MA  ^TFR 

NEGATIVE 

NO .  91  -80044 


MICROFILMED  1991 
COLUMBIA  L-NIVERSITY  LIBR.^^RIES/NEW  YORK 


as  part  of  the 
"Foundations  of  Western  Civilization  Preservation  Project" 


Funded  by  the 
NATION.\L  ENDOW^MENT  FOR  THE  HnUMANITIES 


Reproductions  may  not  be  made  without  permission  from 

Columbia  University  Library 


COP-^^IGHT  STATENENT 


The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  ~  Title  17,  United 
States  Code  -  concerns  the  making  of  photocopies  or  other 
reproductions  of  copyrighted  material... 

Columbia  University  Library  reserves  the  right  to  refuse  to 
accept  a  copy  order  if,  in  its  judgement,  fulfillment  of  the  order 
would  involve  violation  of  the  copyright  law. 


AUTHOR: 


FISCHER,  GUSTAVUS 


TITLE : 


LATIN  GRAMMAR... 


PLACE: 


NEW  YORK 


DA  TE : 


1876 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION  DEPARTMENT 

BIBLIOGRAPHIC  MICROFORM  TARGET 


Master  Negative  # 


Original  Material  as  Filmed  -  Existing  Bibliographic  Record 


;B77.5 
F523 


Fischer,  Gustaviis 

Latin  grammar,  together  with  a  systematic 
treatment  of  Latin  composition.   New  York, 
Schermerhorn,  1876, 

Z  V. 

I 

Contents.--!.   Etymology  and  an  introduction 
to  syntax. — Z.    The  details  of  syntax. 


Restrictions  on  Use: 


TECHNICAL  MICROFORM  DATA 


FILM     SIZE:_3_31/>7_/?l_       __  REDUCTION     RATIO: 

IMAGE  PLACEMENT:    lA  (hA/   IB     IIB 

DATE     FILMED  :j5lli^J-_i INITIALS__j^L^£_._. 

HLMEDBY:    RESEARCH  PUBLICATIONS,  INC  WOODBRIDGE,  CT 


,'  / 


IMAGE  E 

TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


1^ 

■  'I 


111= 

1 3.6 

nil  4.0 


1.4 


2.5 


2.2 


2.0 


1.8 


1.6 


150mm 


A/ 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  SCIENCES  CORPORATION 

770  BASKET  ROAD 

P.O.  BOX  338 

WEBSTER,  NEW  YORK  14580 

(716)  265-1600 


'siscrl^ttsarM: 


■  .>...'^«^ 


•»«««* 


V 


mmnmmm^^.  ^.c--' 


■%4 


w^asM 


¥-yi<^-.    Zit^ifhf'-i'l'^^' 


'  '  '•  s 


s;jsf^ 


W 


'.  ...* 


rv^fe-: 


t 


* 


'tSt'j^. 


1 


vv.<^i-.* 


..■*\i 


.k?^' 

,^^^ 


il^^:-i#'; 


■'\ 


L*V,1 


u.  -  -». 


_i     t    a 


■VAc*-: 


??-.;?■■ 


.vj'?:;^;^^-  ■ 


LIBRARY 


p.—. 


^RLES  KNAPP 
LIBRARY 
1937 


A    V 


T-\V 


T.NTTv  Grammar  and  Reader  on  a  New  Plan. 


THE 

Elements  of  Latin  Guam  mar, 


\ 


WITH    A 


CONTINrorS  reaper  AM)  VOCAlULAia  ADArTEI)  TO  EACH  SECTION  OF 

TlIK  (iRA^lMAir. 

By  GUSTAVUS  FISCHER,  LL.D. 


This  work  contains  a  Latin  Grammar,  adapted  to  first  beginners. 

The  Principles  of  Latin  Grammar  are  presented  in  lucid  and  concise 

language,  thorough  enough  to  lay  a  perfect  foundation  for  the  later 

study  of   details,  and  easy  enough  to  fit  the   capacity  of  average 

students. 

The  Reader  accompanying  the  Grammar  nuivJ^e_sUidiei  ^before jhe 

pupil  has  received  any  grammatjcaj^  instruction_\vhatevcr.  It  consists  of  a 
RolKaTriiistory,  from  the'huilding  of  Rome  to  tlie  battle  of  Zania.  Every 
chapter  of  the  Reader  refers  to  a  chapter  in  the  (Grammar,  which  is  to  be 
studied  at  the  same  time.     The  author  thus  solves  THE   PROBLEM 

I  (.f   a  Reader  for  Beginners,  and  an   Elementary  Grammar,  recon- 
cding  the  two  apparently  contradictory  assertions  that  "  Cirammar  cannot 
be  successfully  studied  without   a  previous  knowledge  o(  the  language," 
and  "  the  study  of  a  language  requires  a  previous  grammatical  knowledge." 
The    two    vocabularies  appended   to   the   Reader,  in  connection  with 
those  sections  of  the  Grammar  which  are  to  be  studied  with  each  chapter 
of  the  Reader,  will  enable  the  student  to  translate  every  sentence  correctly. 
The  first  ox  social,  o{  the  two  vocabularies,  contains  all  those  words  and 
phrases  whose^^^w./Z/Vvi/  forms  the  student  is  not  yet  acquainted  with 
at  that  place  of  the  Reader  where  tbjfv  f»r.st  occur.      But  it  does  not  sug-^est 
any  of  those  grammatical  forms  wm^h'*the  student  should  know^from  his 
previous  studies,  according  to  the  directions  given  in  each   chapter  of  the 
Reader.      Thus,  in   every  succeeding  section  the  numhcr  of  phrases,  etc., 

]  su'-<rested  diminishes,  till,  towards  the  end  of  the  Reader,  the  student  must 
almo-^t  cnlirclv  relv  uijon  the  second  (or  general)  vocabulary,  which  contains 
(all  the  words  of  the  Reader  as  they  are  usually  placed  in  vocabularies. 


I( 


To  illustrate  the  method,  we  reprint  the  first  chapter  : 

ROMAN   HISTORY. 

FIRST  BOOK. 
I.  First  Declension.  Study  §  32  of  the  Guammar. 
Media  pars  Italifp,  infra  fluvium  Tiberim,  antiquitiis  incolebStur  ah  La'iius. 
llrec  pars  Italiio.  ox  nomitu-  incolarum.  appellabflrur  Latium,  et  caput  habebat  Albam 
Lonuain.  Octavo  -u'cnlo  ante  Christum,  Nuniitor  rex  Alb»  Longie  fuit.  Is  cxpnlsns 
est  a  f ratre  suo  Amulio,  qui  Alios  NumitOris  nocavit.  Quum  Rhea  Sylvia,  filia  Xuun- 
tnris,  geminos  filios  peperisset,  Ammulius  jupsit  eos  in  Tiberim  demergi.  At  ecrvi 
roL'ii  satis  habt-bant.  cxponere  pueros  in  loco  proximo  aquir.  Ibi,  lU  tabula  tradit, 
dno  filii  Rheiv  Sylvia  nutriti  sunt  lupa,  qm«  cis  mammas  pra'bnit. 

In   the    first  (special)  vocabulary  the  student   will   tind   the  following 
words  for  the  first  sentence  : 


ab,  by;  ab  Latinis,  by  the  Latins, 
antiquitus,  in  ancient  times, 
fluvium,  the  river. 
incolebatur,  was  inhabited. 


infra,  below. 
Latinis,  the  Latins, 
media  pars,  the  middle  part. 
Tiberim,  Tiber. 


All  the  words  belonging  to  the  first  declension,  for  instance:  //a/ia-; 
inioliirufn,  Alham  Longain,  Alba'  Longa,  aqiar,  Rhcu\  Sylvia,  lupCi, 
mammas,  are  only  found  in  the  second  (general)  vocabulary,  in  the 
nominative  singular,  because  the  student  is  expected  to  translate  them 
correctly,  according  to  the  lesson  just  learned. 

.Since  every  chapter  of  the  Reader  is  a  drill  for  some  section  of  tiie 
(b-ammar,  the  student  upon  finishing  the  Reader  will  have  been  over  the 
whole  of  the  dammar  in  an  easy  and  pleasant  manner,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  he  has  acquired  that  practical  routine  in  the  language  which  alone 
enables  him  to  study  the  details  of  grammar  w  ith  success. 

To  write  such  a  Reader  is  a  matter  of  great  difficulty,  since  it  is  neces- 
sary to  employ  only  such  Latin  constructions  as  may  be  literally  rendered 
into  good  English,  and  still  be  good  and  genuine  Latin.     And  the  thread 
of  the  history  must  be  so  arranged  and  devised  that  in  each  chapter  certain 
grammatical  forms  occur  in  sufficient  number  to   drill  the  student    in  that 
pait  of  the  (bammar  whicli  must  be  studied  according  to  the  order  o{  the 
system.    Dr.  Fischer  has  met  these  diffictdties.   We  are  satisfied  that  there 
is  not  one  sentence  in  the  Reader  which  might  not  have   been  written   by 
a  classical  Latin  author,  and  not  one  which  will  ofi'er  any  difficulty  to  the 
very  first  beginners. 

Fischer's  Elements  of  Latin  Grammar,  with  Reader,  220  pages, 
cloth,     -         -         -         -         -----         -         Price,  $1.25 

^^^  Specimen  copy  mailed  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

J.   W.   Schcrnicrhorn  &  Co.,   Publishers, 

14:  Bond  street.  New  York^ 


Latin  G-rammak. 


•  '•   *  •    .  TdhETruwI  VfrnT    /. 


•  •       ♦        *     • 


-  *  •  •      •  • 


•  •-. 

•      •  •  -••  ,* 


•  » 

*  « 


A  SYSTEMATIC  TREATMENT  OF  LATIX  COMPOSITIOX. 


» .    « 


•  •    • 


m         ^  * 


BY 


GUSTAYUS  FISCHER,  LL.D. 


CONTAINING  ETYMOLOGY  AND  AN  INTIiODUCTION  TO  SYNTAX, 


NEW   YORK: 

J.  W.  Schermerhorn   &  Co.,   Publishers, 

No.  14  Bond  Strp:et. 

1876. 


r 


I 


i 


•  Entered  aocordintr  to  Art  of  Coner^ps,  in  the  year  ISCO, 

Bt  gustavus  fischkr. 

In  tho  aerk's  Oflice  of  the  United  SLitcs  District  Court  for  New  Jersey. 


^'/7.^ 


f 

i 


"I 

Lange,  Little  Si  Co., 
Printers, 
No8.  10  to  20  Astur  Place. 


y 


•PREFACE^^ 


/ 

X   • 


^"TT" — : ' — » 


The  author  of  the  present  work  submits  to  the  institutions  of 
learning  a  new  method  of  studying  the  Latin  Language,  which  neither 
is  a  copy  of  our  own  previous  methods, ^nor_an  improved  edition  of  the 
method  prevailing  in  Germany.  This  jatteir.  country  unquestionably 
produces  better  classical  scholars  than  other  nations.  The  method 
employed  ^here^Js  essentially  practical.  The  student,  first  of  all,  acquires  ^ 
routine  by  reading,  and  this  is  continued  till  the  language  almost  be-  ^ 
comes  vernacular  to  him.  The  whole  course  is  divided  in  four,  five,  or  niore 
places,  and  for  each  of  these,  a  great  number  of  drill-books  have  been 
written,  wliich  are  calculated  only  for  one  or  the  other  of  these  courses. 
We,  in  this  country,  evidently  cannot  devote  a  period_of_ten_or  mora 
years  to  a  merely  preparatory  study  of  the  ancient  languages,  and 
hence  the  use  of  those  German  drill-books  in  our  schools  would  be  out 
of  the  question,  even  if  they  should  be  essentially  remodelled.  For,  by 
introducing  the  drill-books  of  only  one  or  two  courses,  our  preparation 
would  be  very  incomplete  ;  and  by  introducing  the  drill-bp^ks  ,of  aU 
the  courses,  we  would  by  far  exceed  the  limits  of  time^  wWch  we  think 
'  to  be  reasonable  for  a  classical  preparation. 

The  author  is  fully  convinced  that  there  is  a  method  which  may  give 
us  the  benefits  of  the  German  practrcal  drill  and  thoroughness  in  a  con- 
siderably less  time  than  the  Germans  devote  to  their  classical  studies  ;  | 
but  this  method  is  equally  distant  from  tho  G  erman^^raction  and  the  j 
American  coj^action.  Nothing  less  than  a.  rewriting  of  Latin  Gram- 
mar will  "do  for  this  purpose,  and  the  author,  after  a  long  prac- 
tical experience,  has  adopted  the  plan  laid  down  in  the  present 
work,  as  best  calculated  for  insuring  an  end  which  our  educators  al- 
ways have  considered  an  unsolved  problem.  The  practical  success  of 
the  author's  plan  in  his  own  sphere  of  teaching  has  been  remarkable, 
and  as  several  distinguished  teachers,  after  using  the  first  edition  of  the 


\i 


PREFACE. 


( 


/ 


I 


/ 


work  as  a  test-book,  have  endorsed  the  new  system,  it  is  hoped  thai 
this  second  edition,  in  its  revised  form,  wUl  win  approbation  in  wider 
Circles. 

It  is  one  of  the  prominent  features  of  the  new  metliod,  that  the  ele- 
mentary  constituents  of  the  Latin  sentence  have  been  reduced  to  a 
SYSTEM,  and  tliat  througli  this  system  evert  possible  connection  of 
Latin  words  has  been  discovered  and  presented  to  the  student,  so  that 
his  iamiliarity  with  Latin  plirases  and  expressions  does  not  depend  on 
«leir  accidental  treatment  in  the  text,  but  on  the  necessity  of  the  system. 
The  Latin  Inflection  has  been  taught  ae  an  essential  part  of  the  same 
system.  For  we  believe,  that  inflection  not  only  may,  but  must  be 
taught  together  with  construction. 

We  do  not  hesitate  to  make  this  system  the  base  of  elementary 
instruction.  For  if  the  classical  languages  are  to  teach  us  the  logic  of 
speech,  It  must  be  a  great  mistake  to  play  with  the  beginner,  aSd^us- 
tom  him  to  loosej-eflection  and  desultory  learning.  But  we  have  tried 
to  temper  the  harshness  of  systematic  instruction  by  a  practical  form. 
For  while  the  rules  are  fully  adapted  to  the  class-room,  the  exercises, 
which  by  far  exceed  the  rules  in  size,  and  which  have  been  prepared 
with  the  utmost  care,  are  calculated  to  reduce  the  theory  of  the  rule  to 
practical  and  almost  mechanical  skill.  At  the  same  time  the  progress 
of  our  exercises  is  so  gradual  as  to  be  almost  imperceptible,  and  since 
the  results  of  the  previous  lessons  are  always  incorporated  in  the  next 
the  growth  of  the  Latin  sentence  is,  as  it  were  natural,  and  the  student 
becomes  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  different  combinations,  which  in 
methodical  repetition  are  presented  to  him  in  all  possible  aspects. 

The  present  volume  teaches  Declension  in  all  its  forms,  and  with  a 
view  to  thoroughness,  but  Conjugation  so  far  only,  as  it  was  necessary 
to  show  the  elementary  components  of  the  sentence.  The  experience 
of  the  author  has  shown  how  easily  aU  verbal  forms  are  acquired 
after  a  thorough  drilling  in  those  parts  of  the  verb  which  are  taught  in 
the  present  volume. 

It  would  be  beyond  the  limits  of  this  preface  to  explain  the  many 
deviations  from  all  other  tex1.books,  which  will  be  found  in  this  volume 
They  must  defend  themselves,  and  we  do  not  doubt  that  most  of  them 
will  be  endorsed  by  those  who  will  use  the  book.  If  the  Lessons  on 
phrases,  on  their  combination,  on  the  third  declension,  on  pro- 
KOUNS  and  FORM-ADJECTIVES,  and  COMPARISON,  are  carefully  examined. 


PREFACE. 


we  hope  that  interest  enough  in  this  system  will  be  awakened  to  give 
our  book  a  fair  trial. 

The  work,  when  complete,  is  designed  to  supersede  the  use  of  regular 
grammars  and  readers,  the  former  of  which  ought  to  be  used  more  as 
books  of  reference  than  as  text-books  for  studying  the  language.  The 
student,  upon  finishing  the  whole  course,  will  be  able  to  read  Caesar  or 
other  Latin  authors,  not,  as  is  generally  the  case,  by  guesses  and 
with  the  help  of  accommodating  notes,  but  with  a  thorough  under- 
standing of  the  text. 

The  Vocabularies  in  the  Appendix  are  arranged  according  to  the  dif- 
ferent CLASSES  of  words.  We  cannot  too  strongly  recommend,  that 
these  bo  used  strictly  as  intimated  in  the  different  Lessons.  If  more 
than  one  exercise  belong  to  the  same  subject,  generally  one  only 
should  be  translated.  The  second  and  third  numbers  should  be  given 
to  students  of  less  talent  as  separate  lessons,  or  else  be  substituted, 
whenever  it  will  not  seem  desirable  that  successive  classes  should  trans- 
late the  same  exercises. 

The  second  and  third  parts  of  this  work  will  follow  in  rapid  succes- 

sion. 

We  cannot  omit  to  express  our  deep  sense  of  gratitude  to  many 
scholars  who  have  assisted  us  with  their  advice,  especially  to  Professor 
Reiley,  of  Rutgers  College,  to  whose  suggestions  many  parts  of  the 
l)Ook  owe  their  origin. 

New  Brunswick,  Dcccrribcr,  1866. 


?. 


6 


CZl 


) 


•PREFACE. 

Tirrs^rstyart  of  our  Latin  grammar  is  '  introductory ',  its  object  being,  to 
enable  the  s"dent  by  a  popular  and  easy  statement  of  the  fundamental  prhiei- 
ples  to  study  the  details  of  Latin  according  to  our  theory,  which  we  have  mi- 
nutely presented  in  the  ^coaidJPart.  Referring  to  the  Prefucc^of  the  Second 
Part  for  our  method  of  grammatical  treatment,  we  would  make  the  following 
remarks  in  regard  to  the  three  books  contained  in  this  lirst  Yolunie. 

We  are  of  the  opinion  Thai  nooocly  can  fully  understand  or  even  appreciate 
the  spirit  and  usages  of  any  language,  unless  he  is  able  to  express  himself  in  it. 
Hence  we  have  united  Latin  Ci>i»p9*iticni^witli  what  is  gener^Hy  understood  by 
'Grammar  proper'.  No  rule  has  beeiT*presented,  in  tiiis  first  Part,  without 
showiiii,-  its  application  and  treatment  in  converting  Engli^^h  phrases  or  senten- 
ces into  Latin.  From  the  very  beginning,  and  in  the  most  elementary  forms  of 
the  language,  the  student  learns  the  'difference  of  the  two  idioms',  and  ym(7«- 
ai}>j  acqmrea  the  art  of  thlnkimj  in  Latin,  while,  at  the  same  time,  he  masters  the 
art  of  f/rammatiral  thinking  both  in  general,  and  with  respect  to  his  own  ver- 
nacular. 

We  have  continued  this  constant  regard  to  composition,  even  in  the  Second 
Part,  but  according  to  a  plan  different  from  the  method  followed  in  tlie  lirst. 
On  the  one  hand,  the  Exercises  in  composition,  contained  in  the  Second  Part  are 
chiefly  calculated  to  teach  the  art  of  transforming  modern  tJwiigJd  into  classical 
forms.  On  the  other  hand,  the  connection  of  the  exercises  with  the  body  of  the 
grammar  is  more  an  external  one  in  the  Second  Part,  sotliat  they  may  be  omit- 
ted without  at  all  aliecting  the  grammatical  discussion.  And  the  exercises  are 
Ro  framed  that  each  chapter  is  complete  in  itself,  and  especially  ada|)ted  to  the 
wants  of  higher  colleiie-classes,  while  all  that  is  contained  in  the  First  Part 
(and  also  in  the  Fourth  Book  of  the  second)  is  intended  to  be  studied  in  the 
preparatory  and  Grammar  schools. 

In  devising  a  proper  method  for  a  systematic  study  of  this  kind,  we  had  to 
strugirle  with  considerable  dimculties,  which  are  wellknown  to  every  practical 
teacher.  It  was  one  of  our  chief  points  of  view,  that  the  student  should  fully 
understand  every  subject  presented  to  him,  without  drawing,  as  it  were,  on  the 
future,  and  without  anticipating  many  things  that,  at  the  given  time,  could  not 
yet  be  comprehended.  T<)  begin  with  memorizing  the  whole  of  the  i^aradigms 
of  nouns  and  verbs  is,  in  our  opinion,  a  ])ractice  both  useless  and  danirerous. 
Useless,  because  all  the  paradii^ms  thoroughly  memorized,  will  never  help  the 
student  to  translate  the  very  plainest  sentence  of  the  easiest  authors  ;  danger- 
ous, because  it  educates  the  student  to  mechanical  memorizing.  On  the  other 
hand^^vvecojisider  the  so-called  Ollendorf  method  a  most  nefarious  device, 
caleulated  to  tmin  the  beginner  to  desultory  and  loose  study.  ~  We  also  wished 


i 


*  TREFACE. 

to  keepclear  from  all  theoretical  and  pliilosopliical  expositions,  butnevertheless 
to  teach  the  student  the  deep  nieanin- hidden  under  every  grammatical  form 
Ue  hope  tliat  there  is  no  pa-e  in  this  whole  book  AlclAvill  encoura-e  loose 
study  on  the  one  side,  and  mechanical  drill  on  the  other.  We  meant  to  conqxl 
the  dudent  to  think,  and  to])repare  him  for  understandin^reven  the  most  dillicult 
of  ii-rammatical  subjects.  We  never  have  tried  to  evade  any  of  the  numerous 
ditliculties  in  his  path,  but  to  show  him  the  ri-ht  way  not  only  to  overcome 
but  to  lore  the  dilliculties. 

How  far  we  have  succeeded  in  this  plan  can  be  fully  tested  now  that  the  whole 
work  is  before  the  public.     The  first  two  books,  under  the  title  'Manual  of 
Latin  Grammar  and  Composition',  have  been  for  several  years  in  the  hands  of 
teachers,  many  of  whom  have  repeatedly  expressed  their  anxiety  to  see  the 
work   completed.     This  'Manual'   apiR-ars  now,  under  a  dlirerent  title,  in  a 
thorougldy  revised  form.     It  is  increased  by  the  whole  of  the  Third  Book,  the 
details  of  Latin  j:tyiiiology  and  Prosody,  in  the  form  of  seven  Appendice's  to 
the  body  of  the  (irammar.     The  teacher  may  either  connect  their  studv  with 
that  of  the  introductory  lessons,  or  they  may  be  studied  separately  after  finish- 
ing the  course  contained  in  the  first  three  books.  "^''     " 
I      In  regard  to  'etymology '  we  have  confined  ourselves  strictly  to  the  Latin,  and 
f  never  indulged  in  the  cheap  luxury  of  '  comparative  philology  \  howeV(?r  strongly 
i  we  had  often  to  resist  our  inclination  to  enter  upon  that  field. 

To  each  of  the  two  Parts  a  separate  and  complete  index  is  added,  in  which  a 
full  and  systematic  analysis  of  every  articlc"is  containc'd. 

We  must  acknowledge  our  deep  obligations  to  D.  T.  Reiley,  Professor  of 
Latin  in  Rutgers  College.     To  his  advice  and  suggestious^uiaily'parts  of  this 
grammar  owe  partly  their  origin,  partly  their  form. 
New  BiiUNswiCK,  Juue,  1875. 


( 


U/<^cXJ 


> 


'^■r/i^u  /I  U. 


■lA'^c^^acr  uryi , 


Hsrs: ^ 


7IZ     U/  r>/^  /y/^j   ,1^ 


J/L,  ^<ajiuty,  (icx:/y^i/;'C/::?j^/9^Y 


a 


^C    %f  /-'c^ a  ?/6  j^ :ai. 


r  /  /' 


[U 


CJ/Lt 


t  {/}/'/' ryM/>.t, 


tla^u.l 


.C/it^ 


// 


// 


// 


/ 


s 


/^ 


/^ 


L.^jr,  / 


^A    //////^/V€  O/, 


^J( 


^'f 


ft 


II 


// 


// 


// 


// 


// 


// 


ff 


~f/ 


tf 


// 


// 


H 


// 


JM 


/iV^r/f 


//^    S^/ 


'/  c  ffnr/^r w^^  UC7'    r/  iCvt'^f  I^uh,^ 


/?/?//  ^^/? 


<7/-v 


i  u.). 


TT 


^. 


n  ' 


/  / 


9/ 


n 


ii 


tt 


/ 


#/ 


// 


/  ' 


// 


// 


r;? 


vjjo^^  /x   r^y/r///^^ 


/ 


:// 


•■  ~-  -  OW*" 


ct//^?t^  f/ 


'/y7/tr.^/^. 


c 


/ 


2 


/ 


// 


/r 


JX^Zl     ^^Ar'^^/  Ujjcle  /U/i^9ty,   ^f4^///_ 

JXV7I  '■  ^U/?/c  '  i^^Lcud^um. ,  M^4.  ^^f^ .  /^j 


JxFZZT 


v//^  ^»^/ 


.^^:  ^ 


/  ^ 


«I 


// 


1CX7Y7  (Z^^j^^  ^^  ^r^/i-^^ufpt    4^^^   /^7 


t. 


ti 


33X22:. 


C  yZr/^^7^_(:t^J, 


i/ 


// 


// 


♦r 


/f 


n 


J/c 


/46 


n  U/yi>^ 


jsnu 


'-  'Mp 


^rMyf^U  I 


^/.    /<f/ 


^/9 


'"/. 


xyxtizJ 


jszTx; 


v^A^ZL^ 


^ 


/^ 


/^ 


/ecu  Hi  A 


^/^/    /P  /      (       /  ^       /    // 


""^yl/Na 


r^/{^  . 


V/ 


0t 


E 


'f/c   :&  I  Ac/      ''r>/r 


Y'^J^/ai^^TT 


a 


V^ 


H 


r/ 


J/^ 


V 


'^ 


y>y/ 


3  St 


'i^j^'/?^dccf<r>i  ^y  ^^h    cj^y 


Wb/^ui 


My 


(' 


( 


U//a 


/. 


y 


^■^-Ac/f  /^^ 


/( 


Ca 


T7Z 


/• 


7 


trJra 


11^  WW  »-■-*<- 


;^/- J 


/ 


/^/^  /v)    /- 


r/ 


/'^f/^V/  XY^^fy- 


y/^j 


^/Jj  ,  IruJO  c/   y^i     f^r^'  /i^  Li/'rtr^/^S^i,   -^^^ 


"FT 


'< 


'< 


<  / 


»♦ 


'♦ 


•f 


*» 


/ 


t;^ 


/ 


// 


/ 


/  /^  it^yu/z^     J  a  //  /^/  -^ 


(^/T^O^'^t 


IT: 


^ 


^»         ■  -  \<m 


fT 


//         '♦ 


/<       ' 


// 


ff 


yZ/L 


4// 


a 


s 


V 


IKTRODUCTIOK 


II 


^ 


I.— BIIIKF    HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF    THE    LATIN 

LANGUAGE. 

The  Latin  langua.i^e  in  its  earliest  age  (about  800  b.  c.)  was 
spoken  in  Latiuni,  the  central  part  of  Italy.  It  arose  from  a 
union  of  two  languages,  that  of  the  Osci,  an  old  Italic  nation, 
and  the  Pelasyi^  from  the  latter  of  whom,  also,  the  Greeks  de* 
rived  their  language.  There  are  but  few  fragments  extant  of  the 
time  before  the  second  Punic  war  (200  b.  c),  the  oldest  of  them 
not  reaching  bej'ond  the  year  500.  Thus  our  knowledge  of  the 
language,  as  it  w^as  spoken  during  this  time,  is  very  imperfect. 
This  jirenerally  is  called  the  archaic  period. 

The  next  age  (anteclassical  period)  dates  from  200  to  81 
B.  c,  or  from  the  second  Punic  war  to  Sulla's  dictatorship.  A 
number  of  authors,  as  the  poets  PJautns  and  Terence,  and  the 
great  prose-writer  M.  Porcius  Cato  (  Censorinus ) ,  some  of  whose 
works  are  yet  extant,  wrote  during  this  period.  Their  style  lacks 
the  polish  of  the  next  i)eriod,  and  the  anteclassical  language 
abounds  in  words  and  constructions,  which  the  more  refined  taste 
of  the  next  period  has  rejected. 

The  classical  period  or  goldex  age  of  Homan  literature 
begins  with  the  dictatorship  of  Sulla  and  terminates  with  the 
death  of  Augustus  (14  a.  d.)  During  this  period  the  language 
reached  its  culminating  point,  and  gradually  became  the  spoken 
tongue  not  only  of  tlie  whole  of  Italy,  but  of  the  whole  West  of 
the  Roman  Empire.  Here  belong  the  prose-writers  Cicero^ 
Cesar,  Nepos,  Sal/itst,  Livy,  and  the  poets  Lucretius,  Cat  alias, 
Tibullus,  Propertius,  Virgil^  Horace,  Ovid. 


^ 


6 


IXTPtODUCTTON. 


II. — OF   LETTERS   AND   SYLLABLES. 


After  the  fiokUn  follows  th.^  sii.vkk  agk  (from  14  to  .-ibont  1.50 
A.  D.),  with  the  prose-writeis  T7VA>.s'  P,,ten'i(bis,  Qnint'dian^ 
Seneea,  Plhn/,  the  ohh^-an.!  younger,  Turlfu,,  JSuttonlus.Cur- 
this,  and  the  poets  Jaomul,  Ferslas,  MartluL  retrontus,  and 
the  trag-ediaii  Stneca. 

The  next  period,  or  brazen  age,  marks  th^  decay  and  final  dis- 
sohition  of  the  hino-ua-e,  which  ceased  to  be  spoi^en  about  tho 
end  of  the  seventh  century  after  Christ.  Both  tlie  silver  and 
brazen  a^^es  form  the  post  classical  perioo. 

While  in  writing  Latin  the  golden  age  must  be  our  principal 
guide  and  authority,  several  writers  of  the  silver  age  must  be 
ranked  very  high,  and  fully  deserve  to  be  stu(h*cd  in  our  schools.' 
This  generally  is  not  the  case  with  the  writers  of  the  brazen  a<re* 
who  neither  furnish  a  model  for  imitation,  nor  can  their  readino-^'in 
schools  be  considered  as  desirable.  ° 

Rkmakks.-A  pornliar  rla<s  of  wrifors  in  the  brazon  nee  arf>  tho  KrrT.F«»rv«TrrAT 
AUTHOKS  tin  IS.  those  who  wro'c  on  subjects  p'rtMi.u-.  -  fo  rl,  e  n.iM^:^^^^ 
ch,n-ch.  Their  styl-.  is  mil  of  Ori.-ntalls.ns-' :uh}  fauItN  .xmvsli  ,s  b ut  ,  ', " 
are  the  only  authonfy  for  the..lu<rical  tenni.ioloL'v.  Amcu.''  hel^i/XJ  /^ 
(.1-^)js  a  renv.rkabe  exception  in  .ciranl  to  LariMiiv.  Ms  sfvle  ei.V.^  of^^  m^^^^^^^ 
classical  p-.nty  amle|e...nce.-()f  the  Kotnar  Jurists,  helonlnn.r  t  Wch  '  the 
three  periods,  only  fra-m-nts.  more  or  l.-ss  cn-^i^leraMe   -ire  .-vr-i    t    i    rrU  <.  , 

usinc  laiHiKts  or  Di'^ests,  p.irtly  in  sum.- treatise.s  (,f  G;,iii^  and  riiii'in  -md 
the  smaller  lrai,'me.its  of  a  few  other..  Several  of  the  Juris  i  hot  ,frjiier 
and  brazen  ajjes  are  greatly  superior  in  style  to  their  contcniporurk«. 

II.-OF  LETTERS  AXD  SYLLABLES. 

L  The  Latin   language  has  the  same  letters  as  the  En.rlish 
with  the  exception  of  iv  and  k.     The  letter  k  however  someUmea 
was  used  by  the  ancients  instead  of  initial  c  before  the  vowel  a 
and  the  diphthong  ae,  especially  in  abbreviations,  as  K  or  Kac^o 
mstead  of  Caeso ;  K.  or  AW.,  instead  of  Calendar. 

2.  The  letters  ij  and  z  occur  only  in  words  taken  from  the 
Greek  and  other  foreign  languages.  This  in  general  is  the  case 
also  with  the  double  letters  ch,  th,  and  )>h.  IJut  these  also  are 
found  m  very  k^^y  Latix  words,  as  Crtheju.,  triamphus,  pulcher. 

6.  J  here  are  three  diphthongs  in  general  use  in  Latin  :  ae.oe, 
and  an.     The  rarer  di])hthongs  are  eii,  el,  and  ui. 

^^^hlJL^'"'^^  few  words  the  l.'ttors  ae  and  oe  liavc  tlie  force  of  two 
dibtinct  vowels,  belongmg  to  two  different  sylJables.     'i'his  always 


I 


must  be  marked  over  the  vowel  e,  either  by  the  dlerests  (aer, 
coerceo),  or  by  the  isign  of  the  quantity  (i)oeta,  aeris).  Wherever 
tliis  is  not  the  case,  the  v(nv(3l  combinations  ae  and  oe  are  DiPHTnoNGS, 
that  is,  sounds  jmrtdking  of  the  miture  of  two  different  vowels, 
altkoufjh  pronounced  hy  a  single  utterance  of  the  voice.  Au  in  Latin 
words  always  is  a  diphthong. 
Klm.  2.  Tlie  vowcl-rombiinitions  en,  ei,  and  ui  are  generally  used  as  sepa- 
rate vowels,  and  not  as  diphthoni-:».  To  these  tlie  siirn  of  tlie  diieresis 
is  not  a})])lied  (dens,  de  inde,  liu-ie).  Tlicy  occur  as  dijilithongs  only  in 
interjections  {hen,  ehai,  hens,  /lei,  eia,  hni),  and  in  the  words  neuter,  uenti- 
qudui,  ceu,  uen.  seu.  The  I'oets  fre(iuently  use  the  combinations  ui  and  ei 
as  diphtliongs  in  huic,  cui,  dein,  and  other  words. 

4.  The  old  Romans  used  only  capital  letters  for  writing.  The 
«mall,  or  so  called  lloman  letters,  came  into  general  use  not  before 
the  ninth  century,  though  they  were  know^n  as  early  as  the  fifth. 
Ill  our  modern  Latin  texts  capitals  are  used:  L  After  periods, 
points  of  interrogation  and  exclamation,  and  generally  after 
colons;  2.  In  proper  names  and  words  derived  from  them;  3.  In 
the  beginning  of  sections,  and  in  poetry,  of  verses  ;  4.  In  titles, 
headings  and  inscriptions. 

5.  Among  the  consonants  we  distinguish:  1.  The  Liquids,  /,  7n, 
n,  r,  8  ;*  2.  The  Mutes  6  and  p  (P-mutes  or  Labials),  c  and  g, 
(K-mutes  or  Gutturals),  d  and  t  (T-mutes  or  Linguals);  3.  The 
Semi-vowels  j  and  v ;  4.  The  Labial  and  Guttural  Breathings 

/  and  q  ;    5.  The  Aspirate   h  ;  and   6.  The   Double  Letter  j:, 
which  takes  the  place  of  cs  or  of  gs. 

Rem.  3,  The  Romans  used  for  the  semivowels  j  and  v,  and  for  their 
corresponding  vowels  i  and  u,  only  one  sign  for  each  vowel  and 
semivowel  {I  and  V). 

6.  The  dlvi»iioil  of  the  Latin  Syllables  is  different  from 
that  of  the  English.  Every  Latin  syllable  regularly  terminates  in 
a  VOWEL,  and  the  consonant,  following  this  vowel,  belongs  to  the 
NEXT  syllable.  Thus  pater  must  be  divided  pa-ter^  not  pat-er, 
and  po-pu-lui^,  not  pop-id-iis. 

Of  this  rule  there  are  two  exceptions  : 

1.  The  last  svllable  of  a  word  mav  terminate  either  in  a  vowel 
or  a  consonant,  as  :  floater,  ho?ws,  docet. 

•  The  letter  a  jrenerally  is  not  ola«sifle*i  amonsr  the  liquids,  beins  called  a  sibilant. 
But  it  ^h.nvs  all  tlie  e'^^etitial  properties  of  tlie  other  liqiii<ls.  which  <spe<'ially  is  evllent 
from  Oie  intlection  of  tho  noun  and  verb,  where  the  same  laws  apply  to  the  letter  «  us  M 
the  other  liquids. 


INTRODUCTION*. 


III.— QUANTITY,   ACCENT,   PRONUNCIATION. 


2.  When  a  vowel  is  followc^d  by  two  or  more  consonants,  the 

first  of  these  belongs  to  the  precedhig  syllabh',  unless  the  two  or 

three  consonants  are  such,  that  they  may  form  the  initials  of  a 

Latin  word.     In  this  case  they  all  belong  to  the  next  syllable. 

Thus  we  divide  ser-mo,  ai'-fe,  pel-Io,  since  neither  rm,  nor  rt, 

nor  //  can  begin  any  Latin  word.      But  we  divide  a-pro,  a-gro, 

du-plcx,  am-pla,  cas-tra,  since  Latin  words  may  begin  with  pr, 

gi\  pi  and  sir. 

Rem.  4.  A  Latui  word,  not  taken  from  the  Greek,  cannot  begin  with  any 
but  the  following  combinations  of  consonants: 

1.  With  a  MUTE,  followed  by  one  of  the  liquids  I  or  r,  as  prae, 
gr(ftf.%  p^tcto.  In  very  few  words,  as  f/narus,  the  mute  ^  may  bo 
followed  by  tlit^  licjuid  ii. 

2.  With*  the  licjuitl  >*  and  a  nuite,  as  spes,  sto,  scateo. 

3.  With  s-l  and  s-r,  having  a  mute  between  them,  as  strcpo, 
splendeo,  scribo. 

Rem.  5.  In  compoimd  words  the  component  part  must  be  separated,  as 
ab-uti,  tmiifi^o,  de-fero.  An  inserted  d  joins  the  preceding  vowel, 
as  prod-ed,  red-co. 

1.  Syllables,  which  terminate  in  a  vowel,  are  called  open,  and 
those,  which  terminate  in  a  consonant,  eliisc  The  last  sylla- 
ble of  a  word  is  called  the  ultima,  tiie  last  but  one  the 
penult,  and  the  third  syllable  from  the  end  the  ante- 
penult. 


« 


III.   QUANTITY,  ACCENT,   rRONlTNCIATION. 

1.  The  l|iiailtity  of  a  syllable  or  of  a  vowel  is  its  length 
or  SHORTNESS,  that  is  ih(i  longer  or  shorter  time,  required  for  pro- 
nouncing it.  The  Aeeeilt  of  a  syllable  is  the  stress  of  the 
voice,  laid  u})on  one  syllable  in  distinction  from  the  other  syllables 
of  the  same  word. 

Bern.  1.  Tlie  two  ancient  langna2:<^s  had  this  peculiarity,  that  they  mens 
tired  their  syllables  as  well  as  their  vowels.  In  most  modern  lan- 
guages QUANTITY  follows  the  ACCENT,  and  both  virtually  are  the 
same.     In  ancient  languages  oh  the  contrary  ACCENT  was  determined 

by  QUANTITY. 

'  We  here  consider  qtaxtity  so  far  only,  as  it  has  an  influence  on  the 
accent  in  flose.     For  ]»articulai'  rules  on  quantity  see  p.  389. 


2.  In  ancient  poetry  every  syllable  and  every  vowel  was  accu- 
rately measured,  and  accommodated  to  a  certain  scheme,  called 
the  METRU.M.  Here  the  accentuation  of  the  syllables,  as  it  was 
usual  in  piiose,  was  altogether  disregarded,  and  the  accent  of 
POETRY  (iclu^j  or  arsis)  was  determined  by  the  metrum  alone. 
Thus  the  quantity  of  every  syllable  was  of  paramount  importance 
in  the  composition  and  recitation  of  verse,  since  it  was  necessary 
to  fit  each  syllable  to  the  metrum,  and  the  diflferent  time,  allotted 
by  it  to  long  and  short  syllables  necessarily  modified  their  pronun- 
ciation. 

This  is  different  in  prose,  where  nothing  but  the  accent  is  deter- 
mined by  the  quantity,  and  this  in  words  of  more  than  two  sylla- 
bles only.  On  the  pronunciation  of  the  single  syllables  or  vowels 
the  quantity  of  the  latter  has  little  or  no  influence. 

3.  A  syllable  is  long  either  by  natnre  or  by  position. 
It  is  long  by  nature,  if  it  has  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong. 

Thus  in  venire^  docere,  leoncs^  amoeiuis,  incautas  the  penults  are 

long  by  nature,  because  they  have  long  vowels  or  diphthongs. 

It  is  long  by  position,  if  its  short  vowel  is  followed  by  two  or 

more  consonants.      Thus  in  vent  us,  ferre,  magister  the  peimlts 

are  long  by  position,  because  their  vowels  are  followed  by  two 

consonants. 

Hem.  2.  The  quantity  of  the  i\flkctio\al  terminations  is  shown  in 
those  parts  of  the  iLrrammar,  where  tiie  inticetion  itself  is  taujj;lit,  and 
partly  in  the  Prosody  (App.  VII).  Sinee  these  rules  cannot  be  imparted 
to  tir'st  beuiiiiuTs,  and  since  the  (piaiitity  of  the  radical  parts  must  al- 
wavs  b(!  learned  by  'authority,'  we  have,  iov  the  sake  of  securiuLr  a  cor- 
rect pn)nune!ation,  adopted  the  following  system  of  notation  throughout 
this  grammar  : 

Vowels,  that  are  not  marked,  are  supposed  to  be  short.  The 
LENGTH  of  a  vowel  is  thus  marked:  d,e,i,  d,  Ft,  but  only  then,  when 
the  vowel  belongs  to  the  penult,  since  the  quantity  of  the  penult 
only  bas  an  influence  on  accentuation.  Therefore  the  quantity  of 
vowels  in  other  syllables  is  marked  only  then,  when  by  inflectional 
changes  such  a  syllable  may  become  a  })enult,  as  :  addrare,  obedlre. 
Here  the  antepcnults  do  and  he  are  marked  by  the  long  sign,  sinco 
these  antepenults  by  inflection  may  become  penults  {adOras, 
ohedis). 

Short  vowels  when  it  is  desirable  to  designate  their  quantity, 
are  thus  marked :  a,  e,  I,  6,  a. 

4.  Two  consonants  do  not  form  position,  and  leave  the  syllable 
SHORT,  if  the  former  of  them  is  a  mute,  and  the  latter  a  liquid. 


10 


INTRODUCTION. 


Tlius  in  arhitro,  tenehrae,  quadruplex  the  penults  are  snoiiT 
because  their  vowels  are  short,  and  their  consonants  tr,  br,  pi, 
beini»-  mutes  witli  hqiiiils,  do  not  form  i)Osition. 

The  mute  and  li(|uid  combination  gn  however  always  makes 
position. 

5.  The  Ac't*€*nt  in  prose  is  determined  by  the  foHowinur  rules: 

1.  All  Monosyllables  have  the  accent  on  this  one  svllable, 
and  two-syllabled  words  have  theu'  accent  on  the  penult,  aspaterj 
o'nu!^,  le'o. 

2.  In  three  -  and  more  -  syllabled  words  tlie  accent  is  on  the 
PENULT,  if  this  is  a  long  syllable,  as  magi'ster,  argen'to,  audtre, 
doce'bo.  But  the  accent  is  on  the  antepenult,  if  the  penult  is 
SHORT,  as  Cae'sare,  do  ceo,  facto,  vo'lucer. 


EXCEPTIONS* 

a.  Prepositions,  when  thcv  stand  before  their  nouns,  have  no  accent 
at  all.  After  their  nouns  they  have  the  regular  accent,  as:  propter 
ur'hem,  but  urhe  te'nus. 

b.  If  tlie  ENCLITICS  iie,  que,  ve,  ?net  are  affixed  to  a  word,  the  prec(Mlin£> 
syllable  (the  last  of  the  word)  receives  the  accent,  \vli"ther  long  or  short, 
as :  terrd'que,  Ji/ie'que.  But  if  q>ie  belongs  to  the  word  itself  the  accent 
is  regular,  as  :  I'taque  (therefore),  but  Uaqne  (and  thus). 

c.  Adverbs  in  o,  a,  as  and  ic  have  their  accent  on  the  ultima,  as ; 
fidHO  ,  unci ,  ali'(f<' ,  illic  . 

d.  The  PRONOUNS  illir',  iHtir' ,  and  the  civic  nouns  in  as,  as:  no8tra*\ 
vestras',  have  their  accent  on  the  ultima. 

e.  Prepositions,  conipounded  with  adverbs,  take  their  accent  on  the 
PREPOSITION,  as  de'inde,  exiitde. 

f.  Those  comi)ounds  of  y>7c^';r.  that  retain  the  a,  are  accented  on  /<I, 
even  if  it  is  the  penult,  as  adefd'cit,  satisfd'cis. 

6.  The  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  thus  pronounced: 
a,  as  a  in  father  if,,  as  oo  in  tool 

e,  as  a  in  fate  ae,  as  ai  in  fair 

i  and  y,  as  ee  in  tree  or,  as  French  eu  in  feu 

o,  as  o  in  bone  an,  as  ow  in  now. 

Rem.  8.  Of  the  rare  diphthongs  the  pronunciation  of  en  is  doubtful.  Wc 
may  pronounce  it  like  u  in  ftse,  T\n)  Fr(»nch.  Germans  and  Italians 
pronounce  it  diffiM-ently,  according  to  their  own  usage.  The  diph- 
thong  ei  is  pronounced  as  i  in  bile. 


*  Tren  r(>:i  accent unm  rfiguhii^  cottturhant :  dieting ufindi  ratio,  pronunciandi  am- 
biguitas  atque  necessitas.    Priscianua  de  aocentibua,  2,  8. 


III. — QUANTITY,    ACCENT,   PRONUNCIATION. 


11 


t.  All  Latin  vowel-sounds  are  either  open,  or  close,  or 
obscure.  The  pronunciation,  as  shown  g(),  is  that  of  the  open 
sounds,  which  in  pro.se  form  the  rule  for  all  open  syllables, 
whether  long  or  short,  whether  accented  or  not.  Diphthongs 
have  no  other  but  these  open  sounds. 

The  CLOSE  sounds  of  the  vowels  are  those  which  are  applied  to 
close  syllables,  the  closing  consonant  always  modifying  the  utter- 
ance of  the  preceding  voweh 

The  obscure  vowel-sound  is  confined  to  the  letter  e  in  unac- 
cented, open  PENULTS,  as  mfacere,  segcles,  vehemens. 

Rem.  4.  The  close  vowel-sounds  are  distinguished  from  the  open 
sounds  merely  by  their  shorter  duration.  The  close  e  is  eoundcd  as 
English  e  in  2)en,  the  close  i  as  English  i  in  jnn,  close  u  as  English  u  in 
fall.  The  close  sounds  of  a  and  o  have  no  exact  equivalents  in 
English,  and  must  be  learned  from  the  mouth  of  tlu^  teacher. 

Rem.  5.  If  a  vowel  is  followed  by  st  or  sp,  the  syllable,  although  con- 
sidered as  OPEN  (I.,  7)  in  pronouncing  nevertheless  is  joined  with  the  fol- 
lowing 8,  and  has  the  close  sound,  as  the  i)enults  in  magi-dir,  ca-dra, 
f'i-.stif<,  po-fitis,  a-sper,  which  are  pronounced,  as  if  they  were  divided 
mufju-ter,  castj-a,  a.s-per. 

Rem.  G.  In  several  words,  which  are  spelled  alike,  but  are  dis- 
tinguished by  the  quantity  of  one  of  their  vowels,  the  LONG  vowel 
always  should  assume  tlu;  open,  and  the  short  vowel  the  close  sound. 
Thus  the  termination  Is  in  ACC.  plur.  of  nouns  of  the  vowel-class 
assumes  the  open  sound,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  nom.  sing.  (n. 
SING.  cirU  ACC.  plur.  cirls).  The  penult  of  the  neuter  Mem,  and  the 
nominativts  /lic  and  /toe  have  close  sounds,  while  the  masculine  Idem, 
the  adverb  /ile,  and  the  ablatives  hoc  and  hde  have  open  sounds.  The 
termination  ii.s  in  the  4th  declension,  according  to  the  authority  of  ancient 
gramma) iuns,  was  i)r()nouuced  with  the  open  sound,  even  in  nom.  sing., 
where  it  is  short,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  the  like  termination 
of  the  2d  declension. 

Rem.  7.  In  reading  poetry  according  to  the  metrum,  the  open  sounds 
everywhere  are  applied  to  long,  and  the  close  sounds  to  short  vowels. 

OB8KUVATION  1.  It  is  advisable,  in  order  to  accustom  beginner-;  to  th<^  coniiiiental  vowel- 
sounds,  to  niakt'  th.in  pronounce  the  close  syllables  of  the  Latin  i;:'<uage  according  to 
tlie  i"ollowin<jr  >ysleni : 

al  el  il  ol  id,       am  ein  im  om  nm,       an  en  in  on  i„n,       ar  er  ir  or  ur, 

ax  <H  i.s  on  118,       at  et  it  ot  ut. 

Obskkvation  2.  The  system  of  pronunciation,  as  stated  above,  is.  with  some  minor  modi- 
fications in  the  ditb'rent  loc  dities.  adopted  thronLdinut  C(tntinental  Europe  In 
England  and  many  pans  of  this  eituntry  a  different  method  |»revails.  which  i>  based 
on  the  Kngiinh  vowel-sounds.  Aujong  the  reasons,  w  hicli  are  opposed  I»»  this  system, 
we  mention  th.   foUowinir: 

1.  The  Eiigli-h  vowel-system  is  incompatible  with  tliat  of  any  other  lansnacre. 
Hence  only  some  of  the  English  vowel-M)unds  have  l)een  singled  out,  ami  appropri- 
ated to  the  Latin.  JJut  this  very  fact  nuikes  the  Engli^ll  iironunciation  of  ihe  Latin 
more  ditticult  for  even  English  beginners,  than  the  continental  system.  2.  According 
to  the  English  system  the  long  and  short  vowel-sounds  are  distinguished  accord inLr*^« 
'Jt*?  real  quautiiy  of  the  vowels,  which  makes  it  uecessury  for  every  learuer  to  be  familial 


10 


INTRODUCTION. 


with  the  quantity  of  each  vowvl  in  every  word  of  the  lantrnaitfc,  hofore  he  can  pro- 
noiu\ce  oorret'tly.  IJiit  this'voiiiti  reqn  re  h  lonirer  time,  tljitii  iiv  any  of  our  schools 
can  he  devoted  to  it.  'JMic  coiistqiu'iicf  i-s  tliat  we  gt- rn-rally  meet  with  a  eorrnpt  and 
vicious  proniuiciatioii,  which  it  i>  iKiiid'ui  to  liear.  8.  Tl»e  coiiliiieiital  vowel-systeiu 
is  eH>ily  accjiiired,  and  the  few  sounds,  whose  j»ronnnciaiion  is  somewhat  ddhcuit  for 
the  t)ei:iiuier,  must  be  an\  h<»w  Hiqnir«-d  in  stiiilyin^  any  of  tlie  «'ontinental  htnirnaL'fS. 
4.  We  Ivnow.  ami  can  i)rove,  that  tlie  5  vowels  on  tiie  whole  were  pronounced  by  the 
Itonians,  as  the  continental  nations  now  pronounce  them.  Hence  those,  timt  adoi>t 
the  Knsrlish  system  of  pronunciation,  imi>t  ucknowledire,  that  tiiey  <ii>lijjur«'  tlie 
lansruaire,  and  in  readin;;  Latin  text  destroy  its  euphony.  For  one  vowel,  especially 
in  thedenvation  of  v\ords,  stands  in  a  necessary  euphonical  relation  to  the  other, 
M'hicli  must  be  lost  by  the  siilistitiition  of  a  foreii;ii  sound. 
OBaKKVATii>N  S.  Following  the  contineiital  pronunciation,  we  deviate  in  one  point 
from  the  pronunciation  of  tlie  ancient>.  nirariiintr  tlie  ajiplication  of  the  ch)Se  vowel- 
sounds  to  a  1  syllables  eiidiii-,'  in  a  consonant  The  ancients  distinjrui>lied  here  be- 
tween ACCENTED  aiid  UN  ACCENTED  8yllal)le-,  and  irave  in  certain  instances  to  accented 
syllatdes.  whether  terminating  in  a  con-onant  or  a  vowel,  the  open  sound — calling 
this  theciKi  i\MKLE<n'ED  in  opposition  to  tlie  a(i:te  sound.  Tims  the  tirst  syllable  of  the 
nominative /iV'Wrt  had  the  ci^v?/w/?'C/^^/.  but  that  of  the  ablative  lioina  tlie  avute 
.«iounil.  These  distinctions  are  so  comi)licaIed.  that  it  is  |>ractically  impossible  t(»  in- 
troduce them.  Hence  the  practice  of  the  continental  system  lakes  no  notice  of  these 
nicer  distinctions  in  pronunciatitm. 

8.  Most  of  tlic  e(»ii^oii:illt«ii  are  pronounced,  as  in  English, 
but  with  the  fohowing  exceptions  : 

1.  G  always  has  the  hard  sound,  as  in  legere  (i)ronounce 
leghere). 

2.  J  is  pronounced  as  y  in  you,  as  in  Jus  (pronounce  yoos), 

3.  G  in  the  classical  time  was  always  pronounced  like  k.  In 
the  later  centuries  the  hard  and  soft  sounds  of  c  were  dis- 
tinguished, so  that  before  a(\  oe,  e,  i\  y  it  w^as  pronounced  like 
hissing  ,s,  while  before  the  other  vowels  and  all  consonants,  and  as 
a  final  letter  it  retained  the  sound  of  k.  If  we  adopt  this  pronun- 
ciation, which  is  the  customary  one  all  over  the  continent  of 
Europe,  we  should  give  to  the  letter  s  the  sound  of  f]nglish  z, 
since  else  it  would  not  be  distinguished  from  soft  c.  Where 
however  the  continental  pronunciation  is  being  first  introduced,  it 
is  decidedly  preferable,  to  pronounce  the  letter  c  in  all  places  like 
k,  and  then  the  letter  s  must  have  the  hissing  sound  * 

4.  Ci  and  ti  must  not  be  pronounced  like  sh,  but  like  see  and 

tee. 

5.  ITn  is  pronounced  like  hoo,  not  like  j/oo. 

6.  Qu  is  pronounced  like  ktv,  but  the  conjunction  qnnm,  which 
frequently  is  written  cum,  always  is  pronounced  cum. 


♦  Tlie  letter  ft  probuhly  had  the  hissinsr  sound  only  in  the  bejrinninsr  of  words  and  in 
the  middle,  b^fore.  or  after  consonants.  Between  two  vowels  and  at  tlie  cud  it  had  the 
soft  sound  of  English  a. 


J  *' 


LATIN    GRAMMAR. 


BOOK  FIRST : 

THE    ELEMENTARY    PHEASES    AND    THEIR 

COMBINATION. 


LESSON  I. 

DEFINITIONS. 

§1.1.  Iillleetioil  is  the  application  of  endings  to  words. 
Thus  if  we  change  the  word  Caesar  into  Caesaris  (of  Cesar),  or 
Caesari  (to  Cesa^')»  we  say  that  the  word  Caesar  is  ilitlected 
by  the  addition  of  the  endings  is  and  i. 

'  The  different  endings  denote  the  different  relations,  ivhich  the 
inflecfM  icord  has  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 

\  •i  2  J^teill  is  that  part  of  the  word,  to  which  endings 
(terminations)  are  added.  Tlie  last  letter  of  the  stem  is  called 
the  cliaracicristie.  Thus  Caesar  is  the  stem  of  Caesaris, 
and  the  letter  r  is  its  characteristic. 

S  3  3  Yerbs,  SUBSTANTIVES  (that  is  nouns  and  pronouns), 
ADTFCTi'vES  and  partlv  adverbs  are  inflected.  All  other  parts  of 
speech  cannot  be  inflected,  and  therefore  are  called  indeclinable. 

§  4.  4.  The  hiflection  is  fourfold:  a.  Conjugation;  h.  De- 
clension ;  c.  3Iotlon  ;  d.   Comparison. 

a  C^oiijnsatioil  is  the  inflection  of  the  verb,  as  amo,l 
love  amas,  thou  lovest,  amat,  he  loves,  &c.     See  §  6  and  L.  11. 

h  Decloii^iioil  is  that  inflection  of  substantives,  adjectives 
and   certain  adverbs,  which   shows  the  cases  of  these  parts  of 


14 


DEFINITIONS. 


speech,  as  pw^r,  the  boy,  ;vj/(t/,  of  the  boy,  2^^f^ro,  to  the  boy, 

kc.    See  L.  III. 

c.  Moli«II  i>  that  inflection  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  which 
marks  their  genders,  as  iirsus  a  male  bear,  urm  a  she-bear; 
60« M>',  good  (masculine),  bona,  good  (feminine),  bonum,  good 
(neuter). 

d.  Comparison  is  that  inflection  of  adjectives  which 
marks  then*  degrees,  as  alius,  high,  altior,  higher,  altUsimus, 

hiiirhest. 

•J 

Uem.  1.  If  VERBS  are  inflected,  we  say,  that  they  are  con  jiiaraled  ; 
if  sunsT ANxrvKs  or  adjectives  are  inflect^-d  by  declkn.-i  n.  we  Bay, 
that  thev  are  de<*liii<'d  ;  if  by  motion,  that  thev  are  iiiov'etl  ; 

if  ad.ie('tives  are  intiected  by  coMr.VKisoN,  they  are  said  to  be 

COIIipSil'C'Cl. 

§  5.  5.  The  Sllllject  of  a  verb  is  that  person  or  thing, 
that  Joes  tlie  action  imi>lied  in  the  verb.  If  the  speaker  himself 
is  that  subject,  we  call  it  the  lir^^f  p(*rsoil  (as  Hove).  If 
the  person  spijken  to  is  the  sulyect,  we  call  it  the  *«iefOllll 
peri^on  (as  thou  loveM,  you  love) ;  if  any  other  person  or 
thing,  it  is  called  the  third  person^  as  he  loves,  the  boy 
loves f  the  house  burns. 

Hem.  2.  There  are  three  ]K^rsons  for  each  number,  sino^ular  and  plural. 
Hence  the  conjugation  of  the  Latin  verb  is  contained  in  six  personal 
forms.     (See  L.  11.) 

§  6.  6.  The  conjugation  of  the  Latin  verb  shows:  1.  The  per- 
son of  the  sal)ject.  2.  Its  number.  3.  Its  relation  to  the  action. 
4.  The  time  of  the  action.  5.  The  conception  of  the  speaker, 
regarding  the  action.  Those  forms  of  the  verb,  which  mark  the 
relation  of  the  subject  to  the  action  are  called  voice  of  the 
verb  ;  those  which  mark  the  time  of  the  action  are  called 
teiise!^  ;  and  those  which  mark  the  conception  of  the  speaker 
are  called  lllood«. 

§  7.  7.  Hence  every  conjugated  form  of  the  verb  belongs  to 
the  following  five  accidents  :  a.  person,  h.  number,  c.  tense, 
d.  mood,  e.  voice. 

Rem.  8.  All  conjuirated  forms  of  the  verb  are  comprised  under  the  oren- 
eral  name  '*  finite  verb,"  in  opposition  to  the  term  **  iiicleli* 


THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


15 


nile  or  non-finite  verb,  which  compri^-  the  infinitives,  the  par- 
Tic'iPLKS,  ihe  s   FiNKS  and  the  vekual  adjectives. 

{T^  We  C'lnM'lor  in  the  flr*t  Iw>ok  on  y  nn*»  voice,  the  Af-rrvr,  one  vnood^  tb< 
INDICATIVE,  one  U-nse,  tlie  puhsknt;  but  all  three  i»frsons  in  boilj  numU-ra. 

§8.8.  The  aceidents  of  the  llOUn  are  :  case,  number  and 
gender;  those  of  the  proiioilll :  case,  number,  gender  and 
person;  those  of  the  adjei'tive:  case,  number,  gender  and 
degree. 


LESSON  II. 

THE  FIRST  COXJUGATIOX. 

§  O.  Paradigm. 

Infinitive  :   Amare,  to  love  (stem:  ama,  characteristic: 
fi,  ending:  7v). 

Present  Intlieative: 

singular. 

Latin  forms.         E»  'jUsh  equ ivalents. 

1st  pers.  a  mo       J  love 

2d amas      thou  lovest 

3d amat     he  (she,  it)  loves 


PLURAL, 

Latin  form*.     English  equivalenU, 

1.  amamus        we  love 

2.  amatis  you  love 

3.  amant  they  love 


§10.  Observations. 

1.  The  Enirlish  personal  pronouns  I,  thou,  ho,  etc.,  as  suhjects  of  the 
verb,  generaUv  are  not  expressed  hy  special  words  in  Latin,  but  merely 
bv  ENDINGS.  *  These  are  called  rERBONAL  endings. 

2.  All  verl)s,  which  have  the  characteristic  a,  are  conjugated  after  the 
first  conjiio-ation  according:  to  the  paradigm  mndre.  Tlie  present  infini- 
tive ahvavs  has  the  ending  re.  What  is  left  of  the  infinitive,  after 
Btrikimr  out  "this  endinir,  is  the  stem  of  the  verb  (verb-stem). 

3.  Any  o^iven  verb,  after  its  stem  has  been  found,  is  conjugated  by 
successively  attaching  to  it  the  personal  endings,  which  are  the  foi- 


lowmg  : 

SUNGUTjAR. 

(contracted  with  the 
1st  pers.  — O  \  preceding  character- 

( istic  a  into  0. 
2(1      "      — s      . 
ad      "      — t 


PLURAIi. 
1.  —Ill  US 

2.  —lis 

3.  —lit 


f4 


DKFINITION'S. 


^NHH-h,  .H  /.»/'  r,  tlir  hoy.  puni,  of  Hm'  hoy,  ;,»/rro,  to  the  hoy, 

r  Motion  .s  that  iiillrctiim  .»t'  nouns  and  a«lj«Ttivis,  which 
murk.  tiHu  ,.KM»KH.H.  us  i/r^NM  u  n.alr  hrur.  ursa  a  shc-iK-ar; 
6i,«iiM.  K'"»*»    itnttM-nline),  f'ona,  guinl    (remiuino),  />o/tum,  good 

(Muli»r).  .      ,.    ..  ,  •  I 

<i     C«llipill*i«<*>*    i*^    t'»»*    inflection    of   udjcctivos    wliicU 

Mrku  tlitir  nK..KKK.s  us  altas,  high,  a///or,  liighcr,  allisHimus, 

L,    .    t. 

Rim,  1  If  vK.nnH  an-  iiifl.'rt..h  we  nay,  that  th.y  arr  roii|ii;;;H*'*l  ; 
If  HI  UHT  vNT.v,  >  or  v.MK.  Tiv.H  ar.  inthvt..a  by  '(•^•''^^^'^'yj;;' "!"  :^>': 
that  th..v  aro  €l<*<-liiM-d  «  if  »»y  Monnx.  that  n-y  an-  lliov  «  , 
If  AlUKc  rivKH  uni  inthi'U<l  by  o.MPAIIIHun.  th»y  an-  ^aui  to  l.e 

coiiipiirt!«l. 

I  5.  5.  The  ^llllici-l  of  ft  Terh  is  that  prson  or  thinir, 
that  JoV..  the  action  impli^'^l  »"  the  vcrh.  If  the  spkakkr  himself 
i8  that  Huhjecr,  we  call  il   the  lir^l    |MT^oil  fas  lUwe)-      If 

ti r.<(,u   siH.ken   /o    is  the  Knhject,  we  call  it  the    MeCOIld 

|M  I -till  (us  thou  lovrsf,  yna  lor^ )  :  if  nny  other  person  or 
liiiuK.  u  i.  called  the  lliiril  lU'i>OII,  as  he  loves,  the  boy 
loves,  the  liouse  hKvns. 

Rim  '^    There  are  threi-  uvrmwH  for  each  number,  8inj.Mihir  and  ])hiral. 

ilonce  the  onjupition  of  the  I^tiu  verb  is  contained  in  six  personal 

forms.     (See  L.  11.) 

i.  G.  The  conjugation  of  the  Latin  verb  sliows:  1.  The  per- 
son 'n  the  subject.  2.  Its  number.  3.  Its  relation  to  the  action. 
4  The  time  of  the  action.  5.  The  conception  of  the  speaker, 
reirarding  the  actum.  Those  forms  of  the  verb,  whicli  mark  the 
reration")f  the  sub.fect  to  the  action  are  called  voice  of  the 
verb  ;  those  which  mark  the  timk  of  the  action  are  called 
tenses;  and  those  which  mark  the  conception  of  the  speaker 

are  called  lllOOfU. 

§  r.  7.  Hence  everv  cojijugated  form  of  the  verb  belongs  to 
the    lo'll.)wing    five   accidents  :    a.  peusok,   Ik  nlmuer,   c.  tense, 

d.  MOOD.  e.  VOICE. 

Rem.  :i    All  ronjncrnted  forms  of  the  verb  are  comprised  «"^^^.^^^^.  ^JJ^' 
eral  nam.»  -  tiiiile  verb,"  in  opi>o8ition  to  the  term      iiideli- 


THE   FII^ST   CONJUGATION. 


15 


lillO  or  iioii-fllllte  verb,  which  comprises  the  infinitives,  the  par- 
Tlcii'LKH,  the  rt   1-iNKS  and  the  vkkikvl  adjectives. 

re^  We  cnn.M.tor  In  tbo  flr.t  b..nk  only  one  voice,  the  activk,  one  mood,  tb« 
iNlncATivi,  one  Un^,  U.c  .m:«sknt;  bul  all  three  persons  m  both  numbers. 

R  8.  8  The  accidents  of  the  IIOUII  are  :  case,  number  and 
GENPFir  those  of  the  iiroiiouil  :  case,  number,  gender  and 
person;  those  of  the  acljei'tivc:  CASE,  number,  gender  and 
degree. 


LESSON  II. 

THE   FIRST   CONJUGATION. 
§  9.  Paradigm. 
Infinitive  :   Amare,  to  love  (stem:  ama,  characteristic: 
o,  endin<^:  re). 

Prt'j^t'iit  Indicative: 


SINGULAR.  I'L^^^^;  .     ,     , 

Latin  forms  English  equivaUntsA    Utin  form*.     English  equivalent*, 

*-«"*./  •  ,       ... we  love 

you  love 
they  love 


1st  pers.  a  mo       I  love 

2d amas      thou  lovest 

3d amat      he  {she,  it)  loves 


1.  amamus 

2.  amatis 

3.  amant 


§  lO,  Observations. 

1    The  English  personal  pronouns  T,  thou,  he,  fc    as  subjects  of  the 

veri>  ~llv  are^not  expressed  by  special  words  in  Latm,  but  merely 

hv  FNDTXGS    '  These  arc  called  rEnsoNAE  endini^.  .    .    r.      +i  « 

•  o    A     v^;rbs  which  have  the  characteristic  a,  are  conjuorated  after  the 

«.,.  I,  no-  out,  this  endino-  is  tlie  stom  of  the  vprl)  (verl)-stoin). 

3    Any      v™  verb    aft,.r  its  stem  has  been  found,  is  ™nJ"?«  "d  ^f 
s«e;etivery  attaching  to  it  the  personal  eucUngs,  .vhich  are  the  lo.- 


lowing  : 

6INGUT.AR. 

(contracted  with  the 
1st  ix*rs.  — O  ^preceding  charaxjter- 

( istic  a  into  o. 
2d      "      — s      • 

ad     '*     —t 


PLURAL. 

1.  — mus 

2.  —lis 

3.  — Mt 


16 


THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


f.m 


THE    FIRST   DECLENSION. 


IT 


4.  Tlie  cliaractoristic  a  of  the  first  conjugation  is  loni^,  and  the  syll»i 
bl«'  contaitung  it,  if  it  is  the  ]K'niilt,  must  be  act-entrd.  (See  Introduc- 
tion 111.,  >i  'i.  5).  Hence  we  pronounce  <H)h'f  iiiu»,  mnd'lif*,  not  a'/namus, 
a  matin.  But  in  tlie  verl)  dare  (to  give)  and  its  compounds  (circumdare, 
pesHumdare,  venumdare)  tlie  characteristic  a  is  ii/wrt.  Hence  we  pro. 
nounce  circumdare,  circum'damus,  circu/n  datis,  not  circumda'  re^  cir- 
cumda'mus,  circumda'tin. 

EXERCISES. 

53^  T/ie  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  in  the  vocabularies  (XL)  should 
he  learned  succesairdy  in  about  three  lessons,  and  for  each  recitation 
j)aradi>inis  according  to  the  model  of  amfire  should  be  irritten,  together 
with  the  English  meanings,  pointing  out  the  stem,  characteristic  and  end- 
ing of  the  infinitive,  as : 

1.  Accusare,  belhlre,  adorare,  celebrare,  circumdare,  creare. 

2.  Dare,  devdriire,  durare,  errare,  Hare,  implorare,  interrogare. 

3.  Luborilre,  nilre,  pariire,  placilre,  postulare,  stare. 

1. 

Translate  into  English  : 

1.  Volo.  Tentamus.  Stamus.  Erriitis.  Narrat.  iEdificat.  Declaro 
Piignant.  Significatis.  Impldrant.  Properas.  Parat.  DesideriTmua 
Muhas.  Aratis.  Volant.  J>amus.  Stat.  Arant.  Dat.  Stas.  Curant 
Confirniatis.  Emigrant.  Portant.  Vindiciimus.  Muto.  Placilmus. 
Festluas.     Tonat, 

Translate  into  Latin : 

2.  We  punish.  Tliou  declarest.  He  builds.  It  thunders.  She  helps. 
They  ])re}iare.  He  stands.  We  give.  Von  plougli.  They  hasten.  It 
flies.  She  desires.  Tliev  confirm.  I  desire.  AVe  imjdore.  You  stand. 
Thou  givest.  He  punislies.  We  err.  They  reconcile.  Thou  triest.  You 
confirm.     We  educate.     He  preserves.     They  spoil.     Thou  plunderest. 

2. 

Translate  into  English : 

1.  Accusat.  Ap])ropin(iuJItis.  Indicas.  Cantas.  Clamas.  Cogitilmus. 
Commendfitis.  Creatis.  Curo.  Damnant.  Delectat  Deliberaiis. 
Desperas.  Disputo.  Probumus.  Ornas.  Numerant.  Navigat.  Recu- 
peras.  Obtem[)eramus.  Natis.  Natatis.  Imperas.  Expecto.  Regnas. 
Stant.     Vitupenltis.     Repugnant.     Liljcrilmus.     Obtrectas. 

Translate  into  Latin  : 

2.  I  reign.  Tliou  accusest.  He  approaches.  You  recover.  lie  obeys. 
We  swim.  It  delights.  You  command.  I  sail.  You  count.  We  indi- 
cate. She  sings.  You  approve.  I  think.  You  sh()Ut.  They  a<lorn. 
She  disymtes.  Wed(>spair,  1  delibcrat^e.  We  create.  You  care.  Thou 
condemnest.  They  swim.  We  tell.  Thou  ]>raisest.  He  asks.  You 
BCold.     They  put  to  flight.     She  announces.     We  dedicate. 


4 


3. 

Translate  into  English  : 

1  Violant.  Tolero.  Sp  )liamus.  Rebellas.  Saltatis.  Objurgat, 
Mendamus.  Mandfitis.  Incitat.  Invltat.  Infirmas.  Judico.  Guberna- 
mus  Kxornant.  Em(>ndatis.  Denuntiat.  Comparamus.  Bellas.  Abrc 
gant  Ambulatis.  Adjudieamus.  Celat.  Caelant.  Impero.  Impetras. 
Castigant.     Evitads.     Vitamus.     Vetant.  Instat.     Abalienas. 

Translate  into  Latin  : 

2  Thou  workest.  We  mention.  You  fight.  I  recall.  They  enlarge. 
Thou  forbidst.  It  shows.  We  slander.  I  burden.  She  hastens.  They 
arm.     Thev  hope.     I  penetrate.      He  pleads.      It  makes  famous.     Thou 

■  deniest.  They  overcome.  You  dissemble.  He  explains.  She  recon- 
cih'S.  We  decide.  They  disturb.  We  refuse.  It  is  an  obstacle.  Thou 
exceilest.  We  give  (gratuitously).  You  wage  a  war.  Thou  finishest 
the  war.  It  blows.  You  put  to  flight.  You  forgive.  He  conceals. 
We  doubt.     I  approach.     They  besiege. 


LESSON  III. 

THE  FIRST  DECLEXSIOX. 

§  1  1.  1.  The  declension  of  the  substantive  distinguishes  its 
cases.  Each  number,  singular  and  plural,  has  six  cases  :  nomi- 
native, GENITIVE,  DATIVE,  ACCUSATIVE,  VOCATIVE    and  ABLATIVE.       All 

cases  of  the  noun  are  formed  l)y  adding  to  its  stem  certain  endings, 
which  are  called  ca»e-termiiiatioiis. 

§  12.  2.  The  case-terminations  of  the  1st  declension  are  the 


following  : 

SINGULAR. 

Nom. 

a 

Gen. 

ae 

Dat. 

ae 

Ace. 

am 

Voc. 

a 

Abl. 

a 

PLURAL. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


ae 

arnm 

is 

as 

ae 

is 


Tlie  stem  of  a  noun  of  the  1st  declension  is  found  by  removing 
the  termination  a  of  the  nominative  case.  Thus  the  stem  of  mensa 
is  mens.     By  successively  adding  tlie  different  case-terminations 


18 


THE    FIRST   DECLENSION. 


to  the  stem,  tlius  found,  any  given  noun  of  this  declcDsion  may  be 
decHned,  according  to  the  following 


Paradigm  : 
singut.ar. 

Latin  forms.         Kitgli-^h  eqiiivaUnts. 
Norn,  meusa     the     tcUile,     a    Uihle, 

table. 
Gen.   mens.'B     of  thi'tahlc,ofa  tnhle, 

the  table  H. 
Dai.   mensae     to  thet<ihle,toa  table. 
Ace.    iiionsam  the  table ^  a  table. 
Voc.   iiKMisa      0  table  ! 
Abl.    nieiisa      bi/    the    table,    by    a  Abl.     iiieu.sis 

table.  1 


PLURAL. 

fAitin  Jfjrms.  £'ii</lish  equiralenti. 
Norn,  mensae  the  tables,  tables. 
Gen.  mi'iisiirum  (f   the    tables,    of 

tables, 
to     the    tables,    to 

tables, 
the  talfles,  tables. 
0  tables  ! 

by    the    tables,    by 
tables. 


Dat.    mensis 


Aec. 

Voc. 


mcnsas 
mensre 


i;i.  3.  The  Latin  cases  (of  any  declension)  have  the  fol- 
lowing English  significations  : 

a.  The  preposition  of,  or  the  possessive  case,  stands  for  tho 

GENITIVE. 

b.  The  j)re})osition  to,  for  the  dative. 

c.  The  })rej)osition  hi/,  for  the  ablative. 

d.  The  ohjective  case  without  a  preposition  for  the  accusattve 
These  prepositions  and  the  objective  case  are  called  the  re;::il- 

lar  ICii^'lii^li   ca!9ie-ei|llivaleiit!«.     They  are  the  same 
in  singular  and  [jlural. 

Rem.  1.  All  Latin  nouns  of  the  1st  declension  have  the  termination  a  in 
the  nom.  sini^:. 

Rem.  2.  The  termination  of  the  ablative  sing,  is  ft.  Tliis  case  will 
always  be  marked  with  the  long  sign,  in  order  to  distinguish  it  from 
the  nominative  sing.,  which  has  the  termination  a. 

Rem.  3.  The  dative  and  aijlative  pluhal  of  all  declensions  are  alike. 
The  nouns  flia,  the  (hiughter,  and  dea,  the  goddess,  generally  have 
tlie  exceptional  termination  abus  in  these  cmm^  {f  lid  bus  and  dedbus). 


i  i .  4.  Many  nouns  of  the  Latin  language  occur  in  the 
plural  only,  often  corresponding  to  English  singulars,  as  deliciae^ 
delight,  tenebrae,  darkness,  iniutiae,  armistice.  These  nouns  are 
called  pluralia   lailllllll   (sing.  :  plurale  tantum). 

Rem.  4.  The  list  of  pluralia  tantum  of  the  1st  declension  IT.  Voc.  must 
be  committed. 

§  l»l,  5.  Other  uouqs  have  different  significations  in  the  shi 


THE   FIRST   DECLENSION. 


19 


guiar  and  plural,  as  :    sixa.  copra,  abundance,  plur.  copiae,  troops. 
These  are  called  liclerolo^ical  IIOIIIIS. 

Rem.  5.  The  list  of  heterological  nouns  of  the  Ist  declension  VII.  Voc. 
must  be  committed. 

§   16.  Proper  Nouns  of  the  First  Declension. 

6.  The  1st  declension  contains  the  following  classes  of  proper 
iiaiiie!>i : 

1.  IN'iiialo  names,  mostly  in  ia,  4f  Roman,  as:  Lucretia, 
uEmilia,  Jnlia,  Tallia,  Terentia,  Cloelia,  Licia,  Cornelia,  Virginia,  Bor- 
teii4a.Clrnpritra,  d-c. 

2.  i% allien  of  y:o«ldesses,  as:  Minerva,  Diana,  Vesta,  Lat< ma, 
Froserpina,  Flora,  Ponwua,  and  the  plurals  Fariae(\hii  Furies),  Gratiae 
(the  Graces),  and  J//^v?t' (the  Muses). 

:j.  I\aiii4'«j»  <>1"  siiairs,  extremely  seldom  in  za,  as  :  tinrta,  bxala, 
Dohibdla,  Nuiita,yirca,  Porsenna,  Pansa,  Catillna  (Catiline),  Jugurtha^ 
Agrippa,  Seneca,  Scaevola,  GaWa,  &c.  ^ 

4.  i>aiii<«s  of  nalions,  necer  inia,^^'.  BeIga,iiBe\gii^n,  Persa, 
a  Persian,  Nnmida,  a  Numidian,  Gelta,  a  Celt,  Scytha,  a  Scythian,  Bar- 

mdta,  a  Sarmatian.  •     c?     • 

5.  ]\'aiiie*!i  of  <;oiiiiti'ies,  almost  all  in  ia,  as:  Hispania,  fepain, 
Graeeia,  Greece,  Italia,  Italv,  Germania,  Germany,  Gallia,  Gaul,  Britan- 
via  Britain,  Caledonia,  Scotland,  Ilibernia,  IrcXan^X,  Pa nnonia,  Hungary 
ISicllia,  Sicily,  Lusitania,  Portugal,  Persia,  Numidia,  SardinUi,  Europa, 

Asia,  Afrii'a,  dc.  ^    •     m 

a.  Vaiiie*»  of  cities  in  «  and  w.  as:  Roma,  Uome,  Troja,  Troy, 
Abdera,  Alexandria,  Apollonia,  Alesia,  Capua,  II"radea,  Massiha,  Itica, 
Numantia,  Sparta,  and  the  pluralia  tantum,  Athena^,  Athens,  I/iebae, 
Thebes,  Si/racusae,  Svracuse,  Cannae,  Thermopylae. 

7.  A  ft'w  names  of  I'ivers,  as  Allia,  Trebia,  Eimera,  bequana, 
Garuniiia,  Vistula. 

EXERCISES. 

r^  Commit  the  nouns  of  the  first  declension  I.  Vocab.  in  about  thres 
snccessice  lessons,  and  write  the  follotcing  paradigms,  including  the 
English  equivalents,  as : 

1    Affricola,  aqua.  Belga,  bestia,  colonia,  copia,  corona,  controversia. 

2.  Cura,  dea,  epistola,  filia,  gratia,  Numida,  and  tlie  plurale  tantum 
Athena). 

1. 
Translate  into  English : 

1    NumfP.     Grfficia.     Iliberniam.     Furias.     Ir?p.     SyracusJirum.     Ini- 
micitiis.     Lunam.     Culpa.     Blanditias.     Catenarum.      Fahulis.     Flanl 
m;e      Forma.    Fug;r.    Herbas.    Horse.    Ignominiam.    Injunas     Inoi^a. 
Discordiam.     Audaci*.     dementia.     Comoedi^.     Fossas.    Divitiis._   lie- 
Uciuiarum.      Scalis.      Tenebras.      Manubus.      Nundinal,      ^uptla^um 


20 


THE    FIRST    DECLENSION. 


fnsiilas.  Copias.  Cupediam.  Cupediigi.  Littomm.  Littnris.  Incolas 
Justitia.  lJistori;e.  Causam.  Aras.  Alis.  DUdgnitia.  LacrimfirLmi 
Funiinas.     Contumacia.     AtjiKe. 

Translate  into  Latin  : 

2.  By  eloquence.  The  islands.  Of  envv.  To  an^er.  An  annistire 
(ohj*).  Of  enmity.  Letters.  Of  the  laddVr.  Of  beasts,  'i'o  farnirrs. 
By  a  chain.  Of  a  loss.  To  fables.  An  ambuscade  {obJX  'I'o  disobe- 
dience. Of  an  imnii<rrant.  By  the  causes.  Of  tears.  Of  an  intrigue. 
'J\)  darkness.  To  the  crowns.  A  foreigner's.  The  dinner  (olj.).  The 
Persians.  Rumors.  To  tlie  immigrants.  The  care  (obj.).  The  wing 
(ohj.).  Controversies  (o'j.).  To  a  p<Mind.  The  ditches  (ohj.).  Of  youth. 
Tlie  goddesses  (obj.).  Foreigners  (obj.).  To  an  armistice.  To  the  cradle. 
To  tortune.  By  a  farmer.  By  foily.  Friendship  {ohj.).  To  a  wing. 
To  riches.  By  disgrace.  A  farmer's.  By  letters.  By  provisions.  To 
tears.  0  Catiline !  Of  crowns.  To  justice.  Fables.  The  Belirians. 
Enmity  {obj.}.  I'inna's.  By  cares.  the  foreigner  (obj.).  O  fortune! 
Ot  a  thn^at.  Persia  {obj).  By  goddess<'s.  Of  the  Belgians.  Of  a  flight. 
Ot  the  flatteries.  Of  the  wedding.  Numidians  {obj.).  Laziness  {obj.). 
O  Persian  !     To  youth.     By  a  slander.     Of  anger.     By  Numidia 


2. 

Translate  into  English : 

1.  Lucretia.  Syracusas.  Musis.  Catilln.T.  Luxuriam.  Ignornnti». 
Agricolarum.  Ali.nigenas.  Acjuilis.  Calunmite.  Defibus.  Audaciam. 
Ignominifi.  ^rumnis.  Assech-e.  Colonias.  Fallacite.  Fabuh'irum 
El(Miuentiara.  Avaritiae.  Bestifirum.  Filiam.  Adoiesc-ntifB.  Persis. 
Injuria.  Contunieliam.  P'erias.  Athenjlrum.  Indutiis.  Minarum. 
Scopas.  Fortunain.  Operis.  Coi)iarum.  Opera.  Cannas.  Copiis 
Incolarum.  Invidiae.  Libras.  Homiclda».  Justitiam.  Doctrina.  An- 
noUcT.  Advenis.  Amicitiae.  Celtas.  Ualliani.  Italia.  Discipliua?. 
Corruptela?.     Concordia. 

Translate    into  Latin  : 

2.  Of  Gaul.      By  infamy.     O  Numidians  !     To  water.     Fortune  (obj ) 
Seneca's.     By  injuries.     O  daughter  I     To  beasts.     T ho  axrvs  {obj.).     Of 
the  hens.    Flatteries.    By  firmness.    The  Belgians  (ryftj.)    O  disobedience  ' 
To  the  glory.    Of  slander.      By  controversies.     The  beast  (obj.).     O  slan- 
ders !     To  the  lances.     Of  chains.     The  immigrants.     O  beast !     By  a 
crown.     The  history  {obj.).     fc>idly's.     Of  the  farmers.      O  daugliters! 
By  the  islands.     The  hours  {obj.}.     To  a  cause.     Of  a  wing.     Bv  a  letter. 
Hens.     Ot  the  hours.     By  indolence.     To  the  dinners.      The  moon's. 
By   tables.      Of   folly.      By  expenses.      O   goddess!      To   a  foreigner 
Ditches.     Of  expenses.    The  inhabitants.     0  fanners  !     To  the  Beigianet 
Ot  the  fame.     Alien's.     O  anger!     Harmony  (6»/i?.).     By  the  friendship 
Ot  cares.     To  diligence.     O  Persians!     Syracuse  ((yW.).     To  the      '  ^bit 
ants.     Darkness  {obj.).     By  the  wedding. 


•  The  noun,  after  which  the  word  obj.  is  placed,  Is  understood  to  be  In  the  obyectica 


THE    PREDICATIVE    PHRASE. 


21 


3. 

Translate  into  English : 
1  Fabula.   Numidis.  Numidia.  Persiam.  Persae.  Caledoni^.  Luxuna 
Ins^^     Incolis.    La^titiam.    Horis.    Feminarum.    Fuga.    As^uti^^  Co^ 
tumeliam      Cella.     Asseclis.     Filiarum.      Inopiae.    Hammas.      Catenis. 
S^        Re li  uias.      Scalas.       Tenebrarum.       Indutias        Annonain. 
CoDi-r'  Copiarim.      Inimicitiarum.      Fiduciam.      Bibhotheca.     Alieni- 
geS    .'    Column^rum.    Nuptiis.    Scythas.    Sicilia.     ^^l^^^^^iam.    Ado^ 
scntia.     DesidicT.      Hastas.      Injuriis.      Iracundiam.     Lun*.     Ararum. 
Quadrigas.     Insidiiirum. 

Translate  into  Latin  :  m    ^» 

o  Iniuries  (c>W)  Ovoutli!  Of  the  vacation.  By  plants.  To  dis- 
^race  ^Envv  {obJ)-  O  glorv  !  Of  a  hen.  By  the  inhabitant.  To  cares 
fraNumidiin.'  By  Numidia.  To  the  Muses.  ^^-^--^--^/^^ 
distance  (.^j.).  By  anger.  By  Athens.  To  the  hours.  Otntamj^^^^^^ 
threat  Ui)  By  Numidians.  Letters.  iWoxy  {obj.).  Of  the  injuries. 
By  d  scS'  Looses.  Of  Persia.  Lances  W.>.  ^--->' ^  "^l^Z'i 
Of  the  mocm.  Of  the  cradle.  An  hours.  To  the  want  ^^^"|^:  f^ 
Persian's  Bv  indolence.  Of  laziness.  O  rumors !  lo  the  deligiit. 
o"':hs!%h/fable(.6;-.).  Of  an  ambus.ule.  :^^  ^y:^^^;^^''^::^, 
Bv  history.  The  crowns.  Of  the  remams.  lo  the  islands  Athena 
{6hj.).  Eloquence  {obj.).  To  friendship.  By  enyy.  Of  the  ditches. 
The  Graces  {obj.). 


LESSON   IV. 

THE  PREDICATIVE  PHRASE. 

R  1 7  1  A  SENTENCE  cousists  of  PHRASES,  and  a  phrase  of 
words.  There  are  three  phrases  :  1.  The  predicative.  2.  The 
OBJECTIVE.     3.  The  attributive. 

§  1 8  2  A  phrase  is  the  combination  of  two  words, 
which  stand  in  a  certain  relation  to  each  other.  The  one  is  called 
the  governing,  the  other  the  dependent  word.  _ 

S  10     3    A  phrase,  in  which  a  noun  in  the  nominative  is  con- 
nected with  a  Qnite  verb  (§  7,  R.  3),  is  called  predicaliTr 
The  noun  in  the  nominative  is  the  governing  word,  and  is  caiied 
the  subject.     The  finite  verb  is  the  dependent  word,  and  is 
called  the  predicate ;  as  : 

Amicitia  delectat,  friendship  delights  '^.-^^'''^lZ^^ZtrZ^  dS 
Agiicola  arat,  the  farmer  ploughs;  Agmdas  arant,  the  farmers  plougn. 


1 


THE    OBJECTIVE    PHRASE. 


23 


9'> 


THE   PREDICATIVE   PHRASE. 


/ 


PHEDiCiTFs  hnite»erb8  d<tea<,  «j-a^^,  /m<,  «,-«««  are  the 

^*'™./.  Iff  '"'?'"'  '""■'■  J''"  '"■  in'Hoato,!  by  a  rnovoov  as-  Ar  lovo. 

ex  ,ro^^  I      Tl    s  F  ^M  i'i'  f""""/"":?  ""  'I^-^"^  ^-''''X'^l'v  «^^  ■">* 
J.jectsL.'e^ro^::^^ettp\';4fer  ^^"'  "'"^""^^  '^ 
§  30.  4.  T!,e  subject  in  a  finite  predicative  phrase  (for  predi- 
cative pl.rases  with  non-fi„i.e  predicates  see  B.  Ill),  is  alwavs  in  .he 
NOM.xATiv.,  s,„g,d.-.r  or  plural,  and  the  predicate  agrees  with  its 
M>hj,.ct  m  NfMBKu  and  p.rson.     Hence,  if  the  sul.ject  is  a  n,.un 
...  the  singular,  the  predicate  is  in  the  3.  person  singular;  if.hesul.- 
ject  IS  a  noun  in  the  plural,  the  predicate  is  in  the  3.  pers.  plural. 

^""l  f  ti^.T"'' V".f' ■""  J'"''  havon.cir  predicates  in  the  prniUL  in 
Latmhoush  their  English  equivalents  „«vv  be  in    he  sno.  ^n 

EXERCISES. 

Tmndate  into  English : 

15.    ^^.ni^^:^ ''T^i.J^^^J^^'^   14..P.u;ll.saltant. 
18.    Sententia  rej.uonat.      19.    Pec  iniaTin'  t'      on    At?-"^'''  ^^''''''''• 

27.  Pa  !;:r  ^S^^-  28:tal:^XSt.^ir^edS^dcS  'l^T 
pedife  invitant.     31.  FortGna  variat.  -^*^- ^"Pedia  dcbilitat.     dO.  Cu 

Translate  into  Latin  : 

er.  approach.      4.  The  poot  doubts.      H.  Tlie^oets  doabf    r    W^'P" 
explores.      7    A  SRilor  «linntu       «    c  -V    ^ ''%  i'"<^''»  a<^ii"i.      b.   Wisdom 

10    Tlie  farmed  works       1      Tb!'  f         "^  '^'^"Z'      ^'  ^^^^^"^  despairs. 
1^    Ti!.>   ^*"^  .**■'  ^^orks.      11.  Tlie  fanners  work.      12.   Knmitv  1  nrna 

cide.     10.  1  he  Belgian  emigrates.    17.  The  Belgians  emigrate.    18  Teare 


abound.  19.  Eloquence  makes  famous.  20.  The  earth  abounds. 
21.  Friendship  hopes.  22.  Treachery  resists.  28.  Punishment  corrects. 
24.  The  provinces  conspire.  25.  The  queen  repeals.  26.  The  eagles 
devour.  27.  Modestv  excuses.  28.  Pride  accuses.  29.  Rules  educate. 
30  Arrows  kill.  31.' Life  lasts.  32.  The  cradle  jars  (crrpf/r^).  33.  Tlie 
funeral  tires.  34.  The  vacation  refreshes.  35.  Enmity  disturbs. 
3G.  Darkness  reigns.  37.  The  troops  des]>air.  38.  Daintiness  eflfemi 
nates.     39.  Dainties  weaken.     40.  The  workmen  demand. 

2. 

Translate  into  English : 
1.  Mercatura  ditat.  2.  Militia  nobilitat.  3.  Mora  fatigat.  4.  Nautaa 
cantant.  5.  Portfc  cre]\int  {to  jar).  G.  Provinci.-e  rebellant.  7.  Negli- 
gcntia  di^pravat.  8.  Perseverantia  superat.  9.  Philosophia  probat. 
10.  Pirata^  su])plicant.  11.  Prudentia  vetat.  12.  Roma  regnat.  13.  Sar 
gittfB  vulnerant.  14.  Numidre  equitant.  15.  Silva  tiagrat.  16.  Statuae 
exornant.  17.  Undse  sonant.  18.  Piratre  vastant.  19.  Tenebra?  obstant. 
20.  Svracusse  repugnant.  21.  Quadrigae  festinant.  22.  Nuptiae  appro- 
piniiuant.  23.  Mi"n:e  conturbant.  24.  Excubian  vigilant.  25.  Copia 
adjuvat.  20.  CopiaB  dimicant.  27.  Eloquentia  superat.  28.  Horae 
volant. 

Translate  into  Latin  : 
1.  Avarice  disgraces.  2.  Boldness  reigns.  3.  Darkness  conceals. 
4.  The  exp(^nses  are  an  obstacle.  5.  The  pirate  kills.  G.  The  pirates  kill. 
7.  Robberv  {rapJna)  ceases.  8.  Robberies  cease.  9.  The  Persian  wounds. 
10.  The  Persians  wound.  11.  Intrigues  triumph.  12.  The  woman 
scolds.  13.  The  women  scold.  14.  Indulgence  sixjils.  15.  The  chain 
burdens.  16.  The  chains  burden.  17.  Victory  makes  famous.  18.  Vic- 
tories make  famous.  19.  Life  lasts.  20.  Spain  rebels.  21.  Modesty 
reconciles.  22.  Deserters  report.  23.  The  inhabitants  persevere.  24.  Jus- 
tice demands.  25.  The  daughter  greets.  2G.  The  daughters  greet. 
27.  The  Persians  sail.  28.  An  ambuscade  harasses.  29.  The  Vistula 
overflows.  30.  Wisdom  doubts.  31.  The  Numidian  dissembles.  32.  Nu 
midia  obevs.  33.  The  poet  appeases.  34.  The  armistice  releases. 
35.  Provisions  abound.  36.  Enmity  accuses.  37.  Syracuse  invites 
38.  Labor  ceases.     39.  The  workmen  despair.    40.  Luxury  effeminates. 


LESSON    V. 

THE   OBJECTIVE   PHRASE. 

§21.  1.  A  phrase- is  called  objective,  if  its  governing 
word  is  a  verb  (iu  any  of  its  forms),  and  its  dependent  word 
a  SUBSTANTIVE,  as: 


24 


THE    OBJECTIVE    PHRASE. 


To  devastate  the  land,  terram  vastare; — (he)  renews  the 
frietuhhip,  amicitiara  renovat; — {you)  cor>riqyt  nature,  natu- 
ram  vitiatis. 

Rem,  1.  Here  tlie  verbs  rast'ire,  renorat,  vitiatis  are  the  oovETfNrNG,  and 
the  nouns  trrrom,  ainicitiam,  naturam  the  dependent  words  of  the 
phrases,  which  therefore  are  OIUECTIVE. 

§  ^^J.  2.  The  dependent  substantive  in  tlic  objective  phrase  is 
called  the  objCH't,  which  in  Latin  TG^;!:\i\^\'\y  precedes  its  p^ov- 
erning  verb.  The  object  must  always  be  in  one  of  the  oblique 
cases. 

Rem.  2.  All  capos,  with  exception  of  nomtxatite  and  vocative,  are 
culled  obliqiK'  cases.  In  translatinic  an  English  ol)jective  ])hrase 
into  Latin,  beginners  must  render  the  reguhir  English  case-equiva- 
lents (ji  I:})  by  tlie  corres]>ondi ng  Latin  cases,  and  conversely,  as: 

CiEMTiVE:  to  accuse  [somebody]  of  extraca(jance,\i\iein\)iiTi\.ni\dd 
accusare  ; 

D.vTivp]:  [he]  conforms  to  iiafnre,  natiirie  obtem])erat : 

Accusative  :  \th\y\  decide  the  coutrovtrsf/,  controversiam  dijudi- 
cant ; 

Ablative::    [?re]   reconrilc  hy  clemcnry,  chMnentifi   concilinmu«. 

Begiimers  must  be  careful,  not  to  translate  the  English  objective 
case  without  a  |)re])Osition  bv  the  Latin  nominative. 
Rem.  3.  The  NUMr.Efi  of  the  governing  verb  (whether  singular  or  plural) 
lias  no  influence  on  the  number  of  the  object,  and  a  noun  in  the 
singular  may  depend  on  a  verb  in  the  singular  or  ])hiral,  and  a 
noun  in  the  plural  may  depend  on  a  verb  in  either  number. 

§  5J3.  3.  The  oljjective  phrase  has  this  in  common  with  the 
PREDICATIVE  plirasc,  that  both  consist  of  a  noun  and  a  verb.  But 
they  differ  in  this,  that  in  the  predicative  phrase  the  noun  governs, 
and  the  verb  is  dependent,  while  in  the  objective  phrase  the  verb 
governs,  and  the  nouu  is  dependent. 

Rem.  4.  Row  ran  ire  see,  whether  a  given  phrase  is  predlratire  or  objec- 
tice  ?  In  Latin  we  see  this  by  the  case  of  the  nonn.  If  the  noun 
is  in  the  nominative,  it  must 'be  the  SURIECT,  and  hence  the  phrase 
must  be  predicative.  If  the  noun  is  in  an  oblique  case,  it  must 
be  an  object  (J^  22),  and  the  ])hrase  is  OB.nxTlVE. 

In  English  we  likewise  may  recognize  the  phrase  as  objectivb 
bv  the  case-equivalent  of  the  iiourt,  if  the  latter  is  connected  with  x 
rREPOsrnoN  {of,  to,  by).  If  this  is  not  the  case,  we  generally  see  by 
the  arrangement  of  the  words,  whether  the  phrase  is  objective  or 
l)redi<'ativ<',  since  in  English  the  objective  case  gin\t'r&\\y  follows  the 
verb,  while  the  nominative  precedes  it,*      Hence  if  in  English  a 


♦  In  Uie  inverted  arrangement  the  noininRtlvo  may  foVmp.  or  the  objective  caae  pr» 
csde  it.    But  tlie  rej?ular  English  arraiigemeut  is  that  iudicated  in  the  text. 


THE   OBJECTIVE   PHRASE. 


d5 


rerb  is  followed  by  .a  noun,  the  latter  must  be  presumed  to  be  in 
the  objective  case. 

§  21.  4.  Objective  phrases  may  be  conjugated  like  verbs,  and 
the  governing  verb  in  an  objective  phrase  may  assume  any  form, 
without  affecting  the  grammatical  form  (case  and  number)  of  the 
ol)ject,  as: 

A.  iNFiNmvE :  Pugnas  amare,  to  love  battles. 
present  indicative. 


SINGrrLAR. 

1.  Pugnas  amo,  1  love  battles, 


PLURAL. 

1.  Pugnas  amamus,  we  love  battles. 


2.  Pugnas  amas,  thou  lovest  battles.  |  2.  Pugnas  amatis,  you  love  battles. 

3.  Pugnas  amat,  lie  loves  battles.         3.  Pugnas  amant,  they  love  battles. 

B.  Infinitive  :  Culpje  damnfire,  to  convict  of  guilt. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Culpa?  danmo,  I  convict  of  guilt. 

2.  Culpje  damnas,  thou  convictest  of 

guilt. 

3.  Culpje  damnat,  he    convicts  of 

guilt. 


PLURAL. 

culpae  damnamus,  we  convict  ofguUt. 
cidpjT?  damnatis,  you  convict  of  guilt, 
culpa?    damnant,    th£y    convict    of 
guilt. 


EXERCISES. 

Conjugate  the  folloiring  objective  phrases  with  their  English  eouify- 
al(  II ts  according  to  the  paradigms  §  24  : 

Provinciam  gubernare,  to  govern  a  provi7ice—-pTovmcisi8  gubernare  to 
govern  provinces.  ' 

Riipina?  condenmfire,  to  convict  of  a  ro&ft^r^— rapinarum  condemnare 
to  ronrirt  of  robberies.  * 

Keguhp  ol)temi)erare,  to  conform  to  the  rwfc— regulis  obtemperare,  to 
confitrm  to  the  rules. 

Sagittii  necare,  to  kill  by  an  arrow— &a.g\it\s  necare,  to  kill  by  arrows. 


A.  a.  Object  in  the  accusative.  1.  Amicitiam  conturbat. 
2.  Ignorainiam  tolerare.  3.  R(^gulam  abrogamus.  4.  deltas  superant.. 
5.  Minervam  adoramus.  ().  Piratas  dissipatis.  7.  Coronam  adjudicat.' 
8.  Patriam  amplificat.  9.  Scytham  castlgat.  10.  Statuam  calamus. 
11.  Culpam  celsitis.  12.  Gloriam  comparfire.  13.  Perfidiam  confirmas. 
14.  C'oloniam  servat.  15.  Patriam  contaminStis.  IG.  Ignaviam  vitu- 
l-ero.  17.  Concordiam  turbatis.  18.  Filiam  educat.  19.  Grammaticam 
enarrare.     20.  Nugas  excusant. 

b.  Object  in  tile  dative.      21.  Deabvis  sacrificare.    22.  Dese  sacii 


hi 


THE    OBJECTIVE    PHRASE. 


ficas.     23.    Porte   dare.     24.    PoHtis  dat.     25.    Minervae  dedicant.     26. 
Natfine  obtcmi)eranius. 

c.  OiUECT  IN  THK  GENITIVE  AND  AHi.ATlVE.  27.  Avariti.T  arcusjlro. 
28.  Injustitiae  acciisilmii.s.  2iK  Cniitiinuich«  accusat.  o<>.  Nt'uligeuti.e 
damiiiire.  31.  Perfidia'  condcinnant.  32.  Injustitiri  abalk-nare.  33. 
Litteris  coinmcndaro.     34.  Perseveraiitia  suporat.     35.  (iraiia  conoilias. 

30.  Victoriis  pra'stat. 

B.  1.  To  refute  a  slander.  2.  To  ])ul)lisli  slanders.  3.  Th.-y  burn 
Troy.  4.  You  disturb  the  t'rit'ndsbip.  5.  He  endures  wron<;8.  0.  W  o 
teinii  confidtMice.  7.  You  S(^parate  tin;  country.  8.  Thou  recallrst  the 
sailors. 


4)ai' 
1).  She  renews  discord.  10.  We  censure  the  intrigue.  11. 
You  reconcile  the  Celts.  12.  I  recover  the  money.  13.  They  <,-reet  the 
Nuinidlans.  14.  To  r -fuse  the  permission.  15.  Thou  refutest  the 
opinion.  10.  He  divul'^^es  the  letter.  17.  tShe  denounces  the  inhabit- 
ants. 18.  They  demand  justice.  19.  We  attack  Rome.  20.  Thou 
committest  the  treachery.  21.  He  tells  nonsense.  22.  We  build  a 
library.  23.  You  enter  "the  ^ate.  24.  I  excuse  the  wrongs.  25.  Ho 
adopts  the  poet.  20.  1  chisel  a  statue.  27.  You  celebrate  a  victory. 
28.  Thev  surround  the  murderer.  20.  He  recommends  clemency.  ;{0. 
I  convoke  the  inhabitants.  31.  We  commit  to  memory.  32.  1  recom- 
mend to  the  Persians.  33.  Y'ou  explain  to  the  Celt.  34.  It  is  an  ol)- 
stacle  to  glory.  35.  He  accuses  of  folly.  30.  They  convict  of  disobedi- 
ence.  37.  He  obtains  by  b(jldness.  38.  Y<m  reign  by  discord.  30.  She 
appeases  by  tears.     40.  'They  enter  by  a  laddiT. 

'  0.     OB.IECTIVE,   MINGLED    WITH    PREDICATIVE    PHRASES.      1.     PersaS 

adjuvat.  2.  PersjB  adjuvant.  3.  Piratae  circumdant.  4.  Pirfuas 
circumdant.  5.  lieglnam  condemnant.  0.  Reglua  condemnat.  7. 
Roniam  gubernat.  8.  R(mm  gubernat.  9.  Nautas  implorat.  10. 
Nautie  impldrant.  11.  Catillnam  increpat.  12.  Catilina  increpat.  13. 
idven;e  necant.     14.  Advenas  necant. 

1.  He  wounds  the  Persian.  2.  The  Persian  wounds.  3.  He  implores 
the  queen.  4.  The  queen  implores.  5.  Athens  condemns.  0.  He  con- 
deums  Atlu>ns.  7.  Tliev  save  the  sailors.  8.  The  sailors  save.  9.  Ho 
demands  justice.  10.  Justice  demands.  11.  They  devour  the  beast. 
12.  Tha  beast  devours.  13.  He  adorns  the  statue.  14.  The  statue 
adorns.     15.  He  invites  the  Belgians.     10.  The  Belgians  invite. 

2. 


A.  a.  Accusative  as  object.  1.  Insidias  paras.  2.  Nuptias  ex- 
pectfimua.  3.  Sententiam  declaramus.  4.  Gratiam  speratis.  5.  Poetas 
relegunt.  0.  Poetas  relego.  7.  Poetam  relego.  8.  Vitam  conservas. 
9.    Pldlosophiam   laudat.     10.    Historiam   tractamus.     11.    Litteras   ex- 


Invidiam  superant.     13.  Culpam  probare.     14.  Tristitiam 

Angustias  vitat.    10.  Tabulam  vindicanms.     17.  Pecuniam 

Calmnnias   tolero.     19.    Pugnam    nmovat.     20.    Alesiam 


oo 


pectfltis.  12. 
simulas.  15. 
servant.  18. 
oppugnamus. 

I).    Dative  as  object.     21.   Reglnfc  obtem])eramus. 
mandamus.     23.  Incolis  nuntifimus.     24.  Deabus  consecrare. 
consecras.     20.  Belgis  nuntiiltis. 

c.  (iENiTiVE   AND   ABLATIVE  AS   OBJECTS.     27.  CalumnifP  accusarc. 
28.  Injuiiaium  accusat.     29.  Baplnae  damnat.     30.  Diligentia  pra3Staa 


Memori;e 
25.  De<e 


I 


THE   OBJECTIVE   PHRASE. 


27 


31    Hasta  necant.     32.  Herbis  sanant.     33.  Blanditiis  concUiat.     34.  In- 
dulgcntia  dej)ravatis.     35.  Astutia  repuo-nat 

d.  OBJECTIVE  AND  PREDICATIVE  PHRASES.  36.  Assecks  celat.  87. 
Asseche  celant  38  ^cytiui  interrogat.  39.  Scytham  interroirat.  40. 
liha  adorat  41  Hham  adorat.  42.  Tram  excitat.  43.  Ira  excitat 
44.  liraias  (list ur bat.     4o.  Piratie  dist urban t 

r\£'J'  ^' T?' ''''^''  niKASEs      1   I  prepare  the  wedding.     2.  He  desires 

riches.     3.1  hey  prove  the  slander.     4.  I  overcome  the  Persian      5    I 

overcome  the  Persians.     0.  We  overcome  the  Persians.     7.  She  expects 

Invnrt      ^    t7  T'"'-  i''^'^^^:.    ^-  It  delights  the  poet.     10.  To  create 

^  Tlu  7;.        .y  ''^'  banish  the  foreigner.     12.  To  give  permission.     13. 

1  hey  excuse  the  guilt.     14.  She  prei>ares  a  dinner      15.  Thev  carry  the 

l»o..t>       10.  Thou  distarbest  the  country.     17.  TJiev  occupy  Rome.     18. 

W  e  observe  the  stars.     19.  You  violate  the  armistice.     20.  I  hire  the 

fTi?.hf'"*'o.,    l\  "^  «^a»"'^^s  the  causes.     22.  W^e  put  the  pirates  to 

ihjrliL    23.   riiey  capture  Troy.     24.  Thou  conquerest  the  Numidians. 

\  \^<;  conquer  .Numidia.     20.  He  disputes  the  opinion.     27.  Thou  de- 

^!.^fn  ^^^l^^^^ill^^^'^'^^t'-^-     28.  You  desecrate  the  altar.     29.  He  denies 

juhtic.     60.    vV  e  weaken  the  Persians. 

31.  To  sacrifice  to  the  Furies.  32.  We  sacrifice  to  a  goddess.  33. 
He  gives  to  the  daughters.  34.  They  give  to  the  daughters.  35.  We 
give  to  the  Celts.  30.  I  give  to  the  daughter.  37.  To  gi?e  to  the  Graces! 
o8.  He  minist(.'rs  {7nun.tmre)  to  the  queen.  39.  We  minister  to  a  queen. 
40.  I  in, Ulster  to  the  Muses.  41.  He  accuses  of  robbery.  42.  To  accuse 
aJ  ""ll^  '!^'-  f-  '^y^:  ^'^"'^  ^^  robberies.  44.  They  convict  of  a  slan- 
tLf  A'T  P^  '"''•'  ^'^'  '''^'  ^^^  treachery.  46.  We  approach  by  the 
torcst  47.  You  e.Kcite  by  arrogance.  48.  Thou  excellest  by  the  toAgue. 
4J  Ihey  appease  by  tears.  50.  You  reign  by  corrui)tiou 
cr^t.rT'll^  1;"?  P15EDICATIVE  PHRASES.  51.  He  censures  the  Bel- 
gians.  ov.  1  he  Belgians  censure.  53.  They  rebuke  the  sailors.  54. 
Ihe  sailors  rebuke.  5o.  Tiiey  kill  the  pirates.  50.  The  pirates  kill. 
57.  He  calls  t.u  la.  58.  Sulla  calls.  59.  It  tires  the  poet.  00.  The 
poet  tires.     01.  He  helps  the  sailor.     62.  The  sailor  helps. 


2.  Pugnam 

Pugnam  re- 

Pugnam  re- 

11.    Pugnas 

14.   Silvam 


3. 

A.   a.  Accusative  as  object.     1.  Victoriam  nuntiat. 
nKJusamus.     3.    Pugnara  evitat.     4.   Victorias  nuntio.     5 
cuso.     6.    Pugnas  evitaut.     7.    Victoriam   nuntiamus.     8. 
cusiimus.     9.    Pugnam   evitatis.      10.    Victorias  nuntias. 
evitas.      12.   Copias   convocat.      13.   Mercaturam   laudat. 
intro. 

6.  Dative  as  object.  15.  Cinnae  obtemperat.  16.  Cinn^e  obtempe- 
rant.  U.  Regin;e  miuistrant  (to  minister).  18.  Regime  ministratis. 
l.i.  .dinerva?  sacrificat.  20.  Belgis  donare.  21.  Celtis  narras.  22. 
rums  sacrineatis. 

c.  Uexitive  AND  ABLATIVE  AS  OBJECTS.  23.  PerfiditB  damnare.  24 
imprudentue  accusare.  25.  Elegantia  pr^rstant.  26.  Calumniis  accu- 
Batis.  2i.  Controven-iisdisturbant.  28.  Hastis  vulnerant.  29.  Modestia 
concdiat.     30.    Perseverantia  superas. 

d.  OBJECTIVE  AND  PREDICATIVE  PHRASES.  31.  Annonam  important. 
6^.    Annonam   vastat.       33.   Controversite  ceseant.     34.   Controversial 


jm 


28 


THE    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASE. 


THE    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASE. 


2d 


dijudicat.  35.  Fup^am  simulant.  30.  Fuiram  colat.  37.  Coloni.p  obtem- 
IHjrant.  38.  Asseclas  rev(X!Jiiit.  31).  Assocl.n  robdlant.  40.  Belgam  rele- 
gat.     41.  Numuliain  rtTuiu'rat.     4'2.  Nuniida?  recuperant. 

B.  //.  Ou.iE(  TIVK  PiiK ASKS.  1.  He  biims  thc  letter.  2.  "VVe  s<']iarate 
the  followers.  3.  Thou  r«'tiisest  the  remains.  4.  He  confirms  the  troops. 
5.  He  chaiiires  nature.  0.  To  save  a  deserter.  7.  I  endure  the  loss. 
8.'  Thou  plunderest  the  altar.  9.  She  suri)asses  the  queen.  10.  ^Ve 
carry  the  jm-ture.  11.  You  avt'nire  an  injury.  12.  They  observe  the 
shores.  13.  Thou  ret'us^'st  relief.  14.  To  make  Cinna  famous.  15.  We 
explore  Numidia.  1<».  You  release  the  Celts.  17.  They  excuse  eruelty. 
18.  It  indicates  ncirli^once.  10.  They  inhabit  Asia.  20.  He  treats  jdii- 
losophy.  21.  We  praise  tlie  scholarship.  22.  She  ministers  to  the  god- 
desses.* 23.  They  conform  to  nature.  24.  Ho  conforms  to  prudence. 
25.  You  object  (rcpttf/n'irc)  to  cruelties.  2(J.  He  objt'cts  to  military  ser- 
vice. 27.  they  dictate  {imperil re)  to  Spain.  28.  You  dictate  to  Thebes. 
29.  They  accus'e  of  pride.  30.  You  show  by  the  rules.  31.  We  sin  by 
nature.     32.  They  enter  by  the  gate.     33    they  fight  by  land. 

h.  Obje(  TiVE  .VXD  riiKDTCATivE  PiiRASKs.  34.  Friendship  delights. 
85.  He  refuses  the  friendship.  30.  The  enmity  ceases.  37.  He  feigns 
friendshij).  38.  He  avoids  the  ambu.s<'ade.  39.  We  renew  the  diScord. 
40.  Discord  reigns.  41.  The  farmers  labor.  42.  They  plough  the  land. 
43.  The  Celts  conspire.     44.  They  reconcile  the  Celts. 


LESSON  VI. 


THE  ATTRIBUTIVE  nillASE. 

§  15^5.  1.  A  pbrase  is  called  alt ribiitive,  if  its  governing 
'vord  is  a  xoux,  and  its  dependent  word  either  another  noun,  or  an 
ADJECTIVE,*  as  : 

Naidae  tabula,  the  table  of  the  sailor  ; 

Fer,sarum  victoria,  the  victory  of  the  Persians. 

In  these  attributive  phrases  the  genitives  naidae  ^v\&  Permrum 
are  tlie  dependent,  and  the  nouns  tabula  and  victoriae  the  govern- 
ing words. 

§  iJO.  2.  The  dependent  word  in  the  attributive  phrase  is 
called  the  aUrilMltC,  which  in  Latin  may  cither  precede  or 
follow  its  governing  noun.     But  if  the  at.tril)ute  is  a  genitive  (atr 


•  We  consider  in  this  leason  those  attributive  plirases  only,  which  have  a  vovn  in  the 
OKNiTiTK  as  ultributo. 


tributive  genitive),  it  more  generally  precedes,  than  follows  the 
governing  noun. 

Kern  1.  The  attributive  and  predicative  i>hrases  are  distinguished  from 
each  other  bv  the  DEPENDHNT  word,  which  in  the  former  is  a  noun, 
and  in  the  latter  a  FINITE  VEKB.  while  the  GOVERNING  words  in 
both  phrases  are  NOUNS. 

§  27,  3.  The  English  case-equivalent  of  the  Latin  attributive 
genitive  is  either  the  preposition  o/,  or  the  possessive  case,  as  : 

Naulaefdia,  the  daughter  of  the  sailor,  or  the  sailor's  daughter. 

§  98.  4.  The  governing  noun  in  the  attributive  phrase  may  be 
in  any  case  or  number,  without  affecting  the  genitive  case  or  the 
number  of  the  attribute,  and  attributive  phrases  may  be  declined 
in  a  similar  manner,  as  objective  phrases  are  conjugated  (§  24), 
as  : 

SINGULAR. 

Nom.  FUiae  cura,    the   daughter's   care,    or   the    care   of    the 

daughter. 
Gen.    Filiae  curae,  of  the  daughter's  care,  or  of  the  care  of  the 

daughter. 
Dat.     Fdiae  curae,  to  the  daughter's  care,  or  to  the  care  of  the 

daughter. 
Ace.    Fdiae  curam,  the   daughter's  care,  or  the  care  of   tha 

daughter  {obj.  case). 
Voc.    Fdiae  cura,  O  care  of  the  daughter! 
Abl.     Fdiae  curd,  by  the  daughter's  care,  or  by  the  care  of  the 

daughter. 

PLURAL. 

Norn.   Fdiae  curae,  the  daughter's   cares,  or  the  cares  of  the 

daughter. 
Gen.    Fdiae  curdrum,  of  the  daughter's  cares,  or  of  the  carea 

of  the  daughter. 
Dat.     Fdiae  curis,  to  the  daughter's  cares,  or  to  the  cares  of  the 

daughter. 
Ace,    Fdiae  curas,  the   daughter's  cares,  or   the  cares  of  th« 

daughter  {of)j.  case). 
VoG,    Fdiae  curae,  0  cares  of  the  daughter  I 


m 


80 


THE   ATTRIBUTIVE   rilRASE. 


THE   SECOND    CONJUGATION". 


31 


Abl.     Filiae  curis,  by  tlic  daugliter's  cares,  or  by  the  cares  of  the 
daughter. 

Rem.  2.  In  tlie  same  way  we  doclino  attributive  phrases,  if  the  attribute 
is  in  the  pluhal,  as  ^^om.  jilidrnui  cura,  tlu;  cure  of  the  dauij^hters  ; 
G€?i.  filidrum  Clime,  of  the  care  of  the  daughters;  Ace.  filiarum 
curaiit,  the  care  of  the  daughters,  &c. 

EXERCISES. 

^^  Deri  in  e  the  following  attributive  phrases  according  to  the  paradigm 
§  28,  togdher  \dth  the  English  equiv<(lents  : 

1.  Keginae  gratia,  the  favor  of  the  queen. 

2.  PiratiTrum  jTOjna,  the  punixhment  of  the  pirates. 

3.  Puelhe  hicrimae,  t/ie  tears  of  the  girl. 

4.  Indutiilrum  causa,  tlie  cauae  of  the  armistice, 

5.  Sulla'  villa.  Solid's  coJiritry-satt. 

6.  Incolaruni  senteutia,  the  opinioti  of  tlie  inhdbitarUs. 

1. 

A.  1.  PoctcT  corona.  2.  Rapinarum  (rohberg)  poena.  3.  Incoliirura 
fania.      4.  Lunae  distantia.      5.  Fortunie  causa.     0.  Victoriaruni  gloria. 

7.  Bestifirum  catcrvie.  8.  Dearum  statu;e.  1).  Agricohr  diligcntia.  10. 
Numidarum  sagitt;e.  11.  Poetie  eloquentia.  12.  Persiiruni  inimicitiis. 
13.  Belgaruni  ainicitiir.  14.  Incolaruni  injuriis.  15.  Coena?  reliquiis. 
16.  Poeta?  epistolis.  17.  P(;rsarum  divitiis.  18.  Germania?  silvas.  19. 
Terra?  naturam.  20.  Pirat;e  rajunas.  21.  C'opiarum  ])ra»(lani.  22.  Sta- 
tufirum  reli(]uias.  23.  ScythiTruni  saevitiam.  24.  Mora?  causani.  25. 
Persaruni  victorias.  20.  Syracusarum  nicrcatura.  27.  Agricolaruni 
inopia.  28.  Pof'tu' justitiii.  29.  Natura?  regulis.  30.  Scytharuni  igno- 
rautijl.  31.  Nautaruni  invidia.  32.  Modestiaj  fama.  33.  Belg«Trum  con- 
cordiii.     34,  CinnfP  exse(iuiis. 

B.  1.  The  i)overty  of  the  Numfdians.  2.  The  injuries  of  the  ix)et. 
3.  The  daughttT  of  a  foreigner.  4.  The  lances  of  the  Persians.  5.  The 
immigrant's  money.     0.  The  queen's  clemency.     7.  The  sailor's  riches. 

8.  The  obedience  of  the  daughter.  9.  The  history  of  the  Persians.  10. 
The  rules  of  nature.  11.  Athens' treachery.  12.  Cinna's  cruelty.  13. 
Of  the  Belgian's  daughter.  14.  Of  Persia's  riches,  lo.  Of  the  poet's 
history.  10.  Of  tin;  queen's  justice.  17.  Of  the  obstinacy  of  tlie 
colonies.  18.  To  the  glory  of  Syracuse.  19.  To  Home's  memory.  20. 
To  the  «liscords  of  the  i)rovinces.  21.  To  the  distance  of  the  islands. 
22.  To  the  herbs  of  the  earth.  23.  To  the  tears  of  women.  24.  The 
guilt  iobj.)  of  the  pirates.  25.  The  Belgian's  letter  (o^j.).  20.  The  banks 
[obj.)  of  the  Sequanu.  27.  The  rules  {o/j.)  of  discipline.  28.  The  causes 
iobj.)  of  envy.  29.  The  forms  {(jbj.)  of  the  letters  {ff  the  alphabet).  30. 
The  folly  (obj.)  of  the  Numidians.  31.  By  the  knowledge  of  sciences. 
32.  By  tlie  flight  of  the  Persians.  33.  By  the  dinner  of  the  sailors.  34. 
By  the  life  of  the  qiieen.  35.  By  the  vigilance  of  the  watches.  30.  By 
tlie  enmity  of  the  Persians.  37.  By  the  statues  of  the  goddesses.  38. 
By  the  j urate's  booty.  39.  By  the  discord  of  the  troo^js.  40.  By  the 
rules  of  the  school.     41.  By  the  justice  of  the  cause.     42.  By  Catiline'i 


treachery.  43.  Bv  the  industry  of  the  workmen.  44.  By  the  labor  of 
the  inliabitants.  45.  By  the  queens  of  Britain.  40.  By  the  riches  of 
Syracuse.  47.  Bv  the  liatteries  of  a  f/fxH.  48.  By  the  distance  of  the 
stars.  49.  By  tile  arrows  of  a  murderer.  50.  By  the  glory  of  the 
country. 

A.  1.  PirfitfT  audacia.  2.  Alienlgenne  dementia.  3.  CatilTna-  assecla. 
4.  Scvtharuni  a!)stinentia.  5.  Provinciarum  distantia.  6.  Dolabellae 
l)il)li(>thr-ca.  7.  Piratarum  cella.  8.  Catillna?  conscientise.  9.  Celtarum 
ferocia^.  10.  Persarum  colonia^.  11.  Belgarum  clavas.  12.  Seneese 
trawediam.  13.  Perste  arrogantiam.  14.  Scribarum  desidia.  15.  Sen- 
tendaruni  eleirantia.  1(5.  Scvtharuni  inojuri.  17.  Provinciarum  agn- 
cultura.  18.  ('.^piarum  discipllna.  19.  Filife  blanditia.  20.  Fortunae 
gratia.  21.  Fal)uhlrum  nugis.  22.  Numidarum  rapinae.  23.  Pir^jtae 
tilia.  24.  Gramniaticie  regularum.  25.  Numidarum  copiis.  20.  Scriba- 
rum fallaciis.  27.  (Jnrci:e  insulis.  28.  Thebarum  ix>rtis.  29.  Cnpna- 
rum  inijuMisis.  30.  Persarum  insidias.  31.  Italia?  oras.  32.  Philoso- 
phic' fallaciis.     33.  Senec;e  tragoediis.  ,        o    rn 

n.  1.  The  favor  of  the  Muses.  2.  The  imprudence  of  youth,  o.  Uifi 
frciiuency  of  letters.  4.  The  language  of  the  Belgians.  5.  The  sailor  s 
])rudence.  C.  The  corru])tion  of  the  scribes.  7.  Of  the  queen  s  money 
8  Of  Seneca's  pliilosf)phv.  9.  Of  the  treachery  of  the  Scythians.  10 
To  Galbas  crueltv.  11.  To  the  clemency  of  Nerva.  12.  To  the  poverty 
of  Ireland.  13.  to  the  treachery  of  Thebes.  14.  The  discord  {obj)  of 
the  g(xldesses.  15.  The  disobedience  {obj.)  of  the  sadors.  10.  A  colony 
(obj.)  of  Athens.  17.  A  scribe  of  the  queen.  18.  By  the  permission  ot  a 
g.uldi-ss  lU.  Bv  the  pride  of  Britain.  20.  By  the  abduction  {rapina) 
of  Proserpina.  *21.  Bv  the  daughter  of  Latdna.  22.  By  the  discipline 
of  Sparta.  23.  The  banks  of  the  Trebia.  24.  The  tears  of  Lucretia. 
25.  The  shores  of  Sicily.  20.  The  hours  of  sadness.  27.  Of  tbe^  wealth 
of  Sicily.  28.  Of  the  remains  of  the  Numidians.  29.  Of  the  farmers 
Store-houses.  30.  To  the  inhabitants  of  Asia.  31.  To  the  hardships  of 
the  Hi^rht.  32.  The  delavs  {ohj.)  of  justice.  33.  The  hardships  {obj.)  of 
milita?v  service.  34.  Tiie  swarms  {obj.)  of  pirates.  35.  By  tlie  expenses 
of  cominerce.  30.  By  an  armistice  of  the  Scythians.  37.  By  the  dain- 
ti.'s  of  th(;  dinners.  38.  By  the  wedding  of  Emilia.  39.  By  the  gate» 
of  Syracuse.    40.  By  the  want  of  provisions. 


LESSON   VII. 

THE   SECOND   CONJUGATION. 
§  99.  Paradigm. 
Infinitive  :  Moiiere,  to  admonish  (stem.  moMc,  charact.  5, 
eudiug  7't;). 


32. 


THE   SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


rgE   SECOND   CONJUGATION. 


8S 


Prc§eiil  indicative: 

SIISGULAU. 

1.  Moneo,  1  adinonUh. 

2.  Moiies,  thou  adnwnishcst. 

3.  Monet,  he  {nhe,  it)  ddmonishcs. 


I'l.URAIi. 

1.  Mont'inus,  we  admonish. 

2.  Monet  is,  you  admoninh. 

3.  Mouent,  tJicy  admonish. 


§  30.  1.  To  the  second  conjugatiou  belong  all  verbs,  which 
nave  the  vowel  e  for  a  characteristic.  This  conjugation  differs 
frtnn  the  fird  in  the  characterisic  only,  not  in  the  endings,  which 
in  both  conjugations  are  the  same.  But  the  second  conjugation, 
different  from  the^r.sif,  retains  and  shortens  the  characteristic  e  m 
the  first  person  singular. 

§  31.  2.  The  second  conjugation,  more  than  any  other,  con- 
tains verbs,  denoting  a  state  or  being.  Such  verbs  freciuently 
must  be  rendered  by  the  English  verb  '  to  be?  with  an  adjective, 
as  calere,  to  be  warm,  pollire,  to  be  powerful.  They  are  conju- 
gated according  to  the  following  paradigm  : 

Infinitive  :  Taeero,  to  be  silent. 

Pre*^t  lit  indicative : 


HINGULAR. 

1.  Taceo,  I(i7n  silent. 

2.  Taces,  thou  art  »ilent. 

3.  Tacet,  he,  she,  it  is  silent. 


PLURAL. 

1.  Tacemus,  ice  are  silent. 

2.  Tacet  is,  you  are  silent. 

3.  Tacent,  \hey  are  silent. 


EXERCISES. 

.^  Commit  the  verbs  of  the  second  conju^ration  (XII.  Vocab)  and 
coTmi^ate  the  following  verbs,  accordinij:  to  the  varadigms  i^  29  and 
31  :  apparere,  to  apiKur  ;  arcr-re,  to  tcard  off;  cah-^re  to  be  warm  ;  cn^e, 
to  excite;  caviare,  to  be  cautious  ;  fiHreJo  weep  ;  un\)\i'vc,  to  Jill ;  miscere, 
to  mix  ;  parere,  to  obey;  torquere,  to  torture;  nere,  to  spin. 

1. 

PREDICATIVE    PHRASES. 

A  1.  Culpa  apparet.  2.  Silva  ardet.  3.  Africa  calet.  4.  r>esHiia  dis- 
plicet.  5.  Aqua  fervet.  6.  Puella  tlet.  7.  Pu-na  lan.ixuct  8.  Tenebra 
pnrvalent.     9.  Poet.e  indigent.      10.  Pers^^e  lu^rent  L  llora^  monent. 

12.  ScythjB  pavent.  13.  Athr-n.-p  i)ollent.  14.  InsidiaD  at.'iit  U.  Bel-a 
mupet  10.  Sulla  succenset.  17.  Terentia  valet.  IS.  \alvae  patent. 
19.  Copied  pran.lent.     20.  Poetre  tacent.     21.  FuriJB  torrent 

B.  1  Delay  detains.  2.  Discord  dt^troys.  3.  Disci plme  exercises. 
4  Syracuse  tiourishcs.  5.  The  i^ersian  rejoices.-  0.  Athens  lies  down. 
7'  AL^riculture  languishes.  8.  Glory  remains  9.  A  threat  tnghtens. 
lb  The  stars  glitter.  11.  Modesty  ]>lease8.  12.  The  sailors  answer. 
13"  'Hie  girls  laugh.  14.  The  Numidians  fear.  15.  'I  he  Belgians  urge. 
IG  The  Sarth  is  dry.     17.  The  pirate  is  on  his  guard.     18.  1  he  troops  are 


fflad      19-  A  brittle  is  imminent.     20.  Envy  is  hidden.     21.  Anger  is 
iniurious      22.  Modestv  is  silent.      23.  The  roses  are  splendid.      24.  1  ha 


sailol-s  are  angry.      25.  The  poet  is  well       26.  The  colonies  are  strong 
'>:  The  i)rovinces  are  obedient.     28.  The  lances  are  conspicuous.     29.  1  he 
statues  are  exi^osed  for  sale.      30.  The  senate-house  is  open. 


31.  The 


labor  languishes 


OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 

Alienigenam  adhibrtis.      2.  Praedam  admovent. 
4.  Diricrcntiaiii  augeinus.     5.  Arrogantiaui  coerceo. 


A  1  Alieni«^enam  adhibrtis.  2.  Fraedam  admoveni.  3.  Statuam 
amovet  4.  Dirigentiaiii  augeinus.  5.  Arrogantiaui  coerceo.  6.  Roiiiam 
dcir-re  '  7  Colonias  deterres.  8.  Fossas  expletis.  9.  Cordnani  meres. 
10  Mi'suricordiam  movet.  1 1 .  Uticam  obsideo.  12.  Pecuniam  obtinemus. 
13'  Persas  perterrPtis.     14.  Tabulas  jxjssidemus.     15.  Belgas  timent. 

(lENiTiVH.     1(1.  Pecuniae  egere.     17.  Pecuniae  egeiuus.     18.   PecumaB 
eo-es.     19.  Inc^liirum  eget.     20.  Indutiarum  egetis. 
°DvTiVE  AND  Ablative.    21.  Keginre  adbereraus.     22.  ^um8e  appa- 
ret.      23.  NuniEe  api)areo.      24.  Arrogantia  displicetis.      2o.  iihjquentia 

movent.     20.  Blanditiis  persuades.  ,     ^   ,     o     xt  o  rn  «„ 

B  1  It  destrovs  discipline.  2.  We  ward  off  the  Scythians.  3.  Ihey 
excite  envv.  4.  Vou  detain  the  Celt.  5.  I  teach  grammar.  6.  It  exer- 
cises path-nce.  7.  We  have  provisions.  8.  Thou  admonishest  the 
dau-hter.  9.  He  i^ssesses  the  island.  10.  She  retains  lite  1  •  ^•>vi  f^^^ 
the  battle.  12.  We  are  in  need  of  a  library.  13.  He  is  hidden  to  the 
pirates  14.  It  is  injurious  to  the  farmers.  15.  You  are  obedient  to 
Home.'  10.  Thou  givest  advice  to  the  poet.  17  You  shine  ^^7 ^^^^f^;^^- 
18.  He  is  ix)werful  by  ekxiuence.    19.  We  restrain  by  discipline.     20.  i  hou 

dLspleasest  by  negligence. 

/£» 

PREDICATIVE  AND  OBJECTIVE  PHRASES. 
A  1  Ira  fervet.  2.  Pugna  ardet.  3.  Nanta  cavet.  4.  Poeta?  docent. 
5  A'Vricolfe  dolent.  0.  Herl)3e  llorent.  7.  Feminae  gaudent.  8.  Justitia 
coeicet.  9.  'Teiiebrje  pnevahnit.  10.  Parietina3  manent  11.  ISatura 
tornet  12.  Diligentia  languet.  13.  Copias  auget.  14.  Copias  augent. 
15  Heginam  al>h.)rret.  10.  lleglnas  abhorret.  17.  Keginam  abhorrent, 
is"  Heginas  abhorrent.  19.  Terram  movet.  20.  Indiitias  praebet. 
n  Athr-nas  d.'lent.  22.  Pecuniam  adhibemus.  23.  Lndas  timeo. 
^4'  Piratas  arcPtis.  25.  Incolas  ries.  20.  Pecuniam  debere.  2^.  Irani 
^^ntinr-mus.     28.  Concordia  vahltis.     29.  Invidia  displices  ^ 

B  1  Life  teaches.  2.  The  tongue  is  cautious.  3.  The  foreigner  is 
astonished.  4.  Philosophy  lies  down.  5.  The  poets  answer.  G  Memory 
is  strong  7.  The  stars  shine.  ^.  'J'he  provinces  are  open.  9.  The  inhab- 
tants  are  angrv.  10.  The  pictures  displease.  U.  The  rules  teach. 
r>  The  w.)rkm;n  are  on  their  guard.  13.  We  increase  the  vigilance. 
14  Thev  deride  the  victorv.  15.  Thou  teachest  philosophy  16.  He  re- 
moves the  old  walls.  17.  You  grant  permission.  ^^- ^y^/^'^^^^.^^^^^^^P; 
ti..n  19.  He  holds  the  lance.  20.  They  owe  friendship.  21.  You 
destrov  iustice.  22.  I  see  the  flanu^s.  23.  He  prohibits  the  funera 
24  Th'ev  sustain  the  slander.  25.  Thou  obtainest  a  victory.  2(..  \ou 
display  Virmness.  27.  They  are  in  need  of  vvater.  ^^,  IVdiTdvSth 
to  the  queen  29.  Thou  restrainest  by  punishments.  30. 1  dit,advibe  tlie 
battle      31.  She  besieges  the  gate.     32.  We  retain  the  tollowers. 

3 


j^ 


34 


TUE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 


LESSON    VIII. 

THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 

R  33    1    The  uominative  sin-ular  of  the  nouns  of  the  second 
dedension  has   the  case-ter.niuation   .1^   or  lllll.     The  former 
belongs  to  the  masculine,  the  hitter  to  the  neuter  gender. 
Rem.l   Some  nouns  of  this  declension  in  er  and  ir  drop  the  case- 
termination  us.     See  L.  X.  ^ 

§  3:1.  2.  The  case-terminations  of  the  second  declension  are  tue 

following  : 

SINGU1.A11. 


N.  us,  NEUTEiiS  um. 

G.  i. 

D.  o. 

A.  um. 

V.  e,  NEUTERS  um. 

A.  o. 


PLTJTIAL. 
N.  i,  NEUTEIIB  a. 

G.  Orum. 
D.  is. 

A.   OS,  NEUTERS  a. 
V.  i,  NEUTERS  a. 

A.  is. 


Bem    2.  'Neuter  nouns  of  any  doclension  have  the  rH;^^^l>;;;;^ty  fhat  theil 
nominatives,  accusatives  and  vocatives  are  ahke,  and  that  these 
cases  in  the  plural  always  terminate  in  a. 
&  •J4    3    The  cases  of  nouns  of  the  2d  declension  are  formed 

by  addin^^  t'he  terminations  §  33  to  the  declension-stem,  wliich  is 

found  bv  removuig  the  termination  n.  or  ./m  of  the  nominative. 

Thus  hortus  has  the  declension-stem  liorl-,  and  helium  the  stem 

^>^ll'--  n      «^        T> 

§  3»>.  Paradigms. 


SINGULAR. 

N.  Yentus,  the  tcind. 
G.  Venti,  of  the  wind. 
J).  Vento,  to  the  wind. 
A.  Ventum,  the  wind. 
V.  Vente.  O  icind  ! 

A.  Vento,  ly  the  wind. 

N.  Bollum,  the  war. 
0.  Belli,  of  the  war. 

B.  Bello,  to  the  war. 
A.  Bellum,  the  war. 

V.  Bellum,  0  rear! 
A.  Bello,  by  the  war. 


I'LURAL. 

2f.  Venti,  the  winds. 
G.  Ventorum,  of  the  wind». 
J).  Vent  is,  to  the  winds. 
A.  Ventos,  the  winds. 
V.  Venti,  0  winds! 
A.  Ventis,  hy  the  winds. 

N.  Bella,  the  irars. 
G.  Belldrum,  of  the  wars, 
D.  Bi'llis,  to  the  wars. 
A.  Bella,  the  wars. 
V.  Bella,  Owars! 
A.  Bellis,  hy  the  wars. 


THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 


35 


§  3«.  4.  The  noun  deus,  a  god,  has  the  following  irregular 

Voc.  Sing,  dens,  like  the  nominative  (not  dee); 
Nom.  &Vuc.  Flur.  di  (seldom  dei  or  dii); 
Dai.  <k  Ahl.  Flur.  dis  (seldom  dels  or  diis).  ^ 

R  -17     5    The  following  nouns  form  their  plurals  either  in  i  or 
in  L*  They 'are  masculine  in  the  former,  and  neuter  in  the  latter 

'"''X'^.s,  jest,  (pLUR.>ciandioca);//'e/ium,  bridle,  (pLUR./ren^ 
and/yriia);  locus,  place,  (plur.  loci  and  loca). 

The  plurals  loci  and  loca  have  different  significations.     Loca 
are  localities,  but  loci  places  in  books  or  in  discourse. 

Rem  3    The  plnralia  tantum  and  the  heterological  nouns  of  the  2d  de- 
clension'VI.  and  Vll.  Vocab.)  must  be  committed. 

Proper  Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension. 
§    38.    6.  The  following  proper  nouns  occur  in  the  second 
declensum^^^    uaillCS.      The   majority   of    the   Koman  male 
names   belong  to  this  declension,  terminating  m  ns  or  lus,  as . 
Famulus,  Brutus,  Cassius,  Fabius. 

Rem.  4.  It  is  customary  to  drop  the  termination  ^^.  oy^/j^ji^f.  ^^^^  ^^! 

;«   ir",^rrii<Vi   nnd  to  chancre  them  other\Mse,  as  .    y  tf- 

ORck  male  imnns  in  «»  assume  the  termination  «s  m  Latm.     To 

"heir l."l  ng  Jl.m-rus,  Homer. PhUiiypas,  Plulip,  -«'"'if «'";.,.,  j,,. 

On  the  other  liaml,  modern  proper  nan.es  K™""  '^^^.[«"^"Xr 

ending  «»  or  ius  by  modern   Utimris    and  ""™  J.  '^^o  o™^' 

7\^7^i  O  TuUiusI     Tiiose  in  jus  chan-e  ^  into  i,  as  :  (x./i,  U  bajus 
iMWi.u  A^;*li'^        .      ..  pomnev  '     But  common  nouns  in  lUS,  and 

S;;i:Toa,"n- i::r;n;t'":jjo:o^^^^^^ 

ji/iiM  (,Bon)  makes  the  vocative /^i,  not  Jilu. 


THE   SECOND   DECLENSION.^ 


THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 


37 


36 

4.  Several  name»  ol  *•«•"»'•  '»  *'  "''  •     f ,         2^„(i(,„i, 

«e.s,<x,  ^</;y/''«»-    (Egypt)'   «'«•'•«"«•^"^'    ^"'^'"*' 

5.  A  fcw  uaiue.  «  .  r*i;,X;l,;a  J  (the  llhonc), 
(the  Rhhie),  Vanubiu^  (the  Uanuut),  li/to  \ 
Jlellespontiis  (the  Hellespont). 

./'i/-.^/o.r/,.^  ..i.^^^  :  ^^^^"^^S^^^.  proper  na,ne.  to 
^f  the  male  propernames  ^'^j'^'^d  ^e^^^>  ^'^  ^''"■^^"'^Z. 
he  declined  in  the  Hinijular  only),  and  oj  emi.^r      , 

1« 


Translate  the  following  Vocatives  into  Latin : 


Translate  thejouoiciny  r  c.t,......^  ^mnmnion  '     O 

Anthony!     »  f^;d  !     O  f.  «n  !     O  si  cp      « J^m^^      o  rorn.Uus !     O 

}i^-i:e!%'''~er'o'evS./otsassin!     O  „auiclau;     O  pc.p.e  I 

O  crimes !  _^ 

ATTllIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

'    =.n      2   Tlie  hour  of  Imsinoss.     3.  Tho  fli^-ht  of  the 

1.  The  enemy's  son      2^   \     ; '      ^    Fabius's  life    6.  The  victory  of 

allies.     4-  A  disease  of  the  bra-  ^5^^^^^^^^  s.  The  em.nies 

the  Carthaginians  7.  ^  ^^^  ^*^;^  ,n"  x- ,^,.i.,>od  10.  The  places  ol  the 
of  the  people.  9.  The  cau^H  of  the  i^\^'^^^>^-^^.^,^,,,,.,„/of  the  walls, 
hattle.     11.  The  pay  of  ^he  tiiWs^    U.   1  •  ^^^^^^^^^^^      ^.    o    tlie 

la.  The  hours  ol  leisure.     14    He  «J^r  s  o  ^^^^  ^  ^^ 

tvmnt's  power.     1«.  Of  the  ^^^"^^"*/^^^  "Xf  the  pivlVct's  prudence. 
iXsopliy.     18.  Of  the  V^^-^-^^  ^  •JiJ^.Z^L^t--     22.  Of  the 
|>0.  Of  the  duties  ot  -f^X%)t\h^^^^^^^^  ^^^i^'^"     '^^'   '^'^.^'*'^' 

evidence  of  the  ^^^^l^ ^   ti  fl  ,1  mlar  of  the  Greeks.     2«.  To  the  i>en 
erick's  note-book.     ''^•^^To  the  ca  endar  ot^Uu  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^^.^^^^ 

of  Livy.     27.  To  «^'"tley  s  scholars^^^^^^^^  \o  ^^^  ,,„flagration 

21).  I'o  the  auxiliary  trjx^ps  ot  the  ^  ^rman^^^     ^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^ 

of  Susa.     ai.  To  the  bagga-e  ol  the  allies. 


,,   To  the  enemies  of  the  master.     34    To  Pomi-y's  sla^v^^^^ 
eneniv.     o6.   lo  ini    ktu^i  The  r  vers  (^?>?)  ot  ltai>.     o*.   ^^^ 

3o.CUarles-.misdem(-anor(.-^..  ;?,  ;-j,' '*,";  of  the  Dan«l«.  39.  The 
years  (obj.)  of  youth.  ^8.  '  *  ,,!  'f^.  '  f  ,U )  of  the  Helvetiaiis.  41. 
iing-loms  (ohj.)  of  Euro,H..     40^        e  can  v  («  >'  „„^j      4;..  By  the  godB 

h^'^%  ^e  It^r  tt  ^'aulf '^"^.  By  the  grave,  of  the  aUie. 
50    By  the  crimes  of  Tarquin. 

PREDICATIVE    AND    OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 

1       9  The  roofs  shine.     3.  The  slaves  laugh. 
1.  The  people  commands.     ^- The  ^^^^^^^^^  c.  The  German. 

4.  The  assassins  are  hidden,  o.  /. '^^,,;'^  .^.^ound.  9.  The  calendar  con- 
mourn.  7.  The  gods  grant,  ^f'^^^^^^^l  w[nes  deligU3t.  12.Tbe  camp 
tirms.     10.  Auxiliary  troops  appear.     ll..^b^^^^^^^^ 

is  <.pen.  13.  The  rivers  are  ^^'  ^^^- ,X^\^,  ^  triumph.  17.  Tliou  mcreas- 
1.-)  The  arguments  move,  ^l^-^*^,^'''^,,^  i«)  Thev  destroy  the  baggage, 
esi  the  dai?ker.  !«•  ^e  kiHs  the  t^^ant^,  ,  .^^ILace.  22.  Thou  re. 
o()  You  dt'secrate  the  temples.  ^^-  ;'*"  »  H»  destrovs  Susa.  2.).  We 
?me.t  Pompey.  23.  They  besiege  ^  e^^^^  assai  ns  27.' Thou  plunderest 
deride  the  barbarians.  2G  I  ^f  ^^^i^  you  frijrhten  the  allies.  30.  They 
?hTpeople,    28.Weha^.^m;nds     2J.Jo^^^  32.  I. am  obedient  to 

teach  the  freedmen      3  .  ^o  sacnnce  ^  .^^   j^  jg  injurious  to  the 

the  nrefect.      33.  He  adheres  t^)  tlie  t>Tau  ^^^  ^^^  ^^^^       .^ 

p.o ille      35.  They  conform  to  the  1--^;^;^^/^^^  ^,     39.  You  hurt  by 
87  Thev  convi<-t  of  a  crime.     SS.^  ^^S''^  4     Thev  recover  by  the  sword. 
faVseho<fds.     40.  He  heals  by  a  minude      4L^nu .      ^^^^^^^^^^^ 
42.  They  are  strong  by  arms.     4d.  iii^>  ^  H, 

Translate  into  Emjlish:  ^^^  ^^^ 

44.  Gnecos  reh^gat.     4.->.  Oppida  expu.^at      f^^^  ^^  ^^^^^ 

tm^necat.  48.  Pcenos  superant  4^.  i^  ^^^^^^^^^^  53^  Argumenta 
lis.  r,l.  Adversaries  deridet.o..  ^"^  !  ^-^^.^s  torquent.  56.  Fabium 
a^lhibc-Muus.  54.  Barbaros  arce  IS.  ,f'^- J,f^  ,^  ,ecus!iut.  59.  C'ommer- 
,.;tn\w>r.uit  57.  Veios  delemus.  o».  vioum  r.  ^^^eria  coercemuB. 
;ZrS  K-etis.  «0'  Pf -r'"t":!Set"  04  Vurt  -aceosat.  0.5.  Opvida- 
«-•  ^'^-r  "oo'Ti  pa^rPn^ "  OT'.ftuaioW-t.     08.  Kumero  valets 

ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASES 


Sicily.     10.  The  siioils  {dr).) 


38 


GENDER   OF   NOUNS. 


-ADJECTIVES. 


18  B7  the  Oracle  of  Delplii.  10.  By  Pompey's  iiK^ssenijer  20.  By  the 
anihassadors  of  tlie  Ik'lvetians.  21.  By  the  horses  of  the  (  arthagimans. 
22.  The  eonimands  of  the  ].refect.  28.  The  dan-.Ts  ot  the  war.  .4.  1  lie 
sons  of  .Eiiiilius.  2.-).  Of  the  decrees  of  the  i)eople.  2b  lo  tlie  freed- 
men  of  Anthonv.  27.  To  the  refuge  of  the  slaves.  28.  1  o  the  rewards 
of  perseveraiic.''.  21).  To  the  nioiiiiments  of  E.uyi)t.  30.  lo  Darius  ^ 
deatli  31.  The  rem-dies  of  the  pliysician.  82.  The  oiupanion  ('^6;.)  of 
tvrants.  33.  The  philosophers  {obj.)  of  (Jreece.  34.  O  son  of  Mark! 
3.-,.  O  adversary  of  Poinpey!  3().  0  companion  of  criines!  3i.  O  mea- 
6»'nirer  of  thirtvrant!  38.  By  the  testimony  of  l^abius.  3J.  By  the 
l)riiiciples  of  philosophy.     40.  By  the  walls  of  Athens. 

PREDICATIVE    AND    OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 
1   He  asks  the  ambassadors.     2.  Tln^  ambassadors  ask.     3.  He  fears  tlie 
tvrant       4.  The  tvrant  fears.      5.  lie  appeases  Anthony.      0.  Anthony 
appeases.     7.  The'y  praise  the  tribunes.      8.  Tht-  tribunes  praise      J.  He 
recovers  the  ba<r-a<re.     10.  He  b.'sie-es  the  camp.     U.  He  is  obedient  to 
Poinoev       12.  Poun)ey  is  obedi.'nt.      13.  He  is  conspicuous  by  merits. 
14.  ThG'arms  lie  down.      15.  The  i^-ople  fears.      KJ.  The  slaves  mourn^ 
17  The  towns  flourish.      18.  The  schohirs  are  silent.      1!).  Ihe  swords 
.-litter      20.Thev  kill  the  soul.     21.  They  adore  gods.     22.  He  carries  a 
steer   *  23.  He  counts  {mlibPre)  the  votes.     24  They  ovrcome  the  allu-s. 
2.-)   They  recall  the  auxiliary  troops.      2G.  He  saves  the  captives.     2<.  lo 
be  obedient  to  the  masters.     28.  It  i^  agreeable  to  the  tribune.     29.  W  e 
adhere  to  the  plan.      30.  They  accuse  of  a  f^dsehood.      311  am  m  need 
(eaere)  of  food.      32.  He  is  in  need  of  provisions       So.  \ou  reca  I  tlie 
messengers.     34.  Thou  seest  the  temi)les.     30.  We  greet  the  ambassa- 
dors. 

Translate  into  Enf/Ush  :  . 

36.  Philosophum  liberant.  37.  Servura  ca.«^tigat.  38.  Prrefectum  fati- 
eant.  39.  Fluvios  superant  (to  cross).  40.  Muros  delent.  41.  Morbum 
sanant.  42.  Captlvos  liberMinus.  4:5.  Libertos  yexant  44.  I).  tav^Mit 
4.-)  Servi  latent.  4(5.  Plel)rji  dolent.  47.  Socii  gaudent.  48.  Jud.ei 
paVent.  40.  Monumenta  mauent.  50.  Pr-rfecto  debr-nius.  ol  Delph<>g 
SDoliant.  52.  Oraculo  i)arr-mus.  53.  Promissis  i)crsuad.'tis  o4.  Pr.rc  p. 
tis  doces.  55.  Mundum  creat.  50.  Dolo  regnas.  o,.  lebejos  cietis 
58.  PeloponnC'eum  occupant.  50.  Furta  perpetrare.  60.  Patricus  ad 
hsereo. 


LESSON    IX. 

GENDER   OF    NOUNS.      ADJECTIVES. 

A.    Gender. 

R  510.  1.  The  ;;;eilder  of  Latin  nouns  is  fourfold  :  1.  th€ 
MASCULINE,  2.  the  Teminine,  3.  the  neutek,  4.  the  common  gender. 


GENDER   OF   NOUNS.— ADJECTIVES.  3d 

The  common  gender,  with  a  few  rare  exceptions,  is  confined  to  the 
third  declension. 

nine  an-  the  ^--J^^^^^'^^'^^Z^g  of  "the  term 
the  two  sexes  ot    P':'"'"''''-,„„„  '„,'  „,,x    and   hence   this  gendei 

COMMON  gender  see  the  third  declension. 
R  40     2     The  gender  does  not   influence  the   declension  of 
sonsfexeept  that  neuter  nouns  have  three  eases  ahke  m  bo  h 
^o^^s,  exupt  t  adjectives   are   differently 

r;S  i::rl>n!'t^^;:e  lider  of  the  .0...  on  which  the, 
depend^  «^^  *^^^„_^,  „„„„,  (that  is  nor.ns,  denoting  per- 
J.toi  the  SECOND  declension,  terminating  in  us^  are  wthou 
„L  «ASCUL.VF  and  always  denote  males.  They  generally 
"rr^rt:  m«U«..  (§  4,\-o.  O,  that  is  their  termination  .. 
I  ..han'^ed  into  </,  iu  order  to  designate  females  of  the  sam. 
category.     They  then  belong  to  the  first  declension,  as: 

Liu8  a  male  companion «ona,  a  female  companion; 

Booius,  «"<     .fX„j                       .arnica.,  a  female  frund ; 
amicuf.  a  mule  fnena "  ,, 

<•«»«•"!'"<'■■••;••••;„•■„       ■  Tiomrma,  a  female  Boman. 

IJomiinus,  a  male  Roman ""'        -J 

Such  nouns  are  called  movable  nOHlis. 

„    ^-  •      *i,„  vjriiK-L    comprising  individuals  of  both  sexes. 

Rem.  3.  Nouns  in  tie  '^'''^''•*,^'7™!^[„.f,,,-„Wmale  and  female) ;  con- 
aUca,/.^  are  masculine,  as :  P-^oi'-X'/hSAle  plurals  of  national 
sobrfni.c<,»««.s  M  both  |-«  -,«'-,'',  T,?  *^X.  all  of  which,  if 
denoting  the  n^Sn  as  ^^h,  always  are  of  masculine  gender. 
8  40      4    Tebsonal  nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  a,  always 
J  m^'^'culine  unless  they  exclusively  denote  females,  as  Jiha  /., 
Ser  ;  "i..  /,  quee'n.     But  pom.  a  poet,  p^rata,  a  pirate 
etc.  are  masculine. 
Kem.3.     It  is  pecuUar,  that  the  «^^.««ye^^^^^ 

English  of  «.-««»"«  ge'fr,  ^^""S  "S"l  "' (."iiearrue  ;  incola.  an  in 

en?!.X;t'scri^?'-»^^^ 


4:0  GENDER   OF   NOUNS.— ADJECTIYES. 

Persa,  a  Persian.     In  Latin  all  these  nouns  designate  the  male  sel 
only,  and  hence  always  are  masculine. 

§  43.  5.  Nouns,  denotinj,^  TSlili;:^^  (inchiding  beasts),  of 
the  first  declension  (ui  a)  are  feminine  ;  those  of  the  second 
declension  in  uh  are  m.\sculixe,  and  those  in  um  neuter. 

§  44.  G.  EXCEPTIONS. 

a.  the  names  of  the  Gallic  rivers  Ganimna,  the  Garonne  ; 
Sequana,  the  Seme;  3Iatro7ia,  the  Marne,  are  masculine. 

b.  The  names  of  cities  in  us,  as  Ephesus,  Corinthiis,  djc,  but 
not  the  pluralia  tantum  in  ^,  are  feminine. 

c.  The  names  of  trees  in  nSy  as  primus,  a  plum-tree  ;  cerasus, 
a   cherrv-tree  :    law  us,    a   laurel-tree  ;    pln(s,    a   pear-tree,    are 

FEMININE. 

d.  Tlie  names  of  the  followiiio;  four  countries  in  us  are  femi- 
KiNE  :    JEr/yptus,  Eplrus,  Fekqyonuesus,  Chersonesiis. 

e.  The  nouns  alcus,  a  belly  or  beehive,  coins,  a  distaff,  domus, 
a  house,  humus,  the  ground,  vannus,  a  winnowing  instrument,  are 

FEMININE. 

/.The  nouns  2^elafjus,  sea  (a  poetical  word),  virus,  poison, 
vuhjus,  the  populace,  are  neuter.  These  do  not  form  a  plural 
number. 

Kern  4  Several  nouns  of  the  first  and  second  declensions.  ori-:inall.y 
denotinir  TillN(;s,  bv  a  fi-urutive  use  of  the  lan^^ua-e,  have  assumed 
the  signitication  ot"  pekbons.  Such  personal  nouns  r^'tain  that 
Lronder  which  thrv  have  in  their  original  signification  as  thinus. 
Thev  are-  a.  The  fkminines  eoplae,  troops,  o'-stodiac,  ?U'V'*  ^, 
excuhiae,  sentinels,  opirae,  workmen,  HfjUiae,  watchnien  ;  b  1  lio 
NEUTERS  aaxUia,  auxiliary  troops,  atratium  or  mancqmun,  a  slave. 

B.  Adjectives. 

§  45.  t.  Adjectives  are  divided  into  movable  adjectives, 
and  adjectives  of  COIIHIIOII  $;-C'llder.  The  latter  belong  to 
the  THIRD  declension  ;  but  the  movable  adjectives,  that  is  those, 
tchich  have  different  forms  for  the  three  (jemhrs,  belong  to  the 
first  and  second  declensions. 

§  40.  8.  Movable  adjectives  have  the  termination  us  for  the 
masculine,  a,  for  the  feminine,  and  um  for  the  neuter  gender  in 
the  nominative  singular,  as  bonus  m.,  bona  f.,  bonuni  u.  The 
masculine  and  neuter  forms  are  inflected  like  nouns  of  the  second, 


GENDER   OF   NOUNS.-ADJECTIVES. 


41 


and  the  feminine  forms  like  nouns  of  the  first  declension,  accord 
i„g  to"  the  following  paradigm  : 


]^,  bonus 

0.  honi 

Z).  b(mo 

^.  bonum 

y.  bone 

A.  bono 


SINGULAR. 
feminine. 
bona 
bonae 
bonie 
bonam 
bona 
bona 


JfeuUr. 

bonum 

boni 

bono 

bonum 

bonum 

bono 


MaftcuUne.    , 

boni 
bond  rum 

bonis 
bonos 
boni 
bonis 


FLTJRATi. 

jPeminine. 

bonse 

bonarum 

bonis 

bonas 

bonse 

bonis 


Keuter. 

bona 

bonorum 

bonis 

bona 

bona 

bonis 


Rem.  5 


guiar.     For  thuse  see  Lesson  i.. 
«  .1»    q    Adicctivcs  are  attributes  of  the   nouns    on  which 

Adjectives  in  connection  with 
the  following  paradigms  : 

SINGULAR. 

N,  Nauta  regins,  a  royal  sailor. 
G    nautic  regii,  of  a  royal  sailor. 
J)   naut  e  regio,  to  a  royal  sailor. 
A    nautam  rigium,  a  royal  sailor. 
V.  nauta  regie,  0  royal  sailor- 
A    nauta  regio,  hy  a  royal  sailor. 


NOUNS  are  declined  according  to 


Y.  Cura  magna,  the  great  care. 
6?.'  cur*  magn<^,  of  the  great  care. 
B   curfT  raagnre,  to  the  great  care. 

4    curam  magnam,  the  great  care. 

V.  cura  magna,  0  great  care  ! 
A.  cura  magna,  hy  the  greaX  CAire. 


PLUHAIi. 

iV^  nautfE  regii,  nnfal  sailors. 

G.  nauturum  regiOrum,    of    royai 

sailors. 
B.  nautis  regiis,  to  royal  sailors. 
A    nautas  regios,  royal  sailors. 

V.  nauta^  regii,  0  royal  sailors! 

A.  nautis  regiis,  hy  royal  sailors. 

\K.  cur®  magnne,  the  great  cares. 
G.  curarum  magnarum,  oftJie  great 

cares. 

D   curis  magnis,  to  the  great  care», 
i    curas  magnas,  the  great  cares. 
V.  curiB  magnJB,  0  great  cares  ! 
A.  curis  magnis,  hy  great  care» 


42 


GENDER    OF   NOUNS.— ADJECTn"E&. 


B-STEMS   OF   THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 


43 


SINGULAR. 


Ji.  Dolus  niutuus,  a  mutual  fraud. 
G.  tloli  iiiutui,  of  a  mutual  fraud. 
J),  dolo  mutuo,  to  a  inutual  fraud, 
A.  doluiii  iiiiituuiu,  a  mutual  fraud. 
V.  dole  mutue,  0  mutual  fraud  f 
A.  dolo  mutuo,  hi/  a  mutual  fraud. 


PLURAL. 

i^.  doli  mutui,  wututd  frauds. 

O.  doloruin  muluOrum,  of  mutual 

frauds. 
D.  dolls  inutuis,  to  7nutual  frauds. 
A.  dolos  inutuos,  mutual  frauds, 
V.  doli  mutui,  O  mutual  frauds/ 
A.  dolis  mutuis,  hi/  mutual  frauds. 


N.  Prunus  celsa,  a  high  plum-tree. 
G.  ])runi  cclsio,  of  a  hhjh  plum-tree. 
J).  i)runo  celsj!',  to  a  high  jdtim-tree. 
A.  prunura  celstim,  a  high   ^j^W7«- 

tne. 
V.  ])rune  celsa,  0  high  plum-tree  I 
A.  pruno  celsa,  hy  a  high  plum-tree. 


K.  pruui  cel»o,  high  plum-trees. 
G.  pruudrum    celsarum,    of   high 

plum-trees. 
B.  prunis  celsis,  to  high  plum-trees. 
A.  pnmos  celsas,  high  plum-trees. 
V.  pruni  celsje,  O  high  plum-trees  ! 
A.  prunis  celsis,  hy  high  plum-trees. 


N.  Oppidura  parvum,  a  small  town. 
G.  o})pidi  parvi,  of  a  small  town. 
D.  oppido  parvo,  to  a  small  town. 
A.  oi)[)iduin  parvum,  a  small  town. 
V.  oppidum  parvum,  0 small  town! 
A.  oppido  parvo,  hy  a  small  town. 


N.  oppida  iMirva,  suudl  towns. 

G.  oppidoruin  parvOrum,  of   small 

towns. 
D.  oppidis  parvis,  to  small  towns. 
A.  op])ida  parva,  small  towns. 
V.  oppida  parva,  0  small  towns! 
A.  oppidis  parvis,  hy  small  towns. 


EXERCISES. 

^^  Commit  the  adjectives  VIII  of  the  Vorahularies,  and  irrite  the 
foWncing  paradigms  icith  the  Engliih  significdions,  according  to  ^  47  : 

\micitia  vera,  true  friendship.  Incola  e^rr-nus,  a  poor  inhabitant. 
Dea  benigna,  the  kind  goddess.  Barbarus  indoctus,  «//  unlearned  har- 
harian  Humus  madida,  the  wet  ground.  Cerasus  vetusta,  an  old  cherry^ 
tree  Scytlia  Sivvus,  a  cruel  Scythian.  Vulgus  proffmum,  the  profane 
populace.  Auxilium  certum,  a  certain  help,  ^gyptus  aiitiqua,  ancunt 
Egypt  (sing.). 

1  To  a  friendlv  stranger.  2.  Cold  water  {ohj).  3.  By  a  renowned 
Belgian.  4.  Of  aVaitliful  follower.  5.  By  st^vere  disciplini'.  0.  An  ex- 
traordinary ieqregius)  boldness  {ohj.).  7.  Pernicious  discords.  8.  Ot  the 
deep  (iaronne.  1).  Unheard  of  intrigues  {ohj.).  10.  Of  tlie  angry  tr<K)])s. 
11.  By  inveterate  enmity.  12.  A  dense  darkn(>ss.  l)}.  By  a  cowardly 
de^rrter  14.  To  a  poor  farmer.  15.  To  the  sad  daughters.  1().  Tlie 
open  gates  17.  By  the  renowned  Ephesus.  18.  Of  a  nefarious  treacheiy. 
11)  A  high  poplar  (ohj.).  20.  To  a  thankful  peopK'.  21.  By  an  ungrate- 
ful freed  woman.  22.  By  an  idle  (female)  beggar.  2:1  Industrioua 
{female)  slaves.  24.  Sharp  swords  {ohj.).  25.  Ample  provisions  ((y/^jO- 
26.  Of  an  honest  German  woman.     '67.  Pernicious  poisons  {ohj.).     M 


,.  oo  The  renowned  Delphi  {<m-  ^0.  By  invincible 
Of  fon-ign  arms.  ~9.,  A[\^,  J/'"  ..o  pv  the  wealthy  Damascus  oS. 
j,^,,^^,.     ;3l.    ot    l>r;>ua    Athens.      3..^^^^^^^  85.  Ample  re- 

Foreign  auxiliary  troops,     dj.  By  a  P^^nia  ,  ..^^  ^y  a  small 

l^^-tl: Of ti!^ '^^-  ^- ^f^^^'  ''■  ^ '-'' '-'-'''' '-''' 

1.   Narrow  roads.      2.   O^^^son^J^  ^T  ^^^  ^^ 
an  ^^ecurate   schc)larship     o    To  tu,  ete        ^.^^^^  drivers  (a../F^^O.    9- 

t,>wn.  7.  Of  attentive  ^^.^I^H^^'^"-^,,^^^  s^'i^e  {ohj.).  U-  Contrary  de- 
Of  contente<l  farmers  10  ^he  ^^^^^^^^^^  \.^  Doubtful  testimonies  (o6y.. 
Bires.  12.  To  an  excellent  ^^'l^^^^^,  16.  By  a  fertile  ground. 
14.  An  el.>Muent  ixH't  U.  ^^  ^^^^^''^^f.^  master.  19.  Of  the  re- 
17.  Of  hostile  Num.dians.  ^,^-  f y,^/5^\,^^  {ohj.).  21.  By  secret 
nowned   Peloponnesus.     20.     lue   pi        .w.       ,  ^j  ^female)  neighbt)r. 

:„,,     ,2.  Of  rebellious  --'^^^\^-^^l^:Ze)U^^^^-     ^f.  Fu 
k  IW  the  Latin  langimg-     -o^^^^^^^^  Inner  wars.     20     Of 

turetriuniphs(./>jO;^|;   1^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  The  immense  sea  (./>> 

moderate  merits.     30.    Lnpieasai  w  n^.i.rhboring  estate.      34.    A 

p,*„„.„      a..   A  -te  relugc.     33    By  a  »;.;'o    „,,„        su-r !     37.  O 

Z^^^^'r^^^^^^^^-^-    3U.  Of  a  sudden  death.    40. 
By  the  whole  world. 


LESSON  L 

B-STEMS  OF  THE  SECOND  DECLEXSIOIC 
8  ^S    1  Several  noun,  and  adjectives  of  the  second  declens.ou 
§  4».  1-  »P^<^  •"  ,       J,     terminations  us  and  e  m 

.itb  stems,  tevmn-atrng    n  n  .  op  ^  ^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^ 

the  nonun>U,vo  and  voct^ne  .n  r.,,^,»,  «f  ,he 

aiipeiir  m  tlie>e  cascs^     i'"-!  "' 

second  dcfl«'"*'«"-  ,  without  exception 

Tl,e  nouns,  which  belong    o  this  cla  s,  arc  ^m 

--"•T    rin1:rm::cure"S.er<:!rv,^hf  femininl  and 
r::t;::s:ssmn;:tre' regular  Lminationa  and  «». 

'"t'lr'nouu  vir  and  its  compounds  (as  levir,    a  husband's 


44  B-STEMS   OF   THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 

brother,  duumvir,  triumvir,  &c.),  and  the  national  name  Tremr, 

a  Trevirian  ;  . 

2  The  proper  names  in  cr,  witli  a  few  exceptions,  as  :  Alexan' 
der  Tcucer  Ltjsandcr,  and  the  national  names  Cimher,  a  Lira, 
brian,  Umber,  an  Cmbrian,  Ccuitaber,  ^  Cantabrian,  Calaber,  o. 

Calabrian,  Afer,  an  African  ;  .   i  x^     tt    o 

3.  Those  nonns  and  adjr-ctives,  which  are  enumerated  JSo.  U.,  - 

and  VIII,  2  of  the  Vocabularies  ;  ,  .  ,  i 

4.  Those  nouns  and  adjectives  in  fer  and  ffer,  which  are  de- 
rived from  the  verbs  fer  re  and  rjerere,  to  carry,  as:  Lucifer  the 
morning-star,  armif/er,  an  armor-bearer,  siynifer,  a  standard- 
bearer, //•</////€/•,  fruit-bearing, i^estifer,  pestiferous; 

5.  The  adjective  satur,  sated. 

Rem.  2.  Those  compounds  of  n>,  which  consist  in  '^"^^^fffl^^^^ 
NLMERAiA  denote  in  \\^  vi^^uxi.  2.  commitUe  ovhoard.>S  <l<:^^^ 
vumher  of  men  for  the  pnfoymaHCc  of  Home  public  duty.     Ihc  bm- 
eulur  denotes  a  member  of  such  a  committee,  as  : 

Duumvir,  a  duumvir,  member  of  a  committee  of  two,   tlur. 

(/wMmi'm.  a  committee  of  two  ;  f  ♦i.^^.o  •    -pt  m 

trixmiir,  a  triuiinir,  member  of  a  committee  ot   three,   tllr. 

ir?>///U"i>/.  a  committee  of  three ;  .   .  . 

qLuorciri,  a  committee  or  board  of  four;  septemnn  ^^^^ 

tee  or  board  of  seven  ;   decemcin,  a  board  ot   ten  ;  centamun,  a 

board  of  a  hundred. 

§  50.  3.  In  the  inflection  of  these  uouus  and  adjectives  we 
Lave  to  notice  the  following  three  points: 

a.  We  decline  and  move  tbera,  as  if  the  termination  m  of 
the  nominative  had  not  been  dropped,  as  vir,  gen.  vlrl ;  satur, 

FEM.  satura. 

h.  They  generally  Jro;>  the  vowel  e  of  the  final  letters  er  m 
all  cases  except  nominative  and  vocative  singuhir  mascubne,  as 
maglster,  gen.  nuujlstrl;  ^nejer,  gen.  piyri,  fem.  piura,  neut. 

piqruin.  ,••«<-• 

0.  But  the  following  words  retain  the  e  in  their  inflection. 

1.  The  nouns  adulter,  (jener,  puer,  socer,  vesper,  presbyter. 
Liber  (the  Latin  name  for  the  god  Bacchus),  and  the  plur. 
tantum  Uberl  (children); 

2.  The  adjectives   asper,  creper,  lacer,  liber,  miser,  prosper, 

tener; 


R-STEMS    OF   THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 


45 


3.  The  compounds  with/er  and  ger,  both  nouns  and  adjectives. 

The  adjective  dc.rter  sometimes  drops  the  e  and  sometimes 
retains  it  (fem.  dextra  or  dextera). 

Those    nouns  and  adjectives,    that   retain  the  e,  are  inflected 

after    the    paradigms  ;9?^er  and  liber;    those,  that  drop  the  e, 

foHow  the  paradigms  ager  and  sacer. 

Rem  3.  The  compounds  with /^r  and  ger  may  be  recognized  by  their 
MEANING  (carryiiig  or  bearing  something).  Thus  the  adjectives 
pifjer,  mfer,  nigerXnd  tlie  nouns  agcr  and  Afer  are  not  compounds 

of  ferre  an<l  qerere.  ,      ,^    ,  J.^ 

Kem    4    The  i-EKSOXAL  noung,   belonging  to  the  R-stems  mostly  are 
*  MOVABLE.     Thus  mngider,  minister  and  arbiter  torm  the  feminine 
nouns  magistra,  minMra  and  arbitra.     Pmr  irregularly  torms  the 
feminine  noun  paella^  a  girl  (instead  of  puera). 


o  1 .   Paradigms. 


N. 
G. 
B. 
A. 
V. 
A. 


BINGUL.Ul. 
Puer,  the  boy 
pueri,  of  the  boy 
puero,  to  the  boy 
pueriim,  tlie  boy 
l)uer,  O  boy  ! 
puero,  by  the  boy. 


PLURAL. 

iV.  pueri,  the  boys 
G.  puerdrum,  of  the  boy» 
D.  pueris,  to  the  boys 
A.  pueros,  the  boys 
V.  pueri,  0  boys! 
A.  pueris,  by  the  ooys. 


JV.  Liber,  libera,  liberum 
G.  liberi,  libera',  liberi 
D.  libero,  lii)er;e,  libero 
A.  liberum,  liberam,  liberum 
V.  liber,  libera,  liberum 
A.  libero,  libera,  libero. 


bberi,  libene,  libera 
liberorum,  liberfirum,  liberorum 
bberis,  liberis,  liberis 
liberos,  liberas,  libera 
liberi,  liberae,  libera 
liberis,  liberis,  liberis. 


JV.  A  ger,  the  field 
G.  ngn,  of  the  field 
D.  agro,  to  the  field 
A.  agrum,  the  field 
V.  ager,  Ofidd/ 
A.  i\gro,  by  the  field. 


K.  agri,  the  fields 
G.  agrorum,  of  the  fields 
D.  agris,  to  the  fields 
A.  agros,  the  fields 
V.  agri,  0  fields! 
A.  agris,  by  the  fields. 


2f.  Sacer,  sacra,  sacrum 
G.  sacri,  sacr;e,  Siicri 
D.  safro.  sacrie,  sacro 
A.  sacrum,  sacram,  Siicrum 
V.  sacer,  sacra,  sacrum 
A.  Bacro,  sacra,  sacro. 


sacri,  sacrap,  sacrsii. 

bacrorum,  sacrarum,  sacrorum 

sacris,  sacris,  sacris 

eacros,  sacras,  sacra 

sacri,  sacrse,  sacra 

sacris,  sacris,  sacris. 


I 


46 


R  STEMS   OF   THE    SECOND    DECLENSION. 


KXEUCISES. 


THE   FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 


47 


^W'  Connnit  the  IW^  of  the  Il-sfe)Ns  Vonrb.  IT,  2  and  VIIF,  2,  and 
write  tht\foll<>}rif,p  pormlifpnH :  triumvir,  a  tri'iinnr;  arbiter,  an  f/m- 
pire  ;  «i^iiil'er,  d  dandit i drearer  ;  and  the  a^Jcctivea  assper  and  crebt'X. 

1. 

A.    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 

1.  Of  a  tnnirherons  African.  2,  Of  pious  cliilclren.  '].  To  a  renowned 
armor-bearer.  4.  The  unjuHt  eommittee  of  tin.  5.  X'iolent  south  wimls. 
G.  By  a  red  crab.  7.  Hv  (ireek  books.  8.  A  sad  son-in-law  {obj.).  !).  To 
an  industrious  meelumic.  10.  A  j)leasant  evening  ('%•)•  By  a  liidden 
knife.  12.  Of  liurtful  serjx^nts.  Vl.  To  a  learned  fathi-r-in-law.  14.  Ol 
a  private  assistant,  lo.  Hy  a  rough  island.  1(5.  Of  a  crafty  deserter.  17. 
Pestiferous  plans.  18.  By  a  tender  b(»u1.  It).  Of  free pient  tears.  20.  To  the 
free  country.  21.  The  left  eye  (obj.).  •J2.  By  a  lazy  farmer.  2o  Bhu-k  work- 
men. 24.  Beautiful  meadows  {ohj.).  2.")*  Sacred  Del])hi  (f^lj.).  20.  The 
wretclied  Corinth  (of»}.).  27.  By  a  prosj)erous  sailor.  28.  Of  a  river, 
carrvini::  uold.  25).  By  the  right  arm.  oO.  Of  a  conii>lcte  picture,  ol.  Of  a 
fruit-bearing  field.  fi2.  The  siited  trf)ops  {oh}.).  3:>.  By  the  lean  steers. 
84.  The  wretched  inhabitants.     30.  Of  an  active  (female)  assistant. 

7>'.    rREDICATIVE    AND    OBJECTIVE    PHRASES.  ' 

1.  We  plough  the  fields.  2.  He  praises  Alexander.  ,'>  You  adore 
Liber.  4.  Thou  recommendest  the  book.  5.  The  umiiires  decide.  (>.  The 
(female)  teachers  please;.  7.  The  assistants  are  silent.  8.  The  board  of  a 
hundred  examine.  9.  lie  releases  the  nurhanics.  10.  I  recall  the 
standard-bearer.  11.  ^V'e  censure  the  (female)  assistants.  12.  He  salutes 
the  father-in  law.  13.  Knives  wound.  14.  The  south-wimis  blow.  lo.  The 
evenings  refresh.  10.  It  wearies  the  triumvir.  IT.  We  adhere  to  the 
standard-bearer.  18.  He  kills  the  boar.  11).  They  denounce  Lysauder. 
20.  They  sever  by  a  knife.  21.  The  mechanics  rebel.  22  He  reconciles 
the  s(m  in-law.  23.  The  committee  of  seven  resist.  24.  The  books  de- 
light.    23.  The  umpires  are  on  their  guard. 

2. 

Trandate  the  following  phrases,  and  point  out,  to  wJiicJi  category  they 
belong : 
1.  Accurate  teachers.  2.  The  public  lands  (ager).  3.  The  boars  of 
ISIeleager.  4.  By  the  negligence  of  the  nu'chanics,  o.  She  is  in  need  of 
a  teaclier.  0.  By  the  sacred  road.  7.  The  standard-bearei-s  remain. 
8.  Of  the  left  bank.  9.  By  the  sword  of  Alexander.  10.  He  kills  by  8 
knife.  11.  We  await  the  evening.  12.  By  tlu;  assistants  of  the  tyrant 
13.  He  sacrifices  a  goat.  14.  \W  the  sou  in-law  of  Augustus.  15.  They 
banish  the  decemvirs.  10.  Of  the  obedience  of  the  children.  17.  The 
Al>ic*4is  enter.     18.  Of  fruit-bearing  Egypt.      11).  The  (female)  assistants 


of  the  queen.  20.  He  conforms  to  the  umpire.  21.  By  a  beautiful 
hou^e  22  He  plants  (pfant'lre)  wild  olives.  23.  Frequent  games. 
'M  We  put  the  Cantabrians  to  flight.  25.  By  the  red  river.  20.  Ot  a 
comi>lete  beehive.  27.  The  wretched  trooi)8.  28.  The  serpents  hiss 
{xtridere)  21).  The  Calabrians  rebeL  30.  Of  a  lean  steer.  31.  Pestil- 
eious  war.-^.  32.  By  the  rough  forests.  33.  Of  a  beautiful  cherry-tree. 
34  Of  the  red  flame.  35.  The  children  {ohj.)  of  Ponqx-y.  30.  To  a  black 
standard-bearer.  37.  Th(!  mechanics  urge.  38.  He  sees  a  serpent.  31).  O 
lazv  preftH-t'  40.  O  just  mnpire!  41.  Bv  a  tender  conscience.  42.  She 
reconciles  the  father-in-law.  43.  By  a  Latin  bo(ik.  44.  We  sncrifice  to 
Liber.  45.  lb»  banishes  tlu;  children.  40.  The  teachers  {ohj.)  of  the  peo- 
i.le.  47.  Of  a  prosi)eroiis  neighbor.  48.  The  (female)  assistants^  spin. 
41).  The  Umbrians  are  angry.  50.  By  the  pity  of  Teucer.  51.  Knives 
frighten.     52.  By  the  knife  of  an  assassin. 


LESSOxN    XI. 

THE   FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 

§  5»5.  1.  The  fourth  conjiii^ation  has  the  characteristic  i,  and 
the  same  personal  endings,  as  the  ist  and  2d,  except  that  in  the 
3d  person  plural  the  letter  it  is  inserted  between  characteristic  and 

ending. 

§  o3i   Paradigm. 

Infinitive  :  Audire,  to  hear  (stem  audi^  charact.  i,  end- 
ing re). 
Present  inclieative: 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Audio,  I  hear 

2.  audis,  thou  hear  est 

3.  audit,  he,  she,  it  hears 


PLURAL. 

1.  Audimus,  we  hear 

2.  audit  is,  you  hear 

3.  audiunt,  they  hear 


§  51,  2.  The  verb  Ire,  to  go,  changes  its  stem  i  into  e  in  the 
first  person  singular  and  the  third  plural,  as: 


SINGULAR. 

1.  eo,  I  go 

2.  is,  thou  goest 

3.  it,  he,  she,  it  goes 


PLURAL. 

1 .  Imus,  we  go 

2.  Itis,  you  go 

3.  eunt,  they  go. 


R*.tii.  1.  The  verb  ire  forms  many  compounds  with  prepositions,  that  1« 
verbs,  consisting  of  the  verb  ire  and  a  preposition,  prefixed  to 
it  as: 


46 


THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


49 


These  are  conjugated  like  the  simple  verb  Ire  {adeo  praeter  eo 
re™  hZrlantl    But  the  verb  amblre  (to  go  arouiul,  to  solicit 
Tot^a  can  Uaatt»),  which  likewise  is  a  comiH>und  ot  .r..  is  cj^njugated 
1  ke  a  retulur  verb  of  the  fourth  conjugation  {amh,o,  «/'^'^^'  "  )•   , 

T^.m  '>    The  verb  nennlre,  to  be  unable,  not  (to)  can.  is  conjugated  like 
7r7(/!AJ^l  cannot    nequis,  thou  canst  not ;  /.^Vy^/r.^^^  they  cannot) 

Eem    '  Th?  verb^^ar.  has  two  meanings:  a.  to  co,ne  b.  to  be  for  ^<^e 
In  the  fcrmer  signification  it  is  conjugated  regularly,  like  a./rf/r. 
1    the  latt  «^  Bi-nification  it  is  a  comi>ound  of  Ire,  as  ^m^i^o  I  am  for 
^;  :if.:rtW  are  for  sale  ;  but  .e^Cio.  I  come,  r.,u..^,  they  come. 

EXERCISES. 

for  Side  nequire,  to  be  ttnable,  not  (to)  can. 
'  1. 

.    H    T»     -     ,v,o,io,int     *>  Portamaperit.    3.  Amicis  impertit.    4.  Sociis 

gabvonimus     ''■  '*■''■,/ A,,^iriiara  ineo      10.  Trimnvirosamliio.     11.  Mu- 
8.  F  «ymm  """«;;"•.,  «^.f^";.;;^^^  'Ts'  Via,,.  inve„T„,,.«.     14.  Mendacia 

inveniunt.     1^^'-  «:;« "^f„*^:" ^^'^."^o     19.  ^ mm,.uB  s,.b.-unt.    30.  Copi» 
iuteremit.     18.  Ari;i,i„.'nta  pr.utr,  o.     ij<.     ,        ,.  ^     23.  Nuutii 

adveniunt.     21.  Magistri  consentittnt.    22.  Cup^-dise  vencunt. 

'■'/'"rTl.p  auxlUarv  troops  go  a«ay.     2.  The  Cin.l.rian.  arrive.     3.  The 

m.ss.-„grr  arrives.  . .  Prov "'i""","'  ; ' i^.i.innts  perisli  11.  We  bind 
9  The.CiaulB  come  to  help^  J^/^  ^^^^t^,  bury  the  pne,. 
the  prisoners.      12.  1  am  a  ^laM.  "  .  ;  ^  «,  Lysander. 

14.  Von  clotl,e  the  beggars  l;'-  "»,.,.  7,^rdf„  18.  Thev  cross 
1«.  Thou  undergoes, dauf^.r3.       7^^  Ui",,  .^e 

the  Danube.  '''■  '.f  >  ^,^''''^  "''"  gvos  22.  You  exhaust  the  water, 
inhabitants.  21.  He  t  nds  '''<',^™';,';';,  "^^.^  bv  flatteries.  2.->.  They 
23.  We  educate,  "'f  ""'"  bv^be  n  aceT  27  We  punish  the  slaves, 
hinder  by  arms.  20  '  Pass  ^^f  "^  P^^^^"'^;,;  ^.  the  uoops.  30.  You 
28.  'rhe  tTm,,,v,rs  d,ssent       -^».  11    y  e^t"«^^^^       ^,  ,,,,,'  je,,^  ,«,,i8h. 

guard  th,.  .T>n«'n'7-  "^}  t LTstrike  the  ambassador.  35.  They  die  by 
^^  ^"^c' The  sSdafibear  Sme  forth.     37.  The  votes  are  for  .do, 

2. 

V        •  ,«*      9    M-ic/mtri  erudiunt.     3.  Nummos  disper 
A    1    Fluvios  e-shaurmnt.     ^.  Magisiri  eruuiuui.  .,„._.,   „,u.rTrft 

yi,   i.iiu*iwo  .-i-.      K    N«>cr()tinm  coniDeno.     o.  Lastra  apcrire. 

r-^auti.  r:nrnr8.''E<pi-  de^iCr  9.  U^^Hi  exeunt.     10.  Captlvi 


redeunt.     11     Statuam  oporiunt.     12.  ^rumnas  molliunt.     13.  Bell um 

1  .  J  u>t  tia  ^  enit.     18.  Discipulis  impertltis.     10.  Adversariis  subvenitis 
.rat  am  impertiunt.     2  .  Nuntiis  comperiunt.     22.  Frederlcus  disi 

or    T^    *  ''''^'?  ^''^^'''''-     ^'^-    I^l'^^^litiis  lenlre.     2.1    Morbum 

00   ij    -''^  Puniunt.     27.   Perfug.e  pereunt.     28.    Mendacia  in- 
;p-  Hegnum  stabilit.     30.  Oppro!)ria  subeo 
i^.  1.  We  soften  the  tears.     2.  We  lull  the  watchman  to  sleep      3 
TlM.y  cross  the  Hellespont.     4.   We  bring  as.^istance  to  the  Cantabrians 
0    11.;  stiitiics  are  for  sale.      6.  The  Numidians  come.     7.  They  bury 

\7  n]  ?'  1  •?■  '' ''''''  ^>''''^  *^  ^^^  q^^^'^"-  '^-  '^Jiey  feel  the  iniury. 
10.  Ihe  inhabitants  come  forth.  11.  Thev  cover  the  pictures  r>  You 
hnish  the  book.     13.  We  fortify  the  houses.      14.  They  dst rib 


20 
sent 
lenit. 
veiiltis 


tvr..«+      o~    \\-~  1      ,         --•   ^""   strengthen   the 

'h      \'^-  *"  approach  tlie  prelect.      2(>.  The  workmen  thirst.     27. 

1  he  Ahicans  commit  cruelties.     28.   We  season  the  dishes.     29    You 
nourish  a  serpent.     30.  They  cross  the  street. 


LESSON  XII. 

THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

§  •lo.  1.  The  third  conjugation  differs  from  the  other  three: 

a.   I]y  having  a  coxsoxant,  or  the  vowel  u  as  a  characteristic ; 

/j.  By  having  personal  endings,  beginning  with  a  vowel. 

§  oO,  2.  The  endings  of    the  third  conjugation  are  the  fol- 
lowing : 

1.  Iiifiiiilivc':   ^re. 

2.  Present  iiicliiaf ivc  : 


8i:XGULAIl. 

1.  — o. 

2.  — is. 

3.  — it. 


PLURAL. 

1.  — hniis. 

2.  — Uis. 

3.  — ynt. 


§  or.  3.  The  STEM  of  verbs  of  the  3d  conjugation  is  found  by 
removing  the  ending  ere  of  the  infinitive.  Bv  successively  attaching 
to -the  stem  the  endings  §  56,  the  fohowing  paradigm  is  formed! 

♦  This  phrase  may  be  translated  in  diflferent  wayK 


50 


THE   TIIIIID   CONJUGATION. 


THE   THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


51 


Infinitive:  legCre,  to  rmd  {^i^\\\  hg—,  characteristic^, 
endinc:  ere). 


Present  indieative: 

SINGUI.AR. 

1.  Lego,  I  read 

2.  legis,  thou  reddest 

3.  legit,  he,  she,  it  reads 


PTXRAL. 

1.  Leghniis,  ice  read 

2.  legitis,  1/on  read 

3.  legiint,  they  read. 


Rem   1    The  infinitives  of  the  2d  and  3d  conjugations  are  distinguislied 
bv  the  quantity  of   the  vowel   e,  preceding   the  linal    sylhiUle   n, 
which  in  the  second  conjugation  is  ^o/^<7.  being  the  cliaracteristic ; 
but  in  the  3d  conjugation  sh»rt,  being  a  mere  connecting  letter. 
Rem  e.  Tlie  Ist  and  2d  lu-rsons  i)lural  of  the  3d  and  4tli  conjugations  are 
distin'niished  bv  tlie  quantitv  of  the  vow.d  i  bctm-e  the  linul  syllable 
mus  and  tis.   This  vowel  in  the  3d  conjugation  is  short,  belonging  to 
the  ENDING,  and  forming  its  connecting  vowel.     We  therefore  pro- 
nounce Icfjimas,  legitis,  not  legTmus,  U<jl  tis,  different  trom  the  4th 
conjugation,  where  the  vowel  i  is  the  characteristic  and  lonj. 
§  5h!  4.  Several  verbs  of  the  3d  conjugation  take  the  vowel 
t  between  cliaracteristic  and  ending  in  the   1st  person  singular 
and   3d   plural,  thus  having  the   ai)pearance  of  verbs  of  the  4th 
conjugation  in  these  persons.     These  verbs,  which  are  ciiHed   I- 
Verll!»»^  are  the  following  : 

capere,  to  take  f  ugere,  to  flee 

cupere,  to  icish  jacere,  to  throw 

facere,  to  do,  to  make      parere,  to  beget 
fodere,  to  dig 
with  their  comixmnds  (sec  Rem.  3),  and  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete 
verbs  lacere  and  specere. 

They  are  conjugated  after  the  following  i)attern: 


quatere,  to  shake 

rajx^re,  to  rob 

sapere,  to  taste,  to  b^  wise 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Capio,  I  take 

2.  capis,  thou  takest 

3.  capit,  he  takes 


rLUR-VL. 

1.  Ca])imus,  ice  take 

2.  capitis,  yon  take 

3.  capiunt,  they  take. 


Rem  3.  ThecompcMindsof  r^;)er^/ac^r^  .;>r^?r,  rnpere,  sapere,  larere  and 
specere  change  the  vowels  a  and  e  of  the  stem  into  7.  i  he  compounds 
oi  quatere  take  the  form  of  cutere. 


CArERE. 

accii)ere 
conci]X're 
decipere 
incipere 


FACERE. 

affic«'re 
coniict're 
deficere 
interficere 


JACERE. 

abjicere 
conjicere' 
dejicero 
ejicere^ 


RAPERE. 

arripere 
corri})ere' 
diripere 
eripere^ 


BAPERE. 

desij)ere 
insipere- 


LACERE. 

allicere 

pellicere^ 

elicere^ 


SPECERE. 

aspicere^ 
conspicere 
desi)icere^ 
inspicera 


QUATERE. 

concutere 
percutere* 
excutere' 


The  changed  stem-VQW(»ls  of  these  verbs  always  are  short. 
therefore  inter' jicit,  in'spicit,de'jicit,  con'cutit,  d:c. 


Pronounce 


Rem.  4.  Thof^e  verl)s,  compounded  of  facere  and  words  other  than 
prepositions,  retain  the  a,  as:  liquefarere,  to  melt;  tacuefacere,  to 
empty  ;  calfat'ere,  to  warm  ;  assuefacere,  to  accustom ;  mansuefacere^ 
to  tame-  patefacere,  to  open  ;  satisfacere,  to  satisfy. 


§ 


•59.   5.  The  following  verbs  of  this  coi^'ugation  have  several 
il*re;;'lllar  forms  in  the  present  tense  : 

■  1.  Velle  (contracted  from  volere),  to  be  willing,  to.  will ;  2. 
JVoHe  (instead  of  ?ion  velle),  to  ])e  unwilling,  not  to  wish  ;  3. 
Jfflle  (instead  of  magis  velle),  to  wish  rather  ;  4.  Ferre  (con- 
tracted from  /erere))  to  carry;  5.  J5*\se  (contracted  from  esere), 
to  be;  G.  Posse  (instead  of  pote  esse),  to  be  able,  (to)  can. 
Tliese  verbs  are  thus  conjugated  in  the  indicative  present: 


I      wilt',  U)  he  tcilling. 
S.  1.  volo,  I  am  icilling 

2.  vis,  thou  art  willing 

3.  vult,  he  is  icilling 


3rnlle^  to  wish  rather. 
malo,  I  rather  wish 
mavis,     thou     rather 
icishest 

rather 


Nolle,  to  he  unwilling 
nolo,  I ani  nnicilling 
non  vis,  thou  art  un- 

icilling 
non  vult,  he  is  umcil-maxuXt,      he 
linn  \        icishes 

P.\.\d[Mi\\\x9^,iceareicillingno\uni\\B,  we  arc  ?/7i-malumus,    we    rather 
I  i         willing  j        itish 

2,  vultis,  ^0?«  are  willing \\o\\\\i\iis,you are, &c.v[i?ivxx\i\^,  you   rather 

I  I         wish 

Z.\o\\mi,they  are  willing  i\iA\mi,  they  are,  &c.    malunt,    tliey    rather 

I  wish. 


Ferre,  to  carry. 
S.  l.jfero,  I  carry 

2.  fers,  thou  carriest 

3.  fert,  he  carries 

P.  1.  ferimus,  we  car?^. 
2. 1  fert  is,  you  carry 
S.'ferunt,  they  carry 


Ks!*e,  to  be. 
sum,  I  am 
es,  thou  art 
est,  he  is 
sumus,  we  are 
estis,  you  are 
sunt,  they  are 


Posse,  to  he  able. 
possum,  I  can 
potes,  thou  canst 
potest,  he  can 
possumus,  we  can 
potestis,  you  can 
possunt,  they  can 


1  To  throw.    2  To  seize.    '  To  throw  out    *  To  snatch  away. 


>  To  look  at,  to  regard.    '  To  be  mad.  to  be  insane,  to  be  silly.  '  To  allure,  to  attract    •  Tt 
•trike,  to  stab.     'To  draw  out     «  To  despise.     '  To  thake  out,  to  shake  off,  to  siTt 


<J2 


THE    THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


THE   THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


53 


Rem.  ;").  The  verbs  prre  and  esue  form  many  com]>oun(ls,  wliicli  are  con- 
jugated like  tlie  simi)le  verhs.  as:  afi  nr—af  fcr<>,  afftrs,  ajj'ert : 
pracferre — prae'fcro,  praefcrs,  pnuftrt ;  adt.ssc — adsiini) adm,  adest; 
pracesae—praisum,  j)r(i'(ft,  prmest. 

The  verb  pfodcssf,  a  comiiound  <tf  pro  and  ffise,  has  the  letter  d 
inserted  in  all  forms  of  cssr,  which  hetrin  with  a  vowel,  while  in 
those  forms,  which  begin  with  a  consonant,  this  letter  is  dropjnd, 
as:  Pi'osuin, prodta,  prodext,  ^noKfinnis,  prodistia,  prosnnt. 

Rem.  0.  The  most  usual  compoumls  oi eaxe  ar«;  the  following:  Ahc!<a(\  to 
be  absent  ;  adixKe,  to  be  )>resent  ;  dtcsse,  to  be  wanting;  obrssc,  to 
be  in  tin*  wnv,  to  hiinlcr  ;  pnerssr,  to  he  a  cliiof,  to  eoininand  ;  prodesse, 
to  1)0  useful,  to  benolit ;  sxperesse,  to  survive. 

§  60.  6.  To  the  3(1  conjugation  behmg  all  ilicoplive  (in- 
choative) verbs,  that  is  those,  which  have  the  termiiuitiou  scere. 
These  verbs  are  dkrived  words,  inostlv  from  verbs  of  the  2d  con- 
jugation,  sometimes  from  a<ljectives  or  nouns. 

They  are  called  incept  Ire,  because  they  originally  denote  the 
BEGixxTXG  of  an  action.  Tlu'v  generally  are  rendered  by  the 
English  verb  "  to  hecome^^  with  an  adjfxtive,  as  : 

Virere,  to  he  yreen — vin^scere,  to  become  green  ; 
calere,  to  he  irftrm — calescere,  to  become  icorm  ; 
dormire,  to  deep — obdormiscere,  to  fall  odeep. 

The  verbs,  from  which  some  inceptives  are  derived  (stem-verbs), 
are  uot  in  use,  as  the  stem-verbs  of  dlscere^  noscerc^  assuescere, 
crescere. 

All  inceptive  verbs  are  conjugated  regularly  after  the  paradigm 
of  Ufjere. 

1^  For  a  list  of  the  inceptive  verbs  see  XIII,  B  of  the  Vocabularies. 

EXERCISES. 

Commit  the  verbs  XIII,  1,  A  of  the  Vocahuhnien,  and  write  the  following 
pa  rod  ignis  : 

Scribere,  to  write,  regere,  to  govern,  dicere.  to  sag,  discerc,  to  learn, 
incipere,  to  begin,  intertieere,  to  kill,  ejicere,  to  throw  out,  currere,^o  run, 
pra^ferre,  to  prefer,  diripere,  to  plunder. 

1. 

PKEDICATIVE   PHRASES. 

1.  The  teachers  describe.  2.  The  peojde  govern.  3.  The  gods  live. 
4.  The  bovs  play.  5.  Pvrrhus  vields.  (>.  The  earth  nourishes.  7.  The 
slaves  cook.  8.  The  farniers  sow.  \).  Wars  commence.  10.  The  Italiana 
deceive.     11.  The  Persians  ilee.     12.  The  pirates  rob.      Vo.  Wines  re- 


fresh. 14.  The  tributes  reject.  15.  The  ])risoners  escape.  10.  The 
freedmen  are  insane.  17.  A  member  of  the  committee  of  s<'Ven  reports. 
18.  The  philosophers  conceive,  li).  The  promises  allure.  20.  The  Celts 
di•^  21.  The  g(Kls  beiret.  22.  The  umpires  ins)  ect.  23.  The  Numi- 
diuiis  kill.  24.'  1  he  mechanics  throw  down.  25.  The  ambassador  oll'ers. 
2ti.  The  queen  rather  wishes.  27.  The  pirates  are  unwilling.  28.  The 
t!0>ps  are  willing.  29.  The  prefect  commands  (is  a  chief).  80.  The 
accused  is  absent.  31.  Study  benelits.  32.  The  relatives  are  absent. 
33.  l;0:.ks  are  useful.  34.  Tlie  grandfather  survives.  35.  Fortifications 
are  wanting. 

OBJECTIVE   nillASES. 

3G.  I  escape  the  danger.  37.  I  deceive  the  teacher.  38.  He  throws 
th«' arms  awav!  ,31).  Thou  bringest  the  letter.  40.  They  surround  the 
allies.  41.  We  oncede  the  victorv.  42.  You  confer  a  favor.  43.  They 
perfect  the  walls.  44.  They  behold  the  shore.  45.  Thou  bribest  the 
tribunes.  40.  They  consimie  the  provisions.  47.  He  defends  the  poet. 
48,  Thev  abandon  the  towns.  40.  We  yield  to  the  enemies.  50.  lou 
give  satislaction  to  the  queen.  51.  ^Ve  accuse  (arguere)  ot  perfidy.  52. 
Thev  ac<'use  of  negliircnce.  53.  You  are  wanting  to  the  country.  54. 
It  is  useful  to  the  trooi)s.  55.  They  return  irnldirei^thG  prisoners.  50. 
You  i)refer  Virdl.  57.  They  affect  by  tears.  58.  We  succumb  to 
hanlships.  59.  Thou  art  victorious  by  treachery.  GO.  You  return 
thanks. 

Translate  into  Engliah  : 

1.  Adversariis  cedunt.  2.  Adversarii  cedunt.  3.  Legatos  repetunt. 
4.  Leg.lti  repetunt.  5.  Ornanu'Uta  abjiciimt.  G.  Ornameuta  desunt.  7. 
Belluui  indlcit.  8.  Bellum  negligit.  0.  Bellum  incipiunt.  10.  Bell um 
])erticiunt.  11.  Bellum  opprimit.  12.  Perfidia  vincit.  13.  Perfidia 
viueit.  14.  Hasta  interticit.  15.  llasta  interficit.  IG.  Promissis  alliciunt. 
17.  Promissa  alliciunt.  18.  Prafectum  convincit.  19.  Priefectus  con- 
viucit.     20.  C'opias  lacessunt.     21.  CopiiC  lacessunt. 

2. 

j\.  1.  The  colonies  fall  off.  2.  Conflagrations  destroy.  3.  The  pirate 
strikes.  4.  Flatteries  allure.  5.  The  pen  corrects.  G.  Luxury  corrupts. 
7.  Words  deceive.  8.  Athens  is  foolish.  9.  The  Scythians  plunder.  10. 
The  trooi)S  confide.  11.  The  Romans  forgive.  12.  The  CJauls  give 
satisfaction.  13.  The  messengers  report.  14.  The  precepts  are  useful. 
15.  Testimonies  are  wanting.  10.  The  assistants  are  absent.  17.  They 
throw  the  swords  awav.  18.  ^\e  acquit  the  accused.  19.  They  receive 
a  letter.  20.  Thev  sharpen  the  knivt-s.  21.  We  summon  the  inhabit- 
ants. 22.  He  closes  the  gates.  23.  We  abandon  the  cause.  24.  They 
delav  the  undertakings.  25.  You  oj^press  the  provinces.  20.  They 
diminish  the  glorv.  27.  We  distinguish  the  rules.  28.  Y^ou  divide  the 
island.  29.  Thoii  escapest  the  assassin.  30.  We  succumb  to  arms.  31. 
Thev  betrav  the  country.  32.  They  .yield  to  the  Plebeians.  33.  The 
Plel)eians  vield.  34.  He  censures  the  mechanics.  35.  The  mechanics 
censure.  30.  The  candidates  promise.  37.  We  promise  to  the  candi 
dates.     38.  He  brings  the  letter  back.     39.  They  offer  an  armistice. 

n.  1.  Patientia  vincit.     2.  Patientia  vincit.     3.  Dolus  opprimit.    4 


54 


PREDICATIVE   ADJECTIVES   AND   NOUNS. 


Dolo  opprimit.  5.  Consilium  contomnit.  C.  Consilium  deest.  7.  Iivn- 
diuni  fffugit.  8.  Invidia  evcrtit.  9.  Discipuli  pioliciuut.  10.  Discipuloa 
negligunt.  11.  Libros  inspiciunt.  12.  Libri  excellunt.  13.  Liberos 
dilitrit.  14.  Liberi  discunt  {to  learn).  15.  Liborum  extoUunt.  16. 
Libnini  adjicit.  17.  Libruin  conficit.  18.  Captlvos  arrii)iunt.  10.  Cap- 
tlvi  arripiunt.  20.  Prafccti  deciinunt.  21.  Pra^fectos  decipiunt.  22. 
Domuni  reliciunt.  23.  Donununi  produnt.  24.  Oppidum  tradunt.  25. 
Oppiduni  deficit.  20.  Opprobrium  perferuut.  27.  Litteras  i^erferuut. 
28.  Captivos  occidunt. 


LESSON  XIII. 

PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVES  AND  NOUNS. 

§  01.  1.  Adjectives  and  nouns  are  called  predicative, 
when  they  are  connected  with  any  of  the  forms  of  the  verb  esse, 
to  be  (see  §  59).  The  verb  esse  in  connection  with  a  predicative 
adjective  or  noun,  expresses  one  verbal  idea,  and  if  it  is  in  the 
finite  verb,  forms  tojrether  with  its  adjective  or  noun  the  predicate. 
Thus  validus  est  (he  is  strong*)  is  the  same  as  valet;  tacit  us 
sum  (I  am  silent)  the  same  as  taceo;  servus  sum  (I  am  a  slave) 
the  same  as  servio. 

The  verb  esse  in  this  connection  is  called  the  COillllil)  which 
generally  is  placed  after  its  adjective  or  noun. 

§  63.  2.  The  predicative  adjective  or  noun  with  its  copula, 
in  the  same  manner  as  a  verbal  predicate,  is  dependent  on  a 
subject,  and  with  it  forms  a  predic.vtive  phrase. 

Rem.  1.  Thus  "  puer  assiduiis  est,  the  boy  is  diligent"  is  a  predicative 
phrase,  in  which  pit er  is  the  subject,  and  a,sxidtnis  ed  the  pbedi- 
CATE.  Here  the  two  words  assidnus  est  have  the  grammatical  value 
of  one  siugh;  word,  and  the  copuhi  est  has  the  function  of  a  ])ersonal 
ending  of  tlie  verb,  while  the  predicative  adjective  assiduus  rep- 
resents its  STEM. 

§  655.  3.  Predicates,  consisting  of  a  predicative  adjective  or 
noun  with  the  copula,  agree  in  the  following  manner  with  the 
grammatical  subject: 

1.  The  adjective  agrees  with  the  subject  in  gender,  number  and 
case,  and  hence  always  is  in  the  nominative,  as  the  case  of  the 
subject  5 


PREDICATIVE    ADJECTIVES   AND   NOUNS. 


55 


2.  The  predicative  noun  agrees  with  the  subject  in  case  only, 
but  if  it  is  a  movable  noun  it  also  agrees  in  gender  and  number  ; 

8.  Tlie  copula  agrees  with  the  subject  in  number  and  person. 

Diligentia  conspic'ua  est,  the  diligence  is  co?ispicuo us. —Verhi' 

gium  securum  est,  t/te  refuge  is  safe.—^lnvi  alti  sunt,  the  walls 

"lire  high.— Gujxis  poeta  est,  Gajvs  is  a  i^et. — lujustitia  vitium 

est,  injustice  is  a  vice. — Lucretia  serva  est,  Lucretia  is  a  slave, 

-Athenaj  arbitra}  sunt,  Athens  is  the  umpire. 

Rem.  2.  For  the  agreeanent  of  the  predicative  adjective  in  the  construc- 
tion of  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  see  Book  III. 

§  61.  4.  Predicates,  containing  predicative  adjectives  with  the 

copula,  are  thus  conjugated  : 


singulak. 
^alvus  or  salva  sum,  Iain  safe 
salvus  or  salva  ea,  thou  art  safe 
salvus,  salva,  salvum  est,  ?ie,  she,  it 
is  safe 


plural. 

Salvi  or  salvse  sumus,  we  are  safe 
salvi  or  salva?  estis,  you  are  safe 
salvi,   salva^,   salva    sunt,   they  are 
safe. 


Kern  3  The  adjectives  in  the  1st  and  2d  persons  are  either  masculine 
or  FEMININE,  according  as  the  speaker,  or  the  person  spoken  to  is  a 
nu\le  or  a  female.  In  \he  third  j^ersons  they  may  be  either  mascu- 
line, feminine  or  neuter,  according  to  the  gender  of  the  subject, 
expressed  or  understo(xl. 

Rem  4  Predicates,  containinir  predicative  nouns,  which  are  movable, 
are  conjucrated  in  the  same  manner,  as  those,  contammg  adjectives, 
except  "that  in  the  3d  person  they  can  not  assume  a  neuter  gender. 

§  65.  5.  Adjectives,  predicative  as  well  as  attributive,  may 
have  OBJECTS,  like  verbal  i)redicates,  and  form  together  with  these 
latter  an  objective  phrase.  Such  objects  generally  precede  their 
governing  adjectives,  as  : 

Imperii  cupidus,  desirous  of  poicer.—Amicis  fidus  est,  he  is 
faithful  to  friends.— Kuhrn  pleni  sunt,  they  are  full  of  courage. 
— Arrogantia  molesti  estis,  you  are  unpleasant  by  arrogance. 

EXERCISES. 

f^^  Comuqate  the  following  predicates:  Aptus  sum,  1  am  fit; 
genfrosus  sum,  /  am  generous;  liber  sum,  lam  free;  Romanus  sum, 
lam  a  Roman;  Persa  s,\xm,Iam  a  Persian, 


A    Predicates  mTii  the  Copula.    1.  You  are  accurate.    2.  ThoB 
art  learned,  O  poet!     3.  They  {the  icomen)  are  decent.    4.  She  is  tired 


56 


PREDICATIVE   ADJECTIVES   AND   NOL'XS. 


5.  It  is  unjust,     G.  We  are  sorrowful.      7.  I  (a  icomayi)  am  thankful. 

8.  You  are  faitliful,  O  daui^-litrrs !  J).  TIkhi  art  sick,  O  Cornelia !  10.  lie 
is  i)ernicious.  11.  It  is  manifest.  12.  We  are  i)rosi)erous.  l;>.  You  are 
treaclierous,  O  Celts!  14.  Thou  art  profane,  U  Semiu'onius!  1.").  I  {a 
wanuiii)  am  ani^ry.  10.  Thou  art  beautiful,  O  queen!  17.  You  are  cau- 
tious, O  mighbors!  18.  We  are  unknown.  lU.  She  is  tender.  20.  Wa 
is  lazy. 

B.  Prkdicatiyp:  Phr.vses.  21.  The  Cimbvians  are  cruel.  22.  The 
standard-bearers  are  firm.  23.  Poets  are  happy.  24.  The  towns  are 
small.  2.").  The  colonies  are  rebellious.  2(5.  The  sailors  are  active. 
27.  The  plum-trees  are  beautiful.  28.  The  (female)  assistants  are  inex- 
perienced. 2!).  The  Persians  are  conscientious.  oO.  The  roads  are  nar- 
row. :J1.  The  arguments  are  erroneous.  o2.  The  g:round  is  ri'd.  ;]:}.  The 
town  is  wealthy,  31.  The  t^(jds  are  eternal.  35.  Tin;  (female)  teacher  is 
learned.  30.  Sempronius  is  a  ])atri('ian.  37.  Lucretia  is  a  Plebeian. 
38.  Sulla  is  a  Homan.  31).  The  Vistula  is  a  river.  40.  Slander  is  a  dis- 
grace. 41.  ^'Emilia  is  a  teacher.  42.  The  Africans  ar(>  slaves.  43.  (Jold 
is  a  metal.  44,  Syracuse  is  wealthy.  45,  Leuctra  is  renowned.  40.  The 
Seine  is  broad.  47.  Poplars  an;  hiiz:h.  4X.  The  troops  are  faitliful. 
49.  The  camp  is  secure.  ."50.  The  games  are  magnificent.  51.  A  vacation 
is  pleasant.     52.  The  armistice  is  unfair. 

C.  OiJjiXTiVE  Phrases.      1.  (Jlorije  cupidus.      2.  Incohlrum  plenus. 

3.  Indutiarum  iguarus.  4.  Pojuilo  necessarius.  5.  Sociis  jucundus. 
0.  Pr;ed;e  cupidi  sunt.     7.  Beneficiorum  cujjida  est.     8.  Fiducia^  plena  est. 

9.  Dei  ignari  estis.  10.  Populo  earns  es.  11.  Patri;e  perniciosum  est. 
12.  Pnefecto  grati  sumus.  13.  Incolis  incognita  es,  Lucretia!  14.  Tri- 
umviro  infesta?  estis,  feminaM     15.  Sociis  molesti  sumus. 

1.  Envious  of  glory.      2.  Desirous  of  victory.      3.  Ignorant  of  crimes. 

4.  Adverse  to  the;  i)lan.  5.  Friendly  to  the  Africans.  0.  Dear  to  the 
Patricians.  7.  Contrary  to  prudence.  8.  Pernicious  to  the  troops.  1).  I 
am  faithful  to  the  master.  10.  We  are  thankful  to  the  teacher.  11.  I 
{a  itoman)  am  full  of  confidence.  12.  We  {looniin)  ar«;  envious  of  the 
queen.  13.  Thou  art  ignorant  of  the  undertaking,  O  Julia!  14.  You 
are  hostile  to  the  allies,  O  Pomans !  15.  They  {the  women)  are  ungrate- 
ful to  the  country.  10.  They  are  necessary  to  the  tr(M)ps.  17.  We  are 
tired  by  the  battle.  18.  You  an;  wealthy  by  commerce.  10.  They  are 
full  of  joy.  20.  It  is  near  to  Athens.  21.  It  is  peculiar  to  the  Komans, 
22.  Thou  art  agreeable  to  the  troops,  O  son-in-law!  23.  Thou  an  un- 
known to  the  triumvir,  O  Cornelia ! 

2. 

A.  Predicative  Piik.vper.     1,  The  umpire?  are  just.    2.  The  evenings 
are  pleasant,      3.  The   Belgians  are  brave.      4.  The  poet  is  cont<'nted. 

5.  Justice  is  sh)W.  0.  Tin;  mob  is  profane.  7.  The  ]X)ison  is  perni.-ious. 
8.  The  house  is  magnificent.  0.  Homer  is  blind.  10.  Athens  is  faithful. 
11.  The  darkness  is  dense.  12.  The  enmity  is  secret.  13.  The  batth?  is 
bloody.  14.  The  advantng(?s  are  manifest.  15.  The  sailors  are  rebel- 
lious. 10.  The  farmers  are  idle.  17.  The  storehouses  are  full.  18.  The 
gods  are  kind.  19.  Susa  is  rich.  20.  Delphi  is  renowned.  21.  Anns  are 
hidden.  22.  The  funeral  is  magnificent.  23.  A  (pieen  is  the  unqiire. 
24.  W^ar  is  an  evil.     25.  Thebes  is  an  ally.     20.  Poverty  is  a  teacher. 


ADVERBS   OF    MANNER   AND    TIME. 


57 


27.  The  places  are  high.  28.  The  ground  is  sandy.  29.  The  words  are 
false.     30.  The  remedies  are  fit. 

B.  OiUECTiVE  Phrases.  31.  It  is  sacred  to  Minerva.  32.  I  am  de- 
sirous of  leisure.  33.  Thou  art  dear  to  the  gods,  O  queen!  34.  We  are 
ignorant  of  fate.  35.  It  is  contrarv  to  the  rules.  30.  Thev  are  devoted 
{(Ldit'ts)  to  studies.  37.  You  are  hostile  to  tyrants.  38.  She  is  envious 
of  rivals.  39.  Thou  art  full  of  courage,  O  Lucretia !  40. 1  (a  woman)  am 
thankful  to  the  physician.  41.  He  is  adverse  to  an  armistice.  42.  It  is 
contrary  to  duty.  43.  It  is  necessary  to  the  colonies.  44.  Thou  art 
ungrateful  to  the  ]irefect,  O  son !  45.  It  is  accej^table  {acceptus)  to  the 
people.     40.  We  an^  faithful  to  the  master. 

47.  Pecuni.T  cupidu.?.  48.  Invidia' plenus.  49.  PI ebej is  amicus.  50.  Dis 
sacer.  51.  Pra^fecto  diibium  est.  52.  Oraculi  ignarus  sum.  53.  Disci- 
])llna^  contrarium  est.  54.  Negotio  attenti  sumus,  55.  Siculis  cari  estis. 
5().  Patriciis  exitiosus  est.  57.  Belli  ignarus  est.  58.  liomilnis  ignomi- 
niosum  est.  59.  Concordia?  infesti  estis.  GO.  Fabio  ingrati  sunt.  01.  Pa- 
triae necessarius  es,  Poinjxli !  02.  S:evitia^  adversa  es.  regina  I  03.  Musis-, 
dediti  sumus.  04.  Deorum  invida  est.  05.  Incolis  cari  sunt.  GO.  Magis- 
tro  moiestum  est. 


LESSOX    XIV. 


ADVERBS   OF    MANNER   AND   TIME. 


§  06i  1.  Adverbs  denote  properties  of  actions,  as  qniete 
vivere,  to  live  quietly  ;  Sdepe  ecenit,  it  hajjpens  often.  They  are 
divided  into  five  elasses,  viz.  :   1.  adverbs  of  place,  2.  of  time,  3. 

MANXKR,  4.  IXTEXSITY,  5.  CAUSE. 

§  G^.  2.  Some  adverbs  arc  formed  according  to  certain  gen- 
eral RULES  by  way  of  inflection,  but  other  adverbs  are  of  an 
IRREGULAR  formation.  To  the  former  belong  most  adverbs  of 
MANNER,  to  the  latter  most  of  the  adverbs  of  time. 

Hem.  1.  In  the  English  language  adverbs  of  manner  generally  are 
formed  by  atfixing  the  ti'rmination  (y  to  adjectives. — In  this  lesson 
we  shall  consider  «mly  those  adverbs  of  manner^  which  are  formed 
from  MOVABLE  adjectives,  and  the  most  usual  adverbs  of  time. 

§  G8t  3.  The  movable  adjectives  (§  45)  form  adverbs  ot 
manner  by  adding  the  termination  e  to  their  declension-stems,  as  : 
jucnndus,  j^leasant — jucnnde,  pleasantlf/  /  i)ulcher,  beautiful — 
pnlchre,  beautifully  ;  liber, /'/-«^e — libere,  freely. 

They  are  formed  most  easily  by  removing  the  ending  i  of  the 


58 


ADVERBS   OF   MANNER   AND   TIME. 


grenitivo  sin.ir.,  and  substituting  for  it  tlie  adverbial  termination  e, 
as:  ae(jer,  G.  aegri — aegre ;  prosper,  G.  vro^peri—prospere. 

§  69.  EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  Bonus  irrcfridarlv  forms  htnc,  woll  ; 

2.  Some  adjectives  iorm  their  adverbs  by  the  termination  v,  the  most 
usual  of  which  are : 

certo,  certainly  manifesto,  manifistly  secreto,  secretly 

cito,  quickly  necessario,  neccxsarily  sedulo,  diligently 

crehro,  frequently  necopinato,  unexpectedly  sotIo,  seriously 

M»o,  falsely  i)CT\^etuo,  perpetually  subito,  suddenly 

ioTtwito,  accidentally  mro,  rarely  tuto,  sa fly. 

§   70.  4.  The  most  usual  adverbs  of  time  are  : 

adlmc,  still,  as  yet,  yet    mane,  early  in  the  morn-  quotannis,  yearly 


antea,  before 
eras,  to-morrow 
dill,  long,  a  long  time 
liodie.  to-day 
interdiu,  by  day 
interdum,  sometimes 
jam,  already 
jam  diu,  long  since 
hen,  yesterday. 


mg 
noctu,  hy  night 
nunc,  /tow 
nunquam,  never 
nu])er,  lately 
bWm,  formerly 
postea,  afterwards 


quotidie,  daily 

rursus,  again 

Rrjte,  often 

sem]>er,  always 

si  mill,  at  the  same  time 

statim,  directly 

tum  (tunc),  then 


postridie,  on  the  next  day  unquam,  ecer 
pridie,  the  day  before 


§  71,  5.  Adverbs  of  manner  and  time  are  indeclinable  (§  3), 
although  the  former  are  formed  by  means  of  inflection  from 
adjectives.  They  are  governed  by  verbs,  and  are  considered  as 
their  objects,  forming  objective  phrases  with  them.  Adverbs, 
like  other  objects,  generally  jwecede  their  governing  verljs,  as  : 
Beate  vivere,  to  live  happilg;  statim  redire,  to  return  directlt/; 
semper  errat,  he  always  errs. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives,  especially  predicative  adjectives  witli  the  copula, 
may  be  the  governing  'words  of  adverijs,  as:  Semper  pardtus, 
alwavs  readv;  j(ini  propinqui  .v////^  they  are  near  already;  saepe 
irati'estis,  you  often  are  angry.  But  adjectives  generally  cannot  be 
the  governing  words  of  adverbs  of  manner. 

EXEJRCISES. 
1. 

1.  Absurde  a^itis.  2.  Falso  accus.ltis.  3.  Immodice  bibis.  4.  Piilchre 
cnnit.  5.  J'erspicue  cernimus.  6.  Assidue  colimus.  7.  Cupide  consu- 
munt.    8.  Furiose  contradicit.     9.  Accurate  describis.     10.  CJloridse  de- 


TIIE   SUBJECT-INFINITIVE. 


59 


cedere.  11.  Manifesto  decipiunt.  12.  Egregie  distinguunt.  13.  Subito 
fugiunt  14.  Male  legis.  15.  Caute  procedo.  10.  Diserte  defendis.  17. 
Strenue  resistinms.  18.  Adhuc  vivit.  19.  Hodie  abeunt.  20.  Interdiu 
dormio.  21.  Interdum  •dissentimus.  22.  Jam  intelligimus.  23.  Mane 
Burgitis.  24.  Noctu  advenitis.  2~).  Nunc  desipis.  26.  Nunquam 
impedis.  27.  Kursus  recedis.  28.  Semper  diffldit.  29.  Quotidie  pave- 
tis.  30.  S.e})e  i)ecx!anms.  31.  Adhuc  iniilta  est.  32.  Interdiu  otiosi 
sumus.     33.  Interdum  ivgroti  sunt.     34.  Nunquam  justum  est. 

1.  lie  builds  magnificently.  2.  We  approacli  cautiously.  3.  They 
think  accurately.  4.  He  pardons  freely.  5.  We  openly  condemn.  6.* 
'J'liey  deliberate*  a  long  time.  7.  They  desire  immoderately.  8.  Thou 
decidest  unjustly.  9.  Sometimes  you  err.  10.  We  daily  expect.  11. 
Thou  dwelicst  Veil.  12.  We  examine  actively  (sedulus).  13.  You 
watch  by  niglit.  14.  We  listen  (audlre)  attentively.  15.  He  answers 
kindly.  10.  They  }>lunder  eagerly.  17.  She  i)leads  eloquently.  18. 
Thou  teachest  excellently.  19.  Vou  falsely  assert  (affirmdre).  20.  They 
fight  furiously.  21.  ThVy  generously  confide.  22.  You  arrive  unex- 
l»ectedly.  23.*  He  lauirl is  immoderately.  24.  They  necessarily  perish. 
2").  Th'ou  yieldt'St  quickly.  2(i.  I  labor  actively  [inipiger).  27.  They 
advance  wonderfully.  28.*  They  return  to-day.  29.  I  always  obey.  30. 
'J'hou  oftt'u  art  unii:ratefiil,  O  dauirhterl  31.  They  go  directly  away.  32. 
Thou  still  art  angry,  ()  queen  !  33.  You  lany-nish  already.  34.  We  are 
now  contented.  35.  You  never  are  contented,  O  women !  30.  They 
a^^vmhV' (c<mrcnire)  yearly.  37.  You  are  sometimes  unpleasant.  38.  We 
are  always  ready.     39.  They  secretly  fall  otf.     40.  They  are  now  for 

sale. 

2. 

1.  Modesto  dissuadeo.  2.  Tutrt  latent.  3.  Diserte  persuadetis.  4. 
Immodice  succenses.  5.  Tarde  fiuitis.  0.  Serio  vituperamus.  7.  Beate 
regnas.  8.  Pubiice  refutamus.  9.  Sedulo  oi)i)ugiiatis.  10.  Nunquam 
festlnas.  11.  Secreto  conjurant.  12.  Falso  declaras.  13.  Inepte  diju- 
dicat.  14.  Semper  a^qui  estis.  15.  Interdum  severa  est.  10.  Adhuc 
imnmtati  sumus. 

1.  You  praise  immoderately.  2.  He  contradicts  timidly.  3.  They 
advance  slowJy.  4.  We  zealously  defend.  5.  They  return  by  night. 
0.  I  rarely  enter.  7.  Tliey  cross  Imiuently.  8.  He  rebukes  severely. 
9.  He  quietly  ceases.  10.  They  esca])e  perfidiously.  11.  We  live 
obscurely.  12.  You  relate  well.  13.  They  pi^rish  abominably.  14. 
Thou  ])unishest  unjustly.  15.  Thou  art  elo(iiient  today.  16.  He 
always  is  obscui-e.     i7.  Thou  art  again  unjust,  O  queen  ! 


LESSON   XV. 

THE  SUBJECT-IXFIXITIVE. 

§  7*2.   1.  The  Latin  Infi.nitives  occur  in  three  different  rela- 
tions: ].  as  SUBJECT,  2.  as  object,  3.  as  predicate.     According 


60 


THE   SUBJECT-INFINITIVE. 


Tn^    SCBJECT-INFINITIVE. 


61 


to  these  relations  they  are  called  subject-iiifiuitive,  oVyect-iiifiniMye 
and  predicate-mlinitive. 

Rem.  1.  The  rKKDTCATE-TNFiNrnvE  occurs  only  in  the  case  of  the 
li'idoricdl  iiifuiitlit',  and  in  the  construction  of  the  arcffiatirr  icit/t  t/t6 
iiijinitke.  These  constructions  will  he  considered  at  their  proper 
places.  The  ohjkct-infinitive  will  he  considered  in  the  ntxt 
lesson.  In  the  present  lesson  the  suiuect-infinitive  is  explained, 
that  is :  the  infinitive  as  suiJJECT  in  a  predicative  phrase. 

§  7  J{.  2.  The  proper  form  of  the  subject  is  tlie  substantive  (that 
is  a  NOUN  or  pronoun).  See  §  19.  Predicates,  which  have  sub- 
stantives, either  expressed  or  understood,  for  subjects,  arc  called 

liei'fi^oiial  |>rcdii'ateji». 

Rem.  2.  Thus  the  phrases  '*  the  sun  fiJiinfst"  "lie  xlines"  are  pebsonal, 
both  having  substantives  as  suhjects.  The  liUtin  predicates  <nno, 
niDUS,  <nn(it,  dr.,  where  the  suhjects  (/,  thou,  he)  are  undivdood,  are 
PERSONAL  i)redicates. 

§  71.  '^.  Predicates,  whose  subjects  are  not  substantivks, 
expressed  or  understood,  are  called  illiperiiiOIial  l>re<li- 
catc!^.     They  are  of  three  kinds  : 

(I.  Either  they  have  no  subject  at  all,  as  tvnat,  it  thunders  ; 
plult,  it  rains; 

b.  Or  tlieir  subject  is  an  infinitive  ; 

c.  Or  tliey  have  a  dependent  sentence  as  subject. 

Predicative  ])hrases,  which  are  formed  by  an  infinitive  as  sub- 
ject, are  called  iiai|>n>oiiai  predicaf ive  |>lira»es>, 
as  3Ianere  licet,  it  is  allowed  to  remain. 

Rem.  o.  The  ri'gular  form  of  the  inii>ersonal  predicate  in  English  is  the 
tldrd  person  singnkir,  connected  witli  the  inii)ersonal  ])ronoun  "  <Y." 
The  subject-infinitive  in  this  case  stands  after  the  pr«'dicate.  I'mt 
sometimes  the  pronoun  it  is  omitted,  and  then  tlu^  infinitive  y;/t- 
ceilea  the  predicatt\,  as  :  Jt  is  use/at  to  hdrn,  or  to  Udrii  is  uxepil. 

Rem.  4.  We  consider  here  only  the  case,  when  the  imi)ersonal  predicate 
has  an  infinitive  as  suhject.  Those  impersonal  predicates,  which 
re(jnire  dependent  sentences  for  subjects,  will  he  explained  in  the  second 
Part  (p.  609  foil.). 

§  7«5,  4.  Impei'sonal  predicates  in  Latin  are  either  verbs,  or 
predicative  adjectives  or  nouns  with  the  coj)ula.  In  the  former 
instance  the  verb,  and  in  the  latter  the  copula  stands  in  the  third 
person  singular.  The  predicative  adjective  or  noun  is  in  the 
nominative    singular,  and    the    adjective  always  in  the  neuteb 


.•I 
■i 


GENDER      The  sul)ject-inrinitive  regularly /^recefZes  its  impersonal 

predicate,  as  : 

AmhuJare   conduclt,.  it   is  serviceable  to  walk    (to   walk   is 

serviceable); 

laborare  decorum  est,  it  is  honorable  to  w^ork; 
rebel/are  i)ijiiria  est,  it  is  a  wrong  to  rebel. 
§   70.   5.  The  number  of  verbs,  which  may  be  used  as  imper- 
Foiial  predicates,  is  limited  in  Latin,  and  by  far  not  so  large  as  in 
English.     The  following  of  them  take  an  infinitive  as  subject: 
ConduHt,  it  is  serviceable  Ubet,  it  pleases 

decet,  it  becomes,  is  becoming  licet,  it  is  allowed 

displicet,  it  displeases  placet,  it  pleases 

expeditl  it  is  expedient  praestat,  it  is  preferable, 

jucat,  it  delights,  it  is  delightful  it  is  better, 

and  sometimes  prodest,  it  is  useful,  and  nocet,  it  is  injurious. 

§  77.  6.  But  PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVES  ai'c  vcTy  frcqucutly  used 
as  hupersoiud  predicates  in  Latin,  and  their  use  agrees  with  that 
of  the  English  language,  as  :  decorum  ed,  it  is  honorable  -,  aeqwam 
est,  it  is  fair  ;  Jiisfum  ed,  it  is  just  ;  cjenerdsum  est,  it  is  gener- 
ous ;  jncundum  est,  it  is  pleasant,  &c. 

Here  belong  the  indeclinable  neuter  adjectives  necesse  (neces- 
sary) and' .<^a//.s  (enough,  sufficient),  which  in  connection  with  the 
copula  frecpiently  occur  as  impersonal  predicates,  as:  Cedere 
necesse  est,  it  is  necessary  to  yield  ;  obedire  satis  est,  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  obev. 

§  78.  7.  The  jnibject-intinitlvc  may  consist  of  a  predicative  ad- 
jective or  noun  with  the  inhnitive  of  the  copula.  Such  adjectives 
or  nouns  always  must  be  placed  in  the  accusative  singular, 
and  the  adjectives  in  the  masculine  gender,  as  :  Otiosum  esse 
licet,  it  is  allowed  to  be  idle  ;  poetam  esse  jumt,  it  is  delightful 

to  be  a  ]K)et. 

Rem.  5.  For  an  explanation  of  this  construction  sec  the  ACcrsATivE 
^v^nr  tiif  infinitive.  The  bednner  should  be  careful,  not  to 
nu>take  this  accusative  of  the  masculine  for  a  neuter  Nomina- 

Rem  0    From  this  reason  predicative^  adjective  with  the  infinitive    of 
the   copula,  when    they  are   merely  quoted   as  such  without  their 
connection  with  the  sentence,  are  placed  in  the  ACCUSATIVE  SINGU 
LAU  OF  THE  MASCULINE  GENDER,  aa :    tgenum  esse,  to   be  poor 
disertum  esse,  to  be  eloquent. 


62 


THE   OBJECT-INFINITIYE. 


1  EXERCISES. 

Commit  the  inceptive  verbs.  Vocabularies  Xlfl,  B. 

I, 

1.  Iprnoscere  conducit.  2.  Parcrn^  dccct.  3.  Qiiifsccro  cxpedit.  4. 
Vinrere  j uvat.  5.  Vivere  licet.  0.  Kcconoilinro  ])laret.  7.  Obire  pnrstat. 
8.  Ediscere  ])rod('st.  9.  Cedere  a-quura  est.  10.  Ke^nare  ardiiuin  est. 
11.  C'ondonfire  boni^num  est.  12.  Tacere  cautuni  est.  l;3.  Rebellare 
exitiosiini  est.  14.  Errare  liumiTnuiii  est.  15.  Fugere  iK'cesse  est.  10. 
I'roiuittrre  satis  est.  IT.  Honest um  esse  prastat.  18.  Modera turn  esse 
conducit.     11).  Doctuni  i-sse  iuvat.     20.  Inirratuiu  esse  nfx;et. 

1.  It  is  serviceable  to  obey.  2.  It  is  injurious  to  slander.  8.  It  is  use- 
ful to  aduK^nish.  4.  It  is  becoming  to  l>lu.sli.  5.  It  is  expedient  to  pre- 
l)are.  0.  It  is  better  to  beware.  7.  It  is  deliglitful  to  })ardon.  8.  It 
J)! eases  to  rest.  1).  It  is  allowed  to  ceiisun'.  10.  It  is  absurd  to  secede. 
11.  It  is  a  crinu;  to  bribe.  12.  It  is  unpleasant  to  grow  old.  13.  It  is 
])lt'asant  to  grow.  14.  It  is  mean  to  deceive.  15.  It  is  honorable  to  de- 
fend. 1().  It  is  disgraceful  to  tiee.  17.  It  is  a  play  {hid >(.'<)  to  learn.  18. 
It  is  a  follv  to  contradict,  li).  It  is  necessarv  to  inij)lore.  20.  It  is  sutii- 
cient  to  dissuade.  21.  It  is  serviceable  to  be  i»olite.  22.  It  is  b«'coniing 
to  be  modest.  23.  It  is  better  to  be  idle.  24.  It  delights  to  be  safe. 
25.  To  plunder  is  criminal.     20.  To  be  a  jdrate  is  dangerous. 

2. 

1.  Desciscerc  pernicidsum  est.  2.  Differre  molestum  est.  3.  Valere 
jucundum  est.  4.  Procedere  necesse  est.  5.  0}>i»rimere  injustum  est. 
0.  Debellare  Indus  est.  7.  Flere  medeclna  est.  8.  Ubtrectare  injuria 
est.  9.  Tardum  esse  nocet.  10.  Immundum  esse  displicet.  11.  Obscii- 
rum  esse  ])rapstat.  12.  Pro])in(iuum  esse  exi)edit.  13.  Parcum  esse  licet. 
14.  Quietum  esse  decet. 

1.  It  is  better  to  endure.  2.  It  is  allowed  to  rejoice.  3.  It  is  becom- 
ing to  refute.  4.  It  ])Ieases  to  persevere.  5.  It  dis[)leases  to  scold.  6. 
It  delights  to  triumph.  7.  To  i)ardon  is  divine.  8.  To  devastate  is 
cruel.  9.  It  is  agreeable  to  oblige.  10.  To  contradict  is  an  arrogance. 
11.  To  commit  cruelties  is  a  sin.  12  To  praise  is  a  spur.  13.  To  learn 
])y  heart  is  a  play.  14.  It  is  necessary  to  die.  15.  It  is  unpleasant  tc 
be  a  prisoner.  10.  It  is  honorable  to  be  a  farmer.  17.  It  is  i)ref»'rable 
to  be  a  sailor.  18.  It  displeases  to  be  envious.  19.  To  be  cautious  is 
expedient. 


LESSON   XVI. 

THE    OBJIXT-INFINITIYE. 

§  70.  1.  Certain  verbs,  which  express  an  incomplete  action, 
govern  an  infinitive  as  object,  which  is  called  ol>ject-ill- 
fiiiitive.  as : 


THE    OBJECT-INFINITIVE. 


63 


Jre  volo  I  will  go.  3Ianere  debes,  thou  must  remain,  Venire 
,,o^•s/  he  can  come.  TnMigere  incipimus,  we  begin  to  under- 
slaml.'  Di.ivdare  .o/5/^s, -you  are  wont  to  dispute.  Convalescere 
ncnucunt,  they  cannot  recover. 

The  ol)ject-infinitlve,  like    the   substantive-object,  precedes  its 

iroverning  verb.  , 

§  80.  2.  The  following  classes  of  Latin  verbs  govern  an  ob- 

icct-iHlinitive  : 
a.  Verbs  of  ability,  duty  and  habit,  as  posse,  neqmre,  scire, 

ncscire,  discere,  debere,  solere  ; 

h  Verbs  of  intention,  determination,  wish,  fear  and  their 
contraries,  as  velle,  nolle,  malle,  audere,  to  dare,  studere,  to  try, 
varare  to  prepare,  statuere  and  decernere,  to  resolve,  recusare,  to 
refuse,  \tipeve,  to  wish,  cogitare,  to  contemplate,  timere,  to  be 

'^  'cN'erbs  of  beginni'no,  continuing  and  ceasing,  as  iyicipere, 
to  lieoin,  properdre,  to  hasten,  pergere,  to  continue,  omittere  to 
om^^desincre,  to  cease,  dedstere,  to  desist,  ncgllgere,  to  neglect. 

Kem.  1.  Regarding  the  signification  of  these  verbs  the  following  points 
must  be  noticed :  .       •  ?. 

1     Veile  is  rendered  bv  to  intend,  to  be  wUling,  to  propose,  to  wish 
1.  yae  i^  ^^^^'^       ,  •  ^        person  of  both,  singular  and  plural, 

^*ft™  ;r;  mted  L-  "/,'t«?rS."  *«  second  Ind  tl.ird  persons 
of  ,hs  En"auxiliary  being  used  for  expressing  the  FCTCM 

to  to  awav.     Gdere  mdtis,  you  are  willing  to  jneld.    Manere 

o"''V!«l'a.[n''"«e   are   sinularly   rendered   by  "wiU   not,   mil 
r;  ^.,Z  ?,,,    first  ,>erson  sin-ular  and   plural,  and   m   general 

tcinh  either,  to P^'fi^"     ,       ^  ,         «,,.  if  ^  has  a  substantive 
J^S^^:!:::£:^t;::^M^^a:,tepo,.re,  but  by  malle,  if 

"'  '^^Z  11^;""'^«";»«  pr.eferir,^u.  or  antcponimu.  ;  but 

.  ^''^""deW  i":  ;"/;£■  i:".:^t.^,  to  l,e  .ont,  to  VM  (with 
„n'i,;r;tuiveX-''orr  "'^  be  i«  t"e  mur  followed  byo/w.th  a 
verbal  noun  in  "'f ;  f  •  .^^^„„„„,„,)  ,„  ^  ,„en,.     Amhullre sol.o  I  am 

■;'  ;ii;tbit';i   walk^'nl?"  J/«»^-e'.o/.7.«<  (ImperiectJ,  ho  used  to  re- 

main. 


64: 


THE   OBJECT-IXFIXITIVE. 


Often  the  verb  sole  re  is  rendered  by  one  of  the  adverbs  grnernUy 
miudly,  co/)n//o}i/f/,  in  wliidi  cnse  the  Latin  infinitive  miist  be  ex-' 
pressed  by  an  English  finitt^  verb,  as: 

Abease  solenius,  we  usually  are  absent.  licslxUre  sohiit,  they 
generally  resist. 

4.  Verbs  of  be.irinninf}:,  continuincr  and  ceasing  in  Englisli  often 
are  construed  with  the  verbal  noun  in  in;/,  whicli  in  th«' verb  ^o 
desist  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  from.  To  this  answers  the 
mere  Latin  infinitive,  as  : 

They  continue  fighting,  jvif/mlre  j^crf/^'nt.  AVe  cease  Avritinn-, 
seribere  (leKhiiiiitis.     He  desists  from   l)unisljing,  ;;//// ?/v;  desiatit. 

5.  The  English  verbs  to  knoir  and  not  to  l,ni>ic  are  construed  with 
an  interrogativi;  clause,  introduced  by  "  hoir,"  corresponding  to  the 
mere  Latin  infinitive,  as  : 

Thou  knowcft  how  to  ride,  cquitare  scis.  He  does  not  know  liow 
to  answer,  responds  re  iieseit. 

^r°  Notice,  that  Ww  Kn-Iish  vorb  ''to  d,r  n^  a  tiu-re  aixiliaky.  that  N  if  c.»n- 
necti-d  with  tlu-  iiitiMitivtM)f  anotiior  verb,  caiujot  be  t-xpiv.-sc»!  in  L:itiii,as:  1  do  not 
wish,  nolo  ;  1  d,,  not  kiu)\v,  uexcio. 

0.  The  English  equivalent  of  timere,  to  he  afraid,  is  construed 
w^ith  the  preposition  <f  and  the  verbal  noun  in  iiuj,  as:  Voilre 
timet,  he  is  afraid  of  coniincr. 

§  81.  .'].  AVhcii  tlie  object-iiifmitive  consists  of  a  predicative 
adjective  or  noun  with  the  copula,  the  iioim  and  adjective  take 
the  CASE  and  xiMnKii,  and  if  they  are  niovaljks  also  the  gender 
of  the  SUBJECT,  as  : 

Tardus  rsse  solet,  he  is  wont  to  be  slow.  Scveri  e.^se  jjo.-^su^ 
mus,  we  can  be  strict.  Arnica  esf^e  nrquit,  she  cannot  be  a 
friend.     Ja.'<ta  raxe  cnpir),  I  (a  woman)  wish  to  be  just. 

§  8tJ.  4.  The  verljs  y;o^•8 ',  nequlre,  solere,  debere,  incipere 
and  desinere  sonietiincs  are  used  impersonally  with  object-iiifini- 
tives,  formed  from  impersonal  predicates  (§  74),  as  : 

Tunan;  incipit,  it  begins  thundering,  plucre  so/rt,  it  usually 
rains,  coTiducere  imteM,  it  can  be  serviccalile,  cxpedlre  nequit,  it 
cannot  be  expc^dient,  mole.<tum  esse  debet,  it  must  be  nni>leasant. 

OBSERVATioy.-This  is  one  of  tho  two  ca«^es.  wliore  impersonal  vorbs  are  nlao.-.l  in  the 
INFIN-ITIVB  li.^M.inc.rs  sh.>ul,l  not  f,e  in.luce.l,  to  take  such  iu.per.onal  obi  ■  'l-i  flni! 
tives  lor  buhject-intinitives.     See  §  05.  "   '"U'«-rsonai  oojiU  nmni- 


EXEliClSKS. 
1. 

1.  Cedere  debeo.  2.  Simulare  discis.  0.  Tac-re  i)ot<  et.  4  Parere 
voumus.  5.  Negliirere  nolunius.  (1.  Credere  n  .n  vuJiig.  7  Taef-ro 
nolunt.     b.    Debellare  malumus.     9.    Repugnare  audeo.     10.    Proticere 


THE   OBJECT-INFINITIVE. 


65 


studes.  n.  Obi  re  parat.  13.  Dimiciire  statuimus.  13.  Secedere 
decernitis.  14.  Ediscere  cupiunt.  15.  Confidere  timeo.  16.  Advenire 
])roperat.  17.  Intelligere  incipiunt.  18.  Diripere  pergis.  19.  Servire 
(lesiniinus.  20.  Contradicere  soles.  21.  Desipere  soletis.  22.  Vitupe- 
ran;  desistit.  2o.  Pugniire  scis.  24.  Probare  nesciunt.  25.  Kesistere 
neciur.unt.  20.  Severus  esse  ])otest.  27.  Invida  esse  nequit.  28. 
Moderilti  esse  soletis.  29.  Liberi  esse  discunt.  30.  Serv^a?  esse 
nolunt.  31.  Cienerosus  esse  volo.  32.  Saevi  esse  inci[)iunt.  33.  Maesti 
esse  desinitis.  34.  Propinrpia  esse  cupit.  35.  Tonare  desinit.  30. 
Priestare  debet.     37,  Licere  solet.     38.  Jucunduni  esse  nequit. 

1.  I  cannot  discern.  2.  They  can  pardon.  3.  He  knows  how  to  act. 
4.  He  d<x's  not  know  how  to  teach.  5.  We  learn  to  obev.  6.  You  must 
rest.  7.  I  am  wont  to  be  on  my  guard.  8.  He  is  in  the  habit  of  dis- 
])uting.  9.  We  usually  hasten.  10.  I  will  remain.  ]1.  Thou  art  will- 
ing  to  ap})roach.  12.  He  intends  to  escape.  13.  We  will  not  open  the 
mouth.     14.  You  are  unwilling  to  forgive.     15.  I  will  rather  go  away. 

10.  They  prefer  to  perish.  17.  They  dare  to  come  forth.  18.  I  try  to 
give  satisfaction.  19.  Wc  i)repare  to  cross.  20.  They  resolve  to 
secede.  21.  You  refuse  to  assist.  22.  They  wish  to  return.  23.  He 
is  afraid  of  consenting.  24.  1  begin  to  advance  {in  knowledge). 
25.  They  continue  plundering.  20.  He  ceases  digging.  27.  He 
desists  from  slandering.  28.  We  hasten  to  plough.  29.  We 
neglect  watcliing.  30.  They  cannot  be  accurate.  31.  You  can  be 
el  Hjuent.  32.  Thou  knowest  how  to  be  ambiguous,  O  queen!  33. 
You  ilo  not  know  how  to  be  attentive,  0  daughters!  34.  She  learns  to 
be  envious.  35.  Thou  must  be  firm,  O  son !  30.  I  am  wont  to  be 
contented.  37.  Thou  refusest  to  be  a  com'panion,  O  Cornelia!  38. 
Thou  art  willinii:  to  be  a  slave,  O  Rome!  39.  Tliev  befr^n  to  be  tvrants. 
40.  They  cease  to  be  pirates.  41.  You  continue  being  prisoners.  42. 
It  generally  j)leases.  43.  It  must  displease.  44.  It  ceases  ^snowing. 
45.  It  begins  -lightening.  40.  It  must  be  disgraceful.  47.  It  can  be 
just. 

1.  Debellare  potestis.  2.  Appropinquiire  nequeunt.  3.  Dijudicara 
scitis.  4.  Probare  nescis.  5.  Natiire  discit.  0.  t]rrare  soletis.  7. 
Indulgere  debetis.  8.  Fallere  nolumus.  9.  Redlre  volo.  10.  Latere 
nuivultis.  11.  Contradicere  timent.  12.  Lacessore  incipiunt.  13. 
Desipere  pergit.  14.  Vastilre  desist unt.  15.  Arbitri  esse  cupiunt.  10. 
Captiva  esse  non  vult.  17.  ^Egrotus  esse  solet.  18.  Fida  esse  mavult. 
19.  Firmi  esse  volumus.  20.  (ilenerosus  esse  nequis.  21.  Ingrata  esse 
ptTgis.  22.  Tyrannus  esse  audet.  23.  Amici  esse  desinunt.  24.  Ful- 
gurare  solet.  25.  ^Grandinare  incipit.  20.  Displicere  potest.  27. 
I'ericuldsum  esse  solet. 

1.  They  usually  approve.  2.  We  begin  to  despair.  3.  Thou  darest 
to  open  the  mouth.  4.  We  wiU  not  mourn.  5.'  You  contem])late  to 
tiighten.  0.  He  resolves  to  retreat.  7.  We  are  afraid  of  entering.  8. 
They  desist  from  disturbing.     9.  I  wish  to  sleep.     10.  Thou  must  eat 

11.  They  cannot  understand.     12.  We  refuse  to  believe.     13.  We  knov? 


*It  snows,  ningit. 


i^It  W^hX.Qn'i.fulgurat. 


8  Grandinat,  it  hails. 


66 


COMBINATION    OF   PHRASES   IN    GENERAL. 


liow  to  wucre  war.  14.  lie  br'S^ins  to  tliink.  I"».  Thou  tricst  to  conquor. 
1(1.  You  learn  to  fight.  IT.  He  coiitiuues  rciirninir.  IS.  We  ceas(^  to 
pTSuade.  1J>.  Tliev  hasten  to  arrive.  20.  Tliey  cannot  be  moderate. 
21.  Wv  ])ro])ose  to'be  free.  22.  He  is  afraid  of  beini,^  a  nienil)er  of  the 
eonimittee  of  ten.  2:J.  She  refu.^es  to  be  an  assistant.  24.  You^  are 
lunvillinir  to  be  slaves.  2.").  They  continue  brin^r  prodi^^al.  2().  Thou 
canst  be  kind.  27.  She  wishes  to  be  a  (lueen.  28.  You  cease  to  be 
contented.  21).  We  prefer  to  be  free.  30.  She  cannot  be  wretclied.  31. 
It  usuallv  hails.     32.  It  can  be  useful.     33.  It  is  generally  sutiicient. 


LESSON   XVII. 

COXXECTIOX    OF    PHRASES    IX    GENERAL,    AND 
COMBINATION  OE  ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

§  851.  I.  Phrases  are  counocted  with  each  other  either  by 
coorclinatioii  or  V)y  coiiibiiiatioii.  The  former  is 
the  counection  of  phrases  by  conjunctions,  as  :  Prarfectus  et  poeta 
adveniunt,  the  prefect  and  the  poet  arrive;  wjuriam  et  contu- 
tneliam  toleramus,  we  endure  injury  and  disgrace.  The  latter  is 
a  connection,  formed  by  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  as: 
Amico  jyecumam  dare,  to  give  money  to  a  friend. 

§  841.  2.  Two  given  jdirases,  whicli  have  one  word  in  com- 
mon, are  combined  with  each  other  by  dropping  the  common 
w^ord  in  one  of  the  phrases,  and  introducing  the  whole  other 
phrase  in  its  place. 

ILL  VSTRATION:  Let  the  following  two  phrases  be  given  : 

1.  PiiKDiCATiVE  PiiKASES :  The  slave  escapes,  servus  effugit ; 

2.  Attiiibutive  purases  :  The  slave  of  O^njus,  Gaji  servus. 

Here  we  drop  the  common  word  slave  (servus)  in  the  ])redicative 
phrase,  and  introduce  in  its  place  the  whole  attrihutive  phrase  "  tlie 
slare  of  G'fjus."  Thus  the  combined  phrase  will  read  in  English : 
"  The  slave  of  Oajus  escapes^'  and  in  Latin  :  "  Oaji  servus  effugit." 

§  8ti.  3.  The  two  phrases,  of  which  a  combined  plirase  con- 
sists, either  have  the  same  governing  word,  or  the  governing 
word  in  the  one  phrase  is  at  the  same  time  the  dependent  word 
in  the  other  (st'C  the  examples  in  Rem.  1).  In  the  latter  case 
that  phrase,  whose  governing  word  is  the  depeudent  word  Id 


COMBINATION    OF   ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 


67 


the  otlier  ])hra-e,  is  called  the  flciieiicleilt,  and  the  other  the 

;;!:o%eriiiii^  |ilira<!ie. 

Rem.  1.  The  followini:^  combined  phrases  are  composed  of  phrases  with 
the  same  governini^  words  : 

a.  The  sons  of  Gajus  sleep,  Oaji  flu  dormiunt  (the  sons  of  Gajus, 
and  the  sons  sleej)). 

h.  A.  renownetl  colony  of  Corinth,  dara  Corinthi  colonia  (a 
renowned  colony,  aitd  a.  colony  of  Corinth). 

c.  He  delivers  th(;  town  to  the  Romans,  oppidum  Romanis  tradlt 
(he  delivers  the  town,  and  he  delivers  to  the  Romans). 

But  the  following  combined  phrases  consist  of  a  GOVERNING  and 
DEPENDENT  j)hrase : 

a.  The  Persians  plunder  the  town,  Persae  oppidum  diripiunt  (the 
Pereians  i)lunder,  and  ])]under  the  town). 

h.  Thou  canst  conquer  the  Romans,  Romanos  devincere  potes 
(governing  phrase  :  devincere  potes  ;  dependent  phrase:  Roma- 
nos devincere). 

§  SO.  4.  In  order  to  combine  two  given  phrases,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  know,  tvhicJi  of  the  two  phrases  must  be  substituted  for 
the  common  word  in  the  other.  This  is  determined  by  the  follow- 
ing two  j)rinciples  : 

a.  If  the  two  given  phrases  consist  of  a  dependent  and  of  a 
governing  phrase,  the  dependent  phrase  always  is  substituted  for 
the  common  word  in  the  governing  phrase. 

b.  If  both  })lH*ases  have  the  .<'ame  governing  word,  the  order  of 
substitution  is  determined  by  the  nature  of  the  two  phrases. 

Rem.  2.  The  followinir  rules  and  examples  illustrate  these  principles. 
Tlius  the  ])rinciple  (a)  is  api)lie(l  in  i^  89,  91,  94,  while  jmnciple  (b) 
is  applied  iu  j^  92,  99,  100.  In  many  instances  the  order  of  words 
in  the  combined  i)hrases  is  the  same,  whatever  mode  of  substitution 
may  be  ap|)lied.  But  often  the  strict  adherence  to  the  rules,  laid 
down  in  tlu^  following  sections,  is  essential  for  a  correct  arrangement 
of  the  combined  [)hrases. 


COMBIXATIOX  OF  ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

§  ^7.  5.  Attributive  phrases  may  be  combined,  1.  With  pre- 
dicative, 2.  With  objective,  3.  Witli  other  attributive  phrases. 

§  88.  6.  If  attributive  are  combined  with  predicative 
phrases,  the  governing  word  of  the  attribute  either  is  the  sub- 
ject, or  a  predicative  noun.     In  both  instances  the  attributive 


68 


COMBINATION   OF   ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASES. 


phrase  is  substituted  for   tlie   common  word   in   the   prepicativh 

plirase,  as: 

A.   a.  GIVEN  phrase:^:  ^       ^.^..,    ^     . 

PiiEDRATiVK  :  The  sons  play,  jiht  Imlnnt , 
ATTKim  tivk:  tlio  sons  of  the  farmer,  (Kjrtrolaeplu. 
h    COMIjIN  {TKJN:  Bv  substituliui;  tlu'  attributive  phrase 
''lajricolac  Jilir''   for    the  coiunioii  word,  the    subject 
filii  in  the  i>retlic{«tiv«'  phrase  '\filii  luilu/it" : 

A;;i-irolsr  filii  liuliuit,  the  aons  of  the  farmer 
jdtt//. 

B    a    GIVEN  PHRASES: 

PiiKDic.vnvE  :  Friendship  is  rare,  nr//?ir*;i^«  ra?'a  €«C; 

Attiukitivk  :  True  friendship,  (tmicitia  rem. 
b    COMBINATION,    bv  substituting   the   attributive   i)hraso 
''amk'ltin  cera''  for  tlie  common  word 'imicitid  in  the 
predicative  ]>hrase  '' nini'ifii  ninfrsf":  ^ 

Amirilia  vera  rikriiv.^U(ttruefn€nd8/tii)ii 

a  a.  GIVEN  PIIRASES:  ^  .     ^;.        ,. 

PUKDICATIVE  :  CJajus  IS  a  son,  GnjKRJilius  est, 

ATTHiiiiTiVH:  A  Mm  of  Sejus,  S(jijili"''<; 

h    COMBIXATION,  bv  eubstitutini::    the    attributive    phrase 

">'•>  ^H>is'  for'the  common  wonl,  tlie  predicative  noun 

/?////.«,' in  the  predicative  phrasi;  "  (;r(y'/.«* ///'/«  est'' \ 

D    a    GIVEN  PUllASHS: 

PiiEDU  ativk:  Vir.iiil  is  a  poet,  Vu'fjdiHS  poeta  est ; 
Atthiul'TIVE:  A  renewed  {yoat,  poctn  elarus. 
h    COMBINATION,  by  substituting   the  attributive  phrase 
''poeta  clariiH'''  iov  the  predicative  noun  pot7<i  in  the 
phrase  '*  Vi rqVius  pot'f^/  r.v/"  : 
%'ir^iliii*»  8>octa  t^-lariis  est,  VirgU  is  a  re- 
noLCiied  jioet. 

S  89.  "I.  If  an  attrilmtive  phrase  is  to  be  coml)ined  with  an 
objective  phrase,  two  cases  must  be  distinguished: 

1st  case:  If  the  attributive  phrase  is  tlie  depemknt,  and  the 
objective  the  governing  phrase,  which  always  is  tlie  case,  when 
the  common  word  is  a  xorx,  the  attributive  phr me  is  substituted 
for  the  common  ivord  in  the.  objective  phrase  (see  §  86,  a),  as: 

A.  a.  GIVEN  PIIRASES: 

OnJECTivE:  To  devastate  the  lands,  rigros  vnstnrej 
Attributive:    the    lands    of   the   tJauls,    GaUdrum 
o'/ros. 
h    COMBINATION,  by  substituting   the   attributive   phrase 
"  Gallorum  agios"  for  the  common  word  agros  in  the 
objective  phrase  '' agrus  uistare  "  : 


COMBINATION   OF   ATTRIBUTIVE   PIIRASES. 


69 


O  alio  I'll  111   a;;ros  vastare,  to  devastate  tM 
IciiiLfi  of  the  Gauls. 

B.  a.  GIVEN  PIIRASES: 

Ub,jective  :  To  despise  a  man,  virum  despicere  ; 
ATTianuTiVE:  a  treacherous  man,  xirain  perfidum. 
b.  COMBINATION,  by  substituting   the   attributive   phrase 
*'  cirufn  perjiduui"  for  the  common  word  drum  in  the 
objective  ])hrase  "  rirff/i/  d( spicere"  : 
Vii'iiiii   perlitliiiii    €le»|»iccre,  to  despise  a 
tre((cheroas  num. 

C.  a.  GIVEN  PHRAS'ES : 

Objective:  To  be  hostile  to  the  allies,  sociis  infestum 
es,se  ; 

Attributive  :  to  the  allies  of  the  Romans,  Romano- 
ram  sociis. 
b.   CO  Ml3 1  NATION,  by  substituting   the   attributive   phrase 
''  Rimianornia  sociis"  for  the  common  word  sociis  in 
tlie  objective  phrase  "  so('iif<  in f  stum  cf<se"  : 
Koiiiaiioriiiii  ^^ociii^  iiifV^tliiiii  esse,  tobe 
hodile  to  the  allies  of  the  Romans. 

2d  case:  If  the  attributive  phrase  is  the  governing,  and  the 
objective  the  dependent  phrase,  which  always  is  the  case,  when 
the  common  word  is  an  adjective,  the  objective  phrase  is  substi- 
tuted for  the  common  word  in  the  attributive  phrase  (§  86  a),  as: 

a.  GIVEN  PUR ASES: 

Attributive  :  A  man,  just,  xir  Justus  ; 
Objective:  just  to  adversaries,  adcersariis  Justus. 

b.  COMBINATION,   by  substituting  the  objective  phrase 

''  adrerxariij^  Justus"  for  the  cowwnowwoYd  Justus  in 
the  attributive  phrase  "  xir  Justus"  : 

Vii'  a4lvei>ai'iis  jii^ttis,  a  man  Just  to  adver- 
saries. 

§  90,  8.  In  a  coml)ination  of  two  atlributive  phrases 
with  each  other  a  distinction  must  be  made,  w^hether  the  one  phrase 
depends  on  the  other,  as  in  the  phrase  'Hhe  i^overty  of  the  friends 
of  Gajus  f^  or  whether  both  attributes  depend  on  the  same  gov- 
erninL»  noun,  as  in  the  phrase  ''the  great  victories  of  Pompey.^'' 

§  91.  0.  In  the  former  case  the  dependent  attributive  phrase, 
•iccording  to  the  general  rule  §  ^^  a,  is  substituted  for  the  com- 
mon word  in  the  governing  attril)utive  phrase,  as: 

a.  GIVEN  A  TTRIB  UTIVE  PIIRASES : 

The  i)overty  of  the  friends,  amicorum  iriopia ; 
of  the  friends  of  Gajus,  Gaji  amicorum. 


70 


COMBINATION   OF   ATTRIBUTIVE    PIIRASEvS. 


6.    COMBTNATIOY,  by  substitutiiiij:   tlio  (lepen«l.Mit   i)hra8€ 
"  Gtiji  (iinU'nvnin  "  for  tlu'  cmnnon  word  ((/nicOra/n  in 
the  li-ovfrnini::  plinisf  '^ tiiiiie~>niin  inojnn": 
4ii:iji  aiiiiroriiiii  iiiopiu,  the  pocerty  of  the 
ftundfi  of  GtfJ>(f<. 

§  iP*2.  10.  If  tlie  two  attributive  phrases  have  the  same  gov- 
erning' noun,  wliich  especially  is  the  case,  when  one  of  the  attri- 
butes is  a  genitive,  and  the  other  an  adjective,  the  combination 
is  made  in  tlie  following  order: 

1.  Adjective,  2.  Genitive,  3.  Goverxixg  yous. 

Phrases  of  the  latter  kind  are  called  COIIipoilllcl  Slttri- 

biilivc  |>lii*a«e$. 

a.  GIVEX  PHRASES: 

The  ^rcat  victories,  vletoriae  mdfjnnc  ; 
victories  of  Poin[)ey,  Poinpeji  victorite. 

b.  COMBINA  TlOX'^vnmWwr  to  the  special  rule  §  92  : 

illa^ii'.r  S*o:ii|»oii  vietoriic,  the  (jrcat  victo- 
rks  ff  Fo/iipcf/. 
Hem.  3.  If  the  attributive  genitive  and  the  attributive  adjective  have 
not  the  same  governim;  uouu,  tin?  combination  is  done  by  substitu- 
tion aceor<linif  to  i;  J)l,  as:  The  VICTORY  OF  Pompey  the  Gkeat. 
Poinptjl  Mdfiiti  cictorlK. 
Rem.  4.    Analyzing  combined   ])hnise3  means:  Resolving  them  into 
their  constituent  phrases.     The  following  may  serve  for  a  pattern  of 

analvsis : 

Excellent   ijewards  of  diligence,  a  compound 

attribiiticf  phnme. 

1.  SINGLE  PHRASES: 

Attuibutive  phrase:    Excellent   rewards,  praemia 

egnjia; 

ATTiUBUTrvK phrase:  Rewards  of  diligence,  ddifjen- 

tine  pnt^.iinu. 

2.  COMBINATION,  by  arraniring  the  attributes  according  to 

§  92  :  Eg-re(/i(i  dilvjoitine  praemia. 

EXERCISES. 

Analyze  the  follomng  combined  phrases  according  to  the  pattern 
Rem  4 : 

1.  The  fate  of  the  prisoners  is  uncertain.  2.  A  lone:  dehiy  dis]>h'ase8. 
S.  Hatred  is  the  cause  of  wars.  4.  He  praises  the  eloijuence  of  Tullios. 
5!  We  love  attentive  scholars.  G.  Tiujy  are  desirous  of  foreign  help. 
7.  A  vice  peculiar  to  the  (rreeks.  8.  Tiie  industry  of  the  iuhabitants  ol 
tiie  island.  9.  The  rumor  of  an  unforeseen  daui^er.  10.  The  small 
{exiguus)  price  of  provisions.     11.  Certain  testimonies  of  the  guilt. 


COMBINATION   OF   ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 


71 


A.     COMBINED  rREOICATIVE  AND  ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

1.  Prrrfecti  dementia  reconciliat.  2.  Populi  discordia  desinit.  3. 
Piratarum  jxrna  tenet.  4.  -Komandrum  scuta  defend unt.  5.  ^Emilii 
tloctrina  accuriita  est.  G.  Spartanorum  studia  irrita  sunt.  7.  Syracusa- 
rum  mercatura  fructuosa  est.  8.  Kheuus  Gernianiae  tiuvius  est.  9. 
Fama  victorijirum  nuntia  est.  10.  Inopia  sapientiae  ma«^istra  est.  11. 
Vir  conlentus  beatus  est.  12.  Discordi;p  intestlnre  gliscunt.  13.  Peri- 
cula  occulta  terrent.  11.  Vir  iiividus  otfeiidit.  15.  Bella  mala  neces- 
^aria  sunt.     1(J.  Innocentia  perfiigium  securiim  est. 

17.  The  rivals  of  Pompey  ^re  ^^ilent.  18.  The  friends  of  ^milius  are 
al)sent.  liK  The  prefect  of' Uaul  is  i)res.'nt.  20.  The  promises  of  Per- 
seus deceive.  21.  Masinissa's  friendship  is  useful.  22.  The  commerce 
of  Athens  flourishes.  2o.  'i'iie  plans  of  the  prisoners  are  clear.  24.  The 
followers  of  Catiline  perish.  25.  A  timely  help  Siives.  20.  Faithful 
friends  are  wautmg.  27.  The  nei<;hborini,^  provinces  rebel.  28.  Creat 
miracles  happen.'  29.  Fertile  fields  abound.  80.  Unrevenged  injuries 
torture.  31.  Unheard  of  danu:ers  are  imminent.  32.  The  Latin  allies 
ilce.  :}:?.  The  treathery  of  the  allies  is  manifest.  34.  The  trooi)s  of 
Alexander  are  invincilile.  35.  Tlie  disij^race  of  Catiline  is  perpetual. 
30.  The  farmers  of  Sicily  are  wealthy.  37.  Private  injuries  are  bitter. 
38.  An  unchanged  fri«Mulship  is  rare.  39.  Rash  undertakino:s  are  dan- 
gerous. 40.  A  quiet  life  is  hajfpy.  41.  Philosoi)hy  is  the  teacher  of  life. 
42.  Memory  is  tiie  assistant  of  scholarship.  43.  Asia  is  a  province  of 
the  Romans.  44.  Luceria  is  a  Latiu  town.  45.  Poverty  is  an  excellent 
teacher.     40.  The  Romans  are  reliable  [^ctrtua)  friends. 

B.    COMBINED    OBJECTIVE    AND    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 

1.  Philosophi.T  principia  discunt.  2.  Incolarum  concordiam  conturbas. 
3.  Pra'fecti  avariiiam  vituperamus.  4.  Latinorum  C(jntroversias  dijudi- 
cat.  5.  Le<zatorum  arro^^antiam  coC-rcet.  0.  Adver-sariorum  numero 
cedinms.  7.  Uei  pra-ceptis  obtemi)errimus.  8  Amicorum  auxilii  e^^emus. 
li.  Dei  «rratia  (///vf^f)  vivis.  10.  Doctrlnfi  accurfitti  excellitis.  11.  Prae- 
mia ampla  concedit.  12.  Sententias  contrarias  refutiimus.  13.  Eloquen- 
tia  nura  ])r<Tstat.  14.  Animum  gratum  habetis.  15.  Insidias  occultas 
parat.  10.  Sempronii  amiciti;e  cupidus  sum.  17.  Copiarum  fati  ignari 
sumus.  18.  Discipllu:e  regulis  contrarium  est.  19.  Philosophia?  studio 
deditus  {d<  voted)  est.  20.  Populo  Romano  fidi  sumus,  21.  Imperio 
reuio  adversus  est.  22.  Templum  Minervae  sacrum.  23.  Viro  otii 
cupido.  24.  Copi.e  animi  plen.c.  25.  Decretis  populo  infestis.  20.  Ne- 
gotium  regime  molestum. 

27.  We  despise  the  favor  of  tyrants.  28.  They  restore  the  temples  of 
the  gods.  29.  They  receive  {txcipcre)  the  ambassadors  of  Perseus.  30. 
Thou  receivi'st  [accipn-e)  Metellus's  letter.  31.  We  fear  the  giit^  {doniim) 
of  the  Greeks.  32.  We  understand  the  construction  (structur/i)  of  the 
sentence.  33.  They  underp:o  the  dangers  of  the  battle.  34.  You 
8tren«rthen  the  friendship  of  the  allies.  35.  ^Ve  are  in  need  of  the  grain 
of  Sicily.  30.  They  adhere  to  the  friendship  of  the  Romans.  37.  They 
succumb  by  the  folly  of  the  prefect.  38.  He  calls  foreign  auxiliary 
troops.  39.  He  inhabits  a  "golden  house.  40.  We  lose  dear  friends.  41 
You  have  an  eloquent  adversary    42.  They  plunder  the  wealthy  templea 


72  COMBINATION    OF    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 

4']  Thev  are  victorious  bv  unhoard  of  liardships.     44.  Tlioy  arc  desirous 

of-^e^LJIILnc'of  the  Uonu.ns.     4o.   He  is  ^<;^<;^^^^^''^:^:^ 
AT        .,-!.,.      Aa    'Vhnn  «irr  (h-uT  to  t he  sotis  ol  the  (lueen.     4<.    i«>u  aio 

diihcuU  .ta,lv.     49.  You  are  l.ostilc  to  a  kl.ul  n  i.^^t.T      o 0.     I<  is  t»ll^>I 
neforiouB  plans.     51.  A  prcfcet,  unknown  to      "•"''';''""«;•     ;:-^Y 
temples,  full  of  statues.      .'>:!.  Arsrummts.  unplensaut  to   tli(.  accustu 
54.  By  a  discipline,  peculiar  to  tlie  Spartans. 

C.    COMmX.MION-    OF   TWO    .iTTRI BfTIVE   PIIRASKS. 
„.  TWO  ATTUTr.t-TIVE  OENITtTKS.     1- Tl.o  l.istorv  of ^l.o  ^vars  of  the 


lMet,'llus'«  prisoners.  7.  The  pride  ot  the  i,>ii.i«ers  oi  ..iii..>.^.  m.  ...- 
fl  meriTso't  ,l,e  ,pteen  of  lv«>'pt.  9,  The  causes  o  «'V'  ^rs  o,  Py  r  hus^ 
10  Till- vices  of  the  assistants  of  the  tyrant.  11.  1  he  I.  I.t'i's  oi  ine 
«rinciv.es  of  Kpieurus.  12.  Tl...  fli^lit  «f  the  troops  ol  Darius  13. 
Tl"  ^.npathv  ol  th,.  queen  of  Spain.  14.  The  abdudion  ,,v'y^'"«)  «f 
tlu  duuXers-ol  the  Sabinians  (SdbucU,).     15.  The  anger  ol  the  daugh- 

*";  In.i'Ec'^.VKS-  1>K..F.KDENT  OX  ..TTRU^rTtVE   OEN.TIVES.        lfi._The 

gates  Of  the  Ho,nan  ca.np.  IT.  The  oracles  of  the  Cuman  (C"-';;,"») 
Sihvl  (SihMi)  18.  The  decrees  ot  the  lioman  piK  pie.  IJ.  1  He 
a  luti^..  of  accurate  s.-hoLrship.  20.  The  ren.ains  ot  ■>-;™t  "-,"- 
lueut-    '21     Tlie  disgrace  of  an   unjust  war.     22.    Ihe  menioo   ol   a 

a,  pvV.fe      23.  The  perfidy  of  false  eonn-anions.     24.  '    .h' t™";^^  ;;.l' 
a  neighboring  people.     25.  The  pity  ot  a  n..b  e  soul.     2  ..      he  gbuy  ot 
m  ,guifi.ent  t1-imupl,s.     27.  The  advantages  ol  public  s<.ho,.  Is.     -8.   1  he 
desire  of  a  trauipiil  life.     21).  The  votes  ol  an  envious  people.     30.   Ihe 

^^'\^.';'i;.o:4r!vmu;^■^;T•p^tt.^sKS.    31.  The  impious  plans  of  the 

tv  a,  t.-  32.  To  the  great  joy  of  the  s.-holars  •«;  "[Z,^' .^'r^^reekB 
fl'i.rht  of  the  i-ncnii.'s.  34.  The  renowned  victory  (<-/y.\ol  the  biu.ks. 
^.^  k  a  'huigerous  disease  of  the  prefect.  30.  The  unli.reseen  treadi- 
ery  of  the  allies.  37.  Tl...  obscure  arguments  ot  '''^!; ''  "J''';''/:,,^,^; 
By  the  inmi.Klerate  luxury  of  the  Homan  women.  •'?  .".\""',  ^'""^'y 
Wtles  of  Mexander.  4(».  The  hidd.^n  Higlit  W'y.)  ol  tlu;  troops.  41. 
it  nUniticent  remains  (.I.J.)  of  a  temple.  42.  By  tl-  d.^Mne  e  .Hp^enc. 
of  Tullus.  43.  Of  the  secret  adversaries  of  the  yrat.  44.  Uieosttn- 
Bible  (!.i,<r/r«».,)  cause  («ftj.)  of  the  undertaking,  45.  The  clear  evidences 
of  the  fraud. 

Translate  into  English  : 
1  Spartandrum  tyranni  avaritia.  2.  Philippi  le-atorum  artificia  3. 
Svracusarum  tvranni  s.evitia.  4.  Darii  pra  feet  mum  decreta.  .).  Ml- 
midaruin  equorum  pnestantia  0.  Tyrunni  inmistrorum  Perfi^ha-  J^- 
Arbitri  injusti  iudici'ini.  8.  Injustum  arl.itri  judicium.  ''^J^''^\^- 
rum  i,erieul<.sr>rum  remedia.  10.  Peiieulosa  morhorum  remeiiia  U. 
Populi  liomaui  beneficia.     12.  Animi  ingraii  testimonium.     U.  Amicl- 


COMBINATION    OF    PREDICATIVE    PHRASES. 


73 


tite  immutatae  testimoniis.  14.  Vitae  miseria?  caus.T.  15.  Exiguo  fru- 
nienti  ])retio.  16.  TemiK'stivo  Bociorum  auxilio.  17.  Inultse  legaturum 
iiijuriie.     18.  Manifesta  sociorum  pertidia.     19.  Egregia  Liberi  statua. 


_LESSON    XVIII. 

COMBIXATIOX  OF  PREDICATIVE  PHRASES. 

§  051,  1.  A  ])rcdicatiye  phrase  may  be  combined  :  1.  With  an 
o«)jcctive,  2.  With  an  attributive,  3.  With  another  predicative 
phrase. 

Rom.  1.  The  combination  of  predicative  and  attributive  phrases  has  l)een 
shown  L.  XVII.  For  tlie  combination  of  two  predicative  phrases  see 
Part  Second  ]>.  240,  OiiS. 

§  0  1.  2.  If  a  i)redicative  and  an  objective  phrase  are  com- 
bined, the  former  always  is  the  governing  and  the  latter  the 
DEPE.NDENT  pliraso.  Ilence,  accorditip:  to  rule  §  86,  a,  this  combi- 
nation is  made  by  substitntiiiu:  the  ol)jective  for  the  common  word 
in  the  predicative  plirnse.  The  common  word  generally  is  the 
PREDICATE  (see  the  examples  A.  B.  C.  D.  E.  F.).  But  if  the  pre- 
dicative phrase  is  impersonal,  the  common  word  maybe  a  subject- 
infinitive  (see  example  G). 

EXAMPLES. 

A.    1.  OJVEX  PHILiSES: 

Phkdicative  :   The  ambassador  offers.  Iffj'ttus  offert  ; 
Oi!.TK(  TivE  :   others  an  armi.^tice,  indntias  offert. 
2.  COMlUXATI'fN,    by   substitutimr    tlie    objective    phrase 
"  iiuhifiits  off  (ft'  for  the  common  word  offert  in  the  predi- 
cative ])hrjise  *'  /tf/df/fs  offrrf  : 

l^viiiitus  iiifiiilias  oflVrf,  the  ambassador  offers 
an  urmixtice. 
/;.     \.  (r'FVEX  P/f RASES: 

Pi.-Kni»  ATIVK  :    The  (jueen  is  kind,  regliia  hem'gna  est  : 
()IUK(  TiVK  :    is  kind  to  the  inhabitants,  inroUs  henigna  cd. 
2.  COMB/XA  TION,    by    substituting    the    objective    plirase 
*' inraUs  henigna  est"  for  the  common  words  henigna  est  in 
th(»  pnHlicative  ])hrase  **reglna  henigna  esf  : 

K<';;;:iii:i  iucolis  beiii^iisi  est,  the  queen  is  ki)id 
to  tlte  inhabitants. 


U  COMBINATION   OF   PREDICATIVE    PIIKASES. 

0,'.tr.'T.VK.  It  is  M.,^xM  to  tW  .mbassa.lors,  /..yr,^;»  «<-rf. 
o  ^  U hVv  1  7Y0  V  bv  sulHtitufms  tl...  ..l.j.Ttive  j.l.n.s,.  /.■- 
"■  '':;''w;^;/- Mm   ;h,.-con,,nn„  word  /,>,*  i..  the  nn,n.>^.n«l 

p-';;r.:;  ,r'L"r.i;:  ".i^'.-i:"/<  .••'  ««-«<'  <"  *'-  «""'"--^- 

^     l-£SS''^.i-  are  .vilUn.,  W  .;'-<; 
Orm TIVK    are  willing  to  dosort,  drjirere  rolunt. 
o    rnvm\\ri02f    l-y   s.,l.stitutin,'    the    objective  phrase 
"l/^c^tSi"  for  Ule  J«n,nou  word  r,M,„i  in  the  .nv.l.cat.ve 

'''■'"'iooU '.N-H'^Vr.>  volHHt,  the  oHie,  „rc  ^rillin;/  to  daert 

o     rnrS^  I'v   x"l-tit«tin-   tl.o   objective    phrase 

2.    LUMtsi^i.i^i  /  ^.,_  coiiLmon  wore   ui<-ipi"»t  in  the 

«  inffHlOf  CKxe  ii'iuinnid     tor  tin    coiiiui  ii  *- 

'befjlii  to  b>'  /I'Xti/c. 

^-    ^-  PHn'm-Tr'vf^f'lt  •ii^lovious  to  defend.  ,?./■, -rf-r-"/''"-*-""»  ''^• 
J^    ■,    -Mvi.  •  to  defend  tlie  countrv,  p.itr!ani  ,h,tn,d,re. 
o  ^rr  Vc/V'i™    bv   subs,iu,-tinu'    .he    ol,ie,,ive   phrase 

*'■  'ranla..'.  ii"iv.uiV.-c  «•'...•...SHU.  -M.  a  i..^^«™«. 

fo  (lefeitd  the  country.  .         ,.,,,„„1 

Ren.  3.  K  th,:  ol^ect,  de,,e„de,.  ;.n  the  --------IS;;?^ 

l-r""^"''^",.''  ':r;\;^  srfo,Al  •  conn,o„  ».«.1  ,«  the  o,iJK<TIVB 
pWe'T^.uV^be'ex'nple,  mentione.!  under  No.  />.  more  nsnally 
Ls  tl.e  f>n..win«  order:  M/r-^^---'^;^-  „,,.  ^,„     ,.,  ,..„„;,,, 

Rem.  3.  If  the  P'-;''''^^''-     ,'       ,n,l  d     i    I  nitiv,'  ot  the  co.mh,.  th.-  predi- 
ofa,.n.licat.veadjeetne  an      1     m  n  I    ^^.^^^  ^^l^^  ^^ 

^^rwS'^^d:!;;^..;"  JJ:  'r  l-nZate.  if  .ids  o„ect  denotes  a 
"""""'It  cMights  the  triumvirs  to  be  mild.  Tnumuro,  baugnos  em 


COMBINATION    OF   PREDICATIVE    PHRASES. 


To 


jurat.     It  becomes  the  queen  to  be  just,  Reglnam  ju-stam  esse 

(frrrf.  1-       • 

But  the  Latin  lan;Lruai?e  generally  conibini'S  with  predicative 
phrases  of  this  kind  no  other  objects  than  those  which  are  in  the 
ACCUSATIVE  case,  except  when  fleet  or  necesse  ef<t  form  the  ])redicate. 
In  both  instances  the  predicative  adjective,  forming  ]iart  of  the  sub- 
ject, acrr<'es  with  the  obi.'cts  of  these  verbs  in  the  d.vtive  case,  as: 
'  Uiijo  otidso  eaae  W'et,  it  is  allowed  to  (lajus  to  be  idle.  Copiis 
strcnuis  esse  necesse  est,  it  is  necessary  to  the  troops  to  be  brave. 

§  95.  3.  A  peculiar  kind  of  combination  is  that  of  a  predi- 
cative phrase  with  a  subject-infinitive,  and  of  an  objective  phrase 
with  an  object-infinitive.  This  combination  takes  place,  when 
one  of  the  vorl)S  meniioncd  §  82  is  used  impersonally  with  one  of 
the  reguhxr  impersonal  predicates  (76.  T7)  as  their  object-iiifiui. 

tive,  as  : 

Dorruire  jucujidum  esse  sokt,  it  generally  is  pleasant  to 
sleep.     jSeri'ire  j)lacere  nequit,  it  cannot  please  to  serve. 

EXERCISES. 

t^f"  Analyze  the  foUoicing  combined  phrases  hy  writing: 
1.  Flatteries  corrupt  the  soul.  2.  Money  is  wanting  {deese)  to  the 
trcasurv.  o.  Arrogance  is  contrary  to  modesty.  4.  Farmers  live  hai> 
pilv.  5.  It  delights  {jnvare)  the  boys  to  ].lay.  G.  The  troops  wish  to 
fight.  7.  <ir('ece  erases  to  be  free.  ^.  It  is  unfair  to  punish  the  prison- 
ers.    9.  it  is  allowed  to  the  poet  to  be  happy. 

1. 

1  Libri  pueros  delectant.  2.  Pueri  libros  legunt.  3.  Numidre  tem- 
i>la  (liriiuunt.  4.  Frumentum  copiis  deest.  o.  Arbiter  reum  condeiunat. 
()  Socii  frumenti  egent.  7.  Philosophus  argumentis  convincit.  8.  Nautae 
divitiarum  cupidi  sunt.  9.  Marius  Plebr-jis  cnrus  est.  10.  Pugna  Ro- 
nuiiu*  funesta  est.  11.  Socii  timide  pugnant.  12.  Copiae  necopmato 
abeunt  V-\.  Luna  noctu  splendct.  14.  Amicitia  nunquam  moh-sta  est. 
15  l)is<Mpuh)s  discere  jiivat.  i().  Amicis  rei)rehendere  licet.  17.  Ann- 
cos  rei)rehend(>re  li.-et. '  18.  Tvrannus  s:evire  jxTgit.  19.  Piratc-e  diripero 
(U-^istunt.  20.  Triumviri  regnare  nesciunt.  21.  Poeni  procedere  timent. 
22  Homilni  vincere  soleut.  2:3.  Amicos  prodere  simlidum  est.  24. 
Airricolis  laljoridsis  esse  necesse  est.  25.  Pnefecto  otios^i  esse  licet.  26. 
Triiimviros  generosos  esse  decet.  27.  Ludere  jucimdum  esse  solet.  28. 
Iracundum  essi;  conducere  nequit.  .  ^     ->•      .  . 

'X)  Pomi>ev  conquers  the  pirates.  :)().  The  Persians  are  ol^edient  to 
Alexander  31.  Octavianus  defeiits  Anthony.  32.  The  Romans  reject 
the  armistice.  33.  The  baggage  bunh-ns  the  troops  34.  Thebes  pre- 
pares  a  war.  35.  The  scholars  are  distinguished  by  diligence.  3b 
Teachers  are  in  need  of  lK>oks.  37.  Friendship  unites  the  souls.  38 
Vices  bring  disgrace.     39.  The  troops  crois  the  Danube.     40.  The  prov 


76 


COMBINATION    OF    PREDICATIVE    PHRASES. 


ince  is  full  of  desertiTs.     41.  The  troops  are  full  of  con fulf  nee.     4'2.  The 
allies  are  desirous  of  a  haltle.     43.  Indoh-nce  is  contrary  to  dili.uence. 
44  The  peoide  are  thankful  to  the  triumvirs.    4.").  The  country  (t(rnf)  is 
adapted  to  a  battle.     4(;.  The  Simrtans  dine  publicly.     47.   The  troops 
conspire  secretlv.     48.  The  Celts  dig  l)usily.    41).  The  gods  ottm  punish. 
50    Delav  is  rarelv  useful.     51.  Years  never  return.     5-.\  The  trooj.s  are 
as  vet  unhurt.     53.  The  slaves  are  now  fiee.     54.  The  (lUMn  always  is 
generous.     55.    Riclu'S  never  are  secure.     5(i.    It  delights  the  i)oys  to 
swim       57     It   is  necessarv  to  \ho  Carthaginians  to   yh-M.     oS.    It   is 
allowed  to  Anthonv  to  return.     5!l.  It  b.-comes  the  javfect  to  bo  severe. 
()0    It  becomes  bovs  to  be  nKxlest.     (Jl.   It  (heights  tlie  quoen  to  be  nuld. 
C2.  It  is  allowed  to  the  people  to  be  qui.'t.     iui.     It  is  contrary  to  duty 
to  i^hinder.     04.  It  is  never  allowed  to  be  unjust.     ('.5.   It  is  often  expe- 
dient to  be  silent.    <»«;.  It  is  always  better  to  b.-  cautious,     (m.   It  is  olten 
necessarv  to  be  severe.     OS.  The  troops  are  unwilling  to  obey.     01).  The 
comniitti'e  of  seven  resolve  to  conform.     70.  The  prefe«-t  does  not  know 
how  to  finish  the  war.    71.  The  slaves  are  afraid  of  returning.     72.  TJi(> 
umpires  wish  to  be  just.     73.  The  c^ue  -n  is  afraid  <.f  being  rash.     74. 
The  commerce  ceases'to  be  i)rofitable.     75.  The  Belgians  continue  being 
rebellious.     70.  Justice  cannot  be  a  wrong.     77.  Words  must  be  perspic- 
nous.      78.    Tvrants   generally  are   unju>t.      70.    It  is  cruel   to  .^fll-nd 
prisoners.     80.*  It  is  beautiful  to  defend  innocence.     81.   It  is  impious  to 
utter  (ilirerc)  falst>lioods.    82.  It  is  disgraceful  to  break  (f(((d<  lu  )  promises. 
83    It  is  noble  to  be  useful  to  enemies.     84.  It  is  expedient  t(»  1)«'  devoted 
{di(Ut}ix)  to  military  service.     85.  It  is  allowed  to  be  inimical  {(idcvrioi.^) 
to   ne^'-ligi'uce.      80.  It   is   human  to   be  desirous  of  fame.     87.  To  bo 
thankfurto  teachers  is  honorable  (^/frr>;v/.v  .     88.  It  cannot  be  injurious 
to  be  silent.     81).  It  must  be  serviceable  to  finish  the  war. 

1.  Bella  .-erarium  exhauriunt.  2.  Disciplina  copias  continet.^  3.  Pjii- 
^osoi)hia  ingenium  exerct.  4.  OppidHni  veiiiam  imiH'traut.  5.  Ljitini 
pra>feeto  subveniunt.  0.  Fiducia  eojuis  deest.  7.  Pinltie  terra  api)ro- 
pinquant  8.  Pueri  grammatic;e  iunari  sunt.  0.  Frumentum  copus 
necc'ssarium  est.  10.  (Jalli  Romanis  infesti  sunt.  1 1.  Socii  ignominioso 
fugiunt.  12.  Pra?fectus  fortuito  abest.  13.  Animus  semper  bber  est 
14.  Promissa  sa-pe  ambigna  sunt.  15.  Prjrfectum  inaire  decet.  10. 
Ol)pidanis  redlre  licet.  17.  Agricolas  imi)igros  esse  juvat.  18.  Disci- 
puli  proficere  nequeunt.  19.  Reus  hiscere  non  vult.  20.  Sulpicius  tar  ms 
esse  sol(>t.  21.  Adveiue  incogniti  esse  cupiunt.  22.  Captlvos  liberare 
humanum  est.     23.  Maiiere  periculosum  esse  potest.     24.    Heligiosuiii 

esse  prodesse  solet.  .  .       ,.    .  , 

25.  The  inhabitants  extinguish  the  Hames.  20.  The  triumvirs  divide 
the  fields.  27.  South  winds  i)ring  rain  (ph/rin).  28.  The  boys  conform 
to  the  rtiles.  20.  The  troops  throw  the  arms  away.  'M).  The  town  is 
full  of  ])rovisions.  31.  Minerva  is  friendly  'o  the  (Jieeks.  32.  The 
groves  are  sacred  to  the  Furies.  33.  The  troops  suddi-nly  aj'pear.  34. 
The  scholars  hear  attentivelv.  :}5.  Figures  {iium(rii.'<)  sometimes 
deceive.  30.  The  s^'utinels  often  sleep.  37.  The  watchmen  are  now 
Httt'utive.  38.  It  becomes  the  accused  to  mourn.  :'>'.».  It  is  allowed  to 
the  troops  to  rest.     40.  It  delights  the  slaves  to  be  idle.     41.  It  becomee 


COMBINATION   OF   OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 


77 


a  stranger  to  be  |X)lite.  42.  It  is  agreeable  (rotififnfrn/eufi)  to  prudence  tM 
yiehl.  43.  It  is  never  necessary  to  commit  cruelties.  44  It  is  always 
]>r<'ferable  to  be  cout«'nted.  45.  It  ottt-n  is  danirerous  to  be  weak.  40, 
The  tribunes  must  vield.  47.  The  slaves  are  in  the  habit  of  dancing, 
48.  The  seutin(4s  cease  to  watch.  49.  Tin;  um])ires  are  afraid  of  being 
just.  50.  The  (lireeks  wish  to  be  free.  51.  Philosophers  do  not  know 
how  to  govern.  52.  It  is  expedient  to  repeal  the  decrees.  53.  It  is 
necessary  to  conform  to  the  prefect.  54.  It  is  disgraceful  to  divulge 
secrets.  55.  It  is  better  to  act  cautiously.  50.  It  is  abominable  to 
accuse  falsely.  57.  It  generally  is  preferable  to  yield.  58.  It  can  be 
l)rofitable  to  succumb. 


LESSON    XIX. 


COMBINATION    OF    OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 

§  90.  1.  Objective  phrases  may  be  combined  with  attribu- 
tive, PRF.niCATivK,  and  with  other  objective  phrases. 

Rem.  1.  Tiie  first  two  combinations  have  been  shown  in  the  last  two 
lessons.     Here   we   consider  the  combination  of  objective  phrases 

with  EACH  OTHER. 

§  07.  2.  In  combining  objective  ])hrases  with  each  other,  a 
distinction  must  be  made,  whether  both  objective  phrases  have 
tiie  same  governinp^  word,  or  wliether  the  one  objective  phrase  is 
DEPENDENT  on  the  otlicr  (§  85).  The  latter  is  the  case,  when  an 
INFINITIVE,  which  is  an  object  of  the  predicate,  has  other  olijects 
depeiuhnt  on  it.  In  this  combination  the  governing  phrase  is 
caUed  the  objective  phrase  of  the  predicate,  and  the  dependent 
phrase  the  objective  phrase  of  the  infinitive,  as  : 

Fhfcitnn  transire  incipiuut,  tliey  begin  to  cross  the  river. 

Here  tlie  phrase  '' transire  inciphint''^  is  an  objective  phrase 
of  the  predicate,  and  the  phrase  ''Jluvium  transire"  an  objective 
phrase  of  the  infinitive. 

§  08.     3.  In   combining   oVyective  phrases  of  the  predicate 

with  olijective  phrases  of  the  infinitive,  either  of  the  two  phrases 

may  be  substituted  for  the  common  word  (that  is  the  infinitive)  in 

the  other,  as  : 

A.  1.  GIVEX  PHRASES: 

Obje(  tivf:  phrase  of  the  predicate:  We  wish  to  redeem 
rediniere  c npiia ua  ; 


78 


COMBINATION   OF   OBJECTIVE   PHRASES. 


Objecthk  phrase  of  the  infinitive:  to  redeem  the  cap 
tivi's,  captlcns  ndiinere. 

2.  COMBIXA  TION,   by   substituting    either    of    the    two 
plirasi's  for  tlic  common  word  vi  (Jim  eve  in  the  other; 
Csi|>liV4»«^  i'4>cliiii<'i'e  ciipliiiiis,  we  wishtoredeem 
the  capticm. 
B.  1.  GIVEN  PHRASES: 

OiUECTivK  PintASE  OF  THE  PiiEDlCATE :  Tliey  continue  to 

fight,  pHfjinire  pergunt ; 
Objkctivk  phhase  OF  THE  INFINITIVE:   to  fight  bravely, 

strennc  j)i/f/JHlre. 
2.  COMBIXA  TION,  as  in  the  first  example  : 

$>iti*4'iiii<'  i>ii;;ii:ii'<.'  pvv^unt,th€i/ continue  to  ff/Iit 
bn«r,lt/. 

a  1.  GIVEN  PHRASES  : 

OBjErTivE  rniJASE  of  the  predicate  :  We  intend  to  be 

thankful,  (/rdti  i\sse  volumus ; 
Ojuective  piikase  of  the  INFINITIVE,  to  be  thankful  to 

the  ))rele('t,  pr<u'ferto  grati  esine. 
2.  COMIUNATfON,  as  in  the  first  example  : 

PisufVrlo  ;;i*ali  e^^e  voliiiiiii^,  ice  intend  tobe 
thankful  to  the  prefect. 

§  00.  4.  Two  combined  objective  ])hrase.s,  which  have  the 
same  governing  word, are  culled  a  c*inil|ioiiiifl  iilnjective 

plira^e.     In  phrases  of  this  kind  the  obje(;ts  are  placed  in  the 
following  order  before  the  governing  verb  : 

1.  Tlie  objects,  containing  the  case  of  a  substantive  (casE' 
objects),  generally  i^recwZe;  those  objects,  which  are  adverbs  (ad- 
verbial  objects),  as  : 

Legdtis  benigne  respondet,  he  replies  kindly  to  the  ambassa- 
dors. 

2.  Among  more  than  one  case-object  the  accusative  generally 
precedes  the  other  cases,  but  the  dative  either  precedes  or  fol- 
lows the  accusative,  as  : 

Pra^fectum  perjurii  accusare,  to  accuse  the  prefect  of  per- 
jury. 

Irthums  peeuniam  dat,  ov  2^€ciimam  tribunis  dat,  he  ^ivca 
money  to  the  tribunes. 

Praesiatitlam  diliejentld  comparare^  to  gain  distinction  by 
diligence. 

§  lOO.  5.  Certain  verbs  govern  a  case-ol)ject  in  connection 
with  an  infinitive.     In  this  kind  of  compound  objective  phrase 


COMBINATION   OF   OBJECTIVE    PHKASES. 


79 


,  •    f  i^  ,)„.  LoncAi.  (not  the  grammatical)  subject  of 

.        1-4.  J  ,r,r,tn9  ^^  meant  to  be  the 

He,n.  2    In  the  pv,.„  ^^:^Z'^<^V^'^^'^r:, 

DOKB  of  the  iiction  "1  "^'  '""."""•  ^„'„,i:„„  ti)  §  5,  is  the  SDii-IECT  of 

",,;,.,..     Hence  the  noan  '»;'  f„"?M      Ti<A l\t.i>ieot,  explained  in 

nV'ilr r  .o^^Il  "uh,:^;.  oTt^e  W-nt.     see-,  I.,  Ken.^2. 

.,«1.0.  The  verbs,  which  are  constfuea  with  thts  ku.d  of 

con,.,  amd  oljicct,  arc  tlie  followh.g  : 

conip.'unu      .1      ,  prevent     pcoA*en;,  to  prohibit 

f'"  ...,  ^i>^to  wa,  direct        .dur.,  to  forbid 


coqere,  to  coni])el 
docere,  to  teach 


.i';.  to  bid,  direct        .*.r;.  to  forbid 
2)(r>nitterc,    to    allow, 
t»)  permit 


Be.1...  .  r v,n.tio,.  of  .^;^/j;;;^-r- -  f^^'^X'^^tZ 

objects  of  <''^l'r''''"  '■ ,  ^!l;  a«es    vl tie  the  former  make  a  com- 
pl'verninff  and  'l';!;;™  )  "  ,       ^jf  [uiis  analyzed  : 
WL-NU  ubju...  J^^^^^^^^^ ^,,^  ,,^..„t  to  go  away. 

'■  '^«-"^'«uitive:   ^-«"-I'Sntioned  verbs,  ^ands 

P^^^'^^-      ,  ,        ,  ,:fur,  this  combination  Avith  a  predicative 

With  the  verb  jyentiitttre  iui>  cu.u 

ndiective  cannot  be  used. 


80  COMBINATION    OF   OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 

to  hinder,  to  prohihif,  wliicli  are  construed  willi  the  jm'posi- 
tion//v>//i,  and  tlic  verbal  noun  in  /////,  wliilc  in  Latin  the  nn-rt'  iu 
linitivc  is  used,  as:  I  prohibit  the  hoi/a  from  pUtying,  ])Ultos  luder^ 
prohibeo. 

Summary  OF  THE  Rui.es  on  the  cTjAArMATirAL  form  of  the  Pre- 

«liciiiiV4'  SKljcclii'c». 

The  PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVE  takcs  dittrrent  irramnuitieal  forms,  ac- 
cording to  its  ditierent  i2:ranunatical  ri'hitions.  The  ruk'S,  wliicli  cictcr- 
niine  this  form,  are  exphiintd  at  their  jiroper  phiees.  It  is  important 
for  the  beginner  to  view  these  ruh'S  in  their  c(mnection. 

The  general  principh*  is  tlie  following: 

The  predirafire  odjcctire  (dwff/s  (fr/rce.s  with  it'<  looicai.  bthject. 

All  the  spt'cial  rules  are  nothing  but  applications  of  this  jirinciple: 

1.  When  the  predicative  adjective  is  connected  with  a  FINITE  coi)ula, 
it  agrees  with  its  grammaticat.  siiuect  (JJ  <)m).  If  this  grammatical 
subject  is  a  subject-infitiitive,  the  adjective  is  i)hiced  in  tin;  nominative 
neuter  SINGui.AIl  (^i  ?.■)). 

2.  When  the  predicative  adjective  is  connected  with  the  co]>ula  in  the 
infimtive,  we  must  distinguish  whether  the  infinitive  is  a  subject  or 

an  OIUECT-INFINITIVE. 

a.  If  it  is  a  suiuect-infinitive,  the  predicative  adjective  stands  iu 
the  ace». satire  mHyilor  of  the  iinfi<enliiie  {^  78). 

h.  If  it  is  an  ouject-infimtive,  we  a«rain  distinguish,  ^vllether 
the  latter  is  dependent  on  one  of  those  verbs,  that  govern  a  simple 
object-infinitive  (;:^  SO),  or  on  one  of  those,  tliat  govern  a  compound 
object-intinitiv(^  (vj  101). 

aa.  In  the  tbrmer  instanct.'  the  predicative  adjective  agrees  witli 
the  gram/natical  subject  of  its  governing  oredicative  phrase  (^  81. 

lib.    In    the  hitter   instance    the    predicative    adjective    agrees 
with  the  (Cjeiit  of  the  infinitive  (^  10'2). 
The  beginner  will  rarely  err  in  the  application  of  these  rules,   if  he 
always  looks  for  the  lofjiral  subject  of  the  i)redicative  adjective,  whicli  is 
easily  found,  l)y  asking  the  question:    Who  or  what  dues  tlie  action,  ex- 
pressed by  the  predicative  adjective  and  copula. 

Analyze  the  folloiring  phrases  : 

1.  They  cannot  destroy  the  country.  2.  lie  promises  diliL'"ence  to  the 
teacher.  '6.  We  remind  {admonere}  the  allies  of  the  danger.  4.  He 
kindly  receives  {excipcre)  the  ambassadors.  5.  He  accustoms  the  Ro- 
mans to  coiKiuer.  ().  They  prevent  ihe  troops  from  i)lundering.  7.  You 
sutler  the  inhabitants  to  be  free. 

1. 

1.  We  intend  to  restore  discipline.  2.  lie  resolves  to  defend  the  town. 
3.  They  wish  to  occupy  Sicily.  4.  I  am  not  willing  to  h\irt  (l/ndi  re)  the 
strangers.  5.  You  do  not  wish  to  change  place.  (>.  1  rather  wish  to  be 
useful  to  the  people.     7.  1  can  reconcile  the  friends.     8.  Thou  art  able 


COMBINATION    OF   OBJECTIVE    PHRASES. 


81 


o    Tlir^v  cinnot  maintain  the  battle 
to  return  (reddere)  the  money.     ?•  ^hey  cannm  i^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

10.  We  must  rest  nun  arrogance      11]^^^  ^  .^^      ^.j.  Th.y  gener- 

Gracchus      12.  ^h- -e  atra.d  of  ent  i^u^  tl.^^^^        ^^^  ^^^^  ^^ 

allv  are  desirous  ot  bootN  14.  ^.'^^ /J^  i,_  i  .,^.3^  10.  Thev  cease  to 
15.*  We  begin  to  be  mnvcd  {a  ssn  a  us)  ^^  ]'«^^^  ;;,,i,.  i^^.  iie  recom- 
act    ntoderately.     17    ^ott  begm  leaning  assuum^^        ^^^^ 

nu.nds  the  poet  to  the  i;-^;f;^^^J;^;,;;Ahe  victory  to  the  people.  21. 
ipulma)  to  Homer.  20  1  u>  ^  !,"7"^j^,ii,-^.rs  the  letter  to  the  queen. 
1!..  prefers  disgrace  to  death.     22    Ht  ^^'^^^j  ^  '  ,  ^^.^      04.  Thev  accuse 

28.  'rhou  betrayest  the  ^^-^e  .s^^^-^;^;^^^;^^^^^^^^^^^^^  of  corrup- 

the  messenger  ot  treachery.     2o.  \  >     con  ict  i  ^^  ^^^^^  ^.^.^_ 

iuns  by  tavors.    28^  1  rvstram  I^;^-^;  X^^^J^vLip  by  a  rampart.     31. 
take  the  town  by  Imud.     oO.   i*»^>/"J  '^^^^^  ^33. 

You  ialsely  accuse  Semprom us.     .,.    "!,  J* '^;^  ^^^  ^,^  ^M  to  the 

He  always  is  faithful  to  ^^:^'^"^  [.^-"^^^^^^n..     3r..  He  teaches 
allies.     3.-,.  Vou  secretly  aclher.^;>tl^^^^^^^  ^^^      ^^^^ 

th(«  inhabitants  to  obev .  o;  •  ^^  ^^  «^  l^^y  ^  ambassadors  to  be  sdent. 
sutler  the  prison.TS  to  perish      .9.  H^  b  ds  ^^^J^^^;^  ^^^  ^  to  be 

40.  You  forbid  the  troops  to  light.  41  He  ^^''^y^  .^^i,^.,,  \>rohibit 
cautious.  42.  He  permits  the  Vn^nv^^J^  ^^  the  inhabitants  Irom 
the  tyrant  from  being  moderate.     44.   iou  proNcn. 

being  treucUerous.  Proolium   renovare   nolunt.      3. 

1        Vitin»     (hfi'udere    VOlumUS.        '^-     Xlo,uuiii     1  r'.me'nn 

c.mk.n.nat.     2;i.  I'atna>  .cm  "|i  «rati  ?»     >^;     -^^  J^^-^^^  ,.,,,n,nus.     27. 

£^  r:  e.i:™-r'^.  ,1^,1^ P^Im  e.e  .Z. 

2. 

11    T^  1  •    ^      o     TT.i   resolves  to   couvoke   the 
1.    Thev  int(>nd    to  recall   Fabius.   .f-    "  ^^  ^.^^^^        tlie  Romans.     4. 
inhabitams.     3,  They  are  in  the  1ml)  t^^  ^^^^^^'^o  Uandon  Sicily. 
\Vc  cease  electing  deceiuMrs.     ^^^,;;  ;;f  i^^^^^^^^^^  ;.  Vou  begin  to  bo 

0.  We  are  afraid  ot  b^ng  uni>h^  n^  ^'t;^?;:ach 'captiously.     0.    You 
desirous  ot    riches.     8.    j^^^^J.^^-";'^.  f^iiJ^^.  the  slaves  to  the  ma 
rather  wish  to  act  severely.     10.   ^y.,.f^'io    You  abandon  the  b<K)ty  to 
11.  Th.:-  send  a  --^^^;^^  ^.^  ;^^^  iVaud^     14,   ^Ue 

the  barbarians.     U.    We  ^'^''^\,^\^  ^^tten  are  in  need  (^//cZ^^c /v)  ol 
--r  r  ^^'^ef  er^.e     ^j  X     -  He  ac.de.aU.  .;.... 


82        COMBINATION   OF    MORE    THAX   TWO    PHRASES. 

troops  to  be  on  tlicir  ^ruard.     22.  We  let  the  enemies  r.Joice.     23.  Tliey 
prevent  the  tyrant  from  tiecinf,'. 

1.  Sneios  reconciiiare  ciii»imns.  2.  Dolo  vincere  no»i  vnlt.  o.  Lep'i- 
tum  interticere  stutnunt.  4.  Pnefectum  accusare  (k'sinis.  5.  Invidhim 
Buperare  nesciunt.  ().  liegina^  infesti  esse  inoipiunt.  7.  Pnhliee  die«'re 
{to  !<p(ak)t\mLHX  S.  Content.' vivcre  discnnt.  1).  Copiis  victoriam  pro- 
mittit.  10.  Triumviro  cordmun  ott'.-rt.  11.  Philip])um  AU-xamlro 
antt'p(mimus.  12.  SaUiisthim  doli  absolvnnt.  lo.  Le^oltos  «zladio  vul- 
nerat.  14.  Penm  diserte  defenilit.  15.  Ne«rotium  e^jrepe  perfieiiint. 
10.  Adversarios  appropintpnlre  snmnt.  17.  Copias  transire  proh'het 
18.  Diseipulos  attentos  esse  jnbemus. 


LESSOX  XX. 

COMBIXATIOX    OF    MORK    THAN    TWO    PHKASES 

§  ]  03.  1.  If  more  than  two  plirases  are  to  be  coml)iiie(l  with 
each  other,  we  first  coii]l)ine  those  phrases,  which  h;ive  the  same 
governing  word,  according  to  the  rules,  explained  in  the  preceding 
lessons.  These,  in  their  farther  combination  w'.lh  other  })liriises, 
■  are  treated  as  o/ie  single  j^hrase.  According  as  tiiey  form  the 
goventlng,  or  the  dependent  phrase,  the  rule  of  §  8t),  a,  or  the 
special  rules  of  the  preceding  lessons  nuist  then  be  applied. 
Thus  may  be  combined: 

1.  Three  or  more  attributive  phr.\sf.s  witli  each  other; 

2.  Three  or  more  objective  phrases  with  each  other; 

3.  A  combined  orjective  with  a  puedicative  thrase. 

§   101.    Illustr.vtiox. 
A.  Atthiijutive  rii rases. 
1.  TIk'  |M'i'iiirioii<^di«>.<>4>rd  o(  tlic^  Koiiiaii  p<^oi>lc. 

a.  SlN'GEE    IMIRVSES: 

Governing  phrase  (compound  attribntive,  §  92):  The  pernicious 

discord  of  the  jH'ople,  exitwsd  populi  dLtcordia  ; 
DErENDP:NT  PHRASE:  Of  the  Roman  \\iio\Aii,  popall  Itoindni. 

b.  COMBI.N'ATIO-X: 

By  sui»stitnting  the  dependent  phrase  ''populi  Ilo)fi<liii''  for 
the  common  word popuH  in  the  governing  phrase  " txitiuM 
populi  discordia  " : 

ExitiOaa  populi  Rumani  discordia. 


COMBIXATIO.    OF    KOBE   TIIAK   TWO   PHRASES.        83 

^      Ihe  ^ll.es,  dcxUmc  sociOrum  alae. 

Bv  subs,h«th,-r   tl.e  deP^'l''"'  f  4*t,,e  governing  l^se 
aia,'. "  I"!-  tl'«  eoniin.)n  word  aUie  in  e 

"'"'"'•''"''"^«(em.  socwrum  alaefm- 
B    Objective  piikases. 
,.  „e  i.  .....vU.I...'  t«  taue  ...e  to«..  ..,  «.eacUcry. 

a.  Single  phrases:  .nmrenonmlt; 


""^  by  tJ:icWery,  o,,UU„  ,erfiM  capc-e. 

\),  Combination:  i  .„+  i.i.rase  " oppidum 

„  .,:;.  '',n;';:;'"-"un,l  objective,  g  100):   He  forbias  tbe 

b.   Comiunation:  ^^popuhim   excitare* 

3.  llo  altoWN  the  ooy  i«  *»• 

a.   t^iNGLE  phrases:  ^^^  boy  to  give, 

Governing  phka^e  (compound  obj.)- 

vxcro  dnr  prnnittd  ,  .    ^      -^^  ^^^  book  to  Gajus, 

DEPENDK^■'l'  riui ASK  (compound  obj.).         h 
lihvnm  Gap  dun  • 

1).  Combination:  «jihriim  Gnjo  dare" 


84:        COMBINATION   OF   MORE   THAN   TWO    PHRASES. 


G.    PkEDICATIVE   AXD   combined   OB.TErTIVR   PIIKASES. 

1.  Tlu'  :iiiihsi<^s:Miors  aiiiioiiiice  tlie  virlory  to 

tiie  |»eo|>l<'. 

a.  SiXGi.E  phrases: 

Governing   i'in{ASE   (predioative) :    Tlie    ambassadors    announce, 

Uyati  nantidiit ; 
Dependent  phuase  (compound  objoctivo) :    announce  the  victory 

to  the  \iQO\A<i,  popnlo  victorimii  nuntiant  ; 

b.  Co.MBi nation: 

By  substituting^  the  dependent  phrase  "  popnlo  victorutm 
nuntidiit"  for  the  common  word  ;t^////<V/y/nn  the  governinjj 
phrase  "  kgati  nuntiant  "  : 

Leynti  popuh)  vlrtoriam,  invKt'tdnt. 

2.  The   C]ii'('ck«*   know  how  to   put  baihariaiis 

to  lli;j:ht. 

a.  Sin(;le  phrases  : 

GovETiNiNa  phrase  (predicative) :  The  Greeks  know,  Gntrri  ftrimit ; 
Dependent  phrases  (combined  objective,  j^  0^):  know  how  to  put 
to  flight  barbarians,  b(rharosf(i(/dre  sciunt. 

b.  Combination  : 

By  substituting  the  combined  objective  phrase  "  Ixtrhttroxfu- 
fjnre  st'l'tut"'  for  the  coniinon  word  Hciuut  in  the  pnidicative 
plirase  **  Gravel  xcinut'" : 

Graeci  harhdros  fiKjdre  nciuitt. 

3.  It  i$  e\|MMliriit  to  ilie   ltoiii:iii«<  to  r<'fii«»e   the 

ariiii!>^tice  to  the  4  arllia;^iiiiaii$i. 

a.  Single  phrases  : 
Governing  phrase  (a  combination  of  an  impersonal  predicativo 

with  an  objective  ]>hrase,  i^Ut.  D):  It  is  expedient  t<»  the  lio- 

mans  to  refuse,  Dt/i ('!/<! ir  llonianlH  ei'ptdit,  or:  lio/nd/u.'*  ihne- 

gdre  expcdit  (^  1)4,  Rem.  2) : 
Dependent  phrase  (compound  objectiv»') :  to  refuse  the  armistice 

to  the  Carthaginians,  indatiaa  Poenis  dciie(jdre. 

b.    CoMlHNATION  : 

By  substituting  the  dependent  plirase  "i/idtftit/s  Poenis  drne- 
ghre''  for  the  common  word  dcncjdre  in  the  governing  jdirase 
*'  denegdn'  Ilomdnix  txpediV: 
Indutias  Poenis  denegdre  Ronidnis  expedit,  or  :  Romdnis  indutids 
Poenis  denegdre  expedit. 

4.  The    ]^iiiiii€iiaii«<   prevent   Seiiipreiiiiis   from 

eomiiiiiiiieatJiig:  the  tlaii|^ei-  to  .i:iiiiliiis. 

a.  8in(;le   pihiasks  : 
Governing  phrase  :  The  Numidians  prevent,  Numidac  impediunt, 
Dependent  phrases: 

1.  Compound  objective  of  the  predicate  (^  97):  prevent  Sem 
pronius  from  communicating,  Seniproniaia  nuntidre  imp^ 
diiint ; 


COMBINATION    OF   MORE   THAN   T\VO   PHRASES.        85 

2   Compound  objective  of  the  infinitive  .communicating  tk^ 
danger  to  .Euiilius,  uEniUio  pericuLuni  nuutiare. 
I).  Combination  : 

Evfir^t  combining  the  two  comp.  ol.iective  phrases  accordiiigio 
b'    rt^f^^^^         ^^«nlio  pericnlum  nu,.tiar^  inrpedaud) 
SdM;Jn^bstituting  the   iLase.,  thus  <.mbmed  ^^>^^ 
TircHlicate  impedinnt  in  the  gov(>rning  predica  in  e  phra>c  . 
i^S:.'^c';!^"..^^-^  .J^ndUoperieuUua  nuntiare  vnpedtant 

8*105  2.  If  ATTRIBUTIVE  pliniscs  are  to  be  combined  with 
the  more  ^.inplicuted  phrases  of  the  other  descriptions,  we  firs^ 
form  the  skeleton,  that  is  the  subject,  predicate  and  lie 
OBJECTS  of  the  predicate  and  infinitive.  After  this  the  aUnbt. 
tive  phrases  are  separately  constituted,  and  severally  substituted 
for  their  governing  nonns  in  the  skeleton,  as  : 

1.    Tlioy   pieveiil    fUe   dauj^liteis   ol   the   queen 
tVoiii  »ailiii«*  ... 

Skeleton:  Tliey  prevent  tlie  daughters  from  s^iVmg,  films  nan- 

ATTun-rTivKl^intK:  The  daughters  of  the  queen,  reglnae  JUjas 
Co4./lN  V  HON.  bv  Substituting  th?attributive  phrase  "  regu.aefihas 
for  the  object  Jf7iV/«  in  the  skeh'ton  : 

J{((/lnne  /i7w«  nangdre  vnpedinnt. 
2    The  II  oops  of  file  allies  l>e;.iii  to  Harass  the 
lilt   wiiitf  ol  Ihe  .Kloliaiis. 
1.  Skeleton  :  The  troops  be^in  to  harass  the  wing,  Gopme  (dam 
hicissere  ineipimit. 

^-  -^T''''',?,''',;t'm,7,')^''^*tho  troops  of  the  allie.,  sorionnn  copiae; 
ti;;™l.m  <-..  .^^;-  tl-  le'-t^ing  of  the  JEuAX^n.,  su.ist.nn 

3    CoMmNMMoN.  ])v  substituting  the  attributive  phrases  for  their 

?rmernin-  nouns,  enpiae  and  <d<un  in  tlu>  si^eleton :       .      . 

^^.el^^n^ropiae  sinidram  ^toldrum  rdnm  lacesscre  vncipinnt. 

1     vttributive  adiectives,  whicli  have  OBJECTS,  dependent  on  them, 

Rem.  1.  ^^\V^'''"'     ?' J  '..'„. r,Hl   that  thev  with  their  objects /(>//^v?c 

generally  '''^''' ^"^/"^^^^ '^^i^A        anv  combination  with 

•  r  m  >a   ia      o  aieVo  the  Romans,  Cnmpa.^.oppida  lionnuus  u^. 

r>     ^o    u  ±era    CO mbin;.^  Latin   phras.^s  are  to  be  translated  into 

^^""^  1    or^hm^er.^^^^^  OIUiStS   of  the   SUBJECT-INFINmVE  ; 

ir'T;Tim  utf"  be  ong^^n^^  to  the  subject,  or  to  the  rREOiCATivE 
'^-  \^''V'o^tkIts  of  t"ie  predicate;  5.  Attuicutes  ot  the  hater. 
6'Sue!:i^^"i^in™ve;  7.  ATTBIBCTES  of  the  latter,  a« : 


8G 


COMBINATION    OF    MORE    TUAN    TWO    MIllASES. 


|i»iiiisli;t   MMioiiiiii   ala   lliiviiiiii   vjido    tiaiisirc 

iii4'i|Ht.  T      •     I     • 

1.  PiiKDKATiVE  I'liUASK:  Ahx  \nn\ni,  the  fnn(/ b,r/ins. 

3.  ATTUir.UTivK  PiiH  ^sl.:  of  the  subject:  Sinistra  sociOrum  ala,  ^A<! 

lift  irin'i  of  the  (illua.  .....    ;,,,;„- 

4.  OBJhX'TivE'niUASEof  the  predicate:  Transiro  incipit,  heouis 

ft)  rro,<(,N'. 

5    ATTIlini'TlVE  ruKASE  of  the  lattiT  .  _ 

6.  0b.tec:t.  niii.  of  the  infenit.  :  Fluvium  vado  transire,  to  cross  tJie 
river  hy  (if<frd. 

7    Attuibutive  piir.  of  the  latter .  ,1.       r    7 

Translatiov  :   The  left  iciufj  of  the  allies  hefnis  to  cross  the  river  bij  ajoid, 

Srytliaruiii  res^iaa»  Cyiiiin  iiiterficcre  liect. 

1.  Impers.  pued.  rnuASK  :  Intortic-civ  hcvt,  It  is  alloicpd  to  hill. 
2'.  Obj.  phu.  ot  suiuKi-r-iNF.  :  Cvrmn  iiitortici'iv,  to  kill  Ci/nis. 

3.  ATTUir.rTKS,  l)olon;j:iiv;J:  to  the  siUri'iT,  &o.  . 

4.  On.T.  piiu.  of  PKEi).  :  Koniiuii  Hcct.  it  is  alloind  to  the  queen. 

5.  Attuihutive   PiiK.  of  tlie  latter:    Scvtliariuu   w^'^avx,  to  the  queen 

o/'ilie  ISciithiaiis. 

6.  Ohjkct.  piiu.  of  theoH.ri:cT-iNFiMTivK  . 

7.  Attkibut.  phk.  of  the-  hitrer . 

Translation  :  It  is  allowed  to  the  quren  of  the  Sri/thians,  to  l:,ll  (i/rns. 

OusKKVATiov  —The  rules  for  the  arniinrcMiuMit  of  the  phrases  and  for  the  inetliod  of  their 
c.rihiiKitioti  ntV-r  to  the  HK<iiLAR  pu^itiui.  of  Lain,  ^s<.^•.ls.  JJut  .leviatioiis  from  the 
n-ular  arraMi:.-in.-nt  arc  vt-i  v  tVi-.iiunt.  «■>p.'.ially  for  tl.riM-  r.-asuns:  I.  Kmi'IIasis;  ± 
rKRSIMCL'IlY;   -i.   ElI'UuNV.       All  »-\[)OSilioll  of   th.-  rilU->.  i-ol»r,Mliln-    Ilusi-    «IfVI  illoiis, 

fiiuU  its  plii.-i-  in    L\nv   lIiiKi(.i:i.\     It   iiiav  Iv  Mitlic  cut.  to  rnii  rk  hi-n-.  tliat  the 
position   of  til.-  Latin  wonis  is  v.  rv  free,  if  .-oiiip-.r.-.l  with   the  ..rran-.iiu-iit  ot   Mm 
Kii.'li'h  .sfiitfiic.-.  vvhicli  is  hoiiii»!  on  IVw  ami  strict  rm-.     '1  he  h.L'iniu-r  v\  ill  si-e  this 
fn.n.  the  foliowiii-  example:  The  |)iirasc  "  th>/  jd.u^ant  Mfe,--  admits  „t  this  one  miuI 
no  other  arran-einent  of  tlie  words  in   En:.'!i>h.  wh  le  the   Latin  transi:amn   ot  t  i.- 
words  may  be  arranged   in    six   different  way< :   Jucund.f  Ulter.i  tu.r  ;  pintuUr  t,t<r  litte- 
r.r:    litUr.r  jiKUud.t    lu,r;  littera   tu"     Uci-iuulf ;    twr   litUfv   jiruH'hr;    la„'  juoi.ain 
litters.     A:illie.>e  ;,rraiii^enu-nts  an- vouch,  d  f.r  by  Ciceroni  .n  pas-i-e>.     (H.ii  nneo      he 
menil.ersof  ai)li-HS(-  isi.is.-rted  Let  w.-eii  the  two  nsemher^  <•!  anotli.-i  phia-e  which  has  n-.  direct 
praninialical  relatiui,  to  it.  a- :  I/'-^r  liltrrnn  S<„raU'.^  uall'im  nli^U'  ■  «  i-;. :  .-ooMies  I'l"»''] 
did  not  leave  a  k-Uer  (l.ehiiLd  l.iin).  Here  the  oiject  litUnon  \-  ii.-erte.l  u.  tlieatinl.wiive  ,d,ra>e 
'/p-«cNot-r'</rx'and  the   snUject  Si,crnli><   is   Hocrled    in  the  attr.  pinase  ' //</<r  <»/i  ?*»/;"//». 
Such  clian^e^  of  the  coiiiniun'  order   an-  not  arMiiaiily  iiiaiie.  hut    a!  wiys  for  c  itai:.  nieKMl  .al 
purposes.     It  La  the  otfl.-c  of  Latiu  rhetoric  topohit  out  these  purposes,  and  !o  sliow  the  means 
hy  whicli  tiiey  are  elfetted. 

EXERCISES. 

^^Analf/ze  and  tmndutt  the  followintj  eotnhined phraneK:^ 
1  Tlie  accurate  aro;iimeiits  of  the  ( J  reek  philosopheit?.  2.  The  hattles  of 
wild  nations  (pop>/hff<)  of  A^a.  o.  They  intend  to  abandon  Sicily  t«j  tlio 
Komans.  4.  We  t<'ach  the  hoys  to  lov*-  tlie  country,  o.  llo  c«.mi)els  the 
inhahitiints  to  return  inildcn]  the  slaves  to  the  masters.  0.  The  decem- 
virs ahsi)lve  the  accused  of  the  crime.  7.  Tlu;  prefect  is  afraid  of 
resTorino  disciidlne.  8.  It  becomes  the  triumvir' to  restore  the  nioney  to 
the  inhabitants.  9.  The  scholars  of  Sempronius  liear  the  renowned  lec- 
tiin-s  of  the  poet.  10.  The  temple  of  the  Kphesian  {Ej/hcviuif)  Diaiui  is  a 
t^rreat  monument  of  Greek  genius  \^in(jtidain). 


COMBINATION  OF   MOKE   THAN   TWO   PHRASES.        81 


x^'^cu^si*      1    The  renowned  victory  of  th« 

„„r>^,.U«  (.■.(«<'<•"'")<>'  l^a'l  ";'■"■  tfirVnn, of  tlio"Tn.ian  (7V..j-(«««)  im- 
o  C  a  .  «.  'ri'«  ^<f  ^'"'"r  Mol  e  ""l«"f  Antiwlius.  8.  The 
■'gnmts.     7.  Tl.e  unt..rc.seen  fl.s.  the  t  o  1^  _^     .,    Ry  the  manifcB 

«ondevlul  ,H-^v..nu.;-e  (nh])  '' 1.  ™!'\  ^!^  *„«  of  the  invincible  anns  o! 
.milt  of  Antlion.Vs  slays,  l?"  Vf  tl  p  uniust  plans  of  the  tvrant.  U. 
"^r^na.r.     11.  The  adversaries  ot  tie  unus^  1^^^^^  ^   The  ostens,- 

T, badness  of  the  '""'r'^»''^,^  "V ,  uk  (Xf'»'''«)  of  the  Koma.i  am- 
ble  (.■.»,«■.-«»»)  cause  of  the  s.uhlen  doul    M«J^  .  ^^  ^,,^  ,„„nt^ 

bas  ado,-..  14.  The  n.an.lest  cause  «  *^^^^.\,,  ,,-,,u„-g  to  deliver  tho 
C<)Mi,iNi;i>  oiWEtTivi;  niuASES  Y:,,,",;,i  to  sell  a  house  to  (^ajus. 
paiKTs  (UiU  ra.)  to  the  trmmvir.  10.  I  tuul  ^^^^_^^  ^^  ^^.  « 
It'  We  are  unwiUin,-  to  oi^n  ''  _^"  1'  \^  j  cannot  allow  the  booty 
'vish  to  assisu  the  cause  to  imi>  ««l^"^^";;  ;„,  ^j^^.  controversy  by  arbi- 
o'the  troops.  .  -20  We  m.^l  ^ ^^^''^^..r.^  the  controversy  by 
^••-r'^-'uT^:'   n     K-'^hinfexnainingVirgilto^ 

r')-.((;</<i  the  arms.  -.1.  '  1"^""  ,.  ,i,„  i„>i,rl,ts  ( ;"'7'"«)-  *'•  He  aivecw 
We  snttVr  ,he  enemies  to  '^^I'^'^'^.V  an  armistice  to  l>on.pey.  .4 
the  ambassalors  t.>  1"-'>1*«',  <^'  "f '  t -mples.  ;!■•).  He  accustoms  the 
We  Ibrbid  the-  troops  to  1'»""  f ,,!;,",  i^nbit  Sempr<,nius  1'™",  ^"^ 
Hon>ans  to  carry  o„  war^.  M.  ^.'^f  \.,.^,„t  u.e  prefect  from  helping 
«iK-ritiie' a  t'-mple  to  Diana.     .>'■    i'"   i 

r,  ;;»-■,-„';,  ih.- allies.  „„TT-rTivK  riiR-^sES.    38.  The  Cartlia 

^   C,  mium:»  iMiKDii  ativE  ani>  ""-^^'Vlie     onians.     3».  The  prelect 
gin';usivt«rn(...M,rc)  the  pnsoners  to  t  »/•-.„,        crown  to ^he 

t,romis,.  victory    o^^;  J  Xse  the  ,.refect  on-l-udence^    4     The 

1''"'";        l,nndr.i^^ac  luit  Oajus  of  perjury  (/'«^'"^{'"l^he  inbai^itants 

:.'-;^fi.:'   he'tmans'by   eh'phants  (5^.,*-^-;,_  %'^^  »      pe  ar* 

intend   to  decide  the   «•""«"""•'■i.^Jp'i^^.^ns  are  unwilling  to  yield 

wiUin.'  to  renew  the  battle.     41,.   ^  ^^/  f  !p';^,„  ,,i,her  wish  to  change 

rV'""•■'TThe^U';^rssX™"r.l:';t^Ve^.^^ 

to  caiiture  tlie  town,     j,-  •■  hnm,nittee  ol  ten  can  1'».'  '  ' 

cannot  sixstaiu  the  battle.     5.i.    "^''^^ '?"  1  «bit  ot  ceiisuring  Uracchi  s 

tlie  utonev.     04.  'Ihe  l'»"-^.^"^  «^ ,  »,"=  :^,l"The  prefect  «i^h^ '"  l»* 
5.-,.  Tl,e  stranger  dares   o  h.  !  a  l.-ajv^    ^^^  ^^  }^^Xm 

^:^^  =^t'i:^;^r  ;:^sr  «0.  ti^iSu^direc. 

permit  the  enemies  tx)  lead  away  v 


88        COMBINATION   OF    MORE   THAN   T\VO    PHRASES. 


the  troops  to  bo  cautions.     (U.  The  prefect  compels  the  inhabitants  t« 
be  friendly  to  the  troops. 

{J/njHr.so)}<if).  (>-•  It  Ls  injurious  to  oflend  the  pcojilc  by  pride.  (VA.  It 
IS  expedient  to  uive  arms  to  the  shives.  (54.  It  is  pnfcrable  to  (Hvide 
tlie  eni'uiies  by  discord.  ().").  It  deliulits  Titus  to  ()l)lige  friends  by  bene- 
fits. «0.  It  is' allowed  to  the  ambassadors  to  acre} )t  the  i/n'ts  {(f(fiiiiin). 
07.'  It  is  expedient  to  Perseus  to  deliver  Corinth  to  the  tyrant.  OS.  It  is 
pleasant  to  the  farmer  to  plough  the  fields. 

Pkedkativk  and  oiuKcnvi:  riiKASKs  with  attkibutks.  (I!).  Tjie 
Carthaginians  r«'ject  the  propositions  { propoxittfiii)  of  the  Rimians^  70. 
The  troops  of  Pyrrhus  succunil)  to  the  hardsliips  of  the  wav.  71.  It 
deliirhts  the  children  of  (Jajus  to  play.  72.  It  is  allowed  to  the  followers 
of  Pompey  to  return  {ndhr).  7:1.  The  fate  of  the  triumvir  terrilies  tlu^ 
hearts  {uniiii'i.s)  of  the  pe«)i)le.  74.  It  is  necessary  to  the  future  ])refect 
to  win  tlie  hearts  of  the  peo[)le.  75.  The  sons  of  .Emilius  prevj'ut  the 
tribune  from  accusing  the  i)refect.  70.  It  is  allowed  to  the  s^)ns  of  (Jajus 
to  be  free.  77.  Perseus  adds  tlie  town  of  Ki)irus  to  the  kingdom  of 
Macedonia.  78.  The  inhabitants  a.ssign  the  real  (/v ///a)  cause  of  the 
conflai^nation  to  the  malice  {/Kfjuitio)  of  the  slaves.  7!).  You  know  how 
to  escai)e  the  envy  of  the  people.  80.  The  people  cannot  ac«iuit  Semi)ro- 
nius  of  the  desecration  {f«irril(/i'im)  of  the  temples.  81.  The  whole 
people  censure  the  rash  undertakings  of  the  i>refect.  82.  Attentive 
scholars  generally  keep  \tciun)  well  the  words  of  the  teacher.  8:>.  Men, 
desirous  (if  fame,  rarely  conmiit  open  crimes.  84.  \Ve  owe  the  innei 
discords  of  the  i)eople*  to  the  nefarious  efforts  of  ba<l  men.  ^o.  Tha 
flight  of  Pompey  may  [posse)  Ik'  pernicious  to  the  whole  country. 

Trail  side  into  Enijllsh  : 

1.  Ineptie  virorum  doctorum  sententifiB.  2.  Temp»  stivo  copiarum  La- 
tinaruni  auxilio.  :>.  Inult;e  Persei  legatorum  i:ijuria\  4.  Immutata 
Pom])«~ji  iiliorum  tithu'ia.  T).  Inauditam  vin'rum  indo<-tdrum  arro- 
gantiaui.  0.  Injusti  deci-mvirOrum  imperii  memoria.  7.  Futuraruni 
po])uli  discordia'rum  causa.  8.  Perju'tua  insiini  triunivirorum  incepti 
infamia.     i>.  Variis  exigui  annon.e  pretii  causis. 

10.  Pnefectum  i)erjurii  accusare  volunt.  11.  Rtmianis  EpTrum  conce- 
dere  nolo.  12.  Anndiiam  cojais  atl'erre  neipieunt.  !:>.  Irani  verbo  sedaro 
{allot/)  ])otest.  14.  Vitam  Deo  reddere  debemus.  '  lo.  Minis  injurias 
addere  audmit.  Kl.  Opi)iduin  terrfi  oppugniire  cupiunt.  17.  Pecuniani 
mercaturjl  comparare  studemus.  18.  Adversarios  verl)is  lace.ssere  inci- 
])iunt.  11).  Captivos  gladio  interlicere  nudunt.  20.  Discipulos  admo- 
nr-re  raro  negligis.  21.  Agros  arare  studidse  discit.  22.  ^'inum  immo- 
dice  bibere  recusamus.  2:].  Magistris  semj^er  grati  esse  debr-nius.  24. 
Romfmos  deos  colere  docet.  25.  Pricfectum  Siculis  picuniam  restituero 
cogo.  20.  Copiis  pr<edam  colligere  (to  colhrt)  i)ermittit.  27.  Legatog 
castra  inspicere  jubet.  2S.  Legatos  ])ra'fe('tum  ra]»iniTru!n  accusarG 
inbet.  21).  Pra'fectuni  ])ra>mia  accii)ere  vetat.  oO.  Sempronium  .Etolia 
auxilium  ferre  prohibet. 

;U.  Oppidani  adversariis  ]X)rtas  a])eriunt.  :52.  Romani  Pcenis  bellum 
indicunt.  \i-\.  Jugurtha  legatos  ])ecunia  corrumpit.  o4.  P<nii  Antiocho 
auxilium  deut-gant.  ;i5.  Pra'fectus  provinciam  PoMiis  prodit.  otf 
CJeutumviri  Roscium  parricidii  (parricide)  absolvunt.     37.  Perseus  legA 


COMBINATION   OF    MORE    THAN    TWO    PHRASEy. 


89 


•  •  ,  1  W.O+  '^^  Roniiini  Siciliam  retinere  cupiunt.  80.  O^ 
tos  imunissis  p.lacat^  •',;,,?  40  Pnefe<tus  castra  oppuonHrc  statuit. 
jus  divitias  com,  arare  /^t^  ^    ^      ^^'  ^^'^  op  id^ni  nmros  delendere  desl- 

juvat.     5i.  Camillum  patria>  restituere  Romanis  conducit.     oo.  I  ra?tecto 

pnpdam  coi/iis  relinquere  licet.  ,  n      ^      r.-,    T>v^f«ptn«  Per«ei 

54  Tvnnni  ministri  legatos  veneno  tollunt.  oo.  I  rfriectus  P(  rsei 
b.;^^os  *.dt  e  ul,^.  5(5.  Rmnanorum  cophe  Syracusarum  divituis  d.npi- 
legatc)^  adiit  ju  ct  conspiciunt.     58    Copiarum  reliquue 

iniuria'    usta  be  li  causa  ?unt.     «0.  tb'iipus  lucuiu  l  uh.»  r, 
7      DeKtera  tiuvii  ripa  bestiarura  ferarum  plena  esse  solet       ...  1  rem 
;opi^Romnnilocios  deficere  cogunt.     73.  Reglna.  m.nistn  loca  pubhea 
adlre  timent. 

Attributive  Pint  xses.     1 .  The  doubtful  fate  of  the  Roman  captive^ 

^  muKTiVF  Pim.SES.  9.  We  try  to  adapt  the  «ord  to  the  sense 
(,„^,"T  10  ™cdo  not  wi8l>  to  f.noo«rage(.o»/r»<„r)  tre=K;hery  by 
^■''''„,  1,  11,.  refuses  to  soml  a  message-  to  the  pret.ct.  1^.  1  can 
r,-wnrds.  "■  "' 7.  *  ,,,,  pi,.i,,.i.,„s  13  He  is  unvvillins  to  assiffn 
recone  le  the  Patru-ians  ««  "',:  P'^.'^V^'  ,'„  to  abandon  the  town  to  the 
the  delay  to  «".aeher  .     U  ^^^^^'^J^^^^^^^,,  ^,  »,,«  sword.     1«. 

He  is 'in    abU  ;  f     'pi  a.b  g  wJn.ls  by  slanders.    IT.They  often  neglect 
He  IS  in  lamt  oi  .  ja         "j,  ,i|,„es  buying  provisions.     lU. 

t,.  guard  t  i.'  walls.    IS.  He  ""''%•'"•'.,         .iq    f  hev  propose  t..  keep 
We  intend  to  examine  the  '>' "^  ae  »  ate  b .      .0    1  ,^^^1  ^^^^^^^^^  ^^ 

(sen.-.re)  the  pronuse»  <^    '^<, V^  '  /    ;^,;    -{^.  Carthaginians  to  abandoa 

S™;r"^l       ^dir^ts  .itaJ^sisumr.o.  guard  .he  f-'-- ^^^tn^'f 
tirbid  the  triumvirs  to  restore  the  pro,K-rty  (bona,  pi.  t.)  to  1  arqum.     ,o. 

Ue  permits  the  troops  '"  if  ■"l^/^^yj;:;';;^;^  p„„  ,SES      2G.  The  tribunes 
CoMi.iNEDPyEi)!  -  Anthony  restores  Egypt  to  CI eo- 

submit  the  ])a]u'r>  to  ine  qmv n.  ^;"  i.^a      oq    The  tribunea 

putra.     28.  Fabricius   prefers   innocence  to   riches,     ^y.   me  inouu 


90        COMBINATION   OF   MORE   TITAN   TWO   PHRASES. 


offend  tli(>  queen  l)v  arr«)<rance.  00.  Tlie  teacher  intends  to  award  tlie 
prize  (?>/v^t////'^///)  to  Charles.  Ol.  The  qne.-n  is  unwlllinir  to  eon  cede 
the  price  to  the  pirates.  ',V2.  The  scrihe  is  in  tlie  habit  of  c jnimunicat- 
inir  the  secrets  to  the  prefect.  30.  The  inhabitants  resoh'e  to  defend 
tlie  town  by  arms.  04.  The  ininiiirrants  wish  to  bo  frien<ily  to  the  in- 
habitants. 05.  The  queen  be«j:ins  to  be  envious  of  the  tribunes.  0.<5. 
Nunia  accustoms  the  Ronums  to  worshi])  (r<>A?r)  the  prods.  07.  The  de- 
ceinvirs  suffer  the  ]>risoners  to  ])eiish.  OS.  The  prefect  hinders  th»; 
troops  from  being  idU'.  0!>.  It  delights  Claudius  to  torture  prisoners. 
40.  It  is  uni)leasant  to  Titus  to  refuse  the  permission.  41.  It  is  better 
to  defend  the  town  by  land.  '^0.  It  sometimes  is  necessary  to  restrain 
the  j.opidace  by  arms.  40.  It  often  is  expedient  to  enemies  to  feign 
friendship. 

PkEDK  ATIVE  AND  OBJErXIVE  PIIIJASES  WITH  ATTRIBUTES.      44.  FOTU- 

pey  subjects  {si/hjirerc)  Asia  to  the  ])ower  of  the  Roman  ])eoi»le.  4").  The 
remains  of  the  troops  try  to  save  life  by  flight.  4t;.  The  mutual  hatred 
of  the  inhabitants  is  tlie  numifest  cause  of  the  war.  47.  \V«'  cannot 
permit  the  ambassadors  of  the  tyrant  to  despise  the  commands  of  the 
people.  4S.  It  is  peculiar  to  the  (Jr«>eks  to  love  the  study  of  ])hilos>.pliy. 
41).  The  gods  freciuetitly  delay  tlie  deserved  {tneritifs)  punishmtMit  (»f 
crimes.  oO.  The  rebellious  hearts  (^o/ i//? ?/.v)  of  tlie  Hauls  are  open  to  the 
eve  of  the  ])refect.  51.  The  divine  ehxpusiceof  TuUius  «'xposes((A^/A=.''^' 
the  nefarious  plans  of  (^itiline.  52.  It  becomes  the  followers  of  Pompey 
quietly  to  accept  the  judgment  of  the  arms.  50.  The  ambassadors  of 
the  Greeks  do  not  kncnv  how  to  deceive  the  great  cunning  of  Philip. 

Translate  into  EngUf<h : 

1.  Incognita  providenti;e  {providence)  divlnrr  consilia.  2.  Invictis  ])0. 
puli  Romani armis.  0.  Imbecilla  Uaji  filiormn  ingenia.  4  Irata  nunti- 
orum  regiorum  verba.  5.  Securum  Antonii  amicorum  perfiigium.  G. 
Generosi  regVn;e  animi  mouumentum.  7.  Dextene  socioruni  ale  fuga. 
8.  Profan^e  Juirurtha'  legatdrum  audaciie  testimonia. 

9.  Adversarios  dob)  vincere  nolumus.  10.  Legfitum  veneno  interficere 
cogitat.  11.  Pnefectum  dt'mentioe  ac<-usari'  desinunt.  12.  Veniam 
Togare  nun(piam  omittit.  10.  Phiiosophiam  impign»  tractfire  incipiunt. 
14?  Copias  arma  abjicere  cogit.  15.  Legato»  ignorantiam  simuhlre 
jubet.     10.  Copias  a'rumuas  perferre  assuefacit.     17.  Tyrannum  .Etolia 

uuxilium  ferre  vetat. 

18.  Pnefectus  incolis  concordiam  commendat.  19.  Porsenna  Tar- 
quinio  auxilium  offert.  20.  Legiiti  incohis  ]tecunia  tentant  {to  tcnqit). 
21.  C»)pia'  castra  valhj  munire  incii)iunt.  22.  Tliebani  (the  Tluhans) 
bellum  Persis  indlcere  timent.  20.  Praefectus  glorijEcupidus  esse  desi- 
nit.  24.  Op])idani  reginam  strenue  defendere  volunt.  25.  Mariuscopiag 
«Tumnas  ])erferre  assuefacit.  20.  Decemviri  legat<^s  oi)pidum  intrare 
prohibent.  27.  Mendacia  dicere  necesse  esse  nnnquam  potest.  28.  Op- 
pidanis  muros  diniere  expedit. 

29.  His]>anifc  ])opuli  P(rndrum  promissa  Pomanorum  amicitia?  ante- 
pdnunt.  00.  Populus  Hagitii  causam  avarifi.e  tribuif.  ?A.  Pnrfectus 
opjadandi-um  animos  falsis  victoriarum  nuntiis  di^cipit.  02.  Agrippa 
Plebrjis  discordi.e  i)ericula  ostendit.  00.  Philipi)us  Pcendrum  h'gatia 
auxilia  promittit.     04.  Populi  Romfmi  provinciiB  apertas  pnefectorum 


THE    APPOSITION. 


91 


raplnas  per^^rre  nolunt.      35.   Socii    Homa..dnvm    arn  c^  ^   comn^^ 
8,.nthe    incipiunt.     00.  Amicdrum  "annnos  benehci  s       n.rc  U^  ..^^^^ 
^demus.     07.  Socidrum  contr<,versias  dyud.c.ire  p  n>ub>  Rma^ 
dum  esse   nequit.     Os.  Praefectum  decreium  ''^\'''''^^^^^^^^^ 
01).  Discipulis  impigris  ampla  diligeuti.e  pra^mia  percipcre  {^to  leveue) 

licet. 


LESSON   XXI. 


THE   APrOSITIOX. 

8  106.  1.  A|»1M»*«*»«»  i«  *"  agreement  of  an  attribu- 
in  F  N01N-,  witl,  its  ftoverning  substantive  in  case,  as  Dionysius 
tyranum,  Dionysius  the  tyrant ;   G.  DionysU  tyranra,  of  Di- 

onvsius  tlie  tyrant,  &e.  . 

The  nonn  in  apposition,  which  with  its  povernmg  nonn  foim» 
an  attributive  phrLe,  bears  the  same  relation  to  the  pkedic.tive 
noun,  as  the  attributive  to  the  predicative  ad.iective 

8  1  or  "  The  AKKEEMENT  of  the  noun  in  apposition  witli  its 
coverning  'substantive  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  pkedicative  noun 
^"th  its  subject.     Hence  it  aUcays  agrees  in  cask,  and  when 

a  MOVABLE  noun,  it  also  agrees  in  gexde.  and  numbeb  with 
loverniug  sul«tau,ive,  as  :  mo.ysio  tyranno,  to  Diony.ius  the 
[vrant;  Lu.retiam  ny,yMram,  Is^x^  the  teacher  ;  Athene» 
iapieutiac  moyistrm,  Athens,  the  teacher  of  wisdom. 

is  Ib.nul  in  tlu-  sui.ie  "'^'"'"■'' f"  n  v,?r  orCOU.ECTIVK  noun,  it  may 

as •  Jxdui  Dei  populu,.  the  Jews,  the  people  ot  Uod. 
S  I08     -A    Latin    nouns  in  a|>positiou    generally   are  placed 
„i*,M;..^ven>in.  nouns,  while  in  Kuglish  they.often  precede 
fy^.a>n,  reolna,  queen  Cleopatra  ;    Sca>na>uler  fiucu.. 

"'Vio' frtt^ad  of  a  simple  nouu  a  whole  attributive 
t,hr>'e  simple  or  combined,  may  be  placed  in  apposition  to  a  gov- 
Irnhig'subs'tantive.     In  this  case  the  attributive  phrase  la  apposi- 


92 


THE    APrOSITIOX. 


tion  must  be  fornud  sc)  tuafoly  j:ccoidii'<r  to  the  riilcs  in  T..  xviii 
&  XX,  and  then  be  i)liieed  affcr  the  iioverninij:  substantive,  and  all 
those  attributes,  that  are  dciH'udi'Ut  on  the  hitter,  as  : 

Lnca-lit,  a  sdihU  toicn  o/  CamjKOiid,  Lueeria,  cxiguuni 
Campania^  oppiiUun. 

An  ext'dleut  statue  of  P<dijdetas,  the  ornament  of  the  Tns- 
culan  rilla,  egrogia  Polyeleti  statua,  vilhu  Tuseuhuue  oruanieu- 
tum. 

Hem.  '2.  A  noun  may  have  more  than  one  apj)osition.  In  this  case  the 
ditterent  appositions  follow  each  other,  each  with  its  own  attributes, 
in  re<2:uhir  order,  as  : 

The  tjinnd  l\ri<iu(ler,  a  son  of  Ci/padus,  Periander  tyrannus,  C\\y 

seli  Hlius. 

GiiKfo,  ((town  oft'dinpania,  the  nursery  of  vices,  Capua,  Campaniaa 

oppidutn,  viliorum  seminarium. 

§  I  10.  ').  If  tlie  number  or  gender  of  the  noun  in  apposition 
is  dillereut  from  tiiat  of  the  governing  noun,  the  predicate  ai»rees 
witli  the  suiuKt'T,  not  will»  tlie  noun  in  ai)jH)sition.  But  if  the 
«••overniiiii-  substantive  is  the  name  of  a  towx  or  crrv,  being  a 
plnralt  tantnni,  and  the  noun  in  apposition  is  a  word,  denoting 
''elf I/,  toif-n,  rill<([ie^^  (as  oppihttn,  clcnsy  urbs,  cicitas),  the 
predicate  agrees  with  the  noun  in  api)Osition,  and  not  with  the 
subject,  as  : 

Canme^  a  small  v'dlaf/e  of  Apulia^  is  dlstine/inshcd  b//  a 
vldort/  if  the  Cartluajunans,  Canna?,  exignus  Apuliae 
vieus,  PaMiorum  victoria  pnech'irus  est  {)tot  imeclane  sunt). 

§  111.  (i.  Of  the  diilerent  names,  by  which  the  same  person 
is  designated,  tlie  first  name  grammatically  is  treated  as  the  gov- 
erning noun,  and  the  others  as  aitositions  to  it.  They  conse- 
quently nuist  agree  with  the  first  name  in  case,  as  :  (iajns  Cor- 
velins  Gracrhas,  Gen.  Gajl  Cornelll  Gracchi,  of  Gajus  Cor- 
nelius Gracchus,  &c. 

Keui.  n.  The  first  names  of  the  Honia'ns  consisted  of  the  f<)llowing  few, 
t^enerallv  desi<j:nated  in  an  abbreviated  form  by  the  initials  : 

A.  Adus,C.  (roju.i  (Cajus).  ( 'n.  CnejoK.  I).  Didnins,  L.  Lucius,  M. 
Mdirus,  M'.  M<i„i>iH,  N.  N'luteri'is.  P.  Publiu.s,  Q.  Quintus,  S. 
Sextus,  Sp.  Sp'irins,  T.  Tit>ts,  Ti.  Tiberius. 

§  11^.  7.  Often  the  Latin  language  uses  the  form  of  an  ap- 
rosrnoN,  where  the  English  language  employs  the  form  of  an  at- 


TIIE   APPOSITION. 


93 


rRiBUTTVE  GENITIVE  (bv  means  of  the  preposition  of)\  and  some- 
times the  reverse  is  the  case.  We  meet  here  the  following  pecu- 
liariti  s  : 

A.  If  the  names  of  cities,  towns,  villages,  islands,  provinces 
and  i.isiRicTS,  are  accompanied  by  their  corresix)nding  appellative^ 
ii()un<,  the  English  language  connects  the  name  of  the  city,  town, 
district,  &c.,  iry  the  preposition  of  as  ''the  city  of  Capua,  the 
district  of  LiquriaP  This  attributive  relation  is  expressed  by  an 
apposition  in  Latin,  so  that  the  name  of  the  city,  district,  &c.,  is 
made  the  <roverning  substantive,  and  the  appellative  noun  is  placed 
in  api)osition  to  it.  Tims  the  plirases  ''  the  city  of  Capua,  the 
?V<y,/./ o/\S7(v7//,"  must  be  changed  into  ''Capua,  the  city  ;  ^Si- 

cihj,  the  island,''  as  :  ,.,//• 

n-  to.n,  or  Tarennn.,,  Tarentnm  (rarely  ^.r^u// oppianm)  ;^^..%^^ 

ci-  With  the  u^nl  nv'nnn,  h..wevor,  attributive  penmves  are  used  and  i  ot 
n;.pc>sitions,  a'  :  Cn,ra'foria>  r.pnnn  et  r„pn.  i..,Uu  the  kia.^dom  of  Cappa- 
dori:i  and  the  island  of  Cyprus  (Cic.  Fanu  1;^  4,  15). 

The  name  of  a  district  {ayer)  is  designated  by  an  ad.iective. 
formed  from  the  name  of  the  i)eople  inhabiting  it,  as  :^  The^  dis- 
trid  ofLiiiuria,  ager  Liguricus  (literally  :  the  LiyurianJiM); 
the  district  of  Zurich,  ager  Tigurlnus. 

\\    The  birthplace  or  residence  of  individuals  m  English  gen- 
erally is  expressed  bv  the  preposition  of  with    a  noun,   denotmg 
the  place      l>ut  in  Latin  the  name  of  the  place  is  changed  into  a 
civic  noun,  which  is  made  an  apposition  to  the  name  of  the  per- 
son, or  into  a  civic  adjective,  as  :  ^  ^  .  ..  -o  ^     -  •    n 
IJry  of  Patai'ium,  Livius  Patavlnus,  G.  Livu  Tatavim,  JJ. 
Livio  Patavino  (literally  :   IJry  the  Patavian).     Horace 
of  Veuusium,  Horatius  Yenuslnus  (literally  :  Horace  the 
Venusian). 

p:fr  It  appears  con.eqnontly,  that  the  title  of  a  familiar  elementary  Latin  work, 
"  Vii  i  lio)ime,^'  i.s  bad  Latin. 

C  Names  of  months  in  connection  with  the  appellative  noun 
*'  month''  in  English  likewise  are  connected  by  the  preposition 
of'  but  in  Latin  the  names  of  months  are  adjectives,  as:  the 
month  <f  January,  mentis  (3d  decl.)  Januarius  (literally:  the 
Januarian  7aoHth). 


iU 


THE    APPOSITTOX. 


D.  Names  of  stars  on  tin*  conr.'arv  in  Eni^li-^li  tako  ilio  appel- 
lative noun  "  .s7</r"  in  the  form  of  an  APeosirioN,  while  hi  Latin 
the  NAME  of  the  star  is  made  an  ATruiHrrivE  (jexitivk,  as  :  "  Tlie 
star  Saturn,  Saturni  stelhi  (Htcrallj:  the  star  of  Saturn), 

E.  A  word  whi(;li  is  quoted  as  such,  with  the  apposition  'word' 
(verbum),  '  noun  '  {norne/i)  etc.,  is  made  an  ai  tkibutivk  oknitivk 
of  verhum,  nonien  etc,  as:  The  wonl  Mr;>u<l,'  rrr/nf)n  doll  {doH 
verhuin).     For  tlie  appositions  to  '  name,'  see  P.  II.  p.  82. 

EXAMTM.K  or   AVM.YSIS:  THKYCUO-STHK  T?TIOnA\'TT«.  A  BIIOAD  KIVER  OF  GaUI.. 

A.  Skkkktux.    TIu'v  cnis»;  tlu' Illi'uiaiui-^,  IllKxld^mn  trmi-o  imt. 

B.  AiTKiBi'TivK  piiuAsKs :  1.  PfriiASK  WITH  APPosiTrnv.  The  Rliodnnti*  rivor, 
JifiO'lnmim  fliitvnn.  2.  f'oMroi'NO  attiub'tive  plirn-c  (It'p  ndent  ou  the 
apnostioii  './?// r? '///^ '  .•  A  hmnd  river  of  (Jaiil  :  laf'on  (rfiUlp  furi'tm 

C.  Akuanokmknt,  In-  placini:  tlu'  appositioiiMl  pJirasc  '  f(ttnn)  (iaTh^  flhrinrn'' 
after  the  iroverniiiL'  noun  lihodamtm,  in  the  skeleton  :  RfLodanuin,  latum 
Oallice  Jl'tviu/n,  traaseiinf. 

EXERCISES. 
I. 

A.   ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES,   CONTAIXTNG   APPOSITIONS. 

1.  By  Priscianus  the   f-ranimarian  if/r<tinmaticun).     2.  Of  tin'  erram 
marian  Priscianus.     ;l  To  tlie  poet  Virg^il.     4.  O  tribune  Sei>tinmlrj us  I 
5.  To   (]ueen    llortensia.     G.  Of  the   teacluT   Lucretia.      7.  By  .Emilia 
the   assistant.     8.    By  tlie   town  of  CasilTnum.     !).    To   the  village   of 
Leuctra.     10.   To  the  town  of  Seiresta.     11.    By  tlie   river    Rliiiie.     12. 
By  the  district  of  'Salernum.     l;i.  The  diijjtrict   {ohj.)  <»f    Brundusjuni. 
14.   Knnius  of  ^Kudife.     15.   Terence  (r/Z/y )  of  A fiica.     10.  Of  ^I).  .Junius 
Brutus.     17.  ToQ.  Mucins  Scfpvola.     18.  ByM'.  Ciirius  DentHtus.     li). 
L.  Seririus  Catiline  (^6j.).     20.    By  the  island  of  Sardiiua.     21.    To  tlie 
Btar    Uranus.      22.    To  tli-i  •Salient inians,    a    people   of   Calabria.      23. 
To  Cn.  Poniprjus  Mai2:nus,  the  renowned  adversary  of  C.  Julius.     24.  Of 
Athens,  the  rival  of  Sparta.     25.  By  the  triumvir  M.  Antonius,  the  rival 
of  Octavianus.     2(1.   To  the  Latin  poet  Virgil  of  ''Mantaa,  the  friend  of 
Augustus.     27.  The'  banks  of  the  Ister.  a  'rapid  river  of  Paiuionia. 

1.  Seneca  p]dloso])hus.  2.  Seneoa»  phiioso})!»!.  IJ.  Senecje  i)hilesopho. 
4.  Seneca  ])hilosopho.  5.  Victoria  {proper  ikiihc)  regina.  (J.  Victoria? 
regln;e,  7.  Victoriam  reglnam.  8.  Victoria  reglna.  \).  .Ennlia  magis- 
tra.  10.  vEuiiTue  nuigistnp.  11.  Sa<runtuni  oi)ii(!um.  12.  Sagun^)  op- 
pido.  13.  Leuctra  vicus.  14.  Leuctnlruni  vici.  15.  Cannis  o})i)iil<j.  10. 
Ca]>uri  oppido.  17.  Nuniidia  ])rovincia.  18.  Khodo  insuhe.  l!l.  Vejos 
oi)])idum.  20.  Vulturnus  lluvius.  21.  Vultiirno  Huvio.  22.  Lucio 
Metello  Cimbro.     23.    Liicii  Ann.ei  Seneca?.     24.    Agro    i^atavino.     25. 


^  Sttlervnm  U)rm9,  i\\e  ndjectiv»»  Snlernitrinnn.  litemlly,  •'h^-lintfthiq  to  Sttlprvitm!" 
When  we  siiL'irest  adjeotives  nf  this  kinti  in  the  notes,  tiiey  uiwiys  will  he  (je.-iignated  hy  ••  hfi> 
Ittixjing  to'''  '^  B'Uiiiiu-^'DiHM.  belonirina  t»»  Brnii  lii>iii;n  ••  /in'fuii.s.  beloiiiriiiif  t<>  UudiiO. 
*  Let  llie  begiiuitr  ahvjtys  write  «ml  tlie  ahbrevi.itions  of  tho  Hr-t  n:iiiu'>  in  Ux-  trausln- 
lion.     *  SiiUentinuH,  a  SJallentiiiiiin.      «  JJuntiidnua,  beUuiging  to  Mantiui.     ''  Kai>iil,  tur 


THE    APPOSITION. 


95 


Ag.nm  ^Tarentinum.     20.  "  ^Amenno     27^^o^;  I^j^  ^ 

ff  Cantabros.  Hispanije  l-l'^^^^"  '  ^  .r;';,/^    ,f  32.  Eximia  Mercurii 

^-    "  PHRASES. 

Brundusini,    Lima   geneu,   trai,fcmce  i  ^.^^^-^^^^^  Volscos,  autupmin 

Seneca?   tragrediaui,  leg.u-e    l)ra>ta^.     4.  .^^         pra^clarum  Mer- 

Latii  poptdtttn.  vmcip.  ^■^^^;^'2nZn  tlagiliorum  nnnistra,  p<vpu^i 
curii  teuipUnu  l''^^^/'^-. , ^  ~    D mm  Metroddram,   Aristonici  ^^Tlie- 

Komfiui  decreta  deridet.  _  '•  J^''''"'mc'   ,itoliuiii,  deorum  douuim,  dese- 

s;S;:r"t"K=™.'-4s"^^""'  ^^*^-"^-" '-''""' 

is  allc.wod  to  l>l"°yf"^-,*  ;«,'>;:„":  a  ™  .:^e  f  S,°.!n,  refuse  to  yield  to 
of  the  g<Kls.  a.  'Ihe  ;'  '  "'  ,;:f,^,;;  '4  ". -He  ,,„s  „f  the  tyrant  I'is.stra. 
Drusus.  the  prelect  ot  \'  '  l'^.'^^.'^i^;,f  *ii,„,„o,lius.  r,.  H„rt.-n9.u.  the 
tus    torture   ••'l.c-ena    the   Hhiki   oi  ivxplain  the  cans,' ot  tlie 

Varne.l  -attorney  of  the  »''""*;'•;'  J»,,^,,;:  'Lueretia.  the  private 
dispute.  «.  "hou  canst  »^"  «^"f;  ^,  ','^,„„p|,v,  the  t  «cher  of  hie. 
asistaut  of  the  tyrant.  <.  ^','»  ''' "''^  .^  tlie  rival  of  Rome.  9.  The 
8.  TuUns  Hostiliu.  destroys  •  \    a  L^^'»;^»^^  ,„    ,,.,,,  ,„„-„  of  E,ii- 

Uomans  plun.ler  S^yracuse.  a  «>'"  •  "'  ^i  of  the  --Peloponnesian  war. 
danmus.  a  cohmy  ot  ',"•■7;™;  /,  '  ^^t  n  P  ef  ct  -Ehutius.  li.  Deme- 
1,.  Wo  wish  to  save  '1'^./'';  '  'd,.'!'"!!  of  Cassander.  13.  Tliev  in- 
trius,  Anti,:;onus  sou,  k.  Is  -\'^.^;'"?A';,.\,,"\vrant  Dionvsius.  14.  The 
tend'  to  award  a   'prue  ^^^^ ,.  ^,^,,;  „,-  ,,„gust-„s.     1.5.  We  in- 

1.  Syracuse,  a  colony  of  Corj-th   is  frien^^^^^^^^^^^ 

i:^,^rr  r  sr;atr  .|utl;rE;^pt%s  t,.  favU  tiieto„_n^ 

^ o    4 ..^ „,.-,, .tiv    >iijli»n<Tin2  to  Aniens. 

river  in  upper  lt:ily,  ti-e  im»<  en.  P.  .     ''''^'     "  U  Xr<,pof>tfn,ns,  belonirmg    o  Ne.-.po- 
[.ThrhunMS.  bolt.i.ginir  to  Tlu-bes.  a  T'..b.u  .  Vju  ji^       ^    ^^^   „,„,e  <,f  an  Athenian 

woman.      ••^^  AU.M-n^-y,     p<it-ouus.  '  »    -a  p.IouonneUacuH.        ""^  "t*'\  ^    •', 

ancient    resitU-ncc   of    the    k'Jgs    -^    ^'''Tremperantia.       3i  PuUUanus.     belu..gm.? 


90 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


4  Lvsander  takos  Athens,  the  rival  of  Sparta.  5.  Ari)iiiuin  a  small 
toxvii  <.f  Latium,  is  the  •^-'birthplaco  of  C.  MariiK.  G.  -^i  iiular,  r,t 
Thebos,  'Svins  eternal  glorv.  7.  The  town  of  Ai^nigentum  is  a  colony  ot 
the  Khodians.  8.  Ih'  nei^lects  to  aapiire  -wealth,  tjie  assistant  ot 
fame.  i).  Tiie  K<mians  do  not  wish  to  lose  th.-  island  ot  Medy.  lU. 
Perseus  directs  the  troops  to  i)hin(h'r  the  district  ot  Tl^'h^'^^-  ,,1-.^'^^* 
island  of  Britain  is  dear  to  Julius  A-ricola.  the  fatlier-in-law  of  I  Jicitus. 
1  Ilerodoti  •''llalicariiassei  histoiiani  lecrhims.  2.  liisthTUS -Milesius 
Darluni  krdere  nou  vuit.  ',].  I'ersa^  uurum  ^'\Vtticuin  vastaut.  4. 
3-'(.\)irvran  Pcriandri,  Corinthi  tvraiini.  filium  interfi<-iunt.  o.  Minerva, 
sapieiitife  dea.  (iran'os  -"'oleam  serere  docet.  0.  Masinissani  popuh 
Romani  sociuin.  defendere  volunuis.  7.  A<>:rippa  trd)riuus  1  U-bejos 
Patriciis  ivconcilijTre  studet.  8.  T.  Annius  P.  riodiam.  mveteraiuni  M. 
Tullii  ininiium.  iutcrficit.  9.  PuMii  airrum  -"Panorniitanuni  vastare 
pergunt.  10.  ■'■^Segestaui,  Siciliae  poi^ulus,  Honianis  niagnani  Irumenii 
copiani  donaut. 


LI^SSON   XXII. 

COOKDINATE  rilP.ASES. 

§  113.    1.    The  coordination  of  ])hrnsos  (§  83)  is  tlircofold: 
either  copiilalivc ,  or  ili)*Jnurlivi ,  or  advn^ative, 

accordinj,^   to    the  ntUure    of    the   conjunctions,    by   which   the 

phrases  are  connected. 

Rem.  1.  roiijuiK-tioiis  are  words,  connecting  sentences  or  plirases 
with  each  other. 

^  114.  2.  If  coordinate  phrases  have  eiiher  the  same 
GOVERNING,  or  the  same  dependent  word,  tlie  common  word 
generally  is  expressed  only  once,  as: 

A.  rREincATivE  pnii.^SES. 

Metellus  H  .Emilias,  triumphant.  .VrfjUxs  and  ^^iniluii^  triumph 
(^>^.^'-^(/^^■''M('telllls  tnuniphsf«//</ .EinUius  triuniphs'').         ,.    ,      ,     . 

Metellus  venit  et  vincit,  M*tell>iH  coims  and  w  victorious  {instead  of 
"  Metellus  comes  ^/'CZ  Met  ell  us  is  victorious').  ,y,,^j,         ;, 

Ambuhlre  conducit  rt  juvat.  It  i,s,Hrrnrn,hh'  and  (lrhf//,ffu/  to  walk 
(instead  of'h  is  serviceable  to  walk  aud  it  is  delighttul  to  walk    ). 


Ic/m  1 -t  -s     u   ritv    in  Asia    Minor.     '^^  Atfirm.    lu-lonsini:  to    .\thens.       ^^O.rrj/r.uHx, 
aConvrem      io^  an    olive-tree.     *^  ranormit  inu><.    h.Um^Uvj:   to    ranom.us.  the 

modern  ralermo.     "  Segestdnus,  u  Segostian,  inhabitant  of  Segesla. 


COORDINATE    PHRASES. 


97 


B.   OBJECTIVE   PHRASES. 

Grammaticam  ct  philosophiam  discit   5".  ler^rns  grammar  b^^  phUoso- 
phy  {instead  of  "  he  learns  grammar  and  he  learns  philosophy  ). 

C.    ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASES, 

Antonii  et  Qeopatrre  vit«^,  The  lives  of  Anthony  and  Cleopatra  {instead 
of  *•  the  life  of  Anthony  and  the  life  of  Cleopatra  ). 

If  subjects,  predicates,  objects  and  attribntes  are  thus  connect- 
ed bv  coordinating  conjunctions,  having  either  the  same  govern- 
ing, or  the  same  dependent  word,  they  are  called  coordinate 

subjects,  objects,  &c. 

I.  COPULATIVE  COORDINATION. 

S  115  3  In  order  to  form  a  copulative  coordination, 
the  KiKvlish  language  employs  the  conjunction  ^^  and^  which  is 
rendered  by  one  of  the  following  Latin  conjunctions  :  et,  ac, 
at  que  and  the  enclitic  que.  The  first  three  are^  placed  between 
the  coordinate  words,  while  the  conjunction  qtce  is  affixed  to  the 
end  of  the  last.  Of  tliese  atque  cannot  be  used  before  a  conso- 
NANT,  and  ac  not  before  words  beginning  with  a  vowel,  nor  before 

c  aud  qu,  as  : 

Darius  loses  life  and  kingdom,  Darius  vitam  et  ^^gji™  perdit  {or  vi- 

pin.iuos  atque  amicos,  or  propihquos  ^micosque,  not  ac). 

S  1  1 0  4  The  conjunction  et  (not  atque  or  ac)  often  is 
placed  l)efo're  each  of  the  coordinate  words  or  phrases,  answering 
to  the  following  three  Euglisli  connections  :  I.  hoth-and ;  1) 
^^^f  ^,j,^^bia  also  ;  3.  as  icell—as  ;  as  : 

^2^::Z^^  kll^'as ;"  n  o";  tL"sabinians.  as  of  the  Vo.sclans). 

S  I  I  7  .5  If  two  puKmcATivE  phrases,  which  have  a  common 
PUEn..AT.;  are  co,,uh.tivel.y  co.inectcd,  the  pmlicate  in  En^Mish 
al,ra,/.o,  and  i.i  Latin  ffenerall!/  is  placed  in  the  PLrBAL^  But  ,f 
the  coordinate  subjects  are  things  in  the  singular,  and  express 
related  ideas,  which  may  be  considered  as  om,  the  Latin  predi- 
cate stacds  in  the  singular,  as  : 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


99 


98 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


^^nilSu^  and  MeteUiis  die,  iEiuilius  Metollusquo  oboiint  ;  6'/^ ;       ^ 

anget  (not  augent).  ■  •,       .       i 

Rem  ^^  The  connnon  predicate  sometimes  is  placed  in  }^J^^;^ 
evl^n  i  the  cor-rdinate  subjects  do  not  contain  rehited  «1^'^^«-  ^  ;\\'^ 
s  iWects  are  connected  by  et~et,  the  prechcate  may  be  placed  in 
th^-^sino-ufar(>r  plural,  even  if  the  subjects  denote  pehsons,  unle^s 
one  of Ihem  is  ^n   the    plural,  in  whi<-h  case  the  predicate  always 

'^!:i^^ar!:^n::^-Laclius  consent,  etMnc-.nns  et  L.lius  con- 
^^XrS':;;:^,  temfy,  et  min.  et  ira  torrent  inot  terret). 
S  1  1 S     6    If  the  common  predicate  consists  of  a  predicative 
adjective  and  tlie  copula,  the  number  of  both,  adjective  and  copu- 
la is  determined  by  the  last  rule  (§117),  as  : 
'mpparchus  and  Thessalus  are  cruel,  Hipparchus  et  Thc^ssalus   s.evi 

^%rQinia  and  Lucretia  are  renowned,  Virgnia  et  Lucretia  clarre  sunt. 
War  and  Uanger  are  past,  bellum  pericul unique  pra3teritum  est. 

But  if  the  subjects  are  of  different  genders,  both  adjective  and 
copula  must  be  in  the  plural,  and  the  adjective  assumes  the 
MASCULINE  gender,  if  the  subjects  are  persons  or  heasts.  and  the 
neuter  gender,  if  they  are  things  avithout  life,  as  : 

The  son  and  daughter  are  stndions,   filius  et  filia  studios/  sunt 

TheZmlfand  ihe-mlfare  tame,  lupu.s  et  lupa  mausuet.  sunt. 

1  OU  and  labor  are  lost,  oleum  et  opera  perdita  sunt. 
Rem    3    These  rules  apply  also  to  those  predicative  adjectives,  with 
which  the  copula  forms  an  onjE(  t-infinitive,  as  : 

Gajus  and  Sempronius  must  he  ready,  Gajus  et  Sempromus  parati 

?;va^/i^r^!;//(f  P^rj.^;-^  cease  to  he  disgraceful,  pcrfidia  et  perjuriuni 
ignominiosa  esse  desinunt. 
§  1  19.  7.  If  two  attributive  phrases,  which  have  the  same 
attributive*  adjective,  are  copulatively  connected,  we  distinguish 
the  following  two  cases  : 

1.  If  the  coordinate  governing  nouns  are  of  different  numbers 
the   adjective  generally  is  repecded,  and  placed  before  each  of 

them,  as  : 

He  overcomes  the  ohstacles  hy  great  dangers  and  perseverance,  impedi- 
menta  magnis  periculis  magnfuiue  perseverantia  superat^ ^ 

1  A  Latin  proverb,  meaning,  that  all  efforts  are  In  vain. 


V 


2.  If  the  two  governing  nouns  are  of  different  genders,  denot- 
Inn- THINGS,  thc  adjcctivc  either  is  placed  before  the  former  of 
the  nouns,  and  agrees  with  it,  or  it  stands  after  either  of  them, 
agreeing  with  the  one  it  is  connected  with,  as  : 

Gaius  is  distinnniHhed  hi/  re?narkal,le  talent  and  scholarship,  1.  Gajus 
Hiiro  in-onio  ac  doctrina  f.ra^stat,  or  2.  Gajus  ingenio  miro  ac  doctrina 
pra^stat,'"//'  3.  Gajus  ingenio  ac  doctrinfi  mira  pnestat. 
Rem.  4.  Even  in  the  secx)nd  case  it  is  quite  usual,  to  repeat  the  adjective 

before  each  of  the  governing  nouns. 
Rem.  .5.  If  two  coordinate  attributive  adjectives  are  dependent  oti  the  same 
uoun,and  the  noun  implies  two  different  things  or  persons,  ad  >t- 
gui>hod  hvtho  two  a.ljectives,  the  number  ot  the  "«'^".^^/^  ,^^(^^.^^^^ 
PLURAL,  as  in  English,  or  the  singular,  as:  The  Latm  and  Gictk 
huiiruages,  Lingua  (or  linqucB)  Lafina  et  GrcEca. 

§  laO.   8.  The  copulative  and  adversative  conjunctions  some- 
times are  07mtfed,  and  the  coordination  is^  then  called  Sisyu- 
flctic  (that  is  "being  without  conjunction"). 
Rem.  r>.  Of  more  than  two  coordinate  phrases  the  first  two  regularly  are 
connected   a.v/ud.(iodly,   in  English  as  well  as  ^^  Latin.     But  in 
Latin  even  the  third  and  following  phrases  generally  ha%e  no  con- 

^''^^Th^y^drfend  children, property  and  lives,  liberos,  fortunas,  vitas  de- 

fc-ndunt. 

Iconic,  see  and  conquer,  Venio,  video,  vmco. 

II.  ADV^ERSATIVE   COORDINATION. 
§  1^1.  0.  The  adversative  coordination  is  a  copulative 
connection  of  opposite  ideas.     The  adversative  conjunctions  are  : 

1.  J)((t,  sed,  vermn,  autem,  vero,  at ; 

2.  jStlll,  yet,  tamen,  sed  tamen. 

^edj  verlmi  and  at  always  stand  before  the  first  word  of  the 
phrase'  which  tbey  connect,  while  autem,  vero,  and  generally 
tamen,  are  placed  after  the  first,  sometimes  after  the  second 
word  of  the  connected  phrase,  as  : 

The  Romans  Pjht  hravely,  hut  the  all ies  flee,  Romani  strenue  pugnant, 
Bed  (rerum)  socii  fugiunt,  or:  socii  autem  {vero)  fugmnt. 

lluy  often  fiyht^y^t  never  conquer,  Saepe  pugnant,  nunquam  tamen 

vincunt. 

III.  DISJUNCTIVE  COORDINATION. 
§  l!355.    10.  The  disjunctive  coordination  in  English  is 


100 


COORDINATE   PHliASES. 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


101 


formed  by  the  conjunction  or,  wluch  .generally  is  rendeml  by  the 
Latin  conjuiction  ant.  The  donble  connection  either-OT^ 
usually  is  expressed  by  "  ant—aut;'  as  : 

We  intend  to  oecujv,  the  right  or  left  honk  of  the  riur,  Dexterani  axii 

''''f:^^:!:^  or  tke  Carthaginians,  aat  Re 

mHiiis,  aut  Poeuis  adli^orrre  dubi'tis. 
jy  Fur  the  use  ut  vel^vel,  and  sive—nice,  see  p.  -M)  foil. 

IV.  ANALYSIS  OF  COOUDIXATK  I'lIRASES. 
S  133  11.  Cc.Ordinato  pl.rascs  are  nnalyze.l,  like  combised 
nhrases  I'y  resolvin-  tl.ein  into  their  eleinentary  plirascs,  and 
translatins;  these  sin.^ly.  They  are  urno./ed  by  e.xj.ressing  .he 
common  word  once,  a.ul  joining  the  coordinate  words  m  snciv  a 
manner,  that  tliev  tof;efhe>- f.xU  the  same  place  either  before  or 
afto.r  the  eomn.on  word,  a.  each  of  then,  had  in  the  sn.-  e  phrases. 
If  phrases  have  no  common  w.>rd,  they  are  simply  I'hu'w'  together, 
and  joined  by  the  recinired  conjunction. 

Bern.  7.  It  generally  i.  b..t  for  '•'■^---. '"/-the"o,.rnm.T.r«ris. 

coCrdinate  phrases,   to  drop  at   first  one  "'.     ''        , ,  \,,t,.     ,,,ases 

•  and  to  translat..  tU.  «-.Uencc  Y'"'''?'  ,  ;  rolRniNVT     w    t.  B,  en- 

nr,.  then  seimratelv  constituted,  and  tlie  co..ri>inati,  w  > i ,     . 

ml,.,  d  inUtem,  substituted  lor  the  single  ccirdotate  wo.d  m  the 

'"tlVKy'^KNTEXCK:     The   boys   wish   to   he   devoted   and 

tliankful  t(»  the  tfiichcr.  »  ,,„i   tlvmkfiil"  •    PaeH 

1.  Omitting  tht'  coordinate  adjective  "and  tlianktiil    .    rutn 

micjixtrix  dtditi  ense  c  a  pi  ant. 

2.  Cor»lU>lNATE  PHRASES  :  , 

wish  to  be  devoted,  dediti  es^e  c^ipvnit; 
wish  to  be  thankful,  (jrati  emi  oipiunt. 
R     -VRHVNCFMENT   bv  Substituting  the  coordinate  word,  deddi 
'•  ^^i^v  Iw  single  coordinate  word  dedit.  m  the  sentence : 
Pneri  m.ujistris  drditi  it  u rati  es..e  cxpi'fnt. 
Bern.  8.  Coordinate  ATTUinrTivH  P^J-^- lu.vi.;p  c;<m.rnjon  aHn^ 

adjective,  are  constituted  according  to  M>-      ^^'    't    c  »  r    na^ 

tlu'  crovei'iiiniT  uoim,  a> :  .        ,  i  xi 

OJVEX  hyTENGE:    Large  fiM  and  foresU  mrroxmd  the 

t Skeleton    (droppia;?    one    of   the    coordinate    euhjects): 
Agri  domum  cingunt. 


«    r.  .•^T.T^T.mr     ATTTUBUTIVE    PHRASES:     Large    fields   and 

••  fS::r-^7ri  »u,7";<rSe  ,•  («r ,«.,.»  «.h  «<=  «^»".  -^  "^^ 

.  ^^:ft;cKMEV.■•l*•'s,U;stituting  the  cor,r,hnate  phrases  for 
^■th;.irg^S^w.;rd  a,n  in  the  skeh..ton :    Agn  magma. 

Mr,,,'  d ,o„ci„;/,n,i  (<'V'"'^"'.,'J;f.'to"be  [..  ned  bv  coordina- 

Bern.  9.  If  compound  "'"'^^"^^«^'[^.t^ri'n  jl   'hra  es    c^^^^  th. 

^^Z^::^'Zr::^^Lts^:J.^e^  in  either  of  the 

'■' •ri;;'.';:;":!:.  "uajus  by  protmses,  and  Sentpronius  by  money." 
1.  Single  ™<^^-         promises.  G'lj'im  promism  plaeat ;_ 
t  "aira^e»  Se'^^-r'^iniC  by  mW,  Scmpronia,n  pecunu. 
ploeat. 
'■  ^S"W  prrraXle^pronius  by  money,  Gajun. 
promim.  ,1  S„,pro„0„n  ;|^c««M.  „^^5^^,^  compound 

^Gojum  promissis  ct  Scmpronium  pecunia  placat. 

EXERCISES. 

tsg- Analyze  the  folloiringcoordin,dcpl,raj<es: 

,%  pren't  e.ce,s  by  P-'™-  ^^.^  ro^plet;;!    I.  W^ 
duumvirs  are  unwi  Img  to  «f  ■;',';  .^'"'^'"tuJ  teacher  praises  the 

injustice.  ^tro.evQ       1      Thev  capture   and   destroy 

CooUDiXATE  OBJECTIVE   ^^^f'^^'l^-}^-^  Su   )i-ius      8.  We  surronnd 
Nun.antia.     2.  He  accuses  ^^^Vl  anrc-m^^^^^  ''■  ^^^'' 

and  kill  the  allies.     4.  '1  hey  y'^l^^''"^  ^''^l^^^  and  'opposed 

are  dear  and  ple^isant  to  the  ^^^J^^^  l'\ie  pleads  and  defends 
to  the  war.  7.  ^ou  labor  and  ^^'»["  ,^VhP  I'm^^^^^  10  We  either  admon- 
eloqnently.     9.  They  caj.ture  ^^/^.l^^^f  ^^^^^^^^^    V  fe,  but  plunder  the 

ish  or  punish  %^f^^  J;^J^\^^cZ.  to  'the  erlemies.  13. 
Vop^rty.     12.     The>  tigUt  bravei>,  ii    They  olten  open 


•lev  tignt  nraven,  out  ^u.v^.."  ^-      Thev  often  open 
^Ve-al..u,d,.n  the  town,  yet  we  retain  the  eas  e.     14.  Th  y^oiten  op^_^ 

the  mouth,  still  «'-•>, -T|;;;,.;'i*:„;^,rt.h  the  n.an  and  the  crime, 
house  an.l  fzarden.  Id.  )h.>  f  """"\\  "■  ,,  4,,^.  corruption.  18.  ^\  e 
IT.  We  not  o.tly  censure,  but  »>^'!  V'^^.^J'  .  [,  ^  ,,_  l,,-  ,,„„.„ge  „nd 
expect  either  d.-ath  or  victory.  1"- /1''.  •'f'^.'';  .,;  We  pve  both 
coilidence.  iO.  Tlvy  read  e.ther  "^f,  ^^^^  ;,  ,1  t„ry  and  glory  ic 
^Z^'iri^:^^^'^  «»i-  -d  Semprlus.    ^ 


iContrailus.    ^  Bona,  G.  bonorum.    »  Emittere. 


102 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


acquires  fame  and  money  bv  diligence.  25.  He  never  loses  a  battlo  by 
imprudence  or  nog-ligcnce.  2G.  They  generally  displt^ase  by  ignorance 
or  arrogance.  27.  1  know  how  to  reconcile  friends  and  relatives.  28. 
They  intend  to  concpicr  or  to  peritih.  29.  Tliey  either  are  not  able  or 
not  willing  to  explain  the  sentence.  30.  He  knows  how  to  read,  but  he 
does  not  know  liovv  to  write.  31.  They  can  lose  life,  but  they  never  can 
^lose  fame.  82.  We  teach  the  children  to  be  contented  and  happy.  33. 
He  directs  the  duun»vii-s  to  ''arrest  and  to  guard  the  accused.  ;>t.  He 
compels  both  P«'rseus  and  the  ^-Etolians  to  •'require  an  armistice.  35. 
He  permits  Gajus  either  to  remain  or  to  go  away.  30.  He  permits  the 
ambassadors  to  ''recite  the  papers,  but  refuses  to  %dmit  Perseus.  37. 
We  wish  not  only  to  help,  but  also  to  teach  the  freedmen.  38.  Thou 
accusest  Gajus  of  perjury,  and  Sejus  of  treacln^y.  31).  He  sends  horst^ 
to  the  })refect,  and  money  to  the  troops.  40.  They  begin  to  approach 
{adlre)  the  walls,  and  to  harass  the  inhabitants.  41.  I  intend  to  bribe 
the  ambassador  by  money,  and  the  tribune  by  influence. 

Coordinate  predicativp:  purases.  42.  \Vars  and  battles  delight 
the  Scythians.  43.  Discord  and  hatred  destroy  the  glory  of  the  country. 
44.  Phoebus  and  Minerva  grant  wisdom  to  the  minds.  45.  The  j)en  and 
the  sword  are  the  masters  of  the  earth.  4().  Pride  and  arrogance  dis- 
please. 47.  Avarice  and  corruption  are  disgraceful.  48.  Lucretia  and 
the  queen  are  free.  4i).  The  queen  and  the  ])refect  are  dear  to  the  in- 
habitants. 50.  Earth  and  heaven  are  full  of  the  benefits  of  God.  51. 
The  house  and  the  garden  are  valuable.  52.  Crassus  and  the  i)refect 
cannot  be  contented.     53.  The  queen  and  ^Emilia  generally  are  glad. 

54.  Daughter  and  grandfather  continue  to  be  thankful  to  the  prefect 

55.  Both  the  troops  and  the  inhabitants  desist  from  being  hostile.  50. 
Sword  and  lance  cease  to  be  dangerous.  57.  Patience  and  courage 
gen(»rally  are  necessary  to  troops.  58.  Tlie  arms  and  ^accoutrements  are 
^*^burdensome  to  the  allies.  51).  Food  and  water  begin  to  be  rare.  00. 
The  troops  are  safe  and  unhurt.  01.  The  cause  is  clear  and  manifest. 
62.  The  allies  be<2:in  to  be  hostile  and  rebellious.  03.  The  irround  isdrv, 
but  fertile.  04.  The  accused  "api)eals,  but  the  queen  confirms  tlu;  sen- 
tence. 05.  Either  folly  or  treachery  is  the  cause  of  the  crime.  06. 
Either  the  prefect  or  the  tribunes  must  yield.  07.  Men  are  either  free 
or  slaves.  08.  Negligence  or  imprudence  '-causes  the  loss.  01).  The 
queen  comes,  sees,  and  conquers. 

CooUDrNATE  ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES.  70.  The  ample  rewards  of 
'•^genius  and  wisdom.  71.  The  poverty  and  disgrace  f>f  tlu^  children  of 
Anthony.  72.  The  mutual  ^•'grievances  of  both  the  .'Etolians  and 
Perseus.  73.  The  evidences  of  '-'extraordinary  judgment  and  '''shrewd- 
ness. 74.  The  great  damage  and  losses  of  the  farmer.  75.  The  town 
has  old  walls  and  gates.  70.  Gajus  has  ingenious  male  and  female 
scholars.  77.  The  triumvirs  obtain  ixjwer  by  great  fraud  and  intrigues. 
78.  It  is  not  only  allowed,  but  also  ex]x^dient  to  the  allies  and  friends  ot 
the  R<mian  iieojile,  to  ''present  mutual  disputes  and  grit'vances  to  the 
people.     7y.  The  ambassadors  of  either  the  ^tolians  or  of  Perseus  must 

*  In  coordinations  like  tliis,  the  coiiimon  words  (here  can  an<l  Iomp)  must  not  be  ex- 
pre8>^e(l  at  the  second  place.  *  ('ojnprehen'U-re.  •  I'otere.  ''  Uecitftre.  "  Adniittere. 
» Sitrcinse.  *°  .Molestiis.  »'  Aiipeliire.  i'' AlTorre.  i*  Ingeniuin.  '*  Querela.  '*  Egro 
giu8.    »«  BuUeriia.    i'  Proferre. 


COORDINATE   PHRASES. 


103 


yield.     80.  The  daughter  and  son-in-law  of  Gajus  are  unhurt  and  safe. 
81.  A  quiet  conscience  is  a  great  relief  and  '^consolation. 

Translate  into  Enrjlkh: 

Coordinate  suriects.  1.  Minucius  etTrebonius  '^qunesturam  male 
""gerunt.  2.  Ingenium  et  sapientia  invidiam  superat.  3.  Avaritia  et 
perfidia  flagitia  ])arit.  4.  Et  Brutus  et  Cassius  patriam  amicitiae  praefert. 
5.  Ant  Posidonius  aut  Seneca  errat.  0.  Gaji  filius  et  filia  aegri  esse 
solent.  7.  Lucretia  at<iue  ^^milia  reginne  filiJIrum  invida'  sunt.  8. 
l)iscordi;r  c^iusa  atxpie  initium  sa^pe  exigua  sunt.  9.  Invidia  mutua 
at<iue  odium  exitiosa  esse  solent.  10.  Belgarum  industria  ac  mercatiira 
egregifc  sunt.  11.  Pompejus,  Lentulus,  AfricJTnus  foede  x)ereunt.  12. 
Invidia,  odium,  iuimicitia?  tinitinra*  sunt,  sed  tamen  ^'differunt.  13. 
Peregrlnum  auxilium  ac  ])eregrina  pecunia  populis  liberis  sa?pe  exitiosa 
sunt.  14.  J'oi)uli  Komjini  et  justitia  et  dementia  sociorum  animos  con- 
ciliat.  15.  Lil)ertos  et  adjuvare  et  docere  necesse  est.  10.  Praefecto 
cajitlvos  aut  interficere  aut  libera  re  licet. 

CooKDiXATE  PREDICATES.  17.  Libros  et  legimus  et  scribimus.  18. 
Liberos  educare  et  jx)ssumus  et  deberaus.  19.  Bellum  finire  aut  nescit 
aut  non  vult.  20.  Debelliire  volunt,  sed  nequeunt.  21.  Reginae  incola- 
rum  animos  conciliare  et  exi)edit  et  necesse  est.  22.  Servos  liberare  aut 
periculosum  aut  irritum  est.  23.  Belgne  ]X)pulis  finitimis  infesti  exiti- 
osique  sunt.  24.  Sociis  auxilium  aut  mittit  aut  promittit.  25.  Sicilia 
RoHumdrum  cella  et  -'horreum  est. 

Coordinate  objects,  20.  Pompejus  ^^Armenios  et  Judaeos  vincit. 
27.  Magister  discipulorum  et  ingenium  et  diligentiam  laudat.  28.  Plii- 
li]>pus  Pa?no8  et  copiis  et  pecuniJi  adjuvare  i)romittit.  29.  Adversario- 
rum  co])i;e  et  numero  et  discipllna  i)rapstant.  30.  Alexandrum  saevitiaE?, 
injustiti.e,  superbi;e  accusjlre  solenms.  31.  Philipju  legati  tribunes 
pecunia  ac  ])romissis  corrumpere  student.  32.  Adversaridrum  argumenta 
aut  refellere  aut  concedere  debemus.  33.  Persae  Lysandri  avaritiam  ac 
'■'^nequitiam  aldiorrent.  34.  Africanus  Africam  atque  llisj^aniam  imperio 
Romano  addit.  35.  Persel  legati  ^litdlos  magna  -^munificentia  magnis- 
(jue  ])romissis  corrumpunt.  30.  Copiae  castra  diripere  ac  praedam  "^^col- 
ligere  incijuunt. 

Co'iRDiNVTE  ATTRIBUTES.  37.  Discipuli  Plauti  Terentiique  comoedias 
legere  malunt.  38.  (Jajo  philos«>]diia^  aut  eloquenti;r  studium  com- 
mendamus.  39.  Gaji  lil)er  egregii  '^'ingenii  ac  doctrlnap  documenta  con- 
tinet.  40.  Et  amicorum  et  inimicorum  consilia  protlesse  poseunt.  41. 
Linguam  Germaiiam  atque -''Anglicam  lingu;e  -•'Frauco-Gallicae  anteponi- 
mus.  42.  Fabius  diligentia  mira  et  cauta  Poendrum  consilia  ^'eludere 
scit.  43.  Vitam  miseram  sed  justani  vitae  jucundae  sed  injustae  ante- 
ponere  debemus. 


1*  Solatium.  "  Quaistorship.  '"  To  administer.  2*  To  be  distinsiii>hed  from  each  other. 
*3  Honvum,  h<trn.  23  Armcniu.s,  an  Arntfiniait.  "4  Wickedness.  26  Liberality. 
»•  To  collect.  "7X81601.  2s  ^iig.icus,  EnglUh.  '■'»  Franco-Gallicu.-,  French.  ^»  T« 
baffle.    *  Related. 


104 


THE    PASSIVE    VOICE. 


BOOK  SECOND. 

PASSIVE    YOICE.—TIIE    IXFLECTIOX    OF    XOUNS 
AND  ADJECTIVES  CONCLUDED.— PRONOUNS. 

COMPARISON. 


LESSOiN    XXIIl. 

THE    PASSIVE    VOICE. 

§  l!34.  1.  The  English  passive  voice  consists  of  compound 
tenses  only,  formed  by  tlie  participle  and  the  auxiliary  to  he.  But 
in  Latin  the  passive  voice  in  the  present  and  i«  those  forms  of 
the  verb,  which  are  derived  from  it,  consists  of  simple  tenses, 
formed  bv  attaching:  the  passive  endinirs  to  the  stems  of  the  verbs. 

§  125.  2.  The  pa««MVC  C'll(lill^'«>i  of  the  Latin  verb 
are  the  same  in  the  1st,  2d,  and  4th  conjugations,  those  of  the 
third  being  mostly  modified  by  connecting  vowels.  They  are 
the  following  : 

I.  II.  &  IV.  CONJUGATIONS.  III.  CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive  :  ri  Infinitive  :  i. 

Present  indicatfve  :  Present  INDICATI^^E : 

SINGULAR.  plural.  SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

1.  or  mur     \     1.  or  h/iur 

2.  ris  mini     I     2.  eris  hnlni 

3.  tur  ntiir.     \     3.  Uur  nnttir. 

§  l^ff.  3.  By  attaching  these  endings  to  the  stem  of  the 
Terb  (as  shown  in  L.  i.  ii.  vii.  xii.),  we  form  the  following 

Paradigms  : 

I.  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

Infinitive  :  Amjlri,  to  be  loved  (stem  amu,  char,  a,  ending  W). 

Present  indicative. 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Amor,  I  am  loced 

2.  amaris,  thou  art  loced 

3.  amalur,  he,  xhe,  it  is  loved 


PLURAL. 

1.  amnmur,  we  are  loved 

2.  amamiui,  i/ou  are  loved 

3.  amantur,  tfwy  are  loved. 


THE    PASSIVE    VOICE. 


105 


II.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive:  Monr-ri,  to  he  admoimhid  {stk^i  mone,  ckxr.  e, 'E^d- 

INQ  H). 

Present  indicative  : 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Monoor,  I  am  admonished 

2.  nionrris.  thou  art  admonished 

3.  monC'tiir,  he,  she,  it  is  admonished 


1. 
2. 

3. 


PLn?AL. 

monemur,  we  are  admonished 
iiionemini,  you  are  admonished 
monentur,  they  are  admonished. 


III.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive  :  Lfgi,  to  he  read  (stem  leg,  char,  g,  ending  i). 

Present  indicative  : 

SINGLTiAR. 

1.  Legor,  I  am  read 

2.  legeris,  thou  art  read 

3.  legitiir,  Jie,  she,  it  is  read 


PLURAL. 

1.  legimur,  we  are  read 

2.  legimini,  you  are  read 

3.  leguntur,  they  are  read. 


IV.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive  :  Audlri.  to  he  heard  (stem  audi,  char.  I,  ending  ri). 


Present  indicative 
singular. 

1.  Audior,  I  am  heard 

2.  audiris.  thou  art  heard 

3.  audltur,  he,  she,  it  is  heard 


PLURAL. 

1.  audlmur,  we  are  heard 

2.  audiiinni,  you  are  heard 

3.  audiuntur,  they  are  heard. 


Rom.  1.  In  the  \.  sing,  of  the  1st  conjugation  the  characteristic  r?  is 
droj)j)(>d,  and  in  the  3  plur.  of  the  3d  conjugation  the  vowel  u  is 
inserteil  between  stem  and  ending,  as  in  tlie  corresponding  persons 
of  the  active  voice. 

Rem.  2.  The  characteristic  of  dtire  and  its  com]iounds  is  short,  as  in  the 
active  voice.     Pronounce  tlierefore  circf/m'daris,  eireum  datur. 

Rem.  3.  The  I-rerhs  of  the  ?A  conjugatic  n  (g  58)  insert  tlie  letter  i  be- 
tween stem  and  ending  in  the  t.anie  persons,  as  in  the  active  voice. 
as: 

Infinitive  :   Capi,  to  he  taken  (stems  cap  and  capi,  charact.  p, 
ENDING    i). 

Present  indicati\'E  : 


SINOrXAR. 

1.  Capior,  I  (nn,  taken 

2.  cajMTis,  thou  art  taken 

3.  cai>itur.  Jie,  she,  it  is  taken 


PLURAL. 

1.  capimur,  we  are  taken 

2.  cai)imini,  you  are  taken 

3.  capiimtui',  they  are  taken. 


§  I  37.  4.  Of  the  irregular  verbs  of  the  3d  conjugation  e^sc, 
pof^xe,  velle,  nolU\  maUe  form  no  passive  voice.  Ferre  forms  the 
following,  partly  irregular,  passive 


106 


THE   PASSIVE  VOICE. 


Infinitive  :   Ferri,  to  he  carried  (stem  fer,  cuAii.  r,  trreoulah 
ENDING  ri). 

Present  indicative  : 


STNGn.AK. 

1.  Fcror,  lam  carried 

2.  ferris  (irr,),  thou  art  C((rried 

3.  fertur  (irr.),  he,  6he,  it  is  earned 


TLUHAL. 

1.  feriniiir,  we  are  carried 

2.  ferimini,  you  are  carried 

3.  feriiiitiir,  th(?/  are  carried. 


§  128.  5.  The  \vr})  face  re  imd  those  of  its  c()mj)Ouiuls,  that 
retain  the  vowel  a  of  the  stem  (see  Rem.  4),  form  tlie  irregular 
passive  mfLuhWe  fieri,  and  in  the  present  tense  assume  active  end- 
ings, formed  from  the  stemj^?.  The  passive  fieri,  which  has  botli 
the  passive  signification  to  be  done,  to  he  made,  and  the  aciive 
meaning  to  become,  is  tlius  conjugated  : 

Infinitive  :  Fieri,  to  he  made,  to  become. 
Present  indicative: 

rLT'RAL. 

1.  f  Imus,  ice  are  made,  we  hecome 

2.  fitis.  you  are  made,  you  hrcome 

3.  f  Tunt,  tJiey  are  made,  th< y  hcome. 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Flo,  I  am  made,  I  hecome 

2.  fis,  thou  art  made,  thou  hecomest 

3.  fit,  he  is  made,  he  becomes 


Rem.  4.  Tlie  compounds  of  far  ere,  wliich  do  not  ('hanir<'  the  vowrl  a  of 
tlieir  stems  into  /  (j^oH,  K.  4),  form  tht-ir  passives  accordiiiir  to  the 
paradigm  oi fieri,  as:  r(drfae<  n — eed( fieri,  eahflo,  ealifit.  eaUfiunt 
But  those  comi)ounds,  wliirh  are  com])osed  with  ])ri'j)()sitions  (st'O 
§58,  Kem.  3),  form  a  regular  passive,  like  the  other  l-verbs  of  tlie 
3d  conjugation,  as  :   interfieere — inter' fici,  intejfeicrr,  interjieeris  dr. 

§  \*29.  ().  //r,  as  a  simj)le  verb,  forms  only  an  impersonal 
passive  (see  Boolv  III.).  But  the  transitive  compounds  of  ire,  aa 
transire,  prarterlre,,  imre,  form  a  complete  passive  voice  accord- 
ing to  the  following  paradigm  : 

Infinitive  :   Translri,  to  be  crossed. 
Present  indicative  : 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Transet)r,  F  a77i  crossed 

2.  transiris,  thou  art  crossed 

3.  transitur,  he,  she,  it  is  crossed 


PLURAL. 

1.  trnnslmur.  we  are  crossed 

2.  transimini,  yott  are  crossed 

3.  transeuntur,  they  are  crossed. 


Syntactical  Rules  on  the  use  of  thk  Passive  Yoice. 

§  ISO.  T.  Predicative  and  olyectivc  ))h rases  are  formed  from 
verbs  in  the  passive  voice  according  to  the  rules  in  the  preceding 
lessons,  as  : 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 


107 


A.  predicative  phrases. 

1.  Passive  predicates. 

Puer  amdtur,  the  boy  is  loved. 

Copiae  vi/icuntur,  the  troops  are  defeated. 

2.  Passive  subject-infinitives  : 

Lauddri  jucundum  est,  it  is  pleassint  to  be  praised. 
Vinci  dispticet,  it  displeases  to  be  defeated. 

13.  objective  phrases. 

1.  Oriects,  dependent  on  passive  predicates. 
Perfidiae  accusdtur,  he  is  accused  of  treachery. 
llastis  interjiciuidur,  they  are-killed  by  lances. 

2.  Passive  object-infinitives. 
Relinqiii  incipit,  he  begins  to  be  abandoned. 

Vituperiiri  solent,  they  usually  are  censured. 
Vinci  possunt,  they  can  be  defeated. 

§  l«ll.  8.  The  formation  of  the  objective  phrase  from  verbs 
in  the  passive  voice  is  in  two  points  distinguished  from  that  of  the 
active  objective  phrase  : 

1.  Passives  generally  cannot  govern  objects  in  the  accusative 

case. 

2.  The  SUBJECT  of  the  active  voice  assumes  in  the  passive  the 
form  of  an  object  in  the  ablative,  w^hich  is  called  the  pai^sive 

a:;eiit. 

When  the  passive  agent  denote^;  a  person,  the  ablative  must  be 
l)receded  by  the  preposition  a,  which  before  words  beginning  with 
a  vowel  or  A,  assumes  the  form  ab  : 

Puer  a  magistro  lauddtur,  the  boy  is  praised  by  the  teacher. 
Curiatius  ah  Horatio  interfieitur,  Curiatius  is  killed  by  Horatius. 
Gajus  ah  dmlcis  adjuvdtur,  Gajus  io  assisted  by  friends. 

i3ut: 
Agerequis  (not  ah  eguis)  ardtur.  the  field  is  ploughed  by  liorsos. 
Oppidum  dulo  (not  a  dolo)  expugndtur,  the  town  is  taken  by  stratagem. 

Rem.  5.  If  the  passive  agent  has  attributes  dependent  on  it,  the  pro- 
position a  (or  id))  stands  before  the  whole  phrase,  as :  Tullius  ab 
Antonii  amlcis  expelUtur,  Tullius  is  banished  by  the  friends  of  An- 
thony. 

§  1JI2.  9.  The  passives^^eW  and  vklcrl  may,  like  the  copula, 
be  connected  with  predicative  adjectives  and  nouns.  Fieri  has 
then  the  active  signification  "  to  hecome,^'  and  videri  the  active 
signification  "-  to  seem,^'  the  rules  for  the  grannnatical  form  of  the 
])redicative  adjectives  and  nouns,  which  are  connected  with  these 


108 


THE   PASSIVE    VOICE. 


past^ives,  hcinp^  in  every  instance  the  s:inie  as  those  j^iven  for  their 
connection  with  the  coi'i  i..\.     See  L.  Xlfl.  XIV.  XV. 

Vi((e  anperae  fiiiiit,  tho  rouds  ])ecnine  roiiufh. 

Copitt''  dijii'tiic  cidi  lit  (i\  the  trooj)*  seem  (li8i)irite(l. 

S'  ihihuui  Jiii'i  }<t>iUniii  rid'tnr,  to  b.M'anio  i)r<)inl  seems  foolish. 

Graeci  libtrljii  ri  cupiunt,  tho  Gn-eks  wish  to  become  iVee. 

§  l*S*t.   10.  The  verb  ^'/(/m  also  governs  an  objkct-ixfixitive, 
like  the  verbs,  mentioned  §  79,  as  : 

Gajns  dormlre  videtar,  Gajus  seems  to  sleep. 
Copiae  pariitiie  esse  cldentur,  the  troops  seem  to  be  ready. 
Mu(sti  esse  vi'd<  mini,  you  seem  to  be  sad. 

M<  rcatura  f met  11  osa  fieri  cidetar,  the  commerce  seems  to  become  pro^ 
fitable. 

exehcises. 

1^"  Write  the  folloicing  paradigms  of  t/te  passice  voice  with  the  Eng- 
lish fdgnificiitions : 

Parare,  to  prepare  ;  auc^rre,  to  increase  ;  regere,  to  govern;  ]>erficere, 
to  absolve;  ])atelacore,  to  open;  atferre,  to  bring;  sepelire,  to  bury-', 
pra^terire,  to  paxs  hy. 

Verbal  foums  of  the  p.\ssive.  1.  Delectamini.  2.  Supcnlmur 
3.  Exspectaiitur.  4.  Expuii:natur.  5.  Mutaris.  0.  Circumdor.  7.  Cir- 
cunidamur.  8.  Kelegari.  U.  Ediicaris.  10.  Necantiir.  11.  Liberamini 
13.  ConciliiTri.  13.  Deleri.  14.  Doccntur.  15.  Adhibrris.  1(1.  Tone- 
mini  17.  Videris.  18.  Julu'or.  11).  KxtTccmiui.  20.  Moveor.  21. 
Pertcrrentur.  22.  Possidrtur.  2o.  Coercemini.  24.  Timr-mur.  2-"). 
Torqur-ris.  26.  Duceris.  27.  Falli.  28.  Fraiiyitiir.  20.  Vinciinini.  ;;o. 
Decipimitiir.  31.  DiriiVmiur.  32.  Relinqui.  33.  Co(|iuintiir.  34.  Velii- 
mur.  3o.  Hedfici.  30.  Dimiiuuintur.  37.  J)istin<2:iu'ns.  38.  Diriiji.  30. 
Afficimiiii.  40.  Piminiini.  41.  luveniiintur.  42.  Apcrltur.  43.  Erudlri. 
44.  Iini)edior.  4o.  Stabillmur.  4().  C'ustodiris.  47.  Vindmur.  48. 
Vinciniur.  40.  Pnrtcreuntur.  50.  Praeferris.  51.  l^'tel•imilli.  52. 
AfFertur.  53.  Assueflunt.  54.  Pateflunt.  55.  Liiiucfieri.  5().  Teme- 
rarii  tiunt.  57.  Studiosa  fit.  T))i.  Infestus  fio.  50.  Sobrium  fieri.  00. 
Injustus  videor.  01.  LfPta  videris.  62.  vKquum  videtur.  63.  Imbecil- 
li  vidr-mur.     64.  Iratje  videniini.     65.  Contentum  videri.  • 

1.  You  are  celebrated.  2.  We  are  preserved  3.  He  is  surrounded.  4. 
Tliou  art  asked.  5.  He  is  praised.  6.  It  is  mentioned.  7.  I  am  burned. 
8.  Thou  art  banished.  0.  Vou  are  lu\'i]ed.  10.  Tlu-y  are  wounded.  11. 
He  is  avoichMl.  12.  To  be  called.  13.  Thou  art  surjmssed.  14.  I  am  de- 
li<;hted.  15.  You  are  adorned.  1(5.  It  is  completed.  17.  They  are  in- 
creased. 18.  Thou  art  taught.  10.  He  is  directed.  20.  It  is  mixed.  21. 
You  are  frightened.  22.  Wo  are  held.  23.  They  are  omi)h)yod.  24. 
Slie  is  moved.  25.  It  is  granted.  26.  I  am  fi'ared.  27.  To  bo  seen. 
28.  To  be  tortured.  20.  Vcm  are  restrained.  30.  We  seem.  31.  He 
seems.  32.  Y*ou  are  led.  33.  I  am  l)roken.  34.  Thou  art  defeated.  35 
They  are  killed  (interficere).  36.  We  are  left.  37.  It  is  cooked.  38 
Thou  art  drawn.     30.  He  is  acknowledged.     40.  Slie  is  di  ninished.     41 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 


109 


They  are  distinguished  {dieting nere).  42.  I  am  p3rceived.  43.  They  are 
beliehl.  4^.  1  am  sent.  .45.  Tiiey  are  coinnieuced.  4().  To  be  olfju-d. 
47.  It  is  endured.  48  To  be  left.*  40.  Tliey  are  dug.  50  They  ar.' be- 
gotten. 51.  Thou  art  brought  back.  52.  'JMiey  are  thrown  aw'av.  r^Z. 
I  am  alhire'd.  54.  To  be  c(^rre»'ted.  55  To  *be  defi^ated.  56.  To  be 
bound.  57.  You  are  defeated.  58.  You  are  bound.  50.  V\'e  are  pim- 
ished.  60.  It  is  fortified.  01.  It  is  inventi-d.  62.  To  be  educated  (ov/- 
dlrr).  63.  Thou  art  found.  64.  It  is  finished.  65.  To  bj  finished.  63. 
You  are  api)eased.  67.  We  are  hindered.  68.  It  is  imparted.  (iO.  They 
are  entered.  70.  You  are  softened.  71.  It  is  exhausted.  72.  Thev  are 
approached  (^;<Zm).  73.  We  are  struck.  74.  We  are  carried.  75. 'it  is 
o\Mwd{aperlr(').  76.  They  are  opeued  (jM^^/acf/'^).  77.  To  be  brouuht. 
78.  They  are  melted.  70.  To  be  tamed.  80.  It  is  learned.  81.  They 
are  learned  by  heart.  82.  To  become  cautious.  83.  I  become  attentive. 
84.  Thou  becomest  unjust,  O  queen!  85.  tShe  becv^mes  weak.  86.  They 
become  eloijuent.  87.  They  {the  uonieii)  become  friends.  88.  To  seem 
zealous.  80.  Thou  seeraest  happy,  O  daughter!  90.  We  seem  tired. 
01.  It  seems  absurd.     02.  Tliey  seem  envious. 

Predicative  piir.vses  (without  and  with  the  passive  agent). 

1.  Ager  aratur.      2.  Consilium  mutiitur.      3.  Via  monstriitur.     4.  Fabula 

narratur.     5.    Triumviri  relegantur.     6.  Pugna  renovatur.     7.  Nuptia? 

celebrantur.     8.   Pericula  sui)erantur.     9.  Tempha  spoliantur.     10.   Op- 

pidum   circumdatur.      11.    Xumerus  augetur.      12.    Puer   docetur.     13. 

Acjua  miscr-tur.     14.  Dona  i)r;ebentur.     15.  Imperia  delentur.     10.  Openip 

adhibentur.     17.  Castra  moventur.     18.  Copijo  ducuntur.     10.  Consilia 

])erficiuntur.     20.    Heglna  veliitur.     21.  Adversarius  vincitur.     22.  Cap- 

tivus  vincitur.      23.  Pirfita  i)unitur.      24.  Negotium   finltur.      25.  Dis- 

cipuli  audiuntur.     26.  Triumplu  impediuntur.     27.  Pericula  subeuntur. 

28.  Fluvii  transeuntur.     20.  xVuxilium  atfertur.     30.    Incommoda  perfe- 

runtur.     31.  Tribunorum  consilia  conlirmantur.     32.  Pnefecti  jussa  lau- 

dantur.     33.  Sociorum  stipendia  augentur.     34.  Adversaridrum  insidiae 

timentur.     35.  Homanorum  castra  iuspiciuntur.     36.  Gaji   nuptiee  difFe- 

runtur.      37.    Piratarum   numerus   diminuitur.      38.  Fluvidrum   vada 

transi'untur.     30.  .Erarium  Ix^Uis  exhauritur.     40.  ('opi;p  disciplinji  eon- 

tinentur.     41.  Ingenium  philosophia  exercetur.     42.  Flamm;e  ab  oppi- 

diinis  exstinguuntur.     43.  Fluvii  a  sociis  transeuntur.     44.  Muri  a  Ko- 

mandrum  copiis  adeuntur.     45.  Agri  a  triumviris  dividuntur.     46.  Dona 

a   (ira^cis   atieruntur.     47.    Legati    donis    corrumpuntur.      48.    Tenipla 

statiiis  exornantur.     49,  Pecunia  ab  aiulcis  doniltur.     50.   Discipuli  at- 

tenti  fiunt.     51.  Pugna  oxitidsa  fit.     52.   Sententia  sequa  videtur.    53. 

Copia?  fessa?  videntur.     54.  Perfugium  securum  videtur.     55.  Pr^eterlri 

iiijustum  vidr-tur.     56.    Doctum  fieri  arduum  est.     57.  Tribunum  fieri 

licet.     5S.  Sobrium  fieri  i>ra'stat.     50.  Egenum  fieri  molestum  videtur 

60.  pecii)i  acerbum  est.     61.  Opprimi  displicet.     62.  Piratam  fieri  igno- 

miuiosum  est. 

1.  An  ambuscade  is  i)repared,  2.  Tlie  tem])les  are  dedicated.  3.  The 
town  is  embellished.  4.  The  enemies  are  overcome.  5.  Poverty  is  in- 
creased. 6.  Syracuse  is  (h-stroyed.  7.  The  camp  is  besieged.  8.  Pa- 
tience is  exercised.  0.  Philosoi)hy  is  taught.  10.  A  scliool  is  established 
{instituere).  11.  Tho  captives  are  thrown  down.  12.  The  enenues  are 
perceived.     13.  Sempronius  and  Livy  are  removed.     14.  Friendship  and 


110 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 


liannnny  are  restored.  15.  Deserters  are  punislicd  and  despised.  1^. 
The  we"ddin<j:  of  Anthony  is  prevented.  17.  Thf  adversary's  arirumcnta 
are  passed  over.  IS.  The  bushiess  is  finished.  1!>.  J^ivy  and  liatred  are 
hurieil.  '20.  Tiie  UM*tals  are  nu.'ltrd.  21.  liewards  are  conferred.  23. 
Ar<^unients  are  alleged.  33.  The  letter  is  brouii^ht.  34.  The  atTairs  are 
investigated  by  the  eomniittee  of  two.  2.").  Tiie  camp  is  captured  by  the 
Carthaginians.  3(i.  Money  is  accepted  by  the  umpire,  '"27.  The  com- 
edies of  Plautus  and  Terence  are  explained.  38.  Perseverance  is  assist- 
ed {adjiirdre)  by  fortune.  31).  The  camp  is  captured  by  fraud.  JJO.  The 
controversy  is  decided  by  favor,  ol.  The  controversy  is  settled  {sec  page 
87)  by  the  sword.  ;J3.  Jerusah'Ui  {IlUroxoli/ind,  G.  oru)u)  is  destroyed 
by  Titus.  3o.  Memory  is  strengthene  I  {fir/n/lrr)  by  the  ]>en.  o4.  Tiie 
tribunes  are  brihed  by  the  a!nl)a.ssador8  of  .lugurtlia.  35.  The  ambassa- 
dors are  bribed  by  influence  and  money.  8().  The  prisoner  is  saved  by 
the  daughter  of  the  prefect.  87.  Literature  (litterae)  is  negU?cted  by  the 
Spartans.  :]8.  Koscius  of  Ameria  is  (h'fended  by  M.  Tullius.  3J).  The 
town  of  Luc  'ria  is  ]>esi(;ged  by  tiie  Carthaginians,  40.  Tlie  i)refect  is 
preventeil  by  a  disea»:e  of  tlieeyes.  41.  The  district  of  V^'ji  (  Vijentamii*) 
is  devas  at(  d  by  the  Romans.  43,  Sempronius  is  saved  by  the  timely 
help  of  friends.  43.  Tlie  troo])s  beccmie  rebellious,  44.  The  roads  be- 
come rough  and  swampy  {palud''HHS).  45.  The  province  becomes  (piiet 
and  trauipiii.  40.  Thebol  in  -ss  of  Catiline  becomes  unbridled  {ejfrenCdua). 
47.  The  water  of  the  river  Vulturnus  becomes  putrid  {]>utiil>is).  48. 
The  opinion  of  (iajus  seems  erroneous,  40.  The  oracle  of  Pythia  seems 
ambiguous.  50,  The  principles  of  grammar  s<M'm  ditlicult.  51,  The 
victuals  of  the  troops  seem  wretclud,  53.  To  be  courted  is  i)leasant, 
5:}.  It  pleases  to  be  defended  by  friends.  54.  It  is  uni)leasant  to  bi*  fteg- 
lected,  55.  It  displea.ses  lo  be  rejected,  50,  It  is  bt;tter  to  be  exalted 
57.  To  be  lov<*d  by  tlie  people  is  beautiful  and  honorabk\  58.  To  be 
betrayed  by  friends  is  bitter.  51).  To  be  banished  seems  hard.  00.  To 
be  lettered  seems  disgraceful.  01,  It  is  a  crime  to  become  an  enemy  of 
the  country,  03.  To  become  eloquent  is  difficult.  08.  It  is  bettor  to  be- 
come "^calm,     04.  It  seems  mean  to  become;  an  assistant  of  tyrants. 

Simple:  and  coubined  objective  piikases,  1.  Imjirudentiie  ac- 
cuser. 3.  Triumviro  commendfiris.  8.  Dis  conciliamur.  4.  Corruptelae 
coiKk'rananiini.  5.  Prafecto  ilenuntiamini.  0.  Impensarum  adnioneor. 
7.  Incepti  periculo  deterreris.  8.  A  piratis  ignominiose  obsidr*mur,  9. 
Antonii  filiis  injuste  anteix)nimini.  10.  Plebejorum  candidato  pra'feror. 
11.  A  M.  Tullio  ajite  refelleiis.  13.  Sulpicii  auxilio  secreto  expedlmiir. 
18.  A  triumviris  juste  punimini.  14.  Decipi  raro  ])Ossum.  15.  Severe 
})unlri  dehes-',  10.  Ab  adver.-^ariis  accusari  solenius.  17.  A  pra^fecto 
revocari  volumus.  18.  Injuste  accusari  non  vultis.  19,  A  Gajoadjuviiri 
stiides.  30.  A  piratis diripi  tinienius.  3L  A  magistro  negligi  videmini, 
23.  Injuste  opprimi  videris.  2''i.  Ab  inimicis  damnari  inicpium  est.  34. 
Manere  cogor.  35.  Pecuniam  restituerecogeris,  30.  Patriam  defendere 
docemur.  37.  Ablre  impedimini.  28,  Captivos  custodire  jubeor.  29. 
A  vigiliis  oppidum  intrare  i)rohil»emur. 

1.  I  am  recommended  to  the  queen.     2.  Thou  art  accused  of  treachery. 


»  T<i  fitter, 'vinrirfi.     '  Calm,  qnirtus.     '   Why  stands  the  adverb  in  phrase  14  o^r, 
and  in  (>hrui>e  15  before  the  objecl-ititinitivo  ? 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE. 


Ill 


8.  We  are  reminded  of  the  danger,  4.  You  are  betrayed  to  the  enemies, 
5.  I  am  ^ruthles-^ly  tortured,  0,  Thou  art  well  taught.  7.  We  are 
publicly  acquitted  of  tlie  crime.     8,  You  are  splendidly  clothed  by  the 


e  sons  of  the 


queen  9.  1  am  ehxpiently  defended  by  Tullius.  10.  The 
preferred  to  William.  11.  We  are  kindly  greeted  by  th^  ^^^^^  ^.  ^^^ 
queen.  12,  You  are  badly  nreated  by  the  tyrant.  13.  Thou  art  im- 
moderately aflected  by  the  tears  of  the  (female)  j^risoners.  14.  We 
ceas(^  to  be  ])referred  by  the  teacher.  15,  You  begin  to  be  ruled  by 
decemvirs.  10.  Vou  continue  to  be  hindered  by  tlie  want  of  provisions. 
17.  Wc!  niiver  can  be  allured  by  rewards  or  promises,  18.  I  seem  to  be 
deterred  by  the  difficult  beginning  of  the  undertaking,  19.  Thou  art 
afraid  of  being  taken  by  the  pirates.  20.  We  will  not  be  derided 
and  despised  by  the  enemies.  21.  You  generally  are  corrected  by  the 
teacher.  22..  Thou  seemest  to  be  splendidly  •'received  by  the  inhabitants. 
28.  I  am  forl)idden  to  proceed.  24.  You  are  prohibited  from  speaking 
publicly.  25.  We  are  hindered  by  disease  from  writing  the  letter.  20. 
1  am  com])elled  by  the  })refect  to  return  directly.  27.  Thou  art  directed 
by  the  queen  to  inspect  daily  the  books  of  Sempronius. 

combination   of   riledicative  and   objective  phrases,  with  or 

Without  attributes. 

1.  A  triumph  is  decreed  to  Africanus.  2.  The  town  and  the  'garrison 
are  betrayed  to  the  enemies  by  the  duumvirs.  3,  The  message  of  an 
^'unfortunate  battle  is  delivered  to  the  prefect,  4.  The  arms  and  bag- 
gage of  the  trooi)s  art;  '"surrendtTed  to  the  Carthaginians.  5.  M.  Tullius 
is  aj;<piitted  by  the  opinion  of  the  whole  people.  0.  War  is  announced 
to  Jugurtha,  but  badly  ''conducted  by  Calpurnius  Bestia.  7.  Sempronius, 
the  candidate  of  the  Patricians,  is  convicted  of  corruption  by  the  board 
of  a  hundred,  8,  The  inhabitants  are  abominably  i)luiidered  by  L. 
Antonius,  the  assistant  of  the  i)refect.  9.  A  temple  is  consecrated  to 
Fortuna  by  the  sons  of  b\ibius.  10.  A  '-'new  house  is  built  by  the  sons 
and  daughters  of  Cialba.  11.  The  cam))  of  the  Romans  is  surrounded  by 
a  ditch  an  1  a  rampart.  12.  Metals  are  melted  by  the  flames,  and  '^pearls by 
'^acid.  18.  Crimes  are  punisluMl  by  the  people,  and  vices  by  God.  14.  The 
Germans  rannot  be  subjected  by  the  Romans,  15.  The  war  '^may  be  '^un- 
fortunately conducted  either  ]»y  the  envy  of  fortune,  or  l)y  the  ignorance 
of  the  prefect.  10.  Bad  men  usually  are  ''tortured  by  the  'torments  of 
conscience,  17.  Indolent  scholars  must  frequently  be  admonished  and 
punished.  18.  Industrious  and  zealous  scholars  do  not  wish  to  be  sur- 
]>assed  by  '^fellow-scholars.  19.  The  slaves  are  afraid  of  being  sur- 
render«'d  to  the  masters.  20.  Decemvirs  cease  to  be  -^*elected  by  the 
]>eoj)le,  21.  The  sailors  of  Ant i(X3hus  seem  to  become  pirates,  22.  The 
Roman  women  seem  to  be  prodigal  and  devoted  to  luxury.  23.  Honor- 
ble  men  cannot  suddenly  become  vain  and  boastful.  24.  Sempronius 
.s  hindered  by  the  commands  of  t\\v.  prefect  to"  occupy  the  right  bank  of 
the  riv*'r,  25.  The  ambas.sadors  are  tlirected  by  Perseus  to  delay  the 
business  by  disputes  and  -'quarrels. 

*  Tluthles'».  f<BduK.  ^  To  treat,  hnhire.  •  Excipere.  "<  Proe^sidinm.  8  Advernus. 
•  Arf'-rre.  1"  Tnvlfre.  'i  To  conduct  a  war,  bfllum  gerere.  >'■'  Novus.  i3  A  pearl 
murgarUa.  ^*  Acclum.  ^^  P<>shp.  ^^  Male.  "  To  torture,  a nfl'er^,  ^^  Tormeiitum. 
*^  C<'ndiwipulu8.     ^^  To  e\cct,  eligere.     ^'  Querela. 


112 


DEPONENT    VEUBS. 


1.  Perfugae  Romjinis  a  Poenis  redduntur.     2.  Gloria  et  victoria  copiia 
a  pinfecto  proinirtitiir.       3.    (  astra  et  ])r,Tda   inuiK-iisa    Aleiaiuiro   a 
Porsis  reliiKiuuntur.     4.   Fabrioii  copi;!^  I*yrrlii  elcpiiantis  ]K'!tvMroiUui'. 
5.  Belluni  Persco  u  Konianoruni  Irgjiti^  iudicitur.     G.  Pcriii  a  Ht  nianirf 
perfi(li;o   mriidaciiciue  accusantur.      7.  PnpfV'ctus  a  p<  pulo  c«'rrupt("lnf 
aperte  accusatur.     8.    Rnma  a   liomulo    et   Kt-mo,  Klioa?  Sylvia^  fjJiis 
conditur.     D.   Fama  diviii;{'(|uo  a  ])lidosoplii8  sjppe   coiil  Mmmiitiir.      10 
Furta  aiit  serrC'to  aiit  manifesto  jxrpctiari  {)<)ssunt.     11.  liicdla»  Honia 
iidruiu  imperio  adjici  cupiuiit.     12.  Iniiulcis  tradl    injustum  est.     l:». 
Al)  adversarlis  laudari  gloria  magna  est.     14.  InjiLste  acciiyari  aut  falso 
condoinnilri    acvrbuni    est.       lo.  Pocni  et   Fabii   prudcntisl    et   Africani 
inirenio  {f/t'iiOus)  vincuntnr.      10.  Ei)icuri    fallacije  a   M.  Tullio  refelli 
Solent.     17.  (/.  Marius  Patricioruni  eandidato  a  ])<)pulo  pr;etertur.     18, 
Ab  adversariis  deridr-ri  niolestum  videtur.     19.  C'reta  insula  a  piratis 
relincpii   videtur.      20.  (iaji  di.<cipuli    eloqnentia'  dediti  esse  videntur. 

21.  (iajus  a  pra-feeto  ])eeuniani,  Sieulis  debitani  \d'ff),  restituere  cogitur. 

22.  Sodi  a  prafecto  castra  nuiniro  docentur.  2o.  ()pi)idani  a  Senipronio 
mums  statim  djruere  jubentur.  24.  Semprouius  oculGrum  morbo  ludos 
spectare  {to  icitncsff)  impeditur. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

DEPOXEXT    VERBS. 


§  I«t4:t  1.  Deponent  verbs  are  passives,  wliicli  lack  the 
active  voice,  and  mostly  have  an  active  sigxific.vtiox,  as  hortarl^ 
to  exhort  ;  loqid,  to  speak.  Their  conjugation  is  that  of  the 
passive,  but  their  construction  that  of  the  active,  and  they  may 
therefore  have  objects  in  the  accusative  (see  §  131). 

Rem.  1.    Each  of  the  four  conjugations    has  dej)onent  verbs,  but  the 
great  majority  of  the  deponents  belong  to  the  tirst  conjugation. 

§    IJI»>.     2.  Paradigms. 
I.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive  :  Hortari,  to  exhoH  (stem  hortd,  cuak.  a,  ending  ri^ 

Present  indicative. 


singular. 

1.  Ilortor,  I  exhort 

2.  hortaris,  thou  exhortest 

3.  liortiitur,  he  exhorts 


PLUKAL. 

1.  hortfimur,  we  exhort 

2.  hortaniini,  yod  exhort 

3.  hortantur,  they  exhort. 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 


113 


II.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitr^e  :  Veren/tofear  (stem  vere,  chak.  e,  ending  ri). 


PllESENT  indicative. 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Vereor,  I  fear 

2.  vereris,  tJioufearcst 

3.  veretur,  he  fears 


PLURAL. 

1.  veremur,  we  fear 

2.  veremini,  you  fear 

3.  verentur,  tJiey  fear. 


III.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive  :  Loqui,  to  speak  (stem  loqu,  char.  i2,  ending  t). 

Present  indicative. 


SINGULAR. 

1.  Loquor,  I  speak 

2.  loqueris,  thou  speakest 

3.  loquitur,  he  speaks 


PLURAL. 

1.  loquimur,  we  speak 

2.  loquimini,  you  speak 

3.  loquuntur,  tJuy  speak. 


IV.  CONJUGATION. 
Infinitive  :  Potiri,  to  seize  (stem  potl,  char,  i,  ending  n"). 


Present  indicative. 


SINGUI.AR. 

1.  Potior,  I  seize 

2.  potlris,  tJiou  seizest 

3.  potltur,  he  seizes 


PLURAL. 

1.  potimur,  we  seize 

2.  potimini,  you  seize 

3.  potiuntur,  they  seize. 


§  I  !{6.  3.  Tlie  following  deponents  of  the  third  conjugation : 
gradi,  to  proceed  ;  rnori,  to  die  ;  pati,  to  suffer,  with  their  com- 
pounds, belong  to  the  I-verbs,  inserting  the  letter  i  between  stem 
and  ending  in  the  1st  sing,  and  3d  plur.  (morior — moriuntur, 
pallor— patiicntur^  (£r.)  The  compounds  of  j^^iH  and  gradi 
change  the  vowel  a  of  their  stems  into  e,  as  dlgredl,  to  go  away; 
ingredl,  to  enter  ;  aggredi,  to  attack  ;  progredi,  to  advance  ; 
congredi,  to  meet ;  perpetl,  to  suffer. 

§  137.  4.  The  verb  oriri,,  to  rise,  forms  the  present  indica- 
tive like  an  I-verb  of  the  third  conjugation,  as  if  it  formed  an 
infinitive  orl.  But  the  other  forms  of  this  verb  (see  B.  III.) 
belong  to  the  fourth  conjugation.  (Pres.  indicat. :  orlor^  orerls^ 
oritur,  c£'c.)  In  the  same  way  the  compounds  of  orlH  are  con- 
jugated (pxorior^  exoreri.'i,  exorttiir  t£'e.),  except  adoriri,  to 
attack,  which  is  conjugated  like  a  regular  deponent  verb  of  the 
4th  conjugation. 


lU 


DEPONENT   VERBS. 


§  138.  5.  The  following  deponent  verbs  govern  an  ol>J€H*t- 
illlillitivf^^  like  the  active  verbs,  mentioned  §  80  :  Conari, 
to  undertake^  to  endeavor ;  meditari,  to  contemplate^  meditate^ 
desi(/n.;  cuuctari,  to  hesitate;  exordiri,  to  begin;  oblivisci,  to 
forget,  as  : 

He  endearors  to  rapture  the  toirn,  oppidum  expairnnre  conatur. 
We  contimplate  to  Viturii,  rcdlre  mcditHiiiiir. 

Yon  ihsiijii  to  (Wprl  the  garriKoK,  ])r;<'sitliiiiii  expellere  meditamini. 
Th<y  hesitiite  to  adcduce,  progrt'di  ciiuctantiir. 
He  begins  to  speak,  lo<|ui  exordltur. 
They  forget  to  send  the  money,  pecuniam  mittere  oblivisciintur. 

EXEIiCISES. 

t^  Cotnmit  the  lists  of  deponent  verbs  %  XI.  2,  XII.  2,  XIII.  2,  XIV. 
2  of  the  VoeaJjidanes,  and  tprite  the  following  paradigm,^  togetJier  with 
the  English  signifieations:  Mirari,  to  wonder ;  tueri,  to  proteet ;  niori,  to 
die  ;  jn-oficisci,  to  depart ;  assontlri,  to  assent ;  exorlri,  to  arise. 

Simple  phrases.  1.  Pliilippura  adinlror.  2.  Philosopliiam  asper- 
naris.  ;}.  Gajiis  concionatur.  4.  Virgiliuin  intorprftrunur.  5.  Fuiiram 
uieditaniini.  0.  Copia^  pabulantur.  7.  Culpani  confiteor.  8.  Castra 
intueris.  9.  Reirlna  tiirtur.  10.  Belluin  verrmiir.  11.  Auxiliuni  pf)l- 
licemini.  12.  Medici  medentur.  V.\.  Populuiu  allcxiuor.  14.  Advcr- 
sarios  aggrederis.  15.  Poena  scqiiitur.  1(».  Portain  ingrediiuiir.  17. 
Veniam  assequiniini.  18.  Captlvi  morinntur.  19.  Locum  nanciscor. 
20.  Injuriam  ulcisceris.  21.  Poeta  expei<riscitur.  22.  Advcrsarii  ira.><- 
cuntur.  28.  Gajo  assentior.  24.  Dona  larglris.  25.  Pan  us  muntitur. 
26.  Prnedara  partlmur.     27.  Triumviri  sortiuntur. 

1.  I  imitate  tlie  teacher.  2.  Thou  l)orro\vest  money.  3.  Tlie  prefect 
jests.  4.  We  lay  the  fi.-lds  waste  5.  You  n-ward  trraclierv.  G.  Gajus 
and  Sempronius  live  in  the  country.  7.  It  is  allowed  to  rejoice.  8.  It 
deliirlits  to  roam.  9.  We  endeavor  to  be  present.  10.  You  hesitate  to 
attack.  11.  Thou  designest  to  rebel.  12.  1  protect  (^M^r/)  the  commerce, 
la.  Thou  confessest  ignorance.  14.  AVatcr  heals.  15.  We  promise 
provisions.  1«.  You  tear  the  oods.  17,  They  address  the  que.n.  18. 
I  embrace  the  son.  It).  We  follow  the  prelect.  20.  Tht^y  attack  the 
Carthaginians.  21.  Thou  i)ursuest  tlie  Germans.  22.  The  triumvirs 
die.  23.  It  is  sad  to  fall.  24.  The  ambassadors  are  an.ixry.  25.  Thou 
forgettest  to  dine.  20.  The  troops  march.  27.  We  obtain  power.  28. 
The  moon  rises.  29.  The  girls  flatter.  30.  We  attack  {adorlri)  tha 
camp. 

Combined  phrases.  1.  Pr.Tfectus  oppidanorum  controversias  asper- 
natur.  2.  Co])ia'  reglna^  doraum  tuentur.  3.  Incohe  miram  i)ra;tecti 
clementiara  admirantur.  4.  Kegna  opulenta  discordia  dilabuntur.  5 
Copia»  molestias  {prications)  terumnasciue  jHirpetiuntur.  6.  Belli  Ibrtunam 
exiK?riri  nolumus.  7.  Adversariorum  'vestigia  sequi  conaris.  8.  Gaj' 
uegotium   '-'exsequi   cunctamur.      9.  Numidarum   copise   latrocinanlur 


»  Vestigium,  trace,  track,    a  Exsequi,  to  carry  out. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


115 


Bociorumque  agros  populantur.  10.  Legatdrnm  superhiam  atque  arrogan- 
tiam  recordamini.  11.  Pr;estantiam  iirnaviii  assequi  nunquam  potes. 
12.  Cassandra,  Prlami  filia,  Troja^  excidium  vaticiniitur.  i;j.  Tribiini 
immodice  vocifcrantur,  priei'ect unique  minis  deterrere  conantur.  14. 
Praeiectus  sociis  Latlnis -^novas  victorias  novamqui;  pnedani  i)ollicetur. 

^  1.  You  frustrate  the  plans  of  the  triumvir  by  the  testimony  of  Sid- 
picius.  2.  We  forget  to  revenii:e  '^former  injuries.  3.  We  admire  the 
arroiiance  of  the  and)assador  and  the  ])rudence  of  the  prefect.  4.  The 
Komans  remember  avcU  the  ennuty  of  Philii).  5.  The  Thebans  protect 
the  towns  of  Boeotia  by  ^garrisons,  G.  You  ft-ar  the  new  arguments  of 
the  tribunes.  7.  Fabius  hesitates  to  attack  the  Carthaginians.  8.  Troy 
falls  by  the  cunning  of  the  Greeks.  9.  The  tribune  Sulpicius  arises  sud- 
denly and  addresses  the  ])eoj)le.  10.  I  wish  both  to  live  honestly  and  to 
die  liai»pily.  11.  The  teacher  '^tests  the  judg-ment  of  the  boys  by  'little 
juestions.  12.  Tlie  assassins  of  the  prefect  sutfer  Meath.  13.  The 
ambassadors  j^rofess  friendship,  but  meditate  treachery.  14.  Thou 
reward!  St  vice,  and  pursuest  justice.  15.  You  remember  the  bad 
(adccrsus)  fortune  of  Dionysius,  tyrant  of  Syracuse. 


LESSON   XXV. 

THIRD  DECLEXSIOX.     LIQUID  STEMS. 

§  ltJ9i  1.  The  third  declension  differs  in  three  points  from 
the  first  and  second:  1.  By  its  characteristics.  2.  By  its  case- 
TERMiXATioxs.  3.  By  the  manner  iu  which  the  stem  is  found. 

§  1  10.  2.  The  characteristics  of  the  third  declension  are 
either  consonants,  or  the  vowel  «,  as  :  genius  (char,  s),  nonien 
(char,  n),  dolor  (char,  r),  civis  (char.  i).  The  stems  of  tJiose 
nonns.  which  have  the  cliaracteristic  ?,  are  called  the  TOWel« 
sloillN  of  the  third  declension  ;  those,  having  a  consonant  as 
characteristic,  are  termed  COIlsoIiailf-^teillS. 

§111.  3.  The  case-terminations  of  the  third  declension  (see 
§  145)  are  attaciied  to  the  declension-stem.  In  the  3d  declension, 
however,  the  stem  is  not  found,  as  in  the -other  declensions,  by 
removing  the  case-termination  of  the  nominative,  but  by  dropping 
the  case-terminations  of  the  oblique  cases,  that  is,  of  any  case  but 
nominative  and  vocative  singular. 


■  Novns,   n/10.      *  Pri-stinus     '  Garrison,  prsBSidium.     •  To  teat,  experTri.     ^  A  litUe 
quention,  quasstiuncuhi.    ^  Death,  supplicium. 


116 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


Thus  the  i^icm  J u die  of  J/^(^('.r  is  found  by  dropping  the  case- 
termination  is  of  the  genitive  judicis.  Hence  in  order  to  decline 
a  given  noun  of  the  tliird  declension,  one  of  the  obliciue  cases  must 
be  known  besides  the  nominative,  for  which  ])urpose  the  g  km  five 
siNfiULAR  generally  is  chosen. 

§  1  155.  4.  The  Ci<eilfler  of  nouns,  belonging  to  the  third 
declension  is  fourfold  :  1.  The  masculine,  2.  The  feminine,  3. 
The  neuter,  4.  The  common  gender  (§  31)). 

If  a  noun,  denoting  a  persox  or  beast,  is  used  in  the  same  form 
for  both  sexes,  it  is  said  to  be  of  colliniOll  ^:eilder,  as  : 
cicis,  a  male  or  female  citizen  ;  conies,  a  male  or  female  com- 
panion ;  canis,  a  male  or  female  dog.  Nouns  of  common  gender 
are  thus  treated  : 

1.  If  we  do  not  distinguish  the  sex  of  an  individual,  we 
generally  employ  the  masculine  gender;  2.  If  we  speak  of  the 
individual,  as  of  a  male,  the  masculine  gender,  and  3.  If  we 
mean  a  female,  the  femlnine  gender  is  employed. 

Rem.  1.  For  tho  a])i)licutioii  of  these  principles  to  the  names  of  beasts 
seeL.  XXVlli. 


THE  CONSOXANT-STEMS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLEX- 

SIOX. 

§  113.  5.  The  Consonant-stems  of  the  3d  declension  have 
either  one  of  the  mutEs,  or  one  of  the  liquids  for  a  characteristic. 
See  page  7. 

Rem.  2.  Stems,  which  tcrminatoin  a  ltquid  arc  called  liQiii«1  Kleins, 

and  stems,  tcnninatin»^  in  ont'  of  the  MUTE  consoivants,  are  termed 
liillt<^  nK'HIN.  Some  nouns  have  stems  in  '/ and  r  (*^/i*,  6fS,  «/w- 
pitir).     These  are  called  iuuegulau  stems.     See  g  188. 

§  14-J:.  0.  The  liquid  stems  appear  without  a  case-termina- 
tion ia  the  nominative  singnlar,  except  the  feminine  /liet/is^  G. 
hiemis  (winter).  Mitte  stems  on  the  contrary  generally  take  the 
termination  6'  in  the  nominative  sini»:ular. 

§  14o.  t.  The  case-terminations  of  iiouns  with  cousonant- 
stems  are  the  folluwins: : 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— LIQUID   STEMS. 


117 


Singular. 

N.  B  or  — 

G.  is 

D.  i 

A.  em,  Neut.  like  Norn. 

V,  like  Nom. 

A.  e. 


Plural. 

N.  es,  Neut.  a 

G.  urn 

D.  ibus 

A.  cs,  Nerd,  a 

V.  like  Nom. 

A.  like  Dative. 


A  given  tiouu  with  a  consonant-stem  is  declined  by  applying 
these  terminations  to  its  stem,  which  is  found  by  removing  the 
termination  is  from  the  genitive  singular. 


LIQUID  STEMS. 

§  110,  8.  Since  the  noun  hieins  is  the  only  noun  with  m  as 
characteristic,  there  remain  only  the  four  liquids  /,  ??,  r,  s,  which 
can  appear  as  characteristics  of  liqnid  stems.  They  accordingly 
form  4  classes  :  1.  The  L-class,  2.  The  X-class,  3.  The  R-class, 
4.  Tlie  S-class. 

L-CLASS. 

§   147.  Vocabulary. 

Consul,  G.  consillis  m.  a  consul         sal,  sails,  m.  &  n.,  salt 

exsul,  exsulis,  c.  g.  an  exile,  ban-  sol,   sdlis,  m.  snn  (also  as  a  proper 


if<Iu'd  j)ers(>n 

fel,  fellis.  11.  hVe.  f/nJl 

mel,  niellis,  //.  honey 


name  sun-f]od) 
vigil,  viofilis,  m.  a  icatchman 
Hannibal 


proconsul,   proconsillis,  m.    a   pro-  Hasdrubal    >-     G,    tilis,    m.   barbaric 


consul 
pugil,  pugilis,  m.  a  boxer 


Adherbal 


proper  names. 


STNGL^iAR. 

N.  Consul,  a  consul 
G.  consul  is,  of  a  consul 
D.  consul i,  to  a  consul 
A.  consulem,  a  consul 
V.  consul,  0  consul/ 
A.  consule,  bi/  a  consul 


§   148.  Paradigm. 

Plukal. 

N.  consults,  consuls 
G.  consulum,  of  consuls 
D.  consulibus,  to  consuls 
A.  consules,  consuls 
V.  consuh^s,  O  consuls  ! 
A.  consulibus,  by  consuls 


Rem.  3.  Nouns  with  the  final  letters  al,  except  sal  and  the  proper  names, 
have  VOWEL-STEMS,  and  will  be  considered  §  176,  177. 


lis 


THIRD   1)ECLP:NSI0N.— LIQUID   STEMS. 


THIRD   DECLENSIOIT. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


119 


N-CLASS. 

§  1  10,  Vocabulary. 

A^nnon,  agminis,  n.,  aivmon,  column  W^o,  dm.%  m.  a  hoe 

^    of'au.  army  hmix'nado,  7 /iv<,f.  leu  ffth 

Anio  Anirnis,  m.  a  river  in  LdWuii  Miu-cdo,  onis,  m.  a  Mdrcdonian 

A])oli()  hiis,  the  god  of  arts  and  sci-  mairnitudd,  IniKf.  gnat/NSs,  dzc,^ 

(,j^(.f^^  imir-ro,  hiix,  )n.  df.  border,  margin 

carl)0,  oiiis,  m.  charcoal  niiiltitu(io,  hm,f.  multitude 

(•ardo',  hits,  m.  hinqe,  a  j)ole  of  a  globe  -natio,  oois,  f  a  nation 

carmen,  uiis,  n.  a  poem  noinen.  Inis,  n.  name 

Curtlia^n),  7friM,f  Carthage  obsulio,  o„i.s,J.  .^uge ^ 

caio.  (v//v/?X  f.  fle.sh,  meat  occasio.  o,HS,f  orraxion 

cvninv\o,onisjn.a centurion  (captain)  oratio,  oni-sj.  oratom 

certam.'ii,  Xnis,  n.  strife,  druggie  ordo,  ?>//.v.  ok  ordrr,  rank 

co'momcn,  T/^/.v,  n.  surname  ong-o,  7oi.s,f.  ongin 

concio  ON  is,  f  assembly  of  the  people  pavo,  On  is,  ni.  peacock 

conditio,  onis,  f.  condition  ■  pecten,  Inis,  m.  comb 

conjuratio,  orus,f  conspiracy  pranlo,  i>nis,  m.  robl)cr 

consiictudo.  In  is,  f  hohit,  custom.  ])n.rio,  nnis,  m.  dogger 

discrlmen,  Uis,  n.  difference,  critical  ratio,  dnis,f  reason,  method, system 


sii  nation 
disputatio,  dnis,f.  discussion 
draco,  onis,  m.  dragon 
factio,  onis,  faction ,  party 
flmnen,  7nis,  n.  a  river 
l\)rtitudo,  hiiSyf  brarery 
fulnien,  inis,  n.  lightning 
grando,  inis,f.  hail 
har])ago,  onis,  m.  grappling  hook 
^honio,  7/iis.  m.  man 
imago,  hiis.f.  image 
interrogatio!  onis,f  question 
latro,  onis,  m.  robber 
lectio.  onis,f.  a  reading 
legio,  onis,}'.  a  legion 
leo,  onis,  m.  a  lion 

§    150.    Paradigms 

Singular. 


roi^io,  onis,f.  region,  country 

rdigio,  onis,  f  reverence,  conscien- 
tiousness,  religion 

renes  (stem  rUn),  pi.  t.,  w.  the  kid- 
neys 

Saxo.  tniis,  m.  a  Saxon 

seditio,  dnis,f  rebellion 

semen,  in  is,  n.  seed 

sermo,  nnis,  w.  speech,  language 

eimilitudo,  7/iis,f.  si  m  if  a  city 

testudo,  litis,  f.  a  tort<nse 

tiro,  onis,  m.  a  beginner 

valet udo.  inis,  f.  Judith 

vicissitudo,  hiis,f.  ehaiice 

virgo,  hiis,f  a  virgin 


N.  Sermo,  the  speech 

G.  sermfiiiis,  of  the  speech 

D.  sermdni,  to  the  sj)eec1i 

A.  sermdnem,  th^  speech 

V.  sermo,  0  speech  ! 

A.  sermdne,  by  the  speech 


Plural. 

N.  senndnes,  the  speeches 
G.  sermdnum,  of  the  speeches 
D.  sermonibus,  to  the  speeches 
A.  sermdnes,  the  speeches 
V,  sermdnes.  0  speeches  ! 
A.  strnionibus,  by  the  speeches. 


I  Homo  and  vlr  tnust  l.e  dislincuishcd  from  ench  other.  The  former  indn.les  w..in«n 
ftnd  ohildroii,  and  means  an  individual  of  tht-  iicmas  r v  i:  I'.ut  inr  m  opposed  to  both, 
women  and  children.    ^  S'otio  irenerally  means  a  barbaric  n;»tion. 


STNGUTjAR. 

N.  Homo,  a  man 
G.  Iiomlnis,  (>/a  m/z/i 
J),  liomini,  to  a  mwi 
A.  bonnneiii.  a  man 
V.  bomo,  0  man! 
A   homine,  by  a  man 


N.  Nomen,  a  name 
G.  nominis,  of  a  name 
D.  nomini,  to  a  naiiw 
A.  nomen,  a  name 
V.  nomen,  O  iunne  ! 
A.  nomine,  by  a  name 


plural. 

JV".  homines,  men 
G.  bominum,  of  men 
D.  liominibus,  to  men 
A.  bomines,  Tnen 
V.  homines,  0  men! 
A.  hominibus,  by  men. 

N.  nomina,  names 
G.  nom'nnim,  of  names 
D.  uominibus,  to  names 
A.  nomina,  names 
V.  nomina,  0  names! 
A.  nominibus,  by  names. 


§  1  «"i  1 .  9.  Tbe  nouns  of  the  N-class  have  the  final  letters  o 
or  en  in  the  nominative  sin«i"ular,  the  former  dropping  the  char- 
acteristic n  in  this  case.  Those  in  o  are  masculine  or  feminine  ; 
those  in  en  are  neuter  with  a  few  masculine  exceptions. 

§  loS.  10.  Nouns  hi  0  are  generally  masculine,  and  take  in 
the  genitive  the  final  letters  onis,  whieli  they  substitute  for  the 
terminatiou  o  of  the  nominative,  as  le-o,  le-bnis  {leon  being  the 
stem,  and  is  the  case-termination)      But 

1.  Nouns  in  do  and  go  have  mis  in  the  genitive,  and  are  fem 
ININE  ;  and 

2.  Nouns  in  io  are  likewise  feminine,  but  take  onis  in  the  gen- 
itive. 

EXCEPTIONS  TO  RULE  §  152. 

1.  In  Gender:  Cardo,  ordo,  margo,pugio,  centurio,  SLJid  some  rarer 

nouns. 

2.  In  the  form  of  the  genitive:  Apollo,  homo. 

3.  In   both  :  Anio,  caro,  harpago,  ligo,  praedo,  besides  some  rarer 

nouns. 

Some  national  nouns  in  o,  as  Macedo,  Saj>9,  take  dni^  with  a  short 
penult  in  the  gen. 

§  15*{f  11.  The  nouns  in  en  take  mis  in  the  genitive,  and  are 
neuter  ;  hwt  jyecteii,  ^flamen,  and  nouns  in  cen  (from  canere,  as 
oscen,   tibtcen,  ^tuhicen)  are  masculine. 

Rem.  4,  ^TAen  and  the  pi.  t.   renes  are  likewise  masculine ;  but  both 
nouns  have  a  long  e  [G.  lienis). 


Flnmen,  a  nrlvYit  of  a  sincde  deity.    *  Oscen,  a  prophetic  bird.    '  A  fluteplayer.     *  A 
player  of  the  tuDa.     *Z,i<?;t,  milt. 


120 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


R-CLAS^. 

§  1«>4.    TOCABULARY 

Accipitor,  tris,  m.  a  falcon 

ador,  dri.s,  n.  spelt 

«Tquor,  dm,  n.  a  surface 

at-r,  eris,  m.  air 

agger,  eris,  in.  dyke 

'^ainor,  lore 

ardor,  heat,  impetuosity 

ansor,  eris,  c.  g.  goose 

arbor,  oris,  f.  tree 

asser,  eris,  m.  a  {wooden)  hoard 

auctor,  author,  founder 

augur,  uris,  m.  an  augur,  o.  class  of 

priests 
<:adHver,  eris,  n.  a  corpse 
calor,  heat,  warmth 
career,  eris,  m.  prison,  jail 
censor,  a  censor. 


a  high  llomau 


magistrate 


iter,  itineris,  n.  a  journey,  march, 

ro(fd 
jecur,  G.  jecoris,  jecinoris  &  joc5- 

ris,  71.  licer 
labor,  lab'fr,  hardfthip 
later,  r/'/.v,  m.  a  brick 
lenuires.   pi.  t.  (stem    UmUr),  m, 

spectres 
inarmor,  f>ris,  n.  marble 
mater,  tris,f.  mother 
mulier,  eris,f  a  woman 
orator,  (tn  orator 
passer,  eris,  m.  sparrow 
])ater,  tris,  m.  father 
l)avor,  a  tremb'ing,  dread 
])r<eeeptor,  a  teacher 
praetor,  a  praetor,  a  high  Roman 

magistrate 
proceres,  pi.  t.  (stem  proc^r)  m. 

the  highest  in  rank 
robur,  oris,  n.  strength 
scriptor,  a  writer,  author 
senator,  a,  senator 
Boror,/.  a  sister 
tunoT,fear 

tuber,  eris,  n.  a  dioeUing,  a  tuber 
uxor,  /.  a  wife 

ver,  teris,  n.  tJie  spring  of  the  year 
'vesper,  eris,  tn.  evening 
verbera,   ])1.   t.   (stem    verier)  n. 

flogging,  blows 
victor,  (/  etmqueror 
vomer,  eris,  m.  a  ploughshare 
vultur,  uris,  m.  a  vulture. 

Paradigms 

PLURAL. 

N.  dolores.  the  pains 

(r.  doldruiu,  (f  the  pains 

D.  doloribus,  to  the  pains 

A.  dolores,  the  pains 

V.  dolores,  0 pains! 

A.  doloribus,  by  thf  pains. 


cicer,  eris,  n.  a  chick-pea 

clamor,  a  shouting,  clamor 

color,  color 

defensor,  a  defender 

dictator,   dictator,    extraordinary 

Roman  magistrate 
dolor,  pain,  grirf. 
ebur,  drix,  n.  icory 
enitor,  a  buyer 
error,  a  miMake 
{&\oT,facor 

femur,  oris,  n.  the  thigh 
frater,  tris,  rn.  brother 
fulgur,  uris,  n.  light /ting 
{nv,furis,  c.  g.  a  thief 
furoT,fury 
imperator,  a  comynander 

singular. 

N.  Dolor,  the  pain 
G.  dtAnr'ifi,  of  th^' pain 
1).  dolor i.  to  the  pain 
A.  dolorem,  the  pain 
V.  dolor,  O  pain  ! 
A.  doldre,  by  the  pain 

•  In  tins  vocatni'ftiv  the  resnlar  nouns  in  nr  will  not  be  Hocornpaiueil  by  their  genitive» 
or  gi'ndt'r-iiiitrks.  it  b.-ini;  iii\d-'r-.to(>(l,  thit  they  are  mitsniJin".  iintj  form  their  ijenitlvei* 
in  uiin.  with  long  penult.  ''  Venper  is  decline»!  both,  Mfler  the  '2d  and  :3d  declensions.  See 
I  50.  The  genitive  ftiilow»  tiie  2d  (vej<peri,  not  reaper  is),  but  the  ablative  follows  the  8tf 
{ve-spere). 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— LIQUID    STEMS. 


121 


SmGULAR. 

N.  Pater,  a  father 
G.  patris,  of  a  fttlier 
D.  patri,  to  afatJier 
A    pat  rem,  afatJier 
V.  pater,  O  father  ! 
A.  patre,  byafatlier 


PCURAL. 

N. 

pat  res,  fathers 

G. 

patruTH,  of  fathers 

U. 

l)atribus,  to  fathers 

A. 

-paXms,  fathers 

V. 

patres,  0  fathers! 

A. 

patribus,  by  fatJiers. 

N.  Tuber,  a  swelling 
G.  t\ihcT\^,  of  a  swelling 
D.  tuberi,  to  a  swelling 
A.  tuber,  a  swelling 
V.  tuber,  0  swclUng  ! 
A.  tui^ere,  by  a  swelling 


N.  tubera,  swellings 
G.  tuberum,  of  swellings 
D.  tuboribus,  to  swellings 
A.  tubera,  sicellings 
V.  tubera,  0  s (ceilings  ! 
A.  tuberibus,  by  swellings. 


§  156.  12.  The  nouns  of  the  R-class  in  both,  stem  and  nom« 
illative  have  the  final  letter  r,  whicli  is  preceded  either  by  a,  e,  o, 
or  ti.  The  genitive  has  a  short  penult  except  in  the  regular  nouns 
in  or.     Tlie  gender  is  either  the  masculine  or  the  neuter. 

§  157.  13.  Nouns  in  ar  general) v  have  vowel-steais  with  a 
long  penult  in  the  genitive.  See  §  176,  ITt.  To  the  R-class  be- 
long only  some  male  proper  names  {Caesar,  G.  Caesaris ; 
Zlamilcar,  G.  ITa??ulcaris),  besides  some  appellative  nouns  of 
very  rare  occurrence. 

IS^mis  in  er,  denoting  things,  are  masculine  or  neuter  (aer, 
agger,  asser,  career,  ^glhher^  later,  vesper,  vomer  are  masculine' 
the  rest  are  neuter.)  Those  denoting  persons,  follow  their  sex 
{tnater,  frater,  pater,  mulier),  and  those  denoting  beasts,  are 
either  of  common  gender  {eniser),  or  masculine  (2Misser,  accipi- 
ter).  The  genitive  has  a  short  penult,  which  in  pater,  mater, 
frater  and  accipiter  is  syncopated.  For  the  vowel-stems  in  er 
see  §  187. 

Nouns  in  or  form  the  genitive  in  oris,  being  masculine; 
except  the  fem.  arhor  and  the  neuters  ador,  aequor,  marmor, 
which  have  oris  with  a  short  penult. 

Nouns  in  ur  form  their  genitives  in  uris,  except  ehur,  femur, 
rohur,  jecur,  which  have  oris.     Persons  and  beasts  in  icr  are 


"  A  post-classical  word,  meaning  a  hunch  on  the  hack. 


122 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— LIQUID   STEMS. 


S-CLASS. 
§  15S.  Vocabulary. 

TPa  -Pri^  77  bronze  copper  m^^^.  maris,  m.  a  male 

^S%«;  rS  r standard  of     uu..  .nr.ris,  ,«.  "'!-'" f^;;^^ 
R<.„.n  coins,  weight,  and  m.a.     ;-;-;'-; -/^^^tf 

CeresTvTcris,  (A«  goddes»  of  auricul-    nenms.  oris,  /,.  "  i/roi-e 

ture 
cinis,  t-ris,  /«.  a<JA^« 
corpus,  oris,  /t.  6o(/^ 
cms,  cruris,  n.  a  leg 
cucuinis,  eris,  ;?*.  a  cue  umber 
dt'cus,  oris,  /i.  ornament,  honor 
dfdfcus,  r>ris,  >i.  dmjrace 
facinus,  oris,  n.  a  deed,  misdeed 
fenus,  oris,  n.  wmry,  interest 
flos,  tloris,  m.  a  flower 
focdus,  oris,  /i.  a  treaty 
frit^us,  oris,  a.  frost,  cold 
fuuus,  T'ris,  u.fuiiend,  corpse 
genus,  eris,  /i.  kind,  race 


onus,  eris,  n.  a  burden 

oi)Us.  eris,  /i.  a  icork 

OS,  r>ri8,  n  the  month,  tfie  face 

OS,  ossis.  n.  a  bone 

pectus,  oris,  n.  breast 

pecus,  oris,  n.  cattle 

pij;nus,  oris,  n.  a  pledge 

pond  us,  r-ris,  n.  a  weight 

pulvis,  eris,  m.  dust 

ros,  roris,  m.  dew 

rus.  ruris.  /<.  country^ country-seat 

Bcelus,  eris,  n.  a  crime 

Bid  us,  eris,  n.  constellation,  star 

Btercus,  oris,  n.  dung 


honos',  oris,'  m.  honor  (m  plur.  places    tempus,  oris.  //.  tinie 


of  honor) 
jus,  juris,  n.  right,  law 
lepos,  oris,  m.  grare,  elegance 
le])U8,  oris,  m.  a  hare 
latus,  eris,  n.  a  side 
litus,  oris,  n.  a  coast 


SINGULAR. 

N.  Vulnus,  a  wound 
G.  vulneris.  of  a  wound 
D.  vulneri,  to  a  wound 
A.  vulnus,  a  icound 
V.  vulnus,  0  wound! 
A.  vulncre,  by  a  tcouiid 


ulcus,  eris,  a.  a  sore,  idceration 
vas,  vasis"^,  n.  a  vessel  (of  clay, 

silver,  &r.) 
Venus,  eris,  /.  th>  (joddess  of  beauty 
viscera,  pi.  t.,  the  entrails 
vulnus,  eris,  a.  a  wound 

lo9.  Parai)h;ms. 

runt  AL. 
N.  vulnera,  wounds 
O.  vulneruni,  of  wounds 
D.  vulneribus,  to  wound» 
A.  vulneni,  wounds 
V.  vulnera,  0  wounds! 
A.  vulneribus,  hy  wounds 


N.  Tern  pus,  the  time 
G.  temporis,  <f  the  time 
D.  tempori,  to  the  time 
A.  tempus,  the  time 
V.  temi)us,  0  time! 
A.  tempore,  by  the  time 


N.  tem])ora,  tJie  times 

(i.  temporuni.  (f  the  tunes 

D.  temi)oribus,  t(f  the  times 

A.  tempora,  the  times 

V.  tempora.  O  times! 

A.  tempori l)us,  by  the  titne» 


»  nN<  i-  'V//^  cow,fnr'  in  (.pponition  to  rifie.^.  T^rra  and  req\o  are  lafL-yr  or 
.n.a^o  '  district,  of  th^  eartl.. '  L;./..  Patria  i%'>;r'^//X;iZ  2  J^Hc'^wlii  h 
10  Yax,  rods,  l.as  a  collateral  form,  vamm,  v(m,  of  the  2d  declcusiou,  afitr  N^uun 

the  plural  its  exclusively  formed. 


,  THIRD   DECLENSION.— LIQUID   STEMS. 


123 


§  160.  14.  The  final  li?tter  of  the  nouns,  belonging  to  the 
S-class,  is  the  liquid  s,  in  both,  stem  and  nominative  singular.  This 
final  s,  which  must  not  be  taken  for  a  case-termination,  is  changed 
into  r  in  the  oblique  cases,  except  in  ««,  os  (bo?ie\sind  vas. 

§161.  15.  The  majority  of  the  nouns  of  the  S-class  termi- 
nate in  us,  being  of  neuter  gender.  Their  genitives  are  formed 
either  in  oris  or  in  eris.  Some  nouns  in  us  {cms,  jus,  rus,  mus, 
and  some  rarer  nouns)  have  genitives  in  uris.  The  few  nouns  in 
as,  c^s,  €S,  is  and  os,  belonging  to  the  S-class,  are  enumerated 
§  l'^8. 

Rem.  5.  The  characteristic  s  of  the  nouns  of  the  S-class  in  the  earlier 
periods  of  the  language  remained  unchanged  throui^h  the  oblique 
cases.  Thus  vulnuji  (stem  vulnes)  was  declined:  G.  vidnesis,  D. 
tulnrsi,  dc. ;  tempus  (stem  tempos),  G.  teniposis,  D.  tempod,  &c.; 
honos,  G.  honoHis,  d'c. 

Rem,  G.  The  peksonal  nouns  of  the  S-class,  consisting  of  the  names  of 
the  f^^oddesses  Ceres  and  Venus  are  feminine.  The  names  of 
BEASTS  {mnH  and  lepos)  are  masci'LINE. 

Rem.  7.  Nouns  in  os  occur  in  the  T-class  also.     See  §  105,  167. 


EXERCISES. 


Write  paradigms  of  hiems,  WiNtir;  sol,  the  sun;  carbo,  a  char- 
coal; consuetudo,  a  habit  ;  semen,  seed ;  CVsar,  jd;*.  n.;  iter,  a  jourmy  ; 
frateT,  brother ;  soror,  sLster ;  fa\<rnTjig/itnlng ;  robur,  strength;  scelxis, 
trinic ;  corpus,  a  body ;  liios,  manner ;  lepus,  a  Jiare. 

A.   ATTRIBUTIVE   PIIIIASES. 

^  iv-OLASS.  1.  The  wretched  exiles.  2.  Of  attentive  watchmen.  3. 
The  late  of  Adherbal  and  lliempsal.  4.  By  the  proconsuls  of  Gaul  and 
^I'ain.  o.  The  'training  of  l)()xers.  0.  By  the  invincible  Sim-'>-od  7. 
By  'Attic  salt.  8.  The  bitter  gall  {ohj.).  '().  To  excellent  lionev.  10. 
By  Hannibal,  the  renowned  adversary  of  Africflnus. 

1.  Sempronii  proconsulis.  2.  Dionysio  exsule.  ?,.  Hannibali  exsuli. 
4.  Mira  viuiluiu  ne,uli<rentiri.  o.  Sails  Tarentini  pretium.  6.  C'alido 
Arabite  sole.  7.  Iliempsale  atc^tie  Adherbale,  Numidia?  regulis.  8.  M. 
Antonio  et  L.  Murena  consul ibus. 

N-CLASS.  1.  A(Tit()  <:la(lii  -'mucrr.ni.  2.  Varrone  .Emilidqne  con- 
Rulibus.  ;j.  Miro  leonis  grati  ^specimine.  4  Pneddnum  Tarentindrum 
^inciii-sidnes.  o.  •' llirundinum  '  domesticarum  *nidi.  (>.  (irandinea 
civbr.e,  aij-ris  n(»xia\  7.  Mira  copiarum  fortitudine.  8.  InHfinam  M. 
Pisonis  -'libidinem.  9.  Ma^no  mundi  universi  online  ac  ratidne.  10.' 
Altis '"saxosisque  fluminis  marginibus.  11.  Pulchras  templi  imairines! 
12.  Ferarum  Illyria.^  natidnum  conditione.     13.  Kegidnum   frit^idllruin 


>  Training,   discipl'ma.      "Attic,   Atticns.      »  Mncro,   edgf.      <  Specimen,    «rami 

•  In.iirsio.  o.  raid.     «  Hirundo,  a  swallow.     '  Domesticus,  domestic.     «JSidus,  a  n 

•  Lilddo,  pas.iioth,  lust,     lo  Saxosus,   atony. 


mpla, 


rj4 


THIRD   DECLEXSION.— LIQUID   STEMS. 


1 

At' 


ncoLp  14  Ma^nrr  honiinum  ^'admiratiuni.  to.  P.  Cornolius  Scipio, 
Afric.lni  co-uomine  ^-Vo-uitus.  1(5.  K-rt-gia  Piivlan  carmma.  1.. 
Splt-ndido  AnoUiuis  ft  Duln^  teraplo.  IS.  l>nrdan.  Ma(vd.»uuni  mc- 
toruD.     19.  Pavont'Junr.nisacro.     '20.  AnirMie  exiguo  Latii  ttimime. 

1    Of  the    consuls  M.   Tullius   ricero   and   L.   Anthony.     2.   By  the 
nefarious  <-onspi  racv  of  Catiline.     3.  By  the  goddess  Juno,  a  daughter  of 
Saturnusand  lihra.     4.  The  ''tame  dragons  ot  the  '^hpidaurians      o 
The  ^^Catilinarian  orations  of  Cicero,    (i.  By  reason,  the  assistan^  ot  ni  n. 
7    Bv  a  Konum    centurion    of  a   -^Gallic  h'.i^non.     S^  By  Carthage,    he 
ancient  rival  of  Rome.     U.  T..  the  ohs-ure  origin  o   Mar.us.     10.  By  the 
chances  of  human   fortune.      11.  By  tlie  order  ot    words  ot   the  La  m 
lan-uage  [Mn-mo).    12.  Tlie  '-Tusculan  discussH.ns  of  (  icero.    l.>.   A  ba. 
liTbit  (5v.   of  obscure  questions.     14.  By  the  opinions  (opi>nu)  of  learned 
m  n(l^i».      1.-^.  The\iature  of  hot   regions.     K;    Bv   the  passions  ot 
ba<lmen      17.  The 'Vxtraordinary  si/e  (ohj.)  of  the  •'Minud.an  lions 
IS    Bv  a  '^"change  of  ancient  habits.     19.  The  natur.'  of  -'oaken  eharcoal. 
20    The  boldn.Ss  of  the  Theban  robbers.     2L  The  mutual  stntes  ot  the 
^•«M.nosite   factions.     22.   Bv  the   -'abduction  of  the  ■-■'^ablnlan   virgins. 
o;rBriVonderful  image  of  the  godde>s  Juno.    24.  The  ; 'iron  grapphng 
hol.ks  of  the  -'^maritime  robbers.     2r,.  By  the  immense  size  ot  maritnm) 
tortoises      2(5    To  the  assiduous  reading  of  industrious  beginners^     ^*. 
S:!;b''urehist,>ryof  the  ancient   Saxous.     28.  /i;]- P'-i- o/  "'"^'J 
and  Vir.nl.     29.   Bv  sun  and  moon,  the  -lights  of  "    ^''^ve^i-  „;''\,  .'^'^'^ 
dm'-reno-sofliabit'.    'M.  The -"Meadly  arrows  of  Aix.llo.    32.  The  ■-ivory 
(Mmibs  of  the  Roman  women  (m'//«Vr.) 

R-CL\SS      1.   BvCn.  Pom  p.")  us,  the  renowned  rival  of  luliiis  (  ;esar 
2    To  the  Carthaginian  Hannibal,  a  son  of  Ilamilcar.     :,.  hwellmgs  ot 

trees.asi^n  of  disease.  4.  By  the  rough  spring  'ij;"  V;"''"'^^'»r;':Vn;;;^- 
5  The  ^'nmhuried  corpses  of  the  en.  uiies.  (5.  lo  Ilenrv  and  \N  iHwim 
tiie  brothers  of  C^harles.  7.  The  Roman  jail  W«>/.;.  an  <>ld  and  r-n-^ned 
^building.  8.  The^-ggsof  black  geese.  9  The  a.r  (ohj),  close  by 
an  hot  "Tanor.  10.  The  ramp,  secure  by  a  long  dyke  and  dit»  h  11. 
Bv  a  o-iJi^'inipcluositv  of  the  mind.  12.  By  the  mutual  ove  and  -68- 
Smu  ot- Cicero  Lul  Atti^-us.  1:5.  l^y  tlie  universal  ^>^ass*.U  o  the  •>  heai^s. 
14.  The  wailings  of  wretched  mothers  and  wives.  U.  lhe^4U.a  sur- 
faces of  deep  rivers  (  tl'nurn).  IC.  The  ^'upright  manners  (-^:7-  «^/,  « 
ancient  Romans.  17.  The  prophetic  birds  ot  the  augurs.  18.  He 
^gll^vlll^nings  of  Sumailus.^  19  The  -untau.ralde  ^^,men  cd  sick 
livers  ^2():  1^- the  invinrible  strength  ot  the  soul  ot  CMPsar  21.  To  he 
e^  mordinarv* -«Hvhiteness  of  the  ^"Indian  ivory.  22.  The  'swollen 
4lm)a' s  ot  the  Alpine  [A^pln  u.)  nations.     23.  The  thn-ats  and  -mutter- 


n  \,]nvriit\o.  astoniMlnyifivf.     12  Coiinl  is  A'K^/j.  '  •* ' "  V  r.illinix     »'  Tu-culin 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


125 


ings  of  the  troops.  24.  The  cold  •^*' Tibur,  {ohj.)  the  ^'summer  ^'-residence 
of  ^-ealthy  Romans.  25.  The  slow  and  cautious  marches  of  the  Roman 
legions. 

1.  Accii>itres,  ^"venatorura  delicife.     2.  Mira  anserum  ferdrum  multi- 
tudine.      3.    Pulchra   auctoris  incerti  statua.      4.    Furiosi  barbardrum 
clamdres.     5.  Bruto  et  Cassio,  populi  Romani  defensoribus.     6.  Diversos 
scriptorum  Latindrum  errdres.     7.  C.  (iraccho,   Ti.   Gracchi    fratre.     8 
Justii  furum  pr;edonum(pie  pa^na.     9.  Longa  imperatdris  Romani  itinera. 

10.  Magna'  mulLrum  ""^treindatidni  acpavdri.  11.  Julia,  Poinpeji  uxdre 
Cicsarisjue  filiil.  12.  Iliemis  ^'Italicfe  verisipie  ^•^Germanici  similitudo. 
13.  Miro  Mildnis  robore.  14.  Temi)lum  fulguribus  sacrum.  15.  Cor- 
nelia, Gracchdrum  matre  Scipionisque  sordre.  10.  Carne  ^"bubula, 
pni^cij)uo  •'■^Angldru-m  ^'nutrimento. 

S-(  LASS.  1.  The '*"(•' >pp<'r  ases  of  Servius  TuUius.  2.  The  bones  of 
men  and  beasts.  3.  The  *^'silver  vessels  of  Mummius,  the  conqueror  of 
Corinth.  4.  The ''-white  mice  of '^•Egyptian  ♦^'jugglers.  5.  The  principal 
rights  of  the  Latin  allies.  7.  The  long  legs  of  the  «-^ostrich.  8.  The 
•'"ancestral  country-] daces  of  Scii>io.  9.  An  excellent  ])icture  of  the 
^"Coan  Venus.     10.  The  disgraceful  treaties  of  the  Roman  commander. 

11.  The  beautiful  gifts  (mmixs)  of  God.  12.  The  whole  works  of  Livy 
of  Patavium.  13.  The  crimes  {scelu-a)  of  Messallna,  the  impious  wife  of 
Nero.  14.  The  ditferent  weights  and  values  of  the  Roman  as.  15.  By 
the  slow  '^^•ure  of  old  wounds.  1<).  By  the  entrails  of  the  human  body. 
17.  The  wonderful  grace  {»bj..  l<'po.H)'of  the  writer.  18.  A  **^Britannic 
hare  (ohj.),  j)leaSant  to  the  ""palate.  19.  The  excellent  deeds  of  Caesar. 
20.  By  Faustulus,  the  ''herdsman  of  the  royal  cattle.  21.  The  times 
of  the  '-Dutch  "^rebellion.  22.  The  "^Asiatic  coasts  of  the  Hellespont. 
23.  By  the  'premature  frosts  of  middle  (lermany.  24.  To  the  timely 
'♦'redemiJtion  of  the  pledges  of  Tubero.  25.  The  nature  of  both,  males 
and  "'females.  2(].  By  "^Corinthian  bronze,  the  principal  metal  of 
"sculi)tors.  27.  To  Ceres,  the  mother  of  Proseri)ina.  28.  The  seeds  of 
rare  cucumbers.  29.  By  the  dust  of  the  Italian  roads  {iter).  30.  The 
mouths  of  the  goddess  *Fama.  31.  By  the  unhurt  honor  of  the  Roman 
commander.  32.  ""Nouns  of  ^'masculine  ^'-gender.  33.  ^^Garlands  of 
beautiful  tiowers. 

1.  Immensa  (xermandrum  antiqudrum  corpora,  2.  Calidi  ^^Vesuvii 
cineres.  3.  ImprobisCatilinae  facinoribos.  4.  Crebra  frigoris  calorisque 
mutatidne.  5.  Exiinia  Cereris  statuil,  **^igndti  auctdris  opere.  G.  Fu- 
tuTJB  generis  humani  conditidnis.  7.  Templa,  Apollini  et  V^eneri  sacra. 
8.  Divino  Jundnis  ore.  9.  Dubio  socidrum  Ijatindrum  jure.  10.  Pro- 
pinqua  Sicilia?  insuhr  litora.  11.  Magnis  immodicisque  provincifirum 
oneribus.      12.  Scelerum  toeddrum  *^perpetratidne.     13.    Immensa   ele- 


»0  Tibiir,  a  town  near  Rome,  the  modfrn  Tholi.  »1  finmmer,  adj.  eestTviis. 
»'  Re-siiit^nc;  m.-iiisio.  '^  I'^uator.  a  luuitiT.  ^*  .\nxiety.  ^^  Italian.  *«  Gfrm,tnicit» 
OeriiiHii,  iidj.  ^"  B'iftu'us.  beef,  «tv  (n/j.  68  Anglas.  an  Enclisliman.  **  Noiirisliinent. 
«0  (\,ppfir.  (iH  ad),  aiin'ti"^.  *'  SUpff,  ad),  arireiueiis.  ""■^  Allms.  *3  -£tryi>tia  as. 
•M'rteMii:irit<»r.  «^  Strut  liio.  ««  Avitiis.  «^  "cVmn  (of  the  is'and  of  Cos).  Cons  «»  Curatio, 
«»  liriiaiiiiiciiN.  ''P  Pii  atiiin.  ^i  |>a.stor.  ^a  Uatavus.  7  3  tjedjti,,.  '<  .V.siaticu-*.  ■"  Pr»- 
iiiaifirus.  ''6  Ue<lemtii>.  -''  F.Miiina.  ''^  Corinihius.  '»•  Statuarius.  ®°  Nomen. 
81  .Vla>culTiuis.  f*-  Gi'MUs.  »3  Seitum.  «*  VesuTius,  a  known  volcano.  ^^  IgnoUis,  un- 
knou}n.     »*  Perpetratio,  connniMion. 


1-2  i] 


TIIIKI)    DECLENSION. — LIQUID   STEMS. 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— MUTE   STEMS. 


127 


phanti  ossa.  14.  Miro  sormonis  lopdre.  15.  ^'Mansueto  pueri  leportt 
16.  Florum  sertoriiiiique  ^^odorc.     17.  Pecori  Apolliui  sacro. 

B.   SENTENCES. 

1.  Magnus  exsnlum  niimerus  patrte  a  consulibus  restituitur.  2 
Jugurtha  Adherbaltm  Micips;i?  filium  interficcre  conatur.  3.  Fabiua 
lloinanos  llannibahni  viiicere  docet.  4.  El»*pbanti  verberibus  crebris 
mansuefiuiit.  5.  Color  aureus  taurorum*  felle  effici  potest.  6.  Senato 
rum  numerus  a  Servio  Tullio  au«;«"tur.  7.  Exempla  mala  mores  bonog 
corrumpunt.  8.  Lon<i:;T  *'^cogitationis  •■'Hntenniysione  ingenii  mucro 
•'retuiulitur.     9.  ^-Jactatio  auditoribus  ^'^fastidium  afterre  {toc(nis<')sol(it. 

10.  Antonius  jwpuli  pectora  publico  Cjrsaris  funere  ^^inflammfire  studet. 

11.  Servorum  seditionem  parvo  copiaruni  numero  oj)primere  jiossumus. 

12.  Hannibal  socioruni  a.ixiniua  agi,'Tedi  statuit.  18.  ^^Pictor  pnedonis 
imauincni  carbone  '^"deliueat.  14.  Tironibus  Ilomeri  carmina  et  leg-ero 
et  intellii^iTc  necesse  est.  15.  Immensa  Persfirum  multitudo  Alexaudri 
copiarum  tortitudinem  superare  nequit.  10.  Straboneni  regiones  externas 
explorare  juvat.  17.  M.  Tullio  Ciceroni  conjurationem  Catilinariam 
oi)primere  licet.  18.  Errores  contiteri  semper  decet.  19.  Imperatoj 
tribunis  et  centurionibus  co]narum  discrlmen  ostendit.  20.  Copiae 
clamorem  magiium  subito  edere  (^o  rcfiW)  jiibentur.  21.  Augures  con- 
sulem  belhim  inciix^re  vetant. 

1.  The  Muses  are  '•'"sik'nced  by  tlie  ''^din  of  arms  and  tlie  ^^cries  of 
•war.  2.  Thou  canst  not  restore  to  life  ihe  bones  of  tlie  commander.  3. 
The  Italian  sj)ring  restores  Kigor  to  tlie  soul,  and  strength  to  the  body. 
4.  The  Roman  j)e(q)le  wishes  to  diminish  the  burdens  of  the  allies.  5. 
Thou  canst  not  restrain,  O  Sempronius,  the  blind  fury  of  the  passions  ! 
6.  To  be  the  author  of  rebellion  is  netVirious.  7.  Lightnings  have  a 
'■^sulphureous  smell.  8.  Swellings  are  healed  by  honey  and  the  dust  of 
charcoal.  9.  Tiie  people  'demands  the  lives  of  Cesar's  ""murderers.  10. 
A  vulture  daily  devours  Prometheus'  liver.  11.  The  Macedonians  in- 
tend to  tryf  the  chances  of  war  again.  12.  Cesar  prevents  the  legions  of 
Pompey  from  foraging.  13.  The  inhabitants  as  well  as  the  garrison 
are  unwilling  to  suffer  a  long  siegi».  14.  Hares  furnish  a  pleasant  and 
^palatable  meat.  15.  The  (female)  slave  does  not  know  how  to  cook  a 
tortoise.  IG.  We  often  admire  the  good  health  of  Cato.  17.  The 
Greek  orators  have  a  wonderful  grace  {lepoa)  of  ^style.  18.  The  garrison 
is  expelled  by  the  help  of  the  highest  in  rank.  19.  Thou  must  deliver 
Tubero's  country-seat  to  the  buyers.  20.  The  Roman  people  refuse  to 
confirm  the  treaties  of  the  commander.  21.  The  C(msts  of  Sicily  are 
dangerous,  and  are  avoided  (ffffere)  by  the  'merchants.  22.  A  life, 
devoted  to  lusts,  is  injurious  both  to  body  and  soul. 

8'  MitnsiiC'tus,  tame.  ^^  Otlor,  smHl,  fragranc/'.  »9  CogitRtio,  thinking.  »o  Inter- 
mi»si<».  intfr  rapt  ion.  »*  RetuniU're,  to  fdnnt.  »■•'  Jactatio,  a  Ixfisfing.  "3  Fastiiliuiii, 
(iisguxt.  8*  IiirtHmriiiire.  to  injitmc.  •*  Pictor,  a  painter.  *•  Delineiire,  to  sketch. 
^T  T<}  be  silenretf,  ohinntescere.  "•*/>/«.  claniror.  *•<?/•//.  clamor.  ^  Vigor,  visor.  ^Sul- 
phureous .siilfurciis.  3  To  (Ipinand,  eflBsiu'itare.  *  Murderer,  percussor.  '  Palatable, 
sapidu.s.      ^  Style,  st'nno.     "^  Merchant,   incrcHtor. 

*  T'le  quantity  i>f  the  vowel  o  in  the  penult  of  the  ohliquo  cases,  so  T-ir  a.s  it  is  deter- 
mined by  tlie  [jreeediMir  rules,  will  no  longer  be  marked  by  the  long  sign  in  the  exercises. 

t  Notice  the  difference  oi  experiri,  to  try,  and  of  atudere,  to  try.  Tiie  former  requirefl 
«  8UBSTANTIVK,  the  latief  an  iNriNixivB  as  object. 


I 


LESSON    XXVI. 

THIUD   DECLEXSIOX.— MUTE  STEMS. 

§  ]  0!d.  2.  The  MUTE  stems  consist  of  three  classes,  the  P- 
class,  the  T-class,  aud  the  K-class,  accorditig  as  they  have  either 
a  P-mute,  or  T-inute,  or  K-mute  as  characteristic.  They  geu' 
erallf/  take  the  case-termination  s  in  the  nominative  singular^ 
and  ai'e  tiien  niaSciiliiie  or  feminine.  The  only  neuters  with  mute 
steins  are  :  lae  (stein  lact),  cor  {^tem  cord),  crtput,  and  the  nouns 
in  ma,  G.  tndtis,  taken  from  the  Greek.  All  these  neuters  re/use 
the  case-termincttion  s  in  the  noininatitae  singular. 

§   1  0«t.      2.  The   nouns  with  mute  stems  are  declined  like 

those  with  liquid  stems,  by  atta^ihing  the  case-terminations  §  145 

to  their  stems. 

1^^"  Since  the  declension  of  the  mute  and  liquid  stems  is  essentially 
the  same,  and  both  differ  only  in  the  mannei  of  forming  the  genitive,  it 
is  deemed  unnecessary  to  illustrat'3  the  three  mute  classes  by  pab 

ADIGMS.  , 

P-CLASS. 
§  ]  04t.     Vocabulary. 


Ade|)s,  Tj)i<?,  m.fat,  lard 

auceps.  aucupis,  m.  a  hird-ciitcher 

daps,  dapis,/.  a  banquet 

forceps,  ^ipis,  m.  dcf.  a  pair  of  jnn- 

cerfi 
*ops,  opis,/.  help,  resource 

T-CLASS 


plebs,  plebis,  /.  tJie  pleb^,  the  common 
people 

princops,  Ipis,  m.  a  rider,  chief,  em- 
peror 

trabs,  tvabis,  /.  poet 


lOo.     Vocabulary. 


Abies,  Uis,f.  a  pine 
{enigma,  dtis,  n.  (Greek)  a  I'iddle 
jptas,  dti's,  f  age 
anas,  dtif<,f.  a  duck 
antistes,  ^tis,  m.  overseer. 
Ardeas,  dtis,  m.  an  inhabitant  of 
A  rdra 


Arpinas,  (1<v?,  m.  an  inhabitant  of 

Arpinum 
auctoritas.  dtie,f,  authoHtif 
brevitas,  dtU,  f.  shortness,  briefness 
calamitas,   dtis,  f.  calamity,    mis- 
fortune 
caput,  capitis,  n.  head 


aries,  etis,  m.  a  ram,  battering-reim    celeritas,  dtis  f  quickness 

*  This  noun  is  eitiier  the  name  of  the  ooddkss  Opx.  or  an  appellative  nonn,  denoting 
hflp.  As  H  proper  name  ir  loriii»  a  eompieto  siiiiruiar.  Ae  an  appellative  noun  it  lack£ 
tbe  nuuiinative  bingular,  but  furm6  all  other  caaes  \n  both  numberi>. 


128 


THIKD   DECLENSION. — MUTE   STEMS. 


civitas,  dtii^,  f.  state,  eiff/,  citizen-  n<^pos.  oth,  m.  grandnon 

«hip  iiox,  iioctis, /'.  iii<jltt 

comes,  UhH,  e.g.  co)t)paiiion  obscs,  ;<Z/.v,  r.  g.  <i  Jtodnge 

coiiipedcs,  1)1.  t.  (sU'in  compid),  f.  optimatfs,  pi.  t.  (stem  optimal):  m. 

shiiekks  ifridoerntK 

cor,  cordis,  n.  JudH  palus,  iidi.s,/.  -vc^n/ip,  marsh 

cof*,  cotis,/:  whetstone  puries,  eli.%  m.  a  itall  (of  a  house) 

cuspis,  uiis,f.  a  spear  paupertas.  atis,f.  poceiti/ 

custos,  odis,  c.  g.  a  guard,  guardian  ix'cus,  hdis,f.  a  head  of  ndtle 

diad»"ma,  dtis,  n.{(  iIIEEk),  a  diadem  pedes,  1-tis,  m.  a  foot-soldiir 

dilhciiltas,  atis,  f.  dijfiealty  penates.  pi.  t.  (st.  penCU),   m.  house- 
diixnitas,  atis,f.  dig  nit  i/  hold  gods 

dos,  ddtis,  /.  a  dowri/     .  pes,  i)edis,  m.  foot 

eques,  It  is,  m.  a  horseman,  knight  por-ma,  at  is,  n.  ((f  kekk),  a  j)oem 

traus,  fraudis,/.  fraud  pr;esi'S,  alls,  e.g.  a  rhitf 

gravitas,   atis,  f.   weight,  dignity,  quadnipes,  Idis,  V.  g.  a  quadruped 

grai'iti/  quies  (requies),  etis,f.  rest,  repose 

hereditas,  'dtis,  f  inheritance  Quintes,  \A .  t.  (st.  quirlt),  the  liomatu 

lieres,  edis,  c.  g.  an  heir  or  heiress  sacerdos.  Ty^/.v,  e.  g.  a  pricstov priesttss 

liosi)es,  "ttis,  m.  a  guist-friend  salus.  ntis,f.  welfare,  S(f<ty 

iucus,  Mis,f.  anvil  Samiiis,  Jti^s,  m.  a  Samnite 

interi)res,  etis,  c.  g.  interpreter  satellrs,  Itis,  c.  g.  a  saUUite 

juventus,  utis,f  young,  eige,  youth  senses,  i'tis.f  a  sta/tding  crap 

lac,  laetis,  n.  milk  sen(M*tiis,  Fitis.f.  old  age 

lapis,  alis,  m.  a  stone  servitus.  utis.f  slavery 

laus,  laudis,/.  praise  societas,  atis,f.  soeidy 

libcrtas,  dtisl  liberty  temeritas,  dti,s,f.  rashness 

limeii,  itis,  m.  Hm it,  houndary  ic\\\\^i":>i'AS,  dtis.  f  a  storm 

lis,  litis,/",  a  lawsuit  utilitas.  dtis,  ustfuUuss 

merces,  edis,f.  pay,  waejes  vas,  vadis,  c.  g.  a  bondsman,  security 

miles,  7tis,  a  soldier  virtus,  ruis,f.  virtve,  breivery 

§  160.  3.  The  characteristic  of  the  nouns,  belonging  to  the 
T-elass  {t  or  cf),  is  regulurly  dropped  in  the  nominative  singuUir 
before  its  case-termination  s,  which  letter  cannot  he  preceded  by 
a  T-mute.  The  T-mute,  thus  dropped  in  the  nominative,  always 
is  restored  in  the  obhqne  cases. 

Rem.  1.  Of  the  neuters  which  refuse  the  ending  s,  only  caput  retains 
the  T-mute,  but  lac,  cor  and  the  (J reek  nouns  in  ma  drop  their 
characteristics  in  the  nominative. 

167.  4.  Nouns  in  as  generally  belong  to  the  T--class,  being 
FEMININE  with  atis  in  the  genitive,  except  vas — vddis  and  anas — 
aniitis{?) 

Nouns  in  es  generally  have  vowel-stems  (§  HT);  but  a  con- 
gideraljle  number  of  them,  which  must  be  separately  learned  from 


*  Later  «luthors  eomcUmes  use  the  nonn  quadrupes  in  the  neutkk  pentlor. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — MUTE   STEMS. 


129 


the  vocabnlaiT,  beloni]^  to  the  T-elass.  Tiie  most  of  these  nouns 
in  es  change  this  termination  into  ttis  in  the  genitive,  and  are  mas- 
culine (miles,  comes,  /iOs^jes^  equcf^,  pedes,  dx\). 

The  nouns  in  os  {nepos^  sacerdos,  cos  and  dos)  have  dtis.,  those 
in  W.S  uti.^(juventus,  !<alffs,  smectus.,  servitus,  u/?'^u.s'),  and  those 
in  is,  partly  ttis  [lis  and  Samnis),  imrtly  id  is  (lapis  and  cuspis). 
AVitli  the  exception  of  lapis  and  the  personal  nouns  they  are  all 

FEMININE. 

Rem.  2.  A  few  nouns  in  us,  mis,  and  os,  mentioned  in  the  vocabulary,  form 
their  genitives  dillertiitly  (/>nlus,  incus,  jxcus,  custos,  fraus,  laus). 

K-CLASS. 
§  168,  Vocabulary. 

Appendix,  1cls,f.  an  <ipperidage  judex,  u'is,  m.  a  judge 

artifex,  u'is,  nt.  artist  '^lex,  legis,/'.  <i  law 

'*^cervix,  teiii,f.  the  neck  lux,  Ifieis,/.  light 

cicatrix,  lcis,f.  a  scar  nex,  necis./.  death  (violent) 

co(h'x,  a'ls,  m.  a  code,  book  nutrix,  Iris.f.  a  nurse  (female) 

''conjux,  ugis.f.  a  wife,  consort  nux,  nucis,/.  a  nut 

crux,  crucis,/.  a  cross  pax,  paci.s,/.  peace 

cuh;x,  ids,  m.  ei  gnat  pollex,  ids,  m.  thunib 

dux,  ducis,  c.  g.  a  leader,  general  preces,  ])1.  t.  (stem  prec)f.  prayer 

fax,  facis,/'.  a  torch  i)(mtifex.  a'ls,  m.  a  chief-priest 

fornax,  dcis.f.  a  furnace-  radix,  icis.f  a  root 

fornix,  u'ls,  m.  an  arch  rex,  rPgis,  m.  a  king 

frutex,  ids,  m.  a  shrub  salix,  tds,f  a  willow 

frux,  frugis,/.  fii Id-fruit  silex,  \ds,  ni.  flint,  pchble-stojie 

grex,  gregis,  ?n.  a  fiock  vertex,  Tm,  m.  top,  whirlpool 

harusjH'x,  Ids,  ni.  a  so</thsnyer  victriXj  ids,f.  a  conqueress 
index,  ids,  m.  informer,  spy,  indi-    vox,  vocis,/.  voice,  word,  remark, 
cation 

§  1 69.  5.  The  nouns,  belonging  to  the  K-class  have  the  final 
letter  x  in  the  nominative,  which  must  be  resolved  into  cs  or  ^s, 
s  being  the  case-termination  of  the  nominative,  and  c  or  y  the 
characteristic  of  the  stem.  Hence  the  genitive  is  formed  by 
chanii-ing  the  final  x  of  the  nominative  either  into  cis  or  iiitc 
gis.     The  former  is  the  rule,  the  latter  the  exception. 

§  1  70.  6.  The  vowel,  preceding  the  characteristic,  generally 
remains  unchanged.     But  the  nouns  in  ex,  with  the  exception  of 


^^Cetfiix  in  classical  langu:iL'e  ahvay?  is  used  in  the  plckal  with  siniiular  signification 
11  riinjux  aomvl'uues,  but  rarely,  is  used  a3  a  masculine  of  the  husband.     ^^  Lex  Uk 
tingle  law  ;  /um  is  the  law,  as  a  generality. 

9 


130 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — MUTE   STEMS. 


the  monosyllabics,   enumrmtecl   in   the  vocalnilarv,   change   their 
final  hitters  into  tcis  in  the  g-cnilive. 

§  171.  7.  Tlie  GENDER  of  tlie  K-chiss  is  the  feminine;  but 
the  "-ender  of  the  nouns  in  ex  is  the  masculine. 

Rem  3  The  nouns  sene.r,  niv,  supdlfx  are  irrecjulak.  and  the  noun 
no.v  belongs  to  the  T-Class.  Those  nouns  in  wiiich  fiaal  x  is  pre- 
ceded by  a  CONSONANT,  have  voWEL-stkxis.     See  ^  184,  180. 

EXERCISES. 

l^  Write  jmradigms  of  the  follnrlng  noun.'*  iritlt  nvite  stems  : 
Princeps  a  ruler,  a^tas  the  age,  miles  a  soldier,  lapis  d  stone,  virtua 
mrtae,  fornax  afurnaee,  codex  n  hook,  lex  <i  IdU). 

A.    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 

P-CLASS.  1.  The  different  '•'•secessions  of  the  Roman  plebs.  2.  By 
the  unforeseen  help  {ops)  of  bird-catchers.  ;i  The  great  resource's  of  the 
rulers.     4.  By  a  wooden  post.     5.  By  a  i-*curved  ])air  of  pincers. 

1  Plebis  '^scita,  senatoribus  raolesta.  '2.  Infmitu'  Romanornm  opes. 
8.    '«Sumtudsis   Luculli    dapibus.     4.    Querneas   domonim    trabes.      5. 

i^\lbo  anserum  adipe.  ^  »    ^  ,,.  or» 

T-CLVSS      I    'i'he  Atti^  nii^hts,  a  renowned  book  of  A.  Gellins      ,.  Ky 
C    Popilius  Licnas,  the  murderer  of  Cicero.     3.    The  i)ledges  of  safe 
bondsmen      4.  The  wonderful  nature  of  the  'n'ontian  ducks.     .).  To  tlio 
^reat  (luiekness  of  the  Numidian  horsemen.     G.  The  ample  res.»urces  of 
the  rebellious  states.     7.   Bv  the  vain  '"elf  u'ts  of  the  aristocrats.     8.    lo 
the  -'"Antemnatians,  a  ne'igliboring  nation.  U.  By  -'trancpiilllty  of  the  soiib 
the  certain  companion  {comes)  of  virtue.     10.   The  Hight  of  both   the 
foot-soldiers  and   horsemen.     11.  By  a  -'-native  -''him.  n.ss  and  sores  ol 
the  feet.     12.  Bv  Nearchus,  a  guest-friend  of  Cato.     lo.  To  the  -'setthng 
of  doubtful  bou*n<laries.     14.  By  -■'music,  the  ebxiuent  interpreter  of  the 
heart.     15.  The  -'^outer  walls  of  the  building.     Ki.  Tii"  snuiU  remains 
of  magnificent  (standing)  crops.     IT.  By  a  pleasant  repose  of  the  body. 
18.  By  the  -"surrender  of  the  Latin  hostages.     11).  Dnnuci'ous  wmmds 
of  the   riirht  foot.     20.  To    the   burden  of  oil    age.     '2i.    To    the    iron 
shackles  of  the  i)risoner8.     22.  By  the  heii-s  of  the  emperer  Otho.     2:i. 
To  the  small  pav  of   the  Roman  soldiers.  24.  The  -"^s<pmre  stones  of  the 
2»8epulchre.     25.*  Bv  an   ancient  ^"corporation  of  priests.     2C.  The  wel- 
fare {obj.)  of  the  state,  dear  to  the  (pu'en.     27.  Tlie  ''loul  air  {obj.)  «>f  the 
«-Pomi)tinian  marshes.     28.  The  unwilling  praises  of  the  chiet.     29.  1  he 
bloody  lieads   of  the  =^"conspirators.     30.   By  the  diadem  ot  Cleoi)atra, 

queen  of  Egypt.  _ 

1.  Philosophorum  Gnrcorum  aniigmata.     2.  I'errea  generis  Immani 
tDtate.      3.    Sempronio,    augurum    coUegii    antistite.      4.    Imperatoris 


THIRD    DECLENSION. — MUTE    STEMS. 


131 


Romani  auctoritate.  5.  Vit*  human^c  brevitiiti.  0.  Magn*  hominuni 
s^voluntfiti  7.  Illvria?  civitatibus,  populo  Romano  intestis.  8.  Magna 
Fat.'llitum  copia.  '9.  Philosophia  et  grammatica,  ingenii  cotes.  10. 
Sociorum  pedites,  Poenorum  -^pra^senti^e  ignari.  11.  Comitum  pedes, 
itinere  fessi.  12.  Ilanuone  ct  llasdrubale,  Poenorum  interpretibus.  Id. 
Equitura  Romanornm  ordine.  14.  La^ta  filioruin  ac  nepotum  multitu- 
dine  15.  Civitatum  Grajcfirum  libertatem.  IG.  Immensa  mill  turn 
pra^da  17.  Duumvirorum  decreta,  civitatis  saluti  contraria.  18.  N eta- 
rifi  hominum  -«perditorum  societate.     10.  Universa  servitutis  -abroga- 

*^"k-cl\ss  1  The  fierv  furnaces  of  38 Vulcan.  2.  The  advantages  of  a 
long  peace.  3.  Bv  the  '^^oud  voice  of  the  ^"heralds  4.  To  a  code  ot 
the^h)resent  law^.  -5.  By  pebble-st^ne  and  "^-'gravel,  the  ^^material  of 
the  «Flaminian  way.  6.  By  the  spies  of  the  emperors  Tiberms  and 
Nero  7  To  the  just  pravers  of  the  allies.  8.  Tlie  roots  and  ^-founda- 
tions of  ^«^truth  0.  The  opinions  of  the  leaders,  contrary  to  peace.  10. 
Bv  the  clear  {cleirm)  light  of  the  sun.  11.  By  a  rotation  {ordo)  of  the 
^'customary  field-fruits.  12.  To  Cornelia,  the  consort  ot  Cc^esar.  13.  fo 
Servius  Tullius  and  Tarquinius  Priscus,  kings  of  the  Romans  14.  iiie 
^^herdsnien  of  the  royal  tlocks.  15.  By  the  ^^answers  of  the  Roman 
Bootbsavers.  10.  The  high  arches  (obj.)  of  the  'H  ullian  jail.  1 . .  lo  a 
garden,*  full  of  beautiful  shrul)s  and  trees.  18.  Fair  conditions  of  a  fu- 
ture ])eace.  19.  The  breast  of  the  centurion,  full  ot  scars.  21).  The 
soldiers,  ignorant  of  the  plans  of  the  leaders.     21.  The  judges,  devoted 

to  the  -''will  of  the  dictator.  i     .•      o  r^     ^^» 

1  ^-^Crassis  tauri  cervicibus.  2.  Culices,  hominibus  molesti.  o.  (Treges 
exiniii,  ApoUini  sacri.  4.  Severis  Gelonis  legiims.  5.  Dario  Persarum 
re-i  G.  Splendida  siderum  luna^que  luce.  7.  Ca?saris  necem  populo 
Romano  ^  calamitosam.  8.  Lupa,  Romuli  et  Remi  nutrlce.  9  Inaudita 
ducum  temeritate  10.  Indices  mercedis  ac  pra^diB  cupidi.  11.  Ridicu- 
lis  haruspicum  erroribus. 

B.  Sentences. 
1  RomjB  incendium  Neroni  princiin  attribuitur.  2.  Samnites  milites 
Romanos  anna  abji.ere  jubent.  3.  Apollinis  sacerdotes  Cr.pso  ambigue 
resiKjndent.  4.  Uculi  animi  indices  esse  solent.  5.  Populus  Romanus 
Tarquinium  regeni  expellit.  0.  Antistites  novi  a  centumviris  creaiitur. 
7  ^larii  publici  custrules  a  principe  ^-'noniinantur.  8.  Fabricii  mores 
ac  ^h»rohitateni  sa-pe  adniTror.  9.  Philippus,  Macedonum  rex,  libertati 
Gnecie  peiiculosus  esse  videtur.  10.  Arbores  fruticesque  serere  semper 
cxpedit  11.  Seveia  pneceptorum  disciplina  juventuti  molesta  esse 
vidCtur  12  Homines  nefarios  aut  interficere  aut  expellere  civitatia 
Kduti  conducit.  13.  Ca;sar  interpretes  orationem  litteris  (p^/j^^r)  man- 
dare  iubet.  14.  Pyrrhus,  Kpiri  rex,  lapide  interficitur  lo.  bcipio 
Ju<-urtham,  Masinissse    Numidiaj  regis  nepotem,  populo  Romano  com- 


««  Voluptius  fd^oMure.  36  Pra^sentia,  pref>ence.  »«  Perditus,  ahandemed^^-'  Abrog.atm, 
ahoiilion  »^yidci,>,,  tl.e  t'od  ..f  fire  and  mechanic  art^  Vulcaiius  ''/^"^'  ,%"^ 
*o  Iff  raid  nrft-.-o     <^  I'rex^nt,  liodiermis.   •«■'(r'/atv-Z,  glarea.    oj/,,^^,.,^^.  niatena.    '^/'^a- 

f:^Lun,  Fla.ni..ius.  *^  FoundaHnn,  f..n.ia.ne,.tu.n.  "«  Ir^'::'''^'^-,,^,^:^';:^^^^ 
folitus  «• //^/(/^-rmf//,  pa^tor.  ••»  J^mc^r,  responsum.  ^'^  T ullian,  Tnm^nm.  *' >f4«: 
voluntas,  ^a  Cra.-^sus,  thick.  "  Calaiuitosus,  dUantrotiti.  **  JSominare,  to  ap/^otnt 
5»  ^lohildA,  probity. 


132 


THIRD   DECLENSION, — VOWEL-STEMS. 


mendat.  16.  (lermani  a  Cjrsare  (iailis  obsidos  restitiuMv  cou^uutur.  17. 
Oppidi  iniiri  ark-tihus  conciitiuntiir.  18.  A^'ricohe  sei;-t'tfs  ^McuK'tJ^re 
jam  incipiunt.  11>.  Tacviu  arinis  assequi  pncj>tat.  '20.  Veneris;  steila 
lucem  eximiam  -'"edere  incipit. 

1.  Virtue  ninnot  be  allured  l»y  pay.  2.  Perseus  directs  the  ambassa- 
dors to  -nempt  the  rulers  of  tlie  citii'S  of  Illyria  by  m;)uey  ami  the 
promises  of  royal  favor  {/(/cor).  3.  The  inhabitants  refuse  to  carry  lielp 
{ops)  to  the  sick  soldiers.  4.  Impious  men  seeni  now  to  be  the  leaders 
and  standard-hearers  of  inex])erieneed  youth.  5.  The  suldiers  of  Cesar 
cross  the  Hubico.  0.  We  remember  wl'll  the  crimes  {scela-s)  of  the  re- 
bellious leaders.  7.  The  horsemen  wish  to  attack  tht^  colunms  of  the 
enemies.  8.  The  ambassadors  forbid  the  king  to  cross  the  boundary. 
i).  The  crops  seem  to  be  devoured  by  mice.  10.  Vesuvius  begins  to 
throw  out  hot  ashes  and  stones.  11.  the  teachers  give  {tribncM  great 
praise  to  the  beginners.  12.  It  is  better  to  defend  the  safety  of  the 
state.  1-3.  It  is  ^•'uni)recedented  to  give  {dcferre)  to  a  Roman  knight  the 
honor  of  a  triumph'.  14.  The  Roman  people  declare  {imllcen)  war  to 
Perseus,  king  of  the  Macedonians.  15.  The  •'inhabitants  of  Larium 
are  not  willing  to  surremU'r  the  city  to  the  Roman  gfurral.  1<>.  The 
horsemen  of  the  Numidians  cannot'*" 'break  the  columns  of  the  Roman 
footsoldiers.  17.  Lawsuits  generally  are  unpleasant  for  both,  the 
«-complainant  and  the  defendant  {rms).  18.  The  senators  cease  to  be  the 
guardians  of  the  laws.  ID.  The  Pomptiniau  marshes  are  ])ernicious  to 
the  liealth  of  men.  20.  It  is  expedient  to  the  Patricians  to  repeal 
the  «^Ilortensian  law.  21.  It  is  preferable  to  become  a  chief-priest.  22. 
Conscience  seems  to  be  the  ** 'incorruptible  judge  of  men.  23.  We  wdl 
not  offer  {subjlcrre)  the  neck  to  the  '^vxecutioner.  24.  «^''Barren  fields  can- 
not produce  {iffcrre)  an  abundance  of  good  fruits. 


LESSON   XXVII. 

THIRD  DECLENSION.— VOWEL-STEMS  AND  IRllEO- 

ULAR  NOUNS. 

§  172.  1.  The  nouns  of  the  third  declension  with  vowel- 
stems  have  the  vowel  t  as  characteristic,  whicli  is  either  blended 
with  or  absorbed  by  the  case-terminations  §  14;).  The  case-ter* 
niinaiions  of  the  vowel-stems  present  the  following  scheme : 


•«Demetero,  to  harreHt.  "  Edere,  to  give  out.  "  To  tempt.  U'winra.  "  Unpr^es. 
denterl  inaudltus.  «« Larinus.  an  inhabitant  of  Larium.  ^^To  break,  perrninpere. 
•"i Complainant,  actor.  «'  Ilortemian,  Hortensius.  •♦  lucurruptus.  «•»  Cariiifex. 
••  A  rid  U.S. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. — VOTVEL-STEMS. 


133 


Singular. 
N.  is,  es,  s,  Neut.  e  or  — 
G.  is 
D.  i 

A.  em  {im),  Neut.  like  Nom. 
V.  like  Nom. 
A.  e  {I) 


Plural. 

N.  es,  Neut.  %a 
G.  lum 
D.  %bus 

A.  is  {es),  Neut.  la 
V.  like  Nom. 
A.  like  Dat. 


Rem.  1.  From  a  comparison  of  the  case-terminations  of  the  consonant- 
and  vowel-stems  we  easily  see,  in  which  cases  the  characteristic  i  of 
the  vowel-stems  is  ahsorbtd  by  the  endint^  proper,  and  in  which  case 
it  is  blended  with  it.  The  three  principal  cases,  in  whicli  the  charac- 
teristic /  always  ap])ears,  ar^:  1.  The  genitive  plural  {inm),2.  The 
accusative  })lural  of  all  genders  {Is  and  la),  3.  The  nominative  plu- 
ral of  the  neuters  Ciu).  The  termination  ini  in  the  accusative,  and 
i  in  the  ablative  singular  likewise  show  the  characteristic  i,  but 
these  terminations  occur  in  a  few  nouns  only  (§  179). 

Rem.  2.  The  termination  7^  in  the  accusative  plural  b(4ongs  to  the 
clameal  ])eriod  of  the  language.  Later  this  termination  became 
obsolete,  and  the  nouns  with  vowel-stems  assumed  the  same  termi- 
nation {es),  as  those  with  consonant-stems. 

§  17«t.  2.  A  given  noun  with  a  vowel-stem  is  declined  by 
attacliing  the  case-terminations  §  172  to  its  declension-stem.  The 
declensiun-stem  is  found  by  removing  the  termination  is  of  the 
genitive  singular. 

Rem.  3.  In  nouns  with  vowel-stems  we  must  distinguish  between  the 
declensiox-stem  of  the  noun  and  its  true  ste.v.  The  latter 
always  terminates  in  the  characteristic  /,  while  declexsion-stem  is 
the  true  stem  without  its  vowel-characteristic,  being  merely  as- 
sumed for  facilitating  the  inflection  of  a  noun,  which  is  easier  per- 
formed by  joining  the  vowel-characteristic  with  the  terminations 
proper.  Thus  the  true  stem  of  cicis  is  cid,  s  being  the  ending  of 
tlie  nominative.  But  the  declension-stem  of  cicifi  is  civ,  is  being 
the  CASE-TEUMrxATioN  of  the  nominative,  that  is  the  ending,  coni- 
hined  ttith  the  chdrarteristic. 

§  171.  3.  The  nouns  with  vowel-stems  are  divided  into  three 
classes:  1.  The  regular  vowel-stems.  2.  The  liquid-mute  stems. 
3.  The  irregular  vowel-stems. 


§ 


REGULAR  A^OWEL-STEMS. 

1 7«>.     Vocabulary. 

^des,  *is,  f.  a  temple  {in  the  plur.  a  \  aedllis,  is,  m.^7?  aedile,  chief  of  police 
house)  I         and  public  building 

•  H  as  termination  of  tlie  genitive,  the  mere  ca^e-tenniiiatioii  is  is  given  in  this  vocab- 
ulary, it  is  meant  that  these  letters  must  be  substituted  fur  the  nominative-toruiiDutiuiir 
i«,  en,  or  e. 


131 


THIKD    DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


aeqiialis,is,  in.  a  contenipordvy 

attiuis,  is,  c.  g.  a  rdnlice  htj  inavriafjc^ 
coiDiectioii 

Aljn'S,  1)1.  t.  (St.  Alpi),  f.  the  Alps 

alturia,  \A.  t.  (st.  altfiri),  n.  an  altar 

amnis,  is,  m.  a  st/rani 

aiuinal,  alis,  u.  a/c  aninial 

apis,  is,  t".  <i  b<i' 

Atht-niensis,  is,  in.  a/i  Athodaii 

aiiris,  is.  f.  the  car 

avis,  is,  1".  a  bird 

axis,  is,  111.  ai'ktree,  the  axis  of  t/te 
earth 

buris,  is,  f.  the  tail  of  a  plough 

fa3.1es,  is,  f.  murder,  slaughter 

calcar,  aris,  n.  a  spur 

Ciiiialis,  is,  111.  a  conduit-pipe,  canal 

can  is,  is,  c.  ji:.  a  dog 

Carthagiuieusis.is,  n\.a  CartJutginian 

civis,  is,  c.  g.  a  citizen 

clades,  is,  f.  a  defeat 

classis,  is,  f.  ajhet 

clavis,  is,  f.  a  k,<  y 

cochlear,  aris,  u.  a  spoou 

collis,  is.  111.  a  hill 

corl)is,  is,  t".  a  basket 

crinis,  is,  in.  a  hair 

ensis,  is,  m.  a  su:ord 

fames,  is,  f.  hunger 

faniiliaris,  is,  m.  a  friend 

fascis,  is,  m.  a  bundle  of  rods  (car- 
ried by  the  lictors) 

febris,  is,  i'.fecer 

feles,  is,  f.  a  cat 

tides,  is,  f.  (usually  in  tlie  plur.)  a 
string  (made  of  guts) 

finis,  is,  m.  end  (plur.  boundary) 

f unfile,  is,  n.  a  torch 

funis,  is,  m.  a  rope 

fustis,  is  m.  a  dick 
^hostis,  is,  c.  g.  an  enemy 

ignis,  is,  m.  Jire 

juvenis,  is,m-.  <f  young  man,  youth 

mar»',  is,  n.  tJiC  S(  a 

meiisis,  m.  a  month 

laquear  or  lacrmar,  aris,  n.  a  [tannel- 

ceiling 
messis,  is,  f.  a  hardest 


moMiia,  pi.  t.  (st.  mocni)  icalls  (of  a 

city) 
moiille,  is,  n.  '/  necklace 
nares,  pl.t.  (st.  naii),  f.  nodrils,7i08t 
natalis,  is,  m.  birthday  (in  the  plur 

parentage) 
navis,  is,  f.  a  ship 
nubes,  is,  f.  a  cloud 
or  bis,  is,  m.  a  circle  (orbis  terri 

rum,  the  world) 
ovlle,  is,  n.  a  shccp-stable 
ovis,  is,  f.  a  sheep 
paluuibis,  is,  c.  g.  a  wood-pigcon 
panis,  is,  m.  bread 
par,  paris.  n.  a  pair 
l)ellis,  is,  f.  a  skin 
pt'lvis,  is,  f.  a  baain 
piscis,  is,  m.  fish 
])<)stls,  is,  m.  a  post 
pulvinar,  ari.<,  n.  a  cushion 
pupi>is,  is,  f.  the  stern  tf  a  ship 
j)uti'al,  alis,  n.  an  inclosure 
roslis,  is,  f.  a  cord 
rete,  is,  n.  a  mt 
Tu\)cs,  f.  '/  rock 
securis,  is,  f.  an  axe 
gedes,  is,  f.  a  s<  at 
eentis,  pi.  t.  (st.  senti)  m.  thorni 
Bitis,  is,  1.  third 
sodfilis,  is,  m.  companion 
testis,  is,  c.  g.  iritncss. 
Tiberis,  is,  m.  th  Tiber 
tibiale,  is,  n.  a  legging 
tigris.  is,  c.  g.  a  tiger 
loniuisittmiues),  is.  m.  neck-cham 
tribunal,  alis.  u.  a  court,  tribunal 
turris,  is,  f.  a  totcer 
tussis,  is,  f.  congJi 
unguis,  is,  ni.  a  finger-nail 
valiis,  is,  f.  a  ralb y 
vates,  \»,  in.  a  seer,  poet 
vectlgal,  alis,  n.  a  toll,  tax 
vectis,  is,  m.  a  r(ril,  lecer 
vermis,  is,  m.  a  worm 
vestis,  is,  f.  a  garmmt 
vis  (vim  vi),  f.  fare,  power  (plur. 

vires,  drength) 
vulpes,  is,  f.  a  fox 


1  IIoHtiH  is  an  enemy,  with  whom  our  couti 
and  iidvei  NdfiitK  any  kind  of  it  nt'i^onht.     '* 
bs  a  it'Uiiniue,otfeiuald«>. 


try  is  at  war  ;  iitimhioi  is  h  printte  enemy 
JuvenU  homelimes,  bul  very  rarely,  w  U5«d 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— VOWEL-STEMS. 


135 


§   176. 

Paradigms. 

SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

N. 

Civis,  a  citizen 

N. 

cives,  citizens 

G. 

civis,  of  a  citizen 

G. 

civium,  of  citizens 

D. 

civi,  to  a  citizen 

D. 

civi  bus,  to  citizens 

A. 

civeiii,  a  citizen 

A. 

civis,  citizens 

V. 

civis,  0  citizen  I 

V. 

cives,  0 citizens! 

A. 

cive,  by  a  citizen 

A. 

civi  bus,  by  citizens 

N. 

Clades,  a  defeat 

N. 

clades,  defeats 

G. 

cladis,  efa  defeat 

G. 

cladium,  of  defeats 

D. 

cladi,  to  a  defeat 

D. 

cladibus,  to  defeats 

A. 

cladem,  a  defeat 

A. 

cladis,  defeats 

V. 

clades,  0  defeat ! 

V. 

clades,  0  defeats  ! 

A. 

clade,  by  a  defeat 

A. 

• 

cladibus,  by  defeats 

N. 

Ovlle,  a  shcfp-stable 

N. 

ovilia,  sheep-stables 

G. 

ovilis,  (fa  sheep-stable 

G. 

ov ilium,  of  -sheep-stables 

D. 

ovili,  to  a  sheep-dable 

D. 

ovilibus,  to  sheep-stables 

A. 

ovile,  a  shiep-dable 

A. 

ovilia,  sJieep-stables 

V. 

ovlle,  0  t(Ju<  p-dable  ! 

V. 

ovilia,  0  sheep-stables  ! 

A. 

ovili,  by  a  sheep-stable 

A. 

ovilibus,  by  sh^'^p-stables 

N. 

Animal,  an  aninud 

N. 

animalia,  animals 

G. 

animjilis,  of  an  aninial 

G. 

animalium,  of  animals 

D. 

animali,  to  an  animal 

D. 

animalibus,  to  animals 

A. 

animal,  (Ut  animal 

A. 

animalia,  animals 

V. 

animal,  0  animal  ! 

V. 

animalia,  0  animuls  ! 

A. 

animali,  by  an  animed 

A. 

animalibus,  by  animals 

§  177.  4.  The  regular  vowel-stems  of  the  masculiue  and 
feiiiiniiie  gender  have  the  case-termination  is  or  es  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular,  in  which  i  is  the  cliaracteristic,  and  s  the  ending. 
In  a  number  of  nouns  the  characteristic  i  in  the  nominative  is 
changed  into  e  {clades,  caedes,  f tones ^  ct'c.) 

The  NEUTERS  refuse  the  ending  .s,  and  either  change  the  charac- 
teristic i  into  6  {niare^  rete^  tlblcde^  c£'c.),  or  drop  it  altogether^ 
which  is  the  case  in  many  stems,  terminating  in  all  and  dri  [vecti- 
yal^  cochlear^  lacunar^  tJbc.)  Hence  the  iiual  letters  of  the  neuters 
with  vowel-stems  are  e,  at,  or  ar. 

Rem.  4.  All  nouns,  which  have  th(?  final  letters,  mentioned  above,  have 
voWEi.-STKMs,  unless  excepted  by  special  rules,  contained  in  the 
preceding  two  lessons,  which  we  brietly  review  here  : 
a.  Of  the  nouns  iu  is  two  belong  to  the  S-class  {cinis  and  pulois 


13G 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


§158),  four  to  the  T-cluss  {!is,  Sttmnis,  l<ii)is  and  cKspis,  %  1G7X 
and  two  to  the  N-clatJS  {/«Uitjid.s  and  [wlUs,  ^  181)). 

h.  Of  till'  nouns  in  t.s  onc.(tlio  i>r.  n.  C<7V,v,  j^  loS)  belongs  to  the 
t>-clus.s,  and  many  to  the  r  class  i^//^//(.v,  ^7'/<v,  /to.sih.s,  m<j(», 
parua,  olmx,  dir.,  ^  IGo).  Hut  the  rule  is,  that  nouns  in  lh  am 
declined  like  dadcH.  Thus  the  niale  propia-  names  in  «.<<,  aa 
Verves,  Xerxes,  Tkendntoclcs,  dr.,  must  be  declined  as  vowel- 
stems, 

e.  The  nouns  in  e,  except  those  taken  from  tlu;  Greek  (p.  !>*>.■),  7), 
ail  are  neuters  of  the  vowel-class,  while  of  those  in  <(l  antl  <ir 
a  few  belong  to  the  L-  antl  K-classes,      (§  147,  157.)     The 
vowel  a  in  these  latter  is  f<hort,  while  in  the  nouns  of  the 
vowel-class  it  is  lon(/  {IlduiiihCdifs,  Cat  saris ;  but  vcctigd'Us, 
calm  r is). 
Rem.  5.  The  mnius^j mm  is  nnd  rt(/t  is  are  declined  by  the  case-termina- 
tions of  the  CONSONANT-STEMS  {G.  pi.  juveninu,  cauiu/i;  Ace.  pi. 
juvenes,  canes). 

§  17S.  5.  The  GENITIVE  of  the  nmsculines  ami  ieininincs  in  U 
is  like  the  nominative.  The  nouns  in  es  and  the  neuters  in  e 
change  these  terminations  in  the  genitive  into  is,  as  clmles,  G, 
clad  Is ;  marc,  G.  rudrls.  The  neuters  in  al  and  «r  substitute 
alls  and  Hrls  for  tliese  final  letters  in  the  genitive,  as  trlbunal- 
tribiinalls.,  calcar-culcuris. 

§  170.  0.  The  following  nouns  in  is  take  the  termination  iwi, 
instead  oi  em  in  the  acclsative  singular  : 

1.  The  names  of  rivers  and  cities,  as  Tibtris,  ^  VisHrf/is^ 
*Araris,  '^Albis^  ^Jlispalis  / 

2.  The  feminine  nouns  vls^  slds^  tussis,  buris,  /tbris^  pelvis, 
pi/pjHs^  rest  is,  t  arris.,  secHris. 

Rem.  0.    Vis,  sitis,  tas.us  aud  bnris,  to  which  tli(;  unclassical  words  ravis 
and  amussi.s  may  be  added,  ahcays  take  the  termination  iin  in  the 
accusative  singular      The  other  six  nouns,  mentioned  above,  some 
times  are  found  with  the  regular  termination  em. 

Rem,  7,  Vif<  in  the  singular  occurs  in  nominative,  accusative  and  abla- 
tive only  {Hs,  rim,  ci).  The  plural  irregularly  forms  tires,  ciriuni, 
&c.,  and  is  complete. 

§  l^iO.  T.  Tlie  following  nouns  have  the  termination  i,  in- 
stead of  6%  in  the  ablative  singflar  : 

1.  The  neuters  in  e,  al  and  ar,  as  marl.,  tribtntiJili,  calcari. 


»  F/'-^wiz/x,  ft  rivor  ill  Germany,  the  modern  IV^ter.  ^  A r< iris  [more  commonW  A rur], 
«  river  ill  (iaiil,  tlie  nuulern  Saoiie.  ^  Albia,  the  river  /Slbc.  *  llispalis,  h  city  in  Spain, 
the  modern  UtoWa. 


THIRD   DECLENSION.— rLIQriD-MUTE   STEMS. 


137 


]5ut  the  names  of  cities  in  e  take  the  regular  termination  e,  as 
Caere.,  liti^ite.,  Abl.  Caere.,  Reate., 

2.  Tliose  nouns,  which  have  irn  in  the  accusative,  and  gener- 
ally navis  and  ignis.     But  rest  is  always  makes  reste. 

3.  Those  appellative  nouns  in  alls  and  dris.,  which  originally 
are  adjectives,  iis  familiar  is.,  soddlis,  aequdlis,  candlis. 

4.  The  names  of  months  in  iSj  as  ^Ajmlis,  ^Quintilis,  Sextllis. 

§  181.  8.  Gender. 

1.  Nouns  in  lis  and  nis  are  masculine,  except  imllis  SLudjyellis. 

2.  Axis,  ensis,  fascis,  fastis,  77ie?isis,  orbis,  ^92*5Cis,  postis, 
torquis,  an(juis,vectis,  vermis,  and  the  pi.  t.  sentes  are  masculine. 

3.  All  other  nouns  in  is  and  es,  denoting  things  or  beasts,  are 
feminine.  But  anguis,  canis,  palumbes  and  tigris  are  of  com- 
mon gender.     See  §  197. 

4.  The  nouns  in  e,  al  and  ar,  belonging  to  this  class,  are  neu- 
ter. 

LIQUID-MUTE  STEMS. 


§  183.  A' 

Adolescens,  lis,  m.  a  young  man,  a 
youth 

auimans,  tis.  m.  t  k  n.  a  creature 

ars,  tis,  f.  art 

arx,  cis,  f.  a  castle ,  fortress 

calx,  cis,  f.  lime,  the  goal  in,  a  race- 
course 

cliens,  tis,  c.  ^.  a  client 

cohors,  tis,  f.  a  cohort  (the  lOtli  part 
of  a  legion) 

dens,  tis,  m.  a  tooth 

falx,  cis,  f.  a  sickle 

fons,  tis,  m  a  spring,  fountain 

frons,  tis,  i.fortheml,  front 

frous  (fruns),  dis,  f.  foliage 

gens,  tis,  f.  a  tribe,  nation,  family 

glanfl,  dis,  f.  ((n  acorn,  a  bullet 

infans,  tis,  c.  g.  a  child  (less  than  7 
years) 

juglans,  dis,  f.  a  walnut 

lens,  tis,  f.  a  lentil 


ocabulary. 

Mars  (Mavors),  tis,  m.  the  god  of 

uar 
mens,  tis,  f.  mind 
merx,  cis,  f.  icare 
mons,  tis,  m.  mountain 
mors,  tis,  f.  death 
occidens,  tis,  m.  the  west 
oriens,  m.  the  east 
parens,  tis,  c.  g.  a  parent  (m.  in 

plural) 
pars,  tis,  f.  a  part 
pons,  tis,  m.  a  bridge 
puis,  tis,  f.  pottage 
rudens,  tis,  m.  a  rope 
serpens,  tis,  c.  g".  a  serpent 
sors,  tis,  f.  lot,  fate 
stirps,  pis,  f.  a  stem,  lineage 
torrens,  tis,  m.  a  torrent 
tridens,    tis.   m.   a   three-prong&d 

spear,  indent 
urbs,  bis,  f.  a  city 
Vejens,  tis,  m.  a  Vejcntian 


»  A  prills,  the  month  of  April. 
in  republican  Kuiue. 


Quiiitllis  and  Sextilis,  the  months  otJuly  and  Attgusi 


138        THIRD   DECLENSION.— LIQUID-MUTE   STEMS. 


Singular. 

H.  Urbs,  a  city 

G.  iirbis,  of  a  city 

1).  urbi.  to  a  city 

A.  urbein,  a  city 

V.  urbs.  0  city  ! 

A.  urbe,  ly  a  city 


§  IS3.  Paradigms. 

Pluiial. 
iV.  urbcs,  cities 
O.  urbium,  of  cities 
I),  urbibus,  to  cities 
A.  urbis,  cities 
V.  urbes,  0  cities ! 
A.  urbi\)us,  hy  cities 


N.  Parens,  a  parent 
G.  ]mTvnt\ii,  of  a  parent 
D.  parenti,  to  a  parent 
A.  ])iirentcm,  a  parent 
V.  parens,  O  parent  f 
A.  parenie,  hy  a  parent 


iV^.  parentes,  parents 
G.  parentium,  of  parents 
D.  Y>a.T* 'Titihiia,  to  parents 
A.  ivdn^nii»,  pare?it8 
V.  ])arentes,  O  parents  \ 
A.  \}\\.ViiXi\:\h\\^,hy  parents 


N.  Merx,  a  wife 
G.  mercis,  of  a  ware 
D.  merci,  to  a  ware 
A.  niercem,  a  icare 
V.  merx,  0  icare  ! 
A.  merce,  by  a  ware 


JV.  merces,  icarcs 
G.  iwi^xi^mm,  of  wares 
J),  niercibus,  to  wares 
A.  mercis,  wares 
V.  merces,  Orcares! 
A.  mercibus,  hy  wares 


§  181.  0.  It'  tlie  declensioii-stein  of  a  noun  terniinatos  in  two 
consonants,  the  former  of  wliicb  is  a  liquid,  and  tb(»  latter  a  mute, 
the  true  stem  always  is  a  vowel-stem.  Stems  of  this  kind  gener- 
ally drop  the  vowel-charaeteri«^tie  /  in  the  nominative  singHilar, 
and  are  then  called  lic|llid-lllllte  stems.  They  also  drop 
the  mutes  t  or  d,  preceduig  the  ending  6»  (§  IGG),  and  blend  the 
mute  c  with  this  ending  into  x. 


NOM.  SING. 

Urbs 

iufans 

cohors 

glans 

falx 

arx 


true  stem. 

urbi 

infanti 

cohorti 

glandi 

falci 

arci 


DECLENSION-STEM. 

urb 

infant 

cohort 

gland 

laic 

arc 


GEN.  SING. 

urbis 

infantis 

cohortis 

glandis 

falcis 

arcis 


Rem  8.  X.  7i  and  r  are  the  only  liquids,  that  may  precede  a  T- or  K- 
mute  in  vowel-stems.     The  only  liquid  nmte  siems  with   1  -mutes 

are  uvhs  and  xtirps.  .     .          -,..,,              ^  j 

Hence  nouns    ic/iose  nominative-termination  s  is  immediately  preceded 

hij  I,  11,  or  r,  oUcays  helonr/  to  the  liquid-mute  stems,  which  require  th4 
restoration  of  tlie  dropped  t-rmUe. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


139 


§  18»i,  10.  The  nouns,  belonging  to  this  class,  are  declined 
by  attiicliing  the  case-terminations  §  172  to  the  declension-stem. 
The  GENiTVE  is  formed  by  changing  the  termination  s  of  the  nom- 
inative, if  preceded  by  /,  n,  or  r,  into  tis  or  dis,  and  final  x  into 
els. 

Rem.  9.  The  genitive  in  dis  occurs  only  infrons  (foliage),  glans,juglanSf 
and  a  few  rarer  nouns.  The  K-mute  in  liquid-mute  stems  can  be  o 
only,  not  g. 

§  186.  11.  The  Ifeilder  of  the  liquid-mute  stems  is  the 
FEMININE.  But  mo9is^  2)ons^  f<^^^i  dens^  occidens^  orietis, 
rudenSj  torrens^  tridens  are  masculine,  and  anhnans  is  used  in 
all  three  genders. 

IRREGULAR   YOWEL-STEMS. 

§  187.  12.  Several  nouns  with  vowel-stems  assume  the 
regular  nominative  termination  of  one  of  the  consonant-classes, 
and  are  called  irregular  vowel-stems.     Tlicy  are  the  following: 

1.  With  terminations  of  tlie  R-class,  in  ber  and  ter : 
Insuber,  Ijris,  m.  an  Insubrian     uter,  tris,  m.  a  bag 

imber,  bris,  m.  a  shoicer  venter,  tris,  on.  the  stomacli^ 

linter,  tris,/.  a  boat  belly 

2.  With  the  nominative  of  the  N-class  :  c«ro,  carnis  (§  149); 

3.  With  nominatives  of  the  S-class  :  glis^  c/llris,  m.  a  dor- 
mouse ;  rnai<^  marls,  a  male  ; 

4.  With  nominatives  of  the  T-class  :  Zi.s,  Samnis.  the  civic 
nouns  in  as^  dtis^  as  Arpinas,  and  the  pi.  t.  Qulrltes,  opti- 
mdtes  and  'pendtes  (§  105)  ; 

5.  With  nominatives  of  the  K-class  :  fauces,  pl.t.  (st.  fauci) 
/.  throat,  defiles  ;  nox^  iioctls,  night  (g  165)  ;  nix,  9iivis,  f 
snow. 

All  these  nouns  are  declined  by  tlie  case-terminations  of  the 
vowel-stems  (G.  pi.  Imbrlnni,  llntruun,  carnium^  inarium^ 
nivium,  dx\;  Ace.  jjI.  inibrls,  llntrls,  cC'c.) 

Rem.  10.  The  neuters  joa  and  os,  ossis,  take  the  termination  iin7i  in  the 
g«'nitivo  plural,  but  form  the  other  cases  like  consonaut-stems  (NOM 
PLUR.  j'ira  and  ossa). 

Fraus  forms  the  gen.  pi.  fraudam  or  fraudium. 


140 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — IRREGULAR   STEMS. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


141 


HIKEGULAU  NOUNS  AVITII   CONSONANT-STEMS 

§  1^8.  13.  The  followinp;  nouns  have  irregular  cliar. 
sicteristicsi  (§  143,  Rem.  3): 

Sus,  suis,  c.  g.  (char,  k),  swine,  hog,  soic  (G.  pi.  sK/mi,  D.  pL 
,^f(hi(s  or  snibus)  ; 

grns,  gruis,  c.  g.  (char,  u),  a  crane  (G.  pi.  f/nmm)] 

l)os,  1)6 vis,  c.  g.  (char,  v),  (oi  ox,  a  steer,  a  coic,  (G.  pi.  bourn, 
D.  &  Abl.  1)1.  biibus  or  bobas) ; 

Jupl)itcr,  Jo  vis,  (char,  w),  Jupittr,  the  supreme  (jod. 

§  1  89.  14.  The  following  nouns  have  stems,  not  correspond- 
ing to  the  forms  of  their  nominatives  : 

Sanguis,  inis,  m.  Uood  cor,  cordis,  n.  heart  (§  1G5) 

pollis,  inis,  m.  pollen  lac,    laciis,    n.    milk  [without 

plural) 

seuex,  senis,  m.  an  old  ma7i     supellex,     G.     supcllectilis,    f. 

houseJiold-artides,  a  store 
{without  plural). 

Sanguis,  2^ollis  and  senex  have  stems,  belonging  to  the  N- 
class  ;  the  stems  of  cor  and  lac  belong  to  the  T-class,  and  the 
stem  of  supellex  to  the  L-class. 

All  these  nouns  are  declined  with  the  cast-terminations  of  coo- 
sonant-stems. 

§  190.  15.  TllfloC'1ilial>lC  nouns  are  those  whii^h  have 
the  same  form  ui  all  their  cases.  The  most  usual  of  them  are  : 
fas,  nefas,  name,  instar  and  pondo. 

Rem.  11.  ^"-"^  fvnd  nefas  {rifjht  and  yrro////)  aro  csptvially  used  as  pub- 
DICATIVE  nouns,  witli  impkksonal  subjects  {f(t«  (\st,\X,  is  hiwful; 
7iefas  est,  it  is  unlawful,  it  is  a  crime).  They  are  used  in  nom., 
ACC.  and  voc.  siXG.  only.  Mtrne  (morning),  which  occurs  in  the 
NOM.,  ACC.  and  abl.  sino.,  mostly  is  used  as  an  advkub  of  tinio 
{('((r/f/  in  the  mor/ti/if/).  InMav  (likenrys),  occurring  in  NOM.,  acc. 
and  Voc.  SING.,  generally  is  construed  with  an  attributive  genitive, 
and  answers  to  tlie  English  adjective  and  adverb  like  \montis  iui*t<ir, 
like  a  mountain).  Poiulo  (a  pound)  is  used  in  nom.,  acc.  and  ABI. 
of  both  numbers. 

EXERCISES. 

{^T  Write  the  following  paradigms:  Navis  longa  n  long  ship,  nub(^ 
atra  a  black  cloud,  raonlle  pulchrum  a  btautifnl  necklace,  vectigal  moles- 
tuni  a  burdensome  toll,  stirps  incognita  an  unknown  lineage,  ]X)n8  ligneus 


I 


a  wooden  bridge,  falx  ferrea  nn  iron  sickle,  linter  auirusta  a  narrow  boat, 
sanguis  vwheT  red  blood  (in  the  singular),  senex  moribundus  a  dying  old 
man. 

A.    ATTRIBUTIVE    PHRASES. 

Rkgo.ar  vowel-class.  1.  The  small  harvest  of  the  Athenians.  3. 
Tlie  sight  of  a  rare  bird.  8.  By  the  key  of  Theoddrus  of  'Samos.  4. 
The  louiT  ships  of  the  Carthaginians  {Gdrthaginbn>iix).  5.  To  the  small 
fliM't  of  the  enemies  {hosti.s).  0.  The  costly  garment  {obj.)  of  Xerxes.  7. 
Hv  a  black  sliet^.p.  8.  To  the  Carthai^inians,  the  perpetual  enemies  of. 
tlie  Romans.  9.  The  'solid  ^'rafts  of  the  K'lialcidians.  10.  The  ^remote 
boundaries  of  Germany.  .  11.  The  fertile  valh'ys  {ohj.)  of  the  Alps.  12. 
The  **i^rass-bearin^  hills  of  Bneotia.  13.  Worms,  injurious  to  plants. 
14.  Bv  the  "iron  lever  of  the  mechanic.  15.  Multitudes  of  small  fishes. 
10.  By  the  perpetual  fire  of  the  ^Vestals.  17.  By  a  high  tower  of  the 
enemies.  18.  The  llypanis  (^>?>j.),  a  broad  river  of  Sarmatia.  19.  By  the 
»flaix-ship  of  the  Macedonians.  20.  The  unpleasant  thirst  (ohj.)  of  the 
soldiers.  21.  By  the  great  force  of  the  winds.  22.  By  the  extraordinary 
'^'acuteness  of  i 'hunting-dogs.  23.  The  crimes  (scrlus)  of  imi^ious  young 
men.  24.  Tlie  danijeroiis  fever  (ohj.)  of  the  pr;rtor.  25.  The  sight  of 
the  wond<^rful  stren<>:th  of  Nero  of  '-Antium.  2G.  By  the  great  hunger 
of  the  Athenians.  27.  To  the  » incorruptible  '^integrity  of  Aristides.  28. 
The  '-^heavv  tax<'S  of  the  citizens.  29.  The  secret  '-^rooms  of  the  ^'con- 
spirators.  *30.  The  ancient  seats  {ohj.)  of  the  Saxons.  31.  By  the  is.Egean 
sea,  full  of  renowni'd  Islands.  32.  By  Ca^re,  an  old  and  renowned  town 
of  Etruria.  33.  Of  the  hmg  walls  [mtenia)  of  the  Athenians.  34.  A 
'^marble  temple  (ohj. — aed<.<i)'of  .Tuno.  35.  The  /golden  house  {obj. — aedea] 
of  Nero.     3<).  By  the  month  of  ■-"•March,  the  beginning  of  spring. 

1.  Varronem'et  Scjrvolam,  Ciceronis  a-(iualis.  2.  Aniene,  exiguo  Latii 
amne.  3.  Ajuum  Atticarum  melle.  4.  Acutis  -'talpe  auribus.  5. 
F<rdam  Julii  Ca^saris  c;edein.  0.  Immensnp  Persilrum  classis  excidium. 
V.  '■^-'Crinium  humanorum  ])ulchritudine.  8.  Ciceronis  familiarium  epis- 
lolfp.  9.  Incerto  vita'  Inun'ana?  fine.  10.  IIunnd)alem  atque  Antiochum, 
assiduos  nominis  Romani  hostls.  11.  Splendida  Cleopatne  regin?e  navi. 
12,  Variis  mensium  Gr;ecorum  nominibus.  13.  Roma,  orbis  terrarum 
domina.  14.  Subitfi  nubium  -•'collectione.  15.  Navis  puppim, -^guber- 
natoris  sedcm.  10.  Aur(M)S  principum  torquls.  17.  Turrim  ligneani, 
oppuli  UKPuibus  perniciosam.  18.  Immodica  Sicili.e  provinciae  vecti- 
galia.  19.  Subita  virium  valetudinisque  -^  defectione.  20.  Invicta 
juvenum  Romanorum  virtute. 

LiQUiD-MiTK  STE.MS.  1.  The  Commerce  of  His])alis.  a  prosperous  city 
of  Spain.  2.  The  long  stems  {obj.)  of  pine-trei'S.  3.  By  the  divine 
lineage  of  Achilles.  4. 'To  the  pernicious  defeat  of  the  Vejentians.  5. 
Bv  the  errors  of  the  hunum  mind  {mens).     0.  By  the  happy  lot  of  the 


»  Belonging  to  Samns,  Samins.  a  Solid,  solidiis.  3  jiafl,  ratis.  ♦  Chalcidian,  ^}^^]^\' 
>nsis  » /iVmrti*»,  reinolus.  ^  Gra.<iK-hfarin(j,\\eTh\U'r.  i  Iron.  O'fj.  f^-TTi'ns.  ^A  Vestal, 
■fHtal  virgin,  [.riestess  of  Ve:*t;i.  Vestaiis.  »  F'og-xliip,  navis  praetoria  '"  AcnUnfHX, 
iQnien.  '1  Ifinitiiig,  venaticus.  »"  Antium  forms  the  civic  noun  AntmH  ^^  Incor- 
tptihle.  incorruptus.     »■» /«^.-(/rjVv.  inteiriitas.    ^^  Ueary,  molestus.    i« /?oo»J,  conclave. 


den 

v> 

nijtt.      . ,  „      . 

1"  ro?/«y///7//o/-.  coniurutiis.  »»  ^.V^*///,  .Kira-us.  H'  MarnionMi.-.  i<'  M<tr<'Ji.  Martins. 
«»  Tr  pa,  (t  mole.  ^^  The  word  criiiis  in  the  sijiiruhtr  «leiiotes  a  singlk  hair,  and  the 
Kiifrlisli  sincular  hair,  if  it  means  a  coli.egtion  of  hnirs.  always  must  be  translated  by  th« 
I'LCRAi.  of  crinis.  ^3  Collectio,  a  gatherinu.  ^*  Giibernator,  a  htlmstnan.  ^5  Defectio. 
a  fiiilivg. 


142 


THIRD   DECLENSIO:^. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


younfi:  men  {fKloJearen.i).  7.  Tho  nature  of  the  hot  sprinsfs  of  ('ani])ania 
8.  Bv  the  dark  foliairc  of  the  trees.  0.  To  tlie  hiirh  forelicad  of  (N'sar 
10.  Aeonis  {<>hj.),  tlie  food  of  animals.  11.  The  volleys  of  the  -''Pyrencar 
mountains.  \'l.  The  eompletc  teeth  {'>bj.)  of  children  {infoiifa)  l:}.  By 
Till'  sudden  death  (//^>/^v)  of  tlu^  ])ar('nty.  14.  The '-"handles  of -"curved 
sickles.     15.  To  a  neii::hl)orin«(  fortress  of  the  enemies. 

2.  Adolescentium  proborum  lal>ores.  2.  Artium  mao:istri  (master) 
-Miplomate.  3.  Mutua  olientium  "'im^ronoruinqne  olHcia.  4  Sevrnnr^ 
Socratis  fronti.  5.  Martem,  Homuli  Hemuiue  i>atrem.  ({.  Mentis 
ei^^reffi.-e  testimonia.  7.  Olymj)um  et  Ossam,  altos  Thessali.e  montls.  S. 
lirnominiosJi  Neronis  principis  morte.  {).  Exin^Uii?  civium  Romanorum 
parti.  10.  Exitioso  SiTj)entium  viro.  11.  ^'Urbem  Hoinani,  «"tenmm 
mairnitudinis  humfinre  inoiuimt'ntum. 

Ihkhcu'i.au  nol'Ns.  Vowhl-  .\nd  toNsoNANT  sti:ms.  1.  The  frt'cjuent 
showers  (o6/.)  of  •'-mountainous  countries.  2.  •'•'Milan,  the  ••^capital  of  the 
Insuhrians.  3.  The  new  boats  (f/6y.)  of -'^fishermen.  4.  <  J reat  •'Swarms 
of  dormice.  T).  The  «j^reat  exi>enses  of  lawsuits.  (5.  By  the  -''defec- 
tion  of  the  '•'^inhabitants  of  Fiden;e.  7.  The  books  of  the  .\ttic  ni*j;^ht8. 
8.  The  fre;iuent  snows  {<ff>J.)  of  the  A1[)S.  0.  To  a  lar<i^e  drove  {f/r<.v)  of 
swine.  10.  Swine,  •^^hateful  to  Venus.  11.  The  high  (y/^r////^//,v)  price  of 
^"Melian  cranes.  12.  To  Juno,  Jupiter's  consort.  13.  By  Jujnter,  the 
father  of  irod  and  men.  14.  White  steers  (bt)f<)  sacre(l  to  Apol'o  and 
Ju[)iter.  l").  The  ^'powerful  necks  of  the  oxen.  1(1.  I>y  a  white  cow 
{bos,  see  §  197)  of  extraordinary  ^-beauty.  17.  'I'o  an  ■''abundant  store  <.f 
words.  18.  By  the  cold  blood  of  fishes.  10.  By  the  authority  of  "^^capri- 
cious  old  men. 

B.      SENTENCES. 

1.  Subita  nuhium  collectio  imbrls  ac  tempestates  "''^portendit.  2.  "'•'Va- 
tium  Etruscorum  ^"aui^uria  celebrantur.  3.  ^"^Lauri  '''folia  tussim  leniunt 
{to  relieve).  4.  Chelia  Tiberim  -"'tranare  audet.  .">.  iiomanorum  dux 
Nea|K)lim,  '''Chalcidensium  coloniam,  occupare  statuit.  0.  Xerxes  Athenas 
^■^ferro  et  igni  vastat.  7.  Manilii.  airricole  iiomani,  ovilia  celebrantur. 
8.  Equos  caicaribus  ^■Voncitan  solemus.  0.  Mel  apium  labore  eilicilur. 
10.  Suum  carnem  edere  Judeis  nefas  videtur.  U.  Poi)ulus  Komfinus 
urbcm  Romam  CajntoliunKjue,  deorum  sedem.  relinquere  non  vult.  12. 
Siculi  airros  bubus  arare  solent.  13.  C'ohortium  Homanarum  milites 
hostium  '^telis  aut  vulnerantur  aut  interficiuntur.  14.  Populus  Romanus 
mentis  externas  bell  is  injustis  vexiire  non  vult.  15.  A  civibus  diliiy:!  laus 
ma^na  est.  10.  Agricola^  Italici  segetes  lalcil)us  demetere  solent.  17. 
Et  infantes  et  senes  febri  ^-'corripiuntur.     18.  Spartani  arcem  Thebanam 

>«  Purenenn,  Pyien»ii9.  '^  jjnnflU.  ca|>nlu9.  '^  Canted,  onrvii».  "  Diploma,  a  ffiplo- 
♦»ta.  =**>  Patrr)nus,  a  jxit/on.  3i  The  i)hraj*»i  "<;<7y  of  Rome"'  is  traiis!alf«l  l.y  urhn  Iio>n(i, 
or  urbs  Rom'iim,  not  by  Roma  urhn.  32  3f<>u7if<iitiniiM.  saltiiosim.  33  )/i/(i,i.  Medli»- 
Iftniun.  34  Capital,  caput  35  J>'i.sk,=rman,  \>\sciiUtr.  36  Snarm,  {•xfmifn.  3^  D.-fi»'  tio. 
'<'  FidcnM.  5''  Ilatffnl,  invlsiis.  ♦"  Melian,  Melicns.  *>  Pinrcrfnl,  rohii'^tiis.  <2  li'dut;/ 
pnlchritiido.  *'  Ahuii'lant,  co|>io-*n».  **  Capricionx.  moro-iis.  *'•>  I'ortciul.-n».  in  for ^. 
OiHlfi.  *«  Our  prainiiiars  state,  that  f;f/f/'J»  and  sotne  other  nouns,  besides  tlios,>  intntioned 
Rem.  5,  take  nm,  not  »«m,  in  the  «km.  plur.  Hut  a  refeiit.  more  ac<'iir,ite  f.vaminatioti  of 
the  best  rnaiiuscripts  shows,  that  vati^H  is  no  r.\ceplioii  in  tlie  formiition  <»f  tlic  okn.  PLni. 
^'Aiisntium,  «ri  anrtury.  **  Laiirns,  rr  laurel-tree.  <*  Folium,  a  leaf  ^o  Tranan-,  to  croHA 
hy  xioimrnhig.  *'  Chalcidensis.  a  Chalcklian,  an  inhaldtant  of  Chilois  *2  J<\rrum  in 
coordination  with  igiiin  always  is  used  instead  of  gladium.  *3  Concitare,  to  urge.  **  To* 
lura,  dart.     **  Corripere,  to  seize. 


THIRD   DECLENSION. — VOWEL-STEMS. 


143 


fraude  occupant.     19.  Morbi  sangumem    vnrisque   consumereMd«itur. 
20.  Aquam  co(iuere  nive^iue  ■^■«refrigerare  ^eroms  principis     mventum 
est      21    Fulvia.^'lnfortunata  Antonii  uxor,  ab  Attico,  Ciceronis  lamili 
iiri"  adjuvatur.     22.  Milites  fame  ac  siti  hostls  aggredi  coguntur.     16. 
Le«'nones  Komanae  montium  fauces  intrare  mcipmnt. 

1    The  s^pleasures  of  the  ears  and  eyes  cannot  be  compared   to  the 
weniovments  of  the  mind  (wex^).     2  We  prefer  '^'coarse  bread  to  Melian 
cranes  ^Thasian  nuts  and  «Iberian  «\-hestnuts.     3.  The  citizens  design 
to  surrender  the  fortress  to  the  leader  of  the  enemies.     4.  Bad  wares 
seldom  find  a  buver.     5.  The  mind  seems  to  be  a  ^^enant  of  the  body 
6    The  enemies  are  prevented  by  Fabius' legi.m  from  passing  the -toot 
of  the  mountains.     7.  Theinist<x:les  puts  to  flight  and  '■^ontsthenn^ 
men^e  fleet  of  X'^rxes.     8.  The  outer  walls  of  the  city  are  defended  bs  a 
high  tower.     9.  The  soldiers  are  afraid  of  crossing  the  river  ^  i^urgis^ 
10    The  general  p(^rmits  the  citizens  to  «'^repel  force  by   orce      11.   ihe 
Consul  emleavors  to  divide  the  strength  of  the  enemies.    ^^- The  t,eachc>r 
knows  h.)w  to  «^'^inspire  the  minds  ot   the   young  men.     13.     lo  la^y 
voutlis  we  must  ^"apply  the  spurs.     14.  The  horsemen  are  compelled  by 
showers  of  bullets  to' ^>find  safety  by  flight.     15.  The  loot-soldiers  are 
able  to  cross  the  Tiber  by  boats.     IG.  The  soldiers  cross  a  aeepstreain 
bv  b^  --inflaTed  bv  air'    17.  ^  Carrots  relieve  cough   and  cure  '^gripee 
and  -!ickness  of  the  liver.      18.  Pyrrhus  dtdivers   the    -guard  ot  the 
?^Tarentian  castle  to  Milo.    19.  The  Roman  leg  ons  '^invade  the  frontiers 
(  ms)  of  the  Macedonians.     20.  Bees  feed  the  chdd   Hiero  with    ?.y) 
honey       21.  Demetrius  dares  to  excuse  the  impi<ms  murder  ^*  Ale^. 
ander     22.  Old  men  cannot  have  the  strength  ot  young  men.     .3.    1  tie 
Tnales  of  -fish  excel  the  mah^s.in  (/,/)  weight.     24    A\  e  will  not  pre  er 
the  orivate  rin-hts  of  the  citizens  to  the  public  welfare.     2o.   \\  e  prettr 
to  t    low   ti:?  authority  of  the  Athenians.     26.  T}.eUe.a.  f  the  co^^ 
fii)irators  pre  cut  otl^  by  tlie  axe  of  the  lictor.     2..  The  leaders  o    tlie 
SMarUin  Miction  Uh  to'  enter  the  city  of  Home  by  the  -Sublician  bridge. 
9ft    Pontius  Telesinus  the  renowned  leader  ot  the  Samnitians.  is  an  in- 
vLrate  enemy  o   the  ^  name.    29.  The  ^ -'cold  of  the  nights  begins 

to  irunpleasiuit  to  tlie  soldiers.  30.  The  -day-lightnings  are  ascribed 
to  Jupiuir  and  the  ^■'night-lightnings  to  Sumanus.  31.  The  companions 
of  Ulysses  devour  the  Sxen  Si  Apollo.  32.  Immense  flocks  of  sheep  and 
oxen  are  «^raised  by  the  inhabitants  of  Arpinum. 


irtA''b;u:,\dP.e  if^nr-  «  b;  Ibi;  Wolve  «..ctum,,,.    .»  to  r.i.e,  alere. 


14^1: 


SYXOPSIB   OF    THE   GEXDKR-RULES. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

SYXOrSIS  OF  THE  GENDER-RULES. 

§  J  91  .  1.  The  GENDER  of  noniis,  is  dotcniiined  diflerently,  ac 
cordiii<2:  as  they  denote  1.  persons,  or  2.  beasts,  or  3.  things  with- 
out LIFE. 

The  gender  of  persons  and  beasts  is  either  masculine,  feminine 
or  common,  that  of  things  either  masculine,  feminine  or  neuter. 

GEXDER  OF  PERSONAL  NOUNS. 

» 

§  19!i^.  2.  Nouns  denoting  persons  are  either  lliovalllc 
or  not.  Movable  nouns  (§4,  c.  §41)  are  those,  which  indicate 
the  male  and  female  sexes  by  different  terminations  of  the  same 
stem.     Movable  are  : 

1.  Most  of  the  nomis  of  the  second  declension  in  us  and  er  (see 

§41); 

2.  Personal  nouns  of  the  third  declension- in  en  (§  153),  which 
form  their  feminines  in  via,  as  : 

Flamen — flamina  (fJie  wife  of  a  fldmen)-^ 
tibicen — tibicina    (a  female  fiutr-player)  ;    fidicen — fidi- 
cina,  &c. 

3.  Most  personal  nouns  of  the  third  declension  in  tor,  which 
form  their  feminines  in  trix,  as  : 

Victor — victrix  ulti»r — ultrix  {a  female aveuger) 

praeceptor — pra3ceptrix      adjutor — adjulrix  (a  female  an- 

sintaut). 

4.  Some  single  nouns  of  tlic  tliinl  decictision,  as  :  rex — rey'uia ^ 
nepos — neptls  (a  grand-daughter)  ;  /wspes — hosjuta. 

§  19«l.  3.  Personal  nouns,  not  moval)]c,  either  denote  a  single 
SEX,  or  are  of  eoiiiiiioii  ;;eiiclei*   (§142). 

1.  Tliose  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  denote  single 
SEXES  (§  142). 

2.  Those  of  the  third  declension  with  liquid  stems  in  /,  o,  er, 
or,  in\  generally  denote  single  sexes  (masculines  :  eonsul^  priedo, 
hidrio,  caupo,  pater,  f rater,  augur  ;  feminines  :  mater,  mulier, 
uxor,  soror  ;  but  exsul  and  fur  c.  g.)  ; 


SYNOPSIS   OF  THE   GENDER-EULES. 


145 


3.  Those  with  mute  and  vowel  stems  generally  are  of  common 
gender  {civis,  infans^  ;x/r6?z5,  comes,  /teres,  prceses,  sacerdos, 
du.r,  d'c.),  except  thof^e,  denoting  occupations,  belonging  to  males, 
as  miles,  eques,  judex,  etc.,  and  those  mentioned  §  192,  4. 

GENDER  OF  NOUNS,  DENOTING  BEASTS. 

§  194.  4.  Names  of  beasts  -(including  bu'ds,  reptiles,  &c.), 
are  either  epicene,  or  movable,  or  of  common  gender.  '^ 

§  195.  o.  KpicoilC  are  those  names  of  beasts,  which  for 
BOTH  SEXES  liavc  tlic  samc  gender.  These  are  treated,  as  if  they 
were  things  without  life,  their  gender,  without  any  distinction  of 
tlieir  SEX,  being  solely  determined  by  the  termination  of  the 
WORD.  Thus  accipiter,  draco,  lepu.%  passer,  jnscls,  vermis,  md- 
iiir,  are  masculine,  and  ans,feles,  Umax,  ovis,  vulpes,  feminine. 
Names  of  beasts  generalh/  are  epicene. 

§  190.  6.  liovable  are  for  the  most  part  the  names  of 
beasts  of  the  second  declension,  as  : 
Asinus— asina,  /w-  and  she-ass 


cervus — cerva,  stag  and  hind 


mulus — mula,  he-  and  she- 
mule. 
gallus— gallina,  cock  and 
hpn,  &c. 

Movable  names  of  beasts  generally  are  masculine,  if  their  sex 
is  not  distinguished.     Else  they  assume  the  gender  according  to 

their  sex. 

Rt^-m  1  This  rule  is  not  alwavs  observed,  as  in  columhvs — columha  (he- 
and  she-dove>  where  the  feiiiinim'  eolnmhi  is  used  for  doves  without 
distinction  of  sex.  Thus  the  two  forms  siimm—simln  (ai)e),  lacertus 
—larertn  (lizard)  are  promisruofhsh/  used,  in  order  to  designate  apes 
and  lizards  witliout  distinction  of  sex.  although  in  both  instances 
the  use  of  the  fomininr  forms  is  prevailing. 

i^  197.  7.  Of  COIIIIBIOII   gender  are  the  following  names 
of  beasts  :    . 


anguis,  a  snnke 

anset.  a  goose  or  gander 

l-os,  an  or,  steer  or  cow 

canis,  a  dog 

^ama,  (1st  decl.),  a  fallow-deer 

grus,  a  crane 


palumbes,  a  wild  pigeon 


} 


a  snake 


seps 

serpens    ^ 

sus,  a  hog,  a  sow     ^ 

talpa  (1st  decl.),  a  mots 

tigris,  a  tiger 


UQ 


SYNOPSIS   OF   THE   GENDER-RULES. 


They  are  thus  treated  : 

1.  If  their  sex  is  7iot  distinguished,  a?iser  and  bos  are  mascu- 
line, ms  and  (/rits  feminine,  and  tlie  others  are  used  promiscu- 
ously in  either  gender. 

2.  If  their  sex  is  distinguished,  tliey  all  assume  the  gender, 
corresponding  to  their  sexes. 

GENDER   OF   X0UX9,    DENOTING   THINGS. 

§  198.  Rule  I.  Nouns,  denoting  rivers  of  the  third  declension, 

are  masculine. 

Ilein.  2.  The  general  rules  which  our  c^rammars  contain  about  the  gen- 
der of  cities»,  countries,  winds,  geuis,  mountains,  &c.,  have  no  foun- 
dation in  truth. 

§  199.  Rule  II.    Indeclinable  nouns  are  neuter. 

§  ?200.  Rule  III.    Nouns  of  the  1st  and  5th  (see  L.  XXXI.) 
declensions  are  feminine,  except  the  Gallic  rivers  in  a  of  the  1st, 
and  the  nouns  dies  and  meridies  of  the  5th  declension,  which  are 
masculine. 
Rem.  3.  Dies  in  the  singular  sometimes  is  feminine. 

§  5501.  Rule  IV.  Nouns  of  the  2d  and  4th  (L.  XXX.)  de- 
clensions in  us  are  masculine,  and  those  of  the  2d  in  urn,  and  of 
the  4th  in  u  are  neuter,  except  the  names  of  cities,  trees  and 
4  countries  in  tm,  and  the  nouns  rdvKS,  ro//^s^  hfnnus,  rannus, 
domiis  ; — aeus,  manus,  portfcHs,  tribus,  Idds,  which  are  fem- 
inine.     Vidgus^  virus  and  pelagus  are  neuter. 

§  ^O'i.  Rule  V.  Nouns  of  the  3d  declension  in  es  with  gen- 
itives in  tls  and  dls,  and  those  in  o,  oi\  and  os,  are  masculine. 

EXCEPTIONS. 
1.  In  es  (GEN.  ^/s  or  ff i«) :  Seges,  teges,  quus,  mcrces,  and  compes  are 

feminine.  .  u   4.        I 

2    In  o  :  Caro  and  nouns  in  do.  qo  and  lo  are  feminine.     lUit  ordo 

car'do,  nun-go,  lign,  p>f,!/io,  'septtutrio,  •'papUio,  '^cipi»,    ce.y>ertuio,  uud 

harnoQo,  are  masculine. 

3:  In  or:    Arbor  is  feminine,  and  ador,  aequor,  marmor,  cor  are 

4.  In  os:    Cos  and  dos  are  feminine;  o!^,  oris,  and  os,  ossis,  are 
weuter. 


»  The  north.    'A  butterfly.     »A  staff.     «A  bat 


ADJECTIVES   OF    COMXON   GENDER. 


147 


§  S03.  Rule  YI.  Nouns,  terminating^  in  as,  aiis,  x,  es  with  the 
genitive  is,  and  6-,  preceded  by  a  consonant,  are  feminine. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  In  as:  As,  assis.  is  masculine,  and  ms,  vasis,  neuter. 

2.  In  x:  FornLv,  ^caH.r  and  those  in  fx  are  masculine,  except  the 
feminines  lex,  n^.r,  sitpdlcv,  \f(iex  and  tht;  pi.  t.  preces. 

3.  Ill  s,  preceded  by  a  coiisonant :  Ad"ps,  foiis,  mans,  pons,  dens, 
oriens,  occidens,  tridens  and  torrens  are  masculine. 

§  •-J04.  Rule  VII.  Nr>uns  in  is  are  partly  (about  half)  mascu- 
line, partly  feminine.  The  masculines  are  sanffuls,  clnis,  poll  is, 
pulcis,  lapis,  and  those,  enumerated  §  181.  The  rest  are  femi- 
nine. 

§  S05.  Rule  YIII.  Nouns  of  the  3d  declension  in  e,  /,  n,  ar,er, 
ur,  us,  the  sin^i^le  nouns  aes,  caput,  lac,  and  the  nouns,  taken 
from  the  Greek,  in  ma  are  neuter. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1.  In  1 :  Sol,  and  the  plural  of  sal  are  masculine. 

2.  In  II :  Pecten,  lien  (milt)  and  the  pi.  t.  renes  are  masculine.  ^ 

3.  In  <»r:  A'n\  agger,  asser,  career, gibber,  later,  vesper,  vomer,  iinber, 
uter,  renter  are  masculine.     Linter  is  feminine. 

4.  In  IIS  :  Tr/h(s,  (J.  telluris  (oarth),  and  all  those,  having  genitives  in 
fin  and  (lis  (^  107),  are  feminine. 

Rem.  4.  Ei)irene  names  of  beasts,  which  according  to  their  termina- 
tions would  be  neuter,  as  vultiir,  turtur,  &c.,  always  are  of  mas- 
culine gender. 


LESSON    XXIX. 

ADJECTIVES   OF   COMMON    GENDER. 

t^  See  IX.  of  the  Vocabularies. 

?  206.  1.  The  adjectives  of  common  gender  attach  the  case- 
terminations  of  the  THIRD  DECLENSION  to  tlicir  stcms.  They  are 
(»f  ''common  r/ender,^^  because  they  are  not  movable,  assuming 
the  same  terminations  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  genders  in 
their  inflection. 


•A  cap.     •Sediment,  dreffs. 


148 


ADJECTIVES   OF   COMMON   GENDER. 


ADJECTIVES   WITH   VOWEL-STEMS. 

§  207.  2.  Tlieso  adjectives  attach  the  following  case-termina* 
tions  to  their  stems  : 

Singular.  Plukai.. 

N".    is,  s,  Neut.  €,  or  like  Mascu-'    JV.     cs,  Neut.  ta 


line 
G.    is 
D.    i 

A.    em,  Neut.  like  Noiii. 
V.    like  Nom. 
A.    i 


G.  hnn 

JD.  ^tbus 

A.  2s,  Neut.  7/t 

V.  like  Nora. 

A.  like  Diit. 


Hera.  1.  Comparinf^  these  case-torminations  with  tliose  of  nouns  with 
vowel-stems,  the  principal  ditfenMU't's  appear  to  be  1.  that  the  ACC. 
SINC.  of  the  ADJECTIVKS  never  has  the  tenuiaution  /;//.,  and  2.  that 
their  abl.  sing,  alicays  has  the  termination  t. 

§  208.  3.  We  distiiisjcuish  four  classes  of  adjectives  with  vowel' 
stems,  which  are  represented  by  the  following  paradigms*  : 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Ma-'-c.  <f'  Fe/n. 

Xt  uter. 

Ma.^>\  d'  J' tin. 

X-^ottf. 

N. 

Dulcis 

dulce 

N. 

Didccs 

dulcia 

G. 

dulcis 

dulcis 

G. 

duh'ium 

dulci  um 

1). 

dulci 

dulci 

J). 

dulcihus 

dulcihus 

A. 

dulcem 

dulce 

A. 

dulcis 

dulcia 

A. 

dulci 

dulci 

A. 

dulcihus 

dulcihus 

Jf<i.9c.  it  Fern. 

Nenifir. 

Miific.  tfe  Ffm, 

N^utfr. 

N. 

Acer  m.  acris/. 

acre 

N. 

Acri'S 

acria 

G. 

acris 

acris 

G. 

acrium 

acrium 

D. 

acri 

acri 

D. 

acri  bus 

acribus 

A. 

acrem 

acre 

A. 

acrTs 

acria 

A. 

acri 

acri 

A. 

acribus 

acribus 

Ma  lie.  d:  Fern. 

Nfiiiifr. 

J/dsc.  if-  Frtn. 

Ki'ulfr. 

N. 

Sapiens 

sapiens 

N. 

Sapientcs 

sapientia 

G. 

sapicntis 

sainentis 

G. 

sapient  ium 

8a])i('ntium 

D. 

sapienti    ' 

sapienti 

I). 

sapientibus 

sa}>ientibu8 

A. 

sapientem 

sapiens 

A. 

sai)ientls 

sapientia 

A. 

sapienti 

sapienti 

A. 

sapientibus 

sapientibuR 

*  In    this  and  all  tlie  following   paradigms    the    Vocative,  being  like  the  Noininatlv«, 
will  be  u?iiilte(i. 


ADJECTIVES   OF   COMMON    GENDER. 


149 


singular. 

Mane.  &  F^m.  Neuter. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
A. 


Audax 

audacis 

audiici 

audficem 

audaci 


audax 

audacis 

audiici 

audax 

audaci 


PLURAL. 
Masc.  dc  Fern. 
N.      Audiices 
G.      audacium 
D.      audacibus 
A.      audacis 
A.      audacibus 


Neuter. 

audacia 

adacium 

audacibus 

audacia 

audacibus 


8  209.  I  CLASS  :  Adjectives  in  i^,  all  of  which  have 
vowel-stems.  They  have  a  sei>arate  form  for  the  neuter  gender 
in  e  which  letter  is  substituted  for  the  masculine  tei-mination  is. 
For  havino-  a  different  nominative  of  the  neuter  they  generally  are 
called  adjc dives  of  two  tt  liiiiiuitioiis.  They  are 
inllected  after  the  paradigm  dulcis.  ^  ,    ,       . 

S  •JIO.  II  CLASS  K-stemt^of  «H  addecBen- 
sion,  consisting  of  the  adjective  j^^c//'  and  the  foUowmg  m  er  : 


acer 
alacer 


campester 
celeber 


celer  paluster        puter   (putrid) 

ecpiester      pedester        volucer 


and  the  national  adjective  Lisuber.  They  properly  belong  to  the 
first  class,  but  drop,  analo.^ous  to  the  R-stems  of  the  2d  declen- 
sion (Lesson  X.),  their  termination  Is  in  the  nominative  singular 
of  the  masculine,  retaining  it  in  the  feminine,  and  assummg  m 
the  NEUTER  the  termination  e.  Only  par  drops  everywhere  the 
termination  is  and  e  of  the  nominative. 

Kom   o    These   adicctivcs  are  declined  like  ac.r,  by  dropping  the  «  before  r 
^'    ex'^em     y.r,  wbi'h  retains  the  e  throu.dtout,  ibrrnn.j,  the  ^ett.  i^ur.  m 
wu!uot  i.nn.     The  con.pounds  oi' par  {compar,  impar)  have  the  gen. 

E^m  2  3  13)';  calupestris  locus  (Colum.  3,  13);  equestns  <um«te  (L.v. 
27,  1).  ' 

R  «11.  III.  CLASS:  Liqilid-miltos,  terminating  in 
••«  •md  r*.  They  form  tlioir  irdi'tives  in  ntis  and  rtis,  as 
".son.,  G.  )nsontis,  expers,  G.  expertls.  Only  the  con.pon.uls 
7Z\co„eors,  vecors)  form  the  genitive  in  d>s  {concord >s, 
vecordis).    They  are  declined  like  the  paradigm  sapieM. 


150 


ADJECTIVES   OF   COMMON   GENDER. 


§  912    IV.  CLASS  :  Adjectives  in  a\,  OX,  i\  and  a», 

with  genitives  in  ucis^  ocis^  ids  and  alls,  as  :  saf/ax,  sagacis,  /e- 
liXy  fellcis,  velox,  velocis  (see  the  paradigm  andax).  Those  in  as 
consist  in  the  civic  adjectives  of  this  termination,  which  have  the 
same  form  and  declension,  as  the  civic  nouns  in  as  (§187,  4), 
except  that  thej  form  their  abl.  sing,  in  i.  To  this  class  also 
belong  the  adjectives  locuples,  G.  locupletls,  and  simplex,  G. 
simpHeh,  the  other  adjectives  in  es  and  ex  having  consonant-stems. 
§  313.  The  adjectives  of  the  3d  and  4th  classes  have  the 
same  form  for  all  three  genders  in  the  nominative  singnlar,  and 
hence  generally  are  called  adjertive!«»  Of'oiie  terillilia- 

tioii. 

ADJECTIVES  WITH  COXSOXAXT-STEMS. 


§  914.    Vocabulary. 


Anceps,  G.  ancipitis,  twofold,  doubt- 
ful, critical 

biceps,  bicipitis,  having  two  heads 

bipes,  bipedis,  two-footed 

caplebs.  ca'libis,  unmarried 

cicur,  Tirifi,  tame 

compos,  dtis,  havirif/  control  over 

degener,  eri.%  d< generate 

deses,  dt-sidis,  indolent,  slothful 

dives,  it  is,  rich 

liebes,  etis,  dull 

iramemor,  dris,  unmindful 

impubes,  eris,  being  under  14  years, 
yonthful 

inops,  dpis,  helpless 

memor,  oris,  mindful 


particeps,  cXpis,  partaking,  paHid 

paling 
pauper,  tris,  poor 

pr.TC«'])s,  pr-rcepitip,  steep,  headlong 
princt'ps,  //>/.v,  principal 
pubt's,  pubr-ris  — S-class —  adult 
redux,  rcdilciiji,  returned 
Bospes,  "itix,  seife,  sound  and  safe,  ui^ 

hurt 
8uperst«'s.  Itix,  surviving 
supplex,  iciK,  st'bmi^'<Kice,  suppliant 
teres,  Ptis,  tcell  rounded,  smooth 
irux,  triicis,  grim,  fierce,  savage 
uber,  tris,  rich  (of  TniNOs). 
versicolor,  oris,  party-colored 
vetus,  tris  — S-clase  -  old 
vigil,  His,  ^catchful 


§  3I.>. 

Paradigms. 

SINGULAR. 

PL  U  RAT.. 

Ma^o.  &  Fern. 

Neuter. 

Mafic.  <£■  Fern. 

XeuUr. 

N 

Vetus 

vetus 

N. 

Vetcres 

Vetera 

G. 

veteria 

veteris 

G. 

veteruin 

veterum 

D. 

veteri 

veteri 

D. 

veteribus 

veteribus 

A. 

veterera 

vetus 

A. 

voteres 

Vetera 

A. 

vetere 

vetere 

A. 

veteribus 

veteribus 

ADJECTIVES  OF   COMMON   GENDER. 


151 


SFNGULAR. 
Mafic.  <fe  Fen}.  Neuter. 

N.      Dives 
G.      divitis 

D.      diviti  Wanting. 

A.      divitem 
A.      divite 


PLURAL. 
M(V*c.  «&  Fern. 
N.      Divites 
G.      divitum 
D.      divitibus 
A.      divites 
A.      divitibus 


Neuter, 


Wanting. 


S  S I O.  4.  Adjectives  with  consonant-stems  take  the  case- 
terminations  of  NOUNS  with  consonant-stems  (§  145).  Bat  those 
in  ceps  and  ;:>te  take  the  terminations  e  and  i  promiscuously 
in  the  ABL.  SING.  They  form,  with  the  exception  of  a  few,  no 
NEUTER  GENDER,  which,  whcrc  It  occurs,  has  the  same  form  as  the 
masculine  and  feminine  in  nom.  sing.  Their  genitives  are  formed 
like  those  of  nouns  with  the  same  terminations,  the  same  classes 
being  distinguished  in  both.  Only  adjectives  of  the  N-class  do 
not  exist. 

Rem.  3.    Vigil  forms  tlie  ablative  in  i,  when  it  is  used  as  an  adjective, 
but  in  e,  when  it  is  used  as  a  noun. 

§  317.  5.  Only  the  following  adjectives  with  consonant- 
Btems  form  the  neuter  gender :  Vetus,  hehes,  and  those  in 
ceps  with  the  genitive  cipitis.  Veins  has  regularly  Vetera, 
but  the  other  neuters  form  their  nom.  plur.  in  «a,  the  genitive 
liaviriir  tlie  regular  termination  um. 

§  218.  0.  Indeclinable  are:  fnieii  (virtuous,  temperate, 
wodhy),  and  nequam  (wicked),  as  :  homo  frugl,  G.  homirii^ 
frugi,  etc. 

Item  4.  The  indeclinable  adjectives  mces^e,  satis,  and  prtesto  (present,  at 
hand  ,  arc  used  onlv  p^tiict.tireh,.  Pn,sto  esse  ^nh  dative  means  to 
wait  on  somebody,'  as  :  Gajo  proe^to  est,   he  waits  on  Gajus. 

ADVERBS    OF    MANNER,    FORMED   FROM    ADJEC- 
TIVES OF  COMMON  GENDER. 
8  ofO      Oidy   adjectives   w^ith   vowel-stems   form   adverbs. 
Thesrattach  the  termination  ter  to  their  vowel-stems,  or— which 
is  the  same — iter  to  their  declension-st;>ms,  as  : 

nrer-ieriter  coler-ceh'riter         fortis-fortiter  par-pariter 

wTs-ireWter     felix-feliciter  gravis-graviter       velox-velociter, 

Rem.  5.  Of  adjunctives  with   consonant-stems  m^^Tior  only  forms  a» 
s^dyerh—intmoriter  [from  memory]. 


152 


ADJECTIVES   OF    COMMON    GENDER. 


ADJECTIVES   OF   COMMON   GENDER. 


153 


§  220»  Adverbs  from  adjectives  with  liquid-mute  steins  are 
formed  by  substituting  tlie  termiuatiou  fer  for  the  ending  .s  of  tlie 
nominative,  as  : 

dilio^ens— dil i i,^('nter        clci^^ans— el« '<,^an t(-r         solcrs— solt'rt»  r. 

Hem.  G.  Amhtx  forms  a^idncter  or  amhicitcr,  and  diffit-iUs—diifiruHcr 
Of  friei/ Li,  fiuhllfnis,  and  Umpnnix  tho  accusative  nkuteu  sini,ailar  ig 
used  with  tlie  force  of  an  adverb— /};/7'A',  si/bllme,  H/npr/ne. 

Hem.  7.  A  few  movable  adjectives  form  advt-rbs  by  the  termination  ter 

ovttrr,  as:   fntudnlciitu.^—fr'audiilcntir,  '•^nnrus — navitcr,  fir^/ixa 

Jiff  niter,  h  umd  n  us — h  uma/Uter,  ^inh  n  ma  n  >(s — i/i  h  u  ma  n  ite  r.  Ha  vn  k,s 

largiter. 

EXERCISES. 

Bt^  Decline   the  following  phras<s  hif  (jldn<i  the  nominative  ana 

ABLATIVE     SINGULAR,     and     GENITIVE     and     ACCUSATIVE     PLUKAL     //i 

Latin : 

1.  A  short  letter.     2.  A  irre(m  tree.     3.  A  difficult  undertaking. 
A  noble  deed.     o.  A  quick  (nlrr)  messenpT.     0.  A  (luick  ship   °7 
quick  help.     8.    A  sharp  battle.      9.  A  violent  (arer)   hatred.      10 
populous  city.     11.  A  frequented  place.     12.  An  eipiestrian  statue. 


4. 
A 
A 

13. 


The  cheerful  breast.  14.  A  mort^al  wound,  lo.  ''The  Cannean  battle. 
16.  The  Insubrian  forest.  17.  A  vulpir  oi)iiiion.  IS.  A  diliirent  be'nn- 
ner.  10.  An  enormous  evil.  20.  A  sluugish  mechanic.  21.  'i'he  har- 
monious plebs.  22.  An  inircnious  ])lan.  23.  A  sa^-jicious  animal  24 
An  unhappy  race.  25.  A  precocious  "intellect.  20.  An  ecpial  danger! 
27.  An  unequal  ^contest.  2S.  A  critical  journev.  21).  An  old  ima«>-e 
30.  An  old  town.  31.  A  dull  knife.  32.  An  ilnmindful  friend.  "33" 
An  adult  daughter.  34.  A  returned  prisoner.  3."i.  The  <:-eneral,  souml 
and  safe.  30.  A  surviving  s(ddier.  37.  The  suppliant  accused.  '  38  A 
fierce  eye. 

A.    ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

1.  To  a  man,  ignorant  ie.vpcr.f)  of  ''literature.  2.  Bv  a  dissimilar 
'VJiaracter.  3.  By  the  simple  character  {untnnt)  of  the  jxH-m.  4.  Of 
the  steej)  mountains  of  Thessalia.  5,  By  the  district  of  "Capr-na.  0. 
The  lands  of  wealthy  (/<><•  ?/p/r«)  citizens.  '7.  By  a  rich  (/'/^' //;>/<>)  dinner 
8.  The  green  meadows  of  Ireland.  !).  The  stom'achs  of  voracious  animals. 
10.  To  the  unhapi)y  condition  of  sad  old  men.  11.  Bv  the  prudent 
questions  of  the  pnetor.  12.  Tht;  i)resent  i)lans  of  the'  chief,  useh'ss 
{inutilis)  to  the  state.  13.  By  the  insolent  answer  of  the  centurion.  14. 
By  a  youni?  man,  similar  to  the  emperor  Nero.  l.Ti.  The  puerile  under- 
takings of  the  '-Megarians.  1(1.  Old  (r<f/.v)  and  illustrious  names.  17. 
By  the  '•■Syl)arites,  a  de^^enerate  ]).'ople.  IS.  Of  the  rich  iuhrr)  harvests 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Arplnum.  ID.  By  a  man.  unmindful  of  benefits 
20.  Of  the  i)arty-c()lored  o^arnients  of  the  iVrsians.  21.  Bequests  of 
unmarried  old  men.     22.  To  the  small  number  of  survivin<r  enemies 


1  Impunis,  unpuniHked.     2  Impnn*',  with  impunitii.     3  Navus,  active  biisi/     *  T„. 

^um.itms  tiihuman.     ^  h^rans,  plentif,d,   tihun<l(int,'v.opioao.     «   <^a/i»^,i»,  Cannensia 

InMlect^xn^emnm.     «  r7r>«^^.V.  cert  amen.     '•♦  Litter».     ^'^  Indolen.     ^^  Belonaina  t^ 


23  The  '-«defalcations  of  rich  '^bankers.  24.  By  the  consul,  '%afe  and 
^"unhurt.  25.  Bv  a  dull  ^^understanding,  the  punishment  of  angry  Jupi 
ter  20  The  civil  wars  of  the  Piomans,  fatal  to  an  incredible  nuiltitude 
of  citizens.  27.  Massilia,  a  i)opuloris  city  of  Oaul.  28.  By  the  unhappy 
i^fickleness  of  Alcibiades.  20.  By  the  short  marches  of  the  soldiers  ol 
Scipio.     30.  To  the  innumerable  hardships  of  the  -^Vejentian  siege. 

B.  SENTENCES. 

1.  Genus  mortille  undis  delere  Jovi  placet.  2.  Animalia  celeria  pedi- 
bus  f^racilibus  '■^'cognoscuntur.  3.  Initium  semper  difficile^  est.  4> 
s-Utiritatem  privatam  salfiti  i)ublicaB  anteponere  turpe  est.  5.  Consul 
hostis  clade  iugenti  rejiellit.  0.  Kecentia  mercium  pretia  ingentia  esse 
videntur.  7.  Scrij^torum  veterum  opera  admirabilia  sunt.  8.  Coloria 
ni"Ti  civium  jura  -' Tespicere -'-'par  esse  videtur.  9.  Platoni  ac  Socrati 
parem  aut  similem  esse  difficile  est.  10.  Beneficiorum  immemorem  esse 
animi  inirrati  document um  est.  11.  Nunc  supplicem  fieri  necesse  est. 
12.  Leo-es  salutaris  ac  ])atria?  utilTs  mutare  noli;mus.  13.  Dolorem 
s^fufc^re  et  "^S-olu])tatem  petere  h(miinibus  atcpie  animalibus  commune 
est.^  14.  Sermonis  Latlni  rudem  esse  turi)evidr'tur.  15.  Milites  periculo 
ancii)iti  '-'premuntur.  1(5.  Leges  Komnn.T  aetatem  impuberern  tuentur. 
17.  Populus  Ronianus  paiiperibus  Mummii  filiabus  doti'in  donare  consti- 
tuit.  IS.  Sententias  Latlnas  -^recte  -"'convertere  discipido,  regularum 
verborumque  immemori,  dillicile  esse  soh't. 

1.  It  is  better  to  l)e  diligent.  2.  It  is  preferable  to  be  unmarried.  3. 
It  delights  Cesar  to  be  merciful.  4.  We  do  not  wish  to  seem  absent.  5. 
Thi'  la'bors  of  the  committee  of  two  seem  to  be  dilRcult.  0.  (ircat  pains 
usually  are  short.  7.  The  wounds  of  the  centurion  seem  fatal.  8.  The 
minds  of  the  bovs  seem  to  become  dull.  0.  It  delights  the  soldiers  to 
he  partaking  of  the  bootv.  10.  The  citizens  are  compelled  by  -^"necessity 
to  be  haruKmious.  11.  The  consul  directs  the  ambassadors  to  be  grave 
and  prudent.     12.  The  queen  is  j .revented  by  the  king  from  being  liberal. 

13.  It   is  a  crime  {uefas)   to  plunder  the  temples  of  the  immortal  ^ods. 

14.  It  is  praiseworthV  to  reswct  the  authority  of  old  men.  15.  It  is 
cruel  (f'/v/^Zc/w)  and  atrocious  to  kill  unarmed  andsui)pliant  enemies.  10. 
The  senators  present  to  the  returned  soldiers  the  citizenship.  17.  The 
adult  sons  of  Sempronius  retain  the  =^i possession  of  the  ])aternal  country- 
seat.  IS.  The  cliildren  of  jMior  citizens  generally  are  educated 3^vithout 
c.nni^ensation.  19.  It  is  usi'less  to  free  a  degenerate  people.  20.  The 
l)aiiis  of  the  brave  soldiers  are  ^^^taken  away  by  a  quick  death.  21.  1  hou 
canst  not  "^raise  the  svmpatliy  of  men  by  unmanly  wailin<xs.  -  22.  Fire 
and  water  are  useful  to  men  :  but  still  they  can  become  terrible.  23. 
].  Sulla  compels  Mithridfites  by  a  'successful  war  to=^''suefor  conditions 
of  peace.     24.  It  is  difficult  to  convince  dull  and  •^•stubborn  men.     25. 


1-^    liicolinni."^.      ^^    Vn<Jfir.<ifa7}ding^   ratio. 

Utilita-s 


to  seek,  j)etere.     ^7  Periiiiax. 


154 


FOCUTIl    AND    FIFTH   DECLENSIONS. 


Gajiis  is  prevented  from  beini]:  present  l)y  serious  wounds,  and  Sem 
prouius  by  the  sad  dt-ath  of  a  brother. 

C.    rilRASES   AVITII    ADVKKBS. 

1.  The  soldiers  fi<::ht  bravely  and  •''*spiritt'dly.  2.  It  always  is  expedi. 
ent  to  live  ^'^coniforniably  to  nature.  Ji.  I  '^•'willinuly  follow  the  opinion 
and  advice  of  the  chief  4.  The  conditions  of  ])eace  are  •*'hesitatin;<rly 
acc(q)ted  by  the  tccn<'ral..  5.  You  nius.  treat  the  unfortunate  prisoners 
mildly  (/<>//.-<)  and  kindly.  G.  The  scholars  of  Gajus  botli  write  and  s])eak 
correctly  and  "''ele<>antly.  7.  The  consid  is  tn-aled  insolrntly  by  tlie 
leaders  of  the  sohliers,  8.  The  tribune  Flavins  ■^■^n^i rates  the  •'Vi^i'^rian 
law  •*'actively  and  vehemently,  i).  Sempronius  nnswers  sharply  and 
'^•^liercely.  10.  Cicero  -^'shows  "^^briefly  and  ^''forcibly  the  falhu-iis  of 
Epicurus.  11.  It  is  disnrraceful  to  treat  prisoners  inhumanly.  VI.  The 
scholars  seem  to  understand  easily  the  orations  of  Cicero.  Kj.  Theo 
jKnnpus  seems  to  think  similarly,  but  h-e  sj)eaks  ^"diliereutly.  14.  To 
Bi)eak  wisely  is  easy,  but  to  act  wisely  is  ditlicult. 


LESSON  XXX. 

FOURTH    AND    FIFTH    DECLEXSIONS  AXD   COM 

POUND   NOUNS. 

FOURTH   Di:CLENSION. 


See  Vocabidaries  IV  and  VI,  4. 

§  391.  1.  To  the  4th  deeloiision  belong  all  nouns  with  th<^ 
characteristic  u^  except  gnis  and  sus.  The  nominative  tcrminatea 
in  lis  for  the  mascidine  and  feminine,  and  in  }i  for  the  neuter. 
The  case-terminations  are  formed  by  blend inu-  the  eharacteri.stic  u 
with  the  endings  of  the  third  declension  [§  145]  according  to  the 
following  scheme  : 


Singular. 
N.  ?/«,  Neut.  u 
G.  \LS,  Neuters  u  (/kv?) 
D.  ui  or  ?/,  Neut.  alucays  u 
A.  um,  Neut.  u 
V.  like  Nom. 
A.  u 


Plukal. 

N.  us,  Neut.  aa 

G.  uum 

D.  y/>?/.y  (sometimes  ubus) 

■    t  like  Nom. 
A.  like  Dat. 


'<*  SpirU^tJ,  aoer.  3»  Conforr)itthl*>.  convt'nicns  <»  Willing.  Wn-n-^.  <»  Ihxitnting 
cnnctans.  *'  EUijaut,  elecaiis.  '«3  To  agitntf,  agitSri'.  ■•*  Aijinrian.  airr iiius.  •*'  Ao 
tire,  tiavn».  *«  Fierce,  ferox.  ♦^  Detegcre.  <*  B^ief,  brevis.  <»  bigiiiticans.  »«  IHfer 
eat,   contiarius. 


rOURTII    AND   FIFTH   DECLENSIONS. 


155 


Rom   1    The  nouns  in  us  are  masculine,  excei)t  the  feminines  acus 
.</;/;dc>rn  .?;...,  purtirns,  tribus,  the  pi.  t.  10...,  the  names  oi 
TREEsfas  ,.;.;...,  fir. I  and  the  female  personal  nouns  anus,  nurm 
and  sJcril     The  only  5  neuters  of  this  declension  are  : 

cornu,  a  hora  gelu,  frod  veru,  a  spit 

genu,  a  knee  pecu,  cattle 

art-  iNDK.n.iNABi.K  in  »ht>  sin<rul:ir.  But  af>'»"t  -^  "tn  VL  rFS  sing  wl.i.-h  ac-crd- 
.nHr.an  <lecl  -n-l  this  ^Vr'-'^Vll^^^rS  ^l":.if:  U  1  in'u^  ^l^T^Aul^er  gran.- 
Inirto  i.isopinmn  in   «''f /•'='-^'^'^-' /'^.^./^l    '"'^^^^^^^  which  are  hrouirh.  tbrWHnl. 

to  M.s.ain  this  vi.w.  ur.-  l.y  no  "'f '"'^.^^'•"f  ^'^'^^ mvn  v  .  ''p  o./fs  to  h.  imfoiin.l^ 
rihi:  ;^;^r  n::;n;r r 'cl^e  hj;^'  the^-;;;;  "  ^J^^^ot-Litated,  to  re^tore  the 
parailigm  "of  tlie  4th  declension  to  its  ancient  nghu 


Singular. 
N.  Fructus 
G.  fructus 
D.  fructui  or  fructu 
A.  fr  lie  turn 
A.  fructa 


§  22*2. 

Plural. 

fructus 

fructuuni 

fructibus 

fructiis 

fructibus 


Paradigms. 
Singular. 
N.  Cornu 
G.  cornu 
D.  cornu 
A.  cornu 
A.  cornu 


Plural. 

cornua 
corn  uum 
cornibus 
cornua 
cornibus 


Rem  *>  Th(^  nouns  (lomns  and  cohi^  in  some  of  their  cases  are  declined  after 
th^  4  and  in  6<mie  after  the  2d  declension.  Donni.  m  good  prose 
fornis  the  ABLATIVE  singular  ahrai/s,  the  genitive  i'LUKAL  g,ne- 
rXamUi  i  accusative  plural /,vv../.^/v  after  the  2d  declension 
-  ol^V^innniw,  domos.  The  other  cases foUow  the4th  declension^^ 
St' is  declined  in  the  same  way  ;  but  some  ol  its  cases  do  not 

KemTfirthe'foUowing  nouns  the  dative  and  .U.LATIVE  PLURAL  are 
fiinncd  ill  iihux,  instead  ot  "thus: 

acii  areas;  U.cus,  partus,  pecu,  specus,  tribus  and  the  pi.  t.  artus. 

Poiiiis  has  75'/.v  or  ubus.  .  ^     •,  e  ^i,^ 

T?em  4  it  often  is  ditticiilt  for  be-inners  to  distinguish  the  nouns  of  the 
otand  4  h  d'^h-nsions,  both  terminating  in  ..  in  the  nominative. 
F or  ^his  iipose  the  student  should  accurately  commit  the  nouns 
IV  a  V  4  of  the  Vocabularies,  among  which  all  concretes  in  m 
of  til  s  declension  are  found.  As  for  the  abstracts  in  lis,  they  in^ 
^L-tV  'v™  to  the  4th  declension,  when  they  terminate  msus. 
f^roVL.;  those  with  other  terminations  belong  to  the  second. 

FIFTH   DECLENSION. 

1^;^  See  Vocabularies  V. 
^  2tJ3.    2.  The  nouns  of  the  5th  declension  have  the  charac- 
teristi^'i  their  nominative  terminutina  in  es,  for  which,  in  decli- 
ning, the  case-terminations  of  the  following  scheme  are  substituted; 

»  Tolle  7ne.  mi,  inn.  min. 
Si  declinare  doinus  vis. 


156 


COMPOUND   NOUNS. 


SlNGITLAR. 
N.  e6 
Q.  ei 
D.  ei 
A.  em 
V.  es 
A.  6 


Singular. 
N.  Dies 
Q.  diei 
D.  dim 
A.  diem 
A.  die 


Plural. 

N.  es 
G.  eriitn 
D.  thus 
A.  es 
V.  es 
A.  thus 

§  ^^1.    PARADIG>r. 

Plural. 
N.  Dies 
G.  dlrrum 
D.  diebus 
A.  dies 
A.  dirbus 


§  3^5.  3.  The  gexdfr  of  nouns  of  the  otli  declension  is  the 
FEMININE,  the  masculines  dies  and  rnerkUes  excepted.  ]>iit  the 
siiii»-ular  of  dies  sometimes  is  used  as  a  feminine,  especially  if  de- 
notinir  an  appointed  day,  or  a  term. 

§  tJ90.  The  QUANTITY  of  the  vowel  e  in  the  case-termination 
is  loiKj;  but  it  is  short  in  the  j^enitivc  and  dative  sin^.  o{  fides ^ 
plehes,  res  and  S2)es,  the  oidy  four  nouns  of  this  declension,  in 
which  a  consonant  precedes  the  termination  ei<. 

Rem.  1.  Pronounce  tliorofore  fdei,  plehn,  not  1id~''i,  p^eb~'i. 

Rem.  2.  The  nouns  of  the  otli  d«"clension  <renerallv  lack  tlie  plur  \L 
wliicli  completely  exists  in  res  and  f//r,s  onlv.  '  Kifirjus.  farie.s  and 
*i7^.*f  sometimes  are  found  in  those  cases  of*  the  i)lural,  which  ter- 
minate in  es. 

Rem.  ;}.  It  is  easy,  to  distinp^uish  the  nouns  of  the  r)th  declension  from 
those  of  the  M,  terminating-  in  es,  since  in  all  nouns  of  the  former, 
except  jides,  phhes,  ns  and  spes,  tlie  termination  (S  is  preceded  bv 
the  vowel  i,  while  in  the  ;}d  declension  this  is  the  case  in  the  fouf 
nouns  al)-ies,  aiies,  paries  and  quies  only. 

COMPOUND  NOUNS. 

§  3tl7.  The  composition  ofnouns  is  either  PROPER  or  iMPRopKR. 
I-MPKOPKH  compounds  are  phrases,  generally  written  in  one  word, 
when  each  of  the  two  words  of  the  phrase  keeps  its  own  form  and 
meaniun^.     This  composition  is  of  three  kinds  : 

1.  With  attributive  adjectives,  in  respubllca  (res  public(f),ii  re- 
public or  State  (Vit^ivniW 2)ublic  thin<j)\  ^w^  jmjuraiulum  {jiisja- 


COMPOUND    NOUNS. 


157 


raiidum),  oath  (literally  a  rir/ht  that  is  to  he  sworn  to).    2.  With 

oenitives  or  other  cases  in  the  relation   of   attributes  or    objects, 

as  ' paterfatailias,  mater farnHlas,  fillusfajjiUias,   fillafanii' 

lias. ' legislator  {legumlator),  'plebls^u.tum,  *  senatuscomultam, 

'Jurlscousidtus  (or  jureconsidtus),  fidejussor,  a  bail,  iimcapio, 

an  acquisition  of  property  by  prescription.    3.  In  some,  mostly  legal, 

expressions  two  nouns,  asyndetieally  coordinated  (p.  99,  §  120).  are 

used  with  the  force  of  a  single  compound  noun,  as  ususfructus  (inst. 

of  */6'w.s^  et  fructus),  a  usufruct,  emtlo-venditlo,  a  bargain  of  sale. 

Rem  4  If  nouns  are  composed  after  the  1st  and  3.1  methods,  each  of  their 
Constituents  is  deelinell,  as  respMca,  G.  reipuUicc^,  Ace.  rempuhhcam  ; 
msjnntndnni,  G.  jurisjnrandi ;  nsiisfrucrus,  Ace.  ummjrnctum  In  tne 
second  chiss  of  componnds  onlv  the  jrovernin-  word  is  declniod,  a^ 
iunronsultHS,  G.  jureconsnlti.  In  paterfamilias,  Jilhi^famdni^,  etc.,  the  woul 
familias  is  an  archaic  irenitive  of  the  1st  dech  n>ion  (mstead  ol  famdne), 
which  remains  unchan-ed  in  declension,  while  the  iirst  parts  ot  these 
con»i»ounds(/>a/(^r,  jilins,  etc.),  are  re-ularly  dechned,  as  :  G.  patrisja- 
milias.  Ace.  j>atninfaindias,  X.  PL  patrestaindias,  etc. 

§  ^5:58.  Proper  compound  nouns  are  inflected,  as  if  they  were 
BiMPLE  nouns,  as  agricola.G.  a(irlcolae.  They  are  but  a  few  in 
num))er,  and  present  no  peculiarities  in  their  declension. 

§  32».  English  compound  nouns  generally  are  expressed  in 
Latin  by  Ittributivi-:  phrases,  having  either  an  adjective,  or  a 
GENITIVE  as  attribute,  as  : 

1.    With  ADJECTIVES. 


the  dorpstar.  stella  canicidilris 
a  goki-eing.  annulus  aureus 
a  hair-pin,  acus  crinalis 
a  marble-col (imn,  colunma  mar- 
morea 

2.    With  GENITIVES 


a  miU:^tone,  lapis  moh'ris 
raiu-water,  acpia  pluvia 
a  sitoie-storm,  tempestas  nivdsa 
a  water-fowl,  avis  aquatica 


an  enrth-qnah\  terr.T  mot  us 
head-((ehe,  ca])itis  dolores 
house-top,  adium  cidmen 
snow-fall,  nivis  casus 


siudight,  solix  lux 
sun -rise,  soils  ortus 
teoth-ache,  dentium  dolores 
water-works,  aqme  ductus .  sing  ) 


iTh«   Pxnr^ssions  "  Paterfamilifts,    filinsfamiliav'   etc.,    are   difficult   to   convert  into 
often  ,.ccurs  in  the  si-Mifioaion     ny^.      *;\";'*^,,^,7;,,  j,,  this  connection  -ienotea  not 


158 


COMPOUND   NOUNS. 


EXERCISES. 

ATTRIBUTIVE  PHRASES. 

FoiniTH  DECLENSTOX,  1.  Bv  ail  iron  needle.  3.  Tlio  knees  of  the 
suppliant  old  man.  3.  To  the  enormous  limbs  of  the  t'I('i)hant.  4.  Tc 
an  unfortunate  accident.  5.  By  a  beautiful  sonir.  (>.  By  a  h('adlon,i> 
course.  7.  To  tlie  Niimidian  cavalry.  8.  Of  an  unmanly  weeping-.  1). 
By  a  fatal  stroke  of  liglitnin^.  10.  To  the  ''irrcsistibk'  attack  of  tiic  cav- 
alry. 11.  Of  a  small  'band  of  soldirrs.  12.  By  ''illicit  piin.  l:>.  By 
rouoi-h  forests  {mdtua).  14.  By  the  Roman  senate  and  peo])lt'.  LT.  Hy  the 
sound  {ineohoit'iK)  senses  of  the  hcan-is  (amlltor).  1<).  The  Venetian 
{^W'latns)  and  ^Terirestian  harl)ors  {"hj.)  17.  By  the  harbors  of  tiic  '"Adri- 
atic gulf  18.  By  the  holy  (sd/n'tu.s)  spirit.  19.  To  enormous  i-xpcn- 
ees.  20.  By  the  "country  tribes  of  the  Romans.  21.  The  votes  of  the 
'-'city  tribes.  22.  By  a  scanty  sustenance.  2o.  By  a  fierce  {t/'f/.v)  i^hmce. 
24.  Of  a  '■rickety  house.  25.  To  the  humble  house  of  the  '^Stoic  Posi- 
donius.  20.  By  the  new  house  of  Cicero.  27.  The  '  biick  houses  of  the 
old  Romans.  28.  The  hi<rh  roofs  of  the  '••'Swiss  houses.  21).  The  ])a- 
ternal  houses  {obj.)  of  Scipio.  30.  By  the  ''suburban  houses  of  the 
wealthy  Romans.  31.  The  defeat  of  the '\'onstilar  armies.  32.  By  the 
''•*triumi)hal  arches  {(trcus)  of  the  Roman  imperators.  33.  By  a  '^'squalid 
plight  and  bearing. 

FiFTU  DECLENSION.  1.  By  an  enormous  deluge.  2.  To  a  certain  hoi>e. 
3.  Of  necessary  things.  4.  The  i)ernicious  day  of  the  Caimean  battle. 
5.  The  hot  midday  {"bj.).  G.  The  fortunate  {fiat ((.'<)  and  unfortunate 
(ncfad'is)  days.  7.  By  ])rivate  and  ]»ul)lic  atiliirs.  8.  To  certain  de- 
ptruction.  1).  Of  the  '-'Punic  faith.  10.  The  ha})py  (hutHK)  end  of  an  un- 
pleasant affair.  11.  By  the  --asi>ect  of  a  vast  -"'plateau.  12.  To  the 
rouirh  surface  of  the  house.  13.  Bv  a  doubtful  hope  of  safetv.  14. 
The  heat  of  a -^summer  midday,  lo.  An  evidence  of  extraordinary  ef- 
feminacy.    1().  A  mean  and  vulgar  affair  {oh}.). 

Compound  nouns.  1.  l^y  the  Roman  rei)ublic.  2.  Of  the  anci(Mit 
republics.  3.  To  the  safety  of  the  n-public.  4.  Hy  the  oatli  of  Piso. 
5.  The  mutual  duties  of  hou.se-fathers  and  house-sons.  (J.  By  Solon 
{Stlo)  and  Lycurgus,  the  lawgivers  of  the  Athenians  and  Spartans.  7. 
By  a  decree  of  the  senate,  -"^hateful  to  the  common  i)eop!e.  8.  By  fre- 
quent eartlupiakes.  V).  To  the  -''sea-towns  of  Italy.  10.  Hy  a  -'«ea-battle 
of  the  Romans  and  Carthaginians.  11.  By  the  rising  of  the  -"'morning- 
Btar.  12.  Bv  -"'snow  and  rain-water.  13.  Bv  the  "'north  side  of  the 
house.  14.  By  the  ^'south-bank  of  the  river.  15.  To  the  useof  •^-'cistern- 
"water.  10.  By  enormous  snow-falls.  17.  Sharp  •''night-frosts.  18.  By 
the  '^inoderii  •'invention  of  "''steamships.  \\).  The  heavy  •'"freight-ships 
of  Julius  CiTsar.     20.  Bv  the -'^New-Brunswick  water-works. 


«  Inexpuffnnbilis.  '  Mv.nU'^.  ^mjcjtn^.  » T«r<restTnns.  helonging  to  Tt-rge-stfi,  the 
f)io(ifin  Trieiit.  10  .\(lriaiioiis.  ^  Count  >•>/.  as  atl.j.  rusticns.  i'-'  /  V/y,  as  «<lj.  urbanii». 
18  IJiiiiioMis.  '•'Stoicus.  ^^  Brick'.  Jis  ailj.  latfri -iiH.  *«  Ilelvetifus.  •' Suhurl-fitiiis. 
1«  ('■msnlaris.  i"  Triiimphri'is.  '■'"  Sordidus.  '•"  I'liniciis.  '-'■■' CcUKptM-tus.  '^'^  riuiities. 
2"«  SuTtimt'r.  as  adj.  testlvus.  '^^  Invl.sus.  ^*  Trttnshitfl :  maritime  t«»\vtis.  27  N;iviJ 
battle.  '^"  Mututiiiu.-*.  ">♦  Mivosus.  3o  «Septentrioiialis.  3*  Meriilionulis.  ^'^  Cistcriiliiua 
9  3  NdCtiirnus.  34  Kecens.  **  luventio.  *•  Vaporarius.  *' Oiierarius.  '^  jje^^.jjruns- 
viceni>is. 


COMPOUND   NOUNS. 


159 


SENTENCES. 

1    An.'ures  cvcnt«s  futaros  avia.u  ='vol.\tu  prae.licunt^   I.  J^  -CU,'. 
Ri„.^"S'^uUaun>  h,«tiu;n  iMn;.tun.  s«^^^^^^ 
diAnaC'iccronisredm.  vel.ene,    m  comurlawr      4  ^^^^     ^ 

bito  "■-•-:"^!'''"-,./-o^J"i^^^^^^^  sunt.     14.  Sammiium  agn  a 

miiui  <WuK-m  scnatiu  mimiat.     10.  '='^'f™''*  P^V^^^^^  18.  Philoso- 

.  1-^  I'*'    Viiiiwjfi  fnncni  oculorum  acie  exttiin.     i.^-  ^ 

bus  impeditur.     1<.  V  ulpes  cam  m  ocu  .  -^y    lies  occultae 

,,V.a  r^lrun.   lu.n.ann.„n^^^^^ 

atotu' •'•'incognita'  rel)U&  cern»  cu^nit  i  ^  ^.  Pelononnesus  uni- 
tuiu.  fra.,,1?.  fid.,-i  public,;»  e«tio_s=^  esse  s,>lo^  .  ~l;^.f,^  «[Xunes  sp.-m 
versa  ab  llerculis  l'™f  J''^^•i  c olc'su's  UiyodU.s  err«.  motu  -pr^ecipi- 
longain  *^conop<-ro  vetat.  i...  ^^  '  f'!';  "•  ,„  uuiversam  liberant.  25. 
tatSr.  24.  Ath.^nb^nses  prcolio  nava     br.ra^^^^^  ^^^^^^ 

4.  Tbe  water  of  lakes  ,s  '^-'^ :  >''^^'i;X''rsi.k.  s'are  carried  (firre) 
Labir-nus  to  await  the  issue  ot  "'  '"^"'^.  ."i'  ,^.„„i  g.  The  vote  of  the 
i„  ,,,,,,  the  left  band,  -«^^^^^^'^'^XL  and  i>ortico  of  Oc- 
«"lirst-votini;  tribe  IS  given  to  Cesar.   °- J,"*^  f,i„|,,„-,n„'  9.  The  year 

tavUis  are  destroyed  (^''''*«'«^':<;  '•,,^,^,tL°Uus^  we  often  excel  -iU- 
is  full  of  '>imi>ortant  events.     10    By  '>>•"""   [.'sense  of  the  verses. 

reguh.ted  «genius.  11.  I  '■^•"'ll.V";^  ,7be  p^ese  ved  13  The  puuish- 
13^Jal.-tl■e,.s,"bear,ngacorns^    »houbl  be  l^^escrv  ^^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^F^^ 

,„e«t  of  "m>Kms  inen  ha  dct^ec  4^  ^^.  ^^_P  ^_^^^^  .,^^  j^^^  ^,,.  j,,^ 
^.S  o[  t^iiragi^ra.^  T^'^  ^?;!;^^ ''  "^^^T^^- 


t»  Flvinc.  tiiirht.  '»0  Clodianus,  Cio<Ji 
42  To  l.ol.l  up,  to  fasten.  "»  A  tre.nbhi.}:. 
47  To  be  aisi-losed.  *«  To  entertain-  *^ 
U^vM-^.to  illuminate.    ^'  I'rf- ^'-^f  ■ . 

;   si.bj-et  Is  prere.led  by  an  ol.ject.  the 
Vo y„  ,ii.r-,  toUere.     '-'  To  d.Urmine, 
»-   ..c       61    flriivis       "    Inconcinnus. 
Vri>ebcre,p.XnU.«...     ^^  To  he  lost, 
'u  Fluctus.    '»  Senate-hcune.  curia. 


,«    nf  r/odiuH     *»  Gloriae  cnpidus,  amhitioic». 

^  "  "rH;;";.mont  »U.«W  be  ..l«rve,,  In  L^. 
penJf  "  Siruclurf   •'  Aptu»-    "  Magnitiid. 


IGU 


THE  PROXOUNS. 


THE  PRONOUNS. 


101 


to  be  devoted  to  mlHtary  affairs.  19.  Tlie  approaches  to  {trminhtte  "of") 
the  i)lam  are  open  to  the  cavahy  of  llaunil)al.  :20.  l^xtcrnal  tilings  are 
perc<'ived  by  the  eyes,  but  "-'hidden  things  by  the  '^penetration  of  tin; 
imnd  {menH).  21.  The  is.sue  of  tlie  ])ublic  affairs  seems  to  be  contrary 
to  the  liope  of  the  '^(ieinap)gaes.  22.  Cares  and  '^sorrow  cannot  be  dis- 
pelled by  the  memory  of  hai)py  days.  2o.  The  '*'cai)itals  of  the  ''Ionic 
columns  '^present  the  '''imai;e  of  the  horns  of  rams.  24.  The  morn imr- 
and  '^"afternoon-hours  must  be  devoted  to  studies  or  "'business.  2.'). 
The  leaders  confirm  the  treaty  bv  an  oatii.  2(>.  The  Ilortensian  law  as- 
signs  to  resolutions  of  the  plebs  the  force  of  laws.  27.  It  is  allowed  to 
an  house-fathiT  to  '"-disinherit  an  house-son  or  an  house-daughter.  28. 
The  Code  of  Justiniaiius  contains  tlu;  "^ 'ordinances  of  tin;  emperors,  and 
the  '^Pandects  embrace  the  various  works  of  the  lloiuau  lawyers. 


LESSON  XXXI. 

THE    PROXOUXS. 

§  d«tO.  1.  Pronuun.s  are  word^,  roprcscnting persons  or  things 
as  one  of  the  three  gk.\mmatical  peusons  (§  5).  They  are  divi- 
ded into  ^iliiple  and  reflexive  in-ononn.s. 

§  aXXt ,     -.  The  SIMPLE  riioxouNs  are  thus  declined  : 

J^irst  person.  Second  pernon.  Third  person. 

SINGULAR. 

Tu,  thou  Is,  m.  he  ;  ea,/.  ahe  ;  id,  n.  it 

tui.  of  thee  t'jus,  of  him,  ofhtr,  of  it 

tibi,  to  thee  ei,  to  liiin,  to  her,  to  it 

te,  tJtee  eum,  in.  him;  earn,/,  her; 

id,  II.  it. 
te,  hy  thee  eo,  m.  &  k.,  eil,  /.  hy  him, 

her,  it. 
Plural. 

N.     nos,  we  vos,  you  ei  (ii),  ?/?.  ea^,  /.  ea,  /?.,  they 

G.     nostri  [nostrum],  vestri  [vestrum],  eorum,  m.  efirum,  /.  edrum, 

of  us  of  I/O  II  // . .  (f  th  e  III, 

D.     nobis,  to  us  vobis,  to  you  eis  (iis),  to  them 

A.     nos,  US  vos,  you  eos,  m.  eas,/'.  ea,  n.,  than 

A.     nobis,  hy  us  vobis,  hy  you  eis,  (iis),  hy  them. 

''^  Reconditns.  ''S  Acies.  ''*  Demarioouf,  homo  popiilfiti'*.  ''^  yEirritrpht.  ''*  Capita 
lam.  ^T  lonicus.  '«  PrsebC-re.  ''^  Kllijrics.  »"  Pomeridiauos.  »i  I'laral  in  Latin 
*2  Exheredare.     *"  Constitutio.     ***  Paiidecta),  pi.  t. 


X.  Ego.  / 

G.  mei,  of  me 

D.  luihi,  to  me 

A.  me,  me 

A.  me,  hy  me 


Hem    1.  The  double  forms  »o,(ri-n^?«rum,  '^"'^  .""f '7!f  "'or  jSiS' £. 
di.tin^n.ished,  that  the  forms  in  i  are  exclusively  u>e,l  as  o^J£c3y  U 
1^-  He  is  hi  wd  of  m.  nostri  (not  nodnim)  cget.     i'i«*°™i'' '°  "'"    I 
Tre  uB:.d  a"  partitive  aitrib.vte.,  m  such  ptoses  as  :  iV«».  of  us  (,u^    | 
trum),  miui  of  i/oiTlJesimn):    hee  Book  Ul. 
s  3'J'>      3    The  pronoun  of  the  third  pcrsou  is,  ea,  id  has 
three  -enders  in  most  of  its  cases.     It  generally  refers  to  a  noun, 
previously  mentioned,  which  is  called  its  antecedent 

The  GENDER  of  the  pronoun  of  tl>e  third  person  is  not  deter- 
rained  by  the  gender,  which  it  has  in  English,  but  by  that  of  its 
Latin  ANTECEDENT,  while  the  CASE  of  pronouns  is  the  same  as 
would  be  given  to  nouns  in  their  place. 

We  adhere  to  the  king,  ami  love  him,  iJ.»t  adfmeremus  eumqm  dUigi- 
™The  inhabitants  defend  the  queen,  and  are  defended  by  lier,  Incdm 

"^l^:£^:l^'^rS:t^  the  «oman  general  oppresses 
tl„  ,     hcalu-  r,.4d,re  cowmUir,  ml  dia  Roiuanus  eos  oppninit 

T  le  e  en  e    aUndon  the  niountain.and  the  consul  resolves  to  occupy 
u    u!:JJlmo,,tnn  rclwQtmnt.  comulqm  eum  (not  ul)  omipare  datmt. 
'*'^f  enSes  b^lk'the  line  of  Lttle,  but  the  general  restores   .t, 

^xf,:  r^ifgr  Ci''  rri  :rdi£i\t/^iirit,  op,.  ,na,nur. 

.rfWque  ).-,f ;/#c^<«  cidUar;  or,  Lab..r  magnus  est,  eumque  fimre 
dijjicile  vidctur. 

&  *>'$•{  4  Reflexive  pronouns  are  objects,  wbicli  denote 
the  slmJ  person  cr  thing,  as  the  logical  subjects  of  their  govern- 
ing  verbs  or  adjectives.  Verbs,  which  have  reflexive  pronou.is  as 
oblects,  are  called  reflexive  verbs. 

The  Eno-lish  reflexive  pronouns  are  compounds  of  the  word 
self  (mys^^f,  thij^elf,  himself,  c&c).  In  Latin  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  reflexive  pronouns  are  the  same  as  the  simple  pro- 
nouns •  but  the  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person  has  the 
following  peculiar  forms,  in  which  neither  gender  nor  number  are 
distinguished  : 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
A. 


sui  of  himself,  of  herself,  of  itself,  of  themselves,  of  one  s  He  f 

^ibi  to  himself,  to  herself,  to  itself,  to  themselves,  to  one  s  self 

se  or  sese,  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,  one's  self 
se  or  sese,  by  himself,  by  herself,  by  itself,  by  themselves,  by  ones 
self. 


162 


THE   PRONOUNS. 


Rem.  3.  Some  Latin  reflexive  verbs  have  English  neuter  verbs  for 
equivalents,  as:  se  rccipere,  to  retreat  ;  se  Huhmittere,  to  submit  ;  se 
tradere,  to  surrender  ;  se  jactdre,  to  boast ;  w  (/bdirdre,  to  abdicate. 
Students  should  be  careful  to  treat  such  verbs  as  reflexives  throuirh 
all  their  persons,  as :  /  retreat,  me  recipio ;  he  retreats,  sc!  recipit. 
&c. 

Rem.  3.  The  reflexive  pronouns  can  have  oblique  cases  only,  because 
tliese  lu'onouns  according  to  their  nature  must  be  oij,tects.  For 
the  anomaly  of  rctitixive  attuihutes  see  L.  XXXVI. 

Rem.  4.  The  use  of  the  reflexive  i)ronouns  will  be  seen  in  the  following 
exami)les  : 

A.  FIRST  AND  SECOND  PERSONS. 

I  am  not  willin<r  to  hurt  mvself,  me  laedere  nolo. 

We  are  unmindtul  of  oursiUves,  nostri  iniinemores  sumus. 

We  cannot  accuse  ourstdves,  7W)i  aecnmre  nequlmu^. 

We  submit  to  the  king,  regi  nos  suhtttitfiirDix. 

Thou  canst  not  excuse  thyself,  te  excuxdre  neqtiin. 

You  are  dissimilar  to  yourselv(»s,  i^nJm  disdinlles  estis. 

Thou  must  abdicate,  te  abdicdre  debes. 

B.  THIRD  PERSON. 

To  accuse  one's  self  is  rash,  ne  aecusdre  tenuranum  est. 
To  be  mindful  of  one's  self  is  fair,  sui  tnemorem  esse  aeqiium  est. 
Virtue  is  desirous  of  itself,  virtus  sni  ciqnda  est. 

The  inhabitants  commit  themselves  to  the  protection  of  C;esar,//i^^>^ 
Caesaris  fidei  .se  endnnt. 
God  is  similar  to  himself,  Deus  dhi  similis  est. 

§  3«t  !•  5.  Pruiiouiis  grammatinillv  are  treated  like  nouns. 
They  are  members  of  phrases,  like  these,  and  assume  the  same 
cases  as  nouns  wouhl  in  their  place.  But  the  follo\viu<^  rules  are 
peeuUar  to  pronouns  alone  : 

THE  PRONOUNS  IN   THE    PREDICATIVE    PHRASE. 

§  ^Uci*  0.  The  pronouns  as  subjects  generally  are  not  ex- 
pressed in  Latin  (§  10),  the  personal  ending  of  the  predicate  being 
a  sufficient  designation  of  the  person  of  the  subject.  But  the  pro- 
nouns must  be  expressed  as  subjects,  if  they  are  either  exi)ressly 
or  impliedly  opposed  to  nouns,  or  to  the  pronouns  of  other 
persons.     The  pronouns  are  then  said  to  be  used  eilipliati- 

c*all%. 

Gffjus  speaks,  and  we  write,  Gajus  loquitur  ac  nos  scribimus. 
Hie  consul  commands,  and  I  obey,  Consul  imperat,  et  ego  obedio. 
Thou  art  glad,  hut  I  am  sorry,  Tu  gaudes,  Bed  ego  doleo. 
I  go  away,  but  you  remain.  Ego  abeo,  sed  vos  manr'tis. 


THE   PRONOUNS. 


163 


.     The  conml  calls  Piso,  but  he  refuses  to  obey,  Consul  Pisonem  vocat. 
Bed  is  oliedirc  non  vult. 

8  •>'|6  1  Two  or  more  coordinate  subjects  (§  114)  of 
differc't  persons  have  their  predicates  either  in  the  «'•st  or  in  the 
second  person  of  the  plural.  Tl>e  first  person  is  used,  .f  at  least 
one  of  the  subjects  is  of  that  person.  But  when  the  subjects  are 
of  the  second  and  third  persons  only,  the  predicate  is  placed  m  the 
second  person. 

Both  1  and  thou  are  satisfied,  Et  ego  et  tu  content!  sumus^ 
Thou  and  Anthony  mu.t  die,  Tu  et  Antonuis  mori  debet^s^ 
/  and  the  general  intend  to  accept  tl^e  propositions,  Ego  et  dux  proposita 
acciiKTe  volumus. 

Rem  5  The  oRDEn,  in  which  subjects  of  different  persons  follow  each 
other  -eeiaUy  is  this:  the  first  person  takes  precedence  of  the 
setond:'ald  the  second  of  the  third,  whatever  may  be  the  oraer  oJ 
the  subjects,  observed  in  English. 

THE  PRONOUNS  IN  THE  OBJECTIVE  PHRASE. 

8  «'{7  8  Pronouns,  dependent  on  verbs  or  adjectives,  are 
calkrproiioilliliul  objects.  They  form  objective  phrases 
with  their  governing  words,  like  nouns,  and  are  subject  to  the 
same  rules  as  the  latter.  If  the  pronominal  object  is  a  passive 
AGENT  (§  131)  the  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  always 
are  preceded  by  the  preposition  a  or  ah,  which  before  te  generally 
takes  the  form  abs.  But  the  pronouns  of  the  third  person  take 
this  preposition  then  only,  when  its   antecedent  is  a  personal 

noun.  ,     -,-  .  •* 

Gains  cannot  be  praised  by  me,  Gajus  a  me  laudari  nequit. 
TiriU  imt  he  assisted  bu  y<»i,  A  vobis  adjuvari  nolo. 
TifcZeannolhctaLibythen,  (the  enemies),  Urbs  ab  e.s  expugnan 

""v")'-»*.  the  books  and  am  ddigMcd  by  than,  Libros  perlego  eisque  de- 

lector. 

S  ^38  9  If  the  phrase,  in  which  a  pronoun  is  an  object,  is 
combined  'with  another  i»hrase,  containing  the  antecedent  of  the 
pronoun,  the  latter  assumes  the  reflexive  form  m  Latin,  except 
when  the  antecedent  either  itself  is  an  attribute,  or  dependent 

on  it.  .  ., . 

The  general  compels  tJie  inhabitants  to  adhere  to  Mm,  dux  incolas  sib^ 
{not  ei)  adh.nprere  cogit. 


1Q4 


THE   PRONOUNS. 


ramr  aVows  the  amha^sadors  to  meet  him,  C.-rsar  loi^^iitos  se  {tiot  oum] 

adire  perniittit. 

We  are  ordered  by  the  general  to  follow  him,  A  duce  se  {not  euin)  sequi 

jubeinur. 
But: 
llie  disciples  of  Socreites  intend  to  save  him,  Socratis  discipuli  enm 

Bcivare  volant.    {Se  senulre  would  refer  to  disripuli,  and  would  have  the 

retli'xive  meaning  *'to  saoe  themxelcen''). 

Kem.  ().  This  rale  liolds  good  only,  when  the  phrase  of  the  pronominal 
object  is  comhimd  with  the  phrase  of  the  antecedent,  but  not,  if  the 
twt)  phrases  are  connected  bv  rourdinatiipit,  as: 

Caaar  addres.ses  the  (intbii.saddorH,  (uid  permits  them  to  return, 
Cnp.sar  legiltos  alloquitur,  eisque  (//<y^  sibique)  redlre  |K'rmittit ; — the 
phrase  of  the  pronominal  oh]i'Cl{(  isqne  pi  rmittit)\iL'\iv^  not  eombined 
with,  but  coordinate  to  the  phrase  of  the  antecedent  (leydtos  tdlo- 
qnitnr). 

Rem.  7.  The  pronoim  sui.  fdbi,  se,  according  to  §  203  and  238,  occurs  in 
twodiffennt  meanings,  in  a  strictly  refixiw  sense,  rendered  by  hini- 
self,  etc.,  and  in  the  sense  of  a  simi)ie  pronoun  under  a  retlexive 
form,  rendered  by  Jtitn,  her,  drc.  These  two  meanings  must  be 
clea'ly  distinguished.  The  pronoun  is  strictly  reflexive,  if  the  logi- 
cal subject  of  its  governing  words  is  at  tiiesame  time  its  anteced<'nt, 
while  it  is  a  simple  pronoun,  if  it  has  tiie  sul)ject  of  another  than 
its  own  governing  word  for  an  antecedent.  Thus  in  the  exam]>h'8 
to  J^  'I'Vo  Hem.  4.  J),  the  pronouns  of  the  third  person  ar<^  reflexive, 
while  in  the  examples  to  ^238  ihey  merely  have  a  retlexive  form. 
In  the  following  exami)le  : 

''  Gujns  Sempronium  se  intcrficere  impedit" 

the  ])ronoun  se  may  be  taken  for  a  retlexive  or  for  a  simple  pronoun. 
If  Sempronium,  the  logical  subject  of  interfcere,  is  consiilered  as 
the  antecedent  of  se,  the  latter  is  IIEFLEXIVE,  and  the  example  is 
thus  translated  : 

"  Gajus  prevents  Sempronius  from  kiUinf/  himself." 
But  if  we  take  Gajus,  whicli  is  not  the  logical  subject  of  interfi- 
cere,  for  the  antecedent  of  se,  the  latter  is  a  simi'LE  pronoun,  and 
we  translate  : 

"  Gajus  prevents  Sempronius  from,  killing  him." 
The  connection   alone  can  show  in  such  instances,  whether  sui^ 
idbi,  se,  is  meant  to  be  a  retlexive,  or  a  sim[)le  pronoun. 

^^  For  the  use  of  the  pronouns  in  the  attributive  phrase  set» 
^  2«3,  2»4. 

EXEIiCISES. 

A.      THE  PRO^'OUXS  AS   SUBJECTS. 

1.  Et  ego  et  liberi  valemus.  2.  Et  ego  et  rex  hostium  adventu  fuGrere 
cogimur.  3.  Et  ego  et  tu  futuram  nipublicie  sortem  facile  pra^dicere 
possunms.  4.  Et  ego  et  magna  civiuni  ])ars  reeentibus  belli  eventibna 
urbem  ri'limptere  prohibemur.  5.  Tu  ac  Sempronius  a^groti  esse  videmini. 
0    Vos,  tluces  militesque,  hostis  vincere  nescltis.     7.  Ego  magnis  curis 


THE   PRONOUNS. 


1G5 


Io^^r.ro  ivir-tnTii  ou^ro  vos  vero  voluptatibus  sordidis,  atque 

drnuis,  si-d  v'.s  '«■diiionem  ac  bellum  meditammi.    9.  Kex  feempionmm 

rodiro'iiibet,  sed  is  parCreuon  vult.  .,     .      o 

1    c'l.nrlM  T>1-ivs  but  1  learn.    2.  Tliou  spcakest,  but  I  am  silent     & 

Tl  ou'  "St-::»,!  Henry  returns.     4.  Thou,  O  Lucretia    seemest^ U. 

be  .■be.rfu!,  but  «-e  'are  tormented  by  great  (ear  aud  ■•«  >^ety      a.  ^oa 

hnnlore  the  forgiveness  of  Cesar,  bt.t^  we  are  not  «^"'"S  *°  ,^l^,f  ^^ 

,,)-,.  ,  tl„.  dieiaior     6    Both  Cicero  and  1  are  comiwlled  to  tontorm  to 

t  new  conli«.mof  rtie  rep.thlic.     7.  Tlte  queen  and  I  are  adverse  to 

c  r.  ,  Vmsand  frauds.  8.  Bot'h  thou  and  I  «^<^  *»"'«'"  .X'l' to  Mend 
Fi;U.  r  thou  or  I  must  die.     10.  We  and  tlie  soldiers   intend  to  ..tend 

K  rn  in  fullow  the  le'^ious,  and  ?ie  departs  directly.  14.  i'liiUl  enaeavoio 
^;. "„;:.,:,  the  Z^y  of  the  ambaslad.,rs,  but  tl.ey  reject  the  proposi- 
tions  of  the  king. 

B.      THE  PRONOUNS  .49  OBJECTS. 

FliisT   4ND  SECX.ND  PERSONS.     1.  Mei  indigiTC  vitoiini.     2^Se'"P'^ 
ni*c"msilia  mihi  utilia  esse  po-unt      3.  Occasio  -d.i  M-I  f-a      s^ 

^■'"'"■'";  '6"At,i.n"n,."::tiaT'r'"geri's.de;'t'  ^7.  ^r^'eeptor  mihi 
'"'T'-"  l!o,u.;,n  V  «ere^P enn ittit.  8.  N-'cessitas  me  P.nnp.-^jum  s..qm 
T^r  .»  i;rrem  servF."  mihi  semper  licet.  10.  T«i  iinmeinorem 
e  S  in. 'ratu  n "'^tur.  1 1 .  Reipubli,-a>  status  tibyncojrtutus  esse  vtcU. 
essein  r,,i  i^voluiitateiu  tibi  afl.-ne  ilesmit.     IJ.   ic 

".stisV:..';.  d   v!  o      14    Hostes  te  elereittimque  cla.le  ingent,   «per.lere 
'v;:,unt"-15.  Mili-es  abs  '^.  «-M-^ni    r.-d  p  no  un  .     U,.^ 

nostri  inuuemor,.s  es^e  ^■'^'«"t"'^;.  ^ '' ./^.j  if '^^  j  re-is  controversial 
et  Mac.-donil,usM>uit,lia  sunt.  '^'/^'J^^s  lauS  gloriOsum  est,  sed  a 
a  nobis  d,.,  u,l,...r.  n;;-l''::  "  •  ^\^  Et  tenpi"s  et  causae  natQra  nos  bre- 
;i:^'l^:,;Vru.'"2r  'Kt;tl::.^.g;sef  Upuilic.  saUts  v,,s  vivere  v^^ 

"i.^'b:!  Oie  cbi..f  amltbe  board  of  t^n  are  ^^^^::;^^t;, 

^,;:?me""r'ne  lecture:  M^^O  of  SempiJius  are  ^th  ,Wn,  and 

(laedere)  us  seriously.     U.  1  uture  ^.^^y^°^.^         ,       .     f  ig^  rumors  and 
The  faction  of  Anthony  tries  to  rmn  {p^rdeu^i^ee^^ 

1  Viotn.n  qiKorore.  in  «mXv  n  hnng.     '  ^^f^^^^"^^^^,^,     %  peeus.      «  Fides.      »  Favor 
t&.lo.     5  To  \nre  credit  fi')-'",  '"l;;;- jj  ^^:^^^'o,   p  a    m  aff.rre.  to  give  pleasure.     )    To 
able.    io(Jenre.^oc.o«</no<.    /' ^  "' il'n  _^,,arV     is  Im.pporlQnus.     '6  l„terce8sio.     »'  7l> 
Biiniliilate.     i*  T»  propone  a  ImcWgam  ro^^ra.  ii 

foresee,    prffinoscore.  „ 

•  TrannUite  :  "  regard  o/  decency. 


166 


THE   PROXOUXS. 


slanders.  11  The  prfpfor  offers  to  thee  *willin£rly  both  assistance  ((^7)«( 
and  protection  {prae.vdiinn).  12.  Tlie  study  of  the  'ilebrew  lan<rn:iiro 
seems  to  be  neglected  bv  thee.  l;j.  The  cJnnnion  people  general Iv  ""is 
devoted  to  thee.  14.  Die  consul  directs  tlw^e  to  ''^execure  the  conspira- 
tors hy  the  axe.  l.">.  \\v  will  not  -"troul)le  thee  by  qu*'Stions  and  -'objec- 
tion.?. 10.  To  you,  O  soldiers,  the  -'taking  (,f  tlie  fortn-ss  is  as{*igned  by 
the  general.  17.  The  city  nnist  be  taki-n  by  you.  and  thr  fortress  by 
us.     18.  The  king  is  still  in  need  of  you,  and*  refuses  to  dismiss  you. 

TiiiHD  PEKSOX.  1.  Legatus  Capsareiu  adit,  eupie  niiliiuui  victori;im 
nuntiat.  2  Viros  niagnos  admir;"nuir,  eiscjue  siuiil(>s  lieri  studrnius, 
o.  Sernionem  Latinuni  scire  pulchruin  est,  sed  ejus  rudein  (if///nnfiit) 
esse  turpe  vidrtur.  4.  Veniani  ininncis  pr;ebrre  huni/Inum  Cst,  sed 
eos  aniilre  divinuin  videtur.  o.  Ciesar  legMtos  regis  liiteras  sil)i  osreiidere 
jubet.  0.  Cato  servum  se  gladio  iiitcrticere  jubet.  7.  Milites  oj»pi(lano- 
runi  donios  intrant,  eosque  auruni  argcntunupie  -'recondituin  sibi  tra- 
dere  cogunt.  8.  Atticus  Antoiiii  abseiitis  uxori  auxiliuni  offert,  eam(iuo 
pecunifi  et  consilio  adjuvat.  9.  Milites  Pers:'i  prouii.-^sa  Ix-ne  ISrordiintur, 
sed  is  eorum  inmienior  esse  vidrtur.  U).  Philippus  Th(ssali;e  ei\  itntea 
occupat,  sed  eas  iEtolis  restituere  cogitur.  11.  Hostes  naveni  pra^toriam 
siniul'aggrediuntur  eauKpa;  harpagonibus  capere  student.  12.  Philii)pi 
regis  legati  pacis  conimoda  m-atioiu'  -'-'subtlli  et  oallida  fexponunt.  Athe- 
nii'uses  vero  ea  decipi  neipuMint.  V).  Barbari  legiontvs  R  )inanas  acriter 
adoriuntur,  scmI  fortiter  ab  eis  repelluntur.  14.  (iaji  scelus  -grave  est, 
id(|ue  excusjlre  turpe  videtur. 

1.  You  cannot  be  unmindful  of  liim.  2.  We  often  are  in  need  of  her. 
{].  The  city  is  rebellious,  and  we  must  occupy  it  by  an  am])le  garrison. 
4.  llortensius  is  a  great  orator,  but  we  i)refer  Cicero  to  him.  5.  The 
leaders  know  the  secret  plans  of  the  commander,  but  we  are  ignortmt  of 
them.  0.  Lucretia  is  accused  of  -'^ixusoning,  and  the  jucig«'s  intend  to 
condemn  her.  7.  Thou  art  equal  (par)  to  the -'task,  but  I  cannot  ac- 
complish it.  8.  A  large  -''bril)e  is  ottered  to  (Jajus,  but  lie  cannot  be  •^in- 
duced  by  it.  9.  The  leaders  of  the  conspiracy  *'sue  for  an  amnesty,  but 
the  cliief  is  not  willing  to  grant  {lar(/lri)  it.  10.  The  occasion  is  -''favor- 
able, but  you  let  it  "-'escape.  11.  The  general  i>ermits  you  to  surrender 
the  city,  but  I  direct  you  to  delend  it.  12.  The  plans  of  (iajus  seem  to 
be  useful  to  the  king,  but  are  rejected  by  him.  l;].  The  enemies  sur- 
round us.  and  it  is  necessary  to  defeat  them.  14.  Both  mother  and 
daughter  are  sad,  but  we  try  to  console  them.  IT).  Life  is  a  gift  of  Uod, 
and  it  is  criminal  to  -^^lestroy  it.  IG.  The  conditicuis  of  jx'ace  are  ac- 
cepted by  the  general,  but  the  senate  resolves  to  reject  tliem.  17.  The 
troops  are  surrounded  by  tlangers,  and  it  seems  necessary  to  carry  help 
to  them.  18.  C;esar  allows  the  ambassadors  to  communicate  to  him  the 
pro|x)sitions  {p}-opo,sitnfn)  of  the  king.  19.  The  consul  compels  the 
kings  of  Nicomedia  and  Bithynia  to  accompany  him.  20.  A  lictor  is 
directed  by  Verres  to  bring  the  pictures  to  him.  21.  The  friends  of  the 
king  are  afraid  of  protecting  him.      22.  Sempronius  directs  a  slave  to 


»s  Ilibrfticiis.     »9  P(»rcutere.     20  Perturhire.     '*  Alterc.atio.     33  Kxpiiu'n.jtio.     2»  Hid- 
den.    '■^♦Subtle.    26s,.rioii».    26  v,.„^.ticium.    27  Qpu.-*.    ^"  },lerieA.    -•''/'<>  iniiuct,  m*>\tre. 
3"  To  iiUf'fi»-  an  anmexiy,  tran.siHte  :  to  Mfflc  an  anaieHty,  iuipunitatem  petere.     '*  Oppa" 
tumis.     «^  Prajteiire.    ssTullere.    •  Libens.    \ Explaiiu 


THE   PRONOUNS. 


167 


a^conceal  him.     23.  The  inljabif  nts    hosule  to  tl^ 

3.,eizo  and  deliver  him  to  the  Romany  fotei^s  ot  he  ^^ccuser  arl 

diiectsaslave  to  crown  her.     2.).   ihe  talseiiooub  oi 

manifest,  and  Cicero  tries  to  refute  them. 

a      OBJECTIVE   PIIllASES  TVITII  KEFLEXIYE  PRONOUNS. 

•     ^u-     9    r  T^rqise  mvself     3.  Thou  praisest  thyselt. 
1.  To  praise  one  s  sell.     ^-  f  prai^^  "^.^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^^        ^^^ 

4.  He   praises  himselt.     0.  ^^  «  Pf  ^^^    qTbe  ^'nclulgent  to  ones  self, 
selves.     7.  T^iey  1>^^^««  *^^7r\\V^-.Pif^^^artl^  to  thvself.     11. 

0.  I  am  indulgent  to  myselt.     i^'^^^^^^^^^^^^/i^jg.St  to  ourselves.     13. 
She  is  indulgent  to  herself.     12.    yS^,'^  "^^^^^^ 

You  are  indulgent  to  y'^,^rseh-es^    ^tJl^^An^^       mvself.     17.  They  are 
15.  To  be  unjust  to  ones  self     10.  lam  1^^^^^  ^^  themselves, 

unjust  to  themselves      18.  T  u>    the  women  J   .^    ^  ^^^     .^f    2I. 

19.  To  be  ^Mistrust tul  ot  one  s  sell      ~^-/.^",.^'„"  ^f  himself.     23. 

Thou  art  distrustful  ot  thyselt.     22.  ^^I'l^^^^^^^^  yourselves. 

We  are  distrustful  of  ourselves.     24.  ^'^^\J^^^  27. 

05.  They  are  distrustful  otthemselv.^.     ^^^' J^  ^^^^3^^  ^^yVXat!     31. 
1       4.        t       Osi     'I    w»n  retreatest.      ~9.   xle   reiliai».      "V.    y^ 

1  retreat.  ~«\ '''"^'J.'^^^' j^.^t  aS.  To  »burre,uler  to  tl.e  enemies,  ii. 
■V oil  retreat.  *'•'■,  ^ ""^^ '^^:'^'^'',-.,ri,„„  B,,ri-,nderest  to  the  enemies. 
1  surreii.ler  to  the  enemies.  So.  Tlioa  ,^"'  ""«^.^"'j  ,  ^„.  „„e-,  self. 
36.  They  surrender  to  the  ene,ni,.s.  .^' •  !_^  J;\.;',';,  >  ^o  otie's  self.  40. 
f-T^'"«*'":«'<='If  f,-^  'l„lU  bv  mvi."  &.  I  protect  myself 
IrS  T^:^  Uem'«-..ve:."'  ifshe  adiuires  hers-lf.  45.  '^^^-^^ 
and  clmdemnest  thyself.     4G.  Thoa  art  u.e.u^  t«    h^e   •     4 .   rhej   tree 

Thou  canst  not  ■'-'clear  thyself. 

D       SENTENCES   WITH  llEFLEXn'E   PKONOUN8. 

1.  Conjuratorum  numero  tne  -ascribere  nolo,  2.  ^f^^^^J^  ^^ 
gere  nec^.>      3.  Vestn  i.n..c^.>res  e^  ch3b^^^^ 

Btu<lio  me  ^addicere  volo.  o.  li.t  tgo  ^J^  ^^  ^^^  '  .p  ^oercere,  Antoni, 
6.  Et  nobis  et  vobis  contrarn  ^«^«  ^^^^^^^"(^^i^.  "  .^  Octavianum  sibi 
,,equis.  8.  «Vf-^f;;^^-;:|nMSisi(^eT^;-ta  est.  T-  Sese 
conciliare  studet  10  ^  J^^j^^  1,^.'^  ^necle^^^  defendere  ac  tuen  posse 
cubernare  difficile  est.     12.  C^ivitatts  vjr<»e  lecriitos   se  co- 

fulentur  13.  ^'^^^^ZS^^^^^  ii^tu^^e  r^nov.re  pre 
^;h'r^t''.vsarVSt"X trate   eo,it.^7.   Sui   oblltum   esse 

' T      i  s^Ap^nsator       3'   To  he  indidgpnt,  iudulirere. 


3..  rr,/».wi- .■••."  ;■;,■"■;:;■[,•  -V-jre""' To  a.\.l.  '"  To  «Ha.li  .  "  Tc 
r.?:.:''^^;'' FoVgeSuT-^^T^^crcC  ..  ■^'^n.ii,  sc  subun.tere.  «.  A.Utr.ao.. 
»0  Inhciiis. 


168 


DETERMINATIVE    ADJECTIVES. 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


1G9 


the  soul  and  froodom  {varviUiM)  of  foar.  4.  I  will  not  injure  myself  hy 
rash  words.  5.  Thou  canst  save  thyself  and  tlie  army  l»y  a  timely  ^'re« 
treat.  0.  Thou  seemest  to  be  forgetful  of  thyself,  O  «laughter!  7.  Thou 
seemest  to  deny  to  thyself  the ''-happiness  of  a  ''\lomestie  life.  8.  It  is 
necessary  to  preserve  tliyself  to  the  country.  9.  We  wish  to  allow  to 
ourselves  a  short  ^^relaxation  of  the  mind.  1(1.  By  tlie  su(hlen  ehanufea 
(clcis.sitrido)  of  public  affairs  we  must  become  distrustful  of  ourselves. 
11. ''You  are  neirlectful  of  vourselves,  and  '■'abandon  vourselves  to  sloth 
{(le}<idi(i).  12.  You  suffer  yourselves  to  be  defeated  by  an  ^'■'indifferent 
gt>ni'ral.  13.  To  consign  (tntdcn)  one's  self  to  the  -''oblivion  of  ''""pos- 
terity is  absurd.  14.  The  troops  commit  {ithind'ire)  thems.'lvfs  to  flight. 
15.  Theniistocles  commits  (^v>y//>>///'/<';Y)  himself  to  the  faith  of  the  king 
of  the  Persians.  10.  It  is  disgraceful  to  abandon  oncjs  self  to  ''''licen- 
tiousness.  17.  The  queen  ""'attaches  to  herself  the  ^'hearts  of  the  citi- 
z<'ns  by  incredible  '''profusion.  18.  The  king  tries  to  reconcile  to  hini- 
Belf  the  favor  of  the  Konmn  senate  and  i)eople.  19.  The  law  forbids  the 
citizens  to  '••^attach  themselves  to  secret  societies.  20.  The  consuls 
prevent  the  ambassadors  of  the  king  from  showing  themselves  to  the 
people. 


LKSSON    XXXIl. 

CLASSIFICATION    AND    INFLECTION    OF    FORM 

ADJECTIVES. 

SECTION   I. 
Determinative  Adjecth^es. 

*   •§  !999.   1.  All   adjectives   are  divided  into  descrtptive   and 
|]QRM-AD.iECTiVES.     Tlio  foHiier  cxprcss   ideas  of  th(Mr   mvji,  while 


the  latter  merely  refer  to  certain  ffeneraLideas.     The  latter  have 


in  common  with  the  former  their  granmiatieal  form,  whence  their 
name.  Thus  the  foriii^adjecti ve  thUitow t a i ns  no  idea  of  its  own, 
such  as  we  express  for  instance  by  the  descri|)tive  adjective  <7oo</, 
but  it  refers  us  to  the  general  idea  of  place^  l)y  whieii  the  noun, 
to  which  it  belongs,  is  distinguished  from  other  things  or  persons 
of  the  same  class. 

Rem.  1,   All   adjectives,   considered   hitherto,   are   descriptive.      The 
iJiBM-AuiiitTiVES   generally  arc  classified  among  the  PHonouns 

»'  Rcfrressus.  69  Felicitas.  «3  Doinepticus.  «<  Rolaxfttlo.  o»  To  nhandon  onf'n  nelf, 
8e  (U'dere.  »6  Mediocris.  67  Oblivio.  »»  Posteritas.  *"  Libld<».  «o  DevincTrc.  «>  Ani- 
uins.      82  Largiiio.     •»  A(l.junj,'ora. 


the^nnniiiH!^ns.Ciaii"g  ^V"^  ptionomixal  ^3B£|^^f -  "L ^fg^ 
TTVi^^IwN^^ur^while  giher  grammarmns  assert,  iliat  thejc  is  a 
dt5ThTrtlon-t)etween  thestTterms,  whiaahey  however  tail  to  state. 

^  §  310.  2.  The  form-adjectives   are   used   as   attributes   of 

nouns^'witll  which  they  form  attributive  phrases.     They,  like  the 

de^j-iptivc  adjectives,  agree  with  their  ^ov^iing  nouns  in  gender, 

i^JIlH^cTIIId  case.     Form-adjectives^^erally^cannot  bej^edj)rc: 

dicativeh'.  .  .        n        ^ 

— f^Tl .  3.  The  form-adjectives  are  divided  mto  five  classes  : 

1    DCTFHMl'xATn^E,    2.    Nu^iERAL,    3.   QUANTITATIVE,    4.   QUALITATIVE,  ^ 

5  I'^^^^TJ^^E      Each  of  these  classes  appears  in  four  different 
forms  :    l.'Thc  interrogative,  2.  The  definite,  3.  The  indefinite, 

4.  TTTc'REirvrTv^.;)  , 

The  interrogative  form  comprises  those  adjectives,  by  wliicn 
we  ask  a  question,  referring  to  the  general  idea  of  their  class. 
The  definite  form  gives  a  cejiain,  and  the  indefinite  form  an  un- 
certain  answer  to  the  question.  The  relative  combines  the  pro- 
perties of  an  adjective  and  aconjiinction.  It  always  assumes  in 
the  Latin  laug^^e  the  j^nj^of  "the  interrogativc^ljectives. 

Th^^ni'^^^  -»-^  knowledge  Jf  dependent  sentences, 

win  not  be  t^eparaicly  considered  for  the  present. 

^  •Jl*2.  -i.  The  detenniuative  adjectives  refer  to  the  INDIVIDUAL- 
ITY o7  things  or  persons.  They  are  distinguished  by  a  peculiar  iii- 
flectior:,  whicli  often  shows  the  earliest  forms  of  the  Latin  cases. 
Rem.  3.  The  chief  pecnliarities  in  the  inflection  of  the  determinative 
adjectives  are  the  following  :  ^-.„  „^^ 

i  In  almost  all  of  them  the  genitive  and  dative  sinoular  are 
of  COMMON  GENDER,  the  g.nitive  having  the  tennination  ms  o.  jus, 
and  the  dative  the  termination  i  for  all  three  genders. 

2  In  most  determinative  adjectives  the  nominative  and  ACCUSA- 
TIVE singular  of  the  neuter  gender  have  the  termination  d. 

-?    The  other  cases  gi'nerally  assume  the  terminations  of  the  MOV- 
ABLE adjectives,  but  l>mewhat  modified  in  several  ^«^«^^f ->"-,;; 
these  adjectives.     The  interrog ATI VES  of  this  class  in  dativ  e  an<l 
Au.  viMVE  I'lA  RAI.  take  the   termination   of  the   third   declension 
Vjus  in  good  i)rose. 

8 


/ 


170 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


§  943.  5.  The  iilterro^'alive  form  of  tlie  delermiim 
tive  adjectives  consists  of  tlie  words  Quis  (qui)  and  aler.  They 
are  thus  inflected  *  : 


SINGULAR. 


n.URAL. 


N.  Qfiis,  which,  what;  qui,  what  a,  N.  Qui,  quae,  quae,  which,  wliat 


Fem.  quae.  Neuter  quod 
G.    cujus,   of  which,    of    what,   of 

wiiat  a 
T>.  cui,  to  wliich,  &c. 
A.  quern,  quam,  quod,  wliich,  &c. 
A.  quo,  qua,  quo,  by  which,  &c. 


Q.    quorum,    quarum,    quorum,  oi 

wliich,  of  wliat 
D.  quibus,  to  wliich,  &c.     - 
A.  quoft,  quax,  quae,  wliich,  &c. 
A.  quibua,  by  which,  &c. 


N.    Uter,   utra,  iitrum,   which  (of 

two) 
O.  utrlus,  of  which,  kc. 
D.  utri,  to  which,  &c. 
A.  utrum,  ntram,  utrum,  which,  &c. 
A.  utro,  utrd,  utro,  which,  «S:c. 


N.  Utri,  iitrae,  utra,  which,  &c. 
like  sacer  §  51. 


Kem.  4.  The  nominatives  quis  and  qvi  are  so  distiniruished,  that  hyqjfis, 
which,  we  ask  for  the  thini,'  or  person  it.sc/f,  but  by  qui  for'  their 
qutdities.  'I'hus  by  asking  Quih  scriptor?  (which  writer,  what 
writer),  we  expect  the  name  of  the  writer,  or  n  demonstrative  as 
an  answer.  Hut  by  asking  i^ui  srriptor  ?  (what  a  writer),  we  inquire 
for  the  QUALITIES  of  the  writer,  expecting  such  an  answer  as  .scrip- 
tor  accurdtus,  Oraecus,  vetus.  This  distinction  is  not  made  in  any 
of  the  other  cases,  nor  in  any  gender  but  the  MAS(  uline. 

Rem.  5.  Uter  always  must  be  used  instead  of  quis  or  qui,  when  no  more 
than  two  things  or  persons  are  meant,  even  if  in  English  the  adili- 
tion  "of  two"  is  not  made.  Thus  in  speaking  of  two  ])oets,  the 
question  *'  Which  j)o(t  do  you  prefer?  is  translated  hv  "' Utrum  (iio\. 
queiti)  poctani  priKfrtisf 

If  we  employ  the  addition  "  of  tiro  "  in  English,  the  student  must 
not  be  induced  by  the  P]nglish  plural,  to  use  this  number  also  in 
Latin,  as:  Which  tf  tJie  itco  icriters,  "  utir  scriptor,  not  utii  sc/ip- 
tores."  The  tluijal  of  f/ter  is  used  only,  if  its  g(jverning  noun  is  a 
plurale  tantum.  or  if  we  speak  of  two  paktiks,  as:  ^7/v^  nuptiae, 
wliich  of  the  two  weddings;  utrae  parttH,  which  of  the  two 
parties. 

Rem.  G.  For  the  neuter  form  quid  see  Book  III  (absolute  adjectives). 

§  d  J:4.   0.  The  determinative  adjectives  of  the  definite  form 
are  called  cleillOimtralivr    ailjrctives   (conmionly  de- 


♦  Whon  in  the  followinsr  paradijrms  three  forms  an»  nifntionod  urMlt-r  the  same  rasp,  tlie 
flrst  beluiiffs  t<»  tli«  MASCULINB,  the  second  to  the  femimxk,  and  tlie  third  to  the  meutkb 
geuder.     When  a  case  has  one  fynn  only,  it  belongs  to  all  three  genders. 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


in 


nnvorss^      They  arc:  hie,  this;  iUe  and  isle,  that; 
idem,  tlie  same  ;  ip^,  sell.  .  -^  jg  oftciL 

Besides  these  t^e  ^-^;l^^^U  by  a  relative. 
I  i„  place  of  ^Ue,  '^^^^  ^^^,,  ,„  thus  dccW : 

o    '^     *    *  PLURAL. 

BIKOU^AK.  ^^  ^.    ^^^^^  ^^^^^^^   ^^^^^^ 

N.  Ili^,  ''«^<^'  '!''^'  ^^''^  ,      G.  Jiorum,  harum,  horum,  of 

(i.  hujus,  of  this  ^i^pgg 

D.  huic,  to  this  ^  U    j^^^  ^^  ^hese 

A.  Jiunr,  hanr,  hoc,  tins  i       ^^^^^  ^^_^^^  ^^^^^^  ^^^.g^ 

A.  hoc,  hac,  Iwc,  by  tins  ^   /,|^,  by  these. 


N.  IUe,  ilia,  iUud,  that 

G.  ilH'i-%  of  that 

D.  m,  to  that 

A  ilium,  illnm,illud,ni^i 

A.  Ulo,  ilia,  illo,  by  that 


IN.  Illi,  illae,  iUa,  those 

1g.  illOrnm,  Ularum,  illdrum,  of 

those 
Id   ilU-%  to  those 
I  A.  illos,  illa.%  ilia,  those 

lA.  illi^,  ^>y  t^os«- 


SIMGUT.A11 

N.  Idem,  eadem, 'idem,  Oag  same 

G.  ejusdem,  of  the  same 

D.  eldem,  to  the  same  ,,^,Jo   Isdem  {eisdem,  iisdem) 

A.  eundem,  ^--^-'!' '^^^'t'^he  ^mc  ^'  esdeL  ea.lem,  eadem 
A.  6(^dtm,ec-aZ.m,cWtm,by  thesamo^A.  e^^^^  (^.,,^,,riAisdeni). 


PLURAL. 

N.   Idem  {eldem,  ildem),  eaed^m, 
'  eadem  .  ^ 

G.  eorundem,  earundem,  eorundem 


Ia*.  isdem  {eisdem,  iisdem). 


N.  Jp-'^e,  ipxa,  ipsum,  —  self 

G.  ips'ius,  of  —  self 

D.  ipsi,  to  —  self 

A.  ip^um,  ipsam,  ip^->fm,  -  seir 

A.  ip»o,  ipsa,  ipso,  by  —  self 


N   Ipsi,  ipsae,  ipsa,  -  selves 

G.  ipsorum.,  ipsdriim,  ipsorum,  oi  ■ 

Bclves 
D.  iP'^i-^,  to  -  selves 

A.  ipsos,  ipsas,  ipsa,—  selves 

A.  ipsis,  by  —  selves 


being  ]>^v><'''^  to  tlie  bix^ai^^' 

ous  sense.  .       .     ^^^„ ,,,....; on  with  a  NOUN  is  rendered  either 

the  emphalical  particles     luy    ^"^ 


■■■■M 


172 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


173 


SINGULAR. 

N.  Ipse  consul,  the  consul  hiiiisolf,  tJio  very  consul,  even  tlie  consul. 

U.  Ips'iKu  co/isuUti,  of  tliu  consul  himself,  of  liie  very  consul,  even  of  the 

consul. 
D.  fpsi  cohtiuli,  to  the  consul  himself,  to  the  very  consul,  even  to  the 

consul,  &c. 

PLURAL, 

N.   Ipsi  ron.mlcs,  the  consuls    themselves,  the  very  consuls,  even  the 
consuls. 

G.  Ipsonim  consnlum,  of  the  consuls  themselves,  of  the  very  consuls, 

even  of  the  consuls. 
D.  Tpsin  coiisulihus,  to  the  consuls  themselves,  to  the  very  consuls,  even 

to  the  consuls,  kc. 

Thus  in  the  feminine:  Tpm  filia,  the  dauirhtor  herself,  «S:c..  whs  ipsa, 
the  city  itself,  «S:c.  ;  and  in  the  neuter  :  Ipsmn  hi  Hum,  war  itself,  kc 

Ipxe  also  is  used  as  an  attribute  of  ^ll02^ou^'S,  as  Cfjo  ipse,  tu  ipse  kc 
For  this  connection  see  i^  271),  280. 

§  210.  8.  The  iiiflefilliic  form  of  tlie  determinative 
adjectives  leaves  the  individuality  of  persons  or  tliiniz:s  more  or  less 
uncertain.  These  adjectives  comprise  tlic  different  expressions 
for  the  English  terms  aonie,  any,  each,  other,  no  (none).  They 
are  the  following  : 

1.  E(iuivalents  of  some  : 

AUqxis  {(ftiqui),  quidam,  and  the  rarer  qui^piam,  some; 
7ioiinulli  (pi.  t.),  several. 

2.  Eijuivalents  of  any  : 
Quisquam  and  nUus.  any  ; 

vter  and  ulte enter,  either  (that  is  amj  of  two). 

3.  Equivalents  of  each  : 

Q'lisqne,  each,  every,  'Uterquc,e2iv\\  of  two,  both,  and  the  compounds 

with  vis  and  Hhet  : 
Quids  and  qnVihit.  any  you  please,  every  jwssible  ; 
C/ir(7*^w  and  uU  rlibet,  either  you  please.  * 

4.  E(iuivalents  of  other  : 

Alius,  another  ;  oltn-,  the  other  ;    the  plural  ceteri,  the  others,  and 
rcliquus,  the  rest  of. 

5.  Ecjuivalents  of  no  : 
Nemo  and  unllus,  no  ; 
Neuter,  neither  (none  of  two). 

9.  These  words  are  tlni.s  inflected  : 

§24  7.  Tlie  compounds  of  <///As' (y^//)  and  vter  infl(>ct  these 
m)rds  only,  while  their  prefixes  and  suffixes  remain  nnclianged. 
Allqais  makes  the  nom.  sing.  fem.  and  nom.  and  acc.  neutek  plur. 


a  ,,h.raniuml..i%  w^^kcs  the  >.e.  tor  </       y  ^.^Ue  the  mascu- 

,„e  latter  is  used  absolutely  o.'b  (  ««   S     ^^,)^  ^^^_^^  ^^  ,,o^  ^  ) 
,„.„  ,,as,ua,n  may  be  ^^^J^  ^,  ,^,„-,  ,.,<i  uter.    For  the 

neuters  m  quul  m^i^taa  ui  ^  i 

Paradigms. 


SINGULAR. 

N.     AliquiB,  aliqua,  aliquod 
G.     alicujus 

D.     alicui  , 

A     aliqaem.  aliquam,  ahquod 
A.    ali(iuo,  aliqtiri,  ahquo 

G.    cujusdam 

A.    quondum,    quandam,    quod- 

dam  * 

A.    quodam,  quadam,  quodani 


rLTJRAL. 
N.     aliqui,  aliqufc,  aliqua 
Q.     aliquorum,    aliquarum,    au- 

quorum 
D.     aliqiiibus 

A.     aVupios,  aliquas,  aliqua 
A.    aliquibus.  , 

i~^idam,  quoedam,  qunodam 
G.     quorundam,  quarundam,  &tc. 
D.    quibusdam 

A.    quosdam,  quasdam,  quoedam 
A.     quibusdam. 


iTuterque.  utraque,  utrumque 

G.    ntriusciue 

D     utilque 

A.    utvum-iue,  utramque,  utrum- 

que 
A.     utroque,  utraque,  utroque 


N.    utrlque,  utramque,  utraque,  &<l 
like  uter. 


each  without  ex- 


aiura,n  ntnnn.)  ^^^^^,^,.  ^^^^^ 

§  248.  The  words  ahus,  «"^;-  J"  ''',  ^,,.„,ai„g  to  §  242, 
,Ju.  gcnUives  in  i..  and  ^^^^'^J^.::  ;„  „«  genitive  drops 
11.  3,  without  d>stu,ct,on  ^[S^2l^.^^■,,,  (aUl).  AUer  retams 
on.  i  (alias),  but  «*^"'i"* '"  *^/2  ?  ^^Juter  drops  the  e 

r '  -^'''■^t;.?rr:n^«t;andi"-^^-'-^«- 


174 


DETERMINATIVE    ADJECTIVES. 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


175 


lius.     Ill  all  otlier  forms  these  words  are  declined  like  movable 
adjectives  (§  40,  51),  except  that  alius  makes  allud,  not  allum^ 

in  NOM.  it  ACC.  SING.  NEUTER. 

§  tJ  10.  Nemo  is  used  in  the  sino-iilar  only,  and  declined  like 
the  noun  homo  (stem  nemin),  but  in  classical  lanp^uage  it  lacks 
the  GENITIVE  and  ablative,  which  cases  are  supplied  by  7niUus 
(G.  nuUlus,  I),  nemini,  A.  neminem^  Ab.  nidlo).  It  can  be 
connected  with  nouns  of  masculine  gender  only,  lldlquus  and 
the  plural  ceterl  are  declined  like  moval)le  adjectives. 

§  SoO.  10.  Those  indefinite  adjectives,  which  have  the  same 
English  equivalents,  are  thus  distinguished  from  each  other  : 

1.  AU<iuls  denotes  an  uncertain,  but  quidam  a  certain  per 
son  or  thing,  which  the  author  cannot  or  will  not  mention, 
Quhpiam  can  be  used  in  certain  connections  only.  See  p.  5j9, 
R.  4. 

Rem.  12.  Qnidam  generally  is  rendered  by  "a  certain''  if  thisexjires- 
sion  is  used  in  a  geiitaal  sense,  as  Athenienids  quidam,  a  certain 
Athenian. 

2.  A?}!/  with  feminine  and  neuter  nouns,  and  in  the  plural  with 
nouns  of  all  genders,  must  be  translated  by  uUhs,  not  by  qulsquam. 
With  MASCULINES  iu  the  singular  idhis  must  be  used,  if  the  noua 
denotes  a  thing.  l>ut  with  masculine  nouns,  denotini»*  persons. 
quisquam  generally  is  used  instead  of  idlas^  and  always,  if  the 
noun  is  national,  as  : 

Gallns  quUqifam,  any  Gaul,  pJiiJosopJii  ryjuf<qnam,  of  any  philoso- 
pher •  but:  liber  ullu8,faiiiiia  alia,  acdus  ultum. 

3.  Kemo  has  the  same  relation  to  nidlns,  as  qffisqtiam  to 
nllfis.  Thus  neiuo  (except  in  the  genitive  and  ablative)  is  used 
before  personal  masculine  nouns  in  the  singular,  while  with  fem- 
iNiNEs,  with  nouns,  denoting  things,  and  with  all  kinds  of  nouns 
in  the  plural,  nullffs  must  be  used,  as  : 

Liher  vullus,  no  lx)ok,  homines  nidli,  no  men,  feminu  nulla,  no  wo 
man,  scriptoris  nuUlua,  of  no  writer,  a  Hcnpttn'c  nitUo,  bv  no  writer 
but :  neuw  ncriptor,  no  writer,  Atheidenaem  ncminem,  no  Atheniua. 

4.  Uterque,  whose  English  equivalent  hofh  always  has  its 
noun  in  the  plural,  must  be  placed  with  its  noun  in  the  singular 
in  Latin.     It  is  placed  in  the  plural,  if  its  noun  is  a  plurale  tan* 


utnmqiieiyartcs,h^^\^V^^'^;^-  ^^^^   distinguished:     1. 

5.  The   ciuivalents   of      «  ''«  ^  jf  t^e  question  is  be- 

..  Tke  olher^^  i«  the  ^•^-'-•^^«  ^^^"^^  ^^S  the  pluV  by  ceteri, 

twecn  two  only)  is  rendered  J.^  ^"    ',1  arlores,  the  other  trees, 
as  :  «tora  wiw,  the  other  tiec    tet  ^,^^     ,^^..^,_ 

.ithout  an  article)  are  ^^-^^ ^'  I  heU^J.us  answers 

«„o,her  land;  «/"'«  '''"■^'^j!^Zv   Z'' ot/-''''  ''''''"   ''"^"''' 
to  the  English  "  the  rest   of      o  _    ^^^^  ^.^^^  ^^  ^,,^ 

„.,„„s,  denoting  .luant.ties      .  .  i  J ./  »    J       ^^^^  ^^,^^^  ^^^^^^ 

placed  hKfore  the  governing  "«""^-  »^  ;^  ^^,,  ^p,  ,ara) 

S.aliaMtanaorfOrtanaalm'&c. 

EXERCISES. 

•1    9     o    Wliicb    commander.'     o- 
IsTEnuoGATrvES.      t .  W''»-  ^f!^^:^ ,-  5   Which  of  the  two  sol- 

Tof  which  «■;    la  or  which  <^;>';,XoV;lrrtwo  panels.    |. 
V     90    To  ^vbat   cbild  •'     j\-   ^o    ^^"        ^^    «4    ^Vllat  sea  ('/&;.)"  -^^; 

%Vhich  (-Vy.)  of  the  two  m-cUac^s  -0  ^  ^.^^^ ,  ,2»- /J  "I'^.^'S  o 
«7  liy  whidi  situation  .'  -»■  "f ,  o^j^  j^q  bodu-s?  ^?^1^-V "',.,, 
i;:i,^„Mciihand.^^ 

What  burd.-us  {c'bj.)  '.     44,   \>  3    .j,,,;,  g  «t.    4. 

DKMOs-sTK.vTtVKS      1    ■l-ht.stone       -.  llu.     ^    ^,j^^  -nte  oner.    8. 

That  u.ouutaiu.     ^   11'^  ^;:>,,^  ,^,,t.     10.  The  very  wound^    H  Jh, 
■       The  Buuie  ..ege.    ^^-XTl^^^l     l^-  Of  thiB  accident.     14.  Ol 


I 


176 


DETERMINATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


oath.     15.  Of  tliatold  man.     10.  Of  tiat  diadom.     17.  Of  that  shavery 
18.  Of  tlio  same  licir.     1!).  Of  tlio  saiuo  niuht.     20.  Of  the  vcrv  inilk. 


21.  Of  oven 
this  ori«i:in. 
same  herd, 
heart   itself 
^rove  {(>bj.). 


tlio  lion.  22.  Of  jiain  its.lf  2;}.  To  this  hous<'.  24.  To 
2.'>.  To  that  inhtiitunce.  2<;.  To  tliat  imai:e.  27.  To  the 
28.  To  the  same  Ijojh?.  2!>.  To  tlie  vcrv  armv.  :i(l.  'I'o  tlie 
;}1.  This  fountain  (ohj,).  32.  This  axe  (ohj.)  38.  This 
.  .  ,  34.  Tliat  tire  {obj.).  3.").  1'hat  tower  {objX  :U\.  Tliat  i>o«mu 
{ohj.}.  -57.  Tlie  same  month  (ohj.).  3S.  The  same  fever  {f;bj.).  3J».  The 
ship  itself  {ohj.).  40.  Hy  the  Siime  ranal.  41.  Bv  tins  fire.  42.  Bv  this 
defeat.  43.  By  that  stream.  44.  By  that  authority.  4.>.  Bv  the*  very 
root.  4(j.  By  the  senate  itself.  47!  These  attacks.  48.  These  voices. 
4!).  These  rights.  50.  Those  kinds.  51.  Tiiose  hills.  52.  Thos(^  houses. 
53.  The  same  valleys.  54.  The  same  i)airs.  55.  'J'he  sam<'  armies.  50. 
The  very  taxes.  57.  Of  these  songs.  5S.  Of  these  showers.  50  Of 
these  geese. ^^  GO.  Of  these  pains.  61.  Of  those  defeats.  ()2.  Of  tlie 
same  arts.  03.  Of  the  same  young  men.  04.  Of  the  very  mistakes.  (15. 
Even  of  calamities.  00.  To  tliese  lakes.  07.  To  th<.se  oxen.  (;s.  To 
the  same  republics.  00.  Even  to  the  f<x)t-soldiers.  70.  These  journevs 
{<>f>J.).  71.  These  cohorts  (ohj.).  72.  Th.'se  armies  {ob}.).  73.  Those  uiglits 
{obj).  74.  Those  country-seats  (^V/;.).  75.  The  same's» «ats  (^V/j.).  70.  The 
same  cushi(.ns  (/>/;;.).  77.  Even  young  men  (obj.).  78.  The  very  shii»8 
{obj.).  70.  By  th.se  old  men.  Xi).  By  those  gfxls.  81.  By  the  saiiie  god- 
de.sses.     82.  By  the  brothers  themselves. 

Indefinites.  1.  Some  slave.  2.  Some  ship.  3.  Some  work.  4.  A 
certain  priest.  5.  A  certain  city.  6.  A  certain  gift.  7.  Any  soldier. 
8.  Any  flower.  9.  Any  inheritance.  10.  Any  danger.  11.  Everv  virtue. 
12.  Each  king.  13.  Every  crime.  14.  Both  names.  15.  Both  lions. 
16.  Both  legions.  17.  Every  possible  lawsuit.  18.  Any  ])o«Mn  vou 
please.  10.  Either  law  you  please.  20.  Another  heir.  21.  Another 
head.  22.  The  other  commander.  23.  The  other  age.  24.  No  patri- 
cian. 25.  No  state.  20.  No  spring.  27.  Neither  sister.  28.  Neither 
knee.  20.  Of  some  cause.  30.  Of  a  certain  woman.  31.  Of  any  Bo 
num.  32.  Of  any  moimtaiu.  3:5.  Of  everv  <jccasion.  34.  Of  both  ord.rs 
35.  Of  every  pos.sibh;  name.  30.  Of  anoiher  lield.  37.  Of  the  other 
treaty.  38.  Of  no  Latin.  39.  Of  neither  brother.  40.  To  some  house 
41.  To  any  deity.  42.  To  uny  Jew.  43.  To  each  part.  44.  To  anv  city 
you  please.  45.  To  another  art.  40.  To  the  other  hand.  47.  to  no 
knight.  48.  To  no  journey.  40.  Sonvi  favor  ('^6/).  50.  Anv  river  (o/yy ) 
51.  Every  robber  {ohj.),  52.  Both  feet  {oh}.).  53.  Another  ware  {obj.).  54. 
Ihe  other  side  {obj.).  55.  No  clihf  (.6/.).  5^;.  No  night  {obj.).  57.^  Bv 
some  accident.  58.  By  a  certain  difhcultv.  50.  Bv  anv  pain.  (»0.  By 
every  hel[).  01.  By  either  house  you  ph'lis(\  (;2.  *Bv  !)oth  lan-ua'-vs 
63.  By  another  fir»'.  04.  By  the  other  order.  05.  Bv  the  rest  of  "the 
money.  00.  By  no  inhabitant.  07.  Bv  no  nation.  08.  Bv  neither  con- 
sul. 09.  Somt!  soldiers.  70.  Certain  rol)bers.  71.  Several  arguments. 
72.  Any  Athenians.  73.  Other  reasoin.  74.  The  other  kinds.  75.  No 
hostages.  7().  Of  some  l)oats.  77.  Of  certain  ships.  78.  Of  several 
mistakes.  79.  Of  any  leaders.  80.  Of  both  i)arties.  81.  Of  the  other 
kings.  82.  Of  other  pleasures.  83.  Of  no  fortresses.  84.  To  certain 
conditions.  85.  To  any  verses.  86.  To  other  things.  87.  To  othei 
questions.     88.  To  no  images.      89.  Some   nations   {oi>j.).     90.  SeveraJ 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


177 


roots  W.).    91.  Any  customs  W.).  ^'^^'^^'^(^.'^y^ 
S'^^^T    5^  iJher  ri^t^i^s!-    ^  ^  the  other  chie^priests. 
£  uo  defeais.  *  100.  By  both  vacations. 


99. 


LESSOR  XXXllI. 

F  OHM-ADJECTIVES. 
SECTION  II.-NUJIERAL  ADJECTIVES. 

o  .-.-.-.    1    XrvFK^is  are  divided  iuto  cardiii."»!,  ordi- 

§  3.»-3.  1-  •^.Vi™^^  ....i,,^  numerals.     Tlie  Cardiuals  repre- 

-"^  '"r  "  'Tt^^nTa^b:   ;:^  «g  toTnLerical  OHO..  Tl.e 

""'"*■  •      f  „11  numeral»  sec  X.  of  the  Vocabularies.  ThU 

Kem  1.  For  a  synopsis  of  all  numerau  si^ 
synoiisis  mist  be  committed  to  memorj. 

CARDINALS. 
I.   Simple  Cabdisals. 
5  o^3    o   The  Cardinal  Numerals  are  either  simple  car- 

^  *•*    ••  t,  in  the  iudeclinabTe  ,.lurale  UntumqxotM^  m=^"y  ? 

„..„,  nations   ^.^  ^^^^^,^^  ^^^^  ^^^.^^^  ,)   ,,^^^ 

S  --•*•'•  ^«,.oU  fnf  SO  many,  and  totiaem, 

eViiiaUe  .K>to>-..u.nv.  n„m    a^s  .^^^^^^^^^^ 

just  so  (as)  many ;  2)  of  the  dean  p^^iin^ble  are  only 

^riiey  are  ,luralia  -^;""; ^7".^  more  than  one  liun- 

£r:dtr:;!ti"ro::ias^^^^^^^^ 


178 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


N.  Trcs.  tria 

a.  triiiiu 

1).  tribus 

A.  tris  (tres  postdamcal),  tria 

A.  tribus. 


Unvs  forms  the  compound  iinnfiquinqyie,  earli  oiio,  in  "vvliiHi  both 

unus  and  qiiit<quc  are  intiected.     Duo  and  tres  are  thus  declined: 

N.     Duo,  dufP,  duo 

G.     duorum,  (lu<lruni,  duorum 

D.     duobus,  duabus,  dur)l)us 

A.     duo  (duos),  (kiuis,  duo 

A.     duclbu.s,  duilbus,  duobus. 

Auiho,  both,  is  declined   like  duo.     An/bo  is  thus  distinirnished 

from    utcrqiie,  that  the  former  means  hoth  totjcthery  but  the  hittfi 

each  of  them  tfingli/. 

Rem.  3.  The  numerals,  expressing  more  than  one  hundred,  are  declined 

like  movable  adjectives,  as  ducc/iti,  ducentete,  dnrenta  ;    (}.  dncento- 

rum,  duceiiturum,  ducentdrum,  dx.     The  numerals,  exprt^ssing  moro 

than  one  thousand,  are  2^hrffsefi,  formed   by   one   of   the   smaller 

imnurals  as  attributes,  and  the  numeral  noun  uiiJI'ta  as  governinij^ 

word.     'J1ie  latter  is  of  neutek  gendeh,  and  declined  after  tho 

third  declension   like  the  plural  of  a  neuter  in  the  vowel-elass  ((V. 

millium,  D.  <k  Ah.  miUihus,  Arc.  miUvf).     The  attributive  numerals, 

which  nuiy  be  both   definite  and  indefinite,  either  jtrecede  or  follow 

the   word  uti/liei,  and  such  of  them,  as  are  declinable,  must  agree 

with  it  in  gender  and  case,  as : 

Duo  millia  or  millia  duo,   two  thousand;   trecenta  millia  or 

millia  trecenta,  oOO.OOO  ; 
muUa  m\\\\i\,  uiaiti/  ■thoi(f>i(nd  {G.  duorum  millium  or  millium 
duorum,  &:c.). 

Rem.  4.  The  nouns,  connected  with  numerals  from  2000  upward,  are  in 
Latin  always  i)laced  in  the  genitive  tlckal,  being  cf)nsidered  as 
ATTKIBT'TES  of  the  governing  noun  millia.  The  arrangement  of 
these  ])hrases  is  fourfold,  as: 

2000  .Wf//V/',v,  duo  militum  millia,  r>;'  militum  millia  duo,  <>r  duo 
millia   militum,  or  millia  militum  duo;    /'//  10.000  inen,  diH\n\\ 
hominummilibus,  r>/'  hominum  millibus  decern,  or  decern  millibus 
hominum,  (tr  millibus  hominum  decern. 
Rem.  5.  The  numeral  iidUe  is  an  iu'leclinable  ad.tecttve,  and  is  used  oi 
one  thousand  only,  its  governing   noun  alone  being  declined,  as: 
oppida  rnille,  G.  oppidnrum  inille,  D.  oppidis  miUe.     But  in  the  nom. 
and  ACC.  7)dlle  sometimes  occurs  as  a  substantive,  having  its  noun 
in  the  genitive  pujkae,  lik«'  millia,  as  vnUe  h(>miini)n,  1000  men. 
Rem.  0.  The  compound  numerals  [that  is  81,  40,  5:5,  0(5,  702,  &c.]  gen- 
erally are  expressed  by  cooHDINATIon,  according  to  the  following 
rules : 

1.  From  20  to  100  the  larger  number  either  precedes  without  r/!, 
or  ft illows  with  et,  as :  rifjinti  tn  s or  treK  et  n'f/i/tti.  In  comi)oun(ls  with 
o//f' the  numeral  //////.<?  remains  in  the  siNcuii.VK.  agreeing  with  ita 
noun  in  ca.^e  and  gender  only,  as:  51  women,  ftininae  qninqnafjiuta 
una  ;  21  cities,  oppida  uintm  et  riginti. 

2.  In  numerals  over  100  the  larger  number  always  prec(^es, 
either  without  or  with  tt,  which  is  ])laced  immediat«'ly  after  the 
larger  number,  as :  'Soii,  trtccnti  qainquayinta  sex;  lVo2,  miUe  {ct] 
%excenti  triginta  duo. 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


179 


3   u  n.no.aU  aenof.ng  .«ore  t.an  one  JOOO,  -  ^HK 

latter,  ,md  c.m,.ot  be^"-;^*;  J^ruction,  and  ^^J^^Xf^„uau„^), 
the  case,  rwiuiretl  oj  i  ^^^.^-^^  treceuU  Iwmiiim (uu 

"■r"''';;;,':;   <;•  «^(r/;<>.«i«ft«-  ,      .  „  „  <,  generally  are 


titcntu),  ~J- "'   .,.     /  ,„,  one  million 


Keiii'^'mtrruls  i(o™  one  '^^t^m!>^^^^ 

the  fractional  parts  of  the  as.  ^imidius,  a,  vm,  or  by 

diundia  pars   ^^^/ .?  ^he  otlier  fractions  are  ^^  ^'^\^  ^^^^  third  of  a 

Kem   y-  D'-ftnite  numerals  oi  ai  c^riTW. 

^"%r.c>-i>'  ilHir  """"-....^io,,   of  numbers  ^^-as  done  by  CAPrr 

LETTEUfe  (.8*«  >v.  .-.^..g  «-reater.       inu^  IJJ        ^.vpfi-s:  the  siiTU 

lJ03'r'     ,'    ,,   „s   .is  annexed.      Aliusv,v,i  ten  thousands, 

CCI03    CCIOO;    312,000    - 
CCIOO  CIO  CIO- 
'T'i^':f -rf^rnSnUe  numerals,  answering  to  the  .ne.Uou 

guoCare  the  fono^^i..g  :  ^^^..^^^^^  ^^_  ^. ,ery  many,  most 

Solus,  alone,  only  ^^^^^.^  ^,  ^^  few 

aliquot       )  geveral  r>aucwres,  fewer 

complures  S  paucissimi,  fewest 

multhnvMY  all 

j,lurc.  (pU>ral  oi plu.),  moie   ^^^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

plurirni,  most 


180 


NUMER.VL  ADJECTITES. 


The  indefinite  nmncrals  arc  thus  inflected:  Alh/uot  is  an  inde- 
clinable plurale  tantuiii.  ^ulns  and  totfts  are  declined  like  uinis 
(G.  solius,  totlfis^  &c.).  Multi^  phirhui^  panel  and  phrique 
(the  last  without  a  genitive)  are  declined  like  movable  adjectives. 
Omnls  and  the  pi.  t.  complures  are  inflected  after  the  8d  declen- 
Bion  like  an  adjective  of  the  vowel-class.  PUit^  in  the  sinirnlar  is 
a  QUANTITATIVE  adjcctivc  (see  l.  xxxiv),  being  used  in  the  xkctkr 
gender  only  ;  its  gex.  is  pluris  ;  dat.  nnd  abl.  wanting.  But  its 
jdural  plures  (ni.  «fc  f.)  with  the  neuter  p^lnnt  (not  pin  rid)  is 
coni})lete  {G.  plKrhan,  1).  <(;  Abl.  plarihnt^^  Acr.  plnrU^  pt^nra.) 

Kem.  11.  *S'o^/.f,  which  represents  the  unity  of  the  indefinite  numerals, 
is  translatiid  hy  oiili/  or  (tUnie,  and  ia  used  in  both  sinij^uhir  and 
]>hiral.  TIk;  drfinirc  numeral  xhkh  often  is  eniplovtd  in  the  same 
sense,  and  is  tlien  likewise  used  in  both  nnnihers,  as: 

i<cipi()  <'/(?^>//r,  8olus  Scipio  or  unus  fc^cipio;  of  t lie  onJy  naxon^ 

solius  or  unius  causje  ;  hi/  virtue  alone,  sola  6»/*  una  virtfite  ;  oii/(/ 

the  lioinanx,  soli  or  uni  Koniani ;  hy  the  horsemen  alone,  soils  or 

uuis  e(]uitil>us. 
Rem.  12.  Tutus  answers  to  tlie  question  '' h'>w  mnni/  jvnf.s',  and  ia 
op|X)se(i  to  the  fractional  definite  numerals,  corresponding  to  the 
Eni^iish  "the  whole"  or  ''the  irhole  of"  The  singular  of  o,'////j.y  fre- 
quently is  used  in  the  same  siiruification.  The  English  *'  the  whole 
<f"  cannot  he  literally  translated  into  Latin,  but  must  he  changed 
into  an  ad.iix'TIVE  attributive  jjlirase,  as:  'JVk  irh"lr  qt'  Gaul,  omnia 
or  tota  Gallia  {/lOt  Gallite),  Ace.  omneni  or  totam  (raliiam. 

Oniuis  in  the  sini^ailar  frequently  is  used  as  a  determinative  ad- 
jective in  the  meaniiiu"  o[  qoisque,  every,  while  in  the  plural  [oninea) 
it  corresjxinds  to  the   English   all,  as:   omne   citiuin,   every  vice; 
omueH  hoininex,  all  men. 
Rem.  13.  The  indefinite  numerals  generallyj^/vrrrZe  their  governing  nouns. 

§  !358.  T.  The  adverlliS,  formed  from  the  cardinal  mi- 
merals,  answer  to  the  question  qifoties,  how  often  ?  They  are 
formed  by  the  termination  les,  except  those  corresponding  to  the 
first  four  numerals  (Vocab.  X).  Thus  are  formed  the  adverbs 
totles  (so  many  times,  so  often),  alupioties  and  pluries  (several 
times)  from  tot^  al'upiot^  phires.  Pler'upie  forms  the  adverb 
2)lerumqne  (generally,  mostly).  The  adverbs  formed  from  the 
Other  indetiniles  belong  to  the  quantitative  class  (p.  188). 

IT.  DTSTIUnUTIVE   NUMERALS. 

%  9«S9t  8.  The  Distributives  are  a  class  of  cardinal  numerals, 
peculiar  to  the  Latin  language,  denoting  a  naml)or,  rei)cated  as 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


181 


o,e„.  .  there  a.  indivUlua.  or  u  Us  ^^^^:^^ 
noun,  to  which  the  -^J^  J"^,,  the  addition  of 
shnple  cardina    >uvmcral,  ejU^i  -'  J     „.^,,  ,,„u>m,  even  the 

X.  Voc.  col.  5.  ^^^  ^^^^^^^^^ ,  ,„,j, 

r-      ..«.xTov     In  the  followinc  sentence:      /  ^'^ '''?/V"„,;,,eeived  to -be  as  of^ 

'T^:)inr^^X^-^^-^  ''''''^r'^''"''%^ls^roan«        r/nul^    be  translate.!  by 
,  ,.t.-a.l  "t  tl.o  *l'"l'lr  ■•»'''"«  nasMluT'e  anus  1.,  another,  «s: 
«.,„.  u.  Th.,  a.tH.,u.ive  ^^^^•^l::^^Xl^^^Z:^^^ 

gdi'eoUuun^.  2.  U  ul.o  ^'»'St  (^?  'b>^Sve  nu\uoi-al  retVr..  as  : 
fonnectod  «ith  the  ""»"■  ",«  V','  suta'l  il  W«™»*  ^«««  ^'*"I- 
A-m-A  h.„ch  /'«»/"«'•  *';''*'i^''lf;eExrLtsATioN  n.itrUt  be  tlius  ei- 

'^j^c:^  r;r  .'"."«^  -....  .^w^^»  *"• 

T?,.m  15    IVistril.utives  are  used  in  V^acc  oi  ,,,,ieh  have  a  singu- 

to  meaning  as  «,™  <-.-i- V,,,  a  ca^na^ 

'Jua^'mtiu) ;  tunc  bouses,  trmu.  «.des. 

ORDINALS. 

,,«,»..»>  .i««l.«  (-''='"  ";•    e„.»cr.ied  XI.  Toe.  coL 


182 


NUMERAL  ADJECTIVES. 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


183 


ultimas        ^  summiis,  the  Jilghest 

extrenins     t   tJie  last  intiiims,  the  lowest 

postreimis   )  ineclnis,  the  middle. 

All  ordinals,  except  jirior  and  cdfer,  tonniiiate  in  hs,  and  are 

inflected  like  movable  adjectives.     Prior  has  the  inflection  of  a 

COMPARATIVE.     Scc  Lcsson  XXX  VII. 

Rem.  If).  Quotuft  corres]V)nds  to  tlie  Enirlisli  'which'  or  '  ichat\  if  an 
ordinal  mimber  iy  cxpcctiHl  as  un  answer,  as:  W/u(f  ijiurf  Quotas 
{)i»t  quis)  annus— Answkr  :  the  tire'fth—;  What  o'rlorkf  Qaota 
hora  (litcraily:  '  which  hour  in  ord>'r').  Q'lotusquixf/Ke  generally  is 
translated  by  '  hoic  few  !\  and  is  declined  by  inrtectin<j:  ^>oth  words, 
quytiis  and  quisque.  It  always  is  used  absolutely,  that  is  without  a 
noun,  in  Latin,  and  occurs  in  the  MASCuuxl-:  sincular  only. 
Hence  its  prkihcatk,  which  in  p:n<>:lish  always  is  in  tlie  pmkal, 
must  b(;  the  singular  in  Latin,  as:  How  few  underdaud  those 
rates/  Quotus(iuis(iue  regulas  illas  intelligit! 

Obskrvation.  In  tho  cunipiifation  of  the  c.\i.F.M)AU-YKAns  an»!  tlio  norRs  of  tlie 
i>AY,  \vi' ;:iMierally  ii.<e  «^aiidinal  numbers  in  En::li>h.  wliil»-  in  Lntin  Ortlinals  nni.st 
be  einployt'tl.  a.s:  G  o'c/<n-i\  horn  sexta  (litt-rally  t/if  nUth  hour);  the  year  IMJO, 
annus  inillesiinus  octinirontesimiis  se.xagesimus  se.Mus. 

Rem.  17.  Th(^  comi)ound  Ordinals  are  formed  according  to  the  same 
rule  as  the  coiuponnd  (,'anlinals  [Hem.  0],  as  :  the  27th,  vicesiiuus 
sei)timus,  or  se])tinms  et  vicesimus.  The  Ordinals  more  frequently 
follow  than  precede  tlieir  nouns. 

Rom.  18.  All  adverbs,  formed  from  ordinal  nunu^als.  have  the  form  of 
tlie  neuter  adjectives,  either  in  the  aecasative  or  ablative  singular. 
Those  that  occur  in  Latin,  are  enumerated  J V.  No.  4,  as ///////////?, 
for  the  first  time,  ^;;v//^<>,  in  the  flrst  i)lace.  The  ordinal  advrrbs  in 
0  scmietimes  are  used  instead  of  those  in  am.  In  enumerations  the 
adv»'rbs  in  o  are  more  frecjuently  ust^l.  than  those  in  inn,  as:  Uei/t- 
teiidx  jird  to  d"ccicc  the  citiz>'iis,  thni  [sccoiall!/]  to  biconie  a  co/t,sui, 
and  laiithj  to  destroy  the  republic,  Priuio  civTs  decipere,  dcinde  consul 
fieri,  postremo  rempublicam  evertere  cupit. 

MULTIPLICATIVES. 

§  ^Od.  11.  The  MULrirLic.\TivE  numerals  either  denote  the 
number  of  PARTrf,  of  which  a  whole  consists,  and  then  thev  are 
formed  by  the  termination  ]>Ir.r,  as  i<imp!e.v,  duplr.r,  frip/r.r  ;  or 
they  express  the  multiple  of  another  number,  and  t\un  they  ter 
minate  in  plN><,  as  i<implt(!<,  dnphni,  triphcs^  (f:c.  Those  in  pJrx 
are  inflected  like  adjectives  of  the  od  declension  with  vowel- 
stems  (duplex,  G.  dnpricis,  Ahl.  dnpltvi,  N.  jjl.  n.  dnp]i,-ia,  G. 
duplicium).     Those  in  plu^  are  inflected  like  movable  adjectives. 

The  multiplicatives  are  reudered  either  by  cardinal  numerals 


1    I  with  ''  four  or  by  a  numeral  adverb  with  the  addi- 
compoundecl  with     M^  ,  0      y  ^^^^^^^^  ^.^^  ^^  ^^,,^^  , 

tion  of  ''as  murh'\  as  tnj^iex  actt*,  a 

qnadruplum,  four  times  as  much  ^^^^ 

NEUTER   siN(;ULAR   "^  .^^^'^^^fVl'tVuirtold  amount.  ^,,     . 

quadropJI,  a  tine,  eonsistn^g  of  t^^^^^  ^^^^^^^.,,  ^,,1,.     All  of 

ReuL  20.  MuUiplieatives  ar*>  toimed  l^om  a  ^^uiplicativc  of 

tbt'se  are  enumerated  VllL   K'>c.  i^o.  j. 
the  i/oEFl-M-i-E  form  is  ,uuiUl>lex,  manyiold. 

EXERCISKS. 

6TMrl.E  CARDIKAI,    NUMERALS. 

t.Ho,vn.«nyGre..kB!    2.  How  many  arg—!   „3.^0fW_-nj 
years'/    4.  To  lu.w  ma,^"  ox.-n       5    O,^    an       g^^^^^^      ^^^    ,^,,  j 

^7.  One  study.  «.  '  l>e  ^^<' ^^^Z\hl  !•'■  «f  '1'«  ""'-^'  "i"*'  i^' 
kin.i.  11.  1-  te  only.  1..  ?°  {/„„\,.  ,„ee.  1«.  To  glory  alone.  1 .. 
Of  the  mouth  ah.n.'.  ^''o^?,;  j  ,1°"  ii,  „e.  Ifl.  Only  by  |.overtv.  .0^ 
The  only  metho,  "/»>).  1«;,^  „  ;°^.''  g.,.  Of  robberies  alone  23  To 
One  armistice.  -1-  ''<',"' ,;.  .".X  gods.  2.->.  Two  suns  2C.  Two 
the  housc-s  alone.    24.    Onl)  ^,^  *'^  «»"«;       ^^,^.,     09.   of  Wx,  partf. 

«ystetus.  27.  'l;71"''.;'°'l^,,{;^thvl'..ns.  =«.  Two  orders  (^^^.^Sf^ 
30.  T,.  two  oratots^  ;^  ,„  ^  ,vmnen.  3.5.  Of  three  oxen.  30.  lo  thice 
Two  lx)ats  (/*;.>-  "■*•  ^ '"^,  V.  '  ,j,i  1  as  Of  four  soldiers,  'l^- ^i  xi 
kings.     37.  Three  toot^soia.er»  (.-^  A  43    By  38 

^,.t      40    1«   years.     41.   Ot    2b  <lays.    /*■„,.  .0  „ints  (s,'.r(n«w.«).     46. 
llKmtl^t'-  44.  if  31)  pounds  and  a^^;;^-    ;^^,^*  ^^  ,h  Inches  ^gUu^ 
Bv  40  acres  irigerum)      4*.  oJ  l^;^:,^^^      51.  ;>3  sides.     52.  34  c  ties 
4<).  'M  ^swrc.s  (sesterti'is)^   B^^QuestTons      55.  Of  52  sheep.     5b.  (.3 
5:>..  41  head  of  cattle.     54.  B>  4^  q^^^^^^^^^     59.    icxxxviii   years.     bO. 
ii,i«fike<     57.    78  kinds.     08.    J2   ^^oncs.  ^^^   sesterces.     03. 

inis«i<i^«-^-     '^"  .      nf'fi  jif   words,      o-i.    ct^'^'-^^-^'  ^  \      (\(\ 

oxi.ii   sentences.      01.    CCCLIII   ^^oJ   »  ,«>unds   (po„do).     (>b. 

mxMI  feet.     04.    DCI.VI   paces.     C.>.    WCLXn  g,,,  „  ses- 

DccnxXT.  slaves.  07.  dcccci  years  •f,,<^^Jj  \". '."rs  (of  the  alphal«tO 
t.,'ee„  70.  ccw  cc.oo  sesterces.  '}:\?\'lf  l^^,,  7V  1,13  cio  («000) 
72  To  CIO  c»  CIO  CIO  Boldters.  ;3^^'  f^  !;,„,.  77.  To  CO  cio  10 
horsemen.  75.  cci.»  houses.  .0.  «>  X«  79  coiJO  ccioo  CLi  paces. 
'^r'"U..   78^  "^^iri^SLcccSoooo  sesterces.   82.  ccccioooo 

'c?ccSI"■o<"^S:»«■--^-ooc«c^^^ 

8:i.  One  fonrth  of  a  l""»'^/ fp.fj„Xi  ^^'  the  artny.  87.  O  so  many 
7»m1      8.")    HaUah<mse.     H,.  loonenai         .,  ^,<,tions  (»';;.)•    ™; 

ve Aes  8H.  T.,  jttst  as  many  l'"'''"-^  .„^^-  ^',?•^S"e  treaties.  93.  Of 
M^n  lightnings     91.  «.v  '^Y"    ^'^"'^  y^r^..i  wares.    9«.  Very 

,  ..    vTtions      94.  More  orders  ("'y.l-     •'•>•  ">   "  „    ,,  ,.„n,iitions.     99. 

—  r;  'rs  (..-.).  3^  ,rgc^;i:  j'r  ^  loi^^i:^^^ 

All   animals.     100-    *»J    ■"'  fe TZTTZ, 

»  The  Tt(nr\m  capitab,  usea  uero  » 
Latin  nuineruls. 


184 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


102  Of  tlie  whole  difficulty.  103.  To  tlio  whole  cohort.  104  The 
wiiolo  {ohj.)  of  the  army.  lO.j.  By  the  whole  of  the  -lobe.  100  Few 
pleasures  {ohj.).  ^ 

DISTIUIJUTIVES. 

1.  Sin^ul;ip  arcos  a  siii<jrulis  cohortihus  dcfrnduntur.  2.  Ecjiii  pedes 
quaternos  habent,  -iusecta  seuos,  cuiicri  auteni  denos.  3.  Leo-iones  Ko- 
iiiame  ])cdituni  cohortis  dcna.s  sin.irula'  autcm  cohortes  qumlrin.rrnoa 
yici'nos  mihte^  continent.  4.  Militibus  •^i)r<'etorianis  sin'-ula  millia -^Pes- 
tertium.  cohort ibus,^urbani.<  (luin-rni,  -U-^ionariiB  trecf-ni  Au-usti  -tes- 
tamento  f  legantiir.  5.  J  ricit's  tricr-na  sunt  iion^r,>nta.  ({.  Sin<nila  tcninli 
latcra  (juiniy  deujacohnnnis  ornantur.  7.  Binas  horas  'musica»,  ternas 
granmiaticje,  (piatt-rnas  Veonietria'  studio  quotidie  -'trihuere  soleinus. 

1.  Tu-o  acros  of  '"land  to  each  are  divided  "anion|r  the  plebs  "*  The 
-Mormons  ^-marry  two,  three  or  more  wives.  ;}.  The  fiiurcrs  of  men 
inn7'  iT''  'J""^^«'  ^'^''  ' 'tiiimih  (has)  two.  4.  Each  "^re^iment  contains 
100,)  sokhers.  o.  The  leaihT  i)romises  one  '"talent  to  each  consi)irator 
(>.  1  wo  .slaves  '^are  allowed  to  each  soklier.  7.  Each  wall  (of  the  house) 
IS  supi)orted  by  «  '  "]>osts.  8.  Most  houses  of  this  <itv  have  two  -"stories 
y.  A  centurion  generally  leads  100  soMiers.  10.  The  (hiunivirs  allow  to 
each  '-'colonist  10  acres  of  '^-land.  11.  Five  times  23  are  115  12  Six 
times  38  are  228. 

OKDIXALS  AND   JrO.TIPLICATIVES. 

1.  Of  the  first  year.  2.  The  first  ranks.  3.  Of  the  second  battle  4 
To  the  third  house.  5.  The  fourth  street  (oh}.\  0.  Bv  the  fiftli  dau-diter 
t.  A  sixth  wedding.  8.  To  the  eleveuth  hour.  !>.*Bvthe  l{)ih  "^''cen- 
tury. 10.  By  the  28th  regiment.  11.  Of  the  ;}Oth  sentence  V^  Tiio 
4l8t -'cliai>ter  (^%'.).  13.  By  the  ol.-t -miU'stone.  14.  To  the  (I'M  ques- 
tion, lo.  To  the  110th  day.  10.  By  the  273d  night.  17.  Of  the  vear 
\t::^    ^^-  ^'"^"^'  o'clock.     10.  The  lOOlst  month  ((.6j.).     20.  By  the  Vear 

21.  ^Vhat  -'•■class  (in  order)?  22.  Bv  what  day  (in  order)?  23  To 
what  legion  (in  order)?  24.  How  few  are  unhurt!  2r>.  How  few  prefer 
truth  to  life  and  wealth  !  20.  How  few  seem  to  observe  this  law  '  27 
The  last  ])rovince.  28.  Of  the  last  city.  20.  I?v  the  last  reason.  3o! 
Ot  the  highest  mountain.  31.  By  the  lowest  val lev.  32.  The  hi.diest 
^'to|)s.  33.  Of  tiie  middle  houses.  34.  Bv  the  middle  h  gion.  3.').^']'he 
soldiers  attack  a  double  numher  of  the  euf^nies.  3().  We  do  not  wish 
to  ^'\>xpose  ourselves  to  a  threefold  danger.  37.  The  garrison  ca» 
'"withstand  the  attack  of  a  tenfold  number  of  soldiers. 


NUMERAL   ADVEItUS. 

1.  It  is  necessary  to  read  this  hook  twice.    2.  We  do  not  wish  to  say 

3.  You  must  repeat  this  sentence  several 


the  same  thing  three  times 


(Juhoris  urbaua,  a  citt/'Cohort.    t  Lt  -fire,  to  beqututh 


QUANTITATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


185 


•in"    '■,  This  man  now  is  consul  for  flie  third 
time*..    4.  101  tnnos  3  a^o  «0.,    •    Thm  ma  ^.^^^^     „   ,        ^,„^„ 

limu  (!.  ^Vl•  iii'«"'l  W  a-'K'at  tj".  '^  •  'c..  „.b,.lUoii  tlum  the  history  of 
it  relates  the  «.i.se  ""''  ""n^"'!,^' ^^le  "president.  8.  To  be 
|,c  «ar  i..s..lf.  and   lastly      l^;/'^';^    fj,;  bo  ish,  and  tl.irdly  disgrac*^ 

oad  time  is  accused  of  a  thelt. 


SECTION  III 


LESSON 

FOKM-ADJECTIYES. 

.-QUANTITATIVES,  QUALITATIVES   AND 
POSSESSIVES. 


I.    QuANinATIVES. 

.  »P1     ^    Or^NTiT.TivE  adjectives  are  those,  which  include 

§  263.    1.  Q' '  Y'^T  I  i„,,,^  f„„ctiou  IS  that  of 

the  idea  of  an  ailioillll,  a»^  ,':'",„„,  ^^  ^re  measured  or 

deter,nun.O  "-  5"-';^;{- .^Ju    'm      But  they  also  are 
UK'ighed,  as  :  vinum,  «'"'"•  (^.^^.^,^^  ,f  ^^stiuct  nouns,  as  : 
used  iu  order  to  detcrmuie  the  intensity  oi 
tempu^,  dolor,  virtus.    Tlicy  consist : 

2.  Of  the  uEFiNiTES  tantusy  so   mucti,  so  gic     , 

inst  so  (as)  nnicli. 

3    Of  the  following  Indefinites  : 
.„,„„«.,  not  a  little      ;y-;-.-r' 

,  very  '- J;^,,,^^,     ^djective^  have  two  constructions : 
^  -*-■?>•  "r      We    s  plved  in  the  sikg.  of  the  NEtrrEK  gex- 

„.:;;:jitfjrd;rtas— the.^^^^^^^^^^ 


parum,  too  little, 

not  enough 
satix.  enough 
nihil,  nothing. 


i:^,    ..P.„cers.    »r<,^/.a««.o>rcu.ve„,re.    »3  In.o.™odas. 


186 


QUANTITATIVE    ADJECTIVES. 


amount    of  wine);  quaiituiii    argonti,  hofc  much  silver; 
taiitum  teinporis,  so  inur/t  time. 
This  is  called  the  partitive  coxsTRrcTiON". 
h.  The  adjective  retains,  as  it  always  does  in  English,  i\\Q 
form  of  the  attribute,  and  agrees  with  its  governing  noun  in 
gender,   number  and   case,   as  :     quanta  audacia,   how  much 
boldness  ;  multo  vino^  by  much  wine. 

The  FORMER  construction  is  the  rule,  when  the  adjective 
stands  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  singular.  J>ut  in  con- 
nection with  abstract  nouns,  the  adjective  'inay,  even  in  thi;? 
case,  be  construed  according  to  the  latter  method,  as  :  quanta 
temerltas,  what  a  recklessness  ! 

The  latter  construction  always  must  be  used,  if  the  adjective 

is  in  another  case  than  nominative  or  accusative  sin^nilar,  as  : 

tanto  tlmore  (not  tanto  tlmorls),  by  so  much  fear. 

§  5J05.   3.  The  following  quantitative   adjectives:  ;>/?^<f,  ;j>r/?/- 

luin,  2)arum,  nihil  and  satis  are  of  neuter  gender,  having  neither 

a  MASCULINE  nor  a  feminine  form.     They  have  no  other  cases  but 

nominative  and  accusative  singular.     Hence  they  aliratjs  must 

be  used  in  the  partitive  construction,  as  :  more  water,  ])lus  aqui^; 

a  little  2Kitience,  paulum    patientia)  ;    7iot  provisiotis  enowjh, 

parum  frumenti  ;  hlood  enomjh,  satis  simguinis.     XlJill  is  tiien 

translated  by ''no,"  as  :  ''  nlJdl  praemli;'  no  reward;  nihil  auri, 

no  gold. 

Kem.  1.  When  the  En<rlisli  adjectives  morf,  a  littJr,  enough,  etc.,  must 
bo  translated  by  J.atin  genitives,  datives  or  al)latives,  the  w(»rds, 
mentioned  above,  cannot  beuscil.and  otlu-r  expressions,  or  circuinlo' 
cations  must  be  emi)loye(l.  Thus,  instead  of  ;>///.s  we  sav  " ///a;^;" 
copid'' {&.  greater  quantity);  instead  ot\/>^/^//////^  we  enii)l(>y  the  de- 
scriptive adjective  exir/uaH ;  instead  of  satis  the  relative  clause 
''quodsatlH  est";  instead  of  nihil  the  determinative  nu/l>f8. 

Eem.  2.  The  adjective  7ni/,)fs,  in  tliis  form,  likewise  is  a  neuter,  and  can 
be  used  in  tlie  PAinniVK  construction  onlv.  It  has  a  masculinti 
and  feminine  form  minor  (Lesson  XXXVIII."),  which  liowever  is  a 
dp:scriptive  adjective,  corresiwmdinof  to  the  English  adjective 
*'  .wiall(r'\  This  DKSCHii'TiVE  adjective  minor,  in  connection  with 
the  noun  r^/)/^',  must  be  used  instead  of  the  quantitative  adjectivo 
minus,  if  the  construction  re<iuires  a  genitive,  dative  or  accusative, 
as :  by  less  water,  minvre  aqaac,  copid. 

§  906.  4.  The   other  quantitatives   (tantus,   quantus,    &e.) 
have  a  complete  inflection,  and  may  be  used  either  in  the  partitive 


QUANTITATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


181 


+1  of  fhev  ao-ree  with  their  nouns  in  number, 
construction,  or  so  tl^^^V^^^^^^^'-l^^^,  ,, .  .,,anta  induh;entia 
gender  and  c.^e    acconl^^  ^ J  ^    Mndujence  !  tantnm  spor 

r/s')  by  much  labor. 

a.lio.-tivs  •■  Low  Kr..at    ad      so  pre    ,  ^^^^^^^^^  .^,,^^ 

translated  l,y  m".7«"  '''<;''' ^?  "f    ,^,,e    Vequenlly   expressed   by 

ri' t  :;;;;:rer^d-;-,^tft\?.X)c4-  so  ^.^^  .«- 

I': L\Untw  (not  quot  ^";J '"j^f :;;:;•  ,„.,„es  occur  in   diminutive 

II     QUALITATIVES. 

-   ---^^^^'^/r  WaWe  ,u.Us,  what  kind  of,  what 

Th  orf  of  the  iin-tte  tak  such  Uind  of.  such,  as  :  5««^- 

rir,  whkt  kind  of  man  ;  tails  v!r,  'f^J'J'^l    ^^^^i^„,i„„  of  the 

T,oy  nre  infiected  ^'^.^^^l^  J  „L,  nnt.her  and 

vowel-class,  and  agree  w.th  thur  n.^-        «  ,„,;  ,,,jo, 

case,  as  :   Qualia  ammaUa,  ^^hat  kind 

by  such  a  word  ,,,„,„a,ive,  ^«^-f,^J'?S'c:S^^«S^^ 

III.    TOSSESSIVES. 

^    orVH-etives   represent   the  three 

^208.     6.   The   '"^^^'^f^^JIL  instead  of  the  gen^ 

pramtnatical  rr.usoxs  as  ^™  ^^  ;""j   ^'^,,,  „„,,er,  our  father 

Hive  case  of  the  personai.  ™°'^,°;^^,^^    \,,e  1.  au  interrogative 

(instead  of  "«/<e/W'«'-'>/'")-    ^'^'^  " 


1S8 


QUANTITATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


form  ctfjifs,  ctfja^  a(jian,  wliich  is  tniiislatod  by  the  Eiiglisli  poa 
sessive  case  w/tose,  but  in  g-ood  prose  rarely  occurs  ;  2.  a  definite 
form,  wliicli  is  derived  from  the  stems  of  the  personal  pronouns  : 


mens,  7n)/ 
iioster,  oar 


tuus,  th}/ 
vester,  f/our 


suus 


his,  her,  its 
(heir. 


Rem.  7.  From  tlio  stem  of  the  pronoun  of  tho  3d  person  i.%  en,  id  no  pos- 
scssivc  udji-ctive  is  foniu'd.  Instead  of  it  tliti  «jccnitives  cjnx,  (nritiii, 
edniin  are  used,  the  dislinetion  of  which  from  the  j)ossessive 
suns  will  be  ex])laincd  L.  XXXVI,  Rem.  5. 

Rem.  S.  The  inflection  of  the  possessives  is  that  of  tho  movable  adjec- 
tives, l^ut  meus  has  mi,  not  inee,  for  the  vocative  sin<;ular  of  tiie 
masculine,  as  :  y;a\/fV/,  O  ray  son !  Xosttr  and  lu-diT  lose  the  e  of 
the  terminati<m  cr  in  their  inflection — ff:m.  nostra,  GKS.  nostn,  vos- 
trae,  dr.  Possessives  }i;envvdl\y  fof/ow  their  nouns,  except  the  voca- 
tive ))ti,  and  when  tht  y  are  used  with  emphasis. 

Rem.  !).  Tlie  ])osseS8ive  adjective  of  the  od  ])erson,  .s>/v.^,  has  an  ANTE- 
(KUKNT,  like  the  j)ronouns  of  the  od  ])ers<m.  In  tlie  Kui::lish  lan- 
gUiiije  the  ])ossessives  his,  her,  its,  their,  assume  the  gender  of  this 
anti'cedent,  which  is  not  the  case  in  Latin.  Here  the  posses.sive 
agrees  with  its  ^^ny/v«i///7  noun,  like  other  adjectives,  and  not  with 
its  antecedent.  Thus^V/^y  .v//?^v  may  mean  his.  Iter  or  their  son,  and 
(iinirltui  sff'f  may  denote  his,  her  or  their  fri'ialxhip. 

Rem.  10.  The  P^nglish  possessives,  frequently  are  not  expressed  at  all  in 
J^atin,  when  they  are  easily  understood  from  the  connection,  as: 
Parents  loce  their  children,  purentes  liberos  amant. 


ADVERBS. 

§  ^00.  t.  The  Possessives  do  not  form  adverbs  at  all.  The 
Qualitatives  qualis  and  talis  iovm  the  adverbs  qiuditer  and 
taliter,  but  these  have  no  classic  authority.  The  Qimntitatives 
borrow  the  accusative  sinij^ular  of  their  mniters  for  adverbs  ; 
honcG  plffSj  sat is^  niiaus^  2^'f^^^^'^^^i  I^^^fram  arc  used  as  adverbs 
without  any  change.  Instead  of  tantum  and  qHanttoa  the  ad- 
verbs tantopere  (so  much)  and  qnantopere  (how  much)  fre- 
quently occur.     Niiaius  makes  the  adverb  niniis, 

J^x.  You  speak  enough,  satis  lo(pnmini.  They  do  7iot 
pronounce  distiucth/  enou(/h,  })arum  dilucide  enuntiant. 
IIoio  iiiucJt  do  ice  lore  thee,  quantopere  te  diligimus  ! 

Rem.  11.  Tliese  quantitative  adverbs  have  the  pecnliarity.  that  they 
may  indicate  the  intensity  or  the  dei,n"<'e  of  AD.iKCTi  vi:s  or  other 
ADVEKHs,  and  must  then  be  consideretl  as  their  onjEC  Ts.  as  : 

IVie   troops  fujht  less  vigorously,  Copiee  minus  acriter  pugnant. 


QUANTITATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


189 


run.nf  enoiinli  DlsclpuU  satis  dlligentes  sunt, 
hitead  of  (,«»/«;-». and  l''^''^''^^^^  a  ll^tivei  or  adverbs,  as: 

EXERCISES. 

OU^NTITATIVES  AND  QUALITATIVES. 

QLAMii-  ,  How  nuicU  dnns?    4. 

1.  How  much  pay-!  3.  ^\li;^:^^^^  ^\:io^uonce!  0.  What  a  per- 
Hown.ucUadvama^'o!  ...  ""^:  «•«^^*,''"^  To  ll0^v  great  an  enm.ty! 
L.verunce!     7.  Of  Uovv  mncU  asarce^     S.^^^^  ^^_^,^.,,  jjy      fa^t  a 

9.  15v  how  macU  meat!     10.  «>    '  ,.,    ii„^v  great  an.l  u.an>  mir- 

sch,.lnr.ldp!     Vi  ]^'';^  P^ ^f^^    {:.  Not  a  little  advauta^e.    16 
,w.les'     1 1.  Not  a  Uttle  iron  (.A'"-""!'  .^  '    ,g    go  luucli  authority.    1!) 

i''u  :  'mucl-  wine.  2.^  J«f -,--  '  ^  moiey.  I»-  M-»»  ^f% 
o-  isv  much  Hay  ('<'-y'««"-  7p^;„  ,, 'X  n.-Mi-en.-e.  3-3.  More  fo.  a 
"iV  U"v  t<K)  much   hread.     31-  T..o  uuuu  n<o   r,  ^  yy    -joo 

:;r>iorr Bleep.  ^'  !^j^'^^:^':^,J^.^^^  ^T^^,  t 

little  diligence,      i.-  ^"'  f ^.^^U.      4U.  Not  foith  enou.gh.     41.   Nc 
yegcables  (j^^--^  '^J^'ig    M.V.t  silver.     44.  Very  much  fear.      4o. 

47.\vhat  kir>a  of '^    '«^I,  ...^^;, ,ro;'':rgan>eut  ■.'     ol.  .^Hat  kmd  oi 


POSSESSIVES. 


inev!     0.  O  my  tn.ud!     7.  ''">   ^  ,.,.^     j...  Hcr  danger.     13    I 


ron,:^-      G:o  myfri.ud!     7    \.,^«'>;rvl-3:'Ucr- danger      13.  Its 
vork..-   10.  Thv  wedding     "•  ",'4,    ™  i«.  Its  roots.     1-  Her  ntes- 
ori-nn.     14.  Tlieir  gitt.     l-'^l' a^  f,  ,. -ime      20.  Our  lives.     21. -01  my 
n-ers.     18.  Our  system.     10.  ^J»''^  ."J|^.  ,,.,,„are.    34.  Of  thy  teach- 
.rsure.     22.  or  >"y'*">^l''^'";',,i-'„-me     37.0fitsusefulueas.     38.  Of 
-     2.1.  Of  his  g'::.'V,  J  .t.^  i^  '    mriif  their  plans.     31.  Of  our  ol^y^ 

V\n^r      ;54.  Of  vour  clients      ^o.   lu 


t>enirers. 

le 

ers 

their  fanu 


o(»    of  his  victories. 


their  fame.     -•'•. ^\"^ %.    of  vour  kin-.     ;54. 
Se.Ofourqu^Uons      -U^^^ou^^    ^^^ 

my  journey.     -<>•   ^ ^^  ^  >  L.,  ,„,bassador.     4 


UI     VOUi     viiv - 

"••■»«;  *';f'i-\   ^'is'TL^'n'u   d'todtfend  their  country,  lives  and  clu.- 
a:;!  ^■^^:'rh 'hiuy^-iel  to  change  his  plan. 


100 


COMBIXATIOX   OF   FORM- ADJECTIVES. 


ADVKRBS. 

l.^ITow  much  (do)  wo  crriovc;!  2.  How  mucli  (do)  you  rejoice!  3 
Ho\V  just  are  thy  jud^^ueutsl  4.  How  inoderat«»Iy  lie  arts!  .">.  Voa 
]>niiio  him  so  mucli!  0.  Tliy  son  is  so  nioiU'st!  7.  He  adorns  the  citv  so 
much!     !S.   We  work  just  as  much.     9.  NVe  sh'op  miicli  and  v<ui  wat^h 

)rm  tliid 
.ry.     l:j. 

'<>'—  - -   —  — -- ,'..  w.   .w.^.,ii,„i.     XT.  v/ui    soldicra 

advance  a  litth;,  but  cannot  sustain  the  attack  of  the  en<'mif's.  lo.  You 
are  too  little  attentive,  O  boys !  10.  You  work  enough,  but  not  patiently 
euougli. 


much!     M.   \Ve  work  just  as  much.     9.  NVe  sleep  much  and  y<ui 
more.     10.  We  daily  lovt;   him   more.     11.  They  seem   to  perlbrn 
work  less  ably  {aptnx).  12.  The  king  is  now  less  desirous  of  glorv 
(lajus  imitates  too  much  the  example  of  his  father.     14.  Our  s( 


LESSON    XXXV. 

C0M13IXATI0N   OF    FORM-xVDJECTIYES. 

§  970.  1.  When  Form-adjectives  are  combined  with  each 
other  or  with  attribntes  of  other  kinds,  the  Tiutin  huiiruage  gen- 
erally observes  a  certain  order  of  the  words.  Althongh  freqnent 
deviations  from  tlie  regnlar  order  occur,  eitlier  for  the  sake  of 
emphasis,  or  for  other  rhetorical  reasons,  it  nevertheless  is  neces- 
sary to  consider  this  order  as  the  normal  arrangement.  If  j)er- 
fectly  familiarized  with  this  order,  we  shall  better  appreciate  the 
reasons,  by  which  the  Latin  authors  have  been  induced,  often  to 
modify  the  usual  arranu-ement. 

§  27  1.  2.  Intcrro^'alive  adjectives  of  all  classes  pre- 
cede all  members  of  the  attributive  j)hrases,  to  which  tliey  belong. 
The  rest  of  the  phrase  is  arranged,  as  it  would  be  without  the 
interrogative,  as:  What  dmightcr  of  Gaju.^,  (pne  Gaji  lilia  ? 
Which  diligent  Jmy,  quis  puer  diligens  ?  How  great  an  indadnj 
of  m'li,  quanta  homiiium  industria  ! 

§  !tJ7!^.    3.  The  Dt  iiioii*^trative!ii  liic-,  illo,  i'^tc 

generally  take  the  middle  i)lace  in  the  i)hrase,  and  the  l*<>f>»Ne*>!;- 
sives  the  last,  as  :  Magnus  ille  vir,  that  great  man  ;  Hurt  us 
S7d)urham{s  tuus,  thy  suburban  garden. 

Rem.  1.  When  rossKS'^rvES  are  combined  with  7ne,  ille,  iste,  the  arrange, 
ment  according  to  this  rule  must  be  the  following:  1.  (i'(»v«'rnint' 
noun.  2.  Iii<\  illr  or  isfr,  ;i  Possessive,  as:  L/'hrr  t'lli'  tints,  that  liook 
of  thine.     The  English  language  in  thia  combination  employs  the 


COMBINATION  OF   FORM-ADJECTIYES. 


19i 


.      f        ^f  fbP  no^'^essive  (mine,  ours,  &c.\  connecting  it  by 
substantive  form  of  the  P^J^esswe  uy      ,  ^^^ 

j,rm-«;-»,  these  groat  .landers  ^    connocted   witli    other    adjectives, 

K..m    8.    \\l.en    P''^,f>*'^'^^,  ."L  ^™"of  the  phrase,  the  p..ssess.ve3 

th..  hitter  generally  l""-'"''!^  *  ^,^/'t„  °  u-  as    Somo  fneud  of  thine, 

taking  the  last  plaee  iV'''''^^'"^  *  .™  ,„„1«  ol.trectatores 

words  is  allowed.  _ 

.    .»■*..      1     liiilciinito    aajcctivcs   in   connection   with 

I    '27lt.    i.   •"•'•,'"''  I J  ,,iaee  in  the  phrase,  the  rest 

DEscmiTivKS  genonillN  take  tht  la_  t  p  ^^^^^^^^ 

of  the  phrase  being  arranged  a.     J"'  ,;;    ;^.,,,,,,  ,3,ttle  ; 

nitc,   as:    Pxcjna    '"''"'f «''''%''";";,     J",..!      But  some 
Gallia   a^alpina  Ma,   the   ^^''f , ^'^iXnake  the  middle 

^f  «nrt?;?  ^-   ^  t'i:  ti-r^eltive  adjective 
t^rZ^^^S:^^^  Clari  ,ui,a,n  oratores,  some   renowned 

^^'^*^^"^'  1  „„,7/;  m  combination  with  a  descriptive 

other  indefu.ites,  and  ^'^^^ul  olace  as  •  AtUs  ^riptor  nemo  („n. 
erningnoun  tak.ng  ^1';^      f^.^^.^^f^i;;,,,,  qninuaM  and-«a«, 
Im),  no  other  writer      T   us  ar,„^e  ,  ^^^^^  .  „; 

:;|!r,rZu':'otie"sr7«;«';:,4-.  every  other;  alu  oranes.  all 
olher'lcrfcri  .,«.!.«, -11  the  other).  _ 

R  «T4      5     llofillitC   lUlllU-ral*   in  connection  with 

2^^  iieeJvcs  generally  ^^^^^^^^^  ''' 

§      ^••»«        "•  .      •'        .,         ..^c^\i^\r^n      n<    df-SCriDtlTC 


0 


c     OT.*!        G      Form-aaiecuvv;s,    v.^^-- —  . 

Uil^C.,  generally  have  the  same  position,  as  descriptive 


192 


COMBINATION"   OF   FORM-ADJECTIVES. 


adjectives,  that  is  :  tlicy  precede  the  j^enitive,  the  ^overnin.G^  nonn 

taking*  tlic  last  place  in  the  phrase,  as  :    Jlie  same  crime  of 

Verves,   idem   Yerris   scelus  ;    Some   avenger   of  ovr   wrong.'<, 

allcjuis  injuriaruni  nostrarum  ultor.     If  atinl)utive  <^enitives  enter 

a  plirase,   containing  several   combined  adjectives,   the  ij^enitive 

g-enerally  is  placed  immediately  bt'tore   its   governinn^  noun,  as  : 

Mu'o  illo  hidbrinn   spectaculo,  by  that  wondi'rful  sight  of  the 

games  ;   Belli  Vejentani  annus   (juintus,  the  fifth   year  of  the 

Yejentian  war. 

EXEHCrSES. 

Interroc.atives.  1.  Which  dauiihtor  of  the  king?  2.  To  what  folly 
of  the  ])opulact'?  8.  To  wliat  crimes  of  thy  assistant?  4.  By  what  dis- 
turhance  IpiHurhatio)  and  anxiety  of  thy  mind  ?  5.  \\'hich  of  the  two 
ambassadors  of  the  Macedonians'?  (5.  By  which  of  the  two  daughters 
of  your  defender.  7.  The  flanien  {oh}.)  of  what  god  ?  8.  By  the  guilt  of 
wliich  of  the  two  deserters?  1).  Tlir  death  {ohj.)  of  which  r«)hberV  10. 
How  many  and  how  great  crimes  of  thy  son  !  11.  To  how  many  victo- 
ries of  the  Bcmian  arms!  12.  What  year  of  the  Peloponnesian  war? 
18.  By  how  great  a  bravery  of  our  soldiers ! 

Hic,  ILLE,  ISTK.  1.  That  same  question  (ohj).  2.  Those  same 
boundaries.  8.  By  those  same  troojis.  4.  To  those  v(^rv  faults.  5.  'I'o 
that  very  system.  *  G.  Of  that  «,a'neral  himself.  7.  Of  these  ambassadors 
themselves.  8.  That  sani»?  dream.  9.  By  this  same  force.  10.  By 
tills  very  peace.  11.  Of  this  whole  region.  12.  All  those  names.  18. 
That  war  alone.  14.  Of  this  other  accident,  b").  That  great  fortune. 
1().  Of  these  wretched  deserters.  17.  Of  these  brave  troops.  18.  These 
dangerous  exaniph's.  li).  By  that  treachery  of  Lysauder.  20.  To  this 
victory  of  Cn.  Pimi^xjus.  21.  By  that  custom  of  the  leirions.  22.  That 
splendid  reii^n  {impcri'tm)  of  Augustus.  28.  To  that  extraordinary 
bravery  of  tlie  Roman  hostau:es.  21.  Rome  alone,  that  constant  fri«nd 
and  helper  {(/(Ijutor)  of  weak  nations. 

PossKSsivKS.  1.  My  little  (cri^uKs)  scholarship.  2.  Of  thy  learned 
friend.  8.  To  his  firm' friendship.  4.  To  her  grateful  lieart.  o.  l?y  hi3 
great  eUxpience.  6.  Our  wretched  lot.  7.  Of  my  brave  citizens.  8. 
Bv  your  imiuudent  hatred.  0.  Thy  very  father  (r//;/.).  10.  That  rival 
ot"  thine.  11.  Of  that  (female)  rival^of  tliine.  12.  By  that  rashnebs  of 
theirs.  18.  Those  flatteries  of  yours.  14.  These  ])lans  of  mine.  15. 
To  this  slander  of  yours.  10.  Those  ships  of  ours.  17.  Tliese  ar<ru- 
nients  of  his.  18.  f\w  fruits  of  my  recent  labors.  10.  The  dc^atli  of 
thy  old  friends.  20.  By  the  unchanged  faith  of  our  brave  citizens.  21. 
All  vour  crimej;.  22.  The  whole  {olj.)  of  our  inheritance.  2:J.  By  their 
confidence  alone.  24.  To  your  other  affairs.  25.  Most  friends  ot  mine. 
2().  No  relative  of  ours.  27.  How  great  a  fear  of  theirs  !  28.  llow  many 
enmities  (.v////?i/A/.v)  of  yours!  20.  To  the  rest  of  thy  fortune.  :50.  To 
those  ])ernieioii8  ])lans  of  youix.  81.  To  that  inveterate  hatred  of  his. 
82.   His  last  words.     88.  tIic  last  «i^ifts  of  thy  gratefid  citizens. 

Ia'defimtes.      1.    Some   rebellious   states.      2.    To  a  certain   Latin 


THE   PRONOUNS   IN  THE   ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE.    193 

citizen.     3.  By  no  human  help.     4.  Of  any  hidden  plan.     '^-  Eve^^ /^^^^^^ 
born  {inf/runa.)  citizen  iohj.).     C  Other  learned  ^"f  ^^;    .^-.l  >/^^^^  f^ 
wim*-  alone     8    Of  few  good  orators.     9.  Many  pleasant  letters.     10. 
^Wral  parts  of  the  provi'nce.     11.  To  no  Iraud  of  the  --JJ-trates^     12 
To  the  whole  svstem  of  discussion  {(lisputatw).     13.   Most  oiators  ot 
Greece      14.  Manv  provinces  of  the  Roman  empire.     15.  Few  examples 
ot  consular  (....s./r.l.-v)  gravity.     10.  No  other  -----l-',    ^^^^^^^ 
other  kin-.     18.  To  an v  other  reason.     19.  Ot  any  other  Athenian.     .0. 
S  me  oth'er  occasion  (ohj.).     21.  To  many  other   young   men.     22.  Of 
eveJv  other  chief.     28.  All  other  mistakes.     24.  Some   books  of  mine 
or,    Certain  disturbers  itnrhator)  of  the  public  peace.     26.   Many  grave 
Errors  of  vours.     27.    That  extraordinary  fortune  ot  many  citizens  of 
ours     ^8  'To  the  unchamred  love  of  all  my  relatives.     29    The  votes  of 
all  tiie  other  tribes.     80.  So  great  a  unanimity  (consemm)  ot  all  foreign 

"1™te  NUMERAT.S.  1.  Three  'freight-ships.  2  Of  17  long  ships 
8.  Fifteen  -'Ionic  columns.  4.  8000  Wcenary  ««l^^^^f^-  .f/,^;;^^.  .^ '" 
t^nce  of  5000  Roman  paces  {pamuH).  6.  Aii  attack  of  2000  ^^^^^^^^^ 
horsemen  and  of  20,000  ^lispanian  and  ^Gallic  toot-soldiers  7.  io  the 
OOH  verse  of  the  second  book.  8.  To  the  1 4th  year  of  the  secoml 
^Punic  war.  9.  The  second  and  third  years  of  the  ^UMoiX)nnesian  war. 
10.  The  82d  year  of  «American  > independence. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 

THE   rUONOUXS   IX   THE  ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE. 

I.  THE  PRONOUNS  AS  GOVERNING  WORDS. 
§270.  1.  Pronouns  generally  cannot  govern  attributes. 
Tlms^we  neitber  in  Euglisb  can  say  the  great  7,  the  great  you, 
Qor  in  Latin  maqmts  ego,  pukher  tu,  dc.  But  there  are  three 
kinds  of  attributes,  which  may  depend  on  pronouns  :  1.  Partici- 
ples, 2.  Apfositions,  3.  The  form-adjectives  ipse,  solus,  unus, 
totus,  and  the  plural  of  onmis. 

Rem  1    For  the  connection  of  pronouns  with  rARTiciPi.ES  see  Part  II 
Re  n  '■  APPOSITIONS  luav  be  cinnected  with  pronouns  ot  the  1st  and  2d 
pJrsonTbut   not   with  those  of  the  third  person,   as:    Cues  te 
oS'  almvi  nrhis  conditorem.  damn  ant,  the  citizens  condemn 
thee,  O  CamiUus,  the  second  founder  of  the  city.     Ego,  2  hemi^t^U^ 

~  •    „        1  T.vr.:/^iia        3  Al.^ropnarins        *  Numulicus. 


194    THE   PRONOUNS   IN  THE   ATTRIBUTIVE    PHllASK. 

positions, arc  i'ttl»-«V-'f  "    ?,1  Uconsi.   rti..»  the  pivdi.-ut-  u^-roes 

sfcoml  p«'i><)ns  of  NOUNS. 
^  077     0    If  the  fonu-aajcctives  ipse,  sobfs,  unus,  totns  and 
^  0.1  n.  .ttributii  of  PRONOUNS,  they  a-ree  with  tlie 

omms  are  used  «^/^'^7'\;  ^J^^.,,,,  thev  a^ree  with  tlie  antk. 

Intrer  m  NUMiiKR  and  CASE,     in  gendlr  urv     „  .1,,.  /•/>»- 

sola,  according  to  tl>e  gender  of  the  anteudcut  1 

,  ^r.  .0..  ana ...  as  -^;^^^:^^:::-^ 

translate!  by  alo.e  or  o»/,y.      V.-^..  m  'J  I    «;«  "'^''/^^^^    ,„  ,,•,..«- 
U.re,  totun.  se  (o.  so  tot.nn     , t  e  .       .     O^  'J^  .^  ^„„. 

om??e6^  must  agree  ni  ease  with  its  -ovtinin^  p 
of  tcs,  omnilms  nobis  ;  all  of  yon.  omnes  vos. 

§  270.  4.  Ipse  as  attribute  of  pronouns  of  the  1st  and  M 
persons  is  thus  transhited  : 

N     Ip^e  ego,  or  ego  ipse,  myself,  I  myself,  even  I. 

i'    ,Li  inslus  of  nivselt,  evin  of  me. 

D     ^^^S'>r  />^^^-^^'>  to  "^y^^lt;  even  to  mo^ 

1;    ::;  ^..  C^i.^)  or  /,>..  m.,  by  myself,  even  b>  me 
In  the  plural  the  enelitie  .net  generally  is  attae  ed  to  th     P^^^^ 
nouns,  exeept  hi  the  genitive,  as  :  N.  uosmet  .psi     ..)   o  ^^^^ 

G    nostri  ipsoruin.  of  ourseloes ;  D.  uobismet  ipsis  to  ouiseUes, 
A.  nosmlt^psos,  o^sclces  ;  Abl.  uobismet  ipsis,  ly  oursel.es 


THE   PRONOUNS   IN   THE    ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE. 


195 


S  a80  5.  If  ipse  is  an  attribute  of  the  pronouns  of  the  third 
peLn,  the  pronoun  is,  ea,  id,  generally  is  omitted  in  Latin,  but 
the  reflexive  pronoun  sul,  sibi,  se,  always  must  be  expressed,  as  • 


Reflexive  pronoun. 

G.  8ui  ipslus,  of  liimself 

D.  stbi  ip-n,  to  liimself 
A.  sc  ip-VLin,  himself 
A.  se  ipso,  by  himself. 


Simple  pronoun. 
N.  Ipse  (inst.  of  is  ipse),  he  himself, 

.liimself,  even  he 
G.  ipslus  (inst.  of  ejus  ipslus),  of 

himself 
D.  ipd,  to  liimself,  even  to  him 
A.  ipsxm,  himsi'lf,  even  him 
A    ipso,  bv  himself,  t^ven  by  him. 

a'ffi.r, nt  rf"n,iluat\.,n., accrding  to «luch  they  are  dilierently  trans- 

^''•'it.^'prtonnnal  compounds  1   serve  to  make  SIMPI_^  pronouns 
Exn-UATKAI.,  ^vhicl,  m,-ans.  tl.at  the  pro,,ouns  "■•^,  «"''^^^.«PL'.^Jy 

S;'{i,-,^ir\hir:?;^ificatio„  the  c,.mpounas«.tU  «^^ 

i,.i„r„r  to  th,>  first  or  second  person,  are  tran^h^tcll  atcoruiiia  ," 

t;l„n  he/si.  plv  are  rendered  by  ipse,  without  the  add,  ion  ot  a 
^  ,n  ;n(<-'^0  ,s:  riuy  a.„dann  mysdf,  me  ii«um  conden.nant. 
'tC  "•  r«"<^  ;»^  il'^nm  accusant.  Ur  hinmlf  nfuta  this  ^pi^ion, 
^\Z"t^o^J^  refeUit.  Hhe  wMes  to  „««  tl,^  house  hersclj. 
iiisa  domum  possidr-re  eupit. 

^  The  pronom,nal  co.npounds  with  se!f  also  servo  to  express  Ae 
«v,:-tKXiVE  relation       This  relation   has   1 n   consid,T,-,l  J.  23,,. 

Tw";u,lent  m't    easily  distinguish  this  rela.ion  from  the  former 

p,«n'ls  with  sff  have  an   KMriiATICAI.   and   not   a   Rtn.txi^E 

"'™1w,.v,^n  the  KFFI.FXIVE  relation  maybe  made  EMPn.vTICAL, 
.„d  even  here  Ihe  ^  lan„u,,e  us.,  the  B;nn,.^,.™,;.n.na  co^ 
pouiKls,  distinguishing  the  ^^"I'l'^^^J^  f    ,  eo,  tn  rv  i,?I  "tin  the 

mendy  by  the  «"'^^'^^''''^f  ,/^"t^^^   *  ".^.  rinMh,-  ad.lition  of  ipse 
E.M1-IIATUAL  reHexive  relation  ,s  exprcssc     >>  >.^^ 

Tt'^E'"  the"™rd  •••  ...MSKLP"  is  reflexive  wmtoFT  emph- -  -.n^ 


19G    THE    PRONOUNS    IN   THE    ATTEIBUTIVE    PHRASE. 

hence  ^ve  translate  it  by  the  reflexive  pronoxm  ..  I^^^^^^^^;^".;^'^^^^^ 
in^c-  Et  patrvnn.  et  se  ii>s,nn  jwrdnr.  vxH  Utten  tlu  re  is  an 
^  ;has^is  witliout  an  expivssed  opposition  c>t  the  pron<.un  o  o tl  er 
1  ions  or  thin-s.  Such  an  emphasis  can  be  seen  by  the  connlc- 
?  fx X  e  nc?.  it  is  sok^ly  dctornnn.-d  by  the  HiiKT(>.acAL  ac(1  vr 
^^Je  s;«ntenc.  :  ^  Hk  intends  to  kill  I^^'^»;?;^  '  ^^^^y!!^^ 
trn.wlntod  acroi-ainiras  we  phice  the  accent  on  the  verb  k-%U,  or 
^^t^P^n^un  "  hTn^elfr  In  the  tbnner  ca^^  the  pronmm  has  no 
e  nphas  s,  and  is  transhited  without  iim {hc  mterpure  vult)  In  the 
K^cWe  the  pronoun  is  enii,hati<-ai,  and  nnist  b.-  translated  I. n.c 
ind^^;;"  In  tVe  lolh.wing  exc.vises  thos.  immouns,  which  are 
meant  to  be  eniphalicul,  have  been  printed  in  Italics. 

S  a?*;  1 .  6  Instead  of  the  attributive  i)lirase,  which  is  fonned 
bv  a  refh'xive  pronoun  as  governing  word  and  ipse  as  attribute, 
the  Latin  more  trecpieutly  niake^^  q.^e  an  attribute  of  the  ante- 
CEDFNT  of  the  reflexive,  ihat  is  the  suiuect  of  its  governing  verb 
or  adjective,  so  that  ipse  generally  stands  in  the  nominative, 
whatever  may  be  the  case  of  the  reflexive,  as  :  Cato  hlh  hu.sel, 
Cato  se  ipse  [or  ipse  se)  interficit  ;  virtue  is  stnidar  to  itse//, 
virtus  sibi  ipsa  similis  est. 

But  in  two  instances  ipse  agrees  with  the  reflexive  :  1.  \\  h(ii 
the  reflexive  object  is  cooRmNAiE  with  other  ol)jects,  as  :  GajKS 
detains  both  me  and  himself.  Gajus  et  me  et  se  ipsum  detinet. 
9  When  the  reflexive  corresponds  to  the  Knglish  o^tes  set/,  as  : 
Jt  is  wkked  to  kdl  one\^  self,  se  ipsmn  interfieere  nefas  est 

§•>^•J  7  If  the  pronouns,  on  which  one  of  the  ad.iectives 
twTo/.^s^  c£r.,  depeiuis  as  an  attribute,  are  in  the  nominative, 
thev  are  frequently  omitted,  as  :  Thou  entertalnest  tins  opuuon 
alone,  hanc  opinionein  solas  tenes.  The  same  omission  often 
takes  place,  if  these  adjectives  depend  on  any  case  of  the  pro- 
noun  is,  ea,  id.  as  :  They  surround  the  enemies  and  capture  all 
of  them,  hostis  circiundant  atque  oninls  capiunt. 

II.  THE  PRONOUNS  AS  ATTRIBUTES. 
S  »^83  ^'  lu  English  the  pronouns  generally  are  not  em- 
ployed as  Attributes,  but  are  changed  into  possessive  apiectives. 
Thiis  "my  father"  stands  instead  of  ''  the  father  of  me'  ;  our 
bouse,"  instead  of  "  the  hon^e  of  ns ; ''  '^  his  son  "  instead  ot  "  the 
son  of  him  "  etc.  In  the  same  way  the  Latin  langnage  uses  posses- 
sive adjectives  (§  2G8)  instead  of  the  genitives  of  the  personal  pro- 


THE   rilON'OUNS  IN    THE  ATTRIBUXnTE   PHRASE.         197 

nouns  of  the  1st  and  2d  persons.  But  in  the  third  person  either 
the  possessive  adjective  5<^^^5  is  used,  or  the  genitives  of  the  ^ro- 
noxm^ejus.eoranuearumM'''  forms  corresponding  to  the  English 
possessives  A.X  her.  its.  their.  -  His.  her,  their  father^'  may  be 
rendered  ;>a^er  suus  ov  pater  ejus  {eorwn  etc.),  but  with  a  dif- 
ference between  the  two  forms. 

llem  5  The  question  whether  to  express  the  English  possessive  ^^«  etc. 
bvlhe  Latin  pronominal  irenitive  ejus  etc.  or  tlie  possessive  adjec- 
tiVe....s,isdJtennined  by  the  same  rules  as  tl^^  »f,^f  ^he  d^^^^^^^ 
strative  and  rctlexlve  forms  of  the  pronouns  (^  ^38)  llcnct.  r/te 
tnZ-  the  po.sessice  is  d<  cUicd  hy  the  place  of  its  antecedent.  When 
the  antecedent  of  H^,  her,  dc,  stands  in  a  plirase,  comhined  with 
that  of  th(?  possessive,  we  use  sufU,  except  when  the  antecedent  is 
an  ATTRinuTE  ;  but  when  the  plirases  of  the  antecedent  and  ot  tlio 
ix)sse<sive  are  cor)RDiNATH,  or  belong  to  dilierent  sentences,  we  naust 
transhite  A/.v,  Jirr,  if.^,  hy  ejus,  and  their  by  cOram,  earum,  according 
to  the  gender  of  the  antecedent. 

EXAMPLES: 

1    His— suus      Gajus  sells  his  house,  Gajus  domum  suam  vendit. 
The  duumvirs  compi^l   Sempronius  to  give  freedom  to  his  slave 
Duuui nri  Sempromum  sero»  sua  lihertateui  dare  cogunt    Hie  general 
restores  to  the  Latins  their  hostages,  Dux  Latlnis  obsides  suos  restv- 

"V  His— EJUS  This  province  is  rich,  but  i)irates  destroy  its  com- 
merce, i/^r^^w>/v>n'y/,riV^  l.cupUs  est,  sedpiratae  ejus  commercimn  di- 
ruuid  Our  soldiers  defeat  the  enemies,  and  take  their  camp,  Millies 
nostri  hadls  miieunt  eorumque  castra  expugturnt.  The  queen  and 
her  children  arrive,  Reglna  ejusque  liben  adcenvmt.  These  nations 
and  their  chiefs  sue  for  peace,  Mac  gentes  earumque  prmcipes  pacem 

Ren/'o  "if  two  coordinate  phrases  have  a  common  subject  or  object,  a 
possessive  adjective,  combined  with  the  second  phrase  and  having 
the  common  suhject  or  object  as  an  antecedent,  must  be  translated 

bv  suus.  not  bv  <  jus,  as :  ,   ,  ^t    • 

The  Carthaginiaus  destroy  all  provisions  and  hum  their  camp, 
Carthaginienses   omnis  commeatus  diruunt  et   castra  sua    concre- 

^^This  agrees  with  the  general  rule,  since  \\iQ  ^\xh]ect  {Garthagini- 

enses)  is  understood  in  the  second  phrase. 
S  28  I.  0.  There  are  certain  attributive  phrases,  which  are 
derived  from  objective  phrases  by  changing  the  governing  verb 
into  a  VERBAL  NOUN,  aud  its  object  into  an  attributive  genitive. 
Thus  the  objective  phrase,  *'  to  destroy/  Carthage.''  may  be 
chau<red  iuto  the  attributive  phrase,  "  the  destruction  of  Car- 


19S    TUE    PROXOCNS   IN  THE    ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE. 

th„.,e  "     I.,  the  saiv.c  wav  we  form  in  Latin  from  Uhcros  am-are^ 
oLanlor,   Iron.  'Ooaa   emcre-bouorum   emptor,   from 
i^ZJre^ioUnn  uccusutor.     K  such  an  objective  phra.o 
haTa  ™  x(,M  KAL  o«KcT,  the  Latin  language,  w!>en  cbangn.g  th 

obe  tlve  into  an  attributive  I-'-'-. --^'^^f  ^.J— : 
obcct  into  a  rRONOMiNAL  ATTiuni-TK.     'lluis  from  tl.e  "l^^^^t    o 
^,  mse  Tamare  tl.o  rolk.xive  attributive  phrase  amor  su,  (^elf- 
£e)is  formed,  and  fron,  ..  accusure  the  attributne  phrase  «c- 
cusator  sui  (bis  own  accuser.) 

iud^'-e  :  .<<'/i  ins7u.'<Ju(h'J',  liis  own  judge.  nfldition 

Een.^.  a    1.AT..N'  ,;<«ses8ivos  likewise  arc  '"««l»  ,7'' '»• '^»' !     \\'~' "" 

nf  )■»««  which  then  ivhviiys  is  placed  m  the  '■'■'""'T'^ '-•.  ""T"'  .",',; 

""■"'■^"■w     u   ertiv  '  as  .^'Vm»;'"  ."'-"<'.  liH-rallv  "  by  my,  the 
ouiron?rvUli'u.xV'i  k  by  "oboays  wellure  but  mmc. 

I      ATTRIEITES,  DK.rENDEST  ON  rKONOCNS. 

1.  E,o,  consul  ac  dux  ve^or  -U -^-^^^^^^  ^^.S 

cmmoda  "af;m'  'f ''^^csm     r  •K>na.n,  iudign..  tracer.-  b,ci,.i«nt.    0. 
Sil'ut<'atru.  (iaju^'ot  tratrcm  '•-^^^-.Si.r'.r^.:"- 


■    ..  Sica.  n  >1ar,r,^r.      «"^  E.pctere,   to    aim  at,  to  .ingle  out.      ^3  a  cbamplon. 
affonl,      ^*  Unexpected. 


i«To 


THE   PRONOUNS   IN    THE   ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE.    199 


cl«'inontm  ct  luimanitas  nosmet  ipsns  conciliat  ac  placat.    10.  Nulla  Verria 
BCi'liTu  aut  Mobisaut  vobismct  ipsis  inaudlta  attjUf  "insolita  vidcri ix)ssunt. 
11.  Tot  caluninia-el  convicia  abs  to  \\,m  coiitiriiiari  iiequeunt.    12.  Tanta 
])atri:p  calaniitas  a  vobismet  i])sis  ''ferri  no<iuit.     18.  Dux  Somprouiura 
hostis  '^'ircuniTrcjubct,  ipso  '''mediam  acicin  -"perrumix're  statuit.     14. 
Consul  re^nnfp  uiiuistros  rclcgat  ipsamque  duuravirorum  custoditp  tradit 
15.  luipcrTitor  rt-gis  anilcis  vitie  -'securitateni  ipsicjue  populi  Romani  tu- 
trlani  i)n)niittit.     10.  Reglna  amlcos  suos  se  ipsam  nt'gligere,filium  au- 
tcm  suum  dflcndere  jubft.     17.  Egregius  ille  adolcscuns  se  ipse  erudire 
studet.        18.    Iloitciisius   sosc   ipst;   accusfire    vidt-tur.      11).    Antouius 
omneni  istam  ■^-siniulationeni  -'tollit  siblquc  ipse  similis  videtur.       20. 
Civitatos  ista'  sese  ip»o  delendere  ix)ssunt.     21.  Mililrs  et  ducis  et  sui 
ipsoruni  nii'inorfs  esse  videntur.     22.  Se  ipsum  guberna re  difficile  est. 
2:J.  Tu  vcH)  totus  laboril>us  tuis  -^aninuim  intondcre  vidcris.     24.  Tlie- 
mistocles  totum  so  r('ii)ublic;e  -•'applicarc  vidf-tur.     25.  Carthaginiensium 
fides  incerta  (vt   populustpie  eos  solos   timet.      20.    Poimlus    Romanus 
l*()uiprji  ing<'uium  acvirtutcui  admiratur  soliqueliujus  belli  "^«'iinperium 
niandnVe  vult.     27.  Patriie  saluteni  tibi  uni  debemus.     28.    Hujus  con- 
jurati(5nis  pericula  omnibus  nobis  eognita  sunt.     29.  Consul  praedones 
lictori  tradit,  isquo  omuls  securi  percutit. 

1.  The  citizens  despise  tlice,  the  friend  of  our  enemies.     2.  I,  the  de- 
fender of  libtrtv,  \vill  not  -'keep  slaves.     3.  It  is  criminal  'Ho  strike  me, 
a  Koman  citizen,  with  {tmndxte  by)  '^^rods.     4.  You  ruin  all  of  us  by 
your  obstinacy.     5.  All  of  you  are  ^«punishable,  but  the  people  intends 
to  strikt^    {fnJre)    th«'e  alone,  tin;  leader  and  standard-bearer  of  this 
conspiracv.     0.  Tlu^  conspirators  confide  to  me  alone  their  secrets.     7. 
These  ciuestions  can  b«i  -'solved  cmly  by  thee.     8.  The  citizens  seem   to 
be  unmindful  of  me  alone.     9.  The  other  soldiers  seem  to  have  courage 
enough,  and  you  alone  seem  to  fear  the  enemies.     10.  The  ^-writings  of 
this  "■author  are  too  little  '^Appreciated  by  all  of  you.     11.  We  wish  to 
employ  vou  alone  to  this  business.     12.  I  myself  will  not  yield  to  such  a 
iui\\<'v\iniperi>(m).     la.  So  great  a  rebellion  must  seem  dangerous  even 
to  thee.     14.  They  condemn   all   my  friends,  but   they  are   afraid   of 
touchinij   (pftrJi)    mvself.     15.  Such   measures  seem  pernicious  both  to 
the  republic  and  to  o'urselves.     10.  Thou  intendest  to  ruin  either  Lii^lius 
or  mvself  i)V  these  measures.      17.  Caesar  seems  to  move  even  you  by 
this  inildne'ss  of  his.     IS.  That  ^'haughtiness  and  bold  s^overthrow  of 
all  laws  must  be  censured  by  thyself.     19.  The  loyalty  (Jidcs)  of  these 
citizens  is  doubtful,  and  it  is 'right  {Un't)  to  suspect  all  of  them.     20.  We 
fear  (rfrPri)  the  •"i.ord.  and  worship  him  alone.     21.  The  consul  directs 
Semiironius  to  pursue  the  enemies;   he  himself  attacks  the  camp.     22. 
No  man  can  act  badlv  and  be  good  himself.     2:1  The  lictors  are  directed 
bv  the  senate  to  burii  these  injurious  books  of  Flavins,  and  =^"pay  their 
2^•alue  to  himself.     24.  He  himself  wishes  to  diminish  the  •^'^excessive 
'"r)ower  of  the  tribunes.     25.  She  herself  intends  to  save  the  life  of  the 
captives.     20.  These  legions  clothe,  arm  and  ^-sustain  themselves.     27. 

i«rnn«»nal      ^t  Fern},  t^  hear,  to  tolerate.     »»  To  outflank.    ^»  M.e(l\&  Acics.  the  centre. 
30  To  bn-ik  '  5>  Socmitv.      ^a  Hvpocri-y.     ^»»  To  throw  otf.     =4  Aniiniim    intendere,  t« 

>»  Solvere     »2  Liber.     33  Srriptor.     3 1  To  appreciate.    f/f'-sV/mare.      »»  touperbia.    ^''  Ui8 
solutiu.     STDotniima.      '«Solvere,    sa  Pretiuin.    ««Niinius.    *»  ToVestas.    *-' Alere. 


200   THE   PRONOUNS   IN    THE   ATTRIBUTIVE   PHRASE. 

1     ff„i  nf  hei'^elf     28.  The  inhabitants  cannot 
Lucretia  seems  to  he  ne^rlorttul  ( t  A^^^^^^^^^^  .^  ^^^  -,^^^.,,,,9 

protecUAo..</r.-  ^ij;  \;^^":i' ^^^f^  be  distrust  tiiJ  of./.-  ^^((^ 
to  m,vern  iY.r//.  31.  It  otten  is  '^^^'^ff'^'^^';  \  ^..  ;.;.,  i  drliViT  myself 
^iru  generally  is  ditmult  to  ^^-^^^  ^^^J,  ,,,,Hy  to  the  dis- 
^;S  [^^l::;  J^'the  l^nn^ul^o^le.  3o.  Thou  canst  govern  other  men, 
but  thou  canst  not  govern  thy>idf. 

II.     THE  PIIONOUN8  AS   ATTRIBUTES. 

I.  Aut  C^usaut  ^^^^l^:^^jTnJ^ 
pronio  ejusque  ^^^'"^ ."^"^^^^l^T^hW^vvv   legati  paeeni  nunc 
kem  civibus  suis  'J^''f'''r^^ZvJi^^^    reifcit.    V,.  Piera.,ue 
,erio  petunt ;  consul  auteni  «"^,  ^^^^    ./^  ^^,   ''^^;^^^^  fides  ea rum  dubia  vide- 

Galli^e  civitutes  1-P^^*»^  ^"^.'^:^  "i^^  W  or  Uere  noUnnus.  T.  Ducm 
tur.     G.  l>ucem  n..strum  adN  eis^iriis  suis     r  ^      ^  Svracusas  aut 

nostrun.diligimus.^us4m.a.h.Ts.r^^^ 

defendere  aut  regi  ^)^^^  /  T  \olum  s  10.  Hex 'cetera  consulis  i>ro- 
earunuiue  regem  tollere  (^<//)  ^*>'^"; ',..."  rccfmat  H.  1^'>^  ^'^'^era 
posita  -accipit,  sed  exymtum  suum  —  ^^^^^      p^. 

ionsulis  proiK^sita  --PI  '  ^^,^^  ^*  ^m  suum,  ex,ellere  coguntur. 
Carthaginienses  ipsum  V,^'''  .  ?i'av  c(,rum  pacem  ixMere  coguntur. 
13.  Carthaginienses  et  \^f ^'^^^'^^  '  ^  > /^^^'^^^^^^  isse  videtur.  M  ^V^^- 
14    440btrertatio  sm  quoddam  dementia  genus  ^^  \..    ^p^,  ^^.,.,-.^1«  sui 

l^hnatio  sui  vii^utis  et  '"^-^^^ ^!^^  1 1^  vi^m  tua  ipsuis 
ipslus  •*H'ituper;it.>r  ^'ff  ^V  ['nJ.^  .u-e  ,.s.>rum  dementia^  ixenas 
cWa  -degis.  ^-  "^-^^^^^l^  ^^^n^n  interUcit.  2(). 
'i^:T^:^^^^^^  -e  solit.  21.  Mult,  civitntes  sua 
ipsfirum  magnitudine  ^"concidunt. 

^.  (iajusknc^vsliowto^stramlus  j^^^^'^^;'  ^:)^;::;^;;;!  ^..on.  4. 
are  unpleasant  to  me.  3.  1^^^^^^''\,  \  ,  .  „  .^j^^jp  r,.  My  sisters 
Lucretia  and  her  brothers  are  .^^^1*:  /;\.,^i^  f^'^V.^torcs  tl^c  consul 
and    their   children   are    absent.     .' :  J/^^  ,f^'^^^^^^^^^ 

Sempronius  to  his  army.     7^  Y^^.  n^V  icl  of^-^e   di^^  to  Piso  his 

..appoint  ]^':^^'^'^  l^  .^  t\l  l^Tmi;;;>rtal  Nvorks.  10- 
statues.  9.  We  admm'  ^^  '^.^^^*  ^'^;?;,;,'^' '  "^'  '^  ,ve  must  leav(^  him 
Our  fricm,!  refuses  to  ^^^^[^^,^:;^^^  and 

to  his  ^'^former  poverty      U.  ^^*^  *^*^"*^^/'\o    Our  friend  ivfuses  tlu-so 

prefers  to  bear  (fern)  ^^^:'')^^'^'X\:J-^'^^^  intend  both 
Advantages,  but  we  intend  to  -relie%  e  hl^     can  s      lo.  ,^,^^^ 

to   assist   Sempronius,  and   to  '^^^T^':^'^^^\r'^ \\^<^n-^ 

t^L^^^to^have  not   immey  --«^f^  gen!^ J^^^alr^^^ 
obstacle  to  his  undertaking.     1 . •    1  ^'^' ^^ "  .[;'^^;.'     1  'colleague.     18.  A 
enemies,  and  resolves  to  expect  the  ^ //^f/ ^^^^   ''^^q    Sepfp.^ise   gen- 
certain  self-love  seems  to  be  c«unmon  to  all  nu  n.     IJ.  g>cii  i  lai ^_^ 

43T0HCcept.     *^  Debasement      -  ^^^"^"^;::,}};;::^-  53'Vo?cM;dTack!VJm/i'^* 
M  I'rbliiius.      "  Leuire.      "  /Eruiuna.     ^^  To  be  au  uDstacie,  ousia 


THE   COMPARATIVE   AND   SUPERLATIVE. 


201 


erally  is  injurious.  20.  To  be  one's  own  judge  is  contrary  to  justice 
21.  These  men  seem  to  be  their  own  ^^admirers.  22.  Tlie  consul  is  be- 
travcd  bv  his  own  soldiers.  23.  ^V^e  are  prevented  bv  our  own  ''^'weak- 
liess  from  waging  such  a  war.  24.  I  wish  to  be  my  own  interprett^r. 
25.  No  ♦''witness  can  be  compelled  to  be  his  own  accuser.  20.  The 
Atlienians  are  ''Teft  by  all  their  allies  by  their  own  haughtiness  and 
folly. 


LESSOiN   XXXVII. 

THE  COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE. 

§  S85.  1.  The  word  colli pari^^Oll  occurs  m  an  etymolo- 
gical and  SYNTACTICAL  sense.  Ry  comparison  in  the  former  sense 
we  understand  that  wjiedion  of  descriptive  adjectives,  which 
marks  their  dcifrccs  (§  4,  c).  In  the  syntactical  sense  it 
means  a  comhixation  of  two  plirases  by  comparing  them. 

Kem.  1.  In  this  lesson  we  consider  comparison  in  the  etymological 
sense,  that  is  the  formation  of  the  comparative  and  superlative 
degrees.  Every  comi)arison  is  made  by  one  of  the  four  degrees, 
which  are:  1.' The  degree  of  equality  ;  2.  The  comparative  ; 
3.  The  SUPERLATIVE;  4.  The  absolute  degn^e  (L.  XXXIX.).  Two 
of  these  degrees,  the  comi)arative  and  superlative  in  the  comj)arisoii 
of  descriptive  adjectives,  generally  are  formed  by  a  peculiar  inflec- 
tion. The  expression  positive  decree  is  a  mere  negation  of  the 
other  four  degrees.  By  this  term  the  adjective,  if  nut  compared,  is 
designated. 

§  !2S0.  2.  Tlie  coiliparaMve  of  adjectives  is  formed  by 
adding  the  ending  lor  to  tlieir  declension-stem,  or,  what  is  the 
same,  by  substituting  this  ending  for  the  termination  i  or  is  of  the 
genitive,  as:  longus — longior  (longer);  p?//c/i^r — pulchrior 
(more  beautiful) ;  diligens — diligentior  (more  dihgeut) ;  atrox — 
atrocior  (fiercer). 

The  comparatives  are  declined  by  the  terminations  of  the  con- 
sonant-stems of  the  3d  Declension  (§  145)  with  a  separate  form  iu 
t'us  for  the  neuter  gender. 


'»  Admirator.     «^  Infiruiitas.     **  Testis.     «'-^  To  leave,  desercre. 


202 


THE  COMPAEATIVE  AKD  SUPEKLATIVE. 


SINGULATI. 

N.  lonrjlor  (m.  &  f.).  ^onr/ius  (n.) 
O.  lougwris 

A.  lonrjidreni{m.kL)lonoin8{n.) 
A.  lonfjiore 


Paradigm. 

N.  lonrjvn-esim.  &  i),loimora  (n.) 
G.  loH'jwnnit 
D.  lomjiovihns 
A.  I 'ike  Nom. 
A.  Like  Diitive 


^^^'^^'"^■^  e  +iw.  r.ntnmrativcs  bavc,  liko    the 

ga^r.  3  The  --K-  oM  0     ;nv^^^       „......,,„- 

quantitative  a<  ,eet.v  s,  the   orm  ot  t  ^^^^^^.^^^..  ^^. 

lar  of  the  adjectives,  m  lu»,  as  .    »^  ^ 

more  ''cautifully.  ,    .  j^-^  ;,  formcl  by  a.Wing  the  eml- 

ing  mhnu.s  to  the  aecleus>on-stom,  ^  "    .  "'^  ,•  ,,„ty/„,,„x- 
(longest);   diUrn^-daigenlmimus   (mo=t  dil.^ent^ 

o«ro"i.ssuiu(s  (tierecst ).  „,iioftive«  and  their  adverbs  are 

Tliov  are  declined  hke  movable  adjcttivt.,  an» 
fovn  ec,  like  those  of  the  latter,  by  the  en.hng  «. 
S"  2    7V.«  fo™«  the  .uperlativo  adverb  <»(«,«<>. 

nr'nan!"^:;Usdec,ension-ste,„tcnninateshr.. 

acer—accrrimus  (sharpest) 
velu>i—veterrimus  (oldest)  _ 

■Rem  3  iTMrns  makes  both  maturrirnvs  and  ,««««r.«m"». 
T  aiilfollowing  hve  adjectives  iu  .Hs  add  t,-e  ending  .»u.  to 

Kern  4.-2r«'  o;h,;  aa^e.^.^iu,.^  on.  0.  fj.o.;^^^ 

ternUu,  mirabihs,  mutabihs,  do  not  torm  um 
e'^ri;::^es  m  ..c../.«.s  ana  .5/..  are  co.pnred  as  if  they 
p      had  the  Permeations  d^cens,  M^^^^p  "  l,,,,....^... 

henevoliis  (benevolent)        UmwieMWT 


THE   COMPARATIVE    AND   SUPERLATIVE. 


203 


§  390.  G.  The  following  adjectives  form  irrcsular  de- 
grees : 

Itonus  melior  optimum 

mains  poor  pessimus 

ma  gnus  major  ma  rim  us 

parens  7ninor  minimus 

[exterus]  exterior  .  extremus  {extimm) 

HnferuH]  ill f(  nor  '  infimus^lmus) 

[saperus]  superior  supremus  {summus) 

Ipostcrus]  poderior        '      postremus  {postumus) 

Bern  5  l^he  last  four  Positives,  included  in  brackets,  in  good  prose  do 
not  occur  iu  Nom.  Sing,  of  the  masculine  geiider. 

Bern  G.  lustead  of  ;/..7///«^*?,  as  impersonal  predicate,  the  comparative 
mtius  (of  sati.s)  with  the  copula  is  used  very  Irequently,  as :  It  is 
better  to  remiiia,  manere  satius  est.  ,.        . 

Bern  7  The  superlative  summus,  generally  precedmg  its  governing 
noun  verv  fivquentlv  is  used  instead  of  the  superlatives  maximu» 
and  Mskmu-^^:  The  greatest  men,  summi  uri ;  the  highest 
mountains,  summi  montes.  Suuimus  always  must  be  used  instead 
oialtis4mu.,  if  the  superlative  highed  is  used  m  ^^S^r^^^ 

Bern.  8.  Tlie  last  four  superlatives  priucipaUy  are  used  as  I^Dt.I<tMTE 

OKUINAL   NU.MEliALS   (See  §  201). 

§  •J91.  t.  The  followiiij,^  degrees,  partly  regular,  partly  ir- 
regular, lack  the  Positive  : 


COMPAKATIVE. 

Citerior  (hither,  adj.) 
tdterior  (farther,  adj.) 
ihtenor  (inner) 
propior  (nearer) 
deterior  (worse) 
prior  (former) 


SUPERLATIVE. 
citimvs  (nearest  on  this  side) 
ultimus  (farthest,  last) 
intimus  (inmost) 
proximus  (nearest,  next) 
deter rimus  (worst) 
primus  (foremost,  first) 


Bem  9  The  Positives  of  the  first  four  comparatives  occur  in  the  form 
of  LOCAL  ADVEiins  {ritru,  ultra,  intra,  prope).  Di  tenor  and  deUrri. 
mm  are  so  distinguished  from  p<jor  and  pex^imus,  that  tlie  former 
m.'an  less  and  lead  good,  while  the  latter  two  mean  more  and  mod 

Bern  'lo'  Vdvekbs  as  such  generally  do  not  f«^rm  degrees  ;  and  what 
^"the  gi^nmadlns  usnallf  call  the  coMPAKATrvE  and  SLW.in  ATIVB 
of  vSvEuns,  is  nothiug  but  ADVERr.stormea  from  thecoMPAKATnL 
and  sui-EKL XTIVE  of  AD.TECTIVES.  The  temporal  adverbs  saepe  and 
diu  however  form  the  comparatives  saepius  (oftener)  and  diutius 
(lono-er),  and  the  superlatives  saepis.ime  (oftenest)  awd  diutimme 
VnA  without  an}  corresponding  adjectives.  The  adverb  hmge^ 
and  its  degrees,  longias  and  loiigis^ime,  generally  have  a  local 


201  THE   CO.MPAEATIVE   AND   SUPERLATIVE. 

,„.,;  fnih-r  than  .SV/".^.  '^'   f  ""  ' i""  i  ;  e^.^■«  dilhr.  dilhsuu',^, 
Eera.  1 1.  Dh.H  somotinus  lias  ^^'')\'^"^^i,;J„„„.     The  contnvtio.i 

„f  the  JK^Uive  dav,s  ...to  ' ';,  ?•/'  ^'^!:„  ti,„,,;J  >V».,i  forms  it. 
.^■(•Una\i)o  /"'/«,(«1  luak.  >  '"«      '/.  '\/,,i,.,,  j,,  „no<l  pr(«o  (lo.-s  not 

occur.  Tl.e  on.paral.ve,.;  »a  J  >  .  ',„„^.,,i,„„.  .jcu'rally 
,-,„vHW  and  ,«»«  <'ff'V,' '  il,  .  n.r  t  l\.e  auie  of  persons,  arc  cx- 
•^'younser,"  and  "  ''V'='\,,  1' ,  i"',,     «    ««"«  being  on.ilted  wl.eu 

no  amliisruity  can   •."''•-'  '\,i,„'„t  a  positive.    I„  .:o,h1  prose 

g  o«o    8    O.tlv  those  adjectives  form  de;.:rces  which   imply 
"':    :  or  n  CKP  sT    Th  s  natiot.al  odjeetives,  an.l  snch  as  .lra<i 

CREASE  07    DECREAbh.        x  /.,,,nii>:^      (-miiot     bC     CUUl- 

(mortntts),   <7o/rf.u    (aureus),   annual    (atntu.),  cam.ot 

P^^^'^^-  *.  ^p  r-T^ownvv  rofuse  the  inflectional 

Other  .eljectivcs  on  acconnto    ™ J/f  ,  J,,      -f,,;,  ehvss  of 

degrees  only,  either  both  ^^'S-     °'    f^J/;       :i  ,,,  pn.ctice  or 
a.ljectives  is  very  numerous,  and  must  bt  itainiu     .  i 

from  the  lexicon. 

Kern.  12.  The  most  usual  ='fcti- that  lac.  infleaed^^^^^ 

toUowins::  1    ■l'b'-^;v-f;:  "except    1^1  in  ,«"^  as  ;.7".««. 
as  »«.««..,  «/'""•"»;  "'"'•■;,/';  ;;scteru.inating  in   r,l„^,  01.^.  'h". 

^„,(;m".,  pnrari,^,s.  *;;"' «;■  „;,^„.^^^,  ^'    4  'm„,;v  adjectives,  winch 

=^=j^:^s::;<n:|f  .^-^;;.^    --■  ""'-' 

Eem.  13.  The  most  usual  ot  ^}^%2,t^VJ:;l,i,,,,,,_,ncn-^^^^^^^ 

but  not  COMl-.VKAT.VKS,  "''/'•'■';;■'.;,,,     „(,„_„te,TI»«  "«■      Of 

UlU,  probahilis. 

S  «O»    9    Tltose  adjectives,  which  for  the  sake  of  euh.oj|T 
J^hLoI  degrcei,  are  co.npared  by  .na,U    .nore     - 
rnosUivo  for  the  coMPAR-.TivE,  and  by  marvnc.  (most)  wd^h 
t  pSe,  for  tlte  s.rEB..mvK,  as  :  „.«<;.•«  no.u.  (more  hur^ 


THE  COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLATIVE. 


205 


fill),  maxime  noxius  (most  hurtful)  ;  magi^i  arduus  (steeper), 
maxime  arduus  (steepest).  Adjectives,  which  form  inflectiona. 
dc'Tces,  generally  cannot  be  compared  by  magls  and  maxime. 

EXERCISES. 
Attributivi-:  phrases  with  Comparatives  and  Superlatives  Aa 

ATTRIBUTES. 

1    Bv  a   more   accunite  scholarship.     2.  Of  a  fairer  peace.     3.  To  a 
deeper*  river.    4.  An  older  time.     5.  A  friendlier  companion  (obj.)^    b. 
By  a  harder  (ardau.s)  undertaking.      7.  Happier  days.      8.  Of  crattier 
thieves       9.  To   more  certain  events.      10.  More  bwmtiful  gitts  {oh/.) 
11    Bv  promises,  more  sacred.     12.  Of  a  more  hostile  expedition.     13.  lo 
a  braver  eni-mv.    U.  A  more  merciful  leader  {obj.)    15.  A  more  enormous 
crime  (ohj.)     ifi.  Bv  a  lower  place.     17.  Unhapi)ier  wars.     lb.  Of  nobler 
deeds      1!)    To  quicker   messengers.     20.  More  ferocious    attacks  ('%.) 
21     Bv  moike  magnificent  arclies  {arn/s).     22.  The  freest  country  (f^j.) 
23.  OV  the  oldest  city.     24.  To  the  most  dissimilar  method.     2^.    }  be 
most  ditiicult  (iu;-sti<m  (obj.)    20.  15y  th..^  hai>pi«'st  accident      2..    Ihe 
lUMSt  renowned  commanders.     28.  Of  the  best  men.     29.  Ot  the  o-reatest 
writers.     30.  Bv  the  highest  courage  (j>/^//'.)  of  the  troops.     31.    Ao  ^ 
worst  c.mditions  of  a  most  unhappy  pi-ace.     32.  The  smallest  causes  {obj., 
of  the  .greatest  events  {re,s).     33.  By  th(3  highest  tops  (rulmeu)  of  the  roots. 
34.  Ofli  better  fate.     35.  To  a  greater  name.     30.  By  a  narrower  road. 
37.  By   the   smallest   things.     38.  Hitber  Gaul   {obj.)     39.  Both  ot  the 
Litberandof  the  farther  province.     40.  The  nearest  places.     41.    Uie 
richest  kni<rbts.    42.  By  tlie  older  citizens.    43.  By  the  ycmnger  brother. 
44    By  the'most  benevolent  magistrates.     45.  By  the  best  and  mddest 
idemcN^)  brovernment   -in  the  ^world.     40.  To  the  elder  (  ato.     47.  Of 
Pliny  Secundus  the  younger.    48.  Older  houses.    49.  The  oldest  nations. 
50.  the  farthest  cities  of  the  Insubrians. 

Predicative  and  Opjec tive  Phrases  with  Comparatives 

AND  Superlatives. 

1  Our  swords  are  sharper.  2.  Your  kniv<'sseem  the  sharpest.  3. 
You  are  more  desirous  of  praise.  4.  No  city  is  fuller  ot  enemies,  o.  1  he 
consuls  become  dearer  to  the  people.  0.  Most  citizens  are  more  prudent. 
7.  No  war  is  more  pernicious.  8.  Few  examples  are  more  renowned. 
9  This  dano-er  seems  more  serious  and  greater.  10.  No  books  can  be 
better  11  °The  Athenians  generallv  are  wiser.  12.  The  people  cannot 
be  offended  hnore  shamefully.  13.  This  war  becomes  most  dangerous 
14  A  mon^  treacherous  plan  cannot  be  ^conceived.  15.  The  greatest 
and  wisest  men  reji-ct  this  kind  of  government.  10.  You  are  surrounded 
kv  the  most  h.)stile  nations.  17.  The  consuls  are  «exhausted  by  the  most 
dllHcult  lal>ors.  18.  It  is  better  to  -keep  [one's]  ^vord  19.  It  is  more 
phasant  to  bt;  loved  by  the  people.  20.  It  is  mor.e  useful  to  treat  phi lo- 
Boi)hv  and  grammar.  21.  It  is  difficult  to  be  more  cruel  '-^^.  It  is  easy 
to  bJcome  richer.     23.  We  cannot  work  more  diligently.     24.  Crassut 

~^>  R»'s7ubHca7   «Transl.  "o/."    •  Orbis  terraruin.     ■•  Turpis.     6  Ct.gitare.     «  Conficere. 


20C   TUE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMPARISOX. 

all  thy  tnonas  ^',;';^J^J^^^^\o  ;esist  ,no.t  l.n.v.ly,    ;!0.  The 

the  elder  C  ato,  but  It  IS  mon.  UM  <renoral  "selects  a  plaee 

^S:v,SUatthmf\nu«t- treat  the  ".natter  more  fully  and  ele- 
gautly. 


LESSON  XXXYIII. 

THE  COMBINATION  OF  rilKASES  BY  COMrARISON. 

R  oi)4  1  Comparison,  in  a  syntact-cal  sense,  is  a  means  of 
comlTning  ylirases  or  sentences  (§  83.)  Phrases,  which  are  com- 
hined  by  comparison  are  called   compared  phrases  or  a  COlll- 

parative  period. 

Rem  1    For  tlie  combination  of  SENTENCES  by  compariFon  see  Part  II 

Hem  ^'  The  ccminarison  of  phras.s  has  in  several  points  tlie  natim    of 

^      a^cor>   DiNu'ioN  (^  11:1)     This  appears  chietiy   in  the  coruurHng 

words,  which  are  Either  relative  adverbs  (r/^n/^  ^'''''ry/;'^^;:^^;)' 

or  relative  form-adjectives  (7'/.^/^^v,r///o0,  both  ol  which  Ikuo  the 

nature  of  conjunctions  (^  C41). 

Rem  ;^>    Thus  the  pronouns  an.l  i>ossessive  adjectives  of  the  ..d  i>erson, 

which  follow  the  connecting?  word,  are  treated  as  m  cooRDlVVlL, 

and  not  as  in  combined  phrases  (§  2:^.S,  Rem.  G ;  g  28:J,  Rem.  ;,),  as : 

Gajus  is  wiser  than  his  l)rother,  0<(ju8  sapkntior  cd  quam  f  rater 

i'tHX  (not  XII  lis).  1  1  •        J     1  „ 

It   is  more  difficult  to   deceive   Oajus,  than   to  be  di'ceived  by 
him,  Giijam  deciptre  dijidlius  ed,  qunm  ah  eo  (not  sc)  dicipi. 

S  2S>5.  2.  The  first  of  the  compared  phrases  contains  the 
word,  indicating  the  degree,  which  either  is  the  degree  of 
equality  or  the  degree  of  dirTe  re  lire,  according  as  the 

parativk  cannot  be  uauslaled  in   Laliu.     i' Visere.     »*  Acceaere.     i»  Deligere.     '«Sen. 
t*^nlia.     *^  lU«s. 


THE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMPARISON.   207 

compared  relations  are  represented  as  equd  or  unequal.    The 
decree  of  differcnee  in  conn^ared  plirases  always  is  the  comparative. 

?:,nls  ff/i^palon  T^^i^r,  L  .UicU  the  ior.e.  "a."  in- 

ad V  4  ""^A^  ahvay.  is  i,.puJ   Besides  these  there  are  ajew  othe 

,vords.  in   which   --««-'VT-.ZtA     -"F  :  imper'matvefb 
1     Tlip  verb  ?//////ti  (mstead  Ol  magis  kik  ) ,   ~-    ^'^'^'^   "   i  , 

1.  1  nc  > ei u //M<t(,t,  v'"^  «^      ™,      o/ivprb^  Tindta  (nod)  ana 

jird  and  ^second  member  of  the  comparison. 
8  O€>o    3    The  second  member  of  the  comparison  generally 
.nperrs  in'  an  abridged  form,  when  the  compared  phrases  have 
one  or  more  words  in  common.     These  common  words  are  e^- 
pressed  in  the  first  member,  and  inipUed  in  the  second. 

^'''"'l    llv'^siippUing  the  suppressed  COMMON  WORDS,  and 

2.  Ify  ^^^W'^'^^^^^J^f^:!'^^^^     deo-rees  in  both  members  are 
'^  ^^^^rTd^rnfhe  "  ctS  Jhe  kigker  degree,  we 

r;TBup"y  in  the  leccmd  member  the  lesxer,  and  vice  versa. 

EXAMPLES. 

1.  Gajus  li.-is  better  fields  tUaii  Sejiis. 

analysis  : 

word  uaaiii:  ,   ,  .  a  •„« 

Gajas  agros  melidres  habd  quam  Sejm. 


208   THE  COMBINATION  OF  THRASES  BT  COMrARISON. 

It  appears  that  S^j'is  is  the  suLj.'ct  of  the  second  menih.T  and  hence 
in  the  linal  arrangement  remains  in  the  nominativj.  CASt.. 

2.  CiJijii**  lias  bctttr  fields  lliaii  gai  «Uiis. 

ANALYSIS : 
FlKST  MEMBER  :  Gajus  has  better  fields,  Oaj'fs  rrf/m.^  melwrfM  hahH. 
Second  MEMBER  (completed):  Gajus  has  worse  gardens,  Oujns  harm 

deterwirn  hdhet.  ,    ..  ^   .         7    i  v»       1 

ArR  VNCxEMENT,  hv  omitting  the  common  words  G(tjn.^—MbH  and 
the  (U^gree  deterions  in  the  second  member,  and  inserting  the  con- 
necting word  quam : 

Gajus  (Kjros  mdiorcs  hahet  quam  hortos. 
It  ar>poars  that  ^^>?-^'.s  is  an  object  in  the  comi)leted  second  mem- 
ber, and  iience  in  the  tinal  arrangement  remains  in  the  ACCUSA- 

Hem  8  In  these  lessons  the  general  principles  of  numeral  and  quan- 
titative comparisons,  and  that  of  descriptive  adjectives  are  con- 
sideied.  For  (nialit:itive  compariscm.  and  U)r  a  more  particular 
trealmeut  of  the  whole  subject  see  P.  II.  p.  743  loll. 

A.    THE  COMl'ARATIVE  PERIOD  IX  THE  NUMERAL  COMrARTSOX. 

§  297.  4.  The  comparison  is  called  numeral,  wlicii  the  de- 
gree answers  to  the  interrogative  quot  (quam  muHi),  how  many,, 
or  quofie,%  how  many  times,  how  often  (§  254,  258). 

§  2t)8.  5.  The  degree  of  equalitv  in  the  numeral  comparison 
is  expressed  by  the  numeral  adjectives  tot  (tarn  multi),  as  many, 
totidnn,  just  as  many,  pjuI  the  adverb  tofif^-^,  as  many  times 
(§  257,  258).  To  l)oth  tot  and  totidem  belongs  the  relative 
adjective  quot  as  connecting  word.  The  connecting  word  of 
tolies  is   quotlcH.     Both,   quot  and   qnotles,  arc    translated    by 


"  fly" 


W(  hire  as  many  houses  as  Gajus,  Nos  tot  domos  habc-mus  qtiot 

Stnnpmnius  kills  just  as  many  enemies  as  Gajus,  Sempronius  totiaem 

hostiF  occTdit  quot  Giijus. 
The  Gauls  retreat  as  often  ets  the  Romans,  Galli  toties  se  recipmnt 

quoties  Homaui. 

§!209.  G.  The  comparative  degree  in  the  numeral  comparison 
in  answer  to  the  adjective  q}(ot  (liow  many)  is  expressed  ))y  the 
mimeral  adjectives  j^/jor^,  more,  and  pauriore^  fewer,  less  (§  257). 
In  answer  to  the  adverb  quoties  the  comparative  is  expressed  by 


TUE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMPARISON.   209 

the  adverb  8ar;.n/.s  oftener  ^§2VU,  R.9),  and  mmus  .arpe  {h^ 
often,  not  so  often).  With  all  these  comparatives  the  relative 
adverb  quam  (than)  is  used  as  connecting  word,  as  : 

S^^mpronius  intends  to  Imild  more  houses,  than  thou,  Sempronius 

plurls  domos  frditicare  vult,  quam  tu.  Q.mr^ronius 

Gains  seems  to  be  aMsted  hy  fewer  (less)  friends  than  ^^^^»^^^' 

(iaius  a  imucioribus  amicis  adjuvari  vidi'tur,  quam  feempioniiis. 

-  ^,!;.^;" 'rz:^'/^^        mistaken,  than  Gajus,  Sempronius  saepias 

G^uf^^nJsk^'^ften  than  (not  so  often  c.)  Sejus  Gajus  minus 
isaepe  venit  qaam  Sejus. 

B.  the  comparative  period  in  the  quantitative  comparison. 
§  »00.  7.  In  the  quantitative  comparison  the  degrees  answer 
to'the  quantitative  interrogatives  quaatus,  quantum,  quantopere, 
how  much,  how  great  (§  2 03). 

S  *W  I  8  The  degree  of  equality  in  the  quantitative  com- 
parison when  an  adjective,  is  expressed  by  the  quantitative  adjec- 
lives  tantus,  as  much,  as  great,  tantmdem,  just  as  great  ;  and 
when  an  adverb,  by  the  quantitative  adverbs  tantum,  tantundem, 
and  sometimes  by  tantopere  (§  269).  The  connecting  words  are 
the  adjectives  and  adverbs  of  the  interrogative  form,  corresponds 
iiig  in  their  grammatical  form  to  the  words,  expressing  the 
degree.     They  in  English  always  are  expressed  by  "  as :" 

Gajus  has  as  much  money  as  you,  Gajus  tantum  pecuniae  habet, 

ThoullnldnU^^^^^^  just  as  much  silver  to  me  as  to  Gajus— Tantundem 
argenti  mihi  reddere  debes,  quantum  Gajo.  ,,„,i^k 

We  are  oppressed  by  (fs  great  a  cruelty  as  you,  Nos  tanta  crudeli 

tate  opprimimiir,  5'/^^/<^ii  vos.  „f„„^  ,.^a 

We  rejou-e  as  much  as  you,  Nos  tantum  gaudemus,  quantum  \os 
Rem   0    The  partitive  construction  of  fantus  and  taut usdeni  is  tyy^hed 

to  the  comparative  period  according  to  the  genera    rules  (^  -^^' 
Rem.  10.  The  connecting  words  regularly  agree  in  their  gramma   ca 
form  with  the  word,  expressing  the  degree.     Hence  if  this  Tvord  is 
Ln  AD.IKCTIVE.  the  .-onnecting  word  must  be  an  ADJECTIVE  :  if  the 
de-ree  is  expressed  1)V  an  adverb,  the  connecting  word  i^^^^t  be  an 
ADVERB.     In  the  saiAe  way  both  words  must  agree  in  gender  and 
xrxmFR      The  case  is  not  alwavs  the  same,  and  is  determined  by 
a  eTiSJ;  of  the  RELATIVE  SENTENCES  (Part  II.)     In  the  following 
IxercL  only  such  examples  wi^^l  be  ^-vcm,  where  Uie  conm^.i^^ 
adjectives  agree  even  in  case  with  the  words  ^xpressing  the  degree 
Bern.  11.  S<,metimes  the  numeral  degree  tot  and  the  quantitatne  tanU 
(as  great),  are  connected  by  coordination.     In  this  instance  bo.h 

14 


»10  ■„,,  C0»,S-ATIOS  OF  Mn»ES  BY  COOTA.,»». 

"i,„  ;.;;,„"L  I»»".., .,...  •>  'i"""  ■■■■'■ 

word  alwaiji  is  jnniH. 

•  .,n,l  '  l....^ '  are  attrilmlivc  adjectivos.  they  are 

liem.  12.  ■«  !'<•"  '  more    ami  .''^ff,  ?,',,, ",,.,,|iiive  srciiiiive  (?  iM),  a^  : 

ex,.r,.ssea  Hv  ,«»•<  an;    «!;;■  ,"(;,'    'I'j'.'uannia  plus  lerri  .^i,...it 

<,„an-,  «^'"'•'•-^.'^^  '    ';  „^^,  :'•  is  ahvavs  reiulered  by  m,>jor  pvcu- 
,uV,  (net  /-;«••<  i><v«„«i^).     *'';'■   '■.'^; •,,"•, *;,ient  on  a  vK.tn.  it  is  reii- 

dorea  by  /«"'/'•<  ■■  I  ''''"','''■'  u./ri. ma  n  instances  the  advkui. 
p;„,)  adnilror  <,uam  bejuni.     I';"-  ."'^JV'.  ,„  ,,,„.avs  wl.en  (le|.en- 

dei.t  on  ibe  verb   to  love    (  t..  ov,  mmc  _  .^.^^  ^^^  _^^^^^^ 

,«■«  or  «-«"(■<!,  not    "'"i"-  )■    ^  *,  ,; V;  „  .e  more  useful '  =  pi«» 
•;.„er,nr=;-(«;^-,;ri';;;'''-,',4^ 

?;!::':,:;r  pir:s;:t"i:i''^-::^o/^,;s...  ...^  (..e,uau. 

tit.Uve  mi/.^/.v  with  tUn  grnlth'o  J.6/-./v/^^^^         .omparison  is  fcrm.d 

Rem.  15.  The  superlative  ae.irree  m  ^^^^'.^^^  r^^^/.^^^^Xl    n  the  ciuanti- 

bv  thi'  a(l)ectivc'S]>/'//i///i  and  lumn.sinu  (>  7i'J:..*J"';"wi,,,  adverbs 

"^tlve  comparison  by  the  ,x.Yy.'Xx^'^  plan,umi^Zi^6),^^^^i  tli».  aaxer  s 

muxiint  audpl'irinium  (most). 

C     TtlE   COMl-AUAT.VE    PEU.OP    TK    T..F.   COMPAiaSON    OF    DESCRIPT.VE 

^*  ADJECTIVES. 

S  30*5  1 0  The  de<^rees  in  the  comparison  of  descriptive 
abLtives' answer  to  the  qnestion  quam  (how)  in  connection  with 
a  descriptive  adjective  or  adverb,  as  :  How  dd.gent,  quam 
(Z,7/r/emsniow  bravely,  r?i/am/or/i7er?        ^ 

k'  -{O  1  1 1  The  degree  of  equality  consists  of  the  adverb  tarn 
in  connection  with  a  descriptive  adjective  or  adverb,  to  which 
alwavs  corresponds  the  connecting  word  quam.  Both  the  degree 
of  eqnality  tain  and  its  connecthig  word  quam  are  rendered  by 


''  a.s"; 


THE  CO.IBINATION  OF  PHKASES  BY  COMPARISON.   211 
j-7-      *  ^a  Q..\u9  Gains  tam  dilit^ens  est  quam  Sejus. 

pu"-nant  g^/'i//*/  Romilni. 

T1.C  coin.™-,   degree   (L.  XXXVII.)  ^^^^^.^I^^. 
sau.0  conueoling  word  5««'«,  «Lich  theu  is  trauslated  l3)     than  . 

Jhis  placets  molt  ''"'^^?  "'  (^^\  nuam  montes  proximi. 

^';:-2^f^U.Z!}^^^^e.er.  Ho.es  aJrlus  pu.nant 

ntmm  una  nam.  .  i   i.„ 

r:;s;,f  ,;,sr£. ».-  ~"i  t,,. v.* ,.  >i,. 

tZ<jZ^(?.S  g"<a//i  diu  projicvi. 


305.   12.  D. 


SUMMARY   OF    RULES    ON    THE    TRANSLATION   OF   Tim 

WORDS  more  and  less. 


1    To  rondor  the  Knmish  wcnls  J  more^^and    1«;^^  J^^^lf/J'ar.nvKUB.     They 

firVt  di<tin.M.ish  whcMhei-  iho.-e  won  >  iV    ,?.    nf   v  noun  exprc-sed;  (6)  when  thi-y  are 

are  ^    .      TIVES  ^m  when  they  an-  ;''  7^^"^;^^;    „;^  "^.e  p'sSi  loll.),  heing  objects  of  a 

C'd   ubs-hiiely  *i.  e.  ^yith  t'le  h.rce  ot  J    "l^/,*,  ^;  ^^e  advkub.  (a.  when  they  .land 

verb,  as  -t..  -ive  niore.^  \to  lo^e  '"V  «;u??;>iore  i)/^V/f/'(!.  «to:  0)  when  they  are  de- 

i±;i  <:^T^^rh,  ii;:;;;;;^^  s> ^  ^^^  -  -  ^--  -- '  ^' '-  - '  "^"^  '^^7' 

l,,,;..  to  tlie  nlmk.:al  comparison.  ^^;'\"^^[V\f  ^^^-^  '\^  ore  troops  '  is  alwavs  rendered 
V  J,lu.  and  ndnus  with  a  ^r^^V^^',  !''- "Y<!r  r   4).  For  rendering  ^  more  than  three 

etc  see  «^  :ni.  .  . ,  mnrpMs  ID  the  SINGULAR,  the  corapanson  is 

"1;  Whin  the  ^7:-;;-/^.KV,?.  ,,?^?    ,direi  by  i>^a.  or  minu.  with  a  genttne 
nn-nit  tat ive,  more    ami    u>«    I.    Vr  ,.i  » 

Vs^iVi.K\i(v!i'^^*vvni,>u<frameuti\,\i.\^.       ,      ,   .     adjectives  with  the  force  of  a  . 
^'r  NN^K-n^iv>re^  and  Mess    ar^-iis^^^^  You  return  more 

noun  (see  p.  2tll,  Rem.  14),  they  arc  '^    '  V*^^ '    -  '^^n,  nuam  accipis.  ^      .  ^ 

is  alwavs  rendered  ininn^''.  hi<rher  det^rec  of  a  verb,  it  is  generally 

'"«.  When  the  a.lverb  ;}"'>>•,«  V^f"°„VMno.e  t    un  hifbrother,  rnarm  (m>t  Pl''^)  >''^^ 
renQeredbvy//«.7^sa-:nepl^'a-«=^™V,?*^^^^^^^^^  the  pre.iicate,  but  that  o    us 

Zct  qxainjrat.r  ejus.    «O^^JV^^.;   •^/"nevanq  lisi.e.^  more  by  good  plans  than 
objects  is  compare.!  by  marji-^  *'.'^Tr/  J-i/     For  the  use  o( pl^'^  -'^  adverb  see  li.  13 

bS  )i;?^;rprur^ -al'';;.cro';Sroraico).    see  p.  X.,  p.  .™  rou. 


212   THE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMrAKISOX. 


EXElinSES. 

A.    XUMKKAL   CoMrAKISON. 

Deoree  of  kc^UALITY.  1.  Nos  t(Jt  trstis  liabr-iniis,  quot  V08.  2.  (iajug 
tot  carniina  scrioit  quoT  Sfjiis.  3.  Liixuria  tot  liominibus  pfrnicirisa  est 
quot  i)aui)eitas.  4.  Antoniiie*  tot  civis  iuterlicit,  (juot  Sulla  aul  Marius. 
5.  Crassus  totidem  causas  perorate]  not  Brutus.  0.  Tot  idem  adou't^cenics 
^pra^cPduut  quot  virgines.  7.  -Ncnio  tot  verba  defendere  ))otest  ijuot 
dicere.  8.  Poinp«~ji  "theatrum  totid«'m  •^sspcctatcires  Vapit  (jiiot  .lovis 
tenii)lum.  \).  Caniillus  totics  mat  «luotics  iinjMTatoris  nojuen  «nuntiat. 
10.  Excubiat'  totii'S  clamon-ni  Vduut,  quoties  hostes  appropuKjuant. 

1.  Wo  have  as  iiianv  books  as  Scius.  2.  I  liave  as  maiiv  houses  as 
tbou.  o.  \N'e  are  in  ne«'d  of  as  many  soldiers  as  the  army  of  Sertorius. 
4.  I  am  obedient  to  as  manv  mnst«'rs  as  vou.  5.  (lajiis  is  assisted  l)v  a? 
many  fri(>nds  as  S('m[)r(jnius.  (i.  He  intends  to  draft  vc>'/^v•/•/6e/t)  as  many 
h'irions  as  the  other  eon^ul.  7.  It  is  daniivrous  to  have  as  nmnv  friends 
as  enemitjs.  8.  Uajus  is  convicted  of  just  as  numy  thefts  as  Sejus.  \). 
No  writer  writes  as  many  words  as  he  reuds.  10.  The  month  of  *Mareh 
has  iust  as  manv  da vs  as  October.  11.  The  father  pardons  as  ofti-n  as 
tlie  sun  sins.  12.  I  intt'ud  to  'visit  thee  as  numy  tinu's  as  thy  brother."* 
13.  We  must  h^ht  as  often  as  the  p:<'neral  directs  us  to  flight.  14.  The 
liomans  are  Mriven  back  as  often  as  their  allies. 

(.'(^Mi'AHATiVK  DKOKKE.  1.  Plurls  aniTcos  habere  volutnus  quam 
inimlos.  2.  Gajus  se  pluribns  verbis  defendit,  quam  n»'Cesse  est.  3. 
Pluils  '"bubulcos  "habere  «piam  boves  ineptum  est.'"''  4.  Inutile  est, 
st^  ])luiibus  laboribus  '-^dare  ([uam  '^recte  ])t»rfici  ])Ossunt,  5.  (Jajus 
pauciHres  clientes  liabet  (puim  nosmet  ii)si.  G.  A  paucioribus  lumiinibua 
laudari  «piam  vitui)er;"[ri  molestum  est.  7.  S.epius  mediclnam  (piam 
cibum  ca[H're  videmini.     8.  Uajum  minus  s;ppe  videmus  (piam  Sejum. 

1.  More  wars  are  carried  on  by  Pom[>ejus  than  by  any  other  jj^i'neral. 
2.  More  advantages  can  be  ol>tained  by  this  war  than  by  any  treaty.  3. 
More  enemies  perish  bv  disease  than  bv  tlie  sword  of  our  soidiei-s.  4.  It 
is  absurd  to  keep  more  ^'stables  than  horses,  a.  You  seem  to  keep  more 
<l()<:s  than  it  is  necessarv.  (J.  Thou  art  useful  to  more  men  than  mvself. 
7.  That  man  '**kills  more  enemies  by  huni::er  and  cruelty  than  the 
soldiers  by  the  sword.  8.  Our  soldiers  receive  fewer  wounils  than  the 
enemies.  \).  Thou  ])ermitt<'st  fewer  soldiers  to  go  away  tlian  it  is  allowed 
to  thee.  10.  Thou  hast  fewer  enemies  than  even  I.  11.  1  have  oftener 
the  fever  than  even  thou.  12.  You  oftener  ''a})ply  tin?  spurs  than  the 
^'^l^ridles.  13.  Tlie  (iermans  are  less  often  '^visited  by  merchants  than 
the  (jauls.  14.  It  is  less  often  necessary  to  excite  than  to  restrain  one'a 
self. 

B.  Quantitative  Co.MrAiiisox. 

Degree  of  equality.  1.  Oajus  tantum  auctoritatis  habet  (juantum 
tu.     2.  Tu  tatito  odio  me  perseipieris,  quanto  homines -*^'inimicissimi.     3. 

1  To  prect-de.  '  Nobody.  3  Tlu-atre.  *  Sj.t'otator.  »  To  hold.  «  To  r:tiso.  i  Adire. 
*  Fi-iiUr  inav  bo  [>lac?d  in  the  ac-cusalivfe  or  in  llie  noiniiuiiive.  What  dilU-rence  iimken 
this  in  st^nsi'?  »  To  irite  hm-k.  n-pollere.  ^"  O.v-driver.  'iTokt-ip.  '^  i^^.  impiT- 
sonal  i)rt'ilicate  must  be  placed  either  before  or  after  tlie  whole  coin[»rtrative  period,  when 
the  compareil  pliri><es  eoniain  coiainon  worils.  *3  g^  dare^  to  <levote  one's  self.  •*  JW'eil. 
1*  bUbuluuL    »*Tollere.    ^' AdhibGre.    '^  jOfeumu^    i»  Adiro.    ^**  luimical.  *.MHrtius. 


THE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMPARISON.   213 

Pomponius  autem  tibi  tanta  beneficia  pnebet,  quanta  mihi  ipsi.  4. 
Tantum  hiboran^  debes  quantum  proficere  vis.  5.  Huic  vulnen  tantun- 
dem  cune  adhibere  quantum  periculf.so  cuidam  morbo  neeesse  est.  0. 
Tot  tant(jsque  la  bores  ^^buscipio,  (piot  (iuantos<iue  bene  perficere  i)0ssum. 
7  Prater  tuus  tantum  sapientiic  -^'prodit  quantum  virtutis.  8.  Tan- 
tum auri  mihi  deest,  quantum  abs  te  -'-suppeditari  uequit.  U.  Democn- 
tus  tantum  ridet,  quantum  Heraclltus  Here  solet. 

1  I  owe  to  thee  just  as  much  money,  as  thou  to  me.  2.  He  shows  as 
much  boldness  as  i-norance.  3.  You  cultivate  as  mucli  gram  as  we  oiir- 
selves.  4.  This  -'beverage  contains  as  nmch. water  as  wine.  o.  VVe 
feel  as  manv  and  as  great  pains  as  thy  brother.  0.  Ihis  smal  fetate 
carries  ..n  as  manv  and  great  wars,  as  generally  are  -/dreaded  by  the 
ffreatt^st  and  ^Hvealthiest  nations.  7.  We  fear  these  gifts  ot  the  Greeks 
just  as  much  as  tlie  Trojans.  8.  We  -Metest  these  treaties  as  much  as 
ycnir  emperor.     0.  This  king  fears  death  as  much  as  any  other  tyran.. 

('oMi>ARATiVE  DECREE.— 1.  CatuUus  plus  - "siuivitatis  habet  quaiu 
rob.)ris.     2.  Hoc  negotium  plus  detriment!  nobis  atfert  quam  commodi. 

3  i*lus  lal.oris  ab  hostibus  perfertur,  (luam  a  militibus  nostris.  4.^  1  em- 
pus  plus  doloris  leiiTre  st)let,  (luam  omnia  amicdrum -;^olatia.  o.  Vos 
minus  tidu.'i;e  habere  videmini,  (]uam  ipsi  hostes.  0.  Nemini'm  scrii>- 
torem  plus  diligimus  quam  Cicerdnem.  7.  Pueri  magis  ludere  xpiam 
laborare  videntur.  8.  Ambulare  malumus  (piam  sedere.  U.  Mdites 
mortem  gloriosam  subire,  quam  vitam  tur[)ein  -  degere  malunt.  lU. 
Hostinm  exercitus  plus  -^"tirGnum  continet  quam  «''veteranorum. 

1  Our  leaders  show  nmre  courage  than  wisdom.  2.  Hogs  have  more 
lani  than  the  other  animals.     3.  You  must  drink  more  water  than  wine. 

4  Thou  appliest  less  diligence  to  this  =^-work  than  my  brother,  o.  W  e 
assist  Poinponius  more  bv  ^^ 'material  help  than  by  mlvice,  but  you  gene- 
rallv  give  to  him  less  help  than  advice.  0.  We  like  more  to  ^^make  our 
livili-  bv  labor,  than  to  -covet  the  property  =*"of  others,  i.  1  his  city 
nourishes  less  bv  onunerce  than  by  the  -thrift  and  gooa  '^customs  of  the 
inhabitants.  8.'  Thou  seemest  to  love  Serapronius  more  than  anv  oJur 
man-^  i).  We  will  m)t  love  (Jod  less  than  -^'treasure.  10.  Oajus  dis- 
pleas.'S  more  than  his  brother,  but  less  than  thou.  11.  It  is  less  expedi- 
ent to  punish  crimes  than  to  prevent  [them.] 

C.    CoMPARisox  OF  Descriptive  Adjectives. 

Degree  of  equai^ity.— 1.  Regina  tam  prodiga  est,  quam  ejus  mater. 
2  Militu'rt  nostri  tarn  fortes  (piam  generosi  esse  videntur.  3.  tecrip- 
tdrum  ve-terum  lectio  tam  jucnnda  est  quam  utilis.  4.  A  obis  tam  torti- 
bus  (uiam  cautis  esse  neeesse  est.  5.  Uermandrum  legati  tam  arrogan- 
ter  res]>ondent  .luam  inepte.  «.  Hoc  iter  tam  longum  est  quam  moles- 
tum.  7.  Socii  tamtaide  adveinunt,  quam  celeriter  eflfugiunt.  8.  lam 
diu  laboramus  quam  diu  et  voluinuset  possumus^ 

l^nt.is      '-ift  Detest ari       2' Sweetness.      '■"<  Consolation.       -isiolead.     •'"Areciuit.  A 

^"eSn.  ^"^T^^  Material  help,  .;....  pL  -  To  ^-:^^^^::^:r'^^'^ 
»6  t'„„cn,,iscere.  '«Translate  -><trano<'  (oJurxm)  property  ^.^i  Sr^nce  woiUd 
»»  "JAnr  may  be  iranslaLe.l  l.y  an  aecu^ative  or  a  nuuiuiative.  W  hul  diHerence  woiiia 
this  make  in  seusc?     *"  Ui<cs.      •  Umleilake. 


2U   THE  COMBINATION  OF  PHRASES  BY  COMPARISON". 


1.  The  c:eneral  seems  to  be  as  -"Hiu-i'ssfiil  as  his  brother.  The  king 
intends  ti^be  a»  severe  as  just.  :}.  We  are  as  desii(»us  of  a  ■''clianixe  of 
government  as  vou.  4.  It  is  allowed  to  ))e  as  short  as  thou  wishest. 
5.  Tills  work  seems  to  be  as  easy  as  ]>leasant.  (».  Th«?  general  directs 
the  ambassadors  to  be  as  ])olite  as  cautious.  7.  Sempronius  answers  as 
kindlv  as  the  otlier  ambassadors.  8.  I  cannot  -*-M)ear  injuries  as  i)atiently 
as  it  IS  necessary.  9.  This  nuigistrate  speaks  as  absurdly  and  meanly, 
as  it  seems  to  be  his  custom.  10.  The  enemies  arrive  as  suddenly  aa 
they  ^Mepart.     11.  We  err  as  long  as  we  live. 

CoMPAKATiVE  DE(H{EE. — 1.  Valles  fecuudiores  esse  solent  quam 
monf«'S.  2.  GalU  Poenis  amic-idres  sunt  (juam  Ronianis.  ;i.  Equos 
meliores  habeo  quam  lil)ros.  4.  Dux  ilie  pecunbe  cupidior  est  <]uam 
gU)ri;e.  5.  Homo  ille  ditior  est  quam  Crassus,  felicior  (luam  Sulla, 
beniirnior  quam  Titus.  0.  Nemo  homo  magis  nelarius  esse  ]K)test,  (piam 
Catiffna.  7.  Aurum  minus  utile  esse  videtur,  qupm  ferrum.  S.  Lucullus 
mairnificentius  cxenat  (juam  IMogenes.  \).  (lermani  victoriam  acrius 
disputant  quam  Ualli.  10.  Donatus  Virgilii  carmina  melius  enarrare 
videtur  (puim  iuteri.retes  r<'centiores.  11.  Facilius  est  navem  regere 
quam  civitatem.  1'2.  Lai»ides  fniugere  pra>stat,  viuam  tale  negotium 
l>erficere.  lo.  Animi  doloribus  vehementius  torquPniur  quam  corporis 
cruciatibus  (torment.) 

1.  (Jajus  is  more  modest  than  thou.  2.  This  road  H'ter')  is  shorter  tlian 
the  Flaluinian  (FUinuhin.s)  way.  o.  This  crime  is  more  serious  than 
the  theft  of  Gajus.  4.  Our  soldiers  are  bravi-r  than  any  troops  of  the 
enemies,  o.  Our  private  houses  an;  more  maguiticeut  than  any  public 
buildings  of  the  Persians.  0.  We  intend  to  build  better  ships  than  the 
I'hmlish  {Aii(iliis).  7.  No  writer  writes  more  useful  books  than  Seiii- 
jmmius.  8.  The  northwiuds  (^/7'/<Vr>)  are  less  dangerous  to  our  coasts 
than  the  southwinds.  1).  Mice  generally  are  less  injurious  to  the  [stand- 
inu]  crops  than  moles  [td^pa).  10.  It  is  more  i)leasant  t<»  ])ardon,  than  to 
l)U*iiish.  11.  It  is  h'ss  necessary  to  be  wise,  than  to  be  honest.  12.  It 
generallv  is  more  easy  to  hear  than  to  si)eak  ;  but  often  it  is  less  ditiicult 
to  SiK-ak,  than  to  be  silent.  13.  Th(^  Gauls  seem  to  seize  {arripere)  this 
occasion  less  eagerly  than  the  (lermans.  14.  Wise  men  live  mon;  hap- 
pily than  fools  (.'<^//^'^v).  l.").  A  more  disgraceful  crime  cannot  be  con- 
ceived {coi/ita/r)  than  perfidy.  lU.  The  general  directs  Crassus  to  march 
{iter  fdCfir)  more  cautiously  than  before.  17.  We  can  more  easily  attack 
enemies,  tluin  defend  our  own  boundaries.  18.  You  generally  sleep 
longer  than  you  work,  and  eat  oftem^r  than  you  read. 

D.    PROMISCUOUS   EXERCISES   ON   THE   WORDS  moTC   AND   IcSS. 

1.  We  teach  more  scholars  than  you,  but  your  scholars  are  more 
learned.  2.  Thebes  has  more  houses,  but  less  inhabitants  than  Syracuse. 
3-  This  writer  has  more  grace  (l<pos),  but  less  clearness  {pcrspii'Mitaa) 
than  C'ato;  he  employs  more  words,  but  less  lights  {lumen).  4.  Gajus 
is  more  ably  {(iptns)  defended,  than  he  can  defend  hiinxdf.  o.  ^^'e  have 
more  forests  than  the  Sicilians,  anil   less  fields ;    but   our  forests  are 


<»  Felix. 
4*  Abire. 


43  A  change  of  governuient,  res  noca  (literally  new  affairs).    *'  Ferre. 


IDIOMS  OF  THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


215 


Bmaller  than  their  fields,  and  our  fields  produce  (f/ignere)  more  gram 
than  their  forests  wood  (/<ir//^/m)-  ^-  Our  meadows  are  more  adapted 
iidourus)  to  culture  {cultura),  than  the  fields  of  the  Scythians;  but  their 
fiehls  are  more  easilv  harvested  {lucUre)  than  our  meadows.  ^-  ^  J^el 
more  ])ain  than  thou,  but  1  endure  it  more  easily  than  thou.  8.  Wo 
understand  Homer  more  easily  than  Pindar  {Pindarus),  but  this  very 
dillicultv  gives  {<iprre)  more  pleasure  to  us,  than  that  smooth  {lems) 
stream  (  11'irneu)  of  the  Homeric  {HomcrkuH)  language  {oratio)  9.  My 
father  loVes  thee  more  than  his  children,  and  his  children  love  thee 
more  than  themselves.  10.  This  orator  has  more  gall  than  honey,  yet 
he  is  more  eagerly  read  and  by  more  men,  than  any  other  writer. 


LESSON    XXXIX. 

IDIOMS  OF  THE  COMPARATIVE  PERIOD. 
THE  ABSOLUTE   DEGREE. 

§  306.  The  Latin  language  has  several  peculiarities  in  form- 
ing the  comparative  period  :  1.  In  regard  to  completing  the 
second  member  ;  2.  In  changing  the  second  member  into  an 
OBJECT  of  the  comparative  degree  ;  3.  In  deteriniiuzg  the  degree 
of  difference  •  4.  In  cm})loying  the  comparative  period  as  a  mere 
grammatical  form  for  the  limitation  of  numeral  and  quantitative 
relations. 

A,    COMPLETING   THE    SECOND    MEMBER. 

§  JI07.  AVh'en  attributive  phrases  belong  to  both  members 
of  the  comparison,  which  have  the  same  governing  noun,  both 
laniruages  omit  the  common  governing  noun,  but  the  English 
language  often  iudicates  it  by  certain  form-adjectives,  which  can- 
not be  employed  in  Latin. 

1.  AVhen  the  attributes  are  genitives,  the  English  language 
uses  the  form-adjectives  that  (those),  the  one  in  place  of  the 
omitted  governing  noun  in  the  second  member,  which  in  Latin 
cannot  be  translated,  as  : 

The  garden  of  Gajus  is  more  beautiful,  than  that  of  Sempronius, 

G^ji  hortus  pidchrior  ext  quam  Scji  (not  ille  Siji.) 
The  leader  of  the  Romans  is  as  brave  as  the  one  of  the  Gauls, 
llmnaiidrum  dux  taiii  fi/rtis  c^t  quam   GallOrum  (not  unus 
GaMOrum.) 


216 


IDIOMS   OF   THE    COMPARATIVE    PERIOD. 


Tlie  fields  of  tho  Gauls  aro  more  fi-rtilo  than  tJmsr  of  tho  Genv.ans, 
Off/lui-'f/n  (/f/ri  ficiiiidiorcs  sunt  qaani  O'c rmandni/n  (.not  illi 
G(  rNia/ioruNi.) 

2.  When  the  attriljiite  in  tlie  second  member  is  a  possessive 
adjective,  the  KnirUsli  lanirun.G^c  eniphiys  peeidiar  suhstantive  forms 
of  t!ie  possessives  (mlnr,  thine,  hers,  ours,  yours,  theirs),  which 
in  Latin  are  expressed  by  tlie  nsnal  possessive  adjectives,  agreeing 
with  tlie  omitted  governing  nonns,  as  : 

The  house  of  Gajus  is  greater  than  ours,  Guji  domiis  major  est 

qnttin  nodru. 
The  sons  of  Senipionius  are  more  learned  than  mine,  Simproiin 

Jilii  doctionn  stint  quiun  ntd. 

Keni.  1.  Frciiuently  the  adjcrtive  '^y?r//"  is  added  to  the  English  pos- 
sessives,  which  tlu-n  retain  their  adjective  form,  as:  77///  brac<  n/  is 
(jnatt  r  thuii  in  if  oirn,  Virtus  tua  major  fst  <iuam  nu'a.  /f'y'"'"*  ^H^'^'^ 
tky  chUdnn  riwrc  t/ian  his  own,  Gajus  liberos  tuos  plus  diligit  quam 

BUOS. 

*  3.  When  tlie  attributes  are  other  adjectives,  the  English 
langnage  often  indicates  the  omitted  governing  noun  in  the  second 
member  by  the  nnmeral  one,  which  cannot  be  translated  in  Latin, 
the  adjective  of  the  second  member  agreeing  with  its  governing 
noun  understood,  as  : 

A  hrick  house  is  firmer  than  a  wooden  one,  Domns  late  vie  ia  fir  mior 

t.st  qnttiii  litjhea  (not  lujiua  una.) 
Old  friends  are  l)etter  than  new  ones,  Amlci  veteres  meliores  sunt 

quoin  noci  (not  noci  uni.) 
No   writers  are  more   renowned    than    thi'se,   Scriptures    nuUi 

clariores  aunt,  qtiaiu  hi. 

55  JIO^.  When  an  inflectional  comparative  degree  is  used  as 
PREDICATIVE  ADJECTIVE,  all  otlicr  words  in  both  members  being 
common,  the  Latin  language  })laces  the  compared  adjective  of  the 
second  member  likewise  in  the  comparative  degree.  Li  English 
the  second  adjective  always  stands  in  the  positive  degree,  and  the 
comparative  in  the  first  member  is  formed  either  by  "  niore^^  or 
by  '*  ro.lher,^^  as  : 

The  Greeks  are  rather  {more)  mse  than  brace,  Gra?ci  sapientioreB 
sunt  quani  fortiures. 

Rem.  2.  Often  the  Latin  lanf^uaijrc  leaves  the  second  adj.'ctive  in  tlie 
positive,  and  th»'  comi)aiative  of  tlie  first  must  tiien  always  he 
formed  l>j  "  inof/ix,''  which  is  nlwai/.s  necessary,  when  one  of  the  two 
adjectives  does  not  form  infleclionul  degrees,  as : 


IDIOMS   OF   THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


217 


Artem  juris  civilis  hahetis,  magis  magnam  atque  uberem  quam 
diliicilem  et  obscuram.  You  have  the  science  of  civU  law,  rather 
great  and  rich,  than  difficult  and  obscure. 

§  309.  The  comparative  period  often  is  combined  with 
phrases,  which  logically  belong  to  one  of  the  two  members  only. 
This  combination  gives  rise  to  several  peculiar  grammatical  forms, 
which  mostly  belong  to  the  comparison  of  sentences  (Part  II). 
Here  belongs  the  case,  when  an  attributive  phrase,  containing 
the  comparative  degree,  is  combined  with  a  predicative  phrase, 
belonging  to  the  first  member  only,  as : 

We  liave  a  greater  general  than  Caesar,  Ducem  majorem  hahemus 
quam  Caesarem,  or:  Ducem  majorem  habemus  quam  Caesar  est. 

Kern.  3.    Analyzing  this  sentence,  it  is   evident,  that  the  predicative 
phrase  "  vve  have"  does  not  belong  to  the  second  member: 

First  mp:mijeu  :  We  have  a  greater  general ; 

Second  member:  Ccesar  is  a  worse  general  (than  ours.) 
The  copula  is  in  the  second  member  does  not  occur  in  the  first 
member,  and  therefore  ouglit  to  be  and  often  w  expressed  in  Latin. 
But  it  frequentlv  is  omitted,  and  by  a  peculiar  attraction  of  case 
the  subject  CiEsdr  is  then  i)laced  in  the  accusative,  agreeing  with 
the  accusative  duceui  in  the  first  member.  This  attraction,  how- 
ever, only  takes  place,  when  the  noun  of  the  first  member  is  in  the 
ACCUSATIVE,  not  when  it  is  in  other  oblique  cases.  We  then 
■  always  must  retain  the  copula  in  the  second  member,  placing  the 
noun  in  the  nominative,  as : 

We  are  obedient   to   a   greater   king  than  Philip,  Majdri  regi 
ohidimu.i  quam  Philippus  est  (not  qaaiii  Pldlippo.) 
^^  Attraction  is  an  agreement  contrary  to  general  grammatical 

rules. 

B.    CHANGE    OF    THE    SECOND    MEMBER   INTO    AN    OBJECT. 

§  310.  WHien  the  second  member  in  the  comparison  of  dif- 
ferent degrees  contains  nothing  bnt  the  subject,  either  alone  or 
in  connection  with  attributes,  the  Latin  langnage  frequently  omits 
the  connecting  word  quam  and  places  the  subject  of  the  second 
member  in  the  ablative  case,  changing  thus  the  second  member 
into  an  object  of  the  comparative  degree,  as  : 

Gajus  is  braver  than  Sejiis,  Gajus  fortior  est  Sejo. 
Rem.  4.  The  arrangement  in  this  case  either  is  the  same  as  in  combina- 
tion of  ol)jective  phrases  {Gajus  Si  jo  fortior  est),  or  the  ablative  may 
follow  the  corai)arative,  the  same  as  in  the  usual  arrangement  of  tho 
comi)arative  period. 
Rem.  5.  'I'his  use  of  the  ablative  case  always  is  allowed,  when  the  noun 
of  the  second  member,  by  completing  the  latter,  will  appear  to  be 

lU 


218  IDIOMS   OF   THE    COMPARATIVE   TERIOD. 

^::':Z:t  0iw-r«  t  ih!" al-latn-o  _wi,„out  v-..-^.  as  o.,ject  of 

„ef„..««-,.,  following  or  l''-^-f;"f,'\,'^^7,f  ;','.""  »,m  could  (mn, 
oiwrimr  and  «y.e  are  translate..!  li>  the  j    ia«s     (      _ 

'^^,:^:;;r:;:;:;'«;(^^^^      -»^  tk-sc  «^airs  aren^or» 

^n:Z  %  '^:^::^'^:^  l^St..  .  greater.  U.an  H 
(^^lUo  loquacior  est,  Gajus  is  more  talkative  than  usually. 
C.   THE    ABLATIVE    OF   PIFFEBESCE. 

8  «1  1 .  Tlio  comparative  [.eriod  as  such  shows  ruly,  Ihaf  Hie 
conn......  phrases  are  different  or  equal,  but  not  the  amoint,  h,j 

v'ieh  the,'  diirer.  This  an.ount  of  ditterenc.  n.ay  -c  express  d 
either  bv  quantitative  nouns  in  eonncetion  wuli  nlmlbals 
(L  XXXIV  Rem.  2)  or  by  indefinite  qcantit.vtive  advkrus 
(s'->Gy)  '  These  noaus  or  adverbs  are  made  objects  of  the  com- 
mratiN^  de.-ree.  The  nouns  are  placed  in  the  ablative  case,  and 
^  ianiit^tive  adverbs  assume  the  form  of  the  ablative  ne.tek 
sivcuiAE  Of  their  adjectives*    {quanto,  mullo,  much,     >   t.  r , 

ablative  ol'  diHVrentc. 

Gajus  is  (bv)  two  inches  taller  tlum  Sejus,  Gajus  d„obus  digilis procc 
%'e:ia'ls'2;00(/;aces  farther  distant  than  the  camp.  Alexia  du<^vs  miU 

This  r..ad  is  by  ■"^"^:  «>"■«/  ""•'','.  '^f.*'  o  qmiuto    clilkaM.^ 

How  much  more  diligent  i&  feejus  inau    vjaju.,   ^ 

^^■^Ue'-wo^ns  nornule  larger  than  the  fox,  L.pus  alicinanto  n.<jor  est 
qua  til  lulpes. ^ . 

„e  luLcli..able,  »a  w«  «re  «ccustumcd  lu  Si.J  n.  our  sr»."""... 


IDIOMS   OF   THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


219 


Gajus  spoaks  a  little  oftener  than  Sejus,  Gjjuh  pernio  saepius  loanitur 
qwi.m  S(jns.  ^ 

Tlie  entiiuies  are  by  one-half  more  than  our  ^oldinis.  Hastes  dim idio 
piftns  sunt  qiKtm  militcs  iwstn. 

Rem^.^  8.  In  the  English  exi)rossions  "many  more",  " mvrli  more", 
"  inurh  bttter",  the  words  "  mxrh"  and  "  77iore"  indicate  the  amolnt 
OF  DiKFERENc  E,  and  hencc  must  be  expressed  by  an  adverbial  abla- 
tive in  Latin,  as  :  T/ze  enemits  huce  many  more  troops  tlum  me,  llostes 
copias  multo  majores  habent  quam  nos.  It  is  much  more  pleasant  to 
rccfii'6  tJian  ^>  .yi>(',  Mnlto  jucundius  est  ace ipere  quam  dare.  For 
tlie  use  ot  nihilo  as  abhitivo  of  ditference  see  Part  II,  ]>.  2(54. 

KenL  1).  The  English  expressions  ''as  much  af/ain'\  ''as  high  again", 

''tmce  as  large",  etc.,  indicating  the  amount  of  difference,  are  ex' 

pressed  by  the  ablatives  altera  tauto  \\\t\\  a  comparative,  as:   This 

Juki  IS  as  large  again  as  that  of  Gajus,  Hie  ager  altero  tanto  major 

est  quam  Seji.     The  numeral  exjn-essions  "  three,  four,  etc.,  times  as 

large,  as  smjll,  as  much,  etc"  are  transhited  either  bv  cardinal 

ADVERiis  with  the  ablative  tanto,  -r^r   by  cakdixal  adjectives 

witli  the  aidative  partibns  in  connection  with  comparatives,  as  : 

The  garden  of  (jajus  is  live  times  as  large  as  that  of  Sejii,  Gaji 

/tortus  qninquiis  tanto  major  est  qmtni  Si  ji,  or  quinqnepeirtibus 

major  (St. 

Rem.  10.  Tile  ablative  of  difference  may  be  connected  with  those  words 
which  mi'ohe  a  comj)arative  degree  (J^  2i).')),  as :  multo  prargtat,  it  is 
much  preferabU\  it  is  much  hattar ;  pa ue is  diihas  pust  (instead  of 
2>o8t((i),  a  lew  days  later;  multo  ante  (inst.  of  antea),  much  before, 
much  sooner. 

Rem.  11.  The  aniomit  of  difference  niav  also  be  added  to  an perln tires,  flic 
e.\))ivssion  -by  far"  being  rendered  longp.,  or  m>il/o,  as  :  This  liorse 
is  the  quickest  by  six  paces,  Hic  equiis  sex  pas.'^ibus  celerrinms  est. 
DuiiHK.nx  is  by  far  tlie  richest,  Dumnori.v longe  {multo) diti^dmu^  ed. 

Rem.  12.  Tiie  amount  of  difference  may  also  be  expressed  by  whole  sen- 
tences, as :  The  air  is  so  much  the  denser  (crassiori,  the  nearer  it  is 
to  the  earth  (quo  proprior  est  terra;).  For  this  combination  see 
Part  II,  p.  701,  5. 

JJ.     THE    comparative    PERIOD    EMPLOYED    FOR    LIMITATION. 

§  Jll  ^.  The  comparative  period  often  is  employed  to  doter- 
mitic  wttJun  a  certdin  limit  numeral  or  other  ideas,  which  are 
su.'-x-eptible  of  degrees,  as  :  more  thm  six  7nlles,  less  than  50 
pace.%  more  than  human,  more  than  a  revolt.  The  word  more 
is  then  translated  by  plus  or  amplius,  the  word  less  by  minus, 
as  : 

They  kill  more  than  1,000  enemies,  plus  (aynplius)  quam  mille  hostU 
vccldunt. 
Uajus  ijA  more  than  diligent,  Gajus  plus  quam  diligens  est. 
Hercules  is  more  than  a  man,  Hercules  plus  quam  liomo  esL 


220 


IDIOMS   OF   THE   COMPARATIVP:   PERIOD. 


Bern  IH  Comparativo  exprosaiona  liko  theso  cannot  be  resolvod  into  two 
ditferent  m.-nihers.  and  hence  havr  only  tlio  forw,  \m,\  tlie  logical 
weauinn  of  a  c<.mparatiN-e  period.  IL-re  the  conipaiative  words 
more  and  U.ss  cannot  be  considered  as  members  ot  plirasrs  mucjo 
thev  form  onlv  one  idea  in  connection  with  those  words  which  tlu-y 
limU.  Thev  are  nothing  but  PA KTi(i-KS  (see  Book  IV. ).^  In  ;>naly- 
/in.rconipnrative  expressions  of  this  kind  the  coml)inations  '  more 
than   six",    "more  than    human"    always   must   be   considered   aa 

SINGLE  WOllDS.  ,  •       ♦•  •*    • 

Rem.  14.  The  connecting  word  q^KWi,  wlien  in  this  combination  it  is 
followed  bv  NUMEK.VLS,  is  very  frequiMitly  omitted.  an<l  th.'  numeral 
phrase  ir^'nerallv  stands  in  that  case,  which  it  would  have  without 
the  comVarativJs  plu^,  ampll".^  and  tniints.  But  sometimes,  though 
rarely,  the  phrase  containing  the  numeral  is  ]>laced  m  the  ahlatin  k. 
according  to  the  construction  mentioned  i^  olO. 

We  hire  more  than  'i{)\)  eupthu'X,V\n^  (am].lins)  ducentos  ca].ti- 
vos    habemus   (more  seldom:   plan  ducattiH   expttns  or  plus 
quam  dueentoii  cupt'ico»). 
More  than  2000  ennniex  enter  the  gntef<.  Plus  duo  milba  hostium 
portas  intrant  (more   seldom:  plus  dnobun  uaUtbuH,  or  pins 
qiiani  duo  viillia). 
Rem   15.     In  a  similar  manner  the  age  of  persons  is  <'xpressed  by  the 
limiting'-  comparative  period,  as:  older  or  younger  tlian  thirty  yeary. 
Ik-re  we  must  us(;  or  understand   the   participle /m^M.x  (l)orn)      llie 
Latin  expression  is  threefold  :    1.  nntus  plun  {amphns,  minus)  tnjiiit- 
ta  annus;  or,  2.  mn}ur  {minor)  tri'jinta  annox;  or,  8   inojor  {minnr) 
trif/inta  annis.     With  the  last  two  expressions  the  addition  ot  uatMi 
is  rare. 

JE.       THE    ABSOLUTE    DEGREE. 

§.  :{ 1  :i.  Tlie  ABSOLUTE  dogroe  denotes  a  high,  h)\v,  or  modi- 
fied iiitcn.sity.     It  is  expressed  : 

1.  Ill  the  NUMERAL  comparison  by  the  indefinite  numerals  multi, 

panel,  aliquot,  eomplures,  etc. 

Rem  16     The  adieotive  muff  us  »,vl   its  plural  mum  may  be  eonsi.lered  aa  positivkr  of 

would  tor../,...siilvo  .U-rees  A.r  the  o<Mn,,arat,v.y>/'o>«.  ^'■'^^  "'f ''''»'  ^'^^^.'^  ^J 
int..M^itv.  it  Uiustut)e  Mn  abschit,-  .Lirrti-.  h.mI  it  is  nmn.  oom-ct  to  a*bunu-.  that 
j,/.urt6  'and  pln-s  are  orisrinal  ciuparHlives  wtt/.uut  a  positive. 

2.  In  the  quantitative  comparison  by  the  quantitative  adjec- 
tives mulho^,  paulum,  pariim,  sati%  auqmntns,  nimlus  and  by 
the  quantitative  adverbs  admodum  valde,  very  much  ;  vehrmcw 
ter  exceedingly,  extremelv  ;  VHfg?ioprre  {stmnNoj^rn'),  very 
much,  greatlv,  very  greatly,  and  by  those  adverbs,  which  are 
formed  fromUie  quantitative  adjectives,  as  nmltwn,  j'^^rum,  etc. 
(see  §  2tV.K) 


IDIOMS   OF   THE    COMPAKATIYE    PERIOD. 


221 


3    In  the  comparison  of  descriptive  adjectives  by  a  coraliinatioa 
of  the  descriptive  adjectives  or  adverbs  with  the  following  quau- 

titative  adverbs  : 

admodum   or  valde,  very         mmis,  too 

satis,  svfficknthj,  enough,        parum,  too  little,  not-enough, 

soineichat, 

''''  'vorv  ..loo.u-nt  udde  (admodnm)  dlsertns ;  too  boldly,  nimisandM 
Zr^ cl3y"  """?!'.  «'?"  M"ride;  sufficiently  strong,  mtu  vmv 
dm-  not  bravolv  onoHgli, F"'»'"/'""'''''''- 
8  311.    The  absolute   degree   i«    all  kinds  of  comparison, 
denotiixv  a  /.i'/h  degree,  and  in  English  expressed  by  ven/,  .s  fre- 
q    ;;;i^forn.ed    .."the  prefx,..,  connec.ed  -U.  a  jeeuv..  and 
adverl'x    as  :  ncrcoUdas,   very   strong  ;  p'^rnudU,  ^^n'^^^'i' 
TnL;..<s    verv   great ;    perbrevls,   very  short ;    perd.Jficd.s, 
Cv  diffienlt ;  p^rlU  v^r/well,  e,c.    Sometimes  the  prehx^.a* 
is  used  instead  ot>e/-,  as  praealtus,  very  high. 

R  «HI  Tliereo-nlar  inflectional  compakative  and  siperla- 
.nld  "s  ;;;  Unently  employed  in  the  sense  of  absolute 
de..rees  The  compabaiue  has  then  one  of  three  meanings, 
''rutU,-,  "  so,.e,c/uU'\  or  "  too-  and  the  supeklative  the  meau- 
in.r  of  "  i'ety\  "  extreiiiely",  exceedintjbj,  as  : 
"         .      ,     1-7     • ,.  ...v,7  Tl.pmistoolos  lives  too  free.    C'^nM  ineau- 

v:d^:::^:^itnt:^  «1^-  -„.  .o ,.  rati,,,  siow.  6.™««. 

fMne  pugnant,  the  Uerniuns  hglit  very  braN  ely. 
^     \-    K  dc.srree  "  a"  lii-b  as  pcissible,"  is  expressed  by  qimm  before  u 
^''"•,  »:,*,<;  f  «-it  1.  or  vithont'tl..>  addition  of  pos^  (conjugated  in  the 
«»;),)(.«(((,  Willi  o[      '  decrree  is  expressed  1.  either  by 

reipiired  form).     In  l.ngli.-h  imb  "^-■J',  ,  '  ^    i,v    the 

an'  adjecive   ^l^^..Xa}^^^JrT^,ok\A.,  is  long 
conipanuive  wo  d  a.,     ith     ^'-f^,};^^^,.^  «-ith  ••;,e.«6fe"    (the 

f  '"    t    ,^;8ible    the  greatest   possible,   etc.);  or  3.  by   the   verb 
1:X'  (ar  mli  is  I  call  a.  well'as  we  can,  as  many  as  they  can  or 

""Ti!e'ii"',;,.,ns  kill  as  many  enemies  as  possible  (as  they  can),  Bo- 
We"  «'iTtfearrv  as  much  gold  as  possible  (as  we  can),  J«a». 

yiL'=Tr:;TirrriSirifp:Masgw 

Bible),  quam  optinm  libros  {potedis)  kgere  dMis. 


222 


IDIOMS   OF   THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


IDIOMS   OF   THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


223 


Tliey  study  as  diTi^ontly  as  rossible  (as  tlioy  can),  qnam  dillgentU' 

He  (lireT'ts  his  li.uUciKiiit  to  advanco  by  the  greatest  possible  jour- 
neys  (as  irreat  journeys  as  possible,  as  he  can),  Lefjdtum  quam 
rnaxiwin  itiitevil>i(t<  (jtoie.st)  projiclsci  jiihet. 
Rem.  18.  ''As  sooii  as  posdhlt*  is  translated  by  quam  primiim. 

EXERCISES. 

A.      COMrLETING  THE  SECOND   MEMBEK. 

1    Oalldrum  castra  oppido  pro])ir>ra  sunt  quam  Romannrum.     2.  Ro 
Tuanr.rum   naves  altiures  sunt  quam  Oallnrum.     3.  Minerva?  t.-mplum 
mao-nitieeiitius  est  quam  Jundnis.     4.  (  a>saris  nomm  siepms  memoratur 
quam    PomiH-ji      5.  Ilomeri   carmina  a  plurihus   homnubus  h'guntur 
quam  Ib'siodi'.     0.  Alexandri  r.r"um  pra'chirius  est  quam  Phdippi.     7. 
Ao-(>r 'Se-'-estanus  plus  frunu-nti  'i^^iiiuit  qunm    Tarentinus.     8.   \  en(Ti8 
Su^la  chu ius  lucet  quam  Satunii.     1).  Animi  morbi  ],erniciosi«»re3  sunt 
(piam  corporis.      10.  Audacia  nulla   major  esse  i)otest  quam  (  atilinae. 
11    Pa'ientia  nulla  major  esse   iK)test  quam   nostra.     12.  Vir  bonus  et 
sapiens  Hitilitati   communi  plus  "consulit  quam  sua\     1:5.  Nulli  inilitea 
fortidres    esse   possunt   quam  hi.     14.  Seuii)ronii   diligentia  nuijor  esse 
solet  (piam  tua.     15.  Lepdnes  du;p  diutius   i)U-nant  quam  ceteno.     lb. 
Homines  honest!  et  ''sancti  Ix-atius  vivere  solent  (pumi  improbi.   1<.  Am- 
malia  mai;na  diutius  vivere  solent  quam  ])arva.     18.  Scuta  "lerrea  corima 
melius  te<.^unt  quam  lii,niea.     19.  Ab  liominibus  inferiorihus  vinci  turpma 
est  quam  a  paribus.'^  ^20.  Cives  nostri  hoc  helium  fortius  gerunt  quam 
felicius.      21.  PersiC   ditidres    sunt    quam    fortidres.      22.    Ihec    concio 
i"amplior  est  quam  "pra-sidi   gratior.     23.  llonestidres   quosdam   viroa 
memonlre    i)ossumus   quam   Themistoclem.     24.  Regem   cleinenti(»reiu 
habemus  quam  Titum,  sapientidrem  quam  M.  Aurelium.     25.  Hoc  reg- 
num  melidri  viro  dan^volumus  (luam  Antiochus  est. 

1.  The  '^power  of  Jupiter  is  greater  than  that  of  Hercules.  2.  The 
genius  of  this  general  is  greater  than  that  of  the  greatest  commandera 
of  our  timt!.  3.  The  industry  of  the  Sicilians  Si'ems  more  usetul  to 
i-inanlvind  than  that  of  the  Carthaginians.  4.  Our  tenr.les  are  liolier 
than  thoseof  the  (Jauls.  5.  The  armies  of  the  'n^russians  tight  more 
bravely  and  •■'successfully  than  those  of  the  ''Austriaus.  0.  Our  deteats 
are  f<wer  than  those  of  the  Italians.  7.  We  rather  wish  to  imitate  tho 
language  {(/I'atlo)  of  Cicero  than  that  of  Sallust.  8.  The  candidate  ol 
the'^Patricians  is  elected  by  more  votes  than  the  one  of  the  Plebeians. 
9  We  rather  will  yield  to  the  arms  of  the  Romans  than  to  those  of  the 
Greeks.  10.  The  ''ordinances  of  the  tribunes  have  less  authority  than 
those  of  the  consuls.  11.  The  ^'^reign  of  Augustus  is  more  illustrioua 
than  tbat  of  Tiberius.     12.  We  cannot  conceive  {cogitare)  more  abomin- 

1  SfO^xtihiuH.  belonging  to  Segesta.  «  To  produce.  »  TurentlvuM,  beloiiginj:  to  Taron- 
111  *  Intort'st.  6  i'<>),.'<Hf^re,U>  rare  (for  Hiiiii'ihing).  to  uttt-iHl  (to  sonittlmig).  «  Vir- 
luoik»  '  FerreuA,  iron  (a.ij.)  »  In  st-ntt-nces  like  tl.i.s  tiie  sul.j«'Ct-infinitive,  Mhi<-h  ta 
cotniiK.n  to  both  members  (ln-re  vimi)  may  be  onntteii  in  Lntin.  whicii  is  not  a.lmissible 
In  Engisl»  «Assembly.  »o  Splendid,  i»  Pre.sidonl.  ej  l',„^.,iUji.  »3  Mankind,  i/^r»l« 
hnmarium.  »*  lidrussus.  »«  Felix.  »«  Austriacus.  »'  Decrfilum.  »»  Pi-incipiUut  (not 
regnum,  which  is  the  reign  of  a  king). 


tu 


z  t 


able  cr-.mos  than  those  of  Nero.      13.  The  district  oi  ^^Rhegium  has 

more  inhabitants  than  thatof  Tarent.    .14.  It  is  more  profitab le  to  govern 

the  i.rovince  of  Sicil v  than  that  of  Gaul.     15.  It  is  b.tter  to  -'^trengthen 

the  friendshi].  of  the'Si.-ilians  than  that  of  the  other  alhes^of  the  Komaii 

lx-oi»le.     10.  The  star  .Mercury  Is  smaller  than  Jupiter      Iv.  Hus  oration 

^  more  ]»leasant  to  th'3  president  than  mine.     18.    Ihese  words  can  be 

bell^r  undei-st<xxl  than  mv  own.     19.  I  understand  the  method  of  bajus 

as  easilv  as  thine.     20.  Your  soldiers  commit  as  many  crimes  as  ours. 

Si    neEmiH-rorisas  "^Mevoted  to  the  welfare  of  tlie  state  as  to  his 

own      22    (iajus  attends  to  the  atfairs  ..f  -^-^others  as  much  as  to  bis  own. 

2:J    TheRominsseemto  defend  the  rights  of  [theirj  allies  more  care- 

7  Ilv      ///y.M.v)  than  theirown.     24.  It  is  more  disgraceful  to  neglect  the 

id V  u  tairi's  of  others  than  erne  s  own.     25.  The  Romans  rather  wish  to 

c  .:«  u^>ur  provisions  than  their  own.     2«.  The  tenth  legion  hgbts 

noiv  bravely  \han  the  second.     27.  Tliese  trees  are  1^^^;  -^  th^^J^^J^^^^ 

2S    These  p  cture.s  are  more  valuable  than  the  others.     29    This  bi other 

L'more  sober  than  the  other.     ;J0.  1  rather  wish  to  own  this  house  than 


anv  other,     ol.  These  regions 


are  more  fertile  than  any  others.     32.  The 


-  hVrh.r  u()ds  are  more  -'^powerful  than  the  lower  ones. 


88. 


Ditficult 

■l;a::ii^^^>;^'u:e..r^;:rtirmi;d^ 

,4.  Both  banks  of  the  river  are  steep;  »'^t  the  ngh   one  is  lug^^^^ 
the  h'ft      85    It  is  easier  to  conciuer  a  weak  nation  than  a    strong  one. 
•>      The  oritW  ns  of  the  chief  are  rather  -'^sharp  than  elegant;  they  have 
;;uwi   i/cT;    t   an  hoiii^^^^    87    This  -'«pestilence  is  more -alarming  than 

'    ^ruc    ve    ^.  T^anib^^^^  reason  ^di^pntare)  rather  -sop^usti- 

c;U  V  t     m  ■4>gically.     89.  We  read  more  difficult  enters  Uiaii^Cesa^ 

40.  h  is  necessary  to  -appoint  a  more  learned  ^^^^^^^^ 

41.  I  cannot  conceive  a  juster  cause  than  ours.     42.  1  give  tlii^  money 
to  a  more  -^^intluential  man  than  Calidius. 

B     CHANGE  OF  THE  SECOND  MEMBER  INTO  AN  OBJECT. 

1    Thucvdides  Herodoto  36veracior  est.     2.  Antonius  frequentius  errat 

riatdne      8.   Juno  ceteris  deabus  potentior  est.     4.  Am^^-'^^/'^f  ^^/^J^ 

od         eior  est      5.  ^^Bellua   nulla  elephanto  prudentior  est.  _  ^-^^^ 

1  mi  u  vekK-ior  .^t      7.  Nulla  virtus  ^"amabilior  .-st  modes  la.     K  Ar- 

I.    turn  - vmus  est  auro  et  aurum  virtutibus^^.     9.  Fortuna  plus  consilns 

1»  Belon-in-   to    Khesiuni.    J^''''fJ''\''\.  ^  9'"''^'''^^^^^^ 
^^.tn,ag>r  nl.Gnu..    ^"^  The  hi.'h.-r  u-ds.  rft  "*;'^'  ^   ^'^f ^".rAcJr.     '^^  Aeeinm.     ^«  Penti- 

l.niia.     »"MinHX-.    «M»  rnic.sos.us.    ^' ^3' ''^I^'^j    "    ^^^^^^^  4o  Amiable.     "^  Base. 

M.S.     ««Trnihtul.     " /a  se  pretence.     3h\v  ,11  beas^^^^      4  5  rra«,tabilis. 
42  Supi^ly  '•  cdiuH  est.''     *^  Competent.     **  beiuh,   cuie. 


224r        IDIOMS  or  the  comparative  period. 

nicious  than  thine.  6.  ^«Fhittorers  -onrrally  aro  mom  ea,<r.;rlv  sou^'ht 
(ernetere)  than  t'rirnds.  7.  Tlu'  Athenians  ure  more  '  vohitiU'  tlian  the 
other  nations  8.  1  can  -«^prodace  no  more  com]>etent  witness  than 
Tacitus  ')  To  be  wiser  than  Phito  is  as  (lillicult  as  to  surpass  the  <;.Kis 
themseivoa.  10.  It  is  pleasant  to  Ik'  riehc-r  than  Crcrsus.  11.  \irturt 
must  be  dearer  to  thee  than  life  itself.  12.  No  worse  vice  ran  be  tound 
than  -i^neriury  U.  W«^  must  depart  {ahlre)  ^«^sooner  than  we  expect. 
1i  The  punishment  of  the  accused  is  ^'harder  than  justice  require. 
15.  You  have  more  money  than  it  is  necessary.  10.  Ihe  Italians  light 
better  than  usually. 

'    C.   THE  ABLATIVE  OF   DIFFEREN'CE. 
1   ILecviamuUispassibus  brevior  est  quam  altera.    2   Mensis  Martins 
'Hrinis  dirbus  lon-ior  est  quam  Februarius.     ;i  La^lius  tribus  horis  serins 
advenit  Catdne.     4.  (iajus  tribus  annis  major  est  quam  S.-mpronins.     .). 
Turres  »-'denis  pedibus  aitidn^s  sunt  <|uam   miirus.     (..  Molestum   est, 
uno^'sestertio  minus  habPre  (juam  necesse  vidr-tur.    7.  Minerv.e  templuni 
aliquot  pedil.us  altius  .vst  (,uatn  Thest'i.     H.  (iuanto  moh-stius  est  vmci 
uuani  vincere'     I).  Populus    universus  civitatem   multo  melius  regnat 
quam  reges.     10.  Se  ipsuni  gubernare  midto  di ffici bus  est  quam  rem- 
Dublicam.     11.  Lupus  artus  multo  majdres  habet  quam  cams.    U.  (.  aesar 
paulo  ^^maturius   opinidne    exercitum   -dedilcit.      1:5^     he    l>r'ii^M>s   a 
populo  aVuiuanto  minus  diiigitur,  (luani  pater  ejus      14.    1  anto  dithubus 
est  a-ere   quam  velle  {to  pmpox,').     15.  Multo  pluris   inimicos  hab.-re 
vidr-rrs  quam    amTcos.      10.    Pomprjum   multo    magis   admiror   quam 
Cras^um      17.  Ilostium  naves  altero  tanto  majdn-s  sunt  (iiiain  n..str;e. 
18   Kh.'nuss.-xies  tanto  latior  est  quam  Tiheris.     11».  Sol  multis  partibus 
ampli..r  est  terra.     20.   Multo  prrpstat  injurias  accii)ere  (to  nnffer)  (luam 
inferre  (to  i///f^'0.     21.  Hostes  paucis  diebus  ante  adveniunt  (luani  ex- 
pectantur.     22.    Suevdrum   gens  longe  maxima  et    -Lellicosissima  est 
Geimandrum  omnium.    23.  Alcibiades  multo ''forniosissimus  estOra'Co. 
rum  omnium. 

1  Mount  .Etna  is  0,000  feet  higher  than  Vesuvius.  2.  The  place  of 
the  camp  is  200  pae.-s  -lower  than  tlu;  '■'top  of  the  mountain.  3.  I  <>."U»pJJ8 
is  ""two  vears  older  than  Cicero.  4.  The  march  of  the  en.miies  is  2  0(»0 
paces  shorter  than  that  of  the  Romans.  5.  Each  column  is  five  h'ct 
higher  than  the  statues.  6.  The  (iermans  are  one;  foot  "taller  than  the 
Romans  7.  This  tree  is  five  inches  thicker  than  the  otlu^rs.  8.  Henry 
is  several  years  vounger  than  Charles.  1).  How  much  ''-stricter  are  the 
ruuiof-  moralitV  tha^n  those  of  the  civil  law!  10.  This  battle  ,s  by 
far  more  "«blood  v  than  that  of  "■H^inn:e.  1 1 .  Thou  se-mnst  to  be  much 
Bicker  than  vesterdav.  12.  It  is  by  far  better  to  be  healthy  than  ricn.  U. 
It  is  much  more  expedient  to  «^"keep  the  camp,  than  to  attack  the  enemy. 

'47A^„tator.  *■•  Levis.  ««  Aff.rre.  *»  Periunnm.  »«>  Soon  mature.  »i  Sovoro.^ 
•2  Whv  is  the  (llstril.iitive  nn.nerHl  use.l  here?  ^^  A  H.nterrf  n  1  ..uiat.  cmm.  ^4  Mature, 
earh/snon  "  To  lea.l  .twav,  to  with.lraw.  »«  Warlike,  ^t  „,„,,„„.,«.  ^.  Rv  the  com- 
paraUve  of  iuferH>^.     IfnmUior  is  lower  than  a  low  place;    inf.nor  is  lower  than  l    .igh 

v6rr^.    «M)tti.ia  (/;ia/'.)    •♦  Alrox.  «^  The  battle  of  Caini8e,i>«i^Ma  C'u»neft«t«  («annitan 
battle.  "  Tenere. 


IDIOMS   OF    THE   COMPARATIVE   PERIOD. 


225 


14.  It  is  ouch  more  difficult  to  conquer  one's  passions,  than  [one's]  ene- 
luies.  15.  We  have  somewhat  richer  {nher)  fields,  than  yours.  K).  The 
arniv  of  the  Spartans  is  a  little  larger  than  that  of  the  Athenians.  17. 
(Jur' scholars  learn  not  a  little  quicker  than  yours.  IS.  So  much  more 
exi.edient  is  it  to  be  silent,  than  to  speak  too  much.  19.  Lucullus  is  by 
one-half  richer  than  Croesus.  20.  The  president  visits  {adlre)  many 
more  cities  than  it  is  necea<ary.  21.  (iajus  has  much  more  money  than 
thou.  22.  Many  more  hearers  {(ludltor)  are  j^resent  than  it  is  conve- 
nient {convenieiiK).  23.  We  intend  to  start  (profirisci)  three  hours  earliei 
than  the  messengers  of  Sempronius.  24.  We  intend  to  stay  {comnyyran) 
a  little  longer  than  Pompdjus.  25.  Our  fruits  are  as  large  again  as 
vours  20  The  river  Danube  is  twice  as  broad  as  the  Garonne.  27.  The 
mcon  is  fiftv  times  smaller  than  the  earth.  28.  The  consuls  return 
several  davs  later  than  tliev  are  expected.  29.  Socrates  is  by  far  the 
wisest  of  all  (J reeks.  30.  The  Flaminian  road  is  much  the  best  and 
the  shortest. 

D.   THE  COMPARATIVE  PERIOD  EMPLOYED  FOR  LIMITATION. 

1    Plus  septingenti  milites  ab  hostibus  caiuuntur.     2.  Galli  amplius 
duas  boras  certamen  «"sustinent.     8.  Plus  triginta  naves  «\lesiderantur. 

4  Minus  trecenti  milites  ])ereunt ;  paiih)  i)lus  quam  mille  vulnerantur. 

5  Cartha«nnienses  plus  tlucentos  equites  habent.  0.  A  minus  quingentis 
niilitibusl)lus(iuatuormillia  hostium  ca])inntur.  7.  Apes  plus ''\in urn 
T'n'c^em  nunquam  patiuntur.  8.  Hostes  minus  triginta  pedibus  ''absunt. 
9  Filia  mea  plus  decern  annos  nata  est.  10.  Pueri  mindres  quatuorde- 
cim  annis  legibus  "-pacisci  prohibentur.  11.  Juvenes  majdres  sedecim 
annis  '•^ogam  virllem  "^sumere  solent. 

1  More  than  30  prisoners  esca}^.  2.  I  cannot  be  obedient  to  more 
than  one  master.  3.  Less  than  200  soldiers  are  missed.  4.  More  than 
ten  States  intend  to  secede.  5.  We  intend  to  defeat  our  adversaries  by 
more  than  a  million  of  votes.  0.  The  Romans  lose  a  little  more  than 
2  000  soldiers,  the  Gauls  one-half  more.  7.  The  law  forbids  to  eh'ct 
more  than  two  consuls.  8.  Each  legion  misses  more  than  a  hundred 
soldiers  9.  Ten  citizens  ])av  {pcndn-e)  more  than  5,000  -dollars 
ai)iece  10  The  citv  of  Pome  is  lees  distant  than  30.000  paces.  11.  My 
son  ( 'harl.  sis  more' than  five,  and  Frederick  a  little  less  than  seven 
years  old.  12.  All  citizens,  vcnmger  than  forty  years,  are  compelled  to 
•••^serv.' in  the  armv.  13.  Gajus  is  more  than  polite.  14.  Atticus  does 
{prneslare)  more  than  [his]  duty.  15.  This  secession  ol  the  Plebeians  is 
more  than  madness. 

E.   THE  ABSOLUTE  DEGREE. 

1  Atticus  noster  te  valde  diligit.  2.  Te,  mi  fili,  admodum  desidero. 
8.  Bruti  littera^  mihi  vehementer  ""displicent.     4.  Cicero  librum  jucun- 

«7  To  niaint!tin  ««  P^^/V^n/r^  to  miss.  «9  Grammatically  the  distributive  «'«i^* 
wonl.  ber.ouire<l.  Bnt  -xlngnln.  reges^  wonl.l  he  amhi^Mu.ns.  In  ^"^  '  1"^'«"^'*^*^« 
";;;  lie  cardinal  must  he  preferr.-d.  ;»  The  Ko,m.ns  eal.ed  ^W  q'-n  of  t^^^  be«*  r« 
Ti  Ai>e9se.  to  hf  diHtant.     '^  PacisH,  to  mnk>'  coiitractK     '3  1  lie  manh  toga.  10  a^ 

tame.     '»  Centenarius.     t«  To  serve  in  tlie  arin>-,  wi/ifart!.     "  D,<,piiccre. 


226 


IDIOMS    OF   THE    COMPARATIVE    PERIOD. 


dissimiim    tuum,   mi    Quiiite,   nia<rnoporp    laudat.      5.    Multiun    nunc 
lacrimari  vidr-iis.     (5.  Siiinuin  adniodiim  aini)lum  {itphitditi)  vt  txiniium 
tibi  mitto.     7.  VaUlc  bene  Brribis,  mi  Carol.' !     8.  Amicus  nostrr  (iiian- 
dam   rrrum  ]>ublicririim  mutationem  {chaitf/e)  nimis  ciipido  rx|MH'tare 
vidrtiir.     1>.  Tu  et  tVatcr  tuHS  lin<ruam  (Jrajcaiu  satis  bene  intelliiritis. 
10.   Bella  Punica   a   Sisi'iina    ])arum    'Milncide    nariaimir.       11.  Cicero 
omnes  K})icuri    errores  '  "perbrcviter  ac  ])erek\iranter  exiu'iiit  {to  stat<) 
VI.  Permulli  liomim's  hum-  reipublic;e  statum  inteliiiien?  m'(iueunt.     13 
(iajus  patri  siio  simillimus  est.      14.  Senectus  natura   ^"!()<]iiaci()r  est 
15.  Vespasiamis  princeps  i)ecunia'  avidior  est.       1<).   Pluriina   Datami» 
^'i^^esta  obscurinra  sunt.     IT.  Hie  versus  una  ^-'sylham  brevior  est.     18 
Littene  tuie  bmi^iores  sunt.      P.).  Plerlijue   homines    tardius  eogitant 
airunt  autem  celerius.     2U.  (iaUin;r  avescjue  reliqujp  nidos  yited)  (\m\va 
«>'^niollissime  ^^construunt.     21.  Jiiixurtha  (^uam  maximaa  potest  copias 
araiHt.     22.  Caesar   quam   maximum    militiim    numerum   arc(ssit.     2;i. 
Dux  exercitus  discrlmen,  (luam  brevissime  potest,  miiitibus  exponit  (<f 
explain.) 

1.  I  very  much  Avish  to  see  thee  often.     2.  We  erreatly  admire  the  in 
credible  boldness  of  this  magistrate.     3.  I  very  much  r<»gret  the  enorm- 
ous   carelessness  {Koeordia)  of  this  general.     4    These  rumors   i^Kenw») 
«Hnjure  thv  ^^''reputation  exceedingly.     5.  (iajus  is  ])rt'vented  from  Mork- 
in'--  mucli  bv  a  diseusi-  of  the  kidneys.     6.  Sagiintum,  a  vi'ry  rich  {opu- 
lininH)  towi\  is  taken  bv  Hannibal.     7.  The  walls  of  the  town  are  very 
liigh,  and  are  defended  bv  ten  very  liigh  towers.     8.  A  very  (by  pn') 
great  danger  is  imminent  to  the  republic.     9.  This  incautious  (i//m\Y//.v) 
man  can  verv  {pn-)  easilv  be  kille<l.     10.  That  very  iinr)  modest  yoiith 
cannot '^•bi-ar  the  voice  of  the  c(msul.     11.  The  ambassadors  intend  to 
stay  very  long  (In/  the  ^nperhdice).     12.  The  ambassadors  very  {auper- 
laticc)   humbly  inii)h)re  the  ^^pardon  of  Caesar.    13.  Thy  words  do  not 
run  ijlucre)  ^-'smoothlv  enough,  but  the  narrative  {fcdnthi)  itself  is  sulli- 
ciently  accurate.     14.*Thon  treatest  this   \^(^\\\X  {locux)  too  lightly,  and 
the  causes  of  the  rebellion  are  not  stated  clearly  eni)Ugh.     15.  Too  {roiit- 
paratiir)  grrat  and  too  long  a  pleasure  extinguishes  all  *lights  of  the 
soul.     1().  The  reasoning  {niti^f)  of  this  ])hilosopher  seems  to  be  rather 
wiphistical.     17.  The  oldt'st  {nntlqunn)  history  of  the  Saxons  is  rather 
ol)scare.     18.  The  general    begins   to  censure   the   ambassadors    rather 
severely.     P.).  It  is  necessary  to  capture  as  few,  and   to  kill   as  many 
enemies  as  possible.     20.  Tlie  Helvetians  resolve  to  sow  as  much  grain 
as  T)Ossible.  and  to  procure  icomparare)  the  greatest  ]K)ssible  ■♦"amount 
of  arms.     21.  We  wish  to  bring  {(tddnnre)  to  you  as  many  troops  as  wa 
can.     22.  Cicero  sends   both  letters  as  soon  as  ]>()ssible  to  Cesar.     23. 
We  intend  to  h'arn  the  (ireek  lanuruage  as  z.ahmsly  as  p(.ssible.     24. 
Cesar  visits  {ndln)  the  camp  as  often  as  he  can.     25.  It    is   nc  cessar^ 
to  deliver  to  me  the  '-"dispatches  of  the  general  as  (juickly  as  possible. 


^V 


'8  Diliiciduo  clfiar.  ■"»  Brevis.  hiief.  so  LoqiiHX.  taJkatirJ'.  "  Gestum.  a  dfed. 
•5  A  syllable  ^^  Mollis,  soft.  «<  T<.  construct  »*  Offendere.  "«  Roimiatiuii,  tititiUmaUo, 
•*  I'tire.     '"'*  Gratia,     o»  Mollis.     »"  Copib.     »'  Litu-i-aj.     ♦  Luiiu'ii, 


22. 


I 


h 


7 


BOOK  THIRD. 

FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES  AND  MOODS.— ABSO- 
LUTE  ADJECTIVES.— FORMATION  OF  SENTENCES. 


CHAriER  FIRST. 

THE  PRESENT-SYSTEM  OF  THE  REGULAH  VERB. 
§  3 1  6.     All  forms  of  the  verb  are  either  finite  or  indefinite  ; 
the  verb  is  accordingly  divided  into  the  finite  and  the  indefi- 

KITX  VERB. 

Rem  ■<  The  jinite  forms  of  the  verb  are  those  which  imply  one  of  the 
three  grammatical  persons.  They  are  always  distinguished  by  the  pkr- 
PONAI.  ENDINOS.  The  indejinUe  verb  comprises  those  verbal  forms  which 
do  not  show  the  person  of  the  subject.  It  consists,  1,  of  \\w  Infinitive ^nd 
Snnine  in  which  the  action  of  the  yevh  uppcuvs  as  mbject  or  object ;  2,ot  the 
J^irt triples  and  Verbal  Adjectives,  in  which  the  action  of  the  verb  appeal's 

^^ The  finite  verb  is  inflected  by  conjugation,  the  indefinite  verb  by  declension. 

S  Hit,  The  FINITE  verb  comprises  three  moods;  that  is, 
three  ditlerent  ways  in  which  the  speaker  conceives  the  per- 
formance of  the  action.  They  are  the  Indicative,  the  Sub- 
junctive, and  tlie  Imperative,  By  the  Indicative,  the  speaker 
i/*\sYr^6' ; ' by  the  Imperative,  he  commands  directly;  by  the 
Subjunctives,  he  asserts  or  commands  indirectly. 

§'ai8.  The  Tenses  of  the  verb  are  threefold:  Present,  Past, 
or  Future,  according  as  the  time  of  the  action  is  conceived  as 
present,  ])ast,  or  future. 

§  »19.  All  forms  of  the  Latin  verb  are  derived  primarily 
from  the  'verb-stem,  which  is  found  by  removing  the  ending  re 
or  tre  of  the  infinitive.  Some  forms  of  the  verbs  are  directly 
derived  from  the  verb-stem.     These  are  called  Present- System. 


228 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


Otliers  arc  indirectly  (§33G)  derived  from  it,  and  are  called  Per- 
fect-Sijstem. 

§  «ItSO.  The  Present-System  is  divided  into  four  coniuii^ations, 
acconlinjx  to  the  characterUtic  of  the  verb-stem.  Each  of  the 
conj notations  has  two  voices  and  three  moods.  Tlie  Indicative 
mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  the  imperfect,  and  the  fu- 
ture *,  the  Subjunctive  has  two  tenses — the  present  and  the  im- 
perfe<*t. 

The  Indeiinite  verb  of  the  Present-Svstem  has  one  Infinitive 
and  one  Participle  (present  participle)  in  the  active^  and  one  In- 
finitive and  one  Verbal  Adjective  in  the  Passive  voice. 

§  3^1.  Paradigms  of  the  Present-System. 

FIRST   COXJUGATIOX. 

Active.  Passive. 

Indicative  Mood. 


SECOND,  THIRD,  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS. 

Imperfect. 


229 


IT 


AmSrem,  I  might,  should,  wcmld  love,  or  /   AmSrer,  I  might,  should,  would  be  loved,  or  / 

lot'ed  '^^'^^*'  loved 

amilrea  fhmi  itnghtest  love  amareri?,  or  amarere.  thou  migJitest  be  loved 

ainarei,  /le  might  love  aniaretur.  he  might  be  loved 

aman-mut»,  we  might  love  aniarC'inur,  7ve  nnght  tje  loved 

anuirCtis,  you  migfit  love  amaroniini,  you  might  be  loved 

amarcut,  tliey  might  love.  amarenlur,  tliey  might  be  loved. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
First  form  (active).  First  form,  (passive). 

Sine.  2.  Ama.  love  (thou).  Sing.  2.  amare.  be  (thou)  lo^:ed. 

Plur.  2.  amate,  love  O'ou).  Plur.  2.  amammi,  be  (you)  loved. 

Second  form  (active).  Second  form  (passive). 

Sing.  2.  Ainilto.  thou  shall  love  Sing.  2.  amator,  thou  shall  be  loved 
3.  aniilto,  he  shall  love.  3 .  amStor,  he  shall  be  loved 

2.  anvdx rne,  you  shall  love  Plur.  2.  

3.  amauto,  they  shall  love.  3.  amantor,  t/cey  shall  be  looed 


Plur. 


Indefinite  Verb. 


Infinitive.   Amjlre,  to  love. 
pAKTicu'LE.  aumns,  loving. 


Infinitive.  amSri,  to  b*>  loved. 
Vkiibal  Adjective,  ainandus   one  that 
mud  be  loved. 


SECOND,  THIRD,  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS. 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 


PRESENT. 


Amo.  IloT€,  am  loving,  do  love 

amas.  th/ou  lovest 

amat,  he  lores 

ara3muji,  we  lore 

annltis,  you  love 

araant,  they  love. 


amor.  I  am  loved 
amilris.  tha^i  art  loved 
amAtur.  he  is  loved 
aniilmur,  we  are  loved 
amamiui,  ijoii  are  lored 
aniaiitur,  they  are  loved. 


i:\rPEKFECT. 


AmJlham,  T loved,  iras  loving,  did  love 

ainabas,  thou  lovedst 

aiTiilbaf,  hr.  loved 

amabamus»,  ive  lored 

ainabiiris.  you  loved 

amabaut,  they  loved. 


aniabar.  T  was  loved 
ainal>rins  or  ainabare,  thou  wast  loved 
aiiiabatur,  he  was  loved 
arnabainur,  we  were  loved 
aiDabninini,  you  were  loved 
amabautur,  they  were  loved. 


FUTURE. 


AmJlbo,  I  shall  lore 
ainilbis.  thou  wilt  love 
amjTl)it,  he  will  love 
amabimus,  we  shall  love 
aniabitis,  you  ivilllove 
amabuut,  they  will  love. 


aninbor,  /shall  be  loved 
aniabcris  or  ainabere,  thou  wilt  be  loved 
ama])itiir.  he  will  be  loved 
ainaltiiniir,  ice  shall  be  bwed 
ainabiinini,  you,  will  tte  loved 
amabuutur,  they  will  be  loved. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   ]\IOOD. 
Present. 


Amem,  I  may  love,  love,  should  love,  etc. 

Bmes,  them  may  est  love,  etc. 
ttniei.  he  may  love 
araGmns,  we  may  love 
aniC'tis.  you  may  lore 
ameut,  they  may  love. 


amcr,  /  may  be  loved,  am  loved,  should  be 

loved,  etc. 
amt'ris.  thou  maye.^t  be  loved 
aiiu'tur,  he  may  be  lo^'ed 
anK'niur.  ut  may  be  lored 
anu-niini,  you  may  be  bwed 
auieutur,  they  may  be  loved. 


In 

dicative  Mood. 

* 

n. 

in. 

rv 

Present— 7  advise 

I  read 

I  hear. 

Moneo 

lego 

audio 

niones 

It'gia 

audis 

nioiu't 

legit 

audit 

moiiemua 

legimus 

audlmug 

luonetis 

legit  id 

audit  is 

nionent 

leguut 

audiunt. 

ImrEKFECT — I  advised 

I  read,  was  reading 

I  heard. 

nioiu'l)am 

legebam 

audiebam 

nionrbas 

lege has 

audiebas 

nionr-bat 

legebat 

audiebat 

nionebamus 

legebamus 

audiebamns 

inoncbiltis 

legebat  ii* 

audiebiltis 

nionebant 

lege  bant 

audiebant. 

Future — I  shall  advise 

I  shall  read 

I  shall  hear 

nionebo 

legam 

audiam 

munC'bis 

leges 

audies 

nionC'bit 

leget 

audiet 

luonobimiia 

legem  us 

audieinas 

nionebitis 

leget  is 

audietid 

monebuiit 

legent 

audient. 

Su 

BjuNCTivE  Mood. 

Present — I  may  advise 

I  may  read 

I  may  hear. 

moiK-ani 

legam 

audiam 

nioncas 

legas 

audias 

nioiK'at 

legat 

audiat 

monefunus 

legflmua 

audiilmas 

nioiieatis 

legatis 

»udiati3 

moueuut 

levant 

audiaut. 

KS 


280 


SECOND,  THir.D,  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS. 


lMVEnTv:cT— r  ni  ir/^i  f  advise 
monCrt'iu 
monC'res 
mono  ret 
nioin'ivmus 
luoiieiT'tis 
luouereut 


1 7Vff/ht  read 

le;:treiu 

loi^crcs 

IcirtTft 

lei,'err'inu8 

l('Lr«'rt"tis 

It'^'crc'Ut 


Tiniffht  hear. 

aiidTiem 

audires 

audTret 

audirr-imiG 

audirC't\ri 

audlrciit. 


Imperative  Mood. 


Fir»t  form. 

n. 

III. 

IV. 

Moiie 

leixe 

audi 

muuCie 

legite 
Second  form. 

audltc 

Sing.  2.  MonCto 

IcijUo 

audlto 

3   mouCto 

leiTito 

audlto 

Plur.  2.  mouetote 

leifitdte 

auditote 

3.  moueuto 

ICiJUUtO 

audiimto 

In 

DEFINITE  Verb. 

TsriXTTivE.   Monc're 

lefTore 

audTre 

I'AiiTicirLE.  mouuna 

legcua 

audiuns. 

PASSIVE   VOICE. 
Indicative  Mood. 


♦V 


PiiESENT— 7  am  advised 

I  am  read 

I  am  heard: 

monoor 

le<::f)r 

audior 

rnoiiuris 

It'jjrCris  or  legere 

audlrift 

nioiu'tur 

Icjritnr 

audit  ur 

niouCniiir 

le;riimir 

audTmur 

monenuui 

let;iniini 

audiiiiini 

moiieutur 

lei^uiitur 

audiuutur. 

iMrERFECT— /?ra.9  advL 

"ed 

I  nas  read 

I  watt  heard. 

nioiiebar 

leL,a'bar 

andicbar 

inoncbnri?  or  raonebilre 

l(';:obaris  or  legebare 

aiidit'baris  or  audicbdre 

moiiebntur 

Ic'^rt'batiir 

atidii'baiiir 

niouebriimir 

It'i^a-baiiuir 

audicbruiuir 

monobamiiii 

* 

loircbainiiii 

audicbamiui 

monobuiitur 

k'gebantur 

audiebaijtur. 

FuTUUE— /.s7/rt//  f>e  advi 

•^ed 

J  shall  be  read 

I  shall  he  heard. 

inoi'C'bor 

k'>,mr 

audiar 

nnnu'beris  o? 

monebure 

Icirr'ri!*  or  legere 

audirris  or  audit're 

moiu'bitiir 

Ic^'Otur 

audir-tur 

nioiiebiiniir 

Ici^'C'inur 

audir-nmr 

n^oiiebiiiiiiil 

U';,a'inini 

audicmiui 

niouebuniur 

ifgc'utur 

audiuuiur. 

Subjunctive  IMood. 

Pkesext—  r  w  ay  he  adr 

ised 

I  way  he  read 

I  way  he  heard. 

nionear 

Icirar 

audiar 

nioiiefiris!  or 

moneSre 

k"L,'!lri!*  or  legare 

audiaris  or  audiiii'C 

nionefitur 

K'lriltur 

audiatur 

uioiieainur 

leurninnr 

audi  fun  ur 

iiKHieaiiHiii 

K'L'ainiiii 

audianiini 

moueuutiir 

le'^autur 

audiuutur 

€ylS 


SECOND,  THIRD,  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS. 


231 


Imperfect — I  wight  he  advised 
monCrer 

nionorr-ris  or  monerCre 
rnonerPtur 
moneremur 
ruoneremini 
mouereutur 


I  might  be  read 

Icirercr 

It'frerGris  or  legerere 

Iciieretur 

le^icronnir 

lejreromini 

k'gereutur 


I  might  be  heard. 

audTrer 

audirCris  or  audiri^rs 

audiretur 

audiremnr 

audiromiui 

audirentur. 


MouPre 
mouemlni 


Sing.  9.  monCtor 
3.  monGtor 

Hur.  2.      

3.  moneutor 


Imperative  Mood. 

First  form. 

leirere 
legiminl 

Second  form. 

legTtor 
legitor 

leguntor 

Indefinite  Verb. 


andlre 
audiiniui. 


BTidTtor 
auditor. 

audiuntor. 


Tnfixittve. 


monCri 


lepri 
legendus 


audlri 
audieudiis. 


Veubal  Adjectives,   moneudus 

§  JJ^l^^.  The  different  forms  of  the  finite  verb  are  thus  de- 
rived from  the  verb-stem : 

1.  Present  Indicative,  by  suhstltuting  o  for  the  characteristic 
of  the  verb-stem  in  the  first,  and  adding  o  to  the  stem  in  the 
other  conjugations. 

2.  Imperfect  Indicative,  by  adding  ham  to  the  stem  in  the 
first  and  second,  and  tham  in  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations. 
The  Imperfect  Indicative  is  conjugated  like  the  Present  Indica- 
tive of  the  first  conjugation. 

3.  Future,  by  adding  ho  to  the  stem  in  the  first  and  second, 
and  am  in  tlie  third  and  fourth  conjugations.  The  future  in  ho 
is  conjugated  like  the  Present  Indicative  of  the  third,  and  the 
future  \\\am  like  the  Present  Indicative  of  the  second  conjugation. 

4.  Present  Subjunctive,  by  substituting  em  for  the  charac- 
teristic of  the  verb-stem  in  the  first,  and  by  adding  am  to  the 
latter  in  the  other  conjugations.  The  Present  Subjunctive  of  the 
first  conjugation  is  conjugated  like  the  Present  Indicative  of  the 
second;  and  that  of  the  other  conjugations  like  the  Present  In- 
dicative of  the  first  conjugation. 

5.  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  in  all  conjugations  by 
a<lding  m  to  the  Present  Infinitive,  and  conjugated  like  the 
Present  Indicative  of  the  second  conjugation. 


232  SECOND,  THIRD,  AND  FOURTH   CONJCGATIONS. 

6.  The  First  form  of  the  Imperative  (second  person  sing.) 
is  the  same  as  the  verb-stem,  except  that  in  the  third  conjuga- 
tion  e  is  added  to  it.  But  the  verbs  esse,  dicere,  ducere,  facere, 
ferre  form  their  imperatives  by  the  mere  stems  {es^  die,  due, 
fac,fer).  The  plural  is  formed  by  changing  the  ending  tis  of 
the  second  person  Present  Indicative  into  te. 

7.  The  Second  form  of  the  Imperative  is  made  by  adding 
0  to  the  third  person  sinirnlar  Present  Indicative.  The  third 
person  singular  always  is  like  the  second.  The  second  person 
plural  adds  te  to  the  singular,  and  the  tliird  person  ])lural  is 
formed  bv  adding  o  to  the  third  person  plural  Present  Indicative. 

8  The  Passive  Voice  of  the  finite  verb  is  formed  by  adding 
r  to  the  corresponding  active  form,  or  substituting  r  for  the 
final  letter  m  of  the  active.  But  the  first  form  of  the  Impera- 
tive is  always  the  same  as  that  of  the  Infinitive  active. 

9.  The  conjugation  of  the  passive  tenses  is  made  by  substi- 
tuting the  passive  endings,  rls,  tur,  etc.,  or  eris,  itur,  etc.  (§  r2o), 
for  the  corresponding  endings  of  the  active. 

§  323  lu  the  Indefinite  verb,  the  Partk  iple  is  formed 
b/addincr  to  the  verb-stem  ns  (or  ens,\u  the  third  and  fourth 
conjugations),  and  the  Verbal  Adjective  by  adding  ..(7/^6'  (or 
endiisni  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations). 

^  324  The  Participle  and  Verbal  Adjective  (and  in  a 
certain  sense  also  the  Infinitive)  are  declined  like  Adjectives. 
The  Participles  are  declined  like  Adjectives  of  common  gender, 
belon-inc  to  the  liquid-mute  stems  (Paradigm  sapiens,  ^  208) ; 
the  Verbal  Adjective  like  Movable  Adjectives  (Paradigm  bonus, 

7?^m  o  The  dcclensicm-stem  of  the  Presont  Participle  is  always  tlie 
snme^s  The  tl  ii'l  er  on  plural  of  tlio  Pivs.nt  In<licatlve  [.tmnnt-,n.ncn) 
which,  however       tlie  third  and  fourth  conjugations  is  changed  Irom  aut 

^Pant^'^^^f^^  ^rannnatieally  treated  like  a^jccHrc;  they  arc 
^ith  M  ATTiUBUTFS  or  P   F^^^  Hkc  the  latter,  and  may  be  the  goveni- 

f1?^^  o^yot-  OB^FCT^  wl   eh  generallv  are  placed  in  the  same  case  as  mose 
Sn^l^ke  ?^or  MnUiv.^    Sonur  of  then.,  as  .......  Jloren.^  appeien.. 

ardeuH,  are  even  subject  to  Comparison. 

§  3^55.  The  deponent  verb  has  the  same  forms  as  the  pas- 


REMARKS   ON   THE   USE   OF  TENSES   AND   MOODS. 


233 


sive,  but  with  active  significations.  It  has,  besides  the  regular 
passive  ibrms,  also  the  Particijjle  of  the  Active  {hortans,  ex- 
horting), and  in  the  Verbal  Adjective  assumes  the  signification 
of  the  passive  (hortandus,  one  that  must  be  exhorted). 

§  3t26.  The  I-verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  (§  58)  insert  the 
vowel  i  in  all  forms  of  the  finite  and  indefinite  verb,  except  in 
the  Infinitive,  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  and   Imperative.      But 
the  second  form  of  the  Imperative  takes  ^  in  the  3.  plur. 

Preliminary  Remarks  on  the  Use  of  the  Tenses  and  Moods, 
especially  in  Dependent  Clauses. 

V^  The  foUowinir  prcliminarv  remarks  are  intended  to  guide  the  ^^J"dOTt  in  the 
traS^ion  of  the  tenses  and  mood.,  and  to  -ive  him  a  preUminary  driU  in  the  handling  of 
dependent  sent«'uces.    Fur  more  exact  ruleii  see  below. 

S  51^7.  A  DEPENDENT  SENTENCE  or  CLAUSE  is  a  sentenc9 
which  has  the  force  of  one  single  word  or  phrase  in  regard  to 
another  (the  principal)  sentence.  A  clause  may  take  the  place 
of  a  Subject,  Attribute,  or  Object  of  the  principal  sentence,  and 
always  is  recognized  by  either  a  Relative  (adjective  or  adverb), 
or  a  subordinating  conjunction  (§  328),  introducing  it. 

Examples. 

1    Tf  can  never  he  pecessary  fhnt  I  shovM  teU  a  fahehood.  Nnmquam  necepse  esse 

potU  ufm'fdaeium  dicam^IIere  the  -'utence    -/^  ^Lr^f^oTmf%l<ScS^ 
4,.>.v-/^ii>AT  «K-vTVKrv   in  which  the  folloumjr  sentence,  ^^ mat  1  ^nouia  reu  a  jaif-tinHju 
f^kestTu  plac^otaW^^^^^^^  expressed  thus:  -My  telling  a  faMKMTd 

catrmrlrl^n^^^^  principal  sentence*^ has  consequently  assumed  an  tmper- 

eo  a   lorm%  74c  r  ^Mie  dep..ndent  ientenee  is  recoj^nized  as  such  hy  the  subordinating 
co,Oui*ction^/Ar'?.  x4       introduces  it.    In  Latin  we  employ  here  the  subjunctive  present, 

'^'t^'Sfhl^a^^'ikSlGajns  should  change  his  opinion.  Frater  mens  suadSbat,  ut 

Gains  oniniunem  mutjlret.  ,   .     ,    ^^    ^  ,^.„^-j.^t 

PiuNcip\L  Sentenctc  :  Mv  brother  advised.  Frater  me^JS  madepat.  ,     ^^^xr^r.^ 

Depknuent  Sfn^^  That  Gajus  should  chan-e  his  opinion,  ut  Gc^us  optntdnem 

n^t^??^l^  The'^latU  r  ocTupie    the  place  of  an  ob.tect  fn  the  former  sentence   as  i    jt  had 

K  thus  expressed:  Jljbrotli^r advises  a  change  of  opinion  by  Gajus.    In  Latm,  the 

"^T'l^^ji::^:::^^^  ^omus  iHaparva  vid.tur,  quia 

lonirtssime  abest. 

i;^;:;^;;^^' In'^^^e  ^^^^nttrZ^l^distant.  it  talce.  the  place  of  an  ^ject 
<n  th^  form«T  lemence  aVif  w^^^^  said:  Tfns  hmse  is  small  from  its  distance,  ^&^mg 
intn'dS  bv  Ihe  sSord^natlig  conjunctio    because  mia),  it  is  at  once  reco^auzed  as  a 

^'^ir''r/;f  rS'S  Talk"tZ%iuch  are  called  loquacious.  Homines,  qui  nimis  loquuntur, 

^^'pniNxt'pAL  s'i:NTENCE :  The  men  are  called  loquacious.  Homines  f  n-uli  dicuntur 

TU-phM.KNT  Sentence-  ^yho  talk  too  much,  i\m  nimis  loquuntur.  It  takes  \\n.  place 
of  ,u,  «^VwwJ  in  ^helbrmer  sentence,  as  if  we  had  said:  The  men.  talking  too  much, 
Beri;L'^nt7otuced  by  the  fdativJ^  wlvo  (qui),  it  is  at  once  recognized  as  a  clause. 


234     EEMARKS  ON  THE  USE  OF  TENSES  AND  MOODS. 

§  3'38.  Wo  notice  at  this  place  the  followins  suborcVinating 


conjunctions: 

11.  that,  in  order  that.» 
<7?/7///M'"^'//0' when.  ^inco. 
vriu^qvarn,  or  anieqmm,  if/ore. 
dvin  (j'onietimes  cum),  while,  liH 
potftquani,  utter 


OT/frt,  becaufe. 

^Morf,  that,  or  because 

«.  if. 

nj,s't,  unle??.        ,  ,     „.        », 

quamquam,  or  €^«i,  aUhousn. 


8  129    f(  in  the  signification  "  that,"  or  "  in  order  that,    and 
Jn  in  tl, e  signification  "  since,"  aUays  govern  the  su)OnncU,e, 
a  'i      Tl,e  ;redicate  of  tl>e  clause,  introdnced  by  these  con- 
;  ctions,  mult  always  be  placed  in  the  subjunct.ve,  whatever 
i",      le    nood  eniplo  cd  in  English.     The  Engl.sh  co.^.ncUou 
XLr  frequently  is  translated  by  quod  (see  §  393)      AV  e  here 
regard  onlj  the  ;ase,  when  ,«o.7  stands  after  verbs  of  ruAisiNO, 
CENsnuNc;,  and  accusing  {Umdare,  cxtoUere,  vituim-are,  repre- 
i'n,/  r     «  c..„7,r).     Ai'ter  these  verbs  we  generally  translate 
"5/--ith;  verbal  .onn  in  ».,-    Buttlu.Latn,   ..guago 
ahvavs  conceives  quod  in  the  sense  ot  the  conjunction     tU<d. 

you  will  be  praised.  v 

8  330.  Quwn  (cum),  when,  and  priusquam  {antequam) 
take  either  Subjunctive  or  Indicative,  according  to  the  s,,ec.a 
rules  in  P.  II.'  Dum,  in  the  meaning  xchile,  tak.-s  the  /  rescut 
Indicative  ey.n  if  it  refers  to  past  time;  wlien  it  means  .«  it 
takes  the  Subjunctive,  (^«w,  5«am/i«am,e<«  are  used  with  the 
Indicative.  When  sentences,  introduced  by  quamquam  ^nd  cts>, 
precede  the  principal  sentence,  the  latter  is  often  introduced  by 
the  adversative  conjunction  tamen  (§  121),  which  is  translated 
by  still,  yet,  or  nevertheless. 

'^y::zL  ris^'i-  ^^.  r:  i  ^^u  -ve^hoie»..  p,.,,.,,, ,... 

Rem  i  The  Endisli  h.nsnnun.  IVquently  employs  an  o^'^"^"''^ 
^vht■™n  Latin  a  clause,  introduced  by  «(.  nuist  be  used.    Ibo  bes.mua 


.  Th..  En..,sh  conjunction  «*«<  ha.  ".any  I-a.  jn  ^n'n-lent,     TJ-  «'^^f  ^""' '"  ""^ 
directed. 


REMARKS   ON  THE   USE   OF  TENSES  AND   MOODS. 


235 


will  notice  that  only  those  verbs  which  are  enumerated,  §  80,  can  be 
construed  with  an  ohject-infnitice  in  Latin.  After  other  verbs  the  Eiigli.^h 
objecl-intinitive  must  generally  be  changed  into  a  clause  introduced  by 
"  that,"  as : 

We  pray  you  to  cmtu  to-morrrnc,  OrHnniP  vos,  tit  eras  veniJltis  (literally,  we  pray  you, 
that  you  may  come  to-morrow).— /iz/^/'/re^/  Idni  to  depart,  Adducebam  cum,  ut  ablret  (lit- 
erally, 1  iudiiced  him,  that  he  should  depart). 

In  the  same  way,  'priusquam,  with  a  finite  verb,  must  often  be  translated 
by  before,  with  a  verljal  noun  in  ing^  as:  Before  departing,  priusquam  discG- 
das  (discCdat,  etc.) 

§  m\  1 .  It  is  a  Latin  rule,  that  whenever  the  predicate  of  a 
daiise  must  be  placed  in  the  suV)janctive,  the  tense  of  this  sub- 
junctive is  determined  by  the  predicate  of  the  principal  sentence. 
Tliis  is  called  tlie  dependexce  or  coxsecution  of  tenses.  For 
the  tenses  of  the  Present-System  this  rule  is  the  following : 

If  the  jyrincipal  jyredicate  is  a  present^  imperative^  or  future, 
the  predicate^  if  a  subjunctive,  must  be  in  the  pjresent  tense  of  the 
subjunctive.  If  the  principal  predicate  is  a  past  tense,  tJie  de- 
l>endent  predicate,  if  a  subjunctive,  m^ust  be  placed  in  the  imper- 
fect subjunctive. 

In  both  instances  it  is  entirely  indifferent,  what  mood  or  tense 
may  be  used  in  the  English  sentence. 

Examples:  It  ic  vvjia^f,  that  I  shonld  implore  pardon-.  Inju^tum  est,  ut  vcniam  implO- 
rem. —JJe/i/^rufe  quickly,  that  1  may  ttU  my  opinion.  Ceieriter  delihera.  ut  sententiam  ineam 
dicam.— H/^f^/i  dt^tar  app7'(Hiched.  the  enemies  repulsed  our  troops.  Cum  Ciesar  appropin- 
quiiret,  hostes  copias  nostras  repellebant.— TFe  shall  abandon  the  to>on,  since  the  citizem 
tlumselves  bttray  us,  Oppidura  relinquCmus,  cum  ipsi  elves  uos  prodaut. 

Hem.  5.  From  what  we  have  said  ^  327,  it  follows,  that  dependent 
clauses,  when  they  take  the  place  of  attributes  or  objects,  always  must 
have  a  governing  \rord.  The  beginner  ought  frequently  to  analyze  de- 
pendent sentences,  with  a  view  to  fiud  their  governing  words. 

Bern.  0.  If  participles  or  infinitives  are  the  governing  words  of  clauses, 
w^e  must  consider  them  as  the  objects  of  these  words,  according  to  the 'analo- 
gy of  the  objects  ot  adjectives.  In  tiiis  instance  the  rules  of  consecution  must 
be  so  applied,  that  the  tenses  of  the  dependent  predicates  are  not  deter- 
mined by  the  tenses  of  the  participle  or  the  infinitive,  but  by  that  of  the 
principal  predicate,  as: 

Jjtqafi  r^nietjtnit  petentes.  vt  obndes  a  dvsare  remitterentur.  The  ambassadors  came, 
askini;  that  the  hostaires  should  be  sent  back  by  Ciesar.  Here  the  tense  of  the  predicate 
reniltteitiitur  is  not  dftorinintHl  by  tlie  (present)  tense  of  the  participle  ^>e7^/i^e6\  but  by  the 
teuse  of  the  principal  predicate  vtniZhant. 

%  33^.  The  subjunctive  mood  may  also  be  used  in  principal 
sentences.  Thus  it  is  often  used  with  the  force  of  an  imperative, 
as:  Ita  vivdtis,  ut  mortem  semper  expectetis,  Live  so,  that  you 
always  expect  death. 


I 


236  REMARKS   ON  THE   USE  OF  TENSES  AND  MOODS. 

S  333  The  progressive  and  empluitic  forms  of  the  English 
siiuple  tenses  do  not  exist  in  Latin,  hut  are  translated  in  the 
same  wav  as  the  eonimon  form;  tluis  amo  may  mean  /  love,  or 
lam  loving,  or  I  do  love  ;  amabam  may  mean  I  loved,  or  I  xoas 
loving,  or  I  did  love,  as: 

lo  omda^msf-To^^■\^ti^  did  C;v^tix  aspire,  (pdd  armr  appeKhat  f-The 
llul  /!i,?rr.ntan^-TUe  wall,  were  faUing,  viun  cad.bant. 


^^^lat  do  yon  d 
eueuiiea  arc  comiUj, 


EXERCISES. 


1.  Veni,  mi  fill,  ut  tihi  h^c  verba  enarrem.-^.  ^f  ^jjf  ^^J^^jjjl' 

irPompi^T.^    prUsL    nn  disc,.>U.,ri;'  Crass,,,»  H    in>"i>».  """ff ,  f""^ 

n     ,  r,V,,is    w'c  (</i«i'«0    i.ra-liis  at.   I,.)stil)„s    lacfsseba„U,r.-l...  Milia^ 
q,,o,,a,a,i,s  uic|»/«     )    1  St.,i,,.i(ini„s,  cm  Wane  ptrnam  siiW- 

ret  avulso.lcnJout  ur-l  .  ^"^  '"'1 '^^  '  i',"  t,i  ^,/ „,)  dlkiotur,  ul  civibus 
c„losu„i  „CM- li-uslia    ''^''^---IV.,  •ur.rtt,,r'--10    N,,,>tii  inoi  te  ccrto 

^'i:?.    " n^u^miconnn  S,.;.,  spes  .,.a.„..po,-c;  (?,  «^);lebi.Uab,u.,-^- 

^'''ni"\;,on  iis<.if  admonisbcs  us  ,o  (that  wc  ^i'""i->\,;';;'?;;;''-^3  !;;;™;lt,;:: 

2.  Attics  lolusfa  b.„,o,s,  althousU  ,b.y  wore  open    *'    "    .•-■^-  V,  ,„V"^ 
11     ..  ti...t   I'on  irv"    the   tortune   ot   war. — 4.  it   A\ni  ik    txinuKnu 

n  ;;    Uilt  ti^il  es ''^iiice  it  is  allowea  to  thee,  to  pertor,,,  (-,^«v)  .M-.-ater 
S'»"-^  It  "All  b;  becoming  to  perlbrnt  (.cn.jer.)  lUy  business  Kr^r.), 

*3 


I 


REMARKS   ON   THE   USE   OF  TENSES  AND   MOODS. 


. 


gr(>at('sl  care, — 8.  I  shall  never  allow,  that  the  captives  be  returned  [red- 
den)  to  the  enemies. — 0.  We  eat  in  order  that  we  ma}^  live. — 10.  Learn  the 
Latin  huif^uage,  that  you  may  know  both  how  to  think  and  to  write. — 
— IL  It  will  be  preferable  to  return,  since  you  are  afraid  to  proceed  [any] 
farther  (j^  291,  lieiu.  10).— 12.  Gajus  will  give  {dare)  to  me  this  dog,  because 
he  has  more  dogs  than  he  wishes  {pelle). — 13.  Since  thou  wishest  {cupere) 
to  write  letters,  I  allow  thee  to  remain  hohie  (domi). — 14.  Before  attempt- 
ing {rofidri)  to  cross  the  river,  thou  wilt  wait  till  (durn  with  subjunctive) 
some  better  kind  of  boats  {li/iter)  be  on  hand."^" — 15.  Thou  shalt  always  be- 
liave'''*  so  {i't(t\  that  thou  art  oftener  praised   than  censured. — 16.  Since 
Helvetia  is  every  where  {iindlque)  closed'''^  by  mountains,  the  chiefs'-'*  of  that 
slate  are  anxious"''*  to  occui)y  better  and  broader  lands  {ager). — 17.  The 
general  commands  {pra>j<cribere)  that  the  inhabitants  should  make  as  large 
(//<(/// /r?/.v)  sowings'"  as  possible. — 18.  Hannibal's  bravery  and  mi\\iiiY\{J)ellicus) 
art  terrifieil  the  peoj)le. — 19.  The  dead  bodies^*^  of  the  Egyptians  {jEgyptius) 
were  embalmed,"^''  in  order  that  they  might  be  preserved  as  long  as  possible. 
— 20.  Alexander  consulted"^**  the  oracle  of  Jupiter  Annuo,  in  order  to  prove 
his  divine  origin. — 21.  The  Roman  people  showed'^"  the  highest  favors^"  to 
the  Athenians,  in  order  to  attach  {iihxiriiKjere)  this  most  renowned  {claruH) 
people  (.v^/?.'<)  to  them  (^  238).— 22.  M.  T.  Cicero  was  absolved  by  the  sen- 
tence of  the  whole  people. — 23.  The  enemies  already  seemed  to  approach^^ 
nearer  (J^  291).— 24.  it  seemed  unjust  to  the  Senate,  that  our  i)ioperty^'' 
should  be  plundered  {diripere)  by  the  most  wicked^^  proconsuls. — 25.  De- 
cius  loved  his  country  so  much,  that  he  voluntarily^*  devoted  {devovere) 
himself  to  death. — 26.  The  rising  {orlri)  and  sQnmg^occMere)  sun  makes 
days  and  nights. — 27.  Dionysius,  fearing  the  razors,"  burned  (^/(/^/'d/'t^  [his] 
hair  {cupilhuii)  by  a  glowing^"  coal.— 28.  The  general,  distrusting"  himself 
(transl.  to  himmlf)  and  doubting,  d\(\{agere)  uotJiing. — 29.  This  v^ictory  was 
annoimced  to  the  kiug,  already  despairing. — 30.  The  soldiers,  renewing^^ 
the  battles,  put  the  enemies  to  flight  {fagdre). — 31.  Death  cannot  be  ter- 
rible (tevribiliK)  to  men  fearing  {cercri)  God. — 32.  The  soldiers,  following 
the  general,  caused  {edere)  a  great  slaughter.^" 

*»  To  commanff,  prje^cribere.— ^»  To  be  on  hand,  suppetere.— 'i  To  behave,  se  habSrc— 
'2  To  close,  confiuCre.— 23  C'A?^-/.  priuceps.— 2*  To  be  uNjio'/.o.  stndvre.—'^^  Sowing,  iscmen- 
tis.— 2«  .4  deadUnlij.  ciulaver.— ^^  To  endjulm.  condire.—'^''  To  consult,  consulere.— 2»  frans' 
late:  aftVcted  {Utfiwre)  the  Athenians  by  the  highest  favors.— 3°  Benelicium.— 3»  Accedere. 
__32  Proiiertij,  bona.  G.  bonorura.— ^s  Xoquam.— 3*  Vdinitarily.  iiltro.— ^^  A  razor,,  cultet 
touisorins.— 3«  To  glow.,  caudere.— 3^  To  dUtrmt.,  dltildere.— 3»  To  remiL\  redintegrare.— 
■•  Slaughter,  caedcti. 


238 


IKIiEGULAR  VERBS. 


CILVrTEll  SECOND. 

Tinip:(UiLAR  Yp:ur>s. 

§  5l,>i.  The  Irreguhir  Verbs  are  the  ibllowing  8  :  esse,  posse, 
velle,  ?iolle,  rnalle.ferre  (§  59),  7re, including  its  compounds  quire 
and  neqiure  (§  54),  Vi\\i\ fieri  (g  128).  They  belong  to  the  third 
conjugation,  except  Ire,  which  follows  the  Iburth.  To  these  the 
defectives  inqunm  and  ajo  must  be  added. 

The  irregularity  of  these  verbs  is  confined  to  the  Puesext- 

Syste^f,  the   perfect-system   being  regularly  conjugated  in  all 

verbs. 

Rem.  1.  The  iiTesrnlarity  of  €S!<e  and  posae  consists  in  the  anriont  fonng 
glm,  crmn,  era,  antrin  the  j^rt's.  ind.  Vdk,  malle,  noll<\  are  iin-i;ular  in  thu 
pivs.  incUcativc  and  in  the  lirst  person  of  the  pns.  subjunetivc  {rdiin,  etc., 
fossiiu).  The  irregularity  ot'ferre  is  confined  to  the  present  indicative  and 
imperative.  Ire  is  irregular  on  account  of  its  two  stems  in  t'  and  /,  and  in 
forming  the  imperfect  and  future  according  to  the  analogy  of  the  hrst  and 
second^'onjugations  in  bant  and  bo.  The  irregularity  of  ./'Vnconsist.s  in 
its  active  fo'riu  in  the  present-system  and  in  the  irregular  stem. /f,  which,  al- 
thougli  ending  in  a  vowel,  is  conjugated  according  to  the  third  conjugation. 

§  335.  Paradigms   of  the  Presext-System   of  the  Irre- 
gular Verbs. 


1.  Esse,  to  be. 


INDICATIVE. 


Sum,  lam 
es,  thou  art 
est.  /le  ift 
t■umu^<,  ire  are 
estis,  yon  are 
Bunt,  (he>/  are. 


Cram,  7  loas 

em-',  f/ioi/,  ipost 
f'ral,  he.  ivoh 
graimit?,  we  irers 
(Bnltis,  y(m  were 
grant,  they  were. 


fro.  Txha/l  be 
f  rid,  tho't  wilt  be 
frit,  he  wiil  l>e 
f  riniut»,  we  nhall  be 
frit  is,  ijoit  will  he    ; 
Cruut,  (hey  will  be. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Presext. 


Sim,  I  may  be,  should  be,  lam.,  etc, 

eis,  thwt  tiuiyent  be,  etc. 

eit.  he  may  Ite 

sTnuis.  we  may  1)6 

pltis,  yon  may  be 

siut,  they  may  be. 

iMrERFECT. 

espem.  /  might,  should  be.  I  wae^  etc 

esse!*,  thou  iniqhtest  be,  etc. 

esset,  he  might  l>e 

ePsC-nuis,  we  might  be 

essetis,  you  might  be 

esseut,  they  might  be. 

Future. 

Wanting. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


239 


First  form. 

Sing.  2.  Es,*ft«(thou) 

3.  

riur.  '2.  este,  be  (you) 

3. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Sing. 
Plur. 


Second  form. 

2.  esto,  be,  thoti  shall  bt 

3,  esto.  he  shall  be. 
'2.  estute,  you  shall  be 
3.  siuito,  they  shall  be. 


INDEFINITE   VERB. 


Present  TxnEriNiTE.  Esse,  to  be.         ... 
Vi'TruE  Infinitive.     Fore,  to  be  about  to  be. 
pIrtSfLe  i^d  Veubal  Adjective  in  du8.    Waniing. 
l^^  For  the  parts  oUsse  formed  from  the  perfect-stem/w  gee  p.  247. 

2.  Possum,  lean. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 


INDICATIVE. 


Popsnm,  lean.  I  may 
potes,  thou  canst  or  mayest 
potest,  he  can  or  may 
possunms.  we  can  or  may 
potest  is.  you  can  or  may 
po:^suut,  they  can  or  may. 


Poteram.  /  co^ild.  was  able 
poteras,  thou  couldst 
])oterat.  he  could 
puterrnims,  we  could 
poterilti»».  yon  conhl 
poterant,  they  could. 


Possim,  I  may  be  able,  Tmay 

possis.  thou  mayext  be  alie,  thou  mayett  ] 

possit.  he  may  be  able.  etc. 

posslinus.  we  may  be  able,  etc. 

possltis,  you,  may  tje  able,  etc. 

possiut,  t/iey  may  be  able,  etc. 

Imperfect. 

Possem.  Icmild.  might,  might  be  al)k. 

posses,  thou  couldst.,  etc. 

posset,  ]te  could,  etc. 

posseinus,  we  could,  etc. 

posset  is,  you  could,  etc. 

posseut,  iltey  could,  etc. 


Future. 

Potf  ro   T shall  be  able,  it  will  be.  post^ible  to.  etc. 
poteris.  thou  wilt  be  able,  it  wiU  be  imsible  to,  etc. 
poterit.  he  will  be  aide.  etc. 
poterimus.  we  shall  be  able.  etc. 
poteritis,  you  will  be  able,  etc. 
poleruJit,  tiuy  will  be  able,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Wanting. 

INDEFINITE  VERB. 


Waniing, 


I?tfintttve. 
Participle. 

YSKBAL  AJ>J 


Posse,  to  be  able. 
Potens,  powerful. 
.  Wanting. 


3.  Velle,  to  he  waiing.    4.  Nolle,  to  be  unwilling.    5.  Malle,  to  wish  rather 


INDICATIVE. 


Present. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Yolo 

vis 

vult 

volnmus 

vnltis 

voluut 


nolo 
non  vis 
non  vult 
nolniniis 
non  vultis 
noluut 


main 

mavis 

mavult 

malnmus 

niavultis 

malunt 


velira 

velis 

velit 

velTmns 

vein  is 

velint 


nolim 

nolis 

nolit 

nolTinns 

nolTtis 

nolint 


malim 

nialis 

malit 

niallmus 

inalltis 

nialint. 


Batititled.  , 


210 


IRREGULAR  \T^RBS. 


voinbani 

nolrbam 

maU'bam 

VDlC'bas 

uoir-bas 

nialr-baii 

volr-bat 

nolt'bat 

malebat 

v()l(?b;lmn3 

nolcbilmi:» 

iiiak'bninna 

volt'bAtiH 

iiolobjltis 

inaU'biltis 

volebiiut 

uolcbaut 

malC'bant 

Tolam 

nolam 

J: 

malani 

voles 

noles 

inalos 

voh't 

noh't 

Tjialrt 

volGmns 

iu)lC'inu3 

inaU'mna 

volC'tis 

nolGtii? 

maU'tis 

volent 

noleut 

mak'iit. 

TMrp:uFECT. 

vcllom 

V  files 

TPllet 

vcllemus 

TcUetis 

velleut 

Future. 


nollom 

nolles 

nollet 

noHT'inns 

nolir-tis 

nolleut 


Wanting. 


innllcra 

niailei* 

mallet 

nialirmiis 

iiialir-tiH 

inaUout. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Noli,  do  not  (thou) 
Nollte,  do  not  (you). 

INDEFINITE  VERB. 
b<FiNiTivE.  Velle,  nolle,  muUe.  Pakticiple.  Volen^  nolens. 

6.  Fcrrc,  to  mrry,  to  hear. 
Active.  Passive. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 


Sing.  Fero.  fers,  fert,. 
Plur.  ferimuss,  feriis,  fenint. 


Sinfj.  Fcror.  forris.  fcrtnr. 
Plur.  ferimur,  lerimiai,  feruntur. 


iMrERFECT. 


Sinq.  Ferebam,  ferPba":».  feri^hat 
Pliir.  ferebilmus,  lerebiltia,  ferebant. 


Sinn  Forrhar.  forebHris.  forebiltur. 
IHtlr.  ferebauiur,  lerebamiui,  lerebautar. 


Future. 


Sing.  Fenim.  feros.  feret 
J'kir.  ferC'uius,  lerClis,  ferent. 


Sing.  Forar.  forrris.  feret nr. 
riur.  feremur,  leremini,  ferentur. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 


Sing.  Fcram.  feras.  ferat. 
IKur.  feraiuus,  leratii?,  ferant. 


Sing.  Ferrcra,  ferres,  ferret. 
Plur.  ferreLnus,  ferretis,  ferrcnt. 


I.  Fer.  ferte. 
II.  ferto,  lerto,  fertOte,  ferunto. 


Sing.  Ferar.  ferSrij».  feratur. 
Plur.  leramur,  reramiui,  feraatur. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  Ferrer,  ferreris.  ferretnr. 
Pliir.  lerreiuur,  lerreniiui,  ierrentoi. 


IMPERATIVE. 


I.  Ferre,  ferimTni. 
II.  fertor,  ferlor,  fenintor. 


INDEFINITE  VERB. 
Infinitive.  Ferre.    Participle.  Ferens.       Infinitive.  Ferri.    Verbal  Anj.  Ferendas. 


IRREGULAR  TERES. 


241 


INDICATIVE. 

Eo,  iB,  it,  Tmus,  Itig,  Cunt. 


Tham.  Tbas.  That 
ibamiit*,  ibStis,  Ibant. 


Ibo,  Ibis.  Tbit 
ibimus,  ibitis,  Ibunt. 


7.  Ire,  to  go. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

6am,  gas,  6at,  6amus,  Satis,  Cant. 

Imperfect. 

Irem,  ires,  Tret 
irCmus,  irCtlB,  Trent 

Future. 


Wanting. 


I^IPERATIVE. 


I.  I,  Tte, 
II.  Ito,  Tto,  itote,  eunto. 

INDEFINITE  VERB 

Infixitive.  Ire.    Participle.  lens.    Gen.  Suntis,  etc.    Verbal  Adj.  Sundas. 

8.  Queo,  lean.    9.  Nequeo,  I eamiot. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 


sing.  Queo,  qnis.  quit. 
Plur.  quiuuib,  quilis,  queant. 

Sing.  Quibam, ,  quibat. 

IHur. , ,  quibant. 


Sing.  Quibo, 
Plur. , 


Sing.  Nequeo,  nequis,  nequit. 
Plur.  nequlmuts,  iiequltis,  uequeunt. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  nequTl)am,  — 

Plnr. , ,  nequlbant. 


-,  nequTbat. 


-,  qu ibunt. 


Future. 

Sing.  - 
Plur.  - 


-,  neqnlbunt. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 


Sing.  Queam,  queas.  queat. 
Plur.  queainus,  queaLib,  queant. 

,  quiret. 


Sing.  Nequeam,  nequeas.  neqacat. 
Plur.  nequeSmus,  nequeatis,  uequoant. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  Qnirem,  — 

Plur. , ,  quireut 


Sing.  NequTrem, ,  nequTret. 

Plur.  nequiremus, ,  nequlrent. 


INDEFINITE  VERB. 


Infinitive.    Quire, 
Participle,  quieus,  G.  queuntis 


nequTre. 

nequieus,  G.  nequeuntis. 


10.  Fieri,  to  he  done,  to  heeome. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


sing.  Fio.  fig,  fit. 
Plur.  fiums,  fitis,  fTunt. 


Sing.  Fiam.  flap,  fiat. 
Phir.  ftamuB,  fiatis,  iiant. 


2^2 


IBREGULAR  VERBS. 


Imperfect. 


Sing.  FiC'bani.  fiC-has.  fiebat. 
i'lu'r.  tiebamus,  liebuli^,  tiCbant. 


Sinq.  Fierem.  fien's,  fieret. 
Pliir.  lierCmub,  ticrutis,  liercnt. 


FUTUIIE. 


^yanting. 
Imperative,  Participle  (present),  and  Verbal  Adjective  in  dus,  wanting. 


Sing.  Fiam,  fies,  fiet. 
piu'r.  fienui?,  flGtis,  tient 


11.  Ajo,  Isay. 


INDICATIVE. 


Sing.  Ajo,  ais,  ait. 

JHur. , ,  ajunt. 


Sing.  AjCbam.  ait'bap,  ajCbat. 
J*lur.  ajebamiis,  ajcbStis,  ajCbant. 


Present. 


Sing, 
riur. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


-,  ajas,  ajat. 
-  ,  ajant. 


Imperfect.* 


'Wantiixg. 


12.  Inquam,  I  my. 

PREgENT.  Tnqnam,  inqni-.  inqnit. 

iiuiuitnuf.  iiiqiiitis,  iiKiiiiuiit. 
IMPEKF.      (Iiiquiel)am)  itiquiebas  0"q"J5bat),— [mrel.** 
FrrruR.     Iiuinies.  inquiet. 
iMl'EKAT.   Iiique,  inquiio. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

mm  1  The  compoimcls  of  e!<^e  {ahense,  adf.<<se,  etc.)  are  conjncrMt.'d  like 
essT  Be-inners  ouilit  to  be  rarcful  in  immoinicin-  tlu'se  compoumls  ac- 
coidino-  to  the  marked  (iiianlity  of  the  stem-verb  [ad  r nun,  ahenf^  <nh^  nn>i 
e^c  rTi  e  verb  »,vW.w  droits  the  d  m  all  forms  of  6'...  which  beirm  with 
a  consonant,  and  keeps  the  d  in  all  forms  beginning  with  a  vowel  {,>mnm, 
pro'deram.prodess'em.pi'o'dcro).  r-or.ov.iu^  U  nn.rht 

^  2    The  translation  of  the  verb  /)^.w  is  often  difficult.     Geneiallj  it  ought 
to  be  rendered   bv  ran  or  amy;  by  -to  he  able''  only  when  it  is  used  of 
^^r.l    and  we  speak  of  their  'ahinty.    The  future  of  ;.>x..,  when  its  object- 
finitive   is  a  pLtre.  must  be  translated  by  "it  is  possible  to,'    render- 
r.  t  le  Latin  jLire  intinitive  by  an  En.dish  artr,  inhnitive,  and  changing 
the  Latin  subjert  into  the  English  ohjrrt,  as :    Har  ^,.r>^.a  cdenter  coajici 
qjotenint  It  will  be  possible  to  tinish  these  atlairs  (luieklv.  ,  ^    ,  ,      .,  , 

^  t  B ot'h  subjunctives  of  irlle,  noUe^  vadU  are  frequently  translated  by     i 

should  .n.h  or  lifter  ^^  I  should  not  liker  ^  ^^^/^'V^'l- -h' H^u^^-ft  iu:  i  ^ 
^^I  wmr  but  onlv  in  the  first  perscm.  The  English  clause,  f<  I» '^^  ? 
these  expressi(>ns,  wh(-ther  introduced  by 'Mhat"  or  not,  is  translated  by 
the  mere  subjunctive  in  Latin,  without  an  introductory     ut,    as : 

7  .hrr,M  ivi^h  voti  iro^'lf!  return  a.<^  ••wn  as  possible,  volini  (yollrm^  qnani  prinmm  redn!ttii 
(redirSisf.    jlhoZZtlike  that  you  would  itay  .o  long,  nc.lun  tandm  nmneati.. 


*  Tho  other  fornix  of  ajo  are  either  wantinir  or  extremely  rare.     Tn  the  perfect  ^>>tem, 

«JmI'Scm/  u?on  v?n,m  in  ,.se.-*Mn  the  perlVct  .y.t.Mn  of  wrawion\y  mquuti 
fnd  in*«iahc  laid)  occur.    Inquam  also  occur,  in  the  n^ean.ng  of  a  perlect. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


243 


The  Imperfects  Subjunctive  vellem,  ii/)llem,  mallem.,  must  be  used,  if  the 
action  wished  for  is  conceived  to  be  impossible,  as :  I sliould  wiah  Coesar 
teas  alive,  velleni  Casar  viveret. 

The  second  and  third  i)ersoi)s  oi  Telle,  nolle,  malle  are  used  to  give  to  the 
predicate  a  color  of  modesty,  and  are  translated  by  "  would,"  as:  Ut  Jinire 
TeltH,  that  you  would  tinish. 

4.  The  (•omi)ounds  of  Ire,  as  redire^  perlre,  etc.,  are  conjugated  like  Ire 
{redVMim,  per'iham,  a/nbo,  interlbo). 

5.  The  })assive  of  Ire  can  be  used  in  transitive  compounds  only,  as  tran- 
seor,  I  am  crossed  (imperf.  trannbar,  fut.  translbor,  etc.)  But  even  the 
simple  verb  ire,  in  the  third  person  pingular  of  all  tenses,  forms  an  imper- 
sonal passive  (see  P.  II.,  ^  4(50),  as  :  Uur,  edtur,  ihdtur,  iretur,  ibitur. 

6.  The  present  particii)le  of  Ire  retains  its  regular  decleusi(m-stem  eunt 
(§  ;j24,  U.  2)  in  all  cases  except  nominative  singular,  while  the  latter  case 
assumes  the  stem  i,  changing  u  into  e,  like  the  other  verbs  of  the  fourth 
conjugation. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Cum  beate  vivere  jucundissimum  sit,  plcrlque  homines  vitam  beatam 
assequi  summopere  (g  313,  2)  student.— 2.  Deum  oriimus,  ut  propilius 
{gracioaH)  nobis  sit. — 3.  C.  Marius  multis  civibus  funestus  erat. — 4.  Tra- 
janus  ita  regCbat  rempublicam,  ut  quamplurimis  civibus  prodesset. — 
5.  Quum  hostes  jam  adsint,  pugnare  necesse  erit. — 0.  Vires  tibi  deerunt,  si 
tarn  ardue  {hard)  laborare  pergis. — 7.  Bono  auimo*  esto,  mi  tili,  ut  omnia 
\\ivc  imi)edimenta  sujierare  possis. — 8.  Hcmiinis  corpus  rectum' est,  utcoelum 
contuGri  jiossit. — 9.  .Milites  nostri  a^gre^  castra  ten5re  poterant,  quum  un- 
diciue  {everywhere)  ab  hostibus  prcmerentur.* — 10.  Ilostium  fuga  tanta 
erat,  ut  paucissimi  Khenum  transire  possent. — 11.  Hunc  librum,  si  vis,  fa- 
cillime  perlcgere"  poteris. — 12.  Hoc  oi)pidum  a  civibus  soils  defendi  poterit. 
— 13.  GaudGbo,  si  totum  hoc  negotium  quamprlmum  perticere  velis. — 
14.  Cum  milites  nostri  oppidum  ingredi  veilent,  multi  cives  concurrCbant,* 
militibusiiue  venientibus  se  objiciCbant.'' — 15.  Alexander,  Macedonuin  rex, 
totum  orbeni  terrarum  sibi  subjicere  volGbat. — 10.  Coi)ia3  nostra?  mori  quam 
vinci  malGbant. — 17.  Tamdiu  manCbis,  quamdiu  (^  304,  Rem.  1(5)  voles. — 
18.  Cum  milites  nostri  montem  ascenderent,  exploratorcs*  jaminde(^A<?/<ce) 
redlbant.— liJ.  Cura**  ut  exercitus  (piaiu  primum  abeat.— 20.  llaec  civitas 
cito  i)crlbit. — 21.  Domum  {home)  ito,  mi  tili. — 22.  ^Milites  tluvium  transe- 
unto. — 23.  Fluvius  tam  altus  est,  ut  vado  transiri  nequeat. — 24.  Petimus'" 
lit  omnis  has  res  statim  nobis  referatis. — 25.  His  rebus  minus  coinmodi 
nobis  quam  hostibus  atlerebiitur.^' — 2(J.  Aqua  tam  rara  erat,  et  vinuni  tam 
fretiuens,'-  ut  milites  aquani  vino  pra'ferrent.— 27.  Tabellarius"  mens  quo- 
tidie  tibi  litteras  atleret  {to  bring). — 28.  Atfer  nobis  statuam  illam,  mi  amice. 
—21».  Hoc  oi)us  vclim  melius  et  (;itius  tiat.— 30.  His  rebus  Germanorum 
agii  melidres  fecundioresque  tiGbant. 

1.  Since  this  journey  {iter)  is  so  {tam)  long  that  it  cannot  be  made  [feri) 
1   foot",  it  will  be  necessary  to  ride  in  a" carriage  (curru  vehi).—2.  We 


on 


'  Bono  a.nmoes.'ie.  to  be  of  jjood  cheer,  to  be  cheerful.— ^  Rectuft,  ei-ect.— '  .f.gre.  with 
difluulty.— ••  Preinere.  t(»  Yxci^^.—^  I'erlegere,  tt)  perusr.— «  Concurrtre.  to  run  tui,a'ther.— 
'^'6  o/ni'cerc  (with  dative),  to  oppose  t-oiaebody.— **  Ejplorator,  a,  scout.— *  Curare,  to  take 
can*.— »"  i-'t/tre,  to  ask. -^^  Afferre.  to  vaii>^v. — ^'^  Frequeng,  abiindaut.—^^  'J'abellarias, 
letter-carrier.— 1*  (/nyoc^  translate :  bytke/ett. 


244 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


%^ish  {optare)  excmlin-ly  (^313,  2),  that  this  exorcise  {exn'ciiafw)  nia>  be 
verv  (^  :U:},  2)  us.rul  U>,W..s.v.)  for  {to)  thee.-a    Miu-e  you  now  are  nio  e 
ready   than  before,  it  will   be  easy  to  perform  the  whole  ;>"«;"t;f -f'^l^^ 
dili.'ent,  inv  son,  in  order  that  thou  mayest  {pom-)  do  {prmtare)  all  ^^ities  -- 
5    The  river  was  8000  paees  farther  (^  311)  distant  than  the  camp  ot  to 
enemies.-G.  It  was  very  (§  314)  dillicult  to  do  all  these  ^^^^^;':^^^f^ 
—7.  Althou-h  we  were  verv  (^  314)  busy,»  we  stdl  vonU  hear  the  1^'ct  lus   ot 
the  Stoic  {Sioicu.)  Posidoliius.-H.  When  Sempn^nius  was  prestnit  M^^.s-^^), 
the  other  ambassadors  were  silent.-9.  Alexander  was  so  turious,   hat   t 
was  dan-crous  to  apiH'oach  {adur)  him.-lO.  1  hou  wilt  be  priscnt  at  (r/a- 
fc)  thes". lectures  as  Ion- as  it  will  \w  useful  (j^mA-w)  t(>thee  to  ^!;' P;;^;;;;^;"\^ 
-11    All  these  undertakini^s  will  be  doubllul,  while  this  man  will  govern 
our  republic.-12.  The  astrologers  {a.trolo(p,.)  observed  »l^^\"\'^ti()ns  (/y/o/'^/^ 
of  the  stars,  that  they  might  (;>.aw)  learn  (c.^r/mAvc./v)  the  ^^»^1  <;';;'' •!\['M';,^. 
jjods— 13.  Ycsterdav  we  could  perceive  the  star  Mercury  (^  112    D)  wit  i 
(transl.  />v)  the  naked  eye.-14.  The  Roman  soldiers  could  endure  the  hard- 
ships of  the  war  bHter  than  the  Gauls.-l.-».  Our  c.ti/ens  will   be  able    o 
endure  the  war  lon-er  than  vours  (^  307,  2).-l(5.  It  will  be  p()ssible  to  do 
ifacen)  all  these  works  at  thV  same  time.-17.  It  will  be  possible  to  circum- 
navigate {drcumnavigan)  the  whole  island  in  (tnmsl.  %)  three  (Mys.-lS.  1 
should  wish  you  would  tinish  this  work  so(>n(4/-lJ»    1  should  wish  that 
Gaius  was  pivsent.-20.  I  wish   it    were    wmter.-21.  Gajiis  is  so  nc  i 
that  he  wishes    to   have  nothing  more   {anipUn.y-^l-l.    I    intended   {vdle) 
to  postpone  this  journev  a  little  longer,  so  that  my  friend  might  {posse) 
ace  mil  any*  me.— 23.  The  soldiers  were  so  tnvd,  that  they  refused  {nolh) 
to  proceed  (any)  farther  l^-2t)l,  H.  10).-24.  When  we   intended    to  cTiter 
the -ate  a  furious  multitude  surrounded  us.— 2o.  Live  as  quietly  as  thou 
\vilt"\visli  {nllel—liS.  I  should  not  wish  to  iiulorse  {conjirman)  this  opinion. 
—27    I  should  prefer  {malle)  to  see  thy  master.— 28.  Since  our  bodies  perish 
{inte'rlre),  thev  cannot  be  immortal.— 2t).  I  advise  that  you  return  ns  (puckly 
as   possible.-3().  Si)ring  was  already  api>roaching  {appdcre)    v^X^^n  {cum 
with  indicative)  the  army  crossed  the  mountains.— 31.  1  shall  pass  ovei 
this  whole  business,  since  it  cannot  be  pleasant  to  learn  {cofjnoscere)  so  dis- 
graceful tliings.-32.  The  slaughter  (MY/r.v)  was  so  great,  that  more  than 
n<  312)  3000  enemies  perished.— 33.  I  should  wish  you    would  bring  this 
book  to  me.— 34.  The  soldiers  patiently  endured   {perferre)    hunger   and 
thiixt  —3.1  The  confusion  {trepldutio)  was  so  great,  that  golden  vases  (n/^), 
statues  and  valuable  pictures  were  carried  away«  by  the  sol(liers.-3()  Carry 
awav  this  picture,  ()  friend.  -37.  King  Euristheus  gave  ordersMo  Hercules 
to  (that  Iw  should)  brimr  to  him  the  arms  of  the  (lueen  ot  the  Amazons.  — 
38.  Parents  take  pains,"  that   their  children   daily  become  better.— o<).  It 

rei 

40. 

[th.„,  .  -.  -^  .         ... 

that  he  becauie  hateful  {incites)  to  his  citizens. 


38.  Parents  take  pains,"  that  their  children  daily  become  better.— o).  It 
remains  (nstat)  that  this  work  be  done  {facere)  quickly  and  accuratelv— 
to  It  formerly  (^^  70)  happened'»  often  that  whole  cities  were  destroyec  bv 
[theirl  comiueroVs.»'     41.  Tarcpiinius  reigned   {rer/na/r)   so  despotically, 


1  Thj<i7,  ocrnnltKa  —^  Lfdure  Pchnla.— «  Soon,  matOre.— ■•  Comitari.— »  To  pass  aier, 
t>r.UT  iv  -^  ror  r%  a/mraufern^^  To  gi re  orders,  i.nprrare.-;  The  Anuizon,,  Am»- 
Sont4.-»  To  tuLejZfJ,  «tudere.-»»  It  Jiupi^.i^.  fit.-"  Vicior.-^^  Despottcal.  .uperbi... 


\ 


J. 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


245 


CHAPTER  THIRD. 

THE  PERFECT-SYSTEM. 

§  3516,  All  forms  of  the  Perfect-SysteM  are  derived  from 
two  principal  forms:  1)  from  the  first  person  singular  indicative 
of  the  active  of  the  perfect  tense;  2)  from  the  first  supine. 
Both  of  these  are  again  derived  from  the  perfect-stem. 

new  1.  In  order  to  find  the  two  principal  formf»,  we  must  1)'  knovy  ihe  Perpect- 
«<TKM  i  e  the  verb-i*teni  -mp  it  appears  in  the  perfect  system.  Generally  hotli  systems 
iiave'tliP  mwe  stem.  Amdre,  for  inst.,  has  tiie  stem  nnia  for  both,  its  pre-mr  and  \nv- 
feet  «v-tem  Ihii  offn  the  two  sfms  (lifter.  Tiuisc-'//><7/e  has  the  vowel  stem  euba  m  tlie 
l)re-«Mit  sv^tem.  hut  its  perfect  stem  is  consonantic(C'/(^y;  p<'rf.  c//^'/^).  Pettre  has  ihe  con- 
H.n-int  st".-m  p^f  \\\  the  present  svsfem.  and  the  vowel-stem  ;Wi  in  the  perlect-system 
(p.  rf  i^etlrh  —2)  We  mn<t  know  whether  or  not  a  tensk-sion  is  to  he  added  to  the  per- 
fect-stem, and,  iCsi.,  which  tense-sij,'n  must  be  used  (whether  i\  us  in  ainCivi ;  or  w,  as  m 
viontti  ;  or*-,  as  in  carjM). 

g  :{:I7.  Verbs  of  tlie  first  and  fourth  conjugations  form  their 
first  person  indie,  perf  of  the  active  voice  by  adding  vl,  and 
their  supines  by  adding  tmn  to  the  verb-stem,  as  : 


Am  lire 
AndTre 


Pkijf.     amilvi 
Pekf.    audlvi 


Sep.     ainiltnm 
Sup.    audltum. 


Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  change  their  infinitive  termi- 
nation tre  for  the  perfect  into  tiL  and  for  the  supine  into  ttum,  as  : 

MonOre  Perf.    monui  Sup.    mcmitum. 

Pfm.  2.  For  the  numerous  exceptions  to  this  rule,  and  f.>r  finding:  th.'  two  principal 
forms  of  the  third  conju.'Mtion.  see  Appendix  VI  p.  85'..  Kdi.  '^  »'^'.  t^'i^'l.,!^'^;.  ;',f';'": 
mit  to  m.  MM.rv  those  verbs  of  the  1st.  2d.  and  4th  conjugations  which  ^'^'  ''"<^ /.  '>  /'^'i 
rule  (1).  m.  No.  r...  For  these.  an<l  lor  all  the  verbs  of  the  third  coujugation,  the  ll^t  of 
Perfects  and  Supines,  p.  375  loll.,  must  be  consulted. 

§  338.  When  the  two  principal  forms  (perfect  and  supine) 
are  known,  the  Perfect-System  of  any  given  verb  (including  the 
irregular  verbs)  may  be  formed  according  to  the  following 

Paradigm  of  the  Perfect-System  of  Aniare, 


Active. 


INDICATIVE. 
Perfect. 


Passive. 


Amilvi.  Ilored  or  hare  l&red 
amavisti,  thou  loredst  or  ha-^t  loved 
aniavit,  tie  Lored  or  ha>i  lortd 
amavimus,  ue  lored  or  hare  Imed 
ainavi>tis.  yim  lored  or  hare  lored 
amaveruut  or  amavere,  thty  loved 
loved. 


or  have 


Amatus  sum,  1  u'a.<t  lored  or  hare  been  lored 
amiltus  cs,  thou  wast  lored  or  haU  been  loved 
anultus  est.  he  ira^  lored  or  has  been  lored 
amilti  sumus.  we  Were  lored  or  hare  tmn  lored 
amnti  cotis,  you  were  lored  or  hare  been  Imed 
amati  buut,  t/uy  were  loved  or  have  been  loved. 


246 


Active, 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


Pluperffxt. 


Passive. 


AmavCram,  Ihadlored 
aniavcras.  t/um  fuuM  Irmed 
aiiniveras,  he  had  lo'rd 
amaviT-iniusJ,  /ve  /ia(/  tared 
ainaveriltii*,  i/ou  had  tared 
amaveraut,  they  had  loved. 


Amatuf»  eram.  7  had  been  loved 
amilnis  eras,  t/iou  hadst  tjeen  loved 
ainntii!^  erat,  he  had  been  tored 
aiiifiti  crilinijs,  we  had  been  tared 
anulti  erfitis,  ?/o//  had  tnen  tored 
amitj  eraiit,  t/iey  had  been  loced. 


TEEFECT-SYSTEM. 


247 


FuTuiiE  Perfect. 


AraavPro,  InhaM  hare  tared 
amaveris,  tlion  iritt  hare  tored 
amaverit.  he  wilt  hare  tored 
aniaverinms,  we  ,sh(Ut  hare  tored 
amaveritis,  yaii  witt  hare  loved 
amaveriiit,  they  wilt  have  loved. 


Amfltiis  ero,  Tfihalt  hare  be^n  tored 
amatus*  eris,  thoa  nilt  hare  l)een  loved 
amfitufi  rrit.  he  wilt  hare  been  tared 
amati  eriimis,  we  )<halt  fiave  been  tored 
anulti  cnW'^.you  will  Jiare  been  loved 
amati  eruut,  they  will  have  been  laved. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Perfect. 

Ainavprim,  I  tared,  have  loved,  or  may  have  Amiltus  sim,  1  ivas  laved,  hare  been  loved,  ma§ 

tored  hare  b<en.  should  hare  tjcen  loved 

aruaveriti,  thou  tovedst,  etc.  am  St  us«  «is,  Vtou  waid  loved,  or  ha^t  tieen  laved, 

*?tr. 

amaverit.  he  tored.  etc.  amatusi  ^it.  he  ?/'a.«  tared,  etc. 

amaviTimus,  we  tared,  etc.  amati  simuti,  we  were  tored,  etc. 

ainaveritiH.  t/ou  tared,  etc.  amiiti  isitis,  you  were  tored,  etc. 

amaveriut,  they  laved,  etc.  amati  Hint,  t/t£y  were  loved,  etc. 

Pluperfect. 

Amavipsom,  Thad  loved,  would  havelared,    Amatus  essom.  J  had  been,  might  have  be^n, 

mi{/ht  hare  tared  or  u'outd  hare  been  tared 

amavi!*seB,  thou  hadnt  taxied,  etc.  amiltus  esses,  thou  hadsl  t>een  loved,  etc. 

amavisset.  he  had  tared,  etc.  amfltus  e.-;set.  he  had  tteen  tored.  etc. 

amavissCMiuis,  we  had  tored,  etc.  amati  ossemus.  we  had  f)een  tared,  etc. 

amavissC'tis,  you  had  tored.  etc.  amjlii  cssetis,  you  had  t>een  tared,  etc. 

amavissent,  tliey  fiad  loved,  etc.  amati  ebsent,  they  had  been  loved,  etc. 

INDEFINITE  VERB. 

Perfect  Infinitive  Active— Amavis^^e.  to  hare  tared 

i*EiiFECT  Infinitive  Passive— amatum  etise,  to  hare  been  loved 

Pekfect  (Passive)  PAKTicirLE— amStus.  loved  or  having  been,  loved 

FonMEU  Supine— ainntum,  {in  (wder)  to  love 

Latteu  ISiTi'iNE — amatu.  to  tn-  toreil 

Verbal  Adjective— amaturus»,  *  atjout  to  love, 

§  «{«lO.  Ill  order  to  form  according  to  the  preceding  paradigm 
the  perfect-system  of  any  given  verb,  whose  two  principal  forms 
(perfect  and  supine)  are  known,  we  proceed  thus : 

I)  From  the  given  Perfect  remove  final  %  and  substitute  what 
remains,  for  the  syllables  amdv  in  the  Paradigm.  Thus  the 
whole  active  voice  may  be  formed.  2)  From  the  given  Supine 
remove  final  itm,  substituting  what  remains,  for  amCit  in  the 
Paradigm.     Thus  the  whole  passive  voice  may  be  formed. 

*  The  Verbal  Adjective  in  Urus  belongs  by  its  meaninpf  to  the  Preseut-Syeteiu  ;  by  its 
derivation  to  the  Perfect-System. 


-^ 


Ex'AMPT.ES  I.  For  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  conjnirations.  1.  Second 
Coniuo-ation.  Pcrf.  monui.  Sup.  monitnm  (^  :3:i:).  Subsutute  man  a  tor 
amac,  and  mon)t  for  aruCit  in  the  paradigm.  Perf.  \iu\.  mom»  monui.ti, 
OHonaif  cic.-Plup.  monuemm.-l\x\.  perf.  m.>7i//^7v.-Pert.  siil>i  monue. 
ri,n  — Plup.  subj.  mo /urismn,— Fart  pass.  monttuH  stwi  (subj.  ;«;''}•— ''"P- 
pas^  monifus  €r/r??i  (subj.  ^.w/zi).— Verb.  adj.  moMturus.—2.  Third  Con- 
iuffationi^O  Srriberf.  Perf.  srripsi,  Sup.  srripfam  (p.  384).  Snl)stititte  .rnps 
inroinrfr  and  !<rript  for  amat.  Fvri.  un\.  .scn/,si,  scnpmti,.scri/mt.--l  \u\\ 
ffrrifwnini.—Fvvi'.  pass,  .scriptus  snm.—\vvh.  adj.  scripiura.s.—{I>)  iM^dere 
Pc-if  hi^si.  Sup.  lfpmm{\^.m(i)-  Substitute /^'.v  both  for ^/mvf?? and  ^///<;/^.  1  ett. 
Jjpsi,l<f'4s/i,  l^f^sif  (Mc.-Plui)  tasnnm  etc.— Perf.  i)ass.  Imus  sum.  \  •  rb  ai  j. 
;,,,,./-, ,v/.y—:j.  Fourth Conju^tion  J  ?/(?7/Y';  Perf  uud>n,  Su)).  auddam  (^ 
;j;]7).  Substitute  iiadlcUn-tuii'iv,  and  aud'tti'ov  (Dtalt.  Perl.  Aiuiin,audivt»tL, 
aadhit  dr.— VvrW  pass,  audlta.s  f<u)n.—Vi^Tb.  adj.  auditurus. 

II  Irregular  Conjugation,  beinir  regular  in  the  p-'rfcet  svs'ein.  — 1) 
Esse  Perf./V/(p.  377).  Substitute/?/ for  ^^w<?^.  Perf.  :  FNi,fulstLfuitL^\c, 
Phip.  fui'niin.—W'rt'.  subj.  fueritn.  Plup.  subj.  fai.^sem.  Suiec  there  is  no 
supine  (p.  ;I:T),  a  passive  voice  oUxse  eannol  be  formed.  \u)v  the  irregular 
verb  adj  fatdras  see  p.  337.—  2)  Pof<xe.  Perf.  poiui,  without  sup.  (p.  o83). 
SubstiliUe";7.////  Wnamdv.  Perf.  Potai,  potui.xti,  potuit  eXc.  Flap,  pot  iter  am 
,,l<.  _:j)  So  the  perf  svstem  of  vellc,  nolle,  m'dle  (perf.  volai  etc.,  see  the  list) 
i^iv.riilnrlveonjuszated  {rohii,  volnisti  q\c.;  voluerxm  etc.).— 4)  Ferre.  Pert. 
/////, "sup.  I'lluni  (p.  378).  Substitute  tul  for  aaidv,  and  Idt  for  ainat.  Pert. 
Tall  tali.sti,talit  ete.— Plup.  tuhram  etc.— Perf  pass.  Idta^  ,s//;/^— \  erb. 
adj  Id  urns.-  5)  //v.  Perf.  ui.  Sup.  )tum  (p.  379).  Substitute  7c  for  amav, 
aiul  It  for  aiudt.  Perf.  Ivi,  icisfi,  ivit  etc.  Plup.  ivemm  etc.  Pert.  i)ass.  itus 
mimatum  eat.  impersonallv).— Verl).  adj.  itiiruti.—(3.  Fieri.  Ver\.J(tctU!<  mm 
(p  378)  Substitute  y>/r^  tor  ^n/^(7rin  the  pass.  V{^YLFactmmm,faHases, 
farffLscfd  etc.;  1  became,  was  niadeetc.—Plup./«^^?/s^rawi etc. —Verb.  adj. 
jactdras  (belonging  to  the  active  meaning  '  to  make '). 

§  U  lO.  The  l\'rfect-System  has  two  moods,  Indicative  and 
Suiui'NCTivE.  The  Indicative  has  three  tenses,  Perfect,  Plu- 
PEiiFECT,  and  FuTUKE  Perfect,  (dosely  corresponding  in  their 
relations  to  the  three  tenses  of  the  Present-System.  The  Sub- 
junctive has  two  tenses.  Perfect  and  Pluperfect.  The  indefi- 
nite verb  consists  of  I)  one  infinitive  for  each  voice;  2)  one 
participle  for  the  passive  voice ;  3)  one  verbal  adjective  for 
the  active  voice ;  4)  two  supines,  the  former  for  the  active,  the 
latter  for  the  jjassive  voice. 

^  341.  The  tenses  and  moods  of  the  active  voice  are  formed 
by  the  endings  /,  trim,  train,  issem,  ami  m>,  which  are  applied 
to  the  Perfect-stem,  increased  by  the  tense  sign  (w,  u,  or  s),  if 
there  is  any,  or,  in  other  words,  substituted  for  the  ending  i  of 
the  given  Perfect. 


218 


rEllFECT-SYSTEM. 


1 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


249 


The  tenses  and  moods  of  the  Passive  voice  are  compound 
forms,  consisting  of  the  rEiiFECT  Participle  in  connection  witli 
the  Present-System  of  the  copula  esse,  whicli  in  this  connection 
is  called  an  auxiliary  verb. 

These  compound  tenses  of  tlie  Passive  voice  are  grammatically 
treated  in  the  same  way  as  predicative  adjectives  with  the  copula 
(g§  G4,  78,  81,  102).  According  to  §  78,  Rem.  G,  we  must  quote 
the  Perfect  Infinitive  Passive  l)y  placing  the  participle  in 
the  accusative  masculine  singular  (amatum  esse). 

^  :t  i  i;  The  following  verbs  are  called  Perfect  or  Preterite 
verhs,  because  they  lack  the  Present-System:  Ccepisse,  memi' 
nisse,  novisse,  odlsse.  They  are  regularly  conjugated  {ccepi^ 
coepisti,  etc. ;  cceperim,  etc. ;  memini,  meminerlm,  etc.) 

In  reojard  to  their  use,  the  followinsc  rules  must  be  noticed  .* 

1.  Ccepi  has  not  only  the  form,  but  also  the  siirnification  of  a  Perfoct 
yl  began  or  have  begun;  ov  I  commenced,  hare  commeitced).  (Wpl  has  tlie 
same  construction  as  the  verb  incipere  in  the  Present-System  (§  80,  c.)  The 
latter  verb  in  classieal  language  forms  no  Perfect-System,  which  is  borrowed 
from  tlie  verb  c(vpisse,  as  :  I  began  to  irri'fe,  seribere  rcrpi. 

The  verb  ca'pi  has  also  a  complete  Passive  voice  {ca'pfifM  fotm,  ccppfus 
eram,  etc.),  whicli,  however,  lias  exactly  the  same  meaninir  as  the  Active,  and 
is  only  used  wiien  the  Object-Infinitive, dependent  ou  it,  is  a  Famcc,  as:  A 
war  began  to  be  waged,  Bellum  geri  ccrptum  est. 

2.  Meminme,  to  remember;  norisse,  to  know ;  odisse,  to  hate,  are  Perfects 
merely  in  form,  but  Presentx  in  meaning.  The  Imperfects  of  these  verbs 
(I  remembered,  I  knew,  I  hated)  are  exjiressed  by  the  Pluperfects  of  the 
Latin  verbs  {memineram,  noveram,  oderam),  and  the  Futures  (I  shall  remem- 
ber, shall  know,  shall  hate)  by  the  Future  Perfects  of  tlie  Latin  verbs  (niemi- 
nero,  novero,  odero).  Memini  forms  an  exceptional  Imperative,  Memento 
(plur.  menientdte),  remember ! 

3.  The  verb  memini,  if  it  has  a  noun  as  an  object,  generally  takes  it  in 
the  genitive,  but  sometimes  in  the  accusative  (I  remember  the  battli'.  Pug- 
luf  memini).  It  also  t:rkes  an  oiukct-infixitive  like  the  verbs  mentioned 
§80;  but  this  object-iutinitive,  which  in  English  is  always  a  Perfect,  in 
Latin  is  always  a  Preseut-lntinitive,  as  :  1  remember  to  have  heard,  Aud'ire 
(not  audisse)  mejnini. 

4.  The  verb  noviHse  is  not  construed  with  an  object-infinitive,  Imt  with 
the  accusative  of  a  substantive,  and  thereby  is  distinguished  from  scire,  to 
know. 

Rem.  4.  To  these  verbs  may  be  added  the  verb  con.<*ue7u'Kxe,  to  l)e  accus- 
tomed (i)rop('rly  a  iierfect  of  the  verb  constuftcere,  to  become  accustomed), 
whose  construction  and  meaning  is  like  that  of  sole  re  (^  80,  Rem.  3),  as:  IH 
immorfales  talln  homines  punire  consuererunt.  The  immortal  gods  are  in 
the  habit  of  punishing  such  men.  Thus :  Plupkuf.,  consueoeram,  I  waa 
accustomed;  Fur.  I*erf.,  consuevero,  1  shall  be  accustomed. 


§  S'l»!.  The  Di:roxENT  Verbs,  since  they  have  no  active 
voice,  have  only  the  compound  tenses  of  the  passive  voice, 
although  with  active  meanings,  in  the  Perfect-System.  Hence 
they  have  only  o/te  pri?icipal  form,  which,  according  to  the 
analogy  of  the  other  verbs,  sliould  be  the  supine.  But  the 
grammarians  designate  as  such  the  Perfect.  Thus :  Ilortdri^ 
hortdtus  sum;  exper'cri,  expertus  sum. 

The  indefinite  verb  of  the  Deponents  in  the  Perfect-System 
consists  of:  1)  Perfect  Infinitive  (hortatum  esse) ;  2)  Per- 
fect Participle  {hortdtus,  having  exhorted) ;  3)  Both  Supines 
(Jiortdtum,  in  order  to  exhort;  hortdtu,  to  be  exhorted) ;  4)  The 
Verbal  Adjective  (hortaturus,  about  to  exhort). 

§  34:4.  The  following  neuter  verbs  have  only  deponent 
forms  in  the  Perfect-System ;  that  is,  passive  forms  with  active 
siixnilications : 


1)  audere, 

2)  gaudere, 
.S)   solere, 
4)  fidere, 


ausus  sum, 
gavisus  sum, 
solitus  sum, 
fisus  sum. 


to  dare, 

to  be  glad,  rejoice^ 
to  be  in  the  habit, 
to  trust, 


with  the  compounds  of  the  latter  (confidere,  conflsus). 

These  verbs  are  called  Semi-deponents.  On  the  contrary, 
the  verb  reverti,  to  return,  is  a  Deponent  in  the  Present  and 
an  Active  in  the  Perfect-System :  revertor,  Perf.  reverti  (not 
reversus  su)/i). 

§  34«i.  In  verbs  which  form  their  Perfect  with  the  termina- 
tion v/^'ontractions  frequently  take  place,  when  tliis  termination 
is  follow^ed  by  s  or  r.  They  consist  in  omitting  the  syllables  vi 
or  ve,  as : 

Amavisti— amasti ;  amavisse — araasse.  CompleviPti — complesti;  comple\is8e— com- 
pk'sse.  Audivisii — audisti:  audivistie  — andis!«e.  Novititi — iiosti;  novit^se— uosise.  Ama- 
Vfriin-  -amaiiin:  ainavC'rmit — aniilruiit.  Coiibueveriut — consugriut;  cousueveraut — coii- 
Bueruut.    Novtrini— uoriiu;  noveruiit— noruiit. 

But  when  the  syllable  ve  is  preceded  by  I  (as  in  the  4th  conju- 
gation) only  the  letter  v  is  elided,  as : 

audiverim — audierim ;  audiverunt — audiSrant. 

Sometimes  in  verbs  with  the  characteristic  i  the  letter  v  is  also 


250 


TERFECT-SYSTEM. 


omitted  when  vi  is  not  followed  by  s  or  r.     This  is  regularly 
the  case  in  the  conn)ounds  of  ire,  as: 

ahi'i— (not  ablvi) ;  rediit— {not  redlvit). 

Ban.  5.  The  secondary  form  of  the  3.  pers.  nhir.  perfect  imlic.itive  in 
ere  can  never  be  contracted.  Thus  we  cannot  say  u/ndre  instead  o< 
amavere. 

Syntactical  Remarks  ox  the  Use  of  the  Perfect  System. 
§  J{  10.  The  Perfect  Indicative  corresponds  to  both,  the  Past 
tense,  and  Present-perfect  in  English  [atndvl  =  I  have  loned, 
SLiul  Ilooecl).  But  often  the  Engl.  Past  tense  corresponds  to 
the  Latin  iMrEiiFECT,  which  denotes  past  actions  conceived  as 

7iot finished  (incomplete)  at  the  time  spoken  of. 

Rem.  G.  This  principle  on  tiie  use  of  tlie  Latin  Imperfect  indicative  is 
applied  to  a  niunbt  r  of  particidar  usai::es,  coustitutin'j:  a  very  complicated 
theory  (P.  II,  p.  30.")  foil.).  The  most  important  instances  in  which  tiie 
Imperfect  occurs  are  the  following::  Tmf.  Imim-:kfkct  of  Statk,  d«'not- 
inir  a  state  lastinu^  at  the  lime  spoken  nf,  as:  The  bomidiiriex  of  fhe  (hiuh 
e.vteitded  then  to  the  llhiiie,  (JaUonim  tines  tnm  ad  Hhcnum  us(|ue  }nitch(int 
(not  patuerunt). — 2)  The  Impkkfpxt  of  coxtixued  action,  to  dencite  an 
action  in  progress  at  the  time  spoken  of:  When  ILinnihnl  firrived,  we  were 
bexiefjing  Capua,  Qunm  Hannibal  advCnit,  Cajjuam  obsidehd in t/ a  (not  obxe- 
diinnfi). — 3)  Impp:hfkct  of  kkpkatkd  action,  to  denote  actions  indcti- 
nilely  repeated  :  2'he  enemif  daili/  haraxxed  our  troops,  llostes  (piolidie 
copias  nostras  lacesxebant.-^'i)  Impekfect  op  habit,  to  denote  customary 
actions:  The  Chaldeann  observed  {i.  e.  used  to  observe) ///6'  atars  with  great 
zeal,  Clialdaei  sidera  mairno  studio  obxervdbant. — Unless  the  im]>erf('Ct  is 
required  for  one  of  these  reasons,  the  stud'Mit  should  (in  this  tirst  Part) 
render  the  En«,d.  Past  tense,  by  the  Latin  Perfect. 

§  XW7 ,  The  Future-perfect  is  used  either  with  the  force  of 

an  English  Fut.  perf,  or  (more  frequently)  with  the  force  of  an 

Engl.  Future-present,  in  dependent  sentences  (introduced  by  sly 

9tlsl,  qiintn,  etc.,  or  by  relatives),  representing   a  future  act  as 

completed  before  the  happening  of  another  future  action. 

My  son  will  come,  if  thou  wilt  gire  him  permission.  Fiiius  mens  veniet.  fi  vt'iiiam  el  de« 
diris.  Here  the  future  perf.  di-iteris  is  used  instead  of  the  future  dabh,  since  the  perniia^ 
Bion  must  be  i^iven  before  he  comes. 

lakall  write  when  Uajus  conies  {will  have  come),  Scril)am,  cum  Gajus  venerit  [not  veuiet). 

§  5118,  The  Latin  Pluperf  Indicative  generally  corresponds 
totbeEnirlish  Pluperfect.  But  sometimes  we  translate  the  Enoflish 
Pluperfect  by  a  Latin  Perfect.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  clauses 
introduced  by  the  conjunction  after^  which  is  translated  by  j^ost- 
quam  or  postedquwn.     This  conjunction  stands  in  Latin  with  a 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


251 


Perffct,  when  the  action  of  the  Principal  Predicate  is  a  conse- 
quence of  that  of  the  Dependent  Predicate,  as  :  After  the  soldiers 
had  arrived,  Caesar  gave  orders  to  moke  the  attack,  Postquam  mi- 
lites  advenerunt  (not  advenerant),  Caesar  impetum  facere  jussit. 
But  when  the  actions  are  so  separated  that  the  one  is  7iot  a 
consequence  of  the  otlier,  the  conjunction  jyostquam  must  be 
construed  with  the  Pluperfect,  as:  Sclplo  went  to  Asia  after  he 
had  destroyed  Xumantla,  Scipio  postquam  Xumantiam  dele- 
verat,  in  Asiam  profectus  est. 

B^m.  7.  In  the  former  example  the  two  actions  (the  arrival  of  the  soldiera 
and  the  order  to  attack)  stand  in  an  evident  relation  to  each  other,  while 
in  the  latter  they  are  independent  of  each  other,  and  the  one  would  prob- 
ably have  happened  without  the  other.  However,  the  use  of  tense  after 
poufquaw  depends  on  several  other  conditions  and  must  be  studied  in  de- 
tail (P.  II,  p.  601,  foil.).  For  the  Imperfect  after  postouam  seeF.  II  p. 
662  foil.  '  ^ 

§  «iI9.  The  rules  on  the  coxsecutiox  of  texses  (g  831)  re- 
fer also  to  the  tenses  of  the  Perfect-System,  and,  in  application 
to  both  systems,  may  be  thus  expressed:  If  the  Principal  Predi- 
cate is  a  present  or  future,  the  Dependent  Predicate,  if  in  the 
subjunctive,  is  in  tlie  Present  or  Perfect ;  if  the  Principal  Predi- 
cate is  one  of  the  past  tenses  (imperfect,  perfect,  or  pluperfect), 
the  Dependent  Predicate,  if  in  the  subjunctive,  must  be  an  Im- 
perfect or  I*luperfect. 

The  Present  subjunctive  in  the  former,  and  the  Imperfect 
subjunctive  in  the  latter  case  must  be  employed,  if  the  action 
of  the  dej)endent  predicate  is  conceived  to  liappen  at  the  same 
time  with  or  after  that  of  the  principal  predicate. 

Birt  the  Perfect  subjunctive  in  the  former,  and  the  Pluper- 
fect subjunctive  in  the  latter  case  must  be  used,  if  on  the  con- 
trary the  action  of  the  dependent  predicate  is  conceived  as  hap- 
pening before  that  of  the  principal  predicate. 

E.vnmplex:  I.  Time  of  the  principal  sentence  anterior  to  that  of  tlie  de- 
pendent sentence : 

I  command  that  he  should  come,  Impero  ut  veniat. 

1  conuuaialed  that  he  should  come^  Imperavi  ut  venlret 

II.  Time  of  both  sentences  simultaneous : 

I  come  since  you  wish  it,  Yenio,  cum  cupiatis. 
1  came  since  you  wished  it,  Veui,  cum  cuperCtis. 


252 


PEKFECT-SYSTEM. 


III.  Time  of  depend,  sent,  anterior  to  tliat  of  tlie  principal  sentence: 
I  come  since  yon  irish<d  {hmr  <ci.s/u'd)  it,  Venio,  cmii  cupiverilis ; 
J  cdine,  since  you  had  ici.s/ud  it,  Veui,  cum  cupivis;aCti.s. 

JloO.  CoxDiTioxAL  clauses,  i.  e.  tliose  introduced  by  si,  or 
ni^i  [ni),  generally  take  the  Indicative.  For  the  instances  in 
which  ordinary  conditional  clauses  require  tlie  subjunctive  see 
P.  n,  p.  709,  foil.  A  peculiar  class  of  conditional  clauses  are 
those  of  NON-REALITY  (hypothetical  clauses),  when  the  predi- 
cates both  of  the  clause,  and  of  the  principal  sentence  contain 
supposed  actions  contrary  to  reality.  Such  predicates  are  in  the 
suhjimctive  o^  the  imperfect  if  referring  to  present,  and  of  the 
pluperfect,  referring  to  past  time.     See  P.  II,  ]>.  717  foil. 

If  he  came  (hn\  h«>  docs  not^«,  /  would  leave.  Si  vetiTrot.  abliein.  Jf  he  had  come   I  would 
leave,  Si  vtMuss<t,  ablrem.    If  he  had  come,  1  would  have  left,  SivoniKset,  ubiisseui. 

§:?"il.  The  FORMER  SUPINE  is  used  after  verbs  expressincr  a 
motiuii  m  space,  and  d'enotes  the  purpose  and  end  of  themotron. 
It  is  translated  by  "in  order  to,"  as  : 

The  .soldiers  went  away  in  otde}-  to  procure  water,  Milites  aqnatum  abiCrunt. 

§  tl^ri.  The  SECOND  suriNE  is  used  as  object  of  certain  ad- 
jectives, as  facilis,  difficilis,  incredibilis,  jucrmdus,  and  some 
'  others,  with  the  force  of  a  2^((ssjve  infinitive,  although  the  Eng- 
lish  language   by  an   idiomatic  i)eculiaiTty  generally   emplo^'^s 
here  the  active  infinitive,  as: 

coSh"  erit!'''^  ""'^^  ^  ^''^''  ^"^  ""'^^''*'''''*^  (instead  ottobe  understood)   Narratio  facillot 
This  is  easy  to  say.  Hoc  facile  dictu  est. 

Bem.S   The  use  of  both  supines  is  limited  to  cerUiin  verbs,  and  not 
frequently  met  with  m  ancient  authors. 

» 

EXERCISES. 

^  1.  Semper  postulavimus,  nt  Antioehi  Iccrnti  mhoxw  relinquorrnt— '^  Cu- 
ruis  Dentfitus  cum  bis  triumphasset,  olcnr  ])laiitavit/— :}.  Aliens  AlMrtiiis 
qunrtus  Koniandnim  rex,  Latinos  licllo  donuiit,  urbcm  Honiam  ainpiiticavit* 
eamque  novis  mcrnibus  circunuicdit.— 4.  Sa-pissinie  tt-  urbcm  intrarc  ve' 
tuimus.— o.  Quolics  r()i>:asti,  ut  Ici^es  usuriic  aliroirarcntur '— (J  Galli  post- 
quaiii  hacc  lama  contirmata  est,  bcllum  liomanis  infcrrc"  statuVrunt 
Hujus  belli  unperium  Orgetoriirj^  mandilrunt.— 7.  Quiim  trater  tmis  Sem- 
pronium  milu  ronmiendaverit,  ne.iroiium  illud  ei  mandabo.— 8  Exercitus 
noster  proticiscitur,*'  cum  Galli  rursus  conjuraverint.— 9.  Cum  milites  nostri 


» Consequently  the  clause  it>    hypothetical.-^  Qlu?.  cabbaire.-s  Plant  Hie    to  plant    to 
^^^::^:j^:i^fZ^l!^  ^  ^^^^^'  '^  ^"""^^-^  -^  .^.A  somebody.-.  :suuJ'Ct- 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


253 


vr> 


f^ 


advenCnint,hostes  jam  urbem  occupaverant. — 10.  Xisi  iriltus  essem,  jam  diu 
le  casiii;assem. — 11.  Ca'sfU",  cum  .EduGriim  priiieipes  coiivocavisset,  ^\c{t/iU8) 
eos  allocutus  est. — 13.  Si  nos  pecuniil  et  copiis  adjuveris,  Germiinos  vincere 
fiicile  eril. — 1:J.  Si  exules  vestros  revocaveritis,  et  oppida,  a  vobis  occujjata, 
Gallis  reddideritis,  pacem  vobis  dabo. — 14.  Phili])j)us  e([uites  frumeiitatum 
misit. — 15.  Ibec  uva*  peracerba  gustiitu"  est. — 10.  Camillas  a  populo  Roma- 
no accusiitus  est,  quod  regnum  appeteret.' — 17.  Quot  victoriye  ab  hoc  impe- 
ratore  reportatie*,  quot  pradia  pugnata,  quot  oppida  expugnata  sunt ! — 18. 
Cum  culpa  tua  probata  sit,  hcraiicidii^  te  condemno.* — 19.  Quamquam  Sul- 
picius  imi)eratori  jam  diu  denuntiatus  erat,  niimquam  tamen  accusatio  recte 
(/'//////)  probari  poterat. — 20.  Cum  urlis  expugnilta  esset,  dux  servis  omnibus 
libcrtatem  dedit. — 21.  Sulpicius,  homicidii  accusiitus,  a  judicibus  condemua- 
tus  est. — 22.  Germaui,  fluviiim  transire  conati,  a  Romauis  persequentibus  ne- 
ciiti  sunt. — 23.  Siepe  jam  me  spes  frustrata'  est. — 24.  Quamciuam  ctoctrlnam 
tuam  semper  admirati  eramus,  tunc  tamen  ingenium  tuum  plane  (6/i^/;Wy) 
novum  esse  videbatur. — 25,  Antisdienes  discipulos  suos  mcmuit,  ut  sapien- 
tial operam  darent."  Fauci  tamen  pariiGrunt. — 26.  Romani  Corinthum  et 
Carthagiuem,  panels  aulem  annis  post  (J;  311,  Mem.  10)  Numantiam  dele- 
verimt. — 27.  Gajus  a  civibus  accusiltur,  quod  Sempronii  filios  male  docuerit. 

28.  Etruria  tam  Celebris  erat,  ut  totam  Italiam  nomiuis  sui  tama  implesset. — 

29.  Quamquam  Galli  primam  et  secuudam  aciem  ulterius  (^  291)  pro- 
gredi  proliibuCrunt,  tertia  tamen  acies  hostium  latus'  circumire^"  coepit. — 

30.  Gallorum  auxilia  a  Cicsare  ita  adhibita  sunt,  ut  utrunniue  latus  nostrum 
tegereut. — 31.  Cum  aries"  et  seal»  muris  admotje  essent,  eruptio'*'*  ab  oppi- 
danis  omnibus  portis  siiniil  facta  est. — 32.  Filii  inei  magnopere  gavisi  sunt, 
quod  eos  tot  tautisque  beneticiis  atfecisti.'^ — 33.  Si  banc  v^ocem  enuntiare 
ausus  esses,  nulla  te  nunc  premeret'*  suspicio. — 34.  Uvas  istas  nostris  ipso- 
riun  manibus  cariisimus.''^ — 35.  Ca3sar  omuls  copias  suas  abduxit. — 36.  Atti- 
cus  ita  vixerat,  ut  omnibus  civibus  suis  carissimus  esset. — 37.  Cjesar  Laliie- 
niim  hostium  castra  obsidere  jussit. — 38.  Cum  existimationem^"  meam  ca- 
lumniis  asperseris,"  societatem  tuam  aspernor. — 39.  Dux  cum  banc  rem 
comperisset,  primam  aciem  ab  hostibus  repulsam'^  et  fugientem  conspexit. 
— 40.  Ilostes  (luauKiuam  aciem  mediam'"  perruperant,'*"  ab  equitibus  rejec- 
ti-'*  sunt. — 41.  Impetus  tam  celeriter  factusest,  ut  copi;e  nostne  castra  intra- 
reut,  priusquam  ab  hostibus  couspecttr  essent. — 42.  Si  frater  tuus  adfuisset, 
filius  mens  se  servare  potuisset. — 43.  Cum  hostes  omne  frumentum  abstule- 
rint,'"''-'  cives  vitam  sustinCrc  nequeunt. — 44.  Postquam  hie  nuutius  Mario 
allatus  est,  hostis  statem  i)ugnare  copgit. — 1^5.  Timoleon  diligi  quam  metui 
inaluit. — to.  Si  amicos  tuos  adjuvare  voluisses,  nunquam  ab  eis  derelictus 
esses. — 47.  Hoc  pradio  {in  i/ii.s  battle)  ducentie  naves  naulragio"^''  pcriCrunt. 
— 18.  Rcdiimus,  posupiam  hostes  urbem  relitpiCrunt. — 49.  Nisi  fluvium 
transissOtis,  omnes  ab  hostibus  capti  essCtis. — 50.  Proconsul  accusatur,  quod 
civis  Romanos  justo  crudelius  (i;  310,  Rem.  7)  punierit. — 51.  Perbene  diffi 
cilem  banc  (iiuestionem  detinisti. — 52.  Captivi  a  mililibus  nostris  arctissi- 
me""'*  custoditi  sunt. — 53.  PhuMiIces  multas  artis  ipsasque  litteras  invenC- 
ruut. — 54.  Milites,  post([uam  atpiam  cibosque  reperCrunt,  meliore  animo'^' 

*  Uca.  a ^rrape.— 2  Gustdre.  to  ta'^Xe.— ^ Begun m  appefere,  to  a!*pire  to  the  throne,  or  to  royal 
diirnity.— */iV/>o?'A7/-(f.  to  report.— siloniicide. —T'o/u/<iA««<7/'e.  to  declare  guilty. — ''Fruslrd' 
ri.  to  disappoint  —^0/>fra//<  (/are.  to  }iay  attention,  to  take  pains  with. — ^Laf'*s.  flanic.— 
i"To  surround.— I'Hani.—i^A  snrl\e.—*^I{e/i<'tfciis  ajjicere.  to  sliow  favort*  to  somebody.— 
'<To  weijrh  upon  somebody. — i^To  pick.— '^Fame. — '''To  ^vaxw.—^" Rtpellere.  to  repulse.— 
^^ Acies  media,  the  centre.— 20T0  break.— ^'To  throw  back.— ^^To  carry  away.— ^'Aaw/'r» 
ffium,  Ai'i\iwreck.—^* Arctus,  close.— '^^Uono  animo,  cheerfully. 


in 

I  it 


2^54 


rERFECT-SYSTEM. 


itincris  l-ibr.ros  pcrpossi  snnt.-5r>.  Memento  morti.  1-50.  Re-es  promisso. 

pnmi.uiuaivt,  oppi.hun   ah  hostibus  jam  obsulOn  cu'pluni  eral.-o8.  Multi 

homines  talia  seel.ra  ixrpetrfire  e.)nsuesse  videnlur.  n,i(,nted  tlio 

1    Tliou  hast  ba.llv  tinea  the  doors  to  the  house.— 2    Scipio  adoptc  l  tlio 

son  o  •  Pauh.s:Emih\is,  in  order  that  his  name  mi-ht  be  preserved.-.].  AV  o 

Smtlrmed  this  treaty  (>...)  direetly,  m  -•^^-;»^i;!^;^^;^-^^;;,^,X^lS 
nossible  mi-ht  feel  (snirin)  its  advantai^M-s  — 4.  \  on  have  ir<^^quuiu>  lus 
mrb  tl  P  bl  e  peaee. -5.  Tlie  jud-es  declared  the  accused  ^nnlty  {con- 
t^'//y  /.  or  t^  e^^^^^^  Poini>ev  had  comiuc^red  {^h^nare)  the  pirates;  and  so 
ir  A  {virthe  «  orv  of  this'war,  tliat  the  command  ot  the  Mulinda  ic 
f l^  L-I/^'/.t)  wa  Vas  conferred  (.^./Wv.)  on  (translate  to)  liim  >y  the 
^       'l^^  un-nc-ral  lias  ^nven  peace  to  ns,  the  people  will  -ive 

l\  In  the  l!Shest  (^  21)0,  Rem.  7)  lumors.-S.  You  are  praisc.l  bv  the  pj^p  e 
for  havin-  (translate,  thai  yon.  hace)  lou-ht  so  bravelv.-l).  When  Cx.ar 
airivithe  enemies  had  already  occupied  the  banks  ot  tlHyiy^r.-lO  It 
vol  1  ad  cLctlv  asked  {rocjare)  my  opini(,n,  I  should  certainly  haye  told  t 
?;; vo  _  1  K^^^^  ^y,ll  (64  reconcile  the  king  to  you,  the  general  will 
I  v^e  back  your  helds  to  you.-12.  The  ^:duans  {.^ui)  sent  »^m^^««^f,;;^ 
to  \H  yistus  to  ask  {mjiire)  [for]  help.-l;J.  Socrates  was  accused,  that  he 
com    t  HU^>rnL;)Ar^^^  ami  introduced  {h,(rod>,ren)  new  snpersti- 

S(^.nlS.-14.  Althoudi  the  camp  had  been  stormed  (''•'V^^//':;^) 
y  our  tiCps,  yet  the  soldiers  took  (..;..r)  less  booty  than  "^"«^  .b;  M  0, 
KV,n  7)_l3.  Since  many  crimes  haye  been  committed  1  shall  take  care 
h.  they  be  denounced  to  the  pnetor.-16.  As  soon  as  {.dn)  this  inatt(.  w  11 
1  ave  bmi  evplained  by  thee,  I  shall  return  to  thee  all  this  money  -I -.  It 
thou  hadst  "M^^^^^^^  a  better  advice  to  thy  friend,  thou  wouldst^never 

W  b^fa?(^us  Hl\iv  liim.-18.  Your  tViend  is  acnised  of  weakness,^  smc^ 
he  has  been  afraid  (^  80)  of  yiolating  the  laws.-U  .  }^]^]Z^^f^^ 
(runrtdri)  to  arrest^»  Catilne,  since  he  had  been  afraid  ot  einploung  loicc 
^[;^u/ii!::-20.  I  n^joiced  [l.tdri)  that  (,.<.^  ^^^  0/"^;^!»  ^  e  Ind  sS 
{nolle)  to  accept  an  illicit  [illicit, i.)  gam  (/./av////).-2l  W  ^/"  ^  ^^,^^^^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 
a  little  longer  (6  311)  than  it  was  necessary,  we  searched"  the  uho  e  house 
14  Oroaorix  haying  bewailed  {illacmnnrl)  his  sad  fate,'  sei/ed^  tin;  ha  ml 
of  a^r^ind  implorc^l  his  grace  (,../^.).--^^^  The  slayes  n;  ea.nl  by  he 
enemies,  refused  to  follo^y  their  masters.-24.  llay.ng  l^'  »  "^'l^'  ^^  ^,!^^ 
(iuils  themsclvt's  we  shall  demand  the  rewards  due  t(  u>.—^').  It  was 
alh  w^^^^^^^  our  children  to  be  happy.-2l>.  The  (lanls  were  angry 

^^^;.i^r.)  with  (translate  A>)  ns,  sinc^  (y..rf  with  '^^^  ''^^',;;^^i!^^ 
been  destroyed  {delcre)  and  their  liberties  {pnnlq/Hnn)  been  '^"  yl"''^'^  ^  ,;;>. 
us-27  If  thou  hadscmployed  more  care  to  this  business,  thou  wo  UU 
have  been  able  to  reap  {jJrcipen)  the  fruits  of  thy  diligence.-28  All  hese 
ca^nllh^  taye  been^  i;;eyei;te<l  (;>..A/^^.)  by  the  yirtue  and  au  -nty  ;^ 
Pompey  -20.  C<Tsar  increased  his  army  by  two  legions,  latr  >  dialu  d  (^  >/  - 
^SV-m)  When  the  enemies  approached,  Ca-sar  had  already  directed 
(1«t  V  Lab  enus  to  occupy  the  highest  ridge  {jufri^u)  ot  the  mountam.-- 
31  All  tl  ese  thin.^s  were 'foreseen  {proridere)  by  the  general  si.ice  the  sol- 
dk-rs  1  ad  already  tilled  up  the  ditches  and  destroyed  the  tortihcations.- 


J  To  fake  care  curJIrc  -^  Weakne>^>'.  inconstantia.-'  C'ompr.hond.rc-'»  ro  ewjyloy  forc4 
■     i  rff"!^ uu.:.'/^^^  force  to.-"  7-0  ^/rty,  touiinonln.-»  To  search,  \n-T- 

SutXi'-^s::,^  -«  fo  ;;S^4  co;;/pr-ehLiiTre.--»i>a.;  trau.latc:  owed,  pa.t  part,  oitoowe. 
dubere.— 1°  To  annihilate,  tollere. 


PERFECT-SYSTEM. 


255 


\^"' 


82.  When  I  had  seen  Brutus,  I  resolved  to  follow  Pompey.— 33.  We  had 
been  accustomed  to  walk  early  in  the  morning,  when  {cnni  with  indie.)  a 
disease  compelled  us  to  keep' Uie  bed.— 34.  The  citizens  rejoiced  {gaudere) 
that  {quod  with  subj.)  the  war  had  been  tinished.— 3o.  The  citizens  took  up 
{«umere)  arms  in  order  to  {that)  exj^el  {e.vpellere)  the  tyrants. — 36.  Our  troops 
\yere  exhausted  {confectus)  by  hunger,  since  the  enemies  had  consumed 
{(dMiuiiere)  all  provisions. — 37.  The  ambassadors,  frightened  by  these  procfi- 
gies  {prmli<jiani),  consulted'^  the  Delphic  oracle.— 38.  Alexander  opened" 
countries,  imkuovvn  to  fame,  by  his  sword.— 39.  The  consul  dismissed  the 
veterans  {reterdnas),  but  he  drafted^  2000  foot-soldiers. — 40.  A  beautiful 
statue  of  father  Liber  was  chiselh'd  {scalpere)  by  Menauder,  and  ^Menexe- 
mus  formeil'  the  same  god  in  (by)  bronze  {acts). — 4L  The  augurs,  induced* 
by  these  prodigies,  examined'  the  sacred  books. — 42.  Argus,  charmed"  by 
the  music,"  fell  into  sleei)  {obdornmc^r€).—\'d.  The  Corinthians"  had  estab- 
lished" this  colony,  and  by  it  promoted"  their  commerce  and  authority. — 
44.  The  gates  of  Janus,  closed  {ckiudcre)  or  opened  {aperin),  became  the 
signs  {indt.1')  of  peace  or  war. — 4.5.  The  king  disajijxiinted"  the  hope  of  the 
people,  and  spread  {spargere)  the  seeds"  of  corruption  {corruptela)  by  un- 
heard-of briberies.*^ — 4(j.  Prometheus,  since  he  had  defied  {s^^ycrnere)  the 
will  of  Jupiter,  was  athxed'**  by  him  to  the  Caucasus. — 47.  Posthumius  is 
accused  of  having  extorted"  (transl.  by  quod  with  subjunctive)  the  votes 
of  the  lioman  ])eople  by  force.— 48.  Pisistratus  is  said  to  have  collected 
{colligtre)  the  poems  of  Homer,  dispersed"  before. — 49.  Continuous  {conti- 
nuu.s)  pains  gave  to  the  mind  of  the  king  a  sort  oIl  {quidani)  bitterness  {acer- 
l)it(ts). — 50.  Caesar,  moved  {commovere)  by  this  sudden  danger,  took  {capere) 
anotiier  resolution  {con.siliuni). — 5L  The  bundles"  of  the  lictors  became  lu- 
dicrous'-" by  the  diminished  authority  of  the  magistrates. — 52.  Gajus  laid 
{jactre)  the  foundation"'''  of  his  future  fortune  by  this  business  alone. — 53. 
The  Stoic  Posidonius  is  said  to  have  broken"^''  this  sickness  by  his  will  {vo- 
luntas) alone. — 54.  Parrhasius  is  said  to  have  deceived  {fallere)  the  birds 
by  his  i)aiiited-'*  grapes  (//r»0— -55.  Brutus  \)rL'i'crvvd {a ?itepo?iere) ihQ  common 
welfare  of  all  to  his  domestic'''*  happiness  {feUcitaa). — 5G.  Sempronius  was 
thrown  {coujicere)  into  prison,'''*  since  he  had  reported  {deferre)  all  our  plans 
to  the  eneiiiies.— 57.  The  (i reeks  remember  well  the  old  glory  of  their 
country.— 58.  The  allies,  frightened  by  the  elephants,'"'  began  to  abandon 
{tntdtn)  themselves  to  llight.— 59.  The  neighboring  nations  began  to  be 
molesteil  {preinen')  by  the  war. — 60.  Metellus,  having  obtained  {adiplffci) 
the  command,  began  to  restore  the  former  {j)niitinu^)  discipline  of  the  sol- 
diers.—61.  Cornefia,  having  spoken  these  words,  died  {niorl)  with  {bg)  a 
serene  mind. — 62.  The  enemies,  having  found  out  {nancixci)  a  place,  fortified 


by  nature,  elected  {poncre)  a  camp. — 0,1  When  Caesar  had  departed* (j>r<>/i" 
cmci),  the   ambassadors   of   the  Nerviaus   arrived. — 64.    Pana?tius  i)raisei 
Scipio  for  {qnod  with  subj.)  having  been  abstii\ent  {abdinenx). — 65.  Tl" 
(jlficers  {dux)  could  with  ditnculty-'  repress'''"  their  fear,  while'"  they  ha 
been  of  irood  cheer  Ujojio  auiino)  before. — 00.  Since  the  enemies  have  r 


\c^ 


»  To  keep,  tenure.— 2  Consnlore.— '  Tatefacere.— *  Conscribere.— »  To  form,  fiiigere.— 
•  Toiiidnc*-,  a (1(1 11  cere.—''  To  tJ-ainiiie,  inspicere.— **  7bc/<<//v«.  permulcGre.— »J/'<«t'.  cantus. 
— >o  C'oriiUliiuK.— 11  To  e^fabUf<h  a  colony,  coloniam  dedncere.— i*  To  promote,  aujrere.— 
I'Dt'liidere.— »4.4  seed,  semen.— i^Larj^'itio.—i^Jb  affix,  attiirere.— i"  Tb  extort,  extorquere. 
—  >»  Todisjterm.  dispergere.— ""Faticis.— 20  Ridiculus.— «»  Fundamentum.— «'^  Fraugere.— 
>»  Pingere.— 24  Doinesticus.— ^*  Into  prison,  in  vincula.— "•Elephauius.—^'Ife/'A  difficulty 
^.J^^■^>  1.'i^  R^prt^ss,  coiitiiiSre.— 2"  Cum  with  »\\W].—*l^iium  (cum)  always  stands  with  ttie 
eubjuuclive  if  its  predicate  is  a  pluperfect,  not  referring  to  repeated  action. 


256 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


fused  to  attack'  us,  we  shall  enter  {introlre)  the  defiles  {anfjm^iiie)  of  the 
luountauis— 07.  When  Cesar  had  arrived,  the  whole  condition  ot  things 
was  suddenly  chani,-ed.— 68.  After  we  had  returned,  Brutus  came  and 
brouixht  thy  letter.— 09.  Very  many  enemies  jierished  in  {by)  the  waves, 
when  they  had  been  thrown  {th'ncere)  into  the  river  (///  Jtumtn)  by  our 
horsemen.— 70.  If  you  had  guarded  the  fords  of  the  river,  you  would  have 
hindered  the  enemies  from  crossing. 


CHAPTER  FOURTH. 

ABSOLUTE  AND  DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 
PxVRTrnVE  GENITIVE. 

§  li  \  '  Attributive  Adjectives  frequently  are  used  without 
a  o-uveniiiitr  noun,  so  that  the  latter  must  be  understood  and 
S7fpplled,  an  in  English:  77te  wise,  the  j^oor,  these,  this,  others, 
mifie.  They  are  either  absolute  or  disjunct.  An  adjective  is 
called  AiJSOLUTE,  when  a  governing  noun,  denoting  things  or 
persons  in  general,  must  be  supplied,  as :  "  The  poor^''  instead 
of  "  the  poor  persons  ;"  this,  instead  of  "  this  thing,  this  matter:'' 
Adjectives  of  this  kind  must  be  considered  as  real  Substantives. 
An  adjective  is  called  disjunct,  when  a  thing  or  person  must  be 
supplied,  which  Iias  been  premoushj  mentioned,  as:  ''How 
tnany  prisoners  did  we  make?  Tlco  tlionsand:''  Here  the 
numeral  two  thousand  is  a  disjunct  adjective,  since  the  gov- 
erning noun  prisofiers  must  be  supplied  from  the  preceding 
question. 

I.   Absolute  Adjectives  denoting  Persons. 

§  S^t.  In  Latin  a>)solute  Adjectives,  denoting  persons,  are 
])laced  in  the  masculi^te  gexder;  those  denoting  things  in  the 
neuter.  The  rules  on  tlie  use  of  these  adjectives  are  different, 
according  as  they  are  Descriptive  Adjectives,  or  Participles,  or 
Form-adjectiv^es. 

§  tio«i.  Absolute  Descriptive  adjectives,  denoting  persons, 

»  Aggredi.— ^*  A  wave,  fluctuB. 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADIECTIVES. 


257 


i 


generally  stand  in  the  plural,  the  same  as  in  English,  as :  docti, 
the  learned;  pauperes,  the  poor;  mortui,  the  dead.  They  are 
more  rarely  used  in  the  singular,  and  then  w^e  must  render  them 
into  English  by  supplying  tlie  word  7nan  or  p>erson,  as  :  a?grotus, 
a  sick  man  ;  liber,  a  free  man.  There  are,  however,  certain  Latin 
adjectives  which  regularly  are  used  with  the  force  of  nouns,  and 
often  are  translated  by  English  nouns,  as :  amicus,  a  friend 
(originally  friendly) ;  juvenis,  a  youth  (originally  young) ;  fa- 
rnilidris,  an  acquaintance  (originally  intimate) ;  reus,  an  accused 
(person)  ;  par,  an  equal. 

Bern.  1.  Sometimes  we  render  English  Nouns  by  Latin  Adjectives  in  con- 
nection with  vir  or  homo  (in  the  singular),  as:  a  scholar,  vir  doctus. 

Rrm.  2.  Latin  Absolute  Adjectives,  even  when  they  are  translated  by 
English  nouns,  cannot  take  Descriptive  Adjectives  as  attributes.  Thus  the 
English  "  a  good  friemV  must  not  be  rendered  by  amicus  bonus,  but  by  ad- 
modum  {valde)  amicus  ;  my  best  friend  not  by  opt  Ijnus  amicus,  hut  by  amicissi' 
mus.  Thus  "  n  great  sc/uAar^^  cannot  be  translated  by  ''  nuigaus  doctus^''  but 
by  vir  admodum  doctus;  "  the  greatest  scholar"  not  by  maximus  doctus^  but 
by  t>ir  doctissim  us. 

Rem.  3.  To  those  adjectives,  which  are  used  with  the  force  of  nouns,  be- 
longs the  i)lurale  tantum  majores,  in  the  meaning  "  ancestors.''''  But  it  would 
be  l>arbarous  to  say  nuvgni  nostri  majores^  our  great  ancestors.  The  Latin 
sa}%s  :  nuijOres  nostri,  sumini  viri. 

§  S«>0.  Absolute  Participles  in  general  follow  the  rule  of 

Descriptive   Adjectives,    as:    Fugientes,  the   fleeing   (persons); 

vulnerdti,  the  wounded.     Present  Participles,  especially  when 

tliey  have  objects,  may  be  used  in  both  numbers  absolutely. 

They  frequently  must  be  translated  by  English  relative  clauses, 

as : 

Qu^rehs,  one  that  asks,  or  asked  ;  pugnanies,  those  that  fight,  or  fought; 
Jluvium  transeuntes,  those  that  crossed  tlie  river;  Virtutem dmans voluptdtes 
spernif,  one  that  loves  virtue  (he  who  loves  virtue,  or  who  loves  virtue) 
spurns  pleasures.  Dux  ab  hostium  equifibus  diti.sipdtos  coUegit,  the  general 
collected  those  who  were  dispersed  by  the  horsemen  of  the  enemies. 

§  JJo7.    The   Latin   Absolute   Form-adjectives    (denoting 

persons)    are  used   in   both   numbers   of  the   masculine  gender. 

But  many  of  them  have  specific  forms  for  their  absolute  use, 

accordiui^  to  the  followini;  rules: 

L  The  indeclinable  Form-adjectives  quot,  tot,  totidem,  aliquot 

(§  257),  are  rarely  used  absolutely.     We  may  here  either  add 


258 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


tlie  word  homines  or  use  instead  of  q not  and  tot  the  expressions 
quam  raulti^  tain  niulti^  as: 

How  many  hast  thou  killed  ?    Quot  homines  {or  quam  ranltos)  interfecisti  ? 

2.  The  interrogiitive^r^l  (§  243),  if  used  absohitely,  is  trans- 
lated by  icho,  or  by  which  vian  (person).  ISometimes,  but  rarely, 
the  form  qui  is  used  witli  absohite  force.  For  the  distinction  of 
quis  and  qui,  see  §  243,  Keni.  4.  Uter,  accordino:  to  its  niQan- 
ing,  is  used  as  a  disjunct  adjective  (see  g  3G4),  and  is  tlien  hke- 
wise  transhited  by  who,  or  ichich  of  the  two  (see  §  243,  Kem.  5). 

The  i^irtem^^aUiliLi^*  always  is_chanjred  mto  qui,  yvhen  it 
has  the  force  of  the  relat'nx'  "who."  When  tlie  relative  qui,  or 
any'other  relative,  stands  wiUiout  a  noun,  it  must  be  considered 
as  disjunct,  not  as  absolute,  except  in  the  case  No.  3. 

3.  When  tlie  demonstrative  ad.iectives  {hic,(0e'^H;§te^is, 
idem,  ipse)  occur  Avithout  nouns,  they  must  be  considered^as 
disjunj^  (§  3G4),  excei)t  when  they  are  antecedents  of  a  relative 
TfauseTas  hie  qui,  ill i  qui  (but  more  generally  is  qui,  ei  qui), 

which    are  translated    by  he  who;    tlie   one  who ;  those  icJto ; 
idem  qui  is  translated  by  "  the  same  as,''  as : 

/<?,  qifi  fm-ff/m  acJjurdfiir.  He  who  Ctho  one  who)  is  ap^sisted  by  fortune.  Ei  {hi,  Uli) 
q%d  ritiii  dtditi  m/d,  Tho!?e  who  are  ghcn  to  vices. 

The  Demonstratives  hie,  ille,  is,  in  this  case  are  frequently 
omitted,  as  in  Enolish,  and  then  the  relative  has  the  force  of  an 
Absolute  Adjective,  as:  Qui  seinper  dolet,  deoa  accusare  videtur. 
Who  always  mourns,  seems  to  accuse  the  gods. 

4.  The  INDEFINITE  DETERMINATIVES  aUquis  and  qnidam,  quis- 
quam,  quisque,  nemo,  when  used  absolutely,  correspond  to  the 
Eno:lish  expressions  some  one  (i)lural  some),  any  one  (plur.  any), 
every  one,  no  one  (plur.  none),  or  somebody,  anybody,  everybody, 
nobody.  Quisquam  and  nemo  are  the  regular  absolute  forms 
instead  of  the  attributive  ullus  and  nullus  in  the  singular,  while 
in  the  plural  idli  and  nulli  are  exclusively  used  {any  and 
none).  But  in  the  genitive  and  ablative  singular  the  classical 
language  always  uses  nuU'ius  and  nullo  instead  of  neminis  and 
nemine,  and  in  the  ablative  singular  almost  always  ullo  instead 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT  AD.TECTIYES. 


259 


•\^ 


4^ 


of  quoquam,  sometimes  also  in  the  genitive  idllus  instead  of 
cujusquxim. 

The  English  other  takes  the  absolute  plural  others,  and  (with- 
out article)  is  translated  by  alii,  while  tJie  others  is  expressed  by 
ceteri  or  reliqui, 

Bfm.  4.  The  Enj^lish  Indefinite  mmehody  or  anyhody  is  also  expressed  by 
the  Interrou^ative  qaln^  when  it  Ims  no  emphasis,  especially  after  the  parti- 
cles ;?v/w,  an,  utrum,  the  conjunctions  «^,  idai,  and  tie,  and  after  relatives. 
Tiie  declension  of  quis  in  this  meaning  is  irregular  in  the  nominative 
SING.  FEM.  and  NOM.  and  accus.  pluk.  neuter,  in  which  cases  it  generally 
takes  tli(!  form  qua  (like  aUqnis),  rarelv  qiup. 

Ons.  lii-tra  1  of  (ifitjid!<  or  qul'yq'iii/n,  ^on\cMme^  quupiam  (G.  rt/jvspiam,  D.  o/ipiam. 
Ace.  (/'/I  /tij)i(tm)  is  ii>ed.  often  with  poteiiiial  hubjmictivts :  Diuerit  Jorfasse  quittpiufn 
(|)t'rliapshoiiiei)0(ly  iniu'lit  f-ay  etc.).  It  mo>tly  occurs  absolutely  (neuter  ^//2(///ia//i  =  s-oiue- 
Ihin;^),  rarely  aitnhntively  ((/mepia/n,  quodinaui),  and  extremely  seldom  in  ttie  plural. 

Rem.  5.  Aemo  is  frequently  translated  by"  not  anybody  /'  which  cannot 
be  translated  by  noji  qaisquain  ;  as  :  1  have  not  seen  anybody,  Neminem 
vidi.  ^'ei'cr  any  f//ie  =  nenio  {nullus)  unquam,  rarely  nunquam  quiaquam. 
J^'enio  noih  —  every  one  ;  iwn  nemo  {nuUuH)  =  some  one. 

Jiem.  6.  The  English  expression  "  of  others^''  meaning  belonging  to  others^ 
may  be  expressed  by  nliorum.,  but  more  frequeutlj-  is  changed  into  the  at- 
tributive adjective  a/iV«z/ ,9  (foreign,  strange),  as:  The  books  of  otlwrs^  Libri 
aliCni;  by  the  property  of  others^  bonis  aliCnis. 

5.  If  the  adjectives  some — others  are  coordinate  to  each  other, 
they  are  translated  by  alii — alii,  or  by  the  singulars  alius — alius. 
The  one — the  other  is  expressed  by  alter — alter,  and  the  ones — 
the  others  by  alteri — alter i,  as  :  Some  icere  captured,  others  hilled^ 
Alii  capti  sunt,  alii  interfecti.  The  one  teas  sitting  (and)  the 
other  standiny.  Alter  sedebat,  alter  stabat. 

Coordinations  of  this  kind  can  never  he  separated  hy  coordi- 

natiny  conjunctions  in  Latin,  but  always  are  connected  asyn- 

detically. 

Rem.  7.  The  adjective  alius  frequently  occurs  in  the  same  sentence  with 
another  case  of  alius,  or  the  adverbs  formed  from  it  (allOy  aliter,  alias^ 
aliuhdi).  This  peculiar  Latin  idiom  always  must  be  resolved  by  a  coordi- 
nation, as:  AUl  ab  aliis  interfecti  sujif.  Some  were  killed  by  these,  some  by 
those.    Alii  in  alio  loco  stabant,  Some  stood  in  one  place,  some  in  another. 

6.  The  absolute  Fossessives  7neus,  tuns,  suits,  etc.,  in  the 
MASCULINE  PLUK  AT.  dcuotc  ])ersons,  who  are  in  some  close  con- 
nection to  the  person  referred  to,  as  one's  friends,  soldiers,  fol- 
lowers, or  one's  family,  as :  Ilostes  a  nostris  repulsi  sunt.  The 
enemies  were  repulsed  by  our  soldiers.     Hex  a  suis  desertus  est^ 


2G0 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTF^S. 


The  kini?  was  deserted  by  Ids  followers.     Omnes  mel  valent.  All 

my  fhrrdly  is  well. 

Bern.  8.  The  phrase  one's  enunlrymen  or  feUoir-rifizcns  generally  is  ex- 
pressed bV  riici  {fffi,  .*<'//,  etc.)  hominaH  or  cUri*,  and  in  reixard  to  nosier  and 
resifr  bv'the  civic  nouns  noxtnltes,  resfrrife.%  declined  like  the  irregular 
vowel-stems  in  as,  atis  (^  187,  4).  The  Latin  lan.iruage  also  forms  the  IN- 
TERUociATiVE  NOUN  cuj(U(,  G.  cujuUs  (what  countryman  V)  according  to  this 
•analogy. 

II.   Absolute  Adjectives,  denoting  Things. 

§  358.  Absolute  Adjectives,  denoting  Things,  are  placed  in 
the  neutral  plural,  and  generally  are  translated  by  the  addition 
of  "thinr/s^'  ov  another  noun  of  general  import,  as  '' matte rs,^^ 
"'affairs,'''  etc.;  as:  Falsa  loqaf\  to  speak  false  things.  Parva 
sa^pe  maf/nis  rectisshne  co?ifentntar,  Small  things  often  are  very 
fitly  compared  to  great  ones.  Allena  appetere,  to  covet  the 
things  of  others.     See  Uem.  6. 

Rem.  0.  The  use  of  absolute  adjectives  in  the  neuter  Rin.2:ular  is  confined : 
1)  to  philosophical  lanixuaire  in  "reixard  to  certain  abstracts,  jus:  Subl'tnie  et 
pvJchrnm,  the  sublime  and  the  beautiful  (meaninjr  the  Men  of  the  sublime, 
etc)-  2)  to  certain  idioms  with  ])repositi()ns,  and  adverbial  exi^ressums,  as: 
in  pybliro  publiclv;  de  inter/m,  anew;  ///  vn'/m  cof/i\  to  be  collected  at  one 
]dace  •  ;J)  'to  FoiiM-ADJHCTiVEs  (^  859).  In  the  use  of  the  plural  or  sin.i^ular 
the  Eiv'lish  lan<,niaii:e,  on  the  whole,  conforms  to  the  Latin  usacre,  except 
tha^  where  the  plural  is  used,  the  addition  of  a  noun  of  ireneral  import  al- 
wavs  i^  reciuired  in  Eni^Hish.  But  sometimes  P:n,irlish  siui^ulars  are  expressed 
bv  Latin  plurals,  as:  }fnlfa,  much  (many  thin-s),  while  the  Sinirular  ;/^^/^- 
tiini  i^  used  as  a  quantitative  adperb  or  in  c»mnection  with  (Tcnitives,  ^  264. 
So  omnia  (more  rarely  oni?ie\  every  thini;- ;  qu(F,  what  (which  things). 

Bern  10  The  T>atin  absolute  demonstratives  {hoc,  illiid,  istud,  id,  idem., 
ips,im,'iini\  their  Plurals),  denotiui?  Thin-s,  are  used  as  antececlents  of  rel- 
ative clauses  the  same  as  those  denotinu:  Persons  (^  :J.)T, :}),  as  id  quod,  that 
which  (W/r/^  relat.) ;  en  9'/^,  those  things  which  {ithat,  relat.).  We  may 
also  here  omit  the  demonstratives,  as :  Id  quod  (or  qnod  alone)  tibi  dixi, 
terum  est  That  which  {or  what)  I  have  told  thee,  is  true.  Ea  qmv  {ilia  qum 
or  qiu^  aione)  audixtl  falsa  sunt,  Those  things  which  thou  hast  heard  are 
false,  or  What  thou  hast  heard  is  false. 

g  »59.  The  Form-adjectives,  composed  with  the  interroga- 
tive <ii(is,  take  neuter  forms  in  quid  (not  quod),  if  used  abso- 
lutely," as :  quid  (not  quod),  what  (neuter  iiiterrog.)  ;  aUqukl 
(not  allquod),  something;  quiddam,  something;  quicquaiu  (inst. 
ofquidquam),  anything;  quldque  {quldvls),  everything. 

Bern.  11.   Quid  is  used  as  an  indefinite  adjective  instead  of  aliquid  or 


ABSOLUTE  AND  riSJTNCT  ADJECTI^S. 


261 


qnicqvnm  {somethinrj  or  anything)  in  the  same  way  as  qms  instead  oi  aliquis 
and  quisquam  (Reni.  4),  as:  si  quid  .sc^^>,.if  1  know  anything. 

Bern.  12.  37/<i7,  nothinir,  is  considered  as  neuter  of  nenw.   iViiV,! «7  frequently 
is  translated  by  not  anj/thin^^^^rmi-h  never  can  "be  rendered  hv  non  quic- 
quam  :  He  did  not  say  anything,  niliil  dixit.  Never  anything  =:  nihil  unquam, 
rarely  nunquani  quicqu'am.   Nihil  non,  everything;  nonnihil,  someihing. 

Be7n.  13.  The  plural  qumlam  (certain  things,  something)  is  used  nearly 
in  the  same  meaning  as  aliquid,  whose  plural  tdiqua  seldom  is  used  abso- 
lutely. Quidquaui,  quidque  and  nihil  form  no  Plurals.  Aliud  and  alia 
(other  thinirs,  another  thing),  reliquuni  and  reliqwi  (the  rest),  are  used  in 
both  numbers.  Cetera  (the  other  tilings,  the  rest)  is  a  plurale  tantum. 
Utrunique,  both  (both  things),  used  in  the  singular,  is  properly  a  disjunct 
The  demonstratives  {hoc,  illud,  id,  idem)  are  used  in  both  numbers,  without 
ditterence  in  signitication  {hoc  or  hoic,  this  or  these  things;  idem  ov  eadem, 
the  same  or  the  same  things). 

Bern.  14.  The  numerals,  except  unum  (one,  one  thing),  solum,  alone  (the 
only  thinu:),  totum  (the  whole,  the  whole  thing)  are  used  in  the  plural  only, 
as  niulta,'\\\\\Q\\,  many  things;  j>/?/m,  more, more  things;  )nmca,i^\\  things, 
a  little;  omnia,  everything,  all  things.  The  indecliuables  qm)t,  etc.,  can- 
not be  used  absolutely,  being  replaced  by  quam  multa,  how  many  things? 
tarn  multa,  so  many  things.  The  quantitatives  are  used  in  the  singular 
onlv.  These  latter  alwa/s  mean  the  amount  of  something,  and  when  used 
absoiulelv  they  properlv  denote  the  amount  of  Proi*ekty  in  general,  as: 
Quantum  habetis,  hcnv  iiiuch  (property)  have  you?  Plus  quam  Gajns,  more 
(proi)erty)  than  Gajus.  But  they  frequently  mean  the  amount  of  Things  in 
GKNEKAL,  and  then  their  usage  very  little  ditfers  from  that  of  the  Absolute 
Kumerals.  Thus  the  sentence:  I'antum  aud'ivit  quantum  voluit  ditfei-s  veiy 
little  from  the  sentence:  Tarn  multa  audlvit  quam  voluit  (he  heard  as  much 
as  he  wished). 

Bem.  15.  Tlie  neuter  plural  of  the  absolute  Possessives  {mm,  tua,  ma, 
nostra,  vestra)  mean  either  one's  property  or  ones  (own)  affairs,  as: 
Omnia  mea  mecum  porto,  1  carry  all  my  property  with  me.  Tua  magis  ad 
me  pertinire  videntur  quam  mea,  Thy  iilfairs  seem  to  concern  me  more  than 
my  own. 

§  :{60.  The  Absolute  Xeuter  Adjectives  have  a  peculiar  de- 
clension. Thev  cannot  be  used  in  the  Gexitive,  Dative,  or 
Aiji.ative,  if  a  doubt  Avould  arise,  wdictlirer  Persons  or  Things 
are  me^int,  since  neuters  and  masculines  in  these-cases  have  the 
same  forms.  The  rule  is,  therefore,  that  absolute  adjectives  in 
the  GENITIVE,  DATIVE,  and  ABLATIVE  cascs  always  mean  persons, 
uidess  the  connection  clearly  shows,  that  things  must  be  meant. 
The  absolute  adjectives,  denoting  things  in  the  mentioned  cases 
always  take  the  noun  res  as  the  governing  word,  and  are  conse- 
quently placed  in  the  Feminine  Gender,  as  :  Nom.  Falsa  (res 
iaXi^iR),  false  thlnfjs ;  Gen.  Kerum  falsarum  (;iO^  falsorum  alone), 
of  false  things;  Dat.  and  Abl.  Rebus  falsis  j  Ace.  Falsa  (res 


262 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


falsa^). — X.  hoc,  this  ;  G.  hujus  viA.of  this  ;J).\\\\\c  rei,  to  this, 
etc.  Those  adji^ctives,  wliicli  liavo  peculiar  absolute  forms, 
take  their  attributive  forms  in  these  cases,  as : 


N.  Qiiidqnam,  anyffdnfi. 
G.  ullliii*  rei,     of  anyfhinrf. 
I),  ulli  rei,  to  uinjUiiiuj. 

A.  qiiidqnam,    ainjfhl'if/. 
A.  «ilia  re.  by  ainjtkinq. 


N.  Nihil, 
(J.  iiulllus  rei, 
D.  iiiillT  rei, 
A.  niliil. 
A.  nulljl  re. 


not  king, 
o/  nothing, 
to  iiotUitKj. 

luttlniiq. 
by  H')thing. 


Pm:k.    Vila,  any  thing's  ;  niilln,  no  things  ;  (icn.  iillilnim  rermn.  etc. 

f^"  Xihil  has  a  colliteral  foriii  tnliilutn  with  retruhtr  iiiJlectioii  {G.  niliUi  etc.),  which 
is  used  1)  in  the  meaiiiiiLr  ol'a  ssuhsfautive  (nothiiiL''  =  a  nt-Mo  itf  /lof/iitig/i&s-)  innst  iiMially 
after  prepositions  :  In  nih'Unin  co/ir&rti,  to  he  turned  lonothinir:  rx  nihiloflft'i,  U^  be 
createtl  from  nutliini;;.  i)  As  sj'Mi.  of  value  (iiibili  tS'ie.  to  be  worili  uoiliing),  see  P.  II,  |). 
272,  1.    ;i)  As  al)l.  of  dinVrence  (nihilo  ningu  —  no  more). 

Rein.  16.  The  rule  §  3r»(»  applies  also  to  the  neuter  pronoun  id  (itK  when  it  refer?  to  the 
fjeneral  ideaof  'thini,''  (G.  (^)ii.-<  ni,  of  it  etc.).  IJiit  in  cert.ain  <'oiiveiitionil  connections 
the  ni-iiftr  forms  are  ahsultitely  used,  chiefly  the  ahl.  t-o  {<n  (fitoil.  l>y  the  f  ict  that).  So  eo 
as  abl.  of  dill't-rence,  before  compiratives  :  Ko  niiVjU  (jnod.  the  more  so  l)ecause. 

/?«-m.  17.  The  declinable  (luantitative  adjectivei»  (/ndntuni.  titntutn.  innltuin.  (lUqnan- 
tntn  (in  the  singular)  do  not  take  the  forms  with  /rx,  but  are  used  absolutely  in  the 
neuter,  a  cert;iiii  irramiu.itical  office  lu-itii,'  assi_Mied  to  each  case  (e.Ncept  the  dative).  In 
the  «reii.  tliey  occur  a-'  ohjrcts  of  price  and  valiur  ( F*.  II.  p.  070)  :  (^unnt'i  hoc  <  nii<ti  /  At 
what  price  did  you  buy  this.  Ttn^  ace.  occurs  as  ol)ject  of  intensity  (I*.  II,  p.  2G1,  3j,  aud 
Uie  abi.  as  abl.  of  dillerence  (tanto  mtlius,  fo  much  the  belter;,  see  ^  :ill. 

III.    Combination  of  Absolute  Adjectives. 

§  361.  No  absohite  descriptive  adjective  can  take  anotlier 
descriptive  adjective  as  attri])ute.  Tims  "  innanierdhle  (jreat 
thiiKjs*''  cannot"  be  transhited  by  mafjna  innumerah'dia  ;  ^'' exed- 
lent  scholars''*  not  by  ef/re(/ll  docti j  ^'"renowned  deeds'''^  not  by 
pnf^dara  gesta^  the  words  doctiis  and  (jestam  (deed)  being  Abso- 
lute Participles  of  docere  and  (/erere. 

Rem.  18.  The  adjective  attributes  of  absohite  Participles  must  be  chanc^ed 
into  the  corresponding  Adverbs  {/lofito  (f/rcf/ic.  doctns^  pnidarc,  r/csfa).  Other 
adjeetives  are  counected  by  cooruination,  as  )n,'Ujn<i  et  innniiierahilia. 

§  30^2.  Put  absolute  Foiim-ad.tectives  may  take  Descri|)tive 
Adjectives  as  attributes,  es])eciallv  when  the  former  l)elon<j:  to 
the  indefinite  or  interrogative  class.  Other  Form-adjectives 
generally  refuse  this  connection;  as:  Om?iia  jircecldra  nfrissfjna 
sujtt,  all  excellent  thinLjs  are  exceed inLily  rai'c.  Bo/ii  onniea 
consenthoit^  all  good  men  consent.  Put  not:  III  bonl,  these 
good  men;  duo  prceddra^  two  excellent  things. 

Piem.  11),  Since  Form-adjectives  are  used  absohitely  in  tlic  Siuc^ular  also, 
it  follows,  tliat  eomblitatioiis  ot"  iiuletiiute  Forni-aojectives  with  Descriptive 
Adje(;tives  in  tlie  singular  do  not  require  the  addition  of  governing  nouns 
of  general  import,  as:  ^i^nrotxH  qnidam,^o\\\{i  sick  person;  nerru)  bonus, 
no  good  man ;  niortdle  rdhil,  nothing  mortal ;  qiiiGis  sanu»,  every  sane  man. 


?. 


t 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


2G3 


Jiem.  20.  The  indefinite  adjeetive  quUqne  rarely  occurs  except  in  con- 
neciion  with  certain  form-adjectives,  reflexive  pronouns,  or  superlatives 
and  ordinal  munerals.  The  Engl.  '  every  one ',  '  each  ',  uidess  it  is  in  one 
of  these  connections,  is  not  expressed  by  qnuque,  but  by  omne»  (every- 
thing =  oiiiida)  nemo  non,  qulvis,  unusquUque  {pro  se  qidsque,  see  Obs.). 

Ors.  Qi/inf/i/e,  wiiicb  in  the  historian?  eotnetimei»  takes  its  predicate  in  the  plural,  oc- 
curs :  1)  Witli  sui'Ei!L.\TiVEs.  {(i)  in  the  nieaiiiiij,' 'every  '  with  a  positive:  EpicureO'^  doc- 
tixsimii!*  qtiiii'jne  cmtemnif.  Every  sr^liolar  despises  the  E))!ciireans.  Cic.  Tnsc.  1,21.  (b) 
In  the  nj<  anin<;  'even',  'the  very  '  with  superl.:  PotenfissiniUii  qn'ittqne.  even  the  nio(*t 
power  hil.  Li  v.  3S,  50.    Fortl^mnua  qiiUqiie  pugnare  desierat ;  The  very  bravest  had  ceased 


to  Iit,'lit.  Liv.  24. 1.5.— 2)  With  ordinals:  Dec'unus  quuque  (every  tenth  ni.m)  ad  sup  pit 
ciuiulictl.  Liv.  2,  ;.!>.  Ttrtio  q-ioque  anno,  every  third  year.  Vrinio  quo'jue  tt-mpore.  as  sot)i 
as  pits>ihle.  So  (piotns  qiti>t<{t/e  (\).  1S2,  Hi).— ;3)  In  connection  witii  (almost  always  ini 
m»>(liaiely  after)  the  keflexives  ^ibi.  .sv,  and  the  posse-sive  i>ia/g  :  Ipse  se  qnUque  diligif, 
gnod  )>er  se  nfA'p/hque  earns  est  {YjVt'ry  one  Wkeii  himself  etc.).  Cic.  Am.  '21.— Sua  coj us- 
que aniinai'tis  natftra  est ;  Every  livin<;  heinsr  has  its  own  nature.  Cic.  Fin.  5,  9.— Pro  se 
^^a.v7//f(literailv 'each  for  himself ")  often  has  the  meaning  'every  one';  Pro  se  quis- 
que  nxinnrit^r  freuvint;  Every  one  grumbled  with  threats.  Liv.  2,  6.— 4)  In  helativb 
clauses  by  incorporation,  as  :  Detendat  quod  quisque  sen-it.  Let  every  one  defend  what 
he  believes.  Cic.  Tnsc.  4,4.  (sec  P.  II.  p.  »«).— .*>)  In  intekuogative  clau^es  introduced 
bv  inteiroirative  adjectives  or  adverbs:  11  luleiit  (pd^que.  nou  quo  quisque  inconwtodo 
af.rfu-i  sit.  p/ufdi'-anduni  tst  (the  manner  how  every  one  has  borne  hn  affliction,  not  by 
wiial  MtUiclion  he  is  aliected)  Cic  Tusc.  :i.  :W.— (i)  In  comi'auative  clauses  with  -yf  quis- 
qur\  !ind  in  abl)ri'viated  comparative  constructions  with  two  superlatives  P.  II.  p.  751.— 
7)  In  TKMi'ouAL  clauses  with  uf  quisque :  Ut  quisque  hostem  o<:cid<  rat  (as  soon  as  any  one 
had  killed  an  enemv).  abscindendo  terWat  tempus.  Liv.  24, 15.— s)  Sometimes  in  connec- 
tion with  //nidus  or  qenus  ,is  (pinlitative  g.-nitive  :  Cujusque  generis  uota.  the  character  of 
each  class.  Cic.  Orat.  2i.  "lA.— 5M  Very  rarely  qui.^q>/e  occur-  in  other  connections  than  the 
above,  as  for  inst.:   Quisque  eorum  (each  of  these)  //lulia  disputant.  Cic.  Alt.  4,  2,  4. 

§  :{6:{.  Absolute  Form-adjectivks  very  frequently  take 
OTHER  FoRM-ADJECTivES  as  attributes,  especially  in  the  follow- 
ing combinations  and  arrangements  :  ///  omnes,  omnes  illi  (all 
these,  all  those) ;  ormtia  hwc,  mnnla  ilia  (all  these,  those  things)  ; 
omnia  mea  (all  my  property) ;  alia  qucedani  (some  other  things) ; 
alll  ijuidam^  some  others;  alll  multl,  many  others;  alia  midta, 
many  other  things ;  alia  omnia,  all  other  things ;  ^9«wci  quidam, 
some  few;  jxnica  qiuedam,  some  few  things,  some  few  remarks; 
tale  quls  or  quldam,  some  such  man  ;  tale  quid  or  allquld,  some 
such  thing  ;  talla  qnadam,  some  such  things ;  9ilhll  tale,  no 
such  thing;  tale  qulcquam,  any  such  thing.  Instead  of  tails 
the  phrase  ejusmodl  (written  in  one  word)  is  veiy  frequently 
used,  as:  NlhU  ejusmodl,  no  such  thing,  nothing  of  that  kind; 
ejusmodl  quid,  some  such  thing,  etc. 

Ueni.  21.  The  English  combinations  with  "  el^r  are  expressed  by  the 
.  ditfen-nt  forms  o^  allux^  as:  Qnin  alia  !i,  who  else;  qdid  aliad.wh'di  else; 
alius  (lUqnis  or  (divs  quls,  somebody  else  ;  'altud  quid,  something  else;  alius 
quisqu(un,  anv  one  else  ;  aliud  quicquam,  anything  else  ;  qxUm  alius,  eveiy 
one  else ;  quidris  aliud,  every Jiiug  else ;  alius  nemo,  nobody  else  ;  aUud 
nihil,  nothing  else. 


V 


'^.. 


2CA 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTITES. 


I7em.22.  When  those  ronibinations  refer  to*  things  in  creiierar,  tlieir 
genitives,  datives,  and  ablatives,  according  to  ^  360,  sliould  he  tbrnied  by 
the  addition  of  res, n^:  Jif/  nothiiir}  else,  nullilalia  re  :  to  something  else,  alii  eui 
rei;  of  what  else,cu]\i?>  alius  rei ;  by  nothing  of  that  kind,  nulla  ejusniodi  re, 

IV.    Disjunct  Adjectives. 

§  304.  Disjunct  Adjectives  are  tlioso,  whose  governing 
nouns  are  supplied  from  a  preceding  sentence  or  chiuse.  Tliey 
diiier  from  tlie  Absolute  Adjectives  in  two  points  :  1)  The  nouns 
to  be  supplied,  are  not  only  of  goieral  import,  as  in  the  case  of 
Absolute  Adjectives,  but  nouns  of  every  possible  kind  ;  they 
consequently  may  be  used  in  all  nund)ers  and  genders,  while 
absolute  adjectives  in  regard  to  number  are  subject  to  certain 
restrictions,  and  never  can  be  placed  in  the  feminine  gender ; 
2)  Those  adjectives,  which,  when  used  absolutely,  take  specific 
forms,  can  never  take  these  forms  wlien  they  are  merely  d'tsjunct ; 
as  :  Daho  tibi  hoc  rnedicanientdm^  si  quod  (not  quid)  opus  erlt^ 
I  shall  give  you  this  remedy,  if  any  will  be  necessary.  Rela- 
tives therefore  never  can  take  the  form  quid  in  the  neuter,  since 
they  always  must  be  considered  as  disjuncts. 

§  «SO*!.  Disjunct  Adjectives  assume  the  gender,  case,  and 
number  of  those  nouns,  which  must  be  supplied  as  their  govern- 
ing nouns.  In  English  we  frequently  employ  liere  the  Avord  one 
in  place  of  the  noun  understood,  which  cannot  he  iniitated  in 
Latin.  The  English  })OSsessives,  if  disjunct,  take  the  forms 
mine^  tJiine^  ours^  yo7irs^  theirs^  which  are  translated  by  tlie  com- 
mon Latin  forms  meus^  tiius,  etc.  Sometimes  the  governing 
noun  is  repeated  in  English,  which  generally  is  not  the  case  in 
Latin  ;  as : 

Hither  Oaul  iras given  to  Sempronin»,  and  thither  Gaul  to  Marcellus^  Gallia 
citerior  Sempronio  data  est,  ulterior  ]Marcell(). —  Whik  Gajus  refused  a  de- 
served  gift,  Sjns  accepted  an  u/ideserved  one.  Cum  Gajus  nierituni  donuni 
reeusaret,  Sejus  iinnierituni  aceD})it. — Accipe  hanc  patennn,  ego  alteratn 
tcrtehfj,  Take  this  vessel,  I  shall  keep  the  other. — Concordia  par r^B  res  eres- 
cunt,  discordid  maximcE  sape  dil(d)untur,  By  concord  small  st^ites  increase, 
by  discord  the  «rreatest  often  are  destroyed. —  Vos  restrani  patriani  l<iu(kltis^ 
nos  nostrain.  You  i)raise  your  country,  and  we  ours. 

Rem.  28.  The  Disjunct  DcMuonstratives  hie  and  iUe,  generally  cannot  be 
translated  literally.  They  frequently  are  thus  used,  in  order  to  connect 
two  periods  with  each  other,  referring  to  one  of  the  nouns  contained  in  thu 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


265 


J 


last  sentence.  Hie  refers  then  to  the  last  noun,  and  ilk  to  one  of  the  more 
remote  substantives.  The  lileral  translation  of  hie  would  then  be  ''this 
one;'  and  that  of  ilk  "  that  one."  But  we  c:enerally  translate  hie  in  this 
connect  i<m  by  an  emphatic  "  Ae"  or  by ''the  leitter  f'  ille  hy  "  the  former '' 
esi)ecially  when  both  hie  and  ilk  are  employed  in  the  same  sentence.  ' 
Ca'sar  Lahiinum—jussit.  Hie  duas  kgidnes  fluviinn  traduxit ;  Cc'esar  di- 
rected Labienus  to The  latter  (or  he;  literallv :  this  one)  led  two  ledons 

oyer  the  river.— Z^mj;  Lucilium  castra  tenere,  Labienufn  hostU  aggredi  jussit. 
JIic  duas  kgWines  in  hostw  duxit ;  ille  cnm  dvdhus  reUquis  castra  occupdvit  • 
The  Keneial  directed  Lucilius  to  hold  the  camp,  and  La])i5nus  to  attack 
the  enemies.  The  latter  (this  one)  led  two  leirions  against  the  enemies  •  the 
lormer  occupied  the  camp  with  the  two  remaining  ones. 

Rem.  24.  Sometimes  hie,  or  another  demonstrative  (especially  u  ea  id) 
refers  to  a  whole  preceding  sentence  or  clause.  The  demonstratives 'are 
then  i)laced  m  the  Neuter  ISingulak  {Iwc,  id,  this,  it),  as  :  Whik  the  army 
teas  crossing  the  river,  the  enemies,  tcho  had  seen  this  (it),  threw  their  missiks 
vpon  them,  Dum  exercitus  fluvium  transit,  hostes,  qui  hoc  (id)  viderant  tela 
m  COS  conjecerunt.  ' 

§  360.  Disjunct  Interrogatives,  Demonstratives,  and  Rela- 
tives liecpiently  are  used  as  subjects  of  predicative  nouns.  Such 
aubjects  must  agree  with  their  predicate  nouns  in  number,  gender, 
and  case,  reversing  for  this  combination  the  general  rule  of 
agreement  (§  03,  2),  as: 

QiKT  (not  quid)  tristitiee  turn  causa  est?  What  is  the  cause  of  thv  sadness 9 
—  What  is  the  foundation  of  this  repuhlicf  what  are  its  laws?  *Quod  {not 
quid)  est  reipublicae  hujus  fundamentum  ?  quae  (t?/^^  quid)  sunt  ejus  leces*-'— 
This  is  the  source  of  all  excellent  things,  Hie  est  omnium  rerum  prachu-arum 
Ions.— 77//.^  point,  which  is  the  base  of  my  speech,  etc.,  Hie  locus,  quod  oru- 
tionis  meic  tundamentum  est. 

Rem.  25.  AN'hen  by  the  interrogative  "  ithaf  we  ask  for  a  definition  of  a 
person  or  thing  (in  the  masculine  or  feminine),  we  translate  it  by  quid,  not 
by  qu IS  or  qua;  as  :  Wh(U  is  " friend  r'  (meaning  "  what  is  the  definition  of 
Iriend  V  ),  quid  {not  quis)  est  amicus  ':*  What  does  the  word  rashness  uiean? 
quid  (not  qua^)  est  temeritas  V 

§  :{67.  Relative  Adjectives  rarely  are  used  iu  connection 
with  their  governing  nouns,  but  nearly  always  as  disjwicts.  But 
they  always,  according  to  rule  §  365,  must  be  treated  as  if  the 
noun  to  which  they  refer  (their  antecedent)  were  expressly  em- 
ployed as  governing  word.  Thus  in  the  following  sentence: 
"  The  picture,  ichich  I  gave  to  Gajus,  has  been  lost,  tabula,  quain 
Gajo  dedi,  amissa  est,"  the  relative  takes  the  accusative  singular 
feminine,  because  it  must  be  treated  in  the  same  manner  as  if 
the  y\o\\\  picture  {tabula)  was  repeated  as  governing  noun  of  the 


266 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


relative:  ^^  the  pieture,  which  2^lcture  I r/ave,  tabula,  qnam  tal>u- 
lam  dedi." 

Jicm.  20.  The  ancient  aulhoi-s  indeed  sometimes  use  the  r«'lative  in  tliis 
primary  way,  especially  Ca;sar,  as:  I5ell.  Gall.  I,  6.  Onniihm  rebus  coinpara- 
iis  dum  cJicunt,  qua  die — ainnes  conveu'ireut,  After  all  tliinirs  had  been  ob- 
tained, thev  appoint  a  day,  on  which  day  they  should  all  assemble. 

^Ve  see  Vrom  tiiis,  that  ihe  llelative  Adjective  does  not  always  stand  in 
tlie  same  case  as  its  antecedent,  but  that  the  case  of  the  rehilive  depends 
on  the  case  of  its  governing  noun,  as  if  it  were  expressed. 

§  368.  Hence  we  have  the  following  rule  in  regard  to  the 
agreement  of  llelative  Adjectives:    They  aijree  in  monhcr  ami 
ge)aler  icith  their  antecedent^  but  assume  that  case,  which  the 
antecedent  would  have,  if  it  were  used  in  place  of  the  relative. 
For  exceptions  to  this  rule  see  P.  II,  p.  524,  7i.  10. 

§  «109.  When  the  Antecedent  of  a  Relative  is  either  itself  a 
Disjunct  FoiiM-ADjECTiVE  {hie,  ilk,,  is,  idem,  tantus,  talis),  or 
has  a  Form-adjective  as  attribute,  the  class  of  the  relative  must 
a<^ree  with  the  class  of  its  antecedent  or  the  attribute  of  the 
latter.     Tlius  Determinative  Antecedents  must  be  followed  by 
Deter mi)i at ive\\i}\iii\\Qh  {hie,  ille,  is,  idem  are  followed  by  qui) ; 
Quantitative  Antecedents  are  followx'd  by   Qua/ttitative  Rela- 
tives {fantus  is  followed  by  quantum) ;  Numeral  Antecedents  are 
followed  by  Numeral  Relatives  {tot  is  followHMl  by  quot) ;    (Quali- 
tative antecedents  re«iuire  a  Qmditative  relative  {t<dis,  qualis), 
Tliese  are  called  syndetic  antecedents  (P.  II,  p.  492, 15  ;  j).  490,  4). 

Hem.  27.  In  Enixlish  we  have  the  Relatives  who^  which,  that,  as.  The 
rules  for  their  emi)loyment  are  ditferent  from  the  Latin  rules.  The  Engli-<h 
relative  ''  whaf^  (to  be  distinguished  from  the  interrogative)  contains  and 
implies  its  own  antecedent  ;  it  stands  instead  of  that  trhich.  It  is  eithei 
translated  by  quod  or  by  qu(e.     ISee  liejti.  28. 

Eeui.  28.  The  Latin  possessives  have  no  relative  form,  and  are  connected 
"with  the  determinative  relative  qui.  Among  the  numerals,  oidy  t*'i  has  a 
corresponding  relative;  the  others  likewise  take  the  determinative  relative 
qui  {tnulti,  j^aud.,  etc.,  qui).  Among  the  Latin  demonstrativfs  the  deter- 
minative IX,  more  fre(iuently  than  Hie  and  iste,  is  used  as  antecedent  of  qui, 
in  order  to  express  tiie  Englisli  denu)nstrative  fhut,  as:  Mi/  brother  has  re- 
ceived that  h'tfer,  which  lie  had  ej'pect<d,  Frater  mens  eas  litteras,  quas  e.xpec- 
taverat,  accCpit.  The  Latin  Antecedent  eas,  and  the  English  Antecedent 
that,  may  both  be  omitted,  and  we  have  then  in  English  thn-e  ways  of  ex- 
pressing the  sentence.  We  either  say:  ''the  Utter,  /rhich  he  e.v]Hrted,''  or 
*'  what  letter  he  ewpecfed,''  or  '"the  letter  he  expected.'''  Any  of  the  three  lorms 
of  the  English  sentence  is  translated  iu  tlie  same  way  iu  Latin  {litteras  quas 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


267 


exspertarernt,  or:  quas  eTspectarernt  litteras).    An  omission  of  the  Relative, 
as  in  Enulish,  is  inadmissible  in  Latin. 

When  the  Latin  Antecedent  is  Absolute  in  the  Neuter  {id  or  ea),  it  gener- 
alli/  is  omitted,  and  the  English  "  thai  which''  is  changed  into  "  w/iat"  (see 
Rem.  10). 

Pern  20  As  for  thr  difforont  da-offifi  of  relative?,  the  rnles  of  ajrreement  in  Number, 
Case,  and  "cJendcr  arc  in  all  of  them  the  same  as  for  the  relative  qui  (^  'M)S).  and  the  be^nn- 
ncr  ()U"lit  to  be  especially  careful,  not  to  confound  the  ditierent  clai^Kes,  since  the  Enj^lish 
)an"-uai}e  knows  none  of  the  Latin  distinctions.  Thus  /he  mme  a.<>  corresponds  to  the 
Latin  Tdi/n  (jui :  .«irh  a<,  to  f(i/i'<  qualU ;  so  nvich  a<.  to  tantus  quanft/s;  xo  many  o.s\  to 
Tof  qi/ot  Nor  must  the  bcirinner  confound  the  Ki-lative  that  with  the  Demonstrative  that.., 
but  trnii.'ilate  the  Eii'dish  liekttire,  even  when  it  is  omitted,  as  :  All  I  hare  told  you  in  true. 
Omnia,  (pnc  til)i  di.M,  vera  sunt.  — T/i«  imn  that  told  you  that,  is  insane,  Uomo  qui  tibi  id 
(hoc)  tlixit,  iusipit. 

l^  For  special  Rules  regarding  the  Relatives,  see  Book  VL  (Relative 
Clauses). 

Y.    Partitive  Genitive. 

§  370.  Absolute  Adjectives  frequently  are  connected  with 
other  Absolute  or  Disjunct  Adjectives  in  the  form  of  tlie  Pauti- 
TivK  Oknitive. 

The  Partitive  Genitive  forms  with  its  governing  substantive 
an  ATrKiniTiVE  I^huase,  in  which  the  governing  word  stands 
to  its  attribute  in  the  relation  of  the  ^)6rr^  to  tlie  whole,  as:  Two 
pounds  (f  silver,  duo  pondo  argenti;  the  bravest  of  the  soldiers, 
fortissimi  militum.  Attributive  phrases  containing  a  Partitive 
Genitive  are  called  Partitive  Phrases. 

§  ;I71.  The  Partitive  Phrases  are  either: 

1)  Quantitative,  answering  to  the  question,  how  much?  as: 

Multum  auri,  much  (of)  gold. 

2)  or  Numeral,  answering  to  the  c[\\Q^t\ox\,  how  ma7iy ?  as: 

Dauci  eoriim,  few  of  them. 
In  the  former  the  governing  word  is  an  absolute  Form-adjec- 
tive in  the  neuter  singular,  and  the  dependent  word  a  quan- 
titative NOUN  in  the  singular.  In  the  latter  the  governing 
word  is  a  disjunct  Form-adjective  in  the  Plural  of  any  gen- 
der, and  the  dependent  w^ord  a  Substantive  in  the  Plural. 

]>ut  the  lanouaire  has  extended  both  of  these  forms,  and  ap- 
plies  the  QUANTITATIVE  fomi  to  th^  question  what?  {quid  novi, 
wiiat  [of]  news?  nihil  novi,  aliquid  novi,  hoc  novi,  nothing 
new,  something  new,  this  [of]  news)  ;  and  the  numeral  form  to 


268 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTI\T:S. 


the  question  ichich  ?  (qnis  eontm^  wliich  of  them?  nterque  ednmi^ 
botli  of"  them;  sapient  Issiini  Jiomlmim^  the  wisest  of  men.) 

§  ti7^.  The  QUANTITATIVE  fomi  of  tlie  Partitive  Phrase  in 
its  oriufinal  and  j)rimary  ap})lic'ation  lias  been  considered  §  204. 
Tliis  form  is  applied  not  only  to  the  QnanttUUlve.,  but  also  to 
those  Determinative  Form-adjectives  which  have  a  similar  mean- 
ing, as  :  1)  5'?^?V^,  botli  interrogative  xmd  indefinite  ;  quid  tenipo- 
ris^  instead  of  quod  tempus^  what  time?  si  quid  ircB  hahes^  in- 
stead of  si  quam  inon  Jiahes  (if  thou  hast  any  anger)  ;  2)  ali- 
quid^  as  aliquid  patientiiv^  instead  of  aliqua  patientia  (some 
patience)  ;  3)  quiequam^  as  quirquajn  bdtdris^  instead  of  idlus 
labor,  any  w^ork;  4)  the  Determinatives  /loc  and  id,  as  /loc  or 
id  laboris,  instead  of  hie  or  is  labor,  that  work  ;  5)  the  Relativo 
quod,  as  qiiod  reliqui  fuit,  instead  oi  quod  reliquum  fuit,  wliat 
was  left. 

Hem.  30.  We  notice  here  the  pln'asea:  id  tcmporis,  instead  of  eo  tempore^ 
ut  that  time  ,  id  cetdlis,  instead  of  ed  (Bfdte,  in  that  asj^e.  Livy,  tlie  poets, 
and  later  authors,  have  nppHed  this  form  to  other,  even  descriptive  adjec- 
tives, as:  e.vicjaum  cdinpi,  instead  of  exigua  cdinpi  pars,  a  small  part  of  the 
field;  nltiiiiuiti  inopi(t>,  the  last  degree  of  poverty.  Thus  later  writers  use 
ahsolute  wqwXgy  plunds.  In  order  to  desiLcnate  real  parts  or  even  qualitiei<  of 
thinu^s,  as:  plana  urbin^  the  level  ;m/'^»»  of  the  city;  uUima  (Jrientia,  the  far- 
thest parts  of  the  Orient;  incerta  belli,  the  uncertainties  (chances)  of  war. 

Rem.  31.  The  Parts  (divisions)  of  Time  and  Spack  in  classical  lan;2:uai:^e 
are  not  expressed  by  Partitive  Phrases,  but  by  Attribntice  Adject  ice  Phrases. 
Thus  ''tlie  highed  part  of  tJie  iiKnintaiii'  is  not  expressed  by  siininiuiii  num- 
its,  but  by  Hunimus  motin  (literally,  the  highettt  iiwuntain)  ;  the  middle  part  of 
the  city,  media  mbs  {not  medium  urbis);  extremo  anno,  in  the  last  j>art  of 
the  year;  vere  priino,  in  the  beginninir  (tirst  part)  of  si)riniz:;  di/nidiu/a  iter 
(seldom  itineria),  the  half-way.  Tlie  adjectives  sul)ject  to  tins  construction 
are  the  indetinite  ordinals  (gi  201)  and  the  detinite  ordinal  primus. 

§  *t7St.  The  Quantitative  form  of  the  Partitive  Phrase,  in 
regard  to  tlie  dependent  word,  is  applied  to  absolute  neuter 
DESOKIPTIVE  ADJECTIVES,  wliicli,  according  to  the  analogy  of  the 
Quantitative  nouns,  are  placed  in  the  genitive  singular. 
I'his  construction  is  expressed  by  English  ordinary  attrihntive 
phrases  ;  as  :  nihil  boni,  nothing  good,  no  good  thing  ;  aliquid 
novi,  sometliing  new  ;  nndtwn  rmdi,  much  evil,  lint  this  form 
is  confined  to  the  movable  adjectives,  wdiile  adjectives  of  coni'- 
nioii  gender  must  agree  in  case  with  their  governing  absolute 


I 


ABSOLUTE  AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


2G9 


adjectives  (§362,  Rem.  19),  as:   nihil  mortale   (not   mortalis), 

nothing  mortal. 

r^m  3'>  Here  belong-  the  Latin  idioms  nihil  mild  reliqui  est,  nothinj^  is 
lefflo  nf;;  Mapa>4  %d,en,  I  do  not  care  for  it  (literally:  I  consider  it  as 
no  weighed  [that  is,  important]  tlnng). 

Bern  3rj  The  rule,  i^iven  for  quantitative  adjectives  (§  264),  that  the 
panulve  construction'  Sm  not  take  place,  if  ^  ^-^^V^^^"^  ^^.^'^ 
•mv  Other  case  than  the  nominative  or  accusative,  holds  good  in  d\\  cases 
XieAb^^u^e  Neuter  Adjectives  in  the  ISingular  are  employed  as  govern- 
b/.    soVdH^^^^^^^  genitives.    Thus  we  cannot  say  ahem  mm,  to  sonie- 

thbig  new,  but  must  tiiploy  here  a  common  attributive  phrase  with  res 
{nociB  alicai  rei). 

?  »74  In  the  Numeral  Partitive  Phrase  the  governing 
words  are  Disjunct  Numeral  Adjectives,  referring  to  a  Plural 
noun  in  a  precedin-  sentence,  whose  number  they  either  deter- 
mine or  indicate.  This  noun  of  reference  is  indicated  by  the 
Partitive  Genitive,  dependent  on  them,  which  therefore  must  be 
a  Pronoun  or  a  Determinative  Adjective,  as :  How  many  of 
them?  quammultieorum;  Some  o/ z*^,  quidam  nostrum;  lew 
ofichich,  quorum  pauci. 

qinpp  this  Partitive  Genitive  represents  the  nonn,  to  which  the  governing 
dis^   net     die^^^^^^  it  must  be  in  the  same  gender  w  th  it;  and  since 

cljspmct  '\^1^^  3\*^^';  ,^;  '  ij,  ..^.^aer  with  the  noun  to  which  they  reter, 
^^In^  it^    av^sakf^^/"/^^^^^^  <^(jree  in  gender  with  tMr  parti^ 

L  v'il.v!."!:? as    .^;^t  edrui  or  mudti  eOrum,  according  as  mum  reters  to 
a  niascuUiie  or  feiu'mine  noun. 

8  'Sr.-}  Tlie  form  of  the  Numeral  Partitive  Phrase  has  been 
exteiuled  to  the  question  qni,  which  ?  so  that  Determinate 
Aaioctives  mav  be  used  as  the  governing  words  of  the  phrase 
as:  qaidmn  eorum,  some  of  them;  neuter  eorum,  neither  of 
them;  alter  eorum,  the  other  of  them;  qimque  eorrcm,  each  of 
them ;  ^,emo  eorwn,  none  of  tl>em.  It  lias  been  also  extended 
to  superlatives,  as :  sapientlsshmis  eorum,  the  wisest  of  them ; 
«w>nM»/<')-<'A'''«',  the  bravest  of  whom.  .  .      „, 

Sometimes  also  the  form  of  the  Numeral  Partitive  Phrase  is 
applied  to  common  attributive  phrases,  having  numeral  adjec- 
tiA-s  as  attributes.  Thus,  instead  of  saying  plerTque  milUes  we 
may  say  plerjque  miUtum,  most  of  the  soldiers ;  instead  of  qu* 
milites,  we  may  say  qui  militum. 


270 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT  ADJECTH'ES. 


Rem.  84.  Plural  nouns  as  partitive  genitives  cannot  be  employed  with 
liter,  utcrque,  neuter,  it  nun,  oniuea,  and  «renerally  not  ■with  mnlti  and  the 
otli("r  dctinite  nnnierals.  llere  the  common  attributive  phrase  must  be 
used,  as  ntni  Jiliii,  wol  utni  fUulru in  ;  uterqne  J^linx^woX  vtcnjue  jiliurnm ; 
omueH  milites,  not  oimteH  luiUtvtn.  Uiuis  is  construed  with  tlie  preposition 
ex  or  de.  The  construction  with  ex  or  de  frequently  is  api)Hed  to  the  other 
definite  numerals,  and  to  multi  and  nomadli.     See  ^  443. 

Item.  35.  When  (dii — (dii,  alter — alter  are  coordinate  (§  357,  No.  5),  they 
cannot  be  connected  with  Xouns  as  Partitive  Genitives,  as  in  EngUsh,  but 
assume  the  form  of  Appositions  to  their  nouns  of  reference,  as: 

S(ynie  of  the  soldiers  icere  captured,  others  Killed,  ^lilites  ahi  capti,  alii  in- 
terfeeti  sunt  (literally :  the  soldiers,  some  were  killed,  others,  etc.) 

Tlie  one  of  the  female  captires  crossed  the  river  by  a  Ixmt,  the  other  by  aford^ 
Captlvai  tiuvium,  altera  lintre,  altera  vado  transiit  (literally:  The  cap- 
tivex^  the  one  by  a  boat,  the  other  by  a  ford,  crossed  the  ricer). 

§  «ITO.  The  Personal  Pronouns  of  the  iirst  and  second 
persons  in  tlie  Plural  as  Partitive  Genitives  assume  the  forms 
tiostrton  and  vestni?n^  instead  of  9wsfri  and  vestri,  as:  Nemo 
nostrum^  none  of  us;  quis  vestrum^  wbich  of  you?  The  pronoun 
of  the  tliird  person  sui  never  is  used  as  Partitive  Genitive,  and 
we  must  use  ipsonan  instead  of  it,  as:  77iei/  said^  that  many  of 
them  had  j^erished  (multos  ipsorum,  not  sui).  But  when  is,  ea, 
id  can  be  used  as  ])ronoun  of  the  third  person  (§  238),  the  parti- 
tive genitive  *'  oftJienC  is  expressed  by  eorum  or  eCiruni, 

EXERCISES. 

Absot/i:te  Ad.tectives  denoting  Persons. — 1.  Indignnm  est  a  pari 
vinci  aut  superiore,  (sed)  indi>j:nius  ab  infcriorc  atipie  hihiiilidre. — 3.  Mortem 
timens  beatus  esse  necpiit. — 3.  Capitis*  damnatiis  testamentum"  facere  legi- 
bus  prohibotur. — 4.  Gajus,  quum''.  a  sapientibus  despiceretur,  a  stultis  lau- 
diitus  est. — 5.  Omnes  boni  hujus  viri  mortem  lugent  [mourn  for). — (J.  B(ma 
aliPna  appetentes*  leges  divlnas  violant. — 7.  Ingens  [enormous)  fugientium 
multitudo  inseciuentium^  telis  interfecta  est. — 8.  Inhumilta  [uidmritd)  iuter- 
fectorum  corpora  aOrem  intiuiuavrTunt." — 1).  Onmes  nu'i  jjrudontiam  tuain 
admiriiti  sunt. — 10.  ()i)portunus'  Bruti  adventus  [arriral)  et  tibi  ct  tuis  per- 
gnltus  fuisse  vidftur. — 11.  Ciiesar  locorum  angustiis"  suis  auxilium  ferre 
l)r()hil)itus  est. —  r.i.  Hac  PompDji  victoriil  nostrorum  animi  [courage)  reno- 
vilti  sunt. — 13.  ^lilitcs  tautam  Marii  diligcntiam  [apitUcation)  suis  re- 
nuntiahant." — 14.  Kosdem  vincere  et  reconciliare  ditlicile  est. — 15.  Quia 
Ilaunibalis  victor  fuity — !(>.  Cujus  negligeutiiT  copitc  nostne  repulstc  sunt? 
— 17.  Va\\  soli  obedire  debPmus? — 18.  Quern  tilii  tui  exspectant  V — 10.  A 
quo  muudus  universus  rt'giturV — 20.  (Quorum  auxilio  (rajus  luoc  pcrfc^eit? — 
21.  Quibus  Gajus  hoc  secrCtum  prodiditV — 22.  Quos  Verres  avaritiS  sua 

>  Caput,  here:  capital  crime.— "Will.— «While.— *  Appe/ere,  to  covet.—»  Insequi.  to  pnr- 
»ne.—*  I/if/i/hitlre.  to  infest.  mk-vX.—"^  Opixjituuus,  opportune,  timely.— * Z,<>C(/;<//n  amjus- 
We,  impracticable  roails.— »To  report 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


271 


six.liilvit  et  aquibus  idem  Yerres  accusatus  est?— 23.  Multi  bona  aliGna  ap- 
petunt  sed  pauci  vi  (ea)  arripiunt^  et  tenent  (/w;)).-24.  Multonun  scelera 
a  Dfo  solo  puniuntur.— 25.  Platdnis  philosophia  a  paucissimis  intelligivi- 
tlPtur  — '>()  Quorumdam  opiniones  tam  obscur»  sunt,  ut  nemini  elucuiari 
possint  —27  Omnium  consensus^*  ijrave  hujus  rei  [point)  argumentum  esse 
vidotur  —28  Alii  arma  abjieientes  ell'ugiunt,  alii  fortiter  pugnantes  ab  hos- 
tibus  intertieiuntur;  rcliqu'i,  lintils  nacti,  lihenum  transeunt— 29.  Qui  nihil 
a-unt  turpiter  vivunt.— 30.  Eis,  qui  merita*  sua  modeste  celare  student, 
pTus  laudis  tribuere»  solCmus,  quam  ipsi  expectare  possimt.— ol  bi  quis 
tbrtunam  suam  experiri  velit,  amplissima  ei  occasio  dabitur.-32.  bi  qui 
domum  {homi)  redire  voluerint  (^  347)  veniam  eis  libentissime  dabo. 

1    (^reet  in  (bv)  mv  name  all  thy  family.— 2.  Every  one  shall  [wiper.) ^e- 
fcnd  his  rtViendAl.— 3.  It  is  disgraceful  to  be  deserted  by  one  s  [followersj.— 
4   Who  should  be  willing  to  give  up  [dereUnqnere)  so  great  advantages  ?— 
O'  Hv  whose  arts  has  Trov  been  captured '?—G.  To  whom  doest  thou  owe 
si'ieh  a  chan-e  (,y//^r////o)  ot' thv  atlairs  (/•<^•<)  V— 7.  By  whom  could  so  atrocious 
a  CM  in.e  be  CH,mmitted  with  iiupunity  (^  220,  Hem.  G)?-a  AUuoli  [persons] 
disturb  the  (piiet  (r/'^M  of  the  city,  by  nightly'  revels y«-^.  How  many  have 
committed  (r.v/////i/^//^/r)  their  fortunes  to  this  wicked  Ofi^'"^)  man  .•'-10. 
]Mauv  are  call.-d  [rocare),  but  few  are  elected  [eligere).—!!.  The  opinions  of 
mauV  are  contrarv  to  the  measures  of  the  president  [princeps);  but  the  rest 
cl,.f;.nd  bi.n  mosi  persistent ly.»-12.  By  the  frauds  of  some  it  has  been 
elfected  (  facere),  that  [ut)  these  most  useful  laws  were  rejected  by  tiie  ben- 
';,;  _li  ^'Thi.  point  [reJ)  seems  to  be  conceded  by  all.-14.  The  opinions 
of  all  are  unfavorable'"  to  vou,  because  you  covet  [appet^re)  the  property 
(bona)  of  others— 15.  bome  have  C(^ntirmed,  others  have  denied  this  rumor. 
—1«  Tlie  others  were  compelled  to  surrender  [se  trmiere)  to  the  enemies.— 
17  These  statues  have  been  destroyed  by  somebody's  wickedness  [><celus).-- 
18'  If  any  one's  authority  could  prevail'  on  me,  I  would  be  determined 
bv  PlatiA  opinion.-ll).  The  welfare  of  the  republic  must  be  dearer  than 
lite  to  every  on^.-'-^O.  This  fruitless  [sterilis)  victory  has  been  useful  (i>w- 
Lse)  to  nobody.-21.  It  pleased-  (to)  the  general    to  throw  *  some  into 
priscn  (m  rimula);  [and]  to  strike- others  by  rods.^«-22.  The  civd  law 
O- '.)  has  been  written  f/.r  [to)  the  careful  (./.7/^.^1.  .-23.  The  poor  often 
unjustly  accuse  the  rich,  that  [quod  with  subjunctive)  they  rob"  their  prop- 
,.,.,  V  — '>4  Nobody's  honor  [existimatio)  can  be  diminished  {imnunuere)  by  a 
drunken  [ebrius)  tman].-25.  We  fear  those  that  [partic.)  bring  (^rr^)  gitts. 
—"0    The  words  of  the  conirratulatiuir  persons  were  very  pleasant  to  Ci- 
cero—27    It  is  often  damierous,  to  clieck*^  the  course  of  one  that  hastens 
( jj^irtir  )  1.2H    Some  brought  help  to  those  who  fought  [partic),  anti  others 
•e^r  ned  Jmpedlre)  thosS  that  fled  [partic.)-2d.  He  who  (r.^a/.)  disdains- 
Irood  coundls^nust^lCcuse  himself  [^  280,  Hem.  4),  if  he  is  left  alone-  by 
his  friends— 30   Who  [relative)  prefer  their  own  interest  [utUdas)^  to  the 
M-elfare  of  the  country,  are  generally  despised  by  their  fellow-citizens.- 
31    'W)  those  who  [partic.)  intend  [velle)  to  wage  a  war,  arms  are  necessary. 
— 3->   To  those  who  [relative)  prefer  pleasures  to  virtue,  wealth  (r/^r^M  seems 
to  be  the  hi-hest  -ood.-33.  If  any  one  has  another  opinion,  I  shall  most 


272 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJITNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


in.licH,iv,.)  tlwn-      "st     (V";.^      'h^  0«".V"../<Vv,,,,  „,„.„  (,„,„  ,;';,„ 

Absolute  AdVec-    vk"; kvo'   n  •  ™  v ""  <Y"m'''  "'^'  ""-'"-^  <'«'''"■'>• 
co,n,„isoet.'-3.  Utilia  l-ui.  .rl'  ,  ™  j.™  i^f;^-  ,  ".',''  ^'■'■'I*"' '  '|^''  -^'  vera 

20  Nihil  „,K„a,„  u,:.^' s  ,e",'a,;„',';r:s  I;  .^; ,  ^  'irT;:'^';;;.'  t;  t;","""-- 

m.litihus  ahlata  sunt,"  ejusque  rei  ipse  testis''  "uisti  ^*' '"'""  " 

fut,„v  things  l^-,sT,,.e,'/r!.n  s     ■■'t^'  t^^Z'J'::^'''^'^;^'""'''''''^  "^ 
to  inveslisiute  iinl<n,nvn  tliin.^s  aiul  to     n     ,...,,,!  .l''"l'«<)l>liei-s  tiy 

wl,icli  seen,  to  be  kno,vM.-4Tc,hr    '(>'''■''''',■•'■''*  ^""'"'  "'<«« 
these  iinforese-n  events   (tl.in.'s  -1    F,,,,     h*  n  ■       '^  ili«-"neerte,l"  \,y 

(;-•<;-)  wise  [„.e,.].-o^  ^trrt,*.in:^s  w " '  p  e,,  ':,'t,  j'T'  ''"".'•"jr 

Wliatdoe'stthotul,    Z-<r 

la.  Bv  what  art  tho.i  tiTriCl  v-14'"7^  '''•"  "'"  <'"'  >'"'"•- 

wl,a.  did  Ga,i„s  devole  JJI«     j  so  m„?h    i  i ...iee -/^"i';,  ^^'^  ■-''';  To 
do  sonielliin.r,— 17.  All  seem  t<)  he  fn'   It,.,     i  i  ,■    ^^"  '"'>'^  ^'"*''  '" 

ricious  („«,•«,)  „,a„  hulll'm'liv  f  !  .^'^r^^'/Sv^'  To^V'"''" 

hmgs  are  so  unproper  (,„rfm)n/.,,,  that  th..v  .m,st  be  con  "• ' L:!.      -M^'u 
thou  hast  heard  aiivl  in"  tell  nie -Lot    \r,„r.;,  '         ,    ""«^''loi-    —-'(».  If 

a  true  IVien.lsldp.^i  Nt^-o  cotdd  n;;t  he         !."l  r     'f  '■",'"''-■ ''"""''"'  "''■'» 
hy  the  a-onv"  of  the  dvin."      "i  r^\  ,f       l"  ''''liglited  by  aiiylhinj;,  ,bau 

(/ive(^,*..;r)t    c^-^r.Ylin';i;:rpn     .    ; 

been  more  disc..ne<Tt«    Ity-Z/nv  ' .  ,    ,    ,  •     'i   'l"'f— 2''-  1  bave  never 

[men!  eannot  foresee  (*««'«;a  -the'iSs.  ^(".L '  ff  ivei^Mh'n'.r-.';,  •'(V'-'^' 

zc.il.-29.  ThoscMliat(rr/./nn".Te^^^  tmited  with  to.)  much 

-;:>  Pnf.fare,  to  fulfil  ^u  pnM  '.'""^.1  {  {Z  lotZ^  t<',yHe.u  .-»/„,„,.,/,>,.,.  to  change. 
g.l.s.-M  7'^  refuse,  prohihr-rc..-.»  To  'ui;^,^^;^  ^mn^J^  ^^'jtnoss  -.3  /.,,,v,,,^v.,  Tral 
concedere.  pputmrn.        1  rauslate .  t/t(/Mce  us,  thai  we  emi>k,y.-~i^  To  allow. 


ABSOLUTE   AND   DISJUNCT   ADJECTIVES. 


273 


of  tho  ITelvetians.* — 31.  It  is  absurd  to  bring  foi'ward''  anew  {denuo)  things 
which  {iKU't.)  have  been  once  refuted. — 82.  These  things  have  been  Huished, 
but  now  we  wisli  to  commence  {agfjredi)  the  rest. 

Combination  of  Absolute  Adject^tes. — 1.  All  good  men  wish  this. — 
2.  Eveiy  wicked  {iinprobus)  man  praises  {extolUre)  the  enemies  of  his  coun- 
try.— 3.  No  honest  {j^robinf)  man  is  in  the  habit  of  spreading  {divulgdre) 
falsehoods  {jalst'  thinfjx). — 4.  Every  new  thing  generally  excites  {commovere) 
the*  multitude. — o.  'So\\\uv^Yin\\^Ykx\\)\Q{meinorahlli.H)  has  happened  {evenlre) 
while  you  were  absent. — 6.  This  man  does  not  write  anything  useless  {inu- 
illls). — 7.  Your  friend  neglects  some  important  {gravis)  things. — 8.  All  this 
is  unimportant. — 1).  All  that  is  denied  bv  our  countrymen. — 10.  Something 
else  occupies  the  mind  of  Cajsar. — 11.  A  few  other  things  must  be  done. — 
12.  Roscius,  deserted^  by  all  others,  is  defended  by  Cicero  alone. — 13.  This 
man,  praised  by  every  one  else,  is  censured  only  by  his  accuser.* — 14.  These 
boys  have  dev^oted  {fribuere)  their  labors  to  everything  else. — 15.  Victory 
can  be  obtained  by  nothing  else. — 16.  Nothing  greater  could  happen. — 
17.  Nobody  else  tries  to  i^rove  such  things. — 18.  The  mind  of  nobody  else 
could  conceive  {e.rco(/itdrt)  such  absurdities  {ineptidp). — 19.  Some  great  schol- 
ars have  contirmed  this  opinion. — 20.  What  else  has  produced  {efficere)  this 
change  {mutatio)  of  public  atfairs  (things)  V— 21.  Call*  everything  by  its  own 
name. — 22.  Every  learned  [man]  willmost  easily  see  (perftpicere)  this. — 23. 
Everv  good  {superb  it  ice)  man  most  readily  {libenx)  contributed^  something. — 
24.  If  every  one  will  fultir  (^  347)  his  own  promises,  we  shall  succeed."— 
2.5.  We  deinand,  that  (^/0  to  every  one  his  own  property  be  restored  {red- 
chrt). — 2G.  We  have  heard  no  such  thing;  but  Gajus  will  be  able  to  tell 
{narrdre)  (to)  you  something  similar. — 27.  I  suspected  some  such  thing  long 
since,  but  neglected  this  and  innumerable  other  things. 

Dis.ji'NCT  Adjecthtis. — 1.  The  Prussians  {Borussu.s)  invaded^  Upper^" 
Gaul,  and  the  Austrians  {AnstriacNs)  the  lower"  [one].— 2.  If  thou  hadst 
accepted  the  smaller  gift,  thou  wouldst  now  have  got  {/erre)  the  larger 
one. — 3.  Great  thieves  often  escape,  while  {quuni  with  subj.)  small  ones 
are  punished. — 4.  Those  who  {rehit.)  lead*-  the  happiest  life,  while  {dum) 
they  are  living,  often  will  lead  the  most  wretched,  when  {quum)  they  will 
be  dead.— 5.  When  Ciesar  had  thus  addressed  {(dloqui)  Diviiiacus,  the  latter 
stood  {iinperf.)  looking  ou*^  the  ground  {terra). — 6.  While  Sempronius  was 
{present)  thus  attending"  to  the  safety  {mlvs)  of  the  queen,  the  latter  had 
already  left  the  town. — 7.  Both  the  king  and  his  wife  had  departed  {profi- 
m<7);'the  former  in  order  to  (//0  collect'^  an  army,  the  latter  in  order  to 
attend  to  the  safety  of  her  family  (Ji  3o7,  6).— 8.  Artaxerxes  inien^led  to  kill 
Ids  brother  Cyrus,  but  this  one  had  escaped  by  the  help  of  his  mother. — 

9.  The  enemies  intended  to  cross  the  river;  but  Caesar,  who  had  seen  this 
before,'"  had  sent  armed  [men]  in  order  to  {that)  guard"  the  hither'^  bank. 

10.  The  tiueen  and  her  sister  endeavored  to  escape,  but  both  were  captured 
by  our  [troops].— 11.  Both  daughters  of  the  king  sought"  safety  by  flight, 
but  the  oue'^"  was  killed,  the  other  was  thrown'^*  into  prison  {in  rincubi).— 
12.  Gajus  wished  to  buy  both  farms  {terra);  but  he  could  obtain  neither 


1  Helveiius.— 5  7b  i^nwg' /orjrrtrcZ.  proferre.— s  To  desert,  reliuquere.— <  AccusStor.— 
6  Appcllure.— «  7b  cot.tnf/nte,  conll-rre.— M^ie^tare.— »  The  Latin  >ay!<:  "-ue  hare  ran- 
gi/Lshtol,'"  in  order  to  expn-ss  Sl  future  i^iiccess.—»  Ingredi.—i"  Superior.— 11  Inferior.— 
i'^  A"ere  — >3  To  look  on,  contuCri.— "  Consulere.— i^Conticribere.— **  7b  se£  sornetMng  be- 
fore, providere.— I'TeiiCre.— '«Citerior.— 1»  2b  seek,  quaerere.— -"o  See  §  357,  5.— "  Couji- 
cere. 


27t 


ABSOLUTE  AND  DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


ABSOLUTE  AND  DISJUNCT  ADJECTIVES. 


275 


^  ^4G).— lb.  Gajus  has  ninny  l)ooks,  Scjns  owns'  few,  but  tlio  hooks  of  the 
latter  are  more  valuable  than  those  (§  ;jOT)  of  the  fornur.— 14  Two  votes 
were  given  to  ine,  (and)  to  Gajus  three.— 15.  This  is  the  end  of  all  theso 
labors. —1().  Ihis  was  the  beginning  of  all  our  evils.~lT.  This  was  the 
elnnax  {f^miDiui,  Gen.  f<nm),>(t')i>{' x\\\  his  niiserv.— 18.  What  else  is  friendship 
than  {quam)  the  eonneetion  ((v>//y"^///r^Vy)  of  \wo  souls y—lJ>  What  was  the 
opnnon  ot  thy  family  V— :20.  What  will  be  the  tate  (.w/-.v)  of  the  captives  >— 
21.  What  is  the  source  (>//,»<)  of  these  troubles  {qacrehiyi—'-Z^  Gajus'  poems 
are  beautiful,  but  thine  are  more  so."^— 2;J.  Althouirh  the  French=*'lan"-ua<'-e"* 
IS  very  pretty,"  still  ours  seems  to  be  by  fir  the  better."— 24  SemiuonTus 
gave  (to)  me  all  books  which  his  brother  iiad  lelt  {rclinqiure)  —2.")  Vmbiorix 
deteated  the  ai-:dualici,  who  were  the  neighbors'  of  (transl.  ^>)  his  kiu'^dom 
— 2().  Those  men,  whom  thou  hast  hin-t  {Imkn)  so  grievously  •*  will  once 
{tihquaiah»)  accuse  thee.— 27.  The  royal"  troojjs,  whom  Sempronius  had  led 
over  the  river,  were  cut  down"  bv  the  euemies.— 2S.  All  ihiu-rs  which  are 
determined"  by  weight  {i>oml>ix)  or  measure  {uauHura)  mav  {ran)  be  "iven 
as  a  loan.'^- 2y.  ^'o  time,  which  thou  hast  spent'*  in  {hi})  indolenc*  can 
ever  be  restored  {ralihn)  to  thee.— yo.  Most  men  wish  to  have  a  friend  of 
such  kind  {ttdtn),  as  they  cannot  be  themselves. — :n  The  same  fmenl  -is 
had  come,  left  the  cami).— ;j2.  This  is  the  same  [thinir],  as  1  had  sh(»wn  to 
thee.— ija.  These  are  the  best  testimonies  which  can  be  bnjught  forward.'*' 

Paktitive  (tKmtive.— 1.  Hie  labor  nemini  vestrum  anicquam  i)r()dcsse'« 
vidctur.— 2.  Plerlcpie  mcolarum  ghnlio  trucidati"  sunt.  'Keliquorum  vitam 
ducis  lenitas'^  servavit.— 3.  Quis  vestrum  periculosfv  hujiis  e.\i)editir)nis 
particeps'  esse  vuh  V-4.  Nemo  nostrum  tantam  laudem  assequi  poierit — 
5.  Omnium  nostrum  tides  immulata  est.— G.  Du;e  re-is  tilia'  salutem  fu-'il 
IjetPbant;-"  sed  utraciue  earum  occlsa  est.— 7.  Sociorum  copia'  nihil  stii)en- 
du  acceperant.— 8.  \os  (minium  harum  virtntum  nihil  fere  (^/////</.n/)  exhibP- 
tis,-'  nihil  tcmperantia',"'-  nihil  auctoiitatis,  nihil  irravitatis."^— 1).  ISi  quid 
detrimcnti  rcspublica  cepisset,-'  consulcs  ab  unociuoque  accusarcntur.— 10. 
Quid  tequi  ac  justi  a  legatis  nostris  impetrari  potuit  V-  11  llic  juveiiis  nihil 
nniiuam  stulti,  nihil  insulsi,"  nihil  falsi  protulit.-'*'— 12.  Templum  illud  in- 
signls  ohm  tabulas  habuit ;  sed  prastantissimae  earum  vetustate"-'  periC- 
runt.— 13.  Constanlinoi)olis  urbs  duabus  partibus  contiurtur  {roitxist.s  of) 
quarum  alteram  Turci,'^^  alteram  Graci  inhabitant.— 14.  Nemo  nostrum' 
talem^i^gnominiam  unquam  subiit.— 15.  UtiKiue  vestrum  amici  nostri  cele- 
britas'"' jucundissima  erit.— IG.  Magistrfitus  alii  nostrorum  i^^ladiis  interfecti 
abi  a  suis  ipsorum  ci\  ibus  trucidati  sunt.— 17.  Milites  alfi  aliis  itineribus 
etlugGiunt.— 18.  Dua'  Ariovisti  tilii  altera  occlsa,  altera  capta  est  (captiU 
sunt).— 11).  Ga'sar  LabiPnum  jussit  summum  moiitem  duabus  le«'ionibus 
occupare.— 20.  His  operibus  elliciebatur,  ut  intiina  urbs,  si  necesse  esset. 
muniUTri""'  semper  jmsset. 

1.  Our  exi)lorcrs  {(Xplonltor)  have  not  found  any  gold.— 2.  These  mines" 
never  liave  yielded  {rtdderc)  any  silver.— 3.  We  never  saw  anv  of  them  bo- 
tore.— 4.  It  thou  wilt  tind  any  gold,  try  {experlri)  the  lowest*[partj  of  the 


1  U^  .^T.^  Pf^f^'iflCre.-a  Translate :  more  hmnHful.-^  Franco-GuIIiciis.— <  Sermo  — «  Per- 
l)e]l,j;  8  1  ran>latc-:  more jmfirnMt  (pni-stabilis).-^  Finitiimi^.— »*  (iiitrouft.  «M-avi^  — "Kg- 
giiu  -»"  Jo  liiul  over,  tra<luci-iv.->i  To  rut  ddwn,  cu'dere.-'--'  To  be  dttermvTtd,  coiitinuri. 
~  ^"  «  ^<^';-,  "'»'"?•-'*  io  ^i)en(i,  transigcre.— »5  To  bHng  forward.  protene.-i«'io  l)e 
ofany  nse.-i;  yrwmA,r^,  to  slay.->«  Humanity.-»»  A  partaker.-""  Wrt,  to  seek.- 
21  1  ()  show.— 2-  Moderation.— 23  Di-nity.— 24  To  suffer.— 2»  Absurd —2«  To  uttCr  — »7  lW//j,. 
tas,  old  at;e.  -=«  The  Turk..-^»  Celebrity .-3«  To  overflow.-»'  A  mine,  met^ullum 


I 


n,4;sl-y.  What  U>">-tiUn^  '!•  thf  w-  w  11  be'^  given  {mandare)  to  this 
(,.;>./.),  if  tlie  command  ;> ./  '^^.^^V  ^^^'^Uer  bJen  done  by  this  man  ^-^ 
manV-lO.  What  just  =^'1^\  ''^J^^^;'^^-,  //'rve  happened  to  thy  brothei-^-12. 
11.  S<mu'thing  more  ^''''X}^  ^''X^.Z^^^^  Nobody  could  tell  any- 

We  have  never  see'u  anything  "^  ^  ^^^^^^^^^^  n.outh  {os)  of  this  mam- 
thin-- new.— 14.  Nothmgtalse  evei  s^'^mc  .  ;^  y  yf  us.— lb.  I 
^"'N;:;hing  glad  il<.tMi>^  1-«  "^""^  ^  / h  s^c^er  iLnd  anythb^g 
did  not  hear  ^^^}frZ'Z^J'Z^^  of  Pontus,  perished  by  the 
similar.-18.  Mithndates,  the   ast  <>y^^^^  .-   ^^^  ^     Uves  endeavored  to 

trcacherv  of  his  son  l^^'^»'"^^'^^,,'  ,,,  ^ould  reach^  the  sliore.-20.  Some 
Iwim  ac-Voss*  the  river  but  none  ottln;m  ^^^^^^^^,  ,,,  ^ow  highly 

of  us  wish  to  peruse»  these  book.  -^.0  known  to  the  ancients  {retm).- 
(l  3i:{)  rtourishing,^  but  trw  o  tlu^n  ^^.r^^.*^"^;^^'v_23.  But  others  of  you, 
S.  Wbich  of  the  two  girls  ^^^^i^^^^^^f^^'^:^^^^^^  ^^^  The  rest 

^^•ho  have  fought  "^^>^S^»/^^|^tiV(   //  /  tl  e  hrst  battle-liiVe  will  have  repulsed 
of  you  will  wait  {.xsvecinn)  \\\\  ^^^'    .'' "'^J' ,imes  will  be  unpunished.^-26. 
r;>c7/.re)  the  enemy .-2o.  None  *>V>/>J,/ribv  hides  {pelU^\  others  by 

dnn\vas  to.nul,  ...any  >.t  J^'"!'"  X^,f  ^' o  "',  •n<^^  of  who.»  si-okc  tl.us 
3a  Tl...  ki,.,i:  aa...i..ea  ("""»*'■*,.">?:  ^^^  {dad,.),  the  one  (aUer)  o 
Lv)-34.  We  found  two  causes  "'"'"•„,"<, 'nei.f  the  barbarians  sought 
Sh  1  shall  ..ow  ^•^l"'"!'^ Jl'  ;:''ir,"^iuer o\ul  (*r).-30.  The  highest 
rth.irl  safely  by  so...e,  and  o  '  is  bj  <  |J.'^\  ^^.,.„  .^  our  troops  could  pro- 
rnirtlofthebill  wasoccupedbj  "'^  f*,"- '„,;•-, ,.,  jinperf)  already,  when 
ib  tVl.e„..-37.  Midnight  ai.p;-;^^'^^!'^p;X)  the  walll.  of  the 
(,„,»«  with  imhc.)  »--•;'*"'' .»;';,.     f  city  v^    occupied  by  the  Carthag.n.ans, 

-^XT.ti';a.'s;;brr^ 

[p'krt]  of  theni^'Ut. 


276  DR^ISION  AND   FORMATION   OF  SENTENCES. 

CHAPTER  FIFTH. 
DIYISIOX  AND  FOKMATIOX  OF  SENTEXCPJS. 

I.   GENERAL  THEORY. 
§377.    A  Sextexce   or  PjjoposiTiox,  in   its   grammaticai: 
acceptation,  is  a  word,  phrase,  or  combination  of  ]>lirases,  con^ 
taming  a  Predicate,  either  expressed  or  understood. 

no^  Tlni^'^if^'ll''"''''  "'^'^T  "^^"t^  ^^'  ''  ''^'"-'^  ^'^>»-^^  a«  •'  ^  '  ^"\  come !    Xon 
no.      lluis  the  lliree  worts  ot  C'tesar-  "  Ve/a'  ridi  r,W  n  r-  ...  .  i 

conquered),  contain  three  coordinate  sentences       '  ^    "'  '^''''  ^"^ 

§  378.  Sentences  are  divided  : 

1)  According  to  tlieir  coxnectiox  with  each  other.  In  tliis 
respect  they  are  either  rjiixciPAL  or  depexdext; 

2)  According  to  the  grammatical  form  of  the  Predicate.  In 
this  regard  sentences  are  either  fixite,  ixfixitive,  or  partici- 
pial sentences ; 

3)  According  to  tlie  connection  of  the  thought  with  the 
speaker,  in  regard  to  its  reality.  In  this  respect  sentences 
are  either  affirmative  or  xegative. 

4)  According  to  tlie  rehition  of  the  speaker  to  other  persoxs 
In  this  respect  sentences  are  divided  into  declarative,  impera^ 
TivE,  or  interrogative.  When  he  intends  other  persons  simplv 
to  hear  and  understand  his  words,  the  sentence  is  dedanitive  • 
when  he  intends  thorn  to  do  something,  the  sentence  is  impera- 
tive; and  wlien  he  intends  tliem  to  c/n.-^^i^e/- somethin<r,  the  sen- 
tence  is  iiiterroq((tive.  ^' 

11.    Coordixatiox  op  Sextences. 
^     \;    *    The  Coordination  of  Sentences  is  made,  like  that  of 
the  I'hiases  (§  112),  by  the  Copuhitive,  Adversative,  and  Dis- 


COORDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


277 


* 


iunetive  Conjunctions.     But  two  classes,  the  causal  and  con- 
clusive   (illative)    coordination,   are   peculiar  to   the   ^mtenee 

alone. 

H,..nr,lins  Coordination  in  seneral,  there  are  two  points  to  be  observed : 
1)  .  om-reet  use  of  the  diflerent  c..orai"ati"g  ~"J"°«V;?f '  ^>  ^^^  ^."^f  ^J 
p'„si,i.m  of  the  words  in  those  coordinate  «-  "^^^^j;'  ^  ,4^';'^'  ^^S  ais- 
more  words  or  phrases  common  to  both.  In  the  lauer  ^^^l^'^''^^^. ,  ^^  ioq> 
?^nun,i^rthe  coLvm  from  the  coOrduuitc  parts  of  the  sentence  (^  114,  §^  123). 
and  observe  the  following  rule : 

\vrnrme  the  common  parts  of  two  or  more  coordinate  sentences  so,  t^^ty^J 
eitter^:^orf2w  all  aijrdlnaie parU  of  eveky  one  ./  tU  coord^r^i^ 

"feT':  ro.mon  Procreate,  ^-erallv^,/..^  co.rnon  ^^^^^^^yj^^i^^^ 
the  coordinate  parts  of  the  sentence.     ,,^, /"^.J^  '"i'^j'^^iv™  of  makin-  co5rdi- 

£ta:X,(;:?farotS-S^J.«r,;r:Sedr;heiy'^vo„..^^  TUu.,  in  d,e  fol. 

lowing  seuleucc:     „  „^.  „.„„„^,  q^ju,  a„a  kill»  Sejns  by  treachery," 

we  would  tUuB  constitute  ihe  sentences :  ^  ..  _      ,        ^ 

He  wounds  Gains  by  treachery,  ^«^•"^/,';f  f  ^.'j;;/^^^^^- 
He  kills  Sejus  bv  treachery,  Stjta/i  perjidia  intetjicit. 

The  co.rainn.c  par,,  are  ••  Gajnm  ;;"|;;-.;.nd  ;;  f  J-J.|Jert^^»^^^^^ 
apply  here  ,lH.L.e„eraln*.son...bs,an 

^?ece';in\'lciir^ina.e  ^i^^.^'.'afd  liK.leE.re  ,ra„,.  ,e  the  ---;""- 

Pertidid  Gajum  rulnerat  et  Sejum  interflcit. 

oiilv  to  the  latter,  and  not  to  the  former. 

the  ^Z^^^l^^  ,„  ,„„„,e  the  city  and  reduce  it  by  hunger," 
will  be  thus  constituted:  . 

„"     he     .«    i„L  par,,  are:  ••cin.erc"  and  "iUmc  cogere."   By  ..nc.ly  pruceed.ng  ac- 
cordiiij;  to  S  l*i,  we  iranflale  the  sentence  thu» . 

and  ,his  c„rr,..pond,  to  -I';' ^J'i^.S^'jS/'^^prra^.ulX/'co.'iiS!^^^^ 

all  llie  <■"'■■"  ■i'a'^t"'";,'',t,,r;,i..ir&"   "fam/-  precede  ,he  coOidinales  we  would 

sSa"en,';-,,";-''»*-;Sri^^ 
r,?.;r";;,\-ar;i^?,v,;,f.i;;,K^i;';-id\iu^s^ 

it  necesbary  in  Latin. 

S  «JH©    Coi'ULATivE  CooBMNATioN.— We  usc  here  the  Copu- 
lativ^  Colijunctions  et,  ac,  atque,  que  (§  115),  the  same  as  m 


278 


«COORDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


I  Lrasos.     Tl.o  KMP„.vric  Copulative  Coonlination  is   made  by 
l>la<'n..  con,„,K.t„.ns  before  each  of  the  eo.nlinate  sentenees.   ^ 
1.    I  he  K„g  ,s h  l.<,th-a>nl  is  ex,,resse,l  by  et-c.    S,.  ,.  ,  ,o 
2     J  he  Knd.sh  not  onl^-1n,t  aUo  is  expresse-l  either  \.^ct~^ 

I  Inlosophers  shoul.l  ,.ot  only  teaei,,  but  also  practise  virtue 

mj^'/"-  ^-  '^''^'  •■""'"*•"'«  »n."lative  CoOnlmations  have  particular  mean- 

princes,  s,>,„Hin>,.snt^,,Hmr'rCT^^'^^^^      '"''^  son,,.|i,nes  hehl  by 
I'artly  by  bribery  '"  "'""'"^  ""  ""-'  '^"'^'-■"s  P-uHy  by  intlueuce, 

as  those  of  the  «ickd  can  .r    e  ,  s  nle  slnl      ?  V'''-'*'''"''', "'  ' "-'  ff"''«J  »»  «■«••» 
onlinaiion  Iron,  the  c.-n^.a,!  on  by'  ^-^«a,,  \Vh(U,  '''^""^''''"^''  "«i^  c*>- 

la'ioest  (oTHf)  vitid^a.  turn  ((nricin,e  r/mrnl.,   V.]l   ■  i  '   ^'^""^  omnium  rtnim  nm>,. 

public  atui  privat..  Ci;.;  Phu^.  V'^j-^'J^;;^'^^;;/  a  ...a,,  adornoti  by  .;!.,;f;;i„J^  [ 
ti.e.nHplve..  ar.d  f..  t^b-ai.,  tlu-  armistice  C-t  /  R  O  i  i-^  ''''r''^'^''''  J^'»"'  f'"*  Hc-arin-r 
H.  prose:  JAy,/,  ^^U'^n.^uAJln     ii^?^^^^^^  *'»  poerrv.  1>  ,t  ra  « 

^'7''^77r' ^ ' ''''" ''""^ "■'^•'- ' --^^ 'f-'e^i'.;;'' L;v%2''>;i'""- ^""- ''"- ^^-  ^« 

tin,   „nli,„ite.i    of  in.n.n.S  ^'J^Tt  ^VrT;,!^?^^^^^  ^^^^^    ""^  inemotv'a.;;! 
a  verb,  towliu-h  an  object  is  arjded    iFi^  it.  m.m      no  *  I'  ^***-'  d.-inonsiralive  refers  to 

mouth  (iuiuctili.  too.  Cic.  Att  5   12    ^  ''^^^^^^^  ^»  i«  u -reut  hardship  to  ^ail,  and   u  ihc 


COuRDINATION  OF  SENTENCES. 


279 


§  381.  Adversative  CoorwDixATiox. — The  same  conjunc- 
tions are  used  here  as  in  the  Adversative  Coordination  of  Phrases 
(§  121).     These  conjunctions  are  thus  emi^loyed : 

1  In  the  case  of  a  direct  opposition,  that  is,  Avlien  what  is  negatively 
expressed  in  the  tirst  j^roposition  or  phrase,  is  affirmatively  expressed  in 
the  second,  the  connection  is  made  hy  .sed  or  cerum,  as  :  He  does  not  dssiroy, 
6^// /V//jn//<^  ;^/^r,  Lei^a-m  non  toUit,  sed  (verum)  perticit.       ^ 

3'  In  a  RKSTRicTivE  COORDINATION  sed  oT  verum  Ukewise  are  used.  A 
coordination  is  caHed  rkstricTive,  \vhen  what  is  alhvnd  or  conceded  in  the 
lii-;t  i>roposition  or  phrase,  is  resfrirfed  or  limited  in  the  second.  This  coor- 
dination iiJis  a  similar  meaning  as  tlie  mbordinatl<jn,  made  by  '' althouglu 
The  tirst  (concessive)  sentence  often  takes  the  particle  quidem,  which  is 
placed  after  the  tirst  coordinate  word,  and  is  either  not  translated  at  all,  or 
by  "  imleed;'  as  :  Be.f  militnm  {quidein)  rirtfitem  coUauduvit,i*ed  durum  tems- 
ritdtem  gravitrr  reprehendit.  The  king  praised  indeed  the  bravery  of  the  sol- 
diers, but  seriously  censured  the  rashness  of  the  officers. 

3.  Sed  (rarely  vemm)  often  opens  a  new  period  to  indicate  the  close  of 
a  previous  discussion,  or  return  to  the  subject  proper  after  a  digression  : 

Std  rf^leoadannquo'^:  But  1  return  to  the  aucicnt^.  cic.  Tnsc.  1,  \1.-Sedj€mpu.<^fstja}n 
hlnc  ab'ive.  etc.  :  But  (i.  e.  1  dose  my  remarks,  lor)  it  is  ix.w  titne  to  depart  from  here.  C  c. 
Tii-c  1  A\  —Std  l(iXcalia(jiutstioext,ho.-<ud  proiKjniumrevtrtainur:  Bur  ihis.is  another 
UiiesVi(.n,  WK  must  return  to  our  Mil)jecr.  lb.  :i  5.-  Verum  (juidem  kite  hactenns  (an  elljp- 
tical  formula  =  •  we  must  stop  here  ';  literally  '  these  remarks  up  to  this  pomi  ).  lb.  a,  6^. 

4.  Vera  and  aittem  ate  used  to  pass  over  to  a  new  fact,  person,  or  thing, 
either  in  a  new  period,  or  continuing  the  period  which  contains  the  prior 
facts  etc  The  facts,  persons  etc.,'to  which  the  author  is  passing,  are 
expressed  either  by  clauses,  or  by  single  words  (especially  pronouns 
and  substantives,  bi'it  also  verbs  etc.).  If  vera  and  xutem  refer  to  a  clause, 
thev  are  placed  immediately  after  the  conjunction  opening  the  clause. 
If  they  refer  to  single  wends,  they  are  placed  immediately  after  these. 

Omnn  vero  manisfns  traditi  smnus,  vaHh  imb>nm>/r  erroHbus ;  But  when  we  are  handed 
ovX  r  io  teacliers  we  are  filled  with  various  erro-s.  Cic  Tu<c  3.  I .- Philssopjna  vcro.qmd 
est  a/imlni.si  donmn  dtorum  ?  lUit  what  else  is  phih.sophy  than  the -.li  ol  the  gods  '  Cic. 
Tu-c  I  -2»)  -Vtteri  thim/s  enuUn.'^  mc/lis  fuerunt.  liom'ih  autem  (tfa"  J<nn  mveteraHs 
lifferix  hnf:  Tr  e  others  lived  in  less  learned  periods,  but  RomulusV  a-e  was  when  cul- 
ture was  already  old.  Cic.  Rep.  2,  ]0.—Mihi  vtro  longe  vidltur  esse  secus ;  But  to  me  it 
seems  to  be  !ar"^dillereat.  Cic.  Tusc.  3.  25. 

5  At  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  new  periods,  and  its  principal  force  is, 
to  cornet  mixtakh.  Thus  it  denotes  oijjections,  raised  by  the  auflior  him- 
eelf  or  bv  somebodv  else ;  or  to  express  that  someboely's  expectation  was 
unfi)imded  or  was  batHed  by  the  agency  of  another.  Sometimes  it  is  used 
after  a  conditional  clause  with  concessive  force  {but  at  least),  as : 

A.  II,vcfacerenolo.  B.  At  rex  Ju^c  itafieri  vuIL  A.  Jh's  I  refuse  to  do  B  Biit  the 
kin-  will  have  it  don.'  so.-.4^  tanfa  militum  rirtuserat,  nt  nemo  de  vallo  decedent ;  Bnt 
so.rr,a  V  1  h-  bravery  of  the  soldiers,  that  nobody  left,  the  ranipa,-t^( An  attack  ha  l 
be.-n  m:rde  by  allfo.ces  <.f  ihe  eneinv.  bv  which  th.-y  ihou-ht  to  take  the  pi :.c. •).-«/«/- 
%^Zd!^>m,a<'  di»  cunctaiu.,  l)a>^ium  appelldbat  At  iUe...r^  {"."r.jf;;!  IIU'^A 
Blattu.s.  having  hesitated  much  and  long,  applied  to  B^lll''-  ^f  %}^lZn^S^ 
Blattiu--s  expecta-h.n)  disclosed  the  matt.r  to  Hanniba  .  L.v.  ^^::^^--^  ?-?/  ^'ulhl 
V  omnnm/atl  at  iet.Vis  s>ue ;  si  non  hominis,  at  hnnuudtafi^  ratwn.m  haberet ,  That  he 
{3.1  E  some  r^^^^^^^  if  not  for  his  relationship,  but  at  least  for  hi 8  age  ;  it  not  for  the 
man,  at  least  for  humanity. 


2S0 


COORDINATION   OF  SENTENCES. 


6.  Tamen  oorrosponds  to  tlio  En<rlish  ronjnnrtions  **  yet,"  "  still,"  "  how- 
ever;" ml  ((tmr/f,  aftdiiifii,  rfriiinfiintcn  to  the  En^liMh  'hut  still,  hut  yet,  hni 
Viough.  It  may,  like  aed,  be  preceded  by  quidem  in  the  first  of  the  coordi- 
nate sentences. 

Rent.  9.  Advei-sative  Proj^ositions  or  Phrases  often  are  connected  asi/n- 
dctiralhj  {%  1:20),  when  the  ()p]>()sition  apjn-ars  from  the  words  themselves. 
It  is  especially  used,  when  of  two  coordinate  irord)*  the  httter  is  ner/alim. 
In  this  case  it  would  be  l)ail  Latin,  to  use  an  adversative  conjunction,  as: 

UhjHsei^  (but)  not  Afjdmeninon  has  tnken  Troi/,  Ulixes,  non  AuanuMnnon, 
Trojam  cei)it. —  The  IScnate  icishcK  to  vdiiqiuAh,  but  not  to  opprem  these  JStat^s, 
Seuatus  has  civitates  vincere,  non  opprimere  vult. 

§  38^.  The  Disjunctive  Coordination  connects  two  or  more 
propositions  or  phrases  (called  alteiixatives),  only  one  of 
which  is  represented  as  a  reality^  withont  deciding  which,  ex- 
clnding  at  the  same  time  all  other  alternatives. 

Hem.  10.  A  Disjunctive  Coordination  contains  four  requisites:  1)  the 
coordinate  members  must  be  (liffcrent,  2)  only  one  of  them  must  be  repre- 
sented as  a  reality,  :5)  it  nnfst  l)e  left  undecided,  which  of  them  is  a  reality; 
4)  all  other  alternatives  must  be  excluded.  If  a  disjunctive  coordination 
contains  all  these  4  elements,  we  call  it  complete,  as :  Ego  hie  <utt  in  con- 
^pectu  vestro  moriar,  ant  perferam  legem,  1  shall  either  die  here  under  your 
eyes,  or  sliall  carry  the  law.  The  alternatives  are  "  1  shall  die"  and  "  I 
shall  carry  the  law.'"  Tiiey  are  1)  different.  2)  Only  one  of  them  is  repre- 
sented as  a  realijy;  3)  it  is  not  decided,  which  of  the'two  will  happen  ;  and 
4)  all  other  alternatives  are  excluded.  Hence  the  disjunction  is  a  com- 
plete one. 

But  when  one  or  the  other  of  the  specified  requisites  is  wantinir,  tlie 
disjunction  is  called  an  inipeoper  one.  Thus  in  the  followinii'  disjunction 
"  Tlie  old  Britons  nsed  either  hriLss  or  iron  rods  in  place  of  coin^  Bnldimi  ve- 
teres  ant  aere  aut  taleis  ferreis  pro  uummo  utebantur,"  Ijoth  alternatives, 
brass  and  iron  rods,  are  represented  as  real,  and  hence  the  second  and 
third  requisites  of  a  complete  disjunction  are  wanting.     See  Hem.  12. 

§  38JI.  The  DisjuxcTivE  Conjunctions  are  aut,  vel,  sice 
(sen)  and  the  enclitic  ve.  The  first  three  generally  are  placed 
before  each  of  the  alternati\  es,  while  ve  is  used  only  to  connect 
single  words,  and  only  then,  when  they  belong  to  the  less  im- 
portant members  of  the  sentence  (as  duobus  trlhusve  dlthuH^  in 
two  or  three  days).  ]^y  udt — aut  we  declare  either  the  decision 
between  the  preyjmsed^  or  the  exclusion  of  all  other  alternatives 
as  essential ;  hy  sice — sice  we  declare  either  the  one  or  the  other 
as  unessential.  Aut — aut  always  is  translated  by  either — or, 
sice — sice  is  translated  by  either — or,  or  by  whether — or ;  the 
latter  is  the  case,  if  the  proposed  alternatives,  introduced  by 


COORDINATION    OF   SENTENCES. 


281 


sice-sive  are  dependent  clanses,  and  therefore  have  a  predicate, 
different  from  that  of  tlie  principal  sentence.     See  Conditional 

Clauses  (Book  VI.)  ,  • 

The  disjunction  by  vel—vel  represents  the  alternatives  as  de- 
pending on  the  will  or  the  conception  of  the  speaker  or  of  the 
subject''  or  object  of  the  action,  and  in  such  case  it  takes  the 
place  of  either  aut— aut  or  slve—sive. 

liJxamples : 

1  Ant^-aut  Clamilrunt,  eum  sibi  camificem  novum  exortum  esse,  qui 
nut  mori^i  serv  ire  iubeat.  They  exclaimed,  that  he  had  armn  as  aneio 
r/,  rf  J'/^".  /.V>;.rr,  commanding  the  citizens  to  die  or  to  be  daves.  Liv.  2,  35. 
A  othcralternati  -es,  but  the  two  stated  ones  {mon  md  sermre)ave  ex- 
eluded,  ind  this  exclusion  is  represented  as  the  essential  point  of  the 

^%7nwnstrabant,  jvdieium  fen  oporfcre,  ut  ant  uterque  inter  ^f^^^^^^f^T 
sa^d  rt  Thev  showed,  that  the  decision  must  be  this,  that  either  bo  h  of 
them  i  (Uld  <nVe  securitv  to  each  other,  or  neither.  Cic.  pro  Qumct.  8.  Here 
e  iltematives  are:  ^^ mh  shrill  give  securiiy^^  or  ''  rmther  shall  give  secu- 
riW  "The  other  alternative,  that  only  one  of  them  should  give  security  is 
excluded  by  aut-aut,  and  this  is  repiesented  as  the  esse,aial  point  ot  the 

^''V'^lwre-sire     a)  Either— or.     Ita  sive  casu,  sive  consilio  deorum  immor- 
t-.l'ii,ni   mi-c  nai-s  civitfilis  Helvetiorum  insignem  calamitatem  populo  llo- 
;S  intuTe  pcrnas  persolvit;  21eus  either  by  accident  or  by 

/;//"// J  ;/>^  go^lsjat  part' of  the  state  of  the  Ilelvetmn^  which  had 
i  lMd  i  sgnal  disaster  on  the  iLnan  people,  paid  tli^  penalty  fi^f-J^^f^f 
Be  Gall  1  12  Here  it  is  represented  as  ynesseniial,  to  decide  bet^^  een 
the  iwo  alternatives  {accident  or  mil  of  the  gods),  one  ot  which  had  brought 
nnnishment  on  the  Helvetians.  ^  . 

i  ir""(/</-^r  l>ie«nt,  facilcm  esse  rem,  scu  nianeant  sou  proficis- 
onnlv  s  mX'.mum  on.nes  senfmnt,  TA.y  mid.  that  the.  thmg  waxcwy, 
VhXr  theult  L'i,  or  departed,  if  bat  all  uovld  have  the  same  opinwn.  Caesar 
B  G  5  31  Horc'bv  facilem  esirrem  the  safety  of  the  army  is  meant,  and 
"e  cieoHi on  between  the  t«o  alternatives  (whether  they  wonld  stay  or  de- 
pmt)  is  represented  as  unessential,  since  in  either  case  the  army  would  be 

'"'3' r.^^'is^'Mibi  qnidom  conc?dunt  omnes,  ut  vel  ea  defendam  q«» 

P,fn„.Ciurvelit.  vol  ta  can.,  vel  etiam  ad  nostra  me  studio  referam  litterS- 

n  7  '<'»■  iak,,l  they  all  maenle,  eitlu-r  to  de.fe.ul  the  e.ium  of  Pomitey  (ea 

■e  Vom    -it  s  velit),  oUo  keep  dknt,  or  to  retire  to  our  literary  oecupatmis. 

Cic  Fan       8     Hero  the  decisi.m  among  the  three  a  ternatnes  ,s  not  de- 

cl  UTd  tmessential,  and  hence  «>.-«.<■  cannot  be  used.     But  the  exclus.on 

ot'  all  other  alternatives  is  declared  en^ential,  since  the  author  nn plies,  that 

n     these  and  no  other  alternatives  were  allowed  to  l.im     J,ever  he  less 

"    •>,    w,  r  but  rel-ul  is  used,  since  the  decision  among  the  stated  alter- 

Salives  (f'^lowing  the  cause  of  Pompey,  keeping  silent,  or  occupying  liim- 

Bcir  with  literature)  depended  on  the  speaker. 

(Helvctii)  AUobrogibus  sesc  vel  persuasuros  cxistimabant,  vel  vi  coaciu- 


282 


COoriDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


ros,  lit  per  suos  fines  eos  ire  paterentur,  The  ThiretmnH  believed,  that  they 
tcould  either  perauade  the  AllobrofjiiUiH,  to  let  them  pass  throuf/h  th/'ir  territori/, 
or  to  eotnpel  them  by  force  (to  do  it).  Tlie  altcrntitives  are  "  induct'iiu'iit  by 
persuasion"  or  "  indueement  by  force."  Tlie  decision  between  tbcsc  is  de- 
clared as  anesxeniialm  reiz:ard'to  llie  passin;:?  of  llie  territory.  This  would 
recpiire  .sire — .sire.  But  since  the  decision  depended  i)artly  on  the  Helve- 
tians, partly  on  the  Allobrogians,  eel — eel  were  the  proper  conjunctions  for 
this  case. 

Jiein.  11.  Often  alternatives,  containins:  substantially  the  same  proposi- 
tions, may  be  expressed  by  any  of  the  three  conjunctions,  accordiui!;  to  the 
conception  of  thesi)eaker.  Thus  C;esar  says  (R  G.  4,  7):  Gennd/ii  jwMn- 
lant,  ut  {Romdni)  vel  xibi  arjroH  affribftant,  vel  patinutur  eon  tenere,  quos 
armis  jmssederint.  The  Germans  ask,  that  the  Romans  ndglit  assiirn  lands 
to  them,  or  allow  them  to  keep  those  they  had  con(|uered.  And  Livy  says 
(2,  oO)  Ldfl/H  petrbont  d  soioto,  ut  aut  niitteretit  Kubsiditnti,  aut  se  ipaos  arnui 
ciipere  dnerent ;  The  Latins  asked  the  Senate,  either  to  send  them  help,  or 
to  allow  them  to  take  up  arms  themselves. 

In  both  ])laces  the  alternatives  are  substantially  the  same,  and  api)ar<^ntly 
htive  exactly  the  same  relation.  In  both  instances  it  Avas  the  object  of  the 
petitioners,  to  exclude  all  other  alternatives  but  the  ones  proposed;  the  de- 
cision in  both  places  depended  on  the  will  of  the  Romans.  But  the  con- 
nection shows,  that  in  the  place  of  Livy  the  Latins  represented  the  alterna- 
tives as  an  imperatire  necessity,  while,  in  the  place  of  Cicsar,  the  Germans 
apjH'al  to  i\ii\fdir/tess  of  the  Romans.  Therefore  Livy  employed  aut — aut^ 
and  Caisar  vel— vel. 

Rem.  12.  The  Disjunctive  Coordination  often  has  the  meaninir  of  a  Co]ni- 
lutive  Coordination,  and  the  conjuncticms  either — or  are  then  e(iuivalent  to 
partly — partly,  not  only — but  aUo,  Imth — and.  Tliese  belonir  to  the  Improper 
Coordinations  (Rem.  10),  as:  Omnes  reliqudrum  cohortium  cenfurionex  aut 
rul/ierdti  aut  ore'id  eruiit ;  All  the  centuri(ms  of  the  other  cohorts  were  ei- 
ther (partly)  wounded,  or  (|)artly)  killed.  Csesar  B.  G.  2,  25.  Here  the  second 
recjuisite  of  a  Disjunctive  Coordination,  that  only  one  of  the  Alternatives 
must  be  a  reality,  evidently  is  wantinir,  since  both  alternatives  took  place, 
but  partly  the  (me,  ])artly  ihe  other.  But  since  every  other  alternative  (ex- 
cept that  of  beiuLT  killed  or  wounded)  is  excluded,  and  this  is  represented 
as  the  essential  point,  Ca'sar  took  here  the  conjunctions  aut — aut. 

lanta  est  exxpectatio  vel  animi  vel  ingerdi  tui,  nt  ego  te  obnecrdre  non  dubi- 
tem,  aic  ad  nos  revertdre,  etc.,  So  great  is  the  hope  in  (either)  thy  courage 
(or)  and  thy  mind  (or  both,  thy  courage  aud  thy  mind),  that  I  do  not  hesitate 
to  implore  thee,  etc.  Cie.  Fam.  2,  1.  This  is  evidently  a  Copulatire  Coor- 
dination, but  Cicero  represents  it  disjunctively,  because  some  had  hope  in 
the  courage,  and  others  in  the  mind  of  Cicero,  and  he  uses  vel — vel,  be- 
cause these  alternatives  depended  on  the  individual  opinions  of  the  Ro- 
mans. Disjunctions  of  this  kind  can  only  be  expressed  by  aut — aut  or 
vel — eel,  not  by  dee — dee. 

Rem.  13.  When  Sentences  with  Disjunctions  begin  with  negative  words 
{nemo,  nihil,  nunquam,  non,  etc.,  see  -iii  408,  409),  or  when  the  Alternatives 
virtually  have  a  negative  meaning  so  that  they  may  be  expressed  by  neither 
—  nor,  the  disjunctions  are  either  introduced  by  the  negative  conjunctions 
neque — mque  (see  '^  409, 8),  or  by  aut — aut^  sometimes  by  vel — vel,  but  never 
in  good  prose  by  sice — dee  ;  as : 


COORDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


283 


'^"ii ';n,oIm.n  m,-,1  cau-a  quicquam  aut  i^cnsit  avt  fecit.  If  he  ererMlmrMt  or  did  any 

S..nale  .«  much  irri,.f  n.i.l  ■n..i..mnL'  '';'/";,  V'\»;,°;-f'*/rr/rand      .iimcX. 

tlii-se  «intciiiw  the  .ISO  of  iW-re/ »oi,lcl  he  imprupcr.  ,h,.  .„>„.,h„ 

liem  14    When  .W-. .  Are  have  pn^licale,  of  ,heir  ow,,.  he..,?;  rendered  b      v.y.X^ej 
,,"•    h.-v  n"  irt  b.-  ,-.n,.i,l,Me,l  as  cnditiona..  conji:sction>    =,  L*': 'lii-,  Ir?™  i,  rV- 
ii,,"  7:17  On-.  5.    Their  predicate  i.  in  the  .vD,«T,v.n.Ues^.l^^^^^^^^^^ 

5i;S.rs;^';;;^:^;vi)^fThr;i;;:;w;rc.^a'x.;i!e;ii>;,-»;iirrr;ard  or  ,L,en  ,„ur 

^'t»8l  The  Disjunctive  Conjunctions  are  more  rarely  used 
sirtMy  in 'Latin,  than  in  English,  so  that  in  translating  from 
En-lish  into  Latin,  it  must  be  considered  as  the  ride,  to  trans- 
late the  single  "  o/'  hy  the  doidde  Latin  conjunction. 

n       ir    c;.^  (*^u\  '^n(\  vel  mostlv  occur  with  potius,  in  order  to  modify 
Rem.  15.  -^*''^.^^^'^;'  .  ^"'V^\^  Tumillam  in^rediblem  celentdtem  mi  pottus 

'ort^     iVibebsu'tiupUs^Kwithout  „.^/«»)  denotes  different  expres- 

''"tT,/."^!,'.' 'le'"rf'  Js'uso  used  ^vi.h  a  restrictive  fierce,  accmp.nied  with  a 
lViu,,l  rl-.nsoto    «(fa(»0  as:  WM  maqiwjH;-e  or,-,hdnt,nt  »bi  aaidaim 

{'l ,  -l,  ,ns  •  sk e'l  m-'entlv,  tl.at  he  miirht  bring  thein  help,  or  at  to.^^  f 
l!^shm;l;^he  hhui;.,ed  frotn  doing  this,  to  transport  only  the  army  over  the 
Rhine.  Cnes.  B.  G.  4,  1«. 


"m:  sit^'le  eonin.K-lion  adf  mostlv  is  ttsed  in  questions,  beginning  wilU 

a,?i!:;e^::;^lti;{:V«^-adv.bw,^ 

^•Uh'sin'.'i..    J         n  o  t     t  .nembers  of  the'  senUn.e.    as:  (?.««  P«V««™ 
r'r„r"««(  onae  ^tM,nd,„,orai<.rf  .Of  -I'^l/'f 'il.h/t'.,^'',;^!;- 


Quid  primum 
"ain,  or 


f 


284 


COORDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


INFINITIVE  CLAUSES. 


285 


eur^m  aUqvem  qui  consvlunfur  concurmsesr  If  thou  'Y^\ ^7^1 1'Z  Uw 
woi.kl.t  thou  u(  t  iuuuc'dhitclv  h:ive  run  to  Aquihus,  or  (else  to  some  aw- 
yerv  Cie.  Quiuct.  IG,  53.  nont^  ant  circa  urban  nntWi  ca  hu:,ne  prod,gia 
%Uf  At  li>u.e  or  about  the  city  uiany  i>rodiiries  happeuecl  tliat  wuiten 
liv  h  (VI  Tltuviux  xcro  ftcffwo,^  clamiUVmt,  cum  ninjorcH  manux  ho,,tiutn 
T^^cniUcnU  nut  cum.  aliquld  caJmniUltiH  in  pro.vlmi.  hibernlx  emt  ^f^i^ /;;;*» 
T  turui^  exchiimed,  that  they  would  be  too  late,  when  a  .irreater  force  ot  the 
enemy  should  appear,  or  (,H>Vhaps)  in  the  next  winter-cpiarters  some  disaster 
hXlian    r^^^  ^PP^'^'^  c^'nx^'I'^^U  '//'"  ^^"^  altera  a rrepto 

^'^/';rXl:'  »  was  of  opini(m,  that  wlien  one  or  Uie  other  >vas 
arrested,  the  others  would  be  quiet.   Liv.  2,  ~3,  1.). 

§  385.  The  Conclusive  (illutive)  Conjunctions  are  ergo 
(therefore,  consequently,  hence),  igltur  (therefore),  and  itaque 
(tlierefore).  The  conjunction  Ighnr  represents  tlie  predicate 
as  a  mitural  consequence  of  the  previous  proposition.  Itifque 
is  limited  to  actual  facts,  which  are  represented  as  a  conse- 
quence of  those  facts  mentioned  in  the  previous  sentences.  By 
ergo  an  inference  or  logical  conclusion  is  made. 

ExxMrLKS:-X(m  solum  hostls,  sed  ipsos  civis  suos  timf^bant.  Multa 
tV/^T^/'r  blandimenta  per  id  tempus  plebi  ab  Senatu  data,  1  hey  were  not  only 
X-<dd!U<'  eru,,ni:i>ut  <^  their  o,rn  fcWnr-citizen.  Theretore  n^any  acdUu^s 
uerc  xlunrn  through  t/n\s  time  by  the  ."^nate  to  tl^  Pkbetaus.  ,,       ,  . 

Nemo  liber  Phocionem  ausus  est  sepellre.     7^;7"^  a  servis  sepu  tus  est ; 
M>  free  per.on  dared  to  bury  Phnrion  ;  theretore  he  was  buried  by  places. 
Homo  es  er-'-o  errare  potes,  Thou  art  a  man,  hence  canst  thou  err. 
Bem   IG  ' Iq?tur  takes  often  the  phice  of  either  ergo  or  itaque;  but  the 
reverse  is  not  the  case  in  -ood  prose.     Erf/o  and  itaque  generally  oi>en  the 
'en  ence ;  but  iqitur  irene?allv  is  preceded  by  one  word  ot  the  proposition  ; . 
Sometimes  even  by  tWo.     When  the  sentence,  without  mdnr  xvould  be.i^in 
w  ii-epc^^^  either  the  third  or  the  tirst  place    .,6 

Imus  %itlr,  or  iqitir  .^  hoMu.).    Thus  the  Latin  generally  says  Quid 
est  igitur,  quis  est  iyitur,  nemo  est  igitur. 

Rem.  17.  When  the  English  word  therefore  is  an  adcerb,  it  must  be  trans- 
lated by  iccirco  or  idea.     See  P.  II,  p.  281,  7. 

§  386.  The  Causal  Connection  of  sentences  is  either  suhor- 
dinating  or  coijrdlnatbig.  The  subordinating  causal  conjunc- 
tions are  quia,  quoniam,  quod,  qunm  (see  Book  ^  I.) ;  the  coor- 
dinatuig  c^mvi\  conjunctions  are  mtm,  enim,  namque  and  etenun, 
all  coiTcspondiiKT  to  the  English  conjunction  for. 

Of  these  nam,  namque,  and  etnnm  stand  at  the  bepnnin-  of  the  sen- 
tem'e  while  eum  (the  most  usual  of  them)  occupies  the  second,  and  the 
hid  pbice  in  the  same  instances  as  i<jitur  {^quid  e.t  enim,  luhd  est  enim,  etc.) 
a^^  K  a  r^^  habDmus,  sed  os  unum ;  plus  enim  (./' nam  plus,  namque 
plus  eJenim  plus)  audlre  debPmus  quam  loqui,  We  Mve  tico  ears,  but  one 
mouth;  for  we  must  more  h^ar,  than  apeak. 


riENEr.Ai.  Remauk. — Not  only  principal  or  simple  sentences',  but  al«o  drp<^nden(  clauses 
mtiy  be  oiiiiectcd  by  any  of  the  diUer.-nt  methods  of  coordination,  or  coon lin ate  clauj^es 
niav  be  deixjudeiit  on  the  t»aine  principal  t»eiitenc*!  by  the  same  nubordinating  conjunc- 
tions. In  the  fornu'r  case  wliich  is  calh-d  Cookdination  of  Clauses,  each  of  the  de- 
pendent clauses  retains  its  own  coOrdinatini;  conjunction,  as  :  Postea,  ?W  quod  tanta  res 
erat,  t'el  quod  nonduni  aiidierannis,  Bil)u]uin  in  Syriani  venisse,  vel  quia  adminisiratio 
Jnijiik  belli  inihi  emu  liibnlo  i)a'ne  est  commilnis.  scribenda  h*c  ad  vos  putavi.  Afterwards 
1  ihouqhl.  that  1  ouffht  to  /rritt  this  to  you.  eitlier  IjecavM  tlte  matter  ivas  no  imjKtrta/it.  or 
because  we  had  not  yet  heard,  that  Jiihidus  ha<t  come  to  Syria,  ov  because  the  adininistror 
tioii  of  this  war  is  almost  wmiaoit  to  mt  with  Bibaliis. 

In  tlie  latter  case,  which  is  called  Subordinatiox  op  Cooudixate  Sentences,  the 
pubordinatiiii,' conjunction  stands  u\i\y  once  before  ail  the  coordinate  propositions  in  Latin, 
wldh'  in  P]!J:rlish  it  imuj  be  repeated  or  <Ainn\  after  the  coordinates,  as: 

Obs(;errivit  eos,  ut  aiit  secuni  jure  contendefent.  aot  injnriani  sine  ignominiil  impone- 
rent;  lie  a<ljwred  thtia,  that  they  either  should  go  to  law  with  him.  or  do  him  wrong 
without  disfffoce. 

Here  we  /nay  say  in  EiiL'lish.  but  not  in  Latin  :  either  that  they  should  go — ,  or  that  they 
might  do.  etc..  wiiile  it  wtuild  be  barbarous  Latin  to  say:  Obsecravit  eos,  aut  ut  —  cordeti- 
detent,  aut  lU  injuriain  —  iinponerent. 

In  order  to  translate  Eii;,'lisii  coordinates,  dependent  on  a  principal  sentence,  into  Latin, 
the  coordinates  should  first  be  constituted  separately,  repeating  the  si«I)t)rdinating  cou- 
junction  before  eacl»  of  the  coordinates;  and  in  combining  tliem,  the  subordinating  con- 
{un<'ln)na  are  dropped,  and  placed  only  once  immediately  before  the  first  coordinating 
conjunction. 

For  «pecial  riileu  on  the  subordination  of  coOrdiuates,  see  Book  VI,  p.  4T4  foil. 

III.    Infinitive  Sentences. 

§  387.  The  Latin  Infinitive  is  either  a  Subject-,  or  an 
OiuECT-,  or  a  Predicate-Infinitive  (g  72).  Sentences  which 
liave  a  Predicate-Infinitive,  are  called  Infinitive  Sentences. 
They  are  either  independent  sentences  or  clauses  (Infinitive- 
clauses).  A  predicate-intinitive  of  the  Present  in  hidependent 
Bentences  often  is  used  instead  of  the  Imperfect  (not  IVnfect) 
Indicative  in  liistorical  style,  and  therefore  is  called  Historical 

Infinitive. 

The  Ilistoricnl  Infinitive,  which  very  rarely  occurs  in  clauses,  is  chiefly 
used  instead  of  imperfects  ot  repeated\acti()n,  especially  when  several  pre- 
dicates of  repeated  action  are  coordinated  with  each  other  (For  more 
particuhir  rules  see  P.  II,  §  575,  p.  811  foil);  as  :  Jii,i2:urtha  ubi  primum 
adolevit,  non  se  luxu  neqne  inertite  corrumpendum  dedit,  sed,  ut  mos  gen- 
tis  iillus  est,  cquitdre,  jac\ddri,  cursu  cum  {e(iualil)us  certdre,  et,  cum  omnia 
gioriil  antelret,  omnibus  tamen  earns  es,'<e ;  ad  hoc  pleraque  tempora  in  ve- 
nando  agtre,  ler.nem  atciue  alias  feras  primus  aut  in  \n'\m\^  ferlre  ;  phirimum 
facere,  I'ninimum  ipse  de  se  loqui.  As  soon  as  Jugurtha  was  grown,  ?ve  did 
not  give  himself  to  the  ruining  influences  of  lu.ru ry  or  indolence,  but,  as  it  is 
the  custom  of  that  nati<ni,  rode,  threw  darts,  vied  with  his  companions  in  run- 
ning and,  though  he  .surpassed  all,  nevertheless  was  dear  to  all.  Besides  this^ 
lie  spent  most  of  his  time  in  hunting,  he  killed  the  lion  and  other  wild  beasts  first 
or  among  tlie.  first;  lie  did  a  great  deal,  but  spoke  very  little  of  himself . 

§  388.  Infinitive  clauses  are  chiefly  employed  to  translate 
EiiL-lish  clauses  introduced  by  the  conjunction  that,  and  some- 
times also  to  translate  English  Object-Inflnitives.     The  subject 


ssn 


INFINrnVE   CLAUSES. 


of  Infmitive-clanses  always  stan<ls  in  tlie  accusative  an<l  tlio 
prt.licate  in  the  i,,pritice.  Every  word  of  the  sentence,  which 
must  aoree  with  the  Sul,ject,  as  predicative  adjectives  or 
nouns  (if  niovabU.),  and  the  Participles  of  the  compound  tenses 
of  passive  and  dei>oiient  verbs,  must  be  placed  in  the  AausA- 
TivK,  and  agree  with  suc-h  subjects  also  in  gender  and  number. 
Subjects  of  this  kind  are  called  Subject-Accusatives,  m  opposi- 
tioii  to  the  OiuECT- Accusatives,  and  the  whole  construction  is 
termed  :  Construction  of  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive. 

Fyvmi-les— Enicnrns  elicit,  hominum  animos  unil  cum  corporibus  inter- 
ire  >^^-.n  ..'.v/.^  that  the  .souls  of  mm  perMi  tof/rther  ^nth  the  bodies      Here 
the'  81^  i  ect  acS^si  live  a.mos  and  the  Pn.fuanMnrtnitive  int^nr.  tonn  to- 
g^l^r  rVl^nicATiVH  riiKASE     Cicero  ait,  ^-^-^---^l^^:^^ 
t<^r   Ciccw  sous  that  thi   sonls  of  men  are  imutortal     Here  the  1  uuicaic 

•i-reeiiv  witli  the;  Subject-accusative  in  case  aiul  >  nuibei.— M.ucun  >     urn 
;^.vnrsuam  tegiutaid  esse,  Marcus  .rites,  that  ^-^^^^^^^ll^^J'^^t 
Predicative  (movable)  Adjective  ar/rnfa>u  agrees  ^vlth  tlie  Subject- Aetata 
live  uworem,  in  case,  ueuder,  and  number. 

/v,»  1R  PRFDicvrE-lNFiNiTiVES  luav  be  active  as  well  as  passive  as: 
G.^";xtti^  d  "ml^^iu^am  a  S<^o  nmle  dc^endi,  Gf^s  ^^^ -; '^;  ^j^- 
^n  Lll,  defeM  by  ^j^'-     Here  the  imHlicatwe  ,.  n.ise       s  a  ius>^^c 

ZTHdremrt.  that  the  enemies  hair  hn  n  <U  fated  bi,  our  tn>ops.     Heie  the 
^  ;     p^Ct  In  the  passive  predicate  phrase  hostls  rictose^  must  agree 
Ivith  ll\e  subject-accusative  hostts  in  case,  gender,  and  number. 
nem.  10.  The  ho^inner  must  <^-^fy  ^^^^^^^S^^^^^^^l^^ 

otluT.     All  four  may  occur  m    he  Kinu-  ,^^''   ,^  '^;  ;,;^'\\V ^^^^^^^"^^^^  CotiM.tiitin-  the 

derstaud  Hrntence.^  of  this  kind  ^vuhout  n  ak  lu:  tht>^^^  f„, 

^hv^W  phrasos  and  analyzintr  them  "y^",  I      -•    '   .^^..Yi/Z.U    /se nttMU-e,  nvc  wu-uld  proroed 

undrr>uuulin-  st-ntence.  of  thiH  kind.     1  h  >  \^V/'^,V'";  '  "'-jk 're  xve  have  Uirce  Accu^a- 

in  thi.  way:   Vo,ustat,  umunrjn  so>nn  '^*,    ^.  /'//  ^ m.  Su  ."i^-ct  i  ^nniti^e  in  the  seuu-nce, 

tivc-i*  and  tw.)  Inttnitives.      Iranlin-  tluit  th  -n  ';;';•  f  "']:?;,."•  ^.-/.i/i..^  «nd  the  oth»T  a 

of  the  two  infinitives  infxen  and  posse  one  uw.sf     e  '^    /^^  J  'i^.-overnin-  an  Uhject- 

PreUicat.-}.nnitire      But  we_k|u>w,  ;\»«»  ^^Shiec    i  Sd^^^  v  '^^  "ecord- 

infinilive  i§  SO),     llenet^  mf'on  m»st  be  "'Vf>*'  ^»^^'    '  V^  ^y,.  j,„„„.  ,heref..re  that 

ing  to  §  VJ  the  Object-inhnitive  precedes  I'^^^^^'-'T.'",, ,„),,,<,      n„w  we  have  two 

^L  mist  be  a  Predicate,  an.   that  us  ^"'^J^/ '      ^Vtfur  I;  ^/^.^^^^^^  »>•'«  -f  ^vldch 

bi.uns  which  possibly  may  be  the  subjects  \\\{^-;''^^^^^^^  Supposin-  now, 

must  therefore  f>e  a  S^ihjecUuxufsa/ire.  am\     h     'h   r  mO^c  ,    ^  predieative  phrase  would 

that  we  should  take  the  accusative  a,  am  to  be  the  ^"T^  ;;';,;:;!^;.    i,,tin  infueri  we 

be  a./>an  j>osse,  f/>e  f^eareu  ;'(''V  .^^1  j"  ^X  A     i</       H       th^^  would  nntke  no 

would  come  to  the  translation     ^^'^''';  '  ^*^     •  f;,7^^^^^^^^  ,he  Subject-uiflnitive  [homt- 

Beuse.  and  it  follows  that  not  m^l,on.  but  '''<^"    '^t  .^ea^v   to  reco^^  uie  at  once  o^ltw.  as 

nem  i„t,ieri  i^sse.  that  man  ^-^'^  »^^''''^3    ;  ,,^,  '^  ,'/,•  L),  S,;/    We  translate  therefore :  //  is 

the  object  of  intio-ri  and  -o/'/m  as  J^^;,' "l'»^^^"  \   y^^!' .  .'^  ,,;  ,ve  would  arrive,  by  simply 

kno>r,..  that  imm  alone  '•'V\^'"'''^^''"''';'^-  ./uu    -ubtecl    if  we  follow  the  general   rule=*  rf 

from  the  rcasonsi  indicated  pajje  «U. 


INFINITIVE   CLAUSES. 


287 


§  380.  Tite  Personal  Pronouns^  wliich  as  Xominative-sub- 
jects  generally  are  omitted  in  Latin,  must  generally  be  expressed 
as  Acciisatlve-suhjects,  as:  Gajus  says,  that  I  hold  this  opinion, 
Gtfjtfs  diclf,  me  haiic  opinidnem  habere.  The  pronoun  of  the 
tliird  person,  whether  Sul)ject-accusative,  or  Object,  in  Infinitive- 
clauses  always  is  siii^  sibi,  se  (jiot  eum,  etc.),  if  it  has  the  (logi- 
cal) subject  of  the  j)rincipal  verb  as  antecedent. 

Gajus  belteres,  that  he  {Gajus)  is  loved  by  /Sejus,  Gajus  credit,  se  a  Sejo 
amari. — Attic  us  thinks,  th((t  this  has  U'en  useful  to  hiui^  Atticus  existimat, 
hoc  sihl  (noX  ei)  utile  t\iisse. —  llw  auibassadors  announced,  that  thi\s  business 
Jiad  been  (uconiplished  by  then/,  Legati  nuntiavOnint,  hoc  negotium  a  se  per- 
tectum  esse. — Gajus  thinks,  that  Sijus  is  encious  of  him,  Gajus  putat,  Sejum 
sui  invidum  esse. 

Jiem.  20.  The  Possessives  of  the  3d  person  (his,  her,  its,  their)  in  Infini- 
tive-clauses must  be  translated  by  suus  (not  by  ejus  or  edruni),  when  they 
have  the  Subject  of  tlie  Principal  sentence  as  antecedent,  as:  Gajus  is  of 
opinion,  that  his  httrst  is  the  quickest  of  all,  Gajus  existimat,  equuiu  suum 
(not  ejus)  omnium  celerrimum  esse. 

liem.  21.  The  pronouns  is,  ea,  id  are  used  in  Infinitive-clauses,  if  they 
neither  refer  to  the  Subject  of  the  Principal  sentence  as  Antecedent,  nor  to 
a  notm  in  the  Infinitive-clause,  wiiich  according  to  i;  238  would  require  the 
use  of  sui,  sibi,  se,  as  :  The  Se([uaniaiis,  after  tiiey  had  received  Ariovistus, 
saw  that  he  (Ariovistus)  had  their  towns  in  his  power,  Sequani,  postquam 
Arioristuni  recejwrant,  intellexerunt,  eum  {not  se)  oppida  sua  {rwt  eorum)  in, 
sua  {not  (jus)  jwtestate  habere. 

Here  we  must  use  earn,  becaupc  the  antecedent  i?  neither  the  subject  of  the  principal 
sentence,  nor  does  it  stand  in  the  intinitive-elause.  We  say  ojjpida  sua,  because  the  an- 
tecedent (StijiHUii)  is  the  suiyect  of  the  principal  sentence.  We  say  in  sua  pofextate,  be- 
cause tiie  antecedent  of  siut  (Ariovistus)  has  become  by  the  word  eum  the  subjeet  of  the 
Jnjiiiitire-rlaiise.  It  ii«  true  that  the  two  words  una  will  now  liave  different  antecedents, 
which  initrht  make  the  sense  ainbi<ruous.  But  when  the  sense  in  itself  is  clear,  the  Latin 
usa;;e  authorizes  such  apparent  amhiu'uities.  However,  in  instances  of  this  kind  we  may 
employ  the  form-adjective  ij>se  instead  oi sni.  >dOi,  se.  and  ipslus  (ipsc/rum\  instead  oi' Kt/i/s. 
So  it  wou.d  navf  l)een  correct  in  the  precedinLr  example  to  have  said  vithor  ips&ru/n  oppida 
instead  of  npjrida  sua.  or  in  ips'ius  jiol estate  instead  of  in  ixtteMdte  sua. 

Let  us  now  express  the  mentioned  sentence  in  a  sii-^htly  different  way.  as:  The  Sequa- 
nianf».  after  they  had  received  Ariovistus,  saw.  that  /A^tr  towns  were  in  his  power,  Se- 
guani.  pf><fqiiain  Arioristum  fecejMiranf.  infe/Iexen/nf.  opjnda  sua  (not  eorutn)  in  ejus  {not 
sua)  jxjfestate  esse.  Here  opinda  sua  must  remain  the  same  as  in  the  former  sentence, 
since  liie  Secjnanians  are  in  both  sentences  the  sul^ject  of  the  principal  sentence.  But 
the  wordsi  ^' in  his  jx/uer,''  which  in  the  former  sentence  were  translated  hy  in  potestdte 
sua,  must  now  be  expressed  by  in  ejus pote state,  siuce  the  antecedent  of  his  (Arioviftus) 
no  more  stands  in  the  infinitive-clause. 

Since  tlie  Latin  lan^Miai^e  ha-»  tliree  words  to  express  our  personal  pronoun  {is,  ipse,  and 
fui).  and  since  t(»  these  three  words  may  be  added  the  disjunct  demonstratives  hie  and 
ilk.  wiiich  likewise  may  be  used  with  the  force  of  a  personal  pronoun  (§  3«)4,  R  H'i).  it 
frequently  happens,  that  it  is  utterly  impossible  to  render  Latin  sentences  literally  into 
Enj^lish.  so  as  to  makt;  the  sense  clear.  Thus  in  the  f*)llowing  sentence  of  Ciesar  (B.  G. 
1.  .in.  Ariori-ifu.t  resiiondU :  Si  quid  ipsi  a  defare  opus  esset.  se.<e  ad  eum  venturuin  fuisse  ^ 
si  i/uid  ille  se  relit,  ilium  ad  se  renlre  ojxjriere.  In  tliis  sentence  the  words  ipse.  Hie.  and  se 
all  have  the  force  of  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  and  the  place  literally  would  be  thus 
translated:  Anoriistu^  answered:  If  to  him  tuujthing  was  necessary  {if  he  wanted  any- 
thing) from  Viisar.  he  uould  hare  come  to  him  ;  if  he  wished  anything  of  him.  h£  ought  to 
come  li)  him.  The  meaninij;  of  the  co/irdinate  {if  he  wished,  etc.).  is  here  entirely  obscure 
in  the  English  version,  and  we  ouj:ht  to  transla'te :  but  Ctesar  ought  to  come  to  him  (em- 
phatically;, if  he  witihed  anything  of  him. 


28S 


INFINITIVE   CLAUSES. 


§  tlOO.  Tlie  Predicate-Infinitive  in  infinitive-clauses  stands 
either  in  the  Present  or  in  the  Perfect  (of  either  voice).  Whether 
we  use  the  one  or  the  other,  depends  on  the  rehition  which  tlio 
predicate  of  the  Infinitive-chiuse  has  to  that  of  the  Principal 
sentence.  When  the  time  of  the  Predicate-infinitive  is  con- 
ceived as  happening  before  that  of  tlie  principal  predicate,  we 
use  the  Pkkfect-Lnfinitive  ;  else  the  Pkesent-ixfixitive  must 
be  used,  even  if  in  English  a  i)ast  tense  is  employed,  which  in 
this  language  always  is  the  case  when  the  ju-incipal  predicate  is 
in  a  past  tense.  This  tense  in  English  is  the  Pluperfect,  when 
the  action  of  the  clause  is  prior  to  the  action  of  the  principal 
predicate  in  a  2:>ast  tense. 

Examples  -.—Gojuk  beUered,  thit  the  enemies  hid  been  defeated,  Gajus  pu- 
tfivit  hostis  dctoHfsm  (the  dcfcatinir  precedes  tlie  helievini:: ;  hence  pcrfrct- 
infutitic(').—G(ijiix  mw,  that  hix  brother  ican  ^/Z/.«t'/<^  Gajus  vitlit,  tVatreiii  siuuii 
alWiiteni  cssui  (the  ahsence  happened  at  tlie  mme  time,  as  it  ^yas  seen; 
hence  Present-Inthiitive)— ^  hear,  that  Gaju.s  has  been  sick,  xVudio  Gajuni 
{VTotuni  fume  (the  sickness  has  existed  before  it  was  heard  tVoni :  hence 
Perl'ect-Intinitive)  — /  "'^^■/',  ^^'"^  (tajxx  irould  arrire,  Cupio,  (iajum  advenlrc 
(the  anivini,^  cannot  precede  the  wishin^i-:,  hut  nuist  follow  it;  hence  Pres- 
^,^^X)—lIi'  (jace  dinctio/i.%  that  the  field  should  be  pl(juf//ied,  Jussit,  agruni  arilri 
(the  plou.i;iiing  does  not  precede,  but  follows  the  direction;  hence  Present- 
Intinitive). 

Jiem.  22.  For  the  use  of  the  infinitives  of  the  Periphrastic  Conjugations, 
see  P.  il,  p.  134  foil. ;  p.  G:JO  foil. 

§  391.  When  a  Finite  Clause  is  dependent  on  an  Infinitive 
Clause,  the  predicate  of  the  former  generally  stands  in  the 
Subjunctive,  subject  to  the  law  of  consecution.  The  tense  of 
the  Sulrjunctive  however  generally  is  not  determined  by  the 
Predicate-infinitive,  but  by  the  Principal  Predicate  of  the  whole 
Ben  fence. 

The  Germans  said,  that  they  intended  to  keep  the  Uinds  which  they  had  taken 
hu  arms,  Germani  dixerunt,  se  agros,  quos  armis  ce.pissi-nt,  tenCre  yeUe. 
Here  the  relative  clause  "which  they  had  taken"  is  dependent  on  an  nifin- 
itive  clause,  and  conse(iuentlv  must  he  placed  m  the  Subjunctive,  llie 
Tense  of  tliis  subjunctive  is  iiot  determined  by  the  govermnij:  intinitive 
irelle),y^\\\i'\i  wouUl  require  a  Perfect  subjunctive,  but  ])y  the  Princii)al  1  re- 
dicate  of  the  whole  sentence  {di.rerunt),  which  reciuires  a  /  luperject. 

Cicfro  irrote  that  he  <rax  daily  ej'pectinr/ letiers,  because  he  iras  rerymuc/i 
troubled  by  the  health  of  hix  duufjhter,  Cicero  scripsit,  se  litteras  quotidie  ex- 
Bpectare  quia  tilise  valetudine  \i'\wmin\Xi}A- arujeretur.  Here  the  predicate 
of  the  clause  angeretur  is  in  the  subjunctive,  because  it  is  dependent  on  an 


INFINmYE   CLAUSES. 


289 


Infinitive-clause,  and  in  the  Imperfect,  because  its  tense  is  determined  by 
tJie  Principal  Predicate  scripsit  of  the  whole  sentence. 

Jie7n.  2'A.  AVhen  Comparative  Periods  are  introduced  by  "  that,"  and 
must  be  exiiressed  by  a  Latin  infinitive-clause,  the  Nominative-subject  not 
only  of  the  lirst  but  also  of  the  second  member  generally  is  made  an  Accu- 
sative, and  the  common  predicate  ahcays  stands  in  the  Intinitive.  This  is 
also  the  rule,  when  the  predicates  are  different.  But  sometimes  the  second 
member  is  treated  like  a  dependent  clause,  and  then  its  predicate  must 
have  a  Finite  Form,  and  be  placed  in  the  Subjunctive.  For  these  excep- 
tions see  Book  VI.  (comparative  clauses). 

I  assert,  that  Philip  was  greater  than  Alexander,  Ajo  Philipjmm  majo- 
remfuisse  qnam  Alexandrum  (or  majOrem  fuisse  Alexandra.  See  §  310).— 
It  is  more  just,  that  a  guilty  person  should  be  acquitted,  than\hat  an 
innocent  one  should  be  condemned,  Justius  est  mcentem  absolvi,  quam 
innoc£ n tern  da m ndri. 

Rem.  24.  Infinitive  Clauses  are  connected  by  coordination  by  means  of 
the  same  conjunctions,  and  according  to  the  same  rules,  as  Independent 
Propositions.  The  conjunction  "  thar  in  the  En<,dish  clauses  is  here  some- 
times i-epeated,  sometimes  not.  It  generally  is  repugnant  to  the  English 
idiom,  to  make  a  causal  coordination  dependent  on  the  conjunction  ''  that," 
while  in  Latin  causal  coordinates  are  freciuently  placed  in  the  construction 
of  the  accusative  with  the  intinitive.  Conclusive  Coordinations  in  Eng- 
lish generally  assume  a  double  coordination,  a  copulative  and  conclusiv*e 
conjunction  {and  therefore).  In  Latin  the  copulative  conjunction  must 
be  omitted. 

Gajus  dicit,  hunc  prmentem,  ilium  {vero)  ahsentem  fuisse,  Gajus  says, 
that  th{^  latter  had  been  present,  but  tluit  the  former  had  been  absent.— 
Gajus  dixit,  se  utrumque  contemnere;  nihil  enimfoidius  esse  quam  ejumnodi 
inimicilias,  Gajus  said,  that  he  despised  ])otli ;  for  {that)  nothing  was  more 
abominable  than  such  an  enmity.  [Here  the  conjunction  "  that''  ought  to 
be  omilted  in  English;  but  the  propositi(m,  introduced  by  for,  can  nei^r 
be  made  a  tinite  clause  or  sentence  in  Latin,  when  it  is  coordinate  to  an 
intinitive-clause].  Gajus  narrdvit,  muros  fortiter  a  nostHs  defensos  esse; 
1u)st'is  Ujitur  se  recepisse,  Gajus  reported,  that  the  walls  had  been  bravely 
defeiuled  by  our  troops,  and  that  therefore  the  enemies  had  retreated. 
(We  cannot  say  in  Latin  '' et  hostis  igitur;"  but  must  omit  the  copulative 
conjunction.) 

§  Xl9ii,  The  Principal  Predicate  very  frequently  is  placed 
after  the  Infinitive  clause  in  Latin,  and  especially,  when  the  lat- 
ter is  short,  as:  Gajus  se  heri  advenisse  dicit,  Gajus  says,  that 
he  arri\ed  yesterday. — Dux  castra  moveri  jussit.  The  general 
gave  orders,  that  the  camp  should  be  moved. 

Rem.  25.  Every  one  of  the  infinitive-clauses,  given  as  examples,  might 
assume  an  arrangement  according  to  this  rule.  The  bednner  ought" to 
make  use  of  this  form,  whenever  the  infinitive-clause  has  no  dependent 
clauses,  especially  when  the  principal  sentence  consists  only  of  a  predica- 
tive i»hrase. 

§  :I9JJ.  The  English  conjunction  *'  thcif  is  translated  either 


290 


INFINITB'E   CIAUSES. 


INFINITIVE   CLAUSES. 


291 


by  conjunc.tion.  {nt  or  quod\  or  it  is  expressed  by  the  iorm 
of  an  L.finitive  Cla.se,  Sometimes  the  conjunetions  ./,..,  .., 
quin  are'  eniph>ye(l   (for  these  latter  cases  see  book  \  1.)      iho 

o-eneral  principle  is  this  : 

"  1  IvKiNiiivE  CLAUSES  are  «se.l,  when  tl.e  Tl,at-clauso  is  rep- 
rosonled  as  dedaratice  (§  378,  4).  the  principal  predicate  de- 
notin.'  tl.e  conception  or  utterance  of  tlie  Tliat-clause. 

o  Ut  is  used  when  the  Tl>at-..dause  is  conceived  as  impera- 
tive (S  378,  4),  or  when  it  is  dependent  on  a  verb  of  ejfc'tm;,, 
or  when  it  icscvihcs  purpose  (in  order  that),  intensity,  or  man- 
ner ( ita  nt  =  so  that ;  tantus  ut,  so  great  that). 

3.    Quod  is  nsed  1)  when  the  princii-ul  predicate  is  a  verb  ot 
emotion,  oUMerance  of  an  emotion,  of  acru-^in;,,  praisin;,  cen- 
suring etc. ;  2)  when  llie  That-clanse  denotes  a/act,  and  tlie 
principal  predicate  is  «ot  a  verb  of  co.iception  or  utterance. 

I.       OK    n,.nrr.  tlw  followin"  vcrbs  arc  constnicd  with  an  Inlniitivc 

(ilC£ 


r;!i^,trffi;;:i^'  i^£ur:«t  ^'S;:^yZ:t^^  tu.  inu  Jtive,  dependent  „u 

juisf'e,  is  a  Paasire. 


pclliiic:,  forcing,  permitting,  Tvishing,  attending  and  taking  care,  striving, 
decreeing,  as :  Pnciiri,  petere  (to  ask),  qu(vrere  (to  ask),  rogdre  (to  ask),  pos- 
tuUire,  hortdri^  rnonere,,  impellere,  permovere^  incitdre,  adducere  (to  induce,  to 
promjit),  iinperdre  {not  jube re),  pra>cipere,  propscnhere^manddre  (to  charge 
somebody  with  an  order),  Huadere^  perxucuUre,  cogere,  concedcre,  permittere,, 
optdre  (not  cupere),  curdre,  cavere,  coih'^uUre  (to  take  care  for  something), 
Tidi're  (wlien  it  means  to  aftsnd,  to  look,  that  something  should  be  done), 
operam  dare  (to  take  care  or  pains),  niti  (to  strive),  condudere,  deceniere, 
fstiifuere. 

Rem.  28.  The  verbs,  that  are  construed  with  quod  are :  verbs  of  praising, 
censuring,  accusing,  thanking,  congratulating,  and  the  verbs  denoting  eino- 
tiofift,  as  joy,  pain,  sorrow,  indignation,  wonder  and  admiration,  boasting, 
sutTering,  as:  Lauddre,  extoUere,  vKuperdre,  reprehendere,  objnrgdre,  accnmre, 
coiidemndre,  gratlas  agere  (to  thank),  gratam  facere  (to  oblige),  gratiddri, 
gaftdere,  Icetdn,  gloridri,  d/dere,  angi,  ijidigndri,  queri,  mirdri,  admirdri,  cpgre 
or  molcRte  ferre  (to  be  vexed  by  something).  Almost  all  these  verbs,  except 
grtftids  agere,  and  gr<itum  facere,  admit  Infinitive  clauses  instead  o^  quod, 
Avilhout  any  ditfcrenee  between  the  two  constructions,  all  the  verbs  men- 
tioned above  bch)nging  either  to  the  verba  se?itundi  or  to  the  Te7-ba  decla- 
raiaU,  as:  Gaudio  ^mpronium  «e  ab  illlns  Jiominis  soriefdte  sejunxiHse  (or 
qmtd  Seuiproriins  se  i<ejuuxit),  I  rejoice  that  S.  has  withdrawn  fron^  the 
comjiany  of  that  man. — Doleo  te  injirmd  Tcthtudine  nli  (or  quod  infirmd 
taletudine  vteru  duleo);  I  am  sorry  that  your  health  is  bad. 

J{em.  29.  Not  all  the  veibs,  mentioned  in  the  preceding  remarks  can  be 
construed  with  a  That-clause  in  English;  but  it  is  important  for  the  begin- 
ner, to  conmke  all  these  verbs  so,  oa  if  they  w^ere  construed  in  English  with 
the  conjunction  "  that."  Thus  verbs  of  praising,  censuring,  accusing,  and 
others,  are  construed  with  for  and  a  verbal  noun  in  ing,  as:  '' I praUe  thee, 
for  being  diligent:'  But  the  Latin  does  not  think  so,  but  conceives  the 
clause  thus :  "  I  praise  thee,  that  thou  art  diligent:'  Many  of  the  mentioned 
verbs  are  construed  with  an  object-infinitive  in  English,  while  the  Latin  must 
either  use  ut  or  an  infinitive  clause.  Thus  we  say  in  English:  ''  Lhope  to 
oime f'  but  the  Latin  cannot  say:  Venire  i<pero,\i\\\  must  say:  L hope,  that 
I  eon  come,  Spero,  me  venire  posse;  or:  Si)ero  me  venturum  esse  (with  the 
verbal  adjective  in  urua).     See  P.  II,  p.  134;  p.  G81. 

Rem.  8n.  A  Tluit-cl.-uise  afier  nnn  duhiiare  (not  to  donbt)  is  introduced  by  qvin  with 
the  suhjiiiiftivc,  as:  Son  dnhito  quin  jam  RointE  ."U.  I  do  not  doubt  tli.'it  you  are  already 
ar  Rom»'.  — For  the  coiistrucrion  «»t  verbs  of  fearinir.  see  j).  :i()->,  .5(1.  For  the  use  of  iie'^tT 
iir  ?ton  in  neL'aiive  Thar-eh>nses.  pee  p.  ;^)1,  4.  For  the  use  of  quomiuus,  aud  for  particu- 
lar rules  on  Thut-clHUses  see  P.  II,  p.  602;  p.  588  ft)il. 

IV.    Participial  Sentences. 
§  :{9  I.  English  Dependent  Sentences  of  almost  all  kinds  are 
frequently  changed  into  a  Latin  Participial  gonstruction,  by 
wliich  the  English  Predicate  becomes  a  Latin  Participle,  agree- 
ing like  an  attribute  with  some  noun,  contained  in  the  principal 

sentence,  as: 

When  Curivs  iras  ftitting  at  his  fireplace,  the  Samnites  brought  him  a  large 
qnanlitii  of  gold.  Curio,  ad  focum  f^edenti,  Samnites  magnum  auri  pondus 
attulGrimt  (UtcraUy :  To  Curius,  sitting  at  his  fireplace,  the  Samnites 
brought,  etc.) 


292 


PARTICiriAL   CLAUSES. 


Such  attributive  participles   in  connection  with  the  words  de- 
pendent  on   thcni,   wlien    they   must   be   resolved   into  English 

clauses^  are  called:  Paktictimal  clauses. 

nem  31  When  and  how  P^nijlish  cliuisos  may  Ix-  chanired  into  Participial  dances,  will 
be  -ho\vn"r.ook  VI.  Tlu-  irranimaticiil  form,  in  which  these  clauses  appear,  is  thai  ot  a 
common  at  tributive  phras^e;  except  in  the  ca^e  of  tlie  Absolute  Ablatives,     bee  ^  *>o. 

§  395.  The  Absolute  AiiLATivEs  form  a  Predicative  Phrase, 
consisting  of  a  Substantive  (noun,  pronoun,  absolute  or  disjunct 
adjective)  in  the  Ablative,  as  Subject,  and  a  Participle  agreeing 
with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case  as  Fredicate.  Clauses  in 
which  the  absolute  ablatives  form  the  predicative  phrase  are 
called  Absolute  PAiniciriAL  clauses,  while  those  participial 
clauses  in  which  the  particii)le  agrees  like  a  common  attribute 
with  a  substantive  of  the  principal  sentence,  are  called:  Atiri- 

BUTIVE  PaKTICIPIAL  CLAUSES.* 

nrm.  a2.  Every  adverbial  clause  {>'.  e  a  clan>:e  introduced  by  an  adver- 
bial conjunction,' as  '  vviiiie,  after,  because,  aliiioniib,  if,  see  P.  TI,  p.  4S8) 
may  be  "expressed  in  tbe  form  of  ablatives  absolute  if  the  subject  ot  the 
clause  is  ditferent  from  that  ot  the  i)rincipal  sentence.  P.  II,  p.  179. 

§  390.  The  form  of  the  Absolute  Participial  Clause  is  chiefly 
used,  when  a  clause,  introduced  by  one  of  the  temporal  conjunc- 
tions after,  when,  or  ichile,  has  a  subject,  different  froiu  that  of 
its  principal  sentence.  But  in  order  to  employ  this  construction 
it  is  necessary,  1)  that  clauses,  whose  time  precedes  that  of  the 
principal  predicate,  should  have  w  Passive  Predicate;  2)  that 
clauses,  whose  time  coincides  with  that  of  the  principal  ]»redi- 
cate,  should  liave  an  Active  Predicate.  Hence  clauses,  intro- 
duced by  ''after,'''  which  always  presupposes  a  diflerence  in  the 
time  of  the  two  predicates,  can  only  assume  this  form,  when 
they  have  a  Passive  predicate  ;  while  clauses,  introduce<l  by 
''w/iile,''  which  always  presu})poses  coincidence  of  time,  neces- 
sarily require  an  Active  predicate  for  the  use  of  the  absolute 

ablatives. 

In  both  instances  the  Subject  of  the  clause  is  placed  in  the 
AUative  Case.     When  the  Pre<licate  is  a  Passive,  it  is  placed  in 

1  It  is  often  discretionary  in  Latin,  to  employ  Conjunctions  or  Rklatives  with  a  finite 
clause  or  a  Pauticipial  clause.  This  will  be  illustrated  by  specuil  rules  in  B«>olv  \  I. 
In  the  followinir  exercises  it  is  always  svgrjested,  when  En^jlibh  conjunctions  must  be 
rendered  by  Latin  Participial  Clauaea. 


PAPtTICIPIAL   CLAUSES. 


293 


the  Perfect  j)articiple,  when  an  Active,  it  is  ])laced  in  the  Present 
participle  ;  in  either  instance  it  must  stand  in  the  Ablative^ 
aoreeinix  with  the  Subject-al)lative  in  oi;ender,  number,  and  case. 
The  conjunctions  after,  ichile,  or  ichen  are  not  translated. 

Examples  : — After  the  enemies  had  been  defeated,  hostihiiii  victia. — After 
the  queen  had  been  killed,  regtiia  inUrfccta.- — After  this  had  been  obtained, 
hic  re  iiiipetrdtd. — After  the  consul  had  been  slain,  consule  tniciddto. — When 
u  council  had  been  called  toirether,  Caesar  accused  the  centiu'ions  seriously, 
CiPK'U',  ronrilto  courordfo,  centuridneH  ffrariter  incnsdrit. — When  the  arrival 
of  Ca?sar  had  beconie  known,  Ariovistus  sent  ambassadors  to  him,  Ccesaris 
adirntn  cofinito,  yiriori^itf/s  legdtoH  ad  euni  mint.  In  the  last  sentence  the 
predicate  1)  is  a  passive  (to  become  known,  cof/?iof<ci),  2)  its  time  precedes 
that  of  the  principal  sentence  (sent),  8)  the  subject  of  the  principal  sentence 
is  dijfrrrnt  from  that  of  the  clause.  We  therefore  employ  absolute  ablatives 
with  a  per  fret  particii)le  {coguito). 

While  the  army  approached,  exercitu  appropinquante. — While  the  ene- 
mies ^v{\,  /tostihtLs  ftfr/icntihuft. — While  money  is  wanting,  pecunid  dejiciente. 
— While  Tarquinius  Superbus  reiirned  Pythairoras  came  to  Italy,  Tarquinio 
{>H])er})<>  r(fin(iiitf  Pytharpmis  in  Itnlinm  venit. — When  nothing  hinders,  I 
shall  come  to-morrow  to  see  Wwc,  Nnlld  re  inipedieiite,cr(u  te  vmim  venlam. 
In  the  last  exami)le  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  an  actite ;  the  times  of 
the  principal  and  dei)endent  pi'edicate  are  the  same;  the  Subjects  of  the 
clause  and  the  iirincijxil  sentence  are  different.  We  employ  therelbre  the 
Absolute  Ablatives  with  a  PreKent  Particii)le. 

Rem.  Z'\.  If  any  of  the  requirements  for  tiiis  construction  is  wantinir.  ablatives  abso- 
lute cannot  be  used.  ThiJ<  the  sentence  '  Afier  Diony-iiis  had  been  expelled  from  Syra- 
cuse, he  r.iiiLrlit  school  at  Coriiitd',  cannot  b"  rendered"  D'onynn  SijrdcmU  expidm\  i>nt 
bv  an  attrii)inive  partici|)ial  cou^iriicriou  :  Dloni/ni'i^.  S;/ruru>iis  exind.<tnft.  VoHidhi  jixie- 
ros  docHtdt.  Cic.  Tnsc.  3.  Vl.  -'  I  hi-ard  (the  !<  ctuie-  of)  the  irreatcst  men  after  I  had  come 
as  (jua'stor  t^)  .\thens\  can  neitlier  be  rendered  by  ablatives  absolute,  nor  by  an  attribu- 
tive |)ariicipial  cliii-^e.  bnt  requires  a  Unite  temporal  clause:  Audlvi  sumtnos  homines 
quum  (/'icedor  ve/ii^.sem  AthPnas.  Cic.  Or.  1, 11. 

Hem.  84.  A  clause  with  a  predicate  in  a  perfect  active  cannot  take  the 
form  of  ablatives  absolute,  unless  the  verb  is  a  deponent.  But  only  a 
few  perfect  Deponent  participles  are  used  in  this  constructioti,  especially 
mori  and  the  comjiounds  of  gredi  [ingredi,  etc.),  as:  Servio  lullio mortuo. 
After  Servius  Tidb'us  had  died. 

Rem.  8.").  Coordinate  subject  ablatives  liave  their  predicate-ablatives 
in  the  plural  or  siiiirular,  as  in  a  finite  sentence  (i^  127). 

Rem.  8(1.  When  ju-esent  participles  are  employed  in  this  construction, 
their  ablative  sin<^ular  always  takes  the  ending  e,  never  i. 

%  JI07.  When  the  Predicate  of  a  Clause  consists  of  a  Copula 
with  a  Predicative  Adjective  or  Noun,  the  clause  can  only  then 
be  chan(::ed  into  an  Absolute  Participial  construction,  when  the 
times  of  both  the  clause  and  the  principal  sentence  are  the  same, 
and  hence  never  when  the  clause  is  introduced  by  "  after.'''  The 
Copula  is  then  altogether  omitted,  and  the  Predicative  Adjec- 
tive or  Xoun  is  placed  in  the  Ablative  with  the  force  of  a  Parti- 


294 


PARTICIPUL   CLAUSES. 


ciple.     For  the  use  of  ablatives  absolute  when  verbs  other  than 
esse  have  the  office  of  the  copula,  see  P.  II,  p.  76. 

Exampt.es:— Cicerone  consnle,  irliile  Cicero  iras  connnl — Bruto  (ot) 
CoUailiio  consnlibiis  (irciicrally  written  Coxs.  by  abbreviation),  during  the 
conffulsliipof  Brut  as  and  Collaiuit/H.—Svrl'nn  quoque  ccpIo  alicjuando  tonat, 
erefi  while  the  sky  is  clear,  it  sometimes  thunders.— AXgx^xuXvo  irSto,  rrhile 
Alej-andor  was  angry. 

Rem.  37.  Not  only  Nouns  but  also  Pronouns,  and  Absolute  or  Disjunct 
Adjectives,  may  be  the  subjects  of  Absolute  Ablatives,  as:  me  Uherdto,  after 
I  ll:\(l  been  released;  te  pra'scnte.VihWv  tliou  wast  i)resent ;  eo  intirfecto, 
after  he  had  been  killed;  mnltlH  repugnantibax^  while  many  objected. 

li£ni.  38.  The  Latin  often  expresses  by  absolute  ablatives,  what  we  ex- 
press by  verbal  or  other  abstract  nouns.    Here  beloui?  the  following  idioms : 

IJrhe  condita,  after  the  buildinir  of  the  city  (of  Rome) ;  Gajo  mljutvre,  with 
the  help  of  Gajus;  me  depreratdre,  by  my  mediation;  nafurd  dure,  by  the 
guidanee  of  nature  ;  Casare  dace,  under  the  command  of  Caesar;  me  puero, 
in  my  boyhood  (when  I  was  a  bov) ;  me  invito,  against  my  will ;  CiFmre 
invito,  against  Ccesar's  will;  te  nuctOre,  by  thy  authority,  by  thy  influence, 
by  thy  instigation  ;  me  iiescio,  without  my  knowledge ;  me  teste,  by  my  tes- 

h\'m.3d.  The  arrangement  of  the  absolute  participial  clauses  follows  the 
general  rules  of  the  arrangement  of  the  phrases  and  words.  As  for  the 
place  which  the  absolute  participial  clauses  occupy  in  the  principal  sen- 
tence, they  generallv  are  placed  in  the  same  way  as  the  corresponding 
English  clauses.  They  mav  begin  the  sentence,  or  be  inserted  after  the 
sub]ect  or  other  members  (if  the  sentence.  But  they  generally  do  not  fol- 
low the  whole  sentence,  unless  they  contain  several  ol)jective  or  attributive 
l)hrases  besides  the  absolute  ablatives,  as:  Germani—qiiam  nui.rim<is  manvs 
])ossunt  cogunt  et  de  impror'iso  ad  Ciceronis  hiberna  adrolant,  nondum  ad  eum 
fanid  de  Titurii  morte  pcrlutd.  The  Germans— raise  as  many  troops  as  pos- 
sible, and  on  a  sudden  hasten  to  Cicero's  winter-quarters,  the  rumor  of 
Tituriiis'  denth  having  not  yet  been  brought  to  him  (been  heard  by  hun). 
Ctes.  B.  G.  5,  ;ji). 

Particijual  clauses,  as  it  is  apparent  from  the  last  example,  may  contam, 
T)esides  their  predicative  i)hrases,  objective  and  attributive  phrases.  The 
form  of  these  phrases  is  not  affected  by  the  Participial  construction,  and 
they  are  arranged  according  to  the  general  rules. 

V.    Affirmative  and  Negative  Sentences. 

§  398.  If  the  speaker  represents  the  Predicate  as  real,  we 
call  the  sentence  affiumative  ;  if  he  denies  the  realitf/  of  the 
predicate,  the  sentence  is  called  negative. 

Few  40  We  must  liore.  as  in  maiiv  other  point?,  distinjruish  between  the  lofrical  and 
irraiumatical  form  of  ihc  sentence,  tlure  arc  between  a  pure  affirmation  and  a  pnre 
lie.'ation  nianv  interme<liate  doL'rees.  those  of  j)ost-ibiIity.  pn.lmbiluy.  and  doubt. 
Lo'^Mcallv  we  would  not  call  such  sentences  ajfirmafue.  but  <;ranunatically  we  call  all  sen- 
ten'ceH  (ifffn/uitire  which  contain  no  netrative  words.  On  the  otiier  hand  many  sentences 
would  be  hx'icallv  called  afflrmatire.  althou-h  thev  contain  nejrativo  words,  as  lor  instance 
the  copulatfve  coordination  by  "not  only-but  aU^or  a"d  ne-aiivc  queatious,  as:  Have 
I  not  done  this  ?" 


AIFIRMATIVE   AND   NEGATIVE   SENTENCES. 


29o 


§  400.  A  pure  Affinnation  is  not  expressed  by  any  special 
words ;  but  the  Xegatlon  is  rendered  by  Negative  Particles 
(/^o//,  hand,  ne)  or  by  other  negative  words  {?iemOj  viunquam^ 
etc.)  The  different  degrees  between  affirmation  and  negation 
are  expressed  by  limiting  particles  {fere,  fortasse,  vix,  etc.) 
Both,  negation  and  affirmation,  are  increased  in  force:  1)  by 
thii  form  of  the  sentence;  2)  by  interjections;  3)  by  emphatic 
])articles. 

Ref7i.  41.  By  giving  to  a  sentence  the  form  of  an  exclamation  (exclama- 
tory seiitcnee),  >ve  increase  either  its  aliirmalive  or  negative  force.  Such 
exclamations  generally  are  made  in  the  form  of  an  interrogative  sentence, 
introduced  by  interrogative  adjectives  or  adverbs  (as:  How  great  is  the 
goodness  of  God!  instead  of  an  emphatic  aflirmation  of  the  sentence:  The 
goodness  of  God  is  great).  Sentences  of  this  kind  strictly  follow  the  rules 
of  interrogative  sentences.     (See  ^5  422  and  5^  428,  Rem.  73.) 

Re7fi.  42.  Interjections  belong  to  the  class  of  Particles.  Particles  are 
those  parts  of  speech  by  which  the  conception  of  the  speaker  in  regard  to 
the  reality  of  the  i)redicate  (and  the  difterent  degrees  of  this  reality)  is  ex- 
jMisscd.  Iiittrjrrtions  are  exclamatorv  particles,  which  increase  the  force 
of  an  atlirmation  or  negation,  or  denote  the  ditferent  emotions  of  the  mind. 
The  ancients  used  many  interjections,  and  oaths,  without  considering  them 
as  improper.  Most  of  them  caimot  be  translated  into  English,  since  corre- 
sponding words  are  either  wanting  in  the  language,  or  profane.  The  most 
Usual  of  them  are:  heu,  heas,  ehcu,  alas!  en,ecce\o\  behold!  liercle,  ine- 
hercle  or  hercule  (by  Ilercides) ;  medius  jidius,  by  the  son  of  Jove  (instead 
of  me  Jovis  Jilius)',  mecastor,  by  Castor;  edepol,  by  Pollux.  Here  belong 
also  the  phrases  ''per  deos"  (by  the  gods),  ''per  deumjidem,^'  etc. 

§401.  Particles  either  refer  to  the  whole  sentence  or  to 
single  members  of  the  sentence.  The  former  is  the  case  when 
tlic  reality  of  the  Predicate  as  such  is  either  affirmed,  denied,  or 
limited.  The  latter  is  the  case,  when*the  action,  expressed  by 
the  predicate,  is  restricted  to  single  membei*s  of  the  sentence. 
Then  the  particle  is  said  to  be  emphatic,  and  the  word  to  which 

it  refers  is  called  the  emphatic  word. 

1)  Eqtiivalejits  oi'"indeed-\'  Na,profecto,  rero,  sane,  certe,qiiidem,  omjilno, 
prorsus ;  2)  equivalents  of  ^' at  least:"  Cei'te,  saltem,modo ;  3)  equivalents 
of  "  also  .•"  etia/n,  quoque,  et ;  4)  e(iuivalents  of  "  even  .•"  vel,  etiam,  et,  quoque ; 
5)  etpiivalents  of"  especially :'''  imprhnis,  pnfcipue.  m/ixime,  potissimvm,  jyrcB- 
sertim;  0)  potius,  rather;  7)  equivalents  of  "only:"  tatitum,  modo.^  tantumr 
modo^  solum,  demum,  dumtaxat ;  S)  fortas.se  (Jorsitan),  perhai)s;  9)  equiva- 
lents of  "  almost :"  fere  (j'erirte),  pane,  prope,  circiter ;  10)  fix,  scarcely,  hard- 
ly ;  11)  equivalents  of"  not :"  non,  haud,  lie. 

'i'he  \yAr\'ic\i'^  nempe,  nimirvrn,  scilicet,  videlicet  are  idiomatically  used  in 
certain  connections,  either  in  an  ironical  sense,  or  = 'evidently', '  namely*. 
For  tandem  as  particle,  see  p.  310,  R.  71,  and  P.  H,  p.  224,  Obs.  5. 


2'.)G  AFl'IKMAXnT.   AND   LIMITING  PARTICLES. 

These  Partides  Generally  are  placed  inimecV.atcly  after  the  ompbntic 

U,cm,i  praadruM  c„n>U!  \  •'''^y'';;''';p,  ,'":„,,«,,  ,,.„/,/,•  ommm  is  trans- 

«.„>♦.  All  these  .ttny  he  m,<  e.  m1  ;'^,';  ;":",„  „,,  ,'.„„„„.„  U„se  of 
to  our  "  ofconrae,  to  he  surt,     ancl  \vt  Ap\nni  uy  »1  corn'snoiu  s 

1?..  ;"«  ul..^  or  hearer  (it  1«;^^,';-'  '^''''' '^'^'.^'-.i:.' '  '  'he  m  rh  v.-,',  ,./»- 
to  um-'certaiHl!,,  ;''''';;''"«'-^.,;"  ';/'  ^  u  It ,'-  .  shed  I'o.u  the  ..civerb 
,hne  (most  ui.doi.hteclly).  t;/-Jc  '  "l^-^, '',''';'  "i;,  ,,,,,,,,,,-r."  Thus  /-.« 
«vto.    The  hater  "'V^"'-^  "  7.'\'-''7;   "  ^;.    ^  e'Vta     v7  wime  "A".  c.rM 

wise  than  by  Hie  rhetorical  accent  i>i  *1«:  ^'  f,;",  ,  jV\ve    Tay  translate  it 

I)  .or  1  10  24  —Homines  ^ane  .^i-rvTru  >'Vl""'\'!;  ,'  ;'  s»^«/  — Kuui(U'in  log.-s  viohin-  nolo, 
J^irJ.  -I  c  qui(UMn  tacuit.  The  latter  m  A;;/;'  /  ^ea  u  cm.^m  -nam  i(TMui<U;ni  Kpiru- 
TV>.%umrtui/l  not  brtak  the  /a«>.-Nc(iue  \ero  »    ^^^V^»^"  ",.  ^,.  ;;,^  „otjorthaf  itu-^on 

^  40:^   The  English  expressions  at  ^<^^^ --^^'^^::^^  ".U  so  "hai 
th^t  they  restrict  ^he  predicate  to  mu;m^  .  ^,,  J,,,,, 

0^/^  exeludes  ^^^  />^l^^  J    i^^'V^i  :^  ^at^least''  thus  excludes  all  persons_or 

conditionally  or     P^^^'^^y^^^l^'":^^^^^,-^^^^^^^ 

—*Vero  (properlv  tl.e  ablative  «f  rerum=:  Z^l^^X^JvlZ^L-.in  tin-  sent-nce:  ^>/.- 

phatu-ally  n-fl-r^  tos..,ue  Prov  u>n-  smeM.enr  t^^k.n^^  '^^^^UnJ  :  Did  we  lor.aa  that  ,ln. 

f-V-ln  the    h*'.,ri„nniu'  «>'  l^''t«'>-^;  H  J"''    .^;  ,  A^.^^^^^      Y«'K.  indeed.   1   nvi>I»  y.ui   lad 
Hcn    )re^i'iit  at  my  JZreat  aniu-noii.  ^J^;  Xr;.>  V  m'ir'76;.<  ^   I'/o.  lirnte,.<^d  i"   Vuma- 


AFFIRMATIVE   AND   LIMITING   PARTICLES. 


297 


thiiiti-;  but  tlie  mentioned  one  from  the  action  of  tlie  predicate,  it  is  trans- 
lated by  certi' ;  as  :  Quo  quid  sit  btdtian^  niihi  quidem  eerie  in  mentem  mnlre 
noil  potent^  What  can  be  liappier  than  lliis,  I  at  least  (if  others  do)  cannot 
conceive.  Cie.  Tusc.  5,  28,  81. — Certe  ego  tne  noci,  I  at  least  (if  no  others), 
know  myself  Ovid.  Met.  KJ,  840. — (Q.  B<i?bius  dixit)  Unuin  certe  comuhl- 
tniii  phbiti  Rom<'ni(T  esse,  That  one  place  at  least  (if  not  both)  of  the  consuls 
belouired  to  tlie  Plebeians.  Liv.  22,  o4, 11. — In  this  meaning  quidem  is  used 
very  frequently,  if  not  oftener,  than  certe. 

The  other  meaning  of  "at  least"  is,  when  the  action  of  the  predicate  is 
restricted  to  ttco  (tltemutices,  of  which  the  lesser  is  pointed  out  as  a  minimum. 
AV^e  translate  it  then  by  certe,  s<dtem,  or  iiindo.  The  use  of  quidera  is  hei'e 
excluded.  If  the  alternatives  are  so  conceived,  that  the  lesser  must  cer- 
tainly happen  if  the  other  does  not,  we  use  certe  ;  if  neitlier  of  the  alterna- 
tives need  to  happen,  mltem  or  7nodo  is  used.  Thus  certe  always  must  be 
used  in  connection  with  aut — auf,  while  with  a  single  aut,  saltern  may  be 
used,  as :  Eripe  mi/ii  nunc  dolorem^  aut  minue  *<^//^<^;«,  Relieve  me  of^  this 
jiain,  or  at  least  diminish  it.  Cic.  Att.  9,  6,  5. — Qui  si  nan  plus  iugenpj  valc- 
baSy  quam  ego^  certe  tiniebas  minus,  Who,  if  thou  wast  not  stronger  in  mind 
than  I,  wast  at  least  less  atraid.  Cic.  Att.  Fam.  9, 15. — lYbi  suadere,  ut  ie  aut 
cum  Casare  m/hiscumque  conjnngeres,  aut  certe  in  otium  refer  res.  To  advise 
you,  either  to  unite  with  Cajsar  and  us,  or  at  least  to  retire  U)  leisure.  Cic. 
Fam.  9,  9,  2. —  Chii  magnopere  ordbant,  ut  sibi  au.r  ilium  ferret,  vel  si  id  fa  cere 
prohibereturexercitum  modo  lihenum  transportdret,l^\m\Jhmn9,  asked  (Caisar) 
urgentlv,  to  help  them,  or  if  he  was  hindered  from  doing  this,  at  least  to 
lead  an  army  over  the  Rhine. — Instead  o\'  salfem  and  modo  (but  not  instead 
of  certe),  the  adversative  conjunction  tamen  often  is  used  in  the  meaning 
"  at  least:' 

Rein.  43.  "  But  at  least"*  is  translated  by  at  certe,  at  tamen.  or  by  at  alone,  as  :  Si  mihi 
repi/b/ica  bona/nn  non  licnerit.  at  carUto  maid.  If  it  siiould  not  be  allowed  to  me,  to  enjoy 
a  )ziHn\  <ioverninent.  I  shall  at  least  be  tree  from  a  bad  one.  Cic.  Mil.  84.1):l — In  quo  si  non 
prifsejis  jte/icN/uni.  at  certe  lof/inqiia  obsidiOne  fames  esset  titnenda,  where,  if  not  a  present 
<lanii;er,  but  at  least  hun<,'er  must  be  feared,  iu  consequence  of  a  lonjj  ^x^ge.  Ciesar,  B.  G. 
5,  •2«.». 

^  lOJJ  SI.  The  regular  equivalents  of  only  are  tantum,  modo,  or  tantum- 
modo,  which  are  used  with  little  difference.  Solum  in  classical  language  is 
confined  to  non  solum  in  coordinations  (i^  380).  Dumicucat  excludes  a 
greater  amount  or  luunber,  or  a  higlier  degree  (we  may  substitute  but  only^ 
no  more,  or  /to  farther),  and  demum  excludes  an  earlier  time  (we  may  sub- 
stitute fiot  sooner,  not  before).  It  is  especially  used  in  the  connection  tui?i 
demu)u  (then  only).  Quod^i  iste  lUdiam  relinquet,  faciei  omnino  male — sed 
turn  demum  consifia  nostra  o/mmutanda  sunt.  If  now  that  man  will  leave 
Italy,  he  will  act  badly  indeed— but  only  then  (that  is,  "  not  before')  our 
l)lans  nuist  be  changed.  Cic.  Att.  9,  \d.—  Valde  me  Athenee  delectdrunt ; 
urbs  dumtaxat  et  urbis  ornamentum,  AWieus  has  delighted  me  much  ;  (but) 
only  the  city,  and  the  splendor  of  the  city.  Cic.  Att.  5,  10. — Ed'icit,  se  eis 
dumta.rat  vitam  concessurum  :  bona  quidem  eorum  venditurum,  He  i)ublishes 
that  he  would  grant  them  life  only  (not  more  than  life),  but  that  he  would 
sell  their  property.  Hirt.  B.  Afr.  90. 

Rem.  44.  If  ''only"  means  "-  nothing  else  but:''  it  is  translated  by  a  neiration  with  7ii*i. 
See  Conditional  C  laiiscs.  Hook  \  I.  If  only  is  equivalent  to  •'the  only  one."  it  may  be  ex- 
prestied  t)y  the  numeial  form-adjectives  uuvs  or  solus  (§  257,  Hem.  11).  But  this  is  mostly 
confined  to pronoum  and  nouns,  which  have  no  attributes. 

§  404.   Among  the  equivalents  of  " even''  vel  (rarely  ettum  or  quoque) 


i." 


298 


AFFIRMATIVE   AND   LIMITING    PARTICLES. 


is  used  before  8U])€rhitlre8,  as:  Vel  amicimmi,  even  tlie  best  friends.— 
Concordia  parv(B  ren  crescunt,  dlscordid  vel  mwcimoi  dilubuntur,  By  concoril 
small  states  grow  ;  by  discord  even  the  ixreatcst  are  ruined.  Sail.  Else 
etiam  and  (pioque  are  synonyms  of  ?W;  but  nu)re  freciuently  the  former 
than  the  latter.  Both  dimn' '<i\\i\  qaoque  ori^i^^inally  niean  "  also,'' and  arc 
entirely  synonymous,  except  in  their  positions.  Et  in  both  signitications, 
even  and  aim,  is  limited  to  certain  connections,  at  least  in  classical  lan«j^uage. 
It  mostly  is  used  aftiT /i^///^  and  xid,  and  betbre  pnmouns  and  demonstra- 
tives, as:  Sed  ct  Ju>c  {illud)  Unire  debitut,  but  you  nmst  mind  also  (even)  this. 
iV«/M  et  nobis  displicet,  etc..  For  it  is  unpleasant  also  (even)  to  is,  etc., 

Rem.A'i.  The  use  of  ?>?«  for  er^/j  (§  279)  is  conttned  to  nounp  without  adjective  attri- 
butes, to  pronouut»  and  dinjunct  deinoubtratived. 

§  405.  The  equivalents  of  cspeciiilbj  and  rather  denote  a  comparative 
aflirmation  (Rem.  48).  Potimniuni  (esi)ecially,  chietly,  mainly)  ami  i>ntia» 
(rather)  represent  a  predicate,  as  referring  to  certain  persons,  things  or 
actions  rather,  than  to  others,  either  with  or  without  excluding  the  latter. 
PotiuH  is  opposed  to  one,  and  potissiniuni  to  tdl  other  i)ersons,  thmgs  or 
actions.  The  latter  verv  frecpientlv  may  be  rendered  by  the  English  par- 
ticle "jw."<^"  Bv  prmertiin  we  add  to  the  sentence  a  c/^///.-<t',  containing  a 
reason  or  cond'ition,  which  more  than  othei-s,  and  without  excliuling  the 
latter,  go  to  establish  the  reality  of  the  i)redicate.  Therefore  it  is  followed 
by  clauses,  introduced  by  cinn  or  si,  or  by  words  or  phrases  which  may  be 
resolved  into  such  clauses. 

Sed  tamen—qiianfvm,  viihi  rel  fraun  inimicorvrn,  vel  res  pvltlica  tribuat  ofii.  ad  scribe n- 
dmn  iwfiMmiirn  conferani.  But  Htill,  t^o  much  leisure  as»  the  cuiiiiini:  of  my  eneuiie.<  or  the 
rt-puhlic  leave  to  me.  I  shall  fsi)e(iallv  apply  to  writinu'  (mainly,  cliitfly  to  \vriiiii<;).  Cic. 
de  t)rat.  1.  1.  Z.—  Creilo  ego ;  ros—ndnhi.  (ju'ul  nt.  (jtiod—tfjo  jxitis^intum  Ki/rreJtri/n,  I  be- 
lieve that  vou  wonder,  \vhv  it  is,  that  ju^t  i  have  arist-ii.  Cic.  Hose.  Amer.  1.  \.—Qind 
piiinnw  (pi'frai\aHt  u/ide  potissiinmn  oidiar r  Of  what  bliall  I  complain  lirst.  or  where 
thall  1  chiertv  be^'in  ?  Cic.  Rofc.  Amer.  W.—  Ut  ai/dinrni/s  jxjfius  ex  fe,  qiiain  (c  affiononis 
ullil  iiioUs'i(l\  That  wo  rather  hear  vou.  than  i:ive  you  any  inconvenience.  Cic.  IJrut.  :i,  11.— 
Ct^sar  (jroiiter  eo.<  accu-iaf.  f/'/od  ah  iix  non  .s//b/tnf'/r.  i)r<.t'<ertim  cum  eoriun  prfCihun.  ad- 
ducttts'Mlum.  siiKreiterit.  C'sesar  reproaches  tliem  seriously,  for  not  hein-r  r<lieved  by  them» 
especially  since  he  had  undertaken  the  war.  induced  by  their  i)rayers.  Cies  H.  (J  1.  u;.— 
Faciam  iero.  Litli.  pnr.se/fim  si  ufrl</ve  resfnwi  grafinn  fvinri'jii  est,  \es.  I  shall  tlo  it.  O 
Lieliua  especiallv  if  it  will  be  jdeasaiit  to  both  of  you.  Ch'.  i^vn.  i.  (\.—  QitamoOrtm  non 
t.s/a  nie  sain^ntuc  fama  dthrtaf.  falsa  jirasntinK  1  am  therefoie  not  pleased  with  this 
notoriety  of  scholarship,  especially  a  false  one  (tliat  it»,  especially  ij  it  is  Jalst).  t'lc. 
La-'l.  4,  15. 

Rem.  4t>.  Instead  of  potissimvm  very  frequently  maxime  is  used  in  the  same  sijjnifira- 
tion  as  :  fti  ea  via.vime  rafiOfie  fecit,  (jtiod  iiolnit  eiim  l(K-iini—rac<lrt.  lie  did  this  especmlly 
for  this  reas<m,  that  he  did  not  wish  that  place  to  be  vacant.  Cies.  B.  CJ.  1.  'ZS.—linjininis 
(properly  meaninir  '•  among  the  first,  before  the  others")  and  jmnijt'/e  (properly  tiieaiunji 
''b>/  i)re'fere/ict')  sometimes,  but  more  rarelv.  are  used  with  the  force  eitluT  ol  iiolifsiiituin. 
or  of  lintstrtim,  in  order  to  increase  its  force,  as :  Fortuna,  qmf  jUnrimnm  isttext  quuin. 
ill  relujuin  rebus,  turn  j>neciptie  in  b<U(>.  F«)rtune.  which  is  most  powerful  in  other  respects 
as  well  as  especially  in  war.  Cies.  B.  Civ.  :J,  y\^.— Malta  me  morent  %n  discessu.  tmpnmis, 
r/iehercule.  (juod  disjinigora  fe.  Many  thiii<rs  aflect  me  ou  my  departure,  especially-be- 
cause  I  am  severed  iVoiu  thee.    Cic.  Att.  Hi,  ti. 

Rem  IT.  Impninhi  and  pnvcipue  (especially,  particularly)  are  mainly  used  as  adrerbs 
with  the  force  of  an  absolute  dej,'ree  (§  :iV.h.  in  order  to  increase  th»'  intensitijol  the  pi-edi- 
cate  and  ma.rime  is  e.«pecially  used  to  form  the  superlative  de;;ree  (»f  descri|)tive  adjec- 
tives (§  -.iiKi)  as  •  Jlomo  i/itpi'iinix  docfiis  (instead  of  admodrim  doitus).  an  extremely  learned 
imm  —J/iiic  (tgioni  (\tsar  et  iinhdserat  ja;rcip'ie  it  propttr  virtiltem  conjidrtxd  mcwimr, 
Ca}>ar  had  l)ee"ii  extremely  partial  t(»  this  le-it)!!.  and  very  irreaily  contided  duul  th>'  most 
unbounded  confidence)  in  it  on  account  of  its  excellent  qualities,    Ciesar  B.  Ci.  1,  40. 

Rem  IS  The  equivalents  of  "  especially."  when  used  as  p.mztkles.  must  be  distin- 
truished  from  advkkbs.  and  especiallv  fn.m  the  comparative  adverbs  (sunerlatives),  since 
thev  represent  a  comparison  not  of  the  predicate  itself  and  its  intensity,  but  ol  its  reality. 
In  none  of  the  meuiioned  examples  (except  those  of  Kern.  4(3),  these  particles  lorm  a 


THE   NEGATION. 


299 


phnm\\\\\\  the  predicate,  and  less  yet  with  their  emphatic  words;  but  they  must  be  coe- 
euiered  as  one  ol  those  forms  ])y  which  the  speaker  affirms  or  limits  his  affirmation 

1  he  particle  jmtins.  althouirh  it  may  be  followed,  like  comparative  adv.r1)s  bv  qiiam  isi 
distin-inslied  Irom  a  rc^ul  comparison  by  tlie  fact,  that  it  does  not  compare  but  ejccladt  tho 
eecond  member  of  the  comparison. 

ii  -106.  Vere,  prope,  pa>ne  denote  "  almost,  nearlv,"  without  much  differ- 
ence m  meanmg.  But  fere,  more  than  propc  and  pane,  is  used,  with  form- 
adjectives  (as  nemo  fere,  omnes  fere)  and  adverbs  of  tune  and  place  (semper 
fere,  numquam  fere),  as  : 

Bella  1  III  re  liorvm  confecto  tonus  fere  aallim  legdti  ad  Ccesarem  conrenerunt.  After  the 
war  ol  the  llelvelians  was  ended,  the  ambas>adors  of  almost  the  whole  of  Oanl  came  to 
Ciesar.  Ciesar  B  (J  1,  ?A).—l'ropterea  quod  Jinmcn  Dabis  pane  totum  oppidam  cinqit  be- 
cause the  river  Dnbis  encloses  neailv  the  whole  town.  Ciesar  B.  G  1  liS —J^romJirmiS' 
niiia  e<fn/m  regionum  cuitas,  almost  the  stroiifrest  community  of  those  regions.    Caesar 

Circiter  is  used  only  of  nnmhers  (meaning  about),  as:  Hord  circiter  Urtid, 
at  the  thu-d  hour  about.  Vere  with  numerals  means  "  quite','  as:  Millefere 
hastes  ocr'ixi  .sa/it,  quite  a  thousand  enemies  were  killed. 

Rem.  49  Satis  fere  means  ''  qaife  enough.''  His  fere  verbis,  chiefly  (mainly)  with  these 
vrord^.—IIijEcjeredicerehabui,  I  had  chiefly  thiA  to  say. 

The  Xegatiox. 

§  407.  The  regular  negation  is  Jion.  The  use  of  ne  is  con- 
fined to  imperative  sentences,  to  negative  coordinations  (§  409) 
and  to  certain  clauses  and  phrases  (§  415).  Ilaud  is  used  m 
certain  connections  only,  especially  in  hand  scio,  instead  of 
9iescl<),  hand  inar/nus,  hand  txle/uus^  hand  mult  us,  hand  medio* 
cris,  haud  difficilis,  haud  stnie  (indeed  not).  In  Caesar  hand 
occurs  only  once   {haud  seio  an,  B.  G,5,54),  in  Cicero  rarely. 

The  jdace  of  non,  Avhen  it  refers  to  the  whole  sentence,  gen- 
erally is  immediately  before  the  finite  verb  (in  infinitive  and 
particij)ial  sentences  before  the  predicate),  and  hence  before  esse^ 
whether  this  word  is  a  copula  or  an  auxiliary,  as:  hoc  fieri  non 
j)otest ;  hostibus  euhi  non  j^rohibentilms ;  dixit,  se  hanc  calami- 
tateni  ftrre  non  posse;  hcBc  necessaria  non  sunt ;  caMra  expug- 
,nata  non  sunt.  But  when  the  negation,  as  emphatic  particle, 
refers  to  single  members  of  the  sentence,  it  immediately  pre- 
cedes them,  as:  Non  Gajus  (sed  Sejus)  hoc  mihi  dixit.— JVou 
cmne /acinus  in  onniivita  nascitur  ;  Not  every  crime  appears 
in  every  rank  of  life.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  47. 

Rem.  50.  Non  frequently  opens  the  whole  sentence  to  increase  the  stress 
of  the  negation,— i\'<>;i  before  adjectives  imparts  to  them  a  negative  mean- 
ing, which  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  prefix  in  (non  grafus  =  inf/rdtus; 
non  multi  —  pauci).    The  quantitative  adjective  and  adverb  "little"  is 


300 


THE  NEGATION. 


jjonerally  oxprossea  hy  non  imiUum,m){  hy  f>aulhim,\\\\\Q\\  denotes  "a 
liitlc'\  The  P]iii,disli  '"(A>"  iti  m-uative  sciiteiices  is  not  separately  ren- 
dei-ed  :  IVie  f/eniVdl  did  not  gr<f/ii  tlie  rondi(i»/is,  Dnx  condilioues  non  con- 
cessit. The  English  ''no"  hetbre  adJ«'Clives  and  adverbs,  is  rendered  7i6»/i, 
not  nnllus:  I  hdd  no  great  plcdxiiie,  Voluptilteni  hahui  non  niagnam. 

Rfm.  51.  Often  two  iifLjatioiifJ  .are  cnnected  in  the  same  sentence  :  1)  \on  jtossitm  non 
with  un  ohjcci-inliuitivf  means  "  i  cannot  leli)  doUvj;  somrthini,''',  "it  is  impossiitle  not 
to  ",  "  1  mnst  "  :  .■E'^ui/iifffn  (uani  non  /)0'>ii  von  piofMlre  ;  It  was  impi)s>il)ie  lor  me  not 
to  acknowledge  (I  eunid  noi  help  acknowled^'inir»  your  fairne-!?.  Cic.  Fam.  1,  U, -^ti.— AoH 
ixxf^'i/tn  hon  vonfifcri,  <'>/)n>/hln  mt  nut.ihno  {/au'/io,  I  must  confesn  to  be  overwhelmed 
with  ihe  irreatc'st  jt)v.  II).  1,  !>.  l.—i)  Xon  wiiii  a  ne^^iiive  form-aiijective  or  a'herh  i§  4('8> 
has  a  (iitl'erent  meanini;  according  as  the  neiraiion  prei  edcs  i»r  lullows  {iiiin  nuniqudni  = 
nometinn^s  ;  monfjudni  turn  -  aiway»»  (n.  259.  li.  5;  p.  iiil.  li.  12).— 3)  \ec  non.  ntc  nihil 
liave  the  force  of  an  attirmative  parliclc  added  to  a  copulalive  coordination  :  X^c  hoc 
Zeno  non  vhW ;  Nor  indeed  did  this  e-cape  Zeiio'i*  ailention  (  -  and  indeed  Zt-no 
no. iced  \\>U).  (Vic.  Fin.  Arirl.—Xec  t'ini>-n  f<cil  nihil;  .\nd  yt-t  he  really  knows  sometliing. 
Cic.  Alt.  2,20. — 4)  Xtque..  .neque,  foll<<win^'  a  m-gative  word  have  thf  mc-aninu  of  <////. .  . 
aut :  Afihi  nihil  neque  a  (e  ij)So  neqin-  ah  uUo  alio  lUwlvtntn  tuo  scriptum  ent  (Notiiinir  luia 
been  writieii  lo  me  rifh>^r  by  thyself,  or  etc.).  Cic  Fam.  2,  I'J,  1.— 5)  F.,r  Jie  non  t^ee  It.  bii. 
For  non  nui  see  P.  II,  p.  74U. 

lii'm.  52.  Tiie  force  of  the  negation  often  is  increased  by  the  usual  em- 
plialic  particles  :  non  mne,  indeed  not ;  ftre  non,  almost  not ;  omnino  non, 
not  at  all,  under  no  circmnstances,  by  no  means.  Instead  of  omnino  non, 
the  adverb  /teqftorjuotn,  or  the  phrases  nullo  niodo,  nullo  jxirfo  are  frecpiently 
used,  yot  even  is  not  expressed  by  non  vel  or  non  etiom,  but  l)y  ne — qnideni, 
the  emphatic  word  beiuir  plaeed  between  ne  and  qnldeni,^i\s:  lie  does  not 
ecen  lauu-h,  Ne  ridet  i[{\idvm.—f  did  not  eren  tell  the  kini;,  tnot,  etc.,  Ne  li'.ui 
quidem  (lixi,  etc.  The  emphatical  word,  which  in  tlie  last  example  is 
''king,''  is  not  always  indicated  by  jio.v'tion  in  Eniilish,but  must  be  inferred 
from'  the  connection.  In  Latin  the  i)osition  of  the  emphatic  word  between 
ne  and  quidem  never  can  be  changed. 

§  408.  Many  words  attract  tbe  negation ;  tbat  is,  tlie  nega- 
tion is  blended  with  tliem  into  one  word,  as  :  nescire,  neqitlre, 
nolle,  negdre,  the  form-adjectives  neuio,  7nhil,  tivllm,  neuter,  the 
adverbs  numquam,  7iusqua)ii  (nowhere),  nequaqnani  (by  no 
means),  nondiun  (not  yet),  nlhllduia  (nothing  yet),  mdlnsdnm, 
nemodum  (none,  nobody  yet),  and  the  conjunctions  ?i€que,  ?ieve, 
nisi.  In  the  combinations  of  these  negative  expressions,  tlie 
Latin  idiom  frequently  is  diiferent  from  the  English  : 

1.  The  verbs  7iescire,  nequ'tre,  and  nolle  cannot  stand  in  the  satne  sentence 
with  any  form-adjective  or  adverb  having  the  meaning  '^uiy"  or  "  ever." 
Thus  we  must  say:  Yon  do  not  know  hoic  to  do  anythintj,  Nihil  facere  scltis 
{not  (luicquam  tacere  nescltis.— Tr<3  cannot  »ee  anybody,  Neminem  vidCre 
possumua  {,rwt  quenuiuam  vidPre  neqnimus).— ir<3  are  not  icdling  ever  to 
change  this  km,  Ilanc  legem  nuitare  nunquam  volumus  {not  banc  legem 
uufitiam  mutfu'e  nolumus).  Hence  form-adjectives  and  ne(j<itive  adverbs  at- 
tract the  negation  more  strongly  titan  verbs. 

2.  When  form-adjectivks  and  adverbs,  both  of  which  may  attract  the 
negation,  are  in  the  same  sentence,  the  negation  generally  is  attracted  by 
the  FORM- ADJECTIVE.    Thus  the  English  expressions  never  anybody,  neocr 


THE   NEGATION. 


301 


anything  must  be  changed  into  7wbody  ever,  nothing  ever  (nemo  unquam, 
niillus  imtiuam,  nihil  unquam;  not  nunquam  quisquam,  nunquam  ullus, 
nunquam  quiccpiam,  although  under  special  circumstances  the  latter  ex- 
pressions may  become  correct). 

3.  When  a  negative  sentence,  or  a  sentence  containing  negative  form- 
adjectives,  advei-bs  or  verbs,  is  placed  in  coordination  with  a  preceding 
proposition,  the  negation  must  be  taken  from  its  place  before  the  finite 
verb,  or  from  its  combination  with  the  negative  words,  and  must  be  joined 
witli  the  conjunction.  The  negative  words  then  assume  their  aftiri'uative 
forms,  and  instead  of  nemo  we  must  use  quisquam  or  ullus;  instead  of 
nihil,  qiiicqutun  ;  instead  of:  )kfi II us,  ullu^;  instead  of  neuter,  titer  (either). 
The  conjunctions  et  (atque,  etc.)  take  the  form  neque  or  fiec  {nor,  euui  not). 
The  other  conj mictions  take  the  negation  before  them,  either  in  the  form 
of  non  or  of  neque  {nee).  Tims  ''but  nof  is  rendered  by  neque  {nee)  vero;^ 
yet  not,  still  not,  hoicerer  not,  by  neque  {nee)  tamen  ;  for  not  by  non  enim  or 
neeiue  {nee)  enim  (not  by  7iam  non);  therefore  {hence)  not,  by  non  ergo  or  ?ion 
igitur  or  neque  igitur  (not  by  ergo  non,  etc.)  Fi'om  this  rule  the  disjunetixe 
conjunctions  alone  make  an  exception,  which  produce  no  change  in  nega- 
tive propositi(ms. 

Examples  '.—And  tee  hare  seen  rwhody  {nor  did  we  aee  anybody),  neqne  (nee)  quemquam 
vidmnis  (o(,f  et  nemmem).     And  he  nerei'  returned  {nor  did  he  ever  return),  neque  uh-c) 
nntiuam  rednt  {not  et  nunqnam).     And  he  ean not  see  the  enemies  {nor  can  he  see  the  ene- 
7mts),  lu'qiie  hostis  videre  potest  {not  et  liostTs  videre  non  potest,  or  neqnit).    And  thv  is 
t/y  no  means  certain,  neque  hoc  ullo  modo  certum  est  v^ot  et— nullo  modo).-^(/^  he  did 
not  say  f/tfs.  neque  (ik'c)  vero  hoc  dixit.— 5'^i//  /  di'l  not  learn  this  from  thy  oration,  neque 
tamen  hoc  e.x  t.r  itione  tiifi  didici  (»ot  tam«;n— non  didici).— For  he  did  not  fear  to  die, 
neqne  <'nini  inon  ei:im)  mori  timeMat  {mt  nam  mori  non  hmeUat).— Therefore  ^vcli  men 
ou//lit  mtt  to  lire,  non  eriro  (iiritun  ejusmodi  homines  vivere  debent  ynot  eriro— non  debent). 
—  Hut  tre  t^hall  not  only  take  puiits.  fjuf,  etc.,  nee  vero  operam  dai)imus  csolum,  sed  etc! 
(/<(>/  sed  mm  solum  operanuiabimus,  sed). 

Rem.  5:i.  Both  '•  nor"  and  "  and  not "  are  «renerally  rendered  by  ,ipque  (for  neve  see  R. 
55»,  but  in  tlie  followiiii;  instances  by  e'  non  •  \)  Et  non  may  be  n^ed  instead  ot  neque  if 
th  nei,',ition  clo-^t-ly  beloii^'s  lo  a  >inirie  word  ot  the  sentence  (so  fliat  we  iiiav  in  Rn<'iish 
unite  not  by  a  hyphen  with  this  word»,  as:  Demetrius,  vetiis  et  nem  iqnobili.<  dicendl 
ma-ister:  an  old  and  not  ot,scure  (nof-oi>scure)  teacher  of  rhetoric.  Cic.  Brut.  91.  2)  Et 
von  is  always  used  in-tead  of  neque  if  it  i<  virtuullv  attiiinitive  in  clauses  introduced  by 
si.  tamquani  (as  if),  qutai  (as  if  >  and  ut,  ^  el  non'  h'lvini,'  the  force  o[' instead  of  :  Xulla 
rv.*  recte  yx>-V.><  admiuislrari  si  unusfjuis(/>te  relit  rertta  sjtectdre.  et  kon  ad  voluntdt<m 
ejus  qui  viha  h'if)u<rit  acceiler<' :  if  eveiy  one  would  reixaid  the  words  onlv,  and  not 
enter  (  =  instead  of  ciiterint;»  into  the  meanuij^  of  the  speaker  (i.  e.  it  is  proper  that 
evervone  should  t-iitcr  into  thi^  meanini,'  efv)  Cic.  In  v.  2,  M.—Lippitudinc  adductus  sum 
vt  dirlarf-m  /tanc  epi^tolaw,  et  non  ipse  scrifjerem  .'  I  am  compelled  bv  sore  eyes  to  dic- 
tate this  letKT.  INSTKAO  OK  wri!in;.'  it  invs.-ll".  Cic.(iii.  Fr.i.i.  1.— 3)  '!\nd  not'  {but  not) 
conne  tni:  .>*'nirle  members  of  a  sentence  is  nsvndetically  <'X|)re!f?ed  by  uon,  without  et  • 
1  mean  (iajiis,  and  (but;  not  Sejus',  Gajum,  non  iiejuni,  dice. 

4.  Negations  in  ci.auses  introduced  by  subordinating  conjunctions  do 
not  combine  witii  the  conjunctions, except  with  <//'(that)  and  si.  Ut  cen 
erally  takes  the  form  ne,  or  ut  ne  (always  with  subjunctive),  the  negative 
words  of  the  clause*  becoming  alhiiuative  (as  in  No.  8),  aliquis  tfc  quisquam 
bemg  changed  into  quis{ne  quis,  ne  quid).  In  English  '  lest  \ or  •  that  not '  is 
used,  or  an  infinitive  after  not.  But  when  that  not  is  preceded  by  .^o  or 
thus  {tarn,  ita,  sic  etc.),  non  retains  its  place  and  that  is  translated  by  ut. 

..^^^^y^-^^  '—^^if'^'''  uarm  their  young  ones  with  their  feathers,  lest  they  may  be  hurt 
{that  they  may  not  be  hurt)  by  cold.  Aves  pullos  pennis  fovent.  ne  fri<rore  la^dantur  —  Who 
tlunds,  mud  strive  not  to  fall.  Qui  t.tat  uiti  debet  ne  lal^atur.- Uf  demand  that  nobody  s 

>  By  sed  non  only  in  the  cases  of  a  direct  or  restrictive  opi>osition.  and  then  non  is  olaced 
ttn?nedtatelj/  after  seU. 


S02 


THE   NEGATION. 


ofrfnre.<^  bf  wmUhe>l  Postnl.lmnj».  no  cujiis  injun:^  pnniantur.-r;i^v  rt-'^^vV.  ^/m/^A<w^<m- 
diZL  sfiouid  nerefb.  chamie^L  Orf.hant,  m-  u.u,ua,n  c..,.( hiium-s  ilh.  ''y'l'^'-^,;':';!;;- ^jj 
/7Y;om  w,re  so  twtd.  that  tkey  co>,ld  not  wirance  a„y  uuhr  V'l""^'''";iV;V-  ''J  Ll',  ! 
lon-ius  pro-rodi  non  p.)s>«ent.-7'A6  orator  sjtoke  so.  Ihat  nobody  underdood  /am,  Orator 
itu  FocQtut*  est.  lit  iK-mo  etim  audln-t. 

Tho  coninnction  xi  introdiiciiiir  a  ncirativc  sentence,  is  iienenilly  chani^aHl 
into  /u.x/,  and  translated  by  unhxs  or  if  y/r>/,  as:  Nisi  lute  ita  simt,  unless^ 
this  iH  xo  (if  tliis  is  not  so).  Nisi  forte  means  ''unless  perhaps  {\uA  lusi 
fortifsse). 

Hem.  .54.  For  the  upc  of  fd  non  in^toad  of  nisi,  pee  Book  VI. 

Rem  .55  When  a  iii-'ative  proposition  is  copiilativelv  connt>cted  with  a  clause  intrb- 
iliiccdbvv/  or  n^  and  not  or  nor  arc  n..t  transljited  hy  neqae  but  by  neve  Kneu).  as: 
Citsar  exhorts  th.m  to  throve  thdr  darts  from  afar,  and  not  to  a ppn nich  ywy)  nearer 
C^sar  exh.)rtAtur  eos,  nt  prociil  tela  conjiciant.  nere  (neu)  l'n)pui=*  accedant.-//rsA  /A«e, 
voitolosl  coarane,and  not  (nor)  let  thyself  be  orerwhelmed  by  (I,.  rjreatness  oj  the  task, 
Ko.'o  te  nc  animiun  dcniitlas.  nere  te  obrni  neijotii  nuiLrnitudine  sums. 

Rem  5<i  The  En-dish  conjunction  lest  after  verbs  of  feakino  is  equivalent  to  that  hni 
in  Latin  is  expres^Ted  by  ne\  while  the  conjunction  lest  not  or  that  not  x.  translated  by 
ut,  oxnf  ncm  :  Timeo  ,..  r^niaf  ;  I  am  afraid  lest  (tlnit)  he  may  coMie.-]«r/v/>^/r  '/^  r.dde- 
rent'ir  litter^e,  I  was  afrai.l  that  (le.t)  the  letter  would  no^  be  '1;;H^^^7'<  •  l./S;  ^='"Vj^- \- ; 
\.-Ve>eorne  non  lirent ;  lam  afraid  it  will  not  be  allowecl.  Ih.  Alt.  %  VJ,.i.- Timto  ne 
non  impttrem;  1  am  afraid  lliat  I  sliall  not  succeed,  lb.  9.  (i.ti. 

§  409.  Tlic  COPULATIVE  COORDINATION  of  tico  7ier/ative 
phrik.ses  or  sentences  is  made  by  9ieqfie  {nec)—Heque  {nee),  7iei- 

ther nor,  corresponding  to  the  affirmative  et — et,  non  solum — 

sedetiam.  But  when  clauses  connected  by  '' 7ielther—nor''  are 
dependent  on  the  conjunction  "that,"  so  tliat  the  hitter  in  nega- 
tive sentences  wouhl  be  rendered  by  ne,  we  translate  the  English 
^'neither'"  by  7ie,  and  the  English  nor  by  neve  (neu). 

Examples:  The  ambassadors  neitlier  can  nor  iciU  consent,  Lei?ati  consen- 
tlre  nee  possunt  nee  \o\\\\\\.—Xeithrr  Sripio  nor  /Mia.s  w<is  present,  Neqiie 
Bcipio  neciue  Lielius  adtiiit.— 77/^'  Ounls  neithrrwishnlto  leare  the  camp,  nor 
mre  thuj  raidi/  to  f/irc  buttle,  Galli  necpie  castra  reliiuiuerc  volebtint,  neqiie 
pu«nmre  p:n-ati  vrlint—Qfsar  demamled,  that  he  shoa/d  mither  proroke  t/ie 
yEduans  icithout  cause,  nor  should  make  war  on  t/wm  or  {and)  their  allies, 
Csesar  postidavit  ne  ^Ediios  injuria  (trithout  cause)  lacesseret,  neve  ins  so- 
ciisque  {or  sociisve)  eoruni  belluni  nifenet. 

ft  410.    The  Eni^lish  negative  coordination  with  ^'' not  only 

not hut  even''   is    expressed    by   non    modo    (solum)   non — sed 

etlani.     The  coordination  witli  ''not  only  not— hut  not  even''  is 
made  by  non  modo  {solum)  non— sed  ne  quidem  (or  sed  vix),  as: 

Ml/  pain  is  not  only  not  diminished,  but  eren  increased.  Dolor  mens  nou 
modo  (solnm)  non  minuitur,  sed  etiatn  au<::Gtnr.— 7  iu}f  oidi/  am  w>t  angry 
with  ihve,  but  do  not  eren  censure  thy  action,  Ego  non  modo  tibi  non  irascor, 
sed  tactiim  tuum  ne  reprehendo  quidem. 

Eem.  57.  When  coordinate  sentences  with  "  not  only  not— but  not  ev£n" 
have  tiie  same  predicate,  the  coordination  is  made  in  L:itin  by  mm  modo 
{solum)— sed  ne  quidem,  leaving  out  the  second  non  of  the  lirst  propt)sUion, 


IMPERATIVE   SENTENCES. 


303 


as  :  To  the  Senate  it  teas  not  only  not  allowed  to  help  the  republic,  but  not  even 
to  mourn,  Senatui  non  solum  servare  rempublicam,  sed  ne  lug5re  qnidem 
licuit. 

^411,  Infinitive  clauses  are  made  negative  according  to  the  general 
rules,  but  when  the}'  are  governed  by  a  verb  denoting  an  utterance  {rerbum 
direndi  (^  393,  Rem.  26),  it  is  customary  to  take  out  the  negation  from  the 
iullnitive  clause,  and  to  change  the  rerbum  dicendi  into  the  verb  negdre  (to 
deny),  as:  77/^'  ambassadors  declared,  that  they  had  not  seen  the  enemies,  Legiiti 
so  hostis  vidisse  ncfp'irunt. — He  promised  that,  if  they  would  do  so,  he  irould 
not  rhihite  their  territon/.  Si  ita  fecissent  (Ji  3-47)  finis  eorum  se  violaturum 
(s^  347)  negavit.    Ca?sar  B.  G.  6,  32. 

^  412.  Wiien  the  first  member  of  a  comp.vratiye  period  is  made 
negative,  the  comjiarison  oi difference  (i^  295)  is  hereby  made  a  comparison 
i)\' ((juality,  and  non  magis — quam  (not  more — than)  assumes  then  the  mean- 
ing of  '■'■  as  little — as,''  while  non  minus — quam  (not  less — than)  stands  for 
"as  much  as."  Non  minus — quam  is  the  general  way  to  render  the  English 
"  ax  much  as'"*  (sec  ^  301),  and  imn  magis — quam  the  only  w^ay  to  render  the 
English  "as  little  as."    P.  II,  p.  757. 

I  lore  thee  a>i  tnnrh.  a-s  thou  doest  me,  Ejjo  te  non  minns  amo,  quam  tu  me  (Ep^o  lo 
tantu/n  amo  quantum  lu  nn\  would  mean  :  I  lore  thee  only  as  much  as — no  more  than — 
thou  doest  mt).  —  (iajus  nill  hurt  you  as  little  o-v  /.  Gajus  vos^  non  mairis  lyedet.  quam 
eiro. — Son  nascitur  ex  malo  bonum.  non  magis  quam  ficus  ex  olea,  (Tood  does  not  j;row 
from  evil,  an  little  as  (no  more  than)  a  fig  from  an  olive-tree.     Sen.  Benef.  5,  7. 

lUm.  .')8.  When  a  comi>aris()Ti  of  Kqi'ALiTY  (hy  tam—qiiam)  is  made  negative  {non 
tarn — (juam).  it  nu-ans  t-ither  less — than,  or  not  so  much— as.  Hoc  imii  tarn  facile  est  nobis 
quant  tibi.  This  is  less  easy  (not  as  easy)  to  us,  than  (as)  to  thee.— O  eos  non  tarn  constan- 
tia  nostra  ddecfet.  quam  splendor  qffendat.  So  that  our  linnueiss  does  not  so  much  please, 
as  our  renown  hurts  them. 

Rem.  59.  The  English  '  not  so. .  .as  not  to  '  is  expressed  by  '  non  tarn  '  with  ut ;  Non  tarn 
dire<  sum  ut  hoc  eniere  jyossim  ;  I  am  not  so  rich  as  to  be  able  to  buy  this. 

Re/n.  TiO.  •  \o  more  than  '  bef(»re  nuniiTuIs  (§  '.iVi)  is  expressed  by  non  amplius  or  non 
plu.t,  which  i^  often  pbicfd  after  the  nuinrrai  :  Xo  more  than.  500  srtfdiers  were  kilted  ,' 
Non  ami>lius  (plus)  quingeiiii  milites  (or  quinirenti,  non  amplius,  milites)  iuterfecti  sunt. 
Aon  anij)lia8  also  means  '  no  longer  ',  '  not  any  longer ',  referring  to  time. 

YI.  Imperative  Sentences. 
§  41S{.  Imperative  sentences  are  those  whose  predicates  are 
rcj)resented  as  '  willed'  by  the  speaker.     They  are  either  inde- 
pendent or  dfjyendent,  the  latter  being  called  '' Imperative  clauses'* , 

Explanation.  Independent  imperative  sentences  are  shown  to  be  imperative  by  the 
mere  grammatical  form  of  their  predicates,  which,  in  Latin,  is  either  the  impkrative 
Wood,  or  the  si^BjrNCTivE,  or  the  FUTt'KK,  and  in  English  the  imperative  mood  (for 
the  Becond  person),  the  circumlocution  with  ^ let\  or  the  potential  with  'may  '  (for  the 
first  person  plural,  and  for  the  third  p<'rson),  or  the  future  with  shall. — Dependent 
sentences  are  marked  as  imperative,  1)  by  the  governing  verb  (I  commanded,  wished, 
ali<)we(I,  etc.»:  2)  by  the  grammatical  form  of  the  clause,  which  i.s  always  a  That-clause 
\\ith  its  predicate  in  the  subjunctive. 

g  414.  It"  the  predicate  of  an  indejjendent  affirmative  impera- 
tive sentence  is  in  the  second  peksox,  it  is  generally  in  the^^r^^ 
J'or)n  of  the  imperative  mood,  but  sometimes  in  the  present  sub- 
junctive, or  in  tlie  second  form  of  the  imperative,  or  in  the 
future  tense    (7i.  61). — 2.  If  the  predicate  is  in  the  third  per- 


304 


IMrERATIYE  SENTENCES. 


IMPERATIVE  SENTENCES. 


305 


soy  it  is  o-encrallv  in  tl>e  lyresent  siihjunctive,  but  sometimes  m 
the  II.  form  of  th J  imperative  {R.  03).-3.  If  the  predicate  is  lu 
tlie  FIRST  PEKSON  plural,  it  is  always  in  the  subjanctive  present  : 
lleikamus  ad  nostras.  Let  us  return  to  our  friends.  Cic.  Att.  15, 1. 
Bern  61  The  first  form  of  the  imperative  mood  is  regidarly  used  if 
the  ^iion  c^mmand<.d,  requested,  adnsed  vW  ^^  ^l^f '  1  "  ^^ /""io^ 
must  be  immediately  performed  as  :  ^' //''^^'^Vf '//;^; ;  ,  '^^^^^^^^^^ 
lio  liiiu  \(^  the  stike    Liv  8  l.—Perne  ut  ccepi.sti;  Continue  as  joii  nave 

to  y  .,.>■  li-mos,  a,..l  (lefen.l  then..  U..  Cat.  :i,  12- ','";.  ^•'"'Z     ■.      '    'ri  e 
5  ls,dce  is  «seJl  as  salulat..ry  tbrmula.  '  He  saluied  ,   be  «elco.ne  ).- 1    c 

present  subjuncive  ..f  .be  copnla  (../.v)  i» /■•"'"'•'"'^.  i;^ ''^ '  ''V.'  j  ,^V^'  o"^" 
mperative,4;  0/«<.««»  "»■  7■m^•  Ik- caioful,.  «u^T  .    .  C.C.  la^ 

li.^i'  tHii  ■.liafuMmf  Be  vour  own  senate,  lb.  10, 10, -'.— *(»7""M;  oe 
w'e  i  0  ,  F  1  3,  lO.-ft,  d»  ammo  quo  soles  <■.«•;  I5e  "r.sucb  a  cbs|>o- 
s  ,■ ,., Vas  itTs  yol,V\.;nt.  lb.  A,t.  5, 12,  :5  Rarelv  ,be  -  M-'f'v;-;,  "^ 
if  tlie  nrediratc  is  an  or.linarv  verl)  •.  Ad  "le  m/hssioh-  I, It <:;,.■<  ;  u«<  ».  Uc 
Fii  14  '1  -Tl.e  shXO.M)  K<m«  cf  tbe  in.p.Talivc  (son.elnn.s  tie  futuie 
is  nsec  I'rir  the  pe  lo.-n.anco  of  .be  action  co,..inan,i«l  (pe.™iued  elc.) 
s  de  ^nVle  t  on  !.f,;t,.,-e  contingency,  or  can  l.e  |.e.-fo.n,ed  -j  X  ;U  sm.- 
ful,n-e  time,  as  :  ««  erit  quid  ,„ojos,  domo  mUUlo  lolullonom     It  a.  .  .    n.S 

in,po,-.an.  will  happen,  dispatch  an  e.xp.-ess  l^'«'<''--';''";'';  ;, .  '^' •y'„\'''.,? 
0     SeeOus  4)     2)  li  is  also  nsed  in  laws  and  s;eneral  precepts  (see  OBb. ..). 

OBS.  ..  Frequently  the  s„.,ject  «f  l.re,lic«te.  '''^^^P^^":,^'!;,:;"^^^^'^^. 
Att  3,  4.-  r.', « >m  ,m>m.jr,ieit  M;o/w  ;  Do  enjoy  .  In>  1.  iMtr     '■■'"''""-'"'-■,  "• " 

ltm:".he;','."a  ;.,erc  i»  ,„.l,o.ly  «.,,,  has  not  the  n.  n  ;;,,.1>;|-,- .',":,;;",;,  V.  ^  '  ^^;!;„^ 
ll„l,f(„  i»  ahnosr  ...«ays  us.-.l  lu-te;..!  of  *"*';/''  ''',,'"  .if  Cic  \tt  t  1.'..  So  n>  ilie 
/i.lr  /u  Irfoii.  liiMlu ,'  tint  .ieeji  tins  a-  a  secret  (Willi  your.,  lli.  cic.  .^ii. 


yonrselr.  ,„;,.  nnike  the  hest  <,r  It  u.  e   ''j!'''',  ""'i'',^,  ,•;■.,  ,';^,V,,L'^: .•!.;.  V.Ufo '  =  «»... 
n„,rlal.,  lb.  Ke„.  li,  U^     So   ;/<'^  ;™ ,  "S',,^  ,^     '  1.     aVtien,  iinifiu-ela^.i;-...  st>  le, 

'C"i:."^':^:£i^i£'- 1,^;:  ;s  ;;rqnera^  "':i.r:;i;ii:^r;;;';h;f  i;^p;i;  ;;^H^r!^ 

Macfl  virm^  esto  ;  H.  ^--'^^^^;- ^^^^{^l^-^:^  1  .li^   V     ,fc!/'( probably  cor- 
Liv  7  :i«).    So  Ii»noa"iiiioeKtitte.  Suet.  ^  J^- ^•'^'^'"^  ^^ ';,''■  )../w/  /,/,  Afthm'  If  voa 

phraseo.o;:y  ;  2)  ill  or.liimry  nse  refernns  t"  ^e  l;'"-.  >'','';•.'<■' ',';.™.l'  |    ■"„     1    he  In,- 


rules abontaLrricnlfure,  while  the  later  agnculturalists  use  Pubjunctives  or  futures  :  Bene 
terrain  ronnninnifo  .-  i'uiVerize  the  goii  well.  Caro,  R.  R.  151.  So  occatiionallv  (but  rart-ly) 
ill  Pliny  :  Oca  lurid  nova  xupijonifo  (place  q^z^  under  tiie  hen:*  at  the  new  moon).  Arbo- 
nnn  rairire^ltnid  phnd  optr'ifo.  llurnhliy  locis  irttevlunw^erilo.  Piin.  18,  75.— Cicero  quote» 
tlie  etliic  (positive,  noi  the  lu'L'ativei  rules  of  tlie  St.iics  in  the  II.  pers.  of  the  II.  I'oim  :  In 
t^nf'^iitid  ptnuaiilto  ;  Abide  by  thy  opinion.  Cic.  Miir.  31,*;.5,  So  in  rejrard  to  positive 
divine  couiinands.  an:  Ihus,  '  hoc  farito.  hoc  7ie  fectrbt  \  diceret ;  God  would  say'Tliou 
Hhait  do  this  ;  but  that  thou  shalt  not  do  ',  Cic.  Uiv.2,  «1. 

Obs.  4.  In  theoiioiNAUY  use  of  the  II.  form  of  the  imperative  in  the  second  person 
(in  /o  and  tut"),  Cicero  is  more  paiiiciilar  than  theother  writers.  In  the  followinj;  in- 
«•tances  he  always  uses  the  second  form  (for  which  sometimes  the  future  tense,  or  the 
present  subjunctive  is  slibstituied.  but  never  the  first  form  of  the  imperative) : 

1)  When  a  C(»mmand,  request,  permi>sion  etc.  (beiup  afhrniative)  is  made  dependent 
on  a  coniinirency  ejjjressed  by  a  cause  with  a  predicate  i/i  the  future-present  or fuft/re- 
pef;rVr/*.  ti~:  .Si  Ltntuli  navis  non  eiit.  qiiolilnplacebit  imjxmito  ;  If  tliere  will  l)e  no  vessel 
of  Lentiiiiis.  place  them  (the  statues)  in  any  vessel  voii  choose.  Cic.  Att.  1.  8.— /S'i  retn 
nulla /n/ia/jebis.  quod  in  buccam  venej'it  K-iVnto ;  If  you  have  no  news,  wriie  what  comes 
into  your  mouth.  Att.  1,  Vi.  [Compare  tlie  fcdhiwinir  similar  examples  with  futures  and 
present  subjunctives:  Si  nihil  habebis,  fanun  {ta'ibas  aJiquid.  An.4,^i.2.—  Quum  jn'i- 
tnuni  jMfteris,  tua  cousilki  ad  me  srriban.  Ih.  5,  ll).— ^i  tiihil  crit,  quod  in  ttuconn  venerit 
sciibes.  lb.  14.  l.—Quod  quum  scies,  j'aii>s  ut  sciamus.  lb.  8. 15.— Si  quid  acciderit  noviy 
fades  lit  sciam.  li).  Fam.  14.  8.]— Jrf  lirufuw.  si  quid  fcribes.  ofjjurqdto  euin  quod  etc. 
Cic.  Att.  \'2.'iH\.— Omnia  no.ytro,  quoad  ens  limnee  {ii^  loti<r  as  you  will  he  iii  Rome)  ita 
gerito,  regito,  ffuberndto,  ut  nihil  a  me  exsp-ctea.  Ih.  ]n.'Z.'2.~i\'isi  intellex^ritis,  p/dires, 
nullum  esse  rrfficium  tam  sanctum,  quod  non  ejus  scelus  tioldrit,  rirvm  opfitnum  esse  judi- 
catote.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  ;i8.—  r^^j  multu  aidie  v\q.  facta  videbitis.  ibi  i^c^lns  quoqve  latere 
putatdte.  lb.  40.— .Vi  roleti»'.  in  suspicidne  latrntdte\  It).  2{).—Quum  me  confectum  luctu  au- 
dies,  fxistimdto  vie  stultifiiz  m-v  pieuani  fe.rre.  Cic.  Att.  3.  8,  A.—Qwim  litteras  a  librarii 
mann  acc^^iteHs,  ne  paullmn  quidem  me  otii  hahui^sejudi-dto.  lb.  (^u.  Fr.  2.  16,  1,—  Quum. 
val>^tudini  'ua^  dUi'jtnfis4ine  consul i(,ri<.  turn  ronsulito  navigatidni.  lb.  Fam.  Id,  4.— 61 
vn^  ass^qui  jK}fu<n''\  ut  ti'd  rvhb'itur  septnt».  lb.  Tusc.  1,  43.— But  the  other  writers  use 
also  the  first  form  of  the  imperative  in  this  construction,  especially  Livy  :  Vbi  evasero 
in  summum  mont»rn.  perge  hinc.  teque  et  exercitum  s^rra.  Liv.  7,  '^\.—Quum  togd  siqnnrn 
dede/o.  turn  umliqw-  iurlnvn  inraditf,  ac  st<-riiite  omnia  ferro,  Liv.  24.  :iH. — Si 'h<JBcim})e- 
di't  aliqifis.  fert^  serinonibus  b^^lla.  lb  4.5.  [But  :  Si  dimirandum  eiit,  turn  tu  in  novissi- 
vios  le  ncipito.  Liv.  7.40. )  Piautii-^  very  rareiy  uses  the  first,  form  of  the  imperative  in 
this  connection  :  Impinqe  pugnnm.  si  'muttir'erif.  Baceh.4, 6.  2.  Generally  he  has  the  2. 
form,  as  :  Asin.  2.  2,  lOS  :  1.  3.  13  :  lb.  75  and  SC) :  Bacch.  2.  2.  49  ;  3,  (i,  2ti ;  4, 3,  7«  and  92. 

2)  If  no  clauses  are  addi-d  with  a  fiiiure  predicaw.  the  imperative  is  in  the  second 
form,  when  either  a  future  c.ntinireiiry  is  undtn^tood.  or  the  action  is  such  that  it 
caunot  be  performed  intnndiatehj ;  lllud  corT^to  ne  ille  rersus  falso  testimonio  confirme- 
tur ;  Take  care  lest  that  verse  be  n«»t  confirmed  by  false  testimony  n.  e.  When  such 
a  testimony  will  l)e  ofI"ered.  coitiadict  in.  Cic.  Qu.Fr.  1.  3.  8.  — ^Vf^/y?a<  a  notns^  IVteras 
exsptcta,  ast  plures  etiam  ipse  inittttu  {i.e.  vhen  you  will  receive  frequent  letters  by 
me).  lb.  .\tt.  1.  Ki,  17.-- 7V///'////  yHHina  exspec'dto  :  Kxpe't  my  third  poem  (i.  <^.  when  I 
sliall  have  accoi.i)lished  it).  11).  Att.  1.  19.  10  (Comp.  *-j>7><-c/a  in  the  preceding  example). 
-De  Bruto  sem)^r  ad  meomnia  persci  ifdfo  ii.  e.  whenevir  you  will  hearof  him).  lb.  14,  8, 
2. — Quoniam  ad  omnia  pulrinaria  supjUicatio  de-ret  a  est.  celebratdte  illos  dies  cum  corijU' 
gibuM  rtstris  (not  now.  but  wiieii  tin  se  d.-iys  will  come).  lb.  Cat.  3. 10.— />*«  t/it  ^n'/z/t/m 
ridefo;  Only  see  about  the  day  when  it  is  due  (i.  e.  when  you  will  make  the  arrange- 
ments about  the  payments  lb  Att.  13.  'Z\.— Annum  quidem  xitique  teneto ;  Insist  anyhow 
upon  the  year  (i.  ^.  when  this  matter  will  come  before  the  Senate^,  lb.  5,  9. —  Tu  modo 
auctoritdtem  tuam  det'mdito  ;  Take  care  of  your  own  authority  (whenever  there  will  be 
an  occasion  fur  it).  lb.  «j.  10.  10.  -Tliis  nsa/e  is  also  observed  in  anteclassical  language  : 
Abi  hinc  domujn  ;  ranto  hue  cirater  meridiem.  Plant.  Most.  3. 1.  '15. 

lifin.^2.  The  second  person  of  an  afliniiative  iinperative  is  f-eqnently  expressed  by 
cnurMLoceTios  :  1)  by  fac  or  cura  with  a  clause  introduced  by  nt  and  the  subjunctive ; 
2)  by  vtlim  with  a  subjunctive  witiiout  '//  (p.  2t2. 3K  as  :  Fac  ut  considerate  nuviges  ;  Sail 
cautiously.  Cic.  (^u.  Fr.  2,  1. — Cura  ut  qua/n  jm/nnm  venias  ;  Come  as  soon  as  possible. 

gives  the  formula  '  Si  paret  condemndto.  si  non  paret  ab^olvito '  (Condemn,  O  jud^e,  if  it 
is  proved:  if  not,  acquit).  But  in  almost  all  the  other  passages  (lb.  4^3. 46.  50.  51)  ne  uses 
the  imperatives  'condemna\  'absolve'. 

*  If  the  coiitiiigeiicy  does  not  refer  to  the  future,  or  if  the  clause  has  a  present  predi- 
cate, the  imperiiive  is  in  the  frsf  form  :  Si  titi  quid  venit  in.  mentem,  scribe  queeso.  Cic. 
Att.  15,  5,  \.—Si  tibi  res.  si  locus,  si  inslifntuTn  placet,  lege,  qvceso,  legem,  mihique  earn 
mitte.  lb.  12,  36.— //oc,  6^  nie  amas,  priusquam  proficiscdris,  effice.  lb.  5, 4, 3. 


306 


iMrERATm:  sentences. 


lb  Fain  4  16.-T>/i/;?  anhm  .«npuvti  forrique  ^.^ ;  Be  of  a  wise  and  stron?  mind  (T  wish 
y,.'i  w.Hiki'bf.  eto.K  lb.  F.iin.  9.  li.-Often  Qufeso,  rogo,  ob-^ecro  (pray,  I  i'"P><>r^'  >'*•"»  "'« 

;?f//j  W  If  tb.'  prdicate  of  an  afflrmntivo  imperative  sentence  i?  in  the  THiRnrKnM.v, 
it  is  i.M.„,.n,Ilv  pbiced  in  the  present  ^ubjiinrtive  ••p'>cafyfmfas  reip'>hhr.t-  :  I.-:  b.-  ii.- 
tere^t  of  the*  repnhlie  pnvail.  VU'.Oti.  'Ar:i::i.-ntlifno  tt  M^>^  unkpoHUtuv  annntut  ,  Let 
reli-i.H,  iind  di.tv  be  plaee.l  h,.f.,re  friendship.  lb.  8,  \()..-(Jmn,s  >>ciant  ;  May  :dl  know  t^ 
hen  Ep  42-Tlu'TnliU)i>KUsoNof  ilie  skcond  foum  ol  th.-  impkkativk  it*  u-t'd  .  1>  In 
the  i.^ws  of  the  republu-nn  time  (bnt  not  in  th<.se  of  the  latj-r  j)enods.  nor  in  tlie«lccn-e!« 
of  the  S.  nate  or  in  the  edict>^  of  the  n,a-isirates.  ;  ^l^-J'^''^-''  '!''>-^'^'}[%J:\^^^^^^^^^^ 
jiot  »ati-fv  !lie  ind-ment,  lie  (the  ccnph.iiKint»  shall  fetter  bim.js.ll  lab  3.--///?-  /<omi- 
Im».  lann.cuLm  mime  Uclto  ;  It  .hall  be  lawful  for  those  men  to  receive  «'»^t  '  «  ^  '; 
Lex  Crneli  I  de  Qmesfor.  (Uitsehl  C.  I.  n74).-S(,  ,f  thr  lanu'iia-e  of  the  ^^^^:       '  ;\^K^- 

d^h,h,a  hnh,u1o.  lb.Leir.2.s.--2)  In  ri'Bi.ic  tukatiks  with  other  nation;,  a    *»;!;?; ; 

Taurus.   Li  v.  88,  v^. -3)  In  lk.;ai.  instkimknts,  rspeciaMy  ^''^lj''^'''^;;'/"^^^^^^ 
vteu^    Terentuf  ii.ron  vteo'  XXX pondo  rasDnmi  ar(/enfeorum  dato :  ruUuis  shall  jrne 
to  T/Tentil;  80  p..un  is  .,f  silver  v/ss.ls.  Auct.  Her  1,  12.-4.  S..,m-limes  th-    <»rm  ocn,r« 
in  the  poets  u    didactic  ruh-s :  Non  safU  f$t  pulchra 'S.^n>oeinata  ;  duUa  yunto.  et^qiio- 

ireciuentlv  used  in  tin-  meanin-  ■  be  it  ^o  ".    So  Verum  e^to,  let  this  be  true.  Lie.  1-  lace  29. 

C5  4B5.  Netrativc  impciutive  sentences  with  predieate.s  in  tlie  aeeond 
person  are  irenerallv  e.vprcssed  by  a  circumlocntion  of  noli  inoItU)  Willi 
ail  objcct-it'itinitive' (sometimes  by  o/^v  or  by  f^n-  nc  with  a  i>reseiit  sub- 
innciiV.');  more  rarely  by  /w  willi  a  pkukkct  i.UBJiNCTiyH.  It  Hie  pred- 
■jcate  is  in  the  :5.  pef-son,  or  1.  pers.  plur.,  7*^  is  used  with  presknt  siib- 
jimetive  {ne  quu  -  noliody  ;  he  quid  =   mUhinir). 

^^o/i.  Olio,  maj->nnn  iosfi/u'a  r'preheod.r^ ;  Do  not,  O  «ato.  censure  J^e  institutions 
of  our  anc-sf.r-.  V\v.  Mur.  8H,  T^.-XoTHe  id  xelU  ii><od  Jiti  non  ^'^^''^'^  •."';.''  ^^  V;^ 
what  is  nnposHble.  lb.  I'hil.  1.'i:^.-(ktre  ejn.hnm  me  ff 't^>'[/'''«;;  f-V  7',/  }l^ 
not  believr  that  I  have  ?iveii  up  the  care  for  the  rt-pubhc.  lb.  ?  am.  «»^4.—  / //;/«, 
fmter.pnmam  navir,anOne„>  neomi^ens  ;  Do  not  "'i- 'h.;  tirst  <.pportuiuty  ol  sadinij. 
Cir  Qii!  Kr.  2.«.3.-A>  d'dnfiJnx  ea^^  tnWere ;  Do  not  hesitat.;  o  ^eIl(l  ilein  lb-  Att. 
l.(,._Vo<7^m  iiaus  d'-sm  efjestate  lie  aspertuKu^  .^s yio  not  ^lif-'hi  his  J»'^»-.  7^;/-  J '•  *' 
{i.-\e  .sh-  j>,>f>a-Mf '/.'<.  II).  2.  24. -AV  (/>ri<  fa.-'ttdiat  grammatueseleineida  ,  Lei  noi)ody 
rlisihiin  the  elements  of  irr'iinniar.  (Jiiint    1.  4('». 

C  6  AV  with  a />.//e.^  subjunctive  mostly  corr.spoudMo  the  H'cond  form  of  the 
imperative  in  amrnn.tive  sentences.  Ne  with  i,rese,.t  subjunctive  of  tin-  2.  p.  rsoi.  is 
cl    rllv     lUe classical,  as  :  AV  ilium  rerheie.<.    Plant.  Bacch.  4.  8,  110.     In  classical  pn.-e  it 

l;!met  1!::^  iisc'l  of  uncertain  persons;  else  it  is  extremely  «•«''^  j  ,^:  ;t/r,'(;';;.r'r 
ul,<it  nf  leomuK^  Cic.S.  n.  \{).Srnhen  ur  punZre:  He  not  ncirhi;.!  t  m  wn  nnj:.  lb. 
Att  \\  1  —  V^  with  the  lirst  form  of  the  imperative  is  aniedassical  and  poetical  :  .\e  in- 
tHtinbit'viiinl  Hacch.  4  8,  9»).--A>  fafitud.i.  lb.  Asi.i.  2,  4.  5k,.-.\e  cumu  nimis  Ih. 
>Vo't  8  1  «  X\Wfr  .  Vi.-.  .En.K:5l4.-A>withthe  skconi,  FoiiM  of  the  impeiative 
e    her  ii  h  t  M.  seco-.d  or  third  person  is  contine<l  t..  the  republican  laws  in  the  strict 

tum  deruridnes  l^qito,  tuve  »uUe<fito.  mre  coa/>rafo,  m.vt,  etc.  Lex.  Jul.  Munit  (Kits  hi  L. 
1  2nr,  In  «lidactic  rules  and  other  commandments  m  with  lb.-  perf.  subj.  is  .mploved, 
wh  c  ■  nl  ^  'wmjs  be  used,  if  an  altirmaiive  sentence  w<.uld  require  the  second  form  in 
J:!f}.r  omnia  Jcogmfo:  ole.m  „e  oddidenx.CMo  K,  ^-l^rr^- ]^'^^  'pi'in  "  how 
the  Stoics  •  Xihil  vinoveil-;  mmricordiri  c<>mm„tu,^  ne  ^is.  i  ic.  Mur.  81,  »)•>.  Piin>  how- 
.  vr  use.'r^.xvi.h  tTTe  s.cond  fornr  of  .he  imperative  in  rues  on  airncu  ture:  M./c., 
',u.id.crescenteluml.netungifo.  Plin.  U.  N  \sr^5.-^tntuJlunte  ne  aralo.  lb.  18,  ... 

Jiem  6.")  DEPENDENT  imperative  sentences  (J^  413)  are  introduced  by 
vt  unci  if  neiTRtive  by  ne  (sometimes  ut  ne).  Often  the  mere  siibjiinclive 
is  u^ed  instead  of  dt  with  a  snl.jtinetiye.  In  such  clauses,  iieir  takes  the 
place  ni'neoHe  (neither,  nor,  and  not).  See  P.  11.  p.  880;  p.  oU-)  toll. 
^  Peto  a  te  ufid  a  me  neve,  in  hw  reo,  neve  in  aHl^  re^ulrax;  1  ask  you  o  n-quire  this  of 
nu'  neith.M-  in  le-ard  to  this  dHendant,  nor  in  re-ard  to  others  Cic  bam  1,  ^  •  \^-{^^  * 
Jiar JIV \jeMirem  ob^ecraeV  ne  u'nd  grunus  in  jnUrem  statu.r.t :  D.  implored  taesar  n  t 
NMake  an V  harsh  measures  a^au.st  liis  brother.  Ca-s.  jB.  G.  1.  2iy--r^><arLabiluomandat 
Jiemos  adtat  ;  Caisar  orders  Luhieuusi  to  proceed  to  the  Itemi.  10.  6,  u. 


INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 


307 


YII.  Interrogative  Sentences. 

g  116.  Iiiterroi^ative  sentences  express  a  doubt  as  to  the  reality  of  the 
predicate,  implyin<r  a  request  that  the  person  addressed  should  remoye 
the  doubt.  They  are  either  absolute  or  relative.  In  the  former  the 
doubt  refers  to  the  predicate,  the  answer  '  yes  '  or  '  no  '  beinj^  expected  ; 
in  the  latter  the  doubt  refers  to  any  other  member  of  the  sentence. 

Hem.  60.  The  English  absolute  interroffative  sentence  is  distinguished  by 
the  mversion  of  the  predicate,  which  is  placed  before  the  subject,  and  espe- 
cially by  placing  the  auxiliaries  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence.  In  the 
simple  tenses  the  auxiliary  "  do"  is  generally  used,  which  w^ord  neither 
here,  nor  in  any  otlier  case  where  it  is  used  as  au  auxiliary,  can  be  ex- 
pressed in  Latin, 

§  4 1 7.  The  Absolute  interrogative  sentences  in  Latin  gen- 
erally are  introduced  by  one  of  the  interrogative  particles  7ium 
or  7ie,'  without  changing  the  position  of  the  words  on  account 
of  the  question.  The  particle  iie  is  enclitic,  and  is  attached  to 
the  end  of  the  most  prominent  word,  which  then  must  open  the 
sentence.  Num  is  used,  when  the  answer  "  no''  is  expected ; 
ne,  when  the  answer  is  doubtful,  as : 

Meminixtine  7ne  ante  diem  XII K<dendm  Xoremlms  dicere  in  scnatu  fbre 
in  armis—C.  ManUumF  Xum  me  fefellif,  Cafdina,  non  m^do  res  tanta  etc  ? 
Doest  thou  remember  that  1  said,  on  the  12th  before  the  Calends  of  Novem- 
ber in  the  Senate,  that  C.  3Iaidius  would  be  in  arms?  Was  I  mistaken  O 
Catdme,  not  only  in  so  great  an  event,  etc.?  Cic.  Cat.  1,  8,  l.—Xum,  gvw 
tentpixtdx  iniptndettt^  nite.'^  ntelixH  conjieiet  qnam  rjnherndtor?  Will  the  poet 
guess  better  than  the  commander  (of  a  shiii),  what  weather  is  impending'- ^ 
Lie.  Div.  2,  \i—Num  te  fugif  Xum  a  domo  ah^nm?  Have  I  tied  befoTe 
tbeey  Am  I  absent  from  home?  Plant.  Epid.  5,  2,  U.—Ajmllinemne  tu 
jMium  xpolKire  aiisns  eaf  Didst  thou  dare  to  plunder  the  Deliau  Apollo  ^ 
Uc  \  err.  1,  IS.—Itanefacere  oportetf  ]\Iust  you  act  thus?  Ter.  Pliorm  3 
2,42.—Quid/  Duaxne  is  uxores  habct?  What!  has  that  man  two  wives'^ 
ler.  Phorm.  5,  1,27. 

^  litm.  (>7.  Notice,  that  after  num,  aliquis  and  quisquam  must  be  changed 
into  quis  (,N3.)T,  Rem.  4,  and  ^  ;jo9.  Hem.  11),  as:  Num  quis  hie  alius  propter 
meatqne  te  {esty.^  Is  here  any  one  besides  me  and  thee?  Ter.  Andr.  2,  2, 19. 
—In  Servio  Tullio — num  quod  ehquentitz  restiqium  apparet?  In  Serv  Tul- 
lius— does  any  trace  of  eloquence  appear  (in  him)?  Cic.  opt.  gen.  die.  5  10 
NV  hen  n^;  is  used,  and  the  s  ibject  of  the  interrogative  sentence  is  the  second 
person,  tlie  latter  generally  is  ex^pre  sed.  If  it  has  the  emphasis  it  stands  at 
the  first,  il  not,  at  the  S'cond  place,  as:  Vi.sne  tu  te,  Seny\  cohi'>ere'>^  Wilt 
thou  not  restrain  thyself,  ()  Seivius?  Cic.  Fam.  4,5,10.— June  dixeras 
huic?   Hast  iJim  told  him  (that)?    Ter.  Piiorm.  4  3  8 


'  The  interroirative  particle  ne  must  be  distinprnished  from  the  iie<rative  particle  or 
coujiincuou  we;  the  lonuer  has  a  bhort,  and  the  latter  a  long  e. 


308 


Ds^TEimOGATIVE   SENTENCES. 


INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES. 


309 


The  ondin-  -^  of  tho  second  person  of  the  verb,  if  ne  is  attadied  and  ta 
follows   nvuiiriitlv  is  elided,  to-ether  with  the  vowel  e  ot  the  enchtic,  as: 
^I'^Minstead  of  a....  /.),  doest  thou  sayV    Cen^aCtu  ^^  ^rZ,  ^  ' 
doest  thou  believe?     Vu^ta  (for  risue  Oi),  doest  thou  ^^ish  .'     T    '  d    n 
Etrative  hlr,  and  the  adverb  sir  (thus),  Avhen  /^/'  is  attached,  asMuie    h     s. 
]able  ci  before  /..',  as :  ILi^cdne  tua  domus  est,  Is  this  thy  house  .^  1  laut. 

Ani])!!.  1,  1.  r  ^ 

Ucm  (>S  In  rhetoiical  style  the  interrojrative  ])articles  freiiuently  are 
omitted,  as:  Ta  id  nesciebasf  Didst  thoa  not  know  this? 

§418.  If  the  question  is  negative,  and  consequently  an 
affirmative  answer  is  expected,  tlie  sentence  is  introduced  by 
the  particle  ?ionne,  corresponding  to  the  English  negation  not, 
as:  XoHJie  jyottm  post  mortem  nohilltarl  volant/  Do  not  poets 
wisli  to  be  c(dcbrated  after  death?    Cic.  Tusc.  1,  43. 

§  419.  If  tico  (pu'stions  are  connected  by  disjunctive  con- 
junctions* {divnnctive  questions),  each  of  them  must  be  intro- 
duced by  an  interrogative  particle,  the  former  by  utrum  or  the 
enclitic  \,e,  the  latter  by  an,  which  corresponds  to  the  English 
or.     When  the  second  (luestion  consists  only  of  the  words  or  not, 

it  is  translated  by  an)wn. 

Utninir  iqndrant  (k  Q^a'  res  marimfv  sint  ;  an  vim  non  habcnt,  qua  tanfaa 
re^s  n^nf  et  <,enuh  Are  the  irods  i-norant  of  what  the  -reatest  thin.irs 
Ii4  c^  Imve  tl^  (do  thev  lac-k)  theVower,  by  which  theymavsustani 

ami  nde^ueh  thin.^sM^ic^  Nat.  Deor.  2,  77.- I -m'  L'n'inm.  Dnnuhnni  a,i 
^L)jZuil  dTsa'.ut?  Did  you  desert  (from)  L.  Donutnis  or  did  L. 
Domiti;.s  desert  (Irom)  youV  Ca^ar  B.  C,  2,  ^^'^^'r^^'l^ZZ'^is^^ 
no,i  ^  Is  this  (the  man)  for  whom  I  am  askm-  or  not  .''  Ter.  1  hoim.  o,  0, 1.. 

Hem  m    The  En.Mi.h  r>r  cannot  ahvays  he  translated  ^y  ^^:'^Zx^..^!^^^^^^^ 
^^r-;  a;b.;t:ai/mu"  be  uLc]:'aicu^iu,  to  the  rule,  on  ixuproper  di.juuct.ou. 

§  4SO.  An  AFFIRMATIVE  ANSWER  to  a  qucstiou  is  expressed 
by  ita,  Ita  vero,  vero  (yes) ;  sane,  sane  quhlem,  prorsus,  Ita 
prorsas,  omnuio  (certainly,  unquestionably),  or  by  a  repetition 
of  the  predicate  with  t'ero,  corresponding  to  the  repetition  ot  the 
English  au.\iliary,  as: 

^ILis  Gojo^  returned?  ^  llediitne  Gajus  Ita,  vero.j^  ita  vero.-/M^ 
thou  lit  often  seen  my  brother?  Certainly.  Nonne  tratrem  meiim  s^epe 
vid  str^  Sane  (sane  quidem).-//.tr.  not  even  the  most  rewncned  ncen  so,ne^ 
iZXeTpunished  with  death?  Certainly.    Nonne  vel  clarissnni  (n^^  ne- 


quideni)  virl  morte  sncpe  puniti  sunt?  Prorwis  (ita  Y^voTf^u^).— Canst  fho7i 
not  do  this ?^  lam.  ^^mne  lioc  facere  potes?  Possum  vero.— //.^.^^ //*<v,f 
read  Curros  works?  I  have.  Le<ristine  tu  Ciceronis  opera  V  Lcn  vero  — 
Doest  thou  not  remember  that  man  1  I  do.  llliusne  tu  viri  meministi  v 
JMemini  vero. 

Negative  answers  (English  :  Ko,  I  do  not,  am  not,  by  no  means, 

etc.)  are  expressed  by  mirdme,  nunime  vero,  non,  or  by  non 

with  the  re})etition  of  the  predicate  or  copula.     If  a  negative 

or  athrmative  answer  is  combined  with  a  correction,  the  particles 

inrmo  or  hnmo  vero  are  used  {tio  hut,  no  on  the  contrary,  nay 

more,  not  only  this,  hut).     If  an  affirmative  answer  is  coniiected 

with  a  modification,  we  use  omnlno  sed  (yes,  but). 

Num  Uomo'  fuitl  Immojonge  ahfuit.ys^^  he  in  Rome?  no,  on  the 
coiitraiT,  lie  was  far  away.— ///>,  tamen  virit.  Vicitf  hnmo  vero,  etiam 
m  N.'n,itum  venit.  Still  tiiis  man  lives.  Lives?  Nay  more,  he  comes  even 
into  the  Senate.— 6V/'  fat  quidque  qureri.s/  Recte  o/nnino,  sed  non  nunc  id 
ar/itur,  Ihou  askest,  why  everything  happens?  Yes,  rioht;  but  tliis  is 
not  the  question  now.  Cic.  Div.  1,  ;jO,  m.—Xu?n  quis  propinquus  fuit» 
^on  [non  J  Hit),  >V  as  he  any  relation  ?  No  (he  was  not).— .Y/^;^j,  irjitur  erra- 
vius,  Muamerero,  Are  we  therefore  in  an  error?  Certainly  not.— 3'<?/i 
existimas  cadere  in  sapientem  cpgritudinem?  Prorsus  non  arbitror  Thou 
bchcvest  not  that  sorrow  affects  a  wise  man  ?  I  certainly  do  not'  Cic 
lusc.  1,  (j. 

§4*H.  Tho  RELATIVE  IXTERROGATIVE  Sentences  are  intro- 
duced by  one  of  the  interrogative  adjectives  (§§  243,  254,  260 
2(31,  2G.S,  207,  268)  or  adverbs.  To  these  belong,  besides  the 
numeral  and  quantitative  adverbs  {quoties,  quantum,  quam 
[how],  quatitoperc):  1)  the  local  adverbs  iihi  (where),  mide 
(whence),  quo  (wliitlier),  quatenus  and  quousque  (to  what  point, 
how  far) ;  2)  the  temporal  adverbs  quando  (when),  quamdiu 
(how  h)ng,  for  how  long)  ;  3)  the  modal  adverbs  quomodo, 
quemadmodum  and  qui  (how) ;  4)  the  causal  adverbs  cur  or 
quid  (why),  cur  non,  quidni  or  qii'm  (why  not?) 

The  interrogative  adjectives  and  adverbs  frequently  are  made 
more  emphatic  by  the  enclitic  nam,  as:  quisnam,  uhlnam, 
curnam. 

Whosf  Utters  doest  thou  bring?  Cujus  litteras  affers?  (Answ^er:  those  of 
Gajus,  Gaji.)— ]r/f.y  do  you  not  answer?  Cur  non  resp(^ndPtis ''*— ir/^^«/"^ 
does  he  come?  Unde  venit?— H7/f?  has  written  this  Utter?  Quisnam  has 
htleras  seripsit ?— ir//^;v?  ha.^t  thou  been?  Ubinam  fuisti ?— TlV^/'/i  ?ri7Z 
Gitjus  return?    Quando  Gajus  redlbit?— ^?/a^  potest  esse  jucunditas  vitm. 


310 


INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 


INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 


311 


suhlath  awmfiisf  Wliat  can  be  the  cluu'iii  of  life,  after  friendships  have 
been  taken  away?  Cie.  Plane.  S'-i.-Q'io  Sinnluscomulto  era  hoc  lerfato 
penni^Hum^  Aulh.  Curficit?  C^.^c^^/..  ...^  By  what  (  eeree  n  the  ben^ne 
has  this  been  perniitte.l  to  the  dek-ate?  By  none.  \\  hy  did  he  (h>  \\ 
He  was  eonjpclli-d.  Cie.  V'rrr.  ;i,  \Vd.—  Uter  vextrum  cd  cclenorf  Which 
of  you  is  (piickeri'   Plant.  Aul.  2,  4,  42. 

nem  70  We  must  distin«;uisli  between  the  qnnntitatim  and  the  m(^al 
adverb'  -  ho,cr  The  ciuanlitative  /w/^  askin-  for  the  inhnmtn  o\  an  adjir- 
^^rov  adverb,  is  translated  by  gaam  (^  201),  Hem.  11 :  §  30;^,  whde  the  ,nrM 
adverb  A..r,  asking  tor  tlie  ....../•  of  an  action   ^.  translated  by  v;/;;.;-;;, 


The  temporal  aclveri)  quamo  i^wm-n,  :u   >>......   .....v  .,.....>.   .^.    -.••■.•■■ 

ffuished  from  the  conjunction  quum  (when,  at  the  time  when).     Q'ihul  is 
ahrau.  followed  by  the  subjunctive,  conrspondm-  to  oxxv  irhy  should  as 
O.' /,/!./ L../..r//OVhy  should  1  not  rem(niberV(V.;^^^ 
(with  the  subjunctive  only)  in  indirect  qnestums  (^  42X,). 

mm  71  The  eini)hasis  of  a  relative  (piestion  is  increased  by  the  adverb 
tandZ  still  more  than  by  nam).  This  is  often  (  it  icult  to  trans  ate.  It 
cornsiKunls  most  closely  h»  the  En,^lish  collo(,u.al  expressHm  '  m  the 
uorld  "  as.  Quid  tandem  auebatis?  What  m  the  world  did  you  do?  Plant. 
]\len  5, 1, 12.     Often  we  may  translate  it  by  our  "  pray. 

Rem  72  A  relative  question,  introduced  by  uter  {i,  243,  Rem.  5),  may  be 
followed  liy  a  disjunctive  question.  The  tirst  member  must  then  be  con- 
nected with  the  enclitic  ,ie,  not  with  utram,  as:  iter  nosframnopulari,  cd, 
f(m  an  egof  Which  of  us  is  popular,  thou  or  1  ?  Cic.  Kab.  4, 11. 

r,m   -^    In  rol-.tive  nue<ti.)ns  the  EnL>li>h  lanLrna-jfc  dot-s  not  admit  more  than  one 

K    rqutSi  .     m  I  til  .  uvo  or  Hire,  mn-rro^.itive.  may  oc-cur  in  the  ^an.c  ..nteuce. 


En"ii"h.  as:   Ut.v  vtri  inndias  fent ;  Which  ol   ihe  luowMylaid  the  •>,'';:'/,     I, .i^'^  " 

how  ah.u.st  one  t.-trht  drMroyed  an  en.i^i'e  l-nnded  with  -►  tr.eat  ^'1  »'■'»•]  «  •  ^'jI.T: 
Knoqmdc>n,l>f^amxno:  I  km.w  what  1  am  ..wn.i:.  and  'V- '^'"''^'^  n  i  ?i  U,  inu  n7.^  o 
kill  Clo.liiis.  how  great  and  many  occasions  would  there  have  been  I  Cic.  Mil.,  14. 

Rem  74  In  Latin,  relative  questions  may  be  iNCouPOR.vrEi^  in  infinitive 
and  participial  clauses.  Sucli  comhin:'.tions  which  are  called  intfk- 
K()(jvrivh:  INVOLUTION'  must  be  recast  in  En-lish.  as:  Quid  pete nfes 
S;;;^/;)%V^^^s^heolvject  of  your  coming  ?  (literaVly  "  What  askm^  have 
yon  comv'^'')—Qdid  me  fecisse  e-ridimatix?  What,  do  you  think.  I  did  .^— 
*So  with  ablatives  absolute:  Q'la  freqnentid  omnijuufieneruni  prosequenle 
credifis  no.  (\qv,a  profectos  ?  By  what  crowds  of  all  kinds  do  yon  thmk 
we  were  a(;companied  when  we  departed  trom  Capua  i  Liv.  i,  .5U. 

§  4^*1.  If  a  sentence,  by  which  a  question  is  expressed,  is 
dej^emknt  on  another  sentence,  it  is  called  an  interrogative 
CLAUSE  or  INDIRECT  QUESTION,  as  : ''  I  do  not  know,  w/iether  he  will 
"  It  is  uncertain,  hoio  Iohj  it  wllllastr  Such  a  clause  is 


come 


.  ">•> 


cither  the  ohjeet  of  one  of  the  members  of  the  principal  sentence, 
or  the  hnpersonal  subject  of  its  predicate,  as  in  the  latter  of  the' 
mentioned  examples.  The  governing  word  of  the  indirect  ques- 
tion  either  expresses  the  act  o/ askimj  itself,  as  (I  asked,  what 
he  was  doing),  or  it  implies  a  doubt  ovAmcertainty,  in  regard  to 
some  fact,  whicli  is  added  in  the  form  of  a  question,  as:  '''l  won- 
der,  what  he  is  doing ;"  "  I  wislied  him  to  ascertain,  what  was 
going  on  in  thcdcity." 

7?^w.  75.  Clauses,  containing  a  thought  without  any  uncertaintv  or 
doubt,  fretinently  are  expressed  in  the  form  of  an  indirect  question,  when 
^^00".  '''"'^'' ri  f  exclamations  (§  309,  R  41),  as:  S<,pe  m.cum  cogl 
tan,  q,a,n  es,rt  difficile  xensum  m  repubUca  deponere,  I  often  thought  how 
dilhcult  it  was,  to  lay  aside  one's  feeling  for  the  countrv  Here  the  author 
means  nothing  but:  "  1  tiiouglit,  that  it  was  eery  dilhcult,"  etc.  But  he 
conceives  the  thought  as  in  e.rclamati.m  (how  difficult  is  it,  to  etc )  and 
hence  the  sentence  has  assumed  the  form  of  an  interrogative  proposition. 

^  %  J^i:!.  Interrogative  clauses  are  either  absolute  or  rela- 
tive, like  tlu^  sentences,  and  are  introduced  by  the  same  words 
(whether  particles,  form-adjectives,  or  adverbs),  as  if  tliey  were 
expressed  as  independent  sentences.  Only  the  adverb  'quidni 
and  the  particle  annon  are  not  used  in  indirect  questions.  In- 
stead of  them  cur  non  and  necne  must  be  employed. 

The  absolute  interrogative  clauses  in  English  are  introduced 
by  whether  or  If;  iu  L<(tln  by  mini  or  the  enclitic  ne.  If  they 
are  ner,atlve  {whether  not,  if  not),  they  are  introduced  by  7ionne. 
It  the  indirect  question  is  disjunctive,  we  use  ntrum  or  ne  in 
ih^  first,  as  in  direct  questions,  and  necne  (instead  of  a7ino7i)  iu 
the  second  member.  -The  particles  of  tlie  first  member  (utrum 
and  }ie)  sometimes  are  omitted. 

The  mood  of  the  predicate  in  all  interrogative  clauses  always 
IS  the  subjunctive,  subject  to  the  rules  of  consecution  (§  349). 

Legati  cognmcere  jimi  Hunt,  num  PerReus  melon  solllcitasf<ef.  The  ambas- 
sadors were  directed  to  ascertain,  whether  (if)  Perseus  had  solicited  the 
allies.— N;^/y  velm,  locutu.vie  sit  h<pc  verba  ISempronlus,  I  should  wish  to 
knoNv  whether  hempronius  spoke  these  words.— .V^jw^^,  utrum  dux  hodu 

i^s  or  n'T'  ^n'  "^-'^^»'^^^''  ^^J-^»»^^'-  tl>e  general  has  defeatc^d  the  ene! 
mits,  or  no{.—Qua^ucit,  nonne  .^um  ire  mallet.  He  asked,  whetlier  he  did 
no  rather  wish  to  go  with  him.-.S^;>.  et  viultum  hoc  mecum  lo^^MH 
bonuie  an  mail  plus  attukrit  homlnibus  eloquentlee  studlum,  I  have  oftui 
and  ninch  considered  whether  the  study  of  eloquence  has  caused  more 
good  or  evil  to  men.  Cic.  In  v.  1,  l.-Ca^ar  legdtum  cogmscere  Jussit,  qZ 


312 


INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES. 


in  cm 


a^fri^  nererentnr  Ca'sar  directed  his  lieutenant,  to  asrertain  what  ^A  ag 
S  ZUxZZxx^^^^^  >'e-^cUt,  quo  hosUs  iter  fact, -ent.  llie  -eneral 

'cur  Z  ./":";.;.  r'.)/-v'r/.s  1  cannot  understand,  why  thou  hast  not 

announced  tliis  to  the  general. 

12^' >u  :G  In  interro-ative  chuises  the  pronoun  of  the  turd  person  takes 
.,  i  v^v.  ^;  nn   it- T-  terrin-  to  the  h>-ieal  subject  of  the  prnicipal  sen- 

enc^r  i  s:.^as  i^  nSx  dauses  (^.88  and'u.  20)  as  :  Csari  rn  n.n- 
lenct   t   t  hdii  L  ab  iumfias  did  .HtnwixMid,  Ctesar  renienibcnd, 

^iu' w  ;'bo  n  si  e  .^.i-s  ha<l  laid  a  snare  tor  him.  Here  Vc..u.  ,,s 
1  H  1.  ViAl  s^^^^^^i^ec^^^  the  principal  sentence,  and  hen(j^  the  pronoun  htm 
In  tli^'lnlir^ogJal^cVerc  exclamatory)  clause,  must  be  translated  by  ..^., 

not  by  ti.  ,  <•  :.« 

Rem   77    Tntcrro^alive  clinsos  nrp  frnqnonlly  us,-(I  as  sniWKCT>,  of  im- 


I' 


fmuk.Uwl'^it  maUtTS  i.),  ...1  « l.id.  day  s,....ob,xly  .Uc-s .' 

;.,      -«   Tl,p  worils  ;/WW  tlMUK  meertum  f<  fiiUcwed  by  an  intcnoga- 

J:^;^.  '^.^  ist;  '.,.0.;  by  ;^;(^^^ 

S.M:;r;:;t,\\\Tb^cL"M;:L;uhr„c...^,ive  clause  hecon^^^^ 

^zr:tn:s^^f;':."lt;:;^o;i;x;:'=^ 

I  should  tiiink,  that  he  never  said  so. 


parlicleti. 

EXERCISES. 
Coordination  of  Sentences. 
1.  Scienun  promi^io-^t  ei^t^T Ailll-.SrkJS.M^X 

""  >  Promise.-'  To  make  a  promise.-»  To  aunounce. 


COORDINATION   OF  SENTENCES. 


313 


Q\  inirenio  militari,  sed  etiam  sapientia  et  animi  magnitudine  ceteros  Car- 
♦haginicnsls  superavit. — 4.  Nero  i)rovincias  ita  exhausit,  ut  dona  aniplissi- 
Tv.a'  non  modo  reciperet,  sed  etiam  tlagitiiret.^— 5.  Rabirius  se  abdidit,'^  non 
riodo  ut  pa'nam  etfugeret,  sed  etiam  ut  nova  scelera  excogitaret.*— 6.  Sabl- 
Dus  castris  {irithin  the  camp)  se  semper  tenCbat,  ut  {m  thai)  jam  non  solum 
3b  hostibus  contemneretur,  sed  etiam  nostrorum  militum  vocibus  ucmnihiP 
/^arperetur.^ — 7.  Dulce  est  ipsum  pacis  nomen,  res  vero  ipsa  cum  jucunda 
rum  salutaris^  {vM). — 8.  8ex.  Koscius  quum  omni  tempore  {at  all  time)  nobi- 
litatis**  fautor"  fuisset,  tum  hoc  bello  proximo  {in  this  last  war)  nostram  par- 
tem {parti/)  causamque  defendit.— 9.  Quum  omnium  rerum  simulatio  {a 
feigning  of  ererythinrj)  vitiosa'"  est,  tum  amicitiae  maxime"  repugnat.— 10. 
."Non  meis  sed  iSempronii  nostri  periculis  graviter  angor." — 11.  S[ou  exer- 
citus  mihi,  sed  duces  defuCrunt. — 12.  llorlensius  banc  quidem  opinionem 
delendit,  sed  suaviter  {mildli/)  ac  moderate.— 18.  Sempronius  nobilium  auc- 
toritate,  Lucilius  autem  plebis  voluntate  {hv^)  atque  exercitu  sustinGtur. — 
14.  liic  vir  a  plurimis  laudatur;  nobis  vero  Gajus  omnium  candidatorum 
pnestantissinuis  videtur. — l."».  Et  civitates  et  singuli  homines  Concordia  va- 
lent,  discordia  intereunt — 10.   Qiiaestiones  dialecticre  {philo.'fophical)  oi)inio- 
num  gravitate  {(ceiyht)  dijudicari  debent,  non  numero  ac  gratia.— 17.  Reus 
aut  culpam  suani  conlitCri  vlebGbit,  aut  innocentiam  suam  novis  argumeutis 
I>robar('.— 18.   Catinienses  {inhabitants  of  Catina)  sive   metu  {fnmi  fear) 
Athenieiisium,  sive  tiedio'^  belli  i)acem  facere  cupiunt. — 19.  SyracusSni  vel 
vi  coegi  vel  consilio  adduci  poterant,  ut  civibus  nostris  satisflicerent  {to 
gire  satisfaction).— 20.  Facile  est,  multos  vel  liberos  vel  servos  dicere  {to 
•niention),  qui  hujus  rei  testes"  fuCnmt.— 21.  H«c  expeditio  sive  ducum 
{ojficers)  imbecillitute,'^  sive  exiguo  militum  numero,  infeliciter  terminavit." 
—22.  Hoc  oppidum  vi  expugnare  ditticile  erit;  ipsius  enim  loci  natura 
{situation)  et  nuinimentis  validissunis  defendilur. — 28.  Ikec  ego  C(msilia  se- 
cutus  essem,  si  tu  pra'sens  fiiisses.     Novi  enim  temperantiani^^  et  modera- 
tiOnem'"  natura?  tua.'.— 24.  Consilia  tua  ])ertici  non  poterunt;  nam  et  adver- 
sariorum  tuorum  invidia  et  ii)sa  inopia  tua  tibi  obstabunt  {to  be  an  obstacle). 
—25.  liac  pugnjl  nihil  est  nobilius.   Nulla  enim  unquam  tam  exigua  manus 
{band,  number),  tantas  opes'"  prostravit  (to  cru.^h).—2iS.  Pliocio  vitaB  suae  in- 
tegritate  nuilto  notior"''*'  fuit  quam  glorifi  militari.    Itaque  hujus  memoria 
nulla  est,  illlus  autem  fama  magna  (est).— 27.  Qui  talia  affirmant"-' aut  indocti 
sunt,  aut  imi)robi.     ISempronius  autem  et  affirmavit  et  doctus  est.     Ergo 
Sempronius  iinpr()l)us  esse  vidctur.— 28.  Si  Gajus  hoc  dicit,  mentltur;  dicit 
autem :  mentltur  igitur.— 29:  llu?c  erat  loci  natura,  ut  copiaj  nostrse  undique 
{eccryichere)  hostium   telis""""  attingerenlur.'-'^'     Dux   igitur  receptui   cauere 
jussit  {gam  the  signal  for  retreat). 

1.  Eight  towns  of  the  Pra^iestians^*  were  captured,  and  their  fields 
divided.— 2.  This  rumor  was  told  {narrare)  {to)  me  by  Sejus  and  confirmed 
by  my  brother.— 8.  The  army  of  the  Latins  occupied  the  left  bank  of  the 
river  and  that  of  the  allies  the  light  one.— 4.  The  general  censured  the 
indolent  {ignacas)  and  slothful  {soc<^rs),  but  praised  the  active  and  careful 
{ddigenif).—6.  Cavsar  was  able  to  conciuer  as  well  the  bodies  (jf  his  adver- 
saries as  their  hearts  {animus).— 6.  We  intend  both  to  uphold"  tlie  laws 

^  Amplu.^,  fplt'iulid.— 2  To  demand.— »  To  conceal. -<  To  devise.— ^  Somewhat.— «  To 
tease.— 7  lieneticial.— «  Nobility.— «  Adherent.— i»  Vicious,  wicked. -n  Especially,  mostly. 
~^^  Ang&re,  to  trouble,  to  make  uneasy.— >3  Di^^ust.— »*  Witness».- 1*  l>iiioi-aiice.— '«  To 
terminate.— '7  Moderation.—"*  Discretion.  —  »"  Oj>e^  in  plur.,  power.— ^^  Notus.  known.— 
^'  Assert.— 22  Tdum,  a  dart.— 23  Attinyere,  to  reach.— 2*  PrieneslIuus.-26  Sustinere. 


314 


COORDINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


loond)   Dili  also  iiuii  ui  uiuna  v^  ""•»  .*."/.     ^.  -- 

,v\   -To    Vs         .V  l.i..^'s  a  ..  not  s»lH.U.,>lly  (§S  ^<-i.  ^««)  .•■vplame.!/  so  >. 
ll'uu  sliun        r  .  illi.  uH  tlian  .lie  <,tl,ors.-)l.  liy  Ihese  «<.i;.l«  I  .ntriu  not 
.Iq-ii^^   mo  encourage  (.■.■iff.re)  m-v.-Vi.  This  s,.m-l.  (;";"""„''';"';' 
in  J  li,h.  (.«■)  and  ..ny  to  n..;,  .,,,,  darkn-.s  («  -^,,  and  n  .1,.-^^^^ 


til 

to 

l)ri 


dj;rt    UcUsc'  V  4   o     most  .iis^aacelul  lii.'l.t,  bnl  Ih..  mU,  l.gn.n  susian.eu 
V,      ..   .      n  bnl  U,e  arn,y  of  the  San.nites  (Nm.^)  tne<   to  reach       u 


ivilt  rarrv  iiniiiilnhr)  the  first  prize  (i>r,emtiim),  urn  <->aj"=  "■•■  ■"■■";■■ ';7;- 
;     )  the'  llmi.-li).  The  act,  i.y.(»«/«»^W«)  <'f.  "'""^""Irirw:»-  "ted 
f'iJin<    bnt  the  onicliness  ot  Scipio  to  Favonius.— 20.    1  In   w .ii  sumcu 
l^S'fin  she  1      1  ta  Jugnrtlia  unexpectedly  won»  the  Ir.endsh.p  o.  Itoc- 

opinion  either  Of  the  one  (//<•)  or  ot  the  '^l^^^^^y^^^-^^- ^^^^^ 

vontlis  'ire  neri^hin"  either  bv  disease  or  by  the  mnoiU  ot  tin   inunies. 

2      1  mr.-r     I      1   very  show^  our  soldiers,  ^^lletller  conquenni,^- or  con- 

.      tl  e  oh'l^  by  d  SCO  d.-2'J.  A  few  of  these,  either  by  sonie  Ifood]  Or- 

sliii)  of  "-ood  1  inenl,  or  wluit  more  ahoniinable  U</'d>ts)  than  the  iiairLU  an  i 
1      e    nitv  ol- the  vviclved  V-31.  1  shall  tlius  obtain  eitlier  a  certain  lielp,  or 

he  i^oi- 1:'/';  -I  [,ood]  will  i.ouuu.p  ^^  ^j^f^r^^^s't 

^onlre)  the  general,  to  (.^0  «ive  [toj  me  this  ^'«  d^  ^->  >    t     iV  ve  the    i .    v  - 

^i:n:f to'^  ^ledi^'i^v^y  U^^«^^^ 

?,^I)  of  oneCn.-35.  \VY- directed  tins  .na,^  ..r  rather  ummalo 

_aa.  If  thou  liadst  either  praise<l  ^^IJ;'^»""':,"^^™ '^>  '  A'    "i  I'^h  d 
libit  onel  would  now  Heal  thee  more  kindly —37.  Uaniubal,  .liter  lie  iia  i 

qulet^  tUii'' ) '1"^  01"^'-='  ^y  '"■•-''1=*  *"-■'«>  "'•  ''y  '"""'■■^  (/"■<<»■').  '■''^"'veJ 
»«  Gubeniarc. 


mFINITIVE   CLAUSES. 


315 


to  invade  (//^'7r^f )  the  district  of  Neapolis.'-88.  Thy  brother  ^yill  be  able 
mm-^u'-^ltbo^dM^.^^''^  excellently;  tor  evei^thin"'^;:;;"  eLfJ^ 

Zil  t         t    ,f  nr^  ('"^/7^0,-40.  The  treatise  {W,.r)  of  Gajus  ple.ises^^ 
ind  iccnA  ;  V      41    T^  W  forit   las  been  written  more  concisely^ 

and  accurately  —41.  The  Romans  sudden  y  perceived*  a  "-reat  (m-intitv^  nf 

; ;"  ,;m  ^ '  1^''%  ^;^tr"^^  "i^^^  ^'^^  ^^^^^^  ^^-^  hi^i^s[t^;s  t ' 

1  Ti  i-  ^^^  '^^'\'"'  resolved  to  wage"  the  war  in  (//i^)  another  man- 
ei.  Iherelore  he  be-an  to  devastate  the  fidds,  to  take  towns  and  cis- 
tles  {ea.sfenum,  and  to  plunder  the  property  of  the  inh-  itinK  4-^  \W 
while  (/.^cv..)  Jupirtha  was  increa^sing  hTs  tnT>  \m^^^^^ 
Mr  Txv  ";  ?"'*'''  Vf  '"^"r^-  ^''  ^vise^[manj  cai  be  unhajw  Bu  V^^^^ 
;  tl  eVu  ITn,  .m/'V/^""  ?T  notbeunhippy._45.  Thi^Lde  {umbra) 
Wi  be  stormv  - ''^^.  •  ^  "^"^^  '^'\''^\^>'^  ^^,  round  itself-4(>.  The  weather" 
^111  DC  btoim>.      Iherelore  we  shall  stay^-"  home  (ilomi). 

IxFiNiTrvE  Clauses. 
1    Omnes  arbitrilmur,  ducem  nostrum  et  inirenio  et  virtute  prsestare  — 
2    Frater  mens  bene  scit,  Sempronium  lu^c  verba  dixisse.-3  cilTco  "no- 
H,     hostium  cop.as  magnis  itineribus-  approj)in(puTre.-4   Labie  iiis C- 

meUc^l^nint'e^F^^trcmr"  -"«^^^'i^-^-  L.,ail  C.^^'Z^, 
intcULXdunt.— 0.  l<ratrem  tuum  ddigentem  esse  video— 7  Hanc  -lon-ini 
nnn.s  cahdam  esse  arbitror.-S.  Milit?s  impatientls  t\iisse  scribit-Alt^ 
iK-gotia  train  tuo  nimis  dillicilia  esse  novimus.-lO.  ScfmiTtf  foilissime 

^^"S;7''l^^W  T  '"'  ^^^""^"  ^^^^^^^  Posse.-12  Te^^i'c^'dZ 
es^L  aiKlIv  1.— 13.  \  os  ita  vmcere  nunquam  posse  credo.— 14.  Eum  nui  auani 

ita  locutum  esse  existimo  (bHieve).-15.  Lucilius  mihi  sse piss  L  S 
mjnqiiani  aliud  quid  con.perire  potuisse.-lG.  Gajus  J^p^^ul;^ 
m  .  ;;;;  -i^  "^  '•  r"""^""^'''^'  ^^»M)ronium  sui  invidum  esse.-18.  Prater 
o  ?.  ''"'^"'''^"'^  negat.-19.  8empronius  fratrein  suum  redi^se  ^ri^ 
b.t.-20.  Omnes  m)vimus,  mundum  a  Deo  gubernari.-21  €^^86^0  hoc 
iH'gotium  a  Sejo  amdiii  tinltnm  esse.-22.  Brutus  noster  scrhS  La£^^^^ 
ab  omnibus  derKlGii.-2;j.  Ca'sar  se  a  Gallis  deceptum  esS^  ntellex^t ^^^ 
bempn^nius  lianc  statuam  sibi  a  Gajo  datam  esse  negat -2ocV>n.ul  com 

'^r OnnidlVi    n^T^^^^^  "^"""'  "^''^•-"^  multitudine  tenCre.- 

;  dm-o^Omn^^  P     1-  ^*^^^'^'"'T''  ^'"i  t^^l»^*"^^^"  J^^m  moenibus  admov5ri 
vault.— .8.  Omnes  credinius,  solem   longius  distant"  quam  lunam  — '>9 

fcri-edir^'^'o'  quosC^sar  pabulatum  misisl-t,  in  ""  (^^^ 
i^m      ^^   •  -."^^-  <^'""^*«  «^i""t,  mihtes  qui  scelus  aliquod  commise- 

in  t,  gra  lus  pun  ri  quam  ceteros  civls.-31.  Frater  mens  putat  te  hoc  ne- 
golium  tinlie  nol  e,  cpiia  laboribus  gravioribus  proliibearis.-32  '  Meministi 
me  sicpms  hoc  dixisse,  fratrem  autem  meum  alium  opinion^m  Se- 
^3    bempronms  te  male  h)cutum  esse  existimat ;  nihil  enim  m  Lus  iSri- 
posse,  quam  ratiHiiem  illam,  cpia  adversarios  tuos  a-i?ressus  81^-84  Te  4,; 


ver{^r!;^y^:'t^^:;;;^  ^^.  Neapolis.-^  Delectare.-3  ConcUe,  concinnus.-*  Animad- 


nio 


INFINITIVE  CLAUSES. 


PAIiTICIPIAL   CLAUSES. 


317 


1  Mv  brother  writes,  that  Oajns  is  well.-2.  My  father  confirms  [tlie 
reiu)rt];  tliat  the  enemies  are  api)n)acliino:.-;3.  You  all  know,  tliat  the  siiii 
is  lar-er  than  tliC  moon.-- 4.  Cicero  says  {ajo),  that  vn-tue  is  contented  ^Mth 
(/,,A  irscir— .-)  The  ambassador  reports  (nn'tnUrnn  that  the  captiyrs  are 
g{ill  .jiivc  '—(5  We  all  know,  that  cricero  was  th<'  .«greatest  ot  all  Koman 
^vriters— ':  The  seoiits'^  eonlirmed,  that  the  enemies  were  apiiroachmg 
with  ihij)  «n'-eat  quickness.-- 8.  The  ambassadors  answered,  that  their  states 
were  desirous  of  the  friendship  of  the  Roman  p,;,>ph.-«J  The  messen.ir.rs 

announced  to  Caesar,  that  all  Bel-ians  had  ^^l^'^'^'^'^^-^^-^^.^'^Z]^!:^ 
(Jains  ahvavs  was  unmindfid  of  his  duty.-U    1  suppose,*  that  thou  ^Mltt. 
better  than  (}aius.-l2.  I  acknowledge,^  that  I  have  broken^  the  laws  both 
of  God  and  men.— Ul  He  acknowledges,  that  lie  has  committed  that  mur- 
der'—U  We  see,  that  you  have  acted  with  (h,/)  uivat  prudence,  and  have 
well  accomplished  this  whole  business.— lo.  Tiie  mcssen-ers  denied,  that 
thev  had  been  al)le  to  learn^  anythin-  new.-16.  Gajus  denies  that  he  CNcr 
siioke  thus.— 17.  Sempronius  suspects  that  Gajus  is  jeahnis    ot  him.— I». 
Solon   pretended^Mo  be  mad."-ll).  Ariovistus  b()aste(l  0>m<//jw/v),  that 
nobody  had  ever  made''^  war  on  (M  him  with  imimnitv  (?^  2.0,  Kem.  0).  - 
20.  Thnles  of  Miletus'^  (^  112,  B.)  has  said,  that  water  is  the  begmnin-  ol 
everything'-— 21.  Xenopliaues  states  (/(M,  that  the  nnxm  is  inhabited  and 
that'  she  fs  an  earth  with  (transl.  of)  many  cities  and  mountains.-).:-.  My 
brother  acknowledges,  that  the  president"  ot  the  n-pnb he  has  been  killed 
by  him,  and  that  he  has  been  induced"  to  (^//)  do'«  ['tj  by  promises  and 
wihes  "— '^:j  The  chiefs  of  the  state  denied,  tjiat  they  were  Idled  with    any 
envy'or  hatred  toward  (transl.  of)  the  Roman  people.-24.  \V  hen  the  king 
saw   that  he  had  been  deserted  by  the  greatest  part  ot  the  army,  he  sent 
ambi.ssadors  to  (^  3:,1)  treat  for»'^  peace.-25.  If  I  had  learned  ij-orjnoscerc), 
that  the  city  had  b.-en  occuined  by  the  enemies    I  "*V''i?  •'      i-vYmm-v 
turned  there '■^"—20  The  kinir  already  believed  that  he  had  obtained    victoiy, 
when  {r>nn  with  indicat.)  Lucius  ap'proached  on  horseback,'^'' slwrnting,  that 
the  second  line  of  battle  had  been  destroyed*'  by  a  stronger  force     o    the 
enemies.— 27.  When  {cinn  with  subjunct.)  the  duels  ot  the  states  had  un- 
derstood," that  their  tr()oi>s  everywhere-"  were  defeated  by  our  [soldiersj, 
they  implored  Ca'sar,  to  state-'^  the  conditions  ot  i>eace.--28.  Yihen{cu,n 
with  iud.)  lirulus  pretended  to  be  mad,  he  deceived  the  king  in  order  to 
ffive  liberty  to  the  republic.— 20.  We  know,  that  the  diligence  ot  Gajus  is 
frreater  than  that  of  Sempronius,  but  that  the  latter  has  more  talent  than 
the  former— 30.  The  scouts  reported,  that  they  had  been  m  sight  {m  co/i- 
sperfu)  of  the  enemies ;  that  those,  whom  they  Had  seen,  had  had  arms  and 
tliat  their  number  was  much  smtdler  than  that  of  our  soldiei-s.— dl.   1  iro 
wrote,  that  he  had  made  a  most  unfortunate  voyage;'^    tor  the  shij^  wljicii 
he  had  chartered,-^"  had  been  lost'"  by  shipwreck,^'  although  his  lite  had 
been  saved.— ;J2.  (Jajus  wrote,  that  these  atfairs  (/i^'<7.>/^^////)  were  daily  be- 
coming more  diltieult,  becau.se  he  was  assisted  {a(ljuvare)hy  "obody  s  help. 
—33    We  often  observe  {nninmhertere),  that  those  who  laugh  most  (^  tJOX., 
Rem.  14),  generally  (^  80,  3)  grieve  most  if  something  uutortunate  (/<(/r6-/vs<^«) 

»»  TraiHl   ivtre  mon'd  /yy.— '"  To  sue  for  jM-air,  paccm  roi:ftr«'.— "  E<>.  — -'  >an(  l^tl.-      /a 

fi\;,nher  -^5  i„t,.lU'oii'  -'-'^  I  hT<iiu'.-"  Stntuere.-^-^  Transl.  had  sailtd  imst  unJortunaUly 
(iulchx).— ^»  Conducerc— ^^  Truutsl.  had  j)etis/icd.—^^  Naufia;,'iuiu 


has  happened»  to  them.— 34.  The  inhabitants  observed,  that  some  of  the 
besieg('rs-  were  throwing'*  darts,"  and  (^  35«,  o)  that  othei-s  wx-re  approach- 
ing (.v/v^^/zv)  the  town  by  a  covered  way.^— 3r>.  Cjesar  understood,  that  if  thev 
had  re(liiced  (yA'/y>7//<7^/-6)  the  fortitications,  the  end  of  all  labors  was  oil 
hand.  —3b.  1  he  general  observed,  that  those,  wdio  were  attacking  the  first 
line  ot  battle,  were  fighting  with  greater  ener<j:y,'  than  those  who  were 
occupying  the  l„ivst.— 37.  I  hear  with  pleasuie  {gaudeoY  that  thou  hast 


bought  the  estate 


Participial  Clauses. 


1.  datura  repugnante  labor  irritus  est.— 2.  Omne  pondus,  nulla  re  imne- 
ciente,  perpetuo  movCtur  et  fertur.-3.  Astyage  regnante,  Tiiales  Milesius 
detectionem  solis  prajdi.xit.— 4.  Athenienses,  Laced<jemoniis  nihil  sentieuti- 
l»us  {to  peireiee),  navis  ascendGrunt.— .j.  Me  et  t€  consentientibus  nemo  re- 
piignabit— 0.  Graeci,  advenientibus  Persis,  Thermopvlas  occupaveraut — 
i.  C  amillus  novum  exercitum  conscripsit,"  nullo  miihiam  detrectante  '"— 
8.  Darlu.s  copias  suas  duxit,  uxore  et  matre  exercitum  sequentibus— 9  Py- 
thagoras^  1  arquinio  Superbo  regnante  vixisse  vidCtur.— 10.  Trajano  mortiio 
A'A\ns  lladnanus  impeiiuin  (throne)  occupavit.— 11.  Dione  int'erfecto  Dio- 
nvsius   nirsus   Syiacusarum  imperii  potitus   est  {to  take  pofMemon)— 12 
ybnGas,  Trojil  a  Gr^ecis  expugnata,  in  {to)  Italiam  venit.— 13.  Sardanapalus 
yictus,  exstrucla"  incensjlque''^  pyra"  et  se  et  divitias  suas  concremavit.— 
14.  Alii  tela  conjiciunt  {t/iroic),  alii  testudine  facta  oppidum  subeunt  "— lo 
Kegibus  Bruti  virtute  exterminatis'^  libertas  constituia  {to  establish)  est.-^ 
10.  Ucuhs  amissis  alba  et  aira  di.scernere"  non  pos-sumus,  sed  bona  et  mala 
honesta  et  turpia,  utilia  et  inutilia.— 17.  Cajsar,  his  rebus  gestis,^'  lecratos 
civitatum  hnitimaruin  convocavit.— 18.  Sulpicius  consul  bello  {in  t/i/war) 
Maceuoiiico  AntipatiGam  e.vpugnavit  puberibusque'**  interfectis  ac  pra^du 

)mui  miliubus  concessa  {to  Uuice)  muros  diruit  atque  urbem  incendit^^ 

19.   Annocpiiiigeniesimo  quiiiquagesimo  ab  uri)e  condiul  {after  the bnildincr 
of  the  rift/),  Sulpicio  Galba  (et)  C.  Aurelio  Coss.,  Philippo  helium  indicium 
^'':!"T~^-.^'*^^^^  "^^'"^  ^^^  P"^'»"<^  l»anc  rem  saepe  narrilvit.- 21.  Romani,  Hau- 
nibale  VIVO  se  nunquam  secQros  es.se  posse  existimabant.— 22.  Eis  iuvitis 
a  qiubus  Pharus  tenOtur,  naves  Alexandrite  portem  intrSre  nequeunt.-^ 
o?  i'^r^*^  adhuc   rebus'Miomanis  virtus  tamen  inilitaris  ma<>-na  erat — 
^4.  t  ulminum  opera  mira  sunt :  loculis"'»  integris  argentum  coull-Ttur  ''''  ma- 
nente  vaglmr^  gladius  liquescit  {becomes  liquid).— 25.  Novimus,  solis 'defec- 
tionem  nonnlsr*  luiia  novissimfr^  fieri  {happen)  posse.— 20.  PompGjum  tibi 
vakle  amicuni  {kind)  esse  cognovi  {I  knoir),  et  eo  tu  cousule  omnia  qua3 
voles  obtmCbis.— 27.  Solis  occasu'^»  {at)  Ariovistus  copias  suas  multis  vul- 
nenl)us  et  illfUis^'  et  acceptis  {suppli/  ab  eis)  in  castra  {into  the  camp)  reduxit 
— :.8.  Ciesarduobus  maximis  bellis  una  aestate  {in  one  summer)  con^iniWs 
exercitum  paullo  maturius,"  quain  tempus  anui  postulabat,  in  hiberna  {into 
icuitir-quartens)  deiluxit.-" 

1.  While  Tiberius  I'eigned  {regnfire),  the  Parthians='"  ^vere  subjected''^  by 


«v/J  te  tS;     6^'-    ,:'•  ^'^  f^^-^inno  o;^e^^-3  Coiijicere.-4  A  dart,  telum.-^  A  covered 

nr.  H  16T  ^".  '^''';'""'--  Vt  f^r^'Ct. -''^  To  kindlo.-i3A  funeral  pile.-i4  To  ap- 
Po  /.••".  '",  ex  enninate.-i8  To  di8tm-uie.h.-i7  To  carry  out.-i'*  ^  2H  -i»  Burn  — 
(JlrtWf^''  lar^'''''^?''*"/''  '^f  ^a'm-a:^  ;-^.s7y«Wim  in  the  ^inC'.-^i  I^^ul'i.  a  casket,  a  box 
unui .  /a//0.— '"'Contiare,  to  melt.— ^s  Scabban  .—'-«<  Only.— "Absol  decree  to  be  translated 
by  eu;ac%.-"Set  (^  229;.-"  To  mllict.-»«  Sooner.-'^»  To  I^d.-3o  |frtM.-3i  DoTar^^^^^ 


318 


TARTICiriAL  CLAUSES. 


AFFIRMATIVE   SENTENCES   AND   PARTICLES. 


319 


tlio  Eomans. — 2.  Wliilo  tlie  ambassadors  of  the  Grorian  states  were  assem- 
blinir,*  the  army  of  the  Macedonians'''  prepared  to  invade  {invaderc)  Greece. 
— 8.  Wliile  i)leasure  rules,^  tiie  i!;reatest  virtues  are  prostrate.* — 4.  While  I 
Avas  stayinu^  with  thee  {apud  te)  the  vices  of  Dolabelhi  were  unknown  to  me, 
— 5.  WlViie  they  were  tluis  disputinir,  a  Hi^htninir  struck  {Uiiiyere)  the  ship. — 
G.  Whik'  tliis  man  «governs  {gnbcriKlri),  tlie  repul)lic  will  be  safe  {xtdvuii). — 
7.  When  a  storm"  arises/  the  sails"  must  be  struck  {xnbducen^. — 8.  The  sol- 
diers entered  the  city,  LabiOnus  leading"  (/r/</^6'//(/^iV/^^A.*</«/)  the  rear  rank." 
— 9.  The  other  lejj^ions  attacked  {nggredi)  the  enemies,  while  Varro  and 
^iCmilius  defended  the  camp. — 10.  While  thou  wast  absent,  I  received  two 
letters  of  C'icero. — 11.  I  should  wish,  that  all  these  things  had  been  done 
in  my  j^resence. — 12.  Augustus  was  born  while  Cicero  and  Antonius  were 
consuls. — 18.  In  {m/'re  ahlafire)  the  24yth  year  after  the  building  of  the  city 
the  kings  were  expelled  at  the  instigation  of  Brutus. — 14.  Octavianus  hoped, 
that  he  by  the  help  of  Antonius  and  Lepidus  could  take  possession"  of  the 
government.'"^ — 15.  All  these  things  were  done  {f/erere),  when  thou  wast  a 
boy. — 10.  This  house,  while  thy  father  was  living,  was  mine. — 17.  The 
Helvetians  thought  {putdre)  that  against  their  will  no  array  could  enter 
these  detiles.*" — 18.  Gajus  has  arrived,  not  only  against  my  will,  but  also 
w  ithout  my  knowledge. — 19.  The  captives  were  cruelly  {fmlfis)  mutilated," 
more  than  2000  men  being  {irhile  they  icere)  witnesses. — 20.  Iloratius  Codes, 
after  the  bridge  had  been  destroyed  {re.ici/Khre),  crossed  the  Tiber'^  by 
swimming.'" — 21.  Physicians  think,  that  after  the  cure"  of  a  disease  has 
been  discovered,**  the  remedy  has  been  discovered. — 22.  After  Licinius  had 
been  murdered  {occalere),  Constantlnus  took  possession  of  the  empire. — 
23.  After  Darius,  the  king  of  the  Persians,  had  died,  Artaxerxes  accused 
Cyrus  his  younger  (^  291,  K.  11)  brother,  of  aspiring  {that  he  mpired)  to'" 
the  throne.^" — 24.  .lugurtha,  after  [his]  friends  had  died,  the  most  of  whom 
lie  had  killed  himself,  was  suddenly  seized'"  by  a  strange  {mirui<)  insanity."''^ 
25.  The  king  thought  {c.risti/udre),  that  after  I  and  my  brother  had  been 
dismissed,  he  could  commit  the.se  crimes  with  impunity  (ii  220,  K.  G). — 
20.  When  nobody  (^  249)  contradicts,  I  shall  take  the  liberty  {a>mlri)  to 
submit  (propofiere)  this  whole  question  to  you. — 27.  After  these  two  most 
difficult  labors  have  been  accomplished  [by  me]  in  one  summer,  1  shall 
endeavor  to  tinish  the  other  easier  ones. 

AFFiiiMATiyE  Sentences  and  Particles. 

1.  Epistola  tua  gratissima  fuit  Tullife  raece  et  meliercule  mihi. — 2.  Nab 
ego  homo  infelix  fui. — 8.  Njc  tu  malus  orator  es ! — 4.  Nae  ille,  medius 
fidius,  nescit,  parvum  hoc  lucrum"^^  ingentem"^*  sibi  danmum  afferre.'" — 
5.  Meministis  enim  profecto  omnium  harum  rerum. — 0.  Omnes  profecto 
liberi  (piam  servi  es.se  malumus. — 7.  Magnum  profecto  patientite  documen- 
tum  dedistis! — 8.  Hoc  sane  nunquam  credidissem,  nisi  ipse  tu  contirmares. 
— 9.  Gajus  redlbit  sane,  si  hoc  cognoverit  {to  learn). — 10.  Ila3c  quidem  opi- 
nio a  philosophis  nostris  jam  diu  refutflta  est. — 11.  Sempronio  quidem  nihil 
inexspectHtum  aut  mirabile  esse  vidGtur. — 12.  Equidem  semper  existimavi, 

'  ConvenTre. — '  See  §  152,  exc. — '  Dominari. — *  To  be  prostrate,  jacere. — *  Commoveri. 
•  Teinpcstas. — '  Orlri. — "  Velum.—*'  Ducore. — •"  Aj,'men  novissiinuin.— "  To  take  posf<es- 
sioii.  poH/i. — 12  Itcspublica. — '^  Ani,'iistije. — '*  Mutililre. — '*  §  17'.». — ••  To  cross»  l\v  swim- 
iiiiii^,  trandre. — i^  Ciimtio. — "^  InvenTre. — '*  Trans/,  coveting;  {(X>nrupisrerc)  the  throne. — 
'"  Jte^Mimu.— 2»  Corripere. — ^a  Deoieutia.— ^»  Gain,  proGt.— ^*  Euoruious.— ^^  To  caa»e. 


has  res  multo  facilius  reprehendi  quam  emend^lri  posse.— 13.  Sempronius 
q..id,m  pnn.o  respondit,  se  nihil  intellexisse,  delude  (^  201,  116.^8  se7d 

in'*  'Jihn  i;:^^^''  1'"'''"''"^  '^'^=^'"  t^cisse.-14.  Mihi  quidem  nihil  Sc^t^ 
lus  nilHl  iicundu.s  ess<'  potuit.-15.  Omnino  errare  vidrris.-lO.  Verbura 
prorsus  nu  lum  mtell.gn._17.  Hoc  quidem  prorsus  intelligo,  te  d o m  S 
ho..j  nianere  nolle.-18.  Si  aliud  nihil  tieri  potest,  hoc  cert'e  efficiCmus  ut 
mvn^nv  sullrag.onun  numero  quam  unqtiam  antea'yincamur.'^-19. Xc,  s 
l.iudau  non  possunt,  vituperari  cert^.-  uon  debent.-20.  PompPjo  certe:  hoc 
noJerfiT^'^'r  ^^  ^P  V^r^ratmn  fuisse  vidDtur.-21.  vlri  nihildice^e 
potes.  tinge  sa  em  aliquid  commode.''-22.  Si  pecuniam  mihi  dare  ne- 
quis,  velim  consdumi  saltem  des.-28.  Mihi  quidem  etiam  Appii  C^ci  car- 

1!!''V  r  'i^' x""  "'"'  ^!^^^",^--^^-  Video  !dios  etiam  eisdLn  vVtHs  de^I- 
lo.^  esse.— 2o.  ^am  qui  opibus,'  armis,  potentia"  plus  valent,  adversariorum 
stui  it.a  e  inconstantia"  tantum  mihi  i)rofecisse"  videntur,  ut  am  (.^^  et'an 
auctontate  plus  vaIeant.-20.  Nefas  est  nocGre  patri*:  ergi  civi"  Xque 

II  ni  s  oi  V.  n  T  •  ^'^  "1"''^  '^^'"'^:^'"  exemplis  etiam  vestris  contirmare 
(lU)Ltis.— .8.  Velmi  nobis  quoque  orationem  tuam  legas.— 29.  H«c  auoQue 
a  maj,>nl,us  nostns  melius  quam  a  nobis  facta  sum.-80.  In  vfctoHr('' 

uie)  etiam  bonos  de- 

^tissimo  antepono. 

vino  T..  1    .,,T  •       •    X-  — ""  '"'  """'"'«i    acuuuui  {notice). — "d'd.  Ma- 

rius  lel  amlcis  suis  tunestus  erat.-84.  Pra3dones,  agro  Vibonensi'^  depoim- 

aio  -  etiam  urbem  terrCbant.-85.  Olim  seditio  \iMwr^  supplicii^'«  ^m- 

Yssimis  puniebatur;  nuncvero  rebellare  vel  virtus  vidStur.-80.  Is  quidem 

et  yuciliT/-'nb  "'  "'^•^r^^^'"'  ^^'''''  ''''^^''  ^''^'^  vidCtur.-87  Sempi^  is 
n  nn  ?    nf.'        cM>nsen  lunt,  (piam  existimas  ;  nam  et  ille  existimat  homi- 

;  I  i^y-tru  .  V  •'"- ''^"  7^^^'^7  ''^''  *^^^^^  ^^^^^,  lioc  consilium  vel 
unique  nostrum  perniciosum  tore  (that  it  icill  be).-4l.  Turn  demum  beate 
viveie  potes  si  te  ipse  noveris.-42.  Turn  demum  le^rati  lit  eras  d^'^ax^^^^ 
d.i  as,  protulcrunt  {to  shoic).-4^.  Sempronius  hoc  imprimis  effid  yul  ut 
eadein  jura  omnibus  hominibus  reddantur.--44.  On ines  regiS'L  nosU  J 
'^'l^Vl^'^'^.^^'^r  i"^P'-I'"i^  Hutem  ineridiana3.^^5    S^?^ 


a  majoriDus  nostris  melius  quam  a  nobis  facta  sunt— 8i 
vtctor,nyi>\  lirnavis  glorijiri  licet,  adverse  res  {nu.fortam) 
tree  ant  {^hgradi).-d\.  Vel  iniquissimam  pacem  bello  just 
8-.  In  hdibus'-*  musuorum'*  aures  vel  minima^»  sentiunt  i 


1     .  ,     .  '7  o M      •"•I'iiijiio   «vuicui    iiifiKiiuiite.    — 4-,)    iviiriiiT» 

nqS7id  "  'r  No 'l'"^  r'''^'''  ^'7^''-  ^-^^^^^  ii^unrTtc^ 
niipiimis  tui.    —40.  Nos  quidem  omnium  hominum  jura  deiendimus   ora^- 

k^t.  ;^;'/X^To"tr"  "^^^^'•-•-"•-^^-  «^•!?.te  Gra^cai  potissimum  litt^er^ 
4s  \\  .  •  ?'  T^""''^  '>''.^  iieghgere,  aut  illis  certe  posthabGre  ipoHtpom)  — 
,  H..n,       /• ''  '''  ^'-'  l'*^^'-^-^""^'»^  lil>ns  delectari,  qui  non  solum  pulchra  sed 

lam  utilia  proponunt  {teach).-^^X  Cjcsar  h.ec  ea^  maxime  latiom  fecit 
ut  mercauu-es  i M.tius  inwrermdUy)  provinciam  nostram  adl^^^  ^  ' 
-.>0.  llui  condiliones  a  legatis  rejects,  sunt,  pra^sertim  cum  militumiram 


320 


AFFir^MATIATi:   SENTENCES   AND   PARTICLES. 


tin,?reTit-5l.  Si  celeritor  pro-rcdi  vis,  libros  utills  poluis  qiiam  jucnm  03 

bant ''  ab  lioc  potissimum  nuMlico  curiln^'  volPbant.— .>4.  I cmi.H iiin  du-taniKL 

nu^ll;  it'  sullat.  i^mniJulate,)  sunt,  nt  (..^/.^O  vd  --<;^J--;;;^-^;;^: 

(Kiilis  tiTC  viaoiv  ant  nianibus  :ittiimcrc^  vidfaiiiur— .).).  llor  \>ilnus  pi(  pe 

HH le      it -5(i    Hoc  noil  tani  luc,  quani  te  cldectabit,  qui  illliis  loci  propc 

ncmi  p^tut  !<Woe.-57.  Duo^tVre  militum  niillia  interh'ctn  suiU  ac 

iria  circitcT  millia  viibienTta.-oS.  Has  nngas  satis  ^^'^'^V    •        ii::i    nonnt 
vix  a  sapicntissiniis,  muUo  minus  a  bailvuis  at(iue  uuloctis  iiitdbgi    ueun t. 
liod    Nulla  tbrtasse  inveutio«  gt'iR-ri  humfiuo  ulilior  tuit,  quam  lUa,  qua 
libros  impriniere'  docCinur. 

1  Nothin-  by  Hercules,  can  ever  induce  {adducere)  me,  to  c  lan-c  {depo- 
r..-.)mv  political  views.«-2.  Verily,  Corrueius,  thou  art  a  kind  ^^ccuser  - 
3    I  indeil  iun.uesUonnbly)  was  lucky  "  to»  have  seen  tb;U  •-"  ^^^^^^^  -^ 

^A/.  tinie.-4.  Indeed  that  man  is  an  honest  ^1»»^'  ''-"^.vT^  os\T  U  tlilVic^^^^^ 
«t.t..  w  -T  «r.vat  crime  indeed  !— 0.  To  know  one  s  self  (^  281)  i^  cliincuii 

a"i-own  (pube^)  [man],  trealin-  puerile  [tl.injrsl.-«.  //'«  n>an  "Hk-e    « 

be  s^^tdflea-  «ith  m  lir.s.-10.  I, on  n.y  part,  ''^"^f  ^^« ,'''"  |  '',,rCt 
nulre),  that  a  wise  n.an]  can  never  be  unl;appy.»-U.  Caj  >  ^'^  -^"A.  ;' 
he,  oii  bis  part,  could  be  i.ulu<-ed  by  nothing,  to  d''  ''--l-  J  '  '''^; '  ^ 
n-..Ii.ei- the  Vame  as  (S  30U)  voii  have  said  before.— 1-1  1  In»  opinion  siuns 
g^r  c^i"?"-^.^-:^U.  lUce  make  tl- att-j>>  o-' -^^^Jj-  -^;^-  / 
^  ill  be  beaten  ^vlncere).-\r,.  Copernicus  cert^imly  did  "*f^^^"^  y,'  J '.  ,/;^^ 
theorv  (ruiiAA  had  alreadv  been  advanced  {propoMre)  by  Hipi  an  h  i> 
16  It  an  one  at  all  can  perform  this  business,  Brutus  certainly  will  be 
able  t;  <)Ttl  -17  If  nothln,^  else  has  been  etiected  by  these  stru.-les  {c.r- 
^  .It  s  least  seems  to  IkIvc  been  gained,-  that  our  rqmbhc  can  m-ver 
be  dissevered- or  divided.-l8.  Thou  hast  refused  to  act  tiipc.dt :  dl  (  - 
L  iu  least  thy  opinion.-19.  Also  Cesar  had  the  ^'^^^'TT^^ 
Is  understood  [perspic^re)  also  by. us -21  I  shall  «^1^1  ^^1;^  /  =;:  ;  '"^^ 
rtiruv^sl  are  repu-nanl"  to  our  neighbors/'*  which  to  u^,  on  oui  P'  ^;  s(  oil 
e  i  ?lv  oleral  k>  and  even  good.-22.  Even  thy  brother  has  ^*,""^  ^^'^  y 
nr oceedin.'s  --2:J.  Our  citizelis  are  well  received  {e.rni^re)  even  by  the  in  >t 

i;:;m^  muions  (,.;.).-24.  A  good  ( proOn^  V"^;'';' H  ^nd^li'"  ^  U  2  - 
[buti  a  bad  {lmpr^^ni>^  man  slanders^'  even  his  bt'^t  fiiend^  1?^  o.>>    1|-  -  . 
'^5.  I  should  wilh,  that  this  would  also  happen  ^c,,ure)  ^^ ^^^-^"^ 
said  the  same  thing;  but  even  /a.-^  opinion  may  {can)  easily  be  letuted.- 
2^ T  is  cHme  can-  been  committed  only  by  some  cowanUy  [man].- 

28.  Vli  t     lesticm  can  be  solved  ^A,ere)  ^>y  the  .U^reatest  scholars  onb^- 
2')    Only  this  1  intended  to  remark  {monen),  that  ././/•  adherents     at    east 
h  tVJ  neve    ackn(>whdged  {agn^.^cere)  that  law.-:iO.  This  man  avers  {ajo) 
IKU  he  has  paTd"  300o"sesterces  (P.  I.,  p.  183),  while  {cam  with  subjunctive) 


NEGATIVE   SENTENCES   AND    PARTICLES. 


321 


the  treasury'  has  received  {accipere)  two  thousand  onh^ — 81.  Then  only 
shall  we  be  happy,  if  we  shall  prefer  («/i^€j;o/i€r6')  the  commands  {pycpcep- 
tuin)  of  God  to  our  pleasures. — 32.  TJien  only  did  Liscus,  encouraged'^  by 
the  address'"'  of  Ca'sar,  disclose*  what  (J;  300,  R.  27)  he  had  ccmcealed^  before. 
— :]3.  !Say  only  the  word,  [and]  we  gratify  thy  wishes." — 34.  The  general 
exhorted  the  soldiers,  but  esi)ecially  the  centurions,'  to  {ut)  search**  most 
carefully"  the  forest. — 35.  L,*elius  had  selected*^  just  thU  place,  because  he 
intended  to  live  as  ((uietly  as  possible. — 30.  Chietly  by  these  reasons  I  have 
been  induced,  to  embrace  {.s(/,^cl])ere)  the  cause  of  Roscius. — 37.  If  it  seems 
strange**  to  somebody,  that  {infi/t.  da u xe)  }ust  I  have  undertaken  this  busi- 
ness, I  should  wish  you  to  understand,  that  nobody  else  was  willing  to 
expose  {objicere)  himself  to  so  great  a  danger. — 38.  I  believe,  that  you  are 
willing  to  gratity  my  wishes,  esi)ecially  since  the  war,  which  is  imminent 
{i  in  pen  lie  re)  to  the  republic,  can  be  prevented  {prohibere)  by  me  only  (^  278). 
— 31).  The  enemy  can  never  cross  this  line  {Jinis  plur.),  especially  if  our 
generals  are  watchful  {nyihins)  and  attentive.— 40.  Our  fellow-citizens  have 
always  been  exceedingly  partiaP"^  to  this  man. — 41.  We  rather"  hear  that 
we  ourxclve,%  than  that  others  are  praised. — 42.  Then  we  saw  the  veiy  flame 
of  civil  discord  or  rather  of  war. — 43.  B}^  this  naval  battle  the  power"  of 
the  Athenians  was  almost  destroyed  {exxtinffuere). — 44.  Almost  nobody  will 
deny,  that  these  conditions  were  entirely  fair. — 45.  The  laws  almost  of  no 
state  are  as  free  as  ours. — 40.  These  laws  are  now  nearly  obliterated*^  and 
tbrgotten.'" — 47.  We  Imve  lost  quite  enough  money. — 48.  Caesar  explained 
his  opinion  chiefly  with  these  words: — 4'j.  This  city  is  about  20,000  paces 
(^  311)  distant. — 50.  ^Vllen  these  [events]  transpired  {evenire)  we  were  al- 
most in  sight  of  the  Gallic  shore. — 51.  In  {by)  this  skirmish"  the  enemies 
lost  quite  400  [in]  killed  and  about  2000  prisoners  {capfuff). — 52.  The  Gauls 
complained  esiu'cially  {qneri)  that  {quod  with  subj.)  almost  in  their  sight 
their  towns  were  pillaged  {din'pere),  their  fields  devastated  and  their  wives 
and  children  carried  away  {abducere). — 53.  The  sight  of  nothing  perhaps 
has  delighted  me  more,  than  the  triumphal  procession  {triuniphns)  of  our 
general.  —54.  The  soldiers  were  so  few,  that  they  scarcely  tilled  {co/nplere) 
one  ship. 

Negative  Sentences  and  Particles. 

1.  Newtonius  baud  mediocri'^  sane  ingenio,  totam  banc  rationem  {theory) 
excogitavit.*" — 2.  llostes  milites  nostros  aggredi  ausi  non  sunt. — 3.  Ca?sar 
yEduos  graviter  vituperavit,  ([uod,  tam  propinquis  hostibus,  frumentuni 
ab  eis  missum  non  esset. — 4.  Liscus  respondit,  se  hoc  facere  non  potuisse, 
quum  frumentum  in  agris  (//i  the  fields)  inxiXZwwm^'^  non  esset, — 5.  Ariovistus 
Ca?sari  respondet,  C()i)ias  suas  hostem  non  verJ^ri. — 0.  ]Magnum  est  nomen 
ejus,  qui  non  manibus,  sed  vapore*'  nos  laboriire  docuit. — 7.  Gajus  non 
me,  sed  te  invitilvit.— 8.  Liber  iste,  qui  tunc  omnibus  notus  erat,  nunc 
fere  non  legitur. — 9.  Ne  barbari  quidein  talia  credunt. — 10.  Ne  summi  qui- 
dem  homines  has  res  explanare  possunt. — 11.  Si  ejusmoui  labdrem  sus- 
cipere  velles,  ne  Herculis  quidein  vires  tibi  sufficerent.''"^ — 12.  Cajsari  hoc 


coul(f  be  committed.-"  Homo.-"  Numerire. 


322 


NEGATIVE   SENTENCES   AND   TARTICLES. 


opus  ne  incipere  qiiidem  liciiit.— 13.  A.  Si  hoc  ita  est,  tribimi  plobis  ciinl- 
bunt,'  ut  jus  tuum"^  tibi  a  populo  mUlruur.*'    />'.  At  tribuni  plebis  me  ne 
aiuliC^runl  (piidcm  !— U.  Labii^nus,  quuni  0:^:ir  nonduin  adc^ssct,  prci'liiini 
ditrcrre  constituit.— M.  Natura'  U'i>is  a  niorlalibus  nmtari  nuUo  niodo  pos- 
g,,„t.— If).   His  rationibus  Epicuri  opinio  probilri  omnino  non  potest. — 17. 
KxploratOres*  Cajsari  nuntiarnnt,  se   nilnl   omnino  vidisse.— 18.  Xulhuu 
omnino  ncgotium  invito  dco  tieri  ])otest.— 19.  Nihil  omnino  iK'iticcre  scitis. 
—20.  Nullum  un(iuam  militcm  Alcibiade  tbrtioirm  novi'ranuis.— 21.  Dux 
t'xistimavil,  hostis  jam  fugciv,  neque  nostrorum  impi'tum  sustini^re  posse.—' 
22.   Lucullus  belli  uloriam  imi)ilmis  appetlvit,**  neiiue  minus  jjloi'ue  quam 
divitiarum  cupidus'erat.— 23.  Hoc  sane  quam  dilii;entissime  faeia.m,  neque 
a  me  ulla  res,  qme  (pudem  tibi  eunu  eiit,^  nei^liiiCtur.— 24.  Oppidani  necpie 
niuros  defendere,  ne([ue  oppidum  hostibus  tradere  voluCiiml. — 2.").  Consul, 
postquam  vidit,  urbem  neque  vi  neque  dolo  capi  posse,  obsidionem  relin- 
quere  [to  raiae)  coustituit.— 20.  Captlvos  inermis  interticere  nee  debCmus 
nee  volumus.— 27.  Gajus  hoc  opus  non  modo  non  linlvit,  sed  ne  inehoavit 
quidcni. — 28.  Hi  juv^nes  non  modo  timidi  non  sunt,  sed  etiam  audaees  ac 
temerarii  tieri  videntur.— 211.  Kiro  autem  ita  sentio,  Latlnam  linguam  non 
modo  non  inoi)em,'  sed  locui>letiorem'*  esse  quam  Gracam.    Cic.  Fin.  1,  3, 
10,  _30.  Non  modo  res  {the  event)  me  non  feiellit,"  sed  ne  dies  qindem.— 
31.  Non  modo  aMernam,  sed  ne  diuturnam'"  ciuidi-m  jrloriani  asseeutus  est. 
—32.  His  rationibus  non  modo  sapientis,  sed  ne  insii)ientls  quidem  deeii)ere 
potes.— 33.  Ea  enim  est  coniltus,  qua'  ei  non  modo  diL::nitatis,  si'd  ne  liber- 
tatis  quidem  partem''  relintiuunt.— 34.  Nihil  menti  tam  netarium  est,  quam 
voluptas.     Nee  enim  libidine  dominante  recte  coii:itnre  ])o.ssunuis. — 35.  In- 
terea  rex  ali(piot  Illvria»  oppida  exi)uguaverat  et  thraeiam  invadere  voluit. 
Nee  vero  Lacedienionii  quievCre.'"'— 30.  Dux  Aristldem  .Etolis  auxilium 
tVrre  ju.ssit.    Neque  tanuni  hie,  invito  rege,  obsidionem  relinquere  voluit.— 
37.   Curare   debCmus,   ne   benignitas"  nostra   major   sit   cpiam   laeultates 
{m€an)<).—SS.  lingo  te,  ne  ejusmodi  nugis  vitam  eonsumas."— 39.  Dux  htcc 
prtEcGpit,'*  ne  quis  militum  se  neseio  navis  relinquere  i)osset.— 40.  Casar 
omnis  equos  amovCri'"  jussit,  ne  cui  ulla  fug*  spes  reliqua  esset."— 41.  Ihec 
Cjesar  ea  maxime  ratione  fecit,  ne  quid  ab  hostibus  serio  (i^  09)  susciperP- 
tur.— 42.  CopiiE  flumen  transiOrunt,  ne  ab  hostibus  circumirentur."— 43. 
Non  punlmus  homines  quia  i)ec(arunt,  sed  ne  peccent.— 44.  Socrates  ita 
locutus  est,  ut  non  supplex  aut  reus,  sed  magister  aut  dominus  (/•<//*/•)  judi- 
cum  esse  viderCtur. — 40.  Hjcc  quastio  tam  ditficilis  vidctur,  ut  a  nobis  qui- 
dem solvi  ncm  possit.— 40.  Dux  milites  hortatus  est,  ne  deticerent,"  neve 
hostis  fugientis  vincere  ])aterentur.— 47.  TimGbam,  ne  evenlrent  ea,  (luae 
accidPrunt  {came  to  y >//.•*.-<).— 48.  Casar  postulavit,  ne  (iermanos  frumento 
neve  alia  re  adjuvarent.— 49.  Video  te  onmis  labores  subire,  ac  limeo  ut 
sustineas  (^r>.<<).— 50.  W'reor,  ut  pons  ille  satis  lirnuis  sit.— 51.  Non  vereor,  ne 
hunc  laborem  terre'^"  non  possis.— 52.  Hannibalem  non  magis  (i^  412)  bar- 
barum  quam  Scipionem  tiiisse  credo.— 53.  Alcibiadem  non  tam  pertidum 


1  To  take  caro.— "  Jx.'i  f^io/m  {uifHrn.  twim,  etc.),  literally:  one's*  (my,  thy.  etc.)  n<;ht, 
or  a-  Via  sav  in  English:  j//.v7?^v.  Tlie  \\ot(\.  Justitia  can  only  be  used  in  an  abstract 
geli-e  —3  To  reudt-r  — *  Sci>ut.— *  To  covet.—*  Qiav  qid^lnn  tibi  o/ne  erit.  Siidi.  at  least, 
a«  you  will  care  fur.—''  Voor.—''  Rich.—»  Hex  nw  non  fallif.  I  am  not  di-ceiyc-d  in  a  tlnnir. 
The  negation  oltcn  W«  retained,  when  the  common  predicate  is  expres-ed  in  the  hr^' «>i 
the  coordinate  members.— »<>  Lastinir— "  The  part  of  freedom:  thai  is:  the  ktatt,  the 
condition  of  freedom.— 12  Ouiescere,  to  remain  quiet.— >3  B.nevolence.— »*  Voruiumere,  to 
equander  away.—"  I^ee  pnecTpit.  «rave  these  directions.— >«  A/norere.  to  remove.—'^  A«- 
Itquum  esse,  to  be  left.—"  To  outflank.—»»  Dtjictrc,  to  fail.—''»  To  endure. 


NEGATIVE  SENTENCES  AND   TARTICLES. 


323 


atque  impium,  quam  levem*  et  imprudentem,  non  tam  negligentem  quam 
ineuriOsum*^  tuisse  novimus. — 54.  Themistocles  non  minus  celeriter  gessit" 
res  quam  exc(»gitavit.'' — o~).  Scio,  te,  quum  hac  tierent,  nondum  uatum' 
tuisse.     Non  ergo  qua  uimc  ais  vera  esse  possunt. 

1.  Thou  hast  undertaken  no  difficult  business  indeed. — 2.  It  was  not  al- 
lowed to  the  Gauls,  to  imi)ort  Mine. — 3.  Thy  friends  do  not  desist  from  slan- 
dering us. — 4.  The  Senate  is  not  accustomed  (j^  342,  11.  4)  to  make  {inferre) 
"war  on  {to)  the  weak. — 5.  The  soldiers  did  not  siLspect,  that  the  mountain 
was  already  occupied  by  the  enemies. — 0.  The  soldiers  could  not  be  in- 
duced, to  {at)  renew  the  attack. — 7.  The  enemies,  since  they  had  not  been 
assisted  {adjumre)  by  [their]  allies,  could  not  sustain  the  attack  of  our 
legions. — 8.  Lucilius  felt,  that  not  Sulpicius,  but  he,  was  designated  by  the 
speaker  {orator). — 9.  They  said,  that  they  did  not  fear  the  etieiny^  but  the 
bad  loads,^  and  the  vastness'  of  the  forests. — 10.  Themistocles  was  not  less 
dislinguislied'^  by  [hisj  diligence,  than  by  the  quickness  of  [his]  mind. — 
11.  Thus  50,000  of  the  barbarians  were  beaten  by  no  more  than  10,000  of 
our  soldiers. — 12.  So  great  a  fear  suddenly  seized  {occupdre)  the  army,  that 
the  souls  and  minds  of  all  were  not  slightly  {nudlociiter)  disturbed. — 13.  We 
have  not  yet  learned  {diacere),  that  by  battles  and  wars  the  lot  {fatam)  of 
the  human  race  is  ameliorated." — 14.  Not  even  by  the  greatest  scholars  can 
future  [things]  be  foreknown  {jii'iEsc'ire),  unless  they'"  have  been  deter- 
mined" by  certain  laws  of  nature. — 15.  Gajus  ccmld  not  even  nnderstand 
these  words,  but  Semiuonius  did  {facere)  almost  everything  he  had  been 
directed  [to  do]. — 10.  The  laws  of  nature  are  of  that  kind,'"^  that  they  can- 
not at  all  be  violated  with  iini)unity. — 17.  The  soldiers  of  the  allies  com- 
plained {fjUivi)  that  {qnod  with  subj.)  they  had  not  received  any  booty  at 
all. — 18.  The  general  saw,  that  he  could  by  no  means  break  {perfrittgere) 
the  battle-line  of  the  enemies. — 19.  The  soldiers  saw,  that  they  could  not 
find  any  provisions  at  all. — 20.  We  know,  that  nobody  ever  was  wiser  than 
Plato. — 21.  We  never  knew'  {novixsc)  any  greater  scholar  than  V^arro. — 22. 
No  less  than  10,000  of  our  soldiers  were  killed  or  wounded ;  nor  was  this 
battle  more  destructive'"*  to  us  than  to  the  enemies. — 23.  Casar  saw,  that 
this  was  dangerous  to  the  Roman  peoi)le,  and  did  not  think  {eHstimnre)^ 
that  they  ought  {debere)  to  tolerate  {ferre)  the  arrogance  of  Ariovistus. — 
24.  We  perceived,"  that  the  enemies  were  retreating,'*  and  that  none  of 
them  dared  to  show  [their]  faces'"  to  our  soldiers. — 25.  It.  is  known,"  that 
the  Scythians  aie  barbarians,  and  that  no  arts  at  all  are  practised"* by 
thein. — 20.  Nothing  is  more  remarkable'"  than  this  battle,  and  never  did 
so  small  a  band'^"  crush'-'  so  great  a  power  {opes). — 27.  These  [men]  could 
neither  control"-  their  faces,'"  nor  sometimes  restrain"*  tears. — 28.  Ariovistus 
remarked  [iiicei-e)  to  Cuisar,  that  he  declined*'^  neither  his  (Caesar's)  friend- 
ship, nor  that  of  the  Roman  people. — 29.  The  officers'^"  declared,  that  they 
neither  dared  to  leave  the  town  without  Caesar's  will,  nor  were  able  to 
(lefenil  the  walls,  if  the  enemies  should  make  {sid)).  imperf.)  an  attack  with 
{by)  all  troops. — 30.  The  most  renowned  citizens  not  imly  did  not  disgrace,^' 

'  Fickle. — 2  Careless. — '  Gerere.  to  carry  out. — *  To  conceive. — ^  \afus,  born  :  here  used 
as  a  preiiicative  adjective.  Natuin  fuisse  is  not  a  perfect  iutinitive  of  nasci.—^  Bad  roads, 
viarum  an<j:ustiie. — '  Mairnitudo.— »  Tobe  distinguisUed,  ])ra'siftre. — ^Translate:  is  made 
better. — i"  TranM. :  unless  which  are  determined. — '^  Detinlre. — »'-  Transl. :  are  those 
{is,  ea,  ic/).— 13  Fuuestus. — ^*  Auimadverlere.— ^*  To  retreat,  se  recipere.— 1^6'6\  in  the 
eing.— »7  Connta!,  with  an  infinitive  clause.— i'  Exercere.— i«Xobilis.— ^oManus.—  21  Pf^. 
Pternere.— 22Fingere.— "  Vulius  (sin»,',  in  Latin).— 2*  TenSre.— '^^  Kypudiare.— 2«  Dux.— 
*''  Contamiuare. 


324 


NEGATR^E   SENTENCES   AND   PARTICLES. 


but  ereii  honorctP  themselves  by  the  blood  of  Saturnlnus  and  Flaccus. — 
31.  But  tiie  general  did  not  on'ly  not  pursue  the  fleeing  enemies,  but  not 
even  followed  [them]. — :J2.  We  accused  Grac<'hus,  but  thee  we  not  only 
cannot  accuse,  but  not  even  censure. — 3^3.  I  believe,  that  tln'se  not  oidy  are 
not  wise,  but  not  even  sane. — VA.  These  words  were  uselos ;  for  the  sol- 
diers were  unwilling  to  deliver  their  general  to  his  adversaries. — ;>.").  I  em- 
l)loy  thy  Sulpicius  to  everything;  for  I  do  not  think  {jxdicare)  that  any  of 
thy  relatives^  is  more  prudent,  nor  more  attached*  to  nu'. — ;J0.  Our  horse- 
men returned  (/v  re///),  after  they  had  i>ursued  the  tirst  battle-line  of  the 
enemies  for  some  time;*  hut  they  had  not  perceived''  that  the  ci'ntre"  had 
in  the  mean  tinu-''  occupied  the 'town.— 37.  We  nuist  piaise,  but  not  cen- 
sure these  etforts"of  the  young  men,— 38.  Pyrrhus  tried  to  bribe  Fabricius; 
the  latter,  however,  could  not  be  iiuluced  tol)etray  his  country. — 311.  Cesar 
gave  orders  (in/pcrdrc)  to  his  soldiers,  not  to  throw  {eotijicen)  any  dart  at 
all. — 40.  Ariovistus  said,  that  he  was  not  so  barbarous  {Imrharux),  as  not  to 
know,  that  the  Romans  had  never  before  carried  {ferre)  help  to  the  .-^]du- 
ans. — 41.  Ariovistus  demaiuled,  that  Caesar  should  bring"  no  foot-soldier 
[with  him].— 42.  Ca'sar  demanded,  that  Ari(»vistus  should  retiun  the  hos- 
tages, that  he  should  not  trouble'"  the  ^Eduans  [any]  longer V////y/////.s),  nor 
make  war  on  the  latter  and  their  allies. — 43.  Casar'did  this,  lest  it  might" 
be  said,  that  he  had  circumvented  {eircumvcnur)  Ariovistus  by  treachery. — 
44.  Cicsar  was  afraid,  that  the  Germans  might  be  troublesome'"^  to  our  pro- 
vince.— 45.  1  admonish  you,  never  to  {that  yoii,  etc.)  lose'^  [your]  courage 
by  anvbody's  injury. — 40.  We  denumd,  that  nobody  be  accused  for  having 
end)raced'*  the  cause  of  the  enemies. — 47.  1  am  afraid,  that  some  one  (»£ 
you  also  may  have  this  opinion.— 48.  The  general  i)iil)lished,'"  that  no 
(5^  2G3.  foil.)  wine  should  be  given  to  the  soldiers,  ami  that  no  sutlers'^ 
should  enter  {adln)  the  camp. — 41).  I  am  afraid,  that  1  cannot  accomplish 
^vhat  I  have  undertaken.— oO.  1  am  not  afraid,  that  you  should  not  acct)m- 
I)lish  this  business.— 51.  The  soldiers  were  afraid,  that  !Scii)io's  wound  was 
mortal."— 52.  I  think  {exist imdre)  that  Semju-onius  was  as  little  skilled'* 

-53.  I  accuse  thee  of  this  crime 


declared,  that  he  had  not  intended  to  dimiuitih  the  pay  of  the  st>kliers. 

iMrERATivE  Sentences. 

1.  Cela  iram  tuam,  et  die,  si  quid  mali  fecimus.— 2.  Abi,  Parmeni,  et  me 
venisse  nuntia!— 3.  Salve,  mi  frater,  gaudeo  te  advenisse. — 4.  3Iilte**  hunc 
virum,obsecro,  autme  abire  sine.— 5.  Ora,  (piuj  exoptas  ;'"*  dabo!— 0,  Keddc 
luihi,  O  Vare,  legiones  meas !— 7.  Audlte,  di,  audlte !  obruite  ira  vestril  sce- 
leratum''"  istumi— 8.  !Si  irati  estis,  ()  di,  me  potius  pnnlte,  ([uam  patriam 
meam!— y.  ValGte,liberi,  et  qunj  meditamini  audacter  ac  forliter  e.xsequi- 

»  none^tflre.— 3  \*ro\nr\a\\\\)i.—^  Attached  to.  amanf»  with  gen.—*  For  some  time,  aliquam- 
diu.— '  Animadverteir.— «  Centre,  media  acien.— "^  IiitcTim.— "  Studium.— »  Adducere.— • 
1«  Lace<s(.re  — •»  Pos!?e.— >2  Molestu-. ->3  Dciiiittere.— »<  Sui^cipere.— ^*  Edicen-.— '^  .1 
svtUr,  lixa.— 1'  Mortifer.— «^  PerTtus.— »»  Incapax.— ^»  InfClix.— -«  [Those  thin-sl,  which, 
— a'^  Pollic5ri.— ■"  W'vrtfUtss,  uuUub.— »*  lubtqui.— "  Mittere,  to  ticud  away.— ■'«  i:xoptdre^ 
to  desire.—'^'  V'illaiu. 


IMPERATIVE   SENTENCES. 


325 


mini !— 10.  ContitCre  culpam  tuam,  mi  fili,  neve  amplius'  cunctare !— 11. 
Vide,'-*  ne  hoc  negotium  male  peilicias.— 12.  Fac  ut  celeriter  proticiscaris, 
neque  enim  multum  tibi  temporis  restat.=*— 13.  Cette  manus,  veteremque 
amicitiam  renovate  !— 14.  Cedo  hoc  i)oculum  ;*  est  enim  meum.— 15.  IScito 
me  (piam  avidi.^sime  adventum  tuum  exspectare. — 10.  Tu  vero  eis  rebus 
contcritus  esto,  (^uas  Deus  tibi  concessit.— 17.  Laurus  Apolliui  sacra  esto  !— 
18.  Cornelius  et  Sallustius  aequis  {at)  partil)us  lierGdes  sunto.— 19.  Si  quia 
intestato^  moritur,  nee  liberos  habet,  agmltiis"  proximus  familiam'  habeto.— 
20.  Ne  hominem  necato,  neve  furtum  committito.  — 21.  Ne  aliCua  appeti- 
veris;  tnis'  contentiis  esto.— 22.  Imperator  hoc"  edictum  {edicJ)  pro|)o. 
suit:'"  "^"^        •'• 


Ne  milites  arma  sua  neve  vestimenla  vendant;  ne  duces" plus  His 


leslus  sun,"*  qui  te  tantopere  diligit.— 20.  XolTte  unquam  putilre,me  o] 
vestris  (;ontrarium  esse.— 27.  Noli  putilre,  me  culquam  longiores  qu? 
epistolas  scribere.— 28.  Velim  tabellarios'"  certos'"  instituatis.'''"  ut  qi 


)])tatis" 
am  tibi 

^     ..v.^.....,     ^v  quotidie 

alicpias  litteras  accipiam.— 20.  Ut  nunc  seres  habent,*-'He  neve  navibus  neve 
vi;e  commiseris.--'— 30.  Valetudini  tantitm  diligentiap  adhibe,'"  quantum  me 
dcHideriire  scis. — 31.  Cave  existimes  me  quicqnam  audisse,  nisi'-**  quod  a  te 
ipso  cognovi. — 32.  Nisi  euingravissime  jHrnivero,  me  esse  dicito  ignavis- 
simum  [the  qi'cated  coward).— S'S.  Ne  quis  propius  accedat,  quam  impera- 
toris  edicto  concessum  est.— 34.  Resistito,  si  pra^fectus  Lncium  gravius  mul- 
tflbit  quam  legibus  sanctum'^'  est.— 35.  AccGdant'-^"  capllvi,  sententiamque 
a  jiidicibuslatam-''  audiant !— 30.  Me  scito  omnem  meum  labOrem  coiisu- 
nu're  in  {devote  to)  tus,  salute.— 37.  Sic  semper  vivSmus,  ut  injiirias  per- 
peti  quam  inferre'"  mallmus.— 38.  Sempronius  reliquos  exhortatur,  ne  la- 
boribus  succumbant.— 30.  Aces  Datami  dixit,  ne  ab  exercitu  decederet.— 
40.  Consul  Fulvio  scripsit,  ut  exercitum  statim  deduceret." — 41.  Sed  eos 
moneo,  desinant  tiirere.='°— 42.  Quid  vis  faciam  V — 43.  Cave  hoc  facias!— 
44.  Fac  ne  hoc  negotium  anq^lius  ditferas ! 

1.  Pray,  add  this  to  thy  innumerable  favors,"  to  {ift)  attend"'*  to  the  in- 
terests^**  of  my  son  as  far  as^"*  thou  wilt  be  able.— 2.  But  thou,  pursue  {c^rtr 
mjui)  that  glory  which  always  inliamed'Mhee,with  (A.iy)  all  care  {diligen- 
tia)  and  energy  {lnduiitria).—'6.  Send  as  soon  as  ])ossil)le  thy  slave  Pollex 
away,''"  if  he  has  not  yet  departed  {proficlscl).—4:.  Help  {adjurare)  us  as 
much  as  (^  315,  K.  17)  you  can  with  thy  advice,  and  never  forget,  that 
nothing  can  be  more  pleasant  to  us.— 5.  But  thou,  if  thou  lovest  us  all,  and 
espec-ially  me,  thy  teacher,  strengthen  {conjirtitdre)  thy  health.— 0.  Sosias 


*  Any  longer.— 2  Vidh-e  with  vt  or  ne  means:  to  fake  care,  that  {ov  lest)  something  is 
done.— 8  liesidre,  to   be  left.—*  (Joblet.— "  Without  a  will.—»  Kindred.     But  tiie   word 
aonfiti/s  ]\n>i  no  correspundin;;  term  in  En^li.-^li.  Af/ii(ltl  are  all  tJu)se  who  either  are  under 
the  hanie  paternal  power,  or  wo>d<l  l)e  under  it.  if  not  the  death  of  the  father  had  dii?solved 
the  relation,    'thus  married  dau«;hters.  and  all  children  emanciimttd  from  paternal  i)o\ver, 
were  not  afjnnti,  but  coijnati,  in  re«j:ard  to  the  res^t  of  the  lamilv.—'' Estate.— ^  Why  i;?  not 
a  phrase  witli  7es  used  ?—«  The  lullt)wing.— i»  To  publish.— »»  Olticers.— 12  of  elieerful 
mind.— J3  The  Latin  says  :  to  hojx:  the  best.    We  say  :  ••  to  hoj)e/c/r  the  best.''— •<  Wiclved. 
— 15  Torrh.  — '«  Molt.-'tum  esse  ofien  means  ••  to  harm,"  '•  to  inconvenience.'"- i*(?/y/rt^///i, 
n  wish.— >f  Letter-carrier.— 1»  Ke;;ular.— 2"  Instituere,  to  appoint.—-»  Ut  mmc  se  res  ha- 
f/ud,  ar*  matters  now  stand.— 22  To  intrust,  to  trust.— 23  To  devote.— 2-«  m,4  r/vod.  except 
what.— 26  ^sa//c7/¥,  to  t^ancxion.—^^  Acctdere,  to  ai)proach.—^''  Seute/diam  Jtrre.  to  pro- 
nounce a  sentence.- 2»  To  inflict.— 2»  Deducere,  to  withdraw  (someiliin<r).— ^o  'I'o  be  in- 
:<ane.— 31  Beneficium.— 32Consulere.— 33  Interests,  res  (p^xxv.)—^*  As  jar  a^s^  quoad.— =5  In- 
tlammare.— 30  Tq  vend  away^  mittere. 


22(5  IMPERATIVE   SENTENCES. 

e'timof  nu  '  O  soldiers,  a„,l  >-"'<:";'-•  l.',''!''^';, '^S:  a. ':■    ol'  "-..t 

have  beaten  lar-er  »"»>'■«/"'' ^'«>,;':ks '-10    lU.V..  time  «ill  bi 
« -iVIi  nine  soUliers,  snuilar  to  yoiirsehes.  — lu.  inii  "  '"''  „,. 

i;,u.',;ll  seek»bou)\lea,h  rather  in  (^,)  '^:!"!j;,  j;;"-,'^,?'£^^T  1  e  Ig  "! 
Shalt  tear  (^eriri)  «'«' ."'""'/^"  rn";  .'."^n^J  M  tnothe  r.-U.  Yon  ^°.all 
rant.-13.  Thou  sha  t    '<>"'''■   '''J.'^/'V'^'l  ^^^  live  n..  (-,«0  lailh. 

strengthen-  the  weak,  but  ■"l>"""  ^    '    ^,^  '^,  iov'e  m  ■ -^U-  Ucwcacou.e, 

the'J.igl.est  «.^..v««..)  law  lor  ( .)  "- -'-  ;'--;[-,al       es^'vc  «e.Snftho 

U„(«fri)  [mnm]  our  baml   "«  'm»;-^'-  L^    I'O^;^^^  Lot  it  be  knowli 

of  the  citizens  are  liuit  bj  th)  ap^n-  •>"  ^  ^..^/unown  —31  Let  us  re- 
tlu'e,  to  whom  the  habits  i.,uo,)  ot  nun.  '* '^''^^'^"^  ';,,,";;  ,.7,ler,  that 
warj  the  general  by  a  most  °";=;»;^,^«^\,  S^'l^fbo  u  eenstne  St.lpi- 
(i„f.  clauM)  I  reconimeui  these  things  >  tb»;  •  ?V„:^y,  j,,,  „„t  n,,.  cart) 
cit4,  that  (,««i  with  subj.)  I'e  <=;'»«•;'  ">  -l^  A _^5 '  Slav  my  e.xhorta- 

undertake  more  than  '1''''' ?;f''f  «'  'VA'",U^h-ed-  to  hee.-yO.  May  1"« 
tinn'^"  never  sc't'Ui  causek'ss'"' or  111:5111^      luhulivcvi     y^  . 

c  ^en"  i^t  be  f^'i^htened  by  this  threatenii^,"  pa,.er  (^.//..^  -^^    L 
notbinir  binder  yon  from  biyin-  down"  [your    '^^"^-.--^^J, ,  .    •  V,  ren  .  re 

Le,V|;.;"Vnor  make  (l/.r.)  gilts  [.s^^.  ./Za.l.-41.  Do  notudon^^ 

.Tol>eofnooa  cheer,  hono  animo  e-e^^  I^-^j;;:-',^'^;:"^^^^^ 
rari._e  Dcliirn-.-'  Thi^  word  i.-  a  '«^'''/^'^'^^'^^''V/m  '\m,MM,r^'-^3  i,,,,,,;e     <)  take  away. 

lluEnulIrc.-'*  /'(^  l>e  devoted    ^ti"l,V[^'-         >'  V^ta  f-  -'•'  Ff»cii.  -"  Ci-lestis.-'^'  7o 
.uppo^e,!  sing..  vnt.e.y-^  Kitu.    4  l.  ^;;|;.   ^^^^^  'inHtead  of  .i.'uature  :  .../..  or 

tlcrWHy  depoucre. 


INTERROGATIVE   SENTENCES. 


327 


nor  worsliip  (eokre)  more  tl)an  one  "-od  — 42   Do  not  n.v  r.,.\  of  •   i  .t 
writiniis-^  with  (bt/)  false  statements  ^^-^    TuT       ,  /  ^^  •/''^■^  ^^'"^    ^^^7 

Interuogath  E  Sentences. 

^  1.  Nnm  ego  te  ditior  sum  ?-2.  Tune  tardus  cs,  si  discere  debes  sed  celer 
61  h.dere  Yi.J-S.lSum  Xero  clementior  fuit  cWre  ?-4   Non^^^^^^ 

quam  Athuiienses  ?— G.  Is  urn  tu  sceleratum  iUum  Haunibali  comnarilbis 
quo  urn  hic  n^^ratam  patriam  semper  adamSvit,- ille  vero  o-Sr^^^^^^ 

ve  u;:'^^i;;;ei^ti"  ^^;;  v''^  "^^T  nostibusVrodidit^-g'd  ^i 

^  Cbii^^  a    invcni.sti  ^—d.  ^  urn  recte'-^  C.-esari  anteponimus  Alexandrum  ono 
rum  al  er  humanitate  ac  temperantia-  vel  inin  icissimos  conS^ 
racundia  vel  anucissinios  sustulit  y-_lo.  Credisne  tu  tale  me^Uci  u    p^™^^ 
trasse  -11.  ^sum  quid  novi  audisti,  mi  lili  y_i2    Censen'tu    tanti  m  ^^^^ 
honnnis  tujsse;«  ingeniun,  ut  vel  summos  veterum  superset'?     tl^^ 
-1^  Attulistme  tu  librum,  quern  mihi  heri  pollicitus  es?   Sane  quidem - 
14.  ^onne  cuui  nuper  rustieareminijibros  illos  accepistis  quorOarus  vobis 
mi>  t.''   Aeeei)nnus  .sane.-lo.  Nonne  satius  est  (^  290  R  6)    bene  mm»^ 

Z:^i<%STI^f- ^'"''^  ^'''  ^''  '''^'^  •  ^>mnb^>.-16  Nine  con^u^l 
unt  (^  ^42,  H  4)  di  unmortales,  nnprobis  diutuniiorcm^^  interdum  imnuni- 
ateni-  (.'oncedere,  ut  gravius-  eos  postea  puniant  y  Jta  sanH^t -17   Vum 

hosles  copias  nostras  vicGrunty    Immo  vero,    fugati  sun  -18    Num  h  c 

lu>morausamhabetjustaniy  ImmoveroJustikmam.-19  UtiL^^^ 
Mquons  qui  suuimum  bonum  virtiltem  4e  ajunt,  an  Epcrirum  qui  bona 
b"mu s  "'^o^ilrf '  cletnnty-20.  yolui>tates;!e  fus^rJ^'^^^T 
nm  1  -n ^='J""^"^'  ^"^  !^empronnnn  negotio  illi  adhibuisti  y-22  Judices 
.upiobum  Ilium  civem  utrum  condemnarunt,  annon  y-23.  Hostesne  leS- 
Os  paceu,  roga.um  misPrunt.  annon  ?-24.' Num  quid  antrpe^ulam^^^^ 
(m-/:/...waj<.v)nial.  factum  esty  Immomultum  boni.-25  N  une  S^^ 
^I'u  redni  y  Onmluo,  sed  rursus  abiit.-2G.  Cuiusnatn  m^er^-  c  s^^^^^^^^ 

.os,n,m  pugnasse  eredis  y-31.  Unde  oolligiti.^^solenl  ^^^  :^^^  ^ 

;      i  7  ^''''"•'''"  l»««l»i'm  exercitusprofectusesty-8a.  Cur  Plijlin. 

in  Alexandro  anteponis  y-34.  Quid  cunctaris  y  cur  non  responses  VqI 

^n.MluexspecUisr^pia.ndiu  audaeia  tua  nos  eludet  y"-3o.  QuoTusqui.^que 

actn.m      'l\,  r  n  ^  1    'T   '"■'^'  '''''''"  '^'^  J>'-etlK-aie  infinitive  i^  in  111«;;.;/^^/  ~^'  Parere  to 


328 


inteiirogati\t:  sentences. 


INDIRECT   QUESTIONS. 


329 


'8  201   R  \CA  enim  doctrlna  prscstat,  illil  qiiidom'  qiuc  hominibns  prosit?  - 
li.  Quale  lU'-otium  (lualibus  sociis  susccpisti  V-37^  ^^V'•^"'?^'^,  ^Mnnm 
hoc  quicU'iii  int('lli-unl!-:J8.  Quid  priuuun  ciuriar  .^^'  aul  uiulc  poli.sHiium, 
judice^  ordiary  aut  (juod  aut  a  iiuibu.s  au\iluuu  pclani .'' 

1  Am  I  as  rich  and  powerful*  as  lhou?-2.  Art  thou  accustomed  to 
weep  if  somctliiii- unpleasant  hapi.ens  (.w'/(A/v)to  theeV— .i.  Was  bocrates 
^kM  t  whe^^i  he  was  Lccused  of  impiety  v^-4.  Will  not  Brutus  see  thee, 
when  he  returns  (^  347)  V-5.  Were  thJ  soldiers  sad,  after  they  had  heard 
"ml "he^Jlil^ai  lad  ret.lrned  V-d.  Has  any  one  p..  )--\-;^;^;;:iJ"Vj;^ 
absurd '>—;    Has  he  been  slain  (tolkn)  by  somebody  s  treaehei>  .^— H.  Do 

ou  know  ino...)  somebody  who  is  able  to  do  this  V     i)    D.dst  thmi  c.irry 
Iferre)  anythini;  else,  when  Suli)icius  met«  theeV    I  did  "<>t.-  0    D.x'st 

hou  not  believe,  that'Oajus  has  lost  more  than  2000  sj-sterces^  I  do.-  . 
Does  not,  while  (../>;.  ah^  the  war  hists,^  all  trade^  he  down  .^^l^nciuestion- 
ablv-12  Didst  thou  see  that  man,  whom  I  had  pomted  out  to  .tbee  "'  / 
did  -13.  Do  you  think  (puture),  that  all  this  has  happened  accuUn  ally 
(^  OU)?  Bv  m)  means.-14.  Didst  thou  say,  that  1  could  d.)  this  be  ter  l.an 
miy  one  else  V  Certainly,  I  did.-15.  Is  it  m>t  ^^"^'^'^VTtr^^o  Vv  ^ 
(!i  311)  slower,  than  to  ruin  every thmg  by  mnhw^niuiiu.)  ha^te  i  By  all 
means-lG.  Did  (Jajus  obtain'Mhe  tirst  placeV  >,o,  but  the  second.-l^ 
Is  Sulpicius  a  better  scholar  than  Sejus  ?  Not  only  this,  but  he  is  the  best 
of  all— 18  Does  the  accused  confess,  that  he  has  committed  hat  murder 
laedc'sY^  On  the  ccmtrarv,  he  denies  [itJ.-lD.  Do  you  wish  rather  that  we 
Lr  vour  eiiemies  or  vouV  frie-ndsV  Neither  (^  24G).-20.  D<)  you  intend  to 
seek^-^  [your]  safety  by  tli-ht,  or  to  die,  ti-htin-  bravely  V-21  Have  these 
thin.^s  been  done  in  thy  pivsmce  or  absence  v_22   \V  il^t    '-"  b';tv;.  the  c  tv 


11.  a)  do  you  tlin.R  lias  spoKt^n  oeiier,  Sulpicius  or  ^^einpiv 
chance  (W)  ^l<>  y^>"  think  is  better,  [thatj  ot  Grant  i^  o8,  1  .  4)  or  Ltb=.^tJ  t 
Sevmour(^-^*r./vls)V_27.  Whom  did  you  say  you  expected  so  long  ^^  .0)  ^ 
-28  Whose  words  didst  thou  ciuote,-  when  I  saw  thee  the  other  day  i  - 
21).  By  which  reasons  hast  thou  been  induced,  to  take"  so  serious  a  reso  u- 
tion  vi30.  To  whom  did  Gajus  rent'«  his  lUnn  V"-31.  \\  hat  do  you  >M>h 
to  be  doneV_32.  At  what  o'clock  (§  2r,,  U.  1(5)  did  Cjcsar  arrive.^  At  nllR^ 
—33  At  (/»/)  what  an  expense'"  did  Gajus  -ive'^  the  last  {pro.nmu.)  ganus  .'• 
At  fibout  a  million  of  sesterces.-34.  How  often  (^  2o8)  ^l^^\ "^^^  C  a^sar  say. 
that  he  rather  wished,  that  (////.  dau.se)  a  .^^ui by;  LihT^o'JJ  ^^''^^  ^^'^^'^l^' 
than  that  an  innocent  one  should  be  punished  !-3.    "^^v  wil     t  b      os^ 


s 
Ic 


,;i)le  to  settle  (^  37)  these  diihculties  ol  the  repnbhc  :'-3t).  1  o  ho  v  leltnt- 
ess"  an  enemy  have  we  left  our  atlairs  !-:J7.    How  much   (^  311)  more 


less       an  «*miii>    ii.iv»^    »» »-   »v.i   ^^ -^  -  .-  -         , 

certain  is  the  chance  of  victory  to  the  K.mians,  than  o  Antiochus  l-o8. 
What  kind  of  remedies  are  applied  by  this  physu-ian  V-3U.  H.)W  many  sol- 
die';  have  been  killed  by  the  enemies  v_40  low  '-">.  ^»^^'-;^  !;^ 
{;mth  mhj.)  were  not  willing  to  believe  even  tlu^  f—W.  Ho\v   less   nmkr- 


1  At  lea«t  -«  For  tlii^  ^ubj.  see  P.  II.-^  OnerU  to  complnin  (o/'sometliin-;  the  Latin 

I'  ln,pc';ysl..-i«  Edere;--^oNoceu8.-^^  Ettuijere.--^-^  luexorabih«.-'-^3  ^rand.  How  many 
were  t'oimd  (^reperlrej  ? 


Ftand,  that  all  this  is  empty'  and  worthless?' — 42.  How  lonir  did  this  war 

last  •'—43.  Whence  did  C'tcsar  come,  when  he  made  war  on  lils  country? 

44.  Whither  did  Hannibal  proceed,=*  after  he  had  been  defeated*  by  Scipio? 
— 4.J.  \\  here  did  Milo  dwell,  when  he  had  been  expelled  bv  the  Roman 
people  y— 4«.  When  will  you  return  to  me  the  book,  which  1  lent**  to  you 
the  other  day  ?- 47.  AVliy  do  you  believe  that  Gajus  was  absent  ?»— 48.  Why 
didst  thou  not  hurry  hitlierj  when  thou  hadst  heard  {acclpere),  that  the 
arrival  ot  the  enemies  >Nas  expected  ? 

Indiuect  Questions. 

Ij  JThales,  intcn-ogtitus,  num  factaMiominuin  deum  fallerent:»  Ne  cogi- 
tata'"  quidem,  inciuit. — 2.  Solon,  quondam  {once)  a  Crccso  rege  internxj-atus 
est,  num  quemquani  ipso  (^  381),  K.  21)  vidisset  beatiorem  ?— 3.  InteiToo-o 
vos,  judices,  istiusne  scelus  dubium  esse  possit  V — 4.  Animadverte  igitur 
rectCne  banc  sententiam  interpivtery— 5.  Videamus  primo,  delne  provulen- 
tia  mundus  regaliir,  deinde  (i^  2G1,  R  10)  consulalne"  rebus  humanis  y— 
0.  Incerti  tuPrunt,  hostlsne  aggredi,  an  castra  defendere,  an  fuira  saluteni 
jtetcre  priestaret  ?— 7.  Interrogaveras  me,  nonne  putarem,  nostnjs  oratores 
a  Gi-iecis  longe  (j^  311,  K.  11)  supefiltos  esse  V— 8.  Quferitur,^'^  utrum  mun- 
dus   terra   stante   circumcat,'^  an  mundo  stanle  terra  verttltury"— 9.   Si 
sitis,  nihil  interest,  utrum  aqua  sit  an  vinum,  nee  refert,  utrum  sit  aureum 
poculum**  an  viti-eum,"  an  manus  concava."— 10.  Eucrates  quierenti  cul- 
<lam,  liter  esse  mallet,  Cnrsus  an  Socrates,  respondit:  Vivus'"  mallem  esse 
C'nesus,  moriens  autem  Socrates.— 11.  Aristoteles  hand  scio  an  jirinceps 
tuerit  philosophorum.— 12.  Ter  soriibus'"  consuluPrunt,"^"  utrum  Valerius 
staiim  igni  necaretur,  an  in"'Miliud  tempiis  reservarCtury-^— 13.  Xum  un- 
qiiam  liominem  ullum  tanta  pneditum"  constantiil  vidistis?    Con.stantiam 
(lieoy    Nescio  an  melius  j^atientiam  possim  dicere.— 14.  Dubito  an  tantam 
tidcm  ac  constantiam  ju-iemio    aliquo  remunentri  debeamus.— 15.  Thales 
percontanti,-*  quid  esset  dithcilc  y    Se  ipsum,  inquit,  nosse.— 10.  Dionvsius 
regno"  cxpulsus,  culdani  dicenti,  quid  sibi  Plato  ct  pliilosophia  profuis- 
i^^^V   y^  tantam,  incpiit,  tbrtunji?  mutationem'"'  facile  ferani  {endure).— 
1/.  Lpictetus,  interrogatus,  cpiis  esset  dives y   Is,  inquit,  cui  id,  quod  habet, 
satis  est.— 18.  Socrates,  cum  interrogarGtur,  cujatein  (^  357,  Rem.  8)  se  esse 
dicerety  .Alundfuium,"  in(iuit.— U).  Agis  LacedteuKmi'us,  interrogatus,  qiiot 
liabPret  milites :  Quot'-^"  sutliciunt'",  inquit,  utliostes  vincantur.— 20.  Quidam, 
cum  mtcrrogaiT'tur,  qualem  Socrates  vitani  egisset,  qualem,"  inquit,  cum 
nionar,  egisse  ij)se  cupiero.- 21.  Aristipi)us  interroiranti  culdam,  quanta 
esset  hommis  cujusdam  honestas,=*"^  inquit,  i  et  metire  !''— 22.  Thales  percon- 
tanti,  culdam,  ubinam  esset  deus,  interroges  potius,  inquit,  ubi  nou  sit.— 
-.3.  Lquites  obvios''*  percontati  sunt,  quae  Ibrtuna  {the  fate)  consulum  atque 
excrcitus  esset,  ubi  copiae  essent,  quo  se  Hannibal  contulisset,  quid  i)araret. 


Innnit?.— aNullus.-»  To  proceed,  se  conferre.— ■•  Transl.  haviiii:  been  defeated.— »  Com- 
modnre.— «  To  be  absent,  abest^e.— '  To  hnrry  hither.  ii(l\ o] rin\—»  Facff/w.  a  dt'ed  — »  4/i- 
rj}/Hi  me  fa/lit.  :*omothiiv<r  t-scapes  me.— '•  Literally,  the  //li/tr/.s-  thonqht ;  that  is-  Vie 
(/„>H,jhfii,—i\  To  attend. -'2  q,ueiitin\  it  iis  the  qne>ti()n.-i3  C'lmfoilre,  to  iro  ronnd  to 
larn.— '*  W/-/t.  to  l)e  turned,  to  revolve.— is  a  «roblet.  -1«  Poculum  H/reum^a,  ^dase»  «'ob- 
let.— '■  Hollow.— I'-Transl.  ifalire.  if  tiring:  morieris»,  if  cli/inr/.—'^»  SoTft,  a  lot  — '•'o  Z'on- 
tnitere.  to  deliberate.— 21  For  another  Xmw.—'^'^  lieKerrilre.  to  reserve,  to  spare  — 28  En- 
dowed  with.— 24  Ptrc/jntdri.  to  ask.— '"  From  his  kin<,'dom.— 2«  Quid  prodei<t,  of  what  use 
'^  •  •  •— "  Change.— 2'*A  world-citizen.— 2»  Instead  t)f  tot  quot.—^<*  Sufficere.  to  be  sufficient, 
—»>  Instead  of  taleni  (vitani),  qualem.— ^'^  liowQity.—^^  Metlri,  to  measure,— »<  Those, 
whom  they  met  ou  the  road. 


330 


INDIRECT   QUESTIONS. 


nniaaireret?-24.  Domonax,  interro^atus,  quango  ^^^ ^'l;}^!^'^ 


Tnin,  inquit,  cum  ^*>-  '''^^  V;/./;;.  '  r";"  ^t-^'ubi  ft  quanta^  hostium  copia 
tioiumitcH    p       I  ,,.K.,twm  oa«v   irnlied :  To  atlnKmish  others. 


nun)  is.  — U.  IVoi 


,,r lu       £      ■•» V».» 0"« ,1,. *,„,,. ;f  An» 


APPENDIX  I. 


331 


fear  prevails*  with  you  {apud  dos). —  28.  Tell  nie,  whether  thou  wast  not 
anirry,''  when  thou  didst  learn  {cognoHcsre),  that  thou  hadst  been  deceived 
by  the  kiiiiz;.—  29.  I  should  wish  t-o  know  if  these  judi^es  passed  judgment' 
in  {hi/)  (rood  faith. —  80.  Tiie  judi::es  asked  the  accused  whether  he  wished 
to  say  aiiythiuii:. —  ol.  I  do  not  know  wiietlier  not  perhaps  also  one*  of 
you  is  deceived*  by  this  error. —  o2.  Perhaps  the  Stoics  were  right,  when 
they  said*  that  only  a  wise  [man]  could  be  hai)py. —  33.  I  doubt  whether 
anything  of  the  kind  {ejtisniodi)  ever  happened  before. 


J  ValOre. —  2  vl//f/ry,  inlti 
cnvcd,  lat)i. —  *  Translate, 
(rectt),  that  only  a  wise  man 


^s  jt/d(//n^.Kt,  imVichim  dare. —  ■*  Quia. —  *  To  be  de- 
iow  wliethur  not  perhaps  the  ij^oics  said  rightly 


i^:^' 


T 


APPENDIX  L 


Supplementary   rules    on   jjeclexsiox,  ixcludIxg  the  de- 
clension  OF  Greek  nouns. 

1.  Declension  in  general. 

1.  The  Latin  language  has  five  declensions  of  nouns,  which  are  distin- 
guished by  their  characteristics,  /.  e.  the  terminating  vowels  or  consonants 
of  their  stems.  The  tirst  declension  has  the  vowel  a  as  characteristic 
{iiwns-a) ;  the  second  declension  has  the  vowel  o  {hort-u-a,  instead  of  hort- 
OS,  which  is  the  original  form  of  the  nominative  in  this  declension) ;  the 
third  declension  has  the  vowel  i  or  a  consonant  {civ-i-s,  consu-l,  nome-n^ 
ple-b-a);  the  fourtli  declension  has  the  vowel  u  {fruct-u-s);  the  fifth  has  the 
vowel  e  {di-e-'<).  Thus  each  of  tiu'  live  vowels  is  assigned  to  a  special  de- 
clension, while  all  consonantic  characteristics  belong  to  the  third. 

2.  The  Latin  language  has  two  systems  of  case-eudings,  which  are 
shown  in  the  following  synopsis: 

FIRST  SYSTE.^L  SECOND  SYSTEM. 

PIXGULAH. 


Nom. 

—  ors  (neuters  q 

ft 

heL 

r.  urn) 

Nom. 

—  ors 

Gen. 

1 

Gen. 

is 

Dat. 

1 

Dat. 

1 

Arc. 

em  (neuters  like  Xom.) 

Ace. 

cm  (nevf^rs  like  Nom.) 

Voc. 

likeXoui.  cniasc. 

m 

Vie  II.  e) 

Voc. 

like  Nom. 

Abl. 

e 

Abl. 

e 

PLUIIAJL. 

Nom. 

i.  neuters  a 

Nom. 

es,  neuters  a 

Gen. 

rum 

Gen. 

nm 

Dat. 

18 

Dat. 

ibus 

Ace. 

es»,  neuters  a 

Ace. 

OB,  neuters  a 

Voc. 

like  Xom. 

Voc. 

like  Xom. 

Abl. 

is 

Abl. 

ibus 

The  FIRST  SYSTEM  is  applied  to  the  first  and  second  declensions;  the 
SECOND  SYSTEM  bclougs  to  thc  third  and  fourtli  declensions.  In  the 
fifth  declension  some  cases  are  formed' according  to  the  first  system,  and 
others  according  to  the  skcond. 

3.  These  case-endings,  in  the  forms  which  are  given  in  the  synopsis,  ap- 
pear only  in  the  consonant-stems  of  the  third  declension,  and  in  the  geni- 
tive plural  of  all  declensions.  Generally  they  are  so  blended  with  tlie 
characteristic  that  either  the  fii*st  vowel  of  the  ending,  or  the  characteiis- 


532 


DECLENSION  IN   GENERAL. 


APPENDIX  I. 


333 


tie  .  aroppoa.     The  chavacterlstlc.  and  .^-on;.^  - 

ladled 'CASE-TKiniTNATU>NS,  and  what  i^Mt^^  ^^^.   ^^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

Jr^r^r;"  a 'l^nur::^  it\p^^^^  a^.  aroppm,  the  eudings  proper,  . 

culled  the  tuue  stem. 

Synopsis  op  tue  case-teuminations. 


I. 


U. 


III. 

glNGtTLAK. 


Nom.  a  (C,  at»,  cs) 

am  (Cn,  an) 
a  (0) 


Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


a,e,i,o,y,c,l,u,r,8,t,x    u^^ 


u 


ul  (n) 
um.  n 

/iA<J  NOM. 

a 


5s 

CT 

GI 

cm 

like  NOM. 


Nom. 

(irn. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

V(»c. 

Abl. 


finim 
Ts?  (ilbus) 

Uk*'  NOM. 

like  DAT. 


1 


I.  NEUTERS  a 

Oniiu 

OS.  NEl'T.  a 
like  NOM. 

like  UAT. 


n3,  NEUT.  Ua 

uiim 

Ibuf  (nbiirJ) 
fl^.NEir.  ua 
like  NOM. 
like  UAT. 


Orum 
ei)us 

/U-«  NOM. 

/i^6  WAT. 


I:* 
I 

fill  (im) 
like  NOM. 

PLURAL. 

6:4,  NKITTEUS  a  (ia) 
urn  dum) 

ihiis  ... 

C;^,nei:t.  aa^NEUT.  (la) 

like  NOM. 

mimmmmm&m 

eiSinc,.  appoir  «"JjJ^^X'^/^H     '  i^dro  n>-">/'or/o  instead  ol  korto-i.  nv.  ui.t.  of  art-t). 
„!i;„7,  -is,  U-n...h,.n,us  the  short  |  ;-- ';;'',"^-,,,\lU';iUe  mUi,,^,  .clainiug  lhe.d,arac. 


(r7).  Nominative  plfral.  The  mapcnline  and  feminine  nonns  of  the  first,  pecond, 
and  fourth  dccltiisioiis  Ibnn  tliis  case  like  the  gknitivk  siN(iULAB.  lu  the  third  the 
charactcri.-tic  i,  and  in  thelifrh  the  vowel  e  of  the  tTuHng  is  dropped  (d?;'?.«f  inst.  of  civi-e^, 
dies  inst.  of  rf<fc-e<).  Tlic  neuters  of  the  second  declension  di-oj)  the  characterii^tic  {tecta 
insr.  oUerfo-a).  In  the  neuter»  of  the  third  and  fourth  both  the  characteristic  and  endinor 
remain  unchanged  (t/ian-a,  cornu-ci). 

{//\.  CiKN.  pi.L'K.  This  case  shows  in  all  declensions  the  unchanged  characteristic  and 
endiiiir.  .-md  is  tiierclbic  better  adapted,  to  show  the  pure  stem  of  a  noun  tlian  the  geni- 
tiie  diif/iiliu\  which  commonly  is  employed  for  this  piirp«)se  by  the  irraminariaus. 

ii).  Dativk  &  Ablat.  pluk.  The-ecases,  which  in  all  declensions  arealike,  siiow  in  the 
fifth  decl.  the  characteristic  unchanged.  Rutin  thc()iherdecleiisi(ms  the  characteristic  is 
i)i:o]M'Ki)  (  mentis Jjortu,  cifihus.  tnanibus  int^x.  of  iiitiisa-i<.  /lorfo-is,  ciri-ilms.  in<u)u-ibus). 
In  fh"  f.iiirth  decli:n-ioii  often  the  i  of  the  ending  is  dropped  and  the  characteristic 
retained  [iicuhus  inst.  (tf  a<'u-ibns). 

(/•).  AccisAT.  I'LiH.  This  case  drops  in  all  vowe!  declensions  the  <?  of  the  ending  (>n<=flM^, 
fiorfos.  rir'tJi.  niaftil'/.  diei  inst.  of  men^a-es.  Aor/o-es  ciri-ex,  inaiiii-e.t,  die-es).  But.  owing 
to  th»^a|>|)irLMit  KMidenry  of  the  third  declension,  to  droj)  rather  the  characteristic  than  the 
vowel  of  the  endinir,  the  post-classical  lanmiage  drops  also  in  //lis  case  the  vowel-charac- 
teristic i  <»f  ilie  third  declension,  giving  thus  to  both,  the  vowel  and  consonantic  stems 
of  the  third  declension  a  like  case-termination  in  the  accus.  pliir.  The  use  of  the  ter- 
mination es  instead  of  T«  had  already  commenced  In  the  classical  period  ;  and  in  our  texts  of 
the  clas-^ics  th(;  accusative  endinir  es  is  almost  always  given,  lu  the  anteclassical  au'hore 
this  termination  is  often  found  with  the  spelling  <i.v,  inonier  to  mark  its  quantity  as  being 
lOhrf.    The  pronunciation  of  the  syllai)Ie  is  /lo/  atlected  by  this  spelling. 

/^em.  'i.  In  the  following  instances  the  endings  of  tiie  two  systems  interchange  with 
each  other  : 

(f^)TheuKN^TlVK  siNfiiL.^Kof  the  first  declension,  in  ancient  language,  seems  to  have  had 
the  terminal  ion  rtsM  contracted  from  a-is)  accordinir  to  the  second  system.  For  the  d(issu-al 
period  thi<  terminat.on  is  confined  to  four  conipomids  of  the  uouu  fiofu/ht :  patei'fa- 
?ni'ni't,  ni'ifti/tiiniim.^.  ^tHi'is/niuHbis^  filidfaini'ias.  hm  sometimes  tliese  compounds  are 
found  with  ilie  regular  tenninaiioii'^i;/ Frcmi  the  anteclassical  period  the  genitives 
ttrnis,  isc/iM.  rias.  monefas.  Ldfo/aix.  fortRiKis  are  quoted  by  ancient  grammarians,  and 
the  genitive  custodias  is  attributed  to  Suldisf  (Sosip.  Charisius,  p.  82). 

(h).  In  the  gen,  sing,  of  (ireek  proper  iiomis  of  the  third  declension  in  e,<i  the  ending 
i  <»f  tite  first  system  ahernaU's  with  the  ending  i.v  of  the  second,  as  l\jidifi  w  Ptricli, 
}*ra.vitrli'<  or  I'ntiildi.  'J'ltniwtoiiix  or  lln-inixiodi. 

((•).  In  the  (iKNiTiVK  PLfKAL  tile  nouns  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  sometimes 
assiiin  ■  the  ending  um  of  the  2d  system,  and  then  <lrop  their  characteristics.  In  the.^/*'< 
declension  this  is  in  itrnse  confined  to  the  (ireek  nouns  amphora  (a  Greek  measure)  and 
drnchina  (a  (ireek  con).  6-V//.  plar.  (unphonon^drdrhnviin.  In  the  second  dedension  the 
ending  /////  commonly  is  employed  in  nouns,  den(»tin;,' <'/7i/i.>\  irci(/hf  nud  measure,  ifcou- 
iiecierl  witii  a  dcfiiiii-  numeral  (/(>nn/num.  fesfertiu/n,  denarinik.  rnedimnuf/i,  taknfuni^ 
iwi^Xi'ixtX  uf  iiiiinindnun,  SI sfertioram  elc.  Sometimes  tliis  ending  is  also  found  \\\  other 
mums  a«-:  liheniin.  inst.  of  liherbnim  :  fahrum  inst.  ^^fabroruin ;  deuTti,  instead  of  deortim ,' 
Sin-iif//i,  insie.id  of  s(H'ior'iin,  and  In  several  other  nouns. 

_(d).  In  the  dativk  and  aui.ativk  ri.t'KAL  of  the  fiust  declension  the  termination 
ab'is  IS  Sometimes  used  instead  of  is.  This  was  frequently  the  case  in  old  laniruage,  and 
the  ancient  gr.mnnarians  qiiot»;  tlie  (XaX'wvs  pndldbus,  jKn-t'ibus,  oledbns,  tii/t/iphdbus,  inv- 
lfib"s,e'/'/db'fs.  a^in'ibu<,p>t'/idlbu<.  rnpfdbus.  Occasionally  these  termin-itions  are  found 
in  postchissie  il  writers  ;  but  in  dassicU  language  they  are  confined  to  the  nouns  dea,,tilia, 
and  ei/>f'i,  {t/clbi/s,  fi/irib'ts.  e'/i/dbus),  and  only  if  ir  is  necessary  to  distinguish  them  from 
the  correspoiidiiii:  masculines  of  the  second  declension. 

{e).  In  the  dativk  and  ablative  plukal  the  Greek  neuter  nouns  of  the  third  declension 
in  a  ufidffiiia,  jMtemu  etc.)  regularly  take  the  ending  w  of  the  first  system  (cRnigrnatis., 
poema/is,  seldom  itnigmatibus,  jfoemafibus. 

4.  .Muiiy  noiiTL^  are  borrowed  from  tlie  Gueek  language,  either  with- 
out atiy  chaiig-e,  espeeially  if  the  Givek  teniiiiiatioii  occurs  also  in  Latin, 
as  thoni.v,  phiJosophid,  Periclex  ;  or  aflcr  cliani^iiiu^  the  Greek  into  a  Latin 
teimiiialion,  as  lliniiKepintola,  Eplrus,  poefa.  in  tlie  chissical  period  Greek 
iioiiiis  are  mostly  contined  to  the  pkoprii  n.\mes,  and  to  those  few  ap- 
pellatives whose  reception  was  sanctioned  by  long  usage.  If  the  classi- 
cal writers  employ  ;in  unusual  Greek  word,  Ihey  generally  write  it  with 
Greek  letters.  But  later  authors  make  a  very  free  use  of  Greek  nouns, 
and  the  terms  occurring  in  akts  and  sciences,' as  those  denoting  plants, 


334 


FIRST   GREEK   DECLENSION. 


APPENDIX   I. 


335 


s  lo'n'^</vf/2(''V/%.s'.  dies\  fxci'pr  in  tlionom.  sin-  of  tliosonounpof  the  third  (U'clen- 
"wlu-ro  tlu-  chiinictcristic  /  i:*  dropped  before  the  endiui,'  Uuil^f!  strni  ttnlif.  /letrs  st. 


STONES  and  RARET?  ANTMAT.P,  arc  iioaH v  all  taken  from  the  Greek.  Many 
of  these  nouns  even  in  the  cliKsieul  period  ivlain  in  some  ot  the  oblique 
cases  their  Gicek  easc-lei'minations,  and  in  the  FiusT  declensKm  a  system 
of  case-terminations  has  been  formed  eonsistini;  partly  ot  Latin,  i)artly 
of  Greek  endiui^s,  which  is  called  the  Ghki<;k  fiust  declension.  See  i^  U. 

5.    QtANriTY^^i)!-'  THE  CASE-TEIJMINATIONS.  ,.      .        ^      ,        •  i 

The  nnniuation  a  of  nil  ca.r^  is  short,  exci-pt  thi-  Al)l.  8ini;._of  the  llrst  declension  and 
the  Voc  siii<'.  of  (ireek  Proper  nouns  iiK/x.' ///r//.sv7j  yy/zaf/o/y/.  ,»i,,     •    ' 

^  iVshorl  exnpl  in  the  Al!l.  sin-   of  .he5lh  <lrc!.  and  in  the  Noin.  Voc.  and  Abl.  bing. 
of  (ireei<  nouns  in  «  and  cs  of  the  tirst  deel.  :  diS,  eintome,  dyfiwte. 
i  i->  :il\v;ivs  l>>ii<'.  as  hin'tl,  lin.  tructin.  kik'i. 

o  is  /0//7 'in  ilie  dativk  an<l  aiw-ativk  ol  the  second,  but  lougorshort  m  tlieNCMiNATivB 
of  the  tliird  declension— ri/f/(>,  Kcnno. 

?/  i- alwavs  [i)ML'— /rwr//?,  <v)/v//7.  ^  _,>•-„     «-,„ 

in  &\Wiiv>' fi'or/ens  tiie  precedin<,'  yo\\c\-mmmm,frudHtn.  f>e«fertiuin,  diein 
as  is  Ion-  (6P^d>,//t#//Artx),some  wron-ly  excei)tini?  ana^.  In  the  (Ikkkk  nouns  ot  the  firet  de- 
clension 7,s  i,-  loi,-  af cr  a  iwcd  and  after  ;• ;  but  .^f,ort  alter  the  other  consonants  KOoieas 
Pl/fhuf/onlii,  l\!ojn<iih) 
eK  is  ' 

herhl).     But  in  a/7?.<,  ubit^,  and  puru.^  the  teruiinaiion  ew  is  Ion-,  aithou-h  tlieir  stems 

^'  i"'i' " shon  in"  tlie  siXGrLAit_(.rf//^v>.  inafu<),  but  Ion-  in  the  pi.uhai.  {ttclls,  Jinl<).    It  i^^ 

also  Ion-  in  O'/ir'-'^  and  sa/n/U'S  (st.  70.  .       .         .  ...  .^a  a  . 

OS  is  Ion-  JwHds,  nenos.  horlOs)  exe.-pt  the  Guekk  nonunatiyes  in  o-s^of  the  second  de- 
clension, un:es>  thev  belon-  to  the  Adic  declension  {Lemnw^;  but  AJ/io-^).        ,,-.,, 

'"  is  short,  exeeplh.  ..KN.  siN,;.,  and  N..M.  and  Aceis.  f  i.rK.  of  the  funrth  ciocd  (//•  o/.7.-  , 
and  in  those  nv)nnsof  liie  tliird  dec!,  in  which  '/  is  noiiral  {virtue,  stem  nrtiit ,   Mia.-^,  st. 

In  {hi  ./issMiMc  termhiafions  llie  feniti.t  is  always  /o/^r/ju  the  first  and  second,  at  d 
always  s/i'>rf  iti  the  thir»i  and  fourth  declensions  [auirn,  m^n^^'in/m.  deahxs.  reidyrum  it 
cin'wi,  >i,<in,t.  twib».^.  fniclanm,  achhus).  In  the  fifth  declension  tlie  pen  It  is^-enerally 
Ion-   except  tin-  gkn.  and  oat.  sino.,  if  the  termination  is  preceded  by  a  coiv^onant,  a^  . 

*^T'll^'qlmntTty'lIf'Jl'()Vuiu•lt\^^^  not  belon-in-  to  those  raentii)ned  above,  ia 

re-ulatrd  bv  the  followin- tliree  rules :  i„„, 

1    MoNOsv,XA.u>>  are  A^,.y.  except  r5,%/^^  .V..V.  (av^^^^^ 
the  vowels  of  tlwir  final  svllables  shorf.  as  :  p>ur.  dolor,  caput,  r.dujal.     But  the  t\nal 
syllables  of  fhose,  termu.alt.i-  in  a- are  Ion- by  y.o;i/km   the  J^^'/Zf  ^ ':»V.?;r\   !.v  VmvcTu 
a'K-mute  with  ^•.— 3.  Gkkkk  nouns  generally  retain  the  quantity,  which  they  lia\c  m 
Greek,  as  :  ciudr,  delph'm,  Traztii. 

2.  First  Greek  Declension. 

6  The  Giir.Eiv  first  declension  (see  i^  4)  comprises  n(mns,  tertninating 
in  e  e!i  ax  In  the  singi:laii  they  have  a  peculiar  system  of  terminations, 
partly  Latin,  partly  Gheek;  bilt  in  the  pluiial  they  have  the  regular 
LvriN  lermiiiiitions.  Those  in  e  are  feinuilne,  the  otiiers,  maxc'thne 
Hence  the  pUirale  tantum  ete^^im  (trade-winds)  is  a  masculine,  since  it 
must  be  derived  from  a  (Jreek  sitiu:ular  vkslaa  \^6  irt/6iai).  The  singulars 
are  declined  after  the  following  paradigms. 


a  reader 
ana-nost-S» 
aiii-nost  le 
ana-nost-JB 
aiia-nt)st-en 
anagnost-C 
ana-nost-C  (J) 

Bern.  The  terminations  h  ^s,  ds  are  the  Greek  terminations  Vy  '/?»  «?•  The  Greek 
nouns  of  the  first  decl.,  terminaiinir  in  a,  retain  this  terininaticm  in  Latin,  and  are  de- 
clined like  Latin  nouns, 'A^:  i^hmnAna  (<pi'^o6ocpia).  historia  {loropLa),  Electra 
(ILUKr/ja)  etc.    Of  those  that  terminate  iu  r/  and  V?,many  have  assumed  the  Latin 


an  epitom-e 
N.  epit(»m-G 
G.  epilom-S8 
D.  epitoin-iu 
A.  e|)itoin-ea 
V.  epitom-e 
A.  epitom-6 


the  north-wind 
bore-ils 
bore-ie 
bore-je 
l)ore-am  (fin) 
bont  a 
bore-il 


termination  a  and  are  then  likewise  declined  like  Latin  nonns ;  as:  p(Pna  [Ttoivrj), 
syflaba  {6vXXafhf),  bihliotheca  {(^if:i^toSrfH7j),sc}iola  {(^ Xo^) ,€tn-^tola  {f7ti6roXr}), 
mavffarVa  ( ttapyapir?;^),  jyopfa  {7roi?;rr}?),  jnrifta  (Tteiparn^).  others  retain  the 
(.KKKK  termination  but  have  a  collateral  Latin  form  in  a,  as:  epitome  and  epitoma,  mu- 
sice  i\\u\w >isi('a,  IMene  and  Hehnn,  .\iof,e  and  Xiof>a.  atunt.s  and  athma  Perses  and  Per- 
m.  Lapjth>s  and  ['WVha  OthiT  nonns  take  the  (ireek  terminaii<.n  exclusively,  as 
hyperlxAt.  ma'jice,  Ihbe,  huterpe,  acmaces,  tetrarches,  Po!iorc?fe.^,  Thyest^. 

7.  To  the  Greek  declension  in  e  belon?  :  (^0  all  female  proper  nouns  in 
e,  as  i  irci',  Danae,  Hcmte  ;  (h)  the  names  of  Greek  cities,  and  of  cities  named 
by  the  (Jreeksjii  ^,as  :  (hflli'iie,  Ci/rene,  Dldi/mP,  .UeHsnie,  Mltyletie^Siiwpe ; 
{c)  the  mythol()<rical  river  Lethf^'AmX  some  appellative  nouns,  especially 
the  names  of  arts  and  sciences  in  tee,  as  rhdorlce,  qr<immaticJ\  namce. 

n,!lT-J^'*  ffW>^/{^/^re  nouns  in  ?  are  mostly  postclassicai..  a^cromht\  alm'^,  hmnrhoU\ 
opo^frop'n-*  pfa^tic,^,  dinve\  marpre^,  ethice.\  etymoIoqice\  Only  epitowJ»\  gram- 
imticry,  rhetonn '^^anii  ,nu4re\^  have  classical  authority,  and  eVen  these  are  by  far 
more  usual  in  their  Latix  forms  in  a,  as  epitoma,  (jramrnatica  etc. 

8.  To  the  declension  in  es  beloiiij:  :  [a)  the  patronymics,  that  is  the 
names  ot  men  m  the  heroic  a-re,  derived  from  the  n:mies  of  tlieir  fathers 
or  aiices^tors,  as  Atrldrs'^  PelUe>^\  PriawuU's'\  Tyduies^  Laortldde.'i,  lle- 
raclidcH  .  1  hey  terminate  in  tde.s,  Me.%  or  iddcs ;  (d)  Some  m  \le  i)roper 
iiaiiK.'s,  jis  A/ich(.H('sjAjeTfes,  P/a'loc/Ptes  etc.;  (r)  Some  civic  and  national 
nouns  as  Ct'ofo,nr,f,,s-\  AMt/ite.s'\  Spaftidie.s"\  EplrOtea'',  8lagirite.%  Malldt4'><, 
UerndeotM;  {d)  Many  appellative   nouns,  as    anaffnost'es'^  sophiste.'^^K 

7?<m.  L  The  majority  of  the  Greek  proper  nouns  in  e^  follow  the  third  declension  even 
It  in  (iKKKK  they  are  inllected  after  the  first  declension;  as  Euripides  (Gkn.  Eu?ipidis), 
MWiades  ((Jkn  m/tiadis),  while  in  Gkkkk  all  proper  nouns  in  I'SttS  and  d6?/S  hvhm^ 
tothe  /y/w/ <ieelensioii.  Even  thive  appellarive  nouns  in  e.<  {sorites^'',  acinares^\  and  sa- 
[r<il>'-<'\  which  III  (.reek  follow  the  first  declension,  are  in  Latin,  in  the  sin-ularar  least, 
inllected  alter  the  thud,  while  in  the  PLt'UAL  they  follow  the  first  declensionse  \mon  ' 
Itu!  proper  nouns  in  e^.  the  follown-- belong  in  Latin,  to  the  first  (ireek  declension": 
t' ;•"■'/;       ..'";■*'  ^''^''J'"-"-  I^'fertes,  PhVorf^tes,  Prnrrustfs,  ThersVes,  Thueste,^.  E-h^crnte^, 

^Ci/       )>/   ''-^■'^''^^^''-'^•^'■^'^L'^''''  ^t^^^f-'-'f*"'^  PoliorcUts,  Polydectes,  Achates,  AgamMes\ 
Cro/i^^x, /»/i/-,/<//<^,s.  and  some  others  Jess  usual.  ^  >  ^      j  , 

Jiew.'2.  The  nppiUatire  nouns  in  es  are  mostly  posTf  LAssrcAL.as  coinete"^^  paniratiaste^^^ 
C/iora"'es-ii,  marathrV(s32^  mests^K  fnystr^a*.  plastts^\  the  iM.ruAi.K  t  \\ti^-m  Pandtct.t^^" 
and  many  names  of  stonks.  as  achat,x^\  chry^ltes^^  pyrltes^K     Classical  authority  have 
only.  rt//a7/w>.y/«i.s«',  .w/>.7|-^tes"»i,  gernnTtrfs*'^.  sorites*^,  satrapes,  Areopayltes**,  and  some 
compounds  of  arc/ies  ('t/jj;/?),  denotin-  the  chief  of  a  country  (as  Bivotarchs*^,  Ma- 


(  abba-e.—  2  the  plant  aloe.—  3  a  rhetorical  figure  {exagr/eration).—  ♦  a  rhetorical  fi-ure 
~  ,„'",^'  P  '"'''ic  art.—  «  the  art  of  practical  medicine.—  ^  nia-ic—  «ethics.—  »  etvmoTo-v 
Z.l\  'J''*^';'"''"^.-  ''grammar.-  >2  rhetoric-  i3  music-  m  ..andson  of  .4/'/'^*%  a  des'ig- 
nation  of  Agamemnon  and  Mm-laus.-  is  son  of  Peltus,  desi-nation  of  AchUles,—  le»  son 
01  /narnvx- 17  a  descendant  of  //mv//r.x\- >6  inhabitant  of  r/o/o//.— i»  inhabitant  of 
Abilera.--  20  Spartan.-  21  inhabitant  of  Eplrus.—  223  reader.—  23  a  sophist.—  24  a  -,^om- 
Ts  aM         certain   kind  of  sophism.—  2«  a  Persian  sabre.  -  27  a  satrap  {Persian  viceroy). 

—  ^^U\(i\\omx  sat  rapes  behmgs  to  the  .3d  declensi.m  only  in  the  <;e\.  sing.   But  ,wri^/is 
in  ^n/'.wnoleof  the  singular  inflected  after  the  ?a\  declension.  Qaomodo  wrVi  resi-^tas  f 

///•^^"  '*.>"*'*""'''•  Ci'-ero  quotes  this  word  only  once  as  a  Gukkk  express. on*- 
frHiis  hts,(pia<  Gr(eci  comTfas.  nostri  crinitas  rwant.  Nat.  Deor.  -2,  .5.  At  a  later  period 
tlie  woirlwas  received  in  tiie  Ian-u;»-e.  but  only  with  the  Gkkkk  t.»Tmination  *=.«  The 
Un-tucomtta  IS  loijnd  only  in  the  latent  Latinitv.  The  noun  planJtes  (a  planet)  insteid  of 
nieciassic:iU/^//r/^,7YWv  belong-  to  the  Latinitv  of  the  middle  a-'es.—  »0  ;,  eoinbaiant  in  all 
kin.ls  of  -yinnastics.-  3i  .,  (i,„e-pl.iyer.-  32  CMin.-l  wine.-  33  tiie  nMrth-nonh-east-wind. 

—  a  priest  111  the  mysteries.— 36  a  sculptor  — 3«a  part  of  the  civil  law.  codified  by 
Justinian.-  37  ,,^r:„e.  -  sh  topaz.-  s»  fiint.  -  «o  a  reader.-  -«i  asoplust.-  42  a  ^r^,, meter. 

of   AfV'"'^  ^^'"  IV".  «f  ^'^P'li''»"—  **«  member  of  the  Areopagus,  the  liigli  criminal  court 
at  Athens.  —  4s  chief  of  the  Boeotians. 


SECOND   DECLENSION. 


33G 

'."!,  1::  1/..,V..  etL  Juul  the  river  AV.r...  ;  (/»  ^^^^^J^'^^^^  ^^ 
bomrs\  iidras\  carfxv^'  and  the  pliimle  taiituiu  etem^.  only  Ihc  last  ot 
which  has  chissical  authority. 

arn;,iny  of  those  in  „  ah.l  ,;c.    Kx,H,„ion,  arc  the  „m.„»  .Va,..y-«  "."1  "<-'•<:■..  of  wl"ch 
the  colhiieral  forms  Mavf^ya  and  ^n/m  occur. 

10  Gknokk  of  (luKKK  NOUNS-  If  ^reek  nouns  in  >;?  or  «?  assume  the 
Tntin  ten  Mtion  n  tiiey  also  chan-e  their  Greek  gkndeu,  beconnnj 
FF  ntnL  a  "i^  m '^^;^^^^^^  (tVoin  the  Greek  6  ^af.yapirv^),  h,vr.  ^mW.U^ 
fin  GuFFK^w'Wp^  It'both  tlie  GuKKK  and  the  Latin   orms  are  m 

llsetlletendcM-  indifferent  aceonling  to  the  termination,  as  :  Uara.,  masc, 

JJ*;?..';^.",™"'.'''.'.":,'  ;v,;w«t' «»!;«;:,;, t'lfo.-  «hid.  for,,,,  occur.  tl,o„,h  .n 
bi'Miitication!*  diflfrt'iit  from  th(.'  VLritAU 

tl.e  la..^n,„i:e  this  «as    ti.e  7r.7V?rt'-  nATTVK-TEUMINATlON    of  lite  Greek 
■ndiin'-;  ill  e  and  f^.v.     See  Charisius  p.  "20  Keil.  . 

(M  T  e  ACC us v^^^  siNa.  of  the  Greek  nouns  in  .,.  sometunes  especi- 
allv  in  P(H'ts  in  Vi,.^  .hvays)  assumes  the  terminaium  .r,^  alter  the 
GreeL  accusativ"  in  a..     Thu's  we  always  tind  in  Lv.y  the  accusative 

^S'proner  names  in  ex  -enernllv  have  in  the  vocative  and  ablative 
bi^.^!k'l.J^1n  terminations  .(tor  the  v<^.),  -^^  l^.^^l^"^  ^^^ 
Btead  of  the  Greek  terminations  a  and  e,  as  \  oc.  Ainda,  Abl.  Ainda. 

3.  Sf:cond  Declension. 
A    Ailillt tonal  Retnarka  to  Le.^s,  VirL,  /A.,  A. 

10    (Vld   to  8  32^     Tlu.chnractcn.tic oof  this  declension  ^^^•l'^''*^\'\';>' '\\ ,;!^'^;:;;:,I';^^^^ 

freqnl'ntly  find  tl.e  endin-s  os  an(l  ^^^V.    n/     l,^  m  i  i n     m  an  t  Vi.-.).    Whil-  the  In- 

«nil  and  .lasMeal  (ix^serros,  arox  m  ''  '''V^^^iv /r   ,    t.C.h.ati?.  . '  l^  aT.<l  ovu  instead  of 
K-riptions  of  the  archaic  pe.iod  ^:>'"«'/""7,P''''       •  ,^'    .  u  the  Uolnnu.a    Hostrata  ; 

V.  L\  ,nn  <as  ,niwo>>  in  the  n>-tai>hs  «v^    If..^'     IcH     i  ..     th^.rt^l^»^o^^^^^         of  tl.e4 
mi'io..  opj>vlnnr,  poi,lorn   ^^^'  ;>':;,,'    ,."  ^^^Tn^-^^\^-  charac.n-istic  of  .he 

"'^r  iAdd  t ';i;s^.'^Th:  ^:^:::;;:^..  .y  .....  many  proper  nanv^c^MM^^^. 

■    1  Chief  of  the  Ma-ne.ian..  -  ^  chief  of  a  country  in  general.-  »  nor;  h-vvind.-  *  turban. 
—  »  ca^t  north-ea.-t-\\  iud.—  «  a  Greek  measure. 


APPENDIX  I. 


337 


eion  are  formed  fand  in  the  firPt  declension  the  endini?  ia)  is  onVinally  a  derivative  end- 
in-  l..r  AI.JECTIVK.   t   he.no;  the  derivative  element!      Hence  the  e.fdinrSirJ  in  all 
tn-e..  genders.    Ol  the  same  ori::in  is  the  characteristic  i  in  the  nouns  of  the  third  de 
clens.on  l)eh.nL.'in-  to  the  vowel-elass.     This  letter  i,  as  a  derivative  element   is  of  the 

r;:''.n':n  .':"V^'"^^''  '"If-'^'   "^-"^^^*  1«"?"«.?«'*  ^^^ow  il'm  their  declen'lon^rr  «unf     u 
t  he  coirnate  hm-iuiires  tins  derivative  i  -enerally  appears  in  its  consonantic  form  ( /  which 

lllc  pr^.c:.dh,';j"-o wel.''  ^"'^  '^'*^'""  ^  ^'^''"^^  Pomp-^us,  Gajus,  Majus),  always  leniihening 
Thf  adjective  termination  t7/.«f  is  especially  employed  to  designate  the  Roman  fientes  i  p 
tl.e  conii.M.ations  ol  those  families  which  were  derived  fromli  common  ancestor     ThiS 

.hue  IS  I  he  emales  1  ad  no  oth.-r  names  h-it  th.;  name  of  tlieir  irens,  those  of  the  same 
lamily  be.iig  distinguished  by  ordinal  numerals  (Prima,  Altera,  Tertia  etc.).    A  trace  ol 

Hence  the  n';;:;!;' of''.?':"  ""r  '"  l""  "'"^^  "^"."^^  "^"  •"••'^^^-  «^  ^'«^'^<^'  SeAus  Sl^ 
H.M.ce  the  names  of  Komaii  families  up  to  the  Au-ustan  age  alwavs  end  in  ius      Since 

that  time  <limtnutinetori,is  l)e-an  to  be  introduced  for  female  nauK^;,  as  I)ru.ma    ionn- 

iW^y^/ihl/a'"''  ""'"^  ""  '*''''"''  "•''^"^"  "^^"^  ^''  daughter  Tullia  by  the  dinS- 

,1  u;./.^*'*'"  ^V  §  "^^-  I^-.-'^-)  .The  rule  given  in  most  grammars  that  the  noun  genius  (tutelary 
h-.tv)  (orm-  Its  vocative  in  t,  rests  on  th(.>  authority  of  a  single  passage  in  Til)u  1   4  5  9 

.  winch  he  reading  y,m(/ne  genV  is  critically  doubtful,  the  correct  rcadin-  (co„flrned 
by  several  manuscripts)  bein-  alm^.  veni.  The  reason  that  the  e  of  the  v(.eati"ve  of  proper 
names  ux  yt.-^  and  ot    the  noun  ./iViw  was  dropped,   is  the  very  frequent  use   of  these 

natives  in  daily  intercourse.  This  reason  d<.es  not  apply  to  tile  noun  qenljl  SL  voca^ 
In  die  aSiiurJteJs:'"  "'"'^  '^'"^  used,  since  i  does  not  oc?ur  in 'any  foSi 

lo  (Add.  to  g  ;34-38.)  Mostly  to  the  second  declension,  but  also  to  the 
lirst,  helon.ir  tlie  trequeiit  Dimlnutives  of  the  Latin  laniruacre,  which  either 
mipart  the  idea  ot  s.mali.ness  to  their  primitive  nouns,^or  are  used  as 
terius  of  endeau.ment.  They  have  the  endin-s  ulii,<<,  ula,  alum,  oveiilu^, 
cala  culuni,  accordm^r  to  the  gender  of  the  primitive  noun,  as  rivm  — 
ricxlux,  measa  —  menmla,  oppidum  —  oppidalum,  muUer  —  m uliercula. 
Hence  dimmutives  serve  as  tests  for  the  gender  of  their  primitives  in  the 
case  of  doubt. 

nf/?fr",?"Jl\^  endin-s  fihis  a.vm.  which  after  a  vowel  are  chan-ed  into  dlu.<^,  a,  urn,  are 
att.iehed  to  tlie  ntmns  of  the  first,  second,  and  to  those  of  the  third  declension    which 

^tlK^;  nPc'ilK'^'^o  J'n' '"'^"rrr'  ''''  ""r'  '''l^  ^^'^^'^^  declensions  attach  tSese  ending 
lo  rneit  DhCLKNsioN-^TEMs.    Thus  are  lormed  :  ^ 


filia— tiliola 
villa  — villula 

piur— puerulus 
scutum  —  scutulum 


taba.  (obsol.)  —  tabula 
bestia  — bestiola 

malleus  —  malleolus 
negotium  —  negotiolum 


1st  dkcl.  area  —  arcnl  i 

ccena  —  cteiiula 
2DDECL.   nidus  — nidulus 

saxum  — saxulum 
3u  DECL.  (disceps,  o^vrV. )  -  discipulus      rex  -  regulu*  merces  -  mercedula 

caput  —  cupiiulum  fornax  —  fornac-ula        vox  —  voc-ula 

nepos-nepoiulus  stips  -  stijmla  radix  -  radlc-ula 

When  tlie  declension-stem  ends  in  n  or  r,  thest»  letters,  together  with  their  orecedincr 

//  r  Xw//f/.    "/•  ''¥^' ;;  ^^'dlnn-caieUa,  opera  -  opella,  lucrum -lucel  um^siq. 

%Zr.7u.^  [•  "^'  ^i.7'';///i-^i.7t/'/m.     Lnpi<  forms  lapillm.  and  codex -codicil'm.     Pes 

mgii  arly  forms  W^^vz/w,  and  rana  has  two  diminutives,  the  regular  ra/////<7  and  the 

liregular  raaumnlus,  the  latter  pointing  at  an  obs(,lete  noun  m;?^,  d.ranZ  (SeeR  2  ) 

clSon'l'    «ml  7.VHh''  '■"^'•fi  ''•  ''"'  "'^'  attach.'d  to  the  nouns  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  do- 
ar     i     Mv   ?A  those  with  MQir.i)  and  vowel-.stems  of  the  third  declension.     They 

aie  aiv\jiy>  attached  to  the  tiu^k  stem.  ^'"^j 

dlminuiive  l)![!Sln7''''/  "^  '''"^  '^'^  declension  retain  their  characteristic  ^,  to  which  the 
aiminutive  endinirs  ctdt/^,  a,  tnn  are  attached  ; 

piscis  (St.  plici)  —  pi<ci-cHlu8  refe  (st.  reti)  —  reticulum 

nayis  (st.  nan)  —  naviciila  pons  (st.  lytrnd)  —  ponticnlus 

linler  (st.  lintH)  —  lintriculus  pars  (^t.  parii)  —  parlicula 

venter  (st.  ventri)  —  ventriculus  sore  (st.  sorti)  —  sorticula 

th?  vow.'.l'^'i^fn  '■"'•^  their  nominatives  in  2^,  instead  of  the  true  characteristic?,  retain 
me  vowel  2  in  th«ir  diminutives,  as  nnm -  nab^ada,  vulp^s-vidpecula,  isedk  -  se- 

15 


338 


SECOND   DECLENSION. 


cRctdn.-  Faix  form,  falcula  nnd  falcicula,  glans -^  gland.la,  cor  -  corculum,  and  ado- 

legcem  —  adole-cendUitft.      ^        .  „r,^«  ti.avMWPl  nrpcedin»'  their  characteristic  in  the  nom. 

2)  The  Litii  ID  Moms,  which  ''\']'^S^.J\^^''^^^^^^^^  ,   .,„,,,,^  _pa/riH'u/».<, 

8INO..  retain  this  chm^ed '^oy.e  'l^l^^'^^^y^^^^J.^^'^L^^  f.rm.nati<.n 

hamiuu^ulus  wer-fratorculus  mas- mascnhis 

-:^-f::i:z^n.      g-Js^u...     ;-r-,-;;-;i"- 

declJiVsii)..  there  is  only  the  (li.ninutive  diToda  frcni  die.s'. 


16  (Ad(l  t()ii:V2-88.)  In  tbe  classical  pcn.Ml  the  cKNtTnE  ^;n".;[ 
nomis  not  VDJpCTivEs)  ill  ius  an-l  iV/^/i  ^^as  /r////r/.  a.ul  prononwrd  with  a 
ZT/  1^  uUh^  the  accent  on  th.  tknult,  as  /../;.,....<. en ^7.a- 

inge'fii  (not  ingenii).  ,    v    «♦ 

i.  alleirinir  it  t..  he  contrary  to  ^^/'^  \'\'  ,;'/',;  ;;/;;.[  ',h,,.-;  ,  "classu-.m.  ,..Ti<Kl  the 
than  the  nominative,  it  is  ''«^•^''  ]  ^'  r'"/"  '^  vi^^l>  "  -"  "'      ^'''^^  "'-'^  «'"'  ""^''■**"^ 

in  fM/i'i.^  iX<»<t.  Att   U.  i'^l:    >^{  ^-.TxiTri^^^  Hn-  cten.porarv  of  Cickko,  ac- 

o,d,i  hy  Ihe  AccKNT  (oBN.  I  m^n  ;•.'.'/';,,.;  t  .  .;Jnitives  of  I'iantns  an.l  I'l  .uiiu>i 
kn-.u-led-es  this  nsa-e  as  ^f'''^' V/  V'  '  ^^i''  '"  >H-i.  '  cntrarv  to  s.rirt  trrannnar. 
had  ^^-^«''^-(?/•''^V''»^'T7^''!:""^•,  "!  I  of  nouns  in  in.  ,>..) 

In  Lxcrrtv,.,  V,rud,  and    lomrt  ^  ^'.'^^  ;!!>;.    ./J,!  ,f„„,,,^  i  ..-adnallv  was  adopted, 

the  rules  .>f  abstract  ^>-»M';'<=V',  ';."       ^^     r.n  d-".  "d^^^^ 

SeeVchnJide^Cir.  p.  51.,  and  Spalding  to  Qutntihan,  %  ol.  I.,  p.  '±'^^'^^^^^^^ 

the  Greeks.  :n,d  ^^^ v  1:^:1^:^^^^^^  r^^^      Ion. i^jL  Gondii  nun,/ <.f 

^oJw^/  /s'    nd  Isth,n>i>^.  which  are  mas.  ilink,  as  n,  (.reck.  „     ^,       ^ 

from  ,.rr-r..    Son,,,  m~lorn  Rran,man,vn<  (l.-m  ,„„  ,;„„„„ 

grISSif  rc^olllliria'^f 'S;aid';'r;2;.io,.  of  ^..«  nr  .•  a  K.ft.„and  u.au  ,.  .co 


APPENDIX  T. 


339 


would  he  a  very  stran.^c  de  i"na,i\fn  ?,^"  hn.h  ouP  Ih"^'' ^r^'^'^'^-'^'^  to  •  rii:hr  hand', 

or  c<,u.pound,.,l  hy  ,he  Horn  H  s"  \  xi'ite     al    llv  h  fo^/  J^""  ''''''^■''  •^^'"^'•^  "^^^e 

q.;enf:;Sij,lX?:n:;?^];;;^,ri^^;;;r.^^^  --ntc .  intoniz 

That  it  cannot  have  h.enh,.  Vowc>n-(;      the^^  '*"'' '"  otherwords. 

ctyuiol„::ists  assert)  appears  fro      tl  .  f  c    tl    ^h'^n,   nfTt?''  ''^  tl«i  modern  so-called 
Sanscrit  and  the  other  co-nate    an-n  i-^cJ  1^«^  ^'''^  ""'"'^  "'"'■''  ^""C"'-'^  i"  the 

Greek  form.  ^"o'laie  iangua-es  stands  much  nearer  to  the  Latin,  than  the 

JJ.  The  second  declension  of  norms  horroxoed  from  the  Greek 

scconti  ^^{;^::;;.:r^;;r  13^  ^"t  L:;i;:T!:;:::;i::  tr\f  '^^  ?-- 

of  these  Greek  nnnn«   .ntiw  .    7        •      i^'iiin  l.mgnaue  has  bf}rr(nced  nvduy 
iiini-<u u.  I.ATIN  „  ,  I  ,s      (         Hm  I    ,,,  i  ,.'',v    I  '•■"'.""•"i"i>.^"«an<l  '</«,  , ''were 

KINK,  as  h.r' ilmmtiro».  Ii.vr  i>,rim,  m<    h,>i  ,1.  ,,  'f' """""""  ">«■  «lien  tli.'y  are  pemi- 
iii  «■.  as  l,u-  'lim.U,^«  /  climlf  M,^^^^^^^  Hi -.van,  masculixk  ilwy  are  r.,rmixl 

Tifr  sTf'liho  rl'"  "7  "'■."■';'*■"  ^«•'f"  '^  «■•«•k  termi„a„„„  „.,  have  in  ,he  Acco,*- 
aii.l  til,.  Gkekk  t.Tniiiiati,  ,<   Ihe  a    ■  «^n?.-    ..^      '.1    '  """"""'l>'"  ''»«  ""H'  'ho  Lati^ 

';™r :". .1,  t*'  ^ ""™  f "f "'•  '■"•  «■  •'  ^ "-'-  ^''■'^«-  ph..  " « xh  ^0« 

'.im';.  'C  cC  V  ;  .'r^'s'' '"Xi";  hc"n.fr'tr/'''"  •'«"H-'-"™-",  n.„,e  or  a  Greek 

j£?i^;^iM;;^^sr]^;2i^^^     '- ""-'"  -"-.-» «^'^* 

).vn;X:'i'i;';fi',;'l,.;:i  L";;  'dI.S!7^''.ri;'!'"l'T?-  '^  ".ea-re.--,  mine,  a  me.al.- T» 
..fa  >v,,r,l._  .i„,.„t;  i  '  sn  ,-':  ",(^  :;'"  '>■"<•  P"«.",-,»  a  inocli  snn,.-  .«deiivatio,, 
(lisMict.-  n  ruhm  1 1.  „„  Vnt.  „;r  It  ,n  ''  '"■;"■  '>.'IJ-.">' —  "  ■•'  «al.Tlily,-  i.  a 
vc™  of  two  measures.-"  ari'iiudtamL  "S;:a„'l!a:' ^^ 


340 


GREEK   THIRD   DECLENSION. 


24.  The  Greek  proper  name?  of  the  Attic  second  declension  in  CajJ  take  either  w  or 
tMas  nominative-termination,  .4/i'ios(-'^^G'5),  Andror/*  >/.<  or  w  {AySfjoyfoi^)  ;  y-yn- 

dareifx  (/ri^S(\'fjfo,TS).  Tlu'  oihor  cases  ^renorally  t.ikc  the  T.atin  intit-ction  («jkn.  An- 
droriei.  Ti/mldrti).  l\\\\  somctiines  the  i)oets  borrow  the  peculiar  casc-icrnHnation>  of  the 
Attic  (iecien.'-ioii.  Tims  Vir«;il  (-Kii.  H,  20)  forms  tlu^  okn.  Ahdroged  after  the  Greek  «en. 
*Av6fJ')yECtO.     Of  the  roun  J/'AfMthe  sainepoct  vGeori:.  .'i-'Jl)  lormstlie  Accusative  ^4 /'Ao, 

accordiiiL'  to  the  (Trc*k  -i^&',  wliih-  riiny  1,  4,  10  has  the  acc.  Affion.  Arcordini' to  the 
tcstiiiiony  of  Prisciaiiiis.  Cicen»  lonncd  the  Accrs.  Atfionem  alter  the  .'id  dtch-nsion. 
Tlie  n<juii  To-v»,  (A' a)?)  lornis  its  cases  after  its  colhiteral  fwrm  Cons  (.gen.  Coi  etc.) ;  Uit 
the  ABLAT.  is  re<,'tilarly  Co. 

'^5.  TIk'  i>roi)er  nouns  in  f  ^'^  of  the  ."Jd  Greek  declension  crcnerally  assume  in  Latin  the 
tenninatioii  ei(x,  and  are  intlected  after  the  .^erond  declension,  as  Ori>lniis  r.v.s.  (Jrpttn, 
DAT.  (Jri)h(-o,  I*iointtheiis,  «en.  Proinetliei  etc.     The  accusative  of  these  nouns  is  p.irtly 

formed  alter  the  Latin,  partly  in  it  after  the  (ireek  rule.     Livy  always  uses  the  accusative 

Persed.     The  vocative   is  formed  in  e>i,  after  tlie  (Jreek   terminaiion    fl\  as  Orp/nu, 

l^oin?lhfii.     lint  some  of  the  nouns  in  f  ^'?  receive  tlie  Latin  termination  ^.f,  and  follow 

the  third  declension.  Jr//;//''.^  ( ■ '/T''^'^''''^^  «"<l  r'''<?'>^  <  ()67^66fi'<^)  are  always  thus 
formed,  and  of  PerttemWw  collateral  form  Pernex  is  found  (always  in  Cicero  with  the  Ace. 
Pertien). 

26.  Some  neuters  in  o?  of  the  "d  Greek  declensi(m  retain  in  Latin  the  termination  os, 
hut  form  their  eases»  after  the  second  declension,  us  r/tans-  {ro  ^ao?),  «en.  c/iai,  DAT. 
chao;  m^/fas^uEN.  JfiefL  'I'he  neuKT  ^'Jfjyo^  \<  L'cnerally  chiniL'ed  into  the  MAs<ri>iNB 
XM.uiiAUK  TANTiM  Avf/i.  oKS.  A/fjorum.  But  it  is  also  found  in  the  nom.  and  acc.  sino. 
as  a  netiter  {/loc  Arf/d'O.  -- 

27.  (tKXDKK.  The  nottiis  iti  os,  tho  same  as  in  Gfock,  <j:<MU>rally  are 
MASCLJLTN'K.  uiitl  those  ill  r>/A  withoiit  exception  nki'tku.  Hut  nonns  in 
OS,  which  in  Greek  tin*  feminine,  licneially  reiain  this  eciKh'r  in  Latin, 
-whether  tliey  assume  the  Latin,  or  retain  the  Gkekk  termination. 

nh- 


Hem.  The  followinir  Greek  nouns  in  on  and  vs^  are  fkmimne  :  ntitidot>i>i  (vf>\*,  ajxtxi 
p?ios^,  (nTfos'\  (t/o/in/s'',   C(irii<isiis>*^   cnttit^ttis^,    d'Kdtrlon.    d'xnmetroy^^.    dibaphns^^,  di 

t/iOiiflu.s^-.  jtiitfos^^.  j)r/i/nf^fro^**,  nnd    the  iiami-s  of  ^on)e  <.K>i>.  as  <u/ief/tf/>i'ii.t.  ri/rri , 

sappfniiis.  The  followinir  are  used  in  fntth  <r<'iiders  :  h<ntnl<fi.  rr!f<t(i'lii.<^^.  jih(r<'/>'-^^'^.  hata- 
nii>:^''.  jiliid/itix^*.  Several  n»)uns.  Generally  eiiunieiate(l  a<  femininks  in  our  irrammars, 
beloui;  to  the  Latinity  of  the  miildle  aires,  as  f(t>i/s.si(s.  (nt/i'/s,  /laraf/niptnis.  The  com- 
pounds of  o'f^o?'",  which  in  Greek  are  fkminink.  belonir  eilher  to  the  ecclesiastical 
Litiiiity,  as  //<?/•  f.^Yx/^/x^o.  /j,f'r  nifiutdus-^.  or  they  nst  on  fiie  authority  of  tlie  l.atot 
writers",  as  tiif-tliodox.  Ilivr  period un  occurs  in  the  ancient  irraminaiians.  hut  always  with 
a  Latiii'interpretalion,  which  is  an  evidence  thai  the  word  was  not  generally  understood 
by  the  Itomans. 

4.  The  declension  of  nouns  r.ouijowEn  from  the  Greek  after 

THE  TIIIKl)  DECLENSION. 

28.  Tlie  classes  of  Greek  tioiins  of  the  third  declension,  with  a  few  ex- 
ceptions, airree  with  those  of  the  Laiin  lanirnMi^^e  beloiiLnni:-  to  the  same 
declension.  The  (ireek  nonns  of  this  deolensi(»n  tire  divided  into  the  same 
classes,  and  Jiccordini:  to  the  same  principh-s,  us  the  L;itin  nonns  of  the 
third  declension.  The  main  ditferences  between  both  lamrniiires  are  l)that 
the  liqnid-nmtes  of  the  Greek  lanirna.ui:e  do  not  belonii:  to  the  vowel-class, 
but  tt)  the  mnte  clas.ses;  2)  that  the  vowel  characteristics  in  Greek  are 
the  vowels  i(i),o,  and  .v,  beini,'  not  confined   to  the  vowel  /,  as  in  Latin  ; 

"•rAnishuid  iTTthe  Aeirean  Sea.— ^  the  chaos.—  3  a  tune,  a  soni:.—  ■•a  counter  poison.— 
•  an  apn<troj»he.— •  the  constellation  Unit:-  ''  an  atom  in  metaphysics.—  **  ttax.—  *a 
peri)endicular.—  'Oa  diamefer.—  »»  a  L'annent  twice  dyed  with  purt)le.  -  '^a  diplithoni;. 

13  ,-e,i  i;.;i(|.  -  •<  the  «■ircuinfiT:'nceof  a  circle.  -  i»h  crystal.—  '"a  he.in.—  '^an  acorn. 

—  ^<^  the  l)ase  of  a  column.—  ">  a  way.—  '»  the  second  book  of  the  Pt/ttateucfi.—  ^^  a.  coun- 
cil of  bishops. 


APPENDIX   I. 


341 


^)  the  dilferenco  in  the  treatment  of  the  N-class  and  S-class  (S  30  and 
ol)  ;  4)  the  (iilference  m  the  form  of  the  case-e.uiin-s  ^ 

.e/i;;s\i:^,l!;:s^;;j:'j„!:^;^^i^i;i,ii:;-; ,;;;;;  ::-?;j-/-j""^  t.:;  ,K>uns  of  the  first  and 

(A.a,  =AJaj'.  Tpota=  -n-opn.    The  di   htl  o.;.     /.  -ne  '^^  H>tnetinies  „.to  aj  ;.nd  oj 

hut  before  vovvei^  souu-time-  in  o  e  Wv!l-  J  fl"^^' ,U'''"'S^--  mto  ^  a,cpr,,-=^l,e,o, 
hv  y.  bu,  occasionally  hyTiK^^-r^^^'^^^''^'^-  ^^»'  ^^7^  V.'  '■"'-"'^''^-  '-^«'l^^'^^d 
ways  cuan;re.s  i,,,,,  ^,/  „,^,1  «^,  ]'\.  ,    '%\\:'  'L  ''>"  (a«rrv  =  a.v/./).     Th-  (n])hihoni:  tv  al- 

ruptlon,  ar'o8va.eO^'JulZ!Tcii^.>!e:;!''''  ''""''^  "'""'  "'"'"^  lliorouj;hly  cnunged  by  cor- 

2i).  The  Greek  vowel-stems  of  the  third  declension  terminate  in  z  (f) 

llie  lollowinir  nouns  :  "i-n^  w''*'V^>,  i^i\.  jj.  ^,),     Here  belong 

''■""^:^''^:^,^^'^:^:!::*^}:'^!:;!!^^^^^  ■■  <?""■  --"^'^ 

iu  later  writ.-rs  oiilv  •  /mitiesh    m//rn.l/  i  ;^  ttr/nd).     The  following  occur 

plMuis.  beast.,  ;n,.l,^u,/.;:T;.r^^^^^^^^^^  Pn/ta,n.\  ami  several  n^n.-s  of 

Ti.e  (;reek   neuters  in  c  -'em-ral  r^kc  feuS  *''/'•  :''»'^'.V  are  all  lemi.iine. 

>H.t  -ome.imes  «rarely,  ti;^;'o:^l.i:a?n^.;^i''.^;'^ -,;;;;,;;;  Y'^;V'''''f''^^^  <^m><ri.^^ 
FKMALK  proper  names.  ix<  A/cesiU  /^/t-Vs^A-  \l  L  ^v  ^^  '''^^'' '''^^'/•''^'■^^-  '>>  ^<»'ne 
of  a.,  eddy  near  the  Sicilian  cotniurmo:rT,h  V'"'^"''''' ^^''""  "^"**^'  "«'''«  "«'"« 
names,    in  i>,  belong  to   Ute    T^'lal:    see  M^^  ^  H'"'"="^ 

wit  I.  v<M^el-eu(lin.'-  «re  of  Tathi  .^^uaJ,' t.  -■■'  ^,V  -*^  *'^  "auies  n\  ^.s■,  dec  ined 
H.VKKsi,,^.inbarl.;r;^c<,    ttde'mS'>:^?^^^^  ^'^  J^^  ^'""^  '>f 

HteMMs  in  id.  as  7VV/,i.v,  Aihwi,  fa  uO^Ii^t.  'nlr^Y:'  v\  "'  "''^S''  ^'^^^  collateral 
Several  n..mes.»f  cIt.ks    ui.  m  ot"  u       h'-.r         '  J^i'rienK     1  hey  are  all  ma.<culiue.     (d) 

i»  I^.tin.  The  sand-bank  S,rfi.  likew  !e  fol  m  "  Om  i'.u  .'l  T  ^l^"«'-!'"r^  "'>"  "'^^'d 
in  (ir.-ek  it  ha^  a  stem  in  id     The  t  l.ir     1!t,^^   i     v'.wd-declension  in  Latin,  while 

((J.  Trum^m).  luivevl>V"ste,n<  lo,     i     /.V  /T.i  r^^^^^^^  ^"''   ^''«''^''-' 

aliatantum  Ca^e.  ^ruH.,>n^vTa       s^)^^  ^^^  I''»'-  1'  ur- 

I'a^.cpa).     All  these  nouns  are  feminine!  tlitletent  forms  m  Greek  (KaA^.a, 

/t>m.  2.  (Jreek  vowel-stetns  in  v<:  rarelv  oreiip  in  Tat;..  .  ^t 
fern.  rMf,,.  and  of  proper  na.ne"  ^.n    he  nniTe  n  .m..     i      '  ?J  ^ominon  nouns  only  the 
is  also  a  fe.ual,.  n.one.  hut      i  h  a  .  . m  5)     ,^7,.:^^'  ^?^'^"'  '^^^-^;  ^7'^'-^>^'  ^^^''i^h 

''//v;  (n  rh-  mountai.;  Ot/m/:^,  m.  and  tteSeV  /^/^^^^  m  a'h'h""'  ^'^^''^'  '"'"'^  ^'''^^"• 
Avitl.  Greek  case-en.liu-s  (s/e  p  :Uo  /Vu  -()7rntt ',.  .W  '^^^  ^'""'^ .""'""  "'■^''"'  ""'>' 
im-n.-sof  plants  mi^v^^iuul  //.o///  1  kewil  1  u  itb  r  I  L-  "^'''*  ^',*''""'  ''^*'''^  ^'"^  <»nly  the 
or...rri..guucl.an.H.,l'hM,o,.r'i^.,andabl  ^"""^  case-endit.gs,  and  ci^fuHdarv), 

p4e^;inJe-and  tl:e'i;;i;nr;;?rl;^';r^  ter,ninati<Hi  e..  only  the  male 

<.r  /in,,,.)  occur  in  Lal-n.     Tin-    at^e  "  ner    K  dee     u  ^'^"V  V^^]""'  ^''''"''' 

50.net, nn.  take  ;'-  ^^reek^c.-e:endi^s'^;?'^'^j';;,li;i^;l;;'i;!i  ,^|^^  ^--;    ^-'--.  j-t 

s.»nn.  auihors,  takes  the  r-r.n  /V,.    w   .0    n   I  i  vv   u-       M  «ieelensto...     lUpa.v,,  m 

in  others  the  fo,ni  A /•.sv.<  (*o  in  r  cem   u  w   H,.T.    m  '     A     '''"^'A"*''''  ^^''^^^^  f'^rxeo,  Persea), 


"•>iiu  Au,p,e.«  (pl.  A<.pcet«)  occt^s    „  V  i        e  Ml  r7r  "i     ^^  ^^''*'^^-   The  national 

class  ( A>;...v,  a:  lj,,ru'n.  as  i^'/i.r.n  'a  Jtom.  smg.  15^^^^     ^^^"^'  '^''^"°  ^'^^  ^^^"  "^'  '''^  ^- 


'^^'^-^ii^u&~.L^:i^iv^:i^s:k::^-'^^^^^^ 


342 


GREEK  THIRD   DECLENSION. 


out 
t 

s 


in 


iioininativcs  in  o.  as  PMo.  Ifnjo.  Z.oo  ^^'!;J%''/'^^  N.,uns  not  (l.MM)t- 


•A:roAAu,.-o9,  hut  in  Laiiu  '-1/'^"''"  ;•  .,   '"•  ,r;  Wf  JMwlon,  /uiec  Sinjon. 

Maratno,,,  --^^^^' ^^^^^^ ^'^'^^^ ;:^ '^^';^Z^ oS.  Latin  (J^./>*.0".  G.  J/.m^r..^.), 


r    ,.1  Hft.T  ll.f  M.,-...„l  ''"-'"''V'^    nT;5,.^,?,,n  1  iV  T^  <in''k  valley  rd  T,^.-,.  b.-  ng 
occurs  only  in  noni.  and  ncc. 


occurs  only  in  n<.m.  and  ncc.  ,    .u  ,  a  Hn«-  arc  rmpcrlv  AmKCTivEf».  and  com- 

Rem.  ^.  GrcH<  noun-  in  ...  ^^^^  -;=J';j^,  ^^,^,^^'^  Iw^v  nul  all  th«s<.  in  r/...  Tln-sc  arc 
p. is.,  several  nuilc  proper  lunnes  .-is  '''^''  ^:^*: ';'  ',  W,^elU  etc.».  The  conunon  n.Miu-r 
Se.-lincd  in  Latin  like  ^^^-^-^;]^^^'  fl^^X^fnen^^^^^   J^n.are»,  helUmth...  (na.u-  « 

«f  plants»,  arc  drerk  n.-nter  \^'^^  ^^''^'  "''■  lin-V  h  i     .en.  rint:  *'nlv  "'  "•""■  «"'*  "'"*'• . 

~  Atriinnphal  livmn.-»  *"'' '"*'"' "o!'''^"^thVrcnmvn.'d  t.-niplc  in  the  acropolis  of 
d.cni..Mi.-.n.-^  a  ^^■'^•^■'V'•'V'"■  '',''"'  hmv  -'3  '  on  -•*  eanu.-.-mon,.y.-«6  a  kind 
Atlwns.-H  a  ron.^mt  m  the  V?!''*'"-,-;/;  Inn  dial  ^»«  -ta.Hlard.-'»  ima-e.-"  pumpkin, 
of  lii:h.  vcssH.->^cap.>n.-  Miandof     s^.^'^^^^^^^^^^   _.M,„nb-bcll.-^MKXnv-  of  a  ftsh.- 


APPENDIX   I. 


343 


I 


Tiem.  3.  The  common  nouns  hicheros  (a  hero),  hie.  thos  (a  kind  of  wolf),  the  male  name 
Muioi,  and  the  national  noun  Troi  (Trojan)  belont;  to  the  Greek  nouns  of  the  S-cla.«s  in 
WS-.  Gen.  wos.  They  add  the  cou^onanL  endings  directly  lo  the  o  of  the  stem  {herois, 
Minvi'^  etc.). 

o'J.  The*  Gn'ck  nouns  with  mute  «iteins,  the  same  as  the  correspond  in  i^ 
Laiii»  uoiuis,  Consist  of  the  P-class,  the  T-class,  aud  the  K-chiss.  'i'aey 
arc  ircalcd  accordiui::  to  the  tbUowinii;  rules  : 

Rem.  \.  The  Gkeek  words  of  the  P-clas?,  which  are  received  into  Latin,  are  all  mascu* 
M.NK.  (July  those  derived  from  GDil>{/(tce)  have  long  stem-vowels  (dp),  as  Cycldps^  G., 
('ijrlo/d-t.  mi/d/)M'-.  hydropt^.  and  itgiloits* .  The  stem-vowels  of  all  the  others  are  short,  the 
most  of  iliem  havini:  sieuis  in  op,  as  tlie  proper  names  Cecrops  (G.  Cecropis},  Pelopn.  Me' 
rojtt ;  tlie  iiation:il  names  Dnjopx.  .Etldopa,  Dolops ;  the  fish  6/oy?.s\  and  the  \nv^  epoijs. 
TiKtse  wiihoMf-r  ft  em- vowels  are  duilyb^^y  Hb>>'^,  the  national  name  Arabs  and  the  mylho- 
lo;ric.al  bird  (jryps^  with  the  stem  yryph. 

Rem.  2.  The  Gk^kk  nouns  in  6t?  of  the  T-clas8,  of  which  mainly  the  proper  names 
are  used  in  Latin,  have  stems  in  txvv,  cx^  and  cxT .  They  rettvin  in  Latin  both,  the  ter- 
niin.ition  as  in  the  nominative,  and  tiie  stems  ant,  ad  and  at  in  the  other  cases. 

li  Those  with  stems  in  ant  are  masculine.  Here  l)elon','  the  appellative  nonns  ada- 
tna-^'  and  eh-phas^.  the  name  of  the  ciiy  Acrar/a^,  the  name  of  the  priests  Coiybanfe^.  the 
male  proper  iinines  Athaiitax,  Atla--<.  Jiufx,  Valchas.  /Jryas.  Mima,<.  I'allas,  l^>-riphas,  Poly- 
daiiutK.  Thaiinia'<,  T/ioa-'',  and  the  national  names  iii(/aiitt><.  Gararnantts,  Ilyanles. 

'Z\  Tlio<r  with  slfins  in  Jr/ are  fe.mi.nine.  and  the  personal  nouns  amonj?  them  are  those 
of  FEMALES,  except  tlie  male  name  Arcaft,  G.  Arradi-f.  Here  belong  ttie  appellativb 
nouns  lepas^^.lampax^^.  htbdaina-'^^'^.  dro/miJi*^,  Dtuia.s^* ;  the  name  of  the  city  Detnetrias  ; 
the  KKM.M.E  names;  Palliis,  I'olin.'i,  Oli/mpias^^.  with  the  pi.  t.  Hyddes,  Xahlde^i,  Dryddes^ 
Tlufinadtd ;  the  epic  poem  llias ^  and  the  national  names  Arcades  and  Noniddes^* . 

li'rm.S.  Some  of  the  GkfTKk  mascitlives  in  f/?y  G.  ffzo^,  have  been  received  in  Latin, 
retainiui:  their  n(niiiiiative<  in  ?x.  their  stems  in  eL  and  their  mascilink  gender.  Here 
bei<»ni;  lUe  nouns  c^les^'',  l^.hrK^'^.  heri>es^^,  7nafjnfs'^^.  Ore^'^^,  the  city  Tunes,  the  pi.  t.  tra- 
petes^'^,  C'urtltx"^,  Xann^.fei<'^*.i\\\(\  several  male  proper  names,  as  t'hreines,  Vehes,  Thales^ 
Dires,l\vi  two  latter  of  which  are  more  commonly  declined  like  nouns  of  the  vowel- 
CLASS  (G.  T/iafi<).  The  noun  o  rdlty/'s'^^  assumes  in  Latin  the  form  fwc  tapUe  or  to.pl- 
tirm,  and  a  word  hie  taikis,  which  is  a'lei,'ed  by  our  «grammarians,  is  not  found.  The  acc. 
PLiru.  /lox  A//>?/a.v.  which  once  occurs  in  I7rf7i/,  must  be  considered  rattier  as  an  unsuc- 
ci  ssftil  attempt  to  introduce  this  word  in  the  language,  than  as  an  evidence  that  it 
was  really  received. 

Rem  4.  Gkeek  words  in  7?  have.  a.<f  a  rule,  stems  in  7*5  in  Greek  and  in  id  in  Latin. 
•when  tlieyare  received  in  this  lanLruaLre.  To  the  T-class  (with  stems  in  'id)  belong  the  fol- 
lowing iionn-:  I )  APPELLATIVE  (111  KEMiNiNK):  (ef/is^.  pyra/nis^'' .  ti/raniiis'^",  ifri^-^,  aspis'o^ 
cant  liari.s^^,h<tfm^'',profH)xnx^^.  Calais'^*,  and  several  nam«!s  of  plants  and  stones.  2)  The 
resi  are  pkoim-;k  names,  eitht'r  of  males,  as  Xtt/.rls,  XaMs,  Phalaris,  Puti",  or  of  fe- 
males, as  Dipkii'is.  X-^rP/x,  Iris.  It'i'^,  Seiiiiraini>t.  irspe'-yifi^  (p),  t.):  or  of  countries, aa 
Lo-rhi,  Tutrix,  Kii-i.  ('o'c'ii< :  or  cities,  as  (Vri'H'i.  Piia-tUis ;  or  of  rivers,  as  Tigris^ 
Taiiais.  Hypan's  ;  or  of  titles  of  poems,  as  ^-Eneis,  T/tebdis.  They  are  all  feminine,  ex- 
cept the  MvLE  pr.iper  names  and  ttie  rivers. 

'the  Greek  proper  name-  in  in.  with  steins  in  "id.  often  assume  the  declension  of  the 
vowel-class,  as  ^VrtW.s'.  G.  Xab'idis  A\n\  Xahis.  In  tlie  accusative  sing.  Greek  barttonk 
stems(that  i-,  all  tlio.^e  whicli  have  no  accent  on  the  (iltiiiia),iu\i\\\\.  of  both  terminations 
"yleiu  and  im.  while  thi;  o.xytone  stems  (with  the  acute  on  the  ultima)  have  the  termination 
xdtin  only.    Therefore  the  appellative  nouns,  mentioned  above,  except  ibis,  being  oxT- 

*  A  Cyclops.  Tlie  Cyclopes  were  called  so  from  their  single  round  eyes.  —  ^*  near- 
eiirhted.—  '  dropsy. —  *  a  disease  of  the  eyes. —  *  steel. —  •  the  west-south-west  wind. — 
'  a  irrillin.—  »  adiauiond. —  *  anelephint  (themire  usual  form  It^  elephant  as). —  i"  a  kind 
of  lish.—  "  a  lamp.—  '-  a  week.—  "  a  dromedary. —  '*  a  druides-,  a  Gallic  priestess. — 
*' a  female  proper  name  :  but  more  frequently  .iii  Olympiad,  the  period  on  wliicu  Greek 
chronolxiry  was  hased. —  '"  the  Noiuids.  or  Nuinidians. —  '^  a  quick-sailinir  vessel. —  is  a 
kettle.— »»  a  disease  of  tile  skill.— 2"  u  load-stone.— 2'  a  Cretan,  fem.  Cressa.— ^"^  aa 
oil  mill.—  23  j)riests  oCCybele.—  -*  a  Gallic  people.—  2s  a  carpet.—  2«  the  shields  of  Zeus 
and  I'ailas.—  '■'''  .i  pyramid. —  ^ct  11,^  r,,]^.  ,,f  ^  tyrant. —  2u  ^  i,ir>l  sacred  to  the  Egyptians. 
—  ">  a  viper.—  ^i  tlie  Spanish  fly. —  sa  j^  ijeroine.—  ^^  the  trunk  of  an  elephant.—  "^*  a  pre 
cious  stone. 


344 


GREEK  THIRD  DECLENSION. 


APPENDIX  I. 


345 


Svn<>u\:^in6fi^)  ba.  a  .tern  in  ent  (G.  Simoends),  and  the  i.land  of  Salamis  a  .lem  m 
^      .  ■      r-yc    n   roirac  take  in  Latin  nominatives  in  oc  with  ptem?  in 

^.m  6%ev,.,a  Greek  «or,!.,  helonpng  to  tl,e  T-cas..  deviate  tt.  the  fo, m.  of  thetr 
nomtatt  l-eVf,-om  the  re,r„l„r  L*t,n  lem.i.mtion..  The«.  are  :  1)  the  nkl-teks  .„  /'« 
"'"'"'",,'.     rrT,,..,  renin  the  form  .if  llieir  nominative.  In  ma.  th.-ir  «terns  in 

mill.  MM  ini-ir.M:.i.ir.    ^  ,  i^jj.,,  j,,  ,^^,^.  „s.uine  the 

ge„„er,  a,  /,i.  -^-^^;  «•  .i^S*!;     ".hi^^rV'^^N;»? /r,™i»»-.    But  /,o.  /, W- 
^,,";^.";»  'ait   h,;ir  <i  '  k  '  e,n  in  V  iC.  ny,l,r.nMi.).    4,  ..f  the  Ureek  ,-►  »,mnk.  ■„  vi 
r  U^      the  folUnvh.'  two  occur  in  Latin,  retaining  both  their  stetns  ami  Jietuler:  lute 

imai^ristrorna^^,  tonumf^    Hut  ^^VO-^>^^     ;aS^^^^^^  (>tl..'r8.    They 

may  easily  be  disi.u-iushed  fr<»m  ^»"' La-i i^    loun^  of  tm    n .  i^n  ^^^^^  ,^.^^.^  ,,,^ 

f.-w  (as/ama../?«//;;/-a.  laennut)   ^'["V 't  vk  r?rR    ar    se  erallv  Onned  bv  th.-  ter.nina- 

l^yi^S  S:t;"l^n^l^ui^  Sr  \::^>o:.;«/i;-;..r  instead  of  j.,,natan. 
ne.n.  8.  Of  the  Greek  -a.cnUn^  ui  or.    sto^   the  nouns  ^ 

the  termination  and  drclen.ion  '''  l^»'  ^"^  .f^-J;-  ,,,  k.-JiuhI  sin-lv,  to  di^iniruisJ,  th.ir 
nioHtly  consist  of  makk  proper  "«nies  «nd  ist  -W*^  ';/'"l\  !,;\ -.i;,,.  ,»  «11  iliose  tenni- 
dceU-u^iou  from  that  of  the  nouns  ol  the  ^jj  ^/ !"  ''oi.iv  he  city  CUoihau  has  a  M.-m 
iiating  in  pJwn,  as  :  .l/-//y///o//,  i  Usii>ko,>  ^'['''{['l"^'^^^^  n,.d  the  river  />7V- 

i:2,.i!,^;rinra^?r'=£v£J^^ 

ZK4/;r  ."  ..  ;/o.™-'  hL  a'sten,  in  «..    The  Greek  pro„er  natne  ^«^«  »-'"'';;;;  ,  ^" 

*''C'  10   Of  Greek  nnnns  in  ex  only  the  nonn  „«r/to"  ,0.  ««rttfdA  an*  the  national 

-.  Tl,rOraS;;:^Pf.nKW/.^«--k  -me  of  ,od  Amor^    The  «..;;.  ;;e->yerv  fr,. 

qnentlya,  name  of-aave,.-  >  »  .l;|:"'"".'^^''    .^-J  .J  i"'  S":  _  n  one  of  the  Athenian 

X'l'r^r^r- ^'^".rrin/if  r,e:^•:i^•  "  ^"olirr-    •■  r.oVa.".-  3-.  a  cuira...-  "  a 
Bhrub. 


nonn  Lele^es  (ginj  Lelex)  occur  in  Latin.  Of  Greek  nouns  in  ix  are  found  :  1^  with 
fctein,-  in  ic  htc  Fh,znix'  ;  lac  or  h,^c  spadix-^,  hie  or  hizc  perdix^  ;  2)  with  stems  in  Ic  : 
if!i,n%/J^.!;  •".  '  ^t'''^  hl/'fj'ix'^^J^cBc  c/uenix\  hie  or  h(BC  larix\  and  the  national 
?//r'o  ^'"*-^^  ^>  ^^''^'^  ''^«'»=*  ^"  ^9'  ••  ^c  «tnx^ ;  \)  with  a  s^tem  in  ig :  hie  Uonurotna- 

R'ln  n.  Some  Greek  nouns  of  the  K-e]ass,  received  in  Latin,  terminate  in  yx  and  rtx. 
In  ,jx  lernimatf  1)  with  stems  iti  yc :  bombifx^^  cnlyxV^,  sa,idyX'\  The  mountain  A>ya?, 
the  mrilc  inline  (ey.r,  and  the  narional  name  Bebryx ;  2)  with  stems  in  ya :  oryj^*\ 
corryri^  the  mytholoirical  rivcT  Sfyx,  the  male  name  .7f//>//.r,  and  the  narioual  name 
////yj;'»  ;  3)  with  steins  in  ych  the  precious  stones  onyx  and  sardont/r  Thev  are  all 
mascnline.  oxcepx  h.ec  sandy. r  and  ^gf  .bY.v.r.-  lu  Mr  t-nninate  :  1)  with  stems  in  «7  the 
(emmu\e,>  ph(i/a,uri\  Sphifi.c'\  .Synxu:^^  Af<  nhKc-iO;  2)  with  astern  in  fwunly  lynx'^Uc.g.). 

(J'tul'S\.?''^'?^  '•T'' '°  '^^  ^'-'^\-  ^^.  "'^^^  «"^  °f  ^«'^'^  ^^'^  "^m.  termination  oa-  in  La'in. 
Of  these  occur    )  wi  I  h  stem  in  or.  hirhox  (G.  bOcis),  name  of  a  fish  ;  2)  with  stems  in  oc 

1' u'inf  \^  ^^/'^■l''')- '•«'"••  "<  =1  fi^t'.  and  .1...  n.-.tio,,.!  nonn  Cappadox  (also  ,iam..  of  a  ri  er^- 
3.  « 1  h  stem  in  or,  the  imtu.nil  m.un  A/Mjrox  (,,l„r.  Allnbrbqes^.  With  a  stem  in  a«a;  oc^ 
curs/.«c  glaijx  (from  Greek  yAaiif,  an  owl),  the  name  of  a  plant,  G.  glands 

3>}.  Ghkkk  0a8K-kndin(;s  of  tiik  Thikd  Declension  —In  the  classical 
tiiiio  most  wriKM-s  considcml  it  iinproiicr  to  use  Greek  case-endinn-s  in 
iioiiiis  ot  the  third  declension  ixnTowed  tVoin  the  Gfeek.  Cicefo,  nfm,  in 
a  h-iler  to  Atticus,  had  formed  the  accusative  Pinvea.  ajioloirizcs  for  this  use 
in  a  liter  h'tter,  adding-  that  he  oiiirht  t.o  h  ive  said  Pirmum,  accordin*'-  to 
the  universal  usa-e  of  his  time.  Cic.  Att.  7,  8,  10.  Others,  however,  were 
<)t  the  opinion  that  m  nouns  borrowed  from  i he  Greek,  Greek  case-end- 
iniisshoiiM  lie  used.   See  Quint.  1,  r,,  (K).     Greek  c;ise-endinirs  are  used  hy 

poels  whenever  the  metre  recinires  them, and  l.v  later  prose  writers  in  terms 
l)eloii<rm<r  to  the  sciences.     Hut,  in  a  few  instances,  even  in  classical  prose 
dreek  endinus  occur  more  frcquenily  than  Latin  endings. 

Rfm.  1.  GreeU  nouns  with  vowel-stems  in  v  {y\  ireneiallv  take  Greek  endin-s  in  all 
nl^nnT'lliVT  \"  -'^»-  "''It-;  ''■'"■"■  ']?'*'  '■""  '''"'^  'J"  '""^*  •"'^'d  «"=■  endin-s  (GenT  Cotyos, 
T  iv.  1^0' '''Ipu'''"""^  ''  ^^'"-'^-  ^''''■""'  *"■  ^"^'J"^-  T»ie  AM.  is  /ormed  in  ye  (Aty^,  Came] 
L  v.,  L  -i).  I  hese  nouns  are  not  foinid  in  tlie  plur.I.  except  Erin,n,?s  (the  Furies),  where 
€  is  short,  as  in  Greek,  with  Ace.  Ennnyas.    Gen.  and  Dat.  Plur.  do  not  occur. 

litin.  2.  Gk\.  9IXG.  The  Greek  endinij  o?  (a<)  is  confined  to  those  nouns,  which  have 
tne  specirte  (,feek  charactt-ristics  o  ami  y.  l\\  the  female  nouns  in  0  Wv  characteristic  is 
cuiitructed  with  the  eiidim;  a*  into  «v.  as  in  Greek.  'I'he  ijenitive  of  the  proper  name 
I  an  IS  lorined  in  w,  in  order  to  disiin^^'iiish  it  from  panit  (bread). 

lit  HI.  3.  Poets  use  the  eudini;  o-i  also  in  other  Greek  nouns,  especially  in  those  in  i.?and 
o-v  with  stems  in  'id  and  ad  (Daphnido-s,  I'allados\  and  in  those  in  eus  (/^t^?),  G.  eo><  (^ &5?), 
"'*.„s'         ''  ^*  ^''P^<^^^y  the  latter  of  which' is  declined  after  the  second  declension  in 

Hem.  4.  The  Dative  sixo.  has  the  same  endln?  in  Latin  and  in  Greek  (i  and  1)  ;  but 

tins  endin-  cannot  be  attached  to  the  Greek  stems  in  O  and  £V  {euX     The  nouns  of  this 

o'!' .   V''"U  "'";  ":''^'^;;^'■''".•"l  r^n'iniz^d  '^'ems,     Thus  the  datives  nidoni  and  Orpheo  am 

Vir''il  (Ecld''''  f%l''  "*        "    ^"         ^"'^"^'  ^"^  <^''M«i  (dissyllabic)  occurs  once  in 

,  7?em.5.  Accusative  .sino.  The  Greek  endinj?  v  {n)  is  used  in  nouns  with  vowel-steras 
in  I  and  //,  and  in  nouns  in  is  with  steins  in  id.  The  endini,'  n  however  is  more  generally 
chaiii.'e(l  into  m  ^Xe>/.rim.  pordm,  Halyni).  The  Greek  ending  a  (a),  which  belono-s  to 
tiie  consonant-stems,  is  mostly  poetical ;  bnt  it  is  the  usual  one  in  the  words  aer,  a&ther 
wKiiiKu^  x\\\i\  l\if,  (aera.adanianUiGH:.).  It  also  occurs  in  irood  i)rose  in  proper  names 
wiiiitlie  characteristics  n  and  r,  as  Agarneimioiia,  Lacedenhoiuu  SalanwM.  Marathona, 
i/H-tora.  riie  female  nouns  in  o  have  the  ace  in  d  (Didd),  from  a  contracfi.m  of  oa.— 
i  ne  ace,  tyrannida  is  Ibund  in  Cic.  Att.  14,  14,  but  Cic.  generally  has  tyrannidem. 

'  A   Phnpiiician.  and  the  fabulou-»  bird  Phnenix.  -  a  a  palm-branch.—  »  a  partridge  — 
V"'I-'\~,    ^^  porcupine  — «  an  Attic  m.-asure  for  grain.— '  a  larch-tree.—  »  a  Cilician 

—  a  laDulous  owl  —  10  Homer's  scourge,  an  epithet  given   to  Zoiios.—  u  a  silk-worm 

—  tue  calyx  of  a  flower.— i»  vermilion.—  i*  a  gazelle.—  is  a  cuckoo.—  i»  a  PhrvMan' 

—  a  uctic  order.—  »«  a  fabulous  mauster.—  1»  a  nymph.—  20  an  island.—  21  a  lynx. 

15* 


IRKEGULAB  DECLENSION 


APPENDIX  L 


347 


i,J:Si  of  the  Latin  ^''•^'J:':^^'^';;j"-^J^.  'Hrrebel„n,,th..plur.  t:U,t.  T.,,,,^. 


Of  lUe  third  decreusiou,  as  .l/ciO.<ic)/ia>-,  Allobrogas, 

6   Iruegul\ii  dect.enstox. 

See§Ui-15.  3(3.37.  187.  188.  190. 

,4   Irregular  no„ns  ar.  of  live  kin,l. :   1)  iu,leclinable ;  2)  aefocUvc ; 
3)h.:,..n.l.^ical ;  4,  l.e.en.Ci.e;  5,  '^;-;'^;-;;-- ,es  i.avo  the  samo  .ram- 

;::;;,";:!:;;;;;;„  ,!.:«:I;e£c;!ve  oouus  «.mcu  u..  used  omy  lu  o.^  csk,  =. 

for  inst.  the  abhilive  Hiwnte.  ^^^,^, 

of  theecclef'iastieal  writer»» ;  4)  the  l^rcck  iiouus     /     v   ^^^^  historian^ 


children)  were  capturca.  L. v.  ^».,4..                                 a^ricltural  and  scientific  writers  ; 
V  mean,  the  tcp  of  an  ear  of  nn  heat  o.  mu  u  y         ,.,,_..,,„„  ^,  «.  ft.  .  r.  or  tiie 


toanaeh  totluMU  l.ith.   t-"nnat..n.:.  ..  uh- r    u..       ..^^^^^^ 
uations  ot  one  of  the  Latin  cla^se^,  a^  Abmluinvu^,  utii.  ^  r  iSES 

30    Dkkective  not.n..  ar.  those,  which  want  e.lher  some  of  Ih.ir  cases, 
or  avv^olc  number,  either  the  sioguUu-  or  the  plurah 


■J 


licm.  1.  Of  those  that  are  defective  in  capes  the  followinfr  have  no  nominativks  : 
{(hH)s)  G.  d(f/n<K  {ffi/io)  G.  ilitidnisK  (inttrnecifj)  G.  iiiternecidnu^.  ifi-vx)  G.f7unv<,  (om) 
G.  opvi,  iruis)  G.  rids*.    Of  those,  that  are  defective  in  the  otlier  case?,    ' 


niinihtT,  but  th<'  mo!»t  of  tliein  are  of  rare  occnrrence. 


,  there  is  a  great 
1)  (ops)  opM  opetu  ope,  plik.  com- 


is 
d 


plete:  2)  (//^i-v)  rici.^rk'em  vice  ;  pluk.  vices  vicibus  ;  3)  vis  rim  ri ;  pluu.  ii/'^- complete  : 
4)  luts  (plairue)  laem  hm  :  pluk.  wantin<f  ;  5)  fors  (chance)  forte  (by  chance). 

Htm.  2.  Many  noun?  occnr  in  one  case  only.  esi)ecially  in  certain  phrases.  a«  :  urtonte 
(ot  one's  own  accord),  in  connection  with  1*<.sskssivks  {meu.  /?//7,  etc.  >^[Hjnte)  \  ju.'om 
i/t/i/.'i.s'ti.  taitinl'ltH^  iiKHiitu.  rf>f/<lfif.  and  other  ablatives  of  th<'  loiirfh  declension,  derived 
from  the  past  parlici|)les  of  veki'.s,  mostly  in  connection  with  «genitives  or  possessive  ad 
jecti ves  an  :  jus^ii  ( 'irenmh,  tneo.  fuo,  on  Cicero's,  on  my.  thy  command.  Very  frequent  it 
the  abl.  natv  (l)y  birth,  in  connection  with  w/^/V//- and  r/ii/i or  in  the  nK-aninjr  'older"  and 
'yonni,'er',  sonietimesalso  with  (i/i/io.'<  and  a  numeral,  in  the  si^jrnitication  'old'.  Tlie  abl 
mom/tfi/  is  used  iu  Uw  \)\miy^e  in  prompt k esfie  or //(//>t/v,  to  be  r>/  to  have  at  band.  Here 
bcloni,'  the  lollownig  phrases:  (H'i^  oimu,  for  lorai's  sake;  ve/it/m  dare,  to  sell;  ve- 
iium  ire,  to  be  sold  ;  xnpj^etias ferre,  to  bring  assistance  ;  iiifilias  ire,  to  deny. 

Rem.  3.  Nouns,  defective  in  n>nn})er,  want  eith«'r  the  pluual  {singidaria  tanivm),  or  the 
FiNGfi.AK  (phiraiia  tnntinn).  Siiupdat-ia  fantinn  are  :  1)  Those  wliich  do  not  admit  of  a 
plural  on  account  of  ttieir  meaaimj.  Here  belons? :  a)  pkopek  names,  as  Roma,  Cicero  ; 
b)  AnsTKACT  nouns,  as  jfistilia,  amor  ;  n  the  nouns  denotinjr  materials,  as  anrvm,  lig- 
num. 2i  Those  which  conventionally  lack  the  plural.  Here  belon-i:  most  of  the  nouns 
of  the  flith  declension,  and  many  sint'le  nouns,  as  aer,  It/es.  rer.  .^pecime/i.  which  must 
be  learned  from  the  lexicons.  Eor  the  plukalia  tantlm  and  HKTtnoLOGiCAL  nouns  see 
§g  14.  15.  :Hi.  -.il. 

Hem.  4.  Projx'r  names  are  used  in  the  plural,  if  two  or  more  individuals  of  the  same 
name  are  meniimied.  as  duo  Ptinii,  L>/(ii/M  tf  l'i(bHii.-<  Scipiunes. 

Ai{sTKACT  nounsolieii  asMimethe  p.ural,  ifsin-zle  inxfuucts^eamnjiles,  or  kinds  of  »ome- 
tliui'.'  are  to  l)e  expressed,  as  insania,  instances  or  examples  of  madness  ;  prie-senfiie  deo- 
rinn,  apparitions  (»f  j,rods  ;  inltntus  exercituum,  examjjles  of  the  destruction  of  armies; 
OiuntK  ir/fuj7/n/nu,  all  kinds  of  indigniiies ;  clari:e  vtorte.<,  renowned  examples  ot  death. 
{Sometimes  the  plural  ot  absiracts  is  used  iu  ;he  si>iniikaiion  of  a  singular,  as  :  negotia, 
buMiiess  ;  odiu  /lominum,  tlie  hatred  of  men  ;  invidia;  multitudinis,  the  envy  of  the  mul- 
tiiude. 

Nouns  denotiuir  materials  are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural  in  order  to  designate  dif- 
ferent kinds,  or  si  n<,'le  pieces,  of  the  same  mateiial,  as  ?-i//«.  wines  (kinds  of  wines)  apices,, 
kinds  of  pilch;  ligna,  i)ieces  of  wood;  puiiet^,  loaves  of  bread  ;  carnes,  pieces  of  meat. 

87.  IIetekoclites  are  those  nouns  which  in  the  formation  of  tlieir 
oases  assume  (H.AHACTEHisrics  helonirjuir  either  to  no  reiiiilar  declension, 
or  U)  two  dithient  declensions,  or  to  dilierent  classes  of  the  same  declen- 
sion.    'J'licy  are  eitlier  anouialous,  metaplastic,  heteroplastic,  or  redundant. 

Rtm.  1.  ANosiAi.ors  are  tliose  which  have  characteristics  ])elonging  only  to  particular 
nouns,  but  to  no  general  class,  as  si/s,  gru.s.  Ihjs,  (l^'U.  bovi'O,  the  characteiTsiics  u  and  v 
not  occurring  in  any  of  the  regular  classes  of  the  third  declension  (see  §  188). 

lUm.  2.  Metaplastics  are  those  which,  bavinir  but  o"ne  form  of  tlieir  nominative,  make 
tlii'ii-  oilier  cases  aftir  iw»)  dirt'erent  decleiicions.  Here  belong  1)  several  nouns,  mostly 
denotiiiL' TUKKs.  which  form  their  cases  partly  after  the  second,  partly  after  the  fourth 
decleii.vi.m.  as  ct,riii(s  yix  cornel-tree).  c'fprt.'<fiux'(a  cypress-tree)../fV'/.s'  (a  fiir-tree).  laurus  (a 
laurel-tree),  vii/rt'tx  (a  myrtle-tree),  qut^rcus  (an  oak-tree).  Amolig  these  nouns  are  d<miU8 
and  coins  k%'1-1-1\. itenus  (victuals),  and  (sometimes)  se,tdUi.'<  and  ltniiitltiis.~-l)  After  the  sec- 
ond and  third  declensions  are  declined  -.jiigirum  (the  Roman  acie),  which  in  the  genitive 
plural  has  jiK/erinn  only,  bu;  in  all  other  cases  is  declined  after  the  second  ;  and  the  plural 
names  of  Uoman  festivals  in  alia,  which  often  form  their  i:enitives  after  the  second  de- 
clension (Jiacc/ianaliorum),  vvliile  the  other  cases  are  intiected  alter  the  third.—  3)  After 
th(;  third  and  lifili  is  inllucted  y?r/*/,>6- which  forms  its  accusative  and  ablative  either  ?«- 
qiuem,  vtqnit.  or  rKjnietem,  rtqnivte.  Famts,  G./(///a,v,  ha?  alvvay.>/u//ie  iu  the  ablative 
alter  the  tilth  declension  in  the  poets. 

/?t;/i.  ;i.  IIetekopla>tics  are  tho^e  whose  nominatives  have  a  form  1)elongin<r  to  a 
cJasBJd^uj^^alne  declension,  dilierent  Irom  that  of  the  oblique  cases,  as  indjtr,  which, 

*  Daps,  in  classical  prose,  denotes  a  religious  feast,  or  banquet  in  honor  of  the  gods. 
In  the  poets  and  later  authors  it  is  used  of  all  kinds  of  banquets,  Daiis  is  the  assujikd 
nominative;   hut  it  might  he  dajM-s  (ii  genitive  plural  not  oc<  urrin-).— 2  power,   sover- 


eignty.— 3  fiestrucliou,  especially  occurring  after  ad. 
•  chance,  turn. 


It  means  a  total  annihilatiou.- 


348 


DERIVATION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


tii>t   and  another  lu  les  alU-r  the  lillli  dvi  le  imoii   a>  ^"'''"'l.  ,  /    ,.,/,.j,.^.    Thev  loriu 

S.H/U.  vumtia  aiul  ;/.>//i;i..'.  '?"/,t'7,,";;;U'u"  ^  on^  1  ,1  h2  oerca^^. generally  alter 
the  NOM.  and  A(C.  after  either  <.f  V^'"/'''V.  ^iVl.t  !  m  e.ived  irojn  the  past  paniciflea 
the  tlrs.  only.  6)  Many  W"'"'  ^'t  ''»^'  ^'1V  .\1h.  to     d  de^^^^^^^^^^  cv./.7/..v  ^i.  a>m7/«., 

of  vtMl...  have  c.Uateral  forn.s  in  ''Z'l^/^^l^vMte^U^^^^  «ihI  ^«f/^r^/«m. 

and  c-om7/<///.,  evtfdu,  and  e^/./y///^  i>/<^^^/"^    ?    ^  whu-h  the  r<.ll.)xvin.'are  most 

nen.  5.  Here  belong  a  pe:U  ^^n'V^--^^^;;^^;.^;;"  !;;;  . ",  1  .^  Jj^  ^'onci  ^nd  th  rd.; 
frequent:  pUf>s.  <-■  ^s  and  }Mes.  G.  n  ,  ';V^/ Vir  the  uhl  respire  ;  Ve.i>^r.  in  tlu-  si-ni- 
alter  the  second  the  acc.  r^^pepnn.  a ttn-  V  '  / '   "  .,7!'  "    ;j;  /;. V    y;^»//.,  (,'.  ;>.//w,  and 

-M  Hktekooknkous  arc  tl,.«o  n-.nns  ^l'":''  '"  "''^  1''"'"'  ''''^ ^-  *  «'='' 
nKiiilitlLic'iit  from  thill  of  the  sinjinlar.  bees  ">'•  ,.v    .1» 

plural  f,.,.u.  only  curia.,:,    'll'-' '.":''"  ,7  '""  ;•.    '       „L    ,.",,"  'n  ".'poe.-  Hi.-  plmal. 

..«..  (bath),  p.ur  .a/...  and  ^^' ;;-;.';;  ^^^^  ,„,,,„,  ,,.„aer  in  ^.0,  ntunber.,  a.  : 
h'em.  3.  Several  nonns  li')^'^-^'^»'""^^  V   J  'n  ri  rJiion   baltt^»'  and  /.r///^^/m.  r<///'/m  an( 

SS;S.     These  y  called  UKUtsnANT  .n  uknukk. 

39  For  the  heterulogical  nouns  see  ^  lo  and  Vocab.  VI.  and  \  11. 


APPENDIX  II. 
DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

1    Adicctives  are  either  putmitive  or  dkhivative.     Primitive  are  tliose 

oomis,  Ltiix.     i3>       ,^  .,..:,:„,..  jire  either  nouns  or  vehiw.     A  lew  aie  i  e- 
"^^tl  oThc"',la«soi- speech,  as  miernus,  t-^cru.,  nuus  (frotu  tho 

''T^ra^io^'of  a.Vo.ives  is  n,aae  by  means  of  certain  s.tfflxes. 

syllables,  and  sonietnnes  by  a  ^"'^'^^  >;'\\  ;..,^,  ^, .  l^ -Ji,  {jr-is.  In  ■>/><.  in.<is.  This  let- 
xL  noun  or  the  verb  into  an  ^^i;^^^;^"^^^'^ ;^y,^'^:  %onn^  adjectives  are  f<.rmed 
1-;  ale^S  ^ioaiSlaft  rii^l;ur^w;t^<^t ^^  other  addition,  a.  .ijHcas  ,Amcun) 


APPENDIX  II. 


349 


from  Africa.  Pdim  from  Pelion,  Ohjmpins  from  Ohjmpia.  Derivative  endino^s  of  the 
tianie  kind  always  affect  the  dilicrcut  verbs  or  nouns,  to  which  they  are  attached,  in  the 
sai/ie  (jeitet'cU  mdnner. 

A.  Derivation  of  adjectfv^es  from  nouns. 
(Denominative  adjectives.) 

3.  The  numerous  derivative  endini2:s,  by  which  denominativ^e  adjectives 
are  formed,  have  three  diirerent  ijeneral  meaninc^s:  1)  pertaining,  re- 
i>atin(;  or  p.eloncjing  to  somethini,^;  2)  consisting  of  some  material; 
2)  BEING  provided  with  something.  The  great  majority  of  derivative 
endings  {iiis,  Icxx,  (llin,  llis^  (his,  ihuh,  arius,  e/isls)  belong  to  the  first  class, 
which  are  attached  to  lioth,  common  and  prope:r  nouns. 

4.  Derivative  endings  are  attached  to  the  declension-stems  of  the 
nouns,  from  which  they  are  derived,  as  7'ex  —  reglus,  milen  —  millt-drU,  ae- 
nex  —  Hen-Uis,  bos  —  bov-lmioi.  Hence  nouns  with  vowel-stems  lose  their 
characteristics,  as  puer — j^uer-ilis  (st.  puero);  fdtum — fat-alu  (stfato); 
?)an\s —  imv-fdix  (st.  iuid).  Only  the  characteristic  u  of  the  fourth  declen- 
sion remains,  nsfructiiff — fractu-uKUs,  pecu — jncu-arias. 

liem.  The  different  derivative  endings  belong! iiir  to  the  same  class  are  used  without 
any  (litft-rence  as  \o  their  meaning.  Tiiese  meanings  are  always  of  a  L-^eneral  nature,  and 
llndr  Emrlish  equivaU-nts  are  usually  conventional,  (ieneralrules  about  the  rendering 
of  these  derivative  endings  into  English  cannot  be  given. 

{it).  Dcrinitice  enduvjs  of  the  first  clam,  attached  to  common  nonns. 

5.  The  following  are  some  of  the  most  usual  examples  of  combinations 
in  which  the  derivative  endings  of  this  class  occur: 


iniporJltor  —  imperatorius  helium—  hellicus 

uxor —  uxorius  dassis  —  classlcus 

onltor  — oraiorius  civis  — civicus 
'Ifis  ar'i"t 

vulgus  —  vuli^nris  legio  —  legiunariu? 

miles  —  militfiris  nummus  —  nuinmarius 
mola  —  moldris 


Vis 
gens  —  gentllis 
civis  —  civllis 
sen  ex  —  senilis 
wus  and  iitius 
mare  —  marluus 
urbs  —  urbclnus 


alis 
fatum  — fataiis 
murus  — muialia 
rex  —  regillis 

e/it-ift 
castra —  castrensis 
forum  —  forensis 


frumentum  —  frumenta-  homo  —  huin5nu9  circus  —  circensis 
rius 

Hem.  1.  The  ending  rus  is  attached  to  pkusonal  nouns  only  (as  regius,  royal,  from  rex  ; 
pa'nt'^,  belonging  to  the  fatlier.  paternal,  from  pat^r),  being  most  frequently  used  with 
tht  personal  noijns  in  or.  as  noror  —  so/vrii/.<,  belonging  to  a  sister.  A<Ijectives  of  this  kind 
are  generally  reinh-red  by  an  p)nglish  noun  with  the  preposiiiou  of,  as  ars  imperatoria^ 
the  art  of  a  general  ;  J'aiulm  uwa/iu-s,  the  estate  of  a  wife. 

lie/n.  2.  The  ending  units  generall}'  denotes  a  tkade,  vocatio.v  or  ogcupatiox.  It  de- 
signates «'ithcr  tlie  hu-^iness  ifael/  {\n  connectiou  with  «/w»,  or  it  represents  abstkact 
nouns  (re^,  le.o  as  jtertdiuhiff  to  sueli  business,  or  indicates  the  /nrso/is.  engaged  in  a  trade 
etc.  (in  c«)nnection  witli  ho/no,  and  nu>st  frequently  with /uier)  ;  as:  re^  numfnafi,a, 
nioiny  affairs  ;  res  j^c/a/ia, cattle  breeding;  res  frumentaria,  provisions;  ars  toinaria^ 
ornamental  gardening;  ars  stdfuaria.  sculpture  ;  leges  agrarioe.  the  laws  for  the  distrilm- 
tion  of  the  public  lands  \  f (if jer  lignarius,  a  carpenter;  /after  ferrarius,  a  blacksmith; 
/(//>/•  (Urari'is^  a  ci>p})ersrnith.  The  nouns  ar^.faber,  homo  are  frequently  understood, 
and  the  mentioned  adjectives  have  then  the  force  of  nouns.  So  always:  fabellarius,  a. 
letter-carrier,  argenlarius,  a  banker,  argenfaria,  a  banker's  business. 

Hem.  3.  The  ending  J////s'  is  most  frequently  attached  to  names  of  beasts,  denoting 
their  I'RoDi'cTs  ;  as:  lac  asiiunuiti,  asses'  milk,  aax)  vitKtina,  veal,  adtp^  aii'<er~in>i.<,  goose 
hiid.  pdll^  aif/rliia.  a  goat's  skin.  To  the  ending  T/i'/.v  belong  several  nouns  in  via,  which 
ori_nnally  were  adjkctivks  with  a  fein.  noun  understood,  as  tJiediclna  {ars),  doctrlna 
(.ars),  lon.'it rlna  (tabtrna). 

liein.  4.  Easlfi  refVra  to  flacks  only,  as  fomm — forens'ta,  judicial  (T)e!onging  to  the 
forum}.    It  is  most  commonly  attached  to  puopek  names.  See  No.  (j,  R.  5  and  G. 

Jiem.  5.  itarcr  endings  of  this  class  are  1)  nus,  attached  to  the  nominatives ^a/^^r,  fnaier 


350 


DERIVATION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


fraier  (pafern..  etc.)  ;  2)  inmns  ileoiamus^finitimm.  mantunus)  ;  3)  ester  or  esMs  (cam- 
petit  er,,  sUcestris). 

II,)    Dencalire  endings  of  the  frst  cla,>,  attached  to  pro,m'  narnes. 
r.  Tu-ro  an.  (liir<Tont  rules  for  tlie  mlicctivcs  Ibnuocl  from  tlic  proper 
—  o    i-K   son"     f  cocntu,k.«,  an.l  of  ct.ks.     Personal  prop.-r  nan,es 
of  KoMAKs^enerally  auaol,  W««  or  .;«»,  to  .he  «'^f '•■V,';'"?,'™;^'   ,  "^r 

-:-wr^^?"nrr;;:;:;r,ri..:re:.:;;;^^:"u)^^^^^ 

,»;>«»)    names  of  <-ilies  lake  the  etulin-s  .Inns,  ^n„s,  cms,  or  as 

W«-/.--  oi-  <!«.«  iwlieii  the  iiaiil,-  '';"""'f '  '  '  '  ^  ,  .Uv  uH.cM  o"  in  i'«  Klii.U.  if  «-ed  »9 
,m...    Tl,ep.ntile,n,,nos.,    ,lu■lom«.^     eo   K^ 

Ciroiti  h  lanninn-i.     i  iiey  ijikc  iiit  i  iimmi_  »  "'  ott.n.iiiMl  ainDi  to  the  name  of 

pens.     Thu.  if  a  Roman  was  a,lu,,t..    ''l/';':;  .',';  f/-    J.' ;,       ^^^l^^^n^nnus.  i.  e.  the 

n.-unc  which  .^fi-A/.?/?^/.^  assnnio.l  ^V^*"'\ J;;-^,7^;\'  "'^Vv/X^^^  7^/'^'  rYo,/<J/ia  is  a  con- 

S;;;u;mJ';erS'';^r;;j^!;r;n;:^^^^^^  the  adherents  ana 

companion!»  ol  Clodius.  /-«^„„,7«»«   Siiilla  — 

adjfotive  Ca/Wif<«/-iw.s- 18  formed.  .  t,..  ^Pr...  thp  firppk 

,.f  norpK-a  tnU-(»  the  endin<'J»  ?M,f  or  7v.«  (lor  me  iTreeu. 
Pfim  3    Pkusonai.  proper  name»  of  Uukkks  iah.<  im  mum.,,  cu.  .  ,     .     _,.„ 

XiivhiHl,  a»  helltt/n  .)nf/iHdaHc>im,  helium  J'i(/iiftfivi>nn.  „,,„,.v,:n,, 

7?..:  4.  The  adjective,  denoting  n.MionU> ,« -'^;f>;S-^;!^:,^r;;;e  1^!^^^^ 
leu.  (sometimes  in  Greek  nam.-s^^/>')  to  ';";!„;;/ J',  ?;'J, /,,  /Vr.fm.  the  Persian 
NATION  iTsKi.F  is  used  With  thi'  forc- ot  '''■•':;;'':- ,^';^.";.;^7^^^^^^^  farf/t,ir,irau 

lantrnaun'  (ttot  Perstn.  hut  lirrr,ua  ^'-'^' *"';^^;'  *'  .'  ^\i  J^  '.e  Xn^"  The  names  of 
the  Carthaginian  h.n-ua-e  (from  Punt.  "«^^^^'^^V.nt,  i(-  nt  < mm  eral^  the  names  ..f  the 
nations  are  not  derived  ron>  tl.e  "!»'"'„: '//;.;•  "/V/^^  derive,  f.'m  he  nati.Mial  nan,e 
conntries  from  fose  oi  the  njit  u.ns.  J  ^^    '"^        '    vn  -x  en  ion  is  th- national  name 

t;^;^^.iS[n'tr^wth^nr;vrv::^^^  ^^^  ^ 

^'^::  ':  National  adJ.-.tives^so..in.s  n^e^t^  ^^-^ 

forms  with  a  peenhar  mean  in-    /^^^  >''"'"  ^'i^^^^^^^  //^v/w/J'/v  <,r  IMmnrus  is 

an  anny.  eonsistui-  <.l  ^P''"''.\'^''^"^,,:,,  ,„,.,,,   hn   Mlum  IIism,tV'U.<e.M  war  ?/*  Spun. 

deelensicns  take  T.'/s  >fjl»*' t^'n"'":^''»''^;','^,'^ '''';.';.    ^ho"e        a     f   t/m  an.l  i  generally 
takef7»'w.as:  Alfta  --Alhtniu.<  Romtr  --  JOvmw^  r  «.^k  and  waa?.  take 

the  etidin-  ^//>f?^,  ''**  v;^'''''^~^V'^    .'     %M. /^..linVaM        at\s^  is  p.  cnliar   to  the 

;;:;^'^i;;La- 4;:rr^i^;;;--^^^-^^^"-         "--^-  ^^^-^  ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^'- 

^^^i;^rt:u:s^c;ti:nS*fiu;n' their  Ghk.k  endings,  or  assttme  Latin  ending.. 


APPENDIX  II. 


351 


The  mopt  freqnent  Greek  ending  is  to?,  aus).  which  is  generally  retained,  as  Corinthus  - 
toiynt/utjs,    Marathxm  —  Marathoniiu,   tialamis  —  t^alaminius,    Chios— Chius  (inet.  of 

Hem.  7.  The  Greek  ending  Iroi  (jnw)  is  always  retained  in  Latin,  as  :  Agngenium  — 
AfjngeurwvK  Rherfimi  -  Iiher/wvt<,  Tarentum—  Tarennnm.  The  Greek  endin"  aio? 
Uvu^),  whieh  IS  attached  to  cities  of  tlie  Jirst  declenshm.  is  raielv  retained  ag"Xam- 
*(?«>■,  ^wyruaufi.  Generally  a  Latin  endinj,'  is  suhstituted,  as  Athenumns  (inst.  of 
A/hf-rnxm),  Thebanvs  (inst.  of  rh^h<vu>i).  The  endinir  ^'^'^  (cum)  is  generally  changed  into 
eusis;  as  Plaf>ece-P/af.€e,if^,  Antiocfila  -  A„no<:hm.'<if<,  Chalcv<- Vhalcidennl.  But 
the  end;ni:  eus  is  retained,  if  renowned  (ireeks  are  mentioned  to<,-ether  with  the  places 
of  their  birth,  as  Dttmftivs  PhalZreus,  Zeno  Cittieus.  The  ending»  dzrf^,  zVt/S,  and 
&>r;/?  are  rarely  retaiiH-d.  as  in  Cro/oi,uVe^,  Spartiates  (more  frequently  Spartdnus), 
Afjtferifes,  .stayznte^,  Malloies,  Ihradevtes.  In  names  of  cities  terminating  lu  polls,  the 
eudin-,'  zr//5  i^  always  dianged  into  'itanus,  as  NeapolUanus,  Megalopolitanus. 

{c).  Derivative  endings  of  the  second  and  third  classes. 
7.  The  ireneral  derivative  endino:  for  nouns  denoting  materials  or  qnan- 
titie.s  (;is  auruin.aqua  etc.),  is  «^/m,  as  lignius,^\i)o^L'n.^  The  endings  of  the 
third  class  (being  full  or  i)rovided  uilb  suDielhing)  are  osus,  ulentus  (or 
olenttis),  at  us.  It  us,  utus. 

/.V;/|.  1.  Tlie  ri'giilar  ending  attached  to  nouns  denotin<r  material  is  evs.  hut  sometimes 
the  Miller  ending  artu.'^  is  added,  as  aurum  — aureus,  ferrum  —ferreus,  Uqnum  —  lirnievs, 
liHlera—neUerareus,  viemhrand  —  mewbrauaMis.  If  the  material  is  a  species  of  wood 
the  endings  uius,  nus  or  neus  ;>re  added,  as  cedrux  — cednnus,fa(/u.s-  —  far/inus,  pdpulus  — 
2><'i>'d,H'Ux,  qunrui<-  querinis  and  (jtteriuus,  ndix  — mliguvs  aiid  salionevs.  The  t-ame 
enilings  are  added  to  tbur  (tbunifus  or  ebujuus). 

/^m.  2.  The  ending  eus  (mostly  in  tiie  pokts)  also  denotes  similarity  (correspondin"- 
t.)  the  Lnglisii  y  or  ly),  as  niveu.'i,  snowy  ;  wseus,  rosy  ;  viryiMus,  maidenly  ;  aruiidinlus, 

7^//?.  .3.  «eing  full  of  something  Is  expressed  hv  the  endings  cms,  iilerifvs  or  dlevtvs 
(the  latter,  il  there  is  an  i  m  the  preceding  syllable),  as;  puiculum—penculdms^fraus 
—jrauduithtus  vimnn  —  rinoltntux,  animus  — uhinto^vs,  tititim  —  vitiosus.  f acinus— fa- 
CiuuiosHs  •  tin  fxi  —  t'lrbultntus.  pidvis  —  pidvcruUidus.  vis  —  riolentvs.  In  the  nouns  of 
the  fimrih  decleiisDn.  the  characteristic  u  is  preserved,  as /n/r/"//*- — />'w</i/5.v?/,«  1  he 
ending  uoi'Us  is  sometimes  \\}^('i\,  -iloiig  with  dsiis.  in  nouns  not  belonging  to  the  lourth  de- 
cleuMon,  as  /tWfis  —  mo/dO-sus  and  inontudsus  ;  mon^/rum  —  f/ionslrosus  and  momtruOsus. 
_R>'t>}.  4.  Being  provided  or  FniM-^jiKD  with  something  is  expressed  by  the  eidincrs 
aus  J  hts  utus^  as  :  deittalus  (from  d^us),  provided  witli  te.th.  alatus  (from  ala),  winged, 
Otirba  us(baifMi),  bearded,  lofjdtus  (toya),  (iur(lfus(au}^m),fa/cdtus(;alx),cn?iUus  iainis), 
turritus  {turns'),  cornutus  (vm^nu).  astutus  {a^ius).  v./       /'  v  /» 

L'rm.  i).  To  some  nouns  whose  stems  or  nominatives  end  in  s.  the  ending  tus  without 
a  pn-ceding  vowel  is  attached,  so  that  they  terminate  in  estus  or  vstm.  as  :  rnodm  —  mo- 
de-t us  motes  —  molestus.  hoiios  —  honest „s,ftinus  —fi„,t.^tus,  scelus  —  scHesivs,  mtis—onvs- 
lus,  ruOur  —  wtjicstus,  Venus  — venustus.   Velustus  is  formed  from  the  adjective  vetm. 

B,  Dekiyation  of  Adjecth^es  from  Vekbs. 

(Vekbal  Ad.jectives.) 

^  8.  Adjectives  derived  from  vebbs,  as.'^ume  the  following  endings:  idns^ 
nus,  ilis,  and  bilis,  jr?/,v,  u-his,  ax  ami  bumlvK  Here  also  belong  tlie  verbal 
adjectives  in  vdvs  and  itnts,  in  which  however  Ihe  endings  must  be  con- 
sidered as  INFLECTIONAL,  not  as  derivative,  since  they  are  formed  from 
ALL  verbs  (a  few  excepted).  See  P.  II.  p.  125. 

Tiem.  L  The  termination  'idus  ex|)resses  simplv  a  quai.itt,  determined  bv  the  idea  of 
Tlie  VKRB.  It  IS  attached  to  the  vkhp.-stkm,  but  so,  that  verbs  with  vow.l-steiiisdrop  their 
ciianictenstics.  Adje.tives  in  uivs  mostly  «re  formed  Irom  those  verbs  of  the  second 
c-..iijnu'ati<)n  which  lack  the  supink,  as  calere  — calidus :  timere  —  timidus:f7iqer€  — 
Jnyidus  ;  turhare  —  tvrbidus  ;  rubere  —  rvbtdvs  ;  rapere  —  rapidus. 
,  Pern.  2.  The  ending  vns  has  a  similar  signification,  but  is  rare  in  good  prose,  as  :  as- 
mn-te  —  asndvvs.  These  adjectives,  if  derived  from  active  verbs,  have  a  passive  signi- 
ncation,  as  conspicuus,  vieible,  iiriguus,  watered. 


DEEITATION  OF  NOUKS. 


352 

rehire- aclrentiriy.;  -^ --''[j'^^  .^  f  ^^^  f  .^  /i/:^  the  flr.t  co,.j".a,io..  ,nul 
7?f»n.  7.  The  nulni-  .7v^</'/.<  ^t  "  V  '     ..,k  k\t  i  ^i  tu  iVi  k  but  irnrcH-iitiiifr  i1k' action 

baixlNS,  Imlihirmlm,  woi^hmiivs.  /V  J^fa  nV  .rrFVi.uY  pkedicatk.s      Later  nnibors  and 
^„n.M^  a,  d  .nostly  occur  ,u  '  ';'';;  ^^''fi,";,,^"^^^^^^^  frou.  which  th.y  are  d.;. 

Bometinie«  even  Livy,  coti^^true  them  \\  it hUy_  case  "}  '  ,  ^  f^,,,,,^,^,  ^^fifrue  .Xfur'tvU. 

rived,  as  :   ViJaf.o.O^^  V^l'^^r'^^^'it^lii    '^cLZijUalione eArcitus  rjlonahun- 

''"X;r "■  The  c.ulin.'  cv.avs  bas  a  similar  H,,nfication     It  occur,  iujurau  -jvcvn- 


APPENDIX   111. 
DERIVATION    OF  KOVNS. 
1    NoTTN^  derived  fiom  veiu'.s  (VKiniAL  noi  ^s)  aiv  formed  l.y  the  follc^w- 

CLASS  of  peix.ns,  au.l  are  loiiijed  Ironi  V''  -^ ''  f  "^?^w?-  vcitV^r- ^•m//a  ^^  iHvfxnjtr*- - 

''^'■'^-  .    .  ^,'^,ni.i..  .K4i\  bv  rbatieiu''-  the  termination  tor 

Hew.  3.  The  pergonal  "<!U"''.  "\;^ ';;;;;  "^^.V^nJ^  af^tel^^    Si«^.l  l'>"^iu..'e  even  the 

into  tru\  as  a(/j.7/(//' -«'//» Z/^-';  <«  ''^  '^'L^^j 'y^vJ"//?"    rn^'Hai.  U).  ll.U)  ^«tutes  llmt 

,K>un8  in  ^  were  moved,  as  Um.or    =.;!>'.     l,-l^;7ver^ 
Cicero  formed  the  leniale  noun  <y'y.//.s^/?j,x^hithi:?m.i%c.yi 

7...,.  4.  Some  per.u.al  nouus  are  f..nned  ^.^^^^^^^^^^i^T^J^^'^^^ 
STKM,  as  <!;i/x>,  a  dnmluinl   ro/^^^./o  a  ^'1"\''     /''^:' "'j  .^^.^'j,  V«.ntenii)tU(.us  ^ense. 
of  this  kind  are  not  found  lu  good  ,.ro>e,  and  aluays  h.uc  a  l 

7...K  5.  Th<.se  endiuus,  by  -hich  the  ABsTl^^c^  verba^^ 
attached  to  the.vKKU-.TKM   and  ,m  tl>  t^o^^^^^^^^^^  that  i«  a  condili.....  y./o^/'/jeci 

Thus  are  formed : 


ArrENDix  III. 


353 


1)  i  n  or .-  favere  —favor  ;  h/yrrere  —  horror  ;  patUre  —  paZlor  ;  tirriere  —  tlmcyr  :fvrere  — 
luroi  ;  aimre  —  luiwr.  None  of  these  nouns  are  formed  from  verbs  of  tlie  fourth  con- 
jugation. The  most  l)eIong  to  tlie  second.  To  the  first  coiijiijratiou  belou<'  only  airurr 
and  danwr,  and  to  the  third  only  furor,  mpor.  fraqor.  -        j         • 

-i.)  ill  i'«//i.'  xtadtre  —  stadium  ;  Uedert  —  kedlain  ;  coUoqui  —  colloquium  :  incendere  — 
incendiiim. 

3)  in  'idu,  edo,  ujo:  libtre  —  lihldo  ;  prurlre  —  prurigo  ;  capere  —  infercanedo  :  vtrtere  — 
r>eriif/o.  ' 

1)  1  nio :  ardre  —  arafw  ;  tmmre  —  nwnilio  ;  legere  —  lectio ;  larglri  —  largitio  :  tnoiere 

Some  verbal  nouns  iu  io  are  formed  from  tlie  vkrb-stem,  denolini?  a  state  like 
the  ending's  or.  iuui  etc.,  as  oblirio.  the  state  of  being  forgotten.  Often  the  same  verb 
tonus  one  noun  froui  the  vkkb-stkm,  and  another  from  its  supink.  vvitli  si-'iiitieations 
ditierent  according  to  the  same  rule.  Tluis  cx'wmo  means  a  siege,  as  hehvr  ])erform^d 
(on  the  part  ol  tlie  lM^>itge?-x),  wliile  obndio  means  the  state  of  a  siei^e,  as  bein-'- ^/y^^?e(/ 
by  the  benegcd.  Opiitath)  is  a  conjecture,  a  supiiOsUmi,  but  opinio  is  a  belief  as'a  state 
an  opinion.  Jiectio  is  a  dikection  in  the  meaning  of  an  actual  directing,  but  reaio  is  a 
direction  as  a  state,  a  given  direction  in  space,  a  region. 

5)1 11  us  anri  iim  :  nu/rere  —  imtux  ;  agere  —  actus ;  cadere  —  cclsus ;  armare  —  armatura  • 
8ei>erirt  —  ttepultr(ra;ref^tere—rersura.  ' 

Soni.Minifs  the  same  verb  forms  nouns  with  both  endings,  io  and  iix.  with  a  kindred 
hut  soin-what  diirerent  sigmiication,  n^opiwntio  and  opj)odfus,  actio  and  actus.  Sometimes 
the  Siiine  noun  even  takes  all  liiree  endings,  as  stafu.-i,  ^atio,  and  statura. 

limi.  w  The  concuete  nouns  derived  from  v.  rbs.  designate  a  thing  eitheras  the  activb 
fc'UiUKcT  ol  the  &clun\,mjtuere—Jiuinen  {id  quod  fluit),  or  as  its  passive  scbjkct  as 
S'^ineu  \,id  quod  senfur).  or  as  the  passive  AiiEST.  that  is  as  the  means  and  instuument 
ol  the  action,  as  ali/nentufn  (id  quo  quid  alitur),  ve/iiculmn  (id  quo  ve/titur). 

nem.  7.  The  endings  brum,  cnmi  and  trum  are  rare,  being  attached  to  the  verb-'ste.'»! 
Af  J ulcire— fulcrum  (id  quofulclfur),  ardre —ardt rum  {id  quo ardtur\,  lavdre  —  lavdcrum 
(tdquo  lavafur).  Tlie  cliaracteristic  </  before  the  ciuWui:  trum  is  chan"-ed  into.*  a>*  ro- 
dere  —  rostrum  (inst.  of  rodtrum).  cUiudere  -  dausirum  (inst.  of  claudtrum).  Sepukrum 
j;ian(ls  lor  sepericrum,  as  stpultus  for  sepentus.  Instead  of  brum  the  eudiug  bra  is  often 
louiid.  as  dolare  —  doldbra,  latere  —  latebra,  rertere  —  vertebra. 

Rem.  8.  The  endings  men,  mentum.  bulum  and  culum  are  attached  to  the  pfrfect- 
STK.M  that  IS  to  thar  stem  of  the  verb,  from  which  the  perfect-sysTEM  is  formed  (See 
A\r).  \l  No.  1).  IJ  tlu;  perfect-stem  has  a  vowel  as  characteristic,  the  endings  are  at- 
tached to  this  vowel-stem  without  any  other  chan-e,  as  :  ar mure  —  armament um  •  ster- 
n-re (St.  s(ra)—stramen  ;  complTre—complemtntum  ;  crescere  —  iruTementum  ;  /enire  —  le- 
nim^ntum  ;  rolrere  —  rolnmen :  no<cere  (st.  no)  —  uomen  ;  vocdre  —  rocabulum  ';  pascere  (st. 
piD— pabulum,-  Kistere  (st.  stu) —stubulum  ;  serere  (st.  se)  —  siculutn :  vesCire  —  vesfibu- 
lum ;  terere  (st.  tri)  —  tribulum  ;  st.  jto  ( iK)tus)  —  poculum. 

The  noun  Ihwnenfum  from  linere  occurs  in  the  latest  Latinitv.    By  the  ignorance  of 
tue  writers  of  that  tune  it  is  formed  from  the  present-stem,  and  ought  to  be  amentum. 

liem.  9.  If  the  perfect  stem  is  ^onsonantic.  the  derived  noun  either  assunits  a  cov- 
NErTiNu  vowEi.  (1  or  u),or  it  drops  the  last  consonant,  or  the  stem  remains  unchanged 
Jhiis  are  forme.l  :  ai  with  a  c.)nnecting  vowel  cubdre-cufnculum ;  monere  —  mmu'. 
tmnfum;  latere  -  latibutum  :  deM-ere-d^cumentum;  afere-arimentum  :  tegere-teffu- 
vwaUim  ;  vehere  —  vetneutum  ;  erperlri—e.rp.'rimentuni.-\\Q.ncA-farc-ire.  haviu^  a  comto- 
nantic  perfect-stem.  Smnx',  farcimen,  uut  farclmen,  a>^  the  lexicons  have  it.-°6)  with  a 
consonant  d  oppe.l.  adjunlre  (^t.juv)adjumentum  ;  cedere —ccemen'um  :  fulqere  —  ful- 
Z'\L^,""'^  ^'''"--  ''^-  Ji"(f)  -flum^n  ;  Iwere -lunien  :  fovere- fonientum  ;  sarclre-- 

/wvfrh" '  'T'''''  T  T"'^'i""' '  J'^^''^  -Jaculum  :  cingere  -  cinqulum  (for  cinc^dum\ 

;:;m\f  A  ^'"''"^"^";'^  s  e,„.  /,.a../^r.   (pem  St.  f rag) -fragment am  :secdre-,egmen- 

1    M.    r.  .'"f."*^"^'''V  •■  -^'  T'  -f'^'^^^"'  ;  ^^re  -  agmen.    In  carman  (from  canere)  the 
cuaiacteri>tic  //  is  chaiiired  into  r.  ^  /      ^ 

wM^;'*'  ^^'"  '^'''^  endings  which  are  peculiar  to  verbal  nouxs.  sometimes  occur  in  nouns 
N  lie    are  apparent  y  derived  fn.m  aiukctivks.  or  other  nol-ns.    Such  nouns  must  be Te- 

.  ov;V'"Vm  "'T'^'/'m  ''''■^'"'  ''''.'.'■''  "^^'"^*'''  ^'^''''  ^»-(*>me  obsolete,  or  are  merelv  a^s^m^d 
,V.V,nI  r  •  '"r/'*^  following  endings,  properly  belonging  to  verbal  nouns,  are  found  iu 
l^7!f.^V^"''T^  """'r  A"'»-:*T'VEs  .>rotheruouns:  1 )  the  endin-o;- (tor)  in  personal  nouns: 
^'.^  %-,'^''"'  V••''^  ^^'y»  r^«' «**  "  •'•',""  ^''^'^'^  ■•  (i/edfor.  -ambler,  from  alea,  .as  if  from  atedre. 
ZJJ  '»<'^'«i'|""r'  'f^^  ^-'f^  i'lf'f^}  ''»«1  nra.  a^p^ditdtus,  infantry,  from  p^des,  as  iffroma  verb 
K.,.«;^r/^''''^«-^''''-. '•■?'''  t>'''^<'^P' :Q"ai''f>'^^'a,  from  qm^^for.  as  ir  from  a  yorhquoestere, 
i  /J .v/l'fr  •^""'."'"•'y  ?:e  <«^''iie(  c^nsuldtus.  pmtura,  dicfafnra.-  3)  The  ending  fdo 
lu  duLMo  (from  dulcis,  as  if  from  duldre),  and  pinguSdo  (pinguis).-  4)  The  andin^  men- 


DERIVATION   OF  NOUNS. 


354 

•1    /,  f  y^,..-i/m    R<i  \f  from  Urr(lre),calceamenhiin.  from 
«„m  in/«rra».«./.-m,  iron  n  on.,1,  (,r/n^^^m^ 

tf^f^ri5j';;»;";'T«ii;:i;-;«:a  center  isi^^^>  ?"«..««..;« u^-,,  or,«,n,  b.g,u,„„,..  fro» 

„ru  i-i.ACKol-  il.n.ss.,.-  P'■7''^    -,.'';.,;'' ^VmnwI,!,  H.e  Gre.'k  uiid- 

(,i^U,i'un.i,d,ri..hr--,id,.i.'-le,vmi.m,r,Hl-^^^^^^^^  ,l,e 

"'zr'..  The  c„.,in.  «w,„«.  ,^"'";,r";,srr!r.  !!;::;;;,r^,•,■'•::l;;r,?J'?^"-.^™',,^,:^,c^. 

<.nini,--.    Th,-  .MMlM.i.'un""'  ''•'V.''-%V\\,',    "l  l  Mi,'  u    .1  -r  ..1  iiii  .i.li.Tlivc  eiHllu;:.  the 
,„  ,,..vNr.  uml  T,>F,,:<.  an.  "";;;"""-,;       ■     ,  l'  k ind   >     .  "n  ■■.li,-  animals.    Tl,n,  are 

6//^.7/.  (coiv-^(ahle) ;  fV""-^"  -  ''V"^^'"  (hor,-t-sUii>h).  .enerallv  attach 

AV;/?   3  Th..  I'ATiu.NYMics  "n-HtluTMAT.ForFKMAT.E      The  former  -01^^^^^^^^^^ 

8tem  of  the   ,,r..,>er  u  nn.;  f'-^>''VV       L     iL      kin  1^  of  e^^^^  "'''•'""' 

;;;:;^,^  fi!';£T,ial''o;;:iu7.>',-'--'''  >r^t. ':.',  IL  ..aVon^alc.  .  ..-,..,  con. 

"'C'ritM.',.r  name,  in  ...  (M-c)and  rf«  (-vA-75) '«k-  <>-  en.lin.  M«  (./^,,p  for 
,na  r.nd  M     ,,  <,  for  f.-nnU.M.'..r"nyn,ic,.  a,\4/«-«- .l'n</«^  //"V,*»- //.n^^ 

^-:::;r.v>,.r ''prop,. , .'•v^'-.'••••<-:!;;,;^,;:'!^n,i:'*;';vf^S:li?:^^nrs^ 

Iiyinl.s.  hnt  onlv  win-n  ih.^  luv,-,.,!,!,!:  .^^''"   ''    ''  l^''^',- f  flV",' Vl'.,■l,.n^i..Il  in  <w  form 

,l!;;V;;;":o;:J;nic^i'n'^t-.':i•r:■"'■^^^^^^^^^ 

'''^::r;''-itrV,rm^'^';'£t.n:aU.'t:;n.nymic.in  «  «nd  ia.  aroused  .o  designate  epic 

^^    From  ADTFCTiVEs  are  formed   the  abstract  nouns    repiosentmg 

OT  ^LiT  f^isTb'-i  VNTivK  ideas.     Such  nouns  are  formed  by  attachmg 

t^^^^^^^^l^J^'\-^^  tf'!^-  to  the  stems  of  the  adjectives.    Lxeep- 

tioniil  endin"*s  are  monia  and  elfi.  ,         ,, „  „. 

iiou.u  ciiwiu^^  iiiv.  foVn  nnv  of  the  fonr  re«»iilar  endinffP.  at- 

7?fm  1  Tlie  movabi.k  ad.tkctives  (§§  4h.  48)  take  any  oi  J"^ /""^J^;-"  n,uy  eudin"8 
taS-  them,  aceonlini:  to  eonventional  usa-e,  to  the  declknsion-stlms.  Ihe  tiiam„8 
/«■*  and  t>/do  take  the  c  )nn(et!nu' vowel  'i.  a>- 

Y'\  ciarn^  _  chtrA-ta.'^.  pro>^)<^r  —  prosper- i-fa-o.   titteger-  Mefn-t-tas. 

rr;:s:ir-';'brinK".T;.',i;"7;r'';:;,jr/ii^^^^ 

as»  con*M^f  j/«  -  consuet-ado,  sollicitus  -  soUicil-udo. 


APPENDIX  IV. 


355 


F^m.  .3.  Of  the  adjectives  of  common  gevder  the  LiQmD  mutes  (§  211)  take  the  ending- 
irt.  attached  to  the  declensioii-ftem,  and  the  others  (§§  20<i.  210.  212)  eenerallv  take  the 
en•i\ll«J:/a^^  attached  to  the  vowel-stkm.  as  /  &  j 

(u)  mpi^n^  —  fa/yienf-ia,  el^fians  —  eHjant-ia.  concors—  concord-ia,  biers  — in  erf -ia  ' 
(61  brevis  —  brevi-fas\  pobill^  —  nolnii-tas\  comU  —  cmni-tut^,  gravis  —  gravi-tas  •  ' 
(c)  oc(  r  —  acri-fa>\  ce/er  —  cderi-tas,  alacer  -  -  alaen-tan  ;  ' 

('/i  sa^fax  -mgad-fa-\  velox  —  reloci-f(i<(,fenx  —fefifi-fa.'^.  simplex  — nmplici-tan 
ExcKPTioNs.—  Aui/ax  'xudfolldx  foiin  audnna  and  fallacia :  ferox  forms  fefvcia  and 
ferocUax.     Afo.'/i.t.  *vy//«,w,  and  trisfi.'i  form  mollitia.  .<eqintia.  and  tnxtitla  '  turpis    fo7'fis' 
and  si,/u/i< ni.ike  turpURdo.  foritfido.  nm'difr„lo.  Facilis  t'orm^/acili/as mid faculfm  with 
ditl.TiMit  siirnilk-ations  ;  diffiri/t.'< mukr.y^  o'lffifNlta/i  only.  Pofens  [orm^  potenlki'  vpntei^fa<i 
egHis  —egestds,  rale n^i —  valet udo.    Tiie  noun  tem^Htas  ip  formed  from  tlie  adverb  temere. 
Rem.  4.  Of  the  adj.-ctive«*  of  the  roNi^oNANT  classes  (§214  foil.)  those  with  LioriD 
Ptem-*  take  faM.  attaclied  without  connecting  vowels  to  their  htems.     Those  with  mute 
characteristics  take  the  endinj;  ia,  as 

(a)  pntii>er  —  pffiipf'r-fa<.  p'/be"  -  p',ber-fa.^  {hist,  of  imbeMas).  Vetustas  \»  not  derived 
from  refif.'i,  but  from  vetiistitn.  (See  Rem.  2.) 

(h)  iii-ftpt  —  in')/)iif,  dirts-  —  dirif-h^,  (leae.f  —  deaid-ia. 
ExcKi'T.oNs  :  Vigil  makes  cigil-ia,  nie/fior  —  tnemor-ia,  princeps-  princin-ium  svnr^ex 
—  FKltplic-imn.  »     ^j^  -' 

Hem.  ."i.  Th<'  vndm^  jnoida  is  rare.  It  is  found  in  acer  —  acrimfmia^ca^'^tns  —  ccu^timo- 
ma.  sancfds—^aiirhmoiiia  (to<j:ctiier  with  acrifa.<,  castitas.  mncfitas).  Parcn.-^  formswar- 
stm.vw,  From  the  veub  qutii  is  formed  qutiimonia,  together  with  guerlla.— Tutus 
makes  tuttla. 


APPENDIX  IV. 
DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 

Okvktjat.  I?EMAnKs.  — Wcronsider  here  only  the  derivation  of  verbs  from  existing 
woKDs,  and  madi'  l)y  the  Lvtins  aceordiiig  to  dcmonstral)Ie  laws.     Hence  we  exclude 
1)  the  .h-rivatiou  of  verbs  from  such  words  as  once  existed  durin?  the  pre-literary  times 
of  the  Latin  laniruage.  but  were  afterwards  lost,  for  instance  the  derivation  of  such  verbs 
as  iKtrtarf,  optar^.  mutilre.  putrut^,  jMihlre).      T<»  trace  the  oriirin  of  such  verb<  is  the 
province  of  "  Latin  eiymoloiry"  in  a  wider  scn-e.     2)  Still  more  must  we  exclude  the  der- 
nation  of  Latin  verbs  from  their  ultimate  itoors  whicii  would  carry  us  to  the  time  I)efore 
tlie  se|)  nation  of  the  Latin  from  the  other  co-rnate  languages.     This  is  the  province  of 
roMi-AiiATivE  I'liri.oLoov.     Such  wrh:*  i\<  arare  (from  the  root  ar,  occurring  for  inst  in 
«/•*.  arliiit.  anna.  ara).  or  cernere  (fr(»m  the  i-oot  kav,  ox  cer  in  Latin,  occurnn"  for  inst 
in  rer-fiis,  rer-t-hr'im.  rr-Pniini.  f Vr-^v.  cre-dtrf.  cre-are,  and  tiie  German  ffar-ha  aud  qar-n) 
or  of  rirere  (a  reduplicating  verb  of  the  root  rd  or  re,  which  occurs  in  ve-tus  vi-ere  vi-ta 
vi-s\  vi-gSre),  must  for  our  purposes  be  considered  as  virtual  primitives.  '  ' 

The  derivafive  elements  of  verbs  are  placed  immediately  before  the  in- 
linitive  endiutr  re,  (or  ere  for  the  third  conjiiiralion).  Tiiey  consist :  1)  ia 
the  vowels  /7,  e,  and  7,  by  which  the  words  from  which  the  derivation  is 
made,  are  chan.ired  into  verb-stems  of  the  first,  .second,  and  fourth  conjii- 
jjations*.—  2)  In  the  syllables  lid  (containing  the  element  a,  in  combina- 
tion with  the  syllable  if,  meaning  repetition),  by  which  the  derived  verb 
is  assigned  lo  the  first  conjiiuation.—  8)  in  the  element  sc  (sometimes  with 
the  connecting  vowel  i(i.sr),  by  which  the  verb  beccnnes  '  inchoative',  being 
assigned  to  the  third  conjugation.— E.vce|>tional  derivative  elements  are 
ut'l,  ex.<*^  and  ilia,  wiiich  are  used  for  the  derivation  of  a  very  few  verbs. 

Rem.  1.  The  di-rivative  element  a  is  used  to  derive  verbs  from  xouns  and  ad.ikctives 
heiiig  attached  to  their  declension-stems.     In  order  to  derive  verbs  from  other  verbs,  the 

♦The  vowels  <!.  ?.  and  I  existed  as  verbal  characteristics  already  at  a  time  when  the 
Latin  audits  cognate  langmg.-s  formed  still  one  to  i-rue  ;  l)iit  thev  were  even  in  the  literary 
times  ot  the  Latin  lan-u.ige,  used  as  elements  fertile  formation  of  new  words  out  of 
old  ones.  It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  no  consonant  characteristic  (which  would  assio-n 
the  new  verb  to  the  tiukd  conjugation)  was  ever  used  for  such  a  purpose  in  the  literaTv 
times  oi-  the  laniruage,  except  the  combinations  sc  and  ess,  by  which  inchoative  and  itera- 
tive verbs  are  formed. 


356 


DEniVATION  OF  VERBS. 


pnmltlvo  vorh  n,n.t  fir.t  he  ohan.ed  Into  an  n.lJoctivo  for^  i^ 

r.ar.ieiple,  or,  .in  <..h.r  ^^f^^f^^^^^^"^  mUec   '  e  ideH\     This   appear.    nu>st 

this   ehMuent  .h  '  >1'^'><'\^'' •'*J '',':'  ^'',:/;;';lV        i„„h  m-utcr  and  transitive  verl.^  are 

plainly  in  the  derivatn.n  «ronj  no   n^,  ''    l^l!'l^lt,-^^^^^  nonun  ^- r,o,nhu7re, 

derive.l,    as   (a)    ' '^^^-''-^V '•^.- J'' ^^^^  f;^^^ 

r,.^  -  neaire._  rolm,.  -^^'^'/^^^^  ^  s.n.  er  vc  b-    r.  th.H  lo-nie.l  from  pkkson  al  ,.oun., 

deno;in- Mhe  hcMM- (.f  siu- .a  perH^"  ^    r    n.i    «^^^^^^^^ 

\\'ri>8  thus  fo.mrd  from  AOJKCTyKs  J-'*''^;''/   >  ''''V."  f^^^^^^  (j.  ^.  a/ir/y/^m 

101),  as  alef>.r-c.lebrnre  (  .  '^■/''^^'X,  f/  t,^^^ 

'^^"{£!^'^:.:Su:^^'::^^^^  .....-•......,  which  .eun. 


81 

P 
Of 


ither  *t(>  liarden' or 'to just  .  „„.„„;no-  uhirli   bv  attachinir  this  element  to 

Vc.rvi..torestin.'andsiirmficant  «^/  '^, "  '^ '^"? ,    /  -^.  v/.  T>      T^      pHnntive  verb  first 

UPiNK  sTKMs,  is  in.if..rted  to  the  '«'7' VL      .\ ml       a  tiVi pie,  denoiin-  •  the  perlVction 

.asses,  as  it  were,  throui:».  tlie  "^''''''''''-^^  ";*  1    ,f„,    -^^^  a-ain  assumes  a  ver- 

^f  theVerhal  idea',  and  .I.e...  ^^' ''^.  i:;'^  .^f,J  ^^,  \V(ip"     fo^  ^^^'H•''  *'  »"'''  \^^r^- 

bal  idea,  impre-nate.    by  '»'V'Vm\?  i  W.r,  A  »"  'embraced  one',  i.  e. 

Th..s  amplecfi  .to  emb.-aee.  f..nns  ''['['''^^  ^vheth.•^  by  the  voice,  or  a.i 

to  hold  l.in.  en.bi-a.  ed)  ;  canere  *«"\P\'»^"  ,•,,    'V„'  rj!,^;,-;  I  ,„„>i(. ;  ,licet'e\xo^,xs)- dh-trtre 

in-tr...ne„t>-m/'/'7Av,  to  s.ny  or  play  a  t        :    o  y^^\l'^^']^^\:,„.,.,^ ,  ce,hre\xo  yi.-ld>  - 


tre  ^damtnre  (to  shont  in:'':.^'V'\t  .X)  -  f^^.^'f'-^^.,. '^^^  ,.,,.;,  ori-i.-al  n.ean- 


qncTitatives  are  fOr.i.eo.  aiu^  '''^''/'r//;'-/:./  «nVr' VnMiiv"<)th<rs.  "in  other  instances  tho 
th.is  farere-fdctiUlre.  hf^Z' {  ^ ^.U^ll  J  '^7,7  ,  t'  «'riiinble.  whi(-U  is  derived 
r.uM.-nvK  verbis  lo^t- a_s  o    the    r.., ucm  tai.vc^^^  -    ^,^^^,^,^.  d.Tiv<dfn.m  the 

fr.....  the  intensive  w>J.<.^<n-e  (to  speak  in  "'  /»";'Vh1  \.ritnitive  «.f  which  is  w>ure  {to  be 
H.pine  of  an  ob-olete  ve,b  '^'''''^'•f;;,';/':"'^^,  ;,\^^^^^^^^^^  fornied.t 

silent),  from  which  the  adjective  mv///.,  a.id  the  »''^^"^^  ^  ^    /  ^,^„,.^  dkbidkra- 

intensives  lb.-med  «'•'>"\^"P'''^''*»^"' '^.l^V^'XhuTexists  „nlv  as  deponent,  without  a  par- 

^'iX.^l^r,,r  JSV.  does  not  belong  to  the  root  mu,  but  is  an  iuteusivc  of  nwvere  (instead 
of  vwvitdrt). 


APPENDIX  V. 


357 


in  common  use:  esvfire,  to  be  hungry  (formed  ft-om  the  gupine  of  fide7'e^to  eat)  and 
parturlre.  to  i)e  in  iiavail  (fro.n  the  supine  of  ;>a;'^r(?).  All  the  other  verbs  with  ^ifire 
heem  to  have  been  made  for  the  occasion  only.  Thus  the  participle  emnturiens  in  Varro 
K.  R.  pro.  §  «J  (itching  to  buy),  petitur'ire  in  Cic  Att.  1,  14  (to  electioneer,  itching  to  be 
elected),  and  the  exprt-sttions  sidlafurit  animus  ejus  et  p'OscHpfiirif,  Cic.  Att.!».  10  (he  is 
itching  to  become  another  Sulla  ai.d  •  make  prosc.iptions'.  all  of  which  are  fo.ind  at  ihose 
l)laces  only,  and  nowliere  else.  The  so-called  diininuiive  verbs  lormed  by  illare  a.'e  ante 
and  posiclassical,  as  cantiUtl re,  coitsa-ihUldrf  {to  scribble).  Only  titilldre  (to  tickle),  of 
whictK  however,  no  |)iimitive  exists,  is  used  by  Cicero,— The  element  et<«  is  attached  to 
a  few  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  perlbrminga  similar  function  as  the  element  i/a. 
These  v(m-1)s  are  rtrc»-,»'.ve/-6  (inst.  of  atlr/^^i.s-e/e),  fro.n  ctdere ;  aipt-.<sere,  from  capi-re ;  fa- 
ct-^xtrc.  {mm f (lore  ;  incensert,  fiom  cedtrt  ;  and  lactsaeie^i'^om  the  obsolete  lacere.—For 
the  elemeut  sc  and  the  inchoative  verbs,  see  §  GO. 


APPENDIX  V. 
COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. 


In  order  to  understand  this  chapter,  it  is  necessary  to  have  a  general  knowl- 
edge of  PKKPosiTioNs,  which  may  easily  be  acquired  by  reading  §§  424  and  42G  (P. 
II.,  p.  7  and  11). 

1.  Verbs  naniiot,  c:enerally,  be  conipoiinded  with  other  words  tlian  pkep- 
osirio.NS  (tor  exc^eptious  sua  No.  4).  Compositions  of  this  kind  not  only 
atteet  the  MKANiNG  of  the  verb,  but  souietiines  change  the  form  of  both 
the  preposition,  and  the  verb.  It  must,  however,  be  considered  as  the  rule 
tlial  bolli  the  pre[)osition  and  Ihe  verb  remain  unchanged,  as  adamdre 
(tVoin  (III  and  amare)  lUjIutrrirc  (from  nh  and  Jiorrere).  But  if  the  stem  of 
th(!  verb  has  tlie  vowels  ctor  e  liiey  are,  if  lite  verb  is  compounded  with  a 
l)reposilion,  fiequentlvchan<^ed  into  I,  and  the  diphthong  (b  is  generally 
clianged  into  Z,  as /^l^/'<^  —  interjic^ere  ;  cddere  —  iticfdere  ;  hAhere  —  iiiki- 
hl'ir  ;  li'yere  —  collbjcre  ;  reycre  — erir/ere  ;  teiiere  —  detuiere  ;  c<jedere — prce- 
cuUre ;  imdere  —  collldere  ;  qiKjerere  —  perqulrere. 

Hern.  1.  The  following  rules  regarding  the  cha.ige  of  the  stem-vowels  should  be  noticed: 
1)  Not  every  verb  ch.inges  its  vowel  a  or  e  when  enteri.ig  into  composition.     So  cdrere, 
mdinrt.  irdhtre  form  the  compounds  pnecavtre,  perma/itre,  dttrahere.—H)  Some  verbs 
cha.iire  ilie  vowels  in  some  of  their  compounds,  while  ihey  remain  unchanged  in  others, 
'riiiis /i,?,'yr/v  and  pldc'ere  Unui  the  compounds  aiiitluibert.  itoxiliablre.coiniuaclre^pcrpla- 
c^if.  l).it  pt-rhUilre.  mhihlrf.  dUplirt'e.   \\\ddt>,  the  stem-vowel  (wliich  is  alst>the  charac- 
tei:-ric)  ihan^es  tt)  e,  as  condTre,  addere,  perdere.     It  remains  unchanged  in  ci?'cu?nddre. 
Before  tw«)  con>ouant8  S  mostly  changes  into  e  (as  tractdre  —  confrectdre),  sometimes  into 
«,  as  in  ciUcdre  and  mUtdie  {incnlcare,  exs>dtdr<).     Bui  in  fraivjere,  tangere,  and  in  some 
compoumls  of  pdnrj^fe  It  is  changed  into  i  {infri/ir/ere,  coiitiiigere,  i/npinge?e),  while  iu 
oilier  compounds  of  panr/ere  (as  depaiKjtre).  in  thecompounds  of  urg>tere.  in  atruinddre, 
pi-rlracldiK^  and  in  dfsacnirt  (a  posiclassical  verb  which  also  occurs  in  the  form  desecrdre) 
It  remains  unchanged.    Z)  e  changes  into  i  iu  the  verbs  mentioned  al)ove.  in  eglre  (iiuii- 
glit\,prtnii:rt  {f.rpniii^re)  sedlre  (iim'idtj'e)  and  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  spectre 
(dt-sp'icere).    In  the  following  compounds  of  It-g^re  it  remai.is  unchanged:  allegtre, perle- 
ytrf^pnelegert,  relegere,  ,siifA<gert.  Of  einere  the  couii)ound  cueni^re,  and  of  stdtie  the  com- 
liomids  with  dissyllabic  i)retixe8  {circutiistdere)  remain  unchanged.     4)  The  diphthong  (b 
remains  in  /utrirt  {ud/uirert). 

Hem.  2.  Exceptional  changes  are  :  1)  au  into  m  in  claud^ re  (excl Mere),  and  into  5  in 
2*luudere  {expUJdere),  except  applaudere  ;  4)  u  into  e  iu  dtjtrdre and  i>ejerdre  {h-omjurdre). 

Hem.  3.  In  some  instances  a  contraction  of  the  initial  vowel  of  the  verb  with  the 
p.vposiiion  takes  place,  flere  l)elong  the  following  verbs:  cogere  (inst.  of  co-agere), 
df>i>re  ide-agert),  sumeie  (sab-emere),  pmmere  {j)ro-eniere),  comere  (co-emere),  detnere  {de- 
enu:rt),p')/iere  (jxjd-d/ure),  ptrgere  (per-regere),  surgere  {sab-regere). 

2.  Most  of  the  changes  whicli  the  pkepositions  undergo  in  their  com- 
position with  verbs  are  optional,  i.  e.  the  unchanged  forms  are  as  correct  ;is 
the  changed  forms.  Thus  some  manuscripts  give  adcurrere,  while  others 
havt;  accarrere ;  some  read  adjilgere,  but  otiiers  affligere.  The  most  fre- 
<iueut  change  which  the  pkepositions  uudeigo  in  their  composition  with 


858 


COMPOSITION   OF  VERBS. 


VF1U5S  r«)nsists  in  assimilation,  that  is  a  clian-o  of  tlio  las    consonant 
l^^^^V^yn^^nm  into  ihe  tirst  consonant  of  th.  vkhb,  as  rr/f.r;r  msl.  o 
a  /.f^'r^^^^  tlic  last  letter  or  letters  of  the  prepositions  are  drom^^ 

as  .m^XV;  i         of  ^'.i-  radar  ;  ...wvV.,  insl.of  "'-'->->^ ,;^^"^'^^''^' ^"^  'ns 
T^a      a    re     Some  prepositions  increase  by  a  letter  «/)*,  as  ;,m/./r  inst. 
c)l    Xl/v  ;  and  in  so.ne  tlu-  vowels  are  chang<d,  as  componere,  inst.  of 
cuni-ponere  ;  antkipdre,  inst.  of  ante-cipare. 

coi'j'irrirr,toiniiiirni.ciiiilriti«.  „,.-„.,„f«  c  A  no»'.    H  ii'similtile.' be- 

f„r.-/-.  „u,l  l.,.for..  all  ..Hum;  <:""'■"'"''•»'''■"''»''''/;. '-V;,^;/'/^^  '"•*"'"■ 

nujicere,  mriiptre. 

3.  Some  prepositions  occnr  in  composition  only,  rm<l  ^^^^;^  '^ 
separate  words.     They  are:  \)  amK  ^vhH•h   ^''•';/''*.;   f.,^,.^^^*:'^^  V^     .^.i/. 
aLiitdre)  and  clian-es  into  «;i  m  anqmrere  and  '•'''f  ^Vl   ,%m^Tns    3    r 
^  rms  its^<  before  V    the  middle  nuites  \d  and  r/),  J^'hI   all   LKiUins    6)  ie 

;(«;'"«;  Lm/ire,  iece-v,.,-.)  except  in  >^Uere  U"^u..d  .,1  ^dnere). 

brace.     DU  mean.  -a."!,,  er'.  a.  ''''"'■'•».;;''  '  ;\'  .  'in.-,-    i.l..    ■  l>ef."e  a  vowel,  as  i.i 

" i"  CrrulelhalZVhs  c.nnot  be  c,.n,p.mn,,e.,  with  any  ....,<.,■  «onls, 

4.  A<'l"«  r"'^'^;V.<  o«-n  tlw.n-ire  some  few  excep; urns,  the  most  im- 
than  ruKrosrnoNS  (^  ^b.))  Uieic  <ue  hoim.  1«.«   «^        \ ^ — 

«The  lorn.  ,;;^v^^^T^^i^^;ii^^'  f"'™  "'  ""*  preposition  «Inch  fec,uently  occur,  ihns 
la  the  archaic  luouuuients  of  the  lanjiuage. 


APPENDIX  VI. 


359 


portnnt  of  wliich  refers  to  the  ^Qvh  facer e.  This  verb  occurs  in  composi- 
lion  wilh other  verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjiiijations  (which  in  this 
composition  lake  th(\/?V,-</  place),  in  order  to  express  a  m^W/z.^of  the  state 
or  ACTION  contained  in  such  verbs,  as  tremefdcere,  to  make  tremble.  The 
\<.'Yht)irere  in  tiiese  compositions  takes  tlie  place  of  the  intinitive-endini^ 
re  of  those  verbs  with  which  it  is  compounded,  sbortening  at  the  same 
time  the  characteristic  e  of  vrrbs  of  the  second  conjui^ation.  In  these  verb- 
al compounds  the  sti<:m-vowkl  of  the  verb /Wc//-e  is  not  chanired  into  l. 
Tlie  verbs,  which  are  found  in  comj)()sili()n  with /fCdr<?,  are  the  tbilowing: 
arescere  (stem  c//-^)  —  arcfHcere,  as^siv-scere  (nr.  amte)  —  aspuefacore,  consuescer»  (st.  con-. 
t»i?)  —  c-oiiMK-iji.-crc,  calOre  — talflacore.  doeerc  —  coiKiocijracerc,  madeie  —  madefacere, 
in..n5ie  — fommonefacere,  paiOre  — patefacL-re,  lain  (DEi'V— labefacere,  tremere  —  tre- 
iiu'lai-ere. 

One  verb  of  the /r.v/ conjuiration  (vacdre)  occurs  in  composition  with 
fdccrc,  whose  cliaracteristic  d  is  chan<,aHl  into  de—  rucncfdcere. 

lii^m.  7.  The  deponent /)(7//m  (which  in  composition  bocomes  active)  forms  with  nu- 
MEKAi.s  tlie  compounds  hiparare.  (ripartlre.  (/udUriiHirtlre.  The  verl)s  amcVe.  uequire, 
ntfjU'/ere  (inst.  of  neckr/'re)  and  m/le  (ins^t.  of  no/i  vdh)  are  comfx.iinded  with  the  ne- 
gation    T  lie  verbs  />o.s>e  (ins?t.  of  i>otU  tsse)  and  nuMe  (xw^i.  of  mwm  velle)  are  com- 

pOIUidt'd   with  ADVKKBS. 

Jt>in.  H.  Many  compositions,  which  seem  to  be  exceptions  to  the  rule  No.  1  are  not  real 
VKKBAi,  C()mpoiMids.  I)ut  v.-rbs,  d.rived  from  other  words,  in  wiiicli  such  compositions 
already  e.xistecl.  'V\\\\-^  jiHlic'tie  is  not  iinmcdiately  derived  fronl7^^s-  aiid  d'lcen-,  Init  fnmi 
jaile,r  (fiX.jn-ilic).  Tlie  words  pary  and  ntpe»  tirst"enrere(l  into  the  conipositjon  particep^^, 
and  Irom  the  latter  word  the  verb  pari icipa re  is  derived.  Thus  the  followhi"  derivations 
are  m.ide  :  ° 

mairni  facere  —  ma<,ndncijs  —  mairnificare,         b.-llnm  «jerere  —  belliijer  —  belli<>-erare, 
m-.rem  ire  ere  —  mon-er  —  moriir.-rSri,  avis  specere  — auspex  —  anspiciTri, 

sacrum  lucere  —  sacrilicus  —  sacriticAre,  avis  capere  —  auceps  —  aucupSri. 

Verbs  thus  compounded,  are  all  i>kkiv\tives  of  tiu'  iii>t  conjiiiratioii.  J^ometimeg, 
nut  i-aiely,  verbs  of  this  kind  ent>T  into  composition  with  nouns,  even  if  an  intermediate 
worddo<'s  not  e.vist.  as  it<as  facere —  ctdijicare  (as  if  from  (£dificus  or  <xdifex),  terqurn 
vtrtert  —  tergiTermn.  '  ^      1      j 

Rem.  9.  Several  verbs  have  the  Arpr:AnANCK  of  roMPocNDS.  because  thev  are  connected 
with  o).MPi.KMK\rs  (mostly  adverliiai),  which  often  are  written  in  one  word  with  the  verb. 
lltT.'  belohi;:  imtledicere.  hemdlrre,  lucrifarere,  ainmadvertere  (iiisi.  of  unitnum advertere)., 
pe.^-'Umdure.  ctiiinndare,  satl'U'acere.     It  is  more  correct,  to  write  such  words  separately. 

5.  The  coNJUG.vnox  of  compound  verbs  in  every  respect  is  like  that  of 
the  siMPLK  VEKu.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  most  frequently  occur  in  the 
lormHti(;n  of  the  peufkct  tense. 


APPENDIX  VI. 

FORMxVTIOX  OF  THE  PERFECT  AND  SUPINE. 
I.  General  Remarks. 
1.  All  tenses,  moods,  and  other  forms  of  the  Perfect-svstem  are  derived 
from  two  cardinal  forms  :  1)  the  PEitFECT  of  the  active  voice,  or  the 
FIRST  CARDINAL  FORM;  2)  the  SUPINE  (or  in  depoucuts  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple), which  is  called  the  second  cardinal  form  (^  3:56).  In  order 
to  tind  the  two  cardinal  forms  of  any  iriven  verb,  three' things  must  be 
known  :  {<()  the  stem  of  its  perfect  'system  (for  instance  tha?  jieiere  has 
in  the  perfect  system  the  stem  petl  ;  thai  jamreXva^  in  the  perfect  system 
the  stem  ju)\  {b)  the  active  and  the  passive  sii^ns  which,  if  any,  the 
^^iveii  vrrb  reciuires  in  the  |)erfect  and  supine  (for  inst.  that  colere  reqin'res 
the  active  sign  a:colui;  that  carpere  requires  the  active  sign  «  .•  carpsi ; 


3G0  FORMATION   OF   THE   PERFECT   AND   SUPINE. 

e  s  Dine  •  WuiU'tcere  chun-cs  its  ^i^m  far.  miojec). 
nor  do  all  tlie  verbs  which  m  ^^»^J  !r;:^^  ;^>^\^      ^'t,,^^,  ,y,^  ^,H)  r/...V^ 

iTet'i  \n  the  nfrfect  system.  .        .        tIip 

a,Kl  consists  >.,  <.ne<.f  .1,..  '^-''^''j^';- «;.""•  ^'     i     a    1        .Ms  in  one'  of 

'  4.  Ti>..  ciANCK.  of  ii.e  stem  in  .h.  ,...f...t  fyj;;;- ,<■;:;;:';;;'•',  .c"lu'm 

leUors      em  liesis,  as  in  <«n«<r  -  end.  Meniere  -  .-(<•««). 

perfect,  the  stem  unMierally  '^^f''''''''^'''^^^^^ 

pmedin-  iho  active  «r  passne  Mt,ai  >  or  ^  am   f  ^*' ^^  •        ^  ^  f,.,,,„  ^ho 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  system  ..f  ;|-/-^^;-!;:;!j;:5;  '^;;;  ^t   \>,^^  am.nlin.  to  tl,e  class 

stem  of  the  incept  ve  verb  u.,cep  ive  ^!   '   •;\",;;*;;fj,'/,vst.-n   of  cre><ceve  is  Icnned  as  if 

to  which  the  prnu.t.ve  verb  hd<.  ys.      '^   '^;^;;;, ';,';\',L,;.  ..f  .vhc.ve  in  the  same  way  as 

the  verb  were  m/-f,_of  i\mctre,  ab  U  uu.  \cii)  w^it 

from  its  primitive  .«.r/re.  .        ,,  ,   ,;,,  ,  ti.,>  tiTinination /^r^rg.     Tho 

7?.,;,.  3.  The  stemsor.the  -coptive.  an.  nnin.   by  reno^^  T,,,, 

final  letter  of  the  nMnaunn-  r^l],^^'^!)^^-*^^^^^^  ''^''^''-     ^'  ^1'^  U-tter  beloro 

i„ut^axcere  has  the  stem  ^'''''f''?'^  '^"'f^l!^^ ^,  ,nnst  he  removed,  the  stkm-vkub  be- 
the  termination  seen  i^  the  vowel  i.  »'''^,  ^/^  ,V.;'';'Vu"nU*^/vm  yfnv^re).  But  ihive  m- 
lon-in-  to  the  third  ^^<>''J''-^^'''»'Vinr/  i  e  tS.n  ion^^^^^^^^  s-em-verhs  belon-in-  to 

crptives  with  the  letter  i,  l»'"^'''^'''"  -j''%i^,V!j  "' ,X  ,  /v/W^  -  </o;7//7^^  >'Ciscen-^cire. 
th'e  fo,ntk  conjUL'atu.n  ';/':;;;;r^;;;;,;  "J^^^^^^^  .tems  m  the  periect-.y.a.m 

Two  incepiives.  annixx'tn  aiul;>o.>a/e  rcu«iu  k 

(cvm/>6.sfMi.  W>asri).  vowKL-roRM,  have  a  com- 

/Mn.  4.  All  inceptives  whose  pcrfect-sti  m>,  "cion     lo  i  „,^,,t  ^„-  ,hose  belo.if,nn4 

phte  VKUFECT  syste  n,  as  a-v/  xc-r^  V^^''''^'^;;  f  7,^,'^^^^;^^  ibllowin-  live  :  coalesce- 

lo  the  coNsoNANT-KoKM.  lack  ^^Yr:''fr^^^r^^^^^^l>^  ^-^'rdinal  forms.     Th  . 

Siiull^onn,  excLpt  r.^ri.  which  ..>rm.  -^^^f^^^;^  ^^,  ,,,,,,,  ,i,Her  fron.  Nors. 
Rem.  5.  Som.  ln.-ept  i ves  have  ""  verbal  stem>  at  aU  but^a^  ,^,^^^^^ 

as  i7''«'^r€r^.  «/rm-.r^  <.r  fnun  V^^^ra.K^-dve  i  ceptives  form  the  active  teuse=*  by  the 


APPENDIX  VI. 


361 


II.   The  vowel-form  of  the  Perfect  system. 
fb;!\^n  ''^'■^•^'  '''^''^'^,  perfect-system  is  formed  from  Vo^vt:l-stems  take 
STEM,  as 7  "'^'"  ''  '""^ '''  ^^'''^^  ^'^^°  ''  ^^'^^^^  ^^-^  attacherto  the  yoweI 

r  ^    ...  ACTIVES.  deponents. 

A^,^.^....  Perfect.  Supine.  InflnUive.  Participle. 

«lie  J   T^      delctum.  r5ri  (st.  ra).  rattis. 

noscere  (st.  ...).  uovi.      notimi.  i^bhvisci  (st.  ohll).  oblitus 

6    The  following  verbs  have  Vowel-stems  in  the  perfect  system  • 

vetan,  which  havJ  consonant  ^iZTicTdom^xc^^^^^^ 

coiijii;ration  without  exccDfion      rr)  Th..  Tvr™,vJ  "**    ^^^  ^^^  Deponknts  of  the  first 

and  the  deponent  r.-;7  (st  VT  ^'  ^        ""^-    ^"^^  ^^^  ^"^^^^'^^  *'^''«^^'^  (^^^-  ^^^'^^'^J' 

^./V./^r^  etc  ;  {/,)  The  f.>llowinriNCKrT  vKs^  criSw^^  "^*^^^'"^^^' 

(St.  ^v/g,,  and  the  compounds^f  Ih^oZotliS^^^^^^^  ^^^-  ^^«^>'  ««^^^vre, 

^■o/^.<e€/-^,  St.  ole)     (c)  Tliree  verb,  of  /iw,  fhL  .     -^  {aMesctre,  adolescere,  exole^cere.  ob- 

;i)  Stkms  in  I     (a)  The  verb,  of  fh./fV.M.M^     •  '      •  ^'^  '^'**  ^^^  '^^'^'  supine  ruum). 

wtiich  in  the  prc^senrs^^tcm  areVXc^^'^  the  compounds  of  parere\ 

ojn-rhr,  r.pJr.,,  and  the  'i^^^!^s^^^,^^l^ ^Mo^ 

y».\A\T-sTE>f<  in  tlie  oerf.-cr  sv<f,.m      X  'rA     i  '^'^'^^' "'' ^^^^  ^^^"^h  have  con- 

lliinl  conjiiiration  •  r//,>^-/v(st  rnnls   /inzllt^  n    ^"'.if'*  v.(«'  The  followinjr  verbs  of  the 
Jh-e  with    V.ml  i'^e5(.r.^^^^^^^^^^^  ^'^«  derivatives  iS 

^^^i^ip^^c^t^iii!::^  of  ;;sr°"'^  ^^^-  '^^^'  ^^^'  "^  ^^«  -pmeof  ^.a.. 

-i^sKN^^vsJeli;  (c^^epl/^^;:':;;^  l/".i'i''i^"T'f  ^'""  "-'^'^  ^'-  characteristic  ^?  in  the 

ai'.l  />7).  (See  k.  •!>  )    I,  class.,  ai    nn.r,  f,   '  ,h'.     *^-''^^'^'^>-  ^'^'^"^r^  aiul  esse  (st.  .^o^w.  ro^a 
'//•'>/V'^''/.     Theci.Iracte  i^iicTwhi    r1  vHm  ""'"'^V  i"  th...e  verbs  is  always 

vowels  of  the  teriiS^  immediately  precedes  the  initial 

by  the  kindred  consonant  t',  as  :  ^  ^f^oUtued,  and  m  solvere  ^n^UolvereU  replaced 

arijuere      '    iir.-Qi(inst.  of  ffrv/7d)  ar-fltnm 

di  Mere  di  ui  (inst.  of   dUa.i)  difutun?' 

^^^^^^:^^i::^:^^^^  -icU  have  the  vowel- 

1   rp.    .         ,  llcmnrkH. 

1.  The  inceptive  pascere  makes  tlie  supine  pastum,  not  /w///m 

"'';■".''','»  "I""'"'  i"  ihe  l...ticor.s,  b„t  <lop°  not  oc?ur  *        '  tmc-my    A  et-PiN» 

Krfei  !:;;Zrr;;;.;te- anS^'Si" ^  con,o„,,„t.  and  vowol.»fems  in  the 

cla<.).  makes  the  sip    e  i/XS  from  ^he  vnu^^l  ^fj"*"^-'"  ^'if'^  "^  ('^^*'^  ^^^  rednplicaring 

16 


362 


VOWEL-FORM. 


8.  .*r-T«.  10  sow,  maki-  the  Mipine  -<f  ;,•.-„'■;'*"  ,,„1,;..  i„»?r«  -  viAlmn.  ,    . 

(/^-/v,  l:vrk^  tlio  siipmt'.  ^^r    ^  5)  j,„j  ,iie  ^^vh^ferlre,  Jerocire, 

12   'rh(^  DKsiDKUATivE  verhs  in  in  ire  ^'oe  -^IM'-  y  •' 
init>rire,  pvinre,  ,^u,,rrhlre.  fonn  no  !'';'':  '■yj.,';;':;';";,,^  „f  ^,v<?.  which  hi  tl.e  pn-s.  ^y^tcm 

i:i.   ri?W  makes  the  ?(upiiuw-?/'^//i-      1  Ik- conrxmnu.  oi  ^«'/r.  _        ^, ^w.  ,-,..rMl:.r 

Pill 

(r. 

ni* 

TI 


But 

r 


17    /?//;5r«  mMkt's  the  giipitu'  rxf'fm.  but    'nly  in  the  com. 
Thesimple  verb  fonn^  no  *"M>i'H'.  Sc''  p.  -W-  ,      rnscian. 


This*  siein  ^upp>lv,o  ti*^  "c „  — ^  „,wl  en 

7.  Tl.e  c.,n.pou„,U  of  „.e  verbs  memjone.   tonn  .l-P-'^^^;,  •^/;; 


APPENDIX   VI. 


363 


aL>ve!  "'  ''^'  ^''■"'''*^'^  "^  "^^"'  P^^^^^^  ^"d  «"Pi^es.    See  the  Remarks 

III.  The  Consoxaxt  Form  of  the  Perfect  system  in  gexer.l 
H.  J  he  coNSONANT-FOHM  has  three  classes :  (./)  the  Ridic  vl  ol-is^  whi^h 

-huh  ft  (7^  V  ^^^  "'"'  V-''''''''  ^^'^^^^''^  ^^'^^^^  the  active  si^a  /(/^r^ 
-!''^^^[^h  (^)  the  b-CLASs,  wh.cli  takes  the  active  sign  .  (c./ry^.'Jr  - '  L^^W) 

r.;^":  S^iir;.I^^y::;!^il?^^:f  ^  without  chan^m.  their  stems,  as  ma^i^.i; 
6./-^  (perf.  cabni)  ^  ''''^'''^'  ^'''"=''=* '"  a.lciitiou  to  an  active  sij^u,  as  la  cum- 

ihe  LI-CLASS,  and  /  in  the  radiui  i  ufs  .  T^^^^^^^^  1  he  passive  sign  re-iilarly  is  It  iu 
sii:n  /  i.  s...netimes  cha.r^ed  i m  i^^  In  ono  v^M-h  t?''^  '^  «otnetuues  drops  its  i.  and  the 
/r,  (mor(uu.s)  which  ori.'inal  /i^' a  der  "u    "e  ad>  t^i^^  ^^•^'^*.^'^  ^'-"  *« 

poneat  verbs,  wiiich  tik  •  n<)-irtii-<.  «  ,r..    ..         -"^  T  '^'^  '^"'   "'^  ciassihcation  oi  De- 

I'K-lass,  heJause  such  won      1  e  ,1  e  tdaU^^^^^^  '^-^  "-'l<'"-ini,'  to  the 

if  the  dcp<,n..ni  is  a  c  >    pound     ^il^^^^^       !.pw' k"^''*^' ■'*"■'"-•  '    tl'«y  existed.     But 

dcp.n.cM|t  is  always  considered  a  be  o.rS)'o?liu  ridScli"  uh,/"'^*"^'  "'^^f'  ^1'« 
Hguof  itsj)articiple.  "="io  lo  lac  raaical  class,  whatever  may  be  tiie 


Simple  Verb)i. 
clandere        cl.usi        clausum. 
habere  hibui        habit  um. 

t<par^'t•l•e        sj)arsi        sparsum. 
tacere  tacui  tacitum. 


coiiclfldere 
iiihibcM-e 
consp.rufL're 
coiiiKer-cere 


Compounds. 

coucla>i  coiiclasnm. 

inliii)ui  inliibitum. 

conspersi  conspcrsum. 
coniicui 


Compounds. 

perl^ci 
decGpi 


perfcctum. 
deceptuin. 


f.-n-iiTlronwh^u^^fM"*^  '''''7^'  «peptions:  1)  So  ne  compounds  belon-  to  a  cla«.  dif 

Simjde   Verbs. 

crer'o  ^?'"^-  ^"''""»-  P-rficore 

caperc  cGpi  captuni.  decipere 

All  these  exceptions  are  noticed  at  their  proper  places. 
n..ftat\fHceTI'll//r.M[rV!:' '''''''''  '^-"  ^"  ''''^^  ''^  '"  '^e  verbs  of  the  vowel-por.h  doe. 

hi^se).  (^:^tinxis.-,tm),  y;/ (y</u.c^  f:es.^,  consumpse  (produxisse,  cessisse,  consump- 

IV.  The  Radical  Class. 

PcrfeP'n.Tf  n''-^''l*'""'"'^'  ^''  ^'^''  '''■'^"^  ''''  "'^^  ^^^^  '''''  ACTIVE  sign  in  the 
.  vev;,    u  1    7'  '''''•!'  '■"''  ^^^''^''••^"y  '>^'>'-«  <>^  l^^^^  =iff-'cted.  Their  Supinks 

I'-VssrvE  'sign!    '  '^"'  ^  ^^'      '  ""^  '*'"  '^^^^'"^  "^^^^"°"^'  ^^^^'=^>^^  l^-'^^^  ^ 

01.^":,/ imS:  inh:ci;^;;^ti"  i'c  i^r  T^^^^e^j^y^"^"^"  ^''"^'^  ^^^^^-^^  ^^  -^^'^^^  - 

<»r  /•  ucU,-rfi      t^. ,.',,.„  ^";*'^'*^i^'^'*tic  IS  a   I  -mute  (reed 're  —  c<vs>mi\  or  one  of  the  liuui  is  / 

uJ<Lfe-jH^Zm^^^^  -.uietimes  when  an  .  prccedesa  1^  mute 

Jiem.  2.  The  compouud*  of  dare  and  .«/.r,  have  ti,e  supines  ditmn  and  .^i^^;n  (vcndl. 


m 


3G4 


RADICAL   CLASS. 


.™.  ^.n,..r.^.    B..t  horc  '^t>ett..«  cannot  he  c„„,Mer.^^^^^  '-.I^ 

.u  .  l..».>^t  I  !ilinit  V.  ■.    .     i  _     .  \.~r»..»  *l>n  itna. 


thong  (as  fftridere,  aBckre). 

1)  Ft'rfts  ?f///i  rt  .<j/?^ri  stem. 
11    Ilerebdonir  the  followins^  verbs: 

b)  Skcon»  roN.n  r,.  :   c:i\eM',  i.iNtn,  hmv.i   , 
''';^^lij;^;rc:,Sr;-vEll?^;c,!SirTre,  rcpWr.  „hc  .a,t  ,.,,  .,ein.  c,.,nponnd,  of 

"''if .iJ„,K,.  CO.,,-.,. :  «.<-,  .ho  «bsowo  jpi^d  «--i -'ii;!-!;,;:;,";;;;;.':":;^;':  '^^. 

cSnere.  cipno,  fik'n;.  O.n.'re.  "'''^^;,"     s,-'-lt.r"  and  the  pi-rf.-c.-v.'rh  m.-;nlu.   (ste.a 

eoSmnti  of  U.C  verh,  t'.--!!;;'- t^,"  nn'-      i  ^^  ^-vowei:.!."  "«  "-  -'"■ 

plica.in-  syllahle  al-vays  H  *.    hUe  .t      '"^j*"^  ,,cMn-vowcl .!  into  f  or 

ff»«  a  The  ,o.li.plicitin.-  v.Th,  with  ■*"  ,'^  ,":,.™;  ii  1  hi  ,h.-.e  verl),  .-'«'".V--  i«  '• 

„f^i,^.,!;a^^:;'^;s;;;^^^:rrvsu-7;^\^oppei';;:'^s. «.«,  a. .««-«.., 

'rr.rrr.UM.Ucat.ng  ver..  wUU  ™o,.  s.e.,  are  .ho  M,ow...  : 

cadere  ^/fi'l  caxfum 

p'irere  iXnhn  jnent urn  {in  the  com^.) 

7?^  .   Bl^r.  huMn-^  th.  .t.m  ?>..  nnlapUcat..  in  the  prb.kxt  sy.tcm,  like  grgnere 

an^^./?^.''tu:••h^\^^  ,,,  reduplication  .yllai.e, 

Jiem  6.  The  compound,  «f  tl.e/elupl.c^Uvi  ^e   >;  «^mp    ne  r^  ^^l^^^  ^^^.^^^  ,uu\  stare 

LrtectoMlv  (rO'/</<?r6  -'f,"/'  f^' "?''"     ^       Vl    8  ch^n''«'  h..w.-ve.-.  is  ciitine.l  to  c..m- 


APPENDIX   VI. 


365 


1 


(see  No.  9,  R.  3). 


Bern  7.  To  the  moiiosyllahic  compounds  of  dare  belon-;  the  two  verbs  t-g/it/erg  (inn 
of  n,n/m  dar^Uiud  rndtn  (compost-d  of  the  root  ^^r  with  da?'e),  wJiich  have  the  perfect^ 
vmdidi,  credidi,  a.d  itie  supuiw  ceiilUufa,  cr^dUutn.     Th^  other  inoiiosyllal)ic  cm- 
ix.unds  of  dare  arc  t  e  f..ll..wi.ij?  :  ahd*-re,  addere,  co/u.lere,  de^Jere,  edere  (to  be  ditiiiu- 
giiKsiied  lro;n  hlere,  to  eat),  indere.  p^rdere.  prodtre,  rtddere,  t^ubdtre,  tradere. 

Hem.  8.  Tlie  coiiipomidsof  ca/i>re  form  neither  a  perfkct,  nor  a  supine  excent  cnnA. 
vere,  ocanere,  pnecln^re,  which  form  perfects  belou-ing  to  tiie  U-dass  (co,u;lnui  Jic.y. 

Htm.  «J.  The  compound!*  of  pnrere  (and  sometimes  the  simple  verb  in  anteclassical 
laiiirua-jff)  «re  intl.-cted  after  the /o//r//icoiijui,Mi ion  in  the  pkkskvt  system  But  in  the 
PKUFiiCT  system  the  compound^  coinpnre  and  rep'rlrt  form  tlieir  teti<es  like  the  simpi  e 
t'lf  II'  ,l''T''!  ''\!''l'l''>'''-  conmri)  'V\x.^  compounds  aper\r-.  optrivt,  and  cooperlre' iovxxi. 
th.-ii  p.-r;.!cts  like  verbs  oi  the  L-da-<s  {aj>erui.  operui).  Hut  the  supines  of  cUl  com- 
p.iuncis  i.iclu.linir  the  participles  of  the  dkponrnts,  follow  the  sluple  veub  (reperlre 
—  rtpertum.  aj>tnre  —  a/)€rt'i/n,  exper'iri  —  txpertas). 

liem.  10  Tlie  compounds  of  memiid  are  the  inceptive  depotieuts  comminUci  and  re- 
mnu.'oi.  the  former  of  which  forms  its  participle  from  the  stem //le/iof  the  simple  verb 
(coniineatu.^),  while  the  latter  lacks  tlie  partlcii)le. 

li'-m.  n  Tin)sc  veri)s  with  short  ste:ns  which  do  not  reduplicate,  without  exceptioa 
lengthen  I h«!ir  stem-vowels  in  the  perfect,  as:  *-  »  v      ^ 

^inere  imi  emfinn  (emptum). 

l^r/j-re  l^ifji  lertiim 

7nor?re  mrjri  inolnm 

ji'imre  jn,i  jru-im 

f<f'l<-re  nt'li  ^■e.s.^iutn 

vtu'ire  ve/ii  vttUnni. 

The  followiij,'  four  verbs  change  their  sten-vowel  a  int )  2: 

dr/ere  er/i  actum  (see  No.  9,  R.  3). 

c'nttre  c7pi  ciptum, 

filcrre  jTri  fartnm. 

jd  tre  jlci  jactuin. 

The  followini;  verbs  have  peculiar  forms  in  their  supines  and  participles  : 

I'rrare  Idvi  Ivihim  or  lotutn. 

c'liere  clri  caxtam. 

fihlre  faci  Jantunx. 

grCuli  gressiis. 

The  verbs  co/micere,  bibere,  fnrjere,  scab^re,  and  inemini  (as  simple  verb)  have  no 

,  Hem.  Vi.  The  compounds  of  those  four  verbs  which  change  the  gtem-vowel  a  into? 
in  the  perfect,  take  the  reirul.r  vowel-chanire  ^d  into  \)  in  the  pkesext  system 
J^PP-  ^:;  -^"-  1>-,  r^^\  '"  tlie  pkkkect  they  all  resume  the  vowel  I  of  their  simple  verbs 
♦ui*''  M  .  •  **'"'  "1  '*y\''"|)!"e  they  lake  the  vowel  e,  except  the  comp.  olagcre,  which 
take  the  stem-vowel  oJ  the  siini)le  verb:  «i/  /c,,  wmv^u 

retfigere  reilP.^i  redactum. 

acc'iime  accZpi  accept  nm. 

CDnficere  confici  coniertum. 

pwjicisci  pwfictns. 

dtjicere  deject  dejectum. 

_  In  c5r/ere  (inst.  of  co-u/ere)  the  stem-vowel  is  contracted  with  the  precedin<r  vowel  into 
o;  but  the  peufect  system  is  formed  like  that  of  the  simple  verb  (cd€gi—cdactu?n)  -- 
Ambirjere  forms  no  perfect  system.  "^       ^^u,i.LUf,t;. 

Rem.  13.  Fieri,  the  passive  ni  face  re.  forms  a  rc-nlar  perfect  system  from  the  supine 
p.  jcieerc  (taetus  .^u,n  etc. )  Those  co  upon  ,ds  of  fac^,-.  which  assume  the  forms  of  fieri 
VJf'u  ^:^'--^';'"'  -P^''"'  11'-  ■"!''  '^-  ^)-  «••'ktJ  th  •  supinv  /actum,  \\<e  the  simple  verb  \cale- 
juc'um.  piittiaclHin).  Hut  those  compouiuh,  which  in  the  present  system  have  the 
iov\\\ ^ticere.  chaiu^e  their  stem-vowel  intog,  accordini,'to  rule  {inter ticere  —  ifUerfectum). 
rJJ^'U  ^  ^'  7"^'  '-ompoiinds  of  .^^d-^re.  which,  with  the  exception  of  circumsedlre  and  su- 
pen^easre,  ch.in.'c  th.-ir  stem-vowel ,?  into  t  in  the  pkksent  system,  take  the  vowels  of 
iiie  SIMP!  R  verb  in  the  peiipect  system,  as  as^^ldere  —  assldi  —  asse^sum.  But  pnjesUere 
auu  auifidere  form  uo  supines. 


I 


3G6 


RADICAL    CLASS. 


APPENDIX   VL 


367 


J?.m   15  Tho  perfect  «ystem  Of  co«n»YV«  58  not  found  in  the  Clashes.    But  according  to 
Prf ^?«\,  !;>^  formS  a  pcrlecl  conmci,  a.id  other,  a  perfect  connixi.  _ 

^^r ;;  2^":.;!  iti  -npounds  .ener.U.^.ert  n.  l.te^ 

(.m/,r.m,  ...;./>^//n).   J'--,^;:';^"!' ri^.-ninrm^l  u  U-V  f<>nn  /he  per.eA  .y«tenx  like 
\nXo\niere.  imd  co^iz/i^w.  ^^"<'*V-'".'^'  J,V»!"///m>      Bu  followiui;  componn-ls,  which 

S;/. M,^;;;  t;, ,.,„,.,,0. ,..  a,.ai,.t .,,.  ^^^^^^::,  't  ;r,?.?^s',:.iV"'  cjr. 

ir^Vnirkt.^luI^^pIo^edrn-nT-tnlke  ioL^er,'  i.  ..  the  U  ,capUm,  wU.ch  ,s 

tiiuple  vcib :  j^rfi'-zi  p,df.-l„m. 

])fr!f:/ere  i.,//?  i  cijit'ctnin. 

,,,i,hnrn  neglai  nei/iaium. 

l';;;;;;;;si'ytr;;n-u;r;!i;:„;"ei'vowil'^  wJ.^      jf.o  ..ve  -i  u.  preset  .^.eu» 

^T:f  "ri-hl'Tit-vor,. «.,«  (or  «„i.W,  of  the  UEPoxesT  .kc.-t.v.  aii,i»oi  i.  ob- 
Boleie  ill  all  forms  but  the  pakticu-le  : 

furmiu-  its  participle  with  the  ^o^^■<:\e  Kad.pt us). 


2)  Verh><  with  steim,  long  by  po><ltion. 


10    TTore  belon*»-  the  following?  verbs  : 
1^.    Here  Ut  lun.^  ..."    „r,1PrP  nondCro  prandCre.  ppondCre.  tondCre 

a)  Srconp  CoNJroATK.N:  f»''-y^^^;.^;"*^;'^f;f;,^^"  .fe^y^^^  currere,  dincere.  fal- 

(rmr/i)  vincereaudthe(lKEKKverhpsallere(^i>;'V.A£ZK;. 

1T1  tlheseverb.  the  stem-vowel  is  aUvavs  fo  lowe.l  by  tw^  ^ot.s.- 

IJ.  in  iitsevtii).  ,.    either  a  (l()ul)le  coitsoiKint    ^^  or  /r), 

nauts,  sucli  as  make  po^^irioN  ip.  ''''.f,';  \V'  ,,tr  or  n  and  r  with  a  K-  or 

letters  sc,  which  liowever  are  radical  here. 
Tlie  stems  of  these  verbs  either 

1)  «-«-«•«  to»^7  "y  /"'•«■''"«  i"  l"«  P"*»'  ^y^'*^""'  P^"''  "f  """"  '■"'""*'"" 
tiun,  ui.d  part  .r/W««(  •■«'"l'''f;";"f .;,"'.«  „„•  lUiuicll  miuI  are  then  treated 

vowels  mm  reaui,licatk,u,  or  leasHiea  lUe,..  wmr -ur  reaapl.catio». 


14.  Tlie  RTKM- VOWELS  of  the  verbs  of  tlie  former  subdivision  remain  un- 
chanircd,  except  the  rediiplicatin<r  vt^-bs  fallere  and  parcere^  which  change 
a  into  e  in  tiie  perfect,  but  not  in  the  supine. 

Tlie  Si  TINES  eitlier  liave  the  passive  sii^n  s,  droppini^  the  precedino:  con- 
sonant, or  are  hicking  altogether,  excei)t  toulere,  whicli  makes  temwm  or 
ienUuii. 

Tiiose  verbs,  which  have  double  consonants  {II  or  rr),  drop  one  of  them 
in  the  supine,  as  currere  —  curxum,  veVere  —  vuUum. 
Ran.  1.  The  foilowini;  verhs  of  this*  cate^'ory  reduplicate: 

II.  CoNj.    vurriRre  inomordi  vwrff^im. 

peniti-rt  (to  hang,  n.)  j>i>eiid'i  ])em>tm. 

^IMJudere  »jX)i>oiidi  s^pomum. 

tondtre  tofondi  tonsmn. 

III.  Cox  J.  crirrtre  cucurri  cvrfutn. 

fallore  ftfelli  falmm. 

parctre  jiepetci  

7>f7/^/^re  (to  suspend)  pejmidi  pensum. 

po<cere  popo<n  

tendcre  tettndi  ientum  or  t^nsvm. 

Rem.  2.  The  conijmund?  of  these  verhs  do  not  reduplicate,  except  poscere,  and  Romo- 
tiiiies  currere  (d-})rhd?re  —  d' peiidi.rispondere  —  respondi.  ostendere  —  ostendi,  but  repo- 
fcere  —  rf^/xt/xhci  k     Ejcurrert  and  pnecarnit  are  mostly  found  with  reduplication  {excu- 
C'/rri.  pntc'/ciir/i) :  but  the  other  compounds  generally  drop  the  reduplication  {accuni 
dt^nirri).     Rfhlhrt  (compound  ui falleit)  form^  no  supine.  *  * 

Rf>m.  3.  Parcfre.  in  the  antetlassical  authors,  forms  the  perfect  jxirn  after  the  rules  of 
the  S-clasn.     The  verb;il  adj<'Ctiv.-  pnrnnriia  occurs  once  in  Livy  (-26. 13\  and  in  Suetonius. 
Tnc  perfect  pncm  is  once  lound  in  anteclassicai  hintruagc.  from  which  Pliny  (H.  N.  1 
;J3,  4--ir  ilie  icatlini:  is  correct)  lorms  tlie  verbal  adjective  y^am/'/Tru*.  ' 

Rem.  A.  Of  th.-  comi)oun(ls  of  tnuhre  the  followini:  three  :  extendere.  protevdere.  rfiten- 
df/r  arc  formed  with  either  passive  sign,  t  or  s  {exlensntn  or  ex'entum) :  dcteuder»  and 
(f'ile.Kdere  liave*-only  (oafe/i'^u/n.  not— tu/n)  ;  all  the  others  have  ^  oniy  (inUnturn,  atien- 
tnni ) . 

litm.  5.  The  stems  of  the  following  verbs  remain  long  l)y  position  without  redupli- 
cation  : 
fervhe  {ferver^^,  anted.)  pranderc :  the  comp.  oUandcrg  (accend<  re,  in/'mdere),  the  comp. 
o[  fender  €  (dfifetid^re.  ajftud'-re).  lamhere,  tnandere,  pandere.  preJuri^ere  (ox  prendere)^ 
psaUeie.,  Hcandun-.  ve"ire,  verrere,  vertere.  as  : 

prand?re  jrrandi  pransnm. 

Kcandere  ticandi  ticnnmm. 

asrenUere  (P^ccndi  ascensurn. 

The  perfects  ol  the  veiJ)3  with  double  consonants  (paaUere,  vdlere,  vcrrere)  are  extremely 
rare;  t liat  of /;vr///<-rt^  is  nosiclassical.  and  that  of  ?v/rf,'<>  rests  only  on  the  authority  of 
ancient  grainmarians.  Vdlere  makes  two  i)erfects.  velli  and  rvld,  both  of  which 'are 
rarely  used. 

Fetvire.  laniherc,  p.<in1li're  ami  vtrrere  form  no  supines.  Pandere  forms  the  supinej9a«- 
smn  (rt\rr]\  pa/it'ii/i}.,  and  vllen  forms  ni'finn.  inst.  (»(  rel<//fn. 

J}>eii(Un  forms  neither  a  pi  ricct  nor  a  supine,  although  the  ancient  grammarians  men- 
tion tlie  supinesy/-e.vM//<  undfrtftsiint. 

Rnn.  (5.  Feiiere.  with  the  anterlassiral  collateral  form /«T(?^rg.  forms  the  per fect/^rri 
or  ferbui,  the  foimer  being  anteclassical  and  postclassical. 

Tifiti.  7.  Vertere  forms  the  depon<-nt  compotmds  rererti  (to  return),  direrii  (to  take 
lodi^inirs)  and  pnrrerti  (to  anticipatci.  which  have  perfect  systems  with  active  forms  (re- 
V')'/i,  direi'ti.  prarerti.  not  fereisit.f  .si/m  etc.).  Ihit  rerer.sUf.' diverf//fi.  pixtversus  are  used 
as  PEi'oNKNT  participles  with  activk  si<riiitieation  (haviiiL'  returned  etc.). 

Rem.  8.  The  participle /)?a//^«.v  of  ;>m/<(A"/e- has  pei-onent  significaiion  (one  that  has 
breakfasted). 

IT).  Of  tiiose  verbs  whicii  drop  one  of  the  two  consonants,  which 
always  is  tin-  tirsl  of  the  two  (generally  an  m  or  n),  (m\\  f range  re,  fu  tide  re^ 
Unquere,  rumpere,  and  vlncere  lengtheii  their  vowels  without  reduplicatioii. 
All  the  others  iieduplic.\tk  with  short  stem-vowels. 


In 


3G8 


RADICAL  CLASS. 


Jiem.  1.  The  lengthening  vorbs  form  the  following?  perfects»  and  supines: 
frmqere  fr^'ji  fmdnm. 

fnwUre,  jTidi  Jusum. 

lin(/utre  nqni  Itcfum. 

tvi'nfm-e  rupi  ruptum. 

vincere  rid  iidum.  ^    ,.   ,  . 

Franqere  at  the  .ame  time  chan-es  Its  .tern-vowel  a  into  ^.    Ttj  f"':"^';""^//,!;'/?^^ 
afreoil)  do  not  retain  their  own  vowel-chaniro.  but  as.uin.'  timt  ol  \»'''  '   «^»''V  rT'*^ 
^fjlji-i'ij'ractinn.     The  suimne.  are  tor.ued  acco.d.n-  to  the  -eneral  rule  No.  9,  K  7. 
Jt^m    2    The  following  verbs  of  this  category  reduplicate :  ,     .  ,  . 

ice'Uen)  (renVi)  (o«/^Mm)  (only  in  compounds). 

diKCcre  (ihfiri  - 

nndere  fuli  rin«t.  of //tJi)  fi^suvi 

^uiiuqere  (pacisd)         j)e/''i'/i  paiiu/n. 

ptUere  pepidi  pulmm. 

p„nqere  P>'P>'qi        ,      .  .  ,.,         PV^cOun. 

sciridere  fc'idi  (.anted,  scicidt)         sn^sum. 

n.<tere  sVili  ^Uihnn. 

tanaere  tefiqi  ^^"'HLV^ 

U^r'r^  smirdiiXn^i.oUetuli)        suhUltum 

tundere  tut  Mi  tunsum  or  tuf'um. 

Bern.  3.  The  componndP  of  these  verbs»  drop  the  reduplication,  except  discere  and  sis- 
tere.  at» :  repuli,  atllqi ;  but  edidin.  cotu<titi. 

n^m  4  Cdlere  (the  Greek  KhXXtiv)  a?  a  Pimple  verb  occurs  only  in  the  pai-ticiple, 
wldch  ht  \\Xxmlum^  and  is  used  U  an  adjkctivk  o.dy.  It  mu>t  he  cot.sulere.l  as 
r-duiV  oit in.'verl..  its  stciu-svll.ihl,.  bein- shortened  in  the  perfect  ..I  ;>^A-.//^r^-;^r. 
?M_Cc,  .-'^a;?.  The  compounds  iwhclhre.  txccUere  and  pra^relhjr  are  \vith.)Ut  a  per- 
fect «v^tem  •  but  ej-cdUre  tonus  the  participle  .jr./.v«x.  witli  un  adjective  meaniu-.  A 
p.Tf.;ct  ^elS  tioiiih    acknowledged   by   Pri.cian,   occur,   only   m   one   passage  of 

'nem  5  Tlie  perfect  of  findere,  both  of  the  simple  verb  and  the  comi>ound  diffindere, 
i8  ex treme  V  ra?e  Priscian,  whl,  acknou  k-d.-es  the  perfect  ./,V/i,  reu.arks  thai  M,ine 
forS  aiHTfectisi.  Tliat.ftm/^/-^  must  be  placed  among  iho.e  verbs,  which  originally 
reduplicated,  is  evident  Ironi  it>  short  stem-vowel. 

Bern  6  Panqere  with  an  antedassieal  collateral  from  paq^jre,  in  the  stMPT.E  verb  re-u- 
Inr  vTviri/S -%<-/////^  It  als.)  has pujui  - p<uuhun  lafter  the  ^;cto)  lu  anteelas^- 
cal  a  e^ua^/e  ins  '^^^  of  re.iuplicatini.  panqere  suineiimes  (once  m  '  '^/."^  f '"VfJ'; 
nerfect'^'vslem  like  the  verbs  of  th  lit'd  rMi"^»ry  ip?qi- pfir(um),  auA  this  is  awayg 
?he  case  in  Ihe  compounds  i,n pinqe re  \xud  co,.jn.gere,  while  the  rare  compounds  d.pau- 
aere  and  repanqere  do  not  form  a  perfect. 

Of  vagere  (which  also  was  written  parere-Leg.  XII  Tab.  in  Gelllusl,  20, 1)  the  incep- 
tive deponent  jxicUci  (part,  padu--')  is  formed. 

Hem  7  SMere  (stem  st-)  is  derived  from  stare  with  a  reduplication  in  the  pkesknt  sys- 

tem.  like  bibere  (st.  be)  and  gignere  (st.  gen),  analogous  to  the  Greek  i6ry}l.u  unM.  oi 

6idrr;ui,  st.  dra).    The  pert.rt  sfifi  dike  bibi)  retains  its  puksknt  '•<';l"l>>'C«t'<>'!' ^»^' 

fng  the  second  cc.nsonant  of  the  sten.  over  iiuo  the  ••-^l'W>>'^-^V.'' whU  u  i'u  Vhe  sui,ine 
trtmely  rare  in  the  simple  verb,  but  frequent  in  the  compounds,  which  m  thu  supine 

clian"e  a  into  'i  {dtsUtere  —  dtditi  —  deafilum).  _  _ 

Ji^m    K    The  verb  tdlere    instead  of   its  original  iierfect  tetnli  and  supine  /rt/?/m, 

talf'i  iic  per  ict-sv<tem o^^      c  ,iii)..und  .ubfoUePe^mAl-.ohmtnm^,  wli-ch  is  not  used 

h^  tVe  P  ese  .^s^■^^^  '«'nn  tetm.  which  in  anieclassic  lan^M.aj^e  '-  freq.|c>..  ly 

onnd    li;s;;Vis  pVetix  te  ^tnli^.  a.ui  with  its  supine  ^^""^i^^o.rowe.l  "y.)^;;^^^")  J.^',^    ^ 

?r^hjfi;Mnp;S.dsofy.;TJfor.n  their  perf^-ctsHud^ 

nn(]  Idfum    chan-'ln"  tiieir  prepositions  according  to  the  l•ule^  Ai)p.   N  .  (<{  '.r<  rre      "     ' "  •■ 

-af^aulm,  irff-tr?e  --  atiuli  -  dilatum.  cfferre  -  exttdi  - Udtum.  tnjeire  -  tntiUt  -  tUaOon, 

^'^/t/*   0    The  perfect  fntmli  from  fmidere  is  not  found  in  the-  Latin  «"^^"'■''.r,^^^"^!;."^ 
i«  aeknowl  •    'e<l  by   the  ancient    grammarians.     These  als.»  acknow  e.i-e    the  }>yrf*  its 
L^si  uuW  .   ."     n  theco.npou.Hls  tTie  perlec.  fudl  is  beyond  ^«''V'- '^'^^^^-' l.^j!;':'»^':  "J^! 
c^nhldi     The  supines  tuJum  and  /usum  both  occur  in  the  simple  verb  ;  but  m  the  torn 
pounds  tusu/n  has  better  authority  (contugu/n). 


APPENDIX  VI. 


369 


3)  Ve?'bs  with  long  stem-vowels. 

tn^,L"^sv/^-^*"  n7l'?  '''^^^'  ^""r^  ste"^-v^>wels  iti  consonant-stems  belong 
to  tlie  ti-da-^t.^*  ()t  those  verbs,  that  have  a  fully  authenticated  Deiteet- 
svstetn,  only  the  diphth<in-ic  stems  c^.de,'e,  limrere  and  haurire  belon<r  to 
the  K.^DiCAL  class.  All  other  verbs  of  this  kind  either  belon-  to  tlfe  5- 
cUiss  or,  m  .i?ood  i)ro.se,  t.,rm  no  perfects,  or  no  present-system.  Of  the 
verbs  with  diphthon-ic  stems  a,d^re  reduplicates,  bein-  the  only  redupli- 
catin.nr  verb  which  retams  a  Ion-  stem-vowel  {c<Edere~ cecUi— cmm ni\ 
Jlerere  makes  /am  —hmmm,  and  /laurlre,  hausi—haustum.  In  both  per- 
lycts  the  .y  IS  radiml,  being  the  original  characteristic  in  the  present-system 

«     .  ..,.L       *  -^?-''  "^■''^>'"''  '^"^  ^"^  "'  "  Pii-^s  'i:e  ot  Eunius.  quoted  bv  Prise  -m   vv  lo 

al>«»  acknowled"'es   the   nerfecf  atrl/iiri      'Pi.,,  t.wi.?..,.»    ..- i-        •  m'«"o^'^i  o.y  rnscian,  wno 

« e!;^;;^tf .,  - 

^id.'re  existed  or  n<.t.  The  compounds  b..rrow  the  pe.-fect-svstem  of  sed^re  as  (i:/^;!.^^ 
-nm^p.lt  -co,i.e.-<><um.  A  perfect  vl^i  of  tw,v,  althoiu^h  aile-ed  i.  he -SmLiri  doef 
not  occur.     Tne  sup.ne  rls//,/i  is  borrowed  Irom  the  verb  vuwt  «r^iiiniars,  does 

^^m.  3.  The  perfect-verb  ccepi  must  be  considered  as  l)elon<Mn-  to  the  verbs  of  tb^ 

s.e.n-vowels  u>d,o  -  od,  re  -  odi  -o.<„m),  Jmt  its  p.•esent-sv^"tem  occurs  on  I  v   n  t  le  .^up 

V.  S-Class. 
17.  The  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  take  the  active  sign  s  which  is 
added  lo  the  consonant-stem  of  the  verb  without  any  chan<''e  of  its  stem- 
yowel,  as  cavpere  —  earp-^i^  manere  —  man-si.  The  PASsrvE^sign  generallv 
IS  t  {c^rpere-~carp-tum)  ;  liut  it  \^  s  :  1)  If  the  characteristic  is  rfr^;;;?^./ (see 
iNo.  9,  K.  1),  as  plandere  —  plaxsi  —  plausum,  Jiectere  —  Jkxi  —  llexum. 
merriere—mersi--mj'rsum,uti~usus;  2)  in  the  verbs  manere  imansi  — 
mansum),  figere  {Jin  — ./?>«;;i),  and  the  deponent  labi  (lapms) 

^«f.T.n^;7^'i^^^M''■■'^^*"''^l''''  •'"  •'''^r''-^  "''^'^^  ^-^'^*'^  «»•'■  ^nlyectto  the  foUowinff  euphoni. 

sfTh    K'.;il?J'^.''''"''''^^r'"''l'^  *.'"  ^^""-^^^  *"^"  P'  ««  sc'V^-e- script -mipt.m: 
:l  «!     ^^->»'  T'-'^^^'  <7,  r/?/  and  qu)  either  coalesce  with  the  active  and  passive  si>rns  i„to  T 
ireqere  -  rexi  dtcere  -  din.  figere  -ffxi  -flnon,  dinquere  -  .tmxi.  coquire-mvi)  or  \i 
p.y.;edcu    by  /  or  r.  are  dropped  (>nerq.re-vi,r.i -Lrsum.  torqn^-i-tird  fi^^^^^^^^^ 
Jiilsj).   U   g,nxni\  qn  beL.re  ihe  passive  sign  t  are  changed  into  c,  L  reqPre-  ectun   tiri- 

?htnr  ^''^'^'^'^''-^r'/^'^-r^^T-     -^^^''^  T-Mtrx^s^re   dropped\^^  the  perfelft  system 
h  ■  precedi ng  v,,wel  being  lengthened,  as  dimd^re  -  dim4  -  divUim.    ll  the  fohowi  - 
\y^rh>  ihii  ^\irn  s  \H  doubled  m-tead  of  lenirthening  the  previous  vowel  :  ^"""»'n„ 

\^<Mhom^l^(^!''-'  ^"^  '^'  ^''^^'''  ^'  ""  exception  to  this  rule,  since  it  is  coi^ 


370 


S- CLASS. 


quarere 

jyercutere 

ciders 

tni/fere 

jmti 

j'af?n 

drfetinci 


pfrcussi 
cexH 


yX.7'<'W*>'MWl. 

defensus. 


queri  -  que^itus) ;  5)  The  liquiu  n  uc.  jirtum. 

finoere                            ^    '^  pht'ini. 

pin'iere                           ^!  f^ri  i^trutum. 

Wm'jeve                        ^^'^  nactti^  (ornanctus). 

nancv^ci  .     .   ^e  ™?,.,/o  or  jnessux).  <>)  I»  jnh^re 

tj;ii';j'^';:ii'i:;rr;;pi»«V- ,.,,, ,  ,„  „„.  po^eot. 


*j;'\;;"rr,;r"   .^'«&  "-•  -'..  •.  ,      ,„„,, ,  „,d  four  oomp..und,  of  emer>: 

"^  In  tho«'  vciWs  tlw  cli.iiau.  ri.        j  .^..j,  n,.,j„nly  Ot 

18   Tl.c  followins  vorbs  <■'>"«'''"''' ','^,^,7  f'tniu,   ooniu-ati.>n,  as  lUr  U3 
tl,    v-rbs  ^vill.  >u'rF.ci.-UiACTKKisT  cs  o     1  c    nm  .,-   ,;      „„,y  „,e 

t    .7.\o  i."l  boLm-  to  Ibe  .-.ubca   <;  •->;'<';'  ,,,^^  ;,i,,,„,  ,,repere  ;  2Ml..>se 
v,.,l-s  of  lb,.  sKCOsn  an,\     oti  u    00^^;^       ^^,^^  ,5  ,4,  ,,,.,cl.  ca.uiol  be 
du>sitic.a.  of  ,he  sc.oo,ul.  tb»a,  and   '      '  J^  '^    '  ,,,„„,„„  ,„  the  class  with 
„>m"  din'u-n.tU-,  .,r  Mie  ,lnrd  conjutfUU,» .  ^_,^,,„^_ 

samere  ^'^^  373.  /,^cY^/m  (/rixum,  rare). 

b)  WITH  K-MUTE  BTEM.//7f7'  r.  U^^f?J'  '^  P'  '^'     -"i-mV./m. 


co(i  n*  re 

trahfre  (>*t.  Irag) 
virere  (st.  rif7>    ^ 
filruere  (i»t.  fi^ruj?) 

e)  WITH  T-MUTE  STEMS  rja;/;/^r^ 

quiVere 
iniltfre 
Jfecfere     ■ 
■n'lfi 
p'lti 
uti 


duxi 

coxi 

traH 

vixi 

cfa'/fd 
jflexi 


(R.  10). 


J.,  net  u  III. 
fiiti/iii. 
'ti/irtmn. 
ducluvi. 

ttat'hiM  i^nanctus), 
coct'iin. 
tiwiuni. 
vict  II  in- 
struct urn. 
fparnnTn. 

ClautfllTTl. 

dirl<um. 
qiKV-xiiin. 

jfleruin. 

7/ !;{">'. 
t/.s?//<. 


uti  r.1  ;?  into  1  bat  form  thoir  per- 

Ji^m.  1.  The  compm,nd.  of  W^^^l^i^^Jii'lTrfi^^^^l^ 


APPENDIX   YI. 


371 


with  tho  propo^itioiipp^r  and  ffub  dropx  the  stem-vowel  {perqere.  fturgere.,  and  the  incep- 
tive deponent  e.rp^rrji^ci).  lu  the  perfect-syjftem  ihuse  cu'mpuunds  resume  the  stem- 
vowul  of  tlie  simple  verb: 


perirere 
exper;,'ifici 


perrexi 


perrectnm. 
expei  rectus, 
surrectum. 


puirexi 

Similarly  the  componrhd^j  oHarere  and  aper^re.  ;  see  p.  3S0  and  385. 

Rt^in.  3.  Stiiiquere  a.«  a  mimjjle  verb  is  obsolete,  but  it  forms  the  compounds  exstingnere 
{ers(inxi  —  ex^tinctuin),aud  the  participle  institictus.  The  compound  dintinguere  must 
be  derived  Irom  the  verb  tiiignere. 

Rem.  4.  Fur  the  compounds  of  legere  which  belonc:  to  the  S-class,  see  No.  1!,  R.  17. 

Ji'^m.  5.  Tile  compounds  of  pun/fere  (No.  15.  \\.  2»  likewise  helont^  to  the  S-class  (com- 
puitH  —  coinpiincfutn).  'I'hus  p<ingtie  and  parctve  form  tlie  anteclassical  perfects,  panxi 
and  p<trsi,  see  No.  14,  U.  3,  and  No.  15,  R.  G. 

Jie>n.  6.  Spargere  in  its  compounds  chan^jes  the  stem-vowel  a  into  e,  which  is  retained 
in  the  perfect-system  {conxpergere  —  conxpend  — coiuyyersum). 

/i'ln.  7.  Angere  (anxi)  and  idngere  {niiixi)  lack  the  supines.  Vergere  and  the  deponent 
ringi  lack  the  perfect-system. 

Hem.  8.  Compounds  of  verbs  with  T-miites,  when  they  chamre  the  stem-vowel  of  the 
simple  verb,  always  retain  the  changed  vowel  in  the  perfect-sybtem,  as  : 


coiirindere  (daudere) 
alUd-n  (liedtre) 
explodtre  (plaudere) 
ciiiicaUri^  (qii<'tti=re) 
dtjVtUci  i/utisce/'t) 
ptrpeti  (jM(i) 


co»rinH 
alilfi 
exiUosi 
coficu.^si 


conclusum,. 

airisiim. 

exploxum. 

concuxxam. 

defe-ixus. 

perjyessus. 


Rem.  9.  Vridere,  a.<  a  sitnple  verb,  lacks  the  i)orfect-system,  but  its  compounds  have 
a  complete  conjugation  {ecddere  —  evdni  —  evdsuin). 

Rem.  10.  The  perfect-system  of  the  semideponent /7c^(»;'g  (perf . /T-«/.<f  ^/w)  is  poetical 
and  rare,  but  that  (>f  th(Monip()unds  is  Ireijuent  an(l  classical  (a»/?/i.s'k<f.  rff/fI,s^A«).  Livyonce 
uses  the  p  rtect  coiijidiruiit  (44,  3).  (^u  'itere.  as  a  simple  verb,  forms  tlie'siTPi.VE  qudsxnm. 
without  havinira  perlect.  Uut  the  compounds  have  a  complete  perfect-system  {concutere 
—  anicusiti  ~  coiirii.t.onin.  'I'lie  stem ////  is  found  in  the.  inceptive /a/i.sY'er^  (to  tire)  and 
its  deponent  comp'Hind  rtifVtisri  (to  i;row  tired).  Hotli  are  ante-  anil  post-classical  in  the 
present->y-te'n.  but  in  the  |)erfect -system  the  p.irtici pies  of  both  \crbs  {feas^un  and defessus. 
with  tlie  adjective  nieaniiiir /i/y-t/)  are  fre(iuenl  and  classical. 

Ri*!/!.  1 1.  MH  forms  the  irrei^iilar  participle  niri/f  besides  the  regular  nwis.    The  ante 
classieal  inceptive  r>';7'</'///v<7-r*'  (of  unknown  derivation)  forms  the  perA-ct o^7?/e.ri. — The 
perteets  of  iwcft/e  jiiid  pecfere.,  which  are  said  to  t)e  neri  or  nexai,  and  pexi,  pex'ii  or 
y>^r/7ri.  rest  merely  on  the  vouchers  of  ancient  ^nammariaus.    But  the  supines  nexum 
and  itexuin  have  {rood  authority. 

Rtui.  12.  Tlie  intinitive  plectere  belongs  to  two  different  roots,  taken  from  the  Greek  : 
1)  plectere  {tcXehgd)  — plexi  — plexmn.  to  braid,  which  is  extremely  rare  as  a  simplk  verb, 
but  who-e  deponent  coini)ounds  a//i/)/rc/i  aud  complect i  {Uy  embrace)  with  the  participle 
—plenitt,  are  very  fre(iuent  ;  i)  plicteie  {7t\.}/66co,  st.  itXify),  which  in  good  prose  oc 
curs  as  a  deponent  only  with  ttie  passive  signiticaliou  *  to  l)e  punished'.  Tliis  verb  lacks 
the  perfect-.syslein. 

neni.  i;i.  The  verbs  of  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  whose  characteristics  are 
K-ML'TEs  preceded  by  /  or  r,  are  the  loilowing:  algere,  J'idgere,  indalgTre.  miilclre^  mid- 
glre,  tergere,  torquhe.  tnrgere.  urgere.farclre  (eomp.  inferclre.  confercire),  fulclre,  mrclrt. 
They  ali  drop  their  characteristics  ill  the  perfect  and  supine  accordingto  Ao.  17,  R.  2. 

'I'he  verbs  alglre.  fuhjeii.  tnrgert  ami  urgert  lack  tiie  sui)ine.  The  supines  of  the  other 
verl)s,  beloiiLrinL'  to'  this  category,  take  the  passive  sign  t  according  to  No.  17,  R.  1,  ex- 
cept tmdciie.,  which  takes  «■,  as  : 


mnlclra 
(orqi/?re 
farrlre 
fidc'ire 


mvln 
torsi 
far  si 
falsi 


mvlsum. 

tortum. 
fait  inn. 
fultum. 


Arc^re  and  its  compounds  {coerc^e,  exercere)  belong  to  the  TJ-cldss. 

Rem.  14.  3)  The  following  23  single  verbs,  belonging  to  the  S-class,  have  various  charac- 
teristics: 


372 


U-CLASS. 


II.  Con  J. 


III.  CONJ. 


rV.  CoNJ. 


ardlr6 

axdtre 

ay(jere 

ftigPre  ^ 

qandere  (st.  gavia) 

J /'(be re 

lilcPre 

lu(f?re 

manere 

r'uUre 

s>/(7'l?re 

titdtre 

gerere 

'prhiieri 

urere 

qtieri 

uinic'ire 

sand  re 

sent'ire 

se/nre  {sceplre) 

Tvicire 

nuTiri 

ord'iri 


arsi 


a>/xi 
jriu'i 

jussi 

luH 

I  nan 

tnanH 

r'lui 

»uaH 

gfssi 

jtrent'i 


arsum. 

UUKUS. 

auctum. 

garlfffi. 
jtissam. 


ganj't 
een-id 
sepxi 
vinxi 


viansum. 

tturuium. 

tiiesum. 

gentian, 

])re<sum. 

v.sfion. 

quest  us. 

amict'im. 

sanctum  {sancUum). 

sensum. 

septum. 

riiictum. 

7iunsus. 

orsus. 


eral  lor.n  ausim  an^t<;"«l  '\['l;''f^^'''\-         .        „>,,,.  perf.-ct-sv^tem  of  the  pimplk  verb   i8 

?^  //    6</)     The  pcTlect  fctdui  i.  f..uiKl  in  the  latest  Latinity. 

Zl  IH  Ivcere  f..rin.  the  inceptive  compo,:nd  iltucesr.r.  -  illu.d.  which  ,8  used  ,mpe  - 
.oSy  wl^rioX  the  deponent  ccnpcund  cu^^entui  ^a^.e,....;,  and  ardtre  the  m- 
tepiive  compouud  txardtscere  ^exarsi  —  exarsum). 

VI.  U-Class. 

19  The  perfects  of  the  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  are  formed  by  the 
active  sig.l  /*,  which  is  added  to  the  unchanged  consonant-stem.  Ihe 
supine  is'' formed  by  the  passive  sign  it.  ,  ,    v  , 

«        i    T«  t».o  f<.iirmMncr  verl)H  of  the  U-class  the  PTEM  is  affected  :  gignere  (t»t.  gen\ 

«5„.,«r«  (pert.  '*''''•"''':""'"'''!"";;;„  ,  -ner  the  a.mlojv  of„mr<-  and  «rere  (.up.  f». 

'^L  ,.  The  P«»-e  «.,,  «  i.  .lropp«l  ;.-2^.^  i^Si;:^rrif°"l-S.'"'1^^« 
J  by  .ym-op...  «•'P'''''"  I;  ''"%,^.  "V^ '"'rnflWc  rn^  o  be  a  weakened  CI.  in  wh.eli 
[rffi'i  eo:;?;,"ed'rtbr.7n,:^^'«a^t'ln  ^lrH^  .n..  peuul,».  for  mst.  the  .upenatue 
eudin"  'imus  (instead  of  the  former  umus). 

oQ^The  following  verbs  constitute  the  U-class:  1)  all  verbs  of  the 
second  conjngationr  not  belonging  to  the  classes  previously  mentio..ed 
(f(mu  n  '  tl  e"oreat  majoritv  of  the  verbs  of  this  conjugation);  2)  a  j.  - 
eiv  verbs  derived  tOnr  adjectives  which  have  a  pertect  system  (R  0; 
hV  most  verbs  (Mhe  third ''conjugation  with  liqu  d  characteristics; 
4)  21  verbs  of  the^  tirst,  third,  and  fourth  conjugations  with  various 
characteristics  (R.  l«i). 


APPENDIX  VI. 


873 


Fe7n.  1.  The  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  belonging  to  this  class  form  their  perfects 
»nd  t«upine8  in  the  following  way: 


deb? re 

hdhere 

jilact're 

niervrl 

poliictri 


dehui 
hahui 
placed 


debitnm. 

habVum. 

plantum. 

m>r'itus. 

poUtcitus. 


The  following  verbs  drop  the  i  of  the  passive  f  ign 


doc?re 

docui 

docfum,. 

miiicere 

rmxcut 

inl-(tum  (mixtum). 

tenl're 

teiud 

tent  inn. 

t&rreie 

tarrui 

toxtum. 

misereri 

misertus  or  miseritus. 

Pern.  2.  The  following  verbs  of  the  second  conjuiration  belonffinjr  to  this  class  are  with- 
out supines:  arce?e  (perf.  ornn).  crd/ere.  caudTre.  er/T-re.  emunre.ffyteie.  frofidere.  horrere 
laiif/uere,  latere.  madZre.  nWre,  olere.  paUtre,  pa'tre,  riqere,  rubere.sUere,  sorbert,  so7dere\ 
splendtrt,  ntudTre,  stupire,  tiimre.  toriiere.  tumere^  vig^re. 

Hem.  8.  The  followini:  verbs  of  the  second  conju-ration  lack  the  whole  p'Tfect-system  • 
m?re,  calve  re,  caul  re,  flacclre,, Ha  rere.  fittere.  he'iere,  fnunere.  immiture,  livere,  vmr'ere'. 
polUre.  rehidere.  scatere,  squalire,  reger^,  t/iederi.  — Tin-  \erh  solere,  as  seraidepouent, 
lacks  the  first  cardinal  lorin.    Its  comijouiid  a^ittolere  has  no  perfect  system. 

/.Vw.  4.  The  following'  ctmipoiinds  of  fenere :  detinere.  dMinerp  and  j-etinlre  retain  in 
the  perfect  their  chanired  vowel  'i  {del'mui,  etc.),  but  t^ke  the  supine  of  the  simple  verb 
(d-ttntum).     Tlie  other  compounds  of  tenere  (as  attitiere,  abstiim'e)  form  no  supine. 

Rem.  5.  The  compounds  dXarcere.  as  exercere  and  coercere,  form  not  only  perfects  as 
tiie  simple  verb,  but  al<o  si'imnes  (exerc'ifum,  c(xrcitum).  Of  the  simple  verb  arcereiha 
participle  arctus  is  formed  with  tlje  tignitication  of  an  au.tective  (narrow). 

netn.fi.  Cevsere  makes  censui  —  cen-wm.  The  supine  cenx'it'nn  has  no  sufficient  au- 
thority (only  the  uu)numentuin  AncvrSnum.  and  a  pas-age  in  Suetonius);  much  less  au- 
thoniy  has  the  supine  c«//,«?^Mm.  whidi  occurs  in  a  solitarv  (and  quoted)  passage  of  Clau- 
dumus,  and  not  of  the  verb  cen-^Pre,  but  of  its  compound  recen^ere.  The  supine  (cenmm) 
occurs  only  in  the  form  of  the  participle  cenffux  in  the  passive  tenses,  when  censere  in 
usfd  as  a  transitive  verb  with  the  in<-anini;  *  to  assess  in  the  census'.  (Jtmen  is  also  used 
as  a  TRAN-^iTivE  DEPONENT  ill  the  meanuiir '  to  profess  one's  propertvat  the  taking  of  the 
census',  as  in  Cic.  Flacc.  32  (.'<ervo>i  or  peciiniam  refisu-<i  e.'<.  tliou  hast  professed  in  the  cen- 
sus such  a  number  of  slaves,  or  such  an  aiionnt  of  money).  The  irie-iilar  supine  cen- 
sum  (instead  ol  re n.'i'ifu w)  is  explained  by  the  original  form"  and  the  derivation  oi  cen^ere 
Our  <rramniarians  and  lexicograpliers  are  in  great  doubt  al)out  the  derivation  of  this 
word,  soine  relerrinir  it  to  the  Sanscrit  root  sa^.  and  some  Identifving  it  with  jiendere. 
i  lie  original  form  of  this  verb  evidently  was  centere  or  ceolere.  which  was  reimlarly  con- 
jugated ceiisi  —  c^usum.  Servius  Tiillius  was  the  first  who  introduced  the  ceirsus  ;  hence 
the  word  could  hardly  have  existed  before  his  liuie,  its  <,riirinal  meaning  being  unques- 
tioiKihly  connected  with  the  teiisus.  For  the  purpose  of  the  new  instiintion.  he  divided 
the  whole  people  ink)  'centuri<M\  consisiin-rof  a  hundred  (centum)  members  each.  From 
this  must  havespruiiir  the  expression  ^  centlre  populuni'  (to  hundred'  the  people).  From 
the  rc'.'ular  supine  of  this  new  verb  (m^..vww)  the  noun  ctmus\\\\(\  the  verb  c.^/m?;v-  were 
di-nvi'd,  the  latter  of  which  kept  its  original  supine  (as  for  instance  tlfere  keeps  the  su- 
pine r«.NV////()f  its  primitive  rhRre).  'i'his  derivation,  which  is  extremely  probable  in  it- 
sell,  is  eontirmed  by  the  form  ot  the  sui>ine  c^/*wwi,  wliich  cannot  be  explained  in  any 
other  way  but  by  assuming  that  a  T-muie  was  dropped  before  the  s. 

The  compounds  of  centere  are  percemZre  (lackin^j:  the  supine);  recensere  (not  in 
C  ic.and  Cas.).  the  supine  of  which  has  as  «rood  as  no  authority  (see  above)  ;  and  sue 
r<'/*.v<-/¥.  which  has  the  same  supine  as  cemere  (succenmm)  and  as  succendere.  and  hence 
cannot  be  distin<:uislied  from  the  latter  verb  in  the  supine.  Perhaps  surcensere  has  noth 
ing  to  do  with  cemT-re.  but  is  a  corruption  from  yuccendere.  its  meanini:  (to  be  inflamed 
y  II  1  an-en  pointing  nitiier  to  the  root  ceml  than  to  ceusere.  Succendere  would  then  be 
in  the  same  relation  to  succemlre  (.mc^-endlre)  h^pendere  to  pendere;  jacere  to  jacere. 

Jier/i."!.  The  following  inchontives  derived  from  adjectives  behmg  to  this  class: 
crtbrescere  (with  its  compounds  iiia-ef/resrere  and  peraebresce-e  (perf.  trebrui),  durescere 
\Mtii  Its  compound  ofjdurescere  (perf.  obdurui),  evan^scere.,  innotescere.  mxicrescere.,ma- 
lurescere,  nigiesceie,  obmutescere,  obsurdescere,  recrudescere,  vilescere,  evUescere. 


ce 


374 


U-CLASS. 


Nono  of  those  form  a  s.rxxB.    The  other  inceptives,  derived  from  a.lj.ctivcs.  lack  the 

^^^;^is:;j:::;i.aHan..rue......i^^^ 

v..rh  ruhTre.  t ho  root  of  uh,ch  ^«  ^•;:^'    .^'  '^^: 't\;\^,u  al  u'v  ot  ^rvmc.r.  (^y^O,  viacre^eere 

and  nw  noun  ^•"*'';-;.7, ;  fj;;;:^' ;  die  ulc  ly  i  favor  of  c,r6,-..c.r.. 

(macer)  and  tugtescereiuKjH)  \^  decuituiy  im  .a  rh-irartcristics.  helonijhm  to 

The  n.,ow1.,^:r2so  verh.  ^ro.^r^^J^^^  [-fi/Sr^/I^^^^/J^^;^ 
t„r  th,.  f,.nn  s«  (i"st.  of  »n).    1  l.i- 1  rM  -  "-'Wi.  ;«  ■»  «-^  J,  ^,  „„.  ^^^,,,,,, 


;srViVi.c'c„^;;;«  ia,;,„„;o;-;uu,  u;  00.«^.™.«-  .>wi"i;;:y____^^_,_,,  ,„„,„»,.„«.  .we 


/,^ Jr.,  rnnv/...  secare.  sorulre,  '^^:;^:^^^'Xi-'n^^^^^         '^^'  '"^'-  -^  oritur),  and 

?rr,^<f"s;':c',an;!'  ;i,'r,iL;;s7rJ";J;[";'[he  '^:^  ...„rou.h,y  c.xha,.,c.a.,  i- 

classical. 


.h..^;;;;;?;;::S;'Sn^'rf,?i:^x,in^  Ki;;;^i;r ;  .,:^.  Ao...er  occu«  ou,y  ■..  .o.„c  d. 


ArrENDIX  VI. 


375 


J?^.  17.  A  perfect  of  the  Pimple  verh  sapere  is  not  fonnd  in  claspical  lanmia^re     In 
anlc-(ia88ical  authors  we  mostly  find  the  vowel-perfect  w/.Td   (w;?w^€)    bnt  ace  ,rd^^^ 
ly.sc  an  w/m  also  was  fornuMl.    Of  the  con.po.iu.l  re^^^ipere  Cic  to  fot'in.  t  le  ncM-fect  ^^-^^ 
/>/r/._biit  in  the  <,ther  ,,assages  M'here  the  word  i.  found,  the  reX "^  yaries  betw^^^^^^ 
rti^jni  {resipiri)  and  renpui.  ^^^num^  vanes  oetween 

l^lwart-imphcafuvK  with  e(,nal  authority.  Of  api^icare  and  «pWrVCiVeroiUes  thl 
vowel-fonns  (,a./>/tr</i'._^^rfie,7/*/;/^);  Out  the  consonant  formf(xfTcvi-eLH^fu^^^^^^ 
a  >o  are  snstained  by  jr„od  authority.  Of  cofnplicare  and  r^^>/^ca>/  he  perS  svsa  n 
rarely  occurs,  and  hardly  bofore  tlie  silver  a-e.     See  p.  3(il,  R.  3  perieci  sysitm 

Hem.  19.  Of  the  verbs  mentioned  Rem.  1.3.  the  following  form  their  Puoinos  with  tho 
passive  sip  Mnstead  of  it:  /Hrnre  (sup.  Mctuw),  secare  isectmm'en^relmt^^^^^^  t  e 
compounds  of  parere  (.apertum  etc.),  oriri  {ortus):rapere  (raptum)  y^ritctum),  the 

a^^e^^Z^^^^^t:^"''''"'  ^"'"^  the  perfect  n;;».i  and  the  supine  r.,, to,  aa 

Jiem.  21  Of  7»elere  Cato  according  to  Priscian  used  the  perfect  meomi  which  is  twice 
fo.n.i  ,n  .Nhunertiu.  G,ai.  Act.  c.  t>2.  The  perfect  of  meterh^  -enerallf  cipre«^t  bv  tho 
phrase  m.^...m.Ad  Tho  perf.  ^/.r///i  of  ^/eWer^  rests  on  the  testimonyot^Priscian  ^nd 
on  the  coxupound  desterlui,  which  once  occurs  in  Persius.  riscian,  ana 

ALPHABETICAL   LIST  OF  THE   CARDINAL   FORMS   OF   THE 

PERFECT-SYSTEM. 

.  {^Compounds  are  not  jriven  in  alphabetical  order,  except  if  the  simple  verb  is  not 
Ti.r,!:^."/"""  "'  "."  ^■V'"l'"""^'.  V*»»!'!  "«"  «"^ily  '>e  lound  by  moans  of  the^  sit^ple  form 
lie  >st  forms  after  the  infinitives  are  the  prestaits :  the  secnd  forms  are  the  perfect* 
a.,d  the  thud  forms  the  supines.  Of  cieponents.  in  place  ()f  the  perfects  and  sup  fer^^^^^^^^ 
porect  participles  are  ^nven.  Wherever  a  blank  line  is  found  in  the  regular  place  of  a 
..;;  l!*""'v  '"'"^"^  "'■■''  "'r"^  lormsdo  not  occur.  Forms  in  brackets  hSve  no  suthciont 
hor  ty  torn..  ,n  parentheses  have  less  authority  than  the  preceding  <.nos  with.M.t  a 
h  .  ff  r;  nV  r  ""  '•^•f^-'-^'"^'<;^<i''"ote  the  pa-es  and  numbers  of  the  observations  where 
the  diflorent  forms  are  explained.  «ucie 

AMerf,   abdo,  jibdtdl,  abdttum,  sec  nlr/ere,  al^reo,  aisi,  — ,  p.  371   R.  13 


d(fre. 
uholere   {ahtlcHcere),   aboleo,    abolCvi 

(abolui),  abolttum,  p.  3()3,  7;  'm\,Amicire,    'aniicio      fumicui,     amixi], 
^>  ^-  amir.tiim    379 


nlDcere,  ulltcio,  allexi,  allectum.  p. 
3G9,  17,  R.  2. 


^'  ^-  I     amictum,  37^, 

ahsrouderc,  abscondo.  ab.scondi  [ah-amplecti,    anii)lector,    amplexus     p 

scoudldi),  abscouditum,  p.  3Gr),  R.      371,  R.  12.  ' 

'^•„  .  nngere,  aiigo  [anxi],  — ,  p.  371,  R.  7. 

«nj(7V,acuo,  acui,  acutum,  p.  3Gl,G,^p6^ri/'<?,  apcrio,  aperui,  apertum,  p. 

•>•„  I     3Go,  R.  9.  1-  >  F 

addere,   addo,   addTdi,   addltum,    p.api.sci,   apiscor,   aptus,  p.  3G6,  R.  19. 

3G.),  R.  7 ;  .see  du>-e.  I     Coiiip.  adipisci,  adipiscor,  a'deptus! 

(iaoWre,^  adoleo,    adolevi,   adultiini,V/mV^,  arceo,  arcui  [arctuin,  artum], 

p.  3G7,  7.  j     p.  373,  R.  2.     Comp.  exercere,  ex- 

(uiulPHcere,^  adolesco,    adolCvi,   adul-     erceo,  exercui,  exercitiim,  etc. 
.  ij"»,  p.  3G2,  7.  arceHsere,  arcesso,  arcesslvi',  arcessl- 

((g<'r(\  ^iro,  e<ri,  actum,  p.  365,  R.  11.      turn,  p.  3G1.  G,  3. 

Compounds  :  abigere,'A\)\<^ct,  abCi,n,  nrdere,  ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  p.  372. 

abactum,  etc. — Amblyere  forms  110  arere,  aruo,  — ,  — ,  p.    373,  R.  3. 

perlect-.s\'stem.  drescere,  aresco,  — ,  — .    Compoiuid  ; 


e^rarexcere,  exaresco,  exarui,  — . 


-,  ajo(ait)—  p.  242,  11.  ,  .___,,_,..„ 

J.'^\  '?]^'   ^^"^'   ^^^^"^   (airtum),    \:>.arguere,  arguo,  ar<'ui    fari^u 
3'4,  R.  9.  I     361,6,5. 


lunij, 


P- 


rivaiive  words  iimuUare.dtsultonus  etc.). 


376 


APPENDIX  VI. 


LIST   OF  PERFECTS  AND   SUPINES. 


377 


,v  1    oni    siicconsnm  (but  see  p.  373,  R. 

asrnidere,  see  scandere.  ]    s^i,  ^^^^^  ^    ^  recensere  lack 

a.rf.|r.,  audeo,  ausus  sum;  p.  249,,     0).^  ^^^^^^isitum    (in    late 

a.|;r^.%ugeo,auxi,auclum;p.372.^J  ^^^^.^   ^^.^^^^^^   ^^^^^.^ 

6a^^^-(battuere),  batuo,  batui,  -yjf^^^^^^^ln;  p.  301,0.3. 
p.  361.0,  o.  7?  4  5-nl  Comp.:^''''-<''^^^'ci'>('''^'*'*^y'^^^'^'?^' 
30.),  i^.  11.      ^  _.    oAi       ^nnri,-i'o.nnc\eolrnrii\yconcio),C(m' 


blbl 

rAdere,  ciido,  c5ci(li,  cSsum  ;  p.  304, 
/e  4  Compomuls:  decidi're,  docldo, 
^](»(.Y^]i^__;  (?ccl(^tVe,  occldo,  occldi, 

occclsum. 
c<e(ZtVd,  cfedo,  cecldi,  cfesnm      Com 


'c<;/<r</r,  coiicieo  (rarely  concio),  con- 
civi,  concltum  (Lucr.  2,  207);  see 

p.  362,  13. 

cinqh-e,  cm<40,cmxi,  cmctum ;  p.  dOJ, 

17,  R.  "" 


the   reduplicatmn:    oce^do     >^cl^'' ^'^'^'j^'^^'^^')/ o/   Comp. :  amdwiere 
occIsu,n,  p.  309,  No.  1^,R  ^-  ^'^^^J^^  conclasum) ;  p.  371, 

cdlere,  caleo,  calm,  — ;  p.  3 < 3   K.  -.        t ic.  ^c 

ca^/^rd,  calleo,  callui,  - ;  P-  ^ ' '^' ^^' ^^ /^^,;    elepo,   clepsi.   cleptum  ;   p. 

»a„,i,V«,  only  in  compoumU  ^^''^^'''''^'^^jj  "^  IJo.r-'-tn'relv  rf«?/A 
clia,>t;e  a  into  e  :  tncendere.mcxu-     /^  »""'-j.^     ,.„  ,,  (  nelj-ius.  inclitus) 

-^ie. ...     Inceptive  :  <..*.e.1r.,  can,     Ms..  -  cU>MC,d  .t>  le.___^^  _    ^   „^^_ 
«<i«a"ri.t"o  -."^  ;  p.  ".73.  /J.  3.     1     li.  n.     .lc.«i.>.,   ».«)ZeV.,  without 

""fi  ^:;ni:;!:;!;r:;;s^^n:e«;;r'^<Bpio  (..u.d.,  -pi.  c»p. 

rTno    concluui,  -,  p.  30r),  R.  8.  turn  ;  p.  309,  R.  3. 


ie   11      Comp.:   ampere,   accTpio, cM^;^/-.,    0050,    cop^^i     coactum,    see 
ucclpi,  .uT.ptum,  ,).  305,  R  12.  «r/^r.,  and  p.  30.,,  /e.  12. ^  ^ 


(w;)r.ysr'r<3,  capesso,  capesslvi,  — ;  p 

301,  0,  3.  .  *  ,. 

carpere,  carpo,  carpsi,  carptum  ;   p 

309. 17.  Comp.:  decerpere,  decerpsi, 

decerptum. 
cdcere,  caveo,  cSvi,  cautum ;  p.  36.J, 

R  11 
c^rf;^/r.   cCdo,  cessi,  cessum;   p.  370, 

17,  H.  2 


comere,    cOmo,    compsi,    comptum ; 

see  emere,  p.  3(»0.  R.  10. 
commiiiisci,  comiiiiniscor,   commen- 

tiis  ;  see  mcmim. 
comperlre,  comprMio,  comperi,  cv^ra- 

pertum  ;  p.  305,  R.  9  ;  see  parere.^ 
conciipixcere,  conciipisco,  coucuplvi, 

concupilum  ;  p.  361,  0,  3 ;  see  cu- 

pPre. 


J,^V"only  in  ti.e  co,„pou,>d  ,....^U.^.  condo,  conanli.  condU.ttn  ; 

.„';"!:fc:,C"censni.  censum  ;   p.  U'l-^-p  coquo.  coxi,  coctum  ;  p.  3C9, 
a «"3,  R.  0.     So  succensere,  succen-'     17,  U.  w. 


crehrescere,  crebresco,  crebriii.  —  n 


credere,  credo,  crcdidi,  cr5ditum;  p.divldere,  d 
365,  i?.  7  ;  see  dare.  |     309   17 


2.    Compounds  retain  the  redupli- 
cjition  {edidici) ;  p.  308,  R.  3. 

divide,  divisi,  divlsum  :  p. 

"'''/^rv/'ilP'''  ^'"^i'^''  crepitimi ;  p.docere,  doceo,  docui,  doctiim;  p.  373. 
cresrh-e    cresco.    crSvi,    cretum ;   p\ddmdre,  domo,  domui,  domttum ;  p. 

^"^;fV^^"'^^^"^cubitum;p.374,UJ;-;,drico,  duxi,  ductum;  p.  369, 
11.  16.  17  R  2  »  1      "  * 

ci/^Z^^Trj'    cudo  [cadi,  cusi],  [cusum],  dw re-ic^^V^rduresco,  durui,  -  ;  p.  373 


edere  {to  eat),  ^do,  edi,  Gsum  ;  p.  364, 
No.  11  ;  ib.  No.  9,  R.  3.  The  su- 
pine is  anteclassical  and  rare ;  but 
the  participle  obesus  (of  ohedere) 
frequently  occurs,  aIthoii<rh  not  in 
classical  prose.  From  ^dere  the 
desiderative  eaurlre  (to  be  hungry), 
without  a  perfect,  is  formed. 


-cu/n/)ere,  only  in  compounds  :  pro- 
cnmbo,  procubiii,  procubltum  (tak- 
i!i,ij:  the  conjugation  of  cubdre):  p. 
372,  i^.  ].  "  * 

cupere,  c\i\no,  cujnvi,  cupltum. 
(Comp.  incept.:  concupiscere,  cou- 
ciiplvi  etc.);  p.  361,  6,  3. 

307,  No.  14  Compounds  partly  edere  (lo  give  out),  edo,  edtdi,  edl- 
keep  the  reduplication  (excucurri,  turn  ;  see  dare,  p  365  R  7 
pra3cucurri),  partly  drop  it  (accur-«V^/'^,  eireo,  egui,  —•  p  37;i  72  2 
ri,  decurri  etc.) ;  p.  307,  R.  2.  |  Cmpr:mdig%'e/mdireo  indl-ui  - 
dare  do.  dCdi.  datum,  p.  304,  R.  ^! emere]  6mo,  emi',  emptum  (emtum)* 
rHe  comp.  with  mcmosyllabics  p.  365, /^.  11.  Compounds  chan4 
take  dere  in  the  inlinitive,  dUi:^  e  into  I:  adhmre,  adlmo,  ade.ni, 
m  the  perfect,  and  ditum  m  the  ademptum  ;  p.  360,  R.  16  Irreir- 
siipine:  comUre,  condldi,  condl-  ular  compounds:  rf.^;A.^^r^, ';?;.o/;^e4 
tum:  od/ir/^/-^,  vendidi,  venditum;     sumere,  comere.  belon^^incT  to    S- 


class.     Coetnere  keeps  Ihe'i  in  the 
present  system. 


credere,  credldi,  creditum.     Poly- 
syllal)ic  compounds  follow  the  sim- 
ple verb:  circuuiddre,  c\rcumditd\,^emmere,  see  manere 
circumdatum  ;  p.  364,  R.  6 ;  p.  365,  eo,  see  Ire. 

^-  '^-  ^««^,  sum,  fni,  —  (verbal  adj.  futUr. 

see     rus);  p.  361,  6,5;  p.  362,  22. 
exercere,  see  arcere. 
expergiaci,  see  regere. 
p.  exolescere,  see  olere. 

[exuere,  exuo,  exui,  exQtum; 


dedere,  dedo,  dedidi,  dedltum  ; 

dare,  p.  365,  R.  7. 
de/endere,  see  fendere. 
delere,     dcleo,   dGlCvi,   deletum : 

301,  6,  2. 


deiiiere,  dOmo,    dempsi,  demptum ; 

^HQ  emere,  p.  360,  R.  16. 
depsere,  depso,  depsui,  depstum  ;  p. 

374,  R.Q.  '  ^ 

dtlvendere,  see  scandere. 
di'sciscere,  see  Kciscere. 
d'u'ere,  dico,  dixi,    dictum;    p.  369. 

17,  7?,  ^ 


o 


6,5. 

evdnescere,  evanesce,  evanui. 
373,  R.  7. 

fdcere,  fdcio,  feci,  factum  ;  p 

11.  For  the  change  of  the  stem- 
vowel  a  into  I,  see  p.  106,  R.  4, 
and  p.  359.  The  compounds  that 
retain  the  stem-vowel  are  conju 


p.  301, 

— ;  p. 

805,  R. 


A-j-   ^        i.,w         ,.,      .    ,.,  X.  Kvi.i    luc  sicui-vowei  are  coniu- 

iln'l'  *-"'''^^'  dilexi,  dilectum  ;  see      gated  like  the  simple  verb.   Those 

that  change  a  into  i,  make  feci. 


du 


Icqere. 


'cere,  disco,  dldlci,  — ;  p.  368,  R. 


fecium  {interjlcere,   interflcio,  in 


378 


ArrENDIX  YI. 


qp-.     72  1     conflictnm  ;  but  7)W^W  profligavi, 
prrf.    subj.  face,sens   <'^-;:^    %^^H     J^^^,,,  j^  classical   lan-ua-e:    /#> 

•^  14.    Compouna  njdlere  taU-^f^  l"^  as  Aoun  ^/Z*/x^/«  as  acljective);  p. 

feia,  ^vitlH>ut  a  supine  ;  p.  o(). ,  A-  -      as  n         , 
firlre,  tarcio,  tarsi    t^^^;;;}?,;.^^/^;^:  ^   ^/Wio    fodi,  Ibssum ;   P-  364, 

17   0.     Compounds:  co/^/t^  ctre,  '^-/^^'^,  .  -,^'7?  3.  p.  30D,  /^.  H. 

fersi,  contersum) ;  \''  ^'hJ\\.i;  oK^vPre    foveo,  fovi,   ft>tuin;  p.   364, 
uteri,  rateor.  fassus ;  p.  ^'^^  '.{^.t/'^  /'l    ;  p.  365.  7?.  H. 
Compound:     defetisci     ck-tL^iscoi, /m  ./t/^,  i".    -  '^^^s  change  a 


308  1.  1.  Compounds  change  a 
into  i,  resunfmg  in  perfect  and 
s  miue   the   vowel   of  the   snnple 

n-     v&yW^^7^/-^  intV^.i,  infractijm). 

.c.Jrenure,  tVemui,  tVemllum ;   p.  3.4, 


fdleri 

fdtiiiC      . 

Compound:     </</*  ^^ 

defessus;  p.  3.0,  1|,  U-  - 
/ard/-^   tiiveo,  tavi,  tautum  ;  p.  3bo, 

.f//t?lr6  (obsol.).     Only  iu  the  com- 

^  pounds  defendere  and  <^/^/^<^<'''^(;V:>    ^  0 
lendo,  dctendi,  defeusum) ;  P- '^^*'   ..f,;,;^;^   f,endo,  -,  —     The   an- 
i^-5-  .>,.o   10  *^  cient    grammarians   mention    the 

^■^roclre,  terocio,  — ,  —  ;  P-  ;J^:':/'"^,,       ..(^'7    /^»  5. 
rre   fero.  tidi,  latum  ;  aujerre,  ah-     ?^  '/':  ^       ^,.^(,,,1    frictum  or  fn- 

Lmu:  a..mt»,n ;  f  -  (f '^[i^^^il^i^Ta     1,  b^ni.  su;".'.',.  rare) ;  p.  374. 
Imlovvs   the  pertect  ot    ..u.^.M^/-^-  .i'^f  \    j  te\oUl),  frlgeo.  -, -- ; 


/J.'/i  flo,  factus  ;  p.  365.  72.  13. 
iweve  ftgo,  tixi,  tixum;  P- 3.>»,  y 
yf;//;..    tiado,   ftdi  (inst.   ot   tiftdO, 

tissum  ;  p.  368,  if  ^-  ^^ 

p,.;h-^  tingo,  tinxi.  Actum;  p.  3.0, 

iliccere,  flacceo,  — ,— ;  P-iZf'  V\f 
Jiai^ere,  tiaveo,  — .  —  ;  P-  3"^»  ^^-  ^^ 
fled  re,  tlecto,  flexi,  flexum  ;  p.  3.  J, 


fleet 
17. 

ji 
fi 

verb   anifciassn^iii,  .-> -  - 

p,mmls  classical  ■«»;«.»".  coutl.M,     1^ 


stateiiiciu  1)1  iyn.i..>""-  .  _ 

froiidire.  froudfo,  fioiidm,   — ,   P- 

JJhlnoT  [fnictus  «r  fn.n.is  Loth 
^'postclassic.1].  Froi  (like  *r«..« 
kml  rtiiere,  p.  370,  7^.  4,  1)  us  tie 
c,.ns-<  nantic  sl.'m  frag,  whid.  ap- 
,M-ar.  in  the  nouns  //'"^  (  n.u'  s  , 
lin.l  fruclus,  ami  lUe  ludecliiialilc 

//v;"tragio,  fngi,-;P.3C3,folU 

■'7J.3-,  p.:i«3.f,llv.., 3G9, 


17.  „  .,,.,   r>  ■>   fKteire    iilcio,  fulsi,  folumi;  p.  30», 

'X^   a^i^eclaTsic;;?;  ,„^"1.1^.^".-/"^/.--..  fflgco,  luls,.  _  ;   p.o.l.  iu 


LIST  OF  PERFECTS  AND   SUPINES. 


379 


fundere,  fundo,  fQdi,  fusum;  p.  368, 

J-i.    1. 

fn^fji,  fungor,  functus  ;   p.  370,  18 
iNo.  1.  ' 

furere,  furo,  -    _.     Defective  in 
several  forms  of  the  present  sys 


tern  occurs  wim  (Cic).  The  foiTns 
^cerain,  icera.%  wistis,  are  eitlier 
quoted  by  ancient  granmiarians, 
or  rest  on  conjectures.  Tlie  parti- 
ciple ictus  very  frequently  occurs 
in  all  periods  of  tiie  language. 


^"SS^^S-y-"  <-'-'^;it^^^.vi.-, ,  sat. 

on,   11.   a.     Inceptive   coinpoundiWfre    inrlo    inrlT.l!     i„  i-. 
J.m.,  ggro,  gessi.  gestutu;   p.  370,. ^^^.v;    induo,  indui.  indutum;  p. 

Uie  ;a:k.n';- 1;±  'a,„.^  ^t^f' T      '"■"  '  ...T-'-uPlne  is  only  iifi-n-ed 


the  present  system,  anteclassiial. 
Varro,  U.  K.  2,  6,  ;j ,    Lucr.  3.  434, 


from   the  late    Latin  noun  induU 
turn.     See  p.  369,  17,  ^.  1 


^.^ sevei-a.  in^ta.^ ^Ca^^;Ze^ ^Z^,^,  ^^,^^  ,, 
gimre  (antJcl )  .r]Qbo Pnm  r.''f^ff''^^''^'/""^^"''  —  J  P-  373,  7?.  7. 

{:;:i4i;l?';ir3''''^^^-"'^"^ 

of -d  :'s..  postclall"  anttCr' -Tt?'  rf^™^'^"'  '"^ ''^^^-' 
ro).     See  j)   3G<)    17    /?  o  -        '  '•  '  "'  ^- 

?.4  g,.adi!.r,t4iv,s'f ;  3C5,  ijfsr'^"'"'  "■""'•  p-3«i'«'i=p- 


to  e:  confjredi,   congrSdior,   con- 
gressus ;  p.  366,  U.  18. 
-gruere,  only  iu  comi>()unds  {conr/ru- 
ere  coxvj:vxio,  cougrui),  — ;  p.  361, 
6,  5  ;  p.  362.  20. 

/iovvr^,  haereo,  ha'si,  hapsum ;  p.  369 
iNo.  16.  ' 

'''''wiy't''-'^'"*''''  ^^^"^''  baustum;  p 
369,  ^o.  10.  ^ 

J't\^t7-6?,  hebeo,  — ,  _ ;  p.  373^  7^  3 

horrere,  horreo,  horrui,  —  ;    p.  373, 

/I.   i. 

hamPre  (poet,  and  postclass.).  humeo 

_—,  —  ;  p.  373.  II.  3. 

^<^/'e  (to  strike),   a    defective  verb 


compounds  generally  drop  the  V 

in  the  perfect. 
irrauciacere,  see  ravlre. 
J'^^^^re   jado,  jcci,  jactum  ;   p.   365, 

K.  11.     Ihe  intransitive  jacere  (to 

lie)    is    regular    {j'lcui,  jacttum). 

eomp. :  conjicere,  conjcci,  coniec- 

tum,  etc.  ;  p.  365,  K  12. 
^\^.-;r  jiibeo,  jussi,  jussum  ;  p.  370, 

*^''K''"i  ~-^'l??r'  J"°'^^'  junctum  ;  p. 
309,  Iv,  7?.  2. 

jumre,  juvo,  jQvi,  jutum ;  p.  365,  R 
^jUDene^rh'e,  juvenesco.  juvc^nui, 


<l<>"l.tful.   whether    bHon.in<:    tor     TT^^^  Juvenesco.  juvc^uni. 

<^eu!: -ul^l.!-  ;;--^.  2''^^  '4-  ^^?  »  -  "^ -e 
decided."  Pekf     .    •   s  jp    ^L^'      f '-'"'  l''''  ^  ^*>'^^teral  form  Idba  {Id- 

U'i  (pass    infi      Oft...  J'l''V'  ~~'  ~~!    '^  verb,  assumet    by 
U)a.s.   ml).     Ot  the  perl,  sys-     Festus,  to  explain  the  compounds 


380 


APPENDIX  VI. 


LIST  OF  PERFECTS  AND   SUPINES. 


381 


n  IhJ  intensive  form  to^^r^  ('^-|,- f^V,. riucreo   liixi,  -;  P-  372,  7^.  U. 

301,  0,  3.  supine  luctum. 

Sr-.^1     la^ii.    l-un,      com  /«4  U.0,  lui,  -  (-V-mtuu,) ;  P- 30. 

p,„„uK  lake  *•   elKKrc,  ellsi,  «»-|„J,";.^,,,,,,_„„.eresco,  macrui,-;  p. 
sum;  p.  oil,  it.  o.  i     .,^      ,.  r- 

^,,.7.^..,  laml>(>,  iambi  -;v>.  3(^/^.0  1-^^^^  ^^^^^^^i^  _.  p.  373, 

laiiffffPcf,    laugueo,    langui,         ,    i^Y    7V2. 

272,  it.  I.  .  ,«„     p  2.7n(vrere,\y^^^^(^> — »  —  '  P»  373,  A- o. 

^''i;;'i!;;lvf <;..m"'.»ml'<W«c;««. ■^l-,;;;;;^^;-;;,^;*;,^,  „,,„.u  (vcy  rare). 

p.  bO.)   /v.  |1.  „      372. 7»M4.     C.Hupoumls.  < 


legere,  le-o,  Ic-i.  lectum  ;  p.  oHo,  ii 
1 1      The  comp.  allifjere,  pmfi'f/ere, 
reiegere,    keep    the    stem- vowel    .> 
The  other   compounds   generally 
(•han«'-e  the  stem-vowel  into  I,  but 


,^  mansum  ;  p. 

37'^  Jl  14  romi)oun(ls.  itninere, 
eintueo,  emTnui,  -;  imminere 
(without  a  perteei  system);  perma- 
nere  and  ;r//*r/Ai^/r.  like  the  simple 
verb  {penmaixi  etc.). 


f/l(Xi  neqU'clHrn);  p.  3(.(>,  li.  W. 
Zi/;!-rt%  libel,  Itbuit  or  Itbttmn  est 


p.  373,  11.  7. 
mt^^Z^^/v.  me.leor,  -;  P-  '^'^'/^t 


■nuM\.,><,.m'"ti.c,'r,   1  n..  ,1KUU»)      "     ''•':^,  _  ,^e<.pt  in  the 


is  a  re"iil:ir  peiaonal  veil). 
Uiiere,    lino,    llvi  or  ICvi.  Ittum  ;  p. 

301     (),    2.     Compounds:    tanti'n, 

illCvi.  iUItuin.     So  collinere  and  d<J- 

r//idA*^  (williout  pert'.). 
Zi/KA'/v,  lingo,  -,  Imclum  ;   p.  30J, 

i7,  i^.  2 


no  present  system,  except  in  the 
inceptive  compounds  commini.sct 
and  /v/yrj/aV/.  The  supine  7/*.'/^- 
tum  occurs  only  i"  the  compound 
c<wnninUn  (I'KRF.;  commentus 
ifttjN);  p.  304,  11,</.  . 
mrrf/h-e,  merino,  mersi,  mersum ;  p. 


a/!^:;^/e.'linquo    iKpd,    lictum  ;    p.^  JOt)  1;;;^^;  ^  ^^^^,,,„,  .  ^.  372,  7^. 
;/08,   Jl   1.     'Hie   simple   ^^'\^      V^^^'l  "  ..j-^let ,  ,^,.s,/M>ccurs  in  qii<>- 

i„  ,l,e  simple  verb,resls  on  ^>™'"-|     !;;j;.;-/,;6,,„;,  ,„en>i.  -  (metuU..n, 

Ue.  wUh  il.  cuiupouud  cM,,ae^     ^  Javl, 'limu'amm ;  p.  301,  it.  3; 
scire,  coUiqui.  ^.^  yj  ^g   15, 

livere,  llveo,  — ,  — ;  P-  3(3,  ii.  d.        I    p-  0-1, 


arjnoscere,  and  cognos^cere  form  tlie 
suj)ines  agiiUum  and  cognitinn. 
Tlie  other  compounds  follow  the 
simple  verb,  p.  302,  10. 


f»i?;2.7(-><?(mPjgre),mingo,minxi,minc-;zI^;  nitor,  nisus  (nixus) ;  p  309  17 

tuni    and    miclum  ;     p.    309,    17,      7?.  2  ;  370,  No.  18  ;  371,  7^.'  11.'      ' 

.  •  r-         .  ...  nivere    (obsol.).     Coinp. :    con?iivere, 

mf^^n'?'^,mmuomxmu,mmmum;Y).     connlveo.    -,    _.     The    ancient 

.    !'  I),  .) ;  p.  30,,  ^w.  j     grammarians  variously  state   the 

mi.'^rere,   misceo,^  miscui,  mistum  or^     pvr feci  to  he  co?inlvi,  connixi,  con- 

mixtuni ;  p.  372,  7i?.  1.  //^X  without  vouchers. 

mixeren,  niisereor,  misertus  (misert-  nolle,  see  vdle. 

tiis) ;  p.  373,  7^.  1.  noscere{\\\^i.i)^ gnoscere).  iiosco,  novi. 

mitkre  innu)^  misi,  missum ;  p.  370,     ndtum  ;  p.  301,  0,  4.     The  comp. 

1  <,  7t.  2.  i  -  ' 

7)wler(\  molo,  molui,  moirtum  ;  p.  374  ' 

R  9.  'i 

vionh're,  mordeo,  momordi,  morsum  ; 

p.  30<,  No.  14.  nuher'e,  nubo,  uiipsi,  uuptum  :  p.  309, 

vwn  {moriri,  anted.),  morior,  mor-|     17, 7^.  2.  ^         >  t-        , 

l-\^^ /i^o^'*^^    ^^^^^'  ^'^^^'^'"^^'«•'')  J   Pv-'*^/<^/''^,  oniy  in  compounds  (^TiTiwere, 

6iA,J,.d  j     annuo,  annul,— );  p.  302,  20.    Nu- 

nunure,   mdveo,    movi,    motum  ;    p.'     ^^<?  occurs  as  a  noun. 

30.),  7^.  11.  phlivisci,  obliviscor,   oblltus ;  p.  301, 

wi?//r<v'^,  mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum  ;  p.|     0,3. 

3<  1 ,  U.  13.  obmiVeHcere,  obmutesco,  obmutui,  —  ; 

wnlgnr,  nuilgeo,  mulsi,  —  (mulctum,'     p.  373,  7^.  7. 

\  AKiio).  ^  ohi<olesre>r,see  olPre. 

w?m.v<5,.^(llje  simple  verb  only  in  the  ob.surdesce re,    obsurdesco,    obsurdui 

Glos-s.  ^     Phdox.).         Compound:      — ;  p.  373,  7?.  7. 

emungh-e,        emungo.        emunxi,  6»cr^n^V^,  occulo,  occului,  occultum  • 

emuncium;   p.  309,  17,  11  2;   p.      p.  374,  7i».  9. 

'^'^.'  \^-        .  [Mere],  [odio],  ddi,  osum  ;  p.  309,  R. 

7ja//ct."<a,nanciscor,  nactus  (uanctus);     4. 

p.  370.  17,  R  2.  \;:,ler€  (to  smell),  61eo,  olui,  — ;  p  373 

w^wt,  nascor,  natiis;  p.  301,  0,  1.       |    7^.  2.  >       '  i       ^. 

ninire,   neco,  neciTvi   (rarely  nernr), -olere  (to  grow);    onlv  in  the  com, 

necatum  ;  but  eneMre,  eneco  [ene-      pounds  (tholere  (abolescere)    achMe^ 


ctti,  poslcl.  ;  enecdri,}inmc\.],  enec- 
tum  (eneciltnm,  anted.) ;  p.  374.  R 
b").  Collateiiil  forms  :  eniclre  and 
r/u'cdci  (jintecl.). 

nectere,  necto,  nexui  (rarely  next), 
nexum  ;  p.  309,  17. 

neglujf're  (neglf-gere),  see  legere. 


f<cere{i\do]^n'),ob.solef<cere  and  exole- 
scere.  Abolere,  abolCvi,  abolitum  ; 
adolescere,  adolevi,  adultum  ;  ohxo- 
lescere,  obsolSvi,  obsolGtum  ;  exo- 
lescere,  exolCvi,  exoletum.  See  p. 
301,  0,2;  p.  302,7. 
open  re,  see  parere. 


nere,nvo^  nCvi,  n5Lum  (poet.,postd.) ;  oportere,  oportet,  oportuit,  — . 

p.  301,  0,  2.  oppei'iri,  see  parere. 

-nidere,  only  in  the  comp.  miJ^^r^.v^/YHn',  ordior,  orsus ;  p.  372  7?  14. 

reni(kM)(ilieperf.?e/j/VZ^/MS  quoted  ()H/7,  orior,  orltis  (verbal  adi.  mVil 

in  aioss.  Phih,x.) ;  p.  373,  R  3.      |     run)  ;  p.  374,  7^.  13. 
nmrescere,   nigresco,   nigrui,   —  ;   \)pf1rhn\  see  panr/ere. 

drj,  R  7.  pallere,  palh-o,  pallui,  — ;  p.  373.  R.  2 

iT'X'o'"°^^'    "'"^'^'  ""'    P-  309.  yv7/?r^V^pando,pandi,passum  (rare. 
.,/'  ^^  .^-  ly  pansum)  •  p.  307,  IL  5. 

nilere,  niteo,  nitui,  — ;  p.  273,  7?.  3.    pangere,  pango,  peptgi,  pactum  ;  p, 


H 


382 


APPENDIX  \^. 


LIST  OF  PERFECTS  AND   SUPINES. 


383 


J    ..  1         otxiu    1?  li  i>iusuni).  ,    ,- 

IS  tormed ;  p.  dbS,  h.  0.  |        ,       .     j  ^^e  suspended),  pen- 


7).i/-c^^0-     The  verbal  adj.  ?>rt/'««/-f^.j 
occurs  in  Livy  and  Suelomus  and 
varcitfirux  in  Pliny;  p.  S(u    It.  .5 
■u,.  .       1  ,,...t_r>iic*u';ii  com 


14  Compounds  without  redupli- 
cation {(h'peiuln'c,  dependi,  dei)en- 
sum)  ;  p.  oiu,  n.  '•'• 


pareitura.  in  Pl.ny  ;  p.  f».  '^■^     '    "'AuihZ^''    o  sr.spcml),  p.-n.lo, 


pounds  compurcre  and  repxrcrn 
in  the  latest  Lalinity  also  .v//i/>6'r- 


pei>endi,  peusum  ;  j).  d07,  ^o.  i-i. 
Compounds  without  redupliealion. 


Imnerl^re  occurs  onlv  in  Pluutus.  I  see  rf.//-^. 

Ji.  4.      iiu    t,()in|>"uiiw       ,.     ■ .  ^,,  I  ^-,,.^  romnesco,  eompescui, — ),  p- 

into  K  dropping  the  mli.phcali     ,  f  '«,  f'""!"-  <                  .  j  „.|,^.„,^., 

bnt  tV-nning  tl.eir  Pr''»^'"  .f »";'.  t  t:,,f;  L  ui.  nt   -at  with  pasefn. 

also  forn.s  ,v,;)«-l("».    Tl.e  ^'.i'H>>;i  ?•-•'••.  \';^^;;,;;      ,^,„i,    ,,ia„sum. 

peritk  which  is.only  ..sed  as  a.  ^     «W'     '     <;.    ,      ,,,„,,,  ^xplO- 

a,lj.'Ctivc    (expeneuced).      Seep.  ^!;^J'^-;-,(„„„„  .  „.  ;iTl. /J.  8. 
;,a''^;'(;o-*-o„ey),  pareo,  _par„i,       y«.V.^(.o^s,rike),  plec.o, -.  - ;  P 

^  (;«,•-.<»»>«.<  and  ?«'•./«'■«,,  1'»^'-  ,:;'l;./V:r'b.-aia),    plecto    [plexi] 


classical).  /■.-.; 

??a/vre  (to  be  evident),  pSrei  it  is  cm 


plertere    (to""  braid),    plecto    [plexi], 
[plexum].      The    compounds    are 


dent  ,  — ,  —  ("^t.a  i  i  jui  '^' '^  mwukcti  comp  exus  ;  p.  3«  I,  if.  l-i- 

g«ag.  in  the  l'r>^l»''i"'   ?'  "  't  i    .../T/^m  Iv  in  c.In.pon.uls:  .<»«;,(«■<■. 


©a.^C()/-d,  pasoo,  pavi,  pastum;  p.  dOi, 
patere,  pateo,  patui,— ;  P-i);'^' {^  \ 


.nZ6/-f,only  in  compounds:  comjdot, 
compleo,  complGvi,  complGium. 
So   implore,  explore,  deplore  etc. 


patere,  paieo,  p.uui,  — ,  i'-:;-"' '^'  .v      ,^   o,.i    (;  o 

Wi,   patior,   i)assus;  p.   3.0,   1<,  '^J';- ;;''?:'       pUcui  (plicavi),  plici- 

^    Compounds  change  ^tnt<>  .;  ^    "i^^'^    ^fiZl;   p.  Ul,  It  3:  P- 


ante- and  post-classical    The  com-!    p.  3G1,  6,  3.     Comp.:   r^/ly^^lr^>^ 
pounds   applicore,   implicare,  etc.,'     etc.  (conquislvi,  conquisltum) 
make^  eiMier  -phcia,   plicUum,    or  quatere,  quutio,  — ,  quassnm  •  n  370 
pUcaci,    phcatum.      But    explicdre      17,  It  2.     The  compounds'chun-e 
and   rephcare,   m    the   Cicenniian      qua   into   cu   (conrutere,  concuiio 


IHTiod,  always  have  -plied ti,  plicd- 
txm.     [Ueplktuin,  poetical]. 
plodere^  see  plindcre 


concuss],  concussum):  p.  871,  R. 
8 ;  /f.  10. 
qxieri,  queror,  questus ;  p.  370,  No. 


pluere,  pluit  (sometimes  pluvit), — :     \1  R  2 

p.  dbw,  S^.  quiescere,  quiesco,  quiCvi,  quiOtum  : 

7^ft'/a/<';-t',  pa:'nitet,  poenituit.     Aver-      p.  3G1,  6,  2. 

hal  adj.Hnive  pa^nituruH  is  quoted  ^?^J/-e  (comp.  of  ire),  quOo,  quivi  qul- 

by  ancient  trrammarians  as  ante-      turn 

classical,  and  Quintilian  censures Wi^;-^,  raho, -,- (poetical  and  post- 


Sallust  for  usiui;  this  f<»rm. 
poUere,  polleo,  — ,'  —  ;  p.  373,  R.  3. 
jW/^/C("r€ (ante- and  post-class.),  i)ollu- 

c^'^»  — ,  polluctum. 
ponere,  pono,  posui,  posTtum  ;  p.  373, 

R.  2. 


classical). 
rddere^  rado,  rSsi,  rilsum  ;  p.  369,  17. 

R.2. 
rdpere,    rapio,    rapui,    raptum ;    p. 

3io,  R.  20.     Compounds  take  t  in 

the  perfect,  and  e  in  the  supine. 


po.ce re  yo^c.^,  poposci,  -;  p.  ZQl,rdclre,  ravio,  -,  -  (to  be  hoarse); 


No.  14.     Compijiuuls  reduplicate  . 

repoHcere,  repoposci,  etc. 
postie,  possum,  potui,  — ;  p.  374,  R.  13. 
pofare,  j)oto,  |)otavi,  potatum  or  po- 

tum  ;  p.  301,  0,  4. 
2^randere,  prandeo,  piandi,  pransum  : 

p.  3(;7,  n.  5 ;  R.  8. 
;??W/<v/</m'(prendfre),  prehendo,  pre- 

hendi,  prehensum  ;  p.  3l>7.  R.  o. 
prnnrre^J^\•i^n\^^,  pressi,  pressum  ;  p 

370,  17,  o.     Compounds  take  I  (de 

priinere,    deprlmo,    depressi,    de- 

pressum) ;  p.  370,  R.  3. 
prvdi'ir,  i)rodo,  prodidi,  prodTtum  : 

see  dare. 
pn^fiCMci,  proficiscor,  profectus  ;  in- 
ceptive compound  oi  facere\  see 

Syicerc ;  p.  30.>,  R.  12. 
prumere,    promo,    prompsi,    promp- 

tum  ;  p.  30(),  R.  10  (comp.  of  eni^re). 
prurlre,  prilrio,  — ,  _  ;  p.  302,  12. 
psallere,   psallo,   — ,   — .     A    perfect 
pxalli  is  quoted  bv  Priscian;  p.  300, 

12,  0 ;  p.  307,  R  5. 
piuif/i're,  l)ungo,  pupuij^i,   punctum  ; 

p.  308,  R.  2.     Comp. :  compungere, 
exputupre,    which     make    -pt/nxi, 


occurring  Plant.  Pcpii.  3,  o,  33.  TJie 
anted,  verbal  adjective  raumrus 
may  be  referred  either  to  this  verb, 
or  to  an  assumed  rauclre  or  rmi- 
cere  (accordiui,^  to  the  analogy  of 
sarclre,  farcire,  and  parcere).  "  The 
perfect  irrausi  (used  once  by  Cic- 
ero) refers  to  an  inceptive  com- 
pound, which  may  be  either  irror- 
visnre,  or  irrnua'scere,  neither  of 
which  is  actually  found.  See  p. 
370,  R.  3. 

recrudescere,    recrudesco,     recrudui, 
p.  373,  R.  7. 

reddere,   reddo,    reddidi,    redditum  ; 
see  dare. 

regere,  r6go,  rexi,  rectum  ;  p.  369, 
17,  R.  2.  The  compounds  diru/ere, 
porrigere,  erigere  etc.  change  ^'into 
I,  but  only  in  the  present  system 
{dir'igo,  direxi,  directum).  The  e  of 
the  stem  is  syncopated  in  the  pres- 
ent system  of  surgere,  pergere,  and 
the  inceptive  deponent  expergisci 
{—Bubregcre  etc.)  :  aurrexi,  nurrec- 
turn ;  perrexi,  perrectum  ;  exper. 
rectus.     See  p.  370  foil.,  18,  R.  2. 


pnnctain.     Rcpungere  and  depun-^reminisci,  see  viemini. 

.^^^•j  have  no  perfect  system.  repere,  rOpo,  repsi,   reptum  ;  p 


Compounds  change  a  mto  e  :  lli^f'';^^^^^^  .,   p.   301,  R.  3  ;  p.      ■        9ere  have  no  perfect  system. 

peti,  perpelior.  perpessus;  p.  oil,      lum  u     ^^^     ,^^^  simple  verb  is      ■    ?««^e/'^,  quaero,  quaeslvi,  quaesltum ;: 

R.  8.  '  H 


17. 


J69, 


384 


APPENDIX  VI. 


r^/7,  reor,  riltus ;  P- ^«1' "^'',^;^   T?  uUcnmUre    sc'.un\o,  scandi,   scan  sum  ; 

r^./^;r,  rodo,  rosi,  rOsum  ;  p.  30,),  l'':7^l^^4;^a,,;s,.\ai  (.c/cXrf^  anted.), 

w  r -■  1  „.  Tlu'  incontivei     scissiun  :  p.  «><>o,  ii.  ~- 

'•"trn™;;^''  ;;«5^;..,-f " fo'.™^;  ,..„.....  scisco,  scu-i.  scuum  ,  p.  3G1. 

„^;;!:  X  ^m!'  ^-1 1^I^'-r;"f  4^^  '-.po.  scnlpsi,  seulptun, ; 
iuUMHMiter  adjcctivLMU  Ibe  jnrul-      A.    H.     eompouni  ^    ^      ^^^^ 


ical  expression  *  riVa  casa'  (  =  ruta 
et  cajsa),  refLTiinj;  lo  the  appurte- 
nances of  farm-property  w  lull 
have  been  separated  from  the  laml 
bv  manual  labor. 
ruwpere,  runipo,   rupi,   ruptum ;   p 

308,  Rl-  ,   .  o~i 

sallre  (to  leap),  salio,  salui,  —  ;  p.  -i  ••*. 


syllables  change  e  into  i  ni  the 
present  system:  nsshlPrf,  nsMedi, 
a...Hessum.  'But  those  with  dissyl- 
hibics  retain  the  e:  circuumdere, 

sentlre,  sentio.  sensi,  sensum  ;  p.  .5 -^., 
Ji.  14.  Deponent  conip. :  ai<iienti>  i, 
assensiis ;  p.  '372,  !!■  ll- 


l-n-e\u>  leap),  sulio,  snUn  - ;  p.  -  ^.     "^  .  '>- '  J  j.;  ' -.el.vi,  sopuUum  ; 

7^.  13.     Compounds  take  <  •   «<^»^  r^^'Vio   in 

nre^  desilui  (son.etimes  (/..^^u) ;  ^^.p^;^"^^^^^^^^         s.pio,  sepsi,  septum  ; 

sufutiio  salt  ;  collateral  forms:  m]  ,j;;,^;|' (f-^tecatus  ;  p.  301,  6,  5. 

Both   supines   are   rare;   ^>^^\.^^';V<^'. ,  '      V    n  3G->  8.     Comp.  make 
perfect  part.  mUus,  as  an   adjec-i     3bl,  0.  ^  ,  P- «^^- ^\..,_,    L.,wnvi 


tive  (salted),  very  frequent. 
saiiclre,  sancio,  sanxi,  sanctum  (san 

citum) :  p.  37-2.  11  14 
«<5;7.-v-6,  silpio,  saplvi  (''"ted.),  — .    1  »e 

perf.    .^"ptn    rests    on    Pnscian  s 


-sevL  -H,t*,m  {coiixen're),  consBvi, 
consYtum) ;  di^^slnre  lacks  the  per- 
fect (dissero,  -.  dissTtiimUT^ers^^ 
rere  (postclass.)  lacks  the  supme 
(persert),  persPvi,  — ). 


imiperc  form  no  perfect  ;  I'^^t    fx  "  ,1.     ,      ^^  /  ^  ^^.^^^  .  ^ 

J^:!.^^^^,  sanu.;  P- 371. ;-^y.   -PO,  serpsi.  serptu.n  ;   p. 
/^.  13. 


LIST   OF  PERFECTS   AND   SUPINES.  385 

sWre,   sido,  sidi   (poet.).   _       Tlief    379  p  o      rp, 
compounds  borrow  tie  nerf  3     Z    l-^'    J'^^  P^^'^- of  the  simple 
supine  of  ,eda-e  :  ^..  rf/con4df      Jnn^,f  ^^T^'^".^ '  ^"^  ^^^^  inceptive 
consessum  ;  p.  3G9,  No   16    7^0     1     n?^  '"^c  '"^Pj'^d^^^^re  makes  ex- 

•^mre,  srieo,  sllui,  -  •'  p  373  7?  I*     '..^  ^"'^"'  ^^"'^•^• 

«i///'r.,  sino,slyi;sriuni  n  4  fi  qi^^'''''^'^^'^^^  spondeo,  spopondi,  spon- 
The  con/p.  dnip  t  e  J,  f  the  ner  w'n  '  ^^-  ^^7'  ^^'  ^^"  Pompon nds 
feet  :  ddno.  dCsii.  c'csl  um      P. "     ^^'^^l^ou  reduplication :  rc^pondere, 

r^uc,  frequent  in  anted.  iL^'Z^TlZJu^^^^^^^       ~  ~'  P"  ^^^' ^O-    Tlie 
«i.v/.vr.  sisio,  stiti,  stjitum    1    'IS   7?      ^         ^-f""^  presupposes  the  su- 
2  {dies  status,  .</nSv  'Jlf  ;//■  L  P"/-^  *^^"^"'^- 
t^^m    est,    po^tclal^^^Th^^.^;:!'^:^^^'    ^^"^^^->    ",  -;    P-   373, 

fh-e,  destrti,  destr  unf     )    Sft«  15"      ^'^^  ^^'."Pounds,  both  monosyllabic 
7      TK.  ...:..„  _'"'"'"'  P-^^8,  i^.|     and  dissyllabic  {circumsid?'e)  ■  but 


/.  1  he  other  compounds  form  no 
supme  (?/i.s/.y/m%  instlti,  —  •  so  m-- 
.vAv/.^re  a«*^./^^,.6).  Of  exsistere  (ex 
J^tt^re),  the  lexicons  ^ive  the  su^ 
Jiuie  6j-.s7^7//,;i.  But  I  doubt  wheth- 
er «t  be /ound  anywhere.  Civcum- 
ststere   forms   neither   perfect   nor 

_ 


pmstare   makes    prsstfti.   pr'^stl- 

Uim;p.3GI,i?.  4;p.363,9%.2. 
Veroal  adj.:  prmtaturus. 

*/«^w^/-^  statuo,  statui,  statutum;  p. 
361,  6,  No.  5.  The  compounda 
take  i:  co.'istituere,  constitui,  cou- 
stitutum. 

P. 


P-361.fi,  5;  p.  302,  iV,  23.  W?,^,.^    sterto    ^fovu.\ 

10,  souui.  sonltum.-  n  S7^       r>  V!    ^^^^^^'  steitui,  —  ; 


«.>///7/r  sono,  souui,  sonltum;'  p.  374^ 

*^W>.V^  sorbeo,  sorbui,-;  p.  373.  R. 
-     Comp. :  nh.'.orbere,  absorbui  iab- 


R.  14.  '  ~ '  ~'   P-  ^"^' 

stingucre  (obsol.).     Comp. :  -stinguo 
-stmxi  -stmctum  (restingut-rerex- 

««'•'/'Vc,  sordeo,  sordiii  _  •  „  Q70   p      '':'<''^  '"'^^' ""  ""^  statement  of  Pris- 

•'^s;;;.s^„r  ^C"'^"-- '  ^  ^  "''^: "'°'' "'"""  ' 
n^r^o.  eo;!spi.i!si/i;o;:;,^^,;;r;:-^^^^^         sfuctu.;  p. 

^Pi^cere  (spic(^re).  spgcio, (the''^'^''o^'  ^^"'^'''''   ^^""^"^'   -'   P'   ^^3, 

.;'enj.V.,,pe,.„o,sp,.Svi,sp,-et„„;  p.f  "stCI  it"^"'  ""^''  ^"'^""  >   P' 
«i'W^r;.  splendeo.  splendui,-;  p."'*/i&  tt'  SeS  '"''"""' '^ 


386 


APPENDIX  VI. 


LIST  OF  PERFECTS  AND  SUPINES. 


387 


See 


p.  308,  li  8.     AitoUere,  without  a 
nert'ect  svstcm. 

Jdllr.  u.mleo,  totondi,  tonsum  ;  p. 


S(!i     G    2     Mostly   in    tl'C    com- 

«.^;.rs^go!'s«xi.  suctum;  p.  300.1  a«TN..,'_^,,„„,  '""«"i;' '  ^^ '^fe 

17    /?  2  «  m       4//(?//ttre  poetical  ,  Din  nii. 

.a"vf  samo.  sumps,    sumptum;  p.  ^;/^f^    ^;^;,.,,,,,,   '  (,lu,naer«.™cU 

3(i(i,  A>.  Ki ;  see  emere.  ,,,,  ,vetiue,uly  <'^'="'', ""'•.'' 


,.^:Skpej.-;"nest(sonu.ae- 

/>   2      Compouiuls  take  i  m 
iresent  system,  droppin-  the  re- 


adjective  aim  a^^.-o^.^  , 
/.rpi/-.,  torpeo,  torptu,  -•    .  ^^^^/J^j  1 
torpui  seems  to  ^^^'^^^^S  t      ^^^^'^ 
(.(M)tive  torpe.'<ch'e  only  ^Comp.  ^v . 

ohtorpesccre,  oblorpui  (Liv.  .i-,  -"  , 
lb.  34,  38). 


duplication  iu  the  perfect ,  conUf^       I  ^.^ 

)^.>;l.  conttgi,  contactum;  p.  ^^«''^^t/^,  torreo,  torrui,  tostum  ;  p.  3.3, 

Ug%%go,  texi,  tectum  ;  p.  369,  ^L^j^^^  ^,,,^,,  tradtdi,  tr-Vttum  ;  P^ 

temnL   (as    a   simple   verb,  poe  .  ,     :^J';^;4  ;  ^,;,^,rf,  etc.  _. 

^"^^no!  ^-Psi  (ten-)^  ^^^ ^^X^,  traho  tnvxi,  tractum ;  p.  3.0, 
(temtum) ;  p.  3.0,  E.  4,  Z.     &o  ^^  ^,   i ;  i^.  4.  .  «^ 

compound  c^^^^^^^Aim;'!^.  ^rW^/m^^,  tremo,  tremui.  -;   P-  «i'^» 

:;^et^:u;^  W:x  ^u,^^.«u .     ,^,,,  ,„_  ^ ,  300. 

o^/./irum,  as    a    noun).     For   the  fr 

other  compounds  see  p.  3b.,  ^;^' L   ,^.^.  t„oor  [tatus];  p.  362,21.    The 

E  1      The  comp.  change  (J  into  i,  1  post-classically  lake  tut 

fesumin.  .  in  tl.e  ^-P^^^J^'^^Zi     su^inS  .<,!(«»«,  and  intuUu^ 
rellnui,  relenwm).    tI  (iHcre   ^I"",  .    -'       tvimei.,  tQnnii,  — ;   P-  *>">• 
Minc^e  Ibm.  uosupme;  I';  f '/•  <"^f  1.'    Do-iuVul.  wl.etluT  .he  p.  - 

%,  4.     C«»ttn«r    -'■■ms^fj',       .'»;     tct  i«"H»-  belongs  to  ««'«;':«»>.';, 

its  ineeplive  eompoun.is  only  .  J« 

l>ont.  4, 14,  a-1 ;  I'lin.  II.  N.  ~0,  i>, 

23). 


as  an  aJjective  only.     Tlie  pertec 
'Srantecl.)  is  quoted  by  ancient 

o-rammariaiis,  „^. 

ie^re,   tero,    trivi,   tritum ;    p.   361, 

0,3 


,^i  (ter..re.  ter.o  (ter.eo),  -j  -^f  -  -l^til^ 

t^sumTp.  30<J,  17,  II-  '3-,  p.  3.1,'     ;;j;;^^^\o;,tudi,  comusum;  p.  3u8. 

.|^iexo,  texui,  textum  ;  ^' ^^J^^,^^,)^^^ 

Je^,  timeo,  timui ;  p.  373^  72-  2.  ^^;^^^,,  a  perfect  system. 

tjni7i.6r6  (tiug&re),  Un--o,  tmxi,  tine  , 


vlri.m,  ulcipcor,  ultus ;  p.  369, 17, 7?  1 
ti)if/efe  (un^irugiv),  unnro  (nnLruo),'imxi! 

unctuni ;  p.  309,  R  17. 
Hfrre,^  uro,  ussi,  ustum  ;   p.  870,  R  2, 
4.   Thec()iiij)ound  crmibfi  re  re  {from 
an  ancient  collateral  form  burere) 
makes  comhusd,  combustum  ;  p.  370, 


•> 

o. 


urgere  (ur<ruCre),  urgeo(ur£rueo),  ursi 

—  ;  p.  371,  R.  13. 
vadh-e,   vado,   — ,  _.      The   comp. 

^radere  makes  evdsi,  evSsum  ;   p. 

0.1,  R.  9. 
'cegere,   vegeo,  — ,  _;  p.  373^  ^  §_ 
Vegetiis  (which   is  scanned  i'er/^7?/.«j 

in   tlic  poets)   frequently  occurs  as 

an  adjective. 
tehere,  velio,  vexi,  vcctum  ;  p.  370, 

i?^/'/^^  volo,  v61ui,  — .  The  comp. 
malle  and  nolle,  make  mnlui,  nolui  • 
]).  372,  R  1. 

^''oZ'''  VJ^^'''  ^^"^  (^^"^^0,  vulsum;  p. 
oO<,  R.  5. 

vendere,^  rondo,  vendidi,  veuditum  ; 
p.  305,  A*.  7 ;  see  r/^'r^'. 

tv//7/'e  (to  come),  venio,  vCni,  veu- 
tum;  p.  30.-),  R.  11.  'I 

venire  (to  be  for  sale),  vC'ueo,  venii 
(venlvi),  — ;  p.  302,  ^V  11. 

ver,oere,  vergo,— ,  — .  The  perf.  versi 
rests  ou  a  mere  conjecture  in  the 
passage  Ov.  Pont.  1,  0,  52.  Kun- 
NER  erroneously  derives  the  prepo- 
sition versus  from  vergere  (see  ver- 
Ure). 

terrere,  verro  [verri],  — ;  p.  307,  R.  5. 

vertere  (vortere,  in  Sallust  and  the 
poets  ;  also  anted.),  verto  (vorto), 
vera,  versum  (voi'sum).    The  par- 


tic,  verms  {vorsus),  used  as  preposi- 
tion. TJie  compounds  witli  re,  di, 
and  pr(e,  are  deponents  in  the  pres- 
ent system  ;  but  generally  take  ac- 
tive iierfects :  revertor,  perf.  reverti  ; 
see  p.  307,  i?.  7. 
vesci,  vescor,  — ,  — .  Inceptive,  de- 
rived from  the  rooti^e,  from  which 
vivere  is  formed  by  present  redu- 
plication. 

vetdre,  veto,  vetui,  vetttum ;  p.  370 
R.  13.  '  ^        » 

vuiere,  video,  vidi,   visum  ;   p.  304 
Ko.  11;  p.  305, /iMl. 

nere,  vieo,  — ,  viCtum  ;  p.  361,  6,  2 ; 
p.  302,  9. 

vigPre,  vigeo,  vigui,  — ;  p.  373,  R.  2. 
1  he  perf.  rif/ui  does  not  belong  to 
the  inceptive  vigescere  (as  the  lex- 
icons give  it),  but  to  the  stem-verb 
vigere  (Tum  aras  vestrae  viguerunt 
vestra   vis  valuit ;    Cic.   Mil.   31)! 
Perv^'gui  occurs  in  Tac.  A.  4,  34, 
unquestionably  derived  from  »6?-- 
vu/ere. 
Tincere,  vinco,  vici,  victum ;  p.  308, 

Ivincire,   vincio,  vinxi,  vinctum;   p. 
I    372,  R.  14.  '   ^ 

\virere,  vireo,  — ,  -  ;  p.  373,  R.  2. 
Tisere,  vise,  —,  visum  ;  p.  309,  R.  2 
vivere,  vivo,  vixi,  victum;  p.  370,  R 

4.    Inceptive   compound:    revivi- 

scere,  re  vixi,  reviclum. 
volvsre,   volvo,   volvi,    volutum  •    d 

302,22.  '    ^ 

vo7?iere,  vomo,  vomui,  vomttum ;  n. 

374,  R.  9.  '  ^ 

v(/ve7'e,  voveo,  vovi,  votum:  p.  364. 

11;  p.  305,  i^.  11. 


3gg  APPENDIX  VII. 

APPENDIX  VII. 

PROSODY. 
I     GENERAL    RULES. 
I  ,.  Every  vowel  placed  before  another  vowel,  or  before  ft,  is  .«okt. 
V^s\ieiis,  liio,  trdho. 

^■TlTn-f.t  ancient  .erminMion  ot  ,»e  genUive  of  the  «i«t  dee.en.ion  is  «.o  :  a«ral 
'"-:•    k;-,.  .oso  >n  .he  vocwe  te.n.n.Uons  .«.  and  H  o,  the  prope.  n»n.e,  .a 

*"'r;''i-"S«''t:".-he  intepecl.™  «..  .,„, .  ^,„  poet,  aUvays  .horten  i  in 

''tT.n'/i'-vmV'  ^"'''■i^'-;^"  V:.fr'?ow<.l,hefore  vowels  h»ve  the  same  quantity  as  in 

like  a  c.usonant  (»),    "''  '-  ^,^)  <^,«&m^  ^=za>^«-?/«^-).  ,    . 

,,,,.,=,.,,,r.K.vm^eo  -.^a^^^^^^^^  the  vowels  chancred  fnmi 

^*2.  Long  are:  1),  all  '^^Y^]}^']'^^^^^  cmio. 


"^f-;? rp'lt.posi.ion  ...,  in  con,pounc,s,  before  a  vowei,  is  gene.i.y  s„o.. .  pr.aca,«., 

-Ti'n'thc  eon,po.,.on  .i.h  ^''^-^::^:^^^'^^:::::"^^^  vowei 

^ira-TiS  vowel  is  followed  hy  a  n,nte  -«^nant  precedin^^or^^ 

'"•::Tt:::::ZlZ;:^^ora.  retain  the  quantity  ol  the  corre- 
spoucling;  vowels  in  the  primitive. 


PEOSODY. 


389 


,!«««;  *5('l«-»<>jx«--  „„nniitv  of  the  vowels  of  their  simplea 

v;  \    CoMroL-sus  retain  Hie  qiiantit.v   oi  '"«  v    « 


Exceptions. 

nrnf'i!JZ~^V^''^'  (^'<^'rf-^^ajedicns,  and  the  other  compounds  with  dicm  •  nnh^re- 
%,.  :\.^^'^  piviM.Htion  ;;r(5  .imrtens  its  vowd  in  many  compomuls  IZrrdceUaZyro. 
fanus,  prbjurjus,  prbfiteor  etc.    Greek  ;.ro  is  always  Hliort/ekx-pr  in!^r34£.      ^^'''  ^'^'^ 

il.HrwnT^t-t'''-''''''i,?f  ^^«  '-^^^lical  syllal,les  in  declinable  words  retain 
tlH  II  quantity  iM  all  the  inllectional  tonus  which  the  word  may  assume, 
as  dux,  dacis,  duabu.s ;  pakr,  patns  ;  Uyo,  li'fjam. 

EXCEPTION!». 

3.  The  Pupines  of  the  verbs  with  vowel-stems  are  long  (p.  ,361,  362)  &<*  minuere-mi. 
bi'^fete).  if'tffi.  citu/n.  nfum,  f/<uf'/m,  f^iff/m,  rufum  On  connnmndi^) 
and  (/J  ampStivt/        '  ^^''^""''    ^'^'''  ^^'  '^"  "'  '^^^'^  "'  ^"  '^^  ^«"^S'  ^^^^pt  in  das 

XL  PARTICULAR  RULES  OX  QUANTITY. 
§  7.  The  quantity  of  those  syllabhs  of  Latin  words  belono-ino-  to  tlie 
sfenis,  rests  on  the  authority  of  the  Latin  poets.  These  nsa^res^of  the 
poets  ni  regard  to  ev-ery  word  of  the  language,  have  been  collected  in 
alphabelica  \yorks  of  reference  (Gradus  ad  Parnassum),  which  must 
beconsulled  in  every  instance  not  setiled  by  the  rules  of  this  chapter, 
(xenera  rules  can  only  be  given  in  regard  to  the  quantity  of  monoLlla- 
uUn'AwCijinal  or  inflectional  syllables.  ^  J  y 

%  §.  The  quantity  of  monosyllabics  is  contained  in  the  followiuo- 
three  rules  :  » 

1.  Monosyllabic  words  ending  in  a  vowel  are  long  (si,  nl,  me,  til,  qui 
ne,  pro,  ae  etc).  >      >  ^     > 

2.  Monosyllabic  nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  are  long,  as  :  jus,  ver, 
onas,  lis,  OS  (oris).  "^  "^     '       ' 

8.  Monosyllabic  words,  other  than  nouns,  ending  in  a  consonant 
aie  SHOUT  (dd,  fac,  quid,  et,  nee). 
Exceptions. 

1.  The  enclitics  que,  ve,  ne,  ce,  te,  pfe,  are  short. 

i.   1  he  nouns  cor,  f el,  rtieL  vis,  as  (O'-df)  are  shout. 
Tnv./  %r"f      ^fi-'/oo    quin    sin,  crns; plus.  cur.  sic,  and  the  adverbs  hic  and  Mc  are 
long.    Tiie  form-adjectives  hie  anrl  hoc  aie  either  long  or  ^hoiit. 

§  9.  In  DISSYLLABLES  and  POLYSYLLABLES  the  final  vowels  a,  e,  v  are 
short;  the  final  vowels  e,  o,  u  are  long. 
Exception!». 
1.  a  Ls  LONG  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension,  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nroner 
inHhl^'Urnf-fAvJ-'/^y  '''•'/"JJ>-f  i-'  -'  V^«  fi-t  conjugation  (ama,  da)  luki^'Zl 
s      KT      R  r  W  ^     fir'i  "^     fT;  ^'"^^f  ^,?'^;\  ^s^«Pt  i"  ifd  and  quid,  which  Imve  the  a 
MioKT.     Harely  the  final  a  of  the  mdechnable  numerals  (triqinfaeic.)  is  used  ^hort 
frLlf^'"''-''  l""!  ?"  the  ablative  of  the  otli  declension  (sjyecre);  (b)  in  the  ablative  of 
{d^h^rilii^'^  in  the  ..nperative  of  the  second  conjuj^ation  (bit  sometimes  fact 
cnj,  ''d>?  ju>>e    man?,  rale,  rvlh  ;    </)  in  the  adverbs  jn>  of  the  movable  adjectives 
(except  bh,e,  indie)  ;  {e)  in  Greek  nouns  in  e  (>pi'ome,  CircZ).  ^"^""^^  auj(.cii\es 

.1  I  IS  SHOUT  (rt)  m  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  is  (AUxi)  ;  (b)  in  the  dative  of 
S   ich  jT'J-h!''?'  h''''  (lyi^'.Pinvn) ;  (.1  in  ,.isu  qua.^l  and  cul  (if  scanned  as  a  diss  vl\a  hi?, 
ib  iubi     Th^  li.     V  ?''^ '  ^"^^  *•  '^  u^'^'^®  '^'*  '"**!*^  (anceps)  in  mihi  (or  y/iiAi).  ^i6t,  ^iii 
bi'f'  h.L  ii,    ,-       "*^•^^1^""T  m  the  a.mpounds  necubt,  sicubi,  and  generally  in  ublvis, 
out  long  in  ubique.    So  t^/ig?/^,  and  generally  ibidem.  o  j  xu  «(/♦(.», 


390 


APPENDIX  Yll. 


rnosoDY. 


391 


(,fi,t  tho..  nouns  i^V^^  j';};; ',  Jii  j    r„clA  f  /i  ••  ^<^'^  'l'  ^'^"  compouua.ol  lUe 

But  «/vi?.>'.  ^//v?.v,  ;>a/'i^.s\  !i  u.  ^''^.^X  ::   '  7)  i"  t  »«  prt-ix'^ition  penes  ,^  .. 

''t'n';  Tenuinations  in  is,  «.,  ^»  are  short  (/<,n.X  <«;,».,  Co(^.). 
^fini",:;*»  (a)  in  al,  ...e  case,  of  t.,e  plunU  (/'--«..«f^^.^^^V.^?  '^fZ^^^ll^ 

^  VI    Terminations  in  a  cousouaiit  other  than  s  aie 
vii^n,  aiuer,  lauddt,  donee,  semeL 

arc  ahvay:^  short  (.Ae*^^/")- 

III.  THE  USE  OF  METRES  IN  POETRY. 
A.  General  liuhs. 

,  ,8    In  Greek  and.LnUn  V'^'-^y:^^!:^^;:Z:^^:L::Z!r!^ 

th.i  ^a.ue  pocni.  nncionts  and  was  first  employed  in  the  ChriH- 

Or^  -2   TheimYMEwuRunkm.wnto   heanciuiTs.ami  ..J      tonirue.     Ihe 

fru.  hvmu^   at  a  time  wh.M,  the  Latm  l'''lf '"p.^J"    ..i^^'en  nry  of  th.-  Christian  em>.  are 
hv  h  n't  -Ml  in   the  Christian   hymns  (after      «''''J  I  in  the  sense  (letlne.l  ahnve    sin.x- 

TiCAi.  Latimty.  ...  ^  ^«„ci<ti;  of  certain    METRICAL 

^  M.  Generally  a  o..m,K.sU.onjn  verse  cos,^^^^^ 
r^^uoDS,  each  of  which  CMtams    he  me t  t  ^^^^^  ^^n^^;  ^TUoI-iiKS. 
vhich  recurs  iu  regular  succession,     buch  ptuous 


1 


hh 


A  strophe  consisting  of  four  lines  is  called  a  stanza.     If  a  composition 
consists  of  one  single  ver^e  or  strophe,  which  is  not  repeated,  it  is  called 

.    ^.■.^;  f'/ophes  are  divided  into  lines,  called  verses,  and  each  verse 
is  (hvided  into  FEET,  which  contain  a  certain  succession  of  two,  three,  or 
lour  syllables.     Ihe  fee^employed  in  Latin  poetry  are  the  following : 
^  -  lanibus,  as  leffunt,  pat  res. 

-  -  Trochee  (Troc]iaeus^chor5us),  scvTpslt,  terra. 
Spondee,  ncribem^,  terra. 

-  -  -  Dactyl  (Dactylus).  scrlhere,  flumind. 
---  Anapest,  (Anapa?stus),  legereiu,  Mminl._ 

-  -  -  Amphimacer  or  Creticus,  gratlas.  cdgiUms. 
^  -  -  Bachlus,  doldrl,  amavl. 

-  -  -  -  Chorianibus  {i.e.  Choreus  and  l^mhn^), prdeteremit,7ximld8. 

- lonicus  a  niinore,  ddainarl,  adolescent. 

-  -  -  -  lonicus  a  majore,  sententia,  miitdbllU.* 

M6.  Kn  vTiiM  is  the  system  of  rise  or  f)ill  of  the  voice  at  certain  inter- 
^als,  as  represented  by  the  feet.  The  iambus  and  anapest  constitute  the 
b;tnJ'['^'-V.  '^''  ^'-^f  •^•'V'^^^V^'*^^^^'^'  t»»^^/«^^^*^^9H0'tlim.  Thesp<mdee 
7  H;,, ^''^'\^'-  T^'V'^'^H"'  .^^'^^t  combine  both  the  risim,^  and  fallin- 
r^;^^  Wil.  r'Ti'""  V;''''''!''  '^.^«'"«.^^'ith  a  falling  rhythm,  and  ends  with  S 
nw  '.  /  •  ,  ?  ^^'^^clil.is  begms  with  a  rise,  and  ends  with  a  fall.  The 
>'  eh  (liigbest  r>se)  of  the  v.)ice  is  called  arsis;  the  sinking  of  the  voice 
lb  called  thesis.     1  he  arsis  is  marked  by  an  acute  accent ;  as ; 

Iambus,  ^  — 

Anapest,  ^  ^  -. 

Trochee,  —  ^, 

Bactvl,  -  --  >- 

Spondee,  either  -^  -,  or  -  -^. 

Creticus,  with  two  arses,  -  -  -. 

Bacchlus,  ^  -  -. 

Choriambus,  which  two  arses,  ± -^  ^  ±, 

lonicus  a  minore,  -  >-  -i  _. 

lonicus  a  majore,  —  ^  ^  ^. 

a  I  .^pcMHhMi. ;  ----.  an  AntispMsius.     All  tlii.  is  n.ei'e  theorJticjU  specXio^     WV 
exireniely  rare  occurrence.  ' 


tlie  Bacchlus,  aud  the  two  Ionics  are  of 


392 


APPENDIX  Vn. 


PEOSODY. 


393 


Pliiiiiaiiiiii 

^  1«.  Tl.c  last  syHable  „t  <>very  verse  (^ lUi  can        ^  ^^_^^  ^^^^^_ 

m:',.-  he  either  slicrl  or  Ions,  ^^ l"',"^  /'.':;, '«e  mav  l.e  sul.stiUUe.l,  and 
Tims,  when  tl.e  last  foot  'f^J^'^l^^p^^.'^u.H  syllable.  (^e„- 
vice  versa.  Wl.en  tl.e  '^'«t  <  '^  ;^^^.^,"  •„,  pl,iee.  When  the  last  toot 
crally  called  a  Inbrachys)  i.  y  ^'^,  ";'.", 'i^,i  ,„„v  be  used, 
is  an  iambus,  two  short  syllables  (!>>'  '""' !"' "  -^  ,^^.„,,-„  ,,  ..eiscfoot  (hi 
,  ,».  C.K.r,...  (.narked  1)  ■^»''!;-'  y;'^.,:  ^^rvtlnns^t'.er  tl.e  thesis) 
fallh.i;  rhytl....a  alter  the  arsis  ;.;""' .".''^y';l,„e  are  leet.  But  at  least 
Vhe.-?  .naV  be  as  n.a.iy  9*«"J,*   "  ;^.:,  '.'"n^w    ,Vr  ..f  n.ore  thai.  t«-o  leet. 

one  caesura  is  "«"'^«'^^''1  «^^      ;Vm  ,he  "ir^  »^'<>'-''  ""^  o-.^nv^  mn^\  "« 
There  is  genera  ly  ^'•"•''''",1'","  "eiBsi.ra.  it  divides  the  line  inlo  two 
used.     If  there  is  only  (.ne  "«''''^t;:^  >,„*'*,  .■„;.,.  ,i,aii   the  seeo.id  by  one 
^arts,  the  tirst  of  wh.eh  '^S^^^^f  >,,,.'. ''divided  into  three  parts,  a.- 
uora.     If  there  tire  two  "?'    ;^'      ^/^Th.s  in  the  epic  hexameter  the 
cording  to  the  principle  ot  ''.;"";«■ , . 'X(^^.,  „,«  n.ila  a.sis) ;  bi.t  tbe.c 
re.'i.la?  eiBs.ira  is  alter  the  htlh  ."'"»•  ;■ ''. '  ,i,  moiie.     The  «vsnr.e  are 
.•.-.y  be  two  ««sur,c  after  '''«^^  '  'l^^  ,,!^^tl  n"n  'n      Thns  «..«n,  Inhem^ 
,,,La  after  -''l"';;»  'X  .      ,";   ,   otS  UU^T  a  half;  peuU..ui,„e,:,  a  c.e- 
flifcw  means  a  ciCbU.a  at  t.  in  i 
snra  after  live  nior»  and  a  hal  ,  etc.  ._^  ^j^^,,,,. 

1.   Wl.e.i  a  wo.d  ends  in  a  vowU    ^"^'  ,,,  j^  ,ikU'd.  and  not 

vowel  or  an /«,  the  final  vi.wel  c.f  the  ircc,mn„  ^^  „,g 

pronounced,  the  tw,.  ^"^' ^!="!^.J^^i'^,^^^My  v^oy'^^^^^-»»^^  ^»'^'? 

^„,ric-.l  value  of  snch      l'-;'  "   ,1""  i  |'\^c qnions  arc  found  here  and 

1  ,..:fi.   on   <.1(UhI  vowel  (lUinouj^ii  c.\«^^^i'       ,  ,. .  .  -  ^j .  .    n<t..ad  of 


2.  When  a  wo.'d  ends  in  ,n   'l'^.'^'";\«'   p,;^^   '"v  ,wel,  is  elid.-l.  as  : 
vowel  or  A,  the  final  '"•  t.".^'' '"^'r,;     '  ji     ^icaa^'Men^  (read  .i</.:.7«. 


..«"."-■  ?n>,lf."  ",";'  ul^'i'Sf";  "  ™"l'ill",l  V-   li-^""?"»'!  'IV^'-/"''  Preco-Iln»  w.,rt  re- 


cLw').  ^^^'^^P^'h  stetenuitque  coim^  (read  ^  obstapai  sietemntque 

5.  Often  two  successive  vowels  ^rWnn  a  word  (al.so  witli  h  intervonincr) 
aiv  contracted  into  one  syllable.     Thus  dein,  hnie,  cui  are  almost  alwavs 

«J'  /' ;;;;^/^r ''''''''  ^^^^V^^  "-n-yHabics  ;  ana  delude,  a^^lX^r^U, 
acta,  (tufeo,  teren  occur  as  dissyllables. 

n'lnt  ^^I'MnT''''"''  '  T;'*l-;  •'^^•^•.^'""''^'"^''^  chnnirod  into  the  kindred  conso- 
le, J^'/     /    /  '  'f  •  /f-"' ^^^/'•'^  .;'^''^ '"-•«'•  Virir.  .En.  9,  «74  (read  '  dbjmbas  ja- 

^feaj.  11).  ^,  IZl.—Crenya  labnnt  (read  '  (/^//«^/  /<Z/>6///0.   lb.  ^n.  5,  432 
n.^^lf''T""'''^''''''■r'''''''''^^  •'''•'  dropped  between  two  consonants  in  the 
-C../r/.^r  ..,/  (Mislead  of  ralklior  est).    Hor.  Sat.  1,  3,  oS.-oTv^^ m^t^l 

Vi;ri;^^^^;r^'^''^t.'^^-^^  Cauill.7.5.-7^..W^.  (instead  o/  Lr.^^)^ 
V  11  g.  .liiii.  «,  .).)(> :  Cidfacd  (mst.  of  calefacii).  Ov.  Fast.  4,  G1J8. 

candla?)    xTr^'lvr^/or''"''"''-;."''-^'''^^/'^  !^'-'>'^  '^^  ^'^  «*  ^'^^^^  c«W/a.<i  Hnst.  of  rojice 
capillar).   \  II  -   Lcl.  .i  %     boinetiiiu's  v  i<  clijin<,r('(i  int..  the  vowel  '/  a<  ner^hUierf  il'iiTi 

^.-s<„  u-iime.-  „.  where  It  forms  <„„.  ^vlial)le  wiih  the  iiexr  vowel  (see  SI    Xo  ih     m,  ; 
b..  read  as  a  sejmn.te  syllable,  a.  IV/.^/W/^y'/e  sur,a.,,(.  Luer.  4    llii  ^    '  ^'      "'^ 

fl-^-^"^/^>./"y''"'i^"'*'*^"-"^'''*"  poets,  fiiialxof  tiieendinirs  »/.<? an-i  f.  is  freqnentlv elided 

i5.  Simple  Metref<. 

^21.  Nomenclature.  1.  Verses  consisting  of  simple  metres  (S  17) 
arc  named  after  the  number  of  th.-ir  'metres',  the  word  '  metre'  bein'^ 
taken  here  in  a  sense  ditf -rent  from  the  meaninirs  exjdained  ^13  A 
metro,  in  this  third  sense,  means  a  succession  of  two  feet  •  but  if  the  feet 
are  ./.<.7y/.y,  or  consist  of  >//.r  .yy?/.//>^e.s,  each  foot  constitutes  a  metre  by 
Itself  1  hus  the  epic  hexameter,  consisting  of  six  dactyls  (or  their  substt 
tiifet*),  has  .s».r  metre>^,  whence  it  takes  its  name.  But  a  verse  consisting 
<)t  SIX  iambs,  trochees,  or  anajiests.  etc.,  is  called  a  trimeter.  THmeter 
irn^ins  a  verse  ot  two  metres;  tetrameter,  o{  four ;  pentameter,  of  iire. 

-   It  ail  the  'melres'  of  a  verse  are  ccmiplete,  the  verse  is  called  acat- 
ALECTic.     But  if  tlie  last  for)t  or  metre  is  lackimr  one  or  more  svllabies 
the  verse  is  called  catalectic  {ui  sylbdjam,  or  d/ssi/llaba?,i,  according  as 
one  or  two  syllables  are  wanting).     It  is  called  uypercatalectic,  if  the 
last  metre  or  foot  contains  a  syllable  in  addition  to  its  regular  number 


'18 


394 


APPENDIX  Vn. 


PBOSODY. 


395 


and   the  two   loniCS.      1»«  oiiici    i<- 

elu  ,l.!\H.d  in  vured  metres  (sec  belo^v).  ^^^^^^^  ^^^ 

^  22.  lAMiuc  v^:usES.     In  every  Ian^>  c  ver^e.  tl  e  sn  ^^    ^^.  ^^^^^^^^^.^. 

bv  a  Ion-  syllable,  so  ^»»^^1  «\^^^     "  "^^,  ^ts  «r./^)  may  be   ivplac-etl   bv  t  n« 
the  loniF  syllable  o    an  lambu.  {i.  e  it.  ;t       ;^  ^^  ^3  ^^  ^.^^^^  ^^^^^  .  ^  ^  ^^^, 
short  svllabU'S  (a  tnbrachys^  -  -.  J    a,  >  ,,,|,,,iuuea  feet  should 

in  No.  1  and  3  ;  ^^ {^^1^^^;^^'^^  below).     The  most  frequent  of 
be  scanned  and  read    ke  I*^»;  ;^  ^^^^^^        ,,^  senarius. 
Limbic  verses  is  the  In.nete^  f '  Jl  tLeteu 
Obs    1    The  measure  of  the  pure  Iambic  Tkimeteu  a 


/.j^J-l^-i-l--^!--' 


a.  :  Es  iml  ptidllcus  1  ^t  I  v5mx  1  f^^f  .^^'^    ^^^^'^^'Vet^are  Spondees  : 

In  the  Ibllowins  line  a  tribrachy^  (-  -  -)  '^tar.d. 
foot 


i-^s?^T^i?^^^^r5?i;?!'Sn 


The  foilovvh.g  verse  has  an  aAja;>^*«  m  UK.  u 

P5..6..ne  verna.  d.i.  ^^^^  th^^t   a^d  ^nJees  in  the  third  and  Mth  feet : 
In  the  f.dlowin-  a  dacfyl  ^ta.ulH  m  tne  n     ,  7 

Antftm!.6  1ev!ra!nUen!dltreltia.    Ilor.  J..>.  2,  d-l. 
(Scan  :  '  aut  am'  1  i6  le '  etc.)  ^  f^,^,^  ^^i^g  spondees : 

Quo,  quo,  scelesti,  ruins,  am  cm  u., 

(Soak:  qnoqu6  |  «SI6s|ti  ™'1"« '<;'' '''-l,,,  XrimoK-r  Aoatal-ctic  i'""','^"'?';*';;;" 

n'      l/;     u         e   ?' '   vvav»  a  /-»'/1«  l<"-  "/'"'"te  ",  .  ,,,  clan-e  «f  the  rhyll""  "'.'"'; 

siJiiiliiitiiHiis 

qL  nunc  I  t„;.  I  a.,  unlsnibu.  I  'l^lultina.'tl  -•■•;;  <'•     ^^^  ^,,,^,  „„,  <,,  the  Aka.o 
,4,  The  DiMKTKR  IlYPEUCATALECTlc  (occimiu^  on  y 

Sirraclliisil,lWm|ll.-6r|hi».    "'"■•  C"""; ':,J„  ^,  j,,  eombinaliou  «Uh  otl.cr  verse. 
te)  -Ihe  Trimktek  Catalkctic,  u=cd  by  Horace 

'*"»«  I're'.lldei'i'.'.rdomo  I  '-"l"--^,,'\';:- jtr/'in' 'con.binatioa  wilU  the  Trimeter 


Oblf|vi6!nem  e6n|sibus.    Hor.  Ep.  10, 1. 
Ui  prfs|ca  gens  |  morta Ilium.    lb.  Ep.  2,  2. 

(e)  The  DiMKTKK  Catalectic  (the  measure  used  by  Anacreon)  occurs  in  Latin  only  in 
ine  Jater  poet;*  (rarely),  jis  :  •' 

Manu,  I  pner,  |  loqimjci.    Petr.  Frg.  2, 

§  2;{.  Trochaic  verses  are  rarely  used  by  the  Latin  poets  (except  in 
certMin  passaires  of  the  trno^ics  and  the  comics,  especiallv  Terence)  Tiie 
trochcH-s  admit  of  substituted  feet  in  the  same  way  as 'the  Iambi  in  the 
Iambic  metres  (§  22). 

Ob8.  The  foliowinsr  two  varieties  of  trochaic  measures  occur- 

ncrv  «,,T!?."M'^J^'^'*'^r^'^*'^"*^'^'^^^*^^'^^^''"^^'^""'°  ^"  a  few  epigrams  of  the  Anthol- 
ogy,  and  lu  tlie  Pervigiliuui  \  eiieris,  as: 

Cras  almet  qui  |  numqu:mra;mavit,  I  qu{qnea|mavit  |  eras  aimet. 

Ver  no|vum,  ver  |  jam  ca|u6rum,  |  vere  |  natus  |  orbis  |  est. 

The  foUmvin,-  lines  are  from  Tereiitianiis  Maurus's  didactic  poem  'Be  lUteriset  metns' 
a  ccmipoMtion  in  which  ail  possible  metres  are  used  :  *t'te/ w  ec  rneine  , 

Nulla  I  vox  hu|maiia  j  c6nstat  |  al)sque  1  septem  |  littelris, 
Rite  I  v6cailes  vojcavit  |  quas  ma|gistra  |  Graecija. 

caim.  2,  1«  (aiteiiiutely^with  the  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic,  without  any  substituted 
feet) :  N6n  5,  bur  n^que  aurelum. 

^  24.  Of  Dactylic  verses  only  two  are  frequent:  1)  the  Dactylic 
liEXAMKTi:R  AcATALECTic  (iTeuerally  Called  '  Hexameter ',  without  any 
other  addition),  and  the  Dactylic  Pentameter  Acatalectic.  ijenerally 
called  •  Pentameter  ',  without  uny  furthe.-  addition.  In  dactyHc  verses 
mi  other  ieet  can  be  substituted  but  Spondees.  The  last  syllable  of  the 
l:ist_^  foot  ()t  course,  may  be  short  (according  to  the  general  principle 
^  18),  and  hence  a  Trochee  may  appear  as  the  last  foot. 

^  25.  The  following  is  the  metre  of  the  Hexameter : 

The  sixth  foot  must  be  always  a  Spondee  (or  Trochee).  In  all  the  other 
Ieet  spondees  may  be  substituted,  except  in  the  fifth,  in  which  the  substi- 
tution of  a  Spondee  is  very  rare  (generallv  for  producing  certain  impres- 
sions on  the  mind  of  the  reader).  Hexameters,  in  which  the  fifth  foot  is  a 
Spondee,  are  called  Spondaic  Ili'xameters  [versuH  spondiacns).  Hexameters 
are  used,  without  any  other  verses,  as  the  sole  metre  in  epic  poems.  For 
their  use  in  connection  with  other  metres,  see  below  (metrical  schemes). 

Ons.  1.  Tiie  proportion  of  the  spondees  and  dactyls  in  the  hexameter  ciiieflv  depends 
on  iiu'  ta.ste  of  the  pcn-t.     Il.xameters  merely  consisting  of  spondees  are  extremely  rare 
and  conflneu  to  the  Ante-Augustan  poets,  as  : 

Olli  j  respon|det  rex  I  Alba.i  longlai.     Enn.  Frgm.  Ann.  L 

Cives  I  Romaliii  tunc  |  fiu^i  |  sunt  C'am;pani.    Enn. 

An  coe.lum  nolbis  na|tura  ul,tr6  corirupium.    Lucr.  6,  1134. 

C^uis  te  I  leni|rem  noll)is  neu  |  c6na|rere.     Cat.  116,  3. 

Obs.  2.  When  Spondaic  Hexameters  arc  exceptionally  used,  they  must  at  least  have  a 
dactyl  m  the  lourtii  loot,  as  : 

Cum  soei;i!<  na|t6que  Pe|natibns  |  et  mag'nis  dis.     Virg.  ^n.  3,  12. 

Cara  delum  sobojle:^,  maglnum  Jovis  |  increjmentum.    lb.  Eel.  4,  49. 

C6nstitit  i  atque'^)cu|lis  Phrygi|a^agmina  |  circum|spexit.    lb.  ^n.  2,  08. 

Obs.  3.  Many  dactyl>  in  succession,  express  rapidity  of  the  action  described.    Many 
epoudees  in  succesgiou  are  expressive  of  heavy  and  ponderous  work  :  • 


39G 


APPENDIX  Vn. 


PROSODY. 


397 


Q,„V,n.pe,d.ntc  pn!,r..  soniltf.  ,naUt ,  an.„>a  ,  ca^pum.    Vir..  ^«.  S,  506. 

a  ca=' ura  p,M,.lu.rann«i-  cannot  '«;?'"1> ;;y^*,^;     '  ^n?.f^,  !  «-.7,v.  iMemimerm  ; 
nlelolc6U.ator|  .En„'a,l.ic|6r>u,ab    auo. 

l:,ne.,,ne«  eUhor  of  I'";, J-^-^m  "uaSded  llTuM^rttr^t^Uor.  .jl.amc  o(  the  thud 
thi<  instance  i^eneniUy  another  ccsuru 
foot  (tioch.ic  ciusura),  as  :  _  ^  ^  3-^ 

Incipi  unt  ;i  aui,ta,a  ;i  tulme.ccre  ^  ^^^ ;^^;J    {,,  ^Ku.  4,  5S2. 

Si  tora  I  de.eruiere  fl ,  laltet  i  .ub  1  cU^u.    a^  or  ^^^  ^ 

Ver.rar..at.c^.c..u.^^^^^ 

Spargens  !  humida  1  incua  „      ii  „,„..,llv'    niniL'd   *  Pentameter  * 

In  U,e  first  ^^^  :^  ^^ l^'^^;^^ 

Ne  poBlsU  nmlquan,  | ,  Cinna,  pelr.re  fame     «;>■'•.,•  ^  ^^„^,  .„„,,. 
OB,    1    The  name  P.-ntanH-Ier  r..r  the  '^<'}^;XZ:\"^'!^<^<yi'  +  .h..  two  ar^.s  at 

S;;Le;"''ThT.exp.ana,i,.n,,fm,.tpn.s.^^^^^^^^^ 

tlieir  i^norauce  mistalvcii  the  scuciuc 

7,. '  .  .     ,     I    .  .    vv     ^.    1 


umaiier 


^    — 


^   ^    ^   \   K^   <y    -^ 


of  lyric  P'>f  y.^Va'  h  U  not     V  Vrr-     and  Horace. 

tia.,  and  Murt.ah. ;  bi.t  not  by  V  .r„  n-ictvlic  Tetrunieter  Acata- 

^  2r.  Other  dactylic^  mt^vsu^esar^eJUhe^l^^^^^^^^  .^^  combiuaUon  wilU 


soluMiie  •  -ii  Tl.o  nJt,-ii„  T  ■      .     7,''     ,      "y  ••^"S"°i"s  as  a  continuous 

lit  r  f  ;1>ertaniel'.r      t^'',''""*"''  C«'^>«'=>ic  (consisting  of  ti.e  second 

?,     IT  ""'"'"-"-'^  ( I I  r).  "««'I  Ijy  Horace  in  combinatiou 

Aca't-  lee.  p'orTT'"''''  '■  '''"'"'""  .'"•"■'''•'•<■'!"';  4)  The  Dactylic  Dimeter 
ilex;  ,e,^^^^  constsjing  of  the  fifth  and  sii.l,  fee,  of  a 

«iM.ou't  re.frtohm''' tTo-?"''  ^P"'"l''<''  «'"'  D'-x'ty's  may  be  substituted 
m4  rs  ,,  S  .nen  "in/,  "f  ^"'«.'^  ""'  "seri  in  the  classical  poets,  but 
debit's,  l5t^,hir,s).         '"'  ''"■"•  '^''■"'  '''^'^•^  (Claudianus,  Ausoiius.  Pru- 

Obs.  The  following  varietiee  of  Anapestic  verses  are  used ; 

1.  The  Anapestic  Dimeter  Acatalectic  : 

Furlt  ut  I  Phryiriuni  |  Ingeat  |  Attin 

Noil  e-r  I  lacritni.s  |  ,  Cussanidra.  modus. 

t^iua  qine  |  patiuiur  |  vlce|re  niodum.    Sen.  Ag.  fi89. 

2.  The  Anapestic  Dimeter  Catalectic,  or  Paroemiac  : 

Venlent  |  citft  .'»je|cQl;T  qnum  |  jam, 

fe6clu8  I  cSiar  6s|sa  revi  sat.     Prud.  Cathem.  10,  37, 

3.  Anapestic  Monometeii  Acatalectic  : 


^      KJ      ^ 


V-V    t^       ^ 


O  116s  I  jQvf-num, 

Sites  helta  p.iiris, 

Nee  cer  ta  tme 

Data  res  |  jtatrite 

lihetor  A,iethi.    Anson.  Prof  6   1 

tl^c^ur^I^SS!?-?,-^!^.-^-.- Ionics  ^  -'-. 


V-/      W      _£. 


V>       V_/      .i.      


v^»     vy     .z.    


Mfserarum'st  |  nCq„o  ^Imori  (  darg  Uidum  \  neciug  dulci 
mjf  a  falling  rhytlim,  '"ajore,  ;:enerally  considered  as  hav- 


-^    —    v./    w 


.^    


„ ,  ,         '"'""'  "«■•''  I  ■''•a'  videt  I  6  littore  |  nalita. 

havi4r,SuLr?;,';'t";,;;r;l;',l'^':"'"'''^'^  '"^  «"•^<"=-  ^■*--  ">-*  -o.  be  considered  a, 

linp.  ^;/-''^^^  ."""'^   BACCfirc  verses  sometimes  occur  in  intersnersed 
Ck  tip  tI'.'''^^''"''  "^'    ""^^"''  ^''''''''^''  5»  ^^»^'  Comics,  as,  ?oi   i  See 
(cn'id':^™'^"''^^'  ACATALECTIC,  consisting   of  four  AmpbimLceVs 

Tduta  velcordiulnjnata  cui.iquam'^iit  siet.    Ter.  Andr.  4,  13  foil. 


398 


APPENDIX  YII. 


PKOSODY. 


399 


\^   -«- 


B.cc.„c  T.™..M.x.KS  Ac....u.cx:c  consist  of  four  Bacc.lc  feet. 
A^uru'c  ArlchTlis  qu.  adlsSleut,  qu.lque  5p6rtct.    Ter.  Andr.  3.  2, 1. 

C.  Mixed  (Lyric)  Metres.  ,,.,,,  „f  ,•,.„( 

S3..  M«..  M.TKKS  a.e  ^^^^^^^7^^^^^"^^^ 
CO  ubined  in  ll.e  sa>ne  verse.  ,.' "  {, j  [\  ^  1^"  aiy  Skneca).  Tlieoret.cally 
the  choruses  in  ll.e  trag.;dK«  (  n  LaU",  >P>  ^      >  gome  of  these  n.ust 

tliere  is  an   endless  variety  ni  sach  t''""''"-'''  j^^-ice  by  one  or  llie 

be  considered  as  "^''^<'  '^^^":!::^:X^"  t^^-    -^^'  ''''  '•'""".'ll 

all  or  several  of  the  lyric  poels  :         ^      __  „ 

1  Alcaic  Hendecasyixabic  ^   -^   \  ^  f- 
'  Dulc^ei  I  decoirumVt  pr6  1  patria  I  mori^    ^ 

2  Alcaic  Decasyllabic  -^    ^    ^   I 
N6u  sine  I  (Us  amlmOsusl  infant.    ^  .   ^   ^  , 

3.  LESSER  SArPiiic  ^    v^   I   -^   -   1         I 


^    \j 


s.   1   ^ 


J-    ^ 


J-    \j 


J.    \J 


X.      \J 


^  \  ^  ^ 


^  W  v^  1  ^  ^  I -«■  ^  >  ^  "^  • 


""t.  del6,  o,r6  SyMri,,,  I  car  propelra,  a,,n,.udo       ^  

5    Greater  AucHiLociiiAN  -^^      '  ..tnr..d  • 

In  tlu-  first  three  feet,  Spontlees  muy  "^^^"^^^^ 
Sulvitur  1  acri«  hile.ns  grajta  vice  |  \en.  |  et  iahOm. 

6.  Glyconian  ^  ^  I   ^    v^    ^   I   ^    ^ 
Nilraor;talibuslardui'*t. 

7.  Phkrecuatean  -^         ' 
eras  dolnaberis  I  h«do.  \   ^    ^    yj    J-   \ 

8.  LESSER  ASCLEPIAPEAN    ^     -    ' 

Miecelnas  fitSvis  1  edite  r61g.bUs.^  ^^^^l^w-^ 

9.  Gkeater  AscLEPiADEAN  .  ^,      j,^  choriatubus  : 
being  the  les.er  Asclep.adean.  increased  Dy 

TaneUn=4sierl., scire  nefas^q«u.mnu,qnu,nlUbL 

10.  Aristophanic  ^    w    ^   I 
Sanguine  |  vipt^'rino. 


\j 


J-    I    w 


J-   \j   yj 


J.\      KJ     ^^^ 


e,ul  in  a  vowei,  ^v^Jjeu-.- "'■;•;•-.-  ,,,  ^^  ,^,  ^,,o  /"711.^"^^;^  called  asyna.rc.e  nU- 
eliMon  of  the  P';f  «^^^"^f    « ^'^ '  ,,^^,1,,,^  «f  a  rea-on  why  '  \»L^«J,*^:^;V,^.   especially  <ince 

&g,-.s-  t.honld  not  *^.'  >''fl^'t  member  must  be  always //t«r/Hio^^^^^^^^^^^  the  ancient  gram- 

?fu.last  ^y^Hb  eo  tl.e  n.>^  member  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^      ^^--^^the  S  n  srummar..    The  ^- 
of  tht^seasyiuute  eNcr.c  ^  re  .-c hoed  in  the  mouciu  « 

vnarians,  ^vh.ch  might  i'^^^^^^^^         following  lines: 
called  Eleoiambic  consiM^  ui 

X.    \^    ^    \    -^ 


J-      \      ^ 


s.    \    ^    -^ 


• 


The  Jambelegiac  consists  of  the  same  lines  in  reversed  order 

J  i.e  I  niAPEiAN  consists  of  a  Glyconian  verse  (No.  6),  and  a  Pherecratrean  (^o  7^ 

B.  The  Metrical  Scheme!^.  1.  Nomenclature. 
^  J12.  A  poem  consists  of  re,ii:u]ar  or  irregular  metres.  Irregfl\r 
METHKs  r«)ntam  several  different  kinds  of  verse  without  any  plan  ob- 
y^^-vx^^a  in  the  succession  of  the  metres.  Tims  many  of  the  clloral  songs 
in  the  tra^^.'dy  contain  irreirular  metres,  consisting  of  Sapphic,  Glyconian, 
Alcaic  Dactylic,  Anapestic,  Iambic,  and  other  metres,  without  any  sys- 
tem in  the  succession  of  these  dilferent  metres. 

Kegular  metres  are  those  in  which  either  one  and  the  same  kind  of 
verses  is  repeated  without  any  other  kind  intervening   (for  inst     if  a 
poem  consists  only  of  Hexameters,  or  only  oi  Senarii,  or  ^/^/y  of  Ascle- 
inadean  verses,  etc.)   or  in  which  different  kivxU  of  verses  are  joined  to 
iitrophe.%  all  ot  which  contain  exactly  the  same  succession  of  the  metres. 
^  33.  If  a  poem  contains  only  <?;*€  kind  of  verses  indefinitely  repeated 
It  IS  called  MONosTicirox,  or  MoxocoLox.-If  a  poem  consists  of  strophes, 
AMI!»  ditterent  kinds  ol  verses,  we  distiniruish  1)  the  number  of  the  kinds 
ot  verse  empl(,yed  ;  2)  the  number  of  the  lines  occurring  in  each  strophe. 
1  lie  number  of  the  kinds  of  verse  employed  is  designated  by  the  Greek 
word  COLON  ^y,th  the  required  numeral  prefix.     If  the  strophe  contains 
two  difi.Tent  kinds  of  verses  it  is  named  diadon  (as  for  inst.  the  Ele"-iac 
J  entameter,  the  lesser  Sapphic  Strophe,  etc.)  ;  if  it  contains  three  differ- 
ent kinds,  it  is  called  Tricolon  (as  for  inst.  the  Alcaic  Strophe). 

§  34.  The  number  of  lines  in  each  strophe  is  designated  by  the  Greek 
word  sTiciioN  or  STROPiiox  with  the  recpiired  numeral  prefix.  Thus  the 
l.legiae  1  cntameter  is  a  DiSTicirox,  or  distropiiox  ;  the  Sai>phic  Stanza 
IS  a  TETRASTiciiox,  or  TETRASTiiopiiox ;  tlic  sccoud  and  tliird  Archilo- 
e  nan  (according  to  our  theory)  are  tristicha  or  tristropiia.— A  com- 
plete description  of  the  metre  requires  the  joining  of  the  expressions 
I'M-  the  number  of  both,  the  cola  and  sticha.  Thus  we  designate  the  Sap- 
])luc  st:mza  as  a  dicolon  tetrastichon,  and  the  Alcaic  stanza  as  a  tricolon, 
iciraatichon, 

2.  Synopsis  of  the  Metres. 
^  35.  MoNosTiciiA.     Here  belong  {a)  the  Hexameter;  ip)  the  Senarii 
111  the  dfamatistg,  Piijedrus,  etc.,  and  the  Iambic  ^Monostichon   in   Hor 
-^!'.  U\  {c)  the  Iambic  Tetrameters  in  Cat.  2o ;  {d)  the  Choliambus  of 
(  atullus.   mentioned  j5  22,  Ors.  2;  {e)  the  Trochaic  Tetrameters  in  the 
t  ervigilium  Veneris  ;  (/)  the  lesser  Asclepiadean  (mentioned  i^  81,  No  8) 
oecumng  Hor.  Carm.  1, 1  ;  8,  80  ;  4,  8  ;  (y)  the  greater  Asclepiadean  (^"si, 
^o.  0).  occurring  Hor.  Carm.  1, 11 ;  1, 18  ;  4,  10  ;  (A)  the  lonicus  a  minore 
111  lior.  Carm.  8.  12. 

v..?r;K^/^'^v  '^•l^'^'*'"'^^  ^""-'^ '"  ^^^^  tragedy  are  monostichn.    Thus  the  lesser  Sapphic 

•i     I.;  Vi-        -L--o'JV'',*/'^^"^  nKuiosiichoii  in  Sen.  Here.  Fnr.  830-874;  lb.  Thv.  o4(> 

~  iV.,.   •  "'*•''•  '-^^-S-^^--  !•.>•  Tro.  1013-105!»  ;  lb.  Here.  (Et.  1.39-1606.     The  lesser  Asclt- 

nirraA'TcS^^t  "j;?"":;!!^^"'».  '"  ^^\  "^''•c.  F..r.  52.5%91:  Tro.  375-412;  Med.  .56-74; 

Kt"  CE  ■  1032  Iiai  ^^yco'"**"  18  ^h"»*  "«cd  Sen.  Here.  Fur.  875-894  ;  Med.  75-109 


400 


APPENDIX  \1l. 


S  16   Oi'Tirn..     The  f.-llowins  metres  are  u^ed  as  cUsticha  (which, 
^'^^r^Iel^^S^iir^J^^Sst^ -n.^;S!lier  ana  a  Pen.a.e.r 

'"^  ^r;!  Hi,.pnnac,ean.  consistin,  of  a  Trochaic  Dimeter  [§  23,  Obs.  m, 
ami  an  iambic  Trimcler  Calalect.c  (j  i'i,  OB3.  4,  t)  . 

,   Tht  fl„rrtirArc'i.ilocl>ian  strophe,  consis.in,^'  of  the  greater  Archilo- 
c,]an'"("'i:5)  with  an  iambic  Trimeter 

...,...,  ^1  ^   ^J  ^   -^-  'Hm.-rc'ann."l.'4. 
4    Tht  lamt^e/colon,  co„.i.t,n.  of  an  Iambic  Trimeter  Aeataleetic, 
and  an  Iambic  Dimeter  Aeataleetic  : 

-ii:ii:::it,i.'Hot.Ep.r-io.' 

5.  The  fi,^t  Py.hiambic,  consisting  of  a  Uexameter  and  an  lamb.c 
Dimeter  Aeataleetic :  .  ,    ,   , 

6.  ;h:Se:on"d  'p;thtt,Lwcrbein/a  Hexameter  and  an  Iambic  l-ritne- 
ter  Aeataleetic :  ,  ,  vv  i  ^ 

—  -  '  -  Y  ^^ti'^ri  t^  ^  ^      Hor.Elt  fc. 

7.  Th^  Secoml  is^lepiadean,  consisting  of  a  Glyeouiau  (§  31,  0)  and  a 
lesser  Asclepiadean  (g  31,  8)  : 

-  -  ;  ^  ^;^  Y,  '/l  -  t   ^  -  I  -  -•     «"■••  Carm.  I,  3.  13.  19.  30; 

^"i;L"Son-.e;)\ap,..c  S.™^      being  an  Aristophanic 
verse  (§  31, 10),  and  a  greater  Sapphic  (s  31,  4)  , 

"'"  -  1  -  ,-J  ,t"    ^  I  -  -  -  I  -  -  1  -  -•  n<"--Carm.l,S. 

9.  rZ  First  A^vhilLhian,  eor.sisting  of  a  Ilexatneter  with  a  Dactylic 

Trimeter  Catalectic  : 


^       K^       <J      \       -^        ^       "^ 
_£_       ^       \J       \       -C-       ^        '^ 


^  w.     Ilor.  Curm.  4,  7. 


J.  \j 


^  ^  ^ .\  ^  ^ •      ^  .i«.r  a  TTt^xameter    and  a  Dactylic  Tetrameter 
10.  The   Alcmanic,  bemg  a  iiLxamtici,  duu  a  j 

Aeataleetic  :  •    ,    v^ 

^  ^  ^ ;  1 : :  1 :  l^^^  '-^--  «'-■••  ^'-"^i-^-  2«=  ^p- '- 

■^   "^  X^  .^  ^  "^/^  Qt    n,t<  \    pfumidorod  bv  the  fframmarians  as  a 
M,V;oJil't.^'-K}.e^e^Wt -^^^^^^^^^^  (I^M),  and  Pher. 

crateaii  verse  (§  31,  7): 

t  I  U  ^w"  1  1  ^'■"catuU.  17.  18.19. 


PROSODY. 


401 


ri-L^!;  th'IIh '."'''•    '^/'f  f^>Il«wing  two  metres,  taken  by  the  ^ramma- 

T  ^-  T^^^.^^'cond  Arcliilochian,  consisting  of  (a)  a  Hexameter    (b)  in 
Iambic  Dimeter  Aeataleetic,  (.)  a  Dactylic  TrimetirCatalectlf'  ^  ^ 

^iy..l»....i         _rf 


-^     «^    w    I    ^     v-»    w    I    ^. 


-^    ^    \^   \     ^    w    ^ 


-^     V-/ 


Hor.  Ep.  13. 

ak^ctirTiU  dI'^Tio^  TH ''^";  ^^"f  f '«S  «f  («)  ^^  Iambic  Trimeter  Acat- 
aleciic':  ^       Tumeter  Catalectic,  (c)  an  Iambic  Dimeter  Acat- 

-^      v-'      \^     I      ^      V-/      w     I     ^ 

^^Iw^lvy^lw^.    Hor.  Ep.  11. 

^  3§.  Tetiiasticha.     They  are  either  dicola  or  tricola  • 

AlcJX^i^^t'^u^'^  stanza  (dicolon),  consisting  of  three  lesser 
AM.iLpi.iu(.au>»  (j5  61,  »)  and  a  Glyconian  (§  31,  6) : 


^    


-^     ^y     yy 


J-     KJ     ^ 


It  occurs  Hor.  Carm.  I.  G.  15.  24.  33  ;  II,  12  ;  III,  10.  16 ;  IV,  5.  12. 

2.  The  fourth  Asclepiadean  (tricoion).  consisting  of  ia)  two  lesser  As- 
clepiadeans,  (6)  a  Pherecratean,  (c)  a  Glyconian  :  ^ 


■^     —    I    ^     w     w    I    ^     ,^ 


It  is  found  Hor.  Carm.  I,  5.  14.  21.  23 ;  III,  7.  13 ;  IV,  13. 

SannWc^ersf.  i^^^^^^  T^^^-  (dicolon),  consis'ts  of  three  lesser 

^appnic  vei^es  (§  dl,  3),  and  an  Adonic  (j^  27,  No.  4)  : 


-^  ^  \  -i.  —  \  ^ 
-^  W  I  ^  _  I  ^ 
-^      W      W      I     ^     _ 


It  occurs  in  the  Cannon   Sneculare,  in  25  Odes  of  Hor    in  Pqf  11    41 
and  in  the  Chorus  Sen.  Med.  580-G07.  '  *  ^^' 


abics^f^Vl^'f './f '1-'^  (tricoion)  consists  of  (^)  two  Alcaic  Hendecasyl- 
^il^  dec'af;ilai;i[/;yir2/"    "  """"'"  Hypercatalectic,  and  (c)  an  li- 


W      ^      I     _     II     ^     I      ^      ^      ^ 

^     -^    I    '^     ^    I    vy     ^     v^ 
-^     w    v-»    I    ^     v^     ,^ 


Vo»      -i. 


It  occurs  in  37  Odes  of  Hor. 


LiS» 


402 


APPENDIX  MI. 


5.  The  first  Glyconian  stanza  (dicolon)  consists  of  three  Glyconians 
and  a  Pherecratean  : 


s.  —  \  J.    w    Kj  \  J.    yj    - 

X.     —     I     X.     w     <^     I       -^      KJ 


It  occurs  in  Cat.  34,  but  not  in  Horace. 

iA  39.  Pentasticha  do  not  occur  in  Horace  But  Catullus  "«ff  ^  Pen- 
Ustichon  dicolon  (Second  Glyconian)  i"  tl^«  EiMthalamium  (Carm.  61), 
which  consists  of  four  Glyconians  with  a  Pherecratcuu  (bee  ^  J»  o). 


END  OF  PART  L 


VOCABULARIES. 


/if  01 


I.  NOUNS   OF  THE   FIRST  DECLENSION, 
abstinontia,  abstinence.       Icoiiscientia,  comcience.       .ffloria,  ahrv 

a  lolo s!!.' nli '  ''^'"t''^'-      Iconstnntui,    instancy,       kruuuuuticn,  gramMar. 
^^^<^^nU^,  youth,  young.    Mmnes..  Wtv^. .favnr%.fiu,n^. 

.■'^'      .        .         ^  (^onimcuUix,  abstinence.       Ihastu, /a//te. 

advena,  immigrant,  stran-  coDtrover.sia,  controversy, '  herba,  plant. 


9'f 

lenuniia,  hardship. 

&iZT\ci)\i\.far7ner. 
Hijriciihura,  agriculture. 
a  la,  icing. 
alaiula,  Itrk. 

nWeu'iiltina,  foreigner. 
muewUn^foiiy. 

annit'A'ux.,  frendnhip. 
aiiima,  breath 


dispute,  strife.  '     historia,  hUtory. 

contiiniacia,    disobedience, ifioniiclda,  murderer. 


obatinacy, 
contmnelia,  disgrace 


hora,  hour. 
igiiuvia,  indolence. 


coil  viva,  giust,  table-corn-  icrnominia,  disgrace 


panion 
corona,  crown. 
corriiptela,  corruption 
culpa,  guilt. 
eura.  core. 


fi\mbx\i\,  provisions,  grain,  curia,  rj)urt,  senate-house. 


di-a,  goddts^i 
dementia, /b^^^. 
de?.idia,  laziness. 
diligeiitia,  diligence. 
distantia,  diHance. 
discipllnu,  discipline. 
disc'ordia,  discord. 
doc'trina,  scholarship 


aqua,  tvater. 

aquila,  eugle. 

ara,  altar. 

arrotrantia,  arrogance. 

assccla,  follower. 

atstutiu,  cunning. 

andaeia,  boldness. 

avaritia,  avarice. 

bar  ha,  beard. 

Belga,  Belgian. 

beiievuleniia,  benevolence 

be^tia,  beaH. 

bil)rK.theca,  library. 

l»la(i(litia,^a««'/'y. 

ealuimiia,  slander. 

catena,  ckain.  fetter. 

caterva,  crowd,  swurm. 

Cauda,  tail. 

causa,  ctiute,  reason,  case. 

eelia,  storehouse. 

chart u,  mper. 

chiva,  club. 

cleriKMitia,  cUmency,  mild-  fossa,  'ditch. 


ijriiorantia,  ignorance. 
i in  pe 1 1  sae,  expenses. 
ill) prudent ia,  imprudence. 
incohi,  inhabitant. 
industria,  industry. 
indultrentia,  indu'lgtnce. 


custodia,  custody,  prison.  mWrnwo.,  infamu 


jnjnna,  injury,  wrong. 
injustitia,  injustice. 
iunocentia,  innocence. 
iiiopia,  want,  poverty. 
insula,  island. 
itividia,  envy,  hatred. 


na,  / 

, .^.         .iracundia,  f«"^^'' 

Q\*i^'M\UA.  elegance,  i^aw^y.'jactura,  loss. 

^\o(^\\Q\\Uii^  eloquence,  -- -  =  ^-      •     ■• 

epistola,  letter. 

i]iy^\\\i\,jfable. 

tallacia,  intrigue,  fallacy. 

i]xn\di,fame,  rumor. 

iemina, /Vwa/e.  woman. 

feiocia,  wild n ess. 

fi'iuc'ia,  confidence. 

fi;:ura.  figure,  form. 

tilia,  daughter. 

flaniina.  flanie. 

t'oruii\,Jorni. 


II  ess 
ccena,  dinner. 
colonia,  colony. 
cohnnna,  column. 
coinoedia,  comedy. 
coueordia,  harmony. 


t'nrmuii.  fortune. 
frequentia,  frequency. 
\\\\l:i.  flight. 
Galiia,  Gaul. 
jfalliiia,  ken. 
Germuniu,  Germany, 


^xxi^X'Mxn,  j  ustice. 
hicriina,  tear. 
laetitia,  gladness. 
libra,  pound. 
litrera,  letter. 
lingua,  tongue,  language. 
luna,  moon. 
luxuria,  luxury. 
niedeelna,  medicine,  relief, 
nu'Uioria,  memory. 
ni"rcatuia.  cxmmei'ce. 
militia,  military  service. 
miseria,  misery. 

niisericordia,  pity,    syrri' 
pathy. 

modestia,  modesty, 
mora,  delay. 
narura,  nature. 
uauLa,  sailor. 


404 

necrliirentiii,  negligence, 
obediontiii,  obedience. 
ora,  shore. 
opera,  labor,  effort. 
patieiitia.  p'ttmnce. 
puiria,  Koae's)  c<>untry. 
peon  Ilia,  money. 
perti.Ha,  treachery. 
perfufXa,  deserter. 
perseveruiitia,    persever- 
ance. 
philosophia,  philosophy. 
pirilta,  pirate. 
poe»  >  a,  pun  ishment. 
poet  a  poet. 
porta,  i/ate. 
prseUu,  booty. 


VOCABULARIES. 


iprce^tantia,  exrellence. 
\)\<.^\\\\i:\:\^  province . 
pnidentia,  P^'Wt^e/K^^' 
pnelhi,  girt. 
piisTtia,  battle. 
rapliia,  rablery. 

IreiTiiia,  qnet-n,. 
rciTiila,  ruU. 
rlj.a,  bank  (of  a  river.) 
rosa,  ro.^e. 
sajvitia,  crnelty. 
^agilta,  arrow. 
sapifutia,  wisdom. 
r^eli"la,  s<'h"oL 
seieiitia,  knowledge, 
stTil)a,  scribe. 
sella,  chair. 


f^<iniQr\t\nyf>entencejOpinio% 
>\\\iJi,/orest. 
>tatua,  statue. 
Stella,  4ar. 
superl)ia.  pride. 
tabula,  table,  pirtare. 
terra,  earth,  cnmlry,  land. 
traLM-Mlia,  tragedy. 
tristitia,  sadness. 
\\n>\i\,vav^. 

ve  11  i  ft,  permission  jorgit*' 
ness. 

via,  way,  road. 

victoria,  victory. 

vi<;ihuitia,  vl<jilanc^. 

vita,  life. 

tutela*  jirotection. 


II.    NOUNS  OF  THE  SECOND   DECLENSION. 

1.    WITH    THE    EXDINOS    U8    AN»    VTH. 


acervns,  heap. 

Uilvor^arius,     adversary, 
enemy. 

aetimlns,  rival. 

serarinm,  treasury. 

fiBviim,     age     (period     ot 
lime.) 

».\\\\i:\\^,  friend. 

uiiiinus,  soul^  7nind,  cour- 
age. 

aniuihts,  ring. 
«imiis,  year 


coD^ilinm,    plan,    advice,' jraudmm Joy 


purj'Ose,  itieasure 
eon>oriiuin,  company. 
coiivieiiun.  abuse. 
di'cretiun,  decree. 
(lelieliiiii,  misdeincanor. 
de^illerinln,  desire. 
letrimcutiun,  loss.,   dam- 
age. 
\\\y:\X\\f^,  a  finger. 

liscipuliis,  sc/wlar,  disci- 
ple. 


'^Znentu.n,    argumerd,Uocnme}mun,  evUence. 

proof  Ulolus,y;-a«'/. 

artiticMUTi,  artijice,  tricK. 
anrmn,  gold. 
auxiliiitn.  help,  assistance 
uvus,  grandfitth(r. 
barharus,  barbarian. 
helium,  ivar. 
beneticiuui,  benefit,  favor 
brachiuiu,  arm 


calamus,  reed,  pen. 
<i&,\\\\>\\^.  field. 
ca 1 1< I i « i at u s ,  cand idate. 
Capitoluiin,  the  Capitol. 
captlvns,  prisoner. 
cera.-^u^,  cherry-tree. 
cerebrum,  brain. 
c\\n\s,  food. 
circulus,  circle. 
coelum,  heaven. 


domiuus,  master. 
doMJUS,  house. 
Ion  u  111,  gift,  present. 
eqnus,  horse. 

exeidium,  »  destruction. 
exitiuin,      ) 
exeuipluin,  example. 
\\\\nn\,fate. 
till  us.  son. 
tlairitium,  crime. 


German  us,  a  German. 
^la<iius.  sword. 
humus,  ground. 
imperium,    empire,    pow- 
er. 
iiuvn«lium,  cnnfiagrafion. 
ineepluui,  um/eHaling, 
inireuiuin,  mind,   genius^ 

tale /it. 
iniuiieus,  enemy. 
iiiitiuiii,  beginning. 
Italus,  Italian. 
Judaeus,  Jew. 
T^UKiw'www.  judgm,eni. 
}\\\i\\\n.jake. 
'iumentuin,  ho)se  hiraft) 

pissum,  command,  behest 

Latin  us,  Latin. 

lectus,  beil. 

lefriituui,  bequest. 

letratus,  ambassador. 

letum,  d*-ath  (violent) 

11  hertus,  freed  man. 

loeus,  place. 


tluvius,  river. 

forum,  market-place  (the|lueus,  grove 

place  fur  judicial  busi-  lupus,  wolt 

ncs.s  in  Rome), 
frajrnientuin,     fragment, 

piece. 
frumentum,  grain,  provi 

sidiis 


cTlles',\Vmr.o%€,   gaiU, '  fuoduuientum,     founda 

board  ^'^'"" 

commod-im,  advantage.       fundus,  estate. 
oomiuercium,  commtrcs.  'iurtuni,  tfu/t. 


nuiluui,  evil. 
niedicus,  physician. 
iiUMubrum,  limb. 
ine!iducium,,/''</^6Aoo<f. 
men*lieus,  beggar, 
merit um,  merit. 
inetallum,  rnetal. 
miraeulum,  miracle. 
muiiu  men  turn,  manumeni 


momtntwrn,  force,  impor- 
tance. 

morbus,  dise^ise,  sickness. 

niodu-»,  manner,  means. 

in  11  nd us,  wi>rld. 

mudinientum,  fortifica- 
tion. 

muriis.  wall. 

ncirotium,  business,  affair. 

Humerus,  number. 

ir.unmus,  ce»in. 

iiuntius,  m4;ssenger,  mes- 
sage, news. 

ecu  I  us,  eye. 

odium,  hatred. 

ottieium,  duty,  service. 

oj)pidanus,  inhabitant  (of 
a  town). 

opf>idutY^,  town. 

0[>probrium,     reproach, 

ornumentum,  ornament. 

otium,  leisure. 

oraeuium,  nracle. 

patricius,  patrician. 

jieeeatum,  sin,  offence. 

pertutriuin,  refuge. 

j>ericulum,  danger. 

piiilosoplius,  philosopher. 

plausirum,  wagon.  \ 


Afer,  African. 
a^'er,  field. 
adulter,  adulterer. 
aper,  boar. 
arbiter,  umpire. 
armiirer,  armor-bearer. 
auster,  south-wind. 
cancer,  crab. 
caper,  goat. 


VOCABULARIES. 


plebepis,  plebeian. 
I'cenus,  Carthaginian. 
populus,  pettple. 
populus,  poplar. 
praeceptum,  precept. 
j»ra}tVetus,  jirrfect. 
priemium,  reward. 
praesidiuin,  garrison. 
pratum,  meadow. 
pretiiim,  value,  price. 
prineii>ium.  principle 
prceiiiun,  battle. 
promissum,  promise. 
proj)iiiquiis,  relative. 
propositum,  purpose. 
retrnum,  kingdom. 
reus,  accused. 
remedium,  remedy, 
Komatiius,  Roman, 
saxum,  rock. 
scutum,  shield. 
secretum,  secret. 
sepulerum,  grave. 
servus,  sl<iVf. 
siearius,  assassin. 
Siculus,  Sicilian. 
sign  urn,  sign,  signal,  sta- 
I     tue. 
Isocius,  ally,  companion. 

2.    K- STEMS. 

coluber,  serpent. 
culter,  knife. 
faber,  mechanic. 
irener,  son-in-law, 
lil>er,  book. 
liberi,  children. 
inatrister,  teacher. 
minister,  assistant. 
oleaster,  wild  olive. 


405 


solum,  soil. 

sonuiium,  dream. 

sonnius,  shep. 

Spartanus,  Spartan. 

spectaculum,  sight. 

(Stilus,  pen,  pencil. 

stimulus,  sjyur. 

stipend ium,  pay.  fee. 

studium,  zeal,  effort,  study 

suttrajjfium,  vote. 

taurus,  steer. 

tectum,  roof. 

templum,  temple. 

testimonium,  testimony. 

tribunus,   trifmne  (repre- 
sentative of  the  peofile). 

triumph  us,  triumph. 

tyrannus,  tyrant, 

vadum,./'(7ra!. 

vallum,  rampart. 

\QX\e\\\\m,  poison. 

verbum,  word. 

viclnus,  neighbor. 

vie  us,  village,  street. 

vinculum,  bond,  chain, 

vinum,  wine. 

vitium,  vice,  fault. 
|Votum,  vow. 
t valgus,  7nob. 


onager  [onafrrus].  wild  ass 
pinaster,  wild  pine. 
puer,  boy. 
presbyter     [eeclesiasticaJ 

Latin],  elder. 
sijjnifer.  standard-bearer 
^occr,  father-in-law. 
vesper,  evening. 
vir,  7nan. 


in.   NOUNS   OF  THE  THIRD   DECLENSION. 


adolcscens,  young  man. 

aer.  air. 

fes,    bronze,  brass. 

aeias,  aoe. 

amor,  Uwe. 

Hnimul,  animal. 

anser,  goose. 

upis,  hee. 

arbor,  tree. 
ui's,  art, 
artlfex,  artist. 
arx,  castle. 
Ailieniensis,  Athenian. 


auctor,  author. 

auetoritas,  authority. 

auris,  ear. 

avis,  bird, 

bos,  ox,  cow. 

brevitas,  shortness. 

cadaver,  corpse. 

caedes,  mur'Ur,  slaughter. 

ealamitas,  disader. 

calcar,  spur. 

eulor,  heat. 

caput,  head,  capital, 

car  bo,  charcoal. 


career,  prison. 
carmen,  poem, 
euro,  ffes/i,  meat. 
celeritas,  swiftness. 
certamen,  strife,  struggU. 
eivis,  citizen,' 
ci vitas,  state,  city. 
elades,  deftat. 
clamor,  shouting, 
cVdx>x>\^,  fleet. 
clavis,  key. 
cognomen,  surname. 
oollis,  hill. 


T 


406 


VOCABULARIES. 


color,  color. 
couK's,  coinpankm. 
coin  lit io,  ci'intitiofi. 

coiiiuriitio,  von-viiac;t-         •, -,— 

coiiViu-tu  io,  habit,  cud»m\Uu\  Uuef. 
consul,  consul  [ouu  of  the!  turor,./ '/ry. 
twoc'liiet-ni:igsirutct>ol  liisii>,  club 


the  licjhtiung  that  ap- 

PEAHS. 

funis,  r"pe. 
Uxwns./uneral. 


KoiiieJ. 
cor,  heart. 
corpus,  bi/di/. 
crus,  leg. 

eustos,  ijuanl,  guardian. 
«tefeiisor,  Ut/endtr. 
dens,  to<>tk. 
climcuilus,  dijirulfi/. 
dijrui'iis,  ditjiuti/. 
(iisputiitio,  discussion. 
doior,  jD  nn. 

dux,  kaltf,  commander. 
emtio,  purchase. 
eint"r,  paickaser,  h"yer. 
eqm>,     Uioiuan)    knight^ 

hitrsitnan. 
error,  mi-take. 
exousutio,  tJTftiee. 
expediiio,  expedition. 

lueinus,  d^ed. 

factio,  part//^  /action. 

falx,  .sickle. 

fuinca,  hunger. 

Ww  or, /a  cor. 

tVbris,/t-ivr. 

fel,  bile,  gall. 

tims,  lloiit,  end,  bonnd^irT/ 

^cimau.jlamen  [pkikst  of 

A    SPECIAL    DKITV]. 

^on^jlower. 

fluMK-n,  river. 

tbedu^s,  treat//. 

fo\\^,/(ju/itain,  source.   • 

tbrtiiutlo,  bntveri/. 

I'ruter,  brother 

i'nxxi^,  fraud. 

friirus,  cold. 

frous  I  tis ), f» re /lead,  front 

frons  {t\iA).f(dtagej  Uavts. 

i'vuK,  jield  fruit. 

i^'Y'"''    [lightning. 

Fulinen,    the   liglitninjr 
that  8TK1KE8 ;  /ulgur, 


I ii.'i •■  ■,  ^-  — .  _  _ 

i/cMis,  pe'ple,  nation,  trine. 
Jciius,  kind,  race,  gend*r. 
gnivitiis.  weight,  dignity, 

gravity. 
errox,  herd, 

luirn>f»i'X,  soothsayer. 
heredit;is,  inheri'ance. 
hen-s,  htir.  heiress. 
I»ieni8,  Winter. 
homo,  man. 
liohOrt,  li'ihor. 
host  is,'  enemy,  fi>e. 
Iiuiinnitas,  humanity. 
\)f\\\^.  jire. 
imiiLro,  inuige. 
imb(.'r,  .shower. 
imperatof,  general. 
ill  tans. 2  child: 
ijiterro^aiio,  question. 
iter,  much. Journey,  road. 
juveiiis,  youth,  young  man 
juv^■nlu^,    youth,    young 

age. 
labor,  labor,  hardship. 

Uic,  milk. 

lapis,  stone. 

\:i\i»,  praise. 

le>;io,  legion. 

lepus,  hare. 

U'X,  law. 

lihi-rtas,  liberty. 

lil^do,  por-'sion, 

lis,  lawsuit. 

lit  us.  coast. 

loiitritudo,  length, 

lux,  Itght. 

ma<;niiUilo,  greatness. 
margo,  margin. 
in  AS,  mak. 
mater,  mother. 
mens,  viind. 
merces,  pay,  wages. 
merx,  ware. 
messis,  Ji^rvest. 


miles,  sr>l,JieT. 
moiis,  7n">inta%n. 
mors,  death. 
inos,  habit,  custom. 
mulier,'  woman. 
]  miiltilutlo,  inultitudii. 
i\\\\\\\\>,  gft. 
mils,  mouse. 
natio,*  nation, 
nuvis.  ship. 
nix,  snoUK 
notnen,  name. 
nox,  night. 
Mumt'ii,  dtity, 
nux,  nut. 
ob>es.  ho.4age. 
ob>idio.  sitge. 
occa^io,  occasion. 
onus,  buiden. 
opinii»,  opinion. 
o\>\n)YU\\\\\ii^,opl>ort  unity 

opus,  work. 
orator,  orator. 
orbis,  circle. 
ordo,  order,  rank. 
oiiiTo,  origin. 
'OS  'oris),  ni"uth. 
ort  (o*>is),  6<y««. 
ovi>,  shttp. 
pains,  marsh. 
paiii>,  bread. 
\n'kr*i\\»,  partnt. 
paries,  wail  (of  a  house), 
pars,  part,  party. 
\K\Wr,  father. 
paupertas,  poverty. 
pavor,  ti  emblcng. 
pax.  p^ace. 
pecten,  comb. 
\>\ty:\\\>,brea'^t. 
pecus  [u  Jisj,  head  of  catiU 
peous  [6ri>J,  cattle  lU  the 

ABSTRACT. 

pedes,  foot-solditr . 

pes,/oO^ 

piseis,^>A. 

plebs,  the  Plebeians, 

pondurt,  weight. 

pons,  bridge. 

pout  i  fex,  chief -priest. 

praeceptor,  teoclur. 


1  ^,/r^r«,/rtK«,aPOUTiCALoruTEBAKTencmy;  i«im.cu«,  a  private  encrty;  hostis, 

'  -/^S,7:r'eLe's  own  children;  infantes  to  chUdren  in  general,  fron.  the  riRsr  to  the 

BEVKNTH  year. 

1  J/«Z»^r  is  opposed  to  rir; /'7«'"'«  to  ma«.  ,        ^-^^  ?„  nB-virRA.t 

4  I^'atio  is  a  FoBKioN  (generally  barbarous)  nation.     Gens  \%  nation  in  oknebal 


VOCABULARIES. 


407 


praB'lo,  robtfer. 

priiiceps,  chief. 

pulcritudo,  I'eauty. 

j>ulviriar,  couch,  cushion. 

pulvis,  dust. 

quaj>tio,  questUm,  trial. 

qiiies,  repose. 

radix,  root, 

ratio,  system,  method,  rea- 
son. 

regrio,  reyioyi. 

relii:i<i,  reverence,  conscien- 
tiousness, religion. 

rex,  king. 

ru«,  country. 

nacerdos,  pri 


88 

(>a 
sal 


f>s,  priest, 
salt. 


cell,      C»t<C/t/. 

sal  US,  welfare. 
saiijriiis,  blood. 
see! US,  crime. 
Bcriptor,  writer. 


[secuns,  axe. 
jsedes,  seat. 

soLTes,  crop  [standing], 
senator,  senator. 
senectus,  old  age. 
senex,  ol/  man. 
|Sermo,  language,  speech. 
|.'*ocietas,  company, 
sol,  sun. 
soror,  sister. 
Isors,  lot. 
stercus,  manure. 
sus,  swine. 
Huspici(»,  suspicion, 
temeritas,  rashness. 
tem{)estas,  storm. 
tern  pus,  time. 
i\mov,  fear. 

traditio,  surrender,  deliv- 
ery. 
turris,  tower. 


tussis,  cough. 

nrbs,  city. 

utilitas,  usefulness, 

uxor,  wife. 

valetutlo,  health. 

vail  is,  valley. 

vas,  vasis,   vessel. 

vas,  vadis,  bondsjtuin, 

vates,  seer. 

vectlsral,  tax. 

ver,  spring. 

Veritas,  truth. 

vestis,  oarment. 

virjro,  virgin. 

virtus,  braVf.ry,  virtuo. 

v\;<.  force,  power,  violence. 

volujitas,  pleasure, 

vox,  voice,  word. 

vulnu»,  wound. 


IV.   NOUNS  OF  THE  FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

ipradu 


IS,  degree. 


acus,  needU. 

a«f>eetus,  .sight.  [frustus,  taste. 

aditus,  access,  approach.      habitus,  hearing,  plight. 

ambitus,  bribt-ry  [tor  ob-i ictus,  stroke. 


tainincf  okfue.J 

anus,  oil  wmnan. 

appetituH,  desire. 

areus,  arch. 

audit  us,  hearing. 

canttis,  song. 

casus,  accident,  case. 

census,  census. 

coetus,  assembly. 

coiieursus,  concourse. 

conspectus,  sight. 

consuiatus,  consulship. 

cultiis,  culture. 

currus,  wagon. 

cursus,  course. 

delectus,  choice,  draft. 

equitatus,  cavalry. 

exercilus,  army. 

exitus,  issue,  end. 

fletus,  weeping. 

fluetus,^>W. 

fremitus,  noise. 

fructu.s,  fruit. 
... 
jfemitus,  wintmg. 

gestus,  bearing. 


I  impetus,  attack,  violence. 
intellectus,  intelligence. 
int«;ritus,  ilestruction. 
1  act  us,  loss. 
lacus,  lake. 
1  net  us,  7nourning. 
lusus,  play. 
lux  us,  luxury. 
niagistratus,  magistrate. 
man  us,  hand,  baud. 
n\GU\*,fear. 
inotiis,  motion. 
nuriis,  daoghter-in-law. 
nutiis,  htnt. 
occasiis,  setting. 
oltactus,  smell. 
ortus,  rising. 
partus,  birth. 
pen  us,  provisions. 
passus,  step. 
porticus,  2^'^^'tico. 
portus,  harbor. 
potus,  drink. 
principatus,  supremacy. 
progreHsut^,  progress. 


quae-^tus,  gain, 
quercus,  oak. 
questus,  complaint, 
reditus,  return, 
i?>ii\ins,  forest. 
senatus,  senate, 
sensus,  sense, 
sex  us,  sex. 
sinus,  bosom,,  gulf. 
situs,  situation. 
socrus,  m^other  in-law. 
spccus,  cave. 
spiritiis,  breath,  spirit, 
status,  state. 
strepitiis,  noise. 
sumtus,  expense 
tact  us,  touch. 
toiiitriis,  thunder. 
Iribunatus,  tribunate, 
tribus,  tribe. 
tumultus,  tumuU. 
us  us,  use. 
versus,  verse. 
vestltus,  attire. 
victiis,  sustenance, 
visus,  sight. 
vuhus,  glance,  mien. 


V.   NOUNS   OF  THE  FIFTH   DECLENSION. 


acies,    keenness,    line 

Itattle. 
barbaries,  rudeness. 


of 


cresaries,  head  of  hair, 
canities,  hoariness. 
oarici»,  rottenness. 


congeries,  heitp^piU, 
dies,  day. 
diluvies,  deluge. 


408 


VOCABULARIES. 


eflfifrics,  imagf. 

ehivies,  washing  cucay,  m- 

vntiaiion. 
facie:!*,  facfi 


materies,  material.,  timber. 
im-ridifs,  midJay. 
molitie^*,  effeunnacrj. 
muudities,  deannesa. 


ytermcies,  d^suuction. 
j.liinities,  plain. 
prosreiiies,     lineage.,   pro- 
geny. 
rabies,  fury,  madness. 


res,  thing,  nj^air. 
vaiiies,  bloody  matter, 
.seabios,  itch. 
sesrnitieH,  lazinexn. 


'crie-»,  e'r-i'f,  >'• 


fiAv^,  faith. 
placit's,  si/wothntKS,  ice. 
iutjluvies,  gltittouy. 
luxuries,  luxury. 
macies,  leanntss. 


l)ecies,/or//i,  shapv. 
superficies,  surface. 


ftn^nstiae,  narrows^  nar- 
row places. 

arirutiae,  xcit. 

Atlienae,  Athens. 

bi^'ae,  tico-horse  chariot. 

CalfJiaae,  the  first  of  the 
month. 

cunae,  cradle. 

delioiae,  delight. 

diviti:ie,  riches. 

excul)iae,    watches.,   senti- 

iiel/i. 
exscquiae,  funeral. 
exuviae,  spoils. 


arm  a,  arms. 
armamenta,  armament. 
catioelli,  bnlustradts. 
eibaria,  viHiKils. 
clathri,  trellis. 
codieilli,   note-booh.,  writ 
mg. 


VI.  PLURALIA  TANTCM. 

1.  FIRST    DECLENSION. 

facetiae,  pleasantry. 
feriae,  vacation.  _ 
iudutiae.  armistice. 
int'eriae,  sacrifices  in  honor , 

of  the  dtad. 
uumwU'd^',  enmity. 
iiisidiae,  ambascade. 
lapieidiinie,  quarry. 
inannbiae.  booty. 
niiiiae,  threat. 
Nonae.  Noms  (the  5th  or 

7th  of  tlic  iiioiillO. 
nujxae,  nonSffise. 
nundinae,  market. 

2.  SECOND    DECLENSION. 

crepnndia,  rattle. 
eunalMila.  cradle. 
exta,  intestiiia,  entrails. 
fasti,  calendar. 
lamenta,  wailing,  lamen- 
tation. 


nnptiae,  rcedding. 
parietiiiae,  old  walls. 
phalcrae,  trappings. 
quadriirae,     four-hory. 

chariot. 
reliqviiae,  remains. 
sallnae,  saH-works. 
st-ahie,  ladder. 
seopae,  br(M>m. 
S\Tac'Q>ae,  Syracusa. 
teiiebrae,  darkne.^s. 
Tliebae,  ThMs. 
trieae.  trijies. 
xiiUiiQ,  folding  doors. 


liheri,  chiliren. 
pru^eordia,  diaphragm, 
sLTta,  garlands. 
s])olia,  spoils. 
virijulta,  bushes. 


Alpe»,  Alps. 
altaria,  altar. 
aml)ai:es,  evasion,  digres- 
sion. 
com  pedes, /p^^^r. 
casses,  hunter's  net. 
cervices,  n^'ck. 
fauces,  throat,  defiles. 
fides,  lyre,  lute. 
fraces,  dregs  of  oil. 


artu»,  limhs. 


8.    THIRD    DECLENSIOX. 

ilia,/a/^^(ofthebody). 
lautia,  presents  to  ambas- 
sadors. 
leuuires,  spectres. 
majores,  ancestors. 
numes,  shades. 
nioeuia,  ivalh  (of  a  city), 
luuuia,  offu'ial  duties. 
uares,  nostrils. 
optimates,  aristocracy. 


penates,  hottsehold  godi» 
preces,  prayer. 
proceres,  nobles. 
Quirltes,  Romans. 
renes,  kidneys. 
sordcs,  filth. 
tormina,  colic patTis. 
vcpres,  thorns. 
verbera,  scouraing. 
viscera,  entrails. 


4.    rorRTlI    DECLENSION. 

Idus,    the  Ides,    (13th   or|Qninqnatrus,  a/j^^WO* «/ 
15th  of  the  mouth.)       |     Miner r a. 


TOCABULARIES. 


409 


81NODLAK. 


aqua,  wafer. 


VII.  HETEROLOGICAL  NOUNS. 

1.    FIKBT   DECLENSION. 

I  PLURAL. 


'+aqnae,  rnedicinal  springs 

t^upiac,  troops. 

cupeuiae  [cupedia,  orumj  datritiee. 

turtunae,  riches. 

gratiae,  thanks  [only  in  the  phrase 
^gratias  ayere,'  to  return  thanks], 

tlitterae,  epistle,  papers,  sciences,  litera- 
ture. 

operae,  workmen. 


oopia,  abundance. 

cupedia,  daintiness. 

yoriium,  fortune. 

gr-diin^ /avor,  influence,  thanks. 

httera,  letter  (of  the  alphabet). 

opera,  effort,  labor. 


anxilium,  help. 
bun  inn.  a  good. 
c\\m^,food. 
castrinn,  castle 


2.    SECOND    DECLENSION. 

auxilia,  resources,  avxUiary  troops, 
bona,  goods.,  property. 
cibi,  victuals. 
[castra,  camp. 


'  -—^-  casira,  camp. 


epuluin,  ba/iipiet. 
hurt  us,  garden. 
iMHuuli-nentuni,  impediment. 
Indus,  play.  game. 


rostrum,  htak. 

ifides,  temple. 
<:urcQr,  pri.ton. 
facultas,  /i/c///^y. 
nataiis,  birth  day. 
(ops)  opis,  help. 
pars,  part. 
Hal,  salt. 
vis,  power,  force. 


absurdu«»,  absurd. 
accural  us,  ace  a  rate. 
acerbus,  bitter,    hard   (of 

pains), 
acutus,     acutej    pointed, 

sharp. 
adver.sus,  adverse. 
ivjrrdtus,  stc'k. 
ae(pius,  even,  fair. 
acternus.  eternal. 

i^y^^ntta,  strange,  foreign. 
altus,  deep,  high. 
ambiifuus.  atnbtguous. 
ninicun,  friendly. 
anipliis,  ample. 
an<.'iistus,  narrow. 
aniiquus,  ancient,  old. 
«pert us,  o/>en. 
apt  Us,  apt,  fit. 
arduus.  hard,  difiicnU. 
arenoiius,  sandy. 


epului,  dashes  (on  the  table)' 

i\\on\,park. 

tiinpednnenta,  baggage. 

thidi.  th^.  public  gauits. 

froslra,  the  Rostra  (stage  for  speakers.) 

3.    TULRD    DECLENSION. 

ta?des,  aedium,  house. 

ciirceres,  barriers  of  a  race-course 

+tacultales,  property,  means. 

natales,  parentage. 

opes,  power,  wealth. 

tpartes,  party. 

sjiles,  tvitticisms. 

vires,  strength. 

VIII.  MOVABLE  ADJECTIVES. 

1.    WITH  THE  ENDING  US. 

aridus,  </rj/.  \Go^^ienin^,  contented. 

assiduus,  assiduous,  zeal-  contrarius,   contrary,  ad. 


ous. 
attentus,  attentive, 


verse. 
cra.ssus,  thick. 


aufTiistus,    august,   vener-\ crwtwiws,,  bloody. 


able. 

aureus,  golden. 

beat  us,   hapvy. 

benevulus,  Otnetolent. 

bcnitriuis,  kind,  mild. 

bonus,  goitd. 
Ccnpcns,  blind. 
cali(his,  hot. 
call  id  us,  crafty. 
eariLs,  dear. 
cast  us,  chaste. 
cant  us,  cautious 


cupidus,  desirous,  eager. 
decorus,  decent,  honordblo, 
densus,  dense. 
ditftnis,  worthy. 
disertus,  eloquent. 
di versus,  different. 
divinus,  divine. 
doctus,  learned. 
dubius,  doubtful. 
durus,     hard     (for 

touch), 
^^e^ww^,  poor,  needy. 


the 


ceisus,    high    (of    trees, 'eirreirius,  «r,-e//^„,j;; 
masts,  (fee.)  erroneus,  (?/'r'/««ow*. 


cerlus,  certain. 
clarus,  noble,  renowned. 


7  -  -  ■ 

exiguus,  small. 
eximius,  excellent. 


t  The  plurals  tbus  marked  occur  also  in  slgniflcalions,  aajwering  their  sixoiTLAa  meanl^ 


4:10 


VOCABULARIES. 


VOCABULARIES. 


411 


exitiosns,  pemiriovs. 
exterus,     \  foreian,  exter 
exteriius,  (      nal. 

^Giiwwdw^,  fertile. 
ferns,  mid. 
ft'ssns,  tired. 
f[A\\i^,  faithful. 
tiiutimus,  neighboring. 
finmis,  firm. 
foedus,  ahominaliU. 
tlairitiosuti,  criminal. 
frig'ulus,  cold. 
friictudsus,  profifdf'le. 
funt'Stus,  pernicious. 

i'uinrixs,  future. 
generosus,  «0*/«',  generous* 
gloridsus,  glorUuts,  boad- 

ful. 
Graeous,   Grecian,   Greek. 
gratus,  thankful,  p^a-^ant. 
honestus,  honest.,  virtuous., 

honorable. 
liuniaims,  humane. 
idouens,}?/^,  adapted. 
igiiarns,  ignorant. 
iirnavus,  ^</z^,  cowardly. 
\il\\ii\\^,Jiery. 
'Yx^\o\\\\\\ib»\\'!^.,dtsgracefuL 

imbecillus,  »/'et/i-. 
iinnieiisus,  immense. 
iininodicu**,  immoderate. 
imimuxliis,  unclean. 
iinmiitatus,     unchanged, 

unchangeable. 
imperilus,  inexperienced. 
iinprohus,  impious. 
inaudltus,  unheard  of. 
incertns,  uncertain. 
inco^nitus,  vuknown. 
indiornus,  vnworthi/. 
iiidoctus,  unlearned. 
iiieplus,  absurd. 
inexspectatus,  unexpected 
intestns,  hostile. 

intiintiis,  infinite. 

iiitrfiiiosus,  ingenious. 

iuizratus,  ungrateful. 

iiiiquiit*,  unfair. 

injiistus,  unjust. 

insauus,  insane. 

i  us pe rat  ns ,  ^/ nhoped for. 

inti'stliius,  inner,  internal 

iiiultns,  unrectnged. 

inveteratus,  inveterate. 

invictus,  invincible. 
iiividus,  enviou-'^. 
invitus,  unwilling. 

»i»pur,  rough. 


iracnndiis  )  ^^ 
iratus  J       ^'^ 

irritns,  useless,  int-ffectual. 
ji'jfimis,  <//'y.  ei  ro/nous. 
jucundiis,  pleasant,  agree- 

1      aft/*'. 
Justus,  ^"w-s/!. 
laboriosus,  industrious. 
luetus,  f//</fi. 
luevus,  /^/"^  (of  the  hand 

or  side). 
Laiiiius,  Latin. 
latns,  broad. 
liifneus,  wooden. 

lollL'US,  iJO'<f/. 

madid  us,  «'<'<• 
rnaestus,  /*</'/,  sorrotrful 
matriiiricus,    magnificent^ 
I       SpUntlul. 

mairiius,  f/rf-a^,  /ar^e. 
malus,  A*/(/. 
inaiiifestns,  manifest. 
tnaritiuuis,  i/uiritime,  na- 
val. 
incdius,  middle. 
minis,  wonderful. 
modenitus,  moderate  (full 

of  moderation), 
modicus,  moilerute,  incon- 

sidt  ruble. 
moilestus,  modest. 
tmtlestus,  unpleasant. 
morih\mdus,  dying. 
muiulus,  clean. 
uuituus,  mutual. 
neoessarius,  necessary. 
necopiiiatus,  unforeseen. 
iiefarius,  nefarious. 
novus,  now. 

noxuis,  hurtful,  injurious 
nuduH,  naked,  bare. 
obseurus,  obscure,  dark. 
occult  us,  hidden.^  secret. 
opuk-ntus,  wealthy. 
oliosus,  idle. 

parutus,  ready,  prepared. 
j)arcus,  economical. 
parvus,  small,  little. 
paternus,  paternal. 
percirriiuis,yiom.'/Ai. 
pertidus,       perfidious, 

treacherous. 
pcriculosus,  dangerous. 
pcritus,  experience il. 
pernioiosus,  pernicious. 
pcrj)etiius,  perpetual. 


perspicuus,  clt<tr,  pernpi 

cuous. 
placidus,  gentle,  mild. 

2.    K- STEMS. 

ater,  black. 

aurifcr,  currying  gold. 


phis,  pious. 

pU'tms,  fnU. 

prau'ipuus,  principal,  es- 
pecial. 

prjpclarus,  renowned^  ex- 
cellent. 

pretiosus,  valuable. 

privutus,  private. 

probjis,  honf.<t. 

prodiius,  proi/igal. 

prolan  us,  profane. 

propinquus,  mar. 

YT^^\}r\y\^, prom r,  peculiar, 

p\ihlicus,  public, 
ynvws,  pure. 
(piietus,  quiet 
varus,  «-a/v. 
rectus,  right,  correct. 
regius,  royal. 
reliiriosus,  consri^ntioua, 
ritliculus,   ridiculous. 
rotund  us,  round. 
Romainis,  Roman. 
>acvus,  cruel. 
sal V us,  safe,  healthy. 
sancHis,  holy. 
saiuis,  sound. 
secri'tus,  secret. 
securus,  safe,  secure. 
seditio^us,  rebellious. 
>udidus,  active,  busy. 
scmpiiernus,  eternal. 
>crenus.  serene!; placid. 
scvCtus,  S'cere. 
sobrius,  sober. 
^ordi<lus,  m-an,  vulgar 
>pLM;i6sus,  plausible. 
studiosus.  Zealous. 
^U\\U\><,  foolish. 
stretiuus,  brace. 
subitus,  sudden. 
>uperbus,  proud. 
tardus,  sl^nv. 
tcnierarius,  rash. 
•empostiviis,  <<mf/.y. 
timid  us,  timid. 
trantpiillus,  tranquil. 
universus,      universal^ 

whole. 
uri>anus,  polite. 
validus,  strong. 
van  us,  vain. 
varius,  variftus. 
va'itu^,  vast,  vaste. 
verecundus,  respeetfvL 
vcrus,  trup. 
vetu>tus,  old. 
violentus,  violent. 
voluntarius,  voluntary. 


dexXer  rig?ct  (of  the  hunJ|  miser,  wretclied. 


or  side/, 
fru  <ri  fu  r,fru  it-bearing. 
glabcr,  smooth. 
impi/^er,  cutive. 
intcirer,  unhurt^  complete. 
lacer,  torn. 
liber,  free. 
macer,  Uan. 


riik'er,  black. 


sacer,  sacred. 

satur,  mted. 


pestiter  (pestiferus),  jp^s-  scaber,  scurfy. 

tiferous.  ]siiilster,  l^ft. 

purer,  lazy.  taeccr  (tetcr),  abominahle. 

prosper    y  more  frequent    Xenar,  tender. 


jir<)>perus  i,  prosptrous. 
pulelier,  beautiful. 
ruber,  red. 


vafcr,  crafty. 


nbsens,  absent. 
acer,  sharp. 
admirai)ilis,  admirable. 
airrestis,    rustic,     uncuUi 

vated. 
alacer,  cJceerfid. 
aiicopa,  doubtful. 
Ai\\(i\\\{.'nsU,'  Athenian. 
atrox,  atroi-lous. 
au.lax,  l>old. 
brevj.*,  short. 
cailcbs,  unmarried. 
oamf.ester,     level     [of 

eountrv.] 


IX.   ADJECTIVES   OF  COMMON 

heavy,     serious, 


gravis, 
grave. 
Iicbcs,  dull. 

Ilispanieiisis,  Ilispanian. 
Iiostllis,  hostile. 
humilis,  low,  humble. 
iijnobilis,  ifjnoble. 
illustri«i,  illustrious. 
imriKMiior,  unminiful. 
iinmobili»,  immovable. 


itn  mortal  is,  immortal 
i  in  pat  ic  n s,  iinjyatient. 
a  inipar.  unetpiaL 
jimpotiMis,  powerUss. 


Qe\it\>iir, frequented, popu-  j imprudens,  imprudent 


htus   renowned 


celer,  quick. 
civilis,  civil. 


i  nan  is,  empty. 
i  n ere<  1  i  h i 1 1  s,  incredible. 
,         -  incolnmis,  unhurt. 

Clemens,  merciful.  inermis,  unarmed, 

coim^,  polUe.  incrs,  inactive,  sluggish. 

coxwrnnm^' common.  lintelix,  unhappy. 

com[)o^*,     having     control  in^ens,  enorm'ius. 


crcbcr,  frequent. 
creper,  dusky 


over. 

coiieor-;,  harmonious. 
constans,  constant. 
crudelis,  cruel. 
dejrcner,  dtgenerate. 
demens,  insane. 
ditticilis,  dijicult. 
diliijens,  diligent. 
di-par,  unequal,  disslynilar 
d i ssi m i  1  is,  ^dissimilar. 
dives,  rich. 
doc  ills,  docile. 
dnieis,  siveet. 
eqnester,  equestrian. 
expers,  inexptrienced,  ig- 
norant [of  j. 
facilis,  easy. 
fallax,  fallacious. 
i'nnnWkuA,  ftmiliar. 
fatal  is,  fatiil. 
felix,  huppy. 
Urox, ferocious,  defiant 
fertil  is, /rr^i(^. 

1a~(\e\\A,f,iiikful. 
for  lis,  brave. 
frequens,  frequent. 
gracilis,  slendtr. 


innocens,  innocent. 
innumerubilis,  innumera 
hie. 

inops,  helpless. 

insiiriiis,  distinguished. 

ins. )!. 'tis,  V//*'y^«^. 

iuntilis,  useliss. 

Iaudai)ilis,  praiseworthy. 

lull  is,  mild. 

levis.  light. 

liberal  is,  liberal. 

locuples,  wealthy. 

nienior,  mindful,  remem- 
bering. 
me  mora  bills,  remarkable. 
niiliiaris,  military.   • 
miral)ilis,  wonderful. 
mitis,  mild. 
inobilia,  movable. 
iiKM-talis,  mortal. 
niuliebris,  unmanly. 
natural  is,  natural. 
navalis,  naval. 
nobilis,  ru)ble. 
paluster,  swampy. 
par,  equal. 

Y>^n\{^itps,  partaking ,  par- 
ticipating. 1 


GEXDER. 

patiens,  patient. 
pauper,  ^oo/'. 
pcdester,  pedestrian. 
praeceps,      steep,      hecd- 

lumj. 
pi'aecox,  precocious. 
pr.e.-ens,  present. 
prrestaiis,  excellent. 
probabilla,  probable. 
prudciis,  prudent. 
pubes,  adult. 
f)ueriiis,  puerile. 
receiis,  recent,  new. 
rudis.   rough,   raw,  igno 

rant. 
sa^rax.  sagacious. 
saluJx-r,      /       7   7 
sahitaris,    f   ^^^^ome. 

■a  pi  ens,  wise. 

silvcstris,  ivoody. 

similis,  similar. 

simplex,  simple. 

solers,  ingenious 

SOS  pes,    sate,    sound   and 
safe,  unhurt. 

sterilis,  steriU. 

suavis,  pleasant. 

sublimis,  sublime. 

superstes,  surviving. 

supplex,  submissive,  sup 
pliant. 

tenuis,  thin,  poor,  scanty 

terrestris,     belonging     to 
earth. 

terri bills,  terrible. 
tristis,  sail,  sorrouful. 

turpis,  disgraceful. 

uber,  rich[o{'  tilings], 
u  til  is,  useful. 
veliemens,  vehement. 
velox,  quick. 
ve.nsiiuilis,  probable. 
versicolor,  particolored, 
vetus,  old. 
viridis,  green. 
virilis,  manly. 
volucer,  winged. 
vorax,  voracious. 
vulgaris,  vulgar. 


412 


i 
§ 

o 


VOCABULAKIES. 


*   <*)   aj 
■a  c>    • 


en 

a 
> 
■ee 

o 


3 


c      « 


en 


cr.     ^  3   ■» 


P         ec  .3   *  •-:   3 

rr>  —     S     —     •y     C 


p. 


tc  ^  ^  cr  cr"  an 


.  «   aa     .3 

* 

^ 

s 

3 

—  — 

^* 

tr.  =   o  oc   3 

CD 

_tp 

rj^ 

* 

51  > 

^"  ~  ■"  —  '3 

ffl  3  :^  <y  o  «^ 

iK 

1 

r. 

0 
J* 

ii  « 
>  2 

0 

• 

s  =  o rr'TS Ji  « 
3.=  '^   r.  «'^  S 
.=   g   r/:   3   =    -/-   ;= 

0 

0 

'6 

a? 

> 

■1^ 

X 

^   3 

9 

3 

o 

'3 
-0 

U     CJ     „    .^    »j     -;     — 

a)-3  .:::  »-  s  *-.  "i^ 
z  s  Jr  -  -'  i>  <iJ 

3^3  ^  O'  0*  Ui  oQ 

6 

5 

^  s 
." 
'> 

»^ 

alter 
cu 

50  —     3 


3D    O 


>  ^ 


^  ^  r— 1 

a  ^  cs  ^  3 


3 


•3 -a 


=  «    ^S.-i'-^    .'«3.5— "S^ 
bC'  ?i  —  a  c  3  ==  -3  -^  '5  >  =  ^  9 


•3-^3 
-3^  £-0  0-3 

'^  «=  n  2-3  =  o- 

'^  ^   ^  O^  ao   ao 


• 

• 

3 

• 

• 

#-• 

0 

to 

3 

'5 

"a 
»1 

0 

•no 

2 

2 

•i^-* 

• 

•  -^ 

•  >-4 

•  P^ 

3 

*3i^ 

c 

3 

2 

c 

lO 

0 
0 

> 

0 

1 

•8 

3 
§ 

O 
eo 


CO 

» 


04 


S 

S 


VOCABULARIES. 


413 


ZZ     T. 


3 
O 

a 


CO 


5-5 


4J  ■/.  .i  3  —  2  00       X  s         •                        .3  *    .  —  *    •  —  s 

o  o  ^  -   ■/.  =  ~        :-  -i        2                   •  ^*  7  ~  X   =  =  ^        -•  _•  3  - 

>-^  ^-7.  o  =  B      E •=  »  3  X*  2    .  =  =  ::i  =  3  -7  =  ^      -  =  T  S 

4"  *j  X  .:i       ^  £  —   'i  *^r  —  X  z  3  s  .3  .—  o  i,  •—  -^'  -)  X  52  .—  .-:  ~  r3 

a-   =^=n-e^o  =  w  ::^.3  o  .3  •-•  z  7   X   it  ^  £  =  '^  a>  =  »  x  .—  3 

^  i  c  ^  r.  i  >  -T  i:  ;;.  ^  =  i  2^,  "7  t:  t;  •.-  «  z  ^t  i^  =  .=  ^  ~  -  „ 

.E^-^^  =^-  o-r  g-^5  tc^^J  5  5-  ^i.3  5^^  -  3  -E  2.§ 

—   •^— —   -'3*'-'" —   >»   z^Z>   —    -i^^=!   —    Ci*'.—    -— -    "^  <- ._  -tJ 

crx^rD       ^      -c^^v(.as03S'aicra-22^33:5  ii-SS 


• 

s 

X 

*w 

•  •^ 

X 

£ 

JJ 

Y. 

0^ 

z 

3 

1— 

on 

■  •» 

X 

<i> 

w 

•  •-• 

^* 

4-> 

^ 

^ 

z 

0 

CJ 

<u 

^*" 

« 

•w^ 

•V 

0 

•« 

•  «    3 

• 

ci 

•—    z 

'^. 

*^ 

'^ 

C  '0) 

'3 

—    il 

<D 

i> 

0 

laj  bf    . 

tm\          * 

•  —J 

0" 

cr  X 

X 

0 

^ 

bt  2  'E 

tl  z 

=  bt 

tr  0 

0  0 
cc  0 

^ 

3 

viceni 
vieeiii 

■v 

> 

10) 

o    =   d    =    =   O 


'5  'z  ._•  ^  ^ 

:io  =   -'E 

E  rf  •«>  ~  - 

^■M  +j  --  —  z 

u    o    O  .3  .- 

C  O  3   oQ  ^ 


«    r:-  = 


3  ■.-    S 

*"  3    '^ 

oj  -  •« 

c  -  "3 


CO 


pa 
P 


M 


^ 

<» 

s» 

«J 

1 

> 

^ 

0 

r-« 

^^ 

*-» 

0 

OQ 

-4 


^-      3 


en 
'3 


**^     si 
Is»    «~ 

^1 


acr 

p 


"•ii     » 

o  -^ 

S   3 

T3   as 


--(5. 


o 
d 

a* 


S2 


O'T 


X 

cQ   aa 


f-   —   G   ^ 

3  3-3  i!  «  = 
>  S3  2^  5-=- 

C    o    —    -^    fc.    —    3- 
3-0    ^-O  *-    '=!"^ 


X   as 


o4   ^^^^^^^^ditii^m 


> 

X 
CO 


is    H 


M 


o 


•SB 
X  «  >< 
M        M        M 


& 

Q 
M 

c3 


o 


"3 
'> 

o 


o 

'3 

-4-3 

K 


X 


I. 
x" 


'  ? 

x 

X 


> 
3J 


I 


o      3 


X 

*3 

'> 

0) 


-/■ 

• 

X 

sn 

ci 

¥ 

V 

^^ 

'0 

"> 

CJ 

0 

0 

CB 


•n 
0.5 


(B 


3   '^ 

m  X  «^.2   X 


0  o  =>!  *^  «  r^  3  .3 


.-   fee    .  o 

.3   -:   -    X   i-i.*j    3   C   3    r    ~  •-   X 
i---DClOOjj    =    «Zz5 


09 


X 


b£ 

o 


33 


X  •  — 

o  z 


04 


CI 
C4 


00 
C4 


5 


X 

»-'3 


3 


n 
V 


3-0 


3     :::      .5  "E  fi 


CT^        r:-3 


^   3 


fe        >• 


X 


•ft 

«4 


^   -*  > 

XXX 

XXX 

•      •      . 

'-C   f^  TO 
C^  <N  ©< 


X 

X 

X 


X   J 

X   X 


.  X 

.  X   X 
XXX 

>j  «J  -; 


.  d  2 

•    Do- ■ 

•    Coo 

o  ;i  t;  ;;  3 


2  ^ 


p 

-  o  a  s 


—  y  o  o 

^  "  o  "^ 

X  55  M  o 

u  ^  o  o 

o  S  !;;  o 


g^SSS2S?Sgg?§§§5'§o 

i-i  c^ 


,M 


414 


VOCABULARIES. 


4.    OUDINAL 

Local. 
priino,  m  the  first 

place, 
eecuiulo,  (U'iiKlo,  m 

tke   /ifco/id  place, 

Si-comtly. 
tertio,  ill,  th>>  third 

ploi-e,  thirdli/. 
quiirto,  in  the  fourth 

place  ^fourthly. 
quiato,  &c. 


AOVKUBS. 

Temporal. 
pritmim,  at  first., 
for  the  first  tnne. 
iiermn./"'"  the  se- 
cond tune.,  again. 


5.  Ml'ltiplicatives. 

simplex,       suiiplns,     simple.,  siwjU, 

duplex,         duplns,     do'/hle.    tiPofohi, 
twice  us   much. 


triplns,     threefold^      three 
times  as  much. 


tortimn,    for    «/i«  '  triplex, 
thiril   time.  | 

quintiun,  6i(i. 

t^extnin. 

t^eptimimi. 

ocuiviun. 

deciiniun. 


quintuplex,  quiiituplud. 

septeinpicx,  soptiipltis. 

oct\>pliiJ*. 

decciiiplox.       

ceiituplex.  


XL   VERBS   OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION 


1.    ACTIVES. 


Abalieiiarc,  to  estrange. 
abrojrare,  remal. 
abundart'.  ab"und. 
accoMimodaie,  adapt. 
accasare,  accuse. 
a(iindicaiv,  award. 
adpivare,  help,  as><ist. 
ad'orare,  adore,  worship. 
ndoptare,  adopt. 
aedifioare,  build. 
aestiinare,  estimate,  value. 
auibulare,  ivall'. 
aniplitirure,  enlarge,  extend 
apjirobare,  approve. 

aptar<3,^<. 
appropiiiqnare,  approach. 

arare,  plough. 
ariiiare,  arm. 

bellare,  tcage  a  war  or  wars 
caelarc,  chistl. 
canlarc,  sing. 
oa>iIsiaru,  chwtise. 
eel  arc,  conct-al. 
celebrare,  cdehrate. 
cessare,  cease. 
cireinudare.  surround. 
ciauiure,  shout. 
coeiulre,  din,»'. 
cotritare,  think,  mean,  ima- 
gine. 

cotnmendare,  recommend. 

coMiMuuiieare,     communi- 
cate. 

coinpiirare,   acquire,  com- 
part. 

oonciliarc,  reconciU,  win. 


concromare,  burn   (some- 

tliiiiir». 
c'oiuleiiuiare,     condemn, 

convict. 

coutlOiiare,  pardon,  for- 
give. 

contirinare,  confirm. 

ooiijuraro,  conspire. 

coiisecrart-.  cmsecrate. 

coiiservarc,  presf-rve. 

eoiitainiiiare,    stain,    dis- 
grace. 

eoiitiiiiuire,  continue. 

conturbare,  didurh. 

ootivoca^^e,    convoke,     call 
togt ther. 

ooroiiare,  crown. 

ereare.  create,  elict. 

creinare,      burn      (some 

thiiiir)-  .  I 

curare,  care,  mind. 
tiuiniuire,  condemn,  convict 
dare,  give.  j 

debeliare,//!'."^  fi  W'lr. 
debil'nare,  n^eaken. 
deelarare,  declare. 
dedieare,  del  irate. 
deleetare,  delight.  ^ 

eleliberare,  consider,  delib- 
erate. 
demoustrare,  t/^wo«.<!</-ar<?, 

pro  re. 

denetrare,  decHne,  deny. 

demuitiare,  denounce. 

depravare,  spoil,  deterio- 
rate. 


'dcsecrare,  desecrate, 
desiderare,  desire 


desisr'uirc,  d'Sig^aU, 

dfsperare,  d>sp<iir. 
desiiiiare,  destine, 
U\v\or:\.\X'. detour. 
dijudioare,  deride.  ^ 
tlmiicare,  contest,  figltt. 
di-piiiare,  dispute. 
dissipilre,  disperse. 
di-t»irl)aro,  disturb. 
diiare,  enrich. 
divulirare,  di'-ulge. 
(Ionian',  conquer,  subdue, 

snfiji'it. 
doiuiVe,  give   (ffratuitous- 

Iv).  present. 
dubitare.  doubt,  hesitate. 
duriire.  lust. 

e'liieare,  e<lucafe.  bring  tip. 
e  ttV'  I M  i !  1  a  re ,  efe  m  i  n  ate. 
ehiborare,  elaborate. 
|em(*iidare,  correct. 
leiiil'-'rare,  emigrate. 
cMiiirrare.  explain. 
enuntiare.  pronounce,  vtter 
(.•quitare,  rideU->\\  a  liorse.) 
errare,  err,  make  mistakes. 
exeitare,  excde.  rouse. 
|eX(5UMire,  e.rcuse. 
'exornare.  adorn,  embelUsk 
[explai.are,  { ,^^,,i». 
txpliearo,    S 
expl6r.lre,  erphae. 
lexpu'jnare,  capture. 
'expeciare,  expect,  await. 


VOCABULARIES. 


415 


evltftro,  avoid. 

tati^rare,  tire,  weary. 

f"e>tiijure,  hasten. 

tlaj^rare,  burn,  be  on  fire. 

tiare,  bl'W. 

tuiraru,  put  to  flight. 

gwbernare,  govern. 

lial)itare,  dwell. 

i;uperare,  command. 

iijipelrare,  obtain. 

iuipioraru,  itnplure. 

iiiiportare,  import. 

iin}>uifiiuie,  attack. 

inch* (are,  commence,  leave 
an  finished. 

itieilure,     excite,     hasten, 
spur  on. 

iiierepare,  scold. 

indicure,  indicate, 

jntiruiare,  -weaken. 

inhabiiure,  iuhibit. 

iiistare,  impend,  urge. 

interrogare,  atik  \jx  ques- 
tion.) 

intture,  enter. 

iiiuiidaie,  overflow. 

iijvestiifare,  ex<imine, 

invitare,  invite, 

)\i<l\<.-dre,  Judge, 

juraru,  swear. 

juxare,  delight, 

ial)oraro.,  tihjrk,  labor. 

laudare,  praise. 

11  be  rare,  release,  free. 

locare,  hire. 

ruaudare,  commit,  charge. 

iiieiiiorare,  mention, 

nit'iidare,  correct^  improve. 

luonsirare,  show. 

ni  ui  tare,  punish,  fine. 

juutare,  change. 

Hare,       { 

ualare,   j  *"'^''^- 


narrare,  tell,  relate. 

navii^are,  sail. 

necare,  kill. 

negare,  deny. 

ni>l)iiitare,  make  famous. 

nurnerare,  count. 

nuiitiare,     announce,    re- 
port. 

objurgare,  scold,  rebuke. 

observare,  observe. 

obstare,  to  be  an  obstacle. 

obteiiiperare,     conform, 
obey. 

obireetare,  slander. 

occupare,  occupy. 

oiierare,  burden,. 

oppugnare,  besiege. 

orare,  to  pray. 

ornare,  adorn. 

\)ariiVii,  prepare. 

peccare,  sm. 

peiietiare,  penetrate. 

perorare,  plead. 

perpetrare,     commit    (a 
crime;. 

perse  ve  rare,  persevere. 

placire,  soften,  appease. 

poriare,  carry. 

po.-.tulare,  demand,  require 

praestare,  excel,  to  be  dis- 
tinguished. 

priviire,  deprive. 

probare,  prove,  approve. 

promulirare,  publish. 

})roj'erare,  hasten. 

prorogare,  prolong. 

pu^iisirt,  fight. 

putare,  believe. 

rebellare,  rebel. 

recoiled iare,  reconcile. 

recrtare,  refresh. 

recupeiare,  recover  (some- 
tliiiig;. 


recusare,  refuse. 
re fu tare,  refute. 
reguare,  reign. 
relegare,  banish. 
reiiuvare,  renew. 
repnguare,  resist,  oppose, 
revocare,  recall. 
rugare,  ask. 
sucritieare,  sacrifice. 
saltare,  dance. 
saiuiare,  greet. 
sauare,  heal. 
separare,  separate,  sever. 
?ervare,  save. 
sigiiiricare,  signify,  desig- 
nate. 
8imn]are,,/«i^«.,  dissemble. 
sonare,  sound. 
.>perare,  hope. 
spoliare,  plunder, 
slaie,  stand. 

superare,    overcome,    sur- 
pass. 
supplieare,  beg,  implore. 
teiiiate,  try. 
tolerare,  endure. 
tonare,  ch under. 
trad  are,  treat. 
triutnphare.  triumph. 
turbare,  disturb. 
usurpare,  employ,  use. 
variare,  vary,  change. 
va>tare,  devastate. 
\iiVdXKi,  forbid. 
vexare,  harass,  tease. 
vigil  are,  tvatch. 
viiidicare,  reclaim,  avenge. 
violare,  hurt,  violate. 
vitare,  avoid. 
vituperare,  censure. 
vocare,  call. 

o\iire,fiy. 
vuliierare,  toound. 


Admlriirl,  admire. 
adver»ari,  oppose. 
&i\\i\Cir\,fiar(er. 
altercari,  dispute,  quarrel. 
amplexiiri,  embrace. 
ajmulilri,  rival. 
arbitrari,  be  of  ovinion. 
aspernari,  disdain. 
auxiliari,  carry   help. 
cavillari,  deri^le. 
comi.  ari,  a  company. 
conuMurari,  sojourn. 


2.     DEPONENTS. 

oonSri,  endeavor,  attempt 
coneiOiiilri,   harangue,  ad- 
dress the  people. 
consolari,  console. 
coiitemplari,  contemplate. 
cri  in  i 1 1  ar i ,  incrim in  ate. 
cunctari,  hesitate,  delay. 
doiuinari,  rule. 
frumentari,./orcr^g. 
friistrari,  frustrate. 
furari,  steal. 
gloriari,  boast. 


gratificari,  gratify. 
gratulilri,  congratulate 
hortari,  exhort. 
imitari,  irnitate. 
iiidiiriiari,  be  indignant. 
infitiari,  deny. 
interpretari,  inteipret. 
lacrirnari,  to  weep. 
laitari,  rejoice. 
lamentari,  lament. 
latrocinari,  commit  dejire- 
dations 


416 


Inorari,  gain. 
uiaoliiuari,  dt'che,  plan, 
lueditaii,  nuditate. 

"^I"^""''.      [  threaten. 
mmitan,     ) 

niirari,  wonder. 

iiiotk-riri,  rule. 

niurari,  deldi/,  sojourn. 

iMUtuaii,  burrow. 

neiijotiari,  trade. 

Y^dhwVXn,  forage. 

peicuniari,  ask^  examine. 


VOCABULARIES. 


perscrutari,  search^  iii- 
Vtstujate. 

philo>opiiari,  phdos'phize, 

popiilaii,  I'll/  wad". 

precari,  pray.,  entreat. 

recorJan,  rtin<  inbtr. 

ratioouian,  rtasoa,  argue. 

rcinuMcrari,  rtward. 

nisiioari,  live  in  the  coun- 
try. 

scriiiocinari,  converse. 

sut^pieari,  susptct. 


tu- 


testari    [testifioari],     v^lt- 
1     ness. 

tutniilluari,    ratse    a 
I     mult. 

tutari,  protect. 

vai^ari,  wander,  mam. 

vaucinari,  pr-pfu^y. 

veinjrari,  rtvtre. 
-  versilri,    he    involved, 

I     gaged,  enipU>ye'l. 

vocitV-rari,    quarrel,    bawl^ 

j     cry  aloud. 


enr 


XII.    VERBS   OF 


THE   SECOND   CONJUGATION. 

1.     ACT  IV  KB. 


Abhorrere,  detest.  I  fervere,  boil. 

adhiDere,  employ.  tiiiccerc,  droop. 

fidlimeriiy  adhere.  ^i-ra,  weeo. 

adinoiiere,   admonish,  re   ]\i>rcro..jlourish 


friiiere,  be  cold,  freeze, 
fuiiieiv,  glitter. 
IgmidOre,"  be  glad,  rejoice 
{Imbure,  have. 
harere,  stick. 
iiuinmere,  be  imminent. 
'unv\iirii,Jill  vp. 
indiirere,  need. 
iiulul:ZOre,  indulge. 
invidere,  envy,  hate, 
one»  ywarti,  jacere,  lie  (down). 

jubere,   direct.,    bid, 


mind. 
adiuovere,  bring  near. 
amovCre,  remove. 
apjitiiere,  ovpear. 
areere,  hold  ojf,  ivard  of. 
ardere,  burn,  be  onjire. 
arere,  be  dry. 
audere,  dare. 
au*rere,  increase. 
calere,  be  warm. 
caverc,  be  on 

beware.  i"         ,   '  / 

ciere,  move,  stir,  rouse.       \     orders,  command. 
coercere,  restrain.  ihiu^^utre,  languish. 

oomplere,  fu/Jil,  complete,  latere,  be  hidden 
CoiiluiOre,      contain,     re-  Vwcvc,  be  exposed  for  sale, 

strain.  \     '**  albnved,  permitted, 

dohera,  '  otce,    be    obliged,  Mxci^r^',  sh>ne. 

mna.  iluiTdre,  inuum. 

decere,   be  decent,  J^coyn-jiuadere,  be  wet 

ing.  -— '-■ 

deliire,  destroy 
deridgre,  deride. 


give 


deterrgre,    deter,  discour- 
age. 

deiinere,  detain. 

disj)licere,  displease. 

dissuadere,  dissuade. 

docere,  teach. 

dolero,  grieve,  regret. 

egCre,  need,  to  be  in  need 

eininere, 
cQ/ispicuou*. 

exercere,  exercise. 

exhibere,  show,  display. 

expiere,^/^  up. 

{ukSQV^,  favor. 


iiianOre,  remain. 
in  ere  re,  t/e-sy/ 
niiscere,  mix 


nierere,  deserve,  earn. 


monere,  admonish. 
nioverc,   move,  afftct, 

flue  nee. 
nere,  spin. 
nitere,  shine. 
nocere,  be  injurious,  hurt 
obsidere,  besiege. 
oV)tiuere,  obtain 


'be    prominent,[\y>iri^rii,  be  obedient,  obey 


patere,  be  open,  clear,  ex- 
tend. 

piivCre,  tremble. 

peiidere,  hang,  be  in  eut- 
pense. 


persuhdere,  persuade. 

pertc-rrere,  frighten. 

placert',  phase,  be  pleasaiUt 
agreeable. 

pollere.  be  powerful. 

po>sidere,  possess,  own. 

prxhiire,  furn ish,  grant. 
jpran-jilere,  prevail. 
jprandere,  take  breakfast. 

proliU>ere,  prolubit. 

reinovere,  remove. 

replere,_/f//  up. 

respoiideie,  answer. 

retiiiere,  retain. 

riiieie,  Uiugh,  smile. 

sedere,  sit. 

silere,  be  silent. 

solere,  he  <iccustomed,wontt 
use  (to  act). 

-iplendere,  shine,  be  splen- 
did. 

-  tu.ieio,  try,  study. 

stupere,  be  astoni^ihui. 

snadere,  advise,  give   adr 
vice. 

sncceiiserc,  be  angry. 

sustinere,  sustain,  uphold 
maintain. 
i/t-'tacere,  be  silent. 
teiiere.   hoil. 

tcrriiTii,  frighten,  terrify, 

Uu\^rQ,fear. 
lorpere,  be  torpid. 
tortpiere.  torture. 
uri:ere,  yrge^  press. 
valere,    be    well,    healthy, 

strong,  fare  well. 
vidferc,  sre. 
vijrere,  be  strong,  vigorous^ 

jiourisn. 
vovfire,  vote. 


VOCABULARIES. 


2     DEPONENTS. 


417 


ConfltGri, 
fatfiri, 

coiitueri, 
jiilueri. 


confess, 


)      knowledge. 
^  behold,  gaze. 


a<;-|lic6ri,    bid 
tinners   in 
tnederi,  ?ieal. 
niereri,  deserve, 
nusereri,  pity. 


a    price    (on  mro^i&v'i,  profess. 
auction.;         polIicGri.  promise. 

reri,  suppof>e. 

lueri,  protect. 

vereri,yi;a/-,  dread. 


XIIL   VERBS   OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 

1.     ACTIVES. 

A.    Stem-veiibs. 

cole  re.  cultivate,  honor. 
conwnittere,  commit. 
concedere,  concede,  grant 


K\^A\\Q}^r^,lead  aioay,  ab- 
duct, remove. 

abeisse,  to  be  absent. 

al'jicere,  throw  away. 

al>solvere,  absolve,  acquit. 

absiimere,  consume. 

aceidere,  happen,  befall 
(of  untbrtunate  events.) 

accipere,  accept,  receive. 

Aeiiere,  sharpen. 

addt're,    \      ,, 
!••  t  add. 

adjicere,  | 

iidetsse,  to  be  present 

ati'crre  (adferre),  bring. 

attioere  (adficere),  affict. 

artii^ere  (adHijere),  ajffir. 

aire  re.  act,  do,  lead,  drive. 

alcri;,  nourish. 

allieere,  allure. 

ainittere,  lose. 

anteponere.  prefer. 

arct's.>ere,  summon,  fetch. 

arifuere,  accuse. 

arripere,  seize  [of  persons 

and  movables]. 
Rseendere    [adseendere], 

ascend,  rnonnt.  scale. 
ancribere  (adscribere),  (W 

crihe,  attritiute. 
asperL'ere      (adspergere), 

strifi,  asperse. 
ashiir^ere,       [adsurgerej, 

rise  up,  stand  vp. 
attril)ii('re,      [adtribuere], 

ascribe,  attribute. 
bibere,  drink. 
caderp,  fall. 

cai  lore,  cause  to  fall,  strike 
ealefaeere,  heat,  warm. 
can  ere,  sing. 
cape  re,  take,  capture. 
cedere,  yield. 
cernere,  see 


claudeie,  close 


cingrere,  sunound^  inclose. 
oogere,  crnipel. 


eoncqiere,  conceive. 

C(  incut  ere,  shake. 

conducere,  lead.. 

conferre,  confer. 

con  ti  cere,    perfect, 
out.Jiuish. 

confide  re,  confide. 

conjuiijsrere,  unite 

conspicere, 
ceive. 

constituere,  resolve. 

consuniere,  consume. 

eontinfrere,     happen     [of 
fortunate  events]. 

contenniere,  despise. 

contradieere,  contradict. 

convincere,  convince,  con- 
vict. 

eoquere,  cook. 

corri^'ere,  correct. 

corru  inpere,  corrupt, bribe. 

credere,  believe. 

ciipere,  wish. 

deeedere,  gooff,  leave,  die. 

decernere,  resolve,  decree. 

dc'jipere,  deceive. 

du esse,  to  be  wanting. 

defendere,     defend,    pro- 
tect. 

defcrre,   transfer,   report. 

deticere,  desert,  fall  off . 
Idejieere,  throw  down. 

dereiinquere.  abandon. 

descendere,  descend. 

de>crlbere,  describe. 

deserere,  desert  [a  place]. 

de?-inere,  cease. 

desipere,  be  silly,  foolish. 

devincere,  conquer. 

dice  re,  say,  tell. 

ditfi-rre,  delay,  postpone. 

di  tilde  re,  mistrust. 

diligere,  love,  esteem. 


diininuere,  diminish, 
d i ni i ttere,  dismiss. 
diri^ere,  direct. 
diritiere,  pluriAer. 
diruere,  destroy. 
dispell  ere,  dispel. 
di>tin<iruere,  distinguish. 
t^fa/'dividcre,  divide. 
edere,  eat, 

edere,  bring  forth,  publish. 
e  tti  ce  re ,  effect,  pn  >d  ucc. 
behold,    ^^r-:etfugere,  escape. 

buy. 


einere. 

eri<rere,  erect,  elevate. 
e.xceliere,  excel. 
exeipere,  receive. 
excludere,  exclude. 
expellere,  expel. 
ex>tinguere,  extinguish. 
extollere,  exalt. 
evadere,  escape. 
evortere,  destroy. 
fallere,  deceive. 
ferre,  carry,  bear. 
fodere,  dig. 
frangere,  break. 
f u  ge  re ,  flee,  sh  u  n. 
irerere,  carry,  carry  on, 
i n ci  I )e re.  Commence. 
indlcere,  announce. 
inspicc-re,  inspect. 
instituere,  commence. 
inteiligere,  undersLtnd, 
interficere,  kill. 
jungere,  connect,  join, 
lacessere,  harass. 
Idedere,  hurt,  injure, 
leircie,  read. 
ludere,  play. 
tnetere,  reap. 
metuere,./(far. 
inittere,  send. 
neyrligere.  rie<_jlect. 
nubere,  marry. 
ol)jicere,  object. 
obruere,  overwhelm. 


418 


VOCABULARIES. 


VOCABULARIES. 


419 


proinitterc,  prnmhe. 
j)ro-cnl)ure,  proscrihe. 


occnrrere,  meet,  encounter    proceaere   admnce. 

occidere,  kill,  vmrder.         .--'I.ti'-  hetrau. 

otleiidere.  of  end. 

ottcne,  <>f*i>'-^ 

oinittere,  otrut. 

op  poll  ore,  op/)0.'ie. 

oppruuure,  oppress. 

OHteiidere,  g/ioio. 

pareri',  be>/ft. 

purcerf,  ttpare.  _ 

pollere,  d/  ice  (tica>/,  harusfi. 

penijrere,  perform. 

pertlcre,  l^se,  ruin. 

porforre,  endure,  bring. 

perflcere,  accomplish. 

periH^re,  continue. 

permitiere,  permit,  allow. 

pete  re,  »eek. 

plaudere,  applaud. 

pra'cMere,  cut  <if. 
prjeciperccomwrn /,o/a«-r 

pnedieere.  predict. 


9cri1>ere,  write.. 

^       1— >    kjtK.in  iseccdere,  «65t"/t?. 

nrotlere,  o*^'riiu.  >-^^^^-<-         > 

I  .  .  jsuiere,  xuf^r,  kt,  permit, 

prokl^rJ,      advance      (in  sperncre,  ^../-/^  r-/^- 


stiituere,  re-fdve,  conclude, 
sul)iLrere,  suhj'ct.  suhdiu. 
sulMuitlere,  submit. 


pro-cnl)ere,  proscrioe.  o.. ......... ^,  -  -       -    /-..//.yjn 

?in-re    roA.  succiunbere,  ^^/c>C'^/m6. 

recipere,  retake,  receive.  iMUuere,  «aA;«  up. 

(so.nethiu-^-  tan-ere,  ^o./fA. 


redueere,  brin'j  back. 

re  toll  ere,  refute. 

reterre,  brintj  back,  V'^port. 

retioere,  refresh,  restore. 

retrere,  rule,  ijovern. 

riii\<;crG,  reject.  p--.- '        *■■. 

rellnquere,J^■ai;^«Aa"'/'''t.'trl huere,  .iss^i//* 

Irepeu-ro,  redemand,rrpeat.veU^rv,  ./rice. 


te^'iMv,  Cot'*'/",  protect. 

tollere,  </<^.s-^oy  (of  per- 
sons and  abstract  ideas), 
i,)  raise. 

tradere,  ddiver. 

irahere,  drag,  draw. 


be     dU>- 


;   eesse,ioi   a  chief  to  re^.r eU^n>\.rc,  censure. 
^   command.  resistere,  rend. 

ni-jpff ire   prefer.  restituere,  restore. 

\:r^^:J^:  direct,   pre-  satistacere,    satufy,   give 
^  scribe.  I     satisfaction. 

B.     INCEPTIVK8. 


vellere,  «/ta^'<?. 
veudere,  sell. 
vineere,     defeat, 

torious. 
vivcre,  live. 


adolcscere,  grow  up.  |     i'^*<'*^  , 

Jtueseere     [udsue.eere  ,  enU.escere,  6^Y^. 

a^.c.i^or/;.  ^  exardeseere,    fte.om.    i/i- 

albeseere,J...;..  Mte.     \J^ 


tunty. 

noseere.  become  acquaint- 
ed with. 

oMnmui^ccre,  fall  as/^ep. 

obdnrescere,  become  hard- 
ened, insensible. 


caleseere,  grow  warm 
coaleseere,  unde,  coalesce 


exsplendescere,         shine    obmutescere, 
firth.  I    ^P''^<^'^^^^'- 


become 


coi\\esi^GrG,  unde,  coalesce.      ./'/"^-  ,       /,r^///Z//  ob^tupeseere,    become    he- 

co.npescere,    check,   c./'6.  cxinncscere,     6.     i^'^^''^^^  "^J.iw,  .6M*e^e.«. 


oognoseere, 


liTMOseere,      beco7ne     ac-\     afraid.  ^ 

7fuainted  with,  Uarn.     levaneseere,  ^;<^riish 
coLmn^c^re,  wish  ardent-  pliseere,  swell,  increas. 
toricui  Kv^     ,  hi^eere,  open  the  moutti 

coiLncseere,    grow    old,  l.orresoere,    6.c'0//i.   tern 
decay-  '    >"'' 


numbed,  senstless. 

obsolesoerc,    become   obso- 
lete. 

occalescere.  become  callous. 

pasciire,  ptisture. 

'     becorne 


j    become 
_    perliorrescerc,   (     ^,^^^^,J^ 

iperiimoscerc,     j    afraid. 


contScere,    become    ac-  ign«.sccre,    pardon,   /"'•-  periiincscere,     |    ^j 

customed.  '-.ni^Jebre^cere  gain    pntresccre,  become  putrid 

conticeseere.     become    *-  -^^-j;-^^^^;^,.     ^  '  -^ 

contrem-.scere,  ^r..^^^.       i-^-^-^'^:^:^!^^"^* 


1  ••:•  '     . 

(luieseere,  r<>d'«. 

recnuk-seere,  hreih  open 
(out)  again. 


faithless. 
diirnoscere,  discern. 
diiicere,  learn. 


quid,   decline.  I     senses. 

lapideseere, />.^i^y.  Ireviv.scere,   com^    to   l^e 

liquescere,  6^i«;o//i'J  liAiuid.\     again. 


sciscere,  decree,  ordain. 
Benescere,  grow  old. 


ttbflti,  misuse. 
aiTffredi,  attack. 
alioqiii  [udloqui]  address. 
aiiipleeti,  embrace. 
coiiirredi,  meet. 
asseqiii  [adsequi],  \    ,.   . 
consequ'l,       ^    ^'\obtatn 
dijrrodi,  go  apart,  separate. 
d i labi ,  fall  asunder. 
egredi,  go,  or  come  out. 


ftdipisci,  obtain. 
CMiiitniiiisei,  device. 
defetisci,  become  tired. 
experiri'^ci,  awake. 
irasci,  be  anijry. 
uancisci,  obtain. 


Rplendescere,  grow  bright.  I  vigescere,  arow  strong. 
tepescere,  grow  warm.        | 


2,     DEPONENTS. 

A.  Stkm-veub9. 
frui  and  }>erfnii,  enjoy. 
t"iui<ri   and   peri'iuigi,  per- 
form. 

irradi.  stride. 
iiiirredi,  enter. 
iiisequi,    follow    imme- 
diately. 
labi,  fall. 
loqiii,  speak, 
liiori,  die. 

B.  Inceptives. 

nasci,  he  born. 
oh\\\'\s{:\,  forget. 
paeisci,  bargain. 
proticisei,    proceed,     go, 
march,  travel,  depart. 
reiniiiisei,  remember. 


niti,  rest  (upon),  strive. 

perpeti,  [  *^''/^''- 
perseqiii,  pursue. 
proj/redi,  advance,  proceed. 
prolabi, _/«/!/  down. 
qiieri,  complain. 
reared i,  return. 
&&(\\\\,  follow. 
uti,  use. 


renasci,  he  horn  again. 
ulcisci,  revenge. 


vesci,  cat. 


XIV.  VERBS  OF  THE  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 

\.    ACTIVES. 


AV)Ire,  go  away. 

ad  ire,  approach. 

ad  Veil  ire,  arrive. 

Binbire,  go  round,  he  a 
candidate,  court. 

aprrire,  open. 

com()erIre,  ascertain  (by 
Jiearing). 

coiullre.  season. 

cotiseiitire,  consent,  agree. 

custo  lire,  guard. 

de  til  lire,  define,  determine. 

desillre.  spnng  down. 

deviiR'iie,  oblige. 

diupertlre,  distribute. 

disseiitlre,  dissent,  disa- 
gree. 

doriiilre,  sleep. 

erQdire,  educate. 

exliatirire,  exhaust. 

exire.  go  out,  leave. 

expedire,  extricate^  make 
•'eady. 


adorlrl,  attack. 
a»*seti'Iri,  assetU. 
h\i\\\dm,Jlatter. 
experiri,  try,  experience. 
larL'Iri,  bestow. 


evenire,  happen. 
terlrc,  strike. 
til  lire,  finish. 
fuleire,  prop,  support. 
jiinpedlre,  hinder,  prevent. 
[iinperiire,  impart. 
iiiire,  go  in,  enter. 
i  lite  lire,  perish. 
in  venire,  invent,  find. 

jindnire,  \  ^^fi^n,  smoothen. 
inninre,  f</rtify. 
neseire,  not  to  know. 
niitrire,  nouHsh. 
obedire,  obej/.. 
oblre,  undergo^  die. 
o})erire,  cover. 
})eriie,  perish. 
perveuire,  arrive  [always 

with  an  object]. 
prsieire,  be  foremost,  dictate 

[words], 
prodire,  come  forth. 

2.     DEPONENTS. 

mentlri,    lie,  say  a  false- 
hood. 
moliri,  strive,  toil. 
ordiri,  commence. 
orlri,  rise^  arise. 


p\}mre,  punish, 
red  ire,  return, 
reparlre,  find. 
saevire,  commit  cruelties. 
salire,  Uap. 
sancire,  sanction. 
sareire,  patch. 
scire,  know. 
>^enxire,  feel,  think. 
sepire,  hed'je  in. 
servire,  serve,  he  a  slave. 
si  tire,  tJiirst. 
sepelire,  bury. 
sopire,  lull  to  sleep. 
stabilire,  strengthen. 
subire,  undergo. 
subvenire,     bring    assist- 

a  nee,  come  to  help. 
transire,  cro.'is,  pass. 
venire  (veneo),  be  for  sale, 
venire  (venio),  come. 
vestire,  clothe. 
vincire,  hind. 


partiri,  divide. 
potiri,  seize. 

sortiri,  cast  lots^  obtain,  by 
lots. 


^tc 


2/ 


INDEX   TO  PAET  I. 


fi.r^^  '^!?  f '"^*  ^-"'■^  "^  ^^**  references  denote?  the  pages  of  the  Fir^t  Part      ThP 

pa     "ap^^^^^     wluM.'fi;;'"'";;/''''"  l^'^"  ^^^  '''^  W'^  ^^^  K^'"-'  «r  to  «tier  divUmJol 
n1 ...:  f/  V  "  '^''"  *^'""^  miinlKT  is  uK.re  than  once  on  a  na.^e.  the  (le^i.mafion  72 

(It(;    a  k     oru.  .foot-note),  or  no.  (mere  division  of  a  pura^a-aph),!^  addJd     =" 
1  he  lollowinj,' abbreviations  are  used:  i-  ^,  ^'^  auuuu. 


Ahl. 

ahs. 

ace. 

act. 

adj. 

adv. 

attr. 

cl. 

comp. 
conj. 

COIIJII!?. 

Consir. 
coOid. 


ablative. 

absolute. 

accusative. 

active. 

adjective. 

adverb. 

ajtributc,  or 

attributive. 

<  laiise. 

comparative. 

conjunction. 

conjiiirution. 

construed. 

co(5rdinate,  or 

coor.iinatiiig. 


dative, 

definite. 

de<  lension. 

detcrmiii.itive. 

ditlereuce. 


Enijl. 
expr. 

fern. 

format. 

fut. 

impers. 

ind. 

indef. 

inf. 

irr. 

in  St. 

in  f  err. 

Lat. 

niasc. 

uoni. 

ol)j. 


dit. 
dtf. 
dccl. 

d|-term.      aefcnniii.itive.  part, 

dift'-  ditlereuce,  pass 

A  lab).  prcpo-ition.  denotes  the  pass,  agent 
107    K.  2.   For  the  use  oluO  in  generai"see 

Ablative,  sing.,  rule  of  formation  for  all 
deds.  Si'Z  f;  of  abl.  piur.  ;^;«,  £.-AI)l. 
transl.  by  Knirl.  preposition  bt/  is,  3.— Abi. 
of  nouns  of  3.  dccl.  in  i  13«}.  l"so.  Abl.  in  i 
ol  adjs.  of  ;j.  decl.  148,  R.  1;  abl.  in  e  151, 
21b.  Abl,  of  pres.  participles  in  t,  except 
Mhen  used  as  pred.  ai)ls.  2*M,  m. 

Ablativks  ABsoLi^TK.  definition  and 
format.  29i,  39.-)  foil.  Form  o(  pred.  ai)l. 
2!)->,  39(J;  wtien  pied.  abl.  is  an  adj.  or  noun 
2H3.  3!K.  Abi.  abs.  w.  deponent  participle 
29>.  31.  Pred.  abl.  in  pi.  or  sing,  when  two 
subj    are  coordinate.     2113,35. 

COMPARATIVK    ABt.ATlVi:   inst.    of    Quam 

217,  310.    Idiomatic  comp,  abls.  218.  K.  7. 
Abi.ativk  of   Difference  referring  to 

comp-i  218,  311 :  hetove.  praesfat,  jwsf,  antea, 

and  other  words  involvintr  a  comp.  219,  10. 
Absolute  adjectives,  see  Adj'^dires. 
Absolute    decree    of   intensity,   its  different 

foini-  in  i,;it,  2-iU,  313 foil. 
Ac,  coord,  conj.,  use  of  97,  115;  2T7,  380. 
Accent  of  Latin  words  10,  5, 
Accidents  of  Lat.   verbs  14,   7;    of  uouns, 

pr'-n-^.,  and  adjs.  1.5.8. 
accusare,  constr.  w.  qfod  291,  28. 
Accusative  ^ing.,  rule  of  its  format,  for  all 

decls.  332,  d ;  of  ace.  pi.  3*3,  k.  All  neuter 


English, 

expressed. 

feminine. 

formation. 

future. 

genitive. 

impersonal. 

indicative. 

ituh'finite. 

infinitive. 

irreiTuIar. 

instead. ^ 

intetrogative. 

Latin. 

masculine, 

nominative, 

object,  or 

objective. 

l)article. 

passive. 

nouns 
Nouns 
179. 
dec 


pprf.  perfect. 

pers.  person. 

phr.  phrase. 

pl.  plural, 

pliip.  pluperfect. 

poss.  possessive. 

pred.  predicate,  or 

predicative, 

pres.  present. 

prf)n.  pronoun, 

q'lant.  quantity, 

sent,  sentence, 

piiig.  sin-;iilar. 

i?iihj.  siil)ject. 

subjunc.  subjunctive. 

superL  superlative. 

term.  termination, 

transl.  translated, 

voc.  vocative. 

w.  with. 

have    ace.   and   nom.  alike  34.   2. 

of  3.  decl.  w.  ace.  sing,  in  iui  i:3H, 
Nouns  and  adjs.  \v.  vowel-stems  of  3. 
Iiave  ace.  pi.  in  w  133,  It.  2.    Ace.  of 


nouns  taken  fiom  the  Greek,  see  Greek 
/lou/tj).— Ace.  transl.  by  Engl,  objective  18, 
13.-ACCUS.  w.  inf.  28ti,  388;  see  Infinitive 

adducere,  constr.  w.  ut  291,  27. 
Adjectives,  accidents  of  15.  8.  Are  either 
movable  <tr  of  common  gender  40,  45.  Decl. 
of  movable  adjs.  (II.  decl.)  41 ;  44  foil. 
Adjs.  of  common  gender  (III.  decl.),  their 
inflection  147.  20«  foil.:  1)  adjs.  in  u-  149, 
209;  2)  R.  stems  of  3.  decl  149,  210:  3) 
Liquid-mutes  149,  211:  4)  adjs.  in  ax.  ox, 
i>;  as  1.50.212;  5)  Adj.  w.  consonant-stems 
150,  214  foil.  They  generally  lack  neuter 
gender  151,  217.  Indeclinable  adjs.  151,  218. 

Attributive  aiwectives  41,  47;  their 
agreement  w.  the  governing  noun  lb.;  in 
Coordinate  phrases  98,119;  their  place  41, 
47;  their  combiiiatioii  w.  attributive  gen- 
itives 70,  92.  Attributive  form-adjs.  109, 
240.  Attributive  adj«.  w.  their  governin" 
nouns  understood  25«i.  353. 

Predicative  adjectivks  54,  61  foil. 
Agreement  w.  the  sui)j.  54,  63,  May  take 
objects  55,  65,  (For  the  case  of  these  objs., 
see  p.  II).  Impersonal  pred.  adjs.  60,  75; 
61,  77.    Pred.  adjs,  forming  subj.  infs,  w. 


I 


422 


INDEX. 


the  copula,  are  placed  in  raasc.  ace.  sing, 
fil  78-  juTceiiii:  w.  the  ohjeit  of  inip«'i>. 
pivds'  74? :^;  wlu'U  thoy  form  ..hj.  inls.  ihcy 
M.rifcw.  til.-  «zmnimaticai  subj.  iiom.  ».4.  M, 
ami  in  inf.  cl.  w.  lliesubj.  ace.  ^sr,  :ivs;  or 
tlu-v  a-me  w.  tiie  ai,n'-.i  ol  the  obj.  nf. 
in  arc.'7!».  lO'i.  t^iiMunary  of  ruh'H  on  tho 
crammatical  form  of  pred  adjs.  S)  1  u'd. 
adis.  connected  w.  ./im  &  ruhn  lOi.l-J^-. 
Fur  adis.  a-  aO(C'>!*ory  predieatL's.  see  1  .  M. 

DK^CKll-nVK  AN»  FollM-Al).rKeTIVEJ«  1|»H, 

2:]«K  Sre  Forni-adj  ctiv-»  and  the  articl.-s 
D-tt-niiiiiadve,  quantitatire,  iitniitml,  pos- 
^e.-sire,  inttnoiaUve  Form-U'ljecticei.       ^ 

ABSOLI  TK    AIUKCTIVKS   tiof,  toU.      I't'ttni- 

tion  ai.d  dirt-.  fr.>M>  di^jnIU•t  adjs  2.)b.  M. 
AI>r-oluie  dfscriptivf  adjs.  di-notmi,'  pkii- 
^()N<  (inase.  -ender)  25»).  355;  at)s<)Iiile  par- 
ticiples di-notin-;  persons  25T_^  3.)»)j  tonu- 
adis  rcferriiii,'  to  persons  -.ix.  3.j»  lon.~ 
Alxohit.'  adjs.  deiiotm-  t!IIN(}s  (neuter 
.render)  200.  iijS  foil.  Generally  m  iiriiier 
plnr.  2»V^  358;  wl.en  used  in  n.  uier  sin-. 
2t;(),  /.'.9.  IVeuhar  decl.  of  absolute  neuter 
anj-  2<)-2  :iS.  C'i>nii)iiia'ion  of  abs.  adjs.  abv. 
3C,1  ioll.  Absolnie  movable  adjs..  but  not 

tho<r«  of  common  ireudef,  take  the  form  ol 
nartitive  uen.  wli-ii  conn  et'-d  w.  iiuanii- 

tativc  form-adjs.  (,nhUbi>nh-H\^-'Al;ii.  yihd 

reiiqid  est  2«i9,  A'.  32.  Mhi!  ptnsi  huf>eo  lb. 
ln-^.ji'NCT    AD.TKeTivKS   2(>4   foil.;    tiieir 

a«Teeineia  2(i4.  :;»►.");  wluiius.-d  a-  ^-uhjeeis. 

they  agree  with  their  pr».'dicate-uoun?  2bJ, 

COMI-AKISON    OF    APJKCTIVKS,    PCe     Cwn- 

ptrarir-  and  Sup.rlaiirc   Adjs.  which  do 
u.)t  form  inrtectioiuil  de-ive-  201.  2'.t2.  loll. 
Dki.ivvtiov  op  ADJKiTiVKs    tioiu  Com- 
mon nouns  :M<.).  ?,  loll  ;  from  proper  nouns 
:i-.i>,  r,  loll.:  iromv.-ibs  :^/)l.  8  loll, 
admirari,  const r.  w.  <im><l  or  Int.  cl.  -^y  f^- 
a-^tnodum,  (iiiantilutive  adv.  =  teyv  iiunit  2^U. 

Ad"verbs'.^leriiiit'i«>n  and  classes  of  'u  Ofi:  t)f 
manner,  format,  of  .'>7,  (iS:  in  o  58,  (.11;  of 
time  .58.  70.  I'o-ition  ol  58,  71.  A'^ys  of 
manner  form. -d  Irom  adis.  ol  .^.  (led.  i.)i. 
ai'.i  foil  ;  i»r.  format.  1.52  1{.  »1  &  7.  ^'»;»-. 
oral  ad  vs.  180,  258.  Quaniitative  advs.  (ol 
intensity)  18S,  2«i«.»;  nv.y  be  drpendent  on 
adj^  1S8  11.  Advs.  of  comparatives  »fc  s^u- 
l.,ilativc's202.  2s7;20.i.  10.  ,    _ 

adversarius,  diti".  from  kostts  &  tinnacm  1.34, 

aegreferre,  io  be  vexed,  constr.w.  quod  or  lii^. 

cT.  2!il.  28.  ^  .       m    7 

Aegyptus,  fern,  name  of  country  40  d. 
eqS,  impers.  comp.   abl.  =  //m/*   U  is  fai7 

msf ir'.'ivrU.  noun  of  S-cla-s  of  .3.  decl.  122, 

l-,8;  of  neuter  },'ender  147,  205. 
affirmare.  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl   2'.H),  2(,. 
after    En>'l.  conj.,  rendered  by  jjostquam  2-34, 

328:  bylibl.  abs.  2U2,  30«.   . 
agnatus  and  cognatus,  meaninj;  and  diff.  of 

these  terms  325,  n.  (i. 


Agreement  of  finite  predicate*  w.  their  {rram- 
imitical  subj.'.is  in  number  and  pers<m  22. 
io   o,;mrib^uljs.w.the>r^c.vernu,jrn.m^ 
41  47;  of  prrd.  adjs.  w.  ibttr  io-ical  subjs  , 
see   i./yVc/.r.x;   ol    pred.  n..uns  w.     he  r 
8ubjs.  .5.5. 2:  of  nouns  m  apposition  w-    «cr 
trovernin-  n..uns   01,   107;    a!-'';^;^'";:"^  "^ 
number,  of  preds.  w.  coord.  Mibjs.  \U.  11   , 
Hi.  K.  2!  98.'  118,  of  finite  verb-  w.  coord 
pronouns  of  dilVereni  pe.son^*  lt>-^^,f^^'    » 
iittr.  adjs.  w.  two  U«>vernin-  m.nns    .8   ll.», 
of  a  noun  w.  two  attr.  adjs.  00.  K. .).  of  par 
Ticioles  w.  tle-ir  uovernim:  nouns  201,  .>.h, 
;       isjunct  adj-.  w.  those  nouns  which  inust 

^"       . .       .  .  I.     :_    ..........111  Kir  tifillllR  ..1)4. 


be  supplied  as  their  governing  nouns  .(4 
8»i5:  of  relative  adjs.  ^v.Jhcnr  antered     t^ 
•Jti.-).  3ti7:  2r.O,  :;«8  foil.:  2t>r,  JL  29;  of/l\- J  .'nj^t 
adjs.  w.  their  predK-ate-nt)nns  2»..>,  -.0  ..  ^^^^ 
di^junet  adj-.  w.  their  partitive  genitnea 
in  i;.u.hr  2.;0.  374.     Air.eement   ol   ;/>^^, 
,olu.<,  N,ws.  (of us.  o,nms\K,  their  ^^»';;      "j^. 
pron..uns  194,  277  foil.    ^V";'- i^-  «,    ^e 
the  poss.  sUHs  (hi^  ber,  their)  w.  il^  aniecc- 

?iiiSs;::\n1/!inerally  belongs 
vowel-class  of  3.  decl.,  being  mnler    3o, 
177   Thos,-  belonging  to  the  L-cIass  H. •_  i^'- 

alienus.  n^ed  w.  the  force  of  gen.  pi.  a/i<./«/H 

aliiuantus,  indi-f.  quantitative  f^rm-adj^lS.!, 

aliquanto  before  coinps.  as  abl.  of  difl.  n^, 

aiiams  some,  indef.  determ.  form-adj.  17;2, 
%T  ifde  1.  172.  217  :  173.    Use  ol  aUq'ns, 

ami  dirt-.  fr..m  V''i</«''V  1;.^'  f^' ,,;i  jr/- 
=  soinebodv,  as  abs.  adj.  2.>8,  4.  jj^'l"- 
s-miethintr,'  abs.  neuter  torm  of  ahqui'';f^. 
3.50;    w.   partitive  quaniitative  gen.  feinj,. 

207,  371  foil.  ^    ,.„ 

aliquot,  indef.  numeral  1.9,  2;>(. 
aliauoties.  numeral  adv.  180,  Hy^-      „  ,.    .-., 
ahus   <u>o(l,ii\  ind.f.  det.rm.  f.)rm-adj.  172, 
.1.4''  Deel.  of  173.  248.    D-tV.  Ir.un  a//er  and 
cchri  175,  l.-AliU  otbers,  as  abs  :h1J-.  J'^ 
diir.  from  cettti  and  rehqui  2;)9,  no.  4. 
Wis     .ulii's.  us,,  of  2.59.  5  &  li.  i-Alu. . . 

am  take  app..>iiio..s  in^t.  -^ X^r'^^miull^ 
(s..me  of  the  soldujrs.  .  .  other*, -/««"«* 
rt'ii.  ..fl/'i)  270,  A'.  35.  ^,  t-u 

all  En-d.  indff.  ■.u\i.=om>ns  or  07nnes  .9, 
i^:  180.  K.  12.  .\llorusetc  =  «(>.^^om/'qli«| 
2'S  Ml  (»>f)  tlu'se-hi  omnes  2b.J,  3W,  ail 
rofUhe<e  thinL's^-om/<J(f  /i(i^<^  I'».;  ab  my 
pr?,p.Mtj'=.U^ia  mea  ib.;  all  other  things 

alLoi^'I.owtta,!^;:  205.  401;  209,400.  Almost 

not  =  f'l-re  uoii  .31K),  .)2. 
alone,  iraiisl.  by  the  adjs.  solus  and  unu6\U. 

alter  'the  other,  indef.  determ.  form-adj.  172, 
ilJ:  Decl.  of  173,  248.  Ditt.  Irom  alius  .5, 
5  Alter  in  the  meaning  ol  secundus  I8-4. 
m  Alter. .  .alter,  use  of  2.59,  -^:  ^v.;.ppot'l- 
tion  inst.  of  w.  partitive  gen.  2.0,  H.  do- 


INDEX. 


423 


alteruter,  indef.  determ.  form-adj.  172.246  2- 

decl.  of  173.  li.U.  '       '    ' 

amb,  iiisenarahle  preposition  358,  .3. 
ambo,  f><)fh,  dtcl.  of  178,  11.  2.     Diff.  from 

iitrnjxe  Ih. 
amplius,   with   or   without  qunin  =  '  more 

than '  before  numerals  219,  312;  220,  R.  13 

foil, 
an,  or,  di-^junctive  interr.  particle  308.  419; 

an»on,  or  not,  lb.:  aii/,on  not  used  in  in- 

direet  quesijons  311,  423. 
an,  nom.  terminal,  ol  Greek  nouns,  how 

mated  in  Lat.  :-a\.  30. 
and,  Kngl.  conj..  how  e.vpr.  in  Lat.  97,  115. 

A/id  /tot.  how  tran^i.  .301.  53. 
an?i,  consir.  w.  quod  291,  2S. 
animadvertere,  constr.  w.   Inf.  cl.  200,  26. 
Anomalous  nouns  347.  R.  1. 
Answers  to  questions,  howexpr.  in  Lat.  .308. 

420. 

antea,  l^/ore.  adv.  of  time  58, 70;  followed  by 

quf(„>  207,  K.  7. 
Antecedents  »)f  pmns.  of  3.  i)or.«i.  ini,  232;  of 

r.'laiivcs  200,308.     Syndetic  aniecedents 

200.  .300. 

Anteclassical  period  of  the  Lat.  lanirnage  ,5. 
any,  En-1.  indef.  determ.  form-a(ij.,  =  r/v/.v-. 
quam  or  t//liis  174.  2.50.  2:-quis  alter  nam, 
si,  nt",  etc.  .307,  07;  see  qi/is. 
anybody  (anyone)  =  (7//i.sY/*/^///?  2.58,  4. 
».nyt)nng= quirq>/(tm   (qinJquain)  200,   .3.59. 

Whin  e.\pr.  by  qtihl  2(10.  Jl.  11. 
Apposition,  01.  ino  Ibil.  Airrei'ment  of  nouns 
in  apposition  <>i.  107:  02.  110.  Some  imcs 
P^ngl.  altr.  w.  of  etc.  expr.  by  Lat.  apposi- 
tions, and  sometimes  KiigL  appositions 
expr.  by  Lat.  attr.  gen,  92,  112. 

ar,  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns  of  vowel-cl.of 
ill.  decl.  1.35,  177;  their  irendi-r  137,  181. 
Nonns  in  ar  belouirinir  to  R-dass  121,  1.^^17. 
Nouns  in  ar  tak.-n  from  the  Greek,  how 
tn*ated  in  Lai.  342.  4. 

a-bitrari,  con.-tr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  2!K).  20. 

Archaic  period  of  the  Lat.  laniru.iire  5. 

Argos,  nam.'  of  city,  how  declin.-d  310,  26. 

as  nom  term,  of  Lat.  nouns.  Thev  i:ener- 
ally  belong  to  T-class;  their  decl.  and  gen- 
der 128,  lt.7;  beloiu'inir  to  S-class  123,  101. 
Civic  nouns  in  Oft  belong  to  vowel-class 
I'JO,  187,  4.  Gender  of  nouns  in  as  147,  203. 
Nouns  in  a.v  taken  from  the  (ireek  gener- 
ally belong  to  first  decl.  3^34,  6;  336,  9. 
Greek  nouns  in  ^/.vthar  assume  tlu'  term.(^/ 
in  Lat.  .3.30,  9.  R.  (ireek  nouns  in  as  l)e- 
lon-ini,'  to  T-cIass  313.  li.  2. 

as.  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  adjs.,  how  declined 
1.50,  212. 

as.  Kuijl.  comparative  conj.,  dilVerent  wavs 
of  renderini:  it  iqii,  qualis.  etc.)  207.  li.  20; 
tr  uisI  l)y  quant  .-ifter  tai»  210.  .304:  bv  qiatt 
qiiaidlt/ue  alter  tot  tunnque  200,  li.  \\\  by 
quamdiu  Hfter  tamdiu  (as  loniras)  211,  17.— 
'As. . .  so  ",  how  rendered  278,  3.— 'As  little 
as  '  =  //0//  inaqls  qmim  .'J03,  412.  As  manv  as, 
how  rendered  208.  208;  a<  much  as  200.' 301. 
'As  niucli  as  possible'^r/z/rt/zivv.  superl.221, 
li.  17.  'As  soon  as  possible' =:v?/rtw  pHinuni 


222,  18.  'As  much  again  '  referrino-  tomul- 
t\\)\e^=al(ero  tanfo  219.  R.  9. 

assuefacere,  constr.  w.  ol)j.  jnf.  79,  lOl. 

Asyndetic  coordination  99,  "l^O;  of  adversative 
propositions  280,  R.  ». 

at,  but,  Lat.  adver.«anve  coord,  conj.,  used 
to  correct  mi>takes  279,  4;  at=ii\  least  207, 
43:  at  rtrte,  at  tamen  Ih. 

at  all,  Engl,  einpliatic  expression,  how  ren- 
dered 290.  42.  'Not  at  all  '=07nrrwo  non, 
nequaqnam,  nullo  modo,  nuUo  pacta  -300,  52. 
—At  If  ml,  how  rendered  290.  403.  'But  at 
least  '  =  fl/,  at  certe.  at  tamen  297,  4.3. 

Athos,  how  declined  340,  24. 

atque,  and,  coord,  conj.,  use  of  97,  115;  277, 
■■>80. 

attamen,  adversative  conj.,  its  use  280.  5. 

Attraction  in  comj)arative  periods  217,  309. 
Attraction  of  ilie  neiration  300,  408. 

Attributes,  definition  28,  20.  Attributive  gen- 
itive 20.  27:  attributive  adjs.  see  A^ijec- 
tires.  }*articiplesasattribut(s291.394  foil. 
Nouns  in  apposition  as  attributes  91  foil. 
Coord  nation  of  attr.  100.  H.  8.  Fonn-adjs. 
as  attributes  100.  240.  Pronouns  as  atiri- 
butes  100.  283  foil. 

Attributive  phrases,  see  Phta-<tes. 

audere.  ausus  sum.  semi-deponent  249,  344  ; 
w.  obj.  inf.  03,  80. 

audire,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  26. 

aus,  nom.  t-rm.  of  Lat.  nouns:  gender  & 
decl.  117.  203. 

ant,  C(«Grd.  conj.  =  or  100,  122.  When  used 
without  repetition  283.  A".  15.  Ant..  avt= 
either. .  .or  100. 122.  Dift".  from  due.  ..sive, 
reL..vel  280,  38.3.  Aut. .  .aut=^i)arl\v. . . 
partly  x'83.  li.  12.  After  negaticms  jiist.  of 
neque...heque  282,  li.  13. 

autem,  but.  adver.^ative  conj.  09,  121.  Use 
ol,  and  dirt",  from  s^d  and  rerutn  279.  4. 

auxilia,  au.iViary  troops,  used  in  neuter  een- 
«l.r40.  R.  4. 

as,  nom.  teim.  of  Lat.  nouns  of  R-class  129, 
ICkS:  of  nouns  belonirini:  to  Greek  K-class 
344,  li.  9.— .\djs.  terminating  in  ax,  how 
declined  150,  212;  their  meaning  352,  Ji.  5. 

Before,  Engl.  adv.  of  time,  transl.  bv  ar»iea 
.58,  70  ;  as  conjunct,  hv  priusquum  or  ante- 
quam  2^34,  328.  For  '  before '  as  preposi- 
lion  see  P.  II. 

bene,  irr.  adv.  of  bonus  (=  well)  58,  L 

bonus,  forms  irregular  degrees  of  compari- 
son 203.  2!i0. 

bos,  irr.  noun,  decl.  and  render  140,  188. 

both,  Enirl.  jiutneral.  now  tratisl.  174,  4. 

Brazen  age  of  Lat.  language  6. 

bundus,  v.rbal  adjs.  terminating  in  352,  H.  7. 

but,  Eiiirl.  coord,  conj.,  its  difl'erent  Lat. 
equivalents  99,  121  ;  179.  381  ;  279,  3  &  4. 
But  not  =  neque  tti-o  ;301,  3. 

by,  Eni:l.  preposition,  re^'ular  case-equiva- 
lent of  Lat.  abl.  18. 13.  As  pass,  agent  =  ad 
107,  131.    For  otlier  translations  see  P.  11. 

Gssar,  5. 

CapitaJ  letters, when  used  in  Lat.  7,  4. 


424 


INDEX. 


nant    stems    of    3-     l^^^-    ^   ' '^,  ,„„i  ai.- 

Laiiu   nouns   takon   V'T  S.r  19     ib    2I 

24  ;  .it  in  8.  dccl.  34o,  di. 
Cato.  M.  Porcius  5. 
Catullus  5.  /^^,vw   nres.  pubjnnc. 

.-JOtl,  415.  .  ,  „(>.  o 

rsL";r.':"c.H!;u-.'w    inf.  cl.  2..«),  »;  it»  len. 

j^i '^;£  ^^,^'iaf  ^u.":^;  cj;^''-t 

certo,   Htlv.   of  munniT  ob,  bi>.    Di»-  "om 

eSSn:t.SL,andmfrrr^^^ 

Characteristic,   deft.u.ion  13,  2      of    vcr^ 
do-UTiuine  their  conjUiZ.    !•••  ^     32    .iU  ,  4 • , 
52 -4')   5.-):  228,  320;  of  uouus  331,  1  ,  .i-ib, 

cl:;iJrlixy'nanl^  of  country,  .ender  40.  .. 

hcMore  suftU  ne  {hicciiie,  stcciae)  308,  07. 
Koi-tin,  par.  205^  4m;  200,406. 
Cities  in  u.<  7'>'- 40;*  V^io-i'ion  t.^  vrb.^ 
»;!?  4S;rS'  1  ^  Ci-;^- /..n.   how 

ri'iwlt'red  112.  n.  31.  _ 

.!■;:■  cl.lf-o.,i.i..f.  79.  10.  ;w.«/ 
,"f!u-«'  conslr.  w.  obj.  inf.  61,  80. 

cI,m,i'rison  '.1 'V,  ii'.iou  14. ,/ ;  201.  aSV  Cm- 

oqi  roll  -Comparison  of  ftinaliiv,  ana  oi 
S^ivrence  -20.),  "i-KV  .Numeral  comp^msn, 
9n.<  2t7roll.  Quantitative  r.onip./209.  .^00 
a  com!),  of  li-itation  (U.  c^n.n  n, 
numeral  excels;  -more  Huu  six  etc.; 
219.  312. 


Comparative  degree^,  ^^:^^;^^Z  ll!^ 

IvV.Vs  202.  6-.    I.  r.  cou.pa.rative.  2;  3,  2«.KH<    '• 
('(mil)   tonned  l)y  mavJ-^Ot,  2«.i     Comps. 
wi       u    superlatives  2  -4,  13;  w.ihout  poM- 
rives  203    K.  5;-.i08,  291.    Co.npaiatives  of 
^t^rh''202.28r;203.   10.-C.m)p^    >^tl^ 

Two  a.ijs.  compared  w.  each  other,  placed 
ill  the  comp.  fbv^ree  21b,  308. 
rnmna-ative  periods,  their  formatioJi  20f,,  ^.»4 
fX\nah sis  2^7,2%.    In  numeral  com- 
^;scm2U:W7;i..qua.nitam^compnr- 

son  •>0'.)  300.  Attraction  •)f  the  btconu 
.nember  217,  R.  3.  Idioms  in  co.np.  pe- 
riods  215  f«)ll.  ^   ,     .   »^^  na 

Comperire,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  29.^,  26 
complures,  severed,  i.ulet.  nun  en  I  i  .9,  2., 
Compound  nouns,  treatment  of  l..b.  ^r-j\'^ 
lo  nnder  En-l.  compound  nount  into  Lat. 

157,  229,  Chanire  of  their 

Compound  verbs  3.  .,  A ppv.   ^  .^ 

su-m-vuwtls    50.    d,    .10«, .1.,    '     ',     „.K:,.k> 
Clmn<,'esin    the    V^p^l^ll^'f'^'^^^T^ 
veri)s  are  compounded  .-J.).. -J,  -wb-  "•.^• 
^Facere  comp.mn.ied  w.  o.  h.r  verb.  3o8,  4. 
coaari,  con.tr.  w.  oOj.  inf-  IH,  138. 
,  concedere.  constr  w.  ut  2.n,  ^i- 

'  conc.udere.  to  >nJ^r,^y.  ^''^■^}:y,^*\J^'  ^ 
c',^/./..tode.er.nine.wj    291,2.. 

condemaare.  constr.  w.  q;iod  ^  ♦/'  f  •    „   35^ 
.ilh,4ii,  o —  ^  PHiadliiius  228 

i;;ri'v-;rnjS"onr'v.-.rK-«iion.c...o"«. 

'?°?Sf,nj°''*li"3Sro' i:''c';o,-cl.  cu,g..  .77, 

J""  '  "IL'r'I'f  T.nSM      Law  of  cnsrcilticm 
Consecation  of  lenaea.  .  ....  . 

I  cSnsequently,  how  expr.  m  I;;''/^^   '  ,8. ,. 

Cousolants,  P-'- """'llI^V;;'  .^ ^-   Greek  ''ons. 
(•uus..nant-st>'m*  143,  loll,  vv.  ^J'*^' 7.^.  ,  ., 
S;,ns.41foll.Adjs.vs,c.n.s..e.n.l^fo.K 


INDEX. 


425 


.;^m;4.r55T36'',2:3|>3»ll. 


obj.  inf.  248,  Ji.i. 


oonsulere,  w.  uf  291,  27. 

Coordination  !«i,  ll.i  loll;  276  foil.  Copulative 
cord.  97,  115  loll.;  2??  loll.;  ol  two  attr. 
a<ljs.  «18,  1 19.  Af<>  ndi'tic  co«ird.  '.)9.  120;  280, 
9.  Advirsarive  coord.  99,  121;  279  foil  Di<- 
jiin.tive  coord.  99,  122;  2S0  loll.  Causal 
coord.  284,  :iHr,  &  38t;.-Coord.  w.  doui)le 
conjs.  27.S;  280  foil.;  by  <juu,n. .  .turn;  purs 


. .  .parn  ;  qua  .  .qua  ;  nt/iul. .  .nviu'  ■  que 
.  .que  27K,  li  foil.  -Analysis  of  coord,  pbra- 
^'t•!S  100,  lii:  277. 

Copula,  54.  61, 

coi,iae,  tioop-,  used  in  fern,  gender  40,  R.  4. 

coi',  decl.  Hiid  «render  140.  18!l. 

Cos,  island,  how  declined  340,  24. 

Coss.  ahbreviaiion  tor  cons 'ilibv^  294,397. 

Countries,  names  of,  their  geuder  40,  d;  3:38, 

country,  Eu^].  noun,  how  to  be  rendered  in- 
to Laf.  122,  n. 

coantrymen,  tiansl.  by  T7iei  {(ui,  sui.  etc.) 
/io//ii»M,  (ir  by  iiostiuttx,  restrdf^s  iuO,  R. 
8.     What  coiiiitrvinaii  :'=;<7//rt,s':'  260,7^    8 

credere,  «onstr,  w.  Inf.  cl.  21Ki,  2b. 

cujas,  G.  fitis,  nieaniiiir  and  decl.  2t;0.  R.  8. 

cujus,  a,  um,  intorr.  po.-^s.  form-adj.  188,  2»;8. 

cuius,  cula,  culum,  diminutive  term.  To  what 
iioilMs  they  areapplifd  3.37,  R.  1  &  2. 

cum,  coiij.  see  quuin.  Cam,  preposiiiou,  eee 

cunctari,  w.  obj.  inf.  63,  80. 

cur.  iclnj,  inierr.  adv.,  a09,  421.     Cur  noti, 

why  not  lb. 
curare,  w.  >i(  291,  27.     Cura  uf.  a^*  circumlo- 

ciuioii  of  allirmaiive  iyipt-nitiv.'  ;305,  62. 
Curtius,  wiitir  of  the  silver  a/;e  6. 
custodiae,  guards,  ol  leni.  •,'ender  40,  R.  4. 

Dative,  corri'sixiiHliii?  to  Fnirl.  pn'i)o<ition 
/"  18.  13.     Dat.  si.no.,  rules  lor  it.s  lorma- 
tioii  ill  ail  the  declensions  :iJ2,  c;  of  «at. 
iM.uu.  :333,  i.   Dai.  pi.  in  e.>  in  :i  decl.  ,333,  2 
Dat.  |)1.  in  iWus  in  1.  decl.  is.  U.  :i;  :3:«,  2.  d. 

dapis,  defictive  noun  wiihout  nominative 
■•{i7.  R.  1. 

debere.  w.  oi)j.  inf.  63,  80.  Used  impersonally 
bl.  81.  ^ 

decernere,  w.  obj.  inf.  63,  80;  w.  w/  291.  27. 

Declension,  detinition  13.4.  Theory  of  Lat. 
decl.  ;j31.  1,  loll.  FiusT  DECL.  17  foil.  For- 
mat, of  it»  oise.s  :W2,  R.  1.  Archaic  «ren. 
in  as  and  /7/  :i:Vi.  R.  2.  a;  term,  am  inst.  of 
Ciru/n  ill  i,'en.  pi.  3-33,  c;  term.  (7A'/.sin  dat.  & 
Hbl.  pi.  m:l,  R.  2.^/.— SkcoM)  dkcl.  34  foil.; 
its  ^tem.s  teruunate  in  o  3.3b,  12.  Archaic 
Horn,  in  OS.  and  ace.  in  om  alur  r.  lb.  Gen. 
of  nouns  in  lu.^  take  a  siiif,de  i  in  classical 
p(-riod  .Tib.  1:1  Vocative  m  i  \u<\.  of  in  e 
3."),  5:  3}7,  14.  Irr.  plurals  in  i  and  a  3.5,  37. 
Pluialia  tantum  ;i5.  R.  3.  R  stems  <if  2. 
decl.  43.— Tiiiui)  dkcl.;  its  d;rt".  from  the 
other  declensions  ll.").  189.  Cliaracteristics 
11.5,140.  Form,  of  the  cases  1|.5.  141;  Gen- 
der lib.  142.  Case-teiminitioiis  lib.  145; 
133.  Decl.  of  liquid  stems  in,  14b  loll.  (L- 
clasp  117, 147;  N-class  118.  H9;  R-class  121), 
154;  S-class  122,  158;    Irregular  consonant ' 


Ptems  140  15?8).    Decl.  of  mute  stems  127, 
lb2.  foil.  (I'-class  127,  164  ;  T-class  127  165- 

i^>T'','-';  ^7!^-  1'>^)--1^«(^1-  of  vowel-stemJ 
132,  l<2  1oll.  (Ke-,Milarvowel-ohiss  i;i3  \Ty 
liqiiid-m.ites  137.  182;  irremilar  vowel- 
stems  i;i9,  187).  Dirt,  between  decleiision- 
siem  and  true  stem  i;33,  R.  3.-Foukth 
DKCL.  154,  221  :  List  ol  nouns  belonjjincr 
to  11407.  4.  To  reco;,'nize  nouns  of  f.-urtS 
and  second  declensions  in  nom.  1.55  i{  4 
Dative  pi.  in  vbu-^  155,  K.  3.— Fifth  "j)ecl! 
li>o.  22.3  iMosl  of  its  nouns  lack  the  plur.* 
i.>h,  K.  2.     Dkcl.  op  Adjectives,  see  Ail- 

j^chvs;  oJ  Pronouns,  see  tiiese.— Decl. 
of  GiiEKK  NOUNS,  see  Greek  Nouns. 

Defective  nouns  .•^4»;  loll. 

demonstrare,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290  26 

Demonstrative  Form-adjectives  170. '244    foil 
Demonstratives  used    as    antecedents   of 
relative   clauses   260,    10.     Demonstrative 
numerals  179.  2.")7. 

demum,  only  i^not  before),  limitinff  part.  295. 
101;  -Ml.  40  i  a.  «  *-  , 

Deponent  verbs,  112,  134  foil.  Formation  of 
their  tenses  in  pres.  svstem  2::i2.  ;325;  iu 
pert,  system  249.  34.1  Dei)onent  pert,  par- 
tKi|)Ie  as  pied.  a!)l.  29-3,  34. 

desinere,  impersonally  used  64,82;  w.  obj. 
nil.  b:i  80. 

desistere,  w.  obj.  inf.  63.  SO. 

deterioraiKl  deterrimus,  dift'.  from  nnor  and 
pf's.^liitiix  20.3.  9. 

Determinative  form-adjectives  1G9,  242  foil.  Pe- 
culiarities in  their  inllection  109,  R.  3.  Iii- 
terr.  form  170.  243.  Definite  form  170  244 
foil.  Indef.  form  172.  24b  loll.— Determin- 
fltives  constr.  w.  partitive  geii.  iauidain, 
eorinn,  etc.)  2b9.  375. 

to  be  determined  =  j/V^fe  63,  1. 

dens,  declined  35,  36. 

dicere,  coiisir.  w.  inf.  cl.  290.  26. 

dicis  {rau.^a),  defective  noun  without  nom. 
317.  A'.  2. 

Diminutives,  meaninjr  and  formation  of  .3.37, 
15.  8ei  ve  as  test  for  the  u'ender  of  their 
8  em-uouns  lb.    Diminutive  adjectives  338, 

Diphthongs  in  Lat.  6,  3;  pronunciation  of 
10.  6. 

dw.  inseparable  preiiosition  .358,  3. 
discere,  constr.  w.  obj.  inl.  63,  80;  w.  Inf.  cL 
290,  2b.  ' 

Disjunctive  questions,  how  formed  308.  419. 
ditionis.  defective  noun  wiiiiout  nom.  347,  R. 

diu,  lonr/,  adv.  of  time  58.  70.    IIow  com- 
pared 203,  10. 
dives,  adj.,  declined  151 ;  how  compared 204, 

do,  EiiLrl.  auxiliary,  not  transl.  in  Latin  236 

•333 ;  300.  R.  .^0. 
docere,  w.  obj.  inf.  79,  101  :  w.  Inf.  cl.  290. 26. 
dolere,  constr.  w.  quod,  or  Inf.  cl.  291.  28. 
domus,  L'ender40,  e  ;  decl.  of  155.  R.  2. 
dubitare  (non),  w.  quhi  291,  30.    J>ubito  an. 

iiiiomalic  use  of  312,  78. 
ducenti,  etc.  declined  178,  R.  3. 


426 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


427 


dum  com.,-whilo234,  r«8;  const r.  w.  pros, 
imi    -id  :«l).      Bum  H8  enrhtic  ^um^  to 

dumtaiat?  rU,  iJ/art/ur  than),  Uautn.g 

part  •^'•.■»,  401  :  -i'.»",  4CW  a. 
duo.  dc  cl.  of  178,  K.  -i. 

GrtM^k  nmms  iu  r,  as.ume  ti.e  eadin-  a  in 
ehh  Hn^.^'f-^in-adj.,  h.nv  to  he  tnm.l.  172. 
IS  I,  vi.-)'.»- 


3:U,  6,  K.    Greek  nouns  of  the  S-c^- »"  ff 

A.l.j<.  in  t-.  belon-iii-  to  S  and  l-cla^^es 

especially.  Em-1.  emphatic  part.,  how  transl. 
•2't.">  41)1;  -i'W.  4(r):  -.iiiH.  4'i-4s.  . 

esse  -irr.  ;'eri;of  III  conj.  5K  59:  co'.j-  o    >  « 

!>r..     /:>.sr  a.  opnla  54,  ♦il--^>f  ><  ^'  f  ^^ 
of  II.  form  of  impt'rativc,  use  ol  .W4,  -5    in 

et.  and.  coOrd.  conj.  ;  use  ol^  .,  •' ,  ^I'l 
:m  ^/  .  .  .  «/,  both  .  .  .  and  ih,  »1" ,  ,'.8, 
8S0.  A7  i.x  (i'/K  idiomatic  use  of  27»,». 
/;/  /w»,  ditV.  from  ne>/»e  -^^^^  Jl^-  Jf  " 
also  -i...^  401  :  2'.»:.  404  ;  =  eren  "fS.  404 


E30le3ia3tical  writers,  C, 

'?,;%,);,-■  71  >!./>.  J.  E";f  ,'«.'y;'*4':-,;„ 

orl,  liovv  cxiir.  Ill  L:lt.  KM.  li-,  iSH.  W.  "J 

'n-'T";,  ".n:-..  oV,',u.'  ,.,..„  »«..^i«: 

,Uu3,».»m..lin.i".Hivc,.r,mnaI      low„«l 
.,,,1111.4  tlu'V  are  applied  •>>*,  "•  *• 

f  ,,'  /^  o,  -i  /e  21    '  W  lio  t'lse  '=r/Ui.< ah '/-•  f 
•Wuut   flso'=7'/i'/  alitidr       bouiLiuui., 
,„\^,,''  ^nliiKl  niiul.  Ih. 
«     n<.^      ten.  ina.ioii   of    Lat.   nouns  he- 

•     ,   .w,^,-.Mi.«l  ill  ouestioiis  helore  tU'  m- 

eniii:^-;-a^alc<;5nl.co.^;.t.use28^^ 
eatirely,  l.'.w  r.M.d.re.    2.  (..  4(i 

Epicoa3  nouns  ol  beasts  ^ ^    •'• :  ,, 
E?ira3.  f'-m.  nounof  cou^;try40,rf. 

''^^'^"\r\:^ror'la      '-uns&adjec- 
^^i  ves"   N.,  uis  in  Vr  generally  i)elon.  to  R^ 
\       '..t'X  i\i-c\  •  their  inrtcciioii  and  u"nder 

Jl-r^lO-    w.  consonant   stems  ol   3  decl. 

e[rs^sr'S:u^fvi^?;;ir'Di^^ 

\nes  generally  belong  to  vowel-c  .  ot J 
Hi  ;  their  gender  and  mtlectum  1-^';1;  •  ' 
1-^7  181.  Thot^e  belonging  to  T-cJass  128, 
107  •  to  S-class  12:^,  I'.l;  to  tlfth  decl.  127 
on-  15«.  K.3.  Collateral  forms  in  a  of 
thV.'wfter  348  R.  4.  Gender  of  nouns  in  e< 
14  20>  1 17  20:  .  Nouns  in  ?.•  taken  from 
'o'^eek  \:  Vecl.  =«4, ;.;  m  8;  tbey  are^>f ten 
declined  alter  3.  decl.  ;ij-\^^^l;,  .^7'^, 
nouns  in  r,?  assuming  the  term,  a  m  Lat. 


also  -.J.'n.  4WI  .  -t.M.  ^v'  ._— -      .      .^. 

ebenim,  causal  coord,  coiij.,  u^e  of  iM    .W» 
eUam,>so  2<>J,  401;  -:  even  2'.i.,  404.    i^tH 


e'sr'rt'^/'^''^^'    preliminary  remarks   con- 

ceriiiiif^  its  u>e  234,  :W0. 
eus,     num.    term    ..f  Greek     nouns ;   how 

treated  in  Lat.  340.  25;  341.  3. 
even     Kn-l.   emphatic  particle   hovy  trans  . 

2'»°'    401  ;  207    404;  remlered  by  ipi^e   194, 

279"  foil  :  171,  li.   9.    Not  even  =  tie  .  .  . 

e?;;^tiJ;'ex;^.lT2,240;2.3.23:lb..<m^. 
KJ?rvihin-  =  om//irt  2tr),  K.  9;  =  q>ndvi>< 
S).  3.->'.».  ~Q'nd<i>»'  used  only  in  certuiu 
connection- 2ti3.  /^  20.  ir  rli*^ 

ex  noin.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns  of  K-class 
12*.>.  170.  Greek  nouns  of  Iv-class  in  ex, 
how  treated  in  Lat.  34»,  R.  10.  ,„„^..- 

exclamations,  2'..:,,  4 1 .  Kxclamatory  cl^tses 
i„  ,h,-  lorm  of  interrog.  clauses  .ill,  .a. 

existimare,  constr.  w.  luf.  cl-  2'.K),  -to- 

nin.fer-m.  2  :  by  sup«^rlatives  221.  3  •>        ^ 
extremus,  indef.   «rduia    numeral   1^2,  261  , 
irr.  superl.  of  exterus  20.3.  290. 

Facere  I-verb  of  3.  conj.  50,  .58  Its  com- 
pounds w.  prepositi.ms  chan-e  a  into  ?  .-.'), 
\lT  Farlr  ecmipounded  w.  other  verbs 
wittiont  change  of  vowel  ('*<<">■ ''^/''^^,ff.«'^-! 
3-,8  4  Format,  of  its  puss,  voice  lUb.  28  , 
ItS:  k.  4.  /V-  w. ../  and  y  as  circuin- 
h>ciition  of  imperative  .JO.)  h>  .  3lK  4  5 

familias,   ancient   gen.^of  jamUia ,    nouns 
compounded  w.  it  h^i ,  K.  lu.  ^„„,i„-,.^ 

far    End.    adv..    before    superl.    rendered 
/o'/i7^o7m*///r>219.  IMO. 
f»s  indedinabh^noun.  useof  140,  l.H). 
fateri.  constr.  w.  Inf.  d.  290,  2(.. 
fauces   t>l  tannim;  gender  and  decl.  1.39,  .-i. 
fXw  citizens,   transl.  hy  v^i  Kt'n,  sm  etc.) 

fere  (ferme)  a^mo^Mitniting  P;i[t,^f '' ^:*^^  ;, 
DifT.  from  jvpnr  and  prope  2'.*9,  40»..  JSrt/^^ 
I  fere  =  quite  enou-h  299  3  :  ./>^«  "<>/>  - 
;  -almost  ,._'enerally)  iiot  m  52 

ferre  irr.  verb,  conj.  of  ol,  o9  ,  2iu,  o.  i» 
i    pass.  10(1,  127. 


few,  indef.  numeral,  = /jam;  few  things  = 
pa'ica  2H1.  7?.  14. 

fidere,  fisus  sum,  semi  deponent  249.  .344. 
fieri,  as   |»as-.   o[  fact  re.  its  conj.  10(),  128; 
241,  10;  as  (!<)pula  (  =  to  become)  w.  pred. 
adjs.  107.  1.32.    (^tnnritv  of  the  i,  in  the 
dideieiit  form.s  of  fien  388, 1.  6. 
Alius,  forms  its'  voc'  in  i  .3.5.  R.  5. 
Finite  verb,  (ietinition  14,  H.  3 :  227.  R.  1. 
for,    Engl,    pr'puyi/io/i    (see    P.    II)  ;  before 
veriial  adjs.  in  inr/  rendeied  by  quod  2o4, 
329 ;  291.  -^9.     Foij,  E/u/l.  catmU  conj.,  how 
e.\-})r.   284.   ;J86.     Eou  not  =   neque   (non) 
einin  .3'H,  3. 

Form-adjec  ives,  classification  and  inflection 
lfi8,   W9   foil.      Combination    of    1!K),   270 
fi'Il.     See  the  articles  Deterniinatire,  Xu- 
mernL    Q'tanfitafire,  Possesdve,    Qualila- 
fire  Form  ad/fcfivf.t. 
fortasse,  p*^rhap<.  limitinij:  p'lrt.  295,  401. 
Fractions,  li<>w  expr.  17!».  2.5«). 
fraus,  L'eiider  and  decl.  of  l:j9,  R.  10  ;  128. 
Fraurntitive  verbs  3."-().  R.  4. 
from,  Kiul.  preposition  isee  P.  T[)  ;  before 
pirticipials   in    t"7,  rendered  by  Lat.  obj. 
ml.  til.  4;  79.  R.  .5." 
frugi,  indeclinable  adj.  151,  218;  its  comp. 

and  snpi-rl.  204.  11. 
frugis,  defi'ctivt;  noun  without  nom.  347.  1. 
fully,   Kiigl.  empliatic  part.,  how  rendered 

2'.»ti.  102. 
Future  tense  of  the  present  system  (fiitiire- 
pre>fnt),  format    of  231.  322.  3.    Fulure- 
ptvf.,  its  signification  2,j0.  347. 

Gajus,  Roman  Jurist  (J. 
gaudere,  gai-'maa  num.   semi-deponent  249, 
.3t4      Constr.  w.  <i>i()'l  or  Inf.  cl.  2'.»l.  28. 
Gendsr  of  noiin.>j.3s.  :i<.t.     Nouns  in  p!..  com- 
pri-inir   iiKlividiials   of    both    sexes    (and 
Iieiice  n.itional  nouns)  are  ma~c.  39.  R.  2. 
Gender  of  peis.   nouns  of  1.  decl.  39,  42; 
of  nouns  denoting  tliiiiLTS  in  1    «fc  2.  decl. 
40.  4-ifoll.  ;  fein.    in   '/••.■  40.  h—f;  of  citi.-s 
and  countries  in  >/,?  .3:;8.  17;  of  shrubs  and 
»in  iller  plants  in  //v  ;i3s,  17.  '2.— Gender  of 
nouns  ol  3.  dec!.;  of  nouns  of  N-clasg  119, 
151    foil.;   R-clas8    121,    1.50  foil.;  S-cIass 
123,    Ifil  :    T-class   12H,   IHT ;    K-class   130, 
171.     (Jender  of  the  vowel-stenis  1.37.  181  ; 
13«,   isrt;  of  the  irr.  vowel-stems  139,187 
f<dl. :  of  the  irr.  consonant-stems  1:^9.  188. 
Gender  of  nouns  of  4.   and  5.  declensions 
155.  R.  1  ;  1.5(!,  225.     Svnop-is  of  the  gen- 
der rule><  144.  191   folf.     (J.-nder  ol  nonns 
denoting  pkksons  144,  192  foil.     Commo.n 
GENDKR  of  personal  nouns  144.  193.     Gen- 
der of   BKASTs    145.  I'.M  ;  epicene   gender 
145,   195;  common   gender   of  beasts  144. 
193  ;  115,  li»7.     Gender  of  nouns  denoting 
tilings  according  to  the  terminations  14ti. 
1!»8  foil.     Gender    of   Greek   nouns,    see 
Gr^ek  no'fns. 
generally,  Eii'.d.  adv..  transl.  hv  the  verb  so- 
IPr-  GJ.  H{.  1 :  by  plrnmi/ite  iSO.  258. 
Genitive  case,  coiTes|)on(ling  to  Engl,  prepo- 
i«itiou    0/",   or  to  possessive   case  18,   13. 


Corresponding  to  Engl,  appositions  93.  C  ; 
94.  D  &  E.  Gkn.   sing.,   1;hv  of  its  forma- 
tion   in  all  declensions  332,  b;  of  nonns 
in  ins  and  ium  formed  w.  a  single  i  3:^8, 
If).— Gkn.  pi.uu..  its  ft)riiiation  in  all  de- 
clensions   3:«,    h.     Interchanging  of  the 
two  systems  ot  case-endings  in  gen.  sin" 
and  plnr.  333,  R.  2.     Gen.  pi.  in  i//m  o'f 
vowel-stems  in  ;i  decl.  133,  K.  1.  Partitive 
OEN.,  see  this  article, 
glis,  irr.  nonii,  its  decl.  and  gender  139,  187. 
gloriari,  constr.  w.  quod  2tn,  -iS. 
gratias  agere,  to  thank,  w,  quod  (not  w.  Inf. 

el.)  291.  -iS. 

gratuhri,  w.  quod  291,  28. 
gratum  facere,  to  oblige,  w.  quod  (not  w.  Inf. 

cl.)  291,28. 

greatly.  Engl,  adv.,  =  maf/nopej^^  'iiO,  2. 
Greek  nouns.     General  priiiciple  concerning 
their   u<e   in   Lat.   3:i3,   4.     First  Gkeek 
DECLENSION  3-34,   6.     Regul.ir  case-termi- 
nations  334,    0;    exceptional    case-termi- 
nations 33H,  11.     Gender  33(5.  10.     Second 
(4i:ekk  DECLENSION  3.]9  foil.     Temiinat. 
of  nom.    simr.   339,  19   loll.     Wliat   nonns 
take  ace.  sing  in  on  331»,  22.     In  what  in- 
stances Greek  case-terminations  of  2.  decl. 
are  tLsed  in  Lat.  33'.».  23.     Decl    of  proper 
names  of  .\ttic.  2.  decl.  .340,  21.     Gender 
340,  27.— Tmiio   Gkekk  declension  340, 
28  foil.     Nouns  of  3.  (ireek  decl.  have  the 
same  classes  as  the  Lat.  340.  28.     Greek 
nouns  w.  liquid  stems  342.30;  w.   mute- 
stems    312.    3t)  (P-class    .343,   R.  ;  T-clas3 
343,  R.  2  foil. ;  K-class  .344.  R.  9  f^i)ll.) ;  w. 
Vowel-stems  341,  29. — (ireek  case-termina- 
tions of  ,3.  decl.  used  in  Lat.  .34.5.  33. 
grus,  irr.  noun  of  3.   (4?)  decl.;  inflection 
and  gender  140,  188. 

Habeto  =  knou\  IT.  form  of  imperative, 
idiomatically  used  .304,  2. 

baud,  negative  part., 295, 401 ;  diflf.  from  non 
2<><.>,  407. 

he  (him,  her,  them),  Eiiirl.  pron.,  when  ren- 
dered by  is.  ea.  id.  and  when  by  sui.  sibl, 
f>e  161.  232  foil.;  I«i3,  238.  In  Inf.  clauses 
287.  3s9;  in  interrog.  clauses  312.  R.  16. 

help,  7  cannot  help  doing  something  —  non 
jws-'Um  non  :300.  51. 

hence,  as  Enirl.  adv.  of  conclusion,  how 
expr.  in  Latin  284.  .3a5.  For  hence  as  loca- 
tive adverb  see  P.  If. 

Heteroclite  nouns  317.  -37. 

Heterogeneous  nouns  318.  38. 

Heterological  nouns  19,  5  ;  of  1.  decl.  409,  1  : 
of  -2.  decl.  40«».  2  ;  of  3.  decl.  409,  3. 

Hetefoplastic  nouns  347,  R.  3. 

hie,  ha93,  hoc,  denionsfrative  form-adj..  d'^cl. 
and  use  171,  245  foil.  Translation  of  hie 
as  di-jjtinct  form-adj.  204,  7?.  23.  .^rt<"  ab- 
solutely used  2(il,  R.  13;  w.  ])artitive  quan- 
titative gen.  sing.  2(i7.  371  foil. 

to  hinder  (somebody  from  doing)  =  itnpe- 
cFife  w.  obj.  inf.  79,  R.  ,5. 

hir,  indeclinable  noun;  doubtful  meaning 
of  this  word  3:38,  IS. 


428 


INDEX. 


his,  her.  its,  their./.ncl.  R^^J/^nd  ^s^^u'by*  ' 

s,,,!,^  1ST.  -itkS  ;   197.     In  inf.  «•).  -»«,  -«'  i^'"- 
Hiitoricil  lafini  ive,  nee  lahniuve. 
homo,  dill,  fiom  rir  118,  u.  1- 

^Z^   Qua,t>>lv.M.  5:  as  adv.  =  quam 

S  K.   i.-I  KNOW  now  TO  (do  a  thiu^') 
z^  scio  w.  obj.  inf.  0»,  5. 
humus.  r//-o"n'/,  iVi".  »'*'""  of  2.  dccl.  40,  e. 

I      (ireek  iu-utcr«.  in  t  of  the  T-<las=»,  how 

T-i,tdnTiU  245.  yc/emgt/i=the.ame 

jif»  ^tlT,  /^.  ■"•^-  ,  .      „.  .,.34   .1.50.  OK.) 

if  Kniri.  conditional  conj.  =  «t  234  •««,  .f>-, 

■W)      It  not  =  /a4,  or  si  non  :'.02,  No.  4.    7/, 

f„tro.l.,Hn-  intcrr.  clatines,  transl.  by  Lat. 

iiitenoir.  panicles  811,423.     _ 
igitur.  cOnl.  concUisive  conj.     D.ff.  from 

,rao  Hiid  itaqiie  2.^,  38.i. 
me   /Aa/   deinonstnmvf  forra-adj..  its  docl. 
.n.    .w'  IT!    -il.-)      (Cannot  b.-  transl.  hier- 

a   y   vhe     l.'sod  as  disjunct,  adj.  2H5,  «.  « 

mus.  a,  um.  .limi-V'!i:i'^^„^7'"-  N"""'*  ^" 
wliidi  it  is  applied  .«.,  if.  l-  , 

imber,  irr.-.  noun  w.  vowel-stem  of  3.  decl., 
i,s  lurtrcti.H.  and  gender  ^'^.^-  l«2>n 

immo,  Uou-  us<-d  1"  answers  309,  420. 

impedire,  vv.  ol»j.  mf.  .9,  101. 

impellere,  lonstr.  w.  ^<.  291,  27. 

iM-rative  of  botli  lornis  803  foil. 

lSpe?ati.e  sentences,  ^^- ^'^^'^^''^ 

.nl  r.MMis  ..I  tb.'ir  pre.licjtes  304  1   11 .    L)80 

of  III.'  11    lorn,  ol  imperanve.  and  <l  ft.  from 

ho      lorm  3  4. -2  foil.    U^e  ot  II.  lorm  in 

he  :  ■  H  rs.  and  .lirt".  fnmi  the  pres.  and  pe  -r 

Mhimu-   m\  iV^     1'^«  of  circuuilocuiions 

l.f  H.^rativc  imperative  nentences  3U6,  41o. 

iMl.KKATIVE    .LAlTSES30ti.  bo. 

Imperfect  indicative,  f-rtna  .  .Vf,.^^).- *  .  S<„ni 
nr,.ti(.u  of  this  tense  ^.A  3i'.  .^«'j  <•■ 

ImT)erfect  subjunctive,  lor(nat.  ot   231.  3-i.  ^. 

7!t  in  cM.n.liiional  clauses  of  non-reality 
2.V2!  :iiO.  When  used  in  clanser  acct.idmg 
to  law  of  consecution  i.")!,  319. 

Impersonal  verbs,  see  T>r6..    Impersonal  pre- 


imprimis  (inprimisX  e^p^cia/^y,  emphatic  part, 
21».-},  401;  -298.  4T. 


INDEX. 


429 


({ii-(ll(<.  see 


f'redicafe. 


it  is  impossible  not  to  do,  =  non  possum  non 
w.  ui)j.  luf.  3oO,  61. 


N-cl:is-:  how  ireated  in  Lat.  'i^i- 30. 
li^ceptlve  unchoative)  verbs  52^  (U.    torn.at.  of 

their  i-rr.  ^yMe^n  .iU),J{.  3  f  }»• 
incertum  est  ",.i.li<;.nv'nc  us.    >f  -^    ;  '«-^^^^ 

incitare,  constr.  w.  '"-:•"•  7!-  .^w..   u  :.  ^gn- 
tad«d,KMSI..-m,.l.alicorlim.uns!pa.t.,h..«r 

•j:U.  350;  in  con.iitionMl  tl.  *.)2.  .»»•. 

indignari,  w.  7''<>'/ «''•/"f/,';,^   -f,)^,,,,. 

Indirect  'l-ef-^;»\::'^;,^(;^rdini;  numeral 
^'lS;l';;;f:^u:ori;«..,irr.Buperlameof 

In/nitiv.,  Lu...  i,  of  ll.reck„..l>  i^J^  » 

*:,',','ri,:r'«'.'e.  . ',.  '..t^or .!-•  •  «i""^' 

s    hi.    ini.    wncii   I'    »^  ^        ,     OlilKCT- 

ji.id  nred  adis.  or  nouns  1)1,  .H.  2)  uii.it.»  1 
^FIN  Tn-n2.  79.     Verbs  jroverninu  ob^. 
Ml   03,80;  deponents  w.obJ..n•l^t•. If; 

„bj.  inf.  dependent  <'.'\'*'^*'^  ^\*  >  ;  if '-^is 
•  „^  .11«   1       Mfiniiiixxi:  w.  oitj.  ini-  <^^'~» 
c-(P/yi.--.««  24H.  1.     -'^7'"  '* .  .,,^   »  ■'4      Verba 

mt.  28b,  1.».     '^"-    ,  .   \   c   rendered  by  ut 

Infinitive  (hn-l.).    V^'J;.  ";;•  '"^^  Lciatise^ 

234.  H-  4;  ^y  various  Lat.    1  nai  iittuo^'-, 

2'.»l,  29.  Their  formation 

Infinitive  clauses  285  fob.  ^^ '  'V.,  ,,,,..,.,1  by 
.1«-,  -^IA^  foil  In  .  clauses  introouttd  «»jr 
i^^a/;f^Is<V  -k  Wl»tM.  Engl.  That-clan.ea 
are  xnr  by  Lat.  Inf.  cl.  2<»n,  ).-l"f.  cl. 
::t.  07.^' after  verbs  of  prals.n,^  ecu- 
snrin-,  and  verbs  of  ^motion  291,  2«. 
infitias  (i/n,  <l^-f"»""^'^,'l*.!'";.i*''ds\i  13,  4. 

injuU';  dofective  noun,  i..  M.  only  347,  B 

2. 

inauam,  conjnir.  of  242.  12.  ,  .  4^  11 

instar    n.ieclinable  noun,  n-c  of  140,  11. 
S  &  of  w.  a  participial  in  ;'''(.', I^;';^'*^;,^ 

bv  ^//(0/(301,53.  For' instead  ol  -y^ro,  ^ee 

intelligere,  const r.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  26. 
'  to  intend  =  relle  «3.  1. 

con«lr  w.  interr.  clauue  312,  »«. 
Ltrrrem^'awtit..  no„„.  used  in  ace.  and 

330,  11.  lb. 


Interrogative  Form-adjectives,  belong  to  each 
ol  I  he  tive  classes  ot  ronn-adjs,  170;  17V; 
181;  I80;  187;  188.  Use  of  interro^'ative 
lorm-adjs.  and  advs.  iu  relative  luieiroj,'. 
sentences  :509,  421. 

Interrogative  sentences,  307  foil.  Are  either 
al)-<)luit-  or  ri'lative  3h7,  416.  Disjunctive 
int<irr.  («entences  ;^8,  419.  Two  interr.  adjs. 
or  advs.  in  the  t«ame  sentence  310,  73.  In- 
volution of  inierr.  pent.  310,  74.    Intkk- 

noGATIVK  €'I.AISES  310,  422. 

Involution  of  interr.  sent.  310,  74. 

ipse,  demonstrative  h)rin-adj.;  ded.  and  use 
ITl,  24.");  171,  K.  9;  asattr.  of  pronouns  of  1. 
&2.  persons,  how  rendered  191.  279;  as  attr. 
ot  pron.  of  3.  pers.  (he  himself,  etc.)  195, 
2S0.  Not  atireeinj^j  in  case  w.  the  reflexive 
sui,  nfji,  nf.hiw  with  the  antecedent  oi  sui 
etc.  (se  ipse  inferjecif)  196,  281.  Its  gen. 
ip^ii/s  lojjieaily  a^jreeinii  w.  poss.  adjs.  (sua 
ips'nts  virtus)  198.  9.  Jpae  =  even  171,  K.  9; 
2it8.  45. 

ire,  (eo>,  irr,  verb  of  4.  conj.  47,  54,  Pass,  of 
ire  lOti,  129  ConjuiT.  211,7.  Remarks  on 
it-  ten-es  243,  4-6.     Compounds  of  ire  48. 

Irregular  Lat.  nouns  346.  :ii.  foil.  Irr.  verhs 
23S  lull.  Irr.  adverbs  lo2,  H.  6  &  7.  irr.  com- 
parison 203  foil. 

is,  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns  and  adjs.  of  .3. 
decl.  They  jjenerally  are  vowel -stems  ; 
their  gend<r  and  decl,  1.3.5.  177;  137,181. 
Nouns  in  is-  that  take  Un  in  ace.  sin»,'.  i;j6, 
179;  w.  i  in  abl.  sin<r.  1.37,  2-4.  Niuns  in 
is  belon<,diii;  to  S-cla>s  12;i,  Uil  ;  to  T-class 
129,  167.  IrrciT.  nouns  in  is  (sa/tguiti,  ])ollis) 
140,  189.  Synopsis  of  irtnder  of  all  the 
nouns  in  iv»'  UT,  204.  Nouns  in  is  taken 
from  the  (^reek  :Ul.  R.  1;  343,  Ji.  4.— Ad- 
jKCTivEs  in  ^^'  149,  20^>. 

is,  ea,  id,  pron.  of  3.  pers..  and  demonstra- 
tive form-adj.;  decl.  of  160,  231.  Is  quit,  lie 
wii  •:  ei  qui,  those  who  2.58,  3;  is  and  ei 
omitted  lb.  AY  (afquc)  is.  idiomatically 
used  278.  8.  Id  as  determinative  abs.  adj.; 
f<H-m  of  it-  cases  {ejus  rei,  ei  rei.  eo)  262, 16. 
Id  w.  partitive  «.'en.  sinir.  268,  372.  Id  tetn- 
]}0/ig.  id  aef<lti<  268,  R.  30. 

iste,  dennmstrative  f..rm-adj.  171,  245. 

ita,  adv.  of  manner  (P.  II);  ita  {ita  rero) 
used  as  answering  part.  =  yes  308,  420. 

itaque,  coord,  conclusive  conj.  Dill",  from 
f  /f/o  and  iqifur  284.  3s5. 

ius,  nom  term,  of  nouns  and  adjs.  of  2.  decl. 
35,  •W;  :ii6,  13.  I'sed  to  desi^'uate  the  Ro- 
man fjenfes  3.37.  13. 

I-verbs  ^^\  third  conj.  ,50.  58.  Format,  of 
their  tenses  233.  32ti;  in  pa~s.  voice  105,  R. 
3.     Deponent  I-verbs  113.  13ti. 

ix.  nom.  term,  of  nouns  and  adjs.  of  K-cluss 
12<).  168;  l."»0.  212;  as  f<m.  term,  of  movable 
nouns  in  or  144.  3;  352,  App.  Ill,  R.  3. 

Jubere,  w.  obj.  inf.  70. 101 :  w.  Tnf.  cl.  29^,  26. 

Diff.  of  tiiese  two  constructions  21K1,  n.  1. 
iudicare,  w.  Inf  cl.  2<H),  2»;. 
junior,  youngtr;  use  of,  and  diflf.  from  minor 

'2u4,  11. 


Juppiter  (Jupiter),  decl.  of  140,  188. 

Jurists,  Roman  6. 

jus,  riq/t(,  law.  gender  and  decl.  of  139,  R. 

10.     DitT.  from  lex,  law  129,  n.  12. 
jusjurandum,  ded.  of  157,  R.  4. 
jussu,  defective  noun,  iu  al)l.  only  347,  R.  2. 
just,  Engl,  emphatic  part.,  how  transl.  298, 

40.5. 

Justinian,  6. 

justo,  as  comp.  abl.  =  '  than  it  is  just '  218, 7. 
Juvenal,  6. 

K,  when  this  letter  is  used  in  the  Lat.  al- 
phabet 6,  1.  K-class  of  Lat.  nouns  129 ;  of 
Greek  nouns  used  iu  Lat.  344  foil. — K- 
mutes  («gutturals)  7,  5. 

to  know  how,  rendered  by  scire  w.  obj.  inf. 
64,  5.    To  know  =  novisse  248,  4. 

Lac,  irr.  neuter  noun  140,  189;  147,  205. 

Lactantius,  6. 

laetari,  constr.  w.  quod,  or  Inf.  cL  291,  28. 

Latin  language,  its  origin  and  brief  history  5. 

laudare,  w.  quod  291,  28. 

least  =  vd/iinius  {ininime)  185,  2;  230,  290. 

■At  least,'  w,  the  force  of  a  restricting 

part.,  how  transl.  296,  403.     '  Bui  at  least' 

=  at.  at  certe.  at  taimn  297,  43. 
less,  Engl,  quantitative  adj.  and  tiA\'.=minus 

(minor,  minores.  pauciores)  185,  2  ;  186,  li. 

2  ;  210,  302  ;  210,  R.  12;  214.  R.  14  ;  211,  305 

I^ss. .  .than  — mm  tain.,  .quam  303. 58.  Less 

tliau  (before  numerals),  how  to  expr.  219, 

312;  220,  R.  13  foil, 
lest.  Engl.  conj.  =  tie  301,  4 ;  after  verbs  of 

fearing  .302.  55. 
let,  as  auxiliary  of  the  imperative  in  3.  pers., 

how  transl.  306,  63. 
levir,  derivation,  and  decl.  3.3S,  18. 
lex,  \aw,(\\f(.  from  jus  129.  n.  12. 
licet,  it  is  allowed.  inii)ers.  verb  61,  76.    Its 

construction  w.  logical  subj.indat.,  aloiig 

w.  pr>d.  dative  74,  R.  3. 
linter,   irr.  noun  of  3  decl..  inflection  and 

gender  139, 187. 
Liquid  consonants  7,  5.     Liquid  stems  of 

nouns  117, 146  foil, 
little,  Hs  quant itai ive  form-adj.,  how  transl. 

18(),  R.  1 ;  generally  expr.  by  non  mvltuvi; 

a  little  =  panllum  299,  50;  not  a  little  = 

aliquant  us  (um)  185,  3.;  too  little  =parum 

lb.;  HO  little,  tardulus ;  how  little,  quantu- 

lug  187,  5. 
Livy,  5. 

locuples,  adj.,  decl.  of  150,  212. 
locus,  n(uin  of  2.  decl.,  w.  plur.  in  i  or  a,  of 

different  signilicatioiis  35,  37. 
longe.  longius,  longissime,  adverbial  degrees, 

geiierallv  used  in  the  meaning/ar,/a/-/A^7', 

fart f test '"iy)-^.  10.    Longe  before  superl.=6y 
/(/?-2l9.  R.  10. 
Lucretius,  5. 

Mfl,  nom.  termination  of  neuter  nouns  of  T- 
class.  taken  from  the  Greek  :^4,  R.  6;  147, 
205.  Nouns  iu  ma  sometimes  take  gen.  pi. 
in  tdrurn,  dat.  pi.  in  its  344,  li.  7. 


I 


430 


INDEX. 


magnopere.  quantitative  adv.  =  very  much, 
m'a'nus^'  funnt'  irr.  degrees  203.  2<M)      m}or 

form  the  supcrl.  deir.ee  ot  "^lJ^'^»_17;,,f^:^. 
2M3      Mavime.  as  euiph.mc  part.,  -  ^^ptti 
ail V,  clfiertv  2!>.V  4Ul  ;  2US,  46.  Dilf.  from  the 
ailv.  imuiine  -illS.  4S. 


more  «•*  qumit  tative  adj.  =  P'ti^    i'^-^-  -^  ■   '» 
more,  n-  q"  ,j„r,"i  1T'«  •i.>7  ;  nP(iuiiiiii- 

t.itive  adv.  =  mf/^i"  21'>-  •^•--  -''"' -^^*'  -,'"', 
',;;„"'■'.";%  •  t-rnV,:  a/i>i,..iv.  a,|j.  vUl,,  r 


to  make  a  living,  ''^^•^'.'^^t  9^'5C':%f  i^i^^         S'referrln.^toth.ntrs  ==  l^'}' '^  J;^'^^^ 
malle,  irr.  verl).  conj.  n,  59:   ^" , '  '^ :  'J"^'       )>\^,     Summary  «.f  rules  about  r.mUH, 
traM-1.03.K.l;;i4;>.3.Lseofm     .^n2^,3        /M  ^jj_.  ^,.^^^.;  ^^-    "r!:"  ^^L"  H:; 


j/a//.  w.  obj.  inf.  «i3.  sd.  w- 9;f;;/'^  '^"'^  ^^-  ^ 

SS=i'>;;'oorrir."  D.ff.  oi  these  expres- 

siuus  118.  u.  1.  1  „  Af\  n   A 

mancipium,  dare,  of  neuter  gendei  40,  R.  4. 

SaSdui  (U-lectivc  noun,  in  a>.l.  only  .M7,  « 


■  more 
or  advs. 


expr 


r  bv  minua  w.  an  affirmaiive 
(mi'iius  mpe  —  more  ran-ly) 


villi  li 


)i. 


many 


iZ^n,  ar.  rendered  u'uun  UnniA  ^nnU 
3.>T.  Manv  olhen»,  ahi  inultiiM,  dO-i, 
(itiH-r  tliiui^!*;  iilia  luulta  lb. 

Martial,  i\.  ^.n^  Mtn 

mas,  decl.  and  «render  13'),  1«T. 
M&trona,  iiver.inasc.4it,  a. 
meditari,  w.  (»bj.  inf    114,  13«. 

•2ti.   Imperative ///''m<'//Vo-i4.>,  2:    ••  »•  ^,- 
met  ei.diiiea!  si-.ttix  to  pronouua  I'Jl,  -»•». 

Tun- %;/.  abs.  us.-d  =  -my  fnends,^  -my 
nuuiiy^'mtS.  Nenterabj^pl.mej^-Muy 
p.op.  rty;  or  •  my  .-it hurs,   f  ».l-/;/'?;  . 

miUel  miliia,  use  a.ul  .  ed.  of  1.8,  11.  3-5. 

million,  liow  exnr.  1  .i».  K.  «• 

Sine,  thine  etc.,  En-l.  pos..  how  expr.  264, 

Tnt^n.»     indef    quantitative    form-adj.    185, 

T-?"'  u  "ed  a-  adv.  18S.  >»•-'.».     Use  <.t  m.  in 

nujtntitiMve  comparison  -210,  .JOi,  -in,  -w.). 

^;;^;;^Zn-:i'^a;i^r'uperl.=  leant 
negative  answer3«)i>.4;iO. 

:i:^;u^iuVt'oo■d.2r8./^^   ^;;-t;'^f 

...«?;/  e/i'f//i.  not  only  .  . .  I>nt  "Ir'  ,^*f- -• 

molesce  ferre,  to  be  vexed,  w.  quod  or  iuf.  tl. 
2'Jl,  28. 


adj.  or  adv 

;  I  i'/  for  bv  th,-  inneeti..nal  ^uperlatlve 
onKdj.  2.-4.  2:.3:2U2.  288 

--;\troi«p;S^;>-"" 

31«.  41.     Ol  nouns  ui  3.  de.  .  144   -4- 

r^;:;vi;;j:;;Am-TtvKj40  45. 

„,  ,,i.//^/U   IS,        -J  •  .      ^  „„,//<V„,.„- 

^''^''■';^    Jr/?     q     2«        /Ml.     When  the 
^n.^  mXnV  u;-d'^«(  /e.  9.     Much  as 

4     oivi    -^n  •  21«»    8     \  Kiiv    Mi("H.  aa 

./A.,#,  '     ^o  mud»  =  /f///^'''  (tanniin),   t?i<- 
/         tTmw       uch  '  'SO  much.'  abs.   us.'d 

^(>.i,   i»,     •"'"        '  .1.«^    •>      Mil  o    as   abi. 
CrS?Ku.Krrc:;inp™iiv.--..V'm..;.efo.e 

«■,;"«("••!«■  "1":  '"^f"™  »"i.'>"- '';■"■* 

mcTut  i;0.  JoT.     Abs..lute  nse  ol  the  neu- 

l-.iT  foil. 


N»  (/»«)  =  i"'^eed,  affirmative  particle  295, 

^^^  '  *fni\rJon1    it-^  u^e  284.  386.    Nam, 
nam,  causal  couj.,  »«     "         .  , 

as  iuterrojjalive  suffix  309,  4il. 


INDEX. 


namque,  causal  conj.,  284,  .386. 

narrare,  con.<tr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  2W,  26. 

natu,  ddective  noun  in  abi.  only  347,  ff.  2; 

added  i<> ///i//or  and  ///a^'or  to  express  aj^e 

of  meii  204.  11  ;  22(»,  15. 

ne,  1)   NKGATIVE    PAKTICLE     =    TiOt  295,    401. 

Its  U8«'  in  iie<,fative  imperative  si-nti-nces 
3(X),   415.    Ne  .  .  .  quid-in,   not   even  300. 

52.— 2)//?,  NKGATIVK  CON.ILrNCTION,  =:'lest.' 

or  '  that  not"  301.  4.  Idiomatic  use  after 
verbs  of  fearim;  302.  55.-3)  ne.  as  enclitic 
iNTEunoGATivE  PAHTicLE  307,417;  iu  in- 
direct questions  311,  42.1 

nearly. Knirl.  particle.  hc»\v  rendered  299,406. 

nee,  coiMciinaiing  negative  conj.,  see  ntqne. 
Nee  non,  nee  ni/til,  use  of  300,  5.  Aecne, 
'  or  not,'  in  indirect  questions  311.  42:3. 

necessario  as  eomp.  abi.  =:  'than  it  is  ne- 
c.■^^ary  "  218,  H.  7. 

necesse,  ind.-clinabln  adj.  151.  R.  4.  Neeesse 
est,  as  impcrs.  pied.  61,  77.  Its  construc- 
tion w.  predicate-dative  74,  R.  3. 

nefas,  indeclinable  noun,  use  oi"  140.11. 

negare.  w.  Inl.  cl.  290.26  ;  iust.  of  dicerew. 
TicL'aiive  Inf.  cl.  .•:03.  411. 

Negation,  expr.  by  neirative  particles  299, 
407;  by  neijjurive  words  compounded  w. 
tlie  n. ■«ration  (ne)  ;inO,  40n.  With  what 
Words  negations  may  or  must  be  connec- 
ted in  neirative  scn"tences  ;iOO,  No.  1-4. 
Tw(»  ne-raiions  in  same  sentence  300,  51. 

Negative  sentences  294.  398  foil. 

negligere,  w.  oi)j.  inf.  63.  NO. 

neither  ...  nor  =  ne(iue  (ritc)  .  .  .  neqne  {nrc) 
.3t)-J,  109.    When  rendered  by  ne  ..  .  ntre  lb. 

nemo,  indef.  determinative  adj.  ;  declension 
and  relation  to  mdh/.-i  172,  5  ;  174,  249  ;  174, 
3.  Ab>oliitfly  nscd  =  nobody  2.58,  4; 
3(MI.  408.  Xeino  uinqiiani  (never  anybody) 
30(»,  No.  2.  Xeihonun  and  non  ntino  259, 
li.  5  ;  263.  2(»;  300.  51. 

nempe,  expkuiative  part.,  295,401. 

Nep")S,  ■">. 

nequam,  indeclinable  adj.  151,  218;  its  de- 
jri-es  201,  11. 

nequaquam,  emphatic  neL'ativo  part.  300.  ."12. 

neque  (ne:),  nor,  and  not,  coord,  neirative 
conj.  301,  3.  Did",  from  et  non  ;i0l,  .'>:}.  Xt- 
(jiif  rem,  but  not  301,  3;  ntqne  tanun  lb.  ; 
iii-iiue  (non)  enim.  (or  not  lb.;  neque  i{/i- 
tur.  therefore  not  lb.  Neque  . .  .  neque  = 
Utiiher  .  .  .  nor  :i02,  49  ;  aftir  a  nei^alion 
=  either  ...  or  282.  /.'.  13;  ;io0  ;  51. 

nequire,  irr.  verb.  conjMirated  4s,  R.  2  ;  241, 
9.  W.  obj.  inf.  63,  iSO;  used  impersonally 
64,  ^2. 

nescire,  w.  obj.  inf.  63.  80.  Use  of  in  nejra- 
tive  sentences  300.  408.  Xti^cio  an,  idio- 
matic use  of  312.  78. 

neuter,  iiulef.  «leterminative  form-adj.  172, 
42ti,  5:  declension  173,  218.  W.  partitive 
K<*n.  2h9,  .375. 

neve,  nor,  in  imperative  sentences  and 
ciau-es  .306.  6.5. 

never,  Enirl.  adv.  of  time  =  vumquam  58, 
70.  Never  anybody  =  nemo  inulliut)  vm- 
quam  300.  40S.  2.  Never  anvrliinir  =  nihil 
umquam  261,  Ji.  12;  300,  408,  2.     And  nev- 


431 


TT^LUt 


er  =   neq7je  umquam  301,  No.  3. 
ner^r  =  ne  umquam  301,  No.  4. 

nevertheless,  transl.  by  tamen  after  quam- 
quam  and  etf^i  2:^1,  33i). 

nihil,  quantitative  indef.  form-adj.  (=  no) 
185.  263.  Forms  no  plural  261,  H.  13.  Al- 
ways requires  partitive  construction  in 
connection  w.  nouns  18(),  2(i5.  Its  u-e  as 
neuter  absolute  adj.  =  nolhinq.  not  am/- 
ilnng  261.  Ji.  12,  Xi/iil  reliqui  est  269,  R. 
32;  nihil pfnsihdbco  lb. 

nihilum,  nihili,  nihilo,  use  of  262  J^". 

niinirum,  eiii{)liatic  part.  295.  401. 

nimius,  quantitative  indef.  form-adj.  185, 
263.    X'unis,  adv.  of  nimius  188,  269 ;  222, 

nisi  (ni).  unless,  if  not,  subordinating  conj. 
231,-328;  .30-2,  4.  Generally  takes  indica- 
live  252.  35<J.  In  conditional  clauses  of 
non-reality  takes  imp.  or  plup.  subjunc. 
lb.    Nisi  forte  302,  4. 

niti,  w.  ut  2!il,  27. 

nix,  irr.  noun  of  3.  decl.,  ^^ender  and  inflec- 
tion 1:^9,  187. 

no,  1)  Enirl.  indef.  form-adj.,  rendered  by 
nullus  or  nemo  172,  5  ;  174,  3  :  as  quantita- 
tive adj.  by  nihil  186,  265.  No  such  thing 
=  nihil  tide,  or  nihil  eju-^inodi  263,  .363. 
no?/iore  fhanhL^i'oTii  nmnerals  303.  «iO.— 2) 
Enirl.  particle,  as  negative  answer  to  ques- 
tions, how  expr.  in  Lat.  301^.420.  'No, 
but '  =:  inano  lb. 

nobody  =  nemo  258,  4.  Nobody  else  =  alius 
nemo  263,  IL  21. 

nolle,  irr.  verb,  conjugated  51,  .59;  2-39,  4. 
Translation  of  6.3,  2;  24-2.  3.  W.  obi.  inf. 
63,  80.  Nolleni,  use  of  •>13,  3.  Xo'li,  w. 
obj.  inf.  as  circumlocution  of  negative 
imp'ratives  .306,  415. 

Nominative,  case  of  the  subject  21,  19. 
Predicate-nom.  64.  63.  Formation  of  the 
noni.  sing,  of  nouns  322.  a  ;  of  nom.  plur. 
3:«.  g. 

non,  negative  part.,  295,  401  ;  299.  407.  Con- 
neciion  of  nvn  w.  other  particles  :-;00,  52. 
—X on  enim;  non  ergo  ;  non  igifurSOl.  3. 
Xon  i^oluni  {modo.  tanfiim)...sed  etiani 
278,  2.  Xo})  modo  {folum)  7ion...sedne 
quidtm  302.  410.  Omission  of  the  second 
n<m  in  this  construction  302.  57.  Xon  ma- 
f/i\  quam  =  as  little  as  30.3,  412.  Xon  mul- 
turn  ==  little  299.  50.  Xon  nemo,  and  nemo 
non  2.59,  Ji.  5  ;  ,300.  51.  Non  numqvam, 
and  numqnam  non  lb.  Non  jxtssum  non 
lb.  Xon  tain..  Ait  ,303,  59:  non  tain... 
quam  (less  than,  or  not  so  much  as)  J^l  58. 
—  Xon.  as  negative  answer  to  questions 
309,  420. 

nondum,  use  of  .300.  408. 

nonne.  interr.  negative  i)arr.,  use  of  .308.  418, 

nonnulli,  several,  indef.  form-adj.  172,  216. 

nor.  Knirl.  c<i5rd.  neirative  conj..  transl.  by 
neque  301.  3;  when  neve  must  be  used  302, 
54  :  302,  409 

nos, declined  160,231.  DitT.  ])ervvcen  thee-en. 
pi.  nostti  and  nostrum  161,  R.  1;  270.  376. 

noster,  poss.  adj..  1^7,  268.  Nostri  (pi. 
muse),  without    a  noun  =  our   irieuds, 


432 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


433 


onr  troops  etc.  250.  6.    m^fra  (pl-  neuter) 
=  our  proprrty,  our  art.iir»*  'it.!,  A.  i.). 
nostras  docleu.i..n  and  .ne:iniu^'  f.*^ '.^  ..oq 
no^.    En-I.  ne-ative    part.,  hoA'    expi.   ^.U, 
3o7      -Not   to  know.-  'not  to   w.-h     3i)0. 
40>^      And   not  =  nfJi'tf  or  €^  /*o/'  301.  •)} , 
t  at  not  =neornf  no.  :Wl,  4 ;  no    even 
^  „....y»i'/em   300,    52  ;  not  anytjunj,'  = 
r,i//;/-irtl    A'.  1-2;  not  at  all  ^omrnvomi 
nu'lo  ino'lo  i-tc.   mh  r,2;   not   ><;»  -/!';^- 
iluin  300    408:  if  noi  =  I'f^t  or  -se  /k>«  302. 
4  -Not  in  iniporative  scMit  -ncos  by  «^  not, 
7ave  etc.  3>.r,.  4i:>.     Nor,  in  qursuons    by 
no.M.30S,4m    <^-.o/.,n,u.suon^^a^ 

no!!fan^...qad>n:mroS.     Nut  >o. .  .as  not 

<S  /.i/-i/  2(5:1  R  21;  by  tiolluui,'  eUe  = 

1^;^^?;;S.^.?!:^M^«.  I^rvat1onofH52 
7,11  Drrl.'Msion  of  IT;  31;  43;  llo  f;»'  :  1;>/ 
•  1-331  foil.  GcmUt  of  38:  U4  foil. 
N  uns  in  apportion  IH  foil.  l*r.du;at.ve 
u.„u...^l,Hlfoll.  Prop.r  nouns  sen.  iVo;>/ 
nnin^.^  Iiiv-ular  nouns,  see  th<->e.  Al  - 
M,mt  nouMS,  and  nouns  denoting' materi- 
iils  wi.eu  u-cd  m  the  plural  jUi,  «.  4-  ^ 
novisse  inosse».  /'>  A://o?y,  perf.  verb  248,  ~. 

DtV.  fioin  ,sri/-«?  218.  4. 
nnx,  irr.  noun  :  ^eniU-r  and  decl.  130,  5. 

nr.-n   inteiT.  part.  3oT.  417.  .  

&  al  Form-adjective3,   dassiftoatum     .., 
2M    1)  (;.vuuiN.;..s  2.V5.  Interro-.  lorm     m 
2^4    del- form   177,   2.5.'>;    in-lel     I'-nn   l.W, 
2->t'    Distributive  numerals  180,  2.).>;  tuen 
r;:.\v    plur.t.ntum  181.   R.  lo;  »"'»»>'- 

foil.  Ordinals  inst.  of  eardniaU  8i.  ob^. - 
3  Mr./r.i.L.c.^TivEs  182^  •■^'••^•-^;;!"'!'  ,  f 
numerals  17'.».  10.  I^"^t;>    "V'L^' w->     8 

—  \rMKKAl-   ADVKUCS    180.  2.).S.     18i,    1». 

numiuam  .numua^)  58  TO;  3;UK  408.     A^.m- 
nantiare,  const.-,  w.  Inf.  cl.  2".»0,  2b. 
0    hit.  nouns  in  « .belon<?  to  N-^lass  o^^^^^^ 
il.M-1  •  th.'ir  inrtvenon  and  ijemlei  11.»,  i.>i 
fo  1  •    l]!-,     20-2.      N<.uns   in   o   taken  trom 
tl  eGreek;  iu)w  tl»ey  form  tUeir  nom.  nt.d 
ot  Uei  c^ise^.  3 12.  2  &  3.  Gr.-ek  lemale  names 
in  0  (/>>^'/o.  />i'^'7>'' etc.)  341,  4. 
Ob  ect  .lefinition  24.  22     Object  f^-^^ 
liilir'^.     Ol)jeftive  phrases,  ^ee   I liulse^. 
•por  the  dirterent  classes  and  cases  of  ob- 
ic-ts    and  for  obj-'Ct-clauses,  see  1 .  11. 
obmrgare.  w. '/'^rW  2<.»1,  28 
obliviaci,  w.  obj.  mf.  114,  138,  w.  ini 

ociia,  ooissime,  irr.  decrees  without 
live,  useoi  201,  11.  „ 

oiisse   Dcf  verb,  eonjar.  and  u-e2IS,  2. 
E   .'1    preposition,  r.'-ular  ca-e-equ.va- 

"lent  .rr'Lat.'^eu.  is,  13.  Hxpr.  by  Lat  ap- 
positions or  adj-.  (tl»e  ;>vn;..  ol  ^]^-^J^ 
•  Ot  othe;s  '  =  aiilnus  2j'J,  R.  0.     i'  aadu^ 


cl.  29;), 
a  posi- 


of. 


nTortw<i  =  the  estate  of  a  w,fe  310   ff.  l^- 
Of  as  expnne-it  of  partitive  <:eii.  •-i<"'  '^l^- 
When  Lat.  partitive  tren.   is  not  expr.  ny 
0>  182.  2*;4 :  2<M,  371  toll.  .  Whe,.  Enu'l.  o/"  .* 
not  expr.   by  Lat.  partitive  t;en.  1.0,  K-  •', 
ISO,  U.  12:  VM).  R.  1  ;  2(iS,  K.  31;  2j(».  /e.34 
&  k.-Of  co'ine,  used  w.  foree  o»  an  e^n- 
phatic  part.,  how  expr.  20G.  402.  For  other 
Lat.  equivalents  of  En^M.  oj.  see  I     II 
older  =  maior  w.  or  without  nata  220,  lo. 
omittere.  w.  obi.  inf.  (W.  80. 
omnis   all  ;  ind.f.  numeral  1.0,  2.)..     (//n«<=« 
mT/i  ^.^    all    (Of)  >he    soldiers  (not  omnes 
Zntum  270    «.  34.      On,n,s  =  everv,  and 
o,/.,/ia  =  every.him:-2«53.  20;  2(.0   J.  0. 
omnino,  amrmative  part    20..,  ^'"^*''!^*^;- 
As  afVirmative  answer  to  ^"^'^^,10«;^  ^o 
.308.  420.     Oininno  no»  =  not  at  «•' •^""'  •^~- 
on    nom.  term,  of  neuter  nums  of  Greek  2 
decl   330,  19:  when  it  mav  or  may  not  be 
retai.ie»    in  Lat.  330.  20  foll.-The  term 
dnoi  Greek  noun- of  N-cl..  wh.-n  n-taitied 
i,i  I  at.,  and  when  chan-ed  'nt«.  o  3U    ~  & 
S.     Term,  o//  ol  (ireek  nouns   ol1-cla>b, 
how  treated  in  Lat.  311.  H.  <'•  1'^,.»-   ^ 
one,  eardinal  numeral  =  «""•>■  ^ '!;/;'•?-«  V? 
thousand  =  >nh'/^  (not  '"'.""' ^"ff,':'J;,,.h 
5.   On^..  expletively  used  in  E"'-rl- <the  next 

one  etc.).  must  be  loft  <>"'  "!  '^li^J/!!'  '^' 
2f.4,  3(>5.    The  one. .  .the  other,  -  aiier. . . 

onlv^i'mitin';-  particle,  how  rend.'red  (fan- 
Owi  e  c  2<.r,,401 ;  20(1,  403:  2'.>7.  403  a  :  by  a 
neiatiou  sv.V,.}  -.7.  41:  bv  una.  or  .<o/a* 
180.11:  101.  277  foil.  Not  only..  ^\"f '«^'.f 

operae,  workm.-n,  used  in  fern,  gender  40,  li. 

operam  dare,  constr.  w.  nt  201,  27      _  ., 

opinione,  idiomatic  comparative  abl.=/Aani« 
can  he  erpecteil  218.  «•/• 
ops  d^clens.  of  127.  n.  8;  317.  R.  1. 
ojtare.  w. /// 201.  27 

"li  .rUmvaieius  280,  383:  2S3.  3^1:  I^-  /  • 

-  r>      Or  else  ;  or  also;  or  perhaps  2M.  /M-)^ 

On     expr.   by  «uin  disjunctive  questions 

308.  410     Ornot  ^  annnn  lb. ;  =  rucae  in 

iinlin'Ct  qU'Stions  311,  123.  -.♦,.. 

«r      o  n    term,  of  Lat.  nouns  bclon-in<:  to 

"kXs  121.  i:.7;  14(3,  202.     Decl.  of  Greek 

0^i;:;'^^;^f!^;ue^'m;i.nt^hnise.and 

qo.  74    K   2  :  78,  00  &  100  ;  ^5.  10.>      Gen- 
;!;al  rimarks  on'the  Latin  <>rcl<'r  -    ->r'i;^ 

«'••"":•  ,/;i\irX'N-!''fficiof".i- 

m  inif'»'-  '"«I  '^iio  281.  38.-,:    o    r.nni 

and  eJm  2Sl,  :i8;i :  of  the  e  ..phaiic  and 
lim  .iiM.ar.i.'les  2'Mi.  401;  of  the  ne.i^a.io 
;>.!  4;>7:  Ord.M-  of  coO.linate  phr.<es  and 
words  101.  R.0:  ol.c:.or.l.  pmuouns  ^U\, 
R  5-  ofdt'terminative  form-adj>.  1.-). ->i, 
if  iuterroi;ativcs  I'JO.  271:  of  demon.ira- 


lives  and  pos?.  In  connection  w.  other 
adjs.  V»0,  272  :  of  indef.  adjs.  191,  273  foil.; 
o!'  attr.  ueiiitives  in  connection  w.  form- 
afljs.  1!>1,  27.').  Arrangement  of  coord,  pro- 
positions when  two  or  more  words  are 
ix)mmon  277,  379.  Position  of  principal 
pred.  ill  Inf.  clauses  28',>,  302. 
in  order  to,  transl.  by  first  supine  252,  351 

(For  other  e\pI•es^?ions,  see  P.  II). 
oriri,  i)artly  alter  the  3.  conjugation,  partly 
after  the  4th  11.3,  137. 
OS,  mouth  (face),  w.  gen.  ona;  and  =  bone 

w.  gen.  os.si.<!  1:^9,  R.  10;  122,  158. 
08.  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns:  1)  Archaic 
nom.  term,  of  2.  decl.  a3«.  12.-2)  Of  Greek 
2.  decl.  ;tt9,  10.  When  it  is  retained,  and 
when  chaiiL'ed  into  us  3-30,  20  toll.— 3) 
Nouns  in  os  belonging  to  S-classof  3.  decl. 
12.3.  ICil  ;  of  Greek  S-class  342,  31  ;  when 
declined  after  second  Lat.  decl,  .340,  20.— 4) 
Nouns  in  o<  belonging  to  Lat.  T-class  120, 
1«;7;  belonging  to  Greek  T-class  'Mi,  R.  .5. 
— .'\)  Gn-(^ks  nouns  in  to?,  how  treated  in 
Lat.  {.heron,  q.  heroi.-<)  343,  3.-6)  Gender  of 
nouns  in  as  146.  202. 

ostendere,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  23. 

other.  Iiow  to  render  175,  5.  'Others'  and 
'the  others'  difiereiitly  expr.  in  Lat.  2.^)0. 
4  '  Of  others  '  expr.  by  the  attr.  adj.  ali?- 
nns  2.50,  K.  (».  Other  things  =  aliti  (neuter 
pi.)  261.  R.  13:  another  thing  =  aliud  Ih.; 
the  other  things  =  cctfva  2(il,  R.  13.— Some 
...others  —  a'ti...a/ii  2.")9.  5;  the  one... 
the  other.  =  ulfer.  ..(Uftr  lb.;  the  ones. . . 
the  others  ;  =  alien.. .alien  lb. 

Ovid,  5. 

own,  rendered  by  ip^e,  airreeing  w.  its  noun, 
or  'oy  ii)se  in  oknitivk  108.  8  Jc  0.  '  Own  ' 
after  poss..  when  left  out  in  Lat.  216,  R.  1. 

OX,  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns  120.  168;  of 
adjs..  how  treated  1.50,212.  Greek  nouns 
of  the  K-class  in  ox  345,  12. 

P-mutes  ( Labials)  7. 5.~P-cla-<s  of  Lat.  nouns 
<'!  3  (lerl.  1^7.  Kil. 

paene,  alinoU.  limiting  part.  29.5,  401;  diff. 
\\n\\\  fere  299.406. 

Pandectae.  Is  this  noun  mase.  or  fern.  ?  .3.')6. 
10.  R.  /*aii'l<cl,<,  Justinians  collection  of 
I{oniaii  Jurists  «5. 

par,  adj.,  deel.  of  140.  210;  140.  R.  2. 

parare,  w.  obj.  inf.  63,  80. 

pars,  pars,  used  w.  force  of  coord,  conjs. 
•j;s.  1. 

Participial  (F^ui;l.)  in  iag.  transl.  by  Lat.  obj. 
inf.  «il,  R.  1,4  &  6.;  after  fo?'.  rendered  bv 
L.it.  That-cl.iu<es  w.  guoil'SU,  320;  201,/?.2O. 

Participial  sentences  and  clauses  201,  304  foil. 
Al)s(ilute  and  altributive  participial  clau- 
ses 292.  .305.     See  also  Ablatives  absolute. 

Participle  of  present  systetn  (present  partici- 
plf),  formation  of  232,  323  foil.;  of  perf. 
system  ([)erf.  participle)  belongs  to  the 
puss,  voice  217,  .340  ;  or  to  deponents  (w. 
active  meaning)  249,313.  Participles  a<j:roe 
like;  attr.,  w.  their  governing  nouns  201 
;i94.  Their  airreement  in  the  compound 
tenses  of  pass,  and  deponents  248,  341  ;  in 


Inf.  clauses  286,  ;i88.  Absolute  participles 
must  often  be  rendered  by  Lat.  relative 
clauses  257,  ;i56. 

Particles,  definition  205,  400.  Emphatic  and 
Jimiling  part.  295,  401.  Negative  part.  299, 
407  foil.  Interr.  part.  .307,  417;  308, 418  foil. 
Ttieir  omission  308.  68. 
Partitive  genitive  and  partitive  phrases,  deflni 
tion  2(>7,  370.  Arc  either  quantitative  or 
numeral  267,  371.  What  neuter  (abs.)  adjs». 
take  partitive  quantitative  genitives  185, 
2(i4;  2(i8,  373:  lb.  R.  :30  foil.  Descriptive 
adjs.  in  neuter  pliir.  w.  partitive  quantita- 
tive gens.  268,  R.  30.  Abs.  neuter  descr. 
adjs.  nsed  as  partitive  gens.  268,  373;  lb. 
R.  32  foil.  The  governiui;  neuters  in  quan- 
titative partitive  constructions  must  be  in 
NOM.  or  ACc.  2t)9.  R.  33.— Numeral  partitive 
phrases  2<J0.  374  foil. 

parum,  quantitative  indef.  form-adj.  185,  26.3. 
Always  requires  partitive  construction  in 
connection  w.  a  noun  186,  265.  Used  as 
AOVEKB  188,  2(50;  221,  3. 

parvus,  forms  irr.  degrees  203,  290. 

Passive  voice  in  pres.  system,  format,  of  its 
tenses  1U4.  124  ;  232,  8.  Passive  personal 
endings  104, 125.  Pass,  agent  in  abl.  w.  or 
without  af>  107,  R.  5.  Format,  of  pass,  in 
the  perf.  system  (always  vv.  compound 
tenses)  247,  341. 

Past  tense  (preterite),  Engl.,  generally  corres- 
ponds to  Lat.  PEtiFECT  2,50.  316;  when 
rendered  by  Lat.  imperf.  250,  6.  Rendered 
bv  Lat.  PUESENT-iNriNiTivK  in  Inf.  clauses 
288.  390. 

Patronymics,  definition  .3.35,  8.  By  what  ter- 
minations they  are  formed  354,  /?.;  how 
declined  .335.  8. 

pauci.  ./■<?//',  indef.  numeral  179,257.  Pai/ca 
(jHcedatn  —  some  few  remarks  263,  363. 
PauciOtes,  fewer,  use  of  yiO.  R.  14 ;  w. 
(j'nim  in  numeral  comparison  208,  290. 

paulum  (panllum),  a  little,  indef.  quantitative 
form-adj.  185.  2()3 ;  always  in  the  neuter 
sing.,  reiiuiring  partitive  construction  in 
connection  w.  a  noun  186,  265.  Used  as 
adv.  188.  2()0:  diff.  from  noii  inallntn  299, 
50.  Before  comparatives  paido  is  used  as 
abl.  of  ditr.  218,  311. 

pejor,  pessimus,  irr.  degrees  of  malus  203, 
200.  How  distiuiruished  from  deterior  and 
(/rfrrrufi'ts  203,  R.  9. 

pela|:us,  Greek  neuter  nonn  of  the  S-class, 
decl.  in  Lat.  as  neuter  of  2.  decl.  .342,  31, 
R.  2  :  40,  f. 

Peloponnesus,  fem.  noun  of  country  40,  d. 

penates,  decl.  of  139.  4. 

per,  as  prefix  of  adjs.,  (sometimes  also  of 
verbs)  denotinir  'very'  221,314.  For  jjer 
as  preposition  see  P.  II. 

Perfect-system  245  ft)ll.  Paradigm  and  for- 
mat, of  tenses  245.  .338  foil.  How  to  find 
the  two  cardinal  forms  (perf.  ind.  and 
snpine)  :^>.59,  App.  VI.  Stem  of  perf.  sys- 
tem 3f;0,  2.  Active  and  passive  si<:ns  :i(»n, 
3.  Changes  of  stem  :W0,  4.  Vowel-form 
of   perf.-system  361,  5;     enumeration  of 


^34: 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


435 


verbs  helonglnj;  to  it  30!  6.    ^^l]'^^^;^^^ 

y^^vZtU^\  liHt  c,f  perfects  und  .u- 
Stin^c^e.  how  transl.  into  En,l.  250, 

pcrative  :*rnteiu-es .•^^•»'  ^*!"^- 
pergere,  ^y:,;;^^!;;.^^;;^  rendered  hy  forfd^^e 

permittere,  coustr.  w.   obj.  ml.    .J,  101 ,  w. 
parmovere,' con^tr.  w.  ut  291,  27. 

„,„s  ,.f  'h';,P:;'"''^';,',f  •  ^,;,,  „f-il,o  .1.1.- 
V.lj'i'o  ':  r'  VvrJn  ot Vi.e  mcl.  «h,.,,  ,lu. 

petere.  con^tr.  w.  «^  291,  27. 

Petrouius,  I^^^-.P^^f/.';  io_n  Predicative 
P^-^«%'^TTw    predicative  adj..   .;r  1 

;;;;;•  ";cr7r'p.ra?j;  w.'^si  pred.iotj, 

\w-wpn  nouns   as   **ubj.cts    1  ri,    2.... 

Pred    pin-,  cnsistin-  <>^  ^^]^'^  J^^' J'^ 
^Sfo^ui>j.acc^.mdp.^.m^^;Ccnn^ 

tives  t»2,  t9,  w.  .i<i>'«->"-  "        •'       ,..,  .    1   ., 
J„js.  d>-p.  on   pass,  verbs   10«,   lU  .  «i«  P- 


97 •  w.  prouoiniii.il  objs 


w\tnibunve>.^-^i^F-,~^;.t;,:; 
pronouns  as  at  r.  sr^ns.  ^l^'^  *  V,     descrip- 

'V  ^M'l^'ir-'i';    47-  w"  at7r:  form  a.ijs.  1.1), 

A  f  aS  or  di'sjunct  adjs.)  2.0«.  35:i.     Par- 
&ive  attrTb.  pbrascB  207.  370.    Allr.  phra- 


ses w. /^nm.^  and  ind^rord^naU  inst^^ 
partitive  P»'^)-,;'!,.^"'^  '^J^^  .uuion  of 

a,tr.  Pli'-^^;^\^^R/y,^,  '  &pound  attr. 
nu)i;.men  <-:,  8^^*^^  ';,,u'hut!ve  clauses 
phraser  .0.    •'-•     {^.V'  treruudive    and 

preposilU)nal    attnbun  s     ^<^iu 
adverbial  attributes  see  1  .  11. 

w.  partitive  uen.  209,  3«o. 

plex  >ina  P^^»,    .  „    -^.    niean  n«4  and   dill. 
\h.:'  ■*]'[:»     UccLuf  .»,m«ai;  in  y'/«  l» 

2.")0.  350.  rondt'red  1>V  Lat.   l)Uip. 

Pluperfect,  (^..^d.),  rcn(U   tu     >      ^      '  ^^. 

■2-)0  :US;  reiulertd  by  L.a.  Py  •  ','  ,;..  i  ..» 
,VMr.-.tinrMiilm;-mJ«-        „f  noun?  17, 

;!^;d  nouns  dinotin:4  materials  are  used  lu 

plur.  347.  /i.  4. 
p  uries,  nuuural  adv.  ISO  2-,8. 

paratives  ol  w*?^/ '/.>■•  h'hI  ''' '  (^  .r"'.,,.,^ .  j^ 

;;;futo'lo"»utu,,ninco,,nv.tnn,    w 

Sn..nn  IS.'.,  2C-... ;  "»;^',"•, '";,,,,;«  -inoro 
„.   or  vviin..nt    V'"" '    .'",,'  :^  .! .  .,.>„  K.  IS 

sin;:.  />/"'••  211 .  -J»»-».     ''  "T  Wi  ,   <•  •>!  i      /V»/- 
•>,;.»•  itsdiff.  fn.Mi  m-fVt-  2b.  X  ZU.     t 
;t;.,..n.ofpri.-e.uulvaluj.2n^^fV,.. 

,,,/,ym.  a  Utile  more,  J^  '  .»^-  •^...fij^inve 
enrir1i«.^V;t^lnost,inde. 

jiuineral  179,  2;j4. 

poUiceri,  w.  Inf.  cL  ^f'' {-%  „_„^er  14,).  1^9. 
Sollis,  irr.  noun,  its  decl.  ^'r.^'l^\\!  ,,„, 
iondo,  ind.rlinable  noun,  u.e  .»1  140.  l.»U. 
Positive  degree,  20I,  it.  i-  ^^,,  .>, 

1^,3.  ^P^,„,  Too  10  Translation  of 
not  expr.  in  Lat.  »«'^'  {"•  .  /  ,  ^^y  ^aas 
the  Kui,'!.  possesbive  /a*,  Htr,  tic.  uj- 

or  fji'^*'  197,  5. 


Possessive  Form-adjectives,  in t err.  and  def. 
forms  187,  20S.  When  ^us  must  be  used 
inst.  of  the  ])OS3.  adj.  of  3.  pers.  197,5. 
I'ossessives  of  3.  pers.  do  not.  as  in  En<>;l., 
a<;ree  in  ^'eiider  and  number  w.  their  an- 
teiedeuts  188.  9.  Place  of  the  poss.  adjs. 
1«8,  K.  8 ;  190.  272  ;  lb.  R.  1  ;  191,  R-  3. 
Poss.  adj-.  absolutely  used  259,  no.  6  ;  2<!1, 
/*.  15.  Disjunct  possessives  204,  3G5; 
210,2. 

possible.  '  It  is  possible '  often  rendered  by 
pOftse  w.  i)assive  obj.  inf.  242,  2.  'As  much 
as  pos(«il)le"'  =  quaiii  w.  superl.  221,  17  ; 
•as  soon  as  p.'  —  qnain  priininn  222,  IS. 

Postclassical  period  of  Lat.  laufjiiai^e  0. 

postea,  adv.  of  time,  —  afterwards  .58,  50. 
Ciiiistr.  \v.  f/'tam  in  the  comp.  meaning 
•later*  207.  K.  5. 

po3tquam,  temporal  conj.  w.  perf.  or  plup. 
ind.  2.50,318. 

postremus,  indef.  ordinal  numeral  182,201; 
irreu'.  superl.  of  ^XmY^ /-//.v  203,  290. 

postulare,  constr.  w.  nf  2!M,  27. 

potius,  ratlier,  emphatical  comparative  par- 
ticle. 295,  401 ;  298,  4S.  /'o/^-.v?/;j'//n,  superl. 
enipli.  i)art..  =  especialli/,  chiejly^just  295, 
401  :  29>,  405. 

prfflcipere,  constr.  w.  ?/^  291,  27. 

pracipue,  eKptciallt/,  emphatical  part.,  295, 
401  ;  29S,  47. 

prascribere,  constr.  w.  vt  291,  27. 

prfflsertim,  e!<]}f daily,  emi)hatica!  part.,  295, 
401  :  29S,  405. 

pr»stat,  used  imi)er?onally  w.  subj.  inf.  01, 
70;  constr.  \v.  quatn  207.  R.  5. 

prfflsto,  iiuledinableadj.,  used  predicatively 
i:.l.  K.  4. 

precari,  constr.  w.  ?//291.  27. 

Predicate,  detiidtion  21.  19.  Predicate-nomi- 
native .54,  63.  Predicate  infinitive  285, 
387;  288,390.  Predicate-abl.  292,395  foil. 
When  pred.  nouns  or  adjs.  must  be  in  the 
accusative  01.  7^< ;  285,  a^^s  ;  79,  102.  Im- 
personal predicates  (ill.  72  &  74.  Predica- 
tive phrases,  see  P/ira'^.<.  For  predicate- 
gen.,  pred.  dat.,  accessory  predicates, 
predicate  clauses,  and  for  the  dift'.  of  predi- 
cate and  i)re(lication  see  P.  II. 

to  prefer,  when  rendered  by  f/ialle,  and  when 
bv  jtneferre  0:^,  2. 

Prepositions  (see  P.  II).  Prep,  used  in  com- 
l)ositi.)n  of  verbs,  and  their  treatment 
.•^5^.  3. 

Present  system  of  the  verb  227.  319. 

Present  tense,    personal   endinj^s  of  15,  10. 
Foiiuanou   of  pres.    ind.   231,   322,  1;   of 
pres.  subj.  2:^1,  4  ;  its  use  acciu'ding  to  law 
of  «onsecution  235.  331. 
primas,  def.  ordinal  numeral  412:  as  superl. 
o\  prhn-  203,  291.    Use    ot  pnmum   and 
primo  as  ordinal  advs.  182,  18.     Qaain  pri- 
iiniin.  as  goon  as  i)ossible,  222,  IS. 
prior,  coni]).  ordinal  numeral  182,  201. 
prodesse,  conjugated  52,  R.  5  ;  358,  no.  2,  R. 
4:  :ixS.  n.* 

profecto,  indeed,  affirmative  part.,  295,  401 ; 
•i'.t«.  402. 
Progressive  and  emphatic    forms  of  Engl. 


verbs,  rendered   by  ordinary  Lat.  tenses 

230.  3:i3. 

prohibere  w.  obj.  inf.  79,  101. 

promittere,  constr.  w.  Inf.  clause  290,  20. 

T^Tom^tn  (in  prompt u  esse),  defective  noun, 
only  iu  abl.  sinii.  347,  li.  2. 

Pronouns  (personal),  accidents  of  15,  8.  De- 
cleiis.  and  use  100,  2.30  foil.  Antecedents 
of  pron.  of  3.  pers.  101,  2.32,  By  what  the 
pender  of  i>ron.  of  3.  pers.  is  determined 
lb.  Reflexive  prons.  and  their  use  101, 
233;  102,  R.  3  «fc  4.  When  prons.  of  3. 
pers.  assume  reflexive  f<irm  103,  2:^8  foil. 
When  i)ronoininal  subjs.  are  expressed  and 
when  omitted  102,  23i.  Cannot  generally 
be  omitted  in  Inf.  clauses  287,  389.  Order 
of  coord,  prons.  163,  R.  5.  Pronominal 
objects  103,  237.  Pronominal  attributes 
198. 

Pronunciation  of  vowels  and  consonants  10 
foil. 

prope,  alm09f,  as  limiting  part.  295,  401.  Din. 
from /6;-^  21>9.  400.  For  proi)€  as  adv.  and 
as  preposition  see  P.  II. 

Proper  names,  of  1.  and  2.  decl.  19.  10  ;  .35,  .38. 
How  modern  proi)er  names  are  treated  in 
Lat.  3.5,  R.  4.  Hebrew  proper  names 
346,  ,3:3.  5.  When  proper  names  are  used  iu 
plur.  347,  Ji.  4.  Latin  first  names,  their 
granmiatical  treatment  and  abbreviation.» 
92,  111.  Names  of  Roman  females  337, 
13,  Adjectives  formed  from  proper 
names  350  foil.  Proper  names  of  Ro- 
man families  337,  13.    Patronymics  354. 

properare.  constr.  w.  obj.  iuf.  63,  80. 

Propertius.  Roman  poet  5. 

prorsus,  aftirmative  part.,  295,  401  :  290.  402. 
As  aftirmative  answer  to  questions  308, 
420. 

prosum,  see  prodexfe. 

Prosody,  p.  388  foil. 

proximus,  irr.  superl.  of  propior  (prope)  203, 
2*^1. 

ps  liom.  term,  of  nouns  taken  from  tho 
Greek,  how  declined  343,  JR.  1.  Latin 
nouns  of  3.  decl.  iu  ps  127,  104. 


Qua. .  .qua,  co5rd.  conj.  278,  5. 

qusrere,  in  the  meaning  '  to  require,'  constr. 
w.  vt  291,  27.  In  the  meaning  *  to  ask  a 
question,'  constr.  w.  interr.  clause  310, 
422.  Qi/ceritur  w.  interr.  cl.  =  '  it  is  the 
questi(m  '  312,  77. 

quaeso,  parenthetically  inserted  in  impera- 
tive sentences  .305,  62. 

qnalis.  interr,  and  relative  qualitative  form- 
ad  j.  1S7.  267:  267.  /?.  2«). 

Quahtative  Porm-adjectives  187,  207.  What 
circumlocutions  are  used  in  place  of  their 
indefinite  form  187,  267  l'^^. 

quam  1)  =  hon\  as  quantitative  interr.  adv. 
189,  R.  11;  dift'.  from  gimnodo  SIO,  70.-2) 
=  «.<,  as  relative  comp.  adv.  210,  304. 
Quam  =  a^  before  suuerlatives  and  ;)yi- 
7num  221,  R.  17;  222,  R.  18.— 3)  =  than,  as 
comp.  conj.  (a)  in  numeral  c<mii)arison  209, 
299;   (6)  in  quantitative  comparison  210, 


436 


INDEX. 


302.  (c)  after  inflectional  comparatives  211, 

quamdiu,  f>ow   long,  interr.  «tlv    m  421. 

(juaiu'lin  =  «at»'  after  Unndta  211,  K.  i«- 

Quamquam,   althouuK   hul.<)i(linatiii-  c..ni  , 

^..vluninary  remark,  about  Vj;  '>^.^;;-i3^  • «  >• 

Quando,  n-hnu  a^  nite.r.  adv.  .JO'.t,  4^1.    Di  1. 

Iioiii  the  temporal  conj.  (/'/«m,  when -JIU 

7t».     For  quando  as  temporal  and  causal 

Quantitative  Form-adiectives,  their  enumera- 
tion ls:.,-^(./,  lull;  lli^ir  use  in  the  partmve 

jiiul    iitlribntive     cont^truclions    l»o,    ^»>-i. 

Their  iiilleetioh  18»;,  •^«iS.  ,„♦;.„ 

Quantity  of  vowels  and  ^yll»;^!?,^-  "»  f  ^^^*" 

of  "t    K.  2.     liules  on  quantity  3SH  foil. 

quantopere,  quantitative  adv.  18S.  •■^fi'-*- 
Juantul  how  mvch.  interr.  qiiantitatiye 
torm-a.lj.  lS:i,  m.  U^ed  a:*  descriptive  adj. 
( ^  iiow  -reat)  1S7,  3.  (^'lanfw  copuc,  lu)W 
nany  troops;  quanta  pecuma.  »';!w  "luch 
n,onev  1K7,  4.  Quantnl»,-^,  lunv  little  18., 
ry.—QNandnn.  as  abs.  tt)rm-a(ij.  2».2  1 .,  w^. 
partitive  quantitative  i;en.  ISb,  2(>ir,  x«m, 
kl.  0'/«/'/o,  how  much,  as  aid.  ol  did. 
before  comparatives  21^  'Sll.-Quantus  as 
r. -la live  =  d.^'Ziu,  29. 

quatenus,  //r^/r /a/-.  ii»t"rr.  adv.  •  W,  421 

que,  enclitic  coimlaiive  conj.  \U,  11.),  -i.», 
8s().     (^'//'. .  .7//''.  both.,  .and.  '-i '»•.•>• 

qu«madmodum.  //««'.   interr.    adv.  309,  421. 
DilV.  irom  <///rtw.  how  810  70. 

Queri,  constr.  w.  V'/rt</  or  Inl.  cl.  291,  2H. 

Questions,  see  Inttriwjatiie  claiuses  and  ^«n- 

qii''d**terminative  relative  form-adj  258.  2 
Declined   like   the  interr.   quis  ]U%  K.  ^. 

Always  lias  quod,  and  ticver  quid  \n  the 

neuter  2«)4,  mi.    See  Relaftce  ndj,  rfi  ns. 
qui,  />o>c.  interr.  adv.  309,  42.    Us  did.  from 

quain,  how  310,  7». 
quia    /y^<-a'/>'f,   subordinatin?   causal  conj.,  , 

preliminary   remarks  concerning  its  use  | 

quid'  neiifer  of  the  interr.  form-adj.  quis, 
ii>('d  a<  interr.  adv.  =  why  m  421. 
quidam,  ^•om^  anrUnn  o,>e,  indef  ''^  ^»-!^;"; 
ative  form-adj.     Decl.,  use   and  dit    fiom 
a/iy^a>172,  24ti;  172,247;  l^"^'  I'-^.f;!  ;,  5^,, 
quidem,    wd>€d,  affirmative  and  rolnctive 
\ article  29.-),  401;  2%,  402.     Ne  quidem  = 
not  even  300,  52.  .,. 

quidni,   niiu    not,    interrojr.    at\j^-   309,  421. 
l)iir.  froni  cur  non  310,  70.    Not  used  m 
indirect  (luestions  311,  42:3. 
quin.  why  not,  luterroj,-.  adv.  309,  421     Q>nn 
e..nj.  =  •  that'  dependent  on  mn  duMare 
291   30.    For  the  other  uses  of  quin,  see 
P.  ii. 
quilibet,  see  quivis. 

Quintilian,  5.  r.m  o 

quire  (queoi.(ompoundof2/v.conjug.  of  241,8. 

Quirites.  dedens.  of  139,  187  4. 

quis  and  qui,  fem.  qu»,  neuter  quod,  ?f  A^/', 
w/uit,  «-Ao,  interr.  form-adj.  of  '  »'^:  <»«  •.'.5- 
miiKitive  class,  decl.  and  use  of  1.0.  24.i. 
Masc.  quis  as  abs.  iuterr.  258,  2.     Quid, 


ahsol.tte  neuter  form  2G0.  359      e^/^.  ^  • 

partitive  {.'en.  {<i"id  »r,ri  etc.)  2b.,  3.1  fo   . 

qiiis,  .^on>e.an»,.  ind.f.  form-adj   in st.  o  all- 

%y,/;.s-  or  quisquam  259,  7.?.  4  ;  30.,  (»;);  3  1,4. 

l)itr.  in  decl.  Irom  the  interr.  quu  2.)9.  A 

4.     Neuter    quod    (abs.    qukl)    '"    l»^^"^*;/ 

aliquod,  aliquid,  and  quicquam  2<>0,  /f.  11. 

quispiam,  somtfxHiy,  anyone,  uidef.  form-adj., 

ii<i- of  259,  4,  oBs.  . 

a<ii  •  decl.  and  use  172,  24b  .S:  217.  D  tt. 
from  ullus  174.  2.50.  Used  ab>olutely  (  = 
anybodv)  258,  4.  Its  plur.  and  abl.  sin? 
made  from  uffu.<  Ib.-Abs.  neutir  orni 
quicquum  .quidquam)  200.  3o9;  w'^'Vivi 
plur.  201,  R.  13.  W.  partitive  quantitatne 
«'en.  20s,  372.  Quisquam  and  quirquam 
changed 'into  quis  and  quid  2r.0.  Ji.  11. 

quisque,  enry,  ind.'C.  determinative  lorm- 
a"  (led.  of  172,  210  &  247.  Lmutatious  of 
its  use  2»).3.  20.  ^#  i~.T  o!7 

quivis  and  quilibet,  172,  246;  decl.  of  1.2.  24.. 
0//im  =  every  one  2<)3,  20. 

quo,  whither,  interr.  and  relative  adv.  309, 

4'M 

quod',  pubordinatino:  conj.,  1)  =  that;  pre- 
liminary xemarks  about  \ts  use  234,  m 
Verbs,  constr.  w.  quod  =  that  29U,  6.—^)  — 
6m/ '/,v^  234,  32».  ,   . 

quod,  neuter  ol  interr.,  ndative,  and  indef. 
lonn-adjs.  quis  and  qui  170,  ^43 :  w  par- 
titive quantitative  gen.  snii:.  2(rfS  3.:«. 

quomodo,  how,  interr.  adv.  309,  421.  Ditl. 
worn  quam,  how  ^iHi.'li).  .,,1.907 

quoque,  a/^0  or  even,  particle,  29o,  401,  2.JT, 

qiot,/iO'r  r/u7f»y,  interr.  numeral  form-adj. 
177,  2.54;    not  used  absolutely  2o.,  3oi. 
O//0/'.  as  relative  -  a.*  2f)7,  /i.  29. 
quoteni,  how  many,  distributive  interr.  adj. 
'     181,  2«»0. 


quoties.'^J/;  often,  interr.  numeral  adv.  IW), 
258.     Totits. .  .</'/o/ie*-,  as  olten  as.  2)8   21W. 

quotus,  interr.  ordinal  numeral  adj.  18-i,  .0. 
Ouo/usquisque  =  h.)W  f^'^  lb. 

quousque,  how  far.  interr.  adv.  309,  421. 

Juum  icum),  vrA./..  temporal  conj.  w.  ind  01^ 

\ubjunc.  2:i4,  m);  in  the  causa  mean  n- 
%i/K-e' always,  with  sul>junc.  2.34,  32JK- 
Quum..  .turn,  used  as  coord,  conjs.  .4.»,  -i. 

Rather,  En-1.  particle,  =  7^fi>'^  ^^^;  f^l^: 

48.  llemiered  by  comp.  degree  of  descrip- 
tive adjs.  221,  31.5. 

re,  inseparable  preposition  3;)8,  3. 

recusare,  cou>tr.  w.  obj.  inf.  03,  80. 

Redundant  nouns  348,  -K.  4. 

Reduplicating  verbs,  see  Perf.  system. 

?cfert,  i<  is  of  im,x>rfnnce  imper^.  verb, 
constr.  w.  interr.  cl.  312.  77  (see  P.  II.). 

Reflexive  pronouns,  see  Pronouns;  reflexive 
tY,7vx  ltd.  233  full.;  102,  11.2. 

Relative  adjectives,  their  general  charactj  r 
and  lormation  109,  li.  2 ;  20.>,  %.  l.dl. 
A^rreement  with,  and  repetition  of  he 
antecedent  2m,  H.  2«;;  200,  3(»8,  \V  I  at 
classes  of  Ibrm-adjs.  have  a  relative  loiiu, 


INDEX. 


437 


200,  R.  28.  Demonstratives  neeo  a?  ante- 
cedents of  relative  clauses  200,  10.  Omis- 
sion of  relatives  inadmissible  in  Latin, 
200,  28. 

reliquus,  meaning  and  use  of  17.5,  5:  259,  no. 
^  ;  2{\\,  R.  13.     xM/iil  rdiqui  est  209,  R.  32. 

reprehendere,  constr.  w.  quod  291,28. 

respubhoa,  dec!,  of  l.">7,  K.  4. 

the  rest,  —  reliquam,  reliqua,  or  cetera  261, 
R.  13. 

reverti,  semi-deponent  249,  344. 

rogare,  /o  (U'k;  dill".  Irom  interrogdre,  to  a«k 
3i0,  n.  10;  constr.  w.  ut  291,  27.  liogo, 
parenthetically  ius-erted  in  imperative  sen- 
tences 30.'),  ti2. 

rogatu,  detective  noun,  used  in  abl.  only  347, 
R.  2. 

8,  nom.  ending  of  masc.  and  fem.  nouns  .332, 
R.  1,  a.  Nouns  ending  in  *•  after  a  liquid 
(liquid-mutep)  belong  to  the  vowel-class  of 

3.  decl.  (except  hiems  and  Tiryns).  What 
masc.  and  fem.  nouns  do  not  take  the  end- 
ing s  in  the  nom.  3.32,  R.  1.  a.  Nouns  in 
s  preceded  by  a  con>(mant  are  fem.,  w. 
Several  exceptions  147,  203. 

saltern,  at  least,  restrictive  part.,  295,  401. 
Did.  from  cf-1'te  297.  403. 

same,  Kngi.  form-adj.,  tran.'^l.  by  idem  171, 
~'4  I :  the  same  at^^idem  qui  2.")8,  3;  261, /M3. 

Samnis,  a  Samnite,  decl.  of  139,  187. 

sane,  emphatic  part.,  295.  401;  296,  402. 
fSane  quidem.  as  affirmative  answer  308, 
420.     ^V6»/<  sane,  indeed  not  300,  52. 

sanguis,  decl.  and  gender  of  141),  189. 

satis,  tnoutih,  indeclinable  adj.  151,  R.  4. 
liiilef.  (luiintitative  form-adj.  185,  203  ;  al- 
ways recpiires  i>artitive  construction  in 
connection  w.  a  noun  185,  2(W.  Used  as 
adv.  (sufficiently)  18s,  209;  221,  3.  ISatis 
ft-re  =  quite  enough  299  ^.  baHs  est  as  im- 
'p<'rs.  j)red.  01,  77.  /Satiug  est  —  vulius  t6t 
2U3.  0. 

scilicet,  affirmative  particle  295,  401. 

scire,  to  know,  constr.  w.  ol>j.  inf.  \>i.  SO ;  04, 
5;  w.  liif.  cl.  •:90.  2t).  Dill",  from  uovisse  248, 

4.  Use  of  scito  as  imperative  304,  2. 
scribere,  w  .  Int.  cl.  2iH),  '26;  w  .  ut.  lb. 

se  v'<''  letlex.  pron.  in  ace.  or  abl.  161.  *S'^, 
as  inseparable  preposition  in  compound 
verbs  ;J58,  3. 

sed,  Init.  adversative  conj.  99, 121.  DiflF.  from 
(luitm  and  veto  279.  1  loll. 

self  (invself,  hiuiM'lf  etc.),  rendered  by  i;>'^ 
171,  K.  9;  194,  279  fod:  rendered  by  hui, 
Mi,  "e  195. 1{.  4.  How  to  render  seZ/in  com- 
position w.  nouns  (self-love  etc.)  198,  284. 

Semi-deponent  verbs  249,  344. 

Semi-vowels  7,  5. 

Leneca,  (i. 

senez,  decl.  and  gender  1 10, 189;  its  compar- 
n\\s(is(nim\  tdder;  dift".  from  major  294, 11. 

Sentences,  division  of  270.  .52.  D«  j)endent 
M-iitences  2.33,  327.  Affirmative  and  neira- 
tive  sent.  294,  .398;  exclamatory  295,  41. 
Si'<'  tht!  articles  Intvvivgative.  Imptratice, 
Infinitive,  rarticipial  S'entetices. 


sentire,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  26. 

Sequana,  masc.  river  in  Gaul  40,  a. 

servitium,  slave,  usediu  neuter  gender  40,  H. 
4. 

shall,  in  1.  pers.,  expr,  by  future  tense  228, 
321.  When  •  shall' is  rendered  by  II.  form, 
ol  imperative  .'i03  foil. 

si,  conj.,  =  if  234,  328.  W.  indicative  252, 
;i30;  w.  imperf.  and  plup.  snbjunc.  in  con- 
ditional clauses  of  non-reility  lb. 

significare,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  26. 

Silver  age  of  Lat.  language  6. 

simul,  adv.  of  time,  58,  70.  6imul..  .simul 
n<ed  as  coord,  conjs.  278,  5. 

simulare,  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  2H. 

sinere,  w.  obj.  Inf.  79,  101. 

Singularia  tantum  347,  R.  3. 

singuli,  ditfereiit  uses  of  181,  14. 

siser,  neuter  in  sing;,  masc.  in  plur.  143,  n. 
73. 

sive  (sen),  or,  disjunctive  conj.  28-3,  384 :  lb. 
R.  15.  Sive..  .sive  =  either. .  .or;  diff.  from 
ant.,  .aut  280,  382  ;  =  whether. .  .or  281,  b ; 
283,  14.     W.  indie.  lb. 

so,  Engl,  adv.,  rendered  by  tain  189,  11.  So 
mucli.  as  u(lv.,=  tantum  (tanto})ere)  188,  209; 
before  comp.  =  tanto  218,  311.  So  much, 
as  i\(.\}..  =  tantus  185,  203.  About  the  trans- 
lation ol  so  by  ita,sic  etc.  see  P.  II. 

solere.  semi-deponent  249,  344.  How  trans]. 
<;3.  3.  Constr.  w.  obj.  inf.  03,  80.  Used 
impc^rsonallv  64,  82.  Solito,  as  comp.  abl. 
=  ithan  usually)  218,  R.  7. 

solus,  alone,  only,  indef.  numeral,  use  and 
decl.  179,  257  :  180.  In  connection  w.  pro- 
nouns 194,  277  foil.  Gen.  soFius  loiricaliy 
agn^eing  w.  poss.  adjs.  198.9.  Solum,  only, 
limiting  part..  29.5.  401:  297,  403  a.  Non 
solum. .  .sed  etiam  278,  2 ;  7ion  idum  non. . . 
sed  nc  quidem  .302.  410. 

some,  Engl,  indef.  form-adj.,  transl.by  a/i^?/?^ 
or  quidam  172,  240;  174,  2.50.  Some  other 
things  =  r//?a  qucedam  2(>3,  303.  Some  others 
=<ilii  quidam  lb.  Some  few^  things  =  pauca 
quadam  D).  Some  such  thing  =  ejusmodi 
quid,  or  tale  quid  lb.  Some. .  .others  = 
alii . . .  alii  259,  5.  Somebody  =  aliquis  2.=»8, 
4;  when  expr.  by  quis  259.  R.  4;  307,  07. 
'^o\nc\\\\\\g— aliquid  or  quiddamU'tO.  3.59. 
When  it  is  used  w. partitive  gen.  (aliquid 
novi)  208,  373.  When  expr.  by  quid  Hm, 
R.W;  when  by  neuter  plur.  qumlam  201, 
R.  13.— Somewhat,  as  quantitative  adv. 
=r  satis  221.  3  :  by  comparative  degree  ol 
descriptive  adjs. '221,  315. 

spe,  comp.  abl.  =  than  it  can  be  expected 
(hoi)ed.)  218.  7. 

sperare,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.  290,  26. 

sponte.  defective  noun,  used  in  abl.  only 
3 17,  A'.  2. 

statuere,  constr.  w.  obj.  inf.  63,  84;  w.  ut 
291,  27. 

Stem,  definition  13,  2.  Diff.  between  de 
dension-stetn  and  true  stem  of  anoun;^i2. 

still,  as  adv.  of  time  =  adhuc  58,  70;  as  ad- 
versative conj.  —  tamen  etc.  99,  121;  234, 
1    330;  280,  5. 


438 


INDEX. 


studere,  w.  obj.  inf.  63,  80.    Diflf.  from  ex- 
prf'iri  120,  n.  t 

^£tre.  ^>vel-nTn^  word  in  prod.  phr..es 

^or?;     Must  be  in  nom.  if  the  pred.  i:* 

finite  22,20.   Ditr.  of  tjrammatical  and  lo^i- 

?      nhr^S  2-  14  5.     (Fur  lo^'icalsubji'Cts, 

calM  bj.2^,  ^  14^3-     ^  -j,^  Summary; 

nna'v  tl)  ProncMninal  subjs.  s^nerally 
notexpr  in  Latin,  except  a.  ^ubj.  ace. 
2.  S  2>7  :m.  Impers.  prodicaies  witli- 
iTit  Hub  I:  5).  74,  «.  SH"J-et-accu.a t.ve 
S  :^ss.  Difi-.  from  obj.  ace  2Mn.^- l'*;- 
Subject-abla.ive  292,  mi  Snbj.  inf  .ee 
fHtiiitin      Fors'lbi.  clauses  see  P.  n.    . 

nthnn  \vh*-n  (siibiunc.  or  md.)  lb.,  by  7ie, 
Cnot,:i  ,4.  In  Clausen  dependent  on 
Inf  c  a  i-c-^  288.  391  ;  in  inlc-rr.  clauses  .311, 
JS:  •;  con.lTtional  clauses  of  non-reali ty 
Vill'm.  For  tenses  of  the  subjuuc,  tee 
"(•wistcutiou  of  Teiises. 

fuf  srbfV.'reflexivn  and  personal  pron   c^ 
3  '  p  i>.  1  ;i,  2:«.     Use  of  tins  pronoun  l(,.i 
2-18  •  X-A   \i  6  &  7.    Wheu  it  must  be  used 
?f  inf    Hauses  287,  380;    when  iu  mterr. 

T.Uual   immeral   18->,  2(,1 ;   irr.   super:.  o\ 
X^rus  i,.i,enor)  2(«,  291).     Ls.d  w.  fo.ce 

"X",»':"  =  the  hi,l.c^t  part  of  .Lemouu- 

tives  without  s^uperlatives  lb  -bui>"'-  1  ' 
,V  neanin-  '  very  \  "  extremely  \    exceed- 
inl.ly'  221,1^15.    Superl.  alter  quam  =  as 
much  as  possible  221,  R.  1  ••   ^  ^.        ^^ 

BuJiie  usi  of  2.V2,  3.^1  foU.  Formation  of 
siu?b.e?as  second  cardinal  form  of  verbs, 
^cQ  Perfect  system.  „ 

suppetias  ^ferrc^  defective  Tionn  347,  R.  2. 

♦a  hp  sure   iiow  transl.  2%,  4U-i. 

.us  irr   mm»,  how  decl.  140.  188;  of  com- 

sSari ';Sr'w.'Jnf.  el.  290,  26. 

8DUS  po^>  form-a.lj.,  correspondnv::  to 
Suri  '/is  her,  it-<,  t/Ur  1S8,  2»>8;  aj^reems 
■'^""'•. .'*_:. f.r;',,.^;,,    Imt  not  w.  antecedent 


T-claes 


^%;;.;n;ni  niMini  but  no{  w.  antecedent 

used  in  its  place  197  ;  ui  Inl.  cl.  2n.,  7?.  20 
foil  Masc  pi.  siii  without  a  noun  =  his 
eir  e  c.)  fr ieiuls  etc.  2:,9,  6.  Sna,  neuter 
pi  without  a  nouu  =  his  (their  etc.)  pro- 
niTtv  or  alVairs2»)l,  B.  lo.  ,  „i,,c« 

Syllables,  division  «f  7,  6 ;  open  and  clo  c 
8  7-  loiK'  by  nature  or  posiium  9, ;-  ^P\- 
clJl  niU's  on  quantity  of  syllables  388  loll. 

Syndetic  antecedents  26G,  369. 


T-mutes  OinKual?.  or  dentals)  7,  5. 
uf  nouns  127,  10.'j  fo.l. 

SSfn,!^*.  nuama.iv»   rorm-adj.   1S7,  567. 

^    ^^a:U[  ^i^oducin.    tlu.    principal 

sent,  after  g>wnqmi,n  and  «^;»  f  ^-^'^"p^jp 
tandem,  as  emphatic   P'-t-/^^^;/^'     ^""^ 

(ati'lem  as  temporal  adv.  see  P.  H. 
tantoDere   •«•o  nn'ch.  quantitative    adv.,  IJS, 

269  ;  '  n'qvuintitative  comparative  periods, 

209.301.  ,:,„itin<r    particle    295,    401. 

''ST)aA  folio»  b^y  sea  278,  2.     7^an- 

t«rand{litnsdem,y>m..^i..^-m^. 
def  quantitative  form-a<ijs.  1«;^  i<«- 
Used  as  descriptive  adj.  (so  great)  18..  3. 
\\wfulus  so  lit!  le  187,  5.  Taut  urn  as  abs. 
a(  a.  1  nlverbial  use  of.its  ca.es  2t.2,  17 
Tanfo    before   comparatives    as   abl.    of 

Tinlefof  verbs,  definition  14,  0.  Format. 
o??n  .vs  sv^tem  2:^1,322.  In  perf.  sys- 
tern  247,  :«0  foil.  Tenses  of  subjuuct., 
pee  Consecution  of  Tenses. 

iilTtr^nA.  by  quam,  see  Quam;  by  com- 

ti:;:i""^Emd.'dJ.li^nilrative  form-adj.,  bow 
tnai,    E.n-1  antecedent 

followed  bv  o/-,  not  '-xpf-  "'  ^-  '!•./,,':.," V 

♦hpfr  Fr<-1   poss.  adi.,  how  rendered  188  9. 

21      'Therefore  not '  =  /.ou    e/v/0,    ;*^V'/« 

th^"\^?d:'denfon;trative  adj..  transl.   by 

7 f:  1-1     244      'Tills.' without  a  nouu  (of 

',    ,.I  )  ii'oc  or  A.^'^  (neuter  pi.)  261,  li. 

isl     -This;  referriug  to  a  whole  sentence, 

^'hoc  26.5,  li.  24. 

Sm^ir^w'^pbj.   inf.63,80;w..^n.,orn. 

Jme'8'^Fn.M''adverbial  plural,  applied  to  nil- 
times    tn.m  i      canlinal  numeral 

lu^v  isi  '.>.'s  ^-n.ree  tfonr  itcj  times 
wmuch'  =  ^H/v'/s  etc.  f,arti/j"8yi.  coxnp. 
iqq  -rimes' in  m-iltiplicatnm  expr 
by  'tlie  distributive  form  of  the  numeial 

following  it  181,  KXPLAN. 

S^I^^l''pi?^o^t";.t^^ar-<!ise-enuiya- 
"^ent 'of  Kdat.  18.  13,     For  tra.sialiou 
of  ■  to'  by  Lat.  prepositions,  see  1 .  ii. 


INDEX. 


439 


too.  Eii^l.   quantitative  adv.,  =  nimvi  221 
lul  \V*V   "ij't"''.'  «>?  H<lj-  =  nimius  185.  263,' 
iHi,  2Mj.     '  loo  '  rendered  by  comparative 
de-j:ree  of  descriptive  adjs.  221,  315. 

tot  and  totidem,  .-o  nta/nj.  Just  so  inamj,  de- 
inoustrative  numeral   form-adjs.   177  2.")5 
lot.   not   used   absoJuteJv  257,   357.  '  lot 
...  quot.  as  uianv  as  208,  298. 

toties,  numeral  adjs.  180,  258.     Totie!^. ..qvo- 
as'-H)8"298^"^'''^"^  comparisons,  =  as  often 

totus,   he  w/iole  (of),    indef.   numeral    adj. 

i^l!'   V.'^'  "»  dt-'cl.  and  use  180,   12;  194, 

2«  t  foil.  '         ' 

*i"«  ^i^f'  ^^^'  ^^'■^'"^^  numeral,  decl.  of 

trini  distributive  numeral,  when  used  inst 
ol  ternt  181,  li.  15. 
Trees,  names  of  in  ?/.<?.  are  fern.  40,  c. 

S?"',,?.""^-   «'"P*J^tic  part.,    lunv  transl. 
<9f),  ^02. 

to  try.  tranpl.  by  shtdere  or  eTperln :  diff 
between  these  terms  126,  n.  t 

tu  pers.  pron.  of  2.  pers.,  dec!.  160.  231. 
May  be  omitted  as  sulij.  1.5, 1 :  but  rarely  af- 
ter the  interr.  enclitic  ne  307  67 

turn,  t/ten,  adv.  of  tim«;.5S,  70.    TufA  Jemurn 
then  on  y  297,  403  a.     Turn  .  .  .  turn  u^^ed 
tor  copulative  coOrdinaiioii  278.  Ii.  7. 

tuus,  poss    foi mad j.,   of  2.    pers.    187,268 
iMase      pi.    („i^    without    a    noun,  =  thv 
fn<-nds.  thy  family  2.J9,  «.  ^ 

twice  as,  b.-fore  adjs.  =  altero  tanio  w.  com- 

par.  219,  Ii.  9. 


'  ?«i  ^wNJ^I"",  ^^"^^^  ^^^  inflection  123, 
161.  4)  Of  T-class  129, 1C7  :  lb.  R.  2.  5)  Of 
Greek  nouns  of  2.  decl.;  their -ender  and 
inflection  :«9  19  foil. ;  340,  27.  b)  Of  Greek 
nouiij^of  T-dass;W4, /i-.S.  vriecK. 

Dt  (uti),  that,  conj.,  preliminary  remarks  on 

"i  290.  2.    Lse  ol  ut  dependent  on  verbs 

•?nft  r-""?^'*^^^' ?^-    ^°  imperative  clauses 

-3U0,  JO.    t  or  vt  as  comparative  and  teiu- 

I)oral  conj.,  see  P.  II. 
uter,  irr.   noun    of  vowel-cla.^s  of  3  decl  • 

inflection  and  render  139, 187.  " ' 

uter,  interr.  and  indef.  lorm-adj.  of  the  de- 

.no'"Vi.n^'i?  e^'*'*'' '  '^**  ^ecl.  and  use  170, 
213;  170.  li.  5;  172,  246  foil, 
nterque,  tM,  indef.  f(jrm-adj.  172,  246  ;  173; 
1 .1,  4.  Uterqu^,  takesabs.  adjs.  as  partitive 

^~<l'"A''''.f.'"  P'"'"-'  ^"^  i'"t  nouns  269,  375  ; 
<<0,  /i.  .34.  ' 

utervis,  uterlibet.  172,  246  ;  172.  247. 

utrum,   disjuiutive   interroj;.  part.  ,308  419  • 

j;;^y.'^JJ'"-^^lauses  311,  423.    Is'ot  used  alter 


Ubi,  where,  interr.   adv.  .309,  421.    For  vhi 
as  relative  adv.  and  as  temporal  conj.  see 

uUus,  indef.  determinative  form-adj    decl 
and  use  172,  246  foil.  ;  173.  248.     Dili'  froni 
quisqnain  174.  2.->0.     Which  cases   of  quis- 
<Vi'iin  aie  supplied  by  uUus  258,  4. 

Uipian,  lioin  wi  Jurist  6. 

ultimus.    the  last,   indef.    ordinal    numeral 
>2.2t,l  ;  irr.  super),  of  ulterior  2m,  291. 

ulus,  a,  urn,  diniinutive  terminations-  to 
wh.it  words  they  are  applied  3:37,  1. 

unde,  whence,  interr.  adv.  :i09,  421.  p'or  un- 
de  as  relative  adv.  bee  P.  II. 

undoubtedly,  Enyl.  emj)hatic  part.,  how 
traii.-i.  2'.Mi.  402. 

tinus,  def  cardinal,  decl.  ori77,  R  2  When 
n.-ed  III  pliir.  181.  Ii.  l.^-^.  r„u.-i  =  alone  and 
only   104,    277  foil.      Its  jjen.    vnVis  lojri- 

"iiaateti^^T^  ^''  ^'"'''*"  *^^-*^'  ^^"^  "''^"*^ 

unusquisque,  =  every  one  26.3,  20. 

ur,  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns  of  R-cIas«  • 
their  decl.  and  gender  121,157.  Tiie  adj' 
w/;/?'  the  only  Lat.  word  in  wr  decllued 
alter  2.  decl.  44,  5.  .  ;     . 

us  nom.  term,  of  Lat.  nouns,  1)  of  masc 
of  2.  decl.  .34.  .32  ;  2)  of  masc.  and  fem.  of 
4th  decl.  407;  1.5.5,  R.  4.  «ome  of  the 
iiouns  ()f  4.  decl.  in  us  have  collateral 
forms  in  urn  348,  R.  4.    Z)  Of  S-class  of 


^2*!^-^"*"^'.^'^^^^^  ^^^'-  =  ■^^^'y  ^"^h  220, 

^Lw.lo'^'^'^^^  adversative  conj.,  when  used 

^^■Jjementer,   as  quantitative  ti<iy .  =z  exceed- 

vel,  or,  adversative  C(mj.;  when  used  with- 
out bein<>:  repeated  2S.3,  ;i84 ;  lb.   M.   15 
\  el...vel  =  either  . .  .or  ;  diff.  from  aut 
«M/.  and  sive...nve  280,380.     Tel  ..rei  = 
partly... partly  282,  Ii.  12  :  inst.  of  neque 
..  neque  iifl^ir  nei^ations  282,  Ii.  13.— Fe/as 
emphatic  part.  =  even  295.  401. 
velle,  ill-    verb    conjujr.   of  51,  .59;  239,  3. 
1  ranslation  of  (W,  R.  l ;  242,  3.    W  obj 
inf.  «3,  ro.     Vellein^l  should  wish,  wheii 
used   24.3,   3.     TWe;//,  w.  siibjunc.  as  cir- 
cumlocution of  imperatives  305.  (i2. 
Vellejus  Paterculus  6. 
venter,  irr.  noun  of  vowel-class  of  3  decl 

inflection  and  gender  1.39,  187.  "' 

venum,  defective  noun  iu  ace.  only  (venum 
dare  etc.)  ,347.  Ii.  2. 

Verbal    adjectives    in    dus    and    ilruji.    how 
formed  232,  32:3  foil.  ;  in  bundm  352.  R   7. 
"Serb  adjs.   w.  derivative    endin'^s  Idas 
II us,  ills;  /nils!  etc.  351,  8.  ' 

Verbs,  a(  cideiits  of  14.  7.     Partial   conjuo-a- 
ticm  15;  31;  47 ;  49 :  104  :  112.  Verb-stem 
227,  3 '9.    yorn);i;-i2  of  fe!-n»e.s<i:,d  para- 
diy:in?,  of    ,)rt^.   s^sfem   :'.27 .foi).,;'. 2.1s.  ;i34 
.%  Jl.  ;  of  pc  "'.-  8-steii  2^j,  3.^J.     Pe.  feet  oi 
preterite  verbs  248,   342.     Preliminarv  re- 
marks on  the  use  of  the  te.nses  and  moods 
:  m  JolJ. ;  V.50,  34»^, foil.  Denvatioh-  of  verbs 
8.^5  -foi^.    Cy>mp..?ition  of  verbs  "r^o?  foil 
'  ImpRrs/mal  .ViL'7h«  eo,   76;    6V.  7(5.    Verbs 
constr.  w.  Inf.  clauses  (verba  sentiendi  and 
dicendi)  290,  26.     Verbs  constr.  w.  vt  (of 
asking,  'imiyisj?,  ex'hortiiiV,  con^manding 
etc.)  290,-27.-   Terbfi  constr.  w.  i}uOd  (verbs 


440  r'r-  14^ 


INDEX. 


of  emotion,  of  praising,  censuring,  accus- 
viu5^  En^Snative  particle,  how  transl. 

2VHi.  402.  .  ,     -   on    -.at       Dili. 


n. 


as  auswenug 


part.  =  veo' a>8, 'l;iO.   .         .„.  .  „.„  ^f  and 
(litr  iVoin  I'tro  and  auUm  2.9,  1  loU.     \t 

v^r  S;;^1S;mtitative  adv    :.  a./.^rf;;jn 
very,  E-'i-i.  H         Kxur.   >v  the  pri'tix  per 
?*;i"s;4     by  •  uuerhuivc-form   of  adj.   or 
:k     in  3r>    re///  aft.-r  the  article  ' the, 

=  ///a/7//o/>.r«,  admod'on    mlde  -.20,  -{. 
vesper,  derleuf'.  of  f-iO.  n.  7. 

vetare,w.obj.mt. 9,101 

vetu3,  H(lj.,  decl.  ol  l.)0.  -il-'^. 

vijeUcet,utlin.^tnepart>cc^..40L^ 

^UWtieal^da.   c•oIM,la^^^,^d    Hdjs.or 

inT   i'-i->  •  w    ()i)i.  int.  lUB,  loo- 
,i;m,;:V»'cl.ml.u:V.».d  m  fe,,,.  gcuder^. 

,£  tc.  of  4,  «     ^J.a,,in.  ana  - 
compounds  44,   K.  *•     ^lo  um. 
US.  11.  1. 

JiJut'ueuter  noun  of  2.  decl.,  without  plur. 
vt'i'iT.nonnof  3.decl.l36,R.7. 

^i^'  "'''"7'  '     rule   of  Its  format,   in  all 

^j?1^^3.:"'vo"ofp.-oi-^--!--\r 

and  of./i/i./^for.aed  "' *^ -^i;/.^- ^nfMb 
VVliethcr  <pnvi.-<  nu.kys  the  voc.  /7<^ni . 

^°^^^  ^'^r?;;^f"^';i!"D  V.^>etwoen  gon. 
"?lmJ'7^//indVXml.U.K.l;  270,370. 
V;wlspr;H.;uu-iati<mori(K«^Close,op^^ 

";1  f  oun^  of  3.  «U-cl-  132  foil,  (ireek 
'^  1  it.  n"of  3-  decl..  how  treated  in 
;V,7ln  V-vel-tem^  of  verb.  3r.l  foll.- 
Chai.te  of  (ireek  vowels  in  words  received 

^ig^r  neiie?'  Su    of  2.    decl.    without 
plur.  40,/- 


on  nouns  rendered  by  qvU{qm),  QVf^,  Q^od 
170  243.  When  rendered  1>y  (juofus  Ihi, 
1  .'  What  o'clock?  =  (/uota  ^'oraf  U 
\\/,at  relerring  to  quantity,  rendered  by 
ol«/'/ J  1S7,  4"  >V/!a/.  as  «bs.  mierrog. 
f=  w  at  Uiing^)  expr.  hy  gu<,  (neuter  pb) 
o»;0  Ji  ^);  hy  (/"id  2<)0,  :^.r)9;  2  ..>,  li.  25. 
it  ^iJire  'What  '  (=  that  whiehl  expr. 
by  id  quod,  or  ^aw/,  also  by  ea  quoi  2t>0,  7^ 

JL'^intfVr'^dv.,  rendered  VV«/.^;>  30;^: 
4-n  •  a-  temporal  conj-  by  qi'um  310,  .0 , 
ai^o'bv  abl.  ihs.  292,  3'.Ki  For  the  use  of 
vbi,  n't  etc.  =  when,  see  I  .  lI- 

whether,  Engl,  iiiterr.  part.,  hms  <^^P  •  3n 
423-     Whether  not  =  //o////flh.    ^^ ''V.!,/ 
or  -  t^//u//»...«"(negatively/'/r//H311, 

423  Vheii-  whether. .  .or'  must  be  transl. 
hv  ' five... sire 'ilS:i,U. 
while    Enirl.    con...    rendered  by  if'»\^)' 
pr!;.  imi:  234,  328  foil. ;  or  by  abl.  abs.  292, 

who'  Engl,  interr.  adj.,  =  quis  258,  2     If 

the  whole  =  fofu.<^  179,  2.-)7  ;  or  absol.  by  the 
neutT/o^^/m  2.il,  n.  14.  .N-L,^^^»^^;^:^^;^  \f 
a  partitive  attribute,  as  in   Engl.  ISO,  K. 

JwiT  adv..  rendered  by  the  adj.  Mufi\94, 
278;  aS»   hy  the    adv.  p^nitu^,  fuuditns 

JiU ■  E.-i'"  auxiliarv,  transl.    by  the   fut. 

Tens.^  o-f  the  verb  22S,  321  When  ren- 
le"edby.W/.  r.:j,^l.  '  ^\;1\  ""^  =  "^'^^ 
r.3.  2  :  '  will  rather    =  vialle  lb. 

to  be  willing  =  edit  03,  1. 


W  notaixvt.  l-ettei-'G,  1; 
What,  Eiial".  U'tefr-  a^J- 


.when,  dependent 


Y  nom    term,  of  nouns    of  the   K-cla-s : 
^their"en""^uKl  decl.  129,  1^^^^^^^^^^ 

•203.     Greek  nouns  in  x  341,  K.  10  foil. 

Y  vowel,  when  used  in  Lat.  6,  2. 

y^g'  amnnative  Engl,  part.,  how  expr.  308, 

vtf'Eu"!.  temporal   adv.,  =  a<//iMC  .58,  70. 
^tnKd  by  ^lmxin^    rf.m    to    ne,at.sx> 

word-   Knouduni  =  not   yet  etc.)  ;iOl>,  40^. 

IW   as  adversative  con?,  rendered  tamtn, 

nttnnifu  ete   2:^1,  :i30 ;  280.  5. 
/s   r.n    term    .'.f  Lat.  nouns  taken  from 

the  Greek  341,  2  ;  344,  7^  b,  4 

Z  ivhen  used  in  Lat.  6,  2. 


6 


This  book  is  due  two  weeks  from  the  last  date  stamped 
'below,  and  if  not  returned  at  or  before  that    time  a  fine  of 
^  ■  \        '1  be  incurred. 


3N. 


her's 
fs  of 

thini; 

Jalful 

.      It 


-t  any 
more 
:l  vet 


it  retains  the  brevity  ana  conciseness  oi  a  grmiun***. 

The  second  part  of  Roby's  Latin  Grammar  has  deservedly  attracted  the 
attention  of  Latin  scholars  on  account  of  its  rich  collection  of  classical 
passages.     But  their  uncritical  selection  and  lack  of  arrangement  have  met 


IV 


;) 


>     • 


(! 


il 


k 


with  decided  disapproval.      Instead  of  giving  an  accurate  statement  of  the 
laws  governing  the  language,  Mr.  Roby  m 
which  these  laws  might  be  constructed, 
them  himself.      Jlis  collection  of  e-^mple 
hence  he  fails  to  illustrate  many  importan' 


1-.  .  ^^A,irt^(i  the  oassages  from 

n  I  I D I   1  /-  A  -r  J- 

II 

niiiliiii 


liijiiiiiliifi    li  III  III    If  I 

1010674837" 


An    examination   of  Dr.   Fischer's   work  'vill  show  that   none  of  these 
faults  can  be  imputed  to  him.     For  Rules  universally  acknowledged  only 
the    most    necessary    vouchers    are   given.       But  for  such  points  as  are  not 
generally  acknowi- 
attention  of  (irai 


Wheneve    he  ui 

argum*^.its  car    Sr      1      /      f^ 

refuted  by  Dr. 

stereotyped  w 

We     invitt 
Composition. 

Part  I  is 

student  to  th< 
important  prii 

Part  II  d 

adapted  to  the 

Part  \,  44c 
Part  n,  8J 
Parts  I  am 
Specimen 


/ 


JUL  6    193P 


aMHMI 


'#  ;  I 


i 


I  -  nuiyi      -  NMMMMMMIMMI 


ppBef^^aasBj^taapJTsagwwwwsswi*»*^^^^  *i.~*»ii*«&«iiSi 


MMMMai 


^41 


#1% 


'mi 


mAm 


I "'  i 


I ' 


^13 


t  t 


1 1 

t 


f  I 


II 


tl 


■■MiiXAi^M^mMm  fih'. 


^JSJJ^i 


Ml 


mmf> 


ilK><rt<i 


4 


■  ■ 


■::       -1 

« 

s% 

fr.a^ 

i^ 

,  •  r            1 

I'-'W 

^^ 

k^     ■'        -iKCJHQ 

P.--      -        1 

^■R,» 

S^s» 

■"  i^-^-'-r« 

^1 

■*          K--                        f.'S 

SK 

^^       ^t        . 

^« 

&m 

C             I--  V» 

v.u9 

jP:    ' 

kSI 

^B 

. 

I    la 

j^l 

P<si 


to,s.*j^v;-.>"|5 


^1.^  'A- > '  - 


^AO"*"!  •       >"« 


:'^f>' 


■wstmmmx^mms 


*  ."  •,  "^jj i-iiS'' '^  * ™-     i*^?''^V'  '^Il^^i'^    hji^A'fc^'* 


H  .A  '■■■  .  f  .     K  '.   \  r 


,1 


1937 


J 
\       !  \v  Latin  Grammar  and  Reader  on  a  New  Plan. 


■^«,K.:«,*  -ofe.is^^SlHtei'-Wi.^»* 


THE 


intljfCitpoflrtiigiJrk 


LIBRARY 


Ghammak, 


'KD  TO  EACH  SECTION  OF 


IR,  LL.D. 


dapted  to  first  beginners, 
nted  in  lucid  and  concise 
;  foundation  for  the  later 
he   capacity  of  average 

may  be  studied  before  the 
w  hatever.  It  consists  of  a 
he  battle  of  Zania.  Every 
Grammar,  which  is  to  be 
)lves  THE  PROBLEM 
entary  Grammar,  reton- 
ns  that  "  Grammar  cannot 
ivvledge  of  the  language," 
s  grammatical  knowledge." 

leader,  in  connection  with 

studied  with  each  chapter 
ol  the  Reader,  will  enable  the  student  to  translate  every  sentence  correctly. 
The  first  or  special,  of  the  two  vocabularies,  contains  all  those  words  and 
phrases  -whos^  ^grammatical  forms  the  student  is  not  yet  acquainted  with 
at  that  place  of  the  Reader  where  they  first  occur.  But  it  does  not  suggest 
any  of  those  grammatical  forms  which  the  student  should  know,  from  his 
previous  studies,  according  to  the  directions  given  in  each  chapter  of  the 
Reader.  Thus,  in  every  succeeding  section  the  number  of  phrases,  etc., 
suggested  diminishes,  till,  towards  the  end  of  the  Reader,  the  student  must 
almost  entirely  rely  upon  the  second  (or  general)  vocabulary,  which  contains 
all  the  words  of  the  Reader  as  they  are  usually  placed  in  vocabularies. 


<•«• 


1 1 ' 

^l-;l  '^ 

ll  ll 

|,;y 

ml    ^'  m 

9k)lr^A  Ji%x.      ™" 

wfc% 

^^^H^H|  J 

To  illustrate  the  method,  we  reprint  the  first  chapter : 

ROMAN  HISTORY. 

FIRST  BOOK. 

I.    First  Declension.    Study  §  32  of  the  Grammar. 

Media  pars  Italiae,  infra  fluvium  Tiberim,  antiquitus  incolebfitur  ab  Latlnia. 
Hsec  pars  ItaliiP,  ox  noraint-  incoiarura,  appellabatur  Latium,  et  caput  habr-bat  Albam 
Lon<,'am.  Octilvo  steciilo  ante  Chri^^tum,  Numitor  rex  Albfe  Longa  fuit.  Is  expulsiin 
est  a  fratre  suo  Amulio,  qui  filios  NumltOris  necSvit.  Quum  Rhea  Sylvia,  filiaNurai- 
tOris,  geininos  filios  peperisset,  AmmuliuB  jussit  eos  in  Tiberim  demergi.  At  servi 
regil  gatis  hnbCbant,  exponerc  pucros  in  loco  proximo  aquse.  Ibi,  ut  fabula  tradit, 
duo  filii  Rhetfi  Sylvia  nutriti  sunt  lupa,  quie  eis  mammas  pnebuit. 

In  the   first  (special)  vocabulary  the  student  will  find  the  following 

words  for  the  first  sentence  : 


ab,  by;  ab  Latinis,  by  the  Latins, 
antiquitus,  in  ancient  limes, 
fluvium,  the  rivor. 
incolebatur,  was  inhabited. 


infra,  below. 
Laatinis,  the  Latins. 
media  pars,  the  middle  part. 
Tiberim,  Tiber. 


All  the  words  belonging  to  the  first  declension,  for  instance  :  Italia, 
incolaium,  Alham  Lougam,  Albct  Longcc,  aqua,  Rhea:,  Sylvia,  liipd, 
mammas,  are  only  found  in  the  second  (general)  vocabulai7,  in  the 
nominative  singular,  because  the  student  is  expected  to  translate  them 
correctly,  according  to  the  lesson  just  learned. 

Since  every  chapter  of  the  Reader  is  a  drill  for  some  section  of  the 
Grammar,  the  student  upon  finishing  the  Reader  will  have  been  over  the 
whole  of  the  Grammar  in  an  easy  and  pleasant  manner,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  he  has  acquired  that  practical  routine  in  the  language  which  alone 
enables  him  to  study  the  details  of  grammar  w  ilh  success. 

To  write  such  a  Reader  is  a  matter  of  great  difficulty,  since  it  is  neces- 
sary to  employ  only  such  Latin  constructions  as  may  be  literally  rendered 
into  good  English,  and  still  be  good  and  genuine  Latin.  And  the  thread 
of  the  history  must  be  so  arranged  and  devised  that  in  each  chapter  certain 
irrammatical  forms  occur  in  sufficient  number  to  drill  the  student  in  that 
part  of  the  Grammar  which  must  be  studied  according  to  the  order  of  the 
system.  Dr.  Fischer  has  met  these  difficulties.  We  are  satisfied  that  there 
is  not  one  sentence  in  the  Reader  which  might  not  have  been  written  by 
a  classical  Latin  author,  and  not  one  which  will  offer  any  difficulty  to  the 
very  first  beginners. 

Fischer's  Elements  of  Latin  Grammar,  with  Reader,  220  pages, 
cloth,     - ■     -         -         Price,  $1.25 

H^"  Specimen  copy  mailed  on  receipt  of  the  price. 

J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  Co.,  Publishers, 

i'*  j»ond  Street 9  New  York. 


Latin  GrRAMAfAi;. 


i-OiiElHER    >VliII 


.    ...\     . 


A  SYSTEMATIC  THK^.TMENT .  CF  IAT1\  COMPOSITION. 


BY 


GUSTAVUS  FISCHER,  LL.D. 


PART    SECOND, 


CONTAINING   THE  DETAILS  OF  SYNTAX. 


«? 


NEW  YORK: 

J.  W.  Schermerhorn  &  Co.,  Publishers, 

No.  14  BoxD  Street. 
187G. 


•  • •     »     •» 


•    •  • 

•       •    •    •  • 


•     « 


> 


Entered  nccordinp:  tn  Act  of  Conprosa,  in  the  year  1875,  by 

J.  W.  SdlERMEKIlOKN  A  CO.. 
In  the  Office  of  the  Librnrian  ot  Congress,  at  Washiiiyton. 


/.^L. 


Laage,  Little  &  Co., 

Printers,  Eleclrotypers  and  Bookbinders, 

No»,  lu  tj  M  Aator  Place, 

New  York. 


^\. 


PREFACE    TO    PAET    II. 


t 


The  second  part  of  ihU  p:rammar  contains  the  details  of  Latin  sjntax; 

It  has  been  our  object  to  present  a  more  complete  statement  of  the  laws  of 

•  the  Latin  lani^uage  than  has  been  given  heretofore.  Our  constant  study  of  the 
Latin  authors  for  many  years  has  been  directed,  solely  for  this  purpose,  to  the 

'  minute  examination  of  ^'t;.HY  grammatical  form,  and  by  this  means  we  have 
collected  vast  materials,  with  the  help  of  which  we  have  attempted  to  'recon- 
struct' the  syntactical  laws  of  the  Latin  lauicuage.     We  have  not  indulged  in  philo- 

i  sopiiical  and  theoretical  speculations.  Perhaps  the  reader  will  find  rather  '  too 
little'  than  'too  much  '  of  these.  Nor  did  we  merely  amass  the  'material  as 
such ',  leaving  it  to  the  reader  to  make  the  best  of  it.  Indeed  it  was  our  chief 
aim  to  discover  new  ijrinciples,  hidden,  or  not  sufficiently  noticed  before,  to 
use  these  principles  as  the  key  for  the  language,  and  the  language  as  the  proof 
and  test  for  the  })rinciples. 

It  is  impossible  to  treat  all  parts  of  Latin  grammar  with  equal  minuteness. 
A  work  of  this  kind  would  have  been  too  voluminous,  and  its  end  would  have 
been  doubtful.  Hence  we  have  treated  the  easier  parts  of  Latin  grammar  more 
brielly  than  the  difficult  and  more  important  subjects.  By  discussing  the  Case- 
theory,  the  Agreement,  and  other  elementary  i)arts,  with  no  greater  explicitness 
than  is  customary  in  our  grammars,  we  were  enabled  to  devote  a  more  exhaust- 
ing treatment  to  the  Gerundials  and  Participials,  to  the  Adverbial  relations,  to 
Tenses,  Moods,  and  especially  to  JJL^endent  Sentences. 

t  We  have  treated  the  different  '  grammatical  relations'  according  to  log- 
ical categories,  i.  <•.,  according  to  the  ideas  of  place^  time,  manner,  quantity, 
causy,  etc^  whereas  it  is  customary  to  consider  these  relations  under  the  | 
single  cases  (genitiye,  etc.),  each  of  which  is  treated  in  a  separate  chapter 
in  all  its  «grammatical  bearings.  A  good  index,  however,  will  easily  supi)ly 
the  reader,    who  is   curious   to   pursue  each   single  case   in  all  its    applica- 

i  tions,  with  the  necessary  references.  But  even  the  best  index  cannot  sup- 
ply us  with  all  the  dilterent  forms  under  which  a  given  grammatical  idea 
appears  in  Latin,  unless  the  grammarian  treats  them  side  by  side,  and  com- 
})ares  them  witli  each  other.  So,  for  instance,  our  grammars  cannot,  and  do 
not  answer  the  question,  in  what  dillerent  forms  the  idea  represented  by  the 
English  adverb  «70  may  be  expressed  in  Latin;  since  in  their  arrangement 
there  is  no  proper  place  to  discuss  the  question,  which  comprises  several 
cases,  seva'ral  prepositions,  adverbs,  and  clauses.  Hence  what  we  find  in  the 
grammars  about  this  question  is  either  insufficient,  or  erroneous  (Comp.  p.  '230 
and  231).  So  the  rules,  which  the  grammars  give  on  Value  and  Price,  are  more  or  less 
deficient  from  the  fact  that  neither  the  '  genitive,'  nor  the  '  dative  '  is  the  proper 
chapter  under  which  to  discuss  all' the  forms  in  which  the  Latin  expresses  these 


1' 


J 


( 


PREFACE. 


ideas.  A  grammarian  wlio  follows  the  division  according  to  logical  categories, 
is  of  necessity  compelled  to  state  all  the  possible  forms  at  the  disposal  of  the 
Latin  language  to  express  a  given  idea,  while  under  the  traditional  treatment 
of  genitive,  dative,  etc.,  such  questions  will  either  not  present  themselves,  or, 
if  they  do,  will  be  very  easily  evaded.  If  we  ask  why  this  only  proper  method 
has  not  been  pursued  heretofore,  we  know  o^  no  other  answer  but  that  the 
existing  grammatical  '  material '  which  has  been  handed  down  from  generation 
to  generation,  has  been  utterly  insullicient  for  that  purpose,  and  will  but  rarely 
suggest  an  accurate  answer  to  many  questions  considered  as  doubtful. 

Many  important  points  referring  to  the  use  of  the  Tenses  have  never  yet  been 
considered.  The  results  at  which  we  liave  arrived  from  the  large  number  of 
passages  collected  by  us,  have  established  a  theory  of  tenses  essentially  diJGfer- 
ent  from  the  traditional  rules  usually  met  with.  We  have  especially  tried  to  estab- 
lish the  use  of  tenses  in  dependent  sentences^  a  point  almost  entirely  neglected  here- 
tofore. In  regard  to  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  and  the  consecution  of  tenses,  we  have  like- 
wise established  a  new  and  comprehensive  theory,  founded  on  a  careful  investiga- 
tion of  the  classical  authors.  The  largest  space  has  been  devoted  to  the  discussion 
of  dependent  sentences,  which,  we  believe,  has  not  found  in  our  grammars  a  treat- 
ment cornnunsurate  with  its  importance.  Here  we  have  generally  resorted  to 
the  historical  treatment,  so  as  to  give  a  complete  history  of  the  diirerent  forms  from 
their  first  appearance  in  the  authors  (or  on  ancient  monuments)  down  to  the  sil- 
ver age.  We  believe  that  this  method  has  in  several  instances  enabled  us  to 
settle  questions  belonging  to  the  most  doubtful  and  difficult  points  in  Latin 
grammar. 

It  is  proper  to  remark  that,  aside  from  the  original  sources,  we  have  read  none 
of  the  many  valuable  treatises  on  grammatical  subjects  in  the  German  philo- 
logical journals,  and  none  of  the  many  excellent  monographs,  a  veiy  few  ex- 
cepted. We  thought  that  we  owed  the  immense  time,  which  an  examination 
of  these  treatises  would  have  taken,  rather  to  the  Latin  authors.  Although  many 
a  valuable  suggestion  may  have  been  lost,  and  although,  perhaps,  our  own  views 
might  sometimes  have  been  modified,  it  yet  seemed  that  every  hour  devoted  to 
the  Latin  authors  was  infinitely  more  fruitful  for  our  purpose  than  the  same  time 
applied  to  the  study  of  monographs.  In  writing  this  grammar,  we  had  before 
us  the  grammatical  treatises  of  Kuddinmn,  Zumpt,  Madvig,  Kiihncr,  Alch'ing:, 
^j^iisi^,  the  '  Public.^gchool  Latin  Grammar,'  and  .soiiiie  others.  We  have  duly 
considered  their  theories,  and  when  we  found  their  teachings  in  conflict  with 
the  authority  of  the  classics,  we  have  tried  to  refute  the  error  from  the  sources. 
Jlob^  Syntax  wasjiot  published  till  our  plates  were  cast.  Hence  we  could  not 
refer  to  the  views  of  this  grammarian.  His  collection  of  valuable^  material 
regarding  the  '3ases  of  Latin  Nouns  might  have  been  a  very  acceptable  assist- 
ance. 

In  respect  to  the  continuance  of  the   '  English  Exercises '   in  this  Second 
Part,  we  refer  to  our  remarks  in  the  Preface  to  the  First  Part. 
New  Brunswick,   June,  1875. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


For  a  more  accurate  analysis  of  the  single  articles,  see  the  Index. 

BOOK  FOURTH. 

Chapter  First.  Pregositioaa.  §  42i,  425  ;  p.  7-11.  Definition  and  function  in  the  sentence 
S  4'2(j.  List  oT  prepositious  p.  12. —  Ad  §  427,  p.  12-14.  Adcersus  p.  428,  p.  15.  Ante 
g  42'J,  p.  15.  Apwl  §  430,  p.  ICi,  17.  Circa  and  circum  §  431,  p.  18.  Inter  g  432,  p.  18,  19. 
Ob  S  433,  p.  20.  I'er  §  434,  p.  20,  21.  Post,  secundum,  pone  g  435,  p.  22.  PrcBter  %  436, 
p.  2:3.  Propter,  prope  juxta  §  437,  p.  23,  24.  Cis,  extra,  intra,  infra,  penes,  supra,  trans, 
ultra,  versus  §  438,  jj.  24.  Erga  and  contra  lb.  p.  25.  Ab,  ex,  de  §  43'J —  g  444,  p.  25-32. 
Cum  §  44G,  p.  33.  /Vcg  §  447,  p.  33.  Pro  §  448,  p.  34,  35.  Coram,  sine,  tenm  §  449, 
p.  35,  36.  In  w.  acciis.  g  450-452,  p.  37-42.  In  with  ablative  g  453,  p.  42-45.  Sub 
S  454,  p.  45.  46.     Super  p.  08.  —  Names  of  Cities  g  455,  p.  46-48. —  Exercises  p.  48-68. 

Chapter  Second.  Construction  of  the  yerb^.  I.  Coastructiou  in  general,  in  active  and  pas- 
sive §4.56-460;  p.  69  loll.— II.  wTtu  completing  Predicates,  Predicate-Nominative 
§  461-463,  p.  73  loll.  Predicate-Genitive  §  464-467,  p.  76  foil.  Predicate-Dative  §  468- 
470,  p.  81  loll. —  III.  Verbs  with  simple  objects  iu  Accusative  §  471-473,  p.  84  foil.— 
IV.  Verbs  with  simple  objects  in  Dative  g  474-477,  p.  81  foil. —  V.  Verbs  with  simple 
objects  in  Genitive  and  Ablative  g  478-479,  p.  92  foil,— .  VI.  Verba  with  compound 
objects  in  oblique  cases  §  480-487,  p.  96  foil. —  VII.  Verbs  construed  with  Infinitive 
§  488-495.  p.  102  foil.— Exercises  p.  109-113. 

Chapter  Third,     qonstructiou  of  Adjectives  g  496-503,  p.  113  foil.—  Exercises  p.  223.  224.     ■ 

Chapter  Fourth.  Verbal  adjectives  and  Periphrastic  Conjugation  p.  124  foil.  I.  Forma- 
tion of  Verbal  Adjectives  in  dus  and  ilrus  g  504,  505,  p.  124  loll. —  II.  Periphrastic  con- 
jugation p.  126  loll.  A.  In  General  §  505.  B.  Periphrastic  Participle  §  506,  p.  127-129. 
C.  Periphrastic  Future  g  507-510,  p.  129  foil.  I).  Periphrastic  Gerund  and  Gerundive_ 
§511-516,  p.  140  loll. —  III.  Keversed  Phrases  and  Geruudials_  p.  150  foll.~"^~.arrlu 
«j^eneral  g  517-523.  Ji.  As  subjects  and  transitive  objects  f  .524,  525,  p.  156,157.  C. 
In  the  genitive  g  526,  527,  p.  157  foil.  D.  In  the  dative  §  528,  p.  163  full.  E.  In  the 
ablative  p.  169  loll.  1.  Geruudial  ablative  §  .529,  p.  169  loll.;  2.  Ablative  absolute  §  530- 
536,  p.  178  foil.  Jf\  After  prepositions  1h7  foil.  1.  Prepositional  Gorundials  g  537-644. 
2)  Prepositions  w.  participial  phra.scs  §  545,  i).  198  toll.— Exercises  j).  200-213. 

BOOK  FIFTH. 

Chapter  First,  Aivjihial  Relations  p.  214  foil.  I.  ,\d%'erbial  relations  in  general  §  546,  547, 
p.  214  loll.  11.  Place  g  54S,  p.  214— p.  222.  III.  Time  g  549.  550,  p.  222-238.  IV.  Re- 
lations of  Modality  p.  238  foil.  A.  Manner  §  551-.553,  p.  238-245.  B.  Coincident  action 
g  .5.54-.556,  p.  245-260.  C.  Quantitv  p.  260  foil.  1)  Intensity  g  557,  558,  p.  260-266.  2) 
Value  and  Price  g  559-561,  p.  266-275.  3)  Weight  g  562,  p.  275-277.— />.  Cause  g  563-566, 
p.  277-284.—  Exercises  p.  284-298. 

Chapter  Second.  Use  of  Tenses  p.  298  foil.  I.  Present  tense  §  567,  p.  298-301.— II.  Perfect 
S  568-572,  p.  302-305.— III.  Imperfect  305  foil.  A.  General  requirements  §  573-578,  p. 
305-328.  B.  Particular  imperfects.  1)  Imperfect  of  contingent  action  g  579,  p.  328-332. 
•2)  Describing  Imperfect  g  580,  p.  332,  333.  3)  Hietori<;al  imperfect  g  581,  p.  3;i3-336.  4> 
Imperfect  of  inner  action.  A.  Direct  predicates  of  inner  action  g  582,  p.  336-338.  B. 
Indirect  predicates  x)f  inner  action  §  SWi,  p.  338.  a)  Imperfect  of  reference  g  584,  p. 
339-342.  b)  Imperf.  of  rule  and  habit  g  585,  p.  342-346.— IV.  Pluperfect  g  586.  p.  346, 
347.— Future  tenses  §  587,  588,  p.  347-356.— VI.  Epistolary  tenses  §  589,  p.  356-360.— 
Exercises  p,  3(jO-377. 

Chapter  Third.  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  377  foil.  I.  Potential  subjunctive  §  591,  p.  378.  A. 
Declarative  subjunctive  §  592,  p.  TTB-asl.  B.  Interrogative  subjunctive  §  593,  p.  381, 
382.  C.  Subjunctive  in  imperative  sentences  g  594,  p.  382-385.— II.  Dependent  sub- 
junctive g  595,  p.  38.'>.  A.  Subjunctive  of  indirect  discourse.  1)  Direct  and  indirect 
statement  g  596,  597,  p.  385-;W7.  2)  Oblique  clauses  g  598,  p.  387-398.  3)  Suboblique 
clauses  g  599,  p.  398-404.  4)  Quasi-oblique  clauses  §  600,  p.  404-408.— B.  Subjunctive 
by  Attraction  §  601,  p.  408-413.— C.  Tenses  of  the  dependent  subjunctive  §  602,  p.  414. 
1)  I^w  of  consecution  g  603,  604,  p.  4f4-422.  2)  Logical  tenses  §  605,  606,  p.  422-447.  3) 
Conversion  of  tenses  §  607,  p.  447-455.— Exercises  p.  455-471. 


G  TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 

BOOK  SIXTH. 

COMBIKATIOK  OF  SENTENCES. 

Chapter  First.    Theory  of  Sentence^combiaatioii  §608,  p.  472-479.- Division  of  clauses 

ChUter  Seclnd:'" Relative  Clauses  p.  494  foil.  I.  Clas.sification  §  Gil  p.  f  V:!^f  *'.,"•  A"*;^- 
cecU'Uts  §  (U-2  p  a()4-.-yi3.  III.  Construction  and  aiKUihcation  J»  (.13.  p.  52J-o42.  Moods 
in  relative  clauses  S  G14.  G15,  p.  542  574.     IV.  Lucativo  clauses  S  GIG,  p.  574-o7G.— Exer- 

ClIaDteVThVrd'"^  'iut  clauses  p.  588  foil,  I.  Completing  Tbat-clan.sr-s  S  G17.  p.  588.  A. 
Object  Tliat-cUius^slTVrr  sentieudi  R.  23.  p.  588-594.  2)  Verba  declaraudi  «.  24, 
X)  5't4-5it9.  3)  Verba  laciendi  R.  25,  p.  5'.)9-G()5.  4)  Fact-clauses  R.  2G,  p.  G()o-(,08.-  IJ. 
Subject  That-clauses  R.  27,  p.  G08  loll.  1)  Tliat-clauses  as  subjects  of  passive  verbs 
OBS  1  p.  G08,  609.  2)  That-cl.  as  subjects  of  predicate-adjectives  ons.  2-j,  p.  (.O.M.l.J. 
3)  That-cl.  as  subjects  of  predicate-nouns  ons.  8-12,  p.  G13-615.  4)  That-cl.  as  subjects 
of  impersonal  verbs  R.  28,  p.  (-,15-023.  5)  Tliat-cl.  as  subjects  of  ordinary  active  verbs 
oiis  5-8  p.  023.- C.  Attributive  That-claus.s  R.  29,  p.  (•.23-(;28.-D.  Predicate  1  hat- 
clauses  R.  30,  p.  ()28.  E.  Inner  form  of  That-clavises  A*.  31,  p.  G29-G3^1.-  II.  Modal 
That-clausf'S  S  G18,  p.  r.35-G38.— Exercises  p.  GD9-G44. 

Chapter  Fourth.  Tfiioporal  clauses  Gt4  foil.  I.  (^uuni-clauses  S  fil9  p  Ui  A.  I  »j;«  *;'"?- 
noral  (nmni-claus.s.  1.  Adv.  rbial  Quum-clauses  R.  34.  3.>,  p.  04.)-(.o.J.  2.  Attnbutno 
Quum-clauses /e.  3G.  p.  G53-G54.— li.  Atfected  Quuin-clauscs  R.  37-41  p.  (.a4-(..)9.— II. 
Clauses  with  postmiam,  >/hi,  ut,  siinulac,  quand»  ^  (•»20.  p.  G51)-C.GG.— Clauses  with  ante- 
qua, a  and  ;»r/M.sv;ua/»  S  G21,  p.  GGG-G71.— IV.  Clauses  with  duin,  donee,  quoad,  quamdiu 

ChlptVr  Fifth.^"*  Causal  clauses.  I.  Direct  cause  §  623,  p.  682-692.  II.  Adversative  (con- 
ccssive)  <-ause  !ri;2I.  p.  r,<>2-700.  ,  ^      wr  i        v*     » 

Chapter  Sixth.  Conditional  clauses  §  625  foil.  I.  Conditional  clauses  of  doubtful  realit>  H. 
4t  i>  701  foil  "  \.  Tenses  of  the  indicative  in  clauses  of  doubttul  reality  OBs.  1-3,  p. 
702-704.  B.  Negative  Si-clauses  of  doubtful  reality  ons.  4-9,  p.  704-709.— (\  Tenses  of 
the  subinnctive  in  conditional  clauses  of  do)ibtful  reality  ons.  10-20,  p.  709-715.-- II. 
Conditional  clauses  of  doubtless  reality  R.  45,  p.  715-717.— III.  Conditional  periods  of 
jion-realitv  R.  4G,  p.  717-730.— IV.  Improper  conditional  periods  R.  47,  p.  731-733.— V. 
Equivalents  and  Ellipsis  of  Si-clauses  «.48,  p.  733-735.— VI.  Co-ordination  of  con- 
diti.»nal  clauses  R.  49,  p.  736-738.— VII.  Particular  usage  of  conditional  conjunctions 
R.  50,  p.  738-743.  ,.       .  .  _    _, 

Chapter  Seventh.  Cpmparative  clauses  §  C26,  p.  743  foil.  I-  Q'^^^taUve  comparison  7?  ol. 
p.  744-740.  II.  Quantitative  comparison  1)  of  liko  quantity  ii.  52,  p.  toO.  tol  ,  I)  OI 
unlike  quantity  R.  53,  p.  752-768. 

Chapter  Eighth.    Oblique  discourse  §  627,  p.  768-771.    Index  773-817. 


PAKT  SECOND. 


BOOK  FOURTH. 

PREPOSITIOXS. 

CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VERBS  AND  ADJECTIVES. 
PERIPIIRASTICS.    GERUNDIALS.    PARTICIPIALS. 


CHAPTER  FIRST. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

§  4^4.  PRErosiTiONS  are  words  indicating  the  different  re- 
lations of  a  Dependent  Substantive  to  its  governing  word. 
They  have  the  same  function  as  the  Case-endings,  and  hence 
botli  frequently  interchange.  But  the  Case-endings  indicate 
the  77iost  general  of  these  relations,  while  the  Piiepositions 
indicate  those  special  relations  which  are  designated  by  the 
t<?rm  *'  Grammatical  Circumstances;"  that  is,  the  relations  of 
Place,  Time,  Manner,  Intensity,  Cause  (p.  3U  foil.). 

7?^w  1  The  En"'lish  lan-^aao-e  expresses  the  general  Case-relations,  except  thaf  of  the 
Accusative  by  Prtt^Mtioiis.  ^We  tnav  uiidermnd  both,  the  Cask-relations  and  the 
Grammatical  CiuciTMvrANCES  best,  by  repre-^entini;  them  in  the  form  of  Questions. 
'ihus  we  say.  that  the  Genitive  answers  to  the  question  "  Oj  uhom,  or  •  Of  ulac/i; 
the  Dative  to  the  question  "  To  whotn^  or  ''To  tv/tichr  etc.  In  the  same  Nvay  we  say, 
that  the  relation  of  Space  or  Place  answers  to  one  of  the  questions  "  «'-^r^.  J„  ",'"'„ 
or  •'  wheuce ;"  that  of  Time  to  one  of  the  questions  "  when:'  '"  since  when,  '  Hli  when, 
"  hoio  lonn  "  etc  —The  deiuvation  of  several  prepositions  is  doubtless,  for  instance  that 
of  extra,  contra,  proeter,  ultra,  etc.  In  regard  to  other  prepositions,  there  is  a  contro- 
versy, still  undecided,  whether  they  contain  original  roots,  or  whether  they  are  derived 
from  verbal  or  other  roots  (for  inst.  in,  ah, ex,  de,  a^i».— Some  lingmsts  without  adducng 
anv  proper  proof,  are  of  the  opinion  that  all  prepositions, originally,  were  advekbs, 
and  i)ec!nne  propositions  when  they  began  to  be  construed  with  object^.  1  hey  overlook 
the  fact  that  ad ve  bs  do  not,  necessarily,  lose  their  quality  as  adverbs  by  being  construed 
with  case-objects     See  p.  114,  R.  98. 


) 


8 


PEErOSITIONS. 


Rem.  2.  In  our  rules  on  the  use  of  Prepositions  wc  generally  disstinguifsh  three  rela- 
tions:  1)  that  of  Place,  2)  of  Time,  and  3)  the  Inner  Kklationh,  that  is,  the  relations 
of  either  Manner,  Intensity,  or  Cause.  By  far  the  most  of  th.e  Prejjositions  j)rimarily 
indicate  a  relation  of  Place  or  Space  (Local  Kelation),  and  of  Time  (Teinj)oral  Relation). 
But  nearly  all  Prepositions  have,  besides  these  j)rimary  significations,  a  Fioukative  or 
'i'i;oricAL  meaning,  when  theij  represent  ohjecf.-i  of  the  Mind,  as  if  they  were  objects  of  Phice. 
Thus  the  English  preposition  '•*«.■"  originally *ha»  a  local  meaning,  answering  to  the 
question  *"  nviere,''''  as:  "I  live  in  the  city."  But  the  same  pn'position  is  also  used 
piGUUATiVELV  or  TKoi'icALLY,  as :  ''I  am  in  danger'' or  "  I  am  in  distress."  Here  an- 
INTEKNAL  situation,  that  is,  an  object  which  can  only  be  conceived  by  thi"  mind,  is  repre- 
sented as  if  it  was  an  exteknal  situation  of  Place;  that  is  :  The  ideas  '•  Danger"  and 
"Distress"  are  treated  as  Localities. 

§  4^<5,  The  Prepositions  are  not  considered  as  members  of 
the  tuuLcuce,  since  they  can  neither  be  the  governinr/^  nor  the 
dependent  words  o^ Phrases.  But  they  connect  words  to  Phrases, 
and,  like  the  Case-endings,  are  the  marks  oi  Dependence.  They 
occur  either  in  the  objective  or  in  the  attkibutive  plirase, 
and  tlie  Substantives  before  which  they  stand  are  accordingly 
divided  into  Prepositioxal  Objects  and  Pkepositioxal  At- 
tributes. 

Rem.  3.  The  Latin  lanijnaf^e  docs  not  use  Pi'cpositioiial  Atti'ibiitcs  as 
frequently  and  tnely  as  tlie  English  language,  and  English  Prepositional 
Attributes  generally  arc  expressed  either  by  Latin  Gknitivks,  or  by  the 
insertion  of  Participles,  as:  BeUum  Iklvdwruni,  a  why  with  the  Helve- 
tians; Studlum  modeiituv,  a  zeal  Ibrniodesty;  Desiderinni  t(/i\  a  longing /or 
thee;  Victoria  belli  cic'ilis,  a  victory  z/i  a  civil  war;  Consuetud»  Iiomiiium, 
the  intercourse  with  men;  Gloria  bdh\  the  renown  i/i  war;  Bellum  cum 
CarthaginiensibuH  geduin,  the  war  icith  the  Carthaginians;  Mo)in  prope  ur- 
bem  situs,  a  mountain  near  the  city  ;  Libri  de  iihiloaophia  scripti^  books  on 
philosophy. 

Only  8oine  relations  ar.e  expressed  by  Latin  Prepositional  Attributes,  and 
these  must  be  chietiy  learned  by  the  \isage  otthe  Latin  authors,  as :  Aditus 
ad  caMra,  the  access  to  the  camp;  Iter  ad  Ilclretios^  the  road  (journey)  to 
the  country  of  the  Helvetians;  Insubi  in  lacu  Prelio,  an  island  in  thePrc- 
lian  lake ;  Homo  de  plebe  (not  plebix),  a  man  of  the  plebs ;  Poculum  ex  auro^ 
a  gold  goblet;  Tua  in  nie  (uaicitia^  thy  friendship  for  me. 

Rem.  4.  Prepositional  Oujects,  like  the  C'ase-objects,  generally  stand 
before  their  governing  verbs.  In  the  compound  objective  phrase  they  gen- 
erally follow  the  case-object,  except  for  reasons  of  emphasis.  Prepositional 
Attributes  generally  follow  their  governing  nouns.  In  the  compound 
attributive  phrase  they  stand  after  the  adjective  or  attributive  genitive,  and 
before  the  governing  noun,  as  :  Cic£ronu  de  pJiilomphia  libri,  Cicero's  books 
on  philosophy;  Mmjua  in  caatria  trepiddti*}^  a  great  excitement  in  the  camp; 
Optima  tua  de  me  opinio^  thy  highly  favorable  opinion  about  me. 

Hem.  5.  When  the  Prepositional  Object  is  the  governing  noun  of  an  At- 
tribute, the  PreiK)sition  stands  before  the  whole  i)hra3e,  as:  Per  manum 
dextram,  through  the  right  hand ;  Prrrter  Ciceronia  fitium,  besides  Cicero's 
son.  But  often  TnonoKyllnbic  i)repositions,  especially  in,  de,  cum,  ex,  ab, 
Bometimes  also  dissyllables,  vspacuiUy  propter  -dud  inter,  are  placed  between 
a  precedimj  adjective  and  following  noun,  as :  Eodem  in  loco,  in  the  samo 


PREPOSITIONS. 


place ;  hoc  de  tiro,  on  this  man ;  magna  cum  diligeniia,  with  great  diligence ; 
maxima  ex  parte,  for  the  greatest  iiart. 

Rem.  ().  Prei)ositions  always  precede  those  nouns  whose  cases  they  gov- 
ern, and  whose  dependence  they  mark,  except  versus  and  tenus,  as:  tauro 
ienus,  up  to  the  Taurus;  Jlispaniam  versus,  in  the  direction  of  Spain.  The 
jireposition  cum,  belonging  to  the  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  nobis,  vobis,  is  affixed 
to  these  words  as  an  enclitic.  The  same  is  often  the  case  with  the  disjunct 
Form-adjectives  quo,  quibus,  and  qua,  as:  Mecum,  with  me;  tecum,  with 
thee ;  secum,  with  him ;  nobiscum,  vobiscum,  quocum,  quibuscum  (or  cum  quo^ 
cum  quibus;  but  not  cum  me,cum  te,  etc.).— Sometimes  (rarelv)  t /iter  is 
placed  after  the  object  (quns  inter,  among  whom,  Caes.  B.  C.  7,38). 

Rem.  7.  Prepositional  Objects  are  called  Reflexive,  when  their  ante- 
cedent is  the  logical  subject  of  their  governing  word  (j^  233).  The  English 
language  frequently  employs  the  simple  personal  pronouns  instead  of  the 
letlexives,  in  Prepositional  objects.  This  never  is  the  case  in  Latin,  as: 
Diogenes  carried  all  his  properti/  with  him,  Diogenes  onmia  sua  secum  por- 
tavit.    In  these  instances  we  alwai/.f  must  use  tiie  reflexive  pronoun  in  Latin. 

But  even  a  non-reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person  must  take  a  Re- 
flexive FOKM  [xui,  sibi,  se)  in  Latin  in  the  cases  specified  ^^  238,  389,  and 
§  423,  K.  70,  and  it  makes  here  no  dilference,  whether  the  pronominal 
object  is  prepositional  or  only  a  case-object.  The  same  rules  apply  to  the 
Possessive  suus. 

Jieni.  8.  Since  the  question,  whether  the  simple  or  the  reflexive  Pronouns  must  be 
used  in  a  given  case,  belon-s  to  the  more  difficult  parti?  of  Grammar,  we  <rive  here  these 
rules  in  their  connection.  We  call  here  the  forms  srii,  nbi.  se  and  the  Possessive  suus 
ItEFLEXiVE  FouMs.  whether  they  are  strictly  reflexive  or  not.  The  forms,  derived  from 
ts,  ea,  id  (ii6  eum,  him ;  ejus,  his  ;  eOru/n,  their),  are  here  called  Demonstkative  Forms. 

SUMMAIIY    OJ     TIIE    RuLES    ON    TIIE    IJsE    OF    TIIE    ReFLEXIVE 

AND  Demonstrative  Foiims. 

1.  The  use  of  the  Reflexive  or  Demonstrative  forms  chieflv  depends 
on  the  Place  of  the  Antecedent.  The  general  rule  is  this :  \V/ten  both 
Pronoun  and  Antecedent  sta/ul  in  the  same  sentence,  the  Reflexive /b/-//w 
must  be  used;  but,  when  they  stand  in  diffeiient  seiitences,  the  Demon- 
stuatives  must  be  onplot/ed. 

We  consider  here  all  coordinations,  even  the  coordinations  of  single  words 
as  constituting  dittereut  sentences.  Thus  the  sentence  "  The  queen  and 
her  children  were  killed"  consists  of  two  .coordinate  propositions,  which 
we  thus  complete :  a)  The  queen  was  killed ;  b)  her  children  were  killed. 
Hence  the  Possessive  her  and  its  antecedent  queen  stand  in  ditferent  sen- 
tences, and  the  possessive  assumes  the  demonstrative  form  (Regina  ejus- 
que  liberi  occisi  sunt). 

^  On  the  other  hand,  Participial  and  Infinitive  Clauses  are  here  con- 
sidered as  members  and  phrai^es  of  their  princii)al  sentence,  as  :  Germanicus 
tegiimes  universas,  sibi  sunnnam  reipnbliccc  deferentls,  cmnpescuif,  Suet.  Cal. 
1,  Gerinanicus  restrained  the  whole  of  the  legions,  oflering  to  him  the  gov- 
ernment of  the  State.  Here  the  Participial  Clause  :  Sibi  summam  relpub- 
licm  deferentls  is  considered  as  a  combination  of  attributive  phrases,  de- 
pendent on  legidnes.  Hence  the  pronoun  to  him  stands  in  the  same  sentence 
with  its  antecedent  Germanicus,  and  must  assume  the  Reflexive  form 
{sibi;  not  ei)  in  Lai'm.— Camillas  mihi  scripsit,  ta  secum  locutum  esse,  Cia 
Att.  11,  23,  L  Camillus  wrote  to  me,  that  thou  hadst  spoken  with  hiin. 
Here  the  Pronoun  him,  dependent  on  the  Predicate-Infinitive  lociitum  esse 


10 


rRErosmoNS. 


rnEPOSiTioNS. 


11 


i^  con'^idercd  to  be  in  the  same  sentence  with  its  antecedent  Camillus,  and 
therefore  must  be  expressed  by  the  Ketlexive  xa-nni  (not  oun  eo) 

2  Rule  No.  1  uncmuUtionnihj  applies  only  to  the  ease,  when  the  Antece- 
dent is  at  the  same  time  the  Subject  of  the  sentence,  which  most  .i^^'n;;^''}  Iv 
is  he  case  in  sentences  of  this  kind.  I5ut  when  X\xo  Antecedent  is  an  Object 
which  rarchi  is  the  case,  the  usa-e  of  the  Latin  authors  is  not  so  clear  and 
ccT  aim  as  in  the  first  case,  althon.i^h  the  use  of  the  Keflexivk  torm  is 
even  here  the  Rule  ;  as :  dEmr  Fablnm  cum  kijiime  m  sua  remdtd  hiberiia, 
C«s  15  G  5,  0)3,  Ca?sar  sends  Fabius  with  the  legion  to  Ms  wmter-quarteTs. 
Z^llanimonkun^  nomine  dUm^^  Cic.  Fam.  13,  21  Love  "^^J^^J^y^^'"^  f;;»' 
/iwsake— 7'<fc  autem  ticrmlH  Ma.ssilk/mbuH  sua  reddi:*,  tie  Att.  14,  14,  luu 
t^,u  renderest  to  the  Massilians  their  own. -7.V.^.V>/^.;v.^.<>  TZu  oZr 
se  conciliat,  Cic.  Oif.  1,  10,  Reason  and  language  bind  men  to  each  othci 

^'The^l)EMo;5^™vE  roKM  is  chiefly  employed,  when  a  prepositional 
Pronoun  or  Possessive,  having  an  object  as  antecedent,  may  be  resolved 
into  a  separate  clause,  or  when  such  a  Pronoun  or  Posse..i  e  ac^uallu 
stands  in  an  Infinitive  or  Participial  clause,  or  when  the  use  ot  the  ReHex- 

ive  woiild  cause  ambiguity;  as:  Attlco  ^w.tro  ^l^f^^'^t^^^'^^'^^'^f  l^'^Z 
scrintce,  7ion  jucumlwres  fuPrunf,  qmtm  mihi.Uc.  Jam.  l.J,  IH,  1,   lo  onr 
AU  cus  thy  letter,  most  pleasantly  written  to  him,  was  not  more  tigreeab  c 
Ui  n  to  me.       Here  the  Pronoiin  ad  cum  and  its  governing  participle 
s^riut'B  form  a  participial  clause,  and  hence  the  antecedent  .1//^.^  really 
^aus  in  another  clause,  although  in  the  case  No.  1,  that  is,  when  the  an- 
tecedent is  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  Participial  Clauses  are  considered  as 
mcmibers  of  the  principal  sentence.-.S.m;>.r  aniacl  Brntum  propter  ejus 
Z^mtm  inoenlum.  Cic.  Fam.  U,  14,  5, 1. always  loved  1  rutus  on  accomU 
oads  *n-eat  <'-enius  (that  is  :  Because  he  is  a  man  of  great  gen  us),     tit  ob- 
luZ^l^^ntefUun  ejus,  Cic.  Mil.,  lie  meets  C/odius  Ix^tore /...  r^^^^^^^ 
(better :  before  the  place  of  the  latter).     Here  ejus  shows,  that  the  su      ct 
Milo)  is  not  meant,  which  when  «a^/^  were  used,  would  remain  undecided. 
\rantl  Cincinnato  nuatidtum  est,  eum  dictatOrem  esse  factum,  Lie.  ben.  lb, 
50  To  Cincinnatus  while  ploughing,  it  was  announci,'d,  that  /i^  was  made 
a  dictator     Here  the  Pronoun  eum  in  the  Infinitive-clause  has  the  de>ion- 
STU vtive'  form,  because  its  antecedent  is  an  object.     But  when  the  antece- 
dent  is  the  lorpcal  subject  (although  it  has  the  form  ot  an  object),  we  must 
even  in\A/.v  case  eniploy  the  Reflexive  form,  as :  FauMo  spesfuerat 
re^Lnstirmm  apud  se  educari,  Liv.  1,  5,  Faustulus  had  enter  ained  the 
^^  Oiterally :  to  Faustulus  had  been  the  hope)  that  the  royal  otFspnng 
would  be  brought  ui>  in  his  house. 

Wlien  the  AnttHeJleiit  is  an  Attiuuute,  the  pronoun  always  assumes  the 
Devionstuative  tbrm.     This  case  is  extremely  rare,     bee  ^  Z6'6. 

8  When  the  Pronoun  or  Possessive  stands  in  a  finite  clause,  and  tlie 
antecedent  is  in  the  Principal  sentence,  we  must  use  the  Demonstuativb 
Form  This  follows  from  Rule  No.  1 ;  as  :  Hoc  ipsl.  SicuUsjta  persuasu.n 
est  ut  in  aninus  eorum  insitum  atque  inndtum  esse  vuleatur,  Cic.  V  err.  4,  4«, 
The  Sicilians  themselves  are  so  satisfied  of  this  fact,  that  it  seems  to  have 
jrrown  and  to  be  born  in  their  minds. 

But  when  a  Peusonal  Antecedent  is  the  logical  Surtect  of  the 
principal  sentence,  and  the  clause  is  represented  as  being  conceived  by  iht^ 
subject  so  that  he  (the  subject)  means  Jumself  by  the  Pronoun,  or  his  things 
by  the  Possessive,  we  must  use  the  Reflexive,  n.^  the  Demonstuative 


••l 


FoiiMS.  This  refers  to  all  kinds  of  clauses,  wiiether  they  are  introduced 
by  ut,  si,  quod,  quia,or  any  other  conjunction,  and  to  Relative  Clauses  and 
indirect  Questions;  as:  JJa  fames  locum  delegit  talem,  ut  non  midtum  obesse 
muUdudo  hostium  sua?  pa ucitdtl posset,  Datames  selected  a  place  of  this  kind, 
lest  the  great  number  of  the  enemies  could  do  much  damage  to  his  small 
force.  Nep.  Dat.  7,  3.  This  clause  contains  a  purpose  of  Datames,  and 
lie  means  b}'  the  Possessive  his  own  things. — Cassius  constituit  ut  ludi  ab- 
iente  tejierent  suo  nomine,  Cassius  has  resolved,  that  the  games  in  thy  absence 
should  be  given  in  Ztw  name.  Cic.  Att.  l.>,  11,2.  Tliis  clause  contains  a 
resolution  of  Cassius,  and  he  means  by  his  himself. — A  Ca^sare  valde  libe- 
raliter  invltor  sibi  ut  sim  ler/dtus,  Cic.  Att.  2,  188,  I  am  very  liberally  invited 
by  Ca?sar,  to  be  his  delegate.  This  clause  contains  an  invitation  of  Caesar, 
the  logictd  Subject,  and  he  means  himself  by. *f(!7>/. — Africdnus  si  sua  r^'j?  age- 
vi'tur,  testimonium  non  diceret,  Africanus,  if  his  cause  was  tried,  would  not 
be  a  witness.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  80,  8.  Here  the  clause  si  sua  res  ageretur  is 
represented  as  conceived  by  Africanus, ^is  if  it  was  said,  that  he  would  refuse 
testimony  if  his  case  were  tried. ^ — Decima  legio  Ccesari gjrdias  egit,  quod  de  se 
opfintuuijud(ciu?nfecis.sef,Ciii^.  B.  G.  1,41,  The  tenth  legion  thanked  Caesar 
for  having  j^assed  the  best  judgment  on  them  (that  is :  for  having  declared  them 
the  best  legion). — Patus  omnes  libros,  quosfr<der  suus  reliquisset,  mihi dondvit, 
Cic.  Att.  2,  1,  Partus  gave  me  all  books,  which  his  brother  had  left  to  him.'-' 

Whenji/ide  Clauses  are  thus  represerded  as  being  conceived  by  the  Subject 
of  the  principal  sentence,  the  mood  of  the  clause  always  is  the  Subjunctive, 
subjei't  to  the  Law  of  consecution.     For  a  peculiar  exception  see  p.  401,  n.  4. 

litni.  9.  The  verb  esse  frequently  is  used  as  the  governing  word  of  prepo- 
sitional and  other  classes  of  objects  without  being  connected  with  a  predi- 
cative adjective  or  noun.  This  verb  must  then  not  be  considered  as  a 
copula.  Esse  in  connection  with  objects  has  the  signification  of  a  real  verb. 
We  generally,  but  not  always,  use  in  English  the  verb  "  to  be'^  in  a  similar 
sense.  Thus,  in  connection  with  the  prei)osition  in,  the  verb  esse  has  the 
meaning  "  to  stuy^''  "  to  sojourn^''  as  :  In  Megard  fui,  I  was  (stayed)  in  Me- 
gara.  With  ex  it  means  the  source  from  which  something  is  derived,  as  in 
liie  idiom  "  c  republica  esse,"  to  be  of  advantage  for  the  republic,  which 
properly  means  :  *'  to  come  from  the  republic."  With  a  dative  object  esse 
has  the  meaning  ^' to  belong  f  and  with  the  prepositions  ante ^  post ^  pro, 
contra  the  meaning  of  esse  again  is  ditferent. 

§  4:tlO.  IVepositional  Objects  or  Attributes  stand  either  in 
the  Accusative  or  in  the  Ablative.     Each  preposition  governs* 

J  SiMiteiices  like  this»  may  be  represented  as  not  conceived  by  the  subject,  but  as  con- 
ceived Ijy  tlie author.  In  ihit*  ca^-e  ttie  De.honstuative  Form  is  used.  TUus  it  would  l)y 
no  means  be  fanhy,  to  use  in  the  above  sentence  eja-^  instead  oi sua.  In  sentences,  whose 
principal  predicates  do  not  distinctly  show,  that  the  clause  is  meant  to  be  a  conception 
of  tlie  SrnjKCT.  both,  the  Demonstkative  and  the  Keflexive  forms  are  used  at  the 
choice  of  the  author,  and  accordin<j  as  he  means  the  clause  to  be  understood.  From  this 
we  oiijrht  not  to  infer,  that  every  possible  clause  may  be  conceived  in  both  ways,  and 
that  consequi'Utly  tlie  use  of  either  form  always  may  be  defended.  This  is  by  no  means 
the  case.  On  the  contrary,  such  sentences,  where  indeed  both  forms  may  be  used  with 
equal  propriety,  are  l)ut  very  few.  and  in  by  far  the  ijreatest  number  of  sentences  only 
one  of  the  two  forms  must  be  considered  as  the  proper  one. 

"  Here  l)y'tlie  l^'tU-xive  fortn  suuj^  the  author  indicates,  that  the  clause  quos  f rater  mns 
relic/ uiysef  was  said  by  I'letus  himself,  when  he  made  the  donation.  The  Principal  Predi- 
cate (louarif  has  thus  the  force  o{ dixit  se  donare. 

'  The  Preposition  is  said  to  ijovern  the  Case  of  the  object,  not  the  object  as  such,  the 
prcposUion  bein^'  itself  part  of  the  object. 


IZ 


TREPOSITIONS. 


either  the  one  or  the  other  of  these  cases.     Only  four  preposi- 
tions may  be  construed  as  toclt  with  the  Accusative  as  with  the 

Ablative. 

The  following  Prepositions  govern  the  Accusative  : 


ob,  on  account  of. 

penes,  in  the  power  of. 

per,  throurjh,  hy. 

pone  (rare),  behind. 

post,  after. 

propter,  except,  heddcs. 

prope,  near. 

propter,  on  account  of. 

secundum,  along. 

supra,  over. 

trans,  across. 

ultra,  beyond. 

versus  (versuui),  toward  (local). 


Ad,  to  (direction  to). 

ad  versus,  against. 

ante,  before. 

upud,  at. 

circa,  about. 

circum,  around. 

cis  (citra),  on  this  side. 

contra,  againnt  (hostile). 

erga,  toward  (direction  of  the  mind). 

extra,  outside. 

infra,  below. 

inter,  between^  among. 

intra,  irithin. 

juxta,  nej-t  to. 

The  following  Prepositions  govern  the  Ablative  : 

A  (ab,  abs),  from.  e  (ex),  frojn  (out  oQ. 

absque  (rare  and  anteclassical),  tcitJiout.  pne,  before  (rare), 

coram,  in  t/ie  presence  of.  pro, /or. 

cum,  icith.  sine,  without, 

da,  from  (away  from).  ten  us,  up  to. 

The  following  Prepositions  take  either  the  Ablative  or  Ac- 
cusative : 

in,  in  (abl.) ;  into  (accus.)        subter (rare),  under.  )    Nearly  always 
snh  vnd£r.  snper,  over.  f  with  Accusative. 

§  4^?.  Ad  has  the  primary  meaning  "  ?iear  to.''  l)  In  locai 
relations  it  answers  to  both  questions,  "  ?r/i^re  .^"  and '' ic/dth 
er?'\  aiul  is  translated  by  to  in  answer  to  the  question  "  ichither'' 
(denoting  direction  to),  and  by  at  [by  or  near)  in  answer  to  the 
question  ''where;''  as  ad urhem  ire.,  to  go  to  (near  to)  the  city  ; 
ad  Cmsarem  prqficisci,  to  go  to  Ciesar  ;  ad  tumidum2m{/nare,  to 
fight  at  (hij,  near)  a  hill ;  ad  fluiniim  adtiemre  or  2)erven'ire,  to 
arrive  at  the  river ;  ^j>?^/7;ia  ad  Can?ias,  the  battle  at  {of)  Can- 
naj  (not  Cannarum). 

2)  Figuratively  (tropically,  see  Ilem.  2)  «J  expresses  a  tend- 
ency or  AIM  toward  a  point,  or  a  pukpose  for  or  toward  some 
end,  and  is  translated  by  to  or  for,  as :  Ad  2)rudentiam  revocare, 


PEEPOSITIONS. 


13 


to  recall  (o  prudence  ;  ad  helium  paratum  esse,  to  be  prepared 
(ready) /c;*  war  ;  apt  us  ad /lanc  Ur  tern,  ^t,  adai^fted  to  this  art; 
ad  sumina  omnia  natus,  horn  for  the  highest  ends. 

3)  In  relations  of  Time  it  answers  to  the  question  :  "  Till 
what  time?"  and  is  translated  by  to  or  till,  as  :  Ad  tricesimum 
a7inum  vix  it,  }\Q\i\cd  to  \\\^  thirtietli  year;  ad  vesper  um  dimi- 
care,  to  fight  till  evening. 

Rem.lQ.  Ad  is  frequently  strengthened  by  theadverb  w.S(7?/e(p.  21G,  7), 
which  in  this  connection  generally  is  translated  by  up  to  or  as  far  as,  and 
is  placed  either  before  ail,  or  after  the  object,  as :  Usque  ad  Bhenum,  or  ad 
lilienum  usque  venire,  to  come  up  to  (as  far  as)  the  Rhine  ;  usque  ad  senectu- 
tem,  or  ad  senectutem  usque,  up  to  old  age.  In  internal  relations  usque  ex- 
presses intensity  and  degree  (Hem.  13),  as :  ad  furiyrem  usque  excitare,  to 
excite  up  to  fiuy,  to  a  degree  of  fury. 

liem.  11.  The  lirst  difficulty,  which  the  student  meets  in  the  use  of  this 
preposition,  is  to  distinguish  it  from  the  relation  of  the  datfve  case.  In 
purely  local  relations,  tliat  is,  when  the  object  is  a  real  place,  this  dis- 
tinction is  very  clear.  In  such  relations  tlie  English  preposition  to,  an- 
swering to  the  question  "  whither"  or  "  where''  can  never  be  translated  by 
the  Dative,  as  :  I  come  to  the  sJiore,  ad  oram  venio  (not  oroe  xenio).  But  the 
object  of  a  local  relation  is  not  always  an  expressed  place,  but  may  be  a 
PERSON  or  other  tuing,  represented  as  occupying  a  place.  Thus  the  sen- 
tence "  I  come  to  Ciesar"  contains  a  local  relation,  since  it  refers  to  the 
place,  where  Caesar  is.  Local  relations  of  this  kind  generally  are  clearly 
indicated  by  the  puedicate,  and  when  the  Predicate  is  a  verb  of  motion, 
we  nuist  translate  tlie  English  "  to''  by  a  Latin  Preposition,  and  not  by  the 
Dative,  as:  I  flee  to  Cu'sar,  ad  Caesarem  (not  Cmari)  iugio  ;  he  Jiastens  to 
battle,  ad  piignam  properat  {noipugnce);  lie  rides  to  the  general,  ad  ducem 
adequitat  (not  duci). 

There  are  however  verbs,  which  only  presuppose  a  motion,  but  do  not 
express  it  clearly,  as  :  to  send,  to  call,  to  bring.  The  rule  is  here,  to  use  ad, 
not  the  dative,  as  :  I  send  auLbassculors  to  Casar,  Legatos  ad  C^sarem  mitto ; 
I  ctdl  Sejus  to  me,  Sejum  ad  me  voco  (not  mihi) ;  lie  brings  the  book  to  his 
brother,  Librum  ad  fratrem  aflfert  (but  see  p.  90,  Jl.  45.  4G).  But  some 
verbs  (to  restore,  to  write,  to  hand,  to  deliver,  etc.)  might  ajipear  .of  a 
doubtful  nature,  a^id  indeed  we  lind  several  verbs  construed  either  with  a 
Dative,  or  with  ad.  In  cases  of  this  kind  we  must  refer  principally  to 
the  usage  of  the  Latin  authors.  These  construe  certain  verbs  always  with 
a  Dative,  others  always  with  ad,  and  others  sometimes  with  a  Dative, 
sometimes  with  f«r?,  often  according  to  dilferent  meanings  of  the  same  verb. 
Thus  all  verbs,  which  contain  or  imply  the  idea  of  giving  are  construed 
with  the  Dative  of  the  receiver.  The  verb  to  return  for  instance,  when  it  is 
a  verb  of  motion  is  translated  by  red'ire,  reverti,  regredi,  etc.,  and  construed 
with  ad  or  in{ad  patrem  redire);  but  when  it  implies  the  idea  of  giving, 
it  is  translated  by  reddere  (re-dare)  and  construed  with  the  Dative  {librum 
am'ico  reddere).  The  sentence  "  Jle  returned  the  Iwstages  to  the  king"  may 
be  exprcsvsed  by  a  verb  of  giving  {reddere),  and  then  we  must  use  the  Da- 
tive ipbsides  regi  reddidit),  or  by  a  verb,  expressing  a  motion  (as  reducere, 


1  ! 


rPiErosiTioNs. 


to  return,  in  the  moaninir  to  hrinr/  back  or  lead  back),  and  then  the  prepo- 
sition ad  must  be  usetl  {olmden  ad  nrjein  mla.vif). 

Thi'  verb  mitfere  usually  is  constiued  with  ad,  but  it  is  found  also  with 
the  Dative,  when  the  pkusc^n,  to  whom  somethinir  is  sent,  is  conceived  as 
tlie  RECEivEii,  as:  to  send  amba.sfunlorn  to  the  king,  Iciratos  ad  regem  mittere  ; 
but :  to  «end  a  letter  to  the  kinf/,  litteras  irr/i  or  ad  rcf/cm  mittere.  The  verb 
acrlbere  may  be  construed  with  ad  or  the  Dative,  as:  epiKtoUuii  ad  frafreni 
or  fratri  ncriberc.'  But  here  the  Dative  is  more  usual.  The  verb  restituere 
(to  restore)  is  construed  with  ad  or  tlie  Dative.  ''  To  restore  a  thing  to  a 
^person''  is  expressed  by  restitucre  with  the  Dative  of  the  receiver  (as : 
librum  fratri  restituere);  but  "  to  restore  something  to  a  fanner  .state'  is  ex- 
pressed by  ri'stitiiere  witli  the  preposition  ///,  or  by  redigere  with  the  prep- 
osition ad  (in  honorem  restituere,  in  patriam  restituere,  discipllnam  ad 
prist inos  mores  redigere). 

The  verbs  iinvferre  and  anteponere  (to  prefer),  although  ferre  and  poncre 
oriunnally  denote  local  relations,  nevertheless  are  construed  with  the 
Dative  cmly,  since  the  one  that  prefers  something  to  another  thing  is  not 
conceived  as  bringing  it  to,  but  before  the  preferred  thing. 

Verbs,  which  originallv  denote  or  imply  a  local  direction,  generally 
are  construed  with  ad,  anil  not  with  the  Dative,  even  when  the  relation  is 
FIGURATIVE.  Thus  the  verbs  conlre,  recoedre^  redncere,  addacere,  referre, 
redigere,  conferre,  deferre,  accedere,  pertinere,  attinere  must  be  construed 
with  ad,  as:  AliqHeni  ad  sanitate ni  revocdre,  to  recall  somebody  to  reason; 
aliquem  ad  belluni  indncere,  to  induce  somebody  to  a  war;  ad  senatnni 
referre,  to  report  to  the  Senate;  hoc  ad  me  pertinet  or  attinrt,  this  concerns 
7ne  (literally  :  it  i)('it:iins  to  me).  Accedcre  ad  aliqxid  properly  means  "  to  rjo 
near  to  sonulhin'i,''  and  tr()i)ically :  to  be  added  to  something,  as:  Accedit  ad 
lioc.  It  is  added  to  this"'  (it  nuist  be  added  to  this,  that,  etc.)  Hoc  multinn  ad 
dignitatem  confert,  this  contributes  nuich  to  dignity.  We  sometimes  express 
ad  in  such  relations  by  other  prepositions  than  ^^  as;  Siimmnm  imjxriuni 
(Hi  aliquem  deferre  or  transftrre,  to  confer  or  transfer  the  connnando»/^  some- 
body (but  deferre  is  also  construed  with  the  dative). 

liem.  13.  The  preposition  to  before  names  of  Countries  is  translated  by 
in,  not  by  ad.  Before  Places  in  general,  ad  expresses,  that  the  aim  of  a 
moticm  rather  is  to  a  point  near  a  place,  than  to  the  iilace  itself;  as  ad 
Jturiirm,  (ul  littiis  ire,  to  go  to  a  river,  to  the  sea-shore;  ad  urbem,  to  a  i)lace 
before  a  city,  but  in  urbem  to  the  city  itself  Ft)r  this  nice  distinction  of 
the  Latin  language,  which  generally  is  disregarded  in  English,  see  §  450 
and  Hem.  70. 

Bern.  13.  The  preposition  ad  frequently  is  used,  to  cypress  1)  the  idea 
according  to  (see  the  prei)()sitions  Mcundum,  e.r,  pro),  2)  the  idea  up  to,  teen 
to.  In  both  instances  <(d  corresponds  to  its  original  meaning  near  to,  ap- 
proaching  to,  as:  Ad  voluntatem  [nutum)  alicujus  loqui,  to  speak  (recording  to 
somebody's  will  (hint) ;  ad  hunc  modam,  in  this  way,  after  this  manner  (ac- 
cording to  this  fashion);  qucm  ad  moduni  {qucmadmodum),  how,  according 
to  what  manner.  Ad  neceiii  aliquem  caidere,  to  strike  some  one  to  death 
(even  to  death,  up  to  death);  ((d  mille  homines,  about  1000  men,  as  many  as 
1000  men  (a  synon}in  of  circittr,  ^  400). 

1  TAhruni  nil  aliquem  arribere  moans:  To  dedicate  x\.  book  to  soincbody.  Librum  alicui 
ficribere  would  mean:  To  wrUe  abookyo/-  ^ownthoiU.—Einstolum  ud  aliquem  dar€,= 
to  si-ml  a  letttT  to  ^oinelmdv;  ep.  alicui  aa/v,=to  <,Mve  soiiud)()dy  a  IcttiT. 

2  Generally  translated  by  the  impcraiivo  scuteuce:  Add  to  thi:?,  that,  etc.  bee  p.  QiZ,  1. 


rREPOSITIONS. 


15 


Tfem  14  Tdiomp  —Ad  tempn.<i  has  throe  meanings  :  Vi  in  time  (at  the  right  time) ;  2)  for 
a  time"-  -i)  aeeording  to  time  (and  eircumstances*).  Ad  rerbum.  verbatim,  word  for  word. 
—  Id  annum  next  \^iar.—Ad  ejctremuvu  at  last.— .4(/  diem,  ad  /coram,  at  the  (appointed) 
dav  or  hour.— ^(V  wium  omnes,  all  without  exeeption. —.-!(/  summam,  on  the  whole.— ^oc 
nihil  ad  ine,  this  does  not  concern  mc.— Nihil  ad  Ciceronem  est,  he  is  nothing  lu  com- 
pari6>ou  with  Cicero. 

§  428.  Adcersus  {adversum)  means  1)  opposite  to  (over 
against)  ;  2)  toward  or  against  in  local  and  internal  relations, 
ill  a  hostile,  indifferent,  or  even  friendly  sense. 

Rem  15  Adrersus  in  a  local  sense  answers  either  to  the  question  ''where'' 
or  to  "  ichither:'  When  it  answers  to  the  question  "  where  "  it  means  oppo- 
site, over  against,  indicating  a  situation,  as  compared  with  another  situation. 
In  Ihis  sense  it  is  a  synonym  of  the  preposition  contra  and  of  the  expression 
e  regibne  with  a  genitive,  as:  Mons  adversus  Tarcntam  (or  contra  Tarentum., 
or  e  regibne  Tarenti),  a  mountain  opposite  (over  against)  Tarent.  AVhen  it 
answers  to  the  question  "  ^/i/</i^r"  in  a  heal  sense,  it  expresses  direction 
toward  and  is  then  a  synonvm  o^  versus,  or  if!  connection  with  the  idea  of 
HOSTILITY,  and  is  then  a  synonym  o^ contra;  as  Jwstes  adversus  Jtucium  (or 
ad  Jluviunl  versus,  or  Jtuvium  versus)  iter  faciunt,  the  enemies  march  toward 
the  river.  Quinctius  dictator  adversus  Qalliam  {contra  Qalliam)  missus  est, 
the  dictator  Quinctius  was  sent  against  Gaul.  ,       ,  , 

Rem.  10.  Adversus  in  internal  relations  is  either  translated  by  agaimt 
or  toicard.  It  is  employed  1)  in  hostile  directions,  and  is  then  equivalent 
to  contra  and  in,  as  :  belluni  adversus  (or  contra,  or  in)  Jugurtliam  gessit,  he 
wa<^ed  a  war  against  Jugurtha.  2)  In  indifferent  or  friendly  relations  it  is  a 
sym)nyni  of  erga  or  in,  as:  Quonani  modo  me  gererem  adversus  {m  or  erga) 
Ca!sareni,nsus  tuo  consilio  sum,  I  have  made  tise  of  thy  advice,  how  I  should 
behave  bocard  Ciusar.  Ob  egregiam,  fdem  adversus  {erga  or  in) populuni  Ro- 
mdnum,  for  his  excellent  faith  toward  the  Roman  people. 

We  generally  employ  contra,  to  express  hostile  relations,  erga  to  express 
friendly  relations,  and  adversus  to  express  indifferent  relations.  For  the 
dillerence  from  in,  sec  Hem.  72. 

§  1*29.  Ante  (before)  is  used  1)  in  local  relations,  answer- 
ing to  both  questions  '' ichert'"  and  '' whither ^'  as:  Castra  ante 
oppidani  j^osita,  the  camp,  placed  before  the  tow^n  ;  ante  signa 
progressus,  having  proceeded  before  the  standards.  2)  In  rela- 
tions of  Time  (question  ''ichen''),  as:  ante  h(ce?n,  hcioiv  day- 
break; ante  Socvatem,  before  (the  time  of)  Socrates.  3)  In 
CoMPAKisox  (more  than),  as:  queni  ante  me  diligo,  whom  I 
love  before  myself  (more  than  myself). 

Rem.  17  The  temporal  preposition  ante  always  implies  a  comparison 
(^  311  Hem.  10).  Therefore  it  is  construed  with  an  ablative  of  difference, 
lint  it  has  then  the  force  of  an  adverb.  Faucis  diebus  ante,  or  paacis  ant^ 
diibus  means:  "a  few  days  before".  In  this  connection  ante  is  chietly 
used  with  expressions  denoting  the  division  of  time  (day,  year,  etc.),  qual 
itied  bv  numerals,  as  :  Voverat  earn  statuam  annis  undecun  ante  h.  A^m\- 
bus   Liv  40,52  ;  ^Emilius  had  vowed  this  statue  eleven  years  before  {i.  e. 


14 


TRErOSITIONS. 


to  return,  in  the  meanin2:  to  hrinr/  back  or  lead  back),  and  then  tlie  prepo- 
sition iul  nuisl  be  used  {obsiih.i  ad  rifjein  mhn'it). 

The  verb  mitlere  usually  is  construed  with  (id,  but  it  is  found  also  with 
the  Dative,  when  the  pkus^n,  to  whom  something:  is  sent,  is  conceived  as 
the  KECEiVEii,  as:  to  send  amha.ss((dorn  to  t/i£  king,  leiratos  ad  regeni  niilterc; 
but:  to  .send  a  letti'r  to  the  kind,  litteras  re(ji  or  ad  rer/ein  mittere.  The  verb 
scribere  may  be  construed  with  ad  or  the  Dative,  as:  epixtolani  ad  f rat  rem 
or  fratri  acriberc?  But  here  the  Dative  is  more  usual.  The  verb  restituere 
(to  restore)  is  construed  with  ad  or  the  Dative,  "  To  restore  u  thing  to  a 
perso/i"  is  expressed  by  rcKtitnere  with  the  Dative  of  the  receiver  (as: 
librum  fratri  restituere);  but  "  to  restore  something  to  'A former  .state''  is  ex- 
pressed by  restituere  with  the  i^reposition  ///,  or  by  rediyere  with  the  prep- 
osition ad  (in  bonorem  restituere,  in  patriam  restituere,  discipllnam  ad 
pristinos  mores  redigere). 

The  verbs  i^nvferre  and  anteponere  (to  prefer),  althougli  ferre  and  ponere 
oriiiinally  denote  i.ocal  relations,  nevertheless  are  eonstrueil  with  the 
Dative  cmly,  since  the  one  that  prefers  something  to  another  thing  is  not 
conceived  Tis  bringing  it  to,  but  before  the  preferred  thing. 

Verbs,  which  originally  denote  or  imply  ii  local  direction,  generally 
are  construed  with  ad,  and  not  with  the  Dative,  even  when  the  relation  is 
FiGUiiATivE.  Thus  the  verbs  roedre,  recordre,  redncere,  addticere,  referre, 
redigere,  conferre,  deferre,  aceedere^  periinere,  attinere  must  be  construed 
with  ad,  as:  AWpieni  ad  sanitateni  revoedre,  to  recall  somebody  to  reason; 
aliqueni  ad  bell u in  indncere,  to  induce  somebody  to  a  war;  ad  Hendtuni 
referre,  to  report  to  the  Senate;  hoc  ad  me  pertinet  or  attinef,  this  concerns 
ine  (literally  :  it  pertains  to  me).  Accedere  ad  aliquid  properly  means  ''  to  go 
near  to  somcthinn','  and  tropically:  to  be  added  to  something,  as:  Accedit  ad 
hoc.  It  is  added  to  this""  (it  nuist  be  added  to  this,  that,  etc.)  II'H-  mnltnm  ad 
dignitidem  confert,  this  contributes  much  to  dignity.  AV'e  sometimes  express 
ad  in  such  relaticms  by  other  prepositions  than  io,  as;  Sunimiim  imjHrium, 
(nl  (diqneni  deferre  or  transferre,  to  confer  or  transfer  the  command  on  some- 
l)ody  (but  deferre  is  also  eonstrueil  with  the  dative). 

Bern.  12.  The  prei>osition  to  before  names  of  Countiues  is  tran.slated  by 
in,  not  by  ad.  Before  Places  in  general,  ad  expresses,  that  the  aim  of  a 
moti(m  rather  is  to  a  point  near  a  place,  than  to  the  i)lace  it^i'lf;  as  ad 
jiurinm,  ad  littus  ire,  to  go  to  a  river,  to  the  sea-shore;  ad  urbem,  to  a  i)lace 
before  a  city,  but  in  urbem  to  the  city  itself.  For  this  nice  distinction  of 
the  Latin  language,  which  generally  is  disregarded  in  English,  sec  §  450 
and  Rem.  70. 

Bern.  13.  The  preposition  ad  freipiently  is  used,  to  cypress  1)  the  idea 
according  to  (see  the  prepositions  stcundinn,  e.v,  pro),  2)  the  idea  up  to^  teen 
to.  In  both  instances  ad  corresponds  to  its  original  meaning  ne<(r  to,  ap- 
pi'oaching  to,  as:  Ad  volttntatem  {nuium)  alicujus  loqui,  to  si)eak  according  to 
somebody's  will  (hint) ;  ad  hunc  modum,  in  this  way,  after  this  manner  (ac- 
cording to  this  fashion);  gaem  ad  mod'/ni  {qnenuulmodnm),  how,  according 
to  whid  manner.  Ad  necem  aliqueni  civdere,  to  strike  some  one  to  death 
(even  to  death,  up  to  death);  ad  mille  homines,  about  1000  men,  as  many  as 
1000  men  (a  synonym  of  circitery  ^  400). 

1  Librum  ad  aliquem  ttcribcre  means:  To  dedicate  a  book  to  poiuebodv.  Librum  aliciii 
scribtre  would  mean:  To  write  a  hnok  for  »oinehoi\y. —EpMolam  ad  aliquem  dare,= 
to  send  a  letter  to  Honiehody;  ej).  alicni  aar^,=:to  «rive  somebody  a  letter. 

2  Generally  traubhitod  by  "the  iiuperaiivc  scuteucc:  Add  to  ihb,  that,  etc.  Sec  p.  022, 1. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


K 


Pf?n  14  InioMS  —Ad  tempvft  ha?  three  meanings  :  1^  in  time  (at  the  right  time> ;  2)  for 
a  tune  •  :h  aceording  to  time  (and  circumstances^).  Ad  r6r6?mi.  verbatim,  word  for  word. 
_  .1,/  an,nim  next  ycnv.-Ad  extrhnum.  at  last.-.l^  diem,  ad  horam,  at  the  (apnointed) 
daV  or  hour.-vi^^  wiuui  omnes.  all  without  exception.-.l(/  suinniani,  on  the  whole.-iToc 
liiJiil  Oil  me.  tliis  does  not  concern  mn.-NikU  ad  Ciceronem  est,  he  is  nothing  m  com- 
parit^on  with  Cicero. 


§  4S8.  Adcersus  {adverswn)  means  1)  oj^^osite  to  (over 
ao-ainst) ;  2)  toward  or  against  in  local  and  internal  relations, 
in  a  hostile,  indifferent,  or  even  friendly  sense. 

Rem  15  Adrersus  in  a  local  sense  answers  either  to  the  question  "  where'' 
or  to  "  whither."  When  it  answers  to  the  question  "  where  "  it  means  oppo- 
site over  against,  indicating  a  situation,  as  compared  with  another  situation. 
In  this  sense  it  is  a  synonym  of  the  preposition  contra  and  ot  the  expression 
e  regidne  with  a  genitive,  as:  Mons  adversus  Tarcntum  (or  c^mtra  Tarentum., 
or  e  reqivne  Tarenii),  a  mountain  opposite  (over  against)  Tarent.  When  it 
answers  to  the  question  "  whither"  in  a  load  sense,  it  expresses  dir.v.iion 
toward  and  is  then  a  synonvm  of  versus,  or  if!  connection  with  the  idea  ot 
HOSTILITY  and  is  then  a  synonym  of  (-^/i^m;  sls  Imtes  adcersus  Jlumini  (or 
ad  Jluiiunl  versu.'*,  ovjluviuni  versu.s)  iter  faciunt,  the  enemies  march  toward 
the  river.  Quinctius  dictdtor  adcersus  Galliam  {contra  Qalham)  missus  est, 
the  dictator  Quinctius  was  sent  against  Gaul.  ,  .   ,  ^ 

Rem  IG  Adveksus  in  internal  relations  is  either  translated  by  agaiiut 
or  toicard  It  is  employed  1)  in  hostile  directions,  and  is  then  equivalent 
to  contra  and  in,  as  :  belluni  adcersus  (or  contra,  or  in)  JugurtMm  gessit,  lie 
wa"-ed  a  war  again.st  Jugurtha.  2)  In  indifferent  or  friendly  relations  it  is  a 
vviumviu  of  erga  or  in,  as:  Quonani  modo  me  gerereni  adcersus  {m  or  erga) 
CiL^areni  ii.vis  tuo  consilio  .sum,  I  have  made  use  of  thy  advice,  how  1  should 
behave  toward  Ciesar.  Ob  egregiani  fidem  adcersus  {erga  or  in)populuni  Ro- 
mdnuni,  for  his  excellent  faith  toward  the  Roman  people. 

We  qenerallq  emplov  amtra,  to  express  hostile  relations,  erga  to  express 
friendly  relations,  and  adcersus  to  express  indilferent  relations.  1?  or  the 
diHerence  from  in,  see  Rem.  72. 

§  4»20.  A)ite  (before)  is  used  I)  in  local  relations,  answer- 
ing to  both  questions  ''where''  and  '' ichlther,''  as:  Castra  ante 
oppidum  2yoslta,  the  camp,  placed  before  the  town ;  ante  signa 
progressKS,  having  proceeded  before  the  standards.  2)  In  rela- 
tions of  Time  (question  "iMc;i"),  as:  ante  hicem,hcihiii  day- 
break; ante  Socratem,  before  (the  time  of)  Socrates.  3)  In 
CoMPAKisox  (more  than),  as:    qucni  ante  me  diligo,  whom  I 

love  before  myself  (more  than  myself). 

Rem.M  The  temporal  preposition  ante  always  implies  a  conij-ianson 
(^311  liem  10).  Therefore  it  is  construed  with  an  ablative  ot  ditlerence, 
b'lit  it  ha-s  then  the  force  of  an  adverb.  Faucis  diebus  ante,  or  paucis  ante 
diibus  means:  "a  few  days  before".  In  this  connection  ante  'S  chiet^y 
used  with  expressions  denoting  the  division  of  time  (day,  year,  etc.),  qu.n 
irted  by  numerals,  as  :  Voverat  earn  statuam  annis  nndecim  ante  L.  .±.mi- 
lius    Liv  40,52 ;  .'Emilius  had  vowed  this  statue  eleven  years  before  {i.  e. 


16 


rRErosmoNS. 


before  the  time  spoken  of,  =  ante  id  tempns).  In  such  constructions,  the 
accusative  beloni^ini;  to  ante  is  UNDKitsroon,  ami  ante  i>asses  over  into 
an  ADVEiJB.  iMore  rarely  ante  takes  such  numeral  expressions  in  the  ac- 
cusative, havins^  the  force  of  a  preposition  proper.  For  the  use  of  ante  iu 
rebxtions  of  tinie  see  p.  224, 10 ;  p.  200,  3  ;  p.  2:U,  2  ;  p.  198. 

"^4  few  days  earlier  than,  etc.,"  is  translated  eitlier  b}'  paucis  ante  diebtis 
guam,  or  hy  pauris  diebuft  prius  (piam.  The  ])repositi()n  before  wills  a  verbal 
noun  in  ing,  and  the  conjunction''  before'^  are  translated  by  the  Latin  con- 
junctions anfequam  (anteaquam)  orpriu8qua7n,wh\c\i  consist  of  the  adverbs 
ante  and  ;>/7</.'<, combined  into  one  word  with  the  comparative  conjunction 
qnam.  Tiie  English  verbal  noun  in  ing  must  then  be  resolved  into  a  finite 
clause,  as:  Cato\before  leavinfj  the  citi/,  wrote  to  C/^«?v^etc.,Cato  priusquam 
urbem  relinqueret  (or  rellquit),  scripsit  ad  Cicerunem,  etc. 

Rem.  IS.  "  Before  to-day  "  is  not  cxprossod  by  ante  hiinc  diem,  but  by  prius  giiam  ho- 
die.  Before  day  is  not  expressed  by  ante  diem.  I)ut  t)y:  ante  lucein.  Ante  diem  means, 
*'  l)efore  the  proper  time,"  "•  prematurely."  The  expressions  before  all  t/iin^.>\  before  all 
men,  before  the  /^^n/,  mean  in  «r  preference,  may  be  either  rendered  by  aide  omnia,  (ajite 
Ofnne/i,'anteceferos).  or  hy priiiiuni  q[finiu/n,  imprimis,  or  proicipue,  or  by  pneter  omnes, 
prtettr  ceteros  (see  §  43G}. 

§  4«IO.  Ajmd  in  local  relations  denotes  at  (near  by),  bnt  it 
is  chiefly  employed  as  tlie  exponent  of  a  relation,  tor  wiiich  the 

English  language  lias  no  adequate  expression,  and  which  may 
be  designated  as  the  relation  of  teksoxs  in  a  local  sense. 
In  this  sense  apiid  stands  always  before  an  object  denoting 
Persons,  but  indicates  at  the  same  time,  that  the  action  hap- 
})ens  at  a  place,  to  which  the  mentioned  persons  stand  in  a  cer- 
tain relation.  In  order  to  render  this  preposition  into  English, 
we  either  use  local  expressions  (in  the  house  of,  in  the  country 
of,  etc.),  or  we  employ  the  prepositions  among^  icith,  hy^  before^ 
i)K  accordinir  to  the  connection  between  the  Persons  and  the  in- 
dicated  Place,  as  :  Ajmd 2)Cftrem/ui,l]m\Q  been  in  the  house 
of  (with)  my  father.  Ajnid  Gallos  mos  est,  it  is  customary  with 
the  Gauls  (or  among  the  Gauls,  in  the  country  of  the  Gauls,  in 
Gaul).  Manllum  apud popidiun  accusdvlt,  he  accused  ]Manlius 
before  the  people  (at  the  place,  where  the  people  assembles). 

Hem.  10.  Apud  before  the  name  of  a  Pl.\ce  is  translated  by  near,  at,  by, 
and  is  then  a  synonym  of  ad  in  its  second  local  siguilication,  as :  Apud 
Caudium  pufjnaverunt,  they  fought  at  (near)  Caudium.  Apud  in  this  sense 
chieliy  is  used  before  names  of  cities  (villat;es)  and  islands,  while  the  prepo- 
sition ad  has  ii.  general  application.  Expressions  iis :  apud  Jluvium,  apud 
mare,  apud  horturn  in  correct  language  are  unusual,  while  such  expressions 
as  apud  Cannas,  apud  Acliuni,  apud  IjCucades  insnla.'i  are  frequently  met 
with.  For  the  distinction  from  prope,  propter,  juxta  and  circa  see  ^  437,  U. 
42.  For  the  translation  of  the  English  preposition  at,  denotin<;  in,  sec 
§  4o3, 11.  75. 


PRErOSITIONS. 


17 


Fern.  20.  The  translation  of  apud  before  Person^i  often  is  difficult  and 
awkward,  since  we  generally  cannot  reach  the  full  meaninir,  which  the 
Latin  connects  with  this  preposition.  We  must  distinguish  iiere  the  dif- 
ferent relations  of  the  mentioned  Persons  to  the  implied  place. 

1)  When  the  owner  of  the  place  is  meant,  we  use  the  preposition  with, 
or  at  with  a  Possessive  Case,  or  the  expressions  "  in  the  house  of,"  "  in  the 
place  of,"  as :  Achilles  apud  Chirdneni  educdtus  est,  Achilles  was  brought 
up  in  the  house  of  Chiron.  Jleti  apud  pairem  cwfidvi,  Yesterday  I  dined  at 
my  father's,  with  my  father  (merely  in  t/te  company  of  my  father  would  be : 
cum  pat  re  meo,  see  ^  44G).  Apud  me  comniordtur,' he  stays  with  me,  in  my 
house,  in  my  i)lace,  in  my  room. 

2)  When  the  Inhabitants  of  a  country  or  city  are  meant,  we  some- 
times emi)loy  the  preposition  among  (but  see  ^  432,  R.  25),  sometimes  tcith, 
or  the  expressions  in  the  c^mntry  of  in  the  city  of  or  we  substitute  the  name 
of  the  country,  district  or  city  with  the  preposition  in,  as:  Hoc  apud  Ger- 
manos  minus  toltrabdtur,  this  was  less  tolerated  among  the  Germans,  with 
the  Germans  or  in  Germany}  Prior  horuni  apud  Mamigctes  in  j^mlio  ceci- 
dit,  Nep.  Peg.  1,  the  former  of  these  fell  in  battle  in  the  country  of  the 
Massagetes.  Apud  Massilieiises  respublica  a  dclectis  administrdtur.  With  the 
]\Iassilians  (or  in  the  city  of  the  3Iassilians,  in  3Iassilia)  the  government  is 
administered  by  selectmen.  Sometimes  apud  betbre  names  of  nations  has 
the  meaning  of  a  Passive  Agent,  when  an  action  is  represented  as  being 
done  by  a  whole  nation,  especially  in  regular  periods,  as  :  Apud  u^gyptios 
falci/jus  metitur,  Py  the  Egyptians  harvesting  is  done  by  means  of  sickles. 
For  the  distinction  of  apud  with  inter  and  in  see  Pein.  70.  77. 

3)  Sometimes  by  apud  the  regular  incumbents  or  occupants  of  certain 
public  places  are  indicated,  for  instance  the  whole  people  in  regard  to 
the  regular  places  of  their  assemblies,  the  judges  in  regard  to  the  forum 
or  the  coun-house,  the  Senate  in  regard  to  the  Senate-hall,  the  soldiers  in 
regard  to  their  i)laces  of  assembly  in  the  camp.  Here  we  use  the  prepo- 
sition ''before''  (where  ante,  %  421),  would  not  be  at  its  place),  as:  Ajmd 
])lebem  verba  facere,  to  speak  before  the  people  (in  a  public  place,  where 
they  assemble  for  this  piu-pose) ;  apud  Judices  {senatum)  causam  dicere,  to 
plead  one's  cause  before  the  judges  (the  Senate) ;  apud  miiites  conciondri, 
to  deliver  a  speech  befoi-e  the  soldiers  (to  harangue  the  soldiers). 

4)  Often  by  apud  the  author  in  regard  to  his  work  (a  passage  in  an  au- 
thor) is  indicated.  Here  we  use  the  i)reposition  in,  as :  Jioc  apud  Cicerdneni 
Ugi,  1  have  rcail  this  in  Cicero  {in  Cicerone  would  be  a  barbarous  Latin). 

Jt^m.  21.  This  relation  is  figuratively  transferred  from  a  real  to  an 
IDEAL  place.  We  use  then  the  prepositions  ti^ith,  among,  or  by.  Thus 
apud  is  frequently  connected  with  maJOres,  as  :  Hoc  nunquam  apud  majores 
nostras  factum  est,  This  never  happened  with  our  forefathers,  or  this  was 
never  done  by  our  tbrelathers.  Apud  viros  bonos  gratiam  consecuti  sumus, 
AV'e  have  found  favor  with  good  men.  Here  all  good  men  are  conceived 
as  belonging  to  one  common,  ideal  place  (the  abode  of  the  good).  Thus 
nuist  be  explained  the  expression  apud  exercitum  esse,  to  be  in  the  arm}-, 
which  is  used  of  soldiers,  belonging  to  the  arinj^ 

Ron.  22.  Apud  in  this  sense  also  is  used  in  connection  Avith  verbs  of 
MOTION,  and  must  then  be  translated  by  to  and  a  possessive  case,  as :  apud 


>  The  Latin  would  not  use  m  this  conucction  the  expregsion  in  Germania,  by  which 
the  country  as  such,  the  land  U  des^iijnated. 


Vj 


TEEPOSITIONS. 


patreni  vie  contiiU,  I  wont  to  my  father's  (to  the  house  of  my  father) ;  but 
ad  patrem  me  contuli,  1  went  to  my  lather. 

§  1?ll .    Circiim  or  clrca^  both  meaning  around  or  about,  are 

used  ill  rcterences  to  places,  as  :  ^wbes  circa  {clrcum)   Cajyuam, 

the  cities  around  (about)   Capua.      Circa  (not  circum)  is  used 

of  uncertain  time,   as:  circa  eandeni  horam,  about  the  same 

hour. 

Ilejn.  2:}.  Both  circum  and  circa  mean  1)  being  or  goini?  around  some- 
thhi'^  (wh(jlly  or  j^artiallv)  as  :  Plenum  est  forum,  plena  templa  ci-rca  forum, 
Cic.  Cat.  4,  7,  14,  The  forum  is  full,  full  are  the  temples  around  (surround- 
uyA  the  forum.  '  Terra  circum  axem  se  summd  celeritdte  convertif,  The  earth 
turns  upon  its  axis  with  the  ixreatest  rapidity.— 2)  Both  prepositions  are 
used  of  Peiisons,  that  surround  somebody  as  attendants  or  triends,  as  :  Ke 
m  trccentos  jucenes  inermls  circa  se  habebaf,  Liv.  20, 1,  3,  Of  these  he  had 
300  unarmed  younj]^  men  about  him  (around  his  person).— 3)  lioth  prepo- 
sitions are  used  of  an  uncertain  place  in  the  neiii;hl)orho()d  of  some  locality 
{some/rhere  a/)out),aii:  Ceferuni(f/o  aut  ad  te  confrani  jne,aut  etiam  nunc 
circum  ha>e  loca  commomhor,  For  the  rest  I  shall  either  come  to  thee,  or  shall 
still  Ioniser  stay  somewhere  about  this  neighborhood. 

Rem  21.  In  rojrnrd  to  time,  rirca  (not  circum)  is  u-^cd  (first  by  Livy)  to  desiirnatc  a  point 
of  time  at  whicli  an  action  liapp.-iis,  without  voiichins;  for  exa'tni'!=s  (  =  ahont)  :  (Urea 
eandem.  hnram  rox  copiasadmOvit  ;  .l/yo?// ^/i<;.«rt/Aif//0'//- tin- kinir  l>ronuMit  his  troops  aion^. 
Liv  42,  .57.  — In  the  samt?  tien*e  circlter  occurs  us  ^cnii-preposition  with  the  dcsiirnatum 
of  time  in  the  accits.vtive  :  Cirrifer  meridiem  exerciuim  in  ca^tra  n-dnxit ;  Afjo>/f  voon 
he  took  the  army  hack  to  the  camp.  C:e^.  B.  G.  1,4!>.  In  Cicero  it  thus  occurs  only  in 
epistohiry  stvle  :  Scriptimi  erat,  te  in  EpTruni  itflrum  circifer  h'a/enda.'<  .SexlUes ;  1  hat  you 
would  tro  to  Epirus  arK)ut  the  fird  of  July.  Cic.  Att.  5.  IS,  1  (Com]).  Cic.  tarn.  14  5.  2  ;  II). 
15  .3  t»)  —Circifer  is  also  used  as  pakticlk  in  reirard  to  'NTMBEn  (I*.  I.  p.  VU'*,  ^  4(K)) : 
Circifer  parte  tertia  in  oppiUo  retenfa ;  About  the  third  part  bein-:  retained  in  the  town. 
CsB»  B  G  2,32.  When  thus  referrini?  to  numerical  relations  of  ti.me,  the  desiiination 
of  time  retains  the  Mine  case  it  would  have  without  circiter :  JAes-  circUer  (j>nii(tenm 
iter  fec7rvnt :  They  marched  about  filteen  davs.  Cjes.  B.  G.  1,  5.  liedito  tinr  nrnfer  men- 
die  ';  Return  here  about  uoou.  Piaut.  Most.  3,  1,  52.  For  circa,  circum,  and  cirater  as  local 
adverbs,  see  p.  21!).  .  ,     , 

Later  writers  use  the  preposition  circa  of  internal  relations,  with  the  nioaninj?  concerrv- 
i)Hf  ni^  pxtAica  circa  fjon as  a rtl^- socorU la.  the  public  indiirer(;ncc  about  (concermu-)  the 
liberal  arts.  Tac.  Ann.  11,  15.    Thi8  use  commouces  with  Ciumtihan. 

§  i:t*3.  Inter  1)  in  local  kelatiox  means  t/i  the  midst  of, 
heticem  or  amonr/  places,  things  or  persons,  as:  inter  Felium  et 
(hsam,  between  rdion  and  Ossa  ;  inter  saucios  relictns,  left  l)e- 
hind  among  the  wounded.  2)  In  relations  of  Time  it  means 
during,  within,  in  the  course  of,  as  :  inter  duos  annos,  during 
(within,  in  tlie  course  of)  two  years.  3)  It  expresses  Diffeu- 
ENCE  between  two  or  more  persons  or  things,  as  :  Discr'imen  in- 
ter fortls  et  temerarios,  the  difterence  between  brave  and  fool- 
hardy men.  Nihil  interest  inter  vos  et  me,  there  is  no  difterence 
between  you  and  me,     4)  It  is  used  in  connection  with  the  plu- 


} 


PREPOSITIONS. 


1Q 


ral  of  a  reflexive  pronoun  as  tlie  exponent  of  the  eecipkocal 
iielatiox,  meaning  each  other,  one  another,  as  :  Inter  nos  diffe- 
rinius,  we  dift*er  one  from  anotlier ;  inter  se  pugnant,  they  fight 
with  each  other ;  inter  se  aniant,  they  love  each  other. 

mm.  25.  The  Latin  has  for  both  of  our  prepositions  beticeen  and  a?n<??w 
oily  one  Avord,  tnt^^r.  When  inter  stands  before  Personal  nouns  in  the 
pluial,  and  is  translated  by  anwng,  it  is  a  synonym  of  apud  (Kern.  20) 
i  hus  instead  ot  apud  GaUo,'<  ?noM  erat,  we  may  also  say  inter  Gallos  moserat. 
IJut  by  apud  we  designate  the  Gauls  in  t/u'ir  own  country,  which  relation  is 
disregarded  with  mfc'/-,  althou-h  both  expressions  may  actually  mean  the 
same  thing.  AV  hen  I  say,  Inter  Oallos  eram,  I  mean,  that  I  was  amonn- 
Uaus  perhaps  m  Rome  or  at  anyplace  within  or  without  Gaul.  Bui 
apud  ballot  cram  means,  that  I  was  in  Gaal  it,Hclf  Thus  inter  hodls  means 
among  the  enemy,  among  i^L^s  in  general"  (at  whatever  place),  but  "  auud 
lostm    means,  among  the  enemy  at  their  regular  station. 

A  peculiar  idiom  is  "  inter  falearioH''  (among  the  scythe-makers) ;  "  inter 
hynarim  (among  the  carpenters),  meaning  the  quarter  of  the  citv  where 
the  persons  belonging  to  this  trade,  lived.^  Apud  %/^a/-^^,  etc.  would 
mejiu  in  the  houiics  ot  ihe  cari)enters,  etc.  ,        ,  *>       vi 

Item.  2G.  The  preposition  inter  in  the  tempohal  relation,  denotes  either 
a  1  ERioi)  ot  tune,  irtthtn  which  an  action  happens,  or  accompanvintr  cir- 
cumstances, which  hapi)ened  at  the  same  time  with  the  action.  "wS  ex- 
press the  latter  relation  sometimes  by  amid ;  as  :  Omnia  quce  inter  decern 
annos  nefmeflurjitio.yquefacta  sunt,  Everything,  that  has  been  done  crim- 
inally and  disgracelully  icit/tin  {during,  in  the  course  of)  ten  years  Cic 
Verr.  1,  13.  llae  inter  cmiam  Tirdni  dictdri,  I  have  dictated  this  to  Tiro 
during  dinner,  tie.  Qu.  frat.  3,  1,  ({.  For  the  dillerence  of  inter  ii^mpus 
2)er  tempus,  and  in  tempore,  see  Uem.  33  and  Kern.  7U.  Here  belon"-s  the 
adverb  interea  (lornied  from  inter  and  the  adverb  eu),  which  is  uSed  to 
connect  sentences,  and  translated  by:  "  I,i  tJis  mean  while." 

Hem.  27.  To  the  idea  of  diffeuence,  belongs  also  the  idea  of  distinc- 
tion an(lPKKKEUENCE  which  is  exi)resse(l  by  inter  in  a  meaning  similar 
to  that  ot  the  Partitive  Genitive  after  Sui>erlalives  (^  375),  as  :  In  oratorihus 
vera  adnuvabile  est,  fjuantum  inter  ornnes  unus  excellat.  But  in  rcrard  to  the 
orators,  it  is  remarkable,  how  much  one  is  distinguished  amo'lig  (before) 
all.  Lie.  Oral.  2,  G.  o  \  j 

lieni.  28.  The  reciprocal  relation'-'  in  Latin  is  generally  expressed  by  the 
preposition  inter  before  a  Pluual  iieflexive  pkonoun  (of  any  person) 
whatever  may  be  the  En{jli,sh  prei)osition  by  which  the  reciprocal  pron<.uii 
•^a^h  other  is  introduced,  as:  Inter  nos  pufjnanius,  we  tight  afjainst  each 
-other;  inter  vos  dijidifi.^,  you  distrust  each  other;  int<^r  se  distant,  they  are 
(.hshmijj-om  each  other;  inter  .se  connubium  habent,  they  (tor  inst  raies  or 
iiation^i)  have  intermarriage  icith  each  other ;  inter  se  obtrectant,  they  slan- 

"i,'^^^^'''^-""-*"'^,'"  ■  aiialo-y  we  mi-ht  call  the  .^o-called  Swamp  in  the  City  of  N.-w  York 
^VaaJh^''''"'     "'"""°  '"""^  i^-ather-dcaler.,  and  Wall-.troct  or  Exchan^je  Place  i^/^; 

•■*  Uianiniatically  considered  the  reciprocal  relation  is  a  REFLExrv'E  relation  with  more 
Virf  U 'ih^'V'^-  ^"  ^"•'\  '-^'lii."""*  ».»'«  "l>J^'^ts  and  subject,  are  idem  cal,  Zl  eadiT^ 
<!f»  .•,  ^^'%  l^^Tl^J'iner  and  i^utiere^  of  the  action,  x;xpre^>.ed  by  the  prediiire  But  thS 
in?hi'^'  '"'"'*'"  '"  ^^'^  I'Kcii-RocAL  relutiou  only  to  the  agukegatk  of  tL  tubjVct^  vhi  e 
ia  the  REFLEXIVE  relation  the  identity  of  performiu-  and  surtcrin^-  is  iadiiiduil.' 


20 


PREPOSITIONS. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


m 


der  each  other:  infer  se  c^mciUanUn\  they  are  reeoncik'd  to  each  otl  a  , 
internet  mint    they  are  afraid  of  each   other;   colh:.  proinnqni   inUr  se 
hilK  near  ^;  c'lch  oUier  ;  ha^c  interne  confine  ntur,  these  things  are  depend- 

aie  the  tii>t  twu  words  of  an  ancient  law,  probably  the  lex  Conielia  Ue  bicanu.) 

§  43:1.  O^,  as  to  its  local  meaning,  is  in  classical  prose  con- 
fined  to  •  ub  oculos'  (before  one's  eyes), and  ob  viam  (on  the  way). 
It  generally  denotes  cause,  as  a  synonym  of  i:>ro/>^cT  (for), 

7?^m  qi     Alimiid  Ob  oculof>  hahTre.^Xo  have  soinothintr  before  one's  cyeg;  aliquidob 
o^;Vo?r.r;r/tr  vomethin.^  one'«  eye..     Ob  viam  (or  obrUnn),  in  connectmu 

^  tvX  ormonon,l  rendered  '  to  ;7t..r,  and  construed  witb  a  "^T^^-'^-^f  ^;''^  [[^/ '^; 
riiir/ireinre  vtvficUci,  fleri)^'  to  <co  to  meet ',  or  '  to  meet  8oinel)ody.-0j>.  ni  the  u- 
fati on  of  cvu;ris  d.Utiy  n>*.'.l  with  rem  orm'/>//m,  preceded  hy  n  fonn-adjecttve :  Ob 
lim  V«L)  m/^  r  m/S  (alr^o  06  i.Z)- therefore  ifron^  that  reason) ;  fj>mm  ob  caumm  = 
rwh?(^f  'vt'n  wherefor,  whv.  Qu<on  ob  /..M.often  wri.teu  in  -e  -ord)  1.  f^^eqnen  - 
r  n«5,.d  for  connectin.' periods,  witii  the  force  o{t(ngue  (p.  180,  /i'.40;  Or.s.  4,  P- •^-l'^^_^''^- 
i  Oh  is  nW<  ^i  '«V  T)  of  rruposK  with  a  meanin-  nmilar  to  ud,  denoting  ixfuturecoi- 
^{Teraiol  for vvhich  o        v  ew  ,.f  which,  something  i:.  done  or  -iven     It  is  thus  chiel  y 

S  ibs-i;£i^!.;;^Aif-^^^^^^ 

o^othirBeS^  (a/a  .ynomy.n  of/,ro),  with  reference  to  ^/'«/'ll!;';^  '^.^ '^  y," 

ment!  noi  tMntf.m  ob  pecaniam.eA  eiob  ^namommmv^m^dan  ^^^^l^^^^^^^^ 
7,'>.-A-er  oppo^^itn'^^t  pi-nori  decern  ob  mtvas.  Ter.  Phoim.4,  .i  b  .-3)  'Yn^f  00  u  nstu 
fi'niratively  ot'  requitements  for  former  actions  (as  ^ynonym  ot  P\o),  hi  <  "«-  ^  «"^^ 
rm  in  rcmpublicim  pertnlimn^*;  what  we  have  ^»n;''-e^W'>r  our  love  to  t  e  repnbl.c^ 
Pic  Or  3  4  -CapiteanqnisU.iin  ob  rem  malp  ge^fam  (for  an  unsuccesslnl  war)  Liv  »,.ii. 
:^Er?o  nretinm  S;.^/^^?/i«^  fcro.  Ter.  Andr.3,5  4  -4)  ^^^  ^^'^"^ l^l^^^^^^^J^^;}!^ 
frtMiueiitlv  in  po-tclassical  lanirua-e.  06  is  used  ol  motive^  or  <)f  cau^e  y^rwi'/a  7  «1«' 
;  the  •  nction  •  ItomVi  us  al)  Amulio  of,  labefactandi  re-ni  tlmorem  (fromjear  of  l»»''  S  »»^ 
t»?n>ne.  aHibl^im  expAMi  jnssus  est.  Cic.  Uep.  3,  3.-Nec  meliOres  ob  earn  scuniiam,  nee 
beatir>"  c  pos^umus.  lb.  1, 19. 

g  I  :i  I .  rer  denotes  l)  in  local  kelatioxs  a  motion  tliroiigli 
space  (through,  throughout,  over,  by),  or  through  things 
(through),  as:  i>6r  x>^'OV inciarn  ire,  to  go  through  the  province; 
per  agros  vagari,  to  roam  over  the  fields;  per  hanc  viam,  by 
this  way ;  i^er  corpus  j^enctrarc,  to  penetrate  tlirough  (pierce) 
the  body  ;  ^:>er  totitm  orbem,  throughout  the  whole  earth.  2)  de- 
ferring to  Time  it  denotes  during,  throughout,  as  :  i^cr  cos  dies, 
during  (throughout)  these  days.  3)  In  internal  relations  it  de- 
notes'lNSTRUMENTALiTY  and  MEANS  (througli,  by,  by  means  of), 


^^'  per procuratdres  anere  to  icf  hv  o«.^r,fc 

mittPrP  tn  inf  r.     ^       i*^.         ,        ^  ^^"^^  '  i^^^  mamis  se  de- 

mutcre,  to  let  one's  self  down  by  (by  means  of)  his  hands 

our  province.    J3iU    J^^rirL  tt^t  '^^  ^^^  ^^"^'"'  ^^^  ^^^^^  ^^'^^'omjh 

der  ocer  liekls  ^c"r  nfomZn!;'  HrZ  ""'  ''''^"''  ''-^  ''''^''^  ^o  roam  or  wan- 
Tlie  enemies  intS^f tl  "  w  f^n.ntT  ^'''  ^nunitiones  d<jicere  infenderunt, 
G.  3,  2«.    Tlie  Ei^^l   h    iS^  '^'  fortmcations.    C\ts.  b! 

be  rendered  by  its  re-ada r  /w^^  '^  1  "'T'^ ,"'  ^^^'«  ^^'^«^^  ^""st  not 

"  A^7/^r  ;/^;i/  °    ^'  «-quivalent  supra,  which  always  impUes  the  idea 

^yp'<^7^:iJ:^iS^^^^  ^^r^  ^^  -pressed  either 

a  whole  period  we  use  nnilZ.  L,  *  ■  '")•  When  an  action  occupies 
"  to  walk  dt?r  ;>g  tlie  Xfc  n  ?hi  •"  l.i^''-  T  '"•  f''  "^^"^  «'"*"«,•.  means 
the  walking  ^^■rJZ^etu^n^^^^^^  '°"'««^-'.  "-t 

to UctrMusQuam  istkuMi/J,^  IMitot  ihe  nisht.  liege  per  (?»>« /«,. 
negative  senlenws  th^.n^ h.nt?  ™  '■<="'";«^"t«  anin.um.  Liv.  37,  U.±la. 
acUon  happe'/e<I  d  ,rh.^  a  n^nf  r  "'■"'•;""]•  ''""  ''  '''^■"'^l  "'"'  ^n 
I>eriod,  ^s:  Nulla  m  pe/tk.evmuni^^Jv':!^'^;''/'-' ''  '"  ""^ /""'«  "^  "'« 
case  was  decided  durin  "ihree^^l.^  ^/ "'';'"  «'"■'•''''''^«''' «^^^^  no 
1,5.— Comivire     r;«-™51-  „   ■    ^  *•■«'-=' «^J^fept  hy  lier  direction.  Cic  Verr 

*5fi      Tf  f].«        •    V  •     .   "^  "^^'^  under  root  dur  no-  14  vear^    r>P«  l-i  n   i 

din-inir  sonie  time  ortlH    nl /'^^^^  ^"''^^^"'^^'  ^"'''"^  t'^^se  days  {i.e. 

^^icilv  Liv  30  "4  livi  \v.lr^^       ''''^^'^°  ^^^  ^^^^  ^"»^"1  c^*«ssed  over  to 
^rLno'^;^,,i^\!^^  centum  naves  in 

A^m.o4   ^Mieuji;^/- denotes  ixstkumentality  and  mw.^J  -,  • 
iiym  ot  the  ablative  of  mean^  lud  ti.n  lif.  a    mlans,  it  is  a  syno- 

active  construction  tlie  al^  ati^-e  of  m  in.  ,^.f  ^'*i,^«^^^^T  (§  131).  lu  the 
with  about  tlie  same  force  arthenruf^T;:  ''  ^^  denotes  tiilxgs,  is  used 
and  rem  j^r  anna  obtZ^re  hlyc  nlb^^^!^Z  ^'"'-  ^^'\f  ''"^^  ""'"'^  "^^'^^^ 
i.s  done  by  a  pekson  tl  r\W  iti vo  rl^n  "^^'^T,"^'  ^"^  ^^'^^^'«  somethin- 
iu  the  active  con^ruc   onT  i        iL^^^^^^^^^  the  passive,  and  without  ab 

per.    Tlie  ablative  wi[h  «^  Is  tl  c  h>  dc  1  '^^^^^^^^^^  preposition 

own  name,  while  per  desi-'na    s  th'e  dor r  n  "^  t   '  ''^''  '^"^?  ^^^^  ^^^^^"  ^^  ^^^^ 

(not  « W.4)  ,}itUuZr  m-'^S 

r^^^:^S:^^^^'if^!^,^^^  But  onen  doubts 

r.te«  ^^enerally  are  Performed  b>    tlfrm^^^^^^  ^he.e  .acred 

caii.e  the  wou.eii  perforin  tiie  rites   thk>.4lh«^^^^^  "^'''^  ^^"  i=='  "sed,  be- 

reli-ious  community.    Tlie  ablative  hi  I^oVirv A'"  V'''  "'''"^  «^  ^he  priests  and  the 
SON,  i^  employed  when  there  i"  no  ribu inn  'ff^'^"^-  coustruction,  when  it  denotes  a  per- 


22 


riiErosiTioNS. 


^-^"^-  -o  M.M    Thm-fi  110  Mfction  at  is  allowofl  throncrh  me} :  per  Jo- 

Rem.^.  lDioM^-^e!*"',^^''^^Vwi?/,Lnaot-^^^^^^  per  litt^-nis.  ly  writing :  per 

colhxjuinm,  by  uor-d  oj  nmith     1    «•  />-  1^^^^-  Cfovre,  h„mdin  force ;  i)er  otium.  ln.^ur.u; 

,neans  /.c/u«<7,  in  answer  to  the  qnostiou  "^vhoI■c"  or  "jh.tlu  , 

crucem  fixissont  post  «rbcm  in  via  Ponipoja.    C.c.  ^  cu    5,  GO, 
^^r Secuna^cnL^r.  iter  fccCruut,  tl.cy  marched  along  (along- 
side') the  sea.     2)  Boih,  post  and  ««c«»<?<"»  are  used  wUh  refe^ 
once  to  local  oudku  and  to  u.nk,  and  are  then  translated  by 
X  or  ne.t  to,  as:  Qucaulo  post  vocCden.  lo.,n>n  una  sc,uU,n 
cZonans    when   one  consonant   follows   after  a  long  vowel, 
r    le  2   ^'  13.     Secundunx  consoles  auctoritate  pho-unum  ,»-«,- 
S^i^'.«^  ^1/'-  (ne^ct  to)  the  Consuls,  the  Praetors  had  the 
is    r ntho'rit,-:      3    In  relations  of  Tim.  both  post  and  secur. 
;,«  mean  «/^..  bnt  with  the  dirterence,  that  secundum  ind.eates 
1    i,nnudlJe  su'ecession  {ne^t  to,  dWectly  after,  upou),  as  :  been.  - 
dum  con.itia,  directs,  after  the  elections;  '^^^-"^^^)^;^^ 
mortem    vpon  Alexander's  death.     Janus  b.s  post    not  sccuu- 
moium,  iijxjn  ^  f  :*»  Tiv  ;    10      4')  F  "uratively 

dum)  Xunue  regnum  elausus  fuit.    Ln.  1.  19-     V  'Jr    „         ^ 
secindum  is  used  in  the  n.eaning  "  n>  accordance  Mth,    oppo 
:^Z contra,  as:  secundum  nataram  or  secundum  le<je.  ...ere, 
to  live  in  accordance  with  nature,  with  the  laws.        • 

«.;ilttis  nSr~^i-nV4s..^^^  lan.u..e  o„,y. 

of  difiVrcnce  (§  :ill,  K.  10)  an.  ""^  "^'  J«;.      ^t*  n  any,  etc.)  days  uficr. 


\ , 


3  The  ten\ple  of  Janus  was  t\\  ice  tlosui  aiitr  luc      ^ 


PREPOSITIONS.  23 

§  436.  7V*to-  1)  i„  its  LOCAL  signification  denotes  a  motion 
past  or  iy  some  jd.ace  (past,  hy,  alon,j),  as :  prmter  castra  C<^ 
saru  coinas  trcmsdu,it,  he  led  his  troops  past   (by)   Cesar's 
camp.  C«s.  ],   G.  1,  48.     2)  Figuratively  it  A.no  J  except  or 
im<fe,as:    K*«  a«^„«?  ^«^0,««  prater  iUum,  exdemsane, 
hhellum  hbuisset  scribere,  Cic.  Brut.  44,  103.'    Amlcum  ex  con- 
sulanbus  neminem  tibi  esse  video,  pr.^ter  Hortensium  et  Lucul- 
lam,  C.c.  Fam.  ],  5,  15.'     3)  It  is  also  used  to  express  d.stixc- 
Tiox   w.th    co>..pa.-ative    force    (like   inter),   especially  i,,   the 
co..„cct.ons  preHer  ceteros,  propter  alios.     It  is  then  t.-anslated 
by     before-  or  "  «Joi-e,"  as  :  Testis  est  Phalaris,  cujus  est,  prater 
cete.-os  nobiUtata  crudelitas.  Cic.  Off.  2,  7,  27.« 

u^-i'il,  wlieii  «•«■«<  introduces  a  CLtivral  .,,,:./?;,'•  ■'•  '■, '•  '^''«  "a™"  «dvfrb  is 
tliat.  except  ilWp.  (ajT  2-  7-)'l-ll"l*he, ',.,°,.;,  ?^'*'"* ''',"'  *',"*'•  V"l'rqnam  «,  except 
«.7,  and  forms  ii;i-„d;;.rb  ',^.,^1:^  !i  wui.!''  v  f  ^i'/.Mn'':.,'''';''  """""  """  ""^  "«verb 
means:  -btMtH  tlw"  or  •4MV«"Viace,Th,.^L"  if' '''"''"*  "'"'  sentences,  and 

kings  of  the  sa,„e  race!  X^erxls  aXhtf  tttt^^V/xeSJ? \vcrK.°;".  'f """  """^  ""'''^ 
fer'Sti^^befonTm^L-sSTei'''''  "'^  """'^ '  ^"«*'-  "*«"'•  «i»»"  usiai  or  cnstom ;  ^^, 

§  43r.  P/'o/j^er,  ^«-0^,«,  J„a;?ff.  i)  i„  ,.^„^^.^  ^^  ^^^^^  ^.^,^_ 
t.ons  these  th.-ee  p.-epositio.is  e.vpress  nearness  to  a  place  Prone 
generally  .s  t.-a.,slated  by  near,  near  by;  propter  by  beside,  bv 
or  on,  a..d  juxta  by  beside  or  ne.:t  to;  as  :  propter  me,  beside 
by  me;  prope  montem,  near  the  mountain  ;  juxta  muros,  beside 
or  next  to  the  walls.  2)  In  a  figurative  sense  propter  (not 
2yroi,e  or  juxta)  exp,-esses  a  Motive  or  Reason  (for  the  sake  of 
on  acco....t  of,  fo.-),  as  :    Quod  leyionem  propter  paucitalem 

arri^ei  (rrU7;raSi"^^''aSr'  *""""  '^'^'^™''  '"^'^^  ^V» '"ter  than  he  had' 
^l^«Ubed,  that  it  had  pleased  AntoLius  to  write  something  «.rfto  that  really  poor 

«\\n-inri's7h'ri^»rs:^VrU^^^^ 


Q.  PRErOSlTIO^S. 

T       •     1   +1.0  lo^rinn  on  accouiit  ot 
despiciehant,  because  they  clesp.sed  the  k.^on 

(for)  its  small  number.  Cies.  li.  ^.  ^,    •  ^,,^erb,ana  as  a  Pre- 

vL  40    7>;-rt)i<'  is  used  as  a  Particle  (g  40U),  as  a     ^  m,vcrns  an 

poft  on  I  fa'mb.fal,  «heUa-r  /'/«^,'^..«^.^,,l';^'s-^oe  Adverbs  as  well 
Tec  s  ve,  sUouUl  not  be  «""^»';;;''"' ''^J  \,ta  .^  ,eciallv  because  the  co.n- 
1\  Adiectives  may  govern  Objects  (S  ''•'.•f"    ;  A      ;.  r^gi)  are,  like  /»■«;«', 

a)nstruea  with  tl.e  Acx-u>aln   ,  as .  ;  '  .^  ^j^^  <^""''"'""V'     '     i','»* 

?^:,l  T.t  the  sixth  luilosloue  near  my  ^"'•'- .„V",,,„„e  j'roite.  propter, jurUi 
these  Tpos  tions,  by  denoti.>S  »»  ««^;^  ^,'/  't^'c  closest  pioximity.  and 
a     cV,s\in,J;uisla.,l  tV.Mn  each  o  b^^ 

the  St  tue  of  I'lato.    1''^ '''''ITnonVaoVmn  ine,^-d  pl«n.  '«^<:";«„^ 
i    the  neighborhood  of  ,as:   t<  """  '  '  , ,,,ar  ine  but  altogether  with  me. 

„  jStst;  incident  ^fX!^"::^'^^^^^^"^^  f-'lt-^fTnS 
tions-  vropterea  quod,  tor  tUL  ^^'^^J     .  ^^,,1,1^^1  iacommo(lnHitnHmAJ^\^^\ 

^i£^:i.:^:ii^^'^^^-^ '  -  ^"^^" "'  7'": 

-jj:;;^'\r  ^c'i^ll^Jl^n  of  cause  uK^tfre^uenay  l^^^^:^^:J^;. 
Ju'"s causa  or  f/m(i.',  preceded  by  "  ''"'''"J'as .°,miVi(te  c-i«.«  (or  »';«- 
!SoUve  "g-ei_"S  ji'>..Ji-^-™«StS>r"my  sake;  ...(m  <«««.,  for 

^ollv  correspond  to  their  English  equna    "1==  V»       J         c<v^,r  exercdu,,,. 

5  l!l.m\-«ii««<.  the  Helgiansl'V»  «^^  ^;,^  '^^oss  (over)  the  Garunma^ 

/,■««.<  (lariimmm  duxU,  Ctesai    "'  "'»        /■    ;  -j-hese  are  the  first  oulsuie 

/Lit  extra  provincuwi  trans  {"'',';''"''!'/,',,,« /i,KS  prori'/icto,  wi  hin 

/wi  li  mt)  the  province  across  the  «^! ;  '"^\^  ,  j  '1;  ^n  tl.c  walls  of  (iny, 

t  e  b     udari.'s  of  the  province.  J>*''^,'"{-  rfver  runs  below  the  city. 

t  V  etc.)  house.     Flanas  'f';'' «'*''"■;;';,  nho,-d.     Ultra  «>«.,  beyond 

%imJmiOS  unlls,  l>cy'>"^l     Jf  /,  £,    hove  (higher  than)  the  valley. 

(my,  thy,  etc.)  strength    _^«^  "J,^  ^'  '  .  ^  „^  ,,-^,,„-.„  «/,.f« //f  i--'-^" 


te.)  strength.    Supra  vaium,  auuv^  ^.  ^^^^   ^^^^ 

^--  ^^S^Tai:  EdSS^-  '«uiscpte^t  CWis  miles, 


<?/,  at  the  dU 


riiErosiTioNs.  ^  ^. 

f'Stri^oitrfe^^^ 

,ject  01  the  sentence  is  a  word  denniw  •,"■  ^'  ^>  ''**•    When  tlie  sub 

>s  translated  by  with,  as:  r^  fXlfV""''  ^'^  >>"P'"«m, polestm)\enes 
penum  penes  consules  fuit         "^'^'^  ^'"''"'  '"^  ^'"^  conmls,  Bummum  C 

erning  noun  or  pronoun  n"  Utllu^  ?djective  or  genitive  and  its  iov 
ot^r  InetKls  may  eorrespond^lo"tl.ti'"bene^11en'cet^4d'us""''^"^'^  '"""'^ 

irom  t'a^sar;  ,rm  «i  a/lT  """^  '''"*'■'*'  ^o  return 

«om  the  city;   «.  «.^.W...4   f.^ "Ifh       ^''^  "f  "^ '"^^"* 
^v.c./a  ^..v>/?«.c/,  to  dejiart  from  Z  chv   V         .1'  '"^  ^'•''• 

8  zIJ«    Ti  =>  "°™  O'les  (own)  horse. 

Ab  is  c.nployecl  to  ev-,>ress\  '"  ^^*^'"-  K^^atioxs. 

»«V..,,*  a  Pl  voE    3)   •  r  T       '""  ^  '^  1-om  a  Peksox,  2)  from 

out,  o.  f  -otn  «^ii^^  Tl       r'"  "  ''^""°"  ^^■'^'^'-  «-'»  ^-ith- 
moved  is  conce  ved  Totn       V^-'  ""'  ''"  ^'""^  ^'^  1~ 

Roth  rfi  ir     '  ""  '"«''"■  l''-'*«°  'o  »  lo«'er. 

i>o  1    c^,  a„d  ^  ^^j,^^^^  ^,^^  .^j^_^  ^^  Selection  or  t.ktvp 

i     ^-;-"ong  several  objects,  or  from  a  Place  " 


PRErOSITIONS. 

\     Tho  f()riTicr  (Viiiti  ot 
scul,  ,lnve.  t.uw,  ojc )  or  .^  ^Zl''^^'^^^  "»^  *'  "  ^  ""^  ""- 
rU-.":.'.  ?  KSr)t' «proi-a  ..y  ;'*  •^>'>-\ ,,„.  •„  expressed  ..V  .-  (opP'-d 

*s,m.l,oay  iVo.u  (out  ..1)  »t^^'  ^L^'^S»»     «-J^,,,,,  ;,,,  i,„„tj.;  c<u«  ««'«• 

Uiirius  Willi  liiin.  ,  ,  ,„„  ,„.  „,•„,„  is  oxpnssea  \iy  nh  {oi>pospcl 

a   The  kU-aof  motion  from  a  pi;»":  <»  "  -  '"  j^.,',,  .^^  ,..)ining  ort'omg 

from    lie  oiitsUlf  of  li.e  olji'd.      "^"i*:  ';,^.   3^/,,  iv,.ue  „bu-e  ..r  <to«>- 

o  «111 n  till-  object  of  tbe  111 -non  is  ■'  1  "l':"tlT.\^.,.,.,,,,,  o  »«  dmUlere,  to 

,•     to  witliartnv  from  Cv^ar  ^-^^^^^^]:,    ^j,,,  I  co.no  front  l>on,- 

semiitway  a  slave  OVoni  ones  fl;,''''.T,,,NKSot-a  place,  as:  ailnUna 

n,  v-  llwlKMi  ti.e  motion  comes  Iron.   '»^  "'^^''^^^^^^^^    ..b.   besii-ea  Mn.nia|; 

rmfc  r  to  .-elreat  from  MtUtna  ^"^^J^'f,,,,  «ben  .be  subject  bas 
nliZ^w  re,are,  to  return  Iron,  lie  '■'^'-;  ,.^',' 're  e  tbe  enemies  from  t be 
bcW    tie  rivcT) ;  ho.lU  a  m.>n.  J"""':,;  (;     ,^\'    :;,\v  tlic  iaea  of  dircctu,,, 

.  !llV    f^  wben  tbe  autbor  intenas  to   naicalt  m      >  .^.j^  ^„„,„. 

w' V  f.'  nrivlliont  rej;ara  .0.  tlie  "■^.j;  ^^ '"•„:';  ,f.     Tliis  is  espe- 

sir,r :'i^:t4rw'i;::2?^    ^ „!:;:;  tL .  piace ..  .bm. 

i:;;t;;!sy  is"  Si^t  of  n^;  ^"■<';''t,'-,-'  art-  I'lia" -bas  n,^  "-.u-.i  y-  -i- 


themouey66to//^stotUetica.uij.-   inun    y 


PREPOSITIONS. 


27 


^>  n":;^;:!':^:;^^!;^:^.;^,^^  -  employment  on  a  place. 

the   Ihnmi  llici  pronernHrr^A^^^^^^        ^''^^"'^  ''^'^  ^^^'^^"«  considered 
.e.,erallyc^xp;4!.^5  r^^^^^  'potion   from  a   plac^  is 

Cics.  H.  C  1   18  '  ^uctetius  et  Attius  de  muuo  *e  dnectrunt. 

o^'^^^'hi'^:;^^!^:^'^!^^^^  «--««x  ana  „.at 
««»V/««s  m«V  Cic  Att  81  2  T  1,7™  5.f''^•••?f '"''*''''*  '"'''■'""'  '«'«''o 

rL.s±t.  .^"  Sri  -1  ^t-  -  -'  Srri&r!? 

(el.her  .me's  sein  or  othersl  "'"^^^  "^''  "''  ""=  '"'='  °*"  "^'"«■"NG 

notby  *tl'L"''?,f;i;i''t"'"=  ;*"  1''"  P'-'^PO^ition/.../^,  is  expressed  by«i 

bus  ipX,„^!  t,;,l!Lj  Cfe';<«'- >«<««/»«,  ^™m<;  <i;,i«^  «  ,u>stri.,  niilli- 
;)«.»«««  j«a(„«;.  ^«  ^iy.nt^  „4^^_  (,jg^  jj   (,   1  4j'jj^  ^^.^  iuformea, 


(hi^r^t^f—rr..^..  .,.:., .''y'":*rL\  **    (nejufroire  profubuent,  noii  ex  eo,  ^-«erf  ab  eoloconie 

dejectus  est  Lepidtisf    Ab  wr6^. 


""II  lauu?,  Willie  m  tj,  u.  1  44  ho  a<;ksi  n.,>cn,.  t,»  ,.,uC  i  v---- .^^^  ^^^  ««iu,  iruiu  meir 
d<)  his  regionibus,  from  thok^  rt'^U;n^whi%i  wpL  .i^."^^  (^/ft/^m-e)  his  army  ex  (not 
(Cic.  Prov.  Con..  12,  -9)  Bx^dderiuerTde)^^^^^^^  r^^'^'J'    ^^^^'ocare  de  provincia 

PonK'body  from  his  mvn  pn)viS  whkh  h^^nvo^^^^^^^  ^^  "''''''"'^  *«  '"''^^"  «^  expel 

atumvlo  from  a  liiJl   which  fovh^Hton?^  ^m™''    -^l^^llie  general  calls  his  soldiers 
iiUquem  de  aqro  Z  (Cic  Qnincr  6^  fmTfo  !?r?v^  occupied.    Liv.  4,  39.    Thus  detrudire 
'  In  several  phrases  the^mno^■fi^,;^;i  l^  f^-'ve  somebody  from  his  own  land. 

are  omitted,  ailcl  the  me?e  AblSave  is  u/?d  w[  h fh  '1^^         ?^-^^'"  ^'^•^^^  ^^^'•««^ 
must  be  learned  bv  nninH/2     n^wl  i  "t®?..^V"  ^^"^.^^^.^^P^  a  Preposition.    These 


PREPOSITIONS. 

thnt  the  troops  of  Ariovistns  wore  24,000  paces  distant  from  our  troops 
2)  Bv  the  AccusvrivK  of  Place  (see  p.  220,2),  as:  Ah  his  castnsBibrax 
oppidn,ri  ahcrat  mWW'A  pa.^sauni  odo,  Ca^s.  B.  G.  2,  G3    The  town  BiDrax 
was  8,000  paces  distant  from  this  camp.     3)  By  Adverbs,  as  :  vroctd,  longe, 
multam  or  multo,  prope.     (See  p.  220,  7.) 

Bern  47   When  the  relation  of  distance  is  not  exprcsped  hy  the  verbs  disfare  or  abesi^e 
thblmonnt  of "listance  may  be  expressed  hy  the  preposition  a/>  with  the  abhilive,  Nvhih 
premSu     n  n  u.t  then  be  translated  by  -atthe  distance  o/,"  as :  IfA  qnum  a  ^'t'*^^"'»* 
/mi;lo!«l'i/>^«  contra  ix>suisset,  Li  v.  24,  IG,  Wheu  he  hud  erected  there  a  camp  at  a  diMance 
of  about  501)  paces. 

§  441.  Diiforence  of  ab,  ex  and  de  in  figurative  meanings. 
Ab  is  employed  troi)ically  to  denote  1)  tlie  idea  of  Oiuciix  and 
Source  from  Tersons;  2)  the  idea  of  Difference;  3)  the 
idea  of  Separatiox  and  Keeping  off.— ^'^  expresses  the  idea 
of  SOURCE  and  derivation  from  Things  ;  and  both  ex  and  de 
express  the  idea  of  selection  and  taking  away. 

Rem  48  When  tlie  Origin,  from  which  somcthin.c^  is  derived,  is  a  per- 
son froin  is  expressed  bv  a^  ;  when  it  is  a  Thing  or  a  Place  by  ex  as  : 
OHqlnem  a  dis  ducere  or  tra/iere,  to  derive  one's  ori.unn  Irom  the  iroils ;  a 
te  nulla  injuria  orta  eM,  from  thee  no  injury  has  come.  But:  nomen  ex 
alinua  re  ducere  or  traiiere,  to  derive  one  a  name  from  Honiething;  nomeii  ex 
loco  aliquo  vel  re  capere,  to  receive  (get)  one's  name  from  a  place  or  t/nnr/. 
Here  belon.^  the  verbs  of  beginning  (starting  from  some  pomt),  which  arc 
construed  with  ab'  (in  EngUsh  with  from  or  which),  as  incij)ere,ordiri,  tui- 
Hum  or  principium  ducere,  initium  repetere,  as  :  .1  principio  incipere  or  rem 
a  vrincimo  reikfereAo  commence  from  the  beginning  ;  a  Q^'f'  re  jmttmmnm 
ordiar  ?  from  (with)  which  matter  shall  I  chietly  begin  ?  Aliquidab  ultima 
antiquitate  repetere,  to  derive  sometliing  trom  the  earliest  antiquity  (mean- 
in"-  •  to  be<nn  in  some  subject  from  the  earliest  antiquity).— V  erbs  denoting 
a  RECEIVING  from  or  <>/  somebody  (aceiperc),  an  obtaining  (^//i;Wn//y% 
conseqmXov  buying  {emere,  mercdri)  are  likewise  construed  with  ab  as: 
vecuniam  ab  aliquo  accij)ere,  to  receive  money  from  (of)  somahody  ;aliqu id 
a  Ccesare  impetrdre,  to  ohUun  something  from  (of)  C«sar ;  aliquid  a  pos- 
semre  emere,  to  buy  something  from  (of)  the  owner.  The  source,  Irom 
which  something  is  derived  is  also  designated  by  the  verbs  ot  demanding 
(askin*--  of  or  from),  poscere,  pjdaldre,  ]kiere,  as:  aliquid  ab  am  icopoMcere, 
postuldre  or  petere,  to  demand,  ask  something  from  (of)  a  friend.  All  these 
verbs  are  construed  with  ab.  Verbs,  wliich  express  a  learning  and  as- 
certaining from  somebody  or  something  {c^gnoscere,  audirc  anil  acciperc) 
are  construed  with  ab  or  ex;'  and  verbs  of  asking  questions  ((/«.frer^ 


1  Because  the  line  of  motion  is  conceived  here  as  Ptartinj?  from  a  mere  point,  and  there- 
fore  cannot  be  indicated  by  an  eouivalent  of  "  (nit  oj..''' 

7Fmlrelnd  mercan  are  construed  with  ab  and  de.    But  emere  de  frenernlly  means  :  to 
buv  Cm  a  person  who  is  not  the  owner,  but  either  the  aqeat  c^'  the  owner,  or  else  a 
nemTniot  entitle  1  to  sell,  as  for  instance  a  person  under  aire.    The  Roman  j.insts  in- 
?aSV"avV/ilr6  «A   when  the  bar-ain  is  made  between  the  parties  t  u'mselves. 
^  aZ^a>^r^^^^^  are  construed  with  ab  when  they  reler  to  rEn^osf(amosc^e 

ab  ho    Z)  but  with  ex  when  they  refer  to  Things  {cognoscere  or  ducere  ex  httens).    A'^ 


PREPOSITIONS. 


' ' '  I 


^m\percontari)  with  ab,  ex,  or  de.'    Verbs  of  judging,  iNFERur^G  con 
CLUDiNG  (judicare,  concludere,coUigere)  stand  with  ex  only-  ™  Ex  Ms  re 
f'^jndicanpotr.t{colligitur,concmi  potest),  from  these  Ui'im^s  it  mav  be 
niterred  (judged,  concluded)  that,  ^^l-Peadere  (to  ckne  id  Sn   or  «to  h! 
suspended  from  ')  is  construed  with  ex  ^     acpena  on,  or    to  b^ 

\erbs  expressing  a  difference,  as:  differre,  distare   discrendre  di,,,n 

lau  comitas?     What  is  so  dillerent,  than  attubility  from  i^e  sw  a mn 
hetoSV    T^ ''^  ^  '''''''  discrepant  or  ablu^rrerl,  T.l^,^^^;.  j?  .^ 
the  ^^ords.    The  same  construction  is  applied  to  verbs  denotin-  i  w/im 
ING  or  KEKPiNG  OFF  {avcerc, prohibere),'J^EFE^m^o'vn^^^^ 
^l^ye}emi.re,tucri,tutum  esse'),  a  freeing,  RELEi^iNG  and  bein4^^^^^^ 
iJi^rare,  vuidicure,  hberum,  vacuum,  immun^m  esse),  a  separating  Sz 
r'aXr Jr '.tS:^  and  DESISTING  ^cUsistere)^  ai :  H^mt^^lS^tr^l 
raie  aiceje  oi  ptoUibere,  to  keep  men  Irom  dishonesty  se  ab  iniyrh\  Hp 

atjtnacre  oi  tuu  i    io  protect  one's  Iriends  from  violence  from  the  ennniv  • 
ahquema  metu  liberdre,  to  free  or  release  somebody  ^mm^^M     M^^^^^^ 

avv^iy  trom  Persons  generally  are  constriied  with  the  Dath^  Jt'  Uie  Pe^ 

XlJ^Z^:;'''''^''^^.^^^^'  ^^)'  ^"^  sometim^'a^sowith 
ao  as    Ju,is  utiUtas  vel  a  pentts  td  de  libHs  deprdmi potest,  Cic  de  Or  1  W 

Legal  points  may  be  either  taken  (suggested  by)  trom'lawyei^  en*  Lm 
who  take  Inendship  Irom  life,  seem  to  take  the  sun  from  the  world.^ 

§  442.  In  relations  of  Time  both  ab  and  ex  (not  de)  denote 
from  or  since.  Both  are  used  to  express  the  beginnincr  of  a 
period.  But  ab  alone  is  used  to  denote  the  distan'ce  from  one 
lK)int  of  time  to  another,  analogous  to  the  relation  of  space.     Ab 

iSm'llf-lT,,!? i^il,^^^^     ""^Znl^^Tf"'^'  T""^''''^^  ^^^^  ^-^  ^^^^''0  '^  'o,  I  hear 


ott^arelaUouoraile-iance   lo^vTc^rfrmwiX^  •      ii  ^"'"^^^o^y)' ^«"^tes :  to  break 

tt'i-Mi  vol  V  iVo<..,    ',,",'."  ''^ceue.  to  wuticiraw  one  s  aliei,nance  Irom  somebody     It  i^  » 

^reiVa^-iSyiVlteidef'f '"'■-'  ^^"V'"^-^-'-^  -Many  vc^Ds  arc  consired  wah  ^^X 
selection  ,i;?.vM,u.,.  .    ""^  ^e^jaraiion  and  release,  or  the  idea  of  takin«r  awav  and 

Ti^^rson  m-ihhn'V,^^^^  ''^"  "'^j^^^  ^*^  conceived  as  a  place  out  of  whicV^o? as 

b/riadinl/tlii^'lS/inuthor'!'  '^"'"^'^'"^'  ^^^^^-    '^^^^^  constri'ctions  must  be'learned 


30 


PREPOSITIONS. 


is  often  strengthened  by  tlic  adverb  indc  or  jam  inde   (ever 

since),  as: 

Jam  inde  ab  infeUci  pitgnd  ccHderant  animi,  Liv.  2,  G5, 7,  Ever  since  the 
untbi-tiniate  buttle  their  courage  had  sunk.— J/.  yEinilius  ab  iiunnte  ado- 
lescentid  me  dllexii,  M.  ^:nnlius  has  k)ved  nie  from  his  first  youth  (since  he 
was  a  young  man).  Cic.  Fam.  13,  2\.—Ex  eo  tempore  omnia  in  repubhca 
ad  arbitrium  adminidrdut,  Since  that  thne  he  administered  everything 
in  the  republic  according  to  his  pleasure.  Suet.  Ca3s.  20.— 3>c  tcro  disce- 
debum  ex  eo  die,  quo  in  aedoii  Tellaris  conxocdti  sumus,  But  I  did  not  go 
(from  the  place)  since  the  day  we  were  called  into  the  temple  of  Tellus. 
Cic.  Phil.  1,1, 1. — Ab  hord  septimd  ad  vesperum  piignMum  eat,  The  battle 
lasted  from' the  seventh  hour  till  evening.    Caes.  B.  G.  1,  20. 

Bern.  49.  Ex  especially  is  used  with  expressions  denoting  Time  itself  or 
its  divisions  [tempus,  annus,  dies,  etc.)  in  the  meaning  ever  since,  so  that  a 
lan'-er  indetinite  period  is  meant,  as:  ex  hoc  temiwrc,  ever  since  that  tune; 
ex  hoc  die,  ever  since  that  day.  Ab  is  used  either  of  definite  periods,  limited 
bv  the  points  of  beginning  and  ending  {a  septimo  ad  undecimum  annum, 
diem,  etc.),  or  when  Time  is  reckoned  not  by  a  point  of  Time  itself  or  its 
divisions,  but  from  events  transpiring  in  Time,  as  a  juventuie,  a  pugna. 
Here  generally  inde  ab  is  used,  to  express  the  idea  ''ever  since:' 

Ilem.  50.  The  English  conjunction  since,  introducing  Time  clauses, 
meanin^r  ''since  the  time  (chen,''  is  expressed  by  ex  quo  tempore  or  ex  quo  (ui- 
btead  or' ex  eo  tempore  quo),  as:  P.  ei  On.  Corndii  ex  quo  in provinciam  vene- 
runty  nulla  tempore  de^titerunt,  quoi  adversa  hostibns  essent  facere,  Liv.  28, 
39,  P.  and  Cn.  Cornelius,  (iver)  since  they  came  into  the  province,  never 
ceased  doing  what  was  hurtful  to  the  enemy. 

§  443.  Both  ex  and  dc  (especially  ex,  but  never  ah)  are 
used  in  the  meaning   of  the  English  preposition   of  (out  of), 

1)  as  equivalents  of  the  Partitivp:  Genitive,  and  especially 
in  those  instances  where  the  partitive  genitive  is  either  inad- 
missible or  unusual  (§  375,  Kern.  34).  Thus  ex  (sometimes  de) 
is  always  used  after  wins  with  the  force  of  a  partitive  genitive, 
and  mostly  after  definite  numerals,  after  the  indefinites  nidlus, 
midti,  7ionnulU,  aliquot,  ^xfwc/,  complures,  and  after  superla- 
tives (§  375).  In  all  these  cases  it  is  used  both  before  form- 
adjectives  and  before  nouns  (§  375,  Hem.  34),  as:  l//ius  ex 
(de)  amicis  meis,  one  of  my  friends.  Kc  his  duo  morho  mortui 
sunt,  two  of  these  died  by  a  disease.  3hdti  ex  militihus,  many 
of  the  soldiers.  Ex  his  Hannibal  prudentissimus  fait,  of  these 
Hannibal  was  the  shrewdest. 

2)  Both  Prepositions  {ex  and  de,  but  especially  the  former, 
and  never  ah)  express  the  Mateuial,  out  of  which  something  is 


PEEPOSITIONS. 


31 


made,  or  the  Con.stituents,  of  which  something  consists,  as: 
Statua  ex  mre  facta,  a  statue  made  (out)  of  bronze.  Homo  ex 
aniiao  constat  et  corpore,  Man  consists  of  a  soul  and  a  body. 

8)  Both  Prepositions  (but  again  especially  ex)  are  exponents 
of  the  Preposition  on,  when  an  action  is  represented  as  happen- 
ing on  a  place  witli  an  outward  tendency  or  direction,  as  :  Ex 
(dc)  equo  inifjnare,  ex  arido,  ex  muris  diniicare,  to  'figlit  on 
horseback,  on  dry  ground,  on  the  walls;  ex  equis  coUoqui,  to 
have  a  conference  on  horseback ;  ex  vinculis  causani  dieere,  to 
be  tried  under  arrest  (literally:  to  defend  a  cause  from  chains); 
Littcras  ex  itinere  scrihere,  to  write  a  letter  on  a  journey. 

"^'^TFrTiV.N-*'/^]?,?'^?,''-^^  ""^  ^-^  '"""^^  l>e  cx-plainerl  from  the  relation  o' 

cS  HS  Sf  ^>  ^^1^=;^^  ,r«;;"-x;- -„;- si 

and  Vrul;;  which  C^n^J'  ""  "'"^^'^'^    ^"'^^^^^^  ''''  ^-^''^*'--  '^  ^^''"'-•^^  *-"«l>-dy  belo^,^;; 

§  444.  Ex  ah)ne  is  used :  1)  to  denote  a  change  from  one 
condition  to  another,  as:  JM  ex  honiiuihns facti,  Cic.  Hep.  2,  10, 
Gods  made  out  of  (changed  from)  men.  Annona  ex  \inte 
convecta  copia  nihil  niutacif.  The  corn  did  not  vary  from  (in 
regard  to)  the  quantity  brought  there  before.    Liv..  5,  13. 

2)  To  express  the  English  "according  to,"  "on  the  oround 
of,"  "  after,"  witli  a  similar  (Pern.  53)  force,  as  seclndum 
(.^  43o,  4),  especially  with  verbs  of  judging,  estimating,  deter- 
nnnmg,  suing,  as:  ex  eventu  aliquem  judicare,  to  judge  some- 
body according  to  (after)  the  event;  re?n  ex  mquo  et  bono  dis- 
ceptare,  to  determine  (settle)  a  matter  according  to  equity; 
ex  senatus  consultu  agere,  to  sue  on  the  ground" of  a  Senate 
decree. 

sitSk^,K  Vhin' .'^.-o^^^^^^^  ";:;r"'^  connected  with  that  of  Time,  since  everv 

lowin;:  each  ululv      T    ,^T;.     v     .  '^l*,;  'i"»""*'  ''''''  r*'"'^^  "'^  '•'"^^'  iniuiediatelv  fof- 

atelv  an.-rle..-)    Kx   i^^^^  a<T,ons   which  are  pe.fora.ed  imraedi- 


32 


PREPOSITIONS. 


o/","  '  as:  Pompejm  ex  conmldtu  in  Hispaniam  profectus  esf,  Pompcy  immediately 
the  expiration  of  his  term  an  consul  went  to  Spain.— 6>r;t  cum  jurm.'iet.  ne  in  nnllam 


tinn  of,' 

after . .  .  .,       . 

proritidaw.  ex  eo  viagistnVu  itifnnn.  When  he  had  ?Vvum,  that  he  \vouhl  £r«>  into  no  pro- 
vince (would  take  the  government  of  no  province)  after  the  expiration  of  the  term  of  his 
oftice. 

npm.  53.  "  According  to"'  is  translated  hy  ad,  arcundiim.  f.r,  pro.    Ad  expresses  accom- 
modation to  sometliiui,'  (approacliiii>r  to— <((/  ?ii/fitm,  ad  voluntdfetn).    l^tcundum  (from 


§-M.S. 


§  41o.  lie  alone  (not  ex  or  ah)  is  use<l,  to  (U-note  tlic  suu- 
jECT-MATi'EU  of  acts  of  the  niiiul,  coiTospoiuliiig  to  "about," 
"  on,"  "  of,"  "  concerning." 


Tiem.  51.  The  use  o^ de  in  this  moaninir  is  very  extended.  Tt  is  employed  thus  princi- 
pally to  indicate  the  object  of  verbs  of  TiiiNKiN(i.  sayin'c»,  wkitin<i  ;  l)ut  it  may  be  con- 
nected with  any  verb,  conceived  as  moducing  a  contemplated  nimlt.  We  may  «generally 
translate  it  by  '-'concerning,''''  but  tliere  are  many,  more  special  prepositions,  which 
more  closely  arc  adapted  to  the  meanim;  of  the  «riven  verb  {of,  on,  for);  as:  De  homi- 
mbun  nut  rebus  judicdre,  exMimdre,  sentlre.  to  think  (judire)  of,  to  have  an  opinion 
on  (concerninir)  men  or  thini^s.  /Je  jMtosop/iia  scr'ibere,  to  write  on  philoso|>liv.  J)e 
republica  (de  rebns  pulAicis)  dlspiitCire  or  disaerere,  to  ppeak,  debate  on  the  republic  (on 
political  matters).  J)e  amlco  logui.  to  speak  of  a  friend.  De  am'uo  audlre,  to  hear  «>f  a 
friend.  Opin'wnem  de  cd'iqud  re  habere,  to  have,  hold  an  opinion  on  or  about  somethinir. 
De  aiiqno  queri,  to  complain  of  somebody.  De  aliqud  re  ct rt 'tore m  fieri,  to  be  informed 
on  or  o/"somethinir  (literally  :  "to  Ik;  made  more  certain  (jf  or  on  a  thini,').  De  principd/u 
contendere,  to  strmricle,  to  contend  fur  the  hi<:hest  power.  De  pace  agere.  to  treat  for 
peace.  Dene  de  altquo  inereri,  to  desi-rve  wi'll  of  somebody.  De  aliqud  re  gaudtre,  do- 
We.Jiere,  to  be  y:lad  of  a  thini;,  to  be  sorry,  to  weep/or  a  thinir.  De  a/ic/K'd  re  de,y>erdre, 
to  desi)air  o/a  tliinjij.     De  ed  re  nihil  srlo.  I  do  not  know  auythin!::  about  it. 

lie-rinners  ou^dit  to  be  careful,  not  to  translate  {h•^  preposition  -  of"  denotinjj  the  sub- 
ject-matter of  a  verb,  by  the  Latin  genitice,  unless  the  verb  is  construed  witlx  a  genitive, 
(p.  \i2,  and  O;»,  §  484). 

Tiem.  55.  Idioms  with  ab,  de,  and  ex.  Aliquem  afronte,  a  tergo,  a  latere  aggredi,  to 
make  an  attack  on  somebody  in  front,  b>/  the  rear,  by  (on)  the  Hank.  .1  srripfo  diore,  to 
r^a^i  a  speech.  A  parte  aricu/u^t  es?!e,  {o'hii  on  somebody's  side.  Qu'id  faciam  de  ed  re„ 
what  shall  I  do  with  it?  De  tertid  cig'd'id,  during  the  third  night-watch.  De  viedid  nocte, 
about  midniLTht.  I/ac  de  caum,  qua  de  causd.  from  this,  which  reason.  De  induxtnd.  on 
purpose.  J)e  impnm.^o,  unexpectedlv.  De  infegro,  anew.  De  cetera,  de  rd'iqno,  for  the 
rest.  Victoria  de  Gallis.  a  victory  over  the  Gauls.  De  qua  re  ag'itur,  what  is  the  matter  * 
Ex  pugnd,  ex  jiericnlo  sypere--ise,  to  survive  a  battle  or  danger.  E  repul/lica.  for  the  best 
of  the  "republic.  Ex  quo  effic'itur  (with  an  infinitive  clause),  hence  it  follows  (may  be  in- 
ferred), that,  etc.  Ex  eo  quod,  from  the  fact,  that.  Ex  tem])ore  et  re,  accordimx  to  time 
and  circumstances.  Exxentent'id,  according  to  one's  own,  or  according  to  another's  wish. 
Hoc  pendet  ex  te,  that  depends  on  thee.  Ex  ed  cauxd,  ex  hoc  cauxd,  from  this  reason. 
Magna  ex  parte,  in  a  great  measure.  Maxima  ex  parte,  for  the  greatest  part.  Ex  capile 
(de/ifibug)  labordre,  to  have  liead-  (tooth-)  ache.  Ex  morbo  convalescere,  to  recover  from  a 
disease.    Ex  itinere  redlre,  to  return  from  a  journey. 

§  440.  Cum  is  almost  always  rendered  icith."^    It  denotes  1) 
CoNXECTiox  and  company  in  regard  to  place  and  to  internal 
relations,  as  :  cum  ai/neo  2rroficlsci,  to  travel  witli  a  friend  ;  cinn 
hostlbus  pugndre^  to  fight  with  the  enemy ;  meciun  loquitur^  lie 

»  From  these  Idioms  the  modern  expressions,  ex-conml,  ex-president,  ex-tnlnist^r,  etc., 
must  be  explained.  They  correspond  to  the  analogous  terms:  proconsul,  proprietor,  etc. 
(§448).  but  while  these  latter  have  classical  authority,  the  former  have  not.  It  is  even 
doubtful  wliether  tliev  were  technically  used  bv  any  Latin  author. 

3  But  with  not  always  by  cum.    For'the  distinction  from  aprni  see  Rem.  30. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


33 


speaks  with  me.  2)  Maxxer,  in  answer  to  the  question  -  hoio  9- 
and  AccoMPAXYixa  cincuMSTANCEs,  as :  3Iagna  cum  cderitate 
ad  exercitum  redut,  he  returned  to  the  army  with  great  quick- 

The  pro|,ositio„  cum  may  be  omitted,  and  the  mere  ablative 
may  be  used,  wl>en  it  denotes  mannep,  and  the  noun  is  accom- 
panied by  an  Adjective. 

aqnimtc  vesconLi^'^'^^      2  2  M     L  ^''^i.^M  "7fi     '^"™**  """'"'^ 
C,  1..  Tlie  stars  make  tlieir  revolutions  with  a  won'CfS  raiSv     \vi,  ' 

iliilSiiSisi 

^A^imZ^tS^^^^Z^:^'^  is  f trensthened  by  the  adverbs 

shu',!'V,ore",o,"'tlK.';Tv"th  t^"'  """  """  '"'''''  '"'"'*'•-.  ^''^"  I  >vas 
*»/»;««,  ■„  peace.    Van.  ati^uo  in  gratiam  r.cfi^to  fe'reSicS^to  so^Wr'  """ 

g  447.   Prm  (before)  implies  the  idea  of  CoxspictiousvEss 
in  LOCAL,  and  ot  ruEFEREXCE  in  internal  relations.    It  is  used 
only  in  certain  connections  :   ])  I„  phrases  with  p;-<^  se  (prcB  me 
^<',  etc.),  and  a  verb  of  motion,  as  :  prm  seferre,'  to  carry  some- 
thing so,  that  It  is  seen  (and  with  a  figurative  meaning:"  to  dis- 
pl'V/    to  make  a  sho^c);    2)   i.,  „,e  meaning  -in  ccnparison 
I  j",-  ^"'"^  '""^'^'  "'  «o-'iP-wson  with  us;=  .3)  in  the  mean- 
ing    for    ov- on  account  of r  ^,^ec\My  m  negative  sentences, 
expressing,  that  certain  acts  cannot  be  done  on  account  of  (,)rw\ 
something  hindering  them,  as :  Solem  prm  nndtitudine  iacull 
rumnon  videbitis.  You  will  not  see  the  sun  for  the  quantity  of 
our  darts.  ^  ^ 


«.mn  iS/rart;Tmauir";nrS^^^^^^^  "fl'mptui  esf.  Ores.  B.  G.  2,  30,  0„r 

bodies.  """tr  oi  conitmpt  to  the  Gauls,  in  comparison  to  the  size  of  their 


34 


PREPOSITIONS. 


7?^m  rs^  Pr,r  in  the  third  mranincr  1?  PomotimeP  used  in  a,fflrmative  ^on\enco^,  as: 
P^^fnm  ^hZ  pwS^UwnnihL  riaut.  Stich.  X  -2,  l.i.  The  tea.-,  come  rom  my  eiC8 
fo^  joy     The  prc^o^i^^       />rc«  in  this  counectiou  expresses  the  necessity  of  the  elTcct. 

S  418.  Pro  m  local  relations  is  confined  to  some  phrases, 
in  wliich  'it  is  translated  by  ''before^'  with  the  force  of  either 
ajnidovante  {a^:  pro  jifdlelb^fs  loqui,  instead  of  apml  judices 
loqui,  to  speak  before  the  judi^es)»  or  of  fmte,  when  it  depends 
on  verbs,  implying  a  local  relation,  as  cojnas  x>ro  castris  j^ro- 
ducere,  to  lead  the  troops  before  the  camp." 

In  INTERNAL  relations  ;>ro  is  translated   1)  by /or,  and  then 
denotes  :  a)   ix  defence  or,  as  :  pro  patria  pugnfire,  to  fight 
for  (in  defence)  of  one's  conntry ;'  b)  in  behalf  of.     Here  it  is 
either  expressly  or  impliedly  opposed  to  contra,  as:  Hoc  n on 
modo  71011  2)ro  me  sed  contra  me  est,  Cic.  Orat.  3,  20,  75,  This 
not  only  is  not  for  me,  but  against  me.  Zoca  sua  et  i/enus  jv^rfncB 
pro  hostefaere,  Liv.  39,  30,  His  position  and  manner  of  fighting 
were /or,  in  favor  of,  the  enemy  (;)ro  hoste  et  contra  nos) ;  c)  in 
PLACE  of,  instead  OF  (as  a  substitute  of),  either  in  regard  to 
Persons  (as:  Pro  coiisuh'  in  JIlsjKiniam  j^rofectus  est,  he  went 
for  the  Consul,  or  with  the  power  of  a  Consul,  to  Spain),  or 
inreo-ardto  Things  (exchange,  price),  as:  a  arum  pro  anjento 
mutuari,  to  exchange  gold  for  silver;  ;;^r,/;./V^;y^  i>ro  carmine 
dare,  to  give  money  for  (in  exchange  for,  as  the  price  ol)   a 

poem.  . 

Or  it  is  2)  translated  by  in  puoportion  to,  expressmg  1  ro- 
portion   in  number,  quantity,  or  degree,  as  :    Major  Ponianis 

1  ^^rh  nlira«c«  are  •  Pro  conridne  la/ui.  to  speak  before  an  a=^>^emhly  of  the  people  :  jvv^ 


rostriif. 


3  q 
s  1 


hn«  lyro  ade  «edere.  to  sit  before  a  temple  ;  pro  }K>rth,  pro  nviro,  pro  cima. 
'^'^"^^^Nonde^^s.io^.S^^^^^ 


( pvrf- 


"""f^o-  'Zol^^e"pn>  iSS"^,  for  or  with  the  power  of  a  pra-tor  or  qiurstor     From 
Sup  -  or-Ict?n/pres[dent- niii,^   he  rendered  by  the.e  forms  ijrw  pn^^de). 


PREPOSITIONS. 


quam,  pro  mmiero  jactura  fait,  Liv.  21,  54,  the  loss  of  the  Ro- 
mans was  greater  than  in  j.roportion  to  their  number.  Pro  mul 
titudine  liomimim  et  pro  gloria  belli  angustos  se  fin'ts  hahtre 
arbitrabantur,  Ctps.  B.  G.  1,  2,  they  believed  that  they  had  a 
small  extent  of  territory  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  "^inhabit- 
ants and  to  their  renown  in  war.  Pro  merito,  in  proportion  to 
one's  merit. ^ 

/**rj:.?^o7!*^o"^'V''^'  prepo?ition>r,  denoting  purpose,  is  rendered  by 
fiS^^r  :■  ^'  \"  ^^^:  '''h  "''  '^''  ^^^-  ^'*) '  Z^'"'  denoting  Time,  is  translated  by  in 
^  4ov)  ;/(./•  denoting  Causi:,  by  propter  ov  oh  (i^  433.  437);  and  sometime^ 
Dy  pr(R  (^  440.  ror  is  translated  by  pro,  when  it  denotes  :  "  in  defence 
IN  behalf,  or  IN  place  of."  For,  denoting  "  in  the  interest  of  "  is 
also  translated  by  the  Dative  case  {iianmn  cormmdi).  The  dative,  meaning 
Jor,  IS  distinguished  Irom  pro,  by  the  opposition  of  the  latter  to  contra. 
bee  p.  90,  K.  4<. 

Rem.  Gl  Pro  has  also  the  signifieation  "  r/.V  "  as  ifr  which  is  closely  re- 
lated to  the  meaning  -  in  place  of :'  as:  Britanni  talein  ferrets  pro  nummo 
ntuutxr,  the  iJntains  use  iron  rods  as  (for)  money.  C^es  B  G  5  12  Se 
pro  cimgerere,  to  act  as  a  citizen,  Cic.  Arch.  5,  11.  Comidium  'ttniore  per- 
territum  quod  noii  tuUsxet  pro  ri,so  renuntias^e,  that  Considins,  fi  i-ditened 
Jiad  reported  as  seen  (by  him)  what  he  had  not  seen,  Cas.  B.  G  1  22  Alie- 
nam  vicem  pro  nostra  dolere,  to  be  sorry  lor  the  mistbrtune  of  another  as  if 
It  were  our  own.     Cic.  Verr.  1,  44,  li;j.  ' 

Jitm,  C2.  t?ince  pijoportion  is  nothing  but  equalitv  of  ratios  the  prepo- 
sition 3)ro}s  enii)loyed  to  express  the  co,fonniti/ofuyo  situations,  when 
tlie  one  situation  either  is  made  necessarv,  or  authorized  bv  the  other     Pro 
IS  then  translated  by  "  in  conformity  with,"  ''  in  accordjlnce  with  "  "  ac- 
conimg  to,    as  :  Exercituni  pro  loco  et  copiis  instruit,  he  arran"-es  the  army 
according  m  (in  accordance  with)  the  locality  and  number  of  his  forces. 
Kill.  Cjit.  50,  I.     Earn  Pnitifcr  Ma.vlmus  pro  collefiii  sente?itid—ab,sti/ure 
jusHif,  Tue  High-priest,  in  conformity  with  (according  to)  the  sentence  of 
the  Court,  directed  her— to  abstain,  etc.  Liv.  4,  44,12. "  Vos  pro  med  summd 
in  retnpubUcain  dilifjentid  morao,  pro  anctoritdie  co/t.suldri  hortor,  vro  magni- 
iudirtejxricaliobttsfor,  etc.,  I  admonish  you  in  accordance  with'  my  great 
care  tor  the  republic,  I  exhort  you  in  accordance  with  my  consular  author- 
ity, I  adjure  you  m  accordance  with  the  importance  oV  the  danger,  that 
etc.,  Cic.  Mur.  40,  8(5.     Pro  in   the   meaning   "according   to"   is  hereby 
clearly  distinguished  from  "  according  to"  as  equivalent  of  ad,  e.c  and  sc 
cundum  (Hem.  58). 

§419.  The  prepositions  coram  (in  the  presence  of,  in  the 
face  of),  sijie  (witliout)  and  temfs  (as  lar  as,  up  to),  always  cor- 
respond to  tlie  mentioned  English  meanings,  as:  Pella  sine 
labdre  et  p>ericulo  conficere,  to  wage  wars  witliout  labor  and 


»  Froporttone.  or  pro  rata  means  :  in  proportion  to  one's  share.   Pro  mrte  virUi  means 
that  each  has  an  equal  share  (by  equal  shares).  ^ruimrie  iirui  means, 


36 


PEEPOSmONS. 


danger;  Coram  legationum  conventu,  in  presence  of  the  assem- 
bled embassies ;  coram  me^\w  my  face ;  Ostld  tenuSy  as  far  as  Ostia. 

Ob9.  Tenva  is  orisrinallv  llie  adverbial  accusative  ut  a  neuter  nonn,  =  ^ertertding  to' 
bciui?  construed  witTi  a  locative  case  (p.  47,  IL  Si;  -JIT,  8).  When  the  locative  case  Ivcamo 
obsolete,  the  jjeniiivc  orHl)lative  took  its  place.  Ij^o  'Corri/nr  (ein/s\  u]>  to  Corcyra,  in 
an  old  treaty  quoted  in  Liv.  2H.  •24.  The  genitive  is  chielly  confined  to  the  poets,  the  ab- 
lative heini,'  almost  exclusively  used  in  prose.  In  Liv.  44,  40,  the  vnlirata  'genu  tenm^ 
(knee-deepris  unquestionably  the  correct  readinj^,  instead  of  'gtnuK  Units'. 

Rem.  63.  Sine  and  extra  both  moan  "  without  ;'*  but  nine  is  opposed  to 
eitm,  and  extra  (outside)  is  opposed  to  intra.  Sine  very  frequently  occurs 
in  negative  sentences,  and  then  tiie  negation  stands  before  sine,  as :  He 
said,  that  he  had  not  left  his  home  without  irreat  hopes.  Dixit,  se  iwii  sine 
inngnn  x})e.  domuni  reH(/iiixv\  Ca^s.  B.  G.  1,  44.— Tiie  expressions  sine  nlla 
dubitatione  and  sine  dnhio  citlier  have  the  foix-e  of  rAtrriCLES  (referrinu:  to 
tlie  SPEAKER,  with  the  force  o^  eerfe,  proferfo,  %  401),  and  are  tlien  translated 
by  undoubtedli/,  without  (ani/)  doubt  ;  or  they  are  Oriects,  referrin.2^  to  tlie 
subject  of  the  i^overninjj:  verb,  and  have  then  the  meaning]:  "  without  hesi- 
tat/on,''^  as  :  Etenini  sine  duhio,judires,  in  har  caum  ea  res  in  disrrhnen  ad- 
dacitur,  Cic.  Verr,  2,  1,  2,  For  imdoubtedly,  O  judu^es,  this  matter  is  brou<;ht 
to  a  decision  in  tliis  trial.  Si  lUi  nunc  judices  essenf,  istum  sine  dubio  eon- 
demndrent,  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  73,  If  those  were  now  the  judges,  they  Avotdd 
undoubtedly  condemn  him.  lUnd  vero  sine  uUa  dubifatidne  maxiine  fundd- 
cit  imperitnn  nostrum,  C'ic.  Balb.  13,  31,  But  this  witliout  any  doubt  espe- 
cially founded  our  power. —  Quid  tani  temerarium  est,  quam  quod  non  satis 
cognituni  sit,  sine  vlla  dubitididne  drfendere  ?  What  is  so  rash,  as  to  defend 
without  any  iiesitation  wliat  is  not  sufllciently  known  ?  Cic.  Xat.  Deor. 
1, 1.  Afque  illi  omnes  sine  uUd  d'lbitatione .eondemnant.  And  all  those  con- 
demn him  witliout  any  hesitation,  Cic.  Clu.  28,  75. 

Bem.iyi.  The  Enirlish  preposition  iclf/iouf,  wheu  followed  by  a  verbal  nonn  in  t/?.7,  is 
translated  1)  either  by  .vi/i«  with  an  abstract  noun,  corre-^pondiiiir  to  tlu*  En-rlish  verb,  as: 
IJfsineofenxiouennimi  ejus  rd  ipse  statuaf.  etc..  That  he  would  either  decide  himself, 
without"  LTivini;  otfencc  to  (hurtins;)  his  feelinijs.  Cx».  B.  G.  1,19.  Ut  sine  maleficio  et 
injuria  transeanf,\\mt  they  would  pass  (the  country)  without  doinj;  any  mischief  and 
w'ron!?.  Ca^s.  B.  (J.  1,  '.».  Or  '2)  bv  nkcjativk  i'roi'ositions  and  ci.ArsKS  in  ditVerent  forms. 
The  most  usual  forms  are  the  followintr:  rt)  a  simple  chanire  of  the  sentence  into  a  ne'_'a- 
tive  proposition,  interchan^inir  the  predicate  and  the  object,  as  :  Cum  iftr  non  inftrmif- 
teret.  Civs.  B.  O.  1,  41,  pince  he  marched  without  stopping  (literally :  fince  he  did  not  stop 
the  march) ;  b)  a  negative  coordinate  proposition  with  iifque.  as:  (htum  ab  his  sa/rit/.'i 
qncereret.  neque  uUam  ommno  rem  expnmere  jjotsef,  Cies.  B.  (J.  1.  .T2,  When  he  asked  them 
oftener,  without  beini,'  able,  to  elicit  anythin<r  at  all.  Quihus  ))opuliis  /iomdnus  irjiweisset, 
nef/ne  in  prorinciam  redee/issef,  neque  stipendia  imj)Oyuisstf,  C;es.  B;  (i.  1.  4.5,  Whom  the 
Koman  people  had  foririven.  withotU  rediicins;  them  to  a  province,  and  without  layiiiLr  a 
tribute  on  tnt'in.  Quum  vviUos  m^ns'ts  castris  se  ac  paludibus  tenvissef.  neque  sui  j)otestrt- 
tem  fecisset,  Cies.  B.  (J.  1,  K).  When  he  had  kept  himself  for  many  months  within  his  camp 
and"the  marshes,  without  showinir  himself:'  c)  a  neirative  participial  clauses  (either  abso- 
lute, or  attributive),  as :  Nullum  partem  noctis  itinere  inftrntisso.  ("les.  B.  G.  1,  2f).  Without 
ptoppin"  his  march  during:  anv  part  of  the  ni<,'ht.  Quod,  niH  nt^'itus,  non  renerit.  Caes.  B. 
G.  1,  44,~That  he  had  not  come  without  beini,'  asked.  Xullo  militiam  deJrectante.  Liv.  7, 
11  without  any  one  refu!!>iui,'  to  serve.  Constat,  Namam  non  petf-n/em  in  regnuni  accVmn 
e^se.  Liv.  1,  :i3.  It  is  known,  that  Numa  was  elevated  to  the  throne  without  his  asking 
(for  it).— See  p.  188,  A'.  2:i»i,  Obs. 

To  express»  ''without"  with  a  verbal  noun  in  ing.  we  also  make  use  of  a  nesative 
clause  with  uf.  or  quin.    For  this  form  see  p.  517,  C.  D. 

llem.  05.  Some  consider  the  adverb  ptdani  (publicly,  openly)  as  a  prepo- 
sition, since  it  sometimes  (in  poetical  and  post-classical  language)  governs 
an  object  in  the  Ablative  case.  

^Sui  potestatemfacere  literally  means:  To  give  to  somebody  an  opportiiuity  {poteslatem) 
of  ouc'i?  self  (sui,  eec  §  281). 


ri^EPOSITIONS. 

S  4oO.  In  WITH  the  Accrsvrrvv      t> 
en.  both  cases  stand  in  .ocJ:::^::;;;^'^-  ''^'  «ov 
answer  to  the  question  '^,c/,ere?»  an  1  whh     I      \        "''"^'^  '" 
answer  to  tl.e  question  "«■/»V/..;.   "     n  •        f"^^^^^"^'^  i» 

for  LOCI,  relations  is  not  always'  ea,v  to         ,'"    ''  "'"'^'^  ''''' 
sard  to  ,.r.„..,  relations  on  ,2  p,,'''^' '""'""^ '"  '''- 
^v>>i^l.  tlie  special  meanings  of  t  e  P  I'nS   "'''     '  T °'''''"S  "" 
In  with  the  Accusative^  in  LolllTlT  ""'  """  '"''''''""''■ 
i'^^o  or  to.     It  is  opposed  to  ..  "vhile  ^i      "  ^'""""^  ^'^^'"^ 
hence  in  stands  toii„  the  sa'n,         ,2,^:^^^?'  f  ^*'  '''"'^ 
-neans  "  to  come  from  the  inZl.liT\        '^  '"  "^'     '^'  ^"^ 
with  the  Accusative  means  "0^0, ft,    ^         "'"  ''''"-"  ""  "' 
tl.i...',"  while  ad  mea^s     "to     "  /      '"  "'""'''"'  °^"  ^  P'^^^e  or 
t'-«'-  (see  Kem.  "HLl  nL  %  I  'V^'f  °!"  »  ^'^  - 
paniam  profichci,  to  ^o  to  fintot  t'h?  '  ^'\P'''""<='^"h  in  His- 
in  caMra  .cure,  ^o  co^e   o       to     1  e  P'"""^"'/"  ('"'»)  SP'-"  ; 
^mnere,  to  send  somebod;^ti  S^'tL  Z'  ""''''''"'  ''^  '-''"' 

^;ven„.  ,«  the  ^^u.stion'^,^^^^y^;^-  <o  the  Eu^lish  ^  a™ 
.    tlie  qiu-stioii  •'  <chitherf'\  aud  i,  i,m  „,,^1      .    ^  "'"  Accusative  answers  to 
as  are  c.,„sln,ea  with  ,Ue   l^e  k,       ."^  "I^/r'" '''Jcf^'"''  '■'''''  "^  -^"™^ 
expressly  opposed     Thus  we  ^y    Tu^tfTi-^^^^  "'  "'''''^'^  "  "'•"-*"  i" 
to  (int..)  Iialy,  because  we  Lk^"WMt      {"^f*^.'" '"'^*''' Scipi"  returned 
mtis.  say  ^Uaruu.  ,,,  j^i^,  '^««.^'  "  "satu  .f  r ''"■  f /"?'•"  •  ^^^^^ 
11  Italy,  because  we  ask  "  Wliere  rli,!  4. »,;,'.  *'""".?  said  to  liave  rei.'ned 
of ",'hc  ^■'"■«""•^''»  '■"  /'*'•"/ S«     '  ^ {^}^'     Thus  :  Ccesar  c^ 
01  the  buessones  to  (into^  t  lu.ii-  ax:.,,    '^^t-^^r  tea  Jus  army  from  the  country 

{Horn  Italy)  ,0  (i„,„)  Africa.  '     ^  *"'"l'asiniaus  recalled  Hannibal 

-;lKi:\ve;acS;^"o";;if  Z?eS'sTon?;"'''  '"  '>°"  "-  Accusative 
s  (lor»  these  verbs,  as  verbs  of  «nT,7,4^  ri     .,  '•    ^'"^  ^atm   an^uan-e  cou- 

?-:<-fm«^,T|^eUallL    ad  lit d v  anS">''';?  ''^^^''^^ 
<"i<l  ad  tri  bOnai  K„  Jif*  '*'?  "«'  '"  the  forum  ai  uVmfini   ^""^"J"-  ^'■'^f'  t>ut  to  m 


rnErosiTioMS. 


38 

ns-irmbUHl  in  one  place.  P'C.  1  mi    n,  u.  ^^     lianue  nbiUdil  «e 

re^to  collect  tlf  vrniy  m  o,^  Wace.  C^- «-^^-j-^f  „i„,sc{r)  in  .l.e  in- 

^^1T^^  "'X=  S  S"'  .0 -ive  — oay  m  a  Uouse. 
^i^iV^  ^S:..in  ,.epo.«on  ^  w«  acn..Uve  m^Sa|?j!;;| 

with  the  accnsative  by  on,  as :  -('» '''  "  ^  ''  „,^.  „,ounlain).  P."-''"'  ''"'"■ 
U  e  momitain  («rf  montem,  «■•  «-^,,  f"'      'Uo  l\ ust  a-J,  Cart  one-hair  on  the 

corntioUl.  Slercm  '^«'"'"'""'""v'  •  !f,,  •  Inn"  eitlier  on  the  nieailows  or 
ZnX  3«,  We  ou,ht  «o  «1--^,  1'  =  ^'^^.^^.Tiv-e  is  nse.l.  when  tkusons 
on  (over)  the  ganleu.-  2)  -'"J^"  ,',^i„|,,„^.  a  place  in  their  midst.  Hcic 
ni-,.  the  aim  of  Hie  motion,  so  as  to  dcsi  n.iR  .   1  conjieere, 

Zo  u  0   1  "preposition  among  (in  tl".';'''»'  ^;\\>i,t;  ^cc.   ative  is  employetl 
^>  throw  darts  amon;4  the  enemy.     o)Li  "'<    '^'^  '.^.^j  j,  „„.„  translated 
o  designate  a  hostile  direction  ?« ''f 'J 'ft", nal^e  an  attack  against  or 
Z'ZoraffaM,^^:  /'«/«'«« V'  rfrom^-im  1>V  ""•  opposition  of  the 
o  >  the  e,u4y.     It  is  'l.sutvirmsl.e  ^^     ;  ,,„in.,"  wotiUl  be  poor  La- 

latter  preposition  to  pro.     1  '>"^    "'      " ,  „  ^.^,.1,^  denoting  "  attaclimg,    as 
tin itv     'I'l'c  same  is  the  case  "'"' ^  l'^."'''"  u,e  „„  preposition  at  all  to  ex- 
1";':^.,.,  pr..n,ere,  »'^'"« 'S'^r'Tht   H  for  nstance  tile  el.se  with  .srW.-  .« 
press  m  witli  the  '''=«»^j'"  f-ulci  tl  e  N<.nli ;  and  with  verbs  o    a^cej,i>- 
as :  in  septentru>nem  H)>eclut,  "''if  ^^V  „,„r»«  a-cfmlere,  to  m.nmt  a  lioise 
CO  and  MOUNTING,  as:  »«^?  '«-'";«»'•  ;'  ^^„,,,„d  by  profi,.^,a  with  m 
to  scale  a  wall.    5)  To  '^P^^'^J  J^i^  to  depart  lor  Italy 
with  the  accusative,  as -.  «'\f '.'''''  '/,'f^,  ,  oc\i.  itKL.vnoNs.-/«  w   U  the 
;to«   6i)   Distinction  ot  «'' ?''^  "'f  ",';,, :;'d  of  a  motiim  to  a  Place, 
A^cnsativ;  is  the  prop.;r  1-''1--;,';';;;,!1^:3S  a  m<)tU,n  to  a  Peuson  »   Tlrus 
while  ad  is  the  proper  Preposition  t» J-M   *-*•  coUNTUY,  as  -.  m  (not  ad) 

we  use  in,  not  ad,  to  ^If^;:';"^!^:"^  to  places  other  than  com>!';;;s. 

^::!^^^::::::^^^^^^^ 

p.aceorthing,.vh^^^^^ 

f„!,^Sl?S^^tl^."'tn£  ...   ;„,,^.,^  ,^  ,..„,„,,  ,,  ,<,;,„«  in  or  on,  as :  ,««.^.  ^» 
3  The  Hrepesitu.u  t/i  n  oc^^^^^^^^^  ^^.^r^. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


39 


a^^V,  Caesar  led  six  legions  to  the  town  of  Gemovia  Cas  R  r   -  o.  /, 

come  as  soon  as  po.ssible  to  town  •  and  nrl  F-inf  \r  o  ?>  ^     •}  ^  should 
ad  ..beni,  ,.„  dL,, ....  I  .^  .^^  :s^o^ras1'c'a.n'e  tf ^o^^ dtl^ ^ 

.;..?o;^.c1!'c^v-^^\:L^'=?  :^-  ST'.'  Se  '^rf jr  sf  'V^'"''-^^ 

§451     The  figurative  relations,  which  are  e.vpressed  by  m 
with  the  Accusative  arc :  1)  that  of  at,  iuternal  movement  from 
one  pon.t  or  relation  to   (into)   anothe,-    as :   alfquem  in  mem 
opuuOnem,  metum,  etc.  inducer,  to  lead  somebody  into  (to)  a 
hope,  oi.inion,  fear,  etc. ;  aliquem  in  calamitatem  trahere    to 
draw  somebody  into  a  misfortune  ;  in  morbum,  furOrem  etc.,  in- 
culere,  to  fall  into  a  disease,  into  f.try,  etc.  ;  arnicitlam  in  odium 
convertere,  to  change  (turn)  friendship  i„to  hatred.     2)  That  of 
ruurosE,  generally  expressed  by  the  preposition /or,  as:  sum,> 
tus  in  rem  miUtamn  facere,  to  lay  out  (spend)  money  for  mili- 
ta>y  purposes.     3)  That  of  a  direction  of  the  mind  or  feelin<r 
towanl  or  against  somebody,   as  :  Benevokntia  in  aliquem,  I 
good  disposition  toward  somebody ;  inimicitim  in  aliquem  en- 
mity against  somebody  ;  omtio  in  Pisonem,  the  oration  a-ainst 
Piso.  ^ 

nsftl.  in  order  to  expre"rthJ  En-l?<r/>r/o  o^^  '^^  ^'^^  "'"'^  '^*"^^  ^"  «'«''^y*  i« 

iuto  hatred  ;  in  jx^fesfa/.ma/ic'O^^^^^^^  t  ,  r.S  i  ftA%     '  '"  '^'""J'  ''^"''''^  ^^  ^^"  (come) 

jmflx  dindere,  to  divide  son  ethi  U  i  tc)  nnrf^  )/l^  }^  ^"'-  ''•'  "^  rni^''>ody  :  aliquid  in 
is  changed  from  true  into  foKe  K/Cffi^  ^.J/^^fr..^  '"^'''*  '''-^"^u '  ^<>^/*//^^^a«/«r,  this 
do-:  lifyrmninUinnxtmcomtHerf^^^^  conrert.re  to  change  Hecuba  into  a 

w/,/<=;7-^.3  to  confer  ^  Ko^ml^iLtu^^^^^^^  h^^''\'  i'npeHum  ia  aliquem 

tribute  on  a  man  «-""^^anu  o/i  Pomebodj  ;  ^/^i^w^wm  m  hominem  imponere,  to  lay  a 


laws  thev  were  compelled   to  i^av  o  tswl     th.     L'^l'-n"/!'*'"  •"'  "^  triumph.  becau.-e  by  the 


|>etore  Verson«  "'^^j^;;;//,;;' K,\n-.  2.  U).    But  '  /<J 


..•l?ir.:«ssr,;ur.Vuw«eo« 


cpre?s  onr: 
amOrem  in 


40 


TREPOSITIONS. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


41 


But  relations  of  this  kind  nrc  very  frequently  expressed  hytho  En^lis^ 
»'  //)  "     lliio  we  u>*e  1)  in  (with  the  acciifative).  when  tlie  end  of  the  nu.iu)n  i>  (i)nni>t.u 
fi/a  «IT    ATioN  or  a  STATE  IV  w  the  subject  of  tlie  m.»tiou  is  represented  to  dwell,  as 

?n  u  PLACE     ^)  We  u'c«^/  wlu'     the  end  of  the  motion  is  conceived  a.  a  mere  point, 
ACTION    oVtop..    o"wh"n  t  lU  idei  of  the  moti.,n  i.  conceived  as  merely  ^•«"'^"^f  ^^jj  ; . 

F  'm-a  h?  n  o  icms  of  this  kind  generally  are  expressed  hy  the  .amc  v^^J  ^;  »>  ]]}^''^ 
real  mm  ions  are  indicated,  as:  venire,  7-edlre,rever(i,  duccre  {adUucere,  induce?.,  mrdu- 
cere),  trahtre,  agert  {rtd'vjere),  restituere,  reai^cre,  as: 

Venio  nunc  ad  forlifsimvm  rinim.  etc. 


Venire  in  calami fafem  (Cic.  Rose.  Am.  1 ., 
40).  to  c(nne  to  liarm  (into  a  disaster).— 1 1'- 
iiU^  mihi  in  fuenhm,  it  comes  to  (iuto)  my 
mind,  it  enters  my  mind.— iVo/i  hoc  in  dis- 
qui.4(idntm  ve/iit,  this  is  not  the  point  in 
question.  Liv.  30.  31. 

Jeedlre  in  prist inum  station,  to  return  to 
(into)  the  former  state;  in  ditiunem,  to 
obedience  (literally  "to  pnbjectioir') ;  m 
gratiam  cum  aliquo  red'a'e),-  to  he  recon- 
ciled with  somebody  (literally:  to  return 
into  <:race  w  itu  somebody  ;  as  if  grace  was 

a  PLACK). 

Adduc^re  aHqi(em  in  ?nefum,  (Cic.  Mur. 
24),  to  brinsr  somebody  into  a  state  of  fear, 
to  make  s(mie  one  afriiid ;  aliquetn  in  snevi, 
in  opinidnem  adducere,  to  lead  somebody 
to  (into)  a  hope,  to  an  opinion  (to  make 
Bomehody  hope,  believe).* 

Trahere  aliqotm  in  opinidnem.  to  draw 
pomebodv  to  (into)  an  opini(m ;  trahere  in 
aliam  jmrfem,  to  draw  somebody  to  an- 
other measure. 

Eedigere  uEduos  in  senitntem,  to  reduce 
the  .^<:dui  to  slavery  (to  bring  them  back 
into  slaverv) ;  restituere  aliquem  in  anti- 
quum locum  qratiiz  (Cits.  B.  CI.  1.  IS),  to 
restore  somebody  to  his  old  place  ol  mtlu- 
ence  ;  aliquid  in'inteqrum  redituere,  to  re- 
etore  somethiu-,'  to  its  former  state. 


(Nep.  Dat.  1,  1),  f  now  come  (in  my  dis- 
course) to  the  bravest  man,  etc.  \  enio  nunc 
ad  roluptritts  aqricoldrum,  I  come  now  (in 
disconrse)  to  the  pleasures  of  the  rural 
population.    Cic.  Sen.  15,  51. 

Jitdxre  or  rererti  ad  mores  suos,  to  return 
to  one'e  habits  (as  if  to  one's  friends) ;  ad 
se  to  (me's  self  (that  is:  to  onei*  proper 
state  of  mind);  ad  sanitiltem.^  to  reason; 
ad  proj)Ositum,  to  the  purpose ;  ad  ;e/^<,  to 
recur  to  the  subject. 

Adducere  aliquem  ad  jfletum  (Cic.  Brut. 
93)  to  brinj?  somebody  to  a  weepinj;,  to 
make  him  weep  (to  an  ,a(Tion);  aliquem 
ad  fannus  adducere,  to  lead  some  one  to 
(into)  a  crime  (an  action). 

Trahfrc  aliquem  ad  defecfionem,  to  draw 
somebody  to  ;i  fallinj:  otV  (into  secession)— 
anacticm,  not  a  state;  ad  mortem  trahere, 
to  draw  to  death  (make  that  some  one 
sutlers  death). 

lltdiqtre  discipTinam  ad  pnscos  mores, 
Liv.  8,«),  to  restore  discipline  to  the  loriner 
habits  •*  redigere  rem  ad  ])?istinam  Ixut 
rationem,  Ca>s.  B.  C.  1,70,  to  reduce  (re- 
store) everythinir  to  the  former  method  or 
the  war;  omnia  ad prnc>-pta  et  artem  rero- 
care,  to  reduce  ever)  thing  to  art  and  to  rules. 


TMnnv  vcrh«  which  in  fi-nrative  relations  are  constnicd  with  the  preposition  in  and 


1,  311.  the  «realest  torture  wi  1  '^^»'' •';•,; '''''^,^J,,^'^^,'„,;"hein.n'l.^e,l  literally,  a» :  i» 

U.-3  Ad  \<•'f•Z^Zf^,l\7Y^^W^^^U■.  raSou.'  1,1  Sni^lZ  «mild  refer  to  e..u„d 
r,a«.i.  as  a  per  Hoal  s  ale.       (  ;™  '^JJ^',       |,ere  oi.  the  preposition  oifr,  wl.iel.  is  ini- 


hifidem,  incivitatem  rf«>rf.  to  admit  somebody  to  friendship,  lo  allegiance  (allianco> 

,•-)).!>  !lL\^'?^f  T""  ^^'\\y^'^^''^^  the  idea  of  motion  i.^  conceived  as  cotitemplated,  and  when  it 
IS  lelt  doubtltil,  whether  the  end  of  the  motion  is  readied  or  not.  Ilele  l)elon-  the  verbs 
of  I)ksi<;natin(;.  kxhoktino,  i.nvitinc;,  kxciting,  as  desiqnare,  destinareTr^tariei'ci- 

citi/ens  to  slaughter;  ad  diligentiam  hortCiH,'^  to  exhort  to  diligimce  •  ad  litiFi^amea^i 
ture,   (.  arouse  to  joy ;  ad  beUum  incitare,  to  incite  to  a  war ;  Zd  ira)iUacSiTio  nr.l 

lo  call  to  arms,  to  stud>  ,  but :  m  inndiam,  in  luc  urn,  in  duhium  tocare  to  bnnn  to  nntn 
envy  to  inourn.ng ;  to  call  something  into  doubt  (that  is  :  to  make^t  dou^MfuT) 

A^//^   ,1.    ihe  \\<ii  of  in,  to  denote  purpose,  was  very  limited  in  clas«ir-il  lino-no.rA 
flautus  and  Cicero  use  in  in  this  sense  only  of  nn.ney Lid  other  thin-i^^oUn^ 
employed    or  some  stated  occasion,  as:  Aliquid  in  nupfia,  (/«;/(PlauT.  Aul   2  rS)   to 

u\.  n  '  ■  •  '  •'"'•j.l:^' V)"  contribute  money  for  a  statue  (to  erect  it).  Thus  Liw  1 
;e;n,;i/"  iT/f/'*  «^'.^''«/.^^^^'f '*  ^^^'P^i  seponere,  to  deposit  money  for  the  buildin-  Yf  a 
temple."  J  he  Ireer  use  ol  m,  to  express  purime,  begins  with  Livy  and  the  t>oets  of  he 
Augustan  age  Thus  Livv  says  (•.>!,  4->.  2) :  Ouem  fortuna  in  id  lertaVeTlelerd  horn 
..riune  would  choose  for  tfiis  combat :  aliquid  in  gr-atiam  alicuJusfZereiS  21^4  •  3,5  ->  g? 
to  do  ;^(>nie  hmg  111  somebody-s  favor  (for  showing  favor  to  some  one)  •  tol  in  %'imAd 
dare  m,  24,  7),  t.,  pk-dge  one's  word  for  somethiHg.     Later  wrtersu^  in  in  thls^cMle 

m  "honor  m^  7'^  ^lifSi""  liT'^  "•'",  ^  ^^'"'^'^  '^  ^  i^^^^z:::^!!:^::"^^ 

punSent.  ^'   '      '  "'''^^''' J "^^t una  pared  m  lioenam.  Fortune  spares  many  for  their 

Jlern  72.  In  in  the  third  signification  takes  the  place  of  adversus,  erqa  and  contra     It 

ir    10  t.'l')'r'?fr'?""'  '^:  "'^"^  of  feelings  and  actions  whose  natVirMwKior  iS 

or  Jio^tiK-    IS  left  uiu^trtain,  as:   CariMn  in  aliquem  scriptum  (Cic    Orat    2   8(i   -^52)    -i 

poem    written  t/y>o/,^  somebody.'    Thus  it  is  used  of  i.isPosiTioi  in  'eneral    ks  •  ]/^ 

(!/n,?!n  T  'T  '^'^'"'  ^^'^'-  ^'^™-  -  ^'  fi"-^'  ^'«"  "1"'*^  l^e  of  tha?di  ositLT  owani  uf 
Hn..vT'^T  ^'"'''  """"?.  ''t  2^V^'l^'f'^  liomauum  riderentur  (Ca^s.  B.  (i.  1  «  Becau-fe 
Jv,  ^/  I  '^  ^^:^'"^J■^*t  J^^'ll  disposed  toward  the  Roman  people.  In  such  relations  a^^ 
■versus  (Kt-m.  K.j  migiit  have  been  used  ;  but  in  is  bv  tar  more  freauent  /li  is  a  Si  n^.^l 
t''}yJl  ".IJ'^-'i^lyor  hostile  sense,  as  synonym  of  .r^a  (.r.o/Xiiut.^^a  Serai Iv 

s  used  of  feelings  and  emotions  toward  peksons.  while  in  is  used  of  all  possffi  re  a 
T-\!^)::n'?J''n"T'''  'T'  ny,.y>^/Wiea,n  (Cic.  Orat.  38.  133),  the  mefits/K^The  reput 
lit     l)ut  tua  erga  me  merita  (Cic.  Fam.  1,  l).    In  regard  to  inimical  relHtinnc    in  m,  ♦ 

..r  J  /"''"^k"  f'P".''"^'"'  ^"ot  contra),  envy  against  a  man.    Jn  also  must  be  u'ed  i'li  u  ace 

Ke'Sn  "ou"?^-  ;i;^)''SnnK'^!  V'  ''''■    '''T-  ''1'''^ '''  ^"«^  contra  S!S^^!,{1£;^ 
oc  unions  ^o/  {pio)  somebody;  injuria  ami  imjnetas  in  (uoi  contra)   because  there  can 

bo.     ■  h'l'S','''  ;!"l»'^'^y/r  ^"^^  ^""H-body.    SaAre  in  a/^.yV«/^  to  be  cruel  against  S 
bod>     because  there  can  be  no  cruelty/w  somebody.    But :  armis  contendere  contra    or 
tn);  h,;caii<e  ^ye  may  n<rhtj?ro  aliquo  ;conJurme  contra  (or  in)  aliqiZi  Un'l  q^^^^ 
(CIC.  lirut.  4«,  IM),  or  in.    But  the  latter  is  more  usual  u*c</uc//t 

worrf^inl/.llfin''^""]?'-  ?.^'  «■''„'^everal  phrases  must  be  exolained,  with  which  a  goveniin- 
di  vcic      mv^^'^^  iinderstood,  as:  hunc  in  modum,  in  this  mannei-  (that  is" 

diitcted  toward  this  manner) ;  in  hanc partem,  in  this  direction  •  in  hanc  'ient^'nfinm   Vp 
gard.ngthis  opinion,  in  conformity  with  this'view;  ?nii^m7n\noS 
manner ;  in  utramque  partem  dispulare,  to  speak  for  ind  against  an  opiidon  (whit  we  ca 
pro  and  con)  •  magnam  inpartetn  (the  same  Ls  magna  ex  jTarte),  S^^llTum^lmlo 


1  In  deditidnem  recipere  is  a  military  phrase,  denoting  an  agreement  bv  which  to  thn«P 
V^aSmlnfl^'^:'^''  '"  ^  conqlieror,  life  and  ribertv^vL  sccu?il^^'  //o?/J'eMn 
n'^i^c  ndiierf:  oV"!'^^  o  persuade  so  to  friendship,  that  a  treaty  of  friendship 
Att  2  1«  'y.    '  V  «mi   U;    ?'  ■''I'' ''''''  f"«I'dshi,).-8  M  ae.,cire  in  le^afidnem  invlfor  '  (Cic 


amleitood,  aa :  Luiius  .■ie,„l„o,uam  d„xiU  Lucius  married  Senipronia. 


>«.*.„;.;<, she  married }■;;;•  na-mmmlofh^ 
=S^oVno'ifeSi^;./^et^i:  ^^r^^^^^^^ 


42 


rRErOSITIONS. 


.  ,r-^    In  relations  of  T.ME,  in  with  the  accusative  .s  used 
.,1:  u.:umc  is  concoivea  as  conton.pUUoa  ("/-•  a  umcs"      to 
r     mc)"  as:  I-<^^'tias  in  tnyhaa  anno.  in,petrav.n.nt,  they 

^b  "    c'l  an  a,n,istice  for  thirty  years,  Liv.  9,  37,  Vl ;  m  o, 
oui.inim  **  ,^.      ,^         -    1'    i\.    -in  'i^n^tei'iiui  (Item  ais- 

tenqms,  for  all  time  (C.c.  I'a.n.  o,  la,    ) ,   '''t'?^''"'       .  „,,.,„„ 
««//'  he  postponed  it  to  the  next  day  (Cic.  Dejot.  7   -1) ,  «^     "« 

;    '   ^<L.  iecar,U.r,  an  in  aVuul  ten>pns  reservar^^,  whether 
li  shonld  be  killed  immediately  by  fire,  or  should  be  .esuvcd 

1    another  time  (Ca,s.  B.  G.  153) ;  in  reliquwn  tcnpns  {m  fu- 
£v»nrfo'-tl>ei"t>.ve;   in  perpetuun.,fo...or,   in  pr.sens,  lor 

the  present.  .  „,  qvoHdif.  Sco 

B J^  73   Idioms.-//,  *>,«  or  i„  fixg^Jof  dif».  '?>'>;,  "°  ?'  ^^:„w  "  nivc' '«"y  ;  i«  «"*■ 

^  ii,"  m   Lr„i/;rfi««,  c-.c.)  ;;j  «r"  (  ;«  \;^f-     ,S;  i«  «S.  l..  ...m  lone  alter  the 

s'.ir,^.  /-.  ^VT..  T,n.:  A.>..A-nvE.-//.  with  tl>e  Am,.vTivK  de- 
notes    )  the  1'...CK,  or  the  internal  State  or  CoNurnoN,  .«  o. 
r;:;hii  something  is,  or  ..  or  on  .vhieh  some  -U.-.     .,.-  • 
It  answers  to  the  qtiestion  ".<•/-.«/"    ^)  the   ^  f ^-  J"  ^,"; 
.on.ething  happens,  atiswering  to  the   qttesfon      ,r/.en  ?     but 
only  in  certain  connections  (see  l^Mn.  /9).  ,     ,  ,    ,^  :„ 

\,.  castr,  cse.  to  be  in  camp;  -  ^«^ '?Vo\S'an TV  o,-? '  ^  J" 

eo«wc(«r«  p»«-(«//i  esse,  to  rest  -»»  conjecUire.  i,n„,n,rc 

Z.  74.  The  ,.0CAt,  and  -:-^^^:^Z':^:^^'i^"'^^^^ 

expresses  by  tUc  P■■^1'»*''|"'^V:;.f:;^c'o^;^   in  "ate  always  «pressed  by  ia 

Actions  that  happen  oh  the  «»' '•>  ,?,.f ,  •'':'' "^  a  h.)rse ;  "<•.«?«  in  yidAppid 

Willi  the  Ablative,  as:  »  ''f '" '^t  {nnia.i  Id      So  neli.iies  «e  use  tl.e 

fueUi    a  murder,  coinniitted  oh  the  Appian    oau    ^  ,       ^e  trans- 

/.reposition  at,  to  cU'si^nale  aeUoi.  ^;^PS'«^,  il'.hiif^  «^sclt.l,  .^-v,../  /« 
late '(n.y//twiU  the  ablaut,   as.       it.uu  =  p,-,.|,„sition  <-«<•,  to 

express  the  same  relation    as :  P«  •«,  '(     '^    ^{  'JJ.\^,^  /lellespont.     Often 
i^Si^l^rSand^rlM-i-^^o^ 

«»f.  a.,cl  i.  especially  "'"»'':"^;  /  .'  .^,* '<,?"  V;"^J  ■  ,te-.  c»,»).     H  .lT"l>''ly  ">«•"•  '  'f 

S/iri;^^it^trlMvK'anuea"i'^r.^.''plucc.  ^  u  .....ate.  .y  o;--io. 

at/.    Sue  liem.  lU. 


rr.EPosiTioNs. 


43 


actions,  liapponin.?  at  a  place,  where  something  else  happens  at  the  same 
tmie.  In  order  to  designate  siicli  relations,  the  Latin  languac;:e  generally 
employs  the  preposition  i/i  with  the  ablative  (more  frequently  than  inter 
or  per),  while  we  more  frequently  use  the  preposition  ''during;'  as:  i/i  eo 
convicio,  during  this  repast;  i/i  hoc  pralio,  in  (during)  this  battle;  in  ludis, 
during  the  games;  in  cvUoquio,  during  the  eonference. 

In  internal  relations  the  Latin  language  otten  makes  use  of  the  same 


But  often  the  metaphors  are  different,  as:  in  ocidi.-<,  before  one's  eyes;  posi- 
tuni  esae  in  aliqud  re,  to  rest,  to  be  based,  to  depend  on  something.*  The 
Latin  language  often  expresses  by  in  with  the  ablative,  what  we  sometimes 
express  by  clauses,  and  sometimes  by  adverbial  expressions  which  have 
the  force  of  a  clause,  as:  Dignitatem  nostrani,  ut potest  in  tuntd  fwminuni 
perfdid  et  iniq/n'tdte  retinehimus,  Cic.  Fam.  1,  2,  We  shall  maintain  our 
dignity  [as  well]  as  it  is  possible,  when  men  are  so  pertidious  and  unfair 
(in  the  midst  of  sucli  a  perlidy,  etc).  In  ejusmodi  reruni  perturhatwne  omnia 
metuenda  sunt,  Cic.  Fam.  1,5,  Everything  is  to  be  feared,  while  mattei-s  are 
thus  contused  (in  the  midst  of  such  a  confusion).  Quod  in  tanto  imperio 
populi  Jiomdni  turpixsimum  arhitrabdtur,  Ca^s.  B.  G.  1,  83,  which  he  thouglit 
to  be  most  disgraceful,  the  power  of  the  Komaii  people  being  so  great. 
In  vanis  voluntatihus  regndri  tamen  omnes  volebant,  Liv.  1,  17,  '6,  Althouuh 
the  opinions  were  different  {tcith  all  their  ditfereuce  in  opinion),  they  \x^t 
wished,  that  there  should  be  a  king. 
lUiu.  To.  The  preposition  in  with  the  Ablative  is  used  with  reference  to 


chfliculty  {Jdcik)  that  he  {qucm)  was  «//^6»/?^  {in)  the  highest.  Thales,  qui 
sapientissimus  in  scptem  fuit,  Cic.  Leg.  2,  11,20,  Thales,  who  was  an  ex- 
tremely wise  man  among  the  seven."-*  In  quibus  {Itgdtis)  fuit  M.  Scauru9, 
ball.  Jug.  25,  4,  among  whom  was  ISl.  Scaurus.  Cecidtre  in  pngnd  duo 
mUlia  sept'ingerdi  ciciuni,  in  his  qwituor  Ilonidni  centuridnes,  Liv.  27, 12,  Two 
thousand  seven  hundred  citizens  fell  in  the  battle,  among  these  four  Roman 
centurions.  In  his  {fuit)  Antigonus,  Nep.  Keg.  3,  among  these  Autigonus. 
llie  same  relation  fretpientlv  is  exi)ressed  by  ''in  nuniero;'  as:  in  hoc  nu- 
mero  MiUiadesfait,  Nep.  :Mi]t.  3,  among  these  was  Miltiades. 

Item.  70.  The  i^atin  authors  frequently  use  the  name  of  a  nation  or 
INHABITANTS  of  a  district,  in  place  of  the  name  of  the  countuy  or  dis- 
trict, which  they  inhabit.    When  names  of  nations  are  used  in  this  sense 


local  i^repositions,  and  especially  in,  are  frequently  connected  with  them.' 
VVe  supply  thwi  in  English  the  words  "  countru  of  or  "district  otV'  as: 

)n  in  the  country  oi  the 
never  in  G  reads ,  nor  in 


y^.  avii,^,iy  iiimi  111  j!,ngiisn  me  words  "  country  of ' 

JJuni  hoicin  Volscis  geruntur,  while  this  was  going  on  in  the  country  of  the 

Volsci.     'y\ins,:  in  tsiblnis^in  ^iJquis^in  Fersis{h\xiini\       - 


'riVi..  .."^  111  V*^"'"  "'^  •""  iiiciiu  lo  uuciare,  inai  i  uaie^^  was  the  wlfe^t  of  ilie  t>cven. 
milk  n,nn  i  mV.*"  ■*""  -jx^>eptem:^  He  only  lueaut  to  .-ay,  that  TIuUl-h  obtained  a  hi-h 
rauk  nmoij<,'  the  bcven,  tliat  he  was  one  of  the  wit^ec^t. 


44 


niEPOSITIONS. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


45 


Jiomanl^,  in  the  conntry  or  district  of  the  Sabini,  ^^^m,  PcrsiaTis      In  a 
siniihir  Avav  CMccro  (Le-.  C,  18,40)  sa^'S  m  patnba.  'fl'';]!}fj  l'"^^^^^^ 
Cffisar  (15.  (J.  I,  01):  Cctsaria  in  barbans  iwmeii  erat  obscunus,  CJCbdi  s  uamc 
was'lcss  known  among  the  barlnirians.»      ^  nhl-itive 

i^e^/i  77   The  preposition  //i  tVequently  is  omittoa,  and  tlic  mcie  aDiative 
casf^ed  in  order  to  denote  relations,  whieh  otherwise  ^re  ^j-M^J^^^'^^jy 
in  witli  tlie  ablative.     The  connections,  wliere  such  omission  is  admi^siblL 
r  ;lnd>le,  must  be  learned  by  practice.     Thus  ^' terra  ma ngue    (i.yjr 
on  sea  and    and)  in  coordination,  is  used  ^vltllout  preposition  ;  but,  w  hen 
used  sii^ly,  the  same  nouns  generally  take  the  l»eposUH>u  ^l^-^^^-^^ 
mari).     Horace  savs:  Ibani  forte  via  Sacra  (I  once  walked  on    ^^^  ^'^^^al 
road)  but  Cicero :  ^in  Appid  rid,  and  Livy :  t^ia  Lancana.    Cajsar  (15.  tr.  /, 
Orsays     Sm  opporliuiis  lorn  erant  posita  (the  camp  TN-as  placed  on  a 
QvU-able  ground),  but  B.  C.  1,  43:  Acie  in  locis  idonMS  ^'^-^tructai^^' '^\l 
t,attle-nne^md  been  tbrmed  on  suitable  spots)      ^^f^^^"^'^ 
Sicilid  and  iota  in  Sic  did ;  totd  in  Graaa  and  tota  A,;cm     But  it  has  i)cea 
re^u  kid,  that  '^  on  the  whole  earth"  and  ''  on  the  whole  sl^'   ^J^^e  jihvay 
expressed  without  a  preposition   {tota  terra,  toto  cuih).     Ihus  Cicero  has 
h^hXp'^'^-  i^'^ro  and  prinio  libro  (in  the  tirst  book),  and  so  in  mnunK"^ 
able  cast^      ^Vhere  the  preposition  is  left  out,  it  generally  is  done   n  cases 
wl  en  the'noun  is  connected  with  an  atlribute  adjective,  or  when    he  rela- 
t  on  may  be  conceived  as  a  mere  ablative-relation  (expressed  by  tbe  pre- 
os  t\oi  /y)     Thus  the  phrase  memorid  tenire,  to  keep  m  memory,  mus   be 
concdved  as  -  to  keep  l/  meinory."     For  the  omission  ol  the  preposition 
before  names  of  cities,  see  §  45o.  _        .  ♦k^  vKiotiw»  in 

Bern.  78.  Kegarding  the  use  of  the  preposition  m  with  the  Abla  e  m 
relations  of  time,  ^v?  must  distinguish,  whether  the  tune  (>  an  act  n  . 
determined  by  nouns,  denoting  time  itself  and  its  di  ision^  n  p(mi  s 
us  Z»^  spafinm,  a'tas,  sa'Cidlim,  annus,  maisis,  Januarys,  and  the  othe 
mimes  of  he  months,  dies,  hora);^  or  by  nouns,  denoting  events  which 
len  in  lime,  as  :  tda,  juventus,  senectus,  belUun,  pugna  pax,  consalatus, 
S  m  /  //^  eti.  In  tiie  former  case  we  use  the  mere  ablatice  of  timcmth. 
Tu/^  «  vS^V>'r  in  order  to  denote  the  time  at  or  in  winch  an  action  lakes 
pbce^(EnS  'iy,  on,  in).  The  expression  of  Time  must  then  aUcaysbe 
^qa^^tiMbf^n  Attribut^^  ai  :  hoc  tempore, '.i  this  time  ;  ^^^^ ^^^^^^^^"^ 
lecond  vear-  Cale nd is  Januariis,  on  the  tirst  ot  January  (on  the  Januar} - 
t'dends,  ^e  ^^12,  C.) ;  tertio  die  ante  Idus,  on  the  third  day  belore  the 
Ides  (the  middle  of  the  month);  hoc  die  on  this  day 

When  before  expressions  of  this  kind  the  preposition  m  (w  i  the  Abla- 
tive) is  us^  it  has  IvA./'  the  meaning  -during-  and  denotes,  like  ;>.r,  that 
t  c'acti  n  ciuples  the  whole  ^m.;%r  it  denotes,  that  the  action  happens 
...r^}  ear,  month,  day,  etc.  But  even  in  these  connections  the  preposition 
«rt  sometimes  is  oiuitteil. 


The  .lUtinction  ol'  in  Volscu  anrt  ap;d  T'oteax.  (Rem.  30,  «  >; ''l^'; 'IV^^.^Jjfommrv 

pl-cuhur  lorms,  as;:  Jnido,  in  tlie  bt-imu.i-  {M) ;  7ioctu  {uotnocte),  Dy  ni^ui,  uia  ^ 
iie),  by  day ;  tempore  or  in  temjMre,  m  tune,  at  the  proper  lime. 


In  hoc  femporf.i  dnnn<r  this*  (whole)  time;  in  hoc  anno,  durin-  this  (whole)  year 

^^H^  hnr,!  i.fn  nJ'L'h  T.""  ""^'vi'  ^'"{^^'^'1''^  ^^^-  OH'.  3.  2o.  95,  the  most  beautifni;that 
Lo.,  f  n'  i  ?^  (whole)  year  (literally:  than  who  in  that  year  nothin-  was  born  more 
bea.mf  il)  Ar(ef.  qwe  in  ornnt  cetate  cultie.  minncos  eferiwt  frnctus.  Cic.  Sen.  .3.  9,  The 
arts  which  cultivated  in  ereiy  a-e  produce  the  most  wonderful  fruits.  Neouein  iam 
mN/risa,wi.<  cuju,^quam  ex  svd  ^hrpe  funus  vidit,  Nep.  Ke-  2,  3,  And  he  saw.  dunn- 
(the  wh.»le  space  of)  so  many  years,  the  funeral  of  none  of  his  oflsprin-  Bi^dU 
fhrZ"x{l£r^  ^^.^.^''T''  "^'^^'^  tvvicea  day  (every  day).  Cic.  Tusc.5.35.100.  Ter  in  anno, 
lirTJ  J  .  *  IT""-.  ^"  ^^^P'-f^^^.'ons  of  this  kind  the  English  language  uses  the  indefi- 
nite article,  without  any  preposition.  °     ° 

Wiien  the  Time  of  an  action  is  determined  by  events,  we  supply  the  gen- 
eral idea  "  at  the  time  of.--  and  thus  expressions  of  this  kind  milst  be  con 
sidered  as  attributive  phrases  with  the  governing  noun  time  under- 
stood Thus  "i/i  icar''  means:  ''in  the  time  of  war  f'  ''in  youth''  means- 
■'  in  the  time  of  youthr  The  rule  is  here,  to  nse  the  preposition  in  as  a  sub- 
stitute tor  the  noun  tempus  understood.  So  we  say  injuventiite,  in  youth : 
in  senectuie,  m  old  age;  in  bell),  in  (the  time  oQ  war;  in  pace,  in  (during) 
peace ;_  m  itinere,  in  (during,  on)  a  journey,  during  a  march  ;  in  xitd,  in  life  : 
injuga,  on  (during)  the  flight.  But  the  preposition  generally  is  omitted 
when  regular,  notorious,  or  historical  events  are  applied  to  determine 
time,  as:  hello  Punico  secundo,  in  (during)  the  second  Punic  w^ar;  comitivi, 
at  the  time  of  the  elections;  ludis,  at  the  time  of  the  public  games;  feriis 
Latinis  at  the  time  of  the  Latin  festival.  Tiie  preposition  in  may  also  be 
omitted,  when  the  word  by  which  the  time  is  determined,  has  an  attribute 
determining  time  still  closer,  as:  extremd  senectiite,  in  the  hiirhest  old  aire' 
hoc  bello,  in  this  war."-*  "  ^   ' 

Itejn.  79.  Idioms.-//?  pr(xsentia  or  in  pr(fMnti.  at  i)resent.  In  eo  e.^.9€,  tit,  to  be  in  Puch 
a  state.or  condition,  as  to  .  .  Bes  in  inte^ro  est,  xhl  thing  (the  matter)  is  in  its  former 
s  ate.  Uie  afla.rs  are  in  their  former  condition.  Mifd  in  aninio  est  with  a  Subject-inSii- 
ti  e,  or  in  ammo  habco  with  an  Ohjeot-inflnitive.  I  intend  to,  as-  In  onimo  nobis  erat 

£^^^?W,^''''•"'''^'^^^''7^'-l"^^^r^  'i  ''^  ^^'«  intended.  \o  send  ^Mcc^r^rcV'S 
olat  man  '  "'""'"^  liabtbat,  Cic.  Kosc.  Am.  IS,  5-2,  He  intended  to  disinherit 

§  4o4.  iSiib  (under),  referring  to  Place,  governs  tlie  Accusa- 
tive in  answer  to  the  question  "Avhither?"  or  "in  which  direc- 
tion?" as:  Uxcrcltum  subjugitm  niittere,  to  send  an  army  under 
the  yoke.  Often  it  denotes  motion  to  more  elevated  objects,  if 
the  motion  ends  before  them,  in  which  case  the  English  preposi- 
tion "  under''  cannot  be  used,  as :  Ilostee  sub  micros  {sub  jnontem) 
processtrwit,  the  enemy  went  as  far  as  (up  to)  the  walls  (to  the 
mountain). 


n.'.  "^j^J^^.^^  ^"^  tempore  frequentljy  is  used  in  the  meaning  "  in  this  bad  (period  of)  time 
?irne^fo  V^xS^Z  Z\n  t€'i'\^i^''"''''''^'''  ^^^^^ofutl  Nep.  Milt.  5  1  7n  this  (tr  ^|; 
"battle  of  r«rL>^^/?  ^  f  Athenians.  Livy  22.  61 :  quo  in  tempore,  in  this  time  (after 
can  S  afvvnv.  for  n  r"^'' V'''-'-^''  "^*''^'  ™"^  ,^^  replaced  by  the  preposition  iKr.  But  we 
rtirTeither  to  uS  .  Jf.^-^  '''' r /""  ^^"  «°^/  ^^  H^^d  m  place  o{  per,  if  the  preposition 
K^\v  ..yi  J  ^•^^'^^^^,^  of  time  (as  cetas.  vita),  or  to  events  previously  mentioned 
bu  t.u      .  hv  ."'^'^^  "tS'^  f^^"^'  ^^^^'•^  ^^'"d*"^'  NUMEUALS,  it  is  translated  hy  per  ov  inter 

flmiotin.r  .f,«l.        ^"busannis.— 2  Except  in  the  mentioned  cases,  the  preposition  in 

ii.mi.Sorn7,rii.ir;";,,^;;.:;nSh.'''''" ""  ■='"■"' ""'  ^"^^  ^»'"-  "">'  '-^  °' » 


'1 


46 


TKErOSITIONS. 


niEPOSITIONS. 


47 


Sub  governs  the  Ablative  in  answer  to  the  question  ^' where?''' 
as:  Snbj^elUbus  hlemare,  to  winter  under  liides;*  sub  annis,  sub 
sarclnis  dornure,  to  sleep  under  arms,  under  the  bairgage.  JiJj'er- 
citus  sub  monte  eousedlt,  tlie  army  took  its  place  under  (at  the 
foot  of)  a  mountain. 

In  relations  of  Time,  sub  with  the  Accusative  denotes  ap- 
proximative time  (either  at,  or  a  little  before,  or  after),  as:  Sub 
lucem,  about  daybreak;  sub  hoc  tenqms,  about  this  time;  sub 
uocteni,  about  nightfall.  Sub  with  the  Ablative  denotes,  that 
one  event  happens  just  at  the  moment  of  another,  as:  Sub  ipsa 
profectlone,  just  at  the  very  moment  of  his  dei)arture. 

In  internal  relations,  sub  rej)resents  actions  or  conditions,  as 

if  bein^^  or  coming-  locally  under  another  tliinu:.     The  use  of  the 

ablative  or  accusative  is  determined  by  the  analogy  of  the  local 

relation,  as :  Sub  rege  esse,  to  be  under  a  king ;  sub  imperlo  ali- 

cujus  esse,  to  be  under  somebody's  rule  or  power ;    GalUam  sub 

2}opidl  llornani  imperhun  redhjerc,  to  bring  Gaul   under  the 

power  or  rule  of  the  Iloman  people. 

Item.  80.  In  relations  of  time  poets  and  later  authors  use  both  cases 
promiscuously,  in  order  to  denote  either  api)roxi)native  or  exact  time.  The 
expression  »ah  luce  in  classical  hin^^uaijje  does  not  refer  to  time  at  all,  but 
means  ''  in  davlii^ht."  Ilor.  Art.  poet.  303.  In  internal  relaticms  sxh  some- 
limes  caunot'^be  translated  bv  v inter,  as  '' xnb  ocuJix^'  Ijcfore  one's  eyes. 
The  idiom  ,suh  j'ulire  Us  est  (literally:  the  lawsuit  is  still  under  the  judge) 
means:  The  matter  is  under  consideration,  the  question  is  not  yet  decided. 
{■yr°  For  the  u^e  of  s>ij)er,  see  p.  tW. 

CONSTRUCTIOX    OF    XaMES    OF    ClTIES. 

^  ltj5.  When  the  place  in  which  something  is  done,  or  the 
place  to  which  or  from  which  a  motion  takes  place,  is  the  name 
of  a  city,  town,  'village,  or  small  island,^  the  Latin  language 
crenerally  does  not  employ  Prepositions,  to  designate  these  local 
relations,  but  places  the  name  of  the  city  either  in  the  Genitive, 
or  in  the  Accusative  or  in  the  Ablative. 

1.   Instead  of  in  with  the  Ablative  the  name  of  the  city  is 


»  That  i^  •  in  tcntP.  made  ont  of  hides.-^  By  ^mall  i>land*4,  those  are  nndcrMood  wliose 
canitZi n;.  bear  tlie  na.ne  of  the  i>land.  a.  -Rf,o>ius,  .E^iUa,  i'ornjm.  etc.  Sxeuuu  ,^ur- 
Si!/  C^iicil^^ulHxa.  Iliberma.  do  not  belon;;  to  the  .mall  inlands  m  this  .cuse,  hut  arc 
considered  as  names  of  countbies. 


])laced  a)  in  the  mere  Ablative  Case,  when  it  is  a  plurale 
iantum  or  is  declined  after  the  third  declension ;  b)  in  the 
Genitive  Case,  when  the  name  of  the  city  is  a  singular  noun 
of  the  first  or  second  declension. 

2.  Instead  of  the  preposition  in  with  the  accusative,  or  ad, 
denoting  motiox  to  a  place,  all  names  of  cities  are  placed  in  the 
mere  Accusative  case. 

3.  Instead  of  the  preposition  ex  with  the  Ablative,  denoting 
ynYvios  fro7ii  a  place,  names  of  cities  generally  are  placed  in  the 
mere  Ablative  case. 

4.  Tlie  words  donius  and  rus^  are  construed  as  if  they  were 
names  of  cities.  They  assume  the  ending  i  instead  of  in  with 
the  Ablative  (donii,  at  liome ;  ruri,  in  the  country).  They  are 
placed  in  the  Aiu.ative,  instead  of  the  preposition  ex  (cZomo,  from 
liome;  77^;-(?,  from  the  country).  They  are  put  in  the  Accusa- 
tive instead  of  ad  or  In  with  the  Accusative  {doniuni  jnittere, 
to  send  home;  rus  ire,  to  go  to  the  country). 

E.XAMPr.Es:  Zenrmem  Athenin  nudiTbam,  I  heard  Zone  at  Athen<>,  C.  Marciii/^  Coriolis 
ri.rif.  C.  Marcins  lived  in  Corioli.  S'/mma  tvepviatio  fint  CarUiagine.  the  <rrt'ate!<t  ex- 
citement prevailed  in  ('arliia;,'e.  lionun  fiii,  I  «as  in  liome.  Duo  dies  Thurii  rersdtus 
eat,  he  i^tayed  for  two  davi»  in  Tliurium.  Rhoili  in  morbuin  incidit.  at  (in)  Rhodes  he 
fell  into  a  sickness.  Atlten<iJ<  re(rire.  to  return  to  Atliens.  Pnvsidium  Vejos  miUere,  to 
send  a  jrarrison  to  Veji.  lloinaia  propernre^  to  liasten  to  Home.  Carlhaginem  navi- 
{/firc,  to  t^ail  for  Carthaixe.  Ei)lu  :<i/ni  jiroficixciAo  depart  for  Ephesuf?.  A'e  Corinthum 
conferre,  to  proceed  to  Corintli.  lloiiui  teiilf.  lie  comes  from  Rome.  Athfnis  dixce-ssit^ 
heleft  Athens  (wi-nt  from  Atliens).  Bntnduno  pro/ecfns  est,  he  departed  from  Brundu- 
pium.  Tn9  dies  domi  commorCituH  Sinn,  I  staid  honie  for  three  days.  Domum  advenit,^ 
he  arrived  home.  Riu'i  eCiinui^.  let  us  j^o  to  the  country.  AtfiTnas  udceidrc.^  to  arrive  at 
Athens,    liure  disctdere,  to  leave  the  country  (go  from  the  country). 

I{e}ii.  81.  In  the  most  ancient  lanc^uac^e  names  of  cities  in  answer  to  the 
question  ""  irhcrc^''  were  phiced  in  the  first  locative  case,  which  termi- 
nated in  i(\).  215,  JiA).  This  endiui!;,  which  in  the  tirst  declension  was  con- 
tracted with  tlie  ciiaracteristic  a  into  ^p,  remained  in  the  names  of  the  sec- 
ond and  third  declensions  unchanged  ;  but  in  tlie  third  declension  at  some 
later  time  assumed  the  form  of  the  Ablative.  In  many  instances  this  end- 
in<;  /  ap|)ears  even  in  the  language  of  the  classical  period.  Thus,  Livy 
-almost  always  writes  Curthifjiid  (hi  Carthage).  The  forms  domi  (which 
nuist  not  be  taken  for  a  Genitive)  and  ruri  have  preserved  the  form  of  the 
old  locative  case,  which  likewise  api)ears  in  many  adverbial  forms,  espe- 
cially in  iLand  (on  tlie  ground),  ahi,  where,  ublque,  etc.     The  form  domi  may 


*  R»s,  fjen.  rwm.  does  not  mean  a  country,  in  the  sense  of  a  land  (terra) :  but  expresses 
what  is  oppo.-ed  to  citi/.  Bi-sidt-s  this  it  means  "a  country-scat."— 2  Since  verbs  of  au- 
KiviNo  are  constru(Hl  with  ad  or  in  with  the  accusativt".  it  follows,  that  names  of  cities 
and  the  words  domus  and  rus  must  be  placed  in  the  accusative  (not  in  the  ablative)  after 
words  of  arriving,  although  in  English  the  preposition  at  is  used.     See  Rem.  (38. 


48 


TREPOSITIOXS. 


niEPOSITIONS. 


49 


Ordinalos  ^iomi  mUUio'que^^  home  and  m  ^^^^ '^J^^^,/^;  ^ ^"^^^  il  not 

.ue  conbiacntt  j.^^.^^  ^^^  ^,t  cities  is  onh  men 

required.     1  hns  ^^  c  iiuist  s  y  .  ^J  /  ^>„^^,/.,  UqCitox  intra  dies  decern 

""I?'r  '<S"Tt  w'"n^e  i'''Larnf:{imt,  .hen  .he  name  of  a  city  is  the  object 

WmmmMMMm 

«;j;;rk!  ;  ■Uann.1o:'!S:.r'ilanuiha.  had  thus  saved  his  property,  he 
Tame  to' Pn^as  m  Rm.«nlit..nal,^  ,,^.^,  „^.  „,,^,,  „  ,„« 

reS  pa.,So," nrstte'used  holore  tlic^vhole  pln-ase,^.s :  «<   ,u->^ 

before  the  name  ( t  the  ut) ,  a^,  •  ^''  ^'^'^'  ;^.;„,.^^g  proceeded  to  Tarquinii, 
They  slopped  at  Alba,  a  city  conveniently  situated.  Cic.  turn. 

EXERCISES  ON  PREPOSiriONS. 

Ad.      Adveksus.      Apud.      Ante. 

1    Hannibal  quum  a  Cartha.i^iniensibus  cxpulsns  esset  ad  Antioc^^^^^^ 


tarn  ad  Cannas  cladem  accepGrunt,'  ut  totum  pane  cxercitiim  amitterent.— 
8.  Carthaginienses,  qimni   prope  jam  ad   desperationem^  pervenissent," 
Ilamilcaii  belli  imperium  inandavGrunt.— 9.  Exercitus,  Hasdrubale  inter- 
t'ccto,  siiinnuim  imperium  ad  Hannibalem  detulit. — 10.  llicronis  morte  reg- 
11  nm'"  Syracusilnum  [of  Syracuse)  ad  llieronymum,  nepotem  ejus,  trans- 
iiii>siim  est." — 11.  Militum  ignavorum  nomina  ad  imi)eratr)rcm  reluta  sunt. 
—12.  ]Slhil  ad  sapientis  felicitatem  accedere  potest.— 13.  Ariovistus  legatos 
ad  Ca?sarem  niisit,  qui  eum  ad  colloquium'^  invitarent  {should  invite)^U. 
Pauci  eorum  ad  collocpiiuin  congressi  stmt.^'— l.j.  Hoc  non  tarn  ad  Appii 
honorem,  quam  ad  consulum  ignominiam  factum  est.— 10.  Hijec  minus  ad 
me  (piam  ad  te  pertinCre  censeo."— 17.  At  Philippus  nondum  ad  belkmi 
liaratus  erat.— 18.  ISIare  ad  arbitrium  lun»,  modo  (§  379,  Rem.  7)  exiestuat 
{to  inrfll  upl  modo  contraliit'"  undas.— 19.  Sociorum  fiaQs{fidi'Uti/),  qu£e  ad 
eum  diem  tirma  fuerat,  turn  labare''  coepit.— 20.  Praetor  totam  rem  ad  diem 
sequentcm  ditierre"  constituit.— 21.  Hac  controversia  usque  ad  noctem 
ductil,"*  senalus  dimissus  est.— 22.  Qua?ritur,  cur  non  hoc  frumentum  ad 
diem  datum  sit  {to  dd(cer)?—2n.  Deus  i)aternum  adversus  bonos  viros  ani- 
iiiuiii  habet.— 24.  Consul  Spurium  Cassium,  legatum  suum,  adversus  hostis 
misit,  lit  eurum   impetum,  quamdiu  {as  loraj  as)  posset,  sustinCret.— 25. 
Cicero  in  dubio  {in  doubt)  fuit,  quomodo  se  adversus  Casarem  gereret.^" — 
2G.  Ante  llamilcaris  adventum  Carthaginiensium  res  male  gerebantur.'^"— 
27.  Dictntor  Manlium  ante  se  Romam  \to  Rome)  proficisci  vetuit.— 28.  Ante 
oppidum  tumulus-' erat,  quem  hostes  magnis'--'  (/r////)  copiis  occupaverant.— 
29.  Summus  mons  a  duabus  legionibus  occupabatur,  quas  LabiCnus  paucis 
ante  diCbus  ad  Ca3sarem  perduxerat  {to  brin(/).—'SO.  Utierse  tuae,  quas  pau- 
cis ante  dicl)iis  acceppram,gratissim;e  milii  fuGruut.— 31.  Carthan-iuienses 
classe  apud  insulas  .Egalls  {Ejatlan)  a  G:ijo  Lutalio  superata  {to  defeat), 
bellum  tinire  statuerunt.— 32.  Hannibal  P.  Cornelium  Scipioncm  ter  vicit 
primo  apud  Rhodanum  lluvium,  deinde  apud  Padum,  tertio  apud  Trebiam.' 
—33.  Dum  ha>c  in  Asia  geruntur,  casu  accidit,  ut  Prusi£e*'=*  regis  legilti 
«apud  Qumctium  Flamiiiium  coinarent.- 34.  Virgines  Vestales  apud  Tro- 
jaiios,  Albanos,  Romanos  ignis  perpetui  custodes  fuOrunt.— 35.  Dioin-sius 
hyracusfirum  tyrannus,  a  civibus  suis  expulsus,  apud  Corinthios  vixit  —36' 
Hoc  dictum  {remark)  apud  Xenophontem'^*  leperi.— 37.  Sempronius  apud 
pratorcm  verba  fecit,"  ut  funduni  suum,  a  Gajo  injuria  {against  the  laws) 
retentum,-'^  ivcupeiarer. 

1.  The  ^'Etluaus,  since  they  could  not  defend  themselves,  sent  ambassa- 
dors to  Ca?sar,  in  order  to  ask'^'  {nup.)  [forj  help.— 2.  The  consul  directed 
the  hc^or,  to  bring  {arcesscre)  both  messengers  to  him.— 3.  The  enemies  pro- 
ceeded {se  ronfern)  with  (by)  great  quickness  to  the  ships.— 4.  The  emis- 
saries^ ol  Hannibal  found  access  {aditus)  to  the  Ferentian'^"  hosta 'cs.- 
o.  1  his  equestrian  combat  {certdmen)  opened  to  the  legions  the  way  to  the 
l^camp  ()  the  enemies.— 6.  The  horsemen  of  the  enemies  came  as  far  as  the 
ii\er  liber— V  The  tame  of  thy  bravery  and  genius  has  come  {pervenire) 
(up)  to  the  farthest  {extremus)  regions  of  the  earth.— 8.  The  censoi-s  directed 
Ltheirj  attention^"'  to  the  morals^'  of  the  citizens.- 9.  I  wish  indeed  my 


^  The  Romans  themselves  mistook  d07ni  for  a  genitive,  because  they  had  forgotten 
their  ancient  l«><^«tiv('  forms.  ^     „^  ovcr.-^  AdUus,  an  approach.-*  Terga 

t.;«trioruni  IC  £Sa  ;«.7;/f/ro"?m-the  bick,).-'  Mnure,  to  fore,.-.  To  advanc. 


50 


ruErosiTioKS. 


PKEPOSITIONS. 


51 


,    j>       X  4.  r^«qr— 10    You  liJive  callca 

very  words  had  been  reported  (7/;;:/7V/meidf  subiecM^'>^'/^)  indeed -- 

Uviv7r  )  my  attention-^  to  a  v^p'    />^  )     f  ^f  ^^^uuiy  tried,  to  restore'' 

1      WhenMetellus  hud  eome  to  ^^^ ^^^^J^i^a^  stamlard.--l-3.  bnice 

he    Iseiphne  of  the  soldiers  t.>  ^ ^^M^l  A\  the  highest  pruxlcMjce 

0  these  virtues  of  tlie  general  «i  f»'^;»^^-  ^.i^^^^.y  ,vas  certaui.-l.  •  Our 
v-e re  uUl('d;^«  the  soldiers  te U  ^^^'^,^  "  ;/l\;e  day  most  bravely,  but  it  was 
'(>!  Uers  tbu-ht  up  to  the  tlurd    »"^^V     vll<mer  the  attack  ot' the  enemy. 

_U  T  I  iibout  midni-ht-  the  ^vi  ;  ;;,f  ^;  ^J^  !-,^^  that  the  ships  were 
but  then  so  violent  ^uhamm]v^  stoim    arose  I  ,^  ^^^.^  ^^^^^^  ^^  .^^^^   ^^ 

he  deba.c  (.^n«.)  "^'<\";'Vs.«  ^ > .t  .""live  *-"»"V"'>M";'"';;^ 

1  ,W««,r)  l.i.«  to  this  "■'" y' ;-.;,V,f  1  ;''  ame  to  the  a.ul.onues  (m«ff* 
,>,.«p  (/iHwl  1  liail  reported  ()«;<;'«)  "%'  ,,  »  7«Ht  is  important  (M-2J. 
S,.,\v^"4  1  doubt  whether  (nemo  '"'•, M-''' f  ,i' °'  „.<>  pnrties  (;«'•«)  is 
«1^'  f.,r".he\veirarc  of  the  ciV'V''f •J^;^^,.  ins  s  ouU.  he  carried  out 
f„  ;  nA.rr-23.  Verres  denm.uied  tli.vt  eyu>t  .^^    ^     ^,^.^  ,,^,,„^ 

.Vc-'f)  «ccordins  to  ins  hmt.--4  1  ^1^^^^^^^ 

mnv  as  ..p  h»  2000  '"«"•--■•„.f„^''^^  ^  «f  Eubcca  is  situated  «  «»)  opi-o- 
rect  copy  of  this  letter.' '-20.  ^  '\^'''X, ; .  ,|,,u  some  one  ot  tliose,«ho 
Iu„  to  Alhcns.-27.  l"'»' S^-".f '?' 7^" ,"  [^  s,,,  c  cri.ne  against  him  <.r  h,s 
were  i.resent,'=  misht  mediate  J"  "'"'  \"",  ,..,,re"  a.'ainst  one's  sell.— 

llnSl  v'\"  357.'  0).-2«   It  is  «^.^''V^;  ;'^"   .reldet' conunander  k.^wn  .. 
'XJ   Is  not  the  enmity  ot  ''•'-".•'^ ,"'?  ''.,,.,,  others,  hut  also  against  )OUi 
"ilmo't  all  soldiers V-30    Be  jusl  l»"'  ;    ""ei  «.'roirCa  by  I'l'thP.  K'"S."' 
Xs!-31.  The  battle    (!"•««-««),  '^^^  f'   ,f  ,7^  ve  (.»7'»fc""")  "''  'f'f'?" 
',[.':  Macedons^  -^^^^^^^^^,  OetLianus  de.eated  AnU. 


,,,,._.k  \vith  .horn  .-m  you  <Viue  to-.^y_. „^        ado;: declared,  that 
"       .  i  .rrieefid  with  our  ancestors— J7.   "'";..  ",,,„,,,> _38.  1  tind  many 

w„trf,)r  (ofl  this  oiiinion  in  the  ohUi f («•••)  I""!''  ]  ,  ti,;,  i„ 

1M:,:,„.1ius,  hut  oann..t  hnd  an>  hing  ^^^^^A^^^^^^^:^:^!^!!^^ 
(,r»)  in  'riuKydides.-40JJ^!->^liL_L rnri^rT:^:;;^ .„Wecv.    Whim 


•7  Trangilate :  guaras  (.cusmu.  ;  ^^ 


— 41.  Caesar  marclied*"  by  the  shortest  vmrU  f}f^,.\  tr^^^    ^  «i 

sent  the  whole  of  the  cay  Irrbefore  hTm      40^  enemies,  and 

war,  Grecian  art  liacl  iiot\;  Teacl  e'r*»  H^^^  Before  the  second  Punio 

CiKCA.  CiRcujf.  Inter.  Ob.  Per.  Post.  Secundum 

hie„"!iU m  "ayc^,are.;rper^fxh     Vl'::^  ^*-""''  """^  ^'^^""^  -Huilejam 

tatus  suo  sumptu' sem  ,er';.lEha"(/;;;,t;,^^^^^^ 

einissani,  quum  AIcil)iadem  ferro'  asgredi  noii  oudP^-enVnJ^^.n    •       7^"'^ 

?^oX,s»  tmnV    To    i'^M- ""''^•'"'^'''''.'''^  '"°°"«  ^it"m."  raro  a  mer- 

inter  acies  nostras  rcstitQtus  est     ?1tv      t  "  ""  .^^^^'^"^'-nnt,  qua  re  ordo 
tuteni'Miocc4t  nt  ilHm  bP«^^^^^^  Discrlmen  inter  fortitudinem  et  vir- 

dunuaxat  -15'  Lys  m^Hnf.^  Z?"^''^  l^abPre  possint^hanc  antem  homines 
lum  inter  se  c;essOr     t       r  ^J.^^^'^'^'^."?.'  ^^^«««l^'^ta-  societate  (allmnce),  bel- 

inter  sedifferurr-ri^v'cu?n^^^^^^^^      V""''  ''^^'''^  ^"^^^^^^'^'^^  ^^^'^"« 
conciliari  non  1-sse  ntfumq^e  din  S^  ^T?'  '' 

inter  se  seryasse'-''^  intelli-o     10  n  1  -ir  f^^sUtuit.— 18.  Amicos  illos  lidem 

hostihus  tradidit  ■"  non  i<-nnn,in  ., .,  o.       •.         •^*-     ."•^'   f'"'"  exereitum 
sed  se  ipsum  ob  oculos  "inb  h     "^   rJ"'"^  '""'  penculum,  non  pairiam/ 
per  Allobrogum  Ante  ter  ftceren7"    o?""??"',  P"''""."^''"  °'l'"it.  «  Helvetii 

'  ThrTndem.::!'  Ou^n^V.r'llbTJr.T"^''^  fe.-i  With  the  greatest  curiosity  - 
rnpr-ere-*  To  winter.-^Tt  hi  eipeusT-«^ wnr§^"7^^  ^f  translated  by  the  pcmiVe  of 

Mtuated.-M  Merchant.-^^'Fierc;''J!f^.^^  kill.-i/To  me^t.-i^ Vitus' 

nu-anB  :  (hunder-mals.-^^  Translate  •  Tho  uor^T  ^  Peaceful.-'^  The  plural  of  tonitruum 
^'  Institution. -'^2  /Tic/^.,»  JrrllZ  r^.  l-o  Z^^.'^^''  fortitudo  and  virtus.— ^0  To  dissolve  — 
or trood  disposition  i-Fo?hiriudicuil-^^^^^^^  faithful     .3  ^,.^^^  ara^rii?  to  be 

^«Z^.^c^«.-/ac.r^,  to  make  ij^ies!-^^  Wood'l^^^^  '       ''  ^— "  ^^^'V<tc^;v.  10  nmrca.- 


rn  PREPOSITIONS. 

bus  ne  mrrrcrc"  quUlcm  licmt.-31.  C^^J^V'V  ^c^  ^ni^os^r<^o^ 

km.  s  per  vos  lici  is^ft,  rop  ne  vilan,  c,.n,l..iu.concoss>ssom-36^N<.  m 

per  spccKii  ^    en  I        ^         ^  (ku-emciuc  coram  post  me  esse  ali- 

(M.««W»fc)  ycko  nu,  '--e  mai  i         ,  '^ereitim  in.pcdin.onta  post 

qnant»  <& /^,  ,V.,,  :!  "  ,„\,Lrt  I39  Vocnlis»'  e.  post  vocalls  „  vH .;  pos.la," 
k-giones  colUxfli.it  («  ptm-     m    vm.  ,  1  oppi.kim  Gcriio- 

"'"^"'1."'  .,,  'f,,,«t  h.>ras  Philippiis  ante  imiro^  advPnit,  Mum  («nd 
«  r^lasir  ',  si  t'^:  G  cci  Tro  a,n  a.cuno  anno  0.,,?™".!  POSt  quam 
«<?;<!)  c.isu a  iiosim.  c„l..ii-iii-;    nn\nn   tcrtiinn   post  (kcm   reclliTt, 

~t  The  M,klk.  "  ad  tilled  up"  the  "canal  (./«.«O  «Inch  was  ar,mnd  he 
.ni^,  ■>  1  ok  a''  the  Germans  and  those  tril.es  (r/<«.)  «huh  kad  a 
*         V^^ii  ■  "  .,rn,  nd    he  river  Isterl-a.  Already  llippavrhns.  who  lived 

fonni^    e  e  .^i.  rde      "«.•.(«ii'-O  by  soldiei^.-5.  Cato  dismissed  all    liose 

n'  sUmp  of  .10  g.at  ^;^:^^:;^;^;:z;>!:^zij'i:^ ';  -. 

enemy.*'— 10.    A  I^^sc/vn  no   siu  v  vtu  y    i         ,'         ,.     j  till  the  monlli  ot 
lainan    imon     ^  courteous'^»  anion-  his  [trends],  [b  it 

Z^^^l^^-^^  --^'  taciturn --1:5.  '^^'-j-^^  ;:^,i:;;i:rJi^ 

Chb  tel  ow^citizens,  liv4d  among  (in  the  country  -^)J^^,^^^'j^^, 
U."     During  all  this  time,  1  was  twice  in  the  house  ot  Cicsai.-lo.  JJui 

Plural  oihostis.-*-'  \^'i^''\-'\l    ^^'hv  /  /,  •  -"«  Tho  word  tribe  U  translated  by  tribus, 
be  translated  by  a;>w^.  and  "\"^;i'i'-y^y  ^'^^^^  wh.n  it  means  a  savage 

whi^n  it  denote»*  a  thy\^i"/l  «^^^^t^  t"  ft  .rrniT-^  barbarns  occnrH  in  three 

nation.-^"  Coinis.-^^  yrbanu»'.-"  ^^^^^  ™''^^  hore    '>)  it  denote*»  any  nation  neither 
ditterent  mean.nji.  :  D.it  '^^''^''^t^'^^J''''^^^^^  foUowini?  sentence., 

^:X^.  ^frS'^f^'^^irrSmu^t  ;S^li;S>ns.der  the  rules  on  the  difl^reuce 


PREPOSITIONS. 


53 


ing  this  whole  year  he  staid  {romrrwrdi^  in  the  house  of  Atticus  — Ifi    Th^ 
speaker  went  away  amid  the  reproaches  {opprobrium)  and  liissin-s  (./i^M 

j/.v)of  he  nuititiule.-17.  During  the  games  the  I^mlanvoungne.fse^^^^^ 
e  Sabinian  {Sahuiw^)  yirgms  at  a  given  signal.^«-18.  Wha?  difflre  ice  i. 

L  mu^    «  'io't;  •   '^""'IrrS  ^"^^  ^  "^^^^^  ^i^^t  hates  {U^^l^ 
liarent/   -19     llnsis  the  difference  {dL<<crlmen)  between  a  wise  and  an 

IVnuTh       Z"  'tt'''/''^  '^'^  ^'''''''\  ^'''''''  ^'''^  '^'^'  '^«  know;  nothint^ 
Ll)ut  that  J  the  latter  does  not  even  know  t/m.—20.  Only  t/wn  the  rWht  ni' 

cue)  oy  iiie  i^anuJejan  iaw\— 21.  Caesar  did  not  w  sh  (nolle)  th-if  Hnf 
clause,  hese  Irihcs,  since  they  perpetually  {e,>„^/«.«  ;  Uged-\  all  i"  h 
each  other,  shou  ,1  he  neighbors"  of  (to)  our  province.-23  Tie  Greeks 
and  n^'"o.''"  "n^'r  «^"^"  «'""  "^J  their  ta'stes  (.,^«rf.-„«),  h!'hi,s  ( t,) 
^SL„i  •  V"  ''  ","  "'yP"""'-  an»  <"  opinion»"  that  these  questions  are 
fi^  Tr"*''"™''""'"'  r-""^''  «"'«^'••"--'4.  For  that  reason^the  oLh  n 
'  i-  '  'o-'-r?  ■'vas  spread  (*y«,«(,)  almost  U.roughout  tlie  who  l^rth 
{orb,,).-i>.,.  I  do  not  know,  for  what  reason  you  do  not  do  ( pT/'fe^rthis 


U  wn"  ^-r"""!".'"  I"-'''  f "'  •"  ''""•-^^•"■Tiris  w7.ru.e^yc";r  iirrbyHrc^^ 
t  was   dlowei    to  hnn  hy  the  law,  to  become  a  consul  -;i3   Ptminev  ob 

tamed  («,V,«-,,  all  these  honors  through  himself,  without»  bein-Ssted 
^lf)wc„re)  by  any  recommendation  {commendatio  ot  anceL,^  (>^r,S  - 
,n.  bon.e  uw,-,)  of  the  robbers  spread'»  over  the  c^iy,  othei^  over  tSiei^h 
bon„.rlidds.-a,5.  During  all  this  time  the  lleet  of  the  t"e,?iies  blocS 
e<«te/,.™  the  shores  (Ultu.)  and  the  harbor  (;«/'^«.v).-ac  D,?ri,ig  th"\w^^^^^^ 
war  this  legion  had  not  even  *««  an  eneni>'-37.  DuringYl  esell  cVvc a^ 
V     '^Jh"  Doh'"':'  T  <"f)r<;']"'"'S  to  tl'<^  «ill  and  hinrof  Zl^cc^Z 

stii^tiv'''rth,   1  i^i,  ^  '""";, ^T""  "■•■"■  ""**  ^'"«^  '^'^P'  (•«'«•«'•'^)  most 

been  d..n,  /^,  i ; .  \  1  '""'  ""=  ^'' •'"?"  people.-39.  All  tliese  things  Lave 
nttn  (lone  (perjiea-c)  by  me  most  strictly  according  to  thy  directions  ''—40 

M- lien  n»;™';;:;'',''"''-''  '7'?r  '"-"'«^  "y  '""  '«"«^■•"carriei  (l^MaHu>,).-f{. 
men'"  for  (f '  K  '.nl'''  • '"  ^'•y.'^,''"'!"»"'-'"'^!"  (to)  him  by  two  spokes: 
men     lor  (§  3J3,  ]{.  ^(j)  having  hnislied  the  war  so»  successfully  (/«to).— 


en 

'he 

To  be 

ulum)  at  all 

Civ- 


54 


PREPOSITIONS. 


'ili'S  l^ .tu  ^Y^p^^^^^^^^V^Za^  Tire  -^eS 
which  at  (''y^.^-^veral  placc^  cou     be  c^c«^^  J      ^^_ 

save  ;>r''<^^'-'*i^"*ff,:,  l';^  \hat\Xr  iil .  .«tlu.noB,  Isotratcs  has  been  the 
hiiul  hiiii.— 40    1  beliiAt,  "'"'  '"'Y    ,         .-   whilo  the  enemy  was  march- 

i„.»or  a"«'->;^^^;'lV7[,tie  months      S^  to  thee  the  books, 

alive  («;)«.'<).-;jO.Alleitrt^^^^  ^      Ca;sar  returnea  to  the 

which  thou  hasl  lent  '"'"V,  ,"''•,(■;,•,,„  ,.„,,.■:„  nfior  he  had  come  to 
city  of  Gergovia.-53.  "f "'" [ , ';,7  '; .f (^'^^l^^  the  power  of  Dionysius 
Spain   m  J^/'f  f "'«»  :-Vt,v?.^i";^  s  '  a^  (Lmat)<.\^ys  after  he  had 

'"  '•"f 'Xi  l^!■\^^:^TNi•o  wa  borntS^  nine  (curdLd  months  after 
reached"  ^  '=\'y-7:?*Vr^""Jicnis  used  to  cut"  their  hair"  immediately 
Tiberius  died.-5j.  J''"!"  "<^,  fX^.l^'es»  be^  .-ipe"  about  the  summer 
^::£^ice«'rxtTo"u.elutvber\?"'.-5T.lThose]'who  tear  (..r.W)  God. 
live  accordiDg  to  his  commauds  {pmceptum). 

Propter.  PnoPE.  Juxta.  Pu^etek.   Cis.  Citra.  Contra. 
Erga.  Extra.  Intra.  Infra.  Penes.  Supra. 
Trans.   Ultra.  Versus. 
1.  Plebs  Romana.  cum  a  P^triciis  opprimcrmur,  -'^H;.»  j-rbc™  ot  jr^pe 

ripam  Ani.uis  ad  'e-ti"-»  ">•/•''"      ,^^.f^!,^,e;^'B,^™^^^^^  me 

nis  Laeiuue  t;»n'l>>">  »»  '  J^^  ^Auict    jux  a  viam  Appiam"  ad  quintum 

lapidem»  sepullus  est.— o.  ^^am  l>ioP>^r  "  .-;""^^^^       ,  ■^.^.,  guppe- 

(ripe)  non  erant,  sed  ne  P'\\'"  '  /«'f^^' t  ""'  ,"^^^  autem  usus" 

^'^'''•Vaimmur'Sr    o'It   Ado^iX^^ 

iiccessit/"  amintui   piopur  ^      *  ,  •    „iensibus  ante  vi.ijiiiti 

suoruni  derehiuiuere  jussit,  y*'"'^^',''^^^'^^^^^^^^^  a-rorum  partem  dare 

tria  miUia  GernianOrum  ad  se  ^'^^^X^'  ^^^^f  1^^"^"^^  dissipilos. 

vellet.— 8.  Facile  erat  mdites,  pr.TcUe  causa  P^^"  "'^.  !f,^^  j^.^Ha,  qu® 

took  place  in  every  mom.ni  ot  ^^'l'^^'''^]'.-'^^^^^^^^^^^^  objetts,  and  jr.n..ally  i. 

lent  with  ••  to  be  a  kin-  "  ^Jl^f^'t  ^%r'nU:iate  the  pr^M.o.itic.n  after  in  No.  50,  51.  ^"^  !« 
translated  bv  -  to  nile,  to  govm-n  -'  ,V  J  tin -ere  -«'^  toudcre.-»'  Tl.e  plural  ot  ca,nl- 
all  admissible  vvays.-^»  <-'""  V»^;  ^^"  „r\V,"7,,'  -««    To   become    Hpe,  nmturescere.- 

"  ^wmw^^r  .-^o/./ic^  solstitiutii  '"'^'^''^^l-^l'^X^^^^  stick.-* To  pl»ce.- 

^^Accedere,  to  be  added,  to  follow.-»'  To  pretend. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


55 


ffotii  c:rati{l  propenTre. — 12.  Nabis  cum  c.xorcitum  raptim  {in  Jia^k)  pneter 
SpartVim  duxisset,  Pyniii,  quiC  vocantur,"  castra  occupavit. — 13.  Servus 
ille  ()miiil)us  senientns'"  prater  unam  condcinnatus  est.^14.  Suevi  vesti- 
menta  {cht/ii/if/)  nulla  liabent  piaster  pellls,'^*  quarum  propter  exii^uitatem'^* 
magna  corporis  pars  aperta  est. — lo.  Sahini  quoque  proBter  Volscos  et 
yEquos  partem  i)raHlai  postulabant. — 16.  Loquebantur  etiam  Sempronius 
ct  CethP'gus,  et  pneter  cetero-s  Lentulus,  qui  summam"  imperii  acerrime"" 
efllagitabat  {demand). — 17.  Tantum  temporis  nemini  unquara  tribui  {to  de- 
vote) antea,  proeterquam  amicissimis  aut  reipublicjB  causa. — 18.  Caisar  om- 
nem  Galliam  cis  Khenum  atque  inter  mare  MediterranGum  {Mediterranean) 
atqne  Oceanum  i)erdoniuit  {to  subject).— 19.  Caesar  per  exploratores'^*  certior 
tactus  est,  trls  jam  partis  Helvetiorum  Ararim  {the  Arar)  transisse,  et  quar- 
tam  fere  partem  citra  flumen  reliquam"  esse. — 20.  Britannia}  unum  latus 
{Hide)  est  c(mtra  Galliam. — 21.  LabiCnus,  cum  omncm  fere  hostium  exerci- 
tum  contra  se  pugnare  intelligeret,  Cajsarem  per  litteras  orilvit,  ut  quam 
celurrime  sibi  aux ilium  mitteret. — 22.  Apud  Germanos  veteres  latrocinia,^" 
quic  extra  linls  cuj usque  civitatis  ficbant,'^'  nuUam  liabGbant  {to  cause)  in- 
famiam  {infamy). — 23.  Nonne  novisti  meam  et  ceterorum  erga  te  fidem 
{good  faith)  et  benevolent iani  {good  disposition) 'i—'i^.  Boji  Lingonesque 
Etruscos  et  Umbros  agro  {from  their  terrilory)  pepulerant  {to  drice);  hi  ta- 
men  intra  Apeunluum^*  se  tenuCre. — 25.  Postulavit  Casar,  ut  responsum 
{an  answer)  sibi  ad  has  litteras  intra  viginti  dies  darCtur. — 26.  Oppidum, 
infra  arcem  situm,  missilibus'-"  telisque  i)ra3sidii  peti^"  potuit. — 27.  Per  du- 
centosciuadraginta  trls  annos  imperium  [th/',  government)  penes  reges  erat. — 
28.  Supra  tluvium  oppidum  est,  et  supra  oppidum  colics  vitibus'*^  obsiti-*"-* 
per  magnum  spatium  j^atent  {to  extend). — 29.  8upra  hunc  locum  rupes  pro- 
l)eudentes-*^  tectum  elliciunt  {to  form). — 30.  Senatus  Veliternos  trans  Tibe- 
rim  habitare  jussit. — 31.  Casar  speculatores  {scout)  ad  fluvium  versus  misit 
— 32.  Ultra  linls  Xerviorum  Kemi  incolunt  {to  live),  qui  omnium  Belgarum 
sunt  extrCmi. — 33.  Dux  ISemprouium  horlatus  est,  ne  quid  ultra  virls  ex- 
peri  rctur. 

1.  The  enemy  placed  {ponere)  their  camp  in  the  neighborhood  of  a  river, 
to  which  our  soldiers  used^*  to  go,  in  order  {Supine)  to  getwater.^^ — 2.  Ros- 
cius  owned  ( possidilre)  a  little  property  {fundus)  near  the  sea. — 3.  The  same 
has  been  told  me  by  [that]  most  renowned  man,  who  is  sitting  beside  thee. 
— 4.  lie  held  {habere)  that  part  of  Cilicia,  next  to  Cappadocia,  which  the 
Leuco-Syri  inhabit." — 5.  You  do  not  understand  these  things  so  well"  on 
account  of  [your]  youth. — 6.  I  wish  {velle  with  intin.  clause),  that  Sulpicius 
may  be  safe  {salviis),  not  so  much  (j^  412,  li.  58)  on  account  of  my  friend- 
ship, as  on  account  of  the  republic's  welfare. — 7.  Caesar  concluded  {sta- 
tuere)  to  send  Valerius  to  Ariovistus,  both  on  account  of  his  fidelity^®  and 
on  account  of  his  knowledge""  of  the  Gallic  language. — 8.  The  Sequani  are 
woi-se  oil*"  than  the  ^dui,  for  the  reason  that  Ariovistus  has  occupied  the 
third  part  of  the  Sequanian  {Sequanus)  territory  {ager),  which  is  the  best  in 
{ff)  the  whole  of  Gaul.— 9.  It  is  doubtful,  wheUier  Sulpicius  has  done  this 

»8  Qucp  Tocantur,  so  called.— >»  Sentenfia.  a  vote.  Suffragium  is  a  vote  at  the  polh,  a 
ballot.  iSententia  is  a  vote,  based  on  reasons,  or  after  debate,  equivalent  to :  opinion. — 
^^  Ptllifi,  a  hide.— 21  Small  Aze.—'^'^  Sumtna  imperii,  the  highest  command.— ^3 .4c<=r,  vio- 
lent.—-*  Scout.— -i*  Ileliquum  esse,  to  be  left,  to  remain.— 2«  Latrociniu?n,  a  robbery.— 
^'  Fac^re,  to  commit.— '■^**  Supply :  Montem,  the  Apennine  mountains,  the  Apennines.— 
2»  Misfnle,  a  missile.— s"  Petere,  to  reach.— 3»  Vites^  a  grape-vine.— ^^  Ohntus,  planted  (with). 
__3s  Propendlre.  to  overhang.— a-»  By  consuescere.  See  §  342,  R.  4.-35  Jq  get  ivater.  aquSri. 
— "  Incolere.—37  Translate :  You  see  these  things  less.— at»  Fides.— 3»  Scientia.—*"  Trans- 
late :  It  happens  {accidtre)  worse  to  the  Scquani  than  to  the  JEdui. 


56 


rnErosrnoNS. 


for  the  sake  of  (causa)  friendship,  or  [for  the  sake]  of  his  own  interest 
(utim.)--\0.  Thou  suspectest,  perhaps,  that  I  have  done  this  rather  on 
ny  own]  account,  than  [on  aeeount]  of  the  rep^.blic  -11  Scipio  led  the 
fl/et  past  the  coast  of  Italy  and  Gaul  as  far  as  Spain.-13.  The  soldiers  had 
no  inns  except  [their]  swords.-18.  They  uttered-  nolhin-  hut  (except) 
^n  St^^  Xilt  (GiixiTiVE)  tlie  [bad]  )inies  -14  The  All.>hn>,es^n. 
treated  (se  rcciperc)  to  Cirsar,  and  proved*-'  that  nothini.-  was  kit  (^  .y^, 
lia'^Uo  them,  except  the  bare- ground  {solum).-U.  Ariovistus  demanded 
that  they  (each  of  them)  should  bring  {dnceve)  ten  men  besides  themselves 
\o  the  Uiterence  i^ollo,uUu.^^^.An^.n^  heads  o 


^en;ec;;;^m;tSr:,  ^iie  noblest  men,  and  beiore  the  c> the rs  [that]  of  Cicero 

—17.  I  am  0 

clared(i^411) 


laiurs,  lilt- iiiMiii^^:?u  iiiv,w,  .cwvi  ,,v......  -   -     L         J 

—17    lam  owing  (^^c^/c/v)  almost  nothing,  except  to  Atticus.— 18.  He  Uj- 
),  thJt  he  could  not  allow  this  i)assage*-'  to  them,  except,  if 


Pl'lrCn    1^    till.    Lllclt     Jlt/     v^Vj'iiivi.     »iv»/     .»••--..       • in  ■  , 

thev  \vere  wi  lin.^  to  give  hostaires.-19.  I  shall  never  be  quiet*»  so  long  as 

Zu^mai:^  ^n  eiS^my^viU  be  this  side  <>[.t»-.l^"i;;--^--''o7'?l^^v 
brbade  tic  Yeliterni  to  dwell  (//.^6^7.//r)  this  side  the  liber.-21.  The  city 

of  Cirta  is  opposite  (over  against)  Spain.-'>2.  Among  the  kings,  Avho  bore 
(%m^  arms  against  the  Roman  people,  the  most  renowned  (.o/>.^^•  were 
Philii>  his  son  Perseus,  3Iilhridates,  and  betore  the  others  Hannibal.— .d. 
The  Romans  demanded,  that  the  Carthaginians  should  have  no  P<>^^^ff /"^ 
irm.emo)  .vithout  AtVica.-24.  1  always  have  f^^^'^]^^:^^^"!;^'^  ^ 
friendship  and  kindness  {hcnevohntia)  toward  me.--2.).  Demo>tl  enes  pie- 
wed  within  his  house- that  ulory,  which  nobody  but  (except)  he,  has 
mc  ed(^!  "i7L-)tifterward.-2(;.  The  ambassadors  of  Philip  were  du-ected 
to  cave  within  ten  days  the  city  of  Rome.-27.  Below  tiie  star  hatuin 
(^  ir^  D)  is  [tlie  star]  Jupiter,  which  is  much  (^  :]11)  nearer  to  the  eartli 
than  t'he  former.-28  Perhaps  he,  who  holds-  the  highest  power,  will 
g  ;  t  ff  thy  ishJs.---J.  The  form  of  [this]  Gallic  soldier  towered  {e.ni- 
14  ()ver  the  heads  of  the  others.-OO.  Above  the  road  a  very  high  nmun- 
t  in  was  towering  {impcmkre),  so  that  a  very  tew  easily  could  prevent  [the 
:a^,a4l -^  Ci^sar  demanded,  that  Ariovistus  slmuld  no  more-  Ic.ul  any 
ul  in  le  of  men  across  the  Rhine.-32.  Thou  knowest   that  I  have  a 

simlu  property  U'^mdu.)  across  the  Anio  /^  l^^|)-f  ^;.Vwhv"*''f  Vhmi 
lustius  Crispus,  to  sail  in  the  direction  ot  the  island  ot  f  ^'iJV^a.— .>4.  Ihou 
sHt  not  work  {lahorare)  beyond  [thy]  strength,  nor  be  hberal-bevond 
fthv]  melius  Wpcs  pl.).-35.  \(  is  uncertain,  of  what  kind  the  nature  ot  those 
regions  is,  which  lie  (^tm)  beyond  the  boundaries  {pa»)  ot  the  buevi. 

Ar..    De.    Ex. 
1.  Ilamilcar  hostls  a  muris  Carthaginis  removit,  eosque  pacem  petere^ 


— G.  Socrrtes^\\\S  a'l^'bus  occultis  avocavit^  et  ad  vitaui  cominii- 


PREPOSITIONS. 


57 


neni"  addiixit.''— 7.  Hannibal  postquam  ad  Alpis  (the  Alp^)  venit  qua?  Ita- 
liam  ab  Gallia  scjungunt,  nationes  Alpicas  (Alpine)  vicit  et  fudit  ^—8   Dux 
mercenarios'  GeruiSnos  a  reliquo  exercitu  separare  constituit— 9    Pom- 
pC^Jus  quuKiuaginta  diGbus  postquam  ab  urbe  profectus  est,  omnia  maria 
totamque  Asiain  a  i)ra3donibus  liberaverat.— 10.  Hi^c  philosophia?  ratio  ^» 
qiui}  a  Socrate  profccta  est,-  usque  ad  nostram  atatem  vi^niit— 11    Hoc 
genus  oratorum  ab  Isocrate  originem  ducit.— 12.  Qiucritu?,  a  quo  initio 
omnis  philosophia  duciitur?— 13.  Si  quid  ab  amico  postulas  considera  ^•-' 
impetrarlue  id  possit  ab  eo.— 14.  Legilti  non  modo  pacem  sed  ne  indutias 
quidem  ab  ivge  impetrare  potuCrunt.— lo.  Cato  veniam  atque  impunitatem 
{munesty)  a  Ctesare  nee  petere  nee  accipere  voluit.— 10.  Hamilcar  anna  a 
patria  accepta,  hostibus  tradere  noluit.— 17.  Trevirorum  leo-ati  contirmii- 
runt,  se  nunquam  ab  amicitia  populi  Romani  defecisse.— 18.°H«c  est  Stoi- 
corum  sontentia,  a  c^ua  ei,  qui  ad  voluptatem  omnia  referunt,  longe  {icidelu^ 
dissent lunt.— 11).  Ca-saris  litterae  animuni  meum  a  curis  minoribus  ad  sum- 
mum  timorem  traduxCrunt  {to  turn  over).—2{).  !Si  laus  te  ad  virtutem  allicere 
[to  «^//m'O  non jjotest,  ne  metus  quidem  a  foedissimis  factis  (deed)  potest 
avocare.— 21   ^diu,  cum  se  suaque  ab  Helvetiis  defendere  non  possent 
legjltos  ad   Ca-sarem  mittunt,  rogatum  auxilium.— 22.  Gratissimum  pro- 
tecto  non  solum  mihi  fcceris,"  sed  omnibus  qui  adsunt,  si  rem  a  principio 
repetere  yolueris.-2;j.  Ab  eS  potissimum  parte  ordiamur,  qua?  omnibus 
maxime  liqucre  (Ai  id  c?^/-)  vidotur.— 24.  A  prima  a?tate  me  omnis  ars  et 
doctrlna  {knoidedr/e)  liberalis,   inprlmis  autem   i^hilosophia   delectavit  — 
~'':      !f..^'7";'"^  *^^'  ^^'^'"'^^  instituta  {habits)  q\  cultum^^  Armenidrum^^  imitatus 
est.— .0.^ Arboivs  ab  «quinoctio  autumni^^  ad  Vergiliarum-  ortum  serere 
licet— ^<.  JNos  ita  a  pueris  instituti^"  sumus,  ut  senes  summa  reverentia 
(^r//^  r6'm-e/?aO  prosequer(}mur.^'-'-28.  Di  prohibcbunt  Iktc,  sed  nunquam 
propter  me  de  cado  descendent.— 29.  Obsides  Tarentini  (^  112,  B)  comnre- 
hensi,-  virgis- cirsi,-  et  de  saxo  TarpOjo-dejecti  sunt.-30.  Deflexif- jam 
aliquantuui  de  hac  yul  consuetudo  ma  jorum.— 31.  Ctesar  proposuit  (fo  W 
cU>se)  iixA^  quisque  de  Divitiaco  apud  se  dixisset.-32.  Vos  veio  voluntatem 

^///.'/:7?//.fl"n^^^''^w'n  '!^  ^'''''''T  ^'^^  i'Jood faith)  ex  fortun^B  invidia 
{ill-^ctn)  judic^t,s.-33.  De  hac  iv  idura  ad  te  scriberem,  si  otium  haberem. 
—34.  Apud  i^abium  multa  de  republica  et  de  legibus  disputavi  — 35  C'ice- 
'■;;;;;'  ^l<;.r7"^l'^-]  ''l>»-i  «"per  ab  Angelo  3Iajo ^reperti  {discover)  et'editi- 
i.nn  ;~  •■  f^^l.^^'»^^^'".^  exemphs  alia  multa  adjicere  possem,  si  de  huius 
u.  nxpn-ns  q.im  vellem.-37.  De  omnibus  his  rebus  melius  postea 
•  /  ;  >Q~iT  ,  ^^*''  ^'""^  qua'ivre,  quid  ego  de  republica  sentiam  (to 
!mii  "7^'  7  \J='C/'^' ^;;^"ja  Oesar  magnis  itineribus  ad  exercitum  ire  con- 
m     w/r;f" '^'"^;-t^-  J^l^'  '^i^  "^^'''^l^'^N  "^^'1  ^le  suo  sup])licio  (death),  sed 

mi      -^/^ /)"'''!''';  ^"-^'^'^'^'^^^^  Teliseloco  superiore  a  miiilibas 

Vy^^"i^  (^>  thro^r),  liostium  acies  lacile  perfracta-"  est.— 42.  Hannibal    ex 

lam  '>'-r'^T'  i'^c"^"^  ^'")  ai^"^l  Zamam  a  Scipione  victus  est.— 43.  Cicero 
ltd  ex  biciha  decessit,  ut  biculis  omnibus  jucundam  diuturnamque  [lasiircg) 

*'!2^^S^'"''^"^''<'^-^^'-<^ay\irc.-'rTo  lead  to.  to  approach.-^  To  rout -^  Vercenarii 


V  r    o  o  >  i  r4'ni'bo  h- "''r  J/^^  ^<'"^''''^  cdian /acere,  to  do  .om^l^od    a 

bring 
frincjire,  to  brcaY.''  ^"'^^•'""•- ^'-^*^««''^,  w  luru  oxi.-'^^  Edere,  to  publish. -2«  p/^J 


<>b  Hm'  him  .rr...itiir      14  'pf,;.  1  — ^- ■■"'-"'»  «-€..!€€  /uoc/^e.  lu  uu  souii-Doav  a  nr<at  lavor. 


58 


PREPOSITIONS. 


memoriam  nominis  sni  rclinquerct.— 44.  Ex  co  tempore  lei-es  et  conpuetn- 
dines  veteres,  paulillini  (r/radufdlt/)  labefactflri  {to  tot(er)c(v\^{iXi  sunt.— 4.).  Lx 
illo  die  Tarenilni  detectionem  {^ea'ssum)  ad  hostls  nuHlitan  ccepCrunt  — 4(.. 
Turn  ex  siimmil  annoniT3  caritatc^'  et  inopiiV«  ineredibdis  snluto  vilitas 
rei  frinnentaric-e-»»  eonseeuta  est.^*'— 47.  Atrieanus  coc^nnmon  {hi.s  .vnnawie) 
ex  virtute  diixit.— 48.  Tales  truetus  ex  dili-entia  et  probitate^'^  pereipi  pos- 
sunt— 49  Ex  hac  re  colliiri  potest,  quantum  detrimenti  ex  honunis  illlus 
IVaudibus  ceperim.-oO.  Quieslvit  ex  me  Curio,  qua  de  causfl  se  ad  Pom- 
pOium  sequi  noluissem.— 51.  Lueretius  docuit,  ndnl  posse  ex  ndulo  (^  .JOO, 
KIT)  crelu-i  —53.  Nero  ex  comphiribus  templis  statuas  ex  auro  ai\i,n'ntove 
fabrieatas"  detraxit^*  et  eontlavit.^*^— 53.  Duo  e  ISIaeedonum  gente  reges 
niulto  ceteros  rerum  gestarum^"  gloria  supenlbant,  Plnlippus,  AiiVvnt^^^;. 
lilius  et  Alexander  .Alagnus.— 54.  Hoc  ex  omnibus,  (lune  pioposui,  ditheilli- 
nium  esse  vidctur.— 55'.  Civcs  de  quibus  multi  ex  muritipugnabant,  orabant 
dueem,  ne  urbem  liostibus  traderet. 

1    AVhen  I  had  left  {dL^cedere)  Cicsar,  I  saw  that  I  had  been  more  than 
one  hour  with  him.— 2.  I  have  been  informed  by  letter,  that  our  army  has 
departed  iprofidsci)  from  the  boundaries  of  the  Parthi,  and  is  marclung 
(iter  facere)  toward  Cilieia.— 3.  After^»  the  army  of  the  enemy  had  been 
driven  (pellere)  from  the  eitv,'"-'  Eumenes  betcjok*"  himsell  to  the  km-.— 
4  The  territory  (finc.'^)  of  the  Santones  is  not  far  distant  Inmi  the  territory 
of  the  Tolosatians.*'— 5.  Ca?sar  was"'^  no  larther  than  1500  paces  from  the 
enemy.— 6.  The  star  Mercury  moves  {feni)  below  [the  star]  \enus  with 
(by)  incredible  swiftness  around  the  sun,  tVom  which  it  never  is  hirther 
distant  than  the  space  {intcrndhim)  of  one  sign  [of  the  Zodiac].— 7.  The 
Hellespont  separates  Asia  from  Europe— 8.  Separate  {srjungo-e)  thyselt 
from  triends  to  whom  the  necessitv  of  the  times  has  led  {perducere)  thee 
for  a  while  {aliqiiamdiu).—^.  The  Helvetians,  when  they  understood  that 
they  could  not  keep  {ara-n')  our  troops  from  the  river,  suddenly  changed 
their  plan  and  attacked  our  columns  by  the  rear."'^— 10.  Let  us  see,  whether 
we  cannot  free  the  city  from  the  tvrant.— 11.  The  Massilians,"*  who  derive 
rthcir]  ori^nn  from  the  Phoceans,"'  alwavs  have  preserved  {xcrrare)  Greek 
arts  and  literature.- 12.  We  must  neither  ask  nor  accept  lavors  ot  such 
kind  even  from  our  best  friends.""— 13.  I  should  think  {nemo)  that  you  may 
ohX'A\  {impetravc)  this  from  the  king.— 14.  The  Carthaginians  were  so  ter- 
rified by  these  evils,  that  they  even  asked  auxiliary  troops  trom  the  Romans, 
and  obtained  them.— 15.  During  all  this  time  I  have  received  one  letter  ot 
thee- 16.  The  delegates  praved  {ordre)  Ctesar,  not  to  sutler  {pati),  that 
Unf.  clau.se)  the  state,  by  the  bad  {pran<s)  councils  of  young  men,  should 
secede  from  the  alleL^iance  {amicitia)  of  the  Roman  people.— 17.  The  Stoics 
differ  from  the  Peripatetics  {Penpateticus)  not  in  (by)  words,  but  in  {hi/)  the 
whole  matter  (m).— 18.  By  these  proceedings  {re.s)  it  was  brought  about, 
that  the  minds  of  almost  all  citizens  were  turned  {itrcrtn-e)  Irom  [their] 
chief.— 19.  My  pleasure  has  never  called  me  away  {avocdre)  from  any  one's 

27  Svmma  carifcut,  the  highe«»t  prices  (literally :  crreate^^t  doarncss).-"  Scarcity.— 
2»  Cheauness.— 30  Jits  friimentaria,  provis^ions.— =»i  Co/n^eg'ti.  to  loUow.— '-  llomsty.— 
«  FabncCire.  to  inanuractiire,  Ibrm.-^^  Detrahere,  to  voh.—^"  Conjldre  to  melt  up.-3«  Aes 
Q^^dt  (leeclsf  —37  Norn.  A/iii/nta-^.—^"  Part.  claase.-3«  Tlie  army  had  besie<:ed  tl»e  cUy.— 
4"  Coufcrro  — ••'  A  Tolo.-alian  (iutmbitaut  of  the  modern  Toulouse),  Tolosa:»,  Gen.  atis  — 
*3  Abees^e  —  *"  Trans^late  :  and.  after  iheir  plan  had  been  chan.<;ed  (part,  clau-e)  suddenly, 
attacked  our  columns  (agmen)  by  the  rear.— ^^Ma^silien^s.— "MMiocicensis.-*»  Irans- 
.ate  :  Favor.-i  of  such  kind  we  must  not  even  from  our  best  friends  cither  ask  {petere)  or 
accept  — ■»^  To  bfiiv^  about,  facere. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


59 


interest  {cwnmodum). — 20.  Divitiacus  was  of  opinion  {cemere),  that  Ca?sar 
was  able  to  protect  the  whole  of  Gaul  from  the  aggressions  {injuria)  of 
Aiiovistus.— 21.  Since  we  cannot  protect  ourselves  against  the  aggressions 

of  the  Germans,  we  shall  l)e  ol)lige(l  {dihcre)  to  ask'the  help  of  others. 

22.  All  places  that  were  behind  Cavsar  were  safe  from  the  enemy. — 28.  Let 
lis  examine  {repsiere)  the  Avhole  matter  from  the  very  begin ning.^'^ — 24.  I 
should  wish,  that  thou  wouldst  just  begin  with  that  point  {lory.s),  which  it 
is  ni'cessary  to  understand  l)efore  the  others. — 25.  From  my  first  bovhood 


the  sake  of  tiie  republic— 28.  With  the  Romans  the  age  of  childhood 
{infantia)  was  reckoned"  from  the  first  to  the  seventh  j-ear.— 29.  Winter 
and  storms  {tcmpcsiasi)  usually  begin  with  the  rising  of  the  Pleiades. 

30.  So  great  was  the  bravery  of  the  soldiers,  that,  although  they  were 
pressed  by  the  greatest  quantity  {multitt'ul»)  of  darts  {telum),  still  nobody 
went  {dt'ced<'n)  from  the  rampart.— ol.  The  citizens  themselves  defended 
the  walls,  from  which  they  had  driven  {pellere)  the  enemy. — 32.  I  do  not 
know,  whether  not  i)erhai)s  some  also  of  you  have  deviiited  {deflectere)  a 
little  from  the  right  {rectus)  path.'^— 33.  I  shall  neither  write  of  my  labors 
nor  of  thy  expectations.— 34.  Thou  wilt  do  {fut.  2^erf.)  me  a  great  favor  in- 
deed, if  thou  wilt  indicate  {fut.  perf.)  to  me,  wliat  Sulpicius  has  said  of  me 
in  thy  house.— 35.  These  matters,  concerning  which  w(!  lately  had  a  con- 

veistition^'^  with  each  other,  are  as  little  important  (^  412)  as  I  expected. 

3G.  The  leaders  quarrelled  {contendere)  with  each  'otlu'r  for  the  hi^-hest 
command.— 37.  The  question  concerning  taxes"  and  duties"  has  notl)ecn 
settled^"  yet.— 38.  I  see  no  reason,  why  you  should  desj-iair  of  3'our  welfare. 
— 39.  The  law  on  the  rights  of  foreign-born  citizens^"  has  been  carried  b\^ 
all  votes  except  three.— 40.  I  have  sent  you  by  the  letter-carrier  the  books 
which  I  have  written  on  i)hi!osoi)hy.     See  what  you  can  do  with  them. 

41.  I  sailed  from  the  PineCiis  three  days  after  I  had  seen  thee  in  the 
liouse  of  Sulpieius.— 42.  Ciesar  took  (deduce re)  three  legions,  which  were 
wintering  {hiemdre)  about  Aquileja,  from  their  winterquarters  {Jdbernu).—- 
43.  When  Verres  had  returned  fn^m  Sieily,  he  was  aecused  by  the  Sicilians 
ot  malversation**"  and  other  crimes. — i4.  Ariovistus  demanded,  that  Caesar 
and  his  army  should  leave  {decedere)  Gaul.— 45.  The  citizens  saw  from  the 
wails,  that  the  enemy  was  retreating.— 40.  Both  centurions  during  the  whole 
battle  Ibught  on  horseback.— 47.  Since  this  time  Jugurtha  began  more  and 
more*"  to  deviate  from  the  right  path,  and  to  throw  oil{ed>Jic€re)  all  shame*"' 
and  restraint."— 48.  Since  this  dav  the  Greeks  began  to  despair  of  [ their! 
liberty,  and  gradually*^^  to  submit"'  to  foreign  {alienus)  rule.'"— 49.  Since 
that  day  I  liave  leceived  no  letter  of  ilieeX-50.  When*'"  the  pirates  had 
been  destroyed  {tolhn)  by  Pompey,  the  highest  security  {securitas)  followed 


C8 


<«  Pnncipium.  caput.-*»  Societas.-6o  jha^e  of  my,  thy.  his.  etc.,  age.  a^quSles.-^M  Trans- 
late :  '/ hare  heard  Diododisr  that  is  :  his  teachiii^r.  Preceptor  meus  fuit  would  mean  • 
He  liehl  tlio  o/Aft  as  my  teacher.— ^*-^  Susciperc— 53  To  reckon,  habere.—^*  Via  — s»  To  fiav'e 
a  convtrmfioit.  disf-erere.- «fi  .1  tax.  vectliral.— 6' yl  duty  (as  impost)  portorium  — »»  2b 
seme,  constituere.— 5«  .4  foreign-born  citizen,  poreirrlnus.— «0  J/o/^Y.;>^arw«.  repetund-e 
(supply ;  pecmne).  meamn,Lr  properly :  money  to  hv.  asked  back.— «1  More  and  more  ma-'i^ 
flV  T?'**/--~  ,*  ^  ^'r'"C<''i<Ha.-«3  Modu.-^.-s-»  raullatim.-»^  Se  eubmittere.-««  DomiuatioT- 
"^  Partic.  clause.— «=|  Consequi. 


GO 


PREPOSITIOXS. 


su.lclenly  up.^n  .ho  groato«t  excitement  •«»,..,  of  mo. -o  1 1  n  .. 
(lerivoa  {dueere)  this  ..|n.u..i.  l.oiu  «■  /^^  ';  ^*^,  '  ',v,,  r,,  lisastor  .)1' the 
(,•„.,„»•«, ., ).  that  1 !'«, V';'^\^;::;r;  7  ;  n  a'n.    i      ,-e  luc  derivod  IVom 

'since  wljat  tin.o  he  1;»'^  ^  1?!  ll .  n    %  S« '"  h    la^     that  >he  eiti- 

i>ian\  oi  uiL  iiii.Mur>  v/i  roiw.!'*  «»i' tlii'ui    ^nti-'-oiuis,  was  killed, 

crowns  {rerpunn)  a  icr  lus  deaUK     [O m       <>t  ^':,     ''j^     :],.,  ...^^  one  of  his 

Stances.     Farewell. 

Cum     rii.E.    Tko.    Sine.    Cokam.    Tekus. 

sunt  Gemulnjs,  U'\ '■'";-,,,;'',;    ,;\,  I  .'.'nn.lun.onti»  ceperit  ex 
__U    ^"^^^1^%!^^^^^^^         1  suninias  ciuuleni  hominuni  vides  vinutes.-13. 

^rf^-^^^^^^^^  ^^^  ^::-^-^::!^^^^- 


-^;:^;;;;^^^;;^  Ampnus.-"  Proljlt..^^  rarsi^onm. - 


-T*  When  the 

live,  the  numeral  ^-  one-  must  be  ^'"^   f ^;-;  , ^^  \  ^^  ^^  copiU  lU  4  or  .•nlver.utive  con- 
UleUitive  clauses  ^n=ly ''^  "^^/V^'^^^a^,  "S  '  L^r;     o  piin.-^  To  embrace.- 

jnnctions  in   Latin  (See  l):  ■»•*' ^^r' ^;,'^,^^  ;^^^^^^^^^  hard  a-ain.t 

^'Alimdd  dun  adrerms  ^^^^'^'l^Xn^^^^^^^^  For  the  ct.u.pa.^iive 

.omeWljO  means  :m^einp^  TrembUn,.-«  Decency.--  ^V  h.ch 

lufhad  sufferedf-n  In  his  face  and  bearln-. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


61 


Liuario,  pro  :Marcello,  pro  rcgc  Dojotaro  orationcs  apud  Cassarem  habitse" 
sunt. — IT.  Qiuesierani  ex  Semproiiio,  utrum  ipse  pro  judicibiis  locQtus  esset, 
an  alius  quidam  causani  pro  eo  c^nsset.'^'— 18.  Qiuedam  incommoda  pro  eis 
sunt  ([uibiis  accidGruut,  et  quitdam  quae  laudantur  atque  appetuntur  {to 
ronf)  contra  eos  sunt  (pios  delectavCrunt.— 19.  Aliquanidiu  {for  some  time) 
eiiam  niilituin  nostroruin  impetus  inipedltus  est  eo  {bi/  the  fact)  quod  Ger- 
niani   pro  vallo  carros**  suos   a.i^gredientibus   objecerant.^^— 20.    Senfitus 
La'torio  pra?scripsit,  ut  soleninia'"  pro  pontitice^'  susciperet.— 21.  Galba  pro 
l)rirtr)re  ad  exercitum  missus  est.— 22.  Peto  nunc  abs  te  mercGdem  pro  la- 
bore  moo.— 2:3.  Equidem  pro  liac  statua  dimidium  ejus  quod  petis  tibi  dabo. 
— 24.  C'{X?sar  singulis  civitatibus  pro  civium  numero  vectigalia  imposuit.**" — 
2.).  Quid  aliud  pro  tua  erga  me  amicitia  facere  potes?— 20^  Crustumlnis  {the 
Crustumuii)  vero  pro  inopia  {poverty)  eorum'"  agrum  (suum)  restituit.— 
27.  Ca'.sar  C'iceronem  pro  ejus  merito  laudat— 28.  Nonne  banc  rem  pro  tua 
mihi  vendidistiV — 20.  Supervacuunr"  est,  ostendere,  mundum  non  sine  ali- 
(juo  custode"*  stare  {to  Id.st)  po.sse.— :jO.  ^larcet'-  sine  adversario  virtus.— 31. 
r^cisne  tu,  eum  sine  gloria  vinci,  qtn  sine  periculo  vincilurV— 32.  PompPjus 
boc  sine  ulla  dubitatione  faciet ;  sed  nosti  liominis  tarditatem''"*  et  taciturni- 
tatem.'-'*— 33.  Quis  uiuiuam  tot  scelera  ab  uno  bomine  sine  ulla  dubitatione 
eommissaesse  audlvit  V- 34.  Timoleon  tantuni  babuitamoreni  omnium  Sicu- 
lorum,  ut  nullo  recusante  regnum  obtinCret.— 35.  Atlienienses  imi)etum,  ijon 
exspectato^auxilio,  fecCrunt.— 30.  Komani  non  rogati  Graecis  auxilium  obtu- 
ICrunt. — 37.  Maidius  cpuim"^  Semiu'onio  banc  pecuniam  credidisset'-*®  neque 
ullam  ab  eo  salisdationenr'  {.'\Q'j:\<>^{ii  {to  denKHid),  tanien  i)aucis  mensibus 
post  ca'pit  diliidere  {to  bm  conji(teue().—o^.  Tu  vero  rei)etas  velim  ea,  quae 
niibi  coram  genero  meo  dicere  ausus  es.— 31).  Quid  cogiias  de  eis,  qui  aliGna 
()mnia'Vlesi)icientes,  suarum  reruni  {dmh)  magnitudiiiem  coelo  teuus  extol- 
lere  solent  r* 

1.  Crassus  left  (r.?'7/v)  witb  two  messengers  the  ^vinterquarters. — 2.  Han- 
nibal defealL-d  Flaminius  at  the  lake  TnisimPuus,  and  a  few  davs  later  C. 
C"entenius,wh<)  was  occupying  the  mountains  with  a  select-'  force  {mitnus). 
—3.  God  be  with  you,  O  children.  —4.  In  the  meanwhile  {Item.  26)  we  are 
amusing  {dekctnrc)  ourselves  quietly''"  with  {in  company  of)  the  Muses.— 
o.  SuK'c  the  face^'  of  Domitius  did  not  agree  {conftentlrc)  with  his  words,'*'' 
and  [since  he]  against'-'  [his]  custom  spoke  much  with  his  [attendants], 
the  matter  coidd  not  be  concealed^*  and  denied=*^  [j^"y]  longer.— 0.  The 
entertainment'"' was  i)rovided  {iiKstructUf<)  with  everything  necessary.— 7.  It 
so(m  becomes  evident,"  whether  one'''*  has  been  educated  in  (/yy)  a  vulgar 
{c'U'jdrix)  manner  {ino.s\  or  [whether]  he  is  endowed  {i)istruct)(s)\\\\\\  those 
liberaP"  arts,  which  are  in  liie  gift*"  of  the  Muses.— 8.  When  the  Latins  had 
come  {acccdcn)  to  tiie  Xi^ry  gates  of  the  city,  and  had  returned  to  their 
camp,  loaded  with*'  booty,  the  consul  Quinctius  called  {cocdre)  the  people 
to  a  nieeting  (rv///r/V>).— y.  Although  thou  art  a  consul,  and  he  {that  one)  [is] 
a  pjivate  [man],  1  yet  believe,  thai  thou  iu  comparison  with  him,  art  not 


"  IlahZre,  to  deliver.— -3  Cai/sam  agere,  to  conduct  a  case. 
oppo>e.— 16  ^•oA7/<//ia  .v?/.s(vy/^/(-.  to  perlbrm  the  reIi-,nous  cer 
hiuh  priest,  a  hijrli  t^aceniotal  ullice  in  Home.— i"  Ittiitonirc  w 
1"  W  hy  not  auur—-''  Supertluous.— -^  Ruler,  •guardian.— 22  Mat 
—'•'  blownes^y.— •-:*  Taeiturnitv.— 26  Althou,t,'h.— •-«  To  lend.— '- 
noun  ••deeds."— 2»  Delect  us— 3". Equo  annuo.- 3>  Vultus.— '2 
"  Kern.  40.— 3*Te<2:ere.~36Dij;siiuuhlre.— 3«Conviviuin.— 3'  Tr 
—35  Transl. :  '•  some  one."— 3»  Incrpmins  — «u 


iL'cnuus.- 


Tran^l. :  which 


t.o  men.— <!  Trausl. :  ••  driviu^j  [theirj  booty  before  them." 


"  Catrus.  a  cart.— J=  To 
enioiiies.— 17  The  pontiiex, 
ilh  dative,  to  levy  upon.— 
'Cere,  to  droop,  to  lau<,niish. 
'  Security. — 28  Supply   tlie 

Trani^l.:  upeech  (oratio). — 
ansl. :  It  is  easily  declared. 

the  Muses  give  {tribuere} 


Q2  PREPOSITIONS. 

even  a  h.u.an  '.ein.^-lO   I  %'^:'^Z^((^i:'^^y^^^^"^ 

art  on  account  "f  ll.v]  •'''^'?"\-/'vi  S  , .»  ,,r  "  wil  1  h 'asi."--!:).  Ho- 
Ufe  very  face  ami  gait  ''f ''»;'",";,;',  •,-,,,  t ,  .1  c  for  [one's]  country, 
race  says,  tl.at  it  't^""'V  "  i,  1      n        m'.'  t"  l)ct>.re  the  i.r;etor.-lo. 

-It.  Tl,c  ,iu<l,!re  (iM-eclci  Cajii^  '         '         li' ,  ,'„  for  ,nysclf.-10.  Demos- 

thencss  oration  lor  C  esipUon  <?"'■. ^^Tfji,,,.  „u.cli  Atlicns  l.a.l  done 

praised  even  by  his  f^"'"'''^>;;^:?    '  '  .  f,,,  n  I ll.cirl  ni..urning"  at  (r/'"'; 

br  Lis  frietuls,  conkl  be  seen  1 ,'!    "^^'    ,   ^  '  ,,    'e"  tiees  as  restini;-l>^'«s," 

tiv!)  bis  fnncral   /««''»^^'1.■»         7ln^  t  .ke*"    Iheirl  rest  (r'-V")-!»-  Vale- 
A^^inst  (mO  tbese  tlK'y  leaix    «ml     > »   .^^^^^  i.^V.s    -lace  to  (be 

rii.s  besought  (orare)  the  e™^'  •;."{'    ™  , .  I    ,,  „7  consi.l.i-  (huKn^  '><y 

conference  (<•"««?"""!;  -f^.  Senate  set'Spronius  as  a  proconsul  to  the 
l,ot.seasbis[ownl.-^l.  Ibe^^'i^^    'j  ^.^.^^^^  „,^  enemy  wtb 

armv.-23.  CiFsar  sent  Amilius -vuth  t«.)     =•  .-         j^^.pthnius  in  his 

U.e  -power  of  a  ^^^^:^^!^'^^:^!^^..  bad  eVeCe.l  (/,«•.;.) 
stead  t.)  the  Insitbnai.s.-24  11  J   u,  ti^t;  >  ,  .^,„,  ,„e  town  froin  .the 

a  castle  (cmunum).  you  y'!  '  '■'J^'j^J^Vs  \.'  thai  slave.-2(i.  Kin.^  Mco- 
enemy.-25.  I  have  given  ^•^>"^^,f  „''^1,^^  del  Is"  of  the  Cnidians"'  tor  one 
mcdes  was  wil  ing  to  l'/>y/*;  "  \'^|,^.,''ri  .  ,,,^v«'.<''v)  art  to  riches,  re- 
statue  of  Praxiteles  But  \''<;':\',  ',V, ',  «w-a"  lb  -u  askest  (vetcre)  for  that 
fused  (n«ifc).-37.  l«k^('"-"i<';  '  ,  ,  , rd  us  we  return  (-V'-'O  (>«)  Vou 
horse.-28.  For  y^»--..  '">'*!;  »'4,,  ::^'t;'i,.';,'.v  wish  t..  punish  son.e  one 


'j^^^^excLcdb^gly  according  10  his, m.it«- 

tbat  be  could  m.t  come  '  V^^^,  "'T;\v  ,,,t  Sulpieius  has  toUU«"mir<- 
[do]"  nothing  without  God  »  .'*^' l'^-;^;  !„  •.    ,'  „„,l'oubtedly  invented  '  and 
(to)  us  about  the  victories  ot  the  um}^       that  be,  without  any  lus.ta- 
•alse.-3«.  Oajus    uis  >\""™^'^,„^,^      ",",    1 1  this  book.-:!?.  Cicero  wrote 
tion,  was  sharing  O'™'","'').   '  ". '       "  „  cVesar's  pr.-s,.nce.-y8.  Thou  canst 
to  Oppius,  what  be  had  «''V'\'''  o  "  „,ei. odv's  fcerings.'"-39.  When  he 
^y  t^thitlg  at  all  ^^"^'^:^%J^'^^^^^^.»Ii  being  able  to  see 
batl  told  {edere)  li.s  "f"'^  ^   bouse  ^0    lie  left  th..  bouse,  wiUu.ut  being 
any  one.  be  lett  («<■«&')  \"^, .  '  '^;r1vilb..ul  taking  (habirc)  any  regard 
seen"'  by  any  ."!"-';-*l-,f,..     ,\'»_4o\Yili  Ibou  dare  to  repeal»'  that  m 
iratio)  for  (gemtiK)  my  toUh-  -^-  " '"^ 


I 


PREPOSITIONS.  63 

my  face  ?— 43.  The  army  of  Alexander  marched  (proficisci)  as  far  as  the 
Indus. 

AY  WITH    THE    AcCUSxVTIYE. 

1.  Ilamilcar,  his  relms  ex  sentcntia  peractis/  cum  exercitu  in  Ilispaniam 
missus  est.— 2.  Arar  flumen  per  finis  ^Edudrum  in  lihodanum  influit  in- 
credibili^  lcnitute/  (Ita)  ut  ocuHs,  in  utram  partem  fluat,*  judicari'  non 
l)()ssit.— :3.  Id  llclvc'tii,  qui  in  montem  sese  receperant,  conspicati "  proe- 
huin  renovare  capCrunt.— 4.  Cicero  obsecrSvit  Caesarem,  ut  Marcello  in 
patnani  redlrc  permitteret.— 5.  Aristldes  per  civium  suOrum  suffragia  in 
exdnun   missus   est.— «.  Quamquam  Demetrius   liliam   suam  Seleuco  in 
matninonium  dederat,  fida  inter  eos  amicitia  manCre  non  potuit.— 7.  Pom- 
pCjus  Juliam,Ca'saris  tiliain,in  matrimonium  duxerat,  cujus  morte  ultimum 
quod  inter  eos  fuit  vincuhim  ruptum  est.— 8.  Metelhis,  postquam  in  pro- 
viiK'iam  advcnit,  imprimis  milituin  discipllnam  ad  pristinam  conditionem 
r('(hi,^ere  stU(Uiit.— 9.  Keliqui  sese   fugoe   mandilrunt  (to  betake),  atque  in 
l^roxunas  silvas  abdidCrunt.— 10.  Caesar  Divitiaci  summum  in  popuiuni 
Komanum  studium  [zeal)  et  summam  in  se  vohmtatein  {nttachynent)  cogno- 
verat.'— 11.  Caesar  LabiCnum  cum  duilbus  legionibus  impetum  in  muni- 
tiones  facere  jussit.— 12.  Metelius  Mariuni  ad  se  in  tentorium^  invitavit 
oravit(iue  ne  ejusmodi  exspeetationes  conciperet,  admonuit  etiam,  ut  iri 
tulurum  se  pro  loco'-*  et  conditione  sua  gereret.'"— 13.  Sumptus,  quos  in 
lianc  rem  fccisti,  liaud  iacile  recuperabis.— 14.  Lucullus   amplius  decies 
centCna  millia  sestertium  in  unam  coenam  impendit."— 15.  Sempronius  ex 
consuliltu  in  Ilispaniam  i)r()rectus  est,— 16.  Publicani'"^  rogabant  me,  ut 
hac  vectigalia  in  se  transferrem  {to  tranffer).— 17.  Omnes  magistrStus  sup- 
plicabant  {to  peiitiu,,)  me,  ne  nova  onera  in  provinciam  imponerem  {to  lay). 
—18.  Omnia  tibi  libere  {openly)  scribain,  qute  mihi  ea  de  re  in  mentem 
venOrunt.— 11).  Ex  lltteris  tuis  cognOvi,  te  in  PompCji  gratiam  redisse.— 
20.  Boji  Ca^sarem  imi^lorabant,  ut  se  in  fidem  et  amicitiam  reciperet.— 21. 
Caesar  banc  civitatem  in  deibtionem  accipere  noluit,  propterea  quod  fidem 
(?Ai'i/- 7f (>/•(/)  jure  jurando  confirmatam  {to  strengthen)  non  servassent.- '>'> 


'i^fii. 


Dunmorix  vecligalia  et  portoria  omnia  in  decern  annos  redemerat."— 23. 
Hex  senatui  scripsit,  velle  se  in  omne  tempus  amicitiam  cum  populo  Ro- 
mano liabPre  (Awy;).- 24.  Fac  ne  ulkim  omnino  negotium  in  posterum 
{ncvt)  diem  dltleras  {to  postpone).— "ir).  Apud  Komanos  censores  in  quin- 
quennium^^ creabanlur.— 20.  Utrlque  consuli'^  imperium  in  annum  proro- 
gatum est  {to  continue). 

1.  Ilamilcar  took  his  son  Hannibal  over'"  to  Spain.— 2.  The  Senate  de- 
creed, that  Scipio  should  go  as  i)roconsul  to  the  province.— 3.  I  have 
learned  {cognoHcere)  from  tliy  lett.r,  tbat  Pompey  has  gone  to  Greece.— 
4.  La.'sar  sent  his  whole  cavalry  forward^'  in  order  to  ascertain  {cognoscere) 


^  Perar/ere  to  accomplish. -2  incredible.— 3  Smoothness.— *  To  run —s  To  decide - 
ofte'.M-ir.;*f  v..?!;?'!.-"'-'  I^,P  l^^'"'-'"'"^  «^'  ^0(/>'0^'<^ere  irequently  i.  u.ed  Mith  the  force 
n  itic     H  n    vV    L  "^  'r-.~  /":'  f  "V/''''  ^"'"^-    '^^^*'  "'^'•^^  «^  '^  «^*  tentorium  are  idio- 

coim.f.rf  r.n^-  '  f'"'"'.^;  n^*"  purpose  of  a  pergonal  interview.-"  Positi<»n.-io  6e  gerere,  to 
S  cr.v^in1  '"'is-^j-^*'  ^Pfnd.->2p,,6/?,',w,,,v,  a  publican;  that  is:  a  farmer  of  the 
Vh  in  /n  J  •"  .-^^^^''^^^'  ^^  buy.-M  Quinqiieiudum,  a  period  of  five  years.-is  Tlie 
^ni  irt  ->-*^"/  7"  ^o"^'»"e  the  command  to  the  consul :  we  say:  the  command  o/the  con- 
6ai.-i«  Jo  take  over,  transducere.-i^  To  send  forward,  pritraittere. 


{ 


6i 


PRErOSITIOKS. 


in  what  (lircclion  tl.e  cnomv  were  iiiardnn-  (iter  f„rere)--.>.  Ciesai  wilh- 

Z^mZZ)  his  tf..o|«  on  tlie  next  hill,  anM  susmnuM  Ihe  "tuu^k  ot  the 

m.im  IvrhiVcavalrv-O.  Cicsar  dkl  this  chiclly  tor  this  reason  (n  M, 

mo    he     .  ritory  of  The    Ie)vetians.-T.  Although  Caesar  ha(    n';"'    '  I      ;; 


PEETOSITIOXS. 


65 


ilV  WITH  THE  Ablative.    Ablatives  op  Place  axd  Time. 
.ibus?eu,mfer's\7n,t!?r"'"'"!-"-^-  ^^^"""^  '"  l''*'"'!"'"^  -Min.nrnen- 


Tr  t  CT  D  vi  iacus  was  restored  to  his  former  i.osilion  (loa,>)  ol  inllneneo 
and     ono  -  a  The  tribunes  coniplainea  lou.Uy  -  that  the  «ar  a^a 
I ,  'or    a  was  carried  on  ('jercn)  witli  the  greatest  neshgenee.— 14.  Wle.r 
s  Z  .V;ri™l  ii^tl^^^^^  lis  armv,  the  citizens,  terr.tied,  concealed 

U    mse Ive    i        e     hoi   es^lo.  For  I  know  thy  great"  zeal  for  inv  mler- 
elt"  md  fllivl  nnalUM-ahle"  friendship  t.iward  me  and  my  lamily.-lO. 
r'Ur  c  lied  1)         orix   to  liim,  and  admonished  him,  to  av..id  lor  the 
^,m?e  -Is   'ok  is -n.  Often  very  vahiahle-  things  are  thrown  (,;;,«,•. 
o      he  sSl-J-nlhe  shores.-18jhey,ng spent  an  .norm 

tsumptus  inqentU)  for  the  wedding  ol  his  ''■''V^'l''^''^--  •'■  '.'J;'''":;,  '"™    ' 
•,|.U- after  the  expiration  of  his  term  as  i)netor,  went  to  t5ieil\.— -0.  Uccio 
was  af,  lid  lest  aiu' r  he  expiration  of  his  term  as  consul  he  might  .e  thn>wn 
nto  ^rii'l-aC  Upon  (ri.iht  after,  this  attack  all  ^^'^^^^^^IZ^ 
turned  (.«  eoMin-terc)  into  a  most  d.sgraceUil  ihghl.-ii-  l,'-»";!"^^:',',.';';!!!.,,,,,? 


hi'VsonYl  innibal  never  to  L'ive  up"  his  hatred  against  the  Roman  people. 

!!1||.  Do  no   Change  truth  \.nie  t'hings,  into  (^-^'->^>^ ^^^"^^^ 

Ariovistus  made  with  the  cavahy  an  attack  on  the  7,  ".'^  ''^    .'^ --^,  ^,  \',Vv 
(c.«^MV'.  with  inf  clau.se),  that  you  transtca^v.n,r  rieid,li.  t      aid  m^ 

Ln -20.  1  doubled,  whetlier  I  ^''-i'!'^;'^,;'^:  ^ ; .";,     ^'img  hasev^ 
,,,Oon.lK.sep.,.a-..<^a.;s^^^^^ 

thi.s  man  t-ilher  to  thy  friendship  or  .0     0'  l">"f  ;•-•'•  ,Y      "  ,:.'\,:  .'•',.   t 


s  m,'.^;™e  1^  in  rwo'nderful  manner.-:;.-,.  The  higher  (,*y.;0  |;';'S-  rates 
„1-  the  Uomans  were  elected  {crearc)  for  one  (§  ij'Jl  year.-ob.  Ca.»..i  « lotc 
a  book  ill  praise  ot  C;ito. 


:      ; :— V-    ""'"'^  i  I  ^i-niea  jj:uo.s  pricsutisse"  constat/— 7    C<csar  nontp 

m  Aran''  lacto,  exercituni  in  Sequanos  traduxit  {to  lead  ovcA -^'Cym! 
Persariini  rex,  apud  Massap:etas«  in  pra^lio  cecidit-9.  In  liac  fu^^a  Nmni^ 
Che  qui  sinml  cum  Ilann  bale  ex  acie- excesserant,  ei  insidiat^^funt '^ 
10.  C()n.solatur  me  rccordatio  {remembrance)  meorum  ten^^^  rum  Xrum 
niagmem  video m  rebus  tuis.-ll.  N,„,  j,;  vestra    sed  in  ponu 

Komani  clementul  spcs  salutis  (vestra^)  posita  est-r>  In  Inc  re  mi^ns 
ac^rbitate  c^mgltus  sum^l3.  EuphiUor  AmLr!^  ^^^^^J!^ 
p  nxit.   —14.  Xeixes  maximis   exercitibus  terra  marlque   belluni   intulit 

'l!'^:'?iT^''-   ^'^"^''''-  ""l^^^*^"'  ('^^  '''^''^y)  novissimuin   a^.    en  secQ 
A   n    ;   -r'''  ^T^^'^''^''  ^^^^^ti»in  pra>lium  committunt  {conunerJ)-U 
^^r^^  X.iy-'''T  «"^"^^t^>f^  Asia  una  nocte  intilici  jussi    Cv^  .. 
i^v-rr^""  ,"-•"'"'  tempore  judiees  ex   equitibus"  deljo-ebantur '«- 

y    wIIus'n';;.^; •"'""'  -^'-^itum  ex  Aduatici^  in  Nervios  mm^l^it.- 
nnni  -   '  "'  '''"^^''  "''*'^  ^'^^  couivcium  {accomplM),  propterea 

quod  dies  magna  ex  parte  consumptus  est  altercatione  LanJ)  Lentu 

!  tpn,nf\/f  */ />  n  ^  '""^'^  "^*^^^  continenler  {^rlthout  iaterrap- 

Uon)ipmni{tomarcJ,)     Die  quarto  in  linls  Lin-onum  pervenCrunt    cuib 

scqui  n(m  potuihsent.— 21.  In  his  sex  mensibus  Casillnum  ita  est  obsessum 
u    nemo  nee  ex  oppido  c^gredi  {e.vcedere),  nee  in  oppidum  perveilix    o^^^^^^^^ 
-^>^ciu  nt  u'n?Idr^'  iKibentur  (^.^././),  temp;)ie  veri^- et  auti;!^:^  i.- 

Grl^cam  in  Z    ,n  .    li^^^^^ 

t^^^  ^^^^u^'^'l'"T7?''\  "^^^  '''  '^^''^'^  cxercitus  nostri  IWiSores 

luut.— .0.  liello  Punico  terUo  Carthago  a  ScipiOne  minore  diruta  est 

JMiut     D}  uic  cnenn  .—2.  Ot  tiiese  legions  two  were  in  the  Idther  iciferun-) 
and  one  in  the  farther  {ulterior)  province.-3.  In  the  can  p    he  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

wlm  Ui^;;^d^-    '  S,^S:^"^"^^  to  hi,n, 


G(j 


TKEPOSITIONS. 


on  the  bi-hcst  part  (^  3T2,  R.  31)  of  tho  mountain  the  two  legions  aUi  cb 
he  ml  iirst  (;>mrm  -)  dral'tecP»  in  hither  Gaul.-i)  Hannibal  had  led  {uuh.^ 
.m'  Ti  kMiVp^^^  into  an  ambuscade  ni  the  country  of  the 

Lucani  -10.  Let  us  deposit"  these  valuables  (./^'.)  m  the  temple  ot  Dinna 
-11.  Caesar  decreed  to  build  a  bridge  ^^^t  the  rlveMihnu^-U^  .^^^^^^^^^ 
are  mistaken  (to  be  in  an  crror\  O  Sempronius.     .S.  \es,  but  \Nho  led      e 
hUo   I  is    rn)r  v_13.  Caesar  nuirched  on  the  same  road,  as  (on  ^vhlch)  the 
ene  ly  had  gone  before  him.-U.  Know  (thou),  that  the  con  idence  {Jul^ 
of  S  both  in  thy  prudence  and  genius  is  unchanged.-lo.  But  sti  1  ^ve  do 
no   for  anything  si  much-  as  treachery  in  such  a  contusion-  o    things.- 
IG    In  vour  deb^ites"^"  both  history  and  philosophy  are  mutc/Yl''  ^  ^/^ 
nnmes  of  hese  distinguished-^  men  are  in  the  mouth"  o   the  whole  people 
-^  8    1    tly  urgent  {mmmus)  engagements"  tlmu  hast  honored  [dlu.trar.) 
mv  nriv  ite  aflafrs  with  thy  attention  {cura).-l\).  We  saw  the  king  himselt 
b  fv  1^^  a  crow^^^  head.-20.  Cicero's  head  and  hands  were  placed 

Xf/?)  oi?  he  rLtra.-2L  The  ambassadors  of  the  ^dui  said,  that  they 
it  al     iine^^  hid  deserved  so  [well]   of  (Hem.  54)  the  lioman  People,  that 
their  tiel  Is  ou-ht  {ikbere)  not  to  be  laid  waste  {ca.tare)  almost  m  sight  {co,- 
»^cU^  In  this  whole  battle  nobody  could  see   he  back- 

s' ninemy.-2;i^  Nothing  handsomer  can  be  seen  on  the  who  e  eartl.- 
04  Cicero  died  in  the  sixty-fourth  year  ol  [his]  li  e.-2o  At  ^l^^  tunc  the 
hekUniils  if  rax)  generally  are  harvested-  by  [in  the  country  oy)  the  Lgjp- 
th ms.-2G.  On  this  day  the  embassies  of  the  Sicilians  met-  me  in  my  1  - 
rim  villi  ="'—27  In  this  whole  month  grain  was  so  high,'"'  that  haidl> 
Sny  cm  Id  be  i;;u^.t  of  the  corn-dealei-s ---8,  Do  ,.ot  io|^;;^;^t^^;- 
hait  promised  (to)  me  two  letters  a  week  (.^)Jma,.<0.-^iKjhc  Uns  n-c^^ 


cii*>  J^eneraUv  J^rthree  times  a  month.-;iO.  Can  anything  more  uni;>r- 
^.au^  W  l^PPcn  in  men's  lite  V  :u  Dem(^t  lienes  ^^^^^^^ 
n\' i  Ahh,tive\  the  \\w<  delicate  itcnui»)  health  m  youth.— Jw.  At  tlie  ciLCiuns 
t^tlM^\^^^^  liave  broken  out  {exonri)  among  the  c|tizcns.-33. 

brother  Marcus,  were  invited  to  the  conference  {colloquium). 


Sub.    XxVMes  or  Cities. 

stituit.— o.  ±.odcm  uic  ^.  «JL^'^i  /^"  *-    »  civitfitis*  L.  Cass  um  consu- 

submonte  consedisse  (e/ica?«i>).— 4.  liaec  pars  cniuuii»  .^^y.,  .    ,      .,     ., 
lim  interfeceratet  ejus  exercitum  sub  jugum  miserat -o.  ^^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 

noc^c  conqik^cTu'-T.  Alcxundro  Bal.ylonc  morUm  sununa  unpcu  1  er- 


=.  Co„,crlbore.-"  Doponere.-»  Translate  :  -^S.'l^^'io'u^Slo:-"  T^.^lai'^l'" 
tio._s'  To  be  mute,  «biuuiescer.;.-»- 1^^  1,1  "^-     ^-„  r„  „uel   couveiilrc.-»"  TuH-iilun 

^^h!:^t^S^ii^:^'^l^S&,  cotntnunit.  nation.-.  Co. 
quiescere,  to  filcep. 


rREPOSITIONS. 


67 


dicffi"  tradita  est. — 8.  Hannibal  IladrumCti^  reliquos^  ex  fuga  coll5git.' — 
0.  Carthagini  quotannis  bini  reges  creabantur. — 10.  Usee  scrips!  subito  {in 
haste),  quuin  Bruli  servi  Laodiceaj  me  convenissent,  et  se  Roniani  properare 
dixissent.— 11.  Senatus  LatinOrum  principes  Romam  vocavit.— 12.  Hostiuni 
equites  Cajre  usque  pervenCrunt.- 18.  Senat^is  legatos  Coriuthum  mittere 
decrCvit. — 14.  Themistocle^quum  civium  suorum  sutfragiis  e  civitate  ejec- 
tus  esset,  Argos'"  se  contulit.— 15.  Themistocles  LacedaBuionem"  profectus 
est,  ut  cum  eplioris"  de  maMiium  munitione'^  ageret  {to  confer).— W.  Eodeni 


.—19.  Opi 
bcke'^ 


nnago 


a  decemviris  ad  urbem  liomam  arcesslta  est. — 21.  iTannibal 
per  hiemein  in  Capua  oppido  coinmoratus  est. — 22.  Publicani  me  rogarunt, 
cum  Samum  ad  me  venissent,  ut  aliquid  huic  edicto^"  meo  adderem.— 23. 
Consul  copias  suas  Casillnum,  ad  Campania?  oppidum,  direxit.— 24.  Consul 
classem  Emporias,  in  urbem  sociorum  appulit  (liein.  08),  exercitumque 
Tarraconem  ad  socios  et  amicos  populi  Romani  duxit. — 25.  Hannibal  anno 
Ttio  i)ostquam  domo  profugerat,  cum  quinque  navibus  m  Africain  rediit, 
t  Carlhanniensis  ad  bellum  contra  Romanos  induceret.— 20.  Num  solus 


te 

domum  advenisti V— 27.  Nonne  propinquis"*  tuis  rus  ire  in  annno  est? — 
28.  Diodotus  per  multos  annos  domi  nostne  vixit.— 2i}.  Liscus  dixit,  Orge- 
torigem  non  solum  domi,  sed  eliam  apud  linitimos  plurimum  posse  (page 
(jO) — ;',o.  Hie  vir,  cum  domi  militiajque  clarissimus  fuisset,  apud  barbaros 
in  exilio  diem  suprCmum  obiit.*" 

1.  The  citizens  threw*'*'  darts"^  from  the  walls  on  the  besiegers,"  by^ 
which,  however,  since  they  fought  under  cover,'*  not  much  damage  was 
done.— 2.  One  of  the  besiegers  exclaimed  {condamare)  under  the  very  walls 
of  the  town,  that  a  dinner  had  been  prepared  in  the  camp,  if  by  chance" 
the  citizens  {oppidCini)  wished  to  dine.— 3.  Afranius  led  {d£ducere)h.\s  troops 
from  [hisj  canq),  and  placed""  them  on  the  middle  [part]  of  the  hill  below 
[hisj  camp.— 4.  Toward  morning  {lu.v)  the  army  arrived  under  the  walls  of 
the  town.— 5.  The  Corinthians  "thought,  that  it  was  safer  for  {to)  them,  to 
remain  a  little  longer  {paulUper)  under  the  protection  {tutela)  of  a  Roman 
garrison,  than  to  accept  the  nile'^'  of  Antiochus  instead  of  that  of  Philip. — 
d.  At  this  time  the  greatest  part  of  Italy  had  come  under  the  power  {potes- 
tax)  of  Hannibal.— 7.  The  Senate  was  more  numerous  {frequent)  than  we 
had  believed  that  [it]  could  be  in  the  month  of  December  about  the  holi- 
days {diesfestus).—^.  When  I  was  in  Laodic5a,  in  Apamea,  in  Iconium,  and 
in  Synnadd,^*'  in  all  of  which  towns  I  stojiped  {connnordri),  the  magistrates 
and  delegations  (Ufpttio)  of  these  towns  (p.  oJi.n.  GO)  mel''^''  me.— i).  I  have 
done  {perjicere)  with  the  greatest  care=*"  everything  thou  hast  ordered"  (to) 


«  Nom.  Perdiccax.—''  Nom.  Iladrunutum.—^  Instead  of:  €09,  qui  superfu?runt.—^  Col- 
ligere,  to  collect.—»»  The  city  of  .-irj/o-v  is  treated  us  a  Pliirale  tautuiu  except  in  the  Xoiui- 
iiative,  where  it  generally  has  the  Greek  form  of  the  Nom.  ^iul,^  Anjos  (Gen.  Argurum).— 
»'  Nom.  iMctdiiinon.—^^  Ephori,  tlie  ephori,  the  highest  magistrates  after  the  kings  in 
Sparta.— "  Fortification.— »4  J(/r^/<em  to  transpon.— i^  J/a^7/-«.s  early.— *«  To  cross.— 
1"  Nom.  Cyblle.  the  great  goildess,  whose  \\  orship  at  the  time  of  the  decemvirs  was 
bn)nglit  from  Greece  to  Kome.—i»  Edict.— i» /-"/oyyi-'/^wi,  relatives.— 20  Z»ee//i  **</yy/mi«7/i 
ob'ire,  to  ..le.— '»  Conjicere.— 2a  Teluin.— "  Obsidens.— ^^  Translate  :  under  roofs  dec(um). 
—"^^  By  chauce,  forte.— 2«  Constituere.— 2^  Dominatio.— s^Synuada,  Gen.  Orum.— 2»  Couve- 
nlre. — •"  ]\ith,  great  care,  diligeuter.— ^^  Mandirc. 


QC^  rREPOSITIONS. 

„1  ,0  ao]  .v.,enl  w.Ucan,.n  «^;;  ;n  T.;.oc^^ 

of  the  Aeha-i,  was  at  („,  ^'7."  '.     "      .-(".],.'  i  -l>    Q.  Maiciiis  liex,  m  llie 

council  was  l.eUl»  by  Un-  chu-ts  "'''',;>  'fiji,,,-;,-  iVecily.*K-«U''"'««'-<') 

a  eclony  to  Isarbo.-13.    ""-1]"»'*'";    vicit  iadcs  returned  to  AtUeiis  lie 
taken  („M„ccre)  t.)  Cyprus.-14.  .^l;'"^V^^^^^       applause  of  his  fellow- 
was  received  ^e.mi>cre)  by  "'\.'     ™  i'"',,;'/^;;^;'  4a,  because  he  saw,  that 
citizens.-15.  Thenustocles  em  g.atul  {^  <;^^7,^  ,i,j,„,,s  had  arrived  in 
ho  was  not  safe  enough  u   ^\rS;'»->'^„,\;  ,'^?J,,,,„„,)  ,0  the  captain  (,h„u- 
Ephesus,  he  returned  thanks  lor  1"».^^"     ,  r    \r, ..  -i  li;w  days  anibassa.lors 
«S  of  the  ship,  on  which  he  >;«>,|;'^,^^'''.;7,'i  .,-\  i^'ee  w^s  granted  (*,«-)  to 
came  from  Hon.e,  «^''^'V^'.^/^t.lroiuIilatCa,  crossed  over  (f-vy,«T<;) 
Philip.^18.  Q'>"«:''"^'  ;'"'  f  tX   'n  a      rHved  in  Italy  Iron,  Dyrrachi- 
to  Anticvra  and  Corn  th.— U.  \*';';,"  >'''';'  ,,„  „,  nu.  in  order  to  (Hupme) 
urn,  the  delegations  ot  very  >«;;'  y  «    ';^      S  devastated  the  territory  of 
salute  (m Mure)  [mc  .— 20.   Ihc  ''"'"\.''  ''..,,   xfhm  1  arrived  m  the 
t  e  Bo  i  as  far  as  the  city  (op,nd,nn)  "'.^  '^adv  deparle,!  for  CoritUh.- 
cily  ot-Argos,  1  hear.l,  tl'^'^*?"  '''?'  f,.    ve  ,r  in    he  ci  V  of  Khodes.--i;J.  On 
22.^1  lived  (.«/««OAi/'Oiu  Ibts  t;y'"''  I  y.^;!';  "',u,sia,  fo  cnu-ralulate  [hin,] 

the  same  day  a^'.^f  ;'f ''•!,rTl  «  c<^>'  '  >^ '""«'^'  '"  U"^)' "■i»'^''l?^"-"T1 
concerning  tbis  vit    ry.--|-   1    «^  '  ^.'^'  ^     i,,;.^  i„  ^,1,«  country  ot 

in  Antiochia.-2.,.  '1  he  o  hei  «,"':";,„  j,,  Mediolannm,  the  capital" 
the  15o,ii.-2(l,  On  t''-'-  J^^T,/,^^;  V  ..Xl  wintered  (/uV„.»r)  in  Capua 
of  the  Insubnans.— .ii.  Iht  .11  my  01  ,..,„,,v,„ia  — 28.  Alter  (iibml.iM.) 

the  ntost  Hourishing  (florcn.)  '7"  l."'.,^;.'.'  "to' dismiss  the  auxiliary 
Nutnantia  had  been  des  royed.  ^»' I '  ^.  ^  "  -^  ^^uu  disgrace  so  keen  y,- 
r  r ^^.a '("Sr rt^TI  e  ^,^   ,.^.,    Hyhis  Utne  the  m.bd,.y 

this  subject'"  with  Cato. 


— .     ,.  33  ppn  Sicvnni<»  — ^*  Gen.  LeucSdis.— 

35  To  icait  vpon  mmrbody,  P'-";«,^;;,\if,  l^l"^  ~y^  fed'somlthing  keenly,  aliquid  le-re 


*  Ab  urbe  conditil. 


«ical  larv'ua-c  H  ihu:<  cccurs  two  or  t\uee  «'"/e^  n  J;»^^  ["^  jH   15  :  :«,  11  ;  40,  4r, ;  41,  IS. 
Fn>ntu«ntlv  it  is  M  usod  in  the  writers  cf  »1»^' ^'j\;' ."c^ur.^  freqn.-ntlv  in  classical  i.r<.>e 

f  hiJonaacredenf.  lb.  2.i,  :.0   So  lb.  4l.18.-3)  In  V,''' .'"\7"V,o  5^  _  j/ii  m)>eruUo.^  tmcidan- 
Z^^Z^'^^l^i^^^'^^^^    -re,  and  only  poet.cal,  or  po.tci...cal. 


69 


CIIAPTEU  SECOXD. 

COXSTHUCTIOX  OF  THE  VERB. 

I.    Construction  in  GenePwAl,  in  the  Active  and 

Passive  Voices. 

§  4t'>0.  Objects  are  divided  into  completing  and  incidental 
(or  advekuial)  Objects.  They  are  completing,  if  their  gram- 
matical form  is  determined  by  tlie  governing  verb,  and  inci- 
dental, when  their  grammatical  form  is  determined  by  the 
general  ideas  of  Place,  'Ijme,  ^Manner,  Cause,  or  Degree.  Thus 
the  objects  in  the  phrases  lioston  interjicere^  regi  obedlre,  ami- 
cdi'um  iiunnhilsse,  ad  jjaceni  /lortc'iri,  loqiil  coepit  are  completing, 
since  the  governing  verbs  require  these  objects  to  be  respectively 
in  the  Accusative,  Dative,  Genitive,  Accusative  with  at/,  or  In- 
finitive. i>ut  the  o1)jects  in  the  phrase  "  Trls  annos  Homoe 
vi.cif  are  incidental  (adverbial),  since  the  accusative  annos 
and  the  genitive  Jiornce  are  not  required  by  the  verb  vivere,  but 

by  the  incidental  ideas  of  Time  and  Place  with  w^hich  this  verb 
is  connected. 

Jicm.  1.  We  say  tliat  verbs  are  construed  witli,  or  that  they  govern  the 
case  or  oUrt  granniiatical  tbi  iiis  of  tliuir  completing  olvjects.  Thus  ccepisse 
"governs"  or  ''is  construed"  with  an  Object-infinitive  (^  80  c,  §342,1); 
hortari  ^vith  tlie  preposition  ad  (p.  41);  intei-Jicere  wdth' au  Accusative; 
obed'irc  witii  a  Dative. 

liiiii.  2.  Certain  vei'bs  (e.g.  Cfo^e,  fieri,  rkUri),  require  the  addition  of  adjec- 
tives or  nouns  to  form  eomplete  Predicates.  8uch  adjectives  or  nouns 
are  called  Completing  Predicates;*  and  the  verbs,  requiring  them,  are 
said  to  be  "  construed  with"  or  "  to  govern"  a  Predicate  Nominative. 

luiii.  3.  ]SIany  verbs  require  for  their  objects  Infinitive  or  Finite  Clauses. 
Hence  verbs  may  be  construed  in  six  different  wa3's: 

1)  With  Completing  Predicates ;  2)  with  any  of  the  Oblique  Cases; 
3)  with  Prepo.sitional  Objects ;  4)  with  Object-Infinitives;  0)  with  Infini- 
tive Clauses  (Predicate-Infinitives) ;  G)  with  certain  Finite  Clauses,  intro- 
duced by  one  of  the  conjunctions  ut^  7ie,  quod,  quiii^  quominus.'^ 

»  These  are  opposed  to  the  Accessory  Predicates.    See  §  4fil  ;  p.  245,  §  555. 

^  A  complete  treatise  on  the  construction  of  the  verb  must  enumerate  all  verbs  rc- 
quirinj;  the  one  or  other  of  these  complements.  But  tliis  would  exceed  the  limits  of  a 
^-^eneral  grammar.  While  in  the  fii-st  chapter  we  have  shown  tlie  most  important  con- 
uructions  wiih  Prepositions,  and  in  §  3!Kj,  Rem.  26  and  27,  and  Book  VI.  those  with 
Clauses,  we  shall  limit  this  chapter  chiefly  to  the  construction  with  Cases  and  Ixfini- 
TIVK8,  referrinj,'  the  student  for  the  rest  partly  to  the  Lexicons,  partly  to  the  chapters 
mentioned. 


] 


gg  rnErosiTioNS. 

„c  [to  do]  .-hen  I  waited  upon  tl.oe"  ij^ «i;;;^!!!:,-?- 1 U  Tt  LTac""  a 
of  the  Acha-i,  was  at  (,„  b.eyon"  w       200J  t  «^^^^^^  ^,,^ 

eounon  was  la.UPM>y  .he  c  ,u  .  o^  .^^^^ 

year  030  (R  1-,  V' '"-i?,''*r  ' V''  "  , '  r^  were  iilatt'd  (»«'«(«■)  on  sliips  ami 
ft  cclony  to  >iarbo.-13.  '"'- 1'''^'^'^;'^  \\'m!:.,j,,^  returned  to  Athens,  lie 
taken  (Mncere)  t".t;yi>ras^-U.  ^'^  ,f  ,7^  ;t^^^  „f  his  lellow- 

nus)  of  the  ship,  on  which  "'^/'f^l  f,^'''^^'.;Tl  ;;\  ..^;'  «^,  „,uited  (*«v)  to 

e^'»«'-^''-»\';;"S"havil,    d,       e,l     om 

I'hilip.'-lS-  Qmncluis,  'aM",-,  \"  '  ■"    ,  ,     ,  ,,r,.iv«l  in  Italy  Irom  Dyrrachi- 

,o  Anticyra  and  ^""".'l'-l^,,\''''™^''^i'eamrto      «in  order  to  (supine) 

uin,  the  delegations  ot  v^^O' ™^"y  ^  ^f  ^, .  ^^^^^^^^^  ;Ue  territory  of 

salute  (mluUtrc)  [inc].— iO   ^lic  -vn  >k>  '     » '^  ^.,     ^y,       j  .,rriv(;d  in  the 

the  Boji  as  far  as  tlie  city  (opjmhm)  »\TUs    |V     -l.    v  ne  ^.„,i„ti,._ 

23    I  lived  (commorun)  m  this  [«lioU]  >^;^ '"  "  ^™-,„  con.'ratulate  [him] 
,he  same  davainbassadors  came  to  UesaimU^^^^ 

concerning  this  victory.-34.  Ihc  '-"'^  .", ,  4'  ,-,„i,i '^,,  (lUo  country  of 
in  Anliochia.-2o  The  «f'" '''j";  ,^^'';',,  .  ^'.'^'e  ,.  mA.m.  the  capital"^ 
the  15o.ji.-3<i,  On  tlie  next  '>-\;'''-;;\''>f;i"a  wintered  (hiemdre)  in  Capua, 
of  the  Insubrians.— 37.  Ibe  army  o  'V'lV"/ "'^;'  ;.'  .}a  After  («/««/,  ,M.) 
,hc  most  flourishing  (Mens)  ^'\^}^l^^^'Z  Ci(^  M^'^  ^»^»^»^ 
Numantia  had  been  destroyed    =^'1  "' .!',f  [^  j^',,^  "u.grace  so  keenly," 

this  subject^"  witli  Cato,  ^__^ 

•     1-       ^      33  r«»Ti   «;irvnni»  — ^*  Gen.  LcucMis. — 
2-  To  wait  vpon  ,om,Mv,  P';'',f  .l"' ,".  l^^lS^il'o  fSwnlhi,,^  lcfe,d,j.  aliciuid  xgre 
;:,??.^^V:an:i:u^  I  iSS^li^^Kle»  -ucoritui  U>i»  tUiu.  wUU  Calo. 

*  Ab  urbe  condita. 


SUPPLEMENT  TO  THE  RULES  ON  PREPOSITIONS. 
„454  M.  .C^.h  -..T.VK.  is  ex,ren,e,v  -ejn  ....  loo»,  moan,,,.  V.«^ 


1,0' 'lit  quid  stah'L  Cic.  Le-.  2,2»).-.M//>*'/  l.h  f'Vmuiii    Liv  2:  J,  11-2)  A- a  fynouym  of 
m enter  (bcj-i-h-,  beyond,  over  and  iihoTC).  /^f.^'^1,"  ://';/    lu  :^i   i-8._,s,/y)^/w/o/f //<  A(fc 

Hhi  dona  acrhlent.  lb.  -^.i,  :> 0   Sc.   '>•  ^  -j^;-;     ,'.  '/.h    u"  2I  L-Mii  super  alio-^  trucidan- 
succes.sion:Vidnus  super  Tuinu.-:.s^^^^^^^^ 


69 


CHAPTER  SECOND. 

COXSTRUCTIOX  OF  THE  VERB. 

I.    CoxsTRUCTiox  IX  Gexeral,  IX  THE  Active  axd 

Passive  Voices. 

§  4*>0.  Objects  are  dividod  into  completixg  and  ixcidextal 
(or  ADVEiiHiAL)  Objocts.  Tliey  arc  completixg,  if  their  gram- 
matical form  is  determined  bv  tlie  goverxixg  verb,  and  ixci- 
dental,  Avlien  their  grammatical  form  is  determined  by  the 
general  ideas  of  Place,  Time,  Manner,  Cause,  or  Degree.  Thus 
tho  objects  in  the  phrases  Jiostem  interjicere,  regi  obedlre,  ami- 
cor  am  menilnlsse^  ad  2>acem  hortCcri,  loqul  coej^it  are  completixg, 
since  the  governing  verbs  require  these  objects  to  be  respectively 
in  the  Accusative,  Dative,  Genitive,  Accusative  witli  ad,  or  In- 
fniitive.  ]>ut  the  objects  in  tlie  plirase  "  7Vls  annos  HomcB 
vlxW''  are  incidental  (adverbial),  since  the  accusative  aniios 
and  the  genitive  llomm  are  not  required  by  the  verb  vivere,  but 

by  the  incidental  ideas  of  Time  and  Place  with  which  this  verb 
is  connected. 

Jiem.  1.  AVe  say  that  verbs  are  construed  with,  or  that  they  goatern  the 
case  or  other  grannnatical  tbims  of  tlieir  completin*^  objects.  Thus  ccepuse 
"governs"  or  "  is  construed"  witli  an  Object-intinitive  (i$  80  c,  ^842,1); 
hortCivi  with  the  preposition  ad  (p.  41);  interjicere  with  an  Accusative; 
obed'irc  with  a  Dative. 

Uim.  2.  Certain  verbs  (e.g.  csae^Jicri,  rideri),  require  the  addition  of  adjec- 
tives or  nouns  to  form  complete  Pkedicates.  8uc1i  adjectives  or  nouns 
are  called  Completing  Pkedicates;^  and  the  verbs,  requiring  them,  are 
said  to  be  "  construed  with"  or  "  to  govern"  a  Predicate  Nominative. 

Hem.  3.  ^lany  verbs  require  for  their  objects  Intinitive  or  Finite  Clauses. 
Hence  verbs  may  be  construed  in  six  ditierent  ways: 

1)  With  Comi)]eling  Predicates ;  2)  with  any  of  the  Oblique  Cases; 
;3)  with  Prepositional  Objects  ;  4)  with  Object-Infiuitives  ;  5)  with  Infini- 
tive Clauses  (Predicate-Infinitives) ;  C)  with  certain  Finite  Clauses,  intro- 
duced by  one  of  the  conjunctions  ut,  7ie,  quod,  quiii^  quominus!* 

*  These  are  opposed  to  the  Accessory  Predicates.    See  §  iCA  \  p.  245,  §  555. 

3  A  complete  treanse  on  the  construction  of  the  verb  must  enumerate  all  verbB  rc- 
quirinfi:  the  one  or  other  of  these  complements.  But  this  would  exceed  the  limits  of  a 
general  grammar.  While  in  the  fli*st  chapter  we  have  shown  tlie  most  important  con- 
snucti«)ns  with  Prepositions,  and  in  §  81»:i,  Rem.  26  and  27,  and  Book  VI.  those  with 
Clauses,  we  shall  limit  this  chapter  chiefly  to  the  construction  with  Cases  and  iNriNi- 
T1VE8,  referring  the  situdeiit  for  the  rest  partly  to  the  Lexicons,  partly  to  the  chapters 
mentioned. 


70 


CONHTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


In  pomc  connections  completinG:  objects  take  the  form  of  Adverbs  or  Adjectives,  uii : 
Latlne  loqvi,  distrtuirij'acere.    See  below,  No^.  III.  and  IV. 

§  4o7.  Many  verbs  require  but  one  completing  object 
(Rem.  8),  and  are  then  said  to  govern  a  simple  object  or  com- 
plement. But  other  verbs  require  two  ditlerent  complements 
(a  compound  object),  joined  to  each  other.  Thus  the  verbs 
ccepisse,  interjicere^  obed'ire,  veren\  dlcere  are  construed  with 
SIMPLE,  but  permittere^  prohihh'c^  dare,  jycrsuadvre  with  com- 
pound objects. 

Jhrn.  i.  Tt  is  cuPtomary  to  indicate  the  oonstruction  of  a  jriven  verb  in  an  abridircd  ftnin 
by  means*  of  tlie  dilioren't  cas^t's  of  the  indefinite  al'v/uis.  To  denote  tliat  a  verb  governs 
the  GENITIVE,  DATIVE.  ACCUSATIVE  or  ABLATIVE  of  the  PERSON,  We  coimect  it  with  ali- 
ciijus  (alc'fx).  alictn,  aliquem,  aliqi'o.  The  acci>ativk  of  a  'ihino  is  indicated  by  aliquid  ; 
th»;  GENITIVE.  DATIVE,  Of  ABLATIVE  of  a  THING  bv  aiicifjif-'^  Tt'i,  uHcui  Tti.  (iHqud  re.  Thus 
coiuhiniidre  aliqunn  alicii'pt)^  rti  means  ttnit  condanmlre  is  construfd  with  tlu'  accusative 
of  the  Person,  and  the  <,'enitivo  of  tlie  Thin::,  llort'tri  aliquein  ad  a/lquid  indicates  that 
horturi  iroverns  the  accusative  of  tlie  Person  and  the  preposiiicm  ad  with  an  accusative 
of  the  Tliinjr.  Enpcre  alicni  aUquid  means  that  eript/e  is  construed  with  the  dative  of 
the  Person  and  tlie  accusative  of  the  Thin^'. 

§  458,  Verbs  which  are  construed  with  a  completing  object 
in  the  Accusative  are  called  Tkansitive  ;  all  other  verbs  re- 
quiring completing  objects  are  called  Intransitive.  Neuteu 
verbs  are  tliose  that  require  no  object  at  all.  The  completing 
objects  of  transitive  verbs  are  called  Transitive  Objects. 

Bern.  5.  Thus  iiiterficere  is  a  transitive,  obed'ire  an  intransitive,  and  ilor- 
m'lre  a  neuter  verb.  Many  verbs,  transitive  in  English,  have  intransitive 
equivalents  in  Latin,  as:  obedlre,  to  obey;  veHistere,  to  resist;  nocere,  to 
hurt;  parccre,  to  spare;  inridPre.  to  envv  ;  fairre,  to  favor;  jursuddere,  to 
persuade,  all  of  which  .crovern  the  Dative  in  Latin,  while  their  English 
equivalents  govern  the  Objective. 

§  4»>0.  The  construction  of  Latin  verbs  is  oft-cn  modified, 
when  they  are  placed  in  the  Passive  Voice.'  Only  transitive 
verbs  form  a  complete  Passive.  Any  Transitive  (unless  it  be  a 
Deponent)  may  be  changed  into  a  Passive  form,  without  affect- 
ing the  sense,  by  making  the  transitive  object  the  Subject  of  the 
Passive  voice,  and  changing  the  active  subject,  if  the  verb  has 
any,  into  the  passive  agent  (§  131,  2),  as: 

Active  :  Jliles  labOrem  pterfert. 

Passive  ;  Labor  a  millte  perfertur. 


1  Hence,  to  determine  the  construction  of  a  verb,  it  must  be  always  taken  In  ita 
ACTIVE  voice. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   THE   VERB. 


71 


§  460.  Impersonal  Passives  (in  the  3d  pers.  sing.)  are 
formed  : 

1)  As  in  English,  from  verbs  that  are  construed  wnth  clauses. 
Such  clauses  must  be  considered  as  the  Subjects  of  the  imper- 
sonal Passive  (§  74,  c),  as:  CcBsari  lumtiatum  est,  Ilelvetios  2yer 
provinciain  iter  facere  co7u'in\  It  w^as  announced  to  Cajsar,  that 
the  Helvetians  were  attempting  to  march  through  the  province. 
Ca3s.  B.  G.  1,  7. 

2)  Contrary  to  the  P^nglish  idiom,  from  intransitive  and 
NEUTER  verbs,  without  any  sid>ject  at  all  (§  74,  «),  as:  Pugna- 
tin\  a  battle  is  ibught,  people  fight  (literally:  it  is  /ought). 
M'lJil  obedlfur,  I  am  obeyed  (literally:  It  is  obeyed  to  me). 

Item.  G.  The  Passive  of  transitive  verbs  (§  4r)9)  which  has  the  transitive 
objeet  for  its  subject,  is  called  Personal  Passive.  When  transitive  verbs 
are  used  Avithout  their  objects,  they  are  sometimes,  but  rarely,  placed  in  the 
form  of  impersonal  passives. 

I\<m.  7.  In  the  imjiersonal  passives  the  active  subject  takes  the  same  form 
of  the  PASSIVE  AGENT,  as  in  the  personal  passive,  as:  Piigmltur  a  nobis,  a 
battle  is  Ibught  by  us  (literall}':  it  in  fought  by  uh). 

Rem.  8.  All  lenses  and  moods  of  the  verb,  except  the  Imperative,  admit 
of  an  impersonal  i)assive  in  the  od  pers.  sinji;.,  as:  Peccdbitur  in  hoc  judicio, 
Wroniis  will  be  committed  in  this  trial.  Cic.  Verr,  2,  4,  68. — Antea  ratibus 
narigabOtur,  Formerl}'  people  sailed  on  rafts.  Plin.  1,  7,  56. — Quum  sededtur 
nut  (iinbull'tar,  wiien  one  sits  or  walks.  Gell.  N.  A.  2,  2.  The  compound 
tenses  of  the  Passive  must  then  always  take  their  participles  in  the  Neuter 
Gender,  as:  ?r/////;«  f<  people  came. 

Rem.  1).  If  the  En<,dish  equivalents  of  Latin  intransitive  verbs  are  trans- 
itive (Hem.  5),  the  English  verb  forms  a  personal,  but  the  Latin  an  imper- 
sonal passive.  In  this  case  the  Enixlish  suljject  must  be  changed  into  the 
L:itin  intransitive  object,  as  :  'The  king  is  obeyed  by  the  people,  regi  a  populo 
obedltur  (literally:  It  is  obeyed  to  the  king  by  the  people).  The  Latin 
verb  nuist  here  always  be  placed  in  the  3d  pers.  Singular,  although  the 
English  verb  shouUrbe  in  the  Plural,  or  in  the  first  or  second  person,  as: 
Tlie  captives  are  spared,  ca})tlvis  parcitur  (it  is  spared  to  the  captives).  1 
irax  perf<U((ded,  mihi  persuasum  est  (it  tsas  persuaded  to  me).  You  will  be 
encitd,  vobis  invidebilur  (it  will  be  envied  to  you). 

Rem.  10.  If  the  impersonal  passive  has  no  intransitive  object  that  may 
be  made  the  subject  in  English,  the  translation  is  made  in  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing ways: 

1.  The  Latin  verb  is  translated  by  an  English  transitive  objective 
•  phrase,  in  which  case  the  object  is  made  the  passive  personal  subject, 
as:  Pugndtur,  a  battle  is  tbught  {pugmtre,  to  fight  a  I  attle). — Apud  Me- 
idlum  ccendtuni  est,  dinner  was  taken  with  ]Metdlus  {c(£ndre,  to  take  din- 
ner).— Post  c(£nam  ambulabitur,  after  dinner  a  walk  will  be  taken.— 
Consurgitur  ex  consilio,  the  meeting  is  adjourned  (it  is  risen  from  the 
meeting). 


III 


72 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   THE   VERB. 


0  Sometimes  an  English  norm  with  a  personal  or  impersonal  predi- 
care  r  r  •  ')  may  bcT  employed  lor  the  Latin  impersonal  passive,  as: 
P,  r/L/  Lr  tliere  was  a  tight.-.l^nV.r  dimicraum  .«^  the  struggle  was 
iuml-S^^^^  gathering.-i//c  bene  dornutar,  here  are 
n-ood  arranurements  tor  sleeping.  „  un,«Tr'» 
"rotten   the   iiulehnite   English   subjects   "  people,"   "  one,        they 

"  we"  may  be  employed,  as :  Cum  ad  ausfm  ventum  emt,  when  they  had 
come  to  the  camp  (UtJrally  :  when  it  had  been  come  to  the  camp).- 
tm  line  caum  Uhw,  l>eo,)le  often  laugh  without  cause.-.s.  /uane 
nadrjdtur,  if  one  sails  in  the  winter. 

Rem.  11.  Passive  Infinitives  are  used  impersonally,  the  same  as  act- 
ive imi)ers()nals  (^  8vJ,  4) :  r  ♦!  « 

1  AVhen  tliey  are  object  infinitives,  dependent  on  one  ot  t he 
verbs  ?x>..^,  ncqn-ire,  debere,  sole  re,  inripere  (ea'pisse),  donnere^  The 
first  four  of  these  verbs  retain  their  active  torm,  and  are  placed  in  he 
•]d  DCS  sin"  while  the  object-intinitive,  dependent  on  tliem,  takes  the 
;t>n    if'an  imper  <>nal  pas.ave.   But  the  verbs  incipere  (caMUSse)  and  ^',u- 

'rtakftr  nipeis()nal  pa..ire  form  in  the;3d  sing. ;  mv;^-.  t<>rms  the 
e  plX-  cU^,//,.  ...^  and  de.inere  :  desltum  est  ;  as  :  IMbnsres^.h  mm 
/.^/  tl  e  em.nv  eould  not  be  resisted  (literally :  it  could  not  be  resiste^l 
io  e  enemies).'  Ambaldn  debet,  a  walk  must  be  Xakvn.--UjemetmuU^ 
bVbus  Z'^llef,  Generally  children  and  women  are  spared.- l^^y^m  so- 
t/  as  is  nsiial  y  the  case  (literall v :  a.  it  is  aecustonml  to  be  dcme).  But : 
Funndli^^  EST  (not  ea^it),  lighting  commenced  (it  ^vas  com- 
meStobef<>u,Hit);  2.V/r/7  DEMTUM  est,  the  siege  was  discontinued 

^V' Whe'^he;  ':;;•' ScATES  of  Infinitive-clauses.  In  clauses  of 
thh'ki^id  hesiXject-accusative  is  always  understood;  as:  J^'^'^^^^'^^ 
;;;;;  ^^  totis  caJis  trepidan,  it  was  announced  to  the  general  h^  o^ 
^ternatum  prevailed  in  the  whole  camp  (///t/v/% :  that  iM>ab  ticmbitci 
in  til:  whol^camp).-/.^//^^r.^  sibi  his  calumniisvon  admodum  nocen, 
he  saw  that  he  was  not  much  injured  by  these  calumnies. 

Examples.* 

1    Acriter  utrimque  {on   both  sides)  nsque   ad  vesperum  P".^"^ltii"^  f\- 
cL  B  G.  1,  50.-5  Proeho  equestri  (§  22U)  mter  dims  f  ^^  £1^— ^^ 
TK   o   o_3  Celeriter  ad  castra  concui-sum'  est.    lb.  -^»  «^^.  —  ^/^^V^V  " 
hmiento  satis  esset  provlsum."^  lb.  3,  3.-5.  Oppi; ;-  Pauc.s  dieln.      435 
K.  38)  (luibus-^  CO  [thither)  ventum  eiat,  expugnatuin  e.t^  1 K  .^,  ^3^     0_  Ac 
cessun/est*  ad  Britanniam  omnibus  navibus    lb.  "^' ^T; ' ;^^^    ^ *L^;^  .^^^^ 
misqne    ordinibus  acriter  resisterCtur.  lb.  o,  30.- 8.  Non  sn  c  paicuio  in 
c^ist  is  manctur.  lb.  5,  31.-9.  8*vltum  est^  in  ceteros  Trojanos.  Ln   1  1.- 


*  In  place  of  the  former  exord.es  fc,r  translating  frnmLaUn^^^^     ^^'S^h'ihe  "mdent 
tracts  taken  from  the  Latin  authors  will  now  be  given  as  txampits,  %>uilu 
ehould  tran:?late  into  English.  ^♦i,!^^     3  nu;7.jis  instead  of  nostonam.— *  To 

1  To  run.--'  To  make  provision  for  ^«'"«t^n^-     ,n\il   cruSv -^ 
make  an  approach.-^  ;Scerlre,  to  commit  cruelnos  ;  to  kill  cruelly.       itcaam.. 
in  Sicily.-"  To  repose,  rest.-»  Alter  the  Greek  fashion. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE   VERB. 


73 


3,26.-15.  His  persuadGri  non  poterat,  ut  diutius  morarentur.  Caes.  B.  G. 
2,  10.— 16.  Qunm  subsidio'»  veniri  non  posset.  lb.  3,  3.-17.  Ubi  intellexit 
C'aesar,  eis  nocGri  non  posse.  lb.  3,  14.— 18.  Ubi  intellexit,  ultro"  ad  se  ve- 
niri. lb.  5,  56.— 19.  Per  totam  Italiam  trepidSri  coeptum  est.  Liv.  39,  17.— 
20.  Populus  Komanus  intelligit,  secum  actum  esse"  pessime.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 
1,50.-21.  Dici'^a  defensore  coeptum  est.  Cic.  Verr.  2,1,89.-22.  Dixit 
sibi  non  esse  itum  obviam  (§  433,  K.  31),  ne  tum  quidem  cum  iri  maxime 
(just)  debuit."  Cic.  Att  2,  1.-23.  Dubium  non  est,  debellari*^  eo  die  cum 
tSamnitibus  poluisse.  Liv.  7,  28.-24.  Negat  jucunde  posse  vivi,  nisi  cum 
virtute  viviltur.  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  20.-25.  Nee  vero  nnivei-so  generi  humSno, 
sed  etiam  singulis  a  Deo  consuli'"  solet.  Cic.  Nat.  D.  2,  65.-26.  Jam  pri- 
dem"  contra  eos  desituni  est  disputari.  Cic.  Fin.  2, 13.— 27.  Habitilri  ait 
Xenophanes  in  luna.  Cic.  Ac.  2,39.— De  provinciis  decedatur,  in  urbein- 
que  redeiltur.  lb.  Leg.  3,  8. 

II.    CONSTRUCTIOX   OF  THE  VeRB  WITH  COMPLETING  PREDICATES 

(Predicate-Xomixative). 

§  401.  The  Predicates  connected  with  Verbs  are  either 
COMPLETING  OF  ACCESSORY.  The  forni  of  the  COMPLETING  Predi- 
cate is  that  of  an  adjective  or  noun  ;  that  of  an  accessory 
Predicate,  a  Participle,  expressed  or  understood. 

Iie)n.  12.  In  tlic  phrase  Ilomerus  ceecus  fuit,  or  Ilomerus  poeta  fuit,  the 
■words  c<i!ci(8  and  poeta  are  completing  Predicates.  In  the  phrase  Epami- 
nondas  vincens  mortuus  est,  the  participle  viiicens  is  an  accessory  Predicate. 
Tlius  the  adjective  triatcs  in  tSequani  trintes  terrani  intuentur,  Caes.  B.  G.  1, 
32  (the  ISequani  look  sad  on  the  ground),  and  the  noun  prcetor  in  ^Ebutim 
preft^r  in  procinciam  abiit  (He  went  as  praetor  to  the  province),  are  acces- 
sory Predicates,  the  participle  being  of  the  copula  being  understood  in  both 
words.  Completing  Predicates  form  together  with  their  governing  verbs 
only  one  single  Predicate,  and  onl}-  one  phrase  with  the  common  subject; 
but  accessory  Pr(idicates  form  a  combined  phrase  together  with  the  prin- 
cipal predicative  plirase.  Epaminondas  xincens  Quortuus  est  may  be  resolved 
into  the  two  predicative  phrases:  Epaminondas  ticit  and Epajninondas  mor- 
tuus est.  uEbutius  pnvtor  abiit  consists  of  the  two  predicative  phrases: 
yEbiitius  abiit,  ^butius  praetor  fuit. 

Beni.  13.  Accessory  predicates  must  be  distinguished  from  nouns  in  Ap- 
positicm.  with  which  they  are  very  similar  in  form.  The  latter  are  attrib- 
utes of  tlieir  governing  nouns,  while  the  former  are  predicates,  logically 
united  with  the  principal  predicate. 

§  409.  The  verbs  which  (in  certain  significations)  require 
the  addition  of  completing  Predicates,  are:  1)  the  verb  esse^  as 
copula;  2)  the  verbs /eri  and  vicleri  (§§  132,  133) ;  3)  the  verbs 
evadere  (in  the  meaning  "to  become,"  "to  turn  out"),  manere 


»0  To  aspist,  to  help.— 1»  Voluntarily .— 12  Agere  cum  aliqtio,  to  treat  somebody.— ^»  i?i- 
cere,  to  plead.—»*  Inst,  oi  debnisset,  oujjht  to  have.— ^^  Uebellare,  to  finii?h  a  (the)  war.— 
"  Consulere  alicin,  to  take  care  for  s^omebody.— i'  Long  bince. 


n 


't§ 


*1 


74 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VERB. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VERB. 


75 


and  permantre  (to  remain),  existere  (in  the  meaning  "to  come 
out"  "to  be")'  4)  the  Passives  of  those  transitive  verbs  which 
in  c'ertain  significations  require  a  double  Accusative,  as  creari 
and  dun,  to  be  elected ;  dedararl,  to  be  dechired  ;  appdlari, 
vocar(^u<i  did,  to  be  called;  judtcari,  hahlri,  and  extsUman, 
to  be  held,  considered,  and  several  others.     (See  p.  101  ) 

If  these  verbs  are  finite,  their  completing  predicates  must 
be  in  tbe  nominative  case. 

1    H-mnih-il  vrcvtor  factiis  ci^t,  postqunm  rex  fuerat.  N"p.  ITann.  7.— 

1    r   0  31-'    An  i.'.>iuis  .x  IM.ilipin  ainlcis  unus  (alone)  incorrupt  a»'" 
Itt'^mJrut    Liv  40  54.- 10.  C.J,L  cre<udur  C»sar  et  Servlu.s    t  »3. 

7.'!!!«    14  '  For  tlie  a-rcomcnt  of  the  Predicate  Nominatives  in  number 
nmlmnder  s Je  ^ 03  12  und  ^ 75.     Poets  sometim.s  place  the  predicative 
ad  ective  in  the  rieuier  g^nderfeven  if  the  subject  is  a  mascuhne  or  femi- 
nine Dun    as     Varlum  et  imtabile  semixr  {e.t)  fcmna,  \  irg.  ^n-  4,  oOy 
^^  ^mai^  is  exJ^emely  rare  in  c  lassical  prose,  aud  o-;^^-  -'^  -}^^Y 
nouns  only  as:  Omninm.  rerumf'  mor^  t.t  extrtnouu      Cicl^am.  ^. -I;  I- 

T/V  n    i^)r  the  a.-ieement  of  the  copuhi  >vith  the  subject,  see  ^  03  2. 
^V   e    the  su    eet  a  d  predicate-noun  are  of  ditlerent  numbers,  the  copu  a 

soi^^s  %L.  with  \he  number  ot- the  V^^^^^^^^^^t^l'^^s 
ino-  witli  that  of  tlie  subject,  as:  Aiule  nunc  tie  tuo  Mic^uiata  dt^ie,  cups 

^''l^ni  ^1g'  The  veil)  ''to  appear"  in  connection  with  a  predicate-adjective 
or  noun  must  not  be  transhued  by  apparere,  but  by  r.d^n.  ^^j^!^'^ 
^J\.ignitication  ''  to  seem"  only  in  l-st-ch^sica   1>^--;.- '  ^^^  ^  ^  ^! 

rere  is  construed  with  an  inlinilive  clause:  Lt  palatum  luaictm  e^ise  ap 
parCret.  Liv.  40,  55. 

fieri  properly  nH'a.is  -  K,  be  nmdc      i  C'' ^^;/   /j*^,p  .  j  ;.:,,^?i'' .  ,;;,  .ete<l  with  the.e  verb,  ia 

I  Painful.-' Flavoring  condi.nont.-3Mitiejite-^A.^ 
«  Fastidious  -'  bi^t.  ora/iv'/rtz/^/o-once.— «  Delender.— "  t  or  '"^-^i''^"'- 

n'lCsr.;.--  The  «am,/of  '1'« ---Xli;,fe'tr'^s'S"  v    cll^cx  ?££     in  thU 

*  Thi>*  «'enitive  is  equivalent  to  an  ar)^omIe  nt  uici  vs  «^w;. 
pa^-.a-c  the  neuter  gencfer  of  the  predicative  adjective. 


JTc  iS  seen  (being)  sad;  Consvl  victor  exstitif,  the  Consul  came  out  as  (beino-)  a  conqueror 
St  eqvites  inadumes  eva^issfinf.  if  the  horsemen  had  escaped  unharmed.  Liv  .39  50  In  this 
pentence  tncolumes  is  evidently  an  accessouy  predicate  of  evadere.  But  the  mentioned 
verbs,  Irom  being  frequently  connected  with  accessory  predicates,  have  been  ijraduallv 
connected  with  me  idea  of  the  copula,  contained  in  the  accessory  predicates  and  thus 
assumed  the  new  meanings  "to  become,"  '"to  seem,"  "to  remain."  Uence  the  ques- 
tion, whether  a  predicaie-noun  or  adjective  must  be  considered  as  a  completing  or  as  an 
ACCESSOUY  predicate,  depends  simply  on  the  connection  of  the  copula.  If  the  idea  of  the 
copula  IS  contained  in  the  governing  verb  (which  is  alwai/s  the  case  with ^ri  and  vidiri) 
the  predicaiive  word  must  be  considered  as  a  completing  predicate.  But  when  the 
copula  (as  participle)  must  be  understood  with  the  accompanying  adjective  or  noun  the 
latter  must  be  considered  as  accessory  predicates.  Thus  it  is  erroneous,  to  reckon  the 
verbs  jnort  and  nasct,  as  some  grammarians  do,  among  those  verbs  that  are  construed 
\yith  predicate-nominatives,  as:  A'eim  nascitur  dives,  Sen.  ;!0,  Nobody  is  bora  (bein^') 
rich.    Jnnctun  nmior,  Nep.  Ep.  9,  I  die  (being)  uucouquered. 

§  403.  Verbs  generally  can  take  completing  predicates  only 
when  tliey  are  finite  or  ixfinitives. 

1.  SuBJECT-iNFixiTiVES   and   the   Infinitives   in   Ixfixitive- 
CLAusES  take  their  completing  Predicates  in  the  Accusative. 

1.  Consulem  fieri  valde  utile  Mario  videbatur.  Cic.  Off.  3,  20.— 2.  JS'on 
ease  cupidum,''^  pecuuia  est;  non  esse  emdcem,'*  vectlgal^*  est;  contentum 
vero  suis  rebus  es>>e,  maximae  sunt  certissimaique  divitiae.  Cic.  Par.  6, 3.— 
3^  Magnis  in  laudibus'*^  tola  fere  fuit  Grojcia,  vlctorem  Olvmpi®"  citdrL'^ 
Nep.  pref— 4.  Id  eniin  ipsuni  est  summi  oratoris,'"  sumnium  oratdrem 
popiilo  uden.  Cic.  Brut.  50.— 5.  Traditum"-'"  est,  Homerum  ciecum  fuisse. 
Cie.  Tusc.  5,  39. — 0.  Non  paliar  flagitiis  tuis  me  infatneni'^  fieri.  Tereut. 
lleaut.  5,  4,  14.— 7.  Priiicipent^'*  se  esse  mavult  quam  videri.  Cic.  Otf.  1, 
ID. —  8.  Judicabat,  cos  uou  posse  oratores  evadere.  Cic.  de  Or.  1,28. — 
D.  (Romulus  dixit)  se  dciim  esse  et  Quir'inum  vocari.  Cic.  Rep.  2,  10.— 10. 
Scimus  rerjem  Persea'"  ab  populo  Romano  appellatuni  {esse).  Liv.  41, 24. 

2.  Object-Infinitives  take  their  completing  Predicates  in 
the  Nominative,  when  their  governing  verbs  are  finite. 

1.  Cato  esse  quam  Tideri  bonus  malcbat.  Sail.  Cat.  54,  G.— 2.  Oracula 

evanuCrunt-*  postquam  liomines  minus  credalC^'"  esse  ccepCrunt.   Cic.  Div. 

2, 57.-3.  Quc-ero  ex  te.  cogitarisne  niigar  fieri  in  Metelli  locum.  Ib.Vatin. 

8. — 4.  Senilis-"  stultitia  deliratio  (silliness)  appelldri  solet.  lb.  Sen.  11. 

liem.  18.  The  accusative  case  of  the  completing  Predicate  in  Subject- 
Intinitives  must  be  explained  from  the  eonstruction  t)f  the  Accusative  with 
the  Intiuitivc.  Subject-Jntiiiitives  always  have  an  uncektain  rEUSox  for 
their  logical  subject.  The  sentence  "  It  is  preferable  to  be  free,"  means 
"  It  IS  preferable  that  one  is  tree"  (prcestat  "  aliquem"  liber  urn  esse).  Hence 
the  CASE  of  the  completing  Predicate  in  Subject-Infinitives  must  be  an 
Accusative,  and  its  gender  the  Masculine.     See  ^  78. 

Ueni.  11).  It  is  ditiereut,  when  the  impersonal  Predicates  are  connected 
with  personal  objects.  These  objects  are  then  at  the  same  time  the 
logical  Subjects  of  the  Subject-infinitive,  and  hence  the  completing  Predi- 
cates of  the  latter  must  agree  with  the  object  of  the  impersonal  Predicate 

i>  Greedy.— 1*  Eager  to  buy.— >  A  rent.— >•  It  was  a  great  glory.—"  In  the  Olympic 
games.- »«Same  as  deciarCoi.—^^  '*  That  very  drcunislatvce  is  ttie  mark  of  a  great  orat<jr.'' 
—•■'0  It  has  been  reported.—'-»»  Infamous.— SJ  The  first,  the  foremost.— as  Greek  accusative 
o[ Peraeus.—'^*  Jt^va/iescere,  to  vanish.- -^  Credulous.— '•^«  Of  old  men. 


76 


CONSTRUCTION    OF   THE   VERB. 


in  case,  gender,  and  number  (§  94,  Hem.  3)  This  case  is  ^  f  I^ati^;, ^^^J^^^ 
the  verbs  licet  and  mc.se  est  are  connected  with  objects  m  the  Dat  v  e,  as 
la  republka  mihi  negliijaiti  esse  nori  licet.  Cic  Att  1, 17,  6  ^"  *-  j  "\^'  ^^ 
rarely,  even  in  tliis  connection  the  completing  l^^'^'^.^^^^te  f  lound  m  the 
accusative  singular  masculine  according  jo  the  rule  m  Rem.  18.  bee  lor 
the  particulars  of  this  construction  p.  G17,9. 

Bern.  20.  Participles  arc  but  rarely  construed  with  completing  1  redi- 
cates.     This  rule  has  two  exceptions  : 

1  The  participle  of  the  copula  esse,  which  as  such  does  not  exist,  may  be 
uLrioodulil^  construction  of  the  Absolute  Ablatives  The  predica  ive 
adjectivr^  noun  is  then  phiced  in  the  Ablative,  as  :  Ctcero,u^  ccco,  while 
Cicero  was  living.     See  ^  397.  -,   o  .^-.    ^-     a 

2  The  Participles  of  the  Passive  verbs,  mentioned  ^  40X.,  iNo.  4,  aie 
soLumL  con' tilled  with  completing  P-dicate.  but  on^  C^i^ses  if"^; 
struction  with  Absolute  Ablatives,  0)  in  other  ^"^^  ^/j^'^^lp^^'"  .^',J' // ^^  ^^ 
n-irticiole  is  either  in  the  Nominative  or  Accusative.  Ihe  compietinj. 
Crates  ag^;^  then  always  with  the  governing  P-^j-P  -' -(^^^J^ 
the  construcuon  of  the  Absolute  Ablatives  are  placed  m  the  Ablatn  t  cast. 

1.  Inprlmis  quod  JEduo.^fratres  con^<^"qyi^eo'^^^^^^^^ 

jiiio.    iiiv.  •*,  iu.      ^-  ,    I'lm^ul   uiio  omuium  (oj  all  pti'sons  alone)  ctiuoie 

ctrti&nbus  lacus.a»  Li\.  4j,  21.— o.  '-Vt^  ji    i.V     fi    l".)-t  ilcclurifiob  co/u<ult^  Alblmiin 

hostc  decrelo.  Cic.  Phil.  11, 7. 

3.  In  poetry  and  postclassical  prose  Participles  in  tl^cDATiVF  are  some- 
times construed  with  completing  Pi-edicates  in  the  same  9f  .^- J^^^^^Vf^^?,^,^' 
80UY  Predicates  this  construction  occurs  even  in  classical  piose  (p.  .jO, 

^^"T    Womittit33  tamen  Octavianus  Antonio /m«f/i  jndicSto  amicos  omnes.  Suet.  Oct  17. 
2.  'Muximo Vibi  S  evSlcre"  onti.Mr.-  Val.  Max.  8  h,  .._.    PnM,atna  man  nou  licuU 

illi  sapienaf<.-<imo  ab  Appoline  judicato  bocraii.  1  lin.  11.  ^.  »,  -iU  -iu. 

4  Participles  in  the  genitive  cannot  take  completing  predicates,  but 
thcv  sometimes  take  accessoiiy  predicates,  agreeing  with  them  in  the 
genitive  •  as:  Species  lusontis  interempti  Jilii,  the  image  of  his  innocently- 
killed  son.   Liv.  40,  50.    See  p.  256,  Obs.  3. 

§  464.  Pkkdicative  Genitive.— The  Predicate-nominative, 
denoting  the  general  idea  of  a  Person  or  Thing,  is  often  omit- 
ted and°understood,  when  an  atiuibutive  genitive  is  dependent 
on  it.  The  genitive  has  then  the  office  of  a  completing  Predi- 
cate in  the  same  manner  as  an  absohite  adjective  performs  the 
function  of  a  substantive  (§  353);  as:  Jlcec  domus  Senqyronil 
est  (instead  of  res  ISempronil),  this  house  is  the  property  ot 
^Qm^vom\x^.—  Condemnarejudlcis  est  (instead  of  res,  officlum 
judicis),  to  condemn  is  the  duty  (the  affiiir,  business)  of  the 

^  ,T  ron«in«  -'«  Master  of  the  horse.-^»  Elected  gcneral.-3«>Cer^tor./!o,  I  am  informed 
Oitendly-f  become  more  certain  n-'^So..,  S'H'ty.-^^  To  prouounce.  declare.-»»  t.  e. 
lie  a  owed  all  of  A.'«  Iriend.  to  joiu  him.-»*  It  fell  to  your  lot. 


CONttTBUCTION   OF  THE   VERB.  il 

judge. —  Gajns  siimmce  audacim  fait  (instead  of /io??io  SM;/i??ioB 
audaclce),  Gajus  was  a  man  of  the  greatest  boldness. 
Genitives  of  this  kind  are  called  Predicate-Genitives. 

Jiem.  21.  This  Genitive,  which  is  conceived  to  depend  on  a  noun  of 
GENERAL  import,  must  be  distinguished  from  the  Genitive  referring  to  a 
noun,  preciously  mentioned.  The  former  is  analogous  to  an  absolute,  the 
latter  to  a  disjunct  adjective  (§  358).  The  English  language  generally 
employs  here  the  demonstrative  that  or  the  indetinite  numeral  one  2l^  gov- 
erning word,  while  the  Latin  does  not  use  any  governing  word  at  all,  but 
supplies  it  from  the  text,  as :  Ut  tuuni  factum  alieni  hominis,  meum  vera 
coiijunciiasinii  et  auiicissimi  esse  videdtur,  Cic.  Fam.  1,9  ;  So^that  thy  action 
seems  that  of  a  stranger,  but  mine  that  of  a  most  intimate  friend. 

§  46o.  The  Predicate-Genitive  is  used  1)  to  express  posses- 
sion, or  relations  conceived  as  a  Possession  (Genitive  of  the 
2)ossessor) ;  2)  to  denote  those  relations  which  an  impersonai 
Predicate  has  to  its  subject-infinitive  or  to  a  subject-clause 
(Impersonal  Predicate-Genitive)  ;  3)  to  denote  qualities  or 
relations  conceived  as  qualities  of  a  Person  or  Thing  (Quali- 
tative Genitive). 

Jie)n.  22.  Predicate-Genitives  are  connected  not  only  with  esse,  but  with 
all  verbs  having  the  force  of  the  copula  {Jiiirij  videri,  etc.  Liv.  1,  39).* 

§  4G6.  1.  The  Genitive  of  the  Possessor,  in  connection  with 
the  co})iila,  is  generally  rendered  by  "  to  belong  to''*  or  "  to  he  the 
liropertu  of^''  as:  Omnia.,  quae  rnidieris  futrunt,  \ivi  Jiunt,  all 
that  has  belonged  to  the  wife,  becomes  the  2^^operty  o/*the  1ms- 
band.  Cic.  Top.  4. —  Ut  disceptarent.^  quid  cujusque  esset,  that 
they  disputed  what  was  the  property  of  each.  Liv.  42,  23. 
This  genitive  is  changed  into  a  possessive  adjective,  when  the 
possessor  is  expressed  by  a  personal  pronoun :  Omnia,  quae  n\ea 
falrunt,  vcstra  facta  sunt,  all  that  belonged  to  me,  has  become 
your  property  (yours). 

Hem.  23.  Sometimes  not  the  person,  but  abstract  ideas  to  which  some- 
thing is  conceived  to  belong,  esi)ecially  the  idea  of  Time,  are  expressed 
by  this  Genitive,  as:  ]^oii  hujus  temjwris  iata  ratio  est,  that  method  belongs 
not  to  this  lime,  lllais  temporis  {oitdtis)  fait  Aiwuagoras,  to  that  time  (age) 
belonged  Anaxagoras. 

2.  The  Impersonal  Predicate-Genitive  is  differently  trans- 
lated  according   to   the    relation   expressed.      Such    genitives 

^  ■  —         —  -  '     .-^^^      ■—     ■       ■         ■  ■  ■■—  II  ■  ■  .     .    ■—        i.-l. ■     ■■ ..I.  .  I  IMM'P 

*  For  their  connection  with  the  verb?,  governing  a  double  accusative,  see  p.  102,^.76. 


78 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  YEIIB. 


must  be  conceived,  as  if  the  nouns  res,  officium,  munus,  vidi- 
cium    (affiiir,  matter,  business,  duty,    province,  sign,  evidence) 
were  the  proper  predicates.     Often  they  are  rendered  by  simple 
predicative  adjectives,  or  other  predicates,  corresponding  to  the 
indicated  relation,  as:     Cujusms  hominis  est  errare,  Cic.  riul. 
12,  2,  it  is  in  the  nature  of  every  man  to  err  (every  man  is  liable 
to'  error).      Inim'icis  cor^Jidere  summm  stultitm  est,  to   trust 
enemies  is  a  mark  (evidence)  of  the  greatest  folly.     Est  bonl 
princlpis  legihus  oUcmperare,  it  is  the  duty  of  a  good  ruler  to 
obey  the  laws.     Hoc  non  est  turn  gravitatis  atque  auctoritatis, 
this  is  incompatible  with  thy  dignity  and  position.      Coyisulum 
est  videre,  7ie  quid  respublica  detrimentl  capiat,  it  is  the  busmess 
(province')  of  the  consuls  to  see,  that  the  republic  may  not  suffer. 
When  this  relation  is  expressed  by  a  personal  pronoun,  the 
latter   is    changed   into   a   possessive    adjective   in   the   neuter 
singular:  Nostrum  est,  vidvre  ne  irrita  lex  sit,  it  is  our  duty  to 
see  that  the  law  be  not  ineffectual. 

3.  The  QUALITATIVE  GENITIVE  is  either  translated  by  the 
preposition  of,  in  which  case  a  governing  noun  of  general  im- 
port is  often  introduced,  or  by  an  adjective,  or  by  the  verb  to 
have  (in  connection  with  the  copula),  as :  Gajus  summm  fuit 
prudentioe,  G.  was  a  man  of  the  greatest  prudence.  Critogna- 
tus  magncB  apud  2^lehem  auctoritatls  fuit,  Cr.  was  of  great  in- 
fluence (very  influential,  had  great  influence  on)  with  the  people. 
^JIoc  maximi  momenti  est,  this  is  of  the  greatest  importance  (is 

very  important). 

This  form  of  the  Predicate-genitive  is  often  used  to  introduce 
the  relations  of  weight,  measure  and  number  as  predicates,  as 
if  these  were  qualities  of  the  subject,  as :  Murus  fuit  pedum 
sedecim,  the  wall  was  of  sixteen  feet  (was  sixteen  feet  long). 
Legio  trium  millium  peditum  fuit,  the  legion  was  (consisted) 
of  three  thousand  foot-soldiers. 

I     1    (Nccavit  Caesar)  Galliam  potius  esse  ArtoriAti  quam  'populi^i^- 
mani.  vL.  B.  G.  1,  45.-2.  Jam  iiie  ^W^i;*^'  totum-es.se  scisCic^^ 
2,  13,  2.-3.  Hie  versus  Plautl  uoii  est.   Cic.  Fam.  U,  1j.— 4.  Bello  Gallice 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE   VERB. 


79 


prorter  Capitolium  atque  arcem  omnia  hoHtium  erant.  Liv.  G,  40. —  5.  Nolae 
(a  cit)^)  sniiatus  Romaw'n-inn,  jilebs  Ilannibalis  erat.  Liv.  23,  30. —  6.  Thebge 
poini'ii  l^)l11;■Ini  jure  belli  fact;i?  sunt.  Liv.  33,  13. —  7.  ExistimavGrmit,  do 
■  -       -   -  -   .  Cajs.  B. 


siimiml^"  belli  non  finnia   jiulicium,"  sed  impevatons  esse. 


U.l, 


est  tarn 
0.  3Ia<i:ni 


35  Wholly. 


41.— 8.  Petiilaiititi^'*  et  libido  magis  adolescentium  est  quam  setium.  Cic. 
Sen.  11. —  {).  Damnatio^"  est  judicum,  poena*"  legis. — 10.  Non  recusilmiis 
quin**  omnia,  propter  qu{C  belhim  initum  est,  vestra  siat.  Liv.  30,  30. — 
11.  C'urio  fuit  igilur  ejusdcm  ff^r//.-?  fere.  Cic.  Brut.  32.— 12.  Ejusdem  fere 
tciiUHjrin  fuit  eques  liomanus,  C.  Titius.  lb.  45. 

IL  1.  Judicis  est,  semper  iu  causis  "  verum  sequi.  Cic.  Off.  2, 14. — 
2.  Adolcscentis  est,  majores  natu  verCri.  lb.  1,34.-3.  Non  minus  est  imt 
peratOris^  cousilio  supertlre  quam  gladio.  Caes.  B.  C.  1,  72. —  4.  Fortis  animi 
et  constanlis  est,  non  perturbari  in  rebus  asperis."*^  Cic.  Off.  1, 23. —  5.  Nihil 
igusti  aniini  tamciuc  parvi  quam  amare  divitias.  lb.  1,  20. — 
est  ingodi,  sevocarc**  menteni  a  sensibus.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  10. — 
7.  Est  </«.-*  qui  dat,  non  ejus  qui  petit,  conditiones  dicere  pacis.  Liv.  30, 
30. —  8.  Id  enim  ipsum  est  summi  oratOiis,  sumnnun  oratoi'em  populo  videri. 
Cic  Br.  50. —  9.  Dortona*^  mteHiu:entis'*®  est,  vidCre  quo  feraf*Vnatura  sua 
quemque.  Cic.  Br.  50. — 10.  Menliri  non  est  mexm.  Ter.  Heaut.  3,  2,  38. — 
11.  Si  c>tju.squam,  carte  tiium  est,  nihil  praeter  virtutem  in  bonis  ducere.*" 
Cic.  Fin.  3,  3. — 12.  NoHtnun  est  ferre  inodice*"  populi  voluntates.  Cic. 
Plane.  4. — 13.  Tempori  cedere  semper  sapientis  est  habitum.  Cic.  Div.  4, 
<J. — 14.  Duri  hominis,  vel  vix  hominis  vidCtur,  periculum  capitis^"  inferre 
multis.'^  Cic.  Off'.  2,  14. 

in.  1.  p.  Murajna  multae  industries  et  magni  laboiHs  fuit.  Cic.  Brut.  67.—- 
2.  Vir  bonus  sunnuie  pietdtis  erga  deum  est.  Sen.  Ep.  70. —  3.  Magni 
judicii,  sumnue   etiam  facultdti/'^   esse  debObit^'*   orator.    Cic.   Or.  21.— 

4.  Virtus  tantilrum  viriuni  est,  ut  se  ipsa  tueiltur.    Cic.  Tusc.  5,  1,  2. — 

5.  Hannibal  tumulum^*  tutum,  commodumque  alioqui,"  nisi  quod^"  longin- 
quaj  uquationin^''  erat,  cepit."  Liv.  30,  20. —  0.  Philocles  animadvertcbat,^^ 
se  nulllus  momenti  apud  exercitum  esse.  Nep.  Ale.  8. —  7.  Id  est  maximi 
momenti  et  pondens.  Cic.  in  Vat.  4. —  8.  Reliquum  spatium  quod  est  pedum 
sexceutorum.  Ca^.  B.  G.  1,  38.— I).  Fluminis  altitQdo''"  erat  circiter pedum, 
trium.  lb.  2, 18. — 10.  Xerxis  classis  milie  et  ducentarum  navium  fuit.  Nep. 
Tiiem.  2,  5. 

Item.  24.  For  the  distinction  between  the  Genitive  and  Dative  of  the 
Possessor  see  p.  82.  A  peculiar  formula  of  the  Genitive  of  the  Possessor 
is  Hie  phrase  ditiOnis  alicujus  esse  or  fieri,  to  be  or  become  subject  to  some- 
body (literally  <^  he  of  somebody's  rule),  as:  Urbes,  quce,  Carthaginiensium 
diiionis  erant.  Liv.  30,  {).—  Albdni  ditiOnis  alienoi  (to  foreign  rule)  Jdcti  erant. 
Liv.  1,  25. 

J{e)n.  25.  The  Impersonal  Predicate-Genitive  often  consists  of  an 
absolute  adjective  in  the  Genitive  Singular,  denoting  "  persons  in  general," 
■Nvuh  the  force  of  an  impersonal  predicative  adjective  (§  77),  as :  titulti  est, 

"On  the  administration  of  the  war.— "  Cons^true:  Judicinm  de  gumma  belli  non 
puuni  esse,  ged  iniperainns.— ^<*  Frivolity.— ^»  Condemnation.—'»"  The  penal  provisiout?.— 
*»  We  do  not  objict  lebt.—'*^  Trials.— ■•^  Under  ditticullies.— "  To  i^ever.—^^  Teacher.— 
<«  Intelligent.— <^  Literally  :  whither  hUi  nature  carrier  erei-yhody.  Translate  :  %i'hat  are 
every  one's  natural  tendencies,  a  sentence  which,  literally  translated,  would  make  very 
bad  Latin.- <«  Literallv  :  to  reckon  amonj,'  (§  IM.  R.  75)  the  goods.  W  e  say  in  Enj^lish  : 
among  the  blenftings.—*^  With  composure.— ^»  Life.— ^^  To  bring  on  many.— ^^  Talent.— 
"Will  have  to  be.— &*  A  hillock.— "  In  other  respects.— "  Except  that.— ^^  Too  distant 
from  the  supply  of  water.—'»  To  occupy. — ^"  To  perceive. — •"  Depth. 


%\ 


80 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


rebm  inarnbm  commorm,  it  is  foolish  (literally:  it  i^  ^^^^J^^J'^/  ^  /^^^*^J 
per.^on)  to  be  impressed  by  worthless  matters  (tr.tles).     T lie  Latin  does  no 
employ  adjectives  of  one  termination  (^  213),  and  especially  not  those  with 
consonant-stems  (^  310)  as  impersonal  predicates      Instead  of  tl»^^^  the 
form  of  an  impersonal  Predicate-Genitive  is  almost  always  used.    Thus  it 
would  be  unusual  to  sav,  Taclre  prudent  cxU  it  is  prudent  to  be  silent,  in- 
stead of  Tacere  prudentls  est  (it  is  the  mark  of  a  prudent  man). 

1  Est  pr^identis  snstinSre {to  resUt)  impetum  benevolentiie.  Cic.  Ani.  l;--2^^';s';??: 
re  (iukl  d.  se  qnisque  ..'utiat.  m>n  solum  arrc^um  s  e.t  sod  o.nnTno  ^l'^^^>>a  '-7  ^»?-  J\«- 
1, 28  -3.  In  trauquillo  «2  tempestaiem  adver.<aiu  "  opiaie  deineutis  est.  tie.  Ofl.  1,  -44. 

Rem  26.  The  Genitive  of  quality  must  always  be  connected  with  an 
attiibutrve  adject ive.  Thus,  instead  of  -  He  loas  a  man  of  wealthr  we  mus^ 
say  in  Latin  -  He  was  a  man  oi  great  wealth,"  or  "He  was  a  wealthy 
(pecunioms)  man." 

Bern  27.  The  Genitive  of  quality  oftener  occurs  in  the  form  ot  an  AT- 
TmBUTiVE  than  in  that  of  a  predicative  phrase  as:  renclenYi^ctat<B 
virtfitiH  rintm  Just.,  Pericles,  u  man  of  eminent  qualities.— yirw^fe/w,  mttis 
^qenUjlLem,  ui.,  Aruns  a  youth  of  a  sweet  character.- A^^r  guatuor 
Sr"i  Liv.,  a  held  of  tour' acres  (a  four-acre  lot).  In  predicative  phmses 
the  AblItive  of  quality,  which  has  the  same  meanin-  as  the  qualitative 
lenitive  Ls  far  mofe  frequent  than  the  latter.  The  Ablative  ot  Quality  13 
properly  an  object,  which  probably  has  been  introduced  in  consequence 
ofTi  ( initted  -ovei'ning  participle,  such  as  -e^idowcdr provided''  {pr^dc- 

Pdt),  G.  was  a  man  of  great  gitmyxs.—MilUcH  bono  ammo  jua'unt,  the  scl- 
diers  were  of  good  cheer. 

1    rComDerif  ^  C«?ar)  ipsum  es'se  Dnmnori<;em«5  p„mmjl  audaci,!.  magna  apud  ple- 

bem  V;riJat«8  B  G  1. 18.-2.  A-e^ilaus  ,tatara^'  fuit  humili  ela>/vx>/-e  exiguo    Nep. 

l^;S/s_ 3.  Cat";  hi  omnibus  rebu.^inKuUlri  fuil  prudentui  ^\^'{^''''^>-'\..^''L  nt  2  V 

4  "llerodotUH  tantfl  est  dixptentm,  nr  me  (luidem  majjnopere  delectet.   Cic.  de  Or.  i,  13. 

—5.  Summo  iste  quidem  dicitur  iiifjeiiio  luisse.  Cie.  Brut.  ob. 

Bern  28  Re"-ardinir  the  difference  between  the  Genitive  and  Ablative 
of  qlvlh'y,  w"e  remark:  1)  that  both  forms  are  indiscriminately  used  m 
nie  de  ineat ion  of  character  and  special  qualities,  although  the  ablative  is 
far  more  freciuent.  2)  We  must  use  the  ablative  m  describing  external 
qualities  (example  No.  2)  and  momcniarf/  dispositions,  as  in  the  phrase: 
ZTanlno  essc.^  S)  We  Jmt  use  the  genitive,  when  the  prediCjUe  ix-ters  to 
number,  weight,  and  measure  (j>  46G.  Compare  examples  III.  Nob.  8,  J,  10). 
Pum  20.  The  Ablative  of  quality  is,  like  the  genitive,  also  used  at- 
tuibutively,  especially  as  an  apposition,  in  which  relation  the  genitive  is 

extremely  rare.  r.-    ti    *  r~ 

1  Alunena  mediocri*^  ingenio,  sed  ma^no  sturlio  renim  veterum.  Cic.  »™J;  ['••- 
o  Emt  i^ter'LabiGuum  atqiie  bustem  dilScili  //«/i-vi^/-»  rtumen  r>pi,^f/ue  pnerupn..  » 
%^  n  G  6  7  -3  1  i(.m>ui^  ad  mensam  eximia  /o;7/ar  puer...  ju^sit  conMMere  '" 
CIc!'Tusc!'5  -il'.- 1.  clJm-  Valerium  Pn.cillum,  .ummi  virtule  et  h,u,uinitaie  adolc- 
eceiitem,  adAriovistum  misit.   Lies.  li.  G.  1,  47. 

§  407.   The  form   of  a  PiiEDiCATE-GENiTiVE  is  frequently 
used  with  the  force  and  instead  of  a  rredicate-Nomiuative,  in 


_«»  Very  steep.— ^*  To  wait  at  table  {.ad  meiusam). 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


81 


order  to  represent  an  abstract  predicate-noiin,  which  in  English 
has  the  indefinite  article.  This  is  especially  the  case  with  the 
nouns  77103,  consiietudo,  jus.  Instead  of  IHc  fidt  tnos  (hoc  fuit 
jus)  apud  Jiomd?ios,  the  Latin  frequently  says:  Hoc  fuit  moris 
(juris)  ajmd  jRoniduos*  This  was  a  custom  with  the  Romans. 

1.  Est  enim  hoc  Gallica3  coTisuetudims,  ut  viatores'*  etiam  invltos'^  con- 
sistere^'  cogant.  Caes.  B.  G.  4,5. —  2.  Negilvit,  m^fvis  esse  Grascorum,  ut  in 
convivio  virorum  mulieres  accumberent."'*  Cic.  Verr.  1,26. —  3.  Marcellus 
id  HQC  juris  nee  j^tesidtis''^  suaj  esse  dixit.  Liv.^5,  7. —  4.  Quod  jE tolls 
juris  est,  idem  et  nobis  sit.   Liv.  41,  24. 

Rem.  30.  In  the  same  wMy  the  neuters  of  absolute  adjectives  are  fre- 
quently used  as  predicate-genitives,  when  they  with  the  subject  may  form 
a  partitice  phrase  (t^^  372,  373),  as  :  Demonstrant ,  sibi  prcEter  agri  solum 
nihil  esse  retiqui,  they  show  that  nothing  was  left  to  them  but  the  mere 
ground  of  their  tields.  Ca?s.  B.  G.  1, 11. —  Ca?sar  quid  sui  consilii  sit  ostendit, 
Caesar  explains  what  his  purpose  was.    lb.  1,  21. 

§  4:G8.  Puedicate-Dative. — The  predicate-noun,  connected 
with  the  copula,  assumes  the  form  of  the  Dative  in  two  con- 
structions: 1)  that  of  the  Dative  of  the  Possessor;  2)  tliat  of 
the  ABSTRACT  Pkedicate-Dative,  which  is  also  called  the  Da- 
tive of  Pltrpose  or  the  construction  of  the  double  Dative. 

I.  The  Dative  of  the  Possessor  denotes  the  owner  of  the 
thing  which  is  introduced  as  the  grammatical  subject.  The 
verb  esse  in  this  connection  is  rendered  by  "  to  Aaye,"  "  to  own,^'' 
so  that  the  Dative  of  the  Possessor  is  turned  into  the  English 
subject,  and  tlie  Latin  subject  into  the  English  ob.iect  pos- 
sessed, as:  Z^oy/«  ^^5  ei  fuit  omni  suppellectile  instructa,  he  had 
(owned)  a  house,  provided  with  all  conveniences.  This  dative 
is  also  used  to  express  relations  similar  to  possession,  as  rela- 
tionship, habits,  opinions,  and  all  that  may  be  an  object  of  "to 
have,"  as:  Frater  mild  est^  I  have  a  brother;  nobis  aliud  est 
ncQOtium,  we  have  another  business. 

1.  Jlomini  cum  deo  similitudo'"  est.  Cic.  Leg.  1,  8.-2.  Semper  in  civi- 
tfite  (ei)  quibus  opes'^  nuiloi  sunt,  bonis'*  invident.   Sail.  Cat.  37. —  3.  Quot 


*  Tbis  form  must  be  cousidered  as  analogous  to  the  Partitive  Genitive  (hoc  jjwris, 
instead  oi  hie  inof). 
7»  Travelhrs.— ■''«' AjT'Unst  their  inclination.— "  To  ^Xo^.—''*AccumJ)ere  in  convivw. 


po 
"  Means.— ^8  Those  that  are  well  off. 


82 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VEKB. 


homines,  tot  sontcntiae :'"  suns  cuique  mos  est.  Tor.  Phorm.  2  4, 14.— 
4  Dives  est  (i'^)  cui  tanta  posscssio''"  est,  ut  nihil  optct  amplius.  Cic.  1  ar. 
6,  1.— 5.  Sibi  mirum  vidCri  (dixit  Ariovistns),  quid  in  suil  Galha,  qnani 
t)dlo  vieisset,  aut  Cmari  aut  oninino  j)opulo  Koniauo  negotii  esset.  Cacs. 
13.  G.  1,  U. 

Bern.  31.  Here  bclonirs  tiie  personal  dative  in  the  phrase  mild  [tihi,  etc.) 
nonunoY  coqnouwn  e,'<t,\  have  the  name,  I  am  called.  The  name  itself  is 
placed  either  in  the  >'ominative,  or,  by  attraction,  in  the  dative  (agreemg 
either  with  nomen  or  with  the  dative  of  the  Possessor),  or  more  rarely  as 
atuibute  of  jwmen  in  the  genitive. 

1  SvracQpis  cPt  fon?  aqufc  dtilcis»,  cui  nomen  Arethilm  e^t.  Cic.  Verr  4.  53.-2.  El 
morlx)  nomen  est  araricia.  Cic.  Tu>^c.  4. 11.-3.  Attus  Clausus.cni  po^tea  Appio  Uaudip 
mlmen  fnit,  Konmm  transfQgit.«'  Liv.  i,  1G.-4.  Duo  sunt  Ko.cn,  quorum  alien  Capt- 
td/ii  coi'Domen  est.   Cic.  Rose.  Am.  (>.  -         ^i.  j-     *. 

The  name  construction  takes  place,  when  verb?  other  than  esse  form  the  predicate,  in 
whidi  case  tlir  name  either  airrees  with  the  case  of  tlie  word  nonien  or  is  placed  in  the 
Dative  as:  lU-  arliticibus  nomen  his(rwnitni.s^'  inditum^^  (c^t).  Liv.  .,  2  —  Mirps  • 
cui  A^'a>d>an  pareutes  di.xC-re  nomen.  Liv.  1,  l.-Sometunes  the  name  is  placed  in  tho 
nominative,  althou-h  the  word  rumien  stands  in  another  case,  as  :  .  n.s/'i(/f>-  adto  excel- 
S/,y^!Vo.../A/.i..  Justus  ...7  avpellatus,  .Nep.  Arist.  1,  where  «v.dcutly  wo  d,«ereut 
constructions  are  mixed.- C'a/i/<io  cognoimu  Chaucius  usurpare  concemt.  buet.  Claud.  iA. 

Bern.  32.  Between  the  Dative  and  the  Genitive  of  the  possessor  there 
is  the  same  ditierence  as  between  the  English  verbs  "  to  haw''  (to  own)  and 
"  to  belong  tor  The  genitive  of  the  i)ossessor  expressly  or  impliedly  op- 
poses one  possessor  to  another,  while  in  the  dative  ot  the  possessor  a 
certain  property  is  represented  as  a  part  of  the  whole  property  ot  one  and 
the  same  individual.  Thus  ISenipronio  aycr  est,  qui,  etc.,  means:  Sempro- 
nius  owns  (among  his  other  property)  a  tield  wiiich,  etc.  But  IJNbitatur 
hie  ar/er  nitne  Sempronii  means  :  It  is  doubted  whether  this  field  belongs  to 
Sempronius  (or  another). 

§  469.  2.  The  Abstract  Predicate-Dative  is  employed, 
when  the  Predicate  is  an  abstract  noun  (as  honor,  obstacle, 
advanta(/e),  and  when  the  Person  concerned  in  the  matter  {the 
interested  Person)  is  either  mentioned  or  understood.  Both  the 
interested  Person  and  the  abstract  Predicate-noun  are  then 
placed  in  the  Dative  Case.*  The  Dative  of  the  interested 
Person  is  generally  rendered  by  the  preposition  to  or  for,  and 
the  Predicate-Dative  either  by  a  Predicate-noun  in  the  Nomina- 
tive, or  by  a  predicative  adjective,  as :  IMc  res  mihi  hondri 
{emoluniento,  auxillo,  impedlmento,  etc.)  ^.s'^  This  is  an  honor 
(an  advantage,  help,  obstacle,  etc.)  to  me,  or  "  is  honorable,  ad- 

vantarjeous,iiseful,  awkicard,''  etc.— Cui  bono  est?  to  whom  is 

it  of  advantage  ?  Cic.  Phil.  2, 14. 


"  Supply:  m»t.    The  copula  i».  frequently  omitted  ni  general  asserticmt.    f  th,^  kind. 
— «0  Prunertv  -«»  To  Aw.—^'^  The  name  hUfrio  (actor).-^^  Was  jriveii  -»''«  Oh^piin-- 
*  Se  iSicate-Dative  is  a  specie^^  of  Attractiou,  agrecin-  (agaiiiet  tho  general  rules) 


with  the  Personal  dative. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   TIIE   VERB. 


83 


1.  Virtutes  hominibus  deco?-igIo7'icpqye  sunt.  Sen.  Clem.  1, 3. — 2.  Magno 
malo  est  hominibus  avaricia.  Auct.  Her.  2,24.-3.  Pergite,  adolescentes, 
atque  in  id  studium  iucumbite,*^  ut  et  vobis  honuri,  etamlcis  ntiHtdti,et 
rnpuhUcfB  otiolumento  Q&se  possltis.  Cic.  Or.  1,  8.-4.  (Hoc)  Gallis  magno 
ad  pngnam  erat  impedinicnto.  Caes.  H.  G.  1,  25.-5.  (Ariovistns  dixit)  ami- 
citiain  populi  Wom^n'i sihi ornaniento^^ Qtprcp.sidio,"''  nondetrimento  esse 
oportere  {ought).  Cajs.  B.  G.  1,  44. 

Bern.  33.  The  dative  of  the  interested  person  is  often  understood,  espe- 
cially when  it  refers  to  Persons  in  general,  or  when  it  is  expressed  in  a 
followiuiT  clause,  as :  Una  res  erat  magno  nsui,  One  thing  was  very  useful. 
Ca's.  B.  G.  3,  \\.—Quod  auteni  idem  mcesUtiam  meam  reprehendit,  idem 
jocum,  mag  NO  argumento  esty  me  in  utroque  fuinse  moderdtum,  but  that  the 
Kanie  man  censiires  my  sadness  and  my  jesting,  is  a  strong  proof  that 
1  was  moderate  in  both.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  16. 

Bern.  34.  The  predicate-dative  is  also  used  with  those  verbs  that  have 
the  force  of  the  copula  (i^  4(12 ),  and  as  an  accessory  predicate,  in  which 
case  it  is  generally  translated  by  as;  as:  Paupertas  probro  haberi  coepta  est, 
«all.  Cat."l2,  Poverty  began  to  be  considered  a  disgrace.— P<?nc/^s  agros 
8U0S  dono  reipubliccB  dedit,  P.  gave  his  lands  as  a  present  to  the  republic. 
Just.  3,  7.     See  p.  256,  Obs.  2. 

§  470,  OTnER  Constructions  of  the  Verb  esse. — 1.  The  Latin  verb 
esse,  as  the  English  verb  to  be,  is  often  not  a  mere  copula,  but  has  the  mean- 
ing "  to  be  in  a  eertain  state;'  "  to  behave,'"  "  to  sojourn''  ''  to  be  situated."  It 
may  then,  like  other  verbs,  be  connected  with  prepositional  objects 
(^5  425,  U.  9),  or  with  adverbs  : 

1.  Quod  Gallia  si/b  peptentrionibu?  est.  because  Gaul  if»  (situated)  toward  the  North. 
Cx^.  B.  G.  1.  16.— -2.  Quum  ea  ifa  siitt,  since  this  is  so.  lb.  1.  14.-3.  Reclisnme  apud 
te  s^mt  omnia,  all  is  riL'ht  with  vou  (is  in  a  riLdU  state).  Cic.  Fam.  9,9.-4.  In  convivio 
counter  gX  jucuiHie  finsd.ymx  were  (demeaned)  courteous  and  pleasant  duriu]^  the  re- 
past. Cic.  Dtj.  7.-5.  Cum  sciret  nihil  roboris  secum  esse,  since  he  knew,  that  no  force 

was  with  him.  Liv.  4'2,  Wi.  .,.,....   \r  i     o-       i 

Thus  the  plirase  bene  est  frequently  occurs  m  epistolary  style  in  the  formula  bi  vales 
bene  est,  if  your  health  is  good,  it  is  well. 

2.  Esse  often  stands  without  object  or  predicate  in  the  meaning  "  to 
exist,"  and  is  then  generally  translated  by  the  English  impersonal  expres- 
sion "  tliere  is,"  "  tliere  are :" 

1.  Ne  reditus  spes  esset.  that  there  might  he  no  hope  of  a  return.  Liv.  40.  38.-2.  A^er 
publicus  erat  in  Samnitibus,  there  were  public  lands  in  the  country  of  the  Samnites.  lb. 
—  3.  Erant  itinera  duo  (luibus  domo  e.xlre  posseut,  Viere  were  two  roads  by  which  they 
could  depart  from  home.  Cks.  B.  G.  1,  6. 

Here  belongs  the  construction  sunt  or  est  with  a  following  relative 
clause,  the  predicate  of  which  is  placed  in  the  subjunctive.  Sunt  or  est 
qui  etc.  {xunt  multi,  quidam  qui),  means  '  t}]^re  are  persons  who'  {tJtere  are 
mauy,some  who);  netno  est  qui,  there  is  nobody  who,  as  :  Sunt  qui  censeant, 
there  are  persons  who  think  etc.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,9.  For  this  construction 
see  p.  551,  Obs.  4. 

3.  Sometimes  the  exclamatory  particles  ecce  &r\den  (\o,  behold)  are  used  with  the  force 
of 

ject- 
tnen. 


ecce 


In  this  contraction  often  an  accusative  io  used  in  place  of  a  nominative  (eccos,  eccum, 
ecciUum).    See  Hand.  Turs.  2.  348  foil. 

^     I    I  -  — —    ■  '  " 

"6  Apply  to.— 89  Credit.— ^^  Protection. 


8^ 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


III.    Verbs  construed  with  Simple  Ortects  in  the 

Accusative. 

^  471.  The  different  cases  in  which  the  corap^etin?  objects  are  placed, 
inculcate  the  tlifferent  manner  in  which  the  objects  participate  in  the  action 
of  tiie  subject.  Thus  tlie  verbs  redstere  and  obedlre  are  construed  with  the 
dativp:,  because  the  persons  Ibrmini;  the  objects  of  these  verbs,  respect- 
ively attack  and  comimind  the  subject.  The  verb  meminme  governs  the 
GENITIVE,  because  the  rememl)ering  is  conceived  to  come  from  the  object. 
The  ACCUSATIVE  case  denotes  the'  absence  of  action  on  the  part  of  the 
object;  and  wliile  the  starling-point  of  the  action  is  represented  by  the 
NOMiNATn-E,  tlie  accusative  represents  the  object  as  that  in  which  the 
action  simply  ends.  Since  the  Passive  Voice  reverses  the  action  of  the  verb, 
it  follows  that  in  this  voice  the  object-accusative,  or  the  end  of  the  action, 
must  become  the  subject-nominative,  or  its  beginning.  Hence  the  criterion 
of  a  transitive  object  is  its  convertibility  into  a  passive  subject. 

Bern  35  The  cages  with  which  the  different  verbs  are  construed,  cannot  he  determinod 
a  priori.  The  original  conception  of  a  verb  is  often  forgotten  in  the  later  periods  ot  a 
lan«'ua"e,  and  one  lan«ruaj;e  often  conceives  as  transitive  a  verbal  idea  that  in  another 
lant'uai'e  is  considered  as  intransitive.  To  trace  out  the  reckons  u/iya.  certain  verl)  is 
construed  with  a  certain  case,  is  not  the  province  of  tiie  elementary  -,'ranunarian.  We 
confine  ourselves  here  to  ihc /acts  of  construction,  without  enteriu<,'  into  a  discusBiou 
of  its  causes.  ,  .  ,  •     ^  *    • 

Jie/n  m  It  is  evident  that  no  intransitive  object  can  become  a  passive  subject,*  since 
this  would  etfnce  the  difference  of  the  cases.  Ilence  the  convertibility  of  an  object  into 
a  passive  subject  furnishes  a  certain  proof  of  its  beini:  tkansitivk  ;  and  the  mere  fact 
that  a  j)assive  verb  is  connected  with  a  personal  subject  is  alone  a  certain  evidence  of 
the  verb  beiii"  transitive,  or  governin-?  the  accusative  case.  Thus  the  mere  existence 
of  such  constructions  as,  Ihec  i-es  cavZhtr  (this  thin-  is  j,'uarded  agaiust;,  18  a  proof  that 
Hie  verb  cavere  governs  the  accusative  case. 

§  472.  The  construction  of  Latin  verbs  with  the  Accusative 
case,  or  the  question  whether  a  given  verb  is  transitive  or  not, 
is  determined  by  two  rules : 

1.    Verbs  irhich  are  transitive  in  Eiujlish  {and  other  Ian- 

f/uaf/es)  have  (jenerally  Transitive  equivalents  in  Latin, 

Jlem  37.  The  numerous  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  of  two  kinds; 

ia)  Several  verbs,  transitive  in  English,  correspond  to  intransitive 

Latin  verbs.    These  are  enumerated  among  the  single  verbs  governing 

the  dative,  ablative,  and  genitive  cases. 
{b)  Several  verbs,  intransitive  in  English,  are  expressed  by  transitive 

Latm  verbs.     For  these,  see  §  473. 

B£m  38.  The  names  of  LANauAGES,  when  they  depend  on  verbs  of  speak- 
ing writin"-,  knowing,  etc.,  are  in  Latin  generally  expressed  by  adverbs, 
foriiied  froin  national  adjcclives,  while  the  English  language  either  employs 
TII.VNS1TIVE  or  prepositional  olyects,  as :  to  speak  Latin,  Latine  loqui ;  to 


*  That  in  the  English  language  intransitive  objects  very  frequently  arc  made  passive 
subjects  is  owing  to  the  aptitude  of  this  lan<'uage  to  transform  intransitive  verbs  with 
prepositional  objects  into  transitives,  merelyl)y  uniting  the  preposition  with  the  idea  of 
the  verb,  without  changing  its  position.  If  the  English  angua-e  had  more  than  one 
objective  case,  its  condition  in  this  respect  would  be  precisely  the  eame  aB  that  ol  the 
Latin. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE   VERB. 


85 


knoiD  Persian,  Persice  scire ;  to  icrite  a  book  in  Greek,  librum  Greece  scribere 
Thus  occur  the  adverbs  Punice  (Punic,  Carthaginian),  Gallice,  Maurice'. 
I  usee  (in  the  liitrurian  language)  and  others. 

1.  M.  Aurelius  Scaurus  Latine  imprimis  est  eleganter  locQtus.  Cic  Brut  .36  135  — 
2.  Noil  tam  pneclilrum  est  scire  Latine.  qiiam  turpe  nesclre.  lb.  37,  140—3  jovem  «Iri 
ajunt  phiu.sophi,  SI  Grace  \ommin,  luqui.  lb.  31.  121.-4.  Themistociem  unum  intra 
annum  (,ptime  lociltum  esse  ^e^m,^  constat.^^  (^uint.  11,  2,  50.-  5.  Diphilus  banc  fabu- 
lams  GrcKce  scripsit.  Plaut.  Casin.  prol.  33. 

2.   Verbs  whose  objects  are  co)iveriible  into  Passive  subjects, 

are  Transitive,  i.  e.,  construed  with  the  Accusative* 

• 

This  rule  will  not  enable  the  student  to  ascertain  the  construction  of  a  given  verb 
unless  he  knows,  that  it  forms  a  personal  passive  voice.    But  it  is  a  good  test  of  con' 
Btruction,  and  the  student  should  frequently'  apply  it,  by  changing  active  constructions 
into  passives,  and  vice  versa,  so  as  to  become  familiar  with  the  construction  of  all  classes 
ol  verbs  in  both  voices. 

The  rule,  generally  given  in  the  grammars,  that  all  transitive  verbs  govern  the  Accusa- 
tive, IS  a  mere  tautology.  "  ^^v^ud^v 

Bern.  .3«>.  There  are  several  exceptions  to  the  rules  in  §472. 

1.  Several  nkiteu  vkrbs  are  sometimes  connected  with  accusative  objects  which  do 
not  complete  the  action  of  the  verb  as  such,  but  denote  things  or  persons  to  which  the 
actum  indirect///  refers,  Genenilly  such  objects  are  not  convertible  into  passives  and 
hence  cannot  be  considered  as  transitive  accusatives.  Here  belong  ol^re  redolPre  (to 
emelh.  mpere  (to  taste),  luf/ere,  tmerire,  dolire  (to  mourn),  .vj^r^  (to'thirstn  honlre  (to 
shudder),  as:  Ctram  dPre,  to  smell  of  wa.x.  CSc.Ov.Zrih.—Literitum  reipnbiicce  Ivqlre, 
to  mourn  for  the  downfall  of  the  rei)ui)iic.  lb.  Pis.  ■i.—tiUv,  honures.  I  thirst  for  honors! 
lb.  Qij.ir.  .3.  5,  3.  Only  poets  (rarely)  convert  some  of  these  verbs  into  passives,  as: 
LiKjthere  nobis.  Ov.  Met.  10, 141 ;  wjncE  Ritixidur.  lb.  Fast.  1,  216.  So  the  neuter  deponent 
verh/oqifi  is  construed  with  non-tiansiiive  accusatives,  as:  Lapides  loqui  (t»  talk  stones). 
Plant.  Aul.  2,  1,  :iO.—Xi/dl  ni.^i  da.<-f.s  loquen.<  et  extrcifffs,  talking  nothing  but  tleels  and 
armies.  Cic.  Att.  9,  2-3.  3.— Peculiar  is  the  accusative  dependent  on  deticere,  in  the  mean- 
ing 'to  faU\  as:  Te  oratio  dt^flccret.  Words  would  fail  (to)  you.  Cic.  R.  A.  32.-Many 
verbs  similar  to  the  above  are  construed  with  an  accusative  by  the  poets.  These  also 
use  '  poetically '  neuter  verbs  in  place  of  ordinanj  traiuitive  verbs,  constrning  them,  like 
the  latter,  with  arc iL-nt tires.  Here  belong  the  pli'rases  ardtre  aliquern,  in  the  meaniu"  <»f 
anulre  aliquem;  pnlllre  aliquid.  in  tlie  meaning  of  tiialre  aliquid;  plorare^fiere,  geimre 
aliquid,  in  the  meaning  of  deploidre  aliquid. 

2.  Some  verbs  may  tJtke  the  accusative  of  neuter  fr)rm-adjective8  in  the  singular,  but 
not  the  accusatives  of  ordinary  nouns,  as  posse,  velle.  v(aZre,prodtsse,  profictre,  nocere. 
as:  Qmd  potfs^  ov  nihil  ]x>tes  {-qnidfacere  potes)?  What  can  you  (do)?  vou  cannot  (do) 
anything.— /iY  enim  quodcuntjue  rolerd.  Cic.  Fain.  9. 17,  'l.—Ignari,  quid  graritas  valertt. 
Ignorant  of  what  value  gravity  had.  lb.  Sest.  28— A^/ii/  tibi  litterce  mece  prodervnt.  lb. 
Fani.2,  17.— Ao/J  quo  proficiani  quid,  not  that  it  is  of  any  use  to  me.  II).  Att.  12,24,3. 
Here  belong  some  transitive  verbs  which,  along  with  their  transitive  objects,  may  take 
neuter  form-adjectives  but  not  ordinary  nouns  in  the  accusative,  as  adj'/idre,  irnpedlre, 
vwvtre,  n^:  Xi/iil  (te)  imptdio,  I  am  not  in  your  way.  Cic.  Off.  1,1.— Xi/dtne  te  noctur- 
man ]»r<vsidin?n  iiwret?  IJoes  the  nocturnal  guard  make  no  impression  on  you?  lb.  Cat. 
1,  \.—Solitudo  aliquid  {me)  adjuvat.  Solitude  is  of  some  benetit  (to  me).  lb.  Att.  12, 14,  3. 
Rem.  40.  The  poets  sometimes  construe  the  passives  of  some  verbs  with  objects  in 
the  ACCUSATIVE,  leaving  both  the  active  subject  and  ol)ject  entirely  unchanged,  espe- 
cially with  verbs  denoting  a  putting  on  or  off  of  things  iinduere,  exvere,  cinqere,  accin- 
gere).  Tnese  verbs  have  then,  even  in  the  passive  Participle,  the  a|)pearance  and  con- 
struction of  transitive  Deponents,  being  distinguished  from  the  corresponding  active 
forms  by  a  kind  of  reflexive  meaning,  as  : 

Correbus  Androgei  qaleam  induitnr,  Coroebua  puts  on  (to  himself)  Androgens'  hel- 
met. Virg.  .fin.  2,  ;i92.— Exuitur  cornua,  he  puts  off  the  (his)  horns.  Ov.  M«;t.  7.  .31S.— 
J'namiis  iniuileyV/T'o;*  cingitur,  Priainus  girds  /ii//i.sW/ with  the  useless  sword.  Virg. 
^Eu.  2,  h\\.\~lndHtas  vesttin,  having  put  on  the  garment,  also  in  prose  (Li v.  27, 37). 

§  47S.  The  Latin  verbs  which  are  construed  with  tiiansi- 

»  Thus  u.  e.  as  Plato  spoke).— a  ft  is  known.—*  This  rule  applies^ven  to  Deponent 
verbs,  but  only  in  the  Periphrastic  Conjugation  {milites  hortandi  b-unt).  See  Ch.  IV.— 
t  Prose-writers  construe  all  these  verbs  with  compound  objects,  and,  instead  of  the 
mentioned  constructions,  use  active  verbs  with  reflexive  objects  (Friamus  seferrocingit, 
Corw-bus  galtam  sifn  induit  etc.)    See  below. 


86 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  YERB. 


TiYE  objects,  while  their  English  equivalents  are  intransitivb, 

are:  1)  many  verbs,  originally  neuter,  and  denoting  a  motion 

in  space,  which  have  become  transitive  by  being  compounded 

with  certain  prepositions,  especially  clrcwn,  pe)\  jyrcBter^  trcms, 

as:  clrcunistdre  allquem^  to  stand  around  somebody:  perfodere 

allquid^  to  dig  through  something;  prcetenre  allquid,  to  go  past 

something.    2)  The  verbs  appdlare  allquem^  in  the  meaning  "  to 

appeal  to  somebody ;"  cavere  allquid,  to  guard  against,  or  to 

beware  of  something ;  sperare  allquid^  to  hope  for  something  ; 

qiieri  aliquld,  to  complain  of  something.    The  transitive  objects 

of  all  these  verbs  are  regularly  changed  into  passive  subjects, 

as:    homilies    clrcamstantur j'^    allquid   cavetur,    something    is 

guarded  against. 

1.  Eqiiitcs  Komflni  wteriquc  elves,  qui  circumstant  senatu?n.  Cic.  Cat. 
1^  j^. —  2.  Equites,  circuitis'  hostiuin  ca.stn'.^  Ciasso  leuuntiavCrunt."^  Caes. 
B.  G.  8,  2o.— :>.  Quihus  crat  procllvi^'  iniuCim^Jtunun.  Cajs.  B.  C.  1,  48.— 
4.  Fama  est,  Remiuu  novos  Iransiluisse^  tm/roi.  Liv.  1,  7. —  5.  Qnintilliu3 
circulre  ariem  Ciuiunis  et  obst'crflre"  mililcs  ca^pit.  Cirs.  B.  C.  2,  28.— 
6.  Teleslmis.  circiiinvolans'  ordines  excrcitiis  sui.  Yell.  2, 27. —  7.  Yos,  qui 
nuiltas  peiaiiibiilasl is* /<'/'/•</.*«,  ecquani"  cultiorein"'  Iialiil  vidistisV  Y'arro 
li.  K.  1,  2.-8.  Militcs  navis  solvunt"  atque  altero*'^  die  Ajwllonuim  praj- 
tcrveluintur."  Caes.  B.C.  3,  20.— 9.  Aquillii  procumtoi"  a'"  pratore  tri- 
hi'ims  ai)pelhlre  ausus  est.  Cic.  Quinct.  20,  04.— 10.  Tribimi  igitur  appella- 
bantur.  lb.  0;>.— 11.  Milites,  monili  a  Bniiuluslnis,'"  ut  rail  am  ctecuin^' 
fosifanfjue  caveant,  siibsislunt."  Cajs.  B.  C.  1,  28.— 12.  Noii  omnia  quae 
dolCinus'*'  jure-"  queri  i)ossumus.  Cic.  Flacc.  24.— 13.  Nuuc  spero  mcliOra. 
Cic.  Att.  I'o,  3. 

Bern.  41.  The  i>rep()sitIons,  -vvhieh  make  the  verbs  of  motion  transitive, 
are  the  same,  which  indicate  tlie  local  objects  of  tiiese  verbs.  Thus,  in- 
stead of  per  (tf/roa  cnrro,  the  Latin  ^a-nerally  says,  agros  percurro,  I  run 
around  the  fields;  muros  circumequitdcit,  instead  of  circum  muros  equitdvU. 
Besiaes  the  mentioned  prepositions,  also  oh,  sub,  in,  and  ad  have  the  force 
to  make  some  neuter  verbs  transitive,  as  sub'ire  muros,  to  go  under  the 
walls;  but  with  these  a  few  verbs  only  can  be  made  transitive,  while  with 
circum,  trans,  per,  and  prater,  almostf  every  verb  of  motion,  and  many 

♦  To  translate  paesivc  expressions  of  this  kiud  iuto  English,  we  must  generally  express 
the  sentence  actively.  ^  .  .        .  o  m 

»  Circulre,  to  ^'o  around.  Supply :  ab  eis,  and  change  into  an  active  construction.—'  J  o 
announce.— 3  Feasible,  i-asy.— *  lust,  of  fransnare,  to  swim  over.—*  Tranxinre,  to  spring 
over.—*  To  implore.—'  'l"o  tly  or  tu  hapten  around  — »  To  travel  over.—"  Ecqiuim  iii>teud 
of  num  o'/^Aw.—i"  Cultivated.— 1'  Naven  solvere,  to  weiu'h  aiirtior.— i'-»  Nixt.  — '^  Pnittr- 
xehi  to  sail  pa><t  —  >*  Counsel.— '*  From  the  decision  of  the  pnetor.— **  Inhabitants  of 
Brundusium.— 1'  Masked  palisades.—»»  T(.  halt.—»»  I'o  reirret.— '^"  Properly. 

t  Only  a  few  verbs  are  exceptions  from  this  rule.  Thus  trant'jugere,  iterjufjfve.  and  trnnS' 
currere  do  not  become  transitive  by  the  composition  with  traiu^,  but  require  a  preposi- 
tional object  {traiisj'ugere  per  silvas,  etc.)  CircuTnJacire,  to  lie  around,  is  like  adjacere 
construed  with  the  dativk. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VERB. 


87 


other  neuter  verbs  may  be  compounded  and  become  transitive.  The 
En',dish  language  sometimes  employ's  here  transitive  verbs,  as  :  flumen 
transire,  to  cross  the  river;  hostis  circumlre,  to  outflank  the  enemy.  But 
generally  objects  of  this  kind  must  be  rendered  by  means  of  English  pre- 
l)ositions,  coiTesponding  to  those  with  which  the  verb  is  compoijnded. 

Rein.  42.  When  irafmtive  verbs  are  compounded  with  prepositions  of 
this  kind,  they  do  not  change  thereby  their  construction.  Thus  we  say, 
transmittere  nans  in  Hiberniam,  the  same  as  we  say  mittere  in  Uiberniam. 
But  the  verbs  traducerc  (instead  of  transducere),  trajicere  and  transportdre 
are  c.vceptious  to  this  rule.  These  are  construed  with  two  accusatives,  the 
one  belonging  to  the  simple  verb,  being  transitive;  the  other  belong- 
mg  to  the  preposition,  being  local,  as  :  copias  flumen  traducere,  to  lead  tlfe 
troo|)s  over  the  river.  In  the  passive  construction  only  the  transitive  ac- 
cusative becomes  then  the  passive  subject,  the  other  accusative  remaining 
unchanged,  as  :  Behjae  Wtenum  antiquitua  transducti,  the  Belgians  being 
led  in  old  times  over  the  Hhine.  Caes.  B.  G.  2,  4. 

1.  Cicsar  certior  factusest.  trTsjam;><7r/7^copiarumHelvetios  i  id  Jfumen  traduxisse. 
Lies.  15.  G.  1,  12.-2.  tquitum  ma<ruam  jxirtef/ijlumen  transjecit.^  Cais.  B.  C.  1,  55. 
Hem.  43.  There  are,  besides  the  verbs  mentioned  §  473,  No.  2,  many  English  intransit- 
ives  which,  in  translating  from  Euirllsh  into  Latin,  must  be  rendered  by  Latin  transit- 
ives.  t>nch  verbs  are  :fo  look  for  something  (nusrere  aliquld),  to  atone  for  something 
(expiSre  aliquid),  to  ask  for  something  (petere  aliquid).  to  long  for  something  (desiderSre 
aliqujd),  to  prepare  for  something  (parSre  aliquid),  to  laugh  at  somebody  (deridSre  ali- 
qut-m).  to  wonder  at  somtthin'j  (mirilri  aliquid),  to  be  acquainted  with  somebody  (novisse 
aliquem),  and  a  great  many  others.  But  most  of  these  verbs  have  En<dish  traticitive 
synonyms,  bo  that,  in  translatinirfrom  Latin  into  English,  the  construction  of  such  I^tiu 
iritransitives  need  generally  not  be  chan-red.  A  full  control  over  verbs  of  this  kind  can 
only  l)e  acquired  by  an  attentive  reading  of  the  Latin  authors,  and  a  diligent  use  of  the 
lexicon.  ° 

L'em.  44.  Here  must  be  mentioned  the  exclamatory  accusative,  generallv  used 
after  the  inierjeciions  /A?/  or  O,  wliich  must  l)e  explained  as  the  direct  object  of  an 
«flection  or  feeling  :  EluufugacU  annos,  O  the  fleeting  years  \—0  mistrum  Ulum  adole- 
Aa«^f;/<,0  that  unfortunate  youth! 

IV.  Verb.s  Construed  with  Simple  Objects  in  the  Da- 
tive Case. 

§17  1,  Tiie  following  classes  of  verbs  govern  the  dative 
case : 

1.  Verl)s  of  helping  and  AssisTrxG,as  :  subt€nlre,succurrere,auxilidiH, 
su ffraqd ri  [to  support).^'  2)  Verbs  ot"  obeying,  as:  parere,  obtemperdre, 
obedlre,  oksequi.*    a)  Verbs  of  commanding  :  prcei'sse,  to  preside  over,  to 

J  Ilelveti^A  is  the  subject-accusative.—  2  tran^icere  {trajicere)  to  ship  over  —  ^ju- 
rare  ami  adjuvare,  to  help,  to  assist, govern  the  accusative.—  '•Here  belongs  the  remark- 
al)le  phrase  dicto  audi^ntem  esse  alicui,  to  obey  somebody  at  his  command  (dicto) 
where  it  is  doubtful  whether  dicto  is  a  dative,  governed  by  audlre,  in  the  meaninf^ 
'to  obey,  or  an  impersonal  ablative  absolute  (like  augurato,  auspicato).  This  phrase 
never  occurs  otherwise  than  in  the  participial  form  (audiens  wWh  esse) -,  never  in  the 
tenses  of  aurCire.  and  only  in  connection  with  the  singular  diclo  (never  dictis).  The 
Latins  considered  and  probably  pronounced  dido  and  audiens  as  one  single  word,  Mith 
tiie  adjective  meaning  'obedient.''  and  hence  it  may  be  explained  that  the  expression 
not  only  occurs  without  any  object,  but  even  with  another  dative  object:  Aow- 
nuin  nohtiubant,  non  fore  dicto  audientes  milites  (that  the  soldiers  would  not  obey 
commands!.  Cjes.  B.  G.  1,  .39.  Quod  milites  dicto  audientes  snis  imperatoribus  non 
«•a«M')ecause  the  soldiers  did  not  obey  their  superiors).  Nep.  Lys.  1.  Sometimes  it  is 
construed  with  the  dative  jussia  (Jussis  dicto  audientem  esse,  to  be  obedient  to  com- 


88 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


command  ;  imperdre,  to  command.'  4)  Verbs  of  opposing  and  resisting  : 
repuf/ndre  and  resixtere^  (to  resist,  oppose,  withstand), (?6dASd  (to  be  in  one's 
way) ;  obstdre,  reiilii,  reluctdri  (post-classical),  adrermri,  refnwdH  (to  op- 
pose, to  thwart).  5)  Verbs  of  trusting,  distiusting,  and  iielievinq  : 
fidere,  conjidcre^  jidem  habere  (to  trust,  to  contide  in),  dijidere  {lo  distrust), 
credere, to  believe.*  0)  Verbs  of  pardoning:  u/noscere,  coudondre,iind  the 
phrase  veniam  dare.''     7)  Verbs  of  flattering  :  adiddri,'^  blandlri^  asseii- 


TJiandt»).  The  phrajse  is»  distin2:uii*hed  from  other  vorhs  of  obeyincr.  hy  l)oinir  used 
only  ot  person;;  under  dUcipliite,  as  servants  and  soldiers,  and  only  in  ri<;ard  to 
oral  injunctions  involving  immediate  and  implicit  obedience.  It  freiiuenily  occurs  in 
Plautiis,  Cicero,  Civsar,  and  Livy. 

*  Both  verbs»  may  be  construed  a)  without  any  object,  in  the  meaning  '  to  be  a  chief, 
lo  be  a  commander  (their  synonym  in  this  meaning  being  rer/nurt) ;  b)  with  the  object 
over  which  a  rule  is  exercised,  which  object  is  placed  in  tlie  dative.  The  synonym 
regere,  however,  requires  the  accusative  (I'empublkain  regere.  oppido  prceesse,  omnibiu 
gentibus  (exercifui)  iniperdre) ;  c)  with  an  object,  denoting  the  order  to  be  exe- 
cuted, which  is  always  placed  in  the  accusative,  pnxesbe  never  being  used  in 
this  pense,  but  jubtre,  imperdre,  pnTclpfve,  prasoibfre ;  d)  with  a  compound  object, 
expressing  the  person  along  with  the  thing  commanded.  In  this  connection 
inii>€rdre,  pra'cipcre,  pnv^'rrihere,  rake  tha  accusarive  of  the  thino  and  the 
dative  of  the  pkrson.  See  §  4S2.—  '•*  To  resist  an  a' tack  is  expressed  by  i/npetum  fi/s- 
titure.  not  by  itnpetiii  redatere. —  ^  jridere  and  confidere  are  either  construed  with  the 
dative  or  ablative,  as  :  vatilrd,  loci  confidere .,  to  rely  on  the  natural  position  of  a  place, 
Cies.  B.  (}.  3.  9;  rirfiKi  alicujuii  cotifidere,  to  trust  In  somebody's  eminent  qu.dities.  Cic, 
Phil.  5,  1,  The  simple  vvrhfidere  is  mostly  poetical,  except  in  the  participles  (fld&ne, 
JL-iun).  which  are  not  rarely'used  in  classical  prose.  IHffidtre  is  almost  always  construed 
with  the  dative,  seldom  with  the  ablative.  I'he  Enirlish  'to  trust,'  when  meaning  'to 
give  something  into  one's  trust,'  is  rendered  by  romr/nf fere  aliquid  a/icin. —  •*  If  credere 
IS  construed  with  a  simple  object,  it  requires  either  a  dative  or  an  inlinitive  clause.  It  is 
construed  witli  a  simpl.*  object  in  the  dative  «)  if  it  means  '  to  trust  one  as  a  debtor,' 
'  to  give  credit.'  as  Villicu.^  injus,s'it  doinini  cndaf  netnlui  (a  farmer  must  not  give  credit 
to  any  one  without  the  proprietor's  order).  Cato,  K.  It.  5.  4  ;  b)  if  it  means  *to  have  con- 
fidence in  one's  qualities,  intentions,  or  assertions,*  being  rendered  'to  believe,  to  con- 
fide in.  to  trust  to.  to  rely  on,  as  :  fldti  alicujus  crtdtre,  to  confide  in  somebody's 
word;  aUc>ii  inj>ir~ifo  criler?.  to  believe,  to  tnist  ou'!  withoit  hi-*  oath;  c)  in  the 
ior\\\\\\9i.  mihi  crede  {or  c rede  ?/iUii),  which  either  belongs  to  No.  c)  or  is  idiomatically 
used  to  strengthen  an  imperative  sentence,  as-  .Vw/a  jam  istam  nientern,  rnUil  crede 
(please,  do  give  np  that  idea  of  yourg).  Cic.  Cat,  1.  .3.— Mihi  crede,  advoca  illam  in  consi- 
lium. Sen.  E[).  17.  So  Cic.  Tiisc.'l,  :il.  75.— If  crt^dtte  means  'to  be  of  opinion '  ^being  a 
synonym  of  urOifrdri,  j/idlcdre,  e.risti/ndre),  it  is  construed  with  an  intinitive-ciause: 
Credo  ego  rw,  judice^^.  ?nin7ri.  etc.  I  believe  you  to  b<'  astonished,  O  judges,  etc.  Cic. 
Rose.  Am.  1,  1.  In  this  signification  credere' ir^  often  construed  with  the  accusative 
neuter  of  a  personal  pronoun  or  determinative  adjective,  in  lieu  of  an  intinitive-ciause, 
as  :  I[o)niiieK  libenttr  id.  quod  roluut.  credunt  (instead  of  :  i</,  quml  vcflunt,  verutn  e-i^se). 
Men  fain  believe  what  thev  wish.  Cjes.  B.  (J.  3.  18.  The  English  expression,  Mo  believe 
in  something'  (that  something  ^'.W^Av).  must  be  rend'-red  by  credere  {dicere)  with  an  in- 
finitive-clause: To  believe  lii  the  iiods,  credere  {dicere)  deos  ei^xe  (Cic.  N.  D.  (not  deon 
credere,  as  modern  Latitiists  often  sav).  With  a  compound  object,  credere  takes  the 
accusative  of  the  thi.no  and  the  dative  of  the  pkusox.  See  §  4S2.—  ^  Vtniam 
dare  alicui  means  either 'to  «jrant  somebody  a  favor,' or  "  to  pardon  soiiebody  for  a 
crime'  (to<:rant  forgiveness).  Ay/zo-'r^/'f  with  a  simple  object  always  requires  this  object  to 
bein  the  dative,  whether  it  denotes  the  person  pardoned,  or  the  wrong  which  is  forgiven  : 
Jgrwice  eis  qui,  pardon  those  who;  ritil^  ulic//jus  igriOf<cere,  to  pardon  somebody's 
faults.  If  both  the  person  pardoned,  and  the  wrong  wiiich  is  forgiven,  are  expressed, 
the  former  is  place(l  in  the  dative,  and  the  latter  in  the  accusative :  tgnoscere  rem  alicui, 
to  pardon  somebody  for  something.  Tiie  thing  pardoned  is  also  expressed  l)y  a  clause 
with  quod  ord;  Ignoncite  inihi  quod  (si)  hoc  facio.  pardon  me  for  doing  this.  — Co/«- 
dondre  generally  requires  a  compound  object,  the  person  Iteing  in  the  dative,  and  the 
thing  in  the  accusative.  If  this  •thing'  denotes  the  penalty,  coudondre  means  'to  re- 
mit" (supplicium  alicui  condondre):  if  it  denotes  the  crime,  con dond re  has  tlie  meaning 
of  ignofictre  (alicui  seel u^^  condondre).  Sometimes  both,  the  accusative  .and  the  dative. 
deiii)te  persons;  then  the  dative  is  one  of  the'  interested  person,'  meaning  'in  favor  of 
(/rw  fratres  tot  ac  tcUibiis  xiris  condondre.  Cic.  Marc.) — .  •  Aduldri  more  frequently 
Btauds  with  the  accusative. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  VERB. 


89 


id 
m 


ri.  8)  Verbs  of  meeting  and  encountering  :  occurrere  and  verbs  of 
...otion,  in  connection  with  the  adverb  obviam  (as  obviam  ire,  obvUini  ve- 
nire, obmam  procedere%  9)  Verbs  expressing  anger:  irasci,  succensere  (to 
liave  a  grudge).  10)  Verbs  of  serving  :  servlre,  famulari,  imervire,  mi- 
nifftrdre.  11)  The  impersonal  verbs  of  happening  :  evenlre,  accidere,  con- 
tinrjere,  obvenlre  (to  be  allotted).  12)  Most  of  the  compounds  of  ei<se:^  as : 
adesne,  to  be  present ;  d^e^ne,  to  be  wanting ;  iiie^ne,^  to  be  in  ;  interesse,  to 
be  i^resent;  prwei^se  (see  No.  3);  obesse  (see  JVo.  4) ;  prodesse,  to  be  useful ; 
Hupcresne,  to  survive  ;  als(j  prmto  esse,  to  attend. 

To  these  must  be  added  a  great  number  of  verbs  which  can- 
not be  classitied,  as  : 

Appropinqudre,  to  approacli  ;*  apparere,  to  appear  ;  aimentiri,  to  assent  ; 
con.stdrc^U)  be  consistent  with,  to  be  known  to;*  diaplicere,  Xo  displease; 
favere,  to  favor;  grattfimri,  to  grati ty ;  gratuldvi,  to  congratulate;  iii- 
duU/ere,  to  indulge;  inmdire,  to  envy;  licere  (impers.),  to  be  permitted; 
rneden,"  to  lietil,  to  cure;  mindri,  to  threaten;  morigerdri,  or  morem 
gerere, io  accommodate  one's  self;  nocere,'' to  hurt;  nubere,  to  marry;** 
obtrectdre,  to  .'-lander ;  parcere,  to  spare  (somebody)  ;  persuadere,  to  con- 
vmce;  placere,  to  please;  jylaudere,  to  applaud  ;^respondere,  to  answer ;• 
satisfacere,  to  satisty  ;  tdudtre,  to  be  ze:ilous,  to  take  pains,  devote  care  ;^* 
succtd£re  to  succeed ;"  saadere,  to  give  advice :  suppUcdre,  to  implore ; 
viderr,  to  seem  {cidetur  mihi). 

^  1.  iA'.'^cum  persuadere  non  possent,  legatos  ad  Dumnorigem  mittunt. 
Caes.  B.  G.  1,9. —  2.  Dumnorix,  cupidiljlte  regni  adductus,'-^  novis  rebus 
stmU'bat.  lb.  1,9.—  3.  Ilin  Coesar  ita  respondit.^Ib.  1, 14.—  4.  Si  JEduUde 
\\\\uv\\'imtiHfaciant.  lb.  1, 14.—  5.  Liscus  dixit,  \y\y\{\acMn\  Eeloeiiis favere 
liropter  cam  aftinitatem.'"  lb.  1,18.—  (S.  Equitatui,  quem  ^dui  mise- 
nmt, Dumnorix  pra>crat.  lb.—  T.Valerium,  ciii  summam  omnium  rerum'* 
Jidem  habebat.  lb.  1, 19.—  8.  Ad  lunc  Ariovistus  rexpondit :  Jus  esse  belli, 
ut  qui"  vicissent,  eis  quos  vicissent,  quemadmodum"  vellent  imperd- 
rent.  lb.  1,3(J.—  9.  Iluiclegidni  Cge^ar  indulserat  pnccipue  {particularly) 
et  propter  virtutem  eonfidebat  maxime.  lb.  1,40.—  10.  Quam  rem  paucis 
mhtigtatie  docCbat.  lb.  1,  43.—  11.  Bello  superltos  esse  Arvernos,  quibus 
Popuhis  ]^>manus  igiiouxxet.  lb.  1,45,—  12.  Ut  si  vellet  Ariovistus  proe- 


»  Ofeiidere  (to  hit,  to  light  upon  somebody)  and  comemre  (to  meet  with  somebody) 
require  the  accusative.—  '^  Abesse  is  L'enerally  construed  with  ab.—  a  i^^g^  is  more 
frequently  (in  Cicero  always)  construed  with  in  and  the  ablative:  In  oratare  inest  nhi- 
Iwop/iorutn  omniscienda.  Cic.  Or.  3.  T),—  ■»  Adlre,  to  approach, requires  the  accusative 
and  accedere  more  Irequcntly  the  preposition  ad  than  the  dative—  ^  jn  the  raeanino-<o 
be  known,  constat  is  an  impersonal  verb,  but  is  then  more  frequently  construed  with  inte^ 

—  *  Snndre,  10  heal,  and,  in  late  Latin  also  mederi,  are  construed  with  the  accusative  — 
'  LiEdere,  to  hurt,  is  construed  with  an  accusative.—  »*  Nubere.  properly  meaning'  •  to  veil  ' 
denotes 'to  marry.' on  the  part  of  the  woman,  the  veiling  being  part  of  the'^marna^e 
ceremony ;  the  dative  after  nubei-e  is  a  dative  of  '  the  interested  persim.'     Nupta  means 

the  bride.  1  he  marrying  on  the  part  of  the  man  is  expressed  by  in  matrimonium 
ducere.  or  simply  ducere.—  •  If  the  obj-ct  is  the  matter  to  which  an  answer  is  ajven 
resfiondere  is  construed  with  ad.—  lo  Htudere.  in  the  meaningof  the  neuter  verb  '  to  «mdv  ' 
in>tead  ot  the'classical  l<dxjrdre.or  vacdre  litteiis,  is  iisedonly  in  post -classical  language 
Modern  Latinists  u-e  sfudere  aNo  in  the  meaning  'to  study  for  a  profession.'  instead  of 
opt  rum  dare,  yovi'i  rebus  studere  means  '  to  be  desirous  of  a  new  government  '  Studere 
is  also  construed  with  an  olnect-inttnitive  (see  §  80),  and  rarely  with  an  intinitive-ciause 

—  '»  Succedere,  in  its  literal  meaning  '  to  proceed  to  a  close  proximity  to  a  place  '  is  also 
construed  with  »ub  and  an  accu.sative.  See  Rem.  45.—  i'-'  prompted  by  a  desire  of  beiu» 
a  king.—  1»  aninity.—  »*  in  respect  to  all  things.—  »*  supply  ei  before  qui  —  i«  as  " 


90 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE  VERB. 


lio  conlondoro,  ei  potostns  non  (Iceaaef.  Th.  1,  48.—  13.  Ncque  enim 
l<ivryn cq>fitafuiHfyt(hnf.  Ih.t},  17.—  14.  Cirsar  pw/n'intibm^  occurrit.  lb. 
o  21.—  15.  Oppidilni  tuniiii  moxi^vi  vi  appropinqmln  mmnibus xid^nmi. 
lb.  2,  31. —  10.  Dixrrnnt  oppidfuii.oninls  fere  tinitimos'^  suae  rirtiiti  ui' 
viOeir.lh.—  17.  Ob  eas  res  ex  litteris  Osaris  dies  quindeeim  suppli- 
ratio='  deerrta  est,  quod  ante  id  tempiis  accidit  nuUi.  lb.  2,  35. —  18. 
Majdri  parti*  phtcidf,  lei  eventuni^  experiri  et  castra  defendere.  lb.  3,  3. 
—  19.  iMiilta  C[csarem  ad  id  belluni  iiieitilbant,  inprlmis  ne  reruiune 
nationes  si/ji  idem  lid-re  arl)itrarentnr.  lb.  3, 10.-  20.  Qmun  intelliucret, 
omuls  homiues  uatunl  liherhUi stniUre.  lb.  3,  10.—  21.  Neque  qwuw  his 
luivibus  nostrae"  rostro  nocere  poteraut.  lb.  3,  13. —  22.  Neque  satis 
Bruto  vel  tribOniH  militum  conxtdhat,  quid  hostes  aujereut.  lb.  3, 14.— 
23.  Quo  loco  (ei)qui  celeriter  arma  capere  potuerant,  paulisper'  nostris 
re.Htiterunt.    lb.  4,  14. 

Jiem.  45.  Many  verbs  wbieb,l)esides  those  already  mentioned,  arc  com- 
pounded witii  tlie  prepositions  off,  unte,  con  {cum),  in,  inter,  ob,pof<f,prae, 
mib,  super,  require  an  object  in  the  dative  case  with  the  force  of  the  same 
l)reposition  whieli  is  pretixed  to  theui,  as  inhcerere  alicui  rei,  to  be  in- 
lierent  in  a  thinsj^;  ndstare  (tUcui,\o  ^U\\(\  by  some  one;  consent'ire  alicui, 
to  agree  with  some  one.  15ut  many  of  these,  instead  of  with  a  dative, 
are  construed  witli  the  same  preposition  they  are  compounded  with,  as 
in/uerere  in  aliqua  re,  consentlre  cum  aliquo.  Sometimes  they  take  different 
prepositions  (m  rer/num  succcdere),  and  sometimes  are  connected  with 
cases  other  tlian  the  dative  {xupersedere  aliqua  re,  to  dispense  with  a  thini; ; 
pmcedere  aliqucm,  to  precede  some  one).  Most  of  these  require  a  com- 
pound object.     See  Rem.  09. 

l{£m.  40.  If  neuter  verbs,  compounded  with  these  prepositions,  denote 
a  motion  to  a  place,  tliev  are  rarelv  (mostly  poetically,  and  in  lale  Latin) 
construed  with  a  dative,  but  eitller  repeat  their  preposition,  or  bec<mie 
transitive;  as:  accurrere  ad  locum,  to  hasten  to  a  place;  congredi cum,  to 
enter  into  a  tiglit  with  ;  incidere  in,  to  fall  into;  succedere  sub  vivros,  to 
proceed  (close  up)  to  the  walls.  But:  aqg  red  i  aliqu  em,  io  iWUick  some- 
body;  adlre  aliquem,  io  i\\>y>\y  to  some  one;  ad'ire  or  inire  mafjiHtrdtuni, 
to  enter  ui^on  an  office;  sublre  tectum,  to  Ji:et  under  a  roof ;  sublre  la'oores, 
to  undergo  hardship.  Those  compounded  with  circuni,  per,  prater, 
trans,  are  rcijularly  transitive.     See  ^  473. 

Rom.  47.  3[ost  of  the  dative  objects  mentioned  in  ^  474  may  be  con- 
ceived as  datives  *  of  the  interested  person'  (j^  409,  and  page  135,  Hem.  00) 
indicating  the  one  having  an  interest  in  the  acti(m.  Such  a  dative  is 
often  added  in  a  looser  way  to  neuter  or  transitive  verbs  which  admit  the 
idea  of  another  person  being  interested  in  the  action  expressed  by  them, 
whether  to  somebody's  advantage  or  disadvantage.  Thus  cavire,  metuere, 
timere,  alicui  mean  ''to  be  solicitous'  or  '  alarmed'  for  somebody  :  vacare 
alicui  rei,  to  have  leisure  for  something  ;  natum  esse  alicui  rei,  \o  be  born 
for  something;  cu])ere  alicui,  io  w'lah  somebody  well.  Sometimes  these 
loose  datives  are  used  pregntmtly,  so  that  the  construction  must  l)e  re- 
cast in  English  :  Mihi  quidem  esurio,  wni  tibi.  Plaut.  Capt.  4,  2,  80,  1  am 
hungry /or  myself,  not  for  you  (my  being  hungry  is  mi/  conceru,  not  yours). 

»  See  §:«6.—  ^  neighbors.—  'a  tliatiks<,'iving  of  fifteen  days».  The  accusative  quin- 
decim  dies  is  an  accusative  of  time,  which  it»  ^^)Inetilne(^,  but  rareljr,  attached  to  uouus.— 
« the  majority.—  ^  the  issue.-  » tupply  naves.—  '  for  a  little  while. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  VERBS. 


91 


1.  Non  polnm  tiobU  dlvite?  e!»pe  voIhihu?,  ped  Ubcrift,  propinquis,  amiclx.  maximoqne 
reipubliciV.  Cic.  Otf.  ;j,  6:i. —  2.  Multi.  cum  opes  parant,  niisciuntcMt  parent,  nee  cujus 
causa  lat)Orent.  Cic.  Am.  55.—  3.  Cie-ar  Dumnonr/i  cu(>t5des  pouit.  Ores.  B.  G.  1.  20. 
— 4.  Sabliius  AasYi6'/.^Mn  coiitemptiOnem'  venit.  II).  8.  17. —  5.  Vab^-av  suU  (\\uy(\\nt  rtbus 
Genuanos  timCre  voluir.  lb.  4.  Ki  —  6.  DixC'runt  oppidani. /JiW  omnls  fere  finitimos  e>se 
iniuiico-*.  lb.  2,3. —  7.  Non  .«c/z/jAy,  sed  vitije  discimu-*.  S-n.  Ep.  105. —  8.  Nemo  errat 
vifi  fibi,  hed  dementiam  spargit*  in  proximo^. —  9.  Domtis  dominis  ledificata  est,  nou 
muribu.<.  Cic.  Nat.  D.  :i,  20.—  10.  Tisistratus»  sibU  not  pat/ ice  Me;;arenses  vicit. 

Hem.  48.  The  dative  of  the  intere.><ted  peu!*on  or  dafivus  coinmodi  vel  incommodi, 
in  its  orii^iiial  m<aniiig,  cantiot  be  considered  a  completing  ol)ject,  but  constitutes  a 
peculiar  adverbial  relation,  denoting  the  person  or  thing  concerned  in  an  action  of  which 
it  is  neither  the  subject  iu)r  object.  From  being  frequently  connected  with  certain  verl)s, 
it  virtually  became  -i  completing  object  in  regard  to  these.  The  following  are  partic- 
ular applications  of  the  dative  of  the  iiUerested  person: 

1.  The  POSSESSIVE  DATIVE  (distinguished  from  the  dative  of  the  possessor,  §468),  being 
used  in  place  of  a  possessive  atthibute,  as:  Se'>e  Ofnnes  C\e<ari  ad  pedes  p/ojecerimt 
(i  e.  ad  Cje-aris  ])edes);  They  all  threw  themselves  to  Ctesar's  feet.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  31.— 
Pater  vobitt  decesdt  a.  d.  111.  Kal.  Dec;  Our  (my)  father  died  on  the  29th  of  November. 
Cic.  Ait.  l.r».  2. 

2.  The  ETHICAL  DATIVE,  of  a  proiioun  of  the  first  or  second  person,  denotes  either  a 
moral  intere>t  taken  in  the  action  by  the  speaker,  or  an  apj)eal  to  the  person  addressed 
to  interest  himself  in  the  action.  This  dative  generally  appears  redundant  according 
to  the  Knglish  conception,  but  may  be  expressed  l)y  a  paraphrase:  Pidset  turn  mihi  lie- 
iorein!  Let  him,  then,  strike  a  lictor  (i.  e.  I  wish  he  would  do  it,  to  se-i  him  punished). 
Liv.  2,  '29.— Quid  mihi  Celsu-^  agilf  Say,  what  is  the  matter  with  Celsu<?  {i.e.  I  have  an 
interest  in  u).  Hor.  Ep.  1.3. 13. — At  tibi  repents,  quum  minime  ex-^pecturem,  venit  ad  me 
Caninius;  'IMnnk  only,  suddenly  came  Caninius  to  me.  Cic.  Fam.  9,  2,  1. — Quujn  toga 
signufti  dedt/o,  tain  mihi  turbam  invadite.  Liv.  24..3S. — Often  this  dative  is  used  with 
iiiow:  /lie  mihi  etiani  Q.  Faflufi  pads  coinmoda  commemoi'at;  Here,  Q,.  F.  lectures  ue  on 
the  advantages  of  peace  (i.e.'i  think  it  superfluous).  Cic.  Phil.  8,  4. 

3.  The  DATIVE  AFTER  INTER.TECTIONS  expresses  the  persons  to  whom  something  disas- 
trous has  hai)i)ened  or  will  happen:  Vie  victim.  Woe  to  the  conquered!  Liv.  5,  48.— //e«, 
inisero  Diihi.  Woe  to  me,  the  poor  wretch  !  Plaut.  Aul.  2,  2, 23. 

4.  Often  absolute  present  pard'-inles  are  placed  in  the  dative  referring  to  persons  in 
regard  to  wliom  the  principal  actit)n  holds  good  ichen  or  since  they  perform  the  action 
expressed  by  the  participle.  Such  participles  are  often  rendered  by  clauses:  OppiduPx 
primum  T/i'essalice  venienlibns  ab  Epiro,  the  first  city  of  Thessalia  for  those  coming  from 
Epinis.  C;es.  B.  C  3,  80.— -4r//w/i  duo.  nequrnjuam  Hsu  ac  specie  oistimantibus  pare^^.  two 
soldiers,  by  no  means  equals,  when  judged  by  their  aspect  and  appearance  (for  those 
that  judge  th<!ni).  Liv.  7,10. — Annulorum  tuntus  acervus  fait  ut  Jtietientibus  dimidiuin 
tfuptr  frVt  moflios  ejL'plisse.dnt  auctores;  the  rings  are  said  by  some  to  have  filled  three 
modii  and  a  half  by  actual  measurement  (for  those  that  really  measured  mem).  lb.  23, 12, 

§  475.  Some  verbs  take  either  the  accusative  or  the  dative  :  adaHri, 
flatter;  comitdri,  accompany;  desperdre,^  despair  of;  prcestoldri,  wait  for; 
antecedere,  atitelre,  go  before;  proBCurrere,  run  ahead;  illudere,  mock; 
providere,  provide  for.  These  take  eitJier  case  with  the  same  meaning. 
Others  change  their  meanings  according  to  the  case:  consulere  aliquem,to 
consult  one,  but  consulere  alicui,  to  consult  for  one ;  prospicere  aliquid, 
foresee,  but  cdicui,  provide  for;  cupere  aliquid,  wish  for,  but  alicui, to  wish 
one  well ;  timere  aliqucm,  to  fear  one,  alicui,  to  fear  for  one. 

1.  Atticus  \\otQ\\ti^  Antonio  non  est  aduldtus.  Nep.  25,  8. —  2.  Mitiores 
canes  furem  quoque  adulantur.  Colum.  7. 12,  o. —  3.  Tardis  mentibus 
virttjs  non  comitdtur.  Cic.Tusc.  o,  24. —  4.  Virgines  cum  parvo  tilio  comi- 
tabantur  j)atrem.  Curt.  I.,  3,  19. —  5.  ^\  (XxxfiWiXo"  &\\\s  fortiinis  desperdro 
coeperant.,  se  in  proxima  oppida  rccipiebant.  Caes.  B.  G.  3, 11. —  0.  Simu- 

1  contempt,  scorn.— "to  »\iVQa.Ci.—^ desperdre  is  more  frequently  construed  with  de.— 
*  powerful.— 5  whenever. 


92 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  YERBS. 


latque*  caiuVidatns  accusation  cm  nicditilri  visus  est,  liondrem  despcrasse 
vidCtiir.  Cic.  Mur.  21,  43.—  7.  Ut  cudeiii  tempore  ct  hiijus  mluti  et  con- 
diiidni  omnium  civium  providisse  vidcamini.  Cic.  Coel.  l),  22.—  8.  Itaquc, 
O'e  frumeutaria^  provisd,  in  Sontialiuni  tinis  excrcitum  introduxit.  Cit'S. 
B.  'G.  3,  20.—  f>.  Dcus  consulit  rebus  luuufinis,  nee  solum  universis,  vernm 
etiam  sin^fulis.  Cic.  Div.  1,  51. —  10.  Alhenienses  consulchant  Aiwllincni 
Pylhium,'^quas  potissimum  n'li<;iones  tenCrent.  Cic.  Leij.  2,  IG.—  11. 
ComulUc  T<'bi%  prospicitc  patrhr.  Cic.  Cat.  4,  3.—  12.  Hoc  est  sapero, 
non  quod  ante  pedes  modo  est  videre,  sed  etiam  ilia  quie  fulura  sunt 
2~)roi<pic€re.  Ter.  Adeli)h.  3,  3. 

§  476.  K:ire  dative  coiistructioiis  are  1)  tlie  dative  of  tlie 
agent  in  passive  constructions,  as:  Mlhl  conslUnni  afptta/i 
jam  din  est.  Cic.  Div.  5,  19,  a  resolution  lias  long  been  taken 
by  me.  2)  The  redundant  reflexive  dative  with  velle^  as  Quid 
ilhl  vis?  what  do  you  want?  3)  The  dative  \\\\\\  facere :  Quid 
hn'ic  fades?  what  are  you  going  to  do  witli  him  ? 

Rem  49  The  diuivc,  instead  of  the  passive  agent  with  ab,  wlierevor  it  occur?»  in 
cla««'ioal  prose,  inav  aiwavs  be  interpreted  as  a  dative  of  the  interested  per!««)n.  But 
poet<  and  post-clasMeal  authors  often  make  u-^e  of  this  dative  when  it  can  liave  no  othiT 
nieaninu;  but  that  ot  a  passive  aix.-nt.  For  the  use  of  the  dative,  as  passive  agent,  with 
the  penphrastic  conjugation  in  das,  see  §  51.3. 

g  477.  When  verbs  having  a  simple  object  in  the  dative, 
are  us^-d  i)assively,  the  passive  voice  is  always  impersonal 
(§  4G0),  the  object  remaining  in  the  dative,  and  the  verb  being 
placed  in  the  third  person  singular,  without  any  subject: 
Nobis  resistitar,  we  are  resisted. 

Bern.  50.  Ahlatives  ahsolute  cannot  he  formed  of  verbs  which  liayc  a 
simple  object  in  the  dative.  lutinitive  clauses,  in  tlie  passive  construction, 
if  the  verb  lias  a  simi)le  object  in  the  dative,  take  an  impersonal  passive 
infinitive  without  a  subjeel  :  He  thoui,dit  that  he  was  envied,  i*ibi  inciderl 
putdvit  (that  is,  was  envied  to  him).     Seepage  72,  Hem.  11,  No.  2. 

V.   Verbs,  construed  with  Simple  Oiuects  in  the  Genitive 

AND  Ablative  Cases. 

^    !7  '^.     Verbs  with  simple  objects  in  the  genitive  are  but 

few:    ij    verbs  of  remembering   {/neminisse,  reminisci^  recor- 

dari);    2)   of  forgetting  (oW/i?/6^c/) ;    3)   sometimes  the  verbs 

jtotlri,  to  take  [)ossession  of,  to  seize ;  indiytre  and  efjvi'C,  to  need 

to  want ;  4)  the  verb  77iisertri,  to  ])ity. 

llem.rA.  Verbs  of  rememberin^i?  and  foriretting  inay  hayo  the  object 
remembered  or  forgotten  in  the  accusative  if  it  is  a  thing,  and  must  have 


CONSTllUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


93 


it  in  the  accusative,  if  the  thing  remembered  or  forgotten  is  indicated 
by  a  neuter  determinative,  as  hoc  {id)  me  mini ;  quod  fere  obllius  sum.  The 
verb  rccordari  requires  the  person  remembered  to  be  connected  with  the 
proposition  de. 

lifm  .52.  3/^mi/a>'/?^  may  even  take  the  person  remembered  in  the  accnsative,  jf  the 
mere  fact  of  a  person  bein^^  in  our  memory  is  indicated  without  actually  thinking  of  him: 
Ci'inamnutniiii.  •sultamrldi.  Cic.  Phil.  5.  G.  . 

Jic/ft.  M.  According' to  the  analo;ry  of  verbs  of  remembenna:,  the  impersonal  expression 
Vt/iit  ttii/ii  in  mtidem  (it  eome.s  to  my  mind)  ii*  coni*trned  with  a  genitive:  \enU 
mi/ii  IH'doids  in  inenkm.  Cic.  Fin.  5,  1.  But  this  phrat^e  may  alto  be  used  personally, 
with  a  nominative  as*  subject.  „^  .  .  ,,  a 

Ilnn.'A  7//rfJve;e  is  also  comstrned  with  an  ablative.  PoCu^t  is  more  generally,  and 
enere  is  always,  in  prose,  construed  with  an  ablative.    See  §  4T9. 

Rem.  .55.  For  the  genitive  alter  verbs  completed  by  the  idea  of  price,  gee  p.  266  foil. 

1.  Animus  meminit  prmteriforum  {^  3o8),  prjcsentia  cernit,  futura  prse- 
videt.*  Cic.  Div.  1,  30.—  2.  Homo  impn)bus  aliquando'  cum  <\o\ore  flag i- 
tiorum  suorum  recordabitur.  Cic.  Pis.  12.—  3.  Dux  Helvetiorum  hortabatur 
Ca?sarem,  ut  reminiscerefur  et  veteris  incommodi  populi  RomSni,  et 
pristine"  rirtutiH  Ilelvetidrum.  Caes.  B.  G.  1,  13.—  4.  Cohortaius  est  Cffi- 
sar  yEduos,  ut  controrerHiarum  ac  dis.se nsiOnum  obliviscerentur.  Caes.  B.  G. 
7,  34.—  5.  Beneficia  ^neminisse  debet  is  in  quem  collata  sunt,  non  comme- 
moiilre*  qui  contulit.  Cic.  Amic.  20.—  G.  Tu,  si  meliore  memoriS  es,  velini 
scire  ecquid"  de  te  recordere.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  6.—  7.  Obliviscor  injurias,  depono 
memoriam  doloiis  mei.  Cic.  Coel.  50.—  8.  Quotiescunque'  gradum  facies, 
toties  tibi  tudrum  virtdtum  veaiat  inineutem.  Cic.  Or.  2,  Gl,  249. 

§  470.  The  Ablative  is  required  by  1)  Verbs  denoting 
AFFECTIONS  of  the  mind, in  regard  to  the  object  and  cause  of 
the  affections,  as:  gauderc,  laitari,  exuUare,  to  rejoice,  e.xult  at; 
dolere,  mrjprere,  to  mourn  over;  lahorare,  to  suffer  of,  labor 
under;  (jloriari,  to  boast  of.'  2)  Verbs  denoting  plenty  or 
WANT,  in  regard  to  the  special  properties  or  qualities  of  which 
there  is  a  plenty  or  want,  as  ahimdare,  redundare,  to  abound  in  ; 
offlucre,  smtcre,  to  overflow,  teem  with  ;  valere,  to  be  strong  in  ; 
flortre,  to  flourish  in  ;  carere  and  vacare,  to  be  destitute  of,  to  be 
without  a  thing;  egere,  indirjere,  to  need  a  thing.  3)  Verbs  ex- 
pressing RELIANCE  upon  I  niti,  to  rest  on  ;  Jidere,  confidere,  to  rely 
on.  4)  The  deponents  xiti,  to  use ;  edjiiti,  to  misuse ;  frui  and  per- 
fnd,  to  enjoy  ;  funr/l  and  perfmuji,  to  perform ;  poftri,  to  seize ; 
'vesci,  to  feed  upon."  5)  Verbs  expressing  a  placing  one's  self 
at  a  DISTANCE  from  something,  as :    cedere,  decedere,  excedere. 


»  as  soon  as.—''  resfruvi^ntaria,  the  supplies. 


t  to  foresee.-^  once  (referrim;  to  the  futnre).-3  former.-*  to  mention.-^  whether 
anvthiiK'  — «  to  depose.-'  as  often  as.— »  These  verhs  are  also  construed  with  preposi- 
tions (de).  or  thev  tal<e  clauses  with  gmd.  or  intinitive-clauses.  McErere  &ud.  duere 
are  also  constrind  with  the  accusative.--  Tht-se  deponents  beino:  ancunt  passives  the 
ablative  object;  of  which  are  ori-inally  their  passive  agents,  or  ablaUves  of  mstru- 
luent. 


94 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


€(/redi^  to  leave  a  place ;  erumpere^  to  break  from  a  place  ;  sc 
abdlciire^  to  resign  a  place;  abstuitre,  to  abstain  from  ;  desisfere, 
to  desist  from  ;  supersedere,  to  dispense  with.  0)  Verbs  which 
require  the  idea  of  piiice  as  complement:  stare,  constdrc,  to 
cost,  to  come  at ;  cmere,  vendere,  to  buy,  to  sell  at,  for;  voure 
(vened),  llcere,  to  be  soki  at  {to  sell  for,  in  a  passive  sense) 
V)  The  IMPERSONAL  ExpiiKssiox  opus  cst,  it  is  necessary  (see 
Hem.  GO). 

1.  Addobantur  ot  laudes  quihuH  hand  minus  qnam  prcemio pnudent  uiilitnm, 
anlnii.  Liv.  2,  00. —  2.  JVuUd  re  tarn  latdri  soleo  (juain  nieOrum  oniciOnuu 
cousc'iciitia.  Cic.Faiu.5, 7. —  o.  Rex  ilk%  viotorlisdivitiisiiuc  sulmixus*  exul- 
tabnt'^  insolciitia. —  4,  MiliUlrcs  viri  f/Iornftifxr  vulneribuH.  Sen.  Prov.  4. —  o. 
rroi)riiuu  I'sianimi  bene  consliirili.t't  hi'tdri  bonin  rebus,  qI  ilolere  cvntrariiA, 
Cic.  Am.  13,  47. —  (>.  Aliciui  scrmoiu's  liominum  nlunu  bonis  mcprentium 
etiain  ad  vestras  amis  jiermananmt.^  (Mc.  15alb.  35,  5(>. —  7.  Duobus  ri- 
tiis  divcrsis,  (tntritid  et  luxnrul,  civitas  laburat.  Liv.  )>4,  4. —  8.  Constat, 
Germaniam  (Talliamquo  abnitddre  ririii*  l'\  U'li/n/iibus.  Sen.  N.  Q.  3,  0. — 
0.  Cai)ua  Ibrtis^simuiLun  virorum  iHvUllndine  redunddt.  Cic.  Pis.  23. — 
10.  ]Miscrum  est  carere  conHuetudint^  amicurum.  Cic.  Tuse.  5,  22. —  11. 
Quotidie  nos  ipsa  natura  admonet,  (luam  paiicis  rkbns  egeat.  Cic.  Tiisc. 
5,  35. —  12.  Attirns  lamiliilil.-;  stios,  (juibiis  ftbvs  indirptirnnt,  adjuvit. 
Nej).  25,  9. —  13.  Est  atlolescenlis  majorcs  natu'  verCri,  exque  Ids  deiigeie 
optimos  et  probatissimos,  quorum  coimlio  atque  (luctontdte  nitatur.  Cic. 
Otf.  1,34. —  14.  Qiiis  potest  aut  corporis /r//i<7«^',' aiit  tbrtunae  stdbUitdte,'^ 
confidere? —  15.  Multi  benejieio  Dei  perverse"  utuntur.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  28. — 
10.  Conuuoda  qnibus  utimuv,  lucemquc  qua  fruimvr  a  Deo  nobis  dari  vi- 
dCmus.  Cic.  llosc.  Am.  45,  131. —  17.  VA  mihi  videnlur  beate  vixisse,quibus 
sapienti.'C  laude  perfrui  licuit.  Cic.  Brut.  1). —  18.  Fustuarium'"  merClur 
miles,  qui  signa  relinquit,  aut  prwsidio  decidit.  Liv.  5,  C. —  19.  Augures 
poterant  decernere,  ut  magistrdtu  ae  abdicdrcnt  consules.  Cic.  Leg.  2, 
12. —  20.  Ca3sar  legiones  equitatumque  revociiri  atque  itinerc  detsixtere 
jubet.  Caes.  13.  G.  5,  11. —  2i,  Mullo  sunguLne  Poenis  victoria  !<itiit.  Liv. 
23,  30. —  22.  Militcs  Cicsar  cdocet,"  quanlo  detrhnento  et  quot  virorum  Ibr- 
tium  morte  necesse  sit  conntdre  victoriam.  Cas.  B.  G.  7,  19. —  23.  Purpu- 
rtje"  violacea;'^  WhvA  denariU^*  centum  venlbat.  Plin.  N.  II.  0,39. —  24. 
Mdfjistmtibux  opus  est,  sine  quorum  prudeutia  ac  diiigeutia  esse  civitas  non 
potest.  Cic.  Leg.  3,  2. 

Eem.bQ.  The  ij'^noral  idea  of  the  ablative  is  tli.it  of  CAUfSE  in  its  widcPt  gcnsse.  This 
relation,  particiiliriy,  appears  a^*  Uiii  of  "the  i.nstki:.hknt'  (of  which  the  prrpo- 
■^\i\oi\'bi/  is  the  exponent),  of  .m.\nnki;  and  meanh  (by,  iit),  as  that  of  okkjin  (fnmn.  and. 
applied  to  space,  as  the  stauting-I'oint  (relation  whenck).  The  construction  of  all  the 
verbs,  mentioned  above,  may  be  referred  to  one  of  these  relations,  einanatiMjjf  from  tiie 
general  ide  i  of  the  ablative,  lint  more  fre(juently  the  ablative  is  used  as  an  aovekbiai. 
case  (i.  e.  without  completinj;  the  idea  of  a  verb  or  adjective),  in  order  to  express  a 


>  relying  on.— '  to  revel  in.— 3  came. — *  ptreams. — *  intercourse  with.— «  majOres 
natu,  older  persons. — ''  lirninesH. — *>  stability. — *  perversely.--*"  cudgt'limr  to  dt-ath. 
— "  to  explain.—"  purple  color.— '^   violet.—**  a  denarius,  a  Roman  bilver  coin. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


95 


varietv  of  adverl>ial  ideas,  properly  represented  by  prepositions  or  adverbs  (§424.  §  4o3). 
Fven  in  tlie-^e  relations  the  g.-neral  idea  of  the  ablative  may  alway»  be  traced,  and  it  is 
idle  to  split  (as  niDst  jrraramarians  do)  the  ideas  expressed  by  th*-  ah  ative  into  a  number 
of  loose  and  unconnected  catejrories,  there  being  a  number  of  ablaUvc  constructions 
which  can  properly  be  assigned  to  none  of  them. 

Rem.  57,  The  verbs  cnuiuerated  No.  5,  expressing  distance,  etc.,  are 
also  construed  with  prepositions.     See  page  27. 

Rein.  5S.  The  verbs  stare  and  constdre,  mentioned  No.  6,  are  also  con- 
strued with  the  ablative,  in  some  meanings  different  from  that  of  price. 
^tdre  aliqud  re  means  *  to  abide  by  something,''  the  opposite  of  those  verbs  of 
lilacing  one's  self  at   a  distance,  mentioned  No.  5.     Onin£s  cupiebant  Cte- 
xiireni%tare  c^inditionibns  eis,  quas  tuUsset.   Cic.  ad  Att.  1,  7,  15.     The  same 


jirepositions  de,  ex,  in:  quidquid  auro  argentOce  constdret.  Suet.  Aug.  2j. 
Gratis)  nctirme  constat,  non  imitafiOne.     (^uint.  11,  3.     (See  §  443.) 

Rem.  50.  The  abl.\tive  of  pkice  (No.  (i)  is  not  confined  to  the  verbs 
mentioned,  and  in  some  constructions  must  be  replaced  by  the  genitive 
of  price.     See  266  toll. 

Rim  GO.  The  word  opus  in  tlic  connection  opus  est  (it  is  necessary,  there 
is  need  of)  is  an  indeclinable  predicate-noun.  Its  construction  is  either 
i)ersonal  or  impersonal  (which  is  more  fre(iuently  the  case).  In  the  per- 
sonal conslruction,  that  which  is  necessary  is  placed  as  subject  m  the 
nominative,  the  copula  esse  agreeing  in  number  with  the  subject,  as  :  Ami- 
cOrum  auxilium  opus  est;  biU  Lib ri  opus  sunt.— If  impersonal,  that  which 


necessary  is  placed  in  the  ablative,*  the  copula  always  being  in  the  third 
])ers.  sing.  :  Non  mnltis  nrbis  opus  est,  not  many  words  are  necessary 
(there  is  "no  need  of  many  words).— If  that  which  is  necessary  is  ex- 
pressed l.-y  a  VERB,  the  construction  of  tiie  latter  is  either  {a)  by  a  sub- 
ject-in fin  i'tive,  or  (J))  by  an  intinitive-clause,  or  (c)  by  the  ablative  neuter 
of  the  i)ast  participle,  or  {d)  by  the  secc^nd  supine  (the  construction  with 
vt  being  suite-classical).  The  i)erson  to  whom  something  is  necessary  is 
al\vays'l>laced  in  the  dative  (of  the  interested  person): 

(a)  (Jnid  opus  est,  de  Dionvsio  tam  valde  affirnwre.      Cic.  Att.  7,  8.— (6)   Nunc 

opus  est.  te  aninio  cat^re,  ut  corpore  possis.  Cic.  Fam.  16,  U.—{c)  Matunifo^  opus  est. 

Liv.  8,  13.— ((i)  Non  lougius  quam  quoad^  scilu  opus  est,  proccdelur.    Cic.  In  v.  1,  20. 

Rrm.  61.  According  to  the  analogy  of  opus  est,  the  rare  phrase  ysus  est 
(there  is  use  of,  there  is  need  of),  is  likewise  construed  with  the  ablative 
of  the  thing  needed.  It  is  mostly  confined  to  poets,  and  never  occurs  m 
Cicero*  or'Cajsar  :  Ut  Octavius  reduceret  navis  quibus  considi  usus  non 
esset,  Liv.  30,  41  (for  which  the  Consul  had  no  use). 


Jii.v  iwimlart  or  UtCire     But  generally  the  victim  sacriflced  is  placed  in  the  accusative  ; 


3)  the  ablative  dependent  ou  ylatre,  to  rain,  as  sanguine,  lapidibus  plutt.  it  rains  blooU, 
stones. 


1  The  cause  of  this  construction  is  difBcult  to  explain.  The  ancient  Latins  considered 
it  thrniselves  as  an  anoinalv.  See  Gell.  .7,  2.—'»  to  hasten. -s  as  far  as.-*  The  passage 
Leg.  3, 4, 10,  cited  in  the  lexicons,  rests  on  a  bad  conjecture,  and  occura  lu  a  passage 
in  which  archaic  lan^juaiie  is  used  on  purpose. 


96 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


VI.  Verbs  Construed  with  Compound  Objects  ix  Oblique 

Cases. 
§  480.  Only  transitive  verbs  admit  of  a  second  completing 
object,  so  that  in  a  completing  compound  object  one  of  the 
cases  must  be  an  accusative. 

Hem.  63.  Tlicre  are  only  a  few  exceptions  to  this  rule  :  1)  The  plirasc 
intcrdkere  alicul  aliqud  re,  to  exchule,  prohibit  somebody  from  somctliinii, 
as  nlicui  aqnd  et  igni  interdicere,  to  exclude  one  from  water  and  lire  (i.  e. 
to  banish  him).  Ariovi.stKS  omni  Gallid  Romanifi  interdivit.  Crrs.  B.  G.  1, 
4().—Jukrdictuin  mari  Aniidti  popnlo  ed.  \j\\.'6,\A.—M(i(jinirntibu8  mcrO- 
Tfu/i  curationc  interdictum.  lb.  1),43.  Rarely  the  accusative  occurs  for  the 
ablative  {locum  (dicui  interdicere),  and  very  rarely  tlie  accusative  is  fouiul 
instead  of  the  dative  {loco  (diquem  interdicere).  2)  Tlic  ])hrases  Alicui 
dicto  nudientem  case  (^  474,  note) ;  ^fiId  veuit  (dici'ijtia  in  menti  m  (Rem.  5o) ; 
Mihi  aliqud  re  opus  cut  {Ji.  00) ;  Alicui  aliqud  re  calcre.  Cic.  Mil.  27. 

Item.  04.  An  apparent  exception  to  the  same  rule  is  the  construction 
Willi  two  datives,  one  of  which  is  a  predicate-dative  (§  400  and  Rem. 
33).  A  similar  construction  occurs  after  verbs  implyini;  an  action  which 
may  be  directed  to  a  certain  piupose,  when  the  action  is  conceived  as  an 
advantai]^e  to  a  pkuson,  as:  I  send  an  army  for  assistance  to  llie  be- 
sieged, exercitum  obsessis  auxilio  mittere.  l\\  this  construction  the  da- 
tive expressing  tlie  ])urpose  {aiuilio)  must  be  considered  an  accessory 
PREDICATE,  in  which  a  participle  {heinrj  a  help)  is  understood  («^  401).  By 
a  peculiar  attraction  this  accessory  predicate  agrees  in  case  with  the 
*  dative  of  the  interested  person'  (ob.sessis),  instead  of  agreeing  with  its 
logical  subject  (exercitum). 

Jiem.  05.  Verbs  re(iuiring  this  double  dative  are :  accijyere,  dare,  deli- 
gere,  dicere,  mittere,  reli/tqucre,  ire,  ventre.  The  i>redicate-dative  after 
these  veibs  is  generally  translated  by  as,  to,  for,  or  without  auy  con- 
necting word. 

1.  Ctesar  qninque  cotiorfTs  castris  priFfddio  n-linquit.  Cacs.  B.  G.  7, 60.—  2.  Pausanias, 
quos  Bvzantii  ccpcrat  iciris  i)ropinqu()M>  titn  murwri  misit.  Nep.  4,  2.—  3.  Pausanias 
venit  Atticisa  auxilio.  N*'p.  8.  3.—  4.  Pars  SadlnL'^  cxxnt  i.?/6«i''/io,' pars  Koinilnot»  ado- 
riuniur.  Liv.  2.  53,  2.—  5.  Fahio,  nol)ilissiino  liomini,  laudl  nou  est  datum.-»  quod 
pin{::eret.5  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  2.—  6.  Vitio  mihi  daiit,»  quod  uiortem  liouiinis  uecessarii' 
graviter  fero.«    Cic.  Fam.  11.  28. 

t^  Sometime!*  tlie  dative  of  the  interested  person  \s  understood,  as  receptulcanere, 
to  give  the  sisnal  for  retreat  (i.e.  exercitid  lor  the  army).  From  such  phrases  aw  these 
the  grammarians  have  invented  '  a  dative  of  purpose,'  which,  fince  it  is  strictly  limited 
to  the  phrases  described  above,  has  led  inanv  to  tlie  erroneous  opiuiou  that  the  dative 
case  is  a  general  exponent  of  the  relation  of  purpose. 

§  481.  If  to  a  transitive  object  another  comj)leting  object  is 
added,  the  former  is  called  the  near  oriect,  the  latter,  the 
REMOTE  OBJECT.  Romote  objccts  may  be,  1)  a  dative,  2)  ageni- 
tive,  3)  an  ablative,  4)  another  accusative. 


1   relatives.—'»  inhabitants  of  Attica.— ^    assistance.—*  considered.—»   to    paint,  to 
practise  painting.— «  to  find  fault  with.— '^  near  relatives.- ^  am  greatly  afflicted  by. 


f\ 


' 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


97 


B^m.  66.  All  such  compound  objects  may  be  transformed  into  a  per- 
sonal (never  an  impersonal)  passive  construction,  by  leaving  the  remote 
object  unaltered,  and  changing  the  near  object  (according  to  the  general 
rules)  into  a  passive  subject : 

Act.  Alicui  librum  dare.         Pass.  Alicui  liber  daiur. 

A  liquem.  fu  rti  accumre.  Aliquis  fu rti  accumtur. 

Aliquem  oculu  privdre.  Aliquis  oculis  privdtur. 

Only  when  the  transitive  accusative  has  another  accusative  as  remote 
object,  special  rules  must  be  observed     See  Rem.  73. 

§  48S,  By  far  the  most  numerous  cases  of  compound  objects 
are  the  combinations  of  transitive  verbs  with  objects  in  the 
DATIVE,  the  accusative  generally  denoting  a  thing,  the  dative 
denoting  a  peksox,  or  a  thing  which  may  be  replaced  by  a 
person. 

Bern.  67.  If  in  English  two  objective  cases  complete  the  idea  of  the 
same  verb,  the  corresponding  Latin  construction  is  generally  (see,  how- 
ever, 5^  486)  a  transitive  verb  with  a  remote  object  in  the  dative  (he sends 
me  ii  xn-i^^i-nx^donum  mihi  mittii ;  he  promised  him  helv),  auxiUum  ei 
pollivitm  est).  Sometimes  the  English  remote  object  with  to  corresponds 
to  the  Latm  remote  object  in  the  dative  {as  :fug(B  se  manddre,  to  betake 
ones  selt  to  llight;  gratias  alicui  agere,  to  return  thanks  to  some  one). 
JJut  generally  the  constructions  in  both  languaires  are  widely  different, 
and,  while  Engli.«;h  objects  with  to  frequently ^are  expressed  by  Latin 
cases  other  than  the  dative  (as  '  to  accustom  somebody  to  a  ihm<r  ^  aliouem. 
ohqna  re  assuefacere),  or  by  piejiositions  (^  427),  Latin  constructions  with 
the  dative  nuist  very  frequently  be  entirely  recast  in  English  (as :  man- 
dare  altqnid  alicui,  to  charge  somebody  {alicui)  with  something  {aliquid)- 
Odium  alicui  mjerre,  to  make  war  oti  somebody;  prc^Jicere  .aliquem  exer- 
citui,  to  place  some  one  at  the  head  of  the  arm}^  etc.) 

i,n?,^>.i^"'^*^i^"^*^  instances  of  idiomatic  Latin  dative  constructions  are  almost  inex- 
haustible, on  V  s.,nie  of  the  principal  differences  in  idiom  can  be  mentioned  here 
practRai  prol.ciency  in  the  c;orrect  use  of  Unin  constructions  being  attainabfe  only  by 
a  Ion-  and  carelul  reading  of  the  Latin  classic^?.  ^  ^ 

ie<'//y.  68  Verbs  signifying  'to  take  something  away  from  a  person' 
arc  generally  transitive  in  respect  to  the  thing'taken,  adding  the  losimr 
person  m  the  torm  of  a  '  dative  of  the  interested  person'  (dative  of  dis- 
advantage) Such  verbs  are  demere,  aiiinure,  ei-ipere,  8urripere,detrahere, 
exuere  subduc^re,  intercij)ere,  auferre  (to  carry  away),  abiqere  (to  drive 
ii\st\y),furari  (to  steal).     We  either  translate  such  phrases  by  a  verb  of 

taking  away'  with  the  preposition  from  (corresponding  here  to  the 
Latin  dative),  or  we  recast  the  construction,  substituting  a  verb  of  *de- 
privmg,  make  the  person  the  near  object,  and  the  thing  the  remote 
ooject  Avith  the  preposition  of,  as  :  galeam  militi  eripuit,  he  snatched  the 
helmet  Irom  the  soldier,  or  'he  deprived  the  soldier  of  his  helmet '  (liter- 
ally :  he  snatched  the  helmet  away  to  [the  disadvantage  of]  the  soldier.)^ 

1.  Si  xitam   mihi  for^^  ademisset.   Cic.  Plane.  42,  101.-    2.  Ferrum  et  arma  iritis 

»  If  that  from  which  something  is  taken  away,  is  not  a  person,  and  not  conceived  as 
euch,  the  prepositions  a^,  dt,  ex  arc  used.    See  §  441,  Rem  48.-  --^  diance.  '"'"''''^'"'^  *^ 


98 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


99 


et  pngnSro  cnpientihns  inilitibm  adimunhir.  Liv.  22,  44.-  3.  iVi/i  demit,  laydi  ploria 
nostra  ///«?.  Ov.  Pont.  7,  20.-  4.  Ihcc  f^i  falsa  i^unt,  eripic!»  miht  hnnc  ^^'f*"'-  <- »c. 
Art  10  4  —  5  CiP<ar  Dfjotaro  detra.xit  Jrw^»fama 8enatudatam.  Uc.  L>i\.  A-iT.— b. 
Quodauri  habui.it/  mihi  in,  C.  Verrcs.  cripiiisti  atqiu- abMuli»^ii.  <^'!<;- ^'V' 'V  it*f- 
6*  ifl,_  7.  qui  eOrum  cuipiam"  qui  iini  latrocinantnr'  lunltiir  aliquid  aut  enpU,  la 
eibi  iieinlatrocinio*  quidem  relinquit  locuiu.  Cic.  Off.  2, 11,  40. 

Rem.  09.  A  ^reat  difference  ])et\veen  Latin  and  Enf;lish  construction  is 
observable  in  those  compound  objects  which  depend  on  verbs  com- 
pounded with  the  PRErosrnoNS  mentioned  Hem.  45,  especially  pm  and 
in.  Thus  1)  pr(vfirere  and  prcpponere  siirnity  *  to  raise  somebody  to  the 
command  {praj  of  something:,'  as  prcrjicere  aliquem  legiOni,  to  uuike  one 
chief  of  a  lei^ion  ;  2)  infern\  imponeve,  imperare,  it>jk€rejnjurigere,ahqnid 
alicui,  i^cneridly  ex])ress  transitive  ideas,  completed  m  English  by  the  pre- 
position on,  as':  injuriam  alimi  inferre,  to  intlict  an  injury  on  some  one; 
iinponere  alicnl  comUtioites,  to  impose  conditions  on  ;  injicere  manuft  aUnn, 
to  lay  hands  on  one.  Iniperare  aliquid  (dicui  is  es])ecially  used  ot  milita- 
ry reciiiisitions,  as  fnimentum,  pecinwun,  miliies  alicui  inipenwe,  to  order 
some  t)ne  to  furnish  corn,  money,  soldiers. 

r^^  Many  of  the  Latin  transitives  conii)()und('d  with  the  prepositions  mentioned, 

cannot  bo  <onstnu-d  with  the  dativr  as  reinot4^>  ol)jc(t,  but  talvc  l'»ei>«>^>tiona    objects 

olten  ditlVrent  from  those    with  wiiich  thev  are  compounded.     (See  Hf  «'»"•)   1""* 

tlie  Eii-'lish   i)hrasc'to  bestow  somethin-,'  on  t-omebudy' isi  expressed  either  by  C(jn- 

j'trre  aflqmd  in  aUqnein,  or  by  lUj'tire  aUqukl  (ilicui. 

1.  Darius  cloM  Datim  pnvfecit  et  Artaphernem.  Xep.  Milt.  4.—  2.  Ciesar  singulis 
lef/ionihus  cinLTulos  leqatox^  et  quaff arem  pnefTcit.  Cirs.  B.  G.  1,  o2.—  3.  tuisar 
/iifMrrui^^  L(Mh,mn  pra'posuit.  lb.  54.-  4.  Postuhlvit  Csesar,  nc  Anovistus  aiU 
.EduU-MW  eorum  «WwAf^'/w  in  ferret.  lb.  43  —  5.  Uannibal  maprnum  Armwn  nijCcit^ 
exncitni  Romanoriim.  Ncp- Hinm.  5.-  »5.  Ariovistus  respondit.  he  stipenduim^  capero 
lure  ])elli  quod  rictore.^  nrfi,^  imponerc  consuCrint.»  Cses.  B.  G.  1,  44.—  7.  Metelins 
JugnrthiH  imperat  arirfuti  ;>r<W(/o  dncenta  millia.  Sail.  Ju'.^.  fi2,  5.—  8.  Crr^ar  lYrovin- 
da;  t"fi  "uani  niaxiinuin  potest  militum  Jinmerum  imperat.  Cues.  B.  G.l,  ». 

§  i^:i  The  verbs  doiuire,'''  adsjKrgere  and  inspergere^^  in- 
tercUultre;-  imperare,''  induere,''  cxuere,'"  aiul  cirenmdare  are 
construed  either  with  the  accusative  ot'tlie  thing  and  the  dative 
of  the  person,  or  Avith  the  accusative  of  tlie  person  and  the 
ablative  of  the  thini^. 

1.  Ciceroni  populiisKomanus  (rternitdtem^*  immorUditatemqiie"  donflvit. 
Cic.  Pis.  8.—  2.  Atticus  Af/ieni^n.u.s  universos  frumento  donilvit.  Nep. 
Att.  2.—  8.  Vatinius  Mildhi,  clarissimo  viro,  n(mnullam  laudaliOne'*  sua 
hfheculam'"  aspcrsit.  Cic.  Vat.  17.—  4.  Pythagoras  ne  Apollini  qiiidem 
Delio  hostiam"'"  immoliIiV  volnit.  ne  arom  Houguine  aspergeret.  Cic. 
N.  I),  o,  30.—  5.  li^ni.s  witdrix  omnibus  salutaiem  impertii  adorem.  Cic. 
N    D.  2,  10.—  O.^Attici  paler  omnibus  doclrlnis,  <///f/!/?/«  puerllis  (etas 


1  Inst  of  mhil.—'^  qnispiatn,  a  synonvm  of  quixqnam.  is  especially  nscd  in  j^cneral  con- 
ditionni  clauses,  or  su<h  clauses  as  have  tin-  foncof  these  (§3oT.  U.  4).-  ="  to  practise  bigli- 
wav  lobberv.- ••  in  latrocinio.\n^U'i\i\  <»f  infer Uif rone",  among  the  robbers.— «*  lieutenants 
conimaiiding.- «  /lifjenia.  Gen.  drum.  (pi.  tantumt.  winter-quarters.—"'  to  throw.—  inb- 
ute  — »  iust!of  comtueverint.fiom  ro;//!umr>,  wiiieh  has  tlie  meainuK  and  construciion 
of  mlere.—^^  to  present  somebodv  with.— ^i  to  str.-w  soinetbini:  witli  to  Hsi)er.se  som«!- 
bodv.- la  to  exclude  somebody  from.— JS  to  impart,  to  bestow  somethin-z  upi.n —'«to 
clotiie  somebndv  with,  to  put  sometbinj?  on  somebody  —**  to  strip  somebody  of.  1  He 
dative  consirucrionH  of  exiiere  and  cirenmdare  belontr  to  poetry  and  post-classical  prose.— 
»«  eternity.— 17  immortality.—"  euloijy.— »»  a  kind  of  taiut.— '■'"  a  victim. —    to  sacriflce. 


impcrtlri  debet,  fdium  erudlvit.  Nep.  Att.  1.—  7.  Pontis  atque  ilinerum 
angustiffi»  mulHtudini  fngam  intercluserant.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  7,  11.—  8.  Galli 
commeatihuH^  nostros  intercludere  instituuni'.  Cajs.  B.  G.  3,  23.—  9.  De- 
janlra  llerculi  sanguine  Centauri  tinctam*  tunicartt  induit.  Cic.  Tusc. 
2,  8,  20.—  10.  Pomis^  «c  induit  arbor.  Virg.  Georg.  4,  143. 

§  484.  The  combination  of  the  accusative  with  genitive 
objects  occurs  in  several  constructions,  in  which  the  genitive 
denotes  a  fact  from  wfiich  the  action  of  the  orovernine  verb  is 
derived,  tlie  accusative  being  in  the  relation  of  a  logical  sub- 
ject ;  namely: 

1.  With  the  verbs  ndmonere^  commonere,  commonefacere  aliquem 
(dicfijuH  rci,  to  remind  somebody  of  somethiiur;'   2.  with  verbs  denoting 

ACCUSATION,  CO:VVICTION,  and  ACQUITTAL  of  CRIME  Or  faultS,  and  CON- 
DEMNATION for  crime :  accumre,  arguere,  imimuldre,  convincere,  d/im- 
mlre,  condemndre,  absolvcre,  liberdref'  5.  with  the  impersonal  expressions, 
miiiercl,  pa^nifet,  pigcf,  pndet,  tcvdet  {pertxemtn  est)  me  aHcOjm  rei.  These 
arc  rendered  by  personal  expressions  [miseret  me  alicOjus),  I  j)ity  some- 
body (or  something);  pcenitet  me,  I  repent  something;  piget,  I  am  weary 
of;  pudet,  I  am  ashamed  of;  tmlct,  I  am  sick  of,  I  am  disgusted  with. 

1.  AdmonCbat  Q'A\\\\\va  cdium  egentdtis,^  alium  cupiditdiis^^  sua?,  com- 
plftrli  periodi  ant  ignominifp.  Sail.  Cat.  21.—  2.  Gramniaticos'^^  officii  sui 
comnK.nGmus.  Quint.  1,  .5,7.—  3.  Quum  ipse  te  veteris  ainiciticp,  commo- 
nefaceres,  commolus  es  y'-*  Auct.  Her.  4,  24.—  4.  Miltiades  proditidnis'^  est 
accusatus.  Nep.  1,  7,  5.—  o.  IMajores  nostri,  si  quam  unliis  jfeccMi^* 
vuilierem  damnabant,  (eam)  multorum  malejicidrum^^  convictam  (esse) 
pulabant.Auct.lIer.  2,  lo. —  0.  Eorum  nos  magis  miseret,  qui  nostram 
misericordiain  non  requlrunt'",  quam  qui  illam  efflagitant.*'  Cic.  Mil. 
o4,  1)2. —  7.  Numquam  primi  conailii  Ueum  paMiitet.Sen.  Ben.  6,  23. — 
8.  Me  non  solum  pigct  Htidtitice  mea?,  sed  etiam  pudet.  Cic.  Dom.  11,  20. 

Hem.  70.  Aliquem  capitis  accusare  means  '  to  accuse  one  of  a  capital  crime ;'  dbsoltere 
cn)ntis.  to  acquit  one  of  a  capital  crime.  The  death-penalty  to  which  somebody  is  con- 
demned is  i)laced  in  the  ^^[enitive  or  ablative  {capHi.<f  or  capite,  not  mortishnimorte)^^.  A 
tine  to  which  somebody  is  condemned  is  always  placed  in  the  ablative. 

§  485.     The    constructions    of  transitive   verbs   wdth   the 

Ablative  are   mainly  of  two  kinds,   1)    those   wdiose  remote 

object  may  be  conceived  as  a  MEANS  or  instrument;  2)  those 

which  iinpl)'  the  idea  of  separation  from  the  remote  object. 

Rem.  71.  To  the  former  class  belong  1)  verbs  signifying  to  provide  one 
with  something,  taken  in  the  widest  sense  of  the  word,  as  mstlre  aliquem 
aliqud  re,  to  clothe  one  with  something;  circumdare  aliquem  aliqud  re,  to 
surround  one  with  something;  rcjnunerdri,  to  reward;  instruere,  to  fur- 
nish, to  provide,  to  prepare  ;  e.rplere,  complere,  replere.,  to  fill;  orndre,  to 
adorn  ;  onerdre,  to  charge,  to  burden.  To  the  same  conception  belongs 
the  verb  assuefacere  aliquem  aliqud  re,  to  accustom  some  one  to  something 

*  Narrowness,  —  2  commedtus,  supplies.—  '  to  begin. —  *tinf?ed  with.—  ^  garment. — 
*  ixmium.  fruit.—  "^  Verbs  of  reminding  are  also  construed  with  de  in  regard  to  the 
object  reminded.—  «  All  these  verbs  are  also  construed  with  de  or  the  mere  ablative. — 
"  poverty. —  lOcupidity.— »i  «rranimarian.— i^  tobe  aftected.— '^  treason.—  i*  offence.— 
"  misdeed.—  i«  require.—  i^  demand >8  See  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  5. 


100 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  VERBS. 


(that  io  which  one  is  accustomed,  bein2:  conceived  as  the  cause  and 
instrument  of  tlie  habit).  Here  belon.irs  the  general  verb  ap-ere  allqnem 
aliqua  re,  which  is  used  of  producin.ir  atfectionsof  the  mind,  wliile  modern 
lano-uai^es  generally  express  both  the  affection  ])roduced  and  the  act 
of  prodlicing  by  the  verb  itself,  as  gaudlo  aliqncm  ajficcrc,  to  gladden  some- 
body;  (f(>/'(>re  (fjficere,  to  afflict;  admiratidnenfflcere,  to  astonish,  to  surprise; 
?io}iore,  jyrcsmu)  afficcre,  to  honor,  to  reward.  2)  Verbs  of  estimating 
and  JUDGING,  iisjudicdre  aliqucm  aliqua  re,  to  judge  somebody  by  some- 
thing; miimare,  to  estimate;  defimre,  to  determine;  vitfiri,  to  measure, 
1   Natflra  oculos  tennippimin  membrdnis^  ve.-^tTvit  et  «cpsitv  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  57.—  2.  Cur?l- 

vit  Vcm-s  lit  co/ivhium^  omnibus  re^fAsinstnictum  el  paratum  essct.  Cic.  \  err. '~,4  -.. 

—  3.  Dfiis  /x>//i*-  omnibut»  oxplevit  nvnidmn.  niali  nihil  a(hni>ciiii<.  Cic.   Inn.  -^. — 

4  Mariii<  co/nf/uvt'i, stlpendio^,  atwis.  ahix  ntUibn.''  (rebus)  nacuanwraX.  Sail.  Jug.  N).— 

5  Suevi  a  pueris  nullo  officio  aut  disiprwa  aj^suefadi,  nihil  oinnTno  contra  volunt Stem 
faciunt  Cie«  B  (i  4,  1.— (J.  Non  enim  hac  exceptiOne  ?///?/^"  affiiitur  ^ //f/rno.  sed  unns 
priviltur  injuria  (liem.  72).  Cic.  A<,'r.  2,  4.—  7.  Qui  non  T.  Aiuiiiuu  niaxnua*  /"/<(«'•'  ^^W\' 
lum  Itoniilnuni.  cunctam»  /A//irtw. /<o/i(5rtf'.s-oninTs  artVcissc  et  dicat  et  sentiat  Y  Lie.  -Mil. 
2S  —  8  Vo«^  tanti  seeleris  n/fnrem'^  non  ino(lo/?o«W77>'/.«nullis  afllcielis,  j^eil  etiain  ad  t'up- 
pliciiun»  lapi'"'  i)atiemini  ?  lb.  2'.».—  it.  Mairiios  homines  rirtiVe  inctlmur  xwn  fortuna. 
Sep.  18. 1,1.—  10.  (}imi  rectum  est,  nee  magniludiiie  icstimfltun  nee  rnimero,  nee  temj>ore. 
.Sen.  Kp.  74. 

Rem.  72.  To  the  latter  class  belong  1)  verbs  of  kkmoving,  as  :  aliquem 
loco  mocere,  to  remove  one  from  a  place  ;  pellcre,  to  drive;  prohibcre  and 
arccre,  to  keep  from;  iuUrdudcre  and  exdudere,  to  exclude  ;  ~)  verbs  ot 
DEPHiviNG,  n^pri  rare  aliquem  aliqua  re,  to  deprive  one  of -a  thing;"  orbdre, 
to  bereave ;  sjTolidre,  to  rob  ;  J5)  verbs  of  fukking,  as  libera  re,  noUcre. 

1.  Ciesar  r^atishabebatJ^inpnePcntiJl  ho'^tem  raplnis.  pabtdafionib>/s\^,  jwpvlafioni-^ 
b>  '  ^    *   ■     '^      "     ' »—..—-- 


§  486.  Botli  the  near  and  the  remote  object  are  placed  in 
the  Accusative  with  the  verbs  doccre  and  edoccre  (to  teach), 
and  cehlre  (aliquem  aliquld),  to  conceal  (somethin<r  from  some- 
body) ;  and  sometimes  with  the  xi^rhs  ])Oscere,Jf a f/i Wire  {(diqiiem 
allquid),  to  demand  (a  thing  of  one),  roffilre  and  iiiterrofjare 
{aliquem  aliquid),  to  ask,  question  somebody  <d)(>at  a  thing. 

rr"  CeWre  aliquem  (without  aliquid)  means»  cither  'to  conceal',  or  to  'mi  si  end' 
FonVebody  bv  coueealini,'  t«)M.ethin<r  {nliquii  C€ldfitr=^ome  one  is  dccc-ived).  ^l^^}^^^ 
of  cdare  alvinein  alignid,  also  celare  aliquem  de  altqua  ie  occurs.  Cic.  tani.  7.  ^u,  6. 

1.  Fortuna  \w\\\<n'temviclos  i\\\o(\\\Q.  docet.  Curt.  7,  7,  1. —  3.  Philoso- 
phia  uo!<  (imim  cetcras  res  omnis,  tum,  quod  est  dillicillimum,  docuit  ut 
iiosm.l  ii)sos  noscerCmus'\  Cic.  Leg.  1,  22.—  3.  CxxWWxyaJu mitutem,, 
quam  illexerat^",mala/^««-9medocebat.  Sail.  Cat.  10.— 4.  Kumenes  iter 
quod  habCbat  ow/iivcelavit.  Nep.  Eum.  8.—  5.  Non  te  ceUlvi  hunc  »er- 
wOnem.  Cic.  F^am.  2,  10,  8.— G.  Verres  ;?a^£'«^^s;)/•t<i//m  pro  sepultura 
liherurum  posc5bat.  Cic.  VeiT.  2,  1,  3.—  7.  Caesar  jEduos  fmmentuui. 


1  Membrane.—  '  sep'ire,  to  surround.—  »  baiiqnet.—  '•to  mix  with.—  «money.—  •  the 
whole  of,  .vnonvm  ot'  to'vs.-  ■>  aven-er.-  •  death.-  ^^  rapere  «'W'''''"\!!'.v"!?'lor"h  .7 
1»  If  the  deprivfuir  refers  to  thing's  uhich  are  separated  by  takini.^tuem  aw«^.  !i  ]^^^f^ 
taking  awav,  but  not,  irrivare.  mu^tbeused.-  i"^  to  deem,  (see  H.  ^^,  <-•»•-  *'  *"[^S^ 
«*  plinulerifx'.—  »»  to  become  acquainted  witli,  to  know.-  »«  lUicere,  to  allure.—      bunal. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  YERBS. 


101 


qnod  polliciti  erant,  fiagitabat.  Cae.s.  B.  G.  1,  16, —  8.  Pusdonem^  quendam 

Socrates  apud  Platonem  interrogat  quoedam  geomctrica*  de  dimensioned 

quadrati.*  Cic.  Tnsc.  1,  2-1:. 

Jietn.  73  In  crood  Latinity  docZre  is  not  nsed  in  a  passive  constrnction  if  it  i(«  accom- 
panied by  an  accusative  denoting  the  thing  taught.  We  can  say  Aliquis  docitur  db 
a/ioi'^).  somebody  is  taught  by  a  person,  but  not:  Aliquis  docHur  aliquam  rem  (some- 
bony  is  taught  a  thing).  Instead  of  it  the  active  expression  :  aliquix  rem  discit,  must  be 
nsed.  Only  to  the  past  participle  doctus  the  thiiis;  lauglit  Is  added  in  the  accusative,  as 
Lfffidnes  Liirmoe.  militiam  Homdnam  edocUe.  Liv.  6,  32. —  Cflare,  in  the  passive,  likewise 
has  the  active  accusative  of  the  pkksov  as  passive  sul)ject,  but  adds  ihe  thing  concealed 
by  means  of  the  preposition  de  (celor  de  aliqua  re). —  The  verbs  of  asking  and  demand- 
ing, in  the  passive  construction,  have  the  person  who  is  .asked,  or  from  who'm  something  is 
demanded,  as  passive  subject  and  retain  the  accusative  of  the  thing  asked  {^ernproUius 
ro<]atu><€f^l  sentenfiam).  Mut  verbs  of  demanding,  in  tlie  passive  voice,  more  generally  take 
the  construction ^^yi/rt/'cJ  {j)0!<cere)  aliquid  ab  aliqua  {%  A ^\.R.  AH.)—  All  verl)s  oj  saying 
and  feeling,  con-trued  with  rhar-clauses.  or  those  jroverning  an  object-iniinitive,  may 
take  the  neuier  accusative  of  a  prolioun  or  form-adjective  in  place  of  the  clause  or  the 
infinitive,  and,  ii  transitiv»'.  m;iy  tlifts  be  construed  with  two  accusatives  as  objects,  as 
hoc  te  hortor  ;  id  tecorjo.  This  neuter  accusative  remains  in  the  passive  construction, 
as  Omnia  qud,  monemur. 

§  4:8 7«  Certain  verbs,  along  with  their  transitive  accusative, 
take  a  secoxd  accusative  (either  of  a  noun  or  adjective)  as 
COMPLETING  PREDICATE  of  the  actioH  (§  402).  This  predicate- 
accusative  lias  the  transitive  accusative  for  its  logical  subject, 
and,  if  an  adjective,  agrees  with  it  in  number  and  gender.  In 
the  passive  construction  the  logical  subject-accusative  becomes 
the  grammatical  subject-nominative,  and  the  predicate-accusa- 
tive is  changed  into  a  predicate-nominative : 

1.  Active  :  Populu.'i  Romdnu.t  Cic^^rOnem,  comulem  credvit. 
Passive  :  Cicero  a  popiilo  Ilamdno  consul  crcdtus  est. 

2.  Active  :  IL(nc  legidnem  dcsar  foriissimam  judicdnt. 
Passive  :  llcec  legio  a  Ccemre  fortissinm  judicata  est. 

Rem.  74.  These  verbs,  which  are  generally  called  factitive  verbs,  are : 

A.  Those  signityiug  1)  to  make  somebody  something,  facere,  efficere, 

reddere^Jingtre  (to  Ibrin,  to  represent  by  means  of  sculpture,  picture,  or 

poetry) ;  .sc  pra'here,  to  sho\v  one's  self;   se  prmstdre,  to  prove  (to  be) ;  2)  to 

CREATE  or  ELECT  somebody  something  [credre,  eligere) ;  8)  to  proclaim 

somebody  something  {declardre,  renuniidre) ;  4)  to  install  somebody  as 

something  {inHtiluere). 

1.  Pfpni  Uamilcarem  imp-ratorem^  focCriint.  Nop.  Ilam.  2. —  2.  Themistocles  peri- 
li/<iiifnoji  belli  navillis  fecit  Alhenien.us.  Nep.  Them.  i. —  3.  Decs placdtos^  pietas  efHciet 
et  sanctitas.  Cie.  Off.  2.  3. —  4.  Homines  cacos  reddit  cupiditas  et  avaritia.  Cic.  Rose. 
Am^  35. —  5.  Ancum  Marc'utm  reqem  popnlus  creiivit.  Liv.  1,  32.—  6.  Thebani  Philippum^ 
Macedonia*  regem,  ductin  eligtint.  Just.  S,  2. —  7.  Cicerdnem\\\\\\<irii-JL  q'w'ix&s  cousulem 
dechirjivit.  Cic.  Pis.  1. —  8.  Cicero  Lvcium  Mura^nam  conmlem  renuntiavit.  Cic.  Mur. 
1. —  M.  Serrina  Tulliu^  maLmo  consensu^  rex  est  declanltus.  Liv.  1.  4*).—  10.  O  mi&eruin 
et  inf<'l[cem  ilium  diem  quo  co/z^a/ omnibus  ceniuriis**  P.  A^^^Wa  reuuntiatus  est.  Cic. 
Snil.  32.—  11.  Tiresidin^  Mjnentem  fiuL'unt  poCtjc  ;  at  vero  Polyphemum  n<mi5rus 
iounanvm^'^  tiuxit.  Cic.  Sen.  17. —  12.  Tfe  (/ij7/r?///i  tuismajoribus  priebes.  Cic.  Fam.  2.18. 

'  A  lad. —  ^  geometrical  matters  (or  questions). —  '  measurement. —  ♦  quadrdtum,  the 
square. —  '  coinm.snder  in  chief. —  "  piamtus.  propitious. —  '  with  L'reat  unanimity. — 
"  ceuturia.  a  century,  a  division  of  the  Roman  people. —  '  Nom.  Tiresias,  first  (Greek) 
declension.—  lo  monstrous. 


102 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  TERES. 


t^T"  Of  these  verbs  reddere  is  not  used  in  the  passive  voice.  Instead  of  it  Jieri  or 
effici  is  listed. 

B.  Verbs  sii^iiifvin.fij  *to  call:'   dicere,  appeUdre,  vocdre,  nomindre  (to 

name),  inscribere,  to  entitle  (give  a  name  to  a  book), 

1.  Ifosfig  tipnd  majnre.s  nostros  f.<  dicebatnr  qvem  nnnc  peregrinrnn^  dicimns.  Cic. 
Ort*.  1.  \'l.—-'l.  rolycratetn  Samiiim'  felicern  appellilbaiit.  Cic.  Fin.  5,  .'JO. —  3.  Suinmiun 
cormliuni  niajOros  nostri  nppt'liilbanr  semltfon.  Cic.  Sen.  6. —  4.  Cato  sapiens  cellam 
rtenarbiin^  riMpublicje  nostrie,  iiutrlcein*  i>Iebis  Komilniu  SicUiam  nomiiiilvit.  Cic. 
Verr,  2,  2. —  5.  Aliquld  de  oratnris  arte  panels  pnpcipiunt»  libeilis»  eomqxie  rhetnricon 
iiiscrTbunt.  Cic.  Or.  .3,  3. —  (5.  Jiistitia  ertra  doo.s  rdigio  dicitur,  erija  parentTi*  pietas.'' 
Cic.  Part.  2-2.— 7.  Ttmpas  actiOnis»  opportfliurn»  appeliatiir  occaxio.  Cir.  Oil*.  1,40. — 
8.  Apud  Lact'dicmonios  ei  qui  ampli-^sinmrn"'  iiiai;i>»tnitum"  ireriint.'''  iiominajitur 
fienej't.  Cic.  Sen.  (i. —  1>.  Qiiani  cDpiOise^^  ,i  Xenuphoute  a",'ricultQra  Jaudfltur  in  eo  libro 
qui  (Economicus  inscribitur  !  Cic.  Sen.  17. 

C.  V^erbs  signifying  Mo  believe,  consider,  hold,  deem,  judge,' 
habere,  ducere,  putdre,  exixtimdre,  arbitrdri,judicdre. 

1.  Natflra  insculpsit'*  in  nientibns  nostrip,  nt  </^o.<f  aternm  ct  heatox  habcrCmns. 
Cic.  N.  D.  1,  17  —  2.  Timolcon  cam  ricforiam  pnTcldram  diiccbat,  in  qiiil  plus  ess^ct 
.  clciiu'iitia»  qiiam  criidclitiltis.i^  Xcp.  'i'iin.  2.—  :^.  Nemo  credit,  ni^^i'*  ei  qitein  Ji(iTlem^'' 
putat.  Cic.  RofC.  Am.  .'i'.». —  4.  Niliil  milii  i»tiiltiiis  videtur,  quam  e.\i."*timflre  eum 
ffuiiiomm  tiii'^  qnem  non  noris.»»  Cic.  I'et.  7. —  5.  Socrates*  tofTiis  nuindi  se  vicolnin  et 
ciretn  arl)itrabiitur.  Cic.  'lu>»c.  r->.  37. —  (5.  Miilti  hiepe.  versfltos^"  homincd  ct  callidos 
admiraiites,  malitinin'^^  sapit'/idam  }nd\a\\\t.  Cic.  Ofl'.  2,  .'J. —  7.  Scj-thilnim  f7^/?/f  fl/^/i- 
^wi.v.svwa  8emj)er  babita  est.  Just.  2.  1. —  8.  Omni  in  rc.co/tsensio'^'^  omuhvn  pentimn/tx 
natatie  ])iitanda  e>r.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  1.'5. —  9.  Tniversus  hie  tuttiidi/s  una  ciiifa-s  lioiuinimi 
recte  exisitimiltur.  Cic.  Loj^.  1, 7. —  10.  Socrates  ab  Apollinis  oraculo  est  omnium  sapien- 
tissimua  jiuliciltus.  Cic.  Sen.  21. 

t^^^  The  active  voice  of  ^rt^>?r^  in  the  factitive  moanini;  '  to  deem,'  'to  hold'  is 
rarely  used  with  a  predicate-accusative.-'  Iu!»tcad  of  it,  the  complelin>j  predicate  is 
conn«'Cted  \\\th  p}V.     See  Hem.  75. 

Hem.  75.  The  factitive  verbs  ducere.  pvtSre,  and  habPre  are  pometimes  construed  with 
pro  in  place  of  the  predicate-accusative  (see  i)age  Jio.  Item.  61).  as  :  Ariovistiis  Caesari 
respondit  sese  ilium  non  pro  atn'ico  sied  pro  //av/g  habere.  Ciee».  B.  G.  1,  44  (that  he  would 
hold  him,  not  in  the  place  of  a  friend,  but  in  that  of  a  foe).  Here  belont;s  tlic  phrase 
aliquid  pro  tn/ii/o  putore  or  ducere.  to  esteem  somethinir  for  nothinir.  Instead  of  pro 
often  the  expression  ia  numero  will»  a  genitive  is  used:  (Uiquan  in  hoslium  iiutnero 
habere,  to  treat  (consider)  somebody  as  an  enemy. 

Rem.  76.  In  resjard  to  verbs  ot  making  (S4>"^7,  A.l)  two  peculiarities  must  be  noticed: 
1)  Tliey  may  take  a  predicate-irenitive  (j)ossessive.  p.  77)  instead  of  a  predicate-accusa- 
tive or  niuninative:  Sci/no  nmnem  oram,  liomrinm  ditionis  facit.  Liv.  21.60. —  Tota  A'iia 
popidi  Itomfini  facta  est.  Cic.  L.  .\u.  2.  15.—  2)  Tne  tninsitive  accu!»ative  is  sornetiuies 
v/iderstood  if  denotinur  indkfimte  persons  (Itoinincs),  the  second  accusative  bi-iiii,'  a 
predicate-adie«-tive.  Such  adjectives  are  placed  in  the  accusativk  pluiial  masculise 
(aj^reeinuj  with  tiie  transitive  accusative  /lotnirie^  understood):  Vacuus  animu-t  Ijedtos 
e^ffi'it,  a  free  heart  makes  ha[)py.  Cic.Ttisc.  4, 1"!.— Nihil  est  quod  tain  ini^erO't  faciat  qua/n 
srelus.  II).  p^in.  4.  24.— A'i/ii/  ffuiqiii  facit  iracuudos  quam  educatio  mollis.  Sen.  Ii-a.  2, 21. 
Itarely  tlie  acciis.  sinn;.  is  used:  ihinoria  qratum  /oi-it.  Sen.  Ben.:i4. 

t^?f"  For  the  use  of  accessory  prcdicute-accusaiives  with  verbs  not  factitive  (invenlre 
etc.)  see  p.  2.J2,  /^  23. 

VI r.    Construction  of  Verbs  with  the  Infinitive. 
§  4:88,  Verbs  take  the  Infinitive  eitlier  as  Subject-infinitive 

*  foreicrner.—  '  of  Samos.- 3  storehouse. —  *  the  feeder,  the  nurse. — ^  a/iqvid pnrci/iere, 
to  {,Mve  brief  rides. —  «  lihellu>^.  a  little  book. —  ''  pit.'ty. —  *' action. —  »  rij?lH,  <>|)|i..rtuni.— 
1"  the  lii«^iie-t.—  "  ma^dstracy.—  »*  ,o  i,old._  »3  with  what  fullness.—  »<  insculiiere,  to 
en;L,'rave.—  »*  crudty.—  »^  e.xcepf.—  ^^  safe.—  '«  attachtnl  to  thee,  interested  in  th«  e.—  '» 
fut.  iti  noHase  (inst.  of  Jioreris). —  20  shrewd. —  '»  malii  e. —  22  a<,'reement. —  2s  itm  ju  the 
nu\aiiin<; 'to  have' the  active  Aa6er^  is  ficqiiently  construed  with  a  double  accusaiive, 
whicb._ however.  belon«:s  to  the  accessouv  predicates:  (Jinne  illud  ttnipus  hal>'-af  per 
tne  stdntmn  ac  /ifjtrum.  at»  far  as  I  am  concerned,  he  may  have  all  that  time  unoccupied 
and  free.  Cic.  Veir.  2,  12.  ^7  reliquas  cuitdt'is  stij>endiarias  habireut,  that  tliey  should 
hold\not  '•consider')  the  other  communities  as  tributary  ones.  Ctes.  B.  G.  1,30. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


103 


or  as  Object-infinitive.  Both  are  distinguished  from  substantive 
suV)jects  and  objects  by  always  having  a  logical  subject,  either 
e.vpressed  or  understood. 

g  480.  The  Ob.iect-infinitive  is  either  a  simple  object  of 
its  governing  verb,  or  it  forms  a  compound  object  together 
Avith  a  case-object  of  the  same  verb.  The  logical  subject  of  a 
slnqyle  ohject-bijlnltlce  is  always  the  grammatical  subject  of  the 

governing  verb. 

Hem.  77.  Tlio.se  classes  of  verbs  which  may  bo  construed  with  an  ob- 
ject-intiiiitive  are  enumei'ated  §  80.  In  addition  to  the  single  verbs,  men- 
tioned there,  several  others  belonging  to  the  same  classes  must  be  noticed, 
as  a^i^ttueacere  and  constfescere  (synonyms  of  solPre) ;  maturdre  and  fcitindre 
(synonyms  of  propcrdre),  cwpixxe,  deitiindre,  hO/ordre.,  cunctdri,  meditdri,in- 
d-^tere^inntifacre,  consfituere^  pieminisse,  odut<e^  and  the  expressions  non 
dubildre  (not  to  hesitate),//*  nnimo  habere^  (to  intend),  in  animum  inducere 
(10  prevail  upon  one's  self),  aasuetum  esse  (to  be  accustomed),  consiliurfi 
ciipere,  supersedere  (Liv.  21,  40),  non  curdre  (Cic.  Fam.  3,  8,  7),  and  some 
bimilar  vcrl)s. 

Jhm.  TS.  Of  these  verbs  and  of  those  mentioned  §  80,  some  must  alioays  be  construed 
wiih  an  object -infinitive,  as />o.«*e,  /leqalre.  ae/nx/^e.  sol^re  ;  others  (as  velle,  nolle,  desinere) 
are  «'///(W  alwavs  construed  so.  But  the  great  majority  admit  of  other  constructions, 
either  with  case'-objects.  infinitive  clauses,  or  other  dependent  sentences.  Other  verbs, 
not  mentioned  here,  occur  with  object-iiittnitives  only  in  rare  and  peculiar  meanings,  as 
occupdre,  which,  with  an  infinitive,  means  'to  be  the  tirst  to  do  a  thing,'  'to  forestall 
another  in  doiuLT  a  thing'  (b>Uutn  fact-re  occupdre,  to  be  ahead  of  the  enemy  in  beginning 
a  war.  Liv.  1,  i4K  'i'lius  Sallust  (dxX.hH)  von^wnvsconjurdre  {aa^U conjur^ando  statuere) 
with  an  ohjectiiifiidtive :  conjurarere  uofMssitni  civcs  patriam  incendere.  Habire  is  con- 
strued with  an  iutinilve  in  the  phra.se  yUiil  habto  scrihere,  I  have  nothing  to  write  (Cic. 
Att.  1,  2-.i).  which  is  a  Greek  construction.  But  there  are  a  number  of  verbs  which, 
witii  an  object-infinitive,  occur  only  in  the  poets  or  in  later  Latinity)".  as  valere,  calKre, 
suntinZre  (instead  «if  if.)s.se)  ;  e.i-petere  (lnst(;ad  of  vetl,^)  ;  fuqere  and  parcere  (instead  of 
hollr)  ;  quierere,  ardhv,  trtpiddre  (instead  of  sfudi-re) ;  puqndre  (instead  of  latmrdre  or 
l-ardre)  ;  ih-rstdre  (instead  of  ptrstcevdre)  ;  optdrt  (in-tead  of  cupere).  Part  of  these 
v«rbs.  iujpropcrly  or  poeticallv  usi'd  with  an  ol)ject-infiniiive,  are  never,  in  good  prose, 
construed  with  any  completing  object :  part  require  otlier  constructions,  as  optdre 
(whicli,  in  classical  prose,  is  construed  mostly  with  ut),  while  pmoptdre  (to  prefer)  has 
Cjesar's  sanction  lor  heini;  construed  with  an  infinitive  (Cjes.  B.  G.  1,  25).  Thus  dare, 
which  Livy  construe^  only  in  the  phrase  dare  Inhere  (11,  47)  with  an  object-infinitive,  is 
ill  later  prose  frequently  construed  with  an  infinitive  in  the  meaning  ''topennU.' 

Uem.  70.  From  the  rule  in  §  480  it  follows  that  if  the  object-infinitive 
is  a  verb  requiring  a  completing  predicate  {esse,  fieri,  did,  etc.,  §  4G3),  the 
predicate-nouns  and  adjectives  must  agree  with  the  grammatical  subject 
of  the  governing  verb  (^  40^3,  2). 

§  490.  Verbs  can  generally  not  be  used  in  the  passive  voice 
wlicn  their  dependent  object-infinitives  accompany  them. 

Hem.  80.  These  verbs  cannot  form  teuscnal  passives,  since  they  are  without  transi- 
tive objects,  nor  can  they  form  i.MPEUst)NAL  passives,  because  in  this  case  the  infiiutive^ 

»  In-tead  of  i/i  aniuio  hadtre.tlm  imp<irsonal  expressions  '  a/t<;'«  in  animo  est,'  or 
•■anrui  fst  animu-t,'  are  frequently  uswl.  By  this  construction  the  object-infinitive  becom.-s 
jpTiiumatically  a  subject-infinitive.—  '^  Such  verbs  ouirlit  to  be  s«;parately  noticed,  and 
t'hould  not  indiscriminately  swell  the  lists  of  verbs  with  object-infinitives,  which  gram- 
m.irians  are  in  the  habit  of  copving  one  from  the  other,  or  of  crowding  together  out  of 
ditrerent  lists  Irom  all  text-books  within  their  reach. 


104 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  VERBS. 


would  lo?e  its  Biibjpct,  which  would  ho  aijainft  §§  488  and  4'^0.  Hence  such  phrases  as 
prqlicincl  cufntitr,  dormlrefextindtur,  are  vrrammalical  in)possil)i]itie,s. '  Nevertheless  the 
verbs  ca>pisge  and  detdnere  take  a  passive  form  (either  j)ersonal  or  impersonal),  when 
their  object-infinitives  are  passives.  But  this  is  only  a  formal  exception,  cince  tiie  pas- 
sives of  these  verbs  have  strictly  the  same  meanimjsas  their  actives  :  Derepiibliracoi^uli 
ccppti  fturnm.  men  commenced  to  consult  us  about  the  republic.  Cic.  Div.  2,  2,  27.  See 
the  examples  §  4G0.  Rem.  11. 

litf/i.  81.  But.  while  the goveniinj]^  verb  must  be  an  active,  the  ohject-inflnitive  may  be 
a  PASSIVE,  either  personal  or  impersonal,  with  fjosse,  ffol^re,  dtf/ire,  {co'pist<e,  and  deH/i'f-re), 
and  PERSONAL  (never  impersonal),  with  any  of  the  other  verbs,  so  far  as  their  meaninirs 
admit  a  passive  complement,  as:  Metui  cu/nunt,  fuefu'ic/ue  ti/nerd.  Sen.  Ajram.  5,  Ti.—'st 
.yifA  piirgdti  e.*.<e  vel/enf.  Ctes.  B.  (i.  1,  2S.  But  in  most  instanci-s  clausks  are  substi- 
tuted for  passive  inflnitives  dependent  (m  these  verbs  :  Dixit  non  recusataruin.  >ff  a»«- 
Jodi  rnanibus  ipsorum.  Suet.  Claud.  'ZHj.—iiapientein  civetn  me  et  esse  ct  imiturari  volo. 
Cic.  Fam.  1.  9. 

liem.^-l.  The  object-infinitive  after /JOsw  is  freqtiently  understood,  e^peeiallv  a  verb 
of  general  import,  &^f(icere.  in  which  case  the  oiiject  of'/arere  is  directly  connected  with 
/)<M.N'^,  beini;  mostly  a  miantitative  neuter  adjective,  as"  ^^/w/'imj/^i,  niultuin.  quantum^ 
plus,  etc.  It  assumes,  then,  the  meaninj;  '  to  have  power,'  as  plurimum  ]K)sse,  to  be  most 
powerful.  Cjes.  B.  G.  1,  3.  Thus  tlie  object-infinitive  oi mre  is  understood  in  the  piuase 
gcire  1    "       instead  of  ^t-ire  loqiii  Laflne),  to  know  L:Uin. 

§   i!H.  About  twelve  transitive  verbs,  and    a  fow  intran- 

sitives,  admit  of  a  case-object  (accusative  or  dative)  along  with 

an  object-infinitive,  so  that  tlie  case-object  is  the  logical  subject 

of  the  infinitive   (§  101). 

Hem.  83.  These  verbs  are  1)  the  thansitivks  d(>ci're,  aKsuefae^re,  juhere^ 
v^tare,  sinere,  arguere  (to  accuse  of),  iiminiuldre*  (to  cliarire  with),  cogere, 
pati,  impedlre,  j^rohibere,  juul  (poetically  and  iu  later  prose)  d^terrere,  to 
deter,  all  of  which  admit  or  prefer  other  constructions");  2)  the  intran- 
siTiVES  permittere  {(dicui),  conredcre  {(dinii)^  and  (poetical  1\'  and  iu  later 
Latin)  suadere,  impcrdre,  dare  {Grajis  dedtt  ore  rotunda  Miisa  loqui.  llor. 
A.  P.  223.     Mlhi  datur  rcum  proxpere  defendere.  Tac.  Dial.  7). 

Bern.  84.  The  transitives  mentioned  above  admit  of  the  regular  change 

into  the  passive  voice,  the  transitive  object  becoming  the  passive  subject, 

whilt  the  objecl-iutiiiitives  reiuain   the  objects  of  the  passive  voice,  by 

which  chauge  the  i^assive  subject  becomes  their  logical   subject.     They 

have,  then,  exactly  the  same  grammatical  relatious  as  the  verbs  of  the 

first  class  (Rem.  77):  Bu.v  hoHtlxfurjere  eodll ;  Pass. :  Iloste-sfugere  coguntar 

(idmost  the  same  as  JIostcM  fugere  dcbeni).     Deterrere,  which  in  the  active 

voice  is  not  construed  thus  iu  good  prose,  has  Cicero's  authority  for  the 

construction  of  the  i)assive  voice  with  an  object-iutiuitive. 

%^^  1.  The  passive  construction  of  these  verbs  occurs  not  only  in  the  form  of  a 
predicative  i)hrase,  but  may  have  tlie  form  of  an  attkiuutivb  phrase,  so  that  tiie  verb 
IS  used  as  passive  (perfect)  pauticipi.e.  In  this  instance  the  participle  becomes  (lie 
ATTKiBUTE  of  the  nouu  wliich.  in  the  passive  predicative  phrase,  would  have  been  the 
passive  sulyett,  as:  I*nf:t(n' ad  exereituin  ptvUdtici  junKiin,  the  i)netor  (beuiir)  directed 
to  proceed  to  the  army.  The  «^overiiinir  noun  may  \n\  ri-(piired  by  tlie  construction  to 
be  in  any  case, the  participlf  always  a^'reeing  with  it  in  case,  i^endvr.  and  number,  as : 
Gen.  J'ne/d/u  ad  extrciluni  jnojicl/tci  jufud.     Tlius  the  i)hrase  inay  take  the  form  of  the 

*  Such  constructions,  however,  are  sometimes  found  wlien  the  iinpeisonal  passive  is 
a  freiund  (§  5l-i),  as  Virrve  totd  ritd  di!>ceudinn  ext.  et  totd  rifd  di-ccudum  «-.s/  ?/io/i.  Sen. 
,lirev.  Vit.  7.  In  such  constructions,  the  infinitive  is  h.jrioaily  an  ol)ject-iiifiniiive  with 
an  uncertain  person  as  subject,  but  ;,'nunmatically  a  suliject-infinitive.—  s  It  is  doubtluJ 
whether  tin;  verbs  irmmuldre  and  arrjiterc  belonj^  here,  or  whether  their  construc- 
tions must  be  considered  as  real  accusatives  with  tile  infinitive.—  3  Monere  and  horfdri, 
which,  by  some  f,'rammariaiis,  are  added  to  these  verl)s.  are  sometimes  found  with  object- 
influitives,  but  never  when  they  are  accompanied  with  their  transitive  objects. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


105 


Ablatives  Absolute,  as :  Prcefore  ad  ercrcititm  pivficisci  jmao,  after  the  praetor  had  been 
directed  to  proceed  to  the  army.—  Rellod^seia  causuni  inaufiurdri  oKicti  fiamiiiu,  I 
should  have  |)a>sed  in  silence  the  c;ise  of  the  priest  corapelled  to  inaugurate.  Liv.  27, 
8.—  Gn)o  LfFlio  cum  «ociis  naralibus  nrbem  cuf^fodXre  jaam,  after  G.  Laelius  had  been 
ordered  to  guard  the  city  together  with  our  naval  forces.  Liv.  20,  4S. 

2.  A  second  kind  of  passive  construction  in  regard  to  these  verbs  is 
generally  repugnant  to  the  Englisli  idiom.  It  takes  place  if  the  transitive 
object  of  these  verbs  is  altogether  omitted,  the  transitive  object  of  the 
oiijKCT-iNFiNiTiVE  bciug  uiaclc  the  subject  or  governing  word  of  the  pas- 
sive construction.  In  this  instance  the  object-intinitive  must  take  a  pas- 
sive form.  In  English  such  constructions  must  often  be  expressed  actively, 
as:  XcTWK-.Pnvtoreimirbemcustodlrejubent.  Passive:  Urbs  {a  prcp- 
tore)  cuatod'irijiiHKtic^t,  directions  were  given  to  guard  the  city  (literall}^: 
the  citii  wd-f  directed  to  be  guarded). —  Exercilus  e.c  Slcilid  dimitti  jus.Hus  est, 
the  aiiny  was  directed  to  be  dismissed  from  Sicily  (the  army  was  ordered 
to  evacuate  Sicily).  Liv.  20,28.  —  Antiochu.%  mbduci  navibus  jussis,  in 
hibcrnd  A.itiochium  couce.saif,  Antiochus,  after  the  ships  had  been  ordered 
to  be  drawn  on  land  (after  ordering  the  ships  to  be  dawn  on  laud),  went 
to  Anliochia  into  winter-quarters.  Liv.  33,  41. 

Jlem.  85.  The  intransitives  (Uem.  83)  admit  of  a  change  into  imper- 
sonal passives  only,  the  object-iutinitive  becoming  a  subject- infin- 
ITIVE,  being  treated  according  to  the  rules  of  §  49-t  :  Prceceptor  discipulo 
abcti.sc  concedlf  ;  Pass. :  Blscipulo  abesse  conceditur  (about  the  same  as  Di- 
seipulo  (d)eiif<e  licei).  Oidy  iniperdre  (in  good  prose)  assumes  the  form  of  a 
PEKsoNAL  passive,  as  if  it  were  a  transitive  verb,  being  treated  according 
lo  the  rules  in  Kem.  84  :  Lnperor  aliquid  facere  (the  same  as  jubeor  all- 
quid  fdcere). 

1.  Magister  tnus  te  inagnil  inercede  mhWsapere^  docuit.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  4.—  2.  LQupere- 
gnntim"^  vetat  in  raurum  a.«c€ndere.  Cic.  Or.  2.  24.—  3.  Nolftni^  muros  portasque  adlre 
vetiti  sunt.  Liv.  2^5, 16.—  4.  Improl)itas<  numquain  fi^um  re*;>ir<7r6*>iait.  Cic.  Fin.  1. 1«. — 
5.  Acnmlre  eum  nun  est  situs.  Cic.  Sest.  44.—  ti.  Insimulant  Ao;?w/?^m  fraudis  causa rfi- 
sceMfiSie.*  Cic.Verr.  2,  24.—  7.  Mulier  ?/ie  arguit,  banc  domo  a  se  surripuis)>€ .  Plant.  -Men. 
5,  2.  62.—  8.  Pericleii  nvcfor  illTus  injuriae  fuUse  arguebatur.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  :i3.—  9.  Caesar 
ceteras  ?/a'it>/?«^^  imperio  popnii  Komilno  parlre  assuefecit.  Cic.  Prov.  Cons.  18. —  10. 
SertU  qnoque  i)ueros  hujus  letatis  vevberare^  concediinus.  Curt.  8,  26.—  11,  Quinctione 
per'ue  qnidem  taciie  conceditur.  Cic.  Quinct.  I.5.— 12.  Mi  in  Lautumias'*  SvracusS- 
nas  deddci*  imperantur.  Cic.  Verr.  .5,  27.—  13.  Nefarias  ejus  \ib\d'\m:»  commemordre 
nudure»*  deterreor.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  5. —  14.  Ego  numquam  quemquam  ad  te  sine  niuis 
litteiis  ire  patiar.  Cic.  Faui.  15,  17. 

Obskrv.  If  this  class  of  object-infinitives  take  completing  predicates,  the  latter 
phould  agree  (in  the  accusative)  with  the  transitive  objects  of  their  governing  verbs,  and 
with  their  passive  subjects  (in  the  nominative)  if  these  verbs  are  in  the  passive  voice, 
lint  constructions  of  Jubere.  argiiere  etc.  with  inflnitives  of  the  copula  occur  only  in 
connections,  which  hardly  admit  these  infinitives  to  be  Ci)nsidered  as  object-infinitives, 
as  :  (^uod  judicium  de  compnmiisso  factum  est,  id  ifrit'mi  jumt  ease;  He  ordered  the 
judgment  which  was  passed  on  the  compromise  to  be  null  and  void.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  27. 
llere  '  id^  cannot  be  taken  as  a  transitive  object  of  jussit :  but  '  id  irrifH7n  esse''  g\\- 
dentlyi^an  Infinitive  clause.  So:  Post  Numje  mortem  TuUum.  HosfUhnn  rt^gem  {esse) 
populus/vAvi/ ;  The  people  commanded  that  T.  II.  should  be  king.  Liv.  1.  30.— Servio 
liwXWojubel  (Yvx) populum  diclo  audieidem  esse ;  It  is  tlie  will  of  the  king  that  the  peo- 
ple should  obey  the  orders  of  S.  T.  Liv.  1,  41.— The  intransitives  mentioned  above 
sliould  take  tiie  compleliuL'  predicates  of  esse  in  the  i>ativb  ;  but  examples  of  such  con- 
structions do  not  occur  iu  classical  prose.** 

§  40^-J.  Many  verbs  of  SAYING  and  belietixg  with  infinitive 

»  To  be  an  ignoramus.—  2  foreiirner.—  s  inhabitants  of  Nola.—  *  his  wickedness.— 
•  to  draw  breath.—  «  to  have  left  the  city.—  '  lo  inflict  corporal  punishment  on.—  8  The 
stone-quarries,  a  renowned  prison  in  Syracuse. —  »  to  be  gent, —  1°  shame.— >*  Perhaps 
such  a  dative  construction  is  contained  in  At dmo  r\wr\c  jam  otidsoesseimi^QxOy  (Ter.  Andr. 
5,  2,  1)  though  the  passage  is  generally  interpreted  diflerently. 


106 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  YERBS. 


clauses,  when  used  in  the  passive  voice,  instead  of  tlie  regular 
impersonal  construction  according  to  §  460,  1,  assume  the  same 
construction  as  transitive  verbs  with  object-infinitives  (§  491, 
K.  84),  the  subject-accusative  of  the  clause  being  changed  into 
the  subject-nominative  of  their  passive,  and  the  predicate-infini- 
tive of  the  clause  into  their  object-infinitive.  Tliis  is  called  the 
construction  of  the  NOMINATIVE  avitii  the  ixfixitive,  as: 

Active  :  Dicunt,  Gnjuin  advcnisse,  Ihey  s.yj/  that  Gajiin  has  arrived. 

Rkgi^lar  Impkhsonal  Passive  form  :  Picitur,  Gajuni  advcnisse,  it 

is  said  ihtit  Gnjus  has  arrived. 

NoM.  WITH  Inf.  :  Gnjus  adveuissedic'tur,  G ajiis  is  said  to  hai-e  arrited. 

Jiem.  86.  Tin' construction  of  tran^itiv»;  v(m-1)s  with  objoct-innnitivos  (§491)  hears»  a 
ptroii_'  rf>*i*mblance  to  thf  construction  of  intransitive  verbs  of  .sayinir  and  bclifvini; 
with  iiifinitivi' clauses,  and  tliu*  L'raniinarians  >onjftiines  assii;n  the  saini?  vcrl)  (for  iiist. 
jublre.  retCire.  aiytier^)  lo  the  one  or  the  otiier  of  tiiese  clas>es,  acconiini^  to  their  differ- 
ent views».  Thus,  in  the  sentence J'//>^o  ft  ralf'-re,  the  accusative;  fe  is  by  .sonieconsiidercd 
as  the  transitive  object,  and  the  inlinitive  raltre  as  tin?  object-infinitive  of  jnheo.  while 
otiii  rs  take /«^  ^v//«^/v- as  an  intinitive  clause  with  te  as  subject-accusative,  and  raJtre  as 
])re(ilcate-inrinitive.  In  the  passive  voice,  however,  both  kinds  of  ct)nstruction  essen- 
tially ditier  from  each  other.  If  /«-  ralfrt  is  an  inliiiiiive  clause,  the  sientence  in  the  pas- 
hive'voice  would  take  an  impkusonal  passive  form  (jitbetuf  a  me,  te  vnKre),  wlule  if  te 
iu  a  transitive  ol)ject,  and  lallre  an  object-iiitiiiiiive,  tlie  sentence  in  the  pas>ive  voice 
Would  have  a  i'kusonai.  passive  form,  treated  accordin'.;  to  /iV//«.  SI.  {Tu)  Vd/ire  Jufjtiiit. 
But  the  idiom  of  the  l.in_'ua_'e  tr«'atsmany  intransitive  verbs  of  sayintrand  believinij 
e.vactly  'iccordini,'  lothis  latter  Ibrm,  as  if  they  were  transitive  verbs  with  oi)ject-inlini- 
tivej».  Thus  the  active  construciio  i  J)tcu/if,  ArUtiexni  inventdrem  olti  e»se  (they  say 
that  Aristiens  is  the  discoverer  ol  the  olive-treo)  cannot  be  chani^ed  into  the  impersonal 
y)a'  sive  /f'cif'tr,  Ari-tfie't/n  inv-ntrireiH  olei  e^xf  (it  is  said  that  Arist;eus.  etc.)  but  niu-t 
assume  the  personal  form  Ansf<(  >/i  itirftifor  o/ri  {s^e  (/iri^ur  (Xr'istivn^  is  said  to  be  the 
inventor,  etc.)  so  that  iht;  inlinitive  esse  is  treated  asan  object-intinitive  of  <(icitur. 

Rem.  87.  The  passives  of  videre  (in  the  nieaninu:  '  to  soem'),  of  direre, 
narnh''^,  puidre,  existiiudre,  and  of  trade  re,  ferre,  and  perhibere,  which  in 
the  passive;  assume  the  incaiiiiii»:  '  to  be  said,'  '  to  he  feporied  (h}'  hearsay),' 
aluiost  always  assmiie  tite  coiisliuetiou  of  the  '  >«'oiniiiative  uith  tiie 
intiuilrve.'  Oilier  verbs  of  saylns,^  and  thinkinii:,  as  nuntidre,  i/tdicdre, 
memordre,  an  dire,  reperire,  scribere,  demonstrdre,  oiftejidere,  cofjnoscere,  intel- 
ligere,  perspicere  jire  either  construed  in  the  same  way,  or  have  the  reirular 
imiieroonal  constriiclion  aeeordini;  to  Rem.  8(5.  Thus  we  may  say  either 
Gajus  mortuHs  esue  nxiifidtur,  or  Nnntiiliur.  Gajuni  mnrtmuu  esse ;  either: 
ProcinciiB  rebelldre  axdiuntur,  or  Aiidlliir  provineias  rebeUdre. 

1.  Non  ita  «jenerati*  a  natilril  sumus.  ut  ad  liulnm  ot  jociiin/«(:/i  esse  ridfdmvr.  Cic. 
Off.  1.  '20. —  2.  Lectifarinfie'^  I'latonem  siudio-ie,  (luilir'isse  etiam,  Ittinosthfitoi  dicitnr. 
(;ic.  Brut.  31. —  8.  Aristldts  tmus  omu'nmi^  J'/f'(i'''^i/u>/s j'ui->se  traditiir.  Cic.  St-xt.  HT. — 
4.  .ffo//H//w.s' Amiiliuni  reirem  inferemisse*  fertur.  Cic.  Kep.  'i,  3.—  5.  Tfjndan<l(t'>  fratre» 
Don  niodo  ai/juforet!*  in  proeliis  vit  t»»riic  poi)uli  ItomSni.  sed  otiam  nx/ifii  fuijis-e  per- 
idbentur.  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  IJ.-- -  6.  Afficus prudea/i  enfie  \u  jinL'''  c\\W\  putab.qtur.  <'ic.  Am. 
2. —  7.  Dm'ifU'ina  Driiidjlium"  in  Britannia  rep^rfa^  at(pie  inde'"  in  (ialliain  fninsiiitd 
eaue  existimiliur.  Cms.  B.  G.  G,  \'l. —  8.  Milii  nuntiabuiur,  I'arlkijs  trant^isfe  A'uphnKetn. 
Cic.  Fam.  15,  1. 
Jier:.  88    If  these  verbs  are  in  any  tense  except  future,  ])reseiit  or  imperfect,  they  must 

be  construed  i.nrEKsoNALLV,  except  vidtri,  which  eveuiu  these  ten.-es  takt?  a  teksonai* 

construction. 


*  b-)gotten  —  ^  to  read  repeatedly.—  '  vnns owniwm before  superlatives  means  'of  all 
othc'S.'— «  to  kill.—  *  the  Tvndarian  brothers,  i.  e..  sons  of  Tyndareus,  namely.  Castor 
and  Pollux.—  «  helpers.—  ''  law.—  »  the  Druids,  Celtic  priests.—  » discovered.—  '<•  thciice. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  VERBS. 


107 


5  49»*{  The  tense  of  the  object-infinitive  is  almost  always  the  present, 
if  'the  intinitive  is  a  simple  object  {R.  77).  This,  also,  is  generally  so  in 
regard  to  object-infinitives  which  take  a  transitive  or  intransitive  object 
alon-  with  them  (^491).  Only  insimuldre,  arguere  nnd,  oi  course  the 
verbs  menlioned  R.Sl,  may  take  perfect  infinitives  (beei^.  8d,  ii.x.  0.  7.  »). 

Hence  English  object-infinitives  in  i\^e  perfect  {^h^^  ''?ftt''!if£r\.u^%a^r^^ 
hare  b^en' are  not  iTenerally  expfi-ssed  'Jecis^e  jwluit  ,  \mssedebint  ,  but  facere  po- 
tuil'   ' esse  defiuit '     To  this  rule  there  are  the  followiDi,' exceptions:        . 

Tife  eSiJi  perfect  intinitive  after  ^  can\  ^  ruay  \ico>dd  might)  ^z.  e  the  perfect 
and  pluperfect  of  the  potential  with  V««  '  etc.).,  denoting  '/j'lJf'^;;^^,  ^^,f  .'.,^^'lj 
nieterile  is  either  expressed  by  the  circumlocution  with  'fien  jxjU-st  yt  ,  oi  Jiert  po- 
fr  '  (see  p  m8^UBs  2,  1),  or  (more  rarely)  by  the  perfect  }H>ttd  with  a  present  mGn- 
U^^L^^Su^eYn.oc^JFalcuta,  It  is  possible  that  J:^-'<;»'t  ^I^J^ tS^  am;X^ 
have  been  innocent).  Cic.  Clu.41.  But  sometimes  the  Latin  uses  exactly  ti.esa^^ 
feci  infinitive  as  we  do  iu  En^'li^h,  as:  E^ce^stsse  pugna  ad  ^^^'^f^^  '' '^^^^^pX/TliS 
UestrViii,  battle  at  theTrehraca///<o/  havejaUenm  '^"s  >•*^^'^^L\v.  21,  lo.-/^o^w^^^^^ 

lib  in  tio  non  ^edl'<se,  et  lamen  Oppianicum  ^''f »«  ^^«f/^'ff«tf^l.«   !^W  O^^^^^^^ 
nii-'ht  not  have  Utrii  t^itdnn  in  the  bei^'inuing.  and  yet  might  linve  condemned  Oi^^\&\\(.n^ . 
Ci"  Cir41,  1  Wl-Qnmn  {.ac  scribCham.  Pompgjus  jam  Brundusium  ^euts^e  lateral ; 
Pompev  can  have  arrived  at  Br.u.d.isium  (epistolary  tt^»^:f' P;.3?*>  -.^^'f-^^^",»^^^ 

2.  Sometimes  (very  rfrelv)  a  perfect  infinitive  with  iyo.<se  and  debere  lias  a  foice  similar 
Xo\  Mure^^t^nnnlnvJ,  «i:  Bellum  quod  ante  ^^i;-"'"™  ^StiuS'SS/S 
which  we  may  have MM^ed  before  next  winter.  Liv.  37,  ^^--^f '"^^''J.'^^^.Vr^V/,^^^^^^ 
tamen  de  meo  jure  decCdam  ;  Althouirh  it  is  a  necessity  that  I  ^houkl  ci.rec  ly  l^eat  iny 
adversary  0  should  liave  beaten' ;  see  about  the  meaumg  ol  vict,  p.  303,  Obs.  2).  Cic.  K.  A. 

''^  Vsometime.  velle,  especially  if  conn-ected  with  a  negation,  takes  an  object-in^^^^ 

in  the  perfect,  to  represent  the  will  as  '"«'re  decided  by £ving  to  its  ob^^^^^  of  a 

compleUd  c/c/um  (Compare  the  perfect  participle  after  r«//€ii    infinitive  clau^e^^ 

M  ,i\  as-    AV  nuis  nuid  fu-^e  causil  ve/tdidu^se  neve  tmuse  vellet.  Liv.  39,  IT.— x^emineiu 

m.a  i't;av!  nXfsK.;"  ri./i.  II).  24,  MS.-^m^ pei^rcisse  vobis  volunt,  committere  vos 

cur  pereatis  non  patiunlur.  H).  .32,  21.  f^r^o  of  a  nrp«pnt 

4.  Poets  occasionally  use  object-infinitives  in  the  Perfect  with  the  forc^  of  a  present 
infinitive:  Tendentes  opSco  Pelion  iniiwmme  Olympo  (striving  to  place  etc.).  Wor. 
Caiin.  3,  4,  51. 

^ 45>l.  Subject-infinitives  (P.  I.,  §  70 ;  P.  II.,  p.  75)  may  be  in  the  pres- 
ent, or  perfect,  both  in  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

Rpjn  m    The  following  predicates  are  nsed  impersonally  with  subject-infinitives  :  1) 

Tin.  mi.ula   i ncli      n  '  «rancl  vidWir)  with  predicate-adjectives  or  pi>-dicate-noutis.    To 

?h^lH      rb  1  1  "  th^  dt  is  lawful,;  nefas  est  (n  isacrune);  lempus 

If  ^U  x\nT^^^^^^^^^  est\v  is  worth  while).    2)  The  copula  with  impersonal 

tst  (  I  IS  time),  ^V>ff./.V\'\, ;'*,;.  .->.  ...  ,1,..  following  impersona  verbs,  menlioned  P. 

r.}  t'fJa?  w'^^^^^^^^^  be  added:  oportet  (it  behooves)    o/>«.v  tst  (p  9.., /?. 

SlsJi)  whU,  in  this  instance,  Wome  themselves  impersonal. 

itL  90    Imix^r<*ot.al  predicates  are  ofren  accompanied  by  the  logical  subjects  of  they 
Hem.  VH  .  ^'"Py/'*'  "/'^^"'^        ,ake  the  trrammaiical  form  of  their  objects  (rmtii  licet, 

con(iJ/i(.  convHiif,  ecenil.  accidit,  vemt  m  vuntem,  lied,  placet,  dupUcet,  p  oa  a. 
domestic  examples).  Cic.Orat.7,22. 


108 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  "STllRBS. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


109 


Hem.  93.  If  the  copula  eftt  denotes  *  definition,'  it  may  take  alone: "nitli 
its  subject-intinitive  anotlier  intinitive  as  impersonal  predicate,  ns:  V'icere 
est  cofjitrire,  to  live  is  (means)  to  liiinlv.  Cic.  Fam.  0,  l.—ye.se'ire  quid,  uute- 
quam  natus  sis,  acciderit,  id  est  seiui)ei-  esse  pue rum.  lb.  Oiat.  o4,  120. 

Be?n.  98.  Subject-intinilives  may  be  emploN'ed  as  subjects  in  infinitive- 
clauses,  in  place  of  a  subject-accusative,  in  wiiicli  case  their  impersonal 
predicate  must,  of  course,  be  likewise  in  the  infinitive,  as:  Bene  sentive 
recftque  fiicere  puto  sntix  esse  ad  bene  vivendimi,  I  believe  that  meanini; 
well  and  acting  rightly  is  sufficient  for  a  happy  life.  Cic.  Fam.  0,1. 

1.  Grave  est  a  deteiioribns  honOre  anfe'iriA  Sen.  Prov.  3. —  9.  Afiserf/m  e.of  trturbdri'^ 
f<)rtQni5  omiiihuf»,  inineiius  e.*t  injuria.*  Acerhum  eM  al)  aliqiio  circuniret'iri*  acfr- 
biui  a  propinqiio.  Calamitdsuni^  ext  bonin  ererti,'  calaniitof-ittft  cum  dedecore.  Fu- 
pestum''  est.  a  forti  atqiie  honcsto  viro  jugulari.^  funef^this  ab  eo.  ciijus  vox  in  pra^- 
conio  q^a'^^tu'' proHtiiit.i"  Indiffniim  est  o,  \mT\  rinc'mnX  ^\\\\i»\uYK\  irHi'Ujriiua  ab  ink-- 
rlnrt'.  /.t/cfuosum^^  est  trci'li  nlteri'^  cum  bonis»,  lucfvosius  ininiTco.  Cic.  (^uinct.  .'^1.— 
3.  Illnrurn  calamitjltcm  auL'fre  nolo.  quUins  libt-rosii  conjufjrsqne"  unas  at)  iptTus 
petulantia»*  conseirdre  non  licitiim  est.  fie  Verr.  1,  .5—  4.  Fas  est  et  ab  ho?to  doceri. 
Ov.  Met,  4.  428.—  5.  Ni/l/i  cmtir/it  impflnei*  nofici.  Sen.  Con^'.  1.5.—  fi.  Onortet  te.  non 
deeo  quod  detractumi*  e^X  (pieri,  sod  de  co  irratias  fly^r^.  quod  collecisti.»^  Sen.  lb.  11. 
—  7.  Ab  LysOm*  Apollinis  Hicrnum"*  ahldtmn  (esue)  ccrte  non  oitortiiit.  Cic.  Verr. 
2,  4. 17.— 8.  Nihilne  tihi  venief  in  mentem  existimatiOni»»  tniv  con^/lere .?  Verr.  2,  3,  .57  — 
!♦.  Homines  sapi«'ntTs.2o  e.x  quiDus  rebus  maxime  respublica  labnrat,  eis  maxime  inedtri 
convefiit.  Cic.  Kosc.  Am.  .53.—  10.  Quern  non  pocniteat  hoc  pretiojestimasKC  virtfliem  ? 
Sen.  Prov.  3.—  11.  Non  intellifri>»  .««/i^'^>^^*' viri<  Unuhw^  <Iiri\cUse  (\\\i\m  hocpulcrnm  nit  ? 
Cic.  Phil.  2  4';.—  12.  I)e  quo  quid  sentiam  ni/iU  affinet  dicere.  Cic.  Div.  4,  7.-  13.  7<F- 
det  '}An\  amfire  eadcm  niillies.  Ter.  Pii.  3.  2,  2.—  14.  ^em\)er esse fencem.  et  fine  m()n»u 
animi  tmn.Are  vitain.  iqnordre  est  rerum  natfliw  alteram  partem.  Sen.  Prov,  4.— 
15.  Profecto  niliil  aliud  est  bene  et  beate  rirere  nisi^'  honeste  et  recte  rirere.  Cic. 
Part.  1,  4.—  1«.  (^lid  est  judicium  corrtnnitere,  ?i  hoc  uun  e^t,  testis»  auctoritate"  de- 
terrCre  ?  Ver.  1,  10. 

Hem.  94,  The  connection  of  !«nbject-infinitivo3  with  other  verbs  than  the  impcr-^onals 
mentioned  above,  i<  rare  and  uniisnal.  as:  InridTre  non  cadit  in  sapi^ntern,  Envyinj;  does 
not  enter  (the  mind)  of  tht;  wise.  Cic.  Tusc.  3.  10.—  IIo<  o)nnls  eadem  odisse.  e'odetn  rne- 
tuere  in  unvm  co^nit.  Hatiiifrand  feaiiuj;  the  saniethinirs  broujrht  all  these  men  to;:ether. 
Sail.  Jujr,  31.—  Lidici-'se  arfls.  emollit  mores.  Ov.  Pont.  11,  9,  58.  See  p.  623,  Obs,  7. 

Fern.  05.  rnipersonal  predicates  often  take  neuter  determinativeg,  or  peneral  iionns 
alon<;  with  determinatives  (as  ha'C  res.  hcfc  ratio),  to  introduce  the  subject-infinitive  by 
them  :  1.  Fuit  hoc  ouondam  projjrium^»  ponuli  Romjlni  lonL'e  t^i^on\nf>ell(^re.  Cic.  Fontej. 
12.—  2.  Semper  furc  ratio  accusandi  fuir  honestissima  (This  wa.8  aJfra>/s  the  most 
honorable  method  of  prosecuting  as  accuser)  pro  sociis  inimicitlas  sn^cipere  (/o  7;myttf 
enemies  in  hehalf  of  those  under  our  protection).  Cic.  Div.  in  Cu'C,  19.—  Z.  Quibusdani 
totum  //ocdisplicetphilosophSri  {to  occupy  am' s  self  with  philosophy).  Cic.  Fin  1.  1. 
ZW  From  such  constructions  arose  the  method  of  combininjr  neuter  form-adjectives 

in  the  sinirular  as  attributes  with  an  infinitive,  as  if  the  latter  were  a  neuter  noun: 

Me.  cum  hue  veni,  Aw  ipsum  nihil  of/ere  iMiictnt.  after  I  came  here,  thisvei-y  doing 

no"      ■■  'ds  been  my  delight.  Cic.  Or.  2,  G.     See  §  495. 

§  4*.*.*.  Sometimes  the  infinitive  is  used  with  the  force  of  a  noun  in  any 
of  its  functions,  as  transitive  object,  as  attribute,  as  completing  predicate*, 
and  even  after  prepositions.  Tliis  free  use  of  tlie  intinitive  occui-s  oftener 
in  poetry  and  late  prose  than  in  classical  Latinity,  where  it  is  confined  to 
a  few  exceptional  phrases  which  do  not  admit  of  being  generalized. 


1  anfelre.  to  giirpa«?i.—  -  to  be  stripped  of.—  »  supply,  ertvrhflri.—  <  to  be  circumvented, 
—  »  calamitous.—  «  to  be  turnefi  out  of.—  t  mournful.-  ♦•  to  be  slain.—  »;>r/fvY>//Jv.<  qui^stus, 
the  trade  of  a  public  crier  —  ^'^  pi-oxtdre.  tf)  stand  Ibrlh.—  "  jrrievou.s.—  »2  ^ifcy  must  al- 
ways be  used  for  the  Entrllsh  another,  if  the  action  can  only  be  conceived  to  be  between 
two  persons.—  i»  wife.—  >«  frivolity.—  >"  hnpune'\9.\\»iK\  herepre<;nantlv,  'without  paving 
the  penalty  for  it.'—  »•  taken  away.—  "  to  collect,  toeave.—  >»  statu»'".—  i»  character.— 
^^  SajnenHs  maybe  tak<*n  for  an"accusatlve  dependent  on  conrenit,  or  for  a  eubjcct- 
accusative.—  «»  but.—  '-"^  influence.—  23  peculiar  to,  a  peculiarity  of,  a  quality  of. 


1 


/ 


1,  JJeate  rirere  (i.e..  bedlam  vitam)  alii  in  alio,  Epictlrus  in  voluptate  ponit, —  2,  Mori 
(i.e  ,  mortem)  nemo  sat)iens  mi^e^um  duxit.  Cic.  Fam.  (i,  3.—  3.  Demis  nobis  nece>situ- 
dinem»  ilium  perseqvi  (of  pursuiuir).  Sail.  Juj;.  102. —  4.  lj)sum  illud  quod  vocatnr 
inoj'i  (I.e..,  mors)  breviits  es^t,  qiuim  iit^  scntlri  i)os.«it.  Sen.  Prov.  (i,—  5.  Deinde  alii 
quiestus'  instituuutur*  :  accipere^  a  civitatibus'  pecuniam  ;  pretio  certo  missos' 
facere  naiitas.  mis^Ornm  om-  e  stipendium  lucrdri  ;  reliquis  quod  dehgrei"  non  dare. 
Cic.  V«*rr.  2,  5,  24.—  (».  Adimam  cantdre  strictis  (I  shall  stop  the  strict  from  singing), 
llor.  Ep.  1.  19.  9.-7.  Aristo  et  Pyrrho  inter  optinie  valere  (i.e,^  optimarti  raletydinem) 
et  ^rawi^^ime  agro'dre  {i,e..graviisi7niim  morbum)  nihil  prorsus  ducebant  interesse^. 
Cic.  Fin,  2,  13.—  8.  Multum  iiitenst  inter  dare  et  accipere.  Sen.  Ben.  5,  2,—  9.  Nihil 
prmter  plordre^^.  Hor.  Sat.  2,  5,  69. 

EXERCISES. 

I>frETisoNAL  PassivI':s  (§  456-  §  460).  1.  The  very  air  of  the  place  is 
tainted"  in  which  t^acrificcH  are  offerni^^  to  pleasure, —  2.  Before  the  argu- 
ment of  tlie  defence  was  opened  [Translate  :  Before  speaking^'*  (impers.) 
had  Ijeen  commenced  (impers.)  bt/  the  d/fendant^*],  the  triaF^  was  adjourned^* 
to  {in)  the  following  day. —  3.  Let  us  proceed,'^  not  by  that  road  wiiere 
{qua)  people  are  in  the  habit  of  going,  but  [by  that]  where  they  ought^**  to 
(;o. —  4.  Often  those  are  envied  who  are  more  unliappy  tlian  [those]  who 
envy  tliem. —  o.  It  was  announced  to  Caesar  that  on  the  mountain  a  fight 
had  taken  place  {pugnare)  between  his  [troops]  and  a  cohort  of  tlie  cavalry 
of  ilwj  Gaids. —  6.  There  ican  a  lUKh^*  to  arms,  l)ut  a  doubt  arose"^^  whether 
it  was  preferable  to  marcli  immediately'**  against  tlie  enemy,  or  to  wait 
for'^''  tlie  reinforcements  of  the  other  states. 

PuKDiCATE-NoMiN.vriVE  (>^  461  -  §  463).  1.  Agathocles,  not  satisfied^^ 
with  having  suddenly-*  become  rich  [transl.  :  that  (quod)  Jie  had  suddenly 
become  rich]  piacii.sed"-^  piracy-*"'  against  his  country. —  2.  Caesar  wrote 
that  all  Ciaul  now"  seemed  qxiet-^  and  had  become  tributary'^^  to  the  Roman 
l)eople. —  3.  Dill  you  hear  that  our  friend  had  turned  admirer^'^  of  republi- 
c  in  institutions^'  'i —  4.  Vercingetorix  was  called  King  by  his  [followers], — 
o.  ]Many  would  rather  {raalle)  be  considered  bad  than  foolish. —  6.  Cicero 
wrote  to  Allicus  that  he  had  unanimously^'  be^n  elected  Consul. —  7.  7o  be 
called  {dicere)  a  victor  in  the  Olympic  games^^  was  the  higliest  praise 
amongst  the  Greeks. —  8.  Catiline,  after  Cicero  had  been  elected  Consul, 
resolved  to  destroy^*  the  constitution^*  by  force. 

PKKUKitTE-UEMTivE.  (i^  404  -  ^467).  1,  Yiiiathns  was  of  so  great 
bravery  and  integrity'-'*^  that  every  common"  soldier  seemed  richer  than 
{ubl.)  the  chief  colllmander^^ — 2.  He  complains^"  that  the  property*"  which 
belonged  {esse)  to  Boscius,  has  become  thine. —  3,  Be  not  disturbed*'  by  those 
[things]  which  it  is  not  in  our  jtoiccr*"^  to  avoid. —  4,  How  can  virtue  con- 
trol*^ pleasure  r*   For  to  follow  is  the  mark  of  one  that  obeys**,  and  to  cou- 

1  Necessitv.—  ^  literally  '  than  that.''  This  construction  must  be  recast  in  English  :  too 
Hhort  to  be  felt.—  ^  ways  of  making  tnoney.—  ■*  to  try,—  ^  this  infinitive  has  the  force  of 
a  noun  iif  apposition  to'qucentus,  '  that  of  accepting,'  etc. —  «communities.— ■?  factitive  pre- 


^*  evtrtere. —  ^s  respublica  et  leges. —  3*  coniim-ntia.—  ^^  grey:arius. —  ^»  imperator. — 
^"  queri.—  ■♦o  bona.—  ■"  i)eriurb5re. —  ^^  potcstas.  Translate  by  the  genitive.  To  what 
class  l)elongs  this  genitive  ?—  *^  regcrc,—  *♦  one  that  obeys  (parurc),  by  the  participle. 


110 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  VERBS. 


Ill 


trol  [is  that]  of  one  irho  commands.—  5.  The  other  part  of  my^speech 
will  be  very  brief,  and  will  contain  very  little  matter  for  dispute  .—  0. 
It  is  the  duty  of  a  good  judf/e  to  make  conelusionsMrom  the  smallest  cir- 
cumstanees*.—    7.  It  is  arrogant^  to   read"  one's  own  wntmgs   as  {pro) 

*    1  H 

Puedicate-Dative,  and  idioms  with  esse  (§  468  -  §  470).  1.  Do  you 
believe  that  Crassus  would  have  {plupeif.  suhj.)  spurned"  greater  nchcs, 
if  they  by  ehance  (/>>W<')  had  belonged  to  him?—  2.  Honest  j^overty  has 
ihyesse)  h;rotilpoicer''  ovQi''  insolent  wealth.— 3.  In  my  eamp  n(.  ^na/or  ^ 
txerhadii  place.—  4.  1  believe  that  nothing  else  can  be  of  [any]  hcp^ 
{abstract  dative)  to  we.—  5.  Our  arrival'^  gave  {esse)  nobody  [any  trouble 
or  expense",  either  (transl.  neither)  publicly  or  {nor)  j.^vaiely  .—  o. 
What  protection'''  have  you  been  to  our  Jteetf—  7.  There  ^rr/v;  mines*  in 
Attica  from  which  a  great  quantity'^'  of  silver  flowed"  into  the  Ireas- 
urv-^=«_  8  I  know  that  ^A^r^  ^//"tJ  a  great  many  (^  314)  who  belitte-  in 
all  ways^^  the  good  qiialitie-^-  of  o'hers.—  0.  There  wdl  be  always 
[those]  who  retuse  to  do  of  their  own  accord'^'  what***  the  laws  direct 

^^'simi>Le*  Object- Accusative  (^  471  -  ^  473).  1.  Who  will  mourn 
foi^''  the  doicnfali'''  and  destruction  of  a  thoroughly*'  corrupted  state  i— 
2  Phaeton,  because  he  had  asM  for'''  too  great  [things],  ..niserab  y  per- 
ished—  3  We,  on  our  part,  do  not  irishfor''  ill-begotten^**  ?fm///i  and 
iinri'ddeous"  poinr'^,  but  for  the  love''  and  praise  of  our  tcllow-citizens.-- 
4  Do  not  lose  couraiie  in  adversity^",  but  hope  for  better  [things].— o. 
Remember  that  I  speak  Spanish^',  [and]  not  lioman.—  0.  O,  thejallacious 
hope  and  fraiP"  fortune  of   men,  and  the  empty"    altercations     ot  ours! 

^^SiMPLE^DATiyE  (§  474  -  ^  477).  1.  To  obey  God,  is  freedom.-  2.  Epanii- 
nimdas  did  not  obey  that  imprudent  decree*'  of  the  people,  and  induced 
his  adleanues  to  ilo  the  same.—  3.  I  cannot  pardon  the  silence  ot  Dola- 
bclla  —  4.  No  wise  [man]  has  ever  trusted^^  a  traitor.—  ->.  ^  oiitf^.pts  ruled 
over  a  y^r^r^V/^v.iuslly""  praised  by  all  for  [its]  extraordinary  lerlility  .— 
6  A  republic  nmsl  and  will  be  siich^»  that  {ut)  an  enemv  can  "e'ther  be 
wantiu"-  to  the  wicked'\  nor  be  an  obstacle*^  to  the  good''.—  t.  lie  wdl  be 
convinced"'  of  {de)  what  thou  wilt  be  convinced.-  8.  Is  there  aif^t lung  else 
a^minsl^*  liasciiis,  but  that  {nisi  quod)  his  father's  i.roperty'  has  been 
sold^' ''—  0  I  otan  envy  the  mutt"''  if  1  reconsider'"  w  hat  1  have  spoken.— 
10.  How  can  a  man  i)i-e()ccupied^"  by  pleasure,  struggle*^  with  ^^/^^/;  and 
flanqer^-  H  A  tinu'^'  man  will  HA^Wy  resist  the  attacks  ot  those  tliat 
tempt«'  [him].—     12.  Our  soldiers  icill  refuse  obedience'*   to  those  com- 


1  PerbrSvi^^.-    ^  tran-l. :   idll  be,  of  no  great  dh^pute  (contentio\-    3  conjcctflra  - 

n'Stentia.-    "nran'l.  again.t.-    ^3  p,oditor.-     h  adjumen.um.-     «^  adv.ntu..- 
16  labor.-  1^  suniptus.-  i»  privatim.-  i"  i^{b.^tj:act  dative)]ni^^-idm^^^^^ 


20  nu-tailum.— 


40  iv.  rriii         41  h.-ii.i<  —42  fonieiiti  J  — "  scTtum.— «^  pcrsuadGiv.—  "  civdere.—  *«  juri'.— 
"'Ji'fmiuT-  ."'?Jniiita..-'"".   usmo,»:-  ". ..000,11.--"  to  >^,  Z:f''""  tX^'^M 
62  innort^iw  _    63  uerHuadOre  —    64  to  66  rtgrrt^/^«•^  (d)stare.—    «*»  bona.—         looesoia, 
veu  ""-  «^^' mutas^-^  -  rc^^^^  ^^  ocJpM-e.-  -  resistere.-  «^  constant.-  '^^  par- 

ticiple.—  «3  tentare.-  «*to  I'cfu^e  666(iitf/iC<!,  dicto  audientein  non  esse. 


I 


mands^  which  tend'  to  make  them  swerve  from  their  duty'.—  13.  Live 
for  others*  if  thou  meanest'  to  live  for  thy  oicn  interest.—  14.  I  judge  that 
our  armies  cannot  be  residedhy  the  enemy.—  15.  They  worked  [inii^erfect^ 
as  lon'^  as»  they  understood  that  they  were  sowing' and  investing  their 
libor  7n  their  interest  and  in  that  of  the  Roman  people.—  16.  Thou  hast 
raised"  thy  children  not  only  for  thyself,  but  also  for  thy  country.—  U. 
X<ibody  cTi-s  merely  to  his  [own]  disadcantage,  but  is  the  cause  and  author 
of  the  errors  (si no.)  of  others  (^^  357.  Rem.  6).  ,,,,,. 

SiMPi-E  Genitive  and  Abl.^tive  (§^  478.  479).  1.  What  gladder  day  of 
thy  whole  life  canst  thou  remember  {recorddri)  ?—  2.  I  wish  thou  m)uldst 
i<>\\\  Rem  02)  remember'"  the  Acilian  ?««?  of  thy  f\ither".—  3.  Do  not 
fopret'those  men  to  whom  our  republic  owes  all  its  glory.—  4.  I  remember 
weTl  (  i/robe)  the  teachers  who  instructed^'^  [us  in]  our  youth.—  o.  ^ot  even 
those  hesitated''  to  resist  the  attack  who  icere  without  a  Iwpe  of  victory.—  b. 
Alcibiades  because  he  had  not  practised"  faithfully  the  teaching f  of 
Socrates,  ik'came  unmanageable- and  reckless".-  7.  This  was  always 
done  as  long  as  thou  wast  in  the  habit  ot  using  our^.^wto/ic^.-  8- I  lave 
always  had  the  most  friendly  intercourse"^  icith  this  man.—  9.  [Those] 
wlio*<doi-y  in  vice,  and  praise  what  others  blush'-  at  [tran.sl  :  tho^je 
(thinr^s)  at  which,  etc.],  have  lost  the  only  good  [thing]  which  is  in 
evil  —  10  [Those]  that  abandon*'  principles  to  pleasure  are  destitute  of 
either;-''  tor  they  lose  their  virtue,  and,  for  the  r^'^t,"  do  not  have 
Die- sure     but    pleasure    has   them.—  11.  If  you  need  help,  look^»   first 

lu-  her'v'm  cin.iot  find  it  within  {in)  yourseltV-.  12.  What  (must)  we 
think^*  o'f  thy  innocence,  when  thou  hast  sold  {mdie.)  property  {bona) 
worth-  100,000  sesterces  for  10,000  V-  13.  The  treasury  ot  the  Athenians 
was  tilled  to  overtlowing'^«  icilh  the  contributions''  ot  their  allies.—  14 
Sicily  abounded  in  products"^  of  that  kind"  which  the  Roman  pe;)ple  could 
not  easily  dispense'"  icith.-  15.  Africa  overflowed^^  with  the  blood  of  the 
very  soldiers  by  whom  she  was  oppressed.       _      ,  .  ,  ..„  ,33 

ComVouxd    Oiuects  (^480-55  487).     1.  Can  highwaymen-    assert- 
that  they  have  uiveii  life  to  those /;v>/i  ichom  they  have  not  taken  (re/jier^) 

1  v_  J  It  can  hardly  be  believed  that  more  should  have  been^''  taken 
/.;>;«  these  men  than  they  have  earned-.-  3.  C.esar   7;..rcZ.  ;;.^   W.^/; 
chief  of  that  province  which,  of  all  others,  he  coveted'^  "/.^'^Vr  i 

Fidius  whom  C'ajsar  had  made  superintendent"^  of  the  supplies,^'  was  a  Ro- 
m  111  kni-iil  in  whose  integrity^"  all  placed  the  greatest  conhdence*'  -  5. 
D  no"hnagine-^  that  those  things  which  onlperve  tor  thy  pleasure-  m'. 
necessary**  to  thee.-  0.  This  event^'^  relieved^^  our  minds^^  trom  all  fear.- 

'  1  Tn«*i,.n  _  aid  a-iiare  ut  -  transl. :  that  they  :?\verve  (dejicere)  from  their  duty.— 

4  ,;/  r^?  hr.in  'uhi      M  lo^  are  here  considered  as  one  party,  ^o  thai  the  action 

if  ndy  be  wS  two;  ulTalin.  cannot  he  used     The  .n.gular  (ana  not  the  plural 


,    ffiif,, —  -^o    tran>*iaie  :       >aiut;u   v^^it^"""  w.  "-^'  •- 

cere. —  "*  res  liunieniarui. —       in^jn..^i"-.     ,    ,   _.  .,  ^„.,, .         45  rm 46  1  ht'rS.re  — 

J§  3i:i)  _   4i  fulgcrc.-    "  by  the  abstract  dative.—  *♦  opu?.-        re^.-       Jiotrare. 


*''  sing,  in  Latin. 


112 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  VERBS. 


7.  We  could  not  prevent  the  enemy  frojn,  ravages^  and  plinidoi^ —  8.  As 
soon  as'  I  heard*  of  this  disaster,  I  sent  a  body'  of  piclied'  soldiers  to 
Scipio's  help  {double  d/tiive).—  9.  The  ftinnen''  irere  ordered  to  furnish^ 
more  i^rain  than  tlay  had  raised".  —  10.  Do  3-011  not  see  of  what  sort 
(qnalLs)  is  a  virtue  trhich  in  in  need^"*  of  a  r/unrd? —  11.  Epamiuondas 
etfected"  by  his  eloquence  that  the  Lacedaemonians  were  dep?'iced"  of  the 
help  of  their  allies. —  12.  The  jud,i;es  condemned  Alcibiades  in  his  absence" 
for  sacrilt'ffc^*. —  13.  At  Thebes  Alcibiades  heard  that  he  wdn  condtmned 
to  death. —  14.  While  {oiui)  Ilamilear  waited'*  war  in  Sicily,  he  icas  eon- 
demntd  for  treanon^^  by  his  fellow-citizens. —  15.  Biutus  freed  the  repub- 
lic from  royal"  rule^^.—  IG.  Doest  thou  not  pity  those  whom,  by  thy 
cupidity,'^  thou  hast  stripped"-"  of  [their]  property? —  17.  I  confess  that 
/  icaa  not  a  little"^  (ishamed  of  my  rash  suspicion. —  18.  This  triumph 
honored  Ponipey  so  much"  as  (§  301)  nobody  before  hiui  was  yet  honored 
{affected)  within  the  memory  of  men. 

(Double  Accusativk.)  19.  By  these  means  {res)  Alcibiades  effected 
that  he  was  held  (habire)  dearest  by  his  fellow-citizens. —  20.  The  ancients 
{cetus)  called  {appelldre)  Spain  Jbtria  from  the  river  IbCrus,  anil  afterwards 
lli,spania  from  the  llispauic  sea". —  21.  What  will  you  do  with  a  man 
who  has  m'A(\Qli(/hf*  with  the  pray  ern"^  and  representaUons-S)f  his  very  best 
friends?  (^  35")). —  22.  Do  you  believe  any  shore  so  def^eriecf  that  {f/uo)  the 
fame  of  that  day  shouUP  not  have  arrived  ?'-" —  23.  We  call  {diarc)  that 
■man  happy  for  whom  there  is  no  i^ood  and  evil  except  a  ^ood  and  evil 
soul. —  24.  To  make  Virtue  the  handmaid^^  of  pleasure  is  the  mark  of 
[one]  who^*  conceives^"^  nothing  .i^reat  in  hismiiul. —  25.  All  votes  having 
been^^  counted,  the  delegate's  {le;/dtuf<)  proclaimed  Abraham  Li/icoln  Presi- 
dent^* of  the  Republic—  20.  I  never  wished  {edlc)  to  conceal  this  disaster 
from  you.  [J ramform  the  object-injiiiitive  *"  cone etd'  with  its  objects  into  a 
passive  construction,  afOr  having  translated  it  actively.] —  27.  Do  not  ask 
me  for  such  a  dereliction'^^  oi'  iiU  principles  which  I  foruu'rly  j^rofessed. 
—  28.  Do  not  ask  of  me  iho.se  [questions]  which  I  am  neitlier  able  nor 
willing  to  answer. —  29.  We  teach  our  .scholars  Latin  and  Greek. —  30. 
We  teach  our  scholars  the  Latin  and  Greak  It ingu ages  (g  119,  Item.  5). 
[Traniform  the  last  two  sentences  into  pas.sive  constructions  or  their  equiva- 
lents., after  having  trand<ited  them  actively.] 

Inp^initive  (i^  488-  ^  495).  ['J'ranslate  the  sentences  JVos.  1-10  into  Latin 
with  personal  constructions  Jf  an  impersonal  oiif'.  is  not  afniissible  ;  and  tcith 
both  personal  and  impersonal  const ructitjns  if  both  are  admissible.]  1.  It  seems 
that  thou  art  experienced"  above  (J^  43«)  the  others  in  this  matter  {res}.— 
2.  It  seems  that  Ciceiv  was  not  vtry  modest. —  3.  It  is  said  (dicere)  that 
both  Pomponius  and  his  son  have  been  killed  by  robbers. —  4.  It  is  said  (ferre) 
that  the  goddess  Egeria  was  king  Numa's  wife. —  5.  It  is  reported  {tradere) 
that  the  gens  Julia  derived"  its'  origin  from  Julus,  sou  of  ^EuOas.^'' —  6. 


1  Populatio.—  2  raplna'.—  ^  aii  soon  os,  ubi.—  *  ccrtiOrem  fieri,  p.  76.—  ^  maniis.— 
«  deli-ctus.—  7  cultor.—  »  hy  impe rare. —  »  exarare.—  i"  opus.—  "  perliceic—  '"^  pri- 
vtire.—   13  transl.  :  the  al>sent  Aici Diaries.-  1*  sacrilei^iiun.—  ^*  gt-rere.—  1«  proditio, 

17  reiriiis. —   1«  doiuin5iii-. —  ^*  avaritia. —  ^'>  spt)liilre.—  ->  not  a  little.,  at  quantum. 

—   2-  trausi.  :  '  aflVctod'  uijficere)  I'ompey  with  so  ^rn-at  honor.—   *■"    (he  ^jxini-^h  .vta, 
llispjluinn  (,sc.  niaiv).-  -*  ll•an^l.  :   "held  {(luccrt)  li;;lit.'—  "  preces.—  •■»«  adniouitio — 
2^  (ie»t;rtus.~  -'^  subjunctive  of  the  main  verb.—  ->•  perva;lere.—  3»  uncilla.—  3i  paiti- 
ejplt,._  Si  concipere.—   '^  ablat.   abs.—    a*  princeps.—   '*  dcsertio.—    =»<»  expcruis.- 
3'  ducere.—  3«  Gen.  iEnCie  (Greek  declension;. 


* 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   VERBS. 


113 


0  ft  is  supposed  {py tare)  that  Bamnlus  never  existed^  —  7.  It  is  believed 
{ivistimdre)  that  Cmar  took  part'-'  in  the  Catilinariau='  conspirncy.—  8. 
//  w  announced  that  Pompejus  is  absent  from  home.—  9.  It  is  vnderstood 
{intelligere)  that  Cicero  cannot  have  written*  this  oration.—  10.  /  am  com- 
manded {imj^rare)  to  be  present  at  the  games. 

11.  Epaminondas  allowed  his  colleagues  to  place""  the  whole  responsibUity 
upon  himself.—  12.  Epaminondas  did  not  refuse'  to  svffer^  the  penalty  of 
the  law.—  13.  The  first  settlers"  of  Italy  were  the  Aborigines  whose  king 
Saturnus  is  reported  to  have  been  of  so  great  justice  that  not  only  had  there 
been  no  slaves'"  under  him,  but  [that]  everything  had  been  common  and 
undivided"  tor  all.—  14.  If  Antonius  were  present,  he  wouUr-,  perhaps, 
teach  me  or  nither  you,  O  conscript"  fathers,  to  defend  Caesar's  acts".—  15. 
Diomedon  asked"' Epaminondas''  to  allow  him{utsibi  liceret)  to  leave"  ihe 
citv  in  safety  {safeh/},  nnd  take  out"*  all  his  [property].—  IG.  It  will  not 
behoove  you  to  be  an'r/ry'''  with  me  for""  speaking  in  behalf  of  the  republic. 
—  17  i)em()sthcnes  said  that  it  is  often  more  difficult  to  keep"^^  property 
{bona)  than  to  acquire-'  [it].  —  18.  7b  live  without  literature  is  to  be  buried 
alire'^^  —  19.  Do  vou  think  {putdn^  [it]  more  ulorious  to  be  feared  by  one's 
[own]  citizens,  than  to  be  praised  [by  them]?—  20.  The  true  glory  is,  to 
be  equal'*  to  all  others"  in  liberty,  [but  to  be  their]  better'"'  in  regard  to 
{by)  dignity.-  21.  I  believe  that  every  one  ought  {oportet)  to  know  with 
whaf-'lnsolence  that  man  has  plundered'^''  the  public  property.—  22.  Do 
vou  think  that  j^^^/^vn/iZ/'V  jn^^'f'i'"'!  duties'"  is  a  heavy  and  intolerable 
burden  V—  23.  1  believe  i^n-6<7/v/-)  WvAi  p)rizes'' amX  crowns  owghi  {oportet) 
to  be  awarded''^  to  these  men. 


CIIAPTEll  THIRD. 

COXSTRUCTIOX  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
§  406,  Adjectives,  botli  attributive  and  predicative,  may 
have  eillier  completing  or  incidental  objects  like  the  verb,  as  : 
conscius  sceleris,  privy  to  a  crime  (completing  object) ;  ferox 
in  hdlo,  eoiiiis  et  henlf/nus  in  /:>ac^,  savage  in  war,  kind  and 
benignant  in  peace  (incidental  objects). 

Jiem.  90.  In  reixard  to  meaning  and  construction,  adjectives  are  analo- 
gous to,  althouu-h  not  alwavs  ideutical  with,  verbs,  both  denoting  either 
states  or  actions.     Adjectives  denoting  a  state  correspond  to  the  neuter 

1  esse.—  ^  to  take  part  in  8ometfnna,wr\\c\x>em  esse  alicujiis  rei.--  »  Catilinarius.— 
*  scrit)ere  iu»ii  p«»tiiisse,  not  scripsissc  uon  posse.  Si;e  §  4"^'^-—  '  transferre.—  culpa.— 
'  r-cu>are.—  "  sul)Iie.—  »  cultor.—  i»  transl. :  that  neitlier  any  oue  had  senecl  unaer 
hiuj.—  »»  inaivlsus.—  »2  imperf.  sul)j.  of  the  main  verb.-  ^^  Conscnptus.—  i*  actum. 
—  16  rojrare.—  1«  ace.  Einninnondam  (Greek  declens.).—  i7  exire.  —  »»  eflerre.— 
la  irasei.—  -»  translate  either  according'  to  §  3<).}.  Rem.  29,  or  (more  elegantlv) :  angry 
\viih  me,  spealcin-  tpartic.  oi  dicert)  fertile  republic'  §394.-  21  tuCri  —  22  parSre  7- 
"  nr<^S  aecessoiv  predicate.  -  «♦  par.  -  "  transl. :  '  to //i<? others.'  -  2«  princep_8  (in 
the  positive).-  '^  quaiitus.—  28  f»i)oliare.—  2»  to  perform  judicial  duties;  ^«atcare.— 
•"  iuiolerabilis.—  '>  paliua.—  ^2  tribuere. 


lU 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  ADJECTIYES. 


verbs  or  to  passives,  as :  raliduK,  strong  =  vnlere,  to  be  stron.2: :  htrndm  = 
timere;  per.ynmus  =  quod  peri<picitur.  The  trunsilive  and  intransitive 
verbs  correspond  to  analoij:()Us  adjectives,  as  cnpere,  to  desire  =  cuptdus, 
desirous;  fiduH  =  fdi're;  plains  =  implere;  iwxim  r=z  nodve.  1  he  latter 
chiss  of  adjectives  admits  completing  object^  like  corresiiondni!;  verbs. 

Pern  07  PAnTiciPLEs,  rcprcsentiiii;  the  action  of  the  verb  either  in  the  form  of  nn 
atnfbute,  or^of  an  acceV.ory  predicate  (p.  245;  p.  2-lfi,  i?.  18).  have  the  nature  ..f  both 
adjeclives  and  verl)?,  beins  dechned  like  the  former,  and  construed  hke  the  hitter,  lint 
pome  Darticiplesi,  from  their  frequent  attributive  use,  have  passed  over  into  mere  adj.-c- 
tives  and  are  construed  like  these  (§49«M,  hut  /;j(/y  also  retain  the  conMrnction  of  the 
conespo.idin-'  verb,  if  they  are  used  in  a  meanm-,'  fully  correppondiUL'  to  that  of  the  verb, 
as:  A/tiuns  fJi,  fond  of  thee;  but  atna/is  te,  loving  thee;  laborts  patiens,  hard-workuii; ; 
hwi  kifjort in  patieng,  sutlVriu.:;  hardships. 

Kevi  9S  A nvEKBS,  generally,  cannot  take  objects»,  except  iirthe  followinir  instances: 
nSome  adverbs  formed  from  pautioii-lks  (conceidenter,  cougrntuter,  eonsfanftr)  may 
take  the  same  o])iects  as  the  verb-  from  which  they  are  derived:  toureiaenter  (in  har- 
mouy  with)  natnm  vivere.  Cic.  OtV.  3,  v;i.-CongnifnU^r  natflne  rir^re.  Ih.  Hn.  3  ..-- 
mn  con.tanter  dicere  {cwmstently  uUh  one\^  xelj }  ,  Ih.  1  use.  o,  <X  Mini  ariy :  //.fr  to^l^rne 
ol»^eQ>ie„hr  facta:  This  was  done  in  obedience  to  bis  colleague.  Liv.  41. 10.-  2)  Uaiely  the 
adv.  rbs  formed  from  adjectives  of  dimension  take  the  same  objects  as  their  adj-crives 
(/m  imiesal/e^;  Pee  Ex. 4.  7.  p.  117.  S(»:  Locum  delCi^it  ab  Ayarico  loixje  (at  a  distance 
of)  miUia  iKi^suum  sed^rim.  Cies.  B.  G.  7.  16.-  3)  liarely  adverbs  are  con>trued  with 
oEiuNDiAL  DATIVES  (p.  1(«  foil.):  Op/fOffHiie  v€nU  irrifdndts  animi».  Liv.  M.  o.—  A)  Some 
adverbs  (ssmi-pukpositions)  are  occasionally  treated  like  i)repositlons,  takini:  eilher  the 
accut»ative  or  ablative,  accordiuf?  to  the  analosjy  of  kindred  prepositions.  Here  beloni: 
d(i?n  (m-rttly,  with  abl.  or  acc),  palam  {in  f<i(/ht  oj\  with  aijl.).  .v^m;//  (to«,'eiher  with) 
iatus  (within),  «"'7^  (p.  13),  procul,  and  the  comparative  and  siii)'rlative  inopms  and 
vrvHme.  Also  prope  and  coriwi  Juay  be  reckoned  here.  Kx.:  dam  rolnx,  wiih..u  vonr 
Inowledse  (Ca's.  B.  C.  '2,  32) ;  dam  pafre  (Plant.  True.  2.  1,  37» ;  ctam  mafnm  (i.uit. 
Mil  2  1  34)  —I'ahim  populo  {Liv Ay,  U). —Si mul  hi»  {^^famal  cuni  /n<,  llor.  bat.  1,  U».  N.i; 
Mar/ne/iha.n  nmid  (Tac.  A.  4,  5.");  so  lb.  3.  (i4;  C,  \\).-Intus  cdia  (Liv  27,  11,  the  readint,' 
heiii"  doul)tful;  so  Lucr.  ♦;,  1 1  ()!♦).— /'/w«/,  i:enerally.  take-*  ab  with  abl.  (p  21)  fu  1., 
Obs  7)-  but  sometimes  a  mere  ablative:  JIaud  procid  tiedifion^,  Liv.  »>.  lb:  j/roou  d'lhio 
i^Hiie  d'dAo).  (^linr.  1..5.  ll.-T'/o/w'/.s-and  proxinie  take  acc.  or  abl  (§4'.I.S^):  hxercitmn 
habC'ie  quam  proxime  /io.<fem,  Cic.  Alt.  «i,  'y,  3;  ;>/o;uw  nrbem,  lb.  1  Inl.  ..«>.—  o)  the 
adverb  7rqo  (proi»ab!y  from  e  and  an  obsolete  noun  helon,^'ln^' to  the  root  r^fj  =e  rtijo, 
from  thedirectitm  of),  in  anteclassical  and  publicistic  laii-:uair<-,  is  used  in  the  meaii- 
ini:  'on  account  of\  as:  Kj>i.<  rei  ergo,  Cato  It.  K.  139;  formuU„i.-<  en/o  Lucr.  1.  1-4..: 
fanerl^  ergo  (quoted  by  Cic.  Leg.  2,  2,-i,  from  the  XII.  Tab.);  donani  ttrtufis  ergo  (quoted 
\yy  Livy  2.-i,  12,  from  an  old  S.  C);  ejus  legis  ergo  (quoted  from  a  contemporary  law  by 
Cic.  Atr.3,  2.3, -2). 

Rem.  99.  Adjectives  are  rarely  construed  with  advekbs.  except  pnrticipleft.  y,nt  any 
adjective  may  bi;  qiialitled  bv  au  adverb  of  intensitv  d'.  I..ij313;  I  .  U.,  \>.'Zi)\.J£.  dijK 
or  bv  adverbs'  virtually  intensive  {ri'liode  inco/l■^<(all.'^,  =  :u\o.^J  incoiistans  ut  rKlicniu-  Mt, 
Cic.  K.  Com.  «).  or  by  adverbs  used  with  the  force  of  emphatic  particles:  Vtre  lioneMuin, 
truly  v!i'ii,,M<.  Cic.  Otl".  3,  4,  17. 

§  411  #  .  The  completing  objects  of  adjectives  are  1)  Substan- 
tives (nouns  or  pronouns)  in  the  Accusative,  Genitive,  Dative,  or 
Ablative  ;  2)  some  Prepositional  Objects  (see  Chapter  T.) ; 
a)  Infinitives  (rarely  and  exceptionally)  ;  4)  the  Second  Su- 
pine ;  5)  sometimes  Gerunds  and  Gerundive  ])])rases  (p.  101). 

Tfem  100  The  adjectives  ijoverninor  the  dative  and  ahlative  jrenerally  rorre«pond  to 
thf  VERBS  renuiriTi"  the  same  case.  Thus  the  reason  that  ,//,7;.. 2.»vern-  the  '^ame  is  the 
same  a^  tlie  r-ain  whv  vrod>s.^e  require-  the  dative:  atul  /,7>.r  is  ronstrued  with  the  ab- 
ative  ca'e  from  no  othef  reason  tha'n  m.rare.  This  is  difT-rent  with  'J''^ '''';;-;:  l^^'^,;;: 
and  adiective- correspondiuL'  to  transitive  verbs  reirularly  require  their  obied  in  the 
gfntt  VP    See  ^  499.     Th»'  accn-ativc  case  of  the  objects  of  adjectives  is  confined  to  a 

'    few-  instances  iii  which  the  accusatives  of  space  and  time  are  applied  to  dimensions 

i     and  a^je. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


115 


§  40S.  The  following  adjectives  require  objects  in  the  ac- 
cusative case :  1)  The  adjectives  longm  iXou^s)^  [^^^^^  (broad, 
wide),  altus  (lii-h  or  deep),  and  crassus  (thick),  requiring  the 
numeral  units  of  the  measure  whose  dimensions  or  directions 
they  define,  to  be  either  in  the  accusative  or  genitive  ;  2) 
the  participial  adjective  natiis,  in  the  meaning '  old;  requiring  the 
measure-units  of*  life  (amius,  me?isis,  dies)  to  be  in  the  accusa- 
tive, as  :  decern  annos  natus,  ten  years  old;  3)  the  comparative 
and  superlative  adjectives  and  adverbs  formed  from  i^ro^^e  {pro- 
jnor—propius,  nearer;  proximus—proxiwe,  next),  which  have 
their  objects  either  in  the  accusative,  or  dative,  or  are  construed 
with  the  preposition  ab. 

Jiem.  101.  The  units  of  measure  used  by  the  Romans  w-ere  1)  f  J;,^^«^^f  ^J/J^i^llf-df^^it* 
one  eidith  to  one  tifteenih).  and  in  music  modulus  denotes   the  measure    or  oar. 

wmmmmmmM 

.^truciion),  or  they  are  placed  m  ^''^.  ^bi.at  \b.    in  cu^^^^^^  (rarely  in  the  accusa- 

5?:^""  columna  .W,j./i  M^^>^ /^^^^^i^t:^}^  !i?  ^::^^^^^^^:^  J/mJSul^: 


! 


vigiuti  U.dum  -^^-^^-<^f;!:':^^:J^^^  '^^^"^^^^* 

;;:^:S  S;;.^;^   e"^ wUh'i^  ml" u;^e;l^;i^with\./ )^^       mats  a^  the  same).^s  : 

!/;./'"«  UigintaWibus  ad  quadraginta  lata,  a.  house  between  thiit>  and  fortj   fcU 

^'Pem    103    The  expressions  of  numeral  measure  "^^y  be  connected  in  two  ways^^^^^^ 
coM;:;uA'T.\'ET\l,w\,hthecou.p:u-ativeofuMrrATi^^^^^^ 

is  -reater  orsmaller than  a  certain  number  (^  3i2).  or  '^^^^^^'"^'fv,"'^  "/  ?  ^ 

L"m  KxcK<s  of  one  measure  over  anotlier  (ablative  ot  ditTerence,  §  311). 
^^.."lif  ihe'lS-mer  ease  three  ditTe.ent  co-tructions  -^^ ^^^^,JJ^^^ 
Btruction  with  jilus  or  7ninus  according  to  §  312,  Rem.  14.    it.  imscabe 


IIG 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


nre  koon«^  the  same  con?tniction  which  it  would  have  without  plu.<i  or  niinus,  as  :  ^des 
".fph^i^a    amMrV'inta  ;m-./..  (;).</./;./,  ;>ff?»-*'/.s)  lata  (or  latit.uhnc).  (he  t>mpleismore 

IWdtho-^^^^^^^^  l^7nore  than  mrlyfeet.  2)  The  comparative  a.lvcrbs  plxs.v  vunm 

LnV    c^d  ..-.    i   t  o  th.  CO.  adjVctivc-s  maj«;-or;;u.ar  attarinn-  them  as  a  tr  - 

!^ m.i  oVlie  n.  un<  of  dinionsion.  and  kct-pin-  the  construction  of  the  nnmencal  ni.-a-ure, 
ai  •  i  i  n  i  ado  'St  uiai<»r  (minor)  [qn.nn]  tri-rii.ta  j^dum  ( rare  y  pedf>>  or  ped»bu^). 
^rT^  "ct  v^^^^^^^^^^^^  m«y  be  uVenuki,  with  the  co.npa.ativc-s  ;,/*.. and  minus 

into  coMiu'ATiv  ADJECTIVES  (iustcad  ol  plux  longm,  etc.) :  lomjior,  altor,  labor,  cms- 
i  o  .,    \Vi  it  ;,^r.  A^^^  fonrp,,.  lafus/nud  al'u.  without  chani^e  ;  instead  oi  minus 

?mV;;/\V^av  ^  ovqracillor.    The  numeral   mea.t.re  w.th  these  compamtives  is 

S'Sh  pS-1  in  he  ABLATIVE  or  genitive:  .E.hs  hitiores  sunt,  r^v^/./a  p>^dihis 
Sr%S/m  (hardly  ever  latiOres  tnrjinta  pedts).  Columua  cras.ior  (ijraeihor,  tenuior)  est 
tii'dnia  ^/!r/i/i.«  or  (/i7i/'(5/"'^/n  (hardly  ever  dJ^i/O'*''^-  ,    .  ,.  ., 

B  In  he  ease  of  a  d.tiuite  excess,  the  forms  of  the  companitive  are  the  same 
a*  in  he  f  rnu-r  case  and  the  excess  of  measure  is  always  expre^srd  by  the  ablatun.  of 
difrerincJrihi  column.^  qnarfa  part.'  ,q,u»tuor  </^7'7ls)  .enu.Or..s  sunt  quam  i.ta?, 
the^e  columns  are  thinner  by  onefomtk  (four  di-its  thinner)  than  tho.<e. 

Rem    1(14    SorAUE  mea-ure  has  the  game  words  for  units  a?  lineal  measure.   To  pive 
to  these  w.ms  Uie  m.anin- ot- Kiuan-  mea-.ire,  eith-r  the  se.ntive  are.v.  (of  surface) 
?addei  or  t   e  particij.ial  a.fj.ctivi.s  fpmdraln.  or  wulliplicnh.s.n^-.^^un'  square  feet 
r^T'arllloren^         jnadnVi  mnltip/ira/h  j^de^  norem.    The-  Kn-lish  •  square    a^er 
mm-Al'ise  ti.erlilanviseexp  by  the  additi.m  of  «mMif  the  connection  shows 

that  no  iuare  measure  cm  be  u>eani),  or  by  various  ei-cumiocutions  as:  a  s,>ot 
JK/J^/^X/v  locus  trin.n  are^t  i)edum.  «/•  locus  (,uadril'us  irium  pedum  ufrCpte 
liefe-^  Vitn  o^  trTs  ,,edes  Ioultus  et  tant.indem  latus  (V itruv.).  Cubic  "'easnre  is 
expressed  by  the  addition  of  qaouaorer^vs :  saxum  trium  pedum  quoquoversus,  a  block 

^'^/J^yrior-nKM  e'ndar' wa^^  of  expressing  fractions  is  by  circumlocution  with  par^  aud 
an  ordiual  nun  eral  (§ -2^).  V.ut  tho^e  nactb.ns  that  may  be  re.luced  to  a  lorm  with  the 
deiumSo!   l-^m^^^^^^  «li«-  ^•^'^'-  <»f  absolute  or  abstract  fractious)  ex- 

pressed by  the  parts  of  the  Roman  .l.s'.     These  arc  : 

_L-  =  uncia  (expressed  hv  the  symbol  F).  '.,  =  scptunx  (FS). 

?-  (L^  =  sextans  {V.  with  a  line  over  it).  -,«*,-  (i)  -  bes  (FZ  with  a  line  over  it). 

y.    n  =  quadrans  (Z).  -,^,  {^)  =  ^^o'^^ins  (SZ). 

?i.    L    =  triens  (FZ).  j^-  (^)  =  Sextans  or  decunx  (of  doubt. 

y.  =  quincunx  (of  doubtful  notation).  ful  notatnm). 

?^4  (I)  =  semis  (S).  ii  =  tleunx  (of  doubtful  notation). 

These 'expressions  are    applied    to  numeral  measure  only  when  the  m*^«;;".'-^/""i;,J,^ 
u;^erstoo5  as  S.ca  in.  tamla^  non  erasure.  Mante,  cut  '^^^ '^^^^^^^^'^l^^l 
five-sixths   (Of  a  di<'it)       If  the    measure-uint  is  mentioned,  hactions  (annot    n»    (  x 
nres^  ed  Iv  the- »  te  n  s   exc-pt  one  half  (semis.  O.  semissis).     Stmi^  is  generally  used  by 
£'>S;l.ai^on:  dnM.p!n^  i"c----'<'i"^-vh..n.  the  CO 

auino'ie  mde.<  semi<  {ov  nwmaxu^  pedes  et  semtssem),  five  leet  and  a  hall  Ion ^^.  iii.oi 
?cM  n  lirde  to  of  km-  n  i  n  eials  it  ii  often  comp<.uud.'d  witli  the  measure-umts  in  the  lorm 
,  rll"  atJHbutfvJalljective  dUnvimtn.  lu/vin.  the  -J"- --?,"' "gitf(,rSt>n;i:;u 
or  I)  -s  diinidiiltus).  Ttie  fraction  \}4  \^  frecpiently  expressed  by  sesqm  in  C''i^P'^^';|  '" 
with  the  measure-units  ysesquum,  one  foot  and  a  half;   sesqmpeddhs,  one  and  a  half 

^""Vm^^m  The  adjectives  mentioned  above  arc  the  onlr  ones  which  are  used  in  con- 
neSon  ili/h  nSm^rill  expressions  as  ol>j.;cts.  ^»' ^En.lish  expressums^^.^^a  m^ 
tain  -s-'/w.  a  thousand  men  strong,  cannot  be  rendered  into  Latin  by  means  of  artjcctiNts. 

^'^^..^m." Poets,  imitntin,'  a  Creek  idiom,  frequently  use  adjcctivos  «"<;.Pf;^;5^-f,  n;'[»!; 
ciple.  with  objects  in  the  accusative.  assiLMV..f,^t<.  such  accusatives  tin^^^^ 
al  lative,  as  celeri^edes  (m<X.  of  pHldj  us),  quick  m  re-ard  to  the  feet  ^'I'^'h,*^*  "'  j  ..'v  th  s 
color,m  (White  of  color)  ;  tahfactu.<  animum  (weanedjn  soul  ,  ^»^.  t^"  1"  j,''  .  ^/;;;^ 
con>truction  is  found  in  re-ard  to  the  past  participle  vulutus :  Longam  indatoi  itsiem. 
T  ;,.    o*    'Yl 

\.  In  hac  basilica^  mediaua^  testfldo»  inter  cohimnas  ^^l^^O^)^'!''  ^J^,'!fl  ^'f !f 
LX. ;  porticus    inter    parietes  et  cohimnas   est   lata   ped^s  viginti.    \itruv.5,   i.- 

1  a  basilica,  a  public  buildin-  of  peculiar  architecture.-  ^  inner.-  »  arched  ceiling. 


CONSTRUCTION   OP  ADJECTIVES. 


117 


2.  Columnjehabcnt  post  se  parastaticasi  alta.'^  pede.'^  v\s\rMl  '«^^'^^^'^f  f'fl'J^f'iflf  ^^^^ 
ned^m  unum  semis:  supraque  eas  sunt  alia3  parastaticie  />c^i«m  decern  et  octo,  latx 
&Z-^V%,7ped:m.  Vii%v.  Ib.-3.  Hoc  instrumentumhabcat^msupenore  parte 
eanaiem*  long  um  pedes  quinque.  latvm  digit  ^im    alt  urn  '.'^'^^Vl^^^^^^l^"":.^^ 
4   Cauinestris»  locus  alte  duai  pedes  ct  semissem  infodiatur».  ^olum.  d,  16.—  &.  unum 
taterum'  genus  e.t  longum  sesquipede,  latum  pede  Vitr.  2.  8  -   6-  Hoc  genus  laterum 
quod  est  quoquoversys  qvinqrie  palnwrrnn,  pentaduron«  dicitur    A  nr.  lb.  -  «.  1^1"';^ 
Jit  per  ramOruniMiodc.s'o  ea  pars  abietisn  qme  a/^e  circi.er  i;.^..r^^^^^^^^ 
Viir   2  ».-     8.  Majorem    turrim  ait  fieri    oporf5re  aitam    cnbitorum  CXX     latam 
cubiorum  vigin.i  trium.    Vitr.  10,  i:^.-    9.  Supra  epistyliumia   sunt  tnglyphii*  a   J 
vZsox  dimldidfi  moduli,  lati  in  iumX^^^  nnVcs  mod^iii   -    10    bupra  P^^^«.i«  erant 
traN>s>7  cramj;  semissem  ct  quartam  pedis  ;wW^m.  \  i  r.  in,  15.-    11   Hocinterval- 
lum's  sit»»  \rh\m  cf>lumndrum  crassitudine  ;  ipsSrum  columnilium  a/^t/wrfo  sit  modu- 
r mm  «Veto  eVdijnidi^r  moduli  jKirti.^'.  Vitr.  3.  :i.-   12.  (^uje  columua  ab  in-inta  pedi- 
flvlndj^^^^^^^  alia  erit.  (ejus)  ima^o  cras^itQdo  divrdatur  in  parti-  septem  et  di- 

mil  anrVitr    3  4  -  (Jradns-i  ^pectaculnmm^-'  ubi  sub^ellia^S  componantur^*  ne 

/  )  "aV/^•  s  lit  Irdminedt^K  ue  plus  pede  et  digitis  sex  ;  latifudines  eOriim  ne^plus  pedes 
Z^nis  ^m  ui'^e,ies  duo  i<.nstituantur.-  lb.  5,  «.-  14.  Ejus  pulpit^«  altdlKW  >M  ne 
Jus  ;/2.;/' quinque.^  lb.-  1.^.  Cra-situdines  eorum  g-aduum  ita  fimantur  ut  neque 
a'aJore.'<^^  de.rfanfe.  nvqxxo  ton uidre-^''*'  dodranfe  >^mt  vyUociiXiXi-'^  \itr  3  4.-  1^..  Mi- 
pra  i  i  pluieum'o  c<.lumme  qnartn  parte  mindreaJtifudine  sint  quarn  inforiores.  \  itr.  5, 
T-i  IT  lUilnli.imSi  latitudines  .lebenl  esse  nee  minares pedum  demon,  nee  majores  qum- 
ihnum  ut  sin-aila  ju-a  (bourn)  ne  minus  occupent  pedes  septenos.  \  itr.  b,  b.--  18.  (c^ua- 

rat   s'l  CM  i  qi  i  era  /o  /./7/, ,( Infr's pedes  deno.<,  etlicit  are<T  pedes  centum.  \  itr.  9,  prief. 

_  li    ii  s  n*.n       quadraia  paribu./lateribu>3-'   describuutur.  quod  ertt  jyedum  trium 

latus  am "hi^ehtV(/'*^J/^/«,'  '^^nod  erit  quatu<.r.  sedecim  :  quod  quinque  erit   vi- 

i\mi   Ol      V ir    ib--  20.  impouito   trahem  latain    i)edes  duo     crass:im  pedera 

uunTn-m  pedes  Vri.it.ta  septem.  fato  K.  R.  18.-   21.  Alcibiades  «««o..  circiter 

a   nennT    m,/.    diem  obiit  siiprfn.um".  Nep  Ale.  10.-  22.  Duodequadra-inta  an.ios 

vmn^^^  luit  I)lonysius,quun'i  quinque  et  vi.Mnti  a«;|0.  7|a  ;j.^  domi- 

natum3^ocx-ui>avisse!3*.  Cic.  Tusc.  5.  20.-  2;i.  LMui  proximi  I  hj^nwn  \x\co\nm^\  €^R9. 

\        1   '■4-24   In  \frica  proximi  ILspaniam  Mauri  sunt.  Suli.  Jug.  49  1.-  2,..  Cum 

um::nta  y;;v.rr,/;.  innem^^  s1abulantur3^  horridaS^  tiunt.  Vitr  6  6.-  20.  ^':|-YmS 
Veniii<'etori".m  ca-tra  mov  sse  propiu.<  Avartcum.    Lies.  B.  U.  •,  18.—   -£7.  Anamtio 
mV'  i-  (7  lam  :.v  ritia  animos  huminum  exercCbat,  quod  tamcn  vitium  propius  virtutem 

■ri?"4  irat  1  1  -  28  Exi-timabant  illi.  sua  sibi  periciila  proptora  esse,  quam 
mea  Cic.'  Sext.  Is]--'  20.  C;esiir  quam  proxime  potest  liosiium  castris  castra  com- 
mfliiit^'.  Cies.  k  C.  1,  72. 

§  499.  The  following  adjectives  govern  the  Genitive  :  1)  the 
(present )  rAiiTiciPiAL  Adjectives  derived  from  transitive  verbs, 
if  used  in  the  meaning  of  personal  qualities  corresponding  to 
the  verbal  idea,  as  lUlir/eus,  careful  of;  negligens,  neglectful  of; 
2)  adjectives  expressing  desiiie  and  striving;  control,  knowl- 
edge, and  capacity.  •,•      i   i     „ 

Rem    108   To  the  participial  adjectives  vrovernin.i?  the  genitive  belong 
mmetenx    ea^^T  for;  fffideus,  r/^r^/j.^  instrinneutal  of;   perfere7is,  jyaii^ns 
an  orwiUhr-to  etulure,  undergo  ;  fdgieii.s,  afraid  of,  shy  ot-  a  mans,  fond 
(/f-  ok^ervans,  full  of  respect  for,  sitiens,  etc.     Participial  adjectives   de- 
rived from  intransitive  verbs,  generally  govern  the  cases  of  their  verbs,as 

1  Pillar.-  5  inslead  of  binorvm.  In  numeral  expressions  the  g?"il^'y«Jll"^\f,t  ^Jj^  f ^^ 
declension  is  c-nerally  formed  in  i/m  in.t.  of  arum  Q\'^\^y'^,^ll^'^^^^^^ 
used  here?-"3  should  have.-  4  groove.-  »  l^'y'^^l-  "  ^''^,'^[}„  '^  n  ilr  tree -'S 
a  brick  -  8  to  be  considered  as  a  proper  name.-  »  branch.-  |o  Knot  -  "  «'""ee.  cui. 
_  »3  architrave  -  i*  a  triglvph  (in  the  frieze  of  the  Done  order,.-/*  m  f">"<^.-^ '*  P^^*. 
Z  17  beam  -^«  interval.-  1«  should  be.-  ^o  lower.-  '--^  step.-  "  m  the  amphitheatre  - 
23  bench  -  24  to  place.-  25  a  loot  and  a  quarter.-  26  platform.-  ^t  here  high.-  "here 
Ion  -^»  to  place-   3°  parapet.-    3i  j^J/^iV,  aittle-stable.-  ^2  latus  o  6ris,  a  side - 

^Ahem  .4/>Sm  obire%  depart  life  to  die.-  «^  ^"P^^"\^Pr''''-,7 la-f '^^^a^bi^ 
live,  to  dwell.-  3^  tire-place.-  ^^  stabulari  (dep.)  to  be  stabled.-  "shaggy.-      amoi 

tjonl—  41  to  fortify. 


\ 


118 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


obediens,  {dicfo  audiens),  obedient ;  imminens,  (alicui  or  alicui  rei),  threat- 
ening ;  flafjranii  aliqua  re,  burning  with. 

Fern  100  A niong  tlie  adjectives  expressing  desiuk  are :  avidus\  cupidus 
studiOsus\  The  other  chiss,  ex  pressing  control  and  capacity  (mental 
and  otlierwise),  is  very  large.  Here  belong  penfus  and  consultus  ,  gnarus  , 
ronmm^  certior  (in  the  i>lirase  certlOnm  (dlquem  facere  ahcujus  ret) 
pnfdens']  memor,  parturp.^,  poferif^  and  compo.s.  pleniis,  fee ima us  find 
tlieir  contraries,  insciufi  and  }iexn>(f<\  nidis,  i/o^uetus\  immemor,  obUtm  , 
e,vpfrfi,impot('n.sam\impoH'\er/f'iiHn,inopn.  .       ,     -n 

Rem  110  Several  ottheseadje('tives,  as  r^w.<»^«'/.v,  are  also  construed  with 
a  dative  (especially  the  reflexive  dative  mM,  which  is  redundant  ni  hnglish  , 
or  with  im  abltitive,  as  consnltu.s  {juriH  ov  jure  consnl(a.%  a  jurist)  and 
pleniiH  ialicfnnH  rei  or  idiq^a  ri^  Referfm  (full  of,  hlled  with)  is  almost 
always  construed  with  an  ablative.  Some,  as  rudin  {ahrnjus  rci  or  m 
allqud  re)  are  construed  with  a  genitive  or  with  a  preposition. 

hem  111  In  poetry  and  hiler  prose,  many  adjectives  and  participles 
take  a  ocnitive,  which,  in  L,M)od  prose,  are  either  not  used  at  all  (ns  ;)/•«;- 
,uqi(.s,  7fhs(emiNs,  pnT^eiusi  or  which  have  ditferent  constructions,  or 
take  no  object  at  all  (as  intef/er,  earns,  ambiyu us,  docdi^'i,  sapiens,  ixiu\  a 
ureat  manv  others).  Here  belon-  the  adjectives  m  a.r  tormed  trom 
verbs,  n^  hfaj;  gluttonous;  fera.r,  fertile;  fur/a.r,  tugitive.  Ihese 
adjectives,  whicli  in  classical  prose  are  extremely  rare,  and  still  more 
rarely  occur  with  objects  in  the  genitive  (in  Cicero  perhaps  only  the  ad- 
jective r^7)^y.r  in  a  single  passage),  are  very  frequent  in  poetry  and  post- 
classical  prose,  and  regularly  construed  with  a  genitive,  as  tempus  cdax 
rerum,  time,  the  devourer  of  things. 

1    Ronia.ii  semper  appeknfe,^  r/lorice  pnctcr  cctcras  ircutis  atqnc  aridUaudi^  ^",^/,""V 

Cic  M  n   •  --tiCvrenaici'i  pl.llosophi  omuc  bonum  in  voluptJlte  I'o.uCninl   virtfiu;n  - 

nue  ce  sucrunt'c^b'e.nn  rem    audJlri  ..portcrc  q.H.d  efficient  essct  rd'^pfaUs.  <^  i^- <->?■, '; 

N.-n    Kn    -^—  4    Multi  cwitenfwiux  sunt   r;//m/?ry/v.s  qnam   rerttatis.   eic.Or.l,  1  .— 
r  >vttn^o;a<.A-S  W^^^^^  pl.iluH.ph....  C-ie.  Tusc.  5..;5,-0.,ln  omnibus 

relV^    -n'bouToptinnia.eti^^  latet,  idque  ab  e..  p.,te^.  urn  ,p>.<  ni  gnarm  est 

nu    "iri    CU    Or      1-7  Solus   homo  ex  tot    animaniium"  -eneribus  rattoni.^    c^t 

^S-t^i^i^-^-:  Cic.  Le,  t,  7.-  8.  om.^.  5;;^(j;-v>o^-  ^^^^^  -»'•  C-- 

Tuse  5,  13.—  i>.  SUientem  me  virtatis  taai  deseruu-ti.  ID.  1  luuc.  5. 

§500.  The  adjectives  denotincc  necessary  (to  somebody), 

USEFUL,  ACCEPTAliLE,  FIT    (foi*  Something),  NEAPw,  SIMILAR,  EASY, 

and  their  contraries,  are  construed  with  the  dative. 

Rem  112  The  dative  objects  of  almost  all  these  adjectives  iiiay  be 
C(msidered  as '  d.xtives  of  the  interested  person.'  Their  luimber  on 
account  of  the  great  diversity  of  interest,  is  extremelN'  large,  so  that  they 
cannot  be  all  eSumerated  in  lists.  The  most  usual  adjectives  belonging 
to  this  class,  are 


1  Eairer  for-  »  etrivin-  for  somebody  (i.  «.,  attached  tohim).- »  skilled  5"-*  ^»;^- 

livin-  bein".--  "  tho.i-ht.-  >»  acceptable.-  »•  accommodated.-  ''  fit.-  »«  bkilfu..- 
«9  equal.— ^^»  neighboring.—  "  related.—  "  intent  ou. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


119 


omnibus  (since  he  was  liii^hly  satisfied  with  him),  Il>.  Plane.  11.— Mihi  explordt'wiest  (E 
am  ctmvinced)  ita  esse  ut  scribis,  lb.  Fam.2. 1«,  6.  For  '  mihi  cert  am  est'  see  p.  612,  n.  2. 
Bern.  113.  Some  adjectives  take  either  a  dative  or  genitive  :  1)  Similis^;  2)  par,  gen- 
erally takes  a  DATIVE,  but  sometimes  a  genitive;  3);>rc>prif/«  (peculiar),  in  Cic.  generally 
with'a  ciENiTivK^,  else  also  with  a  dative;  4)  communis,  contrarius,  superstes ;  5)  sacer 
(sacred  to)  generally  with  dative,  but  sometimes  with  oenitivk^. 

Rem.  114.  Many  of  the  adjectives  governing  the  dative,  when  used  absolutely,  are  often 
treated  entirely  as  subst  tntives.  taking  their  objects  in  the  form  of  attributes  in  the 
genitive,  as  ieqiol'l-i.  a  c()iit(Mnp«)r:iry  ia/iciljus).  but  'equal '  (fdieui) ;  familmriii,  a  friend 
(aliciijus).  but  '  intimate  with  '  uilu^ui)  ;  amicus  (with  the  same  meaning  and  construction 
«s  famUuiris).  Even  the  supclative  amicissimns,  the  best  friend,  is  sometimes  con- 
ptrned  with  a  genitive  attribute.  Thus  nece.'isariu-'i,  a  relative,  takes  a  genitive  attribute 
or  a  pos-esslve  {n-r'Ss'ari'ts  fuut.  G  iji  nf-cpssarius),  but  if  meaning  *  related '  or  '  necessary,' 
it  is  construed  with  an  object  in  the  dative. 

1.  Senntari  necnf-fariuni  vM  nosse  rempublicam.  Cic,  Leg.  .3,  18.—  2.  Lacedaemonii 
id  potiiis  iiituebantur  (juoil  ipsuruni  dondtiatioiti^,  (\\\ixn\  quod  universie  GrCEcicevtile 
esset.  Ncp.  Then..  7.—  ^.  R..rniiliis  niiiltihuline  graCior^  fuit  quam  pah-ibus'^,  (sed) 
longe  ante  alios  acrepfi>isin\iis  militum  animis.  Liv.  1.  15.—  4.  Nihil  est  naiflne  homiiiis 
a^'commoiafius  b-netic-Mitiil  et  11  be  lal  it  lire.  Cic.  OlF.  1.  14.—  .5,  Volupfntibus  vvixi- 
nus  ta-tidiuui^  fniitimiim  est.  Cic.  Or.  3,  .35.— 6.  Plures  Romuli  quam  Xum/K  similes 
fiiennit  n-ges.  Liv.  1,20.  2—  7.  Num  deos  esse  tui  similes  putas  ?  Plant.  Am.  1,  1, 
los._S.  Nam  «I'liil  i".>  xini't!^  Mlo  fuit  r  Ca?-^.  B.  G.  7,  77.—  9.  Id  est  c>iju<que  projrrium 
qut)  quisque  Iruitur  atiiuc  utiiur.  Cic.  Fain.  7.  .3i).  2  —  10.  Veins  verbum  hoc  quidera 
est.  comin'/nia  es.se  ainicOrum  inter  se  omnia.  Ter.  Ad.  .5,  8.  IS.—  11.  Oinni  (Vtdti  mors 
est  comimlnis.  Cie.Sen.  1'.».—  11.  Totosdies  precabantur»  ut*ti(?>i  liberi«w;x^.*^i/;«^essent. 
Cic  N.  I).  2  2^. —  12.  Utinam'  te  non  solum  ritce,  sed  efiam  dignildtis  //1^(6  superstittni 
reiiquissem'.  Cict^ii,  fr,l,3,l.— 13.  «b'a/is  esse  ItaliiB  uuum  consuleiu  cens6bai.  Liv,  34,43. 

§  501,  The  oiuect-ablative,  dependent  on  adjectives,  con- 
nects with  these  1)  the  idea  of  instrumentality  and  origin,  and 
2)  with  a  few  adjectives  (as  Ube)%  free  from;  allemis,  i'ovQ\g\\ 
to)  the  itlea  of  separation.   (See  §  485.) 

Rem.  115.  lu  some  adjectives,  as  onmtus  (laden  with)  aiid  pr(^ditus  (en- 
dowed with),  the  ahlative  denotes  direct  instrumentality,  similar  to  the 
l)assivc  ai;ent  of  verhs.  The  adjectives  and  participles  belonii^ing  here, 
ai*e  in  seN'i-ral  respeets  noteworthy.  Prmiitas  is  often  used  to  paraphrase 
EuLHish  derivative  adjectives  or"^similar  expressions,  as  virtuous,  y'wixiXQ 
])r,editus ;  ia  modest  circumstances,  parvis  opibus  praeditus  (Cic).  ^  Here 
belon<^  the  participles  ductus,  motus,  permotus,  adductus,  imiuctus,  impul- 
sus,  perterritns  (with  expressions  of  fear),  corresponding  to  'prompted 
by'' or  to  the  prei)osition  from,  denoting  a  motive,  as:  Feci  Iwc  inetu 
permOius  I  have  done  Wnsfrom  fear.  It  is  unusual  that  motives  are  ex- 
pressed bv  the  mere  abhuive,  without  any  of  the  mentioned  participles. 

Rem.  IIG.  The  ablative  connected  witli  most  adjectives  must  be  con- 
ceived as  denolinu-  indirect  instrumentalitv,  corresponding  to  very  ditfer- 
ent Eu'^-lish  prepositions.  Thus  the  instrument  of  the  action  is  conceived 
1)  as  producing  habit,  satisf.\ction,  and  confidence,  with  the  adjectives 
a.s.uetus  aliqud  re  (accustomed  to),  conte jit us  {^iiiisfied  \\ith),fretus  (.ijlym^ 
o/i)'  2)  a?  producing  fullness  or  defect,  with  plenus  aliqud  re  (tull  of 
'see  Hem.  110),  refirtus  (tilled  toith),  opuletiius  (rich   in),  fecu  idus  (fertile 

'iSimilis  always  takes  oexitive  if  the  object  i>.,a  .1»'-?"'^"'^^';:' ^^''I^'^^'^'jj^^raio  -""^  11 
it  is  a  person  (m^i  similis,  patris  similts.  also  ren  simili'^').  Other>  ii>e  either  case.-  as 
forinvi  Cic  R  A  8-L,M.lG.-  3  as:  Insula  torutn  dedru7n  >>acra.  Cic.Verr.2, 1,  18.  So 
lb  Le-  2  18  -  «power  -  popular  with,-*  Senate.-^  6urfeit.-«  pray.-»  would  that. 


120 


CONSTRUCTION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


in\  prcBstaiis,  exceUcm,  cdeber,  prfEclarus  (distiuguished  for),  par  alicui 
aliqud  re  {-a  \\\\\Xi'\\  for  soinuhody  m  soiiu'tliing),  pauper,  7iud us,  vacuus, 
orbus  (destitute  of)\  duudas  (hvnie  in),  mger  (sick  'icith  reufpect  V)). 

Rem.  117.  The  adjective  dinnus  (worthy  of)  takes  the  object  of  whicli 
somebody  is  worthy  in  tiie  abhitive.  In  regard  to  the  exphiuation  ot 
this  construction  opinions  ditfer. 

r^^r-  It  is  probable  that  here  ai;  intermediate  idea  must  be  supplied.  The  Romans 
do  ii"ot  .«»eem  to  have  — iccived  the  ablative  object  of  dignm  as  an  immediate  ol)j.Tt 
of  '  worthy.'  hnt  as  thv.  object  of  a  passive  verb  dependent  on  difiitus,  so  that  dirjtvis 
aliqua  re  would  have  to  be  explained  hy  di'jnm  aUqua  re  onmn  or  pnedihtm  esseK 
Tlu'  other  constriietions  of  drf/iit^  are  1)  a  relative  clause  ;  2)  a  clause  wUh  vf  ;  d)  the 
intinitive:  4)  the  second  supine  (difjna  dic/if,  Liv.  r^f),  1  :  2.5  1)  ;  .5)  with  the  p-nitive. 
Of  all  thes<^  con-tructions  only  two  arc  normal,  that  with  llie  ablative,  and  that  witu 
a  relative  clause.  (Sec  p.  557,  Obs.  3.) 

Bern.  US.  Here  belong:  1.  The  construction  of  the  vocative  mofJe  (pi. 
inacti)  with  an  ablative,'  mostly  rirffttti  {maclc  rirtfite  csto,  which  is  used 
as  a  phrase  of  praise  and  conirmtnlation,  '  Well  done!  Let  me  ccmgratu- 
late  you  for  your  bravery! ').  Made  is  a  defective  adjective,  occurring  only 
in  the  vocative,  and  behniging  to  the  root  m.V(J  {niagnu!*,  and  the  English 
'  might,  maif). 

2  The  ablative  natu  (literally  In/  hirth),  added  to  mnjor,  mn.nmu8,  and 
mliior,  minimxx,  and  indiciling  that  these  adjectives  refer  to  the  age  of 
men  {major  natu,  older ;  minor  n<itu,  younger,  etc.). 

1  Orf'ctorix  cnpliitdte  reijni^  ?/i^?ur^/.-f.conjuratirmem  nobilitJltisS  fecit*  Ca;s.  "B.  G. 
1  i  _  2  Ce-ar  ner  cxploratures»  coiinOvit,  Considium  (imore  /h'rfernfurn,  (id) quod  nor. 
vidiss.-t"  pro  viso-»  sibi  renuntias.f.  (":es.  H.  (J.  1.  22.-:}  Laced;emonii  p.Ttiiu.iCM-nnt, 
i\ecarita(t'  patrise  ^/t/c/^/v  Alcil)iades  aliquando''  ab  ii)>is  dcscisceret»»  et  cum  suis  in  Lrra- 
ti-im  redTret'»  Nen  Vic  5.-1.  Dubiil  >/><'  iinpni^m  certum  in  periculnm  se  c(mnnlsu. 
rlc  Fun  ;^  8-5  Varus  homo  est  suinm;l  religiotie  ct  summil  WJCfonfat^-''  prmdttu^. 
Cc  ciu  M-G  AUrnutn'-^  est  ma-no  ri/v),  qu.xl  alteri  pm-ceperiti»,  ul  ipsum  facere 
lioii  pos^e.  Cic'lirut.  '.♦.-  7.  Per-e»^  hiiK's  omni  liher  me'u.  teque  et  exercitum  s.-na. 
Liv  7  :U  —  8.  ContentHin  suis  rebn.^t  esse  maxim:e  sunt  certissiimeqiie  divitiie.  Cic.  1  ar. 
r,  x  —  9  Cimon  Tha<ios  ow/fm'UJ  fretos  stio  adventu  freirit.  ^ep.  Lim.  2.—  10.  Homines 
liiijSre  as^iduo»«et  quotiduTuo»^  a.-xuPfi.  quum  t.-mpestatis  causil  opere  proliibentur, 
se  ad  aliquem  ludum  conferre'«  s-d.-nt.  Cie.  Or.  :i.  15.--  n..Maxima  quieque  domusx^/- 
w/est  k /.a  superbis.  Vir-  .En.  1>.  2(i.-  12.  Qme  pars  XumidKC  Maureianiam  attin-it»», 
cinorirLue  opuh'Mtlor  est.  Sail.  Ju-.  l'.>.-  13.  Keddet'^»  uie  qu.  nunc  sreenbm  suis 
nrechlruJ^  v<U  m.-arnm  miseriSrum  paMias.  ball.  Ju-.  11.-  14.  Iluie  tradita  urbs  est, 
n?JfaimB4dio,  referta  co/ni^.  Cic.  Att.  7,  18.-  15.  Q.iu.n  sunuis  ^^;^^']^'^^^}^ 
curisnL  vaon,  tuin  (f/if„)  avcmus-2  aliqnid  vidcM-e,  audire,  add.scere-fs.  Cic.  Off  1,  4, 13. 
-  hi  A-e'ilaus  fuir  c/w'dus  alt-ro  prd^.  Nep.  Alt.  H-  17.  Ancus  re-navit  annos 
quatuor  Jl  vii:inti,cuilibel«*  superir.nim  (/aw./-)  re-um  belli  pa.i8qm-  et  artib>i^e\  glond 
var  Liv  1  :i5.-  is.  Diqnum  hoide  virnm  Musa  vetut  mori.  lior.  Od.  4  ..  28.— 
1'»  Nihil'est  laudabilius  (  praUe worthy),  nihil  ma-no  et  pneclilro  Piro^/*7«««*- c  ementiS. 
ri'e'otr  1  25  .S8—  21.  »Aar/i  rir/^T/f^,  milites  Komilui,  estOte.  Liv  7,  3().—  21.  tnnius 
f^ximajormtn  quim  Plautus  et  N^evius.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  3.-  22.  A  Datame  bcisinas, 
maxS^mtn  «bus.  desclvif^».  Nep.  14,  7.-  2:5.  Hoc  prneho  lactom^t/r^/.a<M  omnium 
conscnsu'-««  Icgiltos  ad  Cajsarem  mifGrunt.  Ca-s.  15.  O.  2,  as.       ^ 

»  The  same  idea  mu-t  be  ^ipplied  with  the  ablative  of  quality  (Kern.  27>.  The  sup- 
plying of  .uch  intermediate  ideas  is  sweepin-lv  condemned  by  manv.  These  utterly  mis- 
?a£  tWsp-rit  of  the  lan-ua-e,  which  frequently  makes  objects  and  attributes  dependent 
on  ideas  tha  are  felt  mo7e  than  expressed.  Such  objects  and  attril.utes  cannot  be  cor- 
vee ly  understood  without  nnd.mr  olit  the  governino;  idea.-  '^roya  power.-  \"o»n  it>v 
4  to  form  -  »  scout.-  «  instead  of  a  predicate-accusative  (viaum),  as  seen  b>'  him.  as 
if  ho  Ad  seen  it '— '  love  —  «  once.—  »  desert.-  i«  cum  aliquo  in  grattmn  redlre.xo  be 
rLoncUed  to  one.-^Mn^^  (translate  by  adjectives).-  n  not  becoming.-  »    com- 

mand -  "*co  -  »*  from  here.  -  '«  hard.-  ^^  daily.-  i«  se  conferre,  to  betake  one  s  se  f. 
"o  re-ort  to.-'»»  to  border  on.-  ^o  to  pay.-  «i  conspicuous.-^'^  av?re,  to  be  eager.-  '>  to 
e/rn  in  addition.-  ^4  any.-  =»  dtsci6cere,  to  fall  ofi.-  ^«  consent. 


L. 


CONSTKUCTION   OF    ADJECTIVES. 


121 


§  ^O^.  The  iXFiNiTiYE,  in  classical  prose,  is  not  used  as  an 
object  of  adjectives,  except  sometimes  witli  past  participles  de- 
rived from  verbs  which  take  an  object-infinitive,  as  pardtus  ve- 
nire., ready  to  come  ;  assiietus  scribere,  accustomed  to  writing. 

linn  no  Diqnm  very  rarely  is  construed  with  an  object-inflnitive  in  Livy  (p.  557, 
Ob^  3)  alsoinVitruv.  (forinst.9.  pnef.),  but  never  in  Cic,  Cies.,  Sail.— Poets  and  writers 
of  liic  silver  a<^e  quite  olten  construe  adj^*ctives,  both  attributive  and  predicative,  with 
an  infinitive  as  Coidenina  tit>diini  prorbiehE  re/inerfi{\\'\h'i.) :  diqnux  eligl  (PMn.  Pan.) ; 
lHrVn><  7v7^/V(Tac.) :  apta  regi  (Ov.);  capidus  attingere  (Prop.) :  calUd'cs  condere  (Ilor.). 
In  cli^sicul  lan-niage,  adjectives  requiring  an  actios  as  completing  object,  are  am- 
strued  cither  wiTh  verbal  nouns  (is  re.<  coqnitione  dlqnce,  subjects  worth  knowing.  Cic. 
Oir.  1,«3),  or  Willi  clauses   (p.  557,  3),  or  with  gerunds  (p.  157,  foil.),   or  with  supines 

Hem  120  That  prcducate-ndjectives  are  most  frequently  construed  with  a  surject- 
INFIMTIVK  has  been  repeatedlv  mentioned.  Such  intinitives  must  not  be  mistaken  tor 
obiect-infinitives  (lepciulent  on  the  adjective,  an  error  into  which  beginners  are  o [ten  cd 
bv  ihe  positi<m  of  the  words,  as  :  Qndnnn  qmida  im-yis  sif,  dijinle  est  existmmre.  ihc 
CTcatnesa  of  whose  mind,  (literally,  icho^e  wind  how  great  it  is),  [ix]  is  often  difficult  to 
estimate.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  24.  Constructions  of  this  kind  are  generally  made  personal  m 
Eniilish,  making  the  subjecT-intinitive  the  object-inflnitive  of  the  predicate-adjective. 
ThFs  is  generally  not  allowed  in  Latin.  (See  Rem.  123.  124.) 

§  5051.  Many  adjectives,  especially  those  denoting  pos- 
sibility (easy  and  difficult),  and  those  denoting  an  affection 
or  MORAL  cONDiTiox  of  the  mind  (pleasant,  bitter,  terrible,  dis- 
graceful, honorable),  may  take  tlie/^ECoyp^suPiyEl^s  o^ect^as 
res  difficllls  factu,  a  thing  difficult  to^bcdone  (to  do).    See|"'352. 

Rem.  121.  The  second  supine  (which,  in  its  stem,  is  identical  with  the 
passive  participle)  must  he  considered  as  the  case  of  a  noun  of  the  fourth 
declension,  either  the  dative  (with  the  ending  w,  see  §221),  or  the  ablative, 
most  of  the  nouns  of  this  declension  being  past  participles  with  abstract 
meaning.  In  its  reguhur  (personal)  construction,  it  has  always  a  PASsn^ 
meaning,  althougli  it  is  most  frequently  rendered  by  an  Engiiiili.acrive 
infinitive  (§  352)^  There  are  comparatively  few  verbs,  all  transitive,  that 
form  second  supines  :  dlciu,  factu,  aud'itu,  cognitu,  iiiceptu,  inventu,  'ine- 
mort'ttu,  perpessu,  scitu,  toleratu,  probatu,  visu,  aditu,  transitu,  tractdtu, 
existinidtu,  responsu,  gustdtu,  and  perhaps  a  few  more.  The  adjectives,  in 
classical  prose  construed  with  second  supines,  are  especially  facilis 
and  dijficilis.  More  rarely  are  found  jucundus,  injucundns,  incredibdis, 
molest  us,  suavis,  dulcis,  acerbus,  turjiis,  fadus,  honestus,  crudelis,  nefarius, 
terribilis,  optimus,  brevis,  dignus.  To  these  must  l)e  added  the  substantive 
expressions  (with  adjective  force), /as  est,  nefas  est,  opus  est. 

Rim.  122.  The  adjectives  on  which  the  supine  depends,  may  br  either 
attributive  or  predicative,  as  Opus  turpe  inceptu,  a  work  disgraceful  to  uiider- 
take;  opus  inceptu  turpe  est,  the  work  is  disgraceful  to  undertake.  Otten, 
especially  in  the  poets,  it  is  used  in  elliptical  sentences,  the  governing 
adjective  beimr  used  absolutely,  as  :  Cui  trls  animas  Feroma  mater  {Jior- 
rendum  dictu)  dederat,  to  whom  his  mother  Feronia  (horrible  to  say)  had 
given  three  souls.  Virg.  ^n.  8,  565.  .... 

Rem.  123.  The  predicative  construction  of  the  second  supine  is  either 
PERSONAL  or  IMPERSONAL.  The  FORMER  is  employed  to  give  a  personal 
form  to  sentences  consisting  of  transitive  subject-infinitives  with  imper- 


^ 


\rr 


122 


CONSTEUCTION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


sonal  preilicate-adjectivcs.  This  is  effected  by  clianG:ing  tlie  active  sub- 
ject-infinitive  into  a  second  supine  (witli  passive  force),  and  making  tiie 
transitive  object  of  tlic  former  the  personal  subject  of  the  pre(Ucate- 
adjective.  The  adjective  becomes  thus  a  pehsonal  predicate,  and  must 
I  agree  with  its  subject-noun,  according  to  the  general  rules: 

Impersonal  constuuction.     Ilunc  laborem  facere  difficile  est,  it  is  difficult  to  do 

tliis  work.  .  ,,  ,    .     ....     ,^  ^     , 

Pkksonal  construction.    Ilio  labor  factu  dtfficibs  est,  this  work  is  difficult  to  be 

done  (to  do). 

^  The  personal  subject  of  the  sentence  is  always  at  the  same  time  the 
Logical  subject  of  ihe  supine.  The  use  of  a  passive  infinitive  in  place  of 
a  supine  is  not  admissible.  "(See  Rem.  120.) 

/?em.  124.  The  iMrEU:*oNAL  construction  of  the  supine,  in  classical  prose,  takes  place 
1)  if  an  inteuuo(;ative  clatse  is  us^cd  a-*  subject  of  tiie  sentence,  in  which  ease  the 
second  t»n()ine  (mostly  a  verb  of  savins)  may  always  be  replaced  by  an  active  intinitive, 
as:  Ditficliedictnesf.'quanfoojMrrt'  coiicliut  /loiniiies  cotnidis  affabilitcmine  t'trmoni.o,  it  is 
dithcuit  to  sa\  how  much  eomilv  and  allabiiity  of  speech  reconciles  men.  Cic.  Off.  2,  14, 
(instead  of  Dieere,  quanto—conrllvf,  difficile  e^t).—Quaq>/.is(/ue  in  te  fide  fit  et  coiunfafe, 
difficile  dicta  est  de  niiirfulis,  it  is  difficult  to  sav  in  re<?ard  to  each,  taken  sin>dy,  of  what 
faitli  and  sentiment  he  i<  toward  you.  t'ic.  Fam.  1,  7,  2,  (inst.  of  I/icere  de  ttinguliii,  qua 
fide,  etc.,  (i>n<(/ne  sit.  difficile  est).  ''I'lius  in  the  sentence,  quoted  Kmi.  120.  the  active  \n- 
tinhWc  existim(l?'e  ini^ht  be  clianced  into  a  second  supine.-- 2)  If  the  sui)ine  (especially 
dictu)  depends  on  the  e.xi)ressiohs /o^-  est,  nefas  €st,op>/s  eft.  infinitive  clauses  mav  be 
used  as  their  subjects,  as  nefcui  ^st  dicfu,  7ni'-era}nfuisi>e  talem  senertuft^n,  it  is  criminal 
to  S(aj  that  such  an  old  aire  was  iiiiluippy.  Cic.  Sen.  5.-3)  Sometimes  tlie  supine  is  used 
rcdiindantlv,  merely  to  streuL'then  the  idea  of  tlie  iroveniini:  adjective.  In  such  a  case 
the  pri'diuite-adjective  mav  be  used  impersonally  with  an  intinitive  as  subject,  and  the 
supine -tliay  liave  active  force,  as:  (Oi-gefonx)  jfeffacite  jactu  esse  dlls  probnt  ronCda  per- 
Hcere.  O.  proved  to'them  that  to  accomplish  the  undertakinu'  was  very  easy  (todo).  (  les. 
B.  G.  1.3.— 4)  Later  writers  sometimes  use  tlie  second  supine  with  impersonal  predicates 
without  any  of  tlie.<e  restrictions,  einplov'n»^  impersonal  verbs  or  predicate-nouns  in 
place  of  the  rcj,Milar  nredicate-atljeclives,  as  :  IhidU  dictu.  Tac.  At,'r.  32,  3.—  Quod  dictu 
scelus  eat.  Prud.  Apoth.  b22.>) 

1.  Quid  est  XnxnjucKndum  rognihi  atquer/'/<^/'/quam  papientibuspententiiscravibus- 
que  verbis  ornata  oratio?  Cic."  Or.  1.  8.—  2.  Dubitant  (homines)  Iionestumne  factu  sit 
an  furpe  id  quod  in  deliberationem  eadit2.  Cic.  Off.  1,  3,  9.—  3.  O  multa  dictu  graria, 
perpess'i^  asn-ra  .'  Cic.Tusc.  3.3..').—  4.  Postridie  homines  mane  conveniunt  (o.<>><?///W<') : 
qutprunt  quid  optimum  factu  sit?  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1,  27.—  5.  C\\\\\>^facde  scifu  est  quam 
fiierim  miser.  Ter.  Hec.'3,  1.  15.—  <>.  Hi  postquam  in  una  maMiia  convenOre*  inr»<?f/J- 
bile  dictu  est  quam  facile  coaluerint».  Sail  Ca  .  ti.  2.—  7.  Procedit  in  tuniiilum«  facil- 
U)iut)ii  risH  insidi;intil)us7._  8.  Ilumanus  animus  cum  alio  nuHo  nisi»  cum  ipso  Deo, 
si  hoc  est  fas  dictu.  comparjlii  potest.  Cic.  Sen.  5.—  !).  Si  non  lonirius  quam  quod» 
scitu  opus  est  in  narrnndo»»  procedetur.  Cic.  Inv.  1,20.—  10.  Pnn<ipes  Hritannue  ojiti- 
t/ium  /^V/cf'^esseduxCnint.  frumento  commeatnque  nostros  prohibGn-.  Ctes.  B.  G.  4.  :W. 
—  11.' Jiidicium  horum  houwnnm  diffici/e  factu  e>i[  non  probare.  Cic.  Off.  1,  21,71.— 
12.  Omnia  lia'C.  risu  quam  dictu  fadi'i'ra.  terrOrem  renovHruiit.  Liv.  21.32.—  13.  O  rem 
quuni  aiKHtu  c}'ud^le//i  turn  ri-^u  iffanatn  !  Cic.  Plane.  41,  JK».—  14.  Amnem"  trar\.--i'ii 
diffi'ilem  pro  nimiimento  hal)uil.  lliv.  41,8.—  15.  Crebra  magis  quam  diqua  dictu,  proB- 
lia  fecit.  Liv.  35,  1. 


J  Mad\vkt  Ijies  to  prove  that  Cicero  thuf  uses  the  second  supine  with  the  force  of  an 
actiVr-trlniitive.  without  restricting  it  Ut  the  ca^es  mentione  I  under  No.  1  and  No.  2.  re- 
feirinjr  to  tlie  lollowiuLC  passage :  Ad  liax  (^ocieldttfi)  tion  estfarile  imenfu  oui  descendaid, 
it  is  not  easy  to  llnd  persons  who  would  descend  to  such  society.  Cic  Ltt'i.  17.  But  this 
readinjr,  which  is  not  sum)orted  by  irood  n  anus  ripts,  must  be  unqueBtional)ly  rejected. 
The  proper  ieadin<r  is.  Son  est  f'icile  inventus  qui  dtscendat.  there  is  not  easily  any  one 
found  Mho  should  descend.  Kuh  s,  especially  if  containintr  false  ;:i'ainmar.  should  not 
be  founded  on  solitary  passajjes  of  (to  siiy  the  least)  doubtful  readiufr.— "  The  subjects 
of  their  deliberation.'*. —  '  ptrpeti.  to  suffer. —  *  to  flock  together. — •  coalescere,  to  bc- 
oome  one  body. —  «  a  hill.—  '  insididri,  to  be  iu  ambush. —  *  but.—  »  quod,  ap  far 
as,—  *<*  in  the  narrative.—  ^^  Btream. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


123 


EXEHCISES, 

1.  Babylon  Avas  sixty  miles  in  circumference',  and  was  surrounded 
with  wails  two  hundred  feet  hiirh  and  rifty  wide. —  2.  Lay  out'^  three 
plots",  each  si.vty  feet  loni^  and  ten  feet  wide. —  3.  The  leaves*  of  this 
tree  are  about  three  digits  lontr,  and  one  digit  and  two-thirds  {parts  of  ihe 
Ah)  wide. —  4.  Let  the  boards*  be  ten  feet  long,  twelve  digits  and  a  half 
wide,  and  one  and  a  half  thick. —  5.  The  depth  of  the  river  was  about 
nine  feet. —  G.  Most  renowned  arc  the  plane-trees^  in  the  walk'  of  the 
Academy"  at  Athens,  which  are  twenty-three  feet  high  from  the  root  to 
the  lowest"  branches^". — 7.  This  kind  of  pepper"  is  a  small  shrub"  no  more 
than  a  cubit  and  a  half  in  height. —  8.  Turn"  the  furrows**  about  three 
hands  deeji. —  9.  The  thickness  of  the  shelT*  is  less  than  one-sixth  [of  a 
digit], —  10.  The  garden  behind  my  house  measures  {esf^e)  four  thousand 
square  feet. —  ILTlie  surface'®  of  the  lake  contains  {ease)  about  two  mill- 
ions of  square  feet. —  12.  The  roots  of  this  herb  enter  the  earth  less  than 
a  cubit  in  depth. —  13.  The  length  of  the  tongue  of  the  purple  fish"  is 
one  and  a  half  digits  (by  the  adjective). —  14,  The  thickness  of  the  bricks'' 
of  the  sidewalks'''  shtiil  be  not  less  than  one  third  [of  a  foot]  {by  the  frac- 
tions of  the  An). —  lo.  Thou  hast  made  these  tubes""  too  thick  ;  they  ought 
to  be  thinner  by  at  least"-'  one  fourth. —  IG.  Terentia  Cicero^  died  one 
hundred  and  three  years  old. —  17.  Nearest  to  the  Gauls  live  {esse)  the 
Belgians,  who  border"  on  the  sea. —  18.  Of  all  stars  is  Mercury  (g  112) 
nearest  to  the  sun. —  19.  I  believe  that  the  battle  between  Caesar  and 
Ariovistus  took  place  {es»e)  ten  miles  nearer  to  the  Rhine  than  it  is  generally 
thought-*.—  20.  To  have^*  respect  for  the  laws  is  the  mark  of  a  good 
citizen. —  21.  This  man,  believe  me,  was  always  most  attached  to  thee. — 
22.  [Those  that  are]  eager  for  glory  are  very  often  neglectful  of  their 
(familiesj. —  23.  He  who  has  nocontrol  over  his  anger  ought  not  to  teach 
youth.—  24.  jNIan,  because  he  has  {shares  inj^  reason,  sees  [into]  the  causes 
and  development'-^  of  things. —  2o.  When  Metellus  came  to  the  army,  he 
found'''''  that  the  soldiers  wt-re  almost  iinticcustomed  to  discipline. —  2G.  This 
will  be  of  the  greatest  assistance-"^  not  only  lo  [those  that  are]  unacquainted^** 
with  Greek  literature,  but  also  to  the  learned. —  27.  Caesar  was  far  more 
l)opular''  with  his  soldiers  than  Pompey.—  28.  I  cannot  find  any  instru- 
ment fit^*^  lor  this  work.— 29. 1  shall  particularly^*^  begin'*  with  thesubject^^ 
which  will  be  most  adapted'^  to  thy  age  and  my  authority. —  30.  This  was 
peculiar  to  the  Roman  f^enate  and*peoi)le  that  {ut)  they  never  made  peace 
when  they  had  sutlered"  a  defeat  from  the  enemy.—  31.  The  examination" 
of  truth^"  belongs*'  especially**  to  man. —  32.  This  question,  indeed,  is 
common  to  all  philosophers.—  33.  Themistocles  was  most  similar  in 
character*'  to  Lysander.—  34.  The  forest  nexi*^  to  my  estate  is  full  of  the 
finest  fir-trees**.—  35.  Publius  IScipio,   the  son  of  the  elder**  Africanus, 

»  Circuitus,  4  decl.—  2  demetlii.—  'area.—  *  folium.—  ^  assie,  rn.—  «platanus.—  '  am- 
bularto.—  »  Acadeinia.—  »  inuis.—  i»  ramus.—  "  piper,  3  decl—  "  fruiex.—  »>  con- 
vertere.—  '♦sulcus.—  i*  testQdo.—  »«  area.—  ^^  purpura.—  i»  later.  3  decl.—  »»  am- 
bulaiio  lateralis  (modern  Latin).—  20  tubulus.— 21 /,0,' /^.v^iAan.-  2»  transl.  Terentia 
of  Cicero.—  23  to  border  ont^omeihing,  aitin{,'ere  aliquid.—  24  existimare.— 2*  esse.— 
=•  iOf^hare.  part icipem  esse.—  27  pro«i;re8sus  (plor.).—  2»  cognoscere.—  2»  adjuinentura 
(abstract  datice).—  '^'^  rudis.— 'i  acceptus,  grains.-  3*  idoneus.—  33  §  405.— »*  ordlri.— 


'*  (hesutjtct,  id.— 3«  apt  us 


37 


—  *<*    propnuiu  esse. 
<*  major. 


accipere. —  3b  inquisilio  atque  iuyestigaiio 


.3» 


veruDi. 


*i   §   405,  li.   47.—  "   iuaoles,-  *3    finitimus.—    •»*    abies.-- 


124 


FORMATION   OP  VEEBAL  ADJECTIVES. 


survived  all  his  sons.—  36.  Since  the  bnildin.i::  of  the  city',  the  Romans 
had  been  contented  with  tlie  use  of  [that]  water  [plur.)  which  tliey  drew* 
either  from  the  Tiber,  or  from  weils^  or  from  sprintrs*. —  37.  Curlius 
vohmtarily*  suffered"  death  from  love  of  his  country.—  38.  Many  com- 
mit crimes  from  eairerness  for'  wealtli.—  39.  Tlie  citizens,  when  tliey 
saw  that  the  enemy'had  scaled**  the  walls,  surrendered  {themselves)  from 
fear  of  harsli  trejitment",—  40.  Tlie  ancient  Romans  considered  him 
most  worthy  of  praise  who  lived'"  not  for  liimself,  but  for  [his]  country,— 
41.  Cajsar,  reiving  on  the  bravery  and  zeal  of  his  [soldiers],  did  not  hesi- 
tate to  ben:in"  the  battle. —  42.  All  the  n(iiz:hborini^  states  were  filled 
with  fusjitTve*^  slaves. —  43.  It  is  reported  that  Ara!)ia  was  rich  in  frank- 
incense"^ and  sweet-scentin»;''  herbs.—  44.  Who  can  say  that  he  is  sii- 
])erior'*  or  even  a  malch'^  lor  this  man  in  eloquence  V—  4.'5.  There  are  those 
who  wish  to  be  free  and  loose"  from  all  restraint'^  of  the  laws.—  46.  My 
oldest  brother  is  six  feet  and  three  diijits  and  two-thirds  in  luai^ht.— 
47.  AVho  was  youni^er,  Cicero  or  Caesar  V—  48.  It  makes  little  ditierence 
whether  thou  art  voumj^er  or  older  than  the  others  {sinf/.),  as  loni;  as"*  you 
enjoy  better  health  [than  they].—  [T/ie  foUowinr/ sentences  are  to  be  ren- 
clered  hij  using  Hecond  supines.]  49.  Xothinij:  is  more  dithcult  to  ascertain^" 
than  the  thoui^hts-*  and  sentiments'"  of  men.— oO.  I  think  that  the  soni^ 
of  {hit  niirhtinirale-^  is  more  pleasant  to  hear  than  that  of  any  other  bird. — 
51.  It  is  e*Iisy  to  know  from  w  hat  motives**  this  man  has  refused  to  serve" 
under  that  general.— 53.  It  is  very  difhcult  to  WW"^  the  real  subject  of  the 
discussion'-'.—  53.  What  is  sinful"*  to  say  cannot  be  righteous""  to  do. 


CHAPTER  FOURTH. 

THE  VERBAL  ADJECTIVES  AND  THE  PERIPHRASTIC 

COXJUGATIOX. 

I.  FORMATION  OF  THE  VERBAL  ADJECTIVES 
§  S04L»  Verbal  Adjectives  in  a  wider  sense  are  all  ad- 
jectives derived  from  Verbs  ;  but  in  a  narrowersense  only  those 
are  called  Verbal  Adjectives  which  belong  to  the  regular  forms 
of  the  verb,  and  which  by  certain  inflectional  endings  may 
generally  be  derived  from  any  given  verb.  These  are  the  ver- 
bal adjectives  in  das  and  ilrits,  to  which  must  be  add(id  the 
PARTICIPLES  of  tlie  PRESENT  and  PERFECT  wlieu  tlicy  are  treated 
as  adjectives. 

1  Traiiel.  Since  the  l)iiilt  (coiiderc)  city.—  ^  hanrlre.—  »  pnteus.—  ••  fons.—  »  ultro.— 
"  obire  —  '  aviditas  (wi/h  gen.).—  *  ascendere.—  »  harsh  treatment,  Paevitine.— 
10  Bubjimct.  iinpeif.—  i»  comtnittore.—  "  Jugitlvui*.—  "  tii-,  3decl.—  i«  oduratus.— 
16  romp,  of  pnestans.—  »*  par—  i'  soiatus.—  »«  vinciilnm  (plur.).—^^  as  lori<,'  as.  durn. 
—30  c()"iro>cere.—  2»  cogitatio.—  '^"^  bciiuntia.-  ^s  lusciuia.-  24  translate  :  induced  by 
what  causae  this  man,  olr..—  "  militiln;.—  2«  diccie.—  27  translate  by  an  indirect  ques- 
tion :  '  what  was  that  on  which  it  was  dis-puted.'—  "^  nefas.—  2»  fas. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  VERBAL  ADJECTIVES. 


125 


Rem  12.").  All  adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are,  by  particular  terminations,  distin- 
iniishe;!  from  such  a  Ijective-*  as  arc  deriv  -d  fro  u  otiier  parrs  ot  speec'i.  These  are  the 
ttTminiti')n-»  'idx-i.  ax,  '/'/«,  bml-i^.  anl  c'lndu^,  which  are  ireiierUly  attached  to  the  st^-m 
of  the  piia-iKKT  syst  m  (tho-ie  witli  a  vowel-initial  absorbin-^  the  vowel-characterisiics 
or  I  lisstvj  u),  an  iVi--,  bi'i<,  T'^uk  au  I  loiu^.  which  j^jnerally  are  artachci  to  the  stem  of  the 
PKiiPKCT  or  sui'isB.  Each  of  these  ter.niiiatio. IS  is  attached  to  the  stems  of  a  limited 
ni-mber  of  verbs,  rhu-  r'acere  tak'js  only  the  termination  Kit  {fidlU) ;  tiniere  only  ihe 
termination  vl'is  (timidus) :  novis-^e  only  the  termination  b'llis  (nobUis) ;  /erre.  the  ter- 
minal ions  ili'i  an'i  ar.  {fertU'is  and  ferax) ;  nasci,  only  the  termination  Ivm  (nalivas). 
The  terminaLioii  bundus  miy  he  atra  lied  to  m.>st  verb-stems  belonging  to  the  first  con- 
ju-'ation.  bur  only  'o  a  very  few  of  tlie  other  conju'jrations  {prj'abundas,  /nortbundUfi),  ana 
muny  verbs  do  not  admit  any  of  these  particular  terminati(m>*.  But  the  verbal  adjectives 
properly  so  called  (in  dxs  and  urus),  aside  from  a  few  ^pecial  exceptions,  may  be  gener- 
ally formed  from  auy^'iven  verb,  both  active  and  deponent. 

Rem.  120.  The  verbal  adjective  in  i/r?^«  (also  called  the  active  parti- 
ciple OF  TUE  futuiik'),  is  formed  from  the  supine-stem,  and  in  the  de- 
ponents from  the  perfect-stem  (see  P.  I.,  p.  3G1  foil). 


amflre 
lege re 
hortilri 


amitflrtis; 
lectflrus  ; 
bortattlrus; 


moiiSre 
aiidlre 


monitflrus ; 
atulitflrus  ; 
eirresstlrus. 


egredi        

Hence  no  verb  l:jckin2:  the  supine  {posse,  velle,  malle,  nolle,  meminisse,  no- 
risse),  or  the  whole  perfect  system  (as  most  of  the  neuter  verbs  of  the  second 
CO iij ligation,  as  cdbere,  etc.)  can  tbrm  a  verbal  adjective  in  Urus. 

Jiem.  127.  Several  verbs  form  supines  (perf.  participles),  but  no  verbal  adjectives  in 
tlrus  in  classical  prose,  as  manv  verbs  in  uere  (sup.  iltnni),  vanuere.  suert,  inauere, 
iiiifjiiere  (imbutaruii  is  quoted  Dy  NoN.),  and  several  verbs  of  thehrst  conjugation  with 
consonant  stems  in  tiie  perfeer  sj>tem  (P.  I..  p.3<U,  0).  as  cubare  tonare.  velare  Ol 
domilre,ani\  Uivare.  no  -adjectives  in  «/v/.y  occur  in  classical  prose  ^^omituru^,\\v^.^.4. 
10->;  lacafurus  and  lotdrxs,  poeiiral  or  postdassicai).  The  p<)ets  a.:d  po>^taa^Hcal 
writers  form  adjectives  in  uru.^  of  some  ot  these  classes  of  verbs,  and  ol  some  otuer 
verbs,  bv  adding  tilras,  stlru.'i,  or  ituft.-^  I  »  tue  pkesknt  stem,  a  • 


Infinitive  Present. 

agnoscere 

argue re 

abnuere 

discere 

lucre 

nusci 

orlri 

par  ere 

pintere 

ruei'C 

peciire 

tonare 


Ptvf.  ParticipU. 

agnitns 
ai-gfltus 


nattis 

onus 

l)arlus 

piiisus,  pistns.  pin- 

sii  us  i^all  ijostclass.). 
rut  us 

PcCIUS 


Verbal  Adjective. 
agiiotflrus  {quoted  by  Pri'ician). 
armiiiflius  (quoted  by  Ptiscian). 
abiinirurus  (quoted  by  Pri<cian). 
disci iQriis  (quoted  by  PHsciau). 
luitflrus  (Vlu'idian). 
nascitQrus  (po-^tdanslcal). 
orirflrus  (Horace). 
l)ariiflrus  (Su/pic.  ad  Cic.) 
pinsQrus  (alleged  by  Diouiedes), 

rui  turns  {poetical). 
secatQrus  (Columella). 
t^onatarus  {Horace). 


sonitus 
In  some  verbs  this  method  of  formation  has  classical  authority,  as /;v/i^Cper feet  stern 
fruQ  sue  P.  I.,  p.  '6'^)-fruitHru.'i  (Cic.  Tusc.  3, 17i ;  juvaturus  ^Sall.  Jug.  4< ;  but  adjutd- 
iuf  Liv  M  Ti)-!nfncaturu,<,C\c.  Atr.  1-2,  18,  1 ),  pruestatUrus  (the  supme  being prcestUum, 
botii  in  Cic.  and  hiv. ).  Ol  tnori,  vMnturus  (from  the  present  stem.  iMiw^v  nwrtuurus)  is 
nvqueni  in  (dassic.tl  prose  (Liv. -21.  12;  24,  3 :  25,6;  Cic.  Div.  2, 25;  2,4.;  iat.0,12), 
alrhouiih  the  le-Kicons  and  KiuNKK  assign  wtori<Mr«.v  10  the  poets. 

Utvi.  12s.  The  verb  esse,  with  its  compounds,  forms  the  verbal  adjective 
from  its  perfect  fui  {fiiiiiriis,  def/dilrus,  profntarus,  etc.).  For  the  iufini- 
tire  fore  and  its' derived  foruis,  see  p.  loO,  A*.  140^ 

1  Neither  me  luiii"  nor  form  of  the  adjective  in  tlrus  warrant  the  name  future  PARrr- 
riPLK  Its  ineanin-  (being  '  intention'  or  '  destinv')  implies  moi;e  than  is  contained  m 
the  idea  of  the  future  tensin  and  its  giMmmat.cal  foum  belongs  to  a  system  entin-ly 
fo'vi  M  u  he  FUTUKE.  It  is  true  that  si..ce  the  Aug:ista.i  age  some  of  tlie  functions  of 
a  narli^ciple  have  been  as-igued  to  it.  but  even  this  was  uulcnown  to  the  old  lan-ua^e 
ami  caiinot  justify  the  appelfation  '  paniclple,'  since  every  descriptive  adjective  may,  m 
certain  circumstances,  perform  the  functions  of  a  participle. 


126 


THE   VERBAL   ADJECTIVES   AS   PREDICATES. 


Bern.  1*30.  Tho  verbal  adjoctivo  in  dnn  (often  called  the  passive  parti- 
ciple of  the  future*)  is  formed  trom  tlie  stem  of  the  present  participle, 
both  active  and  deponent,  by  changing  tlie  genitive  ending  tin  into  dus,  as : 

amantis— amandua;  hnrtantis— hortandns;  monenti-i— monondns; 

Iciri'ntis — lejrendus;  cupi  •nris— cupieiidus  ;  aiidioiitis— Hiidieudua  ; 

moricaiia— iiioriendiis ;     lucutis — tueiidu:* ;  t* untis — eundus. 

Those  verbs  which  form  no  present  ]iarticiples,  as  esae^  posse,  nolle, 
malle,  quire,  7iequire,Jieri\  the  perfect  verbs  meminisse,  etc.,  most  imper- 
sonal verbs,  and  the  verb  reri,  to  calculate,  do  not  form  a  verbal  adjec- 
tive in  das  ;  nor  does  velle,  although  it  forms  a  present  i)articiple. 

Jiem.  180.  Tho  oriirinal  Ptom-ondln'j?/w)'of  tlie  present  participle  in  the  third  and  fonrth 
conjugation!*  (§  324,  1{.  2)  has  bern  pre-^ervod  in  Krveral  verbiil  adjectives  in  du.<,  t-specially 
in  f)ofiun/iu>t  (whiih  has  equal  authority  w'nh  jiofiend'is),  and  a  number  of  other  verbi*  of 
which  the  verbal  adjectives  are  occasionally  tonned  in  loid'ts,  as  dicundns.  faciundus, 
geruf}(l'(s.  fenindufi.  repetundnii.  In  certain  solemn,  particularly  le^al,  phrases,  the 
forms  in  u'nd'finn'  th>'U<ual  ones,  as  decfmriri  Ufjibn^f^rnitdis;  actio  ))ecunuT  re  pet  un  dee. 
The  verbal  adjective  m'^//^/^/.-'.  spruni,'.  descended,  (construt'd  with  the  ablative  case  or 
with  ab  or  (?.r)  always  occurs  in  this  form,  but  it  has  a  force  difTerent  from  the  other  ver- 
bal adjectives  in  diis,  havin;;  assumed  the  meuninij  of  the  participle  ortu9. 

IL  THE  VERBAL  ADJECTIVES  AS  PREDICATES. 

(PERIPHRASTIC   CONJUGATION.) 

A.  The  Periimirastic  Conjugation  ix  Gexer.\x. 

§  »i  ih».  The  verbal  ailjectives  are  used  either  attributively. 

or  PREDicATiVELY  \\\  conncction  with  tho  copula  esse  (or  vlderi). 

In  either  case  they  ass;ume  peculiar  forms  and  meanings  which, 

in  many  respects,  differ  from  tliose  of  ordinary  adjectives  and 

participles.     The  system  of  their  inflection  in  connection  with 

the  copula  is  called  '  periphrastic  conjugation.' 

Jtem.  131.  The  present  ])articiples  occiu*  as  predicate-adjectives  only  if 
they  have  in  every  respect  the  meanini^  and  force  of  ordinary  adjectives 
(>5  40G,  R.  97),  as  obedieiitem  esse,  to  be  obedient ;  nppetenfem  esse,  to  be 
easier;  sapieiiteni  esse^  to  be  wise.  They  can  nevku  be  used  in  the 
sense  of  the  Eiii^lish  progressive  form  with  the  ])resent  particijile  and  '  to 
be'  (^  333).  But  the  perfect  pauticiple,  if  used  predicatively  as  a  ver- 
bal adjective,  has  a  pecnliir  relation  to  the  similar  forms  of  the  com- 
pound tenses  of  the  ))assive  voice,  which  rcijuire  a  number  of  special 
rules  about  its  perii)hrastic  conjui^ation.  Hence  there  arc;  to  be  distin- 
ijuished  :  1)  the  periphrastic  conjuij:ation  of  the  peuff:ct  participle 
(periphrastic  participli:);  2)  the  perii)hrastic  conjui^ation  of  the  adjec- 
tive in  w/'w«  (periphrastic  future);  3)  the  periphrastic  conjugatiou  of 
the  ailjective  in  das  (i'eriphrastic  gerund  and  gerundive). 

*  The  verbal  adj.-ctive  in  d'l»  hss  no  «.'reater  chiim  to  the  name  'passive  participle  of 
tht*  future.'  than  tlie  aljcctivi-  in  Hras  to  that  or  "active  partic'ple  of  the  future,''  Only 
.n  the  r.ire-t  ca>*es  they  are  to  e  icli  otiier  iu  the  relation  of  active  and  pa^^sive.  and  we 
can  NKVER  chan<»e  ihc  active  construction  of  the  on<!  into  a  oassive  construction  of  the 
other,  ar*  i-*  always  the  case  with  the  other  tenses  and  inof)ds  of  verbs. —  '^  Fieri  forms 
neither  a  present  participle  nor  a  verbal  adjective  in  dna ;  but  the  verbal  adjective  be- 
lon^inj;  to  it,  in  meaning,  is  formed  from/ttc«rf  (faciendus). 


PERIPHRASTIC   PARTICIPLE. 


127 


Present 

iMl'EKF.  " 

Perfect  " 

Pllteuf.  " 

FUTUKE  " 

FlTTUUE  PeRF    " 


<l. 


armatus  essera. 
armatus  fucrim. 
annatus  fuissera. 


7>.  The  Periphrastic  Participle. 
§  500.  The  periphrastic  participle  expresses  a  state 
whicli  is  conceived  to  be  produced  by  some  previous  act  iden- 
tical with  the  idea  of  the  verb,  as  Oppidum  munition  est,  the 
town  is  fortified  (/.  e.,  in  a  state  of  fortification,  from  the  pre- 
vious act  of  fortifying  it),  but  opjndum  mumtur,  the  town  is 
I'ortified  (is  being  fortified).  Vires  exhaustce  sunt,  the  strength 
is  exhausted  (in  a  state  of  exhaustion,  from  previous  acts  of  ex- 
haustion) ;  but  vires  exhauriuyitur,  the  strength  is  being  ex- 
liausted  (the  acts  producing  the  exhaustion  taking  place  at  the 

time  spoken  of). 

Bern.  132.  The  conjugation  of  the  periphrastic  participle  is  the  same  as 
that  of  a  predicate-adjective  with  the  copula  (^  G4.  §  385.  ^  339,1) : 

iND.  Armiltuf?  sum.      Jam  armed  (hare  arms) ;        Subj.  armStus  sim. 
"     armatus  eram,     /  was  armed  {had  arm.<<) ; 
_,      ,  .        S  I  u-a>i  {have  been)  arrmd  \ 
armiltusfui,      -]     ^^ad  arnu) ;  f 

"      armatus  fueram.  /  had  been  armed  ; 

,,  ,  \  I  t^hall  be  armed  {shall  have  I  n       

armatus  ero,      -j     ^^^^.  \ 

"     armatus  fuero/  I  shall  have  been  armM :  "       

Present  Infinitivk,  armaium  esse,  to  be  armed  ; 
Peufkct  Infinitivk,  armuium  fuisse,  to  have  been  armed. 

Bern.  133.  The  form  of  the  periphrastic  present  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  ordinary  perfect  passive,  hut  hoth  are  different  in  meaning,  and 
anndtus  sum,  if  a  perii)hrastic  present,  means  'lam  anned,'  but,  if  it  is  an 
ordinary  ]ierfect  ]iassive,  it  denotes  '  I  icas  {have  been)  armed.'  The  con- 
lU'Ction'of  the  text  alone  can  show  in  what  sense  the  perfect  participle 
with  sum  must  be  taken.  Thus  the  l)eirinnin,ii^  of  Caesar's  Gallic  war, 
'  (itdlui  est  omnis  dirlsd  in  partes  trl'i,'  (all  Gaul  w  divided  into  three  parts) 
contains  a  periphrastic  present,  and  not  an  ordinary  perfect  passive.  But 
lliB  ni'nWucL','  Post  puf/ nam  prmta  diclsa  est'  (after  the  battle  the  booty  was 
divided)  contains  an  ordinary  perfect  passive. 

rST"  The  student's  attention  should  be  directed  to  both  the  different  rendering  of 
the  LATIN  'armatus  *v/m,' and  to  tlic  different  rendering  of  the  English  passive  into 
Latin  There  are  cerrain  verbs  in  EuLrlish  with  whose  passives  we  always  connect  the 
meanin"  of  a  state,  as  '  the  work  i<  finished,''  '  the  street  is  paved,'  '  they  are  united. 
Ill  rendering  such  passives  into  Latin,  the  periphrastic  present  must  be  used,  and  not 
the  ordinary  present  of  the  pas>^ive  voice :  opus  finlfum  est,  via  strata  est,€orguncU 
sunt  {no{  opus  finVur,  via  stemitur,  conjunguntur,  which  wmM  mean  'the  >v^>!K  is 
being  hnished.  the  street  is  being  paved,  they  are  being  muted  [are  uniting]  ).  On  the 
other  liand,  those  English  passives  hy  which  the  action  itself  is  represented  as  tak- 
ing place  at  the  time  spoken  of,  are  to  be  expressed  only  by  the  ordinary  passive, 
ag"'  lie  is  called  king,'  rex  appelldtur  (not  appelldtus  est). 

Bem.  134.  The  imperfect  of  the  periphrastic  conj nidation  of  the  parti- 
ciple has  the  form  of  the  ordinary  pluperfect  passive,  and  armatus  eram 
may  mean  '  I  was  armed'  or  '  I  had  been  armed.'  The  same  rules  which 
have  been  /?iven  tor  the  present  apply  also  to  this  form,  only  that  they 
refer  to  a  time  past :  Illo  tempore  oppidum  munitum  erat,  at  tlif.t  time  the 
town  was  fortified  {muniebCdur,  would  mean '  was  being  fortified'). 


128 


PERIPHRASTIC  PARTICIPLE. 


Rem.  \?)T).  The  tetifect  (find  the  remainder  of  the  tenses,  except  the  first 
future)  of  the  periphrastic  conjup:ation  has  a  form  of  its  own,  not  occur- 
ring in  the  ordinary  paradigm,  (armdtus  fni,  *  I  ij^an  armed,'  or  *  I  have 
been  armed').  Jani  iemplum  bis  post  Nuttkf  regnum  clanmm  fuit,  the  tem- 
ple of  Janus  teas  twice  ch)sed  after  Numa's  reign.  Liv.  1,  19. —  Amor  iUe 
in  me  tuuH  quo  semper  affeetus  fta'sti,  that  love  of  thine  towards  me  by 
whicii  tliou  /uist  always  been  aft'ectud. 

tW  In  the  use  of  the  peiupijuastic  PEnFRCT  there  are  two  relatione  to  be  noticed  : 
1)  its  relation  to  the  ordinary  perfect  passive;  2)  its  jvlatioii  to  the  periplira-^tic  im- 
perfect. As  to  tlu;  former  jxtiut,  the  (iifterence  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  pi-riphrasiic 
})res<'nt  from  the  ordinary  present  passive,  tlie  periphrastic  perfect  iiidieatini;  a  statk 
existinj^  at  t*ome  former  time,  wliile  the  ordinary  perfect  passive  denotes  tlie  act  as 
sL'cii.  *Jjuii  temphim  his  clausum  e.H'  (clausum  eat  taken  as  pekfkct)  would  simply 
refer  to  the  two  acts  of  closin;;,  after  which  the  temple  might  have  remained  in  a 
closed  state,  or  not. 

To  the  second  point  the  peneral  rules  on  the  distinction  of  the  imperfect  and  perfect 
t«nsos  must  be  applied  (see  p.  .'{02,  .SOo).  So  far  as  these  rules  apply  to  the  periphras- 
tic conj nidation,  the  student  will  notice  here  that  the  imi'ekpect  is  used: 

1.  If  the  state  de.^rrihed  is  represented  as  a  uabit,  as  '  Athenienses  litteris  et  artibus 
dediti  erant  {uol/uirunt).  (he  Athenians  were  devoted  to  littrature  and  arts. 

2.  If  the  state  described  is  repre-ented  to  have  continued  whev  anotiieii  kvent 
TOOK  PLACE,  as  '  (CcB^arlt  adcentu)  ripa  eral  acQtis  sudihus  pnefixis  mtinlta'.  At 
Ciesar's  arrival  the  shore  was  fortilied  by  point^id  posts  fastened  in  front  of  it.  Cajs. 
B.  G.  5,  18. 

The  PEHf  ECT,  Avithout  referrinc:  to  any  other  event,  simply  represents  the  state  to 
have  existed  diirinir  some  pi-riod  before  the  time  of  the  speakei:,  i.  <?.,  before  the  lime 
at  which  the  sentence  was  written  or  uttered. 

l^em.  13G.  The  ]^luperfcct  of  the  periplirasfic  participle  rejiresents  tlie 
action  as  a  state  wliich  had  tassed  bekokr  anollier  event  happened  : 
Eos  qui  in  opere  occupdti  fuerant  qucerere  instituit,  he  began  to  examine 
those  who  had  been  occupied  in  the  work. 

Z^W  In  this  sentence  the  periphrastic phiperfect  occvp'tfiftieranf  expreseea  a  state 
which  formally  had  existed,  biU  did  no  lontrer  exist  when  another  event  (the  exaniin- 
in;j^)  took  i)]ace.  The  ordinary  phiperfect  occi/pufi  eni/if  would  l)e  improp>  r  here,  l)e- 
cause  it  mii^'lit  l)e  taken  for  a  pi-riphristic  imi'Ekfkct.  which  would  imply  that  the 
workmen  were  still  emi)loyed  in  tiie  work  when  the  examitdni:  to(,ik  place.  To  avoid 
such  ambitjuities  the  periphrastic  pluperfect  is  not  rarely  use<l.  when  not  a  state,  but  a 
momentary  action  Is  refeired  to,  as :  *  Arx  CiotOnis,  situ  taiitum  natiirilli  quond.un 
ninnlta.  postea  et  muro  cincta  est,  qua  ah  Dionysio  per  (lolwrnfuera'  capta,  thi;  Crotoii 
Castle,  formerly  Ibrtitied  only  by  its  natural  site,  was  afterwards  enclosed  with  a  wall 
where  it  had  been  cai)turcd  l)y  Dionysius.  Liv.  24,  3.  Thus  Liv.  29,  G  and  often. 

Be7n.  137.  The  two  futures  of  the  periphrastic  conjugation  of  the 
participle,  which  are  of  very  rare  occurrence,  and  of  wliicli  tlie  future- 
present  has  the  same  form  as  the  ordinar}'  future-perfect,  are  used  of 
future  STATES,  the  futuke-peufect  denoting  a  state  on  which  another 
future  state  is  made  dependent, as  Quibns  rebus  clontus  iua  instnictufuerit, 
domus  erit  &rndta  men,  my  house  will  be  provided  with  the  same  things 
Avith  which  thy  house  will  have  been  furnished. 

ZW^  The  future-perfect  of  the  periphrastic  conjuiration  is  hardly  ever  found  with- 
out another  sentence  in  which  a  future-present  iscontained.  But  future-presents  of 
the  periphrastic  conjugation  are  oftenerused  alone. 

Rem.  13S.  The  infinitives  of  the  periphrastic  conju^ration  are  subject  to  the  rules  of 
predicate-adjectives,  and  the  use  of  the  tense,  if  thev  are  preilic.ite-inlinitives  in  inliiiitive 
clauses,  is  determined  by  tlie  rule  in  §  3'JO,  as:  Scribit  P(<in{)t?jnm  ciri-utnvalliltiim  ft'i^e,  he 
writes  that  Pompey  U  locki'diip  within  the  walls.  Srrip^it  Pompejuin  circumvallilnim 
esse,  he  wrote  that  Pomi)ey  lOd't  locked  up.  iScnpsit  PompGjuni  circuinvallillnm/ui.s««, 
he  wrote  that  Pompey  hail  been  locked  up. 

t^~  The  subjunctives  of  the  periphrastic  conjugation  are  regulated  by  the  rules  on 

the  consecution  of  tenses,  the  same  as  the  ordinary  verb. 


PERIPHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


129 


1.  Natio*  est  omnis  GallOrum  admodiim  dedita-  reliijionibns'.  atqueob  earn  causara 
qui  sunt  aft'ecti  gravioriljus  niorbis  admin  stns  Uruidibus*  utiintur.  C:«s.  B.  G.  6.  16.— 
2.  Hestiie"  all*  coriis» /fc/tc  sunt,  aliie  villis*  v-^tltoe.  Cic.  Nar.  D.  2,  47.—  3.  Itatjns 
confusa''  est  oiaiio,  ita  itertarb'iia^  nt  nihil  sit  primum.  nihil  secundum.  Cic.  Or.  3. 13. 
—  4.  Multaconsuetudine®  co///»/j<;/i  inter  iv^»  f-umus.  Cic.  Att.  1,  16.—  .">.  Porticus  tota 
I)atet,  et  columiue  poTitiE  siint^^.  Cic.  C^.  Fr.  3, 1, 1.—  6.  Oculi  nimisargflti"  quemadmo- 
dijiiii-  animo  afffCti  si/tnus  loquuntur.  Cic.  Otl".  3, 5. —  7.  Non  corOna*^  eonsessus^*  vester 
cnicius"  <'st,  ut  solCbai ;  non  nsitSta  frequentiai*  stii)5tii''  suinns.  Cic.  Mil.  1.  1. — 
8.  Ciesar  animadvertit*^  collem  qui  al)  hostibus  tanehiiinr  nudatum^^  (esse)  hominibus. 
Cses.  B.  G.  7.  44. —  9.  Qiiamquam  (.\ntonius)  non  adesi,  tamen  sic  (so)  animdti  es-e'^^ 
debCiis  ut  si2i  adesset.  Cic.  Phil.  9,  5. —  9.  Jubeseum  niihi  esse  affix um"^^  tiimquain^» 
niagistro.  Cic.  (j>ii.  Fr.  3,  1,  6. —  10.  VenetOrum^*  naves  ad  hunc  nioduni  facta,  anna- 
tceqiie  erant.  Cses.  B.  G.  3, 13. —  11.  Luce  prima^*  /Equi  jam  drcuynvallati^^  al)  dictatOre 
erant.  Liv.  3,  28. —  12.  Detestabilis^T  est  istOrum  immanitas^s  qui  in  esitio  patriae 
occiipati'^*  et  svnt  ot fuerant.  Cic.  Oft".  1.  17. —  13.  Te  vero  moueo  nt  omnem  gloriam  ad 
qiiam  a  XiwvrUi^^^infammatus^^fuisti.omm  cura  atque  industria  consequJlr.'.32  Cic. 
Fam.  1,  7.  9.—  H.  Ager  qui  neqne'villam^s  habuU  neque  ex  ulla  parte /wi/  cultus,  uunc 
est  cultissiinns  cum  Optima  villa.  Cic.  Rose.  Com.  12.—  15.  Tibi  autem  multo  notior^* 
mens  in  te  animus  esset.  si  hoc  tempore  omui  quo  disjuncti^^  fui/nus,  Koinae  fuissemus. 
Cic.  Fam.  1.9  1.—  16.  Constat^'  Mithridatis  copias  illo  tempore  omnibus  rebus  or- 
7/rt/i7.s-3^  atcjue  insfructas^'^fuisse.  Cic.  Man.  8,  20,—  17.  Anna,  quae.^Xrt^»  in  parietibns 
fuerant.  hiimi*"  inventa  sunt.  Cic.  I)iv.  1.  34.—  18.  Lycortas.  quia  Philopoenignis,  auc- 
tOris  omnium  qiue  Leai'dvPimtnii*^  facta  f(/e/ri»f.  factiOnis**  erat.  ita  respondit.  Liv.  .39, 
S'\—  19.  (^uocirea*'  sapiens  eOdem  nioclo  erit  affec'us  er<ra  amicum  quo^*  in  se  i|)suni. 
Cic.  Fill.  1.  20.— 20  Non  ista  qiiidem  erunt  ineiiOra,  sed  certe  co«(/7/a**  jucundius. 
Cic.  Mur.  31.—  21.  Quod  \\h\  fiierit  ]}erstidsum  huic  erit  pet:£uusum,  quod  tibi  fuerit 
j/robdtu/n  huic  erit  probatuin.  Cic.  iiosc.  Com.  1. 

C.  The  Pepjpiip.astic  Future. 

§  t5iJ>7.  The  periphrastic  future  contains  the  combination 
of  two  ideas,  namely,  1)  that  of  the  verb,  which  is  represented 
as  a  future  act  (in  the  active  voice),  being  expressed  by  the 
verbal  adjective  in  iirus ;  and  2)  that  of  the  coxceptiox  of 
this  act,  whicli  is  represented  as  different  in  time  from  the  for- 
mer, being  expressed  by  all  the  various  forms  of  the  copula 
esse.  The  usual  English  e<]uivalents  of  the  periphrastic  future 
are  objective  phrases  Avith  'I  am  (was,  etc.)  going  to,'  'I  am 
about  to',  *I  am  to',  and  soiuetimes  the  future  tense  or  poten- 
tial mood  with  'would':  Profectariis  sum,  I  am  going  to  de- 
part, am  about  to  depart,  am  to  depart. 

I?ern.  139.  While  in  the  ordinary  future  the  verbal  idea  is  represented  af»  a  future  one  in 
rej^ard  to  the  speakeu's  time,  the  periphrastic  fuiure  represents  the  verbal  idea  as  future 


»  Nation.—  2  dedere.  to  «jive,  to  devote—  »  relii^ious  rites,—  *  literal!]/,  use  the  Druids 
as  ministers,  i.e.,  make  use  of  their  ministry  (;iirency,  interposition).-  »  corium.  skin, 
lii^e.—  «  riUus.  bristle.  shaiTirv  hair.—  '  confundere.  to  confuse.—  ^ perturbdre,  to  disturb, 
to  entan-.de.-  »  L'reat  intinia(-v.—  ^^»  poire,  to  polish.—  "  bright.—  12  how,  as.—  i3  jhe 
circle  of  the  audience  —  '*  platform.-  »*  to  surround.—  »«  l)y  the  usual  throns:.—  »^  to 
crowd.—  '*  perceived.—  »»  middre,  to  denude.—  20  animdre,  to  animate.—  '^»  as  iL— 
2*''  affirjere.tn  fasten  on.—  2s  as  if.—  2*  tlie  Veneti.  a  Gallic  tribe.—  2»  at  daybreak.— 
2«  circnmral'drt.  to  encircle.  toenclo!*e.—  2t  abominable.—  ^s  brutality.—  29  occupdre, 
to  en  aj;e.—  3"  bovhood.—  3'  injiarnmdre,  to  inflame.—  ^-  eonsequi.  to  reach,  to  pursue.— 
33  a  du^Uintr  (in  "the  conntrv).—  ^*  nofns.  known.—  ^s  disjungere.  to  separate.—  >«  it  is 
k,„,wn  —  37  omdre,  to  provide.—  38  instruere,  to  furnish.—  3^  figere.  to  fix.  to  fasten.— 
*<>  on  the  {jround.—  *»  Norn.  LaMdcemon,  Greek  3  decl.—  ••'  faction.—  "  therefore.— 
<4  ns.—  <*  cond'ire,  to  spice. 


130 


PERirHRASTTC   FUTURE. 


Impekfect    " 
Pkkfect        " 

Pluperfect  " 

FiTT.  Phes,    " 
FuT,  Pkuf.   " 


ecriptflrus  cspcm. 
scriptflrus  fucrira. 
BcriptQrus  fuisscm. 


in  rrcr^rd  to  the  time  of  the  srBJFCT,  hnt  scpnrates  from  it  the  coxckpttov  of  the  act 
refcrnn,!;  it>*  mm;  to  that  of  the  speakkk.  Tlie  seiitruct',  '(;ijus  U  Roinf'  to  depart  ' 
represents  th.-  net  of  depautino  as  ri'TruK  in  reirard  to  the  Mihject  Gains  Init  iri- 
aicates  at  the  isanie  tinje  that  the  Conception  of  the  act  is  piu>knt  in  ie"-ard  to  the 
SPEAiiEu's  time.  In  the  Pentence,  'Gajns  ?<UM,'oiiii;  to  depart.'  the  concepTum  of  the 
act».!  dep.ir-in-  is  represented  as  a  past  one  in  re-ard  to  tlie  speakeu's  time  Thua 
in  Latin  m  the  sentence.  'Gajns  i)rof.Tiarns  est  (erat).'  the  verbal  adj.ctivc  in  ilms  ex- 
presses iliat  ilie  time  of  departing;  is  fuinre  in  regard  to  tiie  si-bject  Gains,  and  the  co'i). 
uia  fy!t  (erat)  inrhcates  that  the  concepiiou  of  the  act  is  a  present  or  a  past  one  in  VQ^r^vd 

to  the  SPKAKEi:.  ^  o      " 

The  periphrastic  fntnre  is  conjngated  after  the  following,'  scheme  : 
Present      Ind.    t=criptnrns  gum.  /  mn  going  to  u/ite,  am    Subj.  scriptQrus  sim 
about  to  U'Hte,  atn  to  u/ite. 

scriptflrus  eram,  I  teas  going  {was  about,       ' 
etc.)  to  IV rite. 

ecriptflrns  fni,  /was  going,  etc.,  to  wiVe 
{would  have  wHtten). 

Bcriptflru!*  Uxaxam,  I  had  been  going,  etc.,  to       ' 
ivrife. 

Bcriptnnifioro,  Ishall be  going,  etc.,  to  tvHte.  

script Orns  fnero,  /  shall  have  been  about,  

etc.,  to  write. 

Presknt  Txfimtivk.  Scriptflrnm  esse,  that  J  am  (ira^)  going  to  write  (will  wHte) 
1  eufect  Infinitive.  Scriptflrum  fuisse,  that  I  ivould  have  written. 

Jiem.  140.  Thecopn'a<'.w.  and  tlie  compounds  of  «.w^  as  an  independent  verb   in  the 
penphrasticfufure.  take  the  form////'/7/m-  xmn  ^eranufui.  etc.\  I  am  ^oiiiirto  be,  ain  to  be 
etc   (prnfufurffs  ,vnn.  I  am  -011.-  to  benefit).     These  forms  of  The  copula  are  inostlv  used 
with  |.re(licate-adj.-eiivesand  nouns,  but  also  with  su.h  completiinr  predicates  as  may  be 
connected  with  thecpnla  (§  4r4foll.),  and  as  independent  verb-,  in  tlie  meanin<-'  to  rii.t 
J!.o.J      t;'^iN   <-tc  i§4Ti».  as  Sain^,,i.^/utnn>.-<.sNm.  I  am  prnin^'  to  be  wise;  sapiens  fuf/f". 
rti.^  pr«w,  erc.j  hocjnturumeM  si,  etc..  this  will  be  the  c:.se  if.  etc.    Instead  of  the  pri rnt 
uAunUw^'Ju  urume>^s<e,  there  is  a  collatenl  {ormfore.  (<z//or^.;>ni'/b7V,  etc.),  which,  in  con- 
rection  with  predicate-a<ljectives  and  nouns,  i<  more  usual  than  the  re-ular  form   futu. 
rum  esse,  as  Sjyero  eosconfenta^/ore,  I  hope  thev  will  be  .-atisfu'd.    Instead  of  the  iVnner- 
lect  subjunctive ////^7/v/.s-e«w/i.  esses,  etc..  th.-re  are  also  the  rolliteral  fnrm^  forem  fore<f 
n>ret,forent  (xu^  jortnms.forms),  which  Saliii-t.  Livv.  and  later  writers  olteii  use'ln  the 
mean-iii^  of  e<sein.  esses,  etc.,  as  quot  miUia  captaforent,  how  many  thousands  had  been 
capturea.  Liv.  4.),  2. 

Rem.  141.  The  present  tense  of  the  pcripliraslir  futiiro  roprosonts  an 
act,  FUTURE  to  tlie  SUBJECT,  as  conceived  at  a  time  present  to  the 
SPEAKER.  The  piesent  conception  is  repi-esented  either  1)  as  an  inten- 
tion (ie>;ohitioii,  expectation)  hy  the  activity  of  the  subject,  or  as  an 
anticipation  of  wh;it  is  to  lie.  This  anticfpalion  maybe  2)' a  merely 
EXTERNAL  one  (the  i.mpendinq  of  something),  or  a)  a  logical  one  (pre- 
supposition), representing  the  fatnre  act  as  a  result  of  sour,  present 
activity.  For  the  first  case  we  generally  use  the  English  et|iilvalents  'I 
intend  to  , '  I  am  going  to',  '  I  am  resolved  nj^on',  '  I  wish,  e.\i)ert  to'  (See 
examples  1-7.)  For  the  second  case  the  nsnal  eqnivalents  are'  I  am  abont 
to/1  am  on  the  point  of,  '1  am  to',  I  am  going  to'.  (Ex.  S-14  )  For 
the  third  case  there  are  the  equivalents  'I  am  to',  'I  am  expected  to'  '  I 
w\ant  to',  (Ex.  15-20);  as:  ' 

^f,\  XT  "^-^  Officio  illo  Hbdicatflrus  est,  he  inf^nd<  (lo  goinj.  etc.)  to  resign  this  nnsHinn 
—  (&)  Navis  qu;e  jam  in  p(»rtiim  inveciflra  est.  a  ship  that  is  afjonf  to  {on  the  mAnt  of 
eic.)  enter  (he  7)^/7.— (o  Instrumentum  quo  iHOru-  sum.  ad  laborem  accommudatuiu 
esse  oportet,  an  instrument  which  lam  (e.rjjected)  to  use  must  be  lit  for  the  work. 
tK*^  For  the  copula  m«.  the  passive  vidtri.  to  seem,  mav  be  substituted  to  express 
inat  tne  future  act  *w//i.s' to  be  conceived  in  a  certain  manner,  as:  Profecturus  videris 
thou  seemest  to  be  on  the  point  of  departure  (it  seems  that  von  are  about  to  depart)' 
^ut  the  periphrastic  future  with  rid?ri  may  also  be  considered  as  a  construction  of  the 
nominative  with  the  infinitive,  (See  Rem.  147.)  o^uv^nou  ui  mc 


PERirHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


131 


J 


1    Nihil  de  cOrnm  eentontifi  dictHrvs  sum  gui  tnrpissimam  servitfltemi 
nomine  appellant.  C;es.  B.  G.  7,17.—  2.  Qui  reipublicte  ;>ra/M/^7?'i  sw/<^  duo  i 
pnpcepta  teneaiit.    Cic  Off.  1,  25.—  3.  \irls  nostr.is  cum  rebus  quas  tentc 


dedltiOnis' 
ilia  PlatOni» 

H-..^..,,-*  -■' -- ~ -       tentatnH  sumui 

comparare  oportet.  Sen.  'i'ranq.  5.—  4.  Injiiiiam  qui  fact ilrvs  est  jam  tacit.  Sen.  Ira  1, 
1.—  5.  Quotusipiisqut!  (§-2(il.  R.  lO)  tam  patiens  est,  ut  velif  discere  quod  in  usu  non 
sit  habitilrus!'  iMin.  Kp.  '«,  14,  3.—  «.  A  capessentibns^  rempublicjim  adhibeatur  tranqiiil- 
litas  animi.  sicpii  lem*  nee  anxii»  futuri  sunt,  et  cum  dii,'nitate  victuri^.  Cic.  Off.  1.  '21.— 
7.  Facite  quod  vobis  libct.  datiirns  non  sum  amplin-".  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2.  19.  —  8.  Belliim 
snipfurus  sum  quod  Populus  Ronianus  cum  Juirurthii  p:essit.  Sail.  Jug.  5,—  9.  Qiuini 
exameii'' apium  e-ri^r</-////i  f^V,  soleut  pra>Tre«  si{?na ;  qiium  jam  erolaturce  sunf.^,  conso- 
n  int>o  vehemei.ter.  Varro  li.  R.  3.  IH.—  10.  Catuli"  qui  jam  dispecf uri  sunt^^,  cxci  aeqne 
eti»  ei  sunt  (jiii  inodo>*  nati.  Cic.  Fin.  4.  23.—  11.  Placet,  quoniamis  omnis  disputatio»» 
de  oflicio  fi/fura  est,  antea  deflniri  quid  sit  offlcium.  Cic.  Off.  1,  2.—  12.  Si  unS^^  inferi- 
turusest  animus  cum  corpore,  vos  tamen  inomoriam  nostri  pie  inviolatequei**  servabitis. 
Cic.  Sen.  22  —  13.  (iuid  tiineam  si  aut  non  miser  post  mortem,  ant  beatii<  etiara  futdrus 
sum*  Cic.  Sen.  19.—  14.  Cum  tali  hoste  pugnaturi  estis,  milites  ;  reliquias  extrCmas 
lio-tium,  non  hostem  habStis.  Liv.  21,  40.—  15.  Tu  veio,  Varro,  bene  meriturus  mihi 
rid^'vi^iW  {for)  tuis  civihus.  si  eos  auxerisi»  copia  verbOrnm.  Cic.  Acad.  1.  7.-16.  Quia 
non  labOro-o  quam  valde  ea  qme  dico  prof^afiirus  sim,  eo  miuussi  conturbor.  Cic.  Fam.  1, 
7._  17.  c'lim  hi-'  ver.<an;^''  qui  te  meliOrem  facfun  sunt,  eos  admitte  quos  tu  potes  facere 
meliores.  Sen.  Ep.  7.—  IS.  Quis  bomisdubitaf"  pro  patrul  mortem  oppetere^*,  si  ei  sit 
nrofuturnsf  Cic.  Off.  1.  17.—  19.  Meilquidem  sententia  paci  qn;e  nihil  habitura  sit  iu- 
sidiaruin-»'semperconsiilere  oportet.  Cic.  OtT,  1,  11.—  20.  RespersasS*  manus  sanguine 
paterno  judices  vidvant  oportet,  si  tantum  facinus  tam  innn^im'^''  credUuri  sunt.  Cic. 
Kosc.  Am.  24. 

Rem.  142.  The  periphrastic  future,  being  subject  to  the  law  of  con- 
secution (i^  ?A*d),  requires  its  sul)junctive  mood  to  be  in  the  imperfect  if 
the  principal  predicate  is  one  of  the  past  tenses. 

1.  Orf^ctorixperfacileesse  prohavit'»,  conata"  ilia  pcrflcere,  qnod  ipse  suae  civitatis 
•mperiiun  obt-nfilrus  esset.  Cies.  B.  G.  1.  3.—  2.  Civiiates  illas  leddi  mihi  aequum  cen- 
sChain'o.  non  quia  maj;na  accessio"  ea  reiriii  futili^a  esset.  sed  quia.  etc.  Liv.  39,  38.— 
3.  Lacedjemonii.  Philippo  minitante  per  litteras,  se  omnia  qute  conarentur  prohibi- 
tilriim''-,  qu.'esiverunt  niim  se  etiam  esset  mori  prohibiturus?  Cic.  Tusc.  5.  42.—  4.  Quae- 
vita  fuissei  Priamo,  si  ab  adolesceniiascisset,  quos  eveutus  senectfltis  esset  habiturus? 
Cic.  Div.  2,  22. 

/iVw.  143.  The  imperfect  and  perfect  tenses  of  the  periphrastic 
fiilure  are  u.sed  1)  to  rejjre.sent  an  event  which  is  future  in  regard  to 
the  SI  iWECT,  as  having  been  conceived  or  imi)ending  at  a  time  past  to 
XW  sPE.MvER,  as  Atheniemes  clucem  classis  ejus  quam  in  Siciliam  erant 
iimsuri  jrcdvirunt  Alcibiadem,  the  Athenians  elected  Alcibiades  leader  of 
the  11  .'t  which  they  were  about  to  send  to  Sicily. — Nunc  jam  quod  cre- 
dit ii  IS  ful  omne  c/'-edidi,  now  I  have  entrusted  all  (to  thee)  that  I  was 
go-  g  to  entrust.  Plant.  Most.  2,  3.—  2)  as  a  collateral  form  of  the  ordi- 
V  /y  pluperfect  subjunctive  of  hypothetical  clauses  (§  350),  denoting  that 
an  event  would  have  taken  place  if  (or  if  not)  another  event  had  hap- 
jiened,  as  R'qem  occisnrusfui  si  in  sententia  mansisset,  I  would  have  killed 
the  king  if  (in  the  case  that)  he  had  retained  his  o\)\moi\.— Si  agendo 
arnientum  in  speluncam  cvmpulissei,  ipsa  vestigia  qucerentem  chminum  eo 
deduddra  erant,  if  he  had  taken  the  herd  by  driving  into  the  cavern,  the 

»  elavery.—  '  dedition.—  >  rempublicam  cnpessere,  to  aspire  to  public  otfices.—  <  if 
(.l<-c._  6  iidl  of  cares.—  «  Both  rivei^e  and  vincere  form  the  verbal  adjective  victurus. 
Tlie  connection  must  decide  which  of  the  two  verbs  is  meant.—  ^  swarm.—  «  precede.— 
»  to  lly  out.—  >»  to  make  a  strong  noise.—  "  a  young  dog.—  ^^  d'lspicere,  to  see.— 
1»  agueet,  the  same  as.—  1*  just.-  >'  since.—  ^»  discussion.—  ^''  together.—  ^^  un- 
tarni.-hed.--  »"  aliqiiem  copia  i'crburum  augZre,  to  increase  ono's  stock  (store)  of  words.— 
ao  to  care.-  ^»  the  less,—  22  to  associate.— •■'>  to  hesitate.— 2«  to  seek,  to  meet.— ''secret 
treachery.—  2«  rej^persus,  drijiping.-  '"  enormous.—  =8  in  the  text  of  Cjesar  stands  probat 
as  '  historical  present'  with  the  force  of  probarit.—  ^9  conatvm,  an  undertaking.—  so  to 
deem.—  "  accession.—  "*  that  he  would  prohibit. 


130 


PERirHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


in  rojjird  to  the  time  of  the  prBJKCT.  bnt  PcpHratc*  from  it  the  coxcKPTTojf  of  the  act, 
referring  it;*  tinu;  to  that  <»f  the  si'eakku.  The  sentence,  '(rijiis  f-«  gjoin^  to  depart,' 
rej)resents  the  art  of  depaktino  «s  rrTURK  in  regard  to  the  fubjeet  Uaju!».  hut  in- 
dicates jit  lilt;  sanu'  time  that  the  cmception  of  the  act  is  puk-knt  in  regard  to  ilie 
SPEAivKu's  time,  in  tiie  sentence,  'Gajns  ?ra-'>' going  fo  depart,'  the  conception  of  the 
act  (tf  dep:ir'in:_'  is  represented  as  a  past  one  in  n-gard  to  tiie  speakek's  time.  Tliua 
in  Latin,  in  tlie  sentence,  'CJajiis  ))i()fectflrns  est  (enit),'  the  verbal  adjective  in  i/nts  ex- 
pri'sses  that  the  time  of  departing  is  fninre  in  regard  to  tlic  siiwect  Gajns,  and  tiie  cop- 
ula e^t  (tnif)  inrlicates  that  the  couceptiou  of  tiie  act  is  a  present  or  a  past  one  in  regard 

to  tile  SPK  AKEi:. 

The  i)eriphraHtic  fntnre  ig  conjugated  after  the  following  scheme  : 

Present      Ind.    scriptnrns  pnm.  /  ayn  ffoing  to  write,  am    Subj.  scriptQrus  sim. 
about  to  icntc,  am  to  iciite. 

Imperfect    *'       scriptflrus  eram,  I  was  going  (was  about,       "      scriptflrus  cssem. 
etc.)  to  icnfe. 

Perfect        "       ecriptflms  fni, /7rrt.f  going,  etc.,  to  W7'ife       "      scriptOras  fnerira. 

{would  have  wHtten). 

Pluperfect"       6cri|)taru!S  fiieram,//ia(/66^n  j/ot^, etc.,  ^o        "      PcriptQrus  fuisscm. 

wnte. 
FiiT.  Pres,    "       scr\p\Qvn!iOTO,  Is/iall  be  going,  etc.,  to  wnte.  

FuT.  Pkrf.   "       scriptQrns  fnero,  /  s/uill  have  been  about,  

ete.,  to  IV rite. 

Presknt  TxFiNiTivK.  Scriptflrnm  esse,  that  I  am  (waA  going  to  write  {xcill  icrite). 
Peufect  Infinitive.  Hcriptilium  luisse,  that  I  would  have  written. 

Hem.  110.  Tlie  copn!a  f.<J.NV,  and  tlie  compounds  of  «mp.  as  an  independent  verb,  in  the 
periphrastic  fnf  ure,  take  1  lie  Uinwfutaru,^  sum  iennn.fui,  etc.>,  I  am  going  to  he,  am  to  lie 
etc.  ipi-ofutiin/^'  ifi/m.  I  am  iroing  to  benefit).  These  forms  of  the  copula  are  mostly  used 
with  preilicate-adjeciives  and  nouns,  but  also  with  su -h  completing  predicates  as  may  be 
cotinected  with  thecpula  (§  4»)4foll.),  and  as  imh-pendent  verbs,  in  the  meaning' to  exi-f, 
to  be  the  case,'  etc.  i§47l>),  as  Sapiens futuru.-i  sum.  I  am  going  to  be  wise;  mpit^nsfutil- 
nis  eram,  etc. ;  hoc fnt arum eM  si,  etc..  this  will  be  the  c.ise  if.  etc.  Instead  of  the  present 
intinitive////<7rM?/i^W(?,  there  is  a  collateral  iorm  fore,  {a/fore,  pnefore,  vie), which,  in  con- 
nection with  predicate-adjectives  and  nouns,  is  more  tisual  thaii  thii  re<:ular  form,  fufrt' 
rum  esse,  as  S/)ei'o  eo-^  con  tent  os/vr*'.  I  hope  they  will  be  satisfied.  Instead  of  the  imoer- 
fect  subjunctive. /'///'7?v/,s' ^.fvfm.  esses,  etc..  there  are  also  the  collateral  iorm» forem.  fore<t, 
foret.forent  {ni>  j'</remug. /oretls),  which  Sullu-t.  Livy.  and  later  writers  often  use  in  the 
meaning  of  esseth.  esse^,  etc.,  as  quot  miliia  captaforent,  how  many  thousands  liad  been 
captured.  Liv.  4.'),  2. 

Rem.  141.  The  ptiesent  tense  of  tlio  poriphrnslic  fiitiiro  represents  an 
act,  FUTURE  to  the  subject,  as  conceived  at  a  time  present  to  the 
SPEAKER.  The  present  conception  is  represented  either  1)  as  an  inten- 
tion (ie;^()liition,  exju'Ctation)  by  tiie  activity  of  tlie  subjf:ct,  or  as  an 
ANTICIPATION  of  wli:it  is  to  be.  Tliis  anticipation  may  be  2)  a  merely 
EXTERNAL  one  (the  impenuinq  of  something),  or  3)  a  logical  one  (pre- 
supposition), representing  the  future  act  as  a  re.sult  of  some  |)resent 
activity.  For  the  first  case  we  generally  use  the  English  equivalents,  *! 
intend  to', '  I  am  going  to',  '  I  am  resolved  upon',  '  I  wish,  expect  to'.  (See 
examjiles  1-7.)  For  the  second  case  the  usual  erpiivalents  are'  I  am  about 
to', 'I  am  on  the  i)oint  of ',  '  1  am  to',  I  am  going  to'.  (Ex.  8-14.)  For 
the  third  case  there  are  the  equivalents  '  1  am  to',  '  I  am  expected  to', '  I 
want  to',  (Ex.  15-20);  as: 

(a)  Se  ab  officio  illo  rtbdicatflrns  est,  he  intend''  (is  goin7,  etc.)  to  resign  this  position. 
—  (^)  Navis  qute  jam  in  portiim  inveciflra  est.  a  ship  that  is  alxnit  to  (on  thejunntof, 
etc.)  enter^ the  /jo/A— (c)  Instrumentuin  quo  usani!*  sum.  ad  lal)orem  accomtnodatuiu 
esse  oportef,  an  instruinent  ivhick  I  am  (exjyeeteU)  to  rise  must  be  lit  lor  the  work. 

^^"  For  the  copula  esse,  the  passive  ridtri,  to  seem,  may  be  substituted  to  express 
that  the  future  act  «f^/zw  to  be  conceived  in  a  certain  manner,  as:  Ptvfecturus  viderls, 
thou  seemest  to  be  on  the  point  of  departure  (it  seems  that  you  are  about  to  depart). 
But  the  periphrastic  future  with  vid^ri  may  also  be  considered  as  a  construction  of  the 
riOmiuative  with  the  infinitive.  (See  Rem.  147.) 


PERIPHRASTIC  FUTURE. 


131 


r 


s 


1    Nihil  de  comm  eententiS  didili^s  *.^/m  qui  tnrpissimam  servitfltemi  decVitiOnis» 

J.  iMiiu  uc  Luiiiiw  7  -.T  _  2    Oiii  reii)ublic;ey)ropA//'7?Y«w/t/.  duo  ilia  Platonis 

S;-i"enta'tSa    *  "cTc"  Off   l^25:- 3    V  riril'ostnis  cim^Vebus  quas  tentatnri  ..m.. 

?on  D-    'i^e  <S^^      Sen.  Tranq.  5-  4.  Injuriam  qui  fact  tJrm  est  jam  lacit.Sen.  Ira  1, 

compa.  arc     port  t^.^^         r    ^         ^^^^  j^atiens  est,  ut  velit  discere  qnod  in  nsn  non 

lit  AflAiS  S  /  '  n^  Ep .^8,  1 1  8.-  H.  A  ca^pessentii)us3  retTipublic^am  «/  l^^^^f  oV ^T"^" 
1  tas  animi.  sicpiiiem*  nee  auKU^/'ituvi  sunt,  et  ^^^Yl-^^cfi^^^^^^i"^^  ^9  -  S  Bell  im 
7.  F:.c.te  quod  vobis  libet.  dafurus  n.m  *vm  ampl  u-.  tic  \  ei .  ^,  2  19  -  « •  «^  "JJ 
ftrrinfuru^t  su/n  uuod  Populns  Komanus  cum  Juirurthii  gessit.  !?all.  Jug.  5.-9.  <^iium 
evlm  .7' at,i.miTSLv/m.>V.  Solent  pra>Tre«  signa ;  q.uim  jam  erolatarcB  synt\  con^o- 
?nn    0  V,.  JZ"  ,er    Variv^  U.K.  3.  16.-  K».  Catuli"  qni  jam  dispecfuri  ^«"/^Vcieci  seque 

e  .i  ei  sunt  qui  modoM  nati.  Cic.Fin^  4.  -23.-  11.  ^'^''^-y'^ ^TT     T'^ rm'l'^^^^^^^ 
de  otliclo  futura  est,  antea  definiri  quid  sit  officium.  Cic.  Off.  1,  2,—  12    iM  una^^  tnreri 
L  .V  .;Aun  mis  cum  corpore,  vos  tlmen  momoriam  m.stri  pie  >n\»"l^^fq"«;,  ,^^^^^^^^^^ 
Cic   Sen   -22-  13.  (hiid    iineam  si  aut  mm  miser  post  im)rteniaut  bearti- enara /-w^^TrM* 
'.m?  Cic  Sen    ]9.i   14.  Cum  tali  hoste  pugnafuri  e.//^,  inilites  ;  rehquias  extrSmas 
ho"  ium  non  hostem  habStis.    Liv.  21,  40.-  15.  Tu  ve.o,  Varro,  bene  f  ^J^'"  'f  ™  l^ 
rhllri^ivifor)  tuis  civlhus.  si  eos  auxerisi»  copia  verbun.m.  C.c.  Acad.  1    ..- lb    Qiiia 
n  n  labony»  quam  valde  ea  quje  dico  prof^adlrus  sim,  eo  minus^    conturbor.  Cic.  F^ni  1, 
mm  "»or       q u^  ,.^r.<an-^-^  qn   te  meliOrem  facturi  sunt,  eos  admitte  quos  tu  potes  lacere 
meliOivs    Sen   El    7  -  Is.^Ouis  bo.uisdubitat"  pro  patruT  mortem  oppetere^S  si  ei  «< 
rr!>r^«>;/sV^Cic  Off  1.17-19.  Meaquidem   sententia  paci  qu;e  nihil  Aflft^^Sra  ^i<  in- 
siSmi^»'-cVipeVcons.lere(.portet.    Cic.  Off,  1,  11.-   20.  Kespersa.^»  .nanus  sangmne 
Kitcr.rjt.dicervid.auto^  lantum  facinus  tarn  immane"  cr£(/i^art  mM.  Cic. 

{(isc.  Am.  24. 

Rem  143    The  periphrastic  future,  being  subject  to  the  law  ot   con- 
secution (§  ;UD),  requires  its  subjunctive  mood  to  be  in  the  imperfect  it 
the  principal  predicate  is  one  of  the  past  tenses. 

1    Or'-etorixperfacileesse  probavit's,  conata""  ilia  perficere,  qnod  ipse  sn?e  civitatis 
:n  ped  un  X^^Tm.  .....7.  cSs.  B.  G.  1.  3.-  2.  Civi.ates  iHas  reddi  mihi  sequum  cen- 

sOi  am"    non  quia  magna  accessio»»  ^tavc^zm  futura  esset.^aA  qnia.  etc.  Liv.  39,  .3b.— 
3    Kced\emo.i?i.  Philimx.  minitante  per  Utteras  se  omnia  qmeconareim^^^  proh  b^- 
tfiriim»2  Quje^iverunt  mini  se  et  am  esset  mori  prohtbitur^isf  Cic.  Tnsc.  5.  4-— ?•_ «^i»» 
vita  fiii/set  Priamo,  si  ab  adolescentiSscisset,  quos  eventus  senecttttis  esset  habiturus? 
Cic  Div  2  22. 

Rfm  143  The  niPEUFECT  and  perfect  tenses  of  the  periphrastic 
future 'are  u.sed  1)  to  represent  an  event  which  is  future  in  regard  to 
the  suiuECT,  as  having  been  conceived  or  impending  at  a  time  past  to 
tlie  SPE\KER,  as  Athenieims  ducem  ckmis  ejus  quam  m  btcUiam  erant 
mi^snri,crean'runt  Alclbiadem,  the  Athenians  elected  Alcibiades  leader  ot 
the  lleet  which  they  were  about  to  send  to  Sicily.— iV'^^MC  jam  quod  cre- 
dit arun  ful  omnecredidi,no\y  I  have  entrusted  all  (to  thee)  that  I  was 
iroing  to  entrust.  Plant.  Most.  2,  3.-  2)  as  a  collateral  lorm  of  the  ordi- 
nary pluperfect  subjunctive  of  hypothetical  clauses  (^  3o0),  denoting  that 
an  event  would  have  taken  place  if  (or  if  not)  another  event  had  hap- 
pened as  Renem,  occimrmfui  d  in  sente/itid  mansmet,  I  would  have  killed 
the  kin.- if  (in  the  case  that)  he  had  retained  his  oi^imon.— Si  agendo 
armentum  in  speluncam  compulmet,  ipm  vedigia  queerentem  dominmneo 
deductura  erant,  if  he  had  taken  the  herd  by  driving  into  the  cavern,  the 

1  slavery  —  2  dedition.—  «  rempnblicam  cnpessere,  to  aspire  to  public  offices.—  <  if 
eue  -  »  inll  of  care."-  «  Both  rivere  an(i  vvicere  form  the  verbal  adjective  victurus. 
The  connect  ion  must  decide  which  of  tlie  two  verbs  is  meant.-  '  '^wann.-  precede.- 
•  to  t?y  mi  .-  ''  to  make  a  strong  noise.-  "  a  yonng  dog.-  ^^  dmncere  to  see  - 
1»  PC/ /L/  the  same  as.-  i*  just.-  »»  since.-  i«  discussion.-  ^\  together.-  »«  im- 
tarni-hed  -  ^»  diauem  copia  vrvbdrum  auglre,  to  increase  ono's  stock  (store)  of  words.- 
io  to  care  -  ='  he  less.-  "^'^  to  associate.-  -^»  to  hesitate.-  ^*  to  seek  to  meet-  »  secret 
treachery  -  "  rm^ersu^,  dripping.-  «  enormous.-  ^8  In  the  text  of  Caesar  stands  pr^f 
as  'historical  piVsenC  with  the  Force  oi  probdvit.-  ^»  condtvm,  an  undertaking.-  '«  to 
deem.—  •»  accession.—  "» that  he  would  prohibit. 


132 


PEIiirHllASTIC   FUTURE. 


ver}'  tracks  would  have  led  thither  the  owner  when  searchini:.  Li  v.  1,  7 


it7ni»'titnrv.<era(  (wlw»,  at  Ihal  time,  war-  contemplating  to  become  ;tls«»  a  candulaic  lor 
llie  a'dilf>hip>.  Ijv.  25,  5.  Ex.  1-3.  »i.  t^o  when  tiio  ini- iided  a.t  i-  rcpivsenttfd  a:^  iiul.ti- 
iiitelv  ivp.-ated  (Ex.  4). -But  tlie  PEnFECT  represents  the  contemplation  (m  inipeiidmi;  as 
a  coMipIet.-d  past  ev.-nt  without  reference  to  any  paiticuhir  lime:  Quid  fiortiia  oiuj.<  jnit 
i^usriid,  si  urfjtm  relicirui  fmvuisf  ('if  we  were  to  leave  the  city';  n..l  merely  refeirin- 

-        -■      In  Ex.  r.  the  two  ten.^es  are  si^Miiticaniiy 


would  have  done 


s  pre — -     -.--,-  ,  .  . 

colni;  to  prevent  by  arms*  (i.  e.  he  did  vot  prevent  it,  but 
not  been  revoked).  Liv.  2.5,  4.  If  so  conceived,  the  impeufect  represents  1)  the  action  as 
reaily  intended  or  impending,  and  that  it  would  hare  come  to  pa^:*  but  lor  some  other 
event:  Oferendum  i/ltra  rati  quod  a/nissiin  trant,  tliinkin»?  they  ^^hould  v«.luntaiily  oiler 


ubjunctive:    (^uod  fucturi  fxi- 
...  ...  .  ^ 

e 


distin«'iiished  from  an  ordinary  hvpolhetical  pluperfect  ,-     .,  , 

7n,/.>-  (=Ucl<>^^mn^)  si  (Vde<  nosine  dtjinr/rassent,  wliicli  we  would  have  done  if  our  house 
hid  burned  down.   Liv.5.r.3.     See  Ex."  1.3.  15.  Ki.-Sometimet»  the  phiptrject  snUjunctit 
of  the  periphrastic  future  occurs  with  a  bimilar  f<.rce,  but  combining,'  the  hvpolhetical 
conception  with  that  of  a  destinv  (Ex.  17).  or  that  of  a  conternphiled  action  (Ex.  U). 


nam  modo  toleralMix  fututa  Etruria  fui.sgtt.  si  quid  in  Sainnio  adcerd  ejtnisstt  (how 
Etruria  w..uUl  have  been  toh-rable  if  etc.).  Liv.  10,  4:^.—Admone>'t€  Jorfuna,  quid,  «  /tos- 

-  See  Ex.  18,  aiKt  the  past-atres  quoted  pi>. 


te7n  habul'iMivis,  ca.^Hruiiifuit'si't.   lb.  :is.  4f).    „-..-,         ,  ,     ,•  •   .-  i.      .  i,„ 

443  and  444.  If.  howevj-r,  the  hvpolhetical  sentence  is  a  modal  clau>e  (introducecl  i»y 
ut.  '  so  that',  qnin,  '  that  \  '  but  that  \  or  an  equivalent  relative),  or  in  the  instance  men- 
tioned p  419,  Obs.  7,  the  perfect  subjunctive  is  used  instead  of  a  pluperf-ct.  eettinj;  aside 
the  law  of  consecution,  a^:  Ea  res-  fantum  tunvdt'iin  pnel»nt  ut,  nisi  castra  extra  >irt)em 
/uisseTif,  efiimra  se  otnnl^  mnltitudo  fu<rif.  Liv.  2»), !(».— Si  rita  >^uppetiss^t,  haud  dulnuin 
fuitquin'tumin  pa-^aesHOne  reqni  rdictilrus /uerit.  lb.  40.  .545.— (Uixii).  C<///J//fw//i  ejus 
exsUium  ruina  nrbis  secuturafuerit,  dainnan  se  a  civibus  pa-^sum  e.^se.  lb.  2o.  4.  See  j-.x. 
23,  and  p.  444.— For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  of  the  periphrastic  future  with  the  force 
of'a  future  subjunctive  see  p.  448  foil.  ,  .-  .  ,  i  «       »  o 

1.  Ilelvetii  fiumentum  oinne,  pranerqtiami  quod  secum  ))orfafun  eranf,  combariiiit.' 
Cies  B  (J  1,5.—  2.  Uuo  die  id  plebis  conc\\\\un /uttlrum  fuemf.  consul  claiii  in  Sici- 
lians abiit.  Liv.  27,  5.— 3.  Le-^aii  Uaili  petiCruut  a  Carihaiiiniensihus  auxiha  adver- 
Bus  GneciaTU.  cni  Ulatrirus  helium  Darius  erat.  Just.  10. 1.-  4.  Vedius  l»olho  servos  suos 
objici6l)at3  murienis*  quas  esilnu^  erat.  Sen.  Clem.  1,  18.—  5.  Qui  occisurux  fratrem/^/t^ 
habeat  irjltos  pat'-rnos  deos  ;  qui  periturus  fraterno»  scelere /'/«7,  perfuiriu-n  in  patris 
misericordia  habeat.  Liv.  40,  10.— (i.  Quod  consilium  vestruni«  fu.-rit  scire  veliin.  ruin 
hostibus  nosiris  consilia  communicastisT  et  arma  consociutfiri^  Juistis.  Seditiosi  illi  qui 
Vit)eUiutn9  sequcbantur,  Rhe_'ium.  urhem  opuU*iitam.  hablturi  peri)etuam  sedem  erant, 
nee  populum  n.'C  socios  Populi  Komani  ultro  (on  theirpart)  lace-mtilri.  Sucronemneio 
vos  domicilium»»  haMtftri  eratis  ?  Ubi  si  vos  relinqueivni.  deos  implonlre  debehfltis.  qiKul 
noil  rediretis  domum.     Viam  consilii  pcelerati'^   exsequn3_v(doj_2Hspaniani  i)rivvi^ 

~»  Except~^2to  biarn.—  »  to  throw  before.—  '  murceaa,  a  murena,  a  lart,'e  fish,  a  fa- 
vorite delicacy  of  the  ancients.—  *  brotherly  ;  here  used  instead  o^  fratris.—'  •  Scipio 
addresses  a  band  of  poldiers  of  the  army  in  Spain  who  had  risen  in  arms  ajjainst  their 
officers,  under  the  lead  of  some  deiua«?oi;ues.—  ^  consilia  communicdre,  to  treat.—*  arma 
a)n.<iocidre,  to  make  common  cause.—  »  Scipio  refers  to  another  military  insurrection 
under    Vibellius.  a  military  tribune.—  i»  Suc7V,  a  small   Spanish  town.—  "  domicile. 

—  12  criminal.—  '^  to  trace  up. 


T 


i 


PERIPHRASTIC  FUTURE. 


133 


Populo  Komauo  ereptun  erdlls.  Liv.  28.  a^.-  7.  Venie1)atisi  i-itur  m  Africam,  provm- 
ciamm:sxime  infestain.    O^uero  qnid  facfuH /ulstL^  f    Ouamquam  qwd  facturifufnfis 
d  lb  t'.-^  mini  vid.'  nn  quid  feceVitis  ?  Cic.  Li-.  S.-  8.  Furium  et  ^milmm.si  trumni 
me  triu.nplK-lre  prohibcM-nt,  testis  (uifvess)  citaturus^  fui  rerum  a  me jr^-starum.  Liv. 
QW[47_q    \d    siiDpruium*    depoposcCrinit*    n<'s  Komam  :  deditns»   nltimis^   cruciati- 
hn-^nfertiinfuZrunt.  Liv.  21,  44.- 10.  ConciawMllud  ubi  Dejoturu-  erat  mamurus^^x- 
ire  pefrexioet,  pn.xiM.a  ..octe  corruitio.  Cic.  Div.  1.  1.5.-11.  llh  ipsi  aratOresU  qu,  re- 
in!inM-runt>2   re'ictnri  omnis  aarms  ^7w/<.  nisi  ad  eo<   Metellus  Roma  litteras  misisse  . 
Cic  V<rr  3  52  —  12.  Explica  utriim  apc'rte  an  elam^s  te  aggressun fuenmus.  Liv.  40,  14. 
—  13   Ou-rr«>  jiuiiies  si  illo  die  irens  ista  Clodiana»*  quod  faccre  vol.nt  etf.cisset./wt^m- 
vf  ad*  arnia  i'turi ?    Fuistisne  vos  ad  patrium  animum  "i?JoV''"q"«  )irtutem  (civl<)  ea-a- 
tatnri  '    Fuistisne  aliquando  reinpublicam  a  funesto  latronei»  repetiturt]^  f  Cic.  Sest.  28. 
—14  ^i  e.'o  morerer  niecum  exspir^dura^^  respublica,  niecum  cos^urum  imperium  Populi 
Roniaiii  emtr  Liv.  28,  28.-  15.  Qnid  enim././;«n/m/;|i/.  si  ilia  ir\%"'"'i6°>Sil'""g,' 
one»»  nlebs  ao-itari"»  cceptaesset  tribuniciis^»  proc-llis^a  ?  Liv.  2,  1  •  3.  —  lo-  MazjEU««   si 
transeuntibus23  flumen  supervenisset^*,  haud  dubie  oppresmrus  fuit  mcoiiipositos-'» 
Tnrt  4  0  —  17    ^ut  non  fato  interiit  Flaminii  exercitus.  aut,  h  fato  (interut),  etiamsH» 
o'l)te'miV';a-set"auspieiis27.  idem  eventurum  fuisset.  Cic.  Div.  2,  21  -  18.  Appiruit,  qixan- 
turn  fxrifatura  moiem^''  VQV.x  fuis^^et  clades.  quum  vanus  rumor^»  tantas  procellas  exci- 
vi<set3o    Liv   -'8  24.— 19.  '  Recepti  in  provinciam  non  sumus.      Quid  si  essgtis  .-<    caesa- 
rlnc  earn  traditun  fuu^sitis,  nn  contra  Ciesarem  retmtiiri  ?  Cic.  Li?.  '^'\^^'^9^^-^-^-'f: 
Neuuc  ainbi-Mtur3i  quins-»  Brutus  pessimo  exemplo  id  factarusfuent, ^x^vxoxwm  re- 
:nim  alicui  re-nnm  extorsisset^».  Liv.  2,  1,  3.-  21.  A"  potc'^t  quisquam  dubit^re  quin  si 
Li-ariusin  lt;Uia  esse  potuisset.  in  eadem  sententia/wfrt«34/^/„rw^  '"  1."^""^^T '-^i 
runt*  Cic   Li-  12-22   Et  sic  loquor,  tanquamss  ^i„e  duce  llispanuE3«  futures  fuennt 
(-i  morerer),  Liv.  '28.  28.--  23.  AdeoS^  citato»'^  aginiues»  ducti  sunt  ut,  si  via  recta  issent, 
baud  dubie  cos  a^secuturi^^  fuerint.  Liv.  28,  1«. 

Pwm.  14G.  The  ixdic.vtive  pluperfect  of  the  periphrastic  future  de- 
notes wli:it  was  impendinu^  befoke  a  linie  which  is  past  in  rei^ard  to  the 
speaker  {He  had  intemled  to,  he  had  been  about  to,  etc.).  See  Ex.  1.  2. 3.    But 

l^oc'ts  use  it  ill  tlie   prineii)al  sentences  of  hypothetical  clauses  with  the 

force  of  an  ordinary  pluperfect  subjunctive  (Ex.  4). 

1  Victor*»  ( -Emilius  Paullus)  cohimnas  iilas  quibus  (sacerdOte?)  statuas  regis  Persel 
immsitilri  fueraut.  suis  statuis  dcstiiuTvit.  Liv.  45,  27.-  2.  M.  Valeriuni  consulem 
OMines  sententiic  (votes)  centuri:eque  dixere  {nominated},  quern  senatus  dictatOrein 
dici  jussurusfveraf.  Liv.  10.  11.-  3.  Hoc  cum  nuntiatura  -^^.lex^»'''^'"»,^*'^^^'*' "?^"Vin'!f 
lon<'as  s(K-iis"imp"rarepneceperar.  excursurusque*''  cum  valida  manu"/'^<'^  AthPnas. 
Jus7  13.  5.-4.  Ten  era  s^V'"<^^^<^  7ntri>ura*=  airlua&*\  n\*'  prius*»  in  scopulum^Hraus- 
form'ata»»  foret.  Ov.  Met.  14,  72. 
Bern  147  The  two  futuue  tensks  of  the  periphrastic  future  are  rarely  used,  denoting 

what  will  be  or  will  have  been  the  intention,  or  i  upending  at  some  future  time  (Ex. 

1-3)      Sometimes  this  form  is  us^d  with  the  f..rce  of  a  potential  future  m  general  pie- 

cent's  (I)  3,1  foil    OBS..5),  referring  to  actions  intended  at  any  time:  Ea.  qucE  demissu- 

rus  ,ris',s„ni;topa>dln  acrbiora;  Take  those  which  you  (=auy  oue>  are  going  to  let  etc. 

Ca^o  \i.  It  101.     See  Ex.  4. 


1  Cicero  addresses  Tubero  and  others,  who,  during  the  civil  war  had  gone  to  Africa 
to  open  e  t liere  again-t  Ca-sar,  but  who  were  denying  now  their  hostile  intentions - 
"c3l  doubt  •'-  3  7o  summon.-  "death.-  '  to  demand.-  «  the  participle  has  the  force 
of  a  e.  n  t  i.al  clause  '  we  had  surrendered.'-  ^  extreme.- «  torment  -  apartment. 
_  10  f  _  n  f;u-iner.  -  ^'^  remain.-  »3  secretly.-  ^*gens  Clodtana,  the  tribe  of  Clo- 
dius's  fol  owers  -•*  a  brigand.-  »«  to  reclaim.-  i^  to  expire.-  i«  pastor,  a  herdsman. 
_'»  "tna  I'^crrcoming  from  .dl  quarters.-  '^o  to  agitate.-  '^^  belondng  to  the  tribunes 
Dolit  a  -  =2  storm.-  =3  the  participle  has  the  force  of  a  clause,  '  tlie.n  wlrle  they  were 
P.^  LVi,  /'  -  2i  suplrven'ire  alicm,  to  surprise  somebody  -  "  them  in  disorder  (I'teml  v, 
0^\n  ordered  ones).-  ^e  ev.n  ii' -  "  the  auspices.-  ««monstrous  mass  ^here  :  earth- 
niiake)  -  ^»  rumor  -  'o  exciere,  to  call  forth,  to  raise.-  3i  ambigere.  to  d'Uibt.-  »-  biu 
that  -  3»  extorau^re  to  extort.-  3*  Some  manuscripts  have  'fui^seV.  Why  x^  fuent 
{h?\m.ner  r3  S-3»  as  if  -  3«  the  two  Hispanias.-  37  .o.-  3«  rapidly  marching. 
Tri.K  ^ij  m  rapid  march^s.^-  3»  column.-  ^»  assequi,  to  ON;ertake.-  «»  th«  ^•^.•"• 
a  ,;;,  -«^  exrurrere,  to  make  an  expedition.-  "  force  -  4*;Teucrian  '  t.e  frojan 
?,'hipiV_46  'nergere.  xo  drown,  to  en-ulf,  to  swallow.-  *«  carina,  vessel.-  *'  mst.  of 
ru^i,-'*(^  before.-  *»  rock.—  »<>  to  transform. 


134 


PERirHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


causa  q„.  d -P; Vf«'",7'«';''-  A  ,\*;if,  ;rnn,.  S.' „.  "o„»,lciam,  qua.u  po.,lm:  .1 

S  508  The  two  INFINITIVES  of  the  ponphrastic  lutiire  aie 
onU-  nsoJ  as  predicates  of  infinitive  clauses,  both  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  and  in  that  of 
the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  (§  492).  The  infinitive  of 
the  riiESF.NT  {scriptrmon  esse)  is  used  if  the  infinitive  clause, 
chan-ed  into  an  independent  sentence,  would  have  a  i.rcdicate 
either  in  the  present  tense  of  the  periphrastic  future,  or  in  the 
ordinary  future.  It  is  generally  rendered  by  the  English  future 
tense  (if  the  principal  pre.lieate  is  a  present),  or  by  the  poten- 
tial with  Ucoidd'  (if  the  principal  predicate  is  a  preterite). 
The  infinitive  of  the  perfect  (scnpturiim  fuisse)  has  always 
a  iiTroTiiETicAL  force,  and  is  rendered    by  the  potential  with 

'■  v}ould  have.''  .  ,  .    ., 

Bern.  148.  According  to  g  390,11...  pre.Iic.te-infinUiv.  Hl^l^^  ^'^  '« 
ttTi-spnt  if  ils  time  is  eitlicr  c(iin(-i(l(.-iU  with  or  latfi-  li:;n  lli.it  ol  t  le 
priS  V 'rK  Tto  11,0  qu..sii,M,  whellKT  Ihis present  infinitive  is  to  be 
K'ir.m  the  oun.NARY  o,.njn-ati,.n  or  from  the  oonjupUou  of  the 
rKiiiiMiUASTic  FUTUUE,  the  following  nilcs  must  be  observed : 

perf'ormtd  this  bui^inesj..  „.,„„» -,«.v'Tvn    whirh   in   Eivlish   may  be  con- 

.  .„  „.,-,-tain-  »  «t.,itim.ut.-    '  mmcribtre  to  draw  lip.-  *  if  he  snail   have  been 
reduced  ,0  adulation  to,  etc.-  'to  un»..)  tUc  other.  I.e.  the  one  who  ha,  bestowed  a 

benefit  on  mo. 


J 


PERIPHRASTIC  FUTURE. 


135 


instancp*»  the  con«truction  of  the  clause  is  made  impersonal  by  HifaTi?  of  the  P/jip^'-as 
?c  infinit  V.  -^M^^rSX^g  or  f(rre  with  ut  (literally  :  that  it  will  be  the  ca^e  that  etc  ) 
tL  ve.'l.  i"pla{"<l  in  VJ  .ubjanctive  present  or  imperfect  according  as  the  principal 
predicate  is  a  present  or  preterite» : 

ErMimaf  foreifvturnm  €s.<<e)  ut  hostes  fffugiant,  he  believes  that  the  enemy  will  es- 
^.,f,^l  S,^^^^  mum  agiLcenut,  he  hoped  that  the  ciiizeus  would  ac- 

knowledge hi6  right.  ,       j  « 

-s   The  notential  mood  with  'would'  or  '  should '  which  is  frequently  eiuployed  in 
RnHiHiTritcu'es  dependent  on  other  verbs  than  those  mentioned  No.  1,  is  not  ren- 
dered  bv  a  iriptirastic  future  in  Latin,  but  by  ordinary  present  mfimlives,  or  by  ordi- 
nafv  MuV.  iciives,  if  clauses  with  ut  are  used.  For  more  particular  rule^,  p.  Wl,  Obs.  6. 
•  re  era.^  venire  nipioiVdimveniwi  eras).  1  wish  (that>  you  would  come  to-moirow.- 
Xea»'eest  (cmu.<^  eJ)  te  hoc  negotium  jyerficere,  it  is  necessary  that  y^ "/^'^"h'^.^n^  wnnM 
b,,.i ,„:.s  -  iVd  faremus,  te  tini  rirtutefr>n  cupimus.  we  favor  you.  and  ^ylsh  you  would 
e  iov  your  n urits.  Cic.  Brut.  97.-  Smaf'd  placet  Cra^sum  SyHamcMtmre.xi  pleases 
?l,e  SeS^hat  Crassus  should  obtain  Syria.  Cic.  Phil  11,  n.-Mirm-  teadrmmhU 
Kcritjere,  I  wonder  that  you  should  have  written  nothing  to  me.  Cic.  Att.  b,  U. 

IS"  For  the  translation  of  '  sliould '  by  the  gerund,  see  §  511,  R.  162. 
fi  The  verbal  adjective  in  Urus.  if  used  as  predicate-infinitive,  agrees,  accordin£r  to 
tho'rules  for  predicate-adjectives,  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  the  subject-accusative. 
Rem  149.  TJie  periphrastic  infinitive,  like  ordinary  predicate-infinitives, 
is  also  emploved  in  the  construction  of  the  no.minative  with  the  in- 
finitive (5^  492),  in  which  case  the  verbal  adjective  in  urns  agrees  with 
the  subject- nominative  in  gender,  number,  and  case  : 

Amicm  turn  breri  rerlifuru^  (e-^se)  dintur,  it  is  said  that  thy  friend  will  soon  return.— 
Civm^,n!lem7ervataroe  {esse)  videbantur,  it  seemed  that  the  states  were  going  to 
keep  their  faith. 

Bet}}  150  If  the  verb  es-^e,  either  as  an  independent  verb,  or  with  com- 
pleting'-" predicates,  is  used  as  a  present  predicate-infinilive  ot  the  peri- 
phrastic future,  it  takes  either  the  form  futfirumiesse),  or  fore.  The  ver- 
bal adiective/</^r/rw.<<  agrees  in  this  construction,  like  other  verbal  adjec- 
tives, with  its  subject-accusative  or  subject-nominalive  in  gender,  number, 

^"'  m^beifos  fore  (or  futuro^)  speramris.  we  hope  you  will  be  happy.-//<«c  res  magm 
mihZxstiMara  {fare)  videMt>}r,  it  seemed  that  this  thing  would  be  of  great  use  to  me. 
Jlem.  151  The  construction  of  the  perfect  infinitive  of  the  peri- 
phrastic future  is  determined  by  the  same  rules  as  that  of  the  present  m- 
finitive  •  but  it  has  always  a  hypothetical  signification,  correspond- 
in-  to  the  potential  '  would  have.'  the  hypothetical  clause  being  either 
expressed  or  understood.  The  copuhi  fui,sse  is  rarely  lett  out,  which  is 
only  the  case  if  the  connection  clearly  shows  the  hypothetical  torce  ot  the 
verbal  adjective: 

Dixit  se  id«m  facturum  fuisse  (not  factrmwi  without  fnisse).  he  said  that  he  would 
bav J^lont  t  r;ame  -^^^^^^  'Tur>eror,em  aesaris  p>ssis  obtemperatarmn  fui,se 

^fueTtadmi^us  h^  believed  Tubero  would  have  obeyed  Caesar's  commands  it  he  had 
U^r^!^!l^'\!^R:diturus  M.^s-e  ridebatur,  H  reniam  ^^P^^^as^et,  U^eems  that  he 
would  have  returned  if  he  had  obtained  tlie  permission,     bee  p.  bd-i,  Ubs.  ». 

1  Promitto  tibi  atque  conflnno^  me  pro  tu5  dignitate  in  hac  provinciS  imperaWris 
*,^..m>  i  W  .,tficia  a.que  partis.  Cic.  Fam.  3,  10.  1.-  2.  Flumen  neque  iP^e  tran^Ire 
b^hr.uit  in  aiiimo  neque  bosils  transifuros  cxistimabat.  Cies.  B.  G.  b,  7.-3.  lalia  te 
'^  u    y^^^^  innumerabiUa,  plane*  ^^"^^f  ?  "^t^df  sc^ib^rse 

tib'  aniDliiQIo*  ista  sollicitadt»^  tutfira  sit.  Cic.  Fam.  .J,  10.  3.-  4.  In  litte  is  ^criD  t,  se 
cum  iegioiiibus  ce!criter  ad/ore.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  5,  4S.-  5.  Sulpicms  prouuutlavlt^  nocte 

1  The  same  form  (with  fu'unim  eH  ut)  is  sometimes  employed  as  a  circumlocution  of 
the  finite  verb  in  the  ca/e  that  a  verb  does  not  form  an  adjective  in  urus,  as  I^'uturum 
J^Ltluniam  i  'ni  -oing  to  be  wise.  Sen.  Ep.  117.-  ^  cofifirnmre.  to  pledge  o.:e  s  helL- 
^i^di!reTliqiAd.  To  chlirge  one's  self  with  something.-  «  plane  non,  not  at  all  -  •  but 
that.—  •  greatness.-  '  distress.—  »  declare. 


PERIPHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


137 


136 


PERIPHRASTIC   FUTURE. 


TirriTima  ih  hml  pccundil  n?ane  ad  quartam  horam  iiocti;*  lunam  defect ilrirnetseKUy. 
proximo  !^1.  hortP^^^^^^^  I  ^^f^^^^^r^uavA'  citius*    quam  iminixli»  Bruttu«  in 

t^iSnos  morerver  eron  Liv.  24,  3.-  7.  K«.n:lni,  redifuros  se  ad  cos  duentes  e^., 

pS'cZmr  Liv.  24.  C-  8,  Appi...  dixit^i  Hcitu-n  .e..c^  h-^m   n,n5  ain     ^jrre 
Inrfifurum  cum  collCi^jl  provinclam».  Cic.  tarn.  1.9.  2o.-  9.  Dixit  Ano\  ^tus    siai^ 
SSiS'o  Ca  "ir   ma-^no  se  ilium  pr.pmi..  renwnerafururn.Cii^^.  B.  O.  1,  44.-  10.  Per- 
nauci*  u-tri<i»  /-//^^n/rn  esse  ait  ?/<  desorta  oppida  iiullum  niihtem  dare  posmit.  hn   41, 
r-11   Ca-ir  etsi/or^  videhat  vf  hostes  cfleriiate  )Hn\i:n\nmefuoerent  Uxnv^u  lo-u,- 
nes  in  ac  e  pro    a"^  ris  ccnsiit.nti-^.  Oes.  B.  G.  4,  :i^- 12.  Video  te  vHle  in  cceUim 
Srk"vi3  et^sp^'o  ;or.  «^  c*n/i;..7a/  id  nobis.  Cic.  Ta.c.  1   34.-  1\^"'>;'"1  "i'^"^;'" 
m ut  tiuncmi*  hac  I.oiniuum  trtflte  re;*  haintilra  esse  vidCtiir.  V^-^mI"' V. J;„V~r  J* 
Ot    11  nobis  .^aiissinmm  erit  quod  ci  qui  poiiuntur  rcrnm  prcE^^tafurt^^  videntnr    Cic 
Fan     1   8  4  -  15.  ^Eioloruui  iut^enu-t  ipsus  versus  {un>rad  nitcrnecionem  rt</6;//c^m/.si« 
vid"  baiiir  -entem    Liv.  4.  25.-  U\.  Osar,  quod'^  niilite.  sij;na'«  non  /«/«n  dict-rentnr 
nihi    U  "/)  ^e  de  "a  re  conimovCrii»  dixit.  C^e..  B.  G.  1,  40.-  IT  lUx  dehcm^"  ^uaorru- 
?iS-a%r^exb^tiiuilvit.  Sail.  Ju-.  :W.-  18.  Quitt urn  fare  v.debanir  rcl.qunm  R-tat.s 
fvX7,t;^?rUen  n   "  Liv  22,  21.-  11>.  IIU  turn  so  consulf.  inipeno  dicto  audvnUsJuturos 
liiTSilmt    U<'  4  ,0.-1  20.  (Vsar  excQ-^i  qnodobsides  dare   nterm.scrant2^../or6  id 
mmd  Hccid  t"pu«.uica^^^^       Ctrs.  B  G.  4,  31.-  21.  Ca-sar  pollicilus  est,  Mbi  earn  rem 
^'ml  ^  S  'L    C>V  R  G  1,  k-  22.  Vercin^retorix  dixit,  copias  se  omnTs  pro  caj-tn. 

?S/;i!m  cn.^ri-  hostibn./.r;7r.m.  ^-^^^;^'^^-^-  S^-c.alll^'h'mc'adepi 
niulicrum  adcenarium  \ ervem  f<>(<mnn?  ^»^-» 7«"; .^' Ml.- 24.  (.all    hanc  aatp  i 
victoriam   in  ncrDetuuni'-^*  s'C  fore  victOres  confidCbant.  ix*.  B.  (i.  5.  3»).—  Z).  t  icsar 

ronrntn^  nrip«26  teti'n>*-et  He  dedidisscn".  Ca'!».  B.  G.  2.  -U.—  ^.  caniin>  nixii,  n») 
an  o  S-^^.^.  hmnl.ni' tribuniciam-  potcstiteni-  rf^trf.;-a/^/.>^.  ^:;^;iKn  -'^'t 
Ko.nani  t-xistiniationiao  satisfact-re  voluih>et.  Cic.  \  err.  1,  lo.,-  2,  ^untl5IUln=•'  c>t 
no  is  Vano  .,  At  ticmn  nostrum,  nisi  dt.  via  fossns  essct,  continuo3^  ad  nos  t^enhirum 
f"j"v  Acad  Post  1,  1.-  28.  Gloricmini  p.r  me  licet,  eos  provinciam /«!.•«  C««ari 
Iradiiur^  Cic  L  -  8,  21.- 29.  Milites  contondernnt33,  i.icolumi  exerc.tu  RomanoS*, 
G?,  rST;  ca%am.)rnmtaros  non  fuisse.  Ca^.  B.  G,  «•  4L-  =50.  Hoc  toium  omilto, 
ne3*  Tubero  quod  nunquam  coi,ntavit/a6-<«rM*V"^'*"«  videatur.  Cic.  L.ig.  ». 

§  509.  rredicatcs  with  poriplinxstic  futures  do  not  admit  a 
change  into  the  passive  voice,  except  predicate-ixfixitives 
in  infinitive  clauses,  wliich  are  made  passive  by  one  of  the  fol- 
lowiniT  circumlocutions:  1)  by  the  first  supine  with  the  pas- 
sive infinitive  irl  (both  personal  and  impersonal)  ;  2)  by  the 
impersonal  mfimlWefuturum  esscut  or  foreut  (K.  148,4)  with 
the  subjunctive  passive  of  the  verb;  3)  by  the  impersonal  in- 
finitive/w^<7n^m  fuisseut w'lih  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  the 
passive;  4)  by  the  personal  infinitive  fore  with  the  perfect 
participle  of  the  verb. 

1  defkere,  to  be  eclipsed.-  "^  inhabitants  of  Locri  ->  declare.-  «  rather.-  »  mixed  np 
-'^verlere  to  turn.  Comparative  clauses,  depc-ndent  on  intinitive  <-lauses  have  eith -r 
th.'i- predicates  ill  the  intiuitivc,  or  in  the  subjunctive  of  the  finite  verb.  V\  .•  irenerally 
rene?snch  predicates  bv  infinitives.-  '  a  law  of  the  Curias,  whid.  were  pol.tica  bo.lie. 
of  the  P  tricians.-  8  to'pass.-  »  sornH  pwrinciam.  a  political  ph-ase  :  Mo  cast  lots  jor 
?he  prov  nce\- »0  to  march  off.-  ^Uusfrum,a  period  .>f  five  years     Connection>^  id 

his  kind  must  be  recast  in  En-lish  :  'in  ten  or  fifteen  yean*'.- »^  to  draw  np  -  3  jj., 
to  -  14  chan^-."  -  1»  <n-ant.-  »«  ad  internecionem  adducere.  to  extermniatc  -  ^^  qvod,  as 
to  the  fact  Umt.-  »«?i7/ia  ferrf.  to  carrv  the  lla-.  i.e..  to  make  the  attack  -  »«  mmtm- 
tSA  to  be  impressed.-  ^o'oflonce.-  «^  abl.  of  id  (from  the  fact^-  ^^  to  n|.L'lect.- 
«  terror  -  i*  for  ever.-"  baltmn-ram.-  "«  dedere,  Hurrender.-  "  of  the  tribunes. - 
28  power  -  29  to  miss.—  so  public  opinion.—  3»  to  announce.--  «^  "'.""^^vy  —  <<^; 
tendere,  to  maintain,  to  ar-ne.-  34  coustructim  of  ablatives  absohUe  with  the  force  of 
an  hypothetical  clause  'if  the  army  were  intact'.—  ^»  lest. 


I 


Bern  152  The  finite  verb  in  the  conj nidation  of  the  periphrastic  future 
.idmits  of  a  passive  form  onlv  in  the  subjunctive  imperfect,  by  means  of 
forem  etc.  (R.  140)  in  connection  with  the  perfect  participle  of  the  verb. 
This  combination  has  the  force  of  a  perfect  future  subjunctive,  and  is 
rendered  '  would  have  been',  as  :  Di.xGrunt  arcem  se  eis  tradituros  si 
remisd  forent,  they  said  that  they  were  willing  to  surrender  them  the  fort 
if  i/uy  would  have  been  sent  back.  Liv.  29,  G. 

Bern  153  The  first  supine  with  iri  serves  as  the  passive  voice  of  the 
infinitive  present  of  the  periphrastic  future.  It  is  frequently  used  in 
infinitive  clauses,  but  rarely  in  the  construction  of  the  nominative  with 
the  infinitive  The  supine,  beim?  indeclinable,  remains  unchanged,  and 
does  not  agree  with  the  subject-accusative,  as  :  CarnQtes  cum  longius  earn 
rem  ductum  iri  existimarent  etc.,  the  Carnutes,  since  they  tliought  that 
this  affair  would  be  i)rotracted  for  a  great  while.  Goes.  B.  G.  7, 11. 

tW-  The  Kupine  with  iri  orisrinates  in  the  use  of  the  active  verb  ire  with  the  first 
Bupine,  in  the  ineanin-  '  in  ord.r  to^  (§  351).  Such  phrases,  especially  i"  antec  assical 
1  1  Uia.'e  are  sometimes  used  with  the  force  of  the  active  periphrastic  future,  as 
'si  oDulentus  it  «f/7/«;n  panperiOris  -ratiam,  if  a  rich  man  is  going  to  (literally  ?70«5  .t^ 
mlkrt^^si'iv  ^  favo  •  of  a  poorer  man.  Plant.  Aul.  2.  2,  29.-Sua8  quoque  injuries 

vul^nir^t^  they  ou^ht  to  tfnnk  also  (literally  •  go  to  )  of  ^;^^ ^^"fj*^^'';,^^^"  ™^r ' 
Liv  2.  (i.-(iiii  panels  seelerJUis  parcunt.  bouos  omuls  perditnm^  eurd,  those  who  tpare 
?.  few  villaini?,  are  going  to  destroy  all  good  ciiizens.  t?all.  Cat.  52,  12. 
Bern  154   The  impersonal  circumlocution  with  futurum  esse  ut  or  fore 
lit  is  tiie  same  as  that  employed  for  active  verbs  which  form  no  adjective 
\i^uruH  (Rem.  147,4),  except  that  the  verb  is  placed  in  the  subjunctive 
of  the  PvssiVE  voice.     The  tense  of  the  verb  is  either  the  present  or  the 
imperfect,  according  as  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  present,  or  in  one  of 
the  past  tenses.     Since  the  construction  is  impersonal,  it  cannot  be  ap- 
plied to  infinitive  clauses  construed  by  the  nominative  with  the  inhmtive. 
En.rlish  Thai-clauses  with  predicates  in  the  future  or  potentia    passive, 
in  order  to  be  cast  into  this  construction,  must  be  first  remodelled  imper- 
sonally {that  theij  will  be  destroi/cd  =  That  it  will  be  the  case  [futuru,n  esse 
or  fort]  that  they  are  destroyed),  as  : 

lie  thinks  that  Gajus  ivill  be  dcfeat^l,  existimat  fore  nt  (futurum  ejeut)  Gajus 
rjmj^/r.-lle  thou-hl  that  Gajus  icoulUbe  defeated,  existimavit  fore  ut  {futurum  esse 
ut)  Gajus  tincerttur. 

Rem  155  The  impersonal  circumlocution  Vs\{\\  fatiirum  fuisse  ut  is  con- 
strued in  the  same  way  as  the  present  futurum  esse  ut,  except  that  tiie 
verb  is  always  placed  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive.  In  meaning,  it 
closely  corresponds  to  the  active  perfect  infinitive  of  the  periphrastic 
future,  being  always  hypothetical.  It  is  rendered  by  the  Luglish  po- 
tential with'  would  have  been',  as  : 

He  thinks  that  Gains  would  hare  l)€en  defeated  if,  etc..  existimat/M/«r!/m/wfe5«  ut 
Gaiu<rnc7r2^i/r  si,itc.--He  ^aid  that  the  life  of  the  prisoner  would  have  been  jn-e- 
^r/ierf.iAiriiad  surrendered  sooner,  m^n  futurum  fuisse  ut  vita  captlvi  cofisercaretur, 
^\  tie  cilius  dedidisset.  , 

B£m  156.  The  personal  ^orm  fore  with  a  perfect  participle  is  used  in- 
stead of  the  forms  with  iri  and  futurum  esse  ut  if  the  future  action  is 
conceived  as  a  state  or  condition,  as  :  Provindam  brevi  snbadamfore  exis- 
timavit he  thouirht  that  the  province  would  soon  be  subjected  (i.  e  a  sub- 
jected one).  Fore  with  a  perfect  participle  is  impersonally  used  only  in  the 
case  that  the  perfect  participle  has  the  meaning  of  an  imperson.-^l  pas- 
sive as  •  Carlhaginienses  debellatum  mox  fore  rebantur,  the  Carthaginians 


133 


PERirHRASTIC  FUTURE. 


rockonod  that  \ho  war  would  soon  be  over.  Liv.  So,  118  {deheltatum  eRt,  the 
war  is  over).  Fore  niav  also  be  connected  with  the  pertect  participle  of 
a  deponent  verb,  and  lias  then  altogether  the  force  of  a  future  perfect. 

See  Ex.  11).  .  ..,,.,.      ,^    . 

\.  Ne.  Pi  occttprifua  tumuUisi  nb  Ilannihale/oM,  veliit»  in  cervicibus  haberent  hosfem. 
Liv.  27, -^»».—  2.  Si  Uiiium  miliuuu  lioinaiiOnun  fuif^ef,  ut  et  C'hakis  et  Eurlpus* 
tA'n'cri '  et  non  rtescri  praesidium*  Athen-Tnim  potuinset,  Chalcis  et  EurTpnsi  ndeinta  rcjji 
1'orent'  Liv.  .31,  23.—  3.  Al(Mi)i;ulc's  pollicrMiir  le-^fltis  Athcnieiisiuin  anncitiam  tt'£?ip,  i*i 
Vespublica  a  populo  trandata  ad  senatiun /or*^/.  Just,  .'i,  .3.—  4.  An  Cii.  I'onipC'jum 
cciist's  tri>»iis  puis  consulatibii!*.  tribu.^  tiiumphi.>*  Icetaturum  fuhse,  pi  kciss.-i  ^e  lu 
P(.lirudiii.-«  .E^'vptioium»  trucidrtf'on''  iW  /  Cic.  Div.  2,  22.— .5.  Sc-iCbat  mI.i  rnmini 
datuW^  in  pecuniam  accepiss».'.  C'io.  Verr.  5,  29.—  «J.  Hi  arbitrantur,  se  benollcop"  m 
puos  amicop  rlotm  iri  si  locuplcteut»»  cos  quacuuque  ratiOue.  Cic.  Ot!.  1,  14.—  7.  Nmn- 
quam  Populu»  Rouifuius  mec.>ii<uU'm  locissct,  s-i  (ukm  ve<tro  clainOn-  pertiirhnlmntn 
arhitrarCtur  Cic.  Kab.  6.—  S.  Ipsi  vtn»  nihil  nocifum  iri  rcspoudit.  C;r<.  B  (».  •'',  .3«».— 
9.  VrjfiitesiJ»  prffidirCbant,  fore  ut  brovi  a  Gallis  Ftoma  cai^r^fur.  Cic.  Div.  1.  44,  100.— 
lb  Valdf  puspicor  fore  vt  infrinqat'ir^'^  honiinum  iniprobitas's.  c\c.  Fam.  1,  10.— 
11  Illud  tibi  aftirmo.  si  rem  e.x  siMiti-ntiil'*  Lresst'risi3,_/c,r^  ut  a  m\\\xU  collixu>U're^\  Cic, 
Fam  1  7  .5  -  M  Divitiacu- di-xit,  rw^7/-?/m  <'<'>*' panels  atinis  >/M>mnes  (Jalli  rx  ni)ii)U3 
puispellofentnr'^.  Cjes.  B.  (J.  1.31.—  13.  Ejo  fide  mcil  spondco"*  /V>r#  ?//■  omnia  lonsje 
ampliOra'9  qnain  a  me  pnedicantur^o  iuvpiiias.  Plin.  Ep.  1.  4.— 14.  Audita  vox  est  a  luco 
Vestiv,  nt  niuri  ct  i)ort:e  rolicercntur  ; /////Tn/m  <'.'>.<?^.  nisi  provlsum"»  essct,  •'/Miotna 
cap^re'tur.  Cic.  Div.  1.  4."),  101.—  15.  Nisi  ro  tenipor<'  niuitii  de  Cu'saris  victoriil  espeiit 
aliari.  existimili)ant  pkvT<pio  futuruin  fuU<e  nt  oppidiiin  amitterttur.  Cies.  B.  C.  3,  101. 
—  1«.  Thf'ophrastus  moricns"  accusasse  natOram  diciiur.  quod  h"ininibns  tain  «'XiL,'uaiu 
vitani  dedissct  ;  nam  si  potuisset  osse  lonfrinquior^'^,///^?;'*//^///?***?  ut  omnos  artes  per- 
firermtur  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  28.—  17.  Frater  mens  cxistimat,  adjuncto  isto  fundo.  patri- 
ni()iiium-3  snum  fore  per  te  con.'ififutum'^*.  Cic.  Fam.  1.  9,  21.—  IS.  Aristoteles  dixit^  se 
vidure  brevi  tempore  philosophiam  phivv"^^  ab'-o/ufdm"'^  fore.  Cic.  Tusc.  .3.  <.9  -19.  Hoc 
die»»,  me  satis  adeptu//ifore,e^\  extantopericulo  nullum  iu  me  periculum  rcdundani-T 
Cic.  Sull.  9. 

§  olO.  Tlie  verbal  adjective  in  ?7r?/.<f,  in  anteclassical  lan- 
guage, and  in  the  prose  of  Cnesar  and  Cicero,  occurs  only  as  a 
predicate-adjective.  But  the  writers  of  the  Augustan  age,  and 
more  frequently  the  post-classical  prose-writers  use  the  adjec- 
tive in  tirus  as  an  attributive  adjective,  or  as  an  accessory 
predicate  (§461)  with  the  force  of  a  participle. 

t^^^  In  Cicero's  letters  the  adjective  mur^ts  occurs  twice  attributively:  Quid  agenfi, 

miid  acturo  ^  to  him  jjoing  to  «io  '  wliat'y  Cic.  Alt.  8,0,  2  — Tarde  tiln  rtddituro,  since 

you  are  to  answer  late.  lb.  5,  Ih.—Ejiturus  in  (^u.  Fr.  2.5,  is  a  conjecture. 

Rem.  157.  If  the  adjective  in  iirus  is  used  ATTiuniTTVELY,  it  either  cor 

responds  to  an  En,ii:li.sh  attribute  with  '  about  to',  '  iroins,'  to', '  in  a  con 

dition  to',  or  must  i)e  resolved  into  a  relative  clau.se  (Ew  1.  2.  3.  9). 

Cito  ffubrenidtix  homini  perituro,  you  should  come  quiclily  to  tliea^^sisjance  of  a  man 
about  to  perish  (in  a  critical  ccmditionK— .Icc^/^ii  iUe  donaiii  sibi  exitio  fularum,  he  ac- 
cepted a  j,'ift  that  was  to  be  fatal  to  him. 
Adjectives  in  vma  are  sometimes  used  as  absolute  adjectives  with  the 

force  of  nouns  (^  354  foil.),  as  : 

InterleciOres  iiderftcturis  jubentur  objici,  the  murderer?  are  placed  before  their 

♦hill.—  ''as  it  were.  p.  718,7.—  'the  straits  between  Bfeotia  and  Euboea.—  * pratai' 
diutn  deitercre,  to  abandon  the  protection.—  » solitude.—  ^.Egyptius,  an  E<:ypiian.— 
'  to  assassinate.—  «  §  480,  R.  W.  «wi.-  »  beneficent.—  »<>  enrich.—  "  inhabitants  of 
V,.ji  _  12  to  break,  to  clieck.—  "  wickedness.—  '«  successfully.—  >•  rem  fjtrere.  to 
carrv  out  a  business,  to  act.—  »•  colltiadrire,  to  praise.—  "  to  drive  out.—  '^  fide  sud 
tijKnidtre,  to  warrant,  to  pled<;e  one's  self.—  >"  j:reater.—  20  privdicdre.  to  profess,  to  rep- 
resent.— 21  providtre  aliquid.  to  make  provisions  for  somethinj^.— ^s  lonj^er.-  "»  prop- 
erty.-  2«  constituere^  to  establish.—  ^»  cnt.irely.—  2«  absolcere.  to  perfect.—  '^  to  arise. 


PERIPHRASTIC  FUTURE. 


139 


future  murderers  (before  those  .ho  are  to  mttrder  them  in  their  turn).  Sen.  Ep.  7.  See 

^  ^8.  If  the  adjective  in  .r^  .^cd  ^- -^J^--^  ^^^^.^^ 
the  force  f^an  ACCKSSonv  PUEDia  T^^^^  tuch'as'denoL  purpose,  but 
a  CLAUSE  (Ex.  7.  8.  9.  --•  ~f  --i/»  ^  S  "l  '  .-^^i  nUu^o^  and  even  of  a  mere 
also  of  ti-e-cb^se^  con<hn^^^^  ^^^.^Sl^^Ui^;  an  object-in- 

co-ordination  (E.x.  10)    ox   lessi^Tor  understood,  or  particlpal  expressions 
^''T""  M    ino-^abo    '  '"n)    -   o'   or  conjunctions  (since,  when,  but,  and) 
!;;^"!;irthci:"hii^^hli?  aSjectWe  m  ..L  agrees  with  its  logical  subject 

camfe/^r^fi^^^^^^^^^^  Curt.  7,  10,  10. 

^::.  m  trtir:  thJ:orbal  a  jecUves  in  ^^^a.^  hypc^h^ical  ^^-in.  a.  if  it 
wert  a  participle  of  the  «hypothetical  ^je;^»^^  r^f  ,  .^li  qu^^^  potuit,  datarus  am- 

\ufin\iiy.-uruniPn^  ^^^^^  al  [nuch  as  he  could,  Sud  would  have  given  more  if 
plius  SI  potuisset,  >'*i'"^",^,,"'^^V,  "  q  «,    /L^Y  Q  10  11   24.) 
Ft  had  bten  in  his  power.  Plin.  Lp.  3  71.  .<^^f '^^- ^^"  "^^;!  .^^  ,    j^  ^^^  construction  of  the 

^W  Very  rarely  the  adjective  ^"  "r'^f.  %";«.^,,?:  adCc  dim  di Velio  IDmSno  erat,  tam- 
ablative  abndute.  as  :  .Ant'OC^^^^^^^Pj^,^;?,  f_f  [J'^^e  ^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^,.^,^  not  -oin-  to  cross 
q„am  non  trau.ituns  !"  A;:'^^"  f  TliJm  ^S^^'^,^^^  ao,nine  foras  non  pr.>c6d.t, 

Plin.  11.  N.  11,  IB.   Comp.  Liv.4,  .8;  41,  ^'  '**'";  ^^.^j^^^m'  cito»  perituram  si  emp- 

1.  Ju.urtha  cedens;  t^b.  f.mtr  ^}^^^^^:^:,:^rem  ph£  fam«  ^ituram 
tnrem  '"VV"',"  ;  o^V^  ^^'•.  '^k..num  Svracusilnum  ad  Hieronymum  tran>  Jtum  e.^ 
quani  hd<i.  ^^^  ■  \:}^'~.  ,!-w  m-is  rtominatiOiiem«  mod  ce'  laturum^.  Liv.  24,  4.— 
mieniin  vixdum*   libertatem  ^^'''^''T'^  J^''''^^^^^^  Liv.  39.  54.-5.  \i- 

Thoc  in<licium«  est.  se  nee  a,='0>o  .ec  urbi  y^^'^" ';[,^^„;i",, i,n am  p//^/» a/ «ro..  Liv. 
deo  vos,  Cartha.M.iiense^  ^"^'llu.  .^a  ida?^u  "SrUusque  puffnatari  quam  hostis  Liv. 
2'   44—6    Infer  mns  helium  't^lne.  auaacuis  u)rui  .4       /    j        q  3       g,  Maj^na 

^1:4  :-7:  llerculem  ««""?'' V^ -^"s  dVTmpStaten^^^  ^^- 

pars  hominum  est  qua>^  ^'«'„»^1:«  ''^^^Kofn.vn^^^^^^  exemplum,  nisi  ener- 

9.  In-eniususM  yir  t'''^,'"»^:?""^  ^^"^  n  U.riim  rnisj  exi-entii'  tibi,  mi.<.»'?7m?  etsi  uoix 
;.  iss.:^^»^  eum  feli.ita>t«.  Sen.  Ep.  1?„- ,\^;,,Vca"Si?Romanus^  vallum  inra^urusl^  m 
exe^Msses.  Plin   Ep.  3  13.--   1  •  fc'?^fd;!.;\^,.^f  ^eonsiS  ^^^5^'^^^/: 

copia^o  puj:me  heret  ^^^^-^'^^  --.^dl^r  ad  Jc^^^  IlannOnem  perdt^»  co^^^^Murm^J^e 
KalouTcam.  Liv.  40,  4.—  1.3.  ai<  xauui  i  «11  1,  _  14    Ad  orima  sicrna  ven-  lianni- 

eve  ntV^3  inturorum  et  de  «\'-S%^,;^VuoquilVM.^  vohintate"  a<^-.r|C- 

balexercit.imin  Eiruriaui  due  t   cam  quo^^^^^^  regiOnem  BactriSnam"  misit, 

rs:,^iii^;^^4  ^^^^r^  l^!^^er;sis.^?: 


ivi 

the 


. '- ; ; 7-rr       4  hnrdlv  vet  —  »  much  less,  to  say  nothing  of 

1  to  leave.-  ^  venal.-  ^q"l^^  y-'^tX-'r  J^fproof.-'»  adjacent  country-.- /^  ^;^ 

Orovalix.wer.-'wiih  moderation.-  8  to  hear  y:"^^,,^,^/ to  chant   songs  to   t 

(liT^re  alic'ii,  n>  use  force  a^^^n^J  .one -J    '^^rs*'^  ^*VvaYc^- »^ 

;Kof  somebody.-  »'  to  ^«'  •"  ,** '"7,^;     r"/\7i,,»   2e  force  of  a  phiral.-*  ^nnvadere, 

^qnest  (on  thy  request).-  »c<>lU'Ctivesi.urular^v^^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^  «  alxnit  the 

r.  K;^".  will.- -to  unite  with  o- -;  ;•- ,,,n;"to  be  presen?.-  "  ci^"«. 
r"or-k.-  3r^,7.;«-;?,ro"aremble,  to  gather.-  »'  saddle. 


140 


PERIPHRASTIC    GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 


J).  The  Periphrastic  Gerund  axd  Gerundive. 
§  *#1  1.  The  periphrastic  conjugation  of  the  gerund  and 
GERUNDIVE  is  fornicd  by  the  verbal  adjective  in  dus  in  connec- 
tion with  the  aifTorent  tenses  and  moods  of  the  copula  (Predi- 
cate-Gerund).  It  presents  the  verbal  idea  as  an  act  tliat 
MUST  BE  ]K'rformed,  the  tenses  of  tiie  copnla  indicating  the 
TIME  at  which  the  necessity  of  the  performance  is  said  to  exist 
or  to  have  existed:  Vincendus  swiu  I  must  be  defeated ;  vin- 
cendus  eram,  I  was  to  be  defeated. 

fc?o  nt  of  tliis  iftVrenct.  in  meaning',  the  relation  of  the  pcnphra.tic  future  to  'he  peri- 
X?<t^c  -erand  i  "not  exa.-tly  the  same  as  the  relation  of  an  ordinary  active  verb  to  it? 
St^iv  ^oice  io  th  nhe  -cnerallv  not  be  chan-ed  into  the  other  uMth<.nt  a  Te<-t- 

Kv^re^S'     T  e  emviits  however,  in  which  neriphrastic  futures  are  almost 

•  "  Iv  .t  r  monn  v/w  h  I  i)erii)hra'^tie  «rrrund.  Tlius  punnatHn  e.^ds  and  robui  jniQ- 
«t;^  /m  .  niy  h  h  ende  e!  bv  \on  are  to  UnhV.  Peritnrm  .mn  tny  be  trans- 
Tat  eft^elS  as  ^W/^^^  mUn  e<t  (I  am  to  pe-ish^.  In  such  instance-  the  meanijij 
nfnecessitvi^  not  contained  in  the  periphrastic  future  as  8uch,  but  is  implied  in  the 
«ftn  ition  xliiich  is  riese iihe<l.  The  rules  on  the  use  of  the  tenses.  an<l  on  the  cons  rue- 
?  on  ol^  he  •  i-e  ic  .te^^  Imv  a  stron-  analOL'v  to  those  on  the  periphrastic  fuiiire, 
ioiwi;  s.^^ri  t;^he  hvnoth.-ti.al  meanii.ir  of  the  indicative  <.f  the  past  tenses, 
V^'iS^^^^^^^^c^  ol^ille  i^finUives  to  iiitinitive  claus.^,  and  to  the  similar  use 
of  both  the  periphrastic  future  and  the  gerund  as  accessory  predicates. 

Bern  101  The  pcriiibrastlc  j^orund  and  the  second  supine  are  the  only 
fonn^  of  DEroNF.NT  verb^with  passive  mean in.irs  (aside  from  a  few  pertect 
ivtrtieinles)  as  MlliicH  ItorUindi  sinit,  the  soUlicrs  must  liE  exhorted  al- 
though mUifes  horlautur  means '  the  soldiers  exhort',  and  not   are  exhorted  . 

Rfjn  10-^  The  predicate-irerund  siuniilies  nf:cessity  in  the  widest  sense 
of  the  word  without  distin-uishiuir  amon.ir  the  ditferent  de.?rees  and 
modes  of  necessity.  By  the  -erund  a  duty  an  expediency,  an  unavoid- 
able F\CT,  or  a  RULE  may  he  represented.  Hence  the  Lnghsh  equiva- 
lents to  he  applied  in  renderini^  the  gerund  are  various  and  must  be  se- 
lected according  to  the  requirements  of  the  sense  ;  as:  lince?i(hts  mm,  1 
must  be  defeated,  I  have  to  be,  am  to  be,  ought  to  oe,  should  be,  mn 
bound  to  be  defeated,  or  '  it  is  necessary  that  I  should  be  defea  ed.  AV  ith 
negations  the  gerund  often  assumes  the  meaning 'cjmnot  or  need  not., 
(Ex  14  22),  tii^dubifandum  iwn  est,  it  cannot  be  doubted  ;  mhd  tibi  timen- 
diiin  est',  you  need  not  be  afraid ;  cavenduni  Jion  est,  no  precautions  need  be 
taken.  ,  ^.    ^ 

Hem    l(i3    To  express  the  idea  of  necessity,  there  are   a-idc  from  the  prcdicate-jrc- 
nuurnv    vo  her  expression^  at  th<'  di<poHiion  of  the  Latin  lar?ua-e.  namely  .feftere 
an  I  tC    np  -^^^^  n<^0'^'<se  est.  oportet.  opus-  e.^t.    Debcre  is  ot  general  iinpor  ,  Hmilar  to 

?he  serund^  and  is  mainly  employed  to  vary  the  expression,  or  for  such  act.oua  which 

I  parens  6parin«'.-  ^»  lUeraJl>/ :  '  t.»  those  that  would  h  ive  left  nothing  behind' ;  i.  f., 
siuce  they 'would  have  left  uothins  beUiud.--  •  tircedmcss. 


PEPilPHRASTIC   GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 


141 


cannot  a'Pumo  passive  form?,  especially  for  the  copula  with  predicative  adjectives  and 
nouns  although  even  thc-^e  may  often  be  replaced  by  vkkbs.  and  th<>n  assume  the  form 
of  -eriinilB  {cavendum  est  tibi=cautus  es-<e  defies;  liBtandum  tibi  est  =  latus  esse  deOe^). 
Detilrex^  also  used  in  lieu  of  a  gerund  with  a  negaiio  i,  wlicu  the  latter  would  assume 
ilif  ineaiiin-  of  possihihty,  as  inuericordld  certe  vinci  noa  debeo.  Liv.  40,  15. 

Oporfet  means  an  act  mokaixv  necessary,  i.  e.,  an  act  the  non-perform mce  of  which 
would  involve  the  disici^'ardiug  of  some  moral,  social,  or  other  rule,  either  particular  or 
ircneral:  Oportet  no-i pnrent'is  aindre.legibus  obedlre.fidem  servdre.    Compare  Cic.  Div.  2, 

^      --         '     .  ..         .  •  _i.:. .,.:i. ..„..,; .  argumentis  et  ratiOnihus  oportet 

See 


11  •  Hoc  e-'o  pliilosophi  non  esse  arhitror  testihus  uii ;  argumentis  et  ratiOnibus  o 
(he  is  bound  by  the  rides  of  his  science,  ii  would  be  unph'dosophical  to  use  witnesses). 
Cic.  Off.  3,  29,  107 ;  Or.  22,  74. 


2,  1.  31;  4,  -A  b;4. 

Opux  est  means  a  necessity  conceived  as  expedient,  i  e.,  which  would  subject  the 
one  disrcL'  irding  it  to  some  inconvexience,  as :  Emas  non  quod  opus  est.  sed  qiiod  necese 
e.<t  Se  I.  Ep.  ".»4.— I^eirem  Curiitam  consuli  ferri  opus  esse,  n^^cesse  non  esse;  That  a /ex 
Citriala  would  not  he  ahsoluiely  necessary,  but  advisable.  Cic.  Fam.  1,9,  25. 

These  expressions  aie  generally  not  interchangeable  without  affecting  the  conception 
of  the  speaker.  Hut  the  predicate-gerund  is  a  gkneual  exprcs^ion  of  necessity  which 
niav  serve  as  a  pvnouvm  of  oportet,  7iecesse  est,  and  opus  est  (Mori  ne  es-e  est  =  morien- 
diim  ot :  pareiHls  ainjlre  oportet  =  pareuiea  amaudi  suut ;  hoc  uegare  tibi  opuserit  = 
hoc  tibi  lugandum  erit). 

§  512.  The  periphrastic  Gerund,  like  all  passive  verbs,  has 
cither  a  personal  or  an  impersonal  form,  tlie  latter  being  ren- 
dered by  some  of  tlie  general  methods  of  expressing  Latin 
impersonal  passives  (§  4G0,  R.  10.).  The  personal  forms  of  the 
periplirastic  Gerund  are  called  the  'predicate-gerundive', 
^vhile  to  the  impersonal  forms  the  term  '  predicate-gerund'* 
(ill  a  narrower  sense)  is  applied. 

Hem.  1G4.  The  equivalents  of  the  gerund,  which  are  mentioned  in  R.  161, 
cannot  be  applied  alike  for  each  tense  atul  mood  of  the  predicate-gerund  and 
gerundive.  Thus  in  English  the  auxiliary '  muM\  being  merely  considered 
le  of  the  signs  of  the  polentiLl  mood,  admits  of  no  modification  by 
I  or  mood,  Uie  perfect '  he  muat  have  been  defeated'  implying  a  concep- 
tion vety  ditferent  IVom  the  present  potential  '  he  must  be  defeated^,  if  the 
latter  is  taken  in  the  ordinary  sense  '  we  must  defeat  him'.  Hence  the 
English  potential  with  *  must '  can  only  be  used  for  the  present  tense  of 
the^'predicate-gerund  and  gerundive,  while  to  the  other  tenses  and  moods 
dilTerent  expressions  must  be  applied. 

^*  The  terms  ^erund  and  gerundive  are  not  very  felicitously  chosen,  and  many  gram-    U 
maiians  have  adopted  a  ditferent  (though  not  better)  terminology.     We  have  abstained    1 1 
from  the  ea-^y  task  of  proposing  new  terms,  considering  mere  names  as  harmless,  and    I 
brill.-  unwilliie'  to  incnnse  the  confusion  prevailing  on  thcMibject,  by  introducing  terms 
riiff  rent  from  all  those  ifi  practical  use.     Our  terminology  is  preciser  than  many  ot  those 


as  on 
tense 


adopted  by  other  gijimmarians.  By 'Gerund'  we  always  understand  the  impersonal 
form  whether  it  i<  a  predicate,  or  an  absolute  participle  generally  designated  by  tlie 
"lammarians  as  'ncuttrof  the  passive  futuie  participle'  {ars  scribendi).  By  '  Gerundive 
The  PER-oNAL  form  is  alwavs  understood.  Besides  this  di-tinction,  there  is  only  one  more 
to  be  obs.-rved,  namely,  tliat  between  PREDiCATE-gerunds  and  gerundives,  and  between 
ATTRIBUTIVE  genuids  and  gerundives.  These  four  categories,  which  agree  with  our  gen- 
eral theory  on '  phrases '.  exhaust  all  possible  forms  which  the  verbal  adjective  in  dus  may 
atsume     The  gerund  and  gerundive  arc  comprised  by  the  general  term  •  gekundial  . 


142 


PERIPHRASTIC   GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 


PERIPHRASTIC   GERUND    AND   GERUNDIVE. 


143 


llffTEKF. 


Peufect 


Pllterp. 


II 


laudamlus  esscm. 
laudandus  fucrim. 
landandus  fuis^em. 


Present 
Imperp. 

Pekfect 
Pluperf. 


Ind. 


SuBJ.  bcllandum  sit. 
"      bellaudnm  csset. 

•'       bcllandum  fueriU 
"      bcllandum  fuisset. 


Synopsis  of  the  peiupiirastic  gerund  and  gerundive. 

1)  Gerundive. 

Ppesent    Ivd     Landandu.  sum,  I  v,nst  he  praised,  ougfd    buBJ.  laudandus  slm. 
FI.ESENT    IND.       ^^^  ^  ^^^^^.  ^^^^  .x^^^  ^^  ^^  pruu<ed,  etc.,  or  it 

in  neo-smnj  to  praise  me.  ^ 

laudandus  orani.  7 /ra,sWo  be  nraimUtt  was 

nece.<mrifto  praise  me,  or  /  ougld  to  have 

been  prai^*d.  .     ^    r        ».y 

lau.landus  fui,  (Twos  to  be  praised).  lourfM 

to  have  been  praised,  it  was  (would  hate 

been)  mceysan/ \o  iniii-'Q  rtu. 
laudandn.»   fucraui,  /  ourj/it    to  have   been 

FcTuuE»  laudanduf  erof/.A.;/  hove  to  be  praised,  it  will  be  necessary  tojyraise  nu. 
PuE'^FNT  iNFiNiTivrn^inVc)  laudandum  cspc,  that  I  must  be  praised. 

PrtFErTlNF;N.T.vE,mo)laudandum  Uu...,  that  I  ought  to  have  been  praised Jhat  it 
would  have  been  necessary  to  praise  me. 

2)  GeruM).    (Impersoual.) 
Bollandnm  ost^.  a  war  must  be  icagcd  (liter- 
ally :  it  ynu-sT  be  warred). 
bellandnui  oral,  a  war  was  to  be  waged,  cvgta 
to  have  been  waged;  it  was  necessary  to 

beThmdum  'fuit,  a  war  ought  to  have  been 

waned,  etc 
bcllandum  lucrat,a  war  ought  to  have  been 

waged,  etc 

Future,  bcllandum  erit,  it  wiU  be  necessary  to  wage  a  7car. 
Prksent  Infinitive,  bcllandum  esse,  tha>  a  lOir  must  be  waged. 

PEUFPCT  TvFCN.TivR.  bcllandum  fuisse.  that  a  war  ought  to  have  been  waged  or  thai  xl 
woiddhavebeennccessatytowageawar.  ,      ,     ^      r  „r,  i  «r  -,  mnrlitional 

auuther  sf  ulcncu".  Sue  Book  \  I. 

8  513.  1.  Only  TUAXSiTivE  verbs  can  be  used  as  geniinlivos, 
while  neuter  verbs,  intransitive  verbs,  and  transitives  used  with- 
out a  passive  subject  (transitive  object)  must  take  the  (im- 
personal) form  of  the  gerund.  Tiic  gerundive  and  gerund,  in 
tliis  respect,  as  in  altnost  all  other  rehuions,  are  exactly  treated 
as  the  passive  voice  in  the  ordinary  conjugation.  A\  hile  the 
verbal  adjective  in  das,  iu  the  form  of  the  gerundive,  always 
a<rrees  with  its  subject  iu  gender,  number,  and  case  the 
same  as  the  compound  tenses  of  the  passive  voice),  it  takes, 
in  the  form  of  the  gerund,  always  the  neuter  singular  in  f?»m. 

I      2  The  rendcrin-  and  treatment  <.f  the  ""P^"^,' ""'Vp-A,'"  ,,^' 'onal  -crundive  in  the  tlurd 
this  should  happen. 


l\ 


he  nmi.W.-Milites  landandi  sunt,  the  soldiers  must  6e  prat^s^.-Mihtes  laudandos  e?se 
cen'co  /  am  of  the  opinion  that  the  bravery  of  the  soldier'^  should  be  praised.— 
Pu-MKindum  est,  a  biffle.  muH  bs  fought. -Diceudam  esse  cxistimo  quid  ceuseas,  i 
believe.  thU  it  must  be  said  what,  you  are  thinking. 

2.  In  bolh  the  li^erand  and  the  gerundive,  the  passive  agent 
01-  doer  of  the  action,  instead  of  being  in  the  ablative  with  ab, 
as  in  the  ordinary  passive,  is  placed  in  the  dative  case. 

Disiripulu!»  mihi  laudandus  est,  the  student  must  be  praised  by  m^^^^-Eraentibuscaven- 
duui  est  ne  decipiantur,  by  lho<e  who  buy,  care  must  bi  taken  lest  they  be  deceived. 
Item.  1G5.  Latiu   inlransitives,  requiring  a  completing   object  in   the 
gfnitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  must  take  the  form  of  the  Gerund^ 

Ant  reip'djliar  mihi.  nut  mei  meorvmque  ofiliviscendttm  est  (I  must  forget  either  the 
ret)ut)Iic.  or  myself  and  mine).  Liv.  8.  l.—Sncrnrrenduni  est  D.  liruto  (D.  Brutus  must 
be  aided).  Cic.  Phil,  O,  :^.-Sao  culciue  J udicio  utend urn  est  (Every  cue  must  use  his 
own  judument).  lb.  N.  D.  3,  1. 

Hem.  10»;  In  Varro  and  Lucrctiaa  transitive  verb?  often  take  the  impersonal  form 
of  the  ^erund  even  if  thev  are  accompanied  by  a  transitive  object  in  the  accusative,  as  : 
Dnnd>un  o/ieram  est  (inst.  of  danda  opera  est).  Varro  K.  R.  1,  1-2.— Certe,  ut  opuior^am 
faciendum  est  sensibus  auctam  (instead  of  ea  facie u da  est  ancfa).  Lucr.  6,  h-ri.— canes 
potius  nauco^  et  arrh-  habnidum  (est)  quam  multos  (instead  of  Canes  pauci  habendisurtt) 
Varro  14  11.  1  '^l.  In  C;esar  and  Liw  no  examples  of  this  construction  are  found»  :  in 
Cicero  only  two  examples  of  it  are  extant  (de  Sen.  2,  and  Scaur.  2,  13).  But  in  the  lor- 
mer  of  these  passages  the  reading;  is  doubtful. 

Rem  107  Verv  rarely  the  a?ent  of  the  periphrastic  ecrnnd  takes  the  ordinary  form  oft 
with  the  ablative,  especiallv  with  verbs  iioverniiii;  a  dauve.  when  it  mi<;ht  be  doubtlui 
wiiich  of  the  two  dative-  is'meant  to  be  the  aeei-t,  and  which  is  meant  to  be  the  object 
of  the  verb-  Admon^ndum ]X)tius  te  a  me  quam  rogandum  puto.  Cic.  Div.  lo,  A.—Aqun- 
turt>on'jmultr,ruw  rivium  gmbus  a  voIjU  est  consnlenduifi,  the  property  of  many  citizens 
is  at  stake  whose  interests  {guibu^)  mu<t  be  provided  lor  by  you  {avobis).  Cic.  Man  -{. 
Sometimes  the  placing  toizether  of  the  two  datives  is  avoided  by  a  circumlocution  of  the 
fforund  with  fakenduTn  est  ut  (similar  to  that  with/ore  ut),  as  Faciendum  mihiputati  ut 
fuif:  tifteru  b'revi  resmnd'^rem,  I  l>elieved  that  I  ou^ht  to  answer  tliy  letter  soon.  Cic.  1^  am. 
3  8  (in-tead  of  tuis  Ufferix  mihi  brni  re.^iwndendum  putdri)  But  Ke-'erally,  when  no 
ambi-vuitv  ran  arise,  the  two  datives  are  used  along  with  each  other  :  Lt  hac  lege  utar 
non  c".nceditur  ab  eo  cujus  roluntftti  mihi  obtcmperandum  est  (by  hrm  ^'^f^f.Jf'f^'f"^,^ 
be  res^perfed  b>/  m^).  Cic.  Clu.  57.  158.  The  same  is  the  case  when  only  one  ^^at nre  is  used 
which,  by  the  sense,  is  clearly  pointed  out  to  be  the  dative  of  the  agent,  as:  Eum  qui 
imperat  cogitare  ojiortet,  hrevi  tempore  sibi  esse  parendum.  Cic.  Leg.  3,  2. 

Hem   ir,s"  When  the  gerund  or  gerundive  is  accompanied  by  the  dative  of  the  agent, 
the  English  constr.iction  is  regularly  made  active,  in  order  to  avoid  the  awkward  passi^ 
circumlocutions  which  are  generally  repugnant  to  our  lan<ruai;e.    The  Latin  datn  e  ol  tne 
Sl'en.  nnS  !hen  be  chan-.-ed  into.an  Knglish  subject-n..minative  a-  mihi  ^riortercdum  eH 
1  must  die.     Cattra  militibus  facienda  sunt,  the  soldiers  must  make  a  camp.    In  th  8 
active  construction  several  expressions  of  necessity  may  be  used  which  in  the  pa^sne 
w?» uhl  no   be  ulmiss  ble.  as  •  it  is  the  duty  \  '  I  am  obliged  ', ;  it  is  necessary  for  me ' : 
Ihcachoamlco  tuo  instifuenda/uit.  it  was  thy  friend's  duty  (it  was  incnmbent  on  him 
to  institute  this  acii.m.     .mhi/ugiend'mi  erat.  I  was  obliged  (c«>nn)elledMo  flee.     Z/t-s 
Tincendum  fuit,  for  them  it  was  (would  have  beeq)  necessary  to  be  victorious     Even  ^f 
to  the  .-eru'n.l  no  dative  of  the  agent  is  added,  the  sentence  is  often  rendered  into  En g- 
sh  as~if  s  ch  a  d.tive  were  expressed,  as:  Moriendnm  certe  c^U  at  id  t'^^^f«'«-  <^n  eo 
ipso  die  (we  m.ist  certainly  die.  etc.).  Cic.  Sen.  74.   Si  in  alterutro  P^ccandum  t^t,7jialo 
tidm  nimis  timidus  quam  parntm  prudens  (if  lam  to  err  on  one  side,  etc.).  Cic.  Marc.  ^i. 
Jiem.  \m.  The  rules  ort  the  consecution  of  tenses  (§349)  are  applied  to  the  periphrastic 

1  Some  i:rammariah8  except  from  this  rule  the  verbs  uti. /rui.  fungi  n^^a  i>onri  stat- 
-  ing  that,  in  tlie  gerundive  construction,  they  may  be  treated  «"^  ■/»">" ^;|f;>f- ^^  f  m-  as 
a  u<a_'e  occurs  with  those  writers  only  who  use  the.^e  verbs  m  tluMr  oMinary  U>^^l^^p-^ 
transitives.  In  Cicero  only  a  trace  of  this  construction  is  found  «;>c.  Fin.  |;  »■-  .'  ^^ 
l-assagesthat  were  form-rly  adduce.l  from  these  authors  in  proof  of  ^^'^  "^^^;f  ^'^ 'i.^^ 
gerund,  have  been  critically  emendated,  so  as  to  be  read  now  with  gerunds.  (Ca,b.  w.  u. 
1,  32.  Liv.  37,  49.) 


144 


PERIPHRASTIC   GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 


PERIPHRASTIC   GERUND   AND  GERUNDIVE. 


145 


irernndfl  in  the  present  and  imporfiM-t,  the  fame  as  to  ordinary  verbs:  pwit/rr^eociipne 
Sln-cnienduni  df,  (he  doubts  xvliettier  the  nlliesou-ht  to  be  assisted).  Mtfarit  Bocumc 
subv(nicn<intn  e^.'tef  (he  doubted  whether  the  allien  ought  to  be  assisted»,  tor  the  su^- 
iuiK  tive  of  tht;  i)erffct  and  pluperfect  s»t'e  R.  172  foil.  . 

J^e/n    .10    In  order  to  tran^slate  Kn^'li^h  sentences  with  phrases  expressing    necessity 
into  Latin  sentences  with  j^nTundive  construction,  they  must  (if  active)  always  be  turnea 
into  pHssives,  and   if  thev  have  no   transitive  object,  the    impersonal  form  of  the  ge- 
rund inust  be  given  to  them,  the  active  sulijects  taking  the  form  ol  the     dative  of  the 

"°h" Active  :  The  soldiers  must  undergo  danirers  :  pass.  :  Dangers  must  be  undergone 

hy\(o)t\n'»ok\icrs— Milif  thus  peric'dasiibeu/u/asunf..         ^      ,,  „    ^  ^„^f  i,« 

a   AcTivK :  You  must  take  care  that  you  do  not  arrive  too  late  ;  pass.  :  Care  must  oe 

taken  by  (fo)  vou  that  elc.—C'irandi/m  libi est  ne  tardins  adve/iia^. 
:i.  Active  :  Thy  friend  should  obey  the  commands  ;  pass.  :  It  should  be  obeyed  by  {fo) 

\hy  iYiexH\to\hi''c(m\mi\\nU—Amlco(voj>/Msobediendt/me/)t      „       ^  .,       „    r.,  «,«,.! 
1.  Liber  f.^/^.r7N/i//(^//*'///.«-' qui  nuUi  turpitudini»  servit^.Auct.  IIcr.4,24.-  2   In  omni- 
bus rebiii,priusnuam  m^'jnHWvin'^.adhibenda  est  pneparatio*  diliL'ens    Cic.  Off.  1,  21 - 
3    TacitiE  magis  et  occultie  inimlcitije  timendiE  suxt  quam  indicfip»  et  apertje.  «  _ic. 
Verr  2  h  71  —  4    '^ov(\\Ci\  sunt  putnndi  qtit  mercantnr»  a  mercatorihus'  quod  statiiu 
vendanV  Cic  Off  1    42   ITjO—  5.  Fortes  et  magnanimi»  sunt  habendi  non  qui  faciunt, 
sed  qui  propulsanti»  injnriam.  Cic.  Off  1.65.—  »'..  Tria  ridenda^^  mnt  oratO-i.  quid 
diait  et  quo  loco,  et  quo  modo    Cic.  Or.  4.3.-  7.  Diffennd'na  nobis  ei^f  inquit  (Cnesar> 
iter  ill  prlescntiil.  Ca-s   U.  C.  ;i,  8.5.- S.  K.xistit  qiue.tio  suMimcilisi^  num  quando»» 
amtci  novi  veteribus  nnt  anteiMnendi.  Cic.  Am.  19,  n7.-  9.  \  obis  carendaac.rur/ifnda 
quam  primiim  (§  31.5.  K.  18)  amam itas »*<..,•/ Asiie.  Liv.  3S,  17.-  10    hx  his  perspici»» 
potest  quid  fit  propter  turpitudiuem /'/f7/Vwr/ww,  quid  ucnco^'  /urfieriduTn  non  «^ 
quodoiiinlno  turpe  non  est.  Cic.  Off  3,  7,33.-  11.  Kiro  vcstros  pat^res  vivere  arbitror 
eteamquidem  vitam  qune  f.<f/ sola  vita  xominanda.  Cic.  Sen.  21.  7..—  12.  1  hijosophi 
Kpicurei»^  omnTs  resquiPcWW/"  hominieJ7>^/f-«(/(ti8  volu])tSte  metiuntur'».  Cic.  I  i'*-''*»-  — 
13    (i<'sui20  KomanOrum  neque  cum  Gnecis^»,  neque  ulla  cum  ^^cute  sunt  conferenda" . 
Cic   Tiisc.  1,  2.—  14.  Nemo  in  auiOrem  siii  (^'iiiU  cohort nndused'^'^.  Sen.  Ben.  4.1«.— 
15.  Nihil  iiinoeenti  turn  optandt/m  (est)  quam  aMiuiim  judicium.  Cic.  Clu.  7.—  lb.   isi 
iL-ro  ad  fratrem,  inonendian  ed.  Liv.  40,  10.-  17.  Qiium  tempus  necessiiasquH*  postu- 
lat  dec^rtanduvi^^  manu  est,  etmors  servitQti-«  turpitudmuiue  antejionenda.  Cic.  on.  i, 
23.—  IS.  Aut  riegandum  eM  deiim  esse^aut  (pii  deum  esse  concedant   t-x^fatendmn  e^t 
etim  aliquid  a-ere.  Cic.  Nat.  D.  2.  7»i.-   19.  Quis  ad  LMibernacula^'  sedeat-»,  suinma 
cura  pfvvidendum^^  et  pmcac€nd>/m^<>  vobis  ed.  Liv.  2L  8.-20.  Ltiam  m  secundissimif* 
rebiiB^'  ma.xime  ed  utei>d>/m  coiisilio  amicOr.im.   Cie.  Off  1,  20.-  21.  Aut  a.'^entiendmn 
Citt^3  nullii  cum3*  gravitates*  paucis^*,  aut  frustra»^  dissenliendum.  Cic.  J^am.  1, ».  .3. 
—  22  Ouie  more  (acco'dinq  to  vsnoe)  asrenfur  institutisque  civilibiis,  de  eis  nihil  est 
nrmciiZnClum^^  Cic.  Off  1,  41,  148.—  2:^.  liisistendum,  Laeli  et  Scipio,  senectflti   ed, 
I'iii-que  vitias»  (iiliiientia  comptiimnda*''  (y'int\ ;  />!//7/urn(/z/w  tanquam^i  contra  morbiim 
sic^'-  contra  senectutem  ;   habeiula  rati"*3   valeludinis.  vtendum    c.xercit-ationibus" 
modicis,  tantuin"  cibi  et  potiOnisi"  adhlbendum*''  ut  refieiantur  vires,  non  oppnmantur, 
necvero  corpori  f^oVi  m/breniendiwi  t*/,  sed  menti  atque  ammo  multo  magis.  Cic.  ^en. 
11   35—    24    Multis  casibus  didici.  quando /?M7«rt/i'/wm,  quando  abdmendum  pugna 
*j<:<«    Liv  4-i  3ti  —  25.  Civitatis  vestne  tyraunum  talem  esse  inter  omuls  constat,  ut  de 


»  Di'so'race  vice—  "^  to  be  a  slave.-  »  to  beirin.—  <  preparation.—  «  pronounced. 
—  «  to'puivhase.—  ^  dealer.—  «  instead  of  vend  it  ilri  sunt.—  »  magnanimous—  »<>  to 
ward  off—  11  to  see  ^o  thn-e  thincrs.—  i'-»  rather  diffieidt.—  >3  sometimes,  inst.  of  ah- 
gua>,do.'^vM  §  ;357,  It.  4.  §:«»,  H.  11.-  »«  the  charms.-  »  per^picere  to  see  (clearly).- 
»•  iccircoQuod.  for  the  reason  that.—  »7  Epicurean.—  »8  erpetere,  to  desire.-  »»  l!^^J}^1> 
to  measure  —  2«  deeds.—  '-'»  thoi^e  of  the  (ireeks.  Instead  of  the  lorm  mentioned  §  .JO.,  1, 
the  attribuiive  genitive  is  often  directly  compared  with  the  goyerniuir  word  of  the 
attribute  that  forms  the  first  member  of  the  comparison.  This  is  called  '  compamtio 
comnendiana\—  ^a  conferre,  to  compare.  (The  gerund  means  here' do  not  allow  , 
'  do  not  admit').— 23  to  exhort.— ^*  necessitv.— 26(/ecrrA7r«  mann,  to  fii;ht  with  the  hatid, 
i  €.  to  make  use  .>f  arms.-  '•^«  slaverv.-"  gxiUrnacula,  pi.  t..  helm.—  "  suhjunctivt.,  with 
the  force  of  a  gerund.—  ^»  to  provide  for.—  3o  to  consider  with  care.—  »i  in  the  greatest 
pro^peritv.-  ^^  asiieiUiH  alicui.xo  endorse  somebody's  opinions.—  s*  uuhoui  any.— 
I»  d\<rnity  —  ^^  paucis  is  the  object  of  both,  UfOfentiendum  and  dissentiendum.—  ^^  ^„  "' 
out  effect,  to  no  purpose.-  *^  j^r^^W^re  aliquid,  to  lay  down  rules.-  "  delects.—  *<>  to 
make  up  —  *^  as  if—  *'*  so.—  *»  ratiOnetn  habere  alicujus  ret,  to  have  due  regard  for 
sonu-thing.—  ««exercise.—  "  only  so  much.—  ««drink.—  «Mo  take.—  ««for  this  devi- 
ation from  tiie  law  of  consecution,  see  p.  426  foil.,  Obs.  2.—  «»  that. 


r 


? 


jMT'na  ejns  magls  qnam  de  amicitiil  nobis  coqitnndum  sit.   Liv.  38,  14.—  26.  Quints 
rfKideiidum  HI  impui,'nantibus',ne  is  quidemdnbitat  qui  spevictorioe  caret.  Just.  38,4. 

§  511.  The  IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  (more  rarely  the  Perfect,  see  Ex. 
17.  18)  of  the  periphrastic  gerund  or  gerundive,  indicates  that  a  necessity 
of  sonic  future  action  existed  at  a  time  anterior  to  the  speaker's  time,  as 
UecjiH  litterm  in  sendtu  legends  erant,  the  king's  letter  had  to  be  read  in 
the  Senate.  The  Perfect  (more  rarely  the  imperfect)  is  used  in  a  hy- 
roTHETiCAL  scHsc  (contraiy  to  reality),  indicating  that  an  action  ought  to 
Juive  been  done,  or  that,  in  a  certain  contingency,  \iwould  harebe£n  neces- 
sary to  do  the  action  :  Hoc  non  polUcendum  fuit  (more  seldom  erat)^  this 
ought  not  to  have  been  promised.  Hoc  faciendum  fuit  si  etc.,  it  would 
have  been  necessary  to  do  this  if  etc. 

Rem.  171.  TJr.rely  the  imperfect  indicative  refers  hypothetically  to  a  present  necessity 
(inst.  of  a  subj.  imp.),  Quodd  Cn.  Pcnnpejux  Romoi  prit'dtus  e.<set,  hoc  tempore  taiiien  ad 
taiituin  bdhim  is  erat  (inst.  of  esset)  eligendiiii  (ought  to  be.  elected).  Cic.  Leg.  M.  17.  For 
tiie  particulars  of  this  construction  see  p.  727  foil.,  Obs.  24.  2»). — The  English  perfect 
poTK.NTiAL  with  'iiiusV  ifl  iiot  expressed  by  the  periphrastic  gerundials,  but  by  oportet, 
or  tievesse  est,  with  a  perfect  subjunctive:  (^uoniam  babes  istum  equum,  aut  emeris  opor- 
tet.  aut  muiiere  a''C''})eri,s\  aut,  si  horum  nihil  est,  surnpueris  necesse  est;  You  must  have 
either  bought  the  horse,  or  received  it  as  a  gift,  or  must  have  stolen  it.  Cic.  Inv.  1,  45. 

Hetn.  172.  In  the  subjunctive  nK>od  the  imperfect  of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  is  sub- 
ject to,  or  exfm])t  from  the  rules  of  consecution  in  the  same  way  as  ordinary  verbs 
"(§§  349.  350),  as  :  I'ra?ce})it  senatui  quid  esset  decernendum.  he  directed  the  Senate  what 
to  decree  (what  was  to  be  decreed).  8ee  Ex.  9. —  Si  hoc  faciendum  esset,  equidem  re- 
cu.silrem,  if  this  were  to  be  done,  I  should  refuse.  Sec  Ex.  10.  11.  Instead  of  the  geniud 
or  gerundive  with  essem,  the  gerund  or  gerundive  with  forem  is  sometimes  employed. 
But  g(n«'rally  it  performs  the  office  of  the  lacking  future  subjunctive  of  the  periphrastic 
conjugation,  indicating  a  necessity  that  will  arise  at  some  future  time.  See  Ex.  12.  13. 

Hern.  173.  The  perfect  subjunctive  of  the  periphrastic  gerundials  hardly  ever  occurs 
in  any  other  than  hypothetical  meaniusr,  denoting  eiiher  what  ought  to  have  been  done  (Ex. 
2!.  22),  or  what  would  have  been  necesxarij  or  unavoidable  if  some  other  action  had  or  had 
not  happened  (see  the  Ex.  below).  The  law  of  consecution,  in  this  form,  is  subject  to 
the  same  exceptions  a*  in  reirard  to  the  periphrastic  future  (p.  132,  E.  145) :  Ita  ge^<ta  res 
est  ut,  si  adfiiissent  Etrusci,  accipienda  clades  fuerit  (that  a  defeat  ivould  have  been  una- 
roidab.'e).  Liv.  10,  27.— A  necessary  action,  7va//y  ^>^/:/b?v/i€(/.  if  a  subjunctive  must  be 
usfd,  is  not  expressed  by  the  perfect  geruudial,  but  by  circumlocutiou  with  dtb^re^ 
ojyortet,  etc. 

Hem.  174.  The  pluperfect  indicative  is  generally  applied  with  the  force  of  the  hypo- 
thetical pi-rfect  {ou'fht  to  have  been.  See  Ex.  2:3),  but  also  in  its  proper  meaninu:.  to  deiiote 
the  necessity  ol  an"  action  as  past  in  regard  to  a  past  time.     See  Ex.  24.     The  pluper- 
fect SUBJUNCTIVE,  the  same  as  in  ordinary  verbs,  is  used  in  hypothetical  periods  (§  :i50), 
either  in  the  principal  sentence,  or  in  the  clause.  Si  hoc  mifii  faciendum  fuisset,  recusassem, 
if  I  should  have  had  to  do  this.  I  would  have  refused.     Hoc  tnihi  faciundum/insset,  nisi 
littertetut^  venissent,  1  would  have  been  obliged  to  do  this  if  not  thy  letter  had  arrived. 
See  Ex.  25.  2U. 
t:^'  In  the  use  of  the  future  of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  no  anomaly  is  to  be  noticed. 
1.  Caesari  omnia  uno  tempore  erant  agenda:  xcxlUum^  jyroponendmn^,  signum  tuba* 
dandu/n,  ab  opere  revocandi  milites,  acies  instruenda^,  milites  cohoriandi.  Caes.  B.  G. 
%  tiO.—  2.  Romilnis  iter  i)er  regnum  nostrum  dedi,  et  per  Thraciam,  ubi  pnx  prcesfanda* 
barbaris'  erat.  Liv.  39.  28.-3.  Dilectibus"  intra  paucos  dies— neque  enim  multi  mili- 
tes  legendl^    erant— pericciii',  consules  in  provincias  proticiscuntur.    Liv.   37,  51. — 
4.  Civitatem  EburOnum  sua  spoutei"  populo  Romano  bellum  facere  ausam  (esse),  vix 
erat eredendmn.  C«s.  B.  G.  5,  28.—  5.  Militibus  simul  et  de  navibus  desiliendum  et  in 
fluctibus'»  con-sidendum'^'^  et  cura  hostibusf7-a/;;?vf7naw/?/w.  Cae.s.  B.  G.  4,  24.—  «.  Apud 
Pvthagoramis  discipirlis  quinque  annis  tacendum  erat.  Sen.  Ep.  52.-7.  Cum  montem 
hostes  cepissent,  et  locy  munlto  se  teuCrent,  evndum  ad  hostis  erat,  si  vincere  vellem. 


» impugnare,  to  attack.—  -  The  flag.—  3  to  bring  up.—  «  the  tuba.—  *  to  draw  up.—  •  to 
warrant,  to  keeu.—  '  A  barbaris  is  not  the  passive  agent,  but  means  'on  the  part  of. 
See  §  445.  R.  .5.5.—  8  dilectus.  4tli  dccl..  a  draft.—  »  to  draft.—  i»  of  their  own  accord.— 
'1  waves.—  1'^  to  stand.—  ^3  Nom.  Pythagoras,  Greek  decL 


UG 


rERIPHIlASTIC   GERUND   AND   GERUNDIVE. 


Quid»  si  nrbcm  cum  mcpnibns  co  loco  tenCrcni  ?  Ncnipe'  oppt/f/nandi^  eranf.  Liv. 
3S,  19.— 8.  Armjlt:!!*  quadrTu'as*  in  primil  acic  locaverat*  rex.  quia  8i  in  fxtrCino  aiit 
in  iiuMlio  loiilta'  fbri'iit,  per  suos  (militcs)  af/tv(/<e*  eranf.  Liv.  37.  11.—  9.  Hi  mihi  nt»n 
icl  videMnntiir  acciisjlre  quod  exsef.  accitoandtwi.  Cic.  8en.  '). —  10,  Damon  vas^  factus  est 
Phintia>*^,  nt  si  hie  non  ad  diem  certam  revcrtisset  {^'3U),  moritndum  fwet  sibi.  (Mc. 
Off.  3,  10,  45.—  11.  Si  pro  alio  dicendnm^  es>ft,  tempus  ad  niedUandnm^^  siunpBirisem. 
Liv.  40.  15.— 12.  Periculum  esse  dixit  nc  victi  mxvz\^  timendi  forent  quam  bellante)* 
fiiissent.  Liv,  ;W,  :i5. —  \'\.  Patres  consiilis  ropias  iniiiui"  nolebant.  nietii  ne  cum  (Jallis 
fm-ef  bellandum.  Liv,  37,  51.—  14,  Utinam»^,  inquit  O,  Pontius  Samiiis>3.  '  turn  essem  na- 
lus  si  qiiando  RomJliii  dona  accipere  ccppissent ! '  Nic  illi  multa»*  »vcc\\\a^^  ea'iKCtanda 
fuTnmt/  Cic,  Oft',  *2.  21.  75.—  15.  Promissum  potiiis  won  faciendum  quam  tiun  taptrum 
lacinus  admitfendumft/i/'«.  Cic.  Off.  3,  25.  «♦.5.—  Ifi.  Hoc  quidim  jineccptum  falsiim 
est  ;  illnd  potiiis  prmipundutn  fuit,  ut  ne  quando  anulre  inciperf tuns  emu  queni  ali- 
qiiando  odisse  j)ossi;inus.  Cic.  Am.  1(>.  fiO.—  17.  Cum  AristonTco  belliim  geruiul'im  fuH 
P.  Licinio  et  L.  Valcrio  C(Uisulilui.-.  Cic.  Phil.  11,  8.—  18.  Quo  tandem  anim«»  fuisse 
illot*  mbitramini  qiiibiit»  liis  de  rcbiis  non  modo  audlendumffn(,\ernm  vtiamjudi- 
candum!  Cic.  Clii.  10.29.—  19.  Quamobrem''  aiu  exiqend'i'*  re^es  won  fiierunt,  aut 
plebi  re»»,  n<m  verbo-»,  danda  lilxrtas,  Cic,  Le^',  3,  10.25.—  20.  Maxime/^/j7  optan- 
t/'/m  M.  ScAuro.  judices,  ut  sine  offeiisioue"^'  cnjiisquam  retinCret'»^  lamiiijc  su:e  dii;- 
iiitatem.  Cic.  Scaur.  1,  1.—  21.  Dubitilri  potest,  ad/twenilumn-.-^/uerif  lu>c  ;;enus'''*.  an 
plaiie^»  omittendiim.  Cic.  Ofl",  3,  2,  9.—  22.  Quis  e«it  qui  diibitet,  qnin  hac  re  compertil 
nnl  obeunda'^'^  mors  Ciuentioaut  ffuftripienda-''  accusatio^»  /Wa//  Cic.  Clnent,  17,  48. 
—  *^3.  Totiis"  est  nunc  ab  eis  a  qiiibiis  tuendx^  fuerafy  rclutus.  Cic,  Fam,  1,9,17,— 
21,  Consul,  perfectis  <eis)  quje  Hoiiuc  a^^/^^/a /«^/a/i/,  profectns  in  Galliam  est.  Liv. 
31,  22,—  25,  Si  lioc  mihi  per  me  effinendum  fuuf^et,  non  me  p<riiit5ret  Ifa  esse  molTtum. 
Cic  Fam,  «.  12,  2.—  2»i.  Nisi  reveViisset  Dejotariis,  in  <?o  couciavi'o  v\  Cuban dum^^  fni^sei 
quod  proximjl  noctc  corruit^^,  Cic  Div.  2.  8,  2i».— 27.  Et  mores  ejus  erunt  (tpecfandi"  in 
qiiem  beneficiiim  conl'ertnr.  et  animus  eri;a  nos.  Cic.  Oft".  1,  14.—  28.  Si  Galli  bellum 
facereconabinitiir,  frd/aAW^M^^e^/i/  ab  iureri<3»  C.  Mariiis.  Cic.  Font.  2f,.—  2<».  Impri- 
mis videndum  trit  ei  qui  rempublicam  administrabit,  ui"«  ^uum  quisque  teneat.  Cic. 
Off.  2,  21. 

§  515.  Tlie  two  iNFiNTTTVRS  of  the  Gerund  and  Gerundive  are  used 
on'ly  in  infinitive  clau.^es,  wliether  tliese  are  construed  with  a  suhject-ac- 
cusative,  or  with  a  subject-nominative.  In  this  construction  the  |>resent 
infinitive  of  the  copula  {es^e)  is  frequently  dropped.  The  perfect  infinitive 
has  almost  always  a  (past)  hypothetical  meaniuij::  llocfaciundamfaisse 
putdvitj  he  thought  that  this  ouf/ht  to  have  been  done. 

Rem.  175.  The  most  usual  verbs  after  which  infinitive  clauses  with  the  perund  or  pc- 
rnn<iive  are  used,  are  those  of  thinkivo  and  dkcueeino  (eJrUHtn'ire.  pufare,  judkiire, 
cen^lre.  decernere,  sfdtuere  and  especially  ri'i'^ri  witli  a  nominative  with  the  inttiiitive). 
It  is  a  remarkable  exception  to  the  j^eneral  rules  that  verbs  of  decuekisg.  demanding, 
and  otiier  verbs  which,  accordin-^  to  §  393,  R.  27,  are  construed  with  ?//.  must  t)e  con- 
ftrued  with  an  intlnitlve  clause,  if  the  depeiul<Mit  i)redicate  is  a  gerund  or  <,'erundive. 
The  veri>  ceris^re  (to  believe,  to  deeu»),  if  it  is  thus  construed  with  a  «gerundive  infinitive 
clause,  generally  means  ' io (/^cr<;e',  '  to  pass  a  resolution',  or 'to  move,  to  propose  a 
resolution'. 

Cato  Carthaginomdelendam  censnit,  Cato  moved  that  Carthaqeho  dPufroyed—V^Xvcs 
diem  unuiu  adjiciendum  lii(lr)nim  ceusueriint.  The  Senate  pasfied  a  nso!i/tion  that  one  day 
of  Uie  (/ameftbe  added.  Liv.  ;i9,  7,— ?5il)i  quis(iue  d«^poscit.  pfcllendos  inde  hosils,  L'reri/ 
one  demaud.-t  on  his  own  account  that  the  enemy  must  he  dricea  away.  Liv.  22,  28.— 
Legaii  domuiu  mittendi  (esse)  videuinr,  itaeems  that  the  envoysought  to  be  sent  home.— 

How.—  2  of  course,  surely.-  '  to  attack.—  <  chariots  (wilii  four  horses),—  »  to  place. 
—  •to  drive,—  '  bail,  suietv,—  »  Norn,  J'hintias.—  »  to  speak.—  »"  for  deliberation. 
—1»  minuere.  to  diminish,-  »2  woidd  that.—  »»  the  Samnile.—  »«  in  an  ironical  pense  = 
pauca.—  1*  centuries.  Tliis  sentence  is  remarkable,  on  account  of  an  accusative  of 
time  being  made  the  passive  subject.  The  construction  ouglit  to  liave  been  imper- 
sonal.—1«  The  second  member  of  the  comparison  corresponds  in  grammaticjil  form  to 
the  first.  We  employ  here  in  English  tiie  intinitive.—  »^  therefore,—  »»  to  expel.— 
i»  in  reality.—  '•'"  in  words.—  21  offeiice.—  '*  to  maintain.—  ^3  fo  admit.—  ^*  subject. — 
25  alto<'ether.—  -^  to  undergo.—  '■'7  to  undertake,  to  commence,  -  28  accusation.— 
29  wholly.-  30  apartment.—  3*  to  sleep.-  ^2  to  fall,  to  be  destroyed.—  "  spectare, 
(Ui'ivid.'io  look  fur  something,  to  take  something  into  ccmsidenition  —  3*  excitare  tiy 
rouse.-  86  inferi.  the  lower  gcnls;  here  used  instead  of  the  '  lower  world',  the  abode  of 
the  dead.—  3«  viiere  is  construed  with  ut^  if  it  means '  to  sec  that  Bomcthiuf:  be  done  . 


I 


I 


PERIPHRASTIC   GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 


147 


Lc^ati  domum  mittendi  fuisse  videntnr,  it  seemj<  that  the  envoys  ought  to  have  been  sent 

Aor/ie.- Sempronio  abeundum  fuisse  putiXvit,  he  believed  that  Hempromus  ought  to  have 

ieft. 

Hem.  176.  Rarely  the  perfect  infinitive  of  the  Gerund  or  Gerundive  refers  to  a  past 
necessity  witiiout  a  hypothetical  meaning,  as  :  Non  satis  mihi  attenderevidgris.  Pomp^jo 
non  solum  quid  esset'opiimum  nrf«A?dMm///i<-w,  sed  etiam  quid  necessariuin  (that  it  was 
Pompey's  duty  «tc).  Cic,  Lig.  3,  11,  26.— The  gerund  or  srerundive  with /ore  has  like- 
wi-^e  a  hvpoth«'tical  force  referring  to  a  future.  It  is  used  if  a  sentence  whose  predicate 
would  be  ill  the  future  of  the  gerund,  must  assume  the  form  of  an  inflnitive  clause,  as : 
JHjrit  H  id  factum  esi^et,  urbem  hostibus  tradendamfoie  (that  it  "would  be  necessary  to  de- 
liver ttie  city  to  the  enemy) 


1.  Kutilius,  et  si  dammltus  est,  vidCtur  mihi  tamen  inter  viros  optimos  atq 
entissimos  esse  nnmerandus.  Cic.  Foiitej.  17.—  2.  Difficile  fuit  judicSre,  i 
\  421,  R.  73)  virtflte  anteferendus^  viderCtur.  Cses.  D.  G.  5,  44  —  3.  Reguhis 


atque  inno- 
centissimos  esse  numerandus.  uic.  r  oiuej.  1«.—  i.  ijuhchk  mn,  juunjinv,  uter  ntrl 
(S421  R.  73)  virtflte  anteferendus^  viderCtur.  Cses.  D.  G.  5,44—  3.  Reguhis  captIvo3 
rlddenda^  in  senStu  non2  censuit.  Cic.  Off.  1, 14.—  4.  Csesar  parfiendum^  sibi  ac  la- 
tins dl<trihuendum  exercitum  putavit.  Cscs.  B.  G.  3.  10.—  5.  Ctesar  has  tantulSrum* 
reruin  occupationes»  Britanniae»  anfe/)onendas  non  judicabat.  Cses.  B.  G.  4,22.—  6.  Ari- 
ovistn«  tantos  sibi  spiritus^  tantanique  arrogantiam  sumpserat*  \xi  ferendus^  non  vide- 
rOtur  Cies  B.  G.  1,3:1.-  7.  Quum  muUi  delmdum  Atheniensium  nomen,  nrbemque  in- 
ceudio  con^imendam  censercnt,  negarunt  se  SpartaniexduObusGncciieoculis  altenim 
cnitnro«'o  Jusr.  5,  8.—  8.  Exsules"  vociferabant»2.  priusquam  tali  foedere  obligaren- 
1ur>3  nox.osi*  puniendosesse.  Liv.  38, :«  —  9.  Eis  qui  se  occultaverant»»  rerum  omnium 
inopi'a  pereundum  vide>atur.  Cies.  B.  O.  6,  43—  10.  Nee  vero  audiendi»«  qui  graviter 
trrt,'c. //^/'/m'Mnimlcis  putahunt.  Cic.  Off  1,25.—  11.  Qnis  non  videt  illis  pnmiissis 
sfandum^**  won  es<€  qua?  coactus  quis"»  metu  promiserit  ?  Cic.  Off.  1, 10.— 12.  Germanico^» 
hello  ctuifecto  C;csar  niuliis  de  causis  statuii2>  sil)i  Rhenum  esse  tran-seundum.  Css.  B. 
G  4  1(5  __  13  Se<'estaiii22  pr;rtoris  imperio  parendum  esse  decrevCrunt.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 
4  '^4'  —  14  Mithridates  optandum  sibi  fuissQ  ait,  nt  [de  eo]  licCret  consulere  bellumne 
sit23'cum  Uomanis  an  pax  habenda.  Trog.  Pomp,  in  Just.  :38.  4.—  15.  Maxime  assen- 
tior  eis  qui  ne-ant  eum  ]ocum24  a  Panaetio  consnltos*  relictum2«,  nee  omnino  scrtben- 
dum  fmsse  clc.  Oft'.  3.  2.  9.—  16.  Scipio  NasTca  dixit,  si  id  factum  esset,  non  magis 
(§  412)  Conieli:e27  familiaj  quam  urbi  Romanic  (Part  I,  p.  142,  note  31)  fore  erubescen- 
dam.  Liv,  38,  59. 

§tll6.  The  predicative  gerundive,  similar  to  the  adjective 
mums  (g  510)  is  used  without  the  copula  1)  in  place  of  a  clause 
of  purpose;  2)  instead  of  a  relative  clause,  as: 

Ilanc  rem  tibi  conservandam  dedi,  I  gave  you  this  thing  to  preserve  it,  t.  ^,,  Mu 
order  thanoumav  ].reserve  it '  (literally  '/o  6e;>r..m-.d ').-Nullam  rem  novimagis 
fugiendam'qntxm  banc,  I  know  nothing  ivhich  ought  to  be  more  shunned  than  this. 

EF"  In  these  constructions  the  gerundive  has  the  grammatical  form  of  a  completing 
or^ce«<orv  predicate,  or  that  of  an  attribute.    But  such  gerundives  must  be  distin- 
guished fmmUieatnibutive  gerundives  properly  so  called,  which  have  a  peculiar  lunc 
lion  of  their  own,  losing  altogether  the  idea  of  necessity,    bee  K.  l»o. 
Rem  177.  The  predicate  gerundive,  denotinnr  purpose  (also  called  parti- 
crpivL  GERUNDIVE,  bein-  a  real  participle  of   the  periphrastic  conjuga- 
tion) is  attached  1)  to  transitive  objective  phrases;  2)  to  passive  predica- 
tive phrases ;  3)  (very  rarely)  to  predicative  phrases    formed  by  neuter 
verbs      It  always  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  Us  logical  sub- 


»  To  nrefer  —  «  The  negation  is  taken  out  of  the  inflnitiveclanse  to  which  it  Jog'caUy 
,elon  ^s^  and  is  connected-with  the  principal  verb,  See  §  411.--  »  to  divide  -  '  toMuli^ 
otrillin"  -  «occunation  with,-  «to  the  expedition  to  Britain.—  'airs.-  sibi  ^m- 
"r'  to  a-umr-»e  gerund  denotes  here  ^«'«^''ibility  (it  seemedto  be  ""Pf  ^^^'f  .^^ 
'a'rwi  irhim.-  ^°  t.vt^ar  out.-  n  exile- «^to  clamor  -  i3  oft  t^ar^  ^^^'«d  "/nh^ 
liifv-  16  tn  hide  —  »«  to  listen  to.—  »'  graviter  ira-sci,  to  feel  very  angrj.—  siure 
tudVe  to  a1,i  e  bv  a  thin"  -  "  ii  st.  oialiquis.-  =«  German,  adj.-  ^i  verbs  o(  decreeing 
ni?vtrt;^^sfn!edi'itl  infiTdtive  clauses  ^^.ntaining  J.-'runaive  predicate,  e^e"  ;f  the 
subject  of  the  clause  and  that  of  the  principal  sentence  «;«  Vfh-Ci^iTants  of  l^e^e^ta - 
use  in  this  case  ..bject-inrtnitives  in  lieu  of  a  cl=tuse  -  "  inhab,ui  ts  o^  be^^^^^ 
2>  for  the  deviation  from  the  law  of  consecution  see  p.  420.-       subject.  on  pui 

pose.—  3«  to  skip.—  ^''  Cornelian. 


b 

so 

mere 

be 

g' 
uliq 

m 


148 


rERirHRASTIC   GERUND  AND   GERUNDIVE. 


ject,  which,  in  the  case  'No.  1  is  the  transitive  object  of  the  principal 
l>reaicatc  ;  but  in  the  cases  No.  2  and  3  it  is  the  o^rammaticai  snl)ject  of 
the  principal  predicate.  Hence,  in  tiie  first  case,  the  ijernndive  is  in  the 
ACCUSATIVE,  and  in  the  second  and  third  cases  in  the  nominative  : 

(\)  Cxf^ar  erfrcifu/n  Titurio  Sablno  in  Mcnapios  ducendum  tUulit,  Ciesar  gave  to 
TituniisSablnus  tht;  army  (inorder)  to  lead  it  (literally  ' to  he  lecD  into  the  coiiniry  of 
the  Menapii.  Cx^.  B.  G.  4,  ii—  (2)  Kxercitus  duce»rinx  Fahio  in  Vejentl;»  datiir.  the 
annv  is»  given  to  Fabius  «in  order)  to  he  led  against  the  Vejentians.  Liv.  2,  43.—  (3)  Nu- 
datiini  l>-c'nm  piti^t  iinhiibii-'  p>i'r^  faciendum.,  the  oare  rtwris  open  to  the  rain,  to  rot 
(or,  taking  imbrihus  fur  an  ablative  'to  be  rotted— dci?troyed— by   ranis').  I.iv.  3«),  17. 

Rem.  178.  The  Irausritivc  verb»  most  usually  cotniccied  with  participial  gerundives 


are : 


1)  \>rbs  implying  a  grantino  or  oivino  (in  the  widest  8en?e  of  the  word),  the  ^rar,- 
pitive  object  denoiiTii:  a  tiiiuL'  to  be  dispo^^ed  of  by  the  action  contained  in  the  gerund- 
ive. Such  verbs  nviTdare.  tradere,  itrahT're.  edere.  a<'H(fa:lre.  nffribuere.  proponere.  ditt- 
dere  (in  the  meining  to  distributp).  concedere,  permittere  (in  the  mi-aniiii.'  to  fntrmf), 
rHinriiiere,  ohjicere  (to  offer,  to  at)andon).  Here  behmg  the  verbs /orJr^nnd  coitdncere, 
the  former  \\\  the  meaning  '  to  give  out  a  wouK  on  contract  (o/)'/< /ocar*'),  or  '  to  rent 
out  a  THING  '  (rem  locdre)  ;  the  latter  in  the  meaning  "  to  Uike  a  work  on  contract '  (ppus 
co>iducere),or 'in\nTci\i\\'n\\x' iremmnducere).^  .,    ,,       ^ 

2)  Verbs  denoting  to  skni)  a  person  or  thing,  to  be  disponed  of  as  fpecitied  by  the 
gerundive,  as  ndtlere,  ditcere.  df-dt/cere. 

3)  V'erbs  denoting  to  dkmano,  to  take,  or  to  receivk  fomethine  (for  a  p-irpose,  ex- 
pressed l»y  the  gerundive),  as  d<'j)oscere,  exiyere,  su/nere,  dtliytre,  ncciptre,  recipere,  nus- 

ciiy€r€. 

4)  The  verb  curare  (aliquid),  denotiriL'  to  take  rare  of  a  thinir,  the  nature  of  the  care 
being  expressed  by  the  gerundive  (see  U.  178).     But  comp.  K.  VJS. 

Hern.  179.  The  participial  gerundive  i?  c«'nerally  translated  either  by  'for'  with  a  ver- 
bal noiin  or  participial  in  j/f/,  or  bv  an  infinitive,  which  is  genetally  clia"L'ed  into  an 
active  form  when  a  I'EHson  (generally  the  remote  object  of  the  principal  predicate)  id 
conceived  as  the  doer  of  the  action,  as:  Pueri<  senindlns  ediscatdiUi  danvis  ;  literally: 
'we  give  to  boys  sentence-'  to  be  memorized  ' ;  but  more  idiomatically  'to  rnemorize. '  {them), 
or  'for  mertunizing  \  This  chan.'e  into  an  active  cannot  fak<'  plac<>  if  we  cannot  connect 
the  doer  of  the  action  as  subject  with  the  infinitive,  as:  Sempronium  liamatn  vddt  a 
com 


The 
bei 


mlibuti  quarendt/m,  he  sent  Sempronius  to  Rome  to  be  questioned  by  the  consuls. 
Phe  f^erundive  with  curare  alwavs  retains  in  English  its  passive  form,  the  verb  curare 
ng  ll-anslated  to  cni<e  or  order  (something  to  be  done),  or  '  to  hare'   (something 


done),  as  tnvrof!  reficiendos  nirare.  to  order  (cau-e)  the  walls  to  be  repaired  ;  domum  de 
Integro  wstrvenddm  curatif,  he  had  his  house  furnished  anew. 

Hem  180.  Hence  to  translate  Eni.'lish  infinitives  into  Latin  if  they  arc  govrned  by  the 
transitive  verbs  mention<Ml  above,  they  nnist  be  clianged  passively,  and  rendered  by  the 
«ERiNDivE  (never  by  the  Latin  infinitive),  which  must  be  placed  in  aL'reement  with  the 


with  ad  and  ihe  gerund  after  the  trans-itive  verbs  mentioned  above,  is  not  so  rare  as  itM 
represented  bv  some  grammarians  (See  for  inst.  Cic.  I'hil.  10,  2,  ."> ;  OtT.  2,  13;  2,  17; 
rianc.  17.  41 ;  Mnr.  :{!,  GO ;  Dom.  2-3,  GO ;  Or.  3,  31 ;  Att.  15,  8 ;  Lvca.  B.  G.  3,  S  ;  B.  G.  7,  81 ; 
Liv.  31,  31,  and  often). 

Hem.  181.  The  construction  with  the  participial  gerundive  is  rare  and  unusual  after 
other  classes  of  verbs  bur  those  mentioned  above,  as :  Muris  oh^idendum  se  iiaiu^erat 
(he  had  closed  him<eli'  up  within  the  walls  to  he  beneged).  Liv.  36.  \1.—Manlimtijioliahos- 
tium  conspicicnda  protulit  (Manlius  produced  the  spoils  taken  from  the  enemy  '  to  be 
looked  at') .  Liv.  G,  20.  7  —  De  spativ<  onlinum  hoc  p'ivcipiendum  hah?mus.  Col.  ft.  5.— 
Armdri  capias  ojxtrtet  dedurendat  in  irquum  (the  troops  should  be  armed  with  a  view  to 
send  them  to  the  battle-field,  i.  e..  'to  make  them  light').  Liv.  22,  14.  Most  of  these 
constructions,  especially  the  last,  are  extremely  harsh. 


1  There  is  also  a  locatio  and  a  conductio  operdrvrn,  used  of  engaging  the  services  ot 
another,  the  former  being  used  of  the  employee,  the  latter  of  the  «-mployer.     But  the 
verbs  locdie  and  conductre  are  not  construed  with  participial  gerundives  il  taken  in  thi» 
meaning. 


PERIPHRASTIC  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 


149 


Hem.  182.  Those  gerundive,  which  w^^^        ^^:^;^^^^.^^^^ 
ramlns,  an  incomparable  triumph,   ^<>«5'«^?0  fW^raArm,  a^^_^^  ^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^^ 


rclat  ve  clauses  even  hy  the  Latins,  as  ^^^  """J*    '  *•'.  nf^.   Rjib.  2.4:  where  the 

^^^•^a;^^^^..e.i,>lo.co4rH.n^^^^ 


nussa  simt.  Lir..20,  ^^-:--('vX"%%^e^m'^^ 

trucidandam  objicere^  Liv.  3. 1'. ,  •♦;- f"  ^  "^"'"^^^^^^^  Dianre  toUtndum^  locS- 

Cic.  Att.  4,  2,  5  -  9.  Magno  ^^';^^'/;^  ^.^  S  ?imul  cum  agro/r.mda  (  =  utenda) 
tur  9i-^,f'-,f^,\^-rJ\\  ^iSnpto  '^  anicohminam  de  Gotta  conduxerat  jacien- 
locilri  jussit.  J^'^-.,'^^'-'-  ".;i^  v'"V3r..if  r'W-  Div  2  'M  47  —  12.  EquOrum  quatuor 
dam.  non  inert  iai'^  ^''^'^'TJ^^-^^'^^r^'  '  t   t  u  ^  20  1-  r?    Cassai  der  mvm  Alexandri 

locerandamque^\  ^'»'' ''"'"P^'!fr;>  ^''-  f^A.'fT  1^?_^  7    lleJiodus  ea  qua,  vtenda  ac- 


se 


gummittendui'^^  essent.  Liv.  26,  44. 

I  The  Morlni.-  '  on  the  spot.-  »  to  seize.-  «to  assign^- '^^^^^^^^  \^^^-- 

7  to  call  out.-  «  ^'tat.u;  (imau-e  of  worship).-   »t.,emm 
tractor.-    ^"^  out  of  intjolence.-  »>  ^ardy^-i*  an  oi  g  the  kii    lit..  ^^  «.iasiire.- 

_  1.  .4car«««,  an  Acarnanian.-  \\ ^'f  ••^'l'P;,^;-bati  n  -  "  a   U  tie.-  '^*  toretreat.- 
30  the  statue  of  a   cow.—    21  golden.—    ■'''  \erDatiiu.—        u. 
a  reserves.—  '•  to  send  to  the  front. 

cate-L'.Tiind»  (ut  i„4  /'««'''«'«"^'f'f^'iJn'hf,^'  ;  'i^^  „  ico  note  17),  m>ij>i^r'm>,d«m 
SS'iUaS^Jrdeffb/L"  jrrsui^yVcl'aS.u  /o  be  Ju.ed  Uy  .we.nu,,. 


]^50  REVERSED   PHRASES. 

III.  THE  REVERSED  PHRASES  AND  THE 

GERUNDIALS. 

A.  Reversed  Phrases  in  General. 
§«I17.  An  attributive  phrase,  consisting  of  a  substantive 
(noun  or  pronoun)  as  governing  word  and  a  passive  participle 
or  verbal  adjective  in  dus  as  attribute,  is  called  a  reversed 
PHRASE,  when  the  grammatical  relation  of  the  members  of  the 
phrase  must  be  reversed  in  order  to  translate  them  into  Eng- 
lish, that  is  if  the  Latin  passive  attriijute  must  be  changed 
into  an  English  active  participial  or  infinitive  as  the  governing 
word  of  the  Latin  substantive,  as  Carthago  delenda  (deltta), 
*  the  destroying  of  Cartilage^  or  '  destroying  Carthage',  or  *  to 
destroy  Carthage'. 

Rem.m.  The  Latin  lanizuaec  ha.  intrmluccd  those  rovcr.cdph^^^^^^^ 


t'ioV  a.  snhject  of  the  phrasJ.  .o  that  the  decU;nsi.,n  of  the  phra.e  rrqu.rc-.l  l>y  the  con- 
«tr  ctioii^ee  §28)  may  be  perfoim.d  hy  <lecli.nn-  its  governing  suhstantue  »  husin- 
Meul  o^  U'^  ar^V/zt^eci  6^/  nading  -book,^  the  Latin  «ays  '  }Ye  are  ddighted  by  books 

being  rea(V.  ,.      ^  *•  • 

n^m  1S4  The  Latin  pa<?ivo  attribnte  in  reversed  phra?e?,  correppondinn:  to  our  partici- 
niiufn  1^'  (or  ot  er  v  -rbal  noun-)  a^  «..vc-rnin-  word*  in  tiansmve  objective  phrases, 
?.  Juher  aVerfect  ,m  or  a  v.-rhal  adjective  in  dus  (j,'erundivc),  aecordlUi; 

to  the  rulesi-iven  below.     Thus  we  form  the  followin-  phrases  : 

1    Bv  <nvin"  advice  we  beneftr,  con,<^mo  dato  ;>mvMW'/*/literally  :  /by  advice  cr.vcn  we 
benefit '7  <  r  loasUio  dando  prosumns  (11  terally  :  '  by  adv.ce  to  be  .Mv-n  we  benefit  ) 
2!  The  advTee  of  nn-lertakin-  a  war,  cousUiam  belli  suscijnendi  (literally  :     the  advice 

""^S.  'S'cha?<;e'oniav*[n"?.n  a  war,  belli  suscepti  cnmen  (literally  :  *  the  charge 

of  a  war  having  been  undertaken).  ,.  .•«. 

Hem  18-j  The  f-erundive,  In  reversed  phrapcs,  loses  its  primary  idea  «f  neceseity  which  it 

has  i?n  •edicate-"erundi ve  assuming  the  force  of  a  present  or  future  i-assivk  paktic.ple 

AUribu  ive  S^^^^  gerundives^sometimes,  but  v.-ry  rarely,  are  not  reversed  phrases 

fsee  Re  n  182)   which  is  always  clear  from  the  connection.    In  tins  ca-e  they  retain  the 

flfa  Snece<<itv.     Hut  aside  from  these  rare   instances,  considered   Rem     82.,  a -n.-ii 

D  ra"\vithn,  a  tributive  gerundive  must  be  considered  as  kkvkkski,.    Thus  ay>y>.;m^ 

?«.  t/W/    VJ^^^^  iLiv.  43.  48)  is  not  an  apparatus  of  cities  which  are  to  be 

b"-i  ■  '.-d  (ic^^^^^^^^         to  tl.e  literal  accept  ,tion  of  the  pluase.,  but  an  "PP'^'-"»"^^^^t'fff.?: 

,^;i7d7ii*      Phrases  with  pkufkct  i.akticm'i.es,  however,  have  more  ^'V'';''f''V>\";f  [.^J 

oroninarv  phrases,  and  the  connection  of  the  sentence  alone  can  decnle  ^\  '«<  .^^ ,/,     ^ 

M  n-t       taUei  a^  reversed  phrases  or  not.    This  is  often  clear  from  the  phrase  itse  I.     I  hus 

"iw/  /en  y^^  ^Xi  y^m'n  (the  charire  of  having  received  a  Roman  ^'arr.sonXan 

on?vbecoHc^vedVs  a  rever/ed  phrase,  while  ^  dux  pn^.-ndii  recepti'  (the  leader  of  the 

receivcHl  S^^^^^^  ^^ense  inly  if  taken  for  an  ordinary  phrase.     «••JV^'-'l^.' »\"^- 

ever  the  nlira-e  itself  may  have  eitlter  meanin-.  and  the  ulterior  connection  of  the  di>- 

c<mr<e    n  •-   deternd.e  it-force.    Thus  in  the  sentence  Marcdlus  vrbem  inw^^ms  omni^ 

ada^meidl^^t  (Liv.  25.  '^)  the.phrase  J/ar..W»^Y.5rm.s..;  see.ns  to  b^^ 

participial   phrase    (Marcellus,  having  entered  the  city,  excited  all  to  take  up  arms). 


l^EVERSED  PHRASES  IN  GENERAL. 


151 


Kevcrtheless  the  connectiot.  with  the  previ.;«  and  JV.U>w^^^ 

"l518'"The  obli<iue  cases  of  the  impersonal  gerund  (in 
J  "'^r  singular)  are  employed  to  express  those^  rcjt^ons 
Ihich  are  assigned  to  the  English  participial  m  mg  it  it  is 
rit^er  vv  thout  any  object,  or  with  objects  which  in  Latui  are  in- 
TR  Nsm^  Since  the  nominative  of  the  English  participial  in 
ir.  nerally  corresponds  to  the  Latin  (subject).nifinitive  the 
oUique  caseJof  the  ^personal  gerund  -  generally  conside^^^^^^ 
as  equivalent  to  the  cases  of  the  inhnitive,  as  ^om.  legere 
X;  GEN.  legendi,  of  reading  ;  D.t    ^^f^^^^!^^ 

sailing,  nnvi'javdo  ddecfamur  onvving one's  rivals,  7nos(emulis invtdendi 

2.  (With  intransitive  objects).  Thchab  t  m  ^y;>j  p      j^^  ^.^,,,,,,  castHspotmndicomi- 

,;,,i,/rr.  .'overning  ^^%*  ;;^^.;;;*^,7e  wi^lUyi^n^^      wait  fSr  the  enemy,  Umpus  fmtibus  in- 

/i'///j.— They  employed  their  time  vmiu  ij  "'o 

sviiaiido  abswmb'iut.  .,„„  a ««mrrF  when  it  is  necessary  to  distin- 


V 

clauses  as  fi^'j^»-"^-      '"'■"''  j"^    #  .1     »«»/3  «ntmf  tfeteac  .     inu»  u/o  «1*1  ^y-... —  —-.  .    „„ 
musf  b^  d./Hild ',  but  •  one  defeats  ,     omj^^'l    uSmUsd') :  d^^idenum  nocendii*  an 
n  meived-as  ars  qua  navi<jCitar  (1"^;'^    f  ^^^^'i^^.^c^.JartH.  ^-  «,  34»  says  :  ui  potius  m 
en  ivalent  of  desideriuni  quo  rmefur.   ^'  /.^,  f.,''"":'^^'',^^,^  detVinieuto  mceretur. 
S"/iio  aliquid  on.itterCtur,  qua.n  ^""^'f.  '^"  i^Vl!"-    "  fh^^^^  a  personal  pa»- 

"ITometimes.  indeed,  absolute  J^"V»|^'f^^'?^"„l^^e^JiVs^^^^  of"  inaccuracy,  as  :  ^pes 

Pive  •  J)ut  such  very  rare  m^ges  must  ,^>.^^*^"?;-l^,":,    "  ,ored.  Nep.  Att.  9.-Vum  populam 
T^ifiundi  nuUa  eiaL  there  was  no  ^op^  «J  ;>y"^j[^*^^  that  the  people  could 

ll:  i>^,'suad''ndo  i^c  cogendoregiPi^JJ'fj'L;^^^^^^  co.npulsion  (by  being  com- 

Ji/,erbe.^overned  by  ^.ui-jrn^^^^^^^^  ^vis  excluded  from  bemg  seen. 


iteUed).  Cic.'Fam.  1, ' 
Cic.  Acad.  2,  17,  53.  ^ 


.  The  theory  of  the  .erundials,  ^^^^-^by  t^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

natu   •  '.  •  the  oeuuni>.ve.    The  pnncipa   ^  J?";;\  "\,^:f^  ^es  it  i?  used  as  governing  word 
rund  absolute  is  taken  from  tl>e  fact  _that  u  man>    n  tanc  ^^^^^  ^^^  language 

of  transitive  objects  (§519)..  But  »»''^  «^;,^,;,^;  f  "  ^[jons  lo-^ically  active,  had  been 
•rom  Jhe  regula?  use  of  th;'  /mpersonal^  |^^^^^^^^^^  its  original  passive 

pra.lnally  accustomed  to  feel  t  as    n  «;/  \^^^^^^^^  functions  to  it.    This  usage  is  an 

force  to  assitrn  in  several  important  '^?'*"."":, ,,':,.  «nd  in  other  languages,  especial  y 
anonalv,  but  one  which  has  many  ^na  ''S^f  "^.^^^J^ »  «^^^^j;-  althoujrh  unquestionably 
\n    the- whole    deponent    verK   wimh    ^«    a^    ^ ^  ^*  ^'^./^K 

deponent  verbs  havt-  been  once  Pass nes    noin  "»  ,.  ^^^^  oblique  cases  of  the 


152 


BEYEBSED  PHRASES. 


^519.  Usao-e  has  allowed  the  construction  of  the  gerund 
absolute  with  transitive  objects,  in  place  of  a  reversed  phrase 
with  a  gerundive  1)  when  the  gerundive  phrase  is  in  the  gexi- 
tivk;  2)  when  it  is  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition.  In 
other  instances  the  use  of  tlie  gerund  witli  transitive  objects  is 
either  unusual  or  inadmissible. 

t^^^  Thus  the  rever*otl  phrase  Spes  >/;Wsf  r/^i^^J'/'F,  thohopt;  of  takini;  the  city,  may 
also  be  expresst'd  by  a  j,'enind  with  a  transitive  object,  liicrally  answerinir  to  the  Ku- 
«rlish  construction  (Sj)es  vrheni  ccijntndi).  The  sentence  //y.sY7.v  ar/z-w  vaatuniiU  itxant 
(he  injured  tlie  enemy  by  devastaiiu';  their  fields»)  may  be  expressed  Ilontli  agros  cms- 
tando  vexavit. 

Bern.  188.  Intransitive  and  neuter  verbs,  since  they  form  no  personal 
passives,  cannot  be  used  as  gerundives  in  reversed  phrases,  except  tlie 
verbs  iifi\  frai,funf/i\nud  potlrl  with  their  coiupounds  {tifju(t\perfrut\  pcr- 
fungi,  drfnnr/i),  wJiich  maybe  used  as  .2:eruniHves,  their  abhitive  objects 
beins^  made  llie  covernini  words  of  the  «xerundive  phrase,  as  :  JaxtitiiB 
fruemM  causa  (iust.  of  justitia  fniemll  causa),  for  the  sake  of  enjoyini^ 
justice.  Cic.  Off.  2,  12.  Tempus  UbcrtCdu  potiundie  (inst.  of  UbcHate  poti- 
undi),  the  time  for  seizini;  {L  e.,  assertinir)  their  liberty.  Liv.  24,  14.  But 
these  verbs  occur  also  in  the  irerund  with  intratisitive  objects,  as  Ea  lege 
male  iitendo,  by  makini?  a  bail  use  of  that  law.  Liv.  41,  8  (the  gerundive 
form  would  be  ed  lege  male  utendd). 

§  ."t»30.  Wlien  a  gerund  is  construed  witli  a  transitive  ac- 

cusaiiv (J,  the  latter  is  sometimes  changed  by  aitractiox  into 

the  case  of  the  ojerund  if  it  is  in  the  cjenitive,  as  ar/rdrum  do- 

7m7idl  causa,  instead  of  agros  donandl  causa.     This  is  called 

THE  GEKUXD  WITH  AX  ATTRACTED  CASE. 

Eem.lSd.  Hence  the  form  of  i^erundials  is  fourf  dd  :  1)  the  genuidiye 
phriiSL' {ars  cauHdrum  dlccnddrum) ;  2)  ihe  gerund  absolute  {am  dicendi); 
3)  the  gerund  with  a  transitive  accusative  {arx  cau sandier; ndi);  4)  the  gerimd 
with  an  attracted  case  {ars  cauf^dnim  dlnndi).  The  first  two  are  the  regu- 
lar grammatical  forms  of  gerundials,  the  last  two  being  exceptional  forms. 

llem.  190.  The  form  of  ])articiples  is  twofold:  1)  that  of  the  attributive 
particii)le  (in  reversed  phrases),  as  crimen  Uestp,  mnjeddtin,  the  crime  of 
otfendiug  the  majesty  ;  adjunctofundopatrimoniumauf/ere^io  increase  one's 
property  by  (after)  adding  im  estate;  2)  that  of  the  impersonal  participle, 
which  occurs  rarely  atidexccptiimally,  and  almost  always  in  the  ablative 
case,  namely  ((/)  in"  the  construction  of  the  impersonal  ablative  absolute 
{debelldio,  after  the  war  had  been  finished) ;  {h)  dependent  on  opus  est,  as 
maturdto  opus  est,  it  is  necessary  to  hurry;  (c)  dependent  on  prepositions, 

and  the  fact  that  the  connecUon  of  the  ijenind  absolute  with  transitive  objects,  is  only 
allowed  in  exceptional  cases.  <,'()  to  show  that  the  orii:inal  me.inini;  of  the  <,'erun(lials  is  a 
pa8-«ive  one,  aud  that  tiie  lunction  of  the  «rerund  as  an  active  verl>,  m  the  cases  where 
u«a"e.allows  it.  is  an  encroachment  on  a  province  oriLrinally  belonirinir  to  the  st^rundivo 
alone.  The  whole  question  is  merely  one  of  theory,  having  not  the  t«lij;htest  bearing  on 
the  practical  use  of  the  gerundials. 


REVERSED   PHRASES  IN   GENERAL. 


153 


• 


especially  ?)/•(?,  as  proviso  aliquid  referre,  to  report  something  as  having 
been  seen  ;  pro  prcpjudicato  aliquid  fer re,  \o  consider  something  as  decided. 
8  ^*Z*^,   lie  versed  phrases   (gerundive  and   participial)   and 
gerunds  are  used  as  members  of  sentences  and  phrases  in  the 
same  way  as   ordinary  substantives,  and  may  perform  all   the 
offices  of  the  latter.     They  are  employed  1)  as  subjects  (almost 
exclusively  confined  to  participial  phrases)  ;   2)  as  predicate- 
nouns ;  3)  as  attributive  genitives  and  appositions;  4)  as  case- 
objects;    5)  as  prepositional  objects  and  attributes.      But    in 
all   these  respects  they  are  distinguished  from  ordinary  nouns 
by  special  restrictions.    The  rules  about  these  restrictions  form 
the  theory  of  gerundial  and  participial  construction,  being  the 
most  idiomatical  chapter,  and  one  of  the  most  important  sub- 
jects of  Latin  iri'ammar. 

Jiem.  191.  Reversed  phrases  are  irrammatically  treated  and  analyzed  l^Ji^^  «^^.f.'-.^^'illj: 

♦  ivp  i,hri<e«   but  tliev  cannot,  lo-'icallv.  be  severed  ni  the  same  way.     Thus  m  the  stn- 

enceS  co;^X  /'%o  y  aJx^^^^^  words  connlvnn  Dionyxxi  m.ist  be  gram- 

m  ukam  con^iderrd  as  an  attributive  phrase.     But  they  cannot  be  ^^'P^^^  «  y  .\;^.^/.^^*r  ^ 

V  •  the   .1  an  of  Dionvsius'.  since  Dionysir  expeUtndi  is  a  ueveksed  phrase  lu  which  the 

eranVinatica    attVibute^W//^^^       is  loijically  tlie  governing  word  to  he  joined  with  con- 

?Sr    Grainm-Aica  irW^  the  coml)inati<7n  consilium  expelendi  would  be  lalse 

I le   ce  reversed  p  'rases  must  be' analyzed  and  conceived  as  single  words   and  , nay  m 

hi"  leM  ect  be  conii.are.l  to  compound  nouns,  from  which  they  differ,  howexer,  b)  the 

•L^^cVreHlm^^  each  member  of  the  combination    indepemie.itly  of  the 

Ker'  combines  with  other  phrases  and  words  (R.  193).  Compare  the  ssor^jusjurandum 

Bern  vy>  The  -erunds  (of  course  always  in  the  neuter  sin-ular),  and  the  mipersmial 
pa.  iSp  e;take  The  same  case-inflection  as  ordinary  nouns  would  m  their  pace^  The 
E-v.'r^eluh  ••»<.-  take  these  inflections  by  means  of  their  governing  substan  ives  with 
wlVc^  h      erundivfor  pa^^  has  to  agree.    Hence  the  cases,  genders  and  number 

of  the  Gerundives  ami  a.^Jributi-par.i.iples  are.  alwavs  deuiv.d  ones,  neing  dependent 
on,and  identical  with  the  cases  of  their  governiMg  substantives. 
Rem  103    While  the -erundials  and  partieiples  are  treated  »><  nouns,  respectively  ad- 

jecmes   in  their  inflection,  they  are  coNSTUiEn  I'l^;^  Y.^g?;;  "anHvei  clU^^ 
which  thev  in:iy  -overn.    They  may  govern  phrases  of  all  kinds  and  escn  clauses  (tiniie, 

't'.il'rio"J,jKn:r;';;r  Hlr-ioiples  have  eomp,ica,o,l  ol.jocts  o^^ 

.fcnmS  i4lS  -."     .  rjc  ,  slriati....»  with  ,n...t  nf  the  tliff.r.ft  \l"rti',"f  ■'^J':';  ^!  »'"1 

<^^(,V„*«S«l«mv;i";iW,tai,t,,m  ,,H,is  tmdavcr,,,,^ 

{iioiisi.loiable  part  of  the  city  by  tXaxtox^i  the  walls  at  sevuial  plate»  b>  mean»  ol  ram-. 

^i '  (V  Ji:vi)-.  wtTH  ruFPO^iTioSAi.  OBJECTS :  Jiissa  ac  veiita  populOrnm  vim  l>»b<!jit  od 
them  from  evil  deeds,  Cic.  Leg.  2,  4. 


1 


REYERSED   PHRASES. 


q   r.KRrsn^  AND  GEurNDiVKf»  WITH  ADVKnBiAL  OB.TKCTS  !  .Aliq"ot  dios  difceptamlo 

SXil  (Lnvs  w  "ro  s^^^^^    in  tliHr.,..i..i:  openly  about  the  conditions  .-u.d  u^eveiul)  nights 
in  li.ttin.r  out  wecreilv  C.irthaL'ini.-in  soldiers  Irom  the  cunip.  Liv.  -it»,  ii. 
4    (V  m-N  l^  wn     OB.TK  Viderent  decemviri  ne  retandoin  <^'rtali^re 

"^""ti '"«KRUNDS  WITH  iNTEtmooATivE  ci.AUSK. :  Unns  OX  RomflniP  ex  PJ«P'"qi]«  j;"^ 
coiitemtdan"  v„mera„do  /npidc^,  i^stimandr^iue  q>nd  to  Jronte  ^'f  ^';V:';;V'  V^K  ,„  "  I 
mn     ni'iri    quantum  proximo  conjectflrjl  poterat,  permensus  est,  <»  ne  "f  '  '^h 'r^l; 
I  Ihi        nV-irvewof  the  walls,  bv  eountin-  the  t.tones,  and  by  estimatin-  ^^ hat  size 
each  oAhemJimUii  front,  mea.uled  the  height  of  the  wall  as  nearly  as  he  could  do  by 

"TtiEm-Npl  WITH  THAT-cT.ArsEi. :  Lucium  Valerium  prmlitnm  memorise  e^t    m^Vv- 
Mm/o  /!^/  (/^  m^SV/Zir?/-.^  dlcere.  prohibentibusdeeemviris.  tumultum  fxnvisse,  it  is  re- 
H    tKl  thlu l^^l^^^^^^^^^^  raisc-d  a  tumult  by  demandin,^  ^'^%T'^'l}^l'^^l^  'Jl 

&.OU1     be  alh.wed  to  speak  about  the  npublie),  the  decemvirs  f^^rbid.iing  it    L  3  ^.  • 

8  GViiNns  w.Tu  iNFiMTivK-eLAisEs:  Khodii  pnfiendo  ;y.v/..  reqem  w  Iff^f'^'fll"^^ 
fr<>'nr^r^  occupanMnquf  'France  op,xrrfnua  locu  rire.^  coflujere  bel  um  "•••«^e  »he 
iTS  ruInV  en%ura<'M  war  by  suffering  that  the  king  should  again  cross  mer  to 

HhS;^.»»""   S^hat  he  Z        gain  .tix-ngth  by  occupying  favorable  positions  m 
Thrace.  Liv.  31,  15. 

Hem  194  Re^anlin?  the  irraminatioal  functions  of  the  reversed  phrases 
and   gerunds  iii   tlie   sentence,  the   loUowing   i;eueral   rules   are    to    be 

noticed  : 

1.  Gerunds  can  never  be  used  a^  pitb-tect..  Participial  reversed  Phr^f^^ ^f  f.^'-^;;^"^'^ 
n*.  d  ,iV"iibiects  In  re.'trd  to  gerundive  phrases,  the  irrammarians  deny  their  use  as 
",d>^Ss  of  a  sentence!  but  it  can  be  shown  that  even  gerund i^..  phrases,  in  certain  con- 
Btructions,  are  employed  in  the  relation  of  s^ubjects.   (See  K.  1J!S.) 

2  Gerundive  phrases  (never  participial  phrases,  and  gerunds  only  i"  «"•^^^'"J?^*'"  connec- 
tion) are  used  as  pkei.icate-gemtivks  and  ruEUiCATE-UATivEs  (see  It.  208).' 

S  Gerunds  and  reversed  phrases  of  boih  kinds  very  frequently  occur  as  attribi'tes  of 
ncmnslmth  as  attributive  iJeniiives  and  as  prepo.sitional  attributes.  They  arc  treated  in 
this  respect  altogether  as  subsUmtives  would  be  in  their  places. 

4  The  APro«iTiovAi,  relation  of  reversed  phrases  and  gerunds  is  confined  to  that  kind 
which  in  Eu'dish,  we  connect  by  '  mmdi/  (explanative  apportion),  as  : 

(  i  Nunmun  in-eniuni  idem  ad  n>^  dirrMmma.<.  parendvm  ntqne  twperandnm 
habiliust  Never  was  a  mind  n..)re  able  to  perform  tlie  most  opp..site  things,  nainely 
oSKam^^  Liv.  21.  4-  (/.)  Non  immemor »./'/.*,  quod  initio  e.msuhl  us 

5  "n'    l^S;^'/i^iim.s  plebis.  Being  not  unmindful  of  t»."Mdb;ry;s.t.on)  which 
he  I  a.lc.ntraeled  in  the  beginnui-  of  his  consulship,  namely  of  n^coucxhnfj  the  health 

•  l^^;\Vn  Pie  Liv.  2,47.-  (n  IMebs  cravalnltur  postquam  et  ad  aha  traducehaitur 
ouerx  fon^Xi  \^rw  facie ndi.^,  cloacurmj'n  uHuimam  ^./A  terram  rt<7.m/«//K  1  he  Plebs 
fe  t  wroi^ed  whei  thc^^^  ^vere  mi>used  als.»  for  other  works,  namehj  (o  .^wsfntct  ^mt,^ 
Ilir  the  Kric^anJyiV^^^^  Circus,  and  to  make  the  underuround  channel  j or  the  (/reat 

Ke'En:dish\qq.o;ition  bv  which  verbal  idea.  a.,  such  are  quoted,  in  the  /V"*!^;.."/.,^ 
nartieiDial  1  Jy/  /  or  (»f  an  inVn.itive.  bi-ing  attached  to  the  -eneral  terms  'word  ,  '%erb  , 
?tc  are  1  at  V:;'  ,essed  bv  an  attributive  genitive-gerund  dependent  <>n  the  expres- 
f  onV',^^;;;.'  orV.'i.m,  as:  The  n-ord  ..jfferi^  P<dien<r^  [''^"'^^-Yf't.mM  .lei;;  on 
inwntn  rniendi  the  verv  word  * /0  icaid"  IS  sad.  Cic.  'I  use.  1,  3t».  b..  If  (kpenaeiii  on 
n  li  ^on: 'thl^'.e^V^^^  words  rerlnnn  or  nonun  ^^l^^^^:;^^^ ^^^ 
1  atin  the  uiioted  verb  takin-  the  same  form  as  the  noun  omitted  ^hollld  Inne  taken,  as. 
!i  'ni)>!m/o!)fJ  scliptor,  Irom  tlie  verb  .cribere  is  derived  the  noun  scriptor.  \  arro  L.  L. 
p.  117.  


1  Gerundives  (but  not  trerundivc  phrases),  and  participles  (but  not  i)articipial 
phraJf")  areLqV^ntW^^^  as  predicates,  namely  in  the  pern.hrastic  coujUL-ation  and 
rnSTe  ah  ^ives  absolute.  Hut  these  forms  do  not  belong  here,  .ince  we  consider  here 
only  those  cases  where  a  whole  phrase  stands  in  the  relation  of  a  predicate-noun. 


REVERSED  THRASES  IN  GENERAL. 


155 


♦'       nf  OBJECTS    thoy  denote 
5   When  gerunds  or  reversed  T>hrnsosar-/n^^|:,^,^  ^^T^T^l^ 

tl»i»V^'^-  ^  .••   1^  onrl  thocreriintlive  in  reversed 

§  5..a.  -i;'-,  l-^^?t7,^tc  r  of  xT^E  which  is  attached 
P'"--  '^'■^  '■  t:;;:r  o  i.e't  me  of  the  principal  predicate  of 
to  them  •"  -1'  ;'-;^j^'  Vf  the  action  in  the  reversed  phrase 
the  sentence.     It  the  t  me  o  „vincii>al  action,  the  re- 

::;:l-Srcotident\r  as  a  future  in  regard  to  the  pr.nc.- 
ml  action,  the  phrase  is  formed  ^V f.*^'^';)^';^,  „;,,,,„ me. tMnionj of 


1 


156 


REVERSED   RII RASES. 


GERUNDIAL   GENITIVE. 


157 


action,  a?  :  Quia  milite?  ot  capiendo,  iirhe  tantiim  labOris  adipseiit.  et  captii  cum  eis  qui 
in  arcetn  confiifxeranr.  })m:iia-si-ut.  >iiice  tlic  soldiers  Jmd  met  with  such  hardships  in 
capt'irlna  the  cHi/.  and  afttr  its  captun  had  foiitrht  with  those  who  had  lied  to  the  fort. 
Liv.  2f).  48  -  ^It'telliis  di.xii.  non  piu-seiitein  solum  dicta toiviu  obsiitisse  rei  bene  gerenda;, 
sed  abscntein  rtiani  f/f.vAr  tibstare,  that  not  oidy  liad  the  dictator,  when  prosint.  op- 
posed ihv  arh'i&ti/i(/ of' />/fure  fuccess,  hnt  was  in  ids  ab-eiice  opposini;  the  success  t/i 'it 
had  been  achieved.  Liv.  22,5.— (iui,  jniKis  hononbus,  cosdeiu  gessi  labOies  quo»  petendis. 
Cic.  Phil.  G,  t). 

B,    The  Ueversed   Piikases   as  Subjects  and  Transitive 

Objects. 

§  t(^M.  Gerundive  phrases  can  oreiierally  not  be  used  as  sub- 
jects or  transitive  objects,  and  when  English  jiarticipials  in  in<j 
are  employed  in  this  relation,  they  cannot  be  rendered  by  ge- 
rundive ])hrases,  but  must  generally  be  expressed  by  subject- 
infinitives,  by  object-infinitives,  or  participial  phrases  (§  525). 

Item.  11)8.  The  only  c:\se  in  which  irenuulive  phrases  may  bo  used  as 
transitive  objects  or  subjects  occuis  witli  some  of  those  veibs  which  are 
construed  with  a  participial  .a:eruiKlive  of  ])urp()sc  (j^  510,  \i.  170).  Here 
belong  the  verbs  curare,  locdre,  coiulncere,  attribuere,  assir/fulre,  and 
P'Kscere,  as  okajti  lecjetulam  curare,  to  give  out  (on  contract)  the  gather- 
ing of  olives  (Cato  11.  K.  144);  pontem  faciendum  curare,  to  cause  the 
building  of  a  bridge;  alicui  slatuatn  transportandam  a.si<iqndre,  \o  Ti9.s\^n 
to  somebody  the  task  of  transporting  a  statue  (Liv.  5,  22,  4);  peUendos 
host'i^  HiU  depoficcre,  to  claim  the  oflice  of  driving  out  the  enemy  (Liv.  22, 
28).  When  these  verbs  are  in  the  passive,  the  gerundive  phrases  arc  in. 
the  relation  of  subjects,  as  oka  legenda  curdtur  etc. 

Jiem.  199.  In  all  these  examples  the  jzoverninc:  noun  of  tiie  ji^ernndive  cannot  he  cor.- 
eider-d  as  the  transitive  o»)ject  of  tlie  verl)s  mentioned,  but  it  is  the  action  contained  in 
the  ixerundive  wliicli  is  the  real  object  of  the  verb.  Ilcncc*  the  phrase»?  in  which  these 
germidives  occur  mu-t  be  taken  ft)r  ukveused  phrases  which  must  l)e  considert'd  as  the 
transitive  objects  of  the  verbs  mentioned.  Most  of  the  instances,  however,  in  wliich 
gerundives  are  thus  attached  to  tlievert)s  enumerated  §  old,  must  be  taken  for  construc- 
tions of  tlie  participial  fjerundive  of  purpose.  We  may  regard  this  participial  s^ertmdive 
ati  the  boundary  l>etween  the  predicate-«,'erundiveand  the  attrii)ute-i,a'rundive  in  reversed 
phrases.  Some  of  these  coml)inations  beloiii,'  to  the  one,  and  some  to  tlie  other  side  of 
the  limit,  and  sevexal  stand  on  the  line  itself,  t»o  that  they  may  with  e(iual  propriety  be 
considered  as  belonginj;  to  eithor  side.  (Jom^.'  dstendufn  ptiellam  pro/nUlere\  Liv.  3,  45. 

g  «>^5.  Reversed  rAiiTiririAL  phrases  arc  used  both  as  sub- 
jects and  transitive  objects  of  a  verb,  with  the  force  of  an 
Enc^lish  verbal  noun  to  which  the  Latin  governing  noun  is 
added  as  an  attribute  with  *  of,  as  : 


IW  For  examples  of  participial  phrases  as  transitive  objects  sec  R.  194,  5. 

Bern.  200.  These  snbject-phrases  may  become  passive  ajjents  in  the  aidative  when  the 
principal  predicate  is  changed  into  a  passive.  They  thus  assume  the  form  of  ablatives 
absolute    diecepto  Hannibale   Prusias    suspectus  pbat.     Angebatur   Ilaunibal  biciUa 


Sordiniaque  ami^si'^).  Such  ablatives  frequently  occur,  as:  Etro  nntem  "^>5>l'"i? ///^ 
ricfao'^e  mut<Vo  m<.rcs  nmtflri  civitfltnm  i)Uto.  but  I  t)ehc%-e  that  bf/aemnge  of  the  life 
and  diet  of  the  nobilitv  the  social  conditions  of  states  are  ch m^'ed  Cic.  Le-.  3.  14.- 
aM,liri  benerolentia  amicitiic  nomen  tollitur.  by  taking  away  bentvolence,  he  »'aine  of 
fr  emlship  is  destroyed.  Cic.  Am.  5.  19.     When  these  constructions  are  made  active,  the 

participial  phrases  become  the  subjects  of  the  sentence  (vita  victusque  mutatus mu- 

tal  ;  subhlta  henevolentia  ....  toUit), 

nem   201    Reversed  participial  phrases  are  rarely  used  as  subjects  by  Cicero,  but  more 
frequently  In  Li vv.  an.   very  often  by  the  writers  of  the  silver  a-e.     Livy m  a  few  pas- 
S"    has  even  attempted  to  intn.duce  impersonal  perfect  participles  as  sub,iects.  a  harsh 
c  n<truction,  which  has  not  been  received  into  the  lan-ua-e  as  :  /'/•on?maa<^/m  repente 
^e  q  lis  piitc'.r  aruKltos  violaretur,  reliquam  omnem  ^^'^^^fK^'^^^^^  ^lii'^^^ 
d,nan>,o>n,cinq  that  etc.  ma.le  the  rest  deliver  their  arras.  L.v   4.  59^    Similarly  are  u^cd 
audit  urn  (2S,  2«) ;  trnfCdum  (7.  22) ;  degen^ratum  (1,  5.i) ;  perhtatym  (7,  8). 
1.  Dubitfl»>at  netno  qtiin  {that)  vioWi  ho.<>pi'e.^\l'mtinerm^^^ 
Cdi    fana-  rexiita^  banc  tantam  efficerent  vastitatem*.  (Jic.  Pis.  3o,  Ho-  2.  Nulla  res 
LacVSm.iiis  ma.ds  erat  damno  quam  dimpnna  Lycurd,  cui  per  septin-entos  annos 
•Vilur-ru   "  "  /^^^^^^     Liv  :i8,  81.-3.  Haiinibalem  ante  omnia  angCbat  quod  Capua  per- 
iVni^^i  ls«  om,^7«^^^^  quam  defenm  ah  se,  multOnim  Italic  pc^pulOrum  ani- 

ravert^Vat^  Liv.  2(>,  38.-  4.  ^uum  Arentum  amis^>m  <«!^f»^V^^»"'-consuht  i 
tnm  arx  cum  pncsidio  refenta  pnvter  spem  gaudio  l^it    Liv.  26,  3.  -  5  ConsuUtui 
c'icernni-  non  medir.cre'-»  adjCcit  decusio  nafus  eo  anno  Thvm  Augustus.  \  el  1   2,  3b.- 
i.Proderitdiscipulisalicfljuso^>;./rj7f/an,M^^ 

7  Lentulo  <-lori;e  luit  bene  tol^rata^-'  pau/}ertiu!.  Tac.  A.  4,  44.—  8.  lerra  mutata  non 
muTi  lorA  I  V  37,-^4.-  9.  Occlsus  dictator  Caesar  aliis  pessimura,  ahis  pulcherri- 
mum  fSus  vi^ebatur.  Tac.  A.  1,8.-  10.  Invidiie  erat  ami..«m  Cremer*  i7r.=E.tdmm. 
Liv.  2,  52. 

0.  Reversed  Piir.vses  and  Gerunds  in  the  Genitive. 
§  5*26.  The  genitive  of  gerundials  is  used  1)  as  an  attribute 
of  all  nouns  with  which  attributive  genitives  may  be  connected, 
as  desider'uim  fflorUe  obt'menclce,  a  desire  for  obtaining  glory  ; 
cupula  cUscendl,  eagerness  for  learning.—  2)  as  a  completing 
oiuECT  of  most  of  the  adjectives  construed  with  an  object  in 
the  genitive  (§  499),  as  cupidus  urhis  expug nandcB,  desirous  of 
taking  the  city;  insuttus  nay/^anc?/,  unaccustomed  to  sailing. 
—  S.'^Gerundive  phrases  (not  gerunds)  are  used  as  predicate- 
crenitives  of  quality  (§  4G6,  3)    as  hoc  dlssolcendtM  dlscipUnre 
est,  this  is  apt  (will  lead)  to  dissolving  (the  dissolution  of)  dis- 
cipline.—Neither  gerunds  nor  gerundive  phrases  are  used    as 
completing  objects  of  verbs  governing  the  genitive. 

Rem  202^  Form  of  the  geritndial  genitive.  Whether  a  gerundjal 
genitive  must  assume  the  form  of  a  -erund  or  of  a  -eruudivephmse,  isde- 
Lmined  bv  the  -oneral  rules  (^^  517.  518.  519)  It  the  verb  is  transUtve 
ai  accompanied  bvjts  transitive  object,  both  form.,  tha  of  a  F^mnd.ve 
phrase,  and  tliat  of  a  crerund-enitive  with  a  transitive  objec  ui  the  ac- 
cusative  are  admissible,  without  discrimination  in  meaum-,  although  ge- 
rundive  phrases  are  more  frequently   employed  than  geruads  with  au 


1  Guest-friend.-  ^  fanum,  temple  -.»  to  plunder.        *  destruction  -   »^^^^.2^^,^, 
become  accustomed.- •;>er/^«a.r,ob>jumte.-'  to aycrt.^-^^^  nonrmatocris, 

not  a  little.-  »»  ornament.-  "  to  rebuke.-  ^^  brave  endurance. 


156 


REVERSED   THRASES. 


ftorii<5itivo  Thus  the  phrase  Mlie  promise  of  dc'livcriiv£?  the  hostas^es» 
mav  be  rendered  vlthcr  pronmsum  obxidex  tmdendl,  or  pronn.mm  oJmdum 
?;«£«^JA)m  But  wheu  the  trausitive  object  of  the  gerund  is  a  personal 
pronoun,  a  gerundive  phrase  cannot  be  used  (K.  --U.>). 

Rem  '^O:^  Wlien  the  Latin  verb  has  an  intransitive  object,  the  form  of 
the  genmd  alone  is  admissible,  as  comitetudo  ^qnalibm  ^'^^«^^^'^/("«J.,7;(^: 
UunTYm^uienddrum\i\x^  habit  of  envying  one's  equals.     But  gerundia 
Sives  of  the  verbs  vti,  frui  etc.    take  either  the  form  oi  a  gerund 
or  that  of  a  gerundive  phrase.  See  li.  188. 

Fern    ''Oi    Somethiies  the  transitive  genitive  gerund  takes  the  form  ot 

a  c.  Tund  with  an  attracted  case  i^  520).    This  is,  generally,  the  case  only 

'r The  Ob  ecl  is  a  noun  in  the  plural  number   as  i^^^^^^^^^^^^f  i:^'^^'-^^^^'^^ 

estaduuim,  the  time  of  paying  the  pena  ty  l^^Y-'^T'o^:    of  the;;%onal 
Ex  D  1  2  3  4  5.     But  when  the  transitive  object  IS  one  of  the  personal 

monouns  ihis  tbrm  is  used  also  when  the  pronouns  are  in  the  singular, 
^yW  Ui  leinale)  vide ndi  est  copia,  there  is  an  opportunity  of  seeing  thee, 
riaut.  True.  2,  4,  \\).-Ejus  (Piiilumenaj)  videudl  cupidus,  desirous  of  see- 
ing her.  Ter.  Hec.  3,  3,  12.  .  .        ,  •     . 

Rem  205.  AVhen  the  pronouns  vie,  te,  se,  nos,  vos  are  transitive  objects 
oflhe'-erund,  the  use  of  a  gerundive  phrase  (for  inst.  no.tnvnkndorwn 
^'»1^  ..:)il  inadmissible,  and  the  gerundials,  in  this  case,  must  t'lther  take 
the  form  of  a  transitive  gerund  with  their  pronominal  objects  in  he  ac- 
cusative, or  that  of  the  gemnd  with  an  attracted  genitive  (^  o20). 
Tho  same  is  irenerallv  tlie  case  with  the  pronouns  is,  ea,  id 

he  had  the  power  to  restore  hitiixelf  in  many  cities.  Cic.  Phil.  9,  .3,  b. 

geStivcB  of  the  personal  pronoun,  were  '  origiacUly'  neuter  po-se.sives. 

All  thP«P  theories  are  refuted  by  the  foUowinj;  reasons  :  „„  i  ^,:„; 

^  It  i?k  reSy  dcmhtlul  whether  the  u'l'nitive  of  the  personal  pronouns  ^va^    ori£- 
n.livNheiinitive  neuter  of  the  possessives,  which  adjectives  are,  on  the  contrary,  de- 

'^'^^:^^:^  ^or  thc,.uter  .cnder  «f  the^-^;:^. 

since  there"isiu)L  The  .1  -htest  doubt  that,  at  the  time  ol  the  hterary  u^*-* '»' J^^VuoNon^^^ 

S/™;1';r;.e™.n""virb  i  "mo"  ilTbf,  "Sn  agreement  bolh  iUosicul  and  uu„am,nal.. 
'1'The''t'Cy''or''tl,o  Oorman  u-rammarian,  in  no  way  accounts  for  the  use  of  <|u. 

''t^^UU^:'S^yl!^::Z:Z^'::i:^"f^  rcnexive  phrase  in  tl.e  f„nn  of  a  (ra- 
sive)  e"run  V  Ifo  iS  i'i  purgandi  ca-ml).  It  i.  ffrannnatically  >"™n-"f"« '"  "  »: 
SderF«r9^i'.di  as  a  PAasiVEgfrundlve  governed  by  «,/,  ....cc  rellexivc  verbs  cannot  be 


GERCNDIAL  GENITrVE. 


159 


c..n.edin,.pas.vc,itJ.in=i.po.,b,e^^t^^^^^^^^^ 

5.  11  ineinMirvtM  '^'\  "/; ,  *„_  ^'..-hilp  our  thenrv  assfiis  these  apparent  anomalies  to 
anomalies  must  be  acTount^      ^cm  d  wi  h  an  atS?ed  case,  which  ha.  bo  many  analo- 
gs Kria^uigc^  ha?  it  caiK^^^     be  considered  as  an  anomaly. 
^  rf      o   V..nT-  incr  to  our  theory  even  such  forms  as  rmi  cusiodiendi  causS,  where  the 

Obs.  2.  Accoidinjx  ^^^/""^  ^^,?"'^.^^^^^^^^  ^ame  as  those  of  the  pronoun,  must  be 

pe„der  «"'^"i^^rnnds  with  ?  tmSd  ca'es  andTot  as  gerundives.    VVe  must  assume 
coMsid.;red  as  ?«runds  w  th  atimciea  c^^^^  repu-nant  to  the  Latin  idiom  to  con- 

that  this  form  was  chosen  because  i».,^*'^,g~$"f.'^'^t'/ '^J.  Y'\  of  the  jrerun- 

T^c'^s:^^^^'^^^^^^^^^"^  p™— .  '-w*  -""'I  »"'"= ""  ""'"=• 

tion  of  the  case  unrecognizable.  ...       ,,     .  ^     ii„.«,»« 

74  m  "OC  Tlie  ccTundial  attributive  genitive  is  cither  1)  yirtuallv  a  COM- 
rtF^iNtToBjECT  of  ABSTRACT  nouns  i.i  regard  to  the  verbal  or  adjecUve 
[d'f  CO  t.S  in  them  (Obs.  1);,  or  it  is  2)  =Utached  to  persona:,  notm 

adjectives  admittini?  a  ^"  J«.^  "i"^,";^;;^'^',  dSdeHnmfa^pldo,  promi^mm,  simu/afio, 
tives  n  their  mkamngs.  Such  nouns  «re  ^^,  a«^.  t«^  .  /  testimonlvm,  cormlium, 
si^cie^  (pretext,  appearance)    sucUum,  ^/*^^^^^^^'.f  ^^^  Hg- 

u,wi,.rienfia.ars,ju..  <^^''\"^^^'f%^^S'\^^^^^^  in  t«gr  after 

Kerundial  Keiiitives  dependent  «>n  •■"^1^  "^Trind  sometimes  "by  object-infmitives,  as 

condlimn  Mli  inferendu  t»'^  ach  ce  to  commence  a  v.ar  J^  ^^^^^  ^,^^„^^^  the 

"OB^  ^^^^Hh:  personal  notuis  -^l^^^  ^^^^^^^S^:^:^^ 

ot.en  rcH-ast  in  rcnderin-   as  .J//?a^^^^^^^^^^ 

always  advised  the  '•^*'"'-;i"f  ^jf.  "^''"%^  ^-  [   TeuTcaumm  dicendK  a-'defendant  in 

{ji^-tJi:/,-    KS«5ek'lJ:;cr^'^ar?T;f\p4ing.    P...c^./..i.^i,thei.re- 

™;;;::V"ot  nouns  ^en^in,  .n.,  ^^^^^^^o^^!:!:^^  ^^  ^^ 

situation  or  eondition)  /«i^v,     ("/^'^^'^(^^^^^^^^  that  mi-ht  be  applied 

time):  rnm-addU^^and'^ll^^^^^^^^  gratia    and   the 

to   deliberation).     Here   ^^^'^^j^:  ^""^^.f ,^„^'0^^^^^^  'for  the  sake  of  \  which  are  very 

anteclassical  ergo,  m  tiie  n^^'»"'"?  ,  ^^'    '  J^°""^as  Ui  »«r^^^^^      cwmi    iov  the  sake  of 
frecp.ently  ronstruc.t_w.th^er«,u  la^^ 


aie.  Ill  iiu- iin;«ni-'f:,    •^"- ' '^  ^„    *\,n  i.in  iniltfiiiii     there  was   no  iime  lu  lui»»"  '^"■^ 

subject-intinitive,  as   Temvm  "^'^^/j^^/jflj'^f/c  there         no  reason  to  injure  him.- 
darts.-O'/of/  in  eo  caum peccandi  non  erat  o^^ansc  tnerc  ^^  ^^^'^        writing.  Cic.  Off.  2, 

1.  4.    If,  l»<>:vever  such  nouns  t.^et^er^w^  ^^^^  ^i^.  ^^  ^^         „,, 

Cic.  Csec  5,  15  uiuUa  ratio  ed  =  it  is  unreasonab.e;. 


160 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


A.  Geuitndivk  phrases.—  1.  Cse^nT  prcelii  efmmiUendi^  s]f:jixim  dcdit.  Cies.  B.  O. 


pnecicm»  a'lxilii  Bvzantiis  ferendi  iirofectus,  Tluaces  nuo  pra^lio  dovlcit.  Liv.  ;i9.  :ij.— 
6    llaiiPibaU-m  in<'t'n8  cupl'do»  iiicesperati»  Tarenti  jtoiinndi.  Liv.  24,  13.—  7.  Logati  ad 
am'ssciidiim  HaniiibaU'in  ciiiri  liaiid  dubio  jiromisso  tradendce  vrbis  veuCrmu.  Ih.— 
8   lnitaf«uut  concilia  w/'6t.s-  ddtndie,  ciriuin  frmiUanddrnm^K  nomini^  L'onuini  exsdn 
auendi    Cic   Mnr  87.—  9.  Audacii«  decfinvinllii'^  ma<j:iia  permiitilur  poti'stas»^  forr^/m 


bantur.  Cips.  B.' «.  4,  14.—   Ki.  FortQna  vobisj  obiaia  est,  pro  tautis  Populi  Kom5ni 

bcnefu-iis  7ra/i(iE  T'/ier^/^rftE''^.  Liv.  5.  44,  3.  

B  CiKKiND?»  ABS(»LrTE.—  1.  No^tji  expcctflbant 81-»  ab  bosfibii»  imtinni  transeundt 
fierct  C'a.>s.  B.  G.  i>.  9.—  2.  Ilur*  boinim  s  .^pes  pnidandP^  ot  t'tudiiiin  Mlandi  ab  aj;ri 
ciiltaril  et  qii()tidijliu)3'  labOre  revonlbat.  lb.  3,  17.—  3.  Snmina  crat  in  boc  mart  vavv- 
qandi  dilHcMiltas.  Ih.  3,  12.—  4.  t2«'<^l»l>"tl  pcrciilil^s  Graccbiiin  iiit^i  quod  potestatem" 
intercedendi'^* coWv^^M  MhTo^r^^Wi  C\c.  Li'j;.3, 10.—  5.  Apiid  Komilnos  vetuj^lissimus  nioa 


permequendi*'^.  Cic.  Mur.  21.  44.—  12.  Ei'iulnftandi  vtpuniendi  inodus-*^.  Cic.  Off.  1,  11.— 
13  TituriuH  dixit,  brevem  esse  conmUndi  occasioiiem.  ("aes.  \\.  G.  5,  29.—  14.  Caisar 
loquendi**  fnieni  fecit*».  Kcqiie  ad  suos  recepit.  C'jes.  B.  G.  1.  46.—  15.  Ihec  ii^noniuiia 
accepta**  ceteris  tribfinis  pra'buit  jiistam  caiisam  resUtendi  collega).  Liv.  4,  53,  4. — 
16.  Multa  psppe  ad  te  cofun'taadi  -.Tatiil  scripsiinus.  Cic.  Off.  3,  2. 

C.  Tkansitive  Gekunds.—  1.  Locus  ipse  pnesidio  eratbarbaris  ;  ncquc  ex*^  occnlto 
insidiaiidi*^  et,  dis]M^r<os  circttDXVenundi*'*  sinirnlis  deerat  audacia.  Ca^s.  D.  G.  «>.  34.— 


jicien 

I).    GeHINDS     with     ATTI?.\CTKD     ("APE 


1.  .Airitnr^^  utrum  "M.  Antonio  facuUas 
deViir  opprimTndiereipubliciP. 'cie(lis  facicnd:v  bonOrnm.  diripiend*  urbis.  agrdrmn 
suis  lati-Diiibus»'»  condonandi^o^  populum  Bomanum  servitQte  oppnmendi,  an  horuni  ei 


»  To  commence.—  «  royal  power.—  »  to  aspire  to.—  ••  permission.—  ^  iter  facere,  to 
march  —  «  to  refrain.—  '  wev  decddif  alien,  the  hope  leaves  some  one,  is  taken  away 
from' somebody.-  «  under  the  pretext.-  »  ea-erness.-  i»  to  overcoine  somebody.  (The 
sentence  must'take  a  ].assive  form  in  En,iili«h.)-  "  to  slauijbter.-  i^  docemviral  (transl.  : 
of  the  decemvirs).—  »»  power.-  i*  falsify.-  »»  public  records,  especially  the  public  ac- 
count-books  —  »«  to  for"-'.—  »'  peniniiT  repdundiT,  literally  :  '  the  demanding  back  of 
money'-  a  technical  plirase  denotin-,' the  trial  for  embezzlement  of  public  money».— 
"  to  be'a  candidate  for.-  »»  to  ensaire  in  battle.-  ^o  to  fi-hi.-3>  anqt<em ^v^tere  n  e 
in  judicio)  to  make  somebody  appear  for  hi<  trial.-  «-^  trials.-  "  to  Bcttle.-  of- 
fenre  —  26  are  established.—  2«  to  hold.—  ^t  >;ince  time  was  Riven.—  as  to  show  your 
trratit'iide  (literallv  :  to  return  the  favor).-  "  Avliether.—  '"to  make  booty.—  '»  daily.— 
»2  nercellere  to  cfu^h  to  ruin.—  »3  ri-ht  —  3*  iidtrc^dere  alicui.  to  interpo-»e  one  s  veto 
a<^junst  the  decrees  of  somebody.—  s»  property.—  »»  happy.—  »'  horwrem  habt-re,  to  pay 
honor  or  respect—  '«  i-weetness.— s»  10  prey  upon.-  •♦''  there  is  onetime  lor.  .  .  .  , 
another  for  etc.-  <i  to  applv.-  "■'  to  prosecute.-  "  a  limitation  a  limit.-  <*  fimmfarere 
alicniusreu  to  break  somethin-otr.  to  cease  doinjrPometliinir.—  ^/o^y?,  to  debate.— «  to 
eutler,  to  under-o.-  *^  in  secret;  see  §  4-1.3.  3.-  *«  to  be  in  wait.-  ♦»  to  cut  otl.-  '«to 

_  5'.*  to  f?ive  Dermission. —  "  the   metliod.—  »«  to   advance   (by 


seize. —  *'  superfluous. - 


to  give  permission. 


running).-   "  time.— " /?i/?m,  a  dart.-  "  to  throw.—    »«  it  is  the  question.- 
briguntU—  •»  to  bestow  (as  a  present). 


6» 


GERUNDIAL   GENITIVE. 


161 


facero  nihil  liceat.  Cic.  Phil.  5,  3.—  2.  Ex  majOre  copia  nobis  quam  illis  fuit  exem- 
vS-'nncllqendi  potestas.  Cic.  Inv.  2.  2.-  3.  UeliquOium  siderumi  qiue  causa  collo- 
iandiMuerit,  in  alium  sermOnem»  differendum  est.  Cic.  Un.  9.- 4.  Mujti  prmcipes 
rives  Roma  non  tarn  sni  cotisercandl  quara  luOrum  consiliOrum  reprimendOrum*  causa 
nrofu-erunis.  Cic.  Cat.  1.  3.  7.-  5.  Siibito  omnibus  portis  eruptiOuc»  facta  neque  cog- 
no-ceTidi^,  neque  8ui  colligendl^  hostibus  tacultatem  ndinquunt.  Cjes.  B  G  3,  6.— 
6.  Finem  \ec\  oferendi  tnei  ne  forte  meacredulitas»  autinsidtOsa»oaut  impudens"  vidc- 
iGtur.  Cic.  Leg,  Agr.  2,  5,  12. 

Rem  207.  Most  of  the  adjectives  arovernin.u:  the  genitive  of  siibstan- 
livc's  (^  41MJ)  may  take  the  genitive  of  gerundials  in  any  of  the  four  torms 
as  eonii)leting  objects.  Such  adjectives  are  cupldus,  insuetus,  perltus,  stu- 
diosu.%  niemor,  ynarus,  igndrus,  particeps,  poteii-^,  imjwtem  (Liv.  35,11), 
sciem  consdux/  Verbs,  however,  cannot  take  gerundials  in  the  genitive 
as  completing  objects.  Hence  it  would  be  lalse  grammar  to  say  Poeni- 
tet  ine  hujus  rei  cUcend(E  (I  am  ashamed  of  saying  this),  or  coiiunonefecii 
earn  im  continetidce  (he  reminded  him  of  restraining  his  anger). 

1  Affirmabat  lacrimans  non  se  cupidlorem  esse  cultritis^'^  retinend<-e  quam  exMlma- 
fiuku^^  Cic  Clu  52,  144.—  2.  Timoiheus  rei  miiitaris  perlttis.  neque  minus civitafi.s^*  re- 
oendiFimt  \ep  Tim.  1.— 3.  Zeno  perpcssus  estomnia  potius  quam  conscios^^  de^ndiB 
■/vm///Ji'/ivi«  indicaict.  cic.  Tusc.  2,  52.-  4.  Verum  est,  si  qiiis  ignarus  Bit  faciiinda!  ac 
wliewLt^''  orafwnu,  eutn»»^  non  posse  id  ipsura  quod  sciat  diserie  dicere.  Cic.  Or.  1.  W. 
—  5  Ita  componenda»»  est  pax2o  ut  Gnpcia.  etiam  absentibus  Romams.  satis  potens^]  tu- 
^«.'/icsimul  p(un^  lib^rtafmue  esset.  Liv.  3;i,  12.--  6.  Ancus,  ''»"  "\'''''«/^!7f  .^M'"- 
maudi  (iiiam  aujeiukE-^'^  reipubliccR  immor.  centum^s  mu*  patres2Megit28.  Liv.  1,  .^5  6.  - 
7  Sc;;urus  vir  regendiB  reipuMaE  sciefdi<si?7ius'\  si  audierit^^*  te,  huc^»,  credo,  veniaiso. 
Cic  Or  1  49  —  8  Ei  qui  kereditdtix  illTus  diripiendiE  participe-n  fuerant,  statuam  lUara 
facfendam'curaverunt.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  100.-  9.  Docti  non  solum  vivi^»  atque  prasentcs 
fi(udlu<os  disceiidi  erudiunt  atque  docent,  sed  hoc  idem  etiam  post  mortem  monumentis 
litieraruin32assequuntur.  Cic.Off.  1,  ^.—\Q.T\twi Xxv^w^iw^equitandipentmimusiMxt. 
Suet  Tit  3  —  11  Dumnorix  petlvit  ut  in  Gallia  reliiiquergtur,  quod  itij^uetus  navigandt 
miiv  tim"eret  C;es  B.  (J.  5, «;.—  12.  11«  res  detinebant «ii'/o?  iimidendi^^  deserta  moerna 
m'ilites.  Liv.  10,  34.—  13.  Euathlus  eloqueutiae  discendye  causarwnque  wamii^*'  cupiens»* 
fuit.  Gell.  N.  A.  5,  10. 

Rem,  208.  The  genitive  of  a  gerundive  phrase  (not  of  a  gerund  in 
anv  of  its  forms)  is  used  with  tlie  copula  ense  as  a  predicate-genitive. 
While  the  ordinary  qualitative  genitive  (§  4GG.  No.  3).  assigns  to  the  sub- 
ject a  quality  directly  expressed  by  the  genitive,  the  gerundial  predicate- 
L^enilive  describes  this  quality  by  the  consequences  it  must  produce.  The 
genuidive  genitive  is  rendered  either  bv  apt  with  an  iutinitive,  or  by  eon- 
ducive  U)  with  a  participitd,  or  by  instm mental  of,  or  by  verbal  expressions, 
as  '  to  serve  to '/  as  : 

Tribflni  plebis  concordiam  ordinum  timcnt,  quam  dis-^olvendce  maxime  tribiimd(K 
Wt^stdtU  rentur  e.s>r,  tlie  tril)unes  of  the  people  dread  the  harmony  of  the  ranks^  wliich 
thcv  believe  to  be  especially  apt  to  destroy  the  tribunitian  power.  Liv.  5,  3.—  Regium 
imneriuin  initio  comervatidiE  librtatu  atque  augendiE  r'^tpiibhm  Ju^rat,  royalty,  in 
the  beginning,  had  served  (had  been  conducive)  to  preserve  liberty,  and  to  increase 
the  strength  of  the  republic.  Sail.  Cat.  6. 

Ob«  Later  writers  use  the  genitive  of  a  gerundive  phrase  with  the  meaning  of  pur- 
po<*E^  where  the  classical  writers  would  add  the  ablative  ca>ml  or  gratia,  as  Unum  e  setii- 
tiO-is  vincTri  jui)et,  magis  umrpindi  juris,  quam  quia  unlus  culpa  loret^ (/or  the safce  of 
skoioinn  his  right,  instead  of  tmirpandi  Juris  c^iusa).  Jac.  ili.>^t.  4,  2o.  The  same  authors 
use  genitive  gerundials  with  tfie  force  ot  subjccl-inllnitiv.-s  or  object-intlnitives.  as ;  ma- 
~T"s^r.—  a  t<»  assign  a  (their)  place.—  s  discussion.—  ■»  to  repress.—  ^  to  flee  — 
«  a  sally  — '  to  inform  themselves.—  8  se  coUigere.  to  collect  one  s  self,  to  form  the  ranks. 
—  «  crediiUtv  —  ^»  deceitful.—  »1  impudent.—  i*-*  citizenship.—  ^^  character.—  1*  state.— 
1»  those  that  were  privy  to.—  »«  Greek  noni.  tyrannis,  the  government  of  the  tyrant,  or 
the  dcspotical  form  of  government.-  ^Mo  po!i.sh.-i«  subject  infinitive-clause.— 
"  to  draw  up  —  30  the  treaty  of  peace.—  «i  powerful.—  22  increase  the  strength  of.— 
2»  supply:  '  new  meml)ers'.-24  to.-  26  the  senate.-  2»  to  appoint.- «7  ^fa^n^  learned.— 
23  should  hear.— 2»  hither.—  »»  would  come.—  3'  when  alive  and  present.-  ^^  litenirj'. 
-^sa  to  take  possession  of.—  3*  to  plead.—  "  desirous. 


162 


REVERSED   TIIRASES. 


GERUNDIAL  DATIVE. 


163 


neat  provincialihus  potentiam  pnam  tali  mo(\o  ostentandi,  let  it  rest  with  tlio  provincials 
to  make  nuch  a  f/ioic  of  their  powi-r.  Tac.  Ann.  15,  21.— Aiigti!^tnin  mo/)>/i/,  riancTnani 
Agripplnani  i/isectandi,  \iv  ailmonif'hed  Aiiu;u?tus  to  pursue  Aj,'rippiua.  Tac.  Ann.  2,43. 
1.  Senjltus  cenj^et,  ro<^itiOnemi  a  coIlGixin  promulL,'atain^  dl<>tolreiiil(e  reipumciB  esse. 
Liv.  4.  4s,  15.— 2.  Nihil  tarn  ief/uafi(i<t^  Uhfrtiitis  est  quani  potent issinunu  «inemqiie* 
l)0!«se»  dicere  causain».  Liv.  :W,  5().—  3.  lliec  p/o<leniii  inipt-iii  Jionumi  (rade/u/.iK'jue 
llaunibali  ricforitP.  si/nf.  Liv.  27.  9.-4.  Leciis  r.nini  siimmi.sT,  quuin  animadvertis'set" 
pleraqiu'  di'^solrendt'tiKin  reliq'uDnim  esse,  L.  I'etillio  dixit  ssese  <m)s  libros  in  iirneni 
conjectflruiu  esse.  Liv.  40.21».—  5.  llii'c  materia»  ita  erat  collccata'»,  ut.  t^i  arl)ornm 
trunci'»  sive  naves dejidendi  (>i>eris^'^  estient  a  barharis  niissu'.  hi!?defensoribusi3  «nriim 
rerinn  vit«  miniierCtur.  Ca^s.  IJ.  (}.  4, 17.—  »».  Omnia  discrimina'*  qinbun  ordines  diseer- 
nuntur".  et  co/ieordUe  et  libeitdtis  aaue  miituendit  sunt.  Liv,  34,  rA.—  7.  Cetera  in  dno- 
decim  tabulif  itn/nHndi  sunt  suintuslamentationisque}''  funeri;'.  Cic.  Lej;.  2.  2:^.-8.  km- 
hnionci^^'  ecertendie  reipntdicie  t^itlenl esse.— U.  t|iiirqiiid>»tribfluusplebif»  loquitur,  eliam- 
pi  jnTHlendit  pattiit  du-^olveinUKjue  reipuUiCiE  est,  a^ifuesti8'»  quiCti  audlre.  Liv.  <i.  15.— 
10.  Sinant  patres  creari  lei^um  latOres  qui  utrieque  utilia  ferant»»,  qu;eque  (xquandiZ 
libertdtis  sint.  Liv.  3, 31.— Clamant,  frustratiOnein  cam  ler/is  tollendiX  esse.  lb.  3,  24. 

§  .I'^T.  The  o^enitive  of  reversed  rAiiTiciPiAL  phrases  is 
used  either  attributively,  depeudeut  ou  abstract  or  personal 
nouns,  especially  such  as  are  derived  tVoiu  verbs  construed  with 
That-clauses,  or  it  is  used  as  a  completing  object  of  verbs 
governing  the  genitive,  as  accasdre^  damndre,  cotmuonefacere, 
etc.  (§  478.  §  484).  It  is  rendered  either  by  participials  (generally 
in  the  perfect  with  ^  havuif/^)  after  prepositions  (o/,  for,  etc.), 
or  by  finite  clauses,  as 

Baibarus  quidam  Ilasdrubalem  ob  iram  interfedi  ah  eo  domini,  obtruncSvit.  a  cer- 
tain barbarian  nlew  Hasdrubal  out  ofanqer  because  he  had  killed  his  master  [for  hi^  having' 
killed  his  (the  barbarianV)  master].  Liv.  21,  2.— .Mihi  Populus  K<»m:lnn!<  non,  nt  nmlti;', 
l>en£  (jestoi,  sed,  ut  nemini.  consetrdtit  reipubliciK  te^ti/nonium  dedit.  to  me  the  Roman 
people  cave  tlu;  testimony,  not  of  having  utU  administered  the  itpubtic.  as  it  did  to 


manj',  l)ut  of  having  saved  the  repufdic,  as  it  did  to  none.  Cic.  Pis. 

res;e  cnpfiV,  jiecu/iidi  datnndtus  est,  Scipio  was  condemned  for  havinjj  accepted  money 


3,  6.—  Scipio  ab 


hau 
trium 


from  the  king.   Liv.  38,  5t). 

1.  Achiei  conHlii'i^  negdti-"^  crimm"^^  excnsflbant.  Liv.  39,  .33.—  2.  Hannibal  poculum'*  ex- 
lusit'^*,  Ijo-piifl'Is-*  deos  rio/dde  a  re^^r  tidei  testis  iiiviKans».  Liv.  39,  51.—  3.  Jrd  pmvin- 
cr  fibi  ^>'j»^C  pnetor  mai:istriltu  t^e  abdicatQrus  erat.  Liv.  37,  51.—  4.  Philij)pus  Deme- 
filium  nuUo  alio  crimint-''  qxuim  Itomdna;  amicitioi  initte  octldit.  Liv.  41,  2-3. — 
5.  Ciesarem  injuriiB  retentOnim  eguituiii  liomanOrum  ad  id  bolluuj  inciijlbant.  Ca'?.  B.  G. 
3,  10.— .  (J,  Cum  Sagunti  excidium  Iloma3  nuntiaium  est,  f-mwmw» pMiov'^'*  uon  lati  auxiUi 
patres  cepit-».  Liv.  21,  16.— 7.  Dictator  co«,'el)at  Manlium  fatCri  /m-i/tM^  insimuldti  fal.so 
crimine  seudt'is.  Liv.  6.  16.— H.  Nunc  quoniam  euopti"^^  belli  purgatum  est  crimen,  gtsti 
reddenda  est  ratio^^.  Liv.  ;i8.  48.-9.  Ca?sar  tam  cito  Metropolim  venit  nt  nuntios^"^  ex- 
pugndti  oppidi  antecederet".  C;cs.  B.  C.  3,  80.—  10.  Hiec  tiia  recusation*  cunfessio  est 
ca/itce  jm-uniir.  Cic.  C'lu.  53,  148—  11.  TerrOrem  subitum  pavoreinque^^  urbis  liortux  ob- 
sessoB  et  oppug/uitih^^  Capua  post  dies  paucos  capta^^  iu  hetiiiam  vert  it.  Liv.  26,  37. 


>  The  bill  of  the  law.—  '  to  propose  (publicly).—  '  to  eausilize.—  *  even  the  most 
powerful.—  *  to  be  liable.—  «  to  be  tried  by  the  courts  (literally  :  to  plead  one  s  cause).— 
'  after  reading  the  main  subjects.-  «  to  notice.—  »  timber.—  >"  to  place.—  '»  trunks.— 
J2  The  qualitative  genitive  is  used  here  attributively,  but  must  be  resolved  into  a  rela- 
tive clause  'guiP.  dejici*^ndi  opens  essent\  It  is  used  thus,  to  avoid  using  twice  the 
copula  essent.  /Jejicere,  to  overthrow,  to  destroy.—  ^^  by  this  protection.—  >*  Discrirnen^ 
difference.—  »*  t<>  distinguish.—  *"  wailing.—  »^  ambitious  aspirations.—  "  whatever.— 
i»  assuevUse  (perf.  of  asttuescere).  to  be  accustomed.—  ^^  to  pnipose.—  '»  council.—  '■"»  to 
refuse  —  -^  the  charge,  aceusation.  reproach.—  "■'♦  cup. —  '-'•  to  empty.—  '•  hospitable. — 
2T  for  ni)  other  crime.—  ^'^  shame.—  ^*»  to  overcome.—  ">  \o  commence.—"*  render  an 
account  about  the  way  it  was  carried  on.—  a^  the  me-sengers  carrying  the  news  of.— 
SJ»  to  overtake.-  «♦  relusal.—  3»  trembling  ou  account  of,—  '«  to  attack.—  •'  the  capture 
of  Capua  happening  after  a  few  days. 


I),  Reversed  Phrases  and  Gerunds  in  the  Dative. 

8  ^H^.  Ci(^rnndive  phrases  (rarely  gerunds)  in  the  dative 
are  used  •  1)  as  completing  ob.iects  of  verbs  or  adjectives  con- 
strued  with  the  dative  of  a  noun  (§  474.  §  482.  §  500),  if  such 
verbs  or  adjectives,  according  to  their  meaning,  admit  of  ver- 
bal  actions  as  objects;  2)  as  adverbial  objects  of  purpose, 
denotin-  the  end  or  the  aim  of  an  action;  3)  as  attributes 
of  nouns  denoting  certain  offices,  or  their  holders;  4)  as  pred- 
icate-datives (§  468)  to  denote  fitness  or  ability  of  things 
or  persons  for  an  action. 

U-The  gerundial  dative  most  freqnontly  occur,  as  a  o.„nx^^^ 

rafelv  in  th.^f^rm  ol  an  absolute  ««^"'J;,;^;;^ J''^,^^^^^^^^^^        For  "xa^^^iplesof  reversed 
object  (Kk  IS.  27),  and  never  as  a  gerund  with  atimcted  case,  r  or  exaiuiii 

„..,., 'ulial  i-;;".^,  t^e  l~."  ufa'V^ru  u   ;.   l^^^^  object 

Iti^wl;  fiX"irt  ium<-)re(\o  be  sufficient),  w«r«  (to  have    eisi  re  for 
jitrare  (lo  '.•  ' l^^''•/"•''n  a„;.n      Th,.  ti-in«ilivcs  occurrins  wtli  this  con- 

nn;;M\t:;;4"rfS"';;  ir^'n  ,   "  ra  J«^^«"^  to  devote  care  to.do- 

TflZ:^]^^fTimcr^^^^^  in,part  labor);  de^ii^are  to  destine : 

■"„r,    ,Ii    i'.'  Znnilta-e  atlhibere,  adjkm  (animum,  to  apply  one  s  self 

^vilh,  to  linisli  the  taking  of  the  census). 


nil,  to  nnisn  ine  uuviii^^  wi  .»-  v.^.......,. 

the  leading  a.lministration  of  »<•  a  ;iir  •  N^Q»;^  V^St  (of  the'civil  war).  C.c.Fan». 
you  did  not  take  a  very  acuve  V^'l V^^^^ j.^'J^rm,  -ee  personally  to  the  execution 
1  7, -^.-Plem.nio  f/'Pt'""  "t  m  <^{f\^±lf^^^Jl!f^Tdo\\\^^r^^^^^^  '>«  present  at 
of  the  measure).  Liv.  ^9,  b.  See  b-v.  '■  -^"**^^^^'^'  ,-  .y,^  nre«ence  of  witnesses  at  the 
the  writing')  is  a  frequent  v"l>Hcistic  V\r^^^^  ^^^l^^}^^'  ll\,,\Z,  in  some  of  the  «Id- 
record ml' of  ()ffleial  resolutions,  ^^^^^F'^^^Z'^.l^^l^^^^^^^  tl  e  «^  ^^^  Bacchanalibus :  (?. 
est  monuments  of  the  hmgua-e,  f^  " '^^,  ^Ti  "fc  ^*'^''"^- 

^faveius  etc.  IV.  Kal.  (^^  ?*^- «^SmS  1  Cm^  ?n  m'an  lU,  the  recording  of  the  decrees 
runt),  and  in  the  Inscnptions  of  Vlf  "i  o"'''^^  cice?o,  Fam.  8.  8,  we  have  a  verbatim 
of  corporations  (Orell.  Inscr.  4  ♦^j.;.*f'^J-/;Ve  cause  of  the  civil  war.  This  decree 
copy  of  the  decree  of  the  ^;;'^'/;;j''^^^,  J-.J,  f  pH^^  iTo/.  Octdbrls  (:iO.  of  Septbr»  in 
hegins  in  the  ^tyle  of  the  6^(7.  d€  W/«/ja^^^^^  j..,^^^   ^g^  4^   gcribendo 

aae  Aixdlinis  sckibendo  adfueuitnt  i..  y/owmu*  ei«^.  a  provincial  council: 

«ii;/is  used  in  the  form  «'f  «  g^'-^^dive  phrase  of    he  record^^         1^    Srnbendo  adfui 

Zcrm  scribendo  video  ^'IP'^^^^^f^^^,  tl^M>eVf,r  nance  of  a\vorir'.  ( Ex.  4  ^  G.  7. . 
^tv.-Frmssereifac^»d.e,    t<>  pr^^.^i<     »^^'-  »^^^  '  n  eonnection  with  a  gerundial  have  preg- 


,. ._.  ^roBesse  reifocdend.e,  '  to  presule  over  tne  I'f  i'^^^'^J  .^^^   '.^jth  a  gerundial  have  preg- 
Obs.  •->.  Mai.yol  the  verbs  mentioned  R.  2  9  m  c^^^^^^^  Supere^se 

naV.f  meanings,  mostly  ^^f,^;";!"^.^^^^^^^  but  a/<.r. some  things 

with  temp'JS  as  •''•l^J'^^^t  mean.  ^)f^/"'^^.^^  Zy^ramjempvs  or  other  expressions  of  time, 
which  are  to  be  done.  (Lx.  ^^ •rv'^'f,  V.v  t  nirto  some  action,  as  Irntivm  ludorvm  jnvcu- 
meins  '  to  give  or  devote  '>"lf,i^;ri*^„\:';^',  ;^,t'e  K'  ^st  (ikitium)  public  games  to  satis- 


reifaciendir.  uenoie^     '"."Vi^"  94; 
Bometliing  for  a  purpose  .  (Lv.  -J4.j 


164 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


^^  Ziimpt  enumerates  amonf?  the  verbs  constmed  with  frenuidial  datives  tho 

{)lira.«e  ftmpii,^  co/iKuuie/t',  uiiich  \n  an  error,  ttic  ircnuidivcs  coiistnu'd  with  iliis  phraeto 
>ein^  abluiivf."*.    Compare:  Eo  reinporc  aplandd  cla.-<-<e  absuinpto.  Liv.  •jl,4!>. 

1.  Claudii  U'lTilti.  qui  otnnibns  gerpndi^  rebus  (apud  dure;*  CanipJlnos)  aiffi/eranf,  in 
seniltu  videbantur.  Liv.  yc»,  Hi. —  2.  Seniltus,  qnuni  dc  Cicernnit»  reditu  eijii^  decrSvit, 
lie  quis  de  efi  re  ferret*-',  lie  quis  di-putaret^.  ne  loquoretur,  ik^  ^cribf-mlo  ade^tsef.  Cic.  P. 
R.  S.  4,  8. —  :i  Cran^^um  (in  seiijltu)  snihendo  adfuuse  auctoritatil)us  i)ra>scriptis* 
ex.stat^  Cic.  Or.  :j,  2. —  4.  Tune,  Eifici,  pneessc;  agro  coltndo  Mauitiuni  putas?  Cic. 
Rose.  Am,  18. —  5.  C|uum  Vesita  amxA  focuni*  urbeni  complexa  >'it^.^i  coltnda;  virjiines 
pnesint.  Cic.  I.e<;.  2,  12,  2'.>.—  0.  Kesi)()ndit  Venes, /^rri  illi  (F(//^ra/<^<r  pul)lice  Mamer- 
tlnum  penatOrem  prtrfvuse.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4.  8.  JSee  ib.  2,  4,  8:1 —  7.  Valerius  procon- 
sul tu'andiV,  circa  Siciifain  maiifimie  om  prirftierat.  l.iv.  2>^,  10.  See  ib.  2.'),  12.—  S,  Nee 
consul  Uoinflnus  reniandu*^  urbihus,  ^'i  i^pe?»  aliqiui  se  ostcndisset,  deeraf.  Liv.  20,  38.— 
!>.  Ilannibaiis  nullo  hibOre  aut  corpus  fatii^jlri  aut  animus  vinei  ]>otcrat ;  id  tempus 
quod  gerendis  rebus  ifuperesttet,  quieti  datum  est.  Liv.  21.  4. —  10.  I't  villicus»  natflram 
ajj^ri  ilovit,  t?ic  noster  hie  rector'"  sfudnit  sane  juri^^  et  Ugihus  cngiio>tcendis.  Cic;.  Rep. 
5,3,5.—  11.  Cui  rei  ft*/'?/«/?/'f  vis  ?  Pntninonioh&^'  auge)ido  f  Cic.  Or.  2,55. —  12.  Vos  ne 
hoc  quidem  loco  contiiindiis  (abi/ses)  in  illos  viros  dlcrudu  pnrcitl^.  Liv.  2(),  31. — 
13.  Nee  yohimi^  modo  vastum  hof^tihus  relicfum,  sed  vicis*  etiam  illiltus  ii;nis:  vrbibvs 
(vero)  oppugnandis  tewpirdtuin  est.  Liv.  10,  12. —  14.  Nihil  leliquum  est  nnde'*ro;«- 
vieatibus^^  sufficiilmuti^'  pnfbendis^'' .  Liv.  28.  41.  -  15.  Tanto  (juisque  certamine»* 
aurtim  et  arireiitum  conferunt,  nt  nee  triumviri  fi'^dpinndo  nee  peril»;»'"  referu ndo"^^ 
suJHcerent-^ .  Liv.  2G.  ;iH. —  ](»,  Cicero  conipoiiere--  alujiia  de  juri(«  scientijl  cu'perat,  nt 
a|)|>areat  po>*se  oratOrem  non  ^/ivc^'/i/Zo  tantum.///;'e  ?"a^v7/'?,  ?ed  i'X'uww  docendo.  Qu.  12 

3,  10. —  17.  Coi\s\\\  placandi.i  Ronur  dh  luibtudd(/ut-^  dilecfui  dat  o\)evt\m.  Liv.  22,2. — 
18.  llasdrul)al  hnjuendo plnra''*,  scnbe)idu(iue  i\\nv  in  rem  noii  essent-*  dedif  operam. 
Liv.  2H,  17  (see  ib.  3.  34,  IK —  11».  Vi.\  eis  nhxs  quas  constituerant  duces  collf>candi«"^ 
atque  adnniiutrahdisXi^m\)\\i^  est  datum.  Ca's.  I>.  (J.  3,  4.—  20.  '^{:\\nu oi>eiilnix a^^picien- 
dis-''  teinpus  dabat.  Liv.  2<;,  51.  (See  ib.  3.  <;•«,  7).—  21.  Masini-sa,  data  df.xtnl  in  id  quod 
■^iiXQh^xwx  Migamla;'^*  fidei^  in  rej^iain"»  concedit^".  Liv.  30.  12. —  22.  Milii  n(m  est  iu- 
tejjrrum^i  ui  ineum  laborem  \\i.^\\\\\\\\\w  ytencuWs  sutAeraudis'^'^  non  itnpertiarn.  Cic.  Mur. 

4,  8. —  23.  MaimbiiR  P<inietTn;e'3  jx^rducendo^*  ad  culintn^*  open  dest'nultiV  eranf. 
Liv.  1,  <>5.  7. —  24.  Omncs  Volerunem  rej'andi.^  cottsulibus  jM-rrm^-tlr^ifn  triljiinStum'» 
credGbant.  Liv.  2.  5(j,  2.—  25.  Tu  rv^ii^  ])ecuniit  deport  an  d^^^''  et  bello  gernido  Marcum 
CatOnem  prtvfecixti  f  Cic.  Dom.  8.  20. —  2(1.  I'opulus  Papirium  Semproniumque  re/isui 
agendo***  i)ni'VCcit.  Liv.  4,  8,  7.—  27.  Mai,'iia  animi  contentio^^  adit/euda  est  explirando 
Ari-ttofelem*^.  Cic.  Fraj^nn.  Uort.  G9.—  28.  Nuiua  rex  sacerdolibus  creandis  auimuni 
adjecit.  Liv.  1,  20. 

Rem.  210.  Only  a  few  of  the  adjectives  whicli  govern  a  dative  case 
are,  in  good  prose,  construed  witli  a  gerundial  dative,  and  even  these 
few  are  more  generally  construed  with  a  prepositional  gerundial  (K.  240). 
Tlie  Ibrni  of  this  gerundial  is  mostly  a  gerundive  plirase,  more  rarely  an 
absolute  gerund,  and  extremely  seldom  (Ex.  0)  a  gerund  with  a  transi- 
tive object. 

Obs.  1.  In  Cicero  the  participial  adjective  accommoddtus  only  (Ex.  1)  is  conpfrned  with 
a  grerundial  dative.  Most  frequently  this  construction  occurs  in  Livy,  and  even  in  Livy 
less  than  thirty  examples  (all  told)  of  adjectives  construed  with  :,'erundial  datives  are 
extant.  He  thus  construes  aphis  (adapted  X^^^,  intenhis  (\M'nX.  intent  onK '^a/^^Menouirh 
for),  pro/np/un  Siiid  pa  rat  n^i  (ready  Xo).  opj)ortunus  (convenii-nt  for>,  proj)ior  (in'arcr  to). 
Later  writers  construe  communis,  reltquus,  idoneus,  halnlis,  utilUi,  and  peveral  other 
adjectives  with  a  ST'^rnndial  (Xux'wq..— Pug u undo  par,  equal  to  the  contest,  occurs  Ca;s. 
B.  G.  5,34.— T'lc/oridP  temperandiE  iinpar.  Tac.  H.  4,  1.  In  'dUserendo  par"  (ecpial  in  dis- 
course, Cic.  Or.  1,  5tj>  the  gerund,  which  Kuhner  considers  as  a  dative,  is  an  ablaiive. 


»  To  deliberate. —  "  to  make  a  report. —  *  to  oj)poBe, —  ■*  in  the  rcjruhir  minutes  of  the 
resolutions. —  ^  to  be  extant,  to  he  on  record. —  •  a  hearth. —  '  to  embrace. —  **  to 
tempt.—  "the  farm-overseer.-  '"chairman. —  n  jurisprudeiue,— '- property.—  '^  the 
fcoil. —  1*  whence.—  '*  supplies.—  i"  ^ati-^y. —  I'to  distribute.—  '"  contist.—  i»  clerk. 
—  20  to  enter  on  the  books. —  21  j„  \^^^  sullicient. —  22  to  compose. —  ^^  to  make  a  draft. — 
2*  to  make  several  remarks.—  20  in  rem  esse,  to  be  pertinent.—  2«  to  arrange—  27  to  in- 
spect.—  '^'^Jidem  obUgdre,  to  pled<re  one's  word. —  -*  })alace. —  ^o  to  betake  one's  self. — 
31  integruines.<<>-,  to  be  allowed. —  ^'^  to  relieve. —  ^3  the  Ijooty  of  Pometium. —  ^4  to  lead, 
to  carry.—  ^»  the  end. —  3«  tribunate.-  ^7  to  transport.—  ^8  to  hold  the  census. — 
3»  magna  contentio,  an  intense  attention. —  *<>  Recent  editions  have  changed  this  read- 
ing into  Ariatoteli,  on  account  of  the  trausitive  gerund.    Uut  see  Ex.  18. 


GERUNDIAL  DATIVE. 


165 


Obs. 


^  2  With  «'omc  adjectives  the  gerundial  dative  is  connected  as  an  advkkbial  ob- 
iect  of  piMi  -OS-  or  iti  the  loo«e  sl-nillcation  ^concfrning\  These  relations,  more 
usual  are  ^pressed  parilv  bv  the  second  supine,  partly  bv  a  jjerundial  in  the  accusa- 
iv  att^M-  ";/  Kus  are  us.d  farUis.  fefir  (Liv'3.  17),  soliemni^  (regular),  a^per  (liatd  t), 
S/  /.  (,  .uai)  ej^guus  (in  the  meaniiig  too  small  for),  parum  (aniecW  7naturus,  trnm^u- 
ru'Vmulan  the  mea  nn-  strong  enonqh  for),  bonus  (good  for).  Som.-times,  but  ^ery 
rareiv  1   c  e^^^^^^^^  «»  ^"^^^  adjectives  have  a  passive  meanin- (Ex 

lir^Pinv  rS\i ly  uV'^^    in  tins  way  gerund  datives,  dependent.on  ^tilu ^m\  stmilar 
adjectives^  L  Aq>Z  nitrosa  vtUis  est  blbe,uio  (instead  of  btberUibus,  or  ad  btbendam). 

"•  "l-  "l^lh^uZ^il^lV  t^;ams"'re&  tempera  den^ntendisyructibu.  et  ;>.ra;n- 

.n!/^V;,?,;;,rl;i"sunt.  cic   sen.  19.^2.  AV-'"^5^"«  ^See  U^'i^A^  1^^"^""^^^^ 
nam  rJet-sst  maxime  renarand(f^  intentus  f iierat.  Liv.  3..  8.  (See  Liy.  23,  So ,  1,  o4  ,  i-  «»"•*' 
07"",  . '5,  8  )-  3    HiCnia  aptu,r  erat  be/to  reparandoqnnm  ulla  ptirs  te.;rSrum*.  Liv. 

'^'  i.  ■  iee  lb.  2.  37'  S.  l{  3>,  10  ;  38.  3  ;  virro  R.  R.  3,  l^}-,^:,,?"^;'^''^''; - 
SnrrvrhetoriceSni^e<-ipit  perciphndi.-<«  puer  ?natunfs  esse  videStur.  Qm   t.  2.  1,  7.— 

5'  i\m.iumM".ud  Kagnfttni./. 'ri*-^^  cuUdis^  '^^'S:^':;'K^7^:'^?V^o^: 
«  17—«»  Hie  locus  ^r/wi/«*- quoque  tegendo  satis  laicbrnsus»  erat.  Li\.  21,54.  <»<.«  i''- 
'li  '  V  )  -  7  Fl  vius  dixit,  nulla.u  umquain  genten.  prompfiarem  renu^darula^^^  fuisse 
n  nun  Ro  n-in  s  Liv  25  IH.-  8.  De  supplicioi^  Cam„ani  senatus/aa/t^  vnpf(rand(Z 
2Si'    TS  T^i^'-  25.  U--9-  Appius  proplor,lnIer- 

d  «''in  0I3  q„i,n  ^^.,,'^^^^  magistratui  erat.  Liv.3  35.-- 10.  N^^^Snint  consu.es  se 
R  Idus  Deceuibri-  sdlemnem  ineundis  magistral ibus  diem  abitQros»*  esse.  Liv. 
?  I  3  lb  3  3r,  -  11.  Ills  rebus  onsulcs  «v/x/w.m'»  rfom«ri//o  multundinem  fecC- 
runt  iv  3  f^>  4--'  Camillo.  jurare  parato  in  verl)a^7  «c<wrtm/<3B  vaJstudim  solita, 
runt.  ^^>):'^,;'-';,7;.  ,.;\i,j  t':'.*/  .^  7  1.  13  BvaxxxQU^  A^crexiguustanioalendoexcrc^' 
T^i':^^^  'i;^^  2  -  V.  MiU  e;  va1rum»«  secum  portabant.  mpardti  omni  loco  cfrr. 
n/imir,   10.  40.  1-      it. -I  tenous    rebus   nerendis    immatarum^^  i^vtiX.  Ih 

sermnd'-s  centui)lex  inwvw^  parum^'^  est.  Piaut.  Pers.  4,  4,  11. 
Rem  'Ml    The  dative  of  a  gerundive  phrase  (rarely  of  a  gerund),   is 
added  as  ail  advkkbi.vl  objkct  to  phrases  and  expressions  consisting 
of  a  NOUN  AND  A  VERB,  in  order  to  indicate  the  purpose  lor  which  the 
NOUN  is  intended.     These  phrases  and  expressions  are  : 

1  Tr\nsitivk  orjective,  or  passive  predicative  phrases,  as  focwwi 

2  Prfdtcxtive  phrases,  with  neuter  verbs,  as  iter  patet,  dm  vetiit  : 
'l)i.<  mmifii^  tutbendi»  venif,  tlie  dav  arrived  for  holding  tlie  a^/embly. --//^r ;>«/</>'«- 

r^J^ltoZllslloZX^Z  »oad  is  opC-n  for  the  transportation  of  gruin^^eeEx^H-j^ 

'Tt^)  harvest- Mo  <mther.-  3  to  repair,  to  renew.-  *  with  the  force  of  a  s5>iSu'aj- 
rJrr    in  tlem;^it.in- the  earth '  is  pliced  in  the  plural  if  c.mceived  as  an  f^^'^f^^jl 

acco.  dug  .o7  pr  scr  bed  f:.nnuirThe  known  phrase  of  Horace" ^-^rar.  in  ^.T6am^^^^^ 
?rr       'swear  to  the  words  of  the  teacher,  is  used.pregnanlly,  'l^P'-^f  ^«J  '^Tn  ^an Taih  - 

Auviium  is  subjeit  accusative,-  3^  unless  they  are  absent,  i.  e.,  are  kept  out.         prop 
erty. —  "  not  enough,  insufficient. 


IGG 


REVERSED  PHRASES. 


3.  Predicates  conslstini:^  of  a  piTclic^tc-noun  and  the  copula,*  as  : 

Deinoathcne^  cum/or  tnnris  rtfici'-n'li.'f  f'/if.  IJfino>it hones  wii>«  a  comtnissionor  for  re- 
pairiiiir  the  walls.  Vie.  Opt.  (i. "().  7,  lU.  See  Ex.  2:i-2'.».— So  with  pr«'<licati'  d  iiiv^--,  (he 
jrenuKiiai  takiiii;  th»-  plarcof  the  dative  oC  the  iiiierested  person:  Nuc  lameu  id  impe- 
iii/neitlo  nbwi  fferendi'^/uit.  Liv.  2G.  24. 

Onf,  1.  In  these  phrases,  which  furnish  the  most  frequent  examples  of  jjernndial  dative?, 
the  idea  of  purpose,  e.xpre-sed  by  the  i;enindial,  is  attacheil  to  the  noi'n,  and  not  to  the 
;:overiiinLr  vkub.  Hence  they  must  be,  lot.'icilly.  considered  as  attkiblttks  of  these 
nouns,  altliou<^h  they  are.  «rraniinatirally,  the  objects  of  the  verbs  with  which  the  nouns 
are  combined,  and  in  which  they  are;  mer«:ed,  as  it  were.  But  in  a  few  instances  such 
perundial  dafivt-s  must,  even  ^'raniniaticnlly,  be  considered  as  the  attributes  of  nouns. 
'I'his  is  especially  the  ca«-e  with  the  nunn-ral  compounds  of  rir,  denoting;  olMcers  (§'!*>, 
K.  2>,  atid  the  noun  awnVia,  as:  Nobilitas  Tiberiuin  (iracchuin, //T'/mWr'/m  oVo/'Jix  de- 
(incemiis,  ferro  necflvit.  tlie  nobilliv  killed  Tib.  Gracchus,  a  triumvir  for  the  tifiuling  of 
col<miei<  {a  colonial  commissioner),  by  the  ewortl.  Sail.  Jui,'.  42,  1. —  ifl  in  manu  ejus  es- 
sent  coniitia  roqando  colRr/o',  that  the  meetiug  f<rr  the  choice  of  his  cftUeagve  mvjht  be 
in  his  hands.  Liv.  22.  :55.t  See  Liv.  4.  4.— Sometimes  it  is  doubttui  wlietlier  pucli  frerun- 
diali»  ar"  <renitive-attril)Utes,  or  dative  objects,  as:  Ut  aliqiiam  niihi  materiem,  proibcas 
agtndiB  ttue  apud  seuAtum  causa'.  Liv.  42,  40. 

Obs.  2.  As  to  the  use  of  this  construction,  the  followinj?  rules  must  be  noticed: 

(a).  It  mnst  be  considered  an  indispen-able  condition  for  applyinjj  a  «rerundial  dative 
of  purpose,  that  there  should  be  a  sibst.wtivk  represented  a-  Ixini;  applied  to  the  pur- 
pose exi)resse(l  by  the  L'erundial.  E.Kamples  where  perundial  datives  of  purpose  are 
attached  to  bare  verbs  without  referrin;?  to  a  substantive  are  extremely  rare,  and  mu>t 
be  considered  as  harsh  anomalies,  as  :  ^cipio  citt^if  civitatiimi  cognosceiidis  TarracOnem 
rediit  (inst.  of  ad  causa^^  cogiioscr^nda<),  Scipio  returned  to  Tarraco  to  examine  the  cases 
concernini,'  these  states.  Liv.  28.  lit.  In  such  connec-ti(»ns  either  an  accusative  L,'<'run- 
dial  after  ad.  or  a  «reiiitive  gerundial  wilh  causii  must  be  used,  as:  Ipse  ad  conventus 
agendos  (not  conrendbus  agendis)  in  citeriOnMii  Galiiam  profectus  est.  Oes.  B.  G.  \.  5!). 

(b).  If  an  object  of  purpose  is  to  be  expre-sed  by  a  trerund  absolute,  it  either  takes  the 
form  of  an  accusative  after  «of,  or  of  a  «.'cnitive,  as  (titm  ad  delifM^randum  gumere  (not 
delib*-ran<l()).  ('a>s.  B.  (J.  1.  7:  spnfium  ad  resinratidurn  (not  res/nra/ido)  dar/ .  Liv.  27.  40. 
Attiri  nxMs  ptv/>ositi  stmt  ad  itnitandum  (not  imitando).  Cic.  O.  G.  O.  4,  13.     For  an  ex-  , 
ceptional  example  of  such  «jerunds  in  the  dative,  see  Ex.  17. 

[c).  Even  jjiTundive  phrases,  if  expressing:  an  object  of  purpose,  assume  more  fre- 
quently the  form  of  an  accusative  after  ad,  than  that  of  a  irerundial  dative.  (See  li.  iSil.) 
Only  if  the  <,'oveniini:  phrase  contains  one  of  the  nouns  denotini;  officers,  oltices,  or  the 
noun  a)A/>i/i//,  a  <,'enin(lial  tlaiive  is  the  ueoitlau  Ibrm  for  the  ol^ject  of  tlie  pmpose 
for  which  these  otficers  etc.  are  appointed.  Such  ofticial  expressions  are  especially  the 
compounds  of  ?7/'  (see  No.  a),  as  triumvir,  decemvir  etc.,  but  also  other  general  desi;;- 
nations,  applicable  to  more  than  one  kind  of  t)fflces,  as  dux.  curator,  dictator.  But  even 
in  this  connection  jc^erundial expressions  with  ad,  or  in  the  form  of  an  attril)Utive  ireni- 
tive  are  not  unusual,  as:  Triumviri  creilti  sunt  ad  su/>pte/idum  co\onOru\ii  iiumerum. 
Liv.  3L  49. — Consulis  sufi^rogandi  comitia  habita  sunt.  Liv.  10.  11. 

('/).  Aside  from  tlie  case  mentioned  No.  (c'),  «jerundive  datives  most  frequently  occur 
witli  phrases  containing  nouns  of  time,  {dies.feria,  tempus)  or  place  (locus)  to  indicate 
the  purpose  for  which  a  time  or  place  is  appointed,  as  diem  alicui  rti  faciendiT.  edictre,  to 
appidnt  a  day  for  doinj^  something' ;  locum  cipere,  iocum  rtliugnere,  i'nvt/tlre  etc. 

(€).  With  other  phrases  jrerundive  datives  are  either  used  to  vary  the  expression 
(especially  when  other  gerimdives  with  ad  occur  in  the  same  sentence,  see  Ex.  12.  1.1),  or 
they  are  pre<,'nantl^  employed  in  enclose  peculiar  dative  relations,  for  inst.  thtt  of  a  da- 
tivus  commodi  or  incommodi,  which  would  be  lost  by  the  preposition  ad  (see  Ex.  13.  14). 

Obs.  3.  A  gerundive  dative  of  purpose  may  depend  on  the  verb  esse  in  three  diflferent 
relations : 

(rt)  if  esse  has  the  force  of  a  neuter  verb  (§  470,  2),  bein?  translated  by  fh^e  is,  there 
are,  a»  :  Comitia  fueruut  f/uigisfra^ibus  creandis,  ihcro  was  a  (public)  meelinj^  to  elect 
officers.  Mora  fuit  agmini  e.cpediendo,  there  was  a  dehiy  in  making  the  detachment 
ready  lor  combat  (Ex.  21-24). 

*  We  must  remember  that  predicate-nouns  with  the  copula  liave  the  grammatical  value 
of  verbs,  and  may  govern  objects  like  these.  %  ♦>!. 

t  For  modern  Latinity  we  may  notice  here  the  phrase  '  Presidential  election\  comitia 
principi  rogando  (the  President  being  only  'asked',  not  directly  chosen  by  the  people). 


GERUNDIAL  DATIVE. 


167 


jp' 


(6)  if  esse  is  used  as  copula  with  a  predicate-noun  (R.  211,  No.  3).  See  Ex.  26-29. 

ic)  if  a  ircrundive  is  used  as  predicate  dative  (see  K.  212).  „,„.ii„i 

In  the  cases  No.  (a)  and  (b)  it  is  more  usual  to  apply  an  attributive  genitive  gerunaiai. 

A    GKRUVDiAi.  DATIVES   GOVEKNED  BY  TiiANSiTiVB   PHRASES.  1.  Patres  qvinque- 
riros  rompt'ino  anro^  dividundo  et  /ri«/M?;i?'(W  Nepete' ootonicB  deducendiX.cr€averuni. 
7  iv  0  21   4  —  2   Decrevgrunt  patres  ut  pnctor  decemviro-*  agro  bamuih  meiienao 
dividenddg'te  cre^ret.  Liv.  31,  4.-  3.  Talis  vir  dictator  deligendus  ^'^^rcendv^  qu<^s- 
tiombus*   Uxit.  lb.  9,  2G.-  3.  Metellus    dixit,  non  convenlre*  quern   ni^jd"*  cnitas 
recuinrandiB  Ilisjximoi^  delegerit  ducem,  eum  repente»  ex  provincia  «"e^"^";.;"/ „Tpit 
—  4    DecrCtum  est  ut  consulcs  comparent»  inter  se,  uter  censortbus  creandis  naoere^ 
comitia.  lb.  24,  10.-  5.  Couui\SL  consult  ^jni  rogando^^^  edicunturi».  lb  23,.iL- b.  ^^on- 
cilium  legi  perferendiH^'^  habitumest.  advocato  populo  abarmis.  lb.  3.  lb.—  <•  -^"S^lv  I 
dixit   omnibus  A j/»^r«wi3  C-x^^nrx^oppugnandisXwxnc  esse  dictum  diem.  Caes.  n.  »jT.  ^ 
27;_  8.  Ilis  avertendit  terroribus  in  triduum»*   feriicis  indictte  »""»•  L'^- ^'Ji' il'i» 
9   Galli  baud  procul  inde  ubii«  nunc  Aquiieja  est,  lociim  opptdocondendo'-'  c^pCn  ni    . 
lb  39  22—  K».  Numamultaloca.<acm/c^W#«rft.^»»dedicavit    I^>' V'^^'TJV.  i^  llatm-sa 
commeatibus^o  subrehendis-^^  ex  Thessalia  mui.Tri"  jubet.  lb.  44,  9.-  ^f.-^^lf^'^^l^';^ 
re-ins  venit  ad  petendam^*  veniam  fe^^'i*  miftendts.  lb.  33   11.-  13   > a-»"^^^*^''^  « 
Apolloniata'-'*  torinenta-'«  quae  oppugna»d<T  nrbi  comparata^^  erant  ad  tuenda^s  m«nia 
devexCre".  lb.  24,40  -  14.  MuliitQdo  incoiarum  libertinorumqueet  "{''««"^"'""Xj^^^f 
nuenfa>'dit^'  retenta   est.  lb.  26,  11.-  15.  Tertium  exercitum   tuendis  .Paran33MtO?/« 
fama  erat    lb    10,:«.—    16.  Placuit   averruncand.t^^  deOruin   trre  victimas3*   ^ff ^'    ; 
ib.8i.     [For  smilar  constructions  see  Liv.  1,  21 ;  3.  :J5:  :i,  37  ;  6,  23:  10,  41  ;  21   4., 
\i.  7  :  26,  40 ;  27,  15 ;  31,  6  ;  4 i,  3 ;  4:3,  14.  Cic.  Or.  2,  55 ;  Cic.  Mur.  11,  25  ;  Plant.  Rud. 

'^'  B   GBKUVniAL  DATIVES  GOVERNED  BY  PREDICATIVE  PHRASES  WITH  NEUTER  VERBS,  OR 

THEIR  EQiriVALENTs.  17.  Pnetor  ad  opprimeudam  (^  0/>/?re^.-*)  t^^-ryOrum  conjiiranOnem 
missus  alios,  jam  con-rei:atos^«  ;>w/7/ian(/o,  vicit,  alios  verberatos"  ""cibus^s  affixit  . 
Liv  .-53  3(i  —  18.  Ouuni  «lies  venisset  fogatidni*^  ex  senatusconsulto/^mWfC,  wncursa- 
Ut^i  tot.K  ille  grex  Catiiln».  Cic.  Att.  1,  14,  5.-  19.  Philo  Romffi  juri  dicendo*^  urbana 
sors  evgnit".  lTv.  2>,  ;j5.-20.  Neque  receptus**  Romauis  in  Tliessaliam,  ueqxic  comme 
afibus  mrvehcndis*^  eo  patuit  iter.  lb.  44,  6.-21.  GomitiH  consulibm rogandtsiix^je^^^^ 
40  18-22.  Secundum  poenam  nocentium««  ut  in  utranique partem*;  an^ndi**«  ^c^ten^w^ 
exemnlum  nobile*»  esset,  indici^o  ijbertas  et  civius^i  data  est.  lb.  2,  5,  9.-  2.3.  ^on 
exerrittis,  non  dux  scribendo  exercitui^'^  erat.  II).  4,  43,  24.^«e«€c/^M^t  or« an d«B  quod 
honestius  potest  esse  perfugium  quam  iuris  interpietatio*' ?  Cic  Or.  ^'f-^.;^-.^^' 
tum»*  ab  decemviris  est  ut  supplication*  prodigns^*  exinandis"  fleret*«.  Liv.  4-«,  ^. 
(See  Liv.  25,  .3.)  ^  ^^^^        aa    -n*. 

C     GBRUNDIAL  DATIVES     DEPENDENT   ON     «^<«'wiTH    PRKDICATB-NOtTNS.—     f»-    A^^" 

cretum  estut  Canua  esset  locus  comportandv<^''  condendisque*'^  frrtctiibw.  Cic  L.  Ajrr. 
2  32  —  27  Datum  hoc  nostro  generi  «»est,  iuiquit  Decius,  ut  luendis^^ periculis publtas 


»  The  Pomptinian  district.-  »  Nepete,^.,  an  Etruscan  town.-  "  to  survey.-  *  T'<^- 
tidnes  exercere.  to  preside  at  the  trials.-  *  imperscmil.-  •  just.-  '  Might  not  this  be 
a  -enitive  ?  And  to  which  rule  would  it  belon-.;.  if  it  were  a  genitive?—  «  suddenly.— 
»  to  settle—  "»  ivgare,  to  elect;  properly  meaning  'to  ask',  because  the  Senate  had 
originallv  the  appointinir  power,  the  people  beinjr  only  entitled  to  'ask  for  the  appoint- 
meTit'.-  1'  to  tix.  to  appt>int.-  »^  to  carry.-  »'  hiberna  pi.  t  ^mterquarters  -  i*  for 
three  days.-  i*  days  of  praver.-  »«  literally:  not  far  from  tfience  where  (not  far  from 
where)  —  "  to  build.—  ^^  Ifjcutn  capere,  to  select  a  spot,  is  a  technical  phrase,  taken 
from  the  augural  ceremcmies.-  »»  sacra  facere,  to  perform  ^'ly^^i^i^  »»;[^ice«-/;  .^'P; 
Dlie^  _  21  to  transport.—  "  viam  munlre.  to  mend  a  road.—  23  a  hemld.— J*  for  a^kll.g 
fc-  "inhabitants  of  Apc.llonia.-  "  artillery.-  "  intended  for.- '^^  ad  tuenda. 
to  defend.-  "  dtvehere,  to  carry  away.-  »»  opifex.  an  artisan.-,  ^^  frequent  are  to 
people  -  "  to  organize.  Parari  is  the  predicate-inflnitive  of  a  subject-clause.-  "  to 
Spp  -ase  (bv  religious  exercises).-  3*  victim.-  "  cffdere,  to  slaughter.-  3«  assembled. 
-'3V  after  scourging  them.-  3«  crux,  cross.-  39  affigere,  to  nail.-  *o  rogatwn^mfeire, 
to  take  a  vote.-  «»  to  flock  to-ether.-  *^  .jus  dicere,  to  preside  over  the  jurisdicti.m.- 
43  %^s  erenit  alicui,  literally  :  The  lot  Hills  to  somebody.  The  «"™*."  .'l'5'^%"^^,;^•4- 
trate^  of  the  same  cateirory  divided  their  departments  by  lot.  Translate  lo  him 
fell  the  department'.  ?7r6a/ia,  belouL'ing  to  the  city  must  be  rendered  1'y^^.o'npo"",^»,'"? 
it  wilh  '  jiirisdicti(m\-4«  retreat.-  "  to  convey.-  «  the  guilty  -^^  on  each  side.-*»  to 
keep  d(.w  1  -  "  notable.-  «»  informer.-  •!  citizenship.-  "  to  enroll  the  army.-- 
«3  eipoun  in- -  "  to  proclaim.-  "  day  of  prayer.-  "  prodigy.-  ^^  expuirealiquid, 
to  expiate  something.-  *^  to  take  place.-  »»  to  forward.-  ••  to  store.-  «^  race.- 
«»  luerealiquid,  to  atone  for  Bomctlilug. 


168 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


piarnla»  simns.  Liv.  10,  28.— 2S.  Hnec  ppolia  inslj^nia'  sint  pnblicU  locv^  derorandis* 
11).  10.  39.— 2t>.  ijemprouius  hoc  maxiumm  continendU*  iu  lidc  aociis  vinculum  esbo 
cons<Cbat.  lb.  :;il,  h'i. 

Rem.  212.  Karely  gerundials  occur  as  niEDiCATE-DATiVEa,  and  in 
classical  lau.i^uage  (excoi>t  in  the  phrase  solcendo  cA.se)  always  as  gerun- 
dives, the  copula  denoting  abilit}',  or  fitness  to  pertbrni  an  action,  asonen 
ferendo  esse,  to  be  able  to  bear  a  burden. 

Obs.  1.  In  anteclas>sical  languaije  the  dative  of  the  gerund  is  made  depondcnt  on  the 
copula  with  the  force  of  an  ordinary  verbal  noun,  ar*:  C^iiid  nu^dx  eat  dttctaiido,  aniando? 
Plant.  Ar-in.  1,  3,  17  (=  Q'd  modus  est  ductativni  tf  u/nori,  or  Quem  modnm  /udMft  duda- 
tio^  etc. :  »ee  p.  81.  no.  1).— In  classical  prose  the  foll»»win«j:  gerundive  phrasrs  occur  a« 
prtdicate-datives  :  OneHftrendo  tfxe  (Liv.  2,  9;  Uv.  Met.  IT),  4(W;  Sen.  Ep.  71 ;  H).  Ben.  7, 
9  ;  lb.  C^u.  N.  0,  22);  Aowtyri  ferendo  eaue  to  bf  able  to  bear  an  honor,  Liv.  4,  3r>:  gradui 
ref'erendif  esse,  to  be  al)le  to  return  a  favor.  Liv.  28,  2.'J:  rest'mqnetido  i(jtti  tsse  (u.-ed  of 
thing!»,  adapted  to  extinguis-h  a  tire.  Liv.  m.  «»)  ;  certatniiti  tolerando  ease,  to  be  able  to 
maintain  a  combat.  Liv.  10,  5:  (Xfi  ali^no  solve /i  dot  sue,  to  beaDleto  pay  one's  debts,  Liv. 
31,  13 :  the  gerund  fo/rendo  esfie,  to  be  solvent  ((Mc.  Fani.  3.  8,  2 ;  Att,  13,  10,  3;  Off.  2^  22, 
79) ;  cetisifi  ceusendo  esue,  to  be  subject  to  assessment  in  the  census,  Cic  Flacc.  32.  80)». 
rost-cla<sical  authors,  especially  Pliny,  use  gerunds  as  lu-edicute-datives  in  a  passive 
sense,  as  Jiadix  scohjmi  rtscendo  tt-t,  the  root  of  the  scidynius  is  tit  to  be  eaten  (Piiu.  H. 
N.  21,  5»),  and  often).    Such  usage  is  extremely  rare  in  classical  prose. 

Obs.    2.   DlFKEKKNCK  BKTWEKS  TUK  rREnirATKOENITlVE,  AND  TlIK  mEniCATE-DATIVB 

OP  (iKUUNDiAi.s.  In  both  the  real  prcilicate  is  an  idea  understood  (^5  100,  2).  In  the  pred- 
icate-genitive of  a  gerund  it  is  tlu-  idea  of  instrumentality  or  means,  such  as  the  noukt 
instnunentmn  or  ca'isa,  of  which  the  gerundial  genitive  must  be  considered  an  attri- 
bute In  the  pndicate-dative  the  idea  understood  is  an  AaiEcrivE.  such  as  idonf  u<  (fit 
ovable),  of  which  the  gerundial  dative  is  an  ob.tect.  as:  'Decretum  est  nt  ad  tnbfltum 
conferrent  divitcs  qui  oneriprendo  esserd,  it  was  resolved  that  the  rich  who  were  aH«  fo 
bear  the  burden,  should  ctmtribute  to  the  taxes.  Liv.  2.  9.  Sometimes  i-itlier  of  these 
two  forms  may  be  used  with  equal  propriety,  as  for  instance  in  respect  to  medical  reme- 
dies which  may  be  represented  as  being  apt  to  heal,  or  able  (i.  e.,  haviftg  the  power  to 
heal).  EmjtlaMrum  qnod  puri  inovendo  est,  Cels.  5.  19  (a  plaster  good  for  removing  an 
ulceration),  where  the  genitive  ;>«ri.s'  morendi  would  be  etpiiilly  proper.  But  generally 
the  one  case  cannot  be  used  in  place  of  the  other.  In  a  number  of  passages  the  reading 
is  unsettled,  some  manuscripts  «jivinii  a  genitive,  others  a  dative.  In  other  passages  the 
genitive,  if  of  the  first  declension,  cannot  be  distinguished  in  form  from  the  dative. 
The  corre<t  readiii<^,  or  the  case,  respectively,  may  be  easily  determined  according  to 
the  rules  laid  down  above.  Thus  the  passage  Liv.  30.  9  :  /Vo  se  gum/ue  qua  diutvun 
obsidioni  (or  obxidionU.  according  to  other  manuscripts)  (olerand,e  sunt  ex  aorts  con- 
vex^re  (everv  one  to«>k  from  the  surrounding  country  what  was  '  for  snstaininii  a  long 
pie"-c').  All  our  grammarians  give  this  passaire  with  the  dative  readinir.  to  illustrate 
the^nse  of  the  gerundial  dative.  This  is  evidently  enoneons,  sirce  Livy  certainly 
did  not  mean  toconvev  the  idea  that  the  things  taken  by  the  inhabitants  were  'able  to 
s-ustain  a  siege;'.  He  "meant  to  say  that  these  thinirs  were  a  MEANs/or  the  in/iabttants 
to  sustain  the  siege,  and  hence  the  genitive  obsidio/iU  \h  the  only  ims.sible  reading  in 
the  passage.  Thus  the  passage  quoted  above  ip.  102,  Ex.  8)  :  AmbitiOnes  evertendie 
reipublic:e  sclent  esse  (Cic.  Verr.  2,  53)  is  by  some  grammarian?,  for  instance  Kuhncr, 
erroneously  taken  for  a  dative. 

Obs  3  The  expression  .w/?v^(/o^sw  is  best  explained  bv  snpplving  the  word«i  flpn  nli- 
ino  (debts),  which  are  actuallv  added  Liv.  31,  13.  Thus  it  would  become  a  gerundive 
phrase,  and  therebv  the  gerundial  predicate-dative,  f<;r  classical  prose,  would  be  exclu- 
sively assigned  to"the  gerundive  imihases.  Most  grammarians  assert  that  the  phrase 
only  occurs  with  a  neiration  {uon  solrendo  esse,  to  be  insolvent).  But  this  is  contra- 
dicted partly  by  the  passaire  of  Livy.  partly  by  the  use  of  the  Roman  jurists,  who,  m 
innumerable  passages,  use  the  phrase  without  a  negation.  See  Ex.  7. 

1.  Experiendum»   est  citne  aliqiiis  plebejus  ferendo  magno  honSri.   Liv.   4,   S-'S.— 
ires  mulierum  exercitaiie'  oneri  ferendo  sunt*.  Sen.  Ben.  7,  9.—  3.  Dictator  fretus 


2.  Aun 


>  A  pin-oflTering.—  '  insiqne,  a  badge.—  »  to  decorate.— <  to  keep.—  •  The  import  of  this 
phrase  is  misunderstood  liv  all  the  interpreters  of  this  passage.  The  meaning  assigned 
to  it  above  is  not  the  original  one.— •  to  try  by  experience.—  '  to  exercise.—  8  The 
passage  may  be  understood  in  two  ways  ;  bv  taking  exercHatOE  for  an  attribute  of  aure^ 
(the  exercised  ears.  i.  <?.,  bv  ear-rings),  or  by  taking  exercitatcE  sunt  for  a  perfect  paa- 
Kive.     In  the  former  way,  one/i  fefendo  would  be  a  predicate-dative  ;  iu  the  latter,  not. 


1  I 


GERUNDIAL  ABLATIVE. 


169 


erat  Ic'-fltum»  ctiamnunc'  certamini^  tolerando  es>>e.  Liv  10,  5.-  J.Hi^pani  Ijctatos  se 
dixCrunt  ScipiOnem  deorum  hi^wh-nimc*  esse grati(B  referendcE.Liy.  2S,  li.- b.^m- 
d^ii  ^modoq^ia.  restinguendo  igniforent  portantes,  in  ^^'^^^^  l^^jj^^.^^f  J»^;-. 
Ih  ;30  0-0  Noli  mirari  quod  Maguis  spcmsor' buiui  factiis  est.  Nimlium"  id  fuit  . 
M^ndo  uon  erat  Cic.  Att.  13,  10.\- 7.  Quum  inter  tidejussOres*  quidam  ^Ivendo 
esse  de^iCrunt,  earesio  ad  onus"  ejus  unisolvendo  est  uon  pertmet.  Papm.  Dig.  46, 1,  ol. 

E.  Reversed  Phrases  and  Gerunds  in  the  Ablative. 

1,  Gerundial  Ablative, 
§  S$99,  Tlie  regular  meaning  of  the  gerundial  ablative  is 
that  of  the  means  and  instrument  of  an  action.  Exception- 
ally and  very  rarely  it  is  used  as  a  completing  object  of  some 
of  the  verbs  construed  with  an  ablative  case.  But  more  fre- 
quently it  denotes  some  of  the  adverbial  ideas  related  to  that 
of  instrumentality:  being  especially  used  to  indicate  the  rela- 
tion of  MODALITY*  The  form  of  the  gerundial  ablative  is  either 
that  of  a  GERUNDIVE  PHRASE,  or  that  of  a  gerund  absolute, 
or  that  of  gerund  witli  a  transitive  object. 

Bern  213  The  use  of  the  gerundial  ablative  as  an  ablative  of  the  direct 
instrument'  or  means  is  very  frequent  in  all  periods  of  the  lau.i-uage. 
It  is  rendered  by  an  English  participial  in  ing,  or  by  an  abstract  noun,  alter 
the  preposition  '  bi/\  as 

Orator  rem  augere  potest  laudmdo.  vitvperandogue  rursiis  adfligere,  an  orator  can 
exalt  a  thin- 6y;7/ai.4/^7  ^by  praise),  and  lower  it  by  censuring  {by  censure).  Cic.  Biut 
^riT.-OratiOnem  L^itlnam  ;/o.^/t./.f7^mii.  etflcies  pleniOrem^^you  ^vil  •  f ^ ;^«^^«f ^"^ 
writings  increase  your  command  of  the  Latin  language.  Cic.  Oil.  1,  1.  (hterallj  .  mau 
the  La'iin  language  fuller).  •        ^ 

If  a  gerundial  ablative  is  dependent  on  a  passive  predicate,  it  otten 
perfornis  the  functions  of  a  passive  agent,  as  : 

Ilominis  mens  disce7ido  alitnr  et  cogitando,  the  mind  of  man  ^^  "S^Jf  ^ Jj, ^^^*™; 
in-and  thinkin-  Cic.  Off.  1.  30 —A  sentence  like  this  may  in  Eng  ish  be  expiessea 
Actively  bvnikm-  he  part  cipial  in  ing  the  active  subject  {Thinking  nourishes JM 
^?dnd)  Biit  in  LaUn  a  gerundial  ablative  can  neither  be  changed  ""to  a  subiect-nomi- 
nnf  S"  nor  into  a  s  biect-innnitive.  Hence  English  artive  seniences  of  this  kind  must 
K,':  ^uTc^^SS^^foi^^^  unless  a  -rbalnotin  exists  w^i^=h  may  boused 
ah  subject.  [The  sentence  above  we  may  express  :  'Cogitatto  alit  mentem  .  But  or 
the  verb  discere  a  noun  cannot  be  formed.] 

Obs  1  The  lo'-ical  subject  of  the  gerundial  ablative  must  always  be  the  same  as  tlie 
trrammaticd  subject  o  the  governing  verb.  But  if  the  governing  verb  is  a  paf  ive 
e  t herfts  irrammaucal  or  its  logical  subject  (the  doer  of  the  action,  or  p^.ssiye  agent)  may 
hP  the  lo4al  siXSo^^^^^^  .renuidial,  as  Faki^is  fallendoimpetravit,  Fulvius  succeeded 
K  !r  .!?»?; nfwiV^hP  h  m"plf  wa"  the  t^er^on  deceiving).  Milites  muniendo  occupantur, 
Se'roSsVre  ScaipreTbf  forUfy!n7(?4  f-tify)     ^^>f ^-/-^^^ 

unless  the  person  expreescd  by  the  subject  has  sunk  the  ship. 


»  His  lieutenant.—  '  still.—  '  contest.- 
—8  Ironical  particle :  '  The  fact  is'  etc. 
fails  to  the  charge. 


*  mercy  —  »  the  lines.—  •  to  rush.—  ''  snretj'. 
»  bondsman.-  »°  fact.—  "  ad  onus  pertinet. 


170 


RETERSED  THRASES. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


171 


0B8.  2.  Ilonce,  when  words  rcferrini:  to  the  loj^ical  Fuhjcct  of  the  jrcrnndial.  as  qnl^q^ie 
and  ipse,  are  conihiiiod  with  it,  the>(  do  not  aqree  with  the  qeriindial  in  the  ahlatu^.  but 
are  placed  in  tlic  nominafi>e  case,  if  the  srammalical  subject  of  the irovcrninfr  verb  it»  m 
that  case:  Callicrates,  agendo  ipse  lfoniJln:e  Hocietatis»  cant«am.  fflecit  utuiii  ab  s^e  di!*geu- 
pcrit  adversiis  Koinjliios  dicere  viderptiir  ;  CaWhriitv!*.  by  })leadin(/,  /rirns^-f/,  the  cause  of 
the  Roman  alliance,  made  thosie  who  dit*agreed  with  him  appear  to  speak  a<,'am8t  the 
Komans.   Liv.  41,  24. 

1  Ludl  et  dies  festi»  quid  habCrent  vohiptati"  carendomn<x\»  intellcxi  qnamfrf/endo. 
Cic  P.  K.  Q.  1.  3.—  2.  Multi  patrimonial  tffud{?runt»  inconsulte*  largiendo*.  Cic.  Off 
2,  15.  M.—  :i.  Hannibal  scnpi*it,  Campilnof»  tolrrando  pauco^  dies,  totam  solutQrt^s» 
obsidiOnem.  Liv.  2(1,  7.—  4.  Hl;e-ius,  docendo  qnam  ea  res  patriae  salutiliis^  esset,  per- 
vlcit"  ut  pnvsidium  Pnnicum  .Marcdlo  tradcretur.  Liv.  2«.  ;W.—  5.  Homines  ad  de(»s 
nulla  re  propius  acce(hint  (approach),  qnam  saiatem  lioruinibus  dando*.  Cic.  Lis:  12.  US. 
—  fi.  Cirsar  dando.  mhlevando^'^.  ignoscendo  ;  Cato  nihil  largiendo^^  'r^lonam  adeptus  est. 
Sail.  Vat.  54.  3.—  7.  Unam  legem  to/hndo^'^  cetera»  infirmabiiis.  Liv. 34,  i.— 8.  Uux  ide 
ex  bellis  Mia  nerendo^^  vivit'.  Liv.  21, 10.—  0.  Sic  ulciscar»*  ea  hominnm  srenera  8in<?nla, 
quemadinodum'^a  quibiis(iue  sum  provocStusi»*:  maloscivis,  rempuMirafuhencgerendo; 
pertidos  aniTcos.  7/J//J/ (7Y(/e//c/o.  atqne  omnia  carendo  ;  invido<,  virtilti  et  «.'hniie  sei- 
tiendo^'' ;  mercatOres»"  proviiiciflrum.  revocando  (eos)domnm,  atqne  ab  eis  provincuV 
rum  ratidnes^^  rejy^ftndo-^.  (Mc.  P.  \i.  it  9.  21.—  l<t.  (iratiam  nns  inlre'-i  tt  Caisare  de- 
fendendd  pace  arbitriTmur.  Cic.  Fain.  4.  2.—  11.  Milites  fati-ilti  per  diem  totnm  vid 
facienda.  a  Hojorum  reire  pnplio  victi  sunt  Liv.  33.  3r..—  12.  Consul,  occupiltus  op- 
jtugnandis  ^^tolicis  urbihus,  Pliilippum  ad  Thessalorum  civittltes  misit.  Liv.  3!»,  24.— 
13.  L.  Marcius  omne  tempu8  niuuiendis  castris  convehendisf/ue'^  commealibm^^  con- 
sumpsit.  Liv.  35,  37. 

Ji^m.  214.  AVhen  Ihe  adverbial  relation  of  modality  is  expressed  by  the 
fi^eriiiulial  ablative,  it  irenerally  has  the  force  of  a  ])resent  participle  used 
as  an  accessory  predicate  (55  4(51,  U.  12),  as  llannihal  vincendo  aenex  /actus 
est  (as  U^'cincetiff  senex  factus  est)Liv.  ;30,  38,  Hannibal,  i;re\v  old  a.s  a  con- 
qnewrjn  themuht  of  rictories^coiiqneriiifj.  (See  lis..  1-4)  Here  belongs  the 
combination  of  the  Venindial  ablative  with  neirations,  when  it  is  some- 
times an  e(iuivalent  of  the  English  participial  after  '  irithouC,  as  :  Litteras 
dedit  mm  scnbendo,  he  composed  a  letter  without  writing.  See  Ex.  10. 

Ob?.  1.  In  this  relation  the  frernndial  atdative  has  often  a  pregnant  meaninjr,  combin- 
hii:  that  of  an  abi.ativic  absolute  (of  which  it,  someiimet».  is  almost  an  equivalent)  with 
thatof  a  irerundial.  It  mav.  then,  often  be  resolved  into  clauses  with  conjunctions,  for 
instance  l)y  nhil*^  (Ex.  5.  «i.  7),  since  (Kx  8).  after  (Kx.  9).  Sometimes  it  is  chosen  m 
place  of  an  ablative  absoUitive  to  impart  the  idea  of  necessity  to  the  action,  as  :  Tardo 
Inde  ad  Maleam  i)ervCnir,  trahendis  plerunKjue  rei/iidco  naribtis  qu:u  cum  commeStu  se- 
quebantur.  Liv  32.  It»  (From  there  he  came  late  to  Malea,  since  the  ships  which  followed 
with  the  supplies  ^a^;  mostly /06" /o/f?^</).  .   -   • 

Obs.  2.  The  «.'eruiidial  ablative  is  (rarelv)  used  instead  of  gnam  with  a  siibiect-inflni- 
tive,  after  c(miparatives,  havinp:  thus  the  full  force  of  a  declined  inrtnitivc  :  Nullum  ofH- 
cium  Merenda  gratia  maj^is  est  necessarium,  Cic.  Otf.  1.  15  ;  no  duty  is  more  necessary 
than  that  of  returnimr  a  favor  (inst.  of  quam  gratiani  referred. 

Obs.  3.  The  «jenindial  ablative  is  very  rarely  used  as  a  completini;  object  of  verbs,  or 
asa  limitiuir  object  of  i)r.(licate-nouns  or  adjectives:  Absfifit  conHnuando  tnar/islrdtum, 
he  (ifr-isteiffrom  prolonj^'in-;  his  ottiee,  l.iv.  9,  -M.—Coident'/s  f)0>'sid>^ndis  agri<,  satisfied 
with  holdiuLT  lands,  Liv.  0,  14. -Ut  et  doctrlnie  studiis  et  re'jenda  civitafe  pi  mops  esset 
(the  first  in  the  art  of  j,'Overninj?  the  state).  Cic.  Leg.  3.  «.— Cura  ceiisOrum  non  se  tenint 


rando  dignus  est\  never  occur. 

1.  InvidiOsisS*  nominibus  utebatur  consul,  peditiOnem  muliebrera-s  appellando.  Cic. 


*  injudicious. —  ^  [or- 


»  festival.—  '  palrimoniam.  fortune.-  s  eJTi'ndere^to  w^^tc—  *  injudicious.—  >>  tar 
qiH  to  t)e  liberal.—  «  solvere,  to  raise.—  '  beneficial.—  «  to  prevail.—  »  salnffm  alicu 
dare,  to  make  somebodv  happv.—  i"  to  relieve.—  »»  to  irrant.—  '-  tosetaside.— »3  to  raise. 
—  i*ul.ciscialigf/em,  to  take  reven<,'e  on  somebody.—  »»  as.—  »«  to  provoke.—  to  'vo 
for.—  »<*  merchant.-  >«  account.—  ^»"  to  require.—  ^^  gratiatn  inlre  ab  aliquo,  to  obhgo 
homebody.—  ^a  to  convey.—  '**  tjupplics.—  ^*  odious.—  '■'*  womauiiih. 


u* 


I 


Oflr.  2,  4.—  2.  Bocchns,  repvtando^  quae  eibi  duObns  proeliis  evenerant,  quinqne  ex 
neccssarii82(lc!6o:it  quorum  fides coL^itaerat.  Sail.  Juj;.  103.— 3.  Rex  ^r«rc#/i£/o quotidie 
militeshostem  opperiebatur^.  Liv.  33,  3.-4.  Camillns  Ardex  dis hominibi/sgue  accusandis 
eene.«cObat*.  Liv.  5.  43.  7.-5.  His  rebus  efficitur*  ut  dando  eX.  acci/iiendo,  mutuanuis- 
gnt^  facudatihus''  et  comnwdavdis^  nulla  re  eireamus.  Cic.  Off.  2,  4.—  6.  Ma-^d stratus 
domim  ne  danto  neve  petendd^  neve  gerendiV'^  neve  gesta  potestdte.  Cic.  Leg.  3.  4.— 

7.  Medici  toto  corpore  curando^^  minima?  etiam  parti  medeutur.  Cic.  Tu8C.  3,  34.— 

8.  Hannibal,  recor</a/*(io  quie  ipse  in  transitu  Alpium  tolerasset,  nequSquamis  facilem 
traiisitum  exspeciabat.  Liv.  27.  39.—  9.  Deniqne  Bomilcar.  omnia  terdando.  socium  sibi 
adjuii^'it  Nabdal.sam.  Sail.  Jug.  70.-  10.  Qui  est  qui  niUlis  ofAcix  praxeiHis  tradendis^^ 
pljilosophum  fee  audeat  dicere  ?  Cic.  OtT.  1,  2. 

2 )  A  llaticGS  ahsolate. 
§  «ISO.  Tho  Ablatives  AB-SOLUTE  (§  395  foil.)  must  be  con- 
sidered as  one  of  the  various  forms  which  the  Latin  lano-uao-e 
has  assigned  to  the  predicative  phrases  of  several  classes  of 
dependent  clauses.  By  this  form  the  dependence  of  the  clause 
is  indicated,  tlie  ablative  case  of  the  phrase  having  the  force 
of  a  suBORDiXATixG  CONJUNCTION.  The  subject  of  this  pred- 
icative phrase  is   called  subject-ablative,  and  the   predicate, 

PREDICATE-ABLATIVE.     " 

f^^For  the  agreement  of  the  predicate-ablative  with  the  subject-ablative  see  §  396, 
and  R.  3.}. 

Jlem.  21.').  The  ablative?  absolute  are,  by  their  original  conception  reversed  participial 
phrfwits.  expressing,  like  the  gerundial  ablative,  and  true  to  the  fundamental  meaning 
of  tile  ablative  Ciise  the  cause  or  means  of  an  action.  In  this  original  meaning  the 
ablatives  absolute  very  fix'quently  occur  in  all  periods  of  the  language,  as:  Neutram- 
l)artem  volCbant  potentiorem  altera  oppressd  fieri,  they  wished  neither  party  to  become 
llie  stronger  bi/  the  crushing  of  the  one.  I^iv.  42,  30. 

The  cause  and  means  of  aii  action  existing  always  previous  to  the  action  as  such,  this 
grammatical  form  (with  a  perfect  participle)  was  etninently  adapted  to  indicate  a  timb 
ANTKuioK  to  th(!  main  action  and  such  relations  which  are  analogous  to  those  usually 
expressed  by  the  ablative  of  substantives.  Thus  the  ablatives  absolute  gradually  be- 
came a  regular  form  for  the  predicative  jjhrases  of  temporal,  causal,  conditional  and 
modal  clauses,  and,  in  general,  for  all  relations  usually  expressed  by  the  English  parti- 
ciple  absolute. 

Jiem.  21G.  The  ablatives  absolute  are  divided  into  five  classes  accord- 
ini;  to  the  ditferent  forms  of  their  predicate-ablatives:  1)  Ablatives 
absolute  with  pkufect  participles  of  transitive  verbs,  the  subject-abla- 
tive beinu^  the  transitive  object  of  the  active  verb,*  as  legdiis  dlmisds,  after 
the  ambassadors  had  been  dismissed ;  2)  with  perfect  deponent  parti- 
ciples, as  IcfiuttH  profectiH,  after  the  ambassadors  had  departed;  3)  with  a 
PRESENT  PAiiTiciPLE  (active  or  deponent),  as  mditibus  sequentibus,  while 
the  soldiers  followed  ;  4)  with  a  piiedicate-noun,  or  a  predicate-adjec- 
tive, as  Cicerone  comule,  vthWa  Cicero  was  (is)  Consul ; /m^re  incolumiy 
while  (my)  brother  was  (is)  sate;  5)  with  impersonal  perfect  passive 
PARTICIPLES  of  neuter  verbs,  as  debelldto,  after  the  war  had  been  finished. 

>  To  consider.-  ^  relative.-  »  to  await.—  *  to  grow  old.—  ^  it  follows.—  «  to  borrow. — 
'  (our  mutual)  means.—  »  to  lend.—  »  to  apply  for,—  »"  to  hold.—  "  to  cure.—  i"  by  no 
means.—  »'  tradere  officii  pra;cej)ta,  to  give  rules  on  human  duties. 

*  This  foiTii  of  tlie  ablatives  absolute  is  always  a  sure  evidence  of  the  verb,  employed 
as  participle,  being  transitive,  the  same  as  with  all  reversed  phrases  with  perfect  parti- 
ciples or  gerundives. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


172 


178 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


CO 


tW  To  these  mny  bo  added  the  participles  of  the  three  periphrastic  conjujration». 
For  the  use«>f  the  «renindial  nhlativo  with  the  force  of  ati  ablative  alisolute  see  K.  -^13, 
Obn.  1.  For  the  use  of  the  participle  in  urns  as  ab;*.  ai)l.  see  H.  15<».  For  the  use  of  tha 
perfect  participle  witli  the  lorce  of  a  periphrastic  participle,  ^^c•e  §  .VM. 
Ons.  1.  The  <;rammatical  value  of  the  two  tciisep  in  which  the  predicate-ablative  may 
appear,  is  not  To  be  taken  as  ABsoi.rTE  (in  rcfrard  to  the  speakeu),  but  depcuda,  as  ia 
infinitive  clauses,  on  its  relation  to  the  principal  predicate  : 

ya)  If  the  time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  participle  is  conceived  as  coinctdknt 
with  the  time  of  the  action  indicated  by  tlie  i)rincipal  predicate,  the  present  parti- 
ciTLK  is  usfd,  and  tiie  construction  must  be  active  (but  see  Obs.  3  (a).) 

(f»  If  the  time  of  the  participial  action  is  conceived  as  antekiou  to  that  of  the  prin- 
cipal predicate,  the  participle  must  be  in  the  PEitPECT,  and  tlie  construction  is  passivk 
(but  see  Obs.  3  (/v).) 

The  Enirlisb  equivalent  of  the  present  PARTiripi,K,  if  it  is  rendered  by  a  participial 
)nstruction,  is  likewise  a  i-rescnt  ])articiple  ;  but  if  it  is  rennert-d  by  a  finite  clause, 
the  tense  aj^reeswilh  that  of  the  principal  predicate,  as :  CeltibCri  quieti  m(7H6«/,  Tiiu- 
t\o  odfinente  imn'mc'uun,  tlie  CVllil)eriaiis  remain  quiet  wliile  Titiirius  //oWx  (is  hoMini;) 
the  province,  (or  Titurius  holding  tiie  i)rovinci');  but:  (.\'ltil)C'ri  quieU  vuintbant  {or 
manser-anf)  Titurio  o/>ii/w?///<'l)roviiiciain,  ihe  Ccltibtrians  re//i(/i//e(/  (had  reijiained  quiet) 
wliile  Titurius  held  (was  hokliii-.')  ilic  province. 

'1  lie  Enirlish  equivalent  of  the  pkkfkct  pakticiplk  (beinj; likewise  a  perfect  partici- 
ple if  a  participial  construction  is  clioseu)  is  j^enerally  a  pupkufkct*,  as  :  Connlio 
dimisso  lerf(Ui  aiKWi  sunt,  after  the  council  had  been  dismissed,  the  envoys  were  hwtrd 
(or  •  the  fOuncU  haiing  l>een  dismissed  t!tc,').  .     . , 

Obs.  2.  8ince  ablatives  absolute  cannot  «generally  be  used  to  express  C(»incident  time 
passively,  nor  to  express  anierior  time  actively.  Eiitrlish  active  constructions,  in  order 
to  be  rendered  into  Latin  ablatives  absolute,  mu^t  frequently  be  changed  in  re^j'ard  to 
voice.  (See  §  Ml  ) 

Obs.  3.  Exceptions  to  the  riti.es  in  Obs.  1  (a)  and  ih). 

(a)  CoiNCiOENT  time  may  be  expressed  pas.<tirf/i/.  if  the  action  is  conceived  as  a  state, 
produced  by  some  fornvr  action.  In  this  instance  the  pkukkct  paktk  ipi.e  may  be  used 
in  the  quality  of  periphrastic  present  (§  5iMj).  as:  Consule  in  Campa/iin  ttccufxlto  hr\h\ni 
tarde  «^eritur,  while  the  consul  is  occu/ned  in  Campania,  the  war  proceeds  slowly.  (Here 
the  participle  Ofcupafo  must  be  resolved  into  the  periphrasiic  puesknt  occ/pVus 
^,M.)  If  the  i)rincipal  predicate  is  a  perfect  (irestum  est)  the  participle  occif/hlto 
is  to  be  resolved  into  a  periphrastic  imperfect  (occt/pdtus  erat,  while  he  was  occu- 
pied). ,        ,  .  v 

ib)  ANTEmoR  time  mav  be  expressed  actively  by  means  of  a  few  of  the  deponent  verns. 
TliuH  are  used  the  depon*"nts  rnoH.  profiH-^ci.  tran~<gredi,  e(/redi.  renrtdi,  ingredi,  and  or'iri, 
as  •  rnortuo  Tullo  (Liv.  1,  •,i-i).—Praioribus  in  vroviuciam  profectis,  after  the  pnetors  had 


Obs.  4.  Rarely  deponent  perfect  participles  in  the  construction  of  ablatives  absolute, 
and  in  ordii  ary  participial  constructions,  are  used  witli  passive  meaninjjs.  as  dej)opnhlfis 
tt'iris  (Cies.  B.  (t.  1.  11) ;  libertdtv^  dutcedine  erpertd  (Liv.  1,  17);  transgrex-dji  Apetmlnis 
(Liv.  10,  27).     Thus  are  used  ad^ptus  (Cic.  Sen.  2)  ;  nltus  (Liv.  2,  17)  and  several  others. 

Jlem.  217.  Relation  of  the  Ablatives  absoi-ute  to  the  principal 
SENTENCE.  Tlic  Abhuives  Absolute  in  re2:ard  to  the  principjil  predicate 
of  tlie  sentence  must  be  considered  as  one  single  term  (the  same  as  all 
reversed  phrases,  t^  191),  of  which  the  predicate  of  the  sentence  (princi- 
pal predicate)  is  the  governing  word.  The  relati(m  of  the  Ablatives  Ab- 
solute to  this  governing  j^redicate  is  always  objective,  and  if  they  have 
the  gramtnatical  value"  of  clauses,  such  a  clause  must  be  considered  as 
the  object  of  the  principal  j)redicate.  This  objective  relation  is  almost 
always  tin  adverbial  one,  being  that  of  time,  means,  cause,  or  CON- 
niTiON.    Rarely  reversed  phrases  with  participial  ablatives  are  used  as  com- 

*  In  freer  style  a  past  tense  i3  frequently  substituted  for  this  plui>erfect.    But  a  papt 
tense,  thus  used,  may  always  be  replaced  by  a  pluperfect. 


{ 


pleting  objects  of  the  verbs  or  adjectives  construed  with  the  ablative 

case. 

Obs.  1.  To  the  verbs  and  adjectives  which  are  sometimes  construed  with  such  particip- 
ial abiitjves  as  completini^  objects  belons;  gloridri,  gaudere,  opus  est,  coittentus,  and  per- 
haps a  few  more,  as:  Nulla  re  mairia  gloriantur  quam  decepto  per  indutias  rege,  they 

'  ■      ■       deceived  the  kiiiff  by  th(;  annifitice.  Liv.  42,  47.— 


boast  of  nothinij  more  than  of  having 


Si  Icires  inlquic  sunt,  sequitur  ut  commu  tat  is  nobis  opus  sit  legibu»,  if  the  laws  are  unjust, 
it  follows  Wmitheje  is  a  necessity  of  our  changing  the  laws.  Cic.  Clu.  55,  150.—  Si  con- 
tentns  bene  re  gestd  quiesset  eo  die;  if,  satisfied  with  haiing  done  [the  thing]  well  (with 
his  success),  he  would  have  rested  on  that  day.  Liv.  42,  59.  Sometimes  such  construc- 
tions may  be  considered  both  as  ordinary,  or  as  reversed  phrases,  as  :  Civitates  com- 
positd  cum  Philippo  pace  gaudebanf.  the  states  were  deliL'hted  with  the  peace  made 
with  Philip  ;  or  '  the  states  were  glad  that  they  had  made  peace  with  Philip'.  Liv.  31,  15, 

Obs.  2.  The  nature  of  the  adveibial  relation  which  ablatives  absolute  have  in  regard 
to  their  principal  predicate,  inusl  generally  be  inferred  from  the  requirements  of  the  dis- 
course, the  same  as  in  the  English  participles  absolute.  The  rules  about  the  conjunc- 
tions which  have  to  be  used  it  ablatives  absolute  are  to  be  rendered  bv  clauses,  are  modi- 
fled  according  to  the  ditferent  classks  of  the  ablatives  absolute  (see  K.  224.  228).  In  this 
respect  it  is  a  rule,  common  to  all  clauses,  that  conjunctions  cannot  generalhf  be  vsed  in 
connection  with  Latin  ablatives  absolute,  but  must  t)e  understood  and  supplied.  Excep- 
tions to  this  rule  occur,  in  good  prose,  in  reirard  to  the  concessive  conjunctions  ^/'.«i, 
qvamquam  (although),  quamvis  (liowever).  and  in  legard  to  the  comparative  conjunc- 
tions qxiam  (than.  vl»'..  sicut  (as),  quasi,  relut,  iamguam  (as  if)  and  nisi  (except  if), 
which  are  added  to  the  ablatives  al)Solute,  the  same  as  to  finite  clauses,  if  the  relation 
of  the  ablatives  absolute  would  be  obscure  or  ambiguous  without  them,  as:  Cum  in 
expectatiOne  seiiatus  esset.  6(?//o  f/^i  non  indicto.  tamen  jam  decrtto,  (\\\\  regum  suam, 
Persei  qui  secntflri  amicitiam  esseiit.  when  the  senate— //i(?  war  bnng  already  decreed 
although  not  yet  declared— wa^  expecting  which  of  tlie  kimrs  would  follow  its  cause,  and 
which  (would  follow)  thai  of  Perseus.  Liv.  42,  lO.—  Vtlatdissini'/l  cum  paUia  rdictis^ 
as  if  their  gods  had  been  abandoned  (bv  them)  together  with  their  country.  Liv.  1,  31. 
—Quod  quasi  deo  teste,  promiseris,  id  tenendum  est,  what  one  has  promised  a*  if  in  the 
presence  of  Uod,  must  be  \iKyi.— (Quamvis  causa  temere  in.'ititutd,  however  raslily  the 
matter  may  have  been  decided  upon.  Cic.  Att.  9,  6.  See  Cic.  Verr.  II.  5.  25 ;  Att.  14,14; 
Ctes.  B.  G.  5,  4  :  B.  C.  1,  37;  2, 13;  Liv.  33,  39.  See  B.Vl.  under  the  conjunctions  mentioned. 

Obs.  3.  The  double  function  of  ablatives  absolute  as  grammatical  objects,  and  as  clauses, 
is  blended  in  a  peculiar  and  idiomatic  manner  if  the  subject-ablative  is  either  an  inter- 
KOOATivE  or  a  kki.ativk  form-adjective.  In  this  instance  the  ablatives  absolute  are  not 
confined  to  their  own  relation  to  the  principal  predicate,  but  (in  the  same  manner  as  in- 
terro'^ative  and  relative  objects)  perform  functions  which  aflTect  the  irrammatieal  form  of 
the  wliole  sentence,  i.  <•.,  they  make  their  own  governing  sentence  a  relative  clause,  or 
an  inierro"-ative  sentence,  or  an  interrogative  clause.  If,  in  such  instances,  the  ablatives 
absolute  may  be  rendered  by  verbal  nouns,  the  construction  can  generally  be  imitated 
in  English.  But  if.  as  it  is  often  the  case,  such  ablatives  absolute  must  be  rendered  by 
CLAUSES  or  by  pauticipials  ABSoi.t'TE.  the  sentence  must  be  often  recast  in  English 
either  by  assf-nin "  the  relative  or  interrogative  function  to  a  member  of  the  principal 
eentence.  or  by  mailing  the  aJ)latives  absolute  the  principal  sentence,  and  reducing  the 
principal  sentence  to  the  form  of  a  clause  : 

1  Rei  ative  connections  :  Ea  est  conatus,  qvibus  pafefacfis  nnllam  sibi  in  posterura 
di-'iiitaiis  locum  relTquit.  he  undertook  things  «r/ac/^  if  knoum,  ^\'ou\d  leave  to  his  charac- 
ter no  chance  for  the  future  (literally  :  Jle  undt'rtook  those  t?nng<  after  which  having be^n 
made  knmvn,  he  left  to  himself  no  chance  for  the  future).  Cic.  Fam.  1,  92.--Movebatur 
Cte^ar  misericordia  civium,  qn'ibus  salris  atque  incolumibus  rem  obtinCre  malGhat,  Cssar 
wa»  seized  with  pitv  for  the  citizens  whom  he  preferred  to  preserve  while  at  the  same 
time  accimiplishing  his  j)\ir}X)se  (literally:  while  who  being  safe  and  iinhurt,  he  preferred 
to  accomplish  his  purpose  {rem  obtinlre).  Cies.  B.  C.  1, 72.   See  p.  535,  R. 

2  Intkiikog ATivE  CONNECTIONS  :  Tu.  quibus  rebus  gestis,  quo  hoste  svperato  conciOneia 
donan.li  <  ansa  advocAie  ausus  es  ?  ^Vhat  have  yov  done,  what  emmy  have  you  cimquernl, 
to  entitle  vou  to  c.ill  a  meeiing  for  decreeing  presents  to  you  ?  (literally:  Aft^r  doing 
what  things,  after  conquering  what  enemy  did  you  dare  to  call  etc.)  Cic.  V  err.  3,  80. 

[Trv  to  render  the  followins  sentences,  both  literally  and  idiomatically,  according  to 
the  rules  given  above] :  1.  Qua'  frequentia"^  omnium  generum  prosequeuieS,  creditis  noa 


Make  the  ablatives  absolute  the  principal  sentcucc-  «  crowd.—  ^  to  accompany. 


174 


EEVERSED  PHRASES. 


ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 


175 


panda 
3.  Grave 


Capnanron.cto«'  Liv.7.30.-  2.  \-xd5myxf*,qmbustexmnchs\orafonbu,qn^m 
1^  lu.  con^de,.th.  pcidus  esl,  ?.a  sumta^  jaccl*  omnm.  Uc.  N.  D.  3,  3o  a> 


phalanx,  came  almost  up  to  our  nist  ranks.  Lies.  15.  u.  i,  4i. 

Jlem.  21S.  The  subject-ablative  can  never  denote  ^^^^  .^j"^^,  P^^^^^'^^^;" 
thin-  as   the  subject   of   the   governm-    predicate.      Thi3    subject  can 
not  appear  in  the  one  of  the  two  propositions  as  a  "«""^^^^^V/.    wi  ^^ 
as  a  p  onoun.     Tlius  the  sentence  '  ^mpromuscame  ^f  ^'/^^j'^f.^f  ^^J" 
formed  that  etc:  couhl  not  be  rendered  Sempronius  unit,  eo  ^^^'i/^J^J^f^ 
etc.     Nor,  if  the  sentence  had  the  lorni    ^After  Sempromus  haci^^^^^^^ 
fanned,  he  came\  couUl  we  render  it  '  Senipromo  ''(^'f'/Z^^^^^^^^^^ 
such  instructions  abhitives  absohite  cannot  be  used  at  all,  but  the  part  c  - 
pie  must  be  added  as  an  attribute  to  the  sub  ect-nomnuUive,  ^^'^eein^^  w    h 
it  in  i,^ender,  number  and   case  :   S^mproniu^,  certu^r  Jactus  ^'j;/^     (^*^,^ 
pronius    havin-  been   informed,  came).     This  construction  of  the  pai 
fici pie  in  (,rde?  t*>  distinguish  it  from  the  attribute-participle  in  reversed 
phrases,  is  called  '  direct  r.\iiTiciri.\L  construction  . 

OBS.  1.   Our  jrrammarian.   forbid   the  use   «^^^^'^^tive   absolutes    even    xvhe^^^ 

ISSS Sri»  is  SSis=i=lHs 

locatis  MdnOvampriwipibu^  -raviler  tos  accQ^at,quodde.tllQtu^Mt»  .  Ca,s.  U.  o.  i,  lo. 


1  About  the  double  iuterrogatives  see  §421,  R  73.  Translate  by  finite  and  co^^^^^^^ 
terro-ative  clause^  without  Mibonliuaiiuir  coujuuciions.     The  '"^^.^.^;^^^'^^;; '  " /'[^.i^^^^ 
S  .r.ls.  must  l>e  iu'dieatecl  by  i"tn)an.in,Mlu.  attnbute  •  o   the  suru  o  ^^^^ 
to  jHl'wU-  •'  ex-^tiiujui.  to  be  cxiingui^Ued.  to  depart  1  le-  »  by    he  "'»»"  J^^'""'  ". 
V  to  lio  prostrate.- »sl>ield.-  •  rej.,re,  to  »>ri"S  -  '  ./^'^'"^^  ^'"  .?• " ,' n    J'     iff^d 
-"tlmrhii-i"iuhi.lile-time.-  "  «should  have  Hounshed—  i-tofoUou.-^    IclL 

dedtiiute. 

*  In  the  earlier  time,  populus  was  not  the  whole  Pfop]«;.;?3;fi  «"J^  '^.^J^f/^.'^^r/er- 
t  TUe  omission  of  co-ordiuaiiu-  conjuuetions  i..  such  I'f  1'«^  l''»^  ,,'X  „eco^^^    is  cun- 

ally  indicates  that  one  of  the  two  coublructxous  CeUher  the  Ur^t  or  the  sctoudj  w  cun 

ceived  as  prior  in  time  to  the  other. 


I 


—  6.  Nemocrit  qui  credat. /«  invito^  provinciam  tibi  es?e  decrStam.  Cic.  Phil,  tl,  10. 

—  t)  Ju"urrha  fr<itre  ineo  inferferto,  rej^num  ej"s  sceleris  sui  praedain  fecit,  ball. 
j,i„  ul-  7  Me  Ub'^ntf'^  eiipics  mild  errOrein.  Cic.  Att.  10,4.—  8.  (^xk^^ar obsidibm  im- 
prritix'cen'uw.  ho<  .Eduis  c  ii^todi'.'ndo^  indit.  Cics  H.  G.  6.  4.—  9.  Cx<&r  prinajnbm 
Trevirorum  ad  se  concocatU  has  sinj,'illatini  {singly)  Ciii^'ctori;,n  conciliavit.  Cies. 
B.  G.  5,  4. 

Ofj«*  2,  But  more  usuallv.  cspeciallv  in  the  Latinity  of  the  silver  aj?e.  direct  parti- 
cipial con>tni(ti(>ns  :jre  used  in  place  of  ablativt-s  absolute  to  which  pronominal  ob- 
jects or  attributes  of  the  principal  sentence  reler.  In  order  to  chanire' into  this  cou- 
t;f ruction,  we  strike  out  the  pronoun  in  the  principal  sentence  replacing;  it  by  the 
noun  which  is  in  the  form  of  the  subject-ablative,  and  to  which  the  jrrammatical 
form  of  the  dropped  pronoun  is  jTJven.  With  this  noun,  the  predicate-ablative  is  made 
to  Mjrree,  Hence  sentence  No.  4  would  be  thus  transformed:  Ccemr  crmroc'ifos  yEduo- 
nim  principf^it  fjrorifer  acru<at.  In  sentences  in  which  the  subject-ablative  is  itself  a 
pnmouu.  this  pronoun  must  be  substituted  for  that  of  the  principal  sentence.  Tims  the 
sentence  No.  ti  would  be  chani,'ed  in  the  foUowint,'  manner  :   Caio  cujus  vivi  lingua  vigu- 

€t'if. 

I jitin  sentences  construed  according:  to  this  form  must  generally  be  rendered  into 
En-di-h  as  if  a  conHrucfvtn  of  ahlati>'es  ahmluU  were  employed,  as  :  (^onanfix  (eos)  dicere 
proiiibuit  .\riovisfus.  Cics.  B.  G.  1,  17,  ichen  th'^y  were  frvi/ig  to  «peak,  Ariovistus  pro- 
Iiibited  them  Ois  if  the  construction  were  '  conantibus  eis  dicere  Ariovistus  prohihuit  eos') 

DlUECT  PAKTICirrAL   CONSTRUCTIONS   IN   PLACE   OP  ABLATIVES   ABSOLrTE. —  1.    NcmO 

dulntilvit  quid  interciroio^  ab  Thessaliacxerd/'/i  patiendum  fuerit.  Li  v.  44,  7.—  2.  Varan- 
/jVy^/^jaui  oppuuMiAresuperveuit^aCreflsapnetor.  Liv.  42.  .56.-3.  OrgeUiriqem  damna- 
tum^  pcena  >etiui  oporteb-it  ut  iirni  cremarGtur.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  1.  4.-4.  H(Xsitantibiis^  in 
rc><ponso7  (It  curi:l«'xcederent«  dictum  (est).  Liv.  42.  10,—  5.  Progrcftsis^  quatuor  millia 
pa«<uum  nihil  optabilius»o  eratquamredfrc.  Liv.  44,  5.-6.  Ex  Corsica m^ac^a  Cicergjus 
in  Sardiniam  traii>mlsit»i.  Liv.  42.  7.-7.  Ludos  gpectanti^"^  (Alexandro)  nuntms  hetus 
aflertur  Persas  a  suis  esse  superStosis.  Cm-t.  3,  7,  4.— 8.  Haec  dice n tis  (CIW.)  latus»* 
hasiiTtransft\it>5  Alexander.  Curt.  8, 1.  57.-9.  Alexander  descendit  in  flamen,  vixq^ue 
i/if/re.-isi^^  <ubito  horrOre'"  artus  ri<:erei8  coeperunt.  Curt.  3.  5.  3.—  10.  Mendaci^^  hommi 
neverumciuidcm  dicHiti  credere  soICmuus.  Cic.  Div.  2, 14(;.— 11.  CoMandro  defnncto'^^ 
Philippus  tllius  succCdit.  Just.  15,  4,—  12.  Tnlia  agentem'^^  atque  m£ditante,n  (Ca^sa- 
rem)  mor<pra^ev0nii2a.  Suet.  Ca?8.  44.— 13.  Hannibal  Gracchmn  in  ms\dieL'^  in  dm  fum^^ 
pustnlit^*.  Nej).  2:^,  .5.-14.  Caesar  imperSvil  ut  Ilelvetii  reducerentui-as ;  reductos  in 
hostium  luimero  Inibuit-*.  Cues.  B.  G.  1,  28. 

Rem.  319.  Gramm.\tical  form  of  the  subject-ablative.  Any  word 
that  may  be  nsed  as  subject-nominative  (nouns,  pronouns,  absolute  or 
disjunct  adjectives)  mav  be  used  as  subject-ablative.  Even  indeclinable 
nouns  and  form-adjectives  occur  as  subject-ablatives,  as  i?nlle  occlsis,  cen- 
tum fere  capiis  (Liv.  43,  23).  But  neither  subject-intinitives,  nor  subject- 
clauses  can  be  used  as  subject-ablatives,  except  some  kinds  of  clauses 
which  may  perform  the  functions  of  a  subject-ablative  with  impersonal 
passives  as  predicate-ablatives  (see  §  530,  R.  234).  Personal  pronouns, 
which  are  often  understood  as  subject-nominatives,  cannot  be  dropped  as 
subject-ablatives.  Tiius  dlco,  I  say,  must  take  the  form  nie  dlc^nte  (not 
dicentc  alone)  if  it  assumes  the  form  of  ablatives  absolute. 

Exceptions  Nonns  of  general  import,  such  as  may  be  supplied  with  absolute  adjec- 
tives («i  3.>3),  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  ami  absolute  demonstratives,  are  some- 
times understood  as  subject-ablatives,  especially  when  they  are  determined  by  a  rela- 
tive CLAUSE  which  has  tiien  the  force  of  an  absolute  adjective,  as  mims  qui  vegan 
ce.i  t  to  rem  facer  ent,  after  persons  had  been  sent  who  were  to  notify  the  king-     Cogmtts 

»  a'ain-^t  thy  will  —  2  with  mv  reuly  permission.—  ^  When  they  would  have  been  cut 
off.— ■»  siii}trven-ire  alicui,  \o  surprise  som.-body.-  »  when  condemned.—  *  ^vhen  they 
he-itated  ....  they  were  told.—  '  re,yx)ns>/m,  answer.—  ^  see  §  440,  Kem.  4o,  6  note  1. 

—  9  progredK  to  advanc<'.—  i"  desirable.—  ^  crossed  his  army.—  ^'^  to  witness,  to  be  a 
spectator  at.—  »3  to  defeat  —  "  lafu.<  G.  ens.  side  —  »6  tran-^ngere,  to  pierce.—  1«  w  hen  the 
eovernin-' word^of  the  participles  are  pnmouns  they  are  frequently  dropped  ni  tb is  con- 
ItructiimTand  must  be  supplied  in  the  translation.—  i^  a  chill-  »8  rig^re,  to  be  para- 
Ivzed  —  »»  mendacious.—  20  drfungi.  to  die.—  21  to  a-itale.—  ^^  to  overtake.—  "  to  l€Ad. 

—  "  to  crush.—  2»  to  take  back.—  2«  treated  them  as. 


REVERSED   PIIR.VSES. 


quoi  framarfa  erant  (inst.  of  cognitU  eU  rebus),  after  those  thinjrs  had  been  ascertained 
which  liad  been  Iransacti'd  (alter  a^'certainiiij;  what  had  been  transacU'd). 

1.  Uivc  paranfibi/x  hlj^^,  ilocem.  roL'ii  IrMnbi"'' intrilmnt  urbom  per  Jliivinm.  Liv.  44,  12, 
—  2.  Compliiribu!*  his  (populis)  propliiss  pul4s*.  Cjesar  in  finis»  V(»contiOnim  pervCnit. 
Cjes.  H.  G.  1.  10. —  '.].  Caralitjlni".  ?imnl^  ad  ac  Valcrinm  initti  audir'riiiit,  iiondum  pro- 
fecto^  ex  Italiil,  suS  sponti-»  ex  opi)i(l<i  Cott.tm  ejiciiiiit.  Cie?.  li.  C.  1,  .'M).—  4.  Tertio 
die  cum  pervenisset  ad  Citinm  montem.  vix  fran^gre-sins^^  propter  altitudinem  nivi?, 
locum  castris»»  iiivCnit.  Liv,  -Xi,  il.—  5.  Adeo'^  sccrCto  re<ris  curafio'^  fuit,  arimiffen- 
tifiu.t^*  neminem,  ut  fama  mortuum  (eiim  esse)  perferret»*,  lb.  4'2.  !(».—  H.  Komftnus 
imperiltor,  Po'V)illi()  relicto  in  ciistodiil'*  ]\vj:\^'' ,  jm^mvisis^'^  qui  repurcilrcnt"  iter,  ipse 
cuii»  leirionibus  airmen-"  ducit.  II).  44.  4. —  7.  Leu'Sti  senatiim  accenderunt'»,  reUltia 
ordine^^  quae  vidissetit.  11).  42.  25.  —  8.  Marcus  et  Acilius  peractis  quie  agenda  in  Gne- 
cijl  erant,  principio"'  hieniis  Roinam  rediCrunt.  lb.  42,  41. —  9.  Csvsar,  deposilis''*  qui 
erant  ex  viiineribus  a?gri,  per  EpTrum  iter  facere^*  coepit.  Cie?.  B.  C.  3,  78. 

Rem.  220.  Adjuncts  of  the  subject-ablative  and  predicate-abla- 
tive. Both  members  of  the  abhitives  absohite  may  take  ailjuncts,  either 
attributes  or  objects,  the  same  as  tiie  members  of  aii  ordinary  pre- 
dicative i>lirase.  The  attril)utes  of  tiie  subject,  if  they  are  adjectives  or 
appositions,  must  'be  placed  in  the  ablative  (but  see  C)bs.  1).  The  predi- 
cate ablative  may  be  construed  with  completing  objects,  adverbial  obje(;ts, 
object-intinitives,  and  with  clauses,  finite,  partici[)ial,  or  intinitive.  The 
completini^  and  accessory  predicates  which  may  be  connected  with  the 
predicate-ablative  must  be  i)laced  in  the  ablative,  agreeini;  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  subject,  as  StaVj,  eddern  manenk',  the  condition  (state) 
remaining  the  same.  Marcena  consule  credto,  Murnena  having  been  elected 
consul.  Eumem  pacaiiOre  invefito,  after  Eumenes  had  been  found  more 
peaceable.  Liv.  37,  45. 

Obs.  1.  When  QuUqfM  or  plenqne.  with  the  force  of  a  partitive  apposition  (see  §  37'), 
R.  36)  is  coml)ined  attrilnitively  with  the  «ubject-ablative,  these  words  take  the  form  of 
the  NOMINATIVE,  not  that  of  the  ablative  (see  K,  213,  Obs.  2).  The  same  is  the  case  if  the 
predicate-ablative  has  a  retle.vive  ol)ject  which  is  emphasized  by  t/>v,  as  : 

Exercitus  Ilerculis,  amisso  duce,  ac  muUU  sibi  quist/u^  imperiuin  }k>feniibus,  brcvi 
dilabitur,  the  army  of  Hercules,  after  the  1o!*h  of  the  leader,  and  since  jnany  claimed 
the  command,  each  for  himself,  was  soon  dissolved.  Sail.  Jui;.  18,  3.— (^iii  acie  refuse- 
rant  milites,  inisf<vi  jt/trlqae  armU.  decastrOrum  defen-iOne  nou  cojj^itiibaut,  the  sdldk-rs 
who  had  fled  troin  battle,  the  mo^c  of  them  kaiing  behind  their  arms,  did  not  think  of 
a  defence  of  the  camp,  Cajs.  B.  C.  3,  95,— Q.  Serapronius,  causd  ipxepro  se  dicta,  quin- 
decim  niillibus  leria  damiuTtur.  Q,.  Sempronius,  after  haviui^  himself  defended  his 
canst' (having  been  his  own  defender),  is  condemned  to  fifteen  thousand  ases.  Liv.  4,  44. 
— J)is  aiictoribus  in  spem  suani  qui.'ique  acceptis;  After  each  had  accepted  the  author- 
ity of  the  gods  for  his  liope.  Liv.  21,45. 

Obs.  2.  The  adjuncts  of  predicate-ablatives  are  often  very  complicated.  Combina- 
tion» of  this  kind  often  btiioni;  to  the  most  perfect  specimens  of  Latin  style  (especially 
C«sar  l)ein<,'  unsurpassed  in  the  elepint  and  masterly  use  of  this  construction),  while  they 
are  sometimes  so  repui^nant  to  the  Euirlish  idiom  that  a  literal  renderin<j  would  make  tlie 
period  almost  unintellii,Mble.  In  such  instances  tlie  Latin  sentence  must  be  rei!;iilarly 
recast,  by  separating  the  ablatives  absolute  and  all  their  adjuncts  from  the  principal  part 
of  the' sentence,  and  by  rendering  the  whole  complex  of  the  ablatives  absohite  as  an 
independent  sentence.    We  add  an  example  of  this  kind  : 

Ilelvetii,  (c)  sen  quod  tiniOre  perterritos  Rom!lno«  discedere  a  se  existimSrent,  («)  po 
magis  quod  pridie  (/)  t<npriorib>i'<  b^if  ocfupafix  pneliiim  non  commisissent,  «/>  sive 
eo  quou  re  frumentaria  intercifldi  posse  confiderent,  (b)  commufdb»  cemsilio  atque  itinere 
convenv,  (a)  nostros  a  novissimo  agmme  insequi  ac  lacessere  cteperunt.  Cues.  B.  G.  1, 23. 

*  Suitply  'person-*'. —  '  small  boats. —  '  abL  of  means  :  In  several  battles. —  *  peUere, 
to  roiii. —  ^ ^fi/ieg  (plur.),  territorv.—  *  inhal)itants  of  t'aralis,  the  modern  Vagliari.—  ''  as 
soon  as.—  »  supply  eo,\.  e.,  Valeno  —  "  of  their  own  accoril.—  i"  Irani^gredi.  to  cross; 
supply  eU.  i.  e.,  the  soldiers. —  ^^  for  a  camp;  i.  e..  facie  iiuis. —  *"^  so.—  »3  the  cure.— 
'■*  supply  *  his  friends',  '  tliose  about  him\ —  ^*  perftrre,  to  report, —  *•  for  the  guarding. 
—  i~  jugf/m.  mouiitain-cham.—  >*  to  send  aheaci. —  i*  to  clear. —  20  jjjp  army.—  ^»  acceii- 
dere,  to  intlaine.—  ^^  in  succession. —  ^s  bey;inuing. —  -*  to  leave  behind.—  *•  to  march. 


ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE. 


177 


On  the  principal  pentcncc  {a)  are  fir«t  dependent  the  ablatives  absolute  (h)  commutato 
.  conrerxo  (after  having  modin«'d  their  plan  and  changed  the  direction  of  their  march). 
The  di-=iunctive  co-ordinate  clauses  (c)  and  (d)  feu  qmd  timbre  perterritos  .  .  .  exisfnna- 
rent  and  nre  eo  quod  .  .  .  confiderent.  are  causal  clauses  dept-ndenr  on  the  abiativt-s 
absolute  (havin<'clianged  the  plan  either  because  they  believed  that  the  Romans  were 
turnincT  their  march  from  fe:ir,  or  because  thev  trusted  that  they,  the  Romans,  mi-ht  be  cut 
off  frjTn  their  supplier'».  The  clause  (e)  eo  magi«  q'lod  .  .  .  commi<isisent ,  is  a  causal 
clan-e  subordinate  to  the  first  of  the  co-ordinate  clauses  ic)  (the  more  because  they  had 
not  accented  a  battk-).  The  ablatives  absolute  {f )  mp^ri/)ribus  loc>s  ocoipatis  (althon-^h 
thev  had  occupied  commanding  positions),  is  a  concessive  clause,  dependj-nt  on  the 
second  co-ordinate  clause  (</).— This  period  literally  rendered  would  make  a  harsh 
EiK'li-h  construction.  Evidently  the  ablatives  absolute  (6)  must  be  separated  from  the 
re^fof  the  sentence,  and  be  made  independent  of  it,  because  several  clauses  partly  sub- 
ordinate (me  to  the  other,  are  dependent  on  it,  and  these  in  a  literal  translation,  might 
be  taken  for  dependencies  of  the  prineipal  predicate.  '  The  Helvetians,  either  because 
they  supposed  the  Romans  were  retreating  from  fear,  especially  since  on  the  previous 
dav  althon«^h  in  possession  of  commandin-z  positions,  they  had  declined  battle^  or 
Ix-caii-^e  they  were  confident  that  they  would  cut  them  ofTfrom  their  supphes,  modified 
their  plans,  and  chang.d  the  directi(m  of  their  march.  Soon  they  began  to  press  on  our 
troops,  and  to  engage  them  in  their  rear. 

Rem.  221.  Ablatives  absolute  of  all  classes  are  rendered  in  one  of  the 
following  three  ways  :  1)  by  the  English  participles  absolute;  2)  by  finite 
clauses  with  a  conjunction  ;  3)  by  prepositional  expressioiis  with  a  verbal 
noun,  either  the  participial  in  ing  or  an  ordinary  substantive. 

^^  Thus  the  phrase  naribu,<;  atnisn-t  may  he  respectively  rendered  1)  bavinf?  lost 
the  ships  ;  the  ship^  having  been  lost  ;  2)  after  (when,  since,  because,  if  althougli)  the 
ships  had  been  lost ;  3)  Jifter  (,l)y,  on  account  of,  considering)  the  loss  of  the  ships. 

§  531.  In  ablatives  absolute  of  the  first  class  (with  perfect 
passive  participles,  K.  21G),  the  Latin  p.vssive  construction 
is  generally  changed  into  an  English  active  one  if  the  passive 
agent  (logical  subject  with  '  bj/)  of  the  participle  denotes  the 
same  person  or  thing  as  the  grammatical  subject  of  the  princi- 

])redicate. 

Rem.  222.  The  passive  aijent  of  the  predicate-ablative,  if  it  denotes  the 
same  tliinj;  or  person  as  the  i^ranimntical  subject  of  the  principal  predicate, 
is  alwavs  UNDERSTOOD  in  Latin,  beini];  never  indicated  by  pronouns  or 
form-adjectives  referrinu:  to  tlie  subject  (such  as  ab  eo,  ab  his  etc.).  In 
this  instance  the  Emj^lish  idiom  requires  a  change  of  the  Latiii  passive 
into  an  active  construction,  as  :  Divico  lioc  reffponso  dato  discessit,  Divico 
left  after  he  had  fjiven  (or  havinrj  rjiven)  this  answer,  or  Having  given  this 
answer,  Divico  left  (literallv  :  after  tliis  answer  had  been  given  \hy  him\). 
Cffis.  B.  G.  1, 14.  This  forin,  in  historical  style,  is  the  most  usual  one  m 
which  ablatives  absolute  occur. 

Ob<»  If  English  active  participial  constructions  (or  their  equivalent  clauses)  \yhose  sub- 
ject is  the  same  as  that  of  the  principal  predicate,  must  be  rendered  by  Latin  perfect 
participles  (R.  216.  Obs.  1),  we  must  distinguish  whether  tlie  English  participles  have 
transitive  obiects  (in  the  Latik  sense),  or  not.  a       a  \. 

1.  Ifth<'  Eiitrlish  participle  is  withoit  a  transitive  object.it  cannot  be  renderert  ny 
ablatives  absolute,  the  attempts  of  some  ancient  Latin  writers  to  introdnce  for  this  pur- 
pose a  coi'.struction  with  impersonal  ablatives  absolute  havinir  proved  abortive,  (^«"e  K. 
234)  We  must  in  this  instance  either  use  a  direct  participial  construction  (if. /1«, 
Obs.  2)  if  a  deponent  verb  is  available,  or  else  employ  a  clause  in  hen  of  a  participial 
construction,  as:  Catiline,  having  returned  to  the  city,  assembled  his  followers, 
CatilTna,  ad  urbem  regresms  (from  the  deponent  r^^rerfi)  suos  convocavit._  11  ere  we 
can  neither  say ra/iH/Ki  regresso  (which  would  be  against  R.  218),  nor  CatiTina.  ad  vrbem 
redito,  nor  CatiHna  ad  urbem  reditus  (both  of  which  expressions  would  contain  personal 


pal 


178 


^ 


BEYERSED   rHRASES. 


passives  formod  of  noutcr  verbs).    But  we  may  say  CafiTina  posfquam  ad  wbem  redtlt^ 
which  lonn  nvid  hti  used  if  there  i;*  no  deponent  verh  available.  .  •   .  i 

2.  If  tiK'  participle  liasi  a  transitive  ohjeet  (the  subjects  l)eins  the  f»ame).  a  participial 
constructiou  may  be  einploved  in  two  way?»:  (a)  when  a  deponent  verbis  availahle,  we  iise 
a  DiHECT  participial  construction  (tlie  Hanie  as  in  the  case  No.  1>,  but  not  an  ablative 
al)-olute  as:  Cm^mi  haring  proinmd  he/p.  pent  an:  knvoy  to  Auiovistus,  Ciesar  aii- 
xiliuuj  ml'irifus  (from  the  deponeuf.  fXillMri)  h-L^Jltum  ad  Ariovistuin  misit  (no\  auxHto 
jMlicifo  which  would  irive  to  the  deponent  participle  a  pa-sive  meaninjr).  {h)  \V  hen  no 
dep-nent  verh  is  available,  we  must  diauirc  the  construction  of  the  participial  clause 
/>rt.v.vuWy  byturninu'the  transitive  object  into  a  sul>jt'Ct.  the  active  subject  becoming 
the  i)assive  a<'enr.  Thus,  by  usin^'  th«^  verh  proinittere  instead  of  pollictn  in  the  pro- 
posed sentence,  we  chan«;e  its  constru(;tion  into  'C-esar,  help  having  been  prmnued  by 
hilt),  SENT  an  ambassador'.  Leavini:  out  the  passive  aijent  of)  to  (hy  him)  according  to 
K  'ii^  we  translate:  C\mir  a>/xiiu)  promisi-o  legd/u?n  niMt.  We  may.  indei-d,  even  here 
employ  a  clause  with  jwxtquavi,  w  liich  form  may  often  he  preferable  from  rhetorical 
reasons  Such  a  reason  inav  be  found  in  a  lojrical  impropriety  to  make  the  transitive 
object  a  passive  suhject.  thus  the  followini:  sentence  'The  consii,,  after  (upon>/'f'*- 
Ctinngtheenetny.iiinwMKX^  a  uktkkat' may  be  expressed  either:  Consul.  coi>spicatu8 
hostis,  rece|)tui  caneiv  jussii  (usin^'  the  deponent  cox.'^picari).  or.  Consul,  jwstquam  hos- 
as  connpexH,  receptui  etc.  lint  it  would  be  less  elegMiit  to  use  ablatives  absolute  (i»y 
means  of  the  transitive  active  ccmt^pictre):  Consul  h<i,dibiis  cotifpedl^.  ii\{\\i<\y;[,\\  the  con- 
struction would  he  perfectly  correct  from  a  merely  grammatical  point  of  view. 

1.  Csesar,  necejimnu  rehnx  iwperdtl^,  ad  leuiiinem  decimam  devCnit».  C;rs  B.  d.  2.  21. 

—  2.  Ilix  rebus  celeriter  adminidra/ls'^  ipse  ad  exercitnm  contendit^.  Tb.  3,  f—f-  ^,«^^'- 

plia-ibus  expxujtHVis  oppidis  Ctesar  statuit  exspectandam  class^em.  1  h.  :|,  ^4  —  4.  l;ania 

percrehuerat<Ciesarem  fu-jere.  puMu;  omnibu.s^  copii<  amis^si.'i.  lb.  B.C.  .i.  t.l— b.  tii*'-:"' 

VolusGno  mandat  ut.  e.rj>lo/df}s^  M/inib'/s  j-tbi/s.  ai\  se  quam  priinum  r«''v*'rtiHnr    1|>.  U. 

G.  4,  21.—  6.  His  Vcesar^  cogni(i9  mllites  air<,'ereinT  comportiire»  juhet.  11).  B.  C.  6,  bz. 

Bern.  223.  If  the  passive  aireiit  of  the  jiredicate-ablative  is  not  the  same 

with  the  iri-aininatical  suhji-ct  of  the  prineipal  sentence,  the  Latin  passive 

construction  is  retained  in  Eiiiilisli.      Even  in  this  instance  the  passive 

agent  is  i^enerally  understood  in  L:itin.     If,  tor  the  sake  of  clearness,  it  is 

required  "to  menlion  tlie  doer  of  the  action,  the  passive  agent  takes  its 

usual  form  with  ah  and  the  ablative. 

Legntmiibus  di?nis,Kis  (i.  e..  a  senHtiO  Harpalus  in  Macedonian!  rcLTepsas  cPt, //^^ (7m- 
bassadors  haring  been  dismissed,  Harpalus  returned  to  Macedonia.  Liv.  4v  1;>.  J  nv^ 
ocoipdtis  aniinis  ab  Enmeue  rege.  omnis  delensio  lejiatorum  respucbalur.  (he  vnnas 
being  (havmu'  hccn)  preoccupied  by  king  Euments,  all  defence  of  the  envoys  was  re- 
jected. Liv.  42,  14. 

1.  Omtd  Gal/id  pacd/a\  abeis  nationihusqua'  trans  Rhennm  incolCbanti»  Icjrnti  ad  Cae- 
parem  missi  sunt.  C;es.  H.  G.  2,  3.-).—  2  CrefenAb'is^^  cum  h<K-  respc.nso  dimmns,  (  Imlci- 
dcnsfsi-'  vocSti  <iinr  Liv.  4:$.  7.-3.  Veji^^^  cap'i^t  sex  trihilnosmilitum  consulnn  potestfltei* 
insequen-^"  annus  hahuit.  Liv.  .5.  24.-4.  Signo  dafo  undicin.»"  >iniul  clamor  in<j;ens  oritur. 
Sail.  Ju".  57,  3.-5.  JIac  oratione^'^  habUiV  mirum  in  niodum  conver-u»»  sunt  omnium 
meiites^Cie-  B  G.  1,  41.—  6.  InterftCto  Indnlioiinlro,  ad  ejus  propiiKiuos  a  ireviris 
imperium  deferturao.  Ca's.  B.  G.  C.  2.—  7.  line  oraiime  ab  J)tritia<o  Af//>?/(7  omnes  aiix- 
iliiuna  Ca'sar.-  petere  cu-perunt.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  1.32.-8.  Confinnata  re  ab  exploratuiibuti^^ 
omiieiu  equitatutn  (Ciesar)  priemlsii--.  H).  2,  11. 

Ob**  It  is  unusual  to  refer  1)V  pronouns  or  demonstratives  dependent  on  the  predicate- 
ablative  to  the  ■•ranimatical  sul>iector  other  members  of  the  principal  sentence.  Such 
pronouns  or  d.-monstrativesare  re^'ulurly  left  out,  and  must  be  supplied  according  to  the 
requirv'inents  of  the  text. 

1    Hannibal  i^pe  potiundie  Nolw  ademptd  (i.  e.,  ei)  Acenas  recessit.  J^iv.  23'  IJ" — 

2.  Lcjjilii,  ed  re  ptnnistid  (L  e.,  eis)  diem  concilio  c(mstituC'runt.  Cxn.  B.  G.  1,  .iU.— 

»  Deveinre  ad,  to  go  to  mvct.—  ^  adminidrdre  aliquid.  to  attend  to  somethiiifr.—  '  td 
hasten  —  ■•  percrebexcere.  to  become  frequent,  to  he  multiplied,  to  bt;  spread  about.— 
»  to  examine  The  passive  air<  nt  is  identical  with  the  subject  of  levertatur.  being  con- 
tained in  the  verb —«  Th.-  subject  of  the  i)rincipal  predicate  is  sometimes  placed  be- 
tween the  two  terms  of  the  ablative  absolute,  if  it  is  identical  with  the  passive  agent 
understood  -  "•  material  for  the  rampart.— «  to  carry.—  »  pardre,  to  reduce  (in.  '  to  mako 
Scefun  -  1«  to  live.-  »'  the  Cretans.-  »-'  those  of  Chalcis.-  >3  §  38,  3.--  >*  military 
tribunes  with  cmsular  power.-  »»  next.-  »»  everywhere.-  »7  address.- «8  to  deliver. 
-l^wuvertere,  to  change.-  '^o  to  confer,  §  427,  K.  11.-  "  Bcout.-  "  to  send  m  advance. 


ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 


179 


•Hi- 


3.  Annxagoram  ferunt.  annunciata  (i.  «..  ei)  morte  fllil  dixisse :  SciSbam  me  genuissc 
mortalein.  Cic.  Tusc.  3.  30. 

^  53*2.  The  clauses  by  which  ablatives  absolute  with  per- 
fect painiciples  may  be  Venderecl,  or  by  which  English  par- 
ticipial constructions,  employed  in  rendering  the  ablatives 
absolute,  may  be  replaced,  are  1)  temporal,  2)  causal,  3)  con- 
ditional, 4)  CONCESSIVE. 

nem  ^n  The  TEMPOBAT-  cl.m'ses,  corresponding  to  such  ablatives 
ntisolnie^lake  hc>  conjunctions  after  or  when  (properly  with  a  pluperfect). 
T^Uli^class  bd^^^        most  of  the  instances  of  ablative  absolute  construc- 

^'Tf  the  tblatives  absolute  are  the  exponents  of  caus.vl  clauses,  the 
conjtmctions^/;...  or  ^  (with  a  pluperfect,  or  respectively  a  perfect) 

""'"Bonl^!? ^d;.^s  regnari  voipbnnt,  ^^r^^^^^^f^  "^^^^^t^l^^i^.^ 
mans  willed  that  there  shoul.i  be  kn.gs  haMi.g  no    >et  ^M^^'^^f"  (.^^j^,  ^,/^. 

freedom  i^ncetheyhnd  ^l^^jl^^^f!^^!^  ^^^{^-^^^^'^.rnS^^  Flamininus  had 
S^;hfih:pS^irVi;i=nun.^«:ir^  had  negleaed  his  religious  duUes. 

roxDiTiox^L  CLVUSES  take  the  conjunction  if.     They  may  be   hypo- 
Ihet  ca?  chu^e\  o7  co.Uain  ordinarv  conditions,  most  generally   referring 
fuure  c"^m^^  must  hare  happened  heU^re  the  principal   action 

can  Ike  P  ace  In  this  relation  the  perfect  participle  has  the  ioi-ce  of  a 
FrTiKF  PERFECT  while  in  the  hypothetical  signification  the  perfect  par- 
rici^leisemj^^^^^^  the  forJe  of  a  pluperfect  or  imperfect  sub- 

'"TI" ti^'^bicti  niter  se  «^;;^-;  -  ^a^^^J^-^^? ^!^ ^^^  S^^lS 
posse  sperant.  mduc.-d  by  this  address  tluj  P';  rf  '1^  '  ,  ^.  rafter)  (hey  would  have 
fioped  that  t hey  would  be-  aide  -  ^•^'^." JJ j>,^,^^^!^  , "^  l^pyUdtl  woix/^td  factjros 
f^Hzed  nnjal  inner.  Ca-s   B.  <^-  '•  f-':'  if  thev  "h'lll  have  answered  tliat  they  would  do 

k\  (  w  <-d'-.-  Ilu'ii'b/  lliat  ih.y  Iwd  had  difigof.  Cic.  Off.  3,  9. 
li>q.Uvalont  to  CONCESSIVK  clauses,  ablative  absolutes  arc  rendered 
bv  (dihounh   (E\.  8)  or  eten  «/'(E.k.  7). 
^  To     mlli't    latroc  nantur  Jrrfe  proposifd.  .o  many  thousands    Practi^^e  mbbery 
aAoug?^dcath     n    .  placed  before  th^m  (is  in  store  lor  them).  Cic  N.  D.  1,  86. 
In  collection   with  nondum  or  rirdam  f^.tWes  absolute  are  some- 
limes  rendered  by  a  temporal  clause  with    before  ,  as 

Hi^^r^ri^nZn  Lfectd,  before  winter  was  over  (before  the  close  of  winter).  C.  B. 

^"  ''  W  Render  the  following  sentence,  both  by  English  absolute  participles,  and 
by  ti^tc.  da  ses  with  the  conjunctions  required  by  the  sense, 
ny  nunc  tiuuM-f"  >  ♦-...,r,t  r-.inhi.nnem  ?vi  a  scnStu  non  M;j;x?/m/a. 

1.  Ex  decem  captTvis  novem  reverterunt  CiUihainnem.  ?f^  a  s^u^i  ;^^..^  ^^^^/.^    ^  .^^ 


[.; 


in.-  •  to  miercept.-  ^  cogmscere,  to  learn.-  «  anguibh.-     tormeni.  iuv       , 


»  written 
re- 


move. 


/ 


180 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


snppliciOrum»  metu?  Cic.  Lei;.  1,  14.—  fi.  ConcesKO  peccato'^,  diflicile  est.  ab  co  qnl 
pt'ccaii  viiidex'  esse  debet,  nt  isjnoscat  impel  rare.  Cic.  Inv.  2,  34.—  7.  Navis  motiim 
et  cursiiiu   retinet   suyin,   intenni<so*    impetn^    pnlmque*  remnriim'.  Cic.  Or.    1,  3:i. 

—  8.  Koinaiii,  sKperioribus  locis  occiipatiii,  pnelium  nou  coininisCrimt.  Cx^.  U.  G.  1.2;J. 

Rem.  225.  Instead  of  a  clause  prepositional  expressions  with  particii)ials 
in  iiig  or  oilier  verbal  nouns  are  frequently  employed.  Tiie  prepositions 
mo.-;t  i^cnerally  used  in  rendcrinu:  ablatives  absolute  with  perfect  partici- 
l)les  are  after  \\\\^on),  by,  with,  irithout  (in  connection  with  a  negative,  see 
K.  2oG,  oiiS.),/c//'  (on  account  of),  and  under,  as  : 

PersiitLsit  eis  ut  oppidis  ricisque  exustis  iin;l  proficiscerentur,  he  pers»uadcd  them  to  join 
in  the  e.xpt'ditioii  q//<-/' &w/7a/<f/ (huviiiLT  burned»  their  towns  and  hamlets.  (\es.  R.  G. 
1.  5.— Nihil  amiitiliir  dato  spatio.  notiiiiii;  is  lo-t  by  rjiring  lime.  Liv.  37.  '.^^.—Fide  pu- 
blicCi  interixtiiUii,  upon  pledj^iii:;  tlie  public  faith.  Sail.  ,i\\.:.—LwninihitK  arnl<in.^.  after  the 
loss  of  hie»  eyet*.— Thel)ani  nonnihii  et  dam/ulfis  pfindjnOus  et  7'estitiVu  exs}ilibii.<  •t^wc- 
censC'l)aiu,  the  Thebiins  were  somewhat  aiiirry  for  (on  account  of  )  the  condemnation 
of  their  leaders  and  tlie  reinstatement  of  tlie  exiles.  Liv.  42,  4Vt.  — I/is  excepfl":  with  the 
exception  of  these.  Cic.  Otf.  2.  3.— A'o/i  exptctdto  mll^  ortu  class»*  in  Saniuin  tra- 
jecGrunt,  ivithouf  expecting  snnrU^,  they  crossed  over  to  Samc.s.  Liv.  37,  Vi.—Niillam 
partem  noctis  itinere  oini6f<o,  ivithout  interruptinfj  thtir  uiarch  durinj;  any  time  of  tlie 
nii,'ht.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  :20. 

Obs.  Often  the  j)redicate-ablative  itt^elf  ha.'*  tlic  force  of  a  preposition,  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  participles  uddnctnx,  indiiclufi,  pernwtu,-i  in  the  direct  participial  construc- 
tion (R.  1)5).  Thurt  a  great  number  of  idiounitic  phrases  are  formed,  as  dilif/enfiii  ad- 
hibild  wiih  dilij^ence  or  care  (literally  ^having  tinidoyed  diliffenC''').  inttrpo^-^Ud  mora, 
after  some  delay  (literally  '  tuirin'j  placed  a  dtlay  f/tf/ceen')  ;  nul/J  i/d'  ri)a<U('i  tnord.  with- 
out any  delay,  Ca>s.  l\.  C.  3.  75  ;  re  bene  geMCi.  after  a  successful  campaiu'ii  (literally  '  hac- 
ing  carried o~d  the  thing  mcce^^^fully")  Cic.  Plane.  25,  <;i  :  clamore  ^uUdtu.  with  shontn, 
Ca^s.  l'>.  (t.  b,  8  ;  clade  accep/a,  by  a  defeat :  jyecunid  accepfd,  for  a  consideration,  Cic.  Oft*. 
3.  22.  Her»!  belonL's  Ca'sar's  "favorite  »'xpression  '  inter/nisso  {itdt/Jecfo)  Itntpore  or 
^yf>a/io',  after  some  time  (later).  Other  idiomatic  expressions  in  the  form  of  ablatives 
ab5»)lute  with  perfect  participles  have  tlu-ir  oriixin  either  in  technical  usaij»'.  or  in  the 
peculiar  brevity  and  conciseness  by  which  this  form  invited  the  people  tocor.di-nse  ideas* 
tlin)ui,'h  it,  for  which  we  must  sul)stitute  different  lorms.  To  the  former  belonjrs  ll»e 
)hrase  .signii  aMdtis  pngndre,  Xo  fii;ht  a  pitched  battle  (for  inst.  Liv.  4.'),  1),  signa  conferre 
)einii;  used  of  the  i^'eiieral  attack,  in  which  the  standauos  ()iigna\  of  lioth  armies  nu't'«Y>«- 
ferre).  To  the  latter  kind  beloni^  for  in^t.  the  phrases»  causa  cognifd,  after  a  i)revious  ex- 
amination, Ca's.  B.  ii.  1,  l'.>:  eguo  adnnsw  or  citdto,  at  full  «rallop,  lb.  L  22  ;  dei<perdfd 
salute,  out  of  despair,  lb.  0,  5;  addlfd  ov  adjunctd  uliqud  re,  including;  a  certain  thing. 

ZW  The    ablitives   absolute    iu  the  followinjj  sentences  must  be  rendered  by 
prepositional  expressions. 

\.  Pompejn>^,  eqnum  nactus.  defracfi-^^  inoignibn^^  imperatoris'"  decumSna''  porta,  se 
ex  ca'^tris  ejecit'-,   jjrotiniisipie'^  tqiin  citdto  Larissam  contendit.  (  a-s.  B.  C.  3,  '.»3. 

—  2.  Qu;e  est  tanta  atrocit.is'*  hujus  causic  (cast),  (luod  onuiibus  f«)reusibus'^  negotds 
intermi-ms^*  nxnvn  hoc  judicium»'  exerceatur  if*?  Cic.  C:el.  1, 1. —  3.  Victor  Tarentlmisi» 
in  turbaram""  dace  a/ni<so  navem  transtiressus^i  est.  Liv.  2H,  .'^. —  4.  Plus  adipiscCre  re 
explicdfd  i)oni  qtiam  addaftitdtd-'^  mali.  Cic.  Oft".  L  24.--  5.  Pericles  soli.s  obscuratione'-'' 
territos,  redditis^*  ejus  rei  caaHs.  metu  libenlvit.  Qu.  L  t7. —  0.  (Juid  esi^s.  (pmm  pau- 
peres  divitibus  esse  a'qualTs  vellmus,  cur  \\\o^  surntu  ad  sacra^"^  ^/^A/i/'^>  deOriim  aditu 
arceamus'^7  ?  Cic.  Ii»-;;.  2,  10.—  7.  Consul,  prima  luce  cadaceatdre-^  daiis'^^  indatiis  di- 
misso,  frumcntando^"  dies  aliquot  consumpsit.  Liv.  31,  3(). —  8.  Pnrtor  neutrd  impel  rata 
re  in  pn)vinciam  redit.  Liv.  42,  '.).—  9.  Alter  pnttor,  consumpta  a'state^'  reco<j:n»)s- 
cendis3''*agris,  ne  visa  quidem  jn'orinrid sud  Komam  rediit.  lb,— 10.  Legati,  nulla  inpm- 


1: 


»  Punishment.— 3  offence.—  '  aventrer.—  ■•  to  interrupt.— 'force.— «  raovinc^  power» 

—  '  oar.—  **  see  §  482.  K.  tiH.-  *  inngne,  a  badi;c. —  '"  render  i)y  the  adjective  imperato- 
fial.—  I*  the  decuuian  ijate  of  the  camp,  the  main  entrance  placed  at  the  side  farthest  frtim 
the  enemy.—  *-  se  ijicere,  to  rush  out. —  •'  protinus,  forthwith. —  i*  enormity.  Qnx 
tantaisa  peculiar  combinaMon  of  form-adjertives  which  cannot  be  literally  rendered 
(literally  :    What  so  great  cnonnityK  transl.  What  is  there  soenarmous  in  vxi-'.—  ^^  iwWc'v-d. 

—  !•  to  suspend  ;  suspension.—  '"^  trial.—  ^^  to  transact.—  '*  Tarentia».— -"  to  throw  into 
c»)nfusion.  —  -*  Iransgredi,  to  step  over. —  -^  to  doubt. —  '-'  eclipse. — •*  causa/n  reddere, 
to  explain  a  reason. —  ^'  ovid  est  cur,  what  is  the  reason  that.—  '■'•  sumtum  ad  sacra  ad- 
ders, to  tax  relii^ioiis  worship  —  27  iq  keep  from.—  ^"^  a  tierald.—  ^'  to  grant.—  '"  to  f(»rage. 

—  >i  summer.  -  '•^  to  cxamiue. 


ABLATIVES  ABSOLUTE. 


181 


in 


eecu! 
exert 


smtid  refipoti.v)  data,  eo3  pe  Clialcidemi  pequi  jnspCmnt.  Liv.  42,  43.—  11.  Spero  te  diJi- 
gcntid  adidhitd  tirmiOrem  fore.  Cic.  Fam.  10.  11.—  12.  Panajtiuin  nos  correctione^ 
quadani  adhitntd  potissimum  secOii  sumus.  Cic.  Off".  3.  2.—  13.  L.  Philippus  tulit  sen- 
tentiams  ut  civitates  quas  L.  Snlla  necunid  acc^ptd  liberavisset  nirsus  essent  vectiga- 
ies<  Cic.  Oft".  3.  22.—  14.  Amicitia  baud  scio  an  excepid  sapientid  quicquam  melius 
sit  iiomini  a  dis  immortalibus  datum.  Cic.  Am.  6,  20.  -  15.  C  sesar  triduo^  iniermisso 
cum  omnibus  copiis  Helvetios  insequi«J  coepit.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  1,  26. 

Bern.  22H.  When  of  two  connected  sentences  the  one  has  happened  before  the  other, 
the  En-'lish  frequently  ignores  this  fact,  connecting  the  two  sentences  by  a  simple  co-or- 
dination.    The  Latin,  in   this  instance,  rarely  employs  the  form  of  co-ordination,  but 
gives  to  that  predicate  which  is  prior  in  lime  the  form  of  a  perlect  participle.     W  hen 
both  s»'ntence-  have  the  same  transitive  objects,  this  participial  construction  is  a  direct 
one:  else  ablatives  absolute  are  n.sed.  as   '  S^cipio  took  the  city  and  plundeud  it  \ 
^c\p\o  vrbem  captam  di7ipuit.— '^civio  took,  ruv:  city  and  sold  the  inhabitants  as 
slaves'.  Scipi»)  vrbe  captd  civis  sub  corOna  vendidit.    Often  a  co-ordination  isapplied 
,n  addititm  to  the  participial  construction,  as  :  '  Scipio  urbem  cepit  captamque  diripiiit . 
1.  Legati  venerunt  Thes^dOrum  ad  Antioctium,  orantes  ut  remoto exercitu  per  le^atos 
cum   disceptarei".  Liv.  3(),  9.—  2.  CU-sari  in  animo  fuit  {Casar  intmded),  conjuncto 
.^•ercitu  cum  Domitio  per  Illyricums  italiae  subsidio»  proficisci.  Cais.  B.  C.  3,   74.— 
3  Tri^inta  tvranni  plurimorum  civium  bona  publicdta^^  inter  se  divisGrunt.  Tsep.  8,  1.— 
4.  Maiilius  Ga/tumin  c<mspectu  diulrumii  rxercituum t'(¥wm'2,  torque^»  spohavit.  Liv. 
(i,  42.—  5.  Romulus  Caiuinensiuin»*  exercituiu  /w/u/i^i^  fugatque,  /usutn  persequitur. 
Liv.  1.  10. 

§  533.  Ablatives  absolute  with  present  participles  (both 
active  and  deponent)  agree  in  respect  to  voice  with  their  Eng- 
lish equivalents,  being  always  active  in  both  languages.  They 
are  more  rarely  rendered  by  English  absolute  participial  con- 
structions than  by  finite  clauses  and  by  verbal  nouns  with 
prepositions. 

Jiem  227  When  ablatives  absolute  of  this  class  are  rendered  by  English  absolute  par- 
ticipial constructions,  the  partiiiple  is  alwavs  active  and  present.*  ^^  hen  timte  clauses 
are  applii'd  their  predicate  is  eith»'r  in  the  present  or  past  tense  according  t»)  the  tense 
of  the  principal  predicate  (R.  2ir.,  Obs.  1).  The  finite  verb  is  very  frequently  in  the  pro- 
gressive form  in  Eiigllsli. 

Jiem  2:8  The  claises  by  which  ablatives  absolute  with  present  participles  are  ren- 
dered "are  the  same  as  those  with  perfect  i)articii)les,  except  that  the  temporal  clauses 
take  th"  conjuncticms  whUe  or  w/u-n,  which  are  mo.st  frequently  applied  in  this  con- 
struction. Next  to  'while'  and  -when',  the  ccmjunctiou  'since  is  most  frequently 
n-'ed,  a  punlv  conditional  and  concessive  meaniUL'  being  the  rarest.  Sometimes  the 
present  ablatives  absolute  may  be  rendered  by  modal  clauses  with  'so  that  . 

Dumnonge  licente,  nemo  contra  licCri  audet,  while  Dumnorix  is  bidding,  nobody 
dares  to  bid  airainst  him.  Ca-.  B.  G.  1.  \'i.-Ih(JEeunte  verba  )iontiJice  id  votnm  snscep- 
tum  est  that  vow  was  made,  the  pontiff  repeating  first  the  words,  or  •  ichile  the  pontiff 
xS  repeating  the  wor.ls'.  Ux.  n.'^.-Cedentibus  n^^/Zm.  ex  parte  unaqtie  priinores 
cecidCrunt.  neither  party  retreating  (since  neither  party  retreated),  t  le  first  in  rank  fell 
on  each  si»le.  Liv.  42,  l.- Animo  sano  ac  valente.  oratio  quoque  r.ibusta  et  >^>n'«  f  t, 
if  the  mind  is  sound  and  vigorous,  laniruage  also  is  strong  ai-d  manly.  Sen.  Lp.  114.— 
Jvlarius  peromnlstribus  trlbflnus  militum  declaratus  est  i>/m>;9«e  laciem  ejus  tg-z/O- 
r  S  // Marius  was  declared  military  tribune  by  all  tribes,  although  mo^t  j^eojjledid 
S  W  him  by  face.  Sail.  Jug.  m,  4.-In  cmspectu  steteranr,  rfenm^^tfe  a^n.^,  they 


1  Nom    Chalcis.-  ^  modification.-  ^  senteniiam  ferre.  to  make  a  motion  im  a  debate) 

._  <rectigdlem  esse,  to  pay   taxes  »>r  trilmte.-  ^  triduum.  a  space  ol  three  days  -  «  to 

nur^e  -C>   rans^ict,    o  settle  the  p».ints  in  dispute.-  «  Illyria.- »  abstract  datives  as 

2ca-S(;ry  predicate  ; 'transl. :  ^  to  carry  hdp  to  Italy  \-  ;»  t»>  confiscate.-  \\  t/j^euvo 

nrinies  i  i"'  aedere,  to  kill.-  ^^  torque.^,  a  neck-chain.-  i<  the  CiEumenses.-  i»  to  rout. 

♦  Sometimes,  however,  it  is  more  idiomatic,  to  change  even  these  constructions  pas- 
Pivelv  Kn.dish  ;  and.  vice  versa.  Ent^lish  present  passive  participles  must  be  change.l 
imoLa!in  actives  in  order  to  be  rendered  by  this  form  of  ablatives  absolute.  But  the 
instances  where  this  happens  cannot  be  reduced  to  a  rule. 


182 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


stood  in  Pight  (of  each  other),  so  that  the  stream  separated  them  (the  etream  eepara- 
^'''-^^-^^pYilil^lauofoth  hy  finite  clauses  and  by  absolute  participial  conBtructions,  as 
1  '%£im  S7S'  am;mS"^:monti.c3  ct  ohscOra^  hrovita-  InCre  pro- cultu.  S^. 

eerat'i  furor  eiiam  eis  qui  boni  habebai.tnr,  nw  damante  mini  e^se  bcllo  cnlh  "i>^^i^'';f; 
Cic    Ka m     <;.  12.-  5.  lliceias  Syracusius»'^  didt.  quum  terra  C'^-^^a.^'lJ, ''^  ^«y,^.'.''^^,^, 
eadem     fhcii'  qiw»^  ^i  star, te^^  terra  cvlnm  moverCtur    Cic    Acad   2.  f.- J;-  J"'^^/"^- 
f.Ubt"lt(Mn  .equ?-  videbiltur.  sed  ea  nulla  erat   ^;^"(f/l^^^'lf^''^^^^^^ 

7.  I^nnp^o  deprecante-^  accepta  lex  non  ej^.'-.,*^'^;,^»: '^^^T.  ^'  iTfr    iUi    medfftn- 
p<«»'f  (Mv^tc"   Pviader»  Orestem  pese  oss^e  dixit.  Cic.  Am.  ., -J4.—  M.  Mri  u\\,meiujtu 
/7^^/6'»    capitis     iXiis  sunt  liberflli".  Cic  I'rov.  Con..  10,  24.-  10.  Jam  motu.^3  «.se 

11.  Thc.b;e  in  ma-no  motn  Bunt,  aliis  ad  re-em  ^^f  *■''  '^;'*  ^^\\'^^"  ,•,  ^.''.^  ""^  KomSnos. 
lb  42  44  —  12  Nihil  potest  evenire  ni!-r-«mw*<7a//^«redm^e-'^  <.ic.  i?  ato  .14. 

Rem  2-->0  In  order  to  render  ablatives  absolute  with  present  partiriples,  prepositional 
ex^:?^shms  i:;^;S'nore  Ireq.iently  u.cd  tlmn  -itb.abhnives  ah.o  ute  i^  ^^'"^ 
nartieiule^  The  prepositions  used  are:  d'mng,  in,  f»j.  nuier.  "'*^'';."*''^ /;.))',''  '  ^ 
Sat  .mi) ^^^^^^^  or  "ith  participles  im|>lyiri-  a  ne-ation),  althour/ft   ai  d 

i/jy/  or  (more  frenui'ntly)  by  an  ordinary  verba  t"^'"'""  V:,wf.  .,,;.?;  n..  0^11  the 
*rt'nerillv  turned  nto  a  possesr^ive  altritmte,  or  into  an  ol.jectne  (a^e  alt»r  oy.  ll  inc 
ribh^cJ'ildlu!^  i^a  proLoun  or  an  equivalent  demonstnitlve  an  Kn^.hp^ 
»^«  Mcwi  iw  Cirprrmf  siKidente  bv  Cicero  s  advice  (l)y  the  ad\ice  or  i  u  t  loi ,  7/*?/J''6"/."f 
^^;<Ty^)^S^^<^^^  of  the  soldiers ;  eo  iillo)  iwj^rwde.  urn  er  his  c..mmand ; 
r/^f>€/7  i//r«/J  with  mv  permis-ion  ;  qno  pror/redie»fe,  in  th.;  course  <>l  which  ;  te  di^^ua- 
Sf  r4  ns  i^^^^^^^^^  m>dti.-  minUautknl  notwithstan.liin^  ^'"•'''''"/"V/T  J  i    SJ 

of  m-iiiv     llere'belcm-a  jrreat  number  of  idiomatic  phrases,  as  ''i^'"^^ ''^''^j'^.^'^SX, 
ylmxh    ineu^^^^  tlie  be-inniu- of  summer ;  nu.  vidente,  ^s■nhm  my  «'«^t;  i^ 

«X/^rSuhbihisheann-  r.Ar/««nf.  na^^'m,  contrary  to  nature;  anno  vertente,  lu 

""''^I^^^^^^^Ast^J^-^nte  facta  e«t.  the  solar  eclipse  which  happened 
duri.  -     "e  re Vm,  (     A^A^  Cic.  Div.  1,49.-Neminem  msijurcwfe  deo  .,n-n lanm 

viruurfuisse  e-redcndu.ne;t,we  must  believe  that  no  one  has  been  a  distin^'ul.hed 
man  without  the  help  of  God.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  tiG.  .,..,,     /. 

1   Geramus  dt-*  rnmnfU,y.^  helium.  Liv.  42.  51.--  2   Atl.enienses   ^Y'^r'/Z/htlX.  r"i30 

S^^cic  or  1^ 


hi     nunSl2J/{£t3«    (ML  '4,  12.  -  10.  Vvo  ee*»  qnisque.  nec  horfanfe*^  vllo,  nee 
bat.  nullo  ;w*fM<an't__.  v^i«- •»>■_-.•  ^»,^.  ^___^,^3    ^  ,^.  ^  ^^_  n.  Erat  in   eo  quidam   f.'rvor 

■~         '  "     'nennte 

or 


bat.  nulio  posixuumt--'.  vr.  1.1 1;.  t,  •*.       'V.,   %  •      n   on    Vr..t  in   oomiidam   fcrvi 
imperant^'M  munienda"  castra  versi  ^^.nn  "•  V>v.  9  2.-    1.  Krat  in  ^"^1"^'  ?,"'/' ;; 

Satis**,  qua  profmdunte  omnia  tiuut  in  dies^^  V-V^'VP^^S'^o^'^^'V^   Qui   hiit   Wte  f   r 
vere  in  vit ibus4«  yemma  qme  diciti'.r*^  sese  ostendit.  lb.  !■>.  r>^.-  13.  (jui  tuit  ist(   lu.' 


f 


1  Vi.^Pre  to  be  in  lashion.—  «  to  cut  short,  to  mutilate.—  3  sentence.--  ♦  o'>''7'r;^- 

.  brevfty.-  «  ^i  ^m  to  be  considered  as.-  '  cuUus.  culture  =  eleu'ant.-  lren>p.Micam 

aer!re    Xo  be  at  (he' head  of  the  republic- «  the  to;^a,  "^/'"1*^':,'"  J'i /,!V'  .  ^^''i  ^» 

Mo  approach  (actively).-  ^^  plausfnwi,  ^KO?--,,"  ;^«  J^' f,\-;:/'/,:n^!!STto  act  on 
nr.HliiV.' pflects  —  »*w»uch  would  be  produced.—  ^^  ftare.  Xo  stand  ^xiu.—  10  aii  o.i 
r       nles  »  f  ext)edie  cv  -  »^  repagnnre,  to  be  opposed  to  soniethin-,  tobe  incompati- 

^w  V^som.'hi^?r^  -  moraiW.- -  c^7>r..^7H,U  <.m)ose  to  p-;-;.;-,^.;;f;;-j^^'-';^ ';; 

t.  know  -  21  defend^re,  to  conduct  the  defence.-  2->  literally  :  to  be  leed  fioin  the  truis 
or      eTnivos.i.-V.,  tobe  acquitted  of  a  capital   crim..-       ^--^^ "'^  T.m^^^^^^^^^^ 

-  ^'n  -^T^.  tH^/S'ii^^iy^  ;;^r.e>  Sill-  i^JJhp  xiE^:^ 

grape-vines). 


ABLATIVES   ABSOLUTE. 


UBS 


i 


nt  cum  Vettio)  colloqner5rei,  popvlo  Romano  ridente?  Cic.  Vatin.11,  26.—  14.  Capliua 
non  modo  permittente  jHitre.  sed  etiam  madenfe  ab  eo  semisravit^.  Cic.  Gael.  7,  18. — 
15.  Catulus  sua  se  manu  interfectOrum  fratrern  sunm  audienfe  senatu  dixit,  lb,  24.  «».— 
IG  Fortasse  eis  non  probaro  causamS  (pii  menm  inimlcum  repugnante  ventrd  avct^rltnte 
t«'xCrunt*.  Cic.  Pn)v.  Cons.  20,  47.—  17.  Municipia*  ilia  iter  mihi  tutum  multis  mini- 
tantibus  pnrbtitGrunt*.  Cic.  Plane.  41,  97. 

§  «>34.  Predicate-ablatives  in  the  form  of  perfect  (passive) 
participles  are  used  with  the  force  of  present  passive  partici- 
ples when  they  may  be  resolved  into  the  finite  tenses  of  the 
PEniPiiuASTic  conjuG^ation  of  the  participle  (§  506),  as :  urhe 
replt/a  milUlhus,  while  the  city  was  filled  with  soldiers. 

Bern.  230.  Ablatives  absolute  with  periphrastic  participles  fol- 
low ill  their  ffniiiimatical  coiLstrucdon  the  rules  for  ablatives  absolute  with 
PERFECT  participles  ;  but  in  respect  to  the  English  equivalents,  /.  e.  as  to 
the  tense,  the  conjunctions,  and  prepositions  which  must  be  used  in  ren- 
dering them,  the  rules  for  ablatives  absolute  with  present  participles 
must  "be  observed.  These  periphrastic  participles,  like  the  finite  tenses 
of  tlie  perii)hrastic  conjugation,  denote  a  past  action  as  a  state,  or  as 
continuing  in  its  effects  at  the  lime  spoken  of,  and  in  the  same  way  as 
mileH  vnlnenltus  est  may  mean  '  the  soldier  is  yyo\im\cCi\  milite  mlnerato 
may  mean  '  the  soldier  being  wounded'  or  '  since  the  soldier  is  wounded 
{haa  wounds).' 

E<t  aliquid  natura  pnrclanim  quod  spr^ta  et  contempta  vdit pta te  o\)t\mns  qnisque  se- 
onereiur  there  i«  somethii.''  eminent  in  its  nature  which  every  good  man  should  pur- 
^iw  H/,iie  Hpurninri  and  d.spl4nq  pleasure.  Cic.  Sen.  13,  43.  [The  acts  of  spurning 
ind  (le<i)i<in-'  are  represented  as  conditions  and  states,  not  as  temporary  acts  ;  hence 
the  DeriohraMic  lonn  i-*  used.  The  Latin  passive  voice  is  changed  into  an  English 
active  construction,  according  to  the  rules  for  ablatives  absolute  with  perfect  partici- 
Dle**  (t5  5.31)  •  but  in  the  use  of  the  conjunction  {while)  and  in  the  tense  (the  present) 
the  nih>  foV  ablatives  abs.  with  puese-nt  i>articiples  (§  5:i3)  are  observed.:j-Si  animus 
paiiM-  e-^t  in 'eiiium  quoqiie  est  sobrium.  Ulo  ritiato  hoc  guoque  adflatiir,  if  the  soul  is 
sound  th'e  mind  also  is  in  a  normal  state ;  if  the  fo7vmr  i^  corrupted,  the  latter  also  is 
tainted  t^en  Ep  114.— Teutoinatus  rex.  rw/w^^rd^o  f^'/o,  vix  se  e  manibus  pra?dantium 
milituin  erio'uit  king  Teuto.natus.  his  horse  InirKj  nounded  {.^nce  his  horse  was  woynded), 
disengaged  himself  with  difliculty  from  the  hands  of  the  marauding  soldiers.  Caes.  B. 
(J.  7,  4»). 

Ob*    V  number  of  idiomatic  phraseP  take  this  form  of  the  periphrastic  ablative  absolute 
several  of  tho^e  enumerated  li.  225  among  the  ordinary  perfect  participles  strictly  belong- 
in-  to  this  periphrastic  form,  as:  Hoc  projmito  numquam  ens  dives,  o/WAt.?  condifwn 
ylni  will  never  be  rich.  Cic.  Parad.  6,  1,  45.   Tantis  ]^?icuhs  pioposiiis,  when  such  dan- 
cers thn-aten    Cic.  Plane.  30,  8H.  Hoc  sublafo.  hoc  remoto,  hy  re.noving  this,  this  being 
Removed,  excluded,  or  taken  away,  without  this.  Adhibito  dt^cnmine,  etriclly  speaking. 
1    Fx  hoc  debet  intelli-'i.  talibus  proemiis  propositis^  numquam  defutflra  bella  civilia 
Cic   Off  2  8  -  2   7?;/f.7t?<7>e'^  remota^  izratissima  est  libertii-.  lb.  2.18.-  3  Antiochus  id 
bellura  sine  uUo  impedimento  se  gesiQrum  speravit,  occv/xitis  Ronumis  in  Macedonia  bel- 
o    Lh'.  4r2il.-4.  /liter  medias  hostium  eIassTs,o;;;>/?/i.-  "?V-rf  ^M^bu?  IS 
l}fonbu<    milites  incolumesH  transportati  sunt.  C  a>s.  B.  C.  3.  .3.—  5.  MiliUhus,  impe- 
;A/t'^  /m     >  r  si^n^        de  navibusdesiliendum»3.etcum  hostibus  erat  pugnandum 
St  B  G  4  S-Tpiura  brevi  tempore  ».f€/>J.  quam  muItis  anms  stante  repyhlu^ 
*  scTfp<imui    Cic-'  OfY'3  1.-  7.  Quotusquisque  reperietur  qui.mp^v/H/a/^^-' j^roi>Q.-t/a,  ab- 


to  engage  somebody.-  »'  desttire,  to  leap  down.—  »«  iinpuuiti. 


184 


REYEKSED  PHRASES. 


stinCre^  posi^it  injuria  ?  Cic.  Off.  3, 17.—  8.  Jam  ip^e  tecum,  nuUd  pert^dnH  infroducfa? 
loquor.  Cic.  Ciel.  15,  35.—  9.  Nuntii  miijsi  a  CiccrOne,  obsessis  omnibus  viu,  iiiter- 
cipinntnr.3  Oies.  B.  G.  4,  40. 

^  sls:|.>  When  predicate-ablatives  consist  of  nouns  or  ad- 
JECTIVES,  the  ablative  of  the  present  participle  of  the  copula 
esse  must  be  supplied  (§  397).  Such  ablatives  absolute  are 
treated  according  to  the  rules  of  those  with  present  participles. 
(§533),  as: 

Caei!»ar  j^aviter  accfl^sat  principcs  ^Eduilnim.  quod  tani  propinqn'is  ho.<fif)us  ah  eis  nou 
PublevCtur,  Ciesar  seriously  reproved  the  cliicfs  of  the  ^Edui.  because  he  was  not  n?- 
licved  by  them  while  {although)  the  enemy  loas  itotiear  (the  enemy  being  so  near).  Cics.  1). 
(i.  1,  1(5. 

Obs.  This  class  of  ablatives  absolute  passes  over  into  ordinary  attributive  phrases, 
consisting  of  a  noun  aiul  an  adjective  in  th(^  ablative,  which  are  «jeneraily  interpreted  by 
supplyiuiij  a  preposition  (cum  or  t/i.  see  §41(5,  R.  5(5).  Some  of  these  expressiruis  may 
be  mterprcted  in  both  ways,  as  :  Sletellus  inteiito  atque  infesto  txercitn  in  Nuniidiam 
procCdit  (Sail.  Jujr.  4(5,  5),  where  some  coiisidcu*  in'ento  and  iufc.'^to  as  predicate-al>latives 
(his  army  bt'inir  full  of  zeal  and  ready  to  i^ive  battle),  wnile  ottiers  su^)ply  the  preposlticm 
cum  (with  an  army  full  of  zeal  and  ready  etc.).  It  is  evident  that  m  expressions  like 
these  both  forms  wholly  coincide.    See  p.  2.59,  obs.  3. 

Jiem.  231.  All  adjeclives  that  may  be  u.setl  as  prctlicate-nominatives 
may,  with  certain  restrictions  (see  obs.  1),  be  eini)ioye(l  as  pt-edicate-tibla- 
tives.  Hence  form-adjkctives  (see  ^  240)  are  nof,  «generally,  employed 
in  this  construction,  e.Kcept  if  they  iiav(?  the  force  of  descriptive  adjec- 
tives, as  tantus,  or,  if  their  use  as  predicate  nominatives  would  be  admis- 
sible, as  iiullus,  multus,  talis. 

Qu(kI  populus  Romilnus  tantit  recfigaJibnii*  jam  vix  potest,  which  (even")  the  Roman 
people  can  hardly  atibrd  now,  althuiqh  its  revenue.^!  are  so  great  (in  spite  of  its  larjjc 
revenues).  Cic.  Par.  (5.  45. —  Summa  erat,  vastoatque  apcrto  mati,  mairnisiestibus.  raris 
ac  prope  7iullis portibus,  difficulias  navij^andi,  there  wa-;  the  jrieuest  difficulty  of  navi- 
gation, the  sea  beinc:  vast  and  open,  the  tides  liiijh,  hartx>rs  bein<;  scarce  and  almost 
none.  Cais.  B.  G.  3,  13, 

Obs.  1.  Adjective'*  u-cd  in  this  connection  are  liable  to  obscure  the  meaning:  of  the 
author,  a  twofold  ellipsis  beintj  always  involved  in  the  const  ruction,  one  in  rcj^aid  to  the 
conjunction,  and  the  other  in  rcani  to  the  copula,  both  of  which  must  l)e  supplied  ac- 
corilim;  to  the  requirements  of  the  text.  Hence  thi-'  form  i->  but  sparin<;ly  applied  with 
ordinary  adjectives,  beini;  frequent  only  with  certain  adjectives  which,  from  their  habitual 
use  as  accessory  predicates  (§  S17.  R.  'i,\  are,  as  it  were,  impregnated  with  a  participial 
meaning,  as  integer,  incolumlt,  salvus,  invilus,  insciu».  coiuicius,  ptixneus,  absens.  vivus.  or 
in  set  phrases  which,  by  conventi  nial  usage,  can  hive  only  this  and  no  other  me  niing. 
Such  plii-a~es  umstbt;  frequently  rendered  by  prepositional  expres-ions,  or  by  circumlocu- 
tion-', aiul,  often,  cannot*  be  properly  rendei-ed  at  all,  beini,'  ba^ed  on  speeiftc  Roman 
intuitions.  To  the  latter  belong  tiie  peculiar  expressions  pingui  (crassd)  Minerrd^ 
tenui  Minerrd,  which  it  requires  a  whole  chapter  in  Roman  niytuology  to  explain. 
To  the  former  belong  the  following  phrases  :  me  conscio,  with  my  knowledge  ;  te 
igndro  or  inscitK  without  thy  knowledLre  ;  eo  prit<ente.  in  his  presence;  nofii^  absen- 
tibus,  in  our  absence ;  fratre  vico.  durincj  tlie  life-iim.i  of  my  (thv  etc.)  brother;  re 
Integra,  the  state  of  affurs  (or  '  of  thii  aftair')  beiiiir  unchanged,  or  *  the  matter  being 
still  untouched'  (re<f  Integra  est  ma-WMi  'there  is  n  >thing  done,  or  chanired  in  the  mat- 
ter'') ;  eo  inrl/o,  against  his  consent  (he  being  unwillin>i)  ;  inrVd  Minerrd,  contrary  to 
one's  proclivities  ;  erf  ra^w  incoluuii,  the  annv  b-ing  uuinjureil  (having  suftered  no 
loss);    salvd  fide,   consistent  witli  one's  word  or  duties;   galnd  republicd,   consistent 

1  To  abstain. —  ^  permnam  introducere,  to  assume  a  fictitious  name.  Perftbna 
(from  per  and  sondre)  is  the  mask  which  the  Roiuiii  actors  used  on  tlie  stage  ;  hence  ptr- 
aonam  agere,  to  play  (sustain)  a  part. —  ^  ^,,  intercept.—  *  In  a  similar  passage,  Cjesar  uses 
the  preposition  i/<  with  the  ablative  (if  the  reailin^  is  correct)  :  (^uod  i//^a/'/o  impt-rio 
populi  Rornani  turpissirnum  reipublicie  esse  arbitrab.ltur,  which  lie  considered  most 
disgraceful  to  the  republic  while  the  power  of  the  liouiau  people  was  so  gr^at  (cou- 
eidurinj;  the  great  power  of  the  H.  P.).  Cies.  B  (1.  1, :«. 


ABLATIVES  ABSOLUTE. 


iSo 


with  the  safety  of  the  republic  ;  salvis  auspiciis,  by  observing  the  auspices  ;  salcis  legibus, 

in  accordance  with  the  laws.  -i      j  „„ 

r^»«   9    «inmr.  nb>itive  cxnressions  with  form-adjectives  are  wrongly  considered  as 

prSafe-aSves  iftL  g^^^^^^^^  for  instanci  the  phrase_; /^  ..«a  ..'  nj  the  pas- 

^J.^^nsulibus\    But-if  Mc  is  used  in  the  meaning  of  talis  it  may  be  tnade  a  predicate- 
ablaiiv?"  Ea  sunt  tolerabilia  hacjuventuie  (our  young  men  being  such).  Cic.  Att.  10, 11. 

Rem  232.  Nouns  are  used  as  predicate-ablatives  only  when  denoting 
PERSONS  either  as  doers  of  certain  actions,  or  as  holders  ot  certain  posi- 
tions, ti^\iisti%  dux,  consul,  etc.  Such  predicate-ablatives  are  either  ren- 
dered by  a  CLAUSE  with  when  or  while  (sometimes  by  if  or  because),  or 
(more  frequently)  by  prepositional  expressions,  in  which  case  the  Latin 
appellation  of  the  person  must  be  rendered  by  an  abstract  noun  denot- 
ing ACTION  or  POSITION,  instead  of  by  a  personal  noun  ;  as: 

^ Cicerr>ne,  nrcetdre,  while  Cicero  was  pnetor,  or  in  the  pnetorship  of  Cicero;  diice 
SenlpwZ  Wn  Sempronius  was  leader,  or  under  the  command  of  Sempronius.jmrfer 
sS^onid'i  inmratSre  Scipidne.  under  Scipio's  ^^\^^-T''T''^%-'''A'!:J:t^fX^x^^ 
his  mediation  •  viepuero,  while  I  was  a  boy,  or  in  my  boyhood  ;  (VJftore  (robmw,  by  the 
au'horUv  or  it.sti^^^^  at  the  dictation  of  Gabinius  ;  teste  Vatimo,  m  the  presence 

of  Vatiriius  (he  being  a  witness),  or  by  the  evidence  of  \  atinius. 

tW  With  two  co-ordinate  subject-ablatives,  the  predicative-ablative,  if  a  noun,  is 
alim>js  placed  in  the  plural,  as  Cicerone  et  Antonio  consulibus,  in  the  consulship  or 
Cicero  and  Autonius. 

Obs  1  The  expression  '  con^'ulibiis'  with  two  persons  as  subject-ablatives  has  a  pecu- 
liar reference  to  the  method  of  Roman  chronology.  The  Romans  did  not  use  fi;rures  to 
desi-nate  the  years  as  dates  of  their  own  history,  except  to  lay  a  stress  upon  the  num- 
ber of  years  elapsed  since  the  building  of  Rome.  The  years  as  mere  chronological 
dites  wL  indicated  by  the  na.nes  of  their  consuls,  in  the  form  of  f^l'.tTv^^hf  PoSex 
These  names  were  known  to  the  people  from  the  consular  lists  kept  by  the  Pontilex 
Maximus  (fast iconsuldrei  or  CapitoTini). 

Rem  2;«.  Rarely  adjectives  are  used  impersokat.t.y  as  predicate-ablatives,  so  that  a 
sul^ect'-inflnitive  or  a  sul>iect-clause  performs  the  officii  of  subject-ablative,  as:  Con- 
snect;e  sunt  duuj  nuinquerSmes,  baud  cuTquam  dubio  quin  Jwsfium  eji<ent(\t  being  do  ibt- 
ffi  to  noiully  fhat  th^-v Delonjed  to  thee.iemy).  Liv.  .28,  n-M^i.^i^Hlnantes  navibu^ 
incerto  pne  tenebris  quVl peterenf.  hede  perierunt.  (it  bem-  iincTtain  V>wards  what  they 
?ere  movi..?.  i.  e..  the  ob  ects  of  which  they  miu'ht  take  hold,  being  i»;:»^''^^'^)-  f^^^ 
as  predicate^ahlative^  on  account  of  their  personal  nature,  cannot  as>ume  an  impt^ 
sonal  form  Such  expre-sii.ns  as  comitiis.  ludis  (at  the  time  ot  the  election  ai  the 
Sof  he.'a.nes,.  wuich  the  grammarians  consider  as  impersonal  predicate-ablat.yes 
are  mere  ablatives  of  lime  (  §  45:i).  R.-solved  into  tlnite  predicative  phrases  they  would 
be  ^VvH^^^udi  sunt,  ihc  games  are  taking  place),  and  not  the  predicate-nouns 
of  the  phrases. 

1  Pos^^um  nominflrei  rusticos^  Romilnos,  viclnos  mcos.  guibus  abaentiMis  numquam 
fere  idla  iragro3  „,,jara  opera  tiunt.  Cic.  Se.K  7,  '^4.- 2  Vix  in  ipsis  tectisj  et  oppi^ 
dis  frigus  iufirmd^  valet udiae  vitatur.  nedum  in  man.  Cic  Fam  Ih,  8.-  3-  ^'1  »  «^^^ 
me  «crip^isse  demlror''.  pnesertim  tam  novis'^  rebu^.  Cic.  tani.  7,  18.—  4.  Jugurtna 
Boc-,ho\>oHicitus  e<t  Nu.nidhe  partem  tertiam,  s.  integri^^  T' •^'''''''l  }lt}lT.T^t\ 
positumJ"  foret.  Sail.  Jug.  97,  2 -.5  Popillius  non  ^'^^  ^bat  Romani  rev^ertl  ne  f^^^^ 
causam  diceretn  ndrerso^''  senltu,  iufestiare  populo.  I..v.  42,  2>.-  6.  H  s  r«;'>'f  l><;»'^c 
tum  est  Mt.  a//i.^.^mis-  lluminibus  atque  impediti^sbm^^'^  itmeribus  nullum  <^=eMr  ac- 
ce"ritM  incomniodutn.  C.es.  B.  C.  3.  77.-7.  Philippus  tum /«  7'^.  o  .otani  molen'» 
Mi<tirt5i>a,  belli  Liv  3'-.,  7.—  8.  Non  tu,  rtW  confute  tuo.  ca^tra  intrab  s.  lav.  10.  3(..— 
5  IlMfnq.iebatur  una  per  Sequanos  \xx,  qt.a^^  Helvetii,  S^T^^'^^^  ^r^'^^^'^^^^^ 
an-'u<tiasi^  i,v«9  non  ,)  .terant.  C:es.  B.  U.  I.  <.».-  10.  C\e-ar  e.xercituiu  et  piovmciam 

-rfo  na.ue.- Mioman  far.uers.  Oit-rally:  rustic  «'»'"»"?)-!  ^^^;7.,;i^  SJoniihed' 
work  -  *  under  th.-  very  roofs  of  h  )iis -s.  -  5  w.;ak.-  «  much  le-s  -  ^  I  am  a>ton  stied. 
-«  Trans  bvth.  noun^^.i;..- »  with -ut  a  reduction  of  hi^  territory  -  "to  settle - 
"  raH<a>n  dic-re  to  hive  one's  trial,  to  be  tried.  -  ^"^  opposel.  inimicd  (to  him).-  ex- 
t^?\i^r\^l\\k^t^\iio  pass.-  1*  to  sutfer.-  >*  brunt.-  i«  by  the  coajuncLion  as  long  as.-- 
17  where.—  •=*  on  account  of  its  usirrowness.—  ^■'  to  march. 


186 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


innfo  muVu  tenet.  Cic.  Fam,  Ifi,  11.—  11.  Ctesar  Divitiacnm  commonefacit»,  qnro  ipso 
pr(v>f>-nte  in  concilio  (JallOrum  de  fratre  <*jus  nint  dicta.  Cues.  B.  G.  1,  19.—  12.  Cser-ar 
oninibiix-  in-'^riis  neqiu'*  t^iispic:intil)Ur»,  viiriliil*  tfrtiS  jiibet  omuls  lcir>5ned  ox  ca-tris 
fdilci.  Hirt.  15.  Afr.  37.—  V-i.  Uamniiii!*  di.vit  lii!<idias  Uhis  ])luri//iis  con-^fiis  coinparAri*. 
Liv.  42.  17. —  14.  Ilof  vidCinii!?  efsc  consecQti  ur  ne  qiiis  ai,'i'r('  cum  jk)|»u1(j''  hwx  salcis 
au''pkii.'i  a!ir  nalns  lerfifmn  aut  dt-nique  sine  vi^  pos^it.  (.'ic.  Fan».  1,  2.—  15.  Unuui- 
vii*  mho  officio  •f'G  facere  p<)S!*c  arbirrautur.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  1. —  Ifi.  Ea  dicam,  T()J)is 
audioutilius,  amisso  jam  temporo.  qn:c  ipsi  soli,  re  integrd.  soppe  dixi.  Cic.  Mur,  21.— 
17.  Diiilliui»  dek'Ctabiitur  cri'i)ro  lunilli  et  libicine*,  qiue  tibi  nuUo  exemjHo  privStus» 
f unn)stM-at'°.  Cic.  Sen.  18.  44. 

IS.  Fal)iu»  Maximus  (:,r^io/ie  ct  P/iUlfipo  iterumi'  consn/iduji  mortnu;»  est.  Cic.  Son. 
5,  14.—  li).  lI;oc  conditio  fuit  info  pnefare  aratOruui»-.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  3,  2'.».—  20.  Qui»d 
cleo  teste  promijiteris,  id  tonouduni  ost.  Cic.  Off.  3,  29  —  21.  Brutus  collGiram  si  hi  croilvit 
Valorium.  quo  adjutOre^^  roires  ojeccrat.  Liv.  2.  2.—  22,  Dicit  illo,  oinnoin  iliaui  tom- 
])t'siiTtfini*  Ctfyare  iinpuhoit^"-'  atcjuo  aijntore  ot^se  oxcitiltam.  Cic.  Prov.  Cons.  8.  18. — 
2;{.  Ik'lvotii  logiltos  ad  Duninorim'in  mittunt.  uiettdejtrtcafOre  a  Soquanis  itor  {f/ie  }>er- 
viisition  of  inarcMnq)  inipotnlront.  Cies.  li.  (}.  1.  «.».—  24.  Kliodii  non  favC'io»*  tantum 
god  adju\  Are  etiam belluni  polorant, quadruginta  navibus  auctOre  Jlegetdloiho  pnt'pariltis. 
Liv.  42.  4."). —  25.  Quid  ost  turpius  quam  anctore  ho^te  do  suminis»  -  rol>us  capon;  consi- 
lium y  C:i's.  B.  (».  5.  !:^.—  2rt.  Voces»  sunt  c(>ntuinol:5sa'if  al)  iijlto  accusatoro'*'  nit/lo 
audi/re  eim<^V'^.  Cic.  Ciol.  1.},  30.—  27.  l{o<;uhi8  in  Afiicil  captus  est  dm-e  Xant/iij)/)0, 
impe ratOre  Axitem  patre  llannibalis  I/tmilorte.  Cic.  Off.  3.  2t>.—  28.  Ciosur  sox  l.-triOnoa 
ox  Hispania  ot  ma'^na  auxilia  Afraoioct  Ptfirjo  ditcihua  hal)et  a  lor<ro->.  Cic.  Fam.  Ifi, 
!•>,  4._  -H)  ^liiii  quidcni, />Mtri6'  itobity,  M.  fecaurus  C.  Mario  ccderu"^"^  mm  videbalur. 
Cic.  Off.  1,  22. 

§  «mo.  Impersoxal  ablatives  absolute  consist  of  a  mere 
predicate-ablative  in  the  neuter  sinpjiilar  of  a  perfect  passive 
jiartieiple  formed  from  an  impersonal  passive  verb,  as  debelldto, 
after  the  war  liad  been  finished  ;  6\i7>/om^o,  after  an  exph)ration 
liad  been  made.     Tiiis  construction  is  of  very  rare  occurrence. 

Rem.  234.  Impersonal  ablatives  abssoluto  are  of  two  kinds : 

1.  Tlu'y  are  formed  from  imi)orsonal  pasnives  of  neuter  verbs,  the  doors  of  tbc  action 
boinj?  uncertain  persons,  and  tbo  verbs  bavinir  tbc  force  of  traTisitivo  objective  pbrasos.  for 
wbicb,  on  account  of  iboir  fromient  occurrence  in  daily  life,  usa ire  had  substituted  siiiffle 
verbs.  Thus  occur  e.  ir.  tlie  i)redicate-ablativ»'s  f/z/v/J^VJ/o,  «'/g"//v7/o. /iWo  (inst.  of  a«- 
ftpiciis.  augurii'^,  Kucnticiis  rite  pirftdix),  and  drfM-'lato  (inst.  of  //^//o  ^finlfo).  Those  liave 
both  the  nature  and  form  of  adverbs  (in  o).  most  of  which  (seegfi'.»»  are  evidently  nothini; 
i)ut  predicate-ablatives  of  impersonal  passives,  as  tiecn to  (fvom  tte('rrntffe),(ito({'vom  Hire), 
falsi)  (iroiufallerc).  necopindto  (from  tlie  ancient  opindre).  tuto  (from  tiitii),  mbito  (fmm 
stih  -  -•  •  ,      .  .^-  ,.  1.  .  . 

(It 

ow.  ^  ,  ,  . 

eral  of  these  expressions  are  compounds  of  impors'mal  ablatives,  as:  intestdto  (without 
Itavinjj  a  will),  i/iconxulto  (unadvisedly;  rare,  instead  of  the  classical  iftro/tft/tte).  bijuir- 
tllo  and  triparlVo  (in  two,  three  divisions;  tlie  simple  partVo  not  occurrinj^  in  classical 
lanfiua<,'e).  All  tliese  expressions  must  be  considered  as  conventional  lornuilas,  which 
canTiot,  l)y  analoury.  be  extended  and  applied  to  other  impersonal  passives.  Thus  such  par- 
ticiples as  ' p>tf/ii<)to\  'coiicurt^o'  {-—gi/ion  pugndfi/jn  etc.  ej^.<et)  do  not  occur.  But  some 
writers  (Livy,  Tacitus,*  etc.)  have  occasionally  coined  solitary  oxpressiona  of  this  kind. 

•  to  address  tlm 


t/.v(>  (from  failert).  tiecopnKiio  (Irom  tlie  ancient  opinare).  vtio  (irom  iiieii),  suuiiu  vii-"iu 
'/An).  Thus  occur  opfd/o  (accordin<:  to  one's  wishes),  coni^ultn  (deliberately),  testdto 
/avinira  will);  sortVo\.hy  lot.  Cic. Verr.  2,  2.  51);  sati^ddto,  in  '  atiguid  mtisdato  dttnre  \  to 
ve  somethinj;  on  security  (often  in  the  jurists,  also  Cic.  Att.  Ifi,  fi,  3;  \h.  Ifi.  15,  2).    Sov- 


to  nrepare. 
people.—  ''  violence.— 8  crebro  fundli  et  tibidne,   literally:    l)y  a  frequent  torch  and  a 


1  Repeats  to.—  "  any  one's.-  '  or.—  *  nitrht-watch. 
(«ople. —  7  violence. — ^  crebro  fundli  et  tlbiciae,   lite 
iliito-plaver;  i.  e.  fn-quent  illumination  (of  his  hou-o»  with  mnsic—  »  as  a  private  person. 

—  »•  to  assume.—  ' »  for  the  second  time.—  ^"-ardlor.  a  farmer.—  >3  literally  h-^lper.-  »*  storm. 

—  1»  literallya  inorer,aheltor.—  »«  fdv^re  (supply  f>eilOK  to  s^ive  countenance  to;  adjurare 
helluta  to  jiriVe  assistance  in  the  war.—  »t  most  important.—  »«  abusive.—  »"  accusi-r.— 
"0  emittere,  to  utter  —  «i  §  44-),  R.  .55.—  ^a  to  be  inferior,  or  second  to. 

*  Some  «,'r:unmarians  (I'uotoa  passai^e  of  Cicero  (cui.  errdfo.  nulla  vcnia.  r6!c/<?/^lc/o  exi- 
trua  lius  prt)ponitur,  Loj,'.  A-r.  2,  2).  to  prove  tbat  be  u<es  f^r/v7/oaiid  nrtyfirfoii^  impor- 
ecmal  predicate-al)latives.  This  roadiui;  would  be  far  loss  defensible  than  even  the  allowed 
example-  of  Livy,  since  the  doer  of  the  impersonal  action  would  bo  the  loi^ical  subject 
of  the  •sentence.  It  has  ionj,'  beon  corrected.  l)ein«r  only  supported  by  one  sinj,'le  inanu- 
Bcript   the  majority  of  the  manuscripts  reading  CHJus  instead  of  cut,  which  makes  erra- 


TREPOSITIONAL  GERUNDULS. 


187 


E 


which,  however,  failed  to  be  received  into  general  nse,  as:  exphrdto  (after  examination, 
Liv.  23.  42 :  see  Ex.  3) ;  uondurn  jxdam  facto  (the  affair  not  havinir  been  made  public  yet, 
^Sy.'l'l.Tirt^.—Svtinndlo  lnres,<7r  -nf.  they  entered  after  room  had  been  made  (by  thelictur). 
lb.  28.  27  {s'ltnmori^tur  aJicui.  a  Motor  clears  the  passaire  for  a  m;i<ristrato). 
2.  The  second  kind  of  impersonal  predicate-ablatives  correspoiids  to  those  impersonal 
assive  predicates  which  have  clausks  as  subjects  (interrogative,  or  That-clauses,  see 
;iook  VF.).  This  form  is  extremely  rare  in  classical  i)roso,  occiiriiiiir  only  twice  in  Cioero: 
Adjuvcto  vero  ///  eldejn  etiam  prudtute»  haherentur.  nihil  erat  quod  homines  non  posse 
consequi  se  arbitrarentiir  [  —  'postquain  accesnt  vt\  after  it  was  added  that,  i.e.  'after, 
in  addition  to  thi-» ').  Cic.  Otf.  2,  12. — Perfecto  cnim  et  concluso.  neque  virtutibus.  noque 
amiritia;  locum  esse,  si  ad  voluptatem  omnia  referantur,  nihil  prieterea  est  diccndura 
(:=/^).stq>ia?n  perfectum  est  etc.:  alter  establishing  the  principle  that  etc.).  lb.  Fin.  2. 27. 
In  Cic.  Inv.  2, 10,  30  (hoc  loco  pneterito,  et  ci/r  pr(¥teredfur  dcinonstrdto),  '  demonstrdto'' 
may  be  taken  as  an  ordinary />fr.s'0/^rt/  passive  predicate-ablative  (per  ecthesin  =  hoc  loco 
doinonstrjlto  cur  prjeteroiltur ;  see  p.  SiHi.  </).  A  few  times  this  construction  also  occurs 
in  Livy,  who  uses  it  as  virtually  equivalent  to  an  active  perfect  participle,  a  usage  which 
cannot  be  considered  as  <_ronerally  adopted:  Consul  ad  Pluinnam  est  progressus,  non- 
dum  co>/i])erto  gi/atn  regiofiem  hostix  pet'isse';  '  it  having  not  yet  been  ascertained  {by 
him)'  what  route  the  enemy  had  taken.  Liv,  31,  39.  See  PIx.  4.  fi.  In  Cses.  B.  G.  7,52 
{e.rjnmto  quid  imquitas  loci  posset)  the  reading  is  dou»)tfnl,  'exjwsuit'  being  probably 
the  correct  reading.  In  the  writers  of  the  silver  age  this  construction  occurs  oftenor. — 
Here  belong  also  the  predicato-al)latives  formed  from  impersonal  predicate-ailjectives 
witli  clai/Sfs  as  subjects,  as:  Hand  culquam  dufno  (=:quura  baud  dubium  esset),  guin 
hat/ium  essent  trirhnes.  Liv.  28, 17.    See  j).  185,  R.  233. 

1.  Pnofectus  roirius.  prope  jam  nt  debeUdto,  Masinissam  persectltus  est.  Liv.  20,  32. — 
2.  Seipio,  vflut  jam  debtUdlo.  quod  ad  Carthaginieusis  atrineret».  UticiR  oppugnandae 
Intontus  erat.  lb.  30,  8. —  3.  Am|)ius  profectus  est,  noque  explordto  circa^,  necstationi- 
l)u>3  satis  lirmis  positis.  lb.  31,  2. —  4.  Consul  explordto  aniva.  utrum  Leucadem*  an  si- 
num*  Atnl)racium  onerariie"  tenuissent,-in  vicom'  cohortls»  frumentiltum»  Ambra- 
ciam  misit.  lb.  :i2.  15.— 5.  Quinctius,  nondum  comperto  quam  in  rogiOnera  vonisset, 
milites  por  airros  dimissos  (li.  225)  vallum  ciedorei"  jubot.  lb.  .3:5.  5.—  fi.  Consul  edicto^^ 
ntquicuiiquei-  ad  vallum  tendereti3  pro  hostehaberetur,  obstitit**  teudentibus  suis  in 
castra,  lb.  10,  30. 

7^      IJeVERSED    PHRASES  AND    GERUNDS    GOVERNED    BY  PREPOSI- 
TIONS. 

1.  Prcj)osltlonal   Gerundials. 

g  ,>37.  Botli  reversed  plirases  and  gerunds  maybe  connected 
by  means  of  prepositions  with  their  governing  words,  so  as  to 
form  cither  prepositional  objects  or  prepositional  attributes. 
l>ut  only  a  few  prepositions  can  tlius  be  used  with  the  accusa- 
tive or  ablative  of  gerundials.  The  most  frequent  preposi- 
tional connections  with  gerundials  are  those  by  acZ,  in  (both 
with  the  accusative  and  ablative),  «5,  de^  and  (in  certain  con- 
nections) oh.     Karely  are  used  inter^  ex^  and  ;>ro. 

to  and  recte  facto  the  datives  of  substantives.  Still  the  old  exploded  reading  is  reit- 
erated in  so  recent  a  publication  as  the  "  Engli<h  Public  School  Latin  Grammar' whose 
author  copie-'  from  Ituddimin  the  as-ertiou  that  '  errdfo'  stands  for  'si  erratum  erit 
a  in^\  and  '  recte  facto"  for  ".si  recte  factntn  erit  a  nie" .  p.  310. 

1  Qiujd  ad  Cartluigiiuenses  atti/itret,  as  far  as  the  Carthaginians  were  concerned.— 
2  circa,  round  about,  i.  e..  in  the  environs  —  »  stafiunes  ponere.  to  establish  stations  or 
posts,—  *  NOM.  Leucas.—  »  gulf  of  Aml)racia.—  «  the  freight-ships.—  "^  in  turn.—  »  co- 
horts.— »  frummtdri,  to  forage.—  »»  to  cut  the  material  lor  the  rampart.—  "  to  proclaim. 
—  ^^  whoever. —  *'  to  press.—  >*  to  oppose. 


188 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


A 


PREPOSITIONAL   GERUNDIALS. 


Hem    ''o.j    Prepositional  c^crundials  take  eitlier  the  form  of  a  {gerundive 

phrase*  or  tiiat  of  a  ireruml  absoUite,  according  to  the  .c^eneral  rules  on 

reversed  phrases  (^^  517.  518) ;  but  tliey  cauuot  take  the  lorni  of  a  gerund 

with  a  transitive  oi)ject: 

AdcondUwuesfac.ieiida-^,  to  make  coiulition*»  (not  ad  faciendum  conditiones)  ;  in  U- 

bris  Legtndis,  in  rcaiin;;  bot)k^  (i»oL  in  Itijeiuio  libim)* 

Rem  2.W.  Many  prepositions  are,  by  their  MEAXiNQ,  excluded  fromjjoverninir  i?erun- 
diiU  'i^  ante  nne,  super,  lenus,  sud,  coram:  but  others  seem  to  be  excluded  from 
comTec Un  -^cTKial  <.b  bv  a  mei'e  caprice  of  the  la.igua-e.    Hence  many  En-Ush 

Drenositional  expressions  with  Uie  particioial  in  in(/  cannot  be  rendered  by  Uilin  prepo- 
Jkions  with  -.-mndials.  fc>ome  of  these  expressions  may  be  rendered  by  parlicipial 
reversed  phnises  ;  b.it  mmv  cannot  even  be  rendered  by  these.  Thus  ^b^fare  the  build- 
in'  of  Rome  'may  b.-  expressed  bv  ante  h'omam  conditam.  but  not  by  «/</^  homam  con- 
del)da7nf  'By  or  thr<mqh  suireriiiir  hardships'  cannot  be  expressed  by  any  reversed 
phrase  with  a  preposition"  (noX  }>erlai>vre.'<  Meruhdos,  nor  j,tr  labtn-e.^  toleratoi<\,\i\\ih^  nn 
ablative  .r.-rundial  or  particii)lc  (laboiibus  tol'vandis  or  tukralis)  'On  account  oj  with 
a  participial  is  never  translated  by  propter  with  a  «eriindi.l,  and  oiily  in  certain  connec- 
ti(m<  bv  o4,  but  most  <;en«'railv  by  cauxa  or  gratia  with  the  genitive  of  a  gerundial. 
'Wittiout  witti  a  p:iitici[)ial  '  may  be  rendered  by  ^in^  with  a  verbal  nonn  UXf^srne  dubi- 
tatione)  but  never  with  a  «reriiudial  or  a  participial  plirase_in..t  .*<//«  j///i'?/a/''-/o  nor 
'sine  diligenlia  adkibita\  without  applying  diligen.-e,  but  nulla  ddigt/dia  adtabUaU 

Obs  in  ord.-r  to  render  the  Kuj^lish  '  wif/ind  '  with  a  participial,  various  combina- 
tions are  at  the  disposition  of  the  Latin  langua-e  :  ,-     ♦,     .  /e  An<i\  .^r  .,P,T«t;vP 

1  The  NEOATioN  mn  (ne.  ne-quidem).  or  negative  form-udjectives  (§  4as\  or  nejratne 
conjunctions  (mgue,  neve,  nl^i),  which  are  combined  either  with  participles  or  gerundials 
in  one  of  the  Ibllowing  ways:  ^.         . 

(a)  With  PARTICIPLES  in  tln>  form  of  accessory  prelicates,  as  :  Dicam  hoc  non  i-eifrens 
asVntandi  suspiciOnem,  I  shall  maintain  this  wdhout  fmng  afraid  iA  the  suspicion  of 
rtaiterv  «.'ic  Or  3,  l2i.— Itoniaiii  non  rogafi  auxilium  offenint,  the  Romans  oth*r  their 
XnAxi  without  beiug  iu^ked  for  it.  Liv.  31, -i:}.-!  osse  liberalitate  uti  /«or.  ^7^<^i<'//-/<'m  .-ce 
patriuionio  pecuniae  e*t  fructus  niaximus.  f.  be  enabled  to  be  liberaM/w^/Jow^  depnting 
one's  se^f  of  one's  propertv.  is  the  greatest  blessing  «)i  money.  Cic,  Off.  2,  IH. 

d>)  With  participles  in  the  form  of  puedicatio-ablativks,  as  nulla  recwanfe  rcgnim 
obfinGre,  to  obtain  the  throne  wif/iouf  any  on^' c^jecJing  Xo  it.  Nep  Tim  3  Aonexpecfato 
solis  ortu  trajicere.  to  cross  wif/iout  expecting  tfie  rise  of  the  mn.  Uv.jU.  \i.  i^ec  ansm- 
cato  r^clitato  instruunt  aciein.  they  draw  up  the  line  ol  l)attle  without  perjornang  tit/ier 
au<pice^orsacnnce>i.  \A\.h,m.  ^vi^M.-nri.a-l*^.  

(C)  With  the  Ablative  or  g.-rundials.  as  nullify  hbns  scnbendi.9,  without  writing  any 
books;  Sdpio  annum  integrum  nihil  gerundo  in  /fispania  con^umpstt,  Scipio  i^pent  a 
whole  year  m  Soain  without  doinir  auytliing.  Liv.  37,  7.  See  R.  214. 

2  The  NKOATivE  PUKFix  in.  apoliecl  to  participles,  adjectives,  or  to  verbal  nouns, 

(a)  The  participles  with  this  pretax  occur  either  in  the  form  of  acces>ory  predicates, 
as  insciens  hoc  feci,  I  have  done  this  without  knowing  it ;  inrocdtus  adest.  he  is  present 
wittiout  bnng  invited  :  inaudVum  aliguem  cond^mndre,  to  condemn  one  without  liearing 
him  Ju^t  22  3:  or  in  the  forui  of  ablatives  absolute,  as:  re  tnfec/a,  or  tnfeclo  negotio, 
witliuut  accomplishing  one's   purpose.  Sail.  >Tug.  58,  7;  indicta   c<f».va  aluiuem  condem- 

*  Formerly  the  editions  of  the  classics  presented  a  number  of  prepositional  construc- 
tions with  <'crunds  and  transitive  object.s.  These  have  been  almost  all  corrected,  being 
i)a>ed  on  iiTferior  ri>ading8  of  some  codices.  There  are,  now  only  three  passag.is  left  in 
which  such  constructions  occur,  1)  Liv.  30,13:  m  a'loguendovictorem;  2)  Liy.  28,^44: 
non  ad  d^fendmdum  modo  llaliam;  3)  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  «J:  ^erbum  hoc  (i.  e.,  invuiere) 
ducinm  est  a  nimis  intuendo  torfunam  alferJus.  In  this  passage  a  iierundive  const ruct lou 
could  n(»t  be  used  at  all ;  »)ecause  intuenda  fortuna  would  have  implied  that  invidtre  was 
derived  Irom  the  phra>ie  '  intuenda  fortOna',  while  Cicero  meant  to  say  that  it  was  iden- 
liciil  with  intueri  alone.  Hence  in  mis  pas-^a-e  the  gerund  with  a  trauMtive  object  is  a 
le 'itimate  evcptiou,  which  however  cannot  be  extended  beyond  this  rare  connection.^ 

t  We  read,  indeed,  in  Liv.  Tret'.  •  gutt  ante  condifam  condendamre  urbun  traduntur  , 
•what  is  reported  of  the  time  before  the  city  was  built  or projcttd'.  Hut  in  this  pas- 
sage anf^  condendam  urb^m  has  not  the  meaning  'before  the  building  of  the  city  , 
bul  pre  'iiantlv,  by  a  bidd  antithesis  to  ante  conditam.  denotes  a  time  in  which  the  build- 
in"  of  Rome  was  not  even  thought  of.  Only  the  antithesis  makes  this  ccmstruci ion  tol- 
erable. Poi'tically  ante  domandum  (inst.  of  antequam  domili  trunt)  occurs  in  \  ir<;. 
(;et)rir.  3.  206. 


(iet)rg.  3.  2Ub.  ,  . 

X  Cum  with  an  ablative  gerund,  and  circa  with  an  accusative  gerund  are,  each  once 
found  in  (iuintiiian  ;  Cum  UMiuendo  juncta  (inst.  of  cum  usu  loguendi  juncta)  1,  5;  circc 
inocendum  valet  (iust.  of  ad  movendum  valet).  4,  5,  (i. 


1 


nnre,  to  condemn  one  without  hearing  his  defence,  Cic.  Kab.  4 ;  causa  incognita,  without 
having  examined  the  case,  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  73:  inscientUms  ipns,  without  their  knowledge 
(their  knowing  it) ;  inauspicdto.  without  (using)  auspices  ;  inaugurdto,  without  (perform 
int')  auiruries  ;  inexplorato,  without  examining. 

(b)  'I'lie  adjective-,  witli  the  |)re;ix  in,  if  corresponding  to  'without'  with  a  participial, 
have  the  force  of  participles,  as  me  igndro  et  in.'^cio.  without  my  having  any  idea  of  it, 
Cle.  Plane.  l(i :  inscios  inopinantei^que  Menapios  oppre»serunt,  they  surprised  the  Menapii 
without  «heir  being  aware  of  it.  C.es.  li.  G.  4.  4  ;  exercitu  incruento  (Sail.  Jug.  97)  or  in- 
cruento  prcelio  (Liv.  2.  5»)),  without  shedding  any  blood. 

(c)  Verbal  nouns  with  the  prefix  t/*,  corresponding  to  '  withouf  and  a  participial  are 

Idaced   in  tue  ablative,  as  incnv^ultu  ineo,  without  consulting  me  ;    injuj^su,  without 
laving  received   an    order.  Liv.  3,  (>3 ;  4.32  {injussu  s-uo,  injussu  iwperafdrit-; -without 
his  command,  wiihout  the  order  of  the  chief-commander.  Cjes.  B,  G.  1,  S);  Cic.  Sen.  20). 

3.  Finite  sentences,  either  co-ordinaied  by  negative  conjunctions  (neque),  or  subordi- 
nated br  lit  non  (so  as  not  to),  or  by  quia  after  negative  predicates,  as:  Paiuetius  de  hac 
re  deinceps  se  scrip-^it  i\\(:\^n\\n.  nee  exsolvit  id  quod  promiserat,  Panietius  wrote  he 
would  speak  of  this  subject  at  the  proper  i)lace,  tcithout,  howexGv^  performing  what  he 
hail  promised.  Cic.  Off.  'i,  2.— (^ui  intra  priesidia  Pompeji  fuissent,  neqve  operant  in  re 
miliijlri  pnvstitifsent,  who  had  been  within  the  lines  of  Pompey,  iiitJwut  lending  their 
h'ip  in  the  operations  of  the  army.  Cies.  IJ.  C.  3,  83.— Qui  virttlti  non  ptudet,  malet  exis- 
tiinjlri  l>oniis  vir.n^  non  nt.  qiiani  esse,  id  non  jnitetur.  who  \s  indifferent  t«>  virtue,  would 
rather  be  taken  tor  a  «rood  man.  irithout  t/eing  one.  than  be  a  L'ood  man  without  being  con- 
sidered so.  c;ic.  Fin.  2,  71.— In  castello  nemo  hiit  omnino  militum  gain  vulneraretur,  in 
the  fort  there  was  not  one  soldier  without  being  wounded.  Cses.  B.  C.  3,  R^. 

4.  Sometimes  the  construction  of  the  sentence  is  recast  by  making  the  phrase  with 
'  without'  a  i)rincipal  predicate,  in  combination  with  a  neirative.  transforming  the  Eng- 
lish principal  verb  into  an  object,  as:  Nulla  profecto  alia  gens  tanfd  mole  dadis  nejn 
obruta  e-<set,  no  other  people,  indeed,  could  have  met  with  so  overwhelming  a  di'^aster 
without  t>eing  annihilated.  Liv.  22,  .54.  {literally:  no  other  people  would  have  been  not 
annihilated  by  such  a  load  of  disaster). 

h  Sometinies  a  Latin  vkubal  noln  after  sine  may  be  employed  to  render  the  English 
'without"  with  a  participial,  as:  Ca'sar  hortjltur  Divitiacum  \\i  siiu  ejus  offensione  animi 
d«'  CO  statiiat,  C;esar  admonishes  Diviliacus  to  decide  about  him  wWwut  ftding  offended 
by  it.  Cics.  B.  G.  \,  19. 

§  o38.  The  preposition  ad  with  tlie  accusative  of  a  gerund 
or  gerundive  phrase  denotes  the  aim,  or  tlie  purpose  of  an  action 
(§  427,  2),  and  is  dependent  either  as  object  on  verbs,  verbal 
phrases  and  adjectives,  or  (rarely)  as  attribute  on  verbal  nouns, 
being  generally  translated  hy  to  ov  for  with  a  participial  in  ing^ 
or  by  an  object-iniinitive  (with  or  without '  in  order''). 

Ilieronymus  legJIlos  Carthaginem  misit  ad  fcedus  cum  l\n\\mhn\e  faciendyw,  Hie- 
ronymus  sent  ambassadors  fo  Carthage  (in  ord^^r)  to  make  a  treaty  with  Hannibal.  Liv. 
2i,  6.— lit  impellereiit  hostis  ad  dedendam  nrbem,  that  they  miiiht  impel  the  enemy 
to  surrender  the  city.  Liv.  25,  "iA.—Ad  nbellandum  neque  virls  neque  duces  habSbant, 
for  revolting  (to  re'volt)  they  had  neither  strength  nor  leaders.  Liv.  33,  29.— SilSnus 
propra'tor  adjutor  ad  resgerendasdatn»  est,  the  proprietor  Siianus  was  appointed  an  aid 
to  administer  the  affairs  (^as  an  aid  in  his  administration).  Liv,  26,  19.— Non  tam  ido- 
ueus  ad  ctlandam  rem  videbJltur  quam  ad  agendam  erat,  he  seemed  not  bo  much  adapted 
to  concealing  a  thing,  as  he  was  adapted  to  doing  it.  Liv.  33,  28. 

Hem.  237.  The  GEnuNDiAL  dative  is  to  the  prepositional  oEnrTTDiAi.  nfter  ad.  in  the 
relation  of  ttie  exception  to  the  rule ;  both  beinir  employed  as  objects  of  aim  and  pur- 
pose.   The  followiiiir  are  the  chief  differences  of  these  constructions : 

L  The  gerundial  dative  is  almost  exclusively  restricted  to  gerundive  phrases,  while 
the  prepositional  gerundial  may  assume  the  form  of  a  gerund  absolute  (for  verbs  with- 
out transitive  objects)  or  that  of  a  gerundive  phrase.  We  may  say  either  diem  '  coinifiis 
habendis^  dicere,  or  diem '  ad  comitia  habenda '  dicere.  but  we  cannot  say  diem  conveniendo 
dicere,  the  form  diem  ad  conveniendum  eilicere  being  the  only  correct  one. 

2.  The  irerundial  dative  alone  is  applicable  if  the  principal  verb  is  one  which  governs 
the  dative  of  a  substantive  (R.  209)-  It  the  verb  may  be  construed  either  with  a  dative 
or  with  ad.  the  two  constructions  have  a  different  meaning.  Thus  deesse  alicid  rei 
faciendiZmQ&miohc  remiss  in  something  (R.  209),  while  deesse  ad  remfaciendamme&ns 


190 


REVERSED   PHRASES. 


to  be  wantmc:',  as  Tlr«?  d^fntnt  ad  expiignandam  vrbem  (not  erpugnandct  vrM)  the 
means  are  wantintj  to  c:iptu  e  the  city.— yir/fw-sY  (scrifjendo)  inean.«  to  be  prcsenl  af  an 
aci ;  ade.^se  ad  a/K/'am  rtinjaritndam  (Liv.  2,  19)  me  m»  to  b.-  present/or  sl future  act 

.{.  11  thepriiiKliai  is  an  AUVKKP.rAi,  object  of  purpose,  the  darive  form  is  re^tricted 
to  phrases  ronuiinmj?  a  noun  io  which  the  purpose  primarily  refers  (U  211)  •  but  the  pre- 
positiotial  ;:eriin(liai  may  l)e  applied  whether  it  relers  to  such  a  noun  or  not'  H.  nee  it  is 
very  trequenily  connected  witti  verb»  denotin-r  a  motio  i  in  space,  where  the  qenindial 
dntive  IS  excluded;  as  Mlfttre  lefjatos  ad  panin  fncitndam.  but  not  paH  facie ikUv  •  ire 
ad  urtk^m  opjmr/nandam.  not  i/rOi  o/>j)U{//>aridiv.  On  the  other  side  the  .-erundial  dative 
IS  the  normal  form  to  indicate  the  specutl  purpose  of  offices,  and  with  the  word  cwfii- 
lUl.  See  K.  211,  Obs.  2  (o, 

4.  VVhen  ADJKCTivKs  jrovcrn  a  gerundial,  the  prepositional  form  is  far  more  usual 
than  the  jjerundul  dative  (li.  210). 

liem,  2:^8.  The  difference  of  the  participial  crcrnndive  (R.  177)  from  the  prepositional 
jreruiidial  (both  expressing,'  purpose),  is  determined  by  th.'  relation  of  the  «'erundial  to 
the  transitive  obj.ct,  or  to  ttie  pissive  subject  of  the  principal  predicate."  The  parti- 
cipial ^'enindive  can  only  be  eniploved  1)  if  the  -gerundial  is  a  transitive  verb  and  2»  if 
Us  transitive  olijcct  is  the  same  with  the  transitive  ol)ject  or  passive  suinJct  of  the 
principal  predicate.  Hence  a  prepositional  ^'erundial.  not  a  participial  L'erundive  ib 
used  1)  It  it  isa  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  ;  2i  if  it  ig  a  transitive  verb,  but  if  its  tran- 
sitive objoct  IS  not  identical  with  the  transitive  object  or  the  passive  sul)ject  of  iho 
principal  predicate,  as  (a)  Lcjrionem  unam  in  a<?ros  ad  fruinentandum  mittif  (b)  ho- 
jxatos  Atlienas  ad  pace m  facint dam  mittif.  In  neither  of  these  two  example-*  a  pakti- 
cipiALi;erundive  would  be  admissible.  Hut  even  in  such  instances  where  a  particinial 
^'erundive  is  correct,  it  may  generally  be  replaced  bv  a  prepositional  .'erund  altcrW 
In  this  case  the  transitive  object,  or  the  passive  subject  of  the  principal  predicate  loses 
Its  i^erundive  attribute  whu  n  becomes  an  adverbial  object  in  the  form  of  a  preoosi- 
tional  .'erund  alter  ad.  The  transitive  object  of  this  jjerund  mu>t  be  alwavs  Vnoku- 
STooi),  beiuf,'  conceived  as  a  personal  pronoun  referrini;  to  the  object  or  subject  of  the 
principa!  predicate.  Thus  the  lollowinj,'  sentence  witii  a  participial  -erundive  '  Inslru- 
mcnla  Afh^nas  7'efi<tefida  luittit  mi-ht  be  changed  into  a  sentence  with  a  preposi- 
tioiial  -erund  Instraitunta  AlhZnas  ad  rf^finenduin  (i.e. «a)  mittit,  both  bein.'  ren- 
dered in  the  same  way  (he  sends  the  instruments  to  Athens  f<.r  repsir  (to  be  rei.Mired) 
It  IS,  however,  more  usual  to  apply  in  such  cases  participial  gerundives  (see  K  lyO)  ami 
prepositional  irerunds  ran  never  be  employed  when  the  whole  gerundive  phrase  iini<t  be 
considered  as  a  transitive  t)biect  of  the  piineipal  predicate  (R.  198).  ThiA  we  can  never 
say  iKM'f.m  ad  fanejHlum  o/ranf,  or  opus  ad  faciendum  locavU  iuet.  oi  mntem  facien- 
dunt  cui  ant,  opus  faciendum  locCivit. 

liem.  239.  Tlie  verbs  and  verbal  phrases  with  which  prepositional  •••e- 
rundials  after  ad  may  be  connected,  ;ire  "^ 

1)  Verbs  in  wliicli  the  idea  of  a  purpose  or  aim  is  contained  so  that 
the  gerundial  only  specirtes  the  idea  already  implied  in  the  verb;  as 

Mindre.  to  destine,  to  allot,  Liv.  5,  21 ;  se  arcommoddre.  to  make  one's  self  fit   Ex  4  • 


tncumbere  ^w^  accedeve  \o  apply  oiie"s  self,  Cic.  Sull.29;  Leg.  2.  18;  xe  transferre  tJ 
'If.  Cic.  Mur.  22,  4ri ;  adhifhre.  to  apply,  Liv.  21.  :A\  incUndre,  to  incline. 


devote  one's  sell 


f  T„  o<-  o  . .    "   •     r  '       '  ""/"""^'  '"  "JMoy,  i^iv.  XI.  ;>*;  incnnare,  to  incline, 

Liv.  2/),  35  ,  ainnmm  coiicertere,  or  adctrtere,  to  direct  one's  attention,  Liv.  20  40-  24 
18;  niti  and  adnlti,  to  stnve,  Ca^s.  B.  G.  7,  63;  Liv.  27,  14  ;  txcitdre,  to  excite,  E.x.  d:' 

fl'.75'X  l"i  'S^'*"  V  T'^-  ^'r  -^-  ?'  "^'/f.'-^-,^,»  stimulate.  Liv.  27,  37;  accendtre,  to  i..: 
tlaine,  lb.  ^A^^-addmrre,  to  induce,  Cic.  Mur.  37,  7S  ;  ^/id/Jrc,  to  solicit.  Liv.  25  15- 
twvi/v',  to  call,  lb.  ;  adhortan,  tocxhort,  Cic.  Kab.  1, 1 ;  elicere,  to  insti-'ate  Liv  25  15  ' 

P.r'nff'/^iu""^'';-^'-^*^'-/^-.^'-.  -^'  •»ii.  ^"i^"'--'-'^  «»^  supi>ttere,\o  be  sufficient,' Ex.  5,' 
Cic.  Ofl.  1, 19;  pertititre,  to  belou:;,  Cic.  Off.  1.  G  ;  ,  ^  , 

and  other  verbs  of  similar  import.  The  prepositional  gerunds  depend- 
ent (m  these  verbs  must  be  considered  as  co.mi'lktin(}  objects  since 
tlie  verbal  idea  would  be  incomplete  witliout  them.  These  «■•(Ti'indials 
are  mostly  rendered  by  English  object-itdinitives,  which,  iirthis  con- 
nection, are  neither  equivalents  of  the  Latin  object-inlinitive  nor  of 
English  phrases  with  'in  order  to'.  ' 

2)  Verbs  of  all  kinds,  not  containing  the  idea  of  i)urpose,  to  which  the 
gerundial  after  ad  is  added  as  an  advekhial  object  of  purj)ose  Such 
gerundials  are  equivalent  to  a  linite  clause  with  ut^  and  are  rendered 
either  by  'in  order  to',  or  by  an  object-intinitive  equivalent  to  it,  or  by 


1 


> 


i 


I 


■^f. 


PREPOSITIONAL  GERUNDIALS. 


191 


for'  with  a  participial.      Here  belong  all  verbs  of  motion  {ire,  venire^ 

projicisci,  dueere,  mittere^  etc.),  jind  every  transitive  or  neuter  verb  which 

may  be  conceived  as  an  action  for  a  purpose,  as  : 

Ad  reliqucLft  nai'i-s  reficiendas  cere  vt(:hdtur,  for  repairing,  (in  order  to  repair)  the  other 
eliips.  he  employed  brass.  Cies.  B.  G.  4,31. — liruVii  jnulti  interfecti  a  militibus  s^urd  ad 
exstinguendam  /nxHlitionis  Jaitwm,  many  Bruttians  were  killed  by  the  soldiera  (ii;i  order) 
to  smother  the  tale  of  their  treachery.  Liv.  27,  16. 

3)  Verbal  phrases,  either  predicative  or  objective,  in  which  not  the 
verb,  but  the  noun  is  qualilied  or  determined  by  an  idea  of  aim  or  pur- 
pose, as 

Tempi's  dare  or  pefere  ad  aliqvam  rem,faciendam^  to  give  or  ask  time  for  doing  some- 
thing. Liv.  27.  24.  4U ;  diem  dicere,  Liv.  22.  11 ;  ngnum  dare,  lb.  45,  34  ;  riam  quoerere, 
Liv.  3,  55,  6;  rires  desunt  or  deficiunl  ad  aliquid  faciendum,  strength  is  wanted  to  do 
something,  Liv.  42,49.  Here  belong  some  predicative  expressions  with  predicate-nom- 
inatives, or  predicate-datives,  as  ;  Consiiles  ad  ofnnia  qux  aspera  sunt  sut>eunda  duces 
esse  debent.  L.  26.  36.  Thus  are  construed  opus  est,  and  the  frequent  phrases  with  the 
abstract  datives  usui  and  impedimento  (usui  e>!se,  to  be  of  use  ;  impedunento  e'>se,  to  be 
an  obstacle  to),  as  Omnia  dterant  quae  ad  reficiendas  navis  erant  usui,  Ca?s.  B.  G.  4,  29. 

Th(-se  expressions  must  be  considered  as  virtual  attributes  of  nouns, 

though  they  tire  grammatically  made  dependent  on  verbs.     Hence  they 

are  olten  replaced  by  grammatical  attributes  in  the  genitive,  as  Hignumpro- 

Jiciscendl  dedit,  Liv.  i-'2,  42. 

Op*  It  is  unusual  for  gerundials  after  ad  to  be  employed  as  grammatical  attributes 
without  being  joined  to  a  verb.  But  occasionall)'  gerandial  attributes  with  ad  are  found, 
as  yaves  se.raginfa  ires  expuqndtex.  sunt,  qucedam  .cum  ?naterid  ad  classem  oidificandam, 
some  with  materials  for  buililing  a  fleet,~Liv.  26.47. — Jbi  audlfur  P.  Decii  eventus,  ingens 
hortameii  ad  omnia  pro  republicd  avdenda,  there  the  affair  of  P.  Decius  was  heard  oi^  a 
strong  incitement  to  venture  everything  for  the  republic.  Liv.  10,  29. 

1.  Hoc  vitium  qui  cffugere  volet  a(//i?6?6i<  ad  considerandas^  re^  et  tempus  et  dili- 
gentiam.  Cic.  Off.  1.  6.—  2.  Helvetii  constituCrunt,  ea  quie  ad  projicixcendwn  (to 
march)  perti/ierent.  compar5re.  C:es.  B.G.  1,  3.—  3.  Terrae  ciiltiim  segniOrem^  suspicor 
fore  si  a'/ ca//i  utendam  lerrOqiie^  si/bigendam  supersiitiOnis*  aliquid  accesserit.  Cic. 
hvi:^.  2,  18.—  4.  Kriictuosior^  homiiuim  generi  est  vita  eOrum  qui  se  ad  rempublicam  et 
atl  maqnas  res  gerendas  accommodaverunt.  Cic.  Off.  1,  21.—  5.  Sp.  Lucretius,  magno 
nalu*.  non  sufficitutibus  jam  viribus  ad  considaria''  munera*^  of>evnda^,  intra  paucos  dies 
moritur.  Liv.  2,8,  4. —  6.  Hoc  omuls  excitdvit  ad o.nna  capienda^° opemque^^  jam  prope 
capi;e  nrh'xftrendam.  Il>.  25.  24.—  7.  Cives  non  dubitilbant,  hostem  deletis  exercitibus 
ad  expugnandam  L'oniam  veniQrum.  lb.  22,  5<».—  8.  Ca'sar  Kutenos  ad  fnW^  Volcd- 
rum  jX)pulandos  mittit.  Cics.  B.  G.  7.  64. —  9.  Expetuntur^^  divitiie  quum  ad  usus  vitae 
necessarios.  tum  ad  ])effruendas  rotupfdtes.  Cic.  Off.  1,  7. —  10.  Adolescentes,  sapientis 
viros  consulentes,  opinionem  afferiint**  populo,  eOrum  se  fore  simills  quos  sibi  ipsi 
deleqerunt^^  ad  imifandum.  Cic.  Off.  2,  13.—  11.  Scipio.  quod  plurimum  ad  accendendos^^ 
niililuin  animos  intererat^'' ,  testis'*  spectatorque  virtfltis  atque  ignavist'*  cujusque 
aderat.  Liv.  2*5,  44. —  12.  Ubii  navium  magnam  cojnam  ad  tran^iwrtandum-^  exeicitum 
2)oHicebantur.  Cies.  B.  G.  4,  16.—  13.  Consul  quum  h  gionil)U8  ad  convenienditm^^  dicTn 
dixit,  non  aiippicato  templum  iiitrasse  argueojltur^^.  Liv.  4,  5,  12. —  14.  Ab  Celtibgris 
diis  ad  consultandtini'^^  peCda  ed-*.  lb.  34,  19.—  15.  Siculi  oita  luce  contionem"^^  hubi- 
turi  sunt  ad  crindnandum  me.  ad  concitandumqve"^  in  vos  populum.  lb.  24,  38. — 
16.  Pomnejus  tibi  gravissimus auctorad  in,stitu(ndam'^^,  fideliesimus  socii's ad comparan- 
datn^^,  fort issim us  a(//«/or  c/(/  rem^^  j)erftciendam^°  fuit.  Cic.  Dom.  iv,  30. —  17.  In  tri- 
buiullu  plus  virium  t'st  ad  vexandum  sendtum.  qiiam  ad  renstendum  improbis  collggis. 
Liv.  4,48.  14. —  18.  Hoc  mihi  numquam  impedimento  ad  rempublicam  bene  gerendani" 
fuit.  lb.  45,  39. —  19.  Hoc  nobis  nuiximo  usui  ad  concUiundos  barbarOrum  animos  erit. 
lb.  26,^3. —  20,  Ii)si  scitis  quanto  exercitu  adT  Capuam  obsidendam  opus  sit.  lb.  26,  8. 

»  To  contemplate.—  2  plow.—  3  iron ;  here  'the  plow.'—  *  superstition.—  »  beneficial. 

—  •  in  his  advanced  age.—  '  consular.—  «  miinvs,  duty.—  »  to  perform.—  '°  to  take  up. — 
'^  P.  1.  p.  127. —  '■-'  territory. —  i^  expetere  aliquid,  to  seek  for  soniethinir.—  '*  to  impart. 

—  »5  Jo  select. — '"  t*)  lire.—  '^  plurimum  interest,  it  is  most  important.—  '^  witness. — 
»»  cowardice,—  20  to  convey.—  -1  to  assemble.—  '■"'-  to  accuse.—  '^  to  deliberate.—  -*  to 
request,  to  apply  for.—  "^  a  meeting.—  2«  to  excite.—  "7  to  conceive.—  ^^  to  prepare- 
rs your  plans.— '3"  lo  carry  out.—  ^i  to  administer. 


192 


EEVERSED   PHRASES. 


Bern.  240.  Adjectives  denoting  QH^litios  representee!  as  bein.i^ooo^^ 
FiTYor  seme  end  or  purpose,  or  as  holding  «^^>«;^"\\^.^.,^  ,^.^,  aenoUn  ^ 
RESPECT   to  a  puri>ose,are  constnunnvilli  ad  "^^ ^^^"^}^^ ^^^^ 
tlwMMid  or  numose      This  construction  is  more  «j^eneiiil  in  its  cnaiacAcr 
t  an  oth^^uncKal  dative  dependent  on  adjectives,  and  may  ah^^^^^ 

brrul'ituted  fm-  i t^     The  number  of  these  adjectives  is  very  large.     Here 

beloiii;  ...         ^._ 

1.  Tiiose  denoting  fitness  and  suitableness  of  persons  or  things  lor 

a  ]Mirpose,  as 


2.  Those  denoting  easy  and  difficult,  as  „  ^  «?o. 

Fanli^,  Liv.  27,  11  ;  Cic.  Off.  3,  6 ;  Tusc.  1,  32,  aud  often  ;  dlfficihs,  Cic.  \  err.  .,  3,  hi , 
Ktp.  l':j5;  arduus,  Liv.  24,  31. 

3  Tliose  denoting  sufficient  and  necessary,  as 

%nn.  Cic  V  R  Qn   1  3 :  Liv.  2.>.  .30,  and  «.ften  ;   nece^.^anu.<^.  Cic.  Off.  3,  b  and  often. 
nt^^SonVthe  ixpiH^/.ion.  opu.^  6v/,  and  mcesse  est.  li.  2:J1),  No.  3. 

4  Those  denoting  re.vdiness  or  inclination,  and  their  contraries,  as 

*T.     -,        r.«.  R  r   •)  91  •   1    1',  •   1   41-   Liv.  27.  43  and  often  ;    prompt'/.^,  \av.  2b,  1; 

lor  Cic.  Rep.  2,  12 ;  Ih.  C«c.  4 ;  -^egnu^,  slow,  not  di.'posed  to  (Ex.  l.i). 
^» '  Those  denoting-  coneral  personal  qualities  or  dispositions  of  cliarac- 
tei  wliich  by  the  gt^-undials  are  restricted  in  tlieir  relations  or  etfects,  as 

k:'^-ln^^>^:u!i^pi\  ferox,  Liv.  7,  27  ;   jyeriinax,  Liv.  5,  7,  1  ;   mterjer,  fresh 

(Ex.  19)  \€  oquen.^      \.       -  .      .      foUowed  by  for  or  fo  with  an  infinitive  (too 

''''^^VJ'\^hm:    etTi '  ^^uun^^^^^  b/a-'uorandial  after  ad  dependent 

poor  to  .  ny  a  }}'''''jyl'j:\jf,,^^^^^  but  bva  clause  with  vmm  »/  after  a  com- 

on  adjectives  mot  .im.^^^^^^^^  ,„,,fi,reref.   Attains  was  too 

r.NE  in  place  ontn.rnndahs.,lnt..  aft^M-  ad  ;  but  not  m  place  of  a  .^erundive,  and  NMth 

3.  Re  iquie  "a^^^^*^""?.,.^      4    iiannibil  ctimdelcctis*  ped  turn  equirnmque  quam  poterat 
rio3  factac.t*.  lb.  4^^^^^^^^         l^\l^^^^,,^^^  contendit^  Liv.  2r,,  5.-  5.  Visdicendi« 

"^^r'f^'n  icTtri^  om  alperLuImduni  acrommoddUe.  Cic   Ac.  1,  S  .32.-  6.  Om- 

est  t'^pli<''^trix   or^iuoni       «*  opes^' tmnda^t  ac  (enendas  quam  (iilisi,  iiec  a/j- 

nnim  rerum  nee  «/>/*'/^^ 

taJ^i'crclSam  emL'uv'39;  l.ls.  Uti-^  nulla  materies  tam/m/i.  a^..rarae.c..<^.m»3 


'  ♦  Instead  of  utilis  ad  rem  faciendam,  generally  the  phrase  nsui  esse  is  employed.  See 

^^i^Kv'no  m'panc  -  '  to  land  -  "  alarm.-  «./?m,  to  arise,  to  spread  in.-  »  picked  men. 
JMrhtS-^o  hur.y^-«oratonal  power-»  the  expounder.- >»  lan^^uage.- 
11  property,—  »2  as.—  "  to  kindle,  to  be  inflamed. 


TREPOSITIONAL  GERUNDIALS. 


193 


c««t  nuiei  ni<i'  admOto  i^ni  iirnem  concipere^  possit,  pic<  nulla  mens  est  tama^f  mm- 
wvSimriJ/ioratOrisparflta  qiiajpossit  incei.dis  nisi«  inflammatus  ipse' ad  earn  et 
Kmsac(^e^"eriV8  Cic  Or^  Fu-a  htind  difficili.^  evat  ad  erumpendum^  inter 

Numidi  Ov  2.5  '34.-  10  Bene  scntlreio^rectgquefacere  safL<>  est  ad  bene  beateqvem. 
vendnm^''  Cic  Fam.  (5,  1.  3.-11.  Ut  adbella  ^vsdpiemia^^  GallOrnm  a/oc^rac  promptus 
eS  animus  sic  inollh  Ac  minimeia  resistens  dd  calamitates  perferendas  mens  fram  est. 
Cr  "  B  G  3  V\  -  12.  Omnes  infe>di  erant  ad  opem  i,o^*  ferend am  nnde  penculum  osten- 
del)-itnr  Liv  26  46.—  13.  NatflrS  »w/)«««i  sumus  ad  diliirendos  homines.  Lie.  Le<:.  1, 
i-V-  4  koianhTradk^redendi/m^^  fui,  quod  difficile  est  de  discessui»  voluntar.o" 
sine  uim  spe  mVi^tioni«i^  co-itSre.  Cic.  Att.  9,  1-3, 4.-15.  Hannibal  segmor  ad  credendum 
K  n,  •;  faS.  i  cTl^^^  24,  14.-  1«.  Atheniensium  populnm  famai»  est  celerem  et  su- 
^^^^1^:^;^^i  ...eadco.and,m:^^.  Liv.  45  ^^^--.n.  Milites  hostem  tnj/^^^^^^^^ 
rtf/ comminns-ii  comerenda!^  maim^i  expulC-runt  loco.  Liv.  2.,  IB.— 1«.  Nome  quod  «a 
cowmemm-'wdum"-'^  honeMius^\  id  [non]  ad  prfandum  multo  vidgn  debet^^^?»^; .' Cic^ 
Div  Ca'c  20  65  —  19.  Rex  in^^7?w  habere  voluit  copias  «rf  o;)^m  propinquis/frm</arn 
civitatibns  sui-".  Liv.  36,  16.—  20  L.  Paullus  eloquentem  ad  insligandam'^*  multitudmem 
inimlciim  in  cat-tris  habebat,  Liv.  45,  37. 

§  539.  Tbe  preposition  in  with  the  accusative  of  gerun- 
dives (never  gerunds)  always  combines  two  meanings,  1)  one 
of  the  local  or  figurative  relations  expressed  by  in  with  the 
accusative  of  nouns  (§  450,  R.  69  ;  §  451,  K  70.  71) ;  2)  the  idea 
of  an  aim,  purpose,  or  tendency. 

Jn  aanim  Sequandnmi  iwpvlandvm  miffi,  to  be  sent  to  the  tenitoty  of  the  Sequani  in 

order  to  plunder  it  (to  be  sent  to  plunder  the  territory  of  the  bequaui). 

Eefn  241  The  construction  of  the  prepositional  crerundive  after  in  with  the  accusative, 
wl'iei  a  real  purpose  is  expressed  by  it.  l^ears  a  stron-  analogy  to  the  construction  of  the 
PArTicimA  .  -^^^^^^^  (H.  1T6  foil.).     What  in  this  latter  construction  is  the  transitive 

ob  S  of  Jhe^pruuipal  predicate,  is  in  the  prepositional  ^'^"-""dive  a  prepo>ntional  object 
w I  h  in  The  <u-rundive  performs  in  both  conslructions  exactly  tlie  same  office,  m- 
diea  in-  tin    purpose  which  attaches  to  the  object  of  the  Pnncipal  verb.     The  same 

re-n  nt  neauini  is  often  contained  in  the  -erundive  after  ad,  as:  Gesar  RntSnos  ad 
^MvZ-innn  populaado.  mitt.t  (inst.  of  ad  JinU  w-Unf  ad  popula7idos  fj),C^l^^  B  ^ 
7  U  In  all  the«»e  constructions  the  ffovernimr  noun  of  the  gerundive  is  at  the  same 
tiim-'a  :  bsta  ive  o  cc  of  the  prindpal  predicate,  so  that  two  diflferent  constructions 
(IKit  of  an  ordinary  object,  and  that  of  a  reversed  phrase  as  object)  are  blended 
together. 

Rem  242  A  ^erundial  in  the  accusative  after  in  is  especially  used  1)  to  give  to  the 
nrecliaue  botha  h,cal,  and  a  fiirurative  sense,  the  local  sense  referring  to  the  noun,  the 
S^niriHveVen^^  the  -erundial.  Ex.  1-6.  17.  18.  It  is  2)  employed  in  a  merely  fig- 
S;aiv4  sense  (»M^  with  verbs  which  originally  have  a  local  ".eaning      o 

i8tin-ni«h  it  from  a  -erundial  after  ad  in  a  similar  manner  as  m  and  ad  wnth  sub- 
stanthx  obicct'  are  di-tin-uished  (^  4.50. 451 ,  R.  41 ).  Ex.  12-16. 19.  This  may  be  especially 
seen  1  thSstruction  f  he  verbs  fmn.ferre  (to  transfer  to\  and  oon/./j^  (to  apply  to 
?ot"irn  to).  These  verbs  are  construed  with  m  and  a  gemndive  ^::'^^  §  11?!  <^?«\»«^^^3^^ 
when  the  relation  may  be  conceived  as  a  metaphor  of  ri..^cE  (Ex  7.  9.  1»),  but  with  a<f 
when  th's  is  not  the  case  (Ex.  8. 11),  or  when  the  gerundial  is  a  neuter  verb,  only  a  gerun- 
dive phrase  being  allowed  after  i/i  requiring  an  accusative,  bee  hx.  lu. 

1.  Marcius  in  barbaros''^  sub  jus  dicionemquc^s  redigendos  missus  est.  Liv.  28,  21  .— 

il._<.  to  iatch.-  *  so.-  6  i,tcaidere.  to  fire,  to  kindle.-  «  unless  -  '.^eing  inflamed  him^ 
self -8  ad  earn  acce-^serit,  he  approaches  it.- ^  ervrnpere,  to  break  forth.- i»  to  have 
go  d  principlS  We  comprise  both  co-ordinate  subject-infinitives  in  one  ^^^.^TZ^^ni' 
?to  act  on  correct  principles'.  The  Latin  lancruage  cannot  reach  here  the  Eng  ish  preci- 
4on  -  "  life.-  12  to  take  up.-  i»  ac  minims  remfms ...  est,  and  has  no  (re^i=^t mg) 
nowerof-"  eo...vnde.  in  that  direction  where.-  i^  todepart-i«  departure.-"  yolun- 
Eirv  -^  18  return-  i«  fama  est,  it  is  universally  believed.-  2°  for  enterprises.-  'i  corn- 
minus  conmemanui  to  fight  hand  by  hand'-  «  to  mention.-  '^3  The  comparative 
ESS  reh^-antly  i^sed  instead  of  a  positive,  as  if  the  tNvo  clauses  were  members 
2?Tcomp'risoz1,  wlJch  according  to  §  3(|,  vvould  require  ,^oth  adject.v^s  toj^e^n  the 
"omparative  degree.-  2*  to  stir  up.—  -»  See  §  45.i.  R.  76.—  26  §  4a4.  ,Sw6jWcS  au^ionemque 
redigere,  is  a  regular  formula,  expressing  complete  subjugation. 


194 


EEVERSED   PHRASES. 


S  H  10.  The  proposition  in  ^vitl.  a  gevun.lial  Aiu.AT.vr.  (ger- 
„nd  or  .^erunaiv^.),  i«  "''<'<1  1)  »^  ^'>^'  <>''■''''''  of  verbs  w.th  ong.n- 
ally  loc^l  meaning.,  which  re.p.iro  prepositional  oluoct.  w.th  ». 
an<l  the  ablative,  as  esse,versCa-i,s!twn  esse  (to  be  situated)  co^- 
locare  (?  453, 11.  74) ;  2)  ,as  the  objeet  of  A.uncnvEs,  or  the  .at  n- 
bute  ofxouNS  restricted  or  determined  in  their  meanings  by  the 
.erundial,  as  tardus,  celc;  dlffnltas ;  Z)  to  de.u.tc  ixdepend- 
KNT  actions  conceived  as  coincident  with  the  prmc.pal  predi- 
cate beincr  equivalent  to  a  clause  witli  Mi'e  or  when. 


-^*}u>c  lantiim  bo„U  h.  ;,MHftt  a  mMu-m  a.  ^'V'';-.^.;^;;^;:-  "'about.-  i«  from  his  inili- 
tarv  dutifs.— -°  to  watcli  over,  //t  l^  1i<;h>  ponuuu}  "  i«'.'       »,<  ,  ,.. ....!, ..tmntisp^ 


TREPOSITIONAL    GERUNDIALS. 


195 


fni««c  aeqnlor  Q.  Mncins  was  believed  to  bave  been  rather  slow  in  adminuiering  jy>Jhli^ 
a1fair<i  C'c  i>om.  M.  91.—  In  comHio  cmiiendo  oinneni  Galliam  reppiciamus,  in  takutg 
are^olvtion  (i.  e..  while,  or  wheu  we  take  a  resolution)  let  us  consider  the  whole  of 
Gaul.  Cffis.  B.  G.  7,  77. 

1  Omni-»  cogitatioi  aut  in  consilils  camendh^  de  rebu?  honeati?»  et  pertinentibus*  ad 
bcn'e  bt-aieouo  viv.-ndufn.  aut  in  studii?-  .scientia;*  coi,'niti()uisque«  versatvr'' .  Cic.  Off. 
10-'*  Cii  Plantius  totam  euam  quait»t1Irani8  in  me  suntentando^  et  com-ervando  collo- 
cr7r?7i»~Cic  P  K.  S.  14.  .35.— 3.  Si  respublica  «tetip?et»i,  «n  agendo  plus  quam  in 
scribe/ido  operse  poncrCn  usis.  cic.  Off.  2,  1.—  4.  Britanni  disper^^o^i»  noptroi»  niiliteP  tn 
viffendo^*'  ocaypa/os  nubito  adorti  Mint.  (\pp.  B.  G.  4.  :^2.—  5.  Cnrius  quum  iardvs  in 
cor/ifaudo  turn  in  imtrvendo^^  disnpatvs  fuit.  Cic.  Brut.  59.  216.-  6.  TePtinionium 
dicii»9  natio  minime  in  iei<iim(miis  di/^endis  religidsa^\  Cic.  Flacc.  10.  23.-7.  Per^eve- 
rmtia  in  oinni  «'I'liere  militia»"^.  ma.xiuK;  tamen  in  obnidendis  urbibns  nece^sarta  et«t. 
Liv  o  «)  9  — 8.  Omnia  ilia,  dignitas  in  ."ententiis  dicendl^^^,  libertas  in  repvblicd  cape/s- 
fie/)dd'^''>  ea  tota  sublilta  sunt.  Cic.  Fam.  1.  8,  S.— 9.  Non  ilhv  eunt  polas  virtfites  jmpera- 
toria^^j  quae  vuI<^o  cxistimantur,  labor  in  nejrotiif'.  indvstria  in  agendo,  cderttas  in  conn- 
ciemln  connlium'''^  injwocidendo.  Cic.  Le-,'.  Man.  11.  29.-  10.  Legati  in  cornmemoranda-^ 
civitjlti- (<Uie)m/ami^/7/'«.  exscxcentis  ad  trlj*  PenatOre?  sese  redactos'-^*  esse  dixerunt. 
C-r>«  B  (}  2  28  —  11  Maris  pericula  tiniGre  ccepi  i/i  tantd  pecunid  reqiam  Italiam  tra- 
jinendd'^'ei  victrn-e"-^  exercHu  trawportaudo'^-' .  Liv.  45.  41.-  12.  LegSti  inpetenda'^^  pace 
eiu^  rei  culpum^»  in  multitudin.-m  contulCruntao.  Cics.  B.  G.  4.  27.-  13.  Manns  in  de- 
rnonstrandis^^  locis^-  acpersdni^^^  advtrbiOrum^*  atque  pronominums^  obtment3«  vicem. 
Quint.  11.  3,  87. 

§  541.  Tlie  gcrundial  ablative  after  ab  is  used  as  the  object 
of  verbs   denoting  separation,  and  of  verbs  denoting  origin 

(§  441,  R.  4S). 
Hern  243   To  the  verbs  admitting  thif»  construction  belong  a^fiinere,  to  abstain  from, 

Liv.  39,25";  2.22:  deferrete  ami  ab'^ferrere,  to  deter,  Liv.  lO-.H  ;  2:?' 1  :  Cic  Or.  1;  Fm. 

5  IS  •  dixcfdere  (Ex.  3) ;  decedere,  Cic.  Cicc.  2.  5 ;  r^cedere.  Cic.  Off.  1,44 ;  refugere,  Cic. 

Or  2'  3-  e.rdudere,  Cic.  Ac.  2.  17.  53  :  absfrohere,  Liv.  26,  12;  Cic.  Seu.b-.rtiidicare    to 

dol'vnd   from   Liv.  26.  13  ;  abhorrere.  Liv.  4,  6,  7 :  avejtere  (Ex.  5) ;  arocare,  Cic.  ben.  5, 15  ; 

amortre,  Cic.  Pr.  Cons.  1,  2  ;  onri,  to  ori-inate  in  (Ex.  G).  mpi.^se{Ex.  7).  as  _ 
deferrere  /losn.'^  a  pers^f/'/endo.  to  datev  the  enemy  from  pursuing;  abstinere  a  pr(^da 
fanendd^xo  abstain   horn  making  booty;  avocdri  a  voluptatibus  perfruejidis,  to  be 
called  away  from  the  enjoyment  of  pleasures. 
Ob*»    To  the  verbs  of  origin  on  which  gerundials  after  ab  may  depend,  belong  those 

denotin"-  the  derivation  of  words  from  Latin  verbs,  as  :  a  scribe  n  do  fit  (is  derived)  sanptor 

(-ee  H   Tm4  4)     Karelv  <'eriindials  after  ab  are  used  as  attributes  of  nouns  derived 

from  the  verbs  mentioned  above,  as:  Arocatio  a  cogifandd  moledid,  &  ca.iVmg  a.way  (of 

the  mind)  from  pcmderiug  on  unpleasant  events.  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  15. 

1  Lc'Mlti  deterruervnt  suos  ab  auxilio  circumsessa?^'  \nh\ferendo.  Liv.  40.  47.—  2.  Ab 
horum  ~a;fafiby-\  digjnfafib>t<qi/€,  et  ho/m^ibm  violn7)di<i  abf^tinebdhir.  lb.  5.  25,  -3.-  3.  In 
hoc  uno  «unt^e  ceteras»  ut  homo  numquam  a  se  ip.^o  in>^tituendo^°  contemplandoque  dis- 
cedat*^  Cic  Rep  2  42  —  4.  Tn  litteris  scripsit  Hannibal,  prolectiOnem-»^  Kuam  ab^trac- 
^w;'am*3  ad  defendendam  Romam  ab  oppuqnandd  Capua  exercitus  RomSiios.  Liv.  26. 
7—5  Seleucus  facile  Philippuin  ab  auHlio  Rom5nis/.?mvcfoad  sua  tuenda  are?-{et**.  lb. 
36  7—  6  yl  .SVf7?//*?'o  potissimumo/V)'/^;?ff»r/obfllumPunicum  secundum  or«iA««'.s^.  lb 
26' 43— 7   Discordia  inter  plebem  ac  patres"exorta4«,a^^cfwi>;ica/irfo*T  qua3stOrum«? 


1  Thinking. 
•  knowledLre 


-  2  to  take  resolutions.—  »  moral  subjects.—  •*  pertaining.—  »  science.— 
-  Kui,»i.-^ -^-  —  7  consists  in.—  »  qua^storship.—  » to  sustain.—  i»  coUocare  tn,  toappiyto 
(literally  to  place  in).—  "  to  last.—  »2  operamponere  in,  to  devote  one's  labor  to.—  i!|  dis- 
persed —  ^*tnefere.  to  cut  grain.—  1»  dixsipdtusin  infttrucndo,  prolix  in  his  compositions. 
--  »«  to  o-ive  evidence  (a  passive  construction  must  be  given  to  the  Emrlish  sentence). - 
IT  scrupulous  —  18  in  military  operations  of  all  kinds.—  i^  senfenfias  dicere.  to  state  the 
reasons  of  one's  votes  in  the  senate,  (to  express  one's  opinions.)—  •^^rempvblicamcapcj- 
sere.  to  apply  for  public  office.- 21  imperatorial.- 22  judsrment.- "  to  stare.— 24  rg^/t- 
mre  to  reduce —  25  to  ship  over.—  2«  victorious,—  27  to  convey.—  28  to  sue  for.—  29  the 
responsibility  for.— 3°  to  lav  on.—  si  to  point  at.—  32  localities.—  ^^  persdna,  person.— 
»«  adverbium  adverb.-  3»  pronbmen,  pronoun.—  3«  7nrem  obfiner^.  to  take  or  supply  the 
place  —  37  t  )'bcsi.'<'e.—  3«  e.<tse,  to  be  contained.—  3»  all  other  things.—  ■»<>  to  instruct.— 
*i  to  come  back  from,  to  leave  off.  —  ^-^  march.— *^  abslrabcre,  to  abstract,  take  away 
from.—  **  to  avert.—  «  patricians.—  ««  exorlri  =  Of'iri.-*''  to  double.—  *«  a  quastor. 


196 


BEYEESED   PHRASES. 


nvvyn-o  ro'pfa^  est.  lb.  4,  A\  3.-  8.  Consnlcs  appdUlti'^  mint  a  considendo,  non  a  reg- 
nando  ;U(hil'  dominando.  Cic.  in  Au;;.  Civ.  D.  5,  12.  i  •  r 

§•!!•>.  Geruiidials    after  Je   are  used,  both    as    objects  ot 
verbs,  uiul  attributes  ot    nouns,  to  denote  the  subject-matter 
of  actions,  especially  of  those  expressed  by  verbs  of  thinking, 
sayin<>",  writini^,  and  bv  nouns  of  similar  import  (§  445),  as: 

\,M.-Lex  de  tribanus  pUbia  rejiciendiii,  ix  law  on  the  ro-clcctiou  ol  iiibiiius  oi   im> 

S  244  Iloncotlie  -crnndial  with  r/Hs  also  used  to  oxnros!»  the  PMhiect-mattcr  of 
transact iot  v."  >f  s  Hfes,  rni..io...,  aud  .i.nil.r  acts,  as  Pndiad'  oc-ru,,a.dop>.t.<  ere- 
lr;ra;V;  th.rVworo  frequent  rt.-ht.  ai.out  (for)  t»- !';>-;;-;•!;':>  .^-.^'-^^^^.^ 
Le-atos  dP  pace  facie  ml  a  miffere,  to  send  vmovfjar  '»'^.  "'f,h"  ,-,  '  '  f,^^"  '  itlu  U  inv 
the  -en.ndial  is  very  frequently  used  in  h.-adin-s  of  buoks  ^  '  ^  h  f.^  T  n  V  V-  //^ 
p-ernini:  word,  as:  /A'  Mor/e  Of^^mn.ndaO     I>;'^Pi;"\-,/.  ;;\ll,/^iV^  ^' 

llomine  Libera  Exhibendo.  On  I'roducin-  the  Body  ol  a  tiec  Man  (lit.  Di.i,.  4.J,  ..»). 
1.  De  inferend<V  injuria  satis  .lictiun  c;t.  Cic,  Off  1   8  -  2.  VicUd>n.nu«  vos  ^^^^^^^ 

mt.s  r^/^C'/m/i    so    (      in  re  ia'pe  quai.It:ii«,  MiflVa-ia  in  n.a-.stnltu  man.  an.h.i^  de  reo 
fi.liamdA^   in  Uv"(  hu  tro-ati^rMie'''  scisceluhV",  elam  an  pala.n'-'t  fyrre--'  "Hdn.s  e.>et 
lb  Le-  3   i5-«i''Ke.nduseai..usa  I'.pnis  </.;  captlris  romuiutamhs\^nomnmm\^^n^^ 
est.  irroff  1,  Ik-TrLe-ati  ad  Verciu-etorigem  de  pact  et  anuciUa^^  concUiauda-^ 
missis'  '  1 55.  B.  G.  7, 55.  ^ 

§  5i:i.  A  crerund  or  gerundive  after  ob  is  especially  used 
of  actions  which  the  taker  of  a  bribe  is  expected  to  perform 
in  consideration  of  the  bribe,  as:  .     .    .  ,. 

Pecnniam  ob  dicmdmn  te.^^fimonium  acciperc,  to  take  money  in  order  to  give  testimony 
(j'or  f/uin/j  one's  testimony). 

Bern  245.  Aside  from  this  specific  mefmin.?,  ob  sometimes,  but  rarely, 
occurs  with  a  gennidial  deuolini,-  the  ulterior  piu-pose  ot  an  act,  wUh  a 
force  simihir  to\ul  (Ex.  G-9).  .-on' 

Or^    Thenhrase  imvniamob  rem  faeiendam  accipere  v.-{\f^  frcqnontly  nscd  in  Miiia  s 
cr^nu;  JuiSanon^.!.  Cor^u^l^a^^.La  in  the  laws  of  Augustus  (^,7- -/j;  ;^^   ^    ^^en 
nrenrs  in  C'icero  and  verv  frequently  in  the  Jurists  (Ex.  1.  2.3).     I  he  pnia«e  is  "«'^i"» 
^tshed  tV(.m  ' ac^'  ?em  faclen.lam  pecuniaui  accipeie',  which  means  •  to  accept  money  ^o 
that  the  t/ionei/  is  to  be  applied  to  some  purpoee  . 

1    1  e.rc'CorneruTde  falsis2»  tencntur  qui  ob  inMruendis  lites'^-'  pocuniara  accepCrnnt 

Ui.;  Di-  48   10      -2.  Si  quiso^  ttsfimoninm  dicendum  vel  non  dictnd'onp.^cmxuun 

ac^J^pelTt,  pTena  i:>^M.  Corndi^e  afficitur.  Marc.  Dig.  4S,  10,  1.-3.  Lege  Julia  repetnu- 

1  The  na^^sive  form  of  the  verb  is  used  on  account  of  its  connection  with  a  ir'^'nindive, 
whiTl^al^'v;4  iVin  the  passive  voice,  (p.  104    80.).-  «  The  word  consu  lis  ^  J'^ved  fron  . 

s  t<i  intifct  —  *  to  impose.—  » to  accept.-  •  ler,  a  condition.-  ^  ^  .U»,  K.  1.—  Ai)i. 
7l>,ol-"  mnt  doesVot^>elon.,  to  scnpfa,  holui,  nsed  -^--^^-^j^^^lf^^^l  r''' ab.m't  he 
to  be  e'ctant.-  »o  literallv  :  'ab.mt  tlie  carrying  on  of  f.ieiuUhi»  ,  «•  f-;  ..«J''^"'^  ^Il^ 
T^nt.ml  rirl  ts  and  duties  of  friends'.-  "  proiclarisnme  script t  hbrt.  bee  ^  4->n,ll.  'i-.,^\e 
S>nu    tran-  itnart"^^^  Wind,  but  >nake  the  adverb  (/>rrt<-/«m>t/«^)  the  attribute 

o?  T.  noun  (516?"    1 .1  Latin  there,  is  a  diflerence  ^^^\r^Y'^^^''^lS'Ji^W  'n.Z 
nowned  book)  and  pr^edarissime  scripttc^  ld>^r  (an  e.Kcellent  ^'^''Vkr/l  ,"^  '       «  ,o  dVi 
nerof  talk  -  i»  to  suppress,  to  stop.-  i*  ;M^mi'/5,  guarman.-  '^V.*^"-"-^b~j*  ^"  "^V"' 
Jus,  L  n  hist,  of  rogando.-  ^"  to  p.ss  sentence  on.-  i»  P/.^'P^j^^^^'^^^aT.,  !4  •   mi  '^^^  - 
r>««^  rp*.)liitioiis  on  —  '^1  uubliclv.—  •"  sufrar/ta  Jerre.  to  poll  votes.—  '»  to  exc.tian  c. 
?4  mnUv  -  '^  makhv'  a  treity  ot^-.-^»  on'  orgery.-  "  insfr><ere  lites^six^  a  technical  term 
deSin^' the  MnstUuti^ig  o^ 
rators  would  appear  as  a  witness,  and  the  other  as  the  complamaat. 


PREPOSITIONAL  GERUNDIALS. 


197 


d.rum  tenstur  qui.  qnum  aliqn.m  potest^temt  M^^^^^^ 

nmjudicandumdecermndumve^accep^nt..yi^^^^^^  U_g  4».  l\  ^^  J-^)^,.^^^^^^^\^  ^.j  ^ 
objus  dicmdnm^  a  Ven-e  acceptas.  Ci,^-,,),,^'^,  ^;^?^^^ 

remrnllcand'im  pecuniam  ^^^'P^'Ji' ^"i^'f''^' l^^l}} ^^^^^  im.nortali- 

absdi>ndum<^  acceperis.  condenimlre.  I'^-,^- ^g-^-. -J„  V^^^^^  1   H  -  7.  Consul 

bus  ob^   M'iren.e  can.;/aj.m  u^^^^^^^^^  f^^'x^  manu-  venta- 

prinio  med.ocna»  i^erebat   «^';^'  "Jf^i^if  "^I  ,,on  hostlli  animo  sed  ob  reyu'^m  tutan- 
;;;;;;;  anna  cc^l^^^^fnlTol:!'^-  -^^^  ^^^^''^"^  plebSjoho- 

miuii'-' in  adopiiOnemi3  se  dedit.  Suet.  Tib. -2.  ^     .    ^ 

§  544.  The  prepositions  ex  (of,  from),  j^ro  (for),  and  inter 
(durinir,  §  432,  K.  2G)  rarely  occur  with  gerundials,  and  have 
SDCcific  meanin^js  in  this  connection. 

also  used  1)  ^^^'^^;^S^'^^xJ^^^(E^.  ?.r,  2   of  the  derivation  oi  words 
/arj.m/(/,  to  derive  plea-urrlrmnth)^^  ^^^  ^,^^^^^  of  taking  away 

from  verbi»,  like  ab  (^^:  ^^;  "«^-^  ^IJ^^/oj^i -inHe  noun,  as:  Tollendum  a^iex  rebus 

'T^'if ■>«  »i.Htn.n'ives  is  («re,0  u-ed  in  the  meaning  '  in  behalf  of,  •  instead 
Of'   or'  'as  an  equivalent  of  (§  448).  See  Ex.  5.  b.  .. 

_  2.  P^rna  divTnaeonstat  6X  r^.ra/^rf^v/*  n  yr    /^^  ^  ^^  providendo 

Leg.  -2,  17-  :5.  Smn.na  volupms  f^^'l^f'^/^^^fJ^,  ^j^^^,  ^i,J;'  \^^^^^^^^^^ 

ss!pS^;;^-^^^^^^^ 


.  ^....a.  was  technically  called  tb.  P-- of^^  blgl^a^^ratc.  ^^ 

power  being  des'gnat.-d  by  |.'«/>^' \'  -  *  ^^*  I  jm&T or  rem  judicare.-  «  to  acquit. 
Vi  do  not  "HM.tio...-.5^'/.^rf^c-e;-^  the  sanie  as^^^^^^^^^  ^^^  .^^ 

_7  o^  ^n-s.^<7^.//.  f ';".^;f  "';Vj,^^^"'i\tes  no?  sav  «i  o^'  ;  kri;/m,  because  the  obtain  in  ^ 
that  he  be  made  a  consul.  Cicero  does  ""\^  '47,j^.,.i,,r  purpose  of  his  prayer,  which 
of  Murena's  consulship  was  not  the  next  but  J^e  uituur  i  ^^  ^nediwrm  genre, 
wa.  a  general  invocation  "  ,di^ine  b  e>s  ng.-  ,^  f;;  ^iV^;",,,^,^  =  to  attack;  supply 
not  to  be  very   active.-  i»   =  1^^^;:"'"*^"«; .  ,  __  ,.,  «mnn  of  nlebeian  descent.-  ^"  had 


-^prceddn —  „,       ,•         n„ 

♦which  he  took'.—  ^2  to  dissemble 


198 


REYERSED  PHRASES. 


2.  Prepositlo7is  xcith  imriiclpial  x^hrascs. 
§  543.  Reversed  participial  phrases  may  be  connected  with 
their  croverning  words  by  means  of  the  prepositions  ante.,  jpost., 
ah,  ad,  oh,  propter,  ^yro,  ex,  <Je,  inter  and  in  (with  tlie  ablative), 
as : 

Ante  vrbem  cmdifntn,  before  tlie  buiUTniir  of  the  city  a.iv.  Pncf.);  sexenniopost  V^os 

ca/)tos,  i?ix  years  after  the  fall  (the  takiu;,')  "f  Veji,  Cic.  Div.  1,  44. 

]i£m  249.  Reversed  pnrticipial  phrases  after  prepositions,  lilvC  abliitivos 

absolute,  must   bo   considered,  primarily,  as  predicative  rmiASES  of 

CLAUSES,  the  iutroduciuiT  prepositions  havin^j?  the  force  of  correspondin,i? 

conjunctions.     Hence  they  must,  very  frequently,  be  rendered  by  clauses, 

especially  when  the  predicate-partici|)les  have;  adjuncts,  either  in  the  iorm 

of  objects  or  completiuir  i)re(rK;ates,  as  Post  ilechinUos  consules  Alhinum  et 

Pisdnem,  after  Alblnus  and  Piso  had  been  declared  consuls,  Liv.  40,  38. 

Prepositional  participial  phrases,  like  the  ablatives  absolute,  may  take 

predicate  nouns  or  adjectives,  in  lieu  of  a  verb,  in  which    instance  the 

participle  of  the  copula  must  be  supplied,  the  same  as  with  predicate- 

abhitives,  as  :  xiiite  me  cont^ulfnn,  before  my  considship  (before  I  was  coii- 

sid).    See  Ex.  3.  4.  11.  12.— Even   impersonal   participles  are   thus   used, 

especially  in  silver  Eatinitv,  analo^rous  to  the  gerund  absolute,  and  to  the 

imiiersonal  ablatives  abs()liite,  as  Verba  ante  cxpectatiDii  cmlentia,  words 

closing  up  sooner  than  expected.  Sen.  Ep.  114.  (Virg.  Geo.  3,  348;  Ov. 

Met.  4,  700).   See  K.  lUO,  and  p.  191),  ons.  3.  4. 

Rem.  250.  When  English  prepositional   expressions  are   employed   in 
rendering  this  kind  of  phrases,  the  translation  is  made  the  same  as  in 
the  analogous  case  of  the  ablatives  absolute  or  prepositional  gerundials, 
the  partinple  being  rendered  by  a  verbal  noun  (either  in  ing  or  otherwise 
formed),  or  by  participles  absolute.      The  Latin  prepositions  are  gener- 
ally exi)ressed  by  their  ordinary  English  equivalents,  as 
Post  nrbem  captam.  after  the  capture  (takini?)  of  the  city,  or  after  takini:  the  city.— 
De  Mesxcne  receptil,  al)out  the  recapture  (retiikhx^)  of  Mes^^ene,  o/-  about  retakini;  .Me?- 
seue.—  Propter  i)t(Vain  pac-m,  oii  account  ol  the  proposal  i,proposiug)  ol  peace,  or  ou 
account  of  proposing;  tlic  peace. 

Obs.  1.  Participial  phrase^*  after /)0>'>'/' arc  employed:  Din  place  of  ablatives  absolute, 
resolved' by  after  (rarely  by  niiice),  as:  I'o.s(  il/a.-^  datas  litlfras  Strata  ed  summa  contoi- 
tio  de  do/no,  after  the  delivery  of  those  papers  followed  (the  delivery  of  tliose  papers 
was  followed  by)  an  anj;ry  discussion  about  my  house,  Cic.  Att.  4.  2.  2.  liut  ^'enera  y 
there  is  a  slii,'ht  dillerence  iu  the  two  constructions,  the  i)repositional  lorni  usually 
denolin-'-  events  whithare  in  no  connection  with  those  indicated  by  the  i)rincipal  ])redic- 
ate  while  the  ablatives  al)s()lute  are  always  in  a  lo^rjcal  conned  ion  with  the  ^n.vernint; 
sentence.  (Compare  the  analo<,'ous  ditlereuce  between />oj(/(/Ma//t  with  u  pluperlect,  and 
msYt/wrt/n  witii  a  perfect.  §  :i48.)  .     ,     .       ,     ,  r*         ». /r^       o\ 

2  l'»»e-e  phrases  after  ;>o.s'/;  are  also  used  a;»  equivalents  of  phrasen  after  ao  (Obs.  "2) 
with  the  for^e  of  the  Kn<,'iish  'erer  since''  wiih  a  verbal  noun.  e«^pecially  in  the  e.\pn's- 
«■ion  ■  post,  homines  naton '  which  means  •  ever  since  the  exi^-tence  of  the  human  race.  Ex. 
9, 10.  1'5.     C\)inpare  the  similar  meaninj,'  oi  potstfjuam,  p.  «Ii4. 

t^^^  In  modern  l.atinitv.  ]K)st  as  well  as  ante  is  employed  in  chronology  to  denote 

the  niiml)er  of  years,  as  dates  :  Post  Christ u/n  vatum.  after  the  birti»  of  Christ.     The 

ancients  thus  used  ab  ^Ubs.  2)  and  ante,  more  Tixvii\y  post  (Cic.  Fam.  9, 21). 

Obs   2  A  reversed  pirticipial  phrase  after  «6  is  used  :  1)  to  denote  an  action  or  event 

niarkin<''  the  bkoinning  ol  a  I'kkioo,   beim,'  rendered  hy  from.     The  knd  of  such  a 

period  Uo  or  till)  is  expressed  by  ad  with  a  participial  phrase,  as  :  lleKiultum  Hoime  a^ 

conditu  urbe  ad  liberatam  annos  ducentos  quadragiuta  quatuor,  kings  rei-ned  ni  Jtomo 


PREPOSITIONAL  PABTICIPLES. 


199 


a 

ira 


from  the  hnildin'r  of  the  city  to  (until)  its  independence  (literally  'to  the  freed  one  J). 
Sd  ol- ^44  viars.-It  is  2.- employed  for  computation  in  chronologv  (so  many  ye. 
comtinrjfrom).    In  this  conneclion   it  is  rendeied  by  after  ovjrom.  Lx.  14  i..  lb. 

On«  \  Ob  and  pronto  r  wUh  pnrticipial  phrases  denote  the  cause  of  an  acUon  (like 
^«"'■•11  d  rmni  But  he  specilie  ottice  of  ob  (similar  to  that  of  o/j  ^vitli  gerundials 
f?/o  rel)i-Uem  t  e  par  ciple  a-  an  kqiivalknt,  in  consideration  <.f  whieh,  the  principal 
ac  i"  n  as'been  pef  formei,  as  Pare  pecuniam  ob  rem  factum  to  ^ne  ^'^J^  ^^^^^ 
tion  of  an  acti<.n  i)errornied,  while  dare  pecmtnmobrernjacundam  means  to  j^ne  a 
brd'f^  i"  '-onsideration  of  an  action  to  be  performed  .  bee  Ex.  1  <-^^-  .^^^,.„.  cpp  ex 

Propter  is  not  uscmI  of  •  equivalents',  but  corresponds  to  a  cl="i^«.;v  th  6^^^^^^^^^ 
Ol    •>•)      After  nronter  ininersonal  nartic  p  es  are  used  by  Livy  :   Ld)ris  inbyUiins  proprei 
.^y,i./L   /.  r«;wJSSi;^W^i.,  «ft^er  the  Sibylline  book,  had  been  inspected  be- 
cause it  ha.l  freci.iently  rained  stones  (on  account  of  frequent  stoue-showers).  Liy.  29,  10. 

Or*  4  Pro  Willi  a  participial  phrase  occurs  1)  with  an  impersonal  participle  (=  as  or 
«/  n:  as:  Considiun'i  timofe  p?rterritum  quod  non  v  disset  irrv  v^^o  ^«""""f^^^V^^^ 
Con'iditis.  from  fear,  had  reported  a.  ....  '?  'fV''^  tV".?  -1 1n"t  "  phrase  5^0  r^ 

ilw  situition  of  aflairs.  Cic.  Alt.  14,  6.  See  lb.  «,  8.  t-x.  ~4. 

rac-em  esse  ju.licc»  non  </,  armi-  l«J''^^'^f"\X^°,t^^^^^^  of  »rms  and.ervl- 

,.  PeJ,„,n.  in  Ca.nmun,  a  maj,.;;;;ns  no.U^^^^  Z!^Z.^^rS^.i>^ 

pania!  cura  unit.  I.n.J''.i».—  '.  '<''.  ''■,'„,  ^,..,„^\y.t  „ha  (tlu  second  of  Im  mine) 


'  '  '       ■     ■         Mil  stead  of  instqmter  ges- 


Philippo 


-rji^c^areinaVpremov  in  ^Z^-?^'  ^^/^f '^^^'i^  ust  he  ^e^c^st.  Mo  d-istin.uish 
serat  (widch  is  unusual  {''-^^'//^^^^^  f  \*X/  verv^m^^^^  L  nity.  if  literally  rendered.- 
cne's  self  as  a  tribune',  which  woiml  malvc  noj     om  J.u  „raer  to  atone  for 


,„eV  self  as  a  tribune',  ^^'"^^ '^^^^^''^';:^,^^^ ^^^^i^n  order  to  atone  Jbr 
Upnmnrnniuin,^siiW^v-^-.~lsedev<mre  io^  „^1  ^^^  ^^^ 

something  by  one's  death).-  «  res  ^J^=!:,^{^'Y^f^T^^^  his  cd^e).-  «  the 

tribunes  lor  quashing  an  indictment  O'}''^,'^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

f,>un.lation  (e>tablish.nent)  o  -nr  religimi  (by  Ro^^  a  cotitempUious  exyfression  for 

Why  can  qmbus  consuUbas  not  be  ^i^.Vu^^^^N'-^ia  «,\  «hn^ive  eoithet.  eauivalent  to  our 

'  man',  of  the 

nasti/  or  dirttj. 


^m\^nro.nt''samrS'e  rrou?  ."si'SSl"--"  an  abusive  epithet,  equivalent  to  our 


200 


EXERCISES. 


—  15.  Abincmso^  Capifolio  hic  est  vicesimus  annus.  Sail.  Cat.  47.—  16.  Trcs_et  poxa- 
pinta  aiuii  sunt  a  priino  Piinico  a^/  f^ecundnm  l/eUuin  finitum.  Liv.  31,1. —  17.  Ei  ob 
^iim]iToi\\^ndi'^  i:\m\\A  levatamignoinlnhirn  nt  oviin^s*  nrbcm  intrilret  conccpsum  e>*t. 
II).  4,  42.—  18.  Soiifttus  dccrCvit.  ui  quanta  dona  App.  Claudio  of)  dtvictuin  Anfiochum 
roirem  data  ad  omnia  pulvinaria*  es*sent.  tanta  privture^  ad  honOrt-ni  deOruni  imnior- 
talium  cui-nrent  danda.  Ih.  25,  Hi.—  V.).  Appilret,  impi^ratOreni  dis  «rratias  aijentem  ob 
rempxbliaim  hme  gea'am^  redlrc  lb.  45,  39.—  20.  C.  Scniproniu;*  Fiilvium  ob  e.rer- 
cituin  in  Apuliil  «mks7//M  in  C()nti()nil)us«  vexjlhat.  lb.  26,  2.—  21.  Hand  lu'tiavrrim', 
propter  non  niniis^  bincCre  iteCitam  ant  exix't-tntain  nupcr  par'-m,  suspt'clani»  esse 
vobis  Punicani  fidom.  lb.  30,  30.—  22.  Dcoeniviri  libros  ISibyllTnos  in.-^piccTf»"  jussi 
^nni,  propter  territos  homines  novis  jirodiiriis.  II).  22,  30.-  2:i.  Hoc  non  placuit  patrl- 
bus,  ni'  Marciiin  id  ipsum"  quod  consiiltatiOni»^  rcliquerant.  pro  pniji/tiirdto^^  ferrety 
lb.  2«),  2  —  21.  Mulieres  nostra?,  in  (luibus  est  tua  soior,  in  pnediisi*  illis  pro  re  natd 
non  incommode  possunt  esse.  Cic.  Att.  7.  14. 

25.  Invidiam»*  quje  ex  contlnudto^^  iUo  honored''  imi)onderet'*  a  te  levi\tam"  putJlbo. 
Liv.  3.  21.— 26.  Ma<;na  iilacommunitas'^o  est  qujeconficitur^i  ex  henrficiis  ultroet  cilro]'* 
ddtU  acrepflsqve.  Cic.  OtF.  1, 17.—  27.  Major  ex  ciribw  amissifi  dolor  qnam  hetitla  fusis''*^ 
hostibusfiiit.  Liv.  4, 17. —  28.  Apud  itomilnos  noa  mtestitia^i  Xdu\n\n  tx  fnale  / e  gestd,  fed 
pavor''^^  etiam  erat,  ne  extemplo'^*  castra  hostis  ai;urcderCtur.  Ii>.  42.  (»0.—  2*).  Ach;ei  de 
Messenei'eceptdcomponll'^cpie'^''  il)i  r^6»<.<jexposuCrunt-".  lb.  40.20. —  30.  ////<^/*]^aviuium** 
et  Albam  Lon<;:am  deduct(uncoloniainir\)i,\utix  fere  intorfuCre^"  anni.  lb.  1,  3,4. 

»  Render  by  'contlaKration  '.—  ^  Clndes  Sempro/iidna  (see  P.  1,  p.a*)0,  A'.  1).  tlie  defeat 
of  Sempronius.-  ^by  ovation.-  *  omnia  pulvinaria  (all  cushions)  means  ilie  teast  of 
the  larjj^cr  lccti>tternia.  in  which  cushions»  were  i)repared  for  the  ima^i's  ot  a// the  <:od.s. 

—  *  retnpublicani  gerere  is  a  term  Wf^i^X  of  the  administratiiMi  of  the  ciirulc  mai;i>trate8, 
especially  the  consuls.  Here  the  term  is  applied  to  the  «rods,  as  if  fh<t/ wvrti  t lie  real 
administrators.  Transl.  :  '  to  irovern  well  the  republic'.—  «popular  meetinu:.— '  Perf. 
pubj.  in  the  meanim,'  of  a  qualified  assertion  '  7  tro'/td  or  shall  not  deny".—  "  not  qtiite. 

—  »  suspicious.-  10  to  inspect.—  >»  that  very  fact.—  *'-  for  further  deliberation.—  ^^  pro 
prcejudicdto  ferret  =  pnejndicfltum  esse  existiuulret ;  pne/>/dm~tre,  to  decide  beforehand. 

—  i*  country-places.—  i*  the  odium.—  i«  to  prolong'.—  *^  oftice.—  »»  would  impend, 
would  be  lial)l(!  to  arise.—  "♦  to  diminish.—  20  communion.—  '■^>  to  arise.-  *-  mutually 
(literally:  thither  and  hither).— '^^/i/ndere,  to  r(»ut.—  "*  mournini:.— -*  alarm.—  -«on 
the  spot.—  27  componere.  to  settle,  to  arriiijje.—  2h  to  report.—  2»  Lavifiiujniinil  Alboiti 
Longam  are  accusatives  of  place  dei)endent  on  dtdudain  —  ^"  translate  by  ■  there  were'. 


EXERCISES. 

I.  PRRrpiiRASTTC  PAKTiciPi.E. —  1.  OuF  vcn'aiio  is  lu'illicr  quick  nf)r 
smooth',  but  wearejilinostdfownecP  by  a  nuiuhi'i'-'  of  .storms*. —  2.  The 
whole  iomnU)  coustitutiou  {ratio)  of  the  Senate,  of  the  courts^  of  the 
whole  republic  is  changed.—  3.  It  is  written  in  some  passai^e''  of  {apud) 
Plato,  that  the  whole  character  {mos)  of  the  LaccMhvmonians  was  inflamed' 
by  ea<a'niess''  for  {of)  victory. —  4.  I  do  not  wonder  that  {infin.  clau.^e) 
Scaurus  [should]  be  broken  down*-'  by'"  this  disaster".—  5.  It  liappensvery 
conveniently'"'  that  {quod)  with  his  incredible  boldness  a  remarkable" 
stupidity"  is  united'\—  0.  It  seemed'"  to  every  one  that  this  whole  hope 
was  destroyed  {toJkre).—  7.  We  are  very  much  embarrassed"  in  our  do- 
mestic atfairs'^—  8.  When  I  was  so  much  alFected  [in  my]  heart,  I  began 
to  distrust'"  mvself—  9.  When  I  arrived  in  Italy,  the  meadows  were  al- 
ready clothed'^"  with  irrass-*  and  flowers.—  10.  Towards  {mh)  the  end  of 
the  battle  the  strength"  of  the  soldiers  was  exhausted'-\  and  their  courage 
sank''*.—  IL  When  this  happened-*  to  you,  I  was  separaled-M'rom  you  by 


etruct).—  "  pt-rturbjlre.—  1»  res  familiilris,  t^in-jr.-  •*  dittidere.-  '■'o  tctjere 
p/.—  aa  vis,  pi,—  23  exhaurlrc.—  2«  deliceru.—  '-»  accidere.—  2«  disjun^cre. 


21  herba, 


EXEKCISEa 


201 


the  sen.—  13.  During  four  centuries"  the  Britons'*  were  subjected"  to  the 
Romans,  and  after  {ahl.  <ihs.)  these  were  driven^"  out  of  the  island,  they 
were  themselves  e.xpelhnP'  by  the  Saxons'^—  13.  The  passage"  over  the 
Alps  (.4//>^.'<)  was  twice  within'threc  months  obstructed^'''  by  snow-storms". 

14  In  the  same  3'ear  the  town,  which  had,  before, been  fortified  with  a 

rampart  and  a  wall,  was  provided^"  with  turrets^'  and  castles^^—  lo.  Thou 
wilt  soon  be  stripped^"  of  all  resources*",  if  thou  continnest  to  squander*^ 
in  that  way*"'  thy  propertv*'.—  10.  Wiien  the  rebellious**  states  will  have 
been  pacified*%  the  financial*'  distress*'  will  be  removed***  in  the  shortest 
time.—  17.  The  life  of  the  dead  {tmrtuus)  is  contained  {placed,  ponere)  in 
the  remembrance  {memorla)  of  the  living  {mvus). 

II.  Pkiuphrastic  Future.  Present. —  1.  Are  the  citizens  going  to 
warrant*'  to  thee  a  safe  journey  through  their  territory"  ?—  2. 1  know  the 
names  of  all  those  who  are  going  to  invest"  money  in  that  undertak- 
ing.— 3.  Sempronius  is  about  to  be  absent  {(ibesse)  from  the  city  for 
{ace)  three  days.—  4.  What  soldier  can  be  of  good  cheer  if  he  is  about  to 
flirht  with  the  enemv  while^'^  he  is  afraid  of  death?—  5.  If  you  want 
mTi"  to  carry**  this  biisiness  out  to  the  end,  it  will  be  necessary  to  assist 
me  with  your  advice  and  work".—  0.  It  is  no  favor^*»  to  give  those  [things] 
which  are  to  hurt"  those  that  ask^"  [for  them].—  7.  I  cannot  fulrtP'  this 
condition  if  thv  favor  is  to  benefit""  me.—  8.  I  do  not  know  by  what  rea- 
sons you  are  «roing  to  defend  this  opinion.—  0.  I  believe  that  those  who 
are  going  to  teach"  some  science  should"-  not  be  ignorant"  of  the  ele- 
ments'"* of  knowledge"^—  10.  It  is  necessary  {oportst)  that  thou  shouldst 
love  my  [own]  self  if  we  are  expected  to  be  true  friends. —  11.  What  I  am 
expected  to  believe  must  be  of  a  kind""  that  it  could  iiave  happened". 

III.  Peripiikastic  Future.  Past  and  Future  Tenses. —  1.  If  Cyrua 
lived  thus  [sic),  who  was  never  to  be  a  private  [citizen],  how  must  thou  live 
who  art  to  return'^''  to  the  people  the  power"**  thou  hast  ?—  2.  The  consul 
was  going  to  cross'"  as  soon  as"  the  first  light'"^  [of  day]  would  show"  a 
convenient'*  crossing'*. —  3.  The  Roman  foragers'"  were  led  into  that  part 
[of  the  country]  where  the  conference"  was  to  take  place'l-  4.1  asked'** 
the  decemvir  among  what  [persons],  and  how^"  he  was  going  to  dis- 
tribute" that  lan(^■^—  5.  Metellus  was  asked'*^'  what  he  was  to  do  on  the 
next*'*  dav. —  (J.  Since  vou  were  about  to  accuse  this  man  in  a  short  time 
{brrci),  you  oui^hl"*  to  have  preserved^"  that  most  important*'  witness^".— 

7.  It  is  announced''*  liiat  the  delegates^"  who  were  to  assemble"'  yesterday 
have  been  suminoned"^  for  {ad)  the  third  day  before  the  Ides  of  April".— 

8.  Ceesar  was  going  to  march"*  through  Ulyria"^  if  (in  the  event  that)  Pom- 

27S;eculum.— 2s  Britannus.— 2» subjicere.— s" «jicere.— 3»  expellerc— ^^Saxo.— 33  iter. 

—  3*  obstruere.—  35  nix.ii  snow-storm.—  3«  instruere.—  »7  turris.— 38  castellura.—  3»  nu- 
(liXre.-  -«o  auxilium.—  -»1  dilapidilre.—  -»2  ua.-  "  bona.—  •**  seditiOsus.—  ■»*  pacgre — 
««  iiummarius.—  *^  diflicultas.—  4«  exstinuniere.—  *»  pra;stare.—  so  plur.  ot\ftnift.—  »»  col- 
loijlre.—  52  by  the  oarticiple  of  tiniere.  airreeinsr  with  ml'e^  —  ^3  if  £  am  to.—  ^4  to  carry 
out.  perducere.—  »5  opera.—  '«  beneficiuin.—  ^^  noc5re.—  ***  petere.  Those,  that  ask,  by 
the  pariici|)le.— *9  pnesiire.—  ««  pn)desse.—  «>  to  teach  a  science,  artis  prcec-pta  traders. 

—  62  ti,>hCM-e.—  «3  i-iniis.—  «4  eleimnium.—  «^  littene.-  ««  ejusmodi  nt  —  «'  to  happen, 
fieri.—  «»  reddere.—  «9  pote-tas.—  to  rransire  —  ^^  as  soon  as.  i/bi.—  '^'-\nx.—  '3  ostendere; 
transl.  bv  subjunct.  pluperf.,  wliicli  has  the  force  of  a  subjunctive  of  the  futun-  perfect. 
—74  ov)portunus.—  ^s  transit  us.—  76  pabulAror.—  ''''  collociuium.-  7«  to  take  place,  esse. 

—  7»  qua^n-re  ex  —  «o  quemadmodnm.—  »»  to  distribute  among,  parfiri  with  dative.— 
»2  a2:er.—  »3  to  ask  somebody,  qiujerere  exaliqm.—  8«  proximus.—  ^*»  debCre.—  ^»  servjlre. 

—  «7  cri-avis.—  «8  testis.—  «y  '/viii/blre.  with  an  infin.  clause.—  »"  I'igatus.—  «^  convenlre.— 
•a  convocare.—  »3  Aprllib.  Translate ;  Jdus  AprlUs.  uee  §  112,  C ;  §  18U,  4.—  »♦  proflcisci. 

—  «^*  lllyricura. 


2    J  EXERCISES. 

pcy  wonld»"  cross  over»'  to  Italy.—  9.  Flaminlniis  would  not  even  have  kept 
quiel'"*  it""  the  eiiemv  had  remained*""  qniet'.—  10.  Hannibal  said  that 
nobody  could  irive  a  truer-  advice  than  the  one'  who  advised*  the  other 
[to  io\  that  which  he  himself  woukl  have  done  if  he  were  in  the  same 
situation  (I'KUs).—  11.  This  rule  {imperium)  seemed  to  the  Lacedremonians 
so  {(idea)  despotical  {si/ptrbu.s)  and  worthless%  that  ('^0  they  undoubtedly» 
would  have  taken  up'  arms  on  the  spot',  if  the  fortune  of  the  city  (cintas) 
had  been  as  of  old  (trausl.:  had  been  the  old).—  12.  If  any  of  our  allied  cities 
shall  be  {have  been)  about  to  treat'"  with  the  enemy,  it  will  be  visited"  with 
the  most  serious''^  puuishment. 

IV.  Infinitives  of  the  peripiiuastic  future. —  1.  I  believe  that  thy 
brother  will  perish  if  heshalF^'  petsevere  in  this  undertakin.;;".—  2.  I  h()i)e 
that  our  republic  will  llourish",  aud  be  powerful"  for  all  time  {jiL)  to  come". 

—  3.  The  soldiers  i)romised  (poUicen)  to  obey  Caesar  implicitly'".—  4.  The 
tribunes  threatened  to  arrest'"  the  consul.— 5.  I  hope  that  Seinin-onius 
will  be  able  (posse)  to  pav""  all  [his]  debts''.-  0.  Plato  beli«'ved  that  slates 
{re.spnblic(i)  would  be  liappy"  only"  from  the  moment"-'  that  i)hil(>s()phers 
would  rule  them.—  7.  Seinpronius  stated"'  that  his  brother  would  not 
need''*  any  help  —  8.  Cicero  said  that  Ilortensius  would  be  worthy  of  the 
hi'diest  praise  if  he  would  be  willinij:  {vene)  to  sacrifice"  his  private  dis- 
llires^*'  to  the  republic— 9.  Fulvius"  said  that  he  would  be  willnvu-'"  to 
sutler^"  the  severest  punishment  if  he  would=*' ever  chanu-e"'  his  opinion.— 
10  Caisar  said  that  he  would  now  (.;V«//0  do  immediately"  what,  other- 
wise'*, he  w«mld  have  been  willin.ir  (li.  144)  to  postpone"  for  some  time. 

—  11.  The  fellow-citizens  of  Tiieniistocles^'»  had  conceived  the  hope  that 
he  would  cmce"  be  a  distin^^^^shed"  man.—  12.  Gellius  says  that  if  Cicero 
had  not  been  consul,  the  republic  would  have  been  totally"  destroyed*". 

—  l:}.  Hannibal  believed  that  Antiochus  in  this  way  (<"^/)  would  have  shut 
out  the  enemy  from  the  sea*',  and  would  have  made  [their]  tleet  useless   . 

—  14  It  was  evidenl*^'  that,  if**  the  Hhodians  would  have  been  relieved 
from  this  care,  they  would  have  made*'  those  parts*''  of  the  sea  ixTfectly 
s;ite.—  15.  It  seems  {rideri)  that  Anicius  would  have  accomplished*'  this 
task  (negotiiim)  if  it  had  not  been  for  his  sickness*". 

V.  Circumlocutions  of  the  P.vssive,  and  use  of  forem.—  1.  Them- 
istocles  said  to  the  LacedaMnoniaiis  that  their  ambassadors  could  not  olher- 


»«  Su1>i  imp—  87  tl•ajic<M•(^—  »'*  to  \<.t'o\)  qwWt.  gNie.^cere.—  »»  by  nblativess  abso- 
lute —  »»»  e.s>r.  wliich  is  tlropi.ed  in  the  constriRtion.— ^  quietus.— 2  fidelis—  is. 
—  4  suadCi-e  witli  d;it.—  5  iiidiLjniis.—  «  hand  duhii'.—  i  caperc—  «  cxteinplo.-  »  1  ransl. : 
If  aiiv  city  (dr/Va-v)  of  (ex)  our  allies.—  1«  la-dus  lacere.—  »1  atnt-rre.—  1-  cnivis.—  per- 
IVct  future.—  »♦  coufitus.c;.  us.—  »»  tlorere.—  »«  vij,'Gre.—  »t  in  onuie  tcnipus.—  »no  obey 
iinulicitly.  dicfo  auin>^nteni  esse.—  »'•»  in  viucula  conjicere.—  ""  solvere.—  '^^  :cs  a  lenuni.-- 
2J  Aeatu--  — ■--  luiu  demuni.—  '■'*Trjinsl.  :  If  ]tliilos<>pliL'rs  would  iiave  coiuincnced  iplxperj. 
«wi/j)  to 'rule  (regen)  them.—  25  §  411.— «*  indi-ere.—  "  condonfire  ali(iuid  alicui.— 


(condnen)  the  hope,  lliat  Themistocles  etc.—  «^  a  i(iuan.lo,—  3«  eirre_MU^.—  •*«  luiiaiius.— 
4»  to  be  destroyed,  intenre.—  *^  Trausl.:  Would  have  taken  {aditnert)  Irom  the  eneiny 
the  use  ot  ttie  sea.—  *'^  inutilis.—  *'  apparZbnf,  with  jiitlnitive  clause.—  <*  Tran^l  :  If 
this  care  l»ad  been  taken  (<iemere)  from  tlie  Kliodians  {Ii/iodius).-~*'>  to  make  perlcctly 
pafe,  tiduni,  prmtare.-  ■•«  regio,  in  the  singular  —  «^  confieere.— *»  Transl. :  unless  (nm) 


he  had  been  hindered  by  sickness. 


EXERCISES. 


203 


wise*»  return  than  if  he  himself  would  have  been  sent  back".—  2.  The  am- 
ba  sado     s!^d  they  would  counsel  peace-  when  (....)  ^^^^^^^ 
have  been  delivered  np''^  and  the  hosta^crcs  would  liave  been  i etui ned    . 
"^l  lIl"c;ulrbelievJd,\hat  C.sar  would  -^f^^^^X!^^^^^ 
nil  in<  tn)ol>^  — 4    I  would  have  kept  silent",  had  I  known     uiat  my 
,  i     :,:  wo'uM  ha^e  b^c.,,  rejoCccK-  k  I  ..anlly"  believe"  that  ,he  Pres- 
i.  ent^«  Avill  be  re-elected»^".— G.  Sempronius  hopes  to  receive     the  votes 
ft  1  te  electoral   bodies.-?.  Titui'ius  believes  that  the  army  will  be 
cut  y 'from    its]  supplies-,  if  they  stay-  at  this  place.  -  8.  I  hope 
tint  v^>nr  own  person"  will  be  respected^  by  the  enemy  (/)?i^^-.  —  9.  Am- 
ioiVV   romle^^^  the  person  of  \he  general  (.f..^)  should  not  be  violated 

£^r.)  1  V  his   [soldiers]  -  10.  Alcibiades  would  never  have  gone  with 
rfleK"  to  Sici^     if  h(  had  known  beforehand^  that  he  won  d  soon  be 
vcalled  by  his  c  t^z.-ns  to  defend  himself^»  at  Athens  against  the  charge 
of  Se.^.-ll.  The  consul  said  that  Fulvius  would  have  been  killed 
V  thC  soldi  M-s  of  his  own  legions'»  if  he  had  led  these  men  to  deail".- 
1  .  Th    accu^.l  O..^  stated  {proferrel  that  if  he  had  «^f "  f  ^[^^^ 
the  city,  the  citizens  would  have  been  slaughtered,  and  the   city  itselt 
sacked"  and  burned.  .     i  i  :. 

VI.  Participle  of  the  periphrastic  future.-  1.  ^l^^;^"^^f  ^,1^?^^"^ 
clothes  otT'*  in  order  to  throw  himself  •'  into   the  nver  -  2.  Daiin.  had 
ar    ved  a    the  village-  of  ArbCla  {pl.t)  [which, /.^r/.]  ^/^  was  going 
nikc  renowned"  b^  his  defeat.- 3.  Alexander  commanded  Qz/&e/'^)  tha 
8)000^^rmen''sln>uld  be  drafted"  out  of  all  P^ovinces^m   order  to 
have   at  the  same  time  {dmul)  hostages  and  soldiers.—  4.  On  the  nex 
av  [t   e]    wo  most  renowned-   captains-  of  [the]  two  most    powertu 
I'd.ns  proceeded-  to  battle,  being  about  either  to  crown"  on  that  day 
the  r   m  t    Md  (//i'/7/«s)  brilliant  achievements-     or  to  wipe    kem  out 
alio'e^l  e^^^^^^^^^^^  perceived^  that  the  am^assado  s 

had'come  to^^  ascertain"»  the  plans  of  the  war,  he  commanded  them  to 
^ale-  the  camp  fc>rtbwitl^  Umplo).-JS.  These   are  riches  more  pre- 
cious'^  than  gold,  [and]  to-  accompany-  you  '^'}:^J^'''^^\J^^.^  ,^^^,,^,^ 

Vll.  Predicate-okrundives  in  the  PJ.^^f.f^'-lp^,^/^^^^^^^^ 
heoducaled  tor  a  religious"  and  virtuous"*'   lite.— 2.   I  my      ot  stN  le 
must  le  b(^^^^^^^^^^^^^        tVom  the  ancients-.-  8.  The  bonds  o  liberality-  must 

peace,  pans  aucforem  esse.—  ^^  tradi-re  —  }JX  ^:  .  ,  v,_,.  u-nown  —  *'  vix  —  ^*  subj. 
l.H-  p^efiicate-innni.ive.-  "  tacSre  (,dup  ^,^^)^;^/;^  ,x'r  (  /.;>  Sm)  will  ie  proro.Mie^i 
pc.rf-  5«  princops  r^n^u.^'liciE.-;;  fm  ir.1.  that  tl  c  po«^^^^  rl^oncCi  {referre)  by 

(prnrogare)  to  the  President.- «»  J/'»;'-  «2  i„;i;w/X-<i  with  at)!.- «"  commeStus  G. 
umreabDixW  electora    Iwdies  (centuria).—/^  intercumti e  \\iuinin.  „,         ,  .      jjj 

f.::  M  manCre  (by  the  pcriphr  future)-;;  l^^^  IJ-  r  7;ero  or^^Tth  tie  predicate- 
not  be  violatc.l  (the  H^'f^^ation  be.nL'  cnher  connecud^  ^^^^^^j^j 

nninitivc).-  «;  classe  P- hc>sci.- «  1 V-^^^^^'^^- ,„j,  f;\4j  yacrilegc  ^sacra  vioim,  the 
defend  himself  (m'/.<am  <il'^'^'i''^'^^^^^^^^^  sui  leyionani.-'^  'm\  ^up 

violated  f  =^7"^  .t»^"?f '•- •;  ^'  ^i'ii^73"dtripe  e.-  'VVm^.sl.  :'he  too^ idetra/^ere)  [his]  jzar- 
phcium  tnihere.-  ''  1^  "^^^'^^^'^^^s  «/«m&e  -  '«  vicus.-  "  nobilis.-  '«  youn-  men, 
ment  {reslis)  Worn  n""^].'^od>  •—      ^'- (W^^f/,^' Hflns<i^^^^^  »2  dux.—  «3  opnlentus.— 

j>n,iores.-  '«  le.;ere.-  «o  posteru^-  ;  ^"  :\^i^[  ^'ra  b^^^^  (a n^,  partus).-  ^^  to  wipe 
i*  procedere.-  «*  eumuiare.-  ««  ^'^^^'^  '  ^^^^^  •  89^,1  «.'der  to  _  «o  explorare.-»i  excedert 
out  altogeth<T.  everfere.-  't''''}''':'^'^^^^^^^^  .anctus.-  »«  lio- 

^^.^^  InS'S^  - -^Ji^--  ^^^^^  '^  -^"^  '  ^"^"^  '''''''"  '  """'' 
centia.— ^  transfro.—  *  munitio. 


204 


EXERCISES. 


EXERCISES. 


205 


ono-ht  to  be  dostroyod.—  5.  It  is  necessary  to  abandon»  the  ^vholc  reirion 
toTlie  barbarians.— 8.  Our  towns  must,  before  all  [otiier  things]  be  pro- 
teeted"  tVoni  phi"(ler\— 1).  Peace  oni^Hit  to  be  made  by  you  assoon  as  possi- 
l)le  —  10  The  worst"  torments"  must  be  endured  by  the  cnptives.—  11.  It  is 
necessary  to  restrain^"  ambition",  but  to  cnconrage^^  rectitude'*  and  mtec- 
i-ity»  _  '12  A  speaker"  must  not  fear"'  the  murmurinir"  ot  popular  assem- 
hli;.s»«  _  1:3  W(.  nuist  not  pass  over'"  [in]  silence'"  those  most  important 
thiu«'-s  concepticm-andinventioir^— 14.  Theconsuls  must  cast  lots^^ib.mt 
rtiierrfi)i-<>vinees,  whenever'*  their  names  arc  reported"  by  the  electoral 
bodies—  15.  The  arroirance  of  these  officials"  cannot  be  endured  at  all  — 
16.  We  cannot  deny-"  the  good  faith  of  these  ambassadors.—  17.  I  do  not 
know  whether  this'busin(>ss  ought  to  be  ])ostponed  {(Uf<rrf)  or  not. 

VIII     PuKOlCVrK-GKIlUNDS  IN    TIIK  IMllCSKNT. —  1.  A  Walk  OUgllt    tO    bC 

taken  after  dinner^.—  2.  The  meeting  must  be  adjourned.—  3.  A  hard  bat- 
tle was  fbu-rht  [which  lasted]  till  evening.—  4.  It  must  be  very  much  de- 
sired^" that  there  should  be  no  further^»'  delay'-''^-  5.  It  must  be  acknowl- 
ed"-ed''  by  all  of  you  that  the  enemy  lias  fought  bravely.—  0.  Duties  must 
never  be  iop'-otteu.—  7.  One  must  easily  pardon  friends.— 8.  Soldiers  must 
meet'*  dan<'rrs  without  shrinking•'^—  0.  This  man  does  not  listen  to 
reason*"-  10.  Nobody  ought  to  be  injured  {nocPre)  without  cause.— 
11.  These  wretches"  ouirht  to  be  spared.— 12.  It  is  ottcn  necessary  to 
speak  in  thecourts*"  ex  tempore=*",but  still  in  {hi/)  connected^  and  precise 
lau'nuK'-e*'--  13.  Bolilness  and  recklessness  (temeritas)  ought  to  be  op- 
posed ^jbiiam  ire)  rather  late  (sero)  than  never.—  14.  Those  that  n re  ac- 
cused of  treason"  must  either  enlist  in  the  army**  or  suffer  death  — 
15  We  should  enjov*"  pleasures  moderate!  v*\  and  devote*"  only  so  i»ii<^''» 
time  to  e.Kcrcises^"  of  the  bodv,  as  not  to  interfere"'  with  <nir  studies  o\ 
duties'*.—  10.  The  character"  of  this  man  is  such'*  that"  you  must  take 
great  care"  lest'"  you  be  deceived""  by  him. 

IX.  Pjip:dic.vti<>geiiunds  and  geuundives  ix  the  tast  and  futuue 
Ti:nses—  1  It  was  necessary  to  buy  peace  from  the  barbarians.—  2.  The 
war  ou'-'ht  either  not  to  have  been  undertaken»'  at  all,  or  to  be  conducted 
accordim--  to  (pro)  the  dignity"  of  the  Roman  people.—  3.  Such  {fjuf<niodi) 
terms"  of  peace  ought  to  have  been  quickly'^'  accepted  by  the  king.— 
4  Thelloman  commander  had  to  cross  a  great  many'"  rivers  and  to  build 
a  number  ot^'  l)rid"-es.—  5.  A  march  of  a  hundred  miles""  had  to  be  made 
by  the  consul  witluu  two  days»".-  G.  It  had  been  necessary  for  ^letellus 


to  perform^"  an  enormous  task"  ;  for  he  had  to  reorganize'^  an  inefhcient 


we  take  {detrahere)  nottiing  ^quvl)  from.- "  iittera\- "  nomic. .  . .  noque.— "  offiua 
honestatis.-  "  mos  (;>/«/■.).-  "  ejusmodi.-  ^^  nt.  -  »«  lo  take  irrrat  care,  nui'mopere 
cavire.  —  "  ne.—  «»  circumvenlre.  —  «'  piiscipcre.  —  «"^  «rerere.  —  "  di-mtas».  —  *  lex.— 
alacer  —  «•  plurimus  —  «^  aliquot  —  •»  a  mUe,  niille  passus».—  «»  two  dayt*,  hldnum  (a 
ace  of  two  day?).—  '<>  peragere.—  "^'  optis.—  "''^  ad  difCiplTiiam  revocSre.-      luers». 


66 

epac 


\V-ti 


Hud  almost  dissolved'*  army. —  7.  Mithridates  had  been  obliged  to  comply 
"with"  all  this,  and  moreover'"  to  release"  all  captives  without  ransom'^ 

—  8.  Peace  was  granted"  to  the  French^Mmt  they  had  to  cede"' a  not 
inconsiderable"^  part  of  their  territory"^',  and  to  pay  an  enormous  tribute'"*. 

—  9.  All  had  to  die  who  had  li^'ft  the  camp  witk  Titnrius.—  10.  All  ofTl- 
cers  {dux)  had  to  acknowledge  {confiferi)  that  the  most  liberal"'  conditions 
had  been  granted  to  them!—  ll.Tlie  road  was  ^o  {aded)  narrow  that"', 
breaking  the  ranks"',  the  soldiers  had  to  march""  in  single  files"". —  12.  You 
ought  to  have  treated  {tmctdre)  this  point""  \yith  greater  accuracy"'. — 
1J3.  You  ought  to  have  resisted  with  greater  energy"'^  the  unjust  com- 
mands"^ of  the  tyrant. —  14.  If  the  enemy  had  succeeded"*  in  reaching 
the  town  a  little  earlier"',  Cajsar  w^ould  haVe  been  obliged  to  invest'"  the 
place  by  a  tedious"'  siege"".—  15.  So  obstinate  was  the  battle""  that,  if  the 
enemy  had  resisted'""  the  attack  till  evening,  our  [soldiers],  since  the  road' 
to  the  water  was  not  free^  would  have  been  obliged  to  march  back  to^  the 
places  they  had  occupied  the  night  belbre*. —  It  is  the  question'  whether 
Alexander  couUr  have  obtained  so  great  a  glory  if  he  had  been  obliged 
to  fiirht  in  Italy  instead  of  in  Asia. —  17.  It  will  not  be  necessary  lor  the 
nation  (.v^^.s)  of  the  Thracians  {Thrrt.v)  to  fear  either"  Perseus,  engaged" 
in  w.#  with  the  Romans,  or  Perseus  in  peace". —  18.  We  shall  be  obliged, 
to  refute  {refelkre)  this  opinion,  before  we  proceed'"  any  farther". 

X.    PllEDICATE-GEItUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES  IX  TFIE  INFINITIVE. — 1.    The 

senate  resolved  {deceniere)  that  the  king  be  bound  to  accounl'^  first  of  all 
for  the  murder'-'  of  Aretaurus.—  2.  The  daughters  of  the  king  wrote  that 
they  had  to  endure'*  at  that  place  all  the  evils  of  exile. —  3.  Domitius  Cor- 
bulo  said  that  the  enemy  ought  to  be  defeated  by  the  spade"  and  the  pick- 
axe'^ — 4.  Many  Laceihemonians  were  of  the  o\)\n\in\{exi)iiiindre)  that 
Athens  ought  t()  be  radically  {ftinditus)  destroyed  and  to  be  wiped"  out 
from  the  earth'". —  5.  The  senate  resolved  {censere)  that  the  consuls,  with- 
out any  delay'",  should  depart*"  for  their  provinces.— 6.  It  seemed  {vide- 
bdtur)  to  many  that  the  siege  of  Capua  ought  to  be  raised'-",  and  that  the 
enemy  ought  to  be  met"  at  {<id)  the  gates  of  the  city  of  Home. —  7.  Han- 
nibal said  that  if  Autiochus  had  followed  his  council,  the  Romans  would 
have  had  to  fight  a  great  deal"  nearer  lo  the  river  Tiber.—  8.  I  think 
that  this  war  ought  not  to  have  been  commenced'-*  at  all. —  9.  I  believe 
that  it  will  i^cnm\breci  tempore)  be  necessary  to  repeal  this  law. 

XI.  PAiiTiciPiAL-GEHUNDiyE.—  1.  Nature  assigned-'  to  woman  (plur.) 
the  household-gods'^  lo  guard*'.—  2.  The  ediles-"gaye  on  contract  the  house 
of  the  traitor"^"  lo  be  torn  down^"  within  two  days.—  3.  I  am  going  lb 
hand  over^'  the  republic  to  Muncna  for  upholding^^   and  defending  it. — 

74  Dissoiatus. —  ■'6  t()  comply  wiUi  t?oinetlnn<r,/tfCc/-^  aliquid. —  '*  praitt-rea. —  '''^  libe- 
rjiic  — ^»  preiiiiin.—  ''^  concedere.—  *>»  Gallii!?.—  "»  cedere  with  al)l.— «- aliquantiit^.— 
»>  piur.  oiJinU.—  «*  trit>atum.—  «a  -uquus.—  ««  ut.—  «^  Trau-l.  :  after  tlie  ranks  (agmen, 
in  the  sinj,'.)  had  been  i)r()keu  (yiolvere).  —  '^'*  incadere.—^^  siti'juli,  aL^reein^' with  '  i*olUiers\ 
—  «0  l()cu5i.—  "i  dilii^entia.—  *'^  animus.—  »3  iniperiuni.—  «*  Trausl.  :  If  it  had  been 
done  Hiat  ('//)  ilie  enemy  rejched  (pfrcmlre  ad).—  »*  maliirus.—  »«  cingere.—  ^Mon- 
•nnquiis.—  "«*  obsidio.—  »»  Transl. :  ro obstinately  (aai^tir)  was  it  fought.—  i°"  siistineie, 
%\\h\  imp.—  »  iter.— 2  to  l)e  free,  paf^re.—  ^  re^redi.- *  Trani*!.  :  to  the  places  of 
the  camp  of  last  (prior)  ni:j:ht.—  ^  qiueritur.—  «  snbj.  perf.—  '  instead  of,  noii.—  «  not 
either...  nor,  neque,  uegue.—  »  occupare.—  »  rerseus?  in  peace,  Feraeus  quutus.— 
1"  pro"redi,v?/*j.  -  "  anv  fartlier, /o/i7'"«»'.— '^  to  account  for  .somethin«r,  lat'onem  ali- 
aVunrei  reddere.— ^^  ciedes.— i*  suDlre.— i»  Transl. :  by  worlcs  {opus).—  's  dolabra 
(«/.)._  17  to  wipe  out,  exstingitere.—  »«  orbis  terrjlium.—  i»  mora.—  -<>  proticisci  in.— 
31  tollere—  -'^  ol)viain  ire.—  ^^  aliqnanto.—  ^*  inferre.— ^saitribuere.— -^  Lares  lanii- 
liares.—  '"  custodlrc.—  ^-^  ledllis.—  2»  proditor.—  3o  dcmollre.—  ^i  tradere.—  ^a  sustinere. 


206 


EXERCISES. 


4  Dometrins,  son  of  Philip,  was  delivored  {dare)  to  the  fimbassadors  to  be 
taken  back"  to  [his]  father.—  5.  The  Roman  people  assijrneil  to"*  Pompey 
the  enactina:  of  the  tinal  scenes  in  the  Mithridatic  war.—  G.  Sp.  Licinina 
took  the  charixe''  of  the  war  in  order  to  hinder  it.—  7.  Does  it  {/ior.)  mean 
{esse)  helpinir^*»  a  people,  to  abandon"  it  to  the  tender  mercies^'  of  the 
enemy  ?—  8.  The  transport  to  Rome='*  of  [the  imai^e  of]  Juno,  the  qneen 
[of  ixoddesses],  was  assii^neil  to  vounij:  mvn{juvenis)  selected  from  the 
whoTe  army.—  9.  The  execution  of  these  desi^rns*"  was  left  to  the  consuls. 
—  10  The  consul  charged*'  Amynander  wilii  the  task*"^  of  rousing"  the 
^tolians"  to  the  war.—  11.  Sempronins  rented*'  to  Gajus  all  the  prop- 
erty he  owned  in  Albany  coimty.-  12.  Sempronins  contracted*''  with 
Gajus  about  providini::  with  fences"^  and  roads**  all  tho  lands  (pnedium)  he 
owned  in  Albany  county.—  13.  The  Senate  ordered*''  the  consul  to  see" 
that  the  contiscated"'  lands  {(ifjer)  of  the  Ligurians  were  i)romptly'"'  re- 
stored to  them.—  14.  Caesar  had  {tiurare)  all  the  old  ships  repaired",  and 
new  ones  built  in  Gaid. 

XII.  Rkveuskd  piihases  as  sub,jects  and  transitive  objects. — 
1.  The  exposure'*  of  the  king's  fraud  made  the  inhabitants"  cautious. 

2.  The  capture  {mpere)  of  HeraclCa  broke  at  lenirth  {tttudon)  the  smrits'*' 

of  the  ^tolians.—  3.  Especially"  the  sinking'*  of  the  royal  flagship*  by  a 
much  smaller  Rhodian"  vessel,  struck  the  enemy  with  dismay'''.— 4.  It 
seemed  as  if  {that)  the  liberation"'  of  Chaleis  would  bring  the  neighbor- 
ing communities  [ddtus)  over^^*  to  the  alliance"*  with  {of)  the  Romans.— 
5.'The  king  mourned"  for  the  loss''"  of  his  friend  more  than  for  [that]  of 
his  crown"^—  6  Gajus  has  taken*"^  Sempronius's  farm  {pnpditaii)  on 
gliare?.—  7.  The  Senate  assigned  {attnl)uerc)  to  Scipio  the  i)acilication*" 
of  Spain.— 8.  The  public  accuser  {accu.sdior)  caused  the  i)unishment 
Ipunlre)  of  all  [persons]  who  had  acted  against'"  the  usury  {usuriu.H) 
laws. 

XIII.  Genitive  OF  the  GERUND.—  1.  Wisdom  must  be  dehued^'  [asj 
the  art  of  living.—  2.  God  separated  man  from  the  other  creatures'"'  by 
nothing  so  much  {nutf/is)  as  by  the  faculty"  of  speech'*.—  3.  Who  does 
not  know"  that  the  hope  of  impunifv"  is  the  greatest  incentive"  to  sin- 
ning ?—  4.  The  ediles  were  charged"*  with  the  care  of  paving'"  the  streets 

as  Kediicen^  —  ^*  Transl.  :  a!»si'_'iied  (d'^ferre)  to  Poinpev  tlie  end  (er'ttico  of  the  Mlth- 
fxCLixixc  (Mlthindaticus)  wnr  to  achieve  {conficere).—^^  to  take  ilie  cliar<,'e  of  t^omethiii;,', 
muiciperealiauid.—  '^^  auxilium  ferre.— "  oluicere.— as  Trans*!,  to  abandon  it  to  tlic 
eiieinv  for  bein-'  slau'Mitercd  (//v/rif/J /•«').—  ^" 'i'ranr'late  :  (iueen  Juno  was  assitjned 
Uissiqnare)  to  be  transported  ul^portilre)  to  Konie.—  ■•o  Transl. :  These  lhin-8  to  be 
done  were  left  (permi  ft  ere)  to  the  consuls.— <»  to  cliarire  somebody  with  soniethmi?. 
attribtiere  alicui  al>quid.—  •»'■'  Transl.  :  attributed  to  Amynander  the  /Eiolians  to  be 
roused—  *3  concitjlre.—  *♦  ^tOli.-  '♦'*  Transl.:  S.  rented  {locare)  to  Gajus  all  the 
T)ropertv  (priedio)  which  he  held  {hahtbat)  in  Albany  county  (arjer  Albdnm)  to  be 
u-ifd  (}'rui}.  The  addition  'to  be  use  T  shows  tliat  a  locatio  rn,  not  a  locatlo 
opens  is  meant.—  ■««Translate:  S.  gave  out  on  contract  to  G:ijus  all  the  lands  etc. 
to  be  provided  etc.— *^  to  provide  witli  fences,  .«tp/vT/v.—  <>*  to  provide  wiih  roads,  d>-mere. 

—  «9  inandare  aliquid  al'icui.—  ^"  Transl. :  that  {ut)  he  should  care  the  condscated  lands 
to  b  •  promptly  restored  {resfiti/rre)  to  the  Lij?urians  {Lir/ures}.—  ^^  adiinere.—  '->-  sine  muril. 

—  83  i-fticere.— 6*  Transl.  :  The  detected  {detegere)  fraud  (fra'i<)  of  the  kiu.r.— '*  cau- 
tus  —  6*  animi  —  ^^  maxime.—  ^s  demeri,'  -re.—  '■'•'  heptC-ris  —  «o  liiuxiins.—  «i  to  strike 
with  dismay,  percellere.—  «•^  libenlre.—  «^  to  brini;  over,  tmd'icere.—  «*  societas.—  «*  to 
mourn  for  soinethin<r,/«7e/-^  aliquid.—  ««  amittere.—  «7  re^'uuin.—  ««  Transl.  :  ha-  taken 
(conditcere)  the  farm  of  Sempronins  to  be  cultivated  (colore)  on  phan-B  ipartiano).— 
«9  pac5re.  — ■">  to  act  a<?ainst  a  law,  in  leqc ni peccary. —"i^  appellilrc.—  ''-'  animal.—  ^'  facul- 
ta».—  '♦  dicere.—  '•  not  to  know,  igiidrare.—  '«  impunitas.—  "  illecCbra.—  ■"«  to  charge 
Bomcbody  with  isoinethiug,  alicui  aliquid  manddre.--  '''  sieruere. 


EXERCISES. 


207 


{via)  within  {in)  the  city  with  pebblestone**,  and  [those]  without  the  city 
with  crravel«».—  5.  Postumius  went**^  to  Praeneste  for  the  sake  of  offering 
a  sacrifice'*^  in  the  temjile  of  Fortfina.—  6.  I,  on  my  part,  have  our  ances- 
tors'*^ for  an  authority^^  and  for  [my]  teachers  in^»  the  observance  J  of 
reli"-ious  duties***.—  7.  The  mtdtitude  was  standing^»  on  the  top  of  the 
wail*  of  the  city,  eager  to  see«'  Alexander.—  8.  Neither  of  the  generals 
{dux)  thou.rht  {rmmorem  esse)  of  sending  help"  to  our  hard  pressed 
[soldiers]  —  9.  The  barbarians  were  powerless^*  to  resist  our  armies.— 
10  Neither  of  the  officers  (<?'^.c)  had"' any  time  for  saving  himself.— 11. 
I  do  not  believe  that  Gajus  has  spoken  thus  {ita)  for  the  sake  of  praising 
us—  12.  The  Helvetians  carried""  all  their  carts  to  {in)  one  place  for  the 
sake  of  defending  themselves.—  13.  Cleopatra  was  desirous  ot  excusing 
iierself  to  {apud)Cxsi\r. 

XIV  Genitive  of  gerundive  and  patiticipial  phrases.-  i.  Anti- 
ochus  did  not  cross  over""  to  Europe  for  the  sake  of  commencing"»  war,  but 
[tor  the  sake]  of  liberating  Greece.—  2.  By  this  error  the  general  lost  the 
opportunity  {1<m:us)  of  achieving  a  success^"".-  3.  Tiie  Senate  gave^  to  the 
ediles  aulhoritv  to  repair  the  porticoe  of  ^milius.—  4.  This  answer^  of 
the  kin"-  furnishedMo  the  ambassadors  no  material*  for  pleading  his 
cause  before  {apud)  the  Senate.—  5.  Although  {cu?n)  after  the  Pharsalian 
battle  I  alwavs  advocated',  not  the  laying  down«,but  the  throwing  down 
of  arms,  1  did  not  succeed^»  in  bringing"  the  king  over  to  my  opinion  . 

—  ()  Tlie  method  (ratio)  of  choosing"  and  arranging'*  the  words  is  easy. 

—  7  Many  renounce'^  pleasures  for  the  sake  of  obtaining  {adipisci) 
o-reater  pleasures.—  8.  Demosthenes  was  zealous'"  in  hearing  Plato.-— 
9  Both  took  part"  in  suppressing'"  the  Catilinarian  conspiracy.—  10.  It 
isreportrd'"  that  Csesar  was  desirous  of  acquiring^»  the  royal  title  _- 
1 1  The  «--lorv  of  havin»'- successfully''  conducted"  and  finished  the  Mithri- 
datic  wal-  was  conceded  to  Pompey.—  12.  A  shouting  was  heard,  a  sign 
that  iqenitiir)  the  town  was  taken.—  13.  The  consul  was  deeply  affected 
bv  the  news-'  that  [his]  brother  had  been  killed.—  14.  The  prisoners  did 
not  dare  to  deny  the  charge"  of  having  entrapped'"  Koman  horsemen  by 

an  ambuscade'".  .  rao   *i      ^^ 

XV.  Geiiundial  dative.—  1.  That  man  was  in  charge  of ^»  the  de- 
i)artment="  for  public  works.—  2.  The  common  counciP'gave  to  decemvirs 
the  supervision"  of  the  buriaP*  of  the  dead^^—  3.  The  means^»  of  the 
state  were  neither  sufficient  for  arming  nor  for  supjiorting^'  the  army.— 
4  Those  men  devoted  their  care  not  to  governing^"*  but  to  plundering 
tie  city  {deltas).—  5.  Romulus  selected*"  a  place  of*'  remarkable*^  adapt- 

«0  Sllex  —  81  fflarea  —  «^  proficisci.—  «^  to  offer  a  sacrifice,  mcra  facere.—  ^*  ma- 
iOrc«-    "    Transl.:  'l  have    our  ancestors    authors    and    teachers    (agre^einn;    with 
inaioreA.-  ««  Genitive.-  ^7  colcre.-  »«  reli-ions  duties,  rdiguines.-  «»  constare.-      on 
ton  of  in  -  "  co-noscere.-  "'^  opcm  ferre.-  »3  hard  presse.i.  laborans.-^*  impotens.- 
lo'iy ',S;_  ».  comportare.-  «M.urgare.-  «s  trajicere.-  «Mnferre.-    oo  to  achiev-e  a 
success,  retn  bene  gerere.-  ^  facere.-  '^  responsum.-  ^  pr^ebere.-  *  matenes.-s  agerc. 
—  «  Pharsalicus.—  '  to  advocate  something,  unctorem  ahcujUH  ,rn  esse.—  »  deponere.— 
»  abiicer^  —  i»  non  posse.-  "  to  bring  ov.-K  adducere  ad.-  »'-auctoritas.-  i3  deligere.— 
i*  collocare.-  »*  carere.-  i«  studiOsns.-  i'  to  take  part,  partidjyein  e^se.-  ^8  ..ppriraere. 
_  19  tni.lere.-  =»  obtinere.-  ^i  nomen.-  '^"^  bene.-  ^n  gerere  -  ^4  nidex.-    ^^  to  be 
deeply  aff.-cted,  mvimo  <lolure  affici.-  2«  nuntius.-  "^  criiuen.-  28  crcum venire^-  2»  m- 
"idie  -    »0  to  be  in  charge  of  something,  pntesse  alicui  ret-  3i  Translate  by  opera 
publica  adniini^trare.-  =2  decuriOues.-  "  by  pr<xncere       34  sepellre.-  36  mortuus.- 
»«  pecuni*.—  >T  alerc.—  ««  regere.—  s»  diripere.—  *»  deligere.-  "  ablat.  of  qualitj.- 
^"^  siuguiaris. 


208 


EXERCISES. 


edness"  for  Imilcrincr  the  cUy.—  6.  Tarqniniiis  was  bent  on  snizinc^  *  the 
citv  of  Gabii  by  tVaiul,  while  {cum)  he  assumed  the  mask"  ot  bemir  en- 
cased" ill  the  busuiess  of  his  city.—  7.  Tlie  Plebs  demanded  {poscrjr) 
that  {at)  as  soon  as  possible*^  an  assembly  for  choosin£^  consuls  should  be 
liekl**—  8  Two  commissions  of  triumvirs*"  were  appomted  {cmire),  Wm 
one  {phw.)  for  recelvin-  the  gifts  of  the  people,  the  other  (/>^'^r.)  for  re- 
l^alrmo-  the  temples  of  Matuta  and  Fortuua.—  0.  ^\  lien  the  day  tor  drattmg 
the  annvhad  arrived,  the  most  serious^"  disturbances^^  arose"  m  the  nty. 
XVI  Gkrundivt.  Genitives  and  Datives  as  piikdicates—  1.  The 
Parisians"^'  brouo-ht"  evervthlng  to  the  city  which  they  believed"  might 
make"»   the    siege    tolerable.— 2.  Such"   harangues"   [must]   contribute 
to  fan"  and   nourish»"  strife".—  3.  It  does  not    seem    that    the  ciecrees 
of  the  kin---  are  apt  to  preserve  peace,  but  [that  they  are  apt]  to  produce 
^var  — 4.  Some  [persons]  believe  that  many  books"  on  j^hyslcal  science 
have  a  tendency  to  dissolve  and  destroy  religion  {phir.).—  5.  Daily  "  exer- 
cises" are  conducive  to  the  preservation  of  life  and  health.—  0.  In  the  con- 
struction"" of  buildings"  care  should  be  especially  taken'^  that  the  walls 
are  able  to  bear  a  [great]  weight.—  7.  In  ourcouniry«'\  those  that  are"»  de- 
vothv  themselves  to  political  life",  should  especially  see  that  ('/^  V»';y 
are  in  a  condition  to  bear  the  struggle.— 8.  An  action  for  fraud     lies 
a'mlnst   those  who,  while    {nnn)   they  were  Insolvent,   have   induced 
oTheis^MoghV»  them  goods"  on  credit.        ,       ,      ,         „    ^         „        7» 

XVII    Geuundial  Ablative.—  1.  Learning  by  heart'"  strengthens 
the  memorv  —  2.  Tlie  first  ranks'"  of  our  [soldiers]  were  tired*'  by  tight- 
iii,r_3   Sclplo  employed"  the  lew   days  whlch^Mie   had  proposed"*   to 
spend  at  Carthage  with  drilllng^^'  his  navaP"  .md  land-forces".-  4  1  ou 
can  defend  me  best  by  punishing  those  who  have  grasped"*"  ^l^^'/^eel     for 
the  sake  of  klUlu"'-  me.—  5.  Hannibal,  with  the  appearance  ot  tleemg    , 
left  the  camp  wifh  all  his  troops,  In  order  to  (?//)  surprise'-'^  the  eneiny 
[while]  engaged''  in  plundering"^*  the  camp.—  0.  The  Numidians  fought 
by  running''l(n-ward"*  and  again  {rur.sus)  retreating  (.s£^  recipe  re)  —  7.  Rtmiu- 
lus  taught  our  ancestors  thai  they  might  {posse),  by  the  cultivation  *  of  the 
fields    have  a  plenty  of*"  everything.—  8.  Doest   thou  not  t«'el  that  llie 
Uuh4s    by  my  acqulttaP\  have  condemned  thee?— 9.  The  Ilomans,  by 
thnrwli'i'^""  .ri-appling  hooks'-'-'   upon  the  ships  of  the  enemy,  made  the 
naval  battle  similar  to  [a  light  1  on  land'"".-  10.  Alclblades,  by  showing' 
liow  «n-eat  a  damage-  they  would  {icere  going  to)  IntHcl^*  on  the  LacedcCino- 
nlans'by  the  capture*  of  Syracuse,  prevailed  on^  the  Athenians  to  send  a 
43  ouDortiiuitJi»  —  *<  c.iiicT.t.— ■»*  to  as-iuinc  Ihti  m;isk,  si//i>d<i/e.  wiUi  an  iiiliiiinve 
clause  (tliat  he;  wa-»  (Mi.'a"o(l).—  *»  en-a-i'tl  in  tho   l)u-«ine<s  of  tlie  <uy.  opwbus  urbuuis 
oSy^T/  /  f..^..-^^  quoq.ic  tempore.-  *^  l.ahCre.-  "»  blnl  triumviri  (two  sets  of 

"  <nl)iunctive  -  &*  by  e^.^e  witli  a  pixMiicate-ircrmuli.il.-  "  ejiiMnodi.—  8»»  oraiio.—  in- 
flatninare  —  «oalere.—  «»  certamen.  -  «'•*  incitilre.—  «3  libri  de  yuinina  ratiOne  natflne  cou- 
tcriuti  — ""  niiotidiilims.-  «*  ambulatio.—  ««  s^trnctara.—  «■  icile^.—  ««  to  take  care  that, 
vidirynt  -  ««  apad  iios.-  ^o  th()>*ethat  iuc,pariciple.  Seo§  3-)«.-"  rempub  icam  capes»- 
^er-  —•'2  actio  doli.—  '^  Translate  :  liv  the  action  for  fraud  are  h'  Id  (fenero  those  who.— 
^*plrducere,  with  uL-  's  alkr  (sin-:).-  ""»  to  j,mvc  on  cre.lir,  crcUer^.-J'  merx  (|.  .).-- 
'«  edi"cere.-  '«  contirmare.-  «"  acies.-  «'  fesKU>*.-  «^  alj=^umer.-.-  -^  t„  spend  which, 
transl.:  durin-  which  (aW.)to  stay  (comwomri).-  ««  ^^tatnere-  «^  exercere  -  ^«  "»'/'^!r; 

-  «7  copiiu  pede>*tres.-««  sumere.-  ««  ferrnn).-»"  fnpe  specie.- •>  ♦•PPr''"*;^*'';-;,  Z,'^^"- 
vatus  with  abi  —  »=  diripere.-  »*  procur-flie.  -  »5  colere.-  »•'  to  hive  p  >-nty,  (buidare. 

-  "  absolvere.-  »«  injicere  in.-  »»  grappliu-  hook,  harpaqo.-  ;«"  a  il-  it  ou  1""'^  y^fi'; 
na  pedestns.-  » docSre.-  ''damnum.-  3  infene  aliciii.-  «  Trans»!,  by  ablatives  absoUuc. 
'after  they  had  captured'  {expugnare).—  ^  persuadere. 


EXERCISES. 


209 


great  fleet  to  Sicily.—  11.  The  accused  escaped»  punishment  by  feigning^ 

^"xvm  Ablatives  Absolute  (First  Class).— 1.  Sclplo,  by  the  destruc- 
tion" of  two  cities  most  Inimical  {inimlcm)  to  this  empire,  not  only  has 
willed  out  {(Mere)  the  present  wars,  but  also  those  to  come    —  2.  Philip 
hoped  that,  by  taking"  the  cities  of  the  JEtollans,  he  would  be  stronger 
for  the  war.— 3.  Ctesar  resolved^Uo  cross  over»  to  Britam,  by  the  sub- 
iectlon^^  of  which  he  believed  that  the  fear'«  of  the  Roman  name  would 
be  Increased  among  the  barbarians.—  4.  After  the  hostages  and  the  arms 
liad  been  surrendered  by  the  inhabitants,  C«sar,  after  the  lapse'^of  two 
davs"^    marched^'  Into  the  territory  of  the  Reinl.—  5.  After  hearing  the 
ambassadors,  Cj^sar  answered  that  he  would  accept  their  surrender  if 
thev  would-»  deliver  him  their  arms  and  the  noblest  of  [their]  state  [as] 
liostages.-  G.  After  L.  Mummlus  had  taken  Corinth  he  adorned  vyith  pic- 
tures "Imd  statues  not  Italy  only,  but  also  the  provinces.— 7.  When  Pa- 
brlelus  byPvrrhus's  ambassador  was  offered^Mi  large  quantity'"  ?  ^?i^/^? 
did-'   not  accept  It,  saying  he  wished  rather  to  rule^*  those  that      had 
it   than  have   it    hlmsdf-  8.   Cn.   Sclplo  died  in  the  greatest  povertv, 
without  leaving  even  so  much^«  money  as  was  sulhcient^'  for  the  dowiy 
of  his  dau'-hters.—  9.  M.  Sallnator  was  condemned  by  the  people  bmiuse 
he  had  noT  divided  the  booty  equally^'' among^"  his  soldiers.-- 10  ^V  hen 
inuum)  P  Valerius's  soldiers  had  been  routed^\  the  Senate  resolved,  that 
he  should  receive  no  reinforcements  before^^  he  had  defeated  the  enemy. 
—  11   The  consul  Ilirtlus  sent  to  the  besieged  Mutinlans'*  letters  written 
on  {by)  lead,  which"  [some  of  his]  soldiers  carried  swimming  over  the 
rlverf  having  fastened   them  to  [their]  arms  {sing.).—  12.   1  he  consul, 
;dthou.>-h  he  had  defeated  the  enemy,  nevertheless  {tarnen)  retreated    to 
the  camp,  fearing"  he  mlghf-'^  fall  into  an  ambuscade.—  13.  The  inhabit- 
ants represented^'  that  If  [their]  arms  should  have  been  taken      from 
thein,  they  could  not  protect  themselves  against  the  neighboring  commu- 
nities [which  were]  most  hostile  to  them. 

XIX  VDLvnvES  Absolute,  Direct  Participles,  or  Finite  Clauses. 
r  \wlil  either  ahlativea  absolute  or  direct  participles  according  to  the  rules, 
■finite  clauses  to  be  used  only  if  neither  of  t/te  two  former  coiistructMns  be  ad- 
missible W/i£rever  either  ablatives  absolute  or  direct  participles  are  allowed, 
transude  in  both  ways.-]-  1.  The  Si)anlards*\  after  having  hitched*^  oxen 
to  vehicles",  placed^^  them  In  fl•ont^^  and,  the  signal*^  being  given  tor 
battle  lired*^  the  vehicles  [which  were]  full  of  pitch-wood*«  and  sulphur  ; 
then  (deiride)  they  drove^"  tlie  o.xen  against  the  enemy,  thre^v^»  [their]  hue 
in  confusion*"  and  broke  through**  [them].—  2.  Pontius  Cominius,  after 

•  Transl.:  was  lil>erated  from  punishment.-  '  8imnl5r_e.-  a  Trans'L :  that  he  was 
insane  (7«my).-  »  evertere.- ^o  those  to  come,  hy  futurus.--^^  ox^n^^^^&Te.-^^Jlv- 
■  "us-»^  Ttiucro.-  14  trajicere.-  i<*  ^^ubi-ere.-  »«  tiinor.  -  »;  by  m/m/a«.r^. - 
i"  bidunm  -  "«  pr)flci.cl.- -^o  phiperf.  «ubj.  of  tradere.-^^  Tran.l  :  Fabncms,  when 
iV  h  °"  nnbasSidor  olTered  to  hi.li.-  '^^  poi^idus.-  "^^  Transl.  :  aft^  not  iiavmnr  accep  ed 
it  /a  --■^Mini)enlre.-25  participle.- =«  ,;o  much  as.  is  qm.- ^no  be  snlhcient,  .*«/??- 
'cl'rT--^  dos  - -^^«aa.s^  Jqual.-  ^o  dative.-  ^\f n.i,'are  -  ^-^  Transl. :  tli^t  no  (««)  rem 
forcemeats  (a^m^mrsliould  l)e  sent  to  him.-  33  ni-i.-  34  Mutineu<is.-  35  i  mnsl.  .  alter 
which  S  been  fastened  (religare)  etc.,  the  soldiers  swam  over  Uranare)  tne  nver.- 
sV"^  red  ere -37  veritus  ne.- 3«  subj.  imperf.  oi  inelde re  to  tall.- S'*  exponere.- 
40  alimere  -  41  Hi.pauus.-  *^  adjun-ere.-  43  vehiculum.-  44  constituere.-  4»  prraa 
f..o  .  !!!.  46  ,i.ruum  -  47  inccdcre.-  4^  t.eda.-  4«  sulphur.-  ^o  participial  construction. 
_M*  participial  constructiou.-  «-^  acies.-  "  to  throw  iu  coutusiou,  comteraare.- 
*4  perrumpere. 


210 


EXERCISES. 


ho  had  been  let  down»  over  (^  434  R. 32)  the  T^H  ^1-"  ^^^^J^^  I]  "^ 
swum-  across  tl.e  Tiber,  ranie  to  Vrji,  ucconip  isliL-a  '^  '  ^  '.  j,,^^.' 
vcturned  in  a  sindlar  way- to  Ins  [^-'"P^'V^^^;  ;-.;!•  .^"^'"r^rT  man 


tViends  comphiined^"  o  Ins  leniency  reMunKin-  i  i.t.  ...  .^  "-  ,3-,  - 
Ma  in  t  e  one  C.x^sar.-  T,.  Hannibal,  havin.^^  been  intormecU  at 
several  of  (.i-)  liis  soldiers  had  tied  to  the  enemy,  declared  P^  >Ih'1v  tl  •  t 
he  hmiclt'had  sent  them  under  the  .^jnise  of  deserters  When  tl  co- 
itus had  heard-  what  he  had  declared,  tluy  f  "f,^-;^^;^^;^;^^,  l!'^.^  ^ 
havin-cutotr^"  their  hands.-  0.  C*sar  alter  he  had  P^'-^^^  Zm^^nJ^ 
fclr  a  while-,  led  his  troops  back-  to  the  camp,  dccnnn-  [uj  sulhcitnt 
fur  the  present"  that  terror  was  struck-  nito  ^^^'^^^y-  ^,^^,  ,,,,. 

XX.  Ablatives  absolute  of  the  second  clas>.     [0/6  l\    ''''''^ 
fences  mu.st  be  rendered  bii  direct  partirip,d  ^'^ff;;'';f-^-J^^^^^^^^ 
had  di.'d,  Tulhis  Hostiluis  was  made  kin-  --  2   ^/.^^^»  ^''f,f  7"""'"  '  '  IV 
V  rted^*   eMch  for  his  [own]  province,  the  Senate  directed      [it>J  ■  tu  ntion 
0  setlin'-   he  di  icillies  i     Spain.-  3.  After  the  praetors  had  le  i  (ff/redc) 
Ic'Sy  WW.     thT^  the  draftin,-  of  the  army  their  l^'.^t  business. 

-  4   Alter  (he  consul  had  returned  (/r^m/.)  Iji-nithe  province  ee- 
mtuuled  ipo.stuldre)  from  the  Senate  the  honor  ol  a  triumph    •-  '  •    »  'VI 
A  exande^  had  crossed"  the  ilypasis,  the  army  ^^^.^^^Y^'lw.u^l  il  c  e   emv' 
demanded-  to  be  {at)  led-  home.-  0.  Alter  day  ^  ;';\    =^\Yu     't    u 
made-  a  sally'^  fn.m  {ahl.)  all  the  -ates  and  came  near   /he  .11 

XXI   ABLvnvES  Absolute  OF  THE  THIRD  CLASS.— 1.  ManluiN  \\  hen 
th^irmy  m^^^^^^^^  mutiny- in  his  behalf- against  »^ij  t'^^her    who  ha 
con   imued  him  to  deathf  persuaded  the  soldiers  tljat  they  won  d^^ 
l.i.n  t(.  he  nunished  —  2.  A  general  is  in  a  great  dangei,  il  (^0  some  le 


^»    A   noise'"  was  heard  m  me  ii^btMiiw;^>    ;   tn^    x^^wcv.   ......„-----, 

h^iMi  chlm')  they  were  treated"  like  the  Messenians".-  0.  i  he  S.^n- 

ims.—  «^  dilii:iMm?M  nc.—      >"\V.    A.  '    t.,,.  1;..»-  i,.r  ^.rruhia^  elTuoere.—  ^^  pcrliTru. 


EXERCISES. 


211 


missior''  should  not'Mie  given.- 7.  That  man  tl^reatcned  within  tie 
hcarin-  of  the  Senate  that  ho  would  kill  his  adversary  with  his  [onn] 
h:uul  --•  8.  Tn  the  beginning  (inire)  of  his  youth  Themistoclesived  rather 
dissolutelv^80that'(?v^r/ic.  c<?^.v/r.)his  own  father  disinherited'  Inm - 
0  The  Sena  e  as^ented^^  to  [the  view  of]  Ful vius  against  the  opinion  of  Len- 
r;nis-  We  trust  i.perdre)  that  with  the  help  of  the  immortal  gods 
hisconspii-acv  will  be  crushed'".-  11.  The  resolution  was  carried'^^  unan- 
mmJ^liv-^  witiiout  any  one's  opposition-.-  12.  While  Capua  was  be- 
sieged bv  the  Komans,  Hannibal  led  his  army  to  the  river  Anio  and  took 
a  pl>siti<;ir«  within  a  little  distance  {non  longe)  from  the  city  of  Home.— 
13  Since  Fulvius  is  engaged-  in  {/>//)  important-  work  for  the  state,  you 
had  better'^-  select-  another  help  for=^  you—  14  AVho  shotild  not  wish 
to  eno-an-e"  in  so  creat  a  science,  so  great  rewards  being  held  out 

XXlf  Ablatives  absolute  of  the  fouutii  class.—  1.  As  long  as 


believe  that  the  Senate  would  grant**  m  his  absence  what  it  had  denied 
to  him  i  his  presence.-  4.  Hieronvmus  broke^«  the  Iriendship  which, 
tl  e  ife  iie  (.^^  his  grandfather-  Hiero,  had  existed-  between  the  Ro- 
Inan  pio  )le  and  the  Syracusians-.-  5  This  promise  has  been  given  b^ 
thee  not  nily  without  my  knowledge,  but  also  against  my  will.-  0.  Labi- 
enu^  said  tluft  he  could  not-  support-  Caesar's  uudertakii^g  j^  consistency 
with"  his  sworn  duties".—  7.  Your  plans  are  such^*  that  {ut)  they  can- 
not iX'  carried  out-  in  conformity  with-  the  laws.-  8.  Inthe  consulship 
of  .Manlius  and  Censorlnus  the  third  Punic  war  began  {orin).—  9.  In  the 
battle  of  Canna'"  almost  the  whole  Roman  army,  under  the  command 
of  Varro  and  .Emilius,  was  either  killed"  or  captured.--  10  A  .gieat  dis- 
pue-  arose  whether  the  laws  that  were  enacted-  under  the  mfluence" 
f  CTsar  should  be  abolished^^  or  confirmed.-  11.  If  thou  art  [his]  wit- 
ess  an  I  'en  rser",  I  shall  readily-  consent-  that  the  republic  be  en- 
tn'st  J«  PompeV's  faith.- 12.  Numa  is  said  to  have  tormed"  he 
reli'^hus  institutimis'with  the  help-  of  the  goddess  Egena.- 13.  If  (.  ) 


[its]'  former'*  dignity. 


i^To-i^rm  tS;  ^W>t/;irs     utum..  sTm^nstituere.-  -  a  helper,  adjator,-  «^callidus 
!1  Vo  S<    •   I  la'i  t  ey  do  not  believe  {subj.)  tlmi  they  can  reach  (coasequi)--'^  not  by 
^/.piiirbutl.ya^c/or.-  ^^  .euior-year,  by  the  pergonal  l^o^x^x  senior.-  ^3sociu..-'*pn8. 

tiuus. 


212 


EXERCISES. 


XXIII   Prepositional  Geuundtat.s  after  ad,  in  (with  nrcusativc), 
^^Yy  ob  —  1   The  (k'tciKkr  most  couscientiously"  made  use  ot  all  argu- 
ments that  were  available'»  for  the  protection"  of  an  accused  petson.— 
2   How  few  are  there  now  w  ho  are  nominated'"  for  high  public  oltices    , 
unless^ntheir]  means*' are  sufficient"^  for  bnbing«='  [the  electors].—  o.  Ihe 
a<^ents  of  Perseus  inveisrled"-'  the  communities  of  the  Achan  to  take  up 
arms  against  the  Ilomans.-  4.  Thou  wilt  have  to  select  braver  m^'»  !<>r 
so  greata  venture«^-  5.  The  consul,  after  having  sent  hisbrother  Man  bus 
to  collect"»  from  the  Boeotians  th.e  rest  of  the  numey  which  '  they  had 
pnnnised,  and  having  api^ointed^''  a  day  for  a  conference  with  the  envoys   , 
led  his  army  back  to  ApamPa.-  G.  The  trooiu'rs"»  ot  Mago  with«'  whoin 
he  roamed  "through"'^  this  i>art  of  the  country"',  were  neither  {non  mmlo) 
stron»'"*  enou'di  to  operate"  against  the  enemy,  nor  even  {mi  ne  quidem) 
to  protect  the  tields  against  {ab)  foragers"».—  7.  The  tenth  legion  gave  the 
assurance  {conlirmare)  that  it  was  fully  prei>ared"  to  meet  {obrmni  ire)  the 
ejieniy—  8    By  this  letter  of  tiie  kiim',  Pausanias  was  made  bolder  to 
carrv  out(/)frAVm;)  what  he  had  ]>romised.— 0.  It  is  by  no  means"  ex- 
pediVnt  thal'"''the  office'""  of  our  Presidents  should  be  extended'  to  another 
[alter]  term"  lest  any  one'  by  a  hmir  lease*  of  power  should  be"^  either 
more  reluctant»  to  lav  down'  [hisj  oilice,  or  more  strengthened"  to  ol)taiii 
it  ao-ain"—  10  The  Senate  ordered  the  consul  to  take  al  )ng'°  everything 
tharmi"ht  be  useful   for  the  siege"  or  detencc  of  cities.— 11.  Several 
thino-s  (rea)  were  in  the  way  {impedimenta)  of  quickly  condu(;tmg  {gerere) 
the  war.—  12.  Hannibal  sent  a  strong  body  of  troops'"^  into  the  district 
of  Puieoli'^^  to  lav  it  waste  by  ffre  and  sword  {ferro  et  iyni).—  Ill  G:ijua 
has  deposited''  with  me  a  large  sum'^  of  money  [as  a  contribution]  for 
the  buildin<'  of  an  orphan-house'».— U.  [FAcry  person]  who  shall  have 
either  giveiv^rotfeied.or  accepted  money  [as  an  inducement]  for  voting" 
is  punishable"*  under  our  laws. 

XXIV.  Ghuundials  after  i^i  (with  abl.),  ah,  <Je,  r>ro,ex,  and  inter.— 
1  In  the  distribution'-'  of  public  offices"-"  the  rulers"'  of  the  rei)ublic  should 
especiallv  {imprlnii><)  see  [to]  what  is  most  useful  to  the  people,  not  [what 
is  useful]  to  the  ai>plicants-^—  2.  When  dangers  are  impendin^•-^  the  cus- 
tom of  phvsiciaus  ou-xht  to  be  imitated,  who  cure-"  slight'-'  cases  by 
gentle'»  reinedies,  but  to  more  serious"  diseases  are  obliged  {cohere)  to 

"75  Keli-'irj-U'^  —  '*  to  bo  availahU',  potiiure.  —  ''"^  tuGri.  —  '»  proponere  (.S7/&7.). — 
79Transl.7f.)rconcluctinj,M7m/'^)  therrpublic-  ^»  nisi.- "i  copiiv.- ^"^  suppetere  ^/^j/.). 
_  »3  iir-Tri—  s*  ctmcitiirc—  «^  Traiisl. :  for  vcntunni,'  (audere)  so  <;reat  a  thin-  — 
8«  exi«'ere  —  "  Transl. :  out  of  that  which  they  had  promised.  If  literally  translated,  the 
relative  '  which  '  in  Latin,  would  refer  to  the  rest,  and  not  to  the  whole  of  the  moMcy.— 
88  dicerc  —  "»  'I'ransl  :  havin<;  said  to  the  envoys  a  day  for  conferrint,'  (rolloqin).—  >">  eqni- 
t.itum.si/j'a')  —  9iTransl. :  the  troopers  who  nnder  U»e  command  (dux)  ot  Map;o  roamed 
etc  —  «2  wrrwdri  with  accusative.—  "  Translate:  this  rej,'ion.-  «*  validns.—  "to 
onerate  a-ainst  somebody,  tace.osere  aliqmm-  ««  pabuhltor.-  "  t.uperlatiye  of  pamtos. 
.-s«  miiiime -- «9  inftnitive  clause.-  1"«  The  ottice  of  a  his;h  ma-istrate,  if  military 
power  is  contained  in  it,  is  reu  lerod  by  imperium.-  »  proroirfire  in.-  yi  ransl.  :  term 
Sf  four  years,  qmdrhnnium.-  ^  ne  quis  -  "  Ti;an>l  :  alter  {ah!.  «/.. )  the  power 
(»o^.sVa*)  has  t)een  made  old  (inretera^cere,  to  make  old).-  ^  subjunc  ive  of  ^vg.- 
«tardus—  7  deoonere.— 8  muiiTtus.—  «  rursus.—  '"  secum  poriilre.—  »1  ol)sidere.— 
y--  IxhK-  of  troops,  aqmen.-  »  I'uteolflnus.-  ^*  deponcrc.-  "  ma-na  Pecunia.- 
16  orphnmf raphe twi  (late  and  modern  Latin,  derived  froin  the  Creek).- "  siiff.a..;K% 
forre  -  1«  not^tris  le-ibiis  tenCri.—  1»  deftrre.-  -»  l)ublic  office,  muwfts.-  -»  those  who 
rule  \qerere)  the  republic-  '^'^  part.  ..f  i>etere.-  -^  'J  ransl.  :  In  damrers  to  be  ap- 
proached (adlrr).—  -'*  curare.—  "Transl.  :  those  that  are  {partic.)  tli-htly  {levittr) 
sick  (rt;yTO^d/-e;.-28Traujl.:  gently  {hy  ItnU).-  27  gravis. 


EXERCISES. 


213 


innlv  dann-erous  cures'''.—  3.  Prestige»  is  one  of  the  greatest  aids''  m  the 
mannc-eme'ni^"  of  the  more  important»*^  aff-airs—  4.  In  defending  yourself 
a-ainst"  so  serious  charges,  you  ought  to  have  been^*  a  little  more  care- 
ful _  5  This  man  had^^  all  [the  qualities]  which  are^  most  important 
for  winning"  popularitv,  ease^»"  in  speakin-,  liberality'»  in  giving,  [and] 
leniencV»  m  forgivin-:-  G.  The  sight^^  of  the  walls  {mo^n^a)  deterred 
the  Cai-thaginians  from  attacking  {oppmj nare)\hQ  city  —  7  I  shall  never 
cease"  from  promoting",  to  the  best  of  my  abdities^Sthe  interests"  of  my 
fellow-citizens.-  8.  The  third  book  of  Cicero's  Tusculan"  disputations 
is  ^vritten  on  alleviating*^  sorrow",- 9.  An  agreement  was  made  by 
lioth  {nternue)  leaders,  that  {nt)  ambassadors  should  be  sent  from  {e^')  all 
Slates  to  {dc)  draft  a  treaty^"  of  peace.-  10.  IIow  wretched  is  the  condi- 
tion of  those  who  are  iunorant  {expers)  of  the  pleasure  which  is  derived 
from  seeing^' and  hearing!— 11.  This  law,  instead  of  diminishing  vices, 
holds  out  rewards  for  committing  crimes.—  12.  It  is  reported^'  ih^XAlYen- 
nus,  ^vhile  weighing'*  the  gold  given  by  the  Romans,  was  surprised  and 
cut  down'M)v  Cainillus.  r    1    ^^ 

XXV.  Participial  tiirases  after  pkeposittons,—  1.  Cnesar  lorbade 
the  soldiers  to  rest"  before  the  eiuP«  of  the  march,—  2.  Fulvius  drafted 

I  hi^]  wiir'"  but  before  signing  and  sealing^'  the  paper"  he  regretted     [his] 
[jii,.pose  —  3.  This  happened  a  few  months  {abl.)  before  I  became  a  consul. 

—  4  After  Alblnus  and  Piso  had  been  declared  consuls,  Flaccus,  the  un- 
successful" candidate,  was  taunted"  by  his  own  mother.—  5.  Six  years 
after  the  fall"  of  Veji,  the  city  of  Rome   was    taken    l^J'^'e    Gauls.— 
G  Tinit  dav  when""  the  news*^»  of  the  loss""'  of  the  Canncan^^  battle  came 
to  the  citv;  was  fir  the  most  glo(miy"  ever  since  the  building'*  ot  t\ie  city. 

—  7  Aiiion«-  these  orators  Servilius  Glaucia  was  fiir  the  most  wicked 
since  the  exCitence  of  mankind,  but  very  acute  and  shrewd  and  especially 
full  of  fun'«—  8.  (^rsar  was  consul  in  the  vear  C94  after  the  building  ot 
Rome—  10  To  all  generals  who  had  commanded  {praesse)  armies  in  the 
Avar   <n-eat  rewardswere  uiven  for  their  successful  conduct  of  the  war.— 

II  After  the  expulsion"  ()f  the  Gauls  it  was  proposed  by  many,  that  all  the 
cit'izens  should  move^"  to  Veji  on  account  of  the  destruction '«by  fire  ot 
the  citv  ot  Rome.—  12.  After  {postquam)  the  report**»  on  the  failure     m 

.  capturing  the  city  has  been  made  by  you,  let  us  speak  {agere)  now  on 
the  meatVs^"  to  capture  it.-  18.  I  have  prevailed  upon  him«*  to  go  to  the 
country'*^  f.)r  a  few  days,  which  unquestionably'"  was  the  best"  [he  could 
do]  under  the  circumstances. ^ 

28  curatio  —  2»  cloria.—  3»  Transl. :    plurimum  adjuvdre.—  s'  administrarc.—  »2  mag- 

n„.  _  sV  I'ransl  •  in  excusin-  so  irreat  charges  {crimen).-  "  Transl.:  greater  diligence 

o  'ht  to  ha?i  1  een  used  {ufiy-  3M>v  e.<>se.-  »•  to  be  most  imiyormnt   rnaxiTnt  nmnentt 

Zf^-^'-vat^^^^^^^^  3«'facilit.is.-  39  muniftcentia.-  *^  dementia.-  *^  by 

ZnS^ere -*^xfceR^^  recedere  ah.-  "  auuere.-  44  quantum  optime  pot^ero - 

^States -  4«  Tu.<cuianu;.-  *^  lenlre.-  "« le^ritudo.-  *«  an, agreement  is  made  by, 

ro//rfe/  ji  (impers  )  inter.-  s"  to  draft  a  treaty  of  peace,  paceni  ^w//g^r«.-  ^1  spectSre.- 

63    raceV-  "  pendere.^  "  opprimere.-  "  caedere.-  *'  conquiescere.-  »«  ^^j  co^iHcere. 

._  6Cn<cribe,-e.-  60  tcstamentum-  ««  to  sign    and    .eal    obsxgnare.-  «Vr''"l^-~ 

«3  poeVdtC're-«*  Transl.  :   who    had   suffered  (/e/re)  a  repulse  (repnlm).-  «Mo  taunt 

^ol^^kl  fxvrdbriire  alicvi.-  ««  sexennium  (a5;.)-  «'  by  capere.-  «^  quo.-  «^  nuntius 

0  b  S//J™  pervenlre.-  '3  fune^tus.-'*  condere.--'S  iiriprobus. 

1176  fJnot  tun    ridlcuZ-  "  expellere.-  "  migrare.-  '»  destruction  by  fire  xncendere 

ac  Jr/lr' -"°  to  make  a  rep..Vt  on  something,  referre  de  ahqva  re-^^   '1  ransl.: 

on  ma  au)turin.'  the  city.-  «^am.-  "  by  the  gerundive  of  caj)ere.-  "  to  prevail  on 

.omeb^dj  a"  c"c/7v  M  mealicui   vt.-  "  rus,-  «•  baud  dubie.-  «'  commodi.simus. 


214 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


BOOK    FIFTH. 

ADVERBIAL  RELATIOXS.— USE  OF   THE  TENSES. 

USE   OF   THE   :\100DS. 


CHAPTER  FHIST. 
ADVERBIAL    RELATIONS. 
I.  ADVERBLVL  RELATIONS  IN  GENERAL. 
§  5 16.  Incidental  (adveiibial)  relations  or  '  circumstances*  are  the 
different  relations  of  Place,  Time,  or  ^Iodality  in  their  combination  with 
the  predicate  or  other  members  of  the  sentence.     The  langnaij^c  gener- 
ally does  not  express  these  relations  by  describing  them  through  words  and 
phrases,  but  by  peculiar  grammatical  forms  to  which  usage  has  assigned 
the  meanings  of  descriptive  words.    Such  forms  are  applied  to  all  phrases, 

predicative,  objective,  and  attributive.* 

t-ff"  ExAJiPLEs.  1.  Objkctive  RELATIONS  OF  Vi.ACF. '.  C{V9{[T  in  GanHf  hoWum  m'lit 
(i/i  denoting;  tluTLACK  of  iJioaclioin.  T/zf/f  profrttuscs  ?  U7«  we  (Iroin  what  I'KacexIuI 
you  (lopart?  Loor/e  alu'st,  hv  is  far  (a  lonjr  way)  (li^tant.— AxTiamTiVK  iiklations  : 
riisina  Cannemu,  the  battli;  of  Caiinffi  (boin^'  foii^^lit  at  a  place  near  CannaM,  lU-  lum 
Jlis^pariiense,  tlie  war  in  Sjjaiii  ((liMill<Jui^'h('(l  Iroin  a  war  ai^ainst  the  Spaniards,  which 
luiijht  not  be  carried  on  in  Spain).  H^'n?  the  attribntive  endini;  ^/^*^<  denotes  h>cal  re- 
lations.—Pukdicative  itKLATioNs  :  iiw'iw^ru-^licntur.  (Jajus  lives  in  tlu-  country. 

2.  ()B.rECTiVE  kklations  of  Time:  I'of^t  diem  se.xtnni  venit  (})Ost  denotiiii:  '  at  a 
time").— />?■/<  niorsttus  est.  he,  tarried  a  lonmj  timk.— Attkibi'tive  kklations:  Opus 
crastintnn,  tlie  work  of  to-morrow  ;  labor  qKotMh'inns,  every  day's  work.— Puedicativk 
RELATIONS  :  \'eiiiet,  tie  ?r<7(f  coine  ;  vC'iiit ,  he /m.>>' come  ;  etc. 

3.  Objective  UEL.\TioNs  OF  Modality:  7;i/;/7<^///e/' labOrat,  he  work?  diliirently  (in 
a  d;lis:ent  manneki.  Quanti  hoc  a'stimas,  At  what  pkue  do  yon  vahie  thisy— At- 
TKiBUTivK  RELATIONS  :  Lleiiuin/(^/ur.  a  war  perforined  in  a  brutal  manner.  (Mere  the 
mere  form  of  an  ai,'iceini,'  adjective  expresses  th<f  relation  of  manner.)  Homo  <liu- 
genfior,  a,  lUHu  dili-ent  in  a  hii^her  deuuee.— Predicative  iielations  :  CJ.ijus /f/r/j- 

fnantt  abiir,  Oajiis  left  weeiiin-r  Uhe   participle,  as  accessory  predicate,  expre^sin;,' an 
action  coincident  with  his  leaving,  being  one  of  the  relations  of  modality). 

§  547.  The  adverbial  relations  are  expressed  by  the  following  gram- 
matical forms:  1)  adverbs;  2)  prepositional  combinations;  3)  the  cases 
of  the  substantive,  taken  in  an  adverbial  or  prepositional  sense;  3)  the 
form  of  an  accessory  predicate,  consisting  of  a  participle  expressed  or 
understood,  agreeing  with  its  logical  subject;  4)  adjectives  derived  from 
nouns  or  adverbs  denoting  time,  place,  or  manner;  5)  the  tenses  of  the 

principal  predicate;  C)  by  clauses. 

fW  Of  these  forms  only  the  adverbs,  the  cases  of  substantives,  and  the  acces- 
soiiY  predicates  are  to  be'eonsidered  liere,  the  other  forms  beini;  assigned  todiilereut 
chapters.     The  prepositional  expressions  are  likewise  considered  here  bo  lar  as  they 

belong  to  the  Bubjects  treated. 

~  *  Thus  for  inst.  the  EiVglisirexpressions^in  t"h<?  way  of'V'  in  the  form  of  are  indicated 
bv  the  mere  ending  rim  i.i  a  great  nnini)er  of  substanlive  adverbs.  The  ideas  ol  cacse, 
means,  puice  may  be  expressed  bv  descriptive  words  (ran^a,  iiistrnmentum,  pretinm), 
but  they  are  most  generally  indicated  by  mere  inflectional  endings,  to  which  usage,  in  cer- 
tain connections,  has  assigned  these,  and  no  other,  meanings. 


RELATION   OF   PLACE. 


215 


7?^n,  1  Advfrb^  are  condengation?  of  speech,  combining  three  different  elements  in 
Jiem.A.  -^^^'^,^^^,  ,?!:,'"'  ..^i  i^KA  bein<'  either  an  ad  ective,  noun.  verb,  or  pre- 
en e  word,  I'ame  y  1  .^^.^l^^^^f^^'  JJ^^^,  and^can^  be  understood,*  as  amanfer  whose 
position,  winch  '""^'/  '''>?  l'"^,' J  5'^  .  ,,i],c  whose  radical  is  the  demonstrative  idea,  ex- 
"^''''\'iv  '!he  lorm  u  c  i^'e  /^c  "^^  'ihe  general  idea  of  an  adverbial  relation  (place 
r'^'^'^c^fn    rv>   whic^^^^^  "^  ^^'^  ^«"^e  "'^^^'  «"  ^'^«  governing  nouns  of 

time,  modallt^\,  ^^''^.'\ I,  "'"'"f.»:",  nianner  or  pkkpositional  relation  Ppecifyin<:  the 
absolute  adjectives  :  -iUhe  ^P^^^  |^  ,7; ."" -.her  as  direction  to,  or  frcm  a  place,  or  as  man- 
general  ideas  of  Pl^^e  time  or  nio(  lalt^  «5\?hTch  the  action  is  performed.     These  special 

;Sui'ons'^;'^-indlcafK  ^^'  ^^'  ^^'    '^^  ^^^'  ^^^  ^""^^  °^^^^^>; 

n.n..  TY  ^'>7-^!;;--^r^^KS;:ci!?^^^ti^ 

or  understocHl,  ami  agre    m- ^  >  h  ^  vidi^the  .ame  as  in 

always  {^t^'»"^.^^  "  ,^  .^i^,^  /^^^^^  ?<^ula  i7to  be  usc-d  as  accessory  predicate,  it  is  always 

cmia\  ^^  hen  ^7 .  P^^.i  .    '  „; '  Vdiective  or  predicate-noun  belonging  to  it  takes  its  inflec- 
understood.  and  the    [f '  «  ^j  J  f  f/i  ^^,^^,^^,  ^^  rncolnrmmi\\m\^\U  he  dismissed 

,  o„.  the  same  «^  •"    J  »^^  "  a,   ,,  hun         n  lar  to  the  adverb  ' impilne').-Sempronius  His- 
Gajiis  unhurt  (>(.tha  he?  «.yuihut^^  ^  ^  I  ^^  Spain,  i.  tJ.  being  a 

^;^^^:^'^:^^^^^  a  ;;ro^oniui;'which  we  mi^ht  imagine  to  have  the  force  of  a 
(not  existing)  adverb  ' proconsuliter\ 

II.  RELATION    OF    PLACE. 
^  54§    The  relation  of  place  is   expressed  1)  by  prepositions  with 
substantives  (B.  IV.,  Ch.  I.) ;  2)  by  the  locative  form-adverbs  ;  3)  by  some 
adverbs  formed  from  nouns,  adjectives  and  prepositions  ;  4)  by  the  accusa- 
tive and  ablative  cases  of  nouns. 

Bern  3   Locative   fot^m-adyet^bs  are  the  adverbs  formed  from  the 
roo^.^;f  most  determinative  form-adjectives  (^  242  foil.)  by  attachmg  to 
hem  certain  endin-s  Avhich,  in  all  respects,  have  the  nature  of  case-end- 
mrs     Thtis  FOUR  CASES  are  formed,  called  the  first,  second  third,  and 
f  urih  locative  cases      They  denote  either  local  dtrections  (to,/mm,  or 
^  r"   7/     oMW^^^^        at  a  place,  the  place  beitig  indicated  by  the  same 
rono    i.^^^^  ^«  tiie  form-adj(^ctives  from  whose  roots  they  a,-e 

eri^ed     The  locative  form-adverbs,  like  the  determmative  form-adjec- 
tives, are  divi.led  into  adverbs  of  the  iKTEimoGATiVE,  deflnite,  indefi- 

xtTF   and  RELATIVE  form  >  (^  241).  -x-        • 

llm  A  The  FIRST  LOCATivECASE  has  thc  force  of  the  preposition  m 
with  'he  ABLATIVE  of  to/.,  accompauicd  by  that  form-ad.i ective  fmm 
w  oLe  root  it  is  deri ve.l.  It  Expresses  the  place  at  or  in  which  something 
i\  done  -in^^^  hy  the  ending  hi,  which  is  attached  to  the  root  of 

tie  Ttenntati  T       the  same  w^y  as  the  case  endings  of  the  corre- 
s  otldhiH^^  Thus  v<  (rocn  0  forms  ibf,  which  means  m  eoloco 

VT  T    "t  place,  or  TIIERE.-The    SECOND   LOCATIVE    CASE    haS   the    foiCC 

otM^  e  Dre 'osition  ex  ov  ab  (with  loco\  and  is  formed  by  attaching   the 
eu  n<^  Sr^  t le  root  of  the  determinatives,  as  inde  {ex  ov  ab  eo  loco) 
Zm  ce  (  r  m  that  place).-The  third  locative  case  takes  the  place  of  the 
p!il>osition  ad  ovm  with  the  accusative  of  locns,  denoting  directionjg 

6ome  gra.iimarians  that  all  prepo-itions  were  on.anally  adve  bs,  ,.  erioncous. 

1  Se°  Tic  (\Tc.  .30,  87 :   Vnde  utrumque  declflrat,  et  ex  quo  loco,  et  a  quo  loco  [i.  e.  from 
the  interior  or  from  the  exterior  of  a  place). 


216 


ADVERBIAL   RELATIONS. 


RELATION   OF  PLACE. 


217 


a  place  It  has  the  same  form  as  the  ablative  neuter'  of  the  determinative 
adV'Ciives,  as  lo  {ad  eum  locum),  thithor  (to  that  place).— The  fourth  lo- 
c  vnvE  CASE  has  the  form  of  tlie  ablative  feminine  of  the  adjfclivcs,  and 
represents  the  preposition  pr,  or  the  ablative  via,  denoting  dneclion 
throur/h,  or  by  way  of  some  place. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE   LOCATIVE   FORM-ADVERBS. 

1)  Interrogative  and  Relative  Forms. 


Adjectives. 


Local  Adverbs. 


FIRST  CASE.    1  SECOND  CASE. 


Onis,  who.  which ' ' ubi ,  lohn-e  ! mule,  lohenM 

Uter,  ivldch  {o{    wUoXn^"  in  which   uinnUc, 


THIRD  C.\SE. 


two) 

Quicunque,  ?p//o- 
ever  or  which- 
ever ) 

Quisqnip,     wJio-   noiubi, 
ever  or  which-      ^I'^f 
ever 


of      the     two 
ptacfft 
iibicuiiquCitt'Aer- 
ever 


where- 


tvhich    of    the 
two  pldCtS 
uiukHunque. 
whencc60ever 

uiulcniulc, 
whtnccsoever 


quo,  irhithfiT 
fromwwo,  to  winch  of 


the  two  places 

quocunqnc,  ichi- 
thersotvtr 

quoqno.w/nth(r- 
(>OtCer 


FOURTH  CASE, 
qua,  which  way 


2)  Definite  Form. 


I^,  that,  he 
Hie,  this 

lit  f"«' 

Idem,  the  same 


Aliqui^,  > 
Quisplani,  some 

Qui^quam,  any 

Quisque,  each 


Qnivip.s      every 

possible 
Uternui',      lx)(h, 

each  oft>ro 
Aliu!«,  another 


ibi.  there 
hlc,  htre 

iblfleni,    at    the 
'    mine  place 


inde,  thence 
hiuc,  hence 
illinc,  Uromyon- 
istinc,i  iter  j)t((ce 
iiididcm,      from 
the  mme  place 


CO,  thither 
hue,  /lifhf^r 
illuc,  tto  yonder 

istUC,  f    JHUCi^ 

eodcm,      to    the 
same  place 


qu;1eunqne,?f7Aai 
way  soever 

quflquS,       what 
way  soever. 


Oil.  by  that  way 
bile,  by  this  way 
illile,  <  by  yonder 
isiHc,  C   way 


cAdi'in,     by 
same  way. 


the 


3)  Indefinite  Form. 


,  .  ,      ,  I        1         )from 

cnbi,*      I    some-  euiulo,      rf^pfne 
alicubi,   i"  ichtre   ulieuude,  [^^^^^ 

n?i)iam,  some- 
w/iere 

ui-qnaui",  any- 
where 

ublque^,  every- 
where 


ubivis.  in  every 
IfossilAe  place 

utioblque,  in 
both  jAaces 

alibi  (alias)  else- 
where 


undique,     from 
every  jdace 


quo,      \to  some 
aliquo,  s  place 

5 

quoquani,  to  any 
place 


quovi;».  to  e^-ery 
possible  place 


qna,      \ 
aiiquil,  f 


by  some 
way 


utrimqne,  /rom |Ulrnque,  to  both 

t)oth  sides  \    sides 

aliunde,      from  alio,  to   another 

elsewhere  place 


qH!Tquani,6yany 

way 
quSque     (upque 

quaque),  every 

way 
qnavisi,  by  every 

posdble  way 


alia  (rare)  by  an- 
otlcer  way. 


>  Tlierc  i^  no  doul)t  that  tliis  ca;-e  was  not  an  ablative  oriu'inally.  It  had  most  proba- 
bly the  same  form  at»  the  dative  endiuir  of  nouns  {di\  which  probably  had  ori<,nn.illy  a 
locative  meaniu",  and  the  final  i  of  which  wa?»  dropped  in  the  courr'e  of  time.— ^  or 
utrubi  The  locative  cases  of  vter  are  either  anteclassical.  or  po^t(•]assical ;  but  vtrnbi 
was  u^ed  in  the  official  language  of  the  Pretorian  edict.—  3  the  four  adverbial  cases  oiille 
and  iste  (ille  illinc  etc.)  are  chieflv  antecla8^•ical.—  *  The  forms  cubi  and  cnide  are  only 
used  after  «i  or  m.  bein"'  written 'in  one  word  with  these  conjunctions  (sicubi.  necmide). 


quilibet,  and  uterlibet  are  extremely  rare  ;  of  vt€7'Vis  no  locative  cases  are  m  use. 


Remarks  on  the  Synopsis. 

Obs.  1.  According  to  the  common  theory  the  local  adverbs  of  the  first  and  second 
cases  are  cimsidered  as  compounds  ot  ibi,  vbi,  inde  and  unde.  But  it  is  evident  that 
bi  and  tide  are  locative  endings,  added  in  the  same  way  to  the  stem  of  the  demonstrative 
td\  as  lo  those  of  all  the  otht-r  determinatives. 

Obs.  2.  Those  determinatives  which  are  formed  by  suffixes  {idem,  qvtcunqrie,  qiiisqne 
etc.)  take  the  locative  case-endiiiirs  before  the  suffix,  the  same  as  the  regular  case-eud- 
inirs  in  the  corresponding  adjectives,  as:  ibidem  (.from  idem),  vblque  (instead  of  cublque, 

from  quixque).  .  _  ,  ,  ,       ^.  /  !,• 

UBS  3  The  interrocative  root  cu  drops  the  c  m  the  first  and  second  locative  cases  {vbi, 
vnde,  ublque  instead  of  ct<bi,  ctmde.  cifblqve).  but  not  in  aliquis  and  its  collateral  form 
quis  (some),  which  make  alicubi,  alicunde.  cubi,  cunde. 

Obs.  4.  In  the  definite  form  hie  (instead  of  hi-ce)  forms  its  first  and  second  locative 
cases  //7(;and  Ai/w  (contracted,  probably,  from  hibice  and  hinde-ce);  the  third  locative 
case  being  hHc  (which  corresponds  lo  the  dative  hnic  in  the  same  way  as  eo  to  the  as- 
sumed daTive  edi).     Thus  are  formed  the  locative  cases  of  Ule  and  iste  which,  in  ante- 
classical  language  had  the  collateral  forms  illic  and  istic. 

Obs.  5.  Quisquam  forms  not  vb'iqiiam,  but  vsqva?n  which,  probably,  is  corrupted  from 
vlnqiiani.  by  dropping  the  i.  and  clianging  b  into  8,  according  to  the  analogy  of  asjxtrtare 
mu\  osttndere  {iuf'X.  ot  abjfortore.  oOte/idere). 

Obs.  6.  The  adv(>rbs  formed  with  suffixes  generally  change  the  ending  nde  of  the  second 
case  into  ndi,  as  undique,  indidem  (instead  of  vndcque,  indedem).  Alius,  in  the  second 
case,  makf  s  cdiunde  (inst.  of  alinde)  according  to  the  analogy  of  amliunt,  in  place  of  audint. 
Obs.  7.  It  is  probable  that  the  locative  ending  i  attached  to  the  name  of  cities,  and  a 
few  other  nouns  {d</ini,  run,  hvini).  is  nothing  but  the  ending  bi  of  the  first  locative 
case.  After  dropping  b,  the  i.  \n  names  of  cities  of  the  first  declension,  has  been  con- 
tracted with  the  characteristic  a  in  the  same  manner  as  the  genitive-ending  i,  and  both 
forms  became  thus  identical.  .  ^       ^     4  \ 

Ors  8.  Several  prepositions  {ad.  inter,  propter,  propter,  circa,  post,  ante,  tenus,  versus), 
and  the  semi-pnposition  itsque.  enier  compositions  with  the  third  or  fourth  locative 
cases,  which  are  either  prelixed  or  suffixed  to  them.  The  locative  cases,  in  this  con- 
nection, partly  retain  their  locative  meaning,  partly  express  the  relations  of  time,  modal- 
ity and  cause.  I'lius  are  formed  the  conjunction  and  adverb  quoad  (as  far),  ana  the 
adverbs  hueusque,  eo».<qu^,  hactenus,  eatenus  (thus  {iir),idiquafenns  (in  some  degree)^ gwo- 
usQue  and  qualmus  (liow  far),  quocirca  and  quajwopttv  (from  what  reason),  praterea  (be- 
sides», ihttvea  (meanwhile),  proptered  (tiierefore),  7>o*/^«  and  jwsthac  (afterwards  .  antea 
and  anteh.w  (before  this  time),  quorsum  (for  what  purpose;  inst.ol  quoversum),  alwrsum 
and  horsum  (botli  anted.),  quoquoversus  (in  whatever  direction). 

Rem.  5.  In  reL^ard  to  the  syntactical  use  of  the  locative  form-adverbs 
the  following  rules  should  be  noticed  : 

1  The  locative  cases  of  ^'/ix  are  used  both  in  iNTEunoGATrvE  sentences  (§421),  and 
in  relative  clauses.  The  cases  of  qvicunque  and  9»i6Y/?/i^;  belong  exclusively  to  the  kela- 
T  VE  from  (see  n  4'tr  foil  ).      Tlie  cases  of  nter  are  confined  to  anteclassical  language. 

2  In  re-ard  tc!  tlu'  KKLATivE  use  of  the  local  adverbs,  the  rules  for  relative  adjectives 
{%imi  3(>H  30(M  must  ])e  applied  as  far  as  they  are  applicable  to  adverbs.    If  they  have  a 

ocal  adverb  of  the  definite  form  leW,  um}e,eo.  ea)  for  an  antecedent  their  cases  need  not 
am-ee  with  each  other,  but  the  relative  takes  the  case  required  by  the  construction  ol  its 
own  ch.use.  the  same  as  ii,  relative  adjectives  (§  3»;S).  as  :  Dejectusnullomodo  esse  potest 
inde  ubi  non  fuit,  he  can  ]>y  no  means  have  been  ejected/mm  a  place  (thence)  where  he 
has  not  been.  Cic.  Ca'C.  12  (see  Ex.  l-d).  ,  ,      .     ,  ^ 

8  in  the  DEFiNiTK  form  the  cast-s  of  ille  and  iste  are  mostly  anteclassical,  rarely  occnr- 
rin.'  in  classical  lanirua-e.  and  never  if  restricted  by  a  relative  adverb,  as  :  Lo  redieruut 
unde  profecii  erant\not  illuc  or  istuc),  they  returned  to  the  place  (thither)  whence  they  had 

*^T  The  use  of  the  four  locative  cases  follows  in  every  respect  the  roles  011  those  prepo- 
sitions whose  place  they  take.    This  usage  often  difters  from  the  English  idiom  : 

(a)  We  often  use  the  equivalents  of  the  first  locative  case  where  the  Latin  uses 
those  of  the  second.  This  is  especially  the  case  when,  accordini?  to  §  443,  ^o  3,  the 
action  is  represented  as  occurring  at  a  place,  but  with  an  outward  direction.  ^\  here- 
ever  in  this  instance,  the  Latin  must  u^eex  With  the  ablative  ol  a  noun  as  an  equiva- 
lent of  the  English  on  ov  at,  the  second  locative  case  nuist  be  used  if  the  place  is 
ndicated  by  an  adverb,  as :  r//rfM)otissimum  ordiar  y  UA^?-^  had  I  better  begin  ?  Cic. 
Ro-c.  Am.  1,  l.-^icilia  vndique  cincta  periculis  est,  Sicily  is  surrounded  everywhere 
with  dan«'ers.  Cic.  Leg.  Man.  11  (i.  e.  dangers  threaten //-cm  all  ])oints).-Muliis7//n7?i- 
Que  interlectis,  many  having  been  killed  0«  both  sides  (the  killing  being  an  action  cioue 
at,  a  place,  but  with  outward  direction).  Ca;s.  B.  G.  7,  42.  (Ex.  7-11). 


218 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


m  Vcrhs  which  ronnire  the.  proposition  ad  or  in  with  the  accupativc,  must  be  con- 
«trnecl  with  Th.'  Tunu)  ocativ.-  case,  althon-h  we  us.^  in  En-lish  the  rq.nvalents  of 
t he  f.r't  (VJ-'T  K       •  rm  R  <i<)-     "••«'  heloMi:  the  xovh^ pernn7re(^o  i.eloM:.').  ac 

conven-ire  (to  ass.-mble  in),  irnponere  and  injwere  (f  place  ;";•  '  ^- ,  /'\?,,f''..l  "f/  ^""v 
pcrti.ient.  this  cI.h-h  not  b-lon-  ^//^re  (/i^rf)  -Cniiwo  (not  t^*0  '^    ;;';J  ;'' VMrVheV.-is 
Arrived   ///.m-A»  principes   convenCrunt    /A.7y  >he  clnef.  a^J'mblc(^^^^^^^^^ 
i.avihus.  atque  eo  niilitibus  injecti.  alter  he  had  .o.zed  'he  ship,  a    1  ^'"1  Plj<  ^^^ 
diers /A^/-^.  Ci«>^.  B.  G.  7.  58. -Hoc /oa/ 7^  ^/w  Hp.'chll)at   this  '"'"^^^.  f,^X.  fi"^  J^^^^ 
different  Net)  2  6  (E\'.  12-lo).-Instead  of  the  laclviii<r  third  case  ofrvdlx.^,  tlie  first  case 
nS^  fj\i:;J;i^nosUy  with  disoUere  and  .^i.u//./-.;  ^'"f  i;''^"i.^!;"j,!;:''Xtn'    ll 
esscf  melius  qn;un  ilhi.n  /<./.sv//^am  di^r.dere  (not  to  .U-p-«ft  for '  '  .v     ;^^; ,  •  J;  ,^-  ti^V^'.  J'  ^^ 
-Quum  Ponipejus  «./.vr/vam  diini(hV»r  (is  not  allowed  to  -.    anyuheu).    11>.  o,  ,1,  .i. 
So  '  nee  mqmiin  di'^cedehnm  \  instead  of '  nee  <vm<nun  .     ic.  '"/•.'•  ^,,,  ,.,„    5,.  .,^,. 
(c\  The  Latiii  uses  the  f<»(-kth  cask  instead  of  the  Kn<r  ish  fir>t  case  {qva  «.'^-  '  1;   ' 
ni  '  nil  -  •   vl,ere^\  if  the  place  is  not  cnceivd  as  a  detinite  an.l  cnnstanl  point  but  as 
^^rn^^o^  1^  line       space:   Ut  ei  iic-t  vairiln  Q'»!  (not  ///yt)  velit  (to  ruam  where  he 
likes     Cic  Or  -Spati  i.n  v^/.i  llnnien  intrrnnttit  (th.'  space  H'lnre    he  river  does 

l„„.-,n.t  sua,  .be  r,-„ul,lic  >;:.f.  "'■> ^'Jl^,  ^,^/^^  '^,;^  V^';  prluus'!,  ;;^    .  h'  proceeded 
it-i   own  <''reatness.   Liv,  pi;ei. — /v»^  int^mtn  *'*^-'' ','•  n        n-    c  ,.  tt^-    m    90 

the  ablative  neuter  of  absolutely  used  ''''"^ '\''J  t-iu-.M  '    Thus  eo  freouently  has  the 

manner  the  loral've  fO  niu.t  ''«"-';;,^,"„ ",',!.,  ' ,'"  ",,,,tiv,-  of  n,v„ns.  as  ib  rcjicle- 
Sr:';;^!^;  ?X"r.VtI.e?C-o  r^PV.:d."uv.  «.  ...  «ee  S  «...  oB.  2 


Poinpeju^,  non  reciisilre  so*  qiiin 


iiulllus  \v 


;ii>^  iini)e!;ln>r  existimaretnr.  si  sine  maxiiiio 


I'ouipejii»,  in'ii  i..<..ii.-<..v.  .  V-     .1 '..;..,.,.»«;,)///:   /^////j  trmere''  esseiit  pro^ressie.   <':e 

detrimento  le-iuues  Ca-aris  '^^-^.e/^'^'^'l'  ^V/'     '/^,  ^.  v^%un\x    C  c    Kan  .  (i.  1.-  5.  Vi.it» 
B.  C.  45.-  4.  Nemo  est  quin«  'dnrU  qua  n  ihi  >^^l^J^:^{^  ^j^i\.  .^s.  or,.-  0.  Ko  vnde 

.entei.tia  lenior  ut  ;'''.;'r/'::\;.M'l:|mu;  CiV-  V  2  ♦  "_!' T.'  'ou  pr,us  elO.it  locum  editum^» 
discedere  non  oportuit»»,  reveitilmui    Uc.  A    .  ^.  it;.         __       \^,'         ,      ^^^.j,.,,,  ;„  omnem 

convenerant.  C:es.  B  G  .^,  l'»-— '-^:  \ _',,."  r,.„^  n  A  i  40  _  U  K»  quum  introe-is-*, 
detractis.  .0  U-ionarios'^»  "I'l'tes  i.nposuit  C.es  B.  G  1  ^,  J.^^  .J„^^  ^^,  ,„  ^  in- 
circumspicias'^6  ut  i/«/^  exTn  possit.  Cato  K.  K.  1.  -s.      i-'-     ».-»•>'     ^ 

to  bein^  consi  lered,-  ^  ;-''  ';?  ;'f;'•;^.^L"  \    p^^^^^^  '  to  stand' 

_-  7  rashly.-  «there  is  n-jbody  but  t^^'^V",,;','  it  has  in  its  proper  iieMninir.  Transl.  : 
with  the  construction  w//i  =  in  '^'^ 'j'.f,  /'''V;  ,j'^?  (j^'-^  _  ti^/Wre  o/>r>/^/i/,  supply 
that  the  punishment  should  ^>^;,^;7'^«'   ^^l^Ja^    ,^^^  ;  transl. :  so  as  to  be. 

'nos\  we  oii!4ht  to  have  lelt.—  y  ^ '^V. '[ '  „  "is  /^J  nafilra  natiiial  formation  of  their 
free  towards  all  directions.-  '*  to  *\'-«^v  up--  ^oji  i"iknlere  to  rout.-  i»  r-f'/^r^ 
Country.-  >«  oo«/^n?W,  to  bo  ^•^"lV'^!',-;\  .'Ji''^;"^-'"..  anrc^Sdt.)  offer.-  "  /.^^i^ 
to  slay.-  20  advanced.-  ^  en  Q>nh''-  ^'5«  i^'^'^al  ?  l/rolr/to  enter  -  »  to  look  around. 
nai-ius  mUes,  a  (foot)  soldier  ol  the  legions.-       mtroire,  to  enicr. 


RELATION  OF  PLACE. 


219 


tcnditi  mattire'  ctitn  oxercitn  perveniat.  Cic  Mnr  9  22.- 16  Unum  ^{5  a";;"^<""J^^t. 
diffici'e  crat.  vix  Qvn^  t^iniruli*  carri»  dneerentnr».  Ctes.  B.  G.  1.  6.  -  1..  MedOam  prae- 
d  cant>  in  ft  pa  fratris  Hii  membra  in  eis  locis  gvd  se  parens  perseqnerqurs.  d^>s  - 
na?is«e  Cic  Lo-  Wan.  9,  22.-  18.  His  ex  manubiis»  Athenilrum  arx'o,  gna  ad  men- 
dfet^M^4.7t  esromaUi  Nep.Cim.2.5.-19.  ^orem  jam  dedflcamn  7/^  nihil  divmatt- 
r,ne^3  oput  sit  Cic.  lio^c.  AiS.  34.-20.  Ne  hodie  quidem  scire  videmtnt  quo  amenU<z 
proj^rcssi  sitis.  Liv.  28,  27. 

Ecm.  6.  The  other  adverbs  applied  to  relations  of  place  are  : 

1)  Some  adverbs  derived  from,  or  compounded  with,  nouns,  as 

coelitus  (instead  of  de  calo),  from\{oTa^  and  ror%i  auto/ doors,  out  o( 

heaven*  the  house, 

funditns, /rr>7n  tf)e  bottom,  thoronghly.  'obviam,*  on  the  icay. 
radicitus,  from  the  root,  thoroughly,  percgre  (from  ager),  abroad. 

ri  ttet  bj.  ' 

2)  Local  prepositions,  used  with  the  force  of  adverbs,  as : 


ad  versus  (adversnm)  opposite  (rare) 

ante,  before,  in  front  (rare). 

circa,  circum  and  circiter,  around, 

all  round. 
citra,  on  this  side. 
contra,    opposite,    (figuratively:    on 

the  confrari/)' 
coram,  in  his  (my,  thy  etc.)  pres- 
ence. 
extra,  without  (outside) 


infra,  below  (rare). 

intra,  within  (rare). 

juxta,  alongside,  'near  by  (rare). 

pone,  behind  (rare). 

prope.  near,  votfar. 

subter,  b^pfoth  (rare). 

supra,  on  the  upper  side,  on  top,  above 

(rare), 
ultra,  beyond,  furth^. 


3)  A  number  of  adverbs,  derived  from  prepositional,  verbal  or  obsolete 
roots  which  are  comprised  under  the  name  of  adverbial  particles: 


ritro.  on  this  side. 
desiiper.  from  abone. 
cxadvers'um,  over  anninst.  oiJposife. 
extrinsecus./rom  witliout. 
insuper.  on  top  (besides). 
intrinsecu-./rowi  tvithin  (rare). 
intro.  inside. 


intns,  within. 

poiTO.  forward,  further  on. 

procul*.  far.  at  a  distance. 

protentis,  onward,  forth  with. 

seorsum.  separate,  apart. 

sursum.  upward. 

ultro,  biyond. 


introrsum,  inward,  to  the  inside. 
Jicm    7    For  the  amount  of  the  dimensions  of  objects  {i.  c.  the  distance 
in  space,  or  the  measure  in  len^ith  etc.),  the  following  grammatical  forms 

ire  used  : 

1  If  tlie  amount  of  the  measure  depends  on  one  of  the  nouns  or  adjec- 
tives expressinir  dimensions  (^o;?.^//r/<7^  etc.,  ?^w.(7?/.«?etc.),  the  rules  ff>ven  f()r 
the  construction  of  these  nouns  or  adjectives  must  be  applied  (see  ^  498). 

2  If  the  amount  of  tlie  measure  refers  to  tlie  idea  of  distance,  it  is 
expre««*ed  either  {a)  in  the  form  of  an  attribute  made  dependent  on 
one  of  the  general  nouns  expressins^  distance,  as  mterxallum,  apatium,  iter 
(len<rth  of  1i  iournev,  march  or  road),  or  (b)  in  the  form  of  an  object 
directly  dependent  on  the  governing  verb.  In  the  former  instance  the 
nouns  denoting  the  distance  {intervallum  etc.),  and  in  the  latter  instance 

1  To  intend  to  iro.  to  be  bound  for  a  place.-  '  early.- ^  ^»/a  is  used  instead  of  vt  ea  ; 
hence  it  is  followed  by  ihe  subjunctive.- «  accessory  predicate:  sinaiy.-^  carrvs,  a 
cair  1«  rf'/oT  to  be  driven.- '  they  (people)  report  that.- «was  hkely  to  pursue.- 
o'booty.-  »0  the  acropolis.-  "  south.—  "  to  carry.—  i^  prophecy. 

*  The  termination  itus  of  substantive  adverbs  is  originally  the  perfect  participle  of 

^'"t  F,yras  and  fori^  are  the  dative  and  accusative  plural  of  the  obsolete  noun  f'>r<J-     ^o- 
ras  is  used  when  the  construction  would  require  the  name  of  a  city  m  the  accusative  , 

\  Obviam  in  classical  prose  occurs  only  in  combination  with  verbs  of  motion. 


220 


ADVERBIAL   RELATIONS. 


the  measures  themselves  arc  placed  either  in  the  accusative  or  in  the 
ABLATIVE  case,  as :  .     .     ^.  , 

pa^s;Sl'op;wiHbufrtUetreU\.  three  thousLd  paces  (mile.)  rfi./an^  Iro.n  the 
town.  . 

If  the  distance  is  not  determined  by  definite  numeral  expressions,  the 
attributive  phrase  (in  tlie  tirst  case)  is  an  adjective  i)hrase,  ami  tiie  object- 
ive phrase  (in  the  second  case)  is  formed^  by  an  adveub  or  one  ot  the 
QUANTITATIVE  toriu-adjectives.     See  ous.  7. 

t^-  The  measure  of  distincc  may  also  assume  rhc  form  of  a  ^vn.iECT.  Sec  obs.  6. 
Oi'^  1    The  measure-units  empl-.ved  here  an-  those  enumerated  §  10-t,  II.  101.  to  which 
we  must  add  fr   he  me.snre.nei.t  of  h.r.-er  distances  th.  'day'  ulte^K  as  a  Vl^f 7.:^'-"''' 
of  t  e   ei  '      of  a  road  «Jav"s  jouni.-v>,  ■.•enrrally  in  connection  with  tfj^r  as     <-r  <hrf   one 
Sav'<  j    in  ev    wJ.A  Adnh  Lr.  a  two  days'  (three  days"  journey) :  d^y^ni  '/';/•';(" /.^'='-.,^ 


which  is  tw.-nty  mi  es  trom  Kouie  oy  lue  r^aiariim  lo.m  m    >,  u.y.  .......    :,•'■■■■,•.■."■:• 

nVil  -s on-J  Vari-o  K.  II  :}. -i.-M'm  viresvn>a,i  liphl'^'n,  within  twenty  mde^    Liv.  5  4 

were  encampi.f-  near  the  baulc  of  the  Anio,  three  miles  (from  the  city).  C.c.  lirut.  1 1. 

Obs  2.  In  the  u<e  of  the  acccsativk  or  ablative  of  disfince  a  distinction  ;.""=*t^\« 
m-ufe  \a\  whetlier  the  distance  is  conceived  as  a  simpi.k  kxtknt  or  h-n-tli,  as  lor  ins  . 
Sf  Ic-  '  h  f  jonrnev.  or  of  a  n.ad  ;  or  (/>)  as  the  distance  of  two  i-o.nts  fuom  eacii 
OTHKR  or  as  the  d  stan  e  of  an  action  from  a  -ivea  point.  In  th.-  lormer  ca.e  we  use 
ah  ays  lie  accusative;  in  the  last  c.i-e  either  ih.  abi.ativk  or  the  accsativk  may  be 
e tiSved  ^IMu  ArciTslTivK  of  distance  must,  lie  c..n>idere.l  as  a  compi.ktin.;  obj.-c  of 
fhe  lei  •  exf  nt  .iNM)Ki;sTooi>(l)ein.4  neare->t  relate.',  to  the  comph-tin.jr  accusaiive  a  ter 
L/U\  /r  '/? -tc  §  4^^^^^^^^^^  The  nature  of  the  ablative  of  distance  is  tln.t  ol  an  ab  a  ive 
of  piFFKB^  the  two  p..ints.    This  ablative  in  this,  as  m  any  other,  relation 

is  originally  an  exponent  of  the  preposition  'by  .  bee  ^  .ni. 

Obs"  .3  The  AcrnisATivR  of  distance  is  especially  u<e.l  as  object  of  the  verbs  of 
MOTION  (  vroticl^ci  proc:d"r,K  ani',>illre,  etc.>  and  .)r  the  verbs  donotin-  kxtrnt,  as  pafere, 
«eSl      o  ex^  A'^  di^  deem  mVlia  pri^^mani  (or  derrm  miUiym  pn.<<>>n>n 

Sum)  /  «oVcX  /  v..  On  that  dav  w..  tr ivelle.l  ten  miles.-^>/v,.  rr^nn^nu^enrni  f.'h,i. 
^!taZ^^^^^  (ory>./-/iM60  the  coast  of  Germany  extends  about  800  miles. 

Obs  4  Either  the  accitsativk  or  the  ablative  i-  u?ed  as  object  of  the  verbs  cxprcssincr 
distauceors  nation,  especi  .llvof  a/>.v.sv,(/.,s-^7/r,«.s-.^  (witha^  int.r.vltru,  aim,  d.-notiui,^ 
?l  e  poin  of  distaiu;.;  W-e  §  440)  :  Ro.m  sM^elni  mWibus  (or  ''^Z/^^'V' '^''^'Vn^Sl'ron 
abe^Udi>^tat.  est).  Rome  is  sixree.i  miles  distant  from  the  .«ea.  bee  Kx.  <»-ll.-In  tlin^  "'»- 
efruc  i  n  the  distance  is  someti.nrs  placed  in  the  oenitive  xyl.u-h  ca<e  must  be  <;'>"^»'ler- 
el  as  an  attribute  depend-Mit  on  the  ide  i  of  ^patiuni,  inhrmflum,  J>'\\'^'' ;'"<^'''^f'>";  :.^:..- 
JVoUnca-^fra  pmpJibrin,',.><q,u^aberantbid'n  {i.e.  i/er),  we  hnrned  to  the  camp  which 
was  at  tne  distance  of  a  two  days'  journey.  Cic.  Att.  5,  K)    bee  Lie.  Att.  d,  i  <. 

Ob^  5  VVh.'U  the  .rovernin.,'  verb  contains  an  action  which  is  represented  to  occur  at 
a  distance  Ihim  some  p  dnt,  the  object  expn-ssin-,'  thi-  distanc  is  i^'-n.-rallv  in  th-  abla- 
fiic  e's  re  '  ntiv  in  th..  accusative,  as  :  OppUluni  condid^runf  unnique  mdUbu.  P^ts^^"''^ 
]^^qHh,q!^  mm>nn  pa^su.m  infennllo  ;  or,  less  frequently,  qmnque^  nulha  m^^>'f>n>  ab 
Aauiiria  thev  built  a  towu  tat  a  dist  ince  of)  five  mil.-s  from  Aiiuih-ja.  bee  Lv.  U-  7.  It 
iiThi.s  instance  the  poitit  of  distance  is  not  added,  the  ablative  (.(distance  is  sometimes 
replaced  by  a  prepositional  object  with  ab  (Ex.  IS).  See  §  440,  K.  4«. 

Obs  6.  The  distance  mav  also  be  expressed  in  the  form  of  asiTBTKCT-NOMiNATivE  with 
eZoi-iitere^se\\^  nredic  ite.  the  points  of  «listanee  beiii-  designated  by  the  prepositi.ms 
S  alT\^\^'?!^ncl^  cedf.um  mUiia  stwliOnwi  sunt  a  turbi'io  (c.jeloi  ad  lunnni, 
?lt\-e  .are  two  .nilll)..'of  stadia  from  the  attnospliero  (of  the  earth)  to  the  moon.  Plin. 
11.  N.  2,  21.  See  Ex.  19. 

Obs.  7.  When  the  amount  of  distance  is  expressed  indeanitely,  the  following  forms 

^% '  A uv  K  UBS  OF  PLACE,  as  pvo'^'U,  lonqe.  prop'^  with  the  preposi  tion  ^^  or  l<>cal  ad  verbs  of 
the  second  locative  case,  as  Poiterodie  procui  a  caUns  /lOitts  in  coUibus  consttftrmt,  on 


BELATION  OF  PLACE. 


221 


the  next  dav  the  enemy  took  position  on  the  ^f^l^f^:^''^'^/,^'^^^^^ 
—  Pm-id  al'iciinde  tar  from  any  place.  Cic  \  err.  2,  2.  20.—  l^"amion'/eef'i/an€in  sacrum 
rvX.?;  J/     how  f a  •  is  it  IVo.n  h"-re  to  the  Galilean  forest  ?  CiC.  Quinct.  2.5.-0«.';m  e^fet 
S     S  aSirili,l,  when  there  was  a  war  at  such  a  little  distance  fvom  ^.cilyCic. 

Verr  2  ^2  -Th^  sometimes,  but  rarely,  is  used  with  th."  force  of  spafio  or 

i«/^mt//o  f.'.llowe.l  by  a  de.inite  measure  in  the  accusative,  as:  \  ercmgefonx locum  ca^fns 
den^lital:  Ararim  lonqe  millia  passuum  sedecim,  V.  .^elected  a  point  sixteen  miles  distant 

'''Z^:^:^"'E'^^^cr}i^'(^^^^^  always  in  the  accusative),  as  /a.^.m^^/an- 
tumtanhuidem  m'dtum  (van-ly  nvdto):  Veteres  ,ie«cieiunt  quantum  a  terra  f  al^- 
sTthe  ancierts  did  not  know  how  much  the  sun  is  distant  from  the  earth  (did  not 

^'i;  Th";^;^:^^"oS-m^u.m^y  ^tlie^ccusativO  of  ATTnxBX^rrvE. adjective. phm.e. 
de  otiiK'  a  comparative  mcaslire.  as :  JHc  locus  fcquofere  spatio  ab  vtnsqxie  ca^lr^ahera^^, 
this  t.lace  was  about  at  an  equal  distance  (cqui.iist.oit)  from  ])oth  camps  Cies.  R  G.  1.  43. 
See  Kx  20  -rr-Ifthe  measure  is  a  pn.portional  one  (byy>ar.s  with  an  ordinal),  the  phrase 
nuista'lways  be  in  the  ablative,  as  ^hrcurvis  qvarta  parte  co'h  asoleabest,  Mercury  is 
from  the  sun  at  a  distance  of  one  fourth  of  the  heavens.  I  lin.  11.  ]\.  2,  b. 

OBS  8  To  the  local  relation  belongs  the  phrase  'to  larder  on\  and  the  phrases  express- 
in-  direction  towards  the  points  of  ihe  compass  (south  Mde.  northeni  aspect,  etc.).  To 
bonier  on"  is  «reneiallv  expressed  by  attinq^re  with  an  accu-ative.  or  by  a^a^ere  with  a 
dative  or  the  preposition  ad;  also  by  continen,  when  the  borders  on  all  sides  of  a  coun- 
trv  are  «dven  In  r.-ard  to  nations  the  phrases  \fi/ntwnwi,  conjinem.  vicinum  esse\ixre 
emi) love.l  sJc  Ex.  25-25.  If  a  locality  is  .les.-nated  by  its  direction  towards  the  points 
of  hecompass,  objective  phrases  are  us.'d  with  the  verb  spedare  uv  rergere,  constmed 
with  an  accusative  after  in  or  ad,  as  :  Ora  Germanice  in  {ad)  septentnonem  spectat  (or 
Virqit).  the  coast  of  Gemiany /(/cf.<  the  north.  Muas  qua  ad  occidentem  soleir.  vergtt, 
the  western  slope  of  a  inouniain.  Ex.  2.5, 20. 

1.  Nemo  potest  biduo  ..,yi;..7^/./a  mil/ia  P^^!,'"^"}.""^^"^^^'-^- .^V'ie?cTni^^  ?n^ 
olniam  Pr-e^.TainJ  ^ij/^  pa^mitn  c.J^/..^^  hi  -  7  ^ -  ^«^^^^Ji'^J^^eher 

Sla^pa^uum  :^;;S  .^/      ae^B  G  5^^  Casm.  hostiutn  a,./,/^L  millibus  pas- 

^m  .    .  c1o  i     huU^^^^^  C:e^.  B.  G.  2.  7.-  ♦?.  Z  ima  quinque  d.Sru.n  dr.r^h 

r    •  iV  rine  a  est    Liv  :0O  30  -  7.  Veniidius  bidui  spado  ab  Ant.mio  abest   Plane  Cic. 
Vmi    ri7-  8    Is^  K^^^^^^^  Lencadem  stadia^  c.ntumvigintij:\c  Fam  16,  2.- 

Q  T  :.inMnV  abest  a  L  rino  xviil  mUHa  passuum.  Cic.  Clu.  9.-  10.  ^sculapn  templum 
rmiS^M  ":,,  nwv^^^  distat.  Liv.  4.",,  28.-  IL  Ca^sivellaui.i  finis  a  manti- 

mis  civ,  t  us^mn  dividit.quod  appellalnr  Tamesi«4.  a  man  ^irci-er  mt//t«6  p;  s^ 
^l>. //.!,;/;/  ('.p^  H  (i  5  11—12  \iiovistus  endemcastia  promnvit*.  et  m<//i/>'/s 
passuum  ...  a  (..sons  c-;  -  -  ---{e  coiis.  .t^  C^  ^R  ^^i  fi^jTi^itmnS^S 
JSdlt  '^'b  2  'S^- 1^1  an  i^KU  qtiind  ctm  fere  miHium  ^«^^o.castra  ab  Ta- 
r  imf  ..suit  iJv  2.5  9.-10.  tiuiuctius  qui.que  7nillia^  ah  Thehis  posuit  castra.  L.v^ 
aV  1  J     7   LacetVi^^^^^^  lonirum,  (sol)  in  latitudinem  V'^'l^""^.'!^"'"    Jf/f Im'^^ 

niteiis  h  !)G    lilt      O'l'/rhiqentos  iude  fere pa^sus  constituit  (to place)  sigiia  {the  stand- 
;  A)      b   -i     >)  -  18     losies  ad  ca^tra  C.esaris  eontendCM-.mtio,  et  ah  milhbus  passuutn 
ninn;  rs^i»   R  ^i^dmhus  castra  posn5runt.  Ctes.  B.  G.  2.  7.-  19.  Inter  nov,ssimu,n>i 
aTnen?t  1  ostrutn  pr  num»*^  uon  ampliu.  qtiiuisaut  senis  millibu-  passuum  |"tererat>2 
Jll'^i''^-  •_!  V  ("esar  pe.lum  viu'inti  directis  Iater.busi4  dnxit»*,  ut  cmus  fossie 

^Av^  tan^'niAtm  patCret  qlvdmn^^  summiC  fossae'-  labrai«  distilrent.  lb  7  ri.- 
^i  Perfie  fti  t  cimi  ndiqiue  ie-innes  mnqnnm  ./^z^^wm  abessent.  pn.nam  le-Onem 
«  ,'b  ^  re  ni-'  0  ad  )  Iri  lb.  2,  17.-  22.  Prima  acies  hastati^i  erant.  nianipuh^^  qmnde- 
c  iS  tes  ^^^mndimm  spafium.  Liv.  8,  8  -  23.,  C.esar  LabiCnum  cutn  leirmni- 
b  s'tribns  n  eas  partis  qme  Menapio^-'-^  adiin'jnnt  pr..hcisci  jubetctes.  B  G.  »,  33.- 
2  Tt-  redone  qua  Tuscus'^*  a-er  Ihrnano  adjac^f,  tuta  omnia  fuSre.  Liv  2  49^- 
25.  H-ec  Jens  i^e^^upm^^  Nep.  Pat.  4,  1.- 20.  Briian- 

1  To  traver7p7oc^ed).-2  tb^HercviiiMn  forest.-»  a  stadiinn  was  125  Ronian  feet.-- 
4  the  Tl-imc- -Mhr  is  dependent  on  dlcidU :  'separates  at  a  disance  of. 

iu.     r.v;.--^^^  to  take  po-inon.-«  supply  passuvm,  which  is  Irequently 

mKle  s  o  -^  haulquaqvam  tantundem,  by  no  means  as  much  (,.  e.  considerably  le.s). 
^.0   to      arch.-n  LLimum  aq.mn,  the  rear-guanl.-^^  van-guard,  snppy 


Non  ainntiu 
»3  cana 
top  of  the 


aqmen. 
is  the  subject  of  intererat:  There,  was^no  inore  ^-I^J^f;--^-:^;^^-^;; 


iV;  "f  ^^  Sic^ct^iar'Sd;;.---  ;«  draw.--  bottom -n  §309^-  the 
♦  .  r  tho  r..,v.  g  \r^  R  31  -»» labrinn,  lip  (here  edqe).-"-^  marchine  with  their  bag^ 
lT<tel='  tll^  liastlii."thl  Ir^t  divMon  in  every  legion.-*^^  squads.-^»  the  country  of 
the  Menapii.  See  §  453,  R.  70.-"-*  Tuscan. 


222 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


riae  alter  anfrnlus»  qni  est  nd  Cnntinm',  nd  orientom  solem^,  inferior  ad  maidiew.^ 
spec'at  ;  a\wrvergit  ad  Ilispaiiiain  atqiie  occidentein  i-olern''.  Cujs.  B.  G.  5,  13. —  27.  Aqui- 
tuuia  spectat  inttr  occdsum  solin^  el  oeptentriunen.  lb.  1,  1. 

III.    RELATION   OF  TIME. 

g  549,  The  relation  of  time  is  expressed  1)  by  prepositions  (g  424,  It 
1.  2);  2)  by  adverbs  of  lime  ;  3)  by  substantives  or  attributive  phrases  in 
the  accusative  or  ablative;  4)  by  clauses  introduced  by  relatives  or  by 
conjunctions  (see  B.  VI.). 

Jiem.  8.  The  adverbs  of  time  are  1)  temporal  form-adverbs,  i.e.  such  as 
corr('Sj)ond  in  form  to  the  form-adjectives  and  locative  form-adverbs  (R.  3) ; 
2)  adverbs  derived  from  substantives,  or  adjectives;  8)  adverbs  of  various 
formation,  comprised  under  the  name  of  adverbial  Time-particles. 

Ob?.  Tho  temporal  form-adverbs  are  more  irregular  in  their  forms  than  the  local  form- 
adverbs  (R.  4),  l)L!ini,'  eitlier  l)orri)vved  from  the^ie  vas  hinc,inde),  or  havinir  a  peculiar 
form  of  their  own,  pi'e!*ervin<,'.  however,  the  roots  of  the  form-adjectives  from  whieb 
thev  are  derived.  Tlu-y  ino!»tlv  corresipoiid  to  the  tirst  locative  case,  answering  the  ques- 
tion '  when'  (aiialoLr«ius  to  'where").  Hut  a  few  have  the  lonuulion  of  the  other  cates 
(quoad,  qumiisque,  eousque,  quatenus,  hactenus). 

Jle/n.i).  To  liie  int('rr()l^^ative  form  of  the  determinatives,  numerals,  and 

quantitatives  (j^^  258,  201)  beloni;  : 

quando.  when;  quoad,  qiiouftque  and  quatenvs,  up  to  what  time;  qiioties,  how  often ; 
qiKimdiu.  how  loni,'.  Thrre  is  no  form  analoi:ons  to  the  second  locative  case,  which  is 
expressed  prepoMtionaiiy  (ex  quo  iempore,//w/i  uv  dnce  which  time). 

To  the  relative  form  bclonu;  : 
quandocunqHe.\\\\<.'XHi\Qr\  quoad,  a^  far  as;  quoties  and  quamdiii,  rntcd  as  coTrc\a.i[\C9 
in  the  meanini^  '«>'  (see  §  3ti!t). 

To  the  deliiiite  lorm  belons^: 
1)  cot  respond  in<^  to  the  first  locative  case  of  hie.  is.  and  idem,h\\t  without  showinj?  the 
demonstrative  roots:  iVm/^c.  now*(eorri'sp«>iulin,<;  to  hie);  iu/n  [or  tune),  tlien  (.corre- 
spondin*^  to  ibi-\) ;  nmuL  at  the  same  time  (corrt'>pondin«;  to  il/idim) ;  2>  with  the  form 
of  the  second  locative  case  of  hie  aid  is  :  hiiie,  then  (silver  Laiinity) ;  dtindt.  and  iiide 
(deifi),  then,  after  this,  later;  abhinc.  ai;o;  dehi/ic.  henceforth:  3)  according  to  the  for- 
niaiion  of  the  third  locative  case  of  hie  luid  i-i :  adhuc,  up  to  this  time,  still,  as  yet§  ; 
hue  (rare)  up  to  this  time;  hueu><que  (\w>\.-c\ii^^\cii\),  up  to  this  time;  tou>^que,  up  to 
that  lime;  4)  with  the  form  of  the  fourth  loc;itive  case  ;  hacttnnt.  tlms  far.  and  una, 
at  the  same  timti  (with  the  meaning  of  ninud) ;  5)  tin;  numeral  /o/i#-.s  (so  often),  and  all 
the  cardinal  and  onlinal  adverbs;  tj)  liie  quantitative  tanidiu,  so  long. 

To  tlie  indetinit»*  form  l)el()iii^  : 
1)  corresponding  to  the  first  locative  case  of  q^iis,  aHqulo,  quidam,  quisquam,  qvi^qne, 
and  alius :  Quando^,  aliquando,  and  quondam,  at  some  time,  lorineily,  once  ;  unquu/n^ 
ever,  and  nunquam,  never  {nonnunquam,  sometimes;  nunqnam  nou.  always):  usque 
(rare),  all  the  time  [semper,  always]  ;  alias  (rare),  at  anotlier  time  ;  ti)  the  numerals  and 
qiianiiratives  aliquotits,  several  times;  plerumque,  mostly,  generally  ;  aliquauidiu,  for 
some  time  ;  jwstnmo.  at  last.  Here  belong,  according  to  their  seuse:  soipe,  ofteu,  and 
identidem  (trom  the  demonstrative  idem),  repeatedly. 

Obs.  1.  Tlie  English  inierroirative  '  when''  is  expressed  by  quando  both  in  interroga- 
tive sentences,  and  in  interrogative  clauses  (§  422»,  as  (m<indo  in>  ix(aeura.<sp  aut  eogifatse 
arhitramini /  Wlieii  do  you  believe  me  to  have  caiH'cf  for,  or  to  have  tlionglit  of,  the-^e 
things y  Cic.  Or.  1,  22,  102.—  Non  intellhjil ur  quando  obnpat  senectus,  it  is  not  noticed 
when  (at  wliat  time)  old  age  creeps  uj»ou  us.  Cic.  Sen.  11.    As  a  pure  relative,  the  English 

^  angle. —  2  \\^q  luodern  Kent. —  ^  oritnt  sol,  east. —  *  south.—  ^  oceidens  sol,  west. — 
•  inter  occTiJium  olivet  seiitentrlonts,  the  north-west. 

■  -  -  -  •    -     "-    "  -'^  ^'•the 


me 


*  Just  now=iiunc  ipsurn  (Cic.  Att.  10, 4, 10  ;  12, 1« ;  12, 40, 9.y.  =  modo  (p.  22.5. 11.  It^  if 
time  is  just  past.  V^n-  jam  =  nunc.  se»'  p.  224,  Obs.  2.  X"nc  often  ref«rs  to  past  ti 
{=tumy~  flbi,  sometimes-//////  (Liv.  :il,  14).—  §  'Still  \  referring  to  present  time,  is  also 
expre>sed  by  etiamiiunc  (ftiamnum,  Cic.  Fam.  10. 10) ;  if  referriuir  to  jta^t  time,  bv  etiani' 
turn  (p.  316.  Obs.  1).  'iStiir  before  c<<niparaiives  =  f/i«//Msiill  larger,  e/i'/m  majo)j;  aa 
adversative  adverb=/aw^n.—  XQuando,  dewoimg  '■at  some  time\  is  used  after  ne^si,  etc. 
Instead  of  aliquando.    See  P.  I.,  p.  259,  li.  4. 


RELATION  OF  TIME. 


223 


'  whm '  is  rendered  bv  the  ablative  of  the  relative  adjective,  or  ^y  pecoiij  unction  t^vwtt;.  as 
/^/i/  /.//V;;^!"^ 't/m  (or  qvo)  GeiTnanos  6'a//i  tir/«/.  f //?.=m;.r/Mhere  was  a  time  when 
the  Gauls  exceeded  tlic  Gennans  in  bravery.  CaiS.  13.  G.  b,  -i4.  .       .    , 

OB-  2  y!/i7tm////r/ and  7./o//./a;nl)otli  correspond  to  the  En-lish  'once  ,  meaning  «^ 
J,J>i;/t  \  The  En-lish '..//r.'  is  rendere.l  1)  by  the  numeral  ;idveib  ^.7/i.ni  it  m^^^^^ 
W'  /i  e  a  4nole)  time  as  JSo/a  se?nel,  scd  saw,  i»<>t  once,  but  olten.  Cic.  Att.  1,  ^^;J-— 
o?  It  /henl-  (  bv  t  he  teni)^^^  adverb  olim  when  it  means  either  'o//c«  ujwn  a  time  , 
or  ^^;^^  l!ml\u/X^iu.ed  <..  ati  indefinite  period  of  time  ^^^^^^^P^ ^^^ 
linliLit  as  it  wa<  once  foimerlv)  the  custom.  Cic.  tam.  0,  1(>,  lb.—  3)  quondam  is  usea 
o?;t.  r  MS  s  nonvm  /y^^^^^  of  sin-le  acts  that  happ.ned  at  a  former  ckhtain,  but  not 

'  c^  mS  l^nnlTltv'h^non^^^^^^^^^  (the  'same  as  dim)  in  ho-sfu^Unusinimex- 

i^iimat^tur^^^^^^^^  thoulditto  be  most  lenient  toward  foes.  Cic.  Rose.  Am. 

^-l^l^rcqu^dau,  (not  olim)  r.missi  a  Py^rho  sine  jn-efio  «^^^^t^/S-^w  thoS  Sn- 
ftJrmer  time)  tho-e  that  were  captuivd  bv  Pyrrhns  returned,  being  sent  back  without  ran- 
«oi  Liv  22  T-A)  AnquaMil  is  used'of  a  time  mevAy  sv pix»^ed ,  or  9"»^f  ^y  ^"^'^'^^.^"'l 
fr.ne  iVre-^c'nt  ori.a-t  an.l  mav  be  rendered  according  to  the  connection  by  o.ce.aiane 

?iS^Se^^^^ 

l\'e  examples  e^^^^^^  or'o/im.  could  be  used.  .  ^^ '^I'cTa' JuliL'e  timr^SS 

and  quondam  are  used  with  the  force  of  oUm  and  ohm  V"  "'f^^^'^^^'^'^''  ^'""^'  ^"^^ 
siicli  usages  are  rare,  or  belong  to  poetry,  or  to  non-dassual  literatuie.  ^ 

Ors  '^  Ttmi  (tunc)  ddnde.  inde.  mav  all  three  be  rendered  hy _' then\  Turn  w  used 
1)  oT^wen  s  th  I  ocain-c.lat  s<une 'former  time  specifi(;d,  being  opposite  to  nmw, 
I'  nid^umcTaqrL  ncolTbant,  those  who  then,  (at  r//anime)  ^""^^^^'V-lV^.^f^  >«''d«, 
C\e  Ken  2  2-  2)  t  conin-cts  two  past  actions  with  each  other  in  re-ard  to  he  time  of 
fi  eir  ™ence  Tlie  action  intro.lnced  may  be  conceived  as  comcident  with  the  one 
ivVm'd  to  b  >//;,,  ,.r  as  imm<-diately  subsequent  upon  ^t:  '  then,  tliereuiwn,  at  that 
vomnl^  a<  lla  eo  miruut  v>  aliquamdiu  in  veutram  partem  inehnareiitacies.'rv^  not 
iX  d    con^^^^  immissis  urbare  prima  signa  hostium  condtur.  They  fouglit  so 

1  .    f  r  «?(une  m  le  the  ranks  vielded  on  neither  side.     Then  (th_ereupon,  at  that  moment 
1  e  couM     o.(  e re^^^        advance  of  the  cavalry  in  order  to  {conatur)  throw  the  foremost 
•oons  ol    1  e  eneu  V  in»,  disorder.  Liv.  7, :«.  neinde^dyiay^  denotes  an  action  which/o^ 
i/^s-  -uu  tier  a   (   c^i  1  never  replace  tum  in  the  case  No.  1.     But  in    he  second  meaning 
«h  .  t«      ,  rul.  hs  m  iv  intenhan«'e  except  if  turn,  (m  account  of  its  double  meaning 
•on     mak.    1    scis^    Un  b         7,s^'c<,i^/.^.m.  horrnn  scelerum  maehinat^em,  statin, 
«,y  /€  m-jW-  rf^  tum)arcessVur  ^faniius,!  immediately  called  Gabinius   he 

over  of  hc-e  crim.t.  t<.  my  louse:  then  ^afterwards)  Statilius  was  summoned,  Cic. 
on  3  3  Freque  tlv  the  two  adverbs  var/  with  each  other,  as  Turn  iiajno  dixit 
^M/;r/.  yt/Vro.  Ci  He  9.  lO.-H^^  inde  and  hie  are  sometimes  (but  rarely)  used  in 
^vdJeTdeind^-IudeSi^  also  u-ed  in  the  place  of '.a-  eotemj>ore\  of  ten  opposed  to 
wi  \v^-  Ind^^men^^adUn^  Martias  sunt./;om  that  time  there  are  three  months 
?o  tlH.  ides  of  March.  Liv.  30,  5>.     For  the  connection  of  inde  with  ab  see  §  442.t 

Obs  4  Abhine  and  dehinc  (the  latter  not  occurring  in  Cicero  or  Caesar)  have  opposite 
M,MiificaUons  Si  meaniiig  '  «r/o"  (from  the  tin^e  <rf  the  speak Eubac^^^^^^^ 
fl^hinc  'hence'  'henceforth'  (trom  the  time  of  the  speaker  l.)iwaid).  Afjfanc  is  alwajs 
ntd  fnco  necti^^^r^^^^^  a  numeral  expression  of  time  in  the  accusative  or  ablative ; 
wle^/  refers  to  an  indefinite  terminus  and  stands  without  any  other  object,  as  ; 
}/a^L;/r««?^r  riginfi  anms  est  inortuus,  tjie  father  of  these  died  22  year* 

uorum  i^\"'^'  "•;;"',  "j;;;  90  vcu-s^  cic  Vcrr  2  W —Dehinc  ertt  rerax  tibi.  henceforth 
Sn'the^ltitSl  ^w  1  ^^n-Sihd  o\l^^  Umt  Pcen.  1,2,  101.  Abhine  must  be  distin- 
guished (ronV  tlie  letiporal  adverb  arde  which  may  refer  both  to  the  time  of  the  speaker, 
and  to  the  time  spoken  of.     See  11.  13.  obs.  1.  2. 

Ob«  5  The  En-lish  adverbs /rz.^V/y,«nrt*V,a^  lengfh.flnalbj  are  expressed  by  ;x?.<^^re»M; 
dudque\.yt^cmdem  Tandem  denoU-J  X\u^X  a  st^.te  oi  l.mg  duration  is  ended  *?/ some  cn'eiit 
id  tn%h  at  last):  deuique  <lastlv.  finally)  expresses  tlie  la>t  in  a  series  ot  e^ents. 
ilZrn  \^V<  te  force  of  either  but  is  distiiiirnished  from  tandem,  by  always  requiring 
/iS  p  e  ^  i^^ai/  w  .\c^  it  Iv^M-elented  as  ended,  to  be  expressly  mentioiied  :  Tandem 
ot  r/^y'  /  e  or  imtremo)  coqnUi  qui  sim.  at  lengih  you  know  who  lam.  Ter.  Andr  3,  4 
t-Fmnp^urprimLi  tos  docuit  meis  consiliis  rempublicamesse  servatam ;  tumposuit,  tn^ 
*  For  Quando  as  temporal  and  causal  conjunction,  see  p.  6t;6  Obs  4  ;  p.  G8T,  Ons.  13.— 
t  r./zrisiinilarly  to  hie)  sometimes  refers  to  a  time  expressed  in  the  subsequent  sentence 
(Cies.  13.  C.  1,  bO). 


224 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


a  nenatu  etc.  rogdri ;  dmiq'/e  ipfte  vospro  salfde  {med)  rogavif,  Pom pPjt;s  first  showed  yon 
that  by  my  counsels  the  republic  ha.s  been  sived ;  then  he  put  it  tbar  I  wis  W;»»t*-'i  •>/ 
the  Senate  otc.  ;  lastlv  (flmilly)  he  asked  you  himself  for  the  h:ipi)inessof  my  life.  Cic.  1  .  K. 
(\„  7  \{\  —Cum  ad  regeni  imTenusent  leffCiti,  per  mnltos  dies  comemendi  ejus  ]X}testas  iion 
est  facta  :  ]X}stremo  cinn  jam  profecti  essent,  ex  itiiu-re  convocati  sunt,  when  the  envoys  liad 
rome  to  the  kini^,  they  tor  many  days  did  not  receive  the  permission  t()  see  him  ;  at  leni,'tn 
(histlv  at  last,  tlnally)  when  they  had  already  dep:irted,  tlu^y  were  called  back  from  their 
journey  Liv  42  25  — /^e'/^i^*/^?  isalso  used  bevond  the  relation  of  time,  to  connect  the  last 
link  in  the  enumeration  of  facts  or  points,  wiihoiit  any  rei^^ird  to  their  time.  It  is  also  cm- 
ploved  with  the  force  of  an  altirmative  particle  («5  103»,  equivalent  to  deinnm,  or  to  our  ex- 
pression 'in  short',  'in  a  \\o\<r.— Tandem  is  also  used  as  an  exclamatory  or  emphatical 
particle,  correspondin<r  to  owv  '  in.  the.  world\  as  Quid  tande/n  vere/niiuf  What  in  the 
world  are  you  afraid  of  ?  Ca;s.  B.  G.  1,  40. 

Obs    6    To  the  temporal  form-adverbs  beloni;  the  nninoral  adverbs,  both  cardinal  and 
ordinal   '  in  re-ard  to  the  ordinals,  two  forms  are  distini,'uished.  those  in  umiiml  rn^'^oi, 
li    18)  in  the  use  of  which  there  is  much  uncertainty.    Tiro  (Cicero  s  amanuensis),  m 
Cell   lb  1   reports  that  the  most  learned  Koinaiis  had  been  doubtful  whether  I^n/ipe- 
jii^  tertium  or  ttrtio  mns>d  was  correct.    They  consulted  Cicero  who  declined  to  decide, 
advisiu"  them  to    use   tlie    al)l)reviation   tert.   con-^nl.      Cicero,   liowever,   always   says 
tertian"  Qnartum  etc.  consul  (meanini,'  either  in  his  third  iiic.  consulship,  or  'who  was 
three  (four  etc.)  times  cofKiU  ').     In  enumerations  the  form  primo  etc.  is  more  frecpient, 
1)rim»rm,  if  used  in  enumeration,  -renerally  iinplyintja  real  precedence  m  regard  to  time. 
The  next  links  of  enumeration  are  rarelv  added  as  in  Kn-,'lish,  by  stcundo,  fertio  etc., 
but  bv  him,  delude,  denique.     Even  aside  from  enumerations,  the  lonns  sccnndo  «ml  se- 
cimdiim  verv  rarely  occur,  their  place  beinj;  taken  by  iterum  Uhe  second  tim.;).     lt>rum 
may  also  be'rendered  '  a'j'iirC  ;  but  '  ayam  '  cannot  ahvays  be  expressed  by  ^^<^''>''>^-.\l 
is  expressed  bv  iterum  when  tlie  s.vmk  action  is  repeated  for  the  skcono  tiiu>;.     In  ttiis 
meaniiK^  denuo  is  sometimes  used  in  its  place  :  Etruna  denno  (more  usually  j/frw/zi)  re- 
6^/a/i/^  Etriiria  rebelling  again  (the  second  time).   Liv.  ID,  31.     When  'a-un    1^  used 
without  reference  to  the  number  of  repetitions,  rnrsuji  (sometimes  also  denuo),   but 
not  iterum  isemi)loved,as  rursus  p'ct>em  in  AvenCmum  s.'vocare,  to  make  the  piens  ayain 
S^to  mo..nt'Av'ent:inus.  Cic.  Mur.  7,  15.     If  by  '  again  '  not  a  repetition  ol  the  same 
act.  but  arestoration  or  an  'undoing'  is  understood,  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  rursi^'^,  never 
by  iterum  (deiwo  occurring  even  in  tliismeanin,',  but  extremely  seldoai),  as  quern  Media 
d'icit iir  /ecisse  rursus  exsene  adolescentulum.  Plant.  Men.  4,  ->,  Gl. 
Ee7n.  10.  To  the  adverbial  particles  of  time  beloiij: 
1,  riiEPOsrTioN.vii  ekprkssions  with  ante,  post  (botli  being  used  with 
the'foree  of  temporal  adverbs), //i/er.  and  ;)/•«.•  ,        , .     ..  / 

ante,  rm^g.7  (before) ;  pos^t,  posted  (after,  afterwards)  ;  a/l'eVI^  Iv'foro  this  tune;  po^  - 
Aac  after  this  time,  in  the  future  ;  intereu  or  interim,  meanwhile  ;  int.rdum,  somc- 
tiines  :  protenm,  forthwith  ;  j)o/ro  (inst.  of  proro)  larther.  .     ,  1      i 

a,  PARTICLES  with  the  appearance  of  piiiMrTiVEs,  but  dem!)nstrably  de- 
rived from  lost  (partly  still  existiiiii)  roots,  as  .....,• 
heri  (or  here)  vesterdav  ;  cm*,  to-morrow  ;  jam  with  its  compounds  Uanijam^jamdm, 
iamdu4um.jamprid:'ni) ;  dum  (in  compounds,  fi-^mndam,  tirdum  mhildum  etc.  see 
8  408) ;  imx,  soon  ;  pridem,  some  time  ago  ;  stepe,  often  ;  semoer,  always. 
Obs  1  In  the  combination  of  ante  etc.  the  terminal  ions  «?.?  and  h<7c  are  the  fourth  loca- 
tive cases  of  is  and  hie.    About  the  use  of  ante  and  jMst  as  adverbs  see  11.  13. 

Ons  2  Jam  alreadv  is  ofren  used  with  the  force  of  n '/»<?,  as  .S-:?/  y/m  ad  insfttata 
pe?qriJ^^  i^^^  Mei  us  cLe  now  to  the  subject.  Cic.  OtF.  2.  2,  8  -  .A/m  a^de  Irom  its  vari- 
ous ami  cplicated  uses  with  the  force  of  modal  particles  o  very  dilU-rent  meainm^s  is 
enpH^cV  v  tl  respect  to  Ti.>iE,of  a  state  cmceivedto  have  been  ui  continued  existence 
fir  some  time  up  t«  the  tim.r  sp..k(>n  of.  In  this  instance  it  is,  generally,  not  separately 
rendered   P^fZ-e  bein-  incluc  e.l  in  the  English  preseiit-p.'rfeet  tense,  as  :  .)fitiridutes 

tinue.l  to  rule)  falreadyl  for  '23  vears  from  that  tune.  Cic.  Leir.  -Man.  3,  ..—  Hunt  no-^tem 
Z  /-o^r  rVvli'a  aniL  vinnma<.  we  have  been  defeating  this  ^^"•■["y  (already)  for  le 
last  31  vears  Liv  «)  3  -  In  the  same  man ner  the  compositions. ;am'a/<.7rt''.i//'('{:^'«- . y^"«- 
^;/;!'^V,:;fus!^;  in'-ill  of  which  the  a.lverb.;.m  is  redun|u.t  n>r  Uje  Eug  .sh  idmm  ay 
Jamprid-^m  cupio  A/era»driam  Hsere^  I  have  long  wished  to  see  A  c.va  liu  Cic  At  ^, 
5.- (^.y.,</  populus  RoinannsjamdiuflimKtt-^s'W^^i  the  Uo.nan  l''yi>'V.!.\;\\;^'\^  'l^'.^ 
inglon-(l\.ratime).  Cic.  Div.  in  C;ee.  ^--Z  J^'^ 'l''<i'>^J'i'>^'l'''^''>li'''''^ 
citicB.  that  stability  of  frien.lship  of  which  we  have  been  speaking  lor  a  long  while  (all 

this  lime).  Cic.  Am.  '2-2.  (p.  229.  319). 
Obs   3.  The  English '  soom  '  is  expressed  1)  by  mox ;  2)  by  bred  tempore  {<patio)  or  by 


RELATION   OF  TIME. 


225 


brevi  alone  ;  3)  bv  inafure.  Mox  is  used  1)  interrogatively  in  connection  with  quam  (how) 
as  olZ  mox  rocV^/m  est prandium ?  How  s<.on  will  lunch  be  ready  (have  been  cooked)  ? 
PI  ill  iiud  2  3  12  -  Exspedo  quam  rmx  Chcerea  hoc  oraHone  utatur,  I  wonder  (expect) 
uw  -00  CluVia  will  u^e  this  la.iguage.  Cic.  Kosc.  Cm  1,  1,-  In  connection  with  tarn, 
^oimoT\mx  brevi  Un^^A.  ^x^  Mil aatur  tarn  brevi  rem  liomanarncrevisse  ihey  wonder 
?hatKome  has  grown  so  soon  (so  rapidly,  in  so  short  a  time  l^jv^l.  9,  4'  ^''  l^'"^^*  "^ 
\m,r  or  brevi  in  this  meaning'  often  the  adverb  nto  is  used.  Cic  tarn,  s,  .. 
^f  Vorts  used  a,''a,i  equivalent  of  ^preserMy\  of  actions  the  immediate  ^oinS  of 
wh  ch^Jcon?em    lated.  either  directly,  or  after  another  actn.n  has  fir-t  »,een  performed 

l^V^E^iMvillam  meam  Cn-wjussitque  miki  «'^"(ff'^nfelMr^TTt)  4  X;So 
Ti-iJ  viii-i    .m<l  s.Mit  me  word  he  won  d  soon  (presently)  come.  Cic.  Att.  10,  \.—  JJuctao 

^ndedSJe'tS;  otli^^begin^^^The^e  expressions  |^ave  a  more  ^---j^ '--/^Xrt^^ 
bein-  u<ed  both  if  the  action  is  directly  imminent,  and  if  it  is  to  IVV/i;^."  ^'  ^^f.  J '^ 
Hose  of  s  me  time  :  liespnblica  per  vos  frrevi  temiwre  jus  suum  recuperabit.  the  republic, 
th lou.d  V  will  smm  recover  ts  right.  Cic.  Fam.  12.  2.-  quosn  statim  agoredertbr 
t^^t^o^opprS^rum.  if  he  would  attack  them  immediately,  he  would  soon,  (in 
a  short  time)  crush  the  whole  of  them.  Nep.  Ihem.  4,  3.  ^„^„f„ 

3)    llw  s  als    sornetimes  used  with  the  force  of  deinde  to  connect  Puccessive  events, 
J\  E^iZfurMiati.  rnox  intra  val'nm  compulsi;  postrern^exuvn^^^^^^^^^^^  they 

Ax-ere  directlv  routed  and  driven  ;  soon  (then)  they  were  forced  within  the  lampait.  and, 
nt  i'i«f    tlii'v"lo<f  (are  strinned  of)  their  camp.  Liv.  4  »,  4a.  b.  j.  „ 

Pum  11  From  substantives  are  derived  1)  the  different  derivatives  of 
(lies-  2)  some  locative  and  Jiblative  cases,  and  prepositional  combinations. 
A  few  temporal  adverbs  are  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles. 

1  Dfrivatives  of  dies ;  din  (Ion-)  and  its  compounds.;a»Wiv,  qnamdiu.Jamdiu  jam- 
dl)wn^-1a>rdiudVU^  inf'rdiu  hychiv;  pridie,  day  before :  i?ostridie.  m-xi  day ; 
t  Si.  dav  after  to-morrow:  hodie  to-day \  propediem  at  an  early  ^ay :jMoJjrfjJ, 
£  .v*_/V  /1^  audposttndie  take  a  clause  with  quam  (p.  7til),  <.r  an  accusative,  {p7idi« 

'  iiha  C  ic  Phi  llV.  b:  ix>sf?^die  ludos,  Cic.  Att.  1«,  4, 1).  or  a  genitive  (pr^c/^e  eju-  dtn^ 
^^Fam  4  1  -liere  belongs  nudius,  with  the  nominative  masculine  ot  ordimds, 
-•.0  ,"i/y  c/a/'s'  iro^  (nudiusferlius,  three  days  ago:  corrupted  lr(,mj7v«c  di^ 
terSisZ)-  2  Locatives,  besides  diu :  noctu*,  by  nignt ;  ^w^^t  at  even  ng,  this 
eve  n<  •  V^'4o.i  or  t.mperi,  timely;  luci  (Imcu  anteclassica  ).  by  dayliL'bt  (C  c.  P  iK 
ir  o^f ;H.m iTtly  in  Plauuis).-  3.  Ablativks:  7nane,  early  '"  ^he  moiming  (all  m^^^^ 
tV  ..^',ALLto\-  horno  this  year  (anteclassical :  hornof i» us,  Cic.  \  err.  2,^.  IS)  .mouo, 
i  srimw  :  nd' tt  :^;mp;.i?ions  Vith  ,.o^  in  the  '"^^"-'^  '«(^.fS  ^iSlf^'S 
•early  ;    ^uotidie  (  =  quot-diebu.)  ;   J-^/-^-^^"?;.  j^Y^  ^  '  ^r  o    hese  ;^    fbe  aXded 

(alter  a  long  t  mc  :  lon^fe,  for  a  long  time:  repmte  and  subito,  suddenly. ^ 

*  From  ,u>cfu  must  be  distinguished  the  aDlative  ri'H:^;- ;^^-^  'c-^^BG^u''  n3^U 

G.  7,  72.    Sometimes,  but  rarely,  node  is  used  with  the  loice  01  tiociu. 


226 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


§  550.  When  the  time  of  an  action  is  determined  by  nouns  expressing 
TIME  and  ITS  TARTS  {(empus,  an?ius,  dies,  etc.),  these  nouns  are  placed 
1)  ill  the  ABLATIVE  if  they  denote  the  time  at  or  in  wliich  the  action  is 
conceived  to  occur  (answering  to  the  question  *  when) ;  2)  in  tlie  accusa- 
TiVE  or  abt.ative  if  the  length  (duration)  of  the  time  of  an  acticm  is 
to  be  MEASURED  by  these  nouns  as  measure-units  (the  question  '  how  long' 
requiring  the  accusative,  the  question  '  ^•Ai  how  much  time',  the  ablative). 
Tiiey  are  connected  3)  with  trepositions  or  with  some  of  the  temporal 
ADVERBS  or  are  placed  in  the  ablative,  if  an  action  is  to  be  determmed  by 
the  time  of  another  action,  or  by  a  time  different  from  the  time  spoken  of 
(u  v-Mpm  ffimmre  dulhn^  Dortis  ornptio  fiCbat,  af  the  snm^  time  ix  sally  was  made 

Lervices  of  tl.is  n.an  Caesar  liad  r.nploved  m  Jonner  V^V'- .]^-  \{lK-?':'%'nf,J^^^^^^ 
H(l  ('«saremderert  he  rcpt^rts  the  lact  to  C'lesar  at  nwinifjht  \h.  J: •^^•-'^^'"'J ''/;', 
SerUm-Jacm.  e't!  A,iovis?n.n  XXIV  .nillibus  pa-sMun;  aljesse,  {on)  the  seventh  day  he 
was  informed  th.t  ArU)vistu<  \vas24  miles  Iromlum    II).  1.41.  „   ^   „  .      Ttft./i«« 

^T  1^* 'nio^Roman  me  x«'imF-t:NiTs  for  Time  w.'re  1)  annm  ;  2)  nvnn^;  3^  die^ :  4^  hora. 

(fonr),as6^^n/a//m  iwo>ea>^^^^^^^ 

queMni'im.  tive  years:  «^<^^^'*'^^(*\;,':. .?",,;  hindre.I  years  is  expre-.-d  by  s.vcuhmi  (een- 
Imnquennmi^.  qmn<iiu'nnu.  .     A  '"J/;^';  ,    \ '.'''"'V,^;'  ^'^^^  ,i  similar  wav,  of  die.^ 

LryK     MiUennvnn  ,s  no  Lat.n  word.    J     •<"'»•;   .^^^:  J"  ^,.„„,    ,„,  iue  ndjecl 


the 


CO  I 

nove)it 


.-;^?jn;^^:;^po= 

the  exprc>*-i()n  nundin,ji*     rom  ''^''  ''V^n  nnt^f  on  every  ninth  day.  the  Romans  conntin- 
^wvry  ei'ihth  day.or.afier  th-  l^V'"'  "^fj'  '!=;'"';,.  mely^^  and  the  last  day  of 

in  all  runninL'  periods  the  torniuuitrnj^   lay  t^c.    namely  .ut^^^^^^^^^^ 


teen  days,  eontauun-  i'»'/"^"'/  ''*'  "^^T,.;';;,)' ,^;  „i..ht   beinix  each  divided  into  1-2  equal 

rnlnute^^    dodrans  hora:  =  \  of  an  hour  (45  mu)ute.).  Phu.  II.  ^.  2,  11 .  18,  ob,  semihora 

'''^:  V^Z\  t^.^^^-  of  ti,nc  the  foil  ,^yin.  rule,  should  be  noticed  : 
1^"  hinle.  of  the  n.onths  are  .o.TErT.VKst^ecMn^wm^^ 

day  bein-  ^'^P'-^^^'^yy/^^^^V^i.  Lll    t^    nmlt  he  ex^^^^  merU«  Junim.  October  (not 

t  y^'^^'^^^'^'^'t.l^hV-tc^l^^^^  ">""»l'^  occur  ^yilhout  the 

i^^^^^^n^^.  t'lic  monthX'^  nmst  be  supplied. 


RELATION  OF  TIME. 


227 


which  are  ia^  Calends,  or  J)l'!^<-^---^^X^:^^^-:^  )5,!/(S>l?/  Tdt^Tu.l 
(b)  Nonce,  (abbr.  Non.)  the/f/ZMin  f''''""«'\'^^  H^^^^f  [^^^.^^^^  except 

or  thirtemth  (in  lour  months  the  f'f''i''^f;;^"^;  J  J^l^^l'^ulV^  >1    o^         fifteenth  *    The 
in  the  m..nths  of  March    ^'»^^,  J"'>;  «"'^^^^-Xh  -u  "^Jdf^^^  ^^^^'^^ 

Kon(E  %vere  ahvays  <'n  the  ninth  day  (or  '''^.^''"  f  J; '';,.V/Io    th^        •  Tht- first  of  January, 
the  Ides  so  that  they  fell  in  the  four  ^'.^.^'^-P^-V"  '  "^^"^*^^^^^^^  Febr.) ;  the 

fSt^;(r'^^r  '^i{;r;4:.r^^^\  ^T^^A^I  Mus  Av^s  dd.  Apr.) ;  the 

^  V^&if  :i^3^I^-S^Vee  con.puti,.days^are  expressed  by  t^ -^erM^ 

^yith  the  accu-atiye  of  the  next  ^."f^P"^'   ;.jf;  V^,;„  j^U  ^i/?^^^^  the  4.  of 

Aw^nM,pndie  .\onas  MxtiHs  oi  ,^''^''^'f^f;.  ;''^^*- * '„  ^lavs  up  to  the  next  com- 

3?  All  other  days  are  exi-r.-ssed  by  Xf  ^'^ /^^^^^f""   of  [^^^^^         i,  Subtracted  from  the 
putintr  day  (aft,..r  the  Roman  Nvay).  so  that  the  ""'"l^^F/'l /"t  aait  k  ^^ 

number  represented  by  V'*:.^''^^.'^"!'' ^,  i'Vde- are  ^^^  or  on  the  7th  and 

^vhether  in  a  triven  month  the^^one^  and  Tdes  are  tne  arn  a^  ^^^^^^ 

l.'ith.ar.d.forthe  Kalends,  ^vhether  the  precedin^^^^^^  ,mnhod.  we  add 

In  order  to  reduce  the  Roman  f-V";^"^^V"/V    nnntin-^l  .v   th^  bein-  reckoned 

one  unit  to  the  number  represe.ited  by  .  f  J.  "  J^  '"^  30"  (31  3-2  or  :W.  Th'.Ts  the  2.  of 
2(J  ,:^.0).  .SI.  or  3->  days,  and  '^/'/.the  add  t  o  a  luui^  th.  None^":  the  2.  of  March,  May, 
January  would  be  ^■xprcssed  a^      e  f^nft  d.  >   m  ror.  i  ja„„ary  would  be  the 

July  and  Octob.T.  as  the  ^  J^^y  of  T  mu-  ry  the  da'y  before  (pridu)  the  Nones.  The 
third  before  the  Nones  and  the  4  ^J  ^'J  ' '  ^  Tanuary-Calends  of  next  year  :  the  14th 
14th  of  December  would. be  the  t^'t^i^; '^''^  tln^ ''«^^'"^.^^  \nril-Calends.  Some- 

of  March  \vould  be  pridle  Mus;  the  Ibth  ol  ^^^^i^f-V^r/,;  Trie  Att  M  •>  •  12  44  3). 

^7^V\VflJv  hnfa'*'*  the  third  d:.l  before  the  Tdes.  while  the  preposition  ante  if 
the  Ides  of  Jul>.  nut  «f       i"»    uiuu  »i  ordinary  me;inn'^  a.s  Ante  hal. 

placed  immedlMtely  before  the  couMMit  n<^    a  >   »  as     >  o.dm  ^^^^.^^^^ 

'jannon  ^^''iry"':,^'''  ^'^1  f,  'Tl^i!''  \^^]^\^r^\^Zt^diem  prefixed  to.the 

;  f:;i;:;sr^mh;n^;;bi;rin  wha?i^r  J^  th.  date  ^.^^r^^f^  !g,:^j:r^'TS 

K-  it  is  the  SITB.TECT  in  the  foUowinir  i)assMoe  ol  Ca-ar  ('^-Jj-l  <^-  ^^  ^Zmf\  Piini^  et 
'J;^^  TA^n..  AG.M.U.  Co.^  i^^  ^i^ZT^^^^^^-  ^the  T^ 
A.  Gab  nio  consulihus).  this  dav  \\as  tnc  nun  '!' i'  '     '        .'     rpj  ,,.  v.t.ntence  m  s:ht 

]SlarclO  in  the  o<mM,lship  of  Piso  aiid  Oab-nius^Oo^)^^^^^^  ^^^^^,^ 

Ivivp  been  cxD-e-scd  in  tlif  less  u>ual  \\.i>     y-^  (cieserai  ijuin  u    \        ^jjt  j^  i    j ,'  i  r-:p 
J;;\h'n.;iowJn.  sentence  '  ^^f  !^^ -[J-XhtS'Kt'sS,^^ 
Fam.  11.  <}  (the  tribunes  had  P't^V''^ J      '   f^      t'»''  '  "^^^^^^  ^ime.    Thus  it  remains 

20th  of  December),  the  l'!>^;'^^' takes  te  "^^^^J^^^"^^,,,,,  Kal.  Odobns  judicio 
nuchan-'-d  afier  prepositions  a>,  ''' ^Z''^'!//'^' ^.['V/ [  24,h%nd  2.5th  days  of  September. 
dirta  die^.  the  (day  for)  }'fr'^.;';'^';X^^Z  W  intern  M%Odotrli  in  quinque  die^. 
J'Sat;]^i^;^^'S??;^o^;^SiaJt:i^^  lUhdayofOctober.  Liy.  45,  2. 

r?/.,,,   1"    Tlie  nimns  expressing  the  time  at  or  ix  which  an  act  is  icp- 
n./enu.;i  ^s  oTcurHn^are  ,'nacc.l  ha  tl^ABLATivEcase^whethe,- the  nouns 

interraJan><).  ♦»,„  ,.„or  v.ofr!m  on  the  Tdes  of  March,  on  which  day  the 

the  Sun  and  the  Moon  were  included. 


228 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


expressing  tlie  time  be  conoeived  as  time-points,  or  as  time-periods  ?r/Mm 
uhich  the  act  takes  place  *  as 

Eo  temjyore  anni.  nt  that  time  of  tlic  year,  aes».  B.  G.  7,  8  ;  alfero  die,  on  the  pecond 
day,  11).  7,  11  :  iw-^few  die,  on  the  next  day,  Ih.  7,  18  (al^o  expies^sed  by  ix^stridie  e'fis 
diri) :  honi  secufidd,  at  two  o'clock  (nicanin-r  the  second  hour  alter  i«anrisc)-  I-«iv.  45.  'Z: 
ttrtn  vif/ilia.  in  the  third  ni;,'ht-\vatch  (nu-anini;  the  lifth  and  t-ixtii  hniirs  alter  sunset), 
C;es.  B.  "(J.  7,  5S;  luildruin  liouKiiionini  gecnndo  die,  on  tli<'  second  day  of  thi;  Hoinau 
«xaines.  Liv.  45.  I  ;  tali  iem]X)re,  in  t^uch  a  time.  C:es.  B,  G.  7,  40  ;  aliofe/nfMjre.  at  anotlier 
time,  lb.  :il;  hoc  ipso  remjMre. '}[\st  at  that  time,  II).  <),  37;  prima  luce.ai  dayl)reak,  lb. 
7,  ;i(i.— So(»f  time-periods  within  which  the  event  lias  happened:  Ko  aiitio  leiillescuiQles» 
tritici  decies  centum  millia  populo  discripserunt.i/^  Mf/  yn/;- (at  some  time  of  the  year) 
tUecuriileediles(listri!>uteda  iniUion  mea-uresof  wh'-at  amon-^^the  pcopU;.  Liv.  '.\\.  li. — 
Ne(|ue  Troii'i.ttemiMrib'K  tantiim  laudis  indi<;endt)  I'lixi  tribuisset  .lomenis.  nor  would 
Homer,  in  I'wjan  tinier,  has  a  attached  so  much  praise  tor  speakin;;  to  Ulyssei*.  Cic. 
Brut.  10,  40. 

Obs.  1.  The  abhitive  mav  be  used  to  indicate  that  an  act  lasts  through  a  whole  period, 
as  Ctun  milittx  tofo  temjiore  frigore  et  ux»idtm  iinhnhux  fardan/d'tr,  whan  the  soidiern 
were  delayed  </'//"i/<7  (or  j//) "the  wliole  time,  or  •</«?  whole  time' by  cold  and  continued 
showers,  c'as.  H.  G.  7, '^4.  Olti'n,  however,  per  is  used  in  this  .souse,  as  Per  hosannos 
mare  clattsum  fait,  the  sea  was  closi-d  durin;;  ihes»;  years,  Cic.  Le<?.  Man.  \l.  lii.—Per  eos 
dies  C/i.  Serciliun  Coaml  in  SicUiain  trajTcit,  In  (durini;)  those  days  the  Consul  Cn.  h. 
crossed  over  to  Sicily.  Liv.  30,  24.  Frequently  other  forms  than  tint  of  n(mns  are^  used 
to  express  this  relation,  espi'cially  the  alilatives  absolute  with  present  participles,  <»r 
predicate-uount»  (§  533,  K.  'l-i.\h  231.  i:\'i.).  as  int'infe  lehlfe,  in  early  youth;  oriente  sole,  at 
sunrise  ;  f/te  pue/o,  te  coiisule  etc.  For  the  use  of  the  preposition  in  in  these  relations  see 
§  45:3.  R.  7ci. 

Obs.  2.  The  DATKS  (in  the  form  described  above,  §  .5.50.  obs.  2).  if  they  answer  to  the 
question  '  ivhen\  are  i)laced  in  the  aulativk  or  in  the  imikpositionai-  lorm  with  ante  ilipni, 
or  (the dates  immediately  precedini;  the  computing'  days)  m  the  advkubi.m.  k)rm  {priUie). 
The  ablative  is  always  used  if  the  date  is  one  of  the  compulini,'  day.s  (ol  course  always 
in  the  plural,  the  computing,'  days  beinj,'  pluralia  tantnm).     Tla-se  al)latives  of  the  com- 
putin"davs  are  frequent  Iv  accompanied  by  ip4.^,  as  -on  the  Ides  of  March  ,  Jdih>(<  Marriu>, 
or  Jpsi.'i  idif)iis  Marfii-i.  the  other  dates  (,nen  those  with  pridie)  moro  frequeutlv  take  the 
form  with  (m/^^/i^/n.  but  are  also  (less  fre(iuenily)  expressed  m  the  lormol  an  ab  aiive.as 
Quinto(&nU')  Kal.  Martiiu,  on  the  25th  of  February  (more  Ireciuently  «.  d.}  .  h<ii.  .mirr.). 
When  the  date  is  accompanied  by  an  apposition,  the  noun   in  appos;tion    is   a('ia>j.<t 
placed  in  the  ablative,  even  if  the  date  itself  is  expressed  in  the  prepositional   fonn, 
as  :  Ante  diem  nidntinn  d^cimxm  Kahiulas  Ocfobrls,  luddrum  Romanonnn  seonidn  <ii>' 
Licinio  consuli  laiireaiie  littere  (allVriintur).  On  the.  Wh or'  S'pfemfjer,  t/te  second  day  of 
the  Roman  games,  a  dispatch  wreathed  with  laurel  was  handed  to  the  consul  L.  Liv.  4.),  i. 
Ob=«  3    The  time  to  which  an  action   refers,  including  the  dates,  is  sometimes   ex- 
pressed bv  ad  with  an  accusative,  chiefly  denotiuL'  '  ^^^r  ^V.J'V^i*' >r'   \fl  ^-\f''l^'^ 
ad/dnl  Mnjas;  I  shall  remain  at  Laodicea  till  the  Ides.  Cic  Att.  .,  1.  21      But  «./  i.  .  m 
used  to  dvMolc  the  time  at  which  an  action  on(ild  or  was  to  6«  perloruud  or  a  time  Jued 
fm  an  action      So  in  the  -eneral  expressions  ' «./  ttmpus\  Uid  dievi' =;  ivmdnatly  : 
Svitas  f-rumentum  ad  dinn  dedit.   Cic.  Verr.  2.  2,  5.     Ad  const ttn tarn  if^^^i^J^f^^ 
Cic  Fam  2  11,  2.     Comp.  lb.  U).  10,  4.     Ad  ttwpi/s  venire.  Sail.  Juu'.  .0,  o.     S«).   1  c  Lao- 
d  ce;  ■  f  re  a.i  meum  adventum  (at  my  arrival).  Cic.  Fam.  3,  5, 3.  ,  (^mwi  ad  di^m   e^Mui.i 
debC ri  fruinentum  sciCbat.  Cx's.  B.  G.  6.  33.     Thus  ad  is  used  neioic  dates  (m  place  of 
an  a  .lat  V  )  i      he  day  ^''^  -r  is  appointed  for  the  action:  It  erat  dutvm  a  consulibas 
Jen    Spiam  ad  Nona^  Februarias.   Cic.  Att.  8,  11.  li.  2.-Eiroad  Aonas  (i.  e.  veniam) 
oTemaZodion  dixi.  lb.  13,  Iti.-Pollex,  vt  dixerat,  ad  Jdus  SextUes  {i.  e  pnesto  luii) 
ftf  R  4(S  -jTa'^^^^^  ill  Pausa  spes  ?  {i.e.  ou  the  day  apimnted  for  the  meetin-  of 

the  Senate).    lb.  16, 1,4.  .      .        .,        , 

Oiis  i  In  the  DATE  of  lettebs.  tlic  place  of  the  date  is  conceived  as  the  place  of  an 
action  with  'outward  tendency'  (accordin-  to  p.  31  3),  and  hence  requires  the  P.reposi- 
tUmex  (so  always  'exca.stns\  instead  ot  which  also  the  prepos.t..)..  «6  (conceive,  as 
direction  '  f7vni')  is  used.  See  Ex.  21 .  23.  Hence  the  name  of  the  city  where  the  letter 
iJ  da  T  biin^  conceiv"  as  < place  from  \  must  (according  to  p.  47.  3)  be  placed  in  the 
ABLATIVE  (not  in  the  r/,nitive),m.tvi^a  of  which,  in  the  context_  ol  letters  also  the  prepo- 
«it-m'i^aV  occurs ;  as:  '/>«/.  a.  d  111.  Non.O<:t,,hr.,rhessalo,nra:  ^''y^^,^;^^'^^^'^')^;^ 
on  the  tilth  of  October.  Cic.  Fam.  14,  -l.-rndie  Kal  Maj.  /{^•'""'''^^-  ]^-_^^'  "l.-.^,;'  v 
ti^xtU.  liheqio;  Khegium,  July  the  20th.  lb.  7.  19.  Comp.  lb  7  20  :  1.3:  10,  3,  ^^  ^n  ->> 
11,10;  1 1 ,  19 ;  1 1 , 20;  11, 23^nj_oncMKj-ln^_fevvjetters  ad  Atticum  (3,  20 ;  3,_«j,  UieCod. 
*  In  En-^lish  'in'  \s  generally  used  to  denote  time-peuiods  {in  the  night,  in  the  year), 
and  '  at '  or  'on  \  wben  the  time  is  conceived  as  a  time-point  (at  the  moment,  on  the 
day).    lu  Latin  both  relations  arc  expressed  by  the  Ablative. 


RELATION   OF  TIME. 


229 


Med.  exhibits  the  Genitive  of  the  place  (Rrundusii,  Thessalonlc(E),  which  the  recent  edi- 
tions (probably  correctlv)  have  chanjjed  into  the  Aidaiive. 

1.  Hoc  die,  inquit  Sc:pio.  tribiini  plebis,vusque  Qui  rites  cum  "^""^^^.^^..^^^^^^^ 
piniensibus  siirni<  collatis  in  Africa  beneac  leliciter»  pu-navH.  ^'^  3«;51:-f;. ^i^'\^  ^5;'^^* 
Itonue  intercala/'on  sit  nee  ne,  velim  ad  me  scribas,  quo  die  '">  -^  ^^  //^V  "  i'.^^^^'^^^  Oes' 
\\t  5  21  14  —  3  Fu-nanir  uno*  te/npn-e  omnibus  lucis.  atque  omnia  tentantur.  c.e?. 
B  G  7  »4  -  4.  Ciesa^  animadvertit,  coUem  qui  ab  hosribus  tenebatur  uudatu.n  (esse) 
homini'bus,  qui  .supeiioribus  diZbus  vix  pr;e  multitudine  c^'""'  P';/.^';|  ,•  ,^,^J  no.T-'i^ 
5  Hoc  ipsot/nuwre  Gernulni  equites  interveniuiil«,  protenusque  ab  decuiiulna  l^i  a  in 
casfra  ir  umpe  e  conantur.  H)  7,  37.-  (i.  Mons  Cevenna  durvssimo  ff^'i^^'J}'"'^}^'^ 
Kiini  live  iter  i.nnedlGbat  lb.  7,  8.-  7.  Ciesar  veritus  ne  hostes  nocte  ex  oppido  profu- 
se S.  bus  e!^  J  esmarniis  excubare^  jubet.  lb.  7,  11.-8.  E^fere  ^nrnlxl^ 
f-r  Qui  ctio  Flaminlno  venerunt,  se  si-nis  collatis  cum  re-e  Phibppo  in  IhessaiiJ 
iuena-e  Liv  ii,  24.-  9.  Exerc.tus  vestTi  mimquam  a  Brundusio  ni>i  hieme  suvirrui^ 
tr-ifismi^Grui  I'o  Cic  Le-  Man.  12,  32.-  -  10.  Antiochus  rex  initix)  verts  navibiis  ab  Ephe- 
s  f  X't  IS  H.-Ilespouuun  petitn;  Liv.  33,  38.-  11.  Pompejus  tantum  be  lum  .x/r.m.i 
Ai^^A^^  apparavif^  i..a./.  vere  suscepit'».  m,dia  (Bstale  coni^^vi  Cic  "^^f^^^^}^ 
35.-  12.  Triumpharei*  m<.7ise  Januario  statuerat  consul.  Liv.  .19.  5.-  13  1  acu.t  suia- 
tui  Pomponium  pnetOrem  tnduo  proximo  lu  provinciam  proficisci.  lb.  2.*,  ^U.-  14_  ^ex 

pnetOres  illo  auho  primum  creati  sunt.  lb.  ■^■^^'^;^--%^^'^'}'i^X^Zu^Z^ 
C.'*)  decessi.ssei*  Antias  Valerius  est  auctor.  lb.  .3p  5b- lb.  'Jn.^^^^f/i^^^^VVJ';';- 
tratum  proximo  s^eculo  Themi^tocles  iusecntus  esti^.  Cic.  B"»V-  ^0;  ^t--  1 '•  f^  ^^>^^ 
vroflio  uuiimi'*  ab  hora  septima  ad  vesperum  puirnatumesset,  aversum  hostemi»  \idcrc 
nem^p  t  cis.  B.  G.  1,  2b.-  18.  Tola  oistate  Nilu<  yfhe  Nik)  Mgyprmn  obrutam 
m"  r.!?;";;-)  Vfnet.  Cic.  N.  1).  2.  5;>.-  19.  (^lue  Genabi^o  ,,,,;,,^  ,o  .  ,^esta  -n,  «;. 
prifnam  a  miecUm  viqiliam  in  fimbus  ArvernOrum  ^"dlta  sunt.  H     «,  .3- 2(^.     aur.s 

propter  nivis  anff  me>u<^em  JuniumtTiin<,lvi  non  potest.  ^^'^^^V'-^^Vi-Jr^a^a/lb  6 
tissima>^2i  a  Cubistris-^'^  te  meas  1  tteras  haliCre  ais  a.  d.  X  AaL  Ocobr.  data-.  ID.  o. 
It-  22.  M.  Fulviu^riumphavit  a.  d.  decimum  Kal.  ./a/i.  de  .EtOl.s  e    de  Cepha  e 
Tiiis   Liv  3't  5  --23  E  Pomi  ejJuo"  navi  advectus-^*suiu  in  Luculli  nostri  ho>pitium-* 
'/  /i^^  '\jl;,'ia.>  ^n7/.J  ///.•  e^-ressus  autein  e  navi  accSpi  ^uasn tteras  quast.uis 
tabellarius--'«  in  Cumamim-^^  attulisse  dicebatur,  ^oms  .Wu.  ^" '^^I^.^^Xr^ur^^^^ 
eadenifir>  hora  veni   in  Puteoiaimm".     Ibi  accGpi  duas  epistola.^  alteiaai  ^om», 
VLlmrumVlI Idas Lannvio  datcu^.  Cic.  Ait.  14.  iO. 

llem  18  When  the  time  of  an  action  (answering  to  the  question  '  when  ) 
i«  determined  bv  mkasl'uinu  its  distance  from  anotiieu  time,  or  Irom 
the  time  of  another  action,  the  nouns  expressing  the  time-measure  (meas- 
ure-units of  time  ^  5.50,  obs.  1)  are  generally  i)laced  in  the  Ablative. 
being  combined  with  those  objects  of  time  which  denote  the  ideas  6d- 
f(>/'d"anil  '<(fter\  This  is  called  the  Ablative  ot  Time-measuke,  while 
the  ablative  of  the  time  at  or  in  which  an  event  occurs  is  d(.'siguated  as 
Abl.\tive  of  Ti.ME  SIMPLE.  The  ablative  of  time-measure  is  employed 
accordiu"-  to  the  following  rules  : 

1  The'^nouns  denoting  the  measure-units  must  have  numerals  as  at- 
tribute>;  which,  according  to  the  sense  of  this  construction,  should  be  cau- 
diwls  (intciTogative,  dotinite,  or  indetitiite,  as  qaot,  duo,  malti,  pauci,aU- 
quot).     But  by  a  peculiar  Latin  idiom  frequently  qiidinals  are  used  m 

1  JiPve  ac  ftliciter  PuccessfuUy.- ^  This  predicate  has  two  completing  objects  and 
five  aTNe,bi/l  oSs  t^^^^^  temporau'^two  modal,  and  one  local.     \^  hicli  o     he 

Sb  ect's  iXVto  c'lcl\  of  these^categories?-  3  The  'mysteries^  «J /he  festiv.H  of  tt^ 
f'riof  p,wirii.-.s  ri^-bele^  are  me:mt.— *  units  has  here  the  force  of  laem.—  '  to  »ee.— 
5'S  vet' t  Ul^'.S' Id.-  '  ...' 1.-.-P  nndor  arm..-  •  end.-  •  ;^;;;ig;-[,;l;."'"•i  "'  »■- 
tor  i  P  mi.lwinter  See  §  372  K.  31.—  *•>  to  cross  over.—  "  to  sail  t(  wards.—  '  to 
nnwc^-^^lo^  le^^^^^^  one's  triumph.-  >*  Translate  this  expression 

1    o  Liiin  by  years'lrom  the  building' of  llo:ne  (iu  th«  year  753  b.c.).-i«  to  die.-  "to 
•    low      The  sentence  mu>t  be  passively  expressed  in  Eu-lish.-  '«  although.-  ^^  liter- 
al    '  a  foe  turned  off  ^^^.  the  back  of  any  one  among  the  enemy.- '^06=ena^Mm,  the 
'ie^sen\  city'ot"uHeans'on  the  Loire.- -  thJ-  ^-^^^^^^^^^.l^^ -\'^l^\Z,^t  S^M.mfr' 
:)y  whicu  what   is  latest  in   lime  cati  be  expressed.-  "^^^t    ,1  I       "  literalW  t/<to  A« 
23  ,iu.  Pompejanum,  a  villa  of  Cicero,  near  Pompeji.-  2*  to  and.-  ■'^  Hf^raily  i'^«>/^« 
nMcditu  ;  supply  'and  found  immediaielv  the  shelter  of  the  hospitable  roof  .-  2«  car- 


{ 


JlO 


Tier.-  37 "A  villa  of  Cicero.—  aa  Another  villa  ot  Cicero. 


230 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


thk  ron^tniction  with  the  force  of  cardinals,  as  Po,^t  dechmm  diem  rediii 
cZ^TmTd^e^^^^^^        lie  returnecl  after  ten  days.  See  ohs.  4     Frequent- 
i%c  mmfeitratti-ihntes  coalesce  with  the  nouns  expressing  the  measuie- 
iniU^  of  time  into  one  word  {biennium,  tndnum  etc.). 
"'o'^niTceie^^^^^^  tempm  is  used  as  time-measure   it  has  ahva>  s 

X^:^^}il^n^^<^^sU^u^^  ^^\'^^^  of  time),  which  is  ^-^\^}^^'^y^'^:^^^ 

adveri'^ar  X  wS',  -'s  ^,vM,?rf,Vi«..  p«<  .l.ree  .lays  laler  (^'"env.n  s): 
A  7»«    «r  1  vo  (1  lys  before :  *•<•«»  abhinc  aimb,  leu  years  a-...    (/-)  1  Kt.P- 

five  vears  Jffcre  Auiriistus  died.  Suet.  V esp. -.  ,,..:,i,  ii,„ 

4 'insteTdof  u-^iirn-  tlieHl.1aliveoflime-ine:is..re  m  connection  %v  ill.  tie 

ndt-erl««"te  an      .W.  H.e  latter  words  may  be  connected  as  g<>ye  n    g 

ruFPO^iT  ONS  Vil U  the  accn.atives  of  the  noun  ^U;""»"^' / '«=  '  «»!\',^; 

!'„l™'i,s  used,  meaning '«->  moretha,,'  in  the  sense  ol  ante,  and    uU  laU, 
than '  in  the  sense  of  post.  See  K.  U,  obs.  o  ^c). 

thorn  int..  ..no  «-.ml  (««""''"'' '^''^;  •/,'".  V,,'yi" '^^^^^^^  i^   '1'^"  H.'-ciu»  c.iinp.;o- 

dale  ,leH.iy^f     .<?•«>  '™^^of1  h'    u".  .'r'hlp  '  A   what  M.ne  Y  mi»"  !/"'.■■-•/'!"'■  '^"^■ 


tin 
use 


Cic.  llosc.  C«>.n..l3,  =57.  ^^ ^'^'^V^^:J^T^::T^^'^^^^  backward  iVom  the 
li-oin  tlie  time  of  a  compro.n  ^e  i  k  .  ^  '^  ,'^f/"^t  ou  Vlence  it  fail^  to  prove  the  assertion, 
speaker's  time,  is  not  ^^'^;^^}"^ ^'^;!^' ^^^^^  of  «Ui.r,  and  tl.e  abla- 
t  The  «rrainmanans  conMdcr  Uii>  ass  J"*;,;'"'''';'  w-tinn^  arc  eoually  frequent  and  vcx- 
tive  with  aMi/ic  as  exceptional,  l^'i^  'y'  '  <^'  ';;  r"\\!  ,\-  /[^^  pS^t-s  quoted,  ust-s  the 
uhir  in  all  periods  of  .he  lan^..a..c  Cicero^ a^-»^'>.>J  •  .s  aKdon  occurs  Phil.  2,  4.5, 
uhlative  Verr.  2,  .r2,  13'».  and  At    1>   Ik     1  he  a^^^»^  ,,^,^,^  e.,n>t.  uctious  are 


RELATION  OF   TIME. 


231 


1)  ^y  ah  hoc  tempore  (inst.  of  a5Mn^)  with  an  ablative   as:  Etdein^^^^^^^^^ 

Konfnhun  qui  «6  /'«^  ^^'«^;^.  «^^^.f^ft^rf  X  C  c'^Re^^^ 

ward  to  Romulus,  who  was  kin-  ^^' >^'^'^"?•VhP  HoS'^trativc-  Aic  as  :  Eriro  Ai,s  quad- 

TivE  of  the  time-measure  in  connection  with  the  «emonstativc^  /Z2c.  a.  .  i^^         v 

ilhid  annMituni  se  nauns  illi-s  lUtbus  ml^l^t^e  L<iij  oajum.  uioumu.   '  '  iivtvpum   Tic 

an  wS-Thai  he  had  .ent  that  silver  «/.'^y^«^;«r7^(wuhin  a 

wise  in  connection  with  hic,  !^\- ^^^^ ,^^Jl\^'^''^^^^  See  R.  14.  oDs.  6  (c).- 

thou  didst  abuse  me,  ^'^^^'J';.  '  J-fTl  ,i^>  I'l'^,  ^'^^  ,'^^  of  the  quantita- 

5)  In  re-ard  to  indefinite  ^'«^fi-^^y  f''«,,t,°7'o?  or  w  th  u^         and  indetlnite  numerals 
five  adieciives 'as  ;)a/^/o  a/i^^,  a  littlt;  wnile  a^o  .  or  uiLu  iiuuii.- "" 

ntheYilUive,as/BeneC.esar;,«^ 
Ut  paulo  nr,U  dixi.  C  c.  Am.  21  ^Comp._  lb.  .<;?<[,  -'l^^-.^,^ '  caAll-Pmyauci^  ante  dkbas 

bebam')littera8adte.  Cic.  Fam.  b,  20.  Comp.  tie.  1  u>c.  1,  o. .». 

OBs.2.  If  time-measure  is  deiermined  ^X  t^«^--^-,^^ ^fl^J^S^^rf  i^  ^e'^^ 
F.,KE  a  time  not  that  ot  the  spe;  k  r,  J  \^^,^^,,^J^;^L^V^'^y\'  ,   'accusative  of   len-th\ 
and  almost  exclusive  »o»'V^  ^^'' «^'^ ,^' ""' J,, '^„f^'j.P'J,^^^^     tf  the  time  before  which  the 
nor -enerallyt  by  a  prepositioiia    %l^'l^^'^.^^3^'^^^^  in  the  form  of  the 

event  happened  is.to  be  ^\'^^'']';^^'^::  ^^,'^^^^'^'^,^  ?orm  of  a  comparative  clause  after 
prep..si.ion««^ewithanc)unor(inoiegeitnl^  ^  j^^  ablative 

he  adverb  ante.    If  the  ti.nt.  is  ""t^P^^;''<^,^^,v\^,J,    %%Ulsante  diebus  Lieluis  Romam 
of  the  time-measure,  withou    any  «^'^«'^,^ \^'^,    ^  r'^V  •:^0  17  --^  ante  guadraginta 

venit.  Many  days  be/ore  L^«l'"^,  ^I^^^f'^.f  ^"  V'  fyX  years  eaZr  (\>ef ore  that  time) 
pax  cum  Carthagin.ensibus  postremo  (act    cTat.  y^  44.-Adversarios  a  quibus 

the  la.t  peace  had  been  made  with  tl^;:;^^^^.^     -^f '"'.^;  ^e-  frmn  the  state  his  antaj,':nnsts 
paulo  ante  erat  ^Oectus,  ^expe  lit  ex  cu  tjlte^^  >  G  7,  4.-Qui  le-em  agrariam 

,v  whom  he  had  been  cjectecl  «  ('^//^Vi^XKal^rit   whc>  had  prop. >sed  ail  agrarian  law 
(^iquot  annuante  secundum  ^^iniciwibdliw^  Sa  5  13  -Pu«Zo  an^.  7nedhim  noctem, 

or 'between  the  lV•^■c^^l'"-^=^V^^^^l^thc^  i  m  m  ^^^^  nttributet     Ante  annis 

whole  ablative  phrase  or  b.tween  the    o^^^^^^^^^^  Generally  however  the 

^^Ll^Z^lt-^^  '■■  S,f 'r./£':  or'--  ^uilJ^^u.  anu;  or  •  auo6as  annis 

ante'. — 

T,        .  .u,rr.  w  no  reason  why  the  one  of  the  two  constructions 

^^  cSreSr  thi^ule    ;^^^  -eptioii  ^^^^ 

Ih?  preposition  a.t.  vvith  \^;;;^^^.^^}\'.'^^^^^^^  lU.ruit.  Vellej-  1.  5. 

numerals,  in  the  "1«'^"'"-,.    ?.-, '.ff  «?Tou  N  7  25  -T-eV'^.um  ante  diem  scitOte  banc 
_ll,,can/6pa./c^.'«/mc>.;didiamus    Sen  Qu  1^.7^^.^^  ^^^^  ^.^^i^^^^ 

ficuiudecerptamCarthagine.  Pbn.  H.  N.  t  ,  2a-ll»c  scn^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^ 

"unt.    Suet.'^Tib.   61,-  It  19  'j^'^Z'^Stn^KU^^^^^^  ^^ '^"^^^^  ^'''"^' 

form  ante  trl^  annos  is  the  regulcir^^''^  /^  ^>^1^'^^«  ""J  distinction  betw-een  '  ^rfiz/s  a;i/. 
being  exceptional  Some  -c.  «^^  ;  «^  \o  ^'^"^^  *l  ^^^^  ^^^nb.  to  Ruddiman  2,  p.  291). 
aunis\  and  •  ante  tris  annos'  (llancl  T  us  !'  -^^  .-/^  ^  .^,,,  i^  the  meaning  '  three  year.^ 
i^^o-i^pc^^tl^^et  l^Sr^^SS;;  Z^aJ^lo  S:!^'n^  it  so  But  there  is  no  passage  in 
S.n  iSilv  nVThe  u.e  of  this  tt^rm  in  the  "^-V^»''^,;^;^^  "f^  remely  rare,  as  for  inst.  : 
f  Tiiiu-measure  in  the  ^7";.<'  J /«•  ^5;^!;^^^^^^^^^  Nep. 

t  HandTniVi  l!  i7;f»do.ibti  that  the  last  arrangement  occurs.    But  compare  Liv.  33, 
44*  annis  jwst  uno  et  viginti. 


{ 


232 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


Ob«  3  If  time  is  defcrminod  by  the  number  of  year?  elapsed  apteti  a  certain  event, 
or  uliich  will  elapj^e  aftkk  Uk^  lime  of  the  si'Eakkk,  tiic  same  coustructions  are  employ- 
ed as  with  a/'^<?,  Diit  with  the  lollowin- moditications :  •    •,  ^ 

(a)  The  adverb  or  preposition  j)Osf,  takes  the  place  o{anfe  or  abhinc.  as:  Belhim  initnra 
e»\avnui)odtnbuset  vifjinti,  the  warcommeneeil  twenty  f/iree  y earn  Later  \ aw  •^";4i.- 
Isdietator  Xvn^xn^ a^t anuis  jmt  liomamconditam  (/uadntigenfi'xjnindfcim,  llewas  ciio^rn 
dictator  415  ijears  after  the  buildinrj  of  Romp  Cic.  Fain  •.»,  21  2.-  e,i  iiou  malto  i>ost 
V'/am  Iudi!*ce5*si8ti,  Yesterday,  not  much  laier  than  you  kdt.   Cic.  At t.  12,  4. J. 

ib)  The  ablative  of  the  noun  denotim,'  the  time-mea-ure  orcnerally  takes  an  ordinal 
attribute,  if  the  numerals  are  detinite,  and  are  not  expressed  by  numeral  nouns  {fntiunjtm, 
Idduwn  etc.).  For  the  raeaninj;  of  this  construction  with  ordnials  see  obs.  A.--inde- 
cinio  die  post  quam  a  te  disce^s.-ram,  ten  rfrtyx  (literally  'on  the  eleventh  day  )  after  I 
had  left  thee  (instead  of  </e<-^m^/i?/>'As'^X).v/).  Cic.  Att.  12,  1.  ♦*!,„„ 

(c)  The  prtpositi*.ual  Jorm  of  the  time-measure  with  jMst  is  far  more  frequent  thnn 
the  same  form  with  ante.  If  the  numerals  are  d>-,fi"ife,  and  cannot  be  expressed  by 
numeral  compounds  {biennium  etc.).  they  are  almost  always  oiidinai.s,  as:  Ablato  post 
VNdecimum  annom  a  y>\eh<i  cimsuiatu,  ^«'/i  ijears  after  the  takin<'  away  of  the  Co.sniate 
from  the  I'lebs  (i.  e.  the  riudit  of  electinj?  Plebeians  as  consuls).  Liv.  .,  K^.  1.  S(»ine  jrruin- 
marians  take  the  preposition  ;xm-^  in  this  c«ninecti(m  for  an  advkub,  explaining  the  accu- 
sative 'as  an  accusative  of  the  lt/ir,th  of  time'.  'I'his  opinion  is  erroneous  since  the  ac- 
cu-alive  of  len>'th'  refers  to  the  whole  period,  while  the  accusative  of  the  ordinal  won  Id 
refer  onlv  to  the  len'-th  of  one  term  of  the  period  {atuni^,  dies  etcK  Nor  will  this  view 
account  for  the  lact  that  ' jxjsr  with  an  accusative  of  the  time-measure  is  never  placed 
at  the  end  of  the  phrase,  which  is  very  frequently  the  case  with  the  ADVEiai  pn.^t  alter  an 
ablative.  If  we  take  2>ost  as  a  preposition,  and  the  accusative  as  the  te<,'ular  case  -,'ov- 
erned  by  it,  this  fact  will  need  no  explanation.  t  ♦!     ♦•    „ 

(d)  The  adverb  mst  is  often  undekstood  after  an  ablative  of  time-moasure  if  the  tune 
reierred  to  is  either  expressed  by  a  clause,  or  else  must  be  supplied  fr«)m  the  text,  as : 
Deilisse  id  deos  tandem  sej-to  decimo  deiiuun  anno,  that  the  ij;ods  had  «rranted  this  at  last 
after  fifteen  years  u"!^t.  of  sexto  decimo  anno  jx^sf).  Lw.  30,  21.—  AccTius  est  Hannibal 
CarthWinem  sexto  ac  tncesimo  anno  quam  puer  inde  project  us  erat.  Hannibal  was  siim- 
nionetl  from  Italy  to  Carrha^'e  thirtvjice  years  after  he  had  departed  Irom  there  as  a  boy 
(inst.  of  7X)a/ &*/a//t7>royVc/«.s' em/).  Liv.  :iO.  35.  .      .  .^ 

ie)  If  the  time  after  which  an  event  is  to  happen  refers  to  the  sprakeus  time,   it 
is  expressed  1)  l)y  the  mere  ablative  of  time-measure  without  the  addition  of  the  adverb 
imst  as    Quicquid  est,  lAduo  sciemus,  whatever  it  may  be,  we  shall  know  it  after  (in) 
two  days.  Cic.  Att.  9,  14.— Dixenint.  Ca^sarem  statuisse,  triduo  exeicitiim  dediuvre, 
they  saiti,  Ciesar  had  resolved  to  withdraw  his  army  afteriSw)  three  days.  Ca?s.  B.  G.  7, 
*>0      Sometimes  the  demonstrative  hie  is  added,  the  same  as  in  the  cas»-  «>l  *  «r/«  .      1  he 
relations 'o//er'  and '6^b;t^' can,  in  this  instance,  be  only  distiii«:nished  by  the  tensk 
of  the  predicate,  as :  llanc  nrbem  hoc  biennio  evertes^  thou  wilt  destroy  this  city  m  two 
veu-s    Cic  Rep  (5. 11.—  2)  By  the  prepositicm  2^'^t  (sometimes  ad  =  />o>7)  with  a  cardinal 
or  ordinal :  Ciir  dolCret  si  ha-c  po.<t  tr^ccntos  awios (after  .300  vears)  event  nra  putaret  ?  Cic. 
Tusc.  1.  37.— Stulttis  est  qui  tlet  (juod  /io>:t  amto^i  mille  iion  vivet.  Sen.  Ep.  y'A.—Post  diem 
senthnum  (after  six  davs)  sesc  revcrsQrum  C(Miliriiiat.  C:e~.  U.  (i.  f»,  33.--Cur  doleam  si  ad 
(=  msf)  dt^cem  vdllia  dnndrum  geiitem  aliqtiam  urbe  poiitflram  putem  ?  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  37. 
(/•)  The  CLAUSES  used  alter  the  ablative  of  time-measure  are  irenerally  co.mi'auative 
daii-es  witlwy«a/«.  which  mav  coal,  see  with  the  pn-cedin.^c  adverb  ^xm/ (y>o*"^VW«'"^- 'is 
sexto  anno  msl  quam  hi  (rulliam  reiurat.  live  ye  ir-  aft«'r  he  had  come  to  (Jaul.     Ka'-ely 
such  clauses  are  used  alter  prepositional  ex|)ressioiis  with  jmt,  as  :  Post  dit^m  quinfu/n 
quam  barbari  male  puiinaverant.  Iej,'ilti  a  Boccho  veniunt.  Four  days  after  the  barbarians 
had  lieeii  beaten,  envoys  came  fn  in  Bocchus.  Sail.  Jui;.  102.     Instead  of  comparative 
clauses   time-clause-  with  quum.  and  relative  dau.ses  are  sometimes  used,  when  the  aiX- 
\erb  imt  mu.st  be  always  omitted.     The   relative  adjective,  in  this  instance,  takes  the 
noun  of  the  time-measure  as  an  antecedent,  beini,'  likewise   placed  in  the  ablaive,  as : 
Ditbm  clrciter  quindecim  ^'/i6/A<?  in  hiberna  ventum  est,  initium  tumiiltus  ortiim  est  ab 
Ambiorire,  About  fiftten  days  after  the  occupation  of  winter  quarters,  the  rebellion  was 
inaiif'ura'ted  by  Anibiorix  (literallv  :  the  beu'innin,-,'  of  the  rebellion  aro.se  from  Ambiorix), 
Cies.'li.  G.  5.  21.     Here  quibiis  has  the  forct;  «d'  jxjsf  quo<,  beiiii;  an  ablative  of  time-m.  as- 
nre  iike  its  antecedent.     Clauses  with  quiun  occur  more  rarely  than  n-lative  clauses,  as  : 
Sexto  die  qwuniu\f\.\\n\Q.n  veiitum  est,  maxima  vis  utrium  efl'-cta,  f' ire  days  after  ihey  had 
come  to  the  river,  the  greatest  part  of  the  air-ba-,'s  was  dtuie.  Sail.  Jul'.  !>1,  1.        .      ,  . 

(7)  The  phrases  by'which  the  Eniilish  indetinite  tiine-ineasMre  •  alter  some  time  is 
expressed,  are  very  ruimeroiis.  Aside  from  the  ablatives  ab-olute  (Ijrevi  spafioinftr/nisso 
etc  R  225  obs)  the  followiii!.;  expressions  are  some  of  tlie  most  usual:  haud  (noa) 
m>dto  jx}.<t,  paulo  ))Ost,  jyost  pauio,  post  aliquanto.  post  non  vndfo  (Nei>.),  )>ost  haudvvuto 
Criaut.),iX)s^  neque  ita  muito  (Nep.),  haud  ita  malto  post,  not  very  Jiuich  later  (Liv.  3»,  jS). 


RELATION  OF  TIME. 


233 


(k)  Instead  of  an  ablative  of  time-measnre  with  post,  rarely  an  accusative  of  tixk- 
MEASURE  is  used,  as :  Fnlvius  .-edein  ForttIna\  quam  proconsul  in  Hispama  voverat, 
ONnossexvif^i^Unmm  voverat  dedicavit,  Fnlvius  dedicated  the  temple  otFortnna  which 
he  had  vowed  as  proconsul  in  Spain,  six  years  after  he  had  vowed  it.  Liv.  42,  10._  t.x- 
trenely  scddom  such  an  accusative  is  used  with  ante,  as:  Tndu urn  ante  dedic'fioi.em, 
three  davs  before  the  dedication.  Such  phrases  a^postridie  Idus  Quzntiris.  on  the  mor- 
row after  the  Qtiintilian  Ides,  i.e.  on  the  sixteenth  of  July  (Liv.  (j,  1,  12),  may  be  con- 
sidered as  formed  after  the  analogy  of  dates.  Such  exceptiona  uses  of  accusa  ives 
of  the  time-measure,  in  place  of  the  regular  ablatives,  must  be  well  distinguished  from 
the  HK(a-LAU  accusative  of  time  (R.  1^)  which  may  also  be  used  in  connection  with  ante 
and  p(jst  not  however  for  marking  the  distance  between  two  time-points,  but  to  denote 
that  the  action  continues  ihrou!.di  the  whole  period,  as:  Aliquot  annos  contimios  ante 
ie-em  (iabiniam  i)opulns  Romamis  mairna  parte  imperii  cariiit.  A  number  oj  years  in 
i.-ui'cession  before  the  kv-x^Aw^  of  the)  Gabinian  law,  the  lioman  people  was  without  a 
large  portioii  of  its  possessions.  Cic.  Leg.  Man.  18. 

Obs  4  In  regard  to  the  construction  of  time-measure  with  ordinai-s  in  place  of 
CaUDInai.s,  there  are  two  points  of  difference  from  the  English  to  be  noticed  : 

1  If  tlie  Latin  uses  cardinal  numerals  for  this  purpose,  the  English  and  Latin  idioms 
whJdlv  coincide,  but  they  difler  when  ordinals  are  apidied.  When  an  event  happens  on 
thelir-t  (lay  of  a  month,  and  somebody  performs  an  action  (for  instance  'arrives  )  <mthe 
third  of  the  month,  we  sav  in  Enclish  either  •  he  arrived  two  days  after  the  event  ,  or 
•hearrive.i  on  the  sectnufday  aftrr  the  event'.  But  the  Latin  says  either  6irfwo;x)^^£ 
advt'iiit  (the  same  as  in  English)",  or  terlio  die  ]>ost  advenit  (diflerent  from  the  English). 
'Jhe  I^itin,  when  api)lyiiig  ordinals,  counts  every  day,  including  the  day  of  the  event, 
and  the  day  of  the  subsequent  action.* 

2  Instead  of   'tertio  die  posf  the  Latin  also  says  ;)0.<;/   teriium  diem.    These  two 
expressions  are  accoidim:  to  their  strict  iirammatical  meaning  entirely  different,  the  first 
ap parentlv  indicating  that  something  happened  on  the  third  day,  and  the  latter  denoting 
that  it  happened  after  the  third  dav.     Nevertheless  nothing  is  better  established  in  the 
rules  of  the  Latiiriangtiaire.  than  that  both  fonns  of  expression  have  absolutely  the  same 
meanin"     Alth->n-di  we  cannot,  now.  trace  the  causes  which  have  led  to  this  remark- 
al>le  deviation  from  the  logical  value  of  grammatical  forms,  we  have  to  acknowledge  the 
fact  and  will  find  a  complete  ideiititv  in  the  peculiar  form  for  dates  (§  .'50.  obs.  2,  4), 
\vith  this  form  of  tiine-measure  for  events  happening'  after  a  time.    As  we  use  the  form 
aute  diem  quart um  Calehdas  with  the  meaning  of  die  quarto  ante  Calendas,  in  the  same 
way  we  use  the  form  ])0<f  diem  quart  um  adrenit  with  the  meaninL'  of  die  quarto  adrenit. 
Thus  Livv  says  (30.  21)  that  Hannibal  left  Italv  ' se.vto  decimo  anno'  (post  adventum).  and 
in  another  passaire  (:W,  28)  that  he  left  Italy  ''jmst  sextnm  decimvm  (innvm\    Now  Han- 
nibal arrived  in  Italy  in  the  vear  218  B.C.,  and  left  it  in  the  year  203  B.C.,  i  '^fi.tteen  years 
(or  in  the  fifteenth  ytar)  after  his  arrival.    Thus  ttiduo  {tiibus  dilfnis)  post  (Liv  21,  32)  is 
the  same  as  quarto  die  jK)-<t.  and  both  are  the  same  as  post  quartum  diem.    Qui  btduo 
ant,-  venerat  (Liv.  40,  4()>,  is  the  same  as  tertio  die  ante,  or  ante  diem  terttum.     Hence  the 
follow  in"  rule  must  be  observed    in  renderinir  Latin  ordinals  with   lime  units,  ex- 
pre-siiv'^DisTANrE  in  time  :  Sufjtract  one  v  nit  from,  the  ordinal  number  and  render  either 
by  a  cardinal  or  by  an  ordinal,  both  in  respect  to  'after'  and  in  respect  to  'before  . 

1  Comitia  jam  abhinc  triqinfa  diZbus  habita  sunt.  Cic.  Yerr.  2.  52,  130—  2.  Miilier 
qua-dam  cMlnc  tritnnium  ex  Androi  ctminiigravit^  hue.  Ter.  Andr.  1.  1.  42.— 3.  \  em- 
enti  Fiilvio  Ti.  Semproniiis  prietor,  qui  Ijiduo  ante  venerat.  obviam  processit  Liv.  4U, 
40  —  4  Voverat3eam  ;edein  annis  undecim  ante  L.  /Emilius  ]{egillus  navaii  proelio 
adversus  pnefectos  regis  Antiochi.  lb.  40,  41.— 5.  Caesar  Viennie  equitiltum,  quein 
niultis  ante  diebus  eo  praMnLsorat*.  nactus»  est.  C«'s.  B.  G.  7.  ».—  6.  Socrates  supremo» 
vitic  die  de  immortalitilte  aiiimi  multa  disseruit',  et  paucis  ante  dtebus.  quum«  facile 
Dosset,  edaci»  e  custodiil»"  noluit.  Cic.  Tusc.  l,-<i9.— 7.  Paulo  ante  tertiam  vigiham 
animadversnmii  est  fumSrei^  aggeremia.  Ca^g.  b.  G.  7.24.-  8.  Vidi  etiam  senemi* 
Liviuin»6  qui  cum  sex  annis  ante  quatnt^go  natus  essem,  fabulami»  docuisset,  Centone 


♦The  passa-n)  Cic.  Phil.  1.13,  32:  Pi^oximo,  altera,  tertio,  denique  reliqvu  comecntts 
dit^us  which  seemed  to  i)rove  that  the  ordinals  in  rcirard  to  the  Cimiputation  of  time, 
were  sometimes  used  with  the  same  force  as  in  English,  is  now  read  without  a  comma 
between  jnoJimo  and  alte)v,  proximo  altera  meaning  •  at  the  very  next  day". 

»  NoM  Andros.—  -  to  move  over.—  s  vov^re,  to  vow.—  *  to  send  in  advance.—  »  imn- 
d^ci  to  reach  —  «  last.-  '  mu/fa  di<.^erere  de  aliqua  re,  to  discuss  many  points  pertaining 
to  —  «  althon<^h.—  «  to  be  delivered.—  '»  prison.—  i»  to  notice.—  »2  t<,  ^moke.—  is  the 
rampart.-  i^^as  an  old  man.—  i*  Livius  Andronlcus,  the  dramatic  poet,  is  meant.— 
^^fabulam  doctre,  to  have  one's  own  dramatic  poem  performed. 


234 


ADVERBIAL   RELATIONS. 


.ii.  Ro.nilni  simul  omnos  trms-rcs.i  '"i    f-  1;'^-  M  •   Rriit   91  -  11    1  oc  o-t,  ntiim"  Ivi- 
n„n  modo  rxercitatior^,  m'.I  PPM>e  ^K}tatu^    ^    •  Br^^^^^  CicD      1, :«.- r^!.  ^«(11- 

III  ifei=s.^s£Ei^ 

duo  quani  ha^  dabain  littera^  cxspiH-tilbarn.  Plane.  Cu-.  Kim.  10  ..J,  H. 
72^vyi  14  When  by  the  time-inca^nre  not  the  time  of  another  event, 
but  merely  the  len-th  of  the  period  itself  is  determinecl,  tlie  nouns  de- 
n  in  Ahe  measurelire  placed  in  the  ACcr.ATrvB  Th^s  tune-measure  ,n 
?1  e  ceusative  answers  to  the  question  '  ho,o  hn;/,  the  numerals  detinmi^ 
I  e  measure  bein-  caudinaia  except  in  the  case  mentioned  obs  2,  (./) 
as  •  De  his  insulis  nonnulli  scripsCrunt  die-s  rontinuos  (rif/tnta  sub  brumil 
essenoctem,  Of  these  islands  some  have  written  that  their^n.irht  about 
the  winter-solstice  lasts  thirti/  daifx  in  succession.  Lies.  J.  Lr.  .),  lo. 

iNDHFrN^tTK  time-measure,  in  this  relation,  is  expressed  I)  by  the  nouns 
denotin-  the  measure-units  with  indefinite  caiuhnal  nunieualsI^  ^-u), 
as  Pana>>i  ibi  dies  morati  sunt,  they  staid  there  afco  (liy^.  (.^es.  5  ^-  ;  <  -J- 
_  o)  by  the  time-adverbs  hnqe,  di>t,  and  its  compounds  {qnanuhu.tauidia  , 
aliqnanidlMjanuUa  etc.),  taiifhp-r**,  paulisprr,  parunipnr. 

All  these  forms  are  rendered  either  by  a  mere  objective,  or  by  the 
prepositions  for  or  during  (sometimes  in). 

Obs  1  Thenounf»  bv  which  thelcn-lh  of  poriod^  is  moa-nred  mn-t  b.«  MEx^vnE-vsiji 

r^« !^;   ;«.  ^1^0  ^)    and  must  l)u  accompanit-d  ])y  caud.nal  numerals  (.ntfrropitive, 

S      e  Tind'flnit.    as  attributes.     If  \ho  len-th  of  ,H'rio;ls  Is  cxpn-sscd  ;''  her  by 

H    r  m.nL  ineisure-units  iii^  tetnpii,'^,  pra^lium,  hiem^.v^r.  adolH>iceulm  Qic.)   in  if 

':l        <l^      r  m    ;1   n    inuVii^v^^^^  a^  attributes,  the  reUiti..n  ol  time 

Ti?K      P oriods  thus  oualitied  are  conceived  as  Time-i'uints,  and  are  expressed  either  by 
preposilionrcV^r^^         with  the  ablative),  or  by  the- ablative  or  ri.ME  simple  ,  ncc.rd- 

1  (Ptrite  vrocedere,  to  live  (literally  :  to  advance  in  a-^e).-  «  t()  cross,-  3  stream.-  *  se 

v™  f,.  r^nrii       »  ^xercitare  toexercii»o.—  •  m  radc-  '  to  introduce.—  «  silently.— 

Mo^nvt'r  w  r  17-  ^'Tp^i,  to  land -> '  to  carry.  -  -^  adj.ny.re  <rl  Xo  annex  to    to 

mi  it,  w   h  - '3  '  «d(/.r^,  t'^uit^  "to  take.-  >«the  timber.-  '«t«  aq>mmaddu- 

\    1  .l.'wh       1" V.muUr  est  _  18  Thr  writer  of  a  letter  f reriueiitly  n<e<  an  imperfect,  m 

^hu^e  of  "pr?.;;;.t,  wri'tiik  :-  if  reilortin,  at  the  time  when  the  letter  would  be  read  by 

^''*  The  relative  clause  foUowin-  iamdiu.  which  in  En-li<h  is  introduced  bv  a.«,  be-ins 
in  I/  u  w  Ml  he  c^  relit  i ve  quanidla  (compare  §  ;|.V>.,  or  by  qmnd.  wh.cli.  a<  a  corr.^  - 
t"ve  i^  renlere  bv  av.  More  rarely  it  is  followed  by  a  mere  qmini  or  by  d>  n.-** /^^  ^* 
{l»;rl/^e  e  al  y  fohowed  by  a  clause  with  dunu  which  conjunciioa  is  either  rendered 
by  M  or^by  «^1  li^vin-  in  thiicase  the  force  of  a  relative  clau.se. 


RELATION   OF  TIME. 


235 


inn-  to  R  11  •  as  •  Stippndium  quod  p^r  bdhim  non  tulerint  (or  in  beU-o,  but  not '  beUum  ), 
the  pay' which  thev  did  not  draw  durin-  the  war  Li  v.  33.  72. -/'er  eo.<>dein  dtex  (not 
eo<d^m  diet  withunt  per.  the  ablative  eudt'm  dicbus  beiiii;  likewise  correct)  C.  Claudius 
au^ur  lectus  e>r.  Durbi'/  (in)  tlio^e  days  C.  Claudius  was  elected  aui^ur.  Liv.  33,  44.— Haec 
»-r  hiermm  act*  sunt  (not  hiemem  without,  per),  this  was  done  duriiiir  the  vvinter  Li v. 
:j;^  21 —  rofif  i)ci>to  hodibriA  (not  tofao  nocfUt),  I  am  standing  for  whole  ni«,'ht6.  I'hasdr. 
Fab  Nov  1,  18.  \).—  Tota  mtdtt*  (not  totam  cestdtem)  Nilus  ^.iryptum  obrutam  tenet, 
the  whole  summer  the  Nile  is  holdintr  Eu:ypt  under  water.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  h^.—  'loto  hoc 
prceJio,  duriiiLC  this  whole  battle.  Cses.  B.  G.  1,  16. 

Obs  2  Exceptions  to  thr  rttlf:  tv  obs.  1.  (a)  Sometimes  nouns  denotinf?  seasons  of 
the  dav  or  the  year,  as  jw.v,  (T.^fa^.  hit^rrv^,  and  similar  nouns,  are  used  as  measure-units 
for  deflnin<^  the  length  of  periods,  being  accompanied  by  cardinal  numbers.  Ihey  are, 
in  this  instance,  jdaced  in  the  accusative,  the  same  as  the  regular  measure-units,  as: 
Urbs  Veil  decern  cB-^tiltes  hiemfif^qne  continual  circumsessa  est,  the  city  of  V  eji  was  i)e- 
sie  'od  d'irinq  ten  ftuminer.<t  and  winters  in  succt  ssion.  Liv.  5,  22.  Here  mtat^s  humesque 
has'the  force  of  annox.  indicating  that  the  siege  was  not  interrupted  in  the  winter,  a  lact 
quite  unusual  in  those  times  —(/>)  Frequently  the  numeral  vnvs  is  omitted,  the  same  as 
in  Kn'Mish  where  it  is  olten  replaced  by  the  indefinite  article,  as  :  C.  Sempronium  cum 
n^/.s'  annum  ie«'er  fuisset,  mortuum  esse,  that  C.  Sempronius,  after  he  had  been  sick/or 
more  than  a  year,  had  died.  Liv.  40,  2.-(c)  Indefinite  cardinals  are  understood  in  the 
frequent  phrase  <lifi!inoctliique  (sometimes  in  the  singular  diem  noctemque).  day  and  night, 
in-t  of  mulfofi  d'l^s  noctl^qite.  indicating  the  uninterrupted  continuance  of  the  action 
durinn-  an  indefinite  number  of  days,  as  :  Vagabatur  dies  nortV^que,  he  roamed  about  day 
and  riijhf  Liv  27  31.  Aside  from  this  phrase,  cardinal  numbers  cannot  be  omitted.  1  h e 
i:no-li*h  phrases  'for  vears', '  for  m<mths'  etc.  cmnot  be  expressed  by  '  an/ios'  or  *  men  sis  , 
but"'bv  ^jwdtos.  anqiiot  per  an.nos\—(d)  Ordinal  numerals  are  used  for  the  measure  of 
time  periods  to  de.^^imate  a  period  which  has  lasted  up  to  the  time  spoken  of.  In  this 
instance  (»nlv  the  hist  term  of  the  period  is  mentioned,  being  placed  in  the  accusa- 
tive and  havin^  an  oudixal  as  attribute.  The  predicate,  in  this  connection,  is  either 
in  tiie  pisKsEvr"(in  place  of  the  English  present-perfect),  or  in  the  impkkfect,  in  place 
of  the  Enirlish  pluperfects  as  :  ...  .  •»,..,    -j  *       i^. 

Mithridates  ab  illo  tc^mpore  annvmjam  tertvim  et  vigesimnm  regnat,  Mithndates  ha^ 
f)fien  rc\^n\n<-  (a\n':n\v)  for  tioeidi/-fhreeyear.^  from  that  time.  Cic.  Leg.  Man.  S.— Pesti- 
lentia  jam  f^rtinrn  dnn'trnmhom  Romanam  atque  Italiani  va^tabat,  A  pestilence  had 
been  desolating  the  city  of  Home  and  Italy  (already)/©/'  three  years.  Liv.  40,  36. 
Ons  3    The  measure  of  the  length  of  time  cannot  be  expressed  by  the  accusative,  un- 
less the  oovKUNiNO  VEKB  itself  designates  the  action  whose  duration  is  measured,  and 
uniess  this  action  is  going  on  uninterruptedly  during  the  whole  period.  From  this  prin- 
ciple the  followinir  rules  sire  derived  :  ,.,,.,.         ^  i.  «i,^ 
(a)  When  the  time-measure  refers  to  actions  which  by  their  nature  cannot  occupy  the 
whole  time,  but  must  cease  at  some  part  of  the  time,  and  then  be  taken  up  again,  the 
time  is  expres-^ed  bv  the  preposition  jyer.  or  in,  or  by  an  ablative,  rarely  by  the  ac- 
cusative, as  :  His  di^ceptationibus  per  dies  aliquot  (not  the  mere  accusative  dic-i  aliqvot) 
habitis.  these  discussions  having  been  continued  for  sevral  days.  Liv.  3^},  41.--Ludi 
per  bidun?n  instaunlti    sunt,  iramcs  were  performed  for  two  days,  Liv.  32.  42.    So  es- 
pecially in  ne"-ative  sentences  :  Proviiicia  sex  7ne?hnf)us  hnpern  nullas  meas  acceperat 
iitteras  the  province  had  received  dnrinq  six  fnonfhs  of  my  government  no  orders  of 
mine    Cic   Att  .5  21,  7.    In  all  sentences  of  this  kind  the  predicate  as  such  has  no  dura- 
tion 'at  all,  and,' if  expressed  affirmatively  the  action  of  'receiving' would  only  be  a 
momentary  one.     Hence  the  accusative  sex  rnens'is  would  be  impropert.     If  the  penods 
durin"  which  actions  thus  qualified  have  happened,  are  represented  as  lasting  up  to  the 
speakek's  time,  the  ablative  is  likewise  us'd,  but  with  the  addition  of  'his  ,  as:    Cui 
Hqinfih'vianyns  supplicatio  decretaest,  ut  non  imperatorappellaretur?    For  whom  has  a 
supplication  been  decreed  ocithin  the  last  twenty  years  without,  calling  him  '  imperator   ? 
Cic   Piiil   14,  4.— On  the  other  hand,  such  actions  which  are  lasting  by  their  nature,  as    to 
rei-'u', '  to  stav\  '  to  be\  '  to  live',  require  the  measure  of  the  r  durati<m  to  be  in  the  accu- 
sative. Later  writers  use  even  for  such  actiims  indiscriminately  the  accus:itive  or  ablative, 

*  Madvi'^  considers  the  ablative  in  this  passage  a  rare  exception,  requiring  the  accn- 
sative,  thi.-"" being  the  leirular  form.  He  evidentlv  mistook  the  relation  expressed  in  this 
l)assaLre.  The  accusative  would  be  improper,  and"  an  example'  of  such  an  accusative  could 
hardlv  be  produced  from  any  classical  prose-writer.  .    .,.  • 

t  Livy  (40,  '29)  says  :  Sex  men hs  nuniquam  pluvis*e  memorire  traditum  est,  it  is  re- 
])orted  that  it  had  liever  rained  during  six  months.  This  accusative  (instead  of  sex  mfn- 
sib'is.  or  per  sex  menjTis)  is  harsh.  Tlie  sentence,  according  to  correct  grammar,  would 
have  to  be  rendon-d  :  It  lias  never  ])oen  reported  that  it  had  (at  any  time)  rained  for  siJC 
months  in  succession.    But  this  idea  Livy  did  not  mean  to  convey. 


236 


ADVERBIAL  RELATIONS. 


more  acciisuuve  won  cl   De  iiic  rei:iuar  luini.      inx-  "..■— ■-•   '--;,„,.,.•  .,.-f  ,:„^f^ 

ivvwith  Iho  same   preilicato  cimiloys  th..  pr.-p.i-.tion  per:   '■■'<''' ■\!'''^, /"',..7,''  "„ 
:'(^\:i'/. "he  U.-P,  mmlel.r  r.,r  «,v;.™l  .lay.  in  ,h.  .^'anonary  cam  .  I- - -f,- 3;-       '-  ;■- 


a  mere  accusutive  would  be  the  reirular  form     1  lui-»  «hile  C.iMr  <_»^_;.';,;,:|".  ^;",;^_ 
pent 

Thirnbhtive  musr  be  concMved  as  an  ablative  of  mkan-;.  as:  C:e<ir  ({''^>'':.^Jj':^^^^^^^ 

fe''?;;:T;;r,«'on\'™;m:\iu:i..^-  "hc'ui^^^^^  ''iic^e'ti.e  „,„,..,...•  or  ca,„,.»  ..."Ked  m.. 

number  of  days  on  a  march.  ..,••»      41,« 

Or.  4    If  the  ti.ne  is  mea-nred  bv  definite  numerals,  bur  withm  rer  a.n    >'"'t-        e 

mEmmmmwm 

w  .  1(      v  to  be  no  lonner  than  three  d  n,s  absent  Ir.Mu  th.»  camp.  Ca-.  li.  Cc  .,  9.  bet  thu 
Ex   ill  ons  -2  0).     A  similar  force  h  is  the  i.repo<ili<)n  tnfm.  See  OBS.  b. 

V^„u  r  ThP  .irrp  of  men  is  crenerallv  express.-d  bv  the  accusative  d.-pendent  on  7mf'/s 
(iL^Z  i)  it  n  ?v  also  be  evfr."S  by  a'puKOKATK-oKNiriVK  (with;  uimi'us),ov  by  an 
i?-c  -Hive  iit  1ui  or  i  ml  dc^.^ndent  on  ar,.re,  as  :  Krat  tnm  rf.nndecini  fere  annonmi  h^ 
accns.iino  \Niin!  n  o  .M    «        1  ^     i  un- n>ihi'>ini  ef  (hrhnuin  eqit  unnHin).     Mold, 

was  then  just  «'/^"  \,V,;  bu  i  el      t  i<  expn'-'cl  bv  a  p:.rticipial  cii^trnctio.., cither  by 

S  312,  K.  15  are  emuloyed.  . 

tn/m.  both  Mttjcr  will  uiru  ordered  Aulus  to  leave  Numidia  within  ten  day^. 

prec^d"u  l,y  .m'accntiveor  tiin.-.  an.l  r„llo-,y..d  by  nc,,,npa,auve  clause, as  :  lr«.n,uu,n 


tf  «(?a;  7ne/i*w  w/^m  qmni  licet,  ceii:^Qram  geram.  Li\.  J,  di. 


RELATION  OF  TIME. 


237 


S   J;  C  >I  eni      diculToV  dictattlra  se  ab.lieavit,  in  modern  t^me.  wUMa  ten  years  ,from 
m  "  )  the  dictator  C.  Mu^uius  resi-ned  hi.  dictatorship.  Li v.  9,  34. 

nn^  -    Tf  mei«ured  periods  are  made  the  attributes  of  nouns,  they  are  generally 
«i?n  ^i  in  t LTfv  TiVK ^i<  0  ?;i7'/^  et  quadraqmta  diernm  cibana.  proy.sions/ar  4o  days 
?K   S/V!     R\a    ^the    oun    o^  the  time-mea.snre  properly  beloniis  is  connected 

9»m,(/-d;/i.-W>/?V''«odecr5taest,athanks2,yingf..rlod^^^^ 

(duri..<Mhree  days)  accordin-  to  the  decree  of  the  decemvirs.  Liv.  3n,  4i. 

1    Attains  mortnus  est  altcro  et  septuacresimo  anno  cum  quaf'wr  et  Ql'^'^ragintaanMS 
..rJ    t    T  iv  'V   "l  -  2   Seiniocum  qxndraqinhl  </ie>- obsedisset  t  iicam,  absce^sit» 

j;J,;.'i'rsoi:'n,^3:5%L-.5;'c-a.sariW,..,U 

S     «IVcs  nl'Vr,  I.!n  m..rll.,.r.  mV.-nas  H.Mto  timor  o„M,c,n  CXCTC.  i.m  "cc    fy  t'»^ 

inccplS  re  '  discedereut   (  ,^^  B.  (..  .,   J.  p,f„^   '    \P^J„  ;,5-e„„i,.,.m*  est,  in  quihas 
n,„io«  ol,Iiniierai><.  Ca>s    B^O.  '•  ,Vn  le^Vnin  nr  iiViDe  1  i.in- a>'a'is  pliilepopliOnim, 

dumneirotuimconfectnm  Mt.  Ck.  *';V'^- Vn^  ^     \i\utvrm'v"-^  annum  ui^^  paren- 
paun^per  in.>M-mitteren.-  pro.  inm   C^es   B.  f^^^.-^J^X^^^^^^^^^  ^  op- 

vnrlo  ed,yuM.n      in  i,uM^.uhH^ 

J5;^9  '  l~Tribun  'c^W  n.»bilitf\rem-^  fraude  eorum  freri^»  ut  Hannibal  d^ct- 
J^ ;.  M;;m  «;.';;;;XlianM.n;iincia,n3o  habeaV.  Ih.  ^V'^n  f  """^"/^"^S'SJo^ 
Viare^am  /.Wi.m  ^/^.m  i;;,vW.cuhs^teneie.ivr  >n>^S  -^1  ;^3^1^.^^^^?^f,g5 
h.stue^»  "'"J''''^*"'  •*'     vr  ,;„,V,  nfmn  e-t    11     :i'l  4-  21.  M.  Fulvins  novemcfiale  sa- 

Si;;33;:;^i;;i?  i^;;/;»  i^c^i/;;- ^;:^/;y.;.,?iapi.iib,ts  pmerat.  m.  3|n2^-  ^  Nimtm. 

;;;i  'del  feclr^e?  lb.  1,  13.-  2G.  Philippus  montem  Ha^mum  gua^o  trtduo  a.cenderat, 

"^  -.11      ,       "oio   nv>«    the  same  a«  re  ^"/V-r/a.— '  a"0?5re7W  ^.«»"^  with  an  infinitive 

I  to  withdraw.-  -  abl.  abs    ; J^  same  a    re  j  y' m<^  _  ^  ^^  causa.- 

f„;«rfi.<  ,««,«*"  as  1     2  »;•   „,„i,"  aJlJo,  ,,5,  force  of  a  Bcnitiye  of  a  noun  (prO!7W«w) 
l.redR-ate  f  ■'"'•'"/|, .*""'''  "  r/IJ,  _  18  ,o  keep  concealed,  ciipplynoSfe.-  "  to  nolily  : 

for  ,omel>n,ly  '"'•''r!"" '^Vj''; '  ?i-p^' .'^'I'^jr  fo^    as  a  province.-  "  larger  vMim.^, 

Z^  ^".r-TnVrcnZ'i'Ura  'X/^L;^'.'- '"\„''',^;"rare.-  »"  J,,  t„e  greatest  dim- 
culty.—  •»"  by  the  hame  way  where. 


238 


RELATIONS   OF   MODALITY. 


Mdf/o  C'st  dc^ressup^  Liv.  40,  22.—  27.  Ilasdrubal  cum  ceteris  copiiH  f:epfuagesimis 
autns  Tarr.cOiuMii  rediit.  lb.  28,  1»}.—  28.  Ciesar  ex  po  loco  qtiintb^  caslns  Gcriroviatn 
pci-vCnir.  C'i«a.  B.  G.  7,  *;.— 2«».  Latera  rejiis  duo  filii  juvciu-h'J  ciiii:Cl>am3  [  ers.-us 
jam  tncmnwm  annum  afitm,  Dcni.trius  qwnqiiemnoiniiior.  Liv.  40,  ♦»•—  -w^  foreman' 
nonnn  a  vobis  prulVctus,  po^t  ncxtum  et  Trice.<imum  annum  redii.  Ih.  30,  .j..—  -ii.  rsoii 
die  iioti  Aon7  o/i//.s*  (luam  noce-s^e  est  mai.M>ti:ltu  abirris*,  modo  nc«  excCdas^  luil- 
tum«  ti-mpus  lb.  9,  :^i.— 32.  (Iiaccbus  centum  tria  oppida  intia  pnucos  dm  m  dedi- 
tiOnem  accepit.  lb.  40,  40.—  3:5.  Ob  res  prosprre  ^'e^ias  a  i)afnbus  ?«  dte.^  qiixnqm  pup- 
phcHtinnes^  (iecrCtte  sunt.  lb. :«,  24.-34.  Ilortim  prodi-iOrum"-»  causjl  dx^^m  vi.nm 
supplicatio  tuit.  lb.  27,  2.3.—  3.-).  Addita  vmmi  diem  supplicatio  est  (>x  d.-crCto  pontiti- 
cunj.  U>.  30,  22.—  3»».  Verriniretorix  nuntiat,se  exiLruc'"  dlTrum  XXX  habere  Irumen- 
lum,  t«eci  paulo  eliam  longing  tolenliiii  po?be  parcendoi'-.  lb.  7,  71. 

IV.  KELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 
A.  Kel.vtiox  op  Manner. 
g  551.  Tlie  relations  of  modality  comprise  all  those  accompanyins 
circumstances  of  an  action  which  neither  refer  to  place,  nor  to  time. 
They  are  distinguished  as  the  relation  of  manner  (in  a  narrower  sense), 
of  COINCIDENT  ACTION,  of  QUANTITY,  and  of  CAUSE.  Th<?  grammatical 
forms  which  the  language  uses  for  the  relation  of  manner,  aside  from 
the  prepositions  and  clauses  of  manner,  arc  1)  the  adverbs  of  manner; 
2)  the  ablative  case  of  attributive  phrases,  and  in  certain  instances 

the  ablative  of  NOUNS  without  attributes. 

Obs  The  relation  of  mod.m.ity  cannot  be  otherwi-sc  defined  than  ncL^atively.  The 
gpeciai  relations  beloiminii  to  it  pa>-i*  over  into  each  oth<'r,  and  it  is  imposMblo  to  deter- 
mine distinctly  their  limits,  many  lorms  which  we  will  have  to  consider  haviu','  th.'  na- 
ture of  several  of  these  relations.  Thus  the  adverbs /oW/^i/o,  f/rafmto  (,-rrat^lltously^ 
fal<0  mfrito  (deservedly^,  may  be  considered  eilht-r  as  adverbs  of  cause,  or  as  adverbs  of 
manlier  •  the  adverbs  x,dulo,  rcdicilus,  ixmtiis  (th-.ronirhly),  and  all  the  a<!verbs  of  com- 
paratives and  sup(  rlatives  may  be  consul,  red  eiiher  as  adverbs  of  maun. t,  or  as  adv.-rhs 
of  qnantitv  (intensity).  The  relation  of  rnicE  anil  vai.ve,  f -r  whuh  lan<;uaf;e  lias  («>tab- 
li«hed  specitlc  adverbial  forms,  is  a  complicated  relation,  which  may  be  considered  as 
one  of  manner,  or  of  cause,  or  of  quantity.  It  refers  to  the  MANNKitof  an  action  when  we 
Pimply  consider  the  nature  of  the  tran-action,  lor  instance,  when  the  qiie>tion  arises 
whether  somethim:  has  been  taken  as  a  <:ift  or  tor  a  consideration.  It  may  be  considered 
as  a  relation  of  cai'sk  wlien  we  'conceive  the  idea  of  value  as  the  uki'kkskntativk  ol  a 
thin"-  The  iud-'c  for  instance  awards  namai^'es  Itecause  the  loss  is  ol  su(  h  a  value  ;  I  irive 
a  prfce  for  somethin-,'  on  arcvvnt  of  its  value.  The  same  relation  is  one  of  quauiity  il  wc 
measure  the  value,  comparin.:,'  it  with  other  values. 

§  552.  The  adverbs  of  manner  are  formed  1)  from  descriptive  adjec- 
tives (see  i^i^  68.  21&.  220),  as  diligcnterjucunde  ;  2)  from  form-adjectives,  as 
ita  (from  the  root  of  /«),  nti  (from  the  root  of  qy(ix),  alitcr.  These  are  called 
modal  form-adverbs  ;  o)  from  particii)les,  as  amanter,  secreto,  prkathn  ; 
4)  from  nouns,  either  by  iutlection,  as  forte,  partini,  or  by  composition,  as 
quomodo,  obiter  ;  5)  from  prepositions,  as  iiltro,  of  one's  own  accord. 

Obs  1  The  adverbs  of  manner  formed  from  descriptive  adjectives  are  of  a  twofold 
character  They  must  be  either  conceived  as  ad.iectivk  attuibi  tks  o\  substantive  ideas 
implied  in  the  verb  on  which  they  depend,  or  they  denote  independent  actions  ol  the 

Mo  make  the  descent.— =  his  two  younu'  sons  (subject).—  3  to  s -rround.  Transl.  : 
On  both  sides  of  the  kini;  went  etc.—  ••  sooner.—  »  Perfect  subjunctive,  with  the  force 
of  '  you  may',  '  1  have  no  objection,  if  you'  etc.  Magl^tratu  ah'ive,  to  resij^n  an  othee.— 
•  pr«)vided  vou  do  not,  so  lon^'  as  you  do  not.—  '  to  exceed,  to  stay  beyond.—   »  J)re. 

scribed.—  »  i)rodigy. >"  scantily. —  ^^  impersonal  passive predicate-influitive  :  ihathis 

army  might  get  alung.—  i-  by  cloic  management. 


RELATION   OF  MANNER. 


239 


I 


Bubjoct  which  for  the  sake  of  brevity,  are  combined  with  the  predicate  in  the  form  of 
an  adverb.    In'  this  case  the  adverbs  have  the  nature  of  predicative  adjectivks.    Thus 
jua/ndfirirerelvds  the  force  of  ritam  jiicvndar,t  agere ;  leviferpunlre  means  lev^m  jm- 
nam   iriomre.    Nrfiotii'in  ntgligenter  conjicere  n.eans  negligentem  esse  in  conjicvndo 
neqotio  '  hoc  facilliwe  dintur  ='hoc  dicere  facillimum  est.    Sometimes  the  Latin  lan- 
L'ua"e  u«e<  adverbs  in  the  last  mentioned  sense  where  we  make  use  of  different  expres- 
sion's in  En-lish,  as  Male,  hercule,  narras!  indeed  you  are  ic rang  to  mention  this.  Cic. 
Titsc   1  f»  —  Hcec  et  dicuntvr  et  credtmtur  stutiisdme.  it  is  most  foolish  to  say  and  be- 
lieve these  things.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  28.-  Utrum  impudentim  Veries  lias  res  populo  Romilno 
adiMiiir  an  audacins  tabulas  commiitavit  V  Was  it  more  ifnjrudent  in  Verres  to  steal  these 
things  from  the  Roman  people,  or  more  hold  to  forge  the  entry  ?  Cic.  Verr.  8,  o6.  Ex.  1,  2. 
Obs.  2.  Aside  from  this  instance  the  idioms  of  both  lanirua^es  are  often  difierent  in 
tlie  ii«e  of  adverbial  expressions  of  manner.     Often   the  «me  language  makes  tise  of 
the  form  of  a  descriptive  or  form-adverb,  while  the  other  language  uses  adjectives,  or 
adverbial  expressions  not  having  th«!  form  of  an  adverb,  as  Siccine  est  sententia?  Is  this 
(literallv  thus)   thv  <»i)inion  ?  Ter.  lleaut.  1,  1,—  Se  ita  a  majoribus  suis  didicisse,  ut 
ma<ds  virti'ite  quam  dolo  contenderent,  they  had  learned  this  rule  from  their  ancestors, 
to  ii<'lit  the  enemy  rather  by  valor  than  by  deception.  Cres.  B.  G.  1, 13.     Absolute  form- 
}i(iiective<   which,  in  Eiigli>"h,  are  used  as  factitive  predicates  of  verbs  of  calling  (p.  102, 
Ji)  take  ill  Latin,  the  form  of  a'/iw66' of  manner;  as:  irA«/ is  this  called  ?  Q'iomodo(\\ot 
quid)  hoc  dicitur?  as:  Tria  sunt  genera,  quid  fiat,  aut  quale  sit,  aut  quomodo  nominefur 
(r;-ferrin"-  to  the  question  '  what  it  is  called  \—i.  e.  what  name  is  applied  to  it).  Cic.  Or. 
2.  It).— Sev.ral  Kuuli-h  adjectives  form  leirular  adverbs,  while  their  Latin  equivalents 
do  not  admit  of  acfverbial  lorms.    Thus  the  adjectives  imnuMlis,  immenmx,  injlexlbilis. 
iuei-tnis  incolu/nis.  ingens.  ^/.orwjwf  I'tlie  adverb  enormiter  being  only  used  by  late  writers), 
and  many  others,  do  not  form  adverbs  in  Latin,  while  from  their  English  equivalents 
re"iilaradv(rl)sare  formed.   On  the  other  hand,  Latin  adverbs  must  frequently  be  rendered 
bv~i)repositional  or  other  adverbial  expressions,  if  English   analo^rous  adverhs  do  not 
exist,  as  impiine,  with  impunity  ;  cegerrime,  with  the  greatest  difficulty  ;  tici-^sim,  in  turn  ; 
perinde,  in  the  same  manner,  and  liiany  others. 

Obs.  3.  To  the  descriptive  adverbs  formed  in  o  which  are  enumerated  §  f;9.  the  following 
shouid  be  added :  arcdno,  secretly  ;  aMUvlto.  deliberately  :  direcfo,  directly  ;  grafuifo, 
gratuitously  ;  improvl^o,  unforeseen  ;  inopindto,  unexpectedly  :  liqnido,  clearly  ;  merito^ 
deservedly  •  optdfo,  according  to  one's  wishes  ;  precario,  on  suflerance  ;  partiano,  on 
shares;  fesfdfo  and  infestdfo.  with,  and  without  a  testament.  Here  belong  the  impersoual 
ablatives  absolute  mentioned  §  5:iG,  R.  234. 

Jieni.  15.  The  ^Modal   Fokm-advebbs  are  formed  from    the  roots  ot 
the  determinative  form-adjectives,  similarly  to  the  locative  form-adverbs 
(i-  548,  K.  4),  almost  all  corresponding  to  the  first  locative  case. 
'  1.  To  the  interroirative  and  relative  forms  (root  c?()  beloniz; : 

the  adverbs  nti  or  ut  (inst.  of  cnti),  how;  q>n,  how  ;  vtut  (corresponding to g-wi^^-Mi^), 

and  utcunqiie  (coi  responding  to  quicunque),  how^oever. 

2.  To  the  definite  tbnn  beloiii^ 

ftic*.  thus,  so  (corresponding  to  hir) ;  ita,  thus,  so  (from  the  root  i  of  is) ;  itideJJi  and 
Us  abbreviated  form  item  (rr«)in  idem),  in  the  tame  manner,  likewise. 

3.  To  the  indefiiiile  Ibrm  belong; 

vtique  (corresponding  to  qnixque),  by  all  means,  anyhow;  the  negatives  nfvft^-wa/n 
(inst    of  )ie->ftiq>/((m).  iwd  its  synonym  ?iequdquam.  m  no  way,  in  no  manner,  in 
no  resj)ect ;  /lequirquam  (also  written  oequidquar/i  or  nequ'iquam).  in  vain  (all  cor- 
responding to  qui'tquam) :  aliOqui  or  alioquin,  in  other  respects,  else  (from  alius  and 
Quis).  andT//i/«y,  otherwise,  in  a  diflerent  manner. 
r??"  Of  these  adverbs  only  qui.  sic,  and  ita,  besides  some  of  the  indefinites,  are  in 
general  use.     In  i)lace  of  the   others,  compounds  or   phrases  with  modo  are  generally 
einploxed      Such  j)hiases  mwf  be  used  in  place  of  the  wanting  modal  adverbs  of  ali- 
Qui-t  quidam  and  ullu^\  as  a'iquo  imtdo  or  quodammodo.  in  some  manner,  uUo  modo  and 
Kuilo  modo.  in  some  way,  in  no  way,  the  latter  of  wliich  is  more  usual  than,  aud  slightly 
difierent  from,  nequdquam. 
Ob*   1    The  re'-ular  modal  form-adverb  of  the  iNTEttnoGATivE  and  relative  form  (root 
.  ai)  is  uti  or  (more  usually)  ut.    But  in  this  meaning  ut  is  never  (in  prose)  used  in  directt 

*  Sic  (instemiof^'i-tvT probably  is  identical  with  tiie  conjuiiciioii  .si,  both  belonging 
to  an  ancient  deuionsirative  root  sa,  which  occurs  in  cognate  languages.  Some  c<m- 
sider  the  a-  in  sic  as  a  euphonic  change  from  /i  in  flic  (as  ef  and  sex).—  t  It  frequently 
thus  occurs  in  interrogative  clauses:  In  vulgus  elatum  e?t,  «/  ea  res  colloqumm  dire- 
misset  {liow  this  had  broken  up  the  conference).  Cks.  B.  G.  1,46. 


240 


RELATIONS   OF   MODALITY. 


intPrvn<Tntion«.     It  occiir^  liowcver,  a»  the  regular  form  (rarely  replaced  by  qrtomodo\  in 

tlZa      n\n\u^^^^^^^  of  this  kind,  frequently  m.xiifles  a  pr.'v.ous  ir^'nen^l^um- 

?St   relict  nit.   s.nne  pn.portic.nal  standard,  and  is  variously  rendered  ^^y/^^'^'f 

non^i^Jnc^.  he  also  lu/d  great  lit.-rary  knowled,'e/r>r  a  Ilornan.  C,e  fc>en.  4    Ex.  5.  6. 
rw-  9    Tho  Fnrrii^h  '/iO«''   in  interro-'ative  sentence-,  both  independent  and  depend- 


■  «  » '/inml-./  «0»  »»■«-;.-(«./.  i..-..ii;i  "ot  fmci  .m,  how  »;.>"',■;  j'.i'v;;;;;,!,^; ;' ;».  '^v,  „ 

r  P  Vli  17  Thu>i  Ire.  uenllv  r/'/7  /?r  ..coirs  with  a  following  at.  as  Qmnt  Maccmis, 
J/  /<.^  ro;  ;;i/JJ  im  ^^  .  v^loes  it  happ.«u.  ( )  Maecenas,  t hat  lu.hody  lives  con  .■nt- 
.";llv  .^""iT  r  Sa  1  1  V>^^^^  and  g>:,madnm>l>on.\\n'  sanie  as  y^^  .-m.  also  used 
rr^V^tivPa  vVrhiVith;^^^^^^^^ 

freouentlv  the  phrase  (i>fo  parfo  is  usc-d  (a  favorite  expression  of  Cicero).  a>  .  '^^'Y.m.nt  v 
3  ^Si  ioc  V/   I  do  not  kn.)W  how  this  always  h;.i)pens    Cic   Mur.  '21.     *  re qm  n    y 

SpF# ':e^3Sf  SSSS,  :i^  i'^ 

manner  so  ever  one  may  have  been  killed  .'  L  ic.  3iii.  d.  ,       ,  . 

Or^    q    9;V  !ind  i/a  are  so  distinguished  tliat  4c  is  more  generallv  emp  oyed  in  a  com- 

air  ;::SS=;;z:2 :«"5|S^       Bx 

ii  cannot  be  made  out  in  what  direct  icm^  flowing.  Cie^.  H.  i..  1,  U.-Ita  ^pLroqumLm, 
—*-n::^;;;^7^^7;r\T7irtvn  written  'mWo  separate  words,  other  words  being  frequei:tly  In- 
serte^r!wS3i  the  twoTart^  This  is  aLavs  the  case  in  interrogative  sentences  when 
it  is  strengthened  by  /,«m   as: ^  •  ^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^.^^  ^^^^  „f  ^,,,^ 

A  ^  ^^'  'a  ^if^r^hi  id  declcMSon  The  tudent  will  have  noticed  that  the  cases  of  tli  s 
u"e  oflSn  for  ule  fomilline  V.acum,  and  for  the  plural  quWr^^cum.  is  non-clas.icaU 


RELATION  OF  MANNER. 


241 


to  \  hope,  Ter.  Andr.  1,5,  as.— In  tertio  de  OratOre  Ua  pcriptum  est  (a  passage  of  Cicero 
bein<'  quoted  after  these  words),  in  the  third  book  '  On  the  Orator'  Vie  foUaicing passage 
oecurs  (literally  '  it  is  written').  Quint.  9,  1,  25.  But  this  distinction  is  often  disregardcid. 
sic  bein"  used  in  place  of  ita,  and  vice  versa.  Peculiar  is  the  idiom  by  winch  Ua 
(not  sic)"followed  by  lit  (that)  is  used  with  a  concessive  and  adversative  force,  equivalent 
to  '  but  so  t/iat',  as  If  a  friitmpharunt  ut,  they  triumphed,  but  so  that.  Hcec  ita  prceteredmus 
ut  tat/iefi  intuf.ntts  relinquamus,  let  us  pass  this,  but  so  that  we  (as  to)  keep  itin  our  view 
(literally :  let  us  so  pasj»  this  that  we,  however,  leave  it  behind  looking  at  it).  Cic.  Sest 
5.— In  iiitcrrogative  sentences  both  ita  and  eicare  generally  placed  tirst,  taking  the  enclitic 
Tie.  hie  being  chanired  into  siccine,  as  Ita/ie  cerises,  do  you  think  so  ?  Cic.  Div.  2.  '^"i.—Siccim 
t  ii' homiiy-m  optime  de  repitUicd  merit  urn  in  discrimen  rocavisti  ?  Didst  thou  thus  place  in 
jeopardv  a  man  of  the  gi-eatest  merits  for  the  republic?  Cic.  Flacc.  33. 

Tain  jind  adeo,  both  meaning  so  (not  '  thm')  are  quantitative  adverbs  (see  R.30,  obs.  4). 
and  cannot  be  used  as  adverbs  of  manner  in  any  of  the  mentioned  sentences;  but  tfa 
(rarely  .s-ic)  before  adjectives  and  verbs,  is  sometimes  used  with  quantitative  force,  as  Ita 
sum  ajffiictus  ut  nemo  vmqimm,  I  am  so  much  afflicted  as  no  one  ever  was.  Cic.  Att.  2, 12. 

Ons.  4.  To  sic  and  ita  corresponds  the  adjective  talis,  such,  of  that  kind  (inst.  of 
itrUis),  for  which  the  attributive  genitive  phrase  ejus  imdi  (irenerally  written  in  one 
word  ejusnwdi)  is  frequently  used.  Ejusmodi.  if  used  predicatively,  has  the  force  of  a 
predicate--'enitive.  Xomen  legdti  efusmodi  esse  debet  ?/^  the  name  of  an  ambassador 
should  be'of  such  a  kind  that.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  33.—  Genus  hoc  ^usnwdi  judicidrum, 
this  class  of  courts  of  that  kind.  lb.  60. 

Ob^  5  TfeniHml  ifidem  arc  generally  used  in  the  meaning  'likewise',  assigning  the 
same  «m/ica/^  to  another  svb/ect  or  object,  as:  Est  igitur  vis  virtatis  duplex...;  tempe- 
rantia  autem  itidem  distribflta  est  duObus  modis.  The  power  of  virtue  is  twofold...;  but 
temperance  is  likewise  distinguished  in  a  double  way,  Cic,  Part.  20,  76,  77.—  Litter*  mit- 
tiintur  isti  a  patre  vehementes,ab  amicis  item.  Vehement  letters  are  sent  to  him  by  his 
father  and likewl-^e  by  his  friends.  Cic.  Verr.  6, 19.-Elcirantly,  non  item  is  employed  in  the 
la<t  of  two  adversative  sentences  having  the  same  predicate,when  the  last  sentence  is  neg- 
ative Non  item,  in  this  instance,  is  translated  'but  not\  occupying  the  last  place  :  O  specta- 
culum  uni  Crasso  jucundum,  ceteris  non  item,  O  for  the  sight  pleasant  to  Crassus  alone, 
but  not  for  the  others!  Cic.  Att.  2,21.  Torender  the  English 'in  the  same  manner '  either 
item,  (itidem)  is  used,  or  the  phrase  eddem  modo  (e^dem  ratidne),  or  the  adverb  perinde  (also 
nroiiide)  This  advi-rb  has  the  peculiarity  that  it  is  also  used  with  adjective  force  (perinde 
est  or  mnnde  valet,  '  it  is  the  same  tliint.'').  Ariovistus  respondct,  jus  esse  belli,  ut  qui 
vicissent  eis  quos  vicissent,  quemadmodum  vellent,  imper3rent ;  item  populum  Iloma- 
num  victis  ad  suum  arbitrium  imperare  consuesse,  Ariovistus  answered,  it  was  the  law 
of  war  that  the  conqueror  should  treat  the  conquered  as  he  wished  ;  in  the  same  manner 
the  ]{oman  people  was  accustomed  to  treat  the  conquered  according  to  its  pleasure. 
C'e>^  B  G  1  :W  —  Perinde  uxor  instituta  fiierat.  libt-rlqiic  instituebantur,  in  the  sams 
wai/h\»  wife  had  been  brou<rht  up.  and  (so)  his  children  were  being  brought  up.  Liv.  3, 
44  o  Ptrinde  is  especially  frequent  with  a  following  comparative  clause,  connected  by 
vr  ar,  ataue,  quam  (as),  or  by  quasi,  ac  si  (as  if),  being  often  rendered  by  just,  just  so, 
ii<  Perinde  ut  culque  data  sunt,  in  the  same  manner  (pn.porti.m),  as  it  has  been  given  to 
each,  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  39.  Per'inde  quasi  exitus  rernin  legibus  vindicentur,  jt^i  so  as  if  the 
issues  of  things  were  punished  by  the  laws.  Cic,  Mil.  7,  19. 

Obi  6  Instead  of  aliter,  frequently  secus  is  used,  especially  with  negatives  and  a  fol- 
lowinir  comparative  clause  {non  secus  acjiaud  secus),  as:  Hecte  an  secus,  mhU  ad  nm, 
rinht  or  otlterivise  it  does  not  concern  us.  Cic.  Pis.  28,—  Dixi  illud  non  secus  ac  seritu- 
bam,  I  did  not  say  this  other'wm  than  1  thought.  Cic.  Or.  2,  6,  24.-  Nihilo  secius  (or  mhtlo 
minus)  means  nevertheless. 

Bern.  16.  Many  past  participles  form  adverbs  in  im  instead  of  in  e,  as, 

C(F.sirn,  by  cutting:  certntim,  at  a  race,  emulously;  con}uncfim,  nnited,  in  concert  ; 
contemptim,  in  scorn  ;  curHm,  rapidly ;  gravatim.  unwillingly  (rare)  ;  ncmmatim  hy 
name  •! passim,  scattered  about :  punctirn,  pointwise :  prtvattm,  privately  ;  raptim, 
hastily :  sensim,  visibly ;  separdtim,  separately  ;  stnctirn,  briefly,  summarily. 
Ob"    Some  few  of  these  participial  adverbs  have  both  forms,  that  in  e  (sometimes  o), 
which  i<5  the  regular  adverbial  ending  (»f  perfect  participles,  and  that  in  im.  as  strictim, 
oonjunctim,  separdtim.    These,  generally,  have  different  significations  according  to  these 
endincs,  as  strictim  and  stricte  (of  stHngere),  the  former  of  which  belongs  to  the  eignifl- 
cation  'to  touch',  and  the  latter  to  that  of  'to  draw  tisrht'.    bome    &»  minut^m  (non- 
classical)  and  minfite  (minutely,  classical)  belong  to  difierent  periods  of  tlie  language. 
Others  as  conjunctim  and  conjuncte,  separdHm  and  separate,  are  used  incuscnrainately. 


242 


EELATIOKS  OF  MODALITY. 


??/.,»   17   Most  iulvcrbs  of  manner  ckrived  from  nouns  arc  forniod  hy 
thflulin^  ^'r.^:-nor:ily  prcce.lec)  by  «,but  «'"^eti'.es  by  of  ..r  connec  - 

is  of  a  looser  clKinicter,  as  ostidtun,  which  docs  not  mean    in  the  manna 
of  doors'  but  *  from  door  to  door'. 

CaUrrknm,  in  troop. ;  a-n,«rmM.  by  '■™'»*f, J'j^^JI^'i^-ir^rV.Syirin^f^^^^^ 

mCUim,  hUiMinarily;  ticimm,  m  turn;  vinf im,  mmi  !.>  uuni. 


IMaut.  Capt.  1,  2.-  4.  Mi.n  ^^"'V'7: /'*  '  ;  "'jA'^  •    k  T^  fiOr.  in  c  vitas  jmipla^  utq.ic 
turn  etiani  (Jriucis.  ^'^  temponbus  ilh>^    eimlltu>     tic.   »"•;.-,,, ,..,,/.„^  K.,nia,.us 


1-  ^-r- .l";.^'.V"'^*-  '}Ji,^  Or  9  4^       11    Oiemadmod'on  soU^s  <lt;  ceteris  rebiid, bie  de  aiuici- 
r/H«/o  j.ulicetnr   Cic.  Or  2  3S  -  ^l"  V''''^f  ^/^^^^^  n.a-istrnmiu  adepii  Mint, 

mm  nihil  a  t>e  culciua.u  de  te  stcus  esse  d.ctiiiu.  Lie.  Att.  1,  1.»,  H. 

^  '-'t    Objects  of  manner  take  the  form  of  attiubutive  niiiASES  m 
the  uuiuuve  if  manner  is  expressed  :  1)  by  one  of  the  nouns  denotinq 


"  ^,  "'  '  16  ^  mT  o   ''"i«  •uiut  1  er      Vviiv  can  aliu.'^  not  be  used  hereof-  "  inUnj.itare 


RELATION  OF  MANNER. 


243 


MANNETi,  especially  modus  or  one  of  its  equivalents,  ?i,s>  pactum,  ratio,  mos 
(if  the  manner  is  founded  on  habit).  This  form  is  used  {a)  if  the  real  object 
of  manner  is  represented  by  an  adjective  (most  frequently  a  foum- ad jec 
TiVE),  as  ?ioc  modo  {pac(o\  cOdem  modo.eddem  raiidne^  quo  modo,  qua  ratiOne^ 
mdlo  modo  {pacto),  quodam  modo,  nefario  modo^  etc.;  (&)  if  manner  is  de- 
scribed by  COMPARING  it  with  the  manner  of  others,  as  modo  {more)  Gr(Ecd- 
rum  (after  the  manner  of  the  Greeks),  the  attribute,  in  this  instance,  gener- 
ally taking  the  form  of  a  genitive; 

2)  by  the  ablative  of  abstkact  nouns,  directly  describing  the  manner, 
without  the  medium  of  general  nouns,  such  as  modus  etc.  The  nouns 
used  for  this  purpose  are  either  derived  from  adjectives  or  verbs  denoting 
the  action  which  is  represented  in  the  relation  of  manner,  or  are  equiva- 
lent to  such  nouns,  as  alacritas,  dementia,  celeritas,  gaudium,  tumvltus. 
These  nouns  must  always  be  connected  with  an  adjective  attribute,  being 
cither  a  determinative  form^idjective  (as  qua  audacid,  eddetn  studio),  or  with 
an  adjective  of  intensity,  such  as  8ummus,multus,magnus,  admivahilis,  in- 
credibilis,  as  summo  gaudio,  with  the  greatest  joy  ;  incredibill  celeritdte,  with 
incredible  swiftness;  ingenti  studio,  with  enormous  zeal. 

The  English  exponent  of  the  relation  of  manner,  if  expressed  by  nouns, 

is  generally  the  preposition  with,  except  when  manner  is  expressed  by 

the  ablative  of  modus,  in  which  instance  we  use  the  preposition  in, 

Ob»'  1.  The  ablative  case  mnst  he  considered  as  a  ^Mieral  form  for  all  adverbial  re 
latioiis,  l)iit  only  //"  the  vatureof  the  relation  is  expressly  indicated  by  one  of  the  words 
of  neneral  immrt  denotituj  the  relation,  a^  tenipns,  die^,  locus,  tntervallum,  longitudo, 
modus,  causa,  pretium.  Oiily  these  words,  denoting:  the  relation  itse  f,  are,  as  a  general. 
KUi.E,  placed  in  the  ablative  case.  Hence  it  is  always  easy  to  find  the  proper  En;i  ish 
preposition  whicli  must  be  emploved  for  each  of  these  diflerent  relations.  But  adverbial 
relations  mav  be  implied  by  ikDEUSTANDixo  the  general  words  mentioned.  Here 
be^-iiK  thedilHcultv  in  detennininn:  the  n;itnrc  of  the  relation  either  in  a  <;iven  Latin 
sentence  or  in  renderini?  expressions  of  this  kind  from  other  languages  into  Latin.  Iti 
is  evident  that  the  indiscriminate  use  of  the  ablative  case  in  all  possible  adverbial  re- 
lations  would  confuse  and  confound  them  all,  while  reserving  this  cjis-i  for  certain  ex- 
pressions, and  restricting  it  bv  specific  forms,  different  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
{elation,  will  be  sufficient  for'the  purpose  of  clearness.  Thus  the  use  of  the  ablative 
in  tiie  relation  of  manner  is  limited  by  the  restrictions  mentioned  §  y53.     tiom  Ihe^e 

^%^Thafnoims^in  hie  ablative  case  do  mt  bdon^  to  the  relation  of  manner  unless  they  are 

combined  unth  certain  atti-ibutes ;  , .    ,,      x»  ..•       ^  »,^„o.-7>7. -.,^.« 

2)  that  the  relation  of  manner  cannot  be  expressed  by  the  adlative  of  every  jwsstble  noun, 

l)ut  only  (a)  by  jnodus  and  its  equivalents,  (b)  by  abstract  nouns  directly  expressing  the 

action  which  is  conceived  as  being  in  the  relation  of  manner.  ,i^„^t.^ 

\Vc  infer  from  tlie<e  rules  :  1)  that  sentences  such  as  '  hejought  xnth  couraqe  ,   he  a^Ud 

with  cheerfulness,  uith  zeaV  cannot  be  expressed  by  the  mere  ablative  of  virtus,  alacntas, 

stiidivm   but  mustbe  provided  with  attributes  {summd  virtute  pugiwvit,  rem  magna  ala.- 

critdtc,  summo studio,  qessit):  2)  that  such  phrases  as 'he  came  with  \\\vqq  wiinessee  , 

'to  fl<'ht  with  the  eneJnv',  Mie  killed  him  with  the  sword^  do  not  belong  to  the  re- 

latioifof  manner,  although  we  use  the  exponent  of  this  relation  in  all  three  instances. 

Ttie  fir<t  phrase  belongs  to  the  relation  of  '  coincident  action',  requiring  the  preposition 

aim  (cw/A  tribus  testibus  venit);  the  seeond  phrase  contains  a  com;?/€/in(7  object  ot  ttie 

verb  'to  fi'-ht',  beini:  likewise  rendered  by  cum  (cum  hostibus  pugnare)  ;  the  third  phrase 

contains  an  object  nf  instrumentality  and  cause,  being  rendered  by  the  mere  ablative  of 

the  noun  (gladio  eum  occldit). 

Ob?.  2.  The  mere  abUtivc  case  of  a  noun,  unless  an  attiibute  ae  defined  §  553  be  added, 


244 


RELATIONS   OF  MODALITY. 


exprospea  instrumentauty  or  cause,  ns  TTeJv^fii  dMnmt  f>e  magl^  '^^1V\?T.^..^\l!?r 
coNffmlereVi^-  B  Ci  1. 13.  the  Ilclvrtian?  paid  that  thoy  wm'  accu-tonu-d  to  «J^l't  ratluT 
^va  or  tlmn  &y  fraud  i.  e.  by  mkans  of  th.ir  valor,  not  by  f^nu hdent  mkan.)  whm,  y 
\\^\nfi  the  nrt'pogition  icith  as  expoiunt  of  mannek.  a  mcaiuii<;  difforcnt  from  that  ot  tne 
uSr  vvmKl  impartc.»  tothrUntencc.  •  To  (l-ht  «i^A  valor '  is  not  v^rmt^^-oritendere. 

tin  exercifum  in  locum  prwdjnf.m  perdnxt^-^e  dixit.  Liv.  2(..  '2  ;  he  ;=ud  '^^J J^>'"  f. *^  i^^'^/;^. 

er^  had  led  their  armies  by  recklessness  and  '''^'''^l''''''',^''''\fj^^}:}^Z^^ 

lP«<»np^^>  into  '  ti«'ht'  olaees.     Thus,    f  we  wcmld  reiuh-r  the  sentence    he  acconipn.  niu 

^'i^^^.i^di&e  and  care'  by  tnere  »^>'''tl-- i-';-;'';;'- f  :;^;  i^^,^^^^^ 
nermoit)  we  w<.uld  thereby  chan.je  the  relation  ot  MAN>fKU  into  one  ol  •''^V  iTw 

Itt      ir  w^n^e        to  n.nvevthe  idea  '  dili-.ntly  '  and  'ca.elnl  y  '  we  must  "!:*•••>  »»'r 

mherbiotin".."e^^^ 

Unagml,  otnni,  or  mnwul  dUigentid  et  curd).  . ,       , 

Or^    S    There  are  a  few  nouns,  the  mere  ablatives  of  which  are  jrrnerally  considered 

to  expre..  a  r  laHon   o    mannku.     But  altl.ou.'h    we  senerally  render  these  iiouns  as 

f  ,\i^rbS«.   A  he  relati<.n  of  mann.r,  ^^e  shall  timl.  <m  closer  ;;^='"^V'"'V;;;;.      «f 

thev  eUln-M  tM..n-  to  the  reh.tlon  of  instrumentality  and  cau';.-,  or  totl.at  ot  ^•«•";^'«^  J 
ar  LV  ai  d  tir  t  even  in  the  latter  instance  thev  were  ori-inally  conceiv.-d  as  expi  ■^^^l.>' 
'^n    ans'      d    in^ir nmenti^^^  ll»'-e  belon-  i)Jure  (ri-htly,  ju.tly,  correctly)   which  is 

n"     eU.;Sti;hol""n;;a;,ri?;ute  or  with  possessives  ^^:^%'!-^:'Z:'"^oZt\"'?^:r^y 

CtinpHtur  n>im  hire  hoc  feceiis.  it    s  the  question  whether  you  ha\e  doin    t  ns  ri^niiy 

^SS  v^u  wSi.h?  in  doin^  this).-  iioc  tuo^or  ^'^''';j)./^f::,;^;-;::::;,;'^:;i^iV,''*:;:^? 

that  von  a«»<ert  thi-*  •  ri<'htlv',  *  correctly  '  (i.  e.  that  you  j#.^   nirht  in  a>>  rtliij:  '"'^';  '^y'* 

^   eVib.nti;themeanrn..4;iri.'htr^^^^^ 

2»   T„;urin  lU  iniurid  biUuiii  iof^ne.  to  commence  awar  vn/'fsf/!/.  (  i»-?.  15.  (••  1.  2t).     .^n 

n,/^rwarisn2(';metb;^'.sw;^.K»inanunju^ 

friColous  «noUNDs.  an.l  hence  the  expresMon  belonu";  '•;,'"/;/'  h™  H   di    «  J- 

Rfiiimpiifiliiv'  —  3)  17  aiul  dolo,  v o  .Mitlv  and  Iraudulemly.  a>  in  tli«  phra^c?^,  atxo  pie 

ful;u,l7u%^^^^^  h    battle  was  not  eomm.nced  in  thr  n-ual  manner  wih  s  u.uting 

has  typically  this  meanin-)  the  dead  with  wailnif?  and  tears,  Liv.  2o,  .JH,  wUcic  me  aoia 
liv,.  ..V iflpntlv  d<-notes  the  means  b>/  which  the  dead  are  honored. 

laVihroVamS^n^^^^^^^^  our  trooi)s  thr  defence  was  mad,-  in  tf,.  .ame  ^nnvnerm 

on  th  ^h  v  iSore    Ca-s     J   G   5,  AO.-Simili  rafione  Powpejus  w  kui.  casfns  con.idit   in  a 
on  the  (lay  IK  tore.  v.«  s^  ,    J:!  ,..\ti\,,  hu  pumn    Ce-    H  C  3,  Ttl.—Kf. it  ions  of  modality, 

a  view  to  take   h^j  or     Ca  s.  1  •  (-  ^y  •     ^,'^^'^^;,  "^/   T,ie  foUowim,'  sentence  :  Hoc  fecit 
S.  ;;;;ii;  Z'd^  .  diar  p "  /'-/"  that. the  war  mijjht  be  fin- 

KecKLi  V. 'i^  35),  Ihe  phnise  non  dubia  .pe  expres.es  coincident  action  (/«>/i  dubte  .peran,). 
n««  K  ThP  nblative  of  those  abstract  nouns  which  pinErTi.Y  describe  t'lo  manner  of  an 
ac?.on  (^  ?.3  I)    .    Vc^ie nth'  made  dependent  on  the  prep..si,ion  cum  (§  '^^  n/^'/^'",;;»; Jf 


BELATION  OF  COIKCIDENT  ACTION. 


245 


Ob8  6  From  the  relation  of  manneu  must  be  distineruishcd  those  ablative  phrases 
which  express  the  relation  of  roiNriPKNT  action,  as  orndtu  regdli-  in  mlio  sedet  (Cic. 
Fin  2  21)  •  maano  coviitatu  ingreM  mn(.  Cic.  Cat.  .3,  2.  r,.  omnibus  copiis  ad  castra  con- 
tendere Cics  B  G.  2,  7  ;  nudCdo  conxire  piigridre,  lb.  1.  25.  a^quo  anitrw  ferre.  All  th-  se 
and  similar  objects  do  not  denote  the  manner  of  sittins?,  of  cominjr,  of  hastening,  and 
fi-'htiii"  but  actions  coincident  and  comfnnid  with  another  action  of  the  same  subject.  ^ 
Th.v  aVe  equivalent  to  participial  expressions,  used  as  accessory  predicates  (to  sit  being 
in  roval  suite  ;  to  come  al«)nf?  /airing  a  great  ntinue;  to  hurry  to  the  camp  having  all 
the  forces:  to  fiirht  having  an  unprotected  body  etc.).  See  §  5,54  foil. 

Oiis  7  Sometimes  phrases,  properly  beloniring  to  the  relation  of  manner,  take  the  form 
of  air'acce-^ory  predicate,  in  the  same  way  as  Ihi?  relation  of  cause  is  expre>*sed  accord- 
in-  to  ^  5<)1  K.  115.  Thus  especially  the  participle  vmfi  is  employed,  which  in  this  re- 
lation perAums  the  same  function  as  the  participles  odducfu'i,  comnUJtus  etc.  in  the  re  a- 
tion  ol  (  \i«K  as-  P(»st<aquam  in  vulgns  milituni  elatuni  est.  v"«  anw/anfta  in  col  o- 
qui(.  Ariovi-ti-'s  t/vt/AMmini  Galli.l  RcmiJInis  interdixisset,  after  it  had  become  generally 
known  inthearmv  irith  tvhat  arrogance  (literally  'using  what  airOganct)  Anovistua 
had  forbidden  the  Romans  from  the  whole  of  Gaul.  Ctes.  B.  G.  l,4t;. 

1  Hoc  modo  iste  sibi  prospicere^  didicit.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  61.—  2.  Siculi  ipsum  Verrera 
pertulisseut''*.  si  humdno  modo.  si  usitdto  ?fiore^,  si  uno  aliquo  in  gene-e  peccasset*.  lb. 
2  2  3  9—3  Thes-^ali*  servornm  tnodo  jineter  spem  repente«  mannmi^sOrum^  jaca- 
bau'tsVese  iusectatiOne»  et  conviciisi»  RomanOrum.  Liv.  .3<»,  W.—  4.  Sumat  argentum  » 
alicunde;  si  nuflo  alioparto.  fenore»^.  Tir.  Phorm.  2.  1.  71.-  5.  Ab  his,  qm i^^cudym'^ 
ritu  ad  voluptJlK-m  omnia  referunt>Moiigedissentiunt.  Cic.  Am.  9,  32.— b.  Anovistus 
po«tniavit  ut  uterque  cum  equitatu  venlret :  alia  ralione  sese  non  esse  venturum  •. 
Cse-  B  G  1  42  —  7  Ilac  oraliOne  habitil  WJfrwm  m  7//0</ww  convcrsaii»  sunt  omnium 
mente-s'  lb  '^  41  —  8.  Scipio  omni  curd  inteutus  erat  necuhi  hosti  ivquo»'  se  conimitte- 
ret  l(»co  Liv '25  :«  —  9.  II<»c  te  ita  rogo,  ut  le  majore  studio  ro>r?ive  non  possim.  Cic. 
On  Fr  '1  2  —  K)  Marcellus,  captis  Svractlsis,  cum  res  in  Sicilia  t  ant  a  fide  atque  m- 
teg'ritd'te  C(mlpo^uissetl^  Ii..maui  devexiti».  Liv.  25,  40.-  11.  Catulus,  seutentiaui 
rogatus,  hoc  initio  est  suin?nd  cumauctoritdte'^^  usus.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  15. 

B.  Relation  of  Coincident  Action. 
§  55  1.  The  relation  of  coincident  action  represents  the  accompanying 
circinnstances  of  the  predicate  as  separate  actions,  but  as  ch)sely  united 
with  tlieniain  act,  or  alTectin.i^  the  same,  so  as  to  be  conceived  as  a  relation 

of  modality  in  reijard  to  the  latter. 

Ob<  The  relation  of  coincident  action  holds  a  middle  place  between  the  relations  of 
manner  time  and  cause  on  t tie  one  side,  and  the  connection  of  two  actions  l.y  copula- 
tive co-ordination,  on  the  other.  Hence  it  may  either  assume  the  grammatical  form  of 
an  oii-iKcT,  or  that  of  a  dedicate  (accessory  predicate).  Thus  the  Engdish  phrases  to 
perform  an  action  olaply,  thankfili.v,  vnwilmnoly'  express  a  relation  of  coinci- 
ciDENT  ACTION,  although  ADVEinJs  formed  like  those  of  manner  are  used  to  express 
them.  These  adverbs  do  not  express  the  property  of  the  a(  tions,  but  the  feelimrs  of 
the  subiect  while  performing  the  actions.  Not  the  action  is  thankful,  but  the  individual. 
The  Latin  expresses  c(.incideiit  actions  of  this  kind  mostly  in  the  form  of  an  accessory 
PREPiCATE,  either  bv  participles,  or  adjectives,  but  often  objectiveforms  are  employed 
as-  Nos  vero.  n  tale  gnid  acciderit.  l.eti  ef  aoentks  guatias  poreawys,  but  we.  if  such 
a  tiiin'-  hai)pens,  will  obev  cheerfully  and  thankfully  (literally  'being  cheerful  and  render- 
inn  tirankA.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,'49.  The  same  relations  may  be  expressed  objectively  in  the 
form  <.f  APVEKBs  (rarelv),  or  in  the  Ibrm  of  ablatives,  or  by  prepositions,  as  :  Anto- 
tiius  Sulpicium  exsfincf'um  i..f.te  atque  insoi.enteh  /«//?7,  Antonius  bore  tlie  death  of  Sul- 
picius  imlullvand  insolentlv.  Cic.  Phil.  9,  :^.-rnfferifa  grate  wemimt  he  remembers 
th.'  past  'thankfully.  Cic.  Fin.  1, 19.-The  same  relations  may  be  expressed  by  the  phrase» 
grata  dafo)  ai'iimo,  gralismna  viemorid,  stmimo  cum  gaudio  etc.  Lie.  i^nii.  4,  1 ,  lu,  a. 

%  555.  The  relatitm  of  coincident  action  takes  either  a  predicative  oran 
objective  form.    The  predicative  form  is  called  the  form  of  the  accessory 

1  To  t'ike  care  —  2  to  endu:e.—  »  custf.mary.— •«  to  ofTend.—  »  The.^salus,  a  Thessalian. 
•  suddei'.lv.-  "^  manumittere,  to  emancipate.-  ^  se  jactdre.  to  l>oast.—  »  prosecution.— 
10  ^-onvictum  abuse.-  "  mt>nev.-  y^fnuK  loan  at  interest.-  '»  pecudes,  cattle.--  '*  to 
refer  to  to  place  in  connection  with.-  »»  supply :  dixit.-  "  converlere^o  turn.-  i'  even. 
»  to  settle.-  »"  devehere,  to  sail  for.—  20  power,  effect. 


246 


RELATIOKS  OF  MODALITY. 


TREDic  VTE  (§  461),  as  Hmc  fi.ens  a  Ccesare  peiivif,  this  he  asked  creeping 
from  C^sar,'  Cses.  B.  G.  1,  20.  The  objective  form  of  the  coincident 
action  consists  either  in  an  adverb  of  manner,  or  in  a  phrase  ni  the  abla- 
tive, or  in  prepositional  expressions,  especially  with  cum  and  sine. 

Rem  18  The  accessory  predicate  may  consist  of  a  present  participle, 
an  adjective,  or  substantive,  but  it  is  always  conceived  as  a  present  parti- 
ciple, the  adjectives  and  substantives  used  in  this  relation  havin-  the  force 
of  n  irticiples  of  predicate-adjectives  and  nouns,  the  participle  o  the 
con  a  be  n-  understood.  In  whatever  form  the  accessory  predicate 
m^v  ppea-rit  must  always  aj^ree  with  its  lo-ical  subject  in  case 
mber,^  'md  (if  it  is  movliblef  in  gender.  The  logical  subject  ot 
the  accessory  \)redicate  is  always  at  the  same  time  a  member  of  the 
phrase  in  ^^■\nvh  the  principal  predicate  is  contained.  Tlius  it  may  be 
he  grammatical  subject,  or  an  object  of  the  principal  predicate,  or  an  at- 
tribute combined  with  a  phrase  of  the  P^n^'M^al  Pr^^^^c^Ue.  T ie  ac- 
ces^orv  predicate,  accordin-  to  the  relation  ot  its  logical  subj  ct,  is 
either^in  Ihe  nominative,  o?  in  any  of  the  oblique  cases,  mostly  the  ac- 

cusative  * 
(a)  AouKEiN-a  with  thk  ^v^^^'^'^\  G<xMfemnansadvh^^ 
in  h»-to)  -  X^uio  saJKit  i^nbrins,  nobody  dances  -sober  .  Cic.  Mui.  b.—  Hk-'^ar  proquiX. 

Ihe  c.innmiKln-  ,>,inloii<.-cl  Sc.npronuis  ut  Ins  .■.■<iue-t  (lit;  '•    J    ^  '">-  "-"""=  ""^  '• 

the  tyrant  was  haunted  by  the  ima-c  of  tliu  •  muocntly  Iv.lled    man. 

Ob^    \cce<sorv  i.rcdicates,  in  r.-ard  to  tlicir  jn-animatical  fnnction  in  the  pontonco  mnst 

ail  aciuMiiv.slliciopula.. ■««(belli'-- oinitied:  nwrtuos  iM^imUus. 

1.  biNoi.K  ^l**^^-^};;\  .,  .Vh..Hiibiect  milifes  being  in  liie  accusative  in  tlie  troveininff 
^^!^:'l!r£^'^  pLVc^"'c£j?d  tntJ  at.^tccnsa.ive  plnase  with  participial 
t^tf^JlSefX^intli  and  tlms  incorporated  with  the  ;;overninj,'  plua.e. 

Hem.  19.  No  tatiticiples  but  the  tresent  can  be  employed  «"js  acccs- 
sorv  Pivdicates.  Hence  this  constructi(Mi  is  generally  conhned  to  e 
active  voice.  But  the  langua-e  has  in  tlie  periphrastic  conjugation  of  the 
participle  (^  500)  a  means%>  supply  this  defect,  and  hence  P=nticip les  in 
he  form  ot' the  perfect  passive,  frecpietttly  occur  as  ^'^'''^:y/'l^^^^' 
which  must  always  be  considered  as  tuesent  pahticiplls  ot  the^PEUi- 

PIIllASriC  CONJUGATION,  as  ,,.,,,        /f  f 

ceived  as  a  pkesent,  relatively  to  the  time  of  the  main  action. 


BELATION   OF  COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


247 


u«rn  hptona  tho  exolctivc  partlciplcs  addnctiis,  pei^wtus  etc.  (p.  Ij^./i'-  ^^^^' ^''".^^ 
Here  bcloncc  the  expicinc  i  *  ^     ^      .^^^  ],}  19).— For  the  use  of  the  periphrastic 

nr.'  frOMllcIlt    V  used  as  ;lCCeh>01  y  1»1  tlin^''*»''-^    yjj^.  j»».  ^.v  ,.       .  „    ion     n    1  ^Q .    r» 

u^rx\v\^\eXx  ani.^  and  -enindials  in  dns,  a^  accessory  predicates,  see  p.  U\hR.  lo8 ,  p. 

?4l  i  51(1  For  ilie  ll^e  of  The  participial  adjectives  in  bundus  as  ace.  pred.  see  P.  I.,  p.  iol. 
ilL  1  Tho  Fn-diFh  oauivalpnts  of  participial  accessory  predicates  arc  ?encrally  pak- 
^^T;l'  w  fmnu    tW     ther  f..rms  are  used,  especially  when  the  participle  ts  in  an 

quid  dtcenHfrattr  tmi^  ^''^^t^'  ^r.^o  trnnJi.i  .'  the  accessory  uredicates  libem  and  scieM 

'r^'t^ll:"  a"•'')5a^■SS^^  m^ l^&;.^lZ^i:S gladly  (wi^lliu^ly.  fain) 

k-::pt'^:ilenrabc;u/fhis  'Slsr  Uv.  27  8.-  Ut  ofenderet  sciens  neminem,  that  lie  know- 

iiKihi  offended  no  one.  Cic.  Plane.  Ifi,  41.  ,      ..  ,, 

n^    rThera^c  of  an  accessoi'vpredicateis.  of  course,  in  the  accusative  If  thesentence 

n  wiiichit  is  n-ed'  Ls  an  SnitSve'c^ause,  provided  that  it  refers  to  theBubject-accusative 

of  the  sentence.  (Ex.  18.  19.  20.)  r.-     c    ,   n  i^       9  TprPntins 

1 .  Plato  nno  et  octo^simo  amio^^  t^^^'^erS'Si^^.  ^Tcf  iiS' ihi 

ava,..^i  urbetn  "n't-^L-    0  \^':- A^^  ^^)f-  4  Con  u. iO.S  om^^       fortissinie  pvgnanjes 

E-J^Jvr'^Vt  C  c' n^^^^^  ]^fl^!^O^S^^moriem  populum  Rom3num  liberum  ,;elm- 
peisi;Mra\it.  cic.inu....  ^-  '         ,,»„.,„  ,i,,h)tam  contirmare  possum.  Ctc.  Bam.o,  16, 


KoinJlnos  eru.  i.n.  o.),  4.j.—  '■*•  ;r\'' ",..',  -'ik  4,,  ^^  _  15  nov,tes  separStim  ntdivm. 

if/c/t//(^^w^^*.  Cic.  Cin.O.i.  i.h.  „  M-^.'^27  ,\.7^  »  ry  1  .>2_-20  Le^^ati  ex  St  nulbant,  spa- 

^^'^:!'ii::^:^^\^S:i^Vru:<^^  Xs-Lp,a™e  tenum.  Liv.  «.47. 

Ttrm  '^0   Tlic  AD.IECT1VES  wliicli  are  used  as  accessory  predicates  gener- 

.,lh      ill.  En  'nsl,  a.lverbs  as  e<,«ivalenls,  cannot  l,e  reduced  to  a  detinue 

n  i .  "nee     J  Latin  laiiirna-e  lr<.t,nently  employs  adverbs  even  in  rela- 

,S    Iv  iC        d       not    lieion-    to     'MASNEU',   but   to  '  COINCIDENT   ACTION 

\  most         idiectivestlius  employed  belong  to  those  expressing  personal 
Ml     ties   especia  ^y  a^^^^  ami  te.i.pers  of  the  mind,  and  properties 

■et'e    in'"  lo    lie  bodv.  to  health  ami  life,  to  clothing  and  arms.     Bui  some, 
^.mcitlb'siiclias  have  a  parlicipi.al  character,  do  not  belong  to  any  ot 
thele  cl'ises      The  following  adjectives  are  most  frequently  used  as  ac- 

(timidly (..^;f7«'''w  """S'Vf  >;  ''^  ;      "  i\  i?i tt l   /S    in  \^llei  ce.,  intemr  ami  i^ 


-— : — : ; "",,,:,,,,,.  triiimnli 2  t,)  adjure. —  ^  to  aliandon.  to 

1  Otan.  to  celebrate  an  ovation.  ^  e.  a      '"/'!"."?';•  in,ndre.l  soldiei-s.-  ^  concidere, 
.critice.-  «  a  centurion,  co.ninMnd...;^  a  jl    •>»  n         '^^,!    "  r  -d  bv  a  uieuositional  exl 


248 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


and  i/j.w/l.s'  (innocently),  orxultus  (hidden,   m  secret),  imprudmH  (^^  ''V^^^.*^?;;;;';*;,;^ 
of),  lucop-inam  and  1,,^"«^^^^  ^without  expecting  ,  niewor  ^'•V"»^"^;  ;;";'-;;X«^^^ 
(unmindful),  vivus  (alive),  .Fj7er  (sick),  xanm-  (healthy)  mImsKm  .afe        ^^^^J^^     " 
presence,  or  '  in  CiX^\x\  ab>^m  (in  oneV  absence)  ;y/./^/x  ^""^  r'%!L/J^.?<fn-^^^^^^^^^^ 
mdudatus*  (in  full  uniform),  i/i^mi.>»  (unarmed),  d'd.c^,  ^     \'^ T  f'l,^J^^^^^ 
1ar<-e  numbers),  rams  (seldom,  in  small  numbers,  far  between),  confeitu^  ^^^11}^}']^ 
do^e Columns    diiersu.^  (<>n  difTerent  roads. i/.  the  1>l"r'^'Jr^''l';^^';^-^''^^ 
(on  \\\'^h).mHtum  (as  a  loan,  especially  in  the  phrase />eic-ama  mutua  data^mouay  ijivcu 

on  loan),  and  many  other  adjective». 

Ors  1   The  Kn<Wish  lanffua-e  uses  the  form  of  the  accessory  predicate  only  m  a  ^w^n- 
Btances  w  ih  a(  K  ives.   l5ut  even  in  Latin  the  <,uesiion  whetlur  the  form  of  an  adverb 
Hhi  form  of  lin  adjective  must  be  used,  does  not  always  <1'-P^'-  ,"";-;"!;  "^^i";,'; 
relation  which  is  to  be  expressed.    Adjectives  are  always  used  lu  th«  a  ^  »^u      >n^ 
f  the  relation  is  one  of  mannkk,  i.e.  if  the  adjective  represents  a  property  <.f  »« ^'a<-»j'"i 
anHot  a  qua  i tv  of  the  subject.    Thus  adverbs  must  always  be  used  m  such  phrases  as 
"o  write  t^eSy'  (onuVe  lcHf>ere.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,  3) ;  to  tlee  i.,-loriously  {turintrr  jugere, 
ci.   B  G  2  'X  to  spe^^^^  barbarously  {harUire  /rx///e.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,  ^) ;  t<,  s.ng  lalsely, 
iS^urde  ca/»;rf{t'ic  ib  )      Here  not  the  surikcts  of  the  action,  but  the  actions  are  rep- 
??sena'l  m  be  ee^^^^^^^  <yrmlta^,  in.'loricms  (fuga  ^,"r;/i.)  barbarous  (.m.jo  ftar- 

Lr,")  false  ^cant^^  a^^urdu^).  In  all  these  examples  the  actions  expressed  by  the 
medickte  are  essentially  moditie<l  and  chan-ed  by  the  circumstance  connected  Uh 
S  en  The  other  extreme  is  when  this  connection  is  merely  an  externa  «".e^,  "«^  c  nu- 
i  ^  or  even  aflectin.^  the  actions,  but  expressiiiir  a  state  or  conditum  ot  the  Hibject 
merely  'n  kf.oahd  tootle  pri.ulpal  pre.licafe,  which  may  be  see,,  best  when  the  pm  n  «  e 
Ts  a  terb  hnplyin-  a  local  jrction  Thus  in  the  phrase  '  (iAJUS  ahu.vei.  safkly  ,  'h'  acM  I'l 
«f  AKKiv  NO  is  not  at  all  atiected  bv  the  safe  conditi.m  of  the  subject.  Ait  hou-h  a  loose  Ei  -- 

ish  iiu^o  t^M  iM.%1*  ys  mlverl,;  ^  such  relations,  the  L.tin  always  expresses  them  by 
^$^Z  Sn';^'  foKn  ;;f  accessory  vreai.at..iGaJu.i.o,lu^^^^ 

iHJ>mi\ft>r  >>rmlre)f  Thus  we  must  say  quittm  (not  quitte)  nedef,  he  sits  quiciiy  (<-i». 
Se  «  17)  and  /  F  I;^  (i^ot  L^^)  abiit  or  rediif.  Cicero,  in  describini;  Nestor's  lauL'ua.'e  uses 
The  met  /pho  •  i  tlowed  sweeKT  than  honey',  sayin-  duMor  (not  dulciu.)  melleJtuM  om- 
/S^/s^T  n %/  si  ce  the  action  of  llowin-  i>'  not  at  all  atieeted  by  the  sweetness  Hut 
£^e?u  ul^i'SSnles  ^l^Jl^  are'many  interujediate  cases  i"  -hich  n.e  t..>  rehi^tm 
P..VSS  over  into  each  other.  This  occurs  especially  in  two  »  '^ff^f^'*.-^^^  J \/*,i, \. ',•-''« 
Hiiiwe  while  nrouerlv  belon-Mn<'  to  the  subiect.  more  or  less  aftects  oi  iiioUint.-  inc 
aSoii^  o      foSr  he  adve  biaU  adjective,  are  used  accordinir  t.»  the  fancy  of 

theauVlor  oraea^  to  established  usa-e.    Thus  Cicero  says:  Supnd  muhtbnl^r. 

iirH/i/;  ViJ^rS  (Tu-c.  2.  2.}).  where  not  the  actions,  but  the  persons  are  woman- 
ish 'It  iVKcovvar^^^^^^  But  the  actions  are  impre-nate.l  and  mod.tied  by  the  quMl.t.es 
u^\\,^iT^^^^^^^  »'t«  that  of  mat.ner.    Cicero  says  timvle 

/V^m  X    Cic  Tusc  2  •")  but  Sallust  (Cat.  ♦».  3)  tinndi  resist  ant.    Thus  occurs  occultus 

fiereelv  (Sail  ;i\v'.^A).a.\\(\ftrfH'ittradt<iiiifariti\A\^.Ai.i).  l '/'^  '"V  '»./_.,,,•?,. 
«,  vi  Xrfi/^^?e  (not"^'^^^^  or  dUiffenter  (not  dUiqen^)  rem  frartat.  alt  ho.i-h  not  he  act  on 

is  studiou^^^^^^  Ue  doer.-  (6)  If  the  action  as  such  is  mentioned  witho.i    the 

doer        if  the  actll)n  has  an  iu.personal  Ibrm.  the  adverb  (witli  somc^^ 

onS  2  andnottheadiective  s  used,  althou-h  the  cireumstance  belon-s  rather  O  the 
«er^n^han  to  the  a?^^^  Cicero,  while,  in  the  personal  cousiruction   he  has  (Juceus 

e^lre  to  ic^ve  the  city  in  full  unifm-m.    It  is  said  of  the  ch.el-comiuander  who  is  leavm- 

^^+  TLe^^tudent'sSidt'ca^^^  not  to  mistake  this  relation  for  an  attributive  relation, 
as  m^>s?  ™naS^  l^  Mich  adjectives  lo  be  'in  Ai.r<»s,T.oN       An 

S^/W?^i;^Srt"ve  has  no  relation  whatever  to  the  predicate,  not  even  an  <'X«-'Mal  on  , 

SusS  bv  a^Vuly  n^; t he  te nn  '  apposition'  to  the  form  '  the  man  anived  sick' ..   ^  or  it 
is^'Snt  tLTKmli\?i  to  this  lAianing  of  the  term  the  tw,.fonns'Conin 
Hvrived'  and  '  \    arrived  as  Coinm  ssioner'  would  be  both  appositumal.     licncc  i  lo.  e 
grammadan.  who  call  Vhe  adjective  nek  in  the  .econd  phrase,  au  apm^hve  adjective, 
either  misapply  the  term,  or  misuuderstand  the  relation. 


RELATION   OF   COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


249 


Obi».  2.  The  limits  noticed  in  ob3.  1  are  frequently  disregarded  by  the  poets,  who  often 
nso  adjectives  where  i)rose-vvriters  would  employ  adverbs,  as  Rapidas  (uisi.  of  cifo)fra- 
trem  rocdrit.  he  rai)idlv  (in  haste)  called  his  brother,  Vir-;.  ^n.  5,  13.  Thus  poeis  fre- 
quently clothe  the  adverbial  relaiitms  of  time  and  place  in  the  form  of  accessory  pred- 
i(at»'<  and  even  in  the  form  of  attributes. as  Vesper Cinus pete  tectum,  seek  ateveningthy 
roof  (in-t  of  rcj^P'-ri).  Hor.  Epist.  1,0,  'lO.—^Eneas  se  matut'inus  a^refia^  ^neas  was  early 
a«tir  (inst.  of  mane).  Virg.  yEn.  8,  Aijh.—Domtsticm  otior,  I  enjoy  my  leisure  at  home  (iust, 
of  domi).  ilor.  Sat.  1,6, 127. 

Ob«  3  Here  belongs  the  frequent  phrase  prcEcljnfem  ire,  agi.  dari-.  or  ferri  (praceps 
irit  praceps  actus  est)  \\\  the  meaning  Mo  rusli  headlong,  to  be  driven  into  ruin' (liter- 
allv-  to  "•()  with  the  head  foremost) ;  as  Pec/v/is  indufgens prreciinfem amieumft7Ti  stmt, 
wlio' connives  at  his  friend's  faults,  suffers  him  to  rush  (precipitously)  to  his  destruction. 
Cic  \m  24  s9.  I^iireps  is  not  used  as  an  adverb  before  the  silver  age.  Similar  is  the 
phra^^e  subrimem.  fern  or  subHrnem  ab'ire  (subTimisfertur  or  abit).  to  be  borne  alofr,  or  on 
hi-h  In  this  phrase,  however,  the  adjective  form  is  chiefly  poetical  (but  see  Ex.  2<j), 
while  in  prose  the  adverbial  expression  (but  in  the  form  of  the  neuter  adjective  ^wWIwi^) 
is  the  usual  one.  as  aer  sublime  firtur,  the  air  rises  upward.  Cic.  N,  D.  2,  ;i9. 

1  Hannibal  banc  contumcliam  facifus  tulit.  Liv.  il\  19.—  2.  Ji:tOli  incavti^  oppressia 
sunt  n».  37,  4.-3.  Non  plaeuit.  Lycios,  qui  nati  liberi  siiit.  uHi  genti  in  servitQtem 
(l,i,.|3  lb  41'  6  —  4  Inter  omnls  cohvenii*.  nt  primo  </?/ifii  in  foro  obversarentur*.  lb. 
as  1  1-  .f,"  (Jallo-Grseci  nudi  pugnabant.  lb.  38.  21.—  6.  Scipio  monuit  pnefectosnavium, 
ut\'i<'ilias  noctnrnas»  f///^/i/i'  servArent».  li)  2G,  43.— 7.  Nihil  feci  i ra tu,<t,  nihW  impo- 
tenti'animo,  nihil  n<m  diu  consideratum».  Cic.  liar.  R.2,  3.— 8.  Lictoresio  consmum 
quin(iue  riri  in  hostium  potestiltem  ven(?runt.  Liv.  27,  27.-9.  Sempronius  t*aepe  ante- 
hac  lidem  prodiderat.  luxuriilatque  \no\)\^  pra'cej>s  abierat.  Sail.  Cat.  25,  4  —  10.  Alarius 
hoc  tempore  (nam  postea  ambitinne  pjurrej^s  datus  est)  C(»iisuiatum  petere"  non  aude- 
bat  lb.  Jug.  «hi,  1»1.—  11.  Multi  nobiles  Ktrusci  prima pnrsentes  erant  c«)ndemnftti ;  pos- 
tea sibimetipsi  exilium  conscisceiitesia,  cum  absentes  damnati  cssent,  bona  tantuni 
pa^iiie  priebelmnt'3.  Liv.  29.  .37.—  12.  Privati  earn  coiiditiOuem  lixfi  accepCre.  lb.  31, 13. 

—  13  Calanus  I:idus  Uhe  Indian)  sua  voluntate  rivus  est  combustu^»*.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,  22. 

—  14.  Post  diem  tertium  veni  in  icdem  Tellilri^'^,  et  quidein"  invitus.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  35. 

—  1")  Mane  Gerinani  freqventes  ad  Ciesaretn  in  castia  vengrunt.  C«s.  B.  G.  4.  13.— 
10  ivieaqiiidem  senteniia  (frequens  enim  te  audlvl  et  adfui)  homines  illos  salei"  tuo 
ct  lepurei»  pellexisti»»  Cic.  Or.  1,  47.—  17.  Quid  tandem  novi  fecerunt  matrOuie'"', 
QUtxl  friawntes  in  causa  ad  se  pertinentesi  in  publicum'-^  proces.^enint?  Liy  :W.  5.— 
IS  Jiane.  scahe-»  umMiium  altiludini  a-quari^*  j)oterant.  lb.  2«i.  45.—  19.  Accedgbat  hue 
ut  immquam  co///V//i,  sed  ra/i  mairnisque  intervailis  proeliarentui-ss.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  o,  lb. 

—  20  Nuntia  G.  Fabio,  ^Emilium  pneceptOrum  ejus  mejnorem  et  vixisse  et  inori. 
Liv  22  49  —  21.  Herennius  I'oiii ins  omuls  qiiam  primum  i«rio/tf/o«2«  dimittendos  cen- 
suit  II)  9  3  —  22  Tibi  nos,  Kulli,  lotain  iiaiiam  mermem  tradiiuros  existimasti  ?  Cic. 
Le"'  A'"'r'l,  5,  1«J.— 2:>.  In  eis  dentibus  ebumeis-'  scriptum  litteris  Punicis^s  luit, 
re<"em  Masiiiissam  imprudtnttm  eos  accepisse,  (sed)  re  coirnitil  reportandos'*»  curasse. 
Cic  Verr.  4,  40,  ia3.—  24.  Cato  sen  hit,  le-iOnes  siepe  alacils  in  eum  locum  profectas 
(esse)  uiide  redituras  se  non  arbiirarenlur.  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  42.— 25.  Animadvertit  Uesiir, 
Sequanos  IrisOs  capite  detnissoS"  teriam  intueri3>.  Cies.  B.  (i.  1,  32.—  2().  PubesS"  Ko- 
mana  credebat  patribus,  liomuluiu  procelia  subi'wum  raptum^a  esse.  Liv.  1,  lb. 

Rem  21.  Fohm-adjectives  used  as  accessory  pi-edicates  in  Latin,  mostly 
correspoml  to  adverbs  in  Eni,dish.  Here  belon.ic  1)  the  ordinal  adjectives 
witii  an  adverbial  Ibrce,  includin.i,^  prior,  prine^ps  (first,  toremost),  ulttr- 
iaus,poHtreinUH;  2)  the  cardinals  (and  distributives)  uhuh,  solus,  totus,  mul- 
ius,  singuli;  8)  the  adjectives  p/v^i^or  axuX  proximus,  having  m  this  respect 

»  Unprepared  for  theemergencv.— =  opprimere  in  military  language  means  to  overpower 
the  enemy  by  surprise.-  >  in  serhtutem  dare  aliqutvi,  lo  assign  somebody  as  a  siav  e.- 
«  impersonally  used:  All  agreed.-  »  to  walk  about.-  «the  nightly  guard-service.- 
7  ri.4<llv  —  «  to  observe.—  »  considered.—  »"  lictors,  the  constant  menial  attendants  of 
curdle  magistrates.-  "  to  be  a  candidate  for.-  12  dU  conseiscere,  to  intlict^  upon  one  s 
g,.ll_  13  ,r,  oiler,  to  leave  lor  punisliment.-  1*  comburere,  to  burn.-  »6  lellus,  the  god- 
dess of  the  Earth.-  1«  et  quidem.  and..too.-  1^  sal,  salt,  ^ylt.-  ^^lepos.^^■^t,  humor - 
>"  nellicere.  to  attract.-  '^«  tlie  ladies,  the  women.-  21  p,r(intre  ad.  to  afleci  somebody 
or  something.- "to  appear  publicly  in  a  body.-  ^^  Mw^.-  -*  ceqnare,  to  adapt — 
as  pndiarL  to  ftdit.-  '-'«  unhurt.-  "  dens  ebvrneus.  an  elephant  tusk,  ol  very  hi-h  value 
with  the  ancients.-  26  Punic  (the  same  as  Hebrew)  letters.-  2»  to  take  back.-  >«  cast 
down.-  31  to  look  at  the  ground  —  ''^  youth.—  "  rapere,  to  carry. 


250 


BELATIOilS  OF  MODALITt. 


ll>p  nitaiv  of  ordinals ;  4)  the  ciclcrminatives  idem  and  etip>e.  in  llie  mean- 
III"  KtoX    n-i  ll.e  «eialive  detcnninatives  mdlm  and  mhd  witU  Uic  lorco 

Liv.  41,  4  (i.  ..  he  was  .l»e  first  «"'7'":/  ','';;;  .^,.';I  wUh '  « •'  wl^'ior/^'/v  se  tertinm 

X.T2  tI^  !!{J^'i^L  in  .m  ( rrrimurn.  iferum.  Urtium  etc.)  are  used  i Hho  ^am b 

time.    Tins  form  ''V'>' ^^f  P^'"^l^' ' '^"^'S,^\  «  ^V  %^^^^^  '  tlu' first  ti.n.r.  !i>* : 

etc.)  did  tlie  ac.ti(.u\  an.l  is  rciulered  by_  t^  st      ^  ^ j'^,^"^;/,,;^^  nxy  brotlier  (loos 

Non  lUKlie  me  Pri^'^^^'^\'^^  J^%Z"^  «Mlavt  Z^T^S:o^^^^.  U.,  40,  15.- 
not  to-dtiv  accuse  me  lor  the  1  r^t  tiin<  ,  oiii  "7.'; -\ '",,.,        ♦.,  ,  .'.ttcr-  ol    is  tonu'-ue 

into  one:  1)  that  tl.e  honor  ^'^''^'''^^Z^^^'^^^^^v,^  tirst  am<.n-  the  to-ati 

-;:i:?^  s.ri;;;i-^*:s:rir:.^ih:;  ni::^;;^»;:?  ^li^^^^^       t^^  pa.a,e  e..  n. 

"^.'^.^:eX!.llalformsino(;>..no,^;...^^^^^ 

are  represented  as  bein- Performed  "'r^/''^^    7^nie^d  or /-/•>>    m       also  be  used. 

in  this  instance  the  forms   uj  ''('^^^^l'^'»  '^;/,^!^*^.     '■;,;^>    m)^  T,jran,v.n^n'>w 

These,  adverbs  are  ^^^^^^^^Z^Hrfc^it^r^^^  '^' ''"'''  Aufocf.m  Jus.U 

{or primnm,  but  not  pnmu-^)  neffaie  autr  "'"^"*  Tv.ml.l  not  accept  ihe  citv  oth  rwisc  ; 
W,  the  «ynuu  first  un  the  fir>tphice)^ldt^yah^  hutnor;>Wmn  m 

then  he  ordered  I'h.ioLle^  etc.  .-ly    ■]::;^J-^J/'.!//,/'^,,,^  ,ii/,i„,4  '^nnt.  the  I/i-^nria.is  first 

must  take  ad.jkctivk  form  according'  to  obs.  1  • -P^'Y'^'''"\j^, '",  .,  -^,,  ,,,,.  Kn<'li<h  "  fir-t ' 
m  S  lak'  the  adverbial  n.nns  in  om  or  « ^^cconhn^  U^  b^^  2  .  nd^3.  ^^^ ^;^^  J),,^. 
refers  ei.her  to  two  persons  a»;""    -> K    >i  to^tu  ifao,nf,alpnncei>s 

mu.^,  and  the  adverb  P'-'"'^^^'^^^.^}^^'.^^  went  into  battle  first  (amon- 

in  pnMum  ibnt.  ^^/'""'f  ^•'f;^^  f,  {  .vctheled  alter  lu.  close  ..f  the  b  ittie.  Liv.  «21.  4.- 
bis  soldiers),  and  was  the  last  f   1  ave  tb^   i "i  ,';»;,.;;'  ^/,,^   ,he  Carnntes  promised  that 

they  wonld  take  lie  '<"^''""^,^,l''  '^  '"J  .  ^l^.  (then-  bc-ln"  onlv  one  more  party  to  the 

;;;:^'c;;;^^/h:f^sr;^^.^d'lb•^^lp^  nV'"i4^        -i^u-^)  -^^^t  .eemed  to  be 

r^e  ii.iiihtfiii  tJtri'U"th  for  a  loothoid.  sail.  Jii;^.  y-*i  •*• 

K' SniL'a1Sr;,Tp-aic«'ii  l°,f:^S  Uhe'rom.  m  „  bein,dou.,tt,.l,  there  being  „o 


KELVTION  OF  COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


251 


(next)  lik.-w.se  denote  order  in  r^'^P^f ^  ^)  localit>    Dill  J     -^^  ^  j^,,^  ^^^,  adverbial 

They  Kon.rally  take  t'»;;  a-  Ject.ye  form  if   hey  re^^  ^^  ^^^^.  ^^^^.. 

form  (in  7/.v  and  e)  if  referrmu'  to  «R:\t;fT^    is      ^    -'»;"  ^  /^    m,)untain  (t.  e.  bein-  nearer 
tothemountain^  havini:  all  h.s  cavalry  with  him.  ball   J. g.  49.     Cra6*«  gro^ 
hyimraf  Cra-su-*  had  had  his  winterquarters  nearest  to  the  sea.  ^^^■^yy-  >>.  ^  "• 
Vr^a^castm  mov^ref,  lest  he  should  move  his  camp  nearer.  C.«s.  B.  G.  ^ ,  9' 

1    Augustus  «mi.^.  omnium  ti-rimi   Rom«  ostendit  in  cave.y^  \T     ^    ^."3^^. 
T>i;:.    ii^'v   1    «11       '1    T  ivius  })nniH^  ro<'atus  est  sententiam.  L.  3*.  l*-— •>•  i^.J'^.^'®' 

L  V  4    '19  -  5.-  OnV  itinl  iKUin.uun  extenlrum  pHncep.^  S^"'^rnnf.d^H-m n'ibalJm 
j^i\.  ^*.  iiT.      -^-  .  \' .....  o  0  o  _  «  i?ttnu  t^   atnm  Marcellum  ad  Hinnioaiem,  ui. 

Komilui  appbcuit^.  <-\c.  \  e       2   2  b.  Kai^^^^^^^  ;,o..^/.5w'^s'  RoinanO- 

cx  (iiio« prime's'  secund;u«  1>"^ "f ,>' "/'^'"^  r?//;l.  ad  hos-" Favonius  accessit' i . Cic.  Fam. 

^    c;;^-^q.Sciv;;^"   li^rai^ffa;  essent,  Tli-.salos ;>W.J..  ouunum  »-.u^.t  con- 
sul  I/'v.  :«.S.).-  10    Ilos.is  ;,;w  in  -a^tra  copias  reduxit.  lb  44  3.^.^- 
«'em  a'fiiinm   consebat  ;;n^>m«  dicereis.   Ih.  3..  3.^.-1^.    i-(^~^i«-    ""V^"^^^^^    ifomanus 
fl  i  in   Scipioni  sine  pretio'"  redditflrum  iv-em  dixit.  Tb  3y..3(.  -  13.  1  If  *l^    '"l^fj^;^^^ 
"nem  facta.n  hosti  credidit,  nihil  se  prwrem  moturum'J.  l'^^;^^^.  31  -  14.  1  i.ec^^^^^ 

•^I'V"  '"^"V"_     ,g  »11, ......a    Hi    „t  roironi  audTrent.  nroJfwu  conslitere-'".  it).  J,  ^o,  ^. 

7>riwo.s'exciverei9  Albilno-    Ml,  Urej^cnaimrLii.   //(/  ,^  ^^       ^^.^  ^ex 


rtwo<  excivere'' i\i'uui«'-.'>i,  «i> '-»-•■—•■•"■--;'....   ,  ,,      ,0  28.—  1<».  Sex 

1.^.   Princeps  in  senStu  't'" -Vn^ri^^inf'Vb  3^  -7  -  l^EUr^^^^^^^^^^^ 

pnetoresilloanno  prwiutn  croilri  -nnt;  lb.  3'';,'-'v,...V,:„„r..;o.,:,.«  nn.irl       "  


j^^'C'-Xrv;"" ,■."-_■-  -    ._„  "-J"  V-;..,.Hi^<Tinienses  quod  jwn7?iO  majOrum 

luendum^i.  Varro  It.  K.  1,  3». 

Ons.  7.  The  En. li<h  adverb,  ^^^n.^l^^^^^^y^^r.^rl^^'f^^^^  -' 

verbs  ;>ror..//*-  ^"^.'r''''^'v''^' "';I/^^  ^     b  ■  m,.    i. ud -^  a  chan,'e  of  aft-air., 

TCnon  rerum  arhla,  AntiocH  iota  .rat AYn}n\^i^^^^^  adiective  and  an 

seemed  more  convem.Mil  to  ^<>y^-i>V'il^»'\^.  ^.'^^L^^!?.,"  Tr  tiw»-  «r..  combined  attributively 


i^aie-denotes  •  ^^^^^^^f -/^ ^'^!^- ^^^^^^^ 

quently  and  fiercely  defied  the  "«^V  »]>;„^^'^f  jJ^^J/j-u;  „S  ^^.  b  G  1. 47.-'  Smrily\  if 

,!^7;.7^^r,  which  >a"-'"--!i^''' Ariov  St  is  n  m  fr^^^^^^^^^  adjective  nlmdUW<i^ 

f^i^;^;!;;n;;^''i^u!  ^d^e^?  ^--  -^^^^'  ^  «^^^^'^  ^^'^^ 

DUiish  each  of  these  classes  singly.  Cic.  p.  11.  C^ii.  J,  ^1.  ,,.,.,    ;„  41,»  fnrm 

lowing  turn  IS  the  antecedent  of  fj'^--  ^^l^i^^Xo^u^Uih^  legion  of  March, 
from  eomebodv.-  "  (vcidere  wl  ahquem,  to  3^>"\,,^'l"^,f';"  \-,,p  idei  of  March).-  ^^  to 
called  SO  in  h.inor  of  the  ^lay  of  Cesar  s  a>-as  inano^»_^«  V^  n.o^^^^ 

-  =2  ^l;S  arilfu^.  a  bra/cn  coucli.-;3  «^^'''^^^.  to  imi^.r  •- j^ Jo  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^yo 

;;;/iJs:^i^  s^^:i;^;i;:'S.^^^;o:^uiS;e^i^Ud.^- v^io  re^ff  Lrve.t.L  3» ,« 

etore  the  crop?.—  "  to  market  the  Iruit»?. 


252 


BELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


armis  vvJbis  dUrMif,  Scxtn;»  docs  not  lay  down  his  armf».  Cic.  Att.  15.  22.— //A7  qnldcm 
noi'te  tiihil  pntterquimi  riqildtum  est  in  vrhe,  aside  from  this,  there  was  no  wafrlunu'  <»n 
that  iiiirht  in  the  city.  Liv.'a/^fi,  12.  Here  belonjrspt^rhaps,  theplirase  '  nihil  irnpedio,  j)er 
me  licet,  I  am  not  in  the  nay  (I  have  no  «)bjeotion).  yon  (,he,  they)  may  do  it'. 

Obs.  9.  The  En^dif^h  'likeu'ifte\  '«/.sy)\  'at  the  fame  time\  are  frequently  expre.*ped  in 
Ihe  form  of  an  aecesisory  t>redicate.  cither  by  et  ipse  or  by  idem  (in  place  of  the  adverb 
item),  as  liotntlni  ne  i?i  caMra  recep^nint ;  rex  ct  ijtse  copias  in  caMra  reduxit,  the  Komans 
retired  to  tlieir  camp;  the  kinj;  withdrew  his  Xroox^i*  like ttiiie  to  his  camp.  Liv.44,  :i7. — 
Oratio  uphndida  et  grandis  et  ead>^m  inpniiiis  factta.  a  splendid  and  irrand  Ptyle.  and  at 
tht  fame  tit/,e  especially  witty.  Cic.  Brnt.  7!».  ^i^i.  —  Qnid  honesfuui  tttt.  idem  est  vtde,  what 
isi  moral,  is  also  expedient.  Cic.  Off. 2. 10.  Et  ipse  is  used  if  the  same  predicate  relers  to 
DiFFEKENT  Ot>gical)  subjcciiii,  and  idem,  if  uifferent  predicates  refer  to  the  s»ame 
subject. 

1.  Ciepar  hac  parte  Oalliie  pacJltiT,  totus  et  mente  et  animo  in  helium  TrevirOrum  in- 
pistit'^.  Civs.  H.  (i.  6,  5.—  2.  Et  ei  qui  snum  nejrotium  «rerunt.  et  «i  qui  f?e  fofos  tradide- 
runt  voluptatil>ns,  sentiunt'.  sine  amicitia  vitam  esse  nuliam.  Cic.  Am.  2-3. 8t).— 8.  iWi 
omnium  oiiOsi*  sunt  qui  sajiientiie*  vacant*  ;  soli''  vivunt.  Sen.  lir.  Vit.  14. —  4.  Milii 
temper  nni  magis  quam  utuverBif*'  plucCre  voluisti.  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1, 1,  10. —  T).  Ilonestius» 
eum  Hirrum  vos  ii/iiversi^'*  quam  >4fi(fu/i  possider^tis.  Cic.  Ai.'r.  2,  :51. —  (i.  Omnes  civesi 
judicant,  civitatis  salfltem  cum  ynl>/s  med  salflti  esse  conjunctam.  Cic.  Vat.  3. —  7.  Sulla 
in  operibus»!,  in  a^uiine''^,  atque  ad  vigilius"  inultuJt  ades^e  solCbat.  Sail.  Jui;.  9<i,  3.— 
8.  i'hilolimup  non  modo  nvlhis  venit,  sed  ne  ])er  litteras  quidem  certir)r«nj  me  fecit 
quid  eL'erit.  Cic.  Att.  11.  24. —  i».Sic  tecum  loquar  ut  misericordia  permOius  esse  videar 
qua»  tibi  mdla  debetur»*.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  !♦).—  10.  Nihil  pro!e(  to  sapis»*.  Cic.  IMiil.  2.  K  — 
11.  Nihilne  te  nocturnum  jjnesidium  I'alatii'",  nihil  nv\n^  vi^iliie»^,  nihil  timor  populi. 
rdhil  lu)rum  ora>»  vultusque'»  movfrunt  ?  Cic.  Cat.  1,  1.—  12.  IntervtMiit  co'jitutio'^o 
Locr08  ur!>em  recipiendi.  (puc  sub  delertiOnem'"  Italiie  tt  ipsa  de-civerat--  ad  r(enf)s. 
Liv.29.  ft. —  13.  Nou  omisere  puirnam  deserti^'  abEtruscis  Fre<,'ellilni ;  sed  postquam 
vulnciJltos  ambo  consules  videre.  tum  et  ipsi  cum  Crispluo  coiisule  duGbus  jaculis"* 
icto^*.  et  Marcello  adolescente,  paucio*'  et  ipso.  etluirCrunt.  lb.  27. 27.— 14.  l'u«j;ii!lie 
et  ip.'.'i  mihi  placet.  lb.  44,  IW.— 15.  Milites  levem''"  et  concursatOrem-'^  hostem,  cum 
procul  missilibus2»  puiina  eluditur'".  instabilem'»  eundf^m  ad  comniinus^'''  conseren- 
das  manus,  expulCrunt  loco.  lb.  27,  IH.—  10.  Indilcis^s  f.ermOnem^'*  lacetuiu^*.  me 
dicere  soipre  esse  me  Jovem,  f^'/«'/f//*V'/f' dictitfire^"  Minervam  esse  sorOiem  meam. 
Cic.  Dom.  34,92.-17.  Niliil  est  liberflle  quod  non  idem  justum  est.  Cic.  Off.  1.  14  — 
18.  Necesse  est,  qui  fortis  sit,  enndem  es^e  ma<rni  animi.  Cic.  Tusc.  3.7. —  19.  Mu- 
piciST,  (pii  erant  quondam  uditn  poOta;,  machinati'*  ad  voluptiXtem  sunt  ven^um^» 
atque  cant  urn*".  Cic.  Or.  3,  44. 

Jie'm.  22.  The  nouns  used  as  accessoiy  pretlicjites,  are  mostly  peksonat. 
nouns,  (.kscribii)i(  a  per.son  by  his  qualities  (for  iust.  ojfire,  vocation,  utate  of 
life,  age  etc.,  as  rex,  connitl^  ohxes,  capt'ivus,  mmtiua,  stnex,  (((hJtxcens),  and 
representin»^  such  (jualities,  not  as  inherent  in  tiie  person  (as  in  the  appo- 
sition), but  as  existiuij:  only  in  reu^ard  to,  and  in  coincidence  Avilh,  the  action 
expressed  by  the  principal  predicate.  In  Eni^lish  they  are  generally  con- 
nected with  the  ])redicate  by  the  conjunction  '  rt.V,  or  are  expressed  by 
means  of  adverbial  phrases  (in  the  quality,  cajiacity  of).  Sometimes  such 
personal  nouns  are  rendered  by  nouns  denoting  the  qualities  they  ex- 
press, as  puer,  in  his  (my  etc  )  boyhood. 

Junius  a,'dem  SalOtis  quam  rrw#?// voverat.  rf;?^or  locaverat,  dictator  dvHlic5vit,  J.  de- 
dicated a«  dictator  the  temple  of  Salus,  which  he  had  vowed  as  consul  (in  his  c  jnsulship)^ 
1  To  subdue. —  ^insistere  in  aliqvid,  to  apply  one's  f^elf  to  Pometliin»;. —  'to  be  of 
opinion. —  *  are  at  leisure  in  the  proper  sense  of  the  word. —  'the  study  of  wisdom. — 
•to  apply  one's  time. —  '  supply  '  lhey\ —  *all  the  rest  toi^cther. —  »  The  adverb  is  tak»'U 
predicatively .  §  5.52.  obs.  2.  The  predicate  must  be  rendered  by  a  potential  with  '  would'. 
—  loall  of  you  taken  tojjether.—  "at  the  military  labors.—  I'^at  the  march. —  ''at  the 
jjuards,  or  posts. —  ^*  d^b«^/ur  aliquid  alicui,  »onivi\nu<r  is  owin<,'  or  due  to  somebody.— 
»*  to  be  wise.—  ««The  P^alatium,  one  of  the  seven  hills,  was  the  quarter  where  most  of 
the  aristocracy  had  their  seats,—  >t  the  sentinels  in.— »«o.*,  face—  »»mien,—  ^onien 
the  idea  struck  him.—  21  desertion,  defection.—  "a  de^^cisc^re,  to  fall  off,  to  go  over,—  -^  by 
a//Aou///j.—  2«dart.  — 28  struck. —  ^«w(mnded.  —  27  „i,nble.  aj,'ile.  Transl.  by  a  relative 
cXsLM^ii  (who  was). —  ^8  a  ^^ood  skirmisher.— 2»  missile.— ^o  10  dodj^e.—  »•  unstable. — 
^^commini/s  conserere  ma«'/,f,  to  fight  hand  to  haml.  Transl.  by  a  noun.—  ss  to  intro- 
duce.— '*  remark.—  '*  wittv.—  ^*  to  as.sert.  —  ^^  musician.  —  ^^  machinCwi  aliquid,  to 
give  to  something  a  form  aaai)tftd  to.—  ^»  versus,  poetry.—  '•o  music. 


KELATION  OF  COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


253 


and  which  he  had  built  (frivinjr  it  on  contract)  «^  ^^"W)r.  L.  10, 1.—  Cato  litteras  Gracm 

ifenex  didicit,  Cato  learned  the  Greek  language  in  his  old  age  (as  an  old  man).  Cic.  Sen.  8. 

Obs  More  rarely  non-personal  nouns  are  used  as  accessoiy  predicates,  as  Ccesari  Gal- 
lia prorinda  obihiit,  to  the  lot  of  Ciesar  fell  Gaul  as  province.  Sometimes  acc»'Ssory 
pre(licate-nouns  are  connected  hv  comparative  conjunctions  (w^.  fam^u^m,  m///),  il  the 
connection  of  the  noun  with  tlie  main  action  is  inerely  assi/med  by  the  subject,  as 
Afortem  itt  finem  miseridnwi  exsjjecfo,  I  exp(^ct  death  as  the  end  of  my  miseries. 
Tac.  n.  4,  58  —  In  place  of  nouns,  absolute  adjectives  may  be  employed  as  accessory 
predicates  (Ex.  6). 

1.  Ego  nee  ohses  ut  RomSnis  iraderer.  nee  ut  leqdtns  mitterer  Komam  petii.  Liv.  40, 

j5  1_  2,  Jurslvit  LabiC-nus  se  nisi»  rictdnm  in  castra  non  reditCrnm.  Cies.  B.  C.  3.  87. 

—  3  Ouicunque  (whoever)  helium  civile  optSvit",  eum  detestabilemS  civ^m  reipublic» 
natum  (esse)  judico.  Cic.  Phil.  13.  1.  1.—  4.C.  Sempronius  dixit.  Fvlviinn  prope  unum 
nuntimn  delCii  exercitus  (sui)  l?(miam  redisse.  Liv.  26,  2  —  5.  M.  Jumwhdamis  pro- 
prietor adjntor*  ad  res  gercndas  Scipinni  a  senStu  datus  est.  lb.  1«..  19^  (>.  hi  Konmni 

»  hoc  cunctantur  facere.  brevi  extorres^  reijno  Ftdemeens  et  Cleopatra  Romam  venicnt. 
lb  44  19  —  7.  Cetera»  multitfldo,  priccipiie  qui  graviOrum  armOrum  erant,  s^pectatOres^ 
pu'-nit  stabant.  lb.  44.  4.—  8.  Eqo  non  eadem  volo  serux  qnsc  imer  volui.  Sen.  tp.  61. 

—  9.  Auri  argentlque»  usum,  velut  omnium  scelerum  materiam»,  sustulit»"  Lycurgus. 
Just.  3,  2. 

B€m.  23.  All  kinds  of  accessory  predicates  may  have,  as  logical  subjects, 
the  TRANSITIVE  objccts  of  the  verbs  to  which  they  are  atlaclied  in  which 
case  thev  must  a^n-'ee  with  these  objects  in  the  same  way  as  the  complet- 
inj;  predicates  of  factitive  verbs  (i^  487).  Almost  all  kinds  of  transitive 
verbs  may  take  accessory  predicates  combined  with  their  transitive  ob- 
jects. Such  accessory  predicates  may  have  a  participial,  an  adjective,  or  a 
substantive  form,  the  same  as  those  w  hich  refer  to  the  grammatical  sub- 

iect  of  the  sentence  :  ,.....• 

Attalnm  aliquamdiu  nihil  aqentem  tenuere,  they  kept  Attains  for  some  time  inactive 
Liv  31  15  —  Multr»rum  te  ociili  non  sentientem  custodient,  the  eyes  oj  many  wiU  ivatclh 
vou,  without  yourbnng  aware  of  it.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  2.  6.—  Qnod  ilium  siwhalwn  stipatum- 
O'/e  lictoribus  vidr-res,  that  you  should  see  him  des^iioUed.  and  surrounded  with  hdors 
Cic  Verr.  2  4  40-Ceteros  i//<^/7?<w  Demetriadem  remittit,  the  rest  he  sends  tmcktvithout 
arms  to  Dermtrias.  Liv.  3«>,  14.-  Alteru.n  viruni  amavi.  alterum  non  odi  woW«?/m,  </i« 
one  I  loved  in  his  life-fime.  the  other  I  do  not  hate  after  his  death.  Lie.  Oil.  3.  I8,  »3.— 
ODuressit  ■vWmneromnant'isiqnaivsque  omnis  Perseus,  Per^^eus,  therefore,  overjxnvered 
them  all  without  their  expecting  or  knowing  it.  Liv.  40,  57.-  Neqiie  oiiiin  /tim/m  id 
vol)is  Philiupus  permitiet.  fn-  Philip  wUl  not  leave  this  free  toyou  lb.  31.  6.—  (^^uinc- 
tius  deos /*^.v/7.<  ingrati  Magnetum  animi  invocSvit,  Quinctius  invoked  the  gods  as  wit- 
nesses of  the  ingratitude  of  the  Magnetejs.  lb.  35,  31. 

Ob«  1  Grammaticallv  this  construction  is  the  same  as  that  with  a  double  accusative 
afterVact'ilive  verbs  (§  487,  R.  74).  But  tlie  accessory  predicates  do  not  complete  the  idea 
of  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  combined  by  means  ot  the  unity  of  their  loirical  sub- 
iects  with  the  transitive  objects  of  these  verbs.  There  is  har.ily  a  transitive  verb 
which  mi<'ht  not  be  combined  with  an  accessory  predicate  of  its  transitive  objects. 
The  most^usual  verbs  which  mav  be  thus  connected,  are  the  same  as  may  take  parti- 
cinial  <'erundials  (which  are  nothing  but  a  species  of  accessory  predicates,  ^  51».),  especi- 
altv  verbs  of  motion  (mittere.  ducere,  reducere.  dimiVere.  reinittere.  agere.  redigere),  re- 
linquere,  caiyere,  tenere,  opprimere,  invenire,  tradere,  2)ermittere,  dare,  damnare,  assequi, 
obtin^re,  and  a  great  many  others. 

Oii*  2  To  the  verbs  which  sometimes  take  an  accessory  predicate  of  their  transitive 
obiects  i>elong  audTire  and  videre,  both  of  whicli  are  more  j^cneially  construed  with 
an"intinitive  clause,  as:  Neque  eum  quisquam  queerentem  audlvit,  nor  did  any  one  hear 
him  inquire.  Nep.  Tim.  4  (instead  of  the  more  usual  eum  qucerere,  thit  he  inquired). 
_M  Catonevi  vidi  in  bibliothCca  sedcntem,  muliis  circumfasurn  StoicOrum  libt;is ;  I  saw 
CiMo  sitting  in  his  Whvuvy,  surroundtd  with  many  books  ot  the  Stoics.  Cic.  l^^in.  3  ^.— 
Su  bvenies  si  jne  hcerentem  vides;  You  will  c...ue  to  my  help  ifyou  see  me  faltering,  lb  3 
4  !_Onis  ^  illis  diCbus  solMum  Vidit  ?  lb.  Pis.  lO.-7/^/m  slipatuux  lic'oribus  videres.  lb. 
Verr.  2,4,  40.— For  nouns  thus  used  as  accessory  predicates  see  bx.  27.  ^». 

I  Excent  -  « to  wish  for.—  »  detestable.—  *  assistant.—  e  Properly  an  adjective,  '  drivm 
from  the  cmmtmr.  '  It  may  be  translated  by  exUe.-  «  cetert  is  sometimes  (rarely) 
nsS  in  tln-Tiuirular  as  an  attribute  of  collective  nouns.-  '  spectator.-  «  silver.  -»  ma- 
ItM-ial.—  *<*  tdkre^  to  abolish. 


254 


RELATIONS   OF   MODALITY. 


«juam's  owes  it 


ori'Mii   as  :  Portoria  parvo  nreiio  rtdeinpta  habu'it,  he   otrnfd  (had)  (he 
~     '  li.G.  1,  18  Oitt-i-ally//^  A^f'/ the  imposts 


Tnii)o.^ts.  hannq  bonqht  them,  at  a  small  price.  Cses.  li.  G.  1,  18  literally  he  had  ne  ""ix'^i^ 
boanht  ii\  a  small  prict-).—  E(iiiitatiiin  (lueni  macfirm  hablbat,  the  cavalnj  vhich  ht  hail 
dm/ted.  II).  1.  lo^properly  meaning,':  the  cavalry  which  he  had  a*  a  draj ted  one,  or  hav- 
im/  drafted  it). 

Obs.  4.  The  participles  accepfu<,  datn^,  expensing,  as  accessory  predicates  of  transitive 
ohjects,  expii-ssin.'  values,  of  the  verb  referre  or  fene,  have  a  technica  nieamii^'  con- 
nected with  the  Koinan  account-books.  Account-books  (tabuhf)  wen*  used  by  all  Konians 
who  had  any  tnoiiey  ii-ausacrions.     Two  books  were  kept,  the  one    beini;  called  codex 


rrtiilit  (luatn  Veires  ei  e.rpensnm  t>fllt.  Dolabella  placed  less  to  the  credit  of  \  erres,  than 
Verres  placed  to  his  char-e  (charj^'ed  him  with).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  :i*.K  Both  phrases,  aside 
from  tiie  account-books,  are  frequently  used  in  the  general  meauin*:  •  to  owe  or  '  to  ac- 
kno\vle(l<'e  to  owe'  (acceptamftrre),  and  to  have  a  claim  (expensum  lerre),  as  :  huit  nemo 
qui  lion  mihi  vitam  suain.  liberos,  r<-mpublicam  referret  acceptam,  there  «v/v  nobody  who 
did  not  acknoicU'dge  that  he  uas  indebted  to  me  for  his  hje,  children,  and  for  the  repuO- 
lie.  Cic.  Phil.  'Z,  5 


1  lli-tri  Strabniiem  in  pnetorio»  insfruentem'^  atque  adhorfantem  puos  opiircsseruiit. 
Liv  11  2  —  2  Ilis  diC'lms  audTvi  (luendam  sapientem  refenntcm  quse  primus  quisque 
ex  iloimlnisducibusfecisset.  Sen.  Hr.  Vit.  I.J.- 3.  Co^'im  eum  responderc,  cur  tot  yiri 
huncunum  non  ant  utanteni  comprehenderints,  awtf'/rjir/ifem  cotisecilti  suit.  Lie.  Lx\. 
2H  r.7— 4  Epaminondas  imprranU/n  patriam  I/ued:einoiiiis  ri-lnKpiebat  quam  acce- 
vvnxt' servieate?n.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,  2t.- 5.  Atque  ban;  non  eo*  dicuntur  ut  te  o,atio  mea 
dormienfem  excita-se»,  sed  potiiis  ut  cmrentem^  iiicitasse^  vide-itur.  i  ic.  gu.  1^  r.  i,  i, 
1«  —  H  Quod  iiisi'^  ita  e<set.  nuiKpiam  claros  viros  seniltus  rinctos  hosiibus  tradiclisset. 
Cic  Off  8  2«»  —7  Hoc  ita  coiniiMratum»  more  majorum'»  «-rat,  ne  qiii<  triumphilret  nisi 
perdomifdm'^  pacafamtjne  provinciam  tn.didisset  successori  Liv  *♦  '^-^iT,^-  r.:?"^v  !!' 
cum  nobilitas  pnesidiis./f/vnJ^/m  atque  omni  ration.-  ^(>/>mM//'//y/'-'teMel)a  <-  lA^  • 
')  1  3  — q  Hrassicam><  esto»*  vel  w/am  vel  crudam^*.  c;ato  K  K.  !.)<).-- 10.  Dux  Ko; 
mSnns  in  alas  dirl-onn  sociabini^  exenitum  habebat.  Liv.  31,  21.-  H-  N<>'i  «-''"nt  isti 
homiiu's  audiendi.  si  quando  de  amicitia.  quam  nee  usu»»  nee  vatir>ne<»  habent  rof/m- 
tam  disputilbum-o.  Cie.  Am.  15.52.--  12.  Vrrres?.ry>('/<.svi  chryso-oMo servo  sestertium-' 


^'?"^^*^"'^V»'Pi:^;'^'ri:";::::;.V.,3i";;,V,,i^alienasse35  at.iue  in  amm  e-i>se  prari„iteni, 

•em  diiceiidi^^  jua 

*  to  arouse. —  *  to 

( rdomdre.  to  con- 
quer wholly.-  '•'  by  every  means.— »3  o/>ra7/Jrf',  to  l)arri..ade.-  i*  c-ibba-je.-  '»  From 


ci8  coniux  (/t'i/V;)  recfcm  tsocium-'    .  .,.  ,  .....  .  ,, 

dicitur.  lb.  30, 'l 4.—  21.  Decietum  est,  inintuni  ne  quem  militem  veterem  duceiidH"  jua 

1  The  priEtorian  lent.—  ■'  to  draw  up.— '  to  arrest.-  *  to  that  effect  _ 

n,n.-T  to  stimulate.-  ^  if  not.-  »  to  establish.-  lo  aneesiors.-  >>   pn'domare.Xojoxx 


edere  the  second  form  of  the  imperative  beiu-  used,  bc-cause  the  Beiitence  contains  oiio 

of  the  Ki'LKshiiddown  by  Cato-  '«  raw.-  >'  ''^''V^'"''^  ^'''^'''^''^/iT'f  ?n"T/;  li'^n  ,•' 
callv  —  "  theoreticallv.—  ^o  to  discuss.—  21  Ger..  plur.  ol  the  second  de.l.  111  ?/m,  a^  I'n- 
ther  below  ' /a/e/J/«/n.'- "-  For  the  use  of  the  genitive  plural  ol  ^<=f<^rtvim  ;;;'''''*"'• 
See  U  3J  oiis  «J—  "  ward.— '-^^  ra'iocinan.  to  ivck.m.  to  calculat.;.- -•»  unbuii.  (l.— 
2«6V/.o.sW>//«A^,  the  place  of  the  renowned  battle  of  Flamii.Inus  a-ainst  "  'P-"  '  " 
rut  off.-^«emptv.  I.e.  without  a  -arris.m- '  »  m/<^/^r^,  ^'ij"?- '"'r  sV  \  .li' S. 
distribute.- 3»  to  raise.-  sa  anchor.-  ^^  to  march  by  land.-  "  allied.-  "  to  uhcuate.- 
^<^'ducere,  to  compel  a  soldier  to  take  part  in  a  campaign. 


RELATION   OF  COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


255 


f  T>,  .^1  R  o.->  Privati*»  onibupdam  ex  pecnniS  quam  conpnlibns  mutuam  dede- 
esset.  lb.  31,  8.—  22.  1  F»  Y«,  „r^ih  -^)  IM  —  23  Pro  impen^is  in  belhim  factis  quinde- 
ranl.t.-r.ia  pensio*^  '^n^?^^;*.'''^;,  ^il^tn  V^i/'/Za  et  miliia  talentura  per  duodecim 
cim  mil  ia  talentum  dabnis,  q"''";^"  f,/?^^;!^^^^^^^  ob'?ntes  eos  damnat.  lb.  42,  43.- 
annos.    Ih.  37,  45.- .24.  Ismcn.as  [^f^^^^^^^^^  /am  6 %,  13.- 2H.  Hannibal  hospi- 

2.5.  Incolumrm   te  ^ito,  ut^spero    )!^.^  .^^'^  ^^^;,^^^^^^^  Liv.  39,  41.- 

,alT^*  deos  yiolatira   ^'"^  i\,^'^/ '   ''*^'*  ^  rJm    !fu>^  iA/ 7^^  bostium  videremus, 

niiod  te,  Antoni,  co«<f«//em  non  vidit.  Lie.  1  nu.  -:,  o. 

Pen    H    S.)i  lelimcs  intransitive   objects  take  accessoiy  predicates 
Til  nulst  (JlTienUv'occurs  with  the  ablative  objects  ot  the  verb  uU^  and 
with' the  (hitive  objects  of  several  verbs,  as  .,    ^    . ,  • 

\^^^^ii;::i:S^l^^:^^^^-'  =''»C.,sicans  at  t.,cir  request. 
l:'c,;!;-«%espondi,,  non  .s.econs„etumnem  poj..^ 

as  Vy«^^V\}^^%X  ^£^^-^^<^  fonns  which  accessory 
f,;:.;i;cau^a  Jn,VuxUres;'iuTt'ances  fre  the  saute  as  those  lor  completiko 
predicates.  ^  4G."i. 


vu-am  7ne  t ibi  amv»if/ere.  non  aus  s  s    .    / dared '^^;  f  ^^t/ii  vorumus,  we  uUl  make u,e 

OBS.  2.  If  an  adjective,  as  «"  «f,^^,:^?^^ 
INFINITIVE,  it  is  general  ycban^d  into  ^^^^ 


)stul:lvit  consu    ui  ''  ""'^;''"  ;;\7::,V:,  tHunwhal  vroce>^>iion.  L.  31,  2U.— li  »*ioi  iiotrun^ 

at  it  be  allowed  to  htm  to  enter  ff/^^/^,  ^X/f  rem  in^  tha'  it  might  be  free  to  him 

e..ef  vel  ad  helium  manenft  ^'^/.^H^  I^^f^T.^^for  ^^  P*^^^"  ^^"  '^'^'  -«--^.f/S^^'^"!:^ 

^^i^^.!^o^X^:^S^^^^^^  "^^^^''^^  ^'^'^  ''^'' 

ecl-intinitive  were  a  finite  verb.  Ex.2.  „...,„u,.^  to  participles,  especially  in  the 

OBS.  3.  Accessory  predicates  arc  ^?"  fj'^jf.jfj.^'^^^.^?,,,  u^kJcompk         predicates,  in 

construction  of  ablatives  absolute,     i     >'  ^^^  Mi^omnt/^u^  Oibcns)  decessit,  Theoxena 

tii-biativ.  as :  ;j;i-;^;^^ 


256 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


Exire  j»iia  secinn  ifferentibus  ;//*>w  armii  tidCmif,  he  took  their  arm fi  from  them  icho  were 
ordered  to kave  carrying  all  their  property  loith  them.  Liv.  4:}.  IS.    [TIih  diuivo  is  diivctly 


mAh9^]  iiii  Jlor  porco  jnaculo  wwiolaudo,  by  i^acrificiuij  this  ho<;  as  an  expiation.  Cato  11. 

li.  139.  See  Ex.  14.  15. 

tef>fibfi3 


tirt)emvi  viclnain*  sibi  ot.  cognStam'  iniioxiam  perire  nnerenf.  Liv.  :^7.  1..—  (..  Kt'srilti 
artirm-lbani,  se  tacitos  ablreiii  animo  habul-^t^.  lb.  3!l,  54.—  7.  P«)^se  liboralifilte  vti  nun 
sitoliantemi^e  patrimoniopeciinite  et^t  fructiir*  maxiiniis.  Cic.  Oft.  2.  IS.—  8.  I  lane  coiin- 
teor  «ori  nihil  posse  dcinentiiis  quam  arnntem  in  eiiin  locum  V'mre,  ubi  libirtiltein  si!< 
pcrtlitarus.  Cic.  lijib.  !»,  •^4  —  9.  llannib.il  nihil  niajus  pn-cjltiir  dros,  quam  ut  uicolvmi 
Ci'dere'^  atqiie  abire  ex  hostium  terril  /iccat.  Liv.  id.  41,  m.d.—  10.  I{ex  n..n  c.nsuit  uicoiaii 


periculis  defendendam.  lb.  Mur.  37,80.-  10.  Cn.  Fulviii!^,  decrm  ex_  CampauOrum 
numeioj'/,sv;t.>'  inertnibus  dedQci  ad  se,  in  fidem  omnis  iecei)it.  Liv.  24,  1*. 
On=»  4  In  the  fame  way  an  in  the  instances  mentioned  above,  accessory  predicates 
may  bt-  dependent  on  attimiuttivk  oknitivks,  or  .vTTitiBirTivK  adjkctives.  as:  Manea 
Vinnniu',  mortiuv  quam  viriE  ftlicioris,  tandem  quievCruut ;  The  dt-iKirted  spirit  ot  \  ir- 
ginra  happier  wh.-n  dead  than  when  alive,  rested  at  len-,'tli.  Liv.  3,  .58.— .\t  quein  homi- 
iiem,  al)8i-ntem.  caus-l  iiicoirnitil,  condemnasti  ?  Ckjxs  ab.<tiiti$  nomen  recepi>ti  (i.  t.  ad 
judiciindiimjy  whose  name  did  you  receive  in  hit»  absence  {i.e.  '  whom  did  you  put  to 
trial  when  he  was  absent ')  ?  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  45. 

lieni.  20.  AiisTKACT  I).\tivi«:s  (p.  8:J,  II  34),  and  Ar.L.vrivr.s  of  qu\t,ity 
(p.  80)  are  tVequ'Mitly  uslhI  as  accessory  priHlicalL's ;  very  rarely  (sk.ni- 
TivES  ot  (iU.\LiTY  (p.  77)  are  used  in  this  relation.  AVilh  such  datives, 
ablatives,  etc.,  the  1'.\uticii»le  of  the  copula  must  be  understood. 

Ob9.  1.  Genitives  of  qiialiiv  are  very  rarely  u«Jed  as  accessory  i)redicafes,  as:  Xonm 
annurnm  avol)is  prolectus,  piist  si'xtum  et  tricesimiim  annum  redii.  Liv.  30, 37;  lUayinjj 
departed  from  vou  at  the  aire  of  nine  years;  analoirous  to  the  ordinary  predic.it«'-<:enilive 
'noretn  anndnhii  ^;vr/// ').— The  aul.\tivk  of  quality  fr<'<imMitly  occurs  in  thi>  form,  as: 
rati  animo  Lacediemonii  in  Th»-rmopylis  occidenmt  ;  With  a  similar  spirit  (/.  e.  Imukj 
animated  with  a  similar , spirit  or  fedinq)  tlie  Laced:emoniaiis  ft-ll  at  Tlicrmopyhe.  Cic. 
Tusc.  1,42, 101  (with  a  finite  copufa:  I'dri  animo  erant  Laced<fmonii).—ViMH\(i{v  animo 
forti;  Take  your  meal  with  couraiieous  hearts  (beiu^  with  courajxeous  hearts).   Cic   lb. 

C)l?s  2  The  accessory  i'kedicate-dativk  (abstract  dative,  §  4()'.M  is  far  more  fre(un;nt 
than  the  accessory  predicate-genitive.  It  is  ol  the  same  nature  as  the  predicate-dativu 
with  the  copula,  only  that  it  is  attjtchedjoprincipal  predicates  exprefsed  by^'e  verba 

~"i  To  mention^''  todenounc(s  to  abiise.—  »  fayor^.—  *  of/sfrinr/ere.  to  bind,  to  oblii^e.— 
6  exftvl  an  exile.—  «  nei-,'hborin<r.— '  kindred.  Tran-1.  both  co-ordinates  by  a  com- 
pound': neiqhboring  filter  city.—  «  to  escape.—  »  radices  monti-s,  the  foot  of  a  inountain.— 
fo  <.old  —  »»  to  i)erform  a  sacritice.—  »"^  to  slaughter.-  "  \vear  and  tear.—  »*  to  supply. 
—  >»  band,  body  of  troops.—  i«  to  strip.—  »'  to  lay  waste  (supply  them).—  »«  to  lend.— 
*"  Incdumem  is  not  to  be  counected  with  tradere,  but  with  defe/idendam. 


RELATION  OF  COINCIDENT  ACTION. 


257 


mentioned  R.  23.  obs.  1.  the  copula  beino:  conceived  as  a  participle  understood,  as. 
l'an-«anias  nuos  Rvzantii  ceperat  regis  propinquos  tibt  mnnen  misit,  Pansanias  sends  to 
thee  as  a  aift  (bein«r  a  gift)  the  relatives  of  the  king  whom  he  took  at  Bvzantiura  Nep. 
Pans  8  :f  1  -  7>ar^  slbinis  eunt  auxilio,  a  part  went  as  a  help  (being  a  help)  to  the  Sa- 
bines    Liv  2  5.3     Here  belong  the  frequent  phrases  diem  (alicui)  coUoquio  dicere,  to  ap- 
point 'a  dav  for  an  interview ;  aliqnem  (allcui)  praddio  relinquere,  to  le^ive  somebody  for 
protection' ;  alv,>nd  im/nori  dare,  to  give  something  f<.r  security;  a^u/md  «f^J:^*^»"»' 
ritio  t)r  protjro  dare,  to  impute  some  action  to  somebody  as  a  crime  (Ex  7.  9).  Frequently 
these  constructions  mu^t  be  recast  in  rendering,  ni^Fabiolaudi  non  ej<t  datuinqvod pingeret, 
it  was  not  considered  a  ground  for  praise  that  Fabins  practised  painting.  Cic.l  use.  1, 2, 4. 
The  phrase  l^Mum  ca-^tris  ca/iere,  to  select  a  place  for  a  camp  may  be  cither  understood 
a-  ail  acci'ssorv  predicate-dative  (supplying  sibi).  or  as  an  ellipsis  of  a  dative  gerundial 
(ra/^tri.1  fa<iei,dl^).     Here  heh>n-s  the  phrase  rectptui  canere,  to  give  the  signal  for  retreat, 
where  inilitibus  is  either  supplied  or  expressed. 

1  Turn  qunm  rem»  habgbas.  qnspsticulus'  te  faciSbat  attentiOrem  ;  nunc,  qunm  tarn 
(eq>/o  animo  bona  perdas,  lestimatiOnemS  te  nuUam  putas  accipere,  qiium  me  hospitio« 
recipias  Cic  Fam  9  Ifi.  7.— 2.  Si  quid  obtigerit^.  O'^vo  rt//wv/);wrt/(x/?/e  monar.  Oc. 
Cat  4  2  —  3  I<'navi  milites  in  proelio  nonnunquam  infeqro c&rj>ore  seabjiciunt».  atque 
affli'cti^  et  exaniniJlti"  jacent.  Cic.  Tusc.  9,  ^i.-  4.  OppidSni  proelium  m^jpte  animo  com- 
mi-Cnintquam  sustiniiGrunt.  Liv.  44,  31.— 5.  Cffisarin  animo habuit.  conjimcto  exercitu 
cum  Domitio  per  lllvricum  Italian  subHdio  proficisci.  Cues.  B.  C.  3.  78.—  b.  Quarta  pars 
niilitum  imesidioim'pedimenlP^  relictaerat.  Cjes.  B.  G.  5,  11.-  7.  Ego  etiam  qnte  tu  sine 
Verre  c.fmmisisti,  Verri  crimini  dattlrus  sum.  Cic.  Ciec.  11.  35.-  8.  \irius  sola  neque 
datur  dono,  neque  accipitur.  Sail.  Jug.  8.5.  JiS.—  9.  Vitio  mihl  dant  quod  mortem  homi- 
uisnecessarii»  gravitei-i"  fero,  Cic.  Fam.  11,  28,  2. 

Hem.  27.  Often  the  form  of  the  accessory  predicate  is  borrowed  to 
connect  the  idea  of  coincident  action  with  the  adverbial  relations  of 
PLACE,  TIME,  and  CAUSE.  Hencc  this  form  is  applied  to  adverbial  clauses 
of  all  kinds  to  represent  them  as  coincident  with  the  main  action.^  In 
the  construction  of  ablatives  absolute  with  present  participles,  adjectives, 
and  nouns,  the  relation  of  the  participle  to  that  of  the  principal  predi- 
cate is  the  same  as  that  of  an  accessory  predicate. 

Ob<».  Here  belong,  in  regard  to  the  relation  of  pbice,  the  expressions  obvim,  simmls, 

prareps,  and  the  compounds  with  rersas,  as  fransrers»s  and  aversm.  instead  of  the  aa- 

verbial  forms  o/yria/y/,  subnme,  [capife  pramisso],  transrerso,  ex  averso  ;  hi^  "^^It-fJiL't 

anrt/ur  obrius pr-ocMit,  Adherbal  marches  to  meet  Ju-urtha.  ^^I'v'^^T*!^..   k      t^»^,;  ,t 

litteras  tnitta-'^,  send  me  the  letters  to  meet  me  on  my  journey.  Cic.  Att.  b,b.—/iotnnius 

mbllmisafjif,  Romulus  is  borne  upward  to  heaven.  Liv.  1,  16,  l.-Cum  coepiteos  transrer- 

sos  aqerefelicitas,  when  prosperity  has  begun  to  drive  them  'across    (e.  «.from  the 

strai'dit  road).  Sen.  Ep  %.—Uoc  toto  prcplio  aversum  hostem  nemo  ridere  potmL  \n  this 

whole  battle  nohodv  could  see  any  of  the  enemy  'by  the  back'  or  •  turned  off   {i.  e.  the 

back  of  anv  one).  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  2H.-In  regard  to  time,  the  participle  nfl/j^>^,  in  the  meaning 

old  (»i  498  -h.  must  be  considered  an  accessory  predicate  (mst.  of  natu,  in  regard  to  btrf/i). 

In  other  relations  the  form  of  the  accessory  predicate  (like  that  ol  the  English  parficiple 

ab-olute),  is  used  when  the  connected  action  is  meant  to  convey  more  than  one  i"ea,  fO 

that  the  more  definite  forms  introduced  for  expressing  cause,  ^"^«ij'*'f/ "^,^;'"  ^^^^^ 

given  case  would  weaken  the  meaning  of  the  author.  Hence  it  is  very  rare  that  these  n,ost 

frequent  constructions  with  accessory  predicates  can  be  resolved  into  ^"'te       thL\^!« 

out  impairing  the  force  of  the  expression,  although,  generally,  the  one  or  the  other  idea 

must  be  considered  as  the  prevailing  one.    Examples  occur  on  every  page  of  the  Latin 

authors,  as:  Dumnorix  petlvit  ut  in  Gallia  relinquerStur.  quod  in.mttus  navigandt  n  are 

timCret    D.  asked  to  be  left  in  Gaul  because   he  being  unaccustomed  to  saibnir,  v\a3 

afraid  of  the  sea.  Cjbs.  B.  G.  5,  6.    Here  the  accessory  predicate  insuyns  is  added  as  an 

h-plination  of  his  fear,  not  strictly  as  a  cause.    Thus  in  the  following  two  sentencea 

tht-  accessory  predicates  nescius  and  bmt>im  combine,  the  one  a  temporal  and  a  conces- 

t<ive  idea,  the  Other  a  temporal  and  conditional  idea,  haviug  at  the  same  time  the  force  of 

*'''c!mlSnisexpngnatiOnem  in  hunc  annum  coninW,  hand  vf^eiiis  qnosdam  «''se  qui 

aniio  ins^quenti  captam  tradiderint,  I  have  placed  the  la  1  ^^ ^^''"^^f^V^n  J^^^l^t 

B  c  ),  bring  miy  aware  that  there  are  some  who  state  that  it  was  taken  in  th^  next 

year.  Liv.  27, 7.--Generosiu8  in  sua  quicquid  sedc  gignitur^:  tuMtum  ali5n%terroe,  lu^td 

Ti^T^erty^^''  a  small  gain.-  »  honor.-  *  as  aguest  (literally :  to  hospitality).-  'should 

happen,  i.  /  if  death  should  befall  me,  a  frequent  euphemism.-  •  t'l''")'' j^^^o^^^vlr 

the  ground.  -  '  paralyzed.  -  « lifeless  -  »  homo  necessanus,  a  relative.-  ^^granter 

ferre,  to  bear  with  grief. 


258 


RELATIONS   OF  MODALITY. 


quo  alitur  (le^enomt.  ovorythiriLC  ffoniiine  jrrows  in  its  own  homo:  tramplanled  to  & 
t«trani:e  soil,  Ci  dcKcnwatcs  to  that  by  whicli  it  is  fed.  Liv.  38,  IT. 
§  556.  Aside  from  the  form  of  an  accessory  predicate,  the  relation  of 
c(»i"ncident  action  is  expressed  objectively  :  1)  in  the  form  of  an  attkiu- 
UTivK  PHRASE  (rarely  a  mere  noun)  in  the  aul.vtive,  as  mar/ m  da  more,  with 
great  shouting  (the  same  as  marjnopere  clamitam)',  2)  hy  a  phrase  or  nonn 
connected  with  tiie  main  action  through  the  preposition  cum  (negatively 
sine),  as  aliquem  ciun  frequentl  amnsu  audlre,  to  iiear  some  one  with  fre- 
quent assent  (i.  e.  frequenter  amntanH) ;  cum  exercitu  adcenlre,  to  arrive 
with  the  army,  i.e.  accompanied  bi/  the  army,  or  accompanying  the  army  ; 
sine  ordine  proficixci,  to  march  without  order,  i.  e.  obKcrcinfj  no  order. 

Him.  28.  Attributive  ablative  phrases,  expressing  the  relation  of'  c()inci- 
dent  action,  are  of  tliree  kinds:  1)  such  in  which  the  idea  of  coincident 
action  is  contained  in  the  attkibute,  as  nudo  corpore pugndre,  to  fight 
with  improtected  body  {i.  e.  without  protection)-,  2)  phrases  in  which  tlic 
idea  of  coincident  acfion  is  contained  in  the  «ovEUNiXd  N()U\,  as  magno 
CLAMoiiE  castra  intrare,  to  enter  the  camp  witli  great  shouling  (/.  e.  eland- 
tanf<);  '^)  such  phrases,  in  which  neither  the  noun,  nor  the  attribute  con- 
tain the  coincident  action,  the  phrase  being  conceived  as  an  object  of  an 
accessory  predicate  2Uidersfood,  in  whicli  the  iilea  of  coincident  action  is 
contain{Hl,as:  Oifirdbus  copiis  adcenit  {^ccomp.'^'SIED  by  all  his  troops). 

Ob^.  t.  The  first  of  the^e  forms  is  the  ablativk  op  quality,  usi-d  as  accessory  predi- 
cate, as  explained  Uiin.  2«>,  obs.  1.  lk'in«z<,'iaminatically  a  i'kedkative  lonn  (§4«>ti,  K.  "i.), 
it  (lufs  not  pioperly  l)»'lonL,'  \n  tin-  objoclivi!  lorius  of  this  relation.  Ir  is  ust-d  wlion  th»; 
coriicideiit  action  is  attached  to  nouns  expressini;  the  soul  of  the  dorr  {ii>; urn  forfi\  or  his 
body  or  parts  of  his»  body,  as  Fabiu'i  nuil'is  p,^(/ifj>/.^  in'imbnlilhat.  babuis  walked  alonj? 
with 'naked  feet  (instead  of  nwlux  pedibtis).  Vac.  Fam.  10,  :«  ;  rapiti'  demi<sot^rr<vn  tn- 
tuelKinturAhcy  looked  at  the  i,M-ound  witli  their  heads  han-,'in<;down,  C'jcs  H.  (t  1  .,2 ;  legati 
CiimUo  nroinis.^0  inqres-i  fooit  cnrhtiji,  the  i-nvoys  enfer«?d  tlie  senate-hall  with  disord('red 
hair.  Liv.  44, 19.  This  form  can  neviT  take  the  pieposition  cum  K\wi  cum  nuUtu  jteUiOu.^^ 
cum  cajnllo  pj'omisso  or  cum  capife  demubO). 

Ob>!   2    Tlie  second  of  these  forms,  th»;  action  belnc:  exprc*»sed  by  tlie  oovKUNi>fo  noun 
of  the  piirase  must  primarily  l)e  considt-rcd  as  an  ablative  of  means  and  instrument,  the 
same  as  all  other  adverbial  relitions  expressed  by  tlie  ablative,  a<  :  Mu.rimo  damore  it 
plaum  liruti  memoriam  pivmiuehatur,  he  expressed  his  fi-elin_'s  m  re-ard  to  the  memory 
of  iiriitus  wi;  h  (bv)  the  loudest  shouiinj:  and  applause.  Cic.  Thil.  H),  4.     Here  the  shouts 
and  applause  mav  be  considered  as  the  means  by  which  the  subj.jct  ;;ave  vent  to  histeel- 
in-'s-  hut  frequently  the  relation  of  '  means' is  only  an  indirect  one,  i)assin<'t)ver  into  that 
o!>o'incident  action,  when  the  noun  (always  a  verbal  noun)  may  he  re>olv.'d  into  a  present 
participle,  as  Lenilti  maqoo  Jietu  a  Cmmre  (iuj-iliumpefir7runf    the_  envoys  with  jireat 
weepin-  asked  help  fromCic.sar.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  22.  So  sedato  r/radu  ahire,  to  -o  away  witli 
a  nuiet^step.  Liv.  2.'),  37  (i.  ^.  t^edilte  -radiens).      This  kind  of   phrases  always  aumit.h 
the  construction  with  the  preposition  cum,  as  marjiwcum  strepUu  eijressi,  havin;;  j;ono 
out  with  o-reat  noise.  Cies.  B.  G.  2, 11.     Cum  must  be  used  if  the  nonn  has  no  attril)nte: 
Cum  impeno  in  prodnciam  proHcisci  vecease  erat.  to  dep.irt  with  'imjM^rium  \  i.  e.  bein*; 
invented  with  iniperium.  Cic.  Fam.  :^,  2;  but  Consuiriii,  imi}eno  proficiici  {Ex.i>).—  Cum 
crucidtu  rtH-ahiVur.  Ca>s.  B.  CJ.  r>,  45;  but  Sunwio  crucldtu  perid.  Cic.  N.  1).  :i  33.    Mere 
al)latives  witliont  an  attribute  mu-'t  be  taken  as  ablatives  t)f  means,  althoii;j;h  they  may 
often  be  chan<'ed  into  accessory  predicates  without  atlectinsi  the  sense,  as:  Agefnit  nuc- 
torifufe  amb<if~roti^i/io  (b>/  nnXh<n\iy.  Ini  plan).  Cic.  Sest.  .\\).  —  i',>„tumii'i~f  adverrus  /lofnles 
ceitare  (AwdefyiuL'  the  nobility).  Liv.  5),  Ak\.—  V<duiitritrin  dhwiti-mrfmre.  lb.  29.  m.—Ler/e 
anerc  Liv  1  9-  C'ic  Verr.  X.ATu-feiiUdctiune  aqtre,  to  sue  ))y  a  '  'eqU m-fio''  (a  form  of  pro- 
cedure in'theold  republican  law.  (Jaj   Inst.  4.  11).— But  in  a  few  co.nvkntional  expies- 
gion>J  'mere  ablatives'  deiioti;  c«)iiKident  action,  icitho'd  the  idea  of  instrumentality: 
Silenho  exercitum  redOcit.  C;es.  B.  C.  2,  :^  (so  11).  B.  (J.  7. 11 ;  Liv.  21.  A-D.-Ckundt't  pvovo- 
laiit.  Liv.  1,1.— Clamore  castra  invad'- re.  lb.  5,  ib.—Strepitu  adventare.  ball.  Jui^'.o^i. 

Obs.  3.   In   the  third  instance   of  ^.  28,  the   phrase   is   trenerally  connected   hy  cum 
(ueijatively  by  sine),  as:  Uasdrubat  propedieni  adi-r'U  cum  vuiiiu  haudijuCiQuain.  coitr 


RELATION   OF   COINCIDENT   ACTION. 


259 


temnenda  TIasdrtibal  will  in  a  few  days  be  present  with  a  body  of  troops  by  no  means 
K  d  sj)  s?(U  e.  accompanied  by  a  body  of  troops)  Liv.  30,  J-'^'^^^^'^^^Ztv^r 
mam  vetm-^ecum  febri,  I  learned  Crom  him  that  you  had  come  to  Rome  with  the  fever 

ri^^hiuinathTfever)    Cic.  Att.  6,  9.    But  there  are  several  exceptions  to  this  rule  : 
^  (a)  I     he  phrie^^^^^^^^^  as  an  ablative  absolute  with  a  part.npial  adjec- 

tive ,iy-)OBi      the  preposiih.n  cum  is  frequently  omitted.     Here  belong  the  majority 

ttlo^e  phrases  whic?h  t!,rmerly  were  explained  by  an  ^>;^^^^;««ft,^e  preposition  ^«^ 
ami  which  our  pr-seiit  u'rammarians  trenerally  represent  as  an  abla  i\e  ol  manneu  , 
a  h.ui-li  hev  neve  •  denote  a  pkopektv  of  the  main  action,  as :  AmbU)nx  alias  regipms 
«  r  V  i>/i  mc^^^r.  >ri«dio  quam  quntuor.  A.  was  fleeing  to  other  parts  with  a  retinue 
of  no  more  than  four  persons  (i.  e.hl<  retinue  heinrf  not  f/reater).  Cies  B.  G  U  j'---(^^ 

I    r  /  i\/i/^^  v^^^  i'l  rheda.  pcenulafus,  imignoet  i7nj>edimento  et  muhebr^  cmrxxta- 

//(7odiis  drove  with  his  wile  in  a  carriage,  wearing  a  wooden  cloak,  with  a  large 
luanmem^^^  it.  e.  his  luggage  being  lar^re,  and  his  «nte  consisting  of 

f  em  es  Cic  M"  1  28.)  Here  belong  the  difl^erent  i>hrases  with  ^  agmef.  describing  the 
m  "  ements'ol- ali  anfv  or  its  condition  on  a  march,  as  agmine  Q''<^dfa<>af^edere  to  ap- 
1  roVch  in  battle  order  (literallv  ftie  army  being  squared,  ov  arranged).  Cic  Phi!  13.  8 
1*42  S  dl  Ti  .'  10.";  agmine  >^uso  abire,  to  march  oft' with  dissolved  (spread  oat)  rank> 
T'iv  41  ^'l  ■  cihifo  aamiufi  by  forced  marches  (the  agmen  being  hurried).  Liv  2o,  .i5.-bo 
•  +»'  tnfJfr,  i^-l  nil^\  Hence  militarvlanc'ua<'-e  sometimes  makes  use  of  this  form, 
TrlZXr^^^^^^^^  '^-  interpreted  as  an  ablative 

Mh^olnn.  as  //Si" 'xfr«/«  ab  vrbe profectu^ est,  he  marched  from  the  city  with  an  enor- 

no-  1  armT  uf  7  9.  Thi^  sometime/ om/.i6./.^  copiis  is  nsed  instead  of  cum  ommbus 
Z,iK-  a"  >/oiVaV/Vav/,.a  C<e.<aris  ojnnibu-^  copiis  confendirunt,thi'.  enemy  marched  on 
SS^'saS^^i^A^an  their  tr.>ops.  Ces.  R  G^.  7     G^.ienilly^  however,  phr^es  M  thm 

'"''■ri'  .  r  h.n  «M  h     or      fsi  ioVai^^^^^^^  atqusUsvim  accubare,  to  sit  (lie)  to 

s;i:in  a^;;ui;^!e^n.r:;,s:n;:!dCn;!d^;;ets.  Nep  Age|  8^  \ry^^^^j^s::{^ 

tvridixoHm..  C;ic.  Tusc.  .5,  5.  But  also  with  cutn:  Ad  Alpes  cum  bona  pace  (without  oppo 
sition  bv)  6''a//5rMm  ;)€rm/?^.  Liv.21.32.  „„  ^^ 

Ops  4'  If  the  coincident  action  denotes  the  effect  of  the  predicate,  the  nouns  ex- 

S  come   «1    .no  to  lUe  shame  of  the  Roman  people.  Uv.  44,  111. 

OB.%   Be-i.le.  the  preposition,  cm  and  .«-if,  i»  »ith  .-m  •'•W.'vt.vc  is  fometitnos  tised 
,o?Mire\s'^Hl;^i..e,,t.   eti;  ...,h,,t  ™^^^ 

must  l.e  rendet^d  e.ther  l.y   he    Wat,  e  ^f.^'^^ f ,!;'„ '.'^?'^  m"„;°i;,  „„,,  ettm  l.c,;iml.; 


31 


tamJ2  pUm'^'i  gradu  in  nosiem  inuucu--.  i^iv.  •«'•'•*';"•  ,,""  "9  T.r     ^  Maibre*  nostri  ne 


2m 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


(heirships),  quum  (whUe)  Asiam  x>ro\\ncmmcons7daHttnpertooh\w(iros*.Cic.  ^1«^«-  34--- 
9.  Varus  dc  tertia  vi^jiliS  dftnfio  t'xerrituui  in  oppidnm  rrdOcit.  Ctys^  15.  C  .  "A  d4  —  ill. 
Hrtsdnibalac  Majro,  pruMiii^sis  Niunidis,  (luain  potonint  maxwie  citato  ngmtnehom:* 
miui  ciept-nint.  Liv.  2o,  35.—  11.  Tantiis  fult  terror  militum,  ui  quunU.ajuf  \olusCiiu8 
cum  equitatu  ad  castr.i  venissot,  Iklein  non  fac-ret^  adoss»^  oim  incolumi  C  a'sarein  /jp- 
ercitu.  Cit's.  13.  G.  0,  41.—  12.  lieatiis  est  nemo  (lui  ejl  le-re»  (in  such  a  condition)  vivit 
wt  non  niodo  iinpanc  sed  eiiam  cum  summfi  iiitfrfeetOn-s  ffi^na  intcrlici  possir  t  ic. 
I'liil  U  :i5  -  l;i  NiiUi  est  altcrcatio'»  clamonf/us  uiiqnain  hahita  vu\iorirj'is.  Cic.  Hrut. 
44,  li>4.—  14.  Ponteiu  Mulviinu^  maqno  comitata  .\llobro;;iim  le-ilii  in;rredi  nicipiuiit. 
Cic  Cat  8  2  ti— 1.').  Oai.latn  dixrMrintJnM)eratr)reiu  l^>iM:lnnni«//m;M//iOtrey«'/w/^ 
inambiihlie  in  "vmnasio.  Liv.  v>9,  •->().—  l»i.  Voluptai»  fini^'itur''  pulch,rrimo  restitw^  vt 
QriuVu'*  reqdli  in  Holio»"  sedeiis».  Cic.  Fin.  2,  «1.  (!'.».- 17.  Mar/no  cum.  d<dore  \yAn-\c\i\^- 
rumii  elapsus>2  sum  eis.  Cic.  Fani.  10. 23.—  18.  Ciuorum  eonsilia  Cu'sarein  a  taiiUl  gloria 
summo  cum  terrore  homiiium  avocjirint,  exputare»»  non  possum.  Fum.  10,  24.— Con»p. 
Cic.  Verr.  2,  4, 5M ;  lb.  2, 4,  30  ;  Liv.  44,  42. 

C.  Relation  of  Quantity. 

1)  Relation  of  Litoislty. 

^.j.j7.  Quantity,  us  a  graminaticjil  circumstance,  occui-s  either  as 
DIMENSION,  or  as  INTENSITY  (deguee).  The  rehitiou  of  dimension  is 
always  an  auxiliary  of  other  relations,  namely  those  of  space,  time, 
value  and  weioiit.  But  in  the  relation  of  intensity  the  idea  of  quantity 
is  directly   applied    to  deline  those  qualities  and  actions  whose  idea 

admits  of  an   increase  or  diminution. 

Ob^  1  The  qnestion  'when  qitantitt  becomes,  quamty'  is  an  old  metaphysical  pro- 
l)lem  III  (JUAMMAK  the  relaiion  of  iNTKNsiTY  is  the  point  where  botli  rel.itions  me<^t. 
Intensity  is  the  relation  in  which  qualities  and  acti-ais  are  <ieterinined.  a<  it  were,  by 
mea-ure  and  weight.  lint  in  this  relation  liie  measurini,'  is  not  determined  by  any  meas- 
ure-unit- as  it  is""  in  all  the  applied  relations  of  dimension,  but  by  the  one  measure  oJ 
the  mind!  which  in  Eiii,dish  is  n-pre-ented  by  the  j;eneral  noun  'DtiiUEK',  and  in  Latin 
by  the  isi^l'nirtcant  word  •  opu^'  (see  Kern.  21»). 

Ons  "i  The  relation  of  i>imexsion  is  one  of  the  relations  of  modai.ity.  beinir  one  of  the 
kinds  «rf'modifvinir  an  action,  lint  this  relation  has  the  peculiarity  that  it  is  always  sub- 
servient to  other  relation-.  It  would  hive  been  more  pliilosophieal  to  treat  the  ivlation 
of  dimension  in  a  sip irite  chapter.  comprisiiiLT  all  it-  ditlerent  applications  to  kxtknt 
ii  4%)  ri.ACE  (§  'A^,  li.  7),  TiMK  (§  r>.")t))  and  vai.itk  (^  5.V.>  foll.>,  wliieh  would  liave  dehiied 
with  «'i-eiter  clearness  the  painmatical  forms  employed  in  tins  relation.  Theso  tiram- 
maticTil  forms  are  in  mat. v  respects  identical  ;  but  at  the  fame  time  they  are  difterent 
accordin"  to  the  nature  of  the  relation  to  which  tliey  are  apidied.  In  t)ursuinj;.  how- 
ever, tins' plan,  it  would  have  been  nece-sary  to  treat  the  sui)jectsof  lime  and  place  in 
ditfe'reiit  parts  of  the  system,  aside  fnmi  other  practical  inconv<Miiences  of  such  an  ar- 
ran-'ement.  Hence  the  rel  itioi:  of  dimen>i<m  has  be«'n  assi<;ned  to  ditrerent  chapters. 
It  o7dy  reniains  now  to  consider  'quantity'  as  a  dimension  of  value  and  weiout  (.§  559), 
and  as  the  inner  measure  of  actions,  or  at»  intensity. 

■  »  »^.  The  grammatical  forms  which  are  used  in  the  relation  of  inten- 
sity are  1)  atthiuutive  phrases  in  the  ablative,  containing  the  noun  opus 
as  governing  word,  and  a  quantitative  adjective  (§  2G3)  as  attribute  ;  2)  the 
absolute  neutek  forms  of  the  quantitative  adjectives  ;  3)  the  adverbs  of 
intensity ;  4)  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees  of  descriptive 
adjectives  (^  28.")  foil.) ;  5)  modal  and  comparative  clauses  of  intensity  (p. 

035  foil.;  p.  750.  foil.) _ 

bv  courtesv,  trave  such  a  character  to  disilnsrui-hcd  persons,  wlio  thertbv  enjoyed  in 
the  province  all  the  privileges  of  real  envoys  or  commissioners— ^  to  hold.—  ^  naetn 
facere  to  make  somei)odv  believe  eometliinjr,  to  convince  somel)ody.—=»  a  slayer.— *  alter- 
'catidnem  hatjcre,  to  have  a  quarrel.-  *  the  Mnlvian  bridge.-*  crejnda,  a  mm\ii\.-\nnr/er^, 
to  represent.—  »  dress.—  »  royal  state.—  »o*c//iww,  throne.—  "assassin.—  ^-elaOt^io 
escape.—  *•  to  make  out,  to  jjuess. 


RELATION  OF  INTENSITY. 


iU- 


r*9-  or  the=e  form?»  those  marked  No.  1. 2. 3.  are  treated  in  the  frdlowing  remarks. 
Tl??comi'ari-on  ofrijectives  has  been  considered  in  the  first  Part.  The  de-rees  of  ad- 
iec  ive^iii  ..^of  ?he  grammatical  forms  of  'intensity',  since  every  comparative  im- 
du's  the  adverb  of  intet^Tity  7nar,is.  at.d  every  superlative  the  adverb  maxime.  The  dif- 
ferenl  forms  of  the  clauses  of  intensity  are  considered  B.  V 1. 
nem  *>9    The  ablative  of  the  noun  opu.%  analogous  to  all  those  general 
nouns  bv  which  the  adverbial  relation  itself  is  expressed,  as  tempu.^  spa- 
^^m2dus,  caum.  pretium,  is  attributively  cor^nected  ^vtth  the  different 
flu     ;  of  the'  qttantitative  form-adjectives  1)  in  the  }^'^'-§^^iJ^ 
live  forms:  qnanio  opere,  how  much  (as  a  relative  '  a.O  ;  2)  m  the  deliiiite 
form    /a  L  Lre,  so  much  ;  3)  in  the  indefinite  form:  magno  opere,  mnjore 
!;;" ;  ^;^Li  o,ire.  snnuno  W>U  greatly,  very  greatly  ^-<^-^^^::'^; 
in  the  hi'diest  degree,  and  negatively  no?i  magna  oj^ere,  httle,  veiy  littK  ,as 

Quanmv,^  opore  ip,.  municlpil  cau.J  ^«^^^^'«' 'l^^j.  ^^^^^'^^^X^/^^S^;;^ 


«anl  Low  'inalKj  ...v«./i«,/     '^^ 'Xt-.m.-^^r  H.*  <  ^  I^^ 

?ffXvS ;;;.c  rXSri'iiXTcl'ilHT'on St.;,;*«hen  l  «...ed  U ,  Ce  sob.. .9 

fcuiv,- art.classirieil acrnnhn_;t.. llH'.r NrMKRAL c  a^^^ 

Ob-  3    Fiirthcrelaliveforccof  4M(mto;Mre8ecR.31.oss.  6. 
7?,m  -m   The  ADVRUUS  of  IXTKNSITT  «re  11  llic  interrogative  and  rela- 
^\^Zfm   I,  w  («.r,v   en  tHOcl  as  a  relative) ;  2)  tl.e  definites  Mm  so;  mleo 
^y  J,    mcl     «'  t<  s»cl.  a  de-ree;  3)  tl.e  indefinites  mlde,  admodum.  rehe- 
ZnZr^y  very  n.ucli,  exceedingly,  intensely  im-^.^",  more ;  '««^"«^; 
!;^>st     «<i'k  to<^  too  n.neh;   mtl>,  enon.irh,   sufficiently;    pamm,  not 

applied  iquaui latus,  9''f  ('*'«'  !7^  7''«  «'^^^^  ^^  Me   O^.am  max  mi  operam  das  ?  Le. 

direct  interroijations  chiefly  (►ccur  in  the  ^'>  "'c=^;^«-  ^J*^-  J(,  ^j  j^^  „^  ,    i^g.  Strange 

llmoptimequamdudumtuadi^,^^^^ 

nuestion!  IL.w  Ion-  ago  did  ^ou  a  rue  ?  IJ^m- ^-- t'.r  *  „.««.o,^  „nrt  in  interrogative 


o  (to  wear  fc.r  a  V>"^;"V^,  y^^^^/';.;^',^  ^  th  v^e  a  e  ^N'ho  lovV,  may  be  seen  from 
amant^yd^r  hoc  \!^^l^Zam{^^^^^^^  adjectives  only,  or  with  adverbs,  btit 
this.  Cic.  Fam.  .,  ^'-^i'^'Z^X^^^T^xy-yx^^  and  cupere,  as  :  QunmreUm  etmmnunc  tn 

not  ^^it^. verbs   ex.^c^t^om*•^me.^^,^^^^^^  ^^^  province^  Cic.  Att.  7,  1,  J-<?''«7 

'SZl1<;:Xi:i>^^l^r^!^         ^vish  to  be  praised,  how  they  are  ashamed  of 
bcins  defciLied !  Cic.  Fin.  5.  22. 


262 


I1EL.VTI0NS   OF  MODALITY. 


OBs.  3.  Sometimes  qmm  and  qnanfnm.  in  connection  ^vlth  acljecti vcs  am^^^  by 

Willi  />T(Oi'.s.  7)  is  a  sviioiivin  ol  raW^;  h'rqnam  r/mr^  extdiaa.  Cic.  1  lane  o.    in  com 
i)o><ition  with  vU  it  means  'however  much  \     See  p.  (.'.i-i  foil. 
OB-    4    T-am  an.l  ndeo  differ  1)  from  each  other  ;  2)  from  fie  and  ifa  ;  3)  ^'j^^^^^'?/'?-^;'': 

mho  t  irahomre  ov  tmHum)  is  used  ])el()re  adj.-ctivep  to  i-xpre^s  the  Knirlish   >o  il 

m-,.  c  I  1 'o  '  r  „lira4  wi  1.  '  «V,  which  in  L^.lin  i»  ii.troih.c..,!  hynuam.  as  :  A  !//</  '■«  /»». 

JhW>;w  7'/r/kf.v^  <7'/rt//i  ?v>^,  I  am  rt.<  tenderliearted  rt.«  you  are,  ()  j  i<!.-e>.  C  k  .  Mil     •  1.     li 
/r/mi^rolX'd  hvi//am.iti^  used  even  lu'fi.re  m-^/.^  and  can  be  i.ei  h.T  r.plaeed  bv 

T  rnnir  >o  well,  as  I  can  disregard  those  thm-C.e\ttl.{. 

20^  //)  If  ■  he  En-'liri  \i',  «lualifyin-  an  mljeetive  is  followed  by  a  That-rlause*  e.ther 
tun  o«Lo  sometimes,  but  rarely,  Ha  or  sic)  is  used,  ilie  n>nJMmnon  that  be.ns:  v  - 
m-d  bv  /!•  xlq>>e  annid  faciehdnv,.  tarn  framu.  anient e.ut  e.vph>ra'a_  ^^1^:  T  -n  '.  ' 
i\a  nor  were  we  while  doih-  this,  so  fcx.lish  that  we  should  consuler  victory  «'r/'er  ani. 
c\c  Fam  fi  1 -■  lleo  e^t  nnhi  inrmi.^  vf  etc.,  he  is  so  odious  to  me  that  etc  C.c.  t  ..m. 

lant  y  rnrnished  did  he  depart  for  the  province  thathe  left  nothm-  ar  hon le  C.e^\  eir  ., 
1  Vl  SeeK  15  oB<  3-(0  Adeo  properly  means  'to  such  a  d^^r/rce  .  he  kiiui  a>  <o, 
and  hence  ban  i  I^reater  emphasis  that,  tarn.  It  \s  more  frequently  employed  than  -/m. 
fn  dirtn  questi^ans   and  takes  then,  the  tirs,  plnre  with  the  enclitic  ne   '«  ^V/^^'i.^Sr,?/  1 1 

may  be  Ivplaced  hyifane  (K.  15,  obs.;J),  as  Adnlne  me  ^>V"s(ume^e^  rl^^K  m  7     •  - 

irascerer,  did  vou  believe  me  to  be  i^o  unjust  as  to  be  ariirrv  with  you  .'  V  r.tio^of'  m\s 

/)  Neither  adeo  nor  fa,n  can  be  used  to  express  the  Kn-rl^h  .0  i  i     'V*/     V,cJexmc4ed 

N FK     If  '  .w'  has  the  meaniui:  of  '  manner'  (in  ^'uch  a  manner,  fh>fi),  it  ib  cither  expicseea 

by  dc  or  ifa  (see  R.  15,  Obs.  3.).    For  the  use  of  eo  see  K.  5,  4 Ad).  ,..,,, 

Obp.  5.  Tarn  and  quam  are  frequently  blended  (./)  with  the  ^'^'^''^l^lJ!!'^^  //IwiVl 
auag>wt  ;  (/.)  witii  thequantitative  adjective  multummio  ta,du,nnm\  7''«^/'^  •/'  ^^^i»^ 
the  descriptive  adjective  7nar/nu.^  into  (anfus  and  quantum,  bee  t?  2.).  ,  ^  ^M  ,  §  -:t»o. 

Obs.G.   Valde  and  adnwdum  are  synonyms    being  used  both  ^'^'f''^,  "/V^'^'S^  "'^^^^^ 
verbs.    They  are.  accor.lin-l>,  rendered  eitluM-  by  ^  ven/  or  by  '  very  inmh    2rfZd 
)^r  (adverb  of  vehemen.-^)  is  more  em,.hatieal   than  either,  eorrespondin- to  our  ^jr^^c/- 

U  or  eVtnmely.     It  is  used  before  acijectives  and  verbs.  ^A'^VJ^'T/  i^^'J^r//;  r^  me 
celJmsiqnnni/Msvfi^  a  very  lar-e  and  hi-h  statue.  ^^'^•- Vr''V^-,~r/''r  ^it   V^^^^^^^ 
nilmndinn  dthctanint.  Philotimus's  letter  has  verv  much  deli;,'hted  me.  Cic.  Att.  «,  >-J. 
7 'rfA'  /i  i^^^^^  rumor  Was  that  you  had  been  very  prosperous 

Cic  fLiI  8  7 -4i7a/.?/-.'  ilUid  tuum,  qmd  mi/n  valde  anuerat,  vehement,  r  di><plicd 

that  wo  d Vi;;Il«.^r6'  of  thine,  which  I  hafl  liked  very  ^^^^^^'^^^]\^^^-iru^t^n"fS^ 
in<rU'  Tie  Att   13  21.    Instead  of  tv/?fmf«^^r  the  expression  etiani  atqne  elinrn  (wiinri 

a;Jo'nu.ans^'.',afra;.Z  .,.«.)  is  frequently  used.  ^-^^^-^^y^^^^^H:;. 
gmtli/   n^  etiam  a*que  (tvmi  roqo  te,  1   ask  you  most  ur-ently.  Cic.  tam.  1.3,  o.— ^a/"o 
dum  nihil,  or  nihil  adnwdiim  means  '  almost  nothiiig\ ^ 

*  In  place  of  a  That-clause  theEnjrlish  frequently  employs  the  construction  with  a«  and 
an  infinitive  (.*o  as  to).  This  construction  has  no  comparative  force,  and  cannot  be  icu- 
deied  by  quam.    See  the  example  under  No.  (e). 


RELATION   OF  INTENSITY. 


263 


Obs  7  Per  in  composition  with  adjectives,  adverbs  (also  with  quam.  Obs.  3),  has  the 
meanin-'  of  valde  (P  I  .  p.  221).  Sometimes  it  is  thus  used  as  a  separate  word  (in  fnieH), 
as:  I'rPeMim  miqai  '<e<fi>no,  I  value  it  very  hi-hiy.  Cic.  Att.  10, 1  l.-^i.H<,  ;>|r/ord 
accommoda'um  tihi,  he  said  it  would  be  greatly  convenient  to  you.  lb.  Fam.  3.  5, 3. 

Jitm,  8L  The  qtinntitative  adjectives  used  to  express  the  relation  of  in- 
tensity, must  be  considered  as  absolute  adjectives  in  the  neuter  gen- 
DEii  (i^  boS),  witli  which  a  general  noun  representing  the  idea  of  quantity  is 
uiulerstood.  This  noun  inay  be  conceived  as  corresponding  to  the  En- 
glish noun  '  atuount ',  which  sometimes  is  expressed  by  copia  {tantum  = 
tanta  copia).  The  adjectives, thus  used,  (always  in  the  singular)  occur  either 
in  the  form  of  the  accusative,  or  in  that  of  the  ablative  case.  The  accu- 
sative is  analoiz:f)ns  to  the  accusative  of  extent  (U.  7,  obs.  2),  while  the 
ablative  is  lluit^of difference.  The  quanlitative  adjectives  thus  used  are: 

1)  Intkrijooative  and  relative  forms  :    Qvatitvm,  how  much,  and  qr/anto,  how 
much   bv  how  much:  qiiantumvis.  however  much.—  2)  Definite  form:  tanti'm,  so 
much'-  ianfo  so  much,  as   much,  by  .'jo  much;  tantitndeni  (corresi)onding  to  idem), 
\\\<i  as  niiiclWwithout  a  form  in  O).—  3)  Indefin[tk  form:  aliquantum  and  ahquanto, 
soin.what.  a  little,  coiisideialdy  ;  multum  and  multo.  much  ;  panlum  and  jviulo.  a  lit- 
tle;/>/'/.<,•  ("witlioutan  ablative  form),  more,  ;7/'/nm?/m,  most  (plurimo  only  in  relation 
to  price  and  value) ;  vmnmn,  too  much  (nimio  after  comparatives,  =  quam  nimium). 
Ob<   1    Whether  the  quantitative  adjectives,  enuinerat.-d  above,  are  called  'adverbs', 
or  •  absolute  adje"ti  ves  witli  an  adverbial  force'  is  a  mere  ditleriince  in  terms.  But  that  by 
the  Latins  ihey  were  considered  and  felt  as  absolute  adjectives  appears  not  only  (lom 
the  two  form- in  ?/mand  o.  but  also  «rom  their  use  as  accusatives  and  ablatives  of  ppace 
and  time  (It  7  oi}-.  7.  x> :  R.  i:i,  2).  wliicli  are  wholly  aiialo-,'ous  to 'accusative-' and  ablatives 
of  intensity"   as  Quinrtiu-^,  taidum  Thebis  morafus  quantum  casus  coegil,  Elaleam  redit, 
Ouinetiiis  "haviii<''  tarried  at  Thebes  so  long  as  the  case  demanded,  returns  to  Elatea. 
Liv  3;J  2—Anfi(x'hus  tantum  prorjre>sus  e  cast  lis  e.^t  ut  dimicatiirum  appareret,  Antto- 
chus  came  forward  troni  the  camp  solar  as  to  make  it  apparent  that  he  was  Avilling  to 
lidit    lb  27  3'»    In  the  lirst  si-ntence  tantum  is  an  accusative  of  the  Length  of  Time  (R.  14), 
at7d  in  the'la-t,  sentence  it  is  an  accusative   of  Distance  (R.  7,  obs.  3).    The  adverbial 
accu-^atives  of  inteiisitv  (whether  called  absolute  adjectives  or  adverbs)  must  be  distin- 
<Miished  from  the /r(//<.vi/ir:: accusatives  of  (luantit-.tive  adjectives  used  absolutely,  both 
haviiK^  the  common  feature  that  thev  are  conceived  as  attributes  of  the  same  i:oveming 
idea  (amount  or  intensitv).    In  many  instances  this  distinction  is  plain,  as  in  the  phra-es 
multum  perftrre,  muVuin  audere,  to  bear  much,  to  risk  much,  where  evidently  mvttum 
is  the  tran-hive  object  of  the  transitive  verbs  petferre  and  audere*.    On  the  other  hand, 
in  the  phrases  aliqutm  imiltum  dilhjere.  to  love  somebody  much  :  plunnuim  interest,  it 
is  very  important ;  nimium  7iocef,\l  injures  too  much,  the  quantitative  adjectives  mul- 
tum,  vivnmvm   ninuum  are   objects   of   intensity.     Often,   however,    the    ditference 
is  les.^  evident   especially  when  the  governing  verh  is  ditlerently  conceived  and  con- 
strued in  En"li-h.    Thus  quantitative  adjectives  are  frequently  used  as  objects  oi jjosse. 
qMie«e  inu<t  fje  considered  as  iraiisitive  objects  (see  §  4'JO,  R.  82).  wh:le  in  EuLMish  they 
take  an  adverl)ial  form,  as:  Grafll  ta>dum possumus  quantum  vicfi.  a!>  ior  mttxn-nce  we 
are  as  i)ow<  rful  as  the  vanquished  can  be.  Cic.  Fam.  4. 1.—Qui  apud  me  jylunmimipos- 
sunt    who  have  the  irreatest  inlluence  with  me.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  1**.     Here  helongs  tlie 
l)hra<e  alicui  ?nulfum  {plurimum  etc.)  tribuere.  which  means  'to  esteem  highly  one  s 
o|)inion<  or  to  have  great  deference  for  somebody',  as  Ei  plurimum  triouanuu^  a  qm  pin- 
Amunidilinimur,  we  should  esteem  him  most  highly  (or  'should  have  the  greaiest  defer- 
ence  for  him' )  by  whom  we  are  loved  most.  Cic.  Oft'.  1. 15. 47.   Here  plunmuni  is  a  transi- 
live  object  of  the  verb  tribuere,  whether  rendered  adverbially  or  by  a  transitive  object. 

0b<»  2  The  forms  in  vm  of  the  quantitative  adjectives,  including  the  comparative  ad- 
jective ?;/^/>\  cannot  be  used  to  qualify  adjectives,  but  only  to  qualily  veibs,t  except 

♦  When  the  quantitative  adj-ctives  are  used  as  tran-^itive  objects,  the  plural  neuters 
mav  always  be  ns<.d  in  place  of  them  {multa  perferre.  multa  audere).  Many  gramma- 
rians maintain  that  there  is  a  great  ditlVrence  between  midta  and  mu'tump-rffrre.  rins 
difTereiicc  is  merelv  iina  'inarv.  Tlie  difTerence  begins  only  at  the  point  where  the  quan- 
titative<  have  aua'drerlAa/  force.—**  That  these  are  transitive  accusatives  is  proved  l)y 
the  fact  that  jM^sse  is  construed  with  accusatives  not  belonixiui;  to  quantitatives,  as: 
Quod  poterant,  id  audebant.  Cic.  Quint.  2,  1.- 1  This  is  an  evidence  that  the  I^itins  did 
iTot  feel  these  Quantitatives  as  adverbs,  but  as  accusatives.  Else  there  would  have  beea 
no  reason  to  exclude  them  from  qualifying  adjectives. 


2G4 


RELATIONS   OF   MODALITY. 


nimium,  wliich  is  nsed  with  the  force  of  nimis,  both  before  adjectives  and  verbs,  an  ni- 
viimn  multi.  too  many,  Cic.  CMu.  4H.  In  i.Iaco  of  the  other  q';j}'V;.''';'^'^•^^Vr,,?;  7'  ,^ 
nientioiied  U  30  must,  he  u^ed  to  qualifv  adjectives,  as  quant  (/iffUnfui,  how  riifflc  uit  (not 
Qxantiim  ditncilis) :  tarn  inmlerhs- (uot  t<inf>/m  in^-olens) ;  valde  inrj^mom^  (not  vviUum  m- 
nenwmx)  ■  mnqU  vloneux,  more  adapted  (not  plus  idoneus) ;  maJtme  (not  plunnium)la- 
imio,^u.o.  The  forms  with  o/>f'/-^  (li.  21h  are  used  synonymously  with  the  accusattve  (ad- 
verbial) forms  of  the  nuantiiatives.  They  qualify  predicjites  ot  all  kinds,  but  cannot  be 
connected  with  attributive  adjectives.  VCith  some  verbs  the  forms  in  0]m-e  "^^t  «f^;»»';; 
Thus  valere,  to  be  strong,  to  be  i)owerful,  to  be  worth,  always  takes  the  forms  m  urn,  not 
those  in  opere.  Ex.  11. 

Obs   3    The  forms  in  o  of  the  quantitatives  are  used  before  coMPAnATivES,  and  with 
Pueh  verbs  as  im|)lv  a  compilative  tas  pnv-^irire.  to  be  superior)*,  as:  Quaido  (not  <rmn- 
turn,  nor  quam,  ikm-  quanto/>ere)  Stoici  meii'/,;  qm  a  vobis  repiehendui.t.ir,/io/«;  nim\f'':^- 
te    kvc  the  St.dcs  who  aiv  censured  by  you  ?  Cic.  N.I).  1,  44.-Sic  die  wuKo  -^celemtwr 
et  mquior  q.iam  Hadriilmis,  aliqmnfo  etiam  jUhio?'  hut   thus  he  was  m v.Vi  mar.  t  t/la   >- 
ou.'<  and  wicked  thin  lladrianus,  and  also  a  gcxxi  deal  luckier.  C  ic.  V  er.  2,  1,  ^*-^^"'^ 
mihi  i>ne-^(af  in  eandeni  recidere  tortQnani.  qnaui  etc.,  it  is  inxchnwre  pnUrahle  to  me 
to  relapse  into  the  same  situation  than  etc.  Cic.  Sefit.  KT,  H.j.     More  rarely   the   f«>rms 
in  0  art  applied  to  sii-kulatives,  as  inulto  ex  maJ^ma  parte,  by  far  lor  the  ^re.Y'^^'t  jk  rt. 
Cic  Verr  2  1   1«).    The  most  usual  adverb  of  intensity  which  is  connected  with  hi per- 
latiVes  is/oWV,  as:  Apud  llelvetio- /o«7^  nobUis^iinu.^  fuit  Or-etorix    anion-  the  Helve- 
tians Or-etorix  was  far  tlu  most  dUtinquUhed  man.  C\es.  B.  G.  1,  2.    For  the  meanin-of 
ouam  wilh  superlatives  see  obs.  (i.-AHform-adjeetives.  qualifyiuL'  comparatives  assume 
a  (  uantitative  character,  and  must  take  the  ablative  form  of  the  neuter,  as  mlnlo  magis, 
no  (by  nothing)  more;  eomagis  (with  the  force  of  tan(o?/iarjis),  the  more,  so  much  more. 
Obs  4    The  En'^lish  '^.s'  much'  after  cardinal  adverbs  (twice,  three  tim^K  as  much  etc.) 
is  cxuressed  by  taido  after  the  Lsxtin  airdinal  adverbs,  as  /Us  taulo  raleo  quaTn.  ralui  pH- 
vslixm  worth  twice  as  much  as  before.  Plant.  Merc.  2.  2,  20.     More  rarely  the  accusa- 
tive  forms  are  used,  af*  Sexhstao  turn  qwim  quantum  satum  est  abint  urn  •^^.''^^''"'^nnr.Fn' 
six  times  as  much  as  was  sown  was  taken  from  the  farmers    Cic.  \err.  2,  3,  4v5.— Hu  Ln- 
ernh'av  much  wore'  or 'as  jnuch  aqain'  nfwr  cardinal  adverb-  is  expressed  by  tan  to 
(■sometimes  eo)  with  amplius  or  plus,  as  Quinquies  tanto  ampliu><  (luain  el  licitum  erat  civi- 
tatibiis  impemvit,  he  taxed   the  cities  with    t\ve  times  as  much  a-.-ain  as    h«    was 
allowed.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3,  97. -Instead  of  bi<  tanto  the  form  alfero  tanto  is  of  en  used   as 
Via  altera  tanto  lonqiOrem  anfractum  habebat,  the  road  was  twice  as  long  (literally  had 
a  'round  about'  twice  as  long).  Nep.  Eum.  8. 

Obs    5   The  En<dish  'little'  as  adverb  of  intensity  (opposed  to  'much')  has  no  direct 
equivalent  in  Lalin,  the  quantitative  panlum  meaning  '  a  little',  and  P'lrum,  too  littlet. 
Thi«*  adverl)  i<  "enerally  express(;d  bv  connectiiiir  a  iie<ration  wiih  the  ditlerent  eqi  i\a- 
lents  of  mw/i,"as  mm  maqnopere  (■«.2!».  last  example),  r/o/i  inultum.mimm^  mult  urn 
Thus  'a.*  little  a-*'  is  generallv  expressed  l)y  )>o/i  maqis  quam  (^  112).    Sometimes    how 


little'  and 'so  little' are  express^ed  by  quantulu.^  and  tantulus,  n^  qnantulum  judica/e 
s  as  litth!  as  we  can  jiidsre.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 3. 1.     Tantulum  mostly  corresp 


7)0*>v///iw,s%  as  little  as  we  can  jiinge.  v.ic.  v  urr.  «,  o.  i.     iy.u;,;„v ...,  - ';. •  y  1"^"^  l^,,^.^^ 

Eu.'li-h  -ever  so  little',  as  si  tantalum  mndo  interest,  if  there  is  ever  so  little  difference. 
Cic^Le"  1,  12.  :W.  'How  little'  is  j:enerally  exi)ressed  by  quam  ''»/'«'  '^,, 7''«'^  "^?"»  «* 
Quarnll  te  nan  decebat,  how  little  wu-  that  becoming  to  you!  Cic.  I  hil.  '^^^-^"yj^ 
nihil  explica.o,ho^vVut\ii  do  vou  explain!  Cic.  Att.  i).  2.-' •'^W*// '^' is  exptx-sed  by  adeo 
nou  or  adro  nihil,  as  Ma/dius  adeo  non  fenuif  iram,  ut  qladio  cwctum  se  m  senatumrentu- 
rum  diceret,  Manlins  c(.ntrolled  his  an-er  so  little  that  he  said  he  would  come  with  his 
sword  into  the  senate.  Liv.  8,  5.-//(Pc'  adeo  nihU  movennd  qiuimquam,  ut  etc.,  this  had  so 
little  effect  on  anybody  thai  etc.  Liv.  3.  2.  For  the  particulars  in  the  use  of  non  vvigis 
quam,  and  nonplus  quam,  in  the  meaning  '  as  little  ,  see  p.  <j7  toil. 

Obs  0  The  relative  use  of  the  quantitative  adjectives  and  adverbs  (quantum,  wiam, 
Quant'opere)  is  confined  to  compauative  clauses,  which  are  nothing  els.-  but 'relative 
clauses'  apolied  to  the  relations  of  manner  and  intensity.  The  antwedentsof  the  quanti- 
tatives of  the  relative  form  are  Din  the  comparative  clauses  of  '  difference  the  compaua- 
TivKsof  adiectives,  in  which  instance  quam  (than)  is  used  as  relative  word,  passing  over 
into  a  conjunction.  See  §  2«.)4  f«.ll.-  2»  If  the  comparison  is  one  of  equality,  the  antecedents 
are  tam,  tantum  (tanto),  tantopere,  tantundem.  The  relative-,  ^\h.ch  are  alwajs  rendt^^ 
by  'a.s',  almost  always  take  the  same  form  as  the  antecedents,     lo  tayn  corresponds 

*  The  comparative  p/ws  and  the  superlative  pluHmum  of  coiirse.  cannot  be  used  to 
intensify  comparatives.  Hence  they  have  only  onk  form  ^^'^*<>' '".  J,*^'*  .rP,^Pf,^,V 
has  the^ame  nature  as  plus  and  plurimum,  but  it  is  used  "V^"""f,  ^'«"„^'*Vli  ' 
paratives  in  place  of  7?/am  with  a  positive,  as  nimio  p/^/^\  more  than  too  "]"ch-  » 'aut. 
Bacch.  4.  4,  21. -t  Sometimes,  but  very  rarely,  the  quaulitative  parw/n,  in  classical  Ian- 
gauge  occurs  with  the  meaning  '  little'. 


RELATION   OF   INTENSITY. 


265 


.    ,.    „i,,.,Hin.r^  Pie  Or  1  35.— 'S'i  m£  am/is  tantum  quantum  pro- 

the  language  (he  uses)  in  his  Pl*;''"'"^^'^- .^  ,^: '^^^^^  cjc   ^tt.  2.23.    For  examples  with 

quantum  omnes  hrede^.  he  '^^,^1;^,*  "^""  , ''^,  „«  n  relative  which  often,  (as  in  English) 
fjefore  comparatives  takes  quanto  (rarely  quod)  fl^'''^^]^^^;^^^^^^,^  rendered  '  th^,'  as  : 

^:  SlSS?^i;/S  'S.n^Si^^re  ~|S^,lt  ^^^±^'^ 

tlli^VufpiS^S'^^k^^^^^"^  ■""^'^  a.  I  see  rn  his 

'"^.'^' 7 ''T'Ltl'i'jrr' ah^oluto  adjective  rammvmflrrc-alar  superlative  of  «t/p«n»),  in 

p.ri/,7n,m  in  titree  or  tair  days  at  m^  'Kiffe  «»'«"'"'"»«  <'^«'*«/  '  ,^T  "'"'  ^»" 
as  synonym  of  iiluiinvun  ar  mxtm^.    y"'  ^',  j  _j,  ,,  „,^0  used  before  adjec- 

^;^^^:^:,^^^^^::^^^^^-^:^^^^'  -"'  ^'-'-^  ^-^^  J""'"""""' 

♦hie  mn«t  be  exceeding V  pleasant  to  me.  Cic.  tam.  id,  ib,  «. 
''^'"Dic  :irp:tl.st;,i»,«;.«pudeanthonunes.,  ,n,ud^ 

Cic.  N.  D.  4,  49.-  3.  At  ici  ^'\%X%ll'  ^„^?f  "ncp  Itt  7.-  4.  Tanto  opere  justitia 
pecunias  impenlret,  hu.c  ni"hi^tus'i  u?ch-Uate?h?bell  devictas  in  fidemi^  recepis- 
SpudmajOres  «"^^'•^t4"t'sc  nfci?  Off 'l   H  --  5  Qi^i^^  nos  magno  o;>.r6.attendit»  un- 


apud  major 

sent,  carum  patrOni 

quam 

essct'  

8iim7n6pere  vii5n„  «portCbit    Cic   inv   i    j^  ^j.       ?j^  "\;'^;;:f  ^irepta  sunt !     Quam  ilia 
V^'S^S^S'^ll^So,  ^S:6^;- V^"  tSrpis  Syracusani^  miseranda^^  omn. 


ent.  carum  patrOni^^  essent.  '-'^•,^"/v'  .".r  2  1   10  -  6.  Hiec  res,   etiamsi  lex  non 
nam  in  hoc  genere  causarum^y  Uc  \  eir  2  1,  1 ).      b    i^ 

ssctl^  riiagnopereyxx^n^^i^nx^^^^^^^^^  ^-J^   simiilac"-»  profOgit'^^  Heraclms, 

mmnopei-e  viian   oportebit.  ,cic.  inv .  i    la,  ^).       o  ,HreDta  sunt !     Quam  ilia 


_ ^ : — -— a  how  thev  run  up  to  me.—  '  remarks.-  *  protect  themselves. 

1  In  the  countr>'-towns.—  "  ^^^^^^J, ,     „  Vu  var      e  to  hide  away  —  *  dear.—  ^»  private 
_  »  pasture.-  «  to  look  about.-  '^.W_^-  '^ J^.^^'- .i«_!'lfXr?tont-actise,  to  respect. 


^^^^2!^"^^:^^^^^^^  ii^l^tVallger  in  or  to.-  "  aacred.-  -  to  keep. 

12 


266 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


cicnm   Romania  eseet.  Liv.  41. 19.  - 14.  Iter  mvlfo  qnam  "Va^ccnsnt   fiiorat  diiflH' 
ill  fuit.  lb.  21,35.-  15.  Hoc  mihi  crit,  r.//.men/^r  -ratum.  C.c    Ira.n   13  2 0  -  1».  l_u    . 
tantiim    homine-^  fefrlli-ti    ut  iioi  u,'eres   aiictont-ltcm  senatn?.   Cic.  Scsf    14.  .r.. 

J//W  c      t  ■  )    --n  plnrimmn.  Cic.  Fam  18.  'i-^.-lS.  Athc.ic.ises  non  H.Jiim  spcin  l.a- 

ce-se5  po,e  a  Nop  .M  3.  -  19.  MuUum  to  ista  iefollit  opinic,  ct  qnule,n«  multis 
in'UKirck  Vrr  2  l,35.--20.  Auxiliaribu^^T  ad  pnirnam  non.  miiltuni  connuebat 
Cral-us    ri:.  B  a  ^^^^^^  dixit,  esse  i.oni.ull..«  quorum  aurtontas  apud 

B  G  1  17  -  'Zi,  Mxlto  dilifienllus  S.tviIuh  lurta  ilia  n<»tilt:i«  liabet  q  lam  tu.  tic. 
Von-'  2  1  21  -  23.  Qucwto  vita  illOrum  honiinum  jmidanor,  t<u,to  l.oruin  M)Cor. 
f\\S'iinamo4'orv*t   SaTl   Ju-'  85,  2>.  -  2t.   Hannil)al  tanfo  vnxsUihat  ceteros  inipera- 

Nei)  Ilann.  1.-25.  E-o  viuKo  tnnio  inhenor  ^um  qnam  tu.  'iaut.  liud.  2,  b.  .><.- 
2(J  Non  M  minus  ducenta  qnadraLMUta  JM-(M-a»2  ,,livCti  c<.la-  minus  nno  viliu-o>3  ha- 
lleVc  «"  e-  nee  AHs  ianto  n,n)iltdvem  lund.un,  aut  (ovl'»^  ^-olas,  id.-o>*  duo  viHic.  .  ut 
ttvs  a  endi  sunt.  Varro  li.  li.  1,  18.  -  'il.  ("a-ar  i)rovincia'  q^mn  maatmutn  ^yolest 
m  lit  ...  ur,  m  impcat.  Ca's.  15.  (;.  1.  7.-2S.  V<m  re<  a.ietor  tuif  •\  nt  rpm,n  prwwm 
1  o mi.K  s  jMi  a<'ere'«  i.cip.-rent,  bominem(,i.e  minime  l.t.-iusum'^  q,m,nt»nnilt>io.v^^- 
Sl''a,u;,.i;;M,t,;r.  Cie.'ven-.  2,  2,  14.  -  21).  (^a-sar  Cingelori-,'is  auctoiitatem  quam 
])lurhni/m  inter  Treviros  valere  voluit.  Cies.  B.  G.  o,  4. 

2)  BeUdlon  of  Vnhie  coid  Price. 

%  559.  The  Value  ami  PincE  attachea  to  an  action  is  expressed :  1)  by 
the  abhitive  case  of  gp:nekal  nouns  expressing?  value  and  price,  as  pre- 
Hum  ;  2)  by  the  ablative  case  of  the  measuuk-units  of  money  {nummus, 
sestertius  etc.)  in  connection  Avith  cardinal  numerals;  3)  by  the  ablative 
or  genitive  neuter  singular  of  absolute  quantitative  form-adjectives,  as 
quanti,  at  what  price  ;  magno,  at  a  high  price. 

Bern  32.  The  adverbial  objects  denoting  price  and  value  are  always 
(but  see  ons.  1.)  dependent  on  one  of  those  verbs  with  winch  tlic  idea()t 
price  and  value  may  be  connected.  These  verbs  are,  1)  those  implying 
or  referring  to  transactions  for  a  valuable  consideration,  as  emere,  to 
buy  {((liquid  m/tqno  enure,  to  buy  something  at  a  higli  price) ;  2)  verbs 
si<niifving  to  estimate,  to  appraise  (value),  as  mtlniare  {ahquid  tnhus 
se'stertiis  mtimdre,  to  value  something  at  three  sesterces);  3)  verbs  denot- 
ing '  costing'  and  '  being  ^voktii',  as  coufitdre,  esse  (quanti  est  dla  merx  7 
wiiat  is  that  article  worth  V). 

Oi5=.  1  Only  one  adjective,  renrdi^.  in  connection  with  esi^e,  is  sometimes,  but  rarely, 
constVued  with  an  object  of  price  and  value,  as  P.  Clo'lii  insula  fst  niHid.s'  'inymmi  hMs\ 
the  plot  of  ground  belo.i-^inir  to  P.  Clodius  is  to  be  had  at  10,01)0  sesterces.  Cic.  CjuI.  .,1.. 

()B3  2  The  most  n<ual  verbs  implvini;  money  transactions  arc  r-eiidere,  to  sell  ;  venire*^ 
to  be  sold,  to  sell  (in  a  neuter  sensi') :  emere  and  inercarl,  to  buy  :  r^dunrre.  to  rede.-m, 
toacniiire  for  monev  ;  Ax-^T/r,  t(.  let :  amducere,  to  rent:  trauMgere.  to  a-iee  on  a  price 
in  a  bar'^iin:  decid>re.  to  compromise  for  a  price;  addirere,  to  award  a  contract  or  a 
work)  to  strike  otl'  in  an  auction;  lifan  (dic>ij>i><  (rsfimdre  to  award  or  hx  damages 
a'^ainst  on<«.  In  the  same  way  are  constni.d  n.:.ny  verbs  denoting  a<ti<ms  which  are 
eUlier  perlormed  lor  payment,  or  which  cost  a  certain  sum,  as  n:di,ftc(tre  (to  bin  id  some- 

»  ascent.—  «  qrafum  alictd  fac<-re.  to  do  somebody  a  favor.— 3  recomim-ndation.— 
4  to  do  harm.-  *  t..  do  <roo.l.  i..  be  of  advanta-.'.-  •  et  qoyhm  and  .  Do  -  \')."xi'iaiy 
troups.-  «  notnre,  to  n..te  down.-  "  sl..tb.-  »<>  to  cxed.-  >»  '•'''''•^''^/.''"•- I'  ^,'^'./''- 

mra  oliveti  co/erf,  to  cultivate  anoliv  larm  of  '^'V'V'"-''^!,"-'''"/.  ''•  /  "r./bo  ,...7 
■»«  iheieloie.  on  that  acount.—  ^^ancfdnm  esse  uf,  <diqttiH  (diqiad Jacvit,  \o  makt  somt  - 
body  do   somet hi  1»«,'.— I «ai^^re,  to   institute  proceedings  or  u  lawsuit.— ^^  quarrelsome, 

^  *^ve}are  (viil:»!veneo)  is  used  as  the  regular  passive  voice  of  vendere;  aase^tcrtU)  venire, 
to  be  sold  lor  a  sesterce. 


RELATION   OF   VALUE   AND   PRICE. 


26' 


thin*''  for  a  price),  doc^re  (to  teach  at  a  price),  haMtare  (to  live  at  a  certain  rent),  cctnare 
(to  (]\i\e  for  a  certain  price)  and  many  others,  as  :  Modium  tritici  denario  emere,  to  buy  a 
bu«hel  of  wheat  lor  a  denarius.  C\c.\ aw. 'i,Z.9>s>.—Ag mm  frumento  locdvit.  he  let  out 
land  for  a  rent  in  L'rain.  Liv.  '21,ii.—  7\rnis  m£dimnis  decidirunf,  they  compromised  at 
llie  price  of  three  mcdimiii  (a  piece).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3,  A\).—Pi,-cm(E  cedificanfur  magno, 
nurseriis  for  fish  are  built  at  a  high  price  (cost  much  nKmey  to  build).  Var.o  R  R.  3. 17.— 
Triqinta  millibm  e>nn  dixistU  haWare.  yon  said  that  he  lived  at  a  rent  of  30.000  sesterces 
Cic  Cad  7  —tmsar  cenfies  eesterlio  coendvit  vno  die.  Caesar  dined  on  one  aay  at  a  cost  of 
ten'millions  sesterces.  Sen.  Cons.  9.  Here  belong  the  verbs  denoting  '  to  condemn  to  a 
fine'  as  :  Absem  nidndecim  mi/libtPf  condemnatus  est,  he  was,  in  his  absence,  condemned 
to  15* 000  sesterces.  Liv.  5, 32.—'  To  write  a  note/or  a  cerfciin  sum  of  money'  (lor  inst.  l.CMK) 
sesterces)  is  expressed  by  syngraphanifnille  sederfium  {iien.  p\ur.)facere.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  37. 

Obs  3  The  verbs  of  estimating  and  appraising  are  fEfttinulrenud  {TaTe]y)pufare,  itaxdre 
bein-'post-clas-^ical),  as:  Est  modi  lis  tritici  lege  iribus  sesfertiis  semisse  oistimatus^iha 
bii-^hel  of  wheat  was  bv  law  valued  at  a  tax  of  three  sesterces  and  a  half.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3, 
75.  :Si  denariis  qundiingentis  Cupidinem  iUu7n  2)u(asset,  if  he  had  estimated  that  statue 
of  Cupido  at  400  denarii.  Cic.  Veir.  2, 4,  7. 

Ob^  4  The  verbs  sifmifying  '  to  cost',  '  to  he  worth'  are  «w«.  to  be  worth  (which  signi- 
fication can  always  he  recognized  bv  the  attached  phrases  denoting  the  price) ;  stare  and 
comtare  to  cost  \  Uc^re,  to  be  held  at  a  certain  price ;  valere,  to  be  worth  (ante  and  post- 
(•li<<i.al) ;  a< :  Sextante  sal  UoincE  et  ])€r  totam  Italiam  erat.  salt  was  worth  one-sixth  of  a 
«(.Vt'erce  at  Home  and  throughout  Italy.  Liv.  2U,  n.-Polybias  scribif,  centmn  talent  is  earn 
rem  Achats  sfedsse,  Polvliius  writes  that  this  aflair  cost  the  Achieans  one  hundred  talents. 
Liv  ^34  50.—  T'tm  qitadrlgte  lioinoi  co>,stitZ7vint  quadnngentis  milhbus,  one  four-horse 
u'am  cost  400.000  sesterces  at  Rome.  Varro  R.  R.  2,  1,  U.-Quanti  Drust  hortt  Itcuisse 
saibis-  id  ego  giiogne  avdUram.  th.-  price  at  which  you  write  that  Drusus  s  park  was  hein, 
1  ha.I  likevvise  heard.  Cic.  Att.  12.  23.-What  apKRsov  is  worth  in  money  is  not  expressed 
in  tid-  form  by  an  accusative  of  value,  but  l)y  a  transitive  accusative  w.th  possidere, 
a«-  He  is  worth  a  million,  ^?o.v.vi(^e<  decies.— Both  constdre  and  stare  are  frequently  used 
of 'equivalents  metaphoricallv  represented  as  -costs',  as  Multorum  sanguine  et  vulnert- 
husea  Penis  victoria  stetit.  that  victory  cost  the  Carthaginians '  the  blood  and  wounds  of 
manv'  (i  e  they  paid  for  it  with  etc.).  Liv.  2:3.  30.  '  It  cost  hi-^  life'  is  not  vita  stetit  or 
'constitit\  but  morte  stetit  (comtit it),  as  Utrlq'ie  vindicta  libertatis  nwrte  ste fit  the  vindi- 
cation of  liberty  cost  both  tlieir  lives  (.both  paid  with  their  lives  for  etc.).  Veil,  i,  b4. 

Rein.  33.  The  general  nouns  expressing  price  and  value  are  pretium 
(price,  value);  pecunin,  money;  impensa  or  impensm  (not  e.rpenm)  and 
«^/w?)/'/.-*,  expense,  expenses;  ???^?wn%  pav.  fee,  wages  {stipefidium,  the  pay 
of  a  soldier).  Tiie  ablatives  of  these  nouns  do  not  belong  to  the  relation 
of  '  quantity'  unless  thevhave  adjectives  expressing  quantity  as  attributes. 
A  LOW  price  is  expressed  hy  parvum  {vile,  or  exiguuni)  pretium  ;  a  high 
PRICE,  b^^  mafinuni  pretium. 

Ob<5  1  Adverbial  ablatives  of  the  nouns  mentioned  above,  if  not  accompanied  by  ad- 
iective-^'exni-essin^  quant  itv,  belong  toother  modal  relations  than  thatof  price  and  value, 
unMici-allv  (^^ressini^^^  ins.nimentaliry.  as  ApolUmius mercjde  docebaL  Apollomus 

taucrht  for  ir.v  Cic  Or.  L  ^.-Fid'-m  et  religionem  svam  pecuma  commidnre,  to  baiter 
on  :^s  fa  th  L.  I  religion  (ie.  one's  principles)  for  mrney.  C.c.  (■!'••  ^^'^-Jl^^J^l^^f" 
iubliro  in  Asia?n  mercdfor  signdrmn  missu.<^  est,  Verres  was  sent  at  public  expen-e  to 
Asia  -fs  a  tmder  in  statues.  Cic.  VeiT.  2,  1,  Hi.-Prelio  ordinem  senatoi^um  mercarx,  to 
buy  the  senate  with  money,  lb.  2,  2,  49. 

Ob<>  2  Quantitative  expressions  with  pretium  to  denote  indpflnite^amonnt,s^of  price, 
are  not  ver\  neq..e..tly  us.';i.  Instead  of  such  phrases  the  absolute  JV"«",^the  quanti- 
tative adjectives  in  the  ablative  or  genitive  (§  5;)0)  ai-c  lar  more  usual  The  adjectives 
which  a^uei  with  ;>r./e//m,  aside  from  tho^e  mentioned  R  3:3  are  the  comparat  ves 
w"f  o  •  and  minor,  the  superlatives  maximns  and  summns.  and  all  those  ^"^"'itative  form- 
S  ect  ivvsTh  t  inav  be  attached  as  attributes  to  nouns  (2153  foil.),  as  B»mnorxx  omnia 
J^i^Orm^^^^^^  Dumtiorix  had  farmed  all  the  pubhc 

im  s  s  of  the  ;Ed..i  at  a  small  (low^  price.  C;es.  B.  G.  1- IS.-^^/»  '^T''^  K^^'^ Zfj^t 
Vossum'^s  quam  hi  cmuntur,  we  cannot  be  redeemed  at  a  higher  price  than  these  may  e 
boto-lu  for  Liv.  22.  50  (So.netimes  vUi  preiio,  at  a  cheap  pnce).-lf  price  is  expressed  by 
an  a";  -cti^'e  vvi  h  pretium.  dependent  on  esse  (to  be  worth),  the  phrase  is  not  in  he  abla- 
^/LKMri.rtbocALiTxTivE  genitive:  NuU'i,^  est  tarn  parii  pretn  gum  etc.  (i»  of_eo 
^      n  v.in    but  .mm    Plm^^  -Parvi  pretii  est.  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  \,2,A.-Mino7ni 

rSa  6  ^L  S.-K/<t-  n  tiie  positive  is  never  used  i.i.regard  to  price,  and  j^cuma 
uht4y6  takers  ;;4Ai^^  (tantus)  and  its  degrees:  Fidem  mxijore  pecuma  adversarw  tror 


268 


RELATIONS   OF  MODALITY. 


didMi,  you  have  surrendered  your  faith  for  more  money  (a  larger  Pum>  to  your  adversary. 
CicVerr.  i,  'i'ii.—  Tanfd  pecnnia.  for  so  much  money.  Cic.  Ih.  2,  \  .M.—Miicore  pecunui, 
at  les:^  monev,  Cic.  lb.  2.  2,  9. -There  is  no  j^enerai  noun  for  the  Ln-hsU  '^um  ,  wtncli 
is  variously  expiesst-a  by  the  out-  or  the  ottier  of  ihe  a'>ove  mentioned  -cneral  tt-nns. 
The  noun  '>i>imma  means  a  •  sum'  as  the  n-sult  or  computation,  of  sutnmim?  "1»."«:  >>  n=*t 
is  the  bum  (total)  of  these  men  ?  Quanta  istiEC  liominum  sunwii  e.^t  f  1  laut.  Mil.  i,  i,  -lo. 

Bern  34.  If  the  price  of  an  action  is  deterniinetl  by  a  noun  denoting 
MEASURE-UNITS  OF  MONEY,  the  hitter  nuist  take  cardinal  (iiiehiami^  dis- 
tributive) NUMERALS  as  attributes,  either  in  the  interrogative  (rehitive) 
form  {qnot.quotmi),  or  in  the  definite  (or  deinoiistrative)  form  {M,  iinus, 
duo,bini  etc.),  or  in  the  indefinite  form  {^/liquot,  ?n>(/tt\  pl'fres,  plnnnii, 
panel).  These  phrases  an;  phiced  in  tlie  ablative  (a  lew  instances  ex- 
cepted, DBS.  3  and  4),  as  :  PUnius  commentarios  snos  vendere  polerat  qua- 
dringentis  millibn>i  nnmmum,  Pliny  could  have  sold  his  commentaries  for 
400,000  Henterces.  Plin.  Ep.  3, o.  In  E^^dish  these  ablative  phrases  ot  price 
are  rendered  variousiv  bv>/',  <^^  to,  or  by  a  mere  objective,  according  to 
the  meaning  of  the  governing  verb.  We  say  :  to  estimate  at,  to  scUJor  or 
at,  to  build  a  house  for,  it  conta  (is  worth)  three  dolUirs,  U)  condenm  to  a  fine 
of  eic.  In  Latin  all  these  prepositional  phrases,  and  the  mere  objective 
after  '  cost', '  to  be  worth',  are  expressed  by  ablatice  phrases. 

Obs  1  If  'price'  is  mide  the  coMPr.KTiNO  object  or  subject  of  a  verb,  the  phrases 
by  which  price  is  exprn-sed.  t:il«',  of  e.Mir-e,  the  e;ise  re<iuiri'd  l)y  th«^  construction,  as 
Numerantiir  illi  .-^estcrtia  (JCL,  250,000  sesterces  are  paid  to  him.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  20. 

Obs.  2.  The  interroj?:itive  and  iiulefinite  fonus  of  these  numeral  phrases  of  price  are 
rarely  used,  the  quuiitTlative  forms  m.-iitioiied  §  .'jtil)  l)eiiij?  prrtem-d  for  this  purposi-.  But 
in  certain  connections  these  forms  cannot  be  dispeu-^ed  with,  as:  IHnribus  aluju;iiito  me- 
f/i//*//i.Nd*-cum;isiMneriiut(iuam  ju-jeraerant  sata,they  bou<?lit  the  tilhi-s/Wr  quite  consider- 
ably more  mt-dimid  than  there  wen-  acres  sowed.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  :i,  47.  The  deliuite  numeral 
vniis  as  attribute  of  nouns  expressiiiLj  the  denoinmarioiis  ot  money,  is  trequently  under- 
stood, as  aliqnidsestertio  emtre,  to  buy  soinelhini;  for  a  (one)  sesterce. 

Ob.«5.  3.  The  verb  esse  in  the  meanincj  'to  he  worth'  takes  the  price  either  in  the  abla- 
tive or  in  the  form  of  a  i)redicate-«,'enitive,  as;  (iuum  in  Siciliil  .sv.s7e/-/ii.s'  bini-'i  iritici 
modius  esset,  snmiuum  fen>i<.  when  in  Sicily  wheat  was  worth  a  modius or  three  at  the 
hi"hest  Cic.  Verr.  2,3,  HI.— Opus  hocerat  vix  sest«'rtium(/'m^//-ar/i///a  mdli'ini.  1  his  worK 
was  hardly  worth  40,000  sesterces.  Cic.  lb.  2,  1,  54.  The  ablativk  'of  worth'  is  used  to 
denote  the  maukkt  riacK  of  an  article,  while  the  i,'enitive  denotes  its  real  value,  bee  the 
first  example  It.  32,  obs.  4,  and  Ex.  5.  Ji.  Sonietiines  (but  rarely,  and  mostly  in  post-clas- 
sical lin<Mia<'e)  ra'ere  is  used  in  the  sense  ol  'to  be  worth  someihin,'',  «,'enerally  con- 
Ptrued  wUh  Uieablativt;  (as  IMin.33.  3».  but  once  (in  V'arro)  it  is  found  with  the  object  of 
value  in  the  acci'sativk:  Di-narii  dicti  quod  r/e/w<  a^ris  V(i/?banf,  mn  am  quod  r/^/iz/a-f, 
the  denarii  were  called  so  because  they  were  worth  ten  (poiind-s)  of  copper  each,  tlio 
quinarii  because  they  were  worth  tlve.  Varro  L.  L.  4,36. 

Obs.  4.  The  verb  fiPN'/lm^//'^.  especlallv  in  the  combination  litem  CEMhn'ire  (see  H. 32, 
OBS.  2),  is  sometimes  consirued  with  iid  befoie  the  price,  in  place  of  an  ablative,  as: 
Ddabdlce.  nd  tncies  lu  est  ce<finiafa.  the  damaijes  au'ainst  Dolabella  were  laid  at  la 
uiillioiis.  Cic.  Verr. '2, 1,3S.— If  ie-^tiimlre  is  construed  with  a  «genitive  ot  a  price  ex- 
pressed by  a  definite  numeral,  it  has  not  the  meaninj?  '  to  ap/mnse',  but  the  fiu'iirative 
meaniiii;  ''to  e-<teein\  '  to  <vn4der\  in  which  mi^anini;  the  object  of  value  rei,ml;»rly  is  in 
the  genitive  (§  ufil),  as  7^///i(}/•e-«  senuin  iiiukx  cextinKiidur  assU,  the  talk,  of  old  men  is 
valued  at  one  as,  i.  e.  amounts  to  nothing.  Catull.  5,  3. 

Ob-!.  5.  The  Piandard  of  Roman  money  was  oriirinnlly  the  copper  as.  weigh! nc;  one 
pound  UPS  lihrdle,ies  (trarc\,  which  gradually  was  reduced  to  one  twenty-lourih  of  its 
original  weight  with  the  same  nominal  value.  On  this  standard,  >ilver  coins  were  made 
of  Ihree  denomination-:  1)  the  //^/?aW/'<',  containinu'  10  as;  2)  the  qnininn-^  ot  o  as; 
3)  the  ses'terfiifs  (contracted  of  semi.-!  f^rtii/s\  i.  e.  2J)  of  half  this  value,  worth  abouU  cents 
of  our  money.  All  sums  of  money  in  piililic  and  private  intercourse  were  calculated  hy 
the  sestertius,  which  also  was  simplv  called  nu/nocu.s^  (properlv  meaning  'com' or  'piere 
of  moiieyV).  Th^  sesterce  is  generallv  notated  by  the  letters  US  (a corruption  Irom  11>, 
i.e.  duo  et  semlO.  Occasionally  larger  sums  of  money  were  «letermined  by  (Jreek 
denominations  of  money,  especially  the  mine  (mi/ia,  which  in  Greek  was  worth  lOOdrach- 


RELATION  OF  VALUE  AND  PRICE. 


W9 


«,»  whilP  the  -Romans  understood  by  it  a  sum  of  100  denarii);  and  the  Attic  talent 

?s;;  S!,?ru.'?r^  ,r^£n  *.05{iu  .o,,u^^ 

iiiUlibus   he  let  tue  house  for  2000  se?terces. 
OB.   ti  In  r...^ard  to  the  gmmmatical  forn.  of  the  word  sestertius  and  the  numerals  con- 

mmmmMmsmm 

cA-i^t- -1  «-»!/•  H  t  ,  .,/^„/,w,i*  ,in,i    it<  Mr-eoinnaiiVlU"''  liumb^'rs.  as    LupiL  Ul^  bui--'ifiui 

'^:^^^i;;^:^J^^IS^^<^l£m^^r.A  outo,-  W,  .aud^^  property.  0.c. 

f„,V.i,m';m6a.Vaud..iaht,  l,u.,<hcdilwu.au<l  seslercc-..  t.  «.  uiic  uulliou  eight  huudrtd 
thousatid  sesterces.  Cic.  \  err.  '2,  1,  39. 


numeral  urn  e4\,  fourteen  times  a 


sesterces)  vvas  pa  dl^    :!|;rfor--Vxnlli«.ns  sesterces.  Suet:  CiES.  50.     So  Sytvgrapfia 
S^;lr^^!i.!j?rfe  \v^.  ^  irli^m;.;:^  -^te..es  ^Cic.  PHiL  2,  37-  CeutUs  sesUrtu  lav 


gitione,  by  a  bribe  of  ten  millions  sesterces,  lac.  Ann   12,  .>8. 

f'''"    ,   ^rnni.V;r  .Verwinu-''  ani.l  nneco»  eniimefilivt»  a.uliChant,  fumlam  venire  arbi- 
tiis  est   ut  q    «  "•'^';'^'    "'  ^^"4"'^,'  „„i  „1,  |,oste  ohsidentur,  ri  em.-ie  aquie  «stan- 

vir  bonus  emet  demfio  quod  fit  mille  Uemnum  /  Cic.  Oft.  3.  M,-  b.  Dccuma. 

.  The  neuter  ^^n^^!:^^i;,J^J^r,^^^;;'f^  ^  "rfS,,-"- »  "t^e  '^2- 

llm  ";'z;,™,,,  that^lw'u'e  or'l:iS«doe.'uot  occur  in  Cicero  is  eitoneou.,  as  .s  seen 
•/.iTrJ^Sus,  a  li^ufd  ra;;,r/cioSn^"a!;out  a'pint.-  n  <lecu,m,  a  tithe. 


il  ■ 


KELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


RELATION   OF   VALUE   AND   PRICE. 


271 


SmlTS  trhi.^Cic.  Verr.  2.  :l,  39.-  7.  Phi.n.s  homo  ill.istn.  ac 

?        ///svS^r  m  r  K'^^^  et  m'dimni.  DVLIV.  lb.  2,  3,  40.-  8  Opus  ouod  ^^y^iefrtt^'rn 

56  -9  I  10  qui  rem  qninqentUmedimni^  d.-idere  nohus.ot.  null.'  promTs.t  I  .  2  Z  M. 
-  10  D  cGbant  illi  ie  malle  sfHertium  quir,q»agh,v<  we//i6w  damnilri.  lb.  2  3  .iS- 
11  Qua  in  d  vit-lte  C.  CaiOni,  clarissimo  >  ire,  H^  fnituor  millifnis  lis  ivsti.nam  est.  in 
Pido,  c ivit-lte  Vcrri^  8cribie«  rt^t  conce.-Muni  ut  ih  terdecie^  uno  nomine'  aifem-ts. 
lb  2V^.-  12  Qmun  senatus  ^«a<?..«i.  //.>^  tritki^  ^"*"^"^^,^'n^7*^'\^H.PC 
nia^n  Verres  tiitici  mo<lio.  .in-ulos  (emu  denanis  sesn.nKlvit  lb.  2,  3,  81.-  13  H  ec 
omnia  sirrnaii  Praxitelis.  MyrOnis.  I'olycleti, //.VA.vjr  milUbus  et  quinqmds  \  cvvx  \en- 

^J^'quMmqintamiinhus  venTre?  lb.  2,  4,  7.-  15.  Aponio  SaturnTuo  «n  auc  nue 
inter  subsdS" ^^  gludiatOrcs  sestertio  mnagies  iguorauti  addicti 

sunt.  Sutt.  Cal.  38. 

§  5r»0  Price  indefinite  in  re^i^ard  to  numbers  is  most  generally  cx- 
pres.>uu  ..y  quantitative  adjectives  used  absolutely  in  the  neuter  singular, 
so  as  to  understand  a  general  noun  denoting  price  or  value,  the  game  as 
a  noun  denoting  'amount'  in  the  relation  of  intensity.  Some  of  these 
adjectives  are  placed  in  the  genitive,  and  others  in  the  ablative  ac- 
cording to  the  classes  to  which  they  belong. 

Rem.  35.  The   quantitative   absolute  adjectives  which  are   thus  used 

with  the  idea  of  price  understood  are  ^         ,c    \      ^    *■ 

\\  in  the  interrogative  and  relative  forms:  quanti,  at  (lor)  what 

price  (as  a  relative  generally  rendered  by  '  an').   It  is  always  in  the  genitive. 

the  ablative  form  of  this  adjective  serving  always  as  ablative  ot  ditlereucc 

before  comparatives.  .       ,o    ^        ^  •  ^  *^» 

">)  the  dfmonstrative  quantitatives  taiiti,  at  (for)  such  a  price,  and  tan- 
iidem,  at  the  same  price.     Tliey  are,  in  this  sense,  always  in  the  genitive. 

3)  ill  the  indefinite  form  : 

la)  manm.  at  (for^  a  hi?h  (great,  larjre,  dear)  price  )  VioXh.  always  in  the  ablative. 
parvo  (nonma{mo),iii  a  low  (cheap,  small)  price  \ 

(b)  p'uri'i  (nirely  vuyori^),  at  a  higher  price  '  i^q^ji  always  in  the  genitive. 

i^pi:^;  ^^l^^^tiLn:  quan^pluXno,^  hid.  (dear)  a.  possible. 
miniim;  generally  with  qaani;  quam  minimo,  as  cheaply  as  possible. 
Hence  the  quantitatives  of  the  interrogative,  relative  and  detinite  (<lemon- 
sSe)  tbrms  must  always  be  in  the  genitive,  while  m  the  indefinite 
f,)nn  the  co.mpauatives  only  are  placed  in  the  genitive,  and  the  posi- 
tives and  superlatives  in  the  abl.vtive,  as  : 

m  IvTERUoovTivB  po«M  :    Quanti   earn  emit?  At  what  price  ha<»  he  bought  her? 

rrVer?2  ^40-%)  Indefinite  FouM  (a)  Positivks  and  >^lu'kiu  atives  :  .Va.//.o 
Cic  \  err.  A  .1.  4.».  f/.,,  .t,„  x\\\w^  at  a  hi-'h  pr  ce.  C  c.  Verr.  2,  3, 1»,.— Om^/'/r/U/t 
tZSf.^u!:^;:,'^.^^'^^'-  ou  th'e  palatine  hlU  ».  a  cheap  ...a  cat  no 


. ir-  Ifi^l  "U.,i,,,ir',',mm«m  .mv.r,.  nou  ,^minl  •  (Cic.  Att.  1,  IJ),  mmon  I,  not  an 
ablative  ol  price  l)ut  of  means,  Uependont  on  movere. 


,' 


9^ 


J.J-  !•  ^  »//  7^'^  fiR&fit  lib'ido  tua.  You  sold  at  a 
trrent  rolitV  Cic.  C«^l.  7. 18.-  ram  '^''.f ."''";,"  ..^'e'Cvtfh  tie  law-  cic.  Wrr.  -.!.  .3.  49. 
to,f  m-to   r  [weassatne  that)  >""•■<, ^^^  «,£i  if  is  In  the  interest  of  the  farmer 

«^at  tl  ftiil^es  should  sell  >,/  ft'  ''>',!'  a  Mure  ;>' j  ".  *  ,  ,k'e„  or  s,,ner.  a*  cAmpl!,  as  yoa 
«m.  *™»I  Q"ea>  """""''•,™nM" '''^;^,'  !'^,'.'  Ve.Klo  fn  t^.^ttln  non  ;/«™  <."«,,  ceteri 

o:r,'Th"'— ians  are  at  a  loss  .o  exphut,  tl.  re,.™  w,^  in  |]-;f STertf,:: 

lives,  and  can  never  perform  the  ^"«^^^«j'J^  ,     adjectives  which,  according  to  i?. 

Oh^  2    The  verb  e^^se,  to  be  worth,  may  ^^ke  all  the  aajecu  ^^^^^  ,^^  .^^  ^ 

r.  ar^;  used  to  denote  the  worth,  ^"  t^«  «'^^'^i\f.  a<:  bi  ut  quisque  quod  plurinn  sit, 


q-,  are  used  to  denote  tne  wuit..,  ...  •;"-  ""v^^  •> .  o<:  si.  ut  quisque  quod  plunnu  sii, 
excluded  from  the  use  as  ^^^^^^l^^^^t^Ja  I'h.edr.  2,  5 ;  «f  ^^^^^j^^^'  4^ ^^^^^^ 

as  Jiene  fminn- q"od  '^JfJ^Jl  j^^f  huvin.,'  i-  -<>"^*'»""f,>'^'»;iT:rb  Jt  to  Surn  what^^^^ 
the  king  who  ^>^^"5-:'^^;;'^,l:^U„„ht  the  house  aim 

CO) 

tec.  ..- 

as  gi/awi  opfii 


i-nMi^»..'.--    -  '       ji  ^^  ji  price).  VIC.  il''  jr\''^__  j.:,nit  domuinirt^peuiintuw 

aUa".  0/-«"«  ««<"■«.  «"  '■«"  "  ."-T  ■"  '    .  '  Verr  S.  3.  21.-  2.  «««"«.ffry-rr. 


ci-n 


BELATIONS  OF   MODALITY. 


tarn 
ma 


,      4       «..«»,♦  Pio  Phil  9  7  —  6.  Permittite  nt  decu- 

rtpecnniamredcmpton'  ^"l\^"^?"^'^"ra::;^^  n  95.-  7.  Dixit  VorreB 

squarUi  qni^que  (PnHOrum),veli     a«.'ne^   J^^^^^^^^  a-stimaliOnc*    alter 

..  decma»  /an/We'm  a^^timasee  7 /«/   i.^'^»*^^^^^^  US  XV  pro  me(  imuo, 

gublevarul'i  arauln-s,  alter  ^^■^'';^^\r^  V  m  ■.iTmmim  •  retinui^ti  US  XXI,  tariH  cnim  est 
ta7iti  euim  erat  ilU»  tempore  ^^itu    imd  nnn,m      ui  u  _  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^^^^^  ^^   ^^ 

frumcntum  SicilieuPC  ex  le-e  «•^«'"  *^'  "  "  ///Jcn-*  b  2.3,80.-10.  Malehaiit  isti 
im..,  quare  putJlbas  t;mptOn  luerum»  « '^  ,;>  'Xum  Veiri;  enu.snriu.u'  ineidere«. 
pul.lieepotius  qxx>xmM>^  u>agno  ^''l\*/*^v7".V?     »   i^A^/i  uecunue  venlrent ;   non  enim 


g  -.,-.1  If  the  value  attached  to  a  thing  is  not  reclucble  to  money  or 
«  '  nnt  i,  ronccivea  as  '  esteem'  or  as  an  '  inner  appreciation    of  a 

Sr ':«.;:g  reTnl.  of  appreciation  is  genenU.y  expre^.i  hy  U.e 
same  quantitative  adjectives  which  are  used  to  denote  price  (R.  3o),  hut 
the^e  adjectives  are  all  placed  in  the  genitive  case 


.  ''\"'n.i,T^  All  o   which   except  rarely  ma^no  with  cestiware) 

ed  by  the  adjectives  mentioiK'd  7?.  35   ALL  or  wiuL^        -hi-hes^t'),  inuj-iwi  is  also  nsed. 

are  In  the  .^knitive..    For  P^^"-''\\J^',%^^^^^^^  ex  ornmhu,  facto 

Absence  of  esteem  is  V-^i\'"^^':^*L^*^n!    i-if.*  -^''•^■'-  ^  ^ '-•  ^-"^—  -  in^^  t.irtt. 

pit 

tariti, 

16.- 

of 


averted  from  you.  Cic.  Cat.  2.  7.  *>,*>  'rolloanial'  "onitives  fiicci,  vavci,  osH-o,  te- 


cation  of  our  noun 


rV  -  •»  rIrS  may  be  understood 'as  an  adv-rsative  (•onjuiic- 
cuuon  oi  oui  ..V,..»  .^,-  rt  .—  ^*^;.";:  •'  f.^^^.,,^  j,,  ,hc  tlrst  case  the  phrase  is  to  »)e 
tion  Kbnt\  or  as  tiu^neuter  of  th,   a  1  tx^mc      ''^^^  ^ran^lation  wonhl  h.' ^  Suinxmng 

reiuU-red  '7i'//  be  thu  m  '  /"?f,/ J"  J' ": '^on  -thin-  excelhuf,  i.  e.  to  pride  yourself  upon 
/AL«!itm<n/^\-  V^'^'-'^l'^.J  .f.f  7'Si  i^^^^  that  there  have  been  those  who.- 
(with    a  participial  couBtruction).—      jui»be  qui,  ^ 

*•*  supply  tinerU. 


0." 


DELATION   OF  VALUE   A^D   PRICE. 


273 


•rot  to  care  a  =tnuv  for  Fomothinir',  as  Jndice»  r^minmcam  Jlocn  rtonfaavn  Ahe  jn^gcs 

.In  nor  (arc  a  straw  for  The  republic.  Cic.  Fan..  4,  5.-.EQui  tomqne  ahqmdjacere  means 

M./t  kc  .  tldr.rplc-asantly-  (in  ^-ood  part),  as  Si  to.  von  mortt  pencudnn  noscegm  bo- 

,!imlfnrimvs  if  ioir  do  not  care  for  the  dan-er,  we  look  pleasanily  at  it.  Liv.  ^\.  Zi 

nl^t/./arm?^/^.  If  I  ^^^  „^,^,^^^     ,„^1 ,,,%  q.^TClae.  Liv.  .29  17.-  2.  Ihs  u  niporOnis, 

*        1     UvftA.miini  cniu<aue  wja^m  <B>VJwo  unlus  aostatis  fructum»  paliestne^  Pala- 

C  Ci     A      2  ^7   iTs?cailW?re^       ;vstimatOres3  prata  et.areas*  qu.sdam  m^iq- 

^^Y'J^ILnr,/' fVuantt  e-t  a.^timaucla  virtus.  qu:T?  neque  naiifrao:io«  nee  incendio  amit- 

mnr^^  S     >n-^r2  r.l   -  4.  Ve^^^^^^    tii.i  tauti  fin^nx  ejus  libTdinem  liomumm  um..- 

Iitur  .'  C  ic.  I  ai    I ,  *;'•,,      ,  ...     Y         2  1  :30   —  5    N"Siruin  est  lene  modice»  popnli 

«a<7^    iv    imant.ir.  Cic.  lb.  3,  13.- 8.  Si  sapiens  aliquism.ser  esse  VoU^-\^^^;;^^> ^^ 
tarn  .d(  riOsaui»*  virtQtem  mn  maqno^^  £Estimandan»  puto    Cic.  lb  3.  3.- 9  lllud  est 

Zini    m^^^^^^^ 

in  Pr-ivi»«  homines  sua  Darii  pern  ere,  aliCna  cupere  soleiit.  Sail.  Cat.  li.—  li.  «  ato 

l^  lu^rL  F   niiin  1).  5  am  d.'duxerati\  quod  non  minon.^  (Esfimanws  quam  quemlibet 

oar.  •  a\i.  ou^.  o<..      »-i.  f  ,^ --    Video  Quanta  nobis  iiiviniae 

lOrem  e  us  prealm^^ 

SKtt^"    ric  o!t.  l^g  -  1(5   Ilorti  illi  inveniendi-  tibi  sunt  .i  me  tantt  laci« 

'Z!!'^'^^^yi^^^\he  q:tmititative  adjectives  are  used  a.  one 
of  the 'forms  to  dwiole  the  de-ree  of  intet^est  which  i^  taken  in  an  action 
^  hich  is  «^eDemlly  expressed  by  the  impersonals  interest  and  refert  (p^021) 


^S^'^>d1  l'c"^V^"  2  i.  itK  '^But  neither  c^rcire.^  nor  exf^eUit  and  a^^i;^^  are  construed 
with  objects  d'enotin-'lhe  dkouee  of  i"'^'»-^^^»-  .,        ,^^  ^^f^^).  hut  is 

UBS.  9.  The  impersonal  r?/W/  h^;";;^,^/,"»;.}"  ^^^  !<^l^t7ed    .f^^^^^  with  a 

a  compoun.l  of  7?  (the  ablative  ^;^j:'\^^'^J^^^^^^  ihe  atiair'  or  'in  the 

force  similar  to  the  Lnfrbsh  'it  /;W>  |  ^h  ^^  '^._^^(™r  «ffafr  i.  «.  I  am  interested  in 
interest'.  Thus  :  7-e  mm  J^rf,  it  tells  mm^.  '"tires  J>J  «ttf^»^;^»  .  ^^.^^^^  ,,f  ^ajus',  it 
.omethin-,  it  is  important  to  me -^^^'^  /;;;.';. j^^^^  construcioi.  became 

is  important  t<.  ,^'«J"^- ^  ^V^"!  ^  f  .'inu^o^^stJi^c tion  was  applied  to  wUre^t  which  ha. 
this  :  aaji  reji-rt.  ^'^''fy%'f!;.Jf}]\^^^^^^^^^^^  the  ablative  re  was  omitted  as  soon 

rfil^tSl^e  ^ril^s^';;:  j:S^-;S;:i^  ;^e/;^r!S^l^--as  grammatical  objects 

of  inttrtu'^t.  (Obs.  4).  ^^  PUB.IECT-CLAU8E8.  or  (niore  rarely) 

OBs.  3.  AS  srB.,ECTs  %;^:!'''^'(^ll^.^^^^^^^  interro^^ative  or  infinitive  clutises, 

SUUJKCT-INFINITIVKS.       1  lie  SUblcCl-CiaUftP  n  _ 


Hostile  CUM  If*  wii"  »»v..^  ^„.--.-      - 
worn  acauctrt  is  icv......v^....j  —  --  :««  oriHi'tioii  —  i»  very  —  ^"  approvable.—  ^\  pieatrea 

iimphal  processions.-  ^Mo  «^^Je  aii  add.t^n        _v«ry.  pf    .^  but.-"  to  keep 

faith    word.—  ^^  to  sacrifice.—  '"  to  be  immineni.  «.  i^  f, 

apart.-  2«  to  find  out  (for  me). 


274 


RELATIONS    OF   MODALITY. 


as:  Maxlme  intn^e^t  quemadmoflnm  qua'que  res  nud'n'ihir;  it  rmk*^9  a  vast  cliffcronre  Iiow 
a  thiti"'  i-  heard  Cic.  Hint.  '^I.  —  Q'ti'i  rcfert,  victnm  e-'^se  Antoniinn?  \Muit  diffen-nce 
niakc<~it  ihat  \  Ims  ht'cii  delfated  ?  Ih.  ;'i«l  Brut.  1,  M.— Interest  ominnm  recte  faceve,  II 
i-  ill  the  iiii.-ivst  of  all  to  do  riv^ht.  lb  Kiii.  2,  22.— Mor.-  rarely  the  subject-clause^  of  inter- 
(utt  and  rer-rt  take  the  lorm  of  That-clauscs  with  '//,  ne,  qmU,  •)r  the  form  of  a  M-clan>e. 
FrcninMitlv  ill  plMce  of  snbjcet-chuisf!*,  the  lu-uters  t»ini:ular  of  the  determinative  It.rni- 
adjel  tiws  (hoc.  ilbid,  id.  qmd)  are  n«c(l  (Ex.  1.  S.  9.  14.  IS.  19 :  s.-e  §  491,  R.  95).  Fur  the 
particulars  of  the  con-tructious  of  interest  and  V'-fert,  see  p.  G21  foil. 

Ob-  4  The  quantir y  or  degkke  of  the  interest  is  expressed  eitlier  by  the  qua vtitativb 
Fou.>i-Ai».rK(riVKS,  or  by  tiie  advkubs  ok  intensity  (p.  2r>l),  or  by  the  neuters  sin<^ilar 
of  some  DETEK.MiNATiVES  of  the  inteiTO^'utive  and  indeflnite  lorms  (quid,  aliquid,  nikU). 

The  Qiv^NTiTATivE  AD-lKCTivEs  take  either  {u)  the  form  in  wm,  accordin-.;  to  the  rules 
on  the  n-lation  of  intensity  (R.  31),  as  Quantum  interest  {rf/€rt),\\\\tiX  a  i?reai  ditleience 
doe<  it  m.ike,  how  important  is  it  i\\x.  4.  5  G.) ;  taniuni  interest,  so  import'int  is  it ;  jhh- 
rimum  interest,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance,  etc.— Or  they  are  (/»  conceived  as  cl«-^'ree«i 
of  AiTKEciATioN,  takini,'  the  tjeiiitive  form  accordinjr  to  the  rule  §  5GI.  In  this  instance 
these  adjectives  (qxanfi,  fanti,  multi,  plunmi)  are  subject  to  the  same  r.strictn)iis  as  when 
they  are  us<-d  as  objects  of  the  verl)s  of  '  esteemiiii;',  as  Pennwjnl  fUP<tru  interest  te 
esse  RonuE,  it  is  of  the  hijrhest  importance  for  us  that  you  should  be  at  Home.  Cic.  .\tt. 
2  ii3  —  Jllud  narri  refert  mx^  rectiqalia  awimi  po^fea  victoria  recuperdn'.  It  is  ot  little 
consequence  (it  makes  little  ditlereiice)  tliat  we  afterw:inls  recover  the  lost  revenue  by 
victory.  Cic  Man.  7,  18.—  Quan/i  id  reftrt  A  tamen  accidit  /  What  diilereiice  does  it  make, 
if  it  vei  happens?  Cic.  Fain.  5.  9,  l.(See  Ex.  7-12.)  ,       ..    ,  .     „  .-o 

The  ADVEKBs  OP  INTENSITY  lake  all  the  ditTerent  forms  detailed  in  §  H-jS,  as  quantojiere 
intere4.  how  ijreatly  impoiiant  is  it  ;  maqnopere  reftrt  ;  nun  tarn  interest  quain  ;  fnaqis, 
niinime.  maxit/ie  interest,  {i^ce  Ex.  Vi-\'i.)  ,.„     .  ,     .   ^       u       i      ^    *  / 

If  the  nel:ter  detkuminativks  arc  used  to  qualify  the  verbs  interest  and  reftrt  (a case 
which  must  be  well  distinu'iiished  from  the  instance  that  the  neuters  hoc,  illiid,  quod  are 
imper-oi  al  sitb-ikct-»,  we  ;,'enerally  render  such  phrases  hy  the  noi'ns  'importance', 
'  consequence'.  '  dirtereiice'.  Tiiese  combinations  are  very  fretjuent  with  reftrt,  but  ex- 
tremely rare  with  i/J^^m<  as  :  Quid  id  vud  refert  f  What  diflereiice  makes  it  for  me? 
IMaiit  Cure  :i  'IT).— Si  neriu.^  est  numquid  reftrt /  If  he  is  a  slave,  makes  it  any  ilitlerence? 
Plant!  Pseud.'s.  4.  28.  (Ex.  18.  20.  21.  2  !J— Ilefert  with  nUiU  or  non  is  rendered  '  it  makes  no 
ditleience'  or 'it  is  of  no  cctnsequencc!',  or  'it  i<  unimportant',  'it  concerns  iioi',  as: 
'' Mea  quidem  istuc  nihil  reft-rr,  that  coiuerns  me  not  (or  'it  is  of  no  consequence,'  etc.  to 
me).  I'laut.  Pers.4,3.  G8.  See  Ex.  18. 21.22.  ,      .    .        ,., 

The  personal  construction  with  substantives  as  subjects  of  r«;/V''^  and  interest  is  ex- 
tremely rare  and  mostly  non-(  las>ical.  as  Ijonqitudo  in.  his  refert.  non  crassitudo,  the 
leng.h  is  thi;  important  point  in  this,  not  the  thickness.  Plin.  II.  N.  18,31.  74. 

Obs.  5.  The  person  or  tiuno  (always  conceived  as  a  person)  that  is  interested  in  an 
action,  IS  placed  in  the  cjenitive.  Itiit  if  the  interested  person  is  expres<e(l  bya  per- 
soi 


ional  pronoun,  tlie  lat'er  t  ikes  the  form  of  a  tosskssive  KouM-AnjKCTivE  in  theal)Ialive 
lingular  fenii  nine  (nieCi.  tuil.  sua,  nostra,  re<trd  :  but  i/rius,  ipsorum,  cnjus.  cnjusquarn,  Gaji, 
."eijfuttliciv  iiU'.).  When  the  genitive  of  siib-tantives  is  required,  ilie  verb  interest  is  far 
more  frequent  than  refer',  which  is  very  rarely  consinied  with  the  irenitivc  of  substan- 
tives, but  very  often  with  al)lative  posse.-*sives.  In  English  these  forms  of  the  •  inerested 
person'  are  expressed  either  personally  by  subject-nominatives,  or  by  the  ciiuivalents  of 
the  DATivK  as  the  proper  case  of  the  '  iiueresled  person'  (§  474.  U.  47,  §  4('y,> ;  as  :  Magni 
interest  med  una  nos  esse,  it  is  of  great  importance  (great  interest)  to  t/ie  that  we  should 
meet,  Cic.  Wt  13,4. — Magis  nul/'ius  interest  quam  tud.  non  impOni  cervicibus  tiiis  onus 
sub  quo  concidas,  it  is  to  nobody  oi  so  great  importance  as  to  yourself,  that  no  biirdt'ii 
should  be  placed  on  y(Mir  shoulders  (literally  '  neck')  under  which  you  wt)uld  sink.  J.iv.  24, 
8.— Semper  ille  qu  intuin  interessot  Vlodii  se  perlie  cogitilbat,  he  always  thought  of  how 
great  importance  it  was  for  Clodius  that  he  should  perish.  Cic.  Mil.  21, 5t). 


larians  have  taken  verv  difleienl  views.  1  he  older  grammarians  luosily  explained  tnea, 
(U  etc.  as  neuter  accusative  plurals  (not  considering  the  long  quantity  of  the  liual  «and 
le  length  of  the  syllable  re  in  r?fert).  Others  (lor  insl.  Ziimpt  and  Kiihner)  supply  causd. 
[advig  thiiik<  that  tned  is  an  adverb  with  the  force  'in  my  direction'.     But  old  Prisciau 


great  im[)orl ,  . 

The  origin  of  this  con-truclion  is  the  one  explained  in  ons.  2,  although  some  gram- 
marians liave  taken  very  difleienl  views.     The  older  grammarians  mosilv  explained  men, 
tua 
tht 

Mad\., - 

explains  refert  by  in  re  medftrt,  and  he  is  unquestionably  right 

Obs.  6.  The  thing  which  is  concerned  in  the  action  BEsinKsor  in  n.ACR  of  the  person  is 
sometimes  added  by  means  of  the  jireposition  ad.  as  Magni  ad  honureni  nostrum,  inter- 
est  (inst.  of  honoris  na^'ri)  nie  quam  primum  ad  urt)em  re/nre.  it  is  of  «rreat  consequence 
to  my  honor  that  I  should  come  as  soon  as  possible  to  town.  Cic.  Fam.  l»i,  1.  The  da- 
tive of  the  interested  person  as  object  of  these  verbs  o.-curs  in  the  only  passage  of  Ilor. 
Sat.  1, 1,  4'.>:  Die  quid  referat  intra  Katurce  finis  riventi  (some  reading  vivenlis)  j ugcra 


REL.'^TION   OF  WEIGHT. 


27 


o 


centum  an  mWe  aret  ?  Say  what  matters  it  to  one  living  within  Nature's  bounds  whether 
he  ploughs  a  hundred  acres  or  a  thousand? 

1    Kni.toMrum  "enera  mnlta  esse  non  ignOras,  sed  unum  illud  ccrtissimum  cujus 
1.  bpi^tojarum  -r*^  '  „v'    ,.,:Ar»<  (nr<.r.-mim -i  sentis  si  cniid  esset  qmd  eos  scire 

causa  inventa  res  ipsa  (^st,  't  <--e"Ore>  la' <  run  us  a  ^V"ij^  .S  putat  intei'me  se,  re 
aut  notrd  aut  ipsvrum  ^>^\^''^fi-J'^:.^^ 

^'T'.n  V^^I^mS^^  clc  iS  I'S- 4.  q^ant^^kp^ili^i.^^uH  C^saiem  potius 
;  /-^.  m  im  \i  to niiim  r'i  icipei  .  tantum  (reipul)liae)  retulisset  AaZ>?r^.Bru turn  quam 
i^''^' if^?,    Veil  '    72  -  5   O^^^^^^^  loco  quanfum  salutis  co?nmunif  intersit  dms 

Sali.mwn  a  mid  te  p    id  <^      bftQras,  malui  fkcere  quod  metis  familiaris  ta^di  suatnte. 


rr  hrnm  *  oeras^^    Plant.  Pseud.  1,  1.  100.-  13.  Ciesar  iJiviuacui  .  uu^^r.  ,/.„.,m^  ,w  .  .>.. 
tervis  I  Refert  enim  maqnoopere  id  ipsum.  Cic.  del.  23.  oi.-  U.  Cesar  diceic  ,  oie  )ai. 


I  :,.    -a     1T         m    TheonJir  islUS  moriens  jueu^a^fc   iiaiui«iii  v..v,..>..    ^ 

::i-j^:icf^n'^^ri^  ifiii^run-  quorum  i^ni^^if^^^^^  ^^}f;^  s^  ;^5; 

me  inferfui<set,  e:dguam  vnatn  dedisset    Cic    lusc  3^8  -   9^  '^r  ^c.  Itt.' 

s'-  VonVjri  ?  a^r  inaitos  libr<?s,  se.l  quam  botios  h'.^'^fas  Seii   E|x  4..  -  23.  bcio.  si 
qrd;h^,n^a  intersit,  tibi  inajr.ri  cune  solere  esse  quam  mihi.  Cic.  Att.  12, 3(. 

3.   Relation  of  Weight. 

^  562  The  rdiitioii  of  quautity  in  regard  to  weight  is  expressed  by  the 
measure-units  of  weight  with  attributive  cardinals  in  the  accusative-,  as  : 
Cyathus  iiendet  drachmas  decern,  a  cyathus  weighs  ten  drachmae.  Plin.  il. 
N  'H  ''OO  Indefinite  weight  is  expressed  by  the  quantitative  forni-adjec- 
tivw  (ll  31)  in  the  accus.^tive  neuter  form,  as  :  Plumbum  tantuiuUm 
nendere  par  est,  lead  siiould  weighju.^^^^  much,  Lucr.  1,  3G0. 

OBS.  1.  The  standard  of  Roman  -'i.M  was  the  pocnd  (^^^^^f.^rVtll  Va" ''^^^^^^^ 

/i/>m,  taking  the  form  of  an  y;;  .^^^ '"=\ !  [^'Xar.^ ^  *« 

^^;;:;tS^:x;^4S\.y^XS^  l^e^^K'p^  is  --«  (ounce). 

OBS  2   The  NEUTEU  verb  to  weigh  is  expressed  either  by  the  neuter  verb  ;>..^erg*jor 

-VX^r;,,,,  ,,aet  in  suffraqu>  J'-^^J^^^ 

the  greatest  prosperity.- '  a^semb  e.-  *  ;>o/    r  -.\  '.^jj^red  as  a 

P,»llux\- ^  V"'"'^  and  quanfi  are  together     '"'i^f;-;   '  ^  ,:'?"  {..(.'^^^^^^^^      relative  forin.- 
mere  conjunction  of  comparison,  and  quanti  as  a  ^"'"  V^'  fj'^^,",'^^'";  to  nlace  -  «  v^s 

die-ere,  to  dispense  justiee  -     i»i\>f '''^'.  >•   ,.„  cm  to  P'-ove.-  13  rain.-  i^  critjnnn,  a 
vest  someb.)dy  with  somethiiig.-i^  W  bat  you  ^'aim  'O  pim         _  ^^  crow.- 

the  transitive  verb  pendere  as  the  word  expressing  the  idea    to  have  wei^ni 


276 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


RELATION  OF  CAUSE. 


277 


by  f^ne,  both  takincr  the  object  (lonntinj;  the  weight  in  the  arcnpativc  cn?e,  ns  :  As  ercA 
lihram  j/ondo,  tlit-  a;?  woiuhcd  :i  pound  (uas  a  pound  in  weiLMili.  Varro  L.  L.  5,  36.—  /rui 
o-ibnita  Mf,  pondo  quincunceni,  the  quantity  ol"  sifted  *Irif*'  .««hould  weij^h  a  pound  and 
ftvf  twell'th!».  Col.  12.  28. —  Quut  pondo  tecetuies  tise,  how  many  pounds  do  you  think  you 
weii;li  ?  riuut.  Asin.  2,  2,  35. 

Obs.  3  The  numeral  cxpieffsions  hy  which  weiffhts  are  determined  are  added  in  the  ac- 
crsATivE  Cask  to  jMVido,  l)ciiif?  the  adverbial  object  of  the  idea  'iiYir//ii/iof\  w  hich  is  never 
cx'iressed  hy  an  adjective,  or  In'  a  p.irticiple  (as  in  Engli.xh).     Ttiis  aceusiative  al.xo  cor- 
responds to  our  KiiL'li-h  ol)jective  alter  'of,  indicatin.,'  the  weiL'ht.  a» :  Patene  aurete 
fuCnint  CCLXXV'l  iibra<  fere  omne»  pcndo,  there  were  2Ti»  f^ojden  bowl;»  iveifffiinq  all 
exactly  o//>!  pound  (all  a  pound  in  weight,  all  of  a  pound).  Liv.  -Jfi,  47.—  Dictator  corO- 
nam  aureani.  lihram  pondu,  in  Capitolio  Jovi  donum  po.-uit,  the  dictator  plHced  a  golden 
crown,  one  pound  in  weight,  (of  one  pound)  in  the  Capitol  a?  an  otfering  to  Jupiter.  Liv, 
4,  20.—  Fnnn  libra  U  formed  ihe  adjective  librCilis,  ^\Gm,i'm^  'one  pound  in  weijjht',  as 
lH,ra  ([)i'ar>i)  libra/ia.  Plin.  H.  N.  15, 11.— '7V>  be  of  weirihf  ,  in  a  figurative  sense,  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  qualitative  genitive />OAj(i<'ri<  esue,  or  by  vallre  with  a  neuter  qmintitative: 
Tmtlittt'nt  nuu-imi  tutnt  apud  me  inrndtris.  Cic.  Fam.  2,  1«.    iio  jK}ndU{<  habere,  lb  3  1* 
j)liif<  and  tantum  ralere,  li).  3,  7;  Off.  3,  31.  "    '    ' 

1.  Drachma'  .Attica"  denarii  ar<jrentei'  Imbet  pondus,  eademque  cex  obolos*  nondere 
cfflcit* ;  ob<»lus  decern chalcos^ p-ndef,  Plin.  II.  N.  21,  109.— 2.  Mna^.iiuam  iio>ti{  minam 
\ocH.ut,pend(t  drarhmas  .\tticMs  centum.  lb.—  3.  In  Transpadflnjl»*  Italift  scit),  vicunas 
qtdnax  librae,  larris»  modios  ;>f/<(/?r«' ;  circa Cinsiuin  et  sena^.  lb.  IS.  12.  2.—  4.  Invenl- 
miis  tiiuunor''"  tahnta  qitindecim  pept'ndi.^xe.  lb.  '.♦,  17.  —  .*).  Fi^tulasn  denum  pedum  lon- 
gitudinis  esse  le:;itiiuuui  est'-,  et.  si  quiiiariie'*  ^n\\\X,sti'agtn.a  i)ondu  jundZre  ;  si  octo- 
nariie,  centena ;  si  denaria\  cnf^na  rir?na.  lb.  31,  31.— •>.  Exercitus  Minucio  corAnam 
auream  libranijX)ndo dvcrCs  it .  Ijv.  3,  29, 3. — 7.  \'iuctii>i centum  jx/ndo  es,  qnaudo pe/ide^^* 
per  (on)  pedes.  Plant.  Asin.  2,  2,  35. 

fJ^"   (lENEIlAL    ReM.VKKS   ON'   THE   OUAMMATK'Al.     FOIiMS   USE»    I\   THE    RELATIONS   OF 

Measuremknt,  VVkight,  and  ("oMi'iTTATioN.— The  most  «reneral  forn»  by  which  tlie  En- 
giisl»  language  desiLrnates  all  these  relation^,  and  di»tiniruishes  them  from  each  other  are 
ad.iectives  (participle>)  and  vkubs  to  which  the  numeral  ex()res~ions  of  mea>urement, 
weiurht  and  computation  an-  added  as  ol)jects  in  tln^  form  of  the  objective  casi>.  As  to  tiie 
use  of  adjective  and  participial  expressions,  the  two  languages  are  analogous  in  the  meas- 
urement of  SPACE  and  time,  but  they  ditVer  in  the  other  relations. 

(a)  In  si'ACK  tilt!  adjective  expressions  used  in  both  laiii^uages  to  designate  measurement, 
aside  from  minor  diversities,  a;e  almost  the  same  (§  4i»8  and  K.  103).  The  general  verb 
' /o  7nea<ure''  (in  a  neuter  sense),  under  which  ail  the  dift'erent  kinds  of  measurement  in 
space  are  comprised,  is  in  Latin  expressed  by  the  verb  pa'cre.  which,  in  this  sen-e.  is  con- 
strued with  an  Acri:s.\TiVE,  corresponding  to  the  English  objective,  a.s  :  ^-Estimilbat 
(/uid  in  fronte  pattrent  lapides  ^inLruli,  he  estimated  what  the  single  stones  viea*tured  in 
front.  Liv.  25.  23.  Seh(enus  t/nadntginta  s/adia  paftt,  the  .«chnMiu<  (a  Persian  measure  of 
distance)  meaxnrfix  fortij  stadia.  Plin.  II.  N.  12.  'JO,  2. — IIujiis  silva>  latitndo  iiovem  diCruin 
ittrpatet,  the  width  of  this  forest  nia<urts  nine  days'  journeys.  C;es.  H.  Ci.  ♦>. '2.'). 

(b)  In  the  relation  of  time  the  Enirli^h  language;  de-»iginiies  by  aiuectives  the  age,  but 
no  other  spaces  of  time.  The  Latin  laniruage  agrees  in  this  respect  with  the  English  (§  49s), 
except  that  in  respect  to  the  a^^e  of  thinos  or  animals  the  English  'old'  is  neither  ex- 

Inessed  by  natus.  nor  by  arj^ns,X)\xt  either  by  a  genitive,  or  by  an n u m  (an nox)  htibiie ,  as  : 
jUcus  LucTnus  nunc  circiter  ^i//«'///i  (/'tadrin(/t  >df.-<i/num  qitiiKpiafjeaimurn  hafM:t,\.\\Ki  Lu- 
cinian  grove  is  now  about  450  years  old,  Plin.  IH,  8.5. 

(r)  In  the  relation  of  nucE  and  valite  the  Latin  language  has  no  adjective  correspond- 
ing to  our  adjective  '  ^wr//r.  The  expression  'worth  sucfi  a  price'  is  variously  para- 
phrased according  to  the  connection  (II.  3*2,  obs.  4). 


a  strange  error,  caused  by  the  passaL'e  of  Lucretius  cited  above.  Tt  is  certain  that  in 
this  passage  the  word  pendere  has  a  short  penult,  and  hence  i^  of  the  third  conjiiiration, 
belongiuij  to  pendo,  not  to  pfndeo.  But  since  jyendh'e  always  denotes  '  to  weii;h  a  thing', 
in  an  active  sense,  it  i.s  obvious  that  Lucretius,  by  a  frequent  poetical  license,  for  the 
sake  of  the  metrum,  has  used  the  active  verb  in  a  neuter  sense.  There  is  no  other  pas- 
sage in  any  author  in  \\\\'n:h.  pendere  is  used  in  the  neuter  sense  'to  have  weight'.  The 
passages  of  Pliny  in  \\\\\ch.  pend?re  and  p^pendh^ffe  occur  in  the  infinitive  form  (Plin.  18, 
12,  3;  9,  17:  31,  31)  must  hi;  assigned  to  peudere.  and  not  to  ]}eitdpre. 

•  A  dracluna  nrdntcttm,  a  small  Greek  silver-coin,  which  is  still  u<ed  in  modern  Greece. 
—  ^  Attic. —  3  silver  (adj.). —  *  an  ol)ole,  a  Greek  copper-coin.—  *  to  contain.—  •  the  chal- 
cus,  (copper),  the  smallest  Greek  coin. —  ''  a  Greek  word  (Mna\—  *  Transpadane.  i.  e. 
beyond  the  Padus  (the  river  Po).—» /ar,  rye.— i"  a  tunny-fish.-  »'  lead  nipes.—  >3  lerjiti- 
mum  est  esse,  they  should  be  (literally:  it  is  legitimate  that  they  shoula  be).—  '•  quina- 
rias,  octondrius,  dfinarins,  measuring  five,  eight,  ten  digits  in  circumference, —  ^*  pendi^ri 
is  here  '  to  be  weighed',  not '  to  hang'.  See  Lum))in.  to  this  passage. 


i 


(d)  In  the  relation  of  weight  the  phrase  '  weighing  8vch  an  ammmV  ie  expressed  by  the 
indeclinable  ]X)ndo{\n  weight)  with  an  accusative,  or  by  a  mere  accusative  (§  5t-2,  obs.  3  ) 

(e)  In  '  rompufafion'  the  Latin  languai:e.  like  the  English,  lacks  specific  grammatical 
forms.  Our  phrase '  so  many  men  etc.  strong"  is  not  expressed  i)y  an  adjective,  but  by  the 
ablative  nmn-ro  (or  ad  num^.riim)  in  connection  with  a  L^enitive.  as  :  Cum  Y^crt^ac  rnille 
^?/7;i^;T>  7Jaf'»;/Klassein  ad  Delum  appiilissent,  when  the  Perrians  had  landed  at  Delos 
a  fleet  one  thousand  sails  strong  (in  miinber).  Cic.  Verr.  2, 1, 18.  See  Caes.  B.  G.  1,  15. 

D.  Relation  of  Cause. 

^  563.  The  relation  of  cause  is  of  three  different  kinds.  It  may  be 
conceived  :  1)  as  the  means  and  instrument  of  an  action  ;  2)  as  the  fact 
which  effects  an  action  (cause  efficient  as  real  cause,  and  motive  as 
moral  cause);  8)  as  purpose.  To  each  of  these  subdivisions  of  cause 
different  grammatical  forms  are  applied. 

§  564.  If  the  relation  of  cause  is  conceived  as  the  means  and  instru- 
ment of  an  action,  it  is  expressed  either  by  the  ablative  case  of  the  noun 
represented  as  means  and  instrument,  or  by  tl»e  preposition  per. 

Rem.  37.  Both,  the  ablative  of  mwms,  and  the  preposition  per  are  rendered 

by  the  Englisih  preposition  '  by'  ;  but  sometimes  by  other  prepositions 

{uith,  (It,  on,  from).     In  the  passive  voice  the  ablative  of  meaiis  h:is  the 

ai'>peariince()f  a  passive  aizent,  as  doloaUquem  clrcumrernre,  to  circumvent 

some  one  by  treachery  ;  dolo  circa mvenlri,  to  be  circumvented  by  treachery. 

Per  is  used  with  the  stime  force,  as  : 

liubrium  per  rim  dedfici  impenlvit,  he  ordered  Rubrins  to  be  taken  np  by  force.  Cic.  V  err. 

2,  1,  '2.').— Cum  in  eas  urbis  ri  invasisses,  when  you  had  invaded  these  cities  byjorce.  lb.  2«>. 

Or*"  1  The  ablative  of  means  has  a  wider  range  than  the  preposition  'by'  in  En- 
<dish  It  borders  at  the  one  side  (ui  the  relati(m  of  'manner',  and  at  the  other  side, 
pas-es  over  into  the  relation  of  'cause  efticient'  an«l  'motive'.  (Compare  the  Examples 
given  §  fvM  OBS  ;i.)  Thus  i^eitibu^  ire  (ferric,  to  walk  on  foot :  cmm  vehi  (but  also  with 
t«  Cic.  Phil. -2.  21. 5S),  to  ride  in  a  carriaire  (by  wairon).  as  Irretigids'im  ratus  est.  sacer- 
dSfem  wdihus  ire  ft-rrlrpw,  ac  se  in  rehiculo  conxpici,  he  deemed  it  irreliL'ious  that  a  pnest 
should  walk  (and  niovet  on  fb<»t.  while  he  himself  was  seen  in  a  carriage.  Liv.  5,40— V\  e 
gav  '  to  be  astonished  at  a  thinir',  or  '  to  be  astonished  becaus^e',  conceiving  this  phrase 
either  as  a  metaphor  of  place  or  as  '  cause  efiicient'.  Th-  Latin  conceives  the  thing  at 
which  one  is  asttmished  as  the  •  instrament'  of  the  ast(mishment.  using  an  ablative  of 
MEANS-  Oh^tupnit  homini'i  irnprvhi  dicto.  he  was  astounded  at  -the  words  of  the  wicked 
man  cic  Verr  '2,  1,  2t>.  The  mohal  «uorNO  of  an  action,  which  Is  in  EnLMish  expressed 
by  'for'  IS  in  Latin  conceived  as  an  ikstki'MENt  of  the  action,  and  placed  in  the  ablative, 
as-  'I'hiiippns  Demetrium  filium  mdlo  alio  ctimine  quam  Komfliup  amicitia^  initteoccldit, 
Philip  killed  his  scm  Demetrius  for  r.o  other  crime  than  that  of  havinir  joined  Inend- 
8hip  with  the  Komans.  Liv.  41,'2:^.  Thus  the  ablative  of  means  touches  the  relation 
of  cause  as  'a  motive',  where  we  use  the  preposition  '  fnnn  or  'out  ol  ,  as  :  Pranor  ira 
provincite  sibi  erepta«  ma-istiatn  se  abdicatams  erat.  the  prietor  was  about  to  resign  his 
office  fwm  {out  of )  auger  X\\Ai  the  province  liad  been  taken  from  hmi.  Liv.  3.,  51.  Here 
belongs  the  relation  represented  by  '  according  to',  which  in  Latin  is  expressed  Dy  ad  or 
ex  but  al-^o  bv  the  men;  ablative,  as  r>>/>i/«i()«e  w^'7,  according  to  (in)  my  opinion.— J  lUl ices 
dedit  nulla  Uge,  nuUo  institnto,  nnlUT  sorte.  he  appointed  the  judges  according  to  no  law 
and  prtctdt/if,  without  castiuir  lots  for  them.  Cic. Verr.  2, '2,  W. 

Obs  2  The  exact  limits  of  this  'ablative  of  means  and  instrument'  cannot  be  reduced 
to  a  rule  and  in  this  respect  the  ablative  case  shares  the  cliaracter  of  most  prepositions, 
the  limits  of  which  cannot  be  exactly  defined  by  distinct  marks  and  theoretical  reason- 
ino-  But  it  is  evident  that  the  idea  oY  '  means  and  instrumentality'  is  the  leading  con- 
ception out  of  which  all  theee  difterent  shades  and  varieties  ot/ cause  must  ne  ex- 
plained. It  is  a  remarkable  argument  for  the  correctness  of  this  view  that  m  almost  all 
the  instances  in  which  an  ablative  of  means  is  used  to  express  what  we  generally 
conceive  to  be  '  cause  enicient'  or  '  motive',  the  preposition  j)€r  (hkewise  denoting  means) 
may  take  the  place  of  the  ablative,  as  :  Si  natiiraiis  essetira.  quomodo  quemquam  poem- 
t(5ret  quod  fecisset  »«r  iram?  if  anger  were  natural,  how  could  anyone  feel  corapunction 
at  what  he  has  done  out  of  anger. ^  Cic.  Tusc.  4,  SI. -Per  metum  potius  quam  voluntate 


278 


RELATIONS   OF  MODALITY. 


civinm  fortanis  consnluSrunt  patre^  the  I^atrida1.s  consuljo.l  'i^'-.^^^e  inte^^^^^^^ 

CONVKNT.ONAM.Y  HU  ACT.VK    MKAN.NO    (  bv  r '''<-' ^'/'FJ^; J '  1,^^  lotilak^^^^^^ 

WC  enplov  our  diirerent  ca.isjil  P'-^T'»^'"''"'-,  .  V"  \VhJ    /;   ,   m^^^^^^^^^ 
nectio;lurdi^.H.r..an;tljetwopo;m 

correctnesso    aj:  Y      )'/  ;.^  ,^^^^^^^  ti.e  ferce  of  the  preposition  ;>roy;/^/^  in 

given  above,  ti.e  ;    '^    ^n    '    "u^^^^^^^^^^^^  of  tlu'  more  definite  preposition*»  would  be 

<w»  ^1   Th,.  rcl'.fion  of  means  anil  Insirum.Mitality  amnnt  be  expresi-cil  bv  form-nd- 
vcH?^no,  Sine,';   V    y    bral,|iUive.Unb,,,l..tc.f..r.n;a,Oc.Mi 

u,i..ih  'I'.m  J  .'iviii''tne  inteiTo-'ative    iinn^  tiir  tlie  innic-ipul  aUM  rnui  ici.nntii>.  luu 

^  cusUkUhs  ho.l!.nu  fallebant,  ^/../W.y  tUey  deceived  the  posts  ot  the  enemy.  L.v.  ii     U. 
Or^  4    If  tlie  means  or  instrument  of  an  action  is  expressed  by  a  whole  sentence  the 
La?iT<4uMa  ly  i^ses    he  tor.n  of  a  «.uini.ia..  ablativk  (§  5-29)  [more  rare  y  f  e  «onii  of 
HhU-^saS^  li. '^ir.J.and  someli.nes  the  form  ol  a  .U-peudent  c  la  Use  in- 

tSc^Ml  bv  S  »>v  the  absolute  n.-uterfo  (of  io.  as  :  CaptTv.  lidem  eo 

max  me  an x^r^^^^^^  inter  ouinTs  c.n^MuChat.  the  prisoners  n.creased  the  relmnce 

Xee  ID  n  U  e m  chietly  bt/  (he  fad,  that  the  reports  ..f  ail  a-reed  (by  a-reem-  in  the.r 
?eD  ms  L  V  9^4^^^^^^^^  sauie  ablative  to  with  a  eiau.e  intro,  ured  by  <iuod  -r  9/'"^  [re- 
n^entlv  denote"*  'cau^e  efficieiit^  or  '  motive',  as :  Helvetii  h,  u.  e.  ea  eausjl)  .piod  re  h-u- 
?,  Si^a  i    terdildi   p^  it^r  converterunt.  tl»e  llelvc-t.ans  tnrm-d  Lea- 

rn h  /V //l^mii/i  /^^^  (because)  Ih.-y  trusted  that  the  Konu.ns  nn-lil  be  cut  oil  t mm 
Ih.  ir  KM  nlies  Serii  O  1  2:3 -Tiic  ablative  eo  as  ablative  t>f  means,  must  be  d.stin- 
Ju  she   '      fronV'^o  denoiin/^^  (§  5G(i),  which  is  followed  bv  "  ^'""f^  ;^;;t  '  '^'^^ 

?)fromU  as  ablative  ol  DiFFEUENCt:  belore  a  comparac.ve,  which  is  followed  by  a  clauso. 
with  ^^/0  (751).  See  p.  G54.  .      , 

1    Siculi  talem  ncccperant  injuriam  quam  nulla  lege  satis  dicrni  perscqui»  pos«ent 
Cic   Ve  r  2   1   S-2  Tuapudexteras  /ntiOnes  i.uperii  n<.mini.que  nostr.  hin.am    ./i.- 
^ri^/V'^  /?« Jk'/^ /«  vi<.lasti   lb.- 3.  Ciesar dixit,  Ariovistum  (Jallos  nx,vs\^  rationed  el 
J"^^.}:  .-^^^"    J  %f\iU'.  r'.,w   R   (t  1   40  —  4    Heracl  us.  pecuniosissimus»  antea 
^::^:ZZ^     n^n^^S^^^^  X^M-ris  «..n-i/^^a.que  injuria  pauper- 

l^mirelt    C^^^^  2   14.-  5.  ('ircumsessus«  est  Verres  a  Lampsacen.s^  liomini: 

conditioned  sociis,/ar//7/t(2'»  ^ervis,  tvV.//^(a/.Y  suppl.ci  .u-  lb.  2,  V./^tiduV^.  unt      i^i 
litea   .Myndo  MilGtum  pedibus  reverti  jussit.   lb.  2,  1,  34.-  7.   In  culpa      Hint    qui 

1  To  prosecute.-  »  prohrnm.  a dis-raceful  act.-  3  method^-  *  ^V.nh^^r^v^bv 'lli^ir  no- 
cutn^edei-e   to  besie^^e  —  Mnbabitants  of  Lampsacus.—  »  also.  furth«  r.— »  by  their  po 
mcii    condition  -'»0  by  their  misfortune,/or/.7na  beinj,  "-\d  "^  "^J^.^^J"  "^  ^/.^^^^^^^^^ 
both  a  fortunate  and  an  unfortunate  sense  -  "  as  to  their  ^^"^>  '^- ^^     h.  fmlt 
may  all  be  rendered  by  'as  to'.-  >'^  in  culpa,  esse,  to  be  blamable,  to  be  in  fault. 


RELATION  OF  CAUSE. 


279 


officla  de«erun1i  mollind^  animi.  Cic.  Fin.  1,  10.  ai-  8.  OratOrnm  ant  in/m7|/» 
omcia  °^'^^}^"\.'\.-j  „rima<*  in  causis»  agSbat  Ilortensius.  Cic.  Brut.  90,  308. 
aut  ^//^^•:^;^*  f '  f./if  .%^;;;?\^on  tam  tegni  qt.ara  regis  vitii^  repudiatum«  e.t.  Cic. 
To?/  ^^'f'n  -  10  Ob  hfe"  I'e.Scia  guifL  ilii  homines  obstupescuut,  nuUos  honOres 
mihi  nisi  verbOrum  decerni  muo.  Cic  Att.  &,  ^i,  i. 

^  565    Tlie  relation  of  cause  efficient  and  of  motive  is  expressed 
1)  by  attributive  phrases  consisting  of  tlie  general  nouns  denoting  cause, 
e^lM'cially  caum  and  ratio  (sometimes  rex),  which  are  either  placed  in  the 
ablative,  or  take  a  prepositional  form,  chiefly  with  de  and  ob,  sometimes 
with  ex  and  propter;  2)  by  the  pkepositions  propter  and  ob  in  direct  con- 
nection with  the  substantive  represented  as  the  cause,  without  any  mter- 
mediate  noun,  such  as  causa  or  ratio  ;  3)  by  substituting  a  mere  ablative 
■  of  the  noun  in  place  oi  propter  and  ob  ;  4)  by  the  foum-adverbs  of  cause, 
as  cur  idco  etc. ;  5)  by  clauses  or  sentences  introduced  by  one  of  the 
causal'  conjunctions  (i^  385.  386  and  B.  VI.) ;  6)  by  accessory  predicates  m 
form  of  certain  participles  {inductus,  adductus,  permoius  etc.  §  501,  R.  115). 
Jlem  38    The  ablative  causa  is  thus  used  1)  in  connection  with  at- 
TUini^^TivE  GENITIVES  either  of  nouns  (§  437,  R.  43)  or  of  gei'undials  (^  o26, 
R  4o  OBS  3),  as  C(^sa?^isciiusd,  for  the  sake  (on  account)  of  Caesar  ;7i^;i(ym 
i^*;^  out  of  respect ;  purjnandi  caum,  for  the  sake  of  fighting.    For  the 
SiV    miLz  tl!e  abhui/e  gratia  is,  in  this  connection,  frequently  used 
ns  a  svnonvm  —  2)  with  attributive  adjectives,  either  descriptive  or 
form-adieclives,  as  7ned  causa,  on  my  nccouni;  probabiU  mj/f«,  from  a 
laus  b  e  reas(,  I ;  fdiena  cwisd,  for  the  sake  of  others.     In  this  connec- 
tion S  cannot  be  used  in  place  of  causa,  except  in  connection  with 

^^*n=r5^  The  ablative  of  caum  or  ^m/ia  with  an  attributive  genitive  or  an  attributive 

^^  •  ?-J„i^^r  w.    is  the      ost   -enn      form   for  'cause   efficient'  and  for  'motive.' 

possessive  ^'^'^^^^I'^J^J^^'^'^^^^^  cause  is  conceived  as  a  person  in 

ita  iiiicxu  ii.iiiiiii  ut  '^"'  ;"  .       ,         Thiis  fTn-vin  iedrum)  cau^a.  lor  their  sake,     bome- 
as  to  undergo  dangers  »"   /'^^  f ^*-    and  seem Tuems  assuine  the  genitive  forms  of 

genitive  attdlmtcf  H  is  Inte-classical  and  poetical,  but  is  also  u.ed  (even  classically)  m 
the  language  of  the  law.  (p.  114, 98)  ,  .  a  e^,^ 

Snn'of  c«S  wfthLnnd-'^me  f^/m"^      nsual  (/.a.  c/.  ca«.a  .•  ob  quam  causam  ;  but 
nuUd  alia  causa  ;  mullis  de  causu^,  not  jnultis  causis. 

Item   39.  The  prepositional  form  of  causa,  as  exponent  of  the  rehition 
of  causcremeieiit  and  motive  (generally  with  de  or  ob)  is  confined  to  ad- 

^prnnas  agere,  suppl>  pariis.  primaiuy  "=^"       ,     nnendia   in  uleadin''-  causes,  i.  e.  as 


280 


RELATIONS  OF  MODALITY. 


RELATION  OF  CAUSE. 


281 


jective  attributes  which  do  not  belons^  to  tlic  possessives,  but  hardlr  ever 
occurs  with  attributive  genitives.  It^  is  as  unusual  to  say  oh  cama>n  Qaji 
in  place  ot  Gajt  causa,  as  graci  causa  (for  an  iinportanfreason)  in  place  of 
graDi,  de  causa  or  ob  gravem  causam. 

Obs.  1.  Per  with  causam  and  an  attributive  «renitive  means '  ?/rt-*«r  the  nreUrtof  a« 
per  ca>,sam  equifatv,.  coqemU,  under  the  pretext  Of  (Iraltin.-  c"nal,  Ca-  if  f;  f '^^^^  \n 
a  certain  meaninnrj>w/>/«r  is  connected  with  ratio  and  an  attrilmtivctrenitive  a^wTvi». 
ter  ratwnem  brtvitdiv^,  from  a  uegar»  for  brevity.  Cic.  y^'J'^  ^^'';•'•4'^'/^^fe^"'t'v^'"*i''^f>?>- 
♦..?.^!l;  ^"  '?o™'^li!"<'*  re*  with  pn^positions  or  in  the  ablative  U  iised  in  plaoe  of  cau.<a  in 

f:;i;ir=5dv^ro?U!;r(ii:tr'""^  ^^"«^^  ""^^  ..«/.<^...oa{L  ^.^:^z 

n^'m.  40.  The  form-adveiibs  employed  to  express  the  relation  of 'cause 
emcient  and  'motive'  are:  1)  I.NTEKuoo.vrrvii  and  iielative  foums  • 
Lur,  why;  quubu,  wliy  not;  quare,  quamobrcm,  whv,  wiierefore,  for  what 
reason  {quapropter  in  this  meaning  being  anteclassical).—  2)  Drfimtk 
form:  eo,  uleo,  iccirco  (or  idcirco),  propterea,  tlierefore.  Causal  form-ad- 
verbs ot  the  indefinite  form  do  not  exist.  In  their  place  plirases  with 
causa  {m  the  singular  or  plural)  are  used,  as  inultis  ils  causls.  In  place  of 
cur,  the  neuter  adjective  quid  is  frequently  used  in  the  meaning  '  whi/'. 

th??.r2'^S',?^''^-^'  fi:erierally  ennmerated  amon-  the  adverbs  of  caitsk.  is  a  compoiiiul  of 
the  prepoMtmn  circa  with  the  third  locative  ca^e  quo  (p.  217.  Obs.  8).  havin-the  mLinin.-  of 
circa  quod  i  e.  in  which  respect.    Hence  it  does  not  properly  belon-  to  the  relation  of 

and  car  u.ak.nij:  u  very  improlmble  that  the  one  slu.uld  be  a  corruption  of  he  other*  ami 
the  MKAMNo  ol  (w- excluding  its  derivation  from  on  rei,  which  even  in  its  lorin  w.m  d 
have  no  aualo-y.  Cur  is  unquestionably  a  wor.l  wh.ch  reaches  up  xo  . he  very  ear  est 
peruHls  ot  lan-ua-e.  It  distinctly  shows  the  iuterro^-ative  r-.ot  c>  in  itr„r  ,,Lrv  lorm 
Ijke  c;//vi),  the  letter  rbeiMir.nost  likely  a  (\,riaative  sound,  which  ..ecu  suth^s^^^^^^ 
nitication  in  ttieco-nate  lan-ua-es  ^he  r  in  the  En-lish  '  where',  bein-  of  the  Jame  ori'nn). 

*yP^^'  •'^•.J'\^"f«^'Ji'*fi(:al  l-}"'-?'iiU'e  the  old  ablative  qui  (see  R.  15.  oes.  2)  wa.s  used  with 
the  si-mftcation  '  why'  a>laut.  Ba<-ch.  5.  2,  4:».     The  neuter  quid  frequently    km-   r"    n 

W  hy  do  I  ar-ue  ?  w  hy  do  I  discuss  th(f  matter  y  Cic.  Mil.  l(i.  It  is  ^,;rv  freuueuilv  used 
in  connection  with  ../an,    the  conjuncti.m  qml  (sometimes  with  7'  a  /UrVm    i^^ 

renipute,'^  te  tuamadpam  commxiaclre  aim  nlttro  />asvst'/  Why  (literally  «hat  iTii 
that)  do  you  accuse  oti.ersy  Why  (li.erally  :  what  is 'it  fo  which  re  io,  do  you  tlmik 
you  can  make  another  share  your  ;^'uilt  t  cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  20. 

Obs  4.  Anion-  the  causal  form-adverbs  of  the  iuterro-ative  form,  rvrand  mitd  are  the 
most  frequent   hav.nn:  the  most  -eueral  character,     q^ire  u^uallv  a^ks  "or  it  e  r^^  i-o   s 
which  \i-<i,\(^  deter  mined  An  action,  and  qmnmhrrm  more  -eueraliy  ivfer^  to  m  .tivk  or  im'h 
pose;  as  :q>,nre  pri.num  il'ea.lesseu..luit  ?  <leind.-  tu  rvr  .indices  alios  soriitus  es  "  Wl^i 
111  the  nrst  i.hice.  reiused  that  man  to  be  present  y  and  a-aiu.  wh,,  did  voii  <lraw  (bv  Ion 
o  her  judges  V  c'ic.  V  err.  2    2.  \^.~  q.uunofnem  een-n.-es  ad  statiiam  tihi  confer^  i   t* 
TUy  Old  the  censors  contribute  for  thy  statue  y  n,.  2.  2,.55.-If  the  int-rr..i:ali(      is    ,"  i'. 
tue,  three  torms  are  used  :  Q^in  (instead  of  qm  >m„),  qui  ini,  r>,r  noo.  coPrespondin'-to 
qui.  quid,  and  o/r,  (qiiare  and  quumohrem  b.in-  rarelv  used  with  ne-ation-)    o!iin    whv 
not)  does  not  really  ask  fora  reason,  but  implies  that  a  future  action  kould  be  p.rformed. 

)V,^^i      /"  '""^  our  horses?  (=Consceudamu.^  eq>,o.<.)   Liv.  1.  sf.     See  pp.  .'>4.;  an.l  51T 
UBS.  n.     turnou  asks  for  the  reason  of  a  present  or  past  not-doinji:   Qm  x„ut  tn  -"  cur 

\\hj  did  y<.u  not  enter  stramhrwaysy  Ter.  Eun.  l.^.l.-Qmdid  (always  with  the  -ub 

te,'«rVlI  w^Jh ''^'^'''''''^•''^'•''',  ""^'/''•"«^"y  contains  an  emphatic  affikmatio.v, 
^«r,"l,  ri  •'  ^'t'"'".t  a  predicate  (=  Why  notf).  It  {,'enerally  refers  to  the  speaker's 
?^  r.r  0'  £"'^v*  '"rVr'^'« K  Why  Bhould  I  not  remember ?  {i'e. I  certainly  reinember)! 
CIC.  ur.2  W).  bee.  for  the  derivation  and  nature  of  this  adverb,  p.  7(ks,  notet.  All  the 
causal  interroRatives,  except  quidni  (quia  only  in  certain  connections;  «ee  pp. 547.  .M8 


1 


-V 


615. 12)  are  also  u?ed  in  indirect  questions  and  as  relatives :  Quae  qmirn  ita  sini,  cur  non 
arbitrum  pro  cocio  adeqeiis  Q.  lioscium.  qvcero ;  I  ask,  why  you  did  not  proceed  against 
Q.  it.  by  an  action  on  account  of  partnership  y  Cic.  K.  Com.  \).—lpse  ostendit,  qxiamobrtin, 
Carhunem  reliqiierit;  he  himself  shows  why  he  left  Carbo,  Ib.Verr.  2, 1, 13.— II  used  as 
relative  adverbs,  quare  etc.  trenerally  have  the  otlice  of  relative  adjectives  with  causal 
prepositions,  referriui,'  to  caum,  ratio,  res,  as  antecedent,  and  are  rendered  \forwhich\ 
'on  account  o/ which'.  See  Ex.  18.  19.20.  For  the  particulars  of  this  relative  use,  see 
p.  527  (a). 

Ob«»  .'>.  The  demonstrative  adverli  ^0  (expressing 'cause  efficient'  or 'motive')  is  not 
the  same  as  the  local  adverb  eo  of  the  third  locativ.'  ca«e  (R.  .5,  No.  (e)),  but  the  ablative 
neuter  of  i*.  Jdeo  is  a  compound  of  id  with  eo.  Propterea  is  formed  out  of  the  fourth 
locative  case  ea  with  the  preposition  propter.  To  these  causal  adverbs  may  be  added 
the  seconil  locative  cases  hinc  and  inde,  which  sometimes  are  used  in  a  causal  sense,  m 
the  meaniu"  '  hence'.  Here  belongs  also  the  compound  provide,  hence,  and  the  words 
itaque  iqiTur,  erqo.  which  have  assumed  the  nature  of  coordinatinir  conjunctions 
(S3S5)'  ilere  also  belon<r  the  relatives  qvare,  qunmobrem,  and  qvaprapter  which  are 
verv  frequently  employed  in  the  si£fiiiflcati«m  of  i/ffr/w€.  the  relatives  which  f.>rm  part 
of  these  adverb*  havitii?  a  demonstkativk  force,  as  is  frequently  the  case  with  all  kinds 
of  relatives.     With  the  same  iorce  qvocirca  is  sometimes  used. 

Obs  r.  The  causal  adverbs  of  the  relative  and  definite  (demonstrative)  forms,  are  on 
the  dividin'T  line  which  separates  conjunctions  atid  kki.ativk  adjectives  from  the  ad- 
VFKBs  and  hence  belomr  to  th(!  most  interesting;  formations  of  the  lan.'uage.  The  com- 
mon feature  of  the  causal  conjunctions  and  causal  adverbs  of  the  demonstrative  and 
relative  forms  is  that  thev  all  contain  a  drmonstkativk  or  relative  element  which 
incorporates  in  them  a  whole  sentence,  either  precedini?  or  follow.nfr.  ^^  hile  thus,  as  it 
were  either  uepeatino  or  anticipating  sentences,  they  at  the  same  time,  by  their 
secoiid  CATSM.  element,  desiuMiate  these  sentences  as  causes.  Hence  this  lortn  was 
admirably  adapted  for  •  connectin-.^  sentences'  with  each  other.  This  nature  of  con- 
nectives thev  especially  have  when  thev  are  the  first  words  in  a  new  sentence.  Those 
amoii"-  them"  which  are  habititally  placed  thus  in  the  beirinninir  of  sentences  for  the 
purpose  of  connectiuiz  them  with  the  i)recediuir  sentence,  have  by  this  fact  assumed  the 
nature  of  cotijunciions.  beiiiir,  as  it  were.  impre<,Miated  with  the  force  of  causal  con- 
nectives These  are  itaqne.  iqitur.  erqo,  which  are  only  used  as  connectives,  and  hence 
arc  exclusively  considenMl  as  conjunctions.  The  same  natun;  have  q>iare,  qnamot/rem, 
quapropter.  qitocirca,  althou-;h  these  words  are  not  called  conjunctions,  since  they,  as 
iiiterio>'-atives  and  relatives,  retain  their  adverbial  force.  As  conjunctions  they  occur 
in  the  7ollowiii<^  sentences  :  Non  tarn  facile  Caithairinis  opes  concidissent.  nisi  bicilia 
classibus  nostrfs  j)ateret.  <?//«/<?  P.  .Vfricfinus,  Cart hairine  delStS,  Siculorum  urbes  pul 
cherrimis  moiiumentis  exornilvit :  The  power  of  Carthaire  had  not  collapsed  so  easily 
had  not  Sicily  been  open  to  our  fleets.  Therefore  P.  Afiicanus.  after  the  destruction  of 
Cartha<'-e  einbellished  the  cities  of  Sicily  with  the  most  beautiful  monuments.  Cic. 
Verr  ''~2  *i— Mihi  necessario  properandum  est.  Quamobrem  rcliqua  attendite:  T  must 
nece-ssiri'lv' hunv.  T/ierefore  attend  to  the  rest.  lb.  2.  1.  Ifi.—  Qfodrca  maergre  hoc 
eventu  vereor  aii  nnvis  'invidi  sit  quain  aniTci.  Therefore  I  am  afraid  lest  it  be  rather  a 
si^n  of  envy  than  of  friendship,  to  mourn  for  this  event.  Cic.  Am.  4,  Vi.  Nemo  istum 
colnperendinatum  sed  coudemmltum  judicilret.  Quapropter  oiio,  quod  ad  meattinet,  vici ; 
NohI>dv  would  think  liis  case  adjourned,  but  they  would  consider  him  condemned. 
Therefore  I  have  triumphed  as  far  as  I  am  concerned.  lb.  2, 1.  8.-Tn  all  these  sentences 
the  a'dverbs  quate,  quanu)brem..  quapropter.  quocirca  are  virtual  conjunctions  and  may 
be  replaced  by  itaque  ;  quapropter  111  the  last  sentence  may  be  even  replaced  by  ^r^o. 
Thn^vroinde  is  generally  used  with  the  iorccoi ergo,  as:  .Ait  accusatOies  ejus  multo 
majOrem  pecuniam  pnetol-i  pollicCri ;  proinde,  si  saperet,  vidCret  quid  sibi  esset^ facien- 
dum :  He  says  that  his  accusers  were  promising  the  prsetor  a  far  «,'reater  sum  ;  /unce,  ir 
he  were  wise,  he  would  see  what  he  had  to  do.  Cic. Verr.  2,  2,  29. 

Ob«  7.  Eo,  idea,  iccirco.  and  propterea  are  distiu<;uished  from  quare,  qnam^rem.  qua- 
profit-r  itaque  aud  erqo  bv  the  fact  that  they  cannot  be  used  with  the  force  of  conjiinc- 
lion-    'They  mav  open  a  sentence  the  same  as  quare  etc..  but  they  do  not,  in  this  case, 
CONNECT  the  precediui?  sentence  with  that  sentence  of  which  they  are  fframmntical  mem- 
ber- as  •  Trcirco.mdiwa,  quia veram causam  habCbam. brevi  peroiSvi.  Iherefore.  Ojudses 
did  I  plead  briefly,  because  I  had  a  f?ood  cause.  Cic.  Inv.  1.  48.-^0,  uleo,  iccirco,  and 
nropterea  crenerally  are  in  the  relation  of 'antecedents' to  causal  clauses  introduced 
lyqnod  ox  quia  (se^-  p.  492,  Obs.  15  to!  1.;  p.  i^i.  Obs.  3),  being  rendered  '  therefore  ',  or    for 
tiie  reason',  the  followin<j  cimiunction  quod  or  quia  l^einu'  ti;anslared  by    that  .     Often 
both  ifleo  (iccirco  etc.)  and  the  followimr  conjunction  are  rendered  by  the  simple conjnnc- 
tioii- because' ;  as:  Ideo  mihi  non  satisfacio  quod  nullam  partem  meritOruni  tuOrum 
conseoui  possu  n.  I  am  not  satisfied  with  myself /r>r  the  reason  that  (or  because)  I  cmnot 
reach  any  part  of  thy  merits.  Cic.  Att.  3,  14.-Filia  habitJbat  cum  x^^ilve  propterea  quod 


f 


282 


DELATIONS   OF  MODALITY. 


v.rnm  non  habebat,  the  dnn-htcr  lived  with  hor  father  became  she  had  no  husband  Cic 
\  .Ml.  >,  1,  «.).-Ao  IS  fre.uM-allv  placed  qfter  the  causal  clause,  and  sometimes  this  is  also 
hr  c.Hse  with  the  othyr  causal  adverbs,  as  :  q,url  probSre  populo  Roui;ln..  fide  .  ve^rim 
nun  p..tuist.s.  to  vohK  j,„lic-an<li  potesfas  erept  i  e<t.  b.caW y^nx  ould  iu.r,.r  vc  to  'm 
CMe'Ter"''  '  r"r  f^V"";'"r"^-/^^V?^'^'"^  the  judicial  power  has  been  tak.'n  from  you 
fv  hi^.^  ':i'  '  ^•-^"'^'ri"'  "'  ^^^  "»  "'.'**  ^^'l'^<',  liequently  eCi  rt  with  qucnl  or  ry/z/a  is  iised 
In  S^  an  evidence  that  eo  m  tids  c.mneetion  i.  an  (Motive,  and  not  the  third 

louitue  (a.>e]  ,  as:  Causatu  coi,'iiosci  oportet :  ea  re  (|iiidem  quod  aliter  condemiviri  reus 

be  cSiemnlS:  vSt.Ti'  IT  ''''^'  ""'''''  ''''  ^^^^^'  ''''''  "'^'^•''"'^^  ^''*^  acci";d  Vinnol 

«.iV^o  ^'  ^*''?^(^''^'^  in  ehissieal  hin-ua-e.  is  rarely  usetl  otherwise  than  i.i  connection 
Avith  a  causal  clause.     Uut,  eo,  ideo,  iccirco  occur  also  without  such  a  (lauV-   reR-rriir^^^ 

nH'v^Ht':T"';r  '"^''  'r"'"'  '"  "^'^  ^"^'^"^^'  '""^^  '^«  UNDKHsToon  ,^  hi  n-/ adied   o  the 
ndvt^rbsin  the  lonn  of  a  causal  clausio  ;  as:  Afranins  et  Perrejus  aesaPei     pr r  io  1^^^ 
cessuut;  neq.ie  tccirco  Ciesar  opus  interunttit ;  Afraniu.  and  IVtrjuV  make  attacks  o 
r  T  i-i  '7.';^^*^^''-<l<'*-^»'>ti'lterrnpt  \^^^^^ovkfor  that  reami  {on  ///a/ mw/'.?)    Oes  H 
C.  1    42.    Here  we  must  alter  ledrco  supply  tli.-  previous  sentence  in  the  rorm  >  o>md  nr.l' 
ho  laces.^eb<itur\^    In  such  connections  the  adverbs  idea  etc/irV   e  rU   r  l.tert  /^^ 
causal  conjunctions  ifuqne  etc.,  and  thrir  equivalents  quare.    IJut  t  lere  is  s    il    hi<  d  m  r 
CM.ce  between  both  clas^es  of  words,  that  ideo  etc.  never  co//;^^^/  he  sin  See'    but  ,^^^^^ 
he  sramniat iciil  ofoecfs  of  the  pre.li.^ates  in  thcdr  own  sentence,    ///i  J  e  c    on'the  ^ 
and,  «r€  mt  members  of  any  of  the  phrases  of  the  sentence  wl.ich  tTuVinimdu  e     I  e  iic^^ 
idto  etc.  express  the  reason  '  for  the  sake'  or  'on  account  of  which  the  s./.t  of  tho 
sentence  p.-rforras  the  action  contained  in  the  predicate;  while  t-v  ion  wl^^^^^^^^^  ?1  tl 
inbiec?     ^rbrKvni'V""r'n'^'  ^"^"''  ^."f'^^'r^^^'O  >"uk.s  the  t««/i.cV/o         uT  not  by  fife 
t  '.  •".  Vf:  .  .  '  '  ''H  '^''-'"''  ^'^  ^-^"'P'»"'»^'  t-'x'  followini:  sentence  with  the  one  la-t  au,- 

ed  .  1.1  censu  h.-.bendo  potestas  omnis  censOri  peimitiitur.  Jtaqne  po  ih  <  en m  ii  ix 
ma  cura  (ielii^if :  ,n  mak.n-  the  cens.K  all  the  power  is  i.-ft  to  th  •  o^so,^  yy/,  ";^  "  the 
people  elects  h.m  with  the  -.vatest  care.  Cic.  Ve.-r.  2,  2,  43.  Here  itauue  ex  ..-Js-es  h^ 
a// //or\sM-eason.  by  which  he  accounts  for  the  car'e  in  elecVinV,T("cenw.  heice 
tccirco  or  Idea  would  be  ..upropcly  applied  in  place  of  t/ar///^.  "  I  ,, t  in  h  h..,  en«  e 
qncued  above  the  reason  for  the  act  is  represented  as  that  of  /he  s.ibject;  Lt  that  of  the 

Aemf^>^'9-i'^'''o^?^/'"fi  "•^"'''''  T  ^^'{^ntaJionU-i  aut  q>,mtu^^  camd  philosophantur^   Cic 
Acad.  2  2..-  2.  lieneficin...  est  quod  qi.is  no.,  sua  cuuhJ  dat,  se.l  J,m-  c.i  dat    Sen    Ben 

^|;.ii^^o::J:;s-;;^:U- 

m.om/^ab.E.,uis/ve//^e<lacie.x  urbe  le-iOnes  jussCre    li,  o  ^4' _u  Iwi  nM^/r  nn  T* 
a.it^..r  ilio  niodo  p.-oro,.ttum  est  ?  c./;.tant<.peie  pnSuT  nm "sfv  Av  V     iTTfJ^i 
eir<.  nunc  Sexti  Pompeji  testimonium  recitem.  qui  cau<au    D  nni<  e-i    i   "  ^,,^.!  ^/1 
DiGms?  qmd  Manlii  «-t  Calen.  V  Ib.Ve.r  2  2  8  ~\:i   (h  n^^^^^^^  i  ^  "-^  ''"^^^"'* 

tfimni  ?  IK  Cr  1,  l(i._  14.  Q.id /  Scieba.s  tibi  cri,&  d  fi  ,.  !  1  V'  "SW'm 
pciCbas?  (///a;/<o/^m/ietiamsiispicabaie?  H)  Verr  2  5  2<)  — 1-.  >i,.Vf.,.  V;.  v"7'""^'/ ^^'J 
quern  ad  tinemy  quam  ob  m/Lm  ^  quo  exemnio  vXilvT^/ 

Jloni^us  secflri;^ /nitim  percussis.  ips^s  pirAt  "Sisl^lJil!!;!;';,,  ;^.,  -j.-- [^^^^^ 

i~   n         ?•    ''•V'^  '^^"'-  "•'-  ''^'^a^^'^.-  tl'i>"'»  tihi  id  fac<.re  non  liceat    lb    Farn   7  27 
3..  Quare  hoc  sit  a'qnissimum,  facile  est  diceie.   lb. Verr  2  1  44 -IK   I)no  s  .^if  ;.„,  " 
cur  tu  irequentiori»  in  isto  otticio  esse  debeas  q.ia.n  iios      i,   F^nn    n%\'^'''^*?'\^^ 
venta  est  rat  o.  fiu(i7v.   sh-  lis;  vir-w.w  «^  )ww .^...  . '  ,      •  '._  '^ '""•  '•''  '^"'  -^  —  i'*-  In- 


venta  est  ratio,  qua?e  iste  US  vicies  ex  hoc  uno  genere  (ne-otiOrum)  cepei-itV^ 


H).Verr. 


Sophists.-  ^ostentation  —  sorain.  -  *  to  profess  philosophical  studies       »  S.mni^r 
'quarn  revera  mnt\  tha.i  they  reallv  are.-  «iruest-friend  _  ^  rC^/uf    I?J  r;.";;» 
leniences  is  often  used  in  ihe  nieanin-  •  as  to'   'conV^nHip 
etc.-  «bad  i.etaken  himself.-  »  literalTv  'I  a.,i\ilr  i     x  1  o  "iVn: /l^  t''"'^'""  "'"' 

attend  ,„orc.  rerjularly  lo  a  ^'^^^^^'^ p.a.^;:^^j:,-^:i^':^:Z^ ZS!^'  '" 


I 


I 


RELATION   OF  CAUSE. 


283 


2,2.  58.—  20.  Hind  cpt  quam  ob  rem}  haec  commemorem,  quod  existimare  vos  volo,  mi- 
rum  queindam  «lolorem  accipere  eos,  ex  quorum  nrbibus  hire  auferuiitur^.  Cic.  Verr, 
2^  4.  (M).—  '^1.  Ch.  Clinia^  htec  fieri  videliat  'i  M.  Quidnif  mecum  unasiinul  !  Ter.  Heant. 
5,  1,  28. —  22.  Hiinc  judicein  horrebanl*  isti  ideo  quod  non  tam  propeiisus*  ad  miseri- 
c«)i'(liam  qiiam  iinplicruus»  ad  severitfitem^  videbatiir.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  ;30,  85.— 23.  Si 
Verres  huic  uni  populo  liS  CC  millia  abstulit.  num  iccirco  absolvC'tur,  g'/O'i  scrij)tum 
est  earn  peciiniani  ditain^  es.><e  statiulriim  nomine»  y  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  .58. —  24.  Conso- 
landiis  ipse  sum  proptt-rea  quod  nullam  rem  erraviusio  jam  din  tuli  quam  incommoduru 
tiHiiii.  Cic.  Fain..').  18.  1. —  20.  Eiro  videor  mihi  hoc**  gi-aruin  fecisse'"-'  Siculis.  Quaprop- 
ter  non  recilso»^  qui.,  vos  quocpie  Verri  temperelisi^  si  Sicnlis  probatus'*  sit.  Cic.VeiT. 
2.  2,  <;.- 2»».  T.  Ai^ar-ius  ot  comes  mens  fuil  illo  miseriimo  tempore,  et  omnium  itine- 
ruiu.  libOium,  periculorum  meoriim  socius.  (Junre  sic  tibi  euiu  commendo  ut  «num 
de  nieis  domesticisi*  et  maxime  neces.sju'iisi*.  Cic.  Fam.  13.  71. —  27.  Quid  eM  qunmo- 
brem  abs  te,  (^.  Horte.isi,  factum  clarissi.ni  viri  11011  reprehendiltur,  (sed)»*  repreheu- 
daiiir  meiinit'  Cic.  Siill.  1,3.—  28,  Statuerant  ill!  hoc  maleticiiiiui*  non  esse  occultan- 
dum-".  Qiiai/iobrem  quid  est  quod  mirC-re,  si  cum  eisdem  me  in  hac  causa  vides 
adesse^i  cum  qiiibusiii  ceteris  iniellitris  abfuisse^^  *  lb.  3,7. —  29.  Eriam  deosaliqui  ver- 
bis ferocioribiis"3  increpant-*,  weiiideo  queraquam  fulinine  ictum"'^*  audlmus.  Liv.  45,  23. 

^4  566.  The  relation  of  cause,  conceived  as  purpose,  is  expressed  by  the 
followin.Lj  i^raniniatical  forms  :  1)  by  attributive  phrases  in  the  ablative 
with  the  general  nouns  expressing  purpose  as  governing  words  {causa^ 
gratia,  ratio^  cotmUuin^  animus^  mens ;  2)  by  prepositional  phrases 
with  ad  and  the  special  noun  finis  (end,  purpose)  as  governing  word ; 
3)  by  the  prepositions  ad  and  ob  with  nouns  or  gerundials;  4)  by  the 
FORM-ADVERBS  quo,  quamohvem^  and  cur  (for  what  purpose) ;  eo  and  ideo 
(for  that  purpose);  5)  by  clatises  with  ut,  ne,  quo,  or  equivalent  rela- 
tive clauses;  6)  by  the  participial  gerundials  (§51G);  7)  by  the  par- 
ticiple of  the  PERIPHRASTIC  FUTURE  as  an  accessory  predicate  (§  510) ; 
8)  by  the  abstract  dative,  as  completing  or  accessory  predicate  (§  469, 
1{.  :U ;  §  55"),  H.  2(),  OBS.  2) ;  9)  by  the  gerundial  dative  (g  528,  R.  211) ; 

10)  by  the  first  supine  (§  351). 

Obs.  1.  The  ablative  of  the  nouns  canm  and  f/rafia  with  a  frenitive  srerundial  (§  526,  R. 
20(i,  OBS.  3.)  almost  always  represents  the  genitive  of  the  irerundial  as  a  pl'upose  of  the 
doer.  But  often  the  genitive  of  mere  nouns  (abstract  or  otherwise)  dependent  on  causa 
or  gratia  must  be  conceived  as  denoting  purpose,  as  Bestias  homianm  gratia  generaias 
esse  viilCmiis,  we  see  that  the  beasts  are  creaied /or  the  sake  of  men  {i.  e.  the  aim  of 
their  creation  is  to  serve  men),  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  (Vi.  Thus  Ex.  1  of  the  last  exercises  strictly 
beUmirs  here  (it  is  the  ri'UPosK  of  the  sophists  to  make  money  out  of  'philosophy'). — 
The  nouns  ratio,  con^Hinni.  animus,  mens  in  the  ablative  in  connection  with  form-adjec- 
tives generally  denote  *  jjurpose',  being  rendered  either  by  this  word,  or  by  *  view',  or 
similar  nouns  («/7  ratione.  for  that  purpose;  hoc  conHtio,  wWh  this  intention  :  eo  ani/no 
or  hac  tnente,  with  this  view),  as:  omnes  iili — hac  7nente  labOrem  sese  ferre  ajunt,  senes 
ut  ill  otia  ttita  recedant.  all  tlies.i  say  they  bear  their  hardship  with  this  view  to  retire, 
when  old,  into  an  undisturbed  ease,  Hor.  Serm.  1.  1.  30. —  Hoc  consilio  a  Metello  peti- 
vCrunt,  ut  {juam  prinium  Verri  succederet.  with  this  intenfton  thej' petitioned  Metellus 
to  succeed  Verres  as  soon  as  possible.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2.  4. —  Ad  w'Mti  Jlnem  expresses  '  end' 
or  •  purpo.se'  in  the  same  way  as  ob  with  cau-^am  or  rem  expresses  'cause  etiicif'nt'  or 
'motive',  as  quern  adfnem,  for  what  end  or  pu.'pose.  (See  No.  15  of  the  last  examples.) 

*  Instead  of  ilia  est  res  (caum)  ob  quam  rem  (quamobrem). —  *  to  steal. —  ^  female 
projier  name. —  *\o  dread. —  '  inclined. —  *  determined  tipon. —  'severity. — *  to  ex- 
pend.— »  under  the  item. —  ^^grariter  aliquid  ferre,  to  fee]  sorry  for  something.— 
-*  Therf)iislruction  beIontj<?to  §4^7, R.  74.  A. —  ^'■^  g'rafum  aliquid aticui  facere,  todo  some- 
body a  favor  with  something,  to  oblige  somebody  with  something. —  ^^  non  recu-<o  qnun, 
1  have  no  objection  to,  I  submit  tt). —  ^*  to  spare.—  ^^alicui  probnri  or  probdtum  esse,  to 
be  endorsed  iiy  somebody. —  '*  house-mate.—  ^^  n(?r<',waW'/s.  a  relative,  is  properly  an  ad- 
jective. For  the  conuection  with  ina.rime  see  §  355.  K.  2 ;  §  292,  R.  12.—  »«  See  §  381.  R. 
9. —  »»  misdeed. —  ^*>  to  bush  up.—  '^^  to  come  forward. —  2a  abesse  in,  to  keep  aloof  from. 
—  '■''  rather  tierce.-  '•^*  to  scold.— -''  struck  (^^upply  esse). 


EXERCISES. 


285 


284 


EXERCISES. 


Or-*.  2.  The  propositionfi  ad  and  oft  oxpreps  pnrposc  not  only  with  prernndials  (§  538; 
§54:5),  but  also  with  nouns  w  hon  verbs  ol  general  nu'iiniiij::  in  ajfcrundial  form  may  l)C 
understood  with  tliem.  Thus  'amicos  alicQjus  ad  mortem  (b-i)oscen!  («•  ^- u«l  nionciu 
pubcundain),  to  dtmaiid  i<oint'l)oiiyV  friends  yw  death,  t'les.  li.  C  3,  10  —  Pecuniam  ad 
sfatuam  confene  {i.  e.  ad  t?tatuam  fariendam),  to  contril)ute  money  lor  a  statue.  Cic. 
Verr.  -2.  3,  77.—  In  a  similar  manner  od  with  a  noun  ha;^  the  specific  mt-aninsi:  ot  of)  with 
a  i^erundial,  if  we  may  supply  the  <;»ruiidial  of  a  vcrl)  of  irent-ral  impori.  as  :  rrcuniaiu 
illam  od  c^nturnm  conrra  leu'es  clam  dedCM  unt.  they  ilh-irally  and  srcreiiy  irave  tiint  money 
'fo?'  a»'seiis//ie/d\  i.  e.  so  tliai  ihey  mi<,dit  l)e  assessed  lower  than  they  o»<;ht  to  have  been 
awsesscd.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  S.'j.  (See  E.\.  4.  5.  G.) 

Obs.  3.  The  forni-adverbs  quo,  to  what  purpose,  and  eo.  to  that  purpose,  are  the  third 
locative  cases  of  (/uls  and  id.  and  have  assumed  the  meaninj;  of  piirpo«.e  l)y  the  preposi- 
tiou  ^«/ which  is  implied  in  thetn  ;  as:  Primuut  r/MO  tantant  pecuniam  (dederunt),  in  the 
first  place y<//-  what  pui'itoxe  did  they  j;ive  so  lar<;e  a  Hum  ?  dc.  Verr.  2,  2,  hh.     Eo.  if  used 
in  this  meainng,  is  ;:enerallv  followed  (sometimes  preceded)  by  a  clause  witii  at,  as  Ct 
h<K;  pacto  ratiOuem  ref<-rre  ri<eret,  eo  SulliliiU!-  repent»!  (actus  est,  non  uf  hoiios  et  dii,'ni- 
tas  iiobilit^lii  restituerOiur.  f/iaf  he  mi<:ht  be  allowed  to  reiifier  his  acTouiits  in  that  way, 
thenfore  (i.  e.  with  Ihat  intrpoae)  he  turned  Sullanist,  not  to  reslorp  honor  and  di.Miity  to 
the  nobi'itv.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1,  \A.~Idto  is.  in  this  sense  al>o.  used  with  the  force  <  f  to,  and 
must  thetibe  considered  as  a  compound  of  id  and  the  third  locative  case,  to  be  distin- 
guished from  ?V>>  denotiui;  *  caii<e  efticient'  ;R.  40.  obs.  5).  as»:  hbo  delecti  patrum  ad 
eum  missi  sunt,  ut  in  perpetuum  mentio  ejus  rei  iiniretur,/o/-  that  pur iK>se  were  deputies 
of  the  Patricians  sent  to  him  i/uit  this  matter  inii^ht  be  set  at  rest  for  ever.  Liv.  2,  15, 2. 
1.  NavTs  onerariasi  Dolabellam  tnenffi  comparilvit^  ut  Italiam  peteret'.  Cic.  Fam    12, 
14,  1.—  2.  Quo  consdio  hue  imis?  Ter.  Eun.  5,  S,  1.—  3.  E.xpli»  ilvi  ^entelltiam  meam,  et 
eoquidemconnlio,  tuum  judicium  ut  cojjnoscerem.  Cic.Fin.  I,  21.--  4.  Naves  t:edfl*  et  pice» 
reiiquisque  rebus  qu:e  sum  ad  i/*«/<</ia  compl(?tie«enint.  Ca-s.  IJ.  C.  3.  10!.—  5.  Noii  con- 
cedes tu  (piicstOri  tuo  ut  pot-  state  sujl  ud  quantum  iitjltiir.  Cic.  (^u.  Fr.  1, 1,  3.-6.  Ncjjo 
til)i  ipsi  nlluin  nummum  esse  numeiatum'.  sed  cum  oft  tun  decrela.obedUta.ob  imjterta, 
objifdicid  pecuuiie  dil)antur,  non  erai  quicrendum  cujiismanu  numcrarentur,  >ed  cujus 
injuria  coi:erentur«.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2.  10.-7.  (Juid  h<c  hotniiie  lacias?  aut  quo  civem  iin- 
portflnum"  aut  quo  potius  hostem  tam  eceleratum  reserves'"?    Cic.  SePt.  13.—  8.  Si 
Jialbus  tam  famili'iri-»»  erat  Clodiie  quam  tu  esse  vis,  dixit  ei  profecto  quo  vellet"'-'  au- 
ruin  illud.  Cic.  C;el.  21.  r>3.—  0.  h'o  te  non  iiiierpell-lvii^  ne  quid  de  hoc  tetnpore  dimi- 
imergtar»^.  Cic.  Or.  3,  4'.>.—  10.  Mannnem  ad  te  fo  misi  ut  aut  tecum  ad  me  quam  pri- 
mum  venlret,  aut.  si  tu  morarGre'*.  statin»  ad  me  redlret.  Cic.  Kam.  Iti.  1.—  11.  Non 
ideo  Uheiium  insediunis»"  ut  Italiam  tuere  nur.  sed  lu;  quis  alius  Ariovislus  re<;nt)  Galli- 
flrnm  potiretnr.  Tac.  H.  4.  73.— 12.   CatilTna  notal'^   et  designat»»  at/  aedem^'  unum- 
quemque  nostrum.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  1,  2. 


»  FnMghtship.—  '^  to  procure.—  =•  to  try  to  land.—  *  pine-wood.—  *  pitch  —•  to  fill.— 
Tfopay. —  «tocollect.—  »  evil-minded.— '"  to  reserve. —  »•  intimate  with.—  »"^  supply  •  /la- 
l)fire\—  '3  to  interrupt.—  ^*  dindnui.  to  be  lost  —  "  /nonlri,  to  tarry.—  ^^  irwide'e  locum 
(more  frequently  loco),  to  occupy  a  place  with  troops,  —  »Mo  mark.  —  »»  to  designate.— 
*•  murder. 

EXEUCISES. 

I.  Locative  Foum-adveub.s. —  1.  Where  is  }'our  friend?  lie  is  there 
whence  nobody  h:is  ever  yel  retiiriuHl— 2.  Where  did  your  vessel'  hiiid'^? 
There  where  it  h:ul  stiirted^*  [on  its  voyai^e]. —  3.  Where  do  yon  conio 
from?  From  tiiere  where  I  wrote  yon  I  wonkl  start.—  4.  Ls*  there  any 
road  from  here  over  tlie  monntains  to  llimera  ? —  5.  Here  the  farmers'  are 
in  tlie  habit  of  doini,^  their  bnsiness";  at  the  same  [place]  tlie  bntcliers' 
have  tiieirshops^—  G.  Blackberries"  are  found  ahnost  everywhere  in  tliese 
rcujons.—  7.  The  widtii  of  lllyria'",  where  it  is  greatest,  is  325  miles.— 
8.  The  straits''  where  the  Peloponnesus  begins  is  called  ihe  Isthmus  of 
Corinth". —  9.  Over  these  monntains  there  is  only  one  nbt  very  {it(i)\mvYoyf 
road  {iter),  where  two  wagons"  can  pass"  at  the  same  time'*. —  10.  The  na- 

1  ^jivis.—  2  to  latid,  aiiiXilli.—  ^  proficisci.—  *  There  is  a  road  to,  ilerfert  (ad)  —  »  arfl. 
tor.—  •  to  do  their  business  (by  going  and  cominur),  conunedre. —  '  lanius. —  »  laberna. — 
•  nibus  Idica  (in  the  sing.).—  '"  tllyricuin.-  i'  an-usti:e.—  »'^  by  the  adjective  Coriidhim. 
—  »'  currus.  Gen.  us,—  »*  diici.—  »»  Two  at  thesaine  time'iA  expressed  by  the  distributive 
luimeral  alone. 


t 


lure  of  the  locality"  is  such"  that  (^/0  darts"*  can  be  thrown"  everywhere  on 

the  euemv. 11. 'Where  do  these  men  intend  to  assemble'^  for  (by  causa) 

holvling'""  [their]  meeting'"?—  12.  The  east-side  of  the  house  is  protected" 
by  a  parapet"*  nine  feet  high  and  thirty  feet  long. 

II.  Measurement  of  space.—  1.  It  is  reported  that  Philippides,  at  the 
time  of  the  firsl  Persitm  war,  ran  1140  stadia,  [the  distance]  from  Athens 
to  Sparta,  in  two  davs.—  2.  Philonides,  however,  the  runner"  of  Alexan- 
der the  Great,  ran  1200  stadia,  the  distance  from  Sicyon""  to  Elis",  in  one 
(];,y._  3.  Ill  the  consulship  of  FontPjus  and  Vipsanius,  a  boy  eight  years 
old  is  said  to  have  run  75  miles  from  noon  to  evening.—  4.  The  longest 
[daV's]  journey  made  bv  Tiberius,  when  (pariic.)  he  hastened  to  his  sick 
bro"th(T  Drusus  in  Gerinanv,  was  no  more  than  [a  distance  of]  200  miles. 

—  5.  The  river  Alpheus  is" navigable"*  [a  distance  of]  six  miles  from  the 
g(.:i_(;.  There  are  120  mdes  tiom  Elis  to  Epidaurus— 7.  Cape'^  Athos, 
which  Xerxes  cut  olf  ^"  frotn  the  continent^"  by  a  cana^^  runs"  [a  distanc^ 
of  J  seventy  miles  into  the  sea.—  8.  Apollonia,  a  colony  of  the  Corinthi- 
ans, is  forty  miles  from  the  sea.—  9.  Tlie  [two]  shores  of  the  Corinthian 
Istl'imtis  are  live  miles  distant  (by  iiitermllnm)  from  each  other.—  10.  The 
eitv  of  Byzantium  is  711  miles' distant  from  DyiTachium.  So  great  is 
imtar)  tlie  length  of  the  land-road'*  between  the  Adriatic  Sea  and  the 
Propontis='^— 11.  The  [two]  shores  of  Asia  and  Europe,  where  they  are 
separatecP"  by  the  Hellespont,  are  seven  stadia  distant  from  each  other. 

—  12  Eratosthenes  savs  that  the  whole  earth  extends  (patere)  252,000  sta- 
dia which  amounts  to"  31,500,000  Roman  paces.  Hipparchus  adds  to 
this  measure"  a  little  less  than  25,000  stadia,  making  {and  makes)  the oarih 
the  ninetv-sixlh  part  of  the  whole  world.—  13.  How  far  is  it  from  the  earth 
to  the  moon  according^"  to  Posidonius?— 14.  The  Island  of  Man"  is 
about  equidistant  from  In  land*'  and  Britannia.—  15.  Meroe  is  a  twelve 
davs'  journev  disttint  from  Sirbitus;  from  there  it  is  just  as  far  to  Davelli. 

—  \{)  The  army  of  the  Athenians  took  a  position*^  near  the  village*  of 
Marathon**,  about  ten  miles  from  the  city.—  17.  Epirus  borders  on  Mag- 
nesia and  Macedonia.—  18.  The  Pelop«mnesus,  a  peninsula,  similar  in 
shape*"  to  a  platanus-leaf  *",  borders  on  two  seas,  the  Ionian*'  and  the 
yEgean***.-  11).  Attica,  towards  the  north,  borders  on  Boeotia.—  20.  From 
thai  [point]  the  shore  has  a  north-eastern  direction*". 

Ill  Expressions  of  Time  Simple  by  Foum-adverbs.—  1.  Avhen  did 
your  brother  die?  My  brother  is  still  livinir.—  2.  There  was  a  time  when 
this  mtin  was  worth'"  nothing.—  3.  Then  1  was  in  delicate^' health  ;  btit  now 
1  am  well  —  4.  The  soldiers  began  to  despair  of  their  safety.  Then  [it  was 
tluitl  two  centurions  went  fortl>'  from  the  ranks",  and  otfered"  to  die  tor 
llie  army.—  5. 1  told  these  men  that  I  would  lirst  finish  my  business, 
[and]  then  would  go"  where  they  would  have  me  go.—  6.  Everything  that 

1«  LOCU8.-17  i^,ca,id.-'«  telum-  ^»  conjiccre.- «u  convenlre.-  ^»  hab6r;e  -  «^  coa- 
tio  -  23  ,u.f,.ndcrJ.-  ^»*  vallum.-  "  cursor.-^"  Gen.  SicyOnis.-  "  Gev.  Elidis.--  a»  to 
be'navi-able,  navi^-mi-  ^*  promontorium.-3o  «J'^cindere.- 3i  contmcns  (t^^^ 

•^  ■  •  .     .  -    .1 .33  tjxcurrere. —  3*  transi.  :  oi  ine  lanns. 


32  a  c7inal.  connect inir  witii  the  sea  z=fretum.—  ^^i 
rarum.—  s^Gen.  Propontidis.— asdividere.-  ^7 


terrarum.-  «M^en.  Propontuiis.- -cuvuicre.-  -  to  amount  to  <./^cem-  '/^  ^Jf^f^^J- 
_89Tran«l  •  How  far  does  Posidonius  sav  tiiat  the  earth  is  etc.  ?—  <"  Mona.—  llUK.rma. 
_  v/to  lake  a  position,  contra /acre.-  -^  vicu.s  -  -  Accus  (Greek)  MarathOna.-  -  for 
ma  —  «9  the  leaf  (  folium)  oi  a  |)latanus.—  *^  lonius.—  *'*  ^geus.—  *^  ^pectare.—  pos 
Sssed  nOtldng.-  V.  intiru.ns.-- *2  procedere.-  ^^ac\e.  (sing.).-  ^*  Tran^l:  saving  that 
Ithevl  were  willing  to  devote  (detovere.)  themselves  for  the  army.- «  1  ran^l. .  that  1 
would  go  thither  whither  they  commanded  (velle)  that  I  should  go  (t/i/.  clause). 


286 


EXERCISES. 


is  m,w  donhtful  and  obscure  ^vill  onco  becomo  ^fV^^j'^^/'^^^^.^J^j;-- J.^^.l! 
civilized"  nations  have  once  been  wild"  and  barbaroii>.—  8.  ^"^e  o"r  .m 
ceVtors  he  r  these  thin^^s  in  no  esteem",  but  they  are  "ow  cove  ed     by 
pvrrv  D-ood'''  man  — 9  I  remember   tliat  yon  (mee  maiU   the  same    re- 
ma  k-io  Sue  -  offcwes-.  once  comn.itted-,  may  be  pan  oned  but.  ot^^en 
routed-  tliey  must  be  corrected-  by  words  and  PyV^M.^'^^.^rT  ,Vwe 
riv(  b(HMi  for  a  Ion-  time  i-noranf^"  of  what  you  were  dom-;'^-  U- 1  li'We 
onc^e d-  for  a  ?n'eat"^time  1(7 see  the  falls-  of  Nia.^ara.-  1:5.  One  o   my  sons 
viul.n  leave"  for  Uo.ne.-  14.  ITmv  soon  will  you  have  ^-^J^[^J^ 
n  So  soon  was  Greece  reduced'*  trom  the  summit'f  oi  l>o^^cl     to  tlie 
ksWl^rree-o?  weakness-.-  10.  Tell-  your  friend  that      shall  recm'e 
him     recently.-  17.  Believe  me  that  I  shall  pay  tins  debt-  -;>"•-   .f^-^;^^ 
last  I  received  your  letter  so  lon.^r  expected    ;>.\";;  -J,^- ,^     -u  '  iv^^^^^^ 
^vere  lon^^  and  violent-;  the  one  protlered-  tins   tj  e     th  t    ^''*     '^^V^^^^ 
rtilll  at  last  Sulpicious  arose-  with  the  to  lowni.<«  add  es^  „•-  -;^-  );^\,y 
lowed-  to  -o  t(   the  exhibition^»  this  evenmg?  It  is,  bu    sec     th     {    )  >    u 
ire  back-  Tn  time  (tunely).-  21.  Was  the  exlnbu  lot.  ^vcl    vis.t.d      tle^ 
before  yesterdav  ?—  22.  Cato  Uticensis  seemed  to  ha\e  lived  \Mtli  tuc  ic 
public  and  to  have  died»-'  at  the  same  time  with  it.  .x ,.,,,«_  i   Qn 

^vhit  div  will  vour  commencement-exercises"*  be-m  .''-  2.  In  ^^ilat  >(ai 
wlj.iiuav  ^^>"  >";",'''"'..   rp ._:.,„  ..,,,1    Plinv  lived"«  in  the  next  century 

?o  Uv^":,  U  ■  V  fortmeations,  an.l  had'»»  this  .M.v'  .lelivercaM..  all  on  he 
s  ,e  I  V  -  5.  Sw..pr...mH  writes  to  me  that  his  house,  whieli  last  sun  - 
me-  I'a  been  struk'  by  li-htnin-,  had,  after  bein- struek  a-a  n  been 
con.mn  Ml  by  fire,- 6.  I  have  been  busy'  the  whole  «ntle.-  wuh  trans- 
H  in  •  tl  e  hdo.'U  's'  .,f  Plato.-  7.  The  solar  eelipse»  wb.ch  happ>->».t  m 
the  eonsK  oT  Vipsanius  and  FontCjns  was  witnessed"  in  Can.pan  a  at 
sev™  ml  i  Arn.en  a  at  ten  o'eloek.  This  could  not  have  happened  re- 
marks" 'iV  il-  the  earth  W.Me  a  plane-,-  8,  In  E-ypt  the  slt;.'">w  -'/  « 
"nn-d  al '  is  J:^  noon-tinu-"  a  little  h,n,'er  than  hair  'l'^^?'^^;';'^'^;,^"^:  ."-i^, 
i„  ihe  eilv  of  Konie.al  the  same  hour,  the  nmth  part  ol  the  sljle  i,-  «.mt- 

g"  o  theladow     in  the  town  of  Ancona  '''<;'«  '--"^^^f*;-;  .tl'e- 
fit?h  ■  in  Venetia  at  the  same  h(mrs  the  shadow  is  equal      to  the  st\  1  . 
it   In  Patalis  a  renowned  port"  of  India,  the  constellation  <>1  the  Ureal 
Be  "»  a   ;      rs  <mly  !>  lif.eeii  ,ii.i;hts,  and  is  seen-  only  ill  thetr  lirst  parts 
.  -10,  The  belrinninys''  of  the   Reasons"  of  the  year  with  til.!  Komans 

pcrlalivc-  "  to  make  the  fame   remark,  ,^md^.e.^      ,  /be  ?°  'rant ,. elhh,..., 

iriiinriire  aitquul.  —  «•  a^'ere.—  '"  com  iipi.  ''''-■,.  _  -s  i,v  lummu^  —  '•  pcitentm.— 

ti  by  «,mmi«.-  '"inllrmita»,-  '•  ''""''•''^'  •  ','.''•;;:_,.  _  ,6  ,.",„.lri  -  »•  liic.-  "'  vert)»- 


EXERCISES. 


287 


were  the  followincr^*  :  On  the  17th  day  of  March,  when  the  sun  entered^' 
into  Aries  Sprins:?  commenced-'*';  on  the  9lh  of  May  was  the  bej^m- 
nin-  of  Summer;  on  the  12th  day  of  August,  that  of  Autumn;^  and  on 
the  ninth  of  November,  that  of  Winter.—  11.  The  consul  appointed'^  the 
day  for  election^»  on  (//0  the  third  of  August,  and  the  Latin  fftiva  on 
the  nth  of  August.—  12.  We  intend  to  be  in  the  Firmian  vdla"  till  the 
fourth  of  May.-  13.  In  the  year  of  Rome  8G5,  on  the  17th  of  June  the 
Romans  were  defeated  by  th6  Gauls  at  the  river  Allia.-  U  Julius  C<Tsar 
was  assassinated-''^  in  >he  year  44  before  Christ  on  the  loth  ot  ^larch.- 
15  AI  Tullius  Cicero  was  killed  by  Popilius  Lsenas,  a  military  tribune  , 
on  ih'e  5th  of  December  in  the  year  711  of  the  city.-  10^  The  cnuperor 
Tiberius  was  born  in  the  year  after  Cicero's  death  on  the  lah  ot  >ovem- 
b,.,-—  17  The  city  of  Rome  was  built  on  the  22d  of  April,  in  the  year 
753  ij.  c—  18.  The  ^legalensian^*  games  were  celebrated^'"  in  the  month 
of  April  from  the  fourth  to  the  tenth. 

V   DisT.^NCK  OF  Time.     [The  different  exprefisiom  of  Tune  mmt  be  ren- 
dered in  every  form  adinimble,  the  regular  forms  heinr/ placed  frM]—  1.  liow 
many  years  airo  did  you  come^"  to  this  country"  V  Twenty-three  years  ago 
—  '^*  I' visited-'"  Seinpronius  three  years  ago  on  {e.v)  [my]  journev  when  i 
was*  n-oin.r^»  to  the  province  to  preside"  at  the  Courts.—  3.  A  few  years 
a«^o  tliese'cities  were  occupied  by  the  enemy.-  4.  Homer  bve(  *    many 
years  before  l^)mulus.-  5.  When  I  arrived  at  the  city   thy  brother  who 
had  come  three  days  before,  was  waiting*^  for  me  and  took     me  to  Ins 
],otel**  —  G   Scipio^nade*"  the  march  to  Asfosta  so  rapidly  {tarn  ciio)  that 
(ut)  he"  overtook"  the  c(dumn*'  which,  a  few  days  before,  he  had  sent 
ahead.—  7.  While  Jul.  Csesar  was  Pontifex,  he  changed*"  the  ancient 
Roman  calendar*",  several  years  before  he  went  to  Gaul  as  chief     of  ^the 
province.—  8.  Carthage  was  destroyed  forty-seven  years  after  tbe  end    ot 
the  second  Punic  war,  and  was  rebuilt"  twenty-three  years  later.— 9.  i 
shall  write  {dan^  a  letter  to  you  in  ten  days;  take  care"*  that  you  answer 
two  or  at  the  latest  {^uniniuni)  three  days  after  the  letter  will  have  been 
delivered"  to  you.—  10.  I  shall  depart  from  here  m  lour  days,  and  will  re- 
turn a  few  days  later.-  11.  The  body  of  Alexander  the  Great  was  taken 
to  Memphis,  and  from  there,  after  several  years,  to  Alexandria.— Iv.  1  lus 
whole  tieet  was  fmislied  00  days  after  the  carting"  of  the  timber  had  com- 
i,,enced  —  13.  Six  years  after  the  destruction  of  Carthage  Viriathus  wa^ 
killed  by  his  own  soldiers.     Not  very  {ita)  long  afterwarc.s  the  Numan- 
lians-  revolted'^.-  14.  It  is  reported^  by  some  that  the  tirst  snn-dial    in 
Rome  was  erected"^  by  Papirius  Cursor  a  few  years  before  the  war     w  tli 
Pvrrhus.     But  Varro  states"  that  this  hapi^ened  in  the  tirst  Punic  %vai 
thirty  years  later  than  the  Papirian""  sun-dial  is  said  to  have  been  erected. 

•  24  hie'-  =»  tvansitum  facerc-  '^«  hntium  caperc,-  ^■'  «"f;.'".""-"^- ''  i^rmi-m  villa* 
dav  f..r  st.meihin-,  diem  diare  alirm  rei.-  '^»  cinitia  --  3«  iorue.-''i  ^j^^^i  m  an  ^    la 

S/?.)  -  3«  ro,n,ni"n1rt..-  37  ,e-pnb!ka.-  3e  adire.-  3«  pi-ofic.sci.-^o  to  pre^ideat   he 
^cJirk convent u.i  agere.-*^  e.se.-  ^"^  e.xspociart.  «  -qucm.-  ^  cond  uere.-  *^  e^ 
,nn.-  *5  coiillcon'.-  ■•«  to  ov.-rtake.  itmere  pnvtenre.--  *'  ^»''^*^"":^ J,?'"  ,!  nmvpr 

lififMrium).^  ^-  Tran-1.  -arter  the  v.mV-A  war'.-  "  .•.■panl.y.-  **  curare  -  />-fatre. 
_  6«  iaii<r.-rro.-  ^'  Transl.  :  aller  the  limb.-r  ^nviten  o  ha-l  been  co.n.i^c  d  t'>  he  cart- 
ed  ( A>or/.7r.).- "  N.unantlui.-  «»  rehellure.- /«Jerry.-    W^m'^^^^^^^^^ 

addition  ,olare  hein-  made  only,  if  necessary  to  d\^tV'^T\  ^n  w  rred  wiirPvr rh^^ 
of  time-pieces).- «2  siatuere.— OS  Transl.:  before  it  had  been  warred  with  liriuus. 

««  prodere.—  **  rapirianus. 


288 


EXERCISES. 


VI  Measurement  of  TiMR-rERioDS.- 1.  It  is  reported  that  [there]  have 
beeu  [men]  who  nh^Uimv,r  {■^^'fV'n^rtivf)  ten  days  in  snccession      irom 
bod  -  2   We  think  dav  and  nii^ht  of  the  sad  condition  of  the  republic. 
-8    CcTtain  little  animals- live  only  one- day.-- 4    Dionvsius  was  for 
thirty  e. Hit  years  tyrant  of  the  Syraensians.- 5.  I  ow  lon^^did  you  stay- 
a      onu^M'staid  only  a  few  days  at  Home,  but  in  Naples  I  spent- the 
who  e  Mimnier --  0.  It  is  known"  (says^^  Pliny)  that  in  the  town  of  Pto- 
e  1  fs-   on    he  border"  of  the  Red-  Sen,  45  days  bHbre  the  solstice^ 
an     a!  i:>   ""    fterwnrds,  the  snn  stands- at  midday- perpendicularly- 
oy  T  h<  Id  "^and  thnt  duiin,^  these  ninety  days  the  shadows  are  tlirown- 
Jo,  h  v  .d--7.  In  the  Island  of  Thule  (says  the  same  aiithor),  wh  cli 
Ha'  X  d  ys'  sail-  distant  from  Britannia  tnward(  /^  the  Ts^^'th.  and  is 
near  the     M-tex"  of  the  world,  both  the  day  and  the  n.-ht  hisl^six  mouths 
hi  'nece<=sion  -  8.  Tn-es  may  b..  transplanted»^  both  in  sprinj?  and  autumn 
rur  iTaboutthirty  days.-  9.  We  had  not  seen  (/)^//.)your  fruMid  for  three 

o'  tlV-^  10.  Pope-  Pius  the  Ninth  ha.  been  re  gnin-  now  20  .years  0  y 
oX!'^.).-  11.  Did  not  the  Maeedonhui-  Alexamler  meet  w.  i  ch.v  h»  m 
his  thirty-third  year?  {Raider  hy  all  mcthodx  ndnimihle).—  \l.n'^nmh^\, 
nne  years  old.  was  bound-  under  {h,)  oath  by  his  lather  "•^'-'Ijf  ^.  5!  (j^^) 
Deroetual'Maimity  a-ainst  the  liomans.- i:3.  It  is  repm-ted  that  8  .0,000 

en  built  the  p>Tami<l-  of  Cheops  in  20  years.-  14.  Tiie  staj  Saturnus 
cmnpleles-itsc(>urse-  in  thirty  years,  but  Jupiterin  tNyelye.-lo^cpioled 
his  army  by  the  third  ni-ht  watch  oiitof  the  town,  and  arrived  in  three  days 
TR^derhyall  method.^idmiM.)  at  Tarraco.-  Ki- It^Jv^H  take  im^-  he 
best  parf^  of  six  months  to  build  this  Inmse.-  17.  For- atten(  uig-  to  the 
funeral"»  of  that  man,  a  vacation  of  two  days  was  given'  to  the  students 
(Render  hij  aU  admiHsihle  methods). 

VII.  ADyEUBS  OF  Manner.-  1.  It  was  more  cruel  to  preserve'  Capua  on 


m  these  conditions,  than  to  destroy  it\    [To  thi^  sentence  must  be  given  an 

when  they  hear»  that  you  have  not  succeeded  •  in  this  atfiiir  -...  The^e  things 
•eVo  as  I  told  you  repeatedly.- 4.  If  Caesar,  as  you  thmk».  isde  ermmed« 
a  seizin.^'"  the  government",  drafts'"^  tor  soldiers  must  be  made"  tlirough- 
the  w-hole  ot'ltaly.-  4.  Alcamenes  is  a  rich"  [man]  tor  an  Athenian. 
6.  Such  a  knowledge»"^  was   quite»"   astounding"  lor  those  times.-- 


ai 
on 

out 


7  IIow  could  you  know  that  the  senate  would  be  satistied'^  with  such 
excuses»"  v-  8  1  aslr»  you  how  it  could  happen-^'  that  all  this  was  etfected 
'vithout  your  knowledge^-  or  consenf-'-?-  0.  Thus  it  came'^*  that  nobody 

«7  ab«tinCie  -  «^  contituious  davs.-  •«  a  little  animal,  bediola.-  "  be  careful  in  tran?- 
Iitin  MhiM.  uneral  - '»  ino.aii.- '•  ^^•^•^.  '  Spent'  nmy  also  be  rendered  ^ afjmviim  ,  witU 
a    uns     ?c'     •cn^^Ui  ve.    But  in  ab.nimere  the  idea '  u>  spend  for  j,  p'nw>^e'  .s  contauied. 

V"  «  HtaJe -^  '*  Okn.  l'tolem;iidis.-  "^^  niar-o.-  ' "  Mare  Itubnnn.-  "  sol- 

;:;'i  iur-^«fransl  r^   s  nany\/o««c/em.-'»es.e.-  «0  §  372    R.  81.-  «M-erpenchcular  y 

Too   f„nn\        1  rn  rider^^^^^^  ^»  di*cipulus.-  »  coimrmre.     'To  preserve  Capua  must  be 
terro<;Jlre.—  "  fieri.—  ^a  by  nescieni'.—  ^3  by  invUus.  -  "  ticri. 


V 


1 


^ 


EXERCISES. 


289 


..„3  .nUn.^  to  plough  >-l-d:;wbne  (*»*..)  .Uat[m^^^^^^^^^ 

ir    You  have  lieard  how  Acilms  did  1"» J»  >„  '.  "  ^,';^  ,a  «ot  find  him- 

senTJfc)  o'.ct  11.o.,whileit«as  yet  poss.be   ,  be^"«^,.  ^^  ^  ^^,,,  ^,, 

se  f »  no  V  in  .nch  a  l''«'>'<-''"^'^lf':-»},e  «.needed  to  private  citizens  to 
re  el  violence"  l.V  violence,  »>•  ^  «?^,i'^«^f(S«9 )  are  threatened"  by  open 
„s'e  violen<«  i   tl.eir  prope.tj     «   ^f^  ,  ^  i^i,^,,^  ?vere  accepted,  but  so  Ibat 

r«^:a.u;;.i^^;"^sini^d{£5;^^in^ 

L  i:i.  Sud.  ar-»n.ents  ;''"f'^«,^""!,';\'even  slander"  orsusp  cion  is  able 

".eliemently  opposed"  ;,,f''™l,'^:,;er,'-Tc   He  easily  Rained"  Ota- 

p,.ace  sb..uld  be  denied    o  1"« f  li  f ^,^,^,  .poke  just  as  if  tl.eir  Mmy 

■ili.is,  but  not  Sempromus.-  17.   {,  f  T^,/,,ee„  defeated,  as  they  were*' 

stvle"  did  Gajus  bndd  b.s  ^  a  -  3^^°  ,;^,,.„.  •„,„)  ,i,ould  be  «"««/■•ed? 
ih-,,,1."  the  de  eijates  ot  the  Gallic  ion  .is.  ^"\'  ,'  ,,'  u-.„„  y_  4. 1  do  not 
!!:."aO.I  what  .'.nditions  -"' P,'-«- ^'^ef  that  /^r  t'lS^  -">'f  ''■ 
know  how  (by  y'''';'7A;-""'=i'  'the  sane  manner  Sul,.iei«s  Las^  ^l^vays 
main  (««)  concealed    .'—  ^-  1"  "  «  >>,  ^    y^  ,,een  a  witness"  thai  1 

been  an  adviser"  of  peace.-  «; } ''  '//VVY ViUerved  in  no  other  way.- 
said,  nay"  shoute.l",  that  peace  ^  "^'  '^V.-imhn.m,  we  would  not  have 
7.  If  Clodius  had  co.t.e  in  goo      ;..th    ..  A.n^^  g  ^et  «s,eelebrale~ 

heard  him  swa.L'jier"  m  the  '"''°"",",n,  of  our  countrymen".— 9.  ^ by 
thU.  day  according  to  the  "'''!ri,.Uv«»  ad  wisdom".-  10.  Your  dele- 
1  mile.- «poke"'  in  the  senate  with  ability  "'  '  ,,  "^fyj^test  fairness"  and 
caws  Intve  examined-  this  maU.T  ("«;"«  .«M'^^  ,;^U1.  greater  eloquence 
ffiigenoe".-  11.  You  "■'ve  dehjnded  h.sop  mon  ^^^^^^^ 

.There  Ilasdrubal  fell»*  fighting,  ^vo|ll       '  I    >J,'^' !  g     -,„  ,,ft«  i^iy 

^>^r:r  t!J  t^::;;;;i^-^.^^  -  ti^4:{^^We>^^ 

^ '  T7~      27  while  it  i*  po«pible.  re  integr^.— 

pCre.— *•*  P'^ii^"*'-      49  «.nuns  —  »"  omnTno.  —  *'   raiio.     .„  „,^_-:,r,re  —  *»se  mctjlre.— 
"occultu*'.-  "  ""^i'^'^^^tn  -  «2  pcntentiam  dicere.- «"  '"-^J' •"  "a  -  ^°  oc-regiu?.- 

Srre°-'.V^rtrfmpru«t«t.e',!«.«.-*^- 


if. 


EXERCISES. 


291 


290 


EXERCISES. 


what  hopes-  thev  had  returno.l.-  5.  There  I  was  informecr  that  tlie  con^ 

an  I  all  without  exception  came  unhurt  to  tlie  camp.- 0.  If  I  fl»'»^^'^»  ' :   ,« 
ever  Inn  iv'  V  otf.ndea  an  v  of  you.  you  will  jud^-e  me  more  by  mv  xs  .1 
?lrm  l)v  mv  deeds-».-  10.  Tlie  youn-  man  bore  this  abuse»  silently  and 
than  '^\'^  >     y,  V  ,,/],io  nl'U'e— 11   In  the  same  year  one  ot  tlie  VestaP 
V  n^^^N^        i-  a   ve^  1^  Sem,H-ouius  said  h^  ou.lit  (posse)  uot  to 
I  ve  bec^^m^mncd  in  his  absence,  sinc-e  he  had  been  absent  m  tlie^i^ 
vcc'     Mhe  state.-  1:5.  IJold  and  a  despiser*  ot  gods  and  men,  Catilme 
rSel  cl    Iv-     u()re]  into  his  ruin.-  14.  When  Verres  departed  as  qiu^s- 
[  r     u-      e   u-ov  nee   he  took«  with  him  all  the  money,  out  ot  wb.ch  t he 
^  d  e  s  ^re  to  be  paid'  U.riu.)  the  next  year.-  15.  ^  '"^^^  -  IJ^^    ^^  i;; 
had  not  returned  to  Home  as  a  free  man,  but  as  the  Ix.ndsm  ui    and  tlic 
slave    ft  ueiemv^        If  thou  hast  ne.iilected  to  sow"  in  thy  boyhood, 
;  u  wi      not'^M;  a  harvest'^  in  thy  old  a,e.-  IT.     ->"  ;  ,^^;-^];;il- 
.dv  done  you  this  service»  if  you  had  sent  me  word'-  a  h    le     ar  ic     . 
-iS.m  friends  came  to  see-  me  in  la.-er  nunibers    lian      1»*;^^    ;^     f  ^^^^^ 
t.w'vmJ—  1«)  We  approach'»  you,  O  Conscript'^  Fathers,  as  suppliants 
e  1     m  win./'M  V  w   ose  artifices-  your  minds  have  been  P»-<';>ccupied  > 
^20.  Publiu^^  Hu'-ns  lost  Ids  eyesight-  sleeping,  while  {cum)  ho 

was  dreaming"'^'  that  this  happened  to  him. 

IrronH^^^^^  ilm  'ZM)  fitli-r  into  accessory  pivdicates,  or  into  alyrrhm 

acc(>i(lin^  to  m._  ruu  s  u.  .^  painUMl  in  wax  colors^-  must  be  traustornicd 

'"('SHkH   Hs  th '  ti"       K^     .•     in    va.K  col.frs'.     Instead  of  •  'l^his  was  il.e  llrst  u.clm-. 
Aii^tHHs,  a^.  iM<   iir  1,  l'.i«i>  ^  i)U-tu  e  was  sohl.  as  the  lirst.  in  Koine  . 

KS:;u''TlenVav    lift    t^m^  bechanced  into   '  Then  t  saw  a 

nri«-of  wa     f(.r    h^e  n^  (prwvwi)\     When  the  Eni^l.sh  senten^-e  has  a  passive 

for  n  wit     a      -  ve  a  -ent,  tlie  sentence  must  -enerally  become  active  in  Latin  to  ex- 
[?nlVu  ili,   aVi<^llv      Th.^  Kn-li^h  sentence  'The  first  mon-y  was  ccined    t)y 

SJervhis  iSi?,  must  be  chu.^,'ed  actively  into  vServin.  Tulliu^  as  the  hrst,  corned 
money'. 

1  Kin*--  TuUus  Ilostilius  was  the  first  wlio  wore'^^  a  to-a  pnetexta  after 
having  conquered  the  Etr.iscans-.- 3.  The  tirst  (.ysterl,eds-  were  niade 
by  Sergius  Orata  at  his  villa  near  Baj.L'",  at  Uie  time  o  he  orator  L. 
Cras^u?—  3.  Italy  saw  the  tirst  elei)hants'^'^  in  the  war  witlr"  king  IV'Thiis, 
in  the  year  472  of  the  City.-  4.  Pompey  was  the  hrst  ^vho  paraded  a 
yoke^'  of  elephtnts  in   hi<  African  triumpli.— ■>.  Asintus  P..llio  wa^.Jhe 

»*>  uil)e  excedere.—  "^  aulerr* 


-  "■-  HCie: 


CO- 


o,^  ^  '    - S.;;;  u '-  -  u^^^^    pernuierirp:^  illiquid  -"  conlertus^-  •«  aci^« 

X7  -"-«  vZh^.^  loo'factu.u  -  '  injuril.--^'  Ve^tllis.-  3  in  -h.  service,  o  t  .0 
^lZre}p,mJcausu.^  *  contemptor.-  ^  in  die..  -  «  fVrre^- J  to  ,P^>'  j';;, -' ;»^^'  ;;* 
snpekdiL  aumerare  mUin.-»  muie  ,.tum.- »  setuenleni  facere.-  'VMoa.mctoi^o 
11  to  .lo  a  service,  m^mv.y  ,>nedrt'-e.  -  '»  cert lurem  lacere  --  '3  nataro.-  *  /.  ,^l'"?f„  ,  ^_! 
somehoclv,  co//i;6^/ruv  a'u/'^eni.-  '»  I  have  a  rv^WJicet  nnki.~  ^«^^"'•' ;-/;  ^'•"s  "m  J  are 
le.uppiek!-  »«  non  iuM.ams.-  ^*  ars.-  "^i  ..ccnp:\tns.-  ^^  "^•^''^'■'•™.^,''  ti"^  '  "-T  S^ 
_  24uti—  "  Etrusci.--''a'i  oy-ter  hcil :  Oifruru/n  vican'vn.— ;\ii\\\hi  ikui  mjo., 
Bajdnurn.^'^»  elephantus  -  ««  Tran-1.  :  the  war  wa.,'ed  {r/erere)  with  Pyrrnus.-  da 
cere.—  »>  a  yoke  ol  elephants,  etephanti  juncti. 


r 


first  who  made  man's  genius»'  public  property"  by  establishing^*  a  library 
in  Rome-  6? k  Valerius  Messala  exhibited"  the  tirst  battle  picture"  m 
KomeTi"  the  year  490  after  the  building  of  the  City.-  7  L.  Mummius, 
he  sati  N-  A^^^^^  destroyed  Corinth,  placed-  a  picture- of  Ans.ldes,rep- 
•esentn-  Father  Liber,  in  the  temple  of  Ceres,  whicli  Pliny  believes  was 
llfiis  t^.re  -n-  picture-  exhibited-  in  Rome.-  8.  The  red"  color  which 
s  cil  ed  sinolus  was  tirst  found  in  Pontus,  not  far  from  the  city  of  binope, 
whe  ce  it^S  [itsj  name.- 9.  Sempronius  caught"  tlie  first  mulle  - 

fisiy»  hi  lis  year.-  10.  Thales  is  said  to  have  first  predicted-  an  eclipse" 
of  the  sun  -  11.  The  Cimbri  crossed  the  Alps  tirst  of  all  German  nations. 
_  1  ^  Wh'ile  (ahl.  ahs.)  the  two"  legions  disputed^»  with  each  other  which 
of  them  should  enter-  the  city  tirst,  the  chief  commander  directed  the 
seventh  legion  to  entei-^^  first.-  13.  The  slave  was  uncertain  ^vhe  her  e 
sho  Id  invUe  LucuUus  lirst  or  Sulpicius.-  14.  To-mght  (W..\  will  lie  tie 
third  representation"  of  the  tragedy  (Edipus- 15.  bempronius  was  di- 
rected to  leave  first  a  sutlicienl»  garrison  at  Crotona,  and  then  to  go  to 
hd  »  he  other  Consul.-  10.  The  captain-  himself  left  the  wrecked- 
si  1  IS  of  all  -  17.  Hispania  was  the  last  of  all  [provinces]  which,  under 
I  le  ead  of  CtEsar  Augustus  was  subjected-.-  lo  In  that  year  Gajus  was 
elected  the  fourth  time  mavor  of  the  city-.-  10.  My  brother  has  devoted- 
hhiAelf  wluiily  to  Greek  literature.-  17.  The  chief-commander  directed 
t    !  k-  (,ns  to  obey  his  commands  alone.-  18.  The  Stoics  believed  that 

V  rt  untlone  was  sufficient  for  a  happy-  life--  1»^^^"' ''''fntrndo.^  to 
as  quickly  as  he  could^*  on  Vesontio;  but  CiBsar  likevvise  intended  to 
ma  e  l.imself  master-  of  that  city.-  20.  Cnesar  accused  the  chiefs  of  the 
E  lui  hat  they  had  not  kept  their  promise",  and  that  they,  likewise  had 
not  heliH'd'-  him  with  supplies,  although^  they  might  have  done  so'  . 

X  .    ACCESSOUY  PKEIHCATES  KOT  AGUEEINC.  WITH  THE  GRAMMATICAL 

SUBJECT  Hi  2:J-20).-  1.  Ciesar,  beimr  carried^  too  far^«  by  the  streams  ot 
tl  c  sc^l  lUTciived-  Rritannia;  lying'^  at  his  left.-  2.  C^sar,  at  lus  depart- 
ure'^ for  Britannia,  had  left  the  M.,rini  in  a  state  ot  subjection  ^  o.  Apd- 
les  left  his  renowned'^  picture  of  the  Coan'«  Venus  unhmshcd  .-  4  rhc 
ilhenian  i^enerals  were  innocently  condemned  t*>  ^^^''=^^\^/;'J^^"^.':,  ^^  ^^i 
they  had  left  unburied'«  those  whom  they  had  been  ^l"^^^;  «i^  3^  Tn  nii  iha 
on  account  of  the  violence"^  of  the  storms^^-  0.  Manns  took  «Tuguitha 
fettered''*  to  Rome  -  G.  The  consul  dismissed  the  envoys  weeping  [the 
.;'L;.  ^^.,,n,  and   lamenting  the  fatal-   error  of  the  lang  W   which   he 

had  been  induced  to  make  war  on  the  I^;>"^^«  l^^'^^P^^'^  'l,^  ^'^^^^^^^^ 
took  the  city  almost  entirelv'"*'   destroyed  by  tire,  and   det,   tute     ot  m- 
habitaiits.-  8.  Youjiavejrp^at^^ 

"  »2  Tr^sr^the  <Teniuses  (ingenia)  of  men.- 3»  res  publica.- 3«  dicSre.-  3»  biblio- 
thSca  -  "e^pro ponerf.-  37%l^,^i  p,c\i  tabula.- «^  ponere.- 3  a  picture  r'^Pr^;^;:"^^^^^^ 
FatluT  Liber  i  Fafker  Liberia  picture  mala)-  *<>  ^"^^ternus  -  *^  ^'^^^^^o  -  i    ute': 

'43  rntw.r      44  tr-ihor. 45  caoere  —  ••*  mu  us.—  *^  pnedicere.—  *'*  detectio.—      uicr 

m/p  Xenare  -  ^^  ntroTre  -  "  intrare.--  "  transf. :  the  tragedy  will  be  represented 
?r;r7).-  "  Stis.-  -  aSuum  (by  the  al.stract-da.ive).-  "  dux.-  "  ^-^y^^^^.^f'^^^^' 
^^w  panlre.-  "  princeps  decurio!-  ««  dare.-  «»  be5tus.-  ^^  hy  f  '^f/ aT  '\\«^ l*;^" 
tlere  -  «*  by  a-  great  marches  (iter)  as  he  could.-  "  velle.-  «»  P.\'«'i-  ^fS^.i"'  ^  Vo  ion' 

"f;onno-s^-«o  cxiMpere-  82  tempe^tas   (H>ig.).-<^^  ducere-.^*  v.ncTre.- 

s»  fa.iirr-  «=■«  almoJ^  entirely,  p<B>^.-  "  destiltttua.-  «»  to  threaten  one's  life,  trmdian 
alicui. 


o<>2 


EXERCISES. 


poctln,'-  it.-  9.  Thou  .ilt  have  [in]  njc  J^^^^^J^^^J^^Z ^^"^ 

Llu>r%un<r  mc  a  brave  ^"^  "y-^ /f-^T/;^^^ 

monev  they  had  received  as  a  loan.--    ^-  y,' .      .....(i  you  in  mv  name.— 

tw  hundred  sesterces  to  my  ^''^•^1'^;^!'^  k^"  .^^,  ^;!;es^^  caused"  Dv  thy 
ll  I  am  goin^,  to  char.e  thee  w.th  ^^^^l^TX^^a  to  employ"  this 
a-ent-on  my  premises  ;- \?-  /J^^,  Vl  u  it  is  not  possihle'-  tor  every 
man  [any]  hm-i^^  as  mui.s  er  ^>f  ;" ;  ..  j  ^^' ^ie  honest,  and  free'»»  from 
one  (..^0  to  die  rich   bnt  ,t  is  P^^f^^f^;^^,^^;^^  ntline'hin.^ly»  to  death. 

e,imV.-  15.  It  i^  the  "^j^';    ;>^.^^;    ^  i 'i^-*   //S  Unr,  was  a,.,n,\  the  con- 
-  1(5.  Ilavin-  dismissed  ^l»^ .^^y'^'^" -;.•,, ^^  ^p  troops  without  delay  to 

sul  directed  [his]  lieutenanl^  ^^'7     )a  • '^^^»    U-is  fell  on^  th(^  en.my  leav- 
thebc>undaries  of  Macc'donia.-  ^.^Oh  s(>  lui^  ^  ^^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

ino;»,  loaded  with  booty,  the  ^-^^'^^l'- /^r'  V',  j  ..p^ted  to  the  general  as  a 
voli  have  sent  me  as  a  V''^^'^''\-- ^\^\-'l''^  the  distressed'»  Sem- 

^Hme  that  (,...0  1-  did  m>t^nd   -  [;^  ^  ^;;:,!|;u.;^^0.  The  inhaiut- 
pronius,in  spite"  of  V^^"^^,  n  ll  vvrthcm  three  c<,horts'-=  for  protection"', 
ants  asked  the  consul  to  ('/0    ^;^  ^'r/'';^  |V    ,r  ^^.  oiubct.  (^  r,.-,G).-  I.  Ex- 
Xn  Coincident  action  in  tiik  koi  m  ob  an  o     '.l   ^     j_  _^ 

pei^f*  thcJ^altaek  of  the  enemy  -«^h  umhum  ed^,^-;^;  (-^  ^^.^  ^^^j. 

F4at  soul,  and  free-  from  al  des.  e  t  .  ^^^!;^^;J^^;^^  .^  ..^i.^e-  to  take  a 
^ersaries.-  3.  With  the  ancient  Jj^^^^^,^^.^;  ^^J^'  ,  ,!^,  wiih  dishevelled" 
meal^'with  unwashed-  hand>.-  /•  i'^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^j^,.  ^  j  '.  aarts-.-  o.  The 
hair*  and  tor.f^«  garments-  rusl.ed  '^'  '^-,;'\',',,,i;.,v?d=«'  face—  G.  The 
emperor-  Angustiis  w.g  never^u ^J  h  jU.^  ^^^^.^.  ^^3.  ,f  the 

severe  sentence  ot  the  CoiMi    ^] f    ^^.^J,  ^,.!^,.,,^^^^  hud  come  with 

soldiers.- 7.  The  ^^^^S  ^^^^;;^^^^' ^]^^^  ^^^^^^^^ 

authority-  to  ccmclude  -'^  1> '  ^^ '-^^  , .  , ';  i  was  so  drenched-  by  rains" 

immense^*  howlmg•*^-/|  On  'l»;Y  J^^"^'    >  '.■  j   j,^^.  M,.a,.s  {.\fedus)  it  was 

that  I  returned  home  with  a  ^^^^^^^^^Zy^J,,^^^ 

the  custom  for-  vvjf^^^"'/*    i   , '  l/w-  that     i-nirlha  i.uended**  to  throw 

garments^V-  U.  When  ^^f^^^^^^i^.^^^  follow"  him  by  forced 

himself  into  tb;,,^^^'^^''-^^  ,^,  ^  .^'  >:;ii'^y[  i^in  undisciplined-  army,  with 
marches.-  12.  Cleon  went      ^o  battle  ^^J'  ^^^.  ^\  ,,^ual  [par)  to 

mi  willing-  allies,  [being]  it  ^^^^^^^  ^^    ,,i,,,  the  Sigents  of  Fabius 
[his]  adversary.--  bi.    lu. t      t  >  ^  ^  j^  ^  ^^^^.iin'inistration-  <>f  thy  office- 
exi)ected  me  to  do.—  U.  i  "    \\,      '  5,  .,., -.pij  .rained"'  to  uie  the  applause** 
tiuVi  wilt  imitate  chully  my  ";^,^'  »  ^^.  N^al^'^o  m    great  satisfaction,  not  a 
i^^■  cverv  <'-<)od'-'  (man),  although  I  niaat    ,10  m>  ^.i 

;e^^  em'iiuesby^ 

_  »6  iJr^du/ni   (.sing.).  -  "V'''"'i.'^^n.t.    S^^  M.^'JlLUS. 

fi«r  )  -"*  to  tear,  scindere.-  ''  vc:^lM  W  f^  ;  J^ "V  i  i^ens.-  3«^  ululiiu-,  G.  ^;^  - 

if  Mrii..u..-  t;^'-"»'^^'^rnS'ir!^3rJi^'    ;j^^^^  women  were  "--'-l.  ;;;"?'>- 

40,, ictus-*»   »u»o  intexins.-  *'  vesus  '^**'*/;^^^^^^  nu  ^imui  conumltere.- *«male 

throw  one',  .elt. i>et.r..- *' clr.erta  l)'^!^.-- ^!  '  ^,*,\?,  ;„  _  ^^l^-.Mo   (dng.).  -   "   ene. - 


EXEECI3ES. 


293 


aware  (««u  *.V""'-'J'Yl''«^»^^,^l;^^>'  some,  now  [kind  of  ]  work,  lyou] 
your  opinion  —  3.  It  y"". ""'',,.,,„,•.,  i.nt  i,ow  miicli  it  can  liurt  you  — 
must  not  ask  how  much  it  f/" /. '.  f '  '  ^'V a,i;  "  ictory  was,  [andl  how 
4.  Wcall  fed  I'ow.sa.l,  hmy   P''»''  ^''^  '  "''|-frie„,,sf  _  5  much 

,,is,naccrul  '">^'^;''."'"f/:,  ;;:,"  'i  u-e  b  ™  if  y  uhll  chosen"»  to  lis- 
hotter,  how  much  la.rer  "■'»',';^^i  ,"^  „%^,',';  ,,,/as  you  Icnow  that  I  love 
ten"  lo  my  opinion.-  0. 1'  .1 'f";  y  '"  '.„,„,  {  ,,.^,m  urssntly  ask  you 
y,m,  I  wouW  in  no  way  i'^'*  .«/''"v  ;\v  er  that  you  so  gre-atly  wish 
(o  ilo  what  you  have  l'''M''«^.  •;;:, 'jj  "^o  secre  Iv  w-as  that  affair  irans- 
,„e  to  l,uy  that  slave.-  8.  So  '•'\»''  "^  \'.,^"  *,^„  .'i  ;,,,,  i,Uiqmd)  was  heimr 
acted»*,  that  we  did  no  even  .^  ^.^Ppf^ .^',  ,,:^  fj  "  fi  9. -Phe  purchase'» 
P^V^"■"',^t  Fonn?:i^'  se    n    U   1  i'^- b  -en  aL  well  considered»»  as  [it  was] 

il^^llt!^"  wXl;  ndr^i^^  i.dij^^^^ 

this  passage"  displeases  »'« .'''^'^,^,^^^'^,;^  ,  am  greatly  bowed"  down; 
cd"  by  these  arguments.-  1.5.  ^^'''V\,  .",•,,,„.  v-.u-i()  tVo.n  which  I  see 
for  1  found  here  thy  two  ^1^;J^:^,^^^Z^V.  thougl.t  would 
ht.w  little  we  can  b"P<; />'  \''  f,  «  ','       '  Id,.-'  impressed  the  embassa- 
bring"  us  peace-  14.  1  ''^•,;»  '  \7;,. ,;''„/  ',,at.ur  embassadors  bad  witb- 
dors  not  a  little.-  lo.  I  wished     <    '«  «  )     -^      tirmly.-  16.  U  cann.rt  be 
stood-  the.^e  arn.gant  demands  ^,  ,','''-,  '^''^'eeomel he  more  impudent, 
doubted,  that  this  <;"'''»y  ;•'     '" '^.  S'/wUli  bun.-  17.  The  ancients  be- 
the  more  generously  we  have  ""='^\'-   .,,.'.''  ',„  ,„0011.-  18.  The  praises 
lieved  that  the  sun  was  nine   imes  as  Ug^c  j  ^^    «v    ^  (by  causa)  saved  the 
which  people  i,l,o,u,ne>)  ^l'"':,,,.\L"/"^,X;:.;.r  Expect.-  lU.  Art  thou 
country,  seeni  to  be  inueb  ^  ''^    '•'    ''^  '    j^    l.Vi,,  our  institutions"',  ibat 
BO  ignorant"»  in  Knowledge  \  »'    '",':^,  .''',"» v_  oQ.  The  enemy  made  the 
thou  cansliiot  even  '■•;«>.  "''f  .;'„''/,  ^1'.  ■  nuiks  they  could..-  21. 1  wish 
attack  against  our  soldie  1=.  «     '    '^/'.',^'",',"^  ^ii  as  you  can,  by  your  advice 

the  city.  .  rr.,.  „  pictures''  of  renowned  artists  were 
XIV.  RklationofPkicl.-1.  ^.]'^  }]l^.  '^^^^^^^  ,/;,f/V//?.«<l  -  2.  The  Archi- 
soldat  iabuU,us«>rices  m  aiUiqmtv^  ,,  „,eh 
gallus  of  Parrhasius  which  If  \\\  ^./^.  ^..';^  '^^  was  estimated  at  6  mil- 
that  he  h>cked  it  up^  m  ^^^^^^^^^^,  ;>tThebes  was  bought  by 
dions  sesterces.-  li.  he  .^'^/^  i  ts  -  4  The  Argonauts^  of  Cydias  the 
king  Attains  for  one  hundred  talents^-4^_LHe^_o__ 

67  sur-cipore  (per/,  future)-  "  «''.^\^*^-""e'6T:,tclli-Se  -  ««  emtio.  -  "  Fonniauum  - 
•8  n,  iiurltu-  -  ««  Ir.icii.Osus.-  •>"  lucrum.-  ' '  ^^  ""^  „  ,  J!J°  _  78  niovere.-  ^«  affli- 
^.,.  bO  lerre  -  »^  oratn».  -  ^"  ob^iire.  --  l^.f,!  V;,,!  _  »0  reel?*-  "  conlertu^.— 
r.  aua!;ii.us.-  -  -oU:^ore^^l^^^>^^%^{^:^  ^J  be   in  the  .iu^^ular.- 


294 


EXERCISES. 


I 


law 
hoii 
1 


i^ver'°°  Hortensius  hoiicrht  for  144,000  sosterces,  and  built^  [expressly]  a 
loiiseMbr  it  in  his  Tusculan  villa.- 5.  The  Ephesians'»  en-a-ed*  Apel- 
es   to  paint  AU-xander  the  Great  with  lightnin.i^  in   h.s   hand    for  the 

1  ,'0^0?  tventy  talents.- 0.  Timomaehus  of  Byzantnini    sokl  h.s  Ajax 
and  his  MedCa  to  Jnlins  Caesar  for  eighty  talents,  whieh  pictures  were 
pi  red  in  the  temple  of  Venns  Genetrix.-  7  Gajus  gav.  me,  f.>r  money 
L  ven  to  him  as  a  loan,  his  note  for  on(>  liundred  twenty  thous^md  Dollars 
fexpreL  the  amount  i a  sesterce^.-  8.  The  pria.'  for  a  tnp  to  Troy  on  tlie 
boat  is  three  Dollars  [e.rpress  in  ^sterces].-  9.  The  Senate  has  compromised 
that  claim"  at  00  millions  of  sesterces  [remk)'  in  all  mithoihadnumblc\.— 
10.  That  work  has  been  awarded  to  Sempronius,  who  made  the  lowest 
bid»    at  mi  000  sesterces  [rewUr  in  every  way  a'imtmbl£\.--\y).  i    nave 
rental  mvtknn^»  to  Gajus  for  C,;500  sesterces  a  year".- 11   That  house  is 
worth  loO  000  sesterces,  or  at  the  utmost  100.—  12.  Wiieat  sHls  now  at  two 
Dollars  a  bushel  {e.rprex>^  by  >u',terres\  — \\V  Yerres  bou-hl  a  statue  that 
was  worth  00  times  aR  much,  for  0,500  sesterces.- 14.  TheJustice  of  peace 
laid  the  damai^es  ai^ainst  Sempronius  at  1,^300  sesterces.-  b).  Ins  house 
cost  me  exactly  {fere)  280.(>0()  sesterces  to  build'V-  10.  This  tence  will 
cost  vounot  Ussthan   a  mina  to  make.-  17.  This  war  ha.s  cost  me  my 
house— 18   That  book  is  exceedini^ly  rare  ;  it  sells  at  auction  tor  prices 
ran.-ino-  iVoin  oOO  to  1,000  sesterces».-  lU.  The  splendid  team'*  of  bempro- 
nius  has  cost  him  50,000  sesterces.—  20.  I  cannot  do  tliis  work  lor  less 

than  100,000  sesterces.  ,    ,t  ,.      „    .  1  9 

KV    INDKKINITK   rnicE.— 1.  AVhat  Will  vou  take"  lor  that  horse  .^- 

2  What  is  goV\  worth  today?—  8.  Wiiat  damages  has  the  jury'"  awarded 
in  that  law-suit?— 4.  What  did  your  house  cost  V— 5.  What  did  you 
bid'*'  I  fori  tliat  statue  at  auction  V—  0.  At  what  sum  did  you  comin'.)mise  . 

—  7  What  do  vou  think  tliat  pifturc  is  worth  V  At  what  sum  do  you 
value  itV—  H.  llow  docs  wheat  sell  to-day  V—  0.  In  the  Roman  Forum  was 
a  picture  of  Aristldes,  representing''"  an  old  herdsman  with  a  statf"',  in  re- 
ga-d-''  to  which  an  envoy  of  the  Tellt()ns•''^  being  asked  how  high  he  estimated 
him  answered,  he  would  not  take"  such  a  [fellow]  as  a  gift  [it  he  were]  alive. 

—  10  How  much  hiu'her  does  wheat  sell  than  barley-^  V—  11.  Seminonius 
sold  me  that  statue  for  what''"  it  cost  him.—  12.  Sempronius  s«)ld  me 
that  statue  for  a   much  higher  price  than  [what"'"']  he    bought   it   [tor]. 

—  18.  I  have  rented  this  house  for  the  same  price  as  last'"  year.—  14.  (»ram 
sold  then  so  high  that  poor  people'--*  could  not  buy  it.-  15.  The  contract- 
ors made  so  high  a  bid  [on J  that  work  that  nobody  could  compete     with 

100  Orator  — '  faccre.—  »  a?(U's  {nnrj.)  .Edes  if^plic-d  in  tlioMn<rul:ir  if  it  denotes  houses 
consistin-oif  one  main  room,  a- teniples,  and  Hinsctuirs  s.ich  as  tlie  mentiom-d  one  «.f 
HorLo.isia^.  -3  Eplio^iiis.-  *  rr:ui-l.  V-ave  out  on  c.mtract  Alexander  to  l)e  Pointed 
etc-»Transl.:  hl.ldinir  in  [lii^^]  tiand.-  •  Byzaniin-.-  •  Transl.  :  t  is  sailed  (wari- 
o7r«>nowto  Troy  for  etc.-  »  nomen.-  »  Transl.  :  who  liad  hidden  (/wvn)  the  ..west 
(minimoi-  •<>  ru>.-  "  'a  year'  is  expressed  l>y  .rivin-.  to  the  nmneral  the  di^tnUut.ve 
l„rni.-  »2  Be  carelul  in  renderii.o;  ,his  numeral.-  '3j,ulex  P'^l'|"^''';  -  ^\VuJ!-J 
have  bnilt  this  h«us.-  f-.r  ete.-"»  Transl.  at  .'",00  sesterce-  up  to  l.OO».-  «  bigic.-»^  hy  ven- 
a^re  —  »»  indices  In  elas>ical  times  tiie  f miction  of  the  jude.v  was  almost  th<t  same  as 
th:.t"of  onr  jnries.  VN  hat  we  call  'jnd.^e'.  in  those  times  was  the  /^V^^^'f- „\\  \'\;,  ^'^^'^'^ 
the  quesnon  o^^law\  while  Xhc  judex,  decided  on  '  fa.N  and  e\  u  eiice  .- »« 1  he  'K-  con- 
nect d  with  llclre,  is  the  same  a<  oth.-r  objects  ot  pru<.  and  vain-.  -  -«  Tg-^^V.fV-iv  ,  !  nl 
of  an  c.ld  (v^//^.c)'terdsman  {paMor)  painted  hy.- «»  l)ac.ilum.- ^^  de.- -^  ' ''^  f '  "^ 
Teuloid  -'^*  Tiansl. :  he  would  not  (/<o7M  th-U  such  a  one  was  presented  to  him  alive. 
—  -^»  honlenm.-  =«  for  so  much,  as.-  =•  The  Latin  eannot  omit  the  rclaiive  ..f  price  in 
comparative  clause»  aft;ir  quam.-  ^»  superior.-  2»  Poor  people,  egtnte.^.-^^  1  rau.-l.  could 
bid  a^rainst. 


EXERCISES. 


295 


ihem-  16   Your  negligence  has  cost  you  dear!-  17.  Sempronius  esti- 
♦  KtVwmd    It  a  vei-v  hi-h  price.-  18.  The  Jury  have  estimated  the 
mates  this  w  01  Iv  ai  avcij  mi^«ii"  n^i.o  Tnw  bivo  estimated 

dimao-cs  at  a  lower  rate  than  I  expected.—  19.  Ihe  Juiy  liaye  t^^siimaiea 
thrcbmra.  Va.' ainst  Sempronius  at  a  lower  rate  than  they  es  imated  those 
tut  (la  na  (  s  a.^.i  1   ^        ,,  j     Tarcnt.—  21.  Rent  is  cheap^^  in  that 

?Sr!"^  ^^  Ttldnk-^  indlords^^'  wish  to  let  as  high  as  possible. 
Zl  tllms-.  lo  lent  as  low  as  possible.-  28.  You  have  bought  this  house 

'''xVr'll^n'^ox 'oK^NNEU  VALUE.-  1.  It  is  wondern.l,  what  value  is 

now  a  lache  1"  U>  these  accomplishments.-  2.  I  do  not  know  how  high 

Y  u  h       tl  a  mm  ;  I,  on  my  part,  h(.ld  him  at  nothing  -  8.  If  you  hold 

UkN    '  li  e  •  n^      -eiHiblic  as  detn-,as  I  do,  we  ought  to  let  minor  points- 

>i  -  4   Even  the  Smallest  [sum  of]  money  is  woiMh  much  to  u^cmu  these 

[;_  5  Was  this  man  so  much  t.)  thee  that  his  fall"  should  affect  thee 

V    h  ;o  ^v^^Jilef  V-  0.  All  these  disadvantages^    1  ^^  ";;t  muuUtthou 

w  It  but1)led-e='"  that  my  and  my  children's  lives  (.si/^y)  shall  be  sate    .— 

-   If  V  ,      1-  ce  a  oreat  value  on  the  pleasure  of  a  few^»  hours,  how  much 

hi.  LVi  I  St  vo    vi  ue  a  pleasure  which  at  no  time  can-  be  interrupted" 

;;;-l;:,[,;;i;::;.^  A  s.  if  wLt  i  esteem  i^^^^-nA!:;:!'.  'f:^.  s  ^'r^^^ 

in.leed  no  commimion^^  can  be  between  us.-  0.  Since    V        *«  't'^LTpir 
tlke^^  li-htlv,  the  great  injuries  of  these  men,  you  should*    take  then 

"^'^^{' UELvrl:^^  'o/^'j^^.-  1.  What  d Terence  does  it  make   to 
Sc^pnlni!^  whether  you  are  sorry  or  glad  ?-  2  I  do  -t  k^^w  olw^j^^^ 
portanee  this  matter  is  to  thee,  but  to  me  it  is  of  the  n^^^;^  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

•>.  That  thou  art  "-oiu'^  soon  to  return  home  tnmi  thyjou  ne\ ,  wil    Ov. 

;;f  <rrca    in  e rest  to  mv  brother.-  4.  It  can  hardly  be  believed,  ot  what  in- 

^Si^it  is^lo';:Nh.t  ^.is  niatter  shotild  be  ^ly-^rJ^V^.^ll^^Cr^S^Fr^^: 

Franc,  was  ...ore  iu  need  ..f  l.iiu  tl.an  ho  [was  m  '";<;;  1  "''','*  "^'C,''!,^^ 
made  liulc  dillVriMice  lo  Fidv  us  wheUuT  the  Sunato  «<)«      lalilj      Ins 
U;etso^:;>'-T.U  will  be  onhe  last  i.,^^ 

.leee^«  vour  brother  to  inf)  io  n"  m  our  councils.—  8.  It  is  not  so  muca 

u-inie le  t  aslhat   <.f  the.  king  that  the  C(mditi()ns  of  peace  should  be 

I  e  )L- ^^icRHl^- -  y  What  matters  it  that  the  tyrant  has  assigned  to  Sex- 

t u    a  province'for  plunder,  in  which  there  is-  --'"''''h^y^^l^^^l 

lei-ed  v- 10    It   does   not  matter  lo  what  sum«- you  bind     y5>ui=r^  '  ^^ 

n^  ;/,  aJ  vmi  have  nothing  with  which  to  discharge^    t^  '^^^"U 

XVlll.  Relation  of  weight,   and  M,,.,suuEMEvr  in  «^^»^;^^;J^ 

Which  weighs  more,  a  pound  of  lead,  or  [a  pound]  ot  tlax    •-;•  |V^^^  "^i^"^ 

pounds  doc's  that  fish  vI^jigh^JtWH^^ 

'       ..  Transl.  :  It  is  lived  at  a  ^^'^^^^^^^^ 
at  a  cheap  price  in  that  part  {regtol-  "  Tian>l. .  '»h }  tha       '    ^  ^  «^3'«  ^.^^j^^i,  >  every- 
Suennt.-  »  at  what  [value]  these  acc(mM)ii^^hment^s     /7e*   a  c  h^^^^^^^^  _  J ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^.^^ 
thin,  smallest  O^.r)  -   \»'^ve  to  be  dropped  .^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ./^V^X  subjunctive  <>f    the 

—  >»  pr.e>tare     ptrj.  .vw/y/  ).  -  ■•»  sal\  us.      .    *.*'■,. „       45  (..jmmunio.  —  **  qmmiam.— 
prinelpal  pn-dirate.-  -«^  intermittcre  -  **  "'   '    .'       r^.^Te-Uc  -  "^^  -  ''  faceti*.- 

i.  eert^.  J  -  lem.,- -  Pros,  siibj.  of  ^^  l>--^>i^  ^'^^;:^',,^  j;!!!  ^  t  o  ratily  ,somc- 


296 


EXERClSEa. 


n  he  iiTst  who  coined»'  money  :  tl.e  ase»,  '^''i"^<'by."''.«)7;;;§^'?; ,  ""^ 
.n(l  a  niece  —  5  An  Enfflisli"  niile»'  measures  about  (arcUer)  10.)0  Roman 
e"  and  a  naufioa  ln,ile"  measures  m,>re  tl.an  four  times  as  m"ol..-  >.  I 
,not  estimaie  the  exact  measure"  of  these  flel.ls  from  ^"C>'i;^S';^<;  -T; 


^eneral  presented  the  Delphic  Apollo  with  ^^''Jf/Jl'^Sf  ^^^fil^o^r^^^^^ 
%  weiM  t.-  4.  Servius  Tullius,  fourth  kms  of  '  '« |,^''''^,  f • 't!.'!  ,e?l  one 
been  the  first  who  coined»;.m,me.v  :  .he  ases,  comed^b^^^^^^^^^ 

poui 

paces, 

cannot  estimate  tiie  exaii  iiit-usuiu    ...  "^^^^/^''KU.VnVc  nr^rcpivefr*  to  their 

7  On  the  f()llowin<i-"  clay,  at  daybreak,  the  inhabitants  pcrceiven     i»  ^"'^" 

L^^et  terror  Tie  troops  of  the\'nemy,  10,000  stronir  stanj  inj?     m  bat  le 

Sray"  at  their  gates  1  8.  The  ancients  report  {prodere)  that  theie  ^vere 

cpvpi-ql  trees  more  than  thousand  years  old. 

vlv  M^Axl  AND  NSTKUMENT.-  1.  Bv  this  mcans  Verres  meant"  to 
conccnl-  Ids  plins  -  fwe  c^  effect  this  by  no  other  means.-  8. 1  can- 
noT^ld^en  Uds  c^^inion  by  any  law  but  by  the  custom  of  our  ancestors, 
not  ^\<^|f"/Vl./M  t  nt  riot  even  the  enemy  should  be  deceived  by  traud.— 
r  A\t\,lf^^i  Tna  re  shre'^r»  and  prudent,  and  he  assisted  nature 
by^he  "i^eatesfpcT^  5.  The  Lacedaemonian  Phcebidas  seized- 

th^    )rt?(s^^^^^^^^  the  instillation-  of  a  fcAV  Thebans  who  were 

fiyoi-  of  t  e  Lace'hTmonians.-  5.  I  was  astonished  at  the  iiriiorance 
of  thl^man  who  Xn  he  was  obli.i^ed-,  as  a  pranor,  to  m'^k^-  laws 
hmself  could  not  even  correctly  understand  those  that  were  made  by 
oH  ers  -  7  I  takes  two  hours"  to  walk  on  foot  from  iny  house  to  the 
H  V  -  8  ThcU  t^'  s  at  that  time  no  law  l)y  which  Caninius  could  right- 

l^wrong    whicirh'e  had]  suffered;».- 9.  According  t^;  >- .<^1--^^^^ 
least  {qmriem),  tl^-^  assertion-  cannot  be  proved  /Jt  alb-    0.  T       as  a  t.o,^ 
I  can  prove  by  the  fact  that  never  any  enmity  existed  (m^)  btlween 

Roscius  and  his  father.  T^ninc  cnirl  ihit  he  had  not 

VY  Ckv^v  ffficient  and  motive.— 1.  Icihus  saui  tnai  ne  n  lu 

n'om  hls'talit.-- 4.  Fron.  theL  -.•asons  (.«,™)  I  '-e ''^™    ,    .f,,  T, 


7'^J:l^■^^^:Z\ZSp^■Foi^im  called-  n,e  to  defend  the 

lunlv-  and  uXreseeu'',  IJurrus  acconM^anied'»  him  on  his  jonruey  ..nder 
t":%.e"i'of  mSmp:-9^me"  rentained  out  of  shame"  mordeMo 

'0  milliaiuim  navale.—  ^»  I  nuiM. .  nn  nai  ^'^  •  \,  "^  "  ^,  ,,  _  ,»  t(..,^.rt..  -  '»  neracfliut'.— 
mu8.  -  ■'*  conspicere.  -  :*  inr^'"ctus. -J«  ncit.-^ jUlc^  84,n  1.7.  in  fnvordf  .o.neho.ly, 
««occupjire. 


, .^ -  ,  ,  ,.  .    '■        sK.Js^        »  <lp««H-jln' —  10  Dative  of  the  ptTj^oual 

»'  iionnulli.—  ^"  by  addnctvs.—  »»  pudor. 


EXERCISES. 


^97 


•  •      ^r  f«nr       10  Why  have  you  changed^  your  opinion  ? 
avoid  the  suspicion  of  fear.—  10   w    y  nav    >  -      .,_^  ^^.  AVhy  do 

-  11.  But  wliy  do  I  try  to  teach  t   as   ck     F^'^  •    l.^  ^  ^.^^^  „^ 

you  think"  that  1>VV?1^  '^K  in    ^ca^^^^^^^^^^ 

faith"  in  your  manhood     and  in  m>  ca  c  ';.    >         •  •       ^9_  14^  There  was 

lv>re  di<l  you  tak.  -X> -^^^^  y^  ^     d  ^^^  war  on  ^  your 
,10  suflicient  and  good     ca  ise        -    J./J"  j     f,,,.g  ,,f  ti^e  Roman  people 

country,  why  you  should  jom  h.  «uU    ^^  V^^,  j:^^^3i  ,oyou.-  15.  Why  should 
^vhy  nothing. livine and  hiunanshode^^^^  ^}    »    commit^  thee  to 

I  not  immediately  ;^>-^^«^  /17;,  ^1  o      a^^^  same  arirument? 

„,i,„„._  10.  Why  hast  not  thou  also  ;V:)^\^.;^^^', /tossed  to"  have  been 
Evidently-  l>ecause  th(M-eby  thou  w<>^^^^^^^^^^^  ^.^^,^^„ 

privy-  to  the  P  ^'^^^'l^  ^^/'ifrZ.Vl   w   hout^^^ 

Tiierefore  I  shall  anlicipa  e"  xNhat  ^  ^^IJ.^^*;"^  Jj",,,^  ...^ak*»  your  plead- 

have  posti^oned-  till  ^  ^^'^^^'^l--^^: ^'^^ ^^^^^^ 

ings*»  are;  therefore  you  ought  to  ;\^^^ '^^^'^.'//Tinm  hast  misin  erpreted" 
strength  in  vain;  tiieretore  '^^^^;)^^^^  "  V^^r.Vto^H^^^^^^  the"  feelings  of 
me.  Because  {//v>;/.  the  ^If^.^^^^^.^^.^^^esth^  You  have  defeated 

this  witness.  1  did  ''''' .^^^^^TJ^^^^^  therefore  (on  that 

our  cavalry  in  one  unimpoitant  ,.,^:  \'  ^"^"i^^^i^iie,,  _„  00.  Hannibal  by 
account)  c<>"sick.r  your  victory  cm^^^^^^       i   c^e  cm^^^^^^  did  he  therefore 

no  means  despised  tlie  little*    band     ot  ^  »«  e   u  >_^  ^^^^  ^.^^^^,,,^ 

(cm  that  account)  become  careless  or  "J^'^,^/' ^,t  „.  „^^^^  ^.e  surrender" 
Ihat  y<ui  refused  to  overcome     i^  KT^tlTc..^^^^^^^^  ^  ^^^ 

of  (.0  keeping  the  torces- o   Ulecmem^a^^a^^^^ 

order»-^  with  a  {that)  view  to  mislead       ^  ^J^*;  ^\        ,  throu-h  the  whole 
s^,p,o*  v_  ;l  For  what  purpose  are  S^^^^'^h;;^^   '   ^".^^  ,,,oney  to 

eitvv-  4.  For  what  purpose  did  you  T^'l'  \  ;''^r  not  bvr'?-  o.  1  do 
Ihim  I  whom,  according  to  your  books^^  3'^»"  ^^^VeJ^K^se^  ti^  ^;^^        1  men- 
t  kn<nv  to  what  purpose  j^ni  1»=^^'*^^  "j^'','  '^"  t^,,,^^^'^^^^  not  be 

tioned  [them]  in  order  [jov  the   purpo^^^^l  _  ^^  ^^, 

euM.Ui'O-e)  to  ->;-r;:^  ^^:^^^P^^\^^;  Sd  be  a  prot^ 

f(.r  that  purp()seare  the  l.nv:,g\t         ^  ^'^^  ^  ;  >        j,,,^.  ^',,,  the  innocent- 

J. „., .    ,.  ....,     23  f,Mn,>ro  —'*  discedere  dc  officio. 

20  Disrcdere  de  ^ententiil.-^  trimcyis.-^-  Jli!);;'^^^^- "  \\,  ,- .^  „r  interest:^,  ddigeptia. 
_  26  to  have  xiu  f-^uh  m  de^n<-nirede.- ■  U  ;,  .lirere  -  ^»  join  hands,  arma  joctare.- 
.1  invioiauis.-  3-^  c..mpreheM.^ere.-  33  in    n  cu  .  umj  ce^^^^^^  ^y^^_^^^  ^^,,^^        ^^     e 


PRESENT  TENSE. 


21i9 


298 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


tect"   not  that  Ihov  should  oppress  the  ri-hts  of  the  citizens—  8.  Not 

hose  onlv  shouhlbe  punished  who  -ive'^  but  also  those  who  accept 

nev  f  >r  votes"  {syffragitnn).-  9.  The  proconsu    ordered-    from  the 

was  iroiu'--  to  make  thioui^h  the  province.— 10.   I  he  tmNi^  J'/vf-V    •        n« 
nmco.  .  il  with  M  two-horse  team  for  some  tavors^^  which  they  (.//.  wished' 
rih/mld  iianl"  Hiem.-  11.  Catiline  is  marking-  every  one  ot  you  for 
murder"  ! 


,.    T^  r      1  72  r^i,,,  ni.fl  nfr/^tif  niu^t  l)e  in  th«M>«'rf*-'Ct  tense.— '^  Arrange:  who 

r  vo^e^mone^livve^   v^M       utTo  wi;.,  hn^e  aecepicd  should  be  pu.nshed.- '*  vn- 
'"-anZlS^^i^'^-^^l^ciilinisinj.).--^^  veUe  with  inliu.  clu,.«e.-  "  pra^stirc- 


for 

per.,. 

'«»  noifirc—  '»  ciedes 


ClIAPTEU   SECOXD. 
USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 

tW-  The  rules  on  th.c  tenses  arc  applicable  to  the  tenses  of  tjic  subjunctive  only  so 
far^they  are  uot  modified  by  tlie  special  rule,  on  the  tcn.e.  ol  this  luood  (Ch.  111.). 

I.  PRESENT   TENSE. 

^  '«^r  The  PRESENT  TENSE  IS  uscd  1)  whcH  the  time  of  the  predicate, 
i  e  the  time  spoken  of,  is  represented  as  that  of  the  speaker,  as  IIos  ego 
video,  These  men  I  see,  Cic.  Cat.  1,  14;  2)  when  the  predicate  is  repre- 
sented  as  belonging  to  all  times,  as  Satumi  stella  cur.um  tnguiia  aiims 
peragit  Saturn  completes  its  course  in  30  years,  Plin.  II.  N.  2,  6  ;  3)  if  the 
predicate  is  represented  as  belonging  to  no  pauticulak  time,  as  Pernoc 
tant  xenaiores  in  nive,  in  montibas  uri  se  paiiuntur.  Hunters  spend  then- 
nights  in  the  snow,  and  suffer  themselves  to  be  burned  in  the  mountains, 

Cic.  Tusc.  2  17. 

-Or«  1  If  the  nresent  tcn««o  is  used  in  the  significations  mentioned  above,  it  may  l>e 
sahl  to  have  Us  mvn  and  proper  mcanin.',  the  action  in  all  these  instances  belon-.n^ 
Shereirelv  or  partly  t\)th(;sPEAKEKN  time.  It  thus  forms  a  contrast  to  a  1  the..tl  er 
t .  es^hi  corAunm  reunire  of  which  is  ,hat  they  desi.Mmie  times  not  tho.e  "  ^  !«  f P''»^^^^^^^ 
Tnereare  instance^  however,  in  which  the  presen  tense  has  lost  this  distinguibhmj, 
mark,  having  assumed  the  force  of  a  preterite.  See  K.  4o. 

Obs  2  The  Latin  lancrua^-e  has  only  one  form  for  all  the  different  meanings  connected 
wi?h  tlK^-K  -LNT   rS^^  the  i-KETEKiTE  is  expressed  t>y  thuee.  and  the  futluk 

bv  \v  0  tVreS  f(.rms.  'Thefact  that  it  is  often  desirable  to  d.stiniruish  »'«  P'-csent 
hue  Vn  ^s  m  lar  w'ly  as  the  preterite  and  future,  is  the  cause  that  in  i-t'^'l'^h  to  the 
P  KSENT^E  '^^^  some  functions  are  assigned  which  properly  be  ong  o  the  pr.^nt 
ten-e  In  Latin  thert^  is  only  a  faint  trace  of  such  a  usage.  See  U  42,  obs.  1  But  in 
another  seu-e  he  Latin  lan-uage  makes  use  of  the  perfect  in  place  of  a  present  it  two 
pSic'ites,  both  beYlnu'in,'  to  a  time  present  to  the  ^i-^-K^^-a^^^  cmm^ed  with  each 
other  that  their  times  in  uelation  to  each  other  are  different,  bee  K.  4-1 

Obs  3  It  in  ikes  no  difference  in  Latin  whether  the  predicate  which,  according  to 
8  v.7m.<t  be  in  the  i.re-eut  tense,  expresses  a  coutinu.-d  or  a  .n..m.-ntary  action  ;  m 
Lh  in'^itceslhe  Latin  hiSiaue  uses  .ilily  onc^y-tn.  igm 

Kn<Wi«h  i)ro"i-e-=sive  and  common  forms,  as:  Ao/a/ et  desi'incU  o^znU^  ad  ctaein    nium 
que'miiK^.  v^^^^^^^  is  MAUKiNo and  siNULiNa  out  with  his  looks  every  one  of  you  lor 

murder.  Cic.  Cat.  1,  1, 2.  i  i\ 

Rem.  41.  The  time  of  the  speaker  is  conceived  in  a  double  way:  1)  as 
THE  MOMENT  OF  HIS  SPEAKING,  as  lloc  uuiic  pHmum  audio,  I  hear  this  now 
(in  this'moment)  for  the  tirst  time,  Ter.  Andr.  5,4,  33;  2)  as  the  period 


[» 


OF  TIME  (or  one  of  its  regular  divisions)  within  which  the  speaker  is  liv- 

mg,  as  /,^»/iijci«n/w  m.(i(mtrum  aerunt.  nt  sunt,  sic  etiamnomi- 

Apud  i^^^-^f^iy^JlXl^cedS  S^^^^^  ^^^''  magistracy  .s  they 

nantursnie.<,  with  trie  ^''*^*^'^>-'^'V"  "',''■.,,,,  this  word  Cic  Sen.  «,  20.—  At  senatui  jme- 
are  -old',  are  calltd  hy  a  "■•'"^';2       >'"-y,^';/',;' s^^^^^  be  d.me  and  hew 

srrVM?  Q>H^  T^ff'T'^'^-'^^-^r  1  u  s  not  do  1  liJ  ii?  Vl  e  moment  of  his  speak- 
it  nmst  be  done  lb.  b,  18  [  It  e  ^  »;;'^' «^.Z ''/ "/^^  -^f^  V  ,  which  he  makes  the  assertion.] 
iuir.  but  at  stated    i^ues  within  'j    ^'^''»^^1,"^^^^^  "the  Ibod  of  the  Germans  consists 

_  G^rmanorum  rtctus^^n  arfe^J^ron^  f  ^if  n'h  s'wa^  ue  be/are  the  time  of  the  as- 
in  milk    meat,  and  ehee>e.  t.je-.  d.  i».  i,n,  i^.  l\"'-      «*  ./ 

yertion.^ind  «/^./'it,  a.id  refers  to  C^.ar*^  . 

lii'm  4'^  If  an  actiou  is  represented  as  having  lasted  during  ^  peiiod  of 
•v  c.Ttai.rU'n  M     (K   10,  obs.  2  ;  R.  U),  and  as  still  continuing  at  the  tin  e 
fMiV    in  -kT.    lie  Latin  lan<nia-e  places  the  predicate  expressing  the 
^Ict    n  i      l\e  PR  -EN    TEk     w^       the  English  language  makes  use  of  the 
Pu^  nVpA^^^^^  designated  by  definite  orin- 

d  l^'.i  t^ex n^^^^^^^^^         c   which  often  ja/y^  is  added,  denoting  m  this  con- 
c  Ion  [lir;m'ti;n;ance  of  the  action  np  to  Jl-  njotnent^  of  sp^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

Tbo  fnvoo  of  this  adverb  jam  is  contained  in  the  English  present  P^"j.ci. 
llieioiccoi  uiis.  auvt.ii-»7  *' «^   _  ,^^.■,^  .y  t.^i^]  ^,.fi  hnigf)ee?i.  encased  the  i.A$r 

In  hoc  judicio  JamfAernuumt^^arm^^^^^^^  ^^„os 

two  y.ars  (not  duo,  "''/"'^^«Z^v•  A^i«  ^n  existence  already /or  more  than  700  years.  lb. 
awplvi.'<  riront;  The  Laced.  A«^^,  *',tl  /  t  Sr£'/f  so /id4  for  these  many  y6ars  that 
Fiacc.  •iO.-Ego  tot  anuos  ita  7,  "^.  "^^^ '^-.^^^^^^^^  tracto  constantiam  ; 

discrlmen^  vcnerPis   L    .  ^,  38.-  2.  {*fj;'\ '^'^'j^^X^        hie  asto^  et  pidto^.  Plant.  Stich. 

num  Italiam  f>fj^idel^.  lb.  28,  41.-  •''■J\'^\)^  y;;""  ",\eendium.  Just.  4,  1.-  5.  Quomodo  tu 

2,  1,  MS.-  4.  .Etme  mon  is  per  ^f /r^f'inrS  iaSe«     af^ris  ^  Cic.  Rose.  Com.  3.  8.- 
hoc  nomen«  an.piins  tramiiuun  in  adv.  r  an^^^^^  ^.^^  ^^.^^ 


jam  cliein  path..   .^  ^ 

ignuro  quid  agas.  Cic.  tarn.  <.  y.  conetrnctlon,  1)  if  the  predicate  is  an 

OBS.  1.  The  perfect  is  used  in  ^^'^.  ^/"^.  ^\,^.^"f^c^^^^^^^  iconticui,  of  conti- 

iNCKPTivK,  ^^•^V-^  P^-'-^^^S^^^^S''^  "Sn^  Ja^^^  tu*  liitene;  Your 

c^scere.  I  hare  b^crmif  silent  =  In  ^  !^»^^;.  „7  f /q  _  g)  if  the  actiou  is  represented  as 
pen  has  bien  silent  lor  a  ong  t  ime.  ^r^^vJJ '"!;';'  k,,\  a^  having  cea^d  at  that  time :  Sero 
having  continued  up  to  the  tune  of  tlieM!^^^^^^^^  ,^^^  ^^  ,^,i,t   liim 

reM>timus  ei  quem  per  annos  decern  «^V'''t  f,«S^  ;   h,.  1  i-t  ten  vears  (but  no  longer  at 

(V.ar)  whom  we  '""'^  ^^^'^f^^^^ J?  "5«;"^'1\^,  ic    •  lades  qn  e 'in  nol  per  quatuorde- 

the  moment  of  rPf^^^i;:  -^^^/^J-i^/ Vhe  disL^^^^^^  »P«"  "^^  '^«^  ^«"'"^^" 

cim  annos  tnoruennd  vertantur.  '\\, '"\^"'?"*YV     .^^  ^^ 

years,  be  turned  in  that  direction  (thither),  f^  '.  r;,; t*'  ^«nt  an  action  as  happening  at 
^  OBS.  2.  To  that  class  of  Prcsent  predicates  xNh^^^^^^^^  ^.^^n  §  567  ; 

ALL  times  (§  507,  -2).  belong  1.  ^<\'; '  ^^ '^f.  >  on^^^^^^^^^^^^         represented  to  be  true  lor  al 

"S^^^l^^^^mk  ^i-  i^never  expedient,  ^.c  Oft  3  1^ 


peccilre 
1.  Viri  illi  perpetul  adiniratinne 


leculnrum  celebrant ur.  Quint.  It,  1 


1.  Viri  nil  perperua  ;''VJ'''^"':'';",,:;r:;V;n7"'sen'3  13.- 3.  Dolus'mahisis  in  gimula- 
omne.;x>;^>'m^  es.e  pcipimie^^  ,,.,,     - 

tione  contvittar^^.  Cic.  on. -i,  i«j-     -*•  >  ^^  °  i^ — -,,—-—--—- 


13.— 2.  Non 
in  sim 
nisi  fulta'^^  sit, 

iul   --  »•  the  edi.-  ''  Maxim.ises.  i.  e.  such  ?^^l' ^Zt^cltion^^^^^  to  our  Common 

n/ulclre,  to  prop. 


300 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


ad  tcrmm /erf  >tr.—  5.  Facillus  in  morhos  Inridunt  adolo«ccntps  (quam  scnes),  grayius» 
ccgrdtanfi,  tristius^  C'lrantur ;  itaquo  pauci  veniantaA  s»eMectati'ai.  Cic.  Sea.  19,  ti7. 
Ob~.  3.  Artioi.s  which  are  rcpn-scMte  1  a?»  hHoniriiiiXto  no  pauticular  timk,  are  placed 
in  tlie  iMiKSKNT  when  tHe  speaker  proposes  them  by  way  of  siti'1'osith>n.  Such  senten- 
ces usually  have  the  Ibrm  ot  general  conditituiil  or  relative  clauses  (»/'a//y  o^f^.Z/ws^  ^f;//o), 
as  •  Si  ei  (j>d  ah  hoste  ofMdentar,  aqiite  sextariiiin  minjl  einere  coguntur,  hoc  prinio  audita 
incredihile  nobis  vidUxr,  if  those  \\\\o  are  besieged  »)y  the  enemy,  are  com  .elled  to  buy 
a  sextarlns  of  water  for  a  mina,  this  w«7/i>',  when  we  hear  it  tirsi,  incredil)le  to  us».  tie. 
Off.  i  1«J,  5<;  — Sicut  illi  qui  iHinyranf,  qwmn  snbito  mare  coepit  horrescere.  unliis  opem 
imfdom/d,  sic  iiost'-r  populus  mau'istratibiis  in  l).llo;>^//v^  ur  re-i.  As  the;/  w/Maresm'tng, 
when  siiddeiiiy  the  sea  i)e<^in8  to  be  in  an  uproar,  imjUore  the  help  ot  One,  bo  our  people 
(^.ys  its  ma;,'istrate3  as  (it  would)  a  kin<,'.  Cic.  Kep.  1,  40. 

liem.  48.  If  two  predicates,  both  beloii^nni;  to  a  time  conocivea  a*?  pres- 
ent to  the  spe,\kp:u,  are  so  connected  that  their  several  times  are  different 
as  to  EACH  OTHER,  the  Latin  lanirnaire  places  that  predicate  which  desig- 
nates the  earlier  action  in  the  perfect  tense,  while  the  English  laugnage, 
generally,  in  this  instance  uses  the  present,  as : 

Si  aut  privatus  aut  populus  Driiidum  decreto  non  ittefit,  sacriflciis  interdu^unf.  if  either 
a  private  person  or  the  people  dO'^--!  mt  of>  y  (literally  '  ha-<  not  obeyed)  the  decree  of  tl»e 
Druids,  they  exclude  them  from  the  sacritlces  (excommunicate  them).  Cajs.  B.  G.  6,  v>3. 
1.  Galli  pro  vietimis*  homines  imnndant*,  inprlmis  eos  qui  in  aliciua  noxiil"  sinit  com- 
prchiusi^.  Sed  cum  ejus  jji-neris  (homiiiiim)  c«)|)ia  deflcif*,  etiam  ad  innocentium  sup- 
plicia»  de<cendiiiit^^\  Cx^.  H.  (i.  H.  lb.-- 2.  Galli5rum  matjistrStus  qu;o  vim  sunt^^  occ'd- 


taiin"',  quieque  e«se  ex  usu  )>idica>\run(  multitudi.d  /troduiU  »^.  lb.  ♦;.  20.—  3.  Apud 
Germtluos,  ubi  quis  ex  principibus  se  diiif  ducem  fore,  musurgitiit^*  ei  c^ui  et  causara 
et  houiinem  proftaat^'^  lb.  «,  «.—  4.  Alces'-«  enrn  se  arboribus,  a  venatonbus  per  radi- 
ces subnitis'"  quietis  c:ui-il  redinac^runl^'^,  inflrmas  arbores  pondere  a^ffTifjunt^*  atqiie 
unsl  ipsie  conridiinn^.  lb.  «,  27.—  5.  Si  ad  luxuriam  ctuim  libidinum  intemperantia  ac- 
ce>sit,  diipl.'x  milum  €>>(.  Cif^.  Off.  1,  34.— G.  liuocunque  ad<i}exlsti,  ut  funie,  sic  tua; 
tibi  0CCM/7V////  injuria'.  Cic.  Par.  2. 

Obs.  The  perfect  verbs  me.miid^se.yOili^se.diwd  novif^e  (§  312)  nre  used  with  the  force  of 
PUKSKNTS  in  all  siu'iiitications  of  this  tense.  With  tht^  same  force  are  employed  all  verbs 
that  in  the  presei7t  denote  an  incipient  state  (especially  ttie  inceptives),  the  perlects  of 
which,  desiijnaiini,'  the  state  of '  incipiency' as  a  past  one,  express  the  state  itself  as 
viiKSKNi'.  ilere  beloui^  the  verbs  assuH^icrre  nud  co/irt'ie>icere,  to  become  accustomed  (in 
the  perfect  msuevi!ite,lo  be  in^cu^tamed) ;  cognoscere,  to  ascertain  (in  the  perfect  co{//io- 
vi.<-!e,  to  know) ;  ad<ilrseere,  to  i,'row  up  (in  the  perfect  adoievi-ifie,  to  be  adult,  the  same  as 
nubereinesse) ;  adainnre,  to  l)ecome  fond  (in  ttie  perlect  adaniasse,  to  love):  of/tin^re,  to 
acquire  (in  tiie  perf.-ct  obtiU'iU^e,  to  have  acciuired,  i.  e.  to  knee,  to  hold).  All  such  per- 
fects are  used  in  two  siLjniilcations.  in  that,  of  a  />erfec\  denotin.,'  the  action  with  the  or- 
dinary preterite  force,  and  m  that  of  ii  present,  denotini;  the  state  whicli  has  i,m-owu  out 
of  the  action  as  a  present  one.  They  are.  in  this  respect,  anuloijous  to  those  passives 
whicli  in  ti»e  perfect  (piiriphrastic  puriiciple,  §  5')ii)  denote  a  present  state, 

1.  Druiiles  a  hello  abesse  coum?,rurU.,  nequc  tribflia  unS  cum  relicjuis  p.-ndnnt^i.  C;es. 


Ilem.  44.  Verbs  of  saying  (the  same  as  in  English)  are  frequently  placed 
in  the  present,  if  the  act  of  saying  is  past  as  to  the  time  of  the  speaker. 
This  is  the  case  1)  if  the  speaker  qnotea  or  mentiom  the  words  of  another 

1  morcdan<^erously.—  >  to  fall  sick.—  '  one  of  the  constructions  noticed  §  552,  obs.  1.  : 
the  result  of  Their  cure  is  oftener  fatal.—  *  Instead  *)f  the  ordinary  victims  (i,  e.  animals). 
--*to  sacrifice.—  *  offence.—  '  to  catch,  to  arrest.—  »  m;«a  deficit,  there  is  a  deticiency 
in.—  »  tormentin"-.—  i»  to  proceed.  -  »*  rideri  (supply  bona),  to  seem  proper  (to  them). 
—  »-  to  com-esil.—  13  to  impart.—  '*  to  arise.—  »»  to  approve.—  »«  elks.—  i'  cut  hy  the 
roots.—  »«  t(»  lean  on.—  i"  to  break,  to  upset.— 20  ,0  full  to  the  t:rouna.--2i  to  pav.—  ^-  \t 
is  grovviu"  dark.—  ^a  mos  is  used  here  prejjnantly  ;  mi  liberi  beini:  technically  called 
the  childnni  In  patonuil  power.—  »*  except.—  *-'*  to  surpass.—  '^«  In  translating,  the  ante- 
cedent in  eix  (with  lindibus  understood)  must  be  placed  before  guarum.—  ^^  to  give 
one's  principal  attention  to. 


PRESENT  TENSE. 


301 


^    ' 


in  order  to  answer  them,  or  to  comment  on  them ;  2)  if  passsages  from 
authors  are  quoted. 

Obs  1  If  the  speaker  mention?  the  words  of  another,  in  order  to  accompany  them  with 
his  own  re  n'rks^t^e  verbs  of  sayin:^  by  which  the  remarks  of  the  othe.-^are  mn;<>;  "^ed 
mix  n  .  1  ace.  in  th('  pre<ent  or  in  t^e  perfect,  and  it  makes  here  no  d.fterence  wh.;ther 
h^iuf  the  lit  -ranee  of  such  re n  arks  is  recent  or  not,  as  :  Negaf  Fabms  a<iitum 
es  e  clas^ibu  nol  r^  iT^.Vl^canl  ;  H.y^^  ullos  portus  pat6re:  M.  Atdiu.n  captu.n  m 
Al-Hcl  rv  //l//J//iom<  •  Fabius  ,s«yy  tluitoia-  fleets  have  no  access  to  Africa  ;  he  denifs  that 
a.  V  porra  ^Xen  ;'  h^m^diom  that  M.  Atilius  was  made  a  prisoner  in  Afr.ca.  Liv  '-^, 
ii^  'ipreS^diS  answers  a  speech  just  made  by  Fabius.  In  the  same  answer  he  places 
tt-  v"rbs  of  i  "■  refer.-  n^Mo  hii  predecessor^  re.narks,  promiscuously  in  the  present 
o^  pera-S     Fa     i^^p  in.ipio  <.ratiOtiis  commeniomrit,  in  sentent.a  sua  P^^^^«  «^J/t'-ecm^^^^ 

ne.'i  sus'pectam  essc^,  Fabius,  ni  the  beginning  of  »'i%^P«r^-»^,JX'pha^.tis^ 

ments  might  create  the  suspicion  of  dispara^'ement.  Liv.  2S.  43.-I  haI6  e  i^^^ 

Pi  r  He  n  rifumrat  qui  tantam  pecutdam  in  Propyhea  conjecerit,  Demetrius  V\m\erL\\* 

ceTmre^ \IJ^^^^  for  having  sunk  so  much  m.mey  in  the  P;;9Py>«a.  C  c  Off 

2    7    In  th  s  n  is-a  re  Cicero  uses  a  present  ten<e  i  r.  respect  to  remarks  which  were  uttered 

moie       I.   •M)(\    earf  be^^  represents  these  words  as  pkksest  to  him,  because  he 

"s-nMnc/to  refute  Ih^  of  iemetrius,  as  if  Demetrius  were  himself  present. 

Obs  2  If  passa-es  from  authors  are  quoted,  not  only  the  verbs  of  saying,  but  also  the 
verbs  denotilli  the  doings  of  persons  i.Ttroduced  hy  the  author  are  placed  in  the  present 
toiK..     For  ttie  use  of  the  iMPKUFKCT  111  quotations,  see  item.  <u.  ,    u..„!! 

*^"7>fn;/a,md  Xeno^  negat  se  unquam  sensiss.  senectfliem  suam  imbecil- 

lirn.m  Sctun   Cic  Sen  '>  30  -  2.  I  )ivTne  Plato  escam'  ma'orum-^  appeVaf  voluptatem. 
b    r^il  -  3  Ea  qu^  "itenda  acceperis,  tnajOre  me.isa.ay.ft.^  r.<ldere  "esuHus.  Cic 

i\«- Vr   w       A  <M,rVainniis  ffi-twtfa'*  uMhera^  ess'Jovem.  Cic.  >f.  D.  1,  15.—  0.  fccce  tini 

lluic  subvenlre  debCmus,  qxitrit  eniin  auxiluim.  tie.  1  use.  i.  l-K  «. 
Re„i.  4.-).  Frequently  the  present  tense  is  used  with  the  force  of  a  per- 
fect in  stating  the  facts  of  a  narrative.     This  present  is  called    the 

HISTORICAL  present'.  .     ^     •  ^^ 

CpsirMinuciumcum  omni  equitatu  prcewfU  :  mw't  ut  ignl-i  in  cistns  fieri  prohi- 
>TS   n*?^n^  1    his  adv -ntus  procul  sir/itic.tio  tiat ;  ses- confestim  sub-equirfia/  Mmu- 
•     \     .Tn  rVr  ,nf..st  Iv  4^  Minucius  in  advance  witli  all  the  cavalry  :  he 

^;;;/Vo  ,  '/1^^  o  for  d  the  ifse  ;.  Xe  in  the  camp,  lest  any  intimation  of  his,arnval 
mfXbe  ';UV.Cn  -^llstance;  he  .ai(/ he  would  fodow  immediately.  Minucms  did 
asdii-ected.  Ctes.  B.  G.  G,  29. 

Op-   1   The  use  of  the  historical  present  is  not  Confined  to  'animated  and  picturesque 
nan-LTiv:--   as      r^  aL  S  but  is  solely  employel  lor  th- sake  ot  varying    t^e 

n;rm    I  tlu M) re  lic~ate"  to  avoid  m..notony.     In  the  most  conimouplace  passages  we  Ire- 
nnen.lv  tSn<lTsto,'cal  presents,  and  as  frequently  the  most  animated  narratives  ot  bat- 
tles, etc  ,  are  related  in  perlects.  ^    *     «^  c  r?.; 
obs  2    For  the  use  of  the  historical  present  with  the  force  of  an  imperfect,  ?ee  §  575. 
nu«"  q    Subinnctive  clauses  dependent  on  historical  presents,  if  subject  to  the  law  of 
Ons.  ?,    ^''''■P^Vw:r.liv'fX.th<)se  tenses  which  an  ordinary  Dresent  would  require,  as: 
pT!rT^'M!  n   ;n"s  Li  i^^   1  ^co  -e  io  One^^^                 Cott^eqne  et  Titurii  calami.tAtem,  qui  in 

t"i"ir  |,i'.'«Tvation  (lllerally  '  that  tliey  wure  preserved ■).    Cies.  B.  Q.  X,  ». 


'_  7'a  passag;  of  the   second   part.— 


f^[4.  T^'-^  Pr^'riche.'-".»  iSp^-  .■  being  lu  noSd  of.  The  ve.e  1.  s,K>ken 
by  Andromeda. 


302 


USE   OF   THE   TENSES. 


II.  PEHFECT   TENSE. 
^  56§    The  TEiiFKCT  TENSE  is  the  general  form  for  predicates  express- 
in'  ac^!:.  'hich  have  happened  before  the  time  of  the  speaker,  except 

if  "special  rules  require  an  ^^^^-^-^^\Z^^^r..,o.a  to  the  English 
Obs.  1.  The  Latin  iniprrfoct  and  p.-rfc-c t.  /; »;  .  .  !^-^''f  ^^  Kern.  42).  «)  ihal  either  of 
prVt^-rit  and  pres.ntpt  rf.ct  i^^^^^^^^^^Z  tic  one  or  \L  oUu-r  o/  the  tenses  in  the 
kr^;;ii:a^.J"  Z^^'S^IS::^^^^^^^^  t..  Latin  tens,  is  d.«Vreut  irota 
tliat  belvveen  the  Engb^h  ten^^es^.  r  ,u„  t  «tin  norfert  and  imperfect  refer  only 

OBS.  2.  The  rules  .iven  l-^l<!V;;;/"„^Jl\7t  .'r^';?/,  i"it^  m  to  each  oth.u. 

to  their  u.e  in  the  inimchTIVK  °^"  i\v ?"t  ti   ^es  o^  the  subjunctive,  in  the  intinilive, 

Whenever  tlieconstructmnreiiuii^p.i^t_ttn.tsiooei  j  tense*»  cease.-*  to 

paAiciple,or  in  the  Pln»'^''''''"'' ^'^^l^tV-  i  e  am  iV'-d  withou    a^^  to  the  differ- 

Sxist,  L  t'hat  the  verhal  tonus  >V^'l\!;  »^,^ /  [^j^  iv        Both  sentences  '  Pericles  ce.cris 
cnce  between  imper  ect  and  perfect ' .'  \^^  ?^»  ^^^,*^   ;, ,;  ;,,,,fUit '  must  have  a  ly^rfectm- 

s;^^r^:i::^"^nde;!t,!n^^s^|^ 

^"V^ri^;cat:r^.  represent  an  action  as  completeo  (perfect) 
atlp!^\i!.:::-n.ed  l>y  the  Ipeake.  are  placed  j^^--;;- ^^ 
teritiun  verfecium),  while  predicates  designated  as  not  complefld  at  sucli 

Z:iL  and  end)  are  placed  in  the  impekkect  C^-^-;;;"- ^l^^l^^^t^ 
Eo  quun.  veni,  praetor  guiescel,at ;  when  I  c....  there  (^^^^^^^^^^  ^^.  ^^^^ 
time  spoken  of),  the  pr.«tor  was  uestino  (not  co.npleted  at  the  ttmc 
spoken  of).  Cic.  Verr  2  4    14  ^^^^^^^  their  con.oqucncc.  and 

Obs.  TI»c  Esom^»  V^'^'^;.Hn  Ht  th.-  tTme  of  the  speaker;  2)  when  actions  past  m 
results  are  repr^-^^'i'|e'l  ««  bis  n^  a  t  -  "n-  o  ^  i.ap'pe.u-d  durin-  a  period  conceived 
the  moment  of  speakm-  "'.'^ '^'I't^w-VtHi  time  can  »)e  assi-ned  to  pa>t  actions.  1  he 
a.,  present  to  the  speaker;  3)  ^'^^^^^^  ,^,^\1^\" ve^i^termined  by  the  completeness  or  in- 
choice  of  the  two  p  ist  tenses  '.'it  ^  'n  /cti  n  i'  e  tier  disregarded,  or  expres.sed  by  tlie 
completeness  oi  the  action.  "»''^v»^;/';  V.  ^i'/'^But  „  Juin  the  use  of  the  tknsk  depends 
poH.i  a>ro-re^Mve  "'•  ^;<'"^"\';"  /,f.  *\Ve  KTKt>  or  nV^  compi-ktei^.  wliile  the  English  dis- 
l^^^llonsSiei;  ;t:*;wo^:^;sem;J.:c;a;.y  d.sre.arded  in  Latin. 

;  r,rO.  Tlte  Lalin  perfect  covers  almost  the  whole  gnntnd  o   Ih    Eng- 
lish lu..  ut-perfect,  and  a  great  part  of  that  of  the  English  preteut  (past 

'"us^ost  Latin  g.ammarians  ^JivideUieLatiit  perfect  ^ 

perfect,  and  an  'iistoiucal  perlee        1  Ins  c    J,  ^^/^^^^^  ,„^,,t  generally 

^ua-e,  has  no  '"''''[l^^'"'}-  .  '?  '  ^  ^^ect  but  ^isis  owini,Mo  very  diflerenl  reasons, 
(not  always)  be  renderc^d  '>y    '^.^a   "  iKr"^^^^^  has  a  relation  to  the  pkesent 

Ihe  Latin  perlect  beins  ''«,^.^^''"V'^J  ,^'\^,i  "^  ucl ion  perfect  and  com- 

t.me,  b..t  because  the  P"-';,^!'^^^:;  '^.^""^*:^'^.!  "c  in  Lat^^  a  past  tense  cannot  be  u.ed 
plele  at  a  past  time  (See  Iteui  f  ^^.^^)..^^";^  e  speak,  r's  time  (11..  A:t).  That  the 
at  all  if  theacti(misrei.resentedassti     la^n^^^^^^^^^  il  evident  from  the  fact  that  per- 

lYi>^cian.  8,  s,  39. 


PERFECT  TENSE. 


303 


dependent  on  historical  perfects  (for exceptions  Pce p.  427 foil.):  ^Jf«^i  vobis  omnia  qiiJB 
^/Sa/  have  imparted  to  vou  ail  /  know  (these  being  the  clo>in-  words  ol  a  speech, 
ecu.-: ;  4.-nanc^nna.n,  Cesar,  habeo  inj.niaui  tuam:  femU  x^lviverem^l  rmrer.r 
n-raius  thou  ha.-t  etleeted  that  I  live  and  d.e  an  ungrateful  man.  ^7':  ^«"- ^- ^,-  ^|? 
1 1^  mi  Vt  ea  itled  that  Iheaucient  L^.tin  -ran.marians,  while  lully  ex-plaining  thecharac- 
ef\.l  the  d\ir  rent  tenses,  know  nothin.^o^  these  two  natures  of  the  per  ect,  which  it 
is  safe  to  say  they  would  have  mentioned  if  they  Xvsnijtlt  any  such  dl^lluctlou. 

Ilem  4«.  If  tlie  predicate  denotes  an  action  the  results  or  consequences 
of  wliich  are  still  existing  at  the  speaker's  time  (§  509  Obs.)  it  is  placed 
in  the  peufect  both  in  English  and  in  Latin;  but  in  English  on  account 
of  the  relation  of  the  action  to  the  present  time,  and  in  Latin  because 
past  actions  with  results  present  to  the  speaker  must  always  be  con- 
ceived as  completed  in  regard  to  the  action  as  such. 

1.  Etsi  mihi  nulllus  noxhe^  conscius^  sum,  tamen  cum  siimmo  P';'dOre3  in  cont^O- 
nem*  vestram  procesn  {I have  come,  and  am  there  now).  Liv.  3,  bi.-  2.  1  oia  i^  "^  rc^-puD- 
lica  atq.ie  est  mi^erior  quam  reliquisti.  Cic.  Att.  2,  21,  1  -  3  Hoc  consi   o  ' »'  Koscumi 

vobis  jigulandum'^  tradiderunt  {they  have  delivered,  «''^.''«f ''?,?;.f .f^ir^^b 'f  o^ 
Ko^c     \m.  10,  29.—  4.  Omnium  harum  rerum  judicium  ipsa  natu  a  in  ^^'i"^"*  „P,:,.,n, 
^oM^^ias  jUaced,  and  it  is  ther.  now).  lb.  Or.  51,  174.-  5..  Sulpicii  n'<;>^^  ;:."1«|'  "^^ 
pnesidium  «miiz/u/^.  Ib.Fam.  12,5.-0.  FecGruntidem  quod  'u  tioslr|republicasolcnt 
ei  qui  per  laigitiOnem^'magistraius  adept.i  sunt  (i.  e.  tenent).  ID.  \  en.  ^,  ^,  oo. 

Obs.  1.  Here  belong  those  verbs  which  in  the  perfect  are  '•ender^d.JXf^^^rb's^^ 
E!lgli^h  verbs  denoting  the  results  of  the  actions  expressed  by  the  ^^at m  % erbs  iiu^iua 
i,..'  the  perfect  verbs  Iniemini,  odi,  novi),  and  many  inceptives  as  co«*"ea,  1  ^av*i  be- 
coTne  acai.to.ned.  or  I  a.u  accustomed  (of  consuescere) ;  ^'f«''«',|.,hf;';;,^^^£f,^;V)  as  • 
am  drv  (of  exarescere);  conticui,  I  have  become  silent,  or  I  am  ^' .«''/. ,^'^^^'if'-;/tfnr'ti^ 
KxiMjlos  v.teris  vbertdtisexandf,  the  t^ower  of  my  /.«J^^^''  ^^^^' '».{;., ^,^'"^^^^ 
Withered.  Cic.  Brut.  4,  Ui.-Jampridem  conticuemnt  turn  ltttcr(B,  thy  letteis  have  Decome 
mule  (are  mute,  it.  42)  long  since.  lb.  5,  19.  ,  .      , 

Obs  2  The  perfect  peril  (I  have  perished,  I  am  dead)  frequently  is  used  in  the  mean- 
in^fu'a  PI  F-^ENT  state,  mostly  occurring  i  i  exclamatory  sentences,  and  is  rendered  'I 
a.n  lost  "am  ch.new  11  "similarly  vicr(Vicimu.)  is  used  to  denote  a  present  or  future 
So^able  is".e  of  a  pending  dispute  or  ditiiculty,  being  variously  rendered  according  to 

its  connection.  ,  .,  .^,n      t»i     *. 

1    Pa   Salvasum.     /;L  At  ego  ;>mt,  qtioi^  medulIamMassittIdo9  iierbibitio.    Plant 

Sti.'h  •>■  TlVi  -  '  Si  senseritiCyj'm.'  Ter.  And.-.  1,3,8.-3.  Bruto  si  esse  "V]"^'f  ^"S 
hl-eb.V,^Vfe!;;..  (o.r  .s.cL.  U  Jtain).  Cic^  Att.  14,  f  \f-- ^; ^-7  sig.uim-  ost^md^ 
emptuin»3  esse  :  ricisti  (/  shall  allow  you  the  victory).  lb.  \  err.  2,  1,  23.-  5.  bi  cunaem 
aninium  habueiitis,  vicimus,  milites!  Liv.  21,  42. 

Obs  3  Since  the  perfect  denotes  the  completion  of  an  action  at  a  former  time  verbs 
de^ilofi-ng  ."^r'.xTii  an^d  sonietimes  other.ve.bi  are  of.e.i  p.egnant  y  u:;<^^";^h;?^PfjfSich 
designate  tlie  state  as  no  h.ng.-r  existing  at  the  speak-r  .  t  me.  ^"^J.,  f/jit^-^'rctS 
havc^the  force  of  a  ptescnl  with  a  negation,  are  rendered  ^r'''''*-^^  ^,^^^' «X*^  ^ 
with  *once'  or  by  Eu-lish  presents  with  'no  more,"  no  longer;  as.  Ego  '^iii'""'" 
s  m  SiU  qu  -m  m  nunc  habes,  /  once  had  that  spirit^.whicb  you  ''^jj%%^'^^f%%^ 
V,dmufl^voAf>nt  ilium.  We  are  no  /o/^ye/•Troja..s,  Ilium  is  no  "'^  ^:  .VrSofrfam  pr^: 
-Often  crwndam  is  expressly  added  to  perfect,  of  this  kind,. as  J-u  1  c  ^ ''^^«f '^.P^^^ 
p.ium  populi  Uornani  longe  a  domo  beliare,  tt^wasouce  a  I»!'^;,''^^'^/;^  j!^i^.."V?^'''i£*;^^^ 

of  tlmse  who  were  no  more  living  (literally:  who  had  f  ^''V,^,^-'^;,^,^;/-,^  i„\^Vhaf  they 
diJisse  pronuntiat.  the  crier  declared  that  the  pleading  had  an  end  (littially .  tiiat  tney 

hud  spoken).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  3U.  .  ,    ,    ^ ,  r>-„  m.,^^ 

1    Triste  est  nomeu  carendi»*  quia  subjicitur  haec  vis'^  '  Habmt,  non habet.   Cic.  1  use. 


«  bribery. 


"  stJme  -  .'paw  fo,'--.«  p.  154,  R.  IW,  No.  i.-  "  it  impl:os  Iho  mean.ng. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


305 


304 


USE  OF  THE    TENSES. 


1  36  —2  Do  Cjpparo  ct  Marcello  audlrom  non  miiinp  lubcntor'  (}imm  dc  eis  foratoribns») 
qui  'faerifnrr  Cic  Brut.  71.  24S.-  3.  I)e  exncitationc^  ct  coiisiMtiidinf  diori*.  vunc  de 
ratiOiK'fi  vidcilnins.  lb.  Tusc.  2, 18  —  4.  Fuif  ida  nspiiblica  quondam  :  fmf  l^ta  Kcve- 
ritiis  in  jucliciis.  lb.  Vorr.  2,  5,  18.— 5.  Ea  via  est  in  coplum,  ct    in   (a?tiiin  ennnn  qm 
rixinrnt,  et  ilium  incohint  locum,  lb.  Hop.  «.  15.— (>.  SuKtcnta  te«,  nn  Tercutia,  ut' 
potes  lioneftis!«iino  !  VLrimiis,Jtoruimus»f  lb.  Fam.  H,  4,  5, 
Obs.  4,  For  past  actions  continuing  at  the  time  of  the  speaker,  pee  p.  299. 
Hem.  47.  The  Enj^li^^li  laiiirnai^e  employs  the  present-perfect  if  a  period 
of  time  considered  as  present  to  the  speaker  (as  to-day,  noic,  etc.),  is  added 
to  the  predicate.     If  such  period  denotes  a  time  past  to  the  speaker  (yes- 
terday, last  year,  etc.)  the  preterit  is  used  in  English.     But  the  Latin  tense 
is  never  determined  by  such  desi<,niations  of  time,  the  perfect  being  used 
both  \\ith  hodi'e  and  Iteri  or  similar  expressions,  if  the  action  is  conceived 
as  complete  at  the  time  spoken  of,  while  otherwise  the  imperfect  must  be 

Hocnos  ab  istis  faccrc  invTti  Tifiri  coacti  si/mvft,  yesterday  ire  were,  much  ao:ain8t  our 

will,  co)t>pdled  by  them  to  do  this.  Cic.  Or.  2,  4,  18.    But :  Itaque  hen  imrahar  qnid 

accidisser,  I  yestcrdav  wondered  \vh;it  had  been  the  matter  (i.  e.  while  a  certain  action 

was  ijoin"-  on)    Cic.  Off.  3,  14.  m.—  Satis  multa  a  nobis  hodie  dicta  huut,  enonjrh  /<a.<f 

been  mid  hy  w»  to-day.  Cic.  Or.  1,  «2.  2»;4.    But :  Eum  hodie  eo-pectabam,  1  have  been 

expecd/ig  him  to-day  (while  eorae  other  action  was  occurrinj:).  Cic.  Att.  9,  11,  1. 

1.  Decemviros  intra  decern  ho.^  aimos  ct  crearimns  ot  e  repnblica  st/f-tidimuft.Uv.  4,  4. 

—  2   Sic  nunc  ad  Antonium  Ca-saremque  mrrenivivf^ .  Cic  Brut.  3«,  138.—  3  Ei^o  num- 

quam  mihi  minus  quam  hesferno  die^'^  placiii.  Cic.  Or.  2,  4.  15.— 4.  Crasbus  hen  nobis 

poUicilus  estias  civlle'i  ad  artemi^  rcdact0rum»3.  lb.  2,  :i3,  142. 

Jiem.  48.  Predicates  denoting  actions  to  whicii  no  certain  time  can  be 
assigned  are  placed  in  the  perfect,  the  saiue  as  in  English  ;  the  imper- 
fect being  e.xcluded,  because  there  is,  in  this  instance,  no  time  at  which 
the  acticm  could  be  considered  incomplete. 

1  Ouam  multi  exercitus  qnibns  minns^  prospcra  pujma»  fortflna/wi/.  eruptinnei» 
facta victOrcm"»  hostem  ;>f />///? ;t/»/'^'  biv.  44,  39.-2.  Aircr  (luum  multosannos  (pmnt. 
uberiOresetrcrri''^  fructns  ^olet.  Cic.  Bnit.  4.  ir,.—  3.  Apud  ccteros  phdosophos  qui 
ono'.nrit  aiiquid,  tacet.  lb.  Fin.  2, 1.— 4.  Mane  salutflmu>"'  d<.mi  bono»  viros  mulios; 
{ihi2o  ^alutano2l  deJluHf^-,  litteris  me  involvo^a.  n,.  Fam.  9.  20.- .\  Hunc  tu  pauperem 
putas  an  dis  imm<»i  talihus  similem  qui  sc  Ibrtflnis  omnibus  WJ/ir^*.?*  Sen  1  raiiq.  8.— 
ti.  Certamiiia  S ncWbmxnx^^  fuh'vnt  erunique  pluribus  populis  magis  exitio^»  quam  bella 
externa.  Liv.  4,  9. 

§  571.  The  Latin  perfect  has  the  force  of  the  English  tretebit  (past 
tense)  whenever  the  action  is  conceived  as  having  been  completed  at 
the  time  spoken  of  (§  500).  Hence  the  perfect  is  the  regular  tense  1)  to 
express  the  facts  of  a  narrative  (historical  perfect  or  aorist);  2)  to 
desinnate  detached  past  actions  to  which  an  author  refers  in  argumenta- 
tive style  (Ex.  2-4).  The  instances  in  which  such  actions  are  conceived 
as  non-complete,  and  are  placed  in  the  imperfect,  are  specified  §  572 

foil.  .  ^  's^-,  ^ 

1    Per«eus  innremm  est  castra  (conpnlis"»  nnllo  sunrum  ronnte.    ConsvrrfTir-^  cnnpul, 

nnvTcssusque  panllum  introeunti-^»  rej;i  dextrani ; w;«i/-».summittenteinque  sc»"  ad 

])edes  siixtidit  ;  iiit  rodurtuni  in  tabeniaculum^^  cimA([crv^-ju^\<it.JlA\\_^^  7.-  i  Cato 

"~MVTtl,  i,(>lef!<  pU'^Hirey^'  whfTare  deceased,  are  no  more  living.—  »  as  to  ex«'rcise  — 

<Tam  done  with  it.- »  method.- «  keep  up  thy  spirit-*  —  Mnsiead  of  ^«/«/yt.-"  our 

lilc,  our  lianpine-s  are  trone.—  »  i.  e.  in  tlie  treatise.-  '<>  the  same  as  ^6/t.-  "  civil  law. 

—  »•■'  science.—  »3  to  reduce.—  '•»  //<</(«/.>•'  pro,<pera.  unrav(.rable.—  »»  a  soriie.—  »«  victorious. 
_  n  to  rout.-  i»^  to  bear.-  »» to  receive.-  2»  »is  M)on  a-.-  ^»  rece[.tion.-  ^i  to  «ease. 

—  a»  1  bury  myself  in  my  books.-  "  to  divest.-  "  taction,  party.-  ^«  nun.-      to  rise. 

—  28  to  enter.—  2»  to  tender.—  a»  f€  ad  pedes  snmtnittcre,  to  full  on  one  s  kueee.—  •»  tent. 

—  32  lo  take  a  peat. 


1- 


rudi  sipculo  litterns  Grrecas  didicit.  Quint.  12,  11,23.-3.  Hocvernm  o^t,  dixit  enim 
LutJUins.  Cic.  Or.  2,  40,  173.—  4.  llaic  statua  est  etfuit  lota  Grsecia  summo  houOre.  lb. 
Verr.  2,  2,  35.' 

Obs.  In  the  historical  perfects  of  passives  and  deponents  the  auxiliary  e^se  is  fre- 
quently  drojjped. 

1   Thraces»  domos^  dilapH^,  Cretenses<  spem  pecunia?  f^eciiti  (i.  c.sunf).Uv  44,  4.5. 
—  o  lli^  audltis  clamor  cum  inirenti  plausu*  frrtus  (i.  e.  est).  lb.  4o,  1.-3.  Po^t^ro  die 
eeniltus  in  curia  habitus'^  (i.  e.  ed),  supplicationesque'  decrStae  (i.  e.  sunt),  lb.  4o,  Z. 
^  572.  Poets  and  later  prose  writers,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  aorist, 
sometimes  use  the  perfect  to  designate  habits  referring  to  all  times,  inti- 
mating by  the  use  of  that  tense  a  past  (complete)  experience  on  which  the 

assertion  is  founded. 

Such  i>erfpcts  are  rendered  by  English  presents,  or  by  the  use  of  the  auxiliary '  icilV : 
Mon -erls  acervu8  et  auri  ie«irr,to  domini  deduxit  corpore  febrls,  no  pile  of  money 
and  L'old  via  take  disea<es  from  the  body  of  the  sick  owner.  Hor.  Epist.  12,  48.— 
li^^e  ?  cc.Tumi  m.Mis  omnibus  una  est  :  auiisso  ntpir^'  fidem  constructaque  mella  dm- 
mlve  iusa^  •  as  long  as  the  queen  remains,  all  (bees)  have  one  mind  ;  whenever  she  is 
UxjZTwill  ma^mK  and  destroy  themselves  the  cells  constructed  (by  thern).  \irg. 
Geo  4  212  -  Multa  quam  supervacua  essent  non  intellexvnus  nisi  quuni  deesse  ccepS- 
nim  Thesupcrtluitv  of  many  things  we  will  not  comprehend  except  when  they  begin 
[<  be  wailtin"  Sen.  Ep.  12-3.-  In  the  first  example  the  perfect  ded^iMt^Vimy  also  be  ex- 
nlained  bv  understanding  the  adveri)  v»qmm  {has  ever  takeii).    In  this  way  the  per- 

?e?iklrea?ly  occurs  iti  S.Olast :  Avaritia  Pe^""yV!"^i,"r.v  u^  Sh^II  Tat^'lH'^  VV^^^^^ 
co/^rw/>I/i/.  which  no  wise  man  has  ever  coveted  (w.ll  covet).  Sail.  Cat  11,  3.  \V it  i 
Si  as  subject,  a  similar  usage  of  the  predicate  occurs  already  in  Cicero  :  Multi 
q  n  bes'e  vdlent,  pro/.e,vmf.  et  quum  prodesse,  ob/uSnwf,  many  \<iredone ^,ood 
(Will  do  irood)  when  they  meant  to  do  harm,  and  have  done  harm  (will  do  harm)  when 
they  meant  to  do  good.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  28,  70. 

in.  LMPERFECT  TENSE. 
A.  General  requirements  op  the  Imperfect. 
§  573.  The  Imperfect  represents  the  predicate  as  not  completed  at 
a  past  time  assumed  by  the  speaker  :  Ciesar  hostis  prosequi  vetuit  quod 
loci  naturam  ujnorabat,  C.  forbade  to  pursue  the  enemy  because  he  did 
not  know  (was  unacquainted  with)  the  locality.  Cas.  B.  G.  5,  9.  Here 
the  predicate  ignorahat  is  represented  as  not  completed  and  going  on  at 
the  lime  assumed  by  the  author,  ^.  ^.  at  the  time  when  the  prohibitory 
order  was  given. 

?m;!f,lctiatt[li.ri.mlTl/.laltcr  being  placed  ill  the  iMPKBrECT,  but  the  lormer  m  tbe 
PKRFECT  (or  historical  present,  see  R.  45). 

Uem  49.  Whether  a  past  action  is  to  be  considered  as  complete  or 
incomplete  in  the  grammatical  sense  of  the  word,  depends  1  on  the  na- 
ture of  the  action  hself  (^^574) ;  2)  on  the  time  which  the  speaker  assumes 
in  connection  with  it  (§  575).  ^ 


»  The  Thracian*»  —  ^  instead  of  in  dornos  sua-%  to  their  homes.- 
Cretans.-  «applause.-  «  to  hold.-  '  thanksgivings. 


»  to  disperse.—  *  the 


300 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


IMrERFECT  TENSE. 


307 


Ob^  1  The  author,  in  inlrodncinjj  past  actions,  trnnpfcrs  himself  in  idea  to  a  past 
tinierOu  thf  stand-point  inn-jr.ird  to  tiiiu' thus  a-unu-d  by  thc:mih(.r.  dopends  thr  n^e  of 
Ihf  ten<e  'IMiis  t;ta  d-uomt  of  the  author  may  ho  a  d(»iil)Ie  oiu-.  In  thi-  hrst  place,  he 
;nav  vhnnn/  the  lime  with  the  acti..n  introduced,  so  tliat  tlje  predicate  determines  its 
own  lime  wuicli  mav  he  chaiiired  wiih  every  suhsequent  Dreihcate.  In  this  instance  the 
author  dwells  on  t  e"actu)n  as  Urn-  as  it  la-ted.  The  time  viewed  Irom  this  stHnd-point 
is  ca""d  'TiMK  \\\so\a:ik\  and  the  action  is  said  to  he  'c<)mi)lete  pn  .-e  .  Such  predi- 
cit.'H  are  ,or,  at  hast,  oii-ht  to  he),  always  in  the  i-eukect,  as  ih.-  perlect  in  the  example 
S511  No  1  and  most  of  the  perfects  in  the  examples  hehmirini,' to  ^d.i»  and  ^. J»  I.  N  <'ry 
rarelv  medicate^  denotinu'  such  actions  are  found  in  the  impeufect;  hut  they  must  he 
co..8i(lered.is  suleeisms,  as  :  Vicesimum  ah  Carano,  qui  primus  re.7//(/A(/f  (fauUy.  instead 
uW^r/Narit)  I»,i>eanumerjlhant,  they  reckoned  Perseus  as  the  tw«-ntieth  Ovinj?  of  Mace- 
doii)  IVoui  Caranns.  who  rtk/ntd  tirst  (was  tlie  first  kin-),  Liv.  Ao.  1>.  lu  Cicero,  Lui^ar, 
and  >allust,  improper  imperfects  of  this  kind  are  not  loiind. 

Obs  2  Tiie  other  way  of  determinini;  the  time  of  actions  is  hy  connectinij  them 
with  a  past  time,  which  tlie  author  has  introduced  aside  from  the  actioii  uself.  Ihe 
time  thus  assigned  to  the  action  is  termed  'Time  Relative'.  Tiie  pre.hcate,  m  t^iis 
instance  is  placed  in  Ihe  imperfect  if  the  actioii  is  conceived  as  nicomplete  (^  .j.4), 
hut  ill  th'e  PEKFKcriril  is  represenlrd  as  finished  (comidete)  at  the  time  assumed  hy  the 
author  It  makes  here  no  dift'eience,  whetlier  tiie  action  is  of  a  Ioniser  or  shorter  dura- 
tiou  If  the  action  is  conceived  as  finished  at  the  time  <;iven  hy  the  author,  lie  tlwelis 
in  his  mind  on  the  action  duriuir  its  whole  extent,  the  same  as  m  'time  absolute  ,  and 
the  i)redicate  is  placed  in  the  perfect;  Ilelvetii  eS  tota  nocte  itruvt,  the  Helvetians 
jiiavclied  (continued  their  march)  during  that  whole  nij^ht.  Cie*.  B.  (».  1,  26.  Here,  by 
ttie  perfect  ur>nif,  the  act  of  marchin-  alllioimh  a  continued  action,  is  represented  as 
complete  at  the  jjiven  tim<>  (ea  toia  i\wAv).—M<insit  Silviis  omnibus  co;,'iiomen  qui  Allnc 
re<Miavenint  the  name'Silvii'  remaned  with  all  who  ruled  at  Alba.  Liv.  1,  ;i  i  He 
time  (rel,ttive)of  the  action  'mansit'  is  implied  in  ^  AlhiE  regnnr?n(iit' \  the  predicate 
7nan'<if,  represented  as  laslinj?  at  that  time,  is  in  tlie  perfect  hecause  the  fact  caiiie  to  an 
end  at  ihe  close  of  the  period,  and  hence  is  conceived  as  complete  at  that  time.— bupera- 
vii  posteaCinna  cum  Mario;  tum.  clarissimis  viris  interfectis,  lumina  civitaiis  exftncta 
ftunf,  at  that  time,  hv  the  murder  of  the  most  prominent  men,  the  li<,'ht--  of  the  state  trere 
exdnfjuiahed.  Cic  Cat.  8,  10.— Hannibal, diim  miirum  Incautius  suliit,  trairuhl  iclusa<i</</. 
Liv  21,  7.  Here  the  time  of  tin;  predicate  ctcidit  is  determined  hy  the  time  ol  another 
actioii  ulum  subit);  being  complete  at  that  time,  the  i)redicaie  must  be  placed  m  the 

PERFECT. 

§  574.  Verbs  in  tlie  itiipeifect  denote  eillur  (^0  a  statk  existing  at  a 
given  time  (R.  50),  or  {h)  an  action  in  pkoghess  at  the  time  (imper- 
fects of  CONTINUin)  ACTION,  OF  of  rilOGIlKSSIVE  ACTION,  W.  51),  01*  (r)  AN 
ACTION  llEPEATED  (imperfects  of  REPEATED  ACTION,  li.  54). 

Obs.  Imperfects  denotinj?  acts  of  the  mino,  as  (xhtlmare,  tinilre,  cc'ire,  etc.,  may  be- 
loii"  to  anv  of  the  above  three  classes  :  but  imperlects  of  tiiis  kind,  on  account  of 
several  features  peculiar  to  them,  are  treated  as  u  separate  class  of  impeifecis,  beinjj 
termed  '  imperfects  of  inner  action'.     (§  5«2.) 

Rem.  50.  Predicates  denoting  states  are  grnmniatienlly  considered  as 
not  completed  or  tintinished  as  long  as  the  state  is  e.xistiiig.  Hence  such 
predicates  are  i)laceil  in  the  imim;kfect  if  the  state  is  represented  to  have 
been  in  existence  jit  and  beyond  a  time  mentioned  by  the  author.  Here 
liclong  the  verb  esse,  either  as  a  copula,  or  with  a  perii)hrastic  participle 
(§  500),  or  in  the  meaning  '  to  exist' ;  mane  re  ;  immiiteve  ;  servi/e^U)  be 
a  slave  ;  jyitere,  to  be  open,  to  extend ;  diatdre  and  ahcxse,  to  be  distant; 
Jlarere,  to  liourish,  and  all  verbs  used  to  describe  things,  localities,  and 
persons  :  ' 

Simul  in  eilvam  ventum  est  uhi  plures  diversn?  semitne  emnf.  at  the  pame  time  they 
came  to  a  forest,  where  there  ictre  (existed)  several  paths  in  difl*erent  directions  (i.  e. 
at  and  fjei/ond  the  time  of  the  cominir).  Liv.  44,  43.— Ciesar  hunc  locum  probilrat  quod 
superiOrisaniii  munitiOiies  inte^'ra?  manebdiit.  hecause  last  year's  fortifications  still 
remained  unhurt  (were  still  in  tjood  order  at  that  time).  Cies.  B.  (}.  «,  32.— Ctc^ar  turrls 
consiitiiere  coepit,  nam  circumvaihlre  loci  natQra  woftibtbat,  for  the  nature  of  the  local- 
ity did  not  allow  to  enclose  (the  town)  with  a  wall.  Cies.  B.  G.  7,  17.    See  Ex.  1-5. 


I 


Obs.  1.  Imiierfects  of  this  kind  are  generally  rendered  hy  the  English  common  form 
of  the  preterit,  only  *  transient  slates  '  admitting  of  the  progressive  form. 

Obs  2  Predicates  expressing  states  existing  at  the  time  spoken  of,  are  frequently 
placed  in  the  perfect,  in  order  to  imply  that  the  state  ceased  to  exist  (was  •  completed') 
at  a  later  time.  The  author  dwells  then  in  idea  on  the  wliole  time  the  state  was  in  ex- 
istence, reprt  sentiDir  it  bv  the  i>erlect  tense,  us  finished  at  that  time.  This  perlect 
passes  over  into  the  negative  perlect  considered.  K.  46,  OBS.  3.— Via  Nomentana,  cui 
tum  Ficulensi  nomen /«t^  profecti  ^unt,  they  departed  hy  the  Nomentum  road,  which 
^m.-.' then  called  ?^iculensis.  Liv.  3.  5-2.— Civitas  ea  (Saguntum)  Ionize  opuleiitissima/wi^ 
ultra  Iberum,  tliat  citv  was  (at  the  time  before  Hannibars  siege)  by  tar  the  wealthiest 
beyond  the  Iber.  Liv.*21,  7  (this  condition  of  the  city  having  ended  by  its  destruction). 
ISee  Ex.  G.  7. 

Obs.  .3.  A  predicate  denoting  a  state  no  more  existing  at  the  time  spoken  of.  is  gener- 
al h  placed  in  the  pluperfect.  Sometimes,  however,  such  predicates  are  found  in  the 
perfect  (never  in  the  imperfect,  if  the  action  denotes  a  state),  as  :  Hue  ex  ilia  domo 
ptjetori.1,  quie  reiris  HicrOnis/?/i^,  emigrabat.  to  this  place  he  (Verres)  would  move  Irom 
that  prietorian  palace  which  had  been  king  Hiero's.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  12.  The  imperfect 
eral  would  represent  the  palace  as  belonging  to  Uiero  at  that  time,  who  was  then  dead 
long  since. 

1.  Eraid  omnTno  itinera  duo  quihus  Ilelvetii  domo  exTre  possent :  unum  per  Sequa- 
nos,  angustum  et  dilficile;  monsantem  altissimus  im>)^ridtbat^ .  Cses.  B.G.  1,6. — 2.  Hel- 
veti'orum  fines  ill  longiiudinem  milliapassunm  CCXL  -atebant'^.  Ih.  1,2.-3.  Plusapud 
me  eOrum  auctoritas  valet'  qui  MagnamGneciam,  quienunc  quidem  del6ta  est.  tum* 
Jlorehat,  price  ptis*  suis  erudierunt.  Cic.  Am.  4,  13.— 4.  Facigbat»  cum  pupiiia^  con- 
siietado^  juris  ejus  quod  tvat  tum  quum  Asellus  est  mortuus.  Cic.  \  err.  2,1,41. — 
5.  Crebris»  arhorit)Us  succfsis'"  omnes  introitus"  erant  prcecliisi^^.  Caes.  B.  G.  5,  9. — 
()'.  Airer  Tarqiiinioruin'3  qui  inter  urbem  et  Tiberim /«i/,  consecratus  Marti  est.  Liv. 
2^  5.2.  7.  lianc  modestiam'*  ubi  nunc  iu  uno  inveneris  quaj  tum  populi  universi/wi^,? 
Liv.  4,  6. 

Rem.  51.  Predicates  denoting  the  performance  of  an  action  are  con- 
sidered as  incomplete  Avhile  the  performing  of  the  act  is  in  progress. 
They  are  ])laced  in  the  imperfect  if  the  action  was  in  progress  at  the  tiine 
assumed  bv  the  author  (U.  49,  Obs.  2).  In  English,  predicates  of  this  kind 
are  generally  ex  pressed  by  the  rROGUESSiVE  form  of  the  preterit,  except  in 
the  instances  mentioned  obs.  1.  :  In  ea  civitSte  duo  de  principatu  inter  se 
conteiidibant,  in  that  city  two  men  vers  stryggling  with  each  other  for 
the  highest  power  (at  the  time  of  Ciesar's  arrival).  Cti^s.  B.  G.  5,  3. — Cres- 
cehat  interim  iirbs,  meanwhile  the  city  icas  qroicing  {i.  e.  while  Romulus 
established  its  institutions).  Liv.  1,  8.     See  Ex.  1-3. 

Obs.  In  the  following  instances  imperfects  of  actions  in  progress  are  in  English 
expressed  by  the  common  form  of  the  preterit : 

1)  Generally  in  the  passive  voice :  Dum  ea  Romani  parant  jam  Saguntum  oppyqnabahir. 
While  tiie  Ko'mans  were  i)rej)arin<,'  these  things,  Satriintum  was  already  besieged.  Liv.  21, 
7  See  Ex  4.  5  The  progressive  form  in  the  passive  is  used  only  if  the  common  form 
would  mean  an  accomplished  fact  (p.  127,  B.  l*i),  as  :  Reirni  certamine  ambigCbant  fra- 
tres;  major  minore  ah  fratre  pellebdtur.  The  brothers  were  engaged  in  a  combat  for 
the  throne;  the  older  brother  was  being  driven  out  by  the  younger.  Liv.  21,  31. (Ex.  6.) 

2)  If  the  Latin  verb,  denoting  an  action  in  progress,  is  expressed  by  the  English  copula 
with  a  predicate-noun  or  adj<'Clive,  as:  Exierat  cum  Crasso  L.  Cotta,  qui  t^m  tribuna- 
tuiii  ptlcbaf,  who  wa.s  then  a  candidate  for  the  tribuneship.  Cic.  Or.  1,  7,  25.  (Ex.  7    .) 

3)  Generallv  p'-edicates  denoting  acts  of  llie  mind,  as:  Rexquarta  vigilia  profllgit: 
pefPbat  \mphipolim.  he  inUnded  to  rearA  Amphi polls.  Liv.  44,  43.— Responsum  anceps 
datum  (est)  quia  faiCri  piqeMt  in  potestate  sua  Latinos  jam  non  esse,  because  they  dis- 
liked (were  loath)  to  owifthat  the  Latins  were  no  more  under  their  control.  Liv.  8,  2. 
(Ex.  8-10.) ^ 

1  Hun"-  over  (the  road),  controlled  the  road.—  ^  t.  e.  at  the  time  of  the  emiirration  pro- 
jected by  the  Helvetians.—  3  ;>/«« tulet,  weighs  more.—  «  supply  «  but'  —  »  teach- 

ln<r  _  •  was  in  favor  of.—  '  his  ward.—  »  practice.—  *  in  many  places,  (in  large  num- 
beTs).  Seep.  247.  R.  20.- »»  wm</^;r,  to  cut,  to  fell.— »' approach.— "  precluded.— 
»3  belonging  to  the  Tarquinii.—  •*  moderation. 


308 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


4)  When  predicate,  denotin.^  the  P-'---^^^^  «[ .Sj^.^Ji^^..^^.^^^^^^^^^^^ 
^  5)  Iinhe  instances  of  preirnant  imperfects  mentione^  R.  52.  ,,^,.:„,e9  u«ed 

11111111^«  honoris  (a  Manu)  '':*^!V'  P\'^;j\ '.  ,h       f.\tis  tril)nC-t)  .t'^  coercendnm  quibiiscun- 

?c.n   q«.e  eient»«   tuta  ab  hostibus  ,ed<ilbat^'.  Ca>^.  13.  G.  2,  5 
r1    52    InipM-f.-cts  of  continned  action  (R    51),  arc  frequently  usee 
■^i   luic^x^T  that  the  actinn  expressed  by  the  verb,  althou-h 

U  i  a  c  mplete  o  r^.c,n  .'^^  includes  an  imperfect  «f  a  state  existtng 
or  of  n^rrei  ve  ^  by  itui'lication  ;  as  :  C^rsar  Crassu.n  SamarobrlVc^ 

pr4m'  ie '^^^^^^  ^tttribuil,  quod  ibi  i.npedi.ueuta  exere.tits  reUngu^ 
£      cisarlnp(,int  d  Crassus  co.utuauder  of  Samarobnva   and  ^'^ve  h   n 

le.'ion  bec^u.se  he  Z.// there  the  ba^age^  of  the  army  (...quod  ib,, 

nuun  decederet,  impedimenta  erant).  C*s.  B.  G.  5.  4..     bee  Ex.  1   .. 

'  OBS.  Lnporfects  of  this  kind  are  f-a-JlJy -^^^  ^l^Xi?  inne^f!^" 2^cf  Str".:^;^ 
a  previous  |,:jssa.v  '"••^- ^Xir'^not  u"  eauJ  -  of  peri-..nnance.    Such  predi. 

i„^ta..ce  vvitl»  a  view  t.  <»'^  '  \"  'V^;;,  *  "^^V^KJcai^e  th.'V  pngnantlv  include  an  inner 
cate<  are  siirniflcantly  placed  n.  i he  '«'P'  '•,,''  ^^'^'^^\"  L'  JJ  4,°  TheV  nu.st  frequenily 
STATK  (can.a.  vwdu.,  «;<••>  j^y'^VA'CL^^^^^^^^^  obj.-cts.^.o  that, 

occur  in  sentences  ni.rodu.ed  by  ^''/' ^'  fi''^^'^''^  '"  from  K-is  to  the  puEDirATE 

/,rr^  to  malce  a  report.- »Mo  ^  yt  _ofl.  nce^^^^^^^^  «^^^^^^ 

Mhy.'v.-.rv  P^^^^i'^V-'T  r.7/r  hTs^e.^-  '  '  o  rim^  ''  fenred  for  the  safety  ..I  the 

ties)  ^v  V^',';;^;;'-^- L^^'"1V\  '  '  ;.*:!  U''a'„c' o,-^  ..'ti  particular  tin.e  .tated  in  a  previo.ts 
Sn^  ^^•«'UVe  dead'than  aliv""  "  sin..r  -  ^^  i.  ..  -'<\ .J^^ PJ^^;--  ^^  ^21T.Z 
^ntaMnt).  s,>  that  he  was  con^pelled  to  ^^^^^^^^^^^^f^'l^^^.s.  quod 
allow  a  profit -"  i^.qn;e  ^"7^  ^^^'-^J  '       '  J  /.^^^^^^^^^^  '"  »"«  "ccmint- 

^::::S^\iC:^  t.;Tmcmurandum-book.-  3»  i.  . 

quae  erat  causa  cur  relinqueres. 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


309 


RoFcinm.  Cnr  saibtbas  ?  Ib.  Ropc.  Com.  3.—  6,  Socinmi  tibi  in  eis  bonis'  edidisti» 
Qiiinctiiim.  f'nm  «-o  tu  voluntariam  societateni*  c.oVjas'>  qui  te  in  hereditaria  socie- 
tate*  IraudSrat^  y  Ib  Quinct.  21.  7»'»,— 7.  Quum  i<;itur  eos  vincTret  quos  secum  habg- 
hat,  t<'  folflinm»*  Komam  vnt't'mii'^f  Ib.  Dej.  7.  22.-8.  Hoc  igitur  per  gaMlna?  Jupi- 
ter tantie  civiiflti  ^ilr^lnm'o  dabat^^  f  Ib.  Div.  2,  6.  56.-9.  Eoniodo  inter  se  duo 
imiteratores,  sunimi  viri,  certabant^^^  ipsi  pares,  ceterum  opibus  disparibus.  Sail. 
J  III;.  52. 

Rem.  53.  Frequently  actions  are  treated  as  incomplete,  the  verbs  beini? 
placed  in  tlic  imperfect,  1)  to  intimate  that  the  action  was  not  carried  out, 
but  remained  an  UNACCOMPi.isnED  or  unsuccessful  attempt  (Obs.  1) ; 
2)  to  represent  the  doer  as  liaving  been  on  tue  roiNT  of  performing  the 

action  (Ous.  2). 

Ons.  1.  Imperfects  of  unnccomplished  attempt  arc  used  :  1)  Of  actions  commenced, 
but  rcmainiKs^untinisbcd.  Such  imperfects  an' rendered  either  by 'endeavored  to,"  or  by 
the  proirressivf  form  of  the  verb,  as:  t^uod  evelli  primi  hastati  si^mumnon  potuit,  timide 
f«>rtas8(;  siu'iiifer  ereUehat  quod  tldenter  inflxerat.  As  to  the  fact  that  the  standard  of  the 
lir^^t  'hasiatus"  could  not  be  taken  out  of  the  jrround,  the  standard  bearer  perhaps  en- 
deuvored  witiiont  contidence  to  tear  out  (was  p.-rh-ips  tearing  out  with  timidity)  what  he 
had  inj-erted  with  assurance.  Cic.  Div.  2.  31.  H7  (E.k.  1.  2).  2)  Of  acticms  which,  as  such, 
Avere  liMi^hed  and  completed,  but  without  the  expected  results,  for  instance  orders  not 
executed,  or  appointments  not  kept ;  as  :  Ibi  Chiudius  maniim  inj6c!t,  scqulque  ^ejube- 
bdf.  Then  Claudius  laid  hands  on  her  and  ordered  her  to  follow  him.  Liv.  3.  44  (the  con- 
nection showing  that  she  did  7wt  follow  him).  Ex.  3,  4.  Thus  such  imperfects  are  used 
of  motions  in  riebates  (expressed  by  verbs  expressing  the  object  of  the  moti(m).  which 
wore  not  adopted,  or  laid  over  to  another  time,  the  matter  remaining  in  statu  quo  for 
the  time  being,  as  :  Ex  hac  etro  lege  (minia  ilia  follTbam,  quse  ad  privatOriim  incoinmo- 
diim  pertiiiel)aiit  ;  Siillanrnum  poss'.'ssiOnes  ro?>;?/7/?f7Artm;  sed  ha^c  tota  res,  interpellSta 
hello,  refi  ixit.  From  this  law  I  proposed  to  take  out  all  that  pertained  to  the  disadvantage 
of  private  persons  ;  Jicas  mlllngtoconfijin  the  titles  of  Sulla's  partisans:  but  the  whole 
atfair.  ii.terrupted  bvthe  war,  came  to  riouLdU.  Cic.  Att.  1.  19,  4.—  A  Kal.Febr,  legatiOnes 
in  Idus  Fel>r.  re}irub(tntur,  \\w  question  about  the  legations  fvafi  laid  over  from  the  firstof 
Febniaiy  to  the  Ides.  Cic.  (^u.  Fr.  2. 3.  1.  In  the  same  way  the  imperfects cm^/^^m  daf^t, 
retd/tat.  etc..  in  Ex.  .5,  denote  that  Gracchus  unsuccessfiiily  proposed  laws  to  give  the  citi- 
zenship, to  f('rt>id.  etc.  ^        ,       .         , 

Obs.  2.  The  imperfect  denotinir  that  the  doer  was  on  the  point  of  performing  the 
act  ion.  agrees  in  its  general  meaning  with  the  imperfect  of  the  periphrastic  future  (u.  132, 
K.  144),  but  it  represents  the  execution  of  the  desiirn  as  diiectly  impehding.  while  the 
imperfect  of  the  periphnistic  future  represents  the  action  merely  as  contemplated  with- 
out any  regard  to  immediate  execution.  Such  imperfects  of  the  verb  itself  can  only  be 
used  if  it  is  made  clear  by  the  connection  that  the  author  could  not  mean  the  performance 
of  the  a^^tion  as  such,  as:  A.  D,  VI.  Id.  Maj.  quum  has  dabam  litteras,  ex  Pompejano 
proficisctbar.  On  the  intli  of  May  T  waft  on  the  jmnf  of  departing  from  the  Pompejanum 
when  I  w.is  writintr  tliis  letter.  Cic.  Att.  5.  2,  1.  Here  the  meaning  of  the  imperfect 
could  not  be  mi-taken  since  the  letter  was  nor  likely  written  on  the  rond.  But  :  Mar- 
cellns  templum  quod  (edificaturtiaerat  (not  adificdbuf)  eis  rebus  ornate  quas  ceperai,  noluit. 
Verr  2,  4.  5.5.  Here  m/ificdfxit  would  mean  the  building  of  the  temple  actually  per- 
fortned  This  kind  of  iinperfect  is  also  used  with  the  force  of  the  hypothetical  imper- 
fect of  the  periphnistic  future  (p.  232,  R.  144).  See  p.  730,  l(Ex.  0-11). 

1.  Ilenna's  tu  simulacrum'*  Cereris  tollere  aud^bas^^  ?  Henna  tu  de  manu  Cereris  Vic- 
toriam'«  eripere  condtun  eff  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4.  50.—  2.  Ad  ea  Crisplnus  (dixit),  iiec  sihi  nee 
illi  hostlsdeessein  (juibus  virtfltem  ostendant'',  conversusquei*  0^16«?'*.  I.iv.  25,  18. — 
3  Vocare  tribus  extemplo  populus  j*/^/^7>a/ ;  ille  tamen  dies  intercessiOne'-^o  est  subia- 
tus".  Ib.  10,  9.— 4.  Miserije  nostra?  tribuas22  qnod  a  Vil)5ne,  quo  te  arcesseMmi'S^^, 
subito  disres-imus.  Cic.  Att.  3.  4.—  5.  C.  Gracchus  dabaf^*  civitatem^s  omnibus  Itali- 
cis,  exteiuUbnt  eam  pa^ne  usque  ad  AipTs;  dividebat  agros  ;   vetdbat  quemqnam  civium 

»  Partner.—  '  property.— 3  to  declare  (by  public  entry).— <  partnership.—  »  to  enter, 
Paraphra-e  :  Quae  erat  mens  tua  qnum  colres?—  «  joint  heirship—  ^  to  defraud. — 
"  fiee,  at  largo.—  ^  i.  e  qua?  ^m^  mens  tua  quum  mitteres  ?—  ">  warning. —  *'  i.e.  num  erat 
(esse  poterai)  Jovis  consilium  ut  daret  ?—  J'»  to  contend  ;  i.  e.  hie  erat  modus  quo  certS- 
bant.— »»  from  Henna,  a  Siciian  town  —  '*  image.—  1*  the  connection  shows  that  this 
attempt  was  unsuccessful,  while  the  attempt  de-^ignated  by  comtm  es  in  the  next 
verse  was  carried  out.— '*  a  Victoria  (statue  of ).—  i^  inst.  of  a«^ewrf<?ry /)0*.«fn^— ^Mnstead 
or  s'f  convertit  et  abibaf.—  •*  The  connection  shows  that  Crispinus  did  not  leave  the  place. 
—  -0  intercession  of  the  tribunes.— 21  to  frustrate.— 22  to  attribute.— ^s  he  summoned 
Atticus.butdid  not  keep  the  appointment.—  ^4  proposed  to  give— 2«  right  of  citizenship. 


310 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


plus  qninscntiP  jn-orisi  hnbCrc :  jmWcla  fnwiferibaf  iid  cqnitr«.  \  clloj.  2  fi  -  6.  Phi 
U\m\  litU'iis  U-cns  mu.avi  con^^ilium  .ie  muli.'r.bus.qnas,  ut  scnp^t'ram.ad  teR..mam 
rendtWxiW'  C'ic  Att.  7,  23,  2.- 7.  Tunc  esseia  hoc  ai.imadvcrteiidum*  quuin  dasMS 
^^rlci^prot^ceMtu^.  lb.  V.rr.  2.  5,  43.- 8  Nam  ...m  q"'>"l  I'f/Y^'  if-fsT 
eiiciehan,*,  reliquain  fOnjunHOrum  mamiin  simul  exunram  puiabam.  lb.  cat.  .i,  a -i. 
-  y  Qnuin  ei.?  Catill.uim  ex  urUo  i>etimm,  hoc  provi.lCbam  ammo  i.on  m.hi  esse 
reihC-  it  MiicdtSto.n  piMtimfscendam.  lb.  3,  7,  1«.-  10.  Nn.n  dubita.  id  me  impcrante 
f^c're"'q  1.  ja.n  tua  'p..nte  r\mef>a.'<  f  lb.  1,  5.-  11.  Has  U-aiiOne.  CiC.ar,  quod  in  la- 
fail  /mlA76«/',  ad  so  revcrli  jussit.  Ca's.  B.  G.  2,  35.-  12.  roriu"  lo  tnnms  cop.ar.nu 
daiuinTst)  quia  Mai.lius  emu  hand  invalido"*  pne.idio»  in  Galham  mitUOidur^^. 
Liv.  21,  17. 

Rem.  54.  Predicates  arc  placed  in  the  imperfect  to  represent  the  action 
as  INDEFINITELY  KEPKATKi)  at  a  «^Mveu  liiiic,  the  repetition  beini;  under- 
stood  toiroonat  that  time.     The  Ireqnent  repetition  without  dehnite 
limits  marks  tliu  action  as  incompletk  in  the  sense  explamed  above  : 
Primo  adventu  exercitus  nostri   hosles  crebras  ex  oppido  excursiones 
faeiebant    parvulisque  procliis    cum   nostris    conteiuUbant,  At    the  hrst 
arrival  of  our  armv,  tin;  enemv  icere  makinf/  freciuent  expeditions   Innn 
the  town,  and  fought  m  small  skirmishes  with  our  men.  Cics.  B.  Cr.  --,  6{). 
Ob^    1    Mere  iiiiperfi'Cts  (without  any  other  addition)  arc  not  used  to  denote  repeated 
action' if"it  would  be  h-lt  doubtful  whe.l.er  tbe  predicate  \r^  *"'^'%'\''Vh/nl!'  sJu'^S's 
actions,  or  one  continued  action  in  progress  at  a  -iven  uiue.     1  h us  in  .»»'«,,''^'  '^">^^^' 
Ex   1-7  every  ambi^'uity.  in  this  respect,  is  removed  hy  tlie  connection  itself.    In  I'.x.  » 
fhe  predicate  2.roc..?2^>u'Mvould  be  arKRFEcTif  it  had  be.n  ^'^^''\  H^^^IS^'^luc^ 
Mu.'lH  •  proce>>ion  '  of  ti.e  prefects,  which  could  not  iiave  been  considered  as      '  C(>in- 
Dlcte  '  at  ihe  time  assumed  bv  the  author.     Nui.tiOrum  pars  depi;eliensa  (ab  ho.tibus)  in 
conspectii  no-t.Oium  militiua  cum  cruci:1iu  mm^.(7/'//'    l>art  oril.c  ^'^^^^^IS^^.'^^ 
seized   were  killed  with  tortures  in  the  eiyht  oJ  our  soldiers.  Cies.  B.  (».  o,  4j.     1  he  im- 
ped c      m/ft/?/'/rden<.tesr.peated  action,  implying  that  several  execution.s  were  occur- 
ri,  .'  a  K  l.'o  111'  on  at  the  ti.ne  spoken  of,  each  messenurr  beimj  kUIe.i  whenever  geize.l 
The  execution  of  all  at  one  time  would  have  been  a  complete  act  at  the  time  spoken  of, 
renuiriu"  the  pkufect  tense. -Quum  uteniue.  utrimque  exisset  exercitus    in  coll^pecttl 
fere(  ue  e  re-ione  castrin  castm  iH)uibant,    When  b«»th  armies. had  started  to  manh 
each  on  «me  of  the  two  banks  of  the  river,  they  pitched  camp  in  si-ht  "'• ''!'^  »''"[■  J 
opposite  to  each  other.  Cas.  B.  (i.  7,  liV    The  connection  of  thi«  p:.8saL'e  «liows    hat 
thi^  method   of  pitchin-  camp   was  repeatedly  done  at  a  time  when  Cie>ar\x.s     ak- 
in -  ceftsiin  measures.     The  mak'n-  of  the  two  camps  on  one  sin-le  wcasion  would  have 
inrplied  an  action  complete  at  the  «jiven  time,  requiring:  a  PKKFtcT.  See  Ex.  .♦. 

Sometimes  pn-dicates  may  be  classified  either  a.s  imperlects  .»f  continued  or  of  re- 
peated action,  without  an V  dilTerence  in  sense,  as  :  Jam  fetiefHW  ur  arieiibus  inuri  Then 
ffie  w^ll.  >xere  battered  by  rams.  Liv.  21,  S.  It  is  indifTerent  whether  ^^'^^^'^'y']^^:^^^ 
ceived  as  one  continued  action  in  progress,  or  as  an  ai:-re-ate  oi  repeated  blows  bj  the  ram. 
Obs  2  Repeated  actions»,  if  represented  to  be  uegularly  done  accord  ins:  to  some 
principle,  routine,  rule,  or  habit,  pass  over  into  the  imperfect  of  haiut  (>  ot>o,  which 
usually,  althouirh  not  necessHrily.  implies  repeated  actums  ot  the  same  kind  as .  1  uc 
Verresex  ilia  domo  fw^f/m^a^  I'hiiher  Verres  v^ed  to  move  (every  spnni:)  Ironi  that 
bon-e  Cic  Verr  2  5  12.  Tlie  perfect  emigrant  would  denote  a  sniLde  chan<;e  ul  hm 
a  lode  complete' at  the  time  spoken  of.  See  Ex.  lU-13.  Here  belon-  actionn,  repre- 
sented to  be  di.ne  whunkveii  (as  often  as)  another  event  happened  (impekfect  or  roN- 
TivcKNT  ACTION  «cc  §  579) :  Hi,  quamcuiique  in  partem  impetum  fecerant.  hostis  loco 
cedJre  conlbanL  "Wherever  they  made  an  attack,  they  {ieri>darl>j)  diModmi  the  enemy. 
CeV  B  ('2  41-  \theniHsenteniiaqiinm  judicitnis  iXarmw^mteri-ogabatur  reus  quaiu 
:e'-ii'matiOnem  commernisse  e.e  confiterGt.ir,  When  at  Athens  a  case  was  passed  over  to 
t^.ejudy^  to  pronounce  sentence,  the  accused  7mx  a.-<kfd  (.evr// /i//^  accord.n-  to  the 
routine  of  thee».urts),  wli*t.  amount  of  punishment  he  confessed  that  he  had  deserved,  tic. 

Or.  1,  54.  See  Rem.  (>5.     (Ex.  14.  15). . . 

I  Acres.— 2  The  connection  shows  that  he  did  not  send  the  women  to  Rome  -  »  inst 
of  fuis^et—  *  to  attend  to.-  ^  The  c(mneciion  shows  that  the  matter  could  n..t  h'iiv«;heen 
done  after  the  lle^'t  had  sailed.-  •  The  connecti..n  makes  it  clear  that  ''^"•-jjj^^^^'l  "[^J^,^^ 
tion  could  not  be  meant,  which  also  would  have  requinM  a  perfect.  1  he  eamt  s  the 
case  with  p4rebam  in  the  next,  senience,  and  Jacubas  m  No.  U).-  '  was  ••'  l'/'';  «  ^? /^^^^ 
part  (was  haxteninf/  in  En-lish  has  the  same  meanimr  ol  a  future  act).-  ^  haudinialidus, 
pretty  strong,  respectable.—  »  force.—  i»  Manlius  had  not  yet  left  at  that  tune. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


811 


ate  "^a^'i^t'-^te,  he  2ro  W  rrw^^^u.  juc^^  s      ^^^^^^^  y^^.^^  .^  represented  as 

K.  the  former  dec  sion.  L  n .  3,^.  %'r\^^{^r-fl^^^^y  Ucn  be  rendered  by  'used  to  ' 
^::^^f^&Z:^TZ^^^  ^-  the  examples  in  oB.  2.- 

^  Ob'  f  IMhc  action  i^  represented  Jo  ^  a  ve  l-^^^V^^^l^^^^^^^^ 

probably  was  oftener  'Y;']'^':^llX/^^ee^^^^^  fo"^  that  punishment  which 

iervos  damnatos  Mjerabat,  \  •^"J^f/^^^^  He  Verr  2  5  8.  The  cnnection  shows  that 
he  infictul  on  uncondeinned  »  '^^' f  «•..^V'fw  J  ^,  ^,;  ^veand  one  master.-Quum  amies 
b<„h  ac.ion.  were  only  once  d'j  .-  >"  «-«^y  ^  t«  ^.  ^.^^l^    ^.^   ^err. 

"  ^;.'k;:mq;^.te.  mum« ^^^^^^^^S^^^^^S^^ 

tate*  eventus  ^^'T^ Z^'^SntZ!^^^^^^  lb.  2, 16.- 5.  Interim  juvenea 

captTv  s,  trans  Sabim  flunien  oinnls  .^•-r\^ob  con  lu  ..    tiogtium  copife  summis- 

c?bninai  ,,r^/,«;,^.o  jn  semT.um  '>P'>"J-^tesque.  U^  M,^^._  0.  \l««\>^"5\^,^^.di,ione  om- 
pis'i  a  regeauxilii<crebro  augebaMur.  C.«^-  /J^^' ,'  , -i  nertii  acia  (minium  fortunaa 
^les  Palatn  ^....f.;./-,  et  cuin   At  j^.  a^^^^^^^  i^S  ubi  ex  oppidis  pra.- 

perturbari'3  vellet.  II).  2  3b.-8.  Mctumsiii^xu  ^j     »   „   ■     veteres  navis  paucis 

Jecti  regii  obvii  procedcbant  J^.  J"^-  46  -^9.  ^  ''^  » ^,  f^^j,,^  .^.erces  ementieban_. 
rebus  imposit IS,  U'l'^'^'l'^r^'"^^;"''' f^^/"  ;^'\  „ 'i"  j^^^^^  facile  septimum  diem  supera- 
tur^^.  Liv.  2.5,  .3  -  lO'/^Ji; '"[^'^;-^ .V",i;;;iaraS  aii/  tuoB  (O  C^sar) 

bant^^.  Ih.  41,  St.-  11.  1  <;"  >y^  ^  4  i"  !!irx  ,ctii  andndabat  Themistocles  quod  som- 
numcrare  non  P"^^"""'^"  \  :,^,  ntu-.m^  re.m  dmt,  Miltindis  trop^is^"  se  ex  somno 
iium  capere  non  V^^>,^'\'y^^\\^^'^}^X^^^^  diei  tempora  per  explo- 

exeitari^'.  lb.  Tusc.  4.  1'.».-  13.  ]}''J ^'^f^^',\  'Jl  q.  o(  tleri  vellet  irnperabat.  Caes. 
ratoies  qu;e  ad  Avancuni  -ererentur  <^^l^ff^,^-'J±  Sorulum  lustrarel^S  bonis  nomi- 
B.  (J.  7,  ir,.-  14.  quum  nnpenyor  ex,TC  tuin     tn>o    popuiuin  m.^a      ^  ^^.  ^^ 

nibus"  qui  hostias  jl^c-H^a-  ^^^.6«^;  ^^^  C^^^  cquis- impedl- 

littore  alniuos  singularl^-^   '^  "  ^U,?  ,  c-./i/in^ao  alii  ab  latere  apertotelaco«^tae6an{. 

The  histovical  iiitiukivu  mostly  occur.,  i.i  place  ot  aa  imperlect  ot  Rc 

ex  die  diicere  iE.lui :  conferri,  comportan,  ades>c  t/tggrg, 

different  results.-  ^  on  repeated  "'^"'"f  "  "/'^"  ^.^f  f.^^^^  11  to ''end.-  ^^  to 

have  tak.-n  a  place,to  '>^^^^^^^V:'^--:'^^r^:^^^-^^nZ^^^n  sea.-  »'  to  pretend 
treat.-  »="  to  endan-er.-  »<  contractors.-  '»  t<>f'"';;  _  o»  ,  ."pj^f^s  -  '^'  awaken.-  22  at 
'  _  1-  a  id;."ue.  prevailing  at  that  time.-  'V'','^"^  ♦■^rnf  TsVur-ons  with  lucky  names, 
.tated  hou-rs.  J-  to  learn.--  to  P«rfor\"  \h.;^  "^,  ^.'^^^^^f  ^e^era  import  (person)  must  be 
The  ablative  is  one  of  quality,  with  wh  ch  '  ,^,^^ {  .'^^..''^^^'^[.tlriy.i:  2«  at  full  gallop.-- 
understood.-  -^»  to  lead    t  k.  victims  Uothy^^^^^^^^  ^osl- 

«»  them  while  try  ng  to  reach  the  land.     ImpfditiL>^  n\  miiiuvrj  '  "•-     = 
tion  of  a  soldierlorfavorable  for  tlghiing-  «o  to  sunound.-      rank. 


312 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


n^kinn  tho /EdnnnS  for  1  he  corn  w\ii<;^.t1 
SJam^r  o>  fn>,n  day  to  day  ;  (^^ y^''^" V '^ 
lU'i.r  at  l>and.  Cues   B.  (i.  1,  16-    i-X;  i-  -«•  *; 

Obs. 

ran-ly  i 
i'lamiire 

t^houUl  answer  me.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  2,  .7 

Ob8.  2 
never  oc 
nor  cau 


thov  had  promised.      The  ^uans  ;>»/<  the 
t  it  was  being  collected,  tran^-ported,  and 

5. 


iiiswer  nie.  CMc.  v  err.  <4,  ~,  •  <•  „„„anv  nslofrical  Ptibiect,  and  hpnce 

I.  The  historical  infinitive  ^^t^^r^l^^^S^ ^^^.  ti"ni.,  and  thins.  ; 
.(•ur*.  lor  an  imperfect  of  f.tate  (K.  •  0)  '"  j^^'',^"  J^pas^^ively).  It  can  not  be  used 
i,  ever  be  n«ed  i"M>c3r.onally_(neit».er  ac    v  elj    -u^r  pa  y;    ^^  ^^  ^^^  ^.  ^^_ 


allv(neitner  acuvei^,  ■'"«  F" j'-         „,- .ho  mind    or 

;T„cTron-.  in  pm-re,»  without  rcpeHMon  .xcept  *>;•;"  :'™°,'^°r,,f^''°i^;„1u'wS;.«^^^ 


jici  catena.  Flaviano  jube  .  lac.  11.  d   lu  i,„porfects  of  coNTi^aKNT 

?«^n  ;^^x"r8f  ^nV'oJS^btU  '^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  refer,  to  r^lpeated  orinner acttoa. 
g:T-i?"-See'kTl.'Hl,  §  =387  (Sail.  .Tu..  6..  ^^  ^^ 

OBS.  5.  Sometin.es  the  l^i^f^J'^'l^/J^^.^i^tme.  t""^  H^  occur  in  the  nreaniu,. 

the  a(Mi..n  the  colorof  n^^'ll'^y /V.il.^'^J^I.M^^'rH/  (at  a  oicm  time,  all  the  actions  going 


^^.  ^'iVirihrWi-ofi-mperlect.  of  rcpc 

and  Ex.  12.  ,!.,;,rrfre>  tapktes  In  vallum  «miifsr*  .• 

i>  iiitinris  vinhua  «"titer  »f;) ';/'««.  n.^^^^^^^  a;cur>«-«  et  an- 


Cir.  01U-.  21.  .',9.-,  6.  .Jan,  pl,.b.  iw-.n  tnm.m       J^^  '4»  -■  nc  ,^,,»n.  e.,e  in  captS 

hauited.-  »  while  othei-s  with  f re^h  ("  '  '  .Si  ,hat  rfS  i-^found  in  tlr.«  meanin-  only 
fin,  to  remove.  The  le.dconj.  «••ro"e"Usly  ^tatc  t  hat  rf^  "f'y^^.^l\l^^^^__  »  to  be  in  conster- 
in  a  tropical  sense.-  '  would  entreat.-  »  hold  ^"}/^*[y  "f  ' '^7;^^^^^^  is  the  counr^el  (advo- 
nati<m.-  i»  inquire  for-  ^ '  at  t  >'nt  ^omen    -  »^  fe^l/^ha^rintd^  ^.^  ^^^  _  ,.  ^^^ 

rii:p;;iS^hr-  lV-S;vl;:tl^^r :^-.^  i^^tarted,  proceeded. 


i 


/ 


..V 


I 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


313 


«^foi  Th  9^  10—  R  Vir<'inius  ferro',  qn5cumque  ibat,  viam  facere.  lb.  3,  48.— 
mota».  ■^\,ti:n?>;«TinTIi«nan  'im  lirimo  Ptatim  adventu  omnem  exercitum  in  se  con- 
ve?tVt'-  nmXrem^^^^i^^^^  milites  cv.d.r.;  eundem  vigOrem 

h^  vnlt\i  vimiu^hi  ocilis  infum.  Neque  Hasdrubal  alinm  quemquam  P^^f  ^«^e  m^/€» 
hi        i«l  To?trerVac"trenue  agendiun  esset,  neaue  milites  alio*  duce  l>^^>  fPJ>Mf^ 
a  /Ly    I.  21/4-  10.  Sic '^^^^       vita  erat:  facile  omnis  perferre  ac  i>a  t«  •  cum 


m 


'•'""Si'.^',.  tulV  terrnrem    PloraiusM  muTier  im  non  ex  privatis  .olum  domi- 

Ei'lE  SiSr  ^irss:  i^s^;^^^::^ 

cernit  senatU!*,  etc.  Liv.  20,  9.  ^ 

§  576.  Tlie  TIME  assumed  by  the  speaker  (standpoint  of  time)  m  re- 
gard to  an  imperfect  must  be  aPARTicuLAK  time,  aside  from  the  general 
idea  of  past  time  contained  in  every  past  tense  (R.  49,  Obs.  1).  This  par- 
ticular time  is  eitlier  expressly  stated  (R.  55),  or  understood  (R.  56). 
Every  expression  of  thne  thus  assumed  by  the  speaker  is  either  conceived 
as  a  TIME-POINT,  or  as  a  space  of  time  (§  578). 

Or«(  The  «ame  action  may  be  conceived  as  complete  or  incomplete  according  a«  U  is 
v;?wp',l  from  S'rent  Doiiiti  of  time.  Hence,  in  order  to  account  in  a  given  instance 
for  l^c^iscM^f  an   m^^^^^^^  is  necessary  to  find  out  1^«  standpoint  of  time 

vhici'the  author'&s.umed^  and  from  -^^-hjie  vi^u^  the  ac„^  l^c'x  oHe' 

i«  either  conceived  as  a  timk-point.  or  as  a  space  oI  time  (period),  w  hiic  tne  action  ue 
Jfo^ed  bv  tluf fmperfect  is  a/a-az/6' conceived  as  occupying  a  space  ol  time  (being  of  un- 
defined duration  or  repetition).  •       ^        A 

%  577.  If  tlie  lime  is  conceived  as  a  time-point,  the  prcdicale  is  placed 
iu'the  im'pcrfect  to  represent  the  action  as  indefiuitely  outlasting  that  time- 

^^^^^  Antiochns  helium  -ossit  cum  minOre  ejus  (Ptolemnci)  fratre,  qui  turn  Alexandriam 

:sSEir£ri!nL^^rb;'^:fe 

cmy  were  admitted  to  the  Senate.  ,     ,  ^  ,       ,    • 

Or^    The  imnerfect  is  always  used  in  this  instance  if  the  action  had  been  already  m 

destroyed  his  own.  Cic.  l3iv.  2,  5G,  115.  ^i      r  n 

Jlcm  55.  To  express  the  time-point  assumed  by  the  author,  the  tollow- 
in-  forms  are  used:  1)  adverbial  expressions,  reterring  to  a  point  ot 
tiine  previouslv  spoken  of.  as  turn  (then);  mode  (just  now) ;  ^«m  (in  tho 
meaning  '  by  This  time' ) ;  eo  {eOdem,  i^ic.)  tempore  {sub  idem  iempus,  eic) 
(Ex  1-8)-  2)  clauses  expressing  the  time  of  another  action,  generally 
inlVoducVd  bv  guum,  nM,  or  their  equivalents,  but  also  by  relatives  or  com- 

i  Had  been  put  in  motion,  i.  e.  ""^l«':ta»<en,  attempted.-- ^  sword.-  '  c^^^^^^ 
commander.-  «  where  brave  and  determined  action  was  required.-  'tins  abative  is  a 
romnlPt  n.r  obiect  of  confiderc.  and  an  adverbial  object  of  audere  (contide  m,  or  dare 
nX)  -  ?oSl7>e^//n^^^^  he  would  get  along  ^:f  all.-  '  1.  e.  9t.^6...5C»;t^..  erat 
/nertmesin) -*•  construe  eis  cum  gmtntscunqve,  to  all  those  with  whom -to  give 
one's  self  up  _  10  "-ould  enter  into  their  ideas.-  "  res  <tiP^rce,  TO»g\iy^ov^^  ^^^V^^'lf 

E^«pi.;-™'^-t.rp?-^^^^^^ 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


315 


314 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


parative  conjunctionc,  atlachea  to  demonstrative  temporal  expressions 
(eo  ternpore  quo,  v\c.)    Ex.  8-11. 

TTMK  at  which  anolht-r  act  OM  f»V;  »[     n'lwrn  .Ym  o il  urevlicate,  the  tinu-  of  which  is  de- 
(rarely  in  Jh^'j'^i;-- -•^^[\\\*J\^;;;-\';^i,,;KcVW  «f  the  clause.: 

tcrtninc'd  by  it,   s  P^^'  VV.i/  nit.^ri,.^  S  priiicines  rranf  !-Edni.  altc  rTus  Soqnani, 

Ot/u.vi  Ciesar  in  <'='  ''''V^.^l^t  r    el"  ..^t  c  ^^^^  were  the  ^duans.  those  of  the 

iVhen  Cesar  m//v.  to  ^'f'^^.^'^^'^»"^'^  '\\     Hut    Jas,  ovv7/^^7emn  tiias  littenis.  Ilirtiu-. 
otherwercai.ebcqnatu    Oes  B  O.h  12^  .  ,  "L  /i^,,^,  ^  is  i•epre^entc■d  as  a  space  of 

see  Kern.  (,o  .         j^^  «„(.h  expressions  ns^  eddem  tempore  <7?/o.  are  stated  to 

mmmmsmmm 


bilnniA  enim  in  piippi' 


et  clav;,,^:5'•/;:;^^;;;;rCie;Fam.l5,3:-2.(^^         /.m«  nior- 

estsipplex.  1^>-/^V5   Ttv  ai    •;       ^,    (\)n"i)ecta  ex  murls   ea  innltimd..  vnir,  jamque 
thaLriniensiiim  era/it.  Liv.  21,  b.— •>    *.oir  pctui  ,\j  "^    ,.   ,,,  .-//^  i,,.,^  Uinnore  ainul 

aZLo    p'r/,    r.   1       ru'.et  indici.uu"  conjurationis  in   SenAtu   si..anim  Jov.s  m 

nu'JuoJ'etTStrunW^^^^^^^^  annis  n(ihi  tctiUe  pr.e.tabaf.  lb. 

B  ;      4'^   iVl  -  ?0   S.r^^^  Mi^nnm  Jovis  collocabatm-  quo  cnjurat...  tnchraf^,- 

fur   \hl)\y. '2,  21,  4T  -  11.  LTMlem  fere-  tempore  pons  in  Ibero  prc.pe  cllocius  nuntialHi- 

tur  et  in  Sicori'^  vadum  reperiebatur.  Cies.  B.  C.  1,  G2. 

ieem  5G  More  frequently  the  time-point  at  wliieh  an  aetion  was  ineom- 
nk'te  is  not  expressly  slated,  but  tnicJer>ttood,  bein-  nnplied  either  in  pre- 
vious predicates,  or  in  the  predicate  of  the  principal  sentence  it  tlie  ac- 
tion is  contained  in  a  clause. 

Ors   1    If  tlie  time  is  not  stated,  an  action  may  either  be  conceived  as  soinj?  on  at  a 

cSa  n  time,  ^N^tl  "n  impkkkkct-preuicatk.  or  it  may  be  rc'-arded  from  ^^-^^ll'^^;;^^^ 

of     <  ow      iine   hein-  represented  as  an  indepkndfat  Fact,  in  whicii  case  llie  medi- 

r  It     is  i)l-  -CM    in    he  peufkc:t.     In  this  case  the  use  of  either  of  the  two  tenses  Is  always 

ontuit       f  the    neon    Vteness  of  the  action  is  no  essential  point  in  the  rarn.t.ve, 

i     tl  e  thou  ^ht"xp  esse.!.     This  may  be  seen  by  tlie  followinir  exampl.'s  :  Fu-.aeijtes 

que  s  nun  s      re  mo.rhW'O   texer.n/.  ab  equitfltu  M.nt  interfc-cli  ;  The  [Vr:»";>'"A  "J'VS^ 

n    th  I    fore-.t-'  nor  mountains  nro/^ctec/.  were  killed  by  i  lie  cavalrv.  Cus.  B.C.  .,hi 

The  v<-ticm^Jr?r  "  if  viewed  from  the  time  of  inferfecti  sunt,  or  if  viewed 

fr  m    tTowi     iinc  •  but  it  woul<l   be  incompK-te   (rr<,uiri.i-  the  imperfect  tegrf>af>t)   it 

xiewec  fn  m  anv  partVcilar  time-p-'int  durin-.r  the  ni-ht.-Vbi  pnmuin   impedimenta 

no.  ri  exercitis  ab  d  in  sUvis  abditi  lafrOant  visa  sunt,  subito  omnibus  coinis  pro- 

voh  vcnm[    !i^^>on  as'the  ba^.^e  train  ..I  .uir  arny  was  >^.    jy  t'^^T^i^'^^'V^^'JeS 

4nft  m  the  forests   thev  sudden  v  rushed  forth  m  full  lorcc.  Ca>s.  B.  (».  ^.  \.i      ine  aciiou 

"1 7  7  at  the  time  when  the  per-on  addressed  wrote  his  letter.-  «  any  lonfrer  -  »  gun/d. 
_  4  stern  -^  he  m  -  «  at  the  moment  wlu-n  Ci.c-ro  left  the  city.-  '  «"«^  •»*-"f»'";'^>-  jg 
disipprove  -  »  disclosure-  '«  10  erect.-  »'  «'/^/v,  topuDlish.-  «^  was  m  his  thirty-fourth 
Year,  which  outlasted  the  time-point  of  the  publicaliou.-  "  the  rivor  Sicona. 


I 


plete  if  viewed  from  the  time  c^  Z^^^^^X'^.^:^^^^'^^ 
U„f)  would  have  been  J."^jl^,^,^.^^^"'  Oiiod  i^l^^^  hnentum  ajrentibns  fore  videbatur.  id 
ti(m  as  a  ST  ATK  (were  lynj^z  ju  den) -Qiiodimp^^^^^^  ^  is  viewed  from  the 

maxime  ad  ««l'^'''''"'"  «^:'5\^- ,^V„,^Vt  jiave  beK  viewed  from  the  time 

.t  .nd  point  of  its  own  line  •  J^  ^'^^  ^r  uleg  «ij^^^^^^^  in  a  similar  connccti.m  :  Adju- 
of  the  predicate  ridehatur  Thus  S*/'^"^.;  Y  17  Here  adjuvit  mijrht  have  be^n  used 
raf>at  eorum  consilium  quod,  etc.  C  je>.  b.  i-  A  1  •    "  J      imperfect  tense  that  the 

fit  had  not  been  the  «"tennon  "f^j^e  auti^or  to  mtin^^^^^^  ^^  mentioning;  who 

circumstances  which    '^rnls  kI  the  hclp^^^^^^^^^^  the  perfect,  sometimes  the 

wrre  the  chiefs  of  ^*T«''»'l  ^'"/;''^'y,^'' ^f  ^in.iaiK  a    chief  as  a   fact,   viewed 

imperfect,  re,>reseiitin<;  in    the  fo   nei  1  1^^  ;e^^^^^^^^  ^^  ^hc 

IVcm  the  r»^^l"lP^^'"\^l  ''^  enm  m    tmS  c  ius  Iciratir.tns  Divico  princeps/t/t^  (or 
of  the  arrival :  Le-sltos  ad  eum  nimum,  ti .  -  i^^atiOnis  NamSjus   et  \  er 


the  time 
erat). 


n  ' —  (jresceoni  inierim  m"^.  ^^^-  --,  ".'"■;— 
i.'ci  ifMi:- IV,  w.v.  ..............    '_.      A    .  Of.     Theoredicatesof  these  sentences  miJihtne 

lloma  interim  cref>nt  A  '>^e  r  Tni>  lb.  1.30.  f J^^, f  ^"jj^an^  (continni)  displicgbar.  Cic. 
interclianged  with  each  ^^^''^['^^'''^J^-r^l^.  ^  admr'iut.  Il>.  Sest.  57,  122.  EOrum 
Att  2,  21.  8  ;  and  :  ExistimSre  <^^^  I'l'f  7.^f""^4^^\lq'^ -^tKs  t w^  way  of  viewin-  an 
judicio  qui  adprer^mjyvo^mi^,^^^^^^^^  ^ed  from  the  stand-. 

^:^::^l^Z^ZC^^r£^i^^ym^^^  »«  predicates  denoting  actions  of  the 

"o^;.  t^^^'lauses  with  inMJcr.ct  pr^^-^of  tir^^ 

I^JKt!^'^!^;^^™^^^^^ 


OBS.  3.  In  the  foll«^^vinlr.  instances,  the  time  ^^^^^^^  „.^,^^  ^^^-     ,,,ncate  of 

PERFECT-rREDICATK  IS  ''''V^''';;"^,^"  5^,"^,^,;'^i  ^^^^^^  ^.580);   2)  in  the  HISTomCAL 

the  principal  sentence  :1)  in  the  DLsciiP.iNGn^^^^^  |  time-point  or  a  space  of 


ihaV^cneraUy  treatises  or   ii-ri>^n.V,^pbs  (tl^^bcn.  c^^^  rS^^irS'^Si- 
nenc^e  with  'sentences  conta.ni.y^  f^'^Zlt^o^  witli  'ToU  .'     condcMtnr:  because  we 

2   MassUienses  Albicos,  barbams  ^^'nines  qui  mem  ef  ^^Vr^.^^l^.^  te^imonium.  quod 

go  vocaverant.  Ca^s.  B.  C    V-;^~  ^i  \-      Tie     \tt  7    2    7.--  4.  Cc^sar  in  L  n?ones 
non  qjia'rBam:  quod  P^^V/^Ar^amnesraMt.  U(\  ah-  «,  _^      Ab  hoccmsilioLingones 

crat  quia  arce r-r-KTTir^iTilt^TTmaFt^.--  *  amicitiatn  alicuju» 


31G 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES, 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


317 


riOie  parte  i«diumW/^^ye/f//^rt/  en   n  nx     i  ^  venenit  eiiim  in  Jtinns.  t  n.  LucJiin-, 

tnr   I   V  1   4U-  12.  Panlo  P"''»  ^^'^'L,  ''"  pj'"  aV;  15   ib   1  -  13.  Consules  nee  »eUitiO- 

prc.».u  ■''^""^'^^''''ri;  '','';;,,<,,,•,<,,,  assumed,  but  is  represented  to  go 
its  action  .snoconnnd  |«  "-  ^'  ^^.„^,„  H-deno,c,  an  action  incom- 
bcyond  IS  hm.ts  (E^-  ;0-  -1   -*•  ,„  „,^,  ;,    ,,,fect  even  wul.- 

plclebyitsownnatmc.solha  .t«ou  8.10.13.22.20.27); 

out  any  designation  of  tunc  (U.  ^C.  «B^-  ^'  l*^;  -  ' ;  «  ,^,^^,  ,,;,„.,„  „.„ 
3)  .,,e..  t..e  P™»-y~,r '  :  .:  ti  "^^^^^^  '•-  -«...  and 
r:£"p";;tedt::ing   on  during    .be  titne.   are  or  inde.n.te 

iX  adverbiil  den.onsirative  J'M'ress.  n,  si.nil^u    t..  tn  -^i,i„„,^ 

.prLio,.  '^'-^^  ^b    fexprJ^s!;:^^  '"^^l^STt  by 

UMiinoralc-lanst'S,  eillu'rabhUives  .iDsoiuuv'/^^t  .    .      clauses, 

^v:^K  <>->."->''-';;-i,';;^ll,^;.;^t\';'Tbr;r;  /,;;-;« or-  '««p--  «-• 

U,e  latter  >»■•■'.?  ,f;,f'\'!>  "V    V    Bvprinoipal  sentences.  U.  0«. 

(See  Oi»s.  a,  and  It.  1.0.  Kx.  .) :   -^)  iy  1'^'»^'   ,„„.„,,,„,, .««».(»« (Er.io-is.) 

:;^S^-e^     we,^«^^^^  "•^^^'^  ^"'H''^X™di;^^te  i^'u.e    m-KurJ^T  (according   to 
Gi!  130.  SCO  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  15).  (ipai^natc  periods  of  indefinite 

mmmmmmmm 

En-lish  in  renderin-  such  V^'^^^^  ,^,\^;ocihiis  ejiciel^^  ^^^  ^^»?^^  """^" ''„'''^>Suurn?d 


t.    '«  time  and  to  the  time  spoken  of  before,  takes  its  predicate  in  the  im- 
^  OB.  3   If  the  period  a.nimed  lor  the  '^c"*>^^,:\"^4"/,k^^Th   .uch  as  the  author  con- 

Of  an  action  (Nvheih.-r  t\>"  '»"^J ''J  4  and  the  Ex.  10-14  to  U.  60. 

Ex  28.  2«>,  the  last  examide  ol  Obs.  4,  auu  luc  x.  ^^^  ^^^  j^^, 

bii  in  the  perfect.  j,   Tiir.rnm  seauiTles"   male  locflto» 

ri»  rd  nisi  a>>*l'l''''' V^,''.  „  l     ,J  dit«  lu'cnn-i.  Plant.  ,Kl'.'f.';,5-.p-f7,' 'i  4  _  igrut 

planian-.-  >*  '^'  ^"S'  ;.*,!    .to  ench  other's  hatids.-  i«  ^l40^'2e';^;'-y  ^^^.  _  22  cHar-e.- 
longer  than  the  readins. 


318 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


Ptr  1h  Or  1   u  -9^  Cx^ar.  dif-s XXVcommorafu.9  dahaf  opernm^ntin  ofRaolinmnO' 
Ck    Verr  ^  4  21  -sfyW^^m-^///*  fore  fuT^t  urbs  sine  armis,  ^ed  oratOrum  aul  «i'^cesHU» 

2^  F  Li     .    t  tiuu  ill"  vUt.)ri  na'<»  f>iU  i.i  Sicili-l  ;>^r  ^ru^«//i'/w  Verre  prcetore    lb. 
2,  M.  (See  tbe  Ex.  10-14  to  U.  60.) 

Rem  58  If  the  period  of  time  by  which  an  action  is  determined,  an- 
swers io  the  question  '  how  lonr/?^  (p.  234,  II.  14).  so  that  the  designated 
period  is  conceived  as  '  measurinf/'  the  time  of  the  action  m  question, 
the  predicate  cannot  be  pUiced  in  the  impertect,  as  : 

PomuSinm  vidi  IV.  Id.  Deccmb.  Fmrnus  (uoi  emmus)  unfl  horas  duos  f«>';^;JSse,  I  saw 
Pmnm  V  on  the    Otb  of  De(itn»)er :  we  were  about  ttro  honrs  to^rether.  Cic.  Alt.  7  4 

HT'IZ  q nutn  ca^tra  inille  passus  inde  posuis.et,  i^^^^^^'V''^'^ '^'^V   V^.m  tlfafj^lo 
(n<»t  S/xio;  ^VMuM.  tlu.  c.,nsunuid  pitched  can.p  at.ou^-th(M.*aiid  pace,  fiom  th^ 

he  ktpt  tiiere/0/-  t^tccnU  days  a  stationary  eair.p.  Liv.  44,  4b.  x.       .  * 

C)R^  1  Tbe  idea  of  coinpleteiio^s,  which  is  always  involved  in  actions  the  time  of 
^vhi?U^bt^meas,tred  ei-h.destbe  use  of  the  in.perfect  ^}-:'-^\%'l}''^JTZ 
nleeu'x-'  is  tala-n  in  th.,- conventional  sense  mentioned,  K.  52  and  li- •'^^' ?b^- ,^' '^« 
J^  V.  i  .t..  r/m;y  be  1  aced  in  tbe  imperfect,  since  in  these  cases  not  tbe  action  itself,  but 
lira  fbea,-    <'^.^^^^  as  '  incomplete'.    Tluis  in  the  sentence 

Fx   5  t< 'k  5"Tcic  Rose  Com.  3),  the  predicate  relinquebut  has  the  Orce  of  causa  erat 
J^uid    pe^rfea.n)  reli,m4l  \.uC.  il  placed  in  \'-.-M'-^ -^/'j,-;!;^y^/il/;-^  ^^ 
I,-  ..<iii'.-<l  tu  li-ifinii'im     In  the  ast  sentence  quoted,  U.  57.  OBS.  3,  livjinia  aics  •  ..•  • 
w/Jn.Jw  n.eansMack  ..f  resuUMbe  action   as  ^ncb  beins 

c  fn/u  lie      T^i^^^^^^^^^  frequently  tbe  cas,;  in  predicates  denoting  hahit.  as  in  the  ^eu- 

?;S'ex:  2.; ,  "r.  5"(Li  v.  4^1,  l.-.)/Thus  :  Ilic  mos,  quern  ,;e.  oni'^'\^Uims^^aMi^.^^ 

ac'b.r;  Ab    h',!  «>nd    a  pe^'an,  ^C&^  eoLnfi  Mnmt  Ho.nilni  usn  aquflnnu 

quas  ant  e^ribe^i^auU.^  jluteisaut  ex  fontibus  hauriebant.  Front.  Aquxd.  4.  bee\x.  12. 
Ob^    2    The  expressions  by  which  the  dnratioii  of  actions  is  thus  measured,  are  phrases 
^v;Vh   ;utm^  1^  mea^^urc"     adverbs,    prepositional  expressions  den<.tin<;  the  in.tial  and 
;      imS  pointMl^^o  tLj.r.   ,^,>^  ad  t.n,..  u^ue  ec^J-^f^^^  'TSnliotS 
ia»7  o-v ',  iiTtroduced  by  the    conjunction  quamdiu,   etc.     lor  tbi»  kind  of  tuni.or.ii 

clauses  see  K.  til.  ^  .  ■   *„  „„ 

1.  Macedonia  a  fnmunoc>.lmine^\forfun(^nd  ^^'^^^»'^-^'?^''*,f »  J'f^.j;'?^,^^;/,;  ^,?"! 

nn^ftfp/it    Liv  45  l>  —  2.  Vide,  si  quis  e^t   m   e-l  provinciil  in  qua  tu //<€«/a//m. /me- 

?\^^/    ,  ^^  t^i  nolit  i)eri^Ve    Cic.  Verr.  2,  3,  77.- 3.  Ex  eo  die  di^^  contwuOM  qmnqne 

^(fr  "^o  'SJ^Zr.o^^^produ^'^^  et  iicieni;^"  i-tntctan^»  ^f  ^^^f;;:' -^ S 

z^:  i^s^iiro;;^^^;;;;].;^  i^:vSs^'x;nc^;ue  ^^it!'^:^t^^T^-ryi 

KaV  ma  Fori  maTve.  iin.",  et  (lb  hard  rx-fara  ad  v..per,nn  secrCto  ro  'oc/y/i"  ^„nus.  lb. 
A  t7  8  4  -  Pop  s  1  omanus  aliquol  an>,o.^  ante  leirem  (ialnmam  maxima  parte 
iin  HM-ii  mn/i/  lb Te-  Man.  IS.-  7.  Idque  Scievoiie  conti-if,  qm  solos  ;jom«  jne^isls 
in\\H'U\  cannr.  li.  ^»- '"J*"-  \^  ._„  *o,i;e  nuum  ita  esscnt,  tameii  Dejotarus  j^vv^e 
K"";;^/ QU^;  ^'      l^o,   pSo  l^tt^^^^  DcJ.4.1.-9,  Id,.o,i\en  nsq.e  ad 

PyUia'     4  /S  -iV^^  aHatiMii.  lb.Tusc.5,  3  3.-  10.  PotitilantHtues-^»  "J^rT.  fi.l  us 

-■,   rph. ..„..(.tioii  hiiovvs    that   ihecare  taken  by   Ciesir   was  unsuccesslul.-J»  Keep 

•..  •      ,^V^  3  Pirv.,-i  in   in^^^  *  censer^.-»  what  he    bad  torn   Irom  the    ceu- 

To  ";;.f  othj;  uS  le  -"  a  r,  iv.-  "inserted  irepeafed  acaon).-  «  depar.ure,- 
V'nt^nLTav^l^'wre  to  old  the  most  promim-iit  place  in  the  bar;  ^tLe  aCion 
outSe     hfpMl«.<h^  «"V  name.  The  meetinu'  of  the  Senate  '«t.  If/.^^y- 

^s"  e  period  aEumed.-  H  ,be  rule-  .•/concluded.- 'Mnstead  ^»^  f-f^^e -*p  nl 
jM,,-ru  ,uir.-  's  to  examine^-  '•  tbe  pnetonan  \^  • "  '  ^*  «^.^^  "  ^  "f^-.2  ,vere  n 
„  w.ip    tim  —  »»  nresented.-  '•*<>  h  s  1  nes.— ^»  drawn  tip.     See  p.  ^•>4,  <  bs.  .5.  wen  m 

"eciel  coKVerencle.-  -  r^--^..  eo  .  .  .  quad,  till  the  time  that.-^*  exiMed,  was  used.- 
"  the  heads.—  '-•  sanctuary.—  "•'^  race.—  ^*  shop. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


319 


,-.  /  Ti.  Vrrr  2  4  24.-  13.  Id  ego  jusjurandum  patri  da- 

h-t^'i   .^  hinted  for  lite  space  *>V'  ?  tbo  p  upe^^^^^         i^  ^^^^^^^'  ^^  =  ^^^^''  ^"^''^ 
c  Ati'KUFKCT,  while  in  1?"^^^^^^^  .?.  '.^a,n  e!t  T^  ^^'^  ^^"*"'''  ''''  '^^'^''"'^ 

b;?':v^:^Sven^o^  ^^"''''  ^^^^ '-' '''''"' 

fir  a  loiifl  time.  Liv.  24,  29.  accoidino;  to  which  the  predicate 

is  placed  in  ^^^^.f ''^,^^^',^    ,?o  ,  at  the  spbakkr's  tune     1    ^"^^  ^/"^J  "  espondinji  to  the 
kind  are  ^cpresen    d^s  gmn    o  pbkfecT  is  u^V'^  V/.^VI' "  am  o«-'  ^V^^w  al'dmus, 

as  coMiM.ETE  at  the  '^P'^'^'^'-JJ;  '  "'  !  sero  resisimnis  ei  ^^^"^"^^  P^^ f'l' "i inn's  for  ten  vears 

„eolen,,y>rf  'l"'M'""'"'"/.V^'',''f  j' j  m.t  «■»«>  (Have  ''"J,«S"£i'- «S  "cul..»  « 
,„>...eu!:ei-  «W  ™'"\r'';,"  -^/;  ,'^i\im  "  i*-*;-»"'  '.";<=  »  '^fTuJeCXxly  otluT  place 

liine^     If  the  impertect  de'^i'^i'-'^ii'l^^J)^,  meanings  of  the  prtuicai^  .    ,  f\ 

i   in  the  last   it  would  essentially  change  luc  «   ,t„iorv  «tvle  (R.  77,  Obs.  1   (/ ) 

ce8.<i  in  the  last,  it  ^^  ^^^^^^^  ^^^^j^,.  „,  epl^tolary .  tyu  j  ^.^^      ^^^ 

3iOT|e^^  up  their  «reugtb.-    P.  ^i=. 

nobles.-  •  pitblicly. 


320 


USE  OF  THE    TENSES. 


20  13-5  Ibi  oxdntum  et  licesimum  jam  diem  oppvgnaham  oppidnm.  Cic.  Fam.  2, 
10  3  -  6  Mnlti  jam  menses  tian^^ierant'  iieque  Bruiidusio naves  lejrionesquc  ad  (.«sa- 
rpm  veniCbai  t"  c"'«  B  C  3,  2r>.- 7.  yu.im  dtcbnum  jam  diem  -lavitor  ex  intestl- 
ir/X-l^m3,  fli^i  inTtiscuianum.  C^ic.  Fan..  7  '2(i,  L-  «.  Jam  inde  ab  adolescenUd 
c«,'0  hanc  vitam  urbilnam  secatus  num.  u  or.  AuUr.  1,  1,  lb. 

liem  CO.  TEMrOKAL  clauses  designating  a  space  of  time  to  which  an 
action  is  referred,  answer  either  to  tlie  question  MrA^/i.?  denoting  ^  the 
time  at  which  an  action  was  going  on,  or  to  the  question  how  long  J  de- 
notino-  the  length  of  lime  during  which  an  action  lasted.  The  lormer 
are  generally  introduced  by  quum  or  dum.  Sucli  chuises  Ji^n^i re  their 
principal  predicates  in  the  imperfect  (in  accordance  with  §  0.8,  JSo.  4) 
if  the  actions  expressed  by  these  predicates  have  no  definite  time-limits. 
See  Ex  1-9.  But  the  principal  predicate  must  be  in  the  perfect  it 
the  action  is  conceived  nsjinisfied  within  or  about  the  time  designated  by 
the  clause  (Ex.  10-14)  : 

Turn  nunm  insula  Delos  nihil  timCbat,  nos  provinciis  atqnc  oris  marltimis  mr^M- 
mn8.  At  the  time  when  the  island  of  Delos  wius  in  vo/ear,  we  on  our  part  had  no  con- 
JrS  over  our  provinces  and  seacast.  Cic.  Le-.  Man.  18.-I  is  l.i)tis  adnumerandi, 
sunt  sex  de  republics  quos  tunc  descripsimns  quum  gubernacu la  reipublicte  tenebamu», 
Amon-  these  must  he  reckoned  six  books  on  the  republic  which  we  vrote  when  we 
weieholdini^Mhe  helm  of  the  sovernment.Clc.  Div.  2,  1,  3  Ube  writing  '><-'n^;  co^^^^^ 
Dieted  within  the  period).—  Dum  ea  Komflni  |;arant,  jam  ba-untum  summS  \\  onpug- 
naMfur,  While  tlie  Romans  were  preparing  these  thin-s  Ma-untum  «v/s  alreauy  i€- 
t^iegedwmi  the  «greatest  enerj;y.  Liv.  ::i.  7  (the  besie-in^;  hem-  not  dehned  as  to  its 
limits)  -Dum  hH'C  in  Africa  ^eruntur.  Hannibal  in  a-ro  Tanntino  astfltem  con^^^mnp- 
sit.  While  this  was  goin^' on  in  Africa,  Hannibal  was  sjiefdixfj*  the  summer  m  tne 
territory  of  Tarentum.    Liv.  25,  1. 

Obs  1  The  principal  predicate  is  sometimes  placed  in  the  ri.tPEUFECT  instead  of 
in  the"Derfect  to  despmate  the  action  as  anteri(»r  to  oth.-r  tacts,  ^ul>s.  quently  narrated, 
which  likewise  were  completed  within  the  period  :  Dum  hiec  in  Italia  -eruntur.  nuntius 
viiiorije  Cartha<;inem  w<t/rt/  Ma^'o ;  is  res -estas  exponil ;  While  this  was  P>">^';>"  J'} 
Italy  Ma-'o  /lad  come  as  nussenj^er  of  the  victory  to  Carlhage  ;  he  explained  what  Had 
beeu'done.  Liv.  2:3,  11.  See  Liv.  21,  21);  Cic.  Verr.  5,  a'i,  91. 

Ob«>  2  The  predicate  of  the  clause  with  qfo/m  desi-jiiatinc:  a  ]>erio<l  (whether  defined 
or  not)  is  either  placid  in  the  imi'EHFEct  inuicative,  «)r  in  the  imi'ekfkct  sib.iunctive. 
Quum  bein-  rendcnd  by  '  ir/un  '  or  '  icfnle\  (If  tlie  clause  denotes  a  time-I'oint,  guiim 
Ti^nu\n'.>i  the,  ))erfect-indicafire  in  the  clause,  accordinj;  to  K.  55,  obs.  1):  <;/»/ym  omnes 
Caesarem  m^^«'«^x//«M^^  PompC'jus  eum  dili-ebal  ;  At  a  time  when  we  all  «>/v  *//?Ya(/  of 
Caesar,  Pomp.-y  loved  him.  Cic.  Att.  8,  1,  4.—  Turn  qi/mn  hello  sociorum  tota  Italia  ordS- 
ret  C.  Norbanus  in  sunimo  olio  fait  ;  At  a  time  when  all  Italy  was  in  the  llames  of 
the  social  war,  C.  Norbanus  lived  in  deepest  peace.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  5,  4.  bee  Ex.  1-8 : 
10-13. 

Ob«  3  The  predicate  of  the  clause  with  dum  (if  it  desiirnates  the  time-period  when 
anact'ioti  was  performed,  not  denoting  'len-th'of  time  on  the  (luesti-m  •  how  louir') 
i- Dlaced  in  the  PRKSKNT  indicative.  Such  clauses  are  rendered  by  '  rchrle  with  the 
pro'^rc^-sive  form  of  the  preterit,  as  :  Dum  ea  coiK/uinin/iir  et  conjWxhtnr  hominuni 
inilUa  VI  e  (Vsaris  castris  ei^ressi  sunt  :  While  these  thinirs  were  being  colUeted  a/at 
delivered,  (5,(XK)  men  esca[)ed  from  Ca-sar's  camp.  Cas.  R.  G.  1.  27.  See  the  Ex  to  /.'im. 
«0  and  Ex  9.  14.— The  present,  in  this  ccmnection,  must  not  be  taken  lor  an  historical 
present  It  Jias  the  force  of  an  itnper/'ert.  but  seems  to  have  been  convontionally  adopted 
for  thin  meaning  of  dum.  to  distin-iiish  in  this  way  its  other  meanings. 

Obs  4  The  present  after  dum  is  also  found  with  a  force  of  an  Enirlish  pkesent-pek- 
PECT  in  the  sense  of  /iV//<.  42.  as  :  Tuas  litteras  phiribus  epistolis  accepi  dam  mm  in 
Arpiiiilti  I  have  received  several  of  thy  letiers  irhUe  1  have  Uen  (during  my  pr.-seiit 
Slav»  in  tnv  Arpiiiian  villa.  Cic.  (|u.  Fr.  .i,  1,  3.—  If  tlie  present  in  clauses  with  ^i//m  is 
required  by  the  construction  to  be  turned  into  a  i»ubjunciive,  it  follows  the  rules  on  the 

» To  pass  —2  equivalent  to:  Xoship^.  etc.,  had  come  to  C(Xsar  for  many  montJut.—  a  c-ravi- 
ter  iiitesiTnis  laliorilre,  to  have  a  serious  disease  of  the  bowels:  also:  to  be  seriously 
dispeptic  —  *  The  action  is  conceived  as  complete  within  the  period.  Fnmi  such  exam- 
ples the  difference  in  the  use  of  the  English  progressive  form  of  the  preterit  from  tho 
Latin  imperfect  may  be  seen. 


IMrERFECT   TENSE. 


321 


con.ecntion  of  ^^f^^-^-^^^^^^J^^S^^^^^  ^^Bi 

'^';^::s'^^  ^f^r  ^^,>^- %  ,^;re;-^r'i;\^hrssr^i^;b.K 

and  later  wuters,  .he  '^'  If;!  '^;'.  Pcbim"  a.ct  fjl  obmuim'.r.  Cic  Tus^.  1, 

775.»    See  p.  074..  ronnected  with  a  predicate  in  the 

OBS.  5.  sometimes  dum  (in  the  ^^"  «,,^f  j^J^-/;,i;?u^^^^^^^ 
iMrKRFECTiNi>icAT.vEandrard>  ^^ltlymIMlLKFK^^^^^^  meus  hostia. 

The  iMrEUFKCT  .NDTCATivE  ^-JX?.r\  u ^  t  «  me  vx'lenme  secum  m  castra  profi- 
im.noiavit.  Di^lna  re>  dum  <^r,fic.fat  "^  1  ^-ked  me  whether  I  was  willing  to  accom- 
cisci  ;   WhUe  the  sacrifice  ''^f\P'/ir'''f,^:,^^^^^^  ^,r66«;/^yr.SamnIteslnteram- 

pany  him  to  the  war  >ep.  Hann  2-  -  />///?^  h.^^^^  ^,^  Liguribus   agebntur^. 

nain  occupilre  conSti  sunt.  ^'^- .^^'' -^^- fr'','.'*  ,1  41  14  - /?wm  haec  Vejis  agebantur, 
Li -u res  repent Ino  inun-tu  c«>loniam  c  T.Crum.  lb    4i,  i*. 

?;;t;.rim  Cal,itolium  in  in.enti  pericu lo  'u;^^^!  >  ^;^^;^  .^  .^  .^^^^  ,,y  ,^e  construction) 

The  «MP»inFKCT  si'BJUNCTiYE  (as^de  f  on  t^^^^^^^  ^^  rexav.Heret.  alter  eia- 

is  fouml  in  several  passag'is  ol  L>>y-/^"'''  "'^,^  J^^^  j,,  Samnio,  cujuscunque  auspi- 
tam  secQrim  in  cap.it^  ^'^'J.^'^'^V.V/XvVnf^ri  n">en  im  \ngens  concltur.  lb.  lb,  18.--  Poets 
ciis,  oererentur^  Koinitnts  '^;.^/;  "f '"'  i'^y\\  pj  fS^.t^^  both  indicative  and  subjunctive 
S?;ir'rn.^"^rcrs%erCei;  l^umim  S /.n.'^  vidit  simulacrum  suum.  l>hu.dr. 

^'^*'^'  .  oftnr  r/./w    if  used  in  this  meaninir,  in  classical  proBe. 

pPS,;Tr^rc^«ptLr  to"^tr  rllc'r-ule  '^Z  te,.c  a.ter  U...  .ee  OBS.  .,  and 

th"T.ME.  but  otiKT  r.-la.i«..J ..  tlK-  n™'.'"  ."^  .^  ».',■  ,^  't  Time'clau.U,  ihe  te„«.8  of  tl>eir 
clau-.'s  have  ,.nly  ll,c../orw.  '"','',,'''=,"-' ;.',  u-"'  (a  ,lau-c-s  wh.,«.  pn^dicale^  are  de- 
nrcUcati;*  bfiiiR  ilet>riniii.-ii  by  tbcir  "»ii  "  '  •  ^"  '  ..^f  ,i,i(1  im-aniuL'  "ftlie  action 
8:,,n;';  ,1,.  pH"ci|.al.«.n,Ha;.- «cc«rd.ns  to  tbc^^^^^^^^^  -  ^    j,    „„. 

of  the  doer,  or  by  s..ine  «•'l^"'' "-S!'^.  ^  ."f^"  e^^^^^^^^  or  tl  c  sake  of  the  time,  so  that  there 
the  time  of  «me  act  on  >>' '>'"\y  ,;^'  '^^^^^^V^Vins  ^iut  thisdilfeMUce,  though  it  is  correct 
i<  no  <.therc«.nnection  between  teuo  action.    1  ,,,„,.rved.  and  already  Servius 

for  the  great  majority  "f    ^/^  ,  1'  ^' f'j;:;din-    he  t^vo  saying:    Sane  sciendum, 

(En    l,»;'.i7^   c..mplains  of  this  ^«miounni   „  uit-  _,.  ^  ,,.<,nii.ntlv  occurs  in  pass- 

Inalo  enore  g>nan  e,  dumr.  Hom.^ms  ^^.^^^^^^y^^^'^Z^o  luhdum  has  the  meaning 
inir  over  from  one  action  t..  "•'•'l»'*'^/ .  .V'k.    l.  u<U\   in  exactly  the  same  meaning  as  : 

and  III  in  the  meaning  '  when\  see  p.  bbO  foil.  ^ ^ 

ral  manuscripts  have  trahai.f,  whn  h  P'''''-'''.%^,.;';,S^^  L.  ,iie  incident,  being  left  an  in- 
oMhe  passage  shows  that  t>n-i'^;;^^-^;-';.   ;,','/  ,1     Hdb'cl  in  th<-  present  co./g/^r 
coMu.leteacticm  for  the  time  being.     ]^^  ■;'';"  .^.V  of  pueonant   iu-pcilVcts  (see  R    53 
Henc!  coufimbalur  must  be  ^al-t'"  /«»  ^  ^  jm-e  been  expressed  'Pater  wmiolabat 
and  II.  .M,  OBS.  <•,),  -";'V;^,;»'r.;«'l [^  ;:  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  is  written  by  Xepos  b:m- 

et</*/mdivTnaresw/*./f6t/'r,  etc      ^ ''y''^^;''- ,f",i.,r)  manuscripts  read  qumn.-*}^^^ 
pelf,  Mud  not   by  his  epltoml^t.- ^  ^oi  c  on    'lor^^^^  f.  the  remarkable  co-i.ui- 

inii.erfect  is  probably  meant  to  point  «ith  greater  ^^?;!;';' ^\         ^^e  Ligurians  was  cele- 
•iee  of  the  two  actions:/ At  the  ^-^''y /.^'^f^^^'he  3    b)  surprise?-  ^  Some  (infe- 
brating,  the  (same)  Li-Minans  ^^''^.^^P      '"^,7^^  ^e^^s  xl  have  been  iufiuenced  by 

j!;)^?^^nr1ir^?;;;;t:r:^^S^-^ 


322 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


e;  t.-   b  'rarnniniu.  tun.  n-^fnit  quum  ^^''VT'^um^L  C  arn     1«:'  t  tCli  omaclni., 

et  ^schiues  t€,u>bant\     '»•.  ^'-.V,   /w   4->  lUS  -  iV  c\i-ar  7-/«m  im/z/o/^/re^"  iUo  die 

quo  primnm  in  -^■^^J^}^>^:^!\,  ^:^^.  J"X\X^^d,,m  utri.nque'*  subverat»r^\  a 

119. 

cast 

,i.m  K  a  e  J,Sm  'f   i  '     <.«"  nction,  answering  to  ,.,.•  <l>.-.i.m  '  -«« 

turn  rex  fuit  qmdii  ivsfn.  i'i;>c  ""''  ;,';^' V'      ;;''",;, ,,;  .  ,|»  /„«,«*  fi.rco  «w  )«f/n- 

cal  fonn  <>^"'»'l■*'•"'"^  Vr'M-"-;      ;  '^  (P;  ™.  ^    ;  :^^l^^^  ^  ,.„i„^.i,,„  ■„,  ,h«r  dura- 

'««to.»;'"''-     l'''Vy."''\""'y,"'?Pl"-'     \,  .  J    ,  ,  niMi.im^  i.nl.lythat  Loth 

•  a  |«,wcTtul  Kovo.-...noi.l  IP'-«V' "",;.,  Tik    -  "en  rail».-  •'  /«»  <*""'"■  '!'«/'"=• 
I»  gi-adually.—  ^*  into  line. 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


323 


l^ydum  or, uona.    These  conjnncm>nB  ^e  incowl^^c^cr^ 

aft.r  (f'on  answering  to  ttie  quo^ti-.n  j'f^J,^  <\\- ''    j  ^^      t^ijIo  tarried  for  a  little  while, 

strri  .^xr.i^«^ir"U';;SKs;^, 'ar;;'iv!.i' t.».',;  Sippeu.  cic.  mi,.  «.  ^.  see 

%!^:..  If  ,he  co„,m,c,io„  .reqni-  .he  .vn,janc,We  bo^^^^^ 


li.-i  ,a„.u„,  .;.np..ri.  r.leM  ^'';';"]^^';iZ^"l:SuS^i^  Sr*;,^.;;  or  .he  roj^l  troop., 
y;e^-Liv'T^^-1v;;;;^,rc'S'n  a';^  l  ..„,«.^-  Xhe  .tr„,g.e  wa« 

8«  ioni  doublful  .ill  Uarlus  ^ooi  ,l.u,l  take.,)  A.^bt.  J"*t.  11,9. 
,.;Bjb„lu,.eoppi,,o„,u,n.is.™o.Wj^^ 

^'HS^^r  TvJSs?;;r  r  :^i^r  y;;i^S'ii:^e^ 

rtx.^  lb.  Or.  2.  2.i.— 4.  Liir  <a  .i_M<»_  V  <""  "•  '    ,q  _  5    ji„c  /Vd  dum  licmt, 

rum*  ?>'//«^Vi.  ^a//i'/i'/  do.ni  {[n'^s)J '.',*^r>u,J/  lb.  ^,V";,.l  \-!_;  ..  ",,niM,.6  res  L^eri^  uo- 


foruui  (lis  innnnrtalibns  />o//*m'    ori.a     u..  ^  Vo «/  U'.,n    li  a  n"^  '^ 

ii^  o  remorati'^  dum  in  elephautis  auxihum  pvtanL  hall.  ^ »'g-  ^3,  -3. 

i?m.  G2.  TlHM-e  arc  two  exceptions  to  the  rule  II.  Gl  111  regard  to  the 
use  of  the  pel  feet  tense  : 


.T  k' OK.  ,.r..i..a,e  of  a  c.a..se  ...  .««. ^^^^ 

rr;brpSic?.,:o"rcCraU'era:*;hr^^^ 

nie  nhicecl  in  the  impeufect.  ,,      •  „„ 

"'  \r,Ucn,  benefloia  q,,.  ip.e  .HbaeraUWj^^m««i^<r^^^^ 
r/.h?Uc^i"  V\',-r,l:?,.^:"u.a  t  KrnS.'  N^'P   A...  n.  5.  a.  -  be  reu.e,n,-erea 
?n  ««■»««  (ivheiie  er  he  bestowed),  and  as  long  at).    See  Ex.  3.  4-B. 
r.  .'  m.  Ue  or  ,en.e  in  regard  ,o  .;:« /-^1-.;;  of  ,he  c^J^ 

fi';;,i^'=a^srn;er«s.eK^;i^';d!Mm^^ 


mortal  -ods.—  »=  remained,  tarried 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


325 


324 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


"■OB^"^.  ir  ,he  .ja,,,e  «.,,0.0,  horn 

laTe?/t"  would  not  dan  to  utler  any  unusual  or  obnoxiou.  word.  tic.  Or.  8,  25. 

Wmmmmmmmm 

interest,  and  not  in  that  of  Verres.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  d,  ov. 

deinctede  inte-ro"  ca?ptnm,  nec  d>mi  per  patentia-»   .Kaj/;/c^6(l^/r  a-.nu.     a/v^a  »^^^^ 

Zut  loii^  _r/>/n  Sulla  in  Allis  ivbns  emt  occu p:\lusi-'.  erant^'^  lulerea  qui  .uis  vul- 
5^:    i.ir  ned<!^mi^M.";,!  KO.C.  Am.  82,  OL- 7.  ^.^^'^  1  Min  vidc^Su/'IlP  PnJv '  oZ 

^-ts^Sj^^irairnSS'^^j^i^^'-cSi;^^^ 

L;7'^;  posTea?,uam  acce.sSrunl>^  pills  nmralibu.'-  interlbant.  Ca>s.  6.  C. 

7  82 

Rem  63.  Frequently,  especially  in  the  historians,  the  time  of  actio.is 
to  be  mentiotuMl  afterwards,  is  expressed  by  rKi>ciPAL  ^^;^'^;^;f;^^;^-^^J^^^ 
time  in  this  instance  is  mostly  represented  as  &  period,  but  sometimes  as 
a  time-point.  ,.     ^, 

^:::M".^^i>^rJi^'nZ^^':''n'  Already  t':e  liLo/  «^ 'fcf -'  "''^  <"■'"«• 
inr'waV ••  but  ClauJius  came  earlier  to  Home  than  Sc.uproDiua.  Liv.  39.  3-i. 


.  f      5„nn..'      3  nnon *  nrmv  —  »  nile,— •  to  maintain. —  'gen- 

them).-  >i  who  ha<l  the  exclusive  k'H>NV^^'  ge  o    theni  -    _J'',^^j;;f/;f  «i/^^^»,,,  ^r.-s, 

tic)  imperfect  implying  '  ^^'"'Vf,;;!^  '-To  ^/^'^0«  S^  ^  rv  ;/^'.cA,  tl  e  imperieci  in.plying 
i.  c,  gratified  their  own  appetites.- i»  cftc^  /^ofjiit^^r^^^^  railu  r  distasielul  to 

;::;;r  ^r:,?s,;:^s  mid  •  wbii;^^^ti.y^^t  r^in^di^iUce  ahe^..;.  .^ng 

?nSe  at  «ev^'ril^,.n.s.-  n  t/>ey  effected  m^^^^^^^^^^^  ^[KL^i^!:!'-  „"^^1  frirc-heS" 

paratives  lonqius  and  /)/«*  refer  to  each  other  (the  -rtaiet,  uie  mur».;.  1 1 

^^jjilurn  tnurale,  a  wall-javelin. 


i 


Or»  The  oredicates  of  such  sentences  are  placed  in  the  imperfect  if  they  denote 
Fimes  o  time  cofncident  with  the  main  action.  If  anterior  to  the  main  action,  the 
n  li, ,.  il  ti.o  n  111)%^^  (Ex  6) ;  if  it  denotes  a  time-point,  it  is  placed  in  the  PhR- 
'f^ct?Kk  4  The^  ac  i onfrifeTrini  to  this  time  are  placed  in  the  perfect  or  ^mperfect 
FECT    l!.x.  4)       1  ^^^  »^'  J,.    ^     .         expressed  by  such  a  sentence,  refers  only  to 

clause  is  almost  always  in  the  perfect. 

1     7ntn  invfsmrascebat\  ct  nc  in  proximam  quidem  noctem  nbi  satis  tuto  cnstodirS- 
Inr'lSi.eS^^^^^  I^i''.  3'-^  ^b.- 2.  Anni  {tern pus)  ]xjs(  circmyiadumsol- 

l^J;  3    r  /  hma  d^^^  ad  wendiemtercrebat :  Iter  mu  to  PV^^-^'^^*  f^^\'|"Vf'.;ii 

C€^s€raid\  quum  ille  alter  Alius  nectltur.  Cic.  Clu.  9,  28. 

liem  G4  Predicates  of  repeated  action  are  placed  in  the  imperfect 
if  the  actions  are  represented  to  have  happened  at  several  indepiite  time- 
points  in  a  period  expressed  or  nndersto()d  ^^iletheMlle  same  is  ^etined  m 
its  extent  or  not  (see  Ex.  1,  Obs.  o4;  Ex.  23  2.),K.  o.  ;  K.  62  ^o.  2).  On  y 
il  the  i>eriod  is  defined  bv  nmnerals,  and  tlie  question  is  how  Ion?  the 
repetition  lasted,  the  predicate  is  placed   in   the  perfect.     See  Lx.  6, 

\\.  58. 

Obs    1    The  particnlar  time  of  imperfects  of  repeated  action  is  often  ^^^"^^^^^^S^;^'^ 
ninnmiernVcnli  r  to  this  class  of  imperfects,  as  :  Qme  apud  Sallusiium  rara  fugnint 
^  wi    n.u^rre  ri  sii   t  •  nee  -^ine  cau-k  :  ille  enim  in  luec  incidtbat.  at  hic  illa  qna^rebat  ; 

if  ,  r  1 1,    n    SerZ   14      The  period  understood  for  '  incidebat '  is  the  whole   time  of 
afl.T  them.  hen.  Kp..  IW.    ^i  ne  |        ^^^^  ^^  Peculiar  is  the  use  of  a»dteb<t7n  ^used  thus 


t  that  we  nacl  souis  laKeii  uui  ui   vn^-.  i,ii.>c.. -«.,...  ...v.  ... y-- 

niv   1",  27  (E\-    1-3)      With  this  imp<-rfect  a  time  must  be  understood  which  the  author 
fs  p'resuined  to  knmv,  and  to  which  he  refers  in  his  mind  without  declaring  it. 
nn«    o    Predic-ites  denotin«^  repeated  action  are  placed  in  the  perfect,  1)  if  "."/«^y; 

•liiiiliiiiiiilli 

d,  o,  i.      ^".",      ;.    ,,'       «   /1    A   9.>     'iMiii- in  the  tir«t  sentence  Quoti'd.  Obs.  1.  the  per- 

si:sy;«?s;;,-iSi/wo:,icthtebVi^a';pX.<v^ 

r»„  ^    •?    Tn  the  insfincc^  mentioned  obs.  2.  adverbs  expressing  repetition,  as  .^crpe,  ere- 
l^:;,np^^"^^y^^^^o^^-  predicate  in  order  to  qualily  the  action  as  a  re- 

~~ : "^     '•      '■         Q  ;t  „•.,<  ,i,.fifi,.<i  _  3  literally  after  the  solstice  had  been 

—  '  had  not  yet  elapsed  in  the  meanwhile. 


326 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


327 


cL", em  cm'limlcs:  *,««•  .-x  Inluu.Sli  „r^Jicarll  ;ulvcr.a  Cit.:i.-cm  pruil.a  fcc•.^.c.  Cks. 

cri  <nT  of i'  I  r""t  bin,  and  ortc  lu>  l.onk»  were  pawmdio  buy  »....;.  0  c   ^i=8t- 51.    10. 
Here'lL  parm-ular  ti,,,:.  i.  U.e  n,„,,  i,-.,n,,rJ,uM  pom.  or^^  .^^ 

;;a,.ii™,;i«''t;me'S^'SMr/bi;ial!cV 


recoiling  of  rhiiiuWivii^oii^A^ii:  'i\n'yof)fauiea  oracles.  )  ,,     .,       ,       „  „r 

Ob^  4    Peculiari*  the  u^eof/^rt-p^  with  an  imperfect  if  it  i^  *^'''V;<^c^'''^"''^.^!;,f,  ?  H/.. 

P  r      \undS  <k'  ili^ au  to    "r;>.  aurluUnn  ami  diceret  se  Iu^i^*  mai:i*.  (^ua.n  "tilitat >8  cleM- 

deHon/ovcJi/Cic  Fi^^^^^     19  (i/..,  Often  when  Auildius  said  tl.i.  Uca^aheanr.  -^Pr^^V^ 

nu  ^   ",    Tho  flbverh  anotidie  always  refers  to  a  certain  period  (exi)resse(l  or  under^tooti) 

Sn  •  \.iovi^tuJ^  d..rin-  all  these  livr!  days,  fought  a  calvary-lK.ttle  ^^^^'7;  «;  '/pf '.^  ' 
G   1   48     In  the  same  syaiguoddie  is  used  with  an  imperfect,  if  refc-nm-  to  //a'.i/6  (Ex.  lo). 

•    ;.  Non  erit  tihi  hoc  -vum  ;  nam  j^j  ^l^  A  -  ^'iSS'  ':;l^^'^Ji:^^n: 

?ia^m   ii!  DW  risr^!- Umemin^^^^ 

-^1  WeT.mvVa^KiTin-Tnch  case-,  the  predicate  answers  to  the  q^^^!"',»*';";,  j, [j"^;  "[^^^^  \{^;;^ 

that  the  pelfecl  after  s(Epc  is  analogous  to  perfect  Pr^J'^'^tes  answer.   ^'  to  he  q^^^^^^^^ 

loHii ''  -"^i-  «•,  "Obis  pueris.-  3  Ilow  the  whole  audience  then  raanifebted  their  reelings. 


e.!.,!m.rc.  facili.,,  po,..„..  n"^  «^''-'SSr-'f  sim;;iSe7.'p.tp"rm\"S:q,?o1 

h„c  iP-^";;;;  log; '-{(f  Sem  :^;«.  n  J  ,  ."i o.tibn' *  Z»-«.  q...^  >%>er  a  boni?*^ 
(because)  11.  (jiaccni  moricui  ;.(^//c  HI  V.       ^   ,.„.„/.;„,„   -,^^t;nri   sipiw.  ex  te  rt'/cnri 


(beca;.se);iM.Gracc|un,ortem.|/^incu  ^^  ^^     ^^^^,^ 

m/^<^/*^^  Ih.Or.2.40  1.0-  b^^^.^^^^^                             ^.j.^^^.  ^^,^,^^,3  opertnm*  c..n- 

tunm.  lb.  IV--\^,   4       8    in   SeinOn<S  reliqulQue  Galli)  COAJ.^?^^^^^^  nunfiave- 

;:i;^;^rnii^"<^^  e;.^-Un.;nn  mnnn^^ 

cnsiVm";-^,.;..rAiM-udens.i_nce,^ 

niOti  nnntescrebn.interpelabant«  (Cuii*^^^^^^^^^  j^^^^.,j^     ^.j^. 

mihi  videbar  habC'ie  cou'mtum  ex  cis  r^-'^"**  ^^^^^,  I^^i^tw   Tw  o  3«  -  13.  Revertit 

rences.  imnerfeci  tense  is  the  nsnal.  although 

Obs.  1.  In  describing  aflfairs  «^  ,<^f^H",J'  ^Jj^'X  1^"«^^^^^^^  <«^'^"  intermingled 
not  a  nece-sary  form  ot  the  Pr<;^'^.^^«,^  ;.r*^5,V^.*^^  ^ re  almost  always  used  in  re-ard  to 
with  historical  presents  and  '"^^«V^f    ' "Sx^^^^^^^^^^  and 

pnch  occurrences,  if  the  doers  «f «/^    '"j^V"/;^^^  Galli  crebris 

masses,  as  for  instance  in  ret;:.rd  to  !»^^  d*\Vnf  inil    es  occuStos  in  opere  adoriebarnur  ; 
eruptionibus  aut  aL-eri  iirnem  ^rifcrtbant,  iwimiM^^^^^^^  ,mraban1ur 

ernostnlrum  turrium  ^^Itituchnem  arf^^^^^^^  ,,^  either  the 

nicenibu.que  «I'P':"^"'^"^';^/^  ^1^^"^  la^  the  siege-works;  they  k^pt 

breast-w.)rks  o»  fire,  or  attacked  the  *'''}^f\J*J^^;T^^^^  trenches  with  larse  stones 

heir  turrets  at  eu'uU  hArjht  ^V^^^h'^u.ut   S'  B   G  f^i.-        i"  the  description  of 

an.U-.y>^  them  Irom  ^PP''^'?,^;'  7/ho  ba   le^  Abditi  in  tabemaculis  aut 

the  panic  in  Cjfisar's  camp  '\^''*»;;^'',^J^\^  !'^^^^^^^^^  periculum  rni^rabantur. 

pedes  altte  d'icehantvr  -ante  hos  «-^''^  '!*  X' ^„,\"/*i  "J,^^^^  Permanent  trenches 

Vrv^exadcabanhir;  reliqna  pars  scro  is  virgult  j  i/^;^f^^^^^^^  .^^  ^^^^^^j^^  ^^^ 

live  feet  deep  were  made;  in  front  of  the^e,  P\\f/,f// "'7  ''  ,.^^  np  with  twigs,  etc. 
TamledfaA-n\x  earth  ;  t  he  «-^-"^" >";,"^, P;^^,,^,;^^^^^^^^^^  iuThe  descriplion  of  the"  pesti- 
CiEs   B.  G.  7.  73.-  Such  imperfects  occur  '"^.;"f^\;"|V.  "  '  roceedin-s  of  the  people  in 

^^  ^^^^^^^^l^rrSTt^^  r;e%t.ibea,  .be 


in  front  of  Bruudusium.    (Ca;&.  B.  C.  l,  60). 


1 


328 


USE   OF   THE   TENSES. 


'■'T ":,!  I":,i.i:  .^  <"™~  >.'«4''»-';  ii^-rAtr  xisr/:,-:  "t'nq 

corun/;TS6fl«/'«;;qu.te«lio.nam.    ^^'^J^^,^,,'^ ,  fi  Ui  po^trCnu,.  o^rfere'^^ 

SaVT^Iixa  iuT'cnti  ponderc  «'^'/^^^'^f,  ,' ..V^  V"'^;  ^,    nj  •  •  a  pro?u53.  esset.  suspen-a*» 
br^a4^r".p:>^"^"^^^  LbU^r  cadcnten.naven.  und. 

affligibat^*.  Liv.  24,  34. 

B.     PaUTICULAK   classes   of    iMrERFECTS. 

1)  Imi>€rfcct  of  contingent  action. 

""oB.  'n.e  pro,„ca,c,  .lono.in.  repeated  «cUons  ^'i^^lZH^tlS:^  ^'^f^ 

co.itingoncy(U.tib,  OP.8.  2).                     „,i,;r.],  imnoitVcts  of  rcpcatrcl  actions 

Jinn.  05.  TlK.  cc,nth.g<^cy  m.   ^^  h    n^^  ^^^  ^^^ 

arc.  made  aepcMMlent,  is  cMtlu;r  ex,  us>u     )}  M  •,,,,,,,  i^  under- 

ciPiALCONSTUUCTioNsa-^x.  ol  o.)   ^^^//"^^^  au-uriis  semper 

stood,  being  generally  '"^^'«'^\^.^^|  \>  ^^^'^^^^^^  2,  30.  TO.  (Ex.  1.  2.) 

ytebatnr  {L  ...whenever  an  ;>^^,^^f  *'"  ^\*^3, ' qv^^^^  iruius  furere  viderC- 


s^,Vo  i::;k^u;:r  ^v{;vn.vw  -  ;;i^,j^^.^'^-;:;;  •:;,t  -  u;  ^*^'^''^;^'^^:;;:;^! 

wt-,  to  vote  a-ainst  n.e  -  '«  •*  "  'i  I  t,,  I,  •  eft  and  riiht.-  -^  xvIhmvv.t.-  ^*  a  ^  qia".- 
yJnne-other..-  •■^'^  ""^^i^'lVr  r.noat  -  '^  i.i  alinanv  diSo.ct  direction,  an  1»"^'""  - 
roll  -  -^  in  mat^pc!*.—  ■**  to  reticai.—  "\.  ,„  ,i,..ni-ihi  bodv  —"■'«to  (^iirround.—  ^"  oit 
'.«tho^e  that,  bad  been  separated  ^"  '''^-JI'^lV,  **'    ,'i  n "' -'  3.  .,Ui..cs.-  33  to  di'-trn)"'^- 

8*  to  hurl  —  3^  to  attack.—  •'*»  weapon.—      ;,/,'.,'..,..„  ™^/  _  3b  an  iron  grapple.—  •*»  tht- 
lSra;,V;i  S^^;;^' "  l^at^/beiu  loo.el,e...-  "  da,„e.l  i.  a^a-s.  ..."  ««.er- 


IMrERFECT  TENSE. 


329 


nrcssion  on  me  that  the  angry  Telamo  was  raging  Cio.  Or.  2,  46, 193 
ii  e  mcnciej-  he  smke  these  words,  he  made  on  me  the  impression  etc). 
The  finite  elanses  expressing  contingency  in  regard  to  repeated  actum 
are-  (.0  Tempokal  clauses  yw  \ih  qmrm,nbi,vt,  aud  nmulac ;  {b)  Loii- 
nrnoNAi  clauses  witli  si;  (c)  Kelative  clauses,  in  which  the  rela- 
^vradk'Clivr  or  adverb  is  treciuently  compounded  with  cinujue: 
(rfrCertain  classes  of  compakative  clauses.-  The  tense  of  the  predic-ate 
iutlic  contingent  clause  is  mostly  the  pluperfect  indicative  (obs.  4). 
no=    1    ConornWv  the  finite  clauses  expressing  coutingeucy  referring  to  repeated 

afraid  he  nii/'ht  have  conmi  l.ed  '''^'l^"'"^:.t'l-t^^^^^^^^^  if'JlnyZ'e  («hen- 
vem  religuvnanl,  luistes  unclu|ue  M»  'f  "'«     '  "\™™"r^^^^^^^^  lo  help 

eve.)  our  troops  had  faMe.ie.  a  /'''P^V'e  1"^»,  »«^»1^»  "  r<p  <R„Te  the  co„tiu. 

^.'^y^^Shapl^fn^agu^J^f^sJil-^-^ 

te'i'airrta^ji'i  |;?:«err  ;f ^  «^ 

the  indellnites.  especially  when  they  ««-.^  «"  j'  !^^.  ;^^if^d  acti<  is  lep^esented  as  immedi. 
.  i,„  si  i'/''^^'^''«";' ^';^;.),„^,f.'^,^„^„JJ-  the  c%S.on?SU..  sivmlaiqve,  vf.  are  used, 
«/e/y  con^eqMent  to  ^^c  contingrncj    tue  co  j  remisfiat  dissoUlms  reperubatur  ; 

S:^'(^ad:^2^\ai^^'/S.^  i^^^^^^n  as  ke  KaU  untent  (thrown  off  h:s  re- 

^''o^'^^J^  e^:e!itng^ontingency  ff-^-^^S^^^  ^L^r/^n^'e 
cLAtsE  when  the  idea  of  --^^^^l^^^^,^l^^S^!^%^ 
eonnerted  with  any  member  o    {^'^^S  [^^r^^*;..?;^^^^^^^^  .  as  :  Quo  gvi  intraxerant,  ^e 

lorm  may  gei.erally  be  leplaced  by  claus^^^  (alwa3^)  involved  in 

ip.i  ac.tissimis  vadis  iHa>ub'iHt;  ^^[[^^'^''^'^'Y'^^   f  ^^'  ^^0^  eo  intralerant,-  Ubi 
the  sharp  pricks  of  the  palisa  les   [  *'\-.  V^VnrP  .y-.i<ti?ban^       €..  Sicvbi.  n  qvo  loco, 
plurimum  periculum  ostendebatxr   ibi         "I'Jp',^,."';^;  \Yer^^^ 
;.steudebatur) ;   ^Vfu^er  ^^^^^^^'^^  "i^^^T^a/i^^  i^^que.^tif  eon,pou..ded 

crsoever,  etc.  :  »i  9««Wi«//<9we^in  partem   mpuumy^^^^^  ^^^^ 

Imchattv^r  direction  xhvy  \'^^l^^^^}]^}''^:J}^lf^^^^^^  of  the  con- 

^.  V.  2,  41.  Ex.  IS.-  Since  by  the. e  ^     'P«^    f,j;;^\^J'^",^  f^'^^^^^^^  (Ex.  19.), 

Ungencv  is  separately  marked,  the  ^*-''»^^,.*^'''*^',^/  ' ,  ,,,  Ivl'  J-.kpfe^      for  the  same 
or  of  both   predicates  (Kx.  2n.)  are  sometmes  r^^^^^^  qyotie.am. 

reasons  as  with  miye  or  sevn>er  (i\.  kJ,  Obs.  -J),  t'ltl^  !^hoi^^^^^^  often  \  or  as  of  ten  as  (if 
cjne  (not  =  quocunquc  tempore.  .^"^  =  qua  m  8  s.^^^  ioe/not  auswer  to  the  q.iestioti 
nsi'd  in  that  m.  aninir).  In  this  instance  ^^  P'^  y^f  ^  "  f,J  "t,.).  >-„niquam  dubitavit 
'  whtn  \  but  to  the  question  -Km  often  (R.  ^^-^' ^.^^^f'/Tiy/^^^^  •  Verres  never /<**■»- 
v"rre.  (auferre  a.MmU.s)^.o^i'-.r./«9^.  alu-ujus  am^^  3  ^  ,^^   ^^^ 

tuted  to  steal,  however  ojten  he  lell  in  love  with  tome  one  s  iin„.  uie. 

""II'TtUo  following  forms  of  comparative  clauses  are  used  to  express  contingent 


J3J  C8E  or  TIB  TESSES. 

Vupni  a-irne  labonlret  ^''9}^^  :'\]:,X,,ed  tlu^re  himself  «.r  senf  <»tu  -  «•   '        ,         j,,  fr„ut  of 
tlu' wall  accorihnfj  t    the  ^  V.^  ^  ^,   q  7  4«  ^s.-c  hx.  -i;''-     /I  ,,'/  „i.lv  to  the  action  in  re- 

he  the  P"f''"  "li'n  o  7,  81  (Es.  ai).  .  ,     ,„       mar,!o,  or  7'«).  .f», 

ues  afddimt.  Caes.  »•  i»;  '■  °    ,,„„„,„.,  •  (Mif-^ ■■■■  q«ohH',  I  "<"■  ■  ■/.,(    ...^  „-ilh  quo.  to. 

>r«;i/  «<•!'  /""'^'''  ""  ""-"  .,„„„,,  „t  ,his  kind  in  ro^aM  to 

27-'».  ,  „„  .i.,,«e«  denot  n-r  '■onluisenc>  01    1  „51  on  mn>l 

»-«SS  iii  J-^'SilyS:^^  !i^cen.,.d  h,  ..  othe„. 

'Z^^ilr^.  ",,,,„  , H„e  in  ..a..n,.Mch_..;cnd.^a,iUe,;o^.;.  -^^^^^ 

Or«  5  There  is  a  unifoim  y  "'  '  .^.^^od  in  ehuisi-^  of  :"[-."''  i,.^.s  in  the  claut^e 
in  whidi  contin.^-ent  actions  ^^"^^^^^,^,  Thi.  V>n;;^:;j>;.;.  \'  'J'^ontin^-ent  action 
whe  lier  the  time  is  P''^^''^'   \\,.P,  .^rprineipal  sentence,  w he  oiriiu.  ^^^j.^„^.,.  ^ 

rl^J"«.^.m;;  t^ ;;-   i^^in  U.ne.'  m  i'-^^]^:Z)  ?f  Uie  t  -e  i'  ^Vasf  c»-.  tlie  coj  «- 
w  p.iiiceiv«'d  to  be  anun'"  fnllowin"-  lensen  :  (")  »'  '•"^    .xilpupkct  (or  perfect  n  mu 

tenses     ThiH  IHW  requires   he  JolUm  1  .^^  ,o...^*/^»'  ^^^  nu'  S' y^'-'  »^'  >^  »"  '^^^  "":•" 
Je,    action  is  in  the  p»'^'»,'^.  I^.'t!-^^    if  the  time  is  ^>'''''^^"  "/f'VVt    iVne  is/'/^'?v,  the  conttu- 

^vVlen  any  -ue  did  no.  ^uO,m  ^^^^  ^^.^^  ^,^^  ^t^nit.  they 

ftc  .         «  ouf^i-if  sacriflcus  lutcrUiUin,  n  "   j 

^  (;>  Fn///r^  :  Si  qni*  «on  stetent,  feacr  ^ontin-ent  dances 

J«  .xdud.  I'itn.  «i^-  ,  ^,  ^  „i„„erfoct  (or  imperfect)  in  t^^!^, ^;Vf,,^J,allv  in  clanses  with 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


331 


when  the  continf^cncv  occnrred,  as  Cic.  Quinct.  11,  39  (qnotpd  7?ew?.  03,  OBa.  4).    Thus: 
Driis'iis<'ravi-^  (cnu)  orator,  ita  dumtaxat  ywwm  de  repnblicii  diceret ;  Driisus  was  a  power- 
ful hpe.rkcr,  but  not  otherwise  than  u-hea  he  ii}y}ke  on  public  jiflairs.  Cic.  Brut.  |»2,  2>2. 
Althou-h  Quum  here  ext)resses  lepeated  coiitini;ency,  it  cannot  be  rendered  by    wlien- 
(■ver  '— (6)  Karelv  (in  continjient  clauses  with  quum  and  n)  the  subjunctive  is  used  by 
Cicen»  and  CVr-ar  if  the  consequent  denotes  an  action  which  is  represented  as  havinir  o/- 
ti-am  haopened  nfunenr  the  confmu'ent  action  occurred,  as:  Ilortensuis,  quum parhre- 
^//teciim  caiisas   perorandi  locum  semper  tibi  relinqnWat ;   When  {ever)  Hortensma 
tvoke  a-  your  partner  (divided  the  cases  with  you),  he  (Uways  leftlo  you  the  cIosiul'  up 
or  I  be  cjise   Cic   Brut.  51,  190.—  Sin  autem  locum  ten5ret-f//(?/i/,  tela  vitSre  wonjwterant  ; 
liut  if  (whenever)  th^  concluded  to  keep  their  positions,  Xh^y  could  not  piofect  thein- 
t^clves  from  the  missiles.  Cics.  B.  G.  5.  35.     See  Cic.  Or.  1,  54  '^2  (q.ioted  li.  54  Obs.  2) ; 
lb.  Div.  1,  4r.,  102  (Ex.  14.  to  R.  54):    Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  22,  and  Ex.  30.—  (c)  In  the  later 
writers,  bednning  with  Livv.  the  subjunctive  became  the  more  usual  mood  in  all  clauses 
expressins?  paht  cl)ntinL'encies  of  this  kind,  as:  Quum  in  jus  duci  debitOrein  nrft.*.'"^?^^ 
und.q.ie  convoimant  ;     Whenever  they  saw  a  debtor  conduct  ed  to  the  courts  tliey^ocAyo? 
tof/efTier  from  all  quarters.  Liv.  2,  27.-  Quemcunque  iictor  7>rf/^«»(/^«^e^  tnbanns  imtti 
iubebul:  Whomerer  the  lictor  had  arj-c,sted,  \hc  tribune  ^voiihl  (always)  commit  him. 
Liv.  3,  11.-  See  Liv.  1,  32;  3,  U;   3,  3« ;  «,  8 ;  25,  3;  20,  11  ;   ai,  38 ;   44,  29;  44,  41,  and 
often. 

1  Fatoor  me  hoc  tibi  sa^pissime  nepjassc,  quod  non  superbia  neque  [nhnmanitate 
faciedam'  Cic  Or  1,  22.  99.—  2.  T.rrie  vis^  Pythiam  Delphis  miifabat^,  natflraj 
Si])yllam.'ll).  Div.  1,  3(i,  79.-  3.  Q»um  Galba  otiOsus^stilum^  prehe?uleraf,  motni-que 
aniini».  tamciuam  ventus^  hominem,  defecerat^  flaccescebaf^  M'""."!*"'-  ^'^-  ^l^h  ri^^V 
4  Coiisilion  ejus  quum  valebant  homines  ntebantur,  pairociiiioi^  quum  ^u-^ia/i'.  lb. 
34   i:}0  —  5.  Verres  quum  rosam  xiderat,  tum  ver  incipere  arhitrabatur.  lb.  \  err.  2.  5, 

10  — g'  (5'/^///iuiuepiaini4  coht)rs  inipetum/f^^/a/",  hostes  velocissime/v/wgtedrtn?L  Cajs. 
BG  5  35  — 7  I'nusquisque  opiniOnes  finrrebatis.  ct  ad  id  quod  ab  alio  audierat  sui 
aliqu'id'addSbat.  Hoc  nbi  unoanctore'«  ad  y>\x\v\^  permanaverat,'-' ,  plures  auct5re«i8  ejus 
Yvxrid>^ba>.tur.  \h.  B.  C.  2,  29.-  .s.  UU  frumento  et  pabulo'»  opw.s'  ^rn^  cohortes  cuin 
oinni  equitatii  pncsidium  aqitahanf^^  Sail.  Jug.  55,  4.-  9  ^/owac/^a^^a^M/^i  senex  ^t 
quid  asperiu-"^  rfM-*?mm.  Cic.  N.  D.  1.:«.  93.-  10.  '  Nihil  hoc  ad  nos;^^,  ad-*  CicerO- 
iiem,'  innuitbaf.  Gallus  noster,  .vi  <??/i<  ad  cum  tale  quid  retulerat^'.  Cic.  lop.  l<J;Oi-— 

11  Sif/uce  res  eraf  major,  populus  horuni  aiutoritate  maxiine  commorebatvr-^  lb 
Se'-t  49  105-12.  .vi  qua  in  parie^'  nostn  laborire^»*  videbnnfur,  eo  si-na  luferii^» 
C*8ar  wbebaf.  Ctes.  B.  G.  7.  ».7.-  13.  Hi,  si  quid  erat  diii-ius^",  concui^^bant^^ ;  si  qm 
equo  decide rat^-',  circuf,iH.^tebant^\-  si  quo  erat  lon-iuss*  progrediendum,  tanta  fmi 
alieritas"  ut  equoiuin  cur.um  ada;quarent3«.  lb.  1,  88.-  14.  St  qmclquafnc-^mi^- 
axp^xerat,  manu^  abstinere  non  poterat.  Cic.  Verr  2.  4.  22.-  15  Qui  «""'^«/^'^.^^jn 
oppidum  veneraut,  immittebantur^»  lUi  ccmtinuo  Cibvralici  canessa  ^,u  ^V^^.^^Vlnhv 

0  niiia  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  21.-  16.  Quoi  Cibyraiie  fratres;??-o/x/mAiA  eis  crust:«<o  aut  emble- 
nlata*'  detrahebantur.  Ih.  2,4,32.-  17.  Qua  ex  parte*^  no.tros  prcmii"  t;,^^tom/A^ 
his  auxilio**  ex  nlterioribus  castellis  deducto^'»»  svbmiftefxint.  C:es.  B.  G.  <,  81.— 
18  QuCECUuque  navis  ,'X  Asia,  ex  Syria  venerat,  statim  tenebatur.  vectOres*'  omnes  sta- 
tim  in  lautnmias  conjiciebant ur ,  onera  atque  merces*^  ,„  pnetoriam  aoxxinnxreferebaTi- 
J/4"Vic  Verr  2  5  5r,.-  19.  Oi/«cw//7'^e  tter/m<  Seivilius,  hoc  jucundissimuin" 
spcctaculiun  oniuibus  pra:b-,baf<  lb.  2,  5,  2G.-  20.  Quascunque  posiea  controversias 

1  i  e  whenever  I  refused  it.—  ^  power.—  inspired,  i.  g.  whenever  she  issued  an  oracle. 
_  ■•  in  "his  leisur.'  hours.-  5  had  seized  the  pen.-  « fnofus  aidmi.  excitement.-     tam- 

quam  v.rdus  hominem.  supply  dejlcit :   the  same  as  if  »1"«»«  ^^f/^.^JIf   Tahi; 
^  ..         , ,  ,    - 1 :.i    ^nro,,ij  droop. — 1°  his  style. —  ^^  aavice. —  ^■' ma 


crew.—  "  onera  afq 
presenied,  oflered. 


332 


USE   or   THE  TENSES. 


21   NuUaes^tamf  uiiquamecn  cntia   |  \^"''      ^..„,1,^6  vi^i  *^nuX.  Cic.  bam.  .'..  2,  «• 

r„t,i;  ac«4a^  CO  njHJor^d.»»^^^^^^ 

d^Ja'C^.n  et  ab  Hcic  .rc;«rf.W    .  U^ 

que  et  dill  eor/Hanlt  (iiiSiiam  n  1'''^^;':',"  K    ridcMi-ni"  i  ici»  livihus.  Cic.  Uiv.  1.  1. 

tor.  lb.  Brut.  24,  93. 

">)  Describing  Imperfect. 
^  '^«ft    DE^criBiNGiMPKUFECTSure  those  ^vhich  Min eate  the  appear- 
.^/^e^.:.:;M;.s;o.  actons  as  t.ey  P—  ^^^^^  ^  ^^^^ 
beholdei-s  at  a  moment  of  time  chosen  by  ^J^V?  I';;,.  1,    hei:atin.,  evon  the 

OB.   1   While  onnnodern  stylo  'vbonnd.  in;  f:raph|C^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ,hey 

po?-Kmado  a  very  .paring'  "-;,;>^;  !',t  ^/^l^  ^r^  of        a',Vo7j>r 

occur  the  author  empl^'y^'  tlicm  ^'  '-'Vi,».   n.yint  narticularlv  chosen  by  him  lor  thi;*  P»  r- 

fti  it  J  puearcd  to  tlio>c  prc-ent  at  a  i>'V'-»'V'"^J'f,V,i,,  ,   .,1  in  tlu' discourse,  and  thereby 

pos e^Tlus  individual  stand-point  "^''rivon  the^l   mr    i    pe  f^^^^^       The  actio..s  thu. 
?h;de-^cribinu'imperrecti..l.s.n.i^u.>hed  1^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^.,^,,i„^,  ,».,.,„  „1  .he 

jrraphically  presented  are  ^7"r;'\\'fc.;  ,   £  i'ndeflni.ely  outlasting  that 

^.>.nent  -^^'^f,  ;j:j';;;,;^ ^^l!^  "^^  !!,•  HmJ^r^^^       areWequently  intenmngled. 

"^0^:"    .  ^:" 2:^:7^^  --  of  '».0  -;.n^de.  or  <l.^;bi^  •  ,,  ,,  ,^0 

j;5iJ!o.;:;;:^i=^ 

mn(  unlus  famiiiie  viril)us  \  ej.-nti  P'>P';'\\  '^'  ^  V  X  .  th<'V  w<  re  marchini:  iu  pro- 
et  admiratione  stupens  Ire  ^-'l^'^ ';^J;;^\Z^'^^'oo^^  ?hen>.  It  \.nplcfureot 
cession:  .<equeMt>,r  ti'rha,  a  crowd  "«  ^l\/'V,  'f,,,:  f  of  time  as  a  beholder).-  (/^>  ^|'^' 
fhe  procession,  the  author  ^^^^l^^^^^^^^'^t  t  Ud  i^  and  P.so  (Cic  Se<t.  8,  S, 
descr-Ptionof  the  tacen  and  outward  'M>p  f »  ^^^^f  /  '  V,   .,        un-'ueuti^*  ainuens,  cala- 

"  an\  t.eter  ince^m^oL  quam  'run,  entus  !  c.  a  t^^^'^^^  '^«„!^.;,\^^  !,,  j^eir  laces  and  d.po.t- 
iu  oculo,  tanta  contractu)  fronis  ut.  etc  \;'»;'>  ^/'f  "  ^  ■  curled  by  the  inm,. .  .he.-M'^^ 
nlenr !    The  one  dripping  ^v'th  t.nguen  .^^^^^^  th/other,0  good  gods! 

coidewpt  for  the  km-l>ts, and  his  "'»^'  /''^  " v/fl  ,0  1^  at  !  Such  ^va<  the  s(,lenm  grav- 
how  m}ly  his  person  u-a-s  how  fl^'-^«- »^,  ^  .f^.  ,  ,' of  Ve.avius  (Ex.  1).-  {d)  The  exe- 
itv  <.t  the  looks,  etc.-  ('^) /»'^;V^>'"f  !\"*.^^'c  .      aw^^  ^^x.  8).-  (/)  A  religious  pro- 

«  to  encounter  in  battle.-  '  l|t'  ^an  e     ir  "^/    '^;*;  ,*J  '_  „  ,„  ,„.  .upeiior.-  ''■'  made  a 
tives.-»  whatever  I  had  ;'''>';''<1       '^   ;-  .,5   ^)'^';  in  the  track  of  such  an  attack.- 

dash  airainst  1»»«  «''•''"y- '' ""  '^'^  J^'l^e''^'^^^^^  when  they  were   f  .1  bn-  back 

1*  slauuditer.-^^c.l- all  sexes  ana  a^.s_-U^^^^^^        ^^  ^^.j^^.^    j   was   inquning. 

on  their  ranks.- i^  outtlankcd.-  J 'l^f,;^"  ^r  imi.ortanl  lleldsof  hunian  kn.^wle.lge. 
-  20  woul.l  occur  to  me.-  '^^  oi^tinut  are  »'^,^,  ;r,  "V»^' V"to  teach"  to  «liovv.-  •'*  wUcu- 
-^atua  alien  jus  rei,  the  way  t»r  »oad  to  eomethiug.  w  itac  , 

ever  he  .poke.- '"  to  inflame.-  ^«  impas:*ioucd. 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


333 


Thu"  the  acts  represented  on  the  stage  are  pometimcp  given  in  imperfecfft  on  account 
of  their  pictural  character:  iJabat  in  ilUl  labuia  poena»  Bellerophontes  ;  Bellerophontes 
did  pav  his  pcuaitv  in  that  drama.  Sen.  Ep.  115.  Such  imperfects  arc  used  in  the  poeti- 
cal descr  ptiou  ot  works  of  art.  when  the  autiior  takes  any  stand-point  ol  time,  as  11  one 
of  J  hose  that  saw  the  work.  Here  beioug.s  the  description  of  the  shield  of  .«Eneas  in 
Virg.  J2n.  8,  G*»,  which  is  given  in  imperlects  and  hij-iorical  presents. 

Ubs  .3  The  frequent  description  of  localities  occurring  in  the  historians,  which  have 
not  the  aim  of  graphic  delineation,  but  of  explainimr  those  local  features  which  are 
necc-sary  to  understand  the  narrative,  do  /lot  l)elong  to  tlie  describing  imperfects,  taken 
in  this  sense.  In  the>e  the  time  of  the  predicates  is  always  suL'gested  by  the  lacts  of 
the  narrative,  and  hence  thcv  t)elong  to  the  regular  imperlects  of  state  {Re?^}.  50).  Only 
in  rt  "ard  to  their  grammatical  connection,  sentences  containing  such  descriptions  have 
the  pt-culiarity  that  they  generally  begin  new  paragraphs,  beinsr  not  grammatically  con- 
nected with  the  J)  evious  senteuce.s.  Hence  the  particular  time  referring  to  imperfects 
of  this  descfipti(»n  Hieing  always  a  whole  period)  must  be  regularly  vndersiood.  Thus  : 
Ipsum  ernf  oppidum  Alesia  in  c(dle  siimmo....  ;  cujus  collis  radices  duo  duSbus  ex  par- 
tihns  ttumina  t~tiUinbaht.  Ante  id  oppidum  plani lies. ..  .;?«/?6a<!  /  reliquis  ex  paitmus 
colics  ...oppidum  cinqUant.  Cies.  B.  (J.  7.  6!».— Flumcn  erat  hand  ma'_Mium  propius 
hoBtium  castris,  etc.  Liv.  44,  40.    See  CiEs.  B.  G.  6.  7  ;  Liv.  25,  39,  and  often. 

1.  A  D.  IX.  Kal.  SeptembrTs,  honl  fere  septimS,  mater  mea  indicat»  ei  apparSre 
nubem  iiiu-itjlta^  specie.  Poscit  avunculusS  soleas^,  asceiidit  locimi  ex  quo  maxime 
illud  miraculum  conspici  poterat.  Nubes.  incertum  procul  intuentibtisex  (juo  niome, 
Ofitba'ur.  Longissimo  velut  trunco  elaui  in  altums  quibnsdam  ramis»  diffuiidebatu.r\ 
pondere  suo  victa'^  in  latitudinem  vaiusc'ebat''.  Plin.  Ep.  ti.  16.— 2.  Direptisi" 
bonis"  Taiquinii  ('amnati  (^unt)  proditOresi"''.  sumptiimque  supplicium'3.  blabant 
deli"-ati'<  ad  paliim»»  juveiies  nobilissimi.  inUerebatqnt'^^  nou  poenie  mairis  homines" 
quani  sceleris.  Liv.  2.5.— 3.  AthenodOnis  videt  agnoscitquei^  narratam  sibi  effi-ziem  ». 
Stabat,  innuebatqne"^^  diirito.  similis  vocanti  :  hie  tollit  lumen  et  sequitur.  7&a/  lila 
lento  irradu:  p<»siquam  deflexit'-i  in  aream  npeiite  dilapsa22  deserit  comitem.  Phu. 
Kp  7  27  — 4  Quam  di>siinilis  hie  dies  illi  tempori  videbatur.  Tum^s  imperaror 
popnl'i  Komani  deos  patrios'*  rejiortalHit'^^  Segesianis  ex  urbe  hostium  reciiperatos^»: 
nunc'''7  ex  tiriie  sociOrum  pnctor  eju~dem  populi  eosdem  illos  deos  nelario  scelere 
wifertbaf^^  Cic.  Verr.  2.  4,  ;i5.—  .'j.  Dihlta^»  res  est  in  pn.ximum  senatum,  cujus  ipse 
con-'pectusao  augustissiuuis^»  fuit.  Princepssa  ]}r<£sidebat^^,  erat  eiiim  consul,  etc. 
Plin  Ep  2  11  —  ()  Post  eas  duo  signa  JunOnis  ixyrtabantur;  tum  XXVII  virgines, 
lo,.-am  indane  vestem.  carm.-n  in  JunOnem  cauenies  ibant  Virginuni  "rdmem  ^«9;^^- 
b(Wiur  decemviri,  coronati  laurea.  In  foro  pompa  constitit.  Liv.2<  3.^--  7.  btdebafin 
rostris  collCira  tuus.  amictus  to«ra  purpurea.  Esceudis.  ascendis. . .  i)\ad^i\m imjyonebas 
cum  plaiigOre  populi ;  ille  cum  plausu  rejicilbat.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  34. 

3)  Ilidorical  Imperfect. 
^  5§i.  IIiSTOBiCAL  Imperfects  are  those  which  contain  an  historical 
perfect  by  imvlicati/jn,  the  action  being  represented  as  incomplete  on 
account  of  certain  purposes  of  the  author.  Tliey  are  used  1)  to  impart 
to  an  historical  fact,  which  is  stated  as  such,  the  quality  of  a  temporal 
CLAUSE  to  determine  the  time  of  other  actions  {Rem.(S^)\  2)  to  narrate 
historical  events  according  to  their  general  features  {Rem.  68). 


1  Told  me  -  2  unusual.-  »  uncle.-  *  sandals.-  »  as  if  raised  on    an  immense   stem, 
like  a  tree -«branch.- 'it  spread  out.-  8  pressed  down  by  its  ovvn  weight-- J  ^^ 
Jniduaiv  vanished    .m   both  sides.- >»  to  confiscate.- ^Mhe  property.- i'' tra,tor.- 
''^llupiM.nn  mmere.  to  execute.-  i*  ,ied.-  ^^  a  post  ([^"der  by  a  p  lunil).-  ^»  M^^^^^ 
J7  the  sMectalors.—  i»  to  recoiruize.— i»  the  apparition  described  to  him.— -i"  to  beckon 
_  Vi  tnrncd  to  the  area.-  22  ,he  suddenlv  disappears  and  thus  left  hercompanion.    See 
m^re  18L  R  22. .- 23  ^.;n  («m  the  former  day)  determines  the  time  ^^I'^-f^T'^ll 
does  not  iustifv  the  use  of  the  imperfect,  since  the  action  ^^'a.^compMe  on  that  day.     The 
a    h(r  asluM.es  a  prntindar  moment  at  which  he  represents  the  actions  as  witnessed  by 
le   l^hol  e  rs  -  2^  the  trod-  of  their  city.-  2^  to  carry  back.-  2«  recovered.-  27  on   he 
atter  day  -  •^*  to  steal.-  2»  to  lav  over.-  3o  the  very  aspect.--3i  most  sublime.-  3 2  the 
.mr.eror-33  The  action  was  complete  if  viewed  from  the  whole  time  of  the  meeting. 
But  the  author  intends  to  give  u  picture  of  the  assembly,  and  chooses  for  this  purpose 
eomc  particular  time  point. 


331 


USE   OF   THE    TENSES. 


Bern.  67.  Historical  imperfects  implying  u  tf-MPORAL  clause  occur  in 
various  connections:  (^0  *''>H<>^ved  by  a  clause  imroduced  by  q a ui/i  w ah 
the  force  of  a  kklative  adveub  {quo  temp) re).  ISee  Obs.  1-4;  {h)  opening 
adetaclietl  narrative  or  anecdote  (Ous.  o) ;  (c)  closing  a  sentence,  and 
indicatin/j  a  temporary  suspension  of  tlie  narrative  in  ren:ard  to  the  pro- 
gress of  events  (Ous.  (>) ;  (</)  so  that  many  historical  impehkects  Ct 
BiNED  point  to  a  stibm/uenl  perfect  by  which  the  result  ot  tlie  aclious 
inii)erfects  is  to  be  stated  (Obs.  T). 


COM- 

iu 


tempuf^)  bt'lluia  iutcrvenit. 


impcrrcct  hiive  the  force  of  relaiive  clauses»  in  tlie  above  >eiise,  hut  in  tins  indance  tem- 
poral ixdvi-Td^  {efiainfamjnterea)  urn  a.Uled  niitn-f/uN/n,  to  show  that  (/uu/n  has  thenu-an- 
in<»of  a  rehitive  (fttryuod  teinpus).  Thus  in  the  Examples  quoted  Kein.oT,  Obs  1  and 
Obs.  3  (Tri"inta  dies  ui  ea  navi  fui,  quuin  inferea  semper  mortem  ex.-<j)ec(dUim.—  EvolS- 
rai  jam  tiiremis,  quum  edamtum  naves  cetera;  auo  in  loco  moliebantut).    See  Ex.  0. 

Obs  3.  The  predicate  of  the  principal  sentence  \»  always  in  the  iMrKiiFECT  ini)ic.\- 
TivK  if  it  represents  a  period  of  time  diinnrj  which  the  action  of  the  clause  happened, 
correspondin«'to  the  <,'ener:il  rule,  liein.  «10.  Obs.  2  (Ex.  1-5).  But  it  is  placed  in  the  plu- 
I'KUFECT  (rarely  in  the  pkufkct)  if  the  action  has  hap|)ened  ajter  tlie  time  <»f  the  princi- 
pal  predicate,  as  :  Cominodum  dixcessenis  heri  quutn  Trebatiiis  veidt,  \ou  hud ]n-l  leH 
ve-terday  when  Treha'ius  came.  Cic.  Att.  i:},  9,  1.— Ti-^'/v  mihi  es'  priino  vetenlior  iiitel- 


x|)ressea  by  «ci'era^  pt ..         ^  ...         .  ,.  ., 

iiavem  cfmscendU,  Brundusiumque  rilant,  et  iiltiiiias  iladriim  mans  o\ix*  ptticU,  qanm 
inteiim  milites  donmm  ohsidere  ca'peruui.  Cic.  Pis.  3S,  93. 

'8  the  form  of  an  indepeno- 
mittere  intortnisi:-ses: 


ENT 


Op.s.  4.  In  place  of  a  relaiive  clause  with  7'/vw.sometinie8  the 
.At  sentence  is  used,  as:  Minlbar  quid  esset  quod  tu  mihi  litteras  i 

indicilnt  mihi  Pansa  Epicureuin  te  esse  lactuin  {when  Pansa  intimated  to  me  that  you 
bad  become  an  Epicurean).  Cic.  Fam.  7,  12.  1  (See  Cics.  B.  G.  7,  25).  Here  belongs  the 
Horatian  '  Ibam  forte  via  SacrJ  :  accurnf  quidam,  etc'  Ilor.  Sat.  1  0  1.  (i.  e.  quum  qui- 
dun  accurrit  )—  Somctime-i  the  correspondini,'  denionttrafice  adverb  t'lin  takes  the  place 
of  qnum  as  :  Jam  cxi<,'iium  inter  duas  acies  eral  spatium  .  .  .  :  lum  ccmsiil  Konulnus 
eqiiituin  pauca<  turinas  immlsit.  Liv.  10,  .3»).— Sometimes  intermediate  clauseP,  as  quum 
hoc  aqerein;  are  inserted  in  the  place  of  quum,  as  Uses.  B.  C.  2,  36.  See  Ex.  7. 

Ors  5  Historical  imperfects  in  independent  sentences  frequently  introduce  detached 
narrativ.s  or  anecdotes.  These.  be-id<'s  represent iiii;  continued  actions  as  ordiiuiry  his- 
torical facts,  mark  the  time  diirin-j  which  the  d. -tails,  containing'  the  jwiid  ol  the  uuec- 
dt)ie,  happened,  a>*  :  Cn.  rompejns  ccpnani  Verri  dahat.  Apposuit  patellam  in  qua  si- 
gilla  eraui  ejiieiiia,  etc.  ;  (Once)  Pompey  gave  (was  giving)  a  dinner  to  \  erretf.     lie 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


335 


,  2,  4, 22. 
quum 


placed  a  plate  on  the  table  on  which  exquisite  fignrcs  were  carved  ctc.Cic.  Verr  5 
slic-h  imperfects  always  involve  temporal  clauses  with  quum  (Pompejus  dedit : 
daret  [da^at]  apposuit,  etc.  See  Ex.  8-12. 

Ob*  6  Historical  imperfects  very  frequently  form  the  closino  prt^picate  in  histori- 
cal conne(ti.  wit  b  previous  actions.  as\  Helvetii  jam  in  J^duOrum  flnls^  pervenerant 
eorm  e  a<"os /><>«^L/ya;//'/r.  ^dui  quum  se  delendere  non  possent  le-atos  ad  Cjesa- 
rem  n  t.um  etc  ;  'the  Helvetians  had  already  arrived  within  the  boundaries  of  the 
^  in"  s  n  wered^mtatinq  their  lands.  The  ^duane,.  smc^e  they.could  not  de  end 
tlRmiselves  sent  envovs  to  Ca-sar,  etc.  Caes.  B.  G.  1, 11.  (i.  e.  Helvetu  jm^hUi  mnt,  et 
/^X  xi  ./X  '/'/^^^  Am  mittunt  etc.)  Frequently  imperfects  of  this  kind  are  imme- 
diately  preceded  in  the  same  sentence  by  co-ordinate,  or  otherwise  connected ;>^rr€Cte. 
Thev<i^'''«te  facts  followinir  those,  expres-ed  by  perfect  predicates, m  ordinary  his  ori- 
calsucces>ion,  and  are  placed  in  the  imperfect  to  mark  a  temporary  stop  in  the  course 
«f  pro.'ressinL'  events  foreshadowing  the  statement  of  other  facts  which  happened 
lir     Mhe  time  occupied  bv  such  actions.    After  stating  these  tacts,  the  thread  of  the 

te  mi  eel  Sn  of  s  ncceedinir  events  is  taken  np  again  :  Ad  nnntinm  tarn  atrOcem  «w- 
Xirag men,  (luce-que  quid  agerent  cm^^ultahaiU  (here  follow  the  details  of  the  consul- 
tation); quum  videre.ft  pnvtOres  .  .  .  .  exercitum  ducuid  Megaram.  Liv.  24,  30.  ^i.  e. 
cOHxultavtiunt.iiidumcoumltant.tilc.)  ^ceh.x.\'^\^. 

Ob«  7  Oft.-n  GiioT'ps  of  historical  imperfects  are  combined,  representing  historical 
fact-occurring  in  succession  to  each  other,  such  as  are  ordinarily  expressed  by  peftect^. 
The  oriof  tl.e  imperfect  represents  them  as  unlinished  for  the  time  bein-,  always 
p/dnt in.";:  a  fact  to 'be  alterwaVds  mentioned,  which  will  end  the  state  «f  ^."comp letenesa 
iiid  uncertaintv  as  to  tht>  ttnal  result  of  the  actions.  Such  imperfects  have  the  lorce  of 
rime  periods  fnr  the  liiture  fact  to  which  they  point  :  Pnin«,  concursu   hostes  pell  m- 

latuie    in   fu-am  coniicinntur  ;  ab  sinistro  .  .  .  reliqui    ordmes  acenime  resK^hbant 

he  rei  ut  this  resistance  remaining  in  suspense),  nee  dabat  suspiciOnem  f".^'je  QU.s- 
Qiiam  Ip-e  dux  Camoiuireiius  suis  aderat.  atque  eos  coJwrlabatvr.  (I  urn)  .  •  •  f'^'QiJ 
^^^^inM-erunf.  etc.  C.es.  B.  G.  7,  62  Mich  groups  of  ""IK-rfects  are  very  frequent 
iu  the  historians,  as  I'les.  B.  C.  3.  m  ;  Liv.  35.  10  ;  10,  36,  and  often  (Ex.  19). 

1    Treviri  a  LabiGno  n(m  hmgius  bidui  via  aberant.  qnum  duas  vej.iffe  legione^jusm^ 

(ii^arl^con^o^cuid-^    Ca-s.  B.  O.  ♦>.  7.-  2.  Jam  ad  Hexapylum  eront  Hippocrates  atque 

^cZ^i::i!;:!:Uq,::^c^o^n^  per  propinquos^  ^''V'^'^'K^'^'lT^^  ''ZnnZv' 
7.„,ji,   .>,v^7^,»vx•  h,ifrrei,?runt**    Liv.  24.  32.—  3.  Ita  equestre  proelium  ercU''.  quum  piv- 

rent  1  b  25  T«J  -  4  Minus  quin-en.os  passusa  castris  aherard.  quum  in  con^^ectujuere 
'^ium^uut  lb.  4i%.-  5.  Jam  n^ii  niotlo  pacis  scd  ne  belli  qu.dem  J-a  ..j.g« 
eranf,  quum  Komtlnus  exercitus  ad  Olympium  castra  P;'^"/^-  f'^-.J^- ;«.--  b  (ff^^^ 
^i;i3  vir«Ms»«  civi>  Kuimltms,  quum  inferea  nullus  gemitusi"  rtW(/if?6f?/Mr.  Cic  V^rr.  A 
^02  A  7  Hipp  )(  ra  es  castra  circa  Acrillas  iw.ebat :  munientibus  superv6nit  (surpitsd) 
MaiTellus  Liv  21  :i5.- S.  Dionysii.s,  quum  fanumi«  Proserpime  Locris  expllavlssell^ 
f^Su^^^^>^^;  isquo  q?,um'secuiidi^sin.o>«  ventu.  ^^••«""^^;.^'^!^,^";,";  ^^f 
'Videti<ne'"iiuiuit,  '  quam  bona  a  dis  im^nortalibus  navigano  ^acrlltgls2o  detur 
Cic   X   D  3  34  8:  -9  Octo  hominum  millia  tenebat  Hannibal  qui  re  icti  m  castris 


fuissent  a  PatiUo  et  VanTme  con 


ulibus.     Eos  senfltus  non  censuit  redimendos-',  ut 


e«set  insitum"  militibiis  nostris  aiit  vincere  aut  emOri.  Jb.  Off.  3,  32,  114.—  10-  Captis 
a  S  n  lo  Veiis  milites  simuhlcrum-^^  j„„Onis  sede^*  sua  moxevi^conabauturj^ixon^m 
2b  1.  nterroUta  dea  an  Roman.  mig.Jlre  vellet,  velle  se  respondit.  ^  aler.  Max.  1,  8  3. 
!-  1  U  •  bcMn  c^  do^ulUU^^.  Quum  ille  cui  donabStur.  se  !?/«  ".eujii^^«- 
II.  1. 1  /^lii  '.^     _     ,i;,.„„^ „,,,,  /.,>nv..iiTrof<ivtf5n:e  >n;e2o  :  'ISon  quiv 


2«  ;'  Non  quiero,' 
12.  Syracu>ani 


tanti'niuneris  invidiam  refllgissel-^  diceiisnon  con venTrcfi*i1  time 

iiiniiit   -fluid   te  accipere  deceat.  sed  quid  me  dare.    ben.  Ben.  i,  Hk  . 

q"!"ia.f^Grunt-''HLVacliibo.iis..r.c/J'^^^^ 

£)icCbant  (juantum  cuT-iue  Verris  jusMi  '»""\'i\^«:»l!?y'.':^;':'^<:.^^i=^V.       <-'^J»^l>a"t....^}.ra<-» 


siliii,  sed  larinen  patiebantur^a. 


Kepeiite  recitiltur^^  uno  nomine^^  HS  CCL  milliaju^sa 

-ToFdc^i^::^»  to  learn.-  "  to  open.-  *  ccmininnications.-  '  J '■}'■' f^;";';;^^^^^ 
Idre^  thepeonleV  partv,  the  democrats.—  '  throw  open.— Mo  interfeie.—      ^"'^  ;^'^^ 
gll^^^.g  ou,  in  tViat  stiite  was.-  -  appearin.u^  in  the  distance.-  -  =/^'3^7-  -  mo^ 
^.r.,vp^  Ml-irm  —  13  to  beat  —  '*  ro(  .—  >''  groan.—  !*•  temple.—  >^  to  plundtr.—      "."~ 
fcvorlbte:- -  to  l^:nn::- course,  technically  used  of  -.sels  whidi  -e  -UmgJ^o^ 
the  win.l  :  make  -..ood  headway.-  '^»  sacrdepu,.  a  «^"ipl^'-'-,  '''';,^':rT ''  Vh'f  ^'t  of  the  do- 
.•nlr-if..fl  in  the  mind-i  of  —  ""  statue.—  ^*  p  ace.—  -^  presentid  v\itU.     Hit  ati  oi  uie  uk, 
n      ;     Si  he^^e^;^!,^!  as  a  lasting  tran^iction.-  -  measuring  u.  ^-.^^JS^"^^!'-^»^^ 
worth.-  "  had  deelined  to  undcr.'o  the  odium  of  such  a  ''•cl»  «'•-;!  f;''^fj^"^^f^^,f'l 
eum-tances  -  *»  the  managers  of  the  Heraclius  esiate.-y  3«  to  render  an  "<-Couni. 
aJmt.iiey.- 32  to  groan—  «^  they  bore  up,  they  were  patient.-  ^*  it  was  read  that.- 
"  iu  one  item  (belongs  to  recitdtur). 


336 


USE   OF   THE   TENSES. 


pn.tnH.  data.    FU  m.xi.nns  ^^r  a^^^^C^.  Ver^^ 

vetii  ratibus  franManf.    I  bi  Cie>ar  «^^^r"»  ^ /«^^i  »  e  i  Q»  profect.i^  ad  cam  par- 


x;"rT;:^;:r:;::;:rr:::;;:;:or^ 

the  iMPERFKCT.     Mostly  (but  not  necessarily,  see  Lx.  3.  4),  such  acts  in 
vnlve  reneuted  jiction.     See  Ex.  1.  2.  5.  .  ,.    ^, 

"tl  vLc..^  Of  .,„.  .|^.  m.i.n.,.  -p;- ^^-r  ^-.^..'S/Sf.rC  S^ 

M.mr'f"  in  qnam  >m|XMne  7;"'!»",;^'fVn  vVnm  lian  lib. 'l  ct  P.tM  i  »'A<"'^'-  H'-  »>• 
C*s.  B.  U.  b.  43. 

4)  Imperfects  of  inner  action. 

A.    i>/;vc<  Predicates  of  inner  adiofu 

K5S2    rredicatcs  (knoling  actions  of  the  mind  (/.€.,  feelings  and 

conceptions,  cogitation,  dispositions  and  affections,  volition),  have  the  fol- 

lowing  peculiarities  in  regard  to  their  tense  :  1)  The  use  of  the  perfect  or 

IT  (ft  win---  'tliev  were  hard  proP.in-  (supply  />osfes).-  ^  to  Pf.'-c^iyf,-  *  .^^^^^^^ 

breakin.'  down,  do^'tmyi"?^- '  /S?  .  -  i»  C  .  p  -  ' >  Proparcd  tben.^clve..-  ''^  the 
_  «  freely,  impiidrntl}  .-  »  to  /•^''P'^'^^^^^^^^  tlie  ccn,Vr  to  thcMu.-  »»  damdrem  follere,  to 
'^^r;' t Katu7cry  -^«  re.^^^^^^^  (or  nm)--  >"  ^vere  carried, 

?;;'  advanc  n"  -  •»»  havhS  formed  a  tortoise  (by  holding'  their  ^^^^^^^'^^:' 
"o"n  c£cl   raT.k..-^^  wild   palm-tree.-"  ^"Pporj^d  them.elve..-  '^^^^^  ^'IJl^^^^. 

—  3T  to  burn.—  '«  to  drive. 


IMPERFECT   TENSE. 


337 


imperfect,  more  than  in  external  actions,  depends  on  the  individual 
CONCEPTION  of  the  author  (Obs.  1.  2.  3).  2)  External  acts  which,  as  such, 
are  represented  as  complete  at  the  given  time,  are  frequently  placed  in  the 
iMPEiiFECT  if  they  have  certain  particular  relations  to  actions  of  the  mind. 
All  predicates  placed  in  the  imperfect  for  either  of  these  two  reasons,  are 

called  IMPERFECTS  OF  INNER  ACTION. 

Obs.  1.  The  jreneral  principle  which  requires  the  use  of  the  perfect  or  imperfect,  accord- 
mir  as  the  action  is  represented  as  complete  or  incomplete  at  a  given  lime,  is  also  ob- 
served in  retrard  to  actions  of  the  mind.  Thus  predicates  denotintr  resolutions,  or  sudden 
imi)ressions  of  the  mind  are  placed  in  the  perfect,  while  predicates  denoting  actions 
whirh  an;  represented  as  states  of  the  mind  indefinitely  lastinof.  and  mentioned  in 
coujiection  with  a  particular  time,  are  always  placed  in  the  imperfect,  as 

1.  Peufkct  :  Gennanicobello  confecto  C'Ai^&T  fitatuU  sibi  Rhenum  esse  transeundnm 
(C'.Tsar  reftofved,  took  the  resolution).  Cies.  B.  G.  4,  14.—  Sed  me  pnmus  dolor  percussit, 
C'otta  quiim  est  expulsus  {thejirst  pang  of  grief  struck  ine).  Cic.  Brut.  89,  305. 

2.  Imperfect  :  Antonius  ait  se  cloquentera  vidisse  neminem.  Imidedat  videlicet  in 
ejus  meiite  species  eloquentiie  quam,  etc.  (in  his  mind  an  ideal  of  eloquence  was  lylarited 
or  flj-ed).  Cic.  Or.  5,  18. 

It  would  be  improper  to  use  imperfects  in  the  first  two  sentences,  or  a  perfect  in  the 
last. 

Obs.  2.  But  actions  of  the  mind,  from  their  nature,  may  often  be  conceived  either  as 
states  lasting:  indefinitely,  or  as  actions  defined  by  the  limits  of  the  given  time.  Hence 
the  tense  in  i)redicates  of  inner  action  very  frequently  isdiflerent  in  very  similar  senten- 
ces and  connections  : 

1.  Pufdfxit  ami  pntavit.  (a)  Ciesar,  quod  memoria  tenSbat,  L.  Caesium  consulem  occl- 
putn  ab  Helvetiis.  (hoc  iter)  concedendum  noup>/t(ldat.  Ctes.  B.  G.  1,  7.—  (b)  Csesar  quum 
intelligeret,  omnis  fere  Gallo.s  ad  belliim  celeriler  excitari,  partiendum  sibi  exercitum 
pitfdvit.  lb.  3,  10.  Madvig  (transl.  l)y  Thacher,  p.  292)  assigns  to  putdbam  the  meaning 
•I  was  of  opinion',  and  toputdvi  the  meaning  'I  adopted  the  opinion'.  But  in  the 
above  sentences  both  putdbat  and  jmtdrit  have  the  meaning  'he  adopted  the  opinion' 
(i.  e.,  the  opinion  was  caused  by  the  emergency).  In  the  same  sense  putdbam  is  used 
B.  G.  1,  40.  On  the  other  hand  2)utdvi  has  the  meaning  'I  was  of  opinion  '  in  Cic.  Off. 
3,30,110  (Regulus,  quia  hoc  pairiaj  non  utile  ^w^Jri/!  [independently  of  the  existiu"- 
emergency],  iecirco  sii)i  honesium  sentire  ilia  credidit).  The  difference  in  the  tenses  ol" 
all  these  predicates  cannot  be  explained  by  anything  except  by  the  character  of  all  inner 
actions  expressing  states  or  aflections  of  the  mind,  which  admit  of  two  ways  of  con- 
ceiving them. 

2.  h'xisfimddaf  and  flxisfimdvit.  (a)  Obcam  causam  non  cunctandum  ^a:'i.«^iw<fri^quin 
puu^na  decertilret.  C:es,  B.  G.  3,  23.  (b)  His  ad  consilia  c«pienda  nihil  spatii  dandum 
eyislimdlHtt.  lb.  4,  13.  In  these  sentences  the  i)erJcct  existiwddt,  and  the  imperfect 
fj-iA/z/^J/^r/niave  exactly  the  same  Ibrce  ('bethought  /Am  that  somethinsr  should /Ac» 
not  be  done  ').  Compare  lb.  3.  17;  4,  3(j  ;  5,  28  ;  6,  5  with  1,  23  ;  2,  17;  4,  5  ;  4,  6.  If 
however  existimdi-e  means  an  al)stract  judgment  about  things,  the  perfect  is  rarely  used 
(equitfltum  recenti  pra-lio  j)ertcrritum  esse  existinidbat.  Cies.  B.  G.  4,  13).  So  lb.  1,  6  : 
1,7;  1,47;  6,  7;  7,50;  7,  M;  7,  Gl. 

3.  AfferPbot  and  aftulit  (to  cause),  (a)  Magnam  hrnc  res  Caesari  diflRculfStem  ad  con- 
silium capiendum  affevtbat.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  7,  10.— (6)  Haic  re.s  Caisari  non  niinOrem  voluptS- 
tem  anulit.  \\Y.  1,  53. 

4.  Tduit  (nfjlifif)  and  rol^bat  (nofebaf).  (a)  Ilarnm  cau?arura  illafuit  jnstissima  quod 
Csesar  Germflnos  suis  quoqiie  rebus  timgre  coluif.  Cies.  B.  G.  4,  10.—  {b)  Id  esl  maxime 
ratirnie  fecit  quorl  uoluit  eiiin  locum  vacSre.  lb.  1,  28.—  (c)  Causa  mittendi  Galbam  fuit 
qiiod  iter  per  Alpis  patefieri  rol^bat.  lb.  3,  1.— (o?)  Quod  siepius  forttlnam  temptaro 
(ialba  nol^baf,  po?tero  die  in  provinciam  proficisci  contendit.  lb.  3,  6.—  (e)  Huic  tu  mo- 
lestus  esse  nolvixti  quera  nunc  respirare  non  sinis  ?  Q;tein  nunc  interficere  cupis.  eum 
appellare  nol^bas  ?  Cic.  Quinct.  11,  :i9.  In  all  these  examples  the  imperfects  and  perfects 
nii-ht  have  been  interchanged  with  each  other,  being  used  in  perfectly  similar,  and 
almost  identical  relations.  In  the  quoted  passage  ol  Cicero,  the  tenses  have  evidently 
been  varied  for  the  sake  of  formal  euphony. 

5.  Doldrem  tnlit  and  dolore  officiebdt>/r(hefv]t  pain,  was  pained),  (a)  Eum  dolOrem 
Plancius  tulii  (at  that  time  only)  paul.'o  apertius.  Cic.  Plane.  14,  34.—  (6)  Qua  ex  parte 

15 


338 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


homme^  bcllandi  cnpUii  n.a=no  rtolnn-  afflcuhanl'ir  (,.en»anontly).  C«es.  B.  O.  I,  S. 
6.  sJnl  (re,„lv«l)  and  ''«'"'««^heia  an  op,m.m  «^^^^^^^^^^  „. 

'Vcll^eV...  ana  ™«.^..^™(  (.«^^«  n"-;-r:L'f.l^ 

?*T'i;r,"!l'm  '.".pS  <:?ZX"  rf..rSrunl:'u'mniu';;:;;nr .«  «,^,um  .tutcn...  <»«-„-.8^"« 

iupjuraiulum  iY?/g6a^.  ^'C- O^- '^' •^^-  \f>  ™.Vh,      1,   Brut   62  221.- (c)  Aiiti^tiuP  rem 

k\"aS^;-?c'i'.p3.arfflT«;i;i'erm^^^^^^ 

9  S  and,*^;;,»  (I  know,.     («-  *i»a,H  "-"-«f  «iJ.rriSHr/'s'n;^';^'^ 
(M  Est...  <|iinin  2«nni  iM.m.  nion  arum  f/"v^''.'D 'vatlS  i-i  iniM'ihnnn.  «-'iri  liln-i-i». 

!1    ilm  ji   islherwilarlciiscot  Ihepiwlaatc,  as:  ,     .,,  , 

'"  fXn    o,         omiiia  n"-  n,„v.n,nr  na.flra.,  n,m;.ri  --;,%«!r;,.?,:U;"ro    'inl 
Cic.  N.  U.  2, 16.  44.-  -l.  l>.vlhas..ra»  ««.«.< '"''";;;";;;  ^."'rcmmHnaVa,*»  «  quibna 

raL!rnrri.vL'rt^'c'sk';;uiv"s?rou^sir;n^^>^ 

Fam.  5,  12,  7. 

B.  Indirect  Predicates  of  inrwr  action. 
S  583  Predicates  denoting  external  acts  are  frequently  placed  in  the 
impcrfec't  on  account  of  their  kefeuence  to  INNER  actions  or  states. 
Thev  either  introduce  actions  with  reference  to  their  real  merits,  inner 
niea^ini?.  and  signiticance  (Imperfects  of  reference)  ;  or  they  repre- 
sent an  action  as  the  result  of  a  rule,  principle,  or  habit  (Imperfects  of 

RULE  AND  habit). 


.  WMoh  move  fn-m  na.nn..  -uhc.  -  ^  oiMjer  "^y -t-al  J-^c,.  or  _^Pon.anco„.1y.- 
s  tlu!  iniiHl.-  «  iH  t'xtrndiu-  over.-  ^PV'^*  '"  -;^,.^,.V,X,,;  ..T.;^  _  8  i„  c«  ns<'(inence  of 
in  tl:is  lueu.ung,  intimates  ^^^}^^^^  ^T;  ^J^,^.  '  'quum  in  ChiOr.uu  lapi- 
inei.tul  dir^ea^*...-  »  to  rave.-  '<>  1V»1^''' ^  Vii.lu.*  o«h.  t  (w  is  HOlit  out  of  tlie  rock^^),  falso 
cidlni^  ^q>mrri€^)  flgQni  quiedam  '''  '^|\^';,,\\  I'^^J.f^!,  ^^^^^^^^  ,e.Milar  head.  -  »=«  The 

exi..imal.al  (  ^./f/if/eW,;  V^^^r^'^il^  l^^Md  hvVle/e  ance.lo^^^^  has  evidently 

continjxent  a<-tion  to  wh.cJ»  the  Opm on    »'^'^l     y/"^f^      M,,  sculpture.-  ^^  This    im- 
causedthe  u.e  ot  Uiin  iniperlect  hy  a  k/''^\  «(/J  '''f.?^  •■-,.,  tsTeU  h^^der,  he  did  not 
perfect  refers  to  a  notorious  order  of  Alexander    J   Am  he  is^aeU  mu  ora    . 
mean  i7i&n-vomat)  hy  it  a  peculiar  favor  {(jralKE  causa). 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


339 


a.  Imperfects  of  Reference. 

§  5§4.  The  sentences  in  which  imperfects  of  reference  occur,  have 
(a)  either  the  form  of  a  finite  clause,  generally  introduced  by  qvum  ;  or 
(5)  the  action  referred  to  is  expressed  in  the  form  of  an  object  ;  or  (c)  un- 
derstood from  the  connection. 

llem.  69.  If  clauses  with  quum  are  used,  the  claum  contains  the  action 

whose  merits  and  character  are  designated  by  the  predicate  of  the  iirln- 

cipal  sentence.     The  predicates  of  such  sentences  are  placed  either  both 

in  the  perfect  or  both  in  the  imperfect  indicative,  as  : 

Te  :?orOns  filiu«  iwtdvH  gnum  tutOrem  liiieris  non  institvit;  Your  own  nephew  branded 
you  when  lie  did  not  ap]xAnt  you  the  j^uardian  of  his  children  {by  not  appointing  ;  he 
meant  the  omission  as  a  gtij,'ma  ;  it  was  virtually  a  stit^ma).  Cic.  Sest,  52.  111.—  cA^im 
Collailno  Brutus  inipcrium  ahrorfdhat.  pot erat  wdUri  facere  idinjuste;  Brutus,  We» 
he  reinnvd  Collatinus  from  power  {in  that  he  removed  him),  tnight  seem  to  have  done 
It  (to  liave  acted)  unjustly  [the  act  of  abroiratiou  is  characterized  as  a  possible  injustice]. 
Cic.  Oft".  3.  10.— ^?/j/mplehs  tribuniciam  i)otestjltem;)ft'>c^6rt/'.  verboillam  posccre  videba- 
tur.  va  \*^r^  imWvwwu  jwsclbat ;  When  the  people  (/fwaz/derf  the  (estal)lishmtnt  of  the) 
tribunate,  it  seemed,  by  the  words  used,  to  demand  thispower,  but  virtually  it  demanded 
the  judiciary.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  15.—  See  Ex.  l-S. 

fnP^^'^'  ^^'^""'^^^  of  this  kind  have  only  the  grammatical  fai-m  of  temporal  clause?, 
rhey  denote  the  in.nkk  identity  of  two  acts,  and  by  the  form  of  a  temporal  clause  the 
actions  are  represented  as  if  the  one  had  happened  at  the  same  time  as  the  other.  Both 
predicates,  in  fact,  denote  only  one  action,  which  is  twice  mentioned,  first  by  the  clause 
by  which  it  is  introduced  according  to  its  outward  appearance,  and  by  the  principal  sen- 
tence which  states  its  real  or  virtual  meaninij.  This  inner  identity  of  the  two  acts  is 
also  express<'d  by  the  identity  of  the  two  moods  and  tenses.  That  either  the  perfect  or 
thonnpcrfect  m.iy  be  used,  follows  from  the  general  principle  applied  to  all  predicates 
of  inner  action  (§  .->H2,  Obs.  2).  This  form  of  a  temporal  clause  with  q>mm  occurs  also 
when  both  predicates  denote  internal  actions  (Ex.  8). 

Obs.  2.  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  clauses  of  this  kind,  see  p.  ().>4,  2.  foil.  In 
the  lollowini:  pas.sa<,'e,  the  subjunctive  diceret  falls  under  the  rule  p.  («4,  Ubs.  l:  Decla- 
rant hoc  hujiis  tribflni  contiones,  qnibns  quotidie  meam  potentiam  criminabdtur^  quum 
diceret  scuatum  quod  ego  vellem  decernere.  Cic.  Mil.  4, 12. 

Oks.  3.  In  place  of  such  Quum-clauses,  sometimes  clauses  with  dum  and  quod 
are  used,  dum  taking  a  present,  imperfect,  or  perfect  ^see  p.  673,  Obs.  5,  n :  JJuin 
nostram  gloriam  tuil  virtQte  augCri  exj^to.feci  non  sapienter;  When  I  insisted  (bv  insist- 
ini:)  upon  our  glory  being  promoted  by  your  labor,  I  did  not  act  wisely.  Cic.  Oii.  Fr.  .3, 
1,  3  (Ex.  9).- Quid  tandem  novi  mtiXv(i\y<'p.  feclriint,  quod  in  causa  ad"  sc  pertinente  in 
publi«-iim  i)roce^serunt  ?  What  new  tliin^did  the  w<mien  do  in  that  thexj slwwed  themselves 
in  public  in  a  matter  concerning  their  interests  ?  Liv.  34.  5. 

Obs.  4.  Frequentlj'.  in  place  of  a  clause  with  quum.  the  fonn  of  an  adverbial  object  is 
tised,  in  which  case  the  predicate  is  almost  always  placed  in  the  imperfect :  IRs  verfns 
etsi  non  nmninabafur  Cicero,  tamen  solus  petetxtfi/r  a.  e.  Clodius,  q}ium  his  verbiii  vtebd- 
tur,  Cic<ronem  non  nomindbat,  sed  solum  j)etebat) :  IJy  these  uwds  of  Clodius,  Cicero 
alone,  although  not  mentioned  by  name,  ivas  aimed  at.  \  ell.  2,  45  (Ex.  4.  10-13). 

1.  Omnia  tu  Dejotaro /n6'/j.s7i'  ^f/w/^^  et  ipsi  et  filio  nomen  regium  concessisti.  Cic. 
I^5'Jot._J'^.  30.- '2.  Non,  quum  si:/na  rccej)tui3  dedi.  frangere  audaciam*  vestram  volui^. 
Liv.  2,0^38.—  .3.  Oravissimum"  judicium  de  me;!  tide  et  de  constantia  ixx^fecisti''  quum 
post,  mortem  C:esaris  toium  te  ad  amicitiam  meam  contulisti^.  Cic.  Fam.  11,  29. — 
4.  Non  plus  Africanus  iu  excidendd^  Numantia  reipnblicje  profuit  quam  P.  Nasica  quum, 
Ti.  Oracchum  interemit^^.  lb.  Off.  1,  22,  7li.—  5.  Non  Herculi  Dejanlia  nocSre  volnit 
quum  ei  tunicam  sanguine  Centauri  tinctam"  dedit.  lb.  N.  D.  1, 28, 70.—  6.  DeMpitbain^'^ 
quum^^  illas  littcras  mittlbam  tibi.  Plant.  Epid.  1,  2,  35.—  7.  3Ie  quum  quaestOrem 

1  You  did  for  Dejotarus. —  2  ^y  conceding,  in  conceding,  when  you  conceded.—  »  the 
fiffiial  for  retreat. —  *  weaken  yourcouraLre,  confidence. —  ^  I  meant.—  «  the  most  unequi- 
vocal.— T  judicium  facere,  to  pass  judgment  (we  would  rather  say  '  to  bear  testimony' ). 
—  ^  se  totnm  ad  amicitiam  couferre,  to  devote  on<!'s  self  whollv  to  one's  friendship. — 
•  in  (by)  destroying,  §  540,  No.  3.—  i»  to  kill.-  *»  dipped  in.— »3  i  was  insane.—  i"  in 
that. 


340 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


^r.^r-\\  deferWnt  Cic. Pis.  1, 2.-8.  Errdbas. 
nonnluR  /"ari^fta/,  homlni  ille  honorem  non  jreneTi  ^/^^^^^^  t^anpriiine  Inerc'* 

irh'tn^lre!  I»>.  Verr.  '^5  ^«.-^V    18  1  -   ^i?^^^^^^^  Kfi «'"; nm  Cim: 

i?,>r?/>«m«  dolOros  meos.   l'>- Att.  U,  '».  J-      *;'•,,   .,   o,  _  n.  Cum  CelubCris,  cum  C  im- 

b   "  nlli  m  t/i  cum  i>dmV'i><^genlH,tur^;c^ri^^^^  online. ././/to//^^/-<Vxj/'. 

appellando.  Liv.  34,  7.  ^^^  referred  to  is 

7?€m.  70.    To  the  instances  \"  ^    .^^^^.^^^^^^^ 
UNDERSTOOD,  belonff  1)  the  "f^^^,.^  .    '^,;;^^^;\  ^   \)^^,ceeclinirs,  and  speeches 
and  utterances  i"  ^*:»'-^^^'^-    !    ^f  ^  in   referring   to  or. 

(Obs.1,  2);  2)  the  ^'^V^^'' r^ons   Ob<  3)  •  S^lie  peculiar  meanings  often 
q->t-S  ^1^«  ^Tr  mellk  ^ach^i^lulll/hnperlect  (Obs.  4). 
given  to  a  verb  by  n\ertl>  piaciu^,  „p„..„.x.  features  of  Puch  dis- 

o«a  1  Tuinerfect.  of  debates  are  generally  u..m1  f  U.e  «^^^^^^^J^,^  J.^quently  imper- 
cu^o,>l  "^  e  pmc^di..j..  in  f  "^^ft-U^idu^irnM;  a£'  ^T  ^v  o^r  win.  reference  to 
fects  o     hi«  kind  refer  to  .pecial  ami        n  ^^l^^^^^^  the  mot mns  and  act« 

all  kinds  of  d.HCU^.'ion^  conference.  :nd^P^^  dUn^.'ion  or  debate  as  tie 

tl  tie  debater,  or  ^f^i;^^}^J^^J!:^^^r.co^^'^^ou  acrount  o   «he  nv;!  - 
Bivue  of  time  assunud  for  them,  ni  in„  im  •        o.^inion-*   and  views  of  the  s-nbjed».     ror 

i,  -3.  /Vr^fmiajn(licibusutilUidjetat    mu^^  ^^^^^„^  ,.,j  .  Accvsa/Hif^^ 

nb  pe  culpam  in  miliK's  tmmjemat    L  %  •  2  k  3      '^•^«  j    ,-^  con}\cubantur  ;aiie,u/Mi- 

iindacia  projtnlMtur-'.  Cic.  Clu.  10,  ou.    ^         y 

'<"'•  SI-'  „„„,=  1     fi  Fa  re»  acta  est  qimni  rompi-jus  vix  pcro- 

an  one,-  appointing  Pompey  the  ruler  of  the  ^^    ''^^^j  /^Vr  ;y,,,_,,,abrxtur  ut  cum  min.Tcis, 
wo  S-  '  was  conferred  upon.  -     i-  f ' ^'   !  "  'X^ac  e  •  was  That  of  a  war  of  ex.crmi- 

_  ,e  „ot  even—  >'  P'-*'^"^"^';,'^^^;;"  ^ed  he  laVv-pc.ints  of  the  ca^e.-  ^"^  wa«  ihe  jpud  C 
Avas  carried  to  the  courts  -''^  •  f  ..tr.J  i,  If  to  the  do^-in-  (secret  waylayinff).-  '\^y* 
accuser.-  '^^  «larts.- ^*  l»'e  ^'''\''l'f^^™'^  1^  Ciodius,.-  -^»  wh|.m  they 

Bta.ed  as  a  fact.-  ■=«  had  ^'«^f  ,  ^*^  fj^^vin^  -^o'^moV^  nelanous.-  3i  pes.il.nce  - 
wished  to  tro.-  2»  the  consul  told  ^'h'-  K  man  .  an  imperfect  of  h;.bit 

«^  This  imperfect  is  generally  ^.^^'^^'^''^i.^^^^^^^^^  mid  hence  could 

(  =  solGb.it^Ucere>.    But  '^ '•^'^^'■•^!l\f,  *'/' -a"  a  '  S^^^  ^^ Xugei-e  aninio,  ima-ine. 

uot  denote  habit,  unless  ptjrhapsArchjtaaw at  a    ittimci 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


341 


Inptntc  maximil;  ncraini  censehai^  fore  dubium  quin  nihil  agitSrc'  mente  posset. 
Cic.  Sen.  12.     See  Liv.  3,  51  ;  lb.  30,  32. 

[CoNFKRKNCKP.]— 9.  Hirtius  enit  apud  me.  Primunis  quod  aitinct,  nihil  mihicorw^^fe- 
hat ;  deinde  arbitrnm  mcstatntbut*  iion  niodo  hujus  rei,  sed  totlus  consuiaius  sui. 
Cic.  Att.  15,  1,  2. —  10.  Curio  utrumque  improbans*  consilium,  quantum  alteri  senten- 
tiie  deespet  aniini,  tantum  alteri  snperesse  clicebat^.  Caes,  B.  C.  2,  31. —  11.  LegSti 
mairno|)cre  ne  longius  progredergtur  Cxnar  oraha/if.  Quum  id  non  impetrassent,  j5€- 
tlhaiit  ut  eosqni  ai;men  aniecesbissenf  pugntl  prohiberet :  ca  conditiOnequae  a  Citsare 
fcrrCtur**  se  nsflros*'  c»iten.dthant .  lb.  B.  (».  4.  11.  (Compare  the  long  report  of  a  philo- 
sophical discussion  in  Cic.  Or.  1,  18, 19,  20  ;  and  lb.  Att.  15,  11,  1,  2  ;  Brut.  22,  88  ;  Fin. 

2.  n,  55.) 

()b8.  2.  Frequently  imperfect?»  are  need  with  reference  to  debates  which  do  not  denote 
the  action  implied  by  the  verb,  but  iht'  proponnr/  of  such  an  action,  as  :  Claudii  senten- 
tial consules  cn^ndbat  in  tribflnos  (instead  of  Claudius  censZbat  consides  armandos 
esse),  he  moved  the  consuls  should  arm  against  the  tribunes.  Liv.  4,  6. —  Hujus  dediiiO- 
nis  ipse  qui  dedebdbur  (\n  hoc  concilio)  suasor  et  auctor  fuit,  the  mover  of  this  sur- 
render was  the  very  person  whose  surrender  wa8  under  discussion  {qui  dedebdtu?;  i.  e. 
de  ciijus  dediddiie  agebdtur)^^.  Cic.  Off.  3,  30. 

1.  SenStu  vocjito.  P.  Cornelius  omnls  duces  exercitusqne  ex  totS  TtaliSad  nrbls 
pnesidium  rf  roed^a/"  /  Fabius  MaximusabscSdi'^  a  Capua  flagitiOsum  ducSbaf.  Liv. 
2(;.  8. —  2.  l)e  snpplicii»'''  Campfmi  senSius  haudquilquam  inter  Fulvium  Claudiumque 
conveniCbati-\  Claudius  Roniam  adsenaiumaibiirium'^ejusreiro'idei^rt/'^^.  Ih.  2(5. 1."). — 

3.  Si'tultum  ut  revocavCrunt  sufietes"*,  una  seutentia  de  pace  le<;at08  ad  ScipiOnem  de- 
cernebat^^  /  altera  llduuibalem  ad  tueudam  patriam  revocdbat.  lb.  30,  7. 

Obs.  3.  Verbs  of  saytxo  are  frequently  placed  in  the  imperfect.  1)  If  they  denote 
what  was  said  by  the  speaker  or  others  at  a  previous  time  or  occasion  ;  beiug  olten  used 
in  letters  witii  reference  to  remarks  in  previous  letters  (Ex.  9,  10).  See  Ex.  1-8.  15.  l(i. 
2)  If  they  refer  to  remarks  and  sayings  of  celebrated  persons,  expressing  their  opinions 
on  certain  subjects  (Ex.  11-15).  Both  these  imijerlecis  refer  to  the  t/iouf/ht  conveyed  by 
the  language,  the  occasion  at  which  the  remark  was  made  being  conceived  as  the  time 
given  ft)r  the  predicate.  Imperfects  of  this  kind  are  generally  explained  as  imperfects 
of  repeated  action,  or  of  habit.  Btit  in  many  passages  this  interpretation  fails,  and  in 
most  of  the  passaL'es  where  such  imperfects  occur  it  is  evident  that  the  author  could 
not  know  whether  the  remark  was  often  repeated  or  not.  and,  certainly,  did  not  7nean.  to 
convey  the  idea  of  frequent  repetition.  But  instead  of  those  imperf<'Cts  more  usually 
nfr/V<"''A' are  used,  a  latitude  beinir  common  to  all  predicates  of  inner  action.  Thus  in 
Ex.  17  dixit  and  diclbiit  occur  in  the  same  sentence. 

1,  MedPa  modo  et  Atreus  coviniemorabantnr^^  a  nobis.  Cic.  N.  I).  3,  29.—  2.  Ejus- 
modi  artiticiiim-i  de  ipso  jure  civlli  hesterno^^  die  Crassus  compOni^^  p^jj^e  dicZbat. 
lb.  Or.  2,  19,  8^3.—  3.  Tum  ilia  qna>  modo  (Jrai^iiUii  comm^morabat-*  egi.  lb.  2,  84,  ;^1.— 

4.  At  medici  quoque— ita  eniin  difefxi-^^^—)fpei>c  falltmtur.  lb.  N.  D.  3,  6.  15. —  5.  Subsi- 
«iiiim  oratnri  ex  illis  disputationibus-*  petendum^T  egge  paullo  ante  dicebas.  lb.  Or.  1, 
.')3,  2.'J0. —  f).  Ouas  igitur  'i'yndaridas''''^  ai)))ellabas2»,  eas  te  obviam  Vatinio  venisse  ex- 
istiinas?  lb.  N.  D.  3,  5,  11. —  7.  Potest  igittir.  quod  modo  7/<?.7<7^a^,  veritfltem  casus  imi- 
t:lri.  II),  Div.  2,21,49.—  ^.  Is,  se  pnesente,  de  se  ter  sortibus  consulttim^o  rfi^e/^a/". 
Cses.  B.  G.  1.  5^3.  (Compare  for  similar  expressions  :  Cic.  Or.  2,  42  ;  Part.  Or.  22,  111 ; 
N.  D.  .3,  7,  18  ;  3,  9,  23:  3,  12,  29;  3.  18.  47;  3.20,  52;  Sen.  Qu.  N.  5.  18,  and  often.)— 
9.  Binas  a  te  accepi  litteras,  quarum  alteris  mihi  gratulabCire ,  alteris  dicebas  te  velle 


'  i.  e.,  dicTbat  se  censtre. —  '  perform  no  mental  act. —  ^  as  to  the  first  point; 
with  reference  to  the  lirst  point.—  *  he  appointed  me  umpire.-  ^  disapproving.— 
«  said  that  the  one  proposition  showed  so  much  courage  in  excess,  as,  etc. —  '  who 
had  i)receded  the  army.—  "^  that  condition  which  Ca?sar  proposed.—  »  comply  with.— 
'"  This  imperfect  cannot,  with  our  grammarians,  be  taken  for  an  equivalent  of  the  peri- 
j)hrastic  future,  because  the  surrender,  at  the  time  spf)ken  of,  was  neither  certain,  nor 
immediately  imminent,  both  of  which  would  be  required  to  place  it  under  the  rule  R. 
5:3,  Obs.  2.—  '» i.  e,.  revocandoscensebat.—  ^^  retreat.—  '3 held.—  ^*  punishment.—  ^^Cor>ve- 
ni/  infer  afiquns  (impersonal)  =  aliqui  convtviunt,  they  agree  about  something. —  >«  de- 
cision.—>^  was  of  opinion  that,  .should  be  left.— '«  the  highest  mairi-trates  at  Car- 
thage.— '*  i.  e.,  decerntndum  cevHbat.—  2"  were  mentioned  (in  a  previous  passa<rc).— 
*■"  trick. —  22  yesterdav.—  23  accomplish.—  24  in  a  previous  passage.—  26  \r,  a  previous 
passage  of  the  book.—  2«  discussions.-  *»  must  look  for  aid.—  26" the  Tyndarides,  i.  e.. 
Castor  and  Pollux.—  "^  in  a  previous  passage.—  s«tbat  it  had  been  consulted  by  lota, 
that  they  had  cast  lots  as  to  his  fate. 


342 


USE  OF  THE   TENSES. 


cxercitum  a  ere  n..n  ix'f;'- J  >^  \\ft-  ^"  «-  „  „\' ,    Ac  S  Khodo  %x.nerat  VIII.  Id. 
on   lion  toutlrent  quid  ppsct  satis  II).  ur. -r^,  Li.      *;•;,,,,'".{'  ,,  o-,  '^  —  1(5    Teren- 

turn»  ex  quo  mira  quieduni  se  audist'e  dutbat.  lb.  Or.  z,6,i6. 

Or^    4   Tn  manv  particular  ii.^tances  predicates  iu  the  imperfect  imply  special  mental 

mis-takeu  by  the  iutcrprclers?. 

h.    Imperfects  of  Kule  and  Habit. 
§  585.  Predicates  denoting  habitual  actions,  i.  c,  actions  regularly  done, 
continued,  or  repeated,  according  to  a  certain  rule,  are  generally 
placed  in  the  impeufect. 

Obs  1  Habitual  aclionf.  (in  consonance  with  the  -oneral  rnh's).  arc  always  placed  in 
the  imm^f"-c  if  a  parliculurtime  is  ahsi-iied  to  tht-m,  and  il  they  are  reproented  aw 
goin'o'^Vat  Uiat  tintS^Thus  xvh.-u  tlu- time  .ivcn  is  -in>o^^oonu^^nn..-^^ut^o^ 
fuif)  onuAno  turn  viox  ul  faciles  essent  in  suum  cuKiue  trihueiulo  J»  ;^«^  f;^  "  |^"|J^ 
cuJoni  that  peoplf  were  obli-iuLT  as  to  1,  avin-  every  one  his  cm  n.  Cic.  Brut.  21,  bo  (Ex. 
4  5  r. )     It  71      But  the  imperlect  is  uot  used  for  habitual  actions  : 

'  D*  If  no  time  can  be  attached  to  the  habit,  as  :  Semper  oratOrum  ^:]'''^]]''.?^}^'^^^^^ 
f//i/ and  iter  urn  nrudentia  :  Tlie  taste  of  the  audu-nee /<«.%■  a/jw.V'»' ^^-^w  the  <,'Uide  loi   tliu 
ehn        ce  Th^^^^  ^  *t-     By  the  Nvritirs  of  the    silver  aire    however, 

h  i  1  1  icti  ,  ,s  to'wht^  ;..  time  can'  be  ass^;ned.  are  frequently  placed  "' '  'C  nnpe,-- 
tect  Multa  .pian,  snpcrvacna  essent.  non  intel  ex  nms  nis,  ^uum  deesse  ca',,5run  11^ 
bamur  cnim  Hie  n<m  quia  debebilmus  sed  quia  habebilnius.  hen.  Ep.  12.^.- MaL-ni  Mrt 
qiXm  J  1  enstrnascertisdiebus  leriis  daUud :  (piidam  nullum  non  ^l";'»  •'"\'7»V^'? 
e  e  lias  Ju-i(/?6«»/.  Sen.  Trai.q.  l.",.  Cicero,  in  such  passages,  would  pn.bably  ha  e  ex- 
pressed  [he  predicates  by  the  perfect  of  soTtre,  or  by  oratio  mdirectu  {6Cimus  dtduse- 
diridifse.ov  dare  i^oliti  sunt). 

2^  In  literary  historv,  where  the  literary  customs  and  habitual  qualities,  etc.  of  the 
diffemi  writeVs  criticiUnUare  the  subjects  of  alnu.st  the  ->''»•-  J'^/^r^nlll^^^/Scrs 
chan.H;  of  tenses  is  dictated  by  the  requirements  ol  lormal  euphony.  I  hus  in  C<.eM  ^ 
B  utus  PERFKCTs  and  iMPKRFECTS  of  habit  are  promiscuously  emphyed,  as  :  renchB 
su  I V itJlte  maxime  hilarat(e  AthCna^  ^vnt  ;  hujus  uberiatem  et  eopiam  admirAtir  ejusdem 
till  dieend  itern.remque  tivnr^runt.  Cic!  Brut.  11.44.  But  :  Phaieivus  ,hlectuhat  UMi^^x^ 
A  n  iensTs  quam  injfammdbat.  lb.  y,  37.-  Thus:  y,r,af>,s  ea  in  omn.  fere  frenerc 
causlrum  H)  4:}  159;  but:  At  ego  hoc  tempore  omni  in  omnium  doctiinflrum  meihta- 
y\ouc  rer^bar.  lb.  «»1.308.- M.  Pi^o /m/.7/i^  qno.ldan.  in  natflra  genus  acuminis  11).  »,., 
2:3») ;  but :  C.  CarbOnis  naiuralem  quaudain  auctoniiltem  habtbcU  oratio.  lb.  bi,  ii\. 

.S)'lf  habit<ar<'  first  mentioned  in  L'eneral  term.s.  and  f^ubsequeiitly  specified  by  the 
deUiils  of  these  habits,  it  is  cu>tomary  to  use  the  perfect  for  the  predicate  by  which 

'  A  frequent  formula,  '  That  w'.at  I  had  undertaken  might  fnccecd  '•-  JJ"  a  ^?LnvI* 
letter.-  a  «jxcept  those  things  (supply  (/itv/^^^),  except  in  re-ard  to  those  things.-  *  ^tou?. 
house.-  6  probJibly  referring  to  a  passa-e  in  Cato's  writings.-  •  rHers  o  tt^f  ""^1^,^,^^  l{ 
p^n/nifl;/7.-  'with  the  revenues  of  which'.-  »  to  blunder.- s  thai  the  fever  had  left 
you.—  •  that  he  had  met  Scievola. 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


343 


the  habit  is  designated  in  genera]  terms,  hut  the  imperfect  for  the  predicates  specifying 
tiie  haiiit  :  as:  Aiuiltis  oratorii)Us  Gnecis  incre<lil)ili  quodam  nostri  homines  dicendl 
%X\uVwflagrar?riint.  J^d^r/Zvan'os  mngniiildo  ac  varietas  causarum;  erant  huic  studio 
maxima  ej-jwnta  praMiiia,  etc.  Cic.  Or.  1,  4,  14.  15. —  Deinde  auguriis  et  reliqui  reges  nsi 
(sunt  I,  et  exactis  regibus  nihil  publice  sineauspiciis  gerebatur.  lb.  Div.  1.  i,  ;i —  Vallo  et 
Macedones  et  Gncci  vni  stmt,  sed  usuin  .  .  .  non  aptartruntj  nam  majores  arbores  coide- 
Imnt  quam  .  .  .  et  quia  eniintfMi/if,  etc.  Liv.  ;i'i,  5. —  Tarquiuius  cum  quibus  voluit  in- 
jussu  populi  loedera  fecit  diremi/f/fie ;  LaiinOrum  sibi  maxime  gratiam  concilidbat,  . . .  et 
alhnitates  Jr/z/r/^/w/.  Liv.  1,  4il. —  Ilidmlt  Caiillna  |)eimulta  signa  adumbrata  virtntum. 
Utebatvr  hoininibus  iinprwbis  inultis,  et  quidem  optiinis  se  viiis  deditumes8e^>■^m^^/a^<, 
etc.  Cic.  Cicl.  5,  12. 

4)  If  the  autlior  means  to  designate  more  tlie  action  itself  than  the  habit  which  is  im- 
plied by  it,  the  perfect  may  be  used,  as  :  Apud  Grtecos  e!oqueuti88imi  homines  ad  scri- 
beiidain  histoiiam  se  upidicuierunt  (where  the  weight  is  placed  on  'ad  sciibeudam  his- 
toriam  ' ).  Cic.  Or,  2.  13,  55,—  JJivus  Augustus  inter  initia  Sphinge^y/riari^  (sealed);  duaa 
in  inatris  annulis  inveiierat :  altera  per  bella  civilia  ainici  M^nawr^  epistolas  et  edicta. 
I'ostea  Alexandri  Magni  imagine  ngndvit.  Plin.  II.  N.  37,  4. —  Aristx)teles  in  hac  qnaistiCne 
adolescentls  exercuit.  Cic.  Or.  14,  4H. —  yEjfyptii  et  Bab3ionii,  in  campOruin  patentium 
jeqiionbns  habitantes,  omneui  curam  iu  siderum  cognitiOue  ix)8uetiint.  Cic.  Div.  1,42, 
y3.  iSee  Ex.  10  to  K.  71. 

Ob».  2.  Predicates  expressing  habitual  actions,  always  imply  two  different  actions,  one 
of  which  is  the  action  re.\li.y  performed,  and  the  other  the  idea  of  habit  or  rule, 
which  is  always  an  inner  state  prompting  or  producing  the  action.  From  this  double 
nature  of  jin-dicates  expressing  habitual  action.alj  tlie  j^ecuiiarities  in  their  treatment 
may  be  exi)Iaineil;  namely  1)  that  imperfects  of  liabit  do  not  require  the  addition  of  a 
particular  time,  since  the  inner  element  always  contains  that  indefinite  space  of  time 
dui-ing  which  the  external  acts  are  represented  to  have  happened;  2)  thut  the  perfect 
may  always  be  used  if  tlie  internal  element  is  disregarded. —  The  language  either  ex- 
presses both  these  elements  separately.,  or  mentions  only  the  action  a*  such^  leaving  it  to 
the  reader  to  supply  the  idea  of  habit.  (See  Jieni.  71.) 

Hem.  71.  If  the   idea  of  habit  is  designated  by  special  expressions, 

the  action  itself  is  variously  added  in  the  form  of  an  object-tnfinitive, 

of  an  INFINITIVE  CLAUSE,  or  of  a  TiiAT-CLAL'SE  with  ut  (witli  later  wiiteis 

also  quod).     The  verb  expressing  the  idea  of  habit  wv,\y  be  either  in  the 

PERFECT  or  IMPERFECT,  but  it  iiuM  bc  in  the  imperfect  if  so  required  by 

the  gciH-ral  rules,  i.  e.  if  a  particular  time  of  the  habit  is  either  expressed 

or  necessarily  understood. 

Obs.  1.  The  expressions  used  to  desisnate  the  idea  of  habit,  are  :  Solere  ('oltbatn  or 
solitus  sutii)  ;  morem  or  morix  e-Sf>e  {mostrat  or  ft/it) ;  con.<fuescere  in  the  jiluperfect  {consneve- 
rain),  whicli  takes  tlie  place  both  of  the  perfect  and  imperfect  (the  peifect  consvevi 
meaning  '  I  <///*  .sccustomed ' ) ;  i/i.'ififaft//n  tertere,  to  observe  a  habit.  Here  belong  the 
adverbial  expressions  rulgo  {in  ri/lgu.<)&u(\.  «^m7>^'r  (customarily,  generally,  always).  Some 
verbs  combine  tiie  idea  of  habit  aiid  the  action  itself  in  all  their  forms,  as  uti,  se  gerere 
(to  conduct  one's  self),  and  the  intensive  verbs  in  itore  and  sare,  as  obseititdre,  to  observe 
habitually  or  usually  ;  factitdre.  to  do  habitually,  etc.  All  these  expressions,  when  they 
are  verlis,  admit  both  tenses,  either  the  perfect  or  imperfect,  unless  (in  accordance  with 
the  general  rules)  the  addition  of  a  part'iculer  time  at  which  the  habit  as  such  was  going 
on  requires  the  imperfect  (Ex.  3-6).  But  even  in  this  last  instance  the  perfect  (though 
rarely)  is  sometimes  used.  (Ex.  8.) 

Obs.  2r  Habitual  action  is  ahvays  designated  by  the  addition  of  one  of  the  expressions 
mentioned  Obs.  1  if  otherwise  the  connection  would  not  clearly  represent  the  action  as 
an  habitual  or  repeated  one,  as  in  the  beginning  of  treatises,  or  new  paragraphs  uncon- 
nected witli  the  previous  sentences  (see  the  beginning  of  Cic.  de  Am.)  Ex.  1.2.  But 
frequently  these  expressions  are  chosen,  even  if  no  such  necessity  requires  them. 

A.  Solere  1.  Neque  illud  venim  est  quod  Socrates  ^/ic^7'«  ^o/fin/S  omnis  in  eo  quod 
scirent,  satis  esse  eloqiientls.  Cic.  Or.  1,  14,  (13.-2.  Curioni  iia  plausum  est  ut  salvS 
republica  Pompejo  ^>/awt/i  solebat'K  lb.  Att.  2,  19,  3,-  3.  In  collfga  meo  susiinendo  si 


»  Biclhat,  instead  of  dicere  sollbai .  would  not  clearly  express  either  habit  or  repeated 
action.  Rem.  70,  Obs.  .3,  No.  2.—  '^  PtaudeMtur  mitrht  be  tal^en  for  a  single  continued 
action  at  the  time  spoken  of ;  plaudi  solitum  est  would  not  refer  to  the  time  expressly 
spoken  of,  although  (rarely)  it  is  thus  sometimes  used. 


344 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


mcam  in  illnm  induli^entiam  landare  soleMtts^,  par  pro})e  laup  P.  Sestii  ep?e  debet, 
lb  Scst  3,  8.—  4.  Wo»  turn  refutare  ttolefxlinK^'^  quoci  p:U<'r  miiltu  nobis  de  ejus  Ptudio 
Bsept'  narrilvit  II).  Or.  2,  1,  2.—  5.  Tian  pnetor  in  liac  omolna  niajarem  partonj  diCi  cum 
tunicil  pull{l3  f<^dere  >^olchat  et  pallio*.  \h.  Verr.  2,4,  24.-  6.  Erat  hoc  factiUltiim  Bcmpcr 
etiani  in  Latinoruni  stipendio^  turn  qinim  illurum  auxiliis  uti  solehamuif.  lb.  2,  .),  24.— 
7.  llos  libros  Thucydidct»  turn  ?cnpsi<se  dicilur  quuni,  id  qnod  optimo  culque  AtliCnirt 
(iccidere  soUhrm  «.</«,  in  exilium  pulsus  essot.  lb.  Or.  2,  13.  r)0.—  H.  C<)n?uetQdo  quo 
quondam  solltm  sum''  u(i  qunm  mihi  in  isto  studio  versilri  licebat.  lb.  Or  1,  30,  1 3.:».-- 
«»  Hoc  nt!  TliermodOrus  quidem  fitciebat,  is  qui  PlatOui^  libros  solitufi  e.4  (tivulgure^. 
11)  Att  13  21,  4  — 10.  Vcf'ier  etiam  1).  Briilus.  ut  ex  h.  Accio  mm  atKUn  solifus.  dicere 
non  mculte  sollbnt.  Cic.  IJrut.  28,  107.  B.  Mouem  ksse,  etc.—  11.  Mos  enW*  taliscis 
eOdom  nia«Mstro  libcrOrumet  comite  uti.  Liv.  5,  2<).—  12.  Armilti,  ita  mos  j^anU»  erat, 
in  concilium  venCrunt.  lb.  21,  20.— 13.  Nam,  ut  mos  fuit^^  Bithynije  refjibup,  IcctTca 
octophoro'i  ferebfltur.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  11.-  14.  .Tuba  duo  millia  equitum,  quos  sme 
custodiiE  causa' '■*  circum  f^t^.  habere  con»u^rat,  Suburric  summlsit'',  Caes.  B.  C.  2,  4U.— 
15  Tenuity  i'rvc9,  hocimtitatutn  in'*  turibulis'*  omnibus  quiecunque  in  biciliS  fuC- 
runt  Cic  Verr  2  4  21.—  IG.  Fuerat  ille  annus  quum  intentusarcus'*  est  in  me  nnum, 
\\tv^dgoWn^ri  rerum  loquebantur.  lb.  Sest.  7,  15.—  17.  Clipeis'^antea  KomJlni  vst  sunt, 
dein  Bcuta'«  pro  ciipcis  fecCre.  Liv.  8,  8.— 18.  Neque  enim  ita  ^e;7^s>t^  ^  «"cs  >n  his 
rebus  tamquam  ratiOnem'»  aliquando^o  esset  reddittirus.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  4,  22.— 19.  1  lie 
8ic  se  qaibiit  Atticus  ut  commanis  infimis,  par  jnincipibus  videretur.  Nep.  Att.  >.— 
20  Neque  solum  deOrum  voces  PythairorCi  obserritartrutd,  sed  etiam  hominum  qn:e 
vocant  omina'^'.  lb.  Div.  1,  44,  102.—  21.  Etiam  Pompiidius  mulUis  i)rivata8  causas 
actitdrii'-^.  lb.  Brut.  70.  24«.-  22.  M.  Bibulus  scripfitdrit'''^  accurate,  lb.  '-.7,  2«)7.— 
2;i.  Timarchidcs  Verris  omnia  decrCta,  impt■ria'-^  lilteras-^-  periti^sune  et  callidissime 
venditabat'^^.  lb.  Verr.  2,  2,  54. 

Rem.  72.  The  idea  of  habit,  if  no  doubt,  ran  arise  as  to  the  meanin.!]:  of 
the  imi)erfc'Ct,  may  always  be  e.\i)i-essed  by  the  inei-e  imperfect  of  tlic 
verb.  Such  iuipeitects  conij^rise  all  actions  which  are  represented  as 
being  done  in  consequence  of  a  rule,  by  routine,  or  by  any  principle  dic- 
tating or  producing  the  same  action  under similir  circumstances.  These 
impeT-fects  are  ijenerally  rendered  by  tlie  mere  preterit  ;  but  sometimes 
in  the  same  way  as  \{  nolere  were  expressly  used  {used  to,  was  accus- 
tom-ed  to.)    Imperfects  of  rule  and  habit  denote  : 

A.  Usages  in  the  life,  practice,  and  sentiments  of  nations. 

1  Quid  "Miostri  veteres  versus  iibi  sunt  cpios  '  olim  Fauni  vatesque  caiiehant''' '  f  Cic. 
Brut  IS  71  —  2.  Hoslis'-«  apud  niajuifs  is  dirtOdt/tr  quern  nunc  p«^'rr;.'ilnum29  dici- 
niu««  lb  Oti  1  123".— 3.  Rudis  adhuc  antiquitas  cr*^^/?/^^/ et  attiuhi  imbrls  cantibiis  et 
n'pclli  'Seii'N.  Qu.  4,  7.— 4.  Co/e/x/zi/»/;- ab  Ilernicis  relii;ir)iie>3'  pie  mai,'isquam  mag- 
nilice.  Liv.  3,  57.— 5.  Phalarica=»'^  ^m/'  Sn^nntlnis  hastlli  al)ieirno  unde^s  ft-rrum^'»  «-x- 
stabat^*.  Id  stuppa^^  circumfirjd/Mnt^'',  liiiebantqut^'*  pice»»,  lb.  21,  8.—  6.  In  (Jnecia 
disabnnt  omnes  nuisicam.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  2. 

B.  Habits  of  the  Public.  _^       ^. 
7.  llla  via  qua  (Ap|)iu8  Clodius)  PpectStum*"  ibat,  Appia  jam  via  vorafxttur.  Cic, 

Sest.  5»,  126.— ». Hiec(Dianje)  statuaab  omnibus advenisrwt'i»(7/«/«'.  H).  Verr.  2,  4,  3t. 

>  Lnndnbdlis  mi"ht  be  taken  for  a  single  (iiiner^  action  at  the  time  when  the  '  sustinlre' 
happened  ;  soliti  estis  would  not  refer  to  such  a  time.—  "  vfidabdmus  mlLrht  be  taken  for 
a  refutation  made  on  a  sintrle  oeca-ion.—  ^  jrrav  tunic,  a  jrarment  worn  only  by  the  lower 
classes,  and  not  fit  for  a  pnetor.—  *  Greek  cloak,  or  <rt)\vii  (opposed  to  the  togji).—  "  ser- 
vice —  «  this  was  the  case  at  all  times  ;  hence  solebaf,  which  would  refer  to  the  time 
^^pokenof  could  not  be  used.—  ^  solPfnim  sliould  here  be  expected.—  ^  published  (with- 
out the  author's  permission).-  »  at  the  time  ^poken  of.—  '»  //o/  at  the  time  spoken  of.— 
1»  a  (sedan)  chair  with  eiuht  bearer<,—  »-  as  :i  body-i^uaid.—  '^  sent  to  help.—  '*  as  to.— 
15 censers  —  '«  the  bow  was  bent.-  '^  shield.—  '"  buckler.—  '»  to  render  an  account.— 
2»  eviT— 21  The  so-called  human  forebodings  (presape^).- 22  mtended  to.  acted  in.— 
23  wrote  an  accurate  style  (accnrdte  saibVtat,  would  nder  to  the  sul)ject8  of  the  composi- 
tion.)— '•'«  rules.—  ■■'•'  i)apers(containiii<r  official  decrees.  L'ranls.  etc.).—  2«  traded  in  :  sold 
them  to  the  parties.— '^^  Quotation  from  Ennius.  — -'  The  term  '  ho^ti^'  was  applied  to  those 
whom.-  2a  foreiu'ner,  stranger.—  3°  by  chants.—  3'  relii,'ious  ceremonies  were  cele- 
brated.— 32  The  Sa^untians  used  a  Pha"laric  (a  kind  of  l)urnin<,'  missile)  with  a  shaft  of 
>ine-wood.—  33  „t  the  top  of  which.—  »4  the  iron  point.—  3»  to  stand  out.—  3«-  tow.— 
'  to  wrap  in.—  »»  to  smear,  to  paint.—  3»  pitch.—  ■•»  went  to  the  spectacle.—  «i  to  visit. 


F, 


IMPERFECT  TENSE. 


345 


—  n.  Incolie,  ut  anfea  demonstrdbant  quid  ubTque  esset,  ita  nunc  quid  ubiqne  abia- 
tum'  sit  ostendunt.  lb.  2,  4,  59. 

C.  Personal  habits  and  qualities, 

10.  Cum  pneris  Socrates  hulere  non  enibescebat^,  et  Cato  vino /a.ra^^x?)'' animum  cu- 
ris  pui)licis  faiifratiim.  Sen.  Traiiq.  15. —  11.  llaunihal  })rinceps  in  proelium  ^at.  ulti- 
mus  conserto  pra-lio*  txcedibal^.  Liv.  21,  4.—  12.  Balbus  'Pliorius  ita  vivebat  ut  nulla 
l)osset  inveiiiri  voUu)tas  qua  non  abundaret.  Cic.  Fin.  2.  20.-13.  Antiochus  sella 
eburnea*  jus  dicehaf .  disc f}>t aba t que  controvi-rsias  ininimarum  rerum.  Liv.  41,  20. — 
14.  Atticus  mendaeium  neque  dicebat,  neque  pati  poterat.  I^ep.  Att.  15. —  15.  Atticus 
sic  Griece  loquebatur  ut  Athenis  natus  viderCtur.  lb.  4. 

D.  Occupations  and  professional  activity. 

Ki.  Tantas  clientGlas^  Appius  reqlbat  ciecus»  et  senex.  Cic.  Sen.  11.37. — 17.  Philoc- 
tCtes^^mpavoAa^'o  vitam  aucupio'i  pennarumque  contextu'2  corpori  tegumenta"/a- 
ciibal.  lb.  Fin  5,  11,—  18.  Hie  qmestu'*  se  sustinebat^^.  Sen.  Mort.  CiPS.  3.—  19,  Diouy- 
>*iu8  tyrannus,  Syracflsis  expulsus,  Coriuthi  pucros  doctbat.  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  12. 

E.  Literary  activity  and  merits. 

20.  Antoniu?7Y;;^n?6a<  quid  dici  opus  esset.  memoriaqne  ea  comprehendebat ;  excel- 
llbat  autem  actione'*.  At  Crassi  mairis  etiitebat^''  oraiio.  Cic.  Brut.  59,  2i5.— 21.  P. 
Scipio  omnia  tale'^  facetiisque'^  superdbai'^^.  lb.  34,  128. 

7^.  Actions  regularly  performed  by  order,  or  by  natural  necessity, 

22.  Calibns^i  eum  interdiii  solQtum^a  custodes  seguebantu?-"^^,  noctu  clausum^*  as- 
servdbani^^.  Liv.  24,4."». —  23.  Poeta  Antipater  Sidonius  omnibus  anuis  uno  tantuin- 
in»)do  die,  quo  genitus2«  erat,  febri  implicabdtur'^^ .  Val.  Max.  1,  8,  IG. 

Okneral  Remark  about  the  u^e  of  the  Imperfect  in  contrastinir  it  with  Perfects.  By 
Fueh  an  opposition  l)Oih  t  lie  imperfects  and  p<r!ecr8  are  placed  in  a  peculiar  litrht,  which 
can  not  often  be  imitated  in  En;;li.*h.    The  following  passages  may  ber\e  as  examples: 

1.  Non  defuit  (miliiibus)  quid  responderetur ;  deeral  qui  daret  responsum  (deerat  em- 
phasizes 'Jw.s/  then  \  while  defuit  is  not  confined  to  tlie  moment  spoken  of).  Liv.  3,  50. 

—  2.  Foret/atn  reij)ublicje  cui  semper  fari.  Cic.  Fam.  12,  1  (favet/ant,  then  and  there; 
fafi,  at  all  times).—  3.  Quamquam  te  boniim  timor  faciibat  (at  that  particular  time),  im- 
probumyVd^audacia  (at  all  times  except  the  particular  time  mentioned).  Cic.  Phil.  2.36, 
99.-4.  l)eincei)s  fiiit  annus  quoeijo  consuhlfuin  pefli'i ;  j)etebat  Catillnamecum.  Cic,  CseI. 
4,  10  {petlri  is  com})lete  within  tlie  year;  bur  also  because  the  action  was  crowned  with 
success:  'I  obtained  the  consulship'.  Pettbat  is  incomplete  at  the  time  of  Cicero's 
candidature,  but  also  because  Catiline  failed  to  carry  the  election). —  5.  ^lius  scHbi-bat 
oratiOnes  qiias  alii  dicerent.  ut  Q.  Pomi)Cjo  Uufo  (as  for  instance  for  Pompejus  Rufus), 
quaniqitam  is  etiam  ipse  scnpnt  eas  qiiibus  prose  est  usus.  Cic.  Brut.  5(5.  206.  (The 
iniperlect  scribtf/fit  represents  the  action  as  a  professional  activity,  see  R.  72.  No.  D. :  but 
scrip-it,  ultliougli  involviiiir  repeated  action  is  represented  as  an  occasional  action. — 
6.  .M.  Scaurus  non  sa-pc  dictbat.  Latlne  vero  ini)rlmis  elejjanter  est  lociltus.  Cic,  Brut. 
35,  1:^5,  (Dicebat  expresses  habit ;  tst  locitfus  is  in  the  perfect,  because  tlie  imperfect  lo- 
gueMtur  might  be  understood  as  limiting  tiie  action  to  the  occasions  when  he  '  dicNjat '), 

—  7.  lAcetxd  melius  quam  /-m/^viMIortensius.  Cic.  Or.  38.  iJicebat  is  an  imperfect  of 
habit;  ycripnt  is  not  ri'))resented  as  a  habit,  hut  as  the  judgment  of  Cicero  on  the  quality 
ol  Hortensius"s  writings.  It  is  the  main  predicate,  while  dictbat  has  the  force  of  a 
concessive  clause.  Cicero  meant  to  say :  '  Ilortensius"s  2vriti/iqs  are  no  good  models 
for  imitiition'.  But  to  soften  the  harshness  of  this  criticism,  lie  added  i\mi  wJienerer 
Hortensjus  ,s7)ciA'e,  Jie  spoke  well.  P'nmi  urbanity  the  excuse  is  placed  before  the  cen- 
sure, 'i  his  loree  of  n'ripi^it  would  be  destroyed  "by  scribibat,  or  by  placing (/icfia/  in  the 
l)erfect. —  8,  Nec  enim  l)ej«)tar<>  cornix  canere  potnit,  recte  eum  faeere  quod  populi  Ro- 
mani  libertatem  defendere  jtararet.  Ipse  hoc  seniiibat.  sicuti  sennt.  Cic,  Div.  37,  78, 
Stntiebat,  if  not  followed  by  sicuti  sensit,  ou  acc«<unt  of  its  opposition  to  poiuit,  would 

1  Auferre.  to  steal.—  2  did  not  blush  ;  was  not  ashamed.— 3  to  relax,—  <  after  the 
battle  had  once  commenced. —  ^  was  the  last  to  leave. —  «ivory  chair. —  ^  held  court 
as  well  as  discussed.—  ^  bodies  of  clients.—  »  although  blind.—  '"  literally  'delayed  his 
lite',  i.  e.,  kept  himself  alive.—  n  bird-catching.—  '2  by  weaving  feathers  together.— 
"coverings  for  his  body,—  "  by  trade.— '^inadea  living.—  '«  by  hisdeliverv,- '^  Crassus 
was  more  distinirui shed  by  the  substance  of  his  addresses.—  '*>  wit.—  1*  pleasantry.— 
2»  was  superior  to  all.—  21  in  the  city  of  Cales,—  22  without  fetters,—  23  accompanied.— 
2*  under  lock.—  25  guarded. —  26  on  which  he  was  born,  i.  ^.,  his  birthday.- 2'  was  in- 
volved in,  seized  with. 


^ 


BiG 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


FUTURE  TENSES. 


347 


have  an  hypothetical  force  (p.  730,  3)  :  'he  would  have  felt  this  even  without  the  cawin» 
of  the  crow  ').    The  perltct  sennit  means  here  couiplctcness  as  reality  and  actuality  (.uh 
he  really  and  actually  lelt  it). 
f3^  For  the  Imperfect  in  letters  see  §  589. 

IV.     PLUPERFECT   TENSE. 
§  5S6.  The  Plupeufect  i^euerally  correspouds  to  i\\G  English  pluper- 
fect, except  in  the  instances  mentioned  Obs.  3. 

Obs.  1.  The  pluperfect  it»  used  (a)  to  denote  an  action  which  was  complete  hrfore  the 
time  spoken  of:  Iter  (Ilannihalis  in  descensu  de  Alpibus)  multo  quam  in  ascensn  fuerat 
dilflciliiia  fiiit,  Liv,  21,  35  ;  {h)  to  denote  an  action  which  had  coi  nine  need  before  the  time 
ppoken  of,  hut  was  completed  at  the  time  spoken  ol".  Such  pluperfects  are  frequently 
co-ordinated  whh  /n/>fori''al irnfierfect.t :  Prima  luce  etnostri  umuon  eranf  /ran/^pfrrfati.  et 
hostium  ucies  cemelmtur  (fx'fore  (iaybreak.  i.  e.,  heftue  the  time  spoken  of,  the  act  of  >hip- 
pin<;  the  troops  wms  not  yet  completed,  but  it  had  commenci'd  ;  af  daybreak  the  act  was 
comnleteK  Cies.  B.  G.  7,  (Vi;  (r)  to  denote  an  action,  commenced  before  the  time  spoken 
of.  the  eflects  and  consequences  of  which  are  still  lasting  at  the  time  spoken  of.  Such 
]>luperfectshave  the  force  of  periplirastic  imperfects  (p.  l-i7,  U.  131),  with  which  they  are 
fre(|uently  co-ordinated  :  Iluncoinnem  locum  copiie  Gallorum  com])leveranteX  maceriam 
sex  in  ah'itudinem  iH'(.\nm  pradtt.i'franf.  Castra  opportOnis  locis  erant  jxm/a  (the  phice 
was  still  tilled  with  troops,  and  the  wall  still  existed  at  the  time  spoken  of.  Erant  f)0- 
n'a  is  a  periphnvstic  imperfect).  C:es.  W.  O.  7.  VtW  —  Ita  uno  tt-mpore  et  loniras  navis  ses- 
tus  contplevetaf,  et  onerarias  tempestas  afllictilbat ;  Thus  the  tide  had  at  the  same  time 
Jilltd  the  lonj;  ships,  when  the  storm  was  injurinjjr  the  freij^ht  ships.  C;bs.  B.  G.  4,  29 
(ce>itu>i  complecerat  has  the  force  of  mi^fu  coni/flitai  erant).  —  Dum  certilmen  in  unam 
partem  ho>.tium  oculos  averterat,  scalis  capitur  murus  ;  While  the  combat  had  turned 
the  looks  of  the  enemy  in  one  direction,  the  w.ill  was  taken  by  sealinjj^  ladders.  Liv.  32, 
24  (dum  averterat  has  the  force  of  averterat,  et  dian  avtvms  teiitbaf,  t>r  rather  duin— tenet). 

Obs.  2.  The  ancient  <:rammarians  define  the  jduperfect  as  the  tense  denoting 'what 
happened  a  very  long  lime  a(jo\  and  hence  I'riscian  stranu'ely  states  that  in  such  passa- 
ges as  •  Trojic  qui  primus  ab  oris  vtnit  (Virv'.  -En.  1.1)',  and  '  cecinit  qu;e  prima  /Enea- 
das  (lb.  8,  310) ',  the  perfects  venil  and  cecinit  have  the  force  of  jdnpertects.  Sometimes, 
indeed,  pluperfects  oeeur  whicli  seem  to  be  used  in  accordance  with  this  definition,  as  : 
'Iccirco  (jenueram  (tiliiim)  ut  esset  qui  pro  patrijl  mortem  non  dubitilret  occiimbere'. 
Cic.  Tusc.  1,  42.  102.  But  if  the  detinitioii  of  the  ancient  ^grammarians  were  correct,  a 
very  great  number  of  i)erfects  would  have  the  force  of  pluperfects,  and  u  still  greater 
number  of  pluperfects  must  be  considered  as  faulty. 

On?!.  3.  Sometimes  the  pluperfect  denotes  an  actifui  hai)peiiini;  «<  thetimeftjxtkenof. 
By  such  pluperfects  the  author  prepares  the  mind  of  the  reader  for  a  later  past  action 
to  be  mentioned  afterwards;  as:  Dum  elephanti  trajiciuntur,  liannil)al  Niimidas  equi- 
tes  ad  castra  Jiomjina  ;yavf-/rt/ (this  pluperfect  refers  to  a  skirmish  of  the  Numidiaiis 
with  the  Romans,  which  is  n'ported  dincily  afterwards).  Liv.  21.29. —  Nam  quuminam- 
hultlrem  in  xyi^io,  et  e-'isttn  otidsus  donii,  M.  ad  me  Brutus  vmo-at  (referrin;::  to  a  conversa- 
tion between  Cicero aiifl  Brutus,  narrated  afterwards).  Cic.  Brut.  3,  10.  See  {).  320,  Obs.  1. 
—  VVhile  the  pluperfect  thus  preirnautly  foreshadows  a  later  past  action,  it  may  even 
denote  an  action  happeniiij^  a//fr  the  time  ppoken  of.  completely  reversini;  the  lotrical 
order  of  time:  P.  Cornelius  consul  tridiio  fere  j)Ostquam  Hannibal  a  rijxJ  lihodani  ino- 
vit.  (luadrilto  a'zmine  ad  castra  hostium  venerat.  Liv.  21.  32.  Here  an  Euirlish  phiptrfect 
should  he  used  for  the  Latin  perfect  ;//r/?j/,  and  the  Latin  pluperfect  ?ft«f^/Y// must  be  ren- 
dered by  an  YA\^\\i\\pretenle.  Tims  in  the  followinj;  sentence:  Jam  aliquantum  spatii 
ex  et»  loco  ubi  pugnatum  est,  aufuijerat.  Liv.  1,  25.  8. 

Obs.  4.  In  the  followinj;  instances  the  Enirlish  plnjierfect  is  expressed  by  a  Latin  im- 
perfect: (a)  in  the  case  mentioned  Rem.  59;  (/<)  sometimes,  to  denote  an  action  lastiiiif 
without  deftiicd  limits  at  some  \\\\wbefore  the  time;  spoken  of.  as:  ()ui  ne  nostrorum  qui- 
dem  flnium  nobis  per  nos  tuendOrumjus  antea  dabant  (inst.  of  dedcranf).  nihil  inierces- 
pgrunt.  Liv.  8.  4. —  Latin  PKirFECTs  are  used  with  the  force  of  Entdish  pluperfects: 
(«)  after  ]X)st(iuam,  ntn.  sini'dar,  and  sometimes  after  r/Kinn  (see  ]>.  f».V.>,  foil.)  :  {lA  some- 
times in  cLAisKs,  particularlv  relaiive  clauses  :  Co;^niiis  eis  rebus  qu:e  sunt  gtsfit  in  ci- 
teriOre  Ilispaniil,  helium  parSbat.  Cies,  B.  C.  2,  18.—  In  eadem  causil  fuCrunt  Usipefes, 
qui  compluils  annos  Siievorum  vim  sustinu^nint  (which  had  happened  fjefore  the  time 
spoken  of),  lb.  B  G.  4.  9.  See  the  Ex.  quoted  n.  307,  Obs.  3(d(miusquie  reikis  HierOnis/t/iO. 
Sometimes  such  perfects  occur  in  principal  sentences:  Dies  baud  iUi  multi  intercennS- 
runt  (Sov  intercesserant)  quum  le^jfiti  ex  Leontlnis,  prsesidium  orantes,  veneruut.  Liv.  24,  20. 


Obs.  5.  The  English  preterit  corresponds  to  a  Latin  pluperfect  in  many  clauses  de- 
pendent on  imperfects  of  contingent  action.    See  R.  (»5. 

Obs.  6.  Frequently  pluperfects  are  followed  by  clauses  with  qwim  having  the  force  of 
a  relative  adverb  {quo  tempore).  If  in  this  instance  the  action  in  the  clause  with  quum 
is  represented  to  have  ivnnediately  followed  the  action  expressed  by  the  pluperfect, 
certain  adverbial  expressions  of  time  are  attached  to  the  pluperfect,  ^s  vix  (scarcely), 
conunodum  (just),  tantuin  quod  (just  a  moment) ;  Vix  prior  tumultus  conticuerat  quum 
Scipio  vi  majOrc  urbem  agiiredi  jubet  (.scarcely  had  the  tumult  subsided).  Liv.  26,  45.— 
Commodum  ad  te  mii^erain  Demeam  quum  Eros  ad  me  venit  (I  had  just  sent  Demea  to 
you).  Cic.  Att.  i:j,  30,  2  (See  lb.  13,  9,  1 ;  13,  19,  1).—  Tantuin,  quod  ex  Arpinati  veneram, 
quum  mihi  a  te  litterae  redditte  sunt  (I  had  just  arrived  a  moment  ago  from  my  villa  in  Ar- 
plnum,  when,  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  7,  23,  1.    See  p.  (>52,  10. 

Obs.  7.  Sometimes  the  pluperfects  of  deponent  verbs  take  the  auxiliary /«^am  in- 
stead of  eram,  the  same  as  the  periphrastic  pluperfects  of  the  passive  (p.  128.  R.  136). 
These  forms  are  used  (a)  to  denote  actions  happening  before  actions  expressed  by  ordin- 
ary pluperfects,  as  :  Iluic  Caisar,  quod  in  omnibu!?  bellis  singular!  ejus  o\>er^ fuerat  ums, 
niajOrum  locum  reftfituerat ;  To  him  Ciesar  ?iad  restored  the  place  of  his  ancestors  be- 
cause he  had,  in  all  wars,  made  use  of  his  special  services.  Ctes,  B.  G.  5.  25.  (b)  to  re- 
present the  action  as  complete  in  certain  particular  senses,  as  :  ConvenCre  omnes  pi-aeter- 
quam  qui  cedentts  in  arcem  Romanos  persecuti  fueianf.  Liv.  25,  10.  The  form  fuerant 
intimates  that  the  act  of  '  following'  the  fleeing  Itomans  was  complete  and  definite,  so 
that  thev  remained  in  the  castle  together  with  the  Romans,  a  fact  which  would  not  be 
expressed  by  ])ersecuti  erant.  In  a  similar  way  are  used  ^loitdt  us  fuerat  '(Liv.  25,  6),  and 
fuerant  usi  (CiSS.  B.  G.  4,  38). 

Obs.  8.  For  the  use  of  the  jiluperfect  indicative  with  hypothetical  force,  see   B.  VI. 

p.  7;j0 For  the  use  of  the  pluperfect  indicative  with  the  force  of  a  '  future-pluperlect' 

see  R.  76,  Obs.  8. 


V.    FUTURE   TENSES. 

§  5§7.  Both  tlie  future  of  the  present  system  ('  FUTUTlE-PRESE^'T '  or 
•future'  witliout  any  addition,  §  322,  No.  8),  and  the  future  of  the  per- 
fect system  ('  FUTUKE-rERFECX  ',  g  340),  denote  actions  to  happen  after  the 
speaker's  time,  or  after  the  moment  of  speaking.  Tlie  future-perfect  repre- 
sents a  future  action  as  complete  (R.  74) ;  the  future-present  represents  an 
action  simply  as  future  without  distinguishing  its  completeness  or  incom- 
pleteness (R.  73). 

Ob^  The  views  of  the  ancient  Latin  grammarians  on  the  future-perfect  are  as  vague 
and  erroneous  as  their  ideas  on  the  pluperfect  (|  58<),  Obs.  2).  They  called  this  tense  the 
'  subjunctive  of  the  future  tense  '  (Prise.  8,  10,  55),  being  led  to  this  erroneous  view  by 
the  FtniM  of  the  future-perfect,  which,  except  in  the  first  person  singular,  is  the  same  as 
that  of  the  perfect  sul>jun«tive.  To  this  similarity  in  form  often  corresponds  a  smiil- 
arity  in  meaning,  so  that  it  nuiy  sometimes  appear  doubtful  whether  such  forms  (for 
instance,  negavens,  dixerint,  etc.)  must  be  assigned  to  the  i)erfect  subjunctive,  or  to  the 
fut  ure-perfeQt.  See  .R.  75,  Obs.  1.— But  nobody  now  doubts  that  the  form  airuivero,  etc.  is 
an  indicative,  altliough  there  are  some  grammarians  who  have  enriched  the  language  with 
a  subjunctive  of  the  future-present  {amatiirus  s'un).  while  one  or  two  have  introduced 
even  a  subjunctive  of  the  future-perfect  (amaverim).  These  evident  errors,  hardly  need 
relutation.— Modern  Latinists  and  grammarians  have  given  to  the  future-perfect  the 
name  of  '  Fut ilrum  e.r actum,'  or  '  Futilrum  perfectvm.'  both  terms  exactly  correspond- 
ing to  the  nature  of  this  tense,  as  expressing  a /«<Mr«  complete  action. 

§  5S§.  The  two  future  tenses  are  either  («)  ordinary  futures  (R.  73, 
74) ;  or  (//)  potential  futures  (R.  75) ;  or  (c)  dependent  futures  (R.  76). 

Hem.  73.  The  futuue-present,  as  ORDrXAiiY-FUTURE  {i.e.  strictly  re- 
ferring to  future  time),  corresponds  to  the  English  future  tense,  both 
with  'shall'   and  'will.'     Hence  the  ordinary  future-present  is  used 


348 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES. 


(1)  to  represent  an  action  as  j^redictedhy  the  speaker;  (2)  to  represent  a 
future  action  as  determined  and  icilled  by  the  speaker  (someiimes  by 
other  persons). 

Ob?.  1.  If  the  future  reprc.s<M)ts  an  action  as  predicted  hy  the  ppoakcr,  it  corrosponds 
to  the  Enu:li;-li  form,  with  'shall'  for  the  tirst  portion,  and  to  tliu  form  with  'wiir 
for  the  '-i.  and  3.  persons,  as:  Solem  pr;e  jaciilOrum  multitiidine  fioa  videbifia  .  .  .  'In 
umbijl  ij^jitur  pKffiiahimus  ;'  I'c/'/  wiU  not  s^ee  the  ^un  for  the  imiltitudu  of  iniHsiifs  ,  .  . 
•  We  hIu7u,  WxKiW,  fifjkt  in  the  hhade,'  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  42,  101.— Ista  lex  jyerj'tretur,  vnit 
enim  Cae!»ar  ;  That  law  wiUj}ai>s,  lor  Cai:*ar  will  have  it  bo.  Cic.  Alt.  13,  32,  4.  (See 
Ex.  1-9.) 

Obs.  2.  If  the  future  represents?  an  action  as  determined  by  the  ppeaker,  it  corresponds 
to  the  Eui^Iish  futuri-,  with  '  will '  for  the  tirst  person,  and  to  the  future,  with  *  bhail  ' 
for  the  2.  and  8.  persons,  as:  OccVIar  equidem,  ped  victus  non  perldo,  I s/iaU  be  killed 
(prediction),  but  I  wilt  not  jierifh  tdetermination)  a  vanquislied  man.  Auct.  Her.  4,  52. 
— Sella  tihi  e7'lt  tamqiiam  hypodidasealo  proxinia  :  ><equitnr  puhlnus  ;  You  fhall  have 
the  next  chair  in  ^'our  quality  as  sub-teacher;  a  cushion  shall  fol low.  Cic.  Fani.  9,  18, 
4.  (i.e.  I  wdl  take  care  X.\\M  you  have  these  things.)  The  tirst  i)t'rson  of  tiie  future  is 
rendered  by 'shall,' or  '  should,' if  the  action  is  dftermiued  by  others  than  the  speak- 
er: Claasibus  aditrsabimur  igitur  ?  '  Shall '  (should)  we,  then,  oppose  the  fleets  ?  Cic. 
Att.  10,  8,  4.     Ex.  8-l.i. 

Obs.  3.  For  rendering  the  English  '  shall '  in  laws,  see  R.  75,  Obs.  5. 

Obs.  4.  Somt'tiines  the  Latin  uses  a  pkesent  tense  when  in  English  a  future  is  re- 
quired, namely : 

(a)  Oiten  with  verbs  expressing  aprc'^ent  *7rt/^,  which  is  to  continue  till  another  action 
will  take  place,  especially  with  verbs  of  expectiuir  and  waiting,  as  exsj)^c(dre,  opinr'ui, 
teii^ri,  commot'ilri :  Konue  ^t^y^eor  dum  a  l)olal)elhe  procuratoribus  exiuam  priniam  peii- 
siOnt-m  ;  I  shall  Ix  kt-pt  {shall  remain)  in  llonu*  till  the  lirsi  payment  is  due  l)y  Dulal)ella"s 
agents.  Cic.  Earn.  0,  18.  5.— Itaeiuc  ^.r>7>((7o  Tlu-ssuk)nTc;e  acta  Kal.  Sext.  ;'Tliererore  I 
shall  await  at  Thessalonica  what  will  (may)  be  done  at  the  lirst  of  Sexiilis.  lb.  Att.  3, 
1.5,  6.  This  present  has  the  same  nature  as  the  present  tense  used  for  states  that  have 
been  lasting  for  a  certain  lime  (U.  421. —lint  often  the  future  is  used  in  this  instance 
in  Latin  as  it  is  in  English  :  Durn  herus  adveniat  a  foro,  opptriar  domi ;  /  fhall  wait  at 
liome  till  the  master  arrives  from  the  forum.  I'laut.  Pumi.  4.  2.  107.  See  Ex,  14-17.  JJuin 
(till)  referring  to  future  actions  in  tiiis  connection  has  its  predicate  either  in  the  future- 
present  or  in  the  present  indicative  or  subjunctive.     See  Cic.  Fam.  IG.  10,  1. 

{b)  Sometimes,  with  verbs  of  going  awiS.  coining,  U  exihcr  &x\  atlverb  or  a  clause  dis- 
tincily  shows  that  a  future  action  is  meant,  or  if  the  act  is  to  be  immediately  performed 
(similar  to  the  imperfect  in  the  case  of  R.  5i,  Obs.  2).  Tiiis  u^aire,  however,  i>  contlned 
to  colloquial  or  epistolary  style  :  Ego  in  ledeiu  Veneris  f^o,  I  shall  go  (am  goingdirectly)  to 
the  temple  ot  Venus.  Plant.  P(en.  1, 1.  62.— Lentulus  hodieapud  me  (est),  eras  mane  viidit  ; 
Lentulus  is  in  my  house  to-day,  he  leaves  (is  going  to  leave)  to-morrow  morning.  Cic. 
Att.  14,  11,  2.— Ego  abto;  vale  atque  salve  !  1  mud  go,  good  bye  I  Plant.  Cure.  4,  4,  32. 
Ex.  18. 

(c)  Sometimes  in  clauses  with  antequam  and priusguam.    See  R.  70,  Obs.  3,  c. 

Obs.  5.  Certain  verbs  are  idiomatically  used  in  the  future  to  increase  the  force  of  an 
aftirmation,  the  same  as  'swearing'  particles.     Here  i)elong  (a)  Mortar  si  d  will  die  if; 

I  pleuge  my  word  that not);  Moriar  si  pneter  te  quem  reliquum  habeo;  I  will  die 

if  I  have  anyone  left  but  you.  Cic.  Fam.  9,  15,  2.—  (b)  Ita  vivain^  (as  true  as  I  live>,  used 
parenthetically,  as:  Sollicitat.  ita  vlram.  me  tuavaletOdo:  Upon  my  life,  your  health 
makes  me  uneasy.  Cic.  Fam.  Ui,  20.—  (c)  AnuVx),  or  amdbo  te,  a<  pareiithetical  sentence, 
which  is  added  both  to  imperative  and  interrogative  senttMices:  Cogita,  amdbo, 
item  nosperhiberi  ;  Please  consider  that  we  are  in  the  same  ])redicament.  Plaut.  Pien. 
1,  2.  30.—  Soror,  parce.  amdbo;  Sister,  forbear,  I  beseech  yon  !  lb,  1,  2,  ;i9.—  Eho,  amdtjo, 
quid  illo  nunc  properas  ?  Halloa !  \Vhy,/or  tk"  sakeof  your  love,  are  you  now  hurrving 
there?  lb.  \. 'Z,  bA.— Amdbo,  niim  hi  falso  oblectant  gaiulio  nos  ?  Ihar  me.  do  'ihey 
amuse  us  with  a  false  i)leasure  (hope)?  lb.  5,  4.  101.— .l/mTAo /^  quum  dabis  posthac 
ali(iuid  donum  litterarum,  mei  memineris  ;  PUaxe  remember  me  if  voii,  hereafter,  should 
make  any  literary  gift.  Cic.  Fam.  15,  17,  4.— .1//<<7(V>  in  this  connection  literally  means 
•  1  shall  be  obliged  to  you  if  you  do,  or  if  you  telV  what  is  expressed  by  the  main  predi- 

1  Most  grammarians  consider  the  expressions  rnonar  si,  and  ita  tJivam  as  present  sub- 
junctives. Both  forms  have  here  exactly  the  same  meaning,  and  in  place  of  *  .sjf  r/ie  di  amii- 
bunf  the  form  '  sic  me  di  ament '  is  frequently  found  ;  but  only  •  amibo  te  '  not  '  amem 


FUTURE  TENSES. 


349 


catc  -  Similar  is  the  force  of  the  expression  'Sic  me  di  amabunt'  Chy  the  love  of  the 
L'od<)  i  e  'The  «^ods  shall  love  me  as  certainly  as  what  is  expressed  by  the  main-predi- 
cate is  true  ' :  ItcTme  di  ajmbunt,  hand  proi)terea  te  rogo  ut  hoc  proferam.  ler.  Hec.  1, 

2   SI 

'  i  Ilodie  apud  inferos»  fortasse  ccenabimvs.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  42, 101.— 2.  -Roc  assegui- 
mv'r  et  tacendoet  laiendo^.  lb.  Att.  13,  31.  3  —3.  Nomen  judicum  amiftemus  ei  ad  cau- 
sas3  judicia  jam  facta*  domo  dr^ferhnvs^.  lb.  Clu.  '2,  «.- 4  C^iud  ergo  potis^simum 
scritnim  ?  Quod  velle  te  puto»,  cito  me  ad  te  esse  venturum.  lb.  t  am.  9,  i,\.-b.  Qua- 
rts fortas.se  cur,  (luum  luec  in  urbe  sini'.  non  absun,  quemadniodmn  tu  lb.  9.  2,  2  — 
6.  SeditiOnis  auctOres  sanguine  ;^/^//<«  quod  adraisernnt».  Liv. '28.  29.- 7.  Miln  crede, 
nnus  annus  additus  laboribus.  multorum  annOrum  lanitiami»  ,io])i8  afferet^K  <^»c.  Qu. 
Fr  1  1  1—8  Ouaniquam  invlta'2  te«/re/>oi3,  animutne<:o^/^^i«m7/i'*  tamen  ut  iliud 
coiisulami»  Plant.  Cist.  8,4,  3.— 9.  In  sua  terra  cof/am  pngnare  Hannibalem,  et  Car- 
thago pra-m'iumvictoriie  el-it.  Liv.  '28,  44.-  10.  De^«  Fadio/om-A;u/.^studiOsequae  rogas. 
Cic  Fam  15  14. '2.-- 11.  Quare  negent  Siculi  sese  te  actorei^  «d  J"d'cium  adfut^ros, 
ei  ine  non  ««cii...  Cic.  dTv.  Ca.c.  9^ '28.- 12.  Nostm- ad  diem  detain- .^^^^^^^  Ib.lani^ 
1«  10—  13.  A  nobis  agentur  omnia  diligenter.  II).  1,  5a,  3  -  14.  Exspecto  dum  i  le 
venit.  Ter.  Eun.  1,  2.  l'2fi.-15.  Ego  in  Arcano  o;;p.Har  dum  istac,,<.Mio^^^^^  Att. 

10  3-16.  Tu  istosabdQce  intro-'o,  „os  hasce  hie  i^mtolabimur^K  Plaut.  Poen.  o.  3, 
36!-  17.   Opptriar    hominem  hic  ut  salflteiu^^.  Ter.  Ad.  3,  3,  92.-  18.  Ego  hos  conr 
veniam^^ ;  post  hue  redeo.  lb.  4,  7,  39. 
Rem  74  The  (ordinary)  future-perfect  in  independent  sentences  is  used 

(^0  ^vitii  the  force  of  an  EngUsh  future-perfect  (Obs.  1) ;  {h)  with  the  force 

of  an  lc:,ui^\\s\i  future-present  to  represent  actions  as  complete  in  the  lu- 

ture  (Obs.  2).  * 

Ob-    1    While  the  English  future-perfect  is  rarely  used  in  independent  sentences,  and 
still  more  rarely  in  clauses,  the  Za/iM  future-perfect  most  frequently  ocxurs  m  clauses 

0  7TU)nt  also  (similarlvUJ  the  English)  in  independent  sentence^    But.t  ,s  rarely  used 
V    hie  force  of  an  English  future  perfect,     ^yhere  ,t  occurs  with  the  meaning  o    t  le 

Enirli^h  future-perfect,  it  is  mostly  qualitied  by  clauses  with  dum  (wh  le,  t  11),  or  by 
dauiesw  th«twith/>H««a//«//^..r  byVMUM-al  relative  clauses:  lJuminh'.ee  leges  c-o 
[  Imn  lor  asse  ^nr.//^;o;  Perhaps  I  shall  have  met  with  Xhaxxnan  lU  (before  when)  you 
reiti'  letter  Cic  At  .  9,  5  -  Prieciare  vixero  liquid  mihi  jirius  acndent  quam  hoc 
[a   turn  nial   videro  :  I  shall  have  lived  happily  if  I  die  belore  seeing  so  great  a  calami  y. 

1  M  '6  99.-  Is  bell.im  cunfectrit  qui  Antonium  oppresserlt  :  He  who  crushes  Auto- 
niiis  will  have  finished  the  war.  lb.  Fam.  11,  1'2,  2.    See  H.  70,  Obs.  4  (Ex.  1.  2). 

Obs.  2.  Frequently  the  Latin  future-perfect  is  used  with  the  force  of  an  English /«- 
turerresHif  This  is  the  ca>e  if  the  predicate  may  be  conceived  a-^  an  act  cotn])lefetn  the 
/v'/V/ras  r'Perpaucis  diebus  in  Poinpejauum  ;  post  in  luec  Puteolana  legna  rei^avvpiw; 
tnaverv  f'wdJys  1  shall  start  for  (my)  Pompejanum  ;  then  I  shall  rehnTi  hy  ^ax\  to 
thel'  Putcoat^  realms.  Cic.  Att.  14,  16,  1.  Here  it  is  not  the  return-tnp.  but  the  return 
t^eTf  whids  expressed  bv  the  future-perfect.  The  fuf.re  renarigax>  would  mean  'I 
sir  11  be  n  the  return-trip"'.  (See  Ex.  3-9).  Thus  generally  \ridero  is  used  with  the 
f  ,rce  of-  '  shall  see'  (but  also  ridl^x,^.  Videro  imp,ies  »)'«;''  <>;")fj,lf^;;^;;[';;^d^ 
'  riilTre'  a*  an  accomplished  act  :  Ego  sta?c  recte  ut  haiit  ridero  ;  I  Ml  see  to  this  being 
^  i  1v.,l^K  Ter  A  dr  2  (J  25  Thus  frequently  ' *SVf/  ridetimus'  as  a  detached  sen- 
Unce%u\  veVlils^e     C  5,3    Ib'4,6,4,'and  often.    But  '  S.d  ridebimus  ^  Ih 

10  4  1  -  S?rupulum  i^^enuW,  sed  vidrbimus  ;  A  poser  for  one  that  is  Som- away  but 
we  !AazV/^^/(r"  whether  it  will  be  feasible,  representing  the  act  as  incomplete  in  the 
f.n'r.  ;  lb  Fill  4  •>H  8()  See  Fx  10  11  Hence  sometimes  future-perlects  and  luturc- 
ore-e  t's  (bo^^  Eu'VlVsh  comm<)n  futures),  are  co-ordinate  if  the  cute  de- 
m  tS  ^c  no  etc-  k\  in  the^^  ser.se.  and  the  other  an  act  without  definite  limits  : 
N  i^quam  S  t.s  banc  n  Iserrimam  vitam  vel  suslenfaix>,ve\  abjerero  ;  ^o;vlK're  it  wil 
be  easier  to  me  either  to  drag  along  this  most  wretched  hie,  or  to  ihww  it  of.  Cic.  Att. 

:^  19,  1.     Ex  ^12^ 

1  Tn   the  other  (lower)  world.—  ^  bv  silence  and  concealment.—  3  trial.—  ^formed.— 

18  as  tu  Fadius.-  '^  te  adore,  when  you   are  appointed  manager  of    lu.  tn,''J-  „„„". 
diiVv  --  1»  at  theauoointed  day.-^o  introabducere,  to  take  into  the  house.-  -»  to  expect 
fol\nx  for  -  ^'^  ?(?'2lute  hiln^  to  p,y  my  respects  to  him.-  ^3  aliquem  convenlre,  to  see 
eomebody  (in  order  to  speak  with  him). 


350 


USE   OF   THE  TENSES. 


Obs.  3.  Sometimes  future-perfects  of  deponents  (hut  only  in  clauses)  take  the  an.TilJ- 
KTy  fuero  instoul  of  era,  the  same  U8  periphrastic  fntnre-peffects  <>f  the  passive?  voice  : 
Nunc  proticiscCmurad  reliqua,  si  paucn  VLulcfuenmus  a  V()i)is  deprecdii.  Cic.Verr.  2,  3,  5. 

1.  Bidunmi/MfH.<  in  viil  dum  in  CuniJlnum'  v.iiis.  Cic.  Fam.  IG,  10,  1. —  2.  Si  omnes 
ocruliinus^,  ego  omnibus  exitio* /««^/-o.  U).  (^u.Fr.  1,  4.-3.  Clamor  et  primus  impetus 
ciXi^WAcepent.  Liv.  25.  3S.— 4.  Atque  hoc  idem  in  amici  re*  uut  periculo/<?(^-frl/.  Cic. 
OIT.  1,  43,  151. —  5.  (^uis  tibi  priinum  iliud  conctsaerit  pneter  PyrrhOiR-m'*  Ih.  Fin.  4, 
18,  48.—  «.  Jieynriiro^  si  te  vidcro.  lb.  Att.  2,  24,  5. —  7.  Multumad  «a  qme  qua^rinjus^ 
explanatio  tua  j^fOfecerif*.  lb.  Fin.  3.  4.-8.  Isto  pretio  iios»  tuas»»  IdcxW  feceris. 
Plant.  Pcen.  5,  4,  G2.— ».  Si  \n^r<;U,  abiero.  Ter.  Ad.  1,2,  47.—  10.  Quicsce",  istanc 
rem  ego  recte  vldtro.  lb.  Merc,  2,  3,  111,—  11.  (^ute  fuerit  causa  mox  ridew.  Cic.  Fin. 
1,  10. — 12.  Quic  quum  magna  ipei  hab^bimun^'^ ,  turn  dtinpseriinus^^  hostibus  multo 
majOra.  Liv.  20,  4^3. 

Item.  75.  The  future  (botli  present  and  perfect)  is  called  totential  if 
not  a  future  time,  but  particular  conceptions  of  the  speaker  in  regard  to 
the  predicate  are  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  future.  The  future  is  thus 
used  1)  with  the  force  of  an  impkuative  (Obs.  1);  2)  to  represent  the 
predicate  as  a  conclusion  of  the  speaker  from  premises  given  or  under- 
stood (Obs.  2.  4) ;  3)  to  designate  the  predicate  as  a  kule  or  law  estab- 
lished by  the  speaker  (Obs.  5) ;  4)  to  designate  the  predicate  as  an  opin- 
ion of  the  speaker  (Obs.  0);  5)  in  verbs  of  saying  and  uttering  as  a  modest 
form  of  tlie  assertion  (Obs.  7).  The  futtire-jierfect  is  not  used  with  po- 
tential force,  excei^t  (^/^as  a  dependent  future  (H.  70),  {b)  when  it  lias  the 
force  of  an  imperative  (Obs.  1).  In  all  other  instances  of  potential  fu- 
tures generally  i\ni  future-present  is  employed. 

Obs.  1.  Both  future  tenses  are  used  with  the  force  of  impefiatives,  beinsr  rendered 
by  English  imi)eratives  :  In  omnibus  rebus  quid  tantis  hotioribus  dei)eas  cof/UdMn  ;  Con- 
sider in  all  tilings  what  you  are  owing  to  sucii  honors.  Cie.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  1,  10,  Vos.  mili- 
tes,  eo9  quorum  vos  modo  arma  texGrunt.  ]ni\rr>ue»  ml'/faMfis'  ;  You,  soldiers  salute  (will 
Kilutc)  those  whose  arms  have  i)rotectcd  you  just  now,  as  patrons,  Liv,  22,  21).—  Quare 
\\\\\\\  j^ropemrl'i ;  Therefore  be  not  in  any  hurry.  lb.  Fam.  1(>.  3,  2,—  In  '7nei  memineris'' 
(remember  me),  Cic.  Fam.  1.5,  7,  4,  memirierht  may  be  taken  for  a  subjunctive  (perfect, 
with  the  siL'niftcation  of  a  present),  or  lor  a  future.  But  also  the  future-perfects 
with  imperative  force  of  other  verbs  rnau  generally  betaken  lor  perfect  subjunctives.  See 
§  ,^.94.—  Ex,  1-5. 

Obs.  2,  The  Latin  likestoemploy  the  form  of  the  future-present  in  anrnmentative  dis- 
course to  represent  the  predicate  as  a  conclusion  from  premises  given  or  understood,  or 
as  a  statement  dependent  on  a  sipposition  madeor  understood  by  the  author.  In  English 
such  futures  are  sometimes  rendered  by  a  future  with  'u'Ul\  but  more  frequently  by 
presents  or  some  form  of  the  potential  (can,  mu"*t,  would) :  Aberif  igitura  saj)iente  icgri- 
tfldo;  lienco.  gr'wf  tvill  not  dwell  within  the  wise  (cannot  dwell,  does  not  dwell).  Cic. 
Tiisc,  3,  8,  IS.—  Num  igitur  ignobilitas  et  humllitas  sapietitem  bejlium  esse  prohibtbit ? 
Can  (will,  would)  therefore  a  low  and  humble  station  of  life  hinder  the  wise  from  being 
happy?  lb.  5,  ;i(J,  103.— Si  considerare  volumus  qiue  sit  in  natQra  hominis  excellentia^ 
intelli(jetnus  quam  sit  turpe  delicilte  ac  moll  iter  vivere  ;  If  we  would  perceive  (if  we  are 
not  blind  to)  the  excellence  in  man's  nature,  we  imi^t  comprehend  the  disgrace  of  a  lux- 
urious and  etfeminate  life.  lb.  Oil".  1.  30.  100.—  Frequently  such  futures  dependent  on 
suppositions  (expressed  or  understood)  are  rendered  by  an  Euirlish  hypothetical  period 
with  '  would'  or  '  should  '  :  Si  de  re  militjlri  huic  dicendum  erit  Snlpicio,  quceret  a  C. 
Mario  ;  If  (for  instance)  Sulpicius /f//o?/A/  have  to  speak  on  military  subjects,  he  would 
apply  to  C.  Marius.  Cic,  Or,  1,  15.  00.—  Quamobrem  si  quis  universam  oratoris  vim  de- 
fining vnlt,  is  erit  orjltor  meil  sententiii  qui,  etc.  ;  If,  therefore,  any  one  ?ro//W  define  the 
ideal  of  an  orator,  /  .should  my  that  he  is  an  orator  who,  etc,  Cic.  Or,  1,  15,  04.  (Hero 
the  future  mMias  the  force  of  dicann'nmesse).~kr\»\ow\e<  istud  non  dabit.  quippe 
qui.  etc.  ;  Aristotle  would  not  concede  this,  since,  etc.  lb.  P'in.  4,  18,  49.  (Here  we  sup- 
ply '  si  eum  quixderis.')—  See  Ex,  t>-y. 


1  Two  days.—  ^  my  villa  near  Cuma^.—  '  to  perish.—  *  abstract  dative  :  ruin.—  ^  affair. 
^  8  to  take  breath  again,  to  be  relieved. —  '  ad  en  qua',  qucerimus,  for  our  })nrpose,—  *  to 
contribute,  to  aid.—  »  us  (female  slaves).—  »»  thy  property.—  >«  be  quiet.—  ^"^  while  those 
things  which  we  shall  have,  are  great.--  '^  to  take  away  from. 


FUTURE   TENSES. 


351 


Ob«  3  In  all  iiiPtancca  of  potential  future?  the  verbs  expressing  possibility,  volition, 
and  necessitv,  namely  po«^€.  veUe,  detrere.  ojxtrtet,  n^cesse  .^^f,  and  the  predicative  gerun- 
dials  are  frequent  I  v  placed  in  the  future  with  a  potential  force  which  is  already  con- 
ted  in  the  verb  itself.  Such  future  predicates  are  generally  rendered  by  some  of  the 
f  rms  of  the  English  potential  :  Si  i-itur  (talis  vir)  non  jKilent  bella  gerere,  etc..  i  la  tamea 
1)4"  tire  (/^/.e^trqu^  in  ipslus  potestSte  ;  If,  therefore,  such  a  man  e.//J«o^  conduct 

wars  etc    hTmiycertainlv(is^erta^  to  perform  those  duties  which  are  m 

lis  nower  Cic  Off  ].  ;w.  121.- Onid  autem  did  ;><?/.  H^  si  tnrpitndinein  non  ipsam  per 
se  fKndam  esse  ^  6ut  what  can  be  said  if  we  assume  that  turpitude  is 

C;  dlltJltaSe  in  its<df  y  lb.  Fin.  3,  U,  :i8.-  Ne  respublica  q"idem  hjec  pro  se  suscipi 
volet  '  Not  even  the  State  would  have  such  things  done  for  u.  lb.  Off.  1,  45  159.— Etqui- 
dem  ban?  totam  copiam  jam  Lucullo  nostro  riotam  esse  oporabU;  ^1"^  ^^Ijole  treasnire^ 
too,  mud  have  been  known  already  to  our  friend  Lucullus.  lb.  Fiu.  3,  2,8.  bee  Ex.  10-13. 

17   19 

Ob«  4    Two  particular  forms  of  conclusions  arc  very  frequently  expressed  by  poten- 
tial futures,  namely  1)  the  syllogism  ;  2)  the  deductio  ad  absukdum. 

A  In  SYLLOGISMS  the  present  tense,  or  vece^e  est  with  a  clause,  may  also  be  used  in 
nlace  of  a  future.  In  English  we  use  (besides  the  present)  the  potential  with  'must 
or  tlie  future  with  'will ' :  (Major prkmisk)  Numquam  sapiens  est  pertui;batus  ;  (MI^OR 
PR  MisE)  at  fT.Mittldo  perturbatio  est  animi ;  (conclusion)  semper  igitur  kcti  udine 
sapiens  racabit~{oT  varat,  ovsainentem  vacare  necesse  est)  ;  A  wise  man  is  never  disturlied 
hi  Ids  nS;  but  grief  is  a  disturbance  of  the  mind ;  hence  a  wise  man  must  {will) 
ulwavs  be  free  from  grief,  Cic.  Tusc.  3,  7,  15,    See  Ex.  14. 

B   The  DEDUCTIO  ad  absurdum  is  either  clothed  in  the  form  of  a  clause  with  si  the 
l.rincipal  sentence  with  the  potential  future  containing  the  <^«!'<^J»^'''" '•*'P''';r;i"t'f,  "« 
falsi'  or  alKurd  •  or  in  the  form  of  an  independent  sentence  as  premise,  and  a  questicn  v\  ilh  a 
I)Otential  fnture  as  conclusion.    Such  nuestions  are  always  ^\'thout  interrogativ^^^ 
i.les.     Both  forms  are  usually  rendered  by  a  hypothetical  period  :  >St  nihil  (^  sap  enna 
conficiCtur)  nisi  c(»rpus.  summa  bona  erunt  ilia,  valettldo,  vacuitas  doloris.  pulcrittldo^ 
ce  eri  r  If  wi-h.m  had  only  to  deal  with  corporeal  things  the  .^"^1^^^  ^^«!>f.fj,jfj>^^^hil 
healih    freedom  from  pain,  beauty,  and  the  like.  Cic.  tin.  4,  13,  So.-  ^'mo'  »^  «"^  a»^^^^^^^ 
p.rritndinem   ootuit  repellere,  ratio  ab  sapienti  wro  non  jwie7%t?    Jj  U'&r  y^asYtower- 
V^ZZ  Vre^^^^^^^^  ^o^  ("""^,^  not)  reason  f^^ve  [he  power 
i-eoe  lit  from  the  wise?  (or  :  Fear  had  the  power  to  repel,  etc.,  and  reason  should  not, 
etc  V    C  c  tTc  3,  i7,  0( .  See  Ex,  15,  10.    Tlie  premises  attached  to  such  questions  may 
ili  nrecede  in  tlie  form  of  a  relative  clause,  the  interrogative  sentence  containing  the 
a  m-iedent  •   "v  j  ^/ca  delJlhri  fuk-Ore  illustmri  Jovis  templum  oportgbat  id  apnd  is  urn 
i    ejusuKKli  (-onv  viis  constituUur  f    A  chandelier  bv  whose  lusire  Jove's  temple  ought 
have  been  illuminated,  should  be  vsed  in  such  kind  of  banquets  ^X  ,^iich  a  man  ?  Cic 
Verr  2  4  :V>  --  Sometimes  the  clause  with  si  is  understood,  as:  Quo  quidem  modo  (i.  f .  si 
hoc  itaeritV  nee  duces  m/;*?  utiles,  nee  magisirStus,  nee  medicTna,  nee  denique  ipsa 
sapientia;  In  E^Ltwa;  neither  generals  would  be  ot  any  ufe,  nor  magistrates,  nor  the 
hcaliii"-  art,  nor  even  wisdom  itself.  Quint.  2,  10,  5. 

Ons  5   RULKS  and  laws  laid  down  by  the  speaker  are  expressed  1)  by  the  second  form 
of  the  imperative.  :  2)  by  the  subjumtive  P»-^^'"t '  3)  by  genindial^^^^ 
oj)Ortet  (not  necesse  or  opu.^  est) ;  5)  by  the  future-present ;  0)  by  the  present  leu^e  it  ine 
existing  law  is  merely  repeated.  ,   ^  .,  ^  . 

A.  The  SECOND  FouM  OF  TiiK  IMPERATIVE  is  uscd  iu  ^bc  predicate  conaiu^^^^ 

hn^ction   if  the  law  itself  is  the  speaker  (corresponding  to  the  English    shall  ).    But 

i<  l^-m  is  i  ni^e^^^     ,  the  laws  in    he  strict  sense- of  the  word,  for  instance  to  the  laws  of 

1  e  XII  Tab  e"-^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^vhich  were  constitutionally  given  by  the  people  in  the 

fr«,zv/a  «A^/riafa     The  pretorian  law,  the  ordinances  of  the  emperors,  and    he  respon- 

criT,  nrtnm  ,mn  AaWtorTlIc  ,.r.«or  .ay«:  What  •  .Imll  be  •  .luuencted  u„ucrcompul«on, 
/.-A<i//iiiit  hold  valid.  Vlp.  Uig.  4, 2,  1.  ,    .  ,  .  ,      ,  j.  .. 

V.  R„lp.  and  la'v»  roferrin"  to  AOTS  and  k-iknce  in  the  brii-f  style  of  c/)mpendi.  are 
frc,\,enly.-r4n  in  the  second  fern  of  ihe  hnperativc  (3.  or  3.  pets.),  ml..rchan£..ng  wH 
IKrhTfo^s  mentioned  above  :  F«n„m  t.M  [t?'^'fra^<:'''o.car^%%r  ^St 


ces 


»ther  forms  mentionea  aoove  :  riKiiiuu  u-m  i^.... ,y. ..,-..;.  -"-^----_^-^ 
Cut  the  h-iy  as  soon  as  it  is  time,  and  do  not  cut  too  late,  Cato  R.  K.  53.    But  in 


FUTURE   TENSES. 


353 


352 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


classical  lan^ua^rc  the  mo.t  usual.form  of  rules  is  thc/^^^m  whel^^^^^  the  ru^e  5^  declara- 
tive or  i)rc5=crii)tive  (i.  ^.  contuiniuj,'  an  injimction  or  precept  that  or  ""W/*^|"^'"'  t 
XnilL,Jdoue)-  the  former  intm1m..Kii.-  frequently  with  8ubjui.ct.vi;  presents  ad 
?h"^liuer\?;;h  tile  forms  tueutioued  No?  2  3.  4..  Tlu-  ....ur..  o,  P;-cr.p..ve  rules  .^e^ 
ilert'd  bv  '  should '  or  'must' :  that  of  declarative  rules  by  ihe  prc^tIlt  or  iiic  poicm mi 
with  '  m-iv '  or  '  can  '    (Declauativk)  :  llujc  et  ad  imprubatiOuem,  ct  ad  umrro-utiu- 

nem  t  "tSm'  .^v"  6«.'  ;  This  is  Jo  true  of  u  ejers  to)  tje  r^bu^^^^^  ^^  S^'a^ 
and  i.f  the  exami.mtion  of  witnesses.  Ai.ct.  Her  2  <,  9.- Hv^^^^^^ 

qui  2>oterimus,  arte,  imitatiOne    exerci-atiuue  :  All   tins  ^^«  .f^'^^  ^,*^"  ^..J^?^,,/,^^ 
wavl   bv  art  bv  imitation,  and  by  practice,  lb.  1,  3,  3.—  ^Pul^cri  «tin  t) .  ^i»»"  ;'"'"' 
Sru-^re  a    i  voU   S  cmlidcran.las  reset  tempus  et  dili-ent.am  ;  \V  hocxer 

wt^il'ti^aloVd  thistult  (in  order  to  avoi<l  tins  fault  we)  ^-"^^;;;^,^,^^^^^ 
riili'cnce  to  the  treatment  of  h  s  subject.  Cic.  Otf.  1,  0,  18.—  1  iimum  cormutniou  a(.iu 


Tat\o  conferenda  est  or  enr ;  ratio  conjereiur     uxn^,  "^  -^        "  ,V„  imnor  .  rt  gubiuuctive 
that  the  En-dish  •  should'  in  this  sense  cannot  be  expressed  by  an  impcrlLCt  euDjuuciut, 

'^'^he  English  m;;;^•^S^w^''^^etUn^^^  an   otOectir.^  rule,  ie,  a  rule 

esSbHl\u-d  by"the  Z^n  sjn.ken  of,  for  instance  by  ha.,it  <-,-»--!f,ir 'j;;;; j^ ;f^;';|j:,^J 
do  as  thevDlease^    This  form  wh  ch  closely  c<.rrespou(is  to   the    ^V<>"'d  ,  "' /*^iy  ^  ,^'^ 
nast  act  on  (  K  54  Obs  3)  is  KcneniUy  expivssed  by  ,olhe  :  but  sometimes  by  the  future 
dncer  in  connections  Silv)^  quem(,ue  deceat.  ex  ^n;v^r^u^Jud^cah>mt, 

obLS em  p eisO^^^^^^^  ipsa  natflra  ;  The  (dramatic)  poets  iviU  judge    rom    he 

reo   irenM\^s()f  the  is  proper  f.n- the  person  ;,  but  to  us  (philoso- 

Ksuat   rriier"^^  that   part.  Cic.  Off.  1,  28,  1»7  -  Aln   rursum  eisdem  a 

Si  cip  s  onine^'ftlcium  ad  volupt^ltem  rejWent  ;  Others-au'ain  fm.n  the  -'^n;;' P"''^  P  «^ 
wiUiWer  everv  duty  to  pleasure,  lb.  Fin.  5,  7.  19.-  Ahquando  mains  h<  mo  ^^cet ^M.nl 
nihil  Bit  requirenduin  ;  Sometimes  a  bad  man  udl  male  so  that  uo  fault  can  be  louud. 
Ouint.  2,  20.  10.  See  Ex.  20.  21. 

Obs.O.  Assertions- advanced  by  the  speaker  as  hi<  own  «".^''"^f.  ""•  J/^f^r^fT^/,';^: 
ouenilv  Dlaced  in  the  future  to  distinguish  them  Irom  t,'eneral  truths  and  statements 
S  V er^ally  ack.  w  edg^^  which  are  placed  in  the  present.  Such  futines  are  either  re  - 
de  ek  by  a^?itnre  with"  wiir  or  by  thV  present  potential  :  ^^^'^^^^^^^ ^^}"]^^^^]^ 
necrflbit  se  fecisse  nuod  cogerCtur  (unil  le-e)  quuni  altera  lex  permitteret ;  A  defence  imust 
S«  coJiilfm;/  S  wJJu,  by  which  the  accused  acknowled-'cs  to  ''^^^e  d.sobeyed  a  cotnp.a- 
«orv  law  and  to  have  acted  upon  another  law  merely  permissory.  Au(  t.  Her  i,  10,  15. 
Fa(eb^I^iturVo\c\  ha^c  omnia  dicta  esse  pncclflre ;  The  Stoics  .re//  (unquestionably)  ac- 
kSedge  all  this  to  be  well  said.  Cic  Fin.  4,  8.19.- Sed  ccTtei.i  bonis  ..v///^^^^^^^^^^^ 
amicos  ;  But  you  ivill.  surely,  count  friends  amonj?  the  '  blessin-s.  lb.  o,  2.,  hi.  Ex.  2>.  ».J. 
Or^  7  Often  verbs  of  SAYING  by  which  the  speaker  introduces  a  statement,  advice, 
or  othJ  asse  .'n  o  his  own.  are  placed  in  the  V.iture  for  the  sake  of  P'>l'tene^  and  o 
avoid  the  harsher  and  more  direct  lorm  of  the  present  tense.  '^"•••\  ''/";••:■  :V.':T^i,r'" 
may  supply  a  clause  like  'If  von  permit',  correspond  to  our  potential  u.  h  ^;«>"1*  • 
Tamum  te  mfmo/?.-6o,  si  illi  ab^.enti'^salatom  dederis,  pnesent.bus  Ins  omnibus  te  datfl- 
mm-  I  would  only  icmind  you,  if  vou  are  goin-  to  pardon  him  in  hi-;  absence  to  do  it 
™  the  p  esence  "this  whole  aiidiJnce.  Cic.  Li.'.  12.  :W  -  Tamen  audm  \e  ab  hac  Aca- 
d"  mik  Eovrf  ad  illam  veterem  vocare  :  ll<»wever  /  icould  beg  to  recall  you  from  this  ^evv 
Academy  to  the  Old  one.  lb.  Fin.  5,  3,  7.  Ex.  24.  2;>. 

1  ^'m/V-s-,  et  quidem  confestim».  Cic.  Att.  13,  %\  1 .-  2.  Fane^^  ny  certir.rcm  de  Tdt- 
bu-  II)  13.  3;J,  4.-  3.  Mihi,  sieunde2  poles,  enus^  qui  decern  le-/lii  Mi"i'.''"'>  ^l'*T« '^* 
Tb  'l3  ?0  3  —  4  In  ceteris  mhrime>i^  si  me  hivreiilema  v„ici,is  lb.  Fin.  3,  4.1b.— 
6  P  incipio"  aniTco  miiim  rcslxtnnU.  Ter.  Andr.  3.  3.  38  -  «5,  Si  .uhUam^  et  fortuitam« 
oratiOnemo  commentatio  et  co-itatio'"  facile  vincit'S  banc  ipsam  profecto  a^sndua  et 
dniV-ens^ciMpJi-lra'^  ../^./v7/;i^"cic.  Or.  1.  33,  150.-  7.  Mim  v^^yv^iiegiilxtur  defonnem 
Pyrrhi  pacem'S  ciccus  ille  Appius  diccudi  viribus  dircmis^c»*  ?    Quint.  2,  lb,  t.— 


\ 


»  And  quickly,  too.— a  =  .si  cunde  (if  you  can  from  any  place,  i  e.  anywhere).  See 
217  o2"  3  and  R  5  Xo  4  a  -  '  di-  out.  make  out,  tind  out.-  "  come  to  my  aid.- 
stopi?n.V  ('l-tkSng).-- «  be?oie  all  other  thin.rs,  first  (.f  alK-  '  extempore  -  «  unpre- 
pared.- 9  mldress.-  i»  cominentaiio  et  cogilatio  a  prepared  and  ^'y'V''.'^  '  'ff^^^'l'^'vr- 
"  surpasses,  excels.—  i"  a  carefully  and  diligently  prepared  paper.-  i»  dejotmu^  pax,  tuc 
transactions  of  an  ignominious  peace.—  ^*  to  break  up. 


8  SeauHur  igitur  beJlta  vita  virtfltem  vel  ad  supphciumJ    ctimque  ea  descendet^^va. 
tauriMu',  nee  cam  minis  blandimentisve  corruota  deseret.    Cic.  Tusc.  5,  31.   8<.— 
q    Honc^tum*   ergo  si  solum    est^  bonuni,  quid  hahdju'^  prieterea    quod   sequSre'? 
Th   Fin   3  4  14  —  10.  Tertiuni"  nisi  tenebimus»,  nihil  oraiOri  in  quo magnus esse  possit 
relinOuhnus^K  lb.  Or.  1,  15,  6s.-  11.  Jain  aut  Callipho  aut  DiodOrus  i^xxomoCiopoterunt 
xmUmX  concedere?  lb.  4,  18,  50.-  12.  Si  virtus  puestat  ndiquis  rebus.  beSius  esse 
^^7^ virtflte  una  pneditus".  lb.  4,  18,  51.-  13.  Hoc  te  diligentissime  percij.ere  et 
Wmi nisse  ro/am.  lb.  Fam.  11,  7,  2.-  14.  Quarum  artium^^  snmmrei3  crescere  possunt, 
ear  metiam  contrariorumi*  .umma  potent  augeri :  ad  virtatis  aut^nn  summam  acce- 
dere'5  nihil  potest  :   ne  vitia  quidem  igitur  crescere  jwterunt,   lb.  Fin   4   24  (m.- 
1.5  Er>'o    histrio»»  hoc  vidlbit  in  scenS»'  :  non  tumit  sapiens  vir  iii  vita  ?  lb  Off.  1, 
31   114^-  IH  Ergo  in  bestiis  erunt  secrCta»«  a  voluptate  qujedam  Pi'^uiacra»»  virtQtum  : 
in   ip^is  hominibus  virtus  nisi"  voluptatis  causa  J'"'l'\/''»^-^,  ^^  k^"*  !;  S//  V 
17  omne  principium'i  rei  totlus  quje  agCtur"  gicrnificatiOnem^s  habere  demit.  lb. 
oV  2  7^    320  -  18.  Defensor  impulsiOnem"*  aut  nuUam  fmsse  dicet,  aut,  si  fuisse  con- 
cedit'  exfenudbit,  et  parvulam"  quamdam  fuisse  demonMrmt,  aut^  non  ex  ea  solSre 
huisiS^di  facta  nasci'^«  docebit.  lb.  Inv.  2,  8,  25.-  19.  SuspiciOnes"  _e    ex  test.rnon.o 
P   .'v  nin.nre  duci^»  oiwr'lbit    lb.  2,  14.  4«.-  20.  Vul-aris29  orator,  si  in  dicendo  cnt 
exercitatus'o,  hac  ipsa  exercitatiOne  istos  (oratOres)  r-./^ftemJt/^i,  neqtie  ge  abets  con- 
temi  i  ac  desnici  simt    lb.  Or.  3.  21,  79.  -  21.  Gravis  et  fortis  civis  et  in  republica  di-- 

m  %rin 'K  s'*<ii'iOnes  ac  bella  civilia /.^i.^3.  atque  ^eni  ^rff^^  totum 
leiiHiblicu'.totamqneeam  sic rw<=6J^»r33  ut  omnibus  onsulats*    lb.  Ofl.  1  2o,  8(^^.-22  Is 

le  nim  vii^mV  cu  us  animnm  neque  prospera  forttlnaas  efferets»,  nee  adversa-"'  infr  n- 
I'et»"  Liv  4.5  8  -  23.  Ac  mea  quidem  sententia  nemo;>o/m^  esse  omni  laude  cumu  a- 
tu-3»'orator  nisi  erit  omnium  rerum  magnarumatqiM-artium  scientiam^»  consecfltus^-. 
Cic  Or  1  B  20  -  24.  Piso.  Exspecto  quid  ad  id  quod  qua'rebam  respondeas.  Cicero. 
JieJmn'debo  me  non  quierere  hoc  tempore  quid  virtus  efficere  P«>ssit.  lb.  tin  5,  2.  ««. 
-  25  (Jiuu^e  banc  oratoriam  facultatem  in  eo  genere  iWig/ziM**'»  ut  eam  civlhs  scien- 
t'lsd*^  partem^*  esse  dicamus.  lb.  Inv.  1,  5,  6. 

Eejn  76  Iftlie  time  of  the  predicate  in  a  clause  is  determined  by  a 
future  time  given  in  the  principal  sentence,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is 
jrenerallv  placed  in  one  of  the  two  future  tenses.  Such  futures  are  called 
'DEPENDENT  FUTURES,'  and  ai'c  usually  rendered  by  English  presents 
(indicative  or  subjunctive), as: 

Profecto  nihil  accipiam  injun»  si  tn  aderv< ;  I,  surely,  shall  not  suffer  a"?' ;^;i^"?  »/ 

xoJare  fje^yre^'^enf.    Cic.  Att.  5.  18,  3.-Ex  isto  morbo  convalesces,  f^Axeadfiibvens  me- 

d?cuursi^e  m,n  adAJftw^m  ;  From  that  disease  you  will  recover,  whether  you  emp/oy 

a  nh  "ic  iaii  o " not      lb.  Div  2.  13.-Ob  banc  rem  tibi  reddam operam  uhi  roe^,  nbi  jus- 

%H<:  F.»r  this  lavor  I  will  retuni  you  my  services  wherever  you  choose,  wherever  you 

Tff/uire  [i\\eM\].     Plant.  Pu?n.  4,2,  31. 

Obs    1    As  to  the  question,  which  of  the  two  future  tenses  is  to  be  used  in  the  pnnci- 

naV^entenee  and  in  the  clause,  four  combinations  occur  :  (a)  Both  predicates  may  be 

n  Uie  flit  re-pi-esent  ;  (fA  both  predicates  may  be  in  the  future-perfect  ;  (c)  the  principal 

pre  icate  may  he  a  fu  ure-present.  and  the  dependent  predicate  a  future-perfect ;  (d)  tiie 

pSp  d     redicate  may  be  a  future-perfect,  and  the  depende.it  predicate  a  luture-present. 

The  1^^.  St  and  second  combinations  are  used  if  the  two  actions  are  represented  &^  co- 


1  Scaffold  -  2  enter.-  » the  brass  steer  of  Phalaris  (in  which,  after  it  was  heated  the  con- 

(ol  t^  Sin  d  in  committing  the  c.ime).-  '^'^ panulam  gvamdajn  a  very  weak  one 
-^26t\,at"S  a"ti<'nsare  n..t  usu.llv  beirotfen  from  it  (the  motive).- ^-  grounds  for 
«nunie  m.  -2»  be  taken  be  derived.-  "  commonplace.-  ^«  if  he  has  practice  in  speak- 
r"^'l^" Uvhip  to  punish.--  3.  detest.-  «3  admiiiister,  govern.  -  ^*  so  as  to  consult  the 
i  UMest^  to  1  o^ide  for  the  interests.- s»  prospera  fot tuna,  prosperity.-  ",;o  ehite 
-"  adv^.r-.ity-3«  crush.- 3Miterally  :  heaped  widi  all  praise,  t.  e  accomplished  in 
everv  re' pect  an  orator  of  the  hi.'hest  order.-  "«  omnium  rerum  magn&rum  atque  artium 
#Sia  a  knowled-e  of  all  great  things  and  arts,  i.  e.  every  important  fadd  of  knoxU- 
ed-e  -'<>  to  acqiriie.-  ^-^faadtatemin  eo  genere  ponemus  ut  dicamus,  I  would  class 
the  oratorial  art  as,  etc.—  «^  social  science.—  **  a  branch. 


354 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


Incident,  or  parallel  in  their  temporal  relation;»  (Obs.  2).  The  third  form  is  upccI  if  tho 
dependent  J'utiirc  i>^  rt'pre.xenrcd  as  precedinij  tlie  aclion  of  the  principal  predicate  (Obs. 
3).  Thef«)urili  lorm  is  rare,  beini^iised  if  the  aclion  of  the  principal  predicate  precedes 
that  of  tlic  clause  (see  Rem.  74,  Obs.  ]),  Dependent  futures  are  used  both  as  ordinary 
and  as  potential  futures. 

Obs.  2.  In  the  first  two  comhinafions  (cqnalit}'  of  both  tenses  in  the  case  of  coincident 
action),  l)()th  predicates  may  be  placed  in  tlie  fiitin-e-perl'ict,  if  this  tens»^  niav  be  used 
aeeordin;,' to  K.  71,  Ons.  2,  as:  Satis  te  niaifire  iidtto  si  plane  conlirmatunt  rhteio  ;  I 
vhall  see  yin\  early  enough,  \i  I  see  you  fully  recovered.  Cic.  Fam.  10,  4.  h  (E.k.  1.)  Iloth 
tenses  generaHij  are  future-perfects,  if  both  jjredicates  refer  only  to  one  acti«)n.  wlucii,  in 
the  clause,  is  desii^nated  as  such,  while  the  principal  predicate  expresses  the  import  and 
inner  force  of  the  action  (see  R.  (JO),  as  :  Per  niihi  {^ratmn  feceris  si  in  hoc  tain  diliirens 
fueris  cjuam  soles;  You  wil!  oblii,'e  me  very  much  if,  in  this  niatt«r,  von  are  as  careful  as 
you  are  wont  (by  be  in  tr  as  careful,  etc.).  Cic.  Att.  1,  2(),  7.  Hut:  Itaque  sapienter 
fades  si  te  in  istam  pacificatiOnein  non  interpOves  :  Hence  you  will  act  prudently  if  you 
do  not  mix  with  this  peacemakinj»  business.  lb.  Faui.  10,  27,  2.  See  Ex.  2-<J.— In' all 
other  instances  both  predicates  are  future-presents,  which,  in  the  case  of  potential  fu 
tures,  is  almost  always  the  case  :  (^nod  ri(/(!/yi^ wr  rectum  esse,  cmabo ;  I  shall  do  whai 
is  ri.L,djt  in  my  view.  Cic.  (^u.  Fr.  3,  4,  5.— Tu  quod  voles  fades  ;  Do  what  you  like.  lb.— 
Minus  id  prodei'it  in  ediscendis  quie  oratiOnis  perpetuaj  ernvt  ;  This  witl  less  avail 
in  memorizini?  passages  belonging  to  connected  discourse,  (^uint.  11,  2,  24.— Si  genus 
cansie  dubium  habebimns^  a  benevolenlijl  principluni  constitiitinus ;  If  we  have  a  case  be- 
lont^ing  to  the  dubious  kinds,  «.'g  ^Aow/(/ 6rt<e  our  introduction  on  the  good  will  (nf  the 
judges).  Auct.  Her.  1,  4.  6.— lu  clauses  with  dum  —  asloitfj  as.  both  predicates  are  al- 
ways future-presents:  Dabllur  a.  me  argentum  dum  erit  commodum  ;  Money  will  be 
given  by  me  as  long  as  it  is  convenient.    Ter.  Ad.  1,  2,  38.    See  Ex.  7-12. 

Obs.  3.  The  third  combination  (Obs.  1),  when  the  action  of  the  clause  is  represented 
n»  inrcedinff  that  of  the  principal  sentence,  is  analogous  to  the  two  instances  when  per- 
fects are  dependenton  presents(K.  43),  and  when  pluperfects  are  dependent  on  imperfects 
(see  Hem,.  (>»»,  Obs.  4.  5).  Future-perfects  thus  dependent  on  future-presents  are  either  ren- 
dered by  En\i\\^\\  jyresenls.  ov  by  English /«^//■f-/>/e,sw//,N',  or  by  English  ;><^/;/k'^*-  (rarely 
by  future-perfects).    The  most  usual  forms  of  such  clauses  are  the  following  : 

(a)  Conditional  clauses  with  si  :  lloe  astfttijuar  prolecto  si  instittlta  iierfrcero  ;  I  shall 
certainly  gain  this  point  if  I  accomplish  my  work.  Cic.  Div.  2,  2.  ♦>.—  Xec  omnis  avari- 
tias.  si  a^que  avantias  esse  dixenmus,  seqiittur  ut  etiam  HMjuas  esse  dicjlmtis  ;  Nor  does 
i^  /b//o?<' that  we  should  call  all  kinds  of  avarice  equal  (to  each  oxXwx)  \f  we  equally 
call  them  'avarice.'  lb.  Fin.  4,  27,  7.'). 

(b)  Temporal  clauses  with  quum,  ubi.  simular,  etc. :  E-ro  in  H])! vnm  pvqfidscar  qnum 
primorum  dierum  nnwiut^  ej'cei)e to ;  1  will  depart  for  Epirus.  ^///e/-  rectivinq  {\\\\r\\  I 
have  received,  when  I  shall  have  received)  the  tidiuLrs  of  the  lirst  davs  (intelligence  of 
what  has  been  transacted  in  the  tirsl  days).  Cic.  Att.  3,  23,  5.—  /y^/f/i^/ex  urbe  ubi  >  rmd 

facfy.  nnptiie ;  He  will  Uee  from  the  city  as  soon  as  the  marriage  is  accomplished.  Plaut. 
Trin.  2,  4,  I'Jti. 

(c)  Temporal  clauses  with  anfeqitam  and  pHusqnam  :  Nequc  priits  qt/am  debeJlarero 
absislam;  Nor  will  1  desist  before  I  have  (shall  have)  finished  the  war.  Liv.  41.  31>.— 
iScvibam  ad  Antonium,  sed  non  aiiteqiKim  te  videio  ;  I  will  write  to  Antonius,  but  not 
before  I  have  seen  you.  Cic.  Fam.  IH,  2.3,  2. 

id)  Comparative  clatises  with  ut :  Ut  semcntem /<5<Tm«  ita  metes;  As  you  sow,  so 
will  Im'  your  harvest.  Cic.  Or.  2,  Cuy,  2<»1. —  Generally.  howev<-r,  comparative  clauses  re- 
quire both  i)redicates  to  l)e  in  the  same  tense  :  Animam  relitiqnam  potius  quam  illas 
deseram  ;  Rather  than  desert  these,  /  will  lose  my  life.  Ter,  Ad.  3,  4,  .52.  (See  Ex.  5. 
18.  20). 

((?)  Relative  clauses  with  qui,  quicungue.  quidquid,  etc.  :  Utar  co  portu  qnam  pri- 
mum  videro  ;  I  will  ni'ike  the  first  pt^-t  that  oftrs  (wliich  I  shall  see).  Cic.  Att.  7,  7,  4. 
—  Qiioquo  modo  nos  (jesserimus.Jiet  tamen  illiid  ouod  futurum  est ;  In  whatever  way 
we  may  act,  that  which  is  to  be,  will  happen.  lb.  Div.  2,  8,  21.     See  Ex.  13-24. 

Obs.  4.  En^rlish  clauses  with  'before  '  referring  to  the  future,  take  th<;  followlmr  gram- 
matical f(»rms  in  LatiiMthe  action  which  shall  be  done  first  6^/oref  the  otlier  action  is 
performed,  Iteing  designated  by  '  Action  A  \  and  the  aclion  which  is  to  be  done  alter  tho 
first,  by  '  Action  B  ')  ,• 

(a)  '  Action  A '  may  be  made  the  principal  predicate,  and  '  Action  B  '  the  predicate  of 
the  clause.  If.  in  this  instance,  both  predicates  have  the  same  subject,  '  action  A '  is 
placed  in  the  future-present,  the  clause  being  introduced  by  antequnm  or  priusquam 
with  its  predicate  in  the  present  indirafire,  or  subjunctive  (p.  6r»8) :  Antequam  do 
accusatioue  ipsa  dico  (B),  de  accusatOrum  spe  pauca  dicam  (A) ;  Before  s^peaking  of  tho 


FUTURE  TENSES. 


355 


charges.  Inill  mnU  some  few  ^^^^^^ ^^^^,;:^^  ; 

Jnt^quam  de  repuhlica  ^^^"''^  ^» 'f.^Sv  Sah.  ^       motive  of  my  departure.  Cic. 

i.  us  are  generally  phice.l  in  tl'/'fii"'!;^;!'^  f/; //:.\^^^^^  corfecero;lU 

cate  bem-  a  future-present.  ,  In.the  1^*'^;  "f^^Jf 'i'., '^i^^     propiOres  sunt,  dixenmm: 

barn  ImaMie.  .,c  .Uruile  ...nnm  fcrro  •,^J./,",'^'^.S/„«"w"rd,  Civ.  -U,  38. 

from  »11  iliroclions  on  the  cr"wd,  and  «("*«»  I  »""'.'  „        ^j  i„„i,i„,-/„««  oratio  cum 

ina.'Uituaim,  utiUt Jtis  i-omimnlnrjV  ""''  o^"i'-,^ |o  _  Uanc  siraililailincni  qui  a,<fc- 
aml  «ith  Iho  ransrc  of  Us  ''*f''^Z^;r,,^-\noi\d:eTio  altaiu  to  thi»  likened,  <•"<»'<' 

rii-que  vchu^  satis>ftcerimus   lb.  OA- l.  -<i  ^"^-  .        .    ,  ^^q„od  placeat,  (lecrevihHh\- 

(T)  I>EUFECTS  implying  a  luture     ^"VX^/'i'J  J  1  like,  I  have  n.ade  up  my 

f.T-,.  Mind  te  •  But  if  (in  the  case  that)  I  sfmtid  "^^  s ''"  <.   15  5  _  Si  Brutus  corner- 

;;l'„';<i"lo''iiv.'>" '1.  yo"  ;;■>■■  '"f  'V^^;^6^o.^.  -i, »«" c«i„pir°e  «.ub  ac  Att.  T,  .5, 

vCtfut  erit  vicinius.  it).  i<am.  !■«,  «.    y^'^^  »         ' 

''oB.  n.  in  place  of  a  '^'■^^f^^^i^  ^XZ^'AS^^l^i^^^ 
force  .f  a  f„l ure-present  and  '-t "'''";,  rfS  a  mSi  iUmmmm.  Cic.  «...  Fr.  I,  1,  11.- 
mnur),  «rdi.,c.n  l'». "'''" V',^   l™, "'",    'tm.' c"  t     Ib.-'vci'r.  4,  39. 

^ OB-: '  'u  .be  ,i„,e  of  predicate.  ^^^'^^ ^:^;;i:^;^!;:^i^^^^'^ 

^'o„''  '■  Sontetimes  f.,t„re  actio,,,  arc  ^'>n^l:t^':^^:^:^^^X^!^ 


356 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


EPISTOLARY  TENSES. 


357 


1.  TTnpccomitiasi  £rratnitn/wf7in/i.  plnsnnns  Cato/w/f/^/t/^qnam  omneplecrpsomnopqne 
judicen.  Cic.  Qii.Fr.-2,  lo,  4. — 2.  (|uo(l  vali'tiulini  tu:e  nmxiinecoiidflcct  f'iyVc<i'i.v3,  iiDixiino 
obfemj)erun>i  voluntSii  iiu-ie.  H).  Farn.  UJ,  1,  2.—  ',i.  Noii  laninm  ad  id  qimd  jam  habere 
poles',  f?i  pnt'lio  ricenfi*.  irloria»^  (ui/'Ctrift.  quantum  wlemeris  gi  quid  advcrsi  evcniat. 
Liv.  30,  30.—  4.  Si  jiidicareHtii<  fine  doit)  malo*  pos^e  lioniineni  occldi^,  omnibus 
facinorosis'*  eandoni  liceiitiain  pirmi'/erifis*.  Cic.  Fiau'm.  Tull.  3. —  5.  Uptime  autem 
pocietas  hominutn  conjunctiOciue"'  strva^itur'^^  ai.  in  quisque  e7it  conjunctis»8imus.  ita 
in  cum  benii^'nitatis  pluriinuin  confe/rf//?'^-.  lb.  OlT.  1.  l»»,  .50.—  <>.  Id  racillimc /rtcvV.f  t^L 
me  omuilms  rebus  quas  dicfs  e*t  fanes  interesse>3  putCihl'i.  li».  (^u.  Fr.  \.  1.  Irt  — 
7.  E/it  eiiim  mecuu)  xi  lecum  erit.  lb.  Fin.  '>.  28.  Sti. —  8.  Cetera,  (iuotiescuiu]ue  roitlia, 
vobis  \).x\Mvkerunt.  lb.  Tusc.  3,  31,  Si.—  9.  Ihoc  si et  arjes^^vi  senfiett,  turn m^ non  modo 
consul,  sed  matjnus  etiam  consul.  lb.  Fam.  10.  (».  3. —  10.  Prol)abiIi.s>6  erif  narratio'*  si 
])ersnnis,  si  temporibus,  si  loeis  ea  qiue  varrahiintur.  consentient»'.  H).  Part.  Or.  9, 
32.—  11.  Hoc.  (turn  eri/nir^  in  ttrnl,  ftif  C(elesti  vit:e  simile.  11).  Tusc.  1,  31.—  12.  Num- 
quam.  dnf/i  ego  adin».  hie  te  tdnrjet.  Ter.  Ad.  2.  1,  3.—  13.  Plura  scrihain  si  plus  otii 
habuero.  Cic.  Fam.  10,  28,  3. —  14.  l)e  eo  dicerc  ]X)t>-iinnts  si  ex  quil)us  partibus  jus'» 
coustet»»  cor/norerimus-o,  Auct.  Her.  2.  13,  10  —  15.  Nemo  me  vestrum.  guum  hinc 
excesiiero'^,  g^quPfur.  Cic.  Tus<c.  1.4.3,103.-10.  Me  ista  sapientia,  ftimv'afgue  ad  earn 
con/ugef •(/•',  in  libertiltem  rindiciVnt-^.  lb.  Or.  2.  33.  14.').-  17.  Vhiowm  locum^*  omnem 
co<;itatione  sepseris-^,  nihil  le  tfuf/ief.  lb.  Or.  2,  34,  147.—  18.  Hoc  si  rarius,/?/^^  quam 
tu  exspect'ibl<,  iden/causiequodnon  temerc  committere  audeo  litieras  meas.'ib.  Fam. 
1,  7,  1.—  19.  Te  in  eis  ipsis  rebus  quas  a  te  d'ulict rit .  sniH-nVnt.  lb.  1,  \h.  (iO.—  20.  Hie, 
qiHeciinqnt  res  inciderit.  prudtntcr,  onijltL"",  et  meniorilcr'-''  dicef.  lb.  1,  1.5.  (>4. — 
21.  (^iddqiiid  liorum  (malOnim)  di>cu.<strifnu.s'^o,  quo  inajttM  ac  tcrribiiius  trit,  hoc  ma- 
jdrem  i/uOh/i>/.-<-^  trratiani.  Sen.  Ittn.  1,  11. —  22.  Old  j)rior  s/rinxerU'-'^  fernun,  ejus 
victoria  er//'.  Liv.  21,  ;38.— 2;i  Non  erifui/,^  libetdfp^  /ini/sq nam  \ia  esse  tu  nos/t-rfm 
certiOres.  Cic.  Faui.  10, 20,  2.— 24.  Ue  Carlha;^'ine  v«'rGri  non  (ode  dednam  quam  illam 
excl«am32  esse  coqnovero.  II).  Sen.  6,  18. —  2.5.  l)e  hac  querela  prlu-quam  rfSftondeo, 
pauca  p?opn>ia>/t.  lb.  Fam.  11.  27,  1.-20.  Antequani  pro  Murena  dicere  t/fc.7i/!wt»53,  pro 
me  ipso  pauca  dieain.  lb.  Mur.  1. 

YI.  THE    USE    OF   TENSES    IN    EPISTOLARY    STYLE. 

§  5H9.  In  epistolary  style,  the  writer  of  the  letter  often  uses  tenses  whicli 

lie  would  use  if  narrafinr/  the  eeenta  V)  the  recHcer  of  the  letter  at  the  time  of 

readlncj  it.   Such  tenses,  whieii  are  called  '  EPr8TOL.\iiY  tenses,'  are  alwaj's 

rendered  by  the  corresponding  tenses,  ordinarily  used  in  «rriV//?// the  letter  : 

Hem  te  valde  bene  ^essis.-se  rumor  frat.  Fx^pectahantur  littenr  tu;e  de  quibuei  trdmua 
jam  cum  Pouii)ejo /oc/7/i,*  Tliere  U  a  rumor  that  you  met  with  <:reat  success.  We  are 
exi>ectiiig  your  letters,  concerniuLj  which  J  hare  alreuly  ^7>oA.v7i  witli  Pumpry.  Cic. 
Fan).  1,  8.  7.  It  the  writer  would  state  these  facts  orally  at  the  time  of  reading  the 
letter,  he  would,  even  in  English,  use  the  same  leases  a.s  in  the  above  Latin  tenience. 

Hem.  77.  Epistolary  tenses  are  used  only  to  designate  actions  which  (</) 
either  transpire  in  the  moment  of  writing,  the  letter  being  incomplete  at 
that  moment ;  or  {b)  which  refer  to  the  irJcdc  letter,  the  time  of  its  writing 
being  considered  a  moment,  or  a  unit  of  time. 

In  regard  to  actions  of  the  former  kind,  epistolary  tenses  can  onl}^  be 

>  Come  off  wiihout  bribery.  —  '  poii'<e  =■  to  h:fve  power  (it  will  be  clear  that  Cato  has 
greater  power).—  ^  if  you  do  (by  doini:)  what  will  be  most  conducive.—  *  i.e.  by  beini,'  vic- 
torious.— »  belouiTs  to  tantum.—  *  nuilice.— '  to  assassinate,—  »  all  inclined  to  doinis- 
chief. —  "  give  permis8it)n. —  >'  connection.—  "  to  preserve. —  i"^  if  on  every  person  a 
;ri>ater  liberality  is  bestowed  according  to  the  closer  nature  of  his  connections.—  la  to 
)(>  present.— "  to  do.— '*  plausible  —  1«  narr.itive. —  i'  correspond  to.— »»  the  law. — 
J"  to  consist. —  ""  co(iPO^cere.  to  learn-,  coqhotUse.  to  know.  The  panic  difference  in 
meaning  is  between  the  future-present  and  future  i)errect. —  -'  excedereex  loro,  toleavea 
place.—  23  confiKjcre  ad  aliquein,  to  take  one's  refuge  with  somebody.—  '^^  aliqu&jji  in 
lifjertdtem  rindicdre,  to  restore  one's  Ireedom. —  24  subject. —  25  to  embrace. —  26,.it.j,,j„tiy^ 
—  27  ntemoHterdicere.  to  speak  without  notes. —  '"*  (^i.<C'/^*'?v,  to  abate.—  '^^  grafiam  inli'}^ 
to  be  popular  (the  more  popular  it  will  be).—  so  ftrruj/i  stringere,  to  draw' the  sword. — 
3»  perijjhrasiic  conjugation.-  3-  excidere.  todesiroy.—  3'  to  begin. 


g 


nscd  if  the  clause  'o^/wm  7we/t  «m7>c^^?7iMwhilc  I  was  writing  this)  is  ei- 
er  expressly  added,'or  may  be  understood  (Obs^I).  Henc^e  «^^ch  tense^ 
must  be  either  imperfects  or  pluperfects  (R.  GO,  6o  ;  ^  586,  Obs.O). 
k'c  Ons  1  4.  5.— Acti(ms  referring  to  the  letter  as  such  must  be  always 
nhiced  in 'the  perfect,  since,  when  the  contents  of  the  letter  are  nar- 
rated at  the  time  of  reading,  the  7critinp  of  the  letter  must  be  consid- 
ered a  momentary,  accomplished  fact.  See  Obs.  2. 
nn^  1    The  eni«tolarv  tense  of  action»  prkpent  to  the  writer,  is  the  imperfect  if 

*"'  "  !V''4';?:'-'\r'ftrun;I'°nar"i'ryam'"lpnfoi;;idebatur.  qnnd  rnasmo  prrrMdip  Bono- 
„;:;,',  ^"j;;(-Am.m",  "■  l>.  &■„„  ,  l.  .-.lUdy  ^.-tag  ii-'ge*  .,y  .mall  ■o.ces,  because 

which  vou  are  pressed  (lit<'iail}  .  .L>or  \\as  i,  \mhi^  vuiuno  k^  ^,   ^  ..  ^ 

^''!;^t^\^'vYl!!^^-^nuc  publice  littera.  Romam  mittero^  pardbam ;  I  am 
no^;l  pri;a;i«^aToffieial  letter  tc?  be  sent   to  Rome  (literally  :  I  wa.  prepanng  to 

''';;/nU;KrTJ"'l™N^'ch;d!us'^^^^^^  habebat.Sn  quibus  Lucnllum  et 

llc^^  e   <iuut  cont^ un^  Clodius  is  holding  SKvex^hed  mass-mee  .ngs  m 

Pibulul  Soes  not  trouble  me  pers.)nally  ;  he  "  will  rather  write'  to  me  on  every  sub- 
^'r/S'lMrKurS-T  ACCOUTRING  TOR.  59.  Ob..  5  :  Septimtim  jarndiemCorcynE«.n.&a»mr; 

clZ^   2    Foi.fol.rv  PKKFECTP  with  PRESENT  force  canuot.  generally,  occur  since  what 

'Vuis  is  the  third  letter  I  write  yon    o-c^^X  ^'^^^jVrG  f-  H^c  3  cA?ri  anibulans  ;  I  am 
two  letters  to-day:  this  «s-  ih"  th>,dK  Cic    Att  ih  b   i       ii  ,^  ^^^  habSbam, 

dictating'  this  letter  while  walking.  lb.  2,  -«.;  l;"/^-/;  FJl^'J!'.   Ajthou-h  I  have  nothing 
brevitatem  secHfus  fnim  te  masristro  (bcmuning  of  the  lettei)  '  Aixmm^u  x  Prope- 

To  whVc,  T  isludh  tryxo  be  brief  «^.^-^^  "f  j^i^^V-^^iJ^liTieiiJer  K^^ 

rantibus  tabellariis  aliCnis  banc  epistolam  ^f/*  •  /  J^^'f  ^*  ^^^^^^*^  '■'"^  J 

carriers  of  others,  who  are  in  a  harry.  lb.  ftt.  n,  H.  J-  .        .    pj.RFKCT3 


358 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


EPISTOLAKY  TENSES. 


359 


ScriAcnd'nn  ad  tc  ex'isfimilvi  (nne  of  Ctesar's  favorite  ciirunilocution?) ;  I  write  to  you. 
I'ies.  in  Cic.  Att.  1(»,  8  B,  1. — FacMTc  non  jMjtui  qiiiii  tihi  se*ntentiam  declariliein  nieam  ;  I 
Tnu,'if.  tfll  yoii  my  opinion.  Cic.  Fam.  G.  18.  1.-  llivc  til)i  etni  audita  esse  arhitrtlbar,  volui 
tuini.:n  notiOracsse  ;  Aliiiou^h  I  think  that  you  have  heard  tliis,  /  wi^h  it  to  bri^till  Ix'tter 
known  to  you.  lb.  10,  '28,  'i.—  Qtiiiin  inihi  lonsciu?  essi-iu  quanti  le  facerein,  non  dubi- 
tdri  jyefetr  quod  prtendiiin  esset ;  /  iinkeAfatinrjhj  a-^k  for  what  I  mu-t  ask  you.  lb.  13, 8,1. 

{€)  Sotnciiines  (rarely)  jurfecls  are  used  instead  of  iuipertects,  for  instance  0)  i"  predi- 
cates denotin<;  inner  actions  (according.'  to  rule  |§  582.  Obs.  1,  i) :  l)e  Dionysio  f^tim  udmi- 
rCUug  •  ltej,'urdinjj  Dionysius  I  am  astounded.  Cir.  Att.  9,  la,  i.  (2)  Actions  wiiich  siiould 
be  in  the  present  accordini,'  to  R.  42,  and  hence  in  the  epistolary  imperfect  according»  to 
Obs,  1,  No./,  are  placed  in  the  perfect  if  quaiifii-d  by  adhiic  (\\\c  action  beinj»  thereby 
desiLToated  as  complete*  at  the  time  beinj?) :  ISo^udhuc  in  ejl  orjl  iliifi/imu,'^  ut.  etc.  ;  la/n 
still  on  that  coast  so  aa  to.  etc.  Cic.  Alt.  8,  11  B,  1. —  (:i)  Instead  ol  an  imperfect  with 
future  loictr,  accordiiii;  to  Ous.  1,  No.  r/,  souVetimes  a  perfect  i.s  used  :  Ei;<>  ftu-itinui  me 
in  Arcino  fratris,  ut  duin  aliquid  certius  atlerrGUir,  occultiOre  in  loco  essCmus  ;  I  am  in 
the  Arcan  villa  of  my  i)rotlu'r,  and  tihall  .stay  there  to  be  concealed  till  something  more 
detinite  will  l)e  reported.  Cic.  At'..  10.  2,  1. 

Tlu'  imairinary  narrator  at  the  tinu;  of  tiie  readini;:  of  the  letter  would  deliver  all  these 
facts  in  pkkfects,  viewini;  them  as  complete  facts  at  the  time  of  writing  the  letter, 
which  is  here  considered  as  a  moment  ot  time,  whereas  in  the  tisc  of  the  imperfect 
(Obs.  1),  when  '■qnum  h(ec  scribUbain''  is  supplieil,  it  is  considered  as  a  pi-riod  of  time 
duriniif  which  the  action  was  incomplete  (§  5Ts,  K.  57,  58  ;  K.  GO)— Momentary  acts  traus- 
})iriii;X  duniii^  the  writini;  of  the*  letter,  are  i]^eiier;illy  expressed  hy  ordhuiri/  /xrfcrfs,  so 
that  the  fact  is  stated  with  the  addition  of  *  (^uum  /urc  ficriptUsem.''  In  Enirlish  we 
would  use  h(!re  a  mere  present  without  such  addition  :  Qin/m  luvc  .scripnastiyi  a  CuriOne 
mihi  ainttidtume.sf  eiim  ad  me  venire  ;  At  this  moment  (while  I  am  wriiini,')  Curio  sends 
me  word  that  he  will  come  to  me.  Cic.  Att.  10,  4,  3.  See  Ex.  8-13, 

Obs.  3.  Present  actions  which  do  not  refer  to  the  moment  of  writing  or  to  the  time  of 
the  writiiii^  of  the  whole  letter,  but  which  refer,  in  general,  to  the  speaker's  time, 
and  which  would  be  expressed  by  presents  even  by  the  imau'inary  narrator  of  the  letter 
at  the  future  readiii",',  can  neither  be  i^xpressed  by  epistolary  perfects,  nor  by  epistolary 
imperfects,  l)ut  always  remain  in  the  j)resent  tense  :  l)e  linito  valde  tihi  a.<s'e/i/}or  (not 
o.ssen/itbar).  Cic.  Fam.  11,  14,  2.—  Itaque  te  non  hortor  solum  sed  etiam  om  ut  totil  mente 
in  rempublicam  incuinl>,is.  lb.  10,  5.  2.  (Itmi<:ht  be  hortandum  e.rh-fimari.hut  lun /torfa- 
tus  sum.oT  hortdbar).  — Pompejinn  sets  (not  scitboti)  temporibus  illis  non  muitum  in  seniltu 
fuisse.  lb.  1,  7,  3,—  Even  actions  which  are  transpirini,'  at  the  moment  of  writiiii.'  cannot 
be  placed  in  an  epistolary  tense  if  at  the  future  rt;adin^  of  the  letter  they  will,  probal)lv, 
still  continue  :  Ma^^'iia  e^t  ho;ninum  exspectatio  de  te  (where  erat  would  Involve  a  «jreat 
impoliteness  to  the  person  addressed).  Cic.  Fam.  1,  7,  9. 

Obs.  4.  Ordinary  imperfects  (rarely  perfects)  are  chanired  into  epistolary  ri.rPERFECTS 
if  the  action  may  be  conceived  as  complete  at  or  6^/o/v  the  moment  of  writing,  .<o  that 
either  '  7MM/n  hcEC  ticnbtbam'  (or  rarely  '  antequam  /uvc  scnberem'' )  maybe  supplied. 
Such  pluperfects  are  rendered  l)y  Eniclish  present-perfects  (rarely  by  preterits)  :  He», 
quiim  hiec  scnbebam,  erat  in  extremum  add'ida  di-crTnieii  ;  Thinirs  have  b^en  bn»iqht  to 
extremities,  (literally  :  Thin>:s,  when  Iwi-ote  thi-.  had  been  brought,  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  12, 
fi,  2.  See  Ex.  14-17.  Epistolary  i)Iupcrfects  corresponding  to  English  i)reterit8  an;  use(l 
in  the  same  instances  where,  with  reference  to  the  present  time,  j>erfects  arc  employed  : 
Ad  tuas  omnl* re scnpst^ ram  pridic; ;  I  yesterday  answered i\.\\  your  letters.  Cic.  Att. !».  10. 1. 
--  VT\d\c  dederam  meft  manu  Iongi0rem(epist6lam);  I,  yc^m'vdny.,  delivered  A  longer  letter 
by  myself,  lb.  10,  3rt,  1. 

Obs.  5.  The  two  future  ten?es  generally  n^main  unchanged.  But  sometiines  the  fut;ire- 
present  is  changed  into  an  epistolary  iMPKurecT,  .and  the  future-perfect  into  a  pkufkct. 

A.  The  ruTUUE-PUESENT  is  changed  into  the  impkufkct  of  the  verb,  if  the  writer  is 
on  the  poitit  of  doing  th<;  act  [Ons.  1,  No  (/<)1.  Thus  the  imperfect  prnfici>iCtfr(T  is  fre- 
quently used  if  the  writer  is  on  the  point  of  departing;  but  also  the  imperfects  of  other 
verbs,  if  the  connection  distinctly  shows  that  the  action  did  not  yet  happen  at  tlie  time 
of  the  writing  :  Ilinc  exercitum  in  hiberna  dedMcendum  (^uintofratri  dafjam  ;  Syt-^o.  me 
LaodicCam  redpir/)am ;  Hence  /  icill  qire  to  my  brother  t^nintus  tlie  army  to  take  it  to 
winter-quarters;  I  myself  ?ri// f7<?  6rtc^  to  Laodicea.  Att.  5,  20,  5.  V.k.  18.  ly. 

B.  Wherever  the  epistolary  pekfkct  is  used  in  r.  future  sense  it  takes  the  place  of  a 
ptiTUKE  PEKPECT  (wliich.  liowcver,  according  to  R.  74,  Obs.  2,  frequently  has  x\\v  force 
of  an  English  future-present)  :  Si  recte  ambulaverit  is  qui  banc  epistolam  tulif.  in  ipsnm 
tuum  diem  incidit  ;  If  he  who  ra/vi.^*' (shall  have  carried»  this  letter,  walks  as  he  should,  lie 
will  just  arnvt  (will  have  arrived)  at  your  birth-day.  Cic.  Att.  9,  4,  3.  The  imairinary 
narrator  would  use  here  perfects,  the  same  as  are  used  in  the  letter.—  Ipst;  Capnam  III. 
"Son.  2i/vfeclus  sum,  (iinim  has  litleras  dedi  (i.  g.  pro/eclus  ero -^  projlciscar,  iuiim&i'mg 


by  tlie  perfect 


future-perfect,  that  he  will  arrive  at  the  eame  day).  lb.  Att.  7,  18,  1.-- 


Such  perfects  (an<l    imi)erfects)  sometimes   give  rise  to    peculiar   expressions    w 

"ntiot  be  imitated  in  English,  as  :  Paucis  diC4)Us_//,a^^6am  (  ==  Imhitflrus  eram)  cer.os 
homines  quibus  darem  litteras.  Jfaque  eo  me  sei-vavi  ;  i  shall  have  i"  a  few  days  reha ble 
'•aniers  to  forward  this  letter.  Henc^  if  you  receive  this  letter,  it  will  be  an  evidence  that 
/  .shall  havfi  lived  a  few  days  lonqer.  Cic.  Att.  5,  17,  1.  Ex.  20.  21.  .  .       .,         !.•     « 

C  If  Vuch  eui»*t<;iarv  perfects  or  imperfects  are  used  in  clauses  requiring  the  subjunc- 
tive thev  are  either  "in  the  in^ierfect,  p.-rfecl.  or  pluperfect,  according  to  the  rules 
of  consecution  :   Etsi  qnum  tti  has  litteras  leqere^^  putabam  fore  ntscirem  jam  quid 

r.uXii  ar/'/m  emt  ;  Alihouirh  I  think  that  I  shall  know  what  i8  (wmU  have  been)  done 
at  un  lusiiun  when'  ^oxxvMl  read  this  letter.  Cic.  Att.  9,  1,1.  (For  a  Pim'l-;r  sen- 
tence expressed  bv  ordinary  tenses  see  R.  74,  Obs.  1.  Cic.  Att  9,  5.)-  Pfi-"|«^"  .^"^/rest 
quo  tibi  iwc  tempore  epistola  reddita  sit :  It  makes  a  great  difference  at  what  time  tli  > 
eicr  will  be  (will  have  been)  handed  to  you.  Cic.  Fam.  11  IG.  1.- Quod  "^^  «^'f/^^f^ 
eiro  Ari)Tnum  co-it5bam  :  I  intend   to  start  for  my  villa  at  Arpi  as  soon  as  /  shail  haie 

^"iTlf  iriuture  act  is  contemplated  or  resolved  upon  at  the  time  of  writing,  tbeiM- 
PKUFECT  of  the  PEUiPiinASTic  rrTUHK  is  frequently  used  with  the  force  of  an  English 
future  •  Dejotarus  ad  me  LaodicCam  renfilrns  erat:  Dejotarus  will  meet  (is  going  to 
C(mie  to)  me  at  Laodicea.  Cic.  Att.  5.  20,  9.  Ex.  23.  24.  25.  ■■  v       ^  -t-.K^». 

F  Future  action^  contemplated  by  the  writer  are  frequently  expressed  by  cogitabam 
with  an  inlinilive.  which  is  the  re^rular  form  in  re-ard  to  contemplated  movements,  wheii 
the;  intinitive  (/>ro/(V-iwi  or  es,e)  is  nnderstc»od.  the  object  of  the  motion  ^'-r»"^  «f  J'^Jf.'^f.^^  *  y 
j/Mvithan  accusative,  but  the  object  of  e^se  l\v  ff^^vlth  the  ablative  Nonis  MaJ'^  "^ 
Vilinam  coqitabam^:  On  the  Nones  of  May  I  shall  depart_  for  Cilicia.  <^;c.  Att.  6.  2  6.- 
Eo  die  coeniabam  in  Anaqnlno.  postero  autem  in  Tuscvlano ;  To-day  /^M//  be  in  my 
villa  near  Ana<Mii  :  to-morrow  in  that  near  Tusculum.  lb.  12.  1.  1.  See  r^^.^. 

imi  T  e  use  of  epistolar», tenses  is  far  less  frequent  than  that  of  the  ordinary 
tensed  eve,  if  t'pisrola?y  tensermight  be  properly  used  !  Nihil  habeo  quod  ad  te  scribam 
(epistolarv  tense:  hafMbam).  Cic.  Att.  1,  19.-  LafM>rafur  vehementer ;  incltnata  res  ed 
(epistolary:  lafxtrafxltur ;  inclindta  erat).  lb.  Fam.  1,  1. 

1    Nos  autem  in  Formiano^  morahamnr.  Cic    Att.  9,  1,  3.-2    PompCjns  (rat ^\ma 
mvnHmnJuvrZrmbam.  lb.  Fam.  IG,  10,  2.-3.  Eqnidem,  quum  h^cscribebam   ahqxud 
^^m^aZ^rputrd^am.  lb.  G,  4.  1.-4.  Atque  ba>c  mihi  seri^^naveM  ^^y^-'^^-^^f;^, 
e<<e  eumacnjus  tu  desperationem  accusare^  scditus  esses,  lb.  b,  1,  5.- 5.  Fama /nm- 
/i^-V^^te  esse  in  Syria  ;auctor  erat  nemo.  lb.  12.  4.  2.-6.  It  AthCnas  ad  \  II.  Kal. 
Ouinci    veneram  'exst^'ctdbayn  ibi  iam  quartum  diem  Pomptinium.  lb.  Att.  5.  lu,  i.— 
7     VdVJ^  rvilla  adhuc  eirressl  non  snmns  ;  Ua  inagno^  et  assiduos  ,mhrl^  habebamis 
b  13  IG^  1  -  8    II  ec  dlcfdri  sedens  in  rheda^  lb.  5.  17,  1.-  9.  Quum  Philogenes  sta- 
ndi ienavi^lt^'um  es.e  diceret,  has  ei  litteras  c^^i  quibus  ^^^^rescrips^^^ 
acceperam  a  Bruti  tabellario  (beg inningof  the  letter).  Ih  «^- ^-    •- 10-  ^^^^^^^^^^^     ^^^'f^ 
tusconsulttim  factum  est  quod  ad  Xemtsi.  lb.  4,  2  5.--  11 .  Quiim  T.  P«"\P^"'"f  «  /^.«^ 
j.roficiscerCtur.  aliquid  mihi  scrlbend'Wi  pnfari.  lb.  Fam.  5.  ^;  .^,;- \\  ^,,^  '  ^'f  6 
d  a  te  litteris  petere  quod  mihi  omnium  eseet  maxime  necessanum.  1  !>•*•'["•  ::«»•;*• 
-l5.  Ciesarem  nunc  d-'fen.lit  Curio?    t^iis  hoe  putaret  pneter  me?    >« «"^;  \' J.^^  «"J: 
nitavi    11)   2   13  3  -14.  Qme  impendere  putarem,  .vrn/M^ram  ad  te^  et  jam  tuas  litte- 
^iTexsiJ^d^^^^^^      II)  Att.  8.  13.  2.- 1.-..  Capua»  N  on  i  s  Febr.  esse  ro/?^flm  quia  con  sues 
j  'Jm'^^     b  7  l|  V-  Februariis  forum'  in.'^fitueram^  airere  ^^odxi:e^.l- 

5  2T  9  -  17.  T  iLTinta  dies  erant  ipsi  qnum  has  dabam  litteras,  per  quos  "")!«;;  "^^0« 
Vi/Vrrrm  ih.  3.  21.-  18.  Nihil  babrbam  q^'l^. ^^ribeumi  neque  en.m  nov.  qmdquam 
audi, ram  et  ad  tuas  omnTs  r'.sr7tp.<-ram  pndie.  lb  9.  10,  1.-19.  A.  D.  V  1.  ^«-  ";'J-' 
nun/ has  dabanV  iitteras  ex  Vomuvi^un  proficLsc?bar.  Delude  coqitalmm  sine  ulia 
n  ra  i  -n  i  mm»  ft  cm.  lb.  5.  2.  1-  20.\\d  eum  postridie  mane  r«rfe6«m\"  qmim 
K'(^;;,,^.'Vb:5?l(^2^21.  Siillecuimandavi  satisscUen^^^^^^^ 

s;;;;!v;rt;";;:ina:i;;i^s;^-jf^:'ii;:i,;^^ 

^iv^.^t-^-  2^^.-s^  i^^;^  ^^^ ^;;ir  ^^1^5.3 

oj  q__9<:    h\ro  tabellarios  ad  vos  iiostero  die  eram  mf^surux.  lb.  h.  3,  1. «•  V"'"^' 

ro^am  TMlram'n  uberalibusi^  coqitkam  dare.  lb.  G,  1,  12.-  28.  Beneventum  cogitabam 
.     hodie.  11).  5,  3,  3. 

'  1  My  villa  near  Formia^.--  'that  it  was  \.-^ali^njm  ^/^■';^^''«/^'>«^'«,«f^';f,fj'J:^,«^'^f^f 
somebodv  with  despair.—  "i^^  (/em. .  ..non.  not  a  foot.-  ^  carnaire.-  to  ai  sw » '•-  .Z^o- 
r^rX^  t    hold  acourt-Mm-^^^ 

ZL  -^»  to  walk  --  '»  skilfully.-  >2  t(,  choose.-  »3  the  toqa  virdis  being  called  p/vm, 
beSiuse  it  hadnol  the  ornameits  of  thcboys^  toga.-  ^  the Liberalia,  a  Roman  festival. 


A 


360 


USE   OF  THE  I'ENSES. 


Rem.   78.  Tlie  epistolary  tenses  are  connected  with  peculiar  expressions 

regarding  1)  the  date  of  letters  ;  2)  the  rendering  of  the  adverbs  to-day, 

yesterday,  and  to-morrow. 

Obs.  1.  The«hit('  is  never  placed  at  the  lioad,  and  rarely  at  the  end  of  the  letter.  If  placed 
Rt  the  end,  it  i:*  either  the  mere  day  with  or  witliout  the  name  of  tiie  place,  or  the  day  in 
connection  with  data  (i.  e.,  data  est  e/mtola,  tlie  letter  was*  delivered  to  the  carrier),  which 
is  otten  abbreviated />.,  as  :  Data  Non.  Novembr.,  Naruiul.  Cic.  Fam.  5,  106.—  D.  IV. 
Noil.  Mart.  lb.  7,  13.—  More  frequently  the  date  is  contained  in  the  text  of  the  letter: 
A.  1).  IV,  Kai.  Maj.  iens  in  Pompejrmuin  bene  mane  h:vc.  scripsi.  lb.  Att.4,  9,  2.—  Scito 
Id.  Maj.  nos  has  dedisse.  II).  5.  5,  1.—  Most  frequently  the  clause  'quo  die  lias»  litteras 
dedi '  is  used,  bein^'  attached  to  the  day  of  the  caltrndar  which,  in  this  instance,  is  ren- 
dered '  to  diy '.  Trebatiuin  VI.  Kal., quodie  has  littera-»  (/e(/i.exspccttlbam  ;  I  am  expect- 
iiiL,'  Trebatiiis  to-day.  (^ic.  Alt.  9,  17.  1.—  Sometimes  the  date  is  expressed  by  implication, 
and  must  be  found  liy  calculation  :  I't  AtliGiias  a.  d.  VII.  Kal.  (^uinct.  veneram,  exspectfl- 
bam  ii)i  jam  quarluin  diem  Pomptinium.  Cic.  Att.  5.  10,  1.—  This  makes  tlie  date  the 
IV  of  the  Kal.  Rarely  the  date  thus  indicated  in  the  text  is  expressed  by  an  imperfect, 
which  is  (mly  the  case  in  a  clause,  or  if  other  epistolary  imperfects  are  conuccted  with 
it:  Iljecautt'in  i<cnbiba)n\>v'\{\.\Q  Nonas.  Cic.  Att.  9,  1,  1. 

Obs.  2.  Tlie  adverbs  to-day^  yesferdat/,  io-morroiv  may,  even  with  epistolary  tenses 
be  expressed  in  the  usual  way,  which,  strictly  spe<ikin<^  is  illoirical,  since  the  imaginary 
narrator  would  not  usi;  these  adverbs  :  llodle  tiias  litteras  ejrspedabainuft  matutlnas  ;  I 
expect  to-day  your  mornin^^'-letter.  Cic.  Att.  12,  M.  So  Att.  9,  11,  1  and  often.— //i?/i 
eiiim  vesperi  veneral  ;  For  he  m//i^ yesterday.  lb.  12,  1«.—  t'/y^A*  0»'it  not  its  equivalents; 
see  the  last  sentence),  always  stands  with  the  future.—  But  very  frequently  these  word», 
ill  conm-ction  with  epistolary  tenses,  are  expressed  by  a  relen'iice  to  a  given  day  or 
other  time.  If  relerriti*;  to  tlie  date  of  the  letter,  to-day  is  expressed  by  (odie  (eOdeni 
die):  Eq  auiem  die  credo  aliquid  actum  in  seniltu.  Cic.  Att.  5,  5,  1.  Most  usually  '  to- 
day '  is  expressed  by  the  date  with  '  quuni  fuvc  ncribebam.'' .  or  '  quodie  hnj*  littera!*  dedi '. 
—  Yesterday  is  expressed  hy  pridie  with  reference  to  the  date :  Venerat  is  in  Cunijlnum 
vesperi  pridie^  id  est  Idibus.  Cic.  Att.  10,  4,  7.—  I^idie  apud  me  Crassipes  fucrat.  lb.  9, 
11,  :i  Often  it  is  expressed  by  the  dav  of  the  calendar  :  E.r<>  me  de  Ciimauo  movi  a.  d. 
V.  Kal.  Maj.  Uhe  letter  beini,'  of  the  IV.  Kal.^.  lb.  Att.  4.  9.  2.  So  lb.  5,  :i.  1  and  often. 
To-morrow  with  epistolary  tenses  may  be  expressed  hy  j^o^^tero  die  or  /)ostri die  :  I'ostero 
die  cor/itdbarn  in  Tuscuhlno.  Cic.  Att.  12,  1,  1.— Frequently  it  in  expre.^^sed  by  mane: 
Indc  domiini  CfpniTtum,  ut  sim  /nofie  pnesto  MilOni.  lb.  Att.  4,  ]2. —  A  peculiar coml)ina- 
tion  of  'to-morrow'  with  the  particular  time  of  writinj^  the  letter  is  made  by  the  cir- 
cumlocution '  Postridie  ejus  diei  ((ui  erat  tuin  fiitflius  quum  hiec  scrihebam'  in  Cic.  Qu. 
Fr.  ;3,  2,  1  :  Postridie  ejus  diei  qui  erat  turn  fmarus  quum  h:ec  scribCham  ante  lucem. 
erat  apud  CatOnem  divinatio  inter  Memmium  et  Neronem///^«my  To-morrow  there  will 
6e  a  competition-trial  for  the  public  accusership  betweeirMemmius  and  Nero  in  Caio's 
chambers.    I  am  writing  this  before  daybreak  (of  the  day  before  the  trial). 

Obs.  3.  The  epistolary  tenses  became  obsolete  about  the  time  of  the  Emperor  Nero. 
Pliny  in  his  letters  always  uses  ordinary  tenses.  Together  with  the  epistolary  tenses, 
gome  other  ancient  formalitit's  in  the  writing  of  letters  secern  to  liave  been  abolished 
about  the  same  time.  Here  belongs  the  frequent  introductory  formula  '  -Si  rales  t}fne  est, 
er/o  va!eo  ;''  If  your  health  isgoixl,  it  is  well  ;  I  am  well  (abbr. :  S.  V.  B.  E.  E.  V.).  Seneca 
(Ep.  XV)  speaks  of  this  as  an  obsolete  form  which  had  been  yet  in  use  in  his  youth. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 

1.  PiiESEXT  TENSE  (R.  42.  4o). —  1.  Retiim  to  me  that  book,  which  I 
have  missed*  for  a  long  time. —  2.  Your  brother  Marcus  has  been 
living  with  us  for  three  months. —  3.  How  long  have  you  been  living  in 
this  state? — 4.  This  law-suit''  has  already  lasted  two  years^ — 5.  Who* 
accommodates^  to  what  nature  exacts®,  feels'  neither  poverty  nor  fear. — 
6.  VVlieresoever**  I  cast"  [niy]  eyes,  I  see  all  faces'"  full  of  courage"  and 


*  Desiderare. —  2  Translate  :  In  this  trial  (judicium)  we  have  been  engaj»ed  (vermri) 
already,  etc.—  '  bieiinium. —  *  is  Qui. —  '  se  compomre  ad.—  •  exigcre.—  '  Translate!  :  is 
not  only  out  oi  {extra)  the  sense  or  poverty,  but  out  of  fear. —  ^  p.  218,  (i). —  '  circumferre. 
—  '<'  all  faces  —  omnia.—  '*  animi. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


861 


energy'.—  7.  When  (ifhi)  we  see  that  this  plan''  [will]  not  avaiP,  we 
summon*  the  authors  of  the  damage*  to  the  court. 

1 1    ExNGLISII  PUESENT-PEIIFECTS  and  LaTIN  IDIOMATIC  PERFECTS  (§  569, 

R  40).—  1. 1  shall  never  deny  that  [there]  are  some  contrivances»  in  the 
possession'  of  those  who  have  made  these  studies  a  special ty\ —  2.  We 
have  said  enough"  on  the  subject.—  3.  We  have  come'"  now  to  the  pas- 
^a"-e"  where  we  stopped"  the  other  day.—  4.  Our  people'''  have  readily 
adopted'nhis  habit.—  5.  The  law"*  is  a  creature"  of  society'".—  C.  Cras- 
sus  has  learned  all  he  could.—  7.  All  those  with  whom  I  spent  my  youth'  , 
are  no  more  —  8.  Many  have  often  Iried^"  to  become*^' suddenly^  rich, 
but"  few  have  [ever]  succeeded.—  9.  Those  who  take  money  for  their 
vote»?  and  those  who  buy  them,  are  liable  to  legal  punishment^*. 

III!  Impeufects  of  st.\te  (R.  50).—  When  the  Roman  fleet  approached, 
the  ships  of  the  Carthairinians  were  anchored*-'»  at^»  the  island.—  2.  Anto- 
nius  increased  the  garrison,which  was  in  the  town,by  three  cohorts.— 
3  At  that  time  more  than  two  legions  were  hiding"  in  the  forests;  but 
the  army'*  arrived  at*"  the  wall  of  the  town  before  the  consul  knew^"  that 
the  enemy  was  present''.—  4.  Caesar  called  out"  the  two  legions  which 
then  were  in  winter-quarters^^  at"  Aquil5ja.—  5.  When  Caesar  came'^  to 
Germanv  the  irreatest  part  of  that  country  was  covered'"  with  lorests.— 
0  Tlie  winter-quarters"  of  all  these  legions  lay'*  within  a  circle  of  one 
hundred  miles  —  7.  The  road  which  led  to  Acerrae  was  intersected'"  by 
a  river  which  was  passable*"  at  several  places  by  a  ford*'.—  8.  The  bounda- 
ries of  the  Helvetians  extended  at  that  time  more  than  two  hundred  and 
fortv  miles  in  len-'-th.— 9.  There  I  saw*^  Buchanan,  the  same  (/«)  who 
later*'  was  Presidoiit**  of  the  United  Slates*^-  10.  The  whole  army  (ag- 
men)  stopped*'  here  for  several  days ;  for  the  snows  of  Mount  Cevenna 

hindered  the  march.  ^  » n  4i 

IV  Imperfects  of  progkessive  action  (R.  51-;)d). —  1.  All  inese 
thin"-s  compelled  the  king  to  call  to  his  aid*'  the  forces  which  were  protect- 
in"-  the  boundaries  of  ^Etolia.— 2,  At  tliat  time  the  castle  of  Tarentum*''  was 
hdd  by  the  forces  of  Hannibal.—  3.  When  Caesar  came  to  Brittany,  its  in- 
terior*" was  inhabited^"  bv  those  who  stated^'  that  they  were  born  on  the  isl- 
and But  the  sea-coasl^-^  was  held  by  those  who  were  crossing  over  and 
returning  for  the  sake  of  plunder''.—  4.  Cassivellaunus  sent  messengers  to 
the  four^iiigs  wlio  ruled"  over  those  regions.—  5.  While  at  the  right 
winrr"  the  ti^dit  was  going  on'"  (see  R.  CO,  Obs.  3),  the  second  and  third 
legions  were  defending"''  themselves  with  great  bravery  against  the  attacks 

"^Robur^^al^tlor^^^^lioUmUT^  fo  the  court.  \i\  judi- 

cial. Voiir.'  -  ^injuria.-  «  ars.- ^  in  the  jmsession,  by  the  adj.  proprtus.-  «  Render  : 
Wl ;, ban.  plaeed  an  their  study  in  knowing  (cor/«^.co-e)tl.ese  things.--  «  Render :  enough 
much  — »0  nervenire  — 1»  locus.—  ^^  subsistere.—  ^^  Render:  lie.—  lubentei.— 
"'  sciscere  -  '«  usUtia.-  >^  procreSre.-  »«  Render  :  The  society  o  men  has  created 
,he  law  !^  1»  whom  I  used  as  a  youn-  man.-  ^»  velle.-  -'  Render  :  to  acquire  (cowi^a- 
r&^iS^^^^^  of  en  riches.--^'^  brevi.- -^  Render  :  which  however  (taimn)  have  fallen  to 
nJe  lofol  few  />a  "■i.o^.;i«r/.;v).-  -  Render  :  Those  who  after  receiving  money  have  ca^ 
(feire)  [their]  votes,  and  who  gave  the  money,  are  held  by  tj«  P^"'^^'  ^^^^L^^.f.  fJ^'Z 
«^  to  be  anchored,  stare.-  =«  ad.-  ^^  latere  -  2«  «snien.-  -«  sub.-  =»  subju^ 
31  adesse—  ^'^  arcessere.—  33  hiemSre.—  3*  ad.—  ^"  indicative.—  opcrtue.--  j"  bi- 
berna    pi  t-38  Render:  were  contained  (co/j/imTe)  by  10.000  Pace«-- -'•' prohibgre.- 

"  to  bV  passable,  transiri.-  * ^  vadum.-  ^^  convenlre  ^^^^^ri^]  P^fe'j!ii7sistere  -^ 
President  vrceesse.—  *^  the  United  States,  cicitatts  tmnims  Aviencani.-  «subsistere.— 
inw  the 'aCSct  dative.-  <^  by  an  adjective.-  -  pars  '^^1^^''^'^;  ]^;;^Z 
'1  dicere.-  f»'^  pars  maritima.-  "  pneda.-  ^*  prjeessc.-  "  cornu.-  by  puynare.- 
"''  to  defend  one's  self  against  attacks,  impeturn  sustmere. 


362 


USE   OF   THE   TENSES. 


ENGLISH  EXERCISES. 


363 


of  the  encn.y.-  G.  The.  army  ^ool^ ^V-^^}^^^^  "^^"^Zl 
for  there  the  savapV  were  said  to  be  huUkn.—  /•  v\  n>  ,11  i  c  n 

tw    lUlcost  him  hislife^  did  he  enter»  the  ^  \»  \^- ^"  .^.),.*^^^lf;^^^ 

11  Epaminondas  was  already  on  the  point  ol  dying,  when  he  was  in 
formed-  that  the  Spartans  had  been  ^^efeated 

V.    IMPEKFECTS  OF  REPEATED  ACTION  (^^;  "^fijY  ^^-i  .^^VnU'S  the  ri-ht 

all  states  of  the  South^  -l-^f-^hbl^a^^^  mn   e  w.^^ 

eve»  of  the  same  consuls  arms  were  openly    caiiiLa    "'K'   ".^  "  V.'i.  ,,,„ 
grtor,   an..]  the  steps"  of  .he  ->"^^ ^"^^:^;^  ^^'l^^,^"^ ,  mur 

with  msuiis    ,  ni.iKiii-,  u.-^c        f»  ppnsured  bv  several 

othors— 3    When  Att  cus  was  doing  this,  he  was  ctnsuieu   uy^ 

■ : — : ; s  i..,-,.  U..<1<    n-niTtiieji  (i/cloidit,  (/UOK  liil</0  LoVdleC- 

S,e.-»  rc-mler  :  How  .mc:U  wen;    he  re-^i-Cf  <«^;, ;  _  xV'l^intinGro.-  »^  .ulmnlten;.- 

i«ab.stract(Uuive.-»Mobe  har     pu^>c  ,  Mw    '^  ,j  j     ciritates  dleridrts, 

tive)  -  »-  civiiates  ultorlOres.    (Tbe  Ma-os  of  the  ^;«  \»  ];  ^"''^  ,,,^.  .,n;,io-y  dI'  Oci/Z^a 

Ma.:;,rH  line  bcin,-  "»<lT<7;»^V"«  !»»%*l'7^;f_!''i\\\Tc  ?-  "^^^^  ^n»'  ^tu.li-».- 

or  Ilispama  citerwr  aud  ulterioi .)—       '"^y-    ,5     "^  _1  a,  oxDloritre,—  "  qua  latione. 

•.3  consuliarc-  "-*  to  .e,u\  "''••'•"•^.f 'J^j/t^u^Tcr  )^>rm^^^^  _  3o'  ^  war  commence.,  helli 
-  a«  undc-  '^-  subjunctive  i"M;errect  of     b  ,    crb  jm  i>er  _   ^^        „.„,„,   f,„i«  «^  concl- 

initi'imfit.-  =«»  ha\>Crn,--  3^  contio  -  3=  ,u  "?  J%»;\7y;';  ,;,^^,._  u«  anlCre.-  '^  ^nmina 
li;,Uulis.-35  <7rm^  ercitement  P'^^\f^'\^^^..^^^^^^^  nispeclin-(i"xy>.c- 

l,ellandi  cnpiditas  -^^^  by  in^e.-  '7t<f'yl\'r  •  L^^  J  :,  '  .^^^^  42  ,,.<.-  <^  ciedei.-  **  dirrptio. 
/u..).-  ^0  ^o  '/'^''^•^^/^«/^•«■•il'^'-"*-^'];:''''  7^^^^  4  "tn  We-  ^»  to  U  under  couhol.  tcncri.- 
_45„;,lam  — •"»  comportare.-  "^  pradi  s  -  toil.  n..  5'i  t,„-widCre  —  "  pote^tas.- 
00  neri.-  <»'  /o  ,^/0«^  /W/'  (o  death  lap.datione.  f«  -  ."^^:-  ...f/;.  '  ..rUcat.-..--  "  tod<mn- 
54  Tl  i;  and  the  following  paniciples  are  to  ',>;' f^''^"^';;^* '\VV>    »Vo^^^^^  "  to 

nofr  with  insultx.  domii.ari  et  in.ultare.-  ^"  to  viako^  „Timi  mu    e  C-re  -  «*'  oi.tiiuStcP.- 
vk^l^^       intimidation  to  ^om^^d',.  joxx^Z^^^^^^  little  (p^rr/.m).- 

5«  Render  :  That  (ry,/o</)  he  seemed  ^^'''i^'   i'^' ',  ,  "J^'^\'  ''t,  a-r/(>r  anythi„<j\  (ali)quid 

«8  ad  versus.—  *^  male  rem  «jerere. 


C    Bibulus  was  his'  enemy,  who  accused  not  only  him  but  the  whole 
nobility.— 2.  Meanwhile  the  common  people,  which,  desirous  for  a  change 
of  government^,  were  at  first'  in  favor*  of  a  war,  changed*  their  minds, 
randl  execrated"  the  plans  of  Catiline,  [and]  raised'  Cicero  to  the  sky.— 
3    \niiochus  invited'  the  prcetor  Verres  to  dinner  ;  he  displayed"  all  his 
tiiin.'-s'"  a  great  deal  of  silver,  and  not  a  few  goblets"  of  ^'^  gold.    Verres 
took"^='  every"  vase'*  in  his  hands,  [and]  praised,  [and]  admired  [them] 
The  king  was  happy''  that  his  banquet"  gave  pleasure"*  to  a  praetor  of 
the   Koman   people.      AVhen   Verres  had  come  home,  he   thought   of 
nothin<^  else  but"  how  he  might""  rob'-^'and  plunder^-  the  king.  He  asked^ 
for  thole  vases,  saying"*  that  he  wished-*  to  show  them  to  his  artists^". 
Tiie  vases  were  sent.  ^The  king,  at  first,  feared  nothing,  suspected  noth- 
in'^     One  day  passed",  [and]  the  nexi'^«,  [and]  more;  they  were  not  re- 
tuVned'^.     Then  the  king  sent  [a  messen.sjei],  that^»  he  might  return^ 
them  if  he  would  pleasc'^^     Verres  told"  [the  messenger]  to  call  again   . 
It  seemed  strange^'^  to  the  king.     He  sent  ugain^'^.     Thev  were  not  re- 
turned.   In  one  word",  Verres  ordered  the  king  to  leave''  forthwith  the 
province  bef«)re  night. 
VII.    Imperfects  (or  perfects)  determined  by  a  point  of  time 

(ct  577) 1   Bv  this  time  the  king  was  already  on  his  way  to  the  theatre 

(rf  war^" —  2.  From  here  the  king  started'"  for  Amphipolis,  and  arrived 
at  llie  town  in  five  days".  But  at  that  very  time  the  consul  crossed  the 
fnmtier  with  all  [his]  forces.—  3.  At  the  same  time  when  {qm)  this  intelli- 
«rence  came*-  to  mv  brother,  the  house  which  he  owned*'  at  Puteoli  was 
Tlestroved**  bv  fire*^—  4.  In  the  same  night  when  Herostratus  burned 
down*«  the  temple  of  Diana  at  Ephesus*%  Alexander  the  Great  was  born. 

—  5  When  Themistocles  at  a  banquet*'  refused  to  play  on  the  lyre  ,  his 
education  wasquestioned^».-  G.  The  king,  when  hemet^'  the  consul,  was 
Mttended"''  bv  his  two  s(ms,  the  one  of  whom  was  three  years  older  than 
the  other^'  —  7.  Jackson^*,  called  the  Stone-walP%  was  hil^*^  by  a  bullet 
in  the  battle  at  Chancellorsville^',  [and  thus]  paid  the  penalty  to  his  coun- 
trv  no-tiinst  whicli  he  was  arrayed  in  arms^».—  8.  Armed  [bands]  ^lestroyed 
thViail,  which  was  being  repaired"  by  order^^  of  the  Common  Council    . 

—  y  At  that  place,  Servilius,  the  same  {is)  who  was,  the^  other  day,  in 
your  house"*,  was  attacked"^  [and]  killed  by  [a  band  of]  assassins  .— 


I  To  him.-  ^  rerum  novfirt.m  cupidu.^.-  3  primo.-  *  favGre,-  «  by  ablat  ves  al),Bolute 
-  «  ex"ecrari  -  ^  tollere.-  »  vocaic-  »  exponerc-  1«  copiae.-  11  pocnlum.-      §  443, 
No  2  -  n  .u mere  -  '*  unu.qnisque.-  '^  va.um.-  i»  gaudSre.-  ^^  .co"vivium.-  ^     i- 
cu  ;.lum  ac^ratum  es.e.-  »«  ni.iV  =»  by  the  ^subjunctive  o    ^he  mam  verb  -  «    spoh- 
a,e-2'i  expiiare.-  -3  ro-are  aliquid.— -*  finite  verb  («^O--  '*  '^«lle.-       artiicx. 

I    ."  ,wn.J-t    e  Fn/zW//^--*"  in  eunlU -*"  Render  :  refused  {recnmre)  the  lyre  (lyra). 

hit  actus),   paid  {penoicere).-  "  «l-m^--   '^^^''"*^  l'*),^,^;"    r^  "S  decurtone"- 
accH-i  )  —  «"  demollri.—  «^  reticere.—  «-  ex  consilio.—  «3  tomimn  touncu,  uccunont-b. 
«*  hy'ajnid  —  «*  to  attack  and  kill,  opprimere.— «« insidiStor. 


364 


USE   OF   THE    TENSES. 


ENGLISH    SENTENCES. 


365 


10  ^^^1r  bccan^^e  almost  all  the  Gauls  were  under  (//0  arms,  thoii^litMliat 
Avas  much    facilitated  by  a  storm  Avhich  kept  the  patiols  ot  the  cucmy 

veyd^e  t  tVom  ours-.- 5.  In  my  boyhood  \!:l^'';^^^\  ^^"^^.^  ^ 
,,„  L.i»  —  n  \t  Paris"  I  staved  about  two  years.  I  licre  I  hnished  llie 
r"  d  t-  o  Laplace's  works^  which-  study  occitpied-  me  ^  'U  elongei 
Ui  I  fexpecto(b  because  my  mind  was  distracted"  by  cares  ot  the  m  s 
vnr  Ml  ki^iu^^^^^^^  7  From  tliat  day  to  tlie  be-inning  ot  the  war  tlio 
H.l  -  ot- CO  mVletiu.;  the  army  was  carried  ou  with  the  .greatest  euer.^ 
1  Sfts  wcM-e  ade-  in  all  coulity-towtis^^  and  mass-meeti.u.'s  were  he  d 
Dialts  wcic  "  '  \  ;  .  ^^53  _  J  seinio  observed^*  this  habit  to  the  last-'» 
d^^rin^s'lif^  o  g^^  to  (/.oX  (Capitol,  where  he   closed  himself 

itt-in  Jupiter's  tfmple.- 9.  From  that  tiuie  up  to  Socrates,  the  Greek 
il()SHu  is  Vkvo  tcd^»  their  study  priucipally""^  to  the  observation  of  na- 
1  !  el'^  0  Foi  th^  vears  the  State  was  without  laws  and  was  con- 
r  led-  bvar  ed  bands"  of  ruffians-.- U.  The  second  aud  third  le- 
gi^ms  mall^alned  the  combat^^ith  the  greatest  ^^--''V^  ^the^o^-r  s 
^     ♦«•  1  ,r  r  ou;^^nn«  p'lrrijMl   heb)*^^  to  our  rsoldicrs     m  clistiesb    . —  i»/.  m 

my  wont,  C()i.>^uCvi.--^  Ken  Ut  .  A  tlou.,a  ''^ ^^  L V'' '"'J  „  jvinen.-  »»  cxcedcro  ali(ino 

•«  ."miiiittoiv.-  "  aiixilium  fcrr.'.-  ••  l>y  ihc  i.ailicii.te  pre»,  of  hiioiare.         tuuit. 
70  vLTfilii.—  "  by  ordiUiil?.—  ''  couttticre. 


the  end  of  l.is  misery'  was  near  at  hand'.-  13.  When  the  ^;"?  -••rived 
not  attend  to  his  h^^v-pn,ct.ce^- lo    On  the  Uu.l  ot  Jtu^^ 

Ihc  weapons"  of  all  bad*^  citizens.  AVhpn  Cras- 

-^;h:lsl^o?^;ir^?2^  HiJ^S^     {-^ 

C.  While  son>e  were  ^■i^l»^,^:;^'^'"^,""*^"^  '„;;'"  i  o  co  .fusiou"^- 
•JK  o.  1  m-l» Je»  enlere,!-  into  a  ions  ^"'r!"T""oV^u"T^P^^^- 
nlh-  snlro '.n.led»  l.y  H.e  "V'l'''>'\>:;;,,''';:\^;'';4- ^;,„'ne  'u  sn^  "«- 

in.-  Appins's  interests  '"  >  '«  l^"™  '^^nser- 9  While  I  have  beea 
came  the  lather-m-law  ".'  '''^'^''''\,,5TY,V.,ye  according  to  the  ens- 
[r i;;ir  uJ^d^  ^irl^i  P^^i>l-t^;na\ave  ^  afinostaU  thy 

ti^e=^:,;j-  t?^f  if?  \  ^ri™^.^^^i,^";a^a^i,s:  ^h!;! 

eonld  no  llon.^'er]   l.mder  it.-  2    As  1  ma; .as  '-}^'J'^^-'^  ,,,  .^^d  kuowl- 

Pon.poninsahont  htnf  ,ben,^  .'' '  ,'^'^'^^';^^      ^  S^^^  ,vas  at  the  head" 
cd"e*"  ol  the  voiin.tc  man.—  J-  As  loni,  as  r.|K.i.  q    ^pg  _  4.  As 

.,r-the  repuhlic,  Thel.es  was  '"« /".''^"•'J.gfJ.t  Uself  I'y  the  Wdes  of  the 

(/,,v)  to  ,ne.-  ^0  advers-lri.-       P^*    [,*^i",  J  «   «  ),«r,  ari^y»/;^^^r  one's  cord rd.  ur  em 

tnrbAiv-3*  agerf.— ^^  tie  iiidii>tna.— ••    "  .7'"  v;,,..,.,  ornarc— 4°  omuibn>  rebUK— 

ri<7/<y  [/iri«(7  .—  "••  coiivenTrc—  "   *^f ''"4«  '  "„  ,  ^ai  J atnchanned.  captus  sum.— **:  im 
!i;!;;»i%-o-cX^--"'^P-^^^^  ^.tT>««<.»<  ^Va^..  caput.-  "  munu.0.- 
»3  doctor. 


366 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


367 


I  felt  that  I  made  any  profrress'. —  7.  "VVc  resisted  these  unwise"  plans 
as  long  as  we  could. —  8.  TJie  general  retained  that  legion  [only]  so  long 
as  he  thought  its  presence'  was  necessary. —  9.  I  supported*  him  as 
long  as  he  was  living  in  my  house*. —  10.  The  Romans  excelled'  all 
other  nations  in  the  arts  of  war'  as  long  as  they  did  their  own  fighting**. 

—  11.  Britanny  fh^urished  as  long  as  the  Romans  governed  that  island"  ; 
but  after'"  the  Roman  rule"  had  ceased'-,  all  traces"  of  humanity  rap- 
idly'* vanished'*. —  13.  CanulPjus  kept  his  temper'"  in  discussing"  so  long 
as  those  that  debated'*  with  him  would  submit'"  to  his  opinion.s. —  13.  It 
was  already  day-break*"  when  the  first  troops  {ngmcn)  of  the  enemy  came 
in  sighf^'. —  Already  noon  was  approaching'-^  when  the  messenger  re- 
turned to  the  camp. 

IX.  DksiGNATION  of  time  TX  rUEDTCATES  OF  REPEATED  ACTION  (R. 
C4). —  1.  I  do  not  wond(.'r  that  this  happened,  for  I  heard  similar  things 
from  thy  father. —  2.  I  heard  that  this  orator  often  spoke  to  a  very  slim 
audience*^. —  3.  On  these  subjects'''*  I  liave  often  had  long  conversations'''^ 
with  hiuA,  but  could  never  iniiuce'*"  \\\n\  to-'  adopt  our  views. —  4.  Atiuius 
often  informed**  the  consul  of  these  irregidaritles""  of  the  soldiers. — 
5.  I  have  alwa3's  liked^"  scholarship  and  scholars". —  0.  Themistocles, 
when  he  was  a  young  man'*'^,  was  much  engaged"  in  judicial  business^* ; 
he  often  attended^*  popular  meetings,  and  no  important^"  affair  was  done" 
without  him. —  7.  In  those  sad  days  I  was  often  compelled  to  pawn  my 
jjroperty'"' ;  often  I  borrowed^"  money  at  enormous  interest*". — 8.  That  na- 
tion always  came  with  arms  to  their  public  meetings. —  9.  In  those  days 
C.  Marins  always  appeared^'  on  the  streets  in  the  garments  of  a  suppli- 
ant*^ —  10.  jVIeanwhile  Indutiomarus  hovered*'  almost  daily  with  all  his 
cavalry  about  Labienus's  camp,  partly  to**  reconnoitre*"  the  locality, 
partly  for  the  sake  of  creating  alarm*";  all  the  horsemen  almost  always 
[plerumrpie)  threw*'  darts'" over*"  the  rampart. —  11.  Meanwhile  the  hope 
for  reinforcements  daily  increased^",  and  LabiCnus  openly  said  that  he 
would  break*'  camp  earl}'  at  day-break  on  the  next  morning". 

X.  Imperfect  of  uniteo  action  (R.  G")). —  1.  Ca'sar  built*'  the  bridge 
over'^*  the  Riiine  in  the  following*^  manner  :  lie  combinecP*^  for  each 
yoke*'  two  eighteen-inch*"  i)osts^",  [being]  two  feet  apart""  [from  each 
other],  and  of  a  length  adapted"'  to  the  depth"''  of  the  river.    These  he 

1  To  make  progre><s,  proficere. —  ^  impraiiens. —  3  i)y  a  clause  with  iit  {ndej^se).— 
«adjnvjlre.—  ^  hyapud.—  «  prn^^lilre.—  '  i)j'  belliois.—  «  Umder  :  At*  loni:  as  they  f(ni«,'ht 
themselves  for  themt*elv('i*. —  "  Uender  :  Ilehl  tiie  empire  of  that  island. —  '<>  ablaii\*e  abso- 
hite.-- ii  imperium.— »2  Render :  had  been  upset  (tolUre).— ^^  vestii^ium.— »<  ccler.— 
i-»  evanescere. —  *«  i»e  retinGre. —  *'  Render:  in  sayins;. —  '"*  disi)nt;lre.--  »»  Render  :  con- 
ceded what  he  said  (qiue  diceret). —  -"  prima  lux. —  '^^  to  come  in  sighf,  cemi. —  '•''-'  api)e- 
tere. —  '^'■'  Render  :  When  very  few  {perpavci)  were  pres^ent  {xiibj.).—  '^*  res.—  26  to  have 
lonfjconverf<afio/is,  miiltum  eolloqui.—  •»"  addnct-re.  -  '-"  Render :  T/uif  (lit)  he  accedfd  (acce- 
dere)  to  our  vit-ws  (senlentia). —  ^h  cominonefa'cre. —  -^  licenfia  (.-i/if/). —  ^*»  /  tiAe 
KOffiefhir)'/,  aliquid  milii  plaeet.— 3i  virdoctiis  —  32  in,Minte  a-tfite.—  ^3  (q  fjf  enf/arjf-d  in 
fiotnetliin'j,  ver>{iri  in  aliqiia  re. —  '^*  Judicial  huKinen»,  ']\\{\\v\w.—  '^^  \t\oi\\rv  \\\  contiOiie.s 
populi. —  3«  niajor. —  37  <,'i.n*re,—  3»  Render  :  /,  compidled  ijy  nocessi'ij,  jKuvned.  u>ppi','- 
Wiiv^vUmy  proi>ertij  (Tii^  familiiiri.^).—  3»  mutuflri.—  *"  in<:^cnii  cum  ver.-flr:!.—  •••  toa/iixdi' 
on  tilt  street»,  in  pnbiicum  j)ri>dlre. —  *2  the  (jannents  of  a  xnpidianf.  vestis  ^-ordida.—  *3  va- 
^ari.—  **  ut.—  ♦•»  Render  :  to  ascertain  (co::n^^eere)  the  nie  (situs)  of  ttie  cam/).—  <«  to 
create  alar7n,  territilre. —  *^  conjicere.—  *«  telnm. —  <»  intra. —  ^o  juiiJGri. —  *»  movere. — 
^■^  postero  die.—  ^3  facere. —  '*•♦  in.—  '^  ad  unnc  inodum.—  '*  inter  t^e  jnnirere.—  ^'  'for 
each  yoke  '  must  not  he  separately  rendered,  but  is  to  be  expressed  by  nsinirdistiit)utives 
lor  tlie  cardnial  numbers. —  ^s  fiL'squipedaiis.—  si»  tignum.—  ^"  inlervallo,  witha  genitive. 

—  •'  Render:  bcinj;  measured  (dimensus)  accordinii  to  (fid).—  *'•*  altiiiido. 


drove'  bv  machinery-  slanting'   into  [the   bottom    of]   the  river,  and 
nliced  opposite  to  them  two  posts*  joined^  in  tlie  same  manner,  at  a  dis- 

ance"  of  forty  feet  from  the  former'.  Beams"  two  feet  thick",  correspond- 
in-  to  the  interstices  between  each  pair  of  posts'",  were  fjistened"  on  top 
of^hem'^  All  these  [beams]  were  connected"  by  timber  laid  length- 
wise over  them'*,  and  covered  over'^  with  long  rails'"  and  fascines".— 
2  Pompey,t..  prevent  Ctesar's  soldiers  from  entering  the  town  by  force 
durin-  he  very  embarkation  of  his  army,  ordered  the  fol  owing  fortifica- 
tio  s  to  be  made'^  :  The  gates  were  barricaded'",  and  the  streets*"  and 
souares"  walled  up";  the  mads  leading^'  to  the  city  were  intersected  by 
'trenches";  the  roads  and  approaches'^^  which  led'*- to  the  harbor  outside 

h(.  city,  were  closed-' by  driving-  [into  them]  immense  logs- sharpened 
...  iiie  toi)^"  —  3.  At  first  our  soldiers  advanced  {mcedere)  cautiously  and 
wi  is  olv  steps".    But  when  several  of  them  tell-,  [being]  struck"  by 

the  darts  of  those  who  defended  the  breastwork^*,  they  moyed"^  at  double 
lick  (step)'"  acj:unst  the  fortifications.     There  they  cut  '  the  breastwoi-k 
h  [  heir   hatchets-  at  many  spots'"  at  the  same  tune*"   and  the  defend 

MS  w  hen  they  saw  that  a  way  was  already  opening*',  fell  back*^  on  the 

upper*'  part  of  the  town  within   the  wall,  while**  our  columns**  were 

marching*"  thnmgh  the  breaches*'.  it  i«  rPnorted*Mhat 

XI    Imperfect  of  contingent  action  (R.  GG).—  1.  lUs  reported    tnai 
b/thc  ancient  Romans,  according*"  to  a  law  of  king  ISuma,  wars  were 
eel- red*"  with  the followimr  ceremonies*':  After^' satistaction  1^ ad  been 
en  landed*' with<,ut  success"*,  the  king  consulted- the  senate.     When 
lis   [member]  who  by  the  king  was  asked  for  his  opinion^%declared* 
at  war  shouUP  be  proclaime<l,  and  the  majority-   ot  the  [members] 
ese    -  voted  in  the  same  way"^  the  war  was  [thereby]  agreed  up()n"\ 
T  len  a  priest  who  was  called  'fetialis'  would  carry  a  lance  with  an  iron 
point"'  to  the  boundaries"*  of  that  people  from  whom  satistaction  was  de- 
led     There  he  would  declare  war  by  a  solemn  lormula      When  he 
h!;;rsaid  these  words,  he  would  throw""  the  l^»^ce  into  their   em^^^^^^^^ 
•>    Whenever  reckless"**  and  audacious  men  were  at"    the  helm  ot   the 
r;,>veMn.neut'"  the  worst" and  m.)st  lamentable'^  shipwrecks-  were  made. 
!l  3   Whenever  {si)  anyone  either  in  the  Senate  or  in'*  [addressmg]  the  peo- 

1  1?  .,^.r.  Wh.n  hf  had  driven  (defi<?ere),  he  placed  (statuere).-  «  machinatiOneP.— 
3  ^^"^  ll'iJrXL  4  Kcm  eJ  //. /"ac^(/  /'^0  opprMte  ones  (contrarius).--  » jungere.- 
3  prone  ac  fastigilte.—     ^V'»''*  r  •  f^«^  /«"^  "      ^  J^dalis.—  i»  corresfwuding  ....  posts. 


cuH  _  *^>  platea.-  a^in.editicare.-  "  which  led  {levre).-  " ^^^ 
'"%  fortdrau-n  (pneciucere)  -  "  aditus  ~  ;«  ducere.-  "  p.^= 
2'^  UHhc^.-^^  sharpened  at  /he  top    l)nVHem»  ?.- -^'  '^a']^.»  f,^!i,  J 


praisepTre. 
radu  —  =*'^  cadere.—  ^3  ictus. 


vote  in  the 
tire  (m  the 
tere.—  «^  1 
gubcrnacula  0)1 


I 


368 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


pie  uttered^  a  syllable''  referring'  to  liberty,  the  rods*  and  the  axe* 
were  immediately  made  ready'  lor'  his  own  punishment  and  as  a  warn- 
ing'' for  (Ihe)  others. —  4.  Tlie  enemy  attacked"  now^"  the  tirst  column, 
now  tlie  last",  according  as"  the  locality  would  give  an  opportunity. — 
5.  Whenever  by  chance'-*  any  one  of  those  who  had  thrown"  themselves 
into  the  river  reached'^  the  other  shore  by  swimming,  he  was  immedi- 
ately seized"  by  the  multitude,  and  killed  with  tortures. —  G.  Daily  the 
enemy  endeavored  to  lead  their  troops  against  our  ranks.  But  (n/)  as 
soon  as  \mnulac)  they  commenced  their  advance",  a  formidable''^  hail- 
storm"* would  throw"^"  their  ranks  into  disorder.  As  soon  as  {ubi)  they 
liad  returned'-*  to  camp,  a  marvelous^"^  serenity  and  tranquillity''^  [of  the 
weather]  would  ensue"*. —  7.  Whatever  ship  was  bound"^  to  ^lacedon 
was  always  either  sunk-°  or  plundered"'  by  the  prefect. —  8.  If  any  one 
of  the  lieutenants-"  proposed'-"  a  ditierent^"  view^\  the  general  would  not 
allow  him  even  an  opi)ortunity  to  prove  or  explain  it^'^ —  9.  Wherever" 
[any]  gaj^s^*  appeared'^  in  the  line'^  of  the  enemy,  the  Romans  immediately 
Avould  introduce"  their  columns^^— 10.  Wherever^"  the  elephants  were 
placed'"  during  {in)  tin;  march,  they  made''  (that  part  of)  the  army  {(if/me?i) 
safe  from  attacks*\  the  enemy  being  afraid"  to  ai^proach"*  [them].— 
11.  Whenever  any  one'^  was  i)ointed  out  by  the  chier",  he  was  hurried 
away"  for  execution*'.—  12.  The  better  (;>/?/a)  a  man'"  had  deserved  of'° 
the  country,  tlie^'  less  was  his  chance^'^  of  receiving  [any]  honor  or  re- 
^vard. —  13.  Whomsoever  the  prtetor  designated  by  [a  hint  of  his]  eyes, 
the  lictor  seized''-*  [him]  and  threw^*  [liim]  into  l>rison=^— 14.  Wherever^' 
Decius  made  the  attack-'',  they  trendjkHp"  as  if"  struck""  by  supernatu- 
ral power*".— 15.  However  often  the  enemy  endeavored  to  break  tiirough^'^ 
the  lines,  they  always  were  rejudsed''^  with  great  slaughter"*. —  10.  I  made 
use  of  his  advice  as  often  as  either  necessity  required'^^  or  as  some  oppor- 
tunity presented  itself"  to  me.— 17.  Our  countrymen"  devoted""  them- 
selves with  so  much  greater  zeal  to  natural  science"",  as  high'"  rewards 
were  held  out"  to  those  who  had  been  most  snceessrur-  in  the  one  or 
other  of  its  branches.—  18.  The  nearer  I  approached"  the  solution  of  that 
problem'*,  the  farther  it  seemed  to  me  that  I  was  removing'^  from  the 

point'*.  ___. 

1  Mittfic—  2  vox.—  3  meiiior.—  *  viiiriL'.—  &  pccilri.-J.—  "  (o  make  something  nady, 
exiH'dlrc  aiiqnid.—  '  in.—  "^  as  a  waminq,  in  nietiim  {aHh  oe/tifire).—  »  a;:gredi.— 
10  mo(lo....m<Hl().—  "  novissinius.—  ''^  utcunciue.—  i^  hi  quando.—  ^  projicerc—  '^  /0 
reach  (he  shore  by  swimming.  Konder  :  (o  touch  (attin<,a're)  land,  hnring  ffetu  carried  (al- 
Ifitiis)  to  (he  other  shore  bj/  shimming  (nari;).—  >«  excipcro.—  »^  by  progredi.—  ^"^  inj^en!?, 

—  1»  cum  «,nandiiio  U-mpcsta-.—  •-»  to  throiv  info  disorder,  dis^turbilrc.—  "■'»  ee  rtfcipere. 

—  '^'•^  mimJ!— ■■^3  cum  s-civniUlte  traiiquillita:*.— '-^  orlri.-  '^'^  fo  bt:  bound  for  a  jilace,  lo- 
cum i)etere.—  2«  supprimoro.  — --^^  spolijlrt'.—  -''loLrJltUK.— 2«  proponerc— ^"ccminirius.— 
31  opinio.— ^*'*  Rendtr  :  ivould  not  concede  even  a  ptewe  of  proving  or  explaining  idis.^crcrc;. 

—  33  quacunque  (referriiiL,'  to  the  battle  tiold  ;  uf/icu/Kjue  would  be  'everywhere').—  3*  a 
gap,  iiitervalfum  —  «^  (oajfj^ar^din-l.—  3«  acie.».—  3t  insinuare.—  3«  ordo.—  3»  quacunque 
'm  vbicunque^  and  whv  r— ^"  licnder  !  's(eppedon'  (incedere).— <»  pnebGre.— '•••i.Kt//^'^- 
lar  (impcuis  having  no  plural).—  *^  Keuder  :  Because  (0  the  em  my  iras  jnir.—  *^  adire. 

—  45  „t  qui-^quf.—  ■»«  dux.  -  *''  (0  hurry  away,  rapere.—  *"  nex.—  **  Hy  ut  quisque.— 
fi"  (0  deserve  of  (he  couidry.  de  repuhlicil  nii-ntuni  esf«e.—  ^i  ita. —  *'■'  Render  :  Th>;  leis 
icas  hi.<  name  presented  (edi-re>  yw/'  (ad)  rtctiving  (h-rvf)  an  honor,  vtv.—  "  npprehen- 
Jere  —  ^*  coiijicere.—  ^^  vincula. —  ^"  Quocunque?  (luacuncjue  ';  or  ubicunque?-- »'  to 
make  an  attack  (on  horseback),  invefii.- «*"  pavere.— s'-' baud  e'ecu--  qnani.— «"  iclus.-- 
«1  supernatvral powrr,  divlnum  quoddam  nuinen.—  «'-  porrumpere.— «» repellerc—  «*  llen- 
der  :  By  (/real  slaughter  (ca'des)  of  their  [men].—  ««  co<,'erc.—  •«  pc  priebCre.--  "  civis.— 
«"  s(!  dedere.—  «»  by  inrexth/dre  nattlram.—  '<»  ami)lus  (comparative).—  ■•  proponere.— 
■"»  lU'iuler:  wlio  had  mast  (maximo)  progressed  {prqflcere,  in  tiie  Huhjunctive)  in  each 
branch  (discipllna)— "  accederc  ad.—  '<  by  qutEStiont?n  ^.o/i'trtf.— '^fjcedcre.— '*  a  line 
uiihi  pioposito. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


369 


XII  Descutbtno  tmpkt^fects  (§  580).—  1.  The  aspect'  of  the  triumphal 
T^roce'^'sion-  was  most  brilliant^  Paullus  iEmilius  himself,  the  tnumph- 
in<^  .reueral\  crowned  with  laurels^,  rode»  in  a  gilded'  chariot»  drawn» 
bv^four  white  horses.  Behind  him  within'"  the  wagon  stood  a  public 
slave  holding  a  golden  crown  over  his"  head.  Next  came"  the  lictors 
with  their  laureled'-»  rods'*.  Next'^  to  them  marched'"  the  victorious 
armv  The  soldiers,  likewise'»  laurel-crowned'",  adorned  with  those 
irw-irds  of  merit  which  each  hr.d  received^'  in  the  campaign,  sang  their 
own  praises,  and  [those]  of  their  generaP^-  2.  The  spectacle  was  a  most 
revolting-'-  one.  Mettius  was  surrounded^M3y  his  cutthroats'^»,  who  evi- 
dentlv*''"lnrded'«  the  assembly^".  One  of  the  Common  Couucd  presided. 
Not  a  voice  of  a  decent'"  citizen  {phir.)  was  heard. 

XIII  Historical  imperfects  (§  581).  1.  The  officers"  were  sitting"  at 
the  banquet,  when  suddenly  a  slave  announced   that  the  enemy  had 
entered^^»  the  citv-— 3.  The  conference^*  had  scarcely  endcHPs  when  the 
first  columns-'"  of  theenemv  were  in  sight".—  ^i.  Theinistocles  had  daily 
conferences^-  with  the  ephori,  in  which  he  tried*»  to  put  otF*'  the  matter  as 
lon.r  as  possible,  when  in  the  meanwhile  at  Athens  the  fortitication  of 
thedtyand  of  the  Piraeus  was  pushed*Mvith  the  greatest  energy*-  and 
raniditv**—  4  Bias  was  once  on  board  aship*Svith  wicked*"  men.  When 
d'urin..-"  a  storm  the  ship  was  tossed*»  by  the  waves*»,  and  the  men  O^^O 
involu'd^"  the  gods,  he  said-^',  *  Be  silent,  lest^^  the  gods  perceive^^  that  you 
are  here  on  board '.- 5.  C  Vettius,  the  leader  of  the  Marsi    was  trans- 
ported^* to  the  Koman  general.     His  slave  drew^»  the  sword  [out  of  the 
icabl)ard],  of  the  verv  soldier  by  whom  he  was  conducted      and  fiist 
killed  his  master;  he'then  said",  '  I  have  emancipated^»  my  master  ;  it  is 
now^»  time  to  attend  to  myself'"".  And  thus  he  ran  the  sword  through  his 
l)o,iv"  —  0  When  this  was  announced  to  the  Consul,  he  ordered  the  army 
to  sop"-',  and  examined  the  locality  [with  his  ej^^s"^]^  There  was  a  marsh 
to  (J)  the  ri-ht,  on  wliich  a  forest  bordered"^     buspecting^"   that   the 
enemv  ^^.as  hiding  there,  he  sent  three  cohorts  to"'  reconnoitre"»  the  forest 
as   to'the  presence  and  strength   of  any  hostile  forces.-  7.  Meanwhile 
C-mna  marihed  at  the  head  of "« live  legions  to  the  support  of-  his  troops 
and  his  cavalry  was  aoproachim:  Sulla  s^'  horsemcMi  at  the  same  time  as 


,11  —  *-    i;iiii '  iviur". —   -     •«c-'^v,.. 

{janvc  01  ine  imeiL-^ic-u  i'^'~:''--—''^  Yh",",  ov)  Or^ 'u  — iMaurciltUh.— =0  bv^?/w.«on 
10  proxinui..  -  '«  HH-»'^  •■.^«•-  Vo^^lJ.^'rr)---  Render:  ;.-i^A  wM  (hey  had  'been  pre- 
acc.unt  of  quisque  (^  .^b2.  R.  19,  >o  3,  c)  ,'".,,-_  ^*  atrox.-  "  circumvc-ntus. 

sented  (doiulie)  during  (he  war.-  ^l  canere.--3  ,mpcrator.         ''^'^30  -,)onu-^  -  3i  dux.  - 

(;frfUunifuifbvllK>«oicl  -(<''','_  '^'V-      «.  R,.,,ikT  •  lliivini;  suspcct.'d.- "  Render  : 


370 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


ENGLISH  EXERCISES. 


371 


the  leuiions  were  soon'  in  order  of  battle'  by  the  enemy,  and  all  was  sud- 
denly clianged.  The  one  legion  of  Cinna^  which  was  pressed  by  tho 
enemy,  en(()iira!::ed*  by  the  hope  of  relief,'  made  an  attack  on  [iheir] 
adversaries.  Tlu'se,  foarinic  for  their  communications  in  the  rear",s('t  tlie 
example'  of  tlii^ht.  The  right  wimx",  havin*^  perceived"  the  friicht'"  of 
the  horsemen,  <^ave  way"  to  avoid*"^  beinir  made  prisoners  within  [their] 
intrenc  hments^^  and  most  of  them  tiirew"  themselves  from  a  heiirht"  of 
ten  feet  into  the  trendies.  All  was"  disorder,  panic",  and  rout'".  To 
remedy''  these  serious  checks-",  the  following"^'  expedients-'^  otfe red  them- 
selves-^ to  Sulla,  which  saved  his  army  from  destruction'^*. 

XIV.  DiUKCT  INNEU  ACTION  (i^  ~j&2). —  1.  CiTCsar  thought-^  the  best 
plan  would  be-*  to  collect"^'  ships"",  to  cross  the  sea,  and  to  follow  Pompey ; 
but  he  was  atraid  this  would  be  slo^v  work  and  would  take  a  great  time^". 
He  did  not  wish^°  that  in  the  meanwhile  {interea)  during^'  his  absence 
more  troops^''  should  be  enlisted'-'^  by  the  Pompejan  party"*,  or  that  expe- 
ditions should  be  sent  to  GauP^  and  Italy. —  2.  Ca?sar  did  not  think  it 
advisable^**  to  subject"  his  passage  over  the  sea^"*  to  the  perils  of  the  win- 
ter season^". —  o.  C:esar  thought  it  advisable  to  conceal  the  intelligence 
he  had  received*". —  4.  Ctesar  did  not  think  {existimdre)  that  the  enemy 
Avould  cros:*  that  river. —  5.  They  thought  that  all  were  preparing  [for] 
fliirht. —  (5.  Cicero  thought  {statnere)  \.\r\X.  this  principle*' in  the  aclminis- 
tralion*'^  of  the  province  was  the  corre(!t*^  one.—  7.  Cirsar  resolved  {stKfti- 
ere)  to**  carry  out  this  i)lan  in  the  administration  of  piis]  province. — 
8.  Pompey's  opinion  greatly*^  differed  from  mine. —  9.  Ihe  Peripatetics*" 
and  Academicians*'  diticrcd  in  terminology*^  [l)ut]  ngreed*'  in  substance-'". 

—  10.  Ciesar  laid  this  matter""  over"'-  to  {in)  the  next  {posterns)  day.— 
11.  Cicero  knew  that  his  departure"'  would  offend  Ciesar.—  12.  The  jury^* 
did  not  agree.—  13.  After'^  this  address""  had  been  made,  the  opinions  of 
all  agreed"'  at  once"*. —  V^.  Pythaiioras  believed  that  the  world  constitut- 
e^l"*  a  numerical  figure*^". —  ^14.  Posidonius  believed  that  dying  [persons] 
had  the  gift  of  prophecy'^'.-  15.  Chrysii)pus  thought  that  all  things  were 
made""^  for  the  sake  of  men.  * 

XV.  Impkhfects  of  uekeiienck  (to  inner  action)  ^  584. —  1.  When 

1  CerneitT^^s  i^  ordtr  of  battle,  by  the  adjcciive  in.'ilrintas  (accessory  predicue).— 
3  by  the  adjective  Vinn'nins.—  *  coufiniuTre.—  ^  i-ui)siiiium.—  «  lieiider  :  Ftannq  for 
(dative) ///ri/-  rt/mt/ (receptus).— '  ^o  >^H  the  example/or  f^metfiinf/,  i^'\i;uuma\'n:ili\ix  rei 
dare.— "  cormi.— *  atiiinadvertcrc  (al>l.itive  atisoliite).—  i»t<'rior.—  "  t-e.se  recip<re.— 
1'^  Render  :    Le-^t  (lie)  f/iet/  jniq/it  t/^  oppnti.<td  icitkin^  etc.—  '^  niiniitio.—  »<  nracipit are. 

—  »»  Render  :  from  a  brednfico/k  uminiiio)  of  ten  feet.—  »«  Render  :  icanfull  of  diimidcr 
(tumiiltus.)-  JT  terror.—  ^^tUira.—  i"  Render:  For  these  cfieck".—  -"  Render:  tfie-^^  no 
great  evils.—  21  hie—  2a  ijui)si(ruim.—  '■'3  i^uecurrere.-  »<  Render  :  which  brought 
(afferre)  xafety  (saliis)  to  his  armij.—  -*  use  tlie  form  of  a  concessive  ehiuse  (althougli  he 
thonfjlit-~ij<i).—  '^\W\n\^r--  i\vsnr  opim/red  (\no\)M\-)  most  (niaxime).—  '"  coirere.- 
2«  Render:  after  hanug  collfcted  '-Idp-*  (:il)l.iiive  at)solnte) /o  r;w,s\  etc.  —  2»  Render :  He 
feared  the  dtlay  (mora)V/  lIuU  thing,  anri  the  length  (lonirinqnitas)  of  finie—  8<*  nolle.— 
3»  alilativc  absolute.— 3-^  more  tr(K>p^,iniKUhi.-  3^  parare.— s*  the  Pompejan  party.  Ponipe- 
jani.—  35  Kendt-r  :  that  Oaul  .should  be  tempted^  teiiiptare).—  3«  by  tjcistimare  with  the 
j^'erinidive  of  xubiirere.- ^''  that  the  passaire  should  be  subjected.— 3»  ;>a•s•.^■rtf7«  Oivr  the 
sea,  naviiratio.—  3»  to  the  perils  of  ttie  winter  season  =  to  wintir.- *"  Render  :  TJjat 
those  (thinirs)  which  he  had  ascertained  (a)7/'^*'>w/'<?)  ^tiould  be  concealed  (dissimnldre) 
l)y  him.—  ••»  ratio.—  *'-'  by  administrilre.—  "^  optimus.—  *«  thai  tliis  jilan  {ratio)  should 
be  carried  out  (obmrare)  by  him  in  the  administration,  etc.—  ••'  multum.—  <«  Peripa- 
tetiei.—  *t  Aeademici.—  48  in  termiiiologi/,  vocal)uli!*.—  **  conscntlre.—  ^»  re  ij)sa.— 
51  res.—  »2  ((,  lay  over,  diflerre.—  '=*  profectio.—  ^*  Render:  The  opinions  (sententue)  of 
the  twelve-men  did  not  agree  (congruere),—  ^^  ablative  absolute.—  ^»  oratio.—  ^^  in  iinum 
coni^ruere.—  »«  gtatim.—  »»  consjtrirccx  —  •»  numerus.—  «'  to  have  Vie  gift  of  propliecy , 
diviuare,—  ""  to  be  made^  nasci. 


MurCna  returned  to  the  citv,he  intimated'  [by  it]  that  there  he  would  be 
of  greater  use-  to  his  country  than  anywhere  else^— 2.  You  acted  un- 
wisely* when  you  were  a  candidate"  for  the  praetorship"  agamst  such  a 
strong  rival'.—  3.  When  Alexander  declared  war  against  {Bat)  Darius, 
iie  did  not  mean"   to  «rratify"   the   Greeks,  but   his    own   ambition'  — 
4  When  the  English"  demanded'-  a  tribute''  from  these  provinces  they 
seemed,  according  to  the  letter,  to  demand'*  a  tribute,  but  m  tact    they 
demanded  that  we  should  impress'"  the  mark'^  of  servitude  on''  ourselves. 
—  \R  70]  •  5.  When   the   defendants  had  come  to  Syracuse,  Apronius 
who''^*was  Ri^pointed-"  as  judge  by   Verres,  told  [them]  that  they  had 
acted^'  against  the   edict  {cdidam).      They  asked,  'in  what  respect^^  r» 
lie  answered  that  he  would  tell  [them]  at  the  tria^-^    Apronius  took^ 
Artemidorus  and  Tlepolemus  as  complainants  in  the  name  ot  the  people   . 
The  defendants  asked  in  what  form  he  wotdd  rule"^"   the  question  at  issue, 
lie  answered,  'If  it  shall  be  proved-'"'  that  [theyj  acted  against  the  edict  . 
Timarchides  advised-"  [the  defendants]  to  compromise-^".   They  peremp- 
torily refused^".— C.  The  complainant^'  asserted^"^  that  Manlius     was  in 
pos.sessi(m  of  an  estate  belonging  to  him  {i.e.,  the  complainant).     Ihe 
defendant  denied  [it].     He  (/.  e.,  the  defendant)  said  he  would  prove  that 
he  held  that  estate  from  the  [lealj  owner^*;  he  asked=^  for  a  referee   .- 
7   That  matter  came  up=*'  in  the  Senate.  Volcatius  denied  that  the  duum- 
virs had  legally-  that  right-  which  they  claimed*".     The  tribunes  inter- 
ceded*', [and]  so  the  matter  was  dropped*-.     I  [now]  introduced     >our 
atlair;  llortensius  made  the  report**.     His  report*"  was  received    wi  h 
l.iud  cries  of  disapprobation  l)y  many.     The  consuls  neither  assented 
nor  did  they  objecl*»very  much*^  After""  this  debate"'  had  been  Pi-otracted 
till  nbrhtfall"'  without^*  being  fiuished"%  the  Senate  adjourned  .-8.  It 
what  Trebonius  just  now  mentioned"'  is  true,  I  believe  that  you  wdl  not 
make  the  iournev'^  without  great  danger.—  9.  lousaid  correctly-^   that  it 
is  exceediiK'-ly  dillicult  to  disabuse""  the  soul  from  the  habit  ot  the  eyes. 
!1  10    in    Uie   same  letter  you  asked"^  [me]  not  to""^  detan-  these  men 
[any]  longer  from  [their]  work,  and  added  that  you  intended     to   come 
over«^  yourself.—  11.  Hortensius  said  that  you  were  engaged^"  with  writ- 
"  1  si-Miifbiire  —  '"i  to  be  Of  oreater  use.  plus  prodesse.-  3  in  any  other  plac-e.—  *  inii.ru- 

[HViu  what  7esp.ct,  quid  (as  object  offacere).-  ^  }'' J^'^'f^J^'-fl'^^^^^^ 

because  it  belongs  to  the  judicial  transaction,  ""P^y/"'??  ^y^^.*^^^  "f^7*>^^^^^^^^  recimra- 

'r";r;".W ;         •bi^inni^VoTevery  judicial  rule  i^tnMla)  ^I^^^ ^to^f^^};' 
.s  aclm.fuere.-  -  tbat^.n  .hey  .liould  compn^^^^^^^^  &  felstate  (^JX.) 

^,.;•em»/on^^  perne^are --^c^tor.-^  ^l^  ^^,,__  3«  arbiter  q,;!  rem 

was  possessed  1)V  M.ii  lius.—      uominii.   t  ,.^,ir.»  -  «o-pre'»  on  this  matter  in 


possesseu  ny  mamius.— ^^  (umiinii..  t'^;  .       ...^ ,  _  a«rere)  on  this  matter  in 

cocjnJ.sceret.-  37  Ren<  er  :  Ac  ion  was  '"V^k  ttia^f-  ^«  w^  assumed  to  them- 

the  Seiiaie.-3'^accor.iui.-to  tht^aA  >.-^^^  '  .'I^i^/.r^^  43  proponere.- <Mo  make  a  re- 
gelves.-  *i  intercedeie.-  *-  to  be  doppf;  "-^f'J^-  u  ^oa'damored  (reclamflre)  violent- 
port,  referre.-  *'  oratu,.-  *;.K^"J^''  =   ;^^  '''i^'^^Serc  -  *»  v<Ude^  Ablative  abso- 

ly  (vehemei.ter)  ^/.J'^^/'^-;^,  „,7;^^!^^  T?{-  -  ""^mue,  p.  189  No.  3 ;  p.  188,  No.  {b).- 
lute.—  5icontroversia-»^(lnc(T^;-.       57  '  ommeinorilre  -  ^^  to  make  a  joui^iey,  pro- 

««occupitum  e.-se,  ?ri/'A  abl. 


372 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


inir,  find  tolcV  [mo]  that  ho.  had  seen  you  twice*  at  Cumne  when  yon  were 
buryini;^  [your]  brother  Marcus. —  13.  Attains  said  that  it  was  more 
j)le;isant  to  make  a  Iriend  than  to  have  one. —  13.  Philip,  Alexander's 
father,  saiil  that  it  was  possible  to  take*  auy^  fortress  to  which  a  donkey' 
laden'  with  gold  could"  climb  up". 

XVI.      PllKDICATFLS  OF  HABIT  WITH  .W(7r,  CtC.  (>5  oSo). —  1.  JulluS  C»TSar 

did  not  foriiet  anything  except^"  injuries  [received]. —  2.  It  was  custom- 
ary with  the  8i)artans  to  use  red  tunics"  in  battle  to'-  conceal"  the  blood" 
of  [tiieirj  wounds. —  3.  The  ancient  Massilians  used  to  give  to  strangers'^ 
who'"  were  leaving"  their  city,  loans  in  money"  to"  be  returned  to  tlieiu 
in  the  lower  worhr". —  4.  The  Cimbrians  had'-'  the  habit  to  exull'^'^  in 
battle,  [but]  to  waiP^  in  sickness. —  5.  Tiie  Laccdtvmonians,  before  they 
went'^*  to  battle'-'^,  used  to  arouse'^"  [their]  courage"  by  the  sounds"  of 
the  flute-"  —  G.  The  Persians  observed  the  habit^**  not  to^'  see^'-  their  chil- 
dren before  these  {t/tei/)  had  comi)leted^^  their  seventh  year. —  7.  In  those 
times  men  used  to  talk  more  bravely  for  their  liberty  than  they  fought^* 
for  it. —  8.  When  Epaminondas  had  come  into  a  company^^  in  which 
either  pul)lic  atfairs'-*"  or  philosophical  subjects"  were^"  discussed^",  he 
never  used  to  leave  it*"  before  the  discussion  had"  closed". —  i).  In  those 
times  the  Athenians  used  to  expel  from  the  State  by  ostracism*^  those  who 
seemed"  to  be  dangerous^-'  to  llie  liberty  of  the  re|)ul)lic. 

XVII.  Impki{F1-:cts  of  habit  without  solar,  etc. —  1.  Atticus  so  con- 
ducted himself*"  as*'  to  seem  on  terms  of  equality*"  both  with  the  low- 
est and  with  the  greatest. —  2.  The  Laced;emonians  always  had  two  kings 
from  tlie  two  families  of  Procles  and  Euryslhenes.  It  was  not  allowed*" 
that  a  member^"  of  the  one  of  these  families  sliould  succeed  in  the  })lace 
ot  a  king  of  the  other  family.  The  oldest  son  of  the  last  king  in  pos- 
session had  the  first  claim^'  to  succession.  If  a  king'"*^  had  deceased  with- 
out male  issue,  then  the  next  of  kin  was  elected. —  3.  At  Athens  those 
who  were^^  condemned  [to  death]  in  a  public  trial''*  were  delivered^^  to 
the  board  of  eleven^''  for  execution^'. —  4.  Whatever  was  a.^ked  of  Atti- 
cus^%  he  [always]  gave  [his]  promises'"  after  mature  reflection  as  to  their 

»  Narrare.— !*  ite?'um  (freqiiuntly  U!«ed  witU  llie  force  of  bui,  hecauKo  what  has  been  done 
a  second  time  niur»t  have  been  done  twice).—  3  etlene.—  *  expii.'niTre.—  ^  Kender:  All 
fortresftes  (castelhwn). —  ^  afellus.-- '' onustup. —  ^  not  rendered;  the  finite  verb  often 
hicliuliiijjf  tlje  meaning,' of  ;^.v.sf.— «ascendere.— 1"  ni.<i.—  "  tunica  rubra.— >2  ^,;  \\'\\\\ 
gerundial.—  i3  dispinmhlre.—  '*  cnior.—  -*  hospejj.—  i*by  a  i)articiple.— ^^  cgredi  ex. 

—  1»  pecuiiije  mutuie.—  i"  Kender  :  uiiich  were  to  be  returned  (siil>juiictive).—  soapud 
inferos.— '■^1  By  tf«e  with  dative.—  "-  exultari-.- '-'^  himentari.—  -'  desceiulerc  ad  (x'/ft- 
jmtrf). —  25  by  diinicdn.—  -^  inUamniilre.— -'  aiiimi.—  '^^*  concentn.—  -"  tibia. —  so  fus^ti- 
tfltum.—  31  ut.—  33  aspicere.—  ^;'  inipiere  {siit»jiinct.).—  ^*  'they  fought '  must  be  placed 
in  thepame  form  of  tiie  verb  as  '  to  talk'.—  ^^  circnhi!».—  3*  pnljhc  a  fairs,  respublica,— 
3'  philosophical  mhjtcts,  piiilosopliia.—  3»  subjunctive.—  3»  Render  :  it  was  disputed  on 
public  afairs,  etc.—  *"  difcedere  ex  (ind*).—  "O  Kubjunc^ive.—  ■*"■'  the  discussion  closes^ 
sermo  ad  rtnem  perdncitnr.-  -»3  ostracif^inusi. —  •**  hul)junctive. —  ■**  Kenrkr  :  Those  J'rvtn 
(ex)  whom  the  liberty  of  the  republic  seemed  to  be  attle  to  take  a-apere)  so7ne  damage  (detri- 
mentum;  by  partitive  jzeidtive).-  '»«t»e  ^erere.—  ■"  ut.—  *»  Render  :  that  he  seemed  com^ 
7/iofi  (coniinfinis)  to  Ihe  lowest  (infiniuf)  and  a  peer  (par)  to  the  foremost  (pnncept').—  •♦»  li- 
<(>re. —  ^"  Render:  That  (intin.  clatise)  a  kini.'  should  l)e  made  out  of  the  one  {alter)  of 
the?e  [families]  into  the  place  of  the  ottier  fanuly.—  ^'  Render  :  In  the  first  pla  re  (pri- 
muin)  consideration  was  had  (raiiOnem  habere)  of  him  who  wa-<  (subjunct.)  the  oldest  out 
of  the  children  of  the  one  (\\W.)  who  had  dn-eased  (deccdere,  subj. )  [while]  reigninrj  (reunare). 

—  *•■*  Render  :  Jf  he  (i)*)  had  not  It  ft  (subjunct.)  7nak  isftue  (viriUs  sexuf),  then  was  electtd 
who  loas  (ful)j.)  the  next  by  relationship  (propinquita;*).—  "  participle.—  '♦  pnt)lice.— 
^5  tradere.— S8  see  Part  I.,  p.  14,  5.—^^  tiuppliciuni.—  «•»  This  attribute  of  the  claus-e  must 
be  made  tlie  grammatical  .suDject  of  the  principal  sentence  {Atticus  promised  what  was 
asked— Yog^vii).—  •'-"  togive promis(S,  promittere. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


373 


«orupulous  fulfilment'.- 5.  Dionysius,  from  fear^  of  razors^  used  to  burn 
hTs"  beaid«  by  llLrhtecP   cllarcoal^-  G.  Scipio  Africanus   was  W(>nt  to 
tie-  occasionally^»  a  season  of  rest"  from  his  magnificent'^  l^^V^^^^J" 
;    s»   an  lfn>inihe  crowds  of  human  being.-,  to  retreatMo  solitude-, 
1  it'"'   ()  a  port-  7.  The  battle-order  of  the  Roman  army  [always]  con- 
sisted (  f    hree  lines'*.     Tlie  first  line'"  was  called  '  hastati  ,  who  entered 
m o   1  •  combai-  first  of  all.    These  were  followed-  bv  those  wh<)  bore 
le  n  me^'principes '.     The  third  line  were  the  '  triarii'  veteran^^  sol- 
iersot'  tried'*  bravery.    If  the  Miastati'  could  not  beat-  the  enemy, 
he'  pine  1^^^^     receivx'd- them  into  the  places'--  left  open  for  them  in 
u^n-  ranks      Then  the  combat  belonged^«   to  the  'principes',  and  the 
« listaii "  IVn'med  the  second  line^".     If  neither  the  '  principes    were  sue- 
ces^^i^,  they  gradual^-  fell  back'"^  on  tl-  li-"  of  the  maru.  ^^H^^^^^^ 

i^  r-  ^T^^  ;;S  '"^'^  dd"  ^b^^w^^of 'an^Un^  ul^r^di- 
bie  stnd^msn  ss^^^^^  H  b7gan*»  to  study  by  lai;.p.light*'  directly*"^  after  (a) 
nidiid*'  Before  davli|ht**  he  reported*^  to  the  emperor  \  espasianus 
who  lkewise*«  made  nse  of  the  night  for  his  labors^  Having  re  urned*^ 
(  e  he  devoted^  the  rest*"  of  the  day  to  studies.  Even  during-  dinner 
re^d  a  book  and  took  notes-  ;  for  he  never  read^^  anything  witlH)ut ' 
tak  iVi  note^  When  he  travelled-,  a  secretary-  accompanied  him^«  with 
?U    olc  ai^^^^^^^^^  whose  hands,  in  ^  "t^M-,  were  pro  ected^   hj 

lo       sl^^^^^^^^^       thai"»  not  even  cold  weather"  might  mterfere"    with  his 
studied    The'  works-  which  he  left,  comprised  one  hundred  and  sixty 

volumes'*.  vrTURF-PiiE^EKT  (72.  73).— 1.  We  shall  know   in 

,«^ a      \"  u'u'.h^mlu'^^Ci  W^sUau'wander  abou^  aestUu.c- 
^V  I    mr  wives"  iiml  cl.ildiin  —  8.  SluiU  I  lemuin,  or  shall  I  depart ' 
S,rol v"  I  s  all  oHVcl  n.Uung  wUli.mt  n.onoy  and  wdhout  an  anvu^ 
;    '>_4   All  lUis  v.iu  «ill  learn"  (rom  Pompey's  letter.- 5  T)  at  lime 

*v!;,'-c,;n.e'a,.l"  rapidly'Moo  -  C    TLc.u,  ^'^■-^  ^  ^J'Tu^e '"  n" 
adapted"  to  this  purpose'"  than  I  am—  ..  Nothing  will  ut  uonc 


374 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES. 


that  matter^  aG:ainst  CiT3sar's  will'. —  8.  Afterwards^  I  sliall  write*  many 
letters  to  our  friends,  in  which  I  will  most  earnestly*  commend*  you 
and  our  Tullia. —  'J.  13y  my  care  thy  father  shall  be  relieved'  from  all 
fear. —  10.  When,  I  pray  3'ou,  and  by  whose  order"  has  all  this  been 
changed? — 11.  Please,  do  grant"  this  permission'"  to  mo",  to  pertbrm" 
this  business  in  my  [own]  way'^ —  12.  I  shall  stay"  here  till  my  brother 
arrives. 

XIX.  FUTUIlE-rERFECT  IN  INDEPENDENT  SENTENCES  (U.  74). —  1.  YoUV 

sail'^  will  have  lasted  long  enough  if  you  return'**  liome  by  the  tenth  of 
September. —  2.  The  enemy  will  have  routed"  our  trooi)S  by  the  lime 
{(hnn)  the  reinforcements  arrive. —  3.  By  the  time  you  read  this  letter 
I  shall  have  made  up  my  mind"*  on  thtit  subject"*. —  4.  That  explanation-'" 
will  not  contribute'-'  much  to  elucidating"^  the  subject. — 5.  My  brother  will 
return  in  two,  or,  at  the  farthest"^,  in  three  days. —  0.  This  will  give"*  the 
greatest  pleasure  to  all  of  us. 

XX.  PoTENTI.\L  FUTUUE.  H.  7."),  (A)  WITHOUT  POTENTIAL  AUXILIARIES. 

1.  Please"''^  send  word^"  to  my  brother  Quiutus  that  no  letter  of  his'-''  has 
yet'-"*  been  handed^"  to  me. —  2.  Send  my  love  to  your  wife'". —  J3.  Do  not 
send  any  letter  to  me^'  tilP"- 3-011  hear^^  from"  me  [again]. —  4.  If  you  look"^ 
at  nature, you  [can]not  doubt  that  [there]  is  somemaker^*  of  the  universe^'. 

—  5.  If  you  examme'"  the  case  attentively^",  3'()U  |  must]  acknowledge*" 
that  the  accused  has  been  justl}'""  condemned. —  G.  Whv,  then*^  would 
you  attempt  to  prove  an  opinion  which  it  is  impossible"  to  uphold  ? 

B.  (With  potentlxl  AUXiLiA/iiEs). —  7.  Neither  friendship,  ncn-  jus- 
tice can  at  all  exisl^*,  excej>t*'  the\'  are  sought**  for  their  own  sake''^ — 
8.  Since*"  Sulpicius  refuses*"  to  be  retained^"  in  this  case,  I  would  wish^' 
that  Antonius  [might]  be  the  attorney'''^ —  9.  If  this  rumor  should**  be 
confirmed,  we  must  depart  for  Svracuse  as  soon  as  i)ossible**. —  10.  It  will 
be  sate  to  say*^  that  Ti!)crius  is  better**'  informed^'  about  the  matter  than 
he^"  is  willing  to  acknowledge^". 

C.  (With  ok  witiiout  potential  auxiliaries). —  11.  We  ought""  not 
to  place  faith  in  the  words  of  those  who  have  often"  treacherously""'  de- 
ceived"^ us.  But  the  Carthaginians  have  already  very  often  deceived  us. 
Hence  it  would  {will)  be  the  greatest  foll^'  to  have  [any]  hope  in  their 
good  faith*'*. —  12.  If  it  were  true  that"^  m:in  has  be(,'n  created  by  nature, 
nature  itself  must  (will)  be  endowed""  with  a  soul  and  reason. —  13.  Even 
rude  and  illiterate"^  [men]  acknowledge,"'*  a  moral  power  and  duty,  [and] 

*  Kos.— ■''  voliiiit.'i!*. — 3(ieiii,|e^ — 4  conscribcre.— *clili<.'('iiler.— "comuieiidarc— '^  lilHJnliv. 

—  3  hy  whom  [nsj  an  author  (auctor). —  *  pm'bGre. —  '"  venia. —  '»  ut.—  ^'^  perlict're. — 
^3  ratio. —I*  coinmorilti.— 1°  Render  :  Youwill  hare  sailed  long  enouqh. — »*  reverti  (  future- 
present). — >''  fuirilie.— •*•  toniake  up  one\t  julnd,  siatiicrc— '"  n-s.  — 20  t-xplanatlo. — ^'  nmfi- 
cere. — 22  iHnytrrirc  (gerundvil).—'^'^  siiinimini.— ^*  alVt'rre.—  25  si-  (loutiactt-d  from  n  ri.v), 
to  be  placed,  after  tlfe  first  words»  of  the  .•*eiitence.— 2«  to  >iend  word  to  xoimltody.  aliqiiem 
certiOrein  facere.—  2^  ab  eo  —  2^  by  dmn  \u  connection  wit!»  '  no  '.  See  §  4C)8. —  2»  uffern-. 

—  30  Kender:  You  will  salute  ijrn/r  wi/V  (inaterfamilias)  by  my  vame. —  ^^  Render:  You 
rcill  not  have  sent  (dare)  to  me  a  l-tter. —  '2  diim.—  ^3  future-prer'ent.—  ^*  de. —  ^^  intiiOri 
aliquid  (in  fiititre-pre^ent). —  ^a  ariifex. —  ^"^  miiversiis  iniindu<. —  ^s  coirno^ccre  (future 
perfect). —  ^»  diii._r,.iitius.—  ■»<>  concertere. —  ^'  jure.  —  ^"^  iiritur.—  *^  ich'irh  can  (poj-fsi-  in  the 
suhjuncfive)  be  uplceld  (tiiCri)  by  no  means.—  **  esse.—  <=  nisi  (u'ith  subjunct.).—  <*  e.\pe- 
tere. —  ■•'  ipsie  per  se. —  ■*«  quoniam. —  ■•*  nejjjlre. —  *"  to  be  retained  in  a  ca.-^e,  caiisam 
puscipere. —  ^»  velle. —  *^  patrOnui*.  —  ^^  futtiri'-present. —  **  primo  quoque  tempore. — 
^•'  by  oiwrtlre. —  "  plus. —  ^^  to  tte  informed  nlx)ut  a  matter,  de  re  novissc. —  *<*  ipse. — 

*^  concedf're. —  *»  Render  :    Who  hare deceived  ?*•*,  to  the  speech  of  those  we  ouqht  (de- 

bSre)  «0^/0  hare  faith.—  «>  sjepenumero.—  «2  per  fidem. —  "^  fallerc. —  «*  good  faith,  fides. 

-  **  Render  :  If  man  has  been  created  (procreilre).—  «"  pra?ditu8.—  «'  in'doctus.—  ""  con- 
cede re. 


ENGLISH    EXERCISES. 


375 


fhP  wise  would  not»?—  14.  The  defence'  should  first  proye^  the  integ- 
itv  of  the  lif^[of  the  accused]  if  [this]  can  be  done^ ;  if  it  cannot,  the 
de^nde.  si  ould  proceed  to  show"  [his  client's]  inexperience',  youth  and 
w.  U  of  education«.  If  he  is  estopped-  by  the  bad  moral  character'"  [of 
^V\,!Tl?pi  Olid  first"  trv^-^  to  establish  the  foct'-*  that  false  rumors 
^^c  'miad"  and  shou  d  dvvell'^  on  the  theme"  of  the  unreliability''  of 
n,mo;T     If'«n(^^^^^  [things]  will  avaiP,  he  shcmld  make  use 

rumors.        11       iumic      '^'^  ^^  '      ,    K    .  ,    ..0,^    u;.,„22    tUof  b*.  wn«j  not  ad- 


'^Tnv    of    S-  s  ol  <  be 7,  w  "  on  an  acre",  but  in  some  locali.  es»'^ 
n     ,1c  more"'  or  ess     Hence»  lhnne,-s«  should  observe  the  custom  »  ns 
?o   Ic^u-  ntity  of  seed  n  a  Riven  locality.-  16.  A  judge  must  not  take 
lit      fn       tlVe  parties-.-  17.  We  should  (oportere)  not  f^-^P  /*;'!^^  " 
w   ifl   we  cannot  return".- 18.  Boys  will  learn  more  (/)i«m)  iri  public 
elools^'  than  by  private  instrucli.m  at  home";  for  at  home  they  wt 
lear°  only     hat"  il  taught"  to  THEM  (/;»<•),  [but]  m  ^c  'ools  also  wl  .at  [is 
n,"it1    loothers-19.  A  person"  who  is  goiu!:  to  inflict   punishment 
vde  in  an"e';iir  never  k^eep  that  middle  way"  which  'S  between  too 
mucli    ml  fo.  li  tie".-  20.  Such  a  knowledge",  in  my  opinion  at  leas 
;"•)',;".  is'of  .m  use".-  21.  He  will  be  justly';  <^^^'^^. 
irni.  nli-n^iive  is^^  the  contempt"  ot  pleasure.—  22.  Unly  lie     isa  j,oou  ciu 
m^wl  oo     erves-  the  laws/not  in  his-,  but  in  [l^Bjcountry  sinteres  .- 
2  J  W    h^"*   he  wise^-  wealth  is  a  servant""   with  the  loo  ish"'  it  is  the  mas- 
;;.«'_  04    I  would  ask"  vou  to  phice  no"^ taith  m  that  hope. 

v'^    n/prxni  NT  fut^^       Hi  70)  —  1.  We  shall  take"^  any""  provis- 
X\I.  Dependknt  FLiLiu.  Vf  vou  r,ubliclv  pionounce"'  these  views, 
ions  which  we  may  fiinl-— 2.  It  >o^\  P^i^^.^'J'  •?   if  von  jro  to  see'»  that 
you  will  [.Iierelnlattack^^^^^^ 

^'"r&Mll  d       "t  rtVou  alt,  reUier"  shun"  the  iompanj-'  of  these 
_  4.   J  ou  w  11  "'•''.../         ,  ,51,.  ,, ,  (sj)  taking  tetter  care"  for  yow 

h,:;hr-G^Wl.:.     il    bettow'-bwK-fitsVsliL^^ 

[aiul]  af.envards"  the  useful-.-  7.  If  these  [things]  are  evils,  [the  one] 


rerbK  -  *"  to  address  a  court  or  monm,  Ts  f.;  a  _  2«  r  ticm.-  ^»  serere.-  ^^  jugerum.- 
_  25  crimen.-  2«  §  259.-  "  rnodm^.-  I'^^l^;-  3«  Render  :  how  much  in  eeery  region 
32  locus.-  "  amplHi*».-  ^*  qtiare.-  ';^'"?','';'!;.t;  .  .^_!  38  [j  i-mntes.-  ^»  benet\cium.- 
/.  sow  (gerundial)  /m.  t^'t^^'^'^^'^al^S^^ithin  tlie  walls  (parietes)  teacher.- 
*o  refenc-  *'  Uidus.-  y  Render  •;tiyamiait  i>'\ov  •  Never  an  anqry  one  whowiU 


,resent.-  ^\<-onteniptio.- -  >  c  t„>m  -  ^  .oR^udvv  :  in  servl'ude.-- 
5T  not  to  him,  but  to  [his]  <^ountry.-^JaY>ui\.--  ^^-^''J;,  auferre.-  ««  any  .  .  .which, 
«isiultus.-«2i„   mpeno.-^ro^^areex^-^  ^^      honestumque  ipsum.- 

by  guicungue.-  «^  declamre—  ««  impu!xu5ic  -    ,3'P^^  _  74  f^jrere.-'^  soc.etas.- 

'otogo  to  see,  convemre.--'i  poi^cre.-  '' V/  '«7/V5r"rS?w<7  aliquid  diUgenter  curSre. 
TH-rati8simuraalicnifacere.-";o/GA-^.7W^/("^  .i^vliat  is,  etc. 

^_78  pra-bcre.— 'M^euder:  ivhat  ts  {will  be)  mcestaiy.         ikiuuc. 


376 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


377 


who  is  [involved]  in  thorn,  cannot  bo  happv^ —  8.  You  -\vilJ  obtain  all 
\'()U  (losiio-.— 1).  Will  the  wi^e  Innff.]  be  hai)pv  if  they  lack  [ihtirj  cye- 
sii^^ht^  1*  They  will  be  even  then." —  10.  I  shall  not  be  remiss^  in  anvthini^» 
which  it  is  possible  to  foresee. —  11.  If  you  propose  this,  you   \vill   not 
make  peojile  believe  it'. —  13.  We  shall  make  niistakos**  as  lonir  as  we  live" 
on  the  earth. —  V,].  If  the  price  of  bread-stuifs  should  be  higher'",  you  had 
better  {irill  best)  take"  your  city-establishment'-  over  to  [our]  estate  near 
Arpi". — 14.  I  slvtill  send  you  word  as  soon  as  (d)  lie  has  left". — 15  I 
Bhall  let  you  know"  when  I  make  up  my  mind"  as  to"  nieetinir  him  on 
the  road,  or  expectiuL^  him  here.— IG.  1  will  write  you  how  I  shall  find 
matters'"  after  my  arrival'"  at  Home.—  17.  Immediately  after  my  return-* 
to  the  cMy,  I  shall  attend"  to  all  that  concerns  your  interest^^ —  18.  I  will 
follow  the  advice  which  he  may  give  me  concerning  (ff<^)  this  atfai^2^ — 
v.).  Whatever  quantity'-*  you  may  add  to  it-*,  it  will  not  be  changed  in 
kind-^—  20.  Whatever-^'  will  be  decreed  about  me,  I  shall  bear-'"  "it  with 
that  mind-'"  with   which  I  ought  {dtberc)  to  bear  [it].—  21.  I  shall  not 
touch''"  these  [things]  before  I  have  seen  you.—  22.  I  shall  not  depart  be- 
fore I  have  linished^'  this  work.—  23.  I  shall  have  linished  this  work  be- 
fore you  depart.— 24.  I  shall   depart  after  lirst'^  finishinir   this  work.— 
2.i.  Before  I  depart,  I  will  lirst  finish  this  work. —  2().  Heibre  I  proceed^^* 
to  defend  myself,  I  will  brielly  state'*  those  [things]  from  which  all  these 
chnrges"  have  arisen'®. 

XXII.  Tenses  in  epistolatiy  style  ^  589.  [Epistolnrif  fense-Uo  be  used 
icJwnevtr  admissible].—  1.  L.  Clodius,  tlie  tribune  elect"',  is  with  me.  It 
seems  to  me  that  he  suspects,  somethino="^  which  vou  disliked'"  may  have 
been  insinuated''"  to  you  about  him.  Hut  he  speaks  in  the  highest  terms 
of  you'',  and'^  I  would  ask''  you  earnestly''  to  believe  rather  me  than 
the  one'"  that  has  slandered'"  him  with''  you.  Your  letter  has  just  been 
handed  to  me''*.  I  did  not  know  Dolabella  had  so  many  troops  with 
him'".  I  am  on  the  point  of  starting  for  Capua.  There  I  intend  to  stay  to- 
morrow, when''"  I  shall  fully  answer  3'our  letter.  Heneventum  on' the 
IGth  of  September. 

2.  [Modern-  letter,  Addison  Xo.  LXXVJ.].  October  i:]^/^  ITll. 
Dear  ISru  :  I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  your  last  kind  letter 
and  invitation,  Avhich  1  heartily  wisiri  could  accept;  but  you  know  I  have 
put  my  hand  to  the  i)l()ugh,  and  have  already  been  absent  from  my  work 


1  Bt'fitns.—  2  vclle.—  3  to  lack  one's  fiyfsirjtit,  KoiiHilHisc.irere  ociih'nim.—  *  IheyicUlhe 
even  then  =  etiam.—  ^  /o />f  n/niss,  Jalli.—  «  lieiitler:  i/i  tho<€  [thinqx]  iiiiich  will  be  iMe 
to  l>e  foreseen  {\>ro\'u\^ro).—  ^  Rrndor  :  You  null  not  mikp  faith.—  »  to  make  jnUtakt.^,  er- 
iSre.—  »  u>-.«>e.—  i"  If  Ijread-^tuf^  (aDiiOiia,  sinfj.)  will  be  dearer  (canl^).—  ^^tjetake  yoiir- 
fst-lfi-^v.  cotiferre)  witk  thr  fomiln  to.  etc.—  12  fainilia  d.  e.,  corvi).—  la  rniulus  Arj)Tiias. 

—  1*  proficitici.—  13  ciTtiOn-m  facoiv.—  >«  to  make  up  one's  mind,  constitiu'rc—  i^  lU-n- 
(Icr :  wh^tk  r  (iitriim)  I  shall  vieel  (<»l)viam  i)ro(o<tere)  Mm.  or,  etc.—  1«  Jteiuter  :  what  1 
shall  have pef'oind  (perspiccre).—  1«  when  I  sliall  l)ave  como  to  Rome.—  20  itei,(irr :  As 
soon  as  (>iiniilat(|iio)  J  shall  hart  returned.—  -'  oiurin-  ali<|ui(l.—  --  I{i'ii(ler  :  Those  [thiiu/s] 
7v/iich  will  thlmi'i  (prrtinere)  to  your  adrantaqe.—  -'^  what  to  inc  at)out  tliis  thin;,'  Ik*  sliall 
have  irivi-n  advice,  that  I  will  follow.—-*  qiiantumcniKnie.—  -'  eo  (i.  ^.,  ud  huuc  locum, 
ad  haiic  rem).—  '-«  Rcufler  :  It  will  remain  in  its  kind  (s,'eniis).—  27  quidquid.--  2«  ferre. 

—  -'•'  aiiiinii.-.—  30  aritii<j:ere. —  3i  peiiic'Te.—  32  priuj^  __  33  inHtitnere.—   3*  iinri;lio. 

3*  criiiieii.—  38  to  arise,  iiasci.—  37  (U.s^ijruntu-.—  3-  by  infinitive  clause.-  3»  nioleste  ferre 
(suhj.).—  <o  to  in<in uate  sameJhinq  to so)n^lK)dii .  deferre  alitiiiid  ad  aliqu.-ni.-  *'  Itender  : 
He  sj)taks  and  thinks  (sentire)  most f/iendly  (amicus»  of  you.—  *-  qiiare.-  *^  peterc  ah 
aliquo.—  **  etiam  atquc  etiam.—  *^' than  the  one,  quam'  ilji  neseio  ciii,—  <«  male  dioere 
ahcui  (subjunct.).—  *''  apud  —  <«  reddere.—  4»  that  Dolahclla  so  much  (adeo)  abounded 
In  troops.—  ^^froni  where  I  shall  more  accurate' y  annoer  (res<crii)ere  ad)  yonrletUr. 


one  entire  month.  I  hope  you  will  not  think  of  staying  in  the  country 
so  lono-  as  you  mention.  Sure  it  will  be  worth  your  while  to  hear  the 
peace  treated  in  the  house  of  Commons.  If  you  will  be  my  lodger,  I 
will  take  a  house  in  Kensingt(m  square,  and  furnish  you  a  chamber.  I 
send  you  enclosed  a  paper  of  Abel  Roper's.  We  talk  of  nothmg  but 
l)eace  I  am  heartilv  glad  you  have  your  health,  and  question  not  but 
you  would  find  the  Kensington  air  as  good  as  the  AVorlley.  I  am  ever 
with  the  greatest  sincerity,  etc. 

Paraphrase. 

Jo«cph  Addison  to  his  Wortlov  UosTphus  Addiso  Vortlejo  si/o  S.  7).) 
Know  that  thou  hast  -really  obli-ed  me^  that^  thou  by  thy  most  pleasants  letter 
hast  t  vitedmc  into  the  hospitality*  of  thy  Vortlejjnum,  whither  O  that  it  was  allowed^ 
tome  to  come  !  But  th<m  knowest«  how  many  and  how  great  labors  I  have  taken  over  me^ 
which  indeedMuterrupted»  by  a  space  of  thirty  days,  have  been  lyin^  down i»  too  long, 
anil  ar^tmwH  longing  tori2  the  master,  as^  a  long  neglected  fi^"'^' f^J-^^e  j;  ';ji?l;  *•  I  h^^ 
that  thou  wilt  not  be  absent  from  the  city  so  long  as  thou  sayest  that  thou  art  going  to 
le  For  surely'^  thou  wilt  wishi«  to  be  present  if  it  will  bo  tiansactedi^  on  the  peace  m 
the  housc^H  of  the  En..'lish'»  people.  If  thou  shalt  have  rcsolved^o  tr.  use  '"y  ^ospitah  y, 
I  shall  rental  a  housc-^^  in  the  Kensington  square",  a  part  of  ^^^^i^h,  furnished^*  wuh 
wh-.t  thin-s  it  will  be  necessary",  thou  mayesf-'«  have  for  thyselt2J.  I  ha\e  sent  a  pa- 
ler-'«  f  Abel  Roper^^.-  We  spoke  of  nothinu30  e.xcept3i  poace.  Tha  '^  thou  art  we]133, 
\am  very  glad  nor  do  I  doubt  that 34  thou  wilt  breathe3s  equallv3«  w-ell  at  Kensing- 
tonST  as  in  thy  Vortlejilnum.    Farewell.    London  (Londinum),  October  13th. 

1  To  obliqe  somebody  gready,  gratissimum  aliciii  facere.-2  quod.-  'J"f  "J.^Jf  .-,V'Tf 
pitium.-  ^  Othat  if  uas  allow,  d.  ntinam  lict-ret  -  «  novisse.-  '  to  l<l^\our  one  8  set  J 
iibi  suscipere.-  «  quidem.-  «  intermittere.-  ^»  to  he  down,  jacSre.-  1^  jarn  -  ^'{olong 
for  the  7na.<ter.  dominum  desidenlre.->3  tamquam.-^  «nltrum-  1«  prolecto.-  Nell  . 
■L  1:  a^rrre  -  1«  curia  —  1«  An-'lictis.—  20  constituere.—  21  condticere.--  22  aedep,— 23  m- 
c„*  -V4'  nstruc  uJ-  25  opus'^sse.-  2«  poreris.-  27  dative.-  ""  libellp.-  .^^»  AbSlus 
R.qWvus.-  30  Sj  alia  re.L  3i  „i,i._  32  J^uod.-  33  valGrc-  34  quin.-35  re.puare  (per- 
lect  ^ubj.).—  3«  a*que.—  37  Ceusinlo. 


CHAPTER  TIIIKD. 

USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

§  590.  The  subjunctive  is  either  potential  or  dependent.  The 
former  (liiostly  occurring  in  independent  sentences)  has  the  force  of  the 
English  potential,  imperative,  or  of  separate  verbs  conveying  similar 
ideas  Rarely  the  Latin  subjunctive  has  the  force  of  an  English  sub- 
junctive The  dependent  subjunctive  is  determined  by  the  relation  of 
a  predicate  to  another  (principal)  predicate,  and  exclusively  occurs  m 
cl.\uses. 

Or<»  The  T  itin  Pubiuncliye  is  in  a  great  measure  a  conventional  U^Tm  of  the  Prf^'ca|e, 
tl^ldeJof^S^Sorbe  reduced  t<>  erne  pnenilpm^^^ 

the  subjunctive  is  the  mood  of  'conception'.  «>•;,  ^VI,"'"^^J:l'^^.i'   ,^^,^e  ^^^^^^^^ 

mind  of  the  speaker'.     lUit  erery  mood  V^J>''*';^*%^'^^l',?'^7i^f,.      ficts^  whereas  the 

alar-.;  part  of  the  denendent  »^"1>J""'»i^-^'^  <i^''V>  f  J^J  /"^L^S 

required,  must  be  learned  Uomspecial  rules. 


878 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


POTENTIAL  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


379 


Q 


y  POTENTIAL  SUBJUyCTIYE. 

§  591.  The  potential  siil»junetivc  occurs  eilher  in  dcchirative,  or  in 
interrogative,  or  in  imperative  sentences. 

(X)  Dkclat:.vtive  Slujunctivk. 
§  592.   The  dechirativc  siihjmictive  is  most  freciucnlly  used  in  con- 
ditional periods,  both  if  the  conditional  clause  is  expressed,  and  if  it  is 
understood,  as: 

Die;»  deficiat  si  volim  mimorfiro,  etc.  ;  Tinio  would  fail  if  I  fhonld  ftttompt,  otc. 


Cic. 


N.  D.  8.  3-2,  81.— Turn  me 
I  would  confess  not  to  ' 
Plane.  39,  93. 


\i  ronjitiar  wow  ]\i(\\ii\\\m  habuissjf  de  utilitate  reipiiblicie  ;  Then 
liuve  had  liny  judgment  on  the  intereats  of  the  republic.  Cic. 


For  this  class  of  subjunctives  see  B.  VI.  p.  717  foil. 

Rem.  70.  Aside  from  the  subjunctive  in  conditional  periods,  a  declara- 
tive potential  subjunctive  occurs  {a)  in  the  piiesp:nt  or  peiifkct,  as  sub- 
junctive of  GUARDED  STATEMiiiXT,  With  the  force  of  a  potential  future  {R. 
75,  No.  0) ;  (/>)  in  a  few  passages  as  impeufect  or  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive, beins^  an  eciuivaleut  oi  oport nit  {ovvj([\t\o  \n\\i') ;  (r)  in  the  second 
PEiisox  SINGULAR  of  the  present,  perfect,  and  imperfect,  to  represent  the 
subject  of  the  action  as  an  indefinite  person. 

Obs.  L  The  subjunctive  of  modest  or  irnarded  Ptatement  in  the  present  tense  mostly  oc- 
curs in  thi'  first  and  second  persons,  and  is  rendered  by  sticli  expressions  as  '  I  am  inclined 
to\ 'it  seenip  to  me\ 'I  Hhould '  ;  and  in  the  second  person  by 'may' or  'will':  Ego 
Tion  hoc  quii^rendum  cenneain,  sed,  etc. ;  It  seems  to  me  (I  should  think)  that  this  is  not  t  lie 
question  here,  but,  etc.  Liv.  21,  18. —  Forsitan  quitnitl^  qui  i^Ie  terror  sit  ;  You  viU 
(may)  axk  ])erhaps  of  wbat  kind  that  terror  is.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  2,  5. —  Ex.  1.  2. —  More 
rarely  this  subjunctive  occurs  in  the  third  pftr<on.  almost  always  \\'\\\\  forsitan  (which 
l>einir  contracted  from  fitr.<  it  an,  ur  forte  ait  an.  '  it  is  the  (by»  chance  or  th(>  question 
whether',  always  recniires  the  subjunctive) :  Matrem  insiinulilre  forsitan  fas  won  sit ,' 
perhaps  it  tco'ild  //o/ /a^  riirht  to  accuse  one's  own  muther.  Liv.  ;i9,  10. 

The  second  person  singtdar,  if  used  in  this  meaninir,  frequently  denotes  an  uncertain 
person  (R.  91.  Ons.  4.'».  implying  that  the  predicate  refers  to  any  person  under  the  stated 
circumstances  :  /it'j>ena<  multos  (juibus  j)cricuIosa  consilia  (jiiiC-tis  splendidiHra  videau- 
tur ;  You  (one,  people)  will  find  many  to  wliom  dangerous  measures  would  eeem  more 
showy  than  peaceful  ones.  Ci(^  Off.  1,  '24, 

Obs.  2.  The  subjunctive  perfect  likewise  occurs  as  subjunctive  of  guarded  statement. 
It  mostly  occurs  when  the  |)redicate  is  a  verb  of  saying  or  tliinkin<r.  and  is  limited  to  the 
hingular  niunber  and  to  the  active  voice.  Although  it  is  evident  that  the  kindred  mean- 
ing and  almost  identical  form  of  the  future-perfect  must  have  intluenced  in  some  way 
tlie  usage  of  a  perfect  in  the  meaning  of  a  qualiflcd  future,  we  cannot  adopt  Madvig'8 
theory,  who,  on  the  strength  of  this  fact,  has  invented  the  theory  of  a  subjunctive  of 
the  future-perfect,  to  which  he  assigns,  in  tiie  active,  the  same  form  as  the  perfect  sub- 
junctive. Since  the  future-perfect,  even  in  the  indicative,  is  not  used  with  potential 
force,  like  the  future  prt;sent  (except  in  the  instances  mentioned  R.  75),  and  since  he 
must  himself  acknowledtje  that  the  so-called  future-perfect  subjunctive  has  neither  the 
meaning  of  a  fiUiire-perfect,  nor  that  of  a  subjunctive  (Madvig's  Or.  §  380),  the  expedi- 
ent proposed  by  him  is  contradicted  by  the  very  reason  which  induced  him  to  in- 
vent it.  The  fact  that,  according  to  Madvii;'s  theory,  we  would  have  to  admit  a  dilVer- 
ent  consecution  of  tenses  in  reirird  to  the  fiUure-perlect  for  the  active  and  for  the  ]>assive 
voice  (Madv.  §  379),  and  that  it  would,  in  other  resjjects,  impair  tlje  symmetry  of  the  law 
of  consecution,  and  of  the  modal  r«'latioiitf  of  the  two  fiUures,  is  fatal  to  tlie  whole 
theory. 

The  perfect  subjunctive  in  this  meaning  seems  to  occur  first  in  Varro  and  Cicero.  It 
is  best  rendered  by*  would',  'may',  'might'  (nciratively  by  'coidd  not'):  Hoc 
sine  ulia  dubitatiOne  continnat'erim  ;  I  zcoi/ld  «.s'sv/Y  this  without  any  hesitation.  Cic. 
Brut.  6,  25.— Plane  quidem  perfectum  Demosthenem  facile  dixcJ'U  ;  Demosthenes  yOM 
ma  I/ fiaMy  cait  simply  perfect.  lb.  9.  35. —  Forsitan  qulspiatn  dixerit ;  Perhaps  somebody 
viigfii  (may,  will,  would)  say.  lb.  Oil'.  3,  0,  39.    See  Ex.  3-8. 


Ons  q  The  second  person  sin-  is  often  used  to  represent  the  subject  a»  an  ttncertatn 
PK^soN  ;oT.e  sotTebocly  you),  and,  if  so  used,  is  alu.o^t  invartably  m  the  ^nbjunct.ve. 

rtsV^^xn<^^^^^  There  is  nothing  forbidding  in   his  appearance ;   at  a 

mee  n"  v^^'S  Jook  at  \mwwWi  awe.  but  not  .hiink  frortihun.  Pl\"- *^  '-J' l»'- Jl  J  .^ 
S.nc.i^e  id-  the  second  person  denoting  an  ;..detin.te  subject,  mo.t  fiequentli  occui8 
in  dependent  sentences.     See  R.  91.  Obs.  4.— Ex.  J-l'^.  .,,     ,       ^.  ^^^„ 

Obs    4    The  stibjunctive  imperfect  and  i)luperfect,  as  potent, al-declaratives   very 
rai^;*occt  r  fn  the'n.eatung  o^\i>ortuit  (ouirht  t.>  have  :  -  om-.^.r  inc^^^^^^^ 

wiiisay     iicMutijr  These  subjunctives  occur  only  if  the  conntc- 

fiol  ;„S.  r"o'x"ce  ;:■lo,;;^>^n'^i„!;;■;fu,ly\■,lear  ;  ,h^^^^  po.o".W  ,o™,,  e.pre.«ng 
necessity  («'erundials,  oi)ort€t,  dehZre),  being  lar  more  usual.  .See  ^»*^-  4,^^"-  ^«'-    ^.  . 

iliilSisiiillllii 

i;;;!,»^  vims  nominaro  q„i  «c  :  /  ''"'i'^f"'/' ,'?™"™  SS';>y?f«'  af/l«  m        ^i 

cic.  Tusc.  5,  0.  ,     ,  ,   <  1      ^t  ««  4 />o«  Viavp'  rrpnorallv  renuires  a  circum- 

;>,,.->•.  with  a  i.erfect  inlinitive  of  the  main  ver^^^^^ 

(d)  The  pluperfect  potentia    ^V.''\  '"'^V   i    /^nr  Us  «xi  oiivm-   licvit.  licebatM^.\  and 
fect,imperfect,orpluperfectiiidic^tiveof^o*w  or  tss^^n^^ 

•should  have'  or  'ought  to  have'  is  ^'^P-lf ^^^^J^^  J ^  ^xt  Deh\hanU\x  omnis  bonos  effi- 
detfere  (or  its  sjMionyms,  oi^rtehaf  oix^rtrnt^^^^^^^^^  ^u  ^.en  good. 


380 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


POTENTIAL   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


381 


..^.  .  Vor  if  wo  idont  this  opinion,  7  o^ght  to  hare  been  alarmed  thc^otl.cr  day  for  t'ao 

vre}ent(lv^^)  i^»  1)1:uhm1  in  tl.ei'KUFKCT  \i potidf  ^lean^*  '  .  whs  po-^il,le  1»'=^)  (  /i^m  />o^n« 
??)  Hndnu'  nin  rive  pn-rrdes  ir  in  lin.e:  /WuiMiluin.  ab  inuu,  ""^J  '7  ■'*;Ve  be  iu- 
po-lbh-  (at  tlu  tini..  of  tlu'  vordict)  tl.at  eomo  yudge)  Aa(/  «of  6fm  present  in  Hit  bt^u 

"*;y^  i;:;;::  J^;;;;;-.^y  ^S'huuViJ^o  of  the  pn.t  tense,  i.  i^ed  ->th  potential ^r<.  in 

1.  Hau.l  /^rmm  an»  no  oi.ns  sit  q.ii.lom  niliil  nnquam  ^^^J/l"/  ;^';^7'"^^''£,^;/;.!  ; 
14  51.- -2.  Itaqiio  rH.a«-,  reb.is  injnstis  jnstos  n.axune  doluro.  lb  M,  -^J- '^Jv  /'\  7/; 
ju  lidnm.  pace  t..a-^  aU-<ri„u  b.n-o  antepono  tuo  I»).  1  use  5y^  1^.-4  ^{  «^^  "'j;"4« 
n  ru.lin ///fvri/zj  lb  Hint  45  105.— 5.  Bona  hoc  tnil  voniaJ  ^/i 'e/?/«.  l'>- i^'^-  i'  J;^ -'*• 
«  V  V  nic.  m  "n  S  he  i.oribns  clarin.^  d„,,rinr->  (,uani  qnod,  qnnin  per  Ir.eu- 
;^,,mrimi.e>r^^^^  pa  tcs»  Italian!  ol.sid(^rent^  illatfli  urn  ^e  bcUnni  eis  no., 

d  "<  mnKM      ViVl   2  2^^^^^  vt-ro  Platr.neni  nec  nimis  valde  nnqnam  noc  n.mis 

r:^    n      e-^^^^^^^^^    1 1    \   iT.  :    :    ,  7r,.-«».  \ulliun  ni>i  loco^  p<.situm  verbuni  ri./^v-^v  lb. 
ii  It    7<     214  -^0.    Ko  nuV^ti-r/>././v.s-  victo.>'-rodennl   ,n  ca^tra    LW"  .Vi 

11  -n.  m  veroc^r/V;/-.^  qnanta  and..cia  fnissot  in  oxercitn  CatilTnie.  Sal.  <^  ^i'- •'»;  Ij- 
ia  V  x  MK-eratimperAtuinqnnn.illn.nsp..liatum'Os.ipatnmune>M^ 

rlc  Yen    2  4  41  -l.i.  (^.i.i  fac-re  debnisti  ?  Il.t„lh>^e.<>,  sUn^sen]^  "■"il^'V   '  o  i' ?' 
V  Kl        14    Ki-(loin  ex  libVis  p.-i>p  eios  qna'  dixerini,  aut  ,>,> jH>})0.'>n>:<e<.  1»).  Att.  2,  1.  -i. 
ili;TaerimymeO^^,^n;•.ul  nJ.r.eni  i  e  proldbuerunt  qu.^ 
et  ad  eftii.Mcn.los  intolerabiles  dolr.res./-//«^  npfis.im»m^-.^  lb.  ^n.  J''-/;,  :^' ^'"J,  ;/. 

:i;;;;;;.^;.E'no;r  n^;;.:^-.  \b.l)iv.' 2.  .1:- is,  Hrqnum  ;;-tn;^«  n-<uni  io^.i^sunt . 

nn-o  vol  sine  niao-istro  facore  ;><;^/r/-///^/,  jrermunosi'  ^je  pntaiit  e^te  ^  ""^><!>"f^7,  * '; 
?)  9  i-lV  .reulh.s,  qui  ta.nen  ali<iua  ex  part.-c  ei^  incH>nHnod..  "^^'«ICn  lor  a-e 
li/Vil'^.'/^i  vostro  iiis-u  coactuH  partem  inilitnin  diinlsit.  l^»- ^L'»";  ^>  ^- -^"l- /."  ;| 
Hv  t^t\^)i8    mim.b  1«^  quu.n  et  remisisti  qu..d  non  oiwrhhaf,  et  aecep  sti  quod 

civitati_  his  "l'"';' ;•.,  'r'a-V-  21  ArcbipinVam'-  ipsum  vidit  nemo,  de  qu<.^3  Mippli- 
dnm';^^  -  U  '^i^:"l'i.t5.  ^:-'2i:'^Si;  jam  Vfiuar  non  ut,<.iio  pennmiis  e.^ 
videar/quorfe^U^»,  sed  ut  misericordi;V«,  qme  tibi  nulla  debetur-^  lb.  Cat.  1,  7.- 

1  P  I  <J  4-^.i   R  78  -  3  with  your  leave.-  ^  with  your  kind  permission.-  *  admirable. 
_  ^a.cele  To  consider.-  «  tin-  faction.  .>f  Marius  and  Cinna.-  ^  had  in  V'^'"",J"^^VJ;.7 
r,u  i  1  nioi  er      ace    -  »  supply  :  eox  es.'^e.-  i»  plundered.-  »>  surrounded.-  '^  a  i  roj^- 
lt  nt  co.  '  r  c  i  m  •  fnstea.l   .    •  quun.  lictnres  imperata  perfecerunt.  ccrnere.  ou.n  st.pa- 
n.inr  C(  n.   ;'';'^'  ''"    ;'  ..-   ^  '     .  ._ia  vouou<dit  t«.havo  n-tnrned  ihe  corn  and  ^'i\en  it 
tuui  ''^'V.'^    •;';,^^:,'^,,\'  ,a„,^  'l!\'5  ;vas  uJife^f  ibest)  tbin-r  I  ciiM  have  done  :  <.r  would 
um-T,e.  n   he  L^t    li^i    "^^^^^  me  to  do.  in   ord.-.  to,  etc.-»»  It  woul.l  have  been  b.  l.-r 
h      )     J  .lid  l,L-  p  ev  Mned  (i  e.  to  prevent  him).-  "  the  -ods  ou-ht  to  liave  wished 
■      losA     i.^JAv  HMover  tliev  haveuse<l  some  harshly  irarhledsontences.-'»  ve.i- 
t   i   o     ^0  in  some  measure.-'-'  /.  e.  if  vou  had  let  him  alone.-"  the  arch-pirat  ■.- 
"     ^rTete     n^  to  n"«o  but  to  arcfnpirota,  anith.r  har.li  ^}^^f^^-;:i^;:(;i:^Z 
funerJde  alinuo.  to  put  somebody  to  death.-  '♦-  sui)ply :  w/W'/^"  esse.-      ^IM/'J 'fi"  " 
Zrl^dtf'eZe     The  tn-lish  expn-ssi<ms  should  be  varied   by  synonyms  of  ^pn'vwlu» 
^;;T_  '27''  uich   o  you"  is  not  iwed  at  uU,  i.  e.  which  you  are  not  enUiled  to  at  all. 


23.  n>ss.m  Pe-q,n;  mnlta^decta^enta^r^nm^^ 
promissum  pairis  non  es:?e*  seivjliuui.  lb.  Oil.  6,  io. 

^    Interrogative  subjunctive. 

t;  593.  The  siihjunctivc  is  used  ia  interrogative  sentences  if  a  declara- 
tive assertion  is  placed  in  the  form  of  a  question,  to  imply  that  the  con- 
trary of  the  assertion  should  hold,  or  should  have  held  good,  or  that  the 
•iction  of  the  predicate  cannot  take  place,  or  that  an  imperative  sentence 
is  expected  as  answer  to  the  question.  Such  subjunctive  questions  may 
l)e  introduced  by  interrogative  adjectives  or  adverbs,  but  not,  generally, 
bv  interrogative  particles,  except  by  an  (Ex.  to  Obs.  1). 

Or.    1    The  predicate  is  placed  in  the  i-resknt  (sometimes  in  the  perfect)  suhjunc- 
•  ^^-'c  •;      r  .^,^;   iw.  th,i<'  of  the  «pFMvFn     This  subjunctive  is  rendered  by  the  po- 

^,mbv  V./r/A/\-  Qmspidet  celentJltem  in<:enu  L- Bmio  defu  ss.       I^o  .^j^^^^^ 

Colldldo\<K  not  knowing,  bow  learned  cm- wise  ^^J^^'^'^^.'^^l^Z 
fuissciUam  infamiam   judicii  corrup  1     ^^^^['^ ,\'^^^^^^^^  polueHm  ? 

Sll^^H^-'.■'■;o  .v;.'vo„\  ;re:v;;;'«sj ;,:;.  Atu^i  i^didfs/or  a»  c.pa„.e  or  .,0. 

r!mmlio.n.ilu»him.cllmadfapurl.H-rtol,l.ciw.,;  Ln.4.3. 
f.„.    ■>   Ti,»  niprnpFrT  sfim'NrTivE  (more  rari'ly  the  pfrfzctI  is  used  1)  ''  "'«n 

tinLM.ished,  b.-inir  ren.  ered  '''     »'  ,f'V'  ^,^^'>  ";  .'"^^^^^^^  plehis  privatum 

Si?"  wi^fXKcllii^TK^^^ 

n^ed)  arms  a-.^dnst  a  tribui.o  of  tbe  people  ?     ;  ^;\;^^^^  ^ do  n      ich  ^  ^^  ^^  ^  ^ .  ^, 

42.--Stomaciulr,  C;nnus  sed  qmdy«c..r^^^^^^  fi*' ^1^4  1  2)  If  tlie  question  is  the  apodosis 
he  could  do  nothini:^  H).  (Ml.  3.  14.  Me  f^^-  V/HiV-oro m  _  nuis  civis  ei  reiri  non  fave- 
of  a  hypothetical  period  :  Hanc  causam  si  "[f;[^/>^^|,«,^J -;,?;",,  Ivovldnot  favor  ih2.t 
r,t  qui.  etc.  ".   \i  \\^^^!^^  '^?i;"    l^^t    Z   mpiv     '  a  co^^^^  ^^^^«  ^^"''^ 

w  i  h  the  force  of  a  potential  future,  and  is  ^^  "''■•'^^f  ',"  ^.^:J^^',^,  Ss  slrmOnis  accedel 
Ennio,  reliquis  poCtis  ro«r.  v/./rm  lit  "«"""';^"i\").^  Si^.f.")^;  'fmow  Hotner,  Ennius, 
r.-nt :  ipse  nunquam  ab  il'^^cerrima  content  pne^/et^rf^^^^^^^^^^  ^        ^ 

.-Mid  the  other  poets  to  emp  <>y  f  ?"iV^"^\«^„;,^"^,^V'?c  Or  31  10^)  -  But  in  this  kind  of 
from  that  strictest  style  of  critical  i'^'»^"""  ?.•  ,^'^' >J';irti '  ^^^^^  dissimillimis 

questi..n   also  prosent  subjunctives  "^J^''     l^^^^^^^^^.^^^^lj^^f «e^en  stage-players  doing 
porsoni^   Patisfaciebant:  e-o  non   f^/''^^'«,  '  '  J^,^;J  .^^^.V^^^ 
justice  to  the  most  heterogeneous  roles,  and  .^honld  I  not  take  Pa_i«S'  ^^  inferiOrem 

1.  Qttid  etiim  ei  pr.rU.ia.f  Q--. -«.!!!f^"E^s^;S^S.^.;S"^ 


^^^^^:7::^x^^^:^^^'^^ 


'  Mention.- 
Lk*- ^fU^cbaS;;- -V,;;-bc  .,ack«ldi..  tUe  praise: 


382 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


34  93  —  6    Ouis  lionOroni.  quis  jrloriam,  etc.,  tarn  unquani  pxiwfaty  qnam  igiioniin!am, 

iniain"iam*etc..  /Vr/mr-J/  11>.  !'•  O.  iti,  91.-  7.  Iln.nini  aiit-'ii,  pnostflru  qiii^  ]X).<sit  nisi 

e  Iv  Ih   N.  D.  3.  10,  -^5.-  8.  Quid  .-go  nunc  tibi  dc  AfncS  saihamf  lb  Pet..  Coms.  3, 

li"  qi  utn    rnajurc^J  m.st.i  adv.-nas  rt-^cs*  no.i  fasiidiennts  ?  lb.  4,  3.-  11.  Nunc  vcro 
quid/  da/  Ion  pat:0nu8>':  in\-jusMu.di  causa  ^^nn\  face  rent  omn.s  Cras.,  et 

blitu'  ■'  lb  2  2  5f).—  13.  Blcsamius  ivrannum  C:Psarom  H-nf>eret  ,  lb.  1>(J.  iz.  .i-.. 
-14  O'/ieNcr'/v-m  et  ;w/^/-fr  doi.fc  rcliam  ct  in  regiam  meam  anuiltus  perveuu^set? 
T  iv  42  "^41  —  ir)  Owiv  eniin  ei  rciri  non  fartnf  fujus  onin«Mn  atafem  in  populi  Koni.ini 
belli'  cou^umpt'am  esse  niendnissel  ?  Cfc  .1).  j.  2.  H.-  Ifi.  Idem  de  ist.«  ^^'^P'i^JlJ^J'r.^;*;;;; 
^///oeniui  nomine  potius  sophismata  i,ophi<rns)  apiycUenif  ben.  Lp.  4;..—  1  *.  LouM\aiu 
me  tihic()inmitiercaususn<m!*um:  comisaiOrem'"  tecum  armwveuieutem reci/>ia;/if" 

Liv.  40,  y.       ^^ 

:C)    Subjunctive  in  imperative  sentences. 
^  591.  The  potential  subjunctive  (aside  from  conditional  periods) most 
freciuently  occurs  in  imi)erative  sentences,  reprcsentin^i^  the  predicate  as 
the  object  of  the  will,  advice,  niAYEH,  TEUMitssiON,  or  wish  of  the 
speaker  (imperative  and  optative  subjunctives). 

Rem.  80.  Imperative  subjunctives  occur  both  in  t lie  present  and  per- 
fect ;  optative  subjunctives  occur  in  all  tenses  excejit  the  porlV-ct. 

Ons.  1.  If  the  predicate  is  in  the  second  person,  it  is  most  usually  placed  in  the  im- 
perative  (P.  1,  §  414)  and  often  in  either  of  the  two  future  tenses  (K.  75,  Ous.  1).  Hut 
hometimes  the  second  person  of  the  present  sul\junctive  is  used  in  such  sentences. 
These  subjunctives  are  most  usually  made  dependent  on  a  verb  implying  a  command, 
prayer,  advice,  or  wish,  as:  A'^/Tro  (/(^vT/zn,  I  couiuiand  you  to  l>e  i)re>enl.  Liv.  21,21. — 
QuiBsu/nus  vos,  hac  reconciliatiOne  conjumri  a  nobis  f^inafis ;  We  beseech  you,  «How 
vourselveM  to  be  united  l)y  us  in  reconciliatitm.  Liv.  40,  40.— In  h:ec  \i'T\n\Jitres})Osfu/o, 
1  demand  you  to  swear  to  these  words.  Liv.  22.  53.— DuOlnis  ducibus  r>  misftis  o/>orfet  ; 
It  is  necessary  you  alone  should  resi>t  two  commanders,  lb.  22.  39.  If  denoting  per- 
mission, llot'is  added  :  Dwas  licet;  Take  Inm  away!  Cic.  Or.  2,  u:j,  255.  But  the  lan- 
guage frequently  understands  such  vc»bs  of  command,  etc.,  using  tlie  subjunctive  with 
the  force  of  a  direct  imperative,  as  :  Uno  animo/^<7rt/i»  sen;ltum,  equites  recenseatl",  a'ja- 
/wcensum,  lustrum  conddtis ;  Sdect  unanimously  the  Senate,  examine  the  lisi  ol  the 
kni'dits,  perform  the  census",  constitute  the  lustrum.  Liv.  40,  46.—  Capiat  restim  ac  te 
«/.s77c//(/a.'^  cum  hero  ;  Taken  rope  and  hang  yonr^^vM  with  your  master.  Plant.  Pa-u.  1, 
2,  1S5.— Miseriienostrae^n-^'/a.^  quod  a  Vi1)r)ne  subito  discessimus;  Attiihute  to  our 
wretched  condition  the  fact  that  I  suddenly  left  Vibo.  Cic.  Att.  3.  4.  See  Kx.  1.—  More 
frequently,  however,  the  second  person  thus  used  has  the  force  of  an  indefinite  subject, 
as:  Facete  lioc  cwn'?c/a.s' adversano  ;  You  (i.  e.  ixny  one)  7/iay  ironically  c^/iCe</fi  this  to 
your  adversary.  Cic.  Or.  2,  71,  2S<5. 

Obs.  2.  The  first  person  singular  generally  denotes  a  wisn,  and  may  often  be  taken 
for  a  future,  except  in  negative  sentences  :  (^uam  primum  mon«r.'  inquit  ille.  Homo 
demens!  Non  vult  mori  qui  opt  at ;  Ler  me  die  (may  I  die)  as  s<»on.  as  possible,  quoth 
he.  O  you  fool  !  He  does  not  mean  to  die  who  savs  that  he  wishes  so.  Sen.  Ep.  117.— 
Sed  ne  dum  huic  obsequar  vobis  inolestus  sim  f  But  I  wish,  I  may  not  displease  you 
white  obeying  tliis  man.  Cic.  Fin.  5,  3,  8.     (Sec  Obs.  0.) 

Obs  3.  The  first  person  plural  contains  a  command  directed  to  other  persons  which 
the  B()eaker  offers  to  follow  himstlf  :  Percjamns  igitur  ad  reliqua,  et  institfitum  ordinem 
persequamvr  :  Let  us,  therefon-,  proceed  to  the  remaining  iH)ints,  and  lollow  tlie  order 
indicated.  Cic.  Brut.  4-3,  \h^.— Morhlmvr.  milites,  et  morte  nostril  ei-ipiamus  exobsulione 
circumveiitas  legiOnes  ;  Soldiers.  Id  //••>•  die,  and  by  our  death  let  us  free  the  surrounded 
legions  from  the  siege.  Liv.  22,  (10.    Ex.  2.  3. 

Obs.  4.  The  third  person  frequently  represents  the  predicate  as  dependent  on  the  will 

^  Aliqiiid  expefere.tcn^trivo.  for  something.— ^  to  shun.— 3 /»o>«i/fY  r/if' a/Kv7j».'>\  I  am 
diso•u^ted  withsomebodv.—  *  immigrant  kings  (i.  e.  kiuL's  born  in  foreign  countries).— 
6  tobeloathof.— «as  attorney.— 'to  be  bound.— «>  write  Ciesar  down  a  tyrant ;  |)ro!ioiince 
him  a  tvrant  in  writing.—  «table  companion.—  »«  as  a  fellow  reveler.—  ^^  recipiam 
may  either  be  taken  lor  an  interrogative  subjunctive,  or  for  a  potential  future  according 
to  p.  351,  Obs.  4,  B. 


roTENTIAL   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


383 


nflhe  person  spoKen  to,  commandhig  or  advising  this  person  to  see  the  action  Perform- 
Cc  VSJ;? amesTiue  qu.e  id  quod  audiunt  e^i^nme^^yr^r^r.^^-^^-^\^^ 
nn;e«tus  causa  insu.surretur ;  Let  thy  t-irs  6«  such  that  theyar^  nuic.cu  lu 

?;^y  hear,  and  not  what  by  f '■'M'^»/'^^!   'i^'%^t  f^'Jiy't^f^^  ""out' S^^. 

V,.  1    1    4  _  ihrc  i'dtur  pr  mum  inlainiar/^ra/'/?';  /v«c  '"'*^,'^V^5'^*^^  ^    A  i  Vhiii.-^    nm- 

«■^Ve^nnc,!  Ci^Qu  Fr.  1, 1, 11,    Ex.9.  lO.-Somet.mc,  «he  third  pe„on  refers  to  the 
tnealcer  httmelf.  if  the  predicate  is  pasfue  or  impersonal.  Ex.  11.  li. 
ObTs    Negative  imperative  sentences,  If  not  referrins  to  the  second  Pe'.'»';- «f"'^?^; 

potest,  ne  susaptafur.  Cic.  P.  o.  -J4.     "  r*-'*^/!'""  ^u  '  sometimes  also  by  m  with 

tVenlrum.  m  ri>  admlnVus  Olonof  womierX  0'=  Fan,.  7, 18  .J  ^f  ^J„,  ^'  '^J^son  mea,iS 

(referring  to  ^"V^-ry  "M^) '■^^^/.^''^^'^•/'Jf.^'l^/.mh.^  of 'U^^^^  Non  eo  sis  consilio 

fru'aliiv   to  have  no  silver  and  gold.  Sen.  Ep.  5. 

OB^    (i    Sentences  expressing  a  wish  are  mostly  expressed  by  velim  or  jdlem  {cyjnam 
or  cJ/^m/M  w    h  a  d,!',^  iTredicate  in  tl>ciniinitive  or  -"^H""-^'''^\u  ''f^dS •   it 

duo;  I  rather  icish  to  l)e  the  auth..r  of  one  speech  of  L  ^^^r^^J'^'he  verbs  of  wishing 

i:!;,^r,;,'lun,Vlyi,,s  .1- ori.in:H,co,,c;.p.i.m  oM 
?rS    f.f\f-^f-;iS-Sunmrin,nirn"plM^^^^^^^ 

K-d':^ff^::^s't-^ii8-fnS(S;^S^^^^ 

l-u'a^<iue   meo  b-ne  et  hhciter  ere7nat .'  -^^'^V    ^^s  hap  ui  pro^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^ 

colic:  <-ue  !  Liv.  40.  4«.  But  sometimes  a  mere  si  bjuucti\e  P'^^^\"\";  ?'"%,_  .j.^  ,j^i-e  of 
s  e  ke  bminis  etiam  cau^H  tibi  ahsit  C.  Flaminu  memoria  Vfly  also  for  ^^^^J^^^^^ 
iLoLu,  the  precedent  of  C.  Flan)i..ius  be  far  In-in  your  n     u  !  ^i  ^  ^^r/V'^y^;     i."  /e 

r^'T ""  ';:;d"th;e'  u^t'^  ^Thu^n  ^i;?^" '  .:'auci;^y&muK :  c^uod 

l)v  rf,  or  Od-  in  wliidi  iusiance  the predica  e  i»  realed  »»  '\,^"'  Vhai  Jvm  tcrr.tnrned 
clauses  ,B.  VI  ) :  ^n;ihl.pne,erUosr^ra(  ..  Jnl»  er- 

•bXhr-'anllS:  Ui<?sfm"et?Ari;;ie?c'haL'^e  in™  e  same  period  :  H.c  ad  te  die  na- 


\ 


384 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTiy-E. 


.nii  mnn  Krrinsi  •  ntio  vfbiam.  Pusccptn»  non  essenumt  ne  quid  ex  oftdora  matrc  postca 

oS  that  day/or  my  mother  had  not  b<yrne  alierw>tfd8  1  Cic.  Att.  9,  9,  3.   bee  Lx.  lt^31. 
o«^  7    oiton  iiniH-rative  Dmlirates  in  th»x?inl)jiinctive  have  the  force  of  a  concepsiox 

snhi  inctive  retVrs  to  the  uresfut,  and,  the  perlect  j,'rni'rally  to  the  P'^''^ /^*  •    V*:^,„^"^ 

£s;:,':'fi;^vidin;icenln<.n.u.^r(/nJi.f//7i«Ml^ 

Avioiif  even  if  this  he  wroin?)  itytertainly  is  not  odious.  Ce.  Atad.  A  ->i.      f  «^'7:  "  J 

ni       PhUit  i>us  cur  advcrsus  ruDfThiK-  dec.ruerCmus  :  quid  IVr^rus  meruit  cur  ^o  i  <  n  - 

S      /hoi.   "isim.isy  r;,.*.^..f  that  Philip  may  hav.  <l<r\^-^-'^';;'^  ''^'y''^^^^^^ 

resolve  thi<  airainst  him  ;  ;„ut  what  hH=5  l'er.^eu:i  done  that  we  alone  of  all  should  be 

hostile  to  him  y  Liv.41,;ii.  Ex.  3i-:«.  „„.n,.^ 

rt/fm''    (U   tail.  IS.  ^'';  !.•„!>,';..   ,,.  o       i-^   Xo  illi  ouidem  on    non  prius  qiiam  \  enu- 

null's  eJpnesklii  reipubiieu.  esse.  Liv.  2:>  59.--.l4,  De  ^]^^^l!^;:;^^^%^i^ 
10.7.-15  Ne  tramieri.-^  IbCrum,  n^  q.nd  lei  t't;>  ^t/  cum  Sagnntlnis.  ''^-  ;/•  "'^- ,_ 
1  Ea*;  litteras  in  enndem  tascieulnm-^  velim  addaf.  Cic.  Att.  1-- •^^  "  \V/ur  ,t  n 
vGr^/*/^ia%  rv/im  lb.  7,  7,  7.-  18.  Velim  tibi  eum  placCre  (l"a.n  maxime  lb  Br  it.  .1, 
ai  .-  rqnatn  r^^^^^^^  d^  his  etiam  oratoribus  qui  I'odie  .unt  VJ>;;l'CcM-e  '^^'r/^  I^h^^.  , 
2 H  - 20.  Vdlem  ade..<et  Antoni.is,  m(,.l..;=«  s  ne  a-l voc-lns^o  H»-  P»  1-  ,  \^^{^.^h  If^^'^^ 
«liquid  Antonio  pnet.-r  ilium  lib^dlum^i  hb'm.<et_  s.-ribore.  .^'^- J.^"'  •  f/;  V';.n7q  il  1 
n  e  )  ipsl.is  interitu  mallem  litteras  meas(/e4./erur6.3.q„am  »'*'^^V34  P„n  .ii  m  niian  i 
-k^NiMnn  accidisset^^  tempus  in  quoperspicere  P«'^f^'^3,»l"^"V  i  ,VTi'  1  -  25^  C^^^^^^^^ 
V.rntiim  fuerem  lb  Div.  3.  K».—  24.  Falsus  utinam  vatesss  ,sim .'  Li\ .  -J»,  h'.  -^-  ^i"'» 
J/i^,  ^^e  iVp™Vis3«  p  Tve^^^       /imr/.'  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  49,  119.-  2(5    liiud  ^'  ^^"«"^;-^  7\'^ 

4  Kr^m  Ih  Div.  5.  17.-  27.  U/i»am  e-o  t.-rtius  vobi^  amicus  «f  *'^^^' vl:  * 
'Sisc  5  2-2,  J?.-  28.  r)i.m;n  liberOru.n  t.ostrOnnn  ^^;^:i^^^;^]^'\l^:^'''l^f  {S% 
1  o  f;  _-  «xi  rtinam  in  Ti  Graecho  ta  s  mensy?/^^c«(?^'  Cic.  Brut.  -^.  l(M.--  -lo.  viuoii  (.i 
mnen  ar;wa  :    '  L  V  i^   13^  31.  1«/../;//='»  civ-es  mei,  rale<,nt!  sv,t  incolume.^o  ,,,,,, 

5  rVmesH  ^  //!  oil  HV  .s/./"  h:pe  urbs  pnrelaia.  mihiq.uc  patria  ^}^''^''^^}.^'';: 
M  •  1  "«'-^i  Vtndat*^  jedTs  vir  bonus  propter  aliqiia  vitia^  ;  pestilente«^«  sxntjt 
A /i;y7A  //;     «alabres  •  quuM-o,  si  ha-c  e.nlon'bus  venditor  non  dixerit   nuin  mjuste  aut 

nun        f.e^^^^  ?      3?13.-  :«.  Ne  dt  .ane  summum  malum  dolor.:  '»«  «''"  .^;:[  « 

y"t  lb  Tusc.  2,  •5.-34.  Fuent  ille  Bruf.is^^  qui  dominatu  rc-io  rempublicam  libenlN  it : 

1  T..  innnire  for  -  ^  to  trace  out.-  »  quarter^.-  «  to  approach.-  »  topccnre.—  •  to  ex- 
tort froi  -  Mo  unite.- ^  I  make  the  following  conditions.-  «brief  and  pnnctual  (or 
'wiuS- restraint  M  10  econc,mical..-  -  P-vjiVT^'R  C  ^- ScT^m  loi  clZ 
"  DoiidiM-  upon.-  15  deliberate.-  '«  ring,  seal.-  "  §  3.).,  K.  b.—  '''/';.  ^ a  ,,.Mrntiv« 
1«  J  -cs  branches.-  "-^  to  undertake.-  »»  to  .eck  contemplate  J"  «•  <^--  '"^'i^J^'^^ 
T...rf Tf  •  T  ft  this  be  «■nou-h  •  h-t  us  stop  here  as  to  the  causes.-  "  drawn.—  raise  my 
?  >  [4  i'^^wh  did  not  "u.p  till  they  ime.-  -^  mnntp  se  vmferre.  to  Jave  a  n.-ht  to 
irefcr  themselves.  The  sentence  is  imperative  merely  in  torm:  ' <>"  ""V  1  f  rn\  •  MUp^ 
E  Mu  t  im-rer  themselves  and  to  boast'.  In  Enj?lish  we  use  a  declarative  form  .  they 
hi-e  1  o    i.d  t.'    Th^  c'o-ordina.e  ^ olorlati  sinr  shmvs  that  the  Latin  sentence  is  no   con- 

ceiv-ed  as  declarative.-"  to  the  sf.me  file.-"  ^ive  l»l^V'^T^.^hnd  not"c";m'e  -  iVfow 
but  -3«  aitornev.-  3»  treatise.- ^J^  to  miss.-  ^^  I  wish  the  tinie  had  not  come.  now 

i.'h  I  ho  d -"  prophet.-  3«  with  spread  sails   with  llyni-  auivas.-  ^^  to  «'ali  — 
s '  ulvVr  ojoin  -  "'i  wish  all  hai.piiu'ss  t..  my  fellow-citizens.-  *»  may  no  evil  bef  11 
them  -^'i  mosperoiis  -^^  blessed  i  ^^  ,tand  fast.-  **  supposin-  a  g^'/^VV/'"/''  t)^^ 
houTJ.-  "defects-  46  unwholesome.-  ^^  granted  that  he  had  been  that  Brutus  who, 

etc. 


DErENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


385 


add  (lei  tamen  non  posscm  ut  qucmquam  mortunm  conjnngcrcm  cum  immortahum 
rei'iOne  lb  Piiil  1,  6,  13.- 35.  Niliil  metus  priesens  ab  Kimifmis  sententias  nostras 
iudlnarih  ■  fuit  certe  tamen  aliquid  quod  tarn  longara  deliberatiOnem  fsiceret  Liv. 
tuamvu      ^^_^^^^^  ^.^ .^  ^,^^   ^_^^^^i^  ^^^.^^    ^^^^^^^  ^j..^  .  j.,^.      ,jj„(jo  esse  ccepit  ?  Cic 

Verr  'l  14  —37  Nemo,  inquies.  unquam  fuit  (ita  eloquens).  Ne  fuent.  E-io  einm  quid 
dt>^i<ierern;  non  uuid  viderim  disputo^.  Cic.  Or.  29,  101.- 38.  Ne  (zquavertlxs^  Uanui- 
bali  Philippum  :  Pyrrho  certe  a^quabitis.  Liv.  31,  7. 


@ 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


§  595.  DicPKNDENT  SUBJUNCTIVES  are  those  which  derive  their  force 
either  from  their  principal  predicates,  or  from  the  conjnuction  which  in- 
troduces the  clause.  They  are  either  general  or  rAirncuLAR  subjunc- 
tives, accordiui;  as  tliey  are  common  to  all  classes  of  clauses,  or  occur 
only 'in  some  particular  kinds  of  them.  The  dependent  general  sub- 
junctives are  of  two  kinds :  {a)  Subjunctives  of  indirect  discourse  ; 

(/>)  Subjunctives  by  attraction. 

Or««    1    The  followin'^  are  examples  of  rARTicTiLATi  subjunctives  :  Stint  qyi  dicant, 
etc      Tlu're  arc  people  who  say,  etc.  ;  where  dicant  is  a  iiarticular  '^nl'J""''"''^.^^^'V: 
rin.Von  i'  in  relative  clauses  (p.  551).     Timeo  ne  rcniat  (I  am  alraid  lest  he  jnay  come) 
w  ere  the  subjunctive  is  determined  by  the  conjunction  m.  }n  '  Si  adjnt  sicloquatur 

hc\ve?e    r  -ent.  he  would  speak  thus)  the  subjunctive  addt  is  peculiar  to  hypotheti- 

••  Uhm^c-  ^  All    he  particular  subjunctives  are  treated  in  connection  with    he  clauses 

to  which  they  belouL'CB.  VI.),  only  the  general  subjunctives  belonging  to  the  present 

chapter.  ,  ,  •  i      /1  „„ 

Ors  2  Xot  everv  subjunctive  occurring  in  a  dependent  clause  can  be  considered  as 
a  (Wndent  siib^^^^^^^  tlu-  sense  dellned  above,  such  subjuiict.ves  often  having  au 

fnt  en  ent  pott-ntial  force  ^according  t.>  1 592  foil  ),  as  :  (iuodsi  id  quod  dtonun  aver- 
f nil f  mine  ouomie  variaverit  fi-rtuna  (ivhkh  omen  the  gods  may  actrt).  Ln .  23. 13.  Here 
the  sub  nc  cv^r^^^  is  potential  (imperative,  according  to  R.  bO,  Obs.  4).  although  it  ,9 
!    n  de  lei  de  It  Vl^^^^^^  a  subjunctive  has  both  the  force  ol  a  potential  and  of  a 

lei  e  uK^^^^^^^^^  :  Mi.a  luitaccuratio,  sed  ea?/«  citius  veteratonam  quam  ora- 

t  Sm  J  ^'.ni  •  S^  a  remarkable  nicety,  but  of  a  kind  that  you  would  c(dl  it  so- 

I  b-tTcal  rather  than  oratorical.  Cic.  Brut.  b7,  23^.    Diceret  has  thecharacter  of  a  poten- 
i  il  Md>   mcUv^  and  of  a  dependent  subjunctive  determined  by«(.  bome- 

n  es  eve  it  iiav  be  considered  «ioubtful  whether  the  author  has  taken  the  ^tV.Ii^^Sl.e 
f  mtentialor  dependent,  as  :  Multi  rumr.res  (erant).  qtios  c?/;?frgm  veros  ;  Hfc^^ere 
nu  rm!>rs  which /.S/.0./W  ,M  (or  •  which  /  ^;i./..^;)  *«  X^  On"^  ^^''o^  Ibr  a  del 
Here  aqitrem  mav  be  either  taken  for  a  potential  subjunctive  (II.  &0,  Obs.  b),  01  tor  a  de- 
pendent subjunctive,  peculiar  to  relative  clauses  (p.  jOO). 

0    SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  INDIKECT  DISCOURSE. 
(S>  DIRECT   AND   INDIRECT   STATEMENT   IN   GENERAL. 

^  59«.  Statements  which  the  author  represents  as  the  conceptions 
(tliou-liis,  utterances,  feelings,  perceptions,  etc.)  of  persons  introduced 
by  liim  in  the  discourse,  are  either  direct  or  indirect.  They  are  direct 
if  the  ^xMhov '  quotes'  them,  i.e.  states  them  in  the  same  form  and  words 
used  by  the  person  introduced  (Ex.  a).  They  are  indirect  if  the  author 
mentions  them  in  his  own  words,  making  them  dependent  on  a  verb  of 
saying,  thinking,  etc.,  expressed  or  understood  (Ex.  h  and  c).    Indirect 

1  T  et  ns  8UDno«e  that  it  was  not  a  present  fear  which  averted  our  leelinjrs  from  the 
Rom  m«  -  »  t^>  asser  --  3  aqvore  aliquem  alicui.,  to  consider  somebody  »n  equal  \o 
Sar  •;  to  compare  him  to  another  (Supposing  you  cannot  or  will  not  compare,  etc.). 
This  perfect  has  the  force  of  a  futiire-perlect. 


386 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


387 


..ten.en.  always  l.ave  tUe  .>.nj^^  -:-^:::;^;™^:^Sr^ 

liein.'  citl.ci-  INFIMTIVE  clauses  (hx.  k),  <»  UMIE  cla 

premcutc  in  tlio  srnJUNCTivK  (Ex  «  ^mU))-,  .  „»-™«<J- 

45.)  '      ■  „,,,  ,<,  INFINITIVE  CLAVSE.    Romulus  dixit  «6  deum  esse.  C.c. 


OB«   1    Direct  .,a,eme„„  .on.ajn.n,  ,u,natio„.  -  f.«-';  /-I™!"."'  'vc^'-'-'y 
i,,?,!;.;,.  which  ,nu,.  we  in.;.r,e^^^ 

the  s'libjcct.  iUKi 


cm).ruUHl  ill  the  =^ciitence  c.nitain.n-  the  ^ tatu  u^  '  ^^^  introduce  direct 

buerim,    nihil  .«pus  est  commem oiilie  •  .^^'/j.^^gf  _  3.  m  me  ubi   vidCrunt    '  H> 
m"  tarn  enimcul. ami  c-o  P^fsta  u»       C  c    ^,^-'24  14-4.  'Nihil  hoc  art  no.*  ;  ad 
sunt.  Pa-nphile'.  ^^/'/vi/JS;'      i  qu   ' Hd\'um'ude  quid  rCuUTat.  I.j  Top.  12  51. 
is    Turn  Quinctin..  '  Kn  "^^^K///ln//     ^       ;';,Vlo  S  r  i.i'fl  ...  iliam  boreditStem? '• 

ilKMU  e  as  the  statem.-nl*  „r  other  pers  i  -  •  "V"'-  °  'I  (Indirect  :  Es...vero  the 
B,  tieaid  •  1  will  "'"•1''?::":^' /'TV  ,e'":?aiemen.r  lii'l.  theau.hor  mnkes  •"»"«;;": 
;;ircr.'^^aS:;r '(rre^^^ly'-nun^'i  'ilr,hn';eati«e,  «cept  those  ot  the  ..hU  „.e.,.,oa, .1 

"'r'^";;:;;:;:::::i:::^:uCxr;.:\....jc,i.o^ 

Ob..  4.  Statements  arc  ""t  expro.sed       a  dir  c  ,  h  t^^  ^,_.,_^j,,.^,  „r  pereeivn.-^, 

sentence  containing  them  is  ^»;.'^:;  ;^';'  '  ^;  .^*;  e n  i.  ' ' --ted  in  tlie  author:s  statement, 
except  thatthepresents^'/O  or/f)./);'/A«/  aM.<)n^^^  nieierer  de  meis  civibu-  hi.  etc.  , 
to  r.  re>»eiu  them  as -uarded  opinions  ^Vi  if  ,  tV-  Tie  Fin  1  :i.-  0/nnor,  eis  crura 
5i;y;?I  :i^>nld  --einyc.mn.rymenba.ly  ^^^%^^',,^  «tc^b.  Rose.  A.  20, 
sutlVini,'anlur  quum,  etc.  ,  I  Otlieie  uicu      „ 

'%  W  (Manses  of  iitcVirect  discourse  are  either  dirertl./  or  iiulireetly 
ai^'o:T:.r^.  (so.neti.nes  a  no.ni)  of  sayi.i,,  thi.iUin,,  ory^^- 

dene.ulent  on  such  verbs,  they  arc  called  oi,LiQi  E  "^''/^^'^y  ^ 

all  those  thoughts  and  utterancesw^^ 

'-:^^;;,;;zr.'rn^^         be  -j;- «^;!^^,;- rr;;!i;|;;;w 

^nertiner  (it  does  not  concern  u-*).—  ^^v^»^  U>»ir"^**=^ 
nothiitg,  O  paiu.-  «  however  iuconveuient. 


author,  if  using  his  own  words  in  dii'ect  statement,  would  express  in  the 
form  of  an  independent  sentence  (Ex.  a). 

Chiuses  of  indirect  discourse  dependent  on  oUlqne  clauses  are  called 
suBOBLiQUE  CLAUSES,  Containing  those  utterances  which  the  speaker, 
even  in  direct  statement,  conceives  and  expresses  ^%  clauses  (Ex.  h). 

Obuqi-e  CLArsF.s  :  Dcmocritus  dicit  innumeraUTis  esce  mvndos.  Cic.  Acad.  4, 


a. 


».,.  (I)ireet:  Inrvinuiiihik-^,  inquit,  sunt  mnndi).-  \  entns  est  ve  hmtiurn  impejum 
suxtbiere  nm  j)0,*set :  He  was  afraid  (  ^  lie  thoutrht)  he  could  not  resist  the  attack  of  the 
enemy  Civs.  13.  G.  5.  47.  (Direct  :  '  Hostinm  i>npettfm\  iuquH  ' smtinere  iwnjw/ero  ). 
— Oulrslvit  a  mcdicis  qiiemadrmdmn  se  hablret ;  He  aslicd  the  physicians  what  was 
the  character  of  his  disease.  Nep.  Dion.  2.  (Direct :  '  Ouemadmodum  •  niQU't,  vie 
liat-  o"  ^y—  Orilbant  vt  i^e  cihojitrdrent  ;  They  prayed  to  help  tlum  to  food.  ties.  15.  Lr. 
7,78.    "(Direct:  'A^(wd6o',  inquiunt, 'a/:/;"»".?^^.'')-  ....  .  ,_,      .   - 

b  SiBOBLiQUE  clauses:  Neirat  Epicilrus  jucnndo  posse  vivi  visi  crim  rirtuteyita- 
frr  '  Epicurus  pay?  that  men  cannot  live  happily  vnle.-^s  they  lire  virtuou.«hj  (l>"(;ct : 
Miicunde\  inquit,  '  vivi  non  potest  rdsi  cmn  lirtufe  viriti/r').  Cic  Tusc.  3,  2(),  49  — 
Damocles  exonlvit  Dionvsium  ut  abirc  WcXireX,  quod  jam.  beatus  noUet  esse ;  Damocles 
imploicd  Dionvsius  to  h't  him  depart  because  he  did  not  care  any  lonqer  to  be  happy. 
lb.  5,  21,  G2.    (Direct :  '  Liceat  mihi  \  inquit,  '  abire,  quod  jam  beatus  nolo  esse  ). 

(?)    OBLIQUE   CLAUSES. 

§  598.  Oblique  clauses  are  either  declarative,  imperative  or  interroga- 
tive (5^  378,  4).  The  declarative  oblique  clauses  generally  have  the  form 
of  infinitive-clauses,  but  if  dependent  on  certain  verbs  of  saying  or  think- 
ing they  either  must  or  maybe  finite  (see  Rem.  82-85).  Imperative  and 
inrerrogative  clauses  are  always  finite*.  All  finite  oblique  clauses  have  tUir 
predicides  in  the  subjunctive.  For  apparent  exceptions  see  Rem.  82,  Obs.  3. 

Rem  81  Oblique  clauses  have  the  form  of  an  infinitive  clause  if 
the  indirect  statement  contained  in  them  is  declarative,  and  dependent  on 
those  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  which,  according  to  the  general  rules 
(i;  393  R  '^O  require  the  construction  of  an  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive. '  Foi^  examples  see  the  Ex.  to  A*.  86.  For  the  instances  when  a 
nominative  with  tlie  infinitive  must  be  used,  see  §  402. 

Ob«  1  In  the  historians,  verbs  of  snyin?irovernin?  oblique  clauses  are  frequently  ?/;i- 
.^?sW'if"asih  supplied  Vn.m  the  connection,  as:  .E-hii  leu'il.os  ad  O^sarem  mittnnt 
ro  Amm  atixili    n  :  Ita  sc  omni  tempore  de  populo  Roman.,  wenfps  e.sse  ur  etc.  ;  1  h e 

Thn/"  sent  e  v..  St,,  Caesar  t(.  appiv  for  h.-lp  :  Thnjhadnt  all  tjmes  so  well  demjed 
of  t  le  Ronvin   .e.M.le  that,  .-tc,  Ca's.  B.  G.  L  11,  (supply  :   TTViO  said  (qvi  dicerent).  they 
L    etc    -DiTtiia^^  ccrpitnequid  gravius  in  fratrem  statueret : 

^^;/semaeSe  rl^xc.  ;  Diviriacus  be..u,  to  nnplor..  Cir^^ar  n.,t  to  take  «"y  ha^^^o"'    In 
ires  a<-ainst  his  brc.tlier.    He  said  that  he  knew  this  to  be  true.  etc.  Cie^.  B  G.  1. J'-  ^" 
r,.,th  ^cnu-nces  verbs  of  .aying  are  implied  in  the  governing  verbs  rogatum  and  obse- 
crdre. 

On-  2  The  construction  of  ordinarv  verbs  of  sayin-  and  thinkin-  with  9'"'><J  a"[}.tbe 
.ubiincTive  instead  of  an  inflni.ive  cla'use  belon-s  t.>  late  Latinity.  e>^P<^c.ally  that  of  tbe 
Ssias  ca  auth<,rs.  But  some  traces  of  this  construction  occur  in  ante-chssical 
Hud  c1  s«ical \t  t"^  Thus  Plautus  construe,  sdo  with  9'/o^/ at'd  the  subjunctive  in 
Tl  nil  7(1  ami  Cicero  connects  the  same  construction  with  inteUiqerem  bin.  5,  11,  30, 
uu\iH\t^\n\cVri  25  81  In  Liv  3  52  2.  almost  all  ..f  the  older  editions  gave 
Jd/«m;i;.;5r.r;^'vL^^  bemg  supported  by  the  codices,  the 

readinirs  of  which  are  senseless. 


For  exceptions  in  regard  to  interrogative  clauses  in  the  oratio  obfiqua  see  p.  769,  6. 


388 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


li 

u\  1 


lem  83.  01)liquc  doclarativc  clauses  take  the  form  of  a  finite  clause, 
.„  place  of  an  infinitive  clause,  if  the  verbs  of  saying,  leeliutr,  etc.,  on 
which  they  are  made  dependent  reciuire  to  be  conslrned  Willi  nt  (/id, 
quill),  or  \villi  quod  (J5  o\i''i,  K.  ^T,  28). 

Ob^   1    Verb^  of  saviii",  etc.,  which  require  this  construction,  or  admit  of  it  (in  which 
ca.'e  cithera  rtniteclan.e  or  an  intli.itive  clause  may  l»e  usrcl»,  ahvays  ^'••"'^''/V./'nu/'nVn.r 
the  ideaof  mijingj-tding,  etc.,  some  other  idea  relcrniii,'  lo  the  charactt/  ol  the  utitr- 

"""^;  A  n-w^c^lS  rcf;;;?ril;^';;;f...  or  gum  (the  .reatost  ,wt  of  the  y^h.  -J^-y^^^^ 
coustriu'd   wiih    tliesc  coiijiiiRfions   <;()vtru   ti/ipovfit'e  da'fsfs,  li.  ^..}.       1  lio>t  \\  iiitii 


G.  1,  34.     Since  these  conjiiucMons  always  reqimv  tin-  siihjunctivc  (if  tluy  nuan  *  that 

lu^siticatioii  of  siicli  ol)liiiuc  clauses  IS  iiiiuurtaiit  <»iily 


I)laced  anion-'  the  ol)li(iue  clauses,  the  same  a>  intinitive  daures,   which  may  Irequently 
be  subslituled  for  them  {li.  VI).  ^ee  §  3'.)J,  14.  2s,  -21».* 
Obs.  2.  Quod-clause;*  dependent  on  the  verbs  of  sayinjr.  fec'lini.'.  etc.,  mentioned  Obs.  1, 


(Direct :  Laudans  Africilnum  'Ab-tineiis;  iiuiuit,  '  fuit").—  Ca-sur  jiraviler  .Kduos  arni- 
mt  Q'lod  (lb  tis  mil  ><ut>ltrltur  ;  Ciesar  earnestly  chanjtd  ttie  .Edui  aith  Ituvixij  Utm  icKfi- 
o'lt  axsistance.  Ca-s.  IJ.  (J.  1,  KJ.-  C'a-aar  mihi  vjiumil  per  iittera»  quod  iion  ««^('«^'«'^^ 
Cic-ar,  in  liis  lerter,  exc'i.-<eji  me  for  fiiUhiq  to  roine  (my  stayiii*,'  away).  (  ic.  Att.  in,  d't,  ^. 
See  Kx.  1-5.—  Rarely  the  author,  by  ^uch  Quod-clauses,  conveys  factt»  from  his  own 
standpoint  a^  author,  in  which  instance  tiie  predicates  are  placed  m  ilie  u,dicatin\  as  : 
V Wwm  re pr(-hen>n<  (I no, I  hWrXw^  patrOnum  j/<f(//>a^  eiim  qui  tum  m  mI^erus  «-rat  .'  Do 
voii  lliid  fault  'vltk  the  r<u't  that  the  fiee.iman  aided  hid  former,  master  who  at  that  time 
wa^  in  distres!?  ?  Cic.  Verr.  1,  47,  \l\.  Here  the  character  of  tlie  aid,  namely  that  it  was 
bestowed  by  a  freedman  on  Ids  former  ma.>^ter  iu  distress,  is  a  lellcction  ()i  the  anlhoi\ 
and  not  of  the  subject  of  repieheiidis.  Had  Cicero  u.<ed  the  mere  iiam.s  of  ttie  parlies 
the  thou-'hr  would  have  been  represented  as  that  of  the  subject,  and  the  predicatt;  would 
have  been  in  the  i-ubjunctive  (J//?;m/).— Often  the  indicative  is  used  after  ^'^orf  iu  re- 
ijard  to  present  actual  facts  (Ex.  W).    See  pp.  5'.K)  and  698. 

*  That  the  Latins  did  not  conceive  Quod-clauses,  dependent  on  the  verl)s  mentioned 
above,  as  '  causal  clauses'  is  made  evident  l)y  the  fact  tliat  the  use  of  quia,  qnoiuatn,  or 
of  theottier  causal  conjunction- 


not  admissibi 


conjunction 


clauses  and  ordinary  causal  clauses.     Hence,  from  the  siandpoint  of  tiie  En<rli^h  coiic«-p- 


lion  we  would  consider  tlie-e  clauses  a^'  sub()l)li«iue  or  •  (lua-i-siib-oblique  (li.  S(. ;  It.  »8  ; 
Obs  2.),  which  would  not  becorrect  for  tin;  Latin  standpoint.  This  want  ot  distinction, 
in  En<'lish.  between  the  two  kinds  of  clauses,  may  oiten  cause  ambi^'uiiies,  as  :  lie 
praises  him  f}ecause  he  is  his  friend/  which  may  mean,  *  He  praises  liim  fort/u  Jact  that 
he  is  his  friend,'  or  'He  praises  him  f(»r  soinethiiii,',.//y>/M //^6'  rea-^oii  that  he  Js  his  triend. 
The  latter  would  require  quia  or  quonUiii  iu  Latin,  while  the  former  would  be  expre^bcd 
by  quod. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


389 


OP.   3   If  the  author  introduces  .e....?JaMt^(lo^calj.^^ 

i.^''eic';  whic  h  re.iu,re  'l^^^;^^X:u!^^^:')]^^do!p^od^^^^  /  ^  «»»  g^f^ 

piV-dicaie  i^  almoM  always  i''  .\'^/'  .'^'^^i'^^l.''^^  ^d  aUmadvermm  e.^t  m  eos  .  on  de- 
liat  I  have  iiiterrupicd  you.  9'^^,    ^i f:^!:^.//.,-/!  sT^Y  /rt'/^/o  '  I  must  not  tind  laultwith 
\^':olp;ehendere  ;  Muod  vij-  ,\;',;;  ^^K^^.a   t  u^e^  be^t..wed  on  brave 

tlH.  lac't  thai  these  ^]i^'\-^:'''' S;t^^^^^^^^^^  l\wd  te  ubi  vi^uru.  dm  'f^^XJJ^^l^^''^. 

;-i!;f^:r;:^;^rrix^rd^;rr^^ 

!;,!;'„.;  Onyouracc.,untatwo-lold.ohcmuicat^^^^^^^^  V,^_^^^  .^  ' '^ ;;''j')\VTl^<i 

l.'T;  u;'i\TV'TS.Xim;iyh"^         U.nouia'.A  Oe  so  (Comp.  p.542,  ^014,  p.  54.3, 

A'.'l.i ;  p.  «ili;  «i'.»0,  B.;  p.  TC»;  ^l » -  ^^'-'  1^|;  ,     ^,1  .^,t  „,  verbs  construed  with  a  Qttod- 

Ob-^  4    If  the  person  or  thin?  represented  aH   ho  oi>J«^^        int..  a  relative  clause,  which 

,^,';  i;!detin\te,  the  Q'}"^-  i'^i^l^lll^f  ^^^  ,^hi^  s  ^^e  a.  ;  Kpicurei  huidant  eos 
takes  the  san,e  mood  as  .he  Q;;"i;^,^^^?^„n "  raisL  those  who  die  with  ^'^^""".'i-Vform 
(jui  aqua  ainmo  monautur :  1  '''^*-  "\"\^,,,.  Atinite,  the  statement  would  have  the  lorm 

^j'uVc.  8.  -^9.  7-2.     If  the  -':4^\^  ^Vt^e?;^^;^^  ^*^"  ^^"^"  ^* 

of  a  (iuod-clause  (Epicurci  laudant  ^^^!  «'^  ^  .eptimo  die  po-t  lilite  mortem  hos- 

]    .E-chine.  in  Demosthi-nem  ^".rM^^«/^  S>Hf,cls^^dednia  lelio  C«sari  gratios  egxt 
tia-  ^nmolaurWK  Cic.  Tusc.  3.;2(..  bj  -  2    1  nnc^ps    atu  ^^.  j^^,^.,,,,^.„^  n.irantur 

'^^'^^^^^:^  a^ey;.  saying,  .Ui^U- 

yolUion,  and  i.dv.ce)  >s  by  "^^^^^^.^^  ,hc  clause  is  generally 

OB-    1    For  Ihc  conMruction  of  imperative  etaUMS  .n  the 

<t:/tTmrT::;l«.r:e' dLsest;.  „,a,i^ 

:;;S:,^v"l!^;^-;V^if^"^J,V|;..r...^ 

ihat.  etc.;  they  grudge  you  that,  etc. 


390 


CSE   OF  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DErENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


391 


a  snis  Tyndaridis  peferet ;  Scopa?  said  lo  Siinonidop  he  iconhl  give  him  half  of  what  he 
liad  l)ai gained  lor;  tlie  rust  he  should  take  from  his  Tyndaridc?-.  Cic.  Or.  2,  80,  352.  See 
£x.  1.  4. 

Obs.  3.  Often  the  j^ovcrninc;  verbs  of  command,  etc.,  mnst  be  snpj)lied  from  the  con- 
nection, the  same  as  verbs  of  sayinL'  will)  declarative  oblique  clauses:  rrociimbunt 
ad  pi'dc's,  fie  piilclu-rrimani  [otTiis"  (iallia'  urlx'in  suis  inaiiii)iis  succi'iuh're  cofitrentur  ; 
Tliey  fall  to  tluir  kiifi-s  (f/e.<f<clnn(f  Vi7'ciii(/etorix)  not  too'ini»!  them  lo  burn  the  fiueat 
city  in  all  (iaul  with  their  own  hands.  Cais.  li.  G.  7,  1.').     See  Ex.  5. 

Oi'.s.  4.  Oblique  imperative  clauses,  if  not  introduced  by  a  conjunction,  have  tlie  same 
form  as  those  JiKlfpcndeiit  imperative  sentences  which  tike  their  predicate  in  the  subjunc- 
tive, except  that  the  subjunctive  of  an- independent  imperative  sentence  is  always  in  the 
present  (st>metimes  in  the  perfect),  when-as  the  subjimctive  of  the  clause  is  subject  to  the 
law  of  consetution,  and  hence  imnj  he  in  the  imperfect.     See  Ex.  1. 

1.  C'icsar  respondit,  si  quid  velleiit,  ad  Idus  \\n\\\A  rfvertirentnr.  C:ps.  B.  G.  1,7. — 
2.  Pf'tieri/nt  ne  se  et  liberos  hostibus  dt-derent.  lb.  7,  2tJ.—  'i.  Plerlque  c^nsefianl^  ut 
noctu  Iwrfart-nnt.  Ih.  H.  i\  1.  (»7.-4.  Vercini,'et()rix  dicit.perf<irile  essefactu  Irumen- 
tationibus-  Ho  rflnos  jtrohibcre.  a'cpio  modo^  animo  sua  ipsi  frumenta  con'i//n/>ant 
KdillciiKjue  iuctntlnnt.  lb.  I^  (i.  7,  «U,—  h.  LcLratiunem  ad  (Yassum  mittunt.  si  velit 
8UOS  recipere,  obsides  sibi  rtniUtat.  lb.  3,  8.  [For  more  examples  see  the  Ex.  13  foil, 
to  Kern.  8().] 

Rem.  84.  If  an  oblique  clause  depoiukMit  on  a  verb  (or  nonn)  of  say- 
in*^,  etc.,  is  conceived  a>^  an  int<MT( miration,  the  predicate  is  retrnlaii}'  (bnt 
see  W.  H.l.  Ous.  7)  in  llie  si  lurNCTivi:,  the  obruine  clause  being  called 
*iNDiiiKCT  QUKSTiON'or  '  INTKKKOG.VTIVK  CLAUSE*.  Tlieso  clanscs  are 
introduced  by  the  satiie  jiarticles,  adjectives,  and  adverbs  as  the  direct 
questions  (^  123 ;  but  see  Hem.  85,  Ous.  7). 

.Epaniinondas  qucei^lrif  salvus//^  e-ifief  clipeus  ;  Ep.  n>>l'ed  whether  his  shield  wa?  pafe. 
Cic.  Fin.  2.  "iO. —  .Menedr-nnis  qinni/xtt  ,'iir  (\v  scril)endis  le<;il)U!»  litlera  nulla  in  e<^rum 
libris  hn-fuirtt'ir  :  M.  a?^ke(l  irhy  in  their  writ  iiiirs  not  a  word  /ra^Joi/nd  on  the  makin<xof 
laws.  lb.  Or.  1,  11»,  ^<i. —  C'lodius  inttrrofjd/iat  suos  ^«iv  txset  qui"  plebem  lame  in'c5ret  ; 
Clodius  asked  his  <;antf  m;A6»  it  teas  that  was  starviui,'  the  people,  lb.  Qu.  Fr.  2,  .3,  2. 

Rem.  8.").  Iiulirect  questions  are  divided  into  rnopp:R  and  iMrnorER 
ones.  Proper  interrouative  clauses  are  those  that  are  made  dependent 
on  a  verb  or  noun  of  sayinu^  \viiicli  implies  the  askinu^  of  a  question,  as 
gucerere,  qna'Mio,  i)iferr<>f/(lrc  and  their  etpiivalents,  as  in  the  e.\anii)le3  to 
li.  84. —  Improper  interroirative  clauses  are  those  which  depend  on  other 
verbs  or  nomis.  These  have  only  the  irrahiinatical  form  and  construc- 
tion of  interron-ative  clauses  Avithout  beinir  conceived  as  questions  actu- 
ally asked  b}'  the  subject  introduced.     tSee  Ons.  1. 

Obs.  1.  Improper  iuterroirative  clauses  are  used  in  the  followinjj  instances  : 
(a)  If  the  clause  coiUains  actions  represented  as  i'nceutain  or  inknown.  and  the 
principal  predicate  states  the  kind  of  this  unceutaintv.  Such  predicates  are  Dut^- 
tdre,  dubium  est,  incertum  est.  non  lUiuet,  audnrjfre,  nefc'ire,  o(/tifii<ci,  adnnidti  (in  the 
m«'aniiii;  *  I  wond>-r  how.''  etc.),  as  :  IhifAtn  n>t/n  idem  tibi  suadeie  (piod  mihi  defjenm  ; 
I  doubt  whether  lemght  to  j,'ive  you  the  same  advice  as  [I  would]  to  myself.  IMiu.  Ep.  (»,  27. 
—  Jncertum  est  quo  ie  loco  mors  exs/)ectet ,'  It  is  unceriiiin  at  what  j)iace  death  waits  for 
you.  Sen.  Ep.  2ti.—  ()i/>d  \\oW\<  agendum  sit  nescio  ;  I  do  not  know  what  we  shall  do. 
Cic.  Att.  12.  7. —  Ilic  I'arquinius.  Prisci  Tarquinii  &\\\\s  fuerit  neposve.  pftritm  Uuuet  ;  It 
i«  not  quite  clear  wheth'r  this  Tarquinius  wtix  the  sou* or  iriandson  of  Priscus  Tanpiin- 
ius.  Liv.  1,4*). —  Hie  ita  nej^iii^ens  vot)is  rUlehitur.  \\\  vnde  audurit  ot/nfi/s  sit;  This 
man  will  appear  to  you  as  so  netrlii^enr  as  to  have  for^/oftt^n  where  he  heard  [these 
things].  Cic.  Plane.  2.3.  57.—  Adinirari  >olC't)am  undv  essef  ilia  taiita  tibi  in  causis  divini- 
tas  ;  I  used  to  wonder  ivhence  had  come  to  you  (how  yiui  had  aeipiired)  this  transcendent 
tact  (this  inspirarion)  in  judicial  transactions.  Cic.  Or.  2,  S9.  3ti2.  Ex.  1.  2.  22.  2:1  29. 

(l>)  If  the  principal  predicate;  de-i,i;nates  an  action  by  which  the  uncertainty  repre- 
pented  by  the  clause  is,  was.  or  maybe  removed  (U*  defined.  The  verbs  ^overuiiiLr  such 
'nuiirect  que-'ii(»ns''  are.  mostly,  verbs  of  savinir,  knc.wiuL'.  learninir,  showin;;,  teachinj;, 

>  CVn,<j5r«.  if  meaning:*  to  beof  opinion  that  somethinj;,s7tM//</l>edone'  (i.  e..  if  theclauso 
isimp»'rative>,  may  also  take  an  intlnitive  clause  with  a  jrerundial  predicate  (ut  iter  fac&- 
rent.,  or  iter  faciendum  esse). — '•'  foraging.— ^  they  should  only  will»  good  grace  destroy,  etc 


. 


iii'iiidiu"  as.  aferre  (to  allege),  diceie,  f  ^1^^/^'  ""^,.''',;,^^^      exiiicdre^exponere,  videre, 

circa  m^^idce  re,  prm'ipere,  curare  and  '«^^'"^/^J^jf '„  .   ^.  meaning  '  to  look  out^  and    to 
Oo  chiose  between  alternatives)  ..r^/>^.V<^^  ,,r),  and  many  other 

cxuectM.  many  iiupers.)nal  predicates  (as  •/^'f'/.^Vo^^^^^       QUije  apud  CicerOnem  gerun- 
Sf.re>si!;nsc,f%iu.llarinu.<.rt;as:Ibj^^c^^ 

?/  r?  7-  non  poluit  iHer  utri  virtule  ^"«'"^^''•^IV'^ri.Vv.'  ol  if,  >   44.-  Doceant  qui  vir  Sex. 

pmn'ise's.  II».  l.-).*44.  Ex.  3-5.  11-17.  19.  fO- 24        _  ..^.^^^  Interrogations,  have  the  force 
^  ^c    Sometiuu'si.uerr..gativeclaus.-s  tlKs  mcas^^^^  ar/a/ //.o  ;  If 

of  a  negative  declakative  ^lay '  ^  •  ^!  /.'  (fnn  afraid  what  Ino  would  do ;  I  am 
Uu-e._'o(is  don<.t  exist,  ^  how  mil  /««■/%''•,.  \^  'II;  44 

uVraid  we  could  do  uotlung  with  Ino).  Cic.  N.  »•  ^' ^^J  ^^"  .overuing  verb  of 

Ob«<  2   As  in  other  obli(iue  clauses  so  in  J'^-'-TJ    tcrasS^^^  (i-  '■  ^"  ^V^' 

savim-,  etf..  is  fre<,uently  understood,  as  :  ,^'^,^;'     ,  I'.^J^^rf^^V/n  ,  esset ;  Labienus  in- 
K  IV-i/ii/    gaau/o  cum  periculo  l^'^'J''''^^ 'V.^  ^\!^'  u  ht  ^iou  the  wlnter-qu^ 
fo  mtVuVsarbv  letter  how  dangerous  It  was  to  c^^^  ,      f,,j.n,  ^f  indirect, 

ci^  U.  G.  5,  47.  Here  belong  l»»>^^'  f?';'' 1^^.,.^' 'it  is  the  same'  (whether-or) 
questions  in  which  such  expressions  s  it  isimlim.uit^^  UnbeciUlne  simus,  non  esse  id 
must  be  suiM>li^'<l^  J^^  :  Fatenuir,  '''•"/  /^ft/^^,  J  '^X/  or  gaick.  we  aeknowledore  that 
l';;,.obis  ;  Alfher  we  ^reep'^d^r  <^^^^^^'^^!^;^:  iXipersonal  •  nihil  interest^  it 
the  cause  is  not  in  us.  Cic.  tat.  J.     (.ucii-  uc       n  j 

makes  no  din'erence.)  «nhipct-clauses  of  impersonal  predi- 

OBs.  3.  Frequently  indirect  ^]^'^}^^j;'^r'J^^,!SAt!Li^^dibile  est!  embigitur.re. 

cates  (§74,  c),  as  |^-'/'-',f^^ '//'J^  conslr?^  on^^  the  intermgative  cl-»^.-«  ^^^Ve^e 
ferf.  interest  (^  42:}.  K.  .2).  l".""*-  '  ,' ,  1,  .rirallv  thev  depend  on  them  as  it  they  were 
•.'rammatieal  subjects  <.f  th(' predicates  but  lo^»caii>^  quantum  inter  omuls 

tl  e  r      •  nc.pal  predicates  :  In  oral.uibus  <^:';^f,/i;''('/;^X orators,  one  is  superior  to 

m  excellaf ,'  It  i>^  remarkable  how  "'^c-h  among  t^fj^  >^;\^,,^  ,^,^V//i.r,  etc.,'  is  ren- 
Cic.  Or.  »  .     The  K'"-'!^^»'.^'^»";^''*';''-"  Z It^,  liU  Zcne  Qvajitnr  ;  It  is  the  question 

lered  by  q.mitur  or  <J"ff^oe^  Di  'Ti^it-Q^Jioest  mrm  paMuTti^iea  .resse 
whether  there  are  any  irods  or  not  <''<^- ■^•f'-Ji;  jn,eremerit ;  //  ix  the  question  whether  9. 
}^'7^^:!^.^^^^^^!^^^^^^^^  the  country  should  t>e pumshed. 
\Z  t  tlf il^ii^r^t^IuSn^s  an;  «ttac^  t.  "cmns  of  t^snme  ^^t^J^ 

nien.ioned  Obs.  1.  In  this  "^t^'-'P^'lr,;  manet  r7 /' 1  opuH  Horatii,  utrias  Curiatu 
Jitional  or  trenitive  attribute,  "^:/'^'f^^ '"'-"A  ,.1' V  nat^^^  the  Iloratii,  and  towhtc/i 
:^:e.int;  Tl.  doubt  ^^^^^^r'Tv^C^^  "o  the  nationality  of  the  lloratu 
the  Curiatii  belonged,  still  reniains  (?.  e.  m 

and  Curiatii).  Liv.  1,  24.  See  Ex.  «..  5-  lu-  introduced  by  interrogative  adjpe- 

Oh-    '■,    Relative-interroirative  clauses  (t.  ^- t'\*';^,^J\,?rdinary  (declarative  relative 

2  ;  §  359).  as  :  -.„„,  /,^,vr^»/wrco^noscebat;    There  he  took 

1    INTEUROOATIVE  t  Ibi  9'/<^  ad  Avancum  J7^?m»/wr  CO  u  ^^^^^  ^^^^^^^  .^  interroga- 

not'iceo^-  what  was  going  on  ''V^^i-i?       1  pm  ^T  VK  •  Poste5quam  illinc  discessi  9"« 

I  h,ve  I..1<1  von  what  I/l,Mu.  e..  >>>.V  ""  '  nl^r"  ^i.ivc  ",  Latin,  and  relative  m 

Ji  1^1.  Cic.  or.  i.  «.-..  X>U.     n  ''«.«^'""'"if,,:  .f;  '^„jj  «„&  loqnar  ;  For  Willi  you  I  will 
Ei"islil.«-I!.;^AT.VK:  Nam  te^cuin  a  e.,^^^^^ 

;X^^''S^rSuiCa?V?^S^e'"n'"E'Sir.r^inii  tUey  mistake  Kii.Ush   Cause, 


V, 


392 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


In  thopc  instances  where  the  predicate  of  a  rehitivc  clause,  hy  the  jjeneral  rules  on  sub- 
oblique  clauses  (§  o'M),  or  by  the  special  rules  on  relative  clau;^es  (B.  VI.),  is  required  to 
be  in  \he  /^'nfjuiirfive.  a  i;lven  clause  may  oHeu  be  taken  either  for  a  relative  or  for  an 
interroirative  claube,  because  in  this  instance  the  grammatical  tonus  of  both  entirely 
a<:rce  with  each  other,  as:  Ut  di  le<,'ercnt  qui  /lomen  /i(/i\e  i/HA  danf ;  In  order  that  tho 
jxods  might  select  (him)  who  should  give  a  name  to  the  new  city.  Liv.  1,  ti.  This  sen- 
tence may  be  taken  for  a  relative  (  =  ut  di  legerent  evin  qui  daret),  where  the  subjunc- 
tive (la ret  mx^ht  he  taken  either  for  a  sul)junctive  by  attraction,  or  for  a  subjunctive  pe- 
culiar to  relative  clause»  (B.  VI.) :  or  it  may  be  taken  lor  an  interrogative  cl.iuse  (ih.it 
the  gods  should  determine  the  (/uesfion  who  was  to  give,  etc.).  Since  both  kinds  of  clauses 
l)re<isely  meet  at  this  point,  both  inform  and  meaninir,  it  is  idle  to  si)eculate  whether  the 
author  7n(ant  the  clause  to  be  an  interrogative  or  a  relative,  just  as  if  the  question  would 
be  raised  whether  Livyin  a  given  passage,  meant  the  accusative  ;>/t6^/n  to  he  the  accusa- 
tive of  plebes  after  the  .5th  deeleiision,  or  of  jttebft  after  thcr  third. —  His  rebus  gestis  La- 
biSno  relicto,  ut  qwE  in  O'aliid  e/en /vnf/ir  cognosceret,  Casar  navis  solvit  (after  Labienus 
was  left  behind  to  keep  himself  informed  of  w/iat  na>:  (joing  on  in  CJaul;.  C'ics.  IJ.  (i.  5, 
y.  The  clause  quee.  .(lererentur  (\n  Euijlish  a  clear  relative  clause)  may  betaken  for  a 
quasi-suboblique  relative  clause  according  to  Rem.  81),  Ous.  2  (ut  ea  quoi  rjererentur  cog- 
nosceret),  or  for  an  interrogative  clause  (  =  quid  gererttu7\  as  in  Cies.  B.  G.  5, 4S,  quoted 
in  Obs.  1,  b).  But  according  to  the  princii)le  explained  Obs.  G,  the  latter  alleruative  must 
be  considered  correct. 


Obs. 


6.  In  which  imtance^  doen  the 


doen  the  Latin  language  erpref.^  a  given  thmight  in  the  form 
of  an  interrogatice  chiKxe,  and  whtn  inn.^t  the  for'in  of  a  relatire  rla>/<e  be  r(,sedf—  'I'liis 
question  cannot  be  divided  according  to  the 'iisag*' of  the  Kni,dish  languatre,  in  which 
relative  clauses  are  frecjuently  required  or  prelerred  where  the  Latin  language  must  cm- 
ploy  an  indirect  question  (Ons.  5^ 

(a)  The  form  of  interrogative  clauses  in  Latin  cannot  be  used  otherwise  than  in  the 
instances  mentioned  Obs.  1.  Hence  the  interroL'ative  form  cannot  be  used  (I)  if  the 
governing  verb  does  not  belonir  to  the  classes  mentioned  Obs.  1  :  'J'ena  numquam  sine 
usnra  reildit  quod  accepit  (not  qidd  acce/f^-ri')  ;  'I'he  earth  never  rtturna  without  interest 
tcttat  it  has  received.  Cic.  Sen.  15,51,—  I'fnnn  til>i  commodum  e-4  elige  (not  ufri/fn..d()  ; 
Choose  either,  whichever  is  convenient  to  yon.  Cie.  Verr.  2,  2,  Gl.  Here  idru/n  is  not  an 
iuterrojjative  adjective,  but  a  relative  endosini,'  its  own  antecedent,  and  used  with  the 
force  or  idrunicitnque,  in  the  same  way  as  the  Kmrlish  *  what '.—  ri)  If  the  ^'ovtrnim:  verb, 
beloiiLTiui:  to  the  classes  mentioned  (,)bs.  l,does  not  represent  the  th()U<,'lit  of  the  danse 
as  doubtful  or  uncertain,  nor  reun)ves  such  an  uncertainty,  a-^ :  C'jesar  qiutril  e.v  solo  ea 
gum  in  eonventu  diu-erat  (not  qme  dij'inKtt)  •  Caesar  asked  him  privately  about  what  he 
had  said  in  the  convention,  (jes.  B.  (J.  1,  IS.  [Tht^  question  was  not  '  What  did  you  say 
in  the  eoiiveiition  ':\  which  was  known  to  both  parties;  hut  'Are  the  things  true  wnicli 
have  btHMi  said  in  the  convi'ution:' '  |.—  (^ucErdinus  (i.  e.  investi-C-mus)  vtA  malelicium 
et  est  et  inveiiTii /;o/6n7  /  Jj(  u-!  make  our  inquiries  (there,  at  the  place)  M'//<-/'g  the  crime 
lies  and  w/ure  it  may  f>t  detected.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  ;iO.  The  question  is  not  about  i\\c  place 
of  the  crime,  which  was  conceded  by  all  parties  to  be  certain.  Interrogatively  expressed 
(ufji  malejici'im-sit),  the  clause  would  denote  that,  the  place  was  unknown,  and  was  to  be 
found  out  by  the  inquiry  ('let  us  iiujuire  at  what  place-  the  crime  was  committed*).— 
Soles  tu  iia'c  studiose  incestigare  qidt  sunt  in  eo  irenere;  You  are  wont  to  incestigate 
with  zeal  the  thingn  which  l)eloni,'  to  this  class.  Cic.  Hep.  1,  11,  17.  Here  the  'things' 
are  represented  as  certain,  being  assigned  to  a  gicen  cla>s.  H'  the  clause  is  expressed 
interrogatively  {qmE  sint  in  eo  i:enere  ;  ]Vhat  things  belong  to  this  classy),  the  ihiuirs 
would  be  represented  as  uncertain  in  n'gard  to  chissiiication.  this  uncertainty  to  bo 
removed  by  the  ^  invedigdre'.—  In  all  these  insiances  the  English  idiom  perfectly  coin- 
cides with  the  Latin. 

{h)  But  if  the  clause  answers  to  tho  requirements  of  the  rule  in  Ors.  1,  it  must  gene- 
rally assume  an  interroirative  form  in  Latin,  while  the  English  lam^uau'e  prefers  or  re- 
quires a  relative  form  wheiu^vcr  the  antecedent  of  the  connecting  lorm  adjective  or  ad- 
verb maybe  made  an  object  (prepositimial  or  otherwise»  of  the  governing  verb;  as: 
1.  Ciesar  (/wi'i  vectigaiis  populo   Uonulno  Britannia  penderet  conj<tituit  ;  Cm^ar  jLced  a 


\inquestionably  relativtr  for  interrogative  clauses.  Tims  Mad  vig  (in  Thacher's  paraphrase. 
J).  ;i!l)  says:  "The  beginner  must  avoid  ronfoiiiiiliiig  dependent  (lUistions  with  thoso 
relative  clauses  which  in  Englirh  bcLriu  with  ivha*.  Dico  quv)1)  skntio,  J  .'«tij  wh'd.  1 
think,  i.  e.  wliat  1  saij  i.-<  my  rea'.  o/nnion ;  Dicam  quid  skntiam  :  /  shall  tell  what  1 
think, I.e.  I  shall  state  what  my  opinion  i'i.''  In  the  last  sentence  Madviir  irives  likewise 
the  present  di'V,  which  his  translator,  from  reasons  l)est  known  to  himself,  has  changed 
into  diram.  The  fact  is,  that  both  sentences  are  in  English  liKLATivK,  and  cannot, 
in  the  way  they  are  given,  assist  the  beginner  '  to  avoid  confuu/idmg  dependent  questions 
ivith  relative  clauses.'' 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


393 


V 


. 


tribute  7rAicA(less  frcquentlv  ' detei^nned  what  tribute')  Britanny  was  to  pay  to  the 
Roman  people.  Cses.  B.  G.  5.  '22.- '2.  Nihil  fuit  turpius  quam  quod  etiam  "'  ^^«''P  i=^  f" 
livi.<c-^hatur  quid  paullo  ante  po^uls^sef ;  The  most  disgraceful  thing  wa<  that  e\ui  in 
writing  he  would  forgtt  what  he  had  jn^t  stated  before.  Cic.  Brut  (it»,  2'8.-  -i-  N^-b  ^<> 
tare  ouanti  homo  sit ;  Do  not  look  at  what  a  mm  may  be  ivorth  U.  «.at  that  which  a 
man.  etc.).  lb.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  '2,  4.-  4.  Ignilri,  quid  m  unaquaque  re  vitii  ^^^  iieqiicnntjudt- 
care  •  The  i<Miorant  cannot  j'/^/7«  of  (discover)  the  faults  wlack  thim^rs  nniy  have.  ID.  un. 
3  •/  r,  -  In  aM  ilR'seexan.plesthe  EuLdish  clauses  are  relative,  while  m  Latm  they  must 
be  interrooaUve,  hince  the  clauses  are  r-presented  as  uncertain  orunkn<>wn,  and  the 
actions  of  the  governing  verbs  (belonging  to  the  classes  of  Obs.  1)  as  either  asserting 
the'^e  oualities  of  the  clauses,  or  removing  them.  ^       ..  v,-  u 

(c)  EXCKPT10N3  TO  RULE  (6).-  If  the  clause  contains  past  or  P^^^^^-t  actions  wdii^^^^^^ 
althou-di  unknown  to  the  person  spoken  to  or  spoken  of,  are  represented  as  dehnitc  ana 
ceriaii.  liicts,  the  relative  form  mal  be  used  ;  as  :  Ju-urilia  {etx)  qu(ByUl*^\\n^a.gebatex 
nuntiis  ao-Tpit ;  Ju-rurtha  learned  from  his  messengers  tvhat  Metellus  was  doing  h^\\. 
Ju-  4(5  r.Ju.M  rtha  did  not  know  the  doings  of  Metellus  before  he  was  i"f^™^'d  by  he 
me^ssen.rers  r^  the  doings  of  Metellus  being  stated  in  previous  chapters,  the  auhor, 
by  using  the  relative  form,  represents  them  as  known  to  the  '-^^«d^;'- ^'^^/^""^H^^Vj'^- 
able  auMdetinite  f  .cts.]-  Vidednvismmc  strictim  «"^^  PO^t  mortem  .S^'J-  R"*^^  »  f  ^  J® 
T  Ko^ci  larta.^unt:  Let  us  UywAU  s'lrvei/  «-Aa^  after  Sextus  Kosc  us  s  death  wa5  done 
iv  ..u't.  K'-cius.-Cic.  Rose.  A.  :^4.  95.  [l\he  int.  rrogative form  '"l^-'''^,  l"^*^.  ^«f "  "r,vei 
but  thJ  author  prefc-rred  the  relative  form  since  the  domgs  of  K;;>;ci.'«  >  a  |  e  rel  tive 
by  the  examination  of  the  witnesses.]  From  the  same  reason  the  lo. m  of  the  rdame 
clause  is  used  in  the  example  qu..te<l  Obs.  5,  1  ,q»ce  sunt  gesta  cognoscite).-  J;^'"^?;^  ^*^  J- 
Cit  on  5  .  5.-i  2  -  S<nnetimes  the  form  of  a  relative  clause  isu-ed  to  prevent  Jinambi- 
guio:which  w<u.ld1)J  cau^ed  l>y  the  inter,o...tive  form,  as  :  ,^'!»'';"  1  '"^^'ff  ^,^\ft«^ 
ChrvMvronus  agebat ;  I  solelv  ofjs<^rred  what  Chrvsoironus  ?m.9  rf6^/^7.  t  ic.  |i"f,.  .\.  ~L  o»- 
T  l^iiuirr   ^u^^^^^  V//;e//..a7^-/>r  might  betaken  in  ihe  mvmmv^    what  he  7vould 

io  '^  n  It  c  ex:  nple  (  (.t/(l  Obs.  5.  2  {loguarq^od  sentio)  the  clause,  having  tfe  lorce  of 
'^Lfi'ZXt^nU  the  trufln,  is  not  ^ep,c4nted  as  uncertain,  -"-  «^;;^,]-"  woufd 
dressed  would  naturally  prcMime  the  speaker    o  tell  ^^'''Xw\o.^'^%i^^^^^^^^ 

™  ri,,V  -onn  no.  t "l  to  tlio  <.on,-tniclion  chosen,  a»  ;  Oi.erGjus,  «•;»-!»<  f/i«w  m  ior- 
'^M^U^^e^^^\'^"<^^S^^^"^^'  (sec  (),».  7,  .»..,1  B  VI.),  .0  thai  ,t  ,s 

^'""^J^a  ■'  ;'i  "l,;  ve  Srth.''.",i '■  Inn,.  1„„  d  .Jm  he  u„  ''^  S"' v^'i  ^'/«/«r. 
SwrV  '!■''"'  »'    "»<  <,«o,lf„lu,;„„  f.f,  ;  1.0.  „,e  knew  «''"^'ff,,*'™», ho  relative 

LLfib;;:;i'i":i,;i;ai;fi^sv^;;,iJh;;:n;e:»":2^;a,;;:™^ 

k'.:n,.^r'li;:r -:;-;-e  \^  i!^ =!S^  sni^.'^'^i^  ^^f '  !iiriS  i^ 

±nL^:^^;^^^^^  s;!u:^i;ft.n^;p;^p  ^>^/^^|i:;S  it^ 


31U 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


395 


Obs.  7.  If!  the  indicative  inclnune.^  of  thin  kind  nlwaijif  a  sure  evidence  thai  the  clause  is 
reUitire,  and  hot  in/er/w/a/ice  f  Thi;»  question  is  idfutical  witli  the  qin'siion  ^ /v/iethtr 
ever  the  predicate  of  (indirect)  interrof/afire  c/a>/ses  is  found  in  the  i  ■''/'    Most 

j^raminaruiiis  (luiiy  "this  absolutely  fi>r  classical  prose  (M  idvi^,  p.  311,  '1  i  ;  KiihiK-r, 

§  15«N,  U  :  MeiriiiC',  §  730  ;  rul)lic  Scliool  (ir.  «j  l(j2).  lint  iliat  clear  and  unqnei»tioiiable 
indirect  interroijaiive  clauses  in  a  very  few  passa.res  ol  Cicero  have  their  predicates  in 
the  indicative,  cannot  be  dispute'!.     The  lacis  are  tliesc  : 

{a)  Accordini,'  to  Obs.  (>,  clauses  wliicli,  by  the  ^'eneral  nilet»,  must  take  an  interro^jfft- 
tive  CiTm,  a.-suine  the  form  ot  relative  clauses,  il  ihe  author  hat»  an  impi>rtant  rea^on  to 
place  the  predicate  in  \\\i;  indicative.  Hence  wequite  often  llnd  clauses  with  predicates  in 
the  indicitive  where  the  introaucin»;  form-adjectives  and  adveri)s  on  accfuintof  the  lack- 
iuijc  antecedent  have  at  first  siirht  the  appearance  of  inteiToi/ativtt^ ;  as  :  l)ili>^entiain  nos- 
tra m,  au  I  V'/e-z/i  (/'i  /f /?t-//i  ad  hue  res //rO(v,swi/,  cur  pnetcreani  y  Why  should  I  not  ineniion 
our  own  ert'orlsor  /At;  ;eA7///,s'(,lineini  which  (queini  we  have  so  fat  arhicvtd  .^  L'ae-.  IJ.  C.  2, 
32.  The  t<peaker  meant  to  represent  these  results  as  unquestionable  facii*,  and  did  this 
briffly  in  the  form  ot  an  indicative  { processit.  instead  of  proc'es.-<erit),  which  was  gram- 
matically allowable,  since  the  s».'ntence  could  pass  for  a  relative  clause  with  incornoraied 
antecedent  (p.  5()(i.),  in  place  of:  'Cur  flnem  ad  quetn  res  pr(K\s\it  j)ra>tereain!!'  . —  Ex- 
actly in  the  same  way  the  following:  passaires  must  be  interpreted:  (^ui  si  7<putaverint 
vX,  (j'titjus  ii'so  temporibu<  nia<j;iii.iiilium  adfj/fus  su/n,  vt  ^iosxvn  qiue  «genera  hominum  in 
seniitum  pervenerint,  profectovxistimabunt  me  merito  judicium  aniini  mei  muia>se  ;  If 
tlu'y  consider  the  times  in  which  / ca/ne  into  the  jjovernment,  and  ihe  kind  of  persons 
who  afterwards  came  into  the  Senate,  iln-y  will  surely  think  that  I  had  a  rii:ht  to  chaii;:e 
my  views.  Sail.  .Iu<j.  4,  4.  Sallust  represents  his  own  acc»'ssion  to  the  ;^'overninent  and 
the  political  duiracier  of  that  time  as  notorious  facts,  opposini,'  it  to  tiie  •questionable  ' 
character  nf  the  men  who  obtained  power  under  Ciesar,  the  names  of  whom  he  omits, 
trcatiuLT  them  as  a 'class',  IK-nee  the  first  clause  (ir. stead  of  * j'eputai'eri/it  te/njx*7-a, 
quifjus  tenij)orifjus  ego.  .adept us  sum)  is  7'elative^  to  enable  the  author  to  usc  an  indicative 
predicate  ;  the  second  clause  icmained  interro<;ative,  the  subjunctive  predicate  an~wer- 
111!.^  the  puri)()se  of  the  author. —  Qua  df  causa  ei  quoinnn  causa  ille  hoc  pi omutqdvit.  os- 
tendi ;  J  havt'  shown  the  reason,  for  which  (why)  and  for  whose  sake  he  piomulqattd  this. 
Cic.  L.  Aijr.  3,  4,  15  (instead  of:  ostendi  cnusdiii  de  qua  cau.sti  et  quorum  causCi)^.—  Nihil 
est  in  Fal)io  aduiiratutiu<  qnam  quomodi>  mortem  fllii  tulit :  Nothinu^  is  so  admirable 
as  the  manner  in  zvhic/i  Fabiiis  bore  the  death  of  his  son.  Cic.  Sen.  4  dor  :  qnnm  modus 
quo  modo  mortem  tulit). —  Vides  enim  in  quo  cursu  suinus^  ;  For  you  see  the  situation  we 
are  in.  Cic.  Att.  1,  1.  4  (instead  of  vides  cursum  in  quo  sumus). 

(b)  The  mentioned  chanues  of  interrojzaiive  into  relative  clauses» arc  admissible  as»  lonij 
as  the  noun  connecti-d  with  the  intcrroirative  form-adj«'Ctive  nuiy  be  understood  as  an  ob- 
ject of  tlie  irovtMiiini;  predicate.  lUii  if  there  is  no  noun  connected  witii  the  interroizative, 
or  il  the  noun  could  not  be  connected  as  object  with  the  i;«)verninL,'  verb,  such  a  chanj^e  is  no 
lonijer  admissible,  and  the  predicate  should  remain  in  tiie  sul)junclive.  fre«  i/ there  were 
loiiical  reasons  which  mij^ht  make  the  indicative  mood  more correspondin::  to  the  author's 
])urp()ses.  Nevertheless  there  are  the  followin^authenticateil  passaires  in  Cicero,  where 
the  predicates  of  clauses  which  ^'raininalically  cannot  be  considered  as  relative,  are 
])laced  in  the  indicative  as  if  the  clause  were  relative.,  and  as  if  the  introducing  interroga- 
tive word  had  an  antecedent : 

1.  Meininistis  (^.  Maximo  ct  L.  MancTno  consulibus  quam  ]xtpuldns  lex  de  sacerdo- 
tiis  videbdtur  :  You  remember  Ao/r/>o/>'//«/-  the  law  on  the  priestly  otlices  /ie^-med  to  be 
in  the  year  of  (|.  Maxiinuss  and  L.  Mancintis's  consulship.  Cic.  Am.  i"),  ".Mi.  The  in- 
dicative '  rvlebtltur'  was  desiral)le  to  the  author,  since  the  subjunctive  of  the  verb 
vidtri  would  impair  the  po^-itiveness  with  wluch  (as  tlie  connection  shows)  he  meant 
to  state  the  fact  '■that  it  seemed  so\  Thus  the  author  emancipated  himself  from  a 
■jirammatical  rule  for  the  sake  of  a  logical  purpose,  perliaps  induced  by  the  close  ana- 
loi:y  of  those  (ori-inally  interro„'ative)  clauses  which  according  to  No.\a)  may  be  con- 
ceived as  relative^. 

*  This  clause  evidently  stands  on  the  dividing.'  line  where  it  may  seem  doui)tlul 
whether  the  seiittlice  could  pass  for  relativi'.  or  must  be  reckoned  among  the  i-xceptioius 
No.  (b).  Grammaficallij.  however,  then'  is  no  reason  wiiy  the  clause  should  not  be  con- 
sidered as  relative,  although  tiie  form  of  a  relative  clause  would  be  rejuignant  even  to  the 
English  idiom.  But  this  ciunot  be  a  reason  for  referring  this  passage  to  the  exceptions  No. 
(f)).  since  the  whole  question  cow^Wxs  oi i\  sf rict I y  formal  grainmaiical  point.— ^  The  read- 
ing simus  is  airainsi  the  codices.—  ^  To  take  this  passage,  as  our  grammarians  do,  for  a 
direct  exclatnalim)  (Meministis  :  '  Qnam  jx)j>utd>is  Icx  videtHitur !  ')  means  only  to  substi- 
tute a  greater  dirticuliy  for  a  lesser  one.  This  remedy  would  evidently  be  worse  than 
X\w.  evil  it  intends  to  cure,  since  nobody  has  yet  alleged  a  single  i)assage  of  ancient  aii- 
tliors  in  which  direct  exclamatory  (or  intern")frative)  sentences  are  found  in  such  a  con- 
ueciion  with  a  verbum  seutiendi.    See  §  S'Jti,  Obs.  4. 


2.   Mdes  propinquitas  qnid  habetj  Yon  see  what  (conveniences)  the  nearness  of 
residence  atlords.  cic.  Att.  13,  !8.     The  editors  did  not  know  any  better  means  to  get 
rid  of  the  difficulty  of  the  ii.'ilicative  '  habet\  than  to  change  it  into  ' habeat\  and  the 
grammarians  readily  acquiesce.     But  the  manuscripts  have  uniioimly  habet.     Cicero 
speaks  of  the  '  piopinqiiitas '  and  its  conveniences  as  a  thing  positively  known  to  the 
lierson  addressed,  and  although  the  subjunctive //a/^^^a/  would  not  affect  this  ibeamng, 
we  must  assume  rather  that  he  disre-rarded  in  the  easy  epistolary  style  the  strict  rules 
of  "rammar,  for  the  sake  of  using  distinct  language,  than  alter  the  authenticated  text. 
3'  Similarly  must  be  ex|»lained:  Vides  quanfo  post  unjl  fiitQri  sumii.<.  Cic.  Fam.  7.  4 
4.   Vidlte.  judices,  qnanf<e  res  his  testimt.niis  i,unt  confecta  ;  You  >>ee  how  imimtant 
facts  were  done  according  totliese  testimonies  (You  see  the  importance  ol  the  lacts 
which).  Cic.  Mil.  18,  47.    Of  this  passage  there  is  a  reading  sud  conject(£,  which,  now 
ever,  is  supported  bv  onlv  two  inferior  codices.  . 

.5.  Quaw  qua  tu  ('studia)  esse  majoia  inteUir/is  ;  I  ask  what  studies  you  nnderstantl 
to  be  greater.  Cic.  Kep.  1,  19.  Uere  the  leaning  inttUigas  is  perhaps  belter  autiienii- 
cated,  and  ought  to  be  adopted,  since  Cicero  had  no  possible  reason  to  substitute  an 
indicative  for  the  regular  subjunctive.     So  in  Fam.  2,  9,  1  (Sns  quern  dico  or  dicam). 

6  Oiher  passa-es  in  Cicero  in  which  indicatives  occur  in  such  clauses  may  be  inter- 
preted as  relative  clauses  according  to  No.  (a),  as  Cic.  Verr.  1,  2,  53,  131 ;  lusc.  4,  dn, 
11  {nostiqu(E  sequuntur).  ,.  ^,     .    ..     ,.      ;„  i„t„_ 

(n  In  aniedas^ical  language  (Plautusand  Terence)  the  nsc  ol  the  indicative  J»  1";«^- 
roirative  clauses  is  quite  frequent,  as:  Scio  quid  ago.  Plant.  Bacch.  1,  1,  4o.---  y"*^**» 
qiueio,  quid  jxjtest  i>ecunia.  lb.  Slich.  3,  1,  9.  So  in  Ter.  Phorm.  2,  3  li  :.Ad  4  5  -J 
llec.  1,  2,  Hi,  and  often.  It  is  not  pmbable  tnat  tftis  usage  was  caused  by  the  influence  oX 
the  Greek  lamriiage.  which  always  in  these  clauses  requires  the  indicative,  it  unques- 
tionably was  a  colloquial  inaccuracy,  which  found  its  way  to  the  language  of  tne  coimcs 
There  are  several  passages  in  the  authors  of  the  silver  ag;e  where  indicatives  occur  in 
nnquestionably  interrogative  clauses,  as  Quid  animi  estis  haJjifuit  quix^o.  liutu.  a-V.H;, ~' 
G,  p.  98.—  Quwres  a  me  quo  juie  mihi  prutor  dedit  possessionem,  lb.  2,  8,  p.  ii-i.  -1""» 
Valer.  M.  5,  7,  ext.  1  ;  5,  «.  ext.  5  ;  Sen.  Ep.  4;  lb.  34.  K^^^n 

(d)  Several  passages  which,  bv  some,  have  been  placed  under  this  rule,  must  be  con- 
sidered as  direct  questions  after  being  correctly  punctuated,  as  Quid  iwbisjactenaum  et>l  f 
Jtjnbro;  What  is  to  be  di»ne  by  us '/  1  do  not  know.  Cic.  Att.  14,  13,  2. 

Obs.  8.  The  idioms  of  the  Latin  and  English  languages  often  differ  when  in  Latin 
intern.gatire  clauses  are  used,  and  the  rendering  of  such  clauses  is  olteu  a  matiei  01 

some  ditliculty.  .  r.>.„  ^t  „  ^.tntivp 

(a)  In  many  instances  the  English  lan<2:uage  requires  or  i)refers  the  form  ol  a  rtiame 
clause,  in  which  instance  the  Latin  trovernin-,'  noun  oi  the  interrogative  adjective  «-;;  w  «ae 
the  Knqlish  antecedent,  iiiterro<:ative  adverbs  being,  for  this  purpose,  r^'^olved  int  > 
attrilmiive  phrases  with  or  without  prepositions.  Absolute  interrogatives  ni"^J  «  fn 
be  turned  into  English  absolute  relatives  with  a  preposition  as  required  by  the  govuning 
verb,  as  :  Quid  quisque  me  dixisse  dicat,  pnestdre  non  possum  ;  I  cannot  «"«(f^/'^ 
nhat  other  people  say  that  I  have  said  (for  the  remarks  which  other  P*'rs(m>  place  in 
my  mouth).  Cic.  Fam.  9,  IG,  5.-  Quid  hostes  con^Mi  caperent  exjyectabat;  He  ««»f«/f^ 
the  measures  the  enemy  would  fake.  Oes.  B.  O.  3,  24.-  Ignosc6tis  mihi  s'.  "»^'^0  ^w« 
cauHi  me  ad  banc  lo(iiiacitatem  imputerit  acce peril  is  ;  You  wijl  ^^^^ciise  ine  f  l^^^'^^ff 
the  cause  which  has  forced  me  into  (his  locjuacity.  Cic.  Or.  2. 87,  355.- Athgnai  me  deltc- 
tant  rec^^datiune  summOrum  virGrum,  ubi  (lUisque  habitilre,  ubi  ^<^^^f «/ ^f*  X^^V-St 
nt  so/itux;  Athens  attracts  me  by  the  memory  of  her  great  men  connected  nith  triepiaces 
irhtre  thry  livtd,  and  where  they  were  wont  to  tit  and  to  speak,  lb.  Leg.  ^,  -:.   oce 

%)  Frequently  English  noun,s  representing  actions  with  the  idea  of  ","f  rj^;"!^  ^^,"; 
expressed  bv  Latin  inlerrogative  clauses.  Thus  the  Latin  does  not  sjiy,  I  do  ^f^/'O^ 
the  size  Of  t/i'is  land.'  l)ut '  I  do  not  kmw  how  great  t/iis  land  t«,'_  as  :  Si  quKl/^^t  »»  '«V 
in-enii.\iuod  quam  sit  exiquum  senlio  ;  If  there  is  any  ta  ent  in  me,  the  '^.'/ff/f  ^^'^^^-J' 
Jiciaw,)  of  which  I  am  well  aware  of,  etc.  Cic.  Arch.  1  L  [Cujus  ^^^^Q'^^'lf'Jf!^. 
wouldbe  ^erv  poor  Latinity.]-  Induiiomarus^^/o-^n  Telit  preecipil.  Indutlomalusj7a^^« 
his  (or  the  necessary)  orders.  Cies.  B.  G.  5.  5«.-  Qualis  sit  amnius  ipse  a/""))'^/.^^/.^. 
The  soul  does  not  know  its  own  qualities.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  2,  'Z.-lHctndi  O^^ro's MuodJvent 
in  utroque.ov^^^o\Mi^  utriusque,  etiani  posteris  nostris,  indicabunt ;  Ihe  oration*  oi  noin 
will  bear  tesiimonv  to  thtir  {grand)  style,  evv"  Nvilh  our  posteriiy.  lb.  Brut,  -^/i '"'*.-  Yi« 
solibus  dtioinis  stude.)  audire  quid  sentias  ;  I  wi^h  to  hear  your  opinion  on  the  iv\o  suns 
(lately  seen),  lb.  Kep.  1,  \1.~  XxnMJvvnn  quantum  quaque  cirijas  '-J?^;?^'^;^'*'"''^',  Vj  ^Z 
fixed  the  numtM^r  of  arms  which  every  state  should  furnish.  Cit>.^-  B.  O.  i,  2.  1  m  U;  «re 
other  similar  idiomatic  uses  of  Latin  interrogative  clauses  which  must  »f,  1^'f,^"^';  ''y 
practical  observation.  Thus  an  interrogative  clause  \\\\\\nde  is  used  ^^  ^olloqu  al  st) le 
to  impart  any  intelligence  to  the  person  addressed  :  Vide  quanti,  in   te   stt  snatuas , 


k 


89G 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIYE. 


literally  •   See  (look)  how  j?rcat  an  affahility  is  in  you.  Cic.  Fam.  IH,  5, 1  (i.  e.  The  fol- 
lowiii<nncifU'nt  shows  tlR'alVability  of  vonr  niannoi-i^K  Seo  Ex.  11-15.  IS. 

(c)  Sometimfsinti'iTojiativi-  adjtM  tivesaiul  adverbs  are  not  iininediaU-ly  connected  with 
t\\c  firedicate  of  the  intcrroirative  clause,  but  witli  a  participle  (eillier  iii  iheform  of  an 


to  tiie  Latin  tcrriiorv.  I.iv.  1,  1.-  VvlZinu,^  (/mhtfs  fxstim/is  omlorihm  quani  in  jwns 
KiyeHsit  '  We  see  thi'Vmall  numiier  of  pronii.-ini,'  orators  which  the  deaths  of  the  «'reat 
nicn  {UHlirafrd  fji/'q\uhu<  which  hert  7iu(w.< '  \\\mi  kind  of)  we  have  mentioned  has 
Jell  to  us  (literallv  :  We  see  after  wltat  Iviiul  of  orators  iiavini,'  died,  in  now  lew  tliere  is 
hope' )  Cic  Otl"  2  19  —  CVsar  inilites  edocrt  </>i(ii,(o  ditHmenlo  et  qvot  ri/urt/m/arfii/m 
mort"  neees'!«e  sir  constare  ricfonam  ;  Ciesar  explained  to  Jiis  soldiers  that  victory  must 
be  bou<'ht  at  the  price  of  s^reat  disadvantajres,  and  by  the  death  of  many  brave  men 
(literally  :  -showed  what  disadvantage  and  the  death^of  how  many  brave  men  U  would 
be  necessary  that  victorv  would  cost ').  See  E.\.  1().  IT.  ,    ,       ,  i 

id)  Freuuentlv  tlie  subieet  of  an  interrogative  clause  is  taken  out  of  the  clause,  and 

lis 
ar- 
cellus  Lie  h'am.  ^,  u»,  -i. —  i/ntud/n  >;«-[«■  m  i/nwi,  iK^iimifi  ^,^  i.'\>\c.\\u\iuv  gtiu/H  finl  KVfS 
(instead  of'  perspiciturquam  lives  (luidam  siut ' } :  The  flrkiem  xs  of  viainj  is  olteii  louiid 
out  if  th.'  monev  at  stake  is  but  a  trille.  It).  Am.  17.  «i:}.—  I)>ii'>trafni'  de  Ararico  incen- 
arineitlaceief  an  defendi  ;  They  held  a  deliberaiion  whether  Avaricuni  should  b.-  burned 
or  defended  Cies  H.  (i.  7,  15.—  Ecthesis  occurs  also,  but  more  rarely,  in  clauses  which 
are  not  interro-'ative  :  lleia  fruniHdariani,  uf  aalli  cointnodt  ,s>ii)})ortriri  jK)t<':€t,  timere 
dicehanf  They  pretended  to  be  afraid  of  the  inconvenience  in  conveyinj,'  the  tupplies 
to  the  arm  V.  Cles.  B.  ti.  1,  39.  See  E.\.  1.-^-20.  ^       ^^     .     v/i 

(e)  If  iiiternx'ative  clauses  refer  to  lhe/f//Mr^,  their  predicates  are  rendered  by    will 
or  *  would'  accordiii''  to  the  tense  of  the  principal  predicate  ;  and  when  the  answer  ex- 

■  ■         •    •  ■  senteiiee).  the  j)ie(iicate  is 

and  the  inteiTojrative 


transferred  totlie  principal  sentence,  «,'enerally  as  transitive  object  :  but  sonie  imes 
subject  or  intransitive  object.     Such  sentences  must  ofti-n  be  recast  in  hns,'lish.     II 
is  called  "  kctiiksis  '  :  Nosti  Maroll'im  (jvam  tanlits  ait;  You  know  the  slowness  of  M 

•ellus.  Cic.  Fam.  8,  10,  :).—  Qmddni  saipo  m  parvtl  i)ecuniS  jx-rspiciui^    -  ' 

instead  of  *  perspiciturquam  leves  (luidam  siut ' } :   The firkiemss  of  /, 
mU  if  tilt;  monev  at  stake  is  but  a  trille.  It).  Am.  17.  O:}.—  Ddi'ftriitni 


pected  i.sa77//<?  for  the  iktsou  askinir  (beiiif;  an  imperative  sent 

rendered  by  '  Dvust:  'to  h*-  to:  \<fi(>'dd\     If  boili  the  principal 

predicate  have  the  same  subject,  the  i>redicate  of  tlie  clause  is  ^'riierally  rendered  hy  an 

English  inliniiive  with  'to'.    This  rule  is  important  if  such  Knirbsh  mnnitives  are  to 

be 'i-eiideied  into  Latin  :  (V'os  eain  potestjltem  habeiis)  ut  ufafmlfis  utruiii  nos  semper 


Queinadinodxin  /n.i  .•«tH.^racla^t  vidVris;  Look  out  how  you  will  safi^fi/  these  (our  friends). 
Cic  Or  -2  SO  351 —()u'i<l  airers  fy/m/-e  it/ r<;''////>i  p/^^t/y/'-/.v;  W'hat  reason  d()  you  LMve  ?r//y 
we  should  helitve  that  this  was  the  case.  lb.  Rose.  A.  1'.».  .^4.-Senatusdecievit  q>n  Romie 
rennaret :  Tlie  Senate  decided  wlio  should  be  kiinj  at  Home.  Liv.  1,  17.—  hL,'o  (luid  acce- 
perim  scio,  <7//i(/  U'lawi  nescio;  I  know  what  I  have  heard,  but  do  not  know  w/«/i'  to 
mij  Cic  Utisc  A.  21,  58.— C^uo»l  sibi  ipsi  judicasseiit  v^/o  procedendum  aut  quid  a<;en- 
dnmiid'erelxr ;  Because  rhev  had  assumed  to  judj^e  whtre  to  proceed  or  ichat  to  do.  C;es. 
B.  (i.  7,  5-2.-  Predicates  of  this  kind  are  not  i^euerally  placed  in  tlie  periphrastic  luture. 

See  Ex   21-24 

( /')  The  English  interrosjative  clause  with  an  infinitive  introduced  by  '  how  '  with  which 
the  verb  '  to  7v/ou' '  is  coiistniefl,  is  expressed  in  Latin  either  by  a  mere  object-inlini- 
tive  or  bv  an  inteiro<--ative  clause  (.with  a  finite  predicate)  introduced  by  quowoilo  or  its 
equivalents,  depemlent  on  w7/r.  A  Latin  interrogative  clause  with  (juomoilo  is  used 
only  if  scire  refers  to  the  style  or  nuinner  of  performmj;  the  action  ;  if  it  means  a  knowl- 
edo-eof  the  whole  action,  the  EuL'lisli  interrogative  clause  is  expressed  by  a  Latin  ohject- 
inllnitive  :  Soli  qui  memoriil  viccent  scivnt  <iuid,  et  qiiatenus,  et  quomodo  dictCin  sint  : 
Only  those  who  have  a  stronu:  inemorv  ^//o?A'  what,  how  much  (=  up  to  what  point)  and 
how  to  sneak  Cic.  Or.  2,  87.  :i55.  Bur  :  Purranre(iuaiii  dedindre  sriat,  before  a  boy  knows 
how  to  decline  (not  ' quotnodo  decllwt).  Quint.  2,  1.  .3.—  J^ocere  sciu/d,  they  know  how 
to  teach  a.  e.  the  art  of  teaching;  qiioniodo  doceaiit  would  be  •  according  to  wliat  method  ). 
Qui  lit.  10,  5,  1'.),  See  E.c.  25. 

Obs.  9.  Interrogative  clauses  dependent  on 'w^.<fm' are  often  parenthetically  inserted 
with  an  kllipsis  of  the  interroirative  predicate,  and  with  the  force  of  an  iiidelimte  lorm- 
adjectiveor  adverb.  The  indicative  predicates  with  which  jusno'xw  this  ca*e  is  often 
inimediately  connected,  must  not  be  taken  for  interrogative  i)redicates  :  iVe.sc/o  quod 
magnum  malum  me  celant  (i.  e.  Magnum  malum,  nescio  quod  [malum]  sit,  me  cclaut) ; 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIYE. 


397 


They  conceal  some  great  evil  from  me  (a  great  evil,  I  do  not  know  which).  Ter.  Hec.3. 
1  .39  —  Lucus  n-escio  quo  easy,  nocturno  tempore  incensus  est :  By  same  accident  a  grove 
was  set  on  tire  dtiriii"  i  he  night  (literallv : '  A  grove.  I  do  not  know  by  what  accident.'  etc.). 
Nep  Milt  4  —  Sed," /ie-vdo  r/vo  ;)arto,  ab  eo  quod  erat  a  te  iiroposiium  aberravt  oratio; 
But'mv  remarks  have  wandered  away  from  the  subject  sugg.'sted  by  you.  I  do  not  know 
how  it' happened  (or  :  But  somehow  my  remarks  h:ive,  etc.).  Cic.  Tiisc.  3,  33,  80.  Hence 
nescio  quis  and  riescio  quid  virtuallv  have  the  meaning  of  a/iquis  and  ahqind  :  I  rope  me 
uescio  ouis  loquitur:  .Somebody  is  ialking  near  me.  Platit.  Pers.  1,  3  9.--  De  lejie  agrarii 
»<e;.scio  (/wi(/ vohiisse  eum  diiere  siisoicaMautur  ;  They  supi)Osed  lie  had  intended  to  say 
toifiething  on  the  agrarian  law.  Cic.  Leg.  Agr.  2,  5,  13.  See  Ex.  2()--28. 

Ob«*  10  To  the  interroL'Mtive  iiariicles  mentioned  |§  417-419,  must  be  added  fc  and  n. 
Ec  (of  uncertain  derivation)  is  used  as  prelix  with  the  indelinites  quis  and  qin{ecqvi, 
ecQuis  fcquid),  and  with  the  indefinite  adverbs  quo  iihdquando(erqyo,  ecquanOo).  It  has 
the  force  botli  of  numixwik  /;e,  and  is  not  especially  rendered  in  independent  interroga- 
tive sentences,  as:  Ecquidfit:!^  anything  going  on?  Cic  Fam.  7,  11. -Aery w  f€f' a 
rirtus  provexi^set  f  Would  your  own  ability  have  raised  yon  to  any  {posifionU  lb.  1  mi. 
13  U.U.-Ecquando  te  ratioiicm  factOrum  tuorum  redditurum  putasti  v  Did  you  i)e- 
lieve  that  you  would  ataity  time  be  called  to  account  for  your  deeds  .'  lb.  >  err.  2.  i  <,  4.1. 
—  In  ii.terro<'ative  clai'ses  ec  means  -whether  '  :  Qiueris  ecqnoi  i-pes  pacifacaiionis  sU  . 
You  ask  whether  there  is  any  lun)e  for  an  amicable  settleinent.  Cic.  Att.  ^'/»  — ;5"r" 
atribrino.<Y/./«//rfonisiper  XXXVtiibus  crtiiti  siut;  1  ask  the  nbuiie  ?M^///y  ilcj 
(the  tribunes)  at  any  time  (ever)  were  elected  otherwise  than  by  'li^  f^/r'^^»^  •'>•  ^''^' 
A«rr  2  7.  17.    Sometimes  ecqvis  is  streiigtliened  by  the  sufhx  nam  (§  421).     hx.  ^9. 

"si  is  sometimes  used  with  the  force  of  •  whether  *  (the  same  as  ;^^  '  m  Ln^bsh).  It 
mostfreuuently  depends  on  verbs  of  trying  and  expecting;  ^^"t '^  ,s  not  coi.hiKd  to 
tliese,  as  "some  grammarians  assert :  Ilelvetio  si  perrvmpere  2H)>^sent  coxxM\  ^""^^:  /'  '- 
Helvetians  tried  whether  they  C(mkl  break  through  (the  lines).  Cics.  B  G.  1.  8.-  lemp- 
t"ta  res  est  si  primo  impetu  lain  Ardea  posset  ;  The  attempt  was  made  «'.'"^/''/f  Ar^  a 
could  be  cariied  by  the  llrst  assault.  Liv.  1,  57.-  Statui  exspecaudum  esse  si  Q"  d  cer tins 
Z-er^fur;lrv^o\vedU>wait  whether 

Cic  Fam.  15,  1.  2.-Philopa^meii  qu(Vslvit  si  Lycortas  incolumis  evasisset;  1  hilopffiuitn 
inniiired  whether  Lvcortas  had  sately  escaped.  Li  v.  39,  50.  Ex.  30-33. 
"'  '  e  h^Jiorlan/very  frequently  iiAerro^ative  clauses  with  .^  are  so  used  hat  a  govern- 
incr  verb  of  -trviu"'.  or  soun;  eiiuivalent  expressi.m,  is  understood.  Th:s  is  most  fre- 
Qifemlv  t  le  casl  f  the  principal  predic:ite  is  a  verb  of  motion,  and  the  c  ause  denotes 
t^lcM)  feet  ot- the  moiio,  .  so  that  the  verb  of  'trying'  if  expressed  would  be  '"the  hrst 
I  oi  Mr3'-  )  Dicunt  clam  ex  castris  exisse  {\.  e.  teniptaf  urn,  or  '  vt^  viderent'  «quid 
nuM.iri-;/^ag?i";;..7W  ;W;  They  stated  they  had  secivtly  left  the  camp^^^^^^^^^^ 
irhether  any  lood  mi'lht  be  found  m  the  neighborhood.  Cio.  B  G.  «.  20.—  IKrcuies  per 
^iiadspeluncam.  si  forte  L  ^^^xx^^ferrent ;  Hercules  proceede(  uUhe  direction  ol  the 
cave,  to  see  whether  perhaps  any  tracks  w.re  leading  there.  Liv.  1,  <.  Ex.  .^4-dU. 

EXAMPLES   TO  REM.  85,  OBS.  1-10. 

1    «;i  unon-im  ^f//W/.7/'/m  f.*/.  QuirTtes.  w/rwm  tribuni  plebis  yestrS  an  snil  causa  sedi- 

tiOnum  sc^ui>cr  a.ictores /../-i.l  id  e...  hoc  anno  desisse  'V^^  l^^'^^  ^r^^"  ' ''oe' ar  ex 
K  '\  _  o  Tiil/num  est  uter  nostrum  sit  verecundiori.  Cic.  Ac.  2,  41,  Ui>.-  3.  CcC>ar  ex 
cIiDtlvi^'c-oX^/  ^;'0  i"  foco  h.stes  con^edissent^.  Cies.  B.  G.  5,  9.-.  4.  Earn  cond.tio- 
Si  nHmrf  er  nt  ut  optet*  ulrum  ;;*a//./ cervices  Eosci.)  dare^   an  insutus  m  cu  leu  .  « 

V  t  n^-  n  it  ere  Cic.  Ho«c.  A.  5.  30.-  5.  ^•.•que  cognosce.ndi  quid  fieret.  necjue  sni  col- 
\liani  iiiiin  iL  1 «...    V,  IV .  »«»>.  V .  iM..     .  1  .,  tnrJi'i  mniii>i7  Cine  dis- 

li-endi  hostibus   facultatem  relinquunt.    C;es.  B.  G.  3,  <•.—  (>.  Lot  uHm  omii  is    .inem. 


i:;.^?rwi:!^^';u^.^;;^in^u^n^^  oiSi^l^^s^.  i.  ^^^i^P^^ 

quMalint  possumus  susiiic-lri-'o,  sic  attirmat  ut  oculis  ea  ceruere  videStur-^  Cic.  Rep. 


1  Modest.—  ^  considere,  to 
ntre.  to  leave  (prescribe)  to 
wurremb-r  one's  neck.—  •  sow 
»  all  kinds  of  i)romi.scuou'*  ( 
persmis,  or  of  slaves.  Liber  d 
esset  is  qui  fuqeret,  an  servus.- 
serving.— '*  [what  are]  for  an 
ncative  force  =  nihil  me  att 
etc.—  »"*  crime.—  ^"  conjectur 


pitch  camp ;  consedisse,  to  be  encamped.—  ^  condi'idnem 

somebody  a  c<nulition.— -»  lo  choo^i^.—  ^  cervices  dare,  to 

id  up  in  a  sack,  the  usual   punishment  of  parricides.- 

•rowd-  —  «  distinction.-  »  whether  they  consisted  of  free 

IOCS  not  grammatically  refer  to  turba  :  understand  ■  Lihern« 

—  10  took  their  refuge.-  ii  to  snow.-  i'-  to  hail.-  \^  by  ob- 

orator  the  benefits  of  a  good  memory.—  ^^  a  question  witn 

inet  dkere,  I  need  not  tell.-  »» traces.—  "  as  to  the  place, 

e.—  20  guess.—  -^  that  it  seems  as  if. 


398 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


399 


1,  10,  15.— 1'2.  Cirsar  iioqne  qvanfa  esset  in^iiljp  nmirnitudoJ.  Tio<|no  ^v^r^  ant  qvnntte 
ii-uiOiit's  iiicohrtht,  iifniie  y//<wt  ueum  Ix'lli  \\i\hitY\^\\\,  xuqwQ  qnf^  fs^tut  ad  miijOriMU 
iiavium  innltitiKiiiu'in  iclonci  portu^  reperire  polenit.  ('jus.  W.  G.  4,  20.—  13.  Prodiicuti- 
tm-*  ci  quos  LitavTcus  odociit'rat*  q^ue  r/irj,  vellef^.  Csvs.  li.  G.  7,  J^. —  14.  Vita  quam 
sit  brerU  coijita.  Plant.  Most.  3.  2.—  15.  Ex  hoc  ini<lIiLri  potest  qnantus  fiient  Ilanni- 
hal.  Nop.  Ilann.  23.—  Ki.  CoL'itSto  quan/is''  lafxtribus  fuiKiritKin'*  iniiicriiiin  una  no?: 
pajno  (ielTiit.  fir.  Cat.  4,  9,  19.—  17.  Tnni  Ic-aiis  dicthdl  j)ot»>t;lirn»  qviit  pttnitm^ 
veiiennt  f.icit'".  Liv.  1,  22. —  18.  Qmv^^  qi/(rn/nfur^'^  qurJid  fint,  iiniiinicrabilia  sunt.  Cic. 
Or.  2.  32,  137.—  19.   Tcinpus  qvamdiu^^  (iiaremw  nobis  pra*stiiUel)as>*.  lb.  (^uinct.  9. — 

20.  Sanytdnem,  hilcm^'",  oxKd  video  posse  dicerevnde^^  concrefa  finf.  lb.  Tu>c.  1,24. — 

21.  In  nostnlno  potestilte  est  qnid  in<'}tiih(rivin.<i f  lb.  Fin.  2.32.  101.-22.  Dionysiiis, 
qunni  bollnin  adversusi  cum  Syracnsilni  decrcvissent,  din  dubitilvit  impiMiunincv/f'yx)»^^/, 
an  bello  resi>t(ere(.  Just.  21.  2.—  23.  Nt'cjue  .«atis  Brnto  vc!  tril>Onis  niililnm  constilbat'^ 
qifid  agercnt,  ant  quam  ratiOueni  i)ujrna>  insistetent^*.  C'a^s.  IJ.  (i.  3,  14. —  24.  Hu*c  volni 
per  litteras  (tibi  fcriboro),  nt  habtn-s^^  quid-  dicere-'^  si  quando  in  vitnperatorcs^"  meor» 
incidisses2».  Cic.  Fara.  7,  3,  <!.—  2.").  Lex  natflra»  vetat  nllam  rem  esse^^  cnjnsqnam  nisi^» 
eju>'^*  qui  fractore  et  vti  sciaf.  lb.  Rep.  1,  17.—  2<>.  Casu  tiesrio  quo  in  ea  tcnijxna  a^tas 
nostra  incidit.  lb.  Fam.  5.  15,  3.-27.  Kescio  qvainodo  ipsa;  ilhv  littera'  excludere  me  a 
l)ortu  et  perfiijrio-^  vid<'ntur.  lb. —  28.  llle  ?ie.<no  qui{<-'^,  qui  in  scholis  notninaii  solet, 
mille  et  octinjreuta  stadia  quod'-*^  abe<set  vidCbat.  lb.  Ac.  Tr.  2,  25.  81.—  29.  Ilbid  du- 
binm  est,  ad  id  quod  sninninin  boiium  dicitis,  ecquanam  fieri  jxpssit  accessio-*.  Il>, 
Fin.  4,  24.—  30.  llanc  palfldem  si  no>itH  trannrent^  liostes  exspectCibanf.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  2.  9. 

—  31.  Centuriones  nntti-*  vocibnsqne^**  liostis  s-i  iidrmre^^  vdl<^nt  ?v<e(7/y  ccepCrunt.  lb. 
5,  43. —  32.  ])e  quo  «renero  pnuUo  plura  dixi.  nt  hoc  ridertd'^  n  lundafivnes^^  (.«sent  in  ora- 
toris  ofticio33.  Cic.  Or.  2.  ^5,  39«.—  3:^.  Primuin  ab  eis  quu'slvit,  si  aqvam  iioniinibns 
jumentisque   in  totidem  dies  quot  frumentun)  iinjyosuissit  (i.  e.  navibns).    Liv.  29,  25. 

—  34.  Consul  ad  (Jonmum  castra  niovet,  si  ]X)nn  oppido  jH)ssff.  Liv.  42,  M.—  35.  Iliniilco 
gecQtus  est  M.uoellnni,  si  q>ia  (K-caxio  puq)ia>idi  esset.  lb.  2-4,  3<). —  3G.  Reseniltis^*  .^duis 
i.i  per  eos  civitaies  reciperdrt^''  jx>sset.,ri:\K\\\oi>  captlvos?  exercitui  distribuit^'.  Cajs.  B. 
G.  7,  89. 

{j?    SUBOBLIQUE  CLAUSES.- 
§  599.    SUBOBTJQUE     CLAUSES    ai'O    clauses    DEPENDENT     Oil     OBLIQUE 

clauses,  and  forming  those  parts  of  the  indirect  statement  uhieii  the 
speaker  introduced  conceives  in  the  form  of  clauses  (^  507).  All  sub- 
oblique  clauses  require  their  own  predicates  to  be  in  the  subjunctive. 
(For  exceptions  see  R.  87.) 

Eetn.  80.  Suboblique  clauses  may  be  dependent  on  any  of  the  four 
forms  of  oblique  clauses  menlioned  above,  as: 

1)  On  INFINITIVE  clauses: 

Epictlrus  dicit,  omnium  rerum  qiios  ad  bedte  rirend>mi  safnenfia  emu  pa  rar  frit,  nihil 
esge  majus  amicitiil ;  Epicurus  pays  that  of  all  means  which  wisdom  had  devised fora 

'^Maf/nihldo\»  redundant  in  this  passnjre.--  -  qu(V  refers  to  the  name,  and  qnanftT  to 
the  iMjml)er  of  the  inhabitant's. —  ^  q',,}  ^yjn,  idohti  refers  to  tlie  capacity  of  tlie  liarbors. — 
* prodncere,  to  bring  forward. —  ^  to  teach. —  '  tiie  witnesses  were  intended  'to  play  a 
ceriain  part',  by  personating  others. —  '^An  interrogative  sentence  witli  'how''  must  be 
used,  which  may  be  directly  coiniected  with  deltrit.  qi/a/diM  being  chanL'ed  into  the  corre- 
si)onding  demonstrative.—*  founded.—»  quid  )>tft/it€-!  venerint  is  dependent  on  dicendi. — 
^^  potestdttin  aliadfacere.  to  give  to  somebody  a  permission. —  ^^  eaqua.— ^"^quiTvi  has 
lierethe  meaniiifj  'to  be  in  doubt',  'to  be  unknown'. —  i'  tewpua  qiiamdiu  =  per  quod 
tempus.—  '*  to  deterinine  beforehand,  to  prelimit.— i*gall.—  i"  tlie  elementg  which  con- 
stitute.—  1^  Alioii  aiiqiiid  cons/a/,  somebody  is  clear  as  to  something'.—  '"  insisttre  raii- 
vintn )tiiqiur,  loadopi  a  phui  of  baUle. —  ^^hahTvo  =  scire.—  ""caviller. —  -'  to  fail  in  with, 
to  meet  with.—  --  to  belouir. —  "^  except. —  '■^*  sn|)plye<.>-y' (except  to  him). —  ^5  icfnire. — 
-*  that  somebody. —  ^r  g^-e  Rem,  81,  Obs.  1. —  ^^  accessio,fie7i  potest  ad  atiq>nd,  something 
admits  of  an  increase.—  ^»  by  gestures. —  '•">  words. —  =**  to  come  in.—  '•'•  i)anegyrics.— 
^^  beloTiged  to  the  province  of  an  orator. —  ^*  Kender  :  Wiih  the  excej>tion  of  the  ..Edu- 
ans  wlio  were  retained. —  ^^  recover.  Ccesar  is  the  subject  understood. —  '•'  (ii>tr]l'V*re 
(diqtiid  alicui,  to  distribute  something  among  some  persons.  Here  a  distributiuu  of  the 
prisoners  'as  slaves'  is  meant. 


I 


I'f    f.i^nrUhin wn^  the  ^-reatest  (nothing  was  greater  Ihan  friendship^   Cic.  Fin. 
Aa;)7)?//^/'^.fIlendshlp^^as  ine  -^\'^l^\\^     .,  denends  on  an  accusative  with  the  inlini- 

1,  20,  r.5.-  [The  fl:'"''^^''-^-  ^^^'  i^'^  "'tn,  word"  were  stated  in  a  direct  form,  would 
live     and  the  ^"^>J«ct,.E|MCM.rn.s   f  Ins  cm     ^^o.d^^^^^  .^bohlique,  and  its 

express  this  thought  {"^he  f.-rn    of  a  ^;       ,.      iencc^  U|^  ^^^^  innnitive  clause  has  the 

v:r^^  :;;t^^!r^e\};rzXz  s^^rs^Tdiii^i^^^wdays.  4.  ciu.02, 

175.    See  Ex.  1-0.  8.  9. 

o\  r»xr  OrT  TOT-F  Tn \T-CLAUSES  with  vf,  ne,  qvin,  «n^»  f'^f^  •'  .    „^ 

rivnl  thtre.  Cic.  Fam.  2,  19,  1.    See  Ex.  10-12. 

patil.le  «ilU  the  public  interest).  Css.  B.  O.  5,  4b.    fete  ti.  1.  l.. 

;;;'S7i!;«»;l'r'JI->c!'\,c1ia,rio',»n,i.h,oent.    Cic.  0.2,  3,,  134.    See  Ex. 
Ob''',.  Ko.  n,l   c,„„.e.  ''^.P-/!-'  ""  f  iH^SSived  J.'^'SeJ 6*"«»^^.%- 

!;;;;-;;i";!;,^,,u^;;t.'lr^vt":i;r'r;;i,|.S^^^^ 


i»  not  suboblique,  becausi;  it  uoes  not  .,e.w..„  ■•' "p  -\^24 

remark  of  the  author  to  explain  the  smnmon    ^«/ J^V^^^;.  Q„,dam  furti  damn?ltu8 
(i)  Dkpkm.ent.on   '•"■^^•:CLA^,,f  5  V;»V^i^^  uiteriOrc  ejus  municipii 

est.  quod  eqno  cujm^  vsvs  xUi  «'^-^''//^'^^^^.^"^'T  S  taken  (stolen)  a  ride  on 

clivoVectus  e«set  ;  Somebody  ^^•«^  ^^'  ^^LJ^  '^'^^\ll'^f^^  ^Jt  ^^  him  to  use  vp  to  that 
a  hill  beyoii'l  the  town  of  Aricia  <m  ^}'^jrf,l^^]^.^^^.^^^^^^^  „ot  suboblique.  because 
In-n.  Valer.  ^Slax.  8,  2.4.  .^'f^^'^^l^^^^^^^^^  the  theft, 

riie\m  a  hill,  etc.,  and  th<M-eby  have  sujlen  the^  se  o^  LabSuo  Jandat,  GermSnos    qni 

(c)  Depknoknt  on  i>'rKiVVTivK  cla   -ls  .   ca.ar   i^^    ,,anslre  conentur,  prohibeat  ; 

avxilio  a  lidqis  ({rcessVi  du-ebantur.^xv^^^^^^        .Zwevetaid  to  have  been  Unmmed 

Ua'sar  ..rdered  Lab-enus  /?./'^«'^'^^tJ  «  V  ^"h     Hver    f    L'V  .v/i^^         atlejni^t  to  force  a 


Ua'sar  ..rdere.l  Lab-enus  ^?/f*t,7rrns<inL"  he  river    f  they  should  attempt  to  force  a 
by  the  IJetqians  /» /Z/^^/-  a*'/,- /''''"  "^' 'J?  %  ""'  Znlntur^  is  suboblique,  because  it 


i"-^'"- •        .   .  1     ^f  ,Y,r,  onthnr  (^iven  in  the  form  of  a  relative 

OBS.2.  Som<-times  ^xplainniir  remarks  o     he      thorven       ^^^^.^,^,^^.^  ^f 

clause,  have  sib-iinctive  Pp'^'l^"^'  ^,  ;^'V,h  m^nV  d^  on  whici.  thev  d.pend.  Gener- 
te  indirect  stateuumt  ^^^^^f  V^^^^,'"  .^  "^^llf.'rel  Uiv^  .biunctives 'with  causal  force' 
ally  such  subjunctives  must  ^!*,\C2"^'\'f '^J  ^^;.,,'^',  \^^^^^^^^^  SolOnem  fuisse,  euni 

according  to  B.  VI  p  5C(),  as  :  ^^J '  f„*^^'^,  ^^^'S^^^^^  sav  that  the  wisest  man  ot 

?^/S<?;;*a^'sr?t^'S;e^^XS^^;>;^'S^^^  .iJm  ,hJy  (the  Athenians)  use  to 


400 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


401 


the  present  day.  Cic.  Rose.  A.  25,  70.    Here  the  clause  '  qui scripserit '  forms  no  part 

of  the  indiivct  (statement,  and  hence  is  7iot  i^uhohlique,  and  yet  the  predicate  is  in  iht; 
puhjunclive  hecause  tlie  aiitlior  represents  it  a«  tlie  |.»roJ)ahle  caiii»e  of  tlie  };»-nerai  opin- 
ion stated  in  tlie  oblique  daus-e.  Hence  the  i)redicaie  utuntur,  which  i»  a  remark  ol  the 
autiior  icifho'it  sucli  cau;-al  force,  i;<  in  the;  indicafive.  See  Ex.  "^s,— Sometimes,  h«)\vever, 
such  predicates  are  iii  il»e  ful)juuctive  when  no  such  causal  force  can  he  as>i.:ned  to 
them  (Ex.  7).     These  belong,'  to  the  subjunctives  by  quasi-attraction.  (^See  Kem.  Ul.) 

1.  Docet'  Ionise  aliil  raiiOne  bellum  esse  gerendum  afque'^  antea  r/estum  nt.  Cjcs. 
r>.  G.  7,  14.—  -2.'  Majorca  vestri,  ^ibicunque  muU'dndo  etistt,  ibi  et  leijitimum  rectO- 
reni^  multitudinis  censebanl  debere  esse.  Liv.  .39,  l.'j.— 3.  Ilelvetii  leurillos  ad  Ciesarem 
niittunt  qui  dicerent,  sil)i  esse  inanlmo^  sine  ulio  maleticio^  iter  per  proviuciani  facere 
propterea  quod  allnd  ittr  haberent  nulluin.  C;es.  li.  G.  1,  7.—  4.  Ciesar.  n  vim  fact le^ 
cont/d'tr  liclvetii,  prohiiiitQiuui^  ostendit.  II).  1,  8.—  5.  Considius  dicit,  montem  (jue/n 
Ccesar  ab  Labieiw  occvpdn  toluerit,  ab  hostibus  tenCri.  lb.  1,  'irl.—  {\.  Quidam  dixit, 
plus  quani  jioUicUus  e.^att  Ciesarem  facere.  lb.  1,  42.-7.  Diciiur  ctiam  Flaminius,  is 
qui  tribuuus  plebis  let'em  de  ajrro»  Gallico  dividendo^  (ulerit^^.  (et)  qui  contiul  ap'id 
Tr<Uiiinenuin  fit  interftctus,  ad  populum  valuisseii  dicendo»-.  Cic.  Brut.  14.  57.—  8.  Vi- 
dCris  mild  tantumi^  juris  civllis  scire  voluisse  qnaid>!iii  satis  tK-<et  oratoii.  lb.  40.  150. 
—  9.  liex,  Servioocclso,  quemcunque  ali'tm^*  generuin  delef/is<ef^^.  eundem  r«'«;ni  herG- 
dem  hictilnis  videbatur.  l.iv.  1, 40.— 10.  Non  dubitilDat  quin,  d  ijkte  Ven-tinconvtnl^stt\^^ 
leqiiitaiei^  causie  commovGre'»  homini'm  posset.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  I,  48.—  11.  Lei^ilti  veniG- 
bant  questum  (juod  llai  ildes.  qui  nt/ptr  in.  Galliam  traiuspurtCtH  ti^mnt^'*.  linls  (■Oruin 
popularenlur-o.  Ca's.  J3.  G,  1,  37.—  1^.  Marcius  miliies  increpril)al-i  quod  in  muliebrls 
be  projecissent'^'-  lletns  poiius  quani  ad  tiitandos  xeintt  iiKOsaciterenf^^  unimos.  Liv.  25, 
37.- 13.  De'^*  pecuni:!  linTtur'",  ne  major-"  causil  ludorumconsumeretur-^  quatn  quanta-'* 
Fulcio  Nuhilidri  decreta'^^  e-^set.  lb.  40,  44.—  14.  LeirAti  intt-rse  sanxerunt=»»,  ne  quia 
enunliilretsi  (.l'^'"*  ''e-^)  nisi  (ei)  quibu.^ coiatnuai  consUio  vimuirit nnx,  e<Kel.  Cies.  IJ.  G.  1. 
30.—  15.  DecrevGruut  patres  ut,  quuin  })opuluK  reqtin  jussi-'i'tt'^'-,  id  sic  ratum^^  csset^i 
pat  res  aud  ores  fiertnf^*.  Liv.  1,  17.—  10.  l^alrOno^^  „ialo  suadCbut  Granius  ut  mulsuui 
Iri^ddum^i  biberet  simulac  doniuni  redisset.  Cic.  Or.  2,  70.  281.—  17.  Fa-dus  ictum  inter 
Itomanos  et  Albanos  est  his  lci,dbus='^  ut,  cujus  poputi  cites  €0  ctrtamiue  vicuseut,  is 
alleri  populo  imperitaret^'*.  Liv.  1,24.—  18.  Solon  quuni  interro;,'aretur  cur  nullum 
Kupplicium  consiitui^set  in  euut  qui  parentnn  mca-^ftf,  dixit  se  id  m-mincm  factilrum 
putasse.  Cic.  Hose.  A.  25,  70.—  19.  Credo  eijo  vos,  judiccs,  minlri  quid  sit  quod'^^  eqo 
pijfimmuf/i  surrexerini*'',  qui  iicque  tctute  neque  in^enio  sim  cum  hi-'  qui  sedeont*^ 
cotnparaitdu.<.  lb.  1,  1.—  2U.  Ilerodotum,  qui  j/rincejis  qenus  hoc  ornurit*'^,  in  causia 
iiilulominu>*3  V(Ts;ltum'>  esse  accepimns-»^.  lb.  Or.  2.  13,  55.— 21.  C;esar  commodissi- 
mum  esse  stutuit^'',  leixionarios  miliies'^  leir'onis  deciuue,  cv/i  qua/n  maxiine  confide- 
bat*'^,  equisimponere^".  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  42.-22.  Ne  hunc  quidem,  quamqvam  <=••«_/  in  re- 
public 
Or.  2. 

quuin  ,  ... 

'24.  LVque  eo,  judices,  animadvi-rti  eum  (i.  e.  accusau'rem)  jocari  alque  alias  res  aL'cre, 
anttqaaiii  Vhri/foqonum  nominaei-''^.  lb.  Kosc.  A.  22,  GO.— 25.  Lei,'aii  venerunt  onltuni 


c'(7  iV;/^s•(7/^^^•^'*,  ex  numero  accepimus  eOrum  (fuisse)  qui  causas  diciaarunt^i.  Cic. 
;.  13,50.-23.  Itespondi,  netjue  me  hoc  ixistuiare.  ne(iue  in  conventu  SiculOrum, 
li  a  me  aujilium  pfttlnVur,  le^jalos  Syracusanurum  adluisse.  Ih.  Verr.  2,  4,  02.— 


»  Doclre  with  a  gerundial  =  to  show  the  necessity  of.—  -  than.  ^Render  :  accordinirto 
a  plan  entirely  dillVreui  Iroin  what  had  been  followed  before. )—3  a  lei,dtimate  (responsible) 
leader.—  *  to'inteiid.- ^  without  dnin;;  any  inischiel.— «  to  use  violence.—  '  i.  e.  se  prohi- 
biiQrumesse.—  »  land.—  »  on  the  distribution.—  i"  fer/fimft-rre.  to  propose  a  law.—  »'  di- 
cendo  valere.  to  be  disiinguislied  as  a  speakt-r.—  '=  ad'ix^iiutum  dictre,  to  speak  publicly.— 
13  only  so  much.—  ^  i.  e.  in  place  of  Se:vius.—  i»  wouhi  have  chosen.—  '"  if  he  hadseeii 
Verres  in  person  (/>«).  The  pluperfect  su1)junctives  in  this  sentence  and  in  i\\.  11. 15.  K». 
17.  have  the  force  of  subjunctives  of  the  fuiiire-perlVct.  beim:  rendered  either  by  'would 
have,' or  by 'would.''  or  by 'had.'  See  §  r.07.— iMn'^^ice.- >"*  produce  an  eflect  j)u  the 
man  by,  etc.—»»  had  been  sent  over.— 2«  were  devastatin;:  their  territory.--'  to  rebuke.— 
'■i-  h  id  aiiandoned  themselves  to.—  -'  ratlier  than  stimul  ite  their  min(ls  to,  etc  —  -*  con- 
ccrninj,'.-  -^  [the  Senate]  decreed.—  =«  i.  e.  pecunia.—  -^  to  spend.—''''*  than  the  ainonnt 
wliich.— -*'  to  -,'rant.— !*•>  came  to  the  understaiidin.,'.— ^'  l<>  divuli^e.— 3-  to  elect.— ^^^  the 
election  should  bir  valid  onlv  if,  etc.—  3*  auctorem fieri,  to  coidirm  somethinj;.-  ^*  attor- 
ney.— a«  ice-cold  honey-wine.-  ^^  conditions.—  s-»  should  rule  over.—  =»»  quid  nt  iju(jd, 
what  reason  there  is  that,  etc.—  ">  surqeie,  to  rise,  (i.  f^.  in  order  to  speak).—  •«>  who  are 
keepini;  their  seats.—  •«'^  who  was  tlie  I'lrst  (earli-si)  writer  in  this  branch  of  literature, 
—  "  nevertheless.—  «*  in  causi^  vermri,  to  |)racii-e  the  1  iw.—  <^  we  have  heard,  i.e.  *  we 
know.'—  4«  thought  it  to  be  most  expedient.—  *''  teqionarii  mifite.^,  foot  scddiers.—  ♦'^  in 
whom  he  placed  the  vcrv  hii,'hest  confidence. —  <»  to  provide  with  horses.—  ^^  in  repu- 
blica  versdris  to  be  eni!;aj,'ed  in  politics.—  ^»  causas  dictitCire.  to  practise  the  law.—  »2  be- 
fore (till)  I  mentioned  Chrysogonus.      The  mentioning  of  Chrysogonus  is  not  a  part 


V 


ut  celoritatci  reliquas  res  couficeret,  qua  pleraque  erat  consecutm^.  Cjes.  B.  G.  7,  IS.— 
20  Hunc  sibi  ex  auimo  scrupulum».  qui  se  dies  noctlsque  stimakU  ac  pungii*,  nt  evelia- 
tiss  postulat.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  2,  (i.—  27.  tiiuero  abs  te.  luerisne,  quod  sine  senadtsconsulto 
tibi  non  licuit,  in  regno  Iliempsalisl'  lb.  Vatin.  5,  12—  '28.  Quum  ex  Socratee^eet  quye- 
sltum.  Archelaiim.  lY-rdiccie  tiliiim.  qui  turn  fort  unatl-'simus  haberetur.  nonnc  beaium 
l)uiaret,  •  Jlaud  scio,' iuquit ;  'iiumquam  enim  cum  eo  mm  collocutus.  10.  lusc.  0, 
12, :«. 

Hem.  87.  Stibobliqiie  clauses  may  liavc  their  predicates  in  the  I^'DICA- 
TiVE,  1)  if  the  indirect  statement  so  tar  as  it  is  contained  in  the  suboblique 
chiusc,  is  ENDORSED  by  tlie  author  (Ous.  1) ;  2)  if  historians  make  use  ot 
the  exceptional  license  of  giving  to  suboblique  clauses  the  same  gram- 
matical form  in  tense  and  mood,  as  they  would  have  if  their  governing 
oblique  clause  had  the  form  of  a  direct  statement  (Obs.  3). 

Ob9.  1.  While  the  author  may  always  (except  in  the  oratio  obliqua  strictly  so  callcdi 
see  B.  VI.)  add  his  own  remarks  to  indirect  statements  in  the  form  of  a  clause  wUli  an 
indicative  u»  which  instance  the  clause  is  Jiol  suboblique  ;  see  Ji.  86,  Obs.  1),  the  same 
mood  is  frequently  used  in  clauses  strictly  subol)lique,  i.  e.,  in  those  that  are  conceivea 
bv  the  same  person  who  makes  the  indirect  statement  in  the  t:overiung  oblique  clause. 
The  author.  l)y  using  the  indicative  in  such  clauses,  implies  that  the  statement  ot  tne 
j)ers()n  introduced  as  speaker  represexits  at  the  tame  time  his  own  view,     blatemeuts  or 

this  kind  may  .  1  .^*      „  ,^„„ 

1)  contain  actual  pacts,  as  :  Kectum  putiTbat  Roscius  pro  eOrum  honestate  se  piig- 
x\^rM  jrropter  quas  ipse  hone-^tUsimus  inter  suos  nurturatKitur  ;  Roscius  considered  it  lus 
duty  to  stru'gle  lor  the  honor  of  those  on  account  of  whom  he  2vas  hiinse/f  recKon<-a 
among  the  most  honored  of  his  townsmen.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  G,  10.  (The  sul)junctive7iwme7'a- 
7e////- would  leave  a  doubt  as  to  the  correctness  of  Koscius's  view  in  regard  to  tlie  laci ; 
by  the  indicative  the  author  pronounces  Koscius's  supposition  as  correct).—  inita  tan- 
dem ratio  est  ut,  quod  riribus  deerat,  arte  a.>quaretur  ;  The  plan  was  finally  adopted  to 
supply  by  art  w/iat  ivas  wanting  in  strength.  Liv.  20,  4.  (The  clause  ^quod..deerat  is  a 
neces.su-v  part  of  the  resolution  'Arte  ivquemus  quod  riribus  nostiis  deest  .  lieiice  tne 
subjunct'ive  deesset  would  be  correct  ;  but  by  the  indicative  deerat  the  author  declares 
that  tile  stren-nh  was  really  deficient.  althouLrh  the  subjunctive  deesset  wouldnof  intimate 
the  contrarv)'-  (iuem  arciorem  studii  censeiis  luisse  in  Archimede,  qui,  dumm  pulvere 
qmedam  dtscrVAt  atieniius,  ne  patriam  quidem  captara  esse  senserit  r"  Lie.  J^in.  &,  19, 

2)  OMlu^statement  may  contain  ideas  which  the  author  takes  for  granted  on  account 
of  their  'objective'  character,  the  criterion  of  which  is  that  the  statement  cannot  be 
(iispiitrd  in  the  wav  it  is  presented  ;  if  for  instance  the  mere  idea  of  a  substantive  is  rep- 
resented in  the  form  of  a  clause,  or  if  the  clause  contains  a  hict  acknowledged  by  all ; 
as:  Quis  potest  esse  tam  mente  captus  qui  iieget,  hiec  omnia  ^//(«  «(/«m?i.«f  deorura  1111- 
niortalium  potestate  administrjlri  ?  Who  can  be  so  insane  as  to  deny  that  all  things 
vhich  y/v  see  are  governed  bv  the  power  oi  the  gods  ?  Cic.  Cat  3,  9,  21.  (1  he  clause 
'qua'  ridtmus'hui^  an  '  objec'tive  '  character,  because  the  fact  that  we  see  cannot  be 
di.^uuted).- Kes  hoc  postillat  ut  eOrum  exspeciatinni  qui  audiunt  quam  celernme  oc- 
currillur  ;  Reason  demands  that  we  should  as  quickly  as  possible  meet  the  expectation 

of  the  statement  introduced  by  Umimadrerti.'  but  an  independent  remark  of  the  author 
who  is  Inre  at  the  same  time  the  speaker.  The  sentence  is  pregnantly  expressed  ad 
in  i)lie<  ^animadrerti  eum  jocari,  in  quo  mque  eo  rersdtus  est  dum  Vhrysogomm  nomi- 
7  .T'-l  uTactinl'  rapidly.  See  p.  '243,  Ons'  1,  1  :  Obs.  2.-  ^  The  clause  yua....conse- 
catiis'  is  nJt  conceived  to'be  uttered  by  the  ambassadors.  Caesar  intimates  this  by  be 
indicative,  and  by  not  usinu'  ed  in  connection  with  celeritdfe.  It  is  meant  for  a  modest 
remark.  '  My  success  is  owing  more  to  my  rapidity  than  to  any  genius  '// ".^'V'ir'irnnv' 
tres<  pan-,  remorse.-*  The  imperative  (optative)  cUxx-Q  vt....erellatis:  /^i.^ony 
When  the'accuser  asked  lor  the  death-iMualty  of  the  accused.  Ciceio  represents  him  as 
if  he  meant  by  it  to  ask  the  curt  for  n-lief  from.the  legal  steps  tl^^t  the  accuscM  W 
probably  take  airainst  him.  Hence  the  clause  '  qui.. .  .stimulat  acjm  ngltJ^x  hich  ^istiacts 
u  d  uis  him)  could  not  be  placed  in  the  mouth  of  the  ac.u~er.  \\  hile  Cicero  makes  the 
s  emeut  of  this  clause  his  own  assertion  by  means  of  the  indicative,  he  intimates  by 
the  rellexive  lorm  st  (which  irrammatically  would  require  a  subjunctive  predicate  p.  11, 
R  8)  that  at  the  .same  lime  tlie  accuser /ee.-'.-  that  the  orator  has  correctly  represented  the 
sta  e  of  his  mind.  It  is  one  of  those  faults  against  strict  -rammar  which  are  committed 
.  on  purpose,  and  by  which  a  irenius  proves  thai  he  is  ttie  lord  even  over  the  laws  ot  Ian- 
guage.—  *  to  tear  out.  to  remove. 


\ 


402 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DErENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


403 


of  thoBC  Who  l>car  (I.  e.  of  our  au.lionco).  Cic.  Or  2,  77,  313  -  ^;'^^,f  *^!:  ;i"7p;^«\ ?^,f J 
da«-  A^kdor  the  person)  to  whom  vou  may  return  what  yon  are  oicwg  (i.  f.  vour 
ce!>t  'Vifyulave  contracted  one).  Sen.  Ben.  5,  11).-  In  all  sueh  elause.^*  the  subjunctive 
iP  le9<  (  ften  <ed  if,  as  in  theexaniplcs  above,  Ihc  f/orerninrf  nbluiue  clause  is  repre>entea 
^  an  ,^cSl.mblL  fact.  Ii;  on  the  cl>ntrar>-,  the  .overnin^  elause  is  «-P;.;';;^"  j;^!  as  auO-ue 
tiiei/itiim/^^'^in  suboblinue  clauses  of  this  kind  is  unusual,  as:  Nollie  putilre  cos  ^'/t 
Xn^im/iecmonmrJ  a.itari  Furiaru.n  t.edis  ardentibus  :  Do  ""i^.^;;  J^^i^^j^.^'f^';^^ 

.burnin-  torches  of  the  Furies.  Cic.  l{osc.  A.  21,  ♦...-  But  f  the  ^''^l%}\^^^^":: 
tains  a  doubtful  fact,  botli  moods  are  indiscriinjnately  used,  as  :  9/  '^'^V  /  -'  /  -  \  e 
videntur  atnciendus  (/ui  d^vm  patria'conservanda'  caus;le//^/emm^  <.or  tuluuful)  [-  the 

troduces  Aim^-^//as  speaker.     In  this  instance  a  distinc.u.n  nu.st  be  '^'^'^^^V''  '^ !  sa^ 
author  l)y  tlie  principal  predicate  of  saying,  commanding',  etc     relets  t.   »  '«-/^'.'"f^  .^'";'J/ 
in::s  and  conceptions,  or  whether  by  the  principal   predicate  he    '«'i'-^J' "f>TV    ke  tho<c 
views      In  the  former  case  the  statements  of  the  author  as  speaker  are  treated  like  t  lost 
o  •  other     crsoi  s,  as :  Postulo  (  =  postuhlvi)  ut  Syracu.nnis  liceret  senAtus  consul  ui 
gU^  >r'JK%?m^«nnihi  reddete;  I  demanded  .hat  the  Syracusans  shmi  d  '>«P^/.'"    ^c^ 
t<.  return  to  me  the  senatorial  decree  w/nch  t hey  had  iHV^.ed  he  <'"-y,^.(<^  *-•.  <^,    •  ^V '  ^"  .^J 
4  00.     But  in  the  latter  instance  the  indicative  in  the  subobhque  clause  is  "i";^^."^  ; 
tl.an  the  subjunctive,  because  such  indirect  «^"tements  are  virtua  ly  direc     a^ 
on.nis  qui  ad/uerunt  deleclSros  esse  vehementer  gmwi  a    e  e><t  ^;^^^'f  ;;j«''<^,*^f// '^ 
that  al  nre.<tnt  were  irreatly  deli-hted.when  you  delivered  your  •^"^f,   ''.^  rl'^^^^  "    ^^ 
nilia    Cic  Or.  2,  11,  44  (  =  omnes  qui  adfueruni  delectabantur  quuni  Pop  luiji  te  lau- 
data'esD.-Iv'o  a  te  petout,  si  tihi  vidt/ar.  disputes  de  hoc  toto  peneie.  lb.  :>,.,.,  2.U  (  - 
l)ispuia,  si  tibi  vidCtur,  etc.).    See  Ex.  14-20.    lu  Ex.  21  the  subjunctive  mood  is  used. 

Obs  2  If  '  improper '  indirecl  questions  do  not  contain  indirect  statements  of  a  per- 
fion  introduced  by  the  author,  but  have  only  thcfonn  of  an  interro-at.ve  fl'';';;;;^/'^^-J^  : 
the  clauses  dependent  on  them  are  virtually  direct  clauses,  and  the  mood  .)f  the  r  ,>r     - 

•ates  is  not  determined  by  the  rules  above,  as:  VideHtis  quam  fi, -enu.s  eOrum  jr 
]!£ierudVivide.t.r  hebes  atque  impolltum;  You  may  see  how  ^If  ""'.'"»«",  y'^^^ 
is  the  tribe  of  those  who  iinarjine  (hat  (hey  are  learned  Lie.  Or  ^' j.'l-^^.J.r.  •*-,""  ^ 
eurum  r/m  ,'<ifn  fnuWl  ridfutur  e-reu'ie  h.bes  atque  impolltum  e>n  -  i*^''l;  ^  •'* ''"  ''"^ 
in  laiide  justitiie  quid  cum  tide,  quid  cum  :vquabilitille  j.n^  (jni  laudabltur  feceril  (  =  ^^UJe 
is  qui  laiidabittir  fecit  explicanda  eruiit).  Cic.  Or.  2,  .So,  34.x 

Obs  3  The  lic<Mise,  by  which  the  hisKuians  «ive  to  the  predicates  of  ordinary  sub- 
oblum'e  clauses  the  same  tense  and  mood  as  if  the  s„vernin<roblique  cause  had  the  form 
of  Ixdh-ect  statement,  is  mostly  contlned  to  the  orado  obliqua  in  the  strict  sen>e  of  llie 
word  "(B  VI)-  but  it  also  occlirs  in  (u-dinary  sentences  with  indirect  statements,  lu 
either  instance  the  use  of  this  form  is  rare,  but  occurs  in  all  the  clas-ical  I'lsK.nan^; 
a^:  Constituunt  ut  ei  qui  valetudine  aut  lelate  inuliles  s,n,t  hv\U\  oppido  excedaiit  , 
Thev  resi)lved  that  those  who  by  their  iiealth  or  a.ire  werexmM  for  war,  should  leave  tlie 
town  C;es  B.  O.  7.  »1,  8.  [If  the  qVmx^c  '  qui.  .sunt  heUo\  were  represented  as  the  au- 
thor-; remark,  it  would  hi^Uiui.  .erauC  ;  if  it  ^vore  tn-ated  as  subobhque  clauses  should 
be  accordin-  to  rule,  it  would  be  '  qui.  .e>^sevt\  The  form  ^qui..suid  »'''»^,«»  ' ,  ^.'^  f 
IV.rm  as  it  would  have  if  the  .irovernin- obiKnie  clause  were  representee  las  a  '  ^^-^^  »" 
maud,  '  Qui  vaMudim,  etc.,  inudl^  sunt  tjello,  omdo  excedant !  ].-  i  hus  on  oh  iciut 
discourse)  in  the  speech  of  Mithridiltes  to  his  soldiers  (Troi;.  Pomp,  in  Just.  .iH,  «.).  Ait 
I^lilhridates  .,u(  ipxi  lioimVd  ferunt,  conditores  suos  lupai  uberibus  altos,  pIc  omnem 
ilium  populum  lin)r)ium  animos  habOre;  Mithrhlat.s  m\d.  ...that  a.'^^  the  Lomajig  theni- 
felveshadtht  (raditioii  that  the  very  founders  of  their  race  had  been  nourished  at  the 
breast  of  a  she-wolf,  so  had  that  whole  people  the  souls  ol  wolves  —  I  uui  senein  jhM- 
auain  conrivium  i>n,rut,  exceptum  poculum  Druso  tradidisse;  (It  was  rumored)  that 
thereupon  the  old  man,  after  he  had  joined  the  banqut(,  had  taken  a  -oblel  and  handed 
it  to  Drusus.  Tac.  Ann.  4,  10.    See  Ex.  22-21. 

Obs  4  Sometimes  the  form  of  the  indicative  in  suboblique  clauses  is  used  for  par- 
ticular reasons  as  :  C.  Mario  ma-na  atque  mirabiliaportendi  haruspexdixerat  ;  pnniide 
qu(e  animoaqitufjat  fn-tus  di-ageret  ;  Tlie  liaruspex  had  said  that  a  irreat  and  astoumiiiig 
fate  was  destined  to  C.  Marius  ;  iience  he  mi-ht.  trusiin-  in  the  ^'ods,  carry  out  w/uit  he 
was  then  revolvinq  in  his  mind.  Sail.  Ju-.  63.  Here  ugitabal  can  neither  be  considered 
Hs  'endorsed  by  the  author'  (no  fact  heini,' 1,'iven  which  the  author  could  endorse),  nor 
lis  an  indicative  accordimr  to  Obs.  3  (wliidi  would  require  the  preseid  tense).  But  il 
Sallust  had  used  the  subjunctive,  the  clause  ' pioinde  qua  anivio  agitaret  would  not 
\m\ii\.\\^.\nvan\nz' hence...  Avhat  he  ^cas  (hen  revnlring  in  hh  intud  ,but  '  wha(eyer  ne 
henceforth  tnight  revolve  in  his  mind\    To  make  this  undersUindini,'  of  the  clause  impos- 


sibl  ■,  Saljist  used  the  indicative  aprainst  the  strict  rules  of  grammar,  thus  preferring  a 
qiies'ioiiable  grammatical  form  to  a  faulty  expression  of  hi-j  meaning. 

1.  Ileheiii,  (luum  id  quod  ipn  dilf/us  viginti  cege}'7i7ne^  confecerant^,  Ctesarem  uno 
die  coulecisM"  inteliigerent.  legatos  ad  euin  mittunt.  Cics.  B.  G.  1,  13.—  2.  Intelligere 
dei)e-.  tibi  tiieiidos  esse  illos  virosrt  qnibu/i  iniduni  libertddsconfectuin  est^.  Cic.  Fani. 
9  14,  y  _  ;^.  Prudentissima  civitas  Aiheiiiensium.  duin  ea  reruin  jwdta  ef<t*,  luisse  tra- 
d'itur.  ib.  liosc.  A.  2."),  70.—  4.  Illain  proscrii)tiOnem  senatus  siiscipere^  noluit.  nequid 
Hcrius»  quam  more  maj&n/m  coinpardtum  esP,  publico  consilio  lactum  (esse)  videatur, 
Ib  w.i  l.j3  —  .^  (Rosci'us)  roirat  te,  ^i  nihil  de  pains  fortilnis  in  suam  rem  conrer/it^,  si 
nul'd'in  re  te  frauddtit.  ut  sibi  per  te  liceai»  innocenti  vitam  in  egestate  degerei». 
Ib   4'i   141  —  O".  (^luens  an  v<ruin  sit  quod  Stoicis  placet^^.  sapieiitiam  bonum  esse,  sa- 


fs>e  i)rovinciiira  quuin  in  areis  fruwenta  sunt^''.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  5,  U—  10.  Scitis  esse 
notisfimuTu»"  ridiculi  genus  quuin  aliudi"  exspeciamus  aliud  dicitur.  Ib.Or.  2.  «;3, 255. 
—  1!  Nonniilli  priecipiunt-",  ut  verbuin  illud  quod  causam  faciC-^  lucide^s  breviterqiie 
nteiqiie-3  dftlniat  lb.  2,  2.").  108.—  12.  Non  quieritur,  quo  bentficium  ab  eo,  cui  datum 
/•-^    lian-fenliur'^^  Sen.  Ben.  5. 10.—  13.  Quieris,  cur  pariter  iiatiss»  fatii  diversasint, 


•>  •).;  _  .2(1   (»ii;ero  abs  t«',  circumsessusne'»»  sis  Lampsaci,  (et)  co-peritne  domum  in 
7iadeiersaljart'-  niiiltitudo  inceiidere.  Ib.  Verr.  2,  1.  78.-  21.  Nihil  prius  constituo'* 


>  With  the  «'reatest  difllcultv.— -  The  predicate  is  suboblique,  l>ut  endorsed  by  the 
nuthor   bem-^stated,  both  in  his  own  nanu",  and  as  part  of  th  •  reasoning  of  the  llelve- 
ti-iiis  —  ^by^vhom  the  way  for  lifjerfy  has  been  paved.    The  staiement  is  suboblique, 
beloii'jin  '  to  the  sentinn  nt  which  ihe  person  addressed  ought  to  have:  but  it  is  likewise 
eMdoi-ed"l»v  the  author,  who  a-serts  that  the  men  he  meant  (Brutus  and  Cassius)  were 
indeed  the  ori'dnators  of  liberty.—  *  «n long  av  it  held  the  supremacy.     The  clause  forms 
a  D.rt  of  the  '  tradilinn.'  but    is  at  the  same  time  endorsed  by  the  author.—  ^  to  be  re- 
sponsible for  —  «  lest  harder  measures  should  seem  to  be  adopted.-  '  than  it  icas  war- 
ranted    This  fact  formed   part  of  the  motives  of  the  Senate,  but  is  at   the  same  time 
endorsed  as  correct  bv  the  author.-  «  appwpriated  to  himself.   This  and  the  next  clause 
are  part  of  Koscius-;  pleading:  but  the  correctness  of  the  facts  is  at  the  same  tune 
vouched  for  by  the  autlior.—  «  at  si/A  per  te  liceat.  to  permit  him.-  '«  to  spend.-  i»  the 
fact  that  the  assertion  'sapientiain  /jonum  esse,'  etc.,  fvas  one  of  the  Stoic  principles  (so- 
called  ^loic  paradoxes),  is  endorsed  by  the  author.— I'Mvho  got  out  ol  him  (received 
from  him»  part  of  the  bo-^tv.     Ferre  is  used  in  contrast  to  ^ofTerre.'-]^  i.  e.quo'ftsa 
tne-^*  which  we  call  'didactic'  (including  the  moral  philosophy).- ^^  to  obtain  the 
hi<'hesf  de-ree  of.-"=  to  jnake  a  circuit  in  the  province.— i"  when  the  corn  is  in  the  barns. 
The  fact  that  this  happeiicd  once  everv  year  is  generally  acknowledged.— "'  the  most  com- 
mon speci<-s  of  the  ludicrous.— i»  when  we  expect  something  else  than  what  is  men- 
liouod  — -"  "ive  the  rule.— 21  on  which  the  whole  case  rests  (turns).— 22  placidly.— 
23  both  of  the  attorneys.-  "-*  is  cui  datum  est,  the  receiver  (for  which  there  is  no  good 
latin  mnni)  —  ''"  gwlenfficium  transftrdtnr,  how  the  benefit  bestowed,  is  «pplied.— 
2«  nariter  na'tis,  to  those  born  in  equal  circumstances,  in  similar  situations.-      and  are 
as  diver-ent  as  circumstances  can  be  (literally:  and  are  distant  by  the  greatest  in- 
tervals „T  circumstances).-2»  orisrin,  birth.-  2»  there  1*  the  least  possible  diflerence.- 
30  .rn-at  works  .d"  arr.— ^i  /,(id  inonred  great  losses,  a  notorious  fact  at  that  time.— 
^"-solutiOne  impedltd.  bv  a  suspension  of  jiayments.-  3»  credit.-  3"  to  collapse.-/' all 
that     set      racticaliuiportance  to  the  citizens.-  36   ,h(Hild  comprise  in  his  mind.- 
37     ,  ncc   ninodate  Ilippias  ivith   so  much.-  »-   friendship.-  ^Mo  alow.- "  which 
threatens  which  is  aimed  at.-^i  to  ward  ofl.-  "  that,  having  been  in  the  most  indigent 
c ircu.    "ances.  you  became  rich,  etc.  See  §  444  -*^  legem  ferre,  to  pass  a  law'.--  ^4  pn  the 
e  nl  ez/lement  of  public  money.-  "5  the  most  stringent.-  ^e  drcunisedire.  to  ^'osiege.-- 
i^TitrM^io  stay.-  *«  1  establish  nothing  earlier  than,  i.  e.  I  determine  before  all 
other  thiugi. 


••%,. 


I 


401 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DETENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


405 


mmm  onUl  Pit  illud»  qno^  mihi  sit  referenda  omni;»  ilia  or,itio3  (iua:ni  propria* 
^    J  /;-?,/  5     ih  Or    '^    -'7   114  -  2>    Ju'MMiha  p()>tero  die  cum  Aulo    in  rolioqiuo» 

forme^^  sihi  putarerant.  cum  tilio  •■jus  Anstonln.  belhuu  -e>M-=^. .  1  fe^  1  "  ^ ;,  r .  «  dJ 
\^'i\-'l\  Scapiius  intll'^  annum  so  tcrtium  ct  octo-csimum  a-ere,  ot  in  a-ro  dc 
quo  agilur^''  militasj!«c"*.  Li  v.  3,  71. 

;  4)QUASI-0BLIQUE,  AND  QUASl-SUBOBLTQUE  CLAUSES. 
^  600.  If  clauses  coiUaiu  iiulirect  stalcnu-iits,  conceived  by  the  (logi- 
cal) subject  of  the  principal  sentence,  without  being  grammatically  de- 
pendent on  a  verb  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  or  on  (me  of  the  oblique 
constructions  mentioned  §  509,  they  are  virtuallt/  ohUque  or  svbobUque.aud 
are  called  quasi-ohlique  or  quasi-subobliqce  clauses  according  as  they 
arc  analogous  to  the  oblique  or  to  the  suboblique  clauses.  They  regu- 
larly take'' their  predicates  in  the  suhjunciive  {\'ov  exceptions  sec  i?.  88, 
Obs.  2).  and  never  have  the  form  of  an  infinitive  clause. 

Ob*  It  1«^  a  common  feature  of  the  oblique  (or  subobliqurV  and  the  qnasi-obliqnc  (or 
o.ia<i-ub.  hliqn  "  e  aiises  that  b..th  are  stated  '  out  of  th.-  mind  of  a  person  introduced  by 
tlu\uri  or '  er  Ji?  /a  ;^^^^  cor/itau/ur).  and  ther.-  is  no  clause-  which  may  no  be  repre- 
sented i^  the  thm^^^^^^^^^  another  ,,ersou  by  merely  =,m  in. -  to  tl^;  predicate  he  ™ 
fl  "n b  u nctive  Th^  En-Ii-h  lan-ii.pe  has  m.  mean=.  to  express  th.-  same  distinction  by 
?h  -  rb.  n  of  tl'e  pmlicate.  as  :  Nocte  ambuhlbat  Themi<roc  es  7.0./  v.,,.«^^^^ 
«m;  jwwsv/  •  Themistocles  walked  about  by  ni-ht  because  he  could  not  4et^p.  Cu.  ^»^^-  4; 
iTifTh^  predh-a  e  ..f  ti.e  clause  is  plac.-.l  in  the  subjunctive,  since  the  cause  w  .  cli 
iile  Theml^ocles  walk  by  ni.dit  rests  wholly  on  his  own  ^^f^^^^^l^^'^^ 
We  must  supply  '  id  'i'i'>d  se  furer^  dlnbnt  quod ,. .  .n..ii  posse  .  1  ins  iu..krs  tic  c  .  u  e 
'  ou/A  sulH)  >luiu(>  '  ai  if  dependent  on  an  intinitive  clause  ut>der>tood.  Had  the  author 
n^.r  b.     m  ic^  Ik- would  have  stated  the  cause  as  his   own  remark  or  as 

vou-lui^^  "«•'  ,l,inl<  proper.- Pliniu.a.cend,th.cuiu 

n  ^>)  qui)  ma'lme  illud  min/culum  ro,..pM  i^feraf;  IMiny  «-;-  ;;;^:,^'\i^^^;^,::^^^ 
that  remarkable  (-vent  could  U  be>t  d^^ernd.  1  liu.  Kp.  b.  1«.      Ihe  ""  »';r-  '  >  ".  .''r,;"J 
(iicative  voUmt,  rei)r('sents  the  clause  as  his  own  r.  mark,  imply  n-_'  "'/','    '''V',,')^ 
ihe.hlce' and  that  the  view  from  there  really  was  as  stated.     /Us.ti!  would  make  the 
clau^e  qua4-obUque  =  ex  quo  illud  miruculum  conspici  ixx^se  «citbuf. 

Hem.  88.  Quasi-oblique  .clauses  are  virtually  equivalent  to  ohhque 
clauses  i.  e.  tliev  may  be  transformed  into  clauses  immahuieji  dependent 
on  verbs  of  savimr,  thinkinir,  etc.,  which  must  be  supplied  liom  tlie  con- 
nection. In  lieu  of  the  verb  of  saying,  etc.,  they  take  their  predicates  in 
the  .suMnnrUcc.     The  governing  verb  thus  understood  is  .     ,      , 

1)  either  a  verb  expressing  purpose  and  intenlum,  or  an  equivalent 
accessory  predicate  {eo  comilio),  in  whicli  instance  the  clause  is  a  final 
clujse/ introduced  bv  the  conjunctions  ut,ne,ov  7^/^  (generally  used 
before  comparatives  with  the  f..rce  of  v/0,^  which  always  require  the 
predicate  to  be  in  the  subjunctive'"  (See  B.  VI.),  as  :       

1  Quid  sit  Vlud  -  the  aim.-  '  qnn  referemla  «^  to  which  ^^Ko"!;)  Jjc  {^'J^f  !;:,^;r  ^l^^ 
discourse.-  *  refers  to.-  »  subject,  theme  -  «  conference  -  '  f''  '  /  f  J;'^  •(•  -- 
nn.-iied  bis  views  to  Aiiliis  —  «  =  ets  .—  *»  held ...  .enclosed,  i.  (.  had  at  his  iikhn. 

•  d  c     ss  .  1    ve    -^^^^^  '"-  The  relative  clause  must  be  placc-d  alter  th.-  in- 

finite clause  -»^  in  rc-'irdo  himself  (Enmenes).-  i4  improper.-  ^^  be-an  (to  sp.-ak) 
-  «  t  n-t  of  th;-  country  -1^  7?ev  de  qua  aqitur  was  u  le-al  lormnla.  corresponCn-  to  the 
attriiJu  !\-cf  phmse  "!i7.«^,Vr/ ..././w/i^c^  '/.^^^."^^ ''^^  I^^'.^IA  "V;to\h   miliVa^y 

multis  locis  in  iuriscousulturum  induditur f.ir.uiilis.  Cic.  I^''^^; '•';'■';- ,i:^^^^^^^^ 
Bervice,  to  servc-^»  Clause:?  of  purpose  or  '  Ihial  clauses   arc  not  alw  ays  couctn  td  as  u.di- 


i 


*      ,....r,,r..u    pniios  vf  f>nem  fuocB  iolleret:    C;tPar   removed  the 

CjEPar  ex  !^^]'\^^'S\^^.'^^,;,'L^^^^^  thehopeof  JlighL  Ca^s.  B.  G.  1, 

hots.s  .uit  of  sifTht  tu  ordet  /0  Uhat    c  "  V''  ^^.      d/strovin-  \  connlium  hatms.  or  eo 

2.5;  ==;inU-iidin{?todest.ov       ^'   ^^   p^VP.erb  of  intendi.Tg  is  impi.ed  in  U.e  mere 

coriAlio  ut  spem  »'''^*'^et.     1  he  louc  m  u_  ^        j      an^,„5.this  quafi5bat,  ne  mvl- 

conjunction  ''^.«;yl  J^^'^X^rh      m^^  -^ '^^  ^^'^  lest  hemiqht 

ti(udh,e  ctrcumxrltur:  fh.  ^"*';^j;.\  P  ,,,^^  ^^ep.  Them.3  (  =  m  order 

be  outflanked  loj  the  >-^^l>^rwr^^^nub    Jot  tla  uicmj  ^^^^  \^^^^.^^^l        f,,,iiius  eqmtatum 
that  not,  io  conditio  addudusa^^^^^  (hedtro)  to  have  a  bettet  defence  against 

t:;i;rx»!t'ei.i.  y:G^r>i( = ™iS/i''W..c«  lu  etc.  «ec  ex.  «.  lo.  n .» 

owi       ,  „,.,ii„n,v  Tort)  of  «avini.  commanclin,!:,  or  tliinUing,  which, 

!;;.^\\T:,:n"K;y;:i>;::i-ohC 

another  route />r'i'/.'6  ''' '""'^^ If^La     [^       AlminOrum  ad  Civsarem  hgSti  vene.unt,  qui 
prudennsadorlnnon2^^setnte      elM^^^^^  j,^-^  ^^^^^  to  Caesar, 

,e  de  ^uperiOH.^  tempons  ^^^'•^V"^,,^f  J^,  "Vfmi  er  r^  Ctes.  B.  G.  4,  22  (t.  e. 

ichoivereto  ercnse  '''-'".  'jj'J''''^^'^^^^^^^  els  indi.-nitas  crescere,  n  ;?. 

ouibu^  m  mandaveraid  vt  se  ^_^cusai  n    .  ^  I'M  j,        j        increased  uhen  \_hey 

de  Tarquxmo  quidemad  se  ''''^7',  Jj^j  .^  \ vi^'y-^^l^in',-  death  beretvruedto  them. 
conndeUd  that]  the  throne  would  ia>^^^^^^^^^^^ 

pv.  L  40  l=;i --  ^erSbaii   re.  nm  -^  '^--Ji:^-  ^,^^,,  Uv.  87,  7.  Ex.  1-^ 
luxuruw.N><?/,  lion  a\Lr.>uuM- qu.ini  .„„-♦  ko  «nnnlied  a-cordinf  to  ;?.  S2,  re- 

OBS.  l.Soinetimes  the  verbs  of  saym.wh^^^^ 

quir.-  a  (iuod-clause,  as:  ^''^y^^'^'}^^J'^L^l^^um  ot  the  people,  because  the  late 
jv,.,v/.i,,-  nium  .lictatr.ris  f«>rm       ,        '_^    '•  ^i^.^'J  soldiers,  misled   the  dictator  s  mind, 
c^f  the  State  had  ^^^^^\-^^Z        \uunJ^ai^t^ictato,  em  quod  tritjas  milifibus,  etc.). 
Liv.  1,  27  ^  -  nivKlui  hot.  inuiu  qui  ^'^^  ^    the  subjunctive  in  the  final  clauses  intro- 
0ns.  2.  The  mood  of  the  clause  is  a  ^«^  ^hc  sm^^  ^^    ^^  ^^  ^  ^^  ^^^ 

d.ued  by  vf.  w.  quo,  »''fV-''''"7  v-Ou"i  hor  i.  which  instances  the  indicative  may  be 
indirect  statement  is  endorsed  b%  the  '^'''"''''J^]/"  j^ludesque  interced'ebant  :  Ue  was 
nsed    a>:  Lon-ius  prosecnn  ven  us  est,  '{.^'^^%^^^^  Cips.  B  G.  5, 

aii^dd  of  continuiu.  .he  ^^^^^1^^^%^^  t^^r^'I^U^tfdan  i.rfiri^/a/ (j^uarded) 
rv>  ^ee  Ek  8  '.».— H,  il^>^V'-iver,  such  an  ar-Miuoiii.iM  ,      ^^  m.neral  y  in  connec- 

'^;^U^on::i  tiie  autiu.r.  the  ^«^J'|>'^t>y«,;!;^:S^L^^  ^  ^^r^hi^r  itnf^ines  t^Orum,  qvod 
tion  with  a  pareniheiical  credo  ^  a.  .  ^^  '".'^^^Ji'.'J  „,h^.r\iav  I  saw  Demosihencs's^  image 
eum,  credo,  a;m7;v.,  imag.nein  f  ^,  ^J^V.,  -«//W  /iS'^^^^  lore  him.  Cic.  Or.  31 .10.  1  he 
amon-  the  images  of  y..ur  ance^^^'[,^' \^'l  '.f;, '  ut  /potential  subjunctive  (R.  79)  em- 
clau^e  '  quod  evm  atinires Ms  n  t  J"f  J.?^  .'Jg^c  ition.  i  niusi  be  in  the  imperlect,  wlulc 
plove.l  in  a  clause  where,  ^'y/  \^/:;'^  *'  ,f  ?  e  ^  Jsen  or  perfect.  See  Ex.  10. 
in  an  indep  'udent  sentence  it  mu.t  be  ^»  ^hc  pi^  tn     J'  statements,  instead  of 

Obs.  :i  Often  causal  or  relative  fl'V'^f^^;. ^^"^^  ^.^i  Xpen  lent  on  those  verbs  of  say- 
t-iki n-  their  predicates  in  the  *'\'^^J''"^'''^Apsnl    e  tex^^^^                                          thought, 
^^  cFc  ,  which  represent  the  act  by  which  ^^e  ^J^^J^^J/ Ji^Vssa  reciperaturos  conndebant  ; 
vs:   Hoc  sihi  t^ol^«tii  l''-''I>7'^"'^'"'J).*?;'^  ..^^^^^^^^^                                                        speedily 
Thev  consoled  themse  ves^cca*/.. /^ey  /^^/^/^^^^  ^^^           .confidlbant  might  have  ub  pred- 
recovir  their  losses.  Cies.  li.  G.  ..  la.  /.''^^^'L'"^,,^^  celeriter  amissa  reciperatun  essent). 
[iue  in  the  subjunctive  without  ^omf^^'tK^^^^^^^^                          occur  in  clauses  o     his 
Ihit  there  are  two  peculiar  and  ^^'''y  *   '^JV,^^^^^^^^^^^                          verbs  of  saying  and  Uunk- 
kind.aml  must  be  (-onsub-red  as  a  t       '•^^  \^XK^^^    of  saving  or  thinking  is  inuirect ly 
i„;r  are  ].lacc.l  in  the  ^'f^''''''//''^;'  \'»^  ''f/?.";iVlvetii  qu^^^^  Romfinos  decedere  a  se  extdi- 
stated,  butiheclau-edepend.M.tonit.a^*.  "^,'^';;;;^   ,„.2an  to  follow  our  tro..p8  be- 
rnareif.  no<tros  insequi  ca?perunt ;   T 1  e  \\^^^^l\l^^^  t^..^.  Cibs.  B.  (i.  1.  23  ;  2)  that 
cau^e  th.y  thought  that  the  Koman>  ^^*^  f ,.  ".    i\7,i  ,J  ,iiese  clauses  (cither  ni   the  in- 
veiibs  of  /ayin-^-  or  thinking  are  fjj-^f' ^J,^  ^^^!  JJM",^;  the  act  of  saying  or  thmkwg^ 
dicative  or-more  Irequenily— m  the  suojuntu     ; 

' "^  \     '•     IZToT^ninnsp  conceived  hv  the  author,  and 

scurAliijocus  sit  aut  mimicus.  Cic.  Or.  2,  oJ,  iiJ. 


406 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


hut  tho  af'tions  mid  or  Ihovqht  are  concoivod  as  the  canso  of  tlio  principal  action  ;  asi  : 
L.  Treboniiis,  iiire.<ti;s  (crat)  patrihiis.  quod  se  ah  iiis  in  cooptauiTis  tri'>flnif*  fraiulc  cap- 
tuni  {ijVmt  ;  L.  Trtboniiis  had  n  griuli.a!  ajxainst  tlic  I*atrii.ians.  btcaii.^e  he  said  that  they 
had  playe(i  a  trick  upon  inin.  Liv.  :{.  (»5  {i.  e.  because,  accordini;  to  his  staiern(Mit,  they 
liad.  etc.).—  Ille  cnijteiidit  itt  in  (jiallia  ndin(inereriir  <i^>iod  reli-^'ionihns  tsi-se  imp<'dlri  di- 
ct-rtt  ;  He  deniandcd  to  he  h'ft  in  (iaul.  b&ainse  he  i^aid  tliat  he  wns  kt-pt  tliere  by  reli<,'- 
iniis  reasons.  ( jes.  B.  (t.  5,  (i  (j,  e.  because  lie  was,  according  to  his  stattuien't,  kept 
there,  etc.).    See  Ex.  11-10. 

1.  Qi'oniam  f/emini^  exufinf^,  necnctfltis  verecundia'  discrTnien  facere ;)o.«.<r<«^^  Palatiuni 
Romulus,  Kt-tnus  Avi-nilinini  ad  aiiiruranduin  tcinpla  c;ipiuiit*.  Liv.  1.  «».— 2.  Miltia- 
des  qiiotiiain  ipse  pro  se  dicere  non  poaxtt,  verba  fecit^  Irater  ejus  Tisacroras.  Nrp. 
Milt.  7,  »»  —  3.  AristTdes  nonne  ol)  eain  causjun  expulsus  est  patiiil,  ^w^/ prater  nio- 
dum"  J //•>•/ '/.<  €iiset  f  Cie.  Tusc.  .5,  ;j!>.— 4.  Si  lucf^  (pioque  canes  in  t'apifolio  iatrenf^, 
opinor  I'is  crura  sullrinirantur'*  quod  arr^s^^  /^ifif*^  ctiani  turn  (jmnn  suspic-io  nulla  sir. 
lb.  Rose.  Am.  'i{\  5(i. —  .'>.  Sji'pe  aliquid  anihiiritur'-  qxod  ant  K/t/urn  aut  rtrtja  nut 
privfermt«a^^.  lb.  Or.  2.  2r.,  111.— 0.  TabuKe»^  repertse  .«tint  in  quihus  suninia  erat'» 
JlelvetiOnim  capituin  inillia  CCLXIII.  ;  exhisr/wi  art/ia /(rnf)(fs.stnf^^  ad  niillia  XCIT. 
Cies.  B.  (;.  1,  •jy. —  7.  Ctesar  exploratOres  pnrmitnt'"  qni^"^  loruin  idoiwrin  c<t>:f n--:  dili- 
qaiit.  11).  2,  17.— 8.  Ca-sar  in  Morlnos  proliciscitur  quod  iiidt  trat  brevi-sinius  iu 
liritanniam  trajectus»».  lb.  4.  21.— 9.  C.  Fl;imiiiius  La-liuna  socerutn,  ywja  cooptdtu,s^o 
in  auirunim  colleL,'ium'-i  nonei'at.  non  admoduni  diiiirebat.  Cie.  Mrut.  2H,  101.—  10.  Ilor- 
tensius  post  consuhltum— r/v//o,  quod  vidTnt  ex  ccHisularibus^-  neniiiiein  esse  s»('cuni 
comparan<ium,  iteqlirji^rtt'-'-^  autem-*  eos  qui  consuii's  non  iuissent— illud  stadium  n^- 
niTsii'-".  lb.  \y.\.  .320. —  11.  Circiter  homiiium  inillia  sex  spe  saliliis-"  inducti.  quod  tiiiam 
fugani  occu/tdri  /)o>tse  exiMimdreiit,  e  castris  llelvetiOrum  e-rressi  sunt.  Ca-s.  B.  (i.  i, 
27.—  12.  Alius  alijl-T  c:iusa  dlatS^y,  quam  sibi  ad /)rt>fici.<cei)dufn^*  nccesmriam'-^o  esse  di- 
ceret.  petCbat  ut  discedere  liceat,  lb.  1.  .'iJ».—  1.3.  (^uiesierat  ex  me  Scipio  quidnam  siii- 
llrem  d(!  hoc  <iuod  duo  colei^  visas  e/^^^.e  constdret^K  Cic.  Jtcp.  1.  1.3.  11».—  14.  lluuc  excu- 
silvit  'I'ereniius  quod^'^  eunt.  bracliiuin  frerjisse  diceret.  II).  Or.  2,  <»2,  253.—  1.').  Hi  ex- 
jjonunt^^.  equite.«i  .Eduoruni  interfectos  (es.se)  quoil  rollocnti  cum  Art'trni^  dicerentur. 
fjes.  B.  (t.  7,  38.—  Hi.  Verres  nomiiiat  servum  suum  quein  tnaqistrum  ptcori^^*  esse 
diceret.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  7. 

Rem.  89.  QuAsr-sunoBT.iQUE  ct-ausks  arc  those  Avhicli  ai-e  virliially 
equivalent  to  (^uhohlujue  danarii  {^  T)!)!)),  \vliicli  is  liic  ca.^^c  (//)  if  the  r/oirrn- 
inrj  verb  implies  an  ohlique  chuise  (Oiis.  1) ;  (b)  if  llie  clau.sc  is  dependent 
on  a  quasi-oblique  clause  (Obs.  2). 

Obs.  1.  Verbs  or  phrases,  which  imply  oblique  clauses,  are  the  following:  :  (a^  many 
piirases  with  substantive  objects,  as  Causain  re/terio  =  causam  esse  rejjerio;  ptt/irt^or  or 
propouo  aliqnid  =  polliecor  me  aliquid  ractilrum  esse;  ])Osco  (^ar/ito,  jieta)  aliquid  = 
impero  (peto)  nt  aliquid  detur.  as  :  Ca'sar  banc  rtperilbat  ra //.<.«;«  quod  apud  (Jf-rmnnos  ea 
consuetQdo  t^,s>6'/' ut,  etc. ;  Vm>&v  found  out  t/ds  rt-aso/i  that  it  woa-  cu>t(>mary  with  the 
(iermans  to.  etc.  Otes.  B.  G.  1,  5i).—  Mai:iia/;/YV>"////7  eis  (jiii  eum  occidfrint  pi-aMida  ;  He 
pr<rndstd  «^reat  rewards  to  those  who  would  kill  him.  lb.  h,  8.—  Ciesar  qiiotidie  .Eduos 
frumcntum  quod  €ssf:ntjx)llicifijla!/itdre;  Ciesar  daily  ^/^7«««r/^</ from  the  .Edui  the  corn 
wliirh  thct/  had  prornistd.  II).  1,  It;.—  {b)  Those  vt'rbs'of  say ine.  tliinkinir.  etc.,  which  are 
construed  with  an  object-infinitive  (g§  489,  491)  are  often  equivaU-nt  to  a  similar  verb  of 
siyinir,  etc.,  with  an  infinitive  dau-^e.  or  a  clause  with  vt.  IJence  the  clatis.s  depend- 
ent on  these  con>tructionsar<'  quasi.sufM>bHque  if  conceived  by  the  subject  of  the  ^'overn- 
im^  verb  of  sayinpr,  etc.,  as  :  Nee  Ilasdrubal  alium  qu'-uHiuani  pratlctre.  nuUk  (malebal) 
ubi  quid  fortiter  ac  streniie  agendum  esset ;  Nor  did  Ha^drubal  likt.  to  jdace  any  one  else 

1  Twins. —  2  j_  fi  quoniani  fremino»  se  esse  considerjlbant. —  3  respect  due  to  a^'e. — 
''  IJomuIus  took  the  I'alatine.  and  Hemus  the  Aveiitine  hill  as  ol)^^■^•vatories  (fenii)la) 
for  the  au'jcunil  phenomena.— ^  acted  as  his  defender  because  (understand  :  '  he  eon- 
hidered  that  his  brother',  etc.).—  «  to  excess.—  i  at  dayliirht.-  «  would  bark.—  *  their 
bones  would  be  broken.—  >•>  sharp.-  "  i.  e.  quod  existimarent  eos  an'is  esse,  l)ecause 
they  would  consider  them  as  sharp. —  »=  is  considered  ambi«;iious. —  J3  i.  e.  quod  vidC- 
tur  verhum  pnetermissum  esse;.-  i-»  lists.—  >•>  suinma  erat  Iltlv^^tiorum.  the  a.^irreirate  of 
the  Helvetians  was  staled  to  be.—  »«  /.  e.  who  were  desi<:nated  in  ihe  lists  as  beini,'  able 
tt)  bear  arms. —  >'  sent  scouts  in  advance.—  >«  /.  e.  qiiHius  imperavit  ut. —  i"  pa>^pa<re. — 
20  chosen.--  «i  board  of  auiriirs  (whose  chairnum  was  Ladiiis).—  sa  exconsuls.- ^3  hlijjht- 
ed.  took  no  account  of  them.— 2*  and.— '-»  j?ave  up.-  •'''  induced  bv  the  pros|)eci  of 
liboriy.-  27  see  §  3.')7.  R.  6.—  2«  to  alleije,  to  plead.—  2»  for  his  departure.-  ^o  c<iusa 
7t>-cessaria,  a  reason  which  forms  a  f^nod  excuse.—  3»  constat,  it  is  known.—  ^2  literally  ; 
because  he  suiU  =  by  saying.—  =*=*  to  ? tate.—  ^*  overseer  of  the  herds. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


•ll 


u  i 


1 


in  command  wherever  brave  and  enerjretic  action  was  required.  Liv.  21.  24  {necprcRficere 
maUr»Z  be  paraphrased  bv  '  Xeqarit  se  pnvticere ' ).-  C'onstitutrut.t  ea  q.ue  ad  proficis- 
^umprHinlrnt  cmni>arC,re  ;  They  resolved  to  prepare  sshi^uvasrequiredjovxh^  march 
V'vT\\ii\  3(r=constituerunt  ut  coinpararent).-  (c)  Predicate-accusatives,  governed 
b;  V.  i.s  of  say  nir  or  thinkinir  (§  487,  B.C.),  are  frequently  equivalent  to  a  ^'"^'1^»';;;^^  > 
of  Ivin^r.  erc.Vith  an  inllni.ive  clause,  as  :  Leres  militesc^m  ha;tam  tan  turn  r7^rer.«Jroe^^ 
Itnntur  •  Those  who  carried  onl v  .1  lance  were  called  light-arnved  soldier.^.  Liv .  8,  8  (  -  dice- 
ha  ur'leves  m  li  es  esse).  [Compare  the  Ex.  p.  202].-The  imperlecl  of  the  periphrastic 
luf   re  (  fien  imX<  a  verb  of  '  ies..lving\  and  clauses  referriufr  ,0  such  a  resolution  are 

U  mmrlvdssnrus ;  1  was  ^oins  H-  e.  I  had  resolv.jl)  to  send  »ht  back  «.  soon  a^  she 
wo^d  consent  to  it.  Cic.  Att.  11, 17.     So  the  Ex.  with  Si-clauses,  p.  a4.-hee  Ex.  1-b. 

Ops  o    Clauses  dependent  on  quasi-oblique  clauses  are  quasi-sufjoblique  according 

to  thea\ndo-vof /?  8(i  87.  as:   Minucius  obtinuit  ut  h-.Ones.  ,tcuti  comuhbus  7nos 

i!;j/  hUertrdivuie;.M.t;   Minucius  obtained  (a  decree  of  the  senate)  that  they  should 

distribute  the  le-ions  amon-  each  other,  as  it  was  customary  with  i-onsnls.  Ln.  22  ^.. 

!Sc  lio'^  ss^t^  is  nuasi-snboblique,  because  It  depends  .m  a  quasi-suboblique    mi- 

,e. at i  N-e)  c  au.«e,  '  vt  leqones  diriderent '  iobtinuit  =  eredt  ut  senatus  decerneret).-  Pluri- 

I  msyVb  s  tecuiu  e-i  i\,  q»oscunque  tihi  ejus  n.cessarios  com7«f//rfar-m.  babSres  eos  in 

I  me  o  ne0rurnelvs.arfor.^     ;  1  have  been  rather  explicit  on  this  subject,  m  order 

I  at  vo  i   I  av  consider  as  m v  relatives,  whomsoever  of  his  relatives  I  would  recommend 

0  to  /  C  Fat^  6  13.  The  clause  '  quoscwiqm. .  .commenddrem '  is  quasi-su  .oblique, 
Ihfce  it  depeS  on  the  quasi.oblique(i\mx\)  clause  '  ut  haf^res;  etc.-  Canes  aluntiir  m 
Ca  itoio  It  si-nitlceiit  si  fures  venerint  ;  In  the  Capitol  dojrs  are  kept  to  announce  / 
\hU^^l^uld^come.  Cic.  Bosc.  A.  2...  5«!  The  conditional  ^^:^^:^T?:^  '' 
qua«i-suboblique,  being  dependent  on  the  final  clause  'w<  stgmjicent.    See  Ex.  J-U^ 

Obs.  3.  Sometimes  the  governin-  final  clause  of  a  conditional  or  of  an  eqnivalont 
relative  lau-e  or  of  a  clause  with  ant.quam  or  priusquam.  is  ellipticallv  omitted  if  it 
may  -"sy  be  supplied  irom  the  text.  Jn  this  instance  t^\^l^'P^'^'^>f/'t  claiise  is  qua    - 

suboblique  with.'.it  any  gov..rning  clause.  ,.^''>"^^''»''"'V.  .^ 'V'^"'^'  ih  s  AnV^^^^^ 
FnHi>h  introduced  bv  'in  theevent  that'  or  'in  the  case  that.' as:  1  ullus  tamen,«t  tana 
J'iV  «.    /    (     MHtio)-,  in  aciem  edflcit  exercit urn  :  Tullus   however  placed  his  army  lu 

1  Sltle-order  in  the  .vent  that  what  Mtttius  proposed  should  be  untrue.  Liv.  1,  23.  He.e  a 
Xiseof  nurnosemust  be  supplied  'edueit  exercitum  ut  pugnare  PO-^^tt ^^.  ^'^-^^W 
oft  run?  sr  v/  r" /0  Z,sop.ne  hi :  Others  ottered  t  hemsel  ves  in  the.ca^e  h  at  their  asnsarice 
woudbeo-  anu  Le  Liv.  2<i,  9  (Supply  '  Ut  sendtns  ojH>rd  sua  utatur  si  quo  usus  ejussit). 
1  tM(h-Ti-(  es  /"'/^ry.mm  tanfum  rofhris  esset  UomCwis,  quantum  futfirnm  apj.arebat 
ocni  !a.it  beliifm  fac^ere  ;  The  Fidenates  hastened  to  begin  the  -«/ .^/^.J^^^^-^i^^, 
had  so  much  strength,  as  it  seemed  that  they  would  have.  Liv.  1,  14  u.  e.  'hey  iKgm  ine 
w^ir  in  order  to  cf^u^l  the  liomans  to  fight  before  they  would  have,  etc.).  See  Ex.  13. 

Obs  4    For  the  tenses  which  any  description  of  indirect  predicates  must  af"me,  if 
thev    in  a  direct  form  of  the  clause'  would  be  iu  one  of  the  future  tenses,  see  §(»07. 

1    Scinio  Corinthiis  statuani  pollicenlibus  eo  loco  uhi  essevt  aliOrum  imperatOrum,  tnr- 

miil'dJxirlSbi    displicere.  \.  Or  2,  05,  ^^i?-"  ^^  V*:--^^'-- ^^'t'  J^^XiS' 
Inlus  esf3   cinod  castra  i>rop  us  Romanos  jnovv-sef.  (  a>s.  B.  O.  <,  ^0.- -^.  i  ffi^ar  ooj^acs 

r    a.  sTVos^'/i  arf  eisfugiss^nf,  j.>po^ctt.  lb.  ^  ^■-'^■'^^'^^'''^  ^^^u' 
iZ.)quos  infer*  controversia  esset,  ad  se  Decetiam  'JY;'<j;^f\^\^^I^^'-  f/  Vartha^' 
rix    caniii-»  no^iuMn  eis?  qui   non  paruermt^  conshfvil\    lb     t,    .1.—  b.  Carttiaj,ini 
en<e^  S  1,  i"  o  majorum  suoru.n  fuisset^^  delude  ah  Syphace  ad  se  pertiemsset^  , 
\^m^i^n'^  '  Liv   4     17.-  7.  Omnia  senStus  reficiel^at^^  nisi  de  me  prius  consule_s  r.^?/- 

S  f/>^  Cic  Sest  31,  08.-  8  (ialli,  nisi  perfregerinf^^  nninit.ones,  de  cmwi  ^f'^t^  de- 
sTJ>^  nt^^i\\o\M.si  rem  ohtinuerint^\  finem  lahonim  ()muium  ^^^'P<^'1<^'}^11-.^^^^^ 
BO    7,  8.-i.--  9.  CaduceStor"»  eo  regius  veuit  ut  indutioi  essent  dontc  toUerentur  ad 

•  1   4  nun  int^ndtd  bu  Sciino :  statme  turmriles"^i^^ing  l>oth  '  equestrian  statues,'  and 

•  «taVuer bv  so     dmns  '-2  f  easini.-  »  was  accused.    The  phrase  proditjOms  insin  uia- 

^ked  for  t lie  re  n  of  wl  at  «tc-  ^Unnnia  rejiriehat  =  declarabat  opmia  mtiionend^ 
^-\l\orv^^^^^^^  they  succeeded  in  forcine  th.ir  way  into  the  intrench- 

menT^  ^ee  T»  07  -  '«  desahVe  desT>frant,  considered  their  lives  as  lost  ;  =  scxefHiM  sibi 
H^en^m  Ut  -  >^  il  they  were^«uccessful.-  ^^  =  sperdi>ant  finem  adjore  laborum. 
—  1»  herald. 


408 


USE   OF   THE    iSUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


4u9 


8epr.ltaram>  qui  in  acit"^  cecidUsfnt:  Liv.  33,  11.—  10.  Bor.i  imporaiOrcs  in  oo  loco  ( 
fujj:;iiu  hostiuiu  fore  arlWirautur^  milites  coUocaiit,  in  (j>io-<K  fi  qui  ex  a<ie/tir/tr\ 
de  iinpmcVio  incidant^.  Cic.  Rose.  A,  52,  151.—  11.  ]I(»sttA-»  in  foio  eiinfaiim  cousii 
runt  lioc  Hiiiinc)  w/,  n  qua  ex  part e  contra  offriam  renirtfur,  acie  instrucifl  df-fnigiim-tin . 
Cies.   B.  G.  7,  'iS.-  !:>.  C'lUriur  casirlla  coinniQiiit",  quo  facilius,  si  se  invVo  tratwir« 
xx^nareiit'tr.  prohihCreyw-VcNt/.  lb.  1,  8.—  13.  Siiuul  Tanaquil,  bi,spes  deistituaf^ ,  alia  pne- 
gitlia'*  molltiir".  Liv.  1,  41. 


B.   Subjunctive  by  attu.ution. 

%  601.  The  predicate  of  ii  clause  is  frequently  placeel  in  the  subjunc- 
tive because  its  jivincipal  iwedicate  is  in  the  same  mood.,  althoui^h  neither 
the  clause,  nor  the  principal  sentence  contains  an  indirect  statement.  The 
predicate  of  a  clause  may  thus  '  agree  in  mood''  with  its  goveruini^  predi- 
cate if  there  is  a  close  and  intimate  loi^ical  connection  between  the  clause 
and  the  governing  sentence.     Such  subjunctives  are  called  'attracted 

SUBJUNCTIVES  ',  Or  '  SUBJUNCTIVES  BY  ATTKACTION '. 

Obs.  It  may  be  considered  af  a  linijniKtic  fact  that,  whencvor  an  indicative  predicate, 
in  consequcnVn!  of  the  ^rranunatical  laws  of  a  lani^ua^e  is  clian^ed  into  a  ml>jniictive, 
those  who  nse  tiie  lan;.'nai,'e  f*-el  in  the  chanirc  of  the  mood  a  ehan;;c  in  the  manniT  of 
coiiceivinij  tlie  i)redicate.  'iMiis  chan2:e  of  conception  atlects  all  part.s  of  tlic  sentence, 
and  is  thiis  transmitted  to  those  dependent  predicates  which  are  in  a  close  lofjical  con- 
nection with  tlie  ^overnini;  j)redicate.  Hence  the  attraction  (»1  mood  is  nothing  but  a 
«grammatical  form  by  which  the  lojjical  luiity  of  two  predicates,  the  one  of  which  is  de- 
pendent on  tlie  other,  is  represented  as  an  identity  of  tueiu  modal  iielations, 

lle.m.  90.  The  mood  of  predicates  in  a  clause  is  generally  attracted  by 

the  std)junclive  mood  of  the  governing  predicate  if  the  modal  conception 

of  the  priuci/hil  predicate  may  be  transferred  and  extended  to  the  dependent 

predicate.     Whether  this  is  the  case  or  not,  cannot  be  determined  by  a 

general  abstract  rule  (see  however  Obs.  1  and  2),  but  often  dejX'nds  on 

the  connection  in  which  a  given  sentence  is  placed,  and  on  particular 

intentions  of  the  writer. 

Qiiif"  in  illfl  jr^tjUe  pndorem,  coiistantiam.<'/i(7m'>t  .«//J  nihil infersit,  non  tamcn  diliirat? 
Wliat  person  would  not  love  modesty  and  lirmness  (if  already  manifesting^  itself)  in 
Pitch  an  early  ai:e,  even  if  he  takes  no  per.-'onal  interest  in  itf  Cic.  Fin.  5,  2*2.  (»2.  Here 
the  modal  relation  of  tiie  «ioverninj;  subjunctive  dilioat  is  that  of  a  supposition  ex- 
pressed in  the  form  of  a  neijative  (juesti»)n  (§  5!)3).  1'lie  clause  '•  etianiA  .-•na.  /d/iil  in- 
Jf/vt/"  is  conceived  as  belonirini;  to  the  same  sni)position  (t.  f.  etiamsi  suil  niliil  in- 
tersit  in  iilo  tmdore  qitem  posuii.  Hence  an  attraction  of  mood  is  required,  and  tho 
use  of  an  indicative,  as  lon^'  as  the  principal  predicate  is  in  the  subjunctive,  would  be 
faulty;  whereas  if  tlie  principal  predicate  were  placed  in  the  indicative,  the  d'-pend- 
ent  predicate  would  assume  tlie  same  mood  (t'nusquis(iue  f///if/i^.etiamsi  suil  nihil 
inft-rest  ;  or  /H(i(/et  etiamsi  sufl  non  infererit). — Hut :  An  ei^o  in  liac  urbe  esse  pfjssini  his 
pulsis  qui  7n£  hujus  iirhi.-ficoinpotemfecernntf  C(»uld  I  remain  in  this  city  after  the  ex- 
pulsion of  those  who  made  it  jws'fiihle  for  me  to  stay  in  this  cityf  Cic.  Sest.  09,  146. 
Here  the  clause  ^qui  me  conipoteni  fec^i  itnf  is  not  subject  to  the  motlal  conception 
of  the  principal  sentence  lin  which  tlie  subjunctive  bel<»n;:s  t«i  ihesume  class  as  the  one 
ill  the  lirst  example).  Hence  an  attraction  of  mood  would  be  improper.  Thi-  instances, 
iiowever,  in  which  the  attraction  or  non-attraction  of  mood  is  to  be  accounted  for,  arc 
not  always  as  plain  as  in  the  examples  above.    See  Obs.  2  and  3. 

But  the  mood  of  the  dependent  ]uedicate  is  generally  7?/>^  attracted: 
])  If  the  governing  sulijunctive  belongs  to  the  indepp:ndent  subjunc- 

1  Ad  sepulluram  tollere,  to  take  away  for  btirial. —  ^  iijjttlc.—  ^  see  R.  88,  Obs.  3. — 
*  This  relative  clause  has  the  force  of  a  clause  of  purpose.  See  B.  VI. —  ^  to  make  an 
unexpected  attack  on  those  who,  etc. — "erected  fortified  castles. — '  if  (in  the  event)  that 
her  hope  would  be  disajipointed. —  *  expedients. —  *  to  devise.  Supply  :  ut  lis  uti poisset 
«i,  etc. 


i  I 


( 


lives  fsee  the  example  below,  No.  a),  exci^pt  in  the  case  of  hypothetical 
pI,?ods(Ex   20  24)!  and  of  interrogative  subjunctives  (as  m  the  examples 

mentioned  above).  ^*  i,^  «^ 

^\  If  the  modal  concepticm  of  the  governing  predicate  cannot  be  ex- 
tetuled  to  the  dem-ndent  predicate.  This  is  generally  the  case  {a)  if  the 
de)endeitclausrccmtttinsa  particular  action  uhich  is  stated  as  having 
iL  y  W^^  (see  Ex.  below.  No.  b) ;  {b)  if  it  contains  general  truiliS 
whidi  h^  even  without  their  connection  willi  the  governing  pred- 

icate  (see  Ex.  below,  No.  c) :  T,.;^„rr. 

J  [T„H   OOVKKMXO  rUKDtCXTK  BKIKO  A^^^^^^^^  ^^^Z 

nat  Oram  causae  videat  (orator),  qwe  "fX/^'^^^'V^f//  /  .t^  1 30     placing  the  predicate 

juiictive  by  attraction.  „.,.^ . , ^-xv/-  a^tt-at  ■papt'sI  —  Tantnm  exarsit  bellnm 

iK.lds  good  Without  any  J-Ci^'-i^d  .^^  ^he  pr    c  pal  prcmc^  ^^^^^  ^^^ 

the  principal  I>'•^■^!i^'V^^'^''''''V   "wV/  rS^^^     But     Ma"uUfldo  maleficii  facit  at, 

•  allVct  the  clause,  and  the  >"*'9^  .'^f^J  «/f,^,!^^^^^^^  The  magnitude  of 

?mi  pane  man>fe,^tum  parjnndvim  PrqWa'^^^  Sc«?^y7>^  /i«^/^  **  Proved.  Cic. 

the  crime  makes  it  incredib  e  nnle^  'I'^tlonXoTf^  ^lerlniualify.  and  since  it  falls 

1-5. 


real  meaumu'  «^  ,i.^y  cc^, ....  v-  --  --     ,,.  •  p        i-  r-     iiero  the  clause  '  si.  .ducininr'' 

'i^::;(;!^X^"^'oiT;Z^  ',^4,',!"; kllilng  „„dc.r  tUis^uie,  attra^ou  a.mo.t 
,K>     iuikes    laec.    Here  belong  the  following  in»taucc8 : 

i,HlicM,r  requires  \u  d^-pen-lfnt  ^^'iT'^i'^^^ZmJ^todiT^^^^^  efl'"'  /  «'«  *""".  » 

!;r:i;;7;,^n:nH.'a,;Sfcier;;r.iVets'.]unc^^^^^^^^ 

its  indicative  accordim;  to  II.  ^"^'^''!- If^*  ^f,?„7;f '  li. Mch  beinc  introduced  by  si,  qicum, 

(fj)  In  those  predn  ales  of  contingent  action  ^"|^^'  ";'''|:  '  ,,:tuer  tenses  equal  to 

vtiLsim>:iac,  .^nc.nq.e.  r'<fiesr;^^q^^  "hS^ct  "if  H^e  Xr  ^  i^  Se'i^rf^t,  and 

thoae  of  their  jxovernintr  predicate,  or  a  plupciicct  "  '''*;'^.''''^^_    .  „^^  5  .  p  330,:  Ita 

mentem  ei  rentelmt  restdM)  ^,He  began  to  be  .ojie  nt,e^  instituendos  adolcsceniulo^ 


Simnlac  jH>dfa  est-habent  //l^^-^^"' "  «f,^^f  "",^^;''«;/  t^Tcas^ii  qiven]  they  may  know 
adapted  to  the  ^"sf"^';'^"  "fJ.'^^^^l/Vr  o  '27  m  -  FiGbat  nt  omnium  oculos.  qvotie^- 
where  to  appW  for  "^lon-'f^/^^^  £  co^?rVrL^^  (It\vas  the  case  that),  wherever  he  made 
'^;^:::^^'vn^^  «^  ^^^  (independent  :  qaoi^escunque  .n 


DEPENDENT    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


411 


410 


USE   OF  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


nublicnm  nrodieraf,  omnium  ocuios  in  se  converterat).  Nop.  Ale  3,  5.  SometimeB,  how- 
fver  <mMwS^^  intnxincrd  by  a  compound  oicunque,  the  moo.!  is  nut  Hltracted^ 
a'inT'^;.  ..0^(1.1  t-.i.mlar  to  .he  last  :  Captlva  ad  ScipiOne.n  adduc.tur  v.r^o  adeo 
exlmS  lornuT  nil  quacunque  inccdSOat,  converttret  oumm.u  uculos.  Liv.  2b,  50.    bco 

^*r;/"*In  Uio-te  clan^c^  iiitroducHl  by  quum  or  duni  which  require  tenses  and  moods  equal 
to%<,^V(     the^rp^^^^^^^  predicate.  iH-cuusc,  the  two  predicates  denote  inner  identity 

of  ac  i  .1  (K  «'»  OBs.  1,  x>  m).  as  :  Quo  fiCbat  ut  Athen.enses  omnia  mnais  prospere 
?4ti  \lcib  ac  is  ciilp:;  (Lertnt,  qnuiii  eum  ant  ne-li-enler  aiit  nial.tiOse  {i:cx^:^eloque- 
Sir     Tm^  it^c^-^m^  the  Athenians   affnf>>'fed  every  ill  success  to  Alcibiades  8 

fa,       »i;/i/%4  .•>■/''  Ctnusmuch  a^  th.y  mid.  by  myinp)  that  he  had  acted  «'cul.-eiitly  or 

?/^  S  aid  lie  l)lame  to  Alcibiades).  Nep.  Ale.  7.  2.  Sometimes  8uch  clauses  akc  tlio 
Ibrm  of  a  ^o.'ditional  .-lause.  See  Ex.  16."^  The  satne  is  the  case  in  clau.e.  introduced 
by  quamdix  after  tamdi't,  or  their  equivalents  (See  Jiem.  (.1,  Uus.  o). 

Ons  2    The  predicate  of  clauses  which  cannot  bf  .separated  from  the  L'overning  predi- 
cate wiMnrnt  dfstroyin.,'  or  afVeetinj,^  its  nleanin,^  mu>t  be  attracted Jo'  »^)„^;T  e  c 
.'overnin-r  uredicate.      Here  beh)nj:  comparative  clauses  with  qnam.  ofqne,  ac,  etc., 
Cv   ich  have^ni   nde^  value,  but  only  serve  fur  qualifyiui,  the  PnM<M>al  chmse  or 

sentence,  as  :  Quis^^loriam  tam  unquam  ^^7^^^«^  «''«''',*^7'''^!';;;'';-/;'7/ 

wiU  (would)  ever  cocef  renown  in  the  same  measure  (Ui  he  f'/ittns  disfracef  i  c  1  art  Ui. 

2»;  9       The  mea,  in.'  of  the  principal  sentence  ' qnis  r,lonam  expetat    would  be  who  ly 

chan-ed  withou      he  comparative  clause,  nor  could  the  latter  be  conceived  as  an  inde- 

m    dent  sen ttM  ce      Hence  the  predicite  r>fr,iat  could  not  be  in  tlie  indicative  as  long  as 

e  nVi   dp     S  ChanL'in;;  the  latter  into  an  indicative, 

e  m  od  of//7i(^  must  follow  (nemo  tarn  expetit  gloriani  quam  ///.v*^  iixm.mn.ian 

See  Ex  nS/  B  It  the  predicates  of  those  comparative  clauses  which  either  contain 

hftortcal   facts  (Ex.  21),or  are  merely  ad.led  f..r  the  sake  c    descnlnng    he  principal 

iredcare   si  as  to  have    he  nature  of  a 'parenthesis  ^u'eneraly  nitn.duce.l  »;>' ^'/^"''^^f- 

mX/V  .^(v/^/  etc.),  are  j^enerally  mt  attracted,  but  retain  their  indicative,  as :  Quid  iratua 

1    Xt  'P^e  Ueirulusy  What  -reaier  harm  could 

a  K  ^lov^h     e  ^^^  <li<i  to  ImLlf?^  Cic.  Off  3.  2«--"^h'^'''^';n/r.^L';* 

nim  Kic  enulTvit  nt,  aueniad.  udnni  qnondnni    h\ibiani  mitite^  Komani  apiMati  mnt, 

s?riuhicraten4s    pucl  (inec()s  in  summa  laude.r>^-/-'"V  ;  Iphicrates  drilled  the  army m 

n  nvm  er  Uiit  ^-onri  the  Jiomau  mldirrs  were  ccUtnl  Fa/nan.^,  so  the  Iphicratian.  were 

i^Z^W^TSuZ^  Greeks.  Nep.  Iph.  1.2  4.     Clauses  with  the  mere/arm 

a  comparative  clause  (an^6  q»am,  vast  quam)  nn,  d(//;/ attracted  or  not;  as     De  h  s 

rebus  dsputatum  est  in  llorte'.sii  viTlft  qiuini  vo  jx),>^tndie  vcni^sCmtis  qmmapudCatu- 

im/Sm.'v;  There  was  a  discussion  on  this  sub  ect  in  »\f ;'"!;";;,«  ^^f 3.;^, '^^"^til^ 

h-id  arrived  there  the  day  after  our  visit  to  CatidiK.  Cic.  Ae.  2,  3.  (See  Ex.  2^.  ^i.)     «ut  . 

Hoc     iperiimrDicm         hicile  perculit  nt  post  diem  tertium  qnam^  .Sinl  tarn  at  tiger  at 

Svracas.?s  ^^X^^^^      So  easily  did  Dion  crush  that  -..vernment  that  he  entered  S>racnso 

ulr^^iUv-o,  davs^';-/^/^^    had  landed  in  Sicily.  Nep   Dion.  5,  3     The  same  prmc.ple  may 

often  be  applied  to  dependent  clauses  of  any  kind.  See  t.x.  Z\.  Zo. 

Obs  3  Hut  the  criteria  j.'iven  Obs.  1  and  2,  arc  not  always  sufficient  to  determine  the 
moo^l  of  the  dependent  predicate,  and  in  many  instances  attractions  .re  found  in  certain 
Sences  while  in  ver}  similar  Sentences  the  predicates  remain  unattracted.  This  par- 
ticularly  refers  to  causal  and  relative  clauses.  „         * 

\)  The  Di-edicates  of  causal  clauses,  although  containing  general  truths,  are  often  at- 
tr  cte(  hi' .  S  on  ace.  of  their  close  lo-ical  connection  with  their  L'overninj;  predi- 
cate-  F  tZen     t^^^  niaxima  quasi  o.atOri  scena  ridtatnr  contiOnis.  natttra  ipsS 

ilornatiisdicenm  .'enusexcitCMUur;  Hut  it  is  certain  that  we  are.  by  the  very  nature 

of-  iixumstaiices  incited  to  a  more  elegant  style  ^.^'[«'--/'^^f  1^  ;'-\,;^  ,  i^^.^i^,;;;^^^^^ 
RPfiiis  a<  it  were  an  eiK.rmous  stiige  lor  tne  speaker.  Cic.  Or.  2,  4.i.  AW.  in  tins  txampie 
UiedieVwa  :."^^^^^^  al^>><'^t  the  character  of  an  indirect   statement    being 

epi!^ei:S;?Zaca;t^  dwelling  in  the  imagination  of  ^IV;""';^ ^':^^t^::^'^Z^ 
•11  ricted  although  the  clause  contains  a -eneral  truth.  But  s-uch  a  coin  i  ption  cann  c 
b    Vound  in    1  rron<,w^^^^^  sentence,  the  predicate  of  which  remain-  nnattn.cted  :  Acc5(    t 

t  e  f  Ui  li  an  i^  IS  evtldat  ex  hoc  aere,  quod  nihil  ed  animo  v^loctu>^ ;  To  tins  must  be 
•uide<l  Ihat  thVsoul  the  more  easilN^  leaves  the  atmosphere  of  the  earth,  6€ca^/.e  ihert  ts 
rtolhing  quicker  than  the  i<ouL  Vic.'Vn^c.U  v.).  EK.'Zh  ,.      ,.     ,v,^^ 

2)  Relative  clauses  are  not  subject  to  attraction  if  the  stntetnent  contained  in  therti 
i^ifin^obiecive  character '  (the  same  as  when  they  are  subobllqm^  li.  S7.  Obs.  1,  2), 
^^a  en  ihev  del  ote  as  were,  'ready  made  ideas,'  so  that  they  often  have  the  lorce  of  a 
mere^Sl?<tan  ive  o?a<n^  as  :  Omnisdicendi  ratio  tribus  rebus  est  nixa,  ut  conciUB- 

n  us  1  SbifeosT^.    a/ Ji««^     The  whole  plan  of  speaking  is  shaped  by  three  pSinls  of 


^1 


M 


I 


/ 


m, 


view,  to  cmciliate  our  audience,  etc.  Cic.  Or.  2,  ^,  115  -  Epistolae  proprmm  e^ixx^isad 
Que?n  Kcribitur  de  eis  rebus  quasiqndrat  certior  Jiat ;  It  belongs  to  the  nature  of  a  le  ter 
thai  the  rtciirer  is  informed  oi  w/iat  he  d-ies  not  know.  lb.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  1.—  lien  Pote>t  ut 
id  quod  sentit  pollie  eh  qui  i.on  pos-it ;  li  is  possible  that  he  cannot  express  his  tItoughU 
smoothlv  11).  Tusc.  1,  a  «5.  Ex.  27.  28.-  But  sometim^-s  the  predicates  of  such  clauses 
are  attracted  by  the  governing  predicate  :  Multos  vidC-mus  qui  quod  relint  sine  cujus- 
ouam  sim.litudine  coiisequantur ;  We  see  many  who  gain  their  ends  without  imitatmg 
J  V  me  lb.  Or.  2,  -'3,  98.  See  Ex.  25.  32.  If  the  relative  clause  refers  to  lacts  vvhich 
ncfuallv  have  transpired,  the  predicate  always  retnins  its  own  mood,  as  :  Di  prohibeant 
ur  hoc  ouod  inaiOres  consilium  publicum  vociTri  ro^werMn^,  pnesidium  sectOrum  existi- 
niGtnr-  Heaven  forbid  that  the  body  «/«ic/i  our  ancestors  07  (/<?(=(/  to  be  called  'Coun- 
cil of  the  Peoide' should  be  considered  the  instrument  (support)  of  the  land-sharks. 
Cic.  Rose.  A.  52,  151.—  Ita  mihi  erant  cari  ut  eOrum  aspectu  omnis  qucv  me  angibat  cura 


t  •  They  were  so  dear  to  me  that,  at  their  si<:ht.  all  the  care  that  afflicted  nie 

)   Brut   3   10    Ex   29-31.    Thus  If  a  present  uredicate  denotes  a />a«<  action,  as  : 

'■   :.     '..  'j .  . I .i:.,i^  «^...,>/^.i..r.i  oM«n«ri.i  •  Tt  msiv  hv  tliflt  vou  iiever  heard 


consederit 

ceased.  lb.  I'irui.  o,  lu.  rL,.\..  >iii--ii.  ^  im.^  n  t.  j/iv..  ^  ..„  ^,..,»-.--^ —  -- — r^.  ■*  '  v.'  a 
Potest  fieri  ut  quod  teaudisse  dicif,  numquam  audieris  ;  It  may  be  that  you  never  heard 
the  words  which  you  say  you  have  heard.  Cic.  Or.  2,  70,  85.  U  however  the  relative 
clause  has  the  force  of  liWnlingent  action,  (according  to  Obs.  ^^,^V  «^  if  it  refers  to  an 
eventualifu  (as  in  Ex.  9,  and  33),  the  predicate  is  attracted  even  if  it  beloi  gs  to  the  past, 
as  •  Quo  factum  e>t  ut  Atheiiieiises  Attico  omnIs  honOies  quosj^ssent  pub  ice  habCrent, 
Thus^it  happened  that  the  Athenians  publicly  showed  t(.  Auiciis  all  tlie  honor  tli^y 
could.  (iNUKi'ENDENTLY  :  Quoscunque  pjtcran/  hondrcs  ha(jebant.)Ne\^  Au.  4,  l. 

3  1 1  most  instances  whet^,  according  to  Obs.  1  and  2,  an  attraction  of  mood  should  be 
expected,  occasionally  the  mood  remains  in  the  indicative,  as  :  Non  utar  ista  consuetu- 
diue  *i  quid  ^st  factum  clem^nter,  ut  dissolflte  factum  criminer  ;  si  quid  vindicatum  est 
severe,  ut  ex  co  crudelitatis  invidiam  coUigam.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  5,  8. 

1  A"esilJlus  (in  trajiciendo  Hellespont o)  tantilceleritilte  uf=us  e-^t-aX,  qvoditet' Xerxes 
anno  fertente^  confecerat.  hie  transient  trigii'ta  (iiebus.  Nep.  Ag.  4,  4.- 2  IIuic  uni 
contigit  nt  patriain  in  qua  erat  natus,  oppressam  a  tyrannis,  hherflret.  I^^- Tim"l- J.  L- 
3  Ita  liebat  ut  quos  tn  n-ipublicm  causa  heseras-,  palam  te  oppugnflrent3  Cic  lam.  1, 
7  1  _  4  NenMuem  conveni  quin  omnet-,  quum  te  sumtnis  laudit/us  ad  cnhati  extuierunt*, 
mihi  continuo  maximas  gratiasagant.  lb.  9. 14,  1.-5.  Quid  potuit  aliud  si  L.Brutua 
^^t^uiciritatem  dornvTatu  regio  libelant  /  ID.  Plane.  25.  60.-  «-.Nemo  est  quin  banc 
affectionem^  aiiimi  piobef  qua  non  modo  utUifas''  nulla  quatr-tfur^  ?cd. contra  utilita- 
?e  n«  etiam  consena'ur  fides'».  lb.  Fin  .5,  22,  03.-  7.  Ejusmod.n  prolusions  df^fe.se, 
Ut  iDsis  senteniiis'3  quibusproluserint^\  pugnSrei^  possmt  oratOrcs.  lb.  Or.  2,  SO,  325. 
-8  Quodsi  luce  qtioque  canes  latrent,  quum  deos  salutatum^^  aliqm  rentnni,  ax^ 
crura  siflrin<ranttir.  lb.  Rose.  A.  20,  56.-  9.  Mos  est  SyracQsis  ut,  siqua  deread  senci- 
?/rr.rm7  L^n^  icat  sententiam  qui  relit^'^.  lb.  Verr.  2,  4.  64.-  10  Hoc  malehcium  ita 
rifo  exsiiiit  Mi  si  quando  au<ntum  sit.  portenti  ac  prodigu  simile»»  videatur.  lb.  Rose. 
A  IS  ;«  — 11  Nemo  erat  qui  animum  jinlicis  quocunque  v-s  posiularet-'>  po^i>et  un- 
nellere^i'  lb  Brut  9:i,  322.-12.  Nullum  helium  civile  fuit  in  nostra  repiiblicil  in  quo  non, 
S/'/X/9««/>a/%vrici.4^",tanienaliq  f.n-ma  esset  futtlra=3  reipublicic.  lb  ad  Brut, 
l^t  10-13  Si  dm'datqueorluseLr-*,  se  quisque  cognosceret  continuo-^  vidSret 
miid  esset  siiminum  bonum.  lb.  Fin  5.  15,  41.- 14.  Equidem  so  eo  agere  adversarii 
?-iiisain2«  ut  discipiilus  agat  snam,  et  guidquid  de  sua  ve^''  cogitant  in  medium  profe- 
r  2«  lb  Or  2  24  102.-1.5.  Accedebat  ut,9'rH//t  sa^rlre  ventusccfmssent,  et  ^e  vento 
dedi'Jni'^ (nxxs'i^^l  et  tempestStemSo  ferreiit  facilius.  et  in  vudi^^i  consi.^erentsa  tu- 
ti'ls   c!cs.  B  G.  3,  13.-  16.  Ego  non  committam33  ut,  si  defugenm^\  causam  aliquam 

1  -  Dnm  annus  vertit,  in  the  course  of  a  year.-  a  to  hurt.-  a  to  attack.-  *  raised 
to  the  skv  -^  that  emotion.-  «  to  approve.-  '  worldly  advantage.- ^  is  aimed  at  - 
.  J  m  '/^/i/<7/.;«.  with  a  disadvantage;  at  the  sacrifice  of  ^^'^'-'dly  af jfntage^  .-J  ^ 
d.itv  i-  di-char.'cd.— 11  belongs  to  es^-^e ;  must  be  so  composed.— i^  intioduction. — 
?"  h<>i<dus-M"which  ihev  ha^ve  used  in  the  intioducti«m.- i.Mlgit  the  adversary - 
1«  t"der  to  pay  their  re-pects  to  the  gods.-  »'  if  any  question  is  discussed  in  the 
S<."?._iV3,^;/,,„^,,,/iaii  qui  velit,  any.me  may  volunteer  his  opinion  ;  in  Rome 
nnbodv  bein-  allowed  t<.  speakf  except  when  invited  by  the  chair  (^ententiaTn  rogare).- 
l^, XI r^a  simile,  like  an  event  out  of  the  le-ulnr  course  of  nature.-  «o  in  whatever 
din^^io^  the  case  Voiild  require.-  ^i  turn  the  mind  of  the  judge.  Fosset  and  in  the  next 
^inte  ce  'Ze  futrlra '  are  particular  subjunctives  peculiar  to  relative  clau^es.-^^  7mi.M 
Imvc  defeated  tie  other,  the  pluperfect  having  the  force  of  a  future-perfect.- "  7/;a«  to 
b^i  ; -in  the  coniemplation  of'  the  party-leaders.- ^.^  orJri  to  be  born^-  "  ^  rectly  - 
^^'cansam  agere.  to  perform  the  part.-  "  case.-  -^  in  medium  prqferre,  to  ^nng  for- 
ward-"» had  c..mmitted  themselves.-  3o  storm.- 3'  in  low  water.-  ''  to  M«y;,- 
"no«  com?  itfamvt  r/^w.  a  circumlocution  of  the  simple  negative  future  (I  uill  not 
give'luid^^^^^^^         thing  as  to  give).-  3*  =  defui/iendo,  by  a  withdrawal  ou  my  part. 


1  n 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


413 


tibi  rocupandi'  dcm.  Cic.  Or.  2.  57,  23.3.-  H.  Quid  habot  popninrc  «7!ip,|"'V;i""™ 
3,  " 


19._  IS.  Maccdoiu's  k'vihus  be 


r,  23.3.—  17.  <iaicl  nanor  popmare  or;un 

puinpscris  ac  pop'i/o  lioinano  r/Jtvf/io'.f 

His,  qiiic  fXcrcC'ivr.f-'  mai:i>»   qn^iivx  fath 


qdreiiP,  ^^ub 


aWuina  miiuiil'  fnerant.  Liv.42,  5.- iiC  Qnumyidtam  "avc-m  curM.nu.Mu-utjM,,^uurn, 
nun   tfmposi?.te  i)n;jncm  potius»  q^iam  Uli 


94  -  20  Jec  i-tm  ipse  me  potius  in  i,rufuu<lum'  nt  cetercx  eons  rv-lrem  quam  ulos  ad 

beham  iiovi  (luod /w-s^  nccidisset  qnnm  dnhsem  ad  to  Philoyciu  littria-.  (_  c.  •^';;    •  ^; 

-2:     Quid  babel  irs  b.ei-  (iu  boc  .loeOrun,  ^-^-'rV  '>•  ^I'l'^'lf;''  f'' .'"'^.^^ST-^^^^ 
pmis^Min  bTrere»3d'-beat  quam  cogititn  iiottn,^.<<'  vidt(i!>fr ."  Ib.Oi.  ^.5.».  ^4*.—  .;».  urns 
eu  nie   n!      mn  la veret  (/ ^.  si  in  torn  d.c-reui)  r-V'/v  onuKMU  tetfllen,  in  populi  Ko- 
3  b^  irionslimpfam.Um^.../- Mb.  I^ 

ad  d.cenduui  veuii'^  banc  atl\rt^;  lacnlu-lieu,  ut,  ^^'«''J;;''^ ''IJ  ^'^'  '?  /^^ 
omr  dicantxr^^  similia  ecriptOimu»»  ess^e  vuleanmr.  lb.  Or.  1.  .33.—  «»).  t.i no  luuni  r 
^^  qmnlc^nib^rcallo  locuvum"-^  dij>n,cn  .,n,v..,  jht  litjeras  teeuu,  coiioquan  lb. 
fIuh  VTl  -27  Kloquendi  vi.-)--=  elHrit  nt  .-a  qua-  iqnoxmufs  dis.eie  et  e.-.  9;/tB  fCl- 
i<am.  I,  I,  I.  -««.  '-^^'";l  '■",,  XT  n  •)  V>  lis  — •>s  \<ia  lain  <)pTma-3  est  el  fertibs 
muK  abos  docere  i)ossIuuis.  Ji>.  IN.  i*.  .*.  •>•',  ^*^-  -^-  -^-  i<«  '<»"•'  i  '."*  ♦  .  „  n  ,04  lu 
nr  mu  iiudine  eaum  Jcnun  q>ne  exporfantur  U\c\\i^  omnibus  terns  antec.ll..t-*.  lb. 
L  ..  M  i.-  2  K  Adeo  a c'consiv^'  sunt  spe..  nt  etiaut  q.i  obsideh,,nlur  Sy;;'ia-^'%r'VS 
Misnileriut^«  Liv  24,  3.-..- oO.  Si  reviviscant  Plaluuis  audnores  fyv?  yKt;•;//'^^^  qmd 
rSoomiS-  ^'  Cic"  Fin  4, 22,  «il.-  31.  Quibus  rebus  tiebat  ut  Mibiades nou  minus  eOrum 
vol   «IT  e  imperium  o^^^  qxi  (cuu.)  vma-an(^\  q.uiui   lUoruni  onn  Q'ifus /rat 

«w/S^^^^  Milt.   2,3.-32.  Quum  bal.eas  id  quod  ;/u////.;t.s.   noli  drsulerflre  id 

Se^^a  iwi  nU^ne.  vive,dssenU  cloquenliJ  persuadCre  potuisseut  Mb.  Inv.  1,  2,  3. 

Bern  91  Predicates  dependent  on  non-oblique  infinitive  clauses  or  on 
sulnect-infinitives,  are  sometinies  placed  in  llie  sid.junctive,  ««  ?/  6.y 
attmctum,  provided  they  stand  in  such  a  relation  to  llie  govern in^sx  in tini- 
tivc  clause  or  subject-intinittve  that  their  mood  icouhl  be  attracted  hi/  i/^em 
if  these  intinitives  were  subjunctives.  Such  subjunctives  may  be  termed 
subjunctives  by  qu.\si-attiiaction. 

Or^  1  Or  A^i-ATTKACTioN  cbiedv  occurp  if  tbc  p:ovcrninj:  infinitive  clause  takes  the 
pl?cv  o  'an  (im  HM™1)  ...6>r^  v^^  an  impersonal  ,.redieate,  ^-ucb  '^^  ^{''^^.^'^^  ;f,^.f^^ 
lTd>mrW^  e<  vw.^  esK  or  i.redicaies  coutandn-  in.pcrsonal  pred.cate-enitives  §  4 W.  2) 
?8  •  Ditn  •  le  est  in  pbilos<.pbia  pauca  esse  el  n..ta.  cui  non  ,i>U  aut  plenique  ant  omnui; 
It  is  drffl'ult  that  n  philosophy  a  few  tbin-s  should  be  kn..wn  i,y  h-m  who  rfo..^  o^ 
k)ww  e  ther  most,  or  alL  Cic.  Tu4.  2,  1.-  Necesse  est  ejus  etiam  p  rtTs  propter  se  expe  1 

10  m  iver-^m  pr..ptersef:r/>.Vrt^/r  .'  It  is  necessary  that  tlie  parts  ot  a  thinir  sliould  be 
de?  Ton  [be  r  owi  accouut'if  the  whole  (literally  ^  ivhir.h  as  a  w  ,  of e/)  is  desired  f..r  Us 
own  sake  Cic  Fin  .'',  i7.  40.- Mand-lrc  qnemquam  liti-ris  co-itatiOnes  suas  qu  eaa 
mc  dfX'.cTC  nee  i^lb  ;trkre  po^sif,  hominis  est  intemperanter  abut.nt.s  et  olio  et  litte- 
?isffl  a  porson  should  corn-nit  his  ib<..i<,'hrs  to  writin-  who  ain  neither  arran^^e  nor 
rxnl'ii  them  is  the  mark  of  a  man  unduly  wastin^'  his  tune  and  paper  Cic.  1  usc.  1, 
explain  the  t  ^^^^^  ^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^^  constructions  are  repugnant  to   he  English 

idiom,  and  oii-ht  to  be  recast,  which  may  easily  be  done  with  the  above  sentences,  bee 
Ex.  1.'2.  ^ 


a 


1  Of  excu«in-  yourself.-  '•'  tchich  rathfr  kept  them  in  practice.  The  Mibjunctive  exer- 
arevt  is  pec  iai-  to  relative  clauses.-  ■■>  to  weaken,  to  impair  the  streUL^th.-  *  under 
con/  nou'^  military  r.mtine.-  ^  referring  toc.r.sU..-«  f.dlow  the  course,  and  Hccomno- 
rlati  to  it  —  7  into  tl.c  sea.-  «  as.—  »  to  depart.—  >°  what  place  (chance)  is  the.e  lift 
for  art  '-n  in  that  class  of  jests.-  i^A/ce/i  dkfnn,  witty  word  -  ^^  eviUswn  ha^rtr^ 
(Zeaf  litera  ly  'must  stick  .-.fter  beinjV  sent  ibrth '.  t.  ..  'must  have  hit  .-  "  lu  his 
Sins' t  le  Inpothetical  idea  of  the  principal  predicate  'favtrH^  is  very  cbarly  continued, 
a,  d  he  hvpothetical  cluis.;  (si  in  fmo  d,cerem)  may  be  aj.pbed  to  it  in  the  same  way,  as 
with  }arrr&.-  ^»  proceeds  to  speakin-.-  »•  brinir-*  with  him—  \'  extempore,  wit  -out 
J  o  es  _  »«  =  bis  words.-  >•»  like  written  ones.-  20  a  circumlocution,  instead  ot  •/i^>^/- 
Urcolloquor^^-^^  inten^aUo  loconnn.  by  space.- ^^eloquence.-  "rich.- ^4  to  excel. 
_  26  vve?e  intbmied  reviv.d.- '^*  kept  up  their  spirits.- 27  ^  the  bearers  .f  Plato.- 
2«  ei  wimi^erant  -his  principals,  the  owners  of  the  expedition.-  =•  r-  his  companions 
thrnu'm  rs  f  the  expedition.-  30  This  suhjunctive  is  evidently  cl.oscn  to  correspond 
to  the  parallel  clause  '7 w<i  malueiis\  But  it  is  also  meant  for  a  subjuuctive  ol 
iruarded  biateinenl. —  ^^  bow. 


Jw 


K 


4 


Obs  2  Subject-infinitives  have  the  power  of  efTecting  a  quasi-attraction,  because  they 
are  always  equivalent  to  infinitive  clauses  with  indefiidle  persons  understood  a'^  tlieir  los;i- 
cal  siibiects  (^  4'>4)  a-  :  Satis  est  id  quod  IradaUir  posse  meraoria  cusrodire  ;  It  is  enougU 
'to "be  able  10  keep"  what  in  tawjht  iu  one's  memory.  Cic.  Or.  1,  2%  127  (\.  e.  aliquem . . . . 
custodlre  •  Tliat  a  person  should  be  able  to  keep,  etc.).  See  Ex.  3-5. 

Obs  3  The  cause  of  quasi  attraction  is  the  modal  similarity  in  the  conception  of  sub- 
junctives and  predicate-intinitives.  Hence  some  lanirua<xes  often  employ  tubjuuctives 
when  the  Latin  language  makes  use  of  a  predicate-inliniiive. 

Obs  4  Since  clauses  with  predicates  in  the  subjunctive  of  the  second  person  with 
the  mi-aniu"  of  an  indeflniie  subject  {\i.  79,  Obs.  3),  may  always  be  placed  in  tliosub- 
iunctive  siPcb  eubjunclives,  wherever  thev  occurin  clauses,  do  notbeloni:  to  any  class  of 
dtpouhnt  subjunctives,  but  must  be  considered  as  potential,  as:  Memona  minnitur  mst 
earn  exercea^;  Memory  is  weakened  unless  you  exercise  it.  Cic.  Sen.  7  (Compare,  how- 
ever p  712  D)  —Frequently  they  occur  in  clauses  which  require  the  subjunctive  Irom 
other  reasons,  and  in  such  inst.nces  these  subjunclives  have  a  two-fold  force  and  nuau- 
in«'  a--  Tum  ilia  ita  scite  inaureis  poculis  illi-jlbat  ut  ea  ad  illam  rem  nata esse  rftcercs ; 
\t"tbat  time  be  inserted  «bese  things  so  skiHuilv  iu  «rolden  iroblets,  that  one  vnr/ht  have 
'thouqht  thev  we.e  made  for  the  puri)08e.  lb.  Verr.  2.  4,  24.  Thus  such  subjunctives  occur 
whei-e  any  predicate  woidd  have  been  in  the  subjunctive  by  attraction  or  qiiasi-attraction  : 
Neaue  est  boni  neque  libenllis  parentis,  qtiem  procreCnis  et  eduxeris^  eum  non  et  vestire 
et  ornare:  Nor  is  it  the  mark  of  a  g..od  and  liberal  parent,  to'eave  him  whom  /^e  has 
henotttJi  and  hrouqht  op,  without  clothing  and  support.  Cic.  Or.  2,  28,  124.  In  the  last 
example  the  indefinite  per-on  to  whom  the  subjunctive  of  the  second  person  refers,  1« 
a  noun  where  in  Entrlish  the  third  per-on  must  he  used.  But  in  Latin  the  second  va-v- 
eon  may  be  used  even  in  sucii  connections,  if  the  s"hjunciive  is  dependent  on  a  subject- 
ii.linitive  since  with  a  subject-infinitive  the  indefinite  subject-accusative  aliquem  must 
alwaysh;.  supplied  (§4".M).  which  maybe  replaced  by'ie'in  the  meaning  of  «/t^wm. 
(ThAl  you  , should  not  clothe  him  whom  yawAare  begotten,  is  the  mark  of  a  bau  parent.)  - 
See  Ex.  6-13. 

1  Mo«  est  \thf  nis,  laudari'  in  contiOne  eos  qui  sint  in  prceliis  interfecfi.  Cic.  Or,  44. 
—  •>  Cui  proito4ta  sit^  conscrvaiio  sui,  necesse  est  huic  partis  qnoque  sui  caras  esse. 
lb~Fiii  r/  13  37  —  3.  Si  est  oraloiis,  q>urcunque  resinfinde  jws'ta  sit^,  de  ea  posse  di- 
cere,  d'icendJim  erit  ei.  quanta  sit  soils  ina-_MiitQdo  etc  lb.  Or  2,  15  -  4.  n-eniOsi* 
vidCfir  vimS  verlii  in  aliud  atqve  ceterinccipiant*'  |)osse  ducere.  lb.  2,  ()2.  254  —  5.  i.st 
boniconsulis  qunrn  cuncta  auxilia''  reip'/fj/icce  /ab'farfan'*  videaf.  ierre  opem  j)airioe. 
II)  Kib  1  3—  ()  Si  in  homines  caros  judicibusque"  jncundos  acerbiuset  c(mtunielio- 
iin-'»  imWire^^\  nonne  abs  te  jii.liees  afja'ienes p-^  lb.  Or.  2,  7.5.  304.-7.  Non  enim 
Picut  ar-umenium  simnlatquei^  ))Ositum  est  arripituri*.  ila  niisericordiiim|6  gimu.- 
atoue  ii^futcris^^  posHs  cummovCre.  Hi.  2.  53.214.-  8.  Si.  quum  pro  alteroi^  d^m>^  cau- 
Um  relinqvas^'',  \uh\UiC  vocHisf  lb.  2.  7.5.- 9.  Est»»  sive  artis  sive  consnetiidinis2«, 
nosse  re-iones  inter  quas  r€«f;/.-'i,  ut^^  jyervefiges^^cino^.  qiueras-*  Ih.  2  34- 
10  Deli.'ere  oportet  qucni  relis  dilieere.  Auct.  Her.  4,  20.-  11.  I  rb5na  dissimulations 
cVt  nuum  alia  dicnntiir^*  ac  sentias.  Cic.  Or.  2,  67,  m).-V2.  Si  ita  nimreMlas'^\  afteren- 
dum"«  est  quod  sif^»  aut  giavins^'o  aut  u-que  grave.  Il>.  2,  53,  21.5.-  13.  Ita^»  dissimiles 
orant  inter  sese,  statuere  ut  tamen  non  posses,  utrlus  te  malles  esse  gmiihOrem.  lb. 

Brut.  40,  148^ ___^ -^r^ 

""rin^FTMMi  we  use  a  subject-infinitive  instead  of  the  Latin  inliniiive  claiise.     \\  e 

may  consider  here  the  •  Mos:  as  personified,  laying  down  a  rule  according  to  which,  etc. 

Tin-  I   e  subjunctive  by  quasi  attraction  passes  over  into  a  subjunclive  of  indirect 

?t    eine   t.l!-  ■Avhoever  is  Anxious  of  preservinir  his  perso.i  (his  'Ego').-  ^  indiscnmi- 

nately  on  every  subject  that  may  be  given.-  ^  the  mark  of  genius.-  «  vim  veiU  dvcere 

^liquid  to  ai)]»ly  a  word  to  a  meaning.-  «  aliud  atque  ceten  acctjnant  different  from 

e  a.  ceptatbm  by  others.-  t  all  the  res'burces.-^  to  be  weakened,  paralyzed.-»  jyrfict- 

bus  is  an  oldect  ot  both  co?os  and  jucv  n  dos. -''>  raXhcr  abusively.-"  to  inveigh - 

la  alienate  (the  -ood  will).—  i3  at  the  same  moment  as  it  is  introduced.—    J^to  catch, 

to  understand,  to  appreciate.-is  misericord iam.  co/nmorere,  to  awaken  sympathy,  or  pity 

vi        he  accused)    u  the  au<lience.-  1«  at  the  same  moment  'you  have  touched  the 

siVi   -'   Utcrallv  'you  have  introduced  it').-  '^  another.-  »«  rel.nquish,  drop  the  case 

1  1"  it    s  amatteI-.-2o  experience,  practice.- 21  =  veneris.- 2i  wuh  the  purpose  of 

r,b-oendent  on  vvi^re),  or  -so  as  to'  (dependent  on  Jiosse).-  '^^lierrestiqare,  eitlier     to 

beiuccV^fu    in  up':  or'to  t.aceuj.in  all  diiections'.  the  prefix  ;^r  having 

e  thet- nieanin-  -  '-^*  what  von  are  searchimr  lor.-  "  it  is  a  species  of  elegant  irony.- 

"  «lip   ly  :  ««-^  t^--  "  >v'»l^  the  force  of  a  potential  future  =  si  quis  ita  mm  refellet 

(reflJlvLr  adrer,<a7y).-  2«  to  brin-  Ibnvard.  to  ofier.-  2»  subjunctive  of  quality  (B.  \  L), 

a  dependent  f.iture   may  be  substituted.-  3»  a  reason  of  greater  or  equal  weight.-- 

»»  They  were  dissimilar,  6?^^  so,  etc. 


414 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DErENDENT  SUBJUNCTIYE. 


415 


& 


Tenses  of  the  dependent  subjunctive. 


§  603.  'E\Q\'Y  independent  subjunctive  is  placed  in  n  particular  te?i8e, 
since  those  rules  (^  592-594)  wliich  rcgu.late  the  use  of  the  difiereut  classes 
of  independent  subjunctives,  determine  in  each  instance  their  tenses.  But 
the  tenses  of  all  dependent  subjunctives  (whether  they  belong  to  the 
general  or  particular  subjunctives,  §  595),  are  determined  by  general  rules 
referring  to  all  of  them.  These  rules  comprise  two  diffeuent  systems: 
1)  the  law  of  consecution  {consecutio  tempornm),  which  determines  the 
tense  of  a  dependent  subjunctive  by  the  tense  of  its  governing  predicate  ; 
or  2)  the  logical  method,  which  determines  the  tense  of  a  dependent 
subjunctive  by  those  rules  which  hold  good  for  the  tenses  ew  the  indicative 
mood.  The  tenses  used  according  to  the  former  sy'stem  are  called  *  tenses 
BY  consecution';  tliosc  determined  by  the  latter  are  'logical  tenses'. 
The  former  are  the  rule ;  the  latter  the  exception. 

Eiro  incis  rebns  jjestis  hoc  S7im  ai^/teculns  ut  hoiium  nomen  CTUtiwer  ;  I  have  «»ained 
this  iioiiil  by  my  acts  ihat  /  am  considered  a  jrood  name.  Cic.  Fam.  5.  (5.  Here  tho 
present  teii<e  of  the  subjunctive  e.rUtinier  is  a  logical  tevsk,  bocau-e  the  predicate 
is  conceived  as  t)el(»nijinijj  to  the  author's  time,  and  is  placed  in  the  present  witiioui  any 
reijrard  to  the  tetise  of  the  irovernini;  precJicate  ''sum  a-ss(critiis\ —  Ita  rixi  ut  opiniOne 
vestnl  facile  contentus  e>.v?6//i  ,*  /  hare  so  iirtd  that  lam  perfectly  sati^fied  (that  J  can 
afford  to  be  satistied)  with  your  opinion  (of  me>.  Liv.  28,  44.  The  imperfect  tense  of 
the  subjunctiv<' «A*;i?/n  is  a  tkvsk  by  coNSKcrTfov,  because,  althouirh  it  is  conceived  to 
l)elon*?  to  tlie  time  of  the  speaker,  it  is  nevertheless  placed  iu  the  imperfect  by  the  in- 
flueuce  of  the  j^overuing  perfect  vixL 

1.    Law  of  Consecution. 

%  603.  1.  Predicates  in  7ion-preterite  tenses  {i.  e.  in  the  present,  impera- 
tive, and  the  two  futures)  require  their  dependent  subjunciives  to  be  in 
the  niESENT  or  teiifect,  the  present  being  used  if  the  dependent  sub- 
junctive denotes  an  action  coincident  in  time  with  that  of  the  governing 
predicate,  or  later  than  it ;  the  perfect  being  used  if  the  dependent  sub- 
junctive denotes  an  action  preceding  that  of  the  governing  predicate. 
This  method  is  called  'tkesent  consecution',  and  hence  the  present  and 
perfect  are  'the  tenses  of  present  consecution'.  2.  Predicates  in 
preterite  tenses  {i.  e.  perfect,  imperfect,  and  pluperfect)  require  the  sub- 
junctives of  their  dependent  predicates  to  be  in  the  impekfect  or  plu- 
perfect, the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  being  used  with  the  same  distinc- 
tion as  the  in-esent  and  perfect  in  the  *  present  consecution'.  This  method 
is  called  'piieteuite  consecution',  and  hence  the  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect are  called  *  TExsf:s  of  pueterite  consecution*. 

Obskkvation.  The  rule  about  the  distinction  between  the  two  tcnfcp  of  the  pubjunc- 
tive,  used  in  eacl»  of  ttie  two  clashes  of  consecution,  must  be  qualified  in  re^rard  to  irov- 
erniuiT  predicates  in  tlic  future  and  in  the  pluperfect.  1.  If  the  principal  predicate  is  in 
the  luture,  tin-  dependent  subjunctive  denotini;  an  action  anterior  to  it,  is  not  always  in 
the  i)erfecr.  This  tense  is  used  only  if  the  action  is  at  the  same  time  anter:<;r  to  the 
»i)eaker''s  lime  (Ex.   C.  a,  1),  or  if  it  lias  the  force  of  a  eubjuuctive  of  the  future  perfect; 


\ 


ol=e  tbe»r.^f»/«ubiunctivemust  be  used  (Ex.   C.  flr,2).    2.  ritipcrfect  snbiunctives  de- 
o^e  tl.epr^'f/u  su  ju  u^^  irenerally  ref.-r  to  a  Wma  pHor  to  the  latter;  but  m 

pendei.iouai^^.ve  I    MjM^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^i,,,^  4.35    3). 

111  perltct  »-"I'-IV''',\' ,,,,.,:. '_r,.„»    /„  450  g)    always  refer  to  a  time  subsequent  to  the 
subiunc.ive  ''•'''';'        '^/I!^^^^^^^  be  considered  as  anteri<.r  to  or  coincident 

•'"!•  ''"!•/;    I'l  ;.  .M.vcrn  ,  <'    ?ed  ca^^  "«^  »>«  determined  t)y  the  English  use 

o"  'tensJ  but  bv  the ImHu  xfay  of  thinkin,^    Both  ways  are  sometimes  diUerent  (see  R. 
42  •  n.  43  ;  n.  00,  Obs.  4,  and  Ex.  under  A,  a,  2.) 

K'^rjirsiru3':fpi;ii«.  .;M.;L^T;.xVtp,"Lsu.«  ^.^,.^,ol^,».m^^ux  u.m  that  »> 

which  the  Latin  subjunctives  are  placed. 

A.  Pbesent  as  ^roverninii:  predicate.  «ovi^^x-ivr   predicate  1    1    Scis 

(a,THEI)KrKNUKNTStB.t-^NCTI^^^^ 

:^SJ:H^/  ?i:^^ri;n?}  X.^T.  neVj^nore^^-mi.^^han  ^^^^^  ihav. 

blushed,.  Se,u  Ep.  11.-  (6,  ^^^ll^^^'^^li;"!^^^^^^^^         tT"leave  tta  y  wh  fe  H^UaU^^^ 

mum  jnweres  :  I  exhort  you  to  ha.<t^n  to  Home.  Cic.  Qu.tr.  1,.3,  4. 

B.  iMPEKATivE  as  fjoverninjr  predicate  f^nr^r^rt   r\f  Vam   1  9  15  — 

eible.  Cic.  Fam.  4,  10. 

2'.».  1. 
i).  Fi'TURE-rEUFECT  a?  ?overnin<x  predicate.  ^ 

(.   PK.o.O  Si  causam  qua-  me  i^i^^n^^'^^,:^^^^:^ 

which  has  ,ndurrd  me.  V"^' V  -^  Pn  iiSn.^  •  If  tluMiop^^^      G'^iCii>f^  pass  a  resolution 
aliquo  cive  Romano  ut  sit  is  civ.>  C»aditanu>  ,  11  nic  l;*-**!''^"'    1^     ,  (La^^    (jic  Balb. 
in  /e^^rd  to  a  Roman  citizen,  that  the  same  ^^te^  )  S?quc'n  cui  rSe V^^^^ 
11.  27  (:=  if  thev  pronounce  him  to  be,  etc.).—  (0,  I^at'eh  )  ^l  quii  i  c   i 
ilrnui^  ;  U  I'jind  a  person  whom  I  may  salely  entrust  (with  the  letter).  Cic.  tarn.  1, 

Roman  i)eople.  Ln  .  2s.  -y;- y';^'*'^Vi,rthn;  le«  cn's^ed  or^r  to  Africa  at  a  time  when 
vreretur.  traosgre^susm  Alncaniro,  •  AgiUhocl(  sj'K>^.>fa  t;te^  '      ,-.  „„o(j  p^jhi 

war  had  bem  ra'iioq  in  Sicily  for  a  long  time.  Liv.  ^f;J^--.~-ri^}*l{^^^  "tic.  Fam. 

,V?;.;l  „r  thS^  -I  am  ."live  .i.;. ha.  J, -;,t;"'/' oS*orS'=A«*'*  '^«  i- 
2  ()r'ndorx  civitati  ?><'r^^'/(^^'^/lU  de  hnibu^  suis  60-17  eA«,  v^i„v..  ^    o  — 3  Re<nili, 

habitTn.ts  /o/.«r..that  they  should  leave)  \he\r  |^;mtvy.  Cx>^^ 

priusquam  tota  cironnrenir.tar  acies.  inter  tu""  1  "  "  fl^^  'Unrounded.  Liv.  28,  33.- 

imidst  the  disorder  b.-lore  the  whole  "^niy  /  «/i  ^^  /'    «^^^^^^^^^ 

condemned.  lb.  28.  34. 

^ent.  prius  ctiam  quam  nostrum  syixiluim  ;><^)!i.W  .  ^;^^*i^,f{.,^"'^before  theu  had  ap- 


•il 


416 


% 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE 


ageretur  ;  The  unlucky  hoy  felt  already  what  2va$  the  matter.  Clc.  Qu.  Fr.  1.  3,  3.— 
2.  Piiucis  diCbus  erani  in'utsurus  (episiorary  tense)  doniesticos  labellarios,  uttotlus  aes- 
tatis  res  jjjestas  ad  ^euiitiuu  per^crlbtrein  ;  1  am  to  send  in  a  lew  days  (a  letter  by)  my 
private  carriers,  that  /  r/iay  comprise  in  the  letter  to  the  Senate  the  events  of  the  whole 
summer.  Cie,  Fajn.  2,  7,  3.— (r,  Lateu.)  Exi»loidhant  Gulli  nnde  belli  initiuin  ./f*;ci  / 
The  Gauls  wtre  making  liiquiiies  where  the  war  was  to  commence.  Cajs.  B.  G.  5,  53. 

G.  1'lupbrfect  as  yfovernini;  predicate. 

(a,  Puion.)  Uu:e  pwi^osita J'aerant  nobis  qnnm  honoribus  9iW\\i\\-?-^\x\-\\'i  perfun.cti  «.*«?- 
r^i^/*,  ea  jam  sublilta  tota  sunt  ;  What  had  Ineii  our  alms  alter  ice  had  /jetn  lu  the  hi<;h- 
est  ollices,  all  that  is  now  wholly  demolished. —  0,  Coin'cident.)  (^uum  inamlnddrem 
in  xysto,  M.  ad  nie  Urutiis  ventral;  M.  Brutus  A  at/  come  to  me  when  I  was  loalk- 
ing  on  the  portico,  lb.  Brut.  3,  10.— (f.  i..\TKK.)  1.  Hannibal  scalas  quibus  scan- 
deret  muros  non  aftulerat ;  Hannibal  had  not  carried  wiili  him  any  hidders  by  which 
to  scale  the  wall.  Li  v.  2:^,  7.-2.  Priiis  rtcursum  semper  ad  wwl^'erat  quam  clamor 
airrestis  corto/e^ ;  T\my  had  aUs'ixy*  returned  to  their  ships  before  the  alarm /wti  Inien 
given  to  the  country-people.  lb.  29,  28. 

li;^*  For  tlie  use  of  tin; '  pres(!nt  consociilion  '  with  predicates  depend* 
ent  «M  I'i-^torical  presents,  see  li  45,  Obs.  'S. 

%  t#(^  I.  If  subjunctives  are  next-dependent  on  a  predicate  which  is  attain 

dependent  on  another  predicate,  they  follow  that  kind  of  consecution 

Avhich  is  required  by  the  tense  of  the  next  (intermediate)  predicate  on 

whicji  they  depend,  not  that  consecution  which  may  be  required  by  the 

FURTHER  (remote)  predicate  by  whicli   the   intermediate  predicate  is 

governed.    This  rule  is  peremptory  if  the  intermediate  predicate  be  finite 

(for  particular  exceptions  see  §  000,  Obs.  4),  as  : 

Nihil  ultra  malOrum  est  quam  quod  jmssi  swnus  ut,  ad  ultimura,  fidom  voh'iji priTstarJ!' 
mus ;  No  evils  are  worse  than  lintse  which  we  have  suffered  to  keep  owr  alleiriance  to 
you  to  the  very  last.  I.iv.  2S,  .31>.  The  consecution  nl'  pnesfaremus  i-  ruETEKiT.  beinj^ 
cletermined  by  the  intermediate  Unite  predicate  pa>si  sumus,  not  by  the  further  predi- 
cate est. 

But  if  the  intermediate  predicate  is  non-finite  (P.  I.,  p.  227),  the  con- 
secution of  the  dependent  subjunctive  is  determined  by  the  (logicall}') 
nearest ^/i/A?  predicate  on  which  the  non-finite  predicate  depends,  except 
if  in  the  intermediate  non-tinite  predicate  a  preterit  tense  is  implied. 
(llt'in.  92  and  9;].) 

Explanation.  Gramjnaticalbj  every  predicate  is.^//i/^  by  nece«Pity  (§  19) ;  but  logi- 
callij  all  those  words  are  considered  as  predicates  which  have  viriually  the  functions 
of  finite  verbs,  and  may  be  represented  by  such.  Here  bclonj;  all  ])redicafe-inlinitives, 
all  accessory  predicates,  a?!  predicate-ablatives,  participles,  supines,  adjectives  (§  4'JU>, 
and  verbal  nouns. 

Hem.  92.  If  subjunctives  are  next-dependent  on  object-infinitives,  par- 
ticiples (either  direct  ixirticii)les  or  ablatives  absolute),  supines,  ^erund- 
ial  i)hrases,  or  genuuls  absolute,  their  consecution  is  not  determined 
by  these  '  intermediate  '  ])redicates,  but  by  the  finite  predicate  on  which 
those  intermediates  depend.  The  same  is  the  case  if  they  depend  on 
nouns,  adjectives,  or  su()ject-infinitives. 

Ctesar  qu:e  esset  \  nsuUe  ma^rn  i  t  ildo  reper'ire  non  poierat ;  Cie?ar  coyihl  not  find  out  what 
was-  the  size  of  the  island.  C;es.  B.  G.  4,  20.  The  imperfect  of  esset  is  a  tense  of  ;>/W«- 
nA' consecution,  not  according,'  to  the  intermediaie  present  objcct-inlinltive  reptr'tr*",  on 
which  it  next  depends,  but  according:  to  the  finite  predicate  yw/r /•(!/.— Scciiri  percitssi 
sunt,  adeo  torpentibus  metu  qui  aderant  ut  ne  j;eniitus  quidem  exaudirtlur ;  They 
were  beheaded,  those  that  witnessed  the  execution  being  so  para!  i/zed  with  terror  that 
not  even  a  ^roan  was  heard.  Liv.  28.  29.  The  consjecution  of  exaudiretvr  is  not  deter- 
mined by  tlie  next  participial  ])re(licate,  but  by  percussi  sunt,  the  Unite  predicate  on 
which  torjtentibus  de[ii:nds.    See  Ex.  1-5. 


I 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


417 


Btit  if  the  participle  is  a  perfect,  the  consecution  of  the  subjunctive 
d('i)eiulent  on  it  is  not  determined  bv  the  ^overnins:  finite  predicate,  but 
the  subjunctive  takes  the  same  tense  which  it  would  have  it  the  pertect 
participle  were  a  finite  perfect  (see  Obs.  1). 

Obs  1  Hence  subjunctives  dependent  on  perfect  participle?  have  <renerally;)r^^m7<J 
C()u^ciiti(ii  as  •  Mi  tuniur  ad  Cesarem  ab  Ccerone  litterte  xnagm^  p?0]x>niispvmim^ 
^%,fu^s^ni^Uo  pertuUnnt) ;  tellers  are  (were)  sent  by  Cicero  to  Cu.^ar  a  tei-^peat 
rvLvd>^  2vere promised  a«.  the  messen^-ers)  in  the  event  ^hat^/^^y  "W^^ '^'/^/y  ^^^^^^^ 
ttum.  CiEs.  B.  G.  5,  40.  Here  the  consecution  of  pertulissent  (which  has  the  loice  ol  a 
■nure-perfect)  is  not  determined  by  the  governing  «"•'«  P^<;4'c^\« /'" '^^''^,  «'l'  ..^  .«^J 
u-onld  admit  of  pre*,ent  consecution  {lyertulennfu  but  by  Pm^^'^tis'sxhichxl^unQ^^^^ 
r, outre  preterite  consecuiion.-  Quern  cnpulitatuni  incendus  inflamjnatum  "'  «u.  poti- 
cndis  qnaj  acerrime  concvpicisset,xmx:x  lanitia  perluncli  arbitra.nnr  qua  ua  Ali^ica  mm 
Hannibale  victo ?  What  i.er^on  infiaimd  by  the  fit;e  ot  desires  m  gaiuinj:  ^^ha  he  ai^dently 
icisl.es,  do  we  think  to  be  pervaded  etc.  ?  Cic.  Fin.  5,  24,  TO.  The  tense  oM  f  ^^«  "i  c- 
Uxe  concupicisstt  is  not  determined  by  the  finite  predicate  ^^^^.^^^'^'^J^l)^'^^^^^^^^^ 
accorciini:  to  the  teachin-s  of  our  gramnmrians  but  which  would  r^.q^i'^^  ^^f "^^^.fj^  ^Z' 
l).it  bv  the  perfect  participle  i„flammatum.  If  the  participle  is  changed  into  a  hnite 
perfect  inflammatus  est.  it  would,  accordii.g  to  the  genera  rule  "^  ^f.f  •  «^^-^ff'^f;  1% 
quire  a;^>f;-Ac/  indicative,  which,  l)y  being  made  a  ^">^blique  predicate  must  become 
a  subjunctive,  and  lieuce  according  to  the  prefcut  rule  a  tubjunciive  ol  the  pluper- 
fect. 

Or-»  2   Tf  the  norlect  participle  on  which  a  pubjunctive  depends,  is  iroverncd  by  an  in- 
fini^tWe  cla.  se  (a.?in  t>d  e^xaniple  Obs.  1),  the  subjunctive  will  be  in  the  perfect  ^^^  !^^ 

ttu  infinitive  clause,  it  woul.l  be  a  perfect  indicative  as  :  ^^">;>/"J?;"  J^f,^"  PJ^^.^^  ^^^^^ 
bus  conumsVis  qui  in  multitndinem  dicere  av^t  -tnt,  memoruT  diirnos  jierpaucos  f'"s  «^ 
ButrSthisto  le    .S^^^^^ 
lleneoDle  at  hir-e    there  were  but  very  lew  worthy  of  being  remembered.  Cic  Brut 

.  2l4^  The  predicate  aU  sinf.  if  taken  out  of  the  infinitive  clauseMVOuld  be  a  Perlect 
indk^iive  (VS/fs  ro/zr/.^^  sunt  (pn..ausi'svnt) ;  beinir  chanired  into  a  euboblique 
preiiJateNt  mS  ivtafn  {he  san.e  te,/se  according  to  the  nde  above.  For  the  reason  of 
this  rule  see  R.  93.  Obs.  1.    For  an  exception  to  it  see  Ji.  94,  OB^.  b. 

Obs.  3.  Sometimes,  but  rarelv.  the  present  consectitipn  is  "^f^  ^^'^t^  subjuncm 
rl.nendent  on  oresent  participles,  if  the  governui'j  finite  predicate  is  a  pietent,  as  .  l)ie- 

•it^or  «acrOr  m  causil  Ilomam  revocatu,r(,st),  consilio  ac  prope  precibus  agens  cum  ma- 
g]s?ro?quhum  ut  plus  conSuo  quam  fortfln^^  conjldat,  a  se  potius  ducem  quam  fcem- 
pronium  i//<i^^^</r.  Liv.  22,  18. 

1.  Neque  cognoscendi  quidfieret  neque  sui  colligeudi  ^o^^i'^"^,f«^!;  ^^^^.^If^l^^.^IIISj 

Hiisf     nres^    Cies    B    G    3  G.— 2.    Hannibal   cum   eqiiitibiis   ^unu(h^^   circumcqmtat 

is'  ,  re^)  urbem  ml  riendum^  qua  max.me^  p-.rteS  aggred,retur    L-v  29. 1.-  3.  Han- 

des  finis  eOruin  popularentur.  Ox>.  '^•^'\l--;'-T,^-,^V:'"i  \.y  «  it-mnib-il  nuntio 
Ti'x^  «en  natrum"  sen  plebis  an  inos  penclitarelur^ .  Liv.  L  42.—  b.  ^^'^"''y''"';'"""  " 
nx  .  .(u  paiiuii    /^«-"V  >-  /  .        ,,-Kpm  !iP-<rredereiur.  coeptam  jnv5mt 


jirivmi^so'^ 


u/su!  i^SK';;.;:^'^;.^»  dtun  ips^  aggrederetur.  ccptam  invSnit 

pugnam.  Liv.  29,  7. 

Rm.  0:].  The  same  principle  is  applied  to  subjunctives  dependent  on 

INFINITIVE  CLAUSES.  - 

1  If  the  predicate-infinitive  is  nox-pi;etertte  (present,  or  the  tnture 
infiiiitive  fore)  the  consecution  of  the  dependent  subjunctives  is  deter- 
uiincd  bv"the  -()vcrnin-.A'/*/^^^  predicate,  licing  the  present  9i>"f scutum  if 
thelaiteV  is  non-preterite,  and  the  preterite  consecution  if  the  latter  is 

^''""TrToo^.o.  nnrari  vos  quid  «7  quo.l  e:ro  poti^^imurn  ..m:r.rim ;  {*f>^"^^?/^X^^'|: 
tin-  wint  ?s'  the  reason  that  just  I  slio'ild  /lav^  arisen.  Cic.  l^)^c.  Am.  1,  1.—  f"/'";™. 
S,Vid  a  te  per  Httenls  jTtere  (piod  mihi  omnium  e^set  maximum;  J  have  not /usilafed 

1  To  examine.-  ^  7naxim^  aggrederefur,  should  make  the  ^^^'^f  attack  -  »  side.-;- ^  to 
to,  etc.—  « to  send  in  advance.-  » to  commence  the  battle. 


I 


418 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


419 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


(do  not  hesitate)  to  ask  of  you  by  letter  what,  for  me,  is  the  most  important  object 
of  all.  lb.  Fam.  2,  6,  2.     See  Ex.  1-7. 

2.  If  BOTH  the  predicate-liitiiiilive  and  the  «rovorniiiG:  finite  prediente 
are  puetekites,  the  cons^ceution  of  the  dependent  subjunctive  is  regu- 
larly the  preterite  consecution  (for  exceptions  see  Ous.  7),  as  : 

Nemincm  ad  eam  diem  fnninphn^sfie  qui  pine  magisthTtu  rem  fjemssef.  comhV>at :  It 
7cas  known  th:ii  up  to  that  day  nobody //a^/  triumphfd  (to  nobody  a  triutiiphMl  entry 
was  «,'ranted)  who  had  conducted  the  WJir  without  being  in  (a  curule)  otlice.  Li  v.  28, 
38.     Ex.  8. 

3.  If  tl>e  i)redicate  infinitive  is  pketerite,  tlie  governing  finite  predi- 
cate beinii:  non-pueteuite,  the  snhjunctives  dependent  on  the  former 
have  the  same  tense  as  they  iconld  have  if  their  gorerning  yerfect  iujini- 
tive  were  chanrjed  into  a  finite  perfect.     See  Obs.  1. 

Obs.  1.  In  order  to  apply  Rule  No.  .3  correctly,  all  the  subjunctives»  dependent  on  a 
predieate-intinitive  mu?t  l)e  divided  into  'ouioinal  scbjcnttive!*  '  and  *  scaTrNCTivES 
3IKHELY  sui5obliqce\  The  toinuT  coinpri>e  ail  tho>e  Mibjunctives  which  would  be  in 
this  mood  ev-ii  if  tlieir  oovern'mg  inflnilire  loere  a  finite  perfect,  as  all  i)redicntes  of  de- 
pendent interroirative  or  imperative  clause!»,  all  those  jjoverued  by  conjunction;- r^7»ir- 
t/*7  the  subjunctive  (jd^ne,  quo.  quin,  qunm  causal,  qwivi  temporal  in  certain  connec- 
tions, quAunris,  licet,  etc.).  and  all  oilur  '  particular '  ^uhjunctives  (B.  V[.).  The  l.itler 
are  tho>e  wliich  are  |)laced  in  this  mood  merely  hecaufte,  as  ,<>/f}<jMiqi/e predicatfs,  titey  are 
made  dependi^ni  on  an  intinitire  clanst,  and  w  hicli,  but  for  this  reason,  would  t)e  in  the 
inUicalice.  All  'oriirinal'  subjunctives,  when  dependent  (»ii  ])redicate-iiilinitivei*  in  the 
peilect,  are  strictly  treated  according,'  to  the  law  of  y^/'^^/c/e/tf  consecution,  whereas  the 
'merely  siiboblique'  sutijiinctives  n-tain  that  tense  in  the  subjunctive  which  they  would 
havt^  in  the  indicative  if  the  intinitive  clause  be  (-haiifjed  into  a  finite  sentence.  Tenses 
treated  aicordiuir  to  tliis  metiiod  maij  have  the  appearance  of  a  pretfrite  consecution  (if 
the  original  tense  of  the  dependent  "pri'clicates  is  an  imperfect  or  plupi-rfect ».  or  it  may 
be  virtually  a  present  consecution  (if  iheir  ori<;inal  teJi(>e  is  a  pret^ent  or  perfect)*. 

Mihi  qiiidem  HomCrus  hujusmodi  quiddam  r?^/^s>v  r^/tV///-  ineis  quaMle  Sireinim  can- 

tWm^flnxent:  It  ■<tenu^  to  nte  lliat  Homer  has  seen  scnnethinir  of  the  Jvind  in  that  which 

♦A«  states  ym  hi<  fictions)  on  the  Siren  songs.  Cic.  Fin.  5,  18.  49.     Here  'finxtHf  is  a 

*  merely  subi>hli(iue  '  subjunctive,  beinir  an  'orii;inar  ])erfect-indicative  :  '  HomSrus 
rir/i^  qiiiddam  ejnsmodi  in  i-is  (\\\;v..1iii,rif.'  This  perfect  .//«ri;!  is  chanj^ed  into  its 
own  sul)jiiiictive  by  l)eiii<j:  made  siil)<>bli(iue,  with-ut  any  rei^ard  to  thei,'oveinin<r  finite 
predicate.  It  would  be  tiie  same  it  it  tiad  assumed  7>/v.>.-^/»/  consecution.—  lUud  iniror 
adflflci  \c  ]x>tiiis>te,  qui  me  peuitus  wo-^^g  deb?rcs,  ut  exi^timdres  me  t;im  improvidum: 
I  wonder  that  you.  whoonf/hf  to  know  me  entitely,  roidd  (shotild)  have  been  induced 
to  belifve  me  s(»  imprudent.  CMc.  Fam.  1,  It»,  1.  IJrfferes  is 'merely  8ulK)l)lique,'  since 
the  ind-'ptMidenr  construction  would  l)e  'Ad  \^r\  potnl-iti  (tu)  (pii  me  peiiitus  no-^se  de- 
blbax  (li  7<>,  Obs.  ,')).  Hence  dtl'thas  is  ch.tir.:ed  into  its  own  sul)jtin(tive  de/^^res, 
which  «rive-»  ti>  it  t lie  appearnnce  of />?'«=/<^ri7«  consecution,  which  it  is  nof.  Sii.ce  in 
plice  of  defjehas  the  indi(ritive  miirht  hive  been  either  d''hni-<ti  or  dtbuej'os  {li.l^^y 
Obs.  5,  d),  if  would  have  been  as  proper  to  use  debiiens  or  debuisses  instead  of  debires, 
the  former  of  which  would  have  ;jiven  if  the  appearauc  of  pv-^ent  consecution.  Oil 
the  other  hand  txi^ti/ndres,  beinL'  a  pirticular  or  'original'  subjunctive,  iroverned  l).y 
vt,  is  subject  to  tlie  law  of  preti^rite  consecution  in  consequence  i»f  the  perfect  /)Otiri<se. 
It  would  have  tiie  .same  tense  and  tlie  same  mood  in  independent  c-uistructiiui,  'Ad- 
dflci  pofuisti  uf  exisflni'ire^.'' —  F)io  Liiculli  adventu  uri)ent  CyzicenOruin  obsessa/n  esse 
quam  L.  LiicuIIuh  tihtrdrit.  pa(>^fncfiunqi/e  nostiis  lejionibiis  esse  Poiitum,  qui  antea 
populo  Konitino  claasusfidsstt ;  1  say  that  at  the  time  of  Lucullus's  arrival  the  capital 

*  The  reason  for  this  diflforence  in  the  treatment  of  the  two  clnsse^  of  gnbjunctivos  la 
plain.  The  '  merely  siibob  ique  subjunctives'  are  'oriu'inil  indicatives',  and  their  rela- 
tion to  the  tense  of  tln-ir  L'overnini^  predicate  is  an  'indicative'  relation;  hence  tlujir 
governunj:  infinitive  can  atfect  their  fen--e  so  far  only  a-  it  wouhl  in  the  indicative  : 
whereas  the  'original  subjunctives'  tak(;  the  mark  of  tense  from  their  «joverninu;  predi- 
cates by  the  same  irraminafical  act  as  they  take  the  mark  of  mood,  a  lin<;uislic  fact 
which  the  laii<.;uai,'e  represents  under  the  };iammatical  form  of  tense-consecufion.  Hence 
the  tenses  of  the  'merely  suboblique'  siibjunctive.s  are  not  tenses  Uy  consecution,  but 
logical  Xaw^v».  They  strictly  do  not  beb>ni,'  to  the  law  of  consecution,  but  to  tlie  next 
section,  being  treated  here  merely  on  account  of  their  close  connectiou  with  tense-con- 
secutioii. 


<& 


The  i„d.-l«'"il'->"  •'"''^"T)    :,:T'}i]A;,\!^i^^  Hence  Uic  perfect 

S!t7:.tar,'v'nS;riur  ••'^lTA.TL^tjriu»fa\V„  b^  a  te.se'-  by  consecution.' 


that  they  have  the  external  aPP*'»:!^»^^^  «^  P-^^Vl'^^^^^^^^^^  immtlnis  nemo  A/m«, 


h'e  approbation,  since  many  items  ^^^f^;;;>  ^fa  ™  ate  dependent  on  '^falmm  est;  not 
clauses.  '  q,nnv .  .fveiit ,  and  9^''  f  "^"  '^'^S .  ^^^-  ;!d  ly  present  consemtim.  If  depend- 
^litr^XC^;:;' Xy  ^^^l^:^^^^U  .--^  cau.al  requiring  the 
subjunctive.  See  Ex.  21. 


be  in  tlm  plujm/tct.  See  Ex.  '26. 


cm-iniiiiiim;,  «  ...v.. .  .._... ,         i>.,,,iio  nnst  ^«.nv  ferunt  nvnnaiu'iit  oiuiwinu.,  j..'v. 

the;>;-.^n/.consecut.oniHnpp.e^  j^  i,  ,.,j,orted  that 

nes  sfai-e  ad  janiiam  duo  quos(  .im,  QUi  turn  ina^  ,,' /fetwo  voung  men  at  the  door  who 
.o<,n  afterw:Mds  Simonides  .^.^v  t;(rom^^^ 
urgently  wished  Imn  to  t>e  called  o't.  Cic  ^'it  in  t'lu  claiise  ^juvenes  stare:  and  thus  in 

i±;.rio 't;;;l:&^2/' ifaff'S-iS^  n^-it  mu.t  have  p....... 

pendent  predicates  to  have  2'/;f7:,'^^  ^i^J-.^^^^^^;  "h  prSicX  nlii^Ttives  in  the  present,  is 
[•nt  infinite  clauses,  referring  to  past  actions,  I'F'l]:'^.  ^^^^  ^subjunctives  directly  or 
i„  this  instance  considered  as  a  ''^''^^l  ^,  ^^^jVive  chiu<es  o  have  pVeterite  consecution, 
indirectly  cl'T^'"^l^'''f/'"  ^^'^  P''^'?;"^' V^^^" m  nh^^  '^»^''"'"'  ''^V^^  ''l" 

"^OB^.  The.e  nre  .evora.  in.Unccs  in  "Imb  .e..^«  -e  n^  .bat  floviate  from  tbose 
ten«!H  which  ^h..nl,l  be  expec-ted  "'■"'")'■'«  '"'^1?  all    ke  nr«iicalc.  dependent  on  in- 

.,!ffiv'c"z^;?sTbiuMr,ss'/s,»;h%"-r/.'''i.-^^ 


420 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DErENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


421 


in  those  tenses  wliicli  the  ppeaker  infrodiiced  would  use  indirect  discourse,  as:  Tantiim 
{(llcehanf)  esse  riirOn'iu  ut  lie  Siuissifiiics  (iiiidcin,  qui  eOdeni  jure  Ktantnr.  doleireri 
jtotneniit :  Tliey  said. .  that  tht-ir  ni.iducs-'  was  t^uch  that  not  even  the  Sues.-iones, 
who  ivei-t  us'iiK/  the  same  hiws,  could  In-  ktitt  from,  etc.  Civs,  B.  fj.  2,  '.\.  Here,  acconiiui^ 
to  /ii/n.'Xi,  No.  1.  pitteritc  coii.vecution  should  liave  been  used;  hut  the  subjunctive!» 
vfdHtitr  aiul  ]H)tHerinf  are  in  liie  present  and  perfect,  l)ecauoe  the  speiii<eri<.  in  «lirect  <lis- 
conrsc,  wouhl  have  said  utiintnriun\})0lH7iind.—  Tradidercquithiin. /Y,«>7X'>//.'//mah  smatu 
ense.^AMUi:  Ithodios  leijatiOnem  mi^/ifse  post  (piaui  trausi;rei-so8  iu  Maeedouiaui  Ifoiuaiios 
(nidlerlnf  ;  Some  liave  reported,  that  tiie  answer  ira^  rjir' n  '«y  tlie  Seii;ite. . .  t!ie  Kiio- 
(lians  laid  xent  ambassadors  at  a  lime  wlien  they  had  heard  that  ihe  ifouians  liad  crossed 
thr  Macedonian  fronti(!r.  Liv.  45,  ;i.  Thepeifict  subjunctive  f^^/'/^Vri»//  is  u^-ed  because 
the  Senate  in  direct  discourse  wouUl  have  said  audilnint.  According  to /^.  93,  No.  2, 
audissent  sliould  liave  l)een  used.  See  IJ.  VI. 

{b)  The  latitude  allowed  in  oblique  discourse  (No.  a)  is  often  extended  to  ordinary 
indirect  statements,  not  strictly  belongiiii;  to  o!ili(iue  discourse.  'J'his  usaire  is  IV»;- 
quently  found  in  tlie  historians,  l)ut  very  rarely  in  Cicero,  ami  other  philosophical  writ- 
ers :  Dictator  ]SIanlium  jure  ca.st/m  (e.s,^e)  pronunfirrvit,  eliam>'i  rep:ui  crimine  insona 
/ueHt,  (\\n  vocHtus  a  mairistro  ecpiitum  ad  dictatorem  non  vt^nis,<>ef :  The  dictator  de- 
clared tliat  the  l<illini,'of  Manlius  wa.-i  Ugal.  altliou^rh  he  m'lfjht  hare  been  innocent  of 
hii;h  treason,  since  he  ha<l  not  ohcyed  tiie  summons  of  the  vice-dictator  (literally  :  \\lio 
//</c/ ?uV<;'o//'Y' summoned  by  the  master  of  the  horse).  Liv.  4.  15.  (In  direct  statement, 
the  dictator  would  liave  said  :  'Jure  Ctf>7/v  fx/.  etiamsi  insons ///J/.  qui  (  =  quum)  non 
venuset  (or  venerat).  The  rule  in  Jiejn.  1*3,  No.  2,  would  require /</is><-/  or  ee.fe/]  —  Qui 
docCre  relief  nihil  ita  sii^nilri  in  animis  nostris  a  veropos-e,  (piod  non  eOdem  motlo  fws.yit 
a  false;  Who  intended  to  show  that  nothinq;  can  be  tlius  imprinted  in  our  souls  l)y  truth 
which  canr.ot  likewise  be  inijjrinted  by  falsehood.  Cic.  .^cad.  2.  22,  71.  [.According  to 
rule  Jieni.  9.3.  No.  1,  ■  po/tsef  is  required  ;  but  ';>r\?v?7'  is  likewise  correct,  since  the  direct 
statement  would  be  '  nihil  signari  ]x>le>!t  quod  non  eOdein  modo  jx^teat.  etc.].—  JSonietimes 
this  exceptional  'consecutitui '  is  used  where,  at  first  sij:;ht,  the  tense  «tnployed  niiL'ht 
pei!in  strauLT'dy  out  of  plac»'.  \vh(Mi  on  closer  e.\aminatl<ui  the  e.Kceptional  lorm  aj)i)ears 
to  be  used  witli  «rreat  si^'iiificance  and  perfect  consistency  ;  Eiro  ba'c  omnia  Chrysoi:oniuii 
fecUi<e  dico,  nt  ementir^tnr.  ut  malum  civem  Koscium  i\u>iii\finf/eref.  ul  eumapud  adver- 
sarios  occlsnm  esse  diccret,  ut  hiscc  dc  rebus  a  lefriltis  Amerinorum  docGri  L.  StiUani 
passus  non  sit ;  I  assert  that  Chrysoi^onns  anninrlted  all  tln*se  misdeeds,  namely  to  lie., 
to  say  against  his  better  knoniedge  that  Ho?cius  was  a  bad  citizen,  to  say  that  he  hlid  been 
killed  in  the  enemy's  camp,  and  not  to  allow  Sulla  to  be  intormed  of  liie>e  affairs  by  the 
Amcrian  embassy.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  41,  127.  Here  the  perfect  p<nt<iis  i<it  is  u  stumbling 
block  to  our  interpreters,  and  Ernesti  corrected  ^  pate  ret  ur.''  But  Cicero,  in  this  wiiole 
passage,  did  not  use  tenses  according  to  (preterite)  consecution,  but  lor/ical  tenses.  In 
direct  statement  he  would  have  said  :  Chrysogonus  enientieln'tfiir  (imjjerf.  of  repeated 
action),  malum  civem  U.  Uil^iiofnr/Tbat  (imp.  of  j)roL'ressive  action),  eum  apud  adversa- 
rios  occlsum  d'icebat  (according  to  U.  70.  Ous.  *}).  docc'ri  Sullani  pai'sim  non  est  (a  momen- 
tary act  with  reference  to  a  point  of  time).  The  same  ten-es  are  used  with  perfect  con- 
sistency and  significance  in  giving  to  these  sentences  the  form  of  indirect  statement. 
By  using  grammatical  consecution,  the  difl'erence  in  the  nature  of  these  actions  woidd 
have  been  completely  etlaced.  Ex.  29-.J2. 

(€)  Logical  tenses  of  the  dependent  subjunctives  maybe  used  in  this  construction 
{E.  !>3),  if  the  use  of  such  tenses  would  be  admi>sil)le  according  to  the  general  lules  in 
Item.  94.  Thus  we  fiiul  xxjn'enent  consecution,  where,  accordimr  to  the  rules  of  li.  93.  a 
preterite  consecution  should  be  expected,  if  either  the  gorerninq  finite  preterite,  or  the 
preteHie  pralicate-injlnitive  logically  iiiclude.<  a  present  tense,  li.  93.  Obs.  2,  as  :  Civsar  ad 
me  scripsit  (i.  e.  scripsit  et  uunvjadicat)  <,'ratis-imum  sibi  esse  quod  guierim  (the  gram- 
matical consecution  would  have  recpiired  gii'-s.-teni) ;  C;e~ar  has  written  to  me  that  w/y 
reniaiiiing  inactive  was  (had  been)  very  satisfactory  to  him.  Cic.  Att.  8,  11.—  Credo  ei:"o 
vos  audisse  (i.  e.  audisse  et  nunc  scire),  quemadmodum  i)r;esidia  RomSna  ab  Siculis  cir- 
cumrerda  et  oppressa  sint  per  lios  dies  (stuict  oii.\mmatical  conseci  tiox  :  circitinrenta 
es-^tut,  as  periphrastic  imperfect,  or  ri/-CM/A<re«?>¥«////',  as  ordinary  imjjerfect);  I  believe 
that  you  hare  heard  how  the  Koman  garrisons  during  these  day-<  have  been  entrai)pe(l 
and  surprised  by  the  Sicilians.  Liv.  2t,  ."iH.  It  is  very  rare,  that,  aside  from  'hese  instan- 
ces (No.  a,  b,  c),  logical  tenses  are  used  in  clauses  dependent  on  predicate-infinitives, 
as:  In  Alcii)iade,  iiatQra  quid  efllccre;>o.v'j;<7  (instead  of  ;x>wO  vidCtur  w;>(?/-/a.  Nep.  Ale.  1. 
1.  Difficile  est  amicitiam  7nanTre  si  a  virtate  defcerix^.  Cic.  Am.  11,  37.-2.  Ego 

non  de-p6ro,/ore  aliquem  alitpiando  qui,  quum  se  ad  audiendum.  legendum.  scriben- 

duinque  dederit-,  e.rsistat  talis  orator,  qualem  qujerimnsS.  lb.  Or.  1.  21.9.5.— 3.  Valde  sus- 

>  Dejicere  ab  aliqnd  re,  to  fall  away  from  something,  to  «bandon,  to  forsake  something. 
—  2  to  devote  one's  self.  Dederit  has  the  force  of  a  subjunctive  of  the  future-perfect. 
Sec  §  G07.—  3  as  we  are  seeking,  i.  e.  as  we  want  (need.\ 


f 


\ 


\i\crtrfore  ut  infrtngdfnr^  liomininn  improbitas  consiliis  tuOrum  amicr)rnm.  lb.  Fam. 

I,  fi.  1. —  4.  Iie'si)onsum  est.  in  deditiOnem  ita  «7cr?/yi  eos  si  belli  concitOies' ^/Grfjt/i.*r- 
senl^.  Liv.  v9  3.—  ft.  Nunicpiam  mihi  drfut'irani  oratioiiem'',  qua  exercatum  meum  al- 
IcKpurer,  credidi.  lb.  2S,  27.—  0.  Nonnuili  Ca'sari  niinti[H»ant.  quum  castra  moveri>A<f- 
sixKtt-\  mm  fore  dicto  audieiites  milites.  Ca-s.  B.  (J.  1.  39. —  7.  Non  speraverat  Hannibal 
fore  ut  tot  in  Italia  })opnli  ad  i^v.  deficerent^.  Liv.  2S,  44.— 8.  C{e>ar  cognovit.  Consi- 
dium  qtiod  non  ridisfiet  pro  viso^  sini  renuntiasse^.  Ctes.  B.  G.  1.  22.— 9.  Ait  mens 
Ifiniiliaris'-',  eand*  ni  causam  Alexaiu]rli,is  y'/i-vve  cur  lauddrent  Gabinium  quie  mihi 
fiierii  quum  eundem  deftndertni.  Cic.  ifab.  Post.  12,  32.—  10.  Ecquam  civitritem/y^/Zd- 
/i.v  (ill'»  tempore)  pacfltami"  yVyi.vvy?.  (\\vm  (iiutic)  Inciiples  nt}^  ?  lb.  Leg.  Man.  2:3,  67.— 

II.  Conf  ted/is necesse  est.  te  o|)iuionem  nmhuiu  fcfeUisse^^  quod  existiinans  me  causam 
Cluentii  lege>3  defensQrum.  \\y  (^']„_  (jj^  kj»)  — 12.  Ipse  se  insanisse^*  confitefnr  quod 
suam  pecuniam  regi  credidetit^^.  lb.  Ilab.  Post.  9,  25. —  13.  Tu  non  rides,  ipsum  ilium 
Aiistotelis  discipulum.  i)ostquam  rex  appelldtus  sit^^.  superbum.  crudglem,  iinmode- 
itltum/'/f.sw.?'  lb.  Att.  13.  28.  3.—  14.  Illud  dico,  me,  ut^'  primum  in  contiOne  proviu- 
ciam  (iejK}suerivi^^,  statim,  quemadmodum  earn  tibi  traderein,  cogitare  capisse.  lb. 
Fam.  .'),  2,  3.  -  15.  Ne  illud  quidem  intelligunt,  ita  memoriie  prod itmn  esse,  quum  De- 
mosthenes dicturiis  essel^^.  ui^"  concursus2i  audiendi  cansil  ex  toia  Grsecia  fierent.  lb. 
Brut.  S4,  289  —  16.  Dionysium /V;v///^  ediHsse,  ut  quod  quisque  de  sacris^-'  hatieret.  id 
ante  diem  certain  in  suiim^^  quid(jue  fanum  referret.  lb.  N.  D.  34,  f;4. —  17.  Medgam 
jn^t^dicanl'^*.  in  fuira  fratris  sui  membra  in  eis  locis  qua^^  se  parens  perseqiteretur"^^ 
di<Hpari.*tse^'.  lb.  Leg.  Man.  9.  22. —  18.  Eam  suspiciOnem  propter  hanc  causam  credo 
fni.s-ne  qnod  Fannius  in  medioctibus'-^^  ovutorWms  haMtus  esset,  hivc  oratio  aiitem  vel 
optima  esset  omnium.  lb.  Brut.  26,  100. —  19.  Sinit  qui  propter  adjectum  ^SvEquOrum 
\'«il-corumque  hello  Vejens^o  belliim,  quia  duo  consules  oblrc^-'^  tot  siniul  tiella  neqm- 
rent,  tribunos  militum  trls  c;v'7/o.v  (esse)  dicant.  Liv.  4,  7.— 20.  Socrates  dicif.  Peri- 
clem  7;;"t; N/<7?.«.«t?  ceteris  oratoribus,  quod  is  Anaxairorte  ,/W;i^  aurlltor,  a  (iwo^"^  cen^t 
<-UTn,  quum  alia  pneclara  qujvdam  didicisset.  fuisse  iiiMxvnm  quibus  oratiOnis  modis^^ 
qtulMlue  aninu'rum  \Mirlv^^* pellerentvr^^.  Cic.  6r.  4,  15. —  21.  ('nidum.  Col«)phOnem,  ali- 
asque  urltTs  captas  es.-^e  coinnienwrem,  quum  vestros  portus  in  pnedOnum  fuisse  po- 
testilie  scidtis  f  lb.  Lclt.  Man.  12.  33. —  22.  VidZ-r^is  mihi  tantum  juris  civlli<  scire  roln- 
isse.  quantum  satis  es/^et  oratoii.  lb.  Brut.  45,  150. —  23.  Ouum  tu  Solem^'  quia  solus 
e.tsef  ap})elldt>iin  esse  dicas,  Soles^'  ipsi  qunm  multi  a  theologis  proferuntur  !  lb.  N  D. 
21.  54. —  24.  Nisi  forte  Censes,  Gracchum  h(idt\C>rvn\  fuisse  quam  filium,  quum  alter  siabi- 

^Jiifriiigi,  to  receive  a  blow,  to  be  checked. —  -  abettors. —  3  plup.  subj.  with  the  force 
of  a  'subjunctive  of  the  futuie-perlect.  See  §  607. —  *  language. —  ^  —  future-perfect. — 
^  ad  aligiieni  deticere,  to  desert  to  somebody,  i.  e.  to  join  somebody  after  deserting 
anc.tber  (the  Pomans). —  '  as  if  he  had  seen  it. —  «  (o  report. —  »  Iriend. —  ^"  the  Romans 
called  a  city  or  country  '  pacdta '.  Avhen  it  was  in  their  power,  or  subjected  by  them. — 
11  locii]>le<  exset  would  be  an  original  subjunctive  referring  to  the  time  of  fuit,  according 
to  the  rules  of  'relative  subjunctives'  (B.  VI.);  independently  :  Qiiui  (nulla)  civitas, 
quse  locuples  esset.  iiacata  fuit?  '  Lori/ples  sif  is  merely  subobliqmr  (indep<Midently  : 
civitas,  qua*  nunc  locuples  est).  The  sense  is:  'No  city,  then  in  our  power,  is  now 
rich.'—  '-^  (•pinto  /ne  /nnltani  fallif.  my  opinion  deceives  me  much  ;  i.  e.  it  is  a  great 
mistake  on  my  part. — i-''  under  th(;  law^i.  e.  with  ref(*l-ence  to  theexi^ting  laws  (opi)osed 
to  'ecpiity  ').--  >>  in<ai'ire,  k»  be  insane.—  '^  credere  alin/i  j)ecuntam.  to  loan  somebody 
money  without  security.—  ^*  regem.  apptlldri,  to  be  called  king,  i.  e.  to  be  acknowledged 
as  kiiig.  to  become  kiiiir. —  ^^  a-i<  six>n  us.  requirimr  the  perfect  indicative  in  direct  state- 
ment.— •''  proiiiiciarn  in  confion''  (i.  e.  militum)  deponere.  to  lay  down  the  government  of 
the  province  before  the  assembled  army.  i.  f.  to  deliver  one's  farewell  address  to  the 
armv.—  •=>  was  to  ^.peak.- -"  how.—  21  concnrsi/s  fiant,  literally  '<:ath(  rings  are  made  \ 
I  e.  people  fiock  together,  gather  in  crowds. —  2a  sacra,  sacred  thing-,  i.  e.  objects  belong- 
ing to  religious  wor-hip. —  "^  suura  gnidgve  famnn  ;  That  temple  to  which  each  thing 
l)elong<'d.— -  2*  The  writer» extol  tiie  fact  (witli  reirard  to  Medea's  ingenuity).—  25  relative 
locative  adverb  of  the  4th  case,  instead  of  ' p^-r  ryz/rt" '.— 2«  The  indicative  dependent 
on  dissipdfjat  would  be  '■  perseqnebdtnr  '  (with  a  future  force,  Ixeni.  .53,  Obs.  2).  It  might 
also  betaken  as  '  subol»lique '  fiom  the  •  mind '  of  Medea  instead  of  'qua  se  persequi 
exi>tim;lref,  in  which  insiance  the  subjunctive  would  be  an  'original  one  '.  The  use  aK  se 
shows  that  the  author  j)rol)ably  took  theclaiise  in  this  way.— -^  10  disperse.— ^s  among 
the  orators  of  middle  rank.—  -•'  See  p.  19!».  0ns.  3.—  '^^  Vejentian.—  3>  tot  simul  bella 
oblre.  to  have  so  manv  wars  on  their  hands  at  once.—  ^2  an  •  involved  '  relative  construc- 
tion (See  B.  VI.).  A  quo  refers  only  to  ' did'/ci^xet  \\\o\  lo  ' gnanim  fuisse'.  Render  by 
ac<M>rdinntion:  'And  he  believes  that,  while  he  had  learned  from  him,  etc.,  he  was  in  pos- 
session of  the  knowledge  (he  knew  bv  what  etc.)— ^3  rhetorical  means.—  34  each  faculty 
of  the  soul.—  35  to  incite,  to  operate  iipon.-  3«  Sol  (the  g<Kl).—  37  the  principal  sentence 
is  elliptical  (I  must  answer  thai  a  great  number  of  Sols  arc  mentioned  by  the  theologians). 


422 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


423 


lire  romnublicam  studuenf\  alter  evertcre.  lb.  Fin.  4,  24.  (i5-'2o&-r.^  me  quodam  tcni. 
porJXupontu.n  ve,n..e  tecum,  n.-qu.  a.l  hospit.-n  aute  ^.^'.;W  quam  i'yt^agonfl 
ipt^uin  ilium  locum  ubl  vitam  rdiderai»,  hecU'ruqiie  ivlrrim  lb.  ;>,  2  4.-  Mk  Aego  rem 
esse  ullam  in  quemquam  ohjtclam*  quie  Fidieulanio  o/o<cfii  "<>»  ,^^^  ahquul  y</t.-^*e  m 
Fidici.Ianii  caljl  quod  idem  uon  esset  in  ceterOrum  lb.  Ciu.  41.  li:i-  27.  lie>'l>0'>.um 
es.<^e  feruni  per  Atialum  reireuu  Hoiiulnos  compote^^  ejus  jote  quod  pehreid.  Liv.  21» 
11—28  Te  meminU  qmim  euldam  clari^*simo  atque  optimo  viro  KupplicatiOiiem'» 
lion  decerneres\  dictre  le  decit-tQium  ^^  refenZtor"  ob  eas  ret<  qn''*'^  «r,.  con^n\  ni 
"rbe  S-^isset  Cic.  Fam.  15,4,11.-29.  Le;;ati  ce>,erant  i.unuanh-s,  Philippum  pn- 
mum  ApoUoniam  temptasse'^  delude,  ut  ea  res  tardiur  si)e/w6^/i/,  ad  Oricum  exercituui 
admorUse.  Liv.  24,  40.-  30.  Scipio  iieqiwlquam  eOdem  ammo  ^.*^trepwj^^use.^t  ad  m  - 
dicandumio  id  m'lus  quo'»  civTIem  erruren»»'^  mi\wr  muavtvity^.  lb.  28,  3f— .«.  Lc- 
eati  tv//e>^.A^/ nuutiantc'8  »^e  mstiuhexxm  Macedoi.um  m.n  ;>o.«.v^^.  msi  pra':^uiium  wf - 
tCttur  Komanum.  lb.  24,  40.-32.  Jh.-^pondinint  legati.  ejus,  quanta  yralia  es^tt  apud 
iiiiperatOrem,  exjiertos  ease  quum  tribflnoa  in  viuculu coujectrU.  lb.  2U,  ly. 

2.    Logiml   Tenses. 
%  605.  Logical  tenses  of  depeiulent  subjunctives  arc  those  which 
are  not  detfrniined  by  the  tense  of  the  governing  predicate,  but  by  the 
lo<^ical  relation  of  the  time  which  tliey  designate,  i.  e.  by  those  rules  which 
determine  the  use  of  tense  in  the  indicative. 

Hi  (Attici  qui  de  ridioulo  scripsCrunt)  ita  in^ulsi  exstitervnt  \\i  nihil  aliud  eOrum 
nisi  ipsa  insul-iuis  lideatur :  These  (i.  e.  tlie  Atties  who  made  theories  of  the  lau-Ji 
able')  became  so  insipid  that  nothinj,'  else  u  laii(fhahk  in  their  writin-s  buttheir  own 
insipidity.  Cic.  Or.  2.  .54,  217.  Th«-  pre*.ent  tense  of  the  subjunctive  n^^*////r  is  not 
determi!iedbyfj-.syi/e/''/;//,  but  bv  its  own  logical  relation  to  the  speaker  s  time  (  the 
insipidity  is  now  htu-hable  ').  If  the  imperlett  rider^txr  had  been  used  it  mis^ht  still 
refer  to  the  speaker's  time;  this  relation,  however,  would  not  be  indicated  by  the 
tense,  but  solely  by  the  connection. 

Ob^  The  tenses  of  dependent  subjunctives  determined  by  consecution  may  be  at  f/ie 
sameiiim  lonical  ttn.'^e.-i.  This  is  gem-rally  the  case  in  the  t-nses  of  /^/v^vAi^  consecution 
(S  603)  and  in  the  preterite  consecution  if  pluperfect  subjunctives  or  imperfi-ct  subjunc- 
tives are  used  with  the  meanin-  of  the  same  leii-es  in  the  indicative.as  m/omf  «»r  «'^e 
examnles  "iven  above,  as  :  tSentiGbat  quid  aqeretur  (-  id  quod  afjthalun,  ^  b0.i,  JN«).  if  \ 
heiatus  sum  quod  mihi  liceret  i  =  quod  /icrhaf),  §  »103,  No.  E  ;  Scipio  disseruil  qnas  jrentls 
redenisset  (  =  de  irentibus  qiias  redegerah.  §  •103.  No.  K.  But  oltm  the  tenses  by  conse- 
cution are  in  coiitlict  with  the  loqical  meanin.i,'  of  the  lense  (in  the  indicative),  as  :  Len- 
lulu^  ostendit  quanta  conscieniiaj  vis  esset :  Lentulus  showed  how  <rreat  the  power  ot 
conscience  u.  Cic.  Cat.  3,  5.  Here  the  imperlect  esstt  logically  denotes  present  tinie.-- 
Factumestut  statim  terga  rerferent :  It  happened  that  they  dinctly  turiK-d  to  flight. 
Ca>s  B  ft  3  19  Here  verftrtnt  has  the  force  of  a  peffect  indicative.  1  he  predicates 
in  clauses  of' purpose  (which,  exce|ft  in  very  rare  instances,  are  always  either  in  the  i)res- 
ent  or  in  the  imperfect  tense)  are  almost  always  in  contiict  with  the  lojiual  relation  ot 
their  time,  which  refers  to  \hcfitfi/?-e.  On  the  other  hand  lo(/ical  tenses  are  Irequently 
iu  coiit!ict  with  the  law  of  consecution  (§  (lOd). 

.  c»;HJ.  The  instances  in  which  logical  tenses  are  in  conflict  with  the 
law  of  consecution  mostly  occur  when  subjunctives  o^  present  consecu- 
tion (present  and  perfect)  are  made  dependent  on  preterite  predicates. 

Such  subjunctives  may  be  used  in  certain  circumstances  (7?.  94.  95.)  if 
the  action  designated  by  the  subjunctive  is  determined  from  the  stand-point 

»  Independently  expressed  :  Gracchvs  hedtus  fait  quum  sfuduit  (p.  339,  Tiem.  09).— 
2  «^one  t«)  Devertere  is  technieallv  used  of  the  stopping  of  strangers  with  their  guest- 
friends  or  in  public  houses.—  ^  rifam  edere,  to  live.—  •*  ofOecta  est.  present  of  the  peri- 
phrastic participle  (ihat  any  objection  is  made  a-ainst  Fidieulanius  ;  any  fault  is  lound 
with  him)  — s  amixttem  nlicnjus  rei  esse,  to  obtain  something.—  «  a  thanksgiving.— 
'  non  derernere  aliguid,  to  vote  a«;ainst  somelhin-,'  (if  the  vote  refers  to  a  decree),  hee 
p  341  Obs  2  —  8  it  the  report  (in  the  Senate)  relerred  to  what  he  had  done  as  consul.— 
•attempted  to  take  ApoUonia.—  »«  to  punish.—  >'  as.—  ^a  =  civium  suorum  errortm, 
the  offence  committed  by  his  fellow-citi/ens.—  »3  to  correct. 


\   I.' 


of  the  spcaker'^s  (author's)  time,  without  any  regard  to  the  time  of  the 
principal  i)redicate. — Rarely  subjunctives  oi pretente  consecution  (imper- 
fect and  pluperfect)  are  made  dependent  on  non-preterite  predicates  {R.  9G). 

Obs.  1.  The  time  of  the  action  determined  from  X\\&  speaker'' s  time  (in  the  instances 
where  this  is  nermitted).  is  either  a  time  present  to  the  speaker  (as  in  the  example  to 
§  605),  or  a  lime  ;>«*•;!  in  reirard  to  the  speaker.  In  the  latter  instance  the  perfect  is  used, 
as  :  ArdCbat  Hortensius  (dicendi)  cupiditflte  sic  ut  in  nullo  unquam  flagrantiiis  studium 
tideHm  ;  nullum  enim  patiebatur  esse  diem  quin  aut  in  for<»  diceret.  aut  meditarltur 
extra  forum;  Hortensius  burned  with  such  a  de>ire  for  8})eaking  that  /  never  saw  in 
any  a  more  ardent  zeal ;  for  he  did  not  allow  any  day  to  pass  without  either  sj>exiking  in 
the  forum,  or  studying  outside  of  it.  Cic.  Brut.  88,  ;302.  Here  the  clause  ut..  .vUierira  has 
no  reference  to  the  time  of  ardetjat,  being  represented  as  past  in  regard  to  tlie  author's 
own  time.  But  the  time  of  diccvet  and  meditaretur  refers  to  the  time  of  the  principal 
predicate  ;w/it//<7/'//r,  and  hence  r«rt«o<  assume  a  tense  of  present  consecution.  Dixtrit 
and  ineditCitus  sit  would  be  as  improper  as  ridlrem  or  vidissem. 

Obs.  2.  Often  relative  clauses  have  the  logical  value  of  independent  sentences,  having 
only  the  grammatical  f(/rm  of  clauses.  If  such  clauses  have  predicates  in  one  of  the 
])0itntial  suf/junctivts,  these  latter  are  not  subject  to  the  law  of  consecution,  but  retain 
the  tenses  which  they  must  have  according  to  the  rules  of  their  class  (§  592-594).  Such 
instances  are  no  rearexceptions  to  the  law  of  consecution,  since  relative  clauses  of  this 
kind,  logically,  must  be  considered  as  co-ordinate  sentences,  as:  Rem  commoiisti  nov5dis- 
piitatiTuie  diL'iiam.  quam  in  aliud  tempns  differmnus  (not  differrPmvs)  ;  You  have  intro- 
duced a  subject  worthy  of  a  new  discussion,  which  we  had  loiter  postpone  toanother  time 
(lilt-rally  '  which  Itt  usj/ostj)one').  Cic.  Brut.  87,  2!i7.—  Qnidam  non  adjecere  niimerum,  inter 
quos  me  ipse  poni  malim  ;  Some  did  not  add  the  number,  among  whom  I  myselt  would  like 
to  be  placed.  Liv.  29.  25.  The  former  o I  these  subjunctives  is  imperative  (|  594),  and 
the  latter  a  subjunctive  of  guarded  statement  {Rein.  79),  neither  of  which,  in  independ- 
ent seniences,  can  assume  a  tense  of  preterite  consecution. — Herebelou"^  relative  paren- 
thetical clauses,  restricting  an  assertion  of  the  auth(>r  to  his  'best  knowledge.'  as: 
Fuit  Sulpicius  omnium,  quos  quidem  ego  audiverim  (as  far  as  I  have  heard)  grandis 
orfitor.    Cic.  Brut.  5.5,  203.    See  p.  5(i0. 

Obs.  3.  If  a  clause  with  a  potential  subjunctive  can  not  be  considered  as  being  virtu- 
ally an  independent  sentence,  it  generally  follows  the  law  of  consecution.  But  some- 
tinies  sucli  subjunctives  keep  their  own  tenses,  whether  they  are  dependent  on  pre- 
terite or  on  non-preterite  predicates,  as  :  (a)  Htjjyothetical  periods  which  are  made 
dependent  on  otlur  sentences,  in  some  instances  keep  their  own  tenses,  and  in  others 
follow  the  law  of  consecution.  (See  R.  '.;0).— (6)  Interrogative  svbjunctives.  if  made  de- 
l)endent  on  preterites,  may  be  placed  in  the  jferfect  to  preserve  ihe  peculiar  meaning 
of  the  interrogative  subjunctive  according  to  §  .593,  which  they  would  lose  by  assuming 
the  tenses  of  preterite  consecution,  since  in  this  instance  they  would  not  be  distinguish- 
able frtun  ordinary  iiitenoijative  clauses,  as  :  Quie  fuit  causa  cur  cuncta  civitas  Lampsa- 
ceiiurum  de  conlione  domum  tuam  concurrerit  ?  What  was  the  reason  that  the  whole 
community  of  the  Lam|)saceni,  alter  the  mass-meeting,  should  have  repaired  at  once  to 
thy  house"?  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1,  31.  (Independently  :  Quid  concurrerit  civitas?  Why  should 
they  repair,  etc.  :  i.  e.  there  was  no  gofnl  rea-^on  why  they  should  do  so,  except,  etc^ — 
Oui  in  illjl  re  quid  facere  potuerit  mm  habChat ;  Wh'o  did  not  know  what  he  could  do  iu 
the  premises.  (Indeix-ndently  :  Quid  facere  j^otuerit  f  What  could  he  have  done?  i.e. 
nothiiiL'.)  See  Ex.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  22,  (Jl,  to  R.  94,  Obs.  4  {c^.  and  Ex.  \.-(c)  Oblique 
Quod-clauses  (R.  82),  and  oblique  clauses  with  i/nperative  subjunctives  (B.  83),  if  made 
dependent  on  preterite  predicates,  sometimes  keep  the  tenses  which  they  would  have 
in  direct  discourse,  according  to  the  principle  explained  R.  93,  Obs.  7,  (a)  :  Resjwndit 
ab  arniis  discedant ;  He  answered  they  should  lay  down  their  arms  (Independently  :  ab 
annis  dl^^cef/atis).  Sail.  Cat.  31.  1.—  Cato  ad  Popilium  scripsit  ut  secuudo  filium  snum 
obliget'^  sacramento;  Cato  wrote  to  Popilius  to  administer  to  his  son  a  renewed  military 
oath.  Cic,  Off.  1,  11,  36.  Seniores  eOrum  nimiam  lenitStem  populi  Rimiflni  castigarunt 
quod  eo-=  homines  qui  in  alieno  solo  ledilicilre  oppidum  couiUi  cint,  impunltos  dimise- 
rint ;  Those  of  advanced  age  found  fault  with  the  excessive  leniency  of  the  Koman 

*  Some  (inferior)  codices  have  concurrerent.  which  stands  in  most  of  our  editions. 
Conru7rerf^nt  is  evideiitlv  a  later  correction  bv  those  who  (like  the  editors)  did  not  under- 
stand the  force  of  this  perfect.—  2  The  reading  obligdret  is  a  mere  conjecture,  without 
being  supported  by  the  codices.  From  the  connection  of  this  passage  it  appears  that 
Cicero  used  the  present  obliget  in  place  of  the  imperfect  olMgdret  to  distillgui^h  the  im- 
perative clause  from  a  hypothetical  construction.    See  for  this  passage  Rem.  96,  Obs.  7. 


424 


USE   OF  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


people  for  Jinring  failed  to  punish  thopc  who  liad  thrrcd  to  hnild  a  town  on  a  ?oil  not 
iheii-  own  Liv.  3i>,  55.  This  form  of  impi-niiive  clauses  ino-t  Iretiuently  occurs  lu 
Suliust  (Ek.  'i-o),  l)utalsoin  Ciesar.  (Ex.6).— Sometimes  oblique  ckiuses  of  Uiiskiud  an;  in 
tenses  determined  by  tiie  law  of  preterite  conscculion,  while  the  t^ulxMxq^ie  clauses 
dependent  on  them  are  loi,'ical  tenses:  Procnmbunt  ad  pedes,  ne  pulcberrimam  lotlus 
GalliiB  urbem.  qutE  pnesidio  et  oriuimento  .nUiri/dfi,  suis  manihus  succendere  coqertn- 
tur.  Cies.  B.  G.  7.  15.  (.Independent  :  Neco.i;amur  urbem  succendere  qu;e  (-6/,  etc.).  Ex.7. 
On-  4  Sometimes  a  non-preterite  jroverninj;  predicate  is  left  out  by  ellipsis,  in  which 
in-^tance  the  subjunctives  of  present  consecution  dei)endent  on  such  non-preterites 
understood,  often  seem  to  depend  on  the  preterite  next  to  them  :  Qute  mea  coiioriatio 
ne  tibi  sine  causa  suscepta  viUedtur,  ilia  me  ratio  jnovii  nt  le  admonendum  putmein  \\t 
con^idenTre-,  etc.  Cic.  Fam.  1,  7,  9.  Here  the  sentenct?  '  ilia  me  ratio  morit '  has  the  force 
of  •  illiik  f^i^Vhauc  me  ratiOnem  movisse,'  videatur  bein^  dependent  on  '  (/it»  understood  ', 
not  on  movit.  (Lest  this  niv  exhortatiim  should  seem  causeless  to  you,  I  remark  tluU 
this  (the  foilowinj,'  reason)  induced  me  to  admonish  you,  (namely)  tiiat  yon  should  con- 
sider, etc.)  Such  iustiinciis  cannot  be  considered  as  exceptions  to  the  law  of  consecu- 
tion. See  Ex.  8.  9. 


(5  Ctelius  le-^'em  promultjdnt  iit  sexenni  die'^  t^ine  usiiris»^  creditye  pecuni;e>*  ttolvan- 
tiir^^.  Cx<.  \^.  C.  3,  20.— 7.  Ciesar  Labieno  imperat.  si  sustinCre.i*  non  possit^'',  deduc- 
tisi**cohortibus''*»eVuptione20/>?/7/a7/v/.  Cies.  15.  G.  7»  86.-8.  Idem  a  te  nunc^>^/'o  quod 
superioribus  litteris  (i.  e.  jyeHd)^  ut,  si  quid  in  perditis  rebus^»  dispiceres*-  quod  mihi 
puiare^  faciendum,  me  7nondres-^.  Cic.  Att.  11,  1«.- 9.  Non  ei,'o  tecum  ita  jocilbor 
lit  eibdem  rebus  (i.  e./eci)  quum  L.  Mureuam  te  accusantet/<;/V/<rfc/-t/n.  lb  Fin.  4, 27, 74. 

lieni.  94.  In  the  followin.i?  instances,  snl)junctives  dependent  on  preter- 
ites ?«rty  {ovmnst,  see  Obs.  i.  2.,  etc.)  assume  the  tenses  of  prctfcnt  conse- 
cntion  {i.  e.  h)L;;ical  tenses)  if  the  time  of  the  action  imuj  or  mast  be  con- 
sidered as  refeiiiiis^  to  tlie  Kpeaker'a  lime,  either  as  present  to  it.  or  as  past 
before  it :  1)  If  by  usin<^  tlie  tenses  of  preterite  consecution  there  would 
be  a  conflict  with  other  .^grammatical  rules,  or  with  tliehiws  of  h)ij:ical  con- 
irruity  or  perspicuity  (Obs.  1);  2)  If  the  Er.ivernin^-  preterite  predicate 
contains  a  present  picdicnle  by  implication  (Obs.  2.  o.  4.  5);  3)  If  the  prin- 
cipal ])redicate  is  a  preterite  referring  to  the  time-period  of  the  speaker, 
but  preceding  another  action  referrin.i?  to  the  same  lime-period,  according 
to  Ilem.  43  (Obs.  (i) ;  4)  If  the  principal  ])redicate  is  a  perfect  subjnnctice 
(Obs.  7);  5)  Rarely  if  the  i>riiicipal  prcdicat»?  is  a  hypothetic<tl  preterite 
(Obs.  8.  D) ;  0)  If  the  clause  in  whicli  the  subjunctive  stands  is  a  Qnum- 
clause  f()ll<»wed  by  tin  apodosis  with  tum{On^  10);  7)  If  lite  clause  in 
which  tlie  stibjunctive  stands  is  introduced  by  ut,  quin,  or  equivalent  ret- 
atives,  describing  the  modality  of  the  principal  acti<ju  (Modal  Ut-clauses). 
See  Rem.  1)."). 

In  most  of  these  instances  it  is  optional,  e\\\wv  to  observe  the  law  of  con- 
secution, or  to  set  it  aside  by  the  use  of  lof/ical  tenses,  the  usage  of  the 
language  inclining  more   towards  the   former  than  Jowards  the  latter 

>  W 1 1  at  w a s  t iTe  7 t-a^r- on  that  (whv). —  *■*  to  he  the  tirst  to  know  (namely  the  assassina- 
tion of  Sex.  Hoscius).— 3  Indepen'deiitly  :  '  Qudmohrem  rohurif  f  wliy  should  he  tiave 
wished,  etc.  (i.  e.  he  could  not  liave  wished  so  if  he  had  been  iiuiocent  of  the  crime).— 
*  their  svmpatliv  witli  tiie  conspiracy.—  'carefidly.—  "  lo  conceal.—  '  every  living' beinp:. 
—  «  appi-oach  (tVv)  with  money.—  *•  =  id  quod.—  »"  tlnit  it  would  not  be  acceptable  to 
the  Senate.—  i»  To  stuff,  cram  with  irifts.—  >-  sc.rfiuii  die  =  ftexetnii  tempore,  \u  six  ye.ars 
lime.—  ^^  interests.—  >*  credi/ic  jMC'/niiV,  all  debts  in  money.—  '^  m  pay.—  "»  maintain 
his  position  (i.  ^.  within  llie  iutienchments).— '^  instead  i>t  possit.  Iiidei)endently  : 
PuLMiiltt),  si  sustinGre  non  ]Y>tes.—  >'^  dediuvre  <'olior(l<,  to  place  one's  self  at  the  liead  of 
ones  cohorts.—  »»  See  p.  181,  li.  2m.—  '^°  eriiptidne  pugndre,  literally  •  to  lii,'ht  by  means 
of  a  sortie  ',  i.  e.  to  meet  the  enemy  oiUsidc  Uk^  entrenchments.— 21  in  my  desperate 
condition.—  =-  lo  discover,  to  find  out.--  -^  to  let  me  liuow. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


425 


method  (Obs.  2.  8.).  V>\xi  final  clauses  denotinf/  purpose  (final  Ut-clauses), 
almost  alwitys  are  subject  to  the  law  of  consecution,  and  their  predicates  (ex- 
cept in  verj^rare  i^istances)  do  not  assume  tenses  of  present  consecution  if 
depcialeni  on  preterites  (see  Obs.  o,  A.  1  ;  Obs.  G)  ;  and  in  many  other  in- 
stances falling  under  the  above-mentioned  heads,  only  the  one,  not  the 
other  system  is  admissible  (see  the  Observations).  But  the  use  of  logical 
tenses  is  limited  to  the  instances  «lumerated  above,  and  to  those  men- 
tioned ^  flOO  (Obs.  1-*]).  If  a  dependent  subjunctive  cannot  be  assigned 
to  one  of  these  exceptional  instances,  it  must  always  follow  the  law  of 
con.sectition.*  For  the  tenses  which  must  be  used  if  ahy]K)thetical  period 
is  made  dependent  on  predicates  requiring  the  subjunctive,  see  B.  96. 

Ons.  1.  If  the  tenses  ui  preterite  consecution  would  be  in  conflict  with  other  gram- 
maiicjd  rules,  or  would  ol)scure  the  meanin<:f  .»f  tlie  author,  or  produce  a  logical  incon- 
gruity {.Rem.  94,  No.  1),  the  dependent  sijl)junctive,  if  denoting  past  time,  ■niusthe  placed 
in  \\\c  jyerftct ;  tlje  action  being  thus  represented  a-f  past  in  regard  to  (he  authoi's  time, 
and  its  tense  as  logical'.  Such  perfect  subjunctives  are  most  frequent  in  relative 
clauses,  and  in  clauses  introduced  by  quum  and  quamvis,  and  in  all  cases  enumerated 
No.  2.  3.  4,  and  5  of  AV//*.  94  (in  which  logical  tense^*  may  always  be  u^ed  without  any 
l)articnlar  reason,  hutmu^tt  be  employed  if  one  of  the  above-mentioned  reasons  coexist): 

(a)  Relative  clauses  often  require  a  predicate  in  the  subjunctive  if  they  are  •  preg- 
nant', i.  ^.  if  a  subordinating  conjunction  is  latent  in  them  (Book  VI.).  If  such  predi- 
cates according  to  particular  grammatical  rules  absolutely  require  a  perfect  tense,  the 
subjunctive  must  as?ume  this  tense,  ev<'n  if  the  law  of  consecution  requires  an  imper- 
fect or  pluperlect;  or  in  other  word-  :  Tlie  law  of  conMcution  mud  yield  to  'prohibitory  ' 
grammatical  rules.  Thus  a  clause  fallinir  under  the  rule  Rem.  69  (according  to  which  a 
clause  containing  an  action  whose  merits  and  character  are  desiirnated  by  the  principal 
predicate,  must  talie  a  })redicate  in  the  same  tense  as  that  of  the  principal  predicate) 
Iniist  have  its  predicate  in  the  pt^rfect  suhJKnctive  if  it  is  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  rela- 
tive clause,  and  the  principal  predicate  is  in  tiiat  tense.  Accorditig  to  the  law  of  conse- 
eiUion  it  wouM  be  in  the  imp'rfect ;  but  tliis  law  must  yield  to  the  higlier  law  of  R.  69  : 
III  M.  Bruto  magnum /t/i/.  Brute,  dedecus  geiieri  vestro.  qui  .  .  accusatiOnem/flc/i^ar^- 
^'i'^  ;  M.  Brutus  «?«.<  a'sjn-at  disgrace  to  your  family.  ()  Brutus,  who  (inasmuch  as  he) 
made  'public  accusing'  a  re^rular  Imsiness.  Cic.  Brut.  31.  130.  (Expressed  by  quum:  In 
Bruto  ...  dedecus  ^//i/,  quum  accusatiOnem /a<:7j/<7r?7.)3— Tubero  paullo  etiam  {fuit) 
duiior.  qui  (}uidem  in  triumviratu.;w(//rarf/i/' VacatiOnem  augures  non  habere  ;  Tubero 
t/v/xeven  a  little  harder,  irho  (inasmuch  as  he)  declared  in  his  triumvirshiu  that  the  au- 
gurs had  no  exemption  (from  judicial  duties).  Cic.  Brut.  31,  117.  With  quum  ;  Tubero 
durus  /V/i/ .  .  .  i\n\.\mjudicdcit).  See  Ex.  1.  2. 

1  Some  grammarians  have  strangely  misunderstood  the  subject  of  logical  tenses  by 
introducing  such  rules  as  these  :  1)  'Vhc  perfect  subjunctive  is  used  in  histouic  (i.  e.  pre- 
terite) consecution  '  when-erer  the  s^n^^'e  requirtfS  that  tense  and  mood '  (Publ.  School  Graium. 
p.  4(l(i'i.  [If  the  word  "  tkesense  '  is  taken  in  the  '  English  sense  ',  the  rule  is  decidedly  false  ; 
if  taken  in  the  'Latin  sense'  the  rule  is  -useless,  since  it  is  just  the  question  when  the 
Latin  linguistic  intuition  requires  tlie  perfect  subjunctive.]  2)  When  a  clause  subor- 
dinated to  a  historic  [  =  strictly  preterite]  tense  contains  a  proposition  generally  true 
without  reference  to  time,  sucha  clause  may  stand  (>*ic)  in  the  present  subjunctive  :  as 
Olitn  laNoUABATi'u  quam  magnum  TecCigaL  sit  parsimjoniaiS*\\\\\.  Sch.  Gr.  p.  407).  [The 
author  has  overlooked  the  fact  that  his  rule  is  only  true  under  certain  circumstances 
(namely  those  enumerated  K.  94),  and  hence  we  cannot  wonder  at  the  izrammatical 
l)lunder  {sit  instead  of  essft)  which  he  made  in  his  example,  by  which  he  ruined  a  pas- 
sage in  Cic.  Par.  0.  3,  49.  We  may  say  that  by  the  above-mentioned  two  rules  almost  the 
whole  law  of  consecution  is  set  a>ide,  or  surrendered  to  the  license  of  tlie  writer.] 
—  -  Kxamples  of  such  perfect  subjunctives  are  not  very  numerous,  since  generally  such 
'cnnllicts  may  be  avoided  hy  recasting  the  sentence.  But  tliey  occur  in  the  very  best 
authors,  and  are  far  too  frequent  tf)  pronounce  them,  as  some  grammarians  do,  as 
'marks  of  negligeiu  styh^',  or  even  to  amend  the  te.vl,  as  many  editors  liave  done,  by 
substituting  tenses  of  preterite  consecution. —  s  '|'|i(>  sentence,  with  quum,  according  to 
/('.  «i9  niiirht  have  also  taken  the  form  dedecus  erat  quum  factitdbal :  and  hence  the  au- 
tiior  miirht  have  used /'c/r/i/J/v-/'  in  connection  with  the  relative  qui,  if  he  had  used  eratr^ 
instead  offuif.  Thus  the  conflict  with  the  law  of  consecution  might  have  been  avoided. 
But  in  this  instance  tiie  peculiar  force  of  this  whole  form  would  have  been  made  irrecog- 
ni/.able,  since  the  im|)erfect  would  have  the  appearance  of  a  preterite  by  consecution, 
not  of  a  tense  denoting  identity  of  action  according  to  Ji.  79.  See  §  G06,  Obs.  3. 


42G 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


427 


(It 
;;[;- v;.i;i;,^  ^;;^:;l  "Jitv:: ;:;  1';:^.,»^»."'-"^'  t,».  .^e  iS„a «.. ... 

«r.iin.r  oil  ut  eveuiii"  (acconliui,'  to  tlio  rule  Ji.  o\).  UBS.  Z).  ,        , , 

uiKiuamauiiuis.iMa.aqiue^torrt/^/   e/^    /-  I'yr  '^^^^^^^^  fonim '  in  mv  boyhood,  and 

wVori'hJwa--  lei'    w  ,  U     "'»"l'"-  •".ant  Hut  1„- u.-vvr  .,n-«y /imf  ^aw.  "■'  1^1  "•r, 

L     ,  '*  T.! , ;:  hv  l:::Jnuui:^  «.v  ..iwivh  ..-.ed  u.  chu..»..  or  .i.i.  kind.  If  t  '<.;i''' ->• 

..,.-  not  m'.»..  to  n.f.r  .!..■  «..Ion  ,o  hi.o.vn  .ime  or  to  ,.  'l^.^'^lZ^^u^c^ 

hill  M«  thai  of  llu*  -iil>J<tl  ul    IK*  t»nu«  «pokfii  ol.  a-  :    I  pilxo^)  '^*'  ,.»    '"•"  V" 

'.....     '.(.j,!,.,!    ''"' — '//«   \t  nmhi  hf  done  at  H  ••mail  » 

,.,.  l»',  d  a»  -iihohUqne.  helntf  ftaiid  *out  of 

■   -^  ,       -A    ■■'  '  \\r  n-pre-enttMl 
.      .,,  v,\\h  t(«i  or 

I  (l<<«triiv  ti'u'  iMnni  of  nio  eimnH*. 

•  'ft'     -     ,   *  •  -    I'tnte  rontnin^  nn  t^mn 

•d  wilhoiit  Mnpalrlni: 
I  II 


the  «oiii    i»f  ihr 


«'/ 


«' 


((Ul 


vvH"  n  rnrii 
•  ♦!.  i.H.    ; - 

Ill  III  drniile  an  action 


I 

,.   ..  !    --f 

htJitinff  Nt 
'<'d  HI»  «n 


lilt  1 1 1 1 
i  t . . 


»dni»i»ft«Thi»firiMllrHit'ronlnln« 


1 


jndired  (and  still,  jndtros,  i.  e.  is  of  opinion)  :  ft/if,  if  was  and  is  still;  riflimvu.  we  paw 
(ind  >till  .-ci'ji  ;  (^')  if  tlie  irovernins  pivteiite"  i;*  introdoced.  not  for  its  quality  as  a  past 
a^MJKii.  JMit  lor  thi' c  iisiquences  rcsiillinir  IVom  it  which  arc  represented  asi)res(  nt  at  the 
spcjikcr's  timi'.  as  uikIii^Ik  you  have  heard  (and  hence  khow) ;  scriimf,  he  wrote  (and 
ijiiil  is  of  opinion)  :  veid,  I  iiave  c<»nie, and  hei  ce  'am  present ' ;  cognC'Vi,  I  learned  (and 
liencc  •  knoiv  ')  ;  (c)  if  a  preterite  is  repre-ented  as  havinjr  always  or  never  held  uood 
and  as  holdini,'  or  nut  iiolilinir  now.  as  nuttupiam  dxlnturi,  1  have  never  doubted  (nor  do 
I  dou>)t  now)  ;  semper  crdd-idlruiit,  they  always  believed  (and  are  believing  now). 
Subjunctives  dependent  on  such  predicates  are  treated  in  the  following  manner  : 
{(I)  If  the  action  of  the  subjunctive  is  repn-scnted  fi»  present  to  the  speaker,  it  maybe 
either  expressed  as  a  lofjlcdl  tense  in  the  ;;/ex^//^,  or  as  a  tense  by  preterite  consecution  in 
the  i/nper/ect  {v\cv\)t  in  the  instance  mentioned  Obs.  5^  as  :  (Puesents)  Quod  genus 
Ijoc  militlim  sit  jutHnlvit  IJibuhis  (qui  noluerit  etc.).  What  kind  of  soldiers  this  {.<?, 
l'>ibulu> Jwi'if/f(/  (when  he  relu-^ed  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  15.  1,  5  (He  judged  then,  and  would 
judge  n  w  if  asked^. —  Vh/inn/s  cum  quanta  cerimonia  non  vestros  polum  w/a^t.<  deos, 
H>(1  etiam  externos  acci|)iiltis  ;  We  have  seen,  (nnd  see  now)  with  what  solemnil»y  you 
worship  uox  only  your  own  i^ods  hut  also  admit  foreign  deities.  Liv.  29,  18.  See  Ex. 
5-!). —  (Impf:rpkcts  :)  Miiii  .^i'onpsi  hoc  loco  doctrlnani  quandam  juvenititi,  qui  esf^ent 
o|)tiinjlies  ;  I  hare  t?-^ated  (iu)f.\  am  still  consideriuL')  in  the  interest  of  our  young  men 
the  question  '  who  l^long  U\  (who  constitute  the  class  of)  the  optimStes  '.  Cic.  Sest.  59, 
119.  See  Ex.  10-1.3. —  Sometimes  both  methods  are  combined  in  the  same  sentence:  Non 
ego  ifjnanis  quid  resfKtnsRrux  fact urnsve  ease»  qitcesivi.  quippe  quum  pne  xeferas  temptare 
te  magis  quain  consulen!  senatiim  ;  I  a.<ked  that  question  (and  still  am  waiting  for  an  an- 
swer), not  because  /  did  not  (and  do  i\o\)  know  whaiyour  ansiver  or  action  would  be,  see- 
in<r  tliat  (since)  ijou  openly  shoio  that  yt)U  are  rather  trying  (makinc:  an  experiment  with) 
than  consulting  the  Senate.  Liv.  2^,  45.  Here  facturus  esses  wWiVfi  to  the  thoughts  of  the 
speaker  in  the  (jiast)  moment  of  actually  asking  the  question,  and  j)rcB  te /eras  to  a 
state  present  and  lasting  in  the  moment  of  speaking. 

(b)  If  the  action  contained  in  the  subjunctive  \'^ coincident  wifJi  the  (jov€r7)in/j preterite, 
the  subjunctive  dependent  on  it  is  placed  eitiier  in  the  imperfect  or  in  the  perfect.  The 
iMPEUFECT  is  used  if,  l}y  changinrf  th>  qorerninq  preterite  into  an  actual,  present,  the  sub- 
junctire  would  f>e  a  puesent.  liiit  the  rEUFECT  must  be  used,  if  by  thus  chanqing  the 
principal  predicate,  the  dtpendfnt  sutijiinctire  would  be  a  preteuite.  as  :  Num  qiiisquocl 
bonus  vir  txstt  (not  fit  or futrit)  gratia-*  disf^i/' unqiiam  ?  Z'i</ t-vera  man  thanklhe  gods 
fortteinq  a  good  man  *  Cic.  N.  1).  3,  M.  87.  (CliaiiL'ed  into  a  present :  '  Nemo  gratias  dis 
aqit  quod  vir  bonus  .v?7'  ;  hence  :  eqit  (\n(:)d.e.<set).  But :  Quis  wnqnvax).  dubifarit  qiiin  inre- 
jjiiltiica  nostril  piimas  eloqiicntia  tenntnt  semper  ?  Who  ever  doubted  (and  who  <lo<-8  now 
doubt)  that  elo(iuence  always //«.v  hebl  iliemo-t  prominent  place  in  our  cotmtry  ?  Cic.  Or. 
40,  1 11.  (Chanircd  into  a  present  :  Nemo  dufAtat  (juin  tenuerit  ;  hence  tenvejit  cannot  be 
cliaiiL'ed  into  tenTret).—\\AH\  pugna  inilicioywi/  (et  nunce.'>0  quos  milites  qesserint^  animos  ; 
I'his  baitley>//7/i.sV/<'(/  (and  now  turnishes)  a  proof  of  the  courage  with  which  the  soldiers 
bihared.  iJv.  7.  "i^i.  (Cliaiiired  into  a  present:  Indicio  est,  quos  animos  qesserint).  By 
the  imperlect  gererent  the  fact  would  be  represented  as  appearing  so  t'o  those  present 
at  the  battle,  which  the  author  did  not  mean.— Sometimes  of  two  very  similar  sentences 
tlu'  one,  according.' to  the  al)ove-mentioiied  rule  requires  the  subjunctive  in  x\\o  imperfect, 
and  the  other  in  the  perfct.  as  :  Perltus  ivostri  juris  nemo  nnqiiam  qui  banc  civitatem  re- 
tin(?re  rdltf,  in  aliaiii  se  fivitilfein  dicdvit ;  No  person  versed  in  our  law,  if  desirovs 
to  retain  the  ri^dit  of  citizenship  in  tiiis  city,  ever  ha^  accepted  the  citizenship  of  an- 
other. Cic.  Balb.  12.  .'iO.  (Ciian^'ed  into  a  ))rescnt  :  Nemo  qui  reiingre  velit,  se  dicat ,' 
hence:  Tf^lUt,  not  volue/it) ;  but  :  Me  dicentem  qui  audierit  nemo  unquam  tarn  sni  de- 
tipiciens///t/  <piin  s/»  nlret  erxlem  modo  se  posse  dicere  ;  Nobody  who haj< heard  me  speak- 
Inir  ever  undt-rrnfid  himself  so  as  not  to  hone  that  he  might  speak  as  well.  Cic.  Or.  2, 
W».  :¥\\.  [Clianged  into  a  prest-nt  :  Nemo,  qiii  me  dicentem  audierit  (aud'irit  accordinji 
to  p.  :j()t),  J{.  4"ii  tam  sui  desiiiciens  e/^t  (iuin>y>^/f^  etc.  Hence  :  audierit.  not  audiret ;  and 
>-;u  nlre'.  not  sperarerit].  \\  c  cannot  hut  admire  the  remarkable  tact  with  which  thecl^s- 
nf  il  a:ithors.  alilioii.rb  not  guided  by  any  grammatical  rulers,  almost  invariably  used 
the  proper  lenses*  in  relatitins  wlierc  so'delicate  distinctions  must  be  made.  Our 
modern  Lallni^ls.  even  the  best  (as  Muivtiis,  Erasmus,  Ernesti,  Wyttenbach)  frequently 
oll'end  against  this  rule.  Several  conventional  phfases,  properly  falling  under  the  rule 
menlioncd  almve,  always  require  an  iinp&rftct.  Here  belonirs  the  frequent  formula 
•  (Su'pei  (Vidiii  (or  audiOi)am.  atidltum  est)  qiuim  dicertt  :  1  have  often  heard  him  say. 
See  p.  a2(l.  Ottn.  3.  4.—  Ex.  14-lti. 


»  Pre 


kind  must  bo  distin'juished  from  the  expressions  mentioned  R. 


4*2.  intplyini;  an  uniniernipled  duration  of  a  etate.  Such  predicates  are  always  in  tho 
prt^rnf.^  »  .Mudvl;;  (in  Thacljcr*»  translation  p.  312)  considers  qesserint  an  'inaccurate' 
cxprer<«lon. 


420 


U8K  OF  THK  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


■      'nw  of  ronprrutlon  muM  ylH.I  to  th<.  pro»MMlorv  rnlo  7?  M 

.1  ir.nn  ilifiMVrmli  lumrtl.  ^.  t-Hri)  III    M-  ...    u  (i    1    txi      lit»»" 

'  •  '    r  III  lilt' rnnk"  of  liM         ^        V        .  ,,111.-» 

»••;  „  „.,.,1  ,1,..  cl.iii-o  would  huv.^  »M-cM  tyi.  ;"    U 

1»|H,       .     »         ,  ,  11.,     ,.  .    «i...    ! ("rHMt    ;        ,  .    '"" 

••fl.T.'  wliut»  v»«ml.i  n.^oU,-  HI.  a-  ',    ;  that  tlif  fluhl  uu»  i-llH 

'    •%'!  r,  liiivf  Irll  il  1  . 1,  will. 

(iiiTonUiiir  to  III»'  rule  li.  M».  Ob».,  a». 

(OUfliMitlM'i.  ^,  J, I  ,,',,.  p,.ru.(.i  HUbJiiiicllvo  c«»iiiriiry  to 

rU.  7M"/«.  or  *M| 4 i         .1    .   ,1..  t,,.w.  iif  111.'  «liiii-f  l>»  /<''/  mraiit  to  he  ilio 

rcu-KMinu    0«  '''•\"!'V':7;;,\    '.  ,  ..and  to  the  mom.'..t  of  «rilli»;  :  S.«po 

"1"»"  "    "  r.   '  •     !;«« )  /  ran.,  '  to  tho  foruin  ;  in  my   ..|.vhoud  Jj-ul 

;i.r,nM./...M.o:.;n;.^,MU.yuu..oMhan.Uuin.^ 

1I,M«  7"""»    •  •  »^"*""!  .^^""'l'  "■''?;';       in    \v.      I    am  .  to  th     onnn).   (Juurn  vtuixsem 
colur.d.Mil  ihow  could  I  hc^ir  t  u-.n  «M  w;  1^^^  m^^^^^^ 

w«>uld  \H'  A  ti'inporal  «InuH.'  will,  thf  nu-aiil  nu'    alt   r    \  ';'*,"'''    rvMi.tiii'  tlu'  tiim-  of 
applloi*  to -aA/'/'/i//». -;  Hoc  III'   "!  ">  •  '  '  ' ,.' •'    '  .   .,,„  ,,f   ,1  ,it  m:m.  he  iras  ltd  tnto 

t.ntla...  tuan.  :  IW  tin-  .*ai..»'  man  iho  •'-  '     '  '''^  M'^^  fie.  VWA,% 

,allho„rjh.  a„U  y.^  you  at  t  he  .n.,e  ''^-^^      1  J.^J^/^     ,' !  '  n  I  e^m  .ubjunc.ive 

Tin-  pn-diratc  of  the  clause  7-/// m  ••/'•'/'"•'''"'''  ,  ,,V  ^   r  ...ri'-.-nt  tl  e  clause  as  a  time- 
(or  perfect  indicative).  wouUl   accord...^'  '*'  {V-  r P.  .^  w^tl.  t  ?e  r    c     of         adveoative 
claiLe.  ^^l.ile  it  j^  n.eant  »"'-,«,,;;•  i;:^?^^^;;;^^  ^,\o,.  n'cr 
,,ropo.>tion  ^V.^^f\  J\:'^^^^^^^^''t^^  wl.^  of  this  kind  are  quite  fre- 

;:s.r{i;s:.:*:ic;;::.!d;.;;\!ni^^^^^ 

„n.c,ed.    Ten.es  by  c....s.-cut. on  an-.tthvayH.>^^^ 

d„es  not  mean  1«.  refer  the  action  ''V»'''*"^^'^^'  '^v"'i".''J\',*'  '  ,'/^^^^        ^enflt-is  noit  cei.. 

iiiiiliiiliiliM 

a  ;»■«««<  predicate  by  imi<ttcuhm  {!!.  W,  No  i  .    j, ''.*•''.;'  V^"V  '  '      ,     ^,„,„„a  of 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


427 


Jndi:«d  (and  Mill  ^id-_'Os,  i.  e.  if  of  opinion)  :  fmt,  it  was  and  1?  ptill;  ridimni:,  we  ^aw 
i-.nd  Mill  M-e.>  •  ?•)  if  the  -overniiiir  preterite  is  introduced,  not  for  its  qual.iy  as  a  past 
jM-ii..n   hnt  lor  th-  c   i.s.  q.ience-  reHnliinir  Irom  it  u  Inch  are  represented  as  present  at  the 
.pe,iker-s  till..-,  as  ionhl'K  vou  have  heard   (and  hence  k>.ow);  scnpnt,  he  wr.)te  (and 
Hill  Is  ..f  opinion)  ;  rnn,  1  l«»ve  cine,  and  hei  ce  '  am  present    ;  cognuvi,  I  learned  (and 
hence  •  know  ")  ;  (C  if  n  preterite  is  r«.pn>ente.l  as  havin-  always   or  "j-'vcr  held  -ood 
nnl  «s  h.'ldin-  or  not  holdin-  now.  ns  nuwqvam  dufAtari,  1  have  never  doubted  (nor  do 
I  doiitit  noir)  T  «tniptr  cndidirunf,  they  always  believed  (and  are  believing  now). 
Subiunclivet'  dependent  on  8uch  predicates  are  treated  in  the  followini?  manner  : 
Oi)  If  the  actlcm  of  the  subjunctive  is  represented  ta^jrre.^ent  to  the  speaker,  it  maybe 
eiher  evpresM-d  as  a  lo(/ic<it  (cose  in  the  pie.<€>»t,  or  as  a  tense  by  preterite  consectition  in 
the  //rt/>*V/W/iexcei.t  in  the  instance  n.enti.med  Obs.  5),  as  :  (Pkesents)  Quod  genus 
ho,-  mil.ti.m   nl  j'^rirarU  liihnlns  iqui  n.duerit  etc.).     What  kind  of   soldiers  this  is 
llibulus  »V/ri7f^/  (vvhen  he  relu-ed  etc.).     Cic  Kam.  15,  1.  5  (He  judged  then,  and  would 
iud"e  n  w  if  asked^  —  Vidimus  cum  quanta  cerimonia  non  vestros  solum  w/tf/t*  deos, 
s.d'eiiamexternos  accipiJItis  ;    We  have  seen  (and  see  now;)  with  what  solemnitty  you 
worship  not  onlv  vour  own  gods  but  also  admit  foreign  deities.    Liv.  29,  18.    ^ee  hx. 
5_«» —  /iMPKUKKCTs  :)  Mihi  stmipsi   hoc  loco  doctrlnam  quandam  juventuti,  qui  es.<eni 
optimises  ;'l//ffr6  fnated  iam\  nm  still  considering)  in  the  interest  of  our  y"'"i??  me^ 
the  Question  '  who  Monr/  to  (who  constitute  the  class  of)  the  optimStes  .  Lie.  best.  5y, 
119    See  E.x  1(1-13  —  Sometimts  both  methods  are  combined  in  the  same  sentence :  ^on 
e<ro'  ifinanis  quid  resmnsilru^  factumsve  essen  qumlvi.  quippe  quum  pne  te/^m.«f  temptare 
te  ma<'is  quam  consulere  seniitum  ;  I  a.<ked  that  question  (and  still  am  waiting  for  an  an- 
pwerrnot  because  /^/i'/  not  (and  do  wox)  knotv  what  your  ansicer  or  action  wouldbe,  see- 
in"  that  (since)  you  oimily  show  that  you  are  rather  trying  (making  an  experiment  with) 
than  consuliin-' the  Senate.  Liv.  %%  45.    ll^ircfa^trmis  esses  refers  to  the  thoughts  of  the 
speaker  in   the  (past)  moment  of  actually  aslcing  the  question,  and  pr(E  te /eras  to  a 
state  present  and  lasting  in  the  moment  of  .^7J(f«A-i«,7.     .,,.„,.  .  ,    .. 

(b)  If  the  action  c<mfained  in  the  sul)junctive  ^coincident  7nfh  the  (jovennng preterite, 
the  Kul>iunctive  dependent  on  it  is  placed  either  in  the  imperfect  or  in  \\\c  jy^rject.     Ihe 
iMPEiiFECT  is  used  if.  Inf  changing  th>-  governing  jvetente  into  an  act uaf.  present,  the  sub^ 
iunclirt  would  he  a  pkesent.     Uiit  the  pkufkct  must  be  used,  if  by  thus  changing  the 
minnpol  predicate,  the  dependent  suf>junctire  would  be  a  preteiute,  as  :  Isuin  quis  quod 
bonus  virw*^'^  (not  sit  or  fuerit)  g.atias  dis  egif  unquam  ?  iHd  ever  a  man  thank  the  gods 
for  being  a  go.xl  man  ?  Cic.  N.  D.  3, 3<i.  87.     (Chanired  into  a  present  :  '  Nemo  gratias  dis 
ar/it  quod  fir  bonus  sil '  ;  hence  :  egit  quodesset).  But :  Quis  unquam  duUnint  qiiin  in  re- 
publico  nostril  primas  elocpi.-ntia  tenu.nt  semper  ?  Who  ever  doubted  (and  who  do-s  now 
doubt)  that  eU)(|uenceaiwavs/i(w/^fWthemo>t  prominent  place  in  our  country  ?  Cic.  Or. 
40  141     (Changed  into  a  present  :  Nemo  dubifat  quin  tenuerit  ;  hence  ^^/meri/  cannot  be 
chan-ed  into  tenereO.-M.vc  pu-nu  indicio/wi/  (et  nunc  e.t)  qnos  milites  gessenni^  animos  ; 
This  battle  furnished  (and  n-.w  lurnishes)  a  proof  of  the  courage  with  which  the  soldiers 
behared    LiV.  7,  ?^^.     (C'han-ed  into  a  present:  Indicio  est,  quos  aminos  gesserint).    By 
th.-  imiicriect  7fmvflnhe  fact  would  be  represented  as  aDpearing  so  to  those  present; 
at  the  battle,  which  the  author  did  not  mean.— Sometimes  of  two  very  similar  sentences 
the  one  according  to  the  above-mentioned  rule  requires  the  subjunctive  in  the  imperfect, 
and  the  other  in  the  perfct.  as  :  Perltus  uostri  juris  nemo  unquam  qui  banc  civitaiem  re- 
linCrer(7/eMn  aliam  se  civiiatem  (/?wr^^•  No  person  versed  in  out;  law,  it  tf^^?m/« 
to  retain  the  right  of  citizenship  in  this  city,  ever  has  acceptfd  the  citizenship  of  an- 
other   Cic    lialh    l->   30.     (Ciianjred   into  a  i)resent:  Nemo  qui  retingre  velit,  se  dicat  ; 
hence:  vellet,  n<.t  volneiV)  :  but  :  Me  dicentem  qui  audierit  nemo  unquam  tarn  sui  de- 
sniciens  fait  quin  speraret  eOdem  modo  se  posse  dicere  ;  N obody  who  has  heai'dme  speak- 
in-r  K'\ev  vndrr rated  himself  so  as  not  to  hope  that  he  might  speak  as  well    Cic.  Or.  2, 
89" 3(11      rciian"ed  into  a  present :  Nemo,  qui  me  dicentem  audient  (auaivtt  according 
to'ii  m  It  43)"tain  sui  despiciensf^/ quin. v>^r^<  etc.  Hence  :  fl?/rfi^/'t^  not  ««/rfir^^ ;  and 
sntrare>\\o\  sperarent].  We  cannot  but  admire  the  remarkable  tact  with  which  the  cl^s- 
Pic.il  authors,  alihouirh  not  iruided  by  any  grammatical  rules,  almost  invariably  used 
the  uroner  tenses  in   relations  where  so  delicate    distinctions   must   i)e   made.    Our 
modern  Latinist.s.  even  the  b.-st  (as  Muretus,  Erasmus,  Ernesti.  Wyttenbach)  frequently 
off.-nd  a.minst  this  rule.     Several  ccmventional  phfases,  properly  falling  under  ihe  ru  e 
mentioned  above,   alwavs   require  an   imperfect.     Here   belongs  the  frequent  formula 
•(SiepeWt'/rfi/MoraudiCham,  audltum  est)  quum  (iic£;-e/;  1  have  olten  heard  hiin  say. 
See  p.  32G,  Obs.  3.  4.—  Ex.  14-lG. 

'^Predicates  of  this  kind  must  be  distinguished  from  the  expressions  mentioned  R. 
49   imulvin«'  an  uuinterrutited  duration  of  a  .-tate.    Such  predicates  are  a  ways  in  the 
present.—  ^  Madvijj  (in  Thacher's  translation  p.  Ui)  considers  gesserint  an    inaccurate 
expression. 


4-8 


USK   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


a^endenm;   You  hare  ^^^?^,  <=;"''    ^^„^7  SZJx.i\^^^defen,J.re  '  is  nnt.nor  to 
earh  case.  Cic.  Finn.  1,  U,  '21  0><_>t  ''o'  '  'ff^f/';;  ;"       \Z.  oh  caus^am  patreiu  liliiis  rxr?</e- 

7i^  ;  Thtre  A«s'  Oeen  no  li-a^.m  rt  ^I^/f '    ^\.     \  fY>  "  a  ill  v  from  two  rcanonP  :  lirst  accord- 
father.  Cic.  Uo.c.  Am.  22,  01  (oc.W^^£v,       d  IH^  a.n  >  ^ 


designation  of  a  V^^^^}''"}^-^'''  \^'  '^  ;.^:;u.,,.^  such  siihj.nictives  always  require  a 
the  Troven.in-  ,..etent,e  is  a  pnrelv  ^^^^Vv  n/r  t  t  r.ne  e--ot  au(iuw>>r<  qiue  Cortimi  acta 
pluperfect,  as  :  ilnnin  res  in  ^'J'';'; '^,,  ^C' f  ^''\'?"i^)  ^iu^^caudivuLs  belon-s  to  a 
Imd  iuoi  dnf).  Cic  ad.  ^;'''y>;:J'';VVwh     "lo^^^^^^^^^^  happened  on  a  certain  day  (I 

luirrative  in  which  the  author  J!;''a^*,:,.'\J^;  ^, '//yiY.ei  ae^  ^subjunctives  are  of  the 

heard  on  that  day  =  «''^'^^^^"^^'^i.TT,^  ^^l'  ^  j,  \„^K^^^  the  Unie  of  the  ^peaker 
.anu..m;urc.jsthcMr,overnn>,^  to  tui.  ca«e,  as  m 

(ashx.  I.-ID).     f?."' :;'«''.,,.,, Honod  .'xaniT)Ks.  and  ill  Ex.  20.  .    . 


lerues,  u».-  i,w..^.viv  .- V..„ii  1,  iM-.'^iMit-Dcrrect      The  alter  always  im;iim'f>  i"^  "— — 

torical  preterite  ^^"^/'V  tf  1  .-  of  •  nJ  int  ten'e  hdon-  .lot  u.  the  perlect  tense  a« 
a  pl•e^ent,  while  .n  Latin  the  dea  (  t  f  1»^.;,*^ '  ^.;.^;^''^..,  i^itams.  This  connecln-n  with 
s,/ch,  hut  to  the  connection  whch  ^  '^^^^'^^^^ ^^    f/  ^^^^^^  is  not  pe.-nliar  to 

the  idea  uf  a  present  ^^l'^^''  "  ":l  "  \V   k  an  im  S^^^^  "^  -ranunariau  has  yet  -one 

the  i^erjed  alone,  but  nunj  eve.       c u .  w  ith  an  '  f/>^  /f«  ;;        .  „p  explaining  such  ro.nh.- 

even  a  sinvlanty  wiihan  hii'^ri'^h  Jl^.^' '•;,;''  ';,.,,ivb..I()n«'"toth(>se preterites  which, 
spond  to  Knu'lish  present  periects  ^,  ^t  ,  V'  ,=  c  d  tt  <e^a^^  Q»es/us  I  plures  te  testis 
ak-,nnlingtoOBS.2,mayrequireoracl.        og^ul^^  •  S    ,,,„,j,iahud  (then  and 

habere  de  Voitinul  4>uim  qm.t  m  eS  t    bu^  p^^^^^  ,    ^  Voltinian  tribe  th  .n  you 

th.re.  and  so  you  do  .wir)u^  »  \  "r.^i^^^^^l'V^Vie  id  r  r  ///.  e<f  ne  e-o,  iracundia  ahqua 
/ia^/m/riec/ votes  there,  f:'^- ^,;    h  T/. /.;.;,,// A;//  Vo,/  indeed  /-^«r  (not  :  ^  lave  you 


;nm;Veen  in  .h\.  Pe.-sian  war.  Nep.  Them  ^;^^:.^^;:;^^;^^^'"  me  ]  Thus  j^^^car^  (hi 
Ihe  fact  vvU  be  v^w^;^  trom  the  s  anc^po  u^  ,  "ois  5,  B)  «i^  many  of  the  perfects 
OBs  2,  «),  •  ^f '/;''> -$^'^^5^',^^  „olt^aS  for  e^^^^^  of  En^dish  present  perfects. 

■  *  Madvi.  (p.  34r^i^her)  consi<iers  the  perlect/..ri^  ,^,*,r;\'o  clol^e^uTe'^^^^^^^ 

in..  Unit  Cicero,  when  he  said  (or  r»tlKT  zr/'O/.)  .M'^/.    nea^  J     >  ^^^^^  1,^ 


I 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


429 


(P.  n^.  and  hence  are  r.a^Pr^^nr.cor^,o.a^^^^^ 

in  exile)  far  from  our  country  and  rom  it.  Ij,^;  a  place  v^^^e^e  /«^.^./J  ^^^.^  f,„.^,  ,„i,. 
an 'SO  (hat  we  are  ffrowinrf  old).  Lu.  -^,^' ^v  ,,V.  I'V'.  ...ji,  , ,,  closer  examinaticm.  be 
junctives  ot  pr.tenU  consecunou  '^j;^/^^^^"  1^/^  Man  A(« 

\::^^:^:^&:;^r^^t.^t  t.  ;sf  s^^:?^  e,  i.  see  ex.  21. 22. 

?^ntl^"Il^v;::^ln^-  the  subjunctives  dependent  on  the  Idnd  of  preterites 
ui^itUml'^O;^:  i;;^.^n-  placed  -  tenses  c^iM^EXKruTK^c^^  ^^^^.^^ 

1.  Ifthedependriitsubjunctive  IS  the  predicate     la  FiNAL^^  predicate  is 

mid  intro,luced  by  W,  ..,  <?'/o,  or  ^.^^;:^:^l'^';^^Jl"'e.  fvk.vU  even  if  a 
almost  always  in  the  '^'i'^^«'f:^-CT    f  the  g^wr mn^^^p^^^^^^^  i  ^^^^^^  is,  that  a 

present  is  contained  in  U  by  ""l'''  f  /  '  '  „,  f  vJJore  or  wHh  the  act  itself,  and  not  at 
Purpose  connected  with  an  'return   n^-tbep^^  «'"  manserit,  e-o.  ne 

\\n'^ present  time'  wl.ich  is  «//c/f/'-v/w^/ ,  as     q  un   Aico^a^^^^^  has  remained  in  the 

Ufnorau'tis  esse  al  quas  pacis  ^""^  't'o  «es    u   xos  i.  .^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^^ 

enenn's  catnp.  /  ''«'•^,^'>'^'^/"  f 'Vhe  c^i  se  'Sf  7  iS^/ir  has  a  ^>./im/  tense, 
conditions  <.f  peace.   l,iv.  21,  13.  . .^  \^„^  ,^^»^^^8^ l^^^  accordinir  to  the 

while  the  final  clax^sv.  ^  ?,e  tr/?>oranti..  ."J"r:'/;?,\y  "  ?    S  0  relinqneret  natQ- 

law  of  pn-terite  con^ectit-on.-  (?/;c«./  \}!}'}^''^T\T)\^o[  xhT\l  should  relinqvl^h 
ram,  sed  qua.  '^^^^^'';f^  V!•^•'J,.^^^t,^1'\l^  Noc  em  un^^  ad  consultandum  svmpsL  qui 
nature,  but  to  preserve  it.  C  >c.t '"•'•/?' '^.-  in«tanti"Vacfrfm  ;  7  //«re  /a^<'/<  one  night  for 

i.  EiMo'a'V  hiiiterrMl.-:.  altlimiL'li  '''■", \V"'"';^,^;,S',:,,j,,^i„,„  ,K,-venms.  nobi^qae 

'''/1S'.e;u;.:^'«r"c 'n-"ti..n  .are  „.e,,  .„t  «^-^^  P-^«*^  S^Sll'^a.r.'qT.f^'",!! 
.iV.;V,lVT„'r,;\rjr''^^?«"l.".S.U>'.'  RlSi"ai.^,"as  ruf.ai.  ..c.  Se„,  B^-u.  ...4.- 
For  Ex.  of  preterite  consecution  ^^ec  pJO.i.  persons  who';  tu  solus  ifivenfns  es 

2.  WUh'ioventi  (reperti)  '['!  'J'\;^.,.^^^^^^^^  subjunc- 

gui,  'you  are  the  only  ""%^\*'V  •  .,)^,'  .,,\'  V-^^^r  7?^'/ecY,  but  is  more  usually  In  the 
live  (see  p.  5.51  foil.)  may  be   in  ^  '^J^'^^f J  ^o  «tri^^^^^^ 

imperfect.     Whenever  these  express  onsh^      f, 'Tb.  t  m'fre  ^^^  the  former  :  Sex. 

inid.-rstood).  either   he  ^"^P^''^^ .  "[  »'S'J.^^^^^  hvenfus  est  nemo; 

Titio  damnSlto  qui  istam  ^'-^i  '-=;  '^!^"^  ,,'^^^^S^aS  w^^^  dared  to  have  this  ima.ire  in  his 
7V,ere  wa^^  no^^// 'V«^J:^'/-„^.ll"'*  m  ,!!3  rXtVi  sunt  qui  uullis  pnemiis  propositus  vitam 
possession.  Cic.  Kab.  Perd  ^v2->--.r"'f  .^?':;,!^?/^^)'^  i/^en  (are)  />««'  ^^•ho,  without  the 
"uam  In.stium  telis  objecerint  (or  p/otcreut)  •  J^^^.  .f„^/"|,7"i;f  en4y.  Cic.  Balb.  10,  26. 
promise  of  rewards,  exp<.se  their  I'ves  to  the  weap  ns  of  J^nc  em  y^^^ 
1-  Pompejus  unus  iov^dvs  est  (luem  '^"^  i    y«rMs  suas^c^^  ^^^  ^  -^ 

Pomp.'v  iv  the  only  one  who-e  c..ni.nu' to  the  c^  '^|  «^  «  ,  ^•;;^,^„\  gaudeant  isnecessary 
(Still)  7-^7/ir7/j/'^m/  withjoy  by  ^»l^,^^<-;^„- ^^^f;/,„,,e^^^  ^'  ref?rrin-  to^the  time  of  the  corn- 
here.' because  gaudmn  or  f/f'?;^^^*^'  ''VTv^u  s  Qtt  fasfcs  popu^  iovpropone- 
^;^:ii;^^^^f^^^'S^^'^^^^^  ftie  (berets  of  the)  calendar 
to  the  people.  Cic.  Mur.  11,  25.  See  Ex.  25-28. 

OB.  6.  If  .ul^unctives  ave  dependent  on  those  i^,^;...!^  ^^^^ 

represent  an  action  as  l''-^"cedinjz anoiluM  aUioiK  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^  K       ^^^^^^ ^  attached  to 

(p  800,  R.  43),  tliey  always  take  ^^ns6.?oy/?^^€nJ«^^^^^^^^  quis  ex  principibus  m 

lucli  perlVcts.  have  their  predicates  'I'    hf/^f^^/'  /^^^^^^  qui  et  causam  pro- 

coucilio  dixit  se  ducem  fore,  qui  sequi  ^^j/'' ^''  '-f  fj^^^'^^j  ^ St  he"is  goin-  to  be  the  leader 
bant  et  h-minem  ;  Whenever  anyone  ^^^^'^^^^  tS  fol  ow  1  m?  to^n-i^ll  their  narr^s,  aU 


430 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


r'i 
1/ 


qni  afferat  aRnnm  quom  immolCmns,  num  is*  mihi  ainins  aflfertnr  qm  etc.?  When  w« 
send  (have  8ciU)  honubody/or  a  lamb  to  hacriflce  it,  will  a  lamb  be  bioujrht  which  etc.? 
Cic.  Div.  2,  IT.— QuifiOfit  lam  cnpidiis  in  coiriiosceiuijl  renim  natQrtl  ur,si  ei  coiiteniplaiili 
les  (li'MiijisiimMs  f  iibito  sit  lUirituni  periculum  patriae,  ciii  tiuljvenlre  j)as>!it  (in>t  posxet),  nou 
ilk!  omnia  rdin(/nat  atqnv.  ab)icia(  f  Cic.  OtV.  1,  43,  ir)4.— If  Mich  peilects  take  the  form 
of  an  ahladve  absolute,  the  clau>es  dependent  on  them,  likewise  take  tcnces  of  present 
consecution,  furmiiiL,'  thus  an  exception  to  the  rule  R.  92.  as  :  (^iii  plurimot»  ex  hi-  inier- 
fecerunt,  rtbltU  in  "|)ul)iiciini  coniibus,  qua'  nut  tesiimouio,  n  ai:nain  lerunt  laudem  ; 
They  are  ^reatlv  praised  afttr  f/irinr/  {aheii  they  (jive)  the  horns  to  the  coramuuity,  bo  as 
to  serve  as  evidence.  Cics.  B.  G.  0,  ^8.  See  Ex.  43. 

Obs.  7.  Subjunctives  dependent  on  9. perfect  f,uh}iinctire  (E.  94,  No.  3).  alwqya  assume 
lo'^ical  tinst's  (of  present  consecution)  if  tiic  j)crffct  subjunctive  has  a  jxUennal  jiresent 
force  accordini:  to  U.  79,  Ou;*.  2,  as  :  Vix  ulllus  geiiiis  huminem  inrenerin  cujus  (elicitil- 
tem  fortfluie  Metelli  coinpavs;  You  will  hardly  llnd  a  man  in  any  nation  (  =  hardly  a 
man  can  be  found  etc.),  whose  happiness  you  could  cornpar^"  with  MetellusV  fortnne. 
Veil.  1  11.—  Utriim  j)oeta^  Stoicos  deprardiint  an  Stoici  poetis  dedevint  auctoritatem 
nt»)  facile  diJ-erhn  :  I  voidd  not  liki  to  say  (W  is  diftimll  to  decide)  whether  the  poets 
spoiled  the  Stoics,  or  whether  the  Stoics  inflianced  tiie  poets.  Cic.  N.  I).  3.  3'^.  91.—  But 
Avhen  the  poverning  subjunctive  perfect  has  the  force  of  a  preterite  (except,  of  course,  if 
it  implies  a  present  according  to  Obs.  2),  the  tense  of  the  d<pendcnt  subjunciive,  accord- 
ing to  the  genrral  rules,  should  be  determined  hy  preteHle  consecution,  which,  indeed 
islrrequently  the  case,  as:  (^uaTendum  est  num  tanta  egestas  ewvcx  opprt»serif  \\i  sacra- 
rium  suum  spolidnt,  ut  deos  patrios  rendtnt ;  We  should  examine  whether  he  was  in 
siuch  straights  that  he  shoi/ld  have  robbed  Ids  sanctuary  and  ,s/io>i  d  have  sold  the  gods  of 
his  fathers.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  ti.  —  But  olten'such  subjunctives  are.  likewise,  placed  in  the 
prrfect  subjunctive, thus  agrecjing  with  their  governing  predicate  in  tense  by  attraction-, 
as  :  Rest:it  ut  hoc  dubitC'mus.  ufer  potiiis  Sex.  Itosicum  occidt^rif,  is  ad  quem  morte  ejus 
diviliie  tv//^?7///,  aut  is  ad  quem  mendicitas  ;  It  remains  for  us  to  consider  which  of 
the  two  more  prol)ably  killed  Sex.  Koscius.  he  to  whom  wealth  came  by  his  death,  or 
he  to  whom  begtrary  (came).  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  31,  88.  Sometimes  (Ex.  33)  such  subjunc- 
tives are  placed  in  tha  present,  if  represented  as  present  to  the  speaker.-  Ex.  29-.33. 
f  Obs.  8.  Hi/]X)thetical  imperfect  snt/jmictives  are  Xo^WixWy  prexenfs  (diceret  si  vireret — 
nnnc  diceret  si  nunc  viveret) ;  and  hypothetical  pluperfect  sabjunctives  are  logical  perfects 
or  imperfects  (dijcisset  =  dictnrus fnit  or  era/).  Hence  it  should  seem  that  subjunctives 
dependent  on  i)reterite  hvpotheticals,  according  to  the  i)rincij)le  explained  iu  Obs.  2, 
ou"-ht  to  admit  of  logical  tenses  (in  the  present  and  perfect).  But  this  is  generally  not 
ihtTcase.  Subjunctives  dependent  on  preterite  hypot helicals  take  the  tenses  of  preterite eon- 
seciition.  In  order  to  know  whether  an  imperfect  or  a  pluperfect  must  be  chosen,  we 
must  conceive  the  hypothetical  imperfect  or  pluperfect  chan<;ed  into  a  perfect  or  imper- 
fect indicative,  iwmX  give  to  the  di'pendent  subjunctives  in  the  hypothetical  period  the 
same  tenses  as  thev  would  ttike  in  this  connection  ;  but  so  that  for  a  present  or  perfect 
indicative,  winch  the  clause  may  Uike  outside  the  hypothetical  framework,  an  imjierfect 
subjunctive  must  always  be  su])stituted,  as  ;  Si  solos  co^  diceres  miseros  quil)us  inori- 
enduin  exsef,  nemiuein  tu  quidem  eOrum,  qui  viverent,  exciperes  ;  If  you  wo'dd  callxm- 
happy  tho~e  only  wiio  must  die.  you  wmdd  except  none  of  those  that  are  living.  Cic. 
Tusc  1,5.  [Chanokd  according  to  rule  :  Uixisti  miseros  eos  quibus  monendum  e^i; 
excepisfi  eos  qui  vivunt :  hence  :  moriendum  esset,  riverenf].—  Qui  ib-ri  poiuit  nisi  homi- 
nes ea  quie  ratiOne  invem-'^oent,  eloquentia  persuadCre  potuissent  ?  How  could  this  be  the 
case  if  men  had  not  been  able  to  make  plausible  by  their  eloquence  what  they  have  derived 
bv  their  reason?  Cic.  Inv  1.  2.  [Chanoeu  :  Homines  persuadCre  poterant  qiite  mtiOnc 
ihxenerant  (this  pluperfect  is  required  accordin<r  to  p.  330,  Obs.  4  and  5):  hence  :  inre- 
imsent\— Ys'O  fi\  me  non  improbissime  Dolabclla  tracta-set,  f/wfti/aw^-m  fortasse  utrum 
remissior  essem.  an  summo  jure  contenderem  ;  If  Dolabella  had  not  treated  me  most  out- 
ra-^-eously  I  would,  perhaps,  have  doubted  whether  to  restrain  myself  or  to  engage  m  a 
strife  to  the  full  extent  of  my  right.  Cic.  Att.  Ifi.  15,  1.  [Dubitabam  utrum  contenderem, 
acf'ordiu"  to  R.  85,  Obs.  8,  e.^—  II  the  bvpothetical  predicates  are  expressed  by  jyresenfs 
(with  th«"  force  of  hvpothelical  imperfects;  see  B.  VI.),  f  fie  omecu  lion  must  be  present :  Si 
forte  nuivreretur  quie  esset  ax^  imperatOris,  constituendum  puldrem  quis  esset  imperfttor  ; 
si  .rrammaticus,  si  jmCta  qumafur.  po^sitn  similiter  explicare  quid  eOrum  quisque 
profitedtur.  Cic.  Or.  1,  48.  210-212.  See  Ex.  :34-:39. 

Obs  9  The  rule  Obs.  8  is  often  set  aside  for  the  reason»  mentioned  Obs.  1.  Clauses 
with  quum  (  =  seeing  that,  ov  since)  if  the  predicate  w.n-  placed  in  the  jmtierfect  sub- 
junctive would  Ireqiiently  be  mistaken  for  hypothetical  clauses  (gnum  being  often  =  ^» 
in  hvp.the'ical  p.riods)  :  and  hence  such  clauses  regularly  have  predicates  with  jn-esfnt 
con-ecution  :  Tu  istud  nisi  lingeres,  sic  aireres  ?  pr:esertim  (/uum  alienOrum  pericula  de- 
fendere  acerrime  soleas,  tuum  negligeresf  Would  yuu  proceed  thus  if  it  were  not  a  licii- 


DETEKDENT   SUBJUNXTIVE. 


431 


t^on.  cace  '  Considering  that  you  u,lL  -;lJ^t^«i^-f^t-S^^  S^t^^^^f  P^f 

c^r;hc^t:Hod!rS:^epK;Sou  -^-----^-^.r;  "predicate  of  the 
OBS    10   If  a  quum-clause  is  0>"-^^'^^dJ;.>'rr^'Vhe  rules  pOS^m  eircum- 

r«l  H-uis es  ince  the  author  meant  to  i;;?''^;;^  ?\,f ^^^l  "ssed  hy  '  defendit '  belonging  to 
Jonmr  period  in  the  life  of  li^^^'^'l^'^^^^'^^S  ? /.At' analogical  te4e,  might  have  be^^^^ 

mmmmmmm 

^fe^Z^IW^Cr^v^ryrJ/r^^uVT  bf  Mfended  .o'  I.  e.  th.  bound. 


\ 


432 


USE    OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


nnuloiu»  cnrandum.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  41, 107.—  2.  Ciinxmix'^  fuit  minfica  vi^ilantiil,  qni  puo 
toto  rons^uirmi  bouinnni  non  ridetifK  lb.  Fani.  7,  yO.  1.—  3.  Quid  eraf  (\\wa'  me  p.rseqiuj- 
reiitur  in  c;i>ti!i  fiiium='  i-^'o  itc-r  ita  fecenm*  nt  me  omnium  civiUltnm  ma^Mf^triltus  (in 
itinera)  convonlrcni^.  lb.  3,8,4.-4.  Hoc  quum«  rcvCra  Uk  .f\i^t  quum  «^t-mpcT  ita 
hfJntuin  ofj,<err(t(uiiiqued(,  iribQni  plebis  c-apuf/w^ «?;'//,/»  hoc'",  lb.  J  2.3,  .1—5.  ^on  ea 
sunt  commisHi^^  qme  .-ine  pincnlis  inj:ontibu>'"'^  expirin'3;>o.v.v«/«C.  Liv.  28.  2.  —  b.  (Quails 
vin.s  creare  vos  cousnles  decmf^*,  t'utit»  e.^t  dichim.  lb.  24,  8.-  7.  Accepisti^-'  (,m  uhmis 
in  republicjl.sif  .«tatus>«.  Cic.  Fam.  1,  •),  21.— 8.  Multis  belli  casibus»'  didia.  quando  pii<;- 
nunduml^  quando  ahstinendum  pu-ml  nt.  Llv.  44,3«).-  9.  Membns  ntimur  pnusquam 
didicimioi  cuius  ea  utilitiliisia  causa  habulmxs.  Cic.  Fin.  3.  20.—  10.  Me  meje  lortQiui'.-'» 


lb  Mil  13  —  14  Nee,  vrro  PoinpC-jus  mhi'm  rtrif/i/iP"  quod  earn  tnCri^J  non  ;xM\ve/3"^ 
ne'e  Itaiiam  (jno'd  vSl pellenfi/r.  lb.  Alt.  8.  11.  2.—  15.  Numqnam  mibi  defutOnim^a  ora- 
tiOm-m^*  cndi'/i,  nou  quo^*  verba  umqnam  j)olius  (luam  ics^"  tj-ercutrim^''.  t>ed  etc. 
Liv  28  27  —  10.  A  Balbo  (odnuidvertidi  quam  nmlta  dicta  slut.  Cic.  N.  D.  3.  1,  4.— 
17  Stepe  et  multum  cogitrici,  bonlne  an  mail  plus  attulerit^'*  hominibu^f  eloquentioe 
Ptiuliuin.  lb.  Iiiv.  1,  1.—  18  Nunc,  quoniam  qnibus  rebus  adductns»»  ad  causam  acces- 
se/i/n*^  clei/ion.sfr~iri,i\\ceiu\'.m\  estde  conteniione*'  nostril.  11).  I'iv.  C»s.  3.—  111.  Credo 
e-'o  vos  audlise  quemadmodum  privsidia  IJomana  ab  Siculis  nrctnnrmta*^  et  oppressa 
dnt*^  per  hOs  dies.  Liv.  24,  38.—  20.  Initium  qnod'^  buic  cum  niatre ///f;t^  audi.^(i.f. 
Cic  CIu  6  17  —  21  Nulla  est  gens  ex  quil  nobis  intei'dictum  sit  ut  ne  quern  asciscere  {to 
rec'eire)  civeiii  {as  a  citizen)  jw^smim.  lb.  Ualb.  13,  30.—  22.  Krplonitvm  eH*^  omnibus 
quo  l()co<«  causa  tua  nt.  lb.  Verr.  2,  5.  <)3.— 23.  Ad  eamne  rem  vos  0"(i>ces)  dettcti 
estU  nt  eos  cond'jnnarTtl-^  quos  slcarii"  juL'ulare*»  non  iiotuissent  'i  lb.  Hose.  Am.  52.— 
24  Iccirco  in  banc  urbem  r<^//2.«/i  nt  hujus  urbis  jura  ro/v/z/z/yMms  domesticflque'»*'  im- 
nuiniiate  no^me  civitiltis  humanitjltem  inquinare^^^  f  lb.  Dej.  12,  32.  -2.\  In  omnibus  ee- 
culls  pauciores  viri  repertinint  qui  suas  cupiditates*  quam  qui  imstium  cr)pias  rincerent. 
lb  Fam.  15  4  15.-20.  Jnrenti  niut  multi  qui  non  modo  pecuniam.  ^ed  vitam  etiam  pro 
patritl  profimdere-'ii  parilti  esS'-nt.  lb.  OlT.  1.  24.-27.  Solus  tu  iinentiix  f-xcui  non  satis 
fuerit  corn'^en-^'-  testamenta  vivOium  nisi  etiam  resrinderessa  niortunrum.  lb.  ^  err. 
2.  1  43.—  28.  Ecquis  e.<  inventus  postca  prietor  qui  idem  illud  Htiard^*  f  lb.  ib.— 
29  Nequc  in  quadrTicis^^  eum  secundum  nmnfraiufim^^  aut  tertium  qui  vix  e  carccri- 
bns"  €xie7-it  quum  palmam""  jam  primus  acceperit.  Ib.  Brut.  47,  173.-  30.  Nc  inj^enio 
quidem  qui  pr(Kstit<nt  facile  diitrim  C.  ri>r)ni.  Ib.  Brut.  78,  272.—  31.  Id  ita/(/« 
notum  omnibus  ut  nemo  tam  rusticus^"  liomo  Ijumam  roneiit'^'^  quiii  sciret  ]\\n\*^  om^ 

""MJanTuius  was  elected  consul  in  place  of  his  predecessor  a  few  hours  before  the  con- 
sular term  closid.--  -  what  was  the  reason  that.—  3  eince,  considerim,'  that.—  ^ factrem 
orfecUsem.  would  represent  the  clause  as  temporal.— ^^  addressed  me.—  ^  since.-  ^  n<t<tt, 
and  ol}serratum  esset  would  nmke  the  clause  dependent  on  the  time  of  pos-^erunt,  repre- 
sentin-'  it  as  (piasi-suboblique,  and  as  conceived  by  the  tribunes.— *»  parajrraph.- >»  to 
iiiirodiice  —  ^^  the  Inllowint,'.—  "  not  such  crimes  have  been  committe<|.  —  ^'^  without  a 
formidable  (exemplary)  reparation.—  i^  to  expiate.—  '*  it  behooves.— "^ you  have  heard. 

—  1«  position.—  17  bv'many  cases  of  war.  i.  e.  i)y  a  j^cat  experience  in  war.—  i"'  it  is  ad- 
vi-iable  to  tb^lit.— '"  the  purpose  for  which  we  have  them  (according' to  /i?«m.  85.  Ob*.8. />). 
_2o  f-it<\—-'^ p(fiiifet  iw..  I  am  dissatisfied.—-'^  either  "your  kindness,'  or  'your  energy'. 

—  '-^3  clianire  actively  :  has  caused  it  -  is  the  cause.—  •*  in  both  descriptions  of  (leiial) 
actions —  ^^  the  i)iiiic!ples  which.— '■'«  Plato  wrote  (has  written)  the  golden  words.— 
37  larpi  Quale.<,  of  the  same  quality  as.—  '^'>  you  have  obtaiNtd  it,  i.  ^.  you  iire  in  a  t«itua- 
tiou.—  '-»  vou  need  not  lie  aiiaid.— ^"  has  left  (being  still  absent).—  3»  hold  (against  Caj- 
e.,f)  —32  'I'he  imp   subj   /w.sw/!  represents  the  action  as  coincident  with  the  preterite  rellr 
quit,  and  not  witli  the  present  contained  in  it  by  implication.— 33  to  fail.—»*  language.— 
35  _  jiQfi  q„od  —  38  facts.—  3^  I  have  practised,  i.  e.  dealt  in.     F^ercuerim  would  remain 
a  preterite   even  if  aedidi  were  changed  into  a  present.—  3f  has  been  conducive  to. 
The  action  was  past  at  the  time  of  '  thinking '.—  3»  See  li.  85,  Obs.  8,  (f).-  '•«'  I  have  be- 
come connected  with  this  case  (preceding  the  '  d^mor.strdre  ').—  *^  about  the  que.-tious  at 
i-.8U<-  between  us.—  •»-  have  been  cut  ott".—  '•3  to  destroy.—  **  the  rel.itions  a»»  they  were 
in  the  be'Tiniiiii"'  between  him  and  his  mother.—  *'">  it  is  getjled  in  the  minds  ol  all.— 
«<«  sia<'e  (of  the  trial).— *'  cutthroat.— -"Mo  slay.— ■«9  by  the  enormities  practised  m 
your  native  C(mntry.— so  to  soil.—  "  to  shed.—  ^'^  to  correct,  i.  e.  to  falsify.-  "  get  aside 
(£  e  by  an  nnjur-t  judicial  decision).—**  literally  :  vho  '  edicted'  that  same  thing,  i.  f.  '  who 
admitted  rules  like  this  in  his  edict'.—  '^  race  with  the  quadilr/a  (four-horse  chariot).— 
6«  to  reckon.-  ^^  the  starting  point  in  a  race.—  *»  the  prize  (>take).—  *»  rustic,  t.  e.  in- 
experienced in  citv-life.—  «<>  this  periect  subjunctive  is  nec«'ssary  on  account  ol  the  pe 
culiar  relation  of  the  Ut-clause.  See  li.  95,  Ob3.  «,  B.—  «» judicial  acta. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


433 


nia  pra?loriP  nntn»  ChelidOnis  gubernilri.  Ib.  Vorr.  2,  5  13.-  32.  A  ideSmus  quanta 
Ita  pecunia///m/ qua;  y>o/^/m<  Hejum  ab  humanitate,  ab  religirme  deducere-.  Ib.  2, 
4  (1-33  Vstat  ut  hoc  dubitCmus  uter  potius  Sex.  Roscium  oc«(/^n^  is  qui  ardens 
a'vaiitia  hratur  infestusS  in  suos.  an  is  qui  semper  ita  r^xent  ut  quai.5tum*  no.*.vt/,  nul- 
lum lb  Hose.  Am.  31,  88.-  ai.  Si  in  secundis  rebus*  bonam  quoque  mentem  darent 
non  ea  solum  qme  (venis^ent,  sed  etiam  ea  qure  cvenire  ix>.wn<  reputaremus^.  Liv 
i  30  -^  8i  asp  rius'  in  quosdam  homines  invehi  vellem.  quis  non  con cederet  uti^o^ 
quoruni  ;cclerum'fu.Ore«  xiMus esmn,  vocis  \\h^n^xcUyerstnngerem^^  f  Cic  Sest.  0  14. 

-  30  Aunim  et  arg<-ntum,  a^s,  ferrum,  Irustraii  nattira  ?enuisset  ^  n.si  eadem  docu^ 
isset  quemadmodum'3  ad  eHrum  wnn^^'^  peiremretur.  Ib.  Div.  1,  .51,  lib  —  3«._^"« 
vitafuisset  Priamo  si  ab  adolescentiji  .*d,*w<  quoseventusi*  senectutis  m€«  haMuruoJ 
lb  2  <1  22.-38.  Hoc  quum  viderent,  illud  quidem  non  <??/a7-«A-;?fcui  hono^ ^  fmsset. 
Ib"  liosc  Am.  31.  86.-  39.  Hoc  scribere,  pra^«ertim  quum  dc  philosophia  c^mft^m/i, 

Znu'utT^m.  nisi  idem  placCret  Pametio  !''•  <^ff- V^"^ ^n^'T^V^s'^t'^i  '  40' 
Or  .38  132-  Ball)  14  33-  Fam.  13,  1.5;  Plane.  4,  9  ;  Pis.  29,  71 ;  Or.  2,  21,  89J.— 4U. 
Qu'o'nam  modo audifl-tur  Slysus^^  aut  Phryxi»  Athenis  qutim  *:"am  Demost^henes^jm^t- 
ref>n--^o  ,it  putidus?  Cic.  Or.  8,  27.-  41.  Nee  de  PerMO  reticaisset^'  Gracchus  quum  ei 
Fannius  de  Menelilo  Maratheno  ohjecimV^'^  \  pr^senim  quum23  Fannius  numquara 
fit  haMtu.^'i*  elinirnis".  jb.  Brut.  20,  100.-  42.  Memorare;)0.-^.-^^?n  quibus  in  locis  maxi- 
n.ashostium  copias  populus  RomSnus  parvS  nia"l>",-/>{'^!r^f  ^  ^"^^"^'*S,"]";^^^ 
Cfn€}it  ni29  ea  res  loii"ius  nos  ab  incepto  traheret3o.  gall.  Cat.  7.  7.—  43.  Galli  bberos 
eiios.  iiisi3i  quum  {\t&)^adolevtrunt^-^  nt  munus  militiae  suttineresa  pomnt,  palams*  ad 
se  adlre3s  non  patiuniur.  Cres.  B.  G.  6,  18. 

Jiejn.  9.J.  The  predicates  of  modal  clauses  introduced  by  the  con- 
jniictions  >ft{nti,  vt  non)  and  qutn,  or  by  equivalent  relative  adjectives 
(OiJS.  9),  IVeqiiently  take  logical  tenses  even  if  their  governing  predicate 
is  a  preterite,  since  modal  relations  of  a  predicate  of  a  past  action  are 
often  described  eilher  by  their  ;>m^72<  effects,  or  by  ettects  in  no  connec- 
tion with  the  time  of  the  principal  predicate  : 
A.  Logical  tenses,  in  such  predicates,  viust  be  used  :  ,      ,  .  ,    . 

1  if  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  a  '  kecessaky  perfect  ,  which  is 
the'case  if  the  past  tiction  expressed  by  it  couiams  a  present  action  by  im- 
plication according  to  R  94,  Obs.  3  (See  Obs.  4) ;  2.  if  the  predicale  is  a 
'necessvuy  IMPERFECT  ',  i.  €.  if  ihc  action  is  such  that,  according  to  the 
o-eneral  rules  ^  573  loll.,  it  would  be  in  the  imperfect  if  in  the  indicative 
ffor  insttvnce  it  it  expresses  a  state,  a  ctnitinued  or  repeated  action,  habit 
etc  determined  bv  tlie  time  of  the  principal  action).  In  this  instance 
the  dependent  subjunctive  is  ahvtivs  in  the  imperfect;  but  such  imper- 
fects are  logical  tenses,  although  agreeing  with  the  law  ot  consecution 

^^  ]y!*  Logical  tenses  are  generally  used  if  the  predicate  of  the  clause  de- 

1  Hint  -  2  avert.-  a  infestum  ferri,  =  sa^vlre.  to  act  fiendishly  against  one's  own  - 

*  Jnnos^^  auii^tum   to  be  unacquainted  with  the  art  of  making  money,  or'  not  to  care 

to  n  ak^m.  nev  ■  -^   n  prosi,eri  v.-  «  to  consider,  to  take  into  account.-  ''aspejtus  in- 

S/     to  I  -ea    ratl'.er  roi"glily,  to  handle  without  mercy.-  «  by  the  madness  of  whose  mis- 

ifeds  instead  of  'by  ^^4lo^e  insane  misdeeds;.-  «  -^responding  to  '^^^^^^^^^^^ 

in>tead  of  'voce  lifjenT,  in  free  (i.  ^.  plain)  ^^P/^"'-!^'--/"  J^  "^^,"  iJVav' o  come^^ 
create  to  make.-  i3  quanadmoduni. .  .perveniretur  how  to  come,  or  the  ;^f>  J^»  ^^  P^ 
flccordii"  to  7.'  85  S  1-'»  veins.- i^  vicissitudes  of  his  old  age.-i\abstract  dative 
a>  83  "  o  whom  it  was  for  a  good  '  i.  e.  who  profited  by  it.-  >«  a  Mysian,  t.  e.  orator. 
-1^  a  PhryS  _  20  exagitWo^ut  pvtidns.  is  criticised  as  •  rotten ',  i  e.  is  obnox  ous  to 
theirJascs.-»»  would  have  withheld  his  opinion  as  to  Per.«.ius  s  authorship  (ot  a  cei^ 
afn  oraticm).-'^^  had  criticised  him  in  regard  to  Menelaus  o  Mamthus.- -3  the  m^^^^^^ 
•i>  ( understand  •  'This  an^ument  is  the  more  conclusive  because  etc  .)—  ine  piupei 
SctSi/reU^r  represent  the  clause  as  temporal,  like/ (?r/?/m     .    oft^ea^^i» 

-  af  er  he  had  been  held).-  "  speechless,  without  language  =  -as  unable  to  make  a 
In'^ecli'  -  2«  witl  a  small  force.-  «7  to  rout.-  ^»  uih^  uvjrnta,  lar-e  fortress.--»  =  nisi. 

-  30  would  lead  us  too  far.-  '^  except.-  32  addescere.  to  grow  to  maturity.-  ^3  mvnm 
v>intM^^tl^^t^^Lc  military  service.-  3*  in  public-  =*  to  approach  them,  to  bo 
in  their  coinpanv. 


4' 


^  t 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


notes  anactU-n  happonins  .t   the  •'^-''-'V.''"V,?,;^'u'rei;Tmforthe 

''TLoJic'l^— 'are  ne.er  used  if  the  clause  is  represented  as  .leter- 
nninPtl  iw  the  jictioii  of  tlie  subject  (Obs.  12)  . 


dicate  ...iM^/- r.lVr.  to  the  ^\^^-'^^''l^,}''''';;.^^^^^^^^^  clauses  the  im- 

the^e  instances  Kiihner  tjives  no  i\»l^*-- ^^^"'Vf.r^mtiwiil.    h    timeof  the  niiiin  aciion 
'^rfect  i.  used  if  the  result  i«  oot.s.den.d  :is  conK^^  en^u  .     t  r  ^  ^^^^^,^  .^ 


curriir^  «r/w  .     v-j«v.  ^^-.  -  ,       - --       ...,„„»,•,.,,  ,i,,i  f.w-r   itself  i'^  to  De  oroiiiiin  wul   ^^j 
'If  iulii:^ioric(i.6.    in    preterite)  'y''''']'^'^}'''}^^]';^^^^^^  luimiseri  erar.t 

dis,lnc:ly,  then  the  perfect  -^^'^^'l^f})"-^':^^^^^^^  they  w.rem 

plied  by  quoting  other  grammarians)  Madvig  s  rule  alone  is  re^po^slD^o. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


435 


OBS.  2.  All  the  modal  Cause,  may  be  imjiovted  in  tl.e  V^^^^-^^^^^^"^ 
denmnstnitive  (deliuite,  ^S'^'-^V^Y^.^^on  aimer  ami   coinci^^  ^^^^e  the  ante- 

TECEDKNTS  of  the  chuise '.  Vi,.,%i  V  a.^  preceded  by  tarn,  adeo.  vxqm  eo,  tta.  and 
cedents  Ac  and  ita  ;  clauses  of  »i^»^'"*;^>  ^'^^I'J' .  «'al  clauses  by  eo,  iccirco.  or  eqiuva- 
S-  cons.cmive  clauses  ^'X  i'<^  «/.<^' ^?' ""l.^^^'^^.c  >  S^e  form-adverbs  are  of.en 
len't  at  libuuve  phrases  ('^  ^''■^^^^«;.,^;f,;'^^^,^:''ad  ectives^^^^^^^^^^^  ll  manner 

mer-ed  in  the  qualitative  and  (iiiantitaiiN  e  *«"  ™JV^"^^^^^^  talis)  are  used  as  aniece- 
rfrepresente.!  t  a  ^  quality ',  ^^^^^;'^^;^-^^^^"^^  are  ur.d.r.tood.  most  .'en- 
dents  or  Ut-elanses.  ^^  '•^■^M«"^y/\\';  "'^'kV;  fi^  of  nianner  and  coincident 
erallv  in  consecutive,  antl  nnal  ^--la  u,es  ^"^  'f  ^"^  'J^V^^^,  impeudebat  t// perpauci  pro- 
ac.i.m,  rarely  in  clauses  of  inters. t,-,  a_.  •  ^^J«  .^^^^^  etc.)  ;  A  very  high  n.ounmm 
hi  here  posxtiU  (coNSKci'TiVE  <^^At.sh  -^«  /«Jf  ^^^  ^  ^^  ^  ^-^-u 
ua-  in  \\v'  way.  so  (hat  a  very  small  f^'cc  to  i   I  a  itnu  i       P  Ut-clau^e,  which 

a,  tecedents  may  «1=^-  ^-  P»='^^'^\*";',r:r;iu  ir      ipa    m^  'YW^^-r^  '^^''^'''' ,^''Z 

m  alm.>st  all  '"Stances  is  placed  «(/ertpriiupa^^^^^^^  consecutive  clause.  «c/;-0  vr 
runt  adtout  nemo  in  urbe  e.s>t<.(Ui  ^^^'J^  1^'^fV  V/.'-^^'*  ,  .  n^iie  flute-plavera  wandered 
\  I!  ;fr,Z<o factum  eM  ut,  or  =:  iaq^'e  with  an  /''^  ^  !i;;«  the  sacred  u  u-ic.  Liv.  9.  30. 
^^.r  r^:i:..y ..,.  fi.^.f  fh^vfi  irnfi  nobody  in  town  to  peitorm  i''«  K','^  ..^_ ,  ,  ,,  . ..  ^. , ,,.  .  y^' ; 


...     V=  rjuo  factum  e.t  ut,  or  =:  ztarf>e  w  it    an   nu  ..      .  f„-,,,red  u' u-'.c.  Liv.  9.  30. 

oni  to  Tibur.  .0  t/uU  there  '^'V     :ri\endered  w  '  1  /o'rfer '  followed  by  '  i 
Mie.an.eceden.s  in  1  nal  c  ausesare  u        r.d  ^y  .^  ,„^  antecedents^ 


"^I'j;:  .;:eceJen(s  i;;;;;:ai  clauses  «re  rencu.^^^  i^T-;fa;;S"hJ  a;:;:;;Se;fts'w^^.hp'e^ 

sometimes  by  '.o  that  \    In  the  o  her    '  ;'^^].,^.;^^(^';\' •';;,,^/,  a  wanner',  'in  .^«c/i  ade- 
pressed  or  understood   are  r^'^^f/i"^;,  ^  ,  f,,,*:^  .° hav^  same  subject,  by  'o>-  to^: 

gree  ,  followed  by  W /«/ \  or    if  b.  th  propc.sit  m^^  ,noril)Us  (a  clause  of 

h  qi.enliai/aperegrinata  tc.ta  AsuT  est  ^'    ^c^xu^  ^^^^   .^^  circuit  throug^i 

'coincident  action'    =    'se  c^^Vt  .if  arc.  rdhfc^to    he  lorei-n  manners.  Cic   Brut.  13, 
the  whole  of  Asia  -^'O  «•'«^  ^^  f/'^^L  n^  to  ?4c^^^^^^  in  English  (tnost  frequent  y 

51._  Frequently  however  it  >^  b^'^^y,  ;' '^^.f^H  Scs    as  :  In  castris  P<.mpeji  videri  li- 
?  uiscs  ol  coincident  aciion    and  y,''^'^']}'}.^^^^^^^^^  de  eventu  ejus  diS.  timu- 

•  lit  irichllas  structas  etc..  vt  /«<^\^f^Jj;  !''  '^' ^Spo  might  be  8eeu  costly  cot- 

is.e  (a  consecutive  clause,  w=lei^^cc)li    lonp^^^^^^       to  the  issue  of  that  day.  Cies. 
tages  etc.,  «;^icA  r70^.<  ^o^7/p/r  that  the>  had  n^^  patria  ,ue  expnlsos  om- 

hC.3,9»i.-(Ei  qui  pecunias  impenlbai.t)  diet   .Uva  ii  u,pi.,imam  tegerent  (a 

nibns  neces'ari.i  rebus  c.gere     ut  bonest:!    px^  ipU^^^^^  j,,  n,ouey  stated 

cl-iiUe  ot  c.incident  action  =  ter/ente.,):   IIiom   ^)  ;;>;';:  "^       \       ^  ..f  ,ue  necessaries  of 
?  a     be  in-  banished  from  their  own  coiU''r>    t     }  wcr.  i.   w.  ^^^^  ^,^^^   j^  ^,  g^ 

re  V/  ;i  usinr,  an  odicial  ^^^'''''^TZ^u^l^d^^  ^^^^^^  prima  ejus  imago  pone- 
30  I-Mtltiadi  /<//i.N- honor  tribQ  us  e^t  <!'"''  \  ."-"'' Miiiules  coiMtd  in  placvnj  his  image 
rntnr  la  clause  ol  maunerj;  The  honor  shou  n  .".f  "'\ '^p^"".,!  _F,equently  clauses  of 
fb-t  in  the  picture  of  the  battle.  >ep.  M'b.  (.  •  .  ^  *;  f;^^;;  ^  ,.  ^nd  ire  tlu-n  in  Euirlish 
oMucldent  aJIion  l>«-c^.^"tly  CM.n^nn  an  ach  j.^  m^^^  ,,    uul  nisi  de  rei- 

introduce.l  by  ^b;t  so  that  ^,  or    ^v     le   ^^J^^l^t^  that  (or  'while')  he  thought  of 
imblicie  pernicie  cog  it  a  ret ;  Antonlu^  r\  ;^7,V. 'pun  4  .> 

Nothing  iut  the  destruction  ol  the  '-.^^^''^^'^^-^^'^.X^  of  preterite  consecution, 

0ns.  3.  In  model  Ut-clanses  the  ^«j^'^^r^^^^^^^^^  never  denote  an  ac- 

the  piuperlect  beinu'  excl.ided  '>y  jbe  "f  "^  .  ^^  ^  ^le  pluperlect  subjunctive  is  used 

on  an  erior  to  the  principal  predicate.     }.«  \y  ['^J^'^  tint  of  its  governing  predicate,  if 
m     al  Ut-clauses,'^denoting  a  time  ^/"^"(f '^   '\  1^  1  ep  'ndi-nt  on  another  principal 
tn    Ser  is  likewise  a  pluperfect  ^"bju'-cin   .  b  nn^^  <'^^ 

'  edicate  :  Attiens.  quum  tanttl  l'r'>^l  c»*'  '^^r.;,  '''l^^^^,  _Veriphrastic  imiierfects,  whicli 

cla  "■'.    Thl   otanation  of)  l,i.toncal  orcl.T  ^}f"\^"'^S'L'%S^.  Paullus  t<,„l«m 
h  ;  .  ™y  ■.   VAMn^»  I'a"""'  I'l-'fiO  -y.  '«,';f' "  '  cTc  Ofl  2  2-"  [.he  f.ato  of  '  mimnn.iy 


436 


USE   OF  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


rot  he  expressed  by  '  aferref  \1  See  Ex.  1-4.-  Here  helon-  actions  represctited  as  hav- 
r,?.5  ah 'n^  or  uVJv  hafpened  ip  to  the  speaker's  time,  a.  :  Ta..t.nn  -^"p/!  ^  "eVJiJ 
munguain  ..ari  pev\cyi]o  fmnf  rartluU'.)  ;  So  -rcat  a  war  whs  kindUd  ^^'a^<-ar'''•'-^y"f 
never  6  e/i  in  mu  equal  ilau-:er.  Nei>-  ":»""•  4.  3.  ^ce  Ex.  5-7.-  If  thr  pm  npal  pndi- 
?a  l^f  a  noda/ul^latise  is  a  perfect  inchulin^  a  pre>ent  by  ^V^^^;^Yn'^V"'liff^l 
the  nrc'duate  of  tlic  ehiuse  is  determined  by  i\n-  nik-s  Hem.  \)i.  Ous  -.2.  foil.,  being  fiM^r 
anre'^i  ^o  ■  imperlect  if  represented  a^  happenin-  at  the  speaker's  time,  and  a  j>eijecf, 
fr  renrein  e  T  re-ard  t.)  the  speaker's  time,  as  :   Tanfa  Hiperstilio  mentis  om- 

'nhn  Si?ulOrumC/j5ar./.  qua.cnnlp.e  acriaa.t  i.x-ommo.ia,  I''^  sS'lianriha? 
evenlrc  videanfar  ;  ISo  great  a  sni.^rstition /mY^a^^f/ the  nunds  o  he  ^'^'\«  ;  '''«^^ 
whatever  misfortune  occurs.  >^eevxs  (to  tlu-m)  to  happen  In.m  that  <:»1!^  "•  ^,  f;  )  \'\' t.)\ 
51  —  Eauideni  »\c  jam  ftbdnrui  ut  animo  it-quissimo  axdlitm  Lab.Tii  poemata,  1  nate 
Vin^ixS^^becoZlo^  I  A^ar  Labenu«'8  poems  with  the  {,'reatL.st  equanimity. 

Cic.  Fam.  12,  18,  •->.    (Ex.  8-11.)  , 

Or«  5  The  immrfecl  subjunctive  Is  nsed  in  all  the  modal  Ut-clanscs  as  a  lor/icaf  tense, 
if  Vhe'predicate  denotes  habit,  or  any  of  those  actions  which  woijld  require  an  n'M»  r  «ct 
f  they  were  in  the  vuiicadve.  The  use  of  a  peiffct  m  Mich  i.ivdi-ales  woi  Id  l>e  f  n  X, 
because  the  perfect,  in  this  instance,  would  be  ,nif/,er  a  lo-.cal  tins.-,  //w-  a  tense  »y  con- 
«ecu  ion  :  Oratio  itu  libcre  lluCluit  id  i.usquam  ad/uire.-'Ctret  (iniperf.  ol  habit)  ;  HiS  lai- 
im.'e  as  so  fluent,  (hat  it  .topped  at  no  point.  Cic.  Brut  71.,  274  -  Fossain  P^'fi"'"  v  • 
Sii  ,1  diR^ciis  lat.Tibus  duxit,  ut  (jus  fossa'  solum  tantuindem  j^aferei  quantmn  su ii  niuj 
n  sie  lahra  distSrent  (imperf.  of  statk)  :  lie  built  a  cana  tweui  v  tcet  deep  w  1 1 .  perpen- 
dicular sides,  «^>  <//«<  its  bottom  /ntd  the  ^mm-.  nuas>,re  in  nidth  as  the  dis  ance  ol  he 
e  h'es  at  t  le  top  Csps.  B.  G.  7,  11.  By  examinin-  tlie  tens.-  (»f  mod.d  I  t-clauses  in  ihe 
different  passa-'es  of  classical  auth(.rs,  it  will  appear  that  amoni,'ih.-  lu.perfecl  subjunc- 
tives used  in  them,  «  large  uiajority  fall  under  this  rule.—  See  Ex.  U-Ij. 

Obs  ♦;    If  the  predicate  of  the  Ut-clause  is  represented  as  happeiiins  at  the  time  of 
the  sneaker,  it  is  placed  eWier  in  the  present,  en-  in  the  imperlect,  but  more  usually  in  the 
former  tense,  as:    Curio  multa  dixit  et  illustria,  ut  eum  imnr  coiiMilem  non  «»>''^«, 
Curio  SDoke  in  many  ea-es.  and  his  speeches  were  celel)ruted.  m  that  I  WimcUr  he  had 
not  Wn  consul.  [Conskclt.vk  clause.]  Cic.  Brur.  .3->,  124.-  Trajrinus  venip.ib  .cam  i  a 
administravit  w<  omnibus  pnncipibus  merito  ;>m:/(n</vr ;   '1  rajanus  admlnl^tered  the 
State  in  such  a  manner  thai  he  is  justly  preferred  to  ail  emperors.  [C  i.aise  of  manneu.J 
Eiitr  8  2  —  Themistocles  adto  erudltus  est  liiteris  PersSrum,  nt  multo  commoduis  dita- 
iur  apud  "re-em  verb,  fecis-e  quam  hi  (pii  in  Per-ide  erant  nati ;  Themistocles  was  m 
proficient  iirPer^au  literature,  that  he  is  mid  to  have  more  fliiently  addressed  the  kinff 
than  those  who  were  born  in  Persia.  [Clause  of  intensity.]   N.  p.  I  hem.  10,  1.— >ee 
Ex   1».-18      But  :  llorum  oratOrun.  tarda  multitQdo  fuit.  tanta  laus,  ut  quum  suriima 
in'irarCmur,  inferiora  lamen  p/vfHirem,>ts  :  These  orators  were  so  many,  and  so  excellent, 
that  while  admiring  th.^  best,  we  i/^t  approve  of  the  inferior  [both  vriraremur,  imil  pro- 
buremus,  are  present  acts  of  the  speaker,  and  would  be  presents  if  m  an  ind<'pcndent  ^en- 
teiice]    Cic.  Or.  2,  5.—  Keddita  est  ei  tum  a  majoribus  statua  pro  vitil,  (jinv  (  =  vt  ea) 
nunc  ad  tantie  familiie  memoriam  sola  rest  a  re  t ;  A  statue  was  then  encted  to  him   in- 
cur ancestors,  ill  return  f..r  his  life,  which  statue  (so  that  it)  is  now  alone  left  as  memorial  lor 
pueh  a  family.     Cic.  Phil.  5).  2,  5.-  (^ui  plusopibus,  armis.  potentiil  valent.  ;;7v//^ci,sw  niihi 
<«/<<?/m  videiiturstultiiiriadversarioriim  ut  eiiam  auctoritilte  jam  plus  r«/^/v«;  ;   ^'^''/^] 
who  prevail  by  wealth,  bv  their  arms,  and  power,  seem  to  hare  Inen  so  much  (tenentea 
by  the  folly  ot  their  adversaries  that  they  a/e  now  prevailing  even  by  authority.    Cic. 
Fam.  1,  7,  10.  See  Ex.  19-21. 

Obs  7    Aside  from  the  instances  mentioned  Obs.  4-fi.  the  perfect  subjunctive  often 
occurs  in  modal  Ut-clauses  in  place  of  an  imperfect,  but  it  is  impossible  t<»  reduce  this 
usa-'e  to  a  ^'eneral  rule,  all  the  attempts  of  the  fjrammaiians  to  esrabhsh  such  a  priiici- 
uieliavin.'  i)ioved  futile.    MadvigV  rule  (see  foot-note  p.  4:^4),  accordmj,'  to  which  the 
predicate  of  modal  Ut-clauses  is  in  the  iterfect,  and  not  iii  the-imperfect  subjunctive  il 
b€.-<ides  its  reference  to  the  principal  predicate,  it  is  also  iei)ie>enied  as  a  distaut  historical 
fact   is  not  warranted  by  the  usa}.'e  of  the  Latin  authors,  aside  fnmi  the  impossil)ilnv  ot 
maidn"  the  'disnnctness'  or  'non-distinctness'  ot  an  liistorical  fact  available  as  a  crite- 
rion   Madvi"-'s  chief  pas-^age  by  which  he  means  to  prove  his  rule  (Cic.  Oil*.  2,  22.  quoted 
Obs  4)  requFres  the  perfect  for  a  reason  very  dillereut  Irom  that  which  he  has  proposed 
(see  Obs.  4),  aud  the  same  is  the  case  with  hi-  other  passages  (Cic.  Wrr.  2.  5,  10  :  ami  t  in. 
2  20    See  Obs.  8).   There  are  a  large  nuinl.er  of  pas^ages  iu  which  tlic  imperject  is  used 
in  an  Ui-clause,  although  the  fact  stated  in  it  is  not  «uily  a  Wlistinct'  hisioiual  fact Dut 
even  the  7n«2Vi'action,  so  that  the  principal  sentence  may  be  altogether  omitted  wit  h<>ul  utlect- 
in"  the  sense  ;  and  on  the  other  hand  there  are  j)ass«ges  wi I h;><?/tr^  subjunctives,  coutain- 
in' facts  without  fl«y  historical  value,  only  serving  to  illusiratea  higli  degree  ol  the  prin- 
cipal aciiou:  [Lmpeufects  containing  the  main  fact,  so  that  the  principal  predicate  may  bo 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


437 


omitted.;Tantafuitomniumexpecta.iov;sendiAld 
Jiueret.  N^-p.  Alc.7, 11  (  =  \N  hen  Ale  b  a  esar m^ 

,hip  to  receive  hinO.-A/U'O  \':^9 ;V^'^'''}^^^'^''^^^^^^  an  opportunity, 

navv<  rdigvas  subd<lci>-treficij'ibc,et.  <^;y^- ^; J^; 'J' rf/ r^"'*  i^e^d  on  shore  etc).-  L.  Gel- 
he  sent  a  rae-sa-e  to  Pompey  to  ^''1}'' l^l^''))''^}^^^^^  =  L.  Gellius"  belonged 
bus  ita  diu  vixit  vt  ^nidtarunv^at,m  ^;f  ^rfl^^^^'^^ea  tes  subita  fuit  ut  prius  Anie- 
t<.  several  rhetoricd  period^.  C  c.  l^!"^- •{',  i '^-  f;,'  ".  uv  i  30  (where  the  passage 
nem  trauslrent  hostesqwam  oinmn  ^^i/^X^"'  f.  ^.^^^  only  the  logical 
over  the  Anio  is  evident  y  tl''"  n^a.n  fact,  the  p  n  a                        ie.reh>f  the  principal 

tesilnun'i  bellum  ut  rnmu,uam  ll^'ri  jm-iculo  {^^^^^^^^'1'^^^^  de^^^sit T^  qui  eJf.rrUuT, 
dangerous  civil  war  arose).- Aristldes  in  ^'    '^  P;VVhV  ™^^^^^ 

vixrdiqverit.  Nep.  Arist.  3_,  2  {  =  ^^'t^^f^^'^'t'l^^^^^^  (  =  ^^""^ 

,  z.^_..    r..;t  »,/  ,.^»>,y. /.  /^,„r,r>itn  musa  steterit  consiannus.  »^ic.  iJim.  T'.  "''^^.  .  .     r  _i 


r. 


tr'il.anu.  Iml'ul  nemo  a  '^''.^"''!},<;^"%'J;Jflf':i^^^^^  historical 

ferrn7pSS'ia'r^cr;«°iii-.c\rro\t 

T         f  cts  Perfects 

dentesin  bostem.  Li\.  y,  do.  G   '^  "^1 

niusCrassus.  juris  peritOrum  eloquentissi-     appellatus.  >ep.  Aii^t.  1,  2. 
Clauses   where  ut  has  the  force  of  itaque  or  of  ^  quo  J^l^^^Z^^^cl'wV^^ 


pa 
cry 


'''''f;,r«  .^rvi^dbat  hibc'^.L  me.^ftus''»*  cui.  «on  facile  extra  tectum  quisquam  m- 


438 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIYE. 


bUv  ji  nprfort  Pnhinnclive  occnr?  in  place  of  the  rcp^iilnr  imperfect  Pnbjniictive,  it  gener- 
al iTvb^-lon^^^S^^^^^^  P^-ra-ot^  '  ^Obs.  4),  or  to  tho.e  winch,  acronling  to 
No^  C  are  usei  fn  m  p^.    icular  rea/ons.    But  .on.etim...  thouir.h  rardy,  perfect^occur 
h.  Juch  chu".eswith«,.ft  any  as.iumahle  rean.n   a.  :  ^>/nre.ja  jnaxMnm  uH^^^^^^ 
Bisiii»;  iit  hie  mnltiis  res  tt  mai:nas  s^me  nnperature  qesstnt,  iiullam  ^lnt  noc  imperauH  , 
>tu  CI      Live   S  a  r.port  of  lum^elf  in 'one  of  tlie  srnate.t  wars,  ihat  XM^verjanmd 
manvt^^^uV'rearltJwitLut  hi.  chi.-f,  (whil.)  the  chief  did  nothmi:  wuhout  hnn    C  c. 
Mur    9  20*  -  Sometii ncs  clause»»  of  intkns^ity  take  the  aniecedeni..  properly  belon- 
hi    to  the  cianSTf  MANNEK.in  which  instance  the.;;.r/.r^  is  used  in  the  -«n;.«;vay  a.  if 
tu'vtudtiuirpn.prr  antecedents,  as:  Hannibal  odiuni  miversn8Hc>mnnos«c(t^^^ 
coZtanlia^  coilservSvit  vt  prius  anirnatn  quatn  id  ^^i^^^;^^^  ^f  la  \hL  h  rce-of\an- 
^talem  imperat^n-ern' xn  the  passa-e  >.p  A-es.  fi  1  <;i\''\\";'^,^?,^:  * Vl^,^,^"-      «  eubiunc- 
/«7/l  i;nw«?«^()mM  —  Often  the  antecedent  is  o/y^///e(/,  and  in  this  instance  luc  ^"'U"''^ 
t  ve  Tx^  V  rarelv  in  the  perfect,  as :  Cujus  advenius  Po.npejilnos  coniprcssit,  "o-'rc,->q"e 
fir, mivit   i/V«e  ex    ".xin/o  terrore  colliier^nt  (so  that  they  recovered  from  a  tornnda     e 
SS    C-"4  B  C  3.  05.-  D»miitiu8  aperte  aliscdvit  w/omnes  tidlrent ;  Domiims  ca.t  his 
vote  for  acnniital  openlv,  m  that  all  saw  it.  Cic.  (^n.  Fr.  3,  4,  1. 

7  In  tlanses  of  intensity  the  u«e  of  the  perfect  or  imperfect  is  optional  with  the 
wrft'eJ  **  iiU  iferfc^Ts  in  the  fullouinj^  instances,  are  more  Ir.quently  »^^1  «lan  mi- 
m  rfecU  •  If  the  rt-clause  has  the  value  of  an  independent  sentence,  and  the  princi- 
{  al  'A  ?enc  •  n^^^^^^  bv  a  CAfSAi.  claise.  or  by  an  adverbial  object  ol  c^use, 

ftf-^Tanlo  favT.re  ad  JnlVra-iuinferendum  in  tribus  discursum  est,  nt  tribQui  rcpente  m- 
ll^U^l'tUer^^^^  r.p.'.i'ed  with  s.»  mueli  satisfaetion  to  their  respecive 

Domn.^  Dlac^^^^^  their  votes,  that  the  tribunes  snd<lenly  chanrjed  their  tac- 

rl  Li?  S^  ^ae  The  tribune^  channel  .he  r  tactics  became  they  .aw  that  the  people 
ete--)-!  i'adeo  su.trbiiu  vi.nn.  e>t  llTunibali  vt  extemplo  tabenias  arjrentar.as  qu« 
c  rca  lor  nf  Hon  a"^ 

L  im  ned"ucd    )a  "  onters  to  sell  at  anction  the  banker's  stancfs  at  the  Roman  fomm 
Uv  T  1       lami    al  gave  orders  because  he  considered  this  as  i"V>U(UM.tj.     Here  be  on- 
e  D  :.  ,  rjs  Ue-   B  G.  2.  21 :  Nep.  Ham.  2,  3:  Liv.  2<}.  11 ;  quoted  Obs.  7.  See  Lx.  22.  2.i 
o    if    ,T  ,he  nrincipal  Sentence  a  quality  of  the  subject,  or  a  trait  ol  character  ^ 
;;tu  icit     e  r^t     ed   and  tl  e  Ut-clau>e  c...:tains  an  actual  laet  irom  which  the  intensity 
Ef  tlie  QU-  li  V  is  to    e  infenvd.  as  :  Octavius  tantnm  auctorita'e  ra'mt,  ui  Wisvm  Sempro- 

S!am  1?umSa,i!m;j;o,«...i/  /  Octavuis  l-^,-i--^^{  «"  jf  l^!,'!^ ^J^i^/?^^d 
(succeeded  in  repealiu-:)  the  iSeinpronian  corn-law.    Cic.  Brut,  bi.  Unit  abrogartt  >\ouia 

'd-?ret  •  auum  autem  ver  esse  ccpperat.  dabat  ge  itinerilni!»,  in  quibu?  <=«  trntne  se  pne>>ebat 
imn  .^ru.     S)  e    n    en.o  ni.qua,.!  in  e(,uo  sedentem  rhicrlt  ;  Verre-.  m  the  winter-mon  lis, 
vedl  "«/Vr« ;""  ^        that  hardly  any  one  mw  him  out  doors;  but  when  spnnfr  commenced 
le  an  )  ie    hnn  H^^^  in  which  he  sl.ow<-d  himself  to  such  a  //^-r/'*-^  active  //^« 

ro  <n  r.ver  ^^M'  him  li  lin-  on  horseback.-  In  the  tirst  clau/e  the  iniperlect  ivhrt 
fs  u"ed  bee  u  se  it  is  the  usual  tense  in  a  clause  of  manner  ;  u.  the  last  ,^'«»;:^;  '^  «  * 
tho- has  chan-ed  the  tense  int..  the  perfect  riderit.  ,,arily  because  it  is  a  clause  of  niten- 
iitv'  IMH  cSv  en.use  it  denotes  an  action  which  never  happened  (()B5.  4).  'I  herea-on 
bv  wS  M^lvi-  acc<m..ts  for  this  pe.fect  (that  it  contains  a  'distinct;  Inst.jncal  fact 
w^.ul  1  a  ply  ^^^  exac  Iv  the  same  stren-tli  to  the  tirst  clause,  in  which  the  imper  ect 
,/r)"  W  is  ui,l      The  s  may  be  said  of  his  additional  remark,  that  the  imperfec    ci- 

y?r  f  u";d  in  1  e  second  clause,  would  mean  '  habi.'.  From  this  remark  (wuch  is 
fhe  more  s  in?e  because  Mr.  Madvii:  confines  in  his  nUesabout  the  i.npe.rfect  le  lea 
of  hab  t  to  theTmperfect  indicative)  it  would  fi.llow  that  rideret  in  the  first  cljuise  does 
mean\u^\V^  n^^i  clMt  eSlentlv  does  not :  and  if  it  did  mc.in  habit,  riderxt  >u  the  second 
dause  would  likewise  mean  habit,  since  the  predicates  of  the  two  clauses  are  perfect.y 
filike  in  re<'.ird  to  the  nature  of  the  action.  ■,..,.      i 

*  S<  mriTnen  re  ers  have  ventured  the  opinion  that  the  perfect  is  n.ed  in   ^s  clause 
heca.  sTn  e  pr  neipal  sentence  contains  no  real  faet,  the  Ut-clause  alone  ^''^''^nnn-    he 
fact     f  the  sentence.     But  tliev  overhu.k  that  just  in  construcdons  of  tins  kind  (if  a  >eib 
o    do  n''i<  used  as  a  mere  irramman.al  form,  while  the  substance.of  the  af'i»'" .;^4'^: 
pre^sed  by  the  Lt-clan.e)  the  tense  of  the  clause  almost  invariably  is  the  imperfect,  bee 

**^Some  -rammarians  state  that '  som.^  historian?,  especially  Nep^s,  use  P'-rff^  ^"J;- 
innotives  iifeon-eeutive  clause't  where  the  imperfect  woiLO  be  moke  usual  (Ma(l\i|.M, 
Kl  Aa  en  ?  t  seems  to  be  made  only  for  the  sake  of  having  some.hin^y  ^o  accoun  c>r 
fho  nV-inv  na»8a^'es  which  Drove  the  unsoundness  of  Madviir  s  theory,  ^epos,  in  a  \ei  v 
iw  na"a^^-  T^ee  \o  /  ses  impn.per  perfects.  But  his  usa^e,  in  -eneral,  aL-rees  wilU 
IJilit  of  Uvv  krd  Ciei\r.  ^  This  a.uhor.  however,  employs  the  form  of  Modal  I /-elauses 
altogether  too  often  (in  the  average  about  three  times  ou  each  pa<;ej,  and  often  whtii 
other  writers  would  have  made  use  of  diflerent  forms. 


DErENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


439 


•   i-    „*jr./,4Viot  r»rtavin<?  had /Af/i  so  much  author- 
impart  a  different  force  to  th«  ^ent.nce  in hmatm  .     ^^^     ^j^,  ^, 

ity'as  to  re,>.al  that  '"^^. .^vhile  «6ro^a  -^^^^^^^^  j,,  ,,     ut-clause  cWs  not 

qen^ral  qu  iliiy).— bee  Ex.  24.  i).  ./[.;,  i,",,,^,,;.- th  of  the  imperfect  tense  (^5»i 

Sote  ai  actual  fact,  but  «"  !!^:*.'"  .V"     '  7.e     as     FuiTetiam  disertis,  ut  i.emo  el  The- 


•denotean  actual  '«^^^  but  an  actio    uit^^^unu^.  ^  etiam  disertus, 

^.11.),  the  i-l-lect  >ub^unct.xe^iu^        u-  ^.^^  ^^  ^,  1,  3,  qi 

hjlniis  i>ar  evset.  Jsep.  tp.  J,  i-   auu..  r 


3 

„. ,  ut  i.erao  el  The- 
quoiedOBS.  7.  See 

^^.^Jperrcct  subjunctive  ^^^^r^;^l^:^^ 

rKKFECT  INDICATIVE    '<> ^l^^'^'''^^^^^^^  "tt^^^^ 

,o  •  non-complete '  acts,   '^^^'^'^''^'lll^'ll^'^^^^^^  •  iueomplete  at  the  giveii  time^,  are 

co-oKDiNATK  puEDicATES  which.  beuiL  rt  P' ^^^^'^^  ^^      j,„„o  'n.odo  i<  erat  qnu  ut  IJeo- 
placed  in  the  imperfeet  accordi,  g  to  OBS  5 ,  a^^^^^  ^^^^^  virtQte  mner./ ;  Zeno 

Dlirastus,  nervos  virtQtis  incident,  sed  contia  J'"*  "'""        Theophrastus,  the  smews  of 
v,^  by  no  m.-a.is  the  ma,.  (  =  ^»;;»\,^  ";*";.  SUvr  e le  vthing  to^•irtue  alone.  Cic.  Ac. 
virtue  but  on  the  contrary  suc>i  a  man  «<>  to  f^^j^T.^',^- ,'_'./  desi^mates  Zeno's  views 
P.    t   i,  10.     [Here  inci^l^ritrvvre.ynll  ^liS-  ,2rce?he  S"^^^^^^^^  i^  ^^^''^  '9 

L  a  la-tin.^  siateO  See  Ex.  ^\.^]\l^\tTr^^^^^^^  i'/'ff  •> 

imrjer/ect  indicafices,  a<:  \  enerat  ad  me^  ,     ''n„h  ini  cura  consederit ;  that,  at  the  sight  of 
;  Sii-um  a.pectu  omnis  quaf  me  anr^Ma^  'X^uvi<Z^ tTu^l 

Ihem,  all  the  care  which  U'a^  ^^^'[[^'Th^Z^m^^^^^^  ^*'^^ 

Brut.  3,  1«».    [Here  the  «"^hordesgnaies    y  t^^^^  according  to  Obs.  5  impart 

as  instantaneous,  and  as  "^oment^ip,  wul^  J^O'' "^^^J^^  ^  anffttMit.]-  2)  In  the  Pame 

to  the  acthm  an  idea  of  ".o'^completencss.  c«  rre^p<^^^^^^^^  /^  .^^^J^  ^^  ^^  .  complete' 

way  the  perfect  ^'«'•^>"ct^ve  ,s  used  in  nw^^^^^  completing  act  and  final 

action,  if  the  predicate  pt  ti'^  ^f.f  ^";^  AnS  l{om£  os  tautum  vulnerum  fuit  t/^plures 
RESULT  of  the  principal  predcate,  as     ^J^^'l^^^^^^^  o„  the  side  of  the  Romans 

jmt  pnelium  saucii  ^^^^^^^f^V/'^^JnoreS  1  e  s  ii  3  ifo.u^  «/^^^  ^^"  ^'^^^t 

Ihere'were  so  many  wounds  ^'{«'Z"'»^!:.^^!']^^  f^  ne  1««'^^^  quidem  iter  patuit  nt  ex  tanta 

Su  a  similar  passa..:.e  NeP";',.'!^ ^  V^^'cfhere  the  pi  feet  i>^^^^^^^^^      expresses  the  idea  that 
tra,  8cd   navls  petiernd  (Milt.  5,  ^^  vvhcrc  the  pc    ccx  yye  i^ubjunctives  are  used  in 

e^  Persians  really  reaehed  the'»-  ships.-  •)  ^^^'^^^^J  ^^;.^,  ^VJ,  f^^  ^,1  ^^„^  ,j,oken  of  as  : 
modal  n-elauses  to  express  that  '  ,J,^;'  "  ^J^  !r„dlvit.  it  Tphicratenses  apud  Gnecos 
Iplncrates  exercitum  ^.c  omni  ^  ■  cipll.ui  '^^^'^'-^V^S'^  would  be  understood  as  referring 
^l^^Z:!^^:!:^  ^'^^^^  ^'^^  ^'^  name  tphicratenses 

renuiined  after  Iphicnites's  tmie  clause?,  the  perfect  Pubjunctive  can  only 

J),  in  rt'-clanses  not  h<^ongn.g  to  the  modal  c  «tKe'   /      s    ^^^^^^^  ^^^  employed,    This 

be  used  if.  according  to  R.  94   No.  l-^-  'og»^»    ^*  ";    ./,'  .iau-e  fills  up  the  blank  idea  of 

particularly,  refers  '«'7>^^^^25^*^^?";;^'^,  ;  V;  -elV     pe^  «^^'"-^  ^"  P[|^': 

a  verl)  of  'doim:';  see  p.  4bS).     But.  m  rj  ra'ei>,  a  j        .    ^       '  f  „^  ,,  i^^  quam  collSgae 

cateclaus<-s  a.,  ^f.}^^^-^^:'^'::^^^^^^;^:^  Z^M  wouldVepresent  the  idea 
Miltiades  m^y-/-i/.  ^^•'l»- ^^''Vv^  VVlilHade-  w  le^  author  meant  that  Milt.ades  s 
of  the  verb  vafere  as  a  qualdy  ol  ^»1.'^'«^^''^' ^^^ ''\'^  i-  mna-e  does  not  permit  the  use 
couLds  prevailed  oI^  a  certain  «>ccaM.m^^  SV''l'e^'<>^^^'^^^^  the /neaning  of  the 
<,f  logical  tenses  in  clauses  »' ;*^'*^'f;.  "^^i'^bv  no  means  refers  the  action  to  tiie 
KSl^^;^::k^^^M?n;^^S;<^^  ^^^^^^^  -ust  be  considered  a  solecsm. 
The  sentence  should  have  been  recast.  substantive  in  the  principal 

OBS.  9.  If  the  subject  or  object  of  a  modal  ,^  '     ,^^.^f_^!)^^^^^^^^  i.i  EngliU, 

sentence  for  an  antecedent,  so  that  ^\Pe'-^,«";\\  ';  '^l^^\  "in  w  i ch  instance  the  relative 
the  Clause  ..f.eii  assumes  u  relative  f«  J"  "  ,^f  [.  i^l'\^S'  ,^  pronoun  i^  would  have  it 
gni  has  the  foree  of  ut  «v,  being  P  ;'ced  iQ  tl.at  ^;^^';;;^^,,^^^, ,,,;,,,  i,  p^ade  for  ut  eju>',  or 
it  had  been  u^ed  in  connection  with  ut.  1  he  ^  ""^  7"'  .'  'I  n^^i^  ..^c  ).  The  predicates 
J/  ^^./'^  which  is  changed  into  ^''V-^-;^  ^'^:;!  ,  ?    f^.l^^  tenses  as  the 

of  .,nh  relative  clau^es  (always  r>;;i'  "»f^.  '  ^.^^'^^^^^^^^^^^  \u  vel  pcrire  maluerint  quam 
U-clause  would  take,  as  :  XX\  .  Judlte^  >^f, '^  "V;,.,  „/^/,«)  fames  ma-is  quam  lama  com- 
perdere  omnui :  XXXI  ^^'^'"^''l  9"0sK\-^.ltatui^^^^^  refer  death  rather  than  loss 

L.r./i/;Twenty-fi.ve  ^«'  V'^^l  .^Mlfm  one  w?rc?^^^^^^^ 

everything  (i.€.  '^^^^^""«r  \  Xi  c^^^^^^  f^'"^-  ^ic  Att.  1   16.  5;- Here 

iieloi^tlJc  '^l^l:^^-  V;"i:and  clSil.  9, 2. 5  (quoted  Obs.  8,  No.  C,  and  Obs.  0). 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


! 


Obs  10  Negative  clnn^es  of  coincident  action  which  have  a  neoative  antece- 
dent (or  an  antecedent  ?7r/«a//v  neirative,  a-,  N<na  quid  est  f;  =  niHl  est)  in  the  princi- 
>al  .-entenec  almost  always,  take  the  relalu'e  form  (/^rwo  qm  mm.  nullum  quod  non  etc, 
in^^tead  ol  ;^;r»o  talis  vt  non,  nihU  ejusmodi  ut  non),  bein^-  often  rendered  by  •  ^11""^'^;; 
before  a  participial  noun  (see  p.  ISU,  No.  3).  In  place  of  qm  non  (the  r*;\«tive  bemg  the 
subiect*)  the  conjunction  quia  i»  frequently  used,  bein-  i-endcred  m  the  r-amc  way  as 
the  relatWe  with  he  ne-at^on.  In  .uch  relative  and  Quin-chinse.  the  predicate  (which 
ralway.in  the  subjunctive),  is  more  fre(,uently  placed  in  the  perfect  than  in  »!«  imper- 
fect as  :  A>me»m  pnetermisi,  quern  quidem  ad  te  perventaruin  putilrem.  n/^lit  eras 
rwnded^rim  ;  I  did  Lt  let  anyon^  pa..,  p.;ovided  I  thought  he  w-ould  reach  you  to  /c//o m 
1  did  not  aire  a  letter  {without  handing  him  a  letter  to  you).  Cic.  Fam.  2.  1, 1.-  ^eino 
Llybl'i  liik^um  riderit,  nemo  in  Sicilia  quin  audierit  ;  Aof^ody  was  at^  ^^^^'^VZIln 
did  not  see  it ;  nobodu  wat»  in  Sicily  who  did  not  hear  it.  Cic.  \  err.  2.  5,  54.-  Qu am  tn 
domum  Qtian  urbem  adistl,  quod  fanum.  quod  non  everstim  atque  extersum  reliqueru  ? 
%l!at\lSZVhat  city  did\^.u  enter,  «7.««  temple,  ivithout  kaving  it  despoiled  and 
cleaned  out?  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  21.  See  Ex.  2U-:i3. 

Obs  11  Sometimes,  in  constructions  with  modal  Ut-clauscs,  the  remarkable  idiom 
occurs  that  the  clause  which  hix»  iho  qrammatiaUform  of  .an  I  t-d  a  use,  luin  no  logical 
?onn<  cti on  V  ith  the  principal  sentence,  while  a  relative  or  a  Qu.n-e  ause  dependent  on 
the  Ut  clause,  is  the  ine  by  which  loi,Meally  the  modality  of  the  principal  sentence  is  de- 
scribed 'I'he  two  modal  clauses  thus  C(.mbined  must  be  consulered  as  one  sin-le  Ut- 
cla  use  'and  may  often  be  contracted  into  one  clause.  But  frequently  they  must  be  ren- 
dered by  making  the  «rsl  Ut-clanse  an  independent  sentence  and  by  chun-inu  the  pnn- 
cipa  sentence  i.7to  a  temporal  clause.  The  predicates  of  the  two  modal  v\m^es  mnst 
alwai/.^  be.  in  the  same  tense,  which,  if  the  principa  predicate  is  a  preterite,  ^'K^l/J^ ^^  '[^ 
an  irnnerftct  or  a  i)erfect,ai^ :  Halbus  ifa  vivChat  ut  nulla  tain  exqui>Ita;/ow<Mn\ei;Iii  \o- 
fnZfqim^^^^^^^^  Balbus  lived  so  that  no  pleasure  could  l>e  f..und  .0  cK^iu.iWthat 

he  did  not  atjound  in  it  (i.  e.  that  he  had  the  greatest  abundance  -f  the  nn.st  exquisite  pleas- 
n?ci  i hit  c^>uld  be  lound).  Cic.  Fin.  2,  20.  H3.-Alcibiades  sic  x;erba  fecit,  vt  mmo  am  ferns 
fuirit  Quin  ejus  causam  lacnmarit :  Alcibiades  sp.,ke  in  such  a  manner  Unit  n<.b<)d>  >Nas 
/o  inhuman  that  he  did  not  shed  tears  over  his  fate  (i.  e.  Nobody  wiis  so  inhuman  as  not 
to  slied  tears  etc.,  when  Alcibiades  ppoke).  Nep.  Ale.  ti.  4.  bee  J-.x.  .A.  .io. 

Ob*  12  The  predicate  of  a  modal  Ut-clanse  must  be  ff/?my«  placed  in  a  tense  by 
CONSECUTION  (i.>.  in  xhvimpHftcfm  the  case  of  preterite  cunsecutirm)  il  the  clause 
must  be  considered  as  su/sMique,  which  is  the  case  if  the  action  uf  the  clause  is  repre- 
sented a,s-  beinq  determined  b{/  a  mental  act  of  the  Ooirical)  sul,jecf  of  the  tmnnpaUinUnce. 
\Utc  clHedy  bVlon-  final  clauses;  but  any  other  modal  relation  may  thus  be  rrlerred  to 
the  intention  or  will  oi  the  subj..ct.  Pre.iicates  of  ihi-s  kind  are  rendered  by  v  poten- 
tial with  '  shoul.r  or  an  e.iuivaient  expression  (•  was  to'  vXi^.y.  Ita  inter  se  munera  bem 
paitTti  sunt  ut  K\i\Q\iW^  }nmxset  {not  pnefuerit)  custodi:e  urbis,  Hippocrates  bellnm  a.l- 
?e  s  s  consulem  Uomaniiui  qereret ;  They  thus  {in  such  a  nianner)  div.d.;d  among  each 
other  the  functions  in  the  war,  that  Epicydes  urn  to  have  the  guarding  ol  the  city,  an 
Hippocrates /oco/*^/;/c^  the  campaign  against  the  lioman  ^''T"':,^'"'' '^*>^*'-~ -J;  ^'""t  . 
clauses  refer  to  intensity,  '  tanfu.'^. .  .ut '  has  the  meaning  'onlu  ii^}f);o  much.,  asto,  as 
Servius  mihi  videtur  tantum  eloquentiic  assumi)sisse  ut  jus  cniW  facile  l^.'^set  tn6ri  It 
seetns  to  me  that  Servius  employed  onl>f  so  muche^pqncuce  (or  J''iy';:i;^''^f'''^'^\ 
as  to  be  able  to  treat  witii  facility  the  points  ol  civil  law.  Cic  l>nit.^40,  loO.  Ihat  not 
in  modal  clauses  of  this  kind  is  rendered  by  ne  or  ut  ne.—  Ex.  3b.  o». 

Examples  lo  J?e}n.  95,  Obs.  4-12. 

1  Murena  Asiam  sic  obiit'  vt  in  ejl  nenue  avaritiic  nequc  luxuriiP  vestigium  reliqvent^. 
Cic'  Mur  9  —  2  Ilnic  oratoii  in  invenieiidis  coinponendisqiie  rebus^  nma  accuraiio* 
fuit,  ?//*  noii  facile  in  ullo  diligeiitiOrem  majorenuiue»  coijnoverim.  lb.  V,'""V,.*'\'''"?'o  "" 
3  Ea  "essimus^,  ut  omnibus  jjotiiis  quam  ipsis  nobis  cons-uluenmv.f.  \h.  bm.  Z.  i.«.— 
4!  (iuibus  causis  tu.  Brute,  eiiam  piiesto^  fuisti,  ^^i»,  qui"  non  satis  dm  vixerit,  lior- 

♦  Quin  is  not  employed  for  ut  non  with  obliciuc  cases  of  i\  See  p.  548. 

»  Went  throu-h  Asia  in  such  a  manner.—  2  that  state  in  which  h-  left  Asia  continued 
at  \\w  t'peaker's  time  ('  no  trac»'S  can  now  be  found  *).—  3  in  the  colU-ction  an(.  airaiiL'e- 
ment  of  his  material.-  *  accuracy.-  »  a  clause  of  intensity.  Mira  is  n.ecl  with  t '»<''« "-cc 
of  tanta  —  «  a  more  careful  and  comprehensive  one.  (We  would  say  in  English  mat  1 
have  not  easily  known  any  more  carelul  etc.  speaker'.)-'!  have  acted  in  sucli 
a  manner.—  «  consvlere  omnif>us.  to  consult  the  interests  of  any  one  else.—  Lausi^t 
pnesto  fvisti,  you  were  i)resent  when  these  cases  wire  transacted.—  »»  a  consecu  ivc 
clause,  «^  having  the  force  of  itaque.—  "  qui  has  here  coLcessive  force  =  alihougn.— 


DEPENDE-NT   SUBJUXCTRT!. 


4.^1 


^^v  ^.«^-/i    TV»  -Rrnt  Qt  .^24  —  5   M.  Cielius  talis  tribQnus 
tensius  tamen  hunc  ^nrsntn  co^/.cm    .  lb.  Br^^^^^^  ^,^    ^,,   .^.^  _ 

plebis   fuit,  '//    ?/^'W0  a  senSti  <'t  !\.\>l\''0™"^.^.' "•,;,,/,,  f'^^^  i\a-rantius  studium  ri- 

!;.  ArdShat  Hortensius  d-c  n.  i  .c>M)Hliiate  .^c  i^/ 1'^^  J^i  mo r  o  afficit^^  oculorum,  ut 
deiim.  lb.  88,  :m-7.  Hoc  mm  re  """''i  fl«'^,^"-*f,y 4"  J'^s'^Natflra  corpus  liomi- 
2KMeanumquam  dextero  seque  bene  w>«.s- ^    •  ,^^f,  •  "^  '  js  ,,,^^^^^  alia  p.ogrediente 

,licfrc«l«r"-'.  ll>.  Brut.  (0.  •»■).-  VI  Ad  eum  P^^;^'''  /""  "K  scipiOnii'»  ti*r«n(«r. 
C,e..  B  C.  3  :».-  13  Krat  "^-^^'^^^'^^^^'iS^ri^S^:^  e^^am  ««Von  ««r,- 
^:;S  S      e     -.uiJVrvi  nZrZ^'ui.  45,  25,-  ':\r;'7,t„ V^;i'™l;;-^^,'Tep" 

?  .m  n„V;,„U™.  !^  -vr-ruVn  riJ").r3=  iu  hoc  illu.l  '."«'l  «-Jf 'hVIJ^.^irL^Mr/r! 
rOrem  inducere.  lb.  »•>,  S.ii. —  4i.   Nciiuft  ;  "'i'  ,/ '."^      „,  /,3^  .miiTiiw  in  de   cti  crimen 

are  now  remembering  thes^e  benelit>  .-  ^J'  t       15  ,0  nro«ecute  —  >«  manner  of  speak- 

''T''i-<Wr?i       '3    tin    w7do  n   t  re.m>t.-  3^  by  observin..-.-  35  .eems.     Render  :  so 
cut.    §  .J42.  li.  4.—      tiut  we  (to  'i*    ;;-'  i.*  said  etc.-  3«  that  you  may  lead  into 

"ror"or™eTn^XTeS  o   ;  .''  ^  "       h  r^ 

an  enor  ine  in«  ^l"J^'^  "3 ',';';  /%,.,.„, .1:,,^  mii^^t  etruf'le  for  his  whole  existence,  i.  e.  in 

t'houghhe"i-.r;.mmittedn<.<>tlence     yocur^^'Z-^:^'Snn^r:^ 

to  account'.- -in  ^«i„"ar;w  a  part^^^^^^^  "^  ^^^::  "^^l^X^  <^^^  «cts, 

to  the  iiilimacy  of  hi»  .nlorcours,.  -  "Sec  p  204  ««s.  5.  ^f "[™  -^  1  >,  ^„ 
contempt,  ''-'  -' ..'•Vi'f  ?<^;v hmlc  .»d '  ipo"  ei  "  hr  «'tWn.-..  he  aMc,l  a'?„.,r.h,  or 
^^u'ht'tm"  m^-d'f'^dVlV'it'Vnow  «t\  tl',e  third  «a.)  ;  i.  e.  whet.be  had  ntcmoncd 

three  things,  he  afterwards  spoke  of  four  or  two. 


442 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Brut  f)0  217  —  28  Excrcita?!  Piimnia  diffirultjltc  rei  frumcntarue  afHcu'batnri  vi>qve  (0 
vt  cciiiu.'lmls  dies  fr  meiiK.  iniliics  caruennf^  et  pecore»  extremain  laniL-m  suslenla- 
retit*  TiR-  K  O  7  U—i\)  Neni't  Ai;rii,'eiiti  neqiie»  ;t'Hlte  tarn  am-ctil*.  iicqiio  vinhua 
tarn  infinn'is''  fiiit  'qui  von  ilia  woqXg  i<unextHi^  leliuiuiiie»,  qiKul  cul  [iie  fors»»  otlerC- 
bur.  arrinuerit^K  Cic.  Voir.  2.  4,  48.-  :^0.  AVmo  ine;T  resiitntiOne  hetatu^  est.  nemo  in- 
iiiriS»2  doluit.  vKi  i>o»  Planeii  in  mo  niisericordia  «xnita./i/^/i/.  lb  1  lane.  l*':/;--f '•  f^^^ 
cr?/o</  in  hue  urbc  inaju-i^  mnquam  incendiiim  fiui  eai  noa  consul  suOvenen/  *  ?  in.  l  J^. 
11  2t)  — :«  Kv  Imc  provineia  lonsniari  imperio  /iz-v/io'*  rediit.  qui  mcoliimis  fi>»^rit\i 
Quintriuinnlidnt'T.  lb.  l«i,  y.S.— :«.  Nemo  fiiit  miliinm  7'/i«  y///,<em/t/</r.  (";e-.  li.  C.  d, 
45  _  34  SyraeusjTrum  hie  situs  atqu.-  hivc  natQra  esse  ioei  ca'llqnedieitur,  vt  iinllus  um- 
Quam  dies  tani  maLrnil  tempestille»  V'<'''«'  Q"^"  »Hqno  tempore  i-ju-'  d;ei  solem  homines 
vidtrint  Cic  Verr  2  5,  10.—  i").  In  Miltiade»»  erai  imra  eomitas  xtt  nemo  tain  humilis 
esset  cut  //o//  aditus-'i^'ad  eiim  jxittrtt.  Nep.  Milt.S,  4.-  m.  Dixit  Ciesar,  «6- belli  raiiOjiem 
esse  divlsimi'^i,  ut  illi'^-'  classe  navis  auxiliaque  sna-3  imptirirent,  ip>e  wt  mitul  teiraqne 
eos  prohiberet.  Cies.  B.  C.  3.  17.—  «7.  Soeietaiem  ab  Romanis  tia  volebant-*  peti  ut  nul- 
lum de  ea  re  scitum  \>o\m\\Jieret,  aul^»  litteris  mandartlur.  Liv.  45,  25. 

Rem.  00.  Tlie  tenses  of  preterite  con.secutioii  are  in  two  instances  used 
lis  lof/i'cdl  tensen  if  the  iroverninc:  predicate  is  non-preterite  :  1)  if  ijyi)olheti- 
cal  preterites  are  made  dependent  on  non-preterite  predicates  (Obs.  1-4) ; 
2)  if,  exceptionally,  the  subjunctive  of  the  imperfect  is  used  in  place  of  a 
/)d/'/vW(soiMCLimes  instead  of  a  present)  subjnnciive  to  mark  i)ailicid:ir 
relations  of  the  action  which,  in  the  i^iven  connection,  would^  imt  appear 
if  the  re<::ular  tenses  of  present  consecution  were  used  (Obs.  5-7). 

Os^  1  Hypothetical  subjunctive?  (§350)  in  both  the  principal  and  the  dependent  prop- 
osition "enerally  reiain  iheir  preterite  tens.s  (imperfeet  or  i)lupt'rlt«t).  wliether  Iliey  are 
made  dependent  on  preterite,  or  on  non-preierite  predicates.  A  subordination  ol  liypo- 
thetical  periods  occurs  in  two  instances:  1)  if  tne  thksis  (j.  e.  the  principal  bypotlieii- 
cal -'enience  See  B.  VI. Makes  the  form  of  a  dependent  clause  (.Obs.  2).  in  wliieli  instance 
the  HYPoTiiKsis  (i.  e.  the  hypothetical  dause  introduced  by  ^i  or /<i*'i)  is  frequently  ■««- 
dHr.<tood  ;  2)  it  the  hypoti'iksis  is  made  directly  dependent  on  an()ther  sentence,  the 
the^is  beiiiLj  undeolood  (.Obs.  4). 

08"*  2  If  the  THKSIS  has  the  form  of  a  dependent  clause,  the  hypothetical  imjierfect 
s>/Mi(V(C(ivf.^  in  both  tlie  thesis  and  the  hvpothe>is,  and  \\w  p!iip,rfect-suhj>im'tire  in  the 
livi)Olhesis,  always  retain  these  forms,  the  same  as  tluy  would  haye  in  an  independent 
hypothetical  period.  No  re«,'ard  is.  in  this  instance,  paid  to  the  law  of  consecution,  and 
it"  makes  no  ditlerence  whether  ihf  clause  as  such  requires  a  siibiiincliye  or  not.  as:  Hoc 
api)aret  quum  yerbiim  alicpiod  altius  transfertur,  et  in  oratione  humili  ponitnr,  quod 
idem  in  alia  (J.  e.  '.si  i»  a/ia  poiiertfur.)  d^aret ;  Tiiis  i-;  cyideiit  when,  in  ordinary  style, 
some  uncommon  word  i.s'  M^e(/ which  would  be  proper  m  higher  style.  Cie.  Or.  2o.  82. 
[The  relative  clause  quod. .  .dectrtt,  but  for  its  hy4)oihetical  meanini:.  would  r-qmiv  the 
indicatiie  :  the  predicate  retains  its  hypothetical  imperlect,  the  same  a>  it  the  hypo- 
theiical  i)eriod  were  independent  '  Verbu/ndtceref,  n  .  .]X)ner^fitr\  The  law  of  consecu^ 
tion  would  require  a  present  or  perfect.]  -  Nee  dttbifat  quin  e-o  a  te  nutii  hoc  consequi 
jwsaem,  eiiamsi  iedificanirus  e,s>e.v  .•  Nor  does  /if  donbf  that  /  could  .>btain  this  ot  yon  by 
a  mere  hint,  even  if  you  were  going  to  build.  Cic.  Fam.  13, 1,  5.     [The  clause  "qutu.  .^ 

»  Suflertd  ciceedinuly  from  want  of  provisions.—  =  the  perfect  is  used  according;  to  li. 
58  _  3  the  meat  of  cattle.—  •«  sati^fied  their  extreme  liuii<:er.  Sux'en'dre/it  is  an  imper- 
fect of  hal)it.  See  p.  31S,  Obs.  1.—  a  See  §  4()<».  A'.  'Ai.—  «  Nobody  at  .A-ri-entum  was  of 
so  helpless  an  a«»e.—  ^  rirtf<  intirntce  =  inlirmitas,  the  ft>im  ririhu.^  i/tfir//n.i  beinj:  used 


iM>dy  with  consular  power,  i.  e.  no  pi ^ -   .  - 

was  intact  (bud  suflered  noj,'reat  losses).—  i'  without  benn:  admitted  to  the  honor  of  a 
triumph.—  »«  tarn  maqna  tetn}}e.-<t(l(e,  abl.  of  quality.  =  so  stormy.—  »»  -=  MU'iad<"<  tarn 
//lira  comitate  erat  ,ot  an  adinirable  atVability,  so  that). --  '■'<»  access.—  2i  the  way  of  con- 
ductinji  the  war  was  so  divided  \i.  e.  aniony:  tlie  two  belli-jrereiits).  The  chance  ot  \var 
must  be  taken  here  for  the  loirical  8ul)jeet,  ^vhich,  as  it  were,  dt-creed  that  the<e  shimld 
be  the  parts  of  the  belliircreiits.—  '■'•^  namely  the  army  of  Tompeju-^.—  ^a  /i,.s-,  i.  e.  Ue- 
sar's.—  2*  It  was  their  will  that  a  treaty  of  alliance  should  be  pro|)osed  to  the  Koinans, 
but  so  that  etc.—  '•">  a  loosely  construed  sentence.  Livy  meant  to  say  'neve  quidquam 
litteris  m(indarelur\  nor  should  anything  be  committed  to  paper. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


443 


«>..,..  ;..^.'wonldrequireasul;jnnctiv.e^ 

posmn  and  <jedincatnrmessemv^-\xnn  \l\}l^^''^^Xxi\xe  first  example.]*-  Horum  l;cen- 
governinj:  present  P'-«'d?cate  t/;/6^/a^•  the  same  a    m  ^"  ^  j„dicarentur  ;  Had  not 

ti:e  nisi  Carmades  restitt.^se.t ,  ^''VlL'^^Hn  not  Avoi- bu     ha\  they  wovM  (i.  e.  they  prob- 
Carneades  ren^^ted  the  I'^en'^e «    he,e  i  do     .t  ^  o^^  ^^J      i5o._if  hypotheti- 

)e  alone  acknowledged  as  l'h''"l'\H'\*:U -.Hwrnt..*  rhev  have  the  samegram- 


viso  that ' 7 a;.r;^;/Vo^.;i.n  '^---j-f^^S^/i^       ^;n;1;retSitt?^;'h!;;S: 

dently  :    'Inlei,'ram  \m\\\  erit,  si  rolam  .\     oni  'i  ."^l''^''"'^"^  -, /..,.»  ...,Ki.inf>iivA 


armeiit 
he  had 
owner.  Liv 


Changed  (  See  the  Ex.  .»>^'l  '^^^-     ..  ^,.  .„,  «p„tcncc)  likewise  retains  its  own  form  if  the 
2.  The  thesis  (principal  l^ypo^''^]^^/  f^/ ^.'^' .f  ^^^  In  this  instance 

clause  in  which  it  is  incorpora  e.l  d<j€^  /wt  «?/"'  ^T^^^^^^^^^^^         ^^i/, dependent  hypothetical 

the  predicate  of  the  thesis  t«kes  on^  o    tl  «  f^^^^^^^^^ 

thesis  referring  to  the  pa-^t  may  «r^"^^  *'^,^  ^'/"^  "j^e  iNi  icative  of  the  thr.e  past  tenses 

srB.TUNCTivK  US  the  regular  f»»-'"  v^»/,  "J^^^"  ^^^^^^  f(,rce  (p.  729,  27;; 

of  the  periphrastic  Intnre  is  used  in  t'^^';,,^""   '^';^  eis  ncommodis  mederi  fortasse 

as  :  In  illo  ipso  inalo  LurnlUis,  <!'[', '^:^''']^}''^^^^^^  art?m  mililum  dimlsii  ;  In 

potal^set  (i.  e.  si  in  inipeno  '"=i'  '"'-^f  ^^f  ."^'  Jl'",) /.^S  perhaps  have  reme- 

ihis  bad  situation  Lueiil  us,  f^^^^^'^^J^^^'^l'^^  your  order 

duMl  these  defeats  (.  .If  »;;^.»^^;^ /^j^ '•^^f,,^".f  ^^  "''^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  form  'ix>tuis.et^  would 

„,  dismiss  part  o    the  tio<.p-  t  c   Leg   Man.  .^^^^^^^^  .^    ^^.  ^^^^^^j 

have  been  used.  If  the  »OM>othetieal  peno^^  Because,  if 

allowed  you.  would  have 

[iNDEPKNDENTLY  :    parU- 

>%  on  account  of 
ie'i^overning  predicate  '  mittor  the  l;*^^  ot  7>7v*^m^ijj.^c^'^^j^^^  ^^^ 

3.^f  the  thesis  assunu^s  the  f<>""/'  .;  .f 'f^l^.^ii',  t>?he  preto^^^^  so  ti^at  (a)  either 

two  forms,  mentioned  No.  2,  are  '^'^,*^"  >f;^^j  .P»  ^J'/ahied  without  any  change,  as  :  Atqne 
the  hypothetical  subjunctive  ot  ^be  pluperfea  is    tta  nu^^^^^  >        ^^^  ^et/iight 

hau<l  sVio  an  par  princunbus  esse  ^^'^^f/  ^  ^  f  1  no  v  u  uu  he  night  have  been  etc.). 
have  been  equal  to  the  nrstdterally:  ^  ^]'  ,''«^  '^"'''Vkk  4  _  (6)  aP  the  predicate  may 
Cic.  Hrut.  41.  151.  This  method  however  i*;«/^  ^J^^/^>,t-hich  instance  the  indicative 
assume  the  pe/iphra.<tic  jor/,i  («^'^^il'^ding  to  No.  i,^^^^^^^  with  a  feme  by 

tense  which  it  lias  in  the  instance  No.  2  i*  changca  inio  a  >^     J  ^j         ^f  Rem.  95. 

lon^eadion  accordin,^  to  tin;  general  rules    but  si^^^^  rf  the penphra^- 

Hence,  if  the  governing  predicate  is  ^'Onf^f^^'^^^^^^^^^^^^^  (^  gi  ita  forte  accidissel. 

tic  future  is  u^ed,  as  :  (iunm    ux^c  r^:!'r,^hf  '^'^'.^^^^^^^^  Ihi^T/ou  show  what  sort 

fue/is  illo  tempore  c«)n;nl.r«n.rw^- ,  ^ylen  }Ou  t^   d^  j.ki^pened  so.  Cic.  Pis. 

if  a  consul  you  trould  have  been  a   »»"^  ,/;";,*^:  i;.JiV'i  i  si    ta  forte  accidisset.]  See  Ex. 


V.  .     mie  fonn  i-  So    e  imes  however  the  law  of  co/<fecuHo,i  is, 

the  governing  P'-cd.cate  ' ;n  //o    t    e   a     ol  pnse^acc^ ^^  ^    ^^.^_^^^  ^^^^ 


-ill 


USE   OF   THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


came  etident  what  an  tiproar  would  have  been  earned  by  a  real  defeat.  Li  v.  2S,  24.—  Id  airi 
apparChiit  nt  iiitciira  t*il>i  omnia  ai)n(l  Homiliios  cf^hient.  conciliiltn  apud  rcL'em  {rratijl, 
i\\\\n\,accei)trin  fiiif>iient  renienfeni;  It  was  evidt-ntly  intended  that  their  rehitioiis  to  tlie 
Koinans  slioniii  reinnin  in  tlu-ir  previons  Ptale,  whili'  tlie  5r<>od  will  of  tlie  kinir  was  con- 
ciliated bv  the  fact  that  tluyivould  have  nceivid  him  if  he  had  cmne.  Liv.  .'id.  5.—  See 
iix.  S. —  The  predicate,  however,  t/iatj  ht  anrl  almost  always  i.-i.  in  tlie  perfect  xufijunctice, 
as  a  logical  tense,  if  it.  is  allowed,  or  required  by  the  rulet»  in  Ki-ni.  «H  and  •>.}.  altli--n-h  the 
rules  in  Keni.  94  are  rarely  applicable  t()  hypothetical  predicates.  But  in  modal  Ut-ctanses 
(IL  Si'i)  xhti  sufijt/ncfire perfect  i\ri  hypothetical  tense  of  the  thesis,  may  be  con>idered  as 
the  rule*,  as  :  Viri^incs  eo  cursu  se  ex  sacrario  prorij)uerunt,  uf,  si  elVui^ium  patui>set, 
impletilne  \\\\w\n  tnmnltu  fuerint:  that,  if  an  escape  had  been  open,  tliey  uou/d  have  filed 
the  whole  city  with  lumuU.  Liv.24,',>r..     So  also,  if  the  thesis  is  introduced  by  quia  after 
non  duhito.     St-e  Ex.  9,  and  p.  132,  2;  p.  1:J3.    Ex.  23.     Or  (c\  the  predicate  may  take  a 
non-periphrastic  tiiisc  of  tlie  verb,  subject  to  the  law  of  consecution,  tht;  same  as  in  No. 
2,  so  that  it  is  in  the  j)luperfect,  or  in  the  perfect  subjunctive,  according;  as  the  govern- 
injj:  predicate  is  a  pietrrite  or  a  non-preterite.     If  it  is  tlius  in  \\\v,  plu)>erffcf.  it  cannot 
be'^distinL'i'ished  from  the  form  menii«)ned  No,  (a).     If  it  is  in  xUc perfect,  the  tense  of 
the  hvpoUu'iicai  clause,  accordin-r  to  11.  9«,  Obs.  7.  is  often  attracted,  as  :  StquenttirWla 
...,iiiier  loium  viiain  et  improbis-imOrum  niliil  oinnTno  j///r-/-(?^>-tf,  ?//  Plato,  ^i  sapiens 
iiiin  fiierit.  nihiio  melius  (pi'iui  (juivi<  iuiprobissimus  nee  beatius  ri.irrit :  Next  icill  this 
follow,     that  there  IK  wo  di  fere  me  at  all  between  the  lives  of  tlie  former  and  those  of 
the  most  wicked,  s(»  that  Plato,  if  he  hail  not  been  wise,  wonld  iioi  have  lived  any  belter 
or  happier  than  the  verv  worst  men.  Cic.  Fin.  4.  9,  21.  [indkpknukntlv  :  Plato,  si    sa- 
piens non  tm.'<sef,  nihild  melius  rij-isset  (or  vi.rerut).]  See  Ex.  10.  11.— This  method  is 
chietlv  eiuploved  witli  a  copula  added  to  a  predicaie-adj'Ctive,  or  i)redicatf-nouii  (as  in 
Ex.  9"and  10i,"t)r  if  the  verb  does  not  Ibriu  a  verl)al  adjective  in  tlr'/s.   In  the  al)ove-men- 
tioned  exainpl-,  the  form  rictan/ti  fnevit  has  not  been  employed  by  theautlior  on  account 
of  the  amhi<;iiitv  which  would  have  arisen  from   the  etjUiility  in  form  of  the  veil)al  ad- 
jective Vict  urns' of  the  verb  vincere.    This  form  of  the  ordinary  perfect  subjunctive  la 
most  frequently  applied  to  the  perii)hr;istic  «renindial,  to  po.oie  and  debere  (oii«_'iit  to),  mul 
certain  impersonals,  all  of  which,  according;  to  p.  727  loll.,  are  used  in  the  jHrfc  indcatire 
with  the  force  of  a  hypothetical  pluperfect  subjunctive,  as:  (Iw.vv'x^  quid  luttonii  auipliua 
assequi  Plaix-iiis  si  Cn.  Pompeji  fuisset  liliiis  ;  You  ask  ivhaf  more  Plancius  could  liave 
obtained  if  he  had  been  Cn.  I'ompey's  son.    Cic.  Plane.  24,  m.    Very  frequently  these 
perfect  suhjunctiv<'s  (/x>/w<'/-<7  and  debuerif^uro  used  as  loirical  lenses  in  modal  I  t-clanses 
(acc«H-din<(  lo  Ji.  95)  if  the  iroverniiiij  predicate  of  the  hypoth -tical  period  is  u  preferifc, 
as  •  Ejusmodi  paciiOnes  in  coitioue  candidatorum  consularium/ac/tK  sunt  ut  nemo  bonus 
int'cresse  dtbutrit  ;  Such  compacts  were  made  in  the  meeting'  of  liie  consular  candidates 
that  no  decent  person  ouiiht  to  hare  staid  tiiere.  Cic.  (^u.  '^'r.  3,  1.  1«».  See  Ex.  12-1;).— 
The  perfect  subjunctive  of  postie  is  also  used  if  the  thesis  has  the  form  ol  a  Qu7n-cfau.<te 
not   strictly  belou^iiiir  to  the  modal-clauses,  mostly  il  the  iroverninjr  p'<^'ilit-»t'*  .^*  "  "^^* 
dubifdvi''  or  an  equivalent  expression,  as:  Haud  du/Aumfuif  f/ui/i.  nisi  ea  mora  interve- 
liisset,  castr.i  eo  die  Punica  c:\\n  potueiiat  ;  There  aax  no  doubt  but  tlmt  on  that  day  the 
Punic  camp  miqht  have  been  taken  if  that  delay  had  not  interfered.  Liv.  24,  42. 

4.  If  the  predicate  of  the  thesis  is  in  the  passive  voice,  the  hypothetical  forms  mentioned 
above  are  generally  not  directly  used,  l>ut.  whenever  the  sen<e  permits  it,  circumlocii- 
lions  by  7>ov6.e  with  a  i)assive  ol)ject-infinitive,  or  by  a  predicative  (jerundial  are  einployed, 
both  of  which  are  placed  in  the  i)erlect  subjunctive  according,'  to  No.  3,  c.  as  :  Tantum 
pavoris  injecerunt  ut.  si  in  piano  castra  posita  essent,  haud  dubie  pnmo  impetu  capi  ix>tu- 
erint ;  They  caused  so  much  terror  that  the  camp  would  (literally  'coubr)  have  been  un- 
questionably taken  U  it  had  been  erected  on  level  ^^round.  Liv.  25,  13.— In  eos  versa 
peditum  acies  haud  dubiuin  fecit  quin.  nisi  lltmflta  extrema  airnunis  fuissent,  imrens  in 
eo  saltu  accipienda  clades  fiurit  :  The  fact  that  llie  footsol(li<-rs  ha<l  to  meet  the  attack 
of  these,  made  it  evident  fhatn  i'orm'nlahlinh'h'iit  would  have  been  sufered  in  these  moun- 
tains, if  the  rear  of  the  army  had  not  stood  their  jrround.  Liv.  21.  34  [literally  '  it  would 
have  been  necessary  to  sutler',  the  periphrastic  irernndial  havin.!,' evidently  the  force  of 
an  onlinary  hypothetical  i)assive].  See  Ex.  12.  14.  1.").  If  such  a  circumlocution  is  not 
admitted  by  tiie  connection,  the  predicate  of  the  thesis  is  placed  in  the  pist  participle 
wilh  fore/u  (p.  l:JO.  li.  140  ;  p.  137,  L'.  152),  which,  in  this  connection,  imparts  to  the  pas- 
sive a  hypothetical  character,  the  same  as  the  periphrastic  future  to  the  active,  as  : 
Quam  vi-re  de  Ly^i\m\vo  foref  Judicilf urn,  (i.  e.  si  jiulices  eiim  coiidemnas<ent),  oratio  in- 
diciofuit  qua*  post  mortem  in  domo  ejus  reperta  est;  How  just  the  sentence  against 
!  ysander  icould  have  been  (literally  :  '  how  justly  it  would  have  been  judged  on  Lysau- 

riie  reason  of  this  usatre  of  the  periphrastic  form  in  preference  to  an  ordinary  ])lu- 
ct  subjunctive,  is  to  be  found  in  the  fact,  that  the  connection  of  modal  Ut-claused 
!>1  iperfects  is  adverse  to  their  nature.  See  Rem.  95,  Obs.  3. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


445 


der'),  was  proved  by  the  speech  which  after  his  death  was  found  in  his  house.  Xep.  Lys. 

3  5  * 
'obs.4.  Sometimes  the /A6,^  of  a  hypothetical  period  dependent  on  anothe^^^^^ 
is  vnderstvjod    In  this  instance  the  hypothesis  (hypothetical  clause)  t.-.kes  the  hame  foini 
iVu  wmi  n^^^  the-is  were  expressed,  so  that,  if  the  governing  predicate  is  non- 

rrJteHte  the  law  oi'con^^^^  i.  excluded  in  the  same  way  as  in  theabove-mentio.ied 

n^t\rn  e  •  Sed  inc  vera  pro  gratis  loqui,  etsi  meum  ingenium  non  rjwneret,  necessitas  co- 
r  /  •  But  'iiecess  tv  i/  /U  me  to  make  rather  a  true  than  a  pleasant  statement,  even  if 
myt^^\n^^w^^^^^  me  to  do  so.  Liv.  3,  G8.  (i.  e.  Necessitas  coi^it.  el  coqerd^i 

meum  i  ."^d.^^^^^^^^  moneiet).-  Vide  ne  religio  nobis  tarn  adhibenda  nt  qua.n  si  tes  i- 
Sonium  llicerlmvs  ;  Take  care  that  we  must  not  apply  t«  >  V^-ttmmfv^^^Cic  Brut  85  '^3 
aid  of  reli-don  in  the  same  manner  as  if  we  were  giyin<r  a  testimony.  Cic.  Brut.  So,  .y-i 
[  =  quam  adhiberlmus  si  testimonium  diceremus].  See  E:c.  lb. 

Obs  5  The  use  of  an  imperfect  as  loqical  teme,  if  the  subjunctive  depends  on  non- 
preterite  predka  es^  is  not  frequent.  Such  imperfects  are  used  :  1)  to  give  the  dependent 
Si  ctive%' )  ne  pa  licular  force  which  would  be  lost  by  a  tense  of  present  consecution 
To  s  (5  2)  if  he  g^.verning  predicate  contains  ix  paM  tense  by  imphcatwn,  analogous  p 
Ihr^similar  case  wht-n  tense? of  present  consecution  refer  lo^ present  contained  by  inipli- 
caiionin  the  governing  predicate  (A'.  94,  OBS.  2).  bee  Obs.  7. 

Ocs    fi.  Imperfect  subjunctives  dependent  on  non-preterites  refer  to  a  particiilar  force 
of  the  acti  1   1)  to  designate  the  predicate  as  a  potential  interrogative  subjunctive  (§.)93), 
ai  •  &AF/4  a  te  c?//- 1.  Corneliuu'i  n.  n  defenderemf  I  eu<k  you  why  I  should  no   have  de- 
fv;../^  /  r    C(  rnelius    Cic  Vatin.  2. 5.    ^'either  defendam.  nor  defenderim  would  express 
thi'lnim'im*      D^ivdam  would  mean  '  why  /  dd  not  defend  ',  and.  defenderim-'  why  / 
did  not  de  iMul '    ^2)  O    they  i,re-nantly  refer  to  a  '  supposition  \  e.th.;r  l,y  representing 
some   neiXr  of  the  clause  as  an  hypothesis  against  reality  (,r  i.nplyiniz  any  other  sup- 
iT  don  the  force  of  which  would  not  appenr  by  usii.i:  regular  tenses  of  present  conse- 
cution     Some  of  these  imperfects  strictly  fall  under  the  rule  in  Obs    2.     But  the  hspo- 
?1  etic-il  reference  is  not  always  clear  by  the  sentence  itself  as  it  is  in  the  p.-issages  quoted 
Oni    2    nor  c«,rid       always  be  conveniently  expressed   by  a  reirular  hypotl.etica 
eriod     Vr    inie  n(,n  est\xx   Ilejus  reliL'iOni  su.e  pecun  am  ar^tepemeret  :  It  is^.ot 
e*-"."  .-.      \     .  ,V  . 7  7 i  „t..,.i.i^\  ;,/,)-^  /iz;///  inoiiHv  liio-her  rhaii  hisrelllT'""    ' "^ 


\ 


ro  la  le  that  Hejus  would  (not  •  should ')  have  held  money  hiirher  than  his  religion.  C  c. 

N\ri  2  4  0     ILt^^^^  'peondam.^  has  the  forca  ' si  quis  ei  pemniam  qferret  . 

Tt,  rn.Mt.'et  snbiunetive  '  anteposuerit'  would  intimate  that  money  was  really  otleivd  to 

h   n     n      1  di  c        u  e  wo^d  lender  by  '  should  have  held  ')  while  the  connection  shows 

ht    1  em    ley  ottered  was  a  merely  nominal  sum.  which  faci  the  author  intimates  by 

Ihf  1  vrnX    Ol   f«»nn  of  the  predicate.-  Verisimile  non  est  nt  (Sulla).  ()iiem  in  ot.o  sem- 

pcM-  scl- 1     hab   isset.  hunc  in  eo  tumultu  qiiem  ip^c  coinparabat.  ab  .edumtferet ;  Is 

1  ot  m-ol)  h le  tliat   while  Sulla  was  enga-ed  in  that  rebellion  whicii  lie  hin.se  t  was  plan- 

n-     -  is  n-i3.e^^^  as  having  planned),  would  (not  ^ sbould')  have  disni^ssed,  a  man 

•Si    healu^s  h;^^  hiufi;.  quiet  times.  Cic.  Sull.  20,  57.    Here  the  object 't« 

rJ/VAi,  //»'  h-i;  a  1  vi'oil.etical  force  (  =  si  turn  in  tumultu  fuisset  quern  ip-e  comparas- 

set)Tfl-rH^  denied  by  the  speaker     If  ^dimiserit^  had  been  used, 

the  evprJi"io~n    in  eo  tumultu  quem  comparabat '  would  have  been  represented  as  con- 

i^i  n  '  a   r  e  fact.t--Sitiius  is  Immo  est  ut. .  .sibi  nefa. mm  helium  contra  patriam  sus^r- 

uin  p  fdref  ^  Is  Sittius  a  man  of  that  character  that  he  would  have  f^iouqhtu  his 

,y'o -Xu^e  ;«:  agent  of  Sulla,  a  nefarious  war  against  ^-.^-"l^'^J.^f^,^  '^^f^  ^ 

rsirnniv  •  '  s-i  Sulla  eum  ob  ta  em  cau.sam  amandassel  .  if  Sulla  iiaa  uispau  uea  nun  lor 

such  a  uurm  se       •  P^averir  would  represent  the  •  suscipere  bellum '  as  referring  to  t he 

r  •d^^Tpl   m        at    he  time,  which  fact  is  denied  by  the  speaker.-  Ttr/.o  can sas  ...... 

m-'  n  u Itas     u  '  ( =  ejusmodi  ut )  istum  impeUerent ;  /  see  that  there  are  many.ca.tses  which 

ir//  iir^   / '//r^Aim  a.e.  Ti.  Koscius  to  assassinate  Sex.  Rosctus».  Cic.  Kosc    Am. 

^!92.  Tc\u!sasesse  quceimpelkrentr  has  the  force  of  -Causas  satis  inagnas  esse  ut  eu  n 

*  All  these  substitutions  prove  that  the  Latin  considered  the  form  of  an  ordinary 
nbmer feet  suh  iinctive  as  generally  insufhcient  to  designate  tlie  predicate  as  hypotheti- 
cal in  the  ca^'tC  clause  as  s.uh  requires  the  subjunctive.  And  since,  in  the  pas- 
s?i(  the  Sped  e  t  of  t  e  .H-riidnastic  future  was  unavailable,  other  lorms  had.to  be 
device  bv  which  the  hypothetical  m.-anin::  mi'/ht  be  c  ear  ydesi-nated  Thus  m  he 
abov.Mii  ■  ntio„-d  passa^ri  of  Nepos,  the  pluperfect  essetjudwafum  would  have  impart-d 
?,  he  seileiicethe  m.'aliing  •  How  true  icas  the  sentence  pas^sed  upon  Ly.^ander',  which 
would  mean  .-xactlv  the  contnuy  of  what  the  author  meant  to  say,  since  he  luieuded  lo 
convey  the  idea  that  the  sentence  on  Lysander  was  not  correct. 

t  (^ompare  the  passages  Cic.  Sest.  .3(},  78:  Rose.  Am.  41,  quoted  p.  612.  in  which  the 
perfect  subjunctives  used  after  verisimile  noa  est  denote  tacts  not  qualilied  by  supposi 
lions  of  any  kind. 


41G 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


kffed  by  him  as 'po^'^ibleilulllCeIIu>nU^]  ,    ..  ,    •      ,. 

a«L  ,   at  An.o>,l„.  .l,oul,l  ha,-,  ,i„r.U  to  H.y  »''l"'' X"',''    '^;'!»'. r,^',  ^;re  ',  '  a«]«i  M' 

,i.  _,  „1  ..osmet  ■j.sos  •"«•■";•  ""^,'""!';  •«„","*'«'■*  hoW.v.T,  such  hnpoiTucls  seem; 
e)«ur  l=e«<ety"!«.  Cic   Lei;.  1,  i..     '".'"",'.   ..i     /)i,~>  Jj./    niTtic  i-uin  i posse,  iilsl 

ci  crura /r*-^«  «s™<  unste:i(l  of  ««/.UI.HM.  1.^^^^^^^^ 

t;r;;cc;ri'^'  l;;crc;^^^.J.;v,,^'r;\,l;r;!.v,!;^■/^^jl'.e  cur,.ct  vea..,,.  m  t,.. 

.imriarconnccVion.l^.io  ,,as.agt.«  of  Cicero,    llcucc  the  vulgaia  jHUe,e- 

'%  'iCSp-f  u;I^r'Si.>^o^[hi;^pas.a,e  i.  wroujr,  since  '  i./a '  is  very  «tramr.-ly  u.od  I 
prLunK^t  htu  Cicl 'ro  "toV  >  dicta  '  i.f  place  of  '^/a  ',  ulf.ch  would  make  the  unperlecl 
audlrtt  a  ie>;ular  lense  by  coueeciition. 


DErENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


447 


sent  the  action  as  present  at  the  moment  of  speakincr.]--  5)  Ihe  u^e  of  the  imperfect 
Hibiiimtivc  dependent  on  u<.n-p.eteritc>f,  is  a  necessity  in  some  particular  instances 
'vhe'  lie  ^anA?a<'e  lacks  available  tonus  to  satisfy  t..e  grammatical  requirements  of  the 
aw  «,f  CO.  se(v  t  o.Vas  :  Conadamw'^  fam«  hominnm  ut  genere  etiam  Iffrmjur  Jioi, 
so  u.  ts<  '  in-e  .io  livlno  ;  I^t  v.^  alloic  this  to  the  fame  of  (izreat)  men  that  they  ^f>wm 
//aiT  Le^  A^K/i  to  be  not onlv  of  divine  mind,  but  also  of  d.vine  extraction.  Cic  Kep. 
/mif  &e^«  r.y  m^  I  ,    ,^„  ,,/     .putarenhir  could  not  assume  a  i)e.fect  {jnitati  mit) 

a^  orefiicate    " K  v  ui^    represent  the  «ct ion  '  permitte<l '  as  anterior  to  the  p.rui,ss,on 
Ti/e<nenin^    resent    coJedd.nm  '  impl.es  a  preterite,  since  ''.'«.^^'•Vr;,^^^.  "Sn  at 
ex nre-ion   places  hi.nself  with  his  mind  in  a  i)ast  nme,  a-  if  giving  the  permisMon  at 
hf  iiuL  «7  6  i  suc^i  beliefs  prevailed,  beinir.  as  it  were,  an  ex  past /ado  peruiiss  on. 
Fm-Mu-h  CO  fceut ions  neither  the  Latin  nor  the  En-Iish  language  has  inventea  a  particu- 
lar form   (t  S  e"  -    o  -past  imperatives'  as  .n  Gre.dO,  and  hence  the  pre-^ent  forms 
ust     euve.rint     it     the  lorce  of  a  preterite.- 6.  Sometimes  the  preterite  on  which 
■  pen  ient  s ulOuucti  es  are  dependent  rs  understood,  (as  in  the  examples  nu;ntioned 
n  4->4   No  8  'b   as :  Jam  vero  illud  quam  incredibile  (i.  e.  esi\  quam  absurdum  {i.  e.fais- 
L^uui  iiom*  Svdeni  facere,  qui  t.anc  urbem  intlammare  vellet   eum  lamiianssinu  m 
H  nn.  din.itJr*  •    I  w  ^  it\  and  how  absurd  (woidd  it  have  bee»)  that  he,  who 

^m/r.i  to  im^^  at  Kome,  and  to  burn  tJiis  city,  should  send  away  his  mo.t 

intimate  friend.  Cic.  Siill.  20,  57. 

1.  n..n«'stnmi  tale  e^t  nt,  vel  si^  igr^omrfvt  id  homines,  yel  si  f>^V'''^llf'l(l' nn%  nt 
men  pulcritudine  ei^.^'et  laudabile*.  Cic.  Fin.  2.1.5.-2.  Kgo  Bruti  rem-.  ^'C  «f70«  ut 
rn,mi  i.wr.ii.  nV/r/^rf^'    lb   Att   5   18.  4.— 3.  IIos  viros  rfrieo  in  suspicionem  populo  Ro- 

es-e"  di'Miitati  sua\  lb.  IMiil.  1.  6.  1.5.-  4.  EloquentiS  »esnoj\n^^  Gracchus  "aOuujei 
mri.n  iMn    em   ID  Brut.  :«.  120.-5.  />ic  quidnam/rtc//7r?/^/Mm.*  si  eo  tempore  cen^o^ 

p,.-nau-rem>5  commQnis  libertiltis  si  occasioni  potuis<et  occurrerei«  Brut  ad  Cc^ 
IV-  7  Quis  d>,hitat  qnin,  si  Saiiuntlnis  tulisscMiius  opem.  totum  in  Hispan  am  be  urn 
aver.^rvi^-'  fmnmu.rUy.  31,  7.-  8.  Dixit  Csesar,  se,  qu.^d  in  longiorem  A^^ncalat^l- 
r /!i«  />/W/'«  rei.riesent.tflrum^o,  ,.t  proxiu.a  nocte  castra  motQrum.  Csps.  B..  G.  ,1,  40. 
-%.  'Adeo  nopia  est  roart.s  Hannibal  ut,  nisi  cum  fujz^  spec  e-  »V' m'^'rnnir^f.W« 
r,.i  linn  jvH^/i/  7/-«s22  fuerit  Liv.  22,  32.— 10.  Quantum  periodom  ab  ilhs  populi>/^/m« 
S  ( Won  n  exs.nbuC^obsessMm  scissent,  suspicari  de  pneterito  quam  re  ipsa  expe- 
,  ri  "      /^      s    lb  3,    <•.-  11.  Nihil  ex  conmieatibus"  ,nperahaf^\  omn.  Irtimento  m  ur- 

Tsmu  ;  nis'convec^^.-^^  nt  Hispanonim  trans^ 
rum  exspect,Va  foret.  lb.  22.  40.- 12.  lb,  ^'l^l^or  trepula  lOnem /e«  2«  m  si^J^^^^^^^ 
h)n.'ius  insectiti  essent,  magna  clades  a^npi  potuerit.  lb.  42,  (T().—  13.  Hjec  '<;S  sii» 
i  on  e-'9  srek"sta  et  nefaria"^;!  ut,  etiamsi  lex  n<.n  esset,  ma-nopere  vifavdafvent^^. 
('i  Verr  1  42  UK-  14  Taun^^exstidt  pavor^i  ut,  si  admOtus  extemplo  exerc,tu« 
f.  ret  omi  cntTa  pof>'ennt.  Liv.  43.  4.- 1.5.  Venfum  erat  eo^^  ut..si  hostem  similem 
a  tlqui-  >IacedoMUin  re-ibus  babuisset  consul,  ma-na  clades  acajn  P^%^|^^.J  ':/J;  J- 
--  l.i  Pruticiscauuir  ad  earn  cui  graiior  nosier  adventus  erit  quam  st  nn^^^fuis^emus. 
Cic.  Att.  9,  192. 

3.     Conversion  of  Tenses. 
§  607.  Since  the  two  futures  have  no  subjunrtivcs,  they  must  be  con- 
verted into  other  tenses,  if  the  construction  requires  predicates,  referring 
to  the  future,  to  be  in  a  dependent  subjunctive.    For  this  purpose  two 
methods  are  used,  the  method  of  ordinary  tenses,  and  the  method  of 

PERTPIIRASTTO  TENSES. 


"Moralitv.-  -^  both  if.,  ami.-  ^  obvivtni,  I  am  mute  (have  J^^^V^"^^  'J^"^*;^-- .  ^jj?': 
able  estimable  -  *  the  affairs.-  « to  conduct.-  ■<  vt  non  ageretsiageret.-  «  Dat.  of  the 
fnteivM  -d  S^^^^^     -  «supply  :  in  ,u.yncidnem.-  ^»  which  would.be  disgraceful  l>y  it  ^f ^ 

i^^Ti    11  aliudaccederet.-n  that  each,  from  a diflerent  reason,  is  comprm^^ 

Uv  -  '•■'  <^  '>  /?  7H.-  ^3 1  e.  si  vita  ei  lomrior  f uisset.-  ^*  pr^sjo  vu  ahqnern,  I  i^ro  e 
^\e  sou.ething  p.  ibl.  A.- iMhe  tnost  zealouschatnpinn.- >;  If  h^^^^^^^ 
oonortunitv  — ^^  to  ward  otT.—  i«*  postp(me  to  a  later  day.-  i»  f.  e.  niM  ilia  accmis.  eiu. 
^'.oVo  lacipate.-  -  appearancU  ?^  to  return  xo.-y^  f^PP^^,;;",!  ^^Tv^the  '  ful- 
U.f,  _  25  to  convev  —  26  =  ut  HispJliii  trnnsire  parati  fuerint  (to  desert).—  ^J  ".the  lul- 
m'  ; '  of  time  i^^ui  been  expected  I  e.  if  they  had  waited  for  the  rijrh  time  -  "  cans.^ 
?onsteruation.-  ^»  by  itself.-  ^»  ought  to  have  been  can*f">'> ,«  .^^f^^JT^  .^^^^ 
the  discouragement.-  a-»  things  had  come  to  that  pass.-  3»  if  ^^e  had  been  m  eacn 
other's  company. 


•I  M) 


.mtH*U<*r«>  f 


Vn  OF  THE  HllULNCllVE. 


tt  0i  f-rim* 


it':  I» 


ttotl  'Cllil»- 


•''  «|U»' «  i.m 


I  him*.-'      ' 
-  'II  Hut  !• 


ClM.T.  liiiiMTfiMl  •iihlunrllv«'i".«l«|KMnU'iit  oiijir 

■  n  If  II..  i.... 

,  of  it  \itI»  of 

IIIIOIC 

<     .  .1» 
ihjii  II 


lor  uiltlnir»  i»  mx'ii  to 


r  ■  I"  wlnt  !•>• 


I< 


,.  ... .  it  III  III) 
ll>tHl  II  III*'  rliiU»)'  I 
«if  fiiiittii*  iifiiii)  I 
fitil*)***  '  '>•■<••'•'•••«'  ' 

ri' '      ■ 

V" 

tin 

pt 

II'. 

|.    a    J 

•  tf  tllf 


N.  I».  I.  l."»;  S>  II   tin-   pt 
-«',  urn»»-'''"'   lo  |  niN'>,  Oi:  i 

fc  piiilii  .  n»  II  III  «llrrcl  «iHroiir^r, 

U     jiiifWtTrd  llmt 

Mi.  fal.  :ii.  1.  - 

(,^  ojMn  Ik  iirimo  ,/,/ .   Ill- ortliTrd  Hum 

,,,.    I  >  all  th,i)  ,tntltt.   [..    ...    .',       Crtt»»  «tl   l'.»|»iliiini 

,/,•  III  ,  I  rfinaii^ri*.  ihtiiiuIo  imiih   iMiffft  ►mraiiunlo; 

vr..u-  I..  I'..i'1'tu..  h.'  ^ho'tM  Uh.I  hi-  mhi  l  «««Ih  it  hv  /nnnifU'i  hlni  lo 

niiiiv    rir   nir  1    n..i»i»-In  III  ^  l'n|K.rl«Mi  -iii.iiiitrtiveH  hio 

,,in  |ii.«  ()i.  W»."i  No.  U)  :  ii  \\  muif  nin»  i:«iuTa 

i--liiiii   liunr  1«  Mil  III  «♦■f//     ,.      j/i  ;    /  «/  /thin  \\  Imlo 

ulyli'H  III  itiM-aklmr «»»  whirl»  aimont  hoIumIv  him  t;hfn  any 
.     rMiiiJiiii"  tlir  lm|n'rif<i  ftdhf  U.  f. 
r  thrii-fof  tin- imp«Mfi'«l.— 4)  S<mH'- 
iiniii>«-.  Ill  naiiKi--  ui  «IimtI   F.iHiriiiriit.  an-  (lc|MMnl<'iit  on  t 

,,  tw  iIk-  fnn-r  of  itntti-ittti,  up  :  IliK  In  omi/Kifa*  IpMniinMii   Fii''  i 

f^iH  nui.lr  .>.»/  <o|.ini.f  ft  oriiRt.'  (lli-«Tf ;  >\  Hit  «li«-<'  (irrmt  «»ialor-)  you 
^vho  ./  I'trf  v»'l  what  if  nttnnt  |o  »iw:ik  with  a  full  r«>in- 

,.   hihI  Tir    linil.  K't.  .ilM  \>'HMiii,<in/>tn  -  i/"i  niinpira- 

Mhir,  lh«-  iMTfrrt  paril<i|»l.'    a  ix  imii-ual  in  thl*  in.niiii.L'.     TIm*  iinpri  fret 

»ni.iuiic(ivi.  rw,./  i-  ii-.mI  |..r  th.    .    :•  ....  i:    -   !o  M'|'ri-''nt  iIm-  paniciple  >>>isjnninfu/i  as 

«■.nilvMlrni   i..a  n-latiN.TliiiiH..  with  n  itnlfrife  ;  «'he  ili«'  pivM-iit  xi/   woiiiji   hav.-    hvii 
„,,.,|i        «  i  t.iiita  i-iat  p4i*ii  I  ««nit  (.\iitoiilii«'>  «liirn- In  h<MM»rtlln«'  rt»"/</'f, 

!•«•  «liPliirt.  im  in. 'am  ?   For  «hat   «i  inu-  in  m»  ;rr<-at   a  penalty  pioviih-d  in  the 

\a\\*  I  hat  Aiiioiiln-  shnuhl  hun  ihiml  to  ^\w  wv  nr  IhmIv.  ih.it  In-  would  cic.  CV. 

IMill    1    :>    \'i.    \h>n>i  *Mt  \\i\*  Ww  U^n-v  i'i  •  lnrna  "  </,(*"/."      Tin*  ptTff.t    '  a>if>ix  t-tl 

would  hnvc  r»'pr»-rnl«Ml  AiitonluHi»  artlon  h*  nnterior  lo  the  law:  <iwc/«'«/  would  rrpre- 
•  Mailvii:  con'idir»*   'i//'  '"  In  «he  alM.vi'-mcntion.d  '••  a^  an  iiiaccunito 

{if   faulty»  «•xprt-!'l->n.  add: :._    .   .'  thcanilmr  had.  in  wayini^  ■  <;i  '  '.at  tin- sanu- iiinu 

thoU"hr  of  'm'/Aav^/M^*"',  which  would  place  this  Inip.rfpct  undntlu'  rule  in  Uur*.  T.uikI 
mu-i"  I'von  th.ii.  I.r  con>i.I.  rrd  a  If-iilinato  c.n.Mniciion.  Siinil.irlv:  Kjiih  pn.-cpil 
I/  r  UI  noHinot  ipsof*  no.««  irr'inn^Mant.i  .r/»^/*'^*  <"•/  ut  i*i.  in»n  hoinnd.  m<1  dco //•</>«- 
•iiiur  (:=  tot  ft  /'/iVi.  Cic.  Lr^'.  1.  i2.     In  mmu.'  pa^-ai;-'^.  Ik'w.v.  r.  such  iinp.i  ficis  .•^eim 

to  he 'Inaccurately' ii^i'd  hv  incro  oviM>ii:lit.  a-:  in<i^<>l^l,  pci-Ikmumi  i  p«>ssc.  nisi 

ol  crura /rr/.M  rxx./i/  .In-'tc.ol  of  ^i»t*.  Cic.  I'hil.  13,  Vl.-Vt  Mci,-.^^  K-natiuin  a  inc  dilici, 
.»hcuin  rem  tUd  har  snif^'ilh.  Fain.  M  IT);  u-  if  '*rH/wi'  h:id  hccn  u-.-d,  whicli  ko  p-l-u- 
larlv  occiii!*  In  i*\u\\  coninTtioii!'.  that  p.rh.ips  'ttcri/m"  i;*  the  euriict  readin*,'  In  this 
oa-'i'n-.'tMHrc  i'ic.  Fain.  l.i.  Hi;  n.  07,  ami  often.  Coiiip.  p.-'J-iTi.         .,       ^  s        n 

tThc  variation  of  tfiift;  in  th-  pas-a-»''*  <>f  Sallust  i-  nia(.%'  without  any  aot^itrnahle 
ri-a-on;  hut  in  ilic  pae^a-e  Cic.  OtV.  1,  II,  the  author  pn»haidy  in.anr  to  avoid  an  ainhi- 
iriiitv  which  ini<'lit  ari-e  Ironi  the  ii^e  of  the  impcrfc»  t  (Mifj'inf,  which  ould  he  under 


i»tiM)d   in  a  hypoilicticai    f'cn? 


Cato  wrote  "to  P«»pilius  /<n;r  he  (Caio)  icould  f/hiit 
hV-"'-«Mi  ifh'e  irato»  )ro'/A/  <//Ay^^^^  him  to  remain  in  the  army'.  Thi.s  .imhiiruity  niiirht 
also  l»eav«.idcd  hy  ad»)ptin-,' the  rradiii;:  •  yM/j,?/'//- '  of  one  inferior  codc.x,  nv  l>y  readuij;, 
wlih  «eveial  codlcen.  patilur',  which  would  likewise  exclude  a  liyiunheiical  meaning,', 
antl  which  would  answer  the  rule  p.  40-2.  Ons.  3.  The  (h.cunientary  authority  of  both 
rea.iiii"^  (#//(/</'//•  and  pateittnr)  is  al)<>ut  iipial.  IJut  the  u>ai:e  ol  suhohlique  indica- 
tives o"f  thi- kind  occurs  oiilv  in  hist<»rians.  while  tlie  use  of  iinperlecl  subjunctives  in 
flmilar  connections  is  loundin  several  passa^'es  of  t'iceiu.  Hence  ihe  vuigala  'jMittre- 
<eir*  st-eins  to  deserve  prefi-nnce.  ,  i      t 

♦  Perh  M's  the  readiii::  of  this  pa«!>aj?o  1;»  wroufr,  since  '  Ma  is  very  PtrancrHy  used.  1 
presume  thit  Cicero  wrote  Ulicta'  in  place  of  'is(a\  which  would  make  the  imperfecl 
andlret  a  rej,'ular  tense  by  coueecution. 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


447 


4 


iM»nt  the  action  a»  ])rc^cnt  at  the  moment  of  ppeakinjr.]-- 5)  The  use  of  the  imperfect 
fiiltjiiiiclive.  dependent  on  non-pieieritC!«,  is  a  necessity  in  gome  particular  instances 
where  the  \n  ■  lacks  available  lonns  to  Hatisfy  t..e  «irammatical  requirements  of  the 

lavv  <ir  eoiis'  .a-  :   ( otici'/ih/iiix  lama'  homiiium  ut  geiiere  etiam  pi/farefttu7\  now 

i*oiiim  •  Hse  in;:eni<»  divTno  ;  /^  f  i/^  <ill<>w  llii-'  to  tlie  f.iiue  of  (L^reat)  men  that  theri  should 
hart  t^en  Im'Iu  rut  to  be  not  only  of  divine  mind,  hut  also  of  divine  extraction.  Cic  Kep. 
a,  2,  4.  The  Imperative  daiisti  vt..  .putarentur  could  not  assume  a  i)erfect  (jnttdfi  sint) 
as  predicate,  which  would  n-present  the  action  'permitted' as  anterior  to  the  permission. 
Tlie  ^'overniiiL'  present  '  conrtilanuiH'  implies  a  i)reterite.  since  tlie  writer,  by  usinj,'  this 
^•xpre^'^ioll.  phices  himself  with  his  mind  in  a  past  lime,  a-  if  yivino;  tlie  permission  at 
the  lime  wktrt  such  beliefs  i)revailed,  beinir,  as  it  were,  an  ex  i>m1  facia  i)ermission. 
For  such  conceptions  neither  the  Latin  nor  t!ie  En-lish  lanjruaj;e  has  inveuteti  a  particu- 
lar form,  (there  beliisr  no  •  pa^t  imperativei* '  as  in  Greek),  and  hence  the  ptesent  forms 
must  be  useil.  but  with  the  force  of  a  preterite. —  6.  Sometimes  the  preterite  on  which 
<|ependent  htibjunctives  are  depeiuh-nt  rs  inidtrntDOd,  (as  in  the  examples  mentioned 
p.  4il.  No.  K.  SI),  as:  Jam  vero  ilUid  qiiain  incredibile  (i.  e.  est),  quam  absurdum  (?.  e.fuis- 
Ket),  qui  Itonue  ca'dem  facere,  qui  liaiic  urbem  inflammare  relict,  eum  lamiliarissimum 
Miiim  dimiitere;  How  incredibe  (?w  i7»,  and  how  aiisurd  {nry/ld  it  /tare  bee  it)  that  he,  who 
judfttuifti  to  make  slaiiirliter  at  Home,  and  to  burn  this  city,  sliould  send  aw;iy  his  most 
inliliiale  friend.   (  ic.  bull.  20,  57. 

1.  Ilonestum'  tale  est  ut,  vel  si'  ignordrent  id  homines,  vel  si  ohninfvissenf^,  suS  ta- 
inen  pulcritndine  eiti<et  laiidabile*."  Cic.  Fin.  2.  15.— 2.  Ego  Bruti  rem^.  sic  ago^  ut 
mam  ip-^e  noii  (igrrrf.  lb.  An.  .5,  18.  4. —  3.  IIos  viros  ^//^//eo  in  suspicionem  populo  Ro- 
inAini''  venire,  non  inodo  metu>''.  quod  ijisiim  essef^^  turpe.  sed  aliiim  alia  de  causS  de- 
es-e"  diirnitnti  sine.  lb.  I'hil.  1.  (»,  15. —  4.  Eloquentiil  nesno  an'-'  Gracchus  liabuisftet^^ 
jiarein  iieminem.  lb.  lirut.  :\i\.  12li. — 5.  Die  q\\'\t\ivAm  fact arus  fueris  si  eo  tempore  censor 
I'uifses.  I.iv.'l. ;«. —  H.  Son  tlnltHo  qiiin  Antistius  se  ^«•«'^•/^/«/'/•«.«'^/'/m/aceriinium  pro- 
jni^rnaiorein'*  commflnis  libertatis  si  occasidni  potuis-et  occiirrere'*.  Brut,  ad  Cic.  1, 
11.—  7.  Uuis  duhitdt  (juin.  si  Sai:uiitTnis  tulissemus  opem.  totum  innisi)aniam  helium 
aiersilii^^  fueiDimsf  Liv.  .31,  7.—  8.  DiHl  Csesar,  se,  quod  in  loiipOrem  diem  collatu- 
7«>"'/>/i.H>r7'*'.  reiinesent-itflnim'-'",  et  proxiiuS  nocte  castra  motanun.  Cjps.  B.  G.  1,  40. 
—  !».  Adeo  inopiil  f-st  roitctus  H.innibal  ut,  nisi  cum  fu<r8B  specie^i  abeundum  timuisset, 
(Jalli.iin  nj)>fi/i7ri/.-"-/itcn/.  Liv.  22.  ;i2.—  10.  Quantum  period'im  ab  illis  popnlis/V  it 
si  Ctipitoliuin  al»  exsillbus  obse^siim  scissent.  suspicari  deprieteritoquam  re  ipsa  ex,»e- 
rlri  ext  jneliiis.  lb.  ;i.  Id.—  11.  Nihil  ex  commeatibus^a  .'iitperdhat'*,  onini  humento  in  ur- 
bls  miiiiltas  eonvecto-'.  lit  HispanOrum  transitio''^''/)ar(7^rt /?'<^n)'  si  maturiias^^  tempo- 
rum  exspect.lta  foret.  lb.  22.  40.— 12.  Ibi  clamor  trepidatiOnem /e«/2»  nt,  si  hostes 
loiiL'ius  insecflti  tssent,  magna  clades  accipi  potuerit.  lb.  42,  *(>. —  13.  HaiC  res  sua 
siionie-"  scelenlta  et  iiefaria  fsl  nt,  eiiamsi  lex  non  esset,  mairnopere  vitanda  fverit^^ . 
Cic.  Verr.  1.42.  lOS.—  14  Tantus  e,rs-/i(it  pavor^i  ut,  si  admntns  extemplo  exercitua 
foret.  caj/i  ca^\m  j>ofaerint.  Liv.  43.  4.— 15.  Vtntuin  erot  eo^^  ut.  si  hosrem  similem 
niitTqiii<  M.icedomim  re<ribus  liabuisset  consul.  maLMia  clades  arcijn  potuerit.  lb.  44,  4. 
--  Hi.  I'r<iticisc.amiir  ad  eum  cui  gratior  nosier  adventus  erit  quain  si  \x\\^^^  fuissemus. 
Cic.  Att.  0,  192. 

3.    Coniersion  of  Tenses. 
%  607.  Since  the  two  fiitiucs  liave  no  subjunrtiveg,  thc\^  nmst  be  con- 
verted into  other  tenses,  if  the  construction  requires  predicates,  referring 
to  llie  future,  to  be  in  Ji  dependent  Fubjunctive.     For  tliis  purpose  two 
methods  are  used,  the  method  of  okdinaey  tenses,  and  the  method  of 

rERlPIIKASTIC  TEXSES. 


1  Morality.—  '■'  both  if.,  ami.—  3  obniutiii,  I  am  mute  (have  become  mute).—  *  credit- 
able, estimable.—  *  the  affairs. —  «  to  conduct.—  ''  vt  non  ageret,  d  ageret.—  ^  Dat.  of  the 
interested  person.—  »  snpi)ly:  in  maincidnem.—  i"  which  would  be  disgraceful  by  itself 
{i.e.  si  nihil  aliiid  accedereth— ^  that  each,  from  adifleient  reason,  is  compromising  his  dig- 
iijtv.—  »-  §  423,  li.  78.—  13  i.  e.  si  vita  ei  lonirior  fuisset.—  i^  prces/o  7)ie  aHqnein,  I  prove 
to  be  something,  p.  101,  A.—  i^  the  most  zealous  champinn.—  ^^  if  he  could  have  met  an 
oiiportunitv.-  i^  to  ward  otT.-  i«  postp«me  to  a  later  day.-  i»  i.  e.  nisi  ilia  accidissent. 
—  20  to  anticipate.—  21  appearance.—  "'-  to  return  to.—  23  supplies.—  ^*  siqurdre,  to  be 
left.—  25  to  convev.—  26  =  «t  Hispani  transTre  parati  f'uerint  (/0  desert).—  '^'>  if  the  'ful- 
ness '  of  time  had  been  expected  {i.  e.  if  they  had  waited  for  the  riL'ht  time.)— 25  caused 
consternation.-  2»  by  itself.—  3"  ought  to  have  been  carefully  avoided.—  3i  so  great  was 
the  discourairement.—  32  things  had  come  to  that  pass.—  3S  if  ^yg  had  been  in  each 
other's  company. 


as 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


]?v  the  .nclhod  of  ordiiiary  tense.,  the  future-prescnt  .s  treatc.l  as  .f  it 
^v...;  anordin<,r!,pre»entM\n'^convenva  into  a  prrseut  or  .mperfect  snb- 
,  Klivraccording  to  the  law  of  consecution  (A'.  07).    The  l„.ure  perlec 
"::':«.  a^  >.-  it  ;ere  an  orain„r,  „erfie,  hein,  converted  int..  a  perteet 
or  pUiperfect  snUjuuclivc  according  to  the  law  ol  consccut.on  (K.  98). 

Cihe  n.e.hod  of  periphrastic  tenses  the  fu.ure-present  .s  turned  >n,o 
the  subjunctive  of  the  present  or  imperfect  tense  of  the  P^V'^^  /''- 
inre  (m  130  131,  R.  Ul.  142),  according  to  the  law  of  consecution  {11.  9  , 
OBS  1)  S  nee  the  suhjunetivos  of  the  ;.,/<W  and  ;,.;,.</...  of  the  per,- 
nhr«t  c  future  are  appropriated  by  the  hypothetical  preterites  (It.  9G, 
oTs  3  tUis  method  cannot  be  applied  to  the/«.,«-;«,/..* ;  nor  can 
it  be  applied  to  the  pa.^>ivc  toiee  of  either  future,  since  a  penphrasi.c  fu- 
ture  of  the  passive  docs  not  exist  (It.  97,  Obs.  3). 

aulhor.  in  « l.icl.   nslnnre  the  J'';'  ^Z, '^  \\'    V,, V,  \^^^^^^^  to ,h..  .penkiTV tin,,.  .a<  for 

pi.niii-  after  the  i„i.e^l.ekeii  of  w.  I  o   t  H  ni^       1      1    r  ,  i_  ,„.  .,,„.,.  ,|„.y  ,l„  not  re- 

Tnst.  th^-  Pre,iie:Ue.of  e,mseou  ,v.  la-e  .   1..  >..^lo  l^"'  ;J      -,  „^^,  „,^.  „  f,„„r„  ,„,.0  if  the 

pre.c.,l.the  actjonas  f  n  n  e  >  ^^  ^^;,,tA  ,  V'"  ■■'■'■''•■"'  *"''""'-  .''''""  •'"  '","  V'^ 
clause,  m  wliicli  tliey  st  i  l.lie  S?^)  ',■',', -■.„,,,  „,  .,,.„„  ,„  „rl>e  ess.t  <iiii;)/iJoi"'i»'.  Li»- 
„.,„e  qn..t,.,l  .ihove  :  •  T,l,ui,te»  1  ''>  .y'  '  ",  V'\  [.  ",>  ■"«•  I  i,Mh-|,en<lei,tly.  woehl  t.ilve  it» 
«,:W\,hee.H,see,tuveclatse.'      m    «  «^O^^^^ 

predieute  in  tlie  i;„,*  i^ff/  atlrt  not  in  ''''/'""      "....w,.  is  irnnired.     liut  if  the  ^-amc 

k;;:-ii^'<^isK;;;«fXi^^^^^^ 

k;^\ta"-i.l',,v;:,f:.;i^'i;ini.:^.''h;u^  acco,',lin«  to  me  method  of 

'"  R:r%-'Tn'cm,veHira  FrTriiK.rn,.:sKNT  into  a  subjunctive,  onDi- 
^-v^frTt.N«F"a  ,    used  nifUie  p.edi.ale  sutiids  to  its  priii<i|,a  pre.Uoate 
?■  \       ia^^',„      r  •!  DKrFNDENT  FiTVitE,  SO  that,  by  takin-  Mh  predi- 
c"tero  1    i     t   e  s,;  ,j^;cfive  coniu.,ti..n,  it  would  be.a  dependent  luUire 
af deli"  ed  Iv  the  rule  p.  353,  K.  7« ;  2)  if  the  action  ■^/•^"■«'^^  "">;,';,;' 
fnt   re  lecessilv  or  .liitv,  or  as  the  object  of  a  ooinniaiul  or  wish.-  1  Kiii- 
!^    it\4it    eiiies  a rc'nse,    1)  in  relalioiis  not  belontxin-  to  those  nientioned, 
f"  it- U  e  ic.im    inplii's  imthing  Imt  futurity  independent  "f  <"'";'.    -';• 
tion«  <  r  of  o  l.er  fit  ure  aclions :  2»  in  all  the  instances  wbeti  'I"'  ;'>';'; 
cx~d  in  lependeiillv,  would  have  a  predicate  in  the  >;^:;=|';     <.';^'  '■ 
i^?l  UK  in  it.  pn.per  ii.eaniii.s  /.  ..  if  the  aeiioj.  is  n-pr-ented  both  a»  fu- 
ture  and  as  cma-eiml  at  the  speakers  iniie  (s  •>(».,  «■  13.». 
0«;.  1.  The,e  ptinciple.  are  >l"-,''m;.'-l  J»  '.lirv.'^J^Cnni'onmra^j'iensJ^^accordit.g 

to^it^-isi^^eirtt^^-'is^r  he^ ;  o  ;^;i.  )^^ 

ti^^X^::^:.:^  Sm^^lln^-Sn'liel^^'he  IdiJe^d  ^,^1.;:;  tL  .<  ,..  peH„i,ia.ie  fu. 
ture.  ,  ,      ♦.  ^. .„...-;,.;  on, 1  it^  ofinivaltMit!!  (/?  82.  Ods.  1.  f/U//u'«.VN  take 

ordinary  tens<.s  alt  .ouL'h,  acTonlMV^  to  the  K   -1  >     ^/l     \»  !      .;.iV^,  ^u,,,,  ,«  vc'rl.s  of 
that  tl.ey  sho.iUl  take  y)^nMra,s/i<   um.|.c>      I  ut  t    .  |^^^^^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

^;:;;;rs;i':^;lj;;^uon:^S^U^^^  ?;lr  i^;^.:;u^:/"e;^onc  j;  ...^  aiway. ..... 


DEPENDENT   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


449 


i 


ordinary  tenses.  Thus  it  must  be  explained  that  verbs  of  fearing  take  ordinary  tenses, 
a?  •  Non  vereor  ne  nan  gcribendo  te  expham  (not  fxpklurus  nm)  ;  I  am  not  afr  id  that 
iikll  not  (be  able  to)  satiafe  you  with  my  letters.  Cic.  Fam.  2,  1,  1.—  It  seems,  however, 
thit  Dcriphra^tic  tens^es  were  colloquially  used  in  clauses  dependent  on  verbs  of  fear- 
in<'  Thus  we  read  in  MatiusV  letter  to  Cic.  (Fam.  11,  28.  8)  :  Non  verem-  ne  mcie  vitse 
niodo-^tia  »(?;-?/ w  t-aliturant  in  ])osterum  contra  lalsos  rumOres  (inst.  of  valeat^ ;  I  am 
not  afraid  that  niv  modesty,  in  the  fnture.  tcill  he  of  ihsnffidenf,  .^trenffth  against  false 
rumor-  —  Frequen'ily  the  futuritv  of  the  action  is  intimated  by  the  hmnforem  in  place 
ol  es'om  lin  the  historians) :  Timor  in  exercitnm  incidit  ne  simul  cum  nge  et  Carthagi- 
nieiUibu-  forti  bellandum  ;  The  fear  beJoll  tlie  army  lest  it  inirjht  be  necessary  to  fight  at 
the  riame  time  with  the  king  and  with  the  Carthaginians.  Liv.  29.  24.—  See  Ex.  1-3. 

3»  Oblique  clauses  with  quin  alter  non  dubito  and  its  equivalents  (p.  388,  Obs.  1,  a) 
"cnerallv  take  periphrastic  tenses,  except  if  the  predicate  is  represented  as  an  action 
wliieh  should  be  done,  in  which  instance  ordinary  tenses  are  used  :  Mihi  non  est  dvbium 
(iiiin  renturu;  non  sitd  legiOnes  ;  It  is  not  doubtful  to  me  but  that  the  Iciricms  will  come. 
Cic  Fam.  2.  17.  5.—  Quuin  nee  milii  nee  fratri  dubiiim  essei  qiiin  Brundusium  contende- 
rtnv/s*  when  neitlier  1  nor  my  brother  had  any  doubt  but  that  we  should ]jrocted  to  Brun- 
du^iui^n  lb  Att.  8,  11  2>.  3.  (The  predicate  co///^//cf<^7tw?/<*  of  the  Quiii-daiise  is  rep- 
resented as  a  rule  for  the  speaker's  future  conduct.]  Often,  however,  ordinary  tenses 
are  used  in  these  clauses  :  (Dixerunt)  )-e  non  dubitdre  quin  Ariovistus  de  omnibus  obsi- 
dil)us  <'ravis^imum  suppliciiim  suinat ;  they  did  not  dmibt  but  that  Ariovistus  ivould  in- 
flict the  severest  punishment  on  all  the  hostages.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  31.  (About  the  use  of 
the  present  consecuti<m  see  p.  419.  420.  Obs.  7.  6  and  c):  Sometimes  both  methods  are 
combined  in  the  same  sentence,  as  in  Ex.  7.  See  Ex.  4-10. 

4»  0»)liqiie  clauses  containin<r  dependent  questions  referring  to  the  fnture,  irenerally  take 
pennhrastir  teiuses.  as  :  Nee  ubi,  nt-c  quando  te  sim  rl-iiruti  possum  suspicSn  ;  I  have 
no  idea  where,  or  when  I  sh<dl  see  von.  Cic.  Att.  11.  13.  2  —  Lacedjemonii  qiiasivSriint 
num  -eetiiim  esset  mori  jwohihiturus ;  The  Lacedtemcnians  asked  whether  he  would 
piohilAt  them  also  to  die.  lb,  Tusc.  5,  42.  LIndependently  :  Avni  jnvhib^bis  etc.]  But 
if  the  answer  expected  on  a  dependent  questi(m  referring  to  ihe  future,  is  a  rule  lor  the 
ix'r-on  askino-  (p.  :39<».  e),  ordinary  tenses  must  be  used  accordiuL'  to  the  second  rule  in 
Ji    97  •  Hannibal  circumequitat 'urbem  ad  visendum  qua  maxime  parte  aggrederetur ; 


tiuiii«<  nine-  Vou  show  that  you  .-ue  trviiig  to  ^'uess  what  rea.son  1  will  give  to  Caesar  m 
ivard  to  mv  dejiarture.  Cic.  Att.  11. 12,  1.  [By  changing  ^im  allaturus  inio  afferam.  tlie 
n.rs-jM'-e  would  have  the  meaninir  'that  you  are  weighing  the  question  what  reason  / 
Ihoiild  give  to  Cie.-ar'].— Deviations  from  this  rule  occur  (a)  if  the  use  ol  an  ordinary 
t.iKr  in  que-tions  implv. Jig  a  future  rule  would  be  ambiguous,  \u  which  instance  peri- 
Dlirastic  tenses  are  preferred,  as  :  f:o  minus  habeo  necesse  cogitate  quid  simjacturm  ; 
The  ie*^  it  is  necessarv  tliat  I  should  think  of  '  how  to  act '  (i.  e.  that  1  should  decide  now 


form  of  the  verb^.  Cic.  Att.  9,  18,  4,-  Hence  if  the  futurity  of  the  action  is  implied  in 
the  gorertting  verb,  ordinary  lenses  may  be  used  in  iilace  of  the  periphrastic?,  winch  is 
always  the  case  if  an  interroirative  clause  is  made  dependent  on  fxspectare,  as  :  Orat  ut 
Quid  in  lU^vtxui^gerdtur  exspectem  ;  He  beseeches  me  to  tvait  (till  I  know)  what  will  be 
done  in  Spain.  Cic.  Att.  10.  8.  1.— Quid  hostee  conAVu  caperent  exspectabat  ;  He  waited 
(to  know)  what  plan  the  enemy  would/olloiv.  Cse^  B.  G.  3,  24.—  See  hx.  12-19. 

■))  Oin<i-obli(iue  final  clavse-^  alwavs  take  ordinary  tenses  according  to  the  second  rule 
of  11  '»7  since  the  i)urpose  in  the  mind  of  the  doer  of  an  action  alwaj-s  represents  Ins 
wish'.  For  Ex.  See  p.  40.").  408. 


r 


there  are  niaii'v  who  irill  inform  Cie-ar.  Cic.  Att.  11,  7.  5.- Romulus  docSbat  vir-ines 
Sablna"^  eo  meliOres  viios  usilras  quod  adnimrussit  pro  se  quisque  ut  parentiura  expleat 
de<i(ieriiim  •  K<nnulus  explained  tiiat  they  would  have  so  much  better  husbands,  becmse 
every  one  would  stiive  to  efface  by  his  own  conduct  their  longinc;  for  their  parents.  Liv. 
1  9  —  Ego  eis  ita  mandaram  ut,  quum  lam  longe  abfuturvs  essem,  ad  me  ne  referrent ;  J 


450 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


451 


had  directed  them  not  to  report  to  mo: .^ince  T  icotiM  be  abf^ent  for  f^o  \ovjr  r  t\mc.  a^^^ 
naa  oirerreu  ini  u  I.  sciiti-i.te,  were  n-ii.ix.rnl,  it  would  not  admit  ol  a  perl- 

b  ,,  le  ^i-dause,   denoting  -1«  t/>e  ecent  th<it\  or  ^  with  the  proviso   /lat    (p.  40.,  Ob>. 
•     ad  in  a     kind  ""  co,>Ui/io,ml.  and  ffwporal  clav-^es  (introdneed  l.v  .t,  f/»u?n   dam 
;  H/M-v//«  n  onli     rv  tcn-es  nu.^t  l.e  us,-d  iltln-y  are  suboblupu',  even  ,f  tlu-ir  pr^-dieatea 
Snof  Son^to  Ihi  ^il'leuUenf  tn.ur.s,  a.  :  It•^^^^.^I)en,et^a.U.n^  .   r^r/.^.^J./vv^ 
re-'ein    triiGcit  •  Isidonis  erof^s.-d  over  to  D(  meina^-  tn  the  <-/>/// /A«^   the  kin<x  in   ni^ 
[nTrh   \-WJ  m*^  Liv.  36,  -20.-  Decreverunt  patri->*  ut  hoc  sic  ratimi  fss.t  s% 

at  e<  «rtG^^^^^^  ^1^'creed.  that  this  .hould  be  valid  under  the  proviso 

tl^^!    thSsJnit^S  L.v.  1,17.-  Dieebant  nihil  e>se  ni-oln,  ^wwm  rc-lniine 

Snes  mi^-M  u^  (not  a/,rV/«A^.^>..^/).  hanc  ie-^^ioneni  Mih  ^are-n.s  ado- 

rlH  f  They  ta  d  that  i.  was  (would  he)  an  easy  matter  to  atlaek  tl.at   eo;.o.i  umle    t^  e  r 
h    r  ,a<re  while  the  other  h-L'ions  would  be  at  a  «;reat  distance.  Cies.  B.  (t.  3  5.-Nisi  forte 
ei  po fest  pe  ?uad^-  e  It   d^'nn  oratOn-s  eant  redeani,  quh-scat  ;  Unless  P»*'»'«P^  Ije  ;;an  in- 
diK-e  him  to  suspend  his  operations  u^e  the  lu-otiators  a;«  (unlllHi)qmnqtoandfio. 
Cic    M     10  1  3  -  Cesar,  an'tqmmi  pl.nes  civitiltcs  cominmrent.  latius  sibi  diMr.buen- 
dumtxercU.nn  putkvit ;  aesar\h„u,iht  it  best  to  .Ustribute  ^^^!^^'^  ^^^ 
before  a  -leater  n umber  of  states  woidd  join  the  cON.ynracy.  Ctes.  B.  (».  3.  10      L> "  a»  in 
dcp«.de.lt  connection,  anter/uam  and  ;>n./.v<7,,./m  cannot  take  the  f "j" J^ '  »^J";;«  ''^Jj^' 
liquc  connection,  the  periplirastic  luture  is  not  admissible,   bee  p.  3o4,  Obs.  4,  a  ,  p.  W)^, 
^021  foil.]  See  Ex.  2-2-27. 
r    Bfpendfnt  FUTunEs»,  i.  <».  those  which  derive  their  force  as  f'jfwres  from  their 

« mm"    p'^ di™  "T.  ,"  .<"VS;-«  o  \:hel IHM-  their  m,M.,l  is  u>lr<u-f.,l  by  , h.-  ■■nhjnnyy., 

irouldconsidtr  him  to  be  in  war  with  him.  Cies.  D.  G.  1,  44.  [Iiidepi  lul  niiy  .  .>  •  i  "*^«''"'^» 
VllmZiwlM^^        Comn.emoravit  quantum  .^»//^  periculi  «<//////•?/•<  >■;  '";Y '^ 
m'^^  /rm-  I  le  haV  imntioned  the  -reat  dan-er  I  irould  inrnr,  if  /  ^''''''''''^''^r.^^'lfj^ 
f/<<yi6tm/i,   11^11»^^  flmlenendently  :  Mairnum  periciilum  a(/7/y?.<  si  in  Afr - 

'  i^^rS  'il     -  J  ii^^o-TJx  dJil  ne  id  consilium  cai^rentcOus  extempio  ,>*.^; 

?.iV.  T  h.   ki\p/a"ked  Iheni  t.)  consider  the  matter,  bst  they  mlul'f  tah'  meamres  ot 
vhi  li  A  V  zri  AAn^^ant    •  r  V  .^.^  Liv.  3r,. '.»  [In<le,,endently  :  Xe  rnpintU  consdium  cujus 

EBJ a  SI  ^:;ji^';^  ?r;rs:^:;?;^;c^';ri!^^^^^ 

fl  de  endiitlv-  TV/i^Ai'/'/wi/ze  est  in  concilium,  ^Wynxmm^  ddibemturjis  ent  f  -  W J^^ 
hs?<\vinW^^^  a  dav  for  deliberation.    The  present  conception  is  ««ore  Pepa- 

?at  H   l^o  n    he    n^^ac^  present  conception  beini:  r.-presented  by  the  copula  (^50., 

/f  IW  But  e  en  the  c(  p.ila  must  be  in  the  future,  because  the  conception  represened 
hv  !;  has  the  relaiion  of  a  depe.xlent  future,  if  required  to  be  in  the  Bubjuuclive,  the 
copula  erit  is  uirned  into  a  present,  accordinj?  to  rule.] 

D  \Li  oTiiFB  CLAUSES  whose  predicate»  are  reprepented  as  future  in  rejrard  to  the 
8ne;ker's  th  e  m  St  take  periphrastic  tenses,  as  :  [Kelativ,;  clause]  It.-.que  ^"*  « 1  «J 
timp.i'  fori!  nan  y^S/  in  consilil.  hnmir,..,  is  extemplo  ad  M,  li.ebmm  mis,  t ;  A'^»  '  "« 
heWiO  wo>dd  up  to  this  ti.ne.  shape  hlsrourse  accordin-  to  circumstance^  (i.  e.  «  /^''9'^' 
he  w^o  deci\le  a^^  his  plan  of  action),  sent  instantly  word  to  M.  Btebius.  Liv.  3h  8^ 
_  fModal  Ut-c la  st^^^^^  cam  ratiOnem  vit;e  nos  fortQna  deduxit  uf.  ''V™'^>'''''V",-r;''/w 
ho  n  num  de  nXs/i/.7/v..vsi  Our  fate  has  placed  ,i«  in  such  a  condmon  «>f  ^l^.  M 
there  nill  be  a  perpetual  comment  of  the  public  about  us.  Cic.  Qu.  l^r  1,  1,  ^f  J^^uxl 
imelli"'0  cur  Kullu^^  quemquam  tribQuum  interces.Qrum  putet,  quum  luterce.eio  .tulth 


\ 


2 
I 


^afe 


tiam  intercessOris  significafnra  fit,  non  rem  ivipedifnra  ;  I  do  not  understand  why 'Rallns 
should  be  of  the  opinion  that  any  tribiino  will  veto  the  measure,  «/*c<;  a  xexo  uauld 
(will)  only  betray  the  stupidity  of  him  who  vetoes,  but  not  prererii  the  measure.  Cic, 
Le<:.  Atjr.  2.  12.—  See  Ex.  34-30.—  But  in  colloquial  style  ordinary  tenses  are  often  em- 
l)l(rve(iVheVe  the  rule  would  requin-  a  periplirasiie,  as  :  Ergo  hoc  quidem  est  piofectnm 
nt  noil  ihodo  tuto.  vt-rum  etiani  palam  nari(/a7et/n/s ;  Hence  so  mucli,  at  hast,  has  been 
etVccted  tiiat  w-  t^hall  depart  m-t  only  safely,  but  also  openly.  Cic,  Att.  10.  4.  10.  [Here, 
according  to  rule,  and  for  the  sake  of  clearness,  a  periphrastic  tense,  or  the  addition  of 
po.<se  would  have  been  required,  since,  as  the  clause  is  exprest^ed,  the  i)redicate  naviqa- 
rtmus  must  be  understood  as  a  i)ast.  or  as  a  present  act.  But  as  the  receiver  of  the  let- 
ter could  not  mistake  the  sense  of  the  writer,  the  latter  allowed  himself  the  use  of  the 


Wise  //     Ut   llflf  l/Lnfltf  lu   siiujK  vjiu     «h  iumi    tn.i^ui«.iiii_     i,v/   HIV,    1. 

Cic.  Att.  10,  8,  2."—  (iuid  enim  essevi  de  pace  dictUrus,  dixi:  For  I  have  said  what  / 
ivoidd  t)€  noiiig  to  say  {i.  e.  si  legatiOnem  susceptunis  essem,  if  1  were  going  to  accept  the 
appointment ;'  the  w  riter  being  resolved  not  to  accept  it).  Cic.  Att.  10,  1,  3. 

Obs.  2.  In  place  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  of  the  periphrastic  future,  the  form  with 
forem  is  sometimes  used  by  the  historians,  as  :  Incertum  eiat  quo  ?nissuTi.  classem  Car- 
thiiginienses/o/Yn^;  It  was  uncertain  wiiere  the  Carthaginians  would  send  their  fleet. 
LivT;iO,  2  —  /r/rfm  is  sometimes  used  in  place  of  €.s\«<=//i  if  a  predicate,  heing  in  the  rela- 
tion of  a  dei)eiid<-nt  future,  is  represented  as  viicertain,  as  :  Dixit  Tullus  usflium  se 
eOrum  opera  si  helium  cum  Vejeiitibus/w*?/ ;  Tullus  said  he  would  accept  their  aid  if 
there  should  be  a  war  w  ith  the  Vejentians.  Liv.  1,  20. 

Obs.  3.  Since  the  periphrastic  future  does  not  exist  in  the  passive  form,  this  voice 
cannot,  generally,  be  used  if  the  ])redicate,  according  to  the  above-mentioned  rules  re- 
quires a  periphrastic  tense.  In  this  instance  the  sentence  must  he  recast  by  turning  the 
passive  C(mstruction  into  an  active  one.  But,  sometimes,  ordinary  passive  presents  or 
imperfects  are  u-ed  where  the  rules  require  periphrastic  tenses  (which,  of  course,  occurs 
only  if  the  future  meaning  of  the  predicate  is  made  clear  by  the  connection),  as  :  Dixit 
Curio,  nihil  es-c  certius  qiiam  ut  omnes,  qui  lege  Ponipeja  condemnSti  essent,  restilve- 
rentiir :  Curio  said  that  notbinir  was  so  certain,  as  the  rthabiUtation  of  those  (literally 
'more  certain  than  tliat  those  would  be  rehabilitated)  who  have  been  condemned  under 
the  I'ompejan  law.  Cic.  Att.  10.4.8.  [Independently:  Restiluerdur  ei  qui  condemnati 
sunt.  It  ilie  piedicate  were  active,  it  would  require  a  peiiphiastic  tense;  hut  the 
chauo'e  intoan  active  construction  would  he  awkward,  and  hence  the  author  preerred  the 
ordinarv  pa-sive  imperfect.  althouLMi  this  tense  might,  grammaticallv,  he  understood  to 
be  coincident  with  the  time  of  '(/?>ir.]  Sometimes  a  passive  predicate  referring  to  the 
future  niav  be  turned  into  a  predicate-infinitive  paraphrased  with/ore  J//  and  an  ordinary 
passive  subjunctive:  as  :  Qui  dubitSre  deeveuiu  possim  quum  \\\^x\\\\\c  fore  vide  am  ut 
ipsi  oppu(fueidur ;  How  can  I  doubt  about  the  issue,  since  they  nill  be  themselves  attacked 
hv  those  who  etc.  Liv.  3»;,  7.  [Here  hv  introducing  'rit/ta/M '  as  governing  predicate,  the 
clause  has  assumed  the  form  of  an  ihtlnitive  clause,  so  that  the  regular  circumlocution 
with  fore  ut  mav  be  applied  to  it.]  Some  grammarians  assert  that  to  passive  future 
predicates  a  circumlocution  hv  means  of  the  finite  impersonal  'futuruTH  est  vt '  may  al- 
wavs  be  applied,  so  that  for  instance  the  above-mentioned  passage  miirht  have  been 
expressed  '  quuju  futurum  sit  nt  ip.-i  oppuqnentur\  But  examples  of  such  a  usage  do 
not  occur  in  the  classical  authors,  although  there  would,  theoretically,  be  no  other  ob- 
jection a-'ainst  this  circ.imlocuti(m  but  the  awkwardness  of  its  form.  A  future  predi- 
cate w  hich  is  peripJirastic  t/i/  its  own  force  can  neither  be  expres.^ed  by  the  fhiite  circum- 
locution with  futurum  est  lit.  nor  hv  the  infinitive  circumlocuti(m  whh  fovFut,  since  in 
both  circumlocutions  the  rop'//rt  is  in  the  future  while  tiie  veyb  itnelf  U  in  an  ordinary 
tense  ;  whereas  the  periphrastic  luture  if  used  in  its  proper  sense  requires  the  copula  to 
be  in  an  ordinary  tense  and  the  verb  to  be  in  a  future  form.  (See  §  507,  R.  139.) 

1.  Quum  HmTrfid  ne  vi  capfis  nulla  apud  victOrem  venia  esset.  dedidCrunt  se.  Liv, 
30  9-2  Hasdrubal  reritus  est  ne  ])arvum  vinculum^  ( oe  nnptite^  essetd^.  lb.  29.  23. 
—  Z'  P^riculum  erat  ne  vera  emanarfht*.  lb.  29.24.-4.  Plane  dulitCire  non  po^sum 
ovin  tibi  amplitildos  istasollicitQdo«  futurasit.  Cic,  Fam.  .3,  10.  3.—  5.  Non  dubifoqvm 
Csesar  lenis'  in  guintum/«^«n/.v  sit.'lh.  Att.  11.  12,  3.—  0.  Dubita,  si  potes«  9?nn  ille 
caidem  faclurus  sit.  lb.  10,  14,  3.—  7.  Duhium  non  est  quin  BceOti  et  Thessah  ad  con- 

»  A  weak  tie.—  =  nuptials.—  s  miixht  prove  to  he.—  ■•  vera  emdnant,  truth  leaks  out.— 
•that  mao-nificence.— «  an  annovance:  a  rare  construction,  instead  ol  the  more  usual 
abstract  dative  isoUicitudini).—  '■lenient.—  «*  virtually  =  '  dubitare  nonpotes  \ 


452 


USE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


DEPENDENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


cul  abcr-scnt.  vim  ('X«;r(-i  MS  ^»»M -^lj\y' ^,',     '.=      ...   ,,  o  _\)    yon  d'thifo  q>iin  iwpe- 
i.e^cio.  lb.  10,  4, «;.- T^.  Ls^l  bum  ^*'"^.'    -^^.^^^^-l^  7      Alt  8   14  'Z-U.  IVrtinot  me 


iin.  nee  quo- 


ri8  non  d.ibitJlre,  ..i  co.iMiles    '^'''^''^' '/j"^^  "^^^^^^^  Vc.  2.-  '^.  Su.tinui  me^» 


turn  priMiua.  socn-tflti^,  ••^■V\='-^';^;;^J^'".^,.^  "^^fL  2M    Dix  i  Ca'.nr  .i  pra-t.-rru  nemo  ...- 
n>ulO>r.  ta.uen  sc  earn  .ohl  decuna  Uir.r.n;^        /  '^  V,,.  '.u-  .ni  Ja/Ved  servis  etiam  re- 


Cic.  A I 
turn  p 


b'riivi  liaidirirm  tit.  roiiil><-j.  »'1  t:'C-  Alt.  «,  IS  t'.  1 


7?.m    9S    To  llie  conversion  of  the  fiti:i:e tekfixt,  only  llie  nietliod 
oTdinxry  tenses  ran  be  applicnl  (^  GOT),  since  tlu^^ul^imu^^ 

ton,e<l.-  -^  abstract  .lat.ve.  =  l>''^'J»^L^.^A"'--;.i^.!.'l!..-i  !!'5  n7=.kc.  tl?e  denn.nd  o.i  me. 


of 


vuut^-M.—     V      ■.!     •  ..-   ......v       4  tn  wiH'rced  —  s  nTakc  tlie  demand  on  me. 

measure  tluir  ^trengt  i  uith  yo.ir  an  n.-     to  ^mc^  ^^..j,^  ^.^.^ 

_  .  ,,.,  =  «cr/V/er..-  '  was  l^  ^Jf«-.^:'V^'!!:.::!'X~,.o?v     l!teralirtl>e  beak  o'f  the  .hip  \ 

'         '       •       •'•-.-       n  regndre.  to 


tiers  of  oarsmen.-  »  ro.v//a  tw,ivr^e?f.  to  turn 


was  uuerlv  msulbeient.—  »*  loi  the  pust  iit.         /„  '•     '  l' niti-s  —  '»  cro-8  over,  i    e.  to 
disease  of  VucU  "^aH-.MU.y.-  J^at  an  eaHv^^^^^^^^  the  name  of 'a  villa, 

sh()wawiilin-iiessMowardstl.e  e>peaol    u  t^^^o  R^^^^^^ 

to  trv  the  plan,  i.  e.  had  reso  ved  to  try     'n.e  cl.ms.  '  ^^f ;  • -^    ;'.  .'^^'_  ^3  j}onue  U  not  an 

g,es;nn,><  evat,  is  <,uas,->ubobliqne.     K^  !!T(\3v\^^J\om~^^^^^  i-  "■  ^l»^'  l^'""*^" 

auribuiive  uenitive,  but  a -.Mutive  ot  place  <»»»«  »;     -'     "     ''i,r;_35«^^ 

thr<,ne).-  3V  .n,>ply  :  ccmsilns  -^^^^^^^"^^     ,,   bl  c  -  "  1  am  working;  .hat 

dtru  !<•  shrink  Irom  nothini:.-  3«  n.  Hie  '  ^^''^a^V;^, '   , '/.!  Ju,e  a<'ainst  I'.m.pev  is  (will 

Ciesar  permits,  i.  e.  for  Oesar  s  perinissinn.-  3=*  if  anv  J^J^'V^^    \.  -"  ;„  vL  40  j,-  you 

b  0  b.f. .re  tlie  Senate  (or  '  discussed  in  the  ^^''^c '  .-  « M^  a    «^^^^^^  •  ^^^^,^ 

aniicipate  the  uta-asines.  about  ^'»'^'^*-\'',:^;;, !;•-„'' f  '       ^^Se  -  «^U^^^^^^^  ^^/Pr. 

_  4-2  «Vability.-  *^  idvimd  ^"''•^■/''^''•'';.,,V\  'Vu-r'"- v  b^^^  a  situation  in  whicU 

•)/)  .inn  eit^ip  iM^<<lmm  to  be  more  careful,  lest  we  may  nt  piuceu  in»  ,         . 
we  Sinot  K^-  ^^  accessory  predicate  :  by  our  Ublraciion.-  ^«  a  mulch. 


fT 


453 


perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  periphrastic  future  are  appropriated  by  the 
]>re(licates  of  Injpothetical  iieriocU  (II.  90,  Obs.  3).  Hence  a  conversion  of 
the  ftitu re- perfect  into  a  subjunctive  tense  is  only  possible  if  ihe  future- 
perfect  has  the  force  of  a  dependent  future  as  defined  by  ihe  rule  p.  5353, 
li.  70,  the  Latin  lantrunge  having  no  forms  at  its  disposition  which,  for 
expressing:  tlie  idea  of  a  future-perfect,  are  equivalents  of  the  periphrastic 
future  (Oijs.  1).  If  dependent  future-perfects  tire  to  be  used  in  clauses  re- 
quiring a  predicate  in  the  subjunctive,  they  are  changed  into  an  ordinary 
perfect  subjunciive  if  a  present  consecution  (or  a  logical  tense  referring  to 
the  time  of  the  speaker)  is  required  ;  and  into  an  ordinary  pluperfect 
subjunctire  if  a  tense  of  preterite  conseciiiioii  is  required  (OiiS.  "Z). 

Ob3.  1.  Since  fnture-pcrfcct^  with  independent  force  are  of  very  rare  occurrence  in 
Latin  (p.  '^W).  Ji.  74.  Obs.  1),  the  necessity  of  usinj;  them  in  sentences  reqiiirin<^  the  sub- 
junctire, occurs  more  rarely  etill.     If  they  are  used  with  the  force  of  E\vj[,\\A\  future-pres- 
ents (p.  *)4U,  Obs.  2),tiii'y  may,  even  in  the  indicative,  almostalways  be  replaced  by  Latin 
fiHure-presents,  andheiice,  in  t^ubjunctivc  clauses,  will  be  convened  according:  to  the  rules 
for  futMi'f-preseiits.     Thus  almost  all  the  sentences  witii  independent  luiure-perlects, 
quoted  \).'M\)  and  3o0,  m.y  be  chani^ed   into   periphrastic  ^)re^ents   or  imperfects  (as: 
(^uum  postea  in  luec  Puteolana  reyna  renatigatilrus  ettstin  or  sim  ;  quum  is  bellum  con- 
fctilrus  sit  qui  Aiitonium  opproscrit,  etc.).     Sometimes  howevera  chanire  of  this  kind 
will  not  be  a(iiuissil)Ie.    Tims  the  sentence  '  Dum  tu  h:cc  leges,  ego  ilium  Ibrtasse  conve- 
tieto  iiK  3.!>,  Obs.  1)'  would  neither  allow  the  chan::e  of  con vcfi era  into  a  periphrasiic 
presCiit  or  imperf«'cr,  n^r  into  an  ordinary  perfect  or  pluperfect.     For  'Nihil  certius 
est  quam,  dum  tu  ilia  legas.  ego  ilium  co/fi>fiturus  sim''  would  place  the  time  of  the 
meeliriLT  ^//A'/-  the  reading  of  the  letter ;  and  " conre.-terim''  would  i)lace  the  time  of  the 
meeting  Ix-fore  the  speaker's  time,  tiince  nothing  indicates  that  a  future  time  is  meant. 
There  is,  in  fad.  no  verl)al  form  at  the  di-position  of  the  Latin  language,  to  change  fu- 
ture perfects  of  tiiis  kind  into  a  siil)junciive  mood.     In  passive  j)redicates  coniaiiiing 
puch  lutuH'-perfects.  Cicero  has  once  tried  to  coml)ine  the  form  of  the  periphrastic  fu- 
ture of  ilie  copula  with  tlie  past  participle  of  the  verb,  in  a  sentence  very  similar  in 
meaning  to  tiie  passaire  quoted  above  :  Non  dui)ito,  quin,  legente  te  has  litteras,  C07i- 
fecta  jam  rvt>- /utilra  sit  (Cic.  Fam,  H,  Vi).  where  '•  conftcta  futura  sit  Ms  vsiudly  under- 
stood to  havt!  tlie  lone  of  a  subjunctive  of  the  future-pcrlect  (I  do  not  doubt  but  that 
the  !natt'-r  will  have  been  accomplished  when  yuu  will  read  this  letter).     But  this  new 
foim,  tried  by  Cicero,  has  found  no  imitators,  and  Cicero  himself  has  used  it  nowhere 
else  in  his  extant  works.    To  the  active  voice  it  would,  of  course,  not  be  applicable.  We 
may,  however,  interpret  the  periphrastic  in  a  difl'erent  manner,  taking  rowyec^a  as  an  at- 
trii)utcof  res  (  =  that  there  will  bean  '  accomplished  fact").   But,  whether  the  passage  is 
ni.derstood  in  the  one  or  the  other  way,  it  i!<  certain  that  a  periphrastic  future-perfect 
ot  ihe  passive  voice  has  iiot  been  received  in  tlie  Latin  language*. 

(^Brs.  2.  The  conversion  of  dejjendent  future-perfects  into  perfects  and  pluperfects 
occirs  in  those  clauses  mentioned  p.  351,  Obs.  3,  as: 

(f/)  Conditional  clauses  :  Cjesar  diKt-t  id  fieri  posse  si  suas  copias  .^dui  in  finis 
BellovacOrum  i/droduxetint :  Ciesar  showed  that  this  might  be  done  i/ the  ^duans 
would  send  (literally  'would  nave  sent')  their  troops  into  the  territoiy  of  the  Bellovaci. 
Cses.  B.  G.  2,  5.—  Solon  capite  sdnxit  si  qui  in  seditiOnc  non  alterlus  utrliis  i)artis  fuis- 
sent  ;  Solon  made  it  a  capital  crime  if  i)erson:«,  in  a  revolt,  iconld  not  join,  (literally  : 
'  W(»uld  have  not  joined ')  either  the  one  or  the  other  party.  Cic.  Att.  10,  1,  2.— See  Ex.  1-4. 

(}))  Tkmpoual  claus-es  with  vbi  and  quum:  Tribilnis  edicit  nt,  ?/6i  signa (%>/urim<i*\<;^n^, 
exiemplo  frfwr^r*^/?^  casiris  legiOnes  :  lie  ordered  the  chief.*  of  the  legions,  instantly  to 
maich  the  legions  out  of  the  camp  as  soon  as  the  signal  would  be  given  (literally  :  *  would 
have  been  •/iven').  Liv.  30,  5. —  JJicebant,  nihil  esse  negotii,  quum  prima  legio'  in  castra 
renissety  banc  sub  sarcinis  adoriri;  Tliey  said  that  it  was  (would  be)  an  easy  matter  to 

♦  It  is  stranire  that  some  grammarians  (Zumpt,  Kiihner,  Meiring — Madvig  being  si- 
lent about  this  form)  a-seit  that,  if  the  future-perfect  with  independent  force  is  to  be 
placed  in  the  siil)JMiictive.  the  Unrnfuturum  sit  {ess'-t)  ut  with  the  subjunctive  perfect  or 
pluperfect  of  the  verb  is  applied.  Kiihner,  in  default  of  classical  vouchers,  tries  to 
establish  this  rule  by  an  examiile  of  his  own  make  :  'Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut 
post  paiicos  dies  ad  v<>s  r<^/^/jV>im ',  a  barbarous  Latinity.  [The  Latin  authors,  unqm-s- 
ti'inably.  would  say  '  Non  dubito  quin  panels diebus?vrf<am'  See  R.  97,  Obs.  1.  A,  4].  The 
chief  objection  against  this  rule  is  that  it  exists  only  in  the  imagination  of  the  gramma- 
rians, no  passage  of  Latin  authors  being  extant  to  prove  the  use  of  this  form. 


,1 


n 


454 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


attack  this  lei,'ion  ichen  the  first  legion  icoiihl  have  arrival  in  tlic  camp.  Cjes.  B.  G.  2, 17. 
Se«^  Ex.  5-7.  9. 

{O  Tkmporal  ci.ArsKs  with  donee  (dfnn),  anteqvayn,  jmvtiqunm :  Placttit,  omnTs  qui 
consults  iniss.'iit  cum  iinpiMio  esst;.  donee  rteem-^-et  a  maris  ho^tis :  It  teas  reftolttd  *hat 
all  who  had  been  consuls  should  bo  iiivt-sted  with  the  hlL'ht-st  military  power  till  the 
eiMiny  n'o>'ld  hare  vifftdraini  from  thf  wall.  Liv.  20.  9.—  Se  non  anff  Crt'piflruin 
dLrif  qitam\ixucm  in  rei.'iiH  castris  eon-'^^jyexi^set :  Ife  «aid  lu;  would  not  beirin  iK-lore  he 
ico'dd  jx-rcefve  (would  have  perceived,  iiad  perceived)  tiu-  fire  in  the  royal  camp.  Liv. 
30.  ^.  [t'lau-es  with  avtequarn,  and  ptiK^^uam  Mrictly  luUow  the  rule»  of  tense  lor  llie 
indicative  mood.  See  p.  354,  Obs  4.]  See  hx.  8.  , 

{d)  Uki.ativk  ci^Ai^sEs  :  Ca;sar  eii*  qui  primi  mtirum  a-teendiKvent  yynvnna  m'ojwsuifj 
Cie^»r  ptmnised  rewards  to  tliose  who  would  be  the  first  fo  scale  tlie  wall.  Cu;s.  B.  G.  7, 27. 
See  Ex.  10.  11. 

Obs.  3.  If  the  clause  of  a  dependent  future-perfect  assumes  the  form  of  a  subohliquc 
clause,  the ;?^'/6c/  sul)junctivc  is  frequently  used  in  plaee  of  a  idupfrfeet  subjiinetive 
acfordinir  to  the  rules  p.  41'.t  foil.  Ous.  7,  as  :  {/JirTritn/),  si  li;ec  e/iwddUi  Ariovisto  Kinf, 
lion  (lubTtare  (luin  irravissiinum  supplicium  suniat  :  Tliey  said  that  if  this  wonld  be 
(would  have  been)  ^/Wmyty;  to  Ariovistus,  h«^  would  take  tti.' severe-^t  reven<;e.  Cies.  B. 
G,  1^ -jl.— Sometimes,  on  tlie  otlier  \\i\\\(\..  itlii})er/ect  mibjioicfiit s  (w'wh  the  lorcc  of  fu- 
ture-perlects)  are  used  in  place  of  a  perj'tcf.  subjunctive,  when  tlie  law  of  consecution 
requires  a  tense  of  ;>/-^«f/i<  consecution,  as:  t^uud  le  mecum,  quodcunque  cfinssein  (in- 
stead of  eepentn),  cons^ilii  pollici'n^  fore;  Tliat  you  promise  to  be  with  me,  whatever 
plan  I  nwdd  have  adopted.  Cic.  Fam.  5,  9,  1. 

Obs.  4.  The  historians  frequently  use  the  passive  subjunctive  phiperfect  \\\\\\  forern, 
instead  of  f.sw//«,  as  a  subjunctive  o"f  tlie  future-perfect  of  the  pa^sive  voice,  as  :  Si  pax 
non  iinpetrtlla  ab  senatu  foret.  ()l)sides  reddi  I'hilippo  receptum  est ;  I;  was  a-jreed  upon, 
that  the  hostai^es  ^hould"be  returned  tol'liilip  in  theca-e  tliat  j)eace  uonld  not  begranttd 
(would  not  have  been  granted)  by  the  Senate.  Liv.  33, 13.  See  Ex.  12.  13. 

Obs.  .5.  Both  perfects  and  iduperfects  with  the  force  of  a  subjunctive  of  the  fiitiire- 
perfect  require  the  predicates  deiiendent  on  them  to  be  in  tenses  of /^/-eAv-t/^consecutioti, 
althouLdi  the  future-perfect  in  the  indicative  reciuires  tenses  of  present  consecution,  as  : 

[CONSKCITION    «IP    TUB    FtTUUK-l'EHFI<  CT    l.V    THE    INUICATIVK    :]    Milll    ijTUOSCet  is  si,  qUJU 

causa  me  ad  hunc  loquaciiiltem  i/npiderif,  aceepentis  :  You  will  pardon  nie  if  you  will  have 
heard  what  cM\>>e  hat  induced  iMi:  to  be  so  loquacious.  Cic.  Or.  2.  88.  3<il.  [Here  the  fu- 
ture-pertect  acceperUls  taices  the  perfect  subjunctive  impuitrit  as  tense  of  present  conse- 
cution.] But  the  same  sentence  beiii;:  made  obli(iue  Ivy^lie  author,  preterite  cons'-cu- 
tion  is  required  by  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  eor/tuA^naius,  imd  in  j)lace  of  the  luiure- 
perfect  acc£p'^ritbt:  Dixisii  lore  ut  tibi  iirnoscerC'inus.  si  eorj no<s^/nus  qwx  h-  causa  in  ser- 
moneiii  impidl^xet ;  You  have  said  that  we  would  pardon  you  if  we  xvould  hare  learned 
what  cause  kad  induced  vou  to  discuss  this  sul)ject.  Oic.  Or.  2,  89,  3f»3.—  Eo minus  liabeo 
neccsse  coiritare  quid  lacit'irtis  sim  si  aeddt rit  nt  ler/aitr :  T\ni  less  it  is  necessary  for 
me  to  think  of  what  I  ouijlit  to  be  iroinir  to  do  if  it  should  hapj>en  (literally  :  if  it  should 
have  happened)  that  /  dm  apjmnftd.  Cic.  Att.  10.  1,  4.  Here  tlie  perfect  subjunctive 
aeciderit,  accordin<r  to  the  p:eneral  rules,  take-i  ler/arer  as  a  tense  of  preterite  consecu- 
tion, althGU<;h  it  has  th»;  force  of  a  future-perfect*. 

1  Quicritur,  si  Carthadnem  r^/ir/?/m//iw  incohimem',  num  quid  incommodi  sit  ad 
rempnblicam  perventfirum?  Cic.  Inv.  1,  8,  11.—  2.  I'terque  idem  lenuntial'^  qui  })rior 
has  an_aistias  occuparerif,  ab  hoc  hostem  prohibeii  nihil  esse  negotii^.  Cies.  B.C.  1.  »i«. 

3.  (}alli.  \\W\^  jyerfreqennt  miinitiOnes  de  oinni  salilte  despf  rant*  ;  Bomilni,  si  rem 

ohtinuerint^,  tinemlab'Orum  omnium  exspectant.  lb.  B.  (J.  7.  35.-4.  Dixit  Ariovistiis, 
si  disces-sissef  Ciesar,  mai;no  so  ilium  jinemio  remuneratilriim.  lb.  I».  (J.  1.  44.—  .').  De 
lioium  audacia  turn  me  dictflrum  p(dlicitus  sum  f/uum  Erucii  crlmini'^  difuls-sem^.  Cic. 
Rose.  Am.  28,  78.—  <».  Nonnulli  Ciesan  nuntiSbant,  7'/'///t  ca.«tr.i  movfri  ac  si.ma  ferri»" 
j'/,s^^t.s■.ve;^  non  fore  dicio  audientTs  niilites.  Cjcs.  B.  G.  1,  39.—  7.  Scipio  ufA  eomrfiisHi^^ 
pusjna  €S«et,  Lselium  cum  equitiltii  impetum  facere  jubet.  Liv.  2.s.  :i3.— 8.  Ca>ar  re- 
spondit  se  civitatem  conservatarum»-  .si  prius  quam  murum  aries  tetifjinset  se  dedidis- 


*  Tiic  editors,  because  aeeiderit  zcould  be  a  future-perfect  if  the  clause  were  not  sub- 
oblicpi.'.  have  chan£;ed  leqarer  into  the  present  sutgiinctive /<?r7er,  although  supported  by 
no  manu-cript.     They  call  such  chauires  *  kmendations.' 

»  Unharmed,  in  its  integrity.— 2  reported,  namely  etc.-  3  nihil  e.<t  neqotM.  it  is  an  easy 
matter.—  ^  '  ni<i  perfreqtnnt\  and  '  d  lemofdinuenni'  are  qua-^i-ot'liqne  clau-es  accord- 
in"  to  Rem.  89.  Obs.  1.—  ^  despaired  of  their  lives.—  «  rem  obtinere.  to  be  successful  — 
T  t7)  withdraw,  i.  e.  from  Gaul.—  «  the  charges.—  »  to  refute.-  »"  yiqna  ferri  jufjere,  to 
give  the  order  to  charire  the  enemy.—  1»  to  begin.—  '-  i.  e.  esse  ;  with  an  inttnitive  ful^se^ 
which  would  be  required  to  be  expressly  added,  the  next  clause  would  be  hiji)OthcticaL 


ENGLISH    EXERCISES. 


455 


n 


. 


N 


I 


I 


sent.  Cies.  B.  G.  2,  :32.—  0.  Fabiii?  milites,  vbi  quarta?  vigiliae  signum  cecinisset^,  ad 
enm  locum  scalar  jussit  ferre.  Liv.  24,  4G. —  10.  Scipio  dixit,  liomain  mitterent  legatos; 
quam-  seiultu-'  .Tquam  cfn<nis.<et,  cam  fortflnam  hahitiiros.  lb.  29,  8.—  11.  Edictum 
imj)eratr»ris  erat.  ipsum  militattlrum^  qui  ita  non  fecisxet.  Liv.  29  1.—  12.  Carmen*  in- 
ventum  vrtit.quanddq»e^  ho^tis  ltali;e  t)ellum  infuii<sef,  eum  vinci  posse  si  mater  Idica* 
Komam  advecta''  foret.  lb.  29, 10. —  13.  SentiCbant,  si  Lycia  etCaria  adempta  ab*  Koma- 
uisforerd,  indfldl  se  insuhe  parvte  liitoribus.  lb.  45,  25. 

1  iSir/nv??i  eanif,  \\\c  signal  is  sounded. —  ^  quam.. .,  earn  fortunam,  =  ea?n  f07-ti2nam 
(fate)  quam.  The  sentence  contains  a  circumlocuiiou  of  the  thought  'their  fate  would 
"):  decided  by  the  Senate'. —  ^  j^at  the  one  who  (  =  every  one  who).,  .would  (  =  must) 
himself  do  military  service.  The  infinitive  clause  has  the  force  of  an  imj)erative  clause, 
which  is  rare.  But  Livy  conceives  the  clause  as  if  it  were  independently  expres-^ed  by 
an  imperative  future  (ipse  militabit  qui  ita  non  fecerit). —  ■*  an  oracle  (oracles  always 
being  given  in  verse). —  ^  whenever. —  «  the  Ida?an  mother,  i.  e.  the  image  of  Cybele. — 
'  adrehere.  to  convey. —  **  by,  not  from.  The  latter  preposition  would  be  expressed  by  a 
dative  in  Latin. 

ENGLISH  EXERCISES. 

I.  Declabative  subjunctive.  (§  593,  R.  70).  —  1.  In  this  matter,  in- 
deetl',  I  ain  inclined  to  dissent'^  from  yon. —  2.  I  should  refer^  to  all  atfec- 
tions*  Avhat  Pana?! ins  asserts^  in  reiijard  to*  pain. —  3.  You  may  find  many 
Avlio  will  have  the  same  opinion. —  4.  You  may  doubt  this,  perhaps;  but 
1  shall  easily  i^rove  it. — 5.  To  some,  both  lhing:s'' seem  to  be  the  same; 
l)ut  I  should  [like  to]  ask  this  :  What  force**  is"  [there]  in  the  word  *  fo- 
j^ere'f —  G.  You  are  the  only  [one]  who — let  me  make  this  remark*"  with 
the  leave**  of  these  [triendsl — have  left  no  hope  I'or  (of)  praise  to  the 
other  orators. —  7.  You  could  not  easily  repeal**  this  too  often. —  8.  Epi- 
curus, indeed,  may  (mii^ht)  perhaps  say  this,  even*^  in  Phalaris's  steer, 
but  I,  on  my  pan**,  cannot  assign*^  so  great  a  power*"  to  wisdom. — 
9.  Clodius  arrived,  inflamed  with  anger ;  you  (one)  would  have  pronounced*"' 
liim  raving"^. —  10.  You  (one)  would  have  1  bought,  some  companion*^,  or 
some  unimportanl'-'"  retainer'-*  was  i)resent,  [and]  not  tlie  lord'*'"' over'-''*  your 
life  and  death'-\ —  11.  You  might  have  distinguished-^  a  remote^®  cloud" 
of  dust,  rising'-"  at  the  horizon''^''. —  12.  Of  that  kind^°  of  property^*  you 
may  easily  be;  deprivetP-.—  13.  I  might  mention  considerably^^  more 
[e.vainples],  but  the  shortness  of  time  warn.s^^  me  not  to^^  go  any  farther. '^^ — 
14.  Tiie  war  might  have  been  finislied^^  in  the  same  year. —  15.  He  could 
have  easily  prevented^**  that  rel>ellion^". —  10.  You  certainly  might  liave 
shown*"  greater  en^M-gy**  in*^  the  pursuit"  of  llie  enemy. —  17.  But  at  that 
lime  {fin/t)  we  ought  to  have  returned  without  anv  hesitation  to  the  place 
we  had  sttirted  fi()ni^\ —  18.  It  seems  that  Titius  had  reached  a  point**^ 
which  110^®  Latin  oiator  witlH>ut  [a  knowledge  of]  Greek  liteiature" 
could  have  overstepped**. —  10.  What  had  been  doiu*",  ought  not  to  have 
been   ratified'". —  20.  You  ought  to  have  paidoned  me  at  least,  since^*  I 

•  Quidem. —  ^  dissenllre  ab  «Tliquo. —  ^  referre  ad.—  *  aflectns. —  *  dicere.—  «  (i^. — 
"*  ntrumque. —  *>  vis. —  »  to  be  in  —  inesse  in. —  ^"  Bender  :  I  would  remark  {dicere)  this. 

—  "  by  jHijr.—  '■-  dictitilre. —  '^  yel. —  '*  /,  on  my  part.  ego. —  1^  tribuere. —  '^  vis. — 
'^  dicere.—  i"  furere. —  1^  comes. —  '-^0  parvulus. —  -^  assectjltor.—  22  arbiter. —  23  rreni- 
tive. —  -*  nex. —  '-^^  cernere. —  ^e  nmOtus. —  -^  nubecula. —  -"  nasci. —  ^^  at  the  horizon^ 
procul. —  2°  genus. —  31  bona. —  ^^  exspoliare. —  33  multo. —  34  clehortSri. —  '^  ne. —  '®  to 
go  any  farther,  longins  progredi. —  37  fo  finish  the  tear,  debelljlre. —  3b  prohibere. —  39  p^. 
«litio. —  '••' uti. —  *'  alacritas. —  <2  ad  _!  43  hy  jurseqni. —  *^  Render:  Whence  we  had 
Plaried  (profieisc'),  thither  without  any  hesitation  {dubil alio)  wi.'  ought  to  have  returned. 

—  <*  Kendt-r  :  Titiiis  eeems  to  have  arrived  {perven'ire)  at  tliat  place  which. —  ^®  Bender 
which  a  Latin  orator  could  not.—  *^  litieroe. —  *"  transgredi. —  ■*"  agere. —  *"  to  be  ratu 
Jie-dy  ratiun  esse. —  **  quoniam. 


w 


456 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNXTIVE. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


457 


di(P,  whatever  1  did,  against  my  ownwilP.— 21.  Tliat  pirate  ought  to 
liavc  been  kept  in  jail'  at  Syracuse. —  22.  It  would  liavc  beeu  more  de- 
sirable* for  Milo  to  olFer^  [his]  throat*  to  C'lodius,  tiiau  to  be  throttled'  by 
Yoc. —  23.  It  would  liave  been  lair"^  to  forbear"  a  little  longer  with  this 
our  heli)lessness'".—  24.  For  your  safety",  and  your  interest'^  it  would 
liavebeen  best  to  leave  your  companions  alone'^;  but  honor**,  and  [your] 
pledged'^  word**  forbade*'  [this  course]. 

II.  Intetikogative  ST'iuuNCTivEs.  (5^593). —  1.  Wlio  would  not  jus^ 
ly**  admir(!  this,  and  tliiidv*"  that  he  ouglil-"  to  devote'-*  all  his  energy  to 
it? — 2.  Why  sh(;uld  not  the  rainbow"-  be,  as  well"^  placed**  among  the 
^ods? — 3.  What  would   you   do   with   [dblat.]   such   a  simj)leton"^  ? — 

4.  Should  /deny  this,  who  could  never  be  convinced""  that   it  is  false? — 

5.  AV'ouid  nibiilussLuuler'-'  thos(!  very  [men]  who  were  inlhiential  enough** 
to  i)revent  his  recall  from  the  province? —  (>.  How  should  those  obey  the 
laws,  Avho  by  these  very  laws  were  forbidden""  to^"  have^'  the  rights  of 
men  ? —  7.  If  I  believe  Archytas  what  he  says  of  others,  should  I  not  be- 
lieve what  he  says  of  himself? —  S.  If  any  king,  if  any  nation  had  com- 
mitted^- any  such  thini;^^  against  Homan  citizens,  would  we  not  avenge'"'* 
[it]  by  war?  [And]  should  we  permit^^  this  crime^",  this  degradation" 
of  the  Roman  name  to  pass  unchallenged? 

III.  iMrEiiATiVR  suBJUNXTiVES.  (§  5'.)4). —  1.  AlIow*'"  me,  I  beseech 
you^",  to  be  [your]  second  in  command*",  and  all  the  others  to  keep*' 
Iheir  former  ranks*-  [in  the  army]. —  2.  Be  always  in  arms*%  antl  on  the 
alert**,  and  neither  miss  your  own  chance*^,  nor  allow  the  enemy  to  have 
any*^. —  3.  Do  not  believe,  soldiers,  that  victory  will  be  as*'  difficult  as 
the  dimensions***  of  this  war  are  great. —  4.  Select*'-' a  himdred  men  out 
of  the  whole  (om/z/,v)  infantry- °,  and  as  many  out  of  the  (tavalry,'^  and  come 
with  them  to  me  by  the  lirst  night-watch.—  5.  Let  us  reinemljer  that  jus- 
tice must  be  observed*-  even  towards  the  lowest''^. —  G.  Let  us  love  our 
country,  let  us  obey  the  Senate,  let  us  disregard^*  present  advantages'^,  aud 
do  everything''®  for  the  glory  ot  [our]  i)osterity^'. —  7.  Let  evervone  show 
himself^**  a  severe^"  judge  both  of  his  [own]  good""  and  bad*^'  qualities. — 
8.  Let  there  be  [at  least]  a  pause*-  in  our  hale'^-'  during'''  peace,  even  if"" 

•  Af/efe.  The  two  jJi-ctiTites  '  I  did'*  musii  be  rendered  l)y  tlie  «tme  verb,  but  l)>  Uilli  r- 
ciit  fiHins. —  2  invltiis». —  ^  to  keep  in-  jail,  ciif*to(lIre. —  <  optaljilij».—  ">  dare. —  *  jiii,ailiim. 

—  ■' jii<;uUTre. —  "  iuquut!. —  "  parcere. —  i**  impotentin. —  i'  i*alus.—  >'-  iitilitas.—  »3  (o 
leave  alone,  (lescrere.—  ^*  hoiiestas. —  i*  dare. —  ^''  flde^. —  J^  repuj^njlre. —  "*  jure. — 
'*♦  aibitnlri. —  '-°  gerundial  —  '-^'  (o  d«-fote  all  ont'd  emrtfy  to  somet/ii/ifj,  fuintiie  in  aliciiul 
re  elabonlre. —  2J  ^rci  species. —  =3  as  icdl,  leqn(^—  •"  to  place  ainonrj  aotaething,  in  nu- 
niero  alicujus  rei  reponere.—  -"truncus. —  ^"  persiiuuiGie. —  '^"^  caluinniilri.—  -*  Render  : 
111  wliof-e  power  (ixikntiu^)  it  was  lest  (ne')  lie  slioiild  l)e  recalled  {reiocan)  from  etc. — 
2'*  prohibCre  (sulyunctive).—  ^o  ne. —  3i  ,,(j —  n  facere. —  ^^  (i„,j  ^^/^./^  thing,  alicjiiid 
ejusinodi.—  34  vindicilre.—  35  to ptiinit  fiome thing  to pasa  vnehalUngtd,  aliqiifd  inuliuni 
diinittere. —  36  injiu-ia.—  37  iixnoiniiiia. —  3f  j^i,(3r<j  —  3a  qua-no. —  4o  j^econd  in  cof/unand, 
ina;iistor  equitinn  ;  the  person  addressed  Ihmmi^  compared  to  a  dictator.—**  tengre. — 
*'-^  itender  :  each  (^lingular)  thtiiv  own  ranks  (ardinex}.—*^  iinniit\\><.—**  nn  the  alert,  iuten- 
tus. — *^  to  WW.*  one'n  own  chance,  occasion  i  siuedeesse. —  •*<'  to  allotv  minebodij  to  have  any 
chance,  alicui  suain  occaslOneni  tiare. —  *''as..  .a-*,  tain.,  .quain. —  *»  Header  :  as?  ol'^rt-at 
name  the  war  is. —  *•  deligere. —  ^o  j)edes.  IJender  :  onto/ the  whole {otnnh')  infantry  and 
cavalry  ;  but  in  order  to  render  in  tliis  way,  the  numeral  must  assume  iliat  form,  by  which 
it  may  be  clear  that  it  refers  to  each  of  the  two  troops.  See  P.  1.  §-.i,>9.— si  tqnts.  Both 
l^edefi  awdeques  remain  in  tlie  sin<,Milar.— 5'*  servilre.— ^3  intiini.— '•«  negiii,'ere.  — ^*  fructiig. 

—  **  to  do  everything  for  something,  alicui  rei  servlie.—  ^^  posteriias. —  ^s  ^e  pnebGre. 
—5»  acer.—  •^"  good  qualiti^^n,  bona.—  ''i  bad  (ji/alities.x'ni^i. —  «'^  Kender  :  In  peace,  even 
if  the  hatreds  are  not  ended,  let  [them]  be  iuterriipted  (intermiltere).—  *'  odium  (pi.). 

—  ^*   in.—  «5  etiamsi. 


* 


\ 


it  is  not  ended.—  9.  Let  the  excess'  of  our  former^  good  works"  make 
up  for  the  shortcomings  in  our  present  duties.— 10.  I  wish  you  would 
a^k  Petronius  what  happened*  to  him  in  my  house^—  11.  1  wish  you 
wotdd  add  some  remarks''  concerning  the  modern' poets.-- 12.  1  wish 
that  all  were  present  wlumi  we  saw  here  in  our  last  asseinbly  .— 13.  I 
wish  you  had  been»  my  companion  in  this  journey.— 14  Would  that  I 
could  find  truth*"  as  easily  as  I  can  prove"  a  falsehood*'  !— 15.  Would 
that  the  ix'ople  were  alwavs  [good]  judges*^  of  the  wortli'*  [of  persons]  ! 
Perhaps  it  is  sometimes*^  [the  case]  biU  ver>'**  rarely.—  16.  W""^^^  ^^^^^ 
Crassiis  had  seen  that  day  !-  17.  Granted  that  he  is  a  good  citizen,  and 
that  he  is  most  wise  and  most  learned :  all  this,  m  my  opinion  ,  will 
not  be  sufficient  to  govern*"  the  republic  well.— 18.  Supposing  this  claim*» 
is  a  iustcme,  the  expenses  of  the  law-suit""  will  certainly  be'-»' so  great 
that  you  will  be  a  loser"  even  if  you  gain^^  [your  suit].-  19.  Granted 
that  slavery'-'''  was  useful  either  to  the  lnasters•■^^  or  to  the  slaves,  or  to 
both'^*  •  it  certainly  never  was  just ;  but  what  is  not  just,  cannot  even  be 
iiseful  —  '^0  Do  not  wonder"'  that  the  proceeds'**  of  this  property'-^»  are  so 
snialP".-  21.  Do  not  blame'*  me,  but  thyself  for  failing="^  in  this  under- 
taking^- 22.  Do  not  do  this",  but  examine'*  everything  before  you  pro- 
ceed'"^  any  farther'*.—  23.  Would  that  I  had  not  been  present !—  24.  I 
should  wish"  you  had  not  done  this.—  25.  Would  that  you  would  not 
meddle'"  in  this  business !— 20.  Granted  that  Titius  had  no  success'»; 
could  vou  derive  from*"  this  tact**  any  hope  of  finishing  tliewar*^  ? 

IV  Indihectand  direct  statements  in  general,  (i^  o9b). —  1.  While 
the  combat  was  fiercely  raging*='  at**  the  intrenchments*S  T.  Pullo  said, 
'Why  do  you  hesitate**,  Vor5nus,  or  do  you  expect  that  there  will  be 
any  better  occasion  to  prove  your  courage  ?'— 2.  Whenever  the  empe- 
ror Titus  had  bestowed  no  favor*"  on  any  one  during*»  a  whole  day,  he 
used  to  say  '  I  have  lost^"  a  dav,  O  friends ! '.—  3.  If  that  should  happen^', 
you  will  say  to  me,'  Did  T  not  predict^^  thatjust  this^'  would  happen?'— 
4    Scinio  used  to  say-'*  '  He  wished  rather  to  save  one  citizen  than  to  kill 
a  thousand  hostile  soldiers^^'.—  5.  AVhen  they  met^«  me  bv  chjmce"  in  the 
forum    they  said^**  to  me,  *  Are  you  the  one^»  who  intend'"  to  starve    the 
couimon  people'- ?'— G.  Whenever  anyone  remarked'%  that  it  was  im- 
possible  for  them"*  to  return   alive"^  from'"  thtit  hazardous  undertak- 
"  "'  The  ac^^i{iii.VlatTo7r<c/^//v^//v^)  of  our  former  good  works  may  fill  up  (^^/f3>  ;^hat  'has 
been  ceased  '  (c^mlre,  impersonal  pass.)  in  duly  {officium).- ^  p.nor. "  '  t>euefacta.-4  ac- 
cidit  -"  apud  me.-  «  aliquid  addere.  -  '  the  modern imfs,  hujus  a;tatis  poCta^.-  «  Ren 
der  'whon?  we  saw  the  la?t  time  (proxime)  here  assembled  (congrega^.^h-    ««^J^^^r^^.^" 
ha.l  been  present  tome  [as]  tlie  c.mpanion  ot  this  J<>"'ney-- ",^«^^'^.- "  t^onvinctre 
_yi  fai^a  —  >3  sin<'.  in  Latin,—  ^  dij,Miitas.—  i^  nonnumquain.—  '«  by^^r.—  ^J  Kender . 
I  d.-i  V  that  all     .r<  is  snffic  cut  etc%  ^^  ad  with  gerundial.-  i»  nomen.-  ^»  nnpcnsae 
n'^iVenl:- -"Render  "Spcmses  will   have  to  ^^^-^-^-::  ^^^^^^  ^"Zil^^ 
i.erfect-sul)iunctive  with  the  force  of  a  luiure-porlect  .—  «3  Muceie.-  "  scrvitus 
"  do.ninus-  "  uterque  in  the  plur.-  ^7  by  the  subjunctive.-  ^"  Iructus.- ^»  fun- 
dn.l!!3u'""..nus.-  31  reprehendere.-  3=  Render:    liecause  thou  haet  pr9ceeded_(;>ro- 
icere)  loo'lutle  (parunn   in   this  thing.-    ^^  by  the  sul)junctive.-  3*  investlgare.- 
'^^wooredi   in  subj.-  3«  ulterius.-  37  by  voile.-  3«  se  in  aliquii  re  luterponere.-  3»  to 
hJZ  inrris"xmcvvti-  "»  caiiere  — -«»  inde.- "  det)eliare.- "3  The  ann^Mt  t><  fiercely 
r2it.racc.Vime  pu^  *  "nunitio  -  ^«  dubitSre.-  ^;  Render  :  Wimt  oc- 

cSfvS)  "?V^^"7<P/^^^^  thy  courage  ivirtus)  dost  thou  \o^\lZi'I^^^;i'^f{-~ 
*%o  t^eitow  no  favor,  nihil  pnestare.-  '•'•  al)l.-  ^»  perdere-  f>  mnir€,  fu  ure-perlect  - 
5--!  nnedicerJ-  "  hue  ipsn  n.-  "*  by  ajo.-  ^^  hostile  soldier,  hostis.-  6«  obviam  venire. 
_  V['eaM.V.-  "  by  the  historical  present.-  ^«  Tune  is  es.-  -  velle-  '^Vf;'*^  *'^':a'?;- 
«2  piebs  _  63  Render  :  These,  whenever  any  one  (ubt  qins)  had  said.-  <^*  Render  .  that 
it  could  not  be  done  that  (ut)  they  should  return  -  ^"  vivus.-  6"  ex. 


•w. 


458 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


ino-^  they  would  say, '  The  greatci-s  ^yin  be  our  glory  ! '—  7.  When  one;of 
the  youn<'-er  chiefs  of  the  k^nous^'  asked  Melellus  what  he  was  goinq 
to  do,  he  auswc'ied.  '  If  1  knew  that  this  coat  were  privy  to  that,  1  would 
iustantlv  pull  it  otf  and  cast  it  into  Ihe  fire  '. 

V     OiiLIt^UE    DECLARATIVE,    AND    IMPEllATIVE    CLAUSES,   [h.  bv.  ii6).— 

1  Scipio  i)raised*  [Ins]  soldiers  because  ueilher*  the  sortie"  ot  the  en- 
emv  uor  the  height'  of  the  wall,  nor  the  unknown"  depth  of  the  pond, 
nor  the  hi-h  situation"  of  the  castle,  nor  its  great  strength^»,  were  obsta- 
cles to  their  valor".— 2.  All  returned'- thanks  to  all  fur"  having  spared 
them  on  the  previous  day,  when  Ihey  were  seized  by  a  panic—  IJ.  Agesi- 
laus  bewailed»^  the  fate'^  of  Greece  that'%  by  the  perverse  policy  ot  his 
adversaries,  his  victories  had  cost  so  many  lives.—  4.  The  prelects  ot  the 
kin.-- of  Persia  sent  ambassadors  to  Athens  to  complain'^  that  Uiabnas, 
bein--"'  a  citizen  of  Athens,  had  accepted'"  the  command  ot  the  Egyptian 
lleetrand,  [m  this  ([ualityj,  was  making  war-"  against  the  knig.—  o.  Xer- 
xes Ihaiikeil  Demaialus  for  beting  the  only  one  that  had  told  him  the 
iniili Uerum).—  G.  Many  charged'^'  Plancius  with--'  his  excessive  popuhir- 
ity._7.  Alcibiades  used  to  boast*-*  that  his  actions"^  had  always  suri>rised 
every  body.—  8.  1  praised  your  brotlier  because  he  had  creditably  ac- 
(luitted^^  himself.— i).  1  think  you  are  right"-'*  that  you  are  in  no  hurry  as 
to  your  suburban  villa.—  10.  The  Laceihemonians  accused  Themistocles 
of  having   conspired''''   with   the   king  of    Persia  to*'"  oppress""'   Greece. 

—  11    I  con^rratulate^^"  you  on''  the  universal   praise  you  met  with  when 
vacating  [y.mrj  magistracy.—  12.  1  thank  you  for  writing  me  irequently. 

—  i;]    1  greatly-'-  approve-*\  and  am  glad  of-'*  your,  continued  stay    at 
Brun'dusiuin.—  14.  1  thanked  him  tbr'"  his  magnilicent  enlertaniment  ot 
my  sou  Quintus.— 15.  Valerius  has  written  to  me  to""  mtoiin-"' you  as 
quickly  as  p(>ssil)le='",  that  he  had  arrived  on  the  l:ith  [id  this  month ;  i.  e 
March]  at  Laodieea,  and  that  he  would  write  you  m  a  lew  days.—  10.  i 
askyou^"  earnestly*' to  carry  out*-' our  oral   understanding  in  regard    to 

»  Hazardous  uvdertakinr/,  conittiif.-'  tanto  major.-»  Render  :  Metellu>»  to  a  younirer 
(»/;/ tor)  chief  of  \hti\i"^u<us  (fnhn„us  7ninf>nn)  a^^kin-  {percrmfam  wliat  »'^  wa>*  l- o  ng 
to  do  'Of  this  tliin-,'  Kai.l.  'if  I  knew  that  this  coat  (^///jra)  was  privy  (''WM«'^;  '  a 

wonki  cast  iccwjicen)  tl'«  P»!'^''»  «><^  ^'"^'  (^^:"^/-0,int(>  ti.e  flre\-  »  ^;*'1J=VMK-,7:  ' 'If,*  fed 
7ior  nm-  =  iion  .  non. .,  non.—  «  erui)tio.—  •  altitudo.-  "  Kender  :  1  he  unexp  oiea 
{ineri>iorrtt>,.-<^  lords  (rad,nn)  of  tlie  j.ond  (><tagmun).-^  Hender  :  A  castle  (C'/.-^^'/f//''* 
iituati'd  {sifus)  on  a  hi-h  hill  Ktumulus).-  >«  Render  :  Nor  the  sironjrest  ^munttunnvs) 
fortification  {am.-  "'  were  oh.'<tiu'hs  to  their  valor  =  eo«  doternnt.-  ^  a{iere  (his  .  rc&- 
ent).-J3  Render:  That  they  had  spared  (parcer,\  Xhvm.  the  ten  ilied  <]"P^0>^/ ^m/wx  ""  ^^^^^^ 
day  before  (pridie).-^*  conimiserf\ri.-  »*  for.nna-  '«  Render:      hat  ^'» '"«''>;  l^'f^''^^^^^ 

bv  him  l)ad  perished  {covcidtre)  hy  the  fault  ^'^^^"{'')  «f  t'''^] /V'^'T  t  hT7.  i  vo  tar 
tence.  if  rendered  quod  virfoiiie  s'ue  (of  rif U  con^ftti-^^ent' wonhi  refer  to  the  1  vc^  i-ac- 
rificed  in  A<'esihTns-s  ()\^n  arm  v.  ro/j.s^?;^  always  implymir  nn  equivalent  paid  h.v  « 
b>n/^r.  Since  A■re^ilaus  meant  the  lives  lost  on  the  side  of  the  enenn/  «/''7;'';'7;;.|^.  J,^ 
t^eiitence  is  necessary.-  ^^  que?i  (first  supine).-'"  qtnim  esse  ._  i«  Hei.der  .  „l»'  v"  - 
been  placed  at  the  head  (/mf/>^y/^^/-^  with  dat.)  of  the  tlee  .'-  -^  helium  i^7rer.^~-  -  ac  cu- 
rare -•-■■-  that  he  was  a-reeabit^  (ora'm)  l)eyond  mea-ure  {pr^vfer  wod»m).—^  l'  ounii.— 
■-•»  Render;  that  whatever  he  did  {(pnrnim/'if  ugtret)  had  deceived  {jol/ere)of  all  alwajs 
the  ou\u\ou.--^^toacrpnto)H\'^s.lr-rrHlitaU;/,  n-m  bene  -ere re.  -  -^*  '^"^,^'"  =  ,^"  "f- 
count  of  id.)  the  suburban  villa  that  thou  not  hurr.e^t  i  pro j?e rare \\  Praise  -  "/p  J[  '- 
,'.i)}re  societatem  facere.—  "-^  ad  with  «,'eruiidial.-  -»  oppriinere.—  3»  ^'laiulitrt.—  ^'  R«  n- 
(ler  -"That  the  pr.iise-  of  all  followed  (prom"i^  yoti  abdicamiir  the  ma-isiracy  ("'«f/»»- 
//•(////  sf  at>diraU.-  3'^  valde.-  =3  probflre.-  «4  ,,uod.-  3^  by  •  adhm  ;„o;v//7.-"«  Ren- 
der •  That  he  tiad  mo-t  liherallv  (manifirentUHme)  received  {ea-a/>ei'e)my*^(U\  Quintus  — 
37  ut.-  3«  ceitiOrem  facere.—  3«  quam  prinuim  i)os<em.-  "«  ro^'are  ab  aliquo.—  *' velie- 
menter.-  "'^  Render:  1'hat  you  accomplish  (conjicere)  what  we  have  made  out  icaclre) 
orally  (coram)  on  our  things. 


\ 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


459 


our  affairs  — 17.  The  consid  directed^  the  quaestor  not  to  obey  the  tri- 
b  ne  of  Uicpecple.-IH.  The  consul  exhorted"^  the  soldiers  to  behave» 
with  the  samc>  bnivery*  as^  they  were  wont  to  do.-  19  ^I  have  written 
to  Curio  that  he  should  give  [you]  what  you  would  wish 

VI     In TEKHOGATiyE  CLAUSES  IN  GENERAL.   (A.  84    bo,  UBS.  l-Oj—  1.  it 

was  the  fiuestion  whether  those  remedies   were  of  any  use  ,  or  not.— 

0  It  is  the  question  whether  knowledge^  has  been  more  benefictal»  or 
Tni  iri ous   o  mankind-.-  3.  The  authorities  do  not  agree-  ^ [as  to]  where, 
am    at  what  distance"  from  the  Rhine  Cresar  deteated"  Anovistus- 
4    It  Is  not  certain  ( liquet)  whether  Themistocles  came  to  ^ersja  ^^^^^^^^^ 
the  reign'*  of  Xerxes,  or  during  that  ol  Artaxerxes.—  5.  I  was  douMt  1 
'bethel'  1  should  instantly  depart-  for  Pompey's  camp,  or  ^vl^^'tl'^     I 
s  Olid  wait-  for  your  letter.- C».  Write  to  me  labout]  what  you  see  what 
voti  Vel   [and]  what  you  think'«  that  our  prospects-  are,  or  our  plan. 
Tught  tl;  Le.  J  7.  It  will  depend  on  you-,  .whicli  [of  the  two]  statuettes- 

1  r^halll  let  you  have",  and  by  what  carrier-*  I  [shall]  send  it.—  H.  Ue- 
sar  fouid  ou\-,  by  asking-  the  prisoners,  what  was  the  cause  ot  the  de- 

1  -7 

'\ll    Reiative  oh  interrogative  CL.vrsES?  (/?.  85,  Obs.  0,7,8,//) 
[Use  the  interrogative  form  wherever  it  is  admissible ;  s^;"te"ces  which 
\n.nj  be  relative  Ir  interrogtttivc,  to  be  rendered  m  I'^Jij^^^- 1'  ^  9,^^ 
not   give  you  an  answer-  to'^"  what  you  have  ^^^^^'^^^  ^^^  ,--Jj  .^^^^^^^ 
Qninlus  isMoing-.  I  cannot  tell.-  3.  You  may  have  what  you  ^^^^^    J^^^     • 
—  4    He  wished^'*  to  ascertain^^  what  I  liked  best.—  0.  It  is  uncertain 
.vlint    l.i^s   real  onini()n  was=^«.-  0.  I  shall    tell,  what   my  true   opmion 
<-7    icanno      e"^^^n^^^  '^  hear-  what  your 

:pini;mi^r;his  sui^^'t3«._9!  idid  not  <^-y^^^}^v^^'^'z. 

■  mini.m  was—  10.  I  sliall  know  at  llio  same  limewhat  to  do    .— 11.  iue 
S  "   elibe ratal"  as   to  the  best   plan"  to   follow  in  then;  defence 

"  i  st  tl,ea..ack  of  the  eueit.y-  12-  ^;!;^^"'"^;  „'■::;"«    I'on  wl?a? 
liihes"  came"  to  Italv.  is  not  known".-  13.  It  is  not  know  n     f  om  w  hat 

.art  of  the  worUl"  tl,e  Intlian  tribes-"  came"'  to  tl"^^^""  ;"<•"' •-i*;,f^ 
1„  not  reme.nbw  what  informalion-'  I  gave  you  ot' ll  e  '''^ects  ot 
(Jnintus.- 15.  For  a  general",  to  do  what  is  ^l^ "  ""^ '  '^  "^^^^^^^^^ 

10  hum:luum  «:enu^.— •'  Render,     ii    ■  ','       7    ;  .  w-.r  Rhiiu.  interval "— ^^  devincere. 
r.  Ji..„der  :  'At  how  ^Mx-at  (p.  '221,  No.  3)  from    he  I'^'^^^^^^^^J'^l^^^^^^^      i8  cxistimflre. 


raior.—  s*  cognotccie. 


I 


4G0 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


what  was  jjoing  on*  in  Komo. —  18.  Vorros  sai(P  he  conhl  not  jndi^e 
what  that  statue  was  worlh^ — 10.  LahiCnus  wrote  to  Ctesar  what  had 
been  done  in  Gaul. —  20.  I  will  write  you  to-morrow  what  I  believe  ought 
to  be  kept  secret*,  and  what  maybe  divulged'. —  21.  You  know  Pom- 
pey's  intatualion" ;  you  know  his  way  of  considering^  cruelty  a  virtue  ; 
you  know  his  susi^icion'*  that  lam  always  railing  at  him. —  22.  Hanni- 
bal sent  five  hundred  horsemen  in  the  direction"  of  the  lloman  camp  to 
reconnoitre'"  whether  there"  were  any  hostile  forces,  what  their  strength 
was,  and  tiieir  j^lans'-. —  2:5.  About  the;  number  of  troops'^"  that  Han- 
nibal had  after  his  passage  over  the  Alps,  the  authorities  differ. —  24.  I 
cannot  tell"  the  exact  number'*  of  the  hostages. —  2.").  The  general  ordered 
an  account  to  be  taken'"  of  the  number  of  prisoners  belonging  to  each 
nation. —  20. 1  wonder"  that  there  is  any  doubt"  about  the  route  which" 
lie  took  in  cros-^ing  the  Alps. 

VHI.  Idiomatic  iNTKitKOGATiVE  CLAUSES.  (/?.  85,  Obs.  8,  &). —  1.  lam 
sensible  of  the  scandal  1  have  given  by  my  loose  writings,  and  make  what 
reparation  1  am  able-".  (DnvDEN). —  2.  Before  Ctesarlefl''-,  he  gave  his 
orilers--  about  the  winter-(|uarters"^^ —  8.  The  ancients'*  did  not  know  the 
properties  of  the  atniosi)heric  aii"^. —  4.  The  Gauls  were  uncertain  about 
the  dirt'Ction"^^  to  be  followed  by  them. —  5.  Pelops  neglected  to  teach  his 
son  the  rules  on  moral  duties"-'. —  G.  The  Carthaginians  did  n(U  under- 
rate the  decrease  of  their  strength  by  the  loss  of  New  C'arthage'-". — 
7.  Is  there  anything  known  to  you  about  the  nationality  of  these  emi- 
grants'^" V —  8.  I  wonder  that  there  should  be  any  doubt  as  to  the  object 
of  these  men  inaj^plying  for  a  railroad  charter'"*". —  J)-  You  have  informed 
me  of^*  the  date  of  your  arrival  at  Athens  ;  now^'^  let  me  know'"*^  liow  many 
days  later^*  you  left''*  that  city. —  10.  It  is  doubtful  from^"  what  reasons 
Augustus  sent  Ovid  into  exile. —  11,  You  see  how  many  and  how  great 
dangers  they  had  lo  meet"  before  they  arrived  at  the  camp.—  12.  It  is  not 
known  by  what  biibe  these  men  were  induced  to  change  their  votes*". — 

*  Fieri.— ■-' by  ner/ilre. — ^ fee  p.  2()7,  Obs.  4.— <  ct-lJlre  (j^oniiKTial).— *  diviiiirnru  (Lrenin- 
dial).—*  KendtT  tliij  three  objects  of  *you  know  '  (sets)  liy  iiiterroirativi-  clauf'fs.  Infatu- 
ation =  liow  inlatuated  (ftifni/s)  P.  is. — '  tjow  lie  thinks  {pi/fdrt)  cruelty  etc. — "  how 
much  (f/it(rrn)  he  t^uspccts  that  he  is  always  di  ridt-d  {iftn^i/tn  eftse)  by  nu*. — ^  nd. — 
1"  speculilri  ^lir-it  supine).  —  "  Render  :  Wiiere  and  iiow  jjrea'  [there]  werehotitile  forces. 
— i'-*  Render  :  What  they  were  preparini;.— i^  Render  :  How  many  troops  wt-re  to  Han- 
nibal ha\  in;;  critssed  (tran^tf/rfdi)  the  Alps,  it  is  by  no  means  (nef/itdf/'/am)  agreed  [ronre- 
nit)  amoni;  the  autliors.  —  n  ii,'norjlre. — '*  Render:  how  irreat  was  the  number. — 
!•  Render  by  an  interroirativeclause  with  ecthesis  :  That  the  prisoners  shoiid  be  counted 
(receiisKn)  \u^\\  many  belonged  «f<»e  with  gen.)  to  every  people. —  "  the  seventeen  word:* 
in  this  sentence  must  be  rendered  hy  rive  Latin  words,  employing  an  interrogative 
clause.— '"  ainbigi.—'*' by  what  [route]  he  crossed.— -"  Render  :  iSince  {'/i/n/uJofjuiilcrn) 
I  have  written  many  things  {niultd)  rather  loosely  (lervis)^  winch  how  nmch  {quain)  they 
are  to  the  otlence  {(iffenshA  of  men,  I  feel.  I  shall  not  refuse  (rtciis'trc)  lo  expiate  [itj 
{quin  expien))  \)\  X\\v  \\'\y\iii\\i.m  by  which  I  can  ((luifuDi  jHnodin  jiiaciiliK). — 2»  proricisci 
(suhj. ).—■■'■'  what  hewi-iie'l  to  be  done.— "■'^  hiljerna.- '•'*  vetus. — '-«^  Itender:  Ol"  what  kind 
(qi/af.is)  was  the  air  which  tl(»ats  around  {rircnnifinidere)  our  earth.- ^*  what,  direction 
l/Hirs)  should  be  loUowed  (gerumlial). — -'  Rend«'r  :  'How  far  {(juatemtfi)  everything 
{(/ui(lf/>it'\  must  he  attended  to  (ri/nlr<\  gerund). — -^  Reiuier:  Were  by  no  means  ignorant 
(lian<lq>((l(l>i(iin  hjiuln  ^ ra/tf).  how  much  to  them  of  strength  {rirty)  had  gone  oil  (di^c-dtrt) 
after  having  lost\«mi/'/^/'f)  New  Carthage. — -"lieiider:  •  Canst  thou  state  (AV«^Wf/Y)  any- 
thing of  what  nation  (r/ein^)  are  those  immigrants  yadrena)'  v_30  lender  :  I  wonder  that  it 
i-  doubted  what  seeking  (V'/t^ry*)  those  men  have  wished  (?>//«-)  that  a  law  on  a  railroad  itia 
ferrca)  should  be  pa.-*scd  (  /'<  /7vi  in  their  interest  idrtf. o/  ilie  iiittresttd  person). — "'  J{end<'r: 
You  have  written  on  what  day  you  arrived  at  Athens.'— ^-  jam.— ^^  fac  ut  sciam. — ^^  Iten- 
der:  '  How  many  days  having  been  placed  between  {inferjh'ere  ;  Pee  p.  ISO,  Obs.)— ^^  de' 
cedere  with  ablat. — '-^^  induced  iodducere)  hy  which  things. — 37  after  having  met  (miiwrartr) 
liow  many  and  liow  great  dangers  («W.  atin.),  they  arrived.— ^i»  having  received  (ucciiyere) 
how  much  (great)  money,  tho:-e  men  changed  their  votes  {de  sentcntiu  decedereJi. 


1 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


461 


I 


tlie  c.\iR-L-i.i"""  "'J  y,,,.,i  ,.\cwiUn"-lv' thai'"  Ileum  iimi^"";-  ■■"■■  ■- 

«luu  t,ul.>.-  1».  "l-'-'^Sn^.'^'^l-t.^^a,  as  loitering-  «n  tl.e  Appmn  r.nul, 
,,la.v"o.i  '"^^  V';"!'-''-- 1^  .JXL'd'^^^^^  20.  There  will  be  trouble 

so,>,e  ut.knowu"  person  ^^''^f'-'"  °i,,";..  ,^„y  one  of"  the  captives  was 
„f  some  kind".— 21.  He  n"'^'^^''- '^  ,  'V, :,,  the  fi"Uting  of  the  others,— 
ineliiuHl-  to  participate-'  .»f,,?,  <-  "  ti  "  t  ere  is  "my  wSy  lo  oppose  these 
22.  We  will  have  ^"^^^'"""^-^^^  Sex    Roscins  hiuP  any  opportu- 

j;l-^;;^;^;.i!:^^t;:ynr:;^:^-^^^.o;^--lt'^ 

!:S"- tSy^a:;:^^  i-'^ii;:L^Xci?u:^t  t^am ..  .ot  ao  his 

best'"  to  adjust"  V  „  ^n   Q7^_l.  Yon  acknowledge" 


Inoit  ;;nxious-  tmt  to  lose-  fg^^^^.l'':^^,cou^;:naevU^u.^t 

listed-  of  raw  rc^nuts-,  and  ']}' ^'^Xx^^^^^^^^^^^^     1»=^^^  concluded  a  con- 
for  service  from  Ins  wound.— ..   1  lie  nvo^^_^_^  nrisoners,  received 


I'll         iinuij,i"^j  ...._,--  i.,.,1    QoinnronUl^^     WUeiUCi    ii^    "  "-^   -^'^ 

the  lamb  «-'  —  7.    The  consul  '^^^^'^l  ^V^^^^TVo  liv  bef()re.--- 8.  Cicero 

~  -    -1.5*—.        //%\j9Jt»0 


462 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


delivered^  the  city  of  TJonie  from  royal  nile^ —  9.  Do  you  think  that 
the  Stoics,  becauseMhey  held*  that  nil  sins'*  were  equal,  therefore"  ])e- 
lieved  tliat  the  same  penalty  should  be  provided'  for  every  crime"? — 
10.  You  ask  me,  in  j'our  letter,  whether  the  opinion"  of  the  Stoics  is 
true,  tliat  evervthina:  that  is  produced'"  on  the  earth,  is  created'*  for  the 
use  of  nu'u. —  11.  I  ask  of  you  that  you  allow'-  me  a  3'ear'stime  coucern- 
ini!:"  those  thins^s  which  I  wi^h'*  to  discuss'^  with  3'ou. 

X.  Quasi  ouiJQUK,  and  (jitasi-svijobltque  clauses.  (/?.  88.  80). — 
1.  After  the  battle  of  Phittvae'"  the  Lacedaemonians  sent  Pausanias  with 
a  fleet  to  the  Hellespont  to  drive'^  the  Persian'"  irarrisons  out  of  that  part'" 
of  the  country. —  2.  Here  the  enemy  established"^"  a  chain  of  fortifica- 
tions"* to  exehide"'-  our  troops  fnun  all  points. —  3.  C.Tsar  resolved  to 
build  a  wall  all  around  Pom[)ey's  camiVuii^  cround^^  to  make  the  convey- 
ance-* of  corn  and  supplies  for  the  army  less  danirerous. —  4.  Pompey 
prohibited  the  maklni;-^  of  cami^-llies'-^^  to  conceal"'  the  more  easily  his 
arrival. —  5.  Pausanias,  because  he  diil  not  choose""  to  return  to  Sparta, 
betook  himself  to  Coklnse,  which  place  was  situated-'"  in  the  district  of 
Troy. —  G.  Miltiades,  because  he  was  afraid  lest  the  fleet  of  the  Persians 
miiilit  arrive,  returned  to  Athens  to^"  the  ureat  dissatisfaction^'  of  his 
connfrymen"-. —  7.  Lysatider,  to  etfect^^this  purpose^*,  first  consulted  [the 
oracle  of]  Apollo  at  Delphi^^,  because  the  Lacedaunoniaus  had  the  habit  of 
consul  I inir^"  the  oracle  on  evervthinir. — 8.  Pompev  crossed  over  to  Greece, 
because  the  republic,  as  he  said",  could  be  defended  there'"'  better  than 
in  Italy. —  0.  The  kini::  instantly  seut  Speusippus  to  piison^",  whom,  as 
lie  said*",  the  «rods  themselves  had  delivered*'  into  his"  hands  as  a  hos- 
taire  for  the  fidelity"  of  [his]  father. —  10.  Cicero  had  not  received  any 
letter  from  Crassns  in  five  days,  because  he  was,  as  lie  thouirht",  besieg- 
ed*^  by  the  eiUMuy. —  11.  The  Athenians  attributed^"  these  calamities'"  to 
their  own  fault*",  because  they  had  expelled  Alcibiades  from  tlie  State. 
—  12.  At  that  tiuu>  ahuost  all  States  of  Greece  were  anxi(uis*'"'  for  an  al- 
liance with  the  Athenians,  to  have^''  a  belter  protection  ai::ainst  the  Per- 
sians in  the  case  that^'  they,  perhaps,  wouhP*  renew  the  war. —  IIJ.  The 
kinir  reminded^^  the  Uhodiausof  the  ships  with  which  they  had  promised** 
to  assist  him. —  14.  The  consul  resolved^'  to  naiP°  to  the  cross  all  the 
inaraudeih^'  who  would  be  captured  by  the  soldiers. —  lo.  The  kinii- de- 
manded of  Verres  the  return^"  of  the  statue  which  he  had  lent  him  some 


qiioniain.--*  «utare. — &  pecciltuin.— «  ictirco. — '  coiis-ti 
tnerc;  (LMTiiiirlial).—  "  delict Min.—'*  lit'iidcr 'wha 


*  LilK'nln». — 2  doniinatus. — ' 

r  pleases*  the  Stoics».' — i"  to  jirodnee,  <;ig- 
iiei-f.  — "  freilre.--'2  dare.— '3  de.— »<  velle.  — '*  (o  discuiix  fo/mt/diir/,  colUtqui  illiquid.— 
1*  Platieciifit!.  — »7  (lej)filcre. — J«  barl)aruriim.  — '^*  Hcnder  :  '  Out  of  those  rei^ioiis'.— -°  elH- 
cere.— -I  a  cha'ni  of  j'urtiJifaCirms,  immitinneH  perpetua'.— ^-  Keiider  'let-tany  place  our 
troops  could  not  ent('r.'— -3  to  btiild  a  wall.  ..caiinniKj  ifround,  ciicunivallilre  rouipejum. 
— "*  K«'ii(lcr  '  In  order  that  with  le-s  dan^rer  tlie  corn  and  supplies  {co/fi7/uuti//<)  could  be 
conveyed  {xvpixntdK)  for  {d(tt.)  the  ariny.'— -*  infinitive  clause.  — i"  i;rnis.— '•^'  Keiider  : 
'that  the  more  secret  (occidtns)  his  arrival  (should)  be.'— '-'*  i.oile.— 2»  et^se.— *'"  p.  2,V.», 
Obs.  4.  — 8>  otlen>io.— 3*-  —  fjllow-citizens.— 33  </</  with  j^.riindi.il.— 3*  res.— 3->  Delphicu». 
— 3rt  to  refer  (referre)  all  to  the  oracles. — '^  Keiider  '  in  ev«-ry  allovvabh!  way.' — 3s  in,le. — 
3»  in  vincula  conjicerc— ■>"  Render  l)y  all  the  nieth<»ds  adnd>sil)le.— <>  dare. — ^^  dHiive 
of  theinterc.^ttd  person. --'3  tides.— <<  ;/;//(?/•(- ;  to  l)e  rendered  by  all  the  met  lu)ds  admitted. 
— -"s  ,,i,,j(icre.— <»'•  tribueic— '•  malum.—'"'  eulpa.— '"*  to  f>e  attxious  for  an  (dllance  ivitk 
sonubo'ty,  se  ad  ali<  Qjus  soeii-iilieui  applicare. — ^"  liender  :  in  orJer  to  protect  {t'o/i) 
th  •m>elves  the  more  ea>ily  apainst  the  Persians.— **  in  the  cane  that,  tii.— ^-  pret«rite  of 
7¥«om/(?.  — ''3  adnninGre  d»;. — ^*  Uender  '  whicli  they  had  prolni^ed  to  send  to  his  «id 
{.s-u/M  /hwi)\-  by  the  abstract  dative.— ss  slatuere.— *«  ad  crucem  adi-ere.— ^^  Render  'all 
that  would  be  seized  yooititnlundire,  in  a  i)reterite  tens^e)  by  the  soldiers  while  plunder- 
iiiir  (pried'lrL  in  the  form  ot  au  accessory  predicate).—*'*  to  denuiiid  tfie  return  0'  sonie- 
ih'iiuj^  repotfccre  aJiquid. 


EKGLISH  EXEECISES. 


463 


\ 


\, 


•r.1  ..\\h  two  cohorts  in  town, if  the 

SSS  e;i= J=3i;;  S:S;^^sS- 

con.nl  s-nt  a  '''■'•«l",'"'"  .  kV.     his  .Urec.ion  in  [his]  flight.  _ 

ev.nl'  llmt  ihe  kin-  hud  "'"'l'  ' ''' !,"\sD  qrASi-ATTKACTioN.  (?  W»)- 

XI    SiiuuNOTivK  By  >;''7'-^"Sp;  li.ai  tlie  public  made  use  of   us 
1.  ^Vn.onius  was  so  popnla.    a  ^[^,.^2.  Thus  it,c,m^;  UnU 
li.o-il  seivici's"  whcni'voi  tiiiy  "liflnpeu  was  needed".—  •>•  intituy 
if  was  open-  ,o  all  il'  his  -^'^^'^^"'"^^Xmry"  he  staid  (em),  he  was  cm- 
AlHbia,ies  em.cted '  |f' ' '"  ^V;^^,';^  "the  «realest  attect>..n'».-  4.  Tlus 

t  .  '«•  »"1  '"  l«-  l"-'i""'"'-  ''"•  ''■"'  Tnn,er  thaiTn.joice  at  the  victory  for 
„;:,.n  over  the  death  -(^^^f  ^^  .^  the  greatness-  of  E.vam.- 
.vhi<h-'=  he  paid  with  1'  «     :  - ^\,t  u,e  h.d.n  '  of  the  republic   The  es 
noudas  thit,  as  lonir  as  he     ^^^^^^    .n-e.it  was  Ithe  power  of]  his  tio 
^v  s  Uie  head  of  all  Greece.-  '  •  f  '  ^,,''„„,"1  thkt  arms  ought  to  be  in- 

,;:nce  that  those  who  ^Y'jt^l-'iftd  bet  >resen,,  he  -;o»'ij;f ^ 

''™''>;. ';;S^.7ourrc7olntions'»\- ^^le  hean  ^ 

i^l;'ronfill■b^^speeei,if.h-^^^^^^ 

to  him  —  10.  It  is  the  cus  om  m  "  ;^''ije„  „ive  satisfactory  security  loi 
wl  are  accused  of  any  oflence,  ""  ""fr  '  roachable  life  is  necessary  for  a 
Th  i  ■l„n--nui<e  in  <:'"Jf,'r  ",„4'A  u  e'  Zer-  of  thinking  and  otFop- 


tuose  who  iii've  '-«ec  ''^^^^^'i,^  Z,-  coNKt.icT  with  othek  T}'''^^ 
viT    'I'liK  T  \w  OF  co^sfc.cl/lIo^  i^  ^^  ,    .^       ^v  — I    Ihe  benaie 

floor  of  ti^^"Jl!!!!!!:iIlii-i^^ 


m  .III   ..  -   --  V(^n  have  civeu  lilt  ^"j^^^^oj;::!: : — - — ^^A:,f. 

nor  of  the  house. —  i^^vuji«i^^U: TTrTTTThiirhtrshcynl^^  ^^^^'. 

the  tti.ht  »^"<>  ^;'':;';'^  ^i^;,7L'u  quo  factum  e.t  "'•"  ;^'^^;;,^y;X..6o./2/  theforem<^t 
__io  10  have  a  ^t?/ f;' niJ -'«  «P"'^  n"0^cunqae.y''  Jo^w^^;^^^^^^^    affection,  aliquem  ca- 
u  opus  esse.--»*  hi^  >';^""v_„  f^  (yeat  ^ometjody  nnth  //'f.^J^^f«'\.^j  -^uj,,    {with  .w^v.-)  — 

ri.simum  Y^^:^^-]Z  S"ened  iredimer.)  by  his  Hoo^--i«r Render"  'What  jou 
•ja  Hender  'which  he  intctimi   v         .„^  («apere.— ^**  piooaic.    ,        y^    up^rs,  would  be 

!;!t,^;;':s,;!;'";M,:*"Vf^;H;':,3''\^ 

niKl  the  secnd  pern:";'  V""VJ-v;ee  ^^,.  33.-3«  Icvissitnus.--*»  de  fanU  i^^^^    adnnssible. 
__43  ,,redere.-*    f^^^'^^r^..,..',   u^i.v^  the  verl)(/a-i/)^ff.-*;  ^■^^^''i^J^j^.^^.r  g.ospes),  ui  aa 


•"T 


4G4 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


guilt  by' opposing^  a,  regular  investigation  into  the  matter. —  3.  Ca?sar 
did  more  than  he  promised,  in  as  much^  as,  in  lieu  of  making  the  tcntli 
legion  his  body  guard,  as  he  promised,  he  made  tliem  cavaliers*. — 4.  Cicero 
saiid  that  Ca'sar  had  committed  a  capital  crime^  in  as  much  as  he  had 
wished"  to  be  king  of  the  Roman  peoi)le  and  the  lord'  of  all  nations,  and 
had  accomplished''  it. —  5.  During"  this  Aviiole  march^"  we  could  not  see" 
[any]  hostile'-  forces,  although'^  we  searched"  all  the  forests'^  and  hiding 
places^®  from  seven  o'clock  till  midnight". —  G.  It  was  impossible  for  ihe 
accused"*  to  have  committed  that  murder*",  since  he  came  to  this  country 
after""  the  perpetration  of  the  crime,  and  never'^*  was  longer  than  one  day 
absent'--'  from  his  [former]  home. —  7.  He  comphiin(;d=*^  without  good 
reason"^*,  since  our  courts'-^^  have  always  held  this  law'"''  to  be  unconstitu- 
tional.—  8.  There  was  no  good  reason'^'  ^vhy  you  should  sell"  those 
stocks'^"  at  a  discount^",  considering  that  the  g(ivernment''  has  always  re- 
deemed them  at  par. —  9.  This  number  was  large,  considering  that  their 
own  cavalry^-  amounted  to  no  more  than  eigiit  liundred. —  10.  The  num- 
ber of  these  was  tive  thousaud^^  while  ^^their  own  cavalry  amounted  to 
less  than  [one]  thousand. 

XIII.    I'llKTEIHTfc:  CONSECUTION,  OR  LOGICAL    TENSES,  DEPENDENT  ON 
rKETEUITES   CONTAININ(;  IMIKSENTS  JJY  IMrLTCATION.    {li.  1)4,  OUS.  2-0). — 

1.  I  have  sullicienlly  explainecP^  how^**  the  idea  of  duty-*'  [must]  be  de- 
rived^** from  the  idea  of  morality^". —  2.  ISobody  has,  as  j^ei^",  asked  me 
whether  I  had  any  message**  for  Rome. —  '•].  Have  not  the  decemvirs  car- 
ried*'^ in  this  very  year  tlie  law  *  tiiat*"'  there  shall  be  no  intermarriage 
betWiHMi  Patricians  and  Plebeians?  ' —  4.  I  have  i)laced"  all  [my]  hojie  in 
you  since,  besides^'  you,  I  have  no  one  in  whom  1  trust*". —  5.  We  have 
been  asking*'  you,  for  a  long  time*",  every  day  whether  there  is*'  any 
hope  to  save  the  life  of  the  accused. —  G.  You  have  not  yet  learned 
wiiat  may^"  be  elFected  by  wisely  using  the  means''  given  to  us  by  nature. 
—  7.  We  have  n(;ver  doubted  that-'-  there  are  [I'Ut]  few  Fabriciuses  in 
this  country^"*. —  8.  I  have  very  oflen^*  considered  tlie  (juestion^^  whethei 

*  Qui.—  '*  by  nolle.  Kenilcr  :  '  Who  dul!«t  not  wbli  that  the  thinj^  ^^h(»ul(l  be  invchtij^ated 

(co(//io,scere)  by  a  just  question'.— ^  Kcnder  :  '  Who,  "when  h(!  had  i)roniisod  tluU  it  was 
to  be  {futtlrum  et:.'<e)  lii.-»  imetoriaii  cohort ; '  ('  Ai.v '  to  be  reudcrrd  by  the  dative  of  tlie  iii- 
teresteil  person). — ♦  (o  nuike  name  person  a  earali^r,  ahqiiein  nd  equtim  rescribere  (a  term  " 
taken  from  the  promotion  to  ihe  equestrian  rank,  in  tiie  census^.— ^  to  commit  a  cujiital 
Clime,  capitillem  esse. — "  eoncupiscere. — ''  dominus. — **  pcrtieere.— ®  al)l. — '"  iter. — "  cer- 
iiere.— '2  hostium.— 13  qaum,  witli  sul)junct. — '*  i)erscrutilri.— '^  saltus. — 1«  latebra*. — 
1^  multtt  nox.--i»  Render  :  How  (qui)  could  it  be  done  that  {ii()  the  accus.ed  committed. — 
*»  caides.— '■'°  Kender : '  Since  he  came  hiter  ij)0^t€(i)  into  this  republic  than  the  crime  {tnale- 
ficium)  hid  t)een  perpetrated  ".— ^*  Kender  "nor  that  [one]  was  lonirer  etc' — '^'^  al)essc. — 
^'■^  queri. — 24  millo  jure. — -^  Render  '  since  it  has  always  been  jud^i-d  (rognOi(cer€)\—'^^  Ren- 
der :  •  that  this  law,  wiihont  prejudice  to  the  ctmstitution  (tutlra  Itfje  pt  rpef/to).  could  have 
not  been  made  (fern}\  Lex ptrpetaa  —  constitution,  is  according  to  tlie  anaIo<;yof '  tdic- 
tum  j)erpetuinn '.  See  also  Cic.  N.  D.  1, 15, 40  ;  Or.  2,  a^i.— •''  Quid  erat  quod.—-"  transfene. 
— ■■'*' publica  ilia  chirDirrapha  (nom,  jilur.).- ^o  cum  versfirjl. — 3»  Render:  'Since,  from 
the  treasury  (te?'ani/f/t)  ii.-ell',  they  have  always  b'*eu  redeemed  (redimen)  at  the  same 
price  [see  p.  '.iTD,  7^.85,  'i\  as  they  were  written'  (the  auxiliary  to  be  used  only  once  at 
Itie  end). — ^-  Itender  :  'Since  the^  themselves  had  no  more  than  elL'ht  hundred  horse- 
men".— ^3  jreiiitive.  — 3*  qnum. — ^*»  explicilre. — 3«  quemadmodiun. — '^''  the  idea  of  duty, 
otficia.— 3^  ducere.— 3»  tlw  idea  of  tnorality,  honestas,— •"'  adhuc. — ""  Itender  *  Whether  I 
wished  {v^Uc)  anythinir  to  Rome  '  (accordinir  to  the  rules  alxmt  the  cases  of  tlie  names  of 
cities). — •»-  ferre.— -"^  liender:  'that  not  (ne)  [tliere]  should  l)e  ii.teiinarria>re  (conn>d>ium) 
to  the  patricians  with  the  plebs'.—**  ponere.—^^pneter.-**  Render  'to  whom  I  trust 
{confidere,  snbjunct.)  I  have  nobody'. — *''  quierere  ex. — *»  jamdiu.— <"  Render:  'whether 
auy"(by€f)  [there]  is  to  the  accused*  hope  of  safety  (^o/m*)'.—'"  posse. — *i  Render  *  by  the 
forces  {rireei},  <;iven  to  ns  by  nature,  wisely  to  l)e  used'  (reversed  phrase). — ^2  quin. — 
»«  Render:  'that  few  are  in  this  State  Fabriciuses'.—'*  Biepe  ac  inultuiu.— '•  to  con- 
sidtr  the  question,  coj^iiiire. 


E^'GLISH  EXERCISES. 


405 


civiV,...i..n-  1..S  boon  a  ^^^Xi^^^  ^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^, 
l,ea.a'  l,..w  anosa...  y  "  '     •  "^  '\  >  q  ^,,.  „ot  because'  he  feels  bm.self 
li,>n'.-  10.  I.uoilu.s    .as    '     :V'''      '^'a^Vil'  to  his   relatives'.- 1.  ^»' 
unsafe»  in  Italy,  but  ,n  •> >' '  ,.V  /•7,,fJ'„,in,,  „nd  gcod  character»,  ever 
,.i„zen  of  this  rein.bl.o,  ^<;  "^,,;!*  *  e  nmtrv''^  «he.?,  he  cannot'   exercise 
l,as  betaken  himselt  Itor  !r™HlJ  ,"  •'*^'"'r :,,,,,    give  offence"  while" 
the  .mlural  ri-hts  ot  ;j'^'>   ■-,  |,7,.f^.  i,}'  ,ey  mean  to   give  offence.- 
„„,v  mean"  to  «;'<>"•'   a,      'J;'"  '  „^    V^  ,^^„^ouia  t.o.  govern"  our  re- 
13.  I  have  olten  l»/"*'  V,    nHlfeol   eclions"  that  Ihedefendant  has  made 
public-  14.  \ouhave  "™'^'^';-°  {  ^".i.  ,,„sl,ccn  alleged- which  [coidd 
L'aii.st  our  arirument.-  iJ-  -'*./,''"'",•,  ■.„  iui.ious=-  an  offence».-  16.  1 
have  induced-  the  accused  t<  •  <:->  '»  '    ^     '^  ,'     .j  „,^.,o  act  as  attorney 
,ve  exi-lained  to  you  the  '"''JXv  ;     , .    .^  w    ■-  onr  [friend]  Gajus 
in  this  <ase.-  IT.  1  was  ^^^'^'^^ {~\li„m^A^'  you  ..f  the  do  ngs 
has-  stopped  his  Pf y'-'f^J'^-T, .^'Si  ^    1  ^s  r etnni"  ft"...  Ganl.he  arrived" 
orQidncuus  'U>.<'^lj;>t!^^  :;/^!  J^iHlds  place  in  order  to  be,  as  ,t  were^ 
at  litis  City.— ID-  1  "!^^V  V  V/.cLl  nbout  bv  manv  storms.— 20.  1  ha\L 
in  a  safe  port,  alter  ^^'^"-^/ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  on^- may  say  1  promised 

made  these  ^^•r=^>Vgc'nuaU>    m  ordir  jmii^  ^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^..^^.^  ^ 

from  fear^Mvhat  I  I'^'^^^^'^V  ^j.^i    ??  ,re  ready  to  perpetrate  the  most 
persotts   ^vho*^^lbr^  ^^11::;^^    '^opfe  wh</*  leliele,  \hat  this  Senator 

wicked  crimes*  .—  -i-     .''VVt,'  ,it  some  wei"-hty*»  reason. 

did  not  change  his  vote*^  withou   somt^^^^^^^^^^^  rK.;FECT   subjunc- 

XIV.  Tenses  of  ^^'f^^^^^/J\i::^VKNCES  with  rytn/m-^^m  (i?/J4,  O^^^^ 
TIVES,  ON  HYPOTiiETiCALS,  AND  ^f^^T^^'^^f^j  j^  ^^f  ^/e  two  meu*^  csteemed*- 
,_10);-  1.  You  ^r^lV^V^t^rUe^  t  at  you  knc^^vith  what  zeal  Crassus 
tbeoihet-"  most-'.— 2.  1  VV'^*"^^,  i.?/,}  nnrrht  that  he  would  gain  dis- 
d c^voted--'  himself  to  speaking  ^^'^^V  udd       i^^^^^^^  though t^^ 

it  proper  to  omif^  jvhat  7;"^^i,,,;>V,f  soldiers^'"   that   Hanmh^lLhad 
--^I^  ,Khn^r^ti^ber(.f  goo(l  (/>am/'.  or<.f  ew^^^^^^^^^^^ 

Voider- ^^s:-f^i^^sj;^^  i:;;-!n-  S^'r^:::^-^^::'^,^^^ 

I;  '%'jr/  iZ/V  conveMre  aliquem.-^  P'V   '^'^""/^;^:,„  ^V-^'  m(.re.  b<.ni.-i''  m  emu 
'  lo  jfoyu  ti-ii  "^  iiindmi  With  ts-<e  in  tue  -unjunti.  _  ,v,,,c;i.  rthin<'sl  whim 

_i'i  niiinn   with   hni>ju"«-i.  ^v,  f,„.,h  i  nrofrie)  a<:aiiist  (t/'>  tnost  L"'l' "  J  o«  ^,.^ 

thc^  word.  '  proper  'o  '  ^•^^^J^!:^^,"eop  ^  (\vith  Quan(ce). 
5*  by  an  mlerrogatue  cuu-e.         »-  i 


466 


USE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


467 


before  lie  crossed'  the  Alps?—  5.  I  would  read-  to  yon  many  [passafjes] 
of  his  letters,  if  I  were  not  afraid  that  this  kind  of  arixumeiil^  is  at  vari- 
ance* with  the  i)raetice  of  tliis  court^ —  G.  Would  you  deny  [if]  if  I  re- 
peated*^ on  what  helj)  you  relied^  when  you  atlncked  me  V —  7.  What 
would  preYent*  me  from  becoming"  a  Darwinian'"  if  I  approved  of  Dar- 
win's principles"? — 8.  Epicurus,  surely,  would  not  reason'-  tiius  if  lie"* 
had  learned  his  multiplication  tal)le'^ — 9.  Wiih  what  deliirht'^  would 
you  hear  Sem[)ronius,  since  your  Titius,  whom  you  pniise  so  much,  wiili 
us,  is  by  no  means  ccmsidered  an  orator  of  the  tirst  rank"^. —  10.  I  would 
mention'^  the  advantages  wliich'^  at  that  time,  LucuHus's  advice  had'" 
for  me,  if  I  couhl  do  this-"  without  speaking  of  myself —  11.  As'-'  the 
Saguutians  were  at  all  times  most  attached*-  to  thelioman  peoi)Ic,  so'^" 
in  the  catastrophe  when"*  flannihal  ])ut  an  end  to  the  existence*^  of  the 
whole  people,  they  kei)t'-"  their  fiilh  up  to  their  last  agony-'. —  12.  While'-" 
P()mi)ey  liad  already'^"  understooiP"  thatCtesar  was  estranired^' from  him, 
he  understood  this  much  more  distinctly^''  when  he  found^'  that  llirlius, 
who  was  Caesar's  most  intimate  friend",  had  not  called  on  hiin^^ 

Xy.  Tenses  ob^  the  subjunctive  in  modal  clauses.  (li.  i).")).—  l.  The 
administration  of  tliat  governor  was  so  disgraceful  as  to  leave  that  State 
wliich,  when  he  entered  otlice,  was  most  prosperous,  utterly  ruined  and 
])oor'^ —  2.  Yesterday  your  ambassador  declared^'  tiiat  he  would  not  re- 
turn to  you,  [so]  that  I  have  come  myself  to^*" conclude^"  ])eace  with  you, 
if  possible*". —  ;}.  8empronius's  speech  was  rereived*'  witli  marked*-  fa- 
vor*%  [so]  that  I  have  hardly  ever  heard  any  orator  who,  in  a  like"**  man- 
ner, commanded  the  attention  of  [his]  atidience*^—  4.  Washington  ad- 
ministered  the  government^Vso  faithfully  and  ])rudently*^  that  he  has 
always  iield*"  the  tlrst  place^"  in  tlu;  hearts^"  of  iiis  countrymen. —  5.  So 
great  was  the  wisdom  of  our  forefathers^'  in  framing^-  the  constitution 
of  the  government,  tliat  it  has  remained  intact,  although^^  a  most  formi- 
dable"^ civil  war  was  kiiulled^Mn  order  to  destroy^"  1t.— G.  That  man 
bore^'  [his]  poverty  in  a  manner  that  never  any  one  heard  him  utter  a 
complaini^^—  7.  Balbus  has  written   that  he  is'sulfering^"  under  a  bad 

>  Tran-i,'it'(U.— '^  n-citilre.— ^  «;ciiiis  orationis.— ■•  (n  be  at  ruridiire  iclth.  ul)li()rrC*re  ab.^ 
5  liiijis  loci  in()<.--«  iiarnlrc— '  KeiuU'r:  '  iriyini:  (frtfus)  (.ii  what  help  (a'U'iha)  vou  at- 
{arkt!il  in-^\— «  proliiliC'ie.— s»  fvadrre.  — '<>  Darviiiiiiiiiis.-,"  HcikIcm-  :  if  I  ai)pr.»ved  ip/o- 
Mrt)  what  that  L<»>U'J  ^'ays  (-ii]>j  1— '-dicc-rc.  — ^3  liii'o.— '*  Kfiidcr  :  if  he  li;id  Iwirixul  how 
much  are  twice  two  (P-  1,  §  "-iV.»,  kxplan.).--'^  Quo  tandem  animo.— >«  (o  conH'fer  some- 
bO(lij  (HI  orator  of  tke  flrnf  rank,  i\\\i\\wm  in  ])iimariis  oratoiibu^  nutnonln'. — ^^diccre. 
— '»  lifiidcr  by  an  inicrroiijativc  clau!*i'.— »>*  to  hare  adrantafjeii  for  t'ouut/ody.  alicui  pro- 
riessc— -«>  l{(Mider  :  If  I  would  not  have  ({/>^n/nUiah  to  t'peak  "of  myself.— 2>  Sajrnntliii 
(lunin.--  2i  ic)  fte  nwt  a/fadied  to  s'ltnefrntlij,  alicui  surnmam  aniicitiain  piiestilrc.— "•'3  turn 
ve:o.— 24  in  ilia  calainiiate  qua.— "^^  uinvei>ani  L'enttm  tollcre.— "■'«colere.— "'  ad  ultimam 
puam  pern iciem. —*•'■"  (pium. .  .turn.— *^^  antea.— 3"  intelli;;ere.— ^>  alicnilre  ab.— sa  certius. 
—=•3  vidCM-e.— 3M{i'n(br  'who   Wiis   most    intimate  (fainiliarU)   to  that    [one]'.      The 
clause  is  i-eprescntfd  as  a  rea-^on  of  I'ompey.— ^^  to  call  on  sonulmty.  aliqiiem  convciiTre. 
— =*«  Keiidet- :  '  That  man  so  dis:j:racefully  (////y>is')  administered  {qafternare)  the  republic, 
that  wliai  State  he  received  (accyn're)  most  flourishin;;  (/o/r//,s), 'that  [one]  he  left  (r&lin- 
fji(fire)  utterly  (penita>i)  destroyed  (evertert)  and  poorest*.— 3'  i)v  ucf/art.—^"  ad.  with  jre- 
rundial  — 3»  componere— «0  ?r///i  yoa  if  j}(,Msi/,le  ;  render:  'if  it  will  liave  b»'en  allowed 
(/«r(?/)  throuirh  you'.— -«i  excipere.— ■»-' in-i-nis.— ^3  LM-alia.~'«*  par.— «s /o  cotnmand  the 
attention  of  an  audience,  animos  iiudientium  commovGre.- •*"  rcinpublicam  ;:abernJlre. — 
*"<  with  so  much  laith  (fides)  and  prudence.— ««  tenCre.— <»  Render  :  •  the  first  in  tlie  heart* 
of  his  citizeiisplace".— 6«aninii.— 5=  majOres — S2  Kender  :  'thatthe  law  by  which  tlioge 
willed  (velli)  that  the  republic  nhould  be  for  ever  (in  perjh^tuittn)  ;r<>verned."has  remained 
(manure)  intact  (incotu/nisf.—^^  quum.— **  nniximum.— s»  inllammaie.— ^«  evertere  (ire- 
rundial  after  ad).—^''  ferre.— s-*  to  utter  a  complaint,  queri  (panic,  as  accessory  predi- 
cate).—^»  Render  :  '  that,  he  is  oppressed  (periimra^tic participle)  by  so  great  hoarseneeu 
(ratfdtas)  \ 


i 


I 
I 


^  ti^ot  l.o  pannot  sneak.—  8.  Crassus  held  the  first 
attack  of  hoarseness  «^  tl  at  »e  canm^^^^^  g^^^^^^,  ^„,ong  the  jurists, 

place  att.ong  tl^e  speak;  J  of  hi    timc^^^a^^^  ^^^^^^^^^^^  common  between 

which  P''^»»''^"^  ^^l^^^'V'  rU?e?r  irirt  of^  the  other's  praise,  bul«  [held] 
l,oth.  so  tlial  e^^^^h^appropnattd    Mil  m  i  ^^^^^,,^ 

his  own  wholly.- i).  ^^  ^''^^  .^'\^'';'',,^^^^^^^^^  seemed  as  if  the  whole 
and  the  cries  of  ngony  ^ere  inte  e.  ^^[^'j^^  J^^^^  ^^,^,,  at  that  time 
citv"  were  in  the  deepest  »^<'"'»"^-V  .1  ipinM^  .,«  the  foremost  by  far'*, 
wa\  sttch'^  that  the  ^^^:^^':^'^^:^^^  11  He  was  [in  the  habit 
[and  that]  the  lUmu  »^S^^^' ,/^^,%^^'";;"  Vb  th  and  thirsty'"  to  his 

of]  taking'^such  exercises'   as  ^  .^/^^"^^^^^^^^^  of  Greece^"^   that 

n,jals'-r-^12.  Athens-'  had  ^^J^^f^  ^^'^.^^I'^r  ,i,e  supreme 
Sparta-  was  aware    that  •\-^;    .^   ^^  !^  X^^^^^^^  ^^ere  the  merits  of  these 

only  a  (luestion  <>^V  rTi//.  lit  to  im  ^^e"  which  of  them^«  was  superior^" 
[two]  men^  that  it  is  dimcult  toju.ige    ]^    '*^'  .       ^  allowable  ten- 

L  the  other-.     [Uender  both  f;;^^  f;J^^,^^^^^^  large  was  the 

ses.  There  will  be  ihree  y^^^"''^^^^^"^;""!'  Jacu  lous^'  that  tliL^  should^"^ 
forces  of  the  enen.y  that  it  ^^^.^^^f^^^^^^^^^^  15.  There  was 

have  been  defeated  by  so  sninlP^  a  tou^c  /  ^^^^^^^^^^^^  ,^^.^,  ^.i.Ue"  we  are 
such  as(.ircity^^ot  pn.nunent^  %%  i^  \"  i^  e  t  admii-ation  for  any-.- 
satisfied-  with  a    ew    we  7/^/,  =^;."    ./    ,^,^,  ^   ^ 

IG.  That  general  might  have  ^U'st.m  ed  ;  "^^  ^  \  ,^^^^^,  ^3^  applied-  what 
he  had  pursued-  it*-  with  energv  '  t^  ,  '  V*  1 '  "Ve^"  knew  how  to  defeat 
Ctcsar  is  said-  to  have  remarked^-'  o  I  omp^  }  ,  ;  v Corv  -\ne  clauses  m 
the  enemy],  [but]  noij'  how  Jju^^^eusc  ^^^^^^^,,,,14^.  n.  Pom- 
the  senience,  17.  1«.  to  betransfovwed  ''^''^;:^^^^^^^^^^^  Home  with 

pey  left  abruptly-  tlu3  cUy  ;---^>--,,;\W^!;:;;^  the  undertaking" 
the  greatest- rapidity  -^.^^^^^ '"-^.t  ,7f  ..nHin--»"  the  sieire  of  the  city.-- 
because  there  was  very  be  ^^/^^^^^^^^(7;  "ecmntrv-:  that  he  placed- 
1«J.  LJ5rutus^vass(>lalthtulmhlJ.(mllt^l'"_  ^     ,,     ^.  j^j^  g.^^  _ 

the  ireedom  of  his  --^^]^y^^^:j''^!^,^Z^^^^^       a  gift  trom 

nu'.r         'lH'aki..j,'Wi<'c'»,l>"t  ^a.//.//M  ^nevula  '»/^^^';^ !,,';.  M^nit  iaufem)  both 
.„'^4   q,lo,lammoUo.-^  ^}'^7;-  %}':l^^'o^ l"t^  to  address  t/ie  jyeople.  i"  7»"0ne 

inenjae)  li  s  (i.e.  praise)  wh  dlv  '  (see  p   '''\^^;^\,:     ;^  in  ,,iU  us  fie/ usque)  were  made  that 
q«L-f«  ll^-nder  :  '  .0  great  .^v^H^p,nL-  a.^   n^;'   ^  ^^/^^^"  ,  ^  -^^^         (vermn)rnonnnu^ 
1^      11  Render-   *  tluU    the  buterest    [in]  '''^  V;    i  tl.nt  then  «t^te  (^/a^«*)•— '^  ^»^^^^"-"" 


ilcibfades  were  .0  great  virtues  and  so  great  Mct.  . 


4G8 


USE   OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 


vices  Ihat  all  wonclerod  lliat  so  difFcreiit  traifs  of  cliaractfr»  sliouUl  be 
toiind  in  one  man.— 23.  Aiitoniiis  was  stiMuilatedM)v  so  violent*  hatred 
a.^^ainst  Cieero  that  lie  was  not  only  hostile'  to  the  latter",  but  also  to  all 
ot  his  incnds.—  3;].  James  the  Second  was  not  the  man  to'  pardon"  jn- 
junr-3  received,  but  of  such  a  character  that  he"  would'"  rather  lose  his 
crown  tlian  torego'-'  his  vcni^eance  apiinsl^^  tliose  who,  on  a  certain  oc- 
casion  ,  had  treated  him  with  disresi)eci'^— 24.  1  never  uttered  the  sli-rht- 
est  rcm.irk  in  belialf  of  Capsar^»  which  he  did  not  receive"  with  evideiil'" 
satlsl.•l(•tl()n^^_2.■).  Xobody  ever  returned  from  that  coiintrv  without  beiii"- 
nllected  m  heallii'-'".—  20.  Thraso  was  not  so  illiterates^  as  nof^^  to  under- 
stand tiiesense()f  Cicero's  words'^^— 27.  [There]  was  nobodv  presenf^* 
wiiliout  leelinir-  compassion  for  the  accused.—  28.  What  services  did  v«)U 
^^'•V-"^^;;  •:;•  ^"  ^vhichl  did  not  surpass"  your  expectation  by  my 
zeal-  .—  2!).  J  hey  entered  into  a  copartnership^»,  but  so  that  the  one  was 
to  attend  to  the  in-door  business^",  and  the  other  to  travel  for  the  con- 
cern .—  ;jO.  Ihey  compromised  the  niatter^'^  so  that  Sempronius  was  to 
receive  an  indemnily"  of  (;o,()00  sesterces,  but  was  to  trive  securitv  for 
lutiire  damages  to  iJalbus^^^—  iM.  He  left  only  so  much  of  a  garrison 
in  tiK'  town,  that  the  inhabitants  could  not  carry  out  any  treacherous 
plan    . 

XVI.  Tenses  of  dependent  nvpoiiiETicAL  peuiods.  (/?.  OG  )  (Tv^ 
ifi  every  sentence  even/  idlniismhlGform  of  the  lu/pothctical  preterite  )—  1  We 
are  not  always  allowed  to  do^'»  what  would  be  proi)er=''  witli'"*  others'»  — 
2.  Alexander,  bciiiir  struck-*"  by  an  arrow  at^^  the  siesre*-'  of  some  citv  re- 
^''"''^'''A'y^'""'^  whicli,  as^^  he  himself  said,  would  i)roclaim**  Jiim  to  be  a 
man  if  he  were  not  Jove's  son.—  3.  It  is  to  no  purpose  to  ask^»^  what  I 
would  do  it  these  [things]  had  not  happened.—  4.  The  prosecutor"  savs 
that  I  ompey  has  done  what  he  had  no  right  to  do*«,  which  is  a  more  seVi- 
ous  [charge]  than  if  he  said  that  he  did^"  what  he  oughl^'  not  [to  have 
(ionej.—  o.  Either  I  must''/  say  many  [things]  which  1  could  not  suppress^' 
It  I  were  present,  or  [IJ  must  not  go^\- 0.  It  is  the  question,  whether 
Alexander  the  Great",  it  ho  had  crossed  over  to  Italv  with  an  armv,  would 
have  detealed  the  Komans,  or  not.—  7.  I  do  not  doubt  but  that  Sempro- 
iiius,  with  great  pleasure ^^,  would  accept  this  olfer^^  if  he  were  \mV'  pre- 
i  ^  dipt  rent  tniit^  of  churacttr,  lam  diveivu  iiatanT.— a  i-se  — »  to  t)e  t^tiiTuilal^d 
against,  i.rri  ni.-Mam  fen.x.-s  i„i,uicu..-6  by  u.-Uhe  vum  to  is  qui -«la  U? 
njuruis  ncct'ptus  nMuitiere.-"  fjut  of  .nrh  a  characttr  that  /e'.ed  qui^-io  vele- 

^^^r'^''inr:f'^-'''''''^^^        Ti..cSui<ei;qua^i^Xbi.^. 

lantlLi  .     ^()  ^\\^;:\\U'>\  yminwuun)   ri-inark  (^/ r/z/w)  of  mine  (1'   1    l)   I'd   li  "i)  in- 
tork-ml  Kinlyreaer,)  lor  (At'.a.'.-.T  acTipenr-."  illustri.-.-iv  -ratia.-Vo^  ^.i^VJ,^/,; 

com  u'ovCd^ 

t i,.      -A  /^     T     **^"^^ '  •     ^  "'^t  (lid  you  order  (rnandare)  me  '  y_-J7  vinceie  — ^»  dili-'eii- 

tia.-^«  to  enter  into  a  copartntr./up,  socieiftte^i  ii.t.-r  se  coniraliere  -:*«  Reiulei  •  'Th  t 

\hl  ;;"nL''^"' •'*''';''''•  ^■^';'''V''''"  ^'"'"^'^l  ^V'^^l»  were  to  bed,,n™  ;,V-^Ker^^^^^ 
the  uall«  (;wte-,.,'._Ji  i{,.,uler  :  'llie  other  ^ho^ld  always  b.-  o V/the  roacN  S^ 

hiufwhithTtc  mT;,;; ;;!:;'^ *;'.''^^^"*" li^v^-.r ^r^'^r" ^^"^ '••"'  ['-'.i i>-.n] done »;; 

..  .u>  i    .    /f  oimiiet.— '-i,'Mnindial.-^3  s^ilGre  aliiiuid.--'*  venire -5^  liender  bv 

Suu!:  -^i  ffZX'iZ    ^"^  ^^^^a,ic/,.o,  si  etc-^e  wltk  yreat  pleasure.  lib;uti..ime.-^i  cou^ 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


469 


vented  bv  the  most  important^  reasons.-  8.  I  am  greatly  embr.rrassed 
b^the  absence Tthos  by  whose  zeaP  I  wou  d  have  obtained* 

evervtldn-    ?1  if  they  were  present).-  9.   Clodius  lett»  tlj,e  ^>rum  a    an 
enr'v  1      r«   because  h"e  would  have  been  in  great  danger  if  he  had  staid 
r     ^'1   i?!n.r:.r       10    rThc'iel  were  six    cohorts  distributed  all  over«    he 
;;^-^  nc   "^d  idi    \n!ouM  <n-dered-  to  the  support-  <>f  Domitius  i   I 

wi  iwl  Wheml  atonenlac  Y<m  have  d(me  things  ot  such  a  kind 

th  t         Se  u  e  1f  U  we^  free,  would  have  placed  you  under  tria     or 
I,\\'  ,      e- -^    2'.  C\i3sar  explained-  to  the  soldiers  the  danger"  in  which 
1         m V  would  have  been\f  the  enemy  had  known ^^^^^^^ 
the  fortifications  were  held.-  KJ.  It  is  not  probable  '^^^'l^^}"^^^^^^^^^^ 
ould  have  remained  quiet-  if  they  had  been  "^\VTtWv  had  n     been 
,\Ve^«  —  14    Tliere  is  no  doubt  l>ut  that  the  citizens^»,  it  they  had  "J>t  «^^n 
1  orou.rhtv  demoralized-,  would  have  been  aide  soon-  to  ;;ecove   Mlic.i 
;;';.i!^_'l.K  Tlie  ambassadors  answered  that  thev  had  ^f^^"  ^^  Z^^^^^^'^^.- 
nnds  of  the  king-,  althou-lr^  they  would  not  have  ^^^j-ed  [to   do  soj 
wi  hmit  his  •iuth()ntv-^''  -  1C>:  Thev  marched"^-'  with  so  great  rapid  ty  that, 
•         care  tbrt  IwomnkH^^^^  delayed-"  them,  they  would  have 

I..    lw.d   he  c  t   -  bcf  r^^  news-^  of  their  defeat"  had  been  known»''. 

^  n    So  ncS^eiuiy  ^s  the  city  guarded-  that  the  ei.emy  ^}^ 
eas  ly  taken^he  whole  garrison-,  if  they,  at  night  l^^d  scaled     th^^v.>l 
bv  ladders^"'—  18.  The  ambassadors    said  that  the    ^^*;"^'"^  ,  ^^^'^^  "!L 
sJrv^  so  well  of-  the  Roman  people  that  their  country-  «".^^^^"  ^«J/^^, 

have  been  devastated  almost  in  sight-  of  the  l^^'»"'-^"  ^;;>">-7.\^;,ve  feea 
was  the  want"  of  provisions  that  it  would,  nnquest u  nably  ;i;;^vc  ^^^ 

ecessary-  to  capitulate-,  if  the  enemy  had  not  ^^^^^^l^^^^  ^;'^^;"  ^  I J^^^^ 
X.ro       oo   The  conlla.n-auon  of  the  city  made  so  rapid  progress    that,   I 

^U;i had  '  nnlnemid  to  blow^  noti  ing  at  all  would  ^^^^^^^^^^ 
-  21.  So  suddenly  dia  the  vniemy  attack  our  troops  on    It  ina  ch     ti  ai 
the  ^vhole  ba-nige-  of  tlie  army  would  have  been  lost   ^i^.,  ^^I^  JJ;^^.^ 
had  not  held  thei7- ground- with  the  greatest  fi^-;;T^l-7^^^^^^ 
no  liope  of  relief^^  even  it  we  could  break  through     the  ciicie  ci 
by  ^vhieh  the  enemy  has  invested""'  us.  ot^rtt-ntpttve    (R 

^XVI  I.    (.N)N  VEUSION  OF  THE  FUTUKE-PRESENT  TNTO  A  ^[  ^'^^^^^^^^^^^j  ^^^^ 

97.)- 1.  lam  afraid  the  tribunes  will  eagerly-^    'T,t     re    w- s       e  u^^ 
to  propose-^  the  law  on  the  consular  pr()Vinces.--  j^Ther^^ 

parative).-^  morCui  uu  llu'.nnperfect  u  I'^^r^  f  u'V/K  oV W/  a  ^i//rf,  ea.-»^  to 
•i-iai  -«  mittere.-  '»  ^^nbsiduini  (abstract  datne).-'  ^^'  ;^',;^  '  "^u  od..cere  -^*  Ren- 
re  some  one  under  trial  .or  hi.  ^^^-^<'^<l^.i;;i^^^;!!\r:i^lZ^r^  to  re- 
Irr  1)V  ;in  interro-ative  clause  un  wha  dan-ei  etc)  ^^'7'"  _i,»eivitas  (  =  cives). 
nahi  V/./i./,  «luieseere.-»^  nrtwremjl.n  ^'7/.«'-^'  :r4nr~'^'  revi^  reciperare.  - 
-•^0  they  are  ihorou,,1dy  de,mrahzed,  »"""»  '^'J^'  ,  '  //,  ^f  the  I'biq.  facere  qme  rex 
23  Keuder  :  •  the  lo>*i  lihiu-s]'  -"^^  to  execde  the  ^  '  Xne^  (  nrmar/\  bv  the  authoriiy 
fieri  voh,it.-'-==  (,uanu,uam.--«  KcMKler  =  ^"^^^;;;.^  .^''7^  ,"'^  impedlre  - 
01  hituself.--^^  iter  facere  -^^  Render  :  tje  c^a  •  U;mO  ,^,^,4*^^^,,,^  ^^,,^^,,4,  defe  it. 
30  ad  urbem  pcrveulre.--"  citius  Hi'^m.-^^^  """t>u.  "' ^i.,^,,,  pnesidium  opprinie.e. 
-34  pc>rcrebrescere.-3i  custodIre.-3«  ^0  ^^^;/^''f  J'' flff  i  ide  a  iquo  meritnm  esPC- 
-37  Lcendere^3.  .cake.--  to  .t^erc^souu-Uat^sonu^  ^e  i^^g^^^SiOne.-*^  by  g<Tun- 
«Oai:ri.— *>  hyc/e/ye/v.— *^  conspectus— "CM  jf  all  as.^     ._.,"V  '.^..^..^vio  r.-lenter  proced«re. 


470 


USE   OF   THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 


most*  dani^er  that  the  iTinforcoincnts!,  on  [their]  niarcli,  would  be  attack- 
ed* by  the  enemy,  and  [henee]  would  not  arrive  early^  eiiouirh*  at  the 
camp.—  ;j,  llaunil)al  was  afraid  that  the  kins  would  not  t'liltiil  his  prom- 
ise* of  makini;  war  au:ainst  tlie  Romans.—  4.  I  liave  not  the  slii^htest 
doublMhat  the  Senate'  will  ixrant  your  petition. —  o.  It  is  not  doubtful'* 
to  me  but  that  you  should  immediately  return  to  Home. —  0.  Cix?sardid  not 
doubt  that  almost  all  the  Gauls  woukl  join  the  conspiracy". —  7.  Xobody 
doubted  that  Pompey,  with  all  his  forces,  would  come  to  the  relief"  of 
Domitius.—  8.  The  Helvetians  did  not  doubt  that  the  Allobroi^es  wouKl 
be  persuaded  to  allow"  tliem  a  passa.i^e''^  throui^h  their  territoiy". —  9,  I 
sec  what  will  happen"  to  us  if  they  persevere'\—  10.  Many  perished, 
not  knowiui?"  what  direction''  to  take  or  to  avoid. —  11.  It  was  decided" 
by  tlie  delejrates  how  many  shij^s,  and  how  much  money  each  State 
should  contribute'".— 12.  Valerius  Procillus  said,  they  had  deliberated^" 
in  his  presince*',  whether  he  should  be  immediately  burned  alive-'"',  or 
whether  his  punishment'^'  should  be  delayed-^—  13.  Sempronius  did  not 
know  with  how  many-*  troops,  or  by  what  roule-^  the  enemy  would 
come;'  to  the  camp.—  14.  Cicero  was  waiting'-''  at  Brundusium  lor  the 
decision  of  his  tate  by  Cit'sar. —  1.5.  I  have  written  to  vour  brother  to 
send  me  a  copy  of  the  paper-"  which  he  is  i^^oin.ir  to  read'"  hi  the  Senate. 
—  10.  We  have  been  warned^'  to  be  on  our  i,Miard'-,  lest  we  may  be  inter- 
cepted^*'  by  Caesar,  because  he=*^  had  marched"  in  tiie  same  direction  in 
which  our  journey  lies,  and  would  arrive  there  sooner  tiian  we  could. — 
17.  I  am  absolutely  unable  to  do  anythiiii^^''  in  your  atfiir,  since  the  Presi- 
dent will  be  absent  almost  duriuLT  the  whole  summer.—  18.  The  memory 
of  this  man  is  so  much  revered"  by  his  townsmen",  that  abnost  all  wiil 
make  contributions^"  towards  the  erection  of  jjis  statue.—  V.L  A  pardon 
was  i^ranted'"  to  Domitius  with  the  i>roviso*'  that  he  should  leave'- the  city 

in  the  same  nii^ht.— 20.  There  was  a  dan<:er  lest"  that  [whole]  party*' mi"-h"t 
be  captured  or  killeiPMf  they  should  fall  in  with^*^  a  larger  force*'  of  The 
enemy.— 21.  Tije  delegates  remarked,  that  if  Hannibal  sliould  lose  the 
fleet,  the  loss  would  be  the  same*^  as  if'"  [the  fleet]  were  lost  by^"  [any] 
other  conuii.inder;  and  if  any  success  would  be  ohiaiiUHp',  it  would  re- 
dound"- to  the  glory  of  Hannibal,  not  [to  that]  of  (he  king.— 22.  1  can 

1  Suminns.— 2  RondtT  :  '  tli.it  tlio  rciurorceincnts,  huviiii;  l)ec'ii  attacl<e(l  ((f.<vi/>(»;-f)  on 
tiu^  march  (iter)  l)y  the;  t'licmii's,  won  id  not  ai-rivr.'— ^  niaiurii<.— -«  HcikUt  botli  by  .safis 
and  jHirff/H,  wliicli  advcrl)s  requin'  dillVrt'iit  exprrssioiis  I'or  ttit' coiijmictiou.— s  Rcudor- 
'  would  not  fiiinil  (  pneddre)  what  ht'  liad  |)n»miscd  coMCi-rnini:  (de)  tiie  mal^in"-  of  war  {btl- 
luingerere)  ai,'ainst  tiio  Koinans.-»  omiiTrio  non  diil)itru-e.— '  Kc'tidor  :  'iliar  tliou  wilt  ob- 
tain (Impefnlrt)  from  the  Senate;  that  whicli  thou  art  t^i-akhi'^  (jjchft).—"  diihiii^.—»  join 
the.  coiusinraaj ,  ad  conjurationem  aceeilere.— >o  t=ul)!^idium  (al)?iract  dative).  -»^  dare  -- 
12  uer.;-i3  tines.— 14  e!>.<e.-ia  pert^eveiilre.— »6  ino.ertus.— 17 /o  takew  to  avoid  a  direc- 
tion, aliquid  petere  aut  vitilre.-'«  const  itnere.  -  i»  pnestare —'-*>  Render  •  'that  it  waa 
deliberated  Kcoimilere)\-^^  Sec  p.  ISl,  li.  2:il,  Obs.  l.-^--'  lo  be  (jxnietl  alive,  ij^ni  necilri.— 
-iJ  supplicmm.— 'i  ni  alind  tempus  ditlVrre.— "  qiiantus.— '-•«  itinera—"  pervenlrc — 
2^  Render  :  expected  wliat  of  a  re.<oIiition  (consilium)  Ca'sar  would  take  icaitert)  coii- 
cernin<,'  lum. --'-:»' exemplmn  libelli.— ^o  recitare.— 3i  ixan\vi\K:\x\—^-^  to  be  on  one's  (ruard, 
cavere.— 3-^  to  intevctid,  excii)ere  — s^  quod  is.— 35  Render  '  Jiaviiii;  marched  into  the  same 
places  which  we  are  t»eekin^(;>e^e7'e),  would  come  thither  more  quickly  than  we  could'.— 
3"  Render  :  'In  thy  tliniir  I  can  do  at)S()lutely  {o//ihIho)  nothiiii,''.— 37  tanto  lionOre  liabe- 
tur  apiid.  -38  cives  >ui.— 3»  to  makeconfribuliom  fouardniht  erection  of  a  atatut,  pecunuia 
111  statuam  conlerre.  — *o  /■or/ran'' 'i7;a;(io«.  impunitjltem  concedere.-*»  ita.~'«- decedere. 
—43  „(..—  14  manus.— <-  to  be  capturtd  or  killed,  opprimi.— *''  to  fall  in  v:Uh.  incidere  in.— 
<7  iiiajores  copue.— <«  Render:  'that  it  would  be  ilie  s^aine  [aiiioiiut]  ol  loss  {dauinnm)\ 
— '««  ac  St.  -•'*'  ])er.— 51  Render  ;  '  il  anything'  prosperous  woukl  bai)peu  {etenire)\—^'^  ease 
with  abstract  dative. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


471 


1  n  of  T  r^nmo  to  tlic  readin<^-  of  this  bilP  with  the  purpose* 

assure^vou   ha    1  came  to      e  leaa.n  interest^.- 

expect"  the  return  <.t  «'  f  .»'"'';',?'"^V"  ."'a,  s.K.n  as"  the  season»  ofthe  year 
rn;;.'p:.r.'-rir.;  yllu  wouW  ^K^  up  «.at  p.an.',  since  that  law 

''xvin'cONvln'^ION  OF  TIIK  FUTCRE-PF.RFECT  INTO  A  SUBJtTXCTIVE. 

/n^.L       1    ^^.n  «IV  ihatwcwiU  be"  (lelealed  if  we  ever  would  come 
\^-^^JiiuZt^;^l!:n^l  ^Seu,pronius  writes  that  "ewiU  return  as 

consul  raist a     ^V;  J''^  ..   ,      .,•  .j  ^  of  the  Roman  army  would  be 

u  »  the  l>.^p"  that  they  would  deliver  ll^r^'^!,'^!°\^"rck<'To    he    ti^ 

that  person"^  whom  he  himself  would  appouU^ — 

inai  ptiMM. — >> — -— ^-r— — f^— -^-T^^;^;^^  ,,t,_6  (o  second  the  biU  of  a  law, 

1  Contirmare.--^  ""*'""•  uiiTlrc  11«  thepaS^eis  in  yow  interest,  utile  vob  b  e.t.- 
leiris  auciorem  esse.-'  V'^'"'  "!.  ,;rv7  !niv  re  -u  eerundial.-»^  exercitum  ex  hibenns 
•  existim5re.-io  to  w^igti  andior  ''a;/,f  "\\\^\.„.,,^  joXcedere  -i«  abrogSre  (Render 
educere.-i3  ,,nnm  pr  mum.-i*  ^en  pus  -i^^^^^^^  primum.-^o  you  allow 

him.  per  te  licet.— ^i  tensCrc  ut.  . '/'"'„11  (ij.rnitv  ha?  been  recovered' (^'6^"?>^«^"«i 
aliqtio  airere.--^  i>atna.---  ^''^V^  ;.  .if///L^'  ,  ."d"  to  "caven,  he  vowed'.-"  claru^.- 
at)i:  abs.).-'^«  attoilere.  Render  :     "^  V'  r  Iv   ^Av     wcml  Utop   have  stopped,  conn^tere) 

n.ilt,Tf.-"  ,«i"«  ',;""«,  -''irf^J  ,J"  -<»  P^cl,.°r" -''  1!^^         ■■  ''I'^t  [he]  should 

i-ki-; twiti'it    Mhiuiii(>   clause. — *     remuiere. —      |iic«rv.ii»^»v,. 

freat  (/mc!a-;'erth^se  nloneys '.-  -  to  appoint,  ei  negotio  pra^ficere. 


472 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


BOOK  SIXTH, 

COMBIXATION^   OF   SEXTEXCES. 


CHAPTER  FIUST. 

THEORY  OF   SENTEXCE-COMBIXATIOX. 

§  608.  'Sentences  are  connected  with  each  other  either  by  suboudixa- 
TiON,  or  by  co-ordination.  Sentences  are  combined  by  subonlination 
if  one  of  two  sentences  (which  is  called  *  the  dependent  sentence',  or 
'  clause ')  forms  a  phrase  (P.  1,  p.  21)  with  one  of  the  members  of  the  other 
(principal)  sentence,  the  whole  dependent  sentence  having  thus  the  gram- 
matical value  of  a  single  word  or  member  in  the  frame  of  the  principal 
sentence.  Sentences  which  are  so  connected  with  other  sentences  that 
they  cannot  be  considered  as  members  of  the  latter,  are  said  to  be  com- 
bined by  co-onluKiiion. 

Ons.  1  The  form  of  c()-of:dixatiox  is»  only  r/rammnnralh/,  hut  not  lonicalhj,  distln- 
puslH'd  from  SIBOKDINATION,  ho  that  the  same-  thoii-hi  mav  ..ftn,  assume  eiiher  the 
lorm  ol  a  saftordinate,  or  of  a  coordinate  sentence  wirhout  «tVectin<'  irs  meanin"  ast  • 
Omnem  senuium  wv.c^xit  cefero!i(/ueii>ih  corona  yv/i./i^/i/- (copulative  c-ordiuatioii)  whicli 
sentence  is  equivalent  lo  :  Omnem  smatum  necjlvit  qiiuiavet,roH  vndtrtt  (or  Omu'isniata 
i,ecato  ceteros  yendidit).  Cm^.  B.  (i.  rj,  u;.-  I'rimo  suis  ioci.s  exercitum  eduxit  conti- 
nenMbu;»  vero  diebus  ^/^  ^^my/vti^'/e/,//.  «  castrU  ;  ^  Eduxit,  oominentibus  vtro  diGbua 
jmxjreaitfHUur  a  casfn.<.  (Kirst  Jie  drew  up  iiJ!*  army  on  tiie  ixrounds  occupied  by  him- 
Kelt,  6//^  on  the  luUowmf,'  dayn  he  advanced  further  Irom  tlie  camp.)  Ca;^  B  C  y  84 
liie  same  sentence  ini^ht  iiave  been  e.:presse(i  in  th.-  form  of  a  concessive  clause  Ud 
2)nino  axvrcwmw  eduxit,  contiiicntibus  diel)us  pro-rediebatiir).—  Memoria  mil  exercejl- 
ln\\u>i{  dimiiiuetur  (memory  mu>t  be  exercised,  or  it  will  he  diminished),  =  M<Mn..ria 
(limmuitiir //isi  eaine.reneas.—  The  question  whether,  in  a  uiven  instance,  subordination 
or  co-ordination  should  be  employed,  forms  a  part  o(  Ldfin  rhelonc. 

Obs.  '2.  A  subordinare  ((b-pendent)  sentence,  or  clause,  rec;ardini:  its  grammatical  re- 
lation to  tlie  principal  sentence,  is  reirularlv  conceived  as  bcin::  virtuallv  one  of  the  two 
members  ota phra.-^-e,  the  other  memi.erof  whicii  is  acluallv  a  m.-mb.-r  of  the  principal 
sentence.  The  clanso  may  take  either  the  place  of  the  ffor.rninr,.  ,„•  the  place  <'f  ih-  dr- 
jH'ndent  word  of  the  phrase,  as  :  n„j„s  riri  >/>'<^  -^'7  constanlta^  inier  omnis  constat.  Here 
the  interroi^ative  claii-e  '///////.v. . . qme  xit constantia  '  has  the  irrammatical  lunction  as  ,<ub- 
^u  1  y'';/"'^T-f""-*'  predicate  ' amshit  \  beiiij,'  to  it  in  the  relation  of  a  qoreriHun  word 
^  1  '  ^.  IV'  ."hile,  m  reirard  to  the  irhde  .<<-„f€ncfi,  everv  clause  i-  conceived  as  •depend- 
ent .—  t/ujus  (/>ue  ^it  coiistuntia  xcU  \  Here  the  same  interroirative  clau-e  has  the  re- 
lation  of  a  romp/t(v>f/  (transitive)  o/Oerf  to  the  irovernin-  predicate  '  vav'  (  =  i,o>*ii  ejus 
constantiam).-  '  AccCju  litteras  qmis  /hH  scrip^hti  \  Her*-  the  relative  clau-e  '  quj. . . 
scrijm,sft    IS  in  the  relation  ot  an  uttrihute  to  the  noun  litleras  (  =  heri  scriptas). 

§609.  Both  in  the  co-ordination  and  subordination  of  sentences,  the 
form  of  connection  is  threelbld,  being  either  {a)  syndetic,  or  {!>)  pronomi- 
nal, ov{c)  a.vjndctic.  Syndetic  is  the  connection  by  conjunctions  ;  tro- 
NOMiNAL  is  the  connection  by  determinative  form-adjectives  (P.  I.,  p.  1G9 
^o\\.)oY  form-adverbs  {V.ll.^Y^.-^XiS  No.2);  asyndetic  is  the  connection 
without  any  intervening  words  by  which  the  nature  and  logical  meaning 
of  the  connection  is  marked.  (P.  I.,  g  120  ;  §  381,  U.  9). 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBIN.\TION. 


473 


tion  by  both  c-^-'>^-^>"^;'l]^J"    ;;  '^i'  Sa^  see  P.  Up.  483.--Some 

junctions  see  P.  I.,  ^  'i'^™' \     n    ,.re  ilsonsed  for  the  purpose  of  subordination  (as  the 
of  the  CO  ordinatin-  ^^''J»"^  ''    ::"'^/„t"  comparative  clauses,  and 

copulatives  ac.  and  «/r//^^^>^onu  tiin  s  a  s  ,  er,  ^"'.^  .,;^.„.o,di„aiiuL',  and  subordinating 


tiun,  1)  that  ol  '^^1^'<,1'V;^'^')\"\\'",'/,^;/  ^vords  used  lor  this  connection  are  th» 

„la  connective  with  ^^'"^  'f^!^ '  ''Xu^^^^^^^  form-adverbs,  being  deimn- 

d.'finite  forra-adjectives,  and    »»:  ;;;;/;iiyf,,V'vtibord    atioii  (tA-,  hie,  Ule,  ibi.  hie,  hue  elc. 
.trafive^  for  co-ordinatum,  and  re  aft ^e.  ^  y.,^     "^j?'  -^^X  ,^^  ^^, .. ,,,  tu  the  co-.)rdina- 


hat 
e 


leiice.  iwiiiiMiiii'^  -       ,\  .^  ...^ntrarv   its  niitecedeiit  zn  ila  ow    tierut/tvt  \y  m"^'^*" 

demonstrative  i''^<>n»'ra  es   on  the  coM^^^^  connected  ;  as  HuicqmA 

makin-the  lattera  "V;"*'''"'  "^^     l.^t  !)  /^ ////v  o^^^^  a»^  mentioned  in  the 

cumperisset  aperit ;  He  ^*';"";""^»^^^!.^ :,/;,*  v'     Pans  4  5.-  Hue  Cu^sar  magnis  iti- 
precedin- sentence)  what  he  had  ^^'^  ^  ^^^L^^^^  pre(edin-  sentence) 

r.eribus  c.nitendit ;     «JIJ^y'^V^J^'^^^L'^^Jt^^^^^^^^^^^  etc.  ;  Induced  by 

by  forced  marches,  ties.  B  ^•\^;    ,/'J;   j   3     jlc're  the  whole  precedin-  sentence  is 
1h,se  iea.<o,>s,  they  resolved  *^»c.  Oes   B   G   1,  -1  ^^^u  t      neither  of  the  two 

incorporated  in  the  ne.ct  by  "\^^  :'   „    ici^     n  a ^  other.-  Komulum  Kemumque 

sentences,  thereby,  is  made  a  ^'U  "'"'    ,^;,,.  ;'i\.o\\,  "^^^^^^  and  Remus  were 

cupTdo  cepit  in  his  Ukis  u!(i,educaiijant  ^^^^^Z^^r^^^,,  ^,ovnht  vp.  Liv.  1,6. 


wo/  a  connective,  but    bei.^  IT'^l^^^'^en^s^ii;!?/-.":/'  5;;^'c;^-i/a  ^urulis^ampta  ../  duc- 
tile «^^  a.ise  to  wh  ch  It  re     rs --  Hoc  kc.^u^^^^^^^^  ;.^.j^.^^,  ^,.^,^^  ^,^^  Etru,can.<^.  ichence 

T^r:i^^:niri;J^:nV^u::i^^^  ^^«  ^--«»  - 

nmw^intion  i  =  ab  Et  niseis,  auctoribus  mice  curulrs). 

sative  force  (see  P.  I.  ^  lf'>  1>;  T^^\:^J1-J'L^  ..i.M^e^  <n   SQO.  R.  M).  in  infinitive,  and 


Or.  -.^9,  102. 


l:k  rr,','„Vfe^m  ■  ;,;;jr,';/S»;,  ■  l;;;"."  .uSaSg  ccguuctluu,.    Both  ..ay  b=  c„m- 

ii;v,!;,is;r;;:;  i!;.;:;;:;i;'a'.K.'r  ^1^:^:^^,  t^^iL^s:^^  ^tU  ..u,.r.,  ,y 

Eiv^Vxlh pronouns  of  the  third  person. 


474 


THE   COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


lan^njif^oa  f^cnerally  ronnoct  the  (lifl*«'ront  poriod;*  alt»o  srammatically.  oitlicr  by  pyndotic 
or  by  nroiiirmiiial  ciKinliiiation.  in  whiih  instance  Ww.  connectives  mostly  open  ihc  sen- 
tence as  :  '//^/rnnnni  vcnissct' (rnreiy 'Qnnm  hue  vcni^sct ').— Ad  h/x  res  conficien- 
das  l.'ienninm  sil.l  satis  duxenmt.  Oes.  B.  G.  1.3.     (The  arranL'»  incnt  'liiennium   sihi 


ad  eas  res  conticieiidas  satis  dnxCrunl '  would  be  used  for  particular  reasons  only.)-  //«« 


'(/>/(»/  u\  quoihi,  ttiam.  veto,  ii/itiir)  apj)ear  to  those  who  view  them  from  the  Kurdish  stand- 
point as  mere  expletives*.'  A  more  accurate  treatment  of  this  subject  belongs  to 
Latin  Thetoric' 

Ob'^  .5  Of  the  different  kinds  of  conrdinntion,  the  copi/lafire  {ft,  ar,  atque,  veqve,  etc.; 
«see  P  I  p  277  foil.),  the  wirfrsotire  {seif.  auttiiK  Vfro.  at.  el<-.),  and  the  (/hjnncfire  («./,', 
Tf-f  tntW,  are  chi.-flv  emploved  to  coordinate  the  parts  of  th<'  mm"  pefu>d  :  while  th»i 
iW/sat  (nam,  €7iwi),'tt\n\  ronsecvfire  (if"(j>/e,  erf/o,  ir/Uur)  coordinations,  and  the 2'/ onotni' 
nal  combinations  are  used  to  connect  difftrevt ptiiods. 

Or.s  «).  Sometimes  periods  are  connected  by  clattses,  in  which  inptance  the  whole 
clause  has  tiie  force  of  aperiodical  connective,  or  coordinatin-: conjunction.  Such  clauses 
have  the  nature  of  formulas,  beinj;  used  in  the  same  typical  form  by  all  writers. 


Here 


lum  ;  Nevertheless  he  would  make  peace  with  them.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  1,  14.—  2)  The  clause  . 
Vxm  hcec  (ea)  qeruntur,  with  the  force  ofintevea  (see  p.  3.21,  Obs.  7).—  3)  Tiie  cliiuse  Qi/o 
fwtiim  e,<t  vt  with  the  force  of  itaque  {thus,  or  therefore) :  Quo  factum  est  nt  omnis  impa- 
riltos  imprudentlsque  otlenderet ;  Thus  he  surprised  them  all  while  tht-y  neither  were 
prepan  d,  nor  had  expected  him.  Nep.  Ajres.  2,  3.—  Here  belonir  those  Quod-clauses  m 
which  quod  has  the  meaninj;  '  as  to  the  fact  that/  or  '  regarding  that.'  See  p.  521. 

Ob».  7.  A  sentence  may  be  coTn'dinaftd  with  another  sentence,  and,  at  the  same  time 
be  tiufjord hinted  to  a  third.  In  this  instance,  the  second  coordinate  is  almost  always  de- 
pendent on  the  same  governintr  sentence  as  the  tirst  coordinate,  belonginir  t()  the 
same  subordinatinii  conjunction  <u-  relative,  which,  in  the  second  coordinate,  is  either 
expressed  or  understood,  as  :  His  rebus  liebat  vf  et  minus  late  vagarentur,  ef  minus  fa- 
cile liniiimisbelluminferrepossent  (or  't/  ut . .  .ruqareiitur.ei  nt..  .jWf^sent):  Thus  it  hap- 
pened that  thev  went  less  far  in  their  raids,  and  {that  thty)  could  h-ss  easily  make  war 
on  their  neiL'libors.  Cies.  B.  G,  1,  2.— Sometimes,  lu)wever.  the  second  cooidimite  has 
gramtnaticaily  the  form  of  an  independent  sentence,  althouL'h  it  has  the  same  logical  re- 
lati<»ns  to  the  principal  sentence  as  its  first  coordinate,  as  :  I'ne  me  tuli,  nihil  nialle 
ijuam  pacem,  non  quin  eadem  limr-rem  qme  illi,  sed  ea  fjflh  rirlti  tt-rir-ra  ducTfiam  (inst, 
of  'jsv-^/ r/><c>/ eabello  civTli  \v\\C)rxi  dKcertni')  :  I  openly  showed  that  I  wished  nothing' 
more  urgently  than  peace,  not  tjecause  1  did  not  fear  the  same  events  as  the  others,  but  I 
con.yidtred  them  as  preferable  to  a  civil  war.  Cic  Att.  S,  11  J/.  7.  Thi<  kind  of  cooniina- 
tion  which  evidently  is  used  to  give  to  the  statement  the  characti-r  of  L'leHter  po^itivc- 
i:rss,  has  become  one  of  the  tvpical  forms  for  coOrdinatii'g  caus.il  cl.iuses  with  other 
causal  clauses  which  are  introduced  hy  non  quod,  ov  non  quo  (p.  »)'.»0).  But.  except  lu 
liii-  kind  of  causal  clauses,  and  in  relative  clauses  (see  below),  it  is  extremely  rare. 

The  form  of  ind^peiidrnt  coordination  of  logically  dependent  sentences  sometimes  oc- 
curs in  the  coordination  of  rdntives.  A  sentence  coordinate  with  a  relative  clause  may 
a«iime  the  form  of  an  independent  sentence  if  the  relatire  ail'pctire  in  the  secoud  roor- 
dinate  would  require  a  case  diferenf  from  the  case  of  the  ^ffrst  rdatire.  In  this  instance, 
the  second  relative  is  replaced  bv  the  corresponding  demonstrative,  as:  Omnes  tiim 
fere,  qui  nee  extra  urbem  banc  vixerant,  nee  tos  aliqua_barbaries  domestica  infiisca- 
*  Compare  the  tollowing  schemes  of  «he  coordination  of  periods:  Cic.  Or.  1,  1  :  Ac 
fvlt  Oiinjn  (>pein...Namqui...Neque  rero..  Nam  pHma...Std  tamen...TUA  f>ro... 
'XamTieque  .—lb.  Fam.  4,  10  :  Cura  iqifur. . .  Vtnit  enim.. .  QuodA  nullum..  .Sed  qvo- 
Tiiatn  Me  tamen...—  Thus  the  brief  letter  of  Cic.  Fam,  13.  14,  which  may  be  consid- 
ered as  a  model  for  the  idiomatic  connection  of  jieriods  :  Tilio. .  .famiharissimc  utor. 
Omnia  mihi  ciim  eo  intercedunt  jura. .  iieeessitudinis.  ////jr. .  .pecuniam  debet  P.Cor- 
nelius. Ka  77^.sa  Volcatio...rejecfa  in  Galliam  est.  Peto  a  tt — Id  et  mihi  grati<simum 
erit  Quod  ut  tibi  ciiije  sit  ..etiamatqiie  etiam  rogo. —  Some  authors  of  the  silv«T  age, 
especially  Seneca,  bv  alfecta'ion,  neglect  the  use  of  connectives.—  Quintilian  (Inst.  Or. 
7,  10.  H)  teaches  :  Sensus  {tht  sentenced  non  modo  ut  sint  online  collocjiti  laboiaiK.iua 
est.  sed  ut  inter  se  juncti  atque  iia  cohierentes  ue  commisstlra  pelluceat;  corpus  tit,  nou 
membra. 


THEOHY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


4. 1  J 


esseiit  pcrfereiidi.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  'ii.  ^nn7,n\  are  not  coordinated  by  connect- 

OK.  8   Dependent  sentences  (except  m  '>''f/,^,f ^'f ^-i^,^'";;/;  '.or  by  itaque,  ergo,  vgi- 
Ob9.  8.  "7,\r,.     jy^riodical  coordination  (neittiei  Dy  "«'/*,\^"Y,  .j^^  co-ordination  of 

«  etiam  etc. :  Siniomdes  sa^         i  by  the  mi"d  if  also  etc.  Cic.  Or.  2,  8.. 
/.,..,  our  perceptions  are  ^^'^^J'f  ^^^^,;;'^!,,  fallowing  rules  are  observed 
9.  In  the  co-ordniation  of  CLALSES^ti.e  i^)^  _^,j^^^^^  ^^.^^^  ^^^^j^  ^^^^^, 


Ic  non  IH'rse<^r;>6*«"/"',"-evarenot 
!m  OtJ-  3  33  -  Piincii.es  AcarnJinum  v^jueri  m  t'«  ^u  neiaiK  ^..jans  prevailed 
from  Zeuxidas.  Ln.  •«,  lo.      '.'/.",  .  storms  fo  owed  which  (  =  ^'^  V,  V^   ^  Vi        s»  tp 

mmmmmmmi 

examples  the  Latin  conceives  the  t^o^^^'JIJ"  "  ^^^^^  ^  conditional  ctmjunction  (f?  «  "^^ 
>vrv  much  as  we  would  onceive  a  ^"''''^,  ["';/;;?  .^/ceo^  conception  several  pccnin  nties 
rixerant  n^c  eos  infuscaverat).  .  1  r"'",^H"xn  a  ned  especially  the  use  of  qm  with  the 
liVtTe  use  ot  rclat.<e.«M.s,r,icUons  nu.>M     .  x^^^^^^  ^,  .  ^  j,^,e  uivolution  .  bee 

force  of  td  is,  quutu  U,  quod  u,  n  ia,  auu 
p.  534. 


53590W 


47G 


THE   COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


sed  ne  tardins  qnam  cnperem  r(MpnblirflR  rjraHdarer  {not  heravnp  I  (hovriht  I  wonld  not 
l)t!  in  time,  but  ltd  1  invjht  coiKjratiUatt  the  republic  later  than  1  detired).  Cic,l'hil.  1, 
4,9. 

C.  The  aftyndt^tic  QownvcWon  of  clatisos  follows  tho  rule*»  on  thcapyndcfic  co-ordina- 
tion of  indepfii(l(«nt  stiitiMices  (I*.  I.,  ^  1-iO:  §  ysi.  A'.  {>».  1)  Three  or  more  deijt-ndent  co- 
ordinates either  recjui  re  the  repetition  of  I  he  eo-ordinntin<r  eoiij  unction  before  raeh  claut»e, 
or  are  asyndetirally  connected,  in  which  in>tance.  however,  the  ftdfordinatinr/  coiijnnc- 
tion  is  i;rner;dly  repeatt-d,  a»  :  Csesar  nua  senatusque  in  eum  henetlcia  coninienioravit, 
qi/od  rex  a/)j>(fldtii,^  e.'<<ef  a  >-t'\]i[tn,  (jnod  aniTcus,  7//0'/  niunera  atnp  isnima ///jaw;  ;  Ciesar 
mentioned  liis  own  and  the  Senate's*  fav<»rs  to  him,  that  /it  had  lueii  ackiiowledf/td  i\^  kini; 
l)y  the  Senate,  that  [lie  iiad  been  addresised]  by  t!ie  title  *  friend',  that  most  iavish  iritld 
had  fjeen  sent  to  him.  t'ses.  B.  (».  1,  43. —  2)  If  of  twodependent  adver.sative  co-ordinates 
the  one  is  ne<j;ative,  and  the  other  aftinnatlvp,  the  co-ordination  is  irenerally  asyndetic 
if  tiie  same  suhordinate  conjunefion  belonir>  to  both  clauses,  and  the  one  sentence  de- 
notes the  contrary  of  the  other,  as  :  Erixo  et  invjdi  et  malev«di  et  timidi  (appellantiir) 
gitia  procllves  ad  eas  i)erturbatu")nes.  tion  quia  semi)er  ferantur;  Hence  persons  are 
called  envious,  malicious,  and  tinjid  ftecause  they  are  inciiiwMl  to  tliese  faults,  hut  uot  be- 
cause they  always  commit  them.  Cic.  Tusc.  4,1:2,  2!-i. —  Illiid  aniinOrum  corporumque 
dissimile.  quod  ixw'xnn  valentes  mori)o  temptilri  n<ni  j)ossunt,  iv/j^ora  /tos.^unt  ;  There  is 
this  difference  in  the  properties  of  the  soul  and  those  «"f  the  hody /Aa/  a  healthy  soul 
cannot  be  attacked  by  di-ease,  fjid  that  a  (healthy)  iHjdi/  can.  C'lc.  Tusc.  4.  14.  31. — 
3i  There  are  seveial  asyndetic  combinations  of  verbs  (and  other  parts  of  speech)  in 
whi(  h,  from  their  frequent  c«)-ordinati(Ui,  the  copulative  C(»njun(  tion  tt  is  conventiotuilly 
dropped.  Such  expressioiis  have  the  lorce  of  a  bin<;ie  verb,  Utv  the  idea  of  whicli  a  sin- 
j;le  term  does  not  exist  in  the  laiiLruai^e.  These  co-oriiinations  nuisi  always  airree  with 
each  other  in  their  irramniatical  forms,  beiiiir  vari<lu^ly  rendered  in  Knirli>li,  as:  Latum 
ad  \}n])i\\iim,  v<//ent  jidji'/'i-ht  popiilo  Carthaiririiensium  bellum  indlci  ;  The  people  was 
asked  whether  thi-ij  voted  for  declarin<]f  war  aijainst  the  CarthaL'inian  people.  Liv.  21,  17. 
—  I't  (itiie>cat  diim  oral (' res /y////  redtiait.  X\\iii  he  mi^'ht  bo  inactive  while  neiroiiators 
would  (/o  (lud  return  {would  (jo  to  and  fro  j  i.  e.  during  ilie  progress  of  the  negttiialions), 
Cic.  Alt.  10,  1, ;}. 

IJ.  Idiomatic  co-ordinations  of  depetident  clauses  occur  in  the  following  instances  : 

1.  If  two  adverl>i.tl  clauso  areadver>aiively  co-ordinated  so  that  tin-  adverl)ial  idea  (for 
m^tiinve  &C(tu/<^.  manner,  or  j}utj»ost-\  isdeiiied  in  reirard  to  tin'  onedatisc.  and  attirmed  in 
regard  to  the  other,  the  clause  to  which  the  ntfjatire  reftrt<  is  hi  ace  d  ttefore  the  othtr  clause, 
thf'  iwfjatuni  (NON)  ininiediatti t/  prectdinq  the  conjunction,  while  in  English  often  a  diflVr- 
ent  arraiiiicnu'iit  is  observed.  The  subordin.iting  cfuijunction  is.  in  this  con^truction, 
repeated  with  both  clauses,  as  :  Sic  eiiim  jam  tecum  lo<iuar.  mm  ?// odio  j^crmotus  esse 
videar,  quo  debeo,  .sxi  ut  misericordia.  (pne  tibi  nulla  debetur  ;  /  will  /u»t  iipc^ik  with 
you  .so  a-'y'  to  seem  prompted  by  haned.  as  I  ouirht,  f/ut  so  «.s-  [to  seem  prompted]  l)y  pity, 
to  which  you  have  no  claim.  Cic.  Cat.  1.  7,  16  [or:  I  will  so  speak  to  you  a.*  to  Sf-en»  prompt- 
ed (as  if  I  were  jjrompted)  by  i>ity,  hut  not  as  if  I  were  j)rompted  by  hatred.  This 
arranirctnent  wtnild  not  be  admissible  in  Latin].—  If  the  clauses  in^'  causal,  the  tirsi  clause 
i-*  generally  introduced  by  nou  quo  {  r=  non  (jiiod).  but  also  by  non  (luod,  and  non  quia,xhe 
predicate  (d'  the  first  clause  l)eing  almost  always  in  the  sulijunctive,  while  the  mood  «>f 
the  last  clause  is  determined  by  the  gene^-al  or  particular  rules  on  mo(»ds ;  as  :  Num- 
quam  mihi  delutflram  oratiOnem,  qiiaexercitum  meiimalloquerer.  credidi  ;  nonqaoycvha 
nm<iuam  potius  (jnam  res  &xercuen/n,  sed  quia  n^i^uC'nun  niilitarihus  ingt-niis  ;  I  never 
have  thouirht  that  words  would  be  wanting  to  me  to  address  my  army,  ^o/  Im'auoe  I  hare 
ever  de'tU  rather  in  words  than  in  deeds,  hut  t/ecause  I  was  accjiiainted  with  the  ways  of 
tlie  soldier.  Liv.  2S.  21. —  Acta  Cjesaris  servanda  censeo,  non  quo  probem,  fed  quia  ratiO- 
nem  habendam  arbitror  pacis ;  I  am  of  the  opinion  that  Caesar's  acts  should  be  main- 
tained, not  that  {because)  I  ajiprore  of  them,  hut  f>ecause  I  think  it  to  be  n<  ce>sary  in  the 
interest  of  peace.  Cic.  Phil.  1,  7,  Hi. —  AbstulCre  me  (Jneciie  res,  non  quia  ij)sas  oj)er{e 
j)retium  e.^et  persciibere,  sed  quia  causa'  cum  Antiochi  fiieriint  bi-Ili ;  Greek  atlairs  liave 
carrii'd  me  away,  not  that  (Ijecause)  it  is  worih  the  while  to  record  them,  but  because  they 
contain  the  causes  of  the  war  with  Antiochus.  Liv.  :^.5,  40. —  l.umina  orationis  sunt  81- 
milia  illis  qua^  in  amploornaru  sceme  aut  Ion  appellaniur  insiLrnia.  n<m  quod  solao/v/en/, 
i<ed  quod  excellant :  The  '  lights  '  in  disc«>urse  are  similar  to  what  in  a  festive  decoration 
of  th(^  stage  or  the  forum  are  called  'insignia"  (salient  points),  not  thai  (fjecuune)  they 
are  the  only  oruamenfii,  but  l>ecnu)!e  they  strike  the  eye.  Cic.  Or.  '■^\\.  184. 

2.  If  the  aflversaiive  ccmnection  of  clauses  is  at  the  same  time  concesnvp  (in  Eng- 
lish: 'but  nevertheless'),  the  second  co-ordinate  clause  is  introduced  by  neque  eo  mi- 
nus, instead  (jf  sed  nitdlomiw^,  as  :  Ita  aflecCrunt  animos  ut  omnia  qiue  in  eos  decreta 
essent  tollerent,  7ieque  eo  minus  n'do\uu\\nn  in  societiliem  I'hilippi  censGrent  ;  This  af- 
fected them  so  that  they  abolished  all  decrees  made  against  them,  but  were  nevertheless 
for  renewing  the  alliance  with  Philip.  Liv.  33,  10. 


THEORY   OF    SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


477 


.1       «0.  ;f  \^l^^\^  refer  to  the  fame  concln- 
U'.icr  (or'clausf),  or  they  />7vc..Z.,  ox  folloio  it  ^^^^^  .^ 

Isihefolh.Nvingpas^aLe.  htnei^^^^^  ab  assiduo  mu-rOre  '  ''«^-^ViVh  SveMo  them 

ence  t(»  that  arangement  ^\'»'Y  ;;'     r. 

phrase  would  ha%e  if  used  instead  of  it.  between  tlie  three  raethods 

eullivatecl  by  practical  ()b^el^ anon   ai  a  />     j  .  ^     ij„iiasi^\ 


i 


478 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


THEORY  OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


479 


by  vt  ne,  gvin,  and  (/-(foJ)  more  frcqucuUy  follow  tlinn  precede  their  principal  Poiitonco 
an  :  lliiic  iiia^'n:y  pwmiis  perMUlder  t//i  ad  Ao.v/7*'  travseat ;  lie  jxTHiadid  him  to  no  to 

?«?/.s?/rt«'<7.  the  two  prrdirates  would  he  in  imnu'<hjite  Piicce.^-ion  (,>^ee  ()b«  ))  Hut  it 
IV.lf  1  "iserted  hetween  -//,/^0 '  and  'ma(^nis\  If  placed  hefore  /nnc,  it  would  destroy 
ttic  lorce  of  the  pnnorninnl  connective.  In  a  *^imilar  sentence  the  Ut-chiuse  is  i/?.«.r^K;  • 
J)  ninoiii;!  ?/^?^/^/«  w;m7?/j/r,  persuader,  elque  fdiani  snani  in  niatrinioniiini  dat'. 
ta>  b.  G.  i,a.  Here  the  two  Unite  predicates  stand  in  immediate  succession,  hut 
thi^  arrai.jroment  was  pr.  ferred  to  tlie  re.-ular  one.  on  account  of  the  sul>>equent  c.Ordi- 

rin.  I'fV;  m'fr  "*"r'''  ^'-'  P'/l^'^r-.t^'.^t-^l'nisc.  .-.fier  ^  persuader  would  hav-c  been  sepa- 
rated fioin  tlu;  sentence  with  which  it  is  coordinated. 

(»Bs.  4.  Dependent  questions  are  most  usually  infertfd,  even  if  its  predicate  and  that 
o    the  pr„u.H,a,.,.„,,,H,.  foil. w  earl,  other  in  i,.^mediate;ncce.sion:V^^^^^^ 

»  .^'"^?     '       "    "'i'"  ^'r'^^^'''»'  ^''^qnot*  vieissent,  ii„n,Hidvmlovi  rellent,  impeiaVent 
(a  masterly  arramred  period).  Ca's.  li.  G.  1,  3«.- Ita  ut  ocuHs,  i/.  vtmm  pmttm  It'nd 
udicari  lun,  possu.  Ih.  11    12.     But  if  the  int.  rro^'ative  claus.-'consist  J  ol  many  meml 
l)cr>,  lOft.n  precedes  or  lollows  its  principal  sentence,  as  :  ()uuli>i  e.^.^f  vntura  monfi^ 
vtrjnahs  ^^c^//.s7/,qu.   coirnoscerent  misit ;  Ur  ..-nt  a  ,i(-ta(lun,-nt  to  examine  //.^^^ 
rA(//Y/c^/;ry  //^^  niounttnn  and  of  its  ascent  ^of  what  character  the  mountain  was  etc.). 
j-.^.  li.  G.  1,  21.—  Credo  e-o  vos,  judices  mirari,  quid  eit  quod  etc.    Cic.  liosc.  Am. 

Obs.  fi.  Relative  clatises   jrcnerally/o//Mr  their  antecedents,  as  :   Interea  ea  h-iOne 
^^InHn'i'l'I'f"'""^  iml.-;ih,,s„ue  qui  ex  prorimia  ronve„erm,t.  a  lac,   Lenmnno,^';  f  in 

m mim   p.-.dflci  .  Cses   B.  (i.  ],  8.-  Hut  th.-y  jrenerallv  follow  the  whole  sentence  on 
wh.ch  ,h.  y  are  dependent,  if  the  two  predicates  would  lie  in  inimediate  sucvsJi   n  a.  • 
1 1  omnihns  commodis  nml  cum  ,h  fniaitur  onorum  se  amiciti;e  d.  «ierint  (not    'l-  unei'. 
^^nTV""  /""";'•'  de'l>y:i'^f/ruautun;  to  enjoy  all  the  advantai,-.  s  i    c  mmunion     ith 
fjHMe  to  ir/n,,  frien<lship   tt.ey  have  devoted   th<-inselves.  Cas  B.  G   3  22    If  a  .    ea 
stress  ,s    a:don  t  ,e  relati.m  of  the  relative  clau.M-  to  its  ^overnim-  v -ntcMi  v  «    't/^   , 
expre^s  nmt  jvst  that  relative  idea  c<.rr.sponds  u.ju.t  /Aa^in  ec '   ^Ti't       t  he  pV  im  h^ 
sentence,  the  relative  clause  is  placed  hjon  its  antecedent,  whic   ,  is  ini  a   ce^  i. 

avs  desiirnated  t>y  a  demomtratin',  the  prop,  r  antece.ient  hein-  inc.  r    u-    ed  in  ll  e 
lelatne  clause  as  the  r/Mvr;.//,5r  „oun  of  the  niative  adjective,  as  :  Jra.  qmt  m/'.     iv    -    s 
lie Ive  ue  itisifrnem  calanntriteu.  iH.ptih,  l^an^n<)  intnlerat,  .a  pri  u 
hus  tha  part  ol  H.-hetia  (/;/.,«////  •  what  part  of  Helvetia  '/whirl   ha         lie  e     a  s  - 

A^^^'f^  '"'•  ,?*'  '^'«^«'Verhial  clauses,  the  mvw/ clauses,  and  the  modal  Ut-clau-es  f«ee  n 
4.M.    )Rs.  1)  -eneral!y.;/V/o/.'  their  principal  sentence  (;ee  the  Ex        437)  •  1,      oHen  caSl 
sal  clauses  (and  sonietinies  also  nuHlal  It-clauscs)  arcUvi^r/./i„  the    HnV    i  se  t"m"  • 

.unlp.flVum' O^^^^^^  '"""  ^'V^  •  '^'^'"^''^  '••'^^'-"''>'  ^Ji'  n>  ^  ad Xlibeian    ini 

^iVVi   u    ,  ,  ^'i^-  ^--^^i^"»»-,  qnodw.moria  trnltnit,  L.  Cassiiim  occlsum  (esse) 

ah  HeKvtiis   c<,ncedendum  non  putjlhat.  Ih.- Ariovistus  nspon.iit   iduos  "     i   «^/^ 
niamMhfortunam  temptamnt,  stipendiarios  esse  lact«,s.  Ih   \   m-O^xTx^n^^^^ 
qummajus  eral  i,nam  ut  ab  homine  viderOtur,  iccii-co  as.ignaiiim  est  C.  l^^^lPirs, 

Obs.  7.  Temporal  clauses  with  <7w?/m  and  itP  equivalents  (?/W  vf  fimvlar  •nnatmmm^ 
coND.TioNA,    roNcKssivK  ihv quan.quam  and  etnl  and  coyxvj^jirvs'v^^^^^^ 
a  nmite  (introduced  l)y  7//  or  quemadmodum . .  .m). generally  w'H,de  tl  eir  mine        "e  f- 

rard%Ro/r'whTeir 

t^iiea  PROTASIS,  while  the  siicceedin<ri)iincii)alsent<-nce    s  called  apodo-^I'^  •  a**  •   Thi  ^n 

m^-i^lliVi^r'm'vnu'i^m  TVT"^^  '■'"'^-^  '^  ^"■"'"'  ^^  ^""*  r.^^zZ}:\x^^  ^^^o^^ 
Hu  mil  ptrpioMiiiam  daie.  et  «  rim  jaare  coneutvr,  prohihitflrum  o^ietidif   \vhen 

o'^  i''im  dS  ;:;i^^hu'rc;;n;  i^^'i'  '\r^^--^-^  <^rH%^  «.J^r;/^.j^;^U/:  •.;2 

fc»//2w,  ne  (icciartu  that  he  could  not  allow  aiiv  one  a  i)assa"'c  throiifh  the  urnvii.c»  • 

and)  he  .h<,wed  that  he  would  prevent  them  ifthey  uJlforVeC-Sr^V\   T-  r  ml 

hHla  suscip.enda  Gallr.rum  alacer  ac  promptus  est  animus.-^^^rmcll  s  ac  minim;  r7.i.t«m8 

ad  ca  am.taies  p.rferendas  mens  er.rum  est :  As  the  character  of    he  G.uiNi^nuiek  ad 

c  la  n'ili^  Ih''ri);*'''rM    Vr"'  "i"'"-'  '^  -V*-''*''"-'  «"^l  "''»i'>"f  n,.y  po     T  of'end.t.T, !! 
calami    es.  II).  3   19  _  If  both,  protasis  and  apodosis,  have  the  same  ^uhi.-et   the  s.  Vie -7 

?vsp:cf;.Sl£?ni  •'';!>.;.  Vv^f  *  ;n/f-;^nrustra  tantum  lahoitn^umL^iaiuiJ 


the  dependent,  and  the  ,overr^.  clause,  tbus  .ivin.  1.  the  clependont^lau^^ 
p..aranee  of  a   direct  dependeiic.^  ■/'«,•?,,,;  .it  homines  bellicOsos  flnitinn     habCret; 
Uat  n,a,M.o  cinn  J'^i'»'"  P";;;;^';^\^,/    .^  ^^  by  having 

lie  ^uw  that,  t/  t/us  .sho'ild  hom^^xh^  \\    g    1    10  [The  clause -id  si  fier.t '  is  not  de- 

OBS.  0.  If  two  clauses  introdt^ed  by  conjun^^^^ 
are  mo^t  frequently  so  arran-ed  ^^^''\}]\lil^^}l^^^^^^^^^  Thus  the  two  conjunctions 

the  c...  jun.tion  by  which  'l^'' l';;V'^'       '  ^  "/j'^.^as  •  G^^^^^^       eos  accflViit  quod,  quwi  ne- 
of  the  clauses  stand  in  immediate  ^"  .f,!,;f.  "   '  ^^V^^f,  .^^^  He  earnestly  re- 

que  emi  luMpie  ex  a-ris  ^'^']'' V-^'';^J^''Z^^^^^^  boUL^ht,  n..r  etc.  Ca^s. 

clauses  are :  1)  ut. .  .arctssat :  2)  quoniaia. .  .veuent ,  3)  quod. .  .Jueru\ . 

L    10    The  subordinatincr  conjunctions  by  ^^'^^^^^  ^"If I'-'JA,^'!""  o'r  p^^^^^^^^ 

one  libertum  imptiibum  habeat.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  8,22.  ...  .     „ 

n.      1      Inordr  to  understand  and  render  the  combination   of  the  clauses  within  a 

mEmmmmmm^ 

,1,0  l„.sim.in,..  «,..1 1,.'.,..,.  ■•^\  «h<-  flr>t  "'•V;';f/'°:\"/,:A"\"  :di-catt  amon^ll^.eTJn^^^^^^^ 
„"•  t..  ei.,-1.  other.   All  ,he  ,K..-lici,.ial  .•...ielnK-,.oi.9..lMl  »1'I'>^>  ':,;''  :"'"«■  "'  "  """^ 

!,,;:\lH.m  !,,  the  pVincipal  Jentoicv,  „r  placing  th.-m  before,  or  after  „,  aceord.ns  1"  the 

rnTes  «.'iven  in  Obs.  1-10^ _ —— 

~"*  The  art  of  Duaohrasiie- a  given  Emrlish  sentence  into  a  sentence  acamimodated  to 
iht  L-  i\n  wav  ftki  "'"belongs  to  Latin  rhetoric.  But  almost  in  every  chapter  of 
^^:  ammJ?  slle  Vlf  U.^  manf  difterenees  of  idioms  J'-,^;"^  ^^^,,^;,^^?'^^  n 
rraetlce  for  acnuiriii"  this  art.  is  the  rendering  oi  {/^(/Lnglsh  trans  at  ons  ol  l^un 
I'mhok  back  iX  Latin,  comparing  them,  when  rendered,  with  the  Latin  text. 


i; 


Hi 


480 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


THEOEY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


481 


^  OiO.  Clauses  arc  divided  1)  aecordinf?  to  the  jircdication,  into  de- 
CLAiiATiVK,  iNTERiioGATiVE,  and  iMPEiiATiVE  cliiuses ;  2)  accoidiiig  to 
their  relation  to  the  nj^eaker,  into  clauses  of  direct,  and  indirect  state- 
ment (obliciue,  subobliqne  etc.);  3)  according;  UMXm'w  fanction  as  mem- 
bers  of  the  principal  sentence  into  subject,  oiuect,  predicate,  and  at- 
tributive clauses;  4)  according  to  their  giunnmatical  form  miovi^iiTE^ 
and  non-finite;  the  finite  clauses  being  subdivided  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  connective  (relative  clauses,  ut-clauses  etc.) ;  the  non- 
finite  clauses  being  subdivided  into  infinitive,  and  participial  clauses. 

Obs  1  The  division  into  declarative,  interro-'ative.  and  imper.itive  clauses  (which  be- 
longs to  (dl  sentences^  relcrs  to  the  form  of  i\u' predication.  By  '  predication'  we  under- 
stand the  conception  of  x\\v.  spcakt-rin  r.-irard  to  tlie  )nod(d  refation>i  of  the  predicate*. 
The  modal  relations  of  thr  pn-dicate  are  either  a  mere  assehtion  (in  wiiich  instance  the 
sentence  is  dfdaratire),  or  a  volition  (makin^j  tl»e  sentence  iwjieratire),  or  interuoga- 
TioN  (?■  e  volition  of  the  speaker  to  have  a  statement  made  in  liis  ^tead).  Tliis  division, 
and*  ih<'divifiuu  into  clauses  of  direct,  and  indirect  ttateinent,  Lave  been  considered 
p.  380  loll. 

Ob*!  2  The  two  division!»  of  clauses  mentioned  §  f'.lO.  No.  3  and  4,  are  the  only  C9Sen- 
tial  ones  in  the  theory  of  <7f/W(^-comhination.  V,s  dividinj,'  the  clauses  accordiui:  to  their 
functions  as  members  of  the  principal  sfiitt-nce,  we  refer  to  their  Uxjicat  tneaninf/,  enu- 
meratiu"'  the  dift'erent  logical  relations  of  those  members  of  pliraf-es  which  may  be  ex- 
pressed^in  the  form  of  a  dependent  sentence.  By  the/o'//-//i  divi^ion,  the  questi<m  is 
nn-\vered,  what  L'rammatical  f«)nns  are  at  the  disjjositioii  of  the  Ian<ruage  lo  express  the 
ditlerent  relations  wliicli  clau>e9  have  according  to  the  tliir<l  divi^ion**. 


*  •  Predirntion  \  and  'predicate '  are  not  convertible  terms.  By  the  '  predicate  '  a  verb  is 
repre^ente(l  as  a  member  of  X\w  predicative  phrase,  while  ^pn;fication  '  refers -to  tlie  <f<n- 
^^;^<'^  only,  being  j,'iamtnal ica II v  expressed  1)  by  the  i/iood  of  the  predicate  ;  2)  by  the 
particU-s  referriii"  lo  tlie  modal  relations  of  the  sentence  (ajfinnatire.  and  iiiferrof/atire 
t)articles.  See  P.^I.,  p.  :295).  '  Philosophizini,''  «xrainmarians  iiave  established  several 
theories  about  the  meaning  of  the  two  terms  predication  (some  call  it  *  assertion  '),  and 
predicate,  the  most  common  of  which  is  the  copvla-theoinj.  According  to  tiiis  theory 
every  predicate  '  in  a  wider  t-eiise '  contains  besides  the  '  predicate  proper  '  a  copnla  either 
expl•e^sed  (fionus  est),  or  bv  implication,  being  represented  l>y  tin;  petsonal  endine/,  the 
radical  (for  inst.  'leg'  in  'leejif)  represent  in  lt  the  predicate  proper,  while  the  'predica- 
tion '  is  said  to  be  expressed  by  the  coftula.  The  chief  objection  against,  this  theory  is  that 
the  personal  eiuliiiir  is  common  to  lx>lk  the  copula  esae  and  the  ordinary  verb,  so  that,  ac- 
cordin"  to  the  copiila-theory,  th(!  radical  part  of  the  copula  es!^e  would  be  ?/f27/<tr  predicate, 
jior  predication.  :Moreovei\  the  peivonal  endintr,  evid<'ntly,  belonifs  \o  \\\c  predicati^^e 
phra.-^axsuch.  being  determined  by  its  governing  word,  like  every  other  endim:  of  declin- 
able words.  Predication,  appearing  only  in  the  three  forms  of  declaration  (assertion), 
rolition,  amXinten-or/atioii.  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  personal  relations  of  the  subject 


tive  mood'  has  not  the  force  of  a  moo<l  as  long  as  the  j)redicate  is  confined  to  a  detached 
predicative  phrase.     It  becomes  mood  and  tense  ontt/  by  discourse. 

**  Many  Latin  (and  other)  grammaii.tns,  accoroinii  to  Ikcker's  theory,  distinguish 
the  clauses,  according  to  the  'parts  of' speech''  which  they  represent,  into  sithstanfire  (sub- 
stantival), adjtx'tire  (adjectival),  and  adrer/dal  clauses.  There  are  several  objections  to 
tiiis  division.  1)  Those  th;it  follow  this  theory  adopt  the  common  opinion  th;it  tlic  parts 
of  speech  are  Uof/ical/i/''  distinijuished  from  each  (Mher,  which  is  an  error,  since  all  the 
four  principal  parts  of  speech  may /07i^^'%  denote  one  and  the  satne  idea.  Hence  the 
parts  of  speech  which,  acccn-ding  to  this  theory,  are  represented  by  the  dillerent  clauses, 
cannot  furnish  a  criterion  for  the  logical  meaning  of  the  latter,  so  that  the  two  questions 
mentitmed  in  Obs.  2  cannot  be  answered  on  the  base  of  such  a  division.—  2)  It  is  n  con- 
sequence of  thus  improperly  dividing  the  clauses,  that  many  quite  heterogeneous  clauses 
are  classified  under  the  same  head,  and  that  clauses  both  lo-jically  and  grammatically 
identical,  are  assigned  to  ditlerent  classes.  Thus  the  relative  clauses,  which,  in  whatever 
connection  they  are  used,  follow  the  same  laws  in  regard  to  their  {.''"mmatical  form,  aro 


i?^772.  2.  As  to  the  function  of  clauses  as  members  of  the  principal  sen- 
tence, either  member  of  anv  of  the  three  phrases  may  be  represented  by 
a  dame     Thus  the  following  classes  of  clauses  must  be  distinguished  : 

A   In  the  predicative  plirase  :  1)  Subject-clauses,  representing  the 


Jl  In  the  oiuective  i)hrase  :  1)  Completing  object-clauses  (or 
'  object-cliiuses  '  without  any  further  addition),  which  complete  the  idea  of 
a  VERB  in  the  principal  sentence  {R.  IJ.  Obs.  1);  2)  advp^ibial  object- 
clauses  (or  '  adverbial  clauses'  without  any  further  addition),  represent- 
ing one  of  the  ideas  of  place,  ti.me,  or  modality  (§540),  with  reference 
toll  VERB  or  adjective  in  the  principal  sentence.    See  11.  3,  Obs.  12. 

C.  In  the  attributive  phrase:  Attributive  clauses,  representing  the 
dilferent  kinds  of  attributes,  dependent  on  a  substantive  of  the  princi- 
pal sentence  (R.  i],  Obs.  lo). 

Obs.  The  following  kinds  of  clauses  do  not  belong,  as  members  of  phrases,  to  the  prin- 
cipal sentence :  1)  Those  clauses  which  are  used  with  the  force  of  a  periodical  connec- 
tive, and  which  represent  a  co-ordinating  conjunction,  introducing  the  principal  sentence, 
(see  §  tiO!»,  Obs.  (j).— 2)  Sometimes  infinitive-clauses  arc  used  with  the  force  of  an  mde- 
pendent  exclamatory  sentence,  as  :  Hunccineliominejn  tantix  delectdtuni  esse  mgis!  Is  it 
l)ossit)Ie  that  Tins  man  should  have  been  amused  by  such  trifles !  Cic  Div.  2,  13,  30. 
Suchinlinitive-clauses  must  be  explained  in  the  same  manner  as  the  exclamatory  accusa- 
tives mentioned  !>.  S7,  li.  44.  with  which  tliey  arc  often  co-ordinated,  as  :  O  spectaculmn 
mi.'<erutn  afgue  acerttum  !  Lmtitirio  esse  iirtds  qloi-icnn,  popvli  Bomani  nonien  jyiratico  myo- 
parOni :  in  jtorlu  Si/racusdno  de  classe  })opy'li  llornnni  triu)nphu?n  oga^e  pirdiam!  Cic. 
Verr.  2,  5,  3S.— See  Ex.  1-5.— Sometimes  mere  inlinitives  are  used  with  the  same  force, 
as  :  Hoc  non  ridTre.'  How  is  it  possible  that  tliis  should  not  he  seen  !  (Not  to  sec  this  !) 
Cic.  Fin.  4.  27,  7«.— 3)  With  a  himllar  force  clauses  introduced  by  guasi  and  id  (both 
haviuLT  their  predicates  in  the  su])junctive)are  used,  as  :  Quanczu  quidqiuim , «dam  quod 
iste  nesciat  I  As  if  I  knew  anvtiiing  not  known  to  that  man  !  Cic.  Fam.  9,  17.  1.—  Egone 
vf  t^  inteipelkm!  Huw  should /interrupt  you'.  Cic.  Tusc.  2.  IS.  (Ex.  «.  7.)—  Both  forms, 
that  with  gua.<i.  and  with  ut,  represent  the  predicate  as  '  not  to  be  thou-ht  of  \—  4)  For 
conditional  clauses,  referring  merely  to  Ww  predication,  see  li.  3,  Obs.  12. 


fieri  inea  culpa !  lb.  Fam.  14.  2.-4.  Tene.  quum  ceteri  socii  tui  fugerent,  potissimum 
iil)i  partis  isias  d^poj^oscisse /  lb.  Kosc.  Am.  34.  95.-5.  J/c  non  cum  bonis  esse/  lb. 
Atf .  9.  G.     [(,'omp.  Cic.  Fam.  H,  1 :  Verr.  2,  5,  44  ;  Clu.  31  ;  Ter.  Andr.  1,  5,  10.]—  6.  Te 


[Conip.                         , 
vt  ulla  res  franr/at^  f    Tu  ut  unqiiam  re  corriqas?  Cic.  Cat.  1,  9.—  7.   (^uan  ego  artera 
aliquam  is'toruin  esse  negetn .'  lb.  Div.  2,  20,  '^.j.— 8.  Quasi  eiro  aut  fieri*  concederevi, 
ant  esset  philosophi»,  causam  cur  quidque  lieret.  non  qua'rere^  !  lb.  2,  20,  46. 

assi'jned  Bticcessively  to  eachot  tlie  ttiree  classes.  The  clause  •  Qidaudiebanf  in  the  sen- 
tt  lue  -Qui  audittiant  rniralnintur'  is  called  a  'substantival  cl^se  '.  because  it  represents 
the  noun  '  the  hearers  '.  But  in  the  sentence  '  Homines  qui  audiehant  Tniraf>antur\  it  is 
called  an  '  adjectival  clause  \  because  it  is  considered  as  equivalent  to  the  adjective  *  hear- 
ing' (the  hearing  persons).  About  some  relative  clauses  the  opinionf.  are  at  variance. 
The  clause  '  unde  piof'ectu><  erat '  in  the  sentence  '  liediit  eo  iinde  profectus erat '  is  called 
by  some  an  adjectival,  by  some  an  adverbial,  by  others  a  sut>stantival  clause  (  =  ad  locum 
profictiOnis)  \  and  indeed,  according  to  this  theory,  the  question  cannot  be  decided,  since 
any  of  the  three  parts  of  speech  may  be  substituted  for  llie  clause.  The  whole  theory 
is  utterly  sterile  in  regard  to  Latin  Grammar,  not  a  single  rule  in  regard  to  the  use  of 
clauses  having  ever  been  establislied.  or  elucidated  by  means  of  it.  'i'hns  Grammar  is 
burdened  with  a  terminology  not  only  perfectly  useless,  hut  producing  perplexity  and 
confusion  l)y  giving  rise  to'douhtful  questions,  which,  even  if  \.\icy  could  be  correctly 
answered,  would  have  no  bearing  on  Latin  Grammar. 

>  '  Qui.,  .victor''  has  the  lorce  of  a  concessive  clause  :  •  altlioimli  victorious  at  Cannje '. 
—-  what  a  blunder  he  had  made.— ^  break  down.—*  impersonal  infinitive  clause  (literally 
'  that  it  should  be  done  ';  being  redundant  in  English.— *qiuilitative  genitive.—*  subjecl- 
inflnitive. 


[I 


482 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


483 


i-.wi  ir.  ihn  rl'umcs  and  their  crnmniatical 
forms  in  geueral,  ure  clillcrunl  accoulins  U>  ti.c  cm» 

Srra.1!  ^l=:;;Hi:;aT"". 'c-r^  Tu.x.c...s.s-.    .ec 

"^  i.-  PKKn.r  vTr.-c,,AU.KS  take  the  form  of  an  Ut-clause,  or  of  a  rclaUvc 

oiuoiNAL  (relative)  ad\kuhs  "';  ;\'    pn,niH)inul  r/ur//if/''7'/<Wt'//i ;  «w/w^  ; 

aiul  the  comi.arativc  adverb  qunm  ^     ''  '^f^  ('^.  T^^^^^  umisquam,  anted, 

quauuliu,  tau.jua>n,  i-^'^-^t^J'^^r^  1  C^;i  from  the  ukla- 

qnam),rr(sttrqHam;  {c)  ^«^•'^,^^J,^P''^ '//^  v^  ;^^  ^  qu in  {\u^\.oi' qui  ne), 

?riVE  KOOT  ,.  (c.) :  ^^;'-;i'4;;;^',^;      ;^  ana  used  to 

quoad,  qutppe;  (^0  coNJLNCiioN^    i     iny  :  with theircompounds 

^urodu^e  certain  coM.^.UATivEeh^UM^s^^^^  .^      [ ,     ,,, 

«m^/^/r,and.«im«^^^(?"«.  ^^/i^m  ,  ,1,      _  Vll  these  coniuneiions  (</-0  are 

unde,quo,qua).  of  rehitive  clauses  intro- 

'Se.u\.f  one  of  ,1...  nK.n.l.vrs  -^^^'^■^^%  f',  i.Tr'  iovcrnin.u 
11,0  same  form  as  c.miplta.ns  o  J  •cl-cU  s  s  (.No  )^^^  ^^  :ww«;./.«y/ 
substanlive  l.as  the  same  ixlatK  n  to  .^„\  ff,^,  "  ,;  j.;,,,  y,y  ,i,e  adverbial 
«/»>c/-d„».«  (OBS.13.2).  ,f )  ^;;;-;':'     ;   ,'i:,u^'    Sive  -uherLs  »*.  etc. 

are  .ise<l  as  aUiiUmes  i-t  '^"'«'^'''  '7^/,*- "'...f'  ,!;  ,vl,ieli  cNpress  IlieiDEX 

E.  There  i»  a  gknkuai.  foum  lor  ^   V''.^  :;'"'",','', ',,ie,  a  sub.t„idive 

OF  A  FACT.  Tliese  may  be  used  "''''V'^;;,':     ;'•,,,  «7,-«,  or  preimi- 

4-1    4KKt      Tlu'V  either  take  thi- lorin  ot  a  '/'"^-^'"''•^f.^V,.  '{«n    «  85   Ob<   1».     The  fnrin 


lent  forms  »r?f»,  g-f/tn.  qnomimts''),  or  a  Quod-clause,  according  to  the  rules  p.  588  foil. 
Ileiicc  both  That-clauscsaiid  iiiterro;,'ative  clauhesare  analo;;ous  either  to  transitive  or 

to  INTHANPITIVE  Ol»jt'Ct8  (§  ■4r)H). 

(ff)  IXFIMTIVK  CLAi:sKS,  IMPEUATIVE  CLAUfEP,  the  INTERKOGATIVE  CLAUSES  dependent 

OR  tniiisiiive  v«Ths,  and  liie  factitive  Ut-clauj^ks  (i.  e.  tl)o^^e  deprndcnt  on  a  \erb  of 
doing,  bee  p.5!U),  are  analoi;oM8  to  the  transitive  objects  (ali^uid  dicere,  credere,  f-enMre, 
i/nperdre.  jieterc/acere  etc.),  a;^  :  (  ae?ar  cognovit  rnontnn  a  suis  ttueii  (Cte?.  B.  G.  1.  22) 
=  cognovit  occmkilionem  TtM/itl'). —  Jmperat  Lielio  ut  per  collla  circuwdncat  equites  (Liv. 
28,  :tt)  =  Imperat  Lcelio  circunidticlionem  equitiim.—  Faciam  vt  ejus  diei  semper  memi- 
veiit  (Phnii.  Capt.  4,  2,  20)  =  Faciavi  evm  ejvs  diei  wemoiein.—-  CivitSii  p^rsvdsit  vt  de 
fini])iis  Hni;»  ex'irent  (,CVs.  B.  G.  1,  2>  =  Civitdti  pj'ofectionem  de  finibi/s 2)erfrudslt. —  But  in 
p<iin<r  conventional  constructions  clauses  of  tliis  kind  are  analogous  to  intransitive  ob- 
jects, as  in  the  cim-truction  ui  certiormi  fucere,  Si\t&  ojxraia  dare.  Tlie  former  is  con- 
strued with  an  infinitive  clavse.  althoujrii  we  say  '  certidrem  aliqvtm  facer e  de  aliqvd  re. 
[The  i)r()i)er  frrainmatical  construction  would  be  'certiOrem  facere  de  eo  qxiod''  ;  but  the 
frequency  of  its  use,  and  the  awkwardness  of  the  regular  construction  was  the  reason 
tliai  this  verbal  expres^i<)n  assumed  the  construetion  of  its  synonym  mintidre.']—  Operam, 
dare  is  construed  with  a  eompletini:  Vt-claiis«  in  place  of  an  intransitive  dative-object, 
as  :  Dedit  openim  id  quam  lont:issime  tempus  duceret  (Nep.  Them.  7,  1),  analouous  to 
the  construction  ' alicri  rci  ojjtrain  dare\  That-clatises  dependent  ou  operam  dare 
originally  are  conceived  as  final  clauses  (  =  '  he  took  pains  in  order  to  etc' ) :  but  from 
the  frecpient  connection  (»f  such  clauses  with  operam  dare,  the  original  conception  wa» 
forgotten,  and  the  clause  was  treated  as  completing,  the  expression  operam  dare  assum- 
ing the  force  of  our  verbs  'to  try  ',  M»)  endeavor'.—  Thus  an  inlinitive  clause  is  some- 
times used  in  place  of  a  dative  of  the  interested  i)erson,  in  the  construction  of  the  ab- 
ftnict  dative  ^§  -IW),  li.  3-3).  as  :  Ipsa  humilitas  eOriini  maximo  argumento  est,  me  n^minern 
advermtmn  es,-e  ;  their  very  humbleness  is  the  best  argument  that  I  did  not  r^pttl  anyone. 
I.iv.  2<i.  31.  [The  clause  '•me. .  .aveisdtum  esse  '  has  the  force  of  •  in  my  favor'  =  hvic  rei, 
or  Diilii.  In  the  Eni:lish  rendering  the  same  clau-e  must  be  considered  as  an  attributive 
clause.  =  an  aigumeiit  'for  niy  not  repelling  any  one"],  ^ee  the  Ex.  Cic.  Thil.  2,  16, 
quoted  p.  8:i.  I{  ;«. 

(//)  Ut  clauses  dependent  on  verbs  op  fkarino  are  conceived  as  iitransitive  datives 
(veiGri  alicui  rei).  Thus  '  narifms  reritns  (C:es.  B.  G.  h.  9)  =  '  ne  quid  navihn-'i  accide- 
ref  ;  recepttii  sua  tinnl>at  (Cies.  B.  C.  3,  »•9)  —  •  id  se  red pei-^ posset '. 

(c)  Clauses  introduced  by  qtiin  or  <7?/o?//ir/7y,v,  are  analogous  to  intransitive  ablative 
objt-cts.  or  lo  objects  with  i)repositions,  but  also  to  certain  tiauHitive  objects  :  Kec  aptas 
iinpedit  quominus  ogri  cc^tndi  sivdia  tenedmiK.  Cic.  Sen.  17,  tto  (  =  ah  agtis  colendis). — 
Mon  ea  res  me  deferndt  quomimts  tiftera.<:  ad  te  mitttrem.  Cic.  Fain.  6,  12,"  1  (jieterrZre  ali- 
qiiem  de  or  ah  altqud  i-e^.     Thus  nan  d>d/ifo  qriin  =  non  duhito  de. 

id)  01)liqiie  (^nod-clauses  are  analogous  to  the  construction  with  an  objective  genitive, 
dative,  or  prepositional  object  (lando  aliquem  quod  =  taudo  aliquem  propter  aliquani 
rem  ;  ignosco  quod  =  ignosco  alicui  rei ;  accusdre  aliqueni  quod prodat  =  accusdrt  ptoUi- 
tionis). 

op.s.  2.  SrB.TECT-cLAUSEs  have  tliesame  grammalical  form  ascompletingCHV<?67-r/a?/.s^^, 
the  lauiriiagt!  conceiving  them  as  •  iiideclinahle  neuters  \  which  donctt  change  their  form, 
whether  they  are  used  in  the  relation  of  a  subject  nominative,  or  in  that  of  an  oblique 
case.  JSonietimes  a  clause  introduced  by  one  of  the  odveftAa/  conjunction^;  {/i.  8.  6').  is 
used  as  a  sul)ject-clause  (the  same  conjunctions  being  occasionally  used  to  introduce 
a  completing  object-clause),  as  :  DixC'ic.  minime  ess-e  mirandnm  si  tanta  ignominia  esset 
accejiia  ;  They  said,  it  was  l)y  no  means  to  be  wondered  at  if  (that)  so  great  a  disgrace 
had  been  met  with.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  ;^.—  Non  temerarium'st  vlA  dives' blande  appellat 
paupentn  '  It  is  not  lor  nothing  jvhen  (that)  a  rich  man  kindly  addresses  a  poor  one. 
I'laut.  Aul.  2,  2,  7.  (Compare  :  Ignoscite  si  (  =  quod)  appHlo  taleia  vinon  scrjnus. 
Cic.  Leg.  Ai:r.  2.  18,  40».—  Subject-clauses  are  tised  :  1)  as  sui)jects  of  those  passives 
which,  in  the  active  voice,  take  the  same  Uinds  of  clauses  as  completing  ol/jects  (Obs.  3) ; 
2)  as  subjects  of  active  i)redicates  (Obs.  4).  Both  kinds  of  subject-clauses  always  have 
impersonal  jiredicates.  Hence  the  i)redicate-adjectives,  participles,  and  gerundials  be- 
longing to  the  predicate  of  the  principal  sentence  must  always  be  in  the  neuter  singular 

Obs.  3.  All  the  verbs  which,  in  the  active  voice,  require  cJatises  as  completing  objects 
(0ns.  1).  take  tiie  same  clauses  as  impersonal  .«.////jV^'/.s-  if  they  are  in  the  passive  voice. 
There  i<  no  distinction  made,  in  this  respect,  wliether  the  object-clause  is  conceived  as 
a  transitive,  or  intransitive  object,  while  svh-tantive  objects,  if  intransitive,  cannot  be 
turned  into  pas-ive  subjects  (§  477).  Hence  if  any  active  verl>,  with  a  comi)letingobject- 
clau^e,  is  turned  into  a  passi\e,  it  must  take  an  impersonal  form,  the  object-cl«use  be- 
coming a  subject-clause,  without  any  change  of  form,  as  :  Alldtum  est  fioxCis  adioentdrej 
li  was  announced  that  the  cuemy  was  arriving.  Liv.  25,  21  (Actively  expressed  :  Affert- 


Il 


484 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


bant  host'is  advevtdre,  where  ^JiosHs  adventare''  i?  an  ohjoct-clnuFc  ;  wliile  in  '' nVdtvm 
esthontls  a(lreii(dre\  the  i*ame  clausJe  is  a  (tiibject-clnufte).--  Kidcm  pnctOri  vianddfum  tat 
ntdiiasdtonnn.'ifmmentiexigu'et;  It  was  ordered  'lo  tl>e  Kaiiie  jiia'tor'  (i.  e.  the  Mime 
prietor  was  ordend)  to  collect  two  tithes  of  corn.  Liv.  ;yi.  2. —  DidAtanthnn  von  fst  quin 
TiiinK/iiarn  poss'it  iitUUas  cntn  honestdte  contendtir  ;  It  niusr  not  he  doiihted  that  cxpe- 
dieaey  can  never  he  in  contliet  witti  morality.  Cic.  Ofl'.  -i,  3,  11.—  Iniqiiissiine  cornjnird- 
tume>>t  quod  in  morhis  corporis  niedicns  optinins  r/iKentur,  in  pericniis  capitis  deterri- 
mnt*  patrOnus  ad/iH/et'tr ;  It  ix  most  unfairly  (stat)lhhtd  li.  e.  it  is  exceedinjjily  inconsist- 
ent) that  in  diseases  of  the  body  the  hest  jiliy^ician  is  called,  but  that  in  capital  trials  the 
most  indifV.rent  counsel  iatinployed.  Cic.  Cln.  20,  57. —  Koniie  non  medio<Ti  cum  admira- 
tioiie  laiidCttiir  quod  id  accifnt-fid'/in  non  putdri  ;  At  Hotiie  •  it  is  praised  '  witii  not  a  lit- 
tle admiration  that  I  hare  fhot/f/ht  I  should  not  accept  that  ^donation).  Cic.  t^u.  Fr.  1, 1,  9. 
—  (|iiiim  qmereri'tar  ecqai  Carnpanonirn  bene  imri'xs  de  repiil)Iic?l  nostra  esMt ; 
When  it  ^rax  inqnind  (i.e.  wlien  inquiries  were  made)  whether  any  o\  the  Cainpanians 
had  wel!  desercrd  ofo'.n*  ri'|)Mblic.  Liv.  -Zii,  :iJ.—  The  nature  of  these  cl.ni-es  may  behest 
feen  it'  tliey  are  coordinal»' w  it!»  sii))-taniive  subjects:  jis  :  \jilerio  triionpltii<,  Maiilio 
vt  ovana  inqrederttur  urh€m  (  =  orafio)  decretmncxt.  ('I'o  tna/npht/s  the  personal  predi- 
cate r/^tvP/i'/.'."  f^'/ must  be  supplied.)  Liv.  ri;^:^l.— The  only  exception  to  the  above-men- 
tioned rule  is  the  instance  when  intinitive  clauses  must  assume  the  fori.i  of  a  no.mi- 
NATiVE  WITH  THK  iNFiMTivK  (p.  l(i(».  /.'.  HCi.  bl).  15ut  even  in  tliis  instance,  inij)t/i^onal 
hubject-clauses  are  suuKJtinies  u-ed  where  the  nile  would  ri-(iuire  a  jft-rsoi/al  con^tnu•lion 
will»  a  nominative  and  intinitixe,  as  :  A\im  c/tnfem  traditur  f.ima.  dulcedine  fniirnm  cap- 
tain Alpis  transl^se  ;  It  is  reported  by  lame  that  this  nation  had  cros-rd  the  Alps,  becjinse 
they  were  captivated  by  the  sweetness  of  our  frtiits.  Liv.  5.  :i'{.  [The  clause  '■rpntetn 
/n//*<'>tA>g' is  an  impersonal  su*>ject-clatisc.  ill  place  of  tin;  rej^ular  nominative  with  the 
intinitive  *  Aa  f/en.9  traditur  /ra/jAisv*» '.]— Sometime»  it  may  be  doubtful  whether  an  Ut- 
clause,  coiinectt;d  with  an  impt-rsonal  pas-ivo  predicate,  must  he  considered  ix  mitjject- 
clause^  nr  a  final  clause  as  a<tr«rl>i<d  ol>i<'Ct  of  the  injpersonal  predicate,  so  that  the  lat- 
ter, accordiiii;  to  §  4»)(),  No.  'i.  is  used  without  any  subject  :  (.)  mii  content ione  pnijudtuni 
eat  ul  lis  h;ec  capitis  lestimareliir.  Cic.  C'lii  41.  \h-r*s^  uf . .  .{r^tiinarefur'  is  eitlieralin.il 
clause  (=  there  was  a  hard  stiiiLri;le  in  order  to),  or  a  siiltjeci-claiise  according  to  p.  o'JD 
(=  they  strove  to  make  this  trial  u  capital  one).     See  p.  (538,  Ubs.  1. 

Obs.  4.  The  impersonal  ])r(dicates  of  sul>ject-clau-es  of  the  second  class  (Ors.  2), 
are  either  ordinary  activk  vi-.nns,  iiiipersonally  ll^e(l,  or  I'Uki»icatk-ad.tectivks  (itt  the 
neuter  sinurularK  or  pedicate  nouns  with  the  impcr«»nal  copula  (I'st).  With  both  kinds 
of  predicates  the  subjertclause  is  either  an  iiiierrogaiive  clause,  or  a  That-claubc  (the 
same  as  in  the  instance  iiientiotied  Obs.  3),  as  : 


strength  of  the  .Ktolians  t,e  ic^akened.  Liv.  3»i,  ,31.— />//'////  fiiit.  e.rcnifarn  populi  Ko- 
nnlni  ad  lacum  Trasinienum  intirlre  :  It  n-as  [destined  bvj  /ate  that  thtarji.y  of  ilie  Io- 
nian people  ahuidd  be  d^afroycd  n\  lake  TrasimC'iuis.  Cic.  I)iv.  2.  8.  21.-  AcoDtntorca  miil- 
tos  in  civiifite  esse,  ntilsest ;  It  in  useful  that  there  should  be  many  public  accusers  in  the 
community.  Cic.  Kosc.  Am.  2(). 

(/y)  Ci.AirsES  iNTRonicKi)  hy  uf,ne,  qiiin.  Qnowinua  :  IJestat  '//deimpcratOrcdcliirondo 
dicenduni  esse  ridfdtur  :  It  remains  to  s/kdk  i  literally  :  that  it  sliouhlsteni  that  it  lie  siniken) 
of  selecting  a  commander.  Cic.  Leir.  .>Lin.  11).  -il.—  Est  jnos  hominum  ut  nolint  euiidem 
pluribus  exeellere;  It  is  the  habit  of  men  to  dislike  that  one  man  sln)uld  be  distinguished 
in  several  accomplishments,  i'ic.  lirut.  2L8».—  Dionysio  wvintefirmn  qiiidem  erat  ut  ad 
justitiam  reinifjrdrtt  ;  It  icas  nor  even  in  Dionysius's/V^/r^T  to  return  to  justice.  Cic.  Tii>r. 
5,  21,  02.—  Si  diem  profi-riiniis.  jiericulurn  est  \  =  verendutn  est»  ne  oiinu's  copia?  conreni- 
anl;  If  we  jjostpone  the  matter,  tliereis  danger  that  all  the  forces  inaij  unite.  Liv.  25, 
3S. —  ^tetis.'ie  per  Tn-houtwrn.  quoniin us  oppid'o  jKttirenfur,  videl)ntur;  It  seemed  to  fje 
TreUmius^s /aalf  that  thei/  did  not  capfuie  the  town.  Csr.-*.  B.  C.  2.  13  [.s7</i.v.sY  being  an 
impersonal  intinitive  dependent  on  rideMtur  =  stetit  \nr  Tieboniiim  <iuointnus  potireu- 
tur). —  J\'on  est  dufjiuni  quin  f)eneliriuin  sit  etiam  iiivlio  prodess»?  ;  'J ht  rt-  is  no  dontit  that 
i/ <,s' (must  be  considerea)  a  Ac/'^/iV  to  be  iiselui  to  a  person  even  airainst  his  will.  >eu. 
Ben.  5.  \\).  [Here  a  sut)ject-iiilinitive  '  prodesse''  is  the  impersonal  sul>ject  of  the  iinner- 
hoiial  predicate  -  bene ftciuin  sit',  and  thi;-  ««enttuce,  in  the  form  of  a  Quinclauae,  is  niado 
the  impers{uml  subject  of  '  /,on  ed  dulnuta  '.] 

(c)  QuoD-CLAisEs:  Punqit /nequod  scribis  e-^e  \e  \(i\\c  libenter:  It  gives  me  a  pang  (\i 
afllicts  me)  ;  literally  '  it  stings  nie  ',  that  you  write  yon  like  to  i>e  there.  Cic.  Fam.  7,  l.">.  1. 
—  Illud  admodutn  ridiculuuk  {est)y  quod  negus  Dejotariim  auspiciOium  illOrum  pa-ni- 
tSre  ;  It  is  extremelv  ridiculm/s  that  you  denv  Dejotarus  to  be  sorry  for  those  auspices, 
Cic.  Div.  2,  37,  .8.—  Magnum  tjenejicium  natQrie  eat  quod  necttme  eat  mori  :  It  is  a  j^reat 
henejit  of  nature  that  ice  must  die.  Sen.  Ep.  101. 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


485 


(d)  Interrogative  claupes  :  Ea  ros  rata  habedtis  necne,  reipublicse  magis  interest 
qnam  mea :  Whtther  you  ratify  this,  or  not.  is  more  a  question  of  public  inte/est  t  han  of 
mv  t)wn.  Liv.  2«),  31. —  Ne  in  proximam  quioem  noctein,  vld  custodiretur expe:diebat :  It 
uus  \\i)\.e\vn  arranged  (i.  e.  no  arrangements  had  lieen  made)  for  liie  next  night,  where 
t/ie  place  of  his  confintnunt  a  as  to  be.  Liv.  ih  —  A dnn?abile  est  quantum  inter  omuls 
iinus  cxcellat  ;  It  ia'wondcjful,  how  much  one  man  is  superior  to  all.  Cic.  Or.  0. 

Obs.  5.  '1  he  active  verbs  that  may  be  used  as  iinpers«inal  i)redicates  of  ^uhject-clanpe3 
(Ob^.4),  are  limited  to  about  tliirty-tive.  These  verbs  (including  those  wliicli  are  con- 
sirued  with  a  mbject  inllnitive  (§  4t>4),  and  those  which  do  not  take  any  grammatical 
subject  (lonat,  fulqurat.  etc.)  are  called  *  pkopek  impkksonals '.  For  these  verbs,  and 
f(U'  the  kind  of  aulgect-clauses  which  each  of  them  requires,  see  p.  til5  toll.—  Predicate- 
iidjectives,  and  predicate-nouns  with  the  copula,  may  be  construed  with  sul)ject-chiuse8 
(according  lo  the  rules  p.  iW  foil.)  whenever  the  idea  of  an  adjective  or  noun  admits  of 
an  acfiou^tis  siibjt.-ct.  Frecpiently  Fact  clausks  (substantive  (^uod-clauses)  are  used  in 
jilace  ol  the  subject  of  a  sentence.  These  clauses  are  not  confined  to  the  '  proi)er  im- 
l)er^ollal  predicates',  but  may  be  used  as  subji-cis  of  a//y  verb  whicli  would  admit  ol 
an  ordinary  substantive-subject,  denoting  an  action.  See  Obs.  14. 

Obs.  ft.  If  the  impersonal  predicate  dependent  on  a  subject  clause,  is  Q,  finite  rerb,  the 
piit>ject-clause  is  in  the  relation  of  -a  subjed  nominative,  as  in  the  example-'  quoted  Obs,  3, 
and  4.  But  often  a  sentence  witli  animj)eisonal  predicate  and  with  an  infinitive  clause  as  its 
sul)ject.  is  itself  an  infinitive  clause,  m  which  instance  the  impersonal  predicate  must  be 
phui'din  the  infinitive  (as  an  impersonal  inedica'eintinilive).  and  iha  svf/jectclause  mvst 
be  conceived  as  a  sul/ject-accusalice.  at^  :  Co\\^\.\\\\ev\u\\ .oiitimum  esse,  dtfinum  snarn  quem- 
quertvtrti ;  Tliey  resolved///^//  it  was  best  that  each  .'should  rttiirn  to  his  own  lumu.  Cies.  B. 
G.2. 10.  [Here  the  infinitive  clause  'doinum..  .reverti  wtniid  be  in  the  relation  of  a  suiiject- 
iiominalive  if  the  imper>onal  predicate  were  finite  (optimum  est) ;  but  since  ttie  sentence 
is  marie  an  object-dause  of  '  constHuerunt ',  the  i)redicate  'optintum  eat '  is  made  an  im- 
personal predicate-infinitive  (o//tiniumes.^e),  and  tlie  subject-clause  ' dontvm  suarn  qxum- 
que  rcverli'  assumes  the  relation  ol  a  si'bjkct-acci'sa  i  ivk  (  =  domnm  reditioiurin  opti- 
inam  esse).] —  FuCrequi  dicerent,  nihil  attinere. omnia  tumnltuose  concitdri  ;  '1  tnre  were 
tlio-e  who  said,  it  was  of  no  use  that  all  should  be  alarmed  in  a  tuniuitu«»us  manner.  Liv. 
3ti,  11  [Indkpknukntlv  :  •  niiiil  atiinet,  omnI-<  coicitari ',  the  clause  '•  omnia  concitaii'' 
being  conceived  .as  the  subject-nominative  of  ihe  impersotral  predicate  ^  atdnet  \  Being 
made  an  object-clause  of  'dicerent  \  the  predicate  'altinef  becomes  an  i  in  personal  yvr^- 
dicate-infini'ire,  ami  the  clause  ' omnls  concifd/i'  is  in  the  relation  of  a  suBJECT-AtcusA- 
TiVE  (  =' concitafionem  omnium  nihil  attinere)].— Such  subject-clauses  may  consist  of 
an  inij>eraon>U  j/aaaive  of  that  class  which  are  used  without  any  subjects  (§  400.  No,  2), 
the  sul)ject-accusative  bein:;  understood  as  if  an  impel  sonal  '  z^  '  (p.  72.7«'.  11,  2).  In 
this  instance  the  same  impersonal  infiiniive  lias  two  relations:  1)  that  of  ii p)edicate-in- 
finifive  of  its  own  clause  ;  2)  tiiat  ot  a  subject-wcusative  to  another  predicaie-inliniti ve; 
as:  Conciamant  omnes,  ad  castra  iri  oportere,  (literally  :  All  shouted  *  that  it  waa  neces- 
sary' that  •  it  should  Ije  gone'  to  tlie  camp,  i.  e.  'that  all  must  proceed  to  the  camp  '.) 
C;es.  15.  (».  3,  IS.  [//i  iei)resents  an  intiniiive-clau>e.  being  at  the  same  time  its  predi- 
cate, and  ccnrespinding  to  the  finite  predicate  -itur^  ('t  is  gone,  thty  go)\  it  is,  al.-^o, 
the  subject  of  oftortet.  which  being  chaiiL'ed  into  a  predicate-infinitive,  ii  must  be  con- 
sidered it.-  subject-accusative.]  Thu- :  Non  dicam  neillud  quidem,  in  hominem  hones- 
tissimum  tanigraviter(///i///«(/tvr/icaustT  indicianon  opart u isse  :  I  will  noteveii  mention 
that  so  severe  a  punishment  ought  not  to  have  been  inflicted,  without  a  hearing,  on  a 
most  respectable  man  Cic.  Verr.  2.  5.  8  [animadverlifur,  =  poena  iriogdlur ;  hence 
'unimadverti  oj)ortuii '  =  poenam  irrogdti  oi>ortuit]. 

Obs  7.  In  the  same  manner  any  finite  subject-clause  may  be  in  the  relation  of  a  sub- 
ject-accusative if  its  iinper.sonal  piedicate  assumes  the  lorm  of  a  preilieate  infinitive, 
as  :  (Dixit)  I'ompeji  summain/V/j-v^e  semper  ro/M/</(7/(7/i  ut  co?n]x/ne7 et ur  alque  ab  armis 
disc^dtretur  ;  He  said  that  it  had  t\\\\ny^  been  tlie  earnest  desiie  of  roinpey  that  a  com- 
promise should  be  made,  unCi  thai  tluyahould  disarm.  Cies.  B.  C.  3,  16  (  =  'compositiOnem' 
et  'disccssiOnem  al)  armis  *  semper  liiisse  voliintiltein). —  Ciesar  omnibus  consiliis  a///«- 
t>/'/6//'/M/n  existiinavii  ut  Narboneiii  proficisctrltar  ;  Caisar  thought  he  must  prevent  by 
all  means  thut  he  should  mar<h  to  yarl/O.  Ca's.  B.  G.  7,  7  [  =  pn^lectiOnem  (ad)  NarliO- 
iiem  anteveitendain  e>se].—  Illud  meinineris,  conveniaae  vt  ne  quid  dotis  mea  ad  te  alfer- 
ret  filia  ;  Reineniher  that  '  it  haa  been  agreed'  (  =  we  have  agreed)  that  my  daui:hter  will 
no'  briiiLT  you  any  dowry.  I'laut.  Aul.  2.  2,  80  [  =  non-dationtm  (if  such  a  substantive  t  x- 
isted)  doiis  convenir.se], —  Ctesar  coirnOvii  yx-r  Afranimn  stare  quominus  picelio  dimica- 
retur  :  C'A'!^:\rharuvd  tlia/  it  uas  Afranius't!  fault  that  there  was  no  fighting.  Cies.  B  C. 
1,  1,  41.—  (^uiim  in»stri  quid  -ine  intj)tratore  efiicere l^ossent  jteiapici  cupeient ;  Since  our 
soldit  rs  w  ished  '  thai  it  should  be  seen  '  w  hat  ihey  could  do  without  the  chief-commander. 
Cas.  B.  (i.  3,  21, 

Sometimes  two  and  more  subject-clauses  are  thus  made  dependent  on  each  other  :  Quum 


486 


COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


omn'mm  voces  nudinfifu)' fxfipeetan  (Hufius  non  ojwrtere  qvin  ad  cnHra  «fe^wr;  AMicn 
Jill  raise'!  thtir  voice'^  tluit  there  .-hoidd  be  no  longer  delay  in  i)rorecdm«,'  to  the  c-imp.  Ciea. 
B  (i  3  'lA  Thvfo-  clauses  are  tiHis  re!?;<)lvfd  :  1.  Quia  ad  eastra  irlUir  uon  ex.-<pecfafur. 
'quiii  ad  casini  iiC-iur'  beiiii,'  in  the  ivhition  of  a  suhject-noniinative  to  tlie  iiiii)tr>()iml 
passive  '  exsi>ect<'ititr\  2.  liy  makinjr  tliis  t^entoncc  the  subject  of  '0])or(et\  the  subject- 
clause  '  Qirin  irttiir''  assumes  tlie  character  of  a  Kuhjecl-accntiaHre  (  =  ad  castra  itiOiiein 
ex>pecliTii  non  oportet).     3.  Afjain  lliis  \vh«)Ie  sentence  is  made  dependent  as  an  object- 

ck  ■  ' 

chani 
omnl- 

k/iou'/i  anum<:  u\\  f/uit  you .,  .,  .  . 

the  citie-  be  qortrtted  Dy  the  advice  of  the  luirher  ranks  (i.  e.  ft>r  an  aristocratic  govern- 
ment of  the  cities).  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1.  1,8.  [1.  it  ciri/afe.<. .  .adminhtrtntur,  prondetur  nhs 
te  =  Adiniitittl ratio }twvidet nr.  2.  Ut  cirifdte.s  admini/itrt/dur,  prorid^ri  constat  =  Admi/n- 
8trationefH provide ri  constat,  the  subject-clause  '  ut...adminhtrtntar''  iiavinjr  assumed 
the  relation  ol  a.  sub/ect-accumtive,  and  the  sentence  ^  vtadnonistrtntur  prondttur  ,that 
ot  a  suiOect-noininaiive.  3.  It  civittltes  administrentur.  ;>/-on(/fH  constdre  \\i\eo  =  Ad- 
minUtratiuiuxinovWionem  constdre  video,  the  whole  bcnteuce  Ko.  1  having  assumed  the 
relation  of  a  suigect-accusaiive.J 

Obs.  8.  Predicate  clauses  are  drntmlocutions  of  the  pi^edicaf^,  the  real  action  or 
ST'i'.sTwcE  of  tlie  predicatr  beiii'„'  expl•e^sed  in  the'form  of  a  claisk,  the  predicate  re- 
taininj,'  merely  the  (/ramniatiad  form  ofa  predicate.  For  this  purpose  those  verbs  are 
employed  which  either  (lent»tc  the  parlicular  kind  of  '  predication  '  (§  «ilO  ;  see  Obs.  11), 
or  the  .reneral  kind  i;f  verbal  action  to  which  the  predicate  proper  belon<,'s  (e.  e.  a  verb 
of  b^inr/  or  doiiiff).  Predicate-clauses  alwavs  have  the  external  api)earance  ot  a  snbject- 
claiise'or  an  ooj'Ct-clause.  or  an  attributive  clause:  but  thry  are  distin-nished  troni 
these  cla-ses  of  clauses  bv  the  tact  that  tlie  verb  to  which  they  are  attached  lacks  thesnth. 
stance  of  a  predicate,  whiVli  is  assi.jjiied  to  the  cla'ist*.  The  irnimmatical  lorms  of  predi- 
cate-chuises  are  either  relative  or  It-clauses,  sometimes  (^iiodclauses.  and  (^uumclauses. 
The  formal  (or  alt^tract)  predicate  of  the  principal  >entence  is  either  the  verb  esse  (denot- 
iiii^  the  nitre  idea  of  '  existence  *).  or  the  veiby<//v/<^,  or  one  of  its  synonyms  (denoting 
the  idea  of  *  doing'),  or  a  verb  designating  the  kind  of  i/;-tciia//i<^^i  {dicere.  (juitrere,  pe- 
tere  etc.). 

Obs.  9.  Pre-Mcate-clauses  attached  to  the  abstract  predicate  esse  have  any  of  the  forms 
meniioned  in  Olis.  8. 


doiiit) 
aiiytliinrf  he 


dam  sunt  qui.  niulti  sunt  qui  etc.),  or  it  is  e.\pres>ed  by  a  noun  «>1  general  import  with 
or  without  indetinite  attributes.  The  predicate-clause  generally  has  its  predicate  in  the 
sul)junctivc,  as  :  Sunt  qui  censeant  una  animuni  et  corpus  occidere  ;  There  are  some  who 
hold  that  ^oul  and  bodv  i)erish  together,  tic.  Tusc.  l-l>  [  =  (^nidam  censeut  una.,  oiri- 
dere]  —  Nemo  est  qui  nesciat ;  Ttiere  is  no  one  who  does  not  know  tluit  etc.  Cic.  ram. 
1,  4.  2  [  =  Nemo  nesdf,  or  Omnes  sriunf\.—  Kraut  t^entenfia  quce  castra  \  ari  opi-ugnanda 
censennt  ;  There  were  votes  in  favor  of  an  attack  on  Vaius"s  caini»  diternliy  which  be- 
lieved that  etc.).  C'ics.  li.  C.  2,  30  [  =  XonnulUi;  senteidue  castra  oppiKj  nan  da  cfinsebant]. 
Sometimes  such  circumlocutions  «)f  the  predicate  l)y  means  of  the  verb  esse  are  a|)pliea 
to  make  the  numeral  relations  (»r  Metinite'  sui>jects  more  prominent,  as:  Krant  ilintia 
duo  quibns  itineribus  domo  exire  posseiit.  C'.es.  B.  (J.  1,  0  [  =  Duobus  itinerilius 
exire  poteraiit]. —  St  e,  ' 
lacks,  lie  is  not  even  h 

A'st  locus  in  quo,  or  sunt  .    -       ■.  .      ,     •         •         .     . 

Tii-c.  Jb.  [  =  Quibusdamin  lexis  id  valet].— Kst  quatenus  amictfue  dan  veiiia  potest; 
There  i6  a  limit  up  to  which  friendship  may  be  taken  into  account.  Cic.  Am.  17  [  -  Isqne 

*  The  verb?  employed  for  such  '  merely  formal '  or  '  abstract'  predicates  (esse,fareie) 
have  the  same  relation  to  ordinary  verbs  i\-*  form-adjt^clives  to  descriptive  a(ljectives. 
They  are  verl)s  meiely  in  their  «rrammatical  form,  and,  partaking  of  the  wh;>le  intlec- 
tioiT  of  (.rdinarv  verbs,  mav  peilnrm  ail  (jratnmatical  lumtioiis  of  the  piedicate,  but 
without  Its  7nediiiiifj,  and  .substance,  which"  is  «-xpies-ed  by  the  '  predicatc-dau  e  '.  liy 
thu-^  di-solvinjr  a  pr.-dicate  into  an  abstract  predicate  and  a  predicate-clause,  we  sepa- 
r.iielhe  piedicate  proper  from  the  predication  (§  GIO.  fi)ot-not<).  The  preoicate-dause 
ha- to  its  abstract  piedicate  the  same  relation  as  any  other  clause  has  to  its  s.\n«ietic 
antecedent  (C)Bs.  1.'),  «I.  Since  thesvndetic  antecedent  always  indicates  the  qrawjnatual 
fuhclion  and  name  of  the  clause  (Obs.  1.5).  it  is  evident,  that  clause»  wldch  have  abbtract 
predicates  as  antecedents  nmst  be  classed  as  '  lYedicate-claust$\ 


est  quod  deest  (ei>,  ne  be;ltus  qiiidem  est:  If  fhrre  ts  anyt/itnq  he 
lappy.  Cic.  Tusc.  5.  S  [  =  si  dtot  aliquid].—  Est  ul,i  id  raleut  {i.e. 
tit  (oci  in  qui/jus)  ;  Thtre  are  occasions  whtre  this  holds  go.xl.  Cic. 


I 


* 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBINATION.  i    * 

ad  cerium  locum  or  finem  amiciti»  dari  venia  potest].—  Instead  of  sunt  qni,  the  form 

•  iurenti  {rrptrti)  svut  qui  '  is  frequently  used  (see  p.  429,  li). 

2)  If  predicate-clauses  attached  to  the  abstract  predicate  *>.<;««  have  the  form  of  an  Ui- 
dause.esse  \>  always  an  impersonal  predicateuHhout  asubject{eHnt  =  'it  is  the  case  that', 

*  it  happens  that ').     Tlii>  form  is  used  :  .,,„.„. 

(a)  iu  emphasize  the  predication,  the  same  as  if  an  '  emphatic  particle'  (§  401)  were  used 
together  with  the  virtual  predicate,  as  :  Est  nt  plerlque  philosoi)hi  nulla  tradant  prai- 
cepta  dicendi ;  Indted.  most  philosophers  fail  to  give  any  rules  on  speaking  (it  is  the 
case  that  most  philosophers  give  no  rules  etc.).  Cic.  Or.  2,  3«!,  152  [  =  Plerlque  «on€  philoso- 
phi  nulla  tradunt  pra-cepta].—  JS'on  est  igitur  vt  viirandum  sit  ea  pra-sentlri ;  Indeed,  we 
should  not  wonder  that  these  things  are  foreknown  (literally  '7^  i.f,  therefore,  7/o^  the 
case  that  it  should  be  wondered  at  etc.).  Cic.  Div.  1,  5«,  128  [  =  Prnfecto  non  est  miran- 
dum  ea  pricsentlri].— Jam  proj^e  erat  vt  ne  consulum  quirtem  majestas  coercgret  iras 
hominum  ;  'It  was  almost  the  case'  {or 'it  was  near')  that  not  even  the  majesty  of  the 
consuls  restrained  the  anger  of  men.  Liv.  2.  ;W  [  -  Prope  ne  consulum  quidem  majes- 
tas coercebat :  Even  the  majesty  of  the  coim^u]^^ scarcely  restrained  etc.].—  Jam  prope  erat 
vt  nee  duci  miliies,  nee  militibus  dux  satis  fideret ;  Scarcely  did  the  foldieis  and  the 
leader  place  sufficient  contidence  in  each  other.  Liv.  10,  18.—  Instead  of  'prope  est  id\  or 
"non  est  uf  the  ex|)ression  ' abest  uf  with  a  limiting  adjunct  (parum  abest,  nihil  aljesf, 
von  inultum  abest)  is  sometimes  used,  in  which  instance  the  predicate-clause  is  intro- 
duced by  the  conjunction  quin  (in  place  of  vt),  as  :  Nihil  attest  quin  sim  miserrimus 
{=  prope  est  ut  si m):  'Nothing  is  wanting  that  I  should  be  the  most  wretched  man', 
i.  e.  I  am  well  ni<:h  the  mo^t  wretched  man  on  earth.  Cic.  Att.  11,  5,  3.—  Haud  mvUvni 
abfuit  quin  Ismenias  interficeretiir ;  'Little  was  wanting  that'  Ismenias  was  killed, 
t.  e.  Ismenias  was  almost  (nearlv)  killed.  Liv.  42,  44.— Hero  may  be  reckoned  the  first  Ut- 
clause  iu  ih«!  construction  'Tdntum  attest  ut...ni',  which  may  either  be  considered  a 
Predicate-clause,  or  an  attributive  Fact-clause,  accordinir  to  the  analysis  given  p.  mi. 

(b)  The  same  form  of  predicate-clauses  is  most  frequently  used  as  a  circumlocution 
of  the  liiture  piedicate-infiniti ve  in  the  passive  voice  (p.  137.  E.  154).  as  :  ArbitiSbar 
j'vre  ut  lex  de  pecuniis  repettindis  K.Ueretur;  1  thought  that  the  law  on  the  embezzle- 
ment of  public  funds  would  be  repealed.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  14,  41.  Here  'fore  id'  is  an  abstract 
predicate  to  which  the  inllection  is  applied  according  to  the  requirement  of  the  con- 
struction, while  the  real  predicate,  whidi  does  not  admit  of  this  inflection,  is  added  in 
the  form  of  a  predicate  Ut-clause.—  Scipio  susi)iciltus  i.'>\  fore  ut  postero  die  invlti.s  di- 
micslre  coqetZtur.  ^S'a'^.  B.  C.  3,  37.—  As  a  similar  circundocution  for  tinite  passive  predi- 
cates thennjiersonal  predicate  '  in  eoesf  with  a  predicate  rt-clau>e  is  sometimes  em- 
ploved,  as  :  Quum  jam  in  to  esset  ut  comprehenderltur  ,•  When  it  was  '  on  the  point '  that 
he  should  be  arrested  (i.  e.  'just  when  he  was  to  be  arrested",  or  '  when  he  was  on  the 
point  of  beini;  arretted').  Nep.  Pans.  5.—  hi  eo  erat  ut  Miltiades  oppido  jxttiretur ;  'It 
was  on  thejtoiid  '  that  Miliiades  seized  the  city  (i.  e.  Miltiades  was  on  the  point  of  seizing). 
Isep.  Milt.  7. 

3)  The  impersonal  abstract  predicate  esse  takes  a  predicate-clause  introduced  by  quod, 
or  a  relative  causal  adv.  rb  «'/;■,  q u an, ottrem)  ov  hy  xhv  temporal  ctmjunction  quuin,  to 
emphasize  the  adverbial  relations  of  cause  and  time  attached  to  the  predicate,  as:  Quid 
est  cur  tu  in  isto  loco  sed<as;  '  What  is  it  why  '  you  ate  sittintr  at  that  i)lace  J  (i.  e.  why 
do  you  sit  etc.).  Cic.  Clii.  5:1.—  C<»^'nos<  et  populus  KomSnus  quid  sit  quamobrein,  quum 
e(liuster  ordo  judicfliet,  in  ntillo  juoice  susjjicio  acceptie  pecunije  constitCda  sit:  The 
l{oman  people  will  learn  '  what  it  is  why'  (i.  e.  will  team  whij).  no  suspicion  of  bribery 
was  established  jgainst  any  judge,  while  the  judicatory  was  m  the  hands  of  the  eques- 
trian order.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  1,  13.—  Credo  eiro  mirjlri  vos  quid  sit  quod.,  ego  potissimura 
rutrexerim  ;  I  believe  that  you  wonder  *  what  it  is  that '  (i.  e.  that  you  wonder  why)  just 
I  should  have  arisen.  Cic.  Hose.  Am.  1.—  Hanc  domum  jam  mvltos  annos  est  gumn  ]tos- 
Mdw  ;  It  has  been  (see  p.  299,  n.  42)  vmrnj  years  when  (that;)  1  have  owned  this  house. 
Plant .  Aiil.  Prol.  A.—Haudduvi  s,x  viens'is  Me^raribus  hue  est  quum  commiqrdvit ;  It  is  not 
yet  six  months  ago  uhen  (that)  he  moved  from  Megara  to  this  place.  Plant.  Pers.  K:}7. 
[Th(?  Quum-danseg  in  the  last  two  sentences  are  piedicate-clauses,  since  the  principal 
predicate  est  contains  (miy  the  abstract  idea  of  a  jiredicate,  but  not  its  substance.  The 
circumlocutitm  is  used  to  emphasize  the  adverbial  adjuncts  'jnvlfos  annos'  and  'sex 
mnisJs'.  B«)th  are  placed  in  the  adverbi  il  accusative  of  time,  as  if  the  temporal  clauses 
were  the  grammatical  predicates  in  place  of  est.  The  editors  find  fault  with  both  con- 
structiiMis,  since  thev  failed  to  see  that  these  temporal  clauses  are  jrredicateclauses 
which,  toqether  with  their  abstract  predicate  est,  form  the  real  predicate  of  the  sentence. 
In  a  similar  passaire  Cicer-'  nivesa  personal  form  to  the  sentence,  making  the  adverbial 
adjunct  the  subject  to  which  the  temporal  clause  is  attached  in  the  form  of  an  attributive 
clause;  Apud  Ura-cos  jam  fz/ywi  prope  qvadiingenti  /fw//^  quum  hoc  probatur:  It  isfo^r 
hundred  years  when  (that)  this  has  been  adoi)ted  by  the  Greeks.  Cic.  Or.  51,  171  (i.  e. 
Anni,  quum  hoc  piobaiur,  quadiingenti  sunt  ;  The  years  or  '  numbers  of  years '  that  this 


488 


COMBINATION  OF  SENTENCES. 


has  been  adopted  arc  four  hundred).—  In  a  pimilar  paspacrc  the  predicate-clanse  has  tho 
Ibnn  of  an  I't-clause  :  Videsiie  ij^itur  miml^  quadrin^'t'iitoiuni  aiinOriun  ^.*s>ihun('  urhem 
vf  sine  regihussit?  Do  you  see,  then,  that  this  city  (by  rdhesvi,  sec  p.  396,  d)  has  been 
less  than  "4{X)  years  without  kin<;s  ?  Cic.  Itep.  1,  37,  58.   (p.  520,  c). 

Obs.  10.  Predieatc  chiuses  dependent  on  facere,  and  its  synonym?,  as  abstract  predi- 
cates, have  the  form  of  an  rt-c/ause  vw\ihii>\z\\\<z  either  the  pndicnt'KM,  as  referrini:  to 
a  '  (loi'if/ '  oi  the  t^ubjeet,  or  an  adverbial  adjunct  of  the  predicate  proper.  This 
construction  is  both  personal  and  impersonal,  as  :  Faclibi  (i.  e.  ?//  tifn)  Urjh  Acilicz  re- 
niat  in.  nientm;  Recall  the  Acilian  law  to  your  mind  (literally  :  Make  that  you  rerjiU 
etc.).  Cic.  Vcrr.  1,  1,  17. —  InrVus  facio  vt  nconltr  rnlwit*  rtipublicie:  I  reluctantly  re- 
call the  ruin  of  tlie  republic.  Cic.  Vatin.  «>.  21. —  Facia  lihenter  ut  per  littera^  tecum  col- 
loquar ;  I  like  to  converse  with  you  by  k'tter  (  =  libenter  colloquor).  Cic.  Fam.  1,  7,  1. 

—  (l\\o  feci  libentius  w/ euin  semiOnem  inandarein  litteris  ;  The  more  willinjily  have  I 
committed  this  dialo<,nie  to  pa|>er.  Cic.  Or.  2,  2,  7.—  Prope  factum  est  ut  injussupnetOris 
in  aciem  exirent ;  It  almost  *  liappened  '  that  they  went  to  battle  without  the  prietor's 
orders  (i.e.  Tlu-y  almost  went  to  battle  etc.).  Liv.  25,  21.—  Egif  ille  niliil  aliud  illo  c.ver- 
eitu  uiisi  vt  urbTs  dfi)()))>dartlur :  He  did  nothinj?  with  this  army  but  devastate  cities 
(i.  e.  he  <»nly  devastated  cities  with  this  armyi.  Cic.  Pis.  17,  41.—  Faciendum  mihi  putilvi 
nt  his  litteris  breviter  yw/^o/it/e/vm  ;  I  tliought  that  I  ouLrht  brii-fly  to  answer  this  letter. 
Cic.  Fam.  3,  8. —  Negavi  me  esse  fact  urum,  ut  de  periculo  publico  non  ad  consilium  refer- 
rem  ;  I  said  that  I  mist  refer  to  the  public  council  in  a  matter  ot  public  dai;<;tr.  Cic. 
Cat.  3,  3. —  Here  belon;^  the  impersonal  expressions^^^  uf,  contingit  uf,  accidit  ut.  as  :  In 
QA^flt  ut  ffique  quisque  altero  delect^tur  ac  se  ipso  ;'  Between  such  jx-rsons  ('  it  happens 
that ')  eiich  flnd-»  as  much  pleasure  in  the  other,  as  in  himself.  Cic.  Olf.  1, 17.—  Timoleou 
niau:nus  omnium  judicio  vir  exstitir  ;  namque  hiiic  contigtt  nt  patriam  ir^qua  erat  natus, 
oppressam  a  tyraimo,  IWerdret  ;  Timoleon  was  a  «rreat  nian  accordiii<r  to  the  jud^'ment  of 
i\\\\  fitr  he  liberated  his  native  country  from  tyranny  (literally  'it  hapiieiitd  to  him\  '  it 
fell  to  his  lot '  that  he  lifjei'ated  etc.).  Nep.  Timol.  1,1. 

Obs.  11.  Often  verbs  of  savin?,  askincr.  and  commandinii,  on  which  oblique  clanseR 
are  dependent  (p.  3S7  loll.)  must  be  considered  as  alj-^hact pvtdh'ales.  This  is  tlie  case 
if,  by  such  verbs,  the  author  desi<;p.ares  his  own  prestnt  as.-i-rtions,  (juestions,  or  com- 
mands, separating  thus  tlic  jiredication  (i.  e.  tlie  i(ka  of  assertion,  (pjestion,  or  com- 
mand), from  \\\c  predicate,  i.  e.  the  substance  of  the  command,  which  is  contained  in 
the  oblique  clause.  ^ Dico  Epicurvm  enulre^  is  a  mere  circumlocution  of  the  simple 
sentence  •  Fincurus  eiraf  ;  the  diHerence  between  both  beinirthat  in  the  former  ihe 
predication  ta  declaration)  is  separated  from  the  iindicale  declared.  Hence  oblique 
clauses  of  tliis  kind,  although  they  liave  the  external  forn»  of  object-clauses,  are  virtu- 
ally predicate-clauses,  the  governing  verb  being  an  abstract  predicate;  as:  Dicimus^ 
C.  Verremquadringentiessestertiuin  ex  Sicilia  abstulisse  ;  We  a^ert  that  C.  Varro  ab- 
Btracted  40  millions  of  t»esterces  from  Sicily  (  =  Verves. .  .al^sfuiit).  Cic.  Verr.  1,  18.  56. 

—  Voln  ut  responde(Pi  (  =  respi>itde\.  Cic.  Vatin.  7,  IS.—  Q'uvro  serrarisne  Jidf.ui ;  I  ask 
whether  you  have  kept  your  i)romise  (  =•  Strvavi-t'ine  fdtmf)  Cic.  Vat.  ti,  15. —  J'tto 
ut  periculum  propuls5tis  (  =  propulsate  pcriculnm).    Cic.  Hose.  Am.  3,  7. 

Obs.  12.  Advehbiai,  clai'sks  are  of  three  forms.  They  are  1)  either  infroditced  by 
adverbial  conjunction.'^  {R.  3,  C),  or  2)  by  7-elatiie  adji-cfires  or  advrlis  :  or  they  take 
3)  the  form  oi participial  clauses,  either  in  the  form  of  ablatives  absolute,  or  in  that  of  a 
direct  participial  construction  (j).  174,  R.  21S). 

Those  adverbial  clauses  whicli  art;  introduced  by  conjunctions,  likewise  assume  three 
forms:  1)  the  direct  adverbial ;  x^)  the  conditional ;  3»  the  compararivt- forms. 

A.  In  the  dikkct  auvekbial  form,  the  ditlrrent  adverbial  relations  of  the  principal 
eentence  (§  51(5  foil.),  except  that  of  im.ace  (which  always  asMUim^s  the  form  of  a  rela- 
tive clause),  are  dinctUj  expressed  by  coiiju'ictions,  denoting  the  relation.  These  are 
(rt)  Tkmpoual  conjunctions  (quurn,  (juando,  dum,  (juoad.  donee)  ;  (fA  the  modal  con- 
junctions Iff,  and  its  equivalents  quo.  f/uin,  guominus  ;  (c^  the  causal  conjunctions  g^iorf, 
quia,  quoniam,  including  the  eoucesj^ive  conjunctions  quamquaui,  etsi,  quatnri't. 

B.  The  CONDITIONAL  ft)rm  represents  the  pueoication  of  the  principal  sentence  (p.  480) 
as  dependent  on  a  continuency  whose  e."istence  or  non-existence  is  represented  as 
uncertain.  This  continirency  is  e.xi)ressetl  in  the  form  of  n  conditional  clause,  which  is 
introduced  by  the  conjuiicti<m  si  (nisi,  ni),  or  by  other  adverl)ial  conjunctions,  iinph/ing 
the*  conjunction  si  (dumni/)do  ctv..  vbi  quis  etc.,  see  §  .")7*.»,  /^  Of»).  Hence  conditional 
clauses  a.<  such  do  not  express  adverbial  relations  of  ilie  principal  ])redicate,  but  they 
may  i//j;Vy  them.  The  )l"i//(/ of  adverl>ial  relations  which  is  thus  contained  by  implica- 
tion in  tlie  conditional  form  of  the  clatise  may  always  be  recognized  if  the  unCf^rtainty 
expressed  by  the  conditional  form  is  removed,  i.  e.  if  thi?  condition  is  made  real.  Thus 
in  the  following  conditional  clauses  the  relation  of  cause  is  implied  :  .Si  diem  proferi- 
mu.f,  periculum  est  ne  omnes  copi:c  conveniant ;  If  we  posti)one  the  matter,  there  ia 
danger  lest  all  the  forces  may  assemble.  Liv.  25,  38  [By  making  the  condition  real : 
Omnes  copiaj  convenGruut  quia  diem  protulimus;   The  troops  assembled  because  wo 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE-COMBIN.\TION. 


489 


postponed  the  matter]. —  Illud  perspicunm  est,  si  neqve  amens  pater,  neque  deprrditus 
fliusfutrif ,  neque  odii  caiisain  jKitri.  neque  sceleris  lilio  l'nis>r;  It  is  clear,  that  it  n.iiher 
the  fatht-r  was  insane,  nor  the  st)u  was  a  villain,  neither  the  father hau  any  reason  to  hate, 
n«»r  the  sou,  to  commit  the  crime.  Cic.  Hose.  14,  41  [If  made  real  :  The  lather  had  no 
reason  etc..  sincehii  was  not  in>ane:  the  son  had  non-ason  etc.,  since  he  was  no  villain]. 
—  In  the  follow  ing  clauses  the  relation  of  time  is  implied  :  Si  prcelium  ciunmitteretur, 
])ropinquitas  casirOrum  celerem  superjltis  ex  luga  nccptuni  dabat  ;  If  (in  tlie  aise  that) 
a  battle  ^llould  be  Ibnght.  the  neatness  of  the  cami)  would  allow  to  the  defeated  party  a 
quick  retreat.  Cu;s.  B.  C.  1,  82  [If  made  real  :  Quuin  praUiuni  conimis<um,  e$stt.  pnquin- 
qnitas  cas-trorum. .  .dabat]. —  Signilicant  canes  et  au^eres  .^i  qui  noctu  in  Capitoiium  vene- 
lint  ;  Tlie  dogs  and  ueese  tjive  the  alarm  if  anyone  co/ne^fjy  night  to  the  ('apitol  [If  made 
real  :  When  a  certain  person  came,  they  «rave  the  alarm].  Cic.  K.  A.  20.  56.—  iSi  qvu  colli- 
gain  appclkcsset.  iui  discedCbal  ut  etc.;  If  any  one  had  appealed  to  a  magistrate  of  equal 
l)ower.  he  came  so  off  that  etc.  Liv.  ;i,  36  [If  made  real  :  When  a  certain  uerson  had 
ai)|)'  aled  etc.,  he  came  so  oil"  that  etc.].—  In  the  following  passage  Cicero  gives  to  a  con- 
ditional clause  the  form  of  a  temporal  clatise  by  removing  the  uncertainty  implied  in  the 
condition  :  Si  damndttts  e) is,  aiquv  adco  qumn  dainndt us  e7is  (nafn  dub'itatio  davi7iatid- 
iiis  quiH  ]X}ferat  esse/),  virgis  te  ad  lU'cem  ca,'di  necesse  erit  ;  If  you  icill  be  condemned, 
or  rather  wtien  you  iciU  be  condtmiud  (for  tchat  doubt  can  there  be  of  your  condemnation  f), 
it  will  he  nece>^ary  to  whip  you  to  death  ;  Cic.  Verr.  2.  3,  25).—  In  the  following  clauses 
the  relation  of  coincident  action  is  implied  :  Facis  injuriam  si  majorem  S)iem  in  hvjus 
(xitiojKtnis  quam  etc.;  You  are  wron<r  if  you  plac^  a  greater  hope  in  hu  death  than  etc. 
Cic.  K.  A.  50.  146  [H  made  leal:  Injuriam  facis  quod.  ..jxmis  (or  quvm. .  .jxinis);  You 
ar(!  wrong  when  (in  asmtich  as)  you  place  etc.].— Satis  pro^um  M;;(^//cio  ut  nolint  obesse 
qui  pf.sriunt;  I  am  useful  (iuowjh  if  /  efnt  that  those  do  not  harm  us  who  have  the 
l)ower  to  do  so.  Cic.  Att.  2,  1,  8  [If  made  real :  Sat's  piosiim,  quod  (or  quum)  jx-rficio  (or 
perfciendo);  in  as  mncji  as  I  eU'ect  (by  effecting)].— But  not  every  conditional  clau.^e 
irni)lies  an  adverbial  lelation.  and  any  member  of  a  sentence  mav  as.-ume  tiie  form  of  a 
conditional  clau.>^e.  if  it  contains  an  uncertain  action  on  which  the  reality  of  the  predi- 
cati<ui  depends.  'I'hus  frequently  conditional  clauses,  by  removinir  tlie  condition,  may 
become  equivalent  lo  subject-clauses,  to  object-clauses,  to  relative,  to  intenogative 
clauses,  or  even  to  nnre  jflirmative  particles,  as  :  Minime  est  mirandum  si  7>iors  aceiba 
fifit ;  There  is  no  wonder  if  his  death  was  lamented.  Nep.  Cim.  4,  4  [Makini;  the  con- 
dition real  :  '■quod  7nors  acey^lia  fuit\  or  'wJo/^7/i  acerbam  fuisse.\  as  subject-clause]. — 
Igno-ce  si  ejus  ri/'i  auctorit.ati  Djotarus  cessV  ;  Pardon  if  hjotarus  olteyed  the  authority 
of  that  7nan.  Cic.  Dej.  4,  12  [If  made  real,  the  conditionil  clau^e  becomes  an  oblique 
(^'lod-rluHse].—  Si  pecuniam  tVA  aliquis  donaretit.  beneficium  vocabi>  :  Jf  somel^ody 
j/resenfs  1JOU  iritk  7jwney,  you  will  call  it  a  benefaction.  Sen.  Ben.  4.  6  [Here  tne  condi- 
tional clatise  has  the  force  of  a  transitive  accusative,  ou  which  a  factitive  t)redicaie  de- 
j)ends  (§  4s7,  R.  74),  —  dimationeni  betificiinn  vocdbi-'^]. —  >ri)n  utar  ista  couMietudint',  n 
quid  est  factum  clementer,  ut  dissolflte"  factum  criminer;  I  will  not  adopt  th<'  habit  of 
stigmati/.ini:  as  reckless  if  anything  is  performed  with  cUinency.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  5.  8  [Here 
the  Ciau.-*t!  *«  ^//iof  <-.v//cfC^>//>j '.  if  the  uncertainty  is  removed,  becomes  kklative  :  'id 
quod  e>i  factum  clementer "].- Nunc,  si  me  ama.s.  cnitere  ut  scida  ne  qua  depeieat ; 
Now,  //  you  lore  tne.  see  to  it  that  not  a  sinirle  sheet  is  injured.  Cic.  Art.  1,  20.  4  [Here 
the  conditional  clause  has  tlie  torce  of  an  adjuring  particle  *  by  your  love  \  per  amorem. 
tuum!\.—  Hence  interrogative  clauses,  in  which  the  pr--dicatioii  is  rei)resented  as  uncer- 
tain, freqiiently  as^^ume  a  conditional  form.  See  p.  397,  Obs.  10.— If  the  reality  of  the 
predicate  is  made  dependent  on  a  condition  icliich  cannot  be  made  real,  the  conditional 
clau>e  cannot  b(;  expressed  in  any  other  form  but  in  that  of  a  conditioti.  cortaining  no 
relation  except  that  lo  the />r»-(/ica/io».  Such  conditional  jx-riods  are  called  'hypotheii- 
caT.  as  :  Alexandro  si  rHa  data  lonmor  es.-et,  Oceannni  transvolassel  ;  Jf  a  longer  life 
had  Ijeeii  given  to  Alexander,  he  would  have  crossed  the  Ocean.  Atict.  Her.'4,  22.  31  [The 
clause '4  tita... esset"  cmwoi  be  repla-ed  in  the  form  of  any  other  clause,  f?YW,  if  a-f- 
sujtHHl  as  real,  in  which  instance  it  must  he  altogether  omitted.  This  is  the  practical  cri- 
terion of  hypothetical  clause^]. 

C.  TnE  Cf)MPAKATivE  FORM  as  such  does  not  denote  anv  of  the  adverbial  relations  of 
thi' principal  sentence.  It  is  a  peculiar  kind  <-f  cooniiiiaiion  forwhich  lauirua-e  ha» 
estal)lislied  a  specif  c  grammatical  form  ;  but  it  may.  like  Ihe  conditional  form  (into 
which  it  pas-^es  over  Ity  in<-ai)s  of  the  conjnnct'on  "?/i.vi.  which  is  both  conditional  and 
comi»arative),  intpfy  the  different  adve/inal  relations  of  the  principal  sentence  The 
nature  of  this  advei:)ial  relation  is  alwavs  eviih  nt  from  xhasund'tic  ante^cedent  of  the  com- 
parative conjunction  (Ous.  15),  which  fictiuently  is  bh-nded  with  it  into  one  single 
word.  The  comparatives  conjuncMons  (aside  from  the  adjective  forms  quanfus.  qualis 
etc.)  are:  quam,  ut,  and  the  coordinating  conjunctions  afque  and  ac  (sometimes  ef). 
These  refer  (a)  to  the  relation  of  intensity  (with  the  antecedents  tatn  and  plus,  which  is 
often  implied  in  the  form  of  the  comparative  of  descriptive  adjectives,  tarn  beiiifj 


490 


THE   COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


MeTidod  with  the  comparative  conjunction  in  the  form  famquam  ;  (ft)  to  the  relation  of 
WANN'KR  (With  the  anU-cedents  .vjraiid  ifa,  bt-ini;  blendt-d  with  the  comparative  conjunc- 
tion in  ihf  form  nici/f  or  inctiti ;  (c)  to  the  relation  of  timk,  in  wliich  n-lation  the  com- 
parative conjuiicti(»ns  an-  centrally  hiendt-d  with  the  antecedents  (poslqiiain.  nnNquam, 
p/'iu'iq'Him,  siniii'<i(\  duuilittqKt',  the  comparative  conjiiiu-tion  vf  Wuvz  u-ed  without  any 
antecedent',  witli  the  toire  ot  •  H-<  soon  as ' ) .  If  the  comparative  form  is  nt^ed  for  any  otiier 
adverbial  lelaii  n.  the  relation  must  be  generally  expnssed  hy  combining  the  required 
adverbial  «lause  in  its  own  form  with  the  comparative  conjunction,  as  in  the  relation  of 
CAi'SE  :  Mereatonbus  est  aditiis  iini;is  eo  ut  qu:e  hello  ceperiiit  qiiibus  veiidatit  liabeant, 
quant  quo  nllam  rem  ad  se  importari  desiderent ;  They  allow  access  to  merch  mts  more 
in  or.lcr  to  have  persons  to  whom  to  sell  their  h(W)ty  than  btcause  they  like  any- 
thiiii?  to  be  imi)orted  to  their  coutttry,  Cies.  15.  G.  4,  2.—  So  in  reference  to  tlie  relation 
of  fLACK  :  Non  loiii;ius  hostes  aberant  q>nm  quo  teltim  adjid  jwsxtf ;  The  enemy  was 
no  farther /A^///  /o  reach  the  place  by  mis-iles  (liteittUy  :  'than  to  which  place  a  mis-ile 
could  be  tlirown'.  Cjcs.  B.  G.  2,  21.  Even  tlie  relations  of  intenstt)/  and  jiiannn'  am  Ire- 
(\\wni\y  separately  erpre)iseil,n\{\\o\vX^\  these  relations  are  sulUciently  expressed  by  the 
antecedents,  as  ;  Si  plus  edidisset  qnam  quantum  natum  esjiet;  If  he  had  assessed  more 
(corn)  than  had  been  raised.  Cie.  Verr.  2,  3,  29.  Here  the  relation  of  intensity  U  tuice 
expressed,  bv  plu^.  ..quarn,  and  by  quantum,  which  mi<;lit  have  been  omitted,  as  in  tlie 
passa.'e  immediately  I'ollowiuL,' :  (i^iiid  si  minus  dedissel  arillor  quam  poposuisset  Apro- 

The  comparative  form  is  not  tncrely  applied  to  adverbial  relatione,  but,  like  the  con- 
ditional form,  is  a  general  <rr  immitic  il  form  whieh  m  ly  refer  to  any  kind  of  rela'ions, 
and  to  all  kinds  of  clause"  and  piiiases.  Thus  the  eoinparison  «)f  ' qualities''  or  '  num- 
bers'" -A^^nmci*  ii  retaf  ice  form,  as:  'I'li,  .Tuii'ter,  qui  eisi/  m  quibus  luce  nrbs  auspirii.<  a 
KoinuU)  es  eonstitatu-  :  Thou,  O  Jupiter,  wlio  hast  (i.  e.  who-e  worship  ha-i  l>een  insti- 
tuted 'n'  Rimiulus  under  the  same  ausidres  (i.  e.  of  the  same  kind  or  quality)  as  tliis  city 
(i.e.  was  instituted).  Cic.  Cat.  1.  i-i,  :W.— -  Totidem  quot  capita  oriirinis  erant  coloniia 
missis:  So  m my  colonies  havini;  l)een  sent,  «v  tlu-re  were  inother-eities.  Liv.  5,  3i.— 
Thus  the  coini)at':son  by  qna/n  is  <'it>pli(Ml  to  su'>jeet-(lauses.  and  olijectclaiises  of  any 
form  :  Mori  nuiluit  quam  <ie  his  rebus Sullam  doitri ;  11^-  would  die  rather  tlian  have  Sulla 
informed  of  these  iliin-rt»  (literally:  than  "  tiiat  Sulla  should  be  informed  ').  Cic.  Kosc.  A. 
9_  oj;^_  i>i„s  interfiiit  reipuhiiea*,  caslellnm  capi  I.i'.:utnm  quain  bene  deft  ndi  cau.<am  .ir. 
Curii  :  It  was  mote  in  the  mtere-t  of  the  republic  that  a  easlle  of  the  Limiri.iiis  shuiild 
be  captured  than  that  the  trial  of  M\  Curias  bhould  bt  uell  conducted,  tic.  lir.  GO, 
234. 

Hence  ilio  adverbial  clauses  arc  treated  in  fivesecMons:  1)  Locat.  clauses;  2)  Tem- 
roitAL:  3)  Modal  ;  4) Conditional;  5)  Compauative  clauses. 

Oiis.  13.  ATTUint'TR-CLAUSEs  are  tho-:e  whose  Ecoverninir  word  is  a  Nouv.  They  are 
an;ilo;::ous  toall  kinds  of  an  ordinary  tittrihute.  and  may  be  conceived  as  attril)utive  adjec- 
tives, as  attril)Utive  ireiiitives.  jis  |)repositioiial  iittribute-^,  or  as  appositions.  Attribute- 
clauses  assume  1)  the  lorm  of  a  uki.ativk  claise.  if  the  jrovernii!":  notin  is  at  the  same 
time  the  jraminatical  antecedent,  of  one  of  its  members.  a.«i  :  Ea  jmrs  Gceani  quiT  est  ad 
IIi>paniam.  (Aes.  li.  G.  1,1.  Here  the !Uttil)ufe  ciau-^e  is  relative,  because  tluMioiin  ;)arx, 
a  meinlier  of  the  principtil  S"nience.  is  the  aiilec-deni  •)f  its  siihject.  The  claiisi-  is  an- 
alou'ous  to  tin  attributive  iidjeciivt!  (tiie  lli^jxtnir  part  of  tlie  Ocean).  Tn  *  Coni/rn-i.  qui 
sunt  'IVevirOnim  clientes',  ilie  clause  has  tlie  force  of  an  (7;yyy6i>i/io// (.the  Condru?i,  the 
clients  of  ilie  Trevirians). 

2)  If  the  iroverninc:  noun  of  the  clause  is  ;jo/  the  grammatical  antecedent  of  one  of  it.s 
members,  the  clati-e  either  takes  the  same  l<u-m  <is  completing'  clau-es  (Or.s.  1-7).  or  as 
adverbial  clauses  lOiis.  12).  The  farmer  is  tlu'  case  if  tlii'  iroverniiiLr  noun  implies  an 
action  such  as  would  require  to  be  completed  by  a  subject-claii"'»',  or  an  oltject-clause  if 
it  had  the  form  of  a  verb.  a<  Crebri  a<l  C:e-«arem  rumores  titVerebantur  o//</<Z.v  JJelqas  con- 
Jnrdre.  I?.  G.  2,  1.  Jiunu'res.  implyinti  a  verb  of  sayino,  takes  its  attriimte  clause  (  = 
de  conjuratiOiie)  in  the  lorin  of  an  iiitiuitive  clause.  be('!iu<i'  the  same  clause  would  be 
required  if  an  ecjuivalent  i>rb  were  u-ed  in  its  place  {nuntiubVur.  omnls  J!rff/a^  ronju- 
rare).-—  Capiunt  iieces-*ariuin  ro/jNi/i'/zyi  ut  >iuscipiant  ip^i  neqolium  (  —  neijotium  ab  ipsis 
suscipiendi).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1.  .■)4.  Here co/t<i7i'///i  takes iui  Ut-clauso  as  attrit)ute,  because 
a  verb  expressiiifj  the  idea  of  a  'j)lan  '  (as  .v/fi/'/*  r^)  would  take  the -ame  dausi- in  the  ftuin 
of  an  oi)j<'ct-cIau«e. —  JudicAvit  'Ywh^ivoracatidnem  auiruies  ownniniK  judi-iis  opercm 
darent{  =  vacatiOuem  ab  judiiH-i)  non  htibcre  ;  Tuhero  declared  that  the  auL'Ur-  had  i.o 
immunity  f  I om  servinq  as  jmlqea.  Cic.  lirut.  31,  17.  Because  verbs  of  j'xemptinur^Take  a 
completing:  object-clause  \\\\\\  qmnninus  (see  p.  (»02,  f)).  the  noun  racatio,  in  the  mtaninj; 
*  exe//ipfion\  takes  an  attrihtite-chiuse  in  the  same  form.  For  examples  of  aitrihule- 
clauses  111  the  Ibrm  of  an  interioj,'ative  clause,  see  p.  3*.»1,  Ons.  4. 

3)  Clauses  introduced  by  ADVEKr.tAL  conjunctions  maybe  made  the  attributes  of  those 
nouns  (.or  of  their  equivalents;  which  represent  llie  dillereiit  adverbial  relations,  as  /fWi- 


THEORY   OF   SENTENCE- COMBINATION. 


491 


pus,  modus,  causa,  consilium  (purpose).  In  this  instance  the  clause  almost  ah^ ays  has  a 
5et;rn\inative  lorm-adjective  as  syndetic  antecedent,  which,  being  ^""^''«^  as  tUnbtf^ 
t<.  the  .roverniii-'  n..un  shows  the  attributive  nature  of  the  clause  :  as  :  Accept t  ajrium 
temponbm  eis  qvum  jacCrent  pretia  i)riediOrum  ;  He  obtained  the  held  t/*  those  tf^suhen 
the  prices  of  real  estiite  were  down  (at  the  time  oj  low  pnces).  Cic.  Itosc^  C.  12  -  bectl- 
tum  est  illud  tempus  quum  me  ad  I'otnpejum  prolicisci  othcium  nieum  coe-it ;  1  hen  loi- 
lowed  the  time  when  my  duty  compelled  me  to  repair  to  Pompey  (  =  \^"'P"^  PJ/^'^f^'^- 
nis  ollicinsa-).  Cic.  Fam.  11,  27.-  Voluptatis  partis  hocmodo  descrlbunt  w/*  maleyokn- 
tia  sit  voluptas  ex  maloalicrlus;  beiievoleniia  etc. ;  They  divide  pleasure  in  this  way 
(thus)  that  malice  is  (defined  as)  pleasure  derived  from  another  perse ms  misfortune  ;  De- 
nevolcnceetc  (  =  modus  deliniendi  voluptatem  etc.).  Cic.  Tusc.4,l«.  20.-  Enxnt  ejusmodt 
(  z=  ejus  modi)  situs  oppidorum,  vt  ncqiie  pedibus  aditum  haberenr,  neque  navibus  ; 
The  sites  of  the  town  were  of  that  kind  (such)a.s  to  have  neither  an  access  by  land  nor 
by  water  Oes.  B.  G.  3.  12  (  =  hoc  niodo  sita  erant  ut  etc.).-  Mansit  in  \>'dCio  usque  ad 
evm  finem  rf«/«  judices  rejecti  sunt;  lie  abided  by  the  agreement  vp  to  the  time-jmnt 
that  (literally  '  till ')  the  judges  were  rejected.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  «,  16.  The  clause  dum  .  .svnt 
is  an  attribute  of  Hnl^  (end-point  of  time),  the  conjunction  dum  (till)  bein<^  used  to  ex- 
press the  adverbial  relation  designated  by  « /t//M '.  The  words  '  usqne  ad  eumjinem 
mi-'ht  have  been  omitted,  or  be  replaced  by  'usque  eo\  In  either  instance  the  clause 
would  be  adrerhiid;  but  being  made  dependent  on  the  governing  noun  Unern,  the  expo- 
nent of  its  adverbial  relation,  it  has  assumed  the  grammatical  lorm  ot  an  attribute- 
clause. 

The  noun  locus,  as  exponent  of  the  relation  of  '  place',  and  all  nouns  represented  as 
localities,  frequently  lake  attributive  clauses  in  the  form  of  adverbial  relative  clauses 
(introduced  by  one  t»f  the  locative  adverbs).     See  §  GlO. 

Obs.  14.  Any  sentence  expiessing  the  idea  of  a  fact  may  be  treated  in  every  re?pect 
like  an  ontinahj  substantive,  and  t)e  placed  in  every  grammatical  relation  and  lorm  of 
which  a  substantive  is  su-ceptible.  These  sentences,  which  are  called  fact-clauses, 
are  geiier.dlv  introduced  bv  quod  (but  sometimes  by  ut.  s(;e  p.  (i05),  taking  the  syndetic 
ant<'C»-dent  (Obs.  1.5)  id  (sometimes  hoc.  illud,  ea  res,  ilia  res.  ilia  causa),  lo  these  ante- 
cedents of  the  fact-clause  all  the  ditierent  kinds  of  inllettion  are  applied  which  a  sub- 
stantive would  take  if  used  in  place  of  the  fact-clause.  Hence  lacl-dauses  may  stand 
in  till-  relation  l)of  a  puiuect  (in  wh  ch  instance  the  predicates  are  not  conhned  to  the 
regular  impersonal  verbs,  Obs.  4,  l)iit  may  consist  of  az-y  verb)  ;  2)  ot  a  TiiANsiTiVE, 

INTKANSITIVE,  or  I'UEPOSITIONAL  OB.II.CT  ;    3)  of  a  S^B^TA^T1VE-ATTK1BUTE.       1  he  SyndCt- 

ic  antecedent  (id,  hoc.  Ulud)  may  be  left  out  when  the  clause  is  m  the  relation  o!  a  sub- 
ject, a  transitive  object,  or  of  an  attribute.  Fact-clause-  are  mostly  rendered  by  the 
fact  that  ',  or  by  a  simple  That-clause. 

1.  Subject  kact-clauses  :  Curam  acuWatquod  adversus  Latinos bellandum  erat :  Tfie 
fact  that  a  war  must  be  waged  against  the  Latins,  made  iheir  anxiety  intense.  Liv\  S,  6. 
—  Suspectum  Alexandrum  fecit  quod  Pelusii  validum  priesidium  relictum  erar ;  1  he  fa  at 
(it)  made  Alexander  suspected  that  a  strong  garrison  had  been  left  at  Peltisium.  Liv.  45, 
11.—  (^//rt^i  totaSicilia.  V//0*/  oinnes  Siculi . .  .Komie  sunt,  uihilne  idvatefM?  Isitot  yio 
immtia  nee.  thai  thewholeof  Sicilv,  that  all  the  Sicilians. .  .are  at  Rome?  Cic.  \  err. 
1,  7._  Xon  ea  res  me  deterruit  quod  tu  ad  me  nullas  litteras  miscras  ;  Thejact  that  you 
had  sent  no  letter  to  me  di<l  not  deter  me.  Cic.  Fam.  G,  22,  1.-  Datum  hoc  iiostro  generi 
tst  ut  Itiendis  jiericulis  ptiblicis  piacula  simus  ;  It  is  the  fate  of  (literally  :  it  is  given  to) 
our  race  to  be.  (that  we  are)  the  sin-oU'erings  for  expiating  public  dangers.  Liv.  10,  28. 

2.  Fact-clausfs  as  tiiansitive  objects  :  Miseriie  nostne /?76?mc*^^worf  a  VibOne  dis- 
Attributt 


cessimiis  ;  Attribute  to  our  ui.happv  condition  the  fact  that  we  left  Vibo  (or  '  our  leay 
ill"  Vibo").  Cic.  Att.  3.  4.— Nisi  hoc  iiidiL^num  putas  quo'l  vestltum  sedeie  in  judicK 
viiles  quern  tu  e  patrimonioexpulisti ;  Unless  you  think  i/an  indignity  thatxhn  man  whon 
you  have  driven  Irom  his  propertv,  is  sitting  (still)  with  clothes  in  the  Court.  Cic.  Rose. 
A.  50  [Here  the  clause  'quod. .  .rides'  is  the  transitive  object  of  putas,  and  at  the  same 


icio 
m 


*  The  .'raminaiians  genctally  consider  Ut-claiises  of  this  kind  as  governed  by  '  hoc  / 
but  the  demonstrative  adjective  «:overnstlie  Ut-clause  as  little  as  it  governs  the  Quum- 
clause  and  the  Du)nclau.<e  in  the  other  passages  quoted.  The  clauses  evidently  depend 
a-  aitribute<on  the  nouns  which  aie  the  exponents  of  those  adverbial  relatiims  that 
are  expressed  by  this  same  kind  of  clause-*.  With  the  form  'hoc  7/wdo\  the  Ut-clau-e 
is  an  attribute-clause  ;  but  if  its  equivalent  ita  is  used  in  its  stead,  the  clause  is  an  ad- 
verbial modal  clause,  in  the  same  way  as  forti  in  'foHi  77iodo  jrugnare'  is  an  attribute, 
but  in  the  form  '  for  tiler  pugnare '  becomes  an  adverb. 


I 


492 


THE   COMBINATION   OF   SENTENCES. 


THEORY   OF  SENTENCE-COMBINATION. 


493 


latter  wcro  an  ordinary  isubstantivo :  the  syndetic  antecedi^nt  iUa,  with  w\[\c\\  anCiqva 
ai^rees,  havini;  assiuim-d  ihc  form  of  u  neutiT  plural].—  si  tihj  f«)i  tiliui  non  deiiit  >it  patre 
ccrto  nat^corCTo,  at  natura  ei'ite  dedit  ut  hmnanililtis  non  i):iniiii  liai»C'r<'>  ;  If  late  did  not 
grdnt  yon  (the  chance)  to  he  born  of  a  Iciritiinato  latluT,  nature  uL  least  has  granted  you 
(thef^iit)  o/  iiupirient  education.  Cic.  l{o^c.  A.  15,  46. 

3.  Fact-clausks  as  ablative  objects:  Cum  maj^no  nssensn  audit  us  est,  non  niagis  ,o 
quod  inultitndinein  no.xfl  levilliaf,  (iiiam  qwnl  cn\],r,un  in  aiiclorcs  vi-ricrat;  lie  was  lirani 
with  f,'reat  favor,  as  inucii  (no  inoreiy'/w/t  fhe/dr'f  [cunsc)  f/i<if  lie  relieved  the  people  from 
a  «grievance,  as  (from  the  lact) ''//«/  li«*  had  hrouijflit  home  the  fault  to  its  authors.  Li  v.  4."), 
10.  [Krom  this  form  of  the  Fact-clause  ico  (/nod),  the  orii^in  of  the  cans(U  Ouod-claus«'s 
must  be  derived,  which  is  made  evident  by  the  jibove-mentioned  passao^e.]— lloc  fo(=/^/</ 
i^/)t^pi  ciril)al  lit  Pythiam  a  Ptiilippo  eorrui)tam  diceret  :  This  referred  to  the  fact  that 
Pylhia,  accurdiui;  to  his  opinion,  was  bribed  by  Piiilip.  Cic.  Div.  2,57,  11«. 

4.  Fact-claitses  as  puErosiTioNAL  ob-jects:  Hoc  er  to  intelliiri  potest  qnod  voi?  do 
eil  re  Jud!(  a'e  non  debetis  ;  This  may  be  nndt'rstood. />"r>//i  the  fact  tliat  yon  t^hould  not 
take  coj;ni/.ancc  in  this  matter.  Cic.  Cicc.  :^5,  102.  —  Videt  sibi  ^/^  fo  7//0(/consensi-rit  cau- 
eain  esse  dicendam  :  He  sees  tinit  he  will  be  j)laced  under  trial  for  the  fact  that  he  con- 
6j)ireil  {for  coji.<jiui/if/.  vvliich  could  not  be  exprc.<sod  by  ^  de  consent ierido',  because;  the 
gerundiul  would  not  refer  to  a  /)(tf)t  fact). —  Avitus  pro  eo  qno<l  fe  suorum  municipuui 
comnuxlis  na'um  esse  arbitrabfitur.  voluntati  Larinatium  dees.^^e  nohiit  :  Avitus,  in  ac- 
cordance u'lth  the  fact  that  lie  tlioiu'ht  himself  to  be  born  for  the  interests  of  his  towns- 
nuMi,  did  not  wish  to  o|)pose  the  wishes  of  the  Larinatians.  Cic.  ("In.  \'^,  4;i  —  (Jratiam 
qui  refert  habet,  et  qui  habet.  in  eo  ip^o  (/nod  habet,  refert  ;  Who  returns  thanks  feels 
thanUlul  (has  thanks),  and  who  feels  thankful  returns  thanks  in  the  very  fact  that  hefeeU 
thankful.  Cic.  Plane.  ;2S,  (iS*. 

5.  Attuibutive  Fact-clacsks  :  Etiam  hanc  7fiole<fiam  n-^i^^mo  quod  mihi  non  solum 
pro  Planciodicendum  est.  Red  etiam  |)ro  me;  I  assume  also  tlie  burden  of  beini;  obliged 
to  speak  not  only  for  Plancins,  ))nt  for  myself.  Cic.  Plane.  1.  :^  [In  altribntive  fact-clauses, 
the  antecedent  agrees  in  trender,  number,  and  case  witli  the  j^overnini;  noun  ot  the  lact- 
clause.  which,  as  an  attrilnite,  irenerally  nn-ans  'consistiui;  in  the  fact  that'].—  Num 
«'tiam  recentiuin  inji/riaram  qaod  \tx'r  \H'r  jjrovincium  ]H'r  vi:n  temj)tassent,  memoriam 
de])onere  posse?  Could  he  also  lori^et  their  recent  wron>js  (con>istinLr  in  the  fact)  that 
Ihey  had  violently  attempted  the  march  throui;h  the  province  *  CuiS.  li.  G.  1,  11. 

Obs.  1."».  Synoetic  avtecedknts  of  a  clause  aretho>e  form-adjectives  or  form-adv<-rb3 
of  the  detlniie  form,  which  mark  t  he  Lrrammatical  function  of  «he  clause  as  member  of  a 
phrase  of  the  principal  sentence.  Tli«'se  demonstrative  form-words  repre<eid.  a<  it  w<-re, 
their  clauses  in  the  principal  sentence,  and  alwavs  have  the  same  frrammatical  relation 
(as  subject,  object,  attribute)  to  the  members  of  the  piincipal  sentence,  as  the  clause  of 
which  they  are  the  antecedents.  Hence  the  relation  of  the  clause  may  be  always  deter- 
mined by  th  it  of  the  syndetic^  antecedent.  Since!  the  svndi-tic  antecedi-nts  are  idi-ntical 
with  their  clause*,  they  hare  not  to  them  the  relation  of  a  iroveridni;  woid  to  its  depend- 
ent word  in  a  phra«^e,  and  must  be  disiiny'uished  Irom  the  grammatical  anfeced'-nt  of  a 
relative  clause,  which  irenerallv  is  at  th«  same  time  its  jjoverninij  noun.  Tiius  in 
''eo  die  qi/o  adera" ",  the  noun  *  die  '  is  the  okammatical  antec»*dent.  and  the  jroverning 
noun  ol  the  attributive  clause  'quo  aderas  '  ;  but  eo  is  its  syndetic  antecedent,  which  by 
its  form  as  a.ttribute  of  dies  represents  the  clause  as  attributive**. 

1.  Si:b.tect  a!Hl  completing;  OiUECT-ci.AtTSEs  take  the  neuter  absolute  demonptratives 
(id,  hoc,  ill "d)  as  syndetic  antecedents:  Non  id  spectandum  est  quid  dlcat ;  we  mii-t 
nor  rei^ard  wliat  he  says.  Cic.  ()(}".  :j.  :5:i  (,in  inlerroiralive  subject-clause,  different  from  the 
relative  ■  ill.,  .quod  dlclt').  —Hoc  tibi  nuimjuam  criinino-'um  lore  |)utasti,r(/*^/([/77//to/6»co 
tifji  cedificari  nwein?  Did  you  never  think  (that)  it  would  be  made  a  charge  against  you 
that  at  a  most  frequentnl  {dace  a  ship  n-a-<  f>uilt  for  you  ?  VU'.  Veir.  'i.  ;">,  18.—  An  hoc 
dubitfibit  quisquam  (fuin.  is  venfilem  in  Sicilia  jurisiliciirinem  habiicrii  iiiii  etc.  ?  Will  any- 
one doubt  that  he  had  a  vena!  jtnisdiction  in  Sicily  who  etc.?  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  48.-- In 
place  of  the  neuter  absolute  a  noun  of  ireneral  import  (res.  ratio  etc.)  may  be  used,  in 
which  instance  the  demonstrative  airrees  with  it  in  gender,  case,  and  number,  as  :  Non 
ea  res  me  detcrruit  quod  (inst.  of  '  Non  iil  me  deterruit  quod  ').  Cic.  Kam.  fi.  2-2,  1.  Some- 
times the  absolute  neuter  demonstratives  are  used  in  tlu;  plural:  His  subsidiis  m  i«um 

♦The  oblique  Quod-clauses  (p.  388.  On».  1,  b)  must  be  considered  as»  oriL'inal  Fact- 
clause-i.  whicli  is  evident  from  tiie  following  jias-age  :  Sunt  qui  in  eo  quoque  aiu^icinm 
ejus  reprehtndant  quod,  quantum  coinmodum  fuerit  frumenti,  detraxerit.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 
1,4. 

**  The  syndetic  antecedents  of  relative  clauses  are  generally  called  ''correlafireft\  but 
their  nature  is  in  no  respect  different  from  that  of  the  other  pyndetic  antecedents,  and 
there  is  no  reason  why  they  should  be  designated  by  a  separate  name. 


flssecQlu»?/^  ex  alienissimis  gociif»  amicissimos. ..redderem  ;  By  these  resources  I  suc- 
ci'cded  in  making  our  most  reluctant  allies  our  most  attached  friends  (liierally:  I  ob- 
tained these  things  that  I  niacle  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  15,  4.  14. —  Not  rarely  bojh  subject  and 
object-clauses  take  the  adverbial  antecedents  nic  and  ita  with  the  force  of  hoc  and  itlud, 
which  is  a  grammatical  anomaly,  but  sanctioned  by  usage,  as  :  Sic  a  majoribus  puis  ac- 
ceperant,  fanta  jwiiuli  Rornani  in  Shulos  ^sse  beneficia  at  etc.;  They  had  received  tlds  tra- 
dition Irom  their  ancestors  that  the  benffilswluch  the  Koman  people  had  conferred  on  the 
Sicilians  iceie  so  great  that  etc.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2.  ."i. —  Sic  ego  existimo,  in  s^mwio  itnjM-ra- 
tore  quatuor  reses}:eojx)7t?re  ;  I  hold  that  a  great  captain  must  hare  four  qualities.  Cic.  Leg. 
M.  10,28.  So  with  interrogative  clauses:  A  V(d)is  i^a  arhitror  spectari  oportere,  ^«/«///i 
ha'C  enrum  jiidicio,  qui  stiidiGsi  sunt  harum  rerum.  cfstimentur  ;  I  believe  that  you  must 
take  thaf  //rie-e  into  consideration  at  which  these  things  are  valued  by  experts.  Cic.  Verr. 
2,  4,  7  (literally  'at  what  price  these  things  are  valued  by  those,  who  apply  themselves 
to  those  thinjr-). —  (Jenerally,  the  subject-clauses  and  the  completing  object-clauses  are 
used  without  any  syndetic  antecedents. 

2.  Advei{biai-  CLAi'SES  OF  PLACE  take  the  demonstrative  (definite)  forms  of  the  four 
cases  of  ]f>cative  form-adverbs  as  syndetic  antecedents  (ibi,  inde,  to,  ed  etc.).  See  p.  210, 
No.  2,  and  p.  575. 

3.  Apvekbiat.  clauses  op  time  if  introduced  by  qvnm  take  the  antecedent  tvm,  as  : 
Tnm  qunm  hello  sociOrum  tola  Italia  arderet.  C.  Norlmnus  in  sumnio  otio  f uit ;  ^yhen 
(literally  Tlien  whf7t\  all  Italy  was  in  flames  during  the  social  war,  Norbanus  lived  in  the 
deepest  i)eace.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  2,  5.  The  combination  turn.  ..quvm  someiimes  involves  a 
comparative  relation  (  =  eodein  tevqx)re  quo)  as  :  Quibus  in  i)rovin(iis  omnia  fana  dej)o- 
pulaius  est  turn  quutti  in  Cn.  Dolabellam  seeing  snum  renovflvit  qurestorium  :  In  these 
provinces  he  despoiled  all  temples  at  the  same  time  when  he  repeate'd  aL'ainst  Dolabella 
that  crime  which  he  had  committed  as  quiestor.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  4,  12.  If  quum  refers  to  the 
time  oi  the  speaker,  it  takes  the  antecedent  nunc  in  place  of  turn  {nunc . . .qinnn  =  now 
that),  as  :  Nunc  vero  qautn  sit  nnus  Cn.  Pompejus  qui  etijim  antiqiiitiliis  rnemoriara  vir- 
IQte  snperarit,  qua?  res  est  etc.;  But  nmv  that  then;  is  only  the  one  Pompey  who  has 
surpassed  by  his  great  qualities  even  the  deeds  of  antiquity  etc.  Cic.  L«'g.  M.  10.  27. — 
J}um  and  quoad  (in  the  meaninL'  ////)  take  the  antecedent  usque  or  vsque  eo,  as  :  Vf^qve  eo 
se  tenuit  quoad  a  Poinpejo  ad  enm  leuHti  vei  erniit;  He  held  hiniselt  (np  to  the  time)  till 
ambassadt  rs  came  to  him  from  Poinpey.  Cic.  Dej.  4,  11.  Dujn  in  the  nuaning  'as  long 
as'  takes  the  antecedent  ta?ndiu.  and  sometimes  usque,  as  :  Ne  tamdiu  quidem  domi- 
nus  erif  duni  depatrismorieqiia^rjltur  ?  Can  he  not  be  the  owner  (of  hi ^  house)  even  so  long 
as  the  investigation  on  his  father's  death  is  lasting  'i  Cic.  Bosc.  A.  28.  78. —  Usque  dam 
per  meliciierit:  .\sloniras  I  shall  allow.  Cic.  Veir.  2,  1.  5.— Those  temporal  conjunc- 
tions which  are  properly  comparative,  take  their  antecedents  according  to  the  rules  of 
comparative  clauses,  as  tamdiu ..  quamdiu  (see  '  comparative  clauses').  According  to 
these  rnh'^ii  po-^tquam.  anteqnam.  priasquam,  siimdatque  etc.  should  not  take  any  antece- 
dents because  in  'postquam''  ]}ost  itself  is  the  antecedent  of  quam  (  =  later  than).  But 
this  original  meaniuL''  o\ postqiiatn  was  not  felt,  and  houco po.-tquam  not  rarely  takes  the 
anteceeient  turn,  which  strictly  is  an  nngran  niaiicaland  illogical  con.bination.  Postqnam, 
however,  'ii\\\ti\<.  prec^ des  this  antecedent  in  the  form  of  a  protasis,  so  that  turn,  when- 
ever it  i<  used,  introduces  the  apodosis.  as  :  PostqiKim  non  resisti  videt,  et  hand  dubiara 
lassitudinem  esse,  turn  collectis  omnibus  subsidiis  IciriOnes  concitilvit ;  After  (when)  he 
saw  that  no  resistance  was  made,  aid  that  their  state  of  indi'lence  was  unquestional)le, 
(the'n)  he  roused  the  leiiions  after  collecting  all  the  auxiliary  troops.  Liv.  10,  29.  Com- 
pare :  Liv.  25.  10;  2'"..  5  ;  1,  54  ;  22.  48;  2S,  48.  The  other  tehiporal  conjunctions  of  the 
comparative  form  take  no  other  antecedents  but  those  contained  in  themselves. 

4.  For  the  antecedent  of  modal  clauses  see  p.  4-3.5.  Obs.  2. —  If  modal  clauses  of  man- 
ner or  intensity  are  in  the  relation  of  an  attkibitte,  their  antecedents,  as  those  of  all 
the  attributive  clauses,  take  thi-  form  of  an  adjec'ive  (the  demonstratives  is,  hie.  ille.  talis, 
beimr  used  in  clauses  of  manner,  and  the  quantitative  tantus  in  clauses  of  intensity)  ; 
as  :  /(7a  definitio  jiidicirjrum  aquOium  rotineatur  ?// et  sine  invidijl  ciili)a  plectatnr,  et 
sin<«  culpa  invidia  ponStur  ;  Let  that  character  of  equity-trials  be  retained,  that  guilt  be 
punished  without  liate.  and  hate  be  slopped  without  guilt.  Cic.  Clu.  2.  5. —  //oc  jure  s;int 
socii.  vt  eis  ne  dei)lorare  (I'lidem  de  siiis  incommodis  liceat.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  2.  27.—  Tahin 
accei)erant  injnriam  quain  (i.  e.  ut  earn  ;  qualem  would  make  the  clause  comparative) 
nulin  leire  satis  (iilmic  persequi  i)ossent.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1.  :^2.  Instead  of  talis  frequently 
tlie  form  of  a  qualitative  genitive  with  modus  and  thedeuionstrative  i.9  iejusinodi)'\^  used, 
where  ejus  is  the  syndetic  antecedent  of  the  clause  and  ' modi^  \\*  governiiiL''  noun  : 
Statuisti  exemplnm  ejusmodi  quod  (  =  ut  id)  acerbum  omnibus  atque  intolerandum 
videretiir.  C\c.  Aerr.  2,  2,  45.  This  form  of  the  qualitative  genitive  is  frequently  used 
predicatively,  like  ordinary  predicate-irenitives.  where  the  Ut-clause  logically  has  the 
force  of  a  predicate-genitive,  but  grammatically  is  the  attribute  of  "modi  \  ejus  being  its 


1 


494 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  LELATIYES. 


495 


they  form  the  jjrota^i*»  (sec  'Conditional  clauses').     But,  if  merely  .,.......,  ...^  ...v  , 

cation,  tlicv  somctinics  taU<'  the;  antecedent  ifa,  and  if  referrin;^'  to  fi/tie,  the  antecedent 
titrn.  as:  lioe  veiienienter  te  roiro,  sed  ifd  .vi,  quod  e;,'o  iressi,  non  contemnendmn  vid<;- 
bitur;  This  I  ask  earnestly  of  y<>n,  Ij'/f  on  tin  amdlthm  that  (if.  =  provided  that)  yon  do 
not  con.^ider  my  aciy  as  indifterent.  Cic.  Fani.  14,  4,  \\.—  Id  ei,'o  .ve  fallo,  tuia  te  qua'so, 
Atnphitniniii  ut,  seinper  iriltus  sies  ;  Jf  I  deceive,  tluii  I  pray  thee  to  l)e  always  ani,'ry 
with  Amphitruo.  Plant.  Aiupli.3,  2,  52.—  Ihec  fi  ai:es  et  sentie»,  turn  eris  nia;,Mius  con- 
sul. Cic.  Fani.  10.  »'•.—  .S'i/^  (junra  potnero.  non  ven'ero.  tutu  erit  iniinlens.  Ih.  Att.  9,  2a, 
2.—  Tamrxdi  te  seribain  plura  .^i  erit  belluin.  lb.  7,  17.  4.—  Tmn  neviuiequain  Capitoliuni 
fervaverim  n  civein  nienni  in  gervitfltein  duel  videain.  Liv.  f»,  14.  C'onip.  Cic.  Att.  7, 
""   '      Div.  1.44.     Rose.  Am.  7;  il).  4!».---  If  conditional  clauses  are  at  tlie  same  time 


The  syndetic  an  tec 
cere,  dwere  < 
9.10.11).     1 


I'tc.)  wliich  lorm  ilie  ^'raniniiitical  predicate  of  tiie  principal  sentence  (Obs 
\f.  lu.  ii;.     i'liey  both  denote  the  i^'ramniatical  function  of  the  chiuse  as  that  of  the  pre 
dicafe,  and  indicate  the  general  kind  of  ilie  action  desii/uated  by  the  clause.  l>y  antici- 
])atin!.r  the  pjcneral  verbal  idea  of  the  clause,  in  the  same  way  as  the  adjective  and  adver- 
bial antecedents  indicate  tlie  <:eneral  idea  of  the  adverbial  rehition  of  their  clauses. 


Hence  tlie  U-rm  for/n-rer/j.s-  may  l)e  applied  to  these  verl>s  in  the 
other  antecedents  are  liinncd J'urm-ai(jcctutfi,  ixiid  fonn-udit  ib.< . 


:>unie  mauner  as  Ihe 


ClIAriKR    SECOND. 

PtKLATlVE     CLAUSES. 

I.    CLASSIFICATION   OF   TIIE   RELATIVES,  AXD  RELATIVE 

CLAUSES. 
^tiil.  Relative  CLAUSES  are  those  wliicli  are  introduced  by  a  rela- 
tive adjective  or  adverb  (§  Gl'3),the  tbrmer  belon<^ini;  to  tlie  attuibutive 
(/?.  3,  Ors.  13).  and  tlu;  latter  to  the  adverbial  clauses  (7^  3,  Obs.  12)*. 

*  Relative  clauses  have  a  donl)Ie  nature,  because  every  relative  adjectiv»*  or  adverV)  in- 
volves two  elements:  1)  that  of  a  connkc  tivk.  namely  the  relative  (ori;:inally  *  interrotra- 
tive  ')  root  ni  ;  and  2>  that  of  a  rorm-adj«'ctive.  or  form-adverb.  Jn  determii  in*;  tiie  irram- 
matical  relation  of  relaii\e  clauses,  the  •connective''  element  must  be  di>re<rarded.  and 
the  question  whetherrelative  clauses  are  to  be  classed  as  att rihntive  or  as  adverbial  clauses 
must  be  decided  by  the  adjective  or  adverbial  element,  and  not  by  the  connective  element 
of  the  rel.itive  word.  Ilenceclauses  introduced  by  relative  «/^//Vr/j/vx  (as  far  as  tliey  belbuij 
to  the  rtgnlar  lelative  clau-^es  ;  seeOiis.  2»  must  be  classed  as  atlrit/xfire  d.iu-es.  since 
they,  ^grammatically,  are  diri'ctly  dependent  on  a  noun  expressed  or  understood,  which 
appears  as  a  grammatical  antecedent.  This  is  even  then  the  case  if  the  connective  element 
of  the  relative  performs  the  function  of  an  adverbial  atn junction  (Obs.  2).  On  the  otlier 
hand,  relative  clauses  introduced  by  adcerbs  (except  in  the  case  mentioned  Oes.  1),  must 


Every  attributive  relative  clause  is  dependent  on  a  substantive  (noun, 
or  pronoun)  of  the  jirincipal  sentence  as  its  grammatical  antecedent,  by 
which  it  is  governed  like  an  ordinary  attribute.  The  adverbial  relative 
clauses  are  dependent  on  the  tredicate  or  on  a  non-finite  verb  of  the 
principal  sentence,  chiefly  denoting  the  adverbial  relation  of  place,  and 

exceptionally  the  relations  of  time,  and  manner  (§  616). 

Obs.  1.  If  relative  clauses,  introduced  by  relative  adverbs,  are  dependent  on  a  noun, 
the  introducini;  adverb  always  has  the  force  of  a  relative  adjective  after  a  prepositioti. 
Such  relative  clauses,  beinf;  {xoverned  by  a  novn,  are  considered  as  attribvtire.  and  not 
as  adverbial,  the  t^mne  as  attributive  clausei*  introduced  by  temporal  or  modal  conjunc- 
tions (Hetn.  3,  Obs.  1.3),  as  :  Romulum  Jiemumque  cupldo  cepii  in  eis  locis  ubi  (  =  in 
quibus)  expositi  erant,  urbis  condeuda\  Liv.  1,  6.    See  'Local  clauses  *. 

Obs.  2.  Clauses  introduced  by  a  relative  adjective  which  has  the  force  of  an  adverbial 
conjunction  combined  ivith  a  demonstrative  adjective  (as  qui  =  vt  if),  are  graintnatically 
attributive  clauses,  although  they  are  lo<jically  adverbial,  as  :  Verres  Messanam  »\h'\  nr- 
btin  deleirerat  qunm  (  =  vteam)  haberet  adjutrlcem  sceleruni ;  Verres  had  chosen  thecity 
of  }fe.<sana  for  the  purpose  of  having  it  as  assistant  in  his  crimes.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  G2. 
i'he  Latin  conception  of  the  relative  a<ljeciives  and  adverbs  was  different  from  ours,  in 
as  much  as  they  felt,  more  distinctly  than  we  do,  the  two  elements  contained  in  tlie  rela- 
tiv»'  (namely  tlie  c»)nneciive,  represented  by  the  root  qu,  and  the  determinative,  rei)re- 
sented  by  is),  as  two  diflerent  relations.  From  this  tact  several  apparent  anomalies 
must  be  explained  :  1)  tlie  ability  of  the  languaire  to  assign  to  the  connective  element 
the  force  ot  ditlerent  conjunctions  ;  2)  in  that  construction  which  is  called  'involution 
of  the  relative  ',  in  which  the  connective  and  the  determinative  element  refer  to  differ- 
ent diiuses  (-ee  Ji.  13) ;  3)  in  the  capacity  of  the  language  to  use  relatives  in  certain  in- 
stances  without  substantive  antecedents  (7^  S).   and  even  ■without  anij  antecedents 

for  t  he  following  reasons  be  classed  as  adverbial  clauses.  Relative  clauses  ini  roduced  by  ad- 
verbs express  the  advtrfAal  idta  of  j)lace  (§54(j  foil.)  (exceptionally  also  that  of  time  and 
manner),  which  is  attached  to  a  verb  (generally  the  predicate)  of  the  principal  sentence. 
Thi-i  m;ikes  the  clau>e  an  adverbial  ofjject  of  that  verb,  in  the  same  manner  as  an 
ordinan/  adverb  of  place,  lime,  etc.,  according  to  the  definition  of  adverbs  «riven  p. 
215,  A'.  1.  Since  itie  grammatical  class  of  the;  clause  is  determined  by  its  relation  to  its 
governing  word  in  the  principal  sentence,  it  follows  that  clauses  introduced  by  relative 
adverbs  mu^t  be  considered  as  adverbial  (object-)clauses  (7^.  2).  It  is  true  that  in  their 
syndetic  a/it<ct dents  {i/,i—ubi)  a  noun  of  general  import  (denoting  *  place')  is  always  in- 
v<»lved  as  tiie  exponent  of  the  adverbial  idea  represented  by  the  clause,  and  hence  it 
might  seem  that  such  relative  clauses  should  be  considered  as  *■  attiifrutes'  of  that  noun, 
as:  Ibi  constitit  ulti  signa  asj)exit,  =  eo  loco  in  qvo  signa  aspcxit.  But  such  nouns,  as 
the  expot  cuts  of  the  adverbial  idea,  and  conceived  as  being  in  sin  adverbial  ca^e  (accor- 
ding to  the  explanation  p.  215,  Ii.  1)  are  involved  in  «•^/-y  ordinary  adverb.  If  we  con- 
sider this  kind  of  clauses  as  attrif/utes  of  the  f)oun  representin<r  its  adverbial  idea,  then 
everv  ordinary  adverb  must  be  likewi>e  considered  as  an  «///^6//^«  of  this  noun.  This 
would  neither  be  in  accordance  with  the  phrase-theory  followed  in  this  grammar,  nor  in 
accordance  with  the  dilVerent  logical  and  grammaticrd  character  of  attributive  and  ad- 
verbial adjuncts.—  Fnun  these  arguments  itwiil  appear  thftt  the  relative advertjs  ])t'Tf(>rm 
the  same  i^ranimatical  function  in  reg.iid  to  the  relation  of  the  clause,  as  the  adverbial 
conjunctions  (quuvi.  vt.  dum  etc.).  and,  indeed,  some  grammarians  have  classed  every 
relJitive  adverb  among  the  conjunctions.  From  a  merely  l(»gical  standpoint  these  gram- 
marians ai(^  perlectly  right,  the  distinction  between  both  classes  of  words  bcinga  merely 
formal  or  grammatical  one  [quunt  havini:  the  force  of  eo  te/njyore  quo,  and  id  ot  eo  modo 
quo).  But  there  is  this  grammatical  diflerence  between  both  classes t*f  connectives,  that 
the  relative  adverbs  are  always  inembers  of  their  own  clause,  being  the  adverbial  objects 
of  the  governing  verb  in  the' c/aw^^  (while  the  M'/to/^  clause  is  the  adverbial  object  of  a 
verb  in  the  principal  sentence).  This  is  not  the  case  with  the  adverbial  conjunctions 
quuni.  dnni  etc..  '  which  are  vurdy  connectives,  containing  no  reco<:nizable  determina- 
tive element,  nor  forminir  an  object  in  the  clause  which  they  introduce.  Oi-iginally  they 
may  iiave  been  relative  (or  rather  inierroi:ative)  adverbs,  and  some  of  them  (as  w6i, 
quando,  vt)  are  actually  used  both  as  adverbs,  and  as  conjunctions.  But  in  the  literary 
period  of  the  language,  the  character  of  these  connectives  as  adverbs  \\a»  no  longer/c/^, 
and  a  distinL:ui>liing  line  was  drawn  between  them  in  the  conception  of  those  that  used 
the  language.  Hence  adverbial  conjunctions  cannot,  as  the  relative  adverbs,  be  used  as 
interrvgatire  adverbs,  unless  they  have  actually  preserved  tlie  double  nature  of  conjunc- 
tions and  adverbs  (as  quando.  ubi,  ut). 


49G 


RELATrV^E   CLAUSES. 


(R.  S,  Obs.  7),  in  wliich  instance  the  relative  pcntencos  lo^e  the  nature  of  claupes,  passing 
over  into  that  ot  iiKlcpeiident  sentences.— Advcrhial  clau-cs  of  place  air  sonu-timi-s 
nitioduc-ed  by  r.laiive  adverl>s  which  tiave  the  lorcc  of  an  adnrbial  modal  conjunctinn 
mended  with  a  local ive  deinonsitrative  adverh.  Such  clans.'s.  being  always  diMx-micnt  on 
r*M/«,j,  must  be  <7/w/////f//iw//// considered  as  attiihutivelncalelanscs  (like  tli<»(.'  nitiitionrd 
in  Ob?*.  IK  but  kujicalhj  as  advi-rhial  modal  clauses,  as:  Hex  'J'heini>tocli  Lamih^uonii 
donarar  mxle  {  =  vt  Ir.de)  vmiiin  sunieret;  The  king  liad  pn-senled  'riieini>toclfs  wiih 
the  city  of  Lampsac'is  in  ordtr  to  take  his  www  from  l/nre.  Nep.  Them.  10.— Unum  itt-r 
trat  per  Seqiiano!?,  cn-iistiuii  et  difficile,  vix  qua  singuli  cirri  ducerentur;  Tiie  one 
road  lay  thronirh  the  territory  of  the  Sequani.  narrow  and  inii)racticable  fo  that  oidy 
one  vehicle  could  pass  it  at  a  time.  Cies.  B.  G.  !.  G  [The  locative  adverb  qua,  with  its  de- 
terniinanve  element  (^(7)  refers  to  the  antecedent  ittr ;  but  its  conueclive  element  refers 
to  the  predicate  •a)i(jUi<lum  trat\  describing  its  modality]. 

Obs.  :i  Coniparativeclausesformasubdivisionof  the  relative  clauses  and  beion"-  ac- 
cordiiig  to  the  relative  by  which  they  are  introduced,  eiiher  to  the  attributive,  or  to  the 
adverhial  rciative  dances.  Since  they  have  many  i)eculiarities  which  are  not  found  in 
the  ordinary  relative  clauses,  they  are  treated  in  a  particular  chapter,  bein.r  eon^dered 
here  only  so  tar  as  they  are  eubject  to  the  same  general  rules  pertainiiK'  to  all  relative 
clauses.  •"' 

Rem.  4.  Kolativo  adjectives  beloncr  to  any  of  the  fivecla.sses  of  form-ad- 
jectives  (P.  I.,  Ji  241  ;  i^  OGD),  and  relative  adverbs  to  the  first  four  classes. 
Ihey  are:  1)  Dkteuminative  class:  qui;  2)  Numkhal  class:  qnot ; 
tj)  QrANTiTATiVE  class  :  <piantu.%  and  its  diminutive  quuuiulus  (alvvavs 
implying  a  small  amount);  4)  Qualitative  class:  qualis ;  5)  Possess- 
ive c-lass  :  ciijus,  a,  wn.  These  relatives  are  either  doubled.or  compounded 
with  cunque.io  introduce  the  '  indetinite'  relative  clauses  (seeOlJS.  7  foil.), 
corresponding  to  the  English  compounds  with  '  ever ',  as  qiti,sqifi,s ;  (who- 
soever), quidqmd  (whatsoever),  quotquot,  qvai.iiiHjvahtvs,  qvaU.squaliS 
(postclassical) ;  quicanqiie,  quoteunque,  q>ianfu!^cunquc\  qudliscunqut',  (an 
indetinite  possessive  being  not  formed  from  cuja.s).  To  the  tirst  four  of 
these  classes  correspond  relative  adverbs,  namely  1)  in  the  determina- 
tive class:  the  locative  form-adverbs  nbi,  v/ide,' quo,  nu(\  qxa  (with  the 
compounds  quorsutn  and  qmtfe/ius,  vhtcuiiqne,  iihiubi  :ind  the  similarly 
lormed  compounds  of  the  other  locatives),  and  the  compounds  qwnnodo 
and  q>temiuhn(>du),),vi\\\\  the  indf finite  relatives  qHommlocunquexmiX  quo- 
quumodo  ;  2)  for  the  nimekal  class  qi/oft\.i  and  qftotusciinqur  ;  S)  for  the 
quantitative  class  the  neuter  adverbial  forms  quantum,  with  the  com- 
pound  quaniopere;  4)  for  the  qualitative  class  the  rare  qualiter  (not  oc- 
curring in  classical  prose). 

To  these  belong  as  syndetic  antecedents  (correlatives)  the  different 
loim-adjcctivesatidtorm-adverbs  of  the  definite  form,  namely  ])  the  de- 
monstkativeb/5,  hie,  iilc,  istc,  and  i(h'w,  and  the  locative  adverbs  of  the  deti- 
iiite  lorm  (p.  210,  No.  2; ;  2)  the  numekals  M,  totnlnn,  and  the  adverb 
Mies;  8)  the  quantitatives  tintus,  tmtusdem  with  the  tulverbs  hiniunu 
tantu7ndem,  ami  ta,itope?r;  4)  the  qualitatives  ialu^,  aud  the  postclas- 
sical and  rare  adverb  taliter. 

Obs.  1   The  determinative  relative  r/^/i  corresponds  to  the  En-lish  relatives  who  whirh 
ad  tfint.  except  if  qm  has  the  antecedent  Ulem,  when  it  is  rendered  •«..'  ,s,.e  •  Uo.     art 
tive  C  lauses  ).     An  om,s.s,on  of  the  n-lative,  as  ,„   Kngli>h  when  the  re  aiiv,.  i>         t  ^o 
oUjectiye  ca.se,  ,s  not  admis>,l>le   as  :  Dum  miUtes  q.nl  iwperaierat  convenlren       Tm 

u  so Uln-rs  he  had  onlered  would  assemble  (>u.t  '  miHfe.  imilrareraf  convemrenl ').  t4s 
B.  Ci.  1,  ..—  i'or  the  rendering  ol  the  relative  '  u'/uK '  see  A'.  <i,  Obs.  a. 

Obs.  2.  The  diial  form  utfr  i».  relatively  u-ed  onlv  with  tin;  force  o7  Ht,rcvnoup  hrhvC 
ovwfu,s<Hrer  of  the  tu-o).nH:  U.nun  vtro  i.ti  nohnnus.  altero  est  uten      m     Sw^-^ 
q;  the^e  tiro  we  relii.^e  to  use,  we  must  use  the  other.  Cic.  S.-st.  n.-FtrZ  !^r  u^^^^^^^^ 
disset,  verum  oracultira  fuisset;   Whichsoenr  of  the  two  a//e/-«a/m  would  Im^^^^^^  ha., 
pened,  It  would  have  been  a  Hue  oracle.  Cic.  D'iv  2  56       """"""''^^  ^^*^'""  "'^^^  I'^^P- 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  RELATIVES. 


497 


The  relative?  of  the  numeral,  quantitative,  and  qualitative  classes  (and  some- 


7chi(h  (iminber)  he  con.-idered  sufficient  for  conveying  two  legions.  C;es.  B.  G.  4,  22. 

nwdi  are  f re- 


terdavsaid ini'dit  be«levised  even  in  regard  to  the  civil  law.  Cic.  Or.  2.  V.K  Ki.  Similarly 
in  place  of  the  postclassical  qualitative  adverb  qualiter,  the  determinative  compounds 
with  modus  iquomodo,  quemadmodum)  are  used. 

OB*  5.  The  relative  adjective  of  the  i>os?essive  class,  cnju,",  a,  vm  (renderrd  by  the 
i),,w<,.w:sive  case  icho.-<i)  is  sometimes  u-ed  in  anteclassical  language,  and  in  old  legal  for- 
milas  Mith  th.>  lorce  of  the  genitive  c?/yt/AM)f  the  relative  (?^«',  as  genitive  of  the  possessor 
(^  4(if,)  «-enerally  with  the  svndetic  antecedent  ix,  as  :  Ilia  cor.sueitido.  in  pnediis  ven- 
diindis  oniniiini  con-ulum.  censurum,  pra'tOrum,  ut  in  optima  conditiOne  sit  is cifja  res, 
cujum  periculnm:  That  usaire.  at  the  i)ublic  sale  of  real-estate,  of  all  consuls,  censors, 
ami  inictors.  that  he  to  whom  the  jiropeity.  to  whom  the  risk  belongs,  is  in  the  'best con- 
dition '  a.  e.  is  favored  i)y  the  law).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  54.—  Argentum,  p.-o  amlnlbus.  ciij(B 
erant  domino  dedi :  I  have  iriveti  t)ie  nionev  for  both  (female  slaves)  to  the  master  to 
whom  thev  belonged.  I'laiitV  Hud.  :i  4.  40.  Comp.  Plant.  Pseud.  4,  4.  5.—  It  is  also  used 
by  Plautii/in  conneetion  with  t  he  ablative  cau^d  {cuja  causa,  for  whose  sake),  and  in  Cic. 
Fniirm.  Var.  (probably  in  the  language  of  an  old  legal  formula)  as  ablative  of  interest 
(tiufd  iutijfidt,  whose  interest  it  was). 

Obs.  fi.  In  the  infi-kction  of  the  relative  (and  interrogative)  adjective  qi/i.  the  forms  of 
the  second  declensii.n  are  mingled  with  those  of  the  third.  Theor.ginal  characteristic  of 
the  second  declension  appears  in  the  f.»rms  quo  (abl.  sing.),  quorum  (tret:,  \i\nr.),  quos  (ace. 
I)liir.).  and  in  the  anteclassical  Un-m^quojus  (inst.  o\cujus),  and  qvoi  (inst.  cf  c?/i).— In  place 
»if  tlie  ablativ*'  sin<:.  r^z/o  (rarely  for  the  feminine  (^»/f7)  the  form  yy/7  is  sometimes  used, 
mostly  with  the  i)rej)ositlon  cihti  (qujcum  =  cum  quo).  Archaic  forms  after  the  third 
declension  are  found  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  {ques  or  queis,  inst.  ol  qtji 
or  q-'os).  and  in  dat.  and  abl.  iilur.  (r/^m- or  (y/z^ix  instead  of  quiOus,  sometimes  found  in 
.  v4.,|),,j,,|  _  If  tin-  relative  qui  is  used  as  prepositional  object,  it  sometimes  ]/recedes  the 
pre|)Osition,  as  Causa,  qua  de  ante  dictum  est ;  The  subje<t  ^  of  ichich  it  has  been  spoken 
before'  d.  e.  the  subject  mentioned  before).  Cic.  Inv.  2,  23,  70.— De  eo  ciimine  quo  de 
ai-'iiitur;  On  the  crime  concrrninq  which  the  accu^aiion  is  made  (i.  <>.  on  the  crime 
charired).  Cic.  Inv.  2,  11,  87.—  Ille  quern  contra  veneras;  He  against  uhom  you  had  ap- 
peared. Cic.  Mur.  4.— Leges  qvas  contra  nemo  est  facere  conaius:  The  laws  against 
nhich  nobodv  dared  to  act.  Cic.  Vatin.  7.—  Illlus  periculnm  quern  jn-opterhxc  ipsa  studia 
diligeb.it;  Tliat  man's  dinvjin-  for  the  sakiof  whom  he  loved  these  very  pursuits.  Cic. 
CirC  22.  51.—  This  order  of  the  words  is  frequent  if  the  relativ»;  is  use«l  as  the  attHfjute 
of  a  prei)ositional  noun,  and  the  jneixjsition  is  monosyllabic,  as  :  Quorum  in  fins  Ro- 
mani  exercitum  iiitrodiixissent ;  In  icho-'^e  terrifory  \\\v.  Konians  Inul  introduced  an  arm}'. 
Cu's.  B.  G.  2,  10.—  Quo  in  loco  Ambiorix  esse  dicebiliur ;  In  which  phice  Amh\or\x  was 
said  to  l)e.  C:es.  B.  (J.  (J,  80.—  (Ei)  quorum  de  jMiend  agebiltiir  ;  Those  uhose  pi/nu'/mmit 
was  in  (juestion.  Liv.  5,8«.—  Quibus  de  rtbus  iid  me  scripsisti :  On  which  things  you 
have  written  to  me.  Cic.  Att.  12,  84.— Here  belong  the  coordinating  adverbial  expressions 
qua  de  causa,  quam  of)  causam,  quamobre?n,  quemad/nodufti.—  The  i)ni\)<)A\\(m  cum  is 
mostly  attached  to  the  relative  as  a  suffix  (qvocum  or  qulcujn,  inst.  of  cum  quo  ;  qui- 
fjuscum.  instead  of  cum  qvibti").  Earely  the  common  order  cum  quo,  and  cum  quibtts 
is  met  w  ith  (as  in  Liv.  1,  58  ;  Nep.  Att.  5 ;  Liv.  4,  5). 

Ob*.  7.  Those  relatives  which  are  either  doubled,  or  compounded  with  cunque,  are  called 
'iNDKFiNiTK  KEi.ATiVKs ',  and  the  clauses  introduced  by  th<  m  are  called  •  indefinite 
iiKi.ATivK  cLAisKs'.  TlU'se  clauses  are  exponents  of  the  idea 'all' or  -every',  as  ap- 
l>lied  to  circumstances  given,  or  to  things  or  persons  mentioned,  and  represent  the  prin- 
cii)al  predicate  as  h.lding  good  ?/ any  of  the  sin-le  acts  contained  in  the  general  idea 
*  all '  «>r  '  every  '  is  assunitd  as  real  or  true.  Hence  these  clauses  jilways  imply  a  '  contin- 
gency', and  jierfonn  the  same  part  amonu:  the  clauses  of  the  relative  form,  as  the  condi- 
tional clauses  amouir  the  clauses  introduced  by  conjunctions.  They  correspond  to  Eng- 
lish clauses  introduced  by  the  dift'.-rent  relative  or  interroL'ative  compounds  with  ^erer^ 
(w  hosoever,  w  hichsoever,  whatever  ;  how  much  soever,  whenever  etc.),  as  :  (Lacedoemon 


/ 


I 


498 


BELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


CLASSIFICATION   OE   RELATIVES. 


499 


bonis  rpc:ibns»  iiti  iiou  potiiitl  qmim  esset  rex  hahnnilw^  f/uicunque  gcucre  rc^io  natus 
C'S!<et :  Lacrdivmoii  could  not  liave  'jood  kiiij.';»  since,  u/ioi-rer  Wdn  born  of  royal  blood 
wms  to  be  made  kiiii,'  (to  be  had  as  kinj^).  c'ic.  Kep,  1,  :i:i.  50.  [Tlie  principal  predicate, 
'the  having  as  king' iiolds  good  in  regard  to  every  person  in  whom  tlie  condiiion  of 
royal  blood  existed,  —  if  any  was  born  etc.]  (^uoxcitiique  de  te  queri  ii\\d\\'\^qtiacuiiqv.e 
potui  raiiOno  placiivi ;  Whomsoertr  I  beard  complain  of  \ou,  I  appeased  in  ichuUvtr  way 
1  could.  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  2.  2  [The  '  jil<v<lrc''  holds  «rood  in  regartl  to  any  person  comi)laiii- 
inj;  (  if'  any  person  complained),  and  in  regard  to  any  method  applied  for  the  pnrpose  of 
" plardre''].—  Quod.  qtiibuKCUnque  verbis  dixeris,  lacetuni  tamen  est,  re  contiiietnr; 
Wh.it  is  witty  in  M7m/«i>r  words  you  may  express  it,  is  a  witticism  conr^in<'d  in  the 
subject  itself.  Cic.  Or.  2,  02  [  =  if  you  dioose  any  of  the  dift'erent  forms  of  ex|)ressiou 
l)Ossibl(!  ;  or  "  altnoucfh  '  you  change  your  exprest^ion  in  evtry  possible  manner]. —  Kuo, 
qnuiqiiid  est  in  me  studii,  quhlqithi  a'.ictoritfite  possum,  vel  dmne  lil)i  defero  ;  U'/iaittcr 
zeal  is  in  nie.  ichatevtr  I  can  do  by  my  inlluence.  even  all  this  I  place  at  your  di-'posi- 
lion.  Cic.  Leg  M.  24,  09  [  =  sire  muitiim  possum,  nice  non  multum  ;  Wkethtr  my  inllu- 
ence is  small  or  great,  or  'uKhouffk  my  intluence  inaij  be  small  'J. 

Ob8.  8.  The  indefinite  relative  clauses  difler  in  several  respects  from  ordinary  relative 
clauses  : 

1)  'I'he  introducing  relatives  have  the  nature  of  both  relative  and  indefinUe  adjectivcd 
and  adverbs.  Wherever  the  form  of  the  relatives  is  dillerent  from  that  «if  the  interroira- 
tives,  they  almost  always  follow  in  their  lormation  the  interrogative,  not  the  relative 
form,  the  same  as  the  indefinite  qnl<.  Qin<quis  and  quidqmd  have,  like  the  indelinite 
qiiis,  the  h)rm  of  the  i.NTEitKOGATivE  qiii.-<,  not  iliat  of  the  relative  qni,  lackiiiir  tJie 
feminine,  and  ihti  ionw  quod,  iihXww^h  quifiinqae  takes  the  relative  form  qtiodcunque, 
not  the  interrogative  foi in  y?/?V/<7///7^/f^  if  used  absolutely.  Thus  the  conipo>ition  with 
CKiiqiie  is  applied  tt)  the  adverl)S  quaiido  (qnaiidocniiqiie*),  and  ///  (itfcunque),  which  occur 
only  as  iattnogatice.  not  as  relative  adverbs  (and  as  adverbial  conjunctions),  as  :  ^-Eqiiis 
Volscisque.  quimdocunque  se  moverint,  ab  tergoerinuis.  Liv.  7,  30.  Ih'iice  both,  the  com- 
j)ouiids  «if  cuitqut,  and  those  with  doubled  f«)rms,  occur  as  pure  indetinitcs  without  any 
innction  as  connectives,  as  :  Bestiie,  ut  quidquid  {  —  ut  quidque)  objectuin  est,  non 
qtuerunt  amplius;  Animals,  when  anythiixj  is  tlirown  to  them,  do  not  l«)ok  any  furilier. 
Ci<-.  Tusc.  5,  34,  *.>8.— Ita  odorabuntur  omnia  et  perve>iigabant  tit.  ubi  quidq'uid  ctiy^vt, 
aliqua  ratiOne  inveiiTrent ;  They  >ceiite(l  and  rummaged  all  things  in  a  manner  that  they 
found  out  in  some  way  wiiere  ectrytldtu/  was  (or  :  th.it.  where  tiiere  was  anythinq,  tliey 
were  sure  to  find  it).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  Kj.— (inidijiiid  erit  igitur  quacunque  (  =  ullil)  ex 
jirte.  quucunque  (  =  ullo)  de  sjeiiere,  id  oiTi;or  dicet  melius  quam  ip^e  ejus  rei  inventor; 
Whatever  there  will  be,  pertaining  to  any  art,  or  to  any  sphere,  an  orator  will  express  it 
belter  than  even  the  inventor.  Or.  1,  12,  51. 

2)  The  indelinite  relatives  liave  in  so  far  the  nature  of  ordinary  relitives,  as  the  inter- 
rogative (or  iiuletinite)  element  qn  is  used  as  a  ronn-ctive  with  'the  force  of  a  conjunc- 
tion ;  but  the  indrtinite  relative  adjectifs  ditler  from  ordii.ary  relative  adjectives  in  re- 
gard to  the  anftctddtt.  The  latter  always  depend  «m  their  principal  sentence  by  mea»>8 
of  their  gramniaiical  (////^ce^/*;//,  wiiich  is  a  member  of  the  jiriiwipal  sent'Mice.  while  the 
indtflnite  relative  adjectives  dt)  not  require  a  giammalical  antecedent,  beini:  directly  de- 
pendent on  the  predication  \\  hich  they  (jualify  in  the  manner  of  conditiona!  dauf^is  iObs.  7; 
Ji.  3.  Ors.  12,  li\\  as  :  (Frater  meu^i  mihi,  qita-^'unqne  re.<  qtvit,  tuendiis  est;  I  must  take 
lh«'  part  of  my  brother  tif'aUrer  things  li«'  may  do  (whatsoever  his  aciioiis  may  be).  Cic. 
Fain.  1,  !),  18.  Here  rex.  the  troveruing  noun  ol  quasrunqiie  cannot  be  made  the  ante- 
cedent of  the  latter,  and  cannot,  in  any  form,  be  conceived  to  be  a  member  of  the  prin- 
cipal sentence.  The  clause  '  q'lascunque  reti  fferit"  performs  the  same  fuitrtions  as  a 
conditional  clause  {  =  at  all  events,  .sire  hoc.  nre  aliiid  quid  agit;  eren  if  he  acts  un- 
reasonably). Both,  conditional  and  indelinite  relative  clauses  belong  to  the  clauses  ex- 
pressing a  'conliiigency ',  the  f«)rmer  expressing  eitlitr  a  dellnite  or  indetinite  (^t  qiiis) 
c«intingency  :  and  the  latter  only  an  indefinite  contingencv.  Hence  both  kinds  of  clauses 
may  be  coordinated  with  each  other,  which,  accordini:  to"  p.  475.  No.  Ji,  is  only  admissi- 
ble if  both  clauses  belong  to  the  same  class,  as  :  Fateor  iiie  oiatOrem  n  modo  dm,  aut 
v\'\.\m  qidc'i nque sim,  ex  Academite  spatiis  exstitisse  ;  I  acknowled;.'e  that  I,  as  an  or.ttor, 
if  lam  i^uch,  or  I  may  even  say  '  whatever  orator  I  am',  have  proceeded  troin  the  halls  of  the 
Academy  ;  (  =  that  1  am  owing  whatever  I  am  as  an  orator  to  what  I  have  learned  in  the 
Academy).  Cic.  Or.  3.  Here  the  conditi(mcd  clause  leaves  the  question  '  wh«*ther  he  is  an 
orator  or  n«.t'  undecided;  the  indefinite  relutire  clause  removes  this  uncertaintv.  but 
leaves  the  question  'about  bis  rank  anion::  tlie  orators'  undecided.  Bv  removini:  tg^w 
this  uncertainty,  the  clause  must  a>siinie  an  ordinary  relative,  or  a  concessive  form. 

*  The  use  (»f  qiiundocunque.  however,  is  rare,  and  generally  ' quocnnque  temin}re\  or 
*•  quoqno  temiwre'' \^  used  in  place  of  it  as:  Qnociinqne  tevi}>ore  mihi  potesias  prujsen- 
tis  tui  fiierit  tu  eris  moderator  consiliOrum  meOrum.  Cic.  Fam.  1,  9,  22.—  Qaoquo  tern- 
2.076  luerit.  Cic.  Alt.  9,  2. 


^^  On  account  of  the  dilTerent  irrammatical  nature  of  ordinary  and  indefinite  relative 
rl'iii^e"  the  latter  do  not  follow  the  rules  of  the  former  in  regard  to  the  7nood  of  their 
predicate  (^  til»)  The  ino«Kl  of  the  indefinite  relative  clauses  is  almost  alwai/s  the  indica- 
Vivr  a<  ii  c<.iM.iti<.nal  clauses  prop.r  (in  which  the  condition  is  represented  asan  unde- 
ci(leifa«-t),  unless  the  subjunctive  is  required  by  the  general  rules  on^dependent  sub- 
j-unciives  (p.  385  foil.),  while  in  English  the  potential  is  generally  used,  bee  Lx.  Obs.  9. 

Obs.  9.  The  two  f«)rins  of  the  indefinite  relatives  by  canque  and  by  doubling  the  sim- 
nle  imlefmiie  are  thus  distinguished  :  . 

1  Ouisqni>^  and  quldqnid  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  are  only  used  absolutely, 
h'in.r  either  in  the  masculine  or  neuter  gender,  according,  as  the  noun  of  general  im- 
Dortlmd.-rsux.d  isa  i)eisonor  thin-  t§  354)*  ;  but  qmcunque  is  used  abs«ilut«  ly,  di.-junctly 
^  MA.  m-i),  and  attributivelv  with  its  governing  noun  expressed,  as  :  0«iC«/j$W6  is  est, 
ei  me  protiteor  inimlcum  ;  Whoever  he  is.  I  profess  myself  his  enemy.  Cic.  i  am.  10. 31, 3. 
-Yw\  onodc,inqiie\o\i;n\  qui  valebunt,  valebunt  auiem  temper  anna;  ^ haieter  those 
wi>h  who  have  the  power,  will  be  done;  but  the  power  will  always  be  with  the  arms 
(arms  will  ahvavs  have  the  p<iwer).  Cic.  Fam.  9,  17.  8.-Plus  attuht  huic  poptilo  digni- 
tatis, q>n.<quis  est  ille,  si  modo  est  aliquis,  qui  etc.;  He  who  etc.,  «Vw^r^r  he  is  if  else 
he  is  any.fne.  conferred  nnn-e  dignity  on  this  people  etc.  Cic.  Brut.  I.i.- qtndqmd  ci 
ccmimendaveris,  erit  id  mihi  gratum  ;  Whatever  you  will  recommend  to  hnn  will  be  ac- 
centabie  lo  me.  Cic.  Fam.  13,  16.  4.  Both,  quodcunqve  and  qmdqvid  may  take  partitive 
qiuHive.^,  meaning  either  '  wAa^fivr'  or  UilV  with  the  Latin  partitive  genitive  as  goyern- 
in-'  noun  or  literally  '  whatever  i)art  of,  when  the  proviso  •  if  any '  is  olten  ^inderstood, 
as"-  Te  hoc  existiinjlre  v«>lo.  quidquid  in  eum  officii  contuleris,  id  ita  nie  accipere  ut  in 
nieipsum  te  putem  contulisse;  1  wish  you  would  rest  assured  that,  whatever  .-ervice 
(everv  .service,  if  anv)  you  may  do  to  him,  will  be  so  taken  by  nie  that  I  consider  it  as 
d<Mie"to  mvself.  Cic'.  Fam.  10,'l,  4.— Vos  hortor  ut  qmdcvnqve  viiMnm  contrahere  i)o- 
teriiis  conlrahantur;  1  exhort  vou  to  collect  whatn-.tr  soldiery  (all  soldiers,  if  any)  you 
can  co"llect.  Tompej.  ad  Cic.  (Att.  8.  12,  A,  4).-rrincipibus  GallOrum  placuerat,  non 
omnia  concremnri  t.-cta,  ut  qtiodcunque  superesset  intnx.  id  pignus  ad  llectendos  hostium 
anim.is  nabC-rent  ;  The  chi«-fsor  the  soldiers  had  resolved  not  to  have  all  the  houses  burnt, 
that  whatever  paitoX  the  citv  would  be  left,  might  be  a  pledge  m  their  hands  (literally  : 
Mhev  mi-ht  liave  whatever' part  etc.  as  a  i>led-e')to  bear  on  the  resolutions  of  the 
enemy  Liv  5  42  See  Ex.  1-3.  The  ordinarv  relative  qnod  is  likewise  used  with  a  par- 
titive <'eniliv«j  in  the  nuaning  '  all',  but  without  the  accessory  idea  of  "if  any '.  and 
withoiu  any  uncertainty  about  the  amount,  as  :  Ex  ipsS  Dulna  qnod  habel)at  aari  de- 
tractiim  esse  dic«);  I  assert  that  from  the  very  statue  of  Diana  id',  the  gold  it  had  wa» 
taken  olV.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  20. 

2  Omdquid  is  never  used  in  any  oblique  case  except  the  accusative,  and  never  in  the 
pliiial  ;  qiilsqiiix  is  never  used  in  the  feminine,  and  never  in  the  genitive  or  dative  sin- 
gular- norisitusedabsolutelvin  the  ablative  singular  (except  sometimes  in  postclas- 
sical  lan'nnve) ;  but  it  freqiiVntlv  occurs  in  this  case  as  attribute  of  nouns  denoting 
thinf"*  (not  persons),  as  :  (^uis  est'qui,  qaoquo  modo  quis  interfectus  sit,  puniendum  pu- 
tet  -"who  is  tlnre  that  holds  the  opinion  that  a  punishment  should  be  intiicted,  in  what- 
ever manner  a  person  niav  have  lieen  killed.  Cic.  Mil.  3.— Oainnius  illiid,  qiioquo  con- 
sUio  fecit  lecit  certe  siio  ;  'With  whatever  intention  Gabiniits  may  have  done  this,  he  hap 
certainlv  done  it  with  His  intention.  Cic.  liab.  Post  S.  For  the  use  of  quocunque  modoawd 
qiioinodocun<nie  see  N«).  Id.— 0'/^^■7'/^^•  is  never  used  in  the  i)lural,  except  in  a  single 
passa-e  «if  Livy  as  an  ordinarv  indefinite  :  Liberos  Buas  qmtA/f<q>nbns  RomSnis  nianci- 
pi.nUrbaiif  q'hev  gave  their  children  into  slavery  to  ihejird  Roman  that  would  offer. 
Liv  41  S**.  In  all  the  cases  in  wiiich  qulsqids  is  exchyded.quicunque  is  used  ;  but  there 
are  no  examples  exiant  of  the  form  quornmcunque.—HoimUmo»  the  suffix  cwiqve\sse]i- 
arated  by  one  or  two  wortls  from  qui  (also  fr.nn  qnalis  and  qnantus.  Ex.  Kii,  as  :  So- 
crates omnium  testimonio.  quam  se  cunque  in  part«'m  dedisset,  omnium  fuit  facile  prin- 
r.p<-  Socrates  unquestionably  was  the  foremost  of  all,  in  whatever  direction  he  might 
npplv  himself.  Cic.  Or.  3,  1«,  00.  -  (^nirunque  is  rarely  used  as  an  ordinary  indefinite,  with- 
out t'he  force  of  a  connective,  mo-tlv  as  adverbial  ablative  with  ratio  and  caum.  butalso  in 
other  connections  (Ex.  12),  as  :  (^lue  sanilii  poterunt,  qaacunque  ratione  saiiSho  ;  W  hat 
can  be  healed.  1  shall  heal  in  every  way  p.is^ible  (where  jnAero  must  be  supplied).  Cic. 
Cat  2  5.— (^ui  de  quacunqne  catim  asj)eruati  nostraauxilia  estis  :  W  hode8pl^ed  our  help 
from  lome  reason  or  other  (  =  nescio  qua  causa,  or  '  de  cauMl  aliqua,  qua^cunque  ea  erat). 


*  In  anteclassical  language  qui^qais  is  sometimes  used  attributively  with  homo. 

**  In  the  passage  in  Cic.  Sest.  45,  which  is  generally  used  in  the  lexicons  to  prove  the 
use  of  qui.'<quis  in  the  nom.  i)lur.,  the  reading  quiqni  rests  on  no  other  authority  but  an 
old  printed  edition  of  Cicero's  works,  where  it  first  occurs.  The  manuscripts  give 
qui. 


I 


500 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF  EELATHTS. 


501 


Liv.  45.  23.—  Si  quid  erit.  mnjrniim  est  adinmentiim,  pln  miniii»,  qnaninqve  rafidne  coii- 
Tendjliniis  ;  If  tlicrt,'  will  he  aii.\  fhiiiir.  it  will  by  a  {^raiul  hcli)  ;  if  not,  we  will  fhilt  aloii" 
ill  one  way  or  other.  Cic.  Atf.  12,  29.  i.  ^' 

3.  rtercunqne  ( hut  not  vfcniter)  is  used  as  an  indefinite  relative  in  the  mcaninjT  *  which«o- 
cver  of  the  two '.  as  :  Xiillnin  hollniu  eivTle  fiiir.  in  (pio  hello  noii,  //fniru/if/i/f'  pm^  vicis- 
pet,  tamen  jiliqna  forma  ej^^et  fimlra  ri-i  |)ul)l'C}e.  Cic.  :ul  Unit.  1.  15.  10.—  Copiie  ita  pa- 
rjlinead  diiuicaiHlimi  esse  diciiritiir  ut,  vftramt/i/e  vieerit,  noii  sir  ininnn  lutQnim.  C'ie, 
Fain.  G,  4,  1.—  In  |)lace  of  the  lacUinj;  uternfer  frequently  the  s'nji^le  uter  is  used  wiili 
the  force  of  nffrcunque,  as:  Seniltiis  a  p«'  rem  ad  po[)iiliini  rejGeit ;  vtii  eoruin  dedieatio 
jussu  p()j)uli  data  essct,  emn  ])r:r('sse  annnna»  jnssit  ;  Thev  di-eieed  that  to  iv/i(im^<(ter,r 
o/  the  Itvo  the  dedieation  would  he  ^'iven.  tlie  same  should  he  jirefect  of  provisions.  Liv. 
2.  27.—  Faeile  convC'uit  inter  Hoinauos  Latiiiosque.  vtrlus  partis  T.  Manlius  (\ux  fu- 
isset,  ejus  futurain  hauddubie  fuisse  vietoii.im  ;  'I"he  Uoinansaud  L;itins  i)erfecily  a<:ret(l, 
that  ivhvh  so  ever  of  the  two  parties»  T.  Manlius  would  have  comuiandcd,  the  victory 
■would  have  unquestionably  helonu;ed  to  it.  Liv.  S,  10.    See  K.\.  13. 

4.  Both  qiiotqnot  and  quotcnnqiie  (heiu^'  indeclinable)  occur  in  the  meaninij  'how  many 
soever',  'however  many  or  few  \  'whatever  iiumlier  of  '  ;  hut  hoih  are  extremely  rare, 
as  :  Si  leires  dua».  aut  qitofquof  erunt.  conservflri  noii  |>os^inl  ;  If  two  laws,  or  hon' many 
soever  xUk^vv  will  l)e,  cannoi  be  prc>ervcd.  Cic.  Inv.  2,  4!).—  QuotCKiique  occurs  only  once 
in  the  lanL'uaire  of  the  law:  Quotcnikque  si'iijltus  creverit,  tot  sunto.  Cic.  Leg.  3,3.  In 
place  ()f  quotqiiot  inu\  qiiotcuhque  Hie  neuters  qnvlqu'id  and  qxoilcunque  with  partitive 
^enitlve«^  (even  of  persons)  «re  jrenerally  employed:  Quidqidd  in  castris  ])ei dilorimi 
fuit  :  Whatever  number  of  desperadoes  was  in  the  camp.  Cie.  Fatn.  10,  23.—  See  No.  1, 
and  E.\.  4.  11.— Tin'  adjective  (^^/(y/z/.s/v///^//^  occurs  only  in  the  meatiiii;:  of  an  ordinary 
indefinite  without  any  conneciive  force  ;  it  is  extremely  rare,  and  only  poetical. 

5.  Of  the  quantitatives,  the  forms  qtinnfnsquantii.'i,  qtHfntnscunque  (botii  in  the  mean- 
inir  '  how  nuich  so  ever',  '  how  L'reai  so  ever'),  and  qiuintnli(s,-ii„qtit  ^h()w  little  soever) 
are  in  use.  qiianf>i-qi((iiititft  \y\\Mx  rare.  They  occur  both  as  attribuie-s,  and  in  the  neuter 
pinjjiilar  with  partitive  p-nitives,  accordinir  to  tiie  ;reiieral  rules  on  quantitative  adjec- 
tives (§  2<i4).  The  iVtnhWwj^  ui qttdiitidux  belon<_'s  to  Apiileian  Latiniiv.  Dejutari  co|)ia<, 
qudidivciinqiie  sunt,  nostia<  esse  dlico  :  J)ejotaru.s's  troop-.  iM.wmu'ch  soever  there  is 
ot  them  (see  P.  I.,  p.  IST  11.  4.  .')).  I  believe  to  be  ours.  Cic.  Fani.  1.5,  1.  ♦;.—  Deciusr/w»- 
tttmcnnque  ririmn  habuit,  ])rimo  certamine  eiludit  ;  lion'  great  ^otrer  i)«'cius's  stniK/th 
may  have  been,  he  spent  it  in  the  bei:iunin<:  of  the  l»attle.  Liv.  10.  28.—  Quaiduntcmt- 
qut  humoria  v^i  ;  llow  much  licjuid  soever  there  mav  be.  Col.  12,  25.—  Procura,  quantn- 
larnnque  est,  Precianam  herediijliem  ;  Take  care  of  ilie  Pncms  estate,  left  to  me  hy  will, 
how  .Kinall  fo  ever  \x  m.iy  be.  I'ic.  Ait.  C.  •».  2.—  Q'lanfK/unnti  u.  e.  emitun.  Imiic  emitur 
(luod  iiecesse  est  ;  What  is  necessaty,  is  houirht  cheapiv  (is  cheap),  at  wtiatever  (how  co 
ever  irn-at»  ju-ice  it  may  he  lioiiirht.  Cic.  Att.  12.  23,  3.— See  E\.  14-l(i.— Frequently 
qnantuinontqm  occurs  with  po<.tu/n  (  =  quantumciinqiie  fact-re  j)ossuni)  as  a  formula  <>f 
modest  assi-ri ion  (as  much  as  I  can,  to  the  hot  of  mvabiliiv)  in  pl;i<  e  of  tiie  simple 
relative  qoan'tan,  to  rejjre^ent  the  ability  of  the  speaker  as  an  unknown  and  question- 
abie  '(nianiity'.  as:  Debeo.  qamdnincnnqoe  ytosAm,  in  eo  (luotiue  elaboran';  I  should 
devote  my  work,  c/.s'  miirli  (ax far)  a<  I  am  attle,  al>o  to  this  sul>ject.  c;c.  Fin.  1,  4,  10.— 
The  idc  a  -however  ^reat '  mny  also  he  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  conces\ice  clause  (sec 
]).  mV)  with  q'lawvis  jnagiiHs  (in  place  of  fivantHsciinque),  which  alwavs  r.<iuires  the 
])redicate  in  tlie  subjunctive:  Exspectatio  qnninvis.sU  maf/ua.  tamen  eau"i  vinces  ;  Hoic- 
ever  great  our  expectation  may  be.  you  will  still  surpas.-  it.  Cic.  Hep.  1,  23.—  This  form 
of  the  concessive  clause  must  be  alwavs  u-ed  if  the  (iiiantitaiive  idea  '  how  so  ever'  re- 
fers adverbially  to  the  intensity  of  adjectives.    See  No.  9. 

0.  In  the  qualitative  class,  r/w/?V/^/r//i.s-  belonirs  to  late  Latiniti',  hut  qvalixrunqiie  if» 
classical,  oc(  urnn.:  in  the  meanini:  'of  whatever  quality,  character,  nature,  <»r  kind  '.  It 
is  often  leplaced  hy  quiamqiie.  Primuin  qiiidque.  qnaltcunque  erit,  continuo  scies  :  You 
shall  know  the  very  first  news,  of  wha'n-er  kind  (nature)  it  may  he.  Cic.  Att.  10  12  (i  —  Is 
est  Kpicureus  noil  penitus  iili  disciplliiic,  qmtcunque  est,  di-ditus :  This  Kpieu'rean  is 
not  wholly  <;iven  to  that  system,  of  what  kind  soever  it  may  he  (j.  e.  whidever  may  he  itti 
cha meter).—  Ek.  17.  '22.—  Instead  of  qua/hcunque  somelinies  the  qualitative  jrenitive 
cnirininodi  (instead  o\'  cnjuscujuxntodi,  which  is  not  found)  occurs,  as:  Co<Mi.indum 
tilii  fuit,  Konue.  n/icmniodi  res  essent.  an  Hhodi  malles  vivere  :  You  had  to~con-i(ier 
whether  yon  would  rarln-r  live  at  \Un\n\  whtdcvir  the  condition  o/'allairs  miirht  he  (lit- 
erally :  ot  whatever  kind  the  allairs  niiu'ht  be»,  or  at  Jihodes.  Cic.'  Fam.  4.  7,4.—  Ciff^is- 
cu.,qiie  moliwwh  the  meaniiiL' of  ^'/«//.<c///(^//fc  is  used  attrihutiv^/i/.  \\hi\v  ci/ianwodi 
oniv  orcuv:^  predicatirely  ;  as  :  (Jt/Jn^o/nq/fe  enim  modi  animal  con.<t\tiien.< ;  For  an  ani- 
mal of  wliateverkind'  you  may  assume  (.  =  whatever  kind  of  an  animal  you  mav  assume). 
Cic.  Fin.  4,  11,  28.  ^  j  . 

7.  The  LOCATIVE  adverbs  formed  from  the  dctcrmiuative  qui  (wW,  wide,  quo,  and  qua), 


if  used  08  indefinite  relatives,  mostly  occur  in  compopitinn  with  a/nqve  (vMc^/vqve  etc.), 
hut  also  (thoMj;h  rarely)  in  the  doubleo  forms  idAidd.  q'loquo.  qnoqna.  Neither  vnde- 
vnd»,  nor  imdtnniqui-  occur  in  classical  prose,  instead  of  wnich.  attributive  phrases  (ex 
qvocirnqiie  kno)  .are  used.  The  locative  adverb^^.  are  used  in  these  forms  accorditiir  to  the 
rules  ot  the  locative  cases  (p.  217  foil.),  hein^  rendered  like  the  simple  relative  adverbs 
with  the  addition  'sotver'  :  Vhicunque  Patricias  liabitat,  ihi  career  privjltus  est;  ^yhe1•e- 
soerer  a  Patrician  lives,  there  is  a  private  jail.  Liv.  6.  3H.—  rbivbi^W  animus,  d-rte  qui- 
deni  in  te  est :  Wheresf)erer\\w  soul  may  he.  it  is  certainly  in  you  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  2'.). —  Qiio- 
cmiqne  te  ratio  reipnblieae  ducet.  sequar :  I  shall  follow  yo\\  irhit  her  soever  {y.  ^.\vt  m\y 
place  so  ever  to  which)  the  interest  of  the  republic  will  lead  you.  Cic.  Fam.  10.  16.  2. — 
Amfiris  ttii,  qvoqiio  me  verti.  vestijria  (i.  e.  video):  I  see  the  footprints  of  thy  love 
irhifher.'-oerer  {\u  what  direction  soever)  I  may  turn.  Cic.  Fam.  7,  24,  1.—  Homam  se  ire 
fi'iizu\fitr\hunt.q>nlc(niq>te  (not  idnn/nque)  ihant.  inimensum  obtinentes  loci;  They  ex- 
pressed hy  their  «restuies  that  they  v» ere  niarchinjr  on  Home  occuiiyinjr  an  immense 
space  y/7/f'?r7vr  they  marched.  Liv.  5,  .37. —  See  Ex.  18. —  Sometimes  the  accusative  neu- 
ter quid'/uid  is  used  as  an  accusative  of  place  to  express  the  indefinite  relative  adverbial 
idea  '  how  far  soever  \'  (Juidquid  iiroL'rediebantur,  niaeris  majrisque  tiirhatos  hostis  cerne- 
bant :  //o?r/a?'.vo<-iYr  they  came  on  their  march,  they  perceived  the  enemy  more  aid  more  in 
disorder  (perceived  tlie  fjradiially  increasiij;  dlsoider  of  the  enemy).  Liv.  8,  39.  See 
Liv.  7.  32.—  Sometimes  the  interro<,'ative  adverb  qnando  is  compounded  with  cnqve  in 
the  uieaniuir  'whensoever',  (qunndocnnqi/e).  but  this  compound  is  not  found  in  classical 
prose,  the  idea 'soever',  applied  to  time,  beinj;  {renerally  not  expressed  bv  the  form  of 
the  advert),  hut  by  the  tense  and  mood  of  the  jnedicate' (^co  p  3i9.  Obs.  1).  so  that  the 
same  temporal  conjuneiions  (7//»/m  etc.)  are  used  for  the  desimiation  of  both  definite 
and  indefinite  tinie.  Whenever  it  is  re<iuired  to  place  a  particular  stress  on  the  idea 
'  soever '.  attributive  phrases  with  qnocvnque  temjiore  or  qnoquo  tempore  are  used,  as  : 
Qnftcunqiie  tempore  niihi  potestas  pru'sentis  tui  fiierit,  tu  eris  »»mnium  moderator  consi- 
liDruni  niennim  :  At  what  time  ."YV^/yv  (wheiiso«'verj  it  will  lie  possible  lor  me  to  see  you, 
you  will  be  lhe<,'uide  <jf  all  my  actions.  Cic.  Fam.  1,  9,  22.  See  Ex.  7. 

8.  In  the  ncmekal  class,  the  adverb  qtmfiescunqf/e  (not  qiiotiesquoties')  frequently  occurs 
in  the  meaniiifr  '  how  often  soever',  as  :  Litteras  ad  me  mittas  qiiotiesciniqne  habebis  cui 
des:  Senrl  me  letter-  how  ofttn  t-oner  y<'U  may  hav»-  somebody  bv  whom  to  forward 
them.  Cic.  Fam.  Hi,  11.  :i.  See  Ex.  19.  The  simple  adverb  qi/ofies,  likewise,  has  always 
the  meaning  of  an  indefinite  relative,  but  is  used  with  less  stress  than  quotiescnnqve. 

9.  In  the  QUANTITATIVE  class,  indefinite  relative  adverbs  are  rot  formed  bv  composi- 
tion with  fuitque.  If  the  idea  -hoivrrer  w^c/( '  is  applied  to  quantity  ni>'  an  adverbial 
idea  (iiitensityi,  the  clause  takes  ttie  form  of  a  'concessive  clause',  the  quantitative  in- 
ferrojrative  advert)  qiiani  l>ein<j:  not  compounded  witti  cimqve,  but  with  ris  (qiiamvis 
instead  of  qnamcvnqne.  which  is  used  in  ••v  ry  respect  like  a  conjunclio!i  ;  see  Obs.  11). 
The  adverb  quam  in  the  douliled  form  (quatnqifam)  which,  accordini:  to  the  analojry  of 
the  otiier  indefinite  relative  adverbs,  should  have  the  meaning  '  how  ever  much  ',  is'only 
used  as  an  oniinary  conci-ssive  conjunction,  nieaninj^  ' a\(hoiigh\—Qua7Hvis  (however 
much)  always  requires  its  predicate  to  be  in  the  sulijunctive. 

10.  Tho  qv MATATiVK^  quatite7rt/nf/>/e  and  qualiterqtiaUter  five  postclassical.  In  their 
place  tin?  interroirative  adverbs  ui  mim\n.'Y  qnomodo  and  vt  are  used  in  the  following 
forms  :  \)  qnoqnornodo  (see  No.  2)  ;  2)  quocvnqne  modo  ;  3)  qvomodocunqve ;  4)  vtciinqye  : 
5)  nt'tt  (more  rarely  than  vtcnnque),  all  with  the  meaninir  '  in  what  manner,  way,  orstyle 
potver',  '  how  soever',  as  :  Hoc  (iiium  in  amiciiiis  dicitnr,  quomodociinqvedicitur.  infel- 
b-ri  tanien  quid  dicjltur  potest  ;  If  this  be  said  w  ith  referenee  to  friendship,  we  can  at 
least  understand  what  is  meant,  in  vhatever  manner  \\.  mav  be  said  (i.  e.  even  if  itwere 
not  quite  i)roperly  expressed).  Cic.  Fin.  5,  11.  30.—  I'tcunqite  ha>c  inciderint,  bonum  ani- 
mnm  habe  :  IIow  so  ner  \\\\'^  will  happc'ii,  be  cheerful!  Liv.  4."j,  8.—  Ctut  sit  res.  casu» 
consilium  nostri  itineris  jiidi(  ilbit ;  llow  so  ever  this  is  (be  it  as  it  may),  chance  will  dic- 
tate the  plan  of  our  journey.  Cic.  Att.  1.5,  25.  1  —  I'tiit  (others  read  a  sim!)le  vt,  which 
would  not  be  proi.er  in  the  j»assage)  est.  indulge  valetudini ;  lie  it  ax  it  may.  take  care  of 
your  health.  Cic.  Fam.  16.  18,  1.— Often  vtaoiqi/e  is  used  in  the  ccmiparative  meaning 
'accordini:  to  ',  denoting  uncertainty  of  thechance,  as:  Utcvnqne  re^  puflxMrvt,  accord- 
ing ff.s' circumstances  would  require.  Cic.  Fin,  .5.  4,  11.—  Ad  ha-c  revocCtur  oratio.  sed  ut- 
cimqiie  aderttnt  ;  To  these  subjects  our  discourse  must  return,  but  according  as  the  audi- 
ence (qui  aderiint)  is.  C:c.  Otf.  1,  .37.—  Vtcunqio-  in  alto  ventiis  est.  exin  veJum  vortitur ; 
According  as  the  wind  is  on  sea.  (accordini:  to  that)  the  sail  is  turned.  Plant.  Ep  1  1 
Thus  vtcunque  in  the  passages  Ilor.  Od.  4.  4.  35:  2,  17,  11 :  3,  14.  29  must  be  understood, 
although  in  these  i)assages  it  is  geue.-ally  interpreted  =  qvandocunque. 

11.  Adverbs  of  cause  are  not  used  as  indefinite  relative  adverbs,  this  relation,  if  the 
cause  is  represented  as  indefinite,  being  exi)ressed  by  attributive  phrases  with  quicunque 
(quacunque  ratiOne,  quaciinque  de  causa,  quocuuqiie  coiisilio). 


502 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


Obs».  10.  In  indefinite  relative  clause!*  four  «jrammntical  forms*  may  be  diiitincrui-^hed  : 

1.  Tlioso  clau>t's  whirli  luive  (jniinmdtiaU  aiitc.ct:denl.-<  in  tlie  principal  hcnicnce.  In 
tlu'se  the  indetinile  relative  airrees»  with  its  antecedent  accordini»  to  tin-  riilfs  in  re<rard 
to  ordinary  relativ<-8  (§  012),  as  :  P^-^-o  vo>  in  oinni  /or/ti/iii,  (/naciOK/ue  erit  oblata.  coni- 
plectar ;  I  shall  embrace  ^ou  in  every  /or(>/n&^  wh<i(f<oever  will  he  ottered.  Cic.  Scist.  O'J, 
146.  [  Tlie  indetinile  relative  (luaruiK^iie  aixn-es»  with  its»  antecedentyw/<7/m,  as  if  it  were 
an  ordinary  relative  : /orfil/id  (jK(V  «rit  ohljiia.]—  I't  aiiiino?- ••Oriim  ad  qiieinnntque  cai/sa 
jx)sfultl/>if  motnm  vocennis  ;  That  we  may  call  their  hearts  to  ir/taferfr  emotion  the  case 
will  recjiiire  (ad  inotiim  <iurmcunque  caii^a  p()stiilat)it ).  Cic.  Or.  2.  27,  115. —  The  antece- 
dent may  be  u/i</erstood  as  a  noun  of  ^'eiieral  import  (persons  or  thinjrs  in  ueneral».  in 
which  instance  it  may  or  may  not  be  implied  in  an  al)solnte  tbrm-adjective  in  tne  prin- 
cipal sentence,  as:  QuoscuiK/ife  de  te  queri  andlvi. .  .jilacavi  (  =  liomines,  quoscunqne 
audlvi,  j)lae:"lvi) ;  I  appeased  eitry  ptrso/i  complainiiii:  of  you.  Cic.  l^ii.  Fr.  1,  i,  2. —  L't, 
g//o(/r////<///^  maxiine  i)n)i)al)ile  oceurrat.  «^  no-tro  jure  lieeat  defiHlere  ;  'I'hat  we  have 
a  riudit  to  defend  tvhaUctr  truest  thing  (  =  whatever  truth)  nuiy  present  itself ;  (  =  rem 
piobibilem,  qtuecuiniue  occurrat).  Cic.  Ott*.  3. 4.  The  «;ratnmatical  antecedents  of  the 
nomiinitives  and  aceusatives  of  qiiisqui-i  atid  quidquiiL  m  classical  lani,'uai,'e,  are  always 
conceived  as  nouns  of  «general  import,  either  undcrsfo.)d  or  imi)lied  in  the  syndetic  an- 
tecediiu  ht,  as:  Promiito,  (jii'vhi'iid  erit  a  te  factum,  id  senatum  comprobaturum  ;  I 
promise  that  the  Senate  will  ajjprove  of  whatever  will  l)e  done  by  you  (  =  oiniils  res 
qnot  a  te  factie  eriint).  Cic.  Fam.  10,  10,  2,—  Posthac  quidqiiid  seripsero,  tihi  pneco- 
niiim  deferam  ;  Whatever  I  may  write  hereafter.  I  will  let  you  do  the  advertising  of  it 
(  =  ejus  rei  or  lifjt'i,  quantcuuqat  or  qutt/u-u/ique  scrip<ero).  Cic.  Att.  l."i,  12,  2. 

2.  The  grammatical  antecedent,  logically  belonging  to  the  i)rincipal  sentence,  may  be 
taken  ov«  r  into  the  clause  as  the  governing  noun  of  the  indefinite  relative  (the  same  as 
ill  ordinary  relative  clauses».  In  this  instance  the  relative  clau-e  (i!>va;/<  inecedes  the 
principal  sentence,  tin;  principal  sentence  being  almost  always  introduced  by  a  sy/idcdc 
antecedent  {is,  hie,  ille  etc.)  of  the  in<lertnite  relative,  which  airrees  wi'ii  the  governing 
noun  of  the  relative  in  number  and  gender,  l)iit  is  placed  in  tinit  case  which  the  gmin- 
tna/lad  antecedent  would  require  if  it  were  expressed  in  the  principal  sentence  :  Sapiens 
ita  acrem  in  oinnTs  i)artls  aciem  iiitendif,  iit,  qitDnciinqne  aifnm  fortflna  invexerif,  hu/ic 
apte  et  (piiete  ferat ;  A  wiso  man  has  so  keen  an  eye  for  all  eventualities  that  he  de- 
cently and  quietly  bears  trhaftvtr  ckdiwe  fate  will  entail  (  =  huiic  caau/n  qutiucuiique, 
or  oninein  aifiuin  que/n).  Cic.  Tusc.  4, 17,  -id.    See  Ex.  20.  21. 

3.  The  governing  noun  of  the  indefinite  relative  may  7iof  belong  to  the  principal  sen- 
tence, so  that  the  clause  ifi  wf/ioiU  any  (jrainmafical  unteccdtnt.  simply  referring /o  ^///? 
reality  of  the  prim  ipal.  predicate,  representing  the  latter  as  true  in  whatever  way  the  un- 
certainty implied  in  the  clause  may  be  verified.  Such  clauses,  which  cannot  be  r<'pre- 
fcuted,  even  by  a  syndetic  anteceifent.  in  the  principal  si-ntence,  have  a  strong  resem- 
blance in  tlieir  form  with  clauses  introduced  by  conjunctions,  passinir  over  into  condi- 
tional and  concessive  clauses  (Ubs.  11):  Ut  qntecunqiiedisseiitieiifinin philosophoiuni  senttn- 
tia  definibusxit,  tatnen  virtus  satis  habeat  ad  vitam  beAiam  priesidii ;  So  that,  whatever  the 
af/inioru^  of  dhtsenting  ]>hilomi>herii  may  he  on  the  lvtnfi<  (of  good  and  evil),  virttie  has  suf- 
ficient j)ower  (is  a  sufiicieat  stronghold)  for  a  h:ippy  life.  Cic.  Tusc.  5.  2'.»  (  —  Quamris 
philo>oplii  disseiitiant.  tamen  etc.  ;  lloictver  /tinch  philosophers  nniy  dissent;  or:  Al- 
though  their  opinions  are  extremely  diverging,  it  will  always  be  true  that  etc.). 

4.  The  fourth  form  of  indefinite  relative  clauses  is  the  adverbial  form,  if  they  are  in- 
troduced by  indefinite  relative  adverhn.  Such  clauses  have  in  every  resjjecr  the  same 
nature  as  liiose  iiitroiluced  by  the  corresi)onding  sim|)le  relative  adverbs,  <;uiy  that  the 
adverbial  relation  is  always  represented  as  an  indefinite  contingency. 

Obs».  11.  All  indefinite  relative  clauses,  since  they  expre-s  a  contingency  both  as  indefi- 
nite and  uncertain,  partake  of  the  nature  1)  of  conditionai.  c!au>es.  which  express  a 
contingency  as  uncertain,  and  eifht-rm*  d«'rtnite  or  indefinite;  2)  of  conckssivk  clauses 
■which  express  a  coniinirency  either  as  definite  and  certain,  or  as  indefinite  and  uncer- 
tain. Hence  each  of  these  three  kinds  of  clauses  pass  over  into  each  other,  and  olteii 
the  same  thou;,'ht  may  be  expressed  in  the  form  of  any  of  these  three  claii.-es.  Here  be- 
long conditional  clauses  with  H  q>/i<.  or  with  si  tnaxi/ne  ;  the  disjunctive  clauses  intro- 
duced by  give. .  sive,^  which  belong  to  both  the  conditional  and  concessive  clauses  ;  and 
concessive  clauses  introduced  by  quainris,  as  :  Quie  yi  tnaxii/ie  meminissem,  tamen 
illlus  temi>oris  similitudinem  jam  eequi  dei)erem  ;  If  I  remembered  this  «t'^r*  ^■o  itv//.  I 

*  This  particle '^^r' it»  evidently  the  came  indefinite  'concessive' particle  which  is 
'\ised  in  the  rend<'rin;:of  all  indefinite  relative  clauses.  Many  irnimmarians  and  nutho's, 
not  comprehendin<r  the  force  of  this  particle,  have  substituted  for  it  the  absurd  negative 
panicle  'never'.  These  would  render  :  'If  I  remembered  Xh\»  never  t^o  well',  making 
thus  'never 'an  adverb  of  time,  which  would  introduce  in  this  construction  a  relation 
wholly  foreign  to  it. 


CL^VSSIFICATION   OF  RELATIMilS. 


503 


would  nevertheless  now  be  bound  to  follow  the  precedents  of  that  time.  Cic.  Att  9  13  3 
[The  clause  *iy//,g  d  muxi/ne  meminl<S( m'  may  be  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  concessive 
clause  •  qiiainris  ea  meminissem',  which,  according  to  Obs.  9,  9,  has  the  force  of  an  in- 
definite relative  clause.  The  clause  may  also  be  expressed  as  an  indefinite  relative  cliu«c 
in  the  form  '  Quidqtnd  de  ea  re  meminissem  '].—  Errant  d  qui  in  belio  omuls  sccundos 
r.rum  eventus  exspectent.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  7,  29  (  =  quicunque  exspectant).—  Tu  melius 
existimnre  videris  de  ea,  si  quam  nunc  habemus,  facultate.  Cic.  Brut.  87  (  =  de  e5  quam- 
cunque  habemus,  faculiille).  The  ditlerence  between  clauses  with*j  quis  and  quicuTiQue 
orquisqulsniny  be  seen  from  the  following  passage  :  Scriha»  si  quid,  vel  potius  ouidouid 
veniet  «n  mentem;  I  wish  you  would  write  (/"you  think  of  anything,  or  nilhktr  whatever 
you  can  think  of.  Cic.  Att.  9,  19,  4.—  Sed  sint  quamvif  boni,  non  essent  meiiOres  quam 
nos.  Cic.  Att.  9.  13.  0  (  =  quamris  sint  boni,  or  ,si  t/iaxime  honi  sint.  or  sire  boni  sint  sire 
minus:  or  quahscunque  suit).—  Qxamvis prud^ns  &6.ixv^\lvii\iX\xm  sis,  tamen,  nisi  mairnte 
tij)i  cune  essent.  uumquam  ea  res  tihi  tain  belle  in  mentem  \enlre  posset  Cic  Att  12 
37,  2  (  =  si  maxims  sajfias  ;  or  quatitacunque  tua  prudeiitia  sit;  or,  expressed  without 
iidehiilteness  :  Quamquam  es  prudentissimiis».— Veniet  leinpus  mortis  «r«  retracta- 
bi.s,  nre  properabis.  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  31  {  =  veniet  si  retractabis.  veniet  si  properabis  •  or  ve- 
wu-tquamtis  retractabis,  or  .?//i(/v^/i</ facies  ut  retractes  ant  properes)  -Hence  clauses 
with,sire-^u'tareusedas  explanatory  coordinates  of  indefinltive  relative  clauses  ■  Sed 
vtcunque  (i.  e.y,\^),^eu  injuncta  sen  suscepta  foret  militia,  fiiiem  aliquein  militandi*  fieri 
lequum  esse  (dixit) ;  But  t>e  this  as  it  may,  whether  the  military  service  was  a  compuUorv 
or  a  voluntary  one,  etc.  Liv.  32.3.-  On  account  of  this  logical  identity  of  concessive  and 
iiKlefiiiiie  relative  clauses,  concessive  clau.<es  with  quamquam  (by  doubling  the  inter- 
rogative y //am  in  the  manner  of  an  indefinite  relative),  have  even  the  same  external 
lorn,  as  indelinite  relative  clauses,  while  those  introduced  by  etsi  borrow  the  form  of 
conditional  clauses.  *"iiii  ui 

Obs.  12.  The  regular  mood  of  indefinite  relative  clauses  is  the  indicative  the  rules 
on  the  mood  in  onlinary  relative  clauses  (§  014)  being  not  applicable  to  th's  kind  of 
causes;  wine  in  English  the  potential  with  may  ov  miqht  is 'regularly  used  in  t  ese 
clauses.  But  the  subjunctive  is  used  \)  if  such  clauses  may  be  resolved  iiL  hv^otlieti^ 
cal  clauses  with  pret-rite  subjunctives,  as  :  Vtncunque  essum,  una  cum  eis  victus  c"sem  • 
nherev^r  I  were,  I  would  be  defeated  together  with  them.  Cic.  Att.  7.  3  2  Flf  the  indefi- 
niteness  is  i-emoyed  from  this  clause,  it  becomes  a  hypothetical  clause  ^  ^iibi  es^em  x\c. 
tus  6^s;..t,/i.]  See  Ex.  20.-  '2)  Sometimes  subjunctives  are  used  in  clauses  inirSSdbv 
doubled  relative  adverbs  (.//,/^  ubiubi),  according  to  the  anal.^i^yofconcelsiTe  elites 
introdi.ced  by  quamvu<.  as  in  the  passa-e,  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  29  (quoted  Obs  9  7). ''"a,*;^ 
Att.  lo.  25  (quoted  OBS.  9,  10).- 3)  In  post-Ciceronian  Lalinitv  the  Hibjmic  iVe  i^  f  e- 
onently  i.se.l  ,n  all  clauses  denoting  an  indefiniie  past  conti^.gencv  as:  S/^^r^^^^^^^^^ 
irtor  prel.endisset,  trii.anus  mitti  jubehat.  Liv.  :f,  11.  See  p.  331,_Yn  ;onye  paSa  ?•« 
the  suhpinctive  rests  on  inferior  readings,  as  in  the  passa-e  Cic.  Top  2l  w  Ire  Hie  vnl- 
e-dta  ^quacunque  de  re  ,tnl\  according  to  the  manuscrii)ts,  must  he  dian-ed  iuto  sunt 

These  exceptional  subjiinctives  must  he  distiniriiished  from  those  subi'inctives  whiVh 
acconling  to  the  general  rules  (p.  3s5  foil.),  must  he  used  in  all  depende  "la  isS  Tht.s 
a  quasM.blique  subjunctive  occurs  in  the  passages  Cic.  Or.  ti,  IH  00  quote  IObV  9  2)^ 
|.iil,ol,l,que  subjunctives  in  Liv.  2,  '27  (  quoted  Obs.  9.  3».  and  in  Ex  1;  .^  4  ,ia!^«„i>ob> 
lique  subjunctives  in  Cic.  Fin.  1,  4,  10  «pioied  Obs.  9.  5).  Subjnnct^e^b  attract  on 
oc.iir  in  Cic.  ad  Brut.  1.  M,  10  (Obs.  9.  3^ :  Fam.  0,  4.  1  (Obs.  9"  3) -Tusc  5  29  (Obs  in  ?^ 
and  in  Ex.  1.  20.  21. ;  a  subjunctive  of  the  second  person  in  Ci?Fin  4;il  Tb  (Obs.  9  6)' 


;;:J.;, ?-,"!" ''\  'l'\7"  '"^P'^'^'S  Q>^idquid  Ktiodiomm  viro.um  feininamm  "est,  cum  omni 
peciin  a  nostra  Komam  veniunt.  ei  <miiii  auroet  argento,  quidouid  uuhlici       o^dmlili 

iu-nnlucmu"  I'if  45'2f  "'^'c^"^"T  -'•-'^^";^  cori.o?aM  Xos^Heii^le  pSin- 

^im  '^r  «:ii  A;/'eo?;^r^;,^:f;!!!;^?  ^i?i^^r:^'V--' ^*^'^-:  ^«i^^n-  refeft  mc  quid 


A    t\      ••■•1  ^••-"'>.-     •■■•   ..v.iji.ii,  qu.Mu  f.1  t-aoem  in  piuris  paitiatur"    Ou  nt   12'^ 

Id 

veiit,  se,u.e^.i^-;;,u.e,  vaid;rv;;.r^'^;^rA;v;v4:r2:^ 

J;esJ.aJ^t^^^ro^ecmIvsis^ 
3  lu  r'^.'*-"'""'"'  ^i'^'^^V'f  i'ifffcedif,  a  delay  intercedes,  intervenes,  is  interposed  - 

veH  e'^V"-i'7oViV\  "Sf ''tT'  ?h^'^^  ""^  propcse.-e  generous;  a  p.edioffive  ad- 
>ero,  see  p.  .J.i8  (Obs.  1).  p.  .«9.— ^  by  the  singular,  in  P:n-  sh.—f*  to  devote  — »  to  riivirlp 
among.-io  p,.rs<.ns.  n  partitive  g.nitive:  n.j.ply  auri  et  arqediTrviXr  •  whateiir 
£■ '".'''hoT ''^ ''.'f'"'  ^^  joining  the  adjective;  p,.6/t«  an(iV^r<W  with  the  am^^^^ 
dent.-i-  house.-'»  deposit  (in  a  heaf)).~M  persoiis.-i^ /jo/f^/J/i  alicuius  mrmitterl  tn 
place  at  one  s  disposition.-'*  cdloquial,  instead  of  vulf^.-^-'  rS  sehX^  ^'^  iloT 
cumstances  are'.-i«  with  the  force  of  a  future:  'we  will  unquestiouabiy  oppose'. 


oOi 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


orit.  iaMeVt^rroH.  Th.  Att.  0,10,  0-  8.  ^?'''''''^''"?''^)';^^  par^  peraifOnma  ]^ 
mort<>  ('jrsaiis  niitabit,  Ininc  in  h.»stinm  minicro  habt;bit.  II).  Att.  14  I.J.  -«•—;'•  .»i  ' '-^ 
ex  '  mare  •..!( ,  q.ih.isanuim  <>tWciis3  Atti.-u.n  ob.trinxcns^  oisd.-m  mc  tibi  obli- 
-n  u  "  ton-,  lb.  F'a.n.  r^/ IS.  ^i.-  10.  K-«)  bonos  vim.,  ant  eos  quinwque  (licrntur 
b  ni  s.'ntiar,  otiainsi  n.enf.  lb.  Att.  7.  7,  7.-  11.  ^^a.nnlio-  q„odru„qne  n.borib'  In.-n.t 
ex  o.nnib  s  populi.-*  contraxorant-.  Liv.  10,  14.-  1-2  llari.m  reium  aliqiml  a-.-nt.i- 
bu^'Or'W'/iyi-intervc'ntu^''  impediinento  est.  Quint.  1,  2  1-2.- 13.  PneK.r  o^rfjiio 
coM-ultam»-  -cnti  ajcl)at  ;  nam  vtnn.'<  partis'»  mehor  r..rtnna  bHli  csset,  ad  ejus  ^..cie- 
tafom  im-linatflrosi'.  Liv.  :J1,  ;52.- 14.  .Memim•n^'^  qmnUtaniqne  tibi  acccssiOnrs'» 
IkMit  forta.ije  ,-t  di-nitatis,  cas  tc  non  potuisso  conscqm.  nisi  mt-i>*  puer  ohm  consiliis 
arni<-(-  Cic  Fam.  2,  1  2.-  15.  Dem--abit>\  (///^///'///^^"«"^"''i  "^l  euin  eni  dcla- 
Mmi«  ■  Plain  P(PM  ••}  4  2S.~  16.  Kx  eo  quod  dico»».  qwmtulum  id  cunquee.^t,c\\\\a  fa- 
ciam  iudicilri^o  p.,'te-t.  lb.  Or.  2,  23,  07.-17.  Q>mh.<cu„q,(e  Himus.  tainen  hiec  qu;u 
m-Tiiumu.  pitinon  deb.umus'-".  Liv.  20.  17.-  18.  Virtfiu-m  .pn  adoptus  cnt.  7/6Kvm- 
Lii/ehlV-entimn^'^  a  nobis  diliirCtur.  C'ic.  N.  I).  1,  4t.-  10.  Hjc  ^n^vr  qj^otte^^nnnrie  me 
viderit  rn-emiscof".  ac  pestcm-»  suam  i-t  patris  s^ui  s^eso  dicct  videre.  ib.  ^e^t_.  «).«, 
14«i  -  20  Alranius  t^e  m  ca-tra  rrcc-i)it.  sic  paiTilus  ut.  qvlcnnqiieACCMh^^aX  ca-us.  hunc 
Quieto  et'  aniuo  a.mno  ferret,  (^vs.  H.  C.  1.  75.-  2L  Licet  videre,  quale.<c>n,qHe  summi 
civitiliis  viri  fucrint.  fal^m  civitiliem  fMi>se  ;  quaoinqxe  muiatio  morum^-'  in  pnncipi- 
bus^*  exstiteril-'^,  eand-m  in  popnlo  secfltani.  Cic.  Leg.  3,  14,  31. 

II.  ANTECEDENTS  OF  RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 
§  613.  The  !^n-aminatical  antecedent  of  a  clause,  intioduced  by  a  rela- 
tiv'e  adjective  is  either  a  noun,  or  a  (personal)  puonoun,  expressed  or  un- 
derstood. The  relative  adjective  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gender 
and  NUMBEii  (for  exceptions  see  Obs.  3,  and  R.  10,  Ons.  2. 3).  The  case 
of  the  relative  is  determined  by  the  construction  of  the  relative  clause 

(^G13, /i\  10,  OiJS.  l.foll.). 

'ob«    1    Tbe  frrammatical  antocedont  is  always  conceived  as  a  member  of  both,  the 
relative  clau.e"an<l  the  principal  sentence.     In  the  cl.m>k.  the  r.lafire  adj.rhve  e^\^i^v 
takes  its  place,  or  is  its  attril)Hte.     In  the  prineipal  sentenck  it  ;/('///  have  a  >yndeiK  an- 
tecedent of  the  relative  as  an  attribute.     To  understand  ilie  lorm  of  the  relative  adjec- 
tive   the  clause  must  be  separated  from  the  principal  sentence,  and  the  rehiiivc  adjective 
mu<t  be  rei)lac.d  by  its  grammatical  ant.ce.lent.  as:  Arhons  sent  a-ncola   quarnni  ad- 
spicietbaccam  ips/numquam;  A  fanner  plants  tr.e^,  the  Iruit  o^  which  he  will  never 
pee    Cic   Tu>«c   1   14   31      The  two  constituent  sentences  are  :  ])  Arbores  sent  a<;ricola . 
2)  Arboi'um  baccamaspiciet  ipse  numquam.     Eitiier  of  the  two  sentences  may  be  made 
dependent  on  the  other  in  tint  form  of  a  relative  clause.  an(   tlie  relative  takes  in  re^'ard 
to  .'ender  number,  and  case,  the  -rammaiical  form  which  the  common  word  has  in  that 
geirtence  in  which  the  relative  is  >ubstituted.     If  introduced  in  the  lirst  sentence  it  must 
be  placed  in  the  accusatire  (  Q>tas  seiit  a-iicola  arhirum  baccam  aspirnt  ete.  :  or  A-ricola 
arbwum  qmu^  serit  baccam  etc.).     If  introduced  in  the  se(  ond  hentence,  it  must  be  in 
the  <'enitive  plural,  the  sentence  takini;  the  form,  as  quoted  above.     In  either  way.  the 
rebuive  takes  the  same  wnnher  m\i\  qeialer.  namely  that  ot  its  antecedent,  but   its  ca.<e 
is  ditiereiit  according;  to  tiie  case  wliich  itie  noun  arbor  would  have  in  the  same  sentence. 
Obs    '>    If  the  relative  adjective  refers  to  several  co-ordinate  antecedents,  it  ip  in  the 
v^urai  and,  if  tiie  antect^dents  have  ditiereiit  ;;enders.  is  i)laced  in  the  m(wcuhne  il  the 
antecedents  are p^rsons^    If  theantece(U-ids are  /A?,k/.>;.  the  rehitive^iseither  m  tliew*?^</<rr 
"~i~Mos»t   ac^eptaT)le7— ■■'  desperados.— 3   services;—*  obstrinqere,  to   lay  under  obji-a 
tioiis  —6  ohUqrifiun  es>>e  aHq'ta  re  to  be  bound  for  somethini:.— •  to  tall ;  to  i)erish.— 
■>  i-oh'ir  is  technically  used  of  the  -serviceable'  part  of  a  population,  t   e.  of  that  part 
which  is  capable  •)f  military  duty. -«  the  whole  p..i)ulation.-«   to  collect,   to  dralt.— 
10  to  those  which  are  en-ajjed  in  anything'  of  that  kind.--''  interf,ren«e.-|2  t.  e  esse  ; 
impersonal  passive  :  'that  it  was  excellently  consulted  to  the  people'  ^  that  the  peo- 
ple was  pia<ed  in  an  excellent  posititm  by  these  resohitn.ns.-'a  p^i'ty--'*  t'!*^^;""'*! 
•  -raviiate'  towards  the  alliance  with  that  of  the  two  parties  etc.— >*  see   p.  .joU,  Obs.  1. 
—1«  Render  by  '  will  be  added  to  \— »^  to  deny.—»»  aliquid  dtlafu/n  ^.s7  ad  me,  I  have  re- 
ceived somethin.'.  — >»  from  what  I  say.-  "«  a  conjecture  may  be  formed  as  lo  what  1  am 
doiii"  -2»  p  379'Obs.  5,  d.—^'^  The  locative  adverl)s  frequently  take  the  partitive  jreni- 
tive7/e«^^</M  or  ierranini  in  the  meaninj,' '  where  in  the  world '  (  ^  quo  terne  loco).- 
»3  to«'roau  —**  the  de^troyer.— "»  morals.— ^»  rulers.— 2'  to  take  place,  to  occur. 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  EELATIVES. 


505 


(which  Render  is  often  used,  even  if  the  antecedents  are  of  the  same  gender)  or  it  a^n-eea 
w.  h  the  las   co-ord.nate.    Often  the  relative,  m  this  instance,  takes Ihe  ZrZqvi^Z'' 
in  the  plural.     If  the  antecedents  are  partly  persons,  and  partly  thin-s   the  relative  ^Pn 
erally  takes  the  gender  of  the  persons.    See  Ex.  1-5.  °  '         '^«^'ative  gen- 

Obs.  .3  If  the  antecedent  is  a  colt.ectivb  noun,  comprising  many  individuals  tl.P 
relative  is  sotnetimes  placed  in  the  jylural,  as  if  the  antecedent^were  a  iZral  denoting 
the  individuals  c()mpns-ed  in  the  collective.  But  this  is  generally  the  ca%  only  if  hf 
predicate  ot  the  clause  denotes  an  action  which  does  not  refer  to  the  colIectfve"dea  b  t 
o  the  single  persons.  See  Ex.  6-8.-  Sometimes  if  the  antecedent  represen tVa  Sn  W 
t  e  name  of  n  thing  or  by  a  noun  of  a  gender  different  from  that  of  the  lerboi  melnt 
the  relative  is  placed  in  the  gender  required  by  ihGi^erson.  Ex.  9.  10. 

tnJ.f^^eml^rir^^^^Cio^^vrrr'  f -^'Jq  "^l/^'i^  lyoj-yniMtw^.tmqve^.XnB  misericordiam  nos- 
pu    ntV'  m  i3-,vu  t«    S  II'  r\?'  't'T     ""i^,«^/.«'^^«\^I"e  divia<^,  oua  prima  mortaies* 
imi.im  .iuuuciuni  .  ^aJi.  Cat.  .ib,  4.— 3.  Attali  regis  legatus  i>ostukbat  nnrljtrnnfitn,, 
qut>,  qnce  ad  Chium  navaii  prcplio  capta  essent,  "estitui.  LiH^  S"-'4    kLZ-  on' 
pida.  Viet,  castella,  agfi.  qui  ad  Pisidiam  ver-unt«,  (dati  sunt)    lb  37   56  -  5    M?hi 

^:^lTl^TV'\r'''r''^??'T  ^t  i.....V^;n'oVtare  vo^is  in  luam  inc^f^s 
CIC.  J  IS.  20,  4b.--  b.  In  gratiam  et  favOrem  no/MiU7tl-i  JiMrnrtha,  venit  miorvm  nflri*  sno 

"    r.!^T.."iL"  V  v""'*  "*^^'^^»f"'-  ^^e  gravius  in  e.im  consulerSttir-     SahS^I?  8 - 
,*;•./.;;/ ^^''^•'^"'''  omnem  quern  ex  omni  provinciiT  coacrum  habSbat  prsemittit  ^v£ 
videant,  quas  m  partis  hostes  iter  faciant.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  15.-  8   AitTvSemS  ter  erVf^^^ 
COS  qui  dicant  aS  Academia  sensus  eripi'o,  a  qvihns  ^  mquara  t  ctiim  "  ^  «ut  s^^^^^ 
rem  ',  aut  colOrem   aut  sonumi^  nullum»3  Jsse^  Cic.  Ac.  2,^S^  103  -  ^Illa  FuH^^^^^ 
C  odius)  y.n  non  pluris  fecerat  Bonam  DeamM  quam  trls'sorOresi^   inmunftlJem  est 
illorum'«  sententiis  assecflrns.  Ib.  Fam.  1,  9,  15.-  K».  IlabSbam  ininiTti  m  non  ^   \f« 
rum  sed  duo  importflnan  prodigia^\  quo.  eirestas.  y^/o.a3ris  Sign  "«  ma^nkfldJ'JLo^ 
Icviias,  improbitas,  tnbflno  plebis  w;^^/ric/05  addixerat^o.  lb.  Sest.  nf^?  '  ^ 

Hem   5.  If  the  antecedent  is  a  noun,  it  is  expressed  {a)  either  in  both 
the  relative  clau.se,  and  the  principal  sentence,  or  {b)  only  in  the  «rLS 
sentence,  or  {c)  only  in  the  cUiuse.  .      k  j      xy  m  lue  pimcipai 

cii?afs*eJ'tenee  hf  wbLh  ^^'l'^  '"'  to  express  the  grammatical  antecedent  only  in  the  prin- 

wt--^:^-  .Se  iv'-;r^i;;:  ;sl:;;ri^^';:;;^-^^ 

ippSifillMilsilii 

lleUx-  ,an^,to/j  were  found  ;„  ,cM,-h  i/uM  a  l-arllonlaraccontwaV  rendered  «0   0^^ 

n«  Bi.iit.r  „J  •  """^^ffi^Q'/M  ojrttnf,  I  have  somethimr  in  abundance  — ^  the  rantivpH 

the  r««  "'  '^r/""^;"l«'-eda8  things,  and  aiv  here  treated  grammatieally  so,  which  is  rarelv 

le  r-"     iITh?;.7lrr''''r.  Fn'r'  r"'  If;  ""K'^P^'-'-''  «he  good  godte^"  2  Cy' 

"  debts.-.'?  i;.7.Lfiver«w?p^,T;;'i;f,t;,K,;^ 


50G 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  RELATIVES. 


aim 


aui  virl..  i.atQra  dedit ' ;  both    '  ^^.^>'-J/'^  a      ff  •re.  t  .'ra.nnuilical  nluiiou, ;  To  Iho^e 
in  the  (lut.ve,allhouo;hth(-c  'l;^'^'^^  ','\\f/   "^j  ^J'Ui  "t^  of  otner  kiiuls.  nature  l.a;i 
beasfs  who  live  (literally  Mvhose  food  ^)  by  .y^\'^':L  o  ii'/*' ^«  /•.^«a*  ad  me  .crips.st. 
given  either  .tren-lh  or  f^^if^^^fti.lVhinuis -^he^yndet  ca^  fis- 1),  in-  omitted 

i;„ram  videhi.n.is  (  =  deeu  J<';;^";  J  \!JX'4  r^^^^^^^  i«  governed  by  the  «ame  ,>re- 

with  its  preposition,  Hince  the  '^*^''^  '\*;/"j;|,f  ,f '' ^  ,o  nie,  we  will  ^ee  when  we 

position)  ;   AM  tho,e  m,ui^  on  ^'^^}\l^l'>'^^l^^ ^^^^^^  relative  are  in  djf- 

meet.  Cic.  Att.  12,  :^.-- Ex  'J- |     II  the  ^^^^^  „„^  jrenera  y  be 

ferent  cases    or  «"y^'^"^'^.    y^^^f^^^  fj^^^^^^^^  the  aecueative)  :  ^««  cupiditateH 

«milted,   unless  it  is  in  <,»^«. ,'«>''LV^,^/,;f,%^7  -  f^^''^'   ^'xplentur) ; 

a  uatOra  proticisciintnr  facile  explentur  (-</"<«  5«/  tflod  Cic  Fin.  i,  16.  5.J.-  The 
%fu,se  appetite.^  w/uc/i  arise  «••;;;"  "ll'^'-^'vj^l'tcfntcc^^^^^^^^  or  understood) 

placin-  of  the  relative  clause  }]^^'!'^'ll^^,^^^^^^  claise  '. 

n  the  principal  sentence  is  ^^  >^'<l    ^^J^^^^f'  f.^*  ,..^^^^^^  ,o  the  relative  clauPe  even  if 

ih)  SouRM  lines  the  grammatical  aniecede.tis^^t  an.  ic^^^^         Hut  this  is  admissible  only 
the  latter/.>//o..w  its  princ  pal  sentencc^  o^^^^  he  ce  can  occur  only  if  the 

Uxhi'  ■<!/n<i^fi<'  ^tnfecedtnt  is  omitted  at  the  s«>"  «;;  ,  J  rf  the  (i»-cs  of  the  syndetic  antece- 
syn.letic  antecedjM.t  would  be  in  '^;/?^>"'\"J  .V,^'';:[,!  ,am  Sd  U ui.lat  in  libris  et  guam 
dent  and  of  >''«  relative  are  the  sail,     s     IL^^^^^  .eipublica>  rjuan,) ;  This  i« 

m.xime  probat  fef"P^ra(ioru^mvv,\n^^^^^^^^^^  „^,,,t  of 

that  hidance  of  the  government    '  'f^  ,^.\        .J/;^/^^^^^^^^^^^  ^  ^  habeo  .«.v  litteras  quas 

ad  eui.dcm  misisti)  ;  I  have  ^''^/''''fl,^,^^^^^^  iecisset)  ;  That  the  come- 

31. _  l><,ptilo  ut  placSrent  (pui,<  f^cls^ety<///  /<i^  (  -J'^  m*^^^^^  _  rpjjj^\.„„^,ruction  oc- 

5i  .s  he  had  made,  should  please  the  f;^,  >',';• /^li.A^^^^^  absolute  as  :  Ex- 

curs  also  it  the  antecedent  would  he  a  ^^  '^'J;',^  i  j'^^  *    ';.,V."/J  «^^^  he  had  explaine.l 

positis  ry./as-  in  Corsica  |v.v  J^';'^^»''^^,^   =4^    "^^^^^^  ,,ause  might  he  Uken 

Ihe  deeds  (which)  he  had  P^'rform^d   u  tors,  a      1^  u^^^^^^^^^  Antecedents  are  thus  left 

as  an  interrogative  cuuise)    ^^'/ •  ;^,T' f/-    ..,7/,Vi  .(v  .'overned  hy  ditlerent  prepositions, 

cut  if  the  syndetic  ^"t^-c^'^^^"^^       ^i^  Ibi  Oi  icipT    c////*  <^,nfM^s  anXnWclum  vnef,piis 
alth<.u<Mitheyareintlie  sanccas^as     IbiCn.    a^  ,^^„^.^^  ^^„j^ 

constitlt(  =  onn  ds  copns  de  (/'«'V'-^,' "  i  iv  o-,  ?>  ^-  In  poetry,  the  grammatical  ante- 
Uuy.^e  troops  which  m-o  in-'"';;;";;'    !^';V  ,^\^iL\ive'ctuse  is    ften^\lace^  relative 

cedent,  which  is  thus  translerred  ««  J  ^.,fV,r  ,<  in»    a  member  of  the  principal  sentence, 
attribute,  so  as  to  have  the  »l>P^''Vrance  of  btin,  a  n,un  nr^^^^^^^^^^^^         i^^^^  ^^^^^^^  .^ 

although  it  is  not  in  the  case  l};!)'';'"'],^^^^^^^^^  urbem  statuo,  ea 

not  admissible  in  prose  ;  as  :  /'/^'^/f ,;{'',  .our"    V  i-  .En.  1,  573.-  Naucratam  quern 
vestraest);  Theci/y.»t7*icViI(s  ml       inld.sj^^^^^^^  ^.^.^,      ,Va'/m//ex, 

convenire  volui,   is  in  navi  non   ^''«^^^  T  .'J'''"',.;jf  Amim   4  1,  \.- PafrOnus  gut  vobis 
nh^^n  I  wished  t«>  .oe,  xyas  no    o"  !^>^e  sh  p.     ^  ;^^t_Am  j.i   4   i  ^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^^^^.^^^ 

fuitf.itilrus  perdid.stis     =   iuipa irm^  omission  of  syndetic  antece- 

you  had.  riaut.  Au  .  2,  2,  l'^-"  '\  "wP/'o  nic  ooets  hardly  any  of  the  above-mentioned 

afferri  tibi  (  =  'J ".'"\'' '''''[''.'' i'\l']^]l^,^^^^^^^^^^  of  the  relative  clause  is  taken 

r "lllliVC  Udjuclivc,  is  Callwl  •  InCOUI-OKATION  of  TUL  ANTtChUtM    . 

principal  sentence,  while  the  relatne  *^7';<r";^^.  ,,(  '     ;,ii,.,.tive  denotes  the  oeneual 

form  il  used  (a)  if  «IV' ^^  h''"'"^.»',;;!!!!.';  I  ,  e  •  e  t  b?  ,  's  s  ^ Ic >.'  (h)  if  the  ante- 
CLAss  of  nouns  to  v^•lHch  the  gram    at.calac^  J  ;^^,^.^^  ,,^^,,,,  ^,,  ^, 

cedent  is  to  the  vroverni.g  'V  "\"' X, /,/"''  "LS-i(^^^  leqa>i-l^natio :  Romani- 
corresponding  roW«r^<<?«?><0'//i  m  the  '^'"-'/V^Sfve  ^-m  of  course  ;*o/ a-ree  witli  the 
no,nI    In  this  form  «'f  .t^';-  -^/^^^^^ /^^  ^^^!  fJ  ^  th^  'hi«  ^^^-' 

grammatical  antecedent  of  the  dai-^e      V'.n    F  th    ai  iiositicui   placin-  the  Latiurfovern- 

-i  In  L^^Thri^^i:^:^..-^^^^^  'i.i';;^ de-cVlbed  ilbo  e  m  1  ?  1  e'coir. 

^^Z  iJc  S^i^^^^o^  pS."  J^t!^^^  TlKfLaSL  and  English  idioms 


507 


exprccpcd  in  Latin,  must  be  recast  in  the  form  mentioned  almvp  ««  •  m^«  • 
jusMt  in  olta.<^iro  quodam,  gtjo;  est  ar^o/-  .Etnje  hi  fom  S.^  /J.  J  ^*  Hominem  suspend! 
the  genus) ;  lie  ordered  lue  man  t..SuS:'  on  a,.  XilXri  %}1'V^'V'-''^  ""^'  «''^ 
market-place  (a  tre,  on  th,-  market-place  "of  he  u'u';  of 'j^t.^f  rfe"  v  '"  ' '^^"'a 
Singulis  sepfni  //wy(/a  tri.ici  dahantur  Qui  nuMll/^  niZ.ulLf^  r^'  ^^^- } ''^''-  2.  3,  18.- 
tur  i^u.di.s  being  the  specie«,  and  JJSX?  ^^T  ^ "^J^!^^^,^!^^^^  «Pl'^HS: 
(peeks)  of  Wheat  were  g  veii,  a  measure  whir/t  (nr-KvlnU,,:''  -lo  each  seven  modii 
iius' at  Athens.  Nep.  Alt.  3  5  -  lli  mm  T./iJ^^i  k^^^  niea.snre  )  is  called  '  medim- 

e.st  in  proviMca.  (yU.^/;.^  a  phiral ,  o  n^^S/s^^^^^  Quc,  cMtas 

to  th  •  nouns  denoting  the  inhal,itant^s  ot  auTc    y\!r  co  m  corresponding 

are  the  graniM.aiical  aniecedent.s,  th  f  "mVrnh      noun  of  Jh    ?  /!h  ^'''  "'"'"'f^'*  "'"  I^^'"«""« 

i»ct,ies;.  ±j,  uppuis  negotia  procflrat 


•ill  Li,;r  ^V  '  "*!"'  «'^  iiequeniiy  made  th( 

ovc,-  i„,„  ,„lvvr.'iHl  rulativi-  c  alls,  "ami  „r,vi,n  l,  I  ,   i  "  ';'?"«•»  "f  ""cli  foi-ms  pass 
inane.  <„/i,,lei„m  hoc  esse  qii"    lain  "C-  ,«1/1    ■r.lin    .'''''•'''  r"°  l^"li>'"''-  '"'  :  Evlli- 

els eq.iiMiMi';;';:^' iic  M,  "'^::!1  n;'":;''^^^^^^^ 


iH'.n  Ihrimn  in.o  piison    "  e.  B  ij  •    «?,%''"'  ^"""'  '*•'"'=''  "'«,  all  nalions,  had 
10  Ihe  in.livi.liial  i,  imes  of     „:  amb:,::.,"i„ '''l?  .V/™'™"  «»«««'  would  have  reftrrc  I 

"'4:;'.?;;:'"";:''^  '"^  -Min-Uld  iir!hSsTar;;;;-,aVfon,'    '""""  '""  ■"""«  ■■«"I'assador-, 

onii::'S{.^:^:;::^Ti::::i;zss^     'ii^/^a^z^r^^  «-«i  '^  ,o.„.u.,  „„„„ 

nyms  (as  />(w/,/u  and  ces)  or  with  iff.  -.m  ''"  ,^'rn  ally  the  same,  hein-  either  svno- 
q  Fal>ius  aliquot  mainlnas  ^.J-    ,^7 "S  'T'"-  '•^'*  ^'^'''''"  «"^  diel): 

faciendam  cu/avit;  Q.  Fabi,f^t  c  ie  ,•  wonnnv/rl''^'"''''"  ^'"^  ^'«"«"^  «^dein 
luulct-monev)  he  bulk  a  tempi.  ",' Venus  iiri"  3,  SeJZf^'-  ^''^  ''•f  ^^'^^'^''^  <«"«• 
Jour  days,  a  ^' umber  of  dalKv/dTuo^^^^^^^  S^natedecreed  a  thank>givin^  o/* 

was  decreed  for  a  tha^sgfvi^^^^Yno  fonm^^  war   L  v'^s'i?^'  "^  ^^  '"""^  ^"^^  ">»  ^^1^^^'^ 


differ 
ti 


Imposition  is^asit'S-elV,'';;;;;!;     ed'l^n-^.:'^:^^.!^  fi"^'i^  "H 

rtlat^^e  18  an  absolute  adjective.  See  Item.  8 


apposition   i^   ««  it  Wo  o   "        7-       '',":■  ^ening  rtouii  t/i  apjx>sii 

relative  is  an  ///..w,,/...,!,-::.*:..""'..  *^™  ^^  •"«  apposition  is  most  Irequently  used  if  the 


'508 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


turn,  in  which  instnuce  the  pyndotic  antocodent.  lantvm  is  conornlly  oTpropepd  in  the 
principjil  sentence,  hs;  \&i:u\\\>taiitiiin  In  latitiuiinem  j»  itehut  v'mw/'/m/ori  aciesinstructa 
occiipare  poterat;  Tlii;»  hill  contaimd  so  7/jvcA  gr/ow/it/ as  an  army  drawn  up  for  battle 
could  occupy.  Cies.  B.  G.  2,  8.—  Se.-  Ex.  20-25. 

1.  Tantiim  helium,  tani  dinturnum,  tarn  lonjjo  latCquc  dippfrsnm'.  <7»/o  bello  omr\f% 
pontes  premehautur,  PompPjus  extrCnia  hieinc  apparavit',  incdijl  jpstsl'e  conleci».  Cic. 
l>e".  M.  12. —  2.  Erant  oninlno  itinira  du<>,  qu'ihvs  itimrihii.'i  domo^  exire  poK-eiit.  Cics. 
B.  O.  1,  6.-3.  Antefuixinni*  Clodii.  quoinfundn  facile  inille  hominuin  versabanlur», 
superiOrem  se  putilrat  Milo?  Cic.  Mil.  20.  hi.—  1  Tanti  7nn'>fidi'^  crimen'.  ckI  maUffrio 
tarn  iIl^iil;nc  ftipplicinin  esr  constilfltuni**.  pro]):Tre  te  cense;*  posse  tnlibiis  viiis?  lb. 
Kosc.  Am.  2(».— 5.  Quarn  quisque  in  partfitn''  casu  devC'iiit,  qtKrque  primo  .«if/na  con- 
ppexit,  ad  h(ec  constititio.  C:l>s.  B.  G.  2,  21.— (5.  Hiineril"  deleta.  q>iO'<  civu^  belli  ca- 
lamitas  reiiciuos  feceiat'^,  fi  s»ese  Thermisi»  colliH-jTiant"*.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  2,  3.').— 7.  Homi- 
nes sapientis,  (-.r  (jtnhus  rfhus  maxime  respnblica  labrnat'^.  ^jv  niaxiine  niedCri  con- 
venit'"*.  II).  liosc.  .Am.  53.  154.—  S.  Vinces'^,  hi  hoc  statiieiis'»,  (jiKirnin  Idndmn  <:lo- 
riain  adanijlris'",  quihiis  artibna  de  laxdea  comparatitur,  in  eis  elaborandinri-"  'tibi  e-se). 
11).  Fain.  2.  4,  2.—  1>.  Eodie.  quo  coiisuCraf^'  intcrrdUo,  ho-tis  sequitur.  Ca^s.  B.  (i.  1,  22. 
—  10.  Nostri  n(m  lonjrius  quani  quein  ad  fnetn'^"^  porrecta-' loca  aperta  pertinCbant, 
cedeniTs^*  iiisequi  aud«?l)ant.  Cies.  B.  (i.  2.']'J.—  11.  Foras^»  educite  7»/am  introduxistis 
lidicitiom'^^.  Plant.  M<>s».  2,  2.  74.—  12.  Nunc  disturbe  qnas  statiiisti"^  inaclniui<  H). 
Pseud.  1,  5,  137.—  13.  i^na^  /in has  pecndes  non  edunt.  homines  edunt.  lb.  \'an\.  3.  3,  31. 
14.  (^unni  venissen)  «(I  Ar/iam/nt^  qui  inonx  niihi  cum  Bibulo  coniniflnis  est,  Cassins 
nosier  feliciter  ah  AntiochCa  hostem  rejeceiat.  Cic.  Fani.  2,  K»,  2.-15.  Quuni  Syinaditi^' , 
quuni  P/tifatnelii-^,  (juum  Iconii"*  essem,  quihus  in  np/nd'j^  omnibus  commoiiltus  sum, 
omnesjum  istlus  «generis  le^atiOnes  craiit  constitQtu'-'^.  lb.  3.  S,  5.— 16.  Finni  et  con- 
ptanfes  amlci  eliu'en<li  «nnr,  cuju<  fj^neri.-<  est  niai^na  penuria-".  lb.  Am.  17,  <52. — 
17.  II»>lveiii  /^f7f7/o.s' ad  Cir-^aiem  mittulit  nohilissimos  civitjltis,  r^/yw.« /e!f/ff//o/jij<rNan)mC- 
jus  et  Veruchetius  principem  locum  ohtinCbanf.  Cses.  B.  (».  1,  7.—  18.  Ca?sar,  in  Car- 
liiite-i'^^.  And*'"'-^.  Tnrcnesque'^^,  qu,^  riri/ilf&Ji  i)roi)inquflp  his  h-cis  erant,  nbi  helium 
pesserat,  Icirionibns  in  hiiternacula  deductis,  in  Itali.im  jirofei  tus  est.  lb.  2,  35. — 
19.  P.  Crassus  pra^fectos  tribunosque  nnlitiim  complurls  in  tinitimas  civitjltes  frumen- 
tandi  ciusS  dimlsit.  quo  in  rtutnno  erat  T.  Terrasidius.  ("a^s.  B.  (J.  3.  7.—  20.  Ulraque 
civitas  r/z/ot/ //'^/<>m^°  in  juvcntflte^i  erat  armilvit,  misiKpic.  Li  v.  35,  38. —  21.  Bhodii 
quo<l  j[(rri>t.  qucHl  rofx>n<  in  jtivM-ntflte  Tuerat,  ami-er.mf.  lb.  37,  12  —  22.  Quod  auri,  quod 
aryentl,  quod  ornanieittf/ruin  in  urbibus  Siciliie  fuit.  id  Verres  absiulit.  Cic.  l)iv. 
Ctec.  5. —  23.  Littene  L.  Metelh  hoc.  quantum  est  ex  Siciliil  frunien'i  honiotini^'',  exara- 
vSrui'.t^',  lb.  Verr.  2,  3. 18. —  24.  'l'ri<;nita  tyranni^^  tria  miltia  sii)i  satellinini  constiiuC- 
runt,  quanfum^^  ex  tot  cladil)us  nec^*  civi'uin  superfuerat.  Just.  5.  8. —  25.  Quod  culque 
ternjxtns  ad  vivendum  datur,  eo  debet  esse  contentus.  Cic.  Sen.  19,  (59. 

Hem.  G.  The  graniin;itic:il  antecedent  is  p:enerally  iinderHtood  if  it  is  a 
wonn  u^  fiencvdl  ///<;><>r^  (denoting  the  genei'al  idea  of  persons  or  things 
§  35:i  loll.).  Such  antecedents  are  either  implied  in  an  absolute  forni-ad- 
jective  (omiiis,  mulii,  unus,  duo^  aliquis  ete.),  which   may  be  the  «yndetic 

1  1  iterally:  'So  lonij  and  widely  dispersed  ',  i.  e.  coverin-j^  so  vast  an  extent  of  coun- 
try.— ■■'  to  prepare. — ^  irom  their  homes. — *  premises. — *  U)  l)e  enirajred.  to  be  present. — 
«  crime. — '  chursre.— ^  inalejicio  ftupidiciuni  coiiftituere,  to  constitute  a  punishment  for  a 
crime. — '  part  of  the  battle-irronnd.— '*•  to  stop. — »>  city  in  Sicily.— »2  a/iqu<t/t  rellquum 
facere.  to  spare  the  life  of  somebody. — ^3  Thennic.  a  Sicilian  city.  —  '■*  to  establi-h  one's 
pelf. — ^^lafH>rdre  ex  aUqud  re,  to  sutler  from  an  evil. — ^^  conrenit  aliquem,  it  behoove.*  some- 
body,—" to  succ»'ed.— 1"  to  propose.— >"  The  clause  ^ quaruin. .  .ada/ndris'  depends  on 
the  iiext  clause '(///i/^'/.«  .  .cotnparantur'' {kiudc^  beini?  tlie  antecedent),  and  this  clause, 
airain,  depends  on  the  next  sentence. — '^"  in  arte  aliqiui  elaf/ordre,  to  devote  one's 
pell  loa  sphere  (of  activity^-'*'  supply*  Ao.v^A'xf// //i '.—"■•'  Construe  :  ad  euin  finem  {\io\\\{) 
ad  quern  /x)t  reef  a.  The  relativ<>  is  inv()lv«'tl  in  the  construction  of  the  participle,  and 
the  sentence  is  best  rendered  by  takinir  /jO'Vi-cfa  a^  the  finite  verb  (/xoTtgedanf).  and 
omit  im'tinebant  in  the  translatiun.— ''^  fxyrH(/i.  to  be  stretched  forth,  to  extend.— '■'*  the 
flei  inir  enemv. — ^s  j^^.^  p  219.  —  -*  names  of  cities.  — 27  leqafiones  consfituere,  to  choose 
embassies —2s  dearth. — ^'  names  of  (iallie  tribes. — 3"  robur  —  everyone  able  to  bear  arms. 
— SI  amonir  their  yoiiH!.'  men.—  ^'frumentuin  hornofinum,  this  year's  c<»rn. — ^s  trf^)louLrh 
out;  said  of  a  letter  of  Metelliis,  in  as  miicli  as  .Metellns  by  fliis  public  letter,  had  in- 
duced the  farmers  to  cultivat»' tlieir  llelds,  which  else  they  would  not  have  done  from 
fear  of  bein<?  deprived  of  their  crop-.— 3*  The  thirty  tyrants,  iuisiitiired  by  Lysandcr 
after  the  end  of  the  Peloponnesian  war.  —35  'i\y,  coiistiu(ti«)n  partly  belongs  V)  Obs.  4, 

Eartly  to  Ous  3.  quantum  havini:  the  lOrce  of  qui  numerui<,  the  j,'ranunatical  antecedent 
eing  the  numeral  noun  (via  inillia. — 3«  —  ny  quitiem. 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  RELATLVT^S. 


509 


antecedent  of  the  relative  {is,  7ne,ta7ifus  etc.);  or  it  is  altogether  omitted 
without  being  replaced  by  an  absolute  form-adjective. 

If  the  antecedent  is  implied  in  an  absolute  form-adjective,  the  latter 
takes  either  tiie  masculine,  or  the  neuter  irender  in  the  plural  or  singular 
according  to  tlie  rules  ^  'SrA  foil.,  and  ^  ;;58  foil,,  the  relative,  as  di^^junct 
adjoclive  (§304)  agreeing  with  it  in  gender  and  number.  If  there  is  no 
such  absolute  form-adjective,  the  relative  takes  that  form,  as  to  number 
and  gender,  whicli  its  syndetic  antecedent  would  have,  if  expressed. 

Obs,  1,  Nouns  of  general  import  {ftomo,  res  etc),  as  gratnmatical  antecedents  of  rela- 
tive adjectives  may  \ni  expressed  as  such,  in  which  instance  the  general  rules  §612  are 
applied,  as  :  Homo,  qui  et  summa  gravitate  et  parens  esset,  olistupuit  Cic  Verr  2 
1,  2«.,—  Jlmmnesqui  sese  student  prastare  ceteris  animalibus  etc.  Sail,  Cat  1  1  —  fres 
sunt  res  qucE  ohst.nt  Kos^cio.  Cic.  Rose.  Am,  13,  35.—  Cnrio  rcprehendit  eas  res  quas 
Ciesar  adm.nistrayisset  in  Gallia  ;  Curio  censured  what  CiRsar  had  done  iu  the  adminis- 
tration ol  Gaul.  Cic.  Brut.  (i<i,  218, 

Or  this  kind  of  grammatical  antecedent»  may  he  implied  in  an  absolute  form-adject- 
ive. Jn  tins  instance  the  r-lative  takes  the  number  and  render  <.f  the  form-adjective, 
as:  C///n^*',  ^//^^/^/y?/.^>a]lquId  consiliiaiita'tatis  fuit  eo  convenerant.  Cies  B  G  3  16  — 
iNunc  diets  aliquidquod  ad  rem  periineat.  Cic.  Rose.  Am.  18,  52.— Al/«7  o</o</ ip>is  iu- 

rr^'''l!l'„7ao  ?w"""' n^V '^"'-  ^'''*  ^-  ^*  ''^^^'-  ^''''^  ''""f  5^"^  '^'"^  efticien.la  dicendo. 
i  i.f!  -V  ♦.  ^'•~  ^''V*  ?"'P  agreement  is  applied  to  the  sundetic  antecedent^  of  the 
n,  ative.  i(  they  arc  used  abs<.luie|y.  as  :  />■  qui  ponat  summum  boiium  in  vnluptate  :  He 
«'//0  places  the  highest  good  m  pleasure.  Cic.  Ott'.  3,  33,-  MercatOres  ea  qum  ad  eflemi- 
nandns.  animos  pertinent,  imix.rtant  ;  Merchants  import  what  tends  to  efleminating  the 

ingb  /rAarth^y-  wish,  lb.  3,  S'"'"  ^""'"'^'  *^  ^"^^  ^'"'""^'  ^^'^^""^  i  ^«"  '^^^^i^^^  ^^i'l- 

-^..^I'^^'i'  '^^''.''V^''^  "'^'''.'  w''l'«>'>t  any  form-adjective  implving  the  grammatical  antece- 
S  .  •  „.  ;  /  r  '"^ia."^-^'  >t  lakes  the  number  and  gender  uhich  the  grammatical  aiitece- 
omt  uould  haveil  exj)i(sse(l,as:  Qui  stadium  currit  eniti  debet  ut  vincat :  (He)  who 

nn"nw  '"'"'l'  ".'"''^  *"'"'■  ^''n.''''!'  ^"'''-  ^^'^  ^'  '^.  42.-  LegSiis,  tril)anis  ?mperat  quod  ixpm\ 
qu  inq  le  lucio  opus  est :  Tothe  stalT  officers  he  irave  orders  abeyitwhat  each  of  them  had 

seemed  tit;  c4s,'b"  0  4  8^  ^""^  ^^^"'"  ^*"^  ^'^'''^  respoudit ;  To  this  Caesar  replied  t/-Aa< 

«  .?."'!;.!:/£ '"'.•''''^•"'''•J.".!'."^."'"  ^^^  iiistancos  mentioned  Obs.  1,  must  be  considered  as 
S,  irflw.  I  "^Vr''^9 /^'^>^N  f'^-'^anseit  always  refers  to  a  previous  noun  exp.essed  or 
1  ndeistoK  .  li.uce  It  nt,>r  tak>s  the  ahmtute  forms  qitis  and  quid,  unless  it  is  merged 
he  ,ndeJinhe7./j,v9.t,v  and  qnidquid.  But.  in  order  to  distinguish  the  two  relation^of 
11:  ;''""^^'f  ">rding  as  it  relets  loan  antecedent  expressed  or  understood,  the  latter 
aic  (l.signated  as  arsolutk  kkl.^tives  %  althoii<:h.  strictly  speakin^,  a  relative  can 
never  be  absolute  in  the  sense  applied  to  other  form-adj.-cfive-  relative  tau 

T,.Mw  *'•"''  '■^l""^*''^  ^'''-respond  to  tiie  foHowing  Em:. ish  forms  :  1)  if  referrincr  to 
r.  :"1  f  •  ^"'  *"'''>'^1'V""='.  I<'.;1'«  who '.  •  the  one  who '.  or  '  who  '  (qui  mpit.  facet  :  who 
«;  a;:.^;;';'?;"  '^  ''T^  '•'^  -i^-»');  and  in  the  plural  to  'those  whA',  '  they  who\  'v.!,"^ 
ffi.i.N.^o'  iv''''"''^-/"'',"''  ''■'.'"  ';*y  ^''^  "'"^'  mistaken).- 2)  If  referring  to  things,  the 
nuiT^l^  nr  ;     wf,*T'""H  '"^  •''"'■"'  '^'"^  correspond  to  '  whar  (that  which)  :   Quod  bo- 

Tho  t^  /    ;    '/"l-    ""-""^''u''"  '^""''  P'-osunt'i :  what  i.«  qood,  is  useful.  Sen.  Ep!  117, 
ns?^,  iwl/.o.H  ,1?  i'^    '®^*  r  ^^"^  "'""f  al,  quantitative,  and  qualitative  classes  cannot  be 
used  vMihout  their  syndetic  an.ecedents  (as many,  as  mucli.  suck  as),  but  the  Latin  ante- 
San, Mi'ihn'/.onr.  wl '"''''  ''V  ^"«"^^''^  J^^'^^l"^  ^^  ni>'^h  AS  I  can.    Victoria  quantam  de 

ha    "^i   er  o  H    ti  "^4'?'"  •^''"  i'-'^'^'^^'VJ  '^^  ^^^«^  "  ^''^^«""y  <^  nobody,  up  to  that  day, 
nail  gainea  over  the  Samnites.  Liv.  10.  38.  ."    f  j^ 

«IBS.  3.  The  syndetic  antecedents  of  a  relative  may  have  the  force  of  both  absolute 

«  ;  ; Wj;"''  "^1J".^'"^'"\/§  ^^«i^).     ^  di.sji.nct,  they  refer  to  nouns  previc  uslv^vcpres^^^^^^ 

iMte  S  Hv.ru     'n'   '•  the  relatives  which  reJer  to  them,  are  treated  as  if  they  were  abso- 
i.kMi^^^^^^^^  antecede.its  of  either  kind  are  frequently  omitted  and 

unneisiood,  acco'ding  to  the  following  rules  : 
A.  The  syndetic  antecedents  tnu-f  Im-  omitted  • 

de«Mul/or^w?/T"^'f''^*'"'V?*'''-"^'  '•''"'"  *^  noun  Of  general  import,  is  an  absolute  in- 
d(  finite,  or  numeral  lorm-adj.cnve  expressed,  as:  Mnl/i  sunt  oui  dicant  etc  •  There 
are  m.y.^  who  say  (not  •inulti  sunt  iHi  or  n  qui  dicant').  Sen.  4n,T  4  -  Nunc  ( iicis 
iSc'  C  s-?"'  l'""'""'"''  ^''"^.>'«"  s:^yso,ne(hinq  that  beh.n.^s  to'the  subjict.  S 
fadSit  •  Th..r: '^rr/ii''/;  ^""^  ^/w-  '!*;"*'  ?,^  «nitore  tractata.  admirabilem  eloquentiaiu 
laciaut ,  there  are  two  things  which,  if  well  employed  by  a  speaker,  make  an  admirabl» 


510 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


eloqnoncc  (i.  e.  novcr  fail  to  cxcUc  the  admiration  of  the  «ndicnce).  Cic.  Or.  37,  128.— 
\\\\\  witti  oinnls  ihc  syiidcfic  aiiticodciit  may  be  eilhtv  exprohr-od,  or  und«T>l()()d,  as: 
Oiiu.e  id  quo  <:aiulC'mii9  vuliiptas  est;  F.nrijUnng  U  •  vohiinasMJUiniJ^emeiit)  in  uhich 
Ave  liiul  pleaf^nrc.  Cic.  Fin.  1,  11,  37.  I5ut  :  Omnxa  (j'ue  ahsiint  vehemeiiler  iiominuiu 
meiiiTs  pertiirl)ant  ;  All  the  t/iinffs  that  are  not  preeeiii.  (wliich  we  do  nut  eee;  greatly 
di>iurl»  the  mind!*  of  men.  Civ».  B.  G.  7.  {S4. 

el)  Syndetic  aiitrcedeiits  are  not  admissible  if  the  indefinite  form-adjective  implying 
tTieurummatical  antecedent  of  the  relative  ii<  e/lijjfiaUfi/  oniitted.  An  ellipsis  of  this 
kind  reirulariy  occurs  (rt)  if  €*v<-(^in  the  meanint; 'to  exist ')  is  tlni  (abstract)  predicate  of 
tlie  si'nVence,  the  relative  clause  being  a  'predicate  clause'  (p.  480,  Obs,  9).  In  this  in- 
le^tance,  the  omitti-d  antecedent  is  the  ^utijtct  (nominative  or  accusative)  of  the  sentence, 
while  the  relative  may  be  in  any  case  required  by  the  construetion  of  the  clause.  Such 
sentences  are.  in  Kni/lisli,  introduced  by  ttie  impersonal  form  '  There  are ;>f;>Y >/<<«>' ',  'there 
avepmide  \  '  there  are  those  (amney,  '  there  are  things  (occasions  etc.)  \  as  :  l)e  impuden- 
tijl  singulari  sunf  (jni  mirentur;  Thu'e  are  those  (some)  who  are  astonished  at  his  re- 
niarkabh;  im|)iidence  (the  form  sunt  ei  qui  being  Un-Latin).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  2.—  See 
Ex.  l-.i.  and  tl)e  Ex.  quoted  j).  486.—  Sometimes  comjxunuls  of  the  verb  ex.sy  are  used 
witli  the  same  construction,  as  :  Ad-^uiit  qui  vos  hortentur;  Tliere  are  those  present  who 
admonish  you.  C;p?.  B.  C.  2,  .'W.—  (h)  If  inren'ire  or  reperue  is  the  predicate,  in  which 
instaiict;  the  indefinite  antecedent  is  eitlier  the  transitive  ol)ject,  or  the  i)assive  subject 
of  the  sentence,  as  :  Non  facile  est  inien'ire  qui,  quod  sciat  ipse,  non  tradat  alteri  (  =  in- 
venTre  aliquem  Qui'  '■turn  qui''  being  inadniissil)I(') ;  It  is  not  easy  to  lind  an>/one  who 
WMUild  not  teach  others  what  he  knows  himself.  Cic.  Fin.  .3,  20.  (IH  —  Vix  inreu'itur  qui, 
lal)oribus  susceptis.  periculistpio  aditis,  non  tpiasi  mercGdem  desideret  glorijim  ;  Hardly 
anyone  is  found  (ej-isfs)  who.  afier  undergoing  hardships  and  dangers,  should  not  be  de- 
sirotis  of  renown  as  his  reward.  Cic,  off.  1.  19.  0.5.  See  Ex.  4.  5.—  Here  belong  the  pas- 
give  predicates  '  inrt^nfi  sunt "  and  *  rei>er(i  yunt '  qui  ;»s  synonyms  of  sunt  qvi  (See  p.  421).  Ji). 

—  (ri  If  llie  predicate  of  the  sentence  is  a  veib  denoting  '■tohare\  'toi>end\  'to  select\ 
or  verbs  of  similir  import,  in  which  instance  the  indelinite  antecedent  is  conceived  as 
the  transitive  object,  or  passive  subject,  as  :  Tum  quum  hdOlljas  quos  imitarcre,  non 
niiiltuni  proftciei)as  ;  When  yui  had  person^  \\\\of\-\<)  to  imitate,  y<»u  did  not  make  much 
pr<'<;ifss.  Cic.  Fam.  9.  21. —  Misiinu^  qui  pro  veciQra  solvt-ret ;  I  sent  a  })erson  to  pay  the 
freiuht.  Cic.  Att.  1,  :j.  2.—  Jhle^/isti  quo.t  Konne  relinqiieres,  ^//o.<  tecum  educeres;  You 
seltcfed  some  whom  you  were  to  leave  in  Rom<-.  and  oth>rs  whom  to  take  out  with  you. 
Cic.  Cat.  1.  4.  9.—  Ex.  <5.  7.  8. — The  same  o  nissiou  occurs  when  the  suited  ol  passive 
veri)s  of  tliis  kind  is  conceived  as  subject-ablative  in  the  construction  of  the  ablatives 
absolute,  as:  Hannibal  Ibenim  copias  tiajecit  7>/-a'///i.s>iA' (/'/i  .Mpiiim  transitus  ppecula- 
renuir;  Hannil)al  sent  his  troops  across  tlie  Hwr  affer  hat  ing  stnf  a  scouting  party  i/* 
a(/iY//K« /(>  r«'connoitre  the  i)asses  of  the  Alps  [literally  :  'alter  having  sent  (.some)  who 
were  to  etc.].  Liv.  21.  2.i.  For  this  omission  of  the  sul>ject-al)lalive  (wliich  after  ttie 
veri)s  mentioned  is  always  neces.sary),  and  for  other  indelinite  subject-ablatives,  the 
omission  ol  whicli  is  optional,  see  p.  17.").  17fi. 

a.  The  al)solute  and  disjunct  syndetic  antecedents  may  or  7uny  not  fje  omitted : 

1)  If  they  are  the  snhjects  (nomiiiative  or  accusative),  and  neuter  antecedents,  if 
they  are  the  8iit)ject.<  or  trandfire  (ttjecfx  oi  any  kind  of  verb  in  the  i)ririeipal  sentence. 
The  i)i{oi'riN(j  of  the  syndeiie  antecedents  may  l)e  considered  as  the  rule  if  they  imply 
persons,  biMUg  subject-nominatives,  and  the  relative  is  likewise  the  subject  of  its  own 
clause.  In  this  instance  the  antecedents  are  only  <'Xj)ressed  if  the  autiior  means  certain 
])ersons.  or  lays  u  certain  stress  upcn  tlt<!m,  as  :  Ifi  eonteiidCnint  qui  apiul  me  et  amici- 
liil.  et  benefic  lis,  et  dignitjlte  |)lurimum  i)ossinit ;  Those  ai)plied  to  me  [tiie  author  meant 
Certain  persons  whom  for  important  rea-ons  he  did  not  choose  to  nu-ntion  by  name]  w/io 
have  the  greatest  weight  with  me  by  tlieir  friendship,  benefactions,  and  cliaracter.  Cic. 
Itosc.  Am.  1.  4.  Similarly  :  I'l  sine  contumelijl  a  me  nominarintur  <i  qui  se  decemviros 
sperani  futfiros.  Cic.  Leg,  Atrr.  '2,  21.—  But  :  Quum  ab  arjliro  arcessebantur,9//t  consules 
fierent  ;  When  people  (iiersons,  farmers)  were  taken  from  the  i)Iougli  /o  IxMiiade  consuls. 
II).  Kosc.  A.  18.— Omnium  est  commflnis,  qui  tuit  hosti-  suOrum  ;  H>-  w/io  was  the  foe  of 
his  own  kindred,  is  the  common  I'liemy  of  all.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  15.— Doe i lis  est  ij<  qui  aiiente 
viilt  audire  ;  Docile  is  he  who  wisln-s  to  listen  attentively,  [where  some  manuscripts  have 
is,  and  others  omit  it].  Auct.  Her.  1.  4,  7.—  See  Ex.  9-11. —  If  the  syndetic  antecedent 
(beiMi;a;>e/vo//),  iseithera  subject -accusative,  or  if  ii  is  a  nominative,  but  tlie  relative  is  in 
a  ditli-reni  case,  the  antecedent,  likewise,  Wofttn  omiite<l.  but  (perlia])s»  more  frequently 
ex])ies-e'l.  The  followini:  are  exanqjles  of  omitted  antecedents  of  such  kind  :  (Cu'^ar 
dixii),  qui  (  —  €0<  qui\  siium  timOrem  in  angusiias  itineris  conlerrent.  faeere  arroiranter ; 
Cajsar  said  tliat  tlio<t  who  relerred  their  fear  to  the  bad  roads  («s-igned  the  bad  roads  as 
the  cause  of  their  fear)  were  actinir  arn  «raiitly.  Cjes.  B.  (J.  1,  41. —  Divifiacus  dixit,  qui 
(  =  eo-iqui)  ejusconsilii  priucipes  fuissent,  in  liritanniam  profiiL'isse.  Cies.  B.  (I.  2.  14. 

—  Utile  est  uti  moiu  auiuii  (  =  eti7n  uti  motu  animi)  qui  mi  nitiOue  non  potest ;  It  in 


ANTECEDENTS   OF   RELATIVES. 


511 


riixhj  that  he  who  (a  person  who)  cannot  act  by  reason  should  act  bv  emotion    Cic  Tns/» 
«•>':h.       7f*'>"",7'''^  auiicitia,  7'//^'/^'  iu  ipsi^  inest   causa  cur  diligantur;'  Those  are 
A         •    "m  '^'•'';".'^'"1>  who.<,ownj>erso„,iiv^  the  reason  why  they  should  be  lovS     «c 
Am   21,  .»-<^,/?4,Av  auiem  luec  sunt  coinmunia,  civitalis  ejusdem  hai.endi  sunt  •   ThiZ 
/o /Mom  this  is  common   must  be  considered  as  citizens  of  the  same  State.  II,   Lt- 
.,  Z.i.~  Janio  plus  gratia  aKjiie  o|)es  valnC-re  ut,  quorum  de  j)a'na  a-elutur,  tribflni  inilil 
.tin  crearenl.n-  (  ^  ut  et  quorum  etc  )  ;  That  the  (very)  ,mn  whose  pu.iisinn  m     was  un  er 
iscussion  were  elected  military  tribunes.  Liv.  5,  ;^.0.-  EdictunV  est,  v^//^'.^^  n^/erS 
.  e.  ei  quibu,  rtderetur)  n,  casira  i.roficiscerentur ;  That  those  who  liked  ini.d.riTo  to 
the  cainp.  Liv.  r,,  2(».— II:ec  vociferanteni  quihus  erat  imnerfltum  i  ^  ei  auibu^  id  erir 
ttnperatum)  jugiilant :  While  he  was  thus  v<fciferatin.^  thole  to  whom  the  orT^was-nven 
killed    him.  Curt.  :i  2.  20.    See   Ex.  12-1.'-,  and  Juv.  :i,  lOi.- If   the  antecedent   denotes 

ouS'  '''nr'rf /■'"  "'"h""^  '^'i  """"■^'■"!.'  ''^  '^«  '^y"^"^'^  antecedent  are  eqtuiMv  /re! 

?      i/i    ^^^' /^'''^^'^-^N  ^*'  ''ci-  witii  or  without  a  syndetic  antecedent,  is  expressed  by 

•A«r   whether  in  the  plural  or  bin-ular,  as  :  Cicero  non  ea  solum  quee  vivo  se  actide^ 

run    liitura  pnedixit,  sed  etiam  qu<t  nunc  usu  veniunt  cecinit  ut  vates  :  Cicero   not  oilv 

rTns^lHiU    fie  ;-''l';r"ir  4" 'iTf  "''t/"^''''"^-  '•"''  'i'^-  "  ^'•«P"«^  foret'ohi'S  "?s  S 

iiaiispiimg    Nep.  Att.  K,,  4.   [Here  the  syndetic  antecedent  ^a  mav  be  droooed  in  the 

.  s,  p,op..s.tion,  a.1,1  add.d  to  the  sec<,nd.]-  Ex  hoc  genere  est  i//v^  9C  \i     u   er  ei 

qui  terogasset   iium  tibi  molestus  es.set  futurus. .  .Inqiiisti :  Of  the  same  k iiul  i"  7/.//«J 

vol!*  'cic"  or ''274 '2-'^    'r""*'  '"""  ^1''?*''^/^  """^V'  '''^^  wlH'ther  he  was  i./tr  id  ng'ot 

>ou.    Cic.  Or.  2.  (.4.  2o9.— Cje.<ar  co-novit.    Considium  quo'l  non  vidisset  nro  viso  sibi 

•enun Masse  ;  Cie.^ar  saw  that  Considius  had   reported  to  him  as  hiiowif  observation 

S       ni;';/  rmul';!'.!?'"'-  ^-  "^-^^  n-?;^^'-»...  est  qu^  conor.  difficile  Jst  9.^  poih^ 
ccor,    \\/,<tr  I  undertake  is  great:  what  1  prom  se    s  difficult    Cic    Rose    Com   /    M 

f  .ati^e;.M;i  "^^ul^j^.:^.^^,  V^^^^^^i  :;;^\;;^,sr^Sitr 

are  either  expressed  <,r  ou.itted,  as  :   Tantom  clqiic- tribue  ,liim  eS  oS^m  inse  effl 
cere  possirt ;  We  should  give   to  everyone  (of  our  Iriendsi  ^VL^(^^^S•^sn  w^^ 

^he  to  C  mfV"-  ^''  ^"V  ^r''^^'^  "S*'^'"*'>  ^''«"^"''^  '^  velletdarem     He  wrote      should 
^  o^r,  ^•'"'"'-  (i'?nuch  as  he  wanted.  Cic.  Att.  10,  15,  4.  Ex.  20  21  ^nouui 

Z)  1  he  .same  omission  <.f  the  syndetic  antecedent  m</y  or  may  not  take  place  if  the  ante- 

fsfn /L'"^"  ""^  '^''^'\'"  ''"'^  '^^  relative,  accordingto  the  c(.„s,ruction      i?s  mvn  cla^^^^^^ 

M,    .0  H  ""'^'^  '■'*'*'  ''^  '»V:.='"'^'«^'dent.  o.  il  both  the  antecedent  and  the  relative  a"e^lenend- 

t(  I  thesame;>;-fy>o.vi/eo//.v.as  :  ImiiCmur^wwcuIque  visum  est  (  =.  'o.  Xv  i^nltArrciiT 

imitate  those  whom  It  has  seeme(  to  evervone)  Cic  Oil"  1    ^1  ns      iii!;,  r.iL.t ..   ,  "  ^.}^^ 

wMu^d  Sb  f  ;r'^-=^f  "^>>'^*^^r-«  v.^ebat) 'He^:ve-^than.^Mhe'h  SJ^g^lS"^ 
Ls        ;.•/  ;    '  J  -'''i"^■a'•"^''"/''^^^'A.^=equilurDemocritum  non  fere  labitur  (  ="n?Sr/. 

F   ,      'r  See'  \^%''T  'Vi^^:^^^'  1^^''  u^haH^.\n-n-)  he  follows  Democri  us  Ck. 
r  Ml.  1,  o.  >te  i\\  2i-u.—  1  hustheantecerleiit  is  ircneialv  omitted  if  the  relntivo  imUow  fho 

Jou    c;i'.^U.'i',^2"^  misfortune  in  what  (in  those  things  in  which)  m'y  family  will  x^eeS 

r.SJfronrth-uo?n?p'^^^^  r€^av>^./if  the  case  of  the  relative  is  rf^Y- 

..Z:  .  ^  "'  V'^  antecedent  (except  ui  the   iistance  mentioned  No  A)  or  if  tfiP 

r  t^^H.  .  'i.  !v.  'f '"'''  ^'"'  ^•^•»'^'»dent  on  different  prepositions,  of  f  S  er  he  ameceden? 
sitio  "^^'  UrV  "''■  r  <^^^^-",  'J^'^'*  ^'•'•'^'  the  (,;her  of  the  two  is  dependent  o  a  Spo- 
1- .,  e;  nr  ,  .tf".'^'  '!'''*''^'  ^"  '^"  >*yndetic  autec  deiits,  whether  they  are  absolute  or  Jis- 
's  .is  mXSs  Sll.^^'i  t  :Vi?;"' ^'^'I"-;-^«-'<'.:  f  •■  ,Vcrres  eum  cui  legatL  fuisset  in  hividiam 
ta  It  he  .V<M)een  Ci  .  VvtT  1  'J  ^  "'  ^I'^d^ed-.  expensed  to  h.-.tred  that  mrm  whose  adju- 
trVw  .  !        •  •  ^'  ;  ^y}^-  ^•'*'  ^^•— ^onvidgliirdelniis-eejusmodideliberatinnemin 

t_r<Hiucere  in  qna  guod  utile  viderStiir  c//m  .0  quod  honestnm  eit  comparar^tur    It  sJImis" 

Tni.snJL''^'*;','.'''''"^- '■'"'^'  "^  "V"  ^^"«''''J>  'I'f  ereryone  imitate  Vvhouretc:'w^<7uIdn)rinad"- 
m  ssible.  slncer/^y^.7./gacco^llu-to§3(j2,  /?.  20.  8  can  onlvbe  used  in  certain  connecVin^ 

of    .nw'^'f'''''''  '""^■"^''^■"^"^  ^ould  refer  to  all '  witin.r.t  (^xception  \    T,  a  "ent^^^^^^^^^^^ 
nrin.fn,        '/'"*"'  ?"?-^'/«^ '""^t  be  incorporated  in  the  relative  clause,  the  stijeS  of  thi 

in  ipaUentence  bein- vari..usly  expressed  according  t()  the  requiremems^o^^^^^^ 
moMly  by  a  syndetic  antecedent  repeated  after  the  relative  clause  ^  ' 


612 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


ANTECEDENTS  OF  EELATR^ES. 


513 


he  ouf-ht  not  to  have  introdnoed  a  dif»cns?ion  of  that  kind,  in  which  what  peems  useful 
is  compared  zvifh  what  is  moral.  Clc.  Off.  3.  3,  12.-Hi  (Icdacen'  colonias  in  m^  ajrroH 
Quos  vmerm\,vt  in  (/u(e  loca  pnetert-a  vidcbitur;  They  uill  Bend  out  cclonH-s  /o ///o,v^ 
hmis  which  thi'v  w\\\  bnv,  and  moreover /o  «//  localities  they  will  choose  (literally  Jo 
those  localities  'to  which  it  will  seem  to  tht-m  i.  e.  to  eend  colonies).  Cic.  L..  Ai^'r  2.  2. 
74  rilere  in  the  first  proposition  the  antecedent  m*  is  retained  because  it  is  introdncea 
by  \\  nrepositioji  which  does  nt)t  refer  to  the  case  of  the  relative ;  but  in  the  second  prop- 
o-ltion  the  antecedent  ea  is  dropped  because  both,  the  antecedent  and  the  relative  (le- 
pend  on  the  same  preposition  {in  ea  loca  in  qitce  colonias  deducere  videbitur).J  t>ee  bx. 
25  if, —  The  absolute  antecedent  takes  here  likewise  the  form  Va  res  it  the  neuter 
«'ender  is  not  sufficiently  marked  bv  the  relative  (see  No.  Ji,  2),  as:  Homines  non  reqnl- 
runt  ratiOnes  ^<7/-Mm  rennn  <juas  semper  vident  (which  is  more  perspicuous  mxneonim 
aim  vident)  •  Aten  do  not  inquire  for  the  causes  of  what  ihey  always  see.  tic.  JN.  i).  i,  .i«, 
9«  —It  is  remarkable  that,  in  this  instance,  the  relative  frequently  does  not  agree  in  gender 
with  the  formal  ^grammatical  antecedent  res,  but  Uikes  the  neuter  form  a>f  tj  the  (intece- 
dtnt  were  an  a/>solute  wtjective  in  the  neuter,  as  ;  Sumptu  ne  parcas  uUa  m  re  quod'^  ail 
valetudinem  opus  sit;  Do  not  spare  expenses  in  aiujthiJ\g  that  may  i)e  necessary  ror 
vour  recovery  Cic  Fam.  H",,  4,  2.— Abundantia  earvni  rermnqim  pruna  mortaies  du- 
cunt  ;  By  an  abnndance  o/ w/i«i  men  place  first.  Sail.  Jug.  41,  l.-Uelectu  reljnsque 
aliis  omvm'T  ipsos  aqemia  erant  pcrlectis  ;  After  the  draft  and  the  ohtr  things  which 
had  to  be  done  by  them  were  accomplished.  Liv.  32,  21».-  In  me  qindvis  harmn  rtrum 
convenit  omt  sunt  dicta  ;  **  To  me  ei-enjone  of  those  /Ainr/N  applies  ttiat  have  been  saut. 
Ter  Ileaut  5  1  4 —This  agreement  goes  to  sliow  that,  in  the  conception  <»r  the  Latins, 
the  forms  ea  res,  and  id  were  identical,  and  that  the  genitives  and  datives  ^us  ret,  ei  ret 
(§  3«0)  are  really  to  be  considered  as  the  obhque  cases  of  the  absolute  neuter  id. 

I)  In  the  instance  mentioned  No.  C,  the  antecedents  maij  t>e  dropped  1)  if  they  are  the 
completing  objects  of  a  verb  (so  that  the  case  of  the  antecedent  is  clear  from  the  eon- 
iieetiouK  rt/unhe  relative  is  the  subject  of  its  own  clause,  as  :  Xerxes  pra-mnim  propo- 
Puit  (i  e  ei)  qui  invenisset  novam  voluptiltem  ;  Xerxes  proposed  a  reward  U^vthe  man 
«7/0  would  dfscover  a  new  pleasure.  Cic.Tusc.  5.  7.  20.-  Semper  in  prtvlio  maximum  est 
nericulum  (i  e.  ei)q>d  maxinie  timet;  In  battle  the  «rreatest  danger  always  tliieatens 
hVn  who  is  most  afraid.  Sail.  Cat.  58.-  Ut  agerentur  gratiic  d.  e.  tis)  qui  e  miinicipiw  vc- 
ni>*-ent  •  That  thanks  should  be  returned /o /Aon*;  irho  had  come  Irom  the  towns.  Lie. 
PRed  'll  See  Kx  27.  2S.— 2>  The  antecedents  may  also  be  dropped  if  they  denoie 
tfiings  (botii  absolutelv  used,  or  with  nouns),  being  introdm  ed  by  a  preiK^sitwn  govern- 
in*' the  accusative,  and  if  the  relative  is  the  subject  or  completing  «.bjeet  ot  its  own 
clause  as  :  Nunc  redeo  ad  quce  mihi  mandas  (  =  ad  eaq'ue) ;  Now  I  come  to  wliat  yoa 
want  me  to  do  Cic.  Att.  5,  11.—  NuUas  adhuc  litterasaeceperam  privter  quce  {  =  pneter 
eas  qua)  mihi  in  Trebulano  reddit;e  sunt  ;  I  have  not  yet  received  any  letter  except  t/iose 
which  were  handed  to  me  in  the  Trebulane  villa.  Cic.  Att.  .'i,  3.-  Helvetii  frumentum 
oume  jmEter  quod  (  =  pneter  id  quod)  s.-cnra  portatilri  erant,  coml)aruni.  <-ies  li.  c  i, 
5  -  3)  Karelv  the  syndetic  antecedent  is  dropped  if  it  is  an  attributive  genitive  ot  a 
noun  (provided  that  the  relative  is  a  subject-nominative),  as  :  Novil  lege,  nt  va  junio- 
rum  non  onvenisset  ad  imperatOrum  edictuin,  qxique  injussu  abisset,  caput  (i.  e.  eji/j> 
caput)  Jovi  sacrum  esset  ;  T.y  a  m>w  law  that  the  heads  ff  those  ainongthe  younger  ci li- 
zeiis  who  would  not  appear  at  the  call  of  the  coinmanders,  and  <>J  those  who  would  lca\c 
without  order,  should  be  forfeited  to  Jupiter.  Liv.  10,  :i8. 

E  The  svndetic  antecedents  are  almost  ahcays  retained  if  they  are  pndWnfc-nomina- 
tives,  the  relative  clause  describing  a  quality  of  the  subject  a>serted  by  ^he  copula        n 
this  construction,  the  syndetic  antecedent  (is)  is  a  (/tvy//«t7  adjective,  always  releri  ing  to  a 
definite  subject,  and  hence  mav  be  also  in  the  feminine.    The  relative  and  its  antecedent, 
in  this  wniiection,  are  rendered  by  'a  man  who',  'such  a  person  as  to  ,  or  by  sunilar 
expresses,  as  :  Zeno  nullo  m(.do  is  erat  qin  nervos  virtQtis  incident  ;  Zeno  was  by  no 
lnean<S  nan  to  cut  the  sinews  of  virtue.  Cic.  Ac.  I'ost.  1,  10  [An  omission  of     ^s    i n 
Uiii  an  I  the  following  examples  would  be  inadmissible.]     Non  sumus  n  y'/o/v/m  vaL^et 
ft  itn  IS  er  -ire  ;  We  a^e  not  that  kind  of  pn-sons  whose  minds  wander  about  nvH  jout 
aViMe//  errOre.}.  Cic.  Oft".  2,  2.-  En  est  Honnlna  gens  q>ue  v.cta  .^'V^' 7,%".f '  '^J^:,  .1  ,' 
Koman  nation  is  of  such  a  character  as  to  find  no  rest  if  conque.ed.  l.u.  .),  3.-  1  >.  a 
tec  Hlent  is,  in  this  construction,  is  omitted  if  it  is  coordinate  to  an  at  riimte  of  ai  - 
otie    p. edieate-mmn,  as  :  L.  Pinarius  erat  vir  acer  et  qui  nihil  in  fide  ^'«-"lOnun  ni>on  - 
ret-    L.  Pinarius   was  a  determined    man,  and   one  who  w«.iild  not    lely  on  »1^^   f«' 
c^f  the  Sicilians.  Liv.  24,  37.-  All  clauses  of  this  kind  are  ^/'-^^'f'^.^f '^^^J  <P-  ^^;  'V.^ "^ 
always  must  have  their  own  predicates  in  the  subjunctive  (see  §  ()_n).    See  hx.  -i^J-ii. 

-*Th^neut<'r  quod  may  also  be  taken  for  a  m'/ri^i«f7  relative,  according  Jo  P^.WO 
Ob»  2-  or  as  a<'ieein-'  with  ilii'  predicate-nonn  opus,  according  to  p.  52o,  Obs.  i,  althou-^n 
onvsUx  ' opus  e^t '  was  hardlv  felt  as  a  noun  by  the  Latins.  •      ,  u„  T>.,„ti„v 

** Two  inferior  codices  read  ^dictce\  which  reading  has  been  received  by  Bent.ey. 


Obs.  4.  An  iNVERsiov  of  relative  clauses  (p.  505,  Obs.  2)  with  absolute  relatives  may  take 
pi  ice  in  all  in-taiices  where  the  use  of  a  syndetic  antecedent  is  admissible,  lor  the  same 
rea-ons  as  when  the  relative  has  an  <'xpre-sed  noun  as  antecedent.  The  svndetie  ante- 
cedent, in  tins  instance,  is  placed  a/terihe  relative  clause,  the  relative  reiainii  g  iis  abso- 
lute form  in  lien  of  the  incorporation  of  the  gramniaiical  aniecedeiit,  which,  of  course, 
cannot  take  place  where  there  is  no  noun  t<>  incorporate  ;  as  :  Quibus  ratio  a  natura  data 
est,  eisdem  rema  ratio  data  est ;  Tothme  to  ivho/n  r^'a»on  has  been  given  by  nature,  a  right 
reason  has  been  given.  Cic.  Leg.  1,  12,  3:J.— Cie^ar  L.  Plaiicum  jiihet,  (^I'oruvi  operfi  cog- 
noveratTasiretinni  inteifectum.M*comprehensos  ad  se  miitere  ;  Ciesjir directed  Plancus 
to  arrest  and  send  to  him  those,  irhom  he  knevv  to  have  been  imjjlicated  in  the  murder  of 
Tasiretius  (lifeially:  by  nhose  iigciu-y  he  kn-w  that  T.  was  murdered).  Cies.  B.  G.  5,  25. 
—  Sperat  se  posse  quod  adeptus  est  per  sceliis  id  per  bieiminm  effiindere  atque  consu- 
mer»'; He  hoj)Cs  ihnt  he  can  squander  and  consume  within  two  years  what  he  has  ob- 
tained by  crime.  Cic.  Kosc.  A.  2.  6.     See  Kx.  32-35. 

1.  Sunt  qui  urbanis  rebus'  bellicas'  ant<  pOnant.  Cic.  Off.  1,  24,  82.—  2.  Fverunt  qui 
dicerent,  non  cceli  niotii^  fieri  ortus  et  occa^^iis'»,  sed  nos  ij)sos  oriri  et  occiderc*.  Sen. 
N.  Q.  7,  12.— 3.  Nonne  dicitis,  esse  e  regiOne* nobis,  e  contraiia  parte^  terra?.  quitnUvr- 
sis  vestigiis»  stent  contra  nostra  vesiigia,  quos  ai-TiVoSa?"  vocfitis  ?  Cic.  Ac.  I'r.  2.  30 
32-3.—  4.  Nihil  est  ditficilius  qiiam  rejwnre  quod  sit  omiii  ex  partei»  in  sno  genere  per- 


fectum.  lb.  Am.  21,70.-5.  In  HoinPro  hoc  maximum  est,"  quod  neque  ante  jlhim 
quem^^  ille  imitardur.  neque»"''  p"st  ilium  qui  eum  iinitSri  jiosset,  inventus  est.  Veil 
1,  5.—  6.  Semper  CimOnem  j)edisequi'3  cum  nunimi«i<  sunt  secflii.  nt  huberet  quod  sta- 
tim  daret.  N.p.  Cim.  4.-7.  (^uuin  e  via  lauLMiCrem's,  miiqui  hoc  ei  diceret.  Cic.  Phil. 
1,5,  12.— 8.  (^iiid  ouici us  qua m //«/>?/•«?  quicuni  omu\a  aiideas  sic  loqui  ut  tecum  ?  lb! 
Am.  0,  22. —  9.  Stiiltissiin  is  e>t  qui  hominem  ant  ex  vestt  aut  ex  ctinditiOne"  lesti- 
inat'^.  Sen   Kp.  47.—  10.  Maximum  ornamenium  amicitue  toUit'"  qui  ex  ea  tollir  vere- 
ciindiam»«.  Cic.  Am.  22.82.—  11.  Errant  ^wnn  prosp- ris  rebiisso  omnls  impetii-'-^J  for- 
tfinie  se  putant  lugisst^sa.  Auct.  Her.  4,  17.  24.—  12.  Necesse  est  sumpium  facen  23  qui 
quant  lucrum24.   i»l.,ut.  Asin.  1,  3,  <w.—  13.  Ne<:ojii-  ess(r--5,  ^;,j  milesujon  sit,  pu.'ilre 
cum  hoste.  Cic.  Oil'.  1,11.-14.  Sapiens  palain  fac  it^e,  potentissimiim  esse  y '4  se  ha- 
bei  in  potestate.  Sen    Ej..  00.—  15.   ^"ji/^/,<  opes  nulhe  sunt,  b'.nis  invident.  Sail   Cat 
37.— 10.  Quod  non  dedit  lortQiia,  non  eiipit-7.  Sen.  Lp.  5'.».— 17.  (  a-sar  niiitit  Vatiniuni 
ad  ripjini  fiuininis  (jui  f«  qu^^;  maxiine  ad  pacem  peitinere^^  videreniur,  ageret.  Cuis. 
B.C.  3,  11».—  18,  Leviura-"  sunt  qute  n-peiiilno  aliaiio  modo  accidunt'qiiam  ea  ouiX 
niediiataso  et  pra'parata  inferuiiiui^i.  Cic.  Ofl:  1,8.-10.  An.bionx  dix  t  (se)  it/ (/i/ot/ 
fecerit  de  oppiignatiOiie  navium.  mque  judicio.  neque  voluniate  sua  lecisse.  Cajs.  B. 
G.5,  27.— 20.  S(d  qiiuiritur  majorne  quani  terra  sit.  an  tantns  quantus  videatur.  Cic* 
J)iv.  2.  3,  10,—  21.  Non  speravi-rat  Hannibal  fore  nt  tot  in  Italia  p«>puli  ad  se  deficerent 
quot  dcfecCrunt  post  Cannens^ni  d.idem.  Liv.  28.  44.—  22.  CoeKsiis  ira^a  quosuvimn^i 
miseros  facit.  Sen.   Here.  Get.  441.-  -.'3.  I'iso  pariim  erat  a  quibus  debuerat  adju  us 


sCmihis  qui  nobis  aliquid  attulissei^"  qu<>4i  hoc  firmius  crederCMnus.  Cic.  Tusc  5  7   20 
—  20.  E-ot.s-  ^nm  qui  nihil  unqiiam  niea  potius  quam  meOrum  civium  causa  fecerit" 
II).  tain.  .5,  21.— .30.   Non  sumus  ti  quibus  nihil  verum  videatur.  sed  ei  qui  omnibus  ve- 


ris  falsa  qmedam  adjuncta  esse  dieaniu».  II).  N.  1).  1.5  —  31.  Dixisti,  Vos  eos  esse  qui 
VI tain  intuavem^-!  sine  his  studiis  putaretis.  lb.  Or.  2,  0.-  32.  Monstitim  certissimum 


'  lies  vtbanrp,  civil  aflairs. 

and  s<'ttinirof  the  stars.— ^ 

footprints  opposite  to  ours,  ?*.  ^.  witli  tln-ir  feet  opposite  to  ours.— »  antipodes —lo  in 

eveiv  respect —"  i.  e.  aliquis  quem.—'^^  Neque  aliquisinrenfusest.  neque  etc. :  There  was 


—2  res  bellicm,  military  affairs.— s  revolution.— <  the  rising 
to  set.— «  just  o\^Hm\Q.—T  ex... parte,  on  the  side.— *>  with 


nobody,  nor  anybody  etc.— '^  footmen.— ^  small  coins.-is  ^  rhl  lanquere.  to  be  tired 
from  the  jonrney.—i«  according  to  the  state  in  which  he  is.— i'  \o  \i\h\o.  —  ^^  or)ianienfum 
alicui  rn  or  ex  (tliqud  re  toUere.  to  stri|)  somethiiiL'  of  an  ornament.— i»  mutu.il  respect 
— -0  111  prospentv.— -^i  hi<,\v.-22  xo  escape.-23  to  lay  our  monev.--"-»  iocnmi  quivrere  to 
ne  desirous  of  makinir  money.— 25  to  be  lawful.— 2«  makes  it  evident  to  all.— s'  to  take 


pre- 

ger 

turd 


away.--"'  to  be  most  conducive  to.— 2»  less  serious.— 3o  accessory  predicate-  'with  pr 
meditation  ',— ai  inferre,  to  indict.— 32the  wrath  of  Heaven.— 33  im  aHouew  pretnif  an<' 
rests  on  somebody.— 34  th,.  fi,.^t  baL'L'acre  train.— 33  to  rush  forward.— 3« ■?^'^7^/,7/^///  anuta-, « 
u/ungeie,  to  pla?e  exp^-diencv  in  eonfijct  with  nature  (i.e.  with  moralitv ).— »7  to  begin. — 
from  a  wroni.'  inflicted.— 3»  to  bring  out.  to  cause  somebody  to  step  forward.—"  ali- 
quid attcui  aJTme,  to  give  somebody  a  new  reason,— ■•1  from  which,  in -consequence  of 
which.—"  unpalatable,  dull.  h^^^^-^  «i 


I 


514 


KELATm:   CL.VUSES. 


e«t  cp^e  aliqncm  humilnil  specie»  ct.  fi^flnl,  qui  tantum  immanit:lte2  hestias  Vicente, 
ur  propter  quos*  hanc  f»iiavis!*iinani5  lucoin  aspexj-rit.  ens  iiidiiriiissinif»  luce  priv-l- 
rit  lb.  Hotic.  Am.  -^J.  «53  —  88.  Miilto  inaiiis  liiuneiKlniu  est'  quod,  ciijii<  iiianiinn  ver- 
siltur*,  n'lmqnam  8init  <^?/m  respiiilr.-»,  minKHiain  qiii.'i»cerc.  lb.  Fin.  1.  Hi.  53.— 
34  Qtii.<(jins  seiitit  quemMdmodiim  sit  am-ctus'».  eniti  iiecfss<'  est  aiit  in  voluptiln'  esse, 
aut  ill  dolorc.  lb.  1.  11,  .'iS.— 35.  Q'Kmfnin^^  .\V\o\\\\\>  ediditsel»''' <iei)erii^  (anlu/nes. 
edicto»<  daudiim  erat.  lb.  Vcrr.  2,  3,  il». 

L'em.  7.  If  the  gnimnmtical  aiitcredent  of  the  rchitive  clause  is  a  (per- 
Ronal)  PRONOUN.  U»c  lehitivo  adjeclive  agrees  with  the  pronoun  in  NUM- 
r.EK.  and  wiih  its  logical  c.kndkk  ((^r.s.  1  and  2).  Itclative  clauses  of 
this  kind  rarely  lake  syndetic  antecedents  (Ons.  1).  For  the  form  of  the 
predicate  in  such  relative  clauses  see  It.  10.  Ous.  1. 

Ons.  L  lit.  fa.  id  has  the  nature  both  of  a  personal  pronoun,  and  of  a  determinative 
form-adicctive  (§§--J3L  iU).  11  t.<.  absolutely  usi-d,  f^ovornsa  n-lativc  clause,  it  is  alwavs 
a  lonn-ailjedlrew)  if  the  person  or  thiiii,'  to  which  it  refers,  is  determined  by  tin;  re^a- 
tire  clau:<e  (ei  qiiihcriotiopnpfiienuit)  ;  un<i  (i)  if  it  has  the  force  of  aqualitative  orquan- 
titaiiveadjt'ciive  (Z.-iio  i-rat'is' qui  tMc.>.  But  it  must  be  consideivd  as  a  jxT-onal  pro- 
noun if  it  refers  to  persons  or  ihin<^s  mcntioni'd  before  as  it-  (irnnnnntKal  aitf(ceilfi,ts 
i^-l-Vl).  The  En-'lish  prouonns  '  he '  and  'tbev'  likewise  occur  in  botn  me;iniii<,'s ;  a<  : 
lloium  princeps'socrates  fuit.  u.  qui  totlus  judicio  (^neciip. .  .omiiitim  ftiit  facile  piin- 
ceps;  Ih  who,  in  tlie  judirment  of  all  (ireece,  unquestionably  was  tiie  foremost  of  ail. 
Cic.  Or.  3,  n;.— Instead  of  iw,  the  other  demonstralives  hie.  illc.  ifte.  are  likewise  used 
■with  tlie  force  of  i)ron()uns  of  the  3d  tierson,  an<l  may  have  relative  clau>es  (l<j)en(ient 
on  them,  a-  hte,  ^//ijam  spe  atque  opinion»'  pra^dam  istam  devoiasset,  commutiis  est ; 
lie,  «'/iohad  in  his  mind  already  swallowed  that  booty,  was  perplexed.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  1,5L 

Obs  2.  The  jtrononns  of  the  first  and  second  pt-isons  may  refer  either  to  niales  or  fe- 
males (pronouns  of  the  secontl  person  referrinir  e.xeeptionally  to  thiiius  per-oiiincd),  and, 
pincc  they  do  not  desij,Miate  tlie  sex  of  tlie  person  by  their  «:rainmalical  lonns,  have 
only  a  i.ooical  oknpeu.  Hence  relative  adj'-ctives  which  have  per.sonal  pronoiiiisMd  the 
llist  or  second  person  a<  irranimatical  antecedents,  aizree  with  the  /of/ical  f/fH'lerol  these 
pronoun-  as:  /V,  ecastor.  eiras  fjiuv  ilium  exspectcs  ;  Indeed  i/o>/  are  mistaken  »7/0 
(when  you)  expect  him.  Plant.  Most.  L  3.  31.—  iddme  nos  sohe  scimu-,  e;/Ofju<i\\U  dedi, 
et  ilia  qua'  a  me  accepit ;  That  only  we  two  know,  /  who  gave  it  to  her,  and  she  who  re- 
ceived it.  lb.  Cist.1,2.  2«).— Nam  ;/o,s\  quarum  viri  hinc  absimt,  sollicitiesumu?  semper;  I<  or 
we.  whoxe  husbands  are  abseiu  from  here,  are  always  anxious.  11).  Siicli.  1,1.  A.—  tqoqia 
te  ronflrmo,  ipse  me  non  conllrmo  ;  l.}rho  rcissure  vor.  am  not  so  confident  niyse.f. 
Cic.  Verr.  2.  3,  30.— Ke-  luce  actrba  vidC'iiir  uniculiiue  re.<triiiii  q>n  simili  seiisu  commo- 
veinini  :  Tliis'matier  seems  hard  Xo  vxu\\  of  you .  who  are  allecied  by  similar  f(H'lin;.'s. 
Yerr.  2.  1,  14.— Ncque  te.  Ma-silia.  i)iu'fereo.  q.nv  L.  Flacciim  militeui  co;:nosti ;  Nor  do 
I  pass  thee.  6  Massilia,  which  kiiowest  L.  Flaccus  as  a  >oldier.  lb.  Flacc.  20,  G3. 

Obs.  3.  The  personal  t>rououns  as  anteeedents  of  relatives  may  be  dropped  if  no  em- 
pha>is  rests  on  tliem,  and  if  thev.  as  sui.jcets.  are  easily  Mippli'd  from  ilie  text,  a-  :  Qm 
.  =  til  qiii\  a-'io  «olendo  i>'aesM'  ll;i;:itium  putes.  |.rof»Tio  Atiliiim  hoininem  ne(iui>si- 
miim  judierir.s  ;  You.  who  thiidc  it  dlMrracelul  to  niana-e  a  farm.  >urely  woiiiii  pronounce 
Aiilius  a  mo^t  wicked  person.  Cic.  H<»sc.  Am.  18,  .*>0.— If  the  relative  has  the  lorce  ol  an 
advcrbi.il  eonjiincii.>n  (denotinu' cause,  co-incident  action  etc.),  the  i)ronouns  to  which 
they  refer  are  <'.nerallv  droppi'd.  if  -ubiects  :  Stiilia  multa  sum  qu<('  vobi-cum  fabuier; 
I  am  very  foolish  /r//o\that  I)  am  talkin-  witli  you.  Pl.nit.  Mil.  2.  .5,  :«.-  Thus  the  pro- 
nouns of  the  second  person  are  most  always  droppejl  if  they  are  the  >ubjec;s  «)f  an  im- 
perative :  Adesfotf  omnes  animis  qui  adestiscorporibus  ;  IJe  all  pre-eiit  with  your  minds 
who  are  present  with  your  bodies.  Cic.  Still.  11.  33. 

Obs.  4.  Since  pergonal  ])ronouns  cannot,  generally,  take  attril)utes  (§  2Tf.),  relative 
chiu-es  dei»i'ndent  on  personal  pronouns  e:innot,  L'enerally,  take  syndelic  antecedents, 
except  in  the  followiiiLr  in^t>inces  :  («)  If  the  relative  clause  is  dependent  on  the  syn- 
detic antecedent  is  (sometimes  itle)   as   predicate-nominative  (/A  «i,  Obb.  3,  A),  Has 

J  In  human  sliape.— ^  brutalitv.— 3  to  surpass.—*  bv  whose  asrency  (to  whom  he  is  in- 
debted for  the  eijovmeiit:  t.  r-' his  parents).—*  mo>t  delitrhtful.-«  in  tlie  iiK.st  outra- 
ceoiis  way.— ^  to  shiiii.— "i/;  nni/nott/icujux  n/filri.  loperva  le  one's  mind.--"  to  breathe. 
— -»»  feels' how  he  is  atlect.-d  ;  i.  e.  i-  cou-cious  of  his  emotions.  — »>  quantum  (l'^'>V.^-  •'" 
infinitive  clause,  dependent  on  edidimset :  dehtii  being  an  imper-onal  passive  pr^cate. 
—•'•-I  to  '«MVeoiit  \  to  pronounce.  The  subjunctive  is  quasl-subobiique,  dependent  on 
'(?x  tdicfo  danduni  erut\  which  is  equivalent  to  '  edict  urn  pnrcepit  ut  dar?tur  .  See 
p  40(j,  Obs.  1,  (a).— 13  aliquid  dvOetur,  someihing  is  due.—'*  the  edict  of  the  pnetor. 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  EELATR^ES. 


515 


nntccedent  is  retained  even  if  a  personal  pronoun  is  the  subject.  Constructions 
of  his  k  ml  must  generally  be  recast  in  Enirlish,  as:  Egouevnqut  semper  ha :  i.ix- 
rUi  Y  •  7  w  be  aJ  (^/^«  one)  who  I  have  always  been  (  =  I  will  be  the  m7ne  I  have 
^  '}^:  ..,\  riP  Att  11  !•>  3  -K"0  is  sum  qui  hoc  illi  concSdi  putem  ;  lite li ally  : 
i  uiw^S  be^eVft hat  \his  sh<nUd  be  conclled  to  them  (  =  IJelonq  totho^^cfio 
Itc)  Cic  ^tt  7  5  5  -V,/  cs  ille  cui  crudelitas  displicet  ?  Are  7jou  the  man  who  dislikes 
cnu  l\v  i  ib   Pis  8   IT  -Sometimes  in  thi<  construction  the  antecedent  is  mav  be  dropped 

clnleu  ?1    c"    re    iT-^^^^^^^^ 

c  u  <V  7is  •■  A'70  ipse  Pontilex,  qui  cerimoiuas  reliirionesque  pub  icas  sanctissime    iien- 
dlsariu  roV   ifh  c   esse  deos   persuadCri  mihi  plane  velim  ;  7,  beimr  myself  Po.ntilex 
?;)robSe\arthe  public  ritlial  and  worship  should  be  most   sacredly  man itnined/ 
would    re^^^^  that  I  could  be  persuaded  of  the  fact  that  gods  exis  .  Cic   N.  D.  1    22. 

O  m  1-  <  or  equ  r  m  fu^  tibi\'iderCre.  is-  per  municipia  cum  caligis  et  lacernS  cu- 
Tn^^^'i-o^SclZxiohiiye  been  a  vice-dictator,  you  ran  through  he  provincial 
t  WIS  i,\  bro^^ans  and  duster.  lb.  Phil.  2,  30.-  (d)  Sometimes  (mostly  poetically)  relative 
cl-  u"es  "  1  ■  ma.le  dependent  ou  '  ill.  ego  '  or  '  eqo  ille  \-  Itaque  eqo  ille  qui  semper  pacts 
a  ic tor'hi, ,) "ce.n  cum  Antonio  esse  nolo  ;  /.  the  same  7^'Ao  have  always  counsel  ed  peace 
opp."  e  a  l)eace  with  Antonius.  Cic.  Phil.  7,3.-7««  ego  qui  quondam  gracili  etc.  (7  who 
once  sum:  etc.).  Virg.  .En.  1,  1.  _„„„„j 

Obs  .5  Personal  pronouns,  as  antecedents  of  a  relative  clause,  are  sometinies  merged 
\uT,J^es^re  wljectire :  Illud  quidem  nostrum  consilium  laudai.dum  est.  9?'^  '"«<>';  ci vis 
lervi^^Irmrms  objicere  noluoim  (literally:  That  o,.inioii  ..f  ours  is  praiseworthy  zfAodid 
not  wish;  i.  e.  It  is  praiseworthy  wlien.  I  did  not  wish  etc.).  Cic.  t^am.  i,y  . 

1    Laiublbnnt  fortflnas  ineas  qvi  trnatum  (son)  habCrem  tali  ingenio  pnediliim.   Ter. 
Andr    1,1,71.-2.  Id  wnl  minime  refert  qui  sum  natu   maxnnus.  lb.  Ad   5  4  2^.— 
.3.  Til  nostra,  qui  remaiisi<semu<,  caule  contentum  te  esse  dicebas    C.c.  Cat   I-  8.  «•— 
4     Vestra.  qui  cum  summjl  inte-ritilie  vixistis,  h.u-  maxime  interest.  H>-  !"«''"•  ^»'  ' ^  — 
.5.   Vej<tra  cousilia  accusantnr.  qui  mihi  summum  liononm  imposuistis.  ball.  Jug.  eo.— 
c!  Vehementer  intererat  restrd,  qni  patres  estis,  Plin.  Ep.  4,  13. 
Bern   8.  There  arc  relative  clauses  which  have  only  a  logical,  but  no 
irranimalical  antecedent.     Such  clauses  pass  over  into  co-ordinate  rela- 
tives {/?.  9),  and  are  used  to  add  facts  or  remarks  pertainin.i;  to  a  whole 
sentence,  or  to  any  of  its  parts  not  V)ein<r  nouns  or  pronouns.     The  rela- 
tive, in  this  consi'iMiction,  assumes  the  following  forms:  1)  That  of  the 
neuter  singular  (jund  (qaioduin,  quale),  representing  the  clause  as  referring 
to  the  idea  of  the  '  fact'  involved  in  the  sentence  to  which  it  refers  (J^  060, 
7?.  2 1).    2)  The  form  qnm  res  in  the  place,  and  with  the  meaning  of  q>tod 
8)  The  form  of  an  (ittributirc  rehitire,  agreeing  with  a  governing  noun  of 
general  imi)ort  m  liich  represents  what  is  stated  in  the  sentence  in  a  more 
particular  manner  than  hv  the  general  designation  'res'  {qum   senteniia, 
quod  qenus,  qui  honor  etc.).— The  sentence  to  which  the  relative  refers  is 
called  the  *  LOGICAL  ANTECEDENT'  of  tlie  relative,  and  the  relatives  thus 
referring  to  iojxical  antecedents  are  called  '  logical  relatives'. 

0ns  1  ^Kelative  clauses  of  this  kind  form  the  transition  from  pronominal  .^?/Z«)?Yfi««- 
tinn  t.;  pVonominal  coordination  (p.  473.  Obs.  2),  as  :  P.mipejus,  qiiodmihi  ^I'J^^modohri 
fst.  ipse  se  afllixit :  Pompey  has  injured  iii.mself,  which  is  very  patnfid  tome  ^^ic-  At»- 
2  IM  2  Here  the  relative  dau-^e  *  7^/0^/. .  .^>r  does  not  lorm  a  member  of  the  principal 
sentence  '  7'o;/*/>r/V/N  in>^,^  se  affliHt\  On  the  contrary,  the  principal  sentence  is  repre- 
se  ted  as  -incorpora  ed'  in  the  clause  by  means  of  the  relative  quod,  vhichimplies 
'v,hichjWc/ "-namely  'that  P..mpey  injured  himsell  \    But  this  incorporaiion  is  a  cri- 

*  A  similar  conTtiuction  is  Pometh^ies  applied   to  national  adjectives,  to  which  the 

relative  idlers  as  il  to  a  national  noun,  as  :  Vejens  bellum  ortuni  est.  ?/'f '^^^^J^^^Vnl!  h«d 
C(.iuunxerant;TheVejentian  war  an.se  «•i//Mr//w/M  =  wiihwliKhpe..ple  the  S^^^^^^ 

made  an  alliance  Liv.  2.  .«.-National  adjectives  have  exactlv  the  same  relation  t;>  i  «Um  1 
nouns  as  possesMve  adjectiv-  to  ihecorr.-spondn.ir  persona  pronouns.  1 1"»^.  "*'«'»  ^'^j 
meniioned  sentence  mi-hi  be  thus  cban-ea  :  '  Nostrum  bellum  ortum  est  qml^us  SabTni 
arma  conjunxeraiit  \  Madvig,  who  has  no  objection  to  this  connection  of  relativcb  w  ith 
possessives,  censures  the  quoted  passage  of  Livy— which  is  inconsistent. 


516 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


tcrinn  of  pronominal  coordinafio»  (p.  473\  beinir  juist  the  vcvcr?o  of  the  principle  in« 
volvi-d  ill  sulHjrdiiKitiDii.  Never  h«'les.s  the  <'l:ui>c  is  virtually  and  *  lojrically  '  .s////<>/v/i. 
lalte^  since  it  mos;  IrcMiiU'iirly  pret-idcs  the  seiilt'iicc  to  which  it  relers?  or  is  iii-i'it-d  in 
it  (auaiiist  llie  iisr  in  pronominal  c<iurdinat!on  by  deni<»nt«trative?).  and  may  always  l)e 
conceived  as  an  oidinanj  rdath-e  danfe  dependent  on  a  noun  of  «general  import  {-jact') 
in  appoiiU'ion  to  the  p'incipal  sentence,  and  iieiice  foimir.g  :i  meniUer  of  it  (Ponipey  hii.s 
injured  iiimself,  a  fact  which  is  verv  painful  to  me).  Indeed  thi>  form  of  tlie  «pposilion 
is  freqiien  I  ly  preferred  in  the  English  renderinu:  to  the  Latin  '  loj^iral  relative'.  Ex-n 
in  Latin  this  kind  of  sentence-apposition  (which  is  not  admissihie  in  ordinary  r^^lalivc 
constructions,  seep.  5()6.  Obs.  .'})  is  frequently  applied  to  the  loiricnl  relatives  [id  qxod  ;wq 
Obs.  4).— Since  lo<;icHl  nlative  clauses  cannot  he  considered  as  heinL'jrrammatically  mem- 
bers of  the  principal  sentence,  it  follows  that  Ikeij cannot  take  fyndttic  anlectdtnts  to  rej)- 
resent  them  in  the  principal  sentence. 

Obs.  *>.  Logical  relative  clauses  of  this  kind  may  have  a  doublk  relation,  1)  that  of  an 
or^/'//rtr// relative  clause  introduced  by  quod  wiili  an  "absolute'  antecedent  expres-ed  or 
undors'ood  in  the  principal  sentence;  and  'i.)  that  of  a  A>f/^v// relative  clause  conceiv.  d  as 
apposition  to  rtAO/'//t/'c/(^/'^N^,  dependent  on  the  same  principal  sentence,  as  :  Feci,  quod  pro- 
fectoaute  me  nemo,  ut  ipse  me  per  iitteras  consolflrer ;  1  succeeded  to  be  my  0"ii  c«)m- 
forter  by  literature, a ///i/<f///m/  surely,  nobody  attem{)ted  before  me,  (literally  :  1  did  what 
liobody  did  before  me,  (naniely»  that  I  was  my  own  comforter).  Cic.  Alt.  Iv',  14,  3. — Nihilo- 
minus  llelvi'tii  id  quod  constitueraitt  facereconantur,  uf  e  tiiiihus  siiis  extant  ;  The  Helve- 
tians nevertiieler-s  undertook  to  carry  out  what  ihey  had  resolved  before,  junnely  t/it  etni- 
gration  from  tiieir  country,  or  '  The  Helvetians  neverthehiss  tried  to  leave  their  country, 
(which  w^is)  in  accordance  with  their  fortneri)lans.'  Cu's.  M.  G.  L  5.— Clauses'  of  this  kind, 
which  must  always  l)e  recast  in  renderm;.',  may  assume  the  inverted  form  accordiiiL;  to 
7i'.  ().  Obs.  4,  in  wliich  instance  a  pyndelic  antecedent  must  be  used,  as  ;  Quod  a  N'erre 
pridie  Heraclius  impi'tnlre  non  potiierat,  id  ei  postiiiiie  venit  in  tnentem,  e.r  lege  /,'unifia 
sortlri  dicax  opnrttre  ;  On  the  ne.xt  day  came  to  Verreg's  mind  ichat  Heraclius  could  mir 
obtain  from  liim  the  day  before,  namely  that  according,'  to  the  Hupilian  law  he  must 
draw  the  judires  by  lot.  Cic  Verr.  v»,  2,  17.  Here  the  intinitive  <'lause  'e.rr  le(j€...opor- 
tere"  is  the  subject-clause  of  the  period  ;  the  (lo;:ical)  relative  clatise  Upiod. .  .nan  jiotue- 
raf  is  in  ai)position  with  it,  '•id  ei..  .in  imiitini'  beinj;  the  |>rincipal  senieiice.  At  the 
same  lime  the  relative  clause  V///of/  potiorat'  is  an  ordinary  absolute  relative  clau>e 
in  re^rard  to  the  principal  sentence,  in  whicli  its  syndetic  antecedent  id  represents  the 
subject.      See  Ex.  1.  2. 

Ob!«.  3.  Lojirical  relative  clauses  with  quod  mostly  occur  in  the  form  of  paienthttical 
clauses,  so  as  either  to  jjrecedc  the  sentence  which  they  incorporate,  or  to  he  inserted 
in  it,  or  in  the  period  to  which  they  belontr.  They  are  variou>ly  rendered  in  English, 
^^enerally  by  placini;  them  after  the  sentence  (with  'irlth/i'),  or  by  inserting  them  in  the 
form  of  a  demonstrative  clause  with  'and\  or  by  chan<j;ini;:  the  construction  substan- 
tively ;  as  :  Detiique  (contirmo),  quod  eM  indignifiHiinutn,  per  tribflnos  plehis  reues  in 
civitilte  constltui;  Lastly  I  assert  (and  this  is  tlie  inoxl  outnupous  tliinq).  that  kin-^'s  are 
introdu'ed  by  the  tribunes  of  the  people.  Cie.  Leir.  Ajrr.  2,  ('>. —  (^ui  virtQte  i)ra'diti  sunt, 
eoli  sunt  divites  ;  t^oVi,  quod e.^t  j)ropnuni  dii  itiarun/.  coiwcuxi  suis  n-bus  sunt ;  The  vir- 
tuous alone  are  rich;  they  alone  are  contented  with  their  own,  which  is  a  criterion  (f 
wealth.  Cic.  Par.  (>,  52.— Captu*  urbis  L'oniflnjv,  quod  jtost  paiicos  accidil  arttios,  chides; 
The  disaster  of  tiie  capture  of  Koine,  which,  happened  after  a  few  years.  Li  v.  5,  21. —  See 
Ex.  3-5. —  The  relative  clause  is  placed  after  the  sentence,  either  if  both  proi)0>iliona 
are  very  short  and  plain,  or  to  give  emphasis  t(»  the  facts  asserted  in  the  clause  :  Natus 
est  Gadibus.  qnodinnw  negaf :  He  is  born  at  Gades,  ichicti  nohody  denies  (which  is  n()t 
dispuied). —  At  erat  mecum  seiiatu-'.et  (luidem  v»'ste  mutatil.  quod  p/ome  unojfost  honii- 
nu/n  /netfioriam  pul/lico  con.silio  nusceptuin  est  ;  But  tin- Seiiaie  htood  by  me,  and  nn)re- 
over,  in  the  gart)  of  miserv,  an  honor  ?rhich,  as  far  as  hisforical  records  go.  has  f/ee/i 
shown  tome  alone  hy  official  action.  Cic.  Plane.  .35.  HT.  See  Ex.  «i.  If  the  lelaiive  clause 
follnws  the  sentence,  '•quie  ?'es'  is  sometimes  used  in  i)lace  of  qu(/d.  which  is  generally 
the  case  if  the  relative  is  required  to  be  in  an  oliliquc  case  (see  below):  Ca>ar  navis 
paullum  removGri  jussit;  qua' res  magnousui  nostris  fuit.  Ca^s.  B.  G.4.  25. — Cunicullsad 
aggerem  vineasque  actis,  <•?//«.<  rei  sunt  longe  ])eritissimi  Aquitani;  After  digging  mines 
towards  the  rampart  and  tlie  covered  ways,  in  which  (art)  the  .Aciuitani  tire  most  skillful, 
lb.  3,  2L—  Often  quod  is  connected  l)y  ip-iutn,  in  which  instance  it  is  ofti-n  imi)o-sil)le 
to  render  without  imi>airing  tlie  force  «»f  tlie  relative  construction  by  substituting  an 
English  coordination  :  Orat  vos  ut  banc  ui-bem  sibi  intiieri  liceat,  quod  ipsuin  for- 
tflna  eripiierat,  nisi  nnlus  ainlci  ojjcs  subvenissent :  He  implores  you  to  allow  him  the 
sight  of  this  city,  and  even  of  this  loon  fate  woidd  have  deprivi-d  him  withoiit  one 
friend's  help.  Cic.  Rjib.  Post.  Yt,  A'i^.—  Quod,  asa  logical  relative,  is  generally  used  onlyi'i 
the  nominative,  accusative  and  ablative  singular,  as  :  Dociii  nuUam  ratiOnem  huic  cor- 
rumpendi  luissc  ;  ex  quo  intelligitur  etc.  ;  From  which  it  is  clear  that  etc.  {which  goes  to 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  RELATRTIS. 


617 


„.e  etc  )    Cic.  Cln.  23,  ^. ,  Thus  in  the  e-f^tiori  >ntb  a  c^-^ 

TV         'sMcoiid  not  be  -«'VK'f^^^iy';;^i^^;,'^cu  •  in  omei  cases,  and  even  iu 
Mc    O r    5tJ.     So.neti.nes.  however,  logical  ^1-»'  ^^-  ''^^^.^i  qbs.  o.-ln  the  same  way  us 
ule-nVt^ier  pUual,  as  in  nie  passage      "^  ;.,  ^^^^J^^kal  clause,  restricti.^g  the  .mncipal 
r:Hcr;;;Tn.;Ssf:^in;Hi^t-dS^^lhe     la..^ 
Sni^S  rS.S'or^U  ^Z^^^a:ZXL  I  couMdo  wUb  human  w.. 

•nee     It  m.ts.'be  conceived  as  "^'"'^'"S  »»^V„^  ;  S  maxitneexspectSri 

Av POSITION  to  the  principal  f^^^^^'^^e.  a- •  »  ""J^'^^Ytutm        :  When  Pomp5jus  showed 

v!dc-ba.ur.  os.endit  -' J^^e  oMle    r  bS,  a^^^^^^^^^^^^       «/'^^'^  -^«!"S''^  ^"  *'J'  IT^t^^ 
thnt  tie  would  restore  the  V*^^^  "\!.?*iw  Vrf  (/wrxi  lam  ante  dixi,  imprudeiite  Sulia 

expected,  etc.  Cic  Y^'»'--.  V.„\".i:.  rthes^c  inel  Wlu^^  already  remarked  before,  are 
.celera  luec  fi^/^.'/^f,//^.'^  1^^/«  .'i;^.^^^^^  Am.  9,  25.  See  Ex.  8.  9. 

committed  witiiout  Sulla  s  know  ica^c.  «entence  is  incorporated, 

Ons.  5.  Frequently  in  the  logical  relaj  -  ^J^^^^,^^^^^^  i'al'^Of  en  Hrc'fdl'a'to  wKich  the 
but  such  parts  of  it  as  may  ^^«^'•"'■fi  f^^^L^^he  Ste^^^  inference.    Such  constructions 

relative  thus  refers  must  be  elicited  ft  cm  l^'^^^^^'l'}^^.^^^  as:  Si  etiam  momndi 

are  freque  tlv  repugnant  to  the  Eng  ish  H^''»  ^  ""^,"^"^^  ^^^^  etc  :  If  YOU  must  l)e.  also, 
e  tis  t?  me,  quod  non  estis,  videor  h\>c  l^'f  .  «^^^^  ^  ecomneiVd  li.is,  that  etc..  (literal  y.: 
rnhnoni^hedhyine.  which  tsnof  necessary,  I  \^<nua  \l^vuux  42  _Sic  mihi  persmlsi, 

il^vcm  a  fto  be  admonished,  «'/.ic-A  you  are  "^ ^^^^^^^Jii^-^^ym)  si  non  posset, 

i\iJ,m  >4mplex  animi  -^'^- --[',-;ra;e's;^  ^«^  ^'-^f^'r^^i' 

non  t.osse  intcrlre  ;  I  aiii  sitishwl  tlut  tlie  soui^i  ^^^^^^  ^_^^  perirh    Cic.  Sen 

cannot  be  divided;  and  V;''S'  ,;\'.,f'  "  «li  ?  nifiv  bl^^  P^^ral,  if  it  refers  to  seveml 
91  78  — In  Ibis  nstance  the  logical  '^.'^'^!^\\  "J  ;,,',.,.  ..^  •  Neque  en  m  scnbenli.  edi- 
?  >;i;dinafe  ideas,  contained  i'»  the  prn-ctpa    ^  ^"^Kge^nu^^ujuscunque  il't^-rveidm. 

ecenti.  coiritanti.  l''«''^'^'l'V'*  f  ^'';^' .\/. m.^Tas^^^^^^^^  when  the  latter  is  writing, 

impedimento  est  :  F<.r  the  teache    c  n      t  «"^^^f  »^^^,,^  V^i„._.  ^  hindrance  to  those  en- 

action  ci)ntained  m  tlie  «^^'V^'^^V' .JTi '  ,rs  i^n  a  «"n  ilar  wav  as  in  the  instance  mentioned 
tlie  relativ."  without  liemg  its  antecedents,  in  a  . '  "  y  ;;  •,  gjative  has  a  qraniviatical 
t.r.ol'l  3,  only  that  in  the  instance,  ^;:;;!^^^^^  ^»;;,,^- ,  liJiVl.f  the  relative  is  lo^fi- 
antecedent  in  llie  governinir  sen  eiice,  w''  '^.  V^l  ^...^l  i  KiiLdish,  either  by  making  the 
S.  S"ch  constructions  must  be  /jH":^-  '  ^  ,  ;  ,  -ted  w  ih  the  governing  sentence  in 
Snerningm)un  of  the  relative  its  "."teceden      011  u    itu  «  ^     .  Pomptniuis.  qui 

tie  form  of  an  appositio..,  or  by  using  th'   ^V]^l^\^J^'^^  testi's.  i.nestat  tihi  rne.no- 

a  te  Uactru.is  est  ^^''^  ^^^^'^^ll^'J^^-\^^^  ^"^'«1,  "•'^'"^^^V'-V  "^ 

riam  quai.i  debet  :  Pompiimus.  who  h^^J;^^.  "   /'/'^    a-"  he  ought.  Cic.  Fam.  3,  10,  ■^•- 

Quidaii.  sibi  nullan,  societfltem  ^7/"/"^V;;=  '  .l^VI  •  sonie  hold  that  no  bcmd  unites  them 
q.iw  sententia  societatem  omnem  <':'\\.''',  ;,?;,,;  nte.ests.  a»  opinion  which  dissolves 
?vitli  their  fHlow-ci.i/AMis  in  regard  toll   cm^^^^^  .-xercittis  ab  GalUs  yisa_sunt. 

all  civil  society.  Cic.  Oil.  3.  ^'^^''^^^^'uJ^aX.  (minibus  copiis  l>ro  vol  aver  tint 
Quod  tewpus  inter  eos  committendi     la  n  ^*;";'  "^  J  '  ^auls,  ///n-c/i  moment  they  bad 
When  the  ba-'at'C  tram  of  our  army  was  seen  ;^>  ;' *^  ,'^:;^    ^..^.^.  r.  g.  2.  19.-  Atticus 

which  cannot  be  literally  rendered  in  English  . 


518 


EELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


A.  Relative  cI.jupcs  with  ntioft  nrc  ii?ert  with  the  force  of  an  English  coniparativo 
clansc  with  -^s- '.  or  of  a  condition;!!  clause  witli  '  if  : 

{(i)  In  the  forniuia  f/>/nfl  ajimf.  (inst.  of  ttf  a'pint^  or  (jnomodoajunO.  referring  to  a  pro- 
verb. =  'a-^ iHopIt  my\  'as  the  prorah  has  it \  Uicamliny  to  the  jtrocerh\ik^:  Nee  kc- 
piilcra  leu'eiisi  vereor,  (juod  aju/if,  ne  perflani  inenionani  ;  Nor  am  I  afraid  of  losin»-  my 
inem()r\;  by  readinirt^epuhhres  (sepulchral  inscription»),  as  (ht-  ptvr<rdMii/s.  C'ie.  Stir?  — 
Irtje  ii;itur.  iiec  traiisversmn  uii<rin-in.  f/wof/  aju/it.  a  stiio:  Go  on.  tiierefore,  but  do  liot 
go  a  nad  s  l)readtii  beyond  (tVonii  tiie  pen.  as  pwple  my  {i.  e.  do  not  spe.ik,  l)ut  coiiHiio 
yourselt  to  wntini:).  Cic.  Fam.  7.  •,>.^,  2.     [Here,  tlic  proierh  is  the  sentence  iucorporaied 
m  the  l();,Mcal  relative  quod,  —  vvhicit  tiling  (proverb)  the  people  say. J 
^  (ft)  In  arestncdve  sense  =  'as  far  as"  (mostly   witii  tlie  siib)unctive.  ennivalent  to 
qnantuin    with  the  indicative;  see  Cic.  Fam.  1,!>,  10.  quoted  Uns.  .-it.     'J'hus  it  occurs 
J)  in  the  fonmilas  '  quo'l,  sciam  \  as  far  as  I  know  ;  to  th.-  best  of  mv  knowledf^e  •  '  oi/od 
audierim  \  '  qiHxl cufjuannm  \  as  far  as  I  have  heard,  (frequently  connecied  \>^th  the  rc- 
Btrictive  p;irticle  quidem)  :  (^ui  quiim  ante  hanc  puL'iiam  tiro  esset,  q'/od  sciaw  •   Since 
he  was  a  novice  belore  tins  battle,  as/aras  Iknoiv.  Cic  Jiosc.  Am.  ♦»,  17.— Aristld'es  uiiu« 
l)ost  homiiiiiin  meinoriani.  q)(od  qnidem  I'os  udditninus.  coirnomim-  Justus  est  appella- 
ttis  ;  Ariiiides  was  the  only  one  who,  as  far  as  we  hart  heard,  was  calU-d  the  Just.  Nep 
Ar.  1,2.    See  hx.  14.  1.).— These  formulas  cannot  be  explained  by  Ufa  lit  fciam  \  as  the 
^'rainmariaii.<  do,  which  would  be  more  in  need  of  explanation  than  quod  sciain      Tliev 
are  siibjunctiyts  of  <xuarded  statement,  or  of  individual  oi)iiiion,  api)li.-d  to  an  ordinary 
(lo-ical)  relative  clause.     '  GaJ'is  renief  quod  (  =  id  (piod)  scio'  would  mean  •  Gains  will 
come,  a  fact  whirh  1  know'.     But  '  Gajiis  vuiiet    quod  sciam'  means  'He  will  come,  a 
lact  which  Ifhwk  I  know'  =  '  as  far  as  I  know'.— 2)  In  several  expressions  with  the 
meaniiii,'    asjarassomtthing'  (which  is  expressed  in  the  princi|.al  sentence)  is  consistent 
tinth  somethinq  ,  or  '  not  prejudicial  to  something'  (mostly  exi.rosed  in  the  clause  by 
an  ablative) ;  or  •  tf  sointthingisronMstent  with  somethinq  \    These  formulas  have  alwava 
he  pr.-dirate  jare  re  ])ossim  (  posses  etc.)',  or  facias  ;  fie,  i  possit  (iKM^set),  orfiat  Uiere't), 
ntio(  need  by  quod  as  accusative  (with  face  re),  or  nominative  (with  fiefi)  ;  as  :'Cupio 
tibi  aliqujl  ex  parte,  quod  salru  fide  (facere)]H,ssim,  para  re  ;  I  wish  to  spare  your  feel- 
in<^s  in  some  res,)ect   «.*/«;•  as  1  can  do  consistently  uith  „n,  duties  (as  far  as  is  consist- 
uM  h'Ih?^.hro-  ^''^•«»>''^;Am.34,r,.     These  expressions  inostly  occur  in  connection 
with  the  al)lative  commodo  (  =  'as  far',  or  •  if    consistent  with  somebody's  interest  or 
ionrenience)  or  '  sine  7nolestnV  (  =  «as  far  ',  or  '  if  ccmsistent  with  soiUibodyV  cnnven- 
tenceK  as:  Sed...,  quod  rommodo  fuo^fit-ri  /x)ssi(,  u  tun  >qiw.  nostrum  nia-'ui  inter,  stut, 
te  videam  :  But.,  .it  is  very  much  in  tlie  intrresi  of  both  of  us  that  1  should  see  you   it- 
consistent  n-ith  your  con reni>nre.  Cic.  Fam.  ;j.  b.  4.-  (^ua-  tibi  inandAvi.  velim  cures,  ouod 
nnemolestia  tua  jaore  jK>ieris  ,-  j  wi.^h  you  would  aiiemi  to  what  1  have  i)la<ed  in  vour 
hands,  asjarasconrenient  to  you.  Cic.  Alt.  1,  :.,  7.-Senritus   tibi  decernit  nt  re-ein  'e- 
dacas,  quod  commodo  reipuhli-,efacerei)ossi^  ,-  'J'he  Senate  char-es  von  with  le-instatin" 
]}^^y^\n)z,  as  jar  as  {or  If)  consistent  icith  the  interest  of  thf  rtpiit,lir    Cic    Fam    1    1    .S — 
benatus  censmt.  ut,  qiiicuiKiue  (ialliam  provineiam  ohtinerel.  quod  commodo  reipublhie 
JiKere  jmset  {(isfar  as  vo\\>^\y^w\\H'\c.),  Mnwo^  defenderef.  Ca-s.  B.  (;   ]    Ji^i -Instead  of 
quod,  the  conjunction  si  is  used  in  the  same  sense  :  Scribit  Lal)iCno,  si  'reipubliae  aun- 
modo  jacere  lK>^set,  cum  ieiriOne  ad  liiils  Nervir.nim  veniat  :  lie  wrote  to  Lahienus  to 
;T.  '«^  ''''      r.   *'^'',?'V.*'i^l'V  ^'^Tviau  territory,  if  he.  could  d'j  so  consistently  with  the  pub- 
he  znterest    (  ;e.«<.  B.  G  5^4(,.-In  these  <'xpressions  quod  has  the  force  .,f  ita  ut  id  in  the 
sense  explained  p.  »;.'i7.  No.  2.-  3.  For  some  similar  expressions,  with  both  subjunctive 
and  indicative,  seep.  .OGO,  Obs.  2.— See  Ex.  16-18.  i«i  uuui  sunjuncine 

B  \  relative  clause  introduced  by  'quod  atlinet  ad'  with  an  accii.sative  denotes  '  re- 
gardinff  ov  concerninq  ^oimljody  or  s,muthinq\'u<  to  somefjod,/-,  'with  r>  sped  to  sotne- 
thiu,,  ,  Um  my,  thy.  /us part  '  bein-  often  connected  with  quidem.  It  is  used  either  to 
emphasize  the  person  or  thin- spoken  of  in  the  princii)al  .«.nieiice  (mostlvas  i.areniheti- 
cal  clause,  =  hoc  ad  me,  te,  id  etr.  atfinel,  that  which  is  said  refers  to  m,-  ihe.-  it  etc  )  • 
or  as  a  foi  inula  oj  transition,  if  the  discourse  passes  over  to  a  new  Mil)iect  (  =  /A>r  ouod 

n^^-'l'in'lnn'''x  T  ''"'7'V  "'  '-  l-l"i^l''"^  V'/^/  ad  me  attind,  q.Jo  ,ne  vertam 
nisdo  I,  on  my  part  (As  to  me,  I)  do  not  know  where  to  turn.  Cic.  Clu.  1.  4  -Ut  se  lota 
res  habeat.  ^'/0(/at/ ert///ao7<7/<m  r///i//.^  demonstrabitiir  vobisalio  loco  •  IIow  the  wh-.le 
matter  stands,  ^//  r^qard  to  that  State  (as  far  as  that  State  i<  concerned)  will  be  explained' 
to  you  at  another  place  hereafter).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2.  5.-.I./  t.qatos  quod  attin-t  ou  (  me 
cl*^;Kn;3?s;T"s,SEx.'li;-S.^^'  ^./.7^',.,  what  could   be  doiJL  by  me  ImU  Ct  JJa 

C.  The  relative  formulas  'quoil  nitquum  eM  ',  or  ' quod  supere^t'  (•  a«  to  the  rest "  = 
eeterum),  are  mere  lormulasol  iran>iti..n,  b.-ii.fr explained  in  ihe  .-atne  wav  as  the  ahove- 
said  -"«r^  nVTr''"  (  -.'1'»''^'  which  will  be  directly  mentione.l,  stiirremains  to  be 
IV.fiAl'^"  *'7>^/-6y^  s!  verum  illiid  (proverbium)  e>t,  certe  pormanebunt  ;  For  the 
rest,  If  that  proverb  is  true,  they  will  surely  remain.  Cic.  Alt.  5,  11,  5.-Quod  rdiqiiuni 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  RELATIVES. 


519 


«»<  velim  au-cas  tua  in  eum  bencficia  omnibus  rebus  qn.-e  te  eruvt  di'^nie  •  As  to  th^ 
lS!Fr^'^:^.l'^:^'^S:'''  '"'"'''  '"'""  '"'''  "'"^^^  thataio^econ^ngyiu! 
J).  Thelo-icalrelativetakes  an  ATTRIBUTIVE  form  in  the  sense  explained  Ob«  6  in 
those  clau>e.swhicli  have  tin;  force  of  the  preposition  ;>w  (accordins;  tc/ in  ,.c  o  daiu  e 
with.  p.  3.5  /^.  02.,  bem-  rendered  in  the  same  way.  or  t)v  '  with  'or  ^S>nXdeZr  11- 
1  u,  s,  esset  lacium,  quce  tua  esfhumanitas.  ascrip^isses  flf  it  had  been  d.ufe  y  "^i  w.M.ld 
have  added  It  ,sa,d  s..)  in  your  letter,  in  accnrdance  with  your  courtesy  i^nmennovour 
courtesy  ;  literally  :  you  would  have  added  it,  which  is  you,-  humanitf)  Cic  An  7  1  \ 
In  ttiese  expressions  the  relative  is.  iriainmaticaliy.  the  predicate  n<yur,o{  the  c\L^^  /hn 
manitas  tua  A<ec- est  ;  ^>/c/.  is  your  humanity),  the  s.ii,jec    bernnnb"  raci  no   n     les" 

iie'inl'rn  ce  nu"  tlolie.rOc^- '  T^^'^'t?^''!  ''°'^'"^^'-  ^^  ,«  ^"''^f^-'t-e  term,  the  same  as  1 
111    instance  nuntionedOns.  G.     The  above-mentioned  example,  in  its  original  .T".mmat- 

ca  conception  means  •  \  our  humanity  is  such  as  reuresented  in  the  principal  sStece' 
a  clause  wtiich  is  parenthetically  added  to  the  sentence.    Thus  :  M,%lifummXih^i' 

'.T/'""/h'''r"'"  >'"^"'"'"  ^«ti^^  Y«'i'"'m  I^'i-'i'^;  This  seemed  to  be  a  sufflck^^  nu-aiiTto 
«mforce  the  law,  in  accordance  with  icoimderinq)  the  discretion  of  men  at  hauTme  i^nX 
was  men  s  di«creti>.n  at  that  time).  Liv.  10,  %     See  Ex.  24.  25.-In  ti^  same  way  the  ?Ha 

ivev</«/tx*isused  to  desi;:nate  the  idea  conveved  by  the  principal  seZ'S^  L^bebf^ 
like   he  i<  ea  of  the  noun  which  is  tlie  subject  of  {lie  clause,  as^:  Abdux,  fidt  s  ante  Po^,  i^ 

S^iSiiii-Srii-^^^^^ 

Or  TV,    ^^^^      ,r     'f    V'"*^''l^^*'r  ^"""'"  countrymen.  I  do  not  despair  that  etc    Ck 
Hv..  i      r,    ''-'  ^^- -^'--I'l^-t^'a'l  of  u^'iJiJ,'  a  relative  as  predicate-nominative  the  same  reS: 
tne  IS  often  used  as  pn  dicate-ablative  of  quality,  as:  Qua  e^  vrudentid  nm\\o^Z\^rt^ 
nn-as  liiteras  d.li^.nter  le,s:eris  ;  Aca>rdinqto  ( With)  ycmi  qt  iS  petcepiiSn   mn^^ 
escape  you  if  you  read  my  letter  with  attention.  Cic^  Fain.  11    13,  1      See  Ex  27  S 

domo^e!nf/4ent'' c""'\?T'"J'".'l  ^'«."'V^«'"  ^'^^=«  faciendum  quod  IlelvetiifeceHnt.  ut 

An  b.<iS;  h  ;>  i^r;c^;.ci.%r'ci"Fl;;n'  I't  r^^lT^r  ^^^^^ML  felicllerS 
ip.nn  erat  scelus,  dS^;5'^^^n^.rhalf^,!L;^:ib;  pJs.^^T-'s  hXIi  em  ^Z^f 

;'i.accid.l     ulirtt  I^G^^o^ 

ime  ob>  en"  S  X.  i  osc  o^'ic    h\7«c   ^'';^;i""  «-«^^  ^'va/.^^rm^r/o  .a-i-syt/n^-.,  possum., 

sunt,  se  injectfln.;^\obis  caVJ^n  delU.4md  ■«'  ib  C.,?c  2^r' m'p.  '  t!--,;^"'''^  '"^-'^"^f 

judices.  id  quod  ad  diquitdtem  j>opull  llil^dd  Imir^,^  %^i^d^  ti    p  iTaS'tf.s  nr/ 

ces  vn-j.,n.s  \  e^talis  q„am  mime^  Galiorum  valuis/e'o^TiSitur    fb    Fon  %T  4^^^^ 

1,-  V^'^*"•^^"'^^7;^  .egem,  9;/o</  numquamantea  apud  «>.■  «m /.m^ii""  ^^avCnin? 

Atlicum  here(  em  fccir  r-vM  f(Mflr,.,.f,.io  ^..  ,..,„  / ..  ",•  r.  ,./       -  c;  "^:  ^^-^  '•^-  «-*<^i 


c   v..      -  V.......    ,  Y""i*  <H-tu//i,  Pii  jieuiem  pronteii-'-' est  ausiis    lb  Fin   -1  '\  1 

hi.  T  MTyTT'  ^,r  ,r"f  ^"  ('^o.facerl  poleris,  venias  ad  hi  ten.p>is'qu'"d 
-*  c       -     -         ^'>'.l--  1'' IVrj,Maium  mihi  Itceris  si  Co.^sinium,  qvod  nne  nwlestia 

aZrL'W"^'"''  '■''/*"'''•  "l"^  ''^''^"'"-  ''  «'-^'""y  concerns  something  -Mhreas-^iorSl 
a/>'/'/  to  h.ive  weii,dit  wiih  s(unebodv.— n  Tlie  relative  clan<e  nWers  i.of   .«  tiw.  ,..V    f 

I'w^iL'*;?' :?"'^";^^''  '''>'  ^'"'>'  '"  ^'-  P'-licate  and  it"objec  -:/  'rm  of  g^ve  1^^"- 
ance  IVt"^* iS^  ^'^Z-  '■  "'^^^  ^'-\«'-ci^cd  l.y.-M  at.  of.-io  ,,,,  p.  ii«.  n,  Itfs.-l»  Mhe:it- 
I  wrote  e  c  -"oTc^  civ'" ""f;  "•'•  f  •  ^  ^r^^-''  I^<'!'/'f  r  ''y  coordination  :  The  book  which 

84..       »v,       T  ^"^*^Py- ^^"•'  l>ook-coi)yists.— -'a  h  storical  ore^ent  — 23  n.  hnlulpv 

was  the  only  one  who.  See  p.  251,  Obs.  7.-"  to  profess  himself  as  wise.       ^^''^^^- 


520 


REL.*.riYE   CLAUSES. 


ANTECEDENTS   OF  RELATTV^ES. 


521 


tu(i  ficU,  si  qua  in  re  op*  ^>  ci  fu«rit.  Invent».  lb,  Fam.  13,  23,  2.—  IS.  Tu  velim,  qund 
coninwdo  valetn'iinix  Uu^^-i'if,  c\nAn\\o\\)^\<Ainc  ixiteri;».  ohvinm  nol)!»»  prouert-ei».  II). 
14,  5.  1.—  19.  Sic  ill  provticiil  ik>!<  <,'erinms2,  qu(kl  <i(l  aMirw/tfuim^  attinet,  ut  iiullus 
ternn^in;*'*  ii)8iiinatur*  in  qiieniqiiam.  lb.  Alt.  5,  iT,  2.-20.  Quod  ad  popnldrem  ratio- 
nem^  attiiiet,  hoc  vid6imir  cfgc  cuiijifcflri'  ut  ne  quid  ULri''  cum  populo  cine  vi  poissit. 
lb.  Fan».  1,2,4. —  21.  Quoii  ad  me  attinet.  jnin  advei>a'»,  jarn»"  feciindas  re^^  inc  ita 
IraudavCrmit"  ut  ratiOat*m  scqui"  quam  ff>rtniiam  maliiii.  Liv.  3(),  30.— 22.  Ihvc  qui- 
deni  iiacteiius'3  :  qtiod  r<^/i(jnii/n  est .  qwothWr  tab-llariof*'*  habCbis.  Cic.  Att.  Hi.  15.3. 

—  23.  QutMi  '<ui)erettt,  Hcril)c  qua  ii  accural ifsiine  quid  placcat.  quici  cfnseas.  II).  \).  19,  4. 

—  24.  Si  niihi  perinisisse»^,  rem,  qui  rueus  amor  in  U  eM,  coufecifiscm'*  euro  coheredi- 
1)119»«.  II).  Fam.  7,  2.—  25.  Non  dubito  quiri  fine  meft  commcMiflatiOne,  q>/od  tuum  eat 
judicium  de  homini}ju.<i,  ipslu;*  Lami;e  c^iUt^A  omr.i.i  btudir>.>*t-  faciOrus  pii».  lb.  12,  29.  2. — 
20.  Huic  prKlecLo  ipsj,  gua/Uu/n  eM  siluin^''  t'«  nobi.'<.  «ipem  fern-  debCmui».  II).  Arch.  1. 
— 27.  Ajax,  quo  ariim.0  (fuisse)  tradifur,  mi  lie»  oppeierf'*  mortem  quam  ilia  i)orpi'ti 
nialui^!«et.  lb.  Off.  1, 31.—  28.  Fater  tuus  «i'^  viverei,  qui  severitdle  fuit,  lu  prol'ecto  uon 
vivere?,  lb.  Dom.  32. 

Rem.  9.  Tlie  form  of  the  relative  clause  is  very  freqnentl)'-  used  "svitli 
the  force  of  a  puoxo.minal  pkuiodical  cooudinatio.n  (p.  173.  Obs.  2,  4). 
Siicii  relatives  have  in  every  respect  the  fmiclion  of  tlie  denionstratives 
hic  or  Uy  havin<^  antecedents  onl}»-  in  that  sense  in  which  every  demonstra- 
tive and  the  pronoun  is  of  the  third  person  are  sai«l  to  have  antecedents 
(P.  1.  §  2o2).  The  propositions  introduced  by  these  relatives  are  not 
clauses,  but  independent  sentences.      Relatives  of  this  kind  are  called 

COOUDINATING  UELATIVES. 

Obs.  1.  Coordinating  relatives  are  mostly  used  for  ;)rrio(/«m/ .coordination  (Obs.2  foil.). 
But  sometimes  they  are  used  for  a  coordination  of  i)ropor-itionf*  within  a  period.  In  this 
instance  they  always  include  one  of  tlie  coordinating  conjunctions  et  or  autem  (and  its 
synonyms)  {qui  —  et  if-'  or  s^id  i.<).  Sometimes  they  renresent  a  causal  or  consecutive 
coordination  (qui  =  nim  ii^ ;  or  is  iqitur)  ivifhiii  a  period.  Such  relatives  are  eitlu^r  ren- 
dered by  thh!  required  Englisli  coordinating  conjunctions  in  connecion  with  u  demon- 
strative or  a  pronoun  of  tlie  third  person,  or  by  pariicipial  construction;  as;  Katio 
docet  esse  deos;  quo  couceiino  contltendum  est  eOrum  cousilio  mundusn  adminisinlri ; 
Kt^ason  teaches  that  tliere  are  iroils  ;  and  if  this  is  qntnttd  (this  granted)  we  must 
acknowledire  that  tlie  world  is  ruled  by  their  will.  C"ic.  N.  I).  2.  .30,  7.').  — i'lerl(iue  exi-li- 
niunt,  si  acriiis  Sulla  insequi  volnisset.  belliini  eo  die  j)otiiisse  tinlri ;  cujn^'  consilium 
reprehendenduTU  non  vidCinr;  Most  people  think,  that  the  war  mijht  liave  been  rtid^hed 
on  that  day  if  Sulla  had  made  up  liis  mind  to  pursue  the  enemy  with  greater  energv  ; 
but  Ids  management,  in  my  opinion,  is  not  reprehensible.  (.  jes.  It.  C.  3.  51.— CupidiiStes 
sunt  in-atiabiles,  quie.  non  modo  ^ingulos  homines,  sed  nniversas  familias  everiunt ; 
Appetites  are  insatiable,  dtr^troijing  not  only  single  individuals,  but  whole  families.  C"ic. 
Fin.  1.  13. — Mnlras  ad  res  lierutiles  Xenophonti-  libri  sunt  ;  quos  legite,  qucE^o,  studiOse  ; 
Xenophon's  writing-  are  very  useiul  lor  many  puri)Oses;  htiice  do  read  them  with  uili- 
gence.  Cic.  Sen.  17.  59.—  Ex.  1.  2. 

Obs.  2.  The  form  of  fEiiiODic*L  pronominal  coordination  by  moans  of  a  relative  is 
more  frefiuently  iist-d  than  a  coOnlinatiou  by  means  of  a  demnnstr.iiive,  if  the  period 
connected  with  previous  periods  is  introduced  by  a  i)rot,isis,  or  by  am/  clause  ^finite  or 
I)articipial)  precedin»:  i:s  jtrineipal  M-ntent-e.  In  this  iiisijince  the  relaiive,  with  its  gov- 
erning luwxw,  jtrecedts  the  conjiiiK^lion  of  the  clause,  and  is  the  fir>t  word  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  ablatives  absolute  ;  as;  Ilia  StoicOrum  de  so  oi>inio  tirma  in  Hiitilioet 
stabili^  invtMita  est.  Qui  quum  innocent issimtis  in  jiidieinm  vocil  us  csset.  omtofem  ad- 
hibGre  noluir  ;  That  self-respect  of  the  Stoics  was  found  firm  and  unalteralde  in  Kiitiliiid. 

'  Ohviam  properdre^  to  jfo  to  meet  by  a  rapid  journ«\v.— "■'  w  fjrrtre,  to  act. — ^  af^stinen- 
tiawiiti  a  technical  term,  denoting  the  quality  of  n  higlier  officer,  esptcially  of  provin- 
cial governors,  who  took  no  gifts.  We  have  no  term  for  it  in  Knirli-'h,  aldiotiirii 
wesoinetimes  need  it  :  'as  to  gift-rcfnsiiii;  \— ■«  not  a  fartliiiiir ;  tfruncius  being  tlirfc- 
twelltlis  of  an  as. — *  assessed  upon,  taken  from  ;  i/isuui<re  implyiuLT  the  idea  ^?/w/'/<'' 
facere  in.—^  po|)ular  government.—'  to  have  arrived  at  that  point  where.  — **  aliqu'id 
agilur  cum  populo  was  a  technical  term  applied  to  those  political  aflairs  wliidi  li  ul 
to  be  decided  by  a  vot"  of  the  people:  Nothing  can  be  transacted /y// the  peopU' with- 
out violence."-"  adi'e)s<e  res,  adversity;  stru /idee  res,  prosi»erity. — ^°  J<tfn  . .  Jam.  imw 
...now. — >i  disappoint.— i"'*  to  rely  upon  reason.—"  an  elliptical  expies^on;  supply 
dicta  sin f :  'So  much  for  this  subject '.—»*  letler-c.irriers  will  be  at  your  dis))Osition.-- 
^"  to  arrange.— 1«  coheir.— i'  rests  with  us  {sitvtn  esse,  to  be  situated,  to  lie).—'"  to 
expose  himself  to  death.—-»  See  p.  479,  Ob.<?.  10. 


r^  vif'S)  /T  innocent  was  placed  under  trial  he  declined  to  employ  a  defender 
Cu-  I.ru  .iO.-Quam  Jaculfatem  n  quis  casus  oripuerit,  mea  tamen  in  te  officia  consfa: 
bunt  ;  y/  any  incident  should  deprive  me  of  this  pririleqe,  my  services  to  v^m win  s/m 
remain  the  same  Cic.  Fam.  3,  5,  4.-Thus  coordinating  relatives  are  ele-^a  ly  laci 
before  re  ative  indirect  questions,  as  :  De  quo  quid  sentilim  nihil  attinet  dicere  •  ^Vhatl 
tiankor  him,  it  ,s  o.  no  use  tellinir  you.  Cic.  Fam  4.  7,  3.-.Co-o..iina"ri-  relmi'ves  ay 
even  be  placed  before  oti.ei;  relative  clatL.es  to  wl.fch  thev  belong  as  demT.nVtr  We<  a? 
Kc  qutbus  qjae  maxime  diflerant  ab  ceteris  hj^c  sunt ;  Those  oHhem.s  hicl  diftVr  nnw  t 
rom  he  other  (animals),  are  the  foII«,win-  C«s.  13.  G.  (J,  J.-S.  See  £v.  3-10  Her"  e- 
long  the  frequent  connections  y//^6  quum  ita  Hut.  quo  facto,  qua  re  coqnita  etc  -Kelative 
co-ordinations  of  periods  are  likewise  (l,ut  not  so  frequent  v)  used  when  the  eo-ordiiate 
period  begins  with  the  pnncipal  sentence,  or  consists  only  of  independet  sentences  as^ 
Cimontestarumsurtragiis  decern  annorumexsiliomnltfltis  est.  6V^^/.M•acti  ceSrf  Aih^^^ 
niensls  qtiani  ipsum  pcen.tuit ;  The  Athenians,  however,  r..-rett('d/A.iJ  fact  qi^icker  than 
he  himself.  Nep.  Ar.  3  Here  belonir  the  frequent  com'iections  by  LamXm%e/a  2£ 
causa,  quapropter,  quo  temim-e.    See  Ex.  11-14/  <duu.,nuu,trn,  qua  ae 

r..?T:  ^-  r  "  !''*^  ^''?'"®  ,'^'*y  ^l*"^.  '■^'*^'^)  ^he  relative  adverbs  ubi,  unde.  and  qno  are  n«ed 
for  co-ordination  in  place  of  the  a.lvcrbs  of  the  definite  f..rm  (?7vi  i^rf"%o)  as  •  Inde 
hm.lius  Lacediomonem  adit  «c  Pallantium.  Undex>^v  Megalopo  n'oTvmpiam  e'cend  t 
I  tji  et  alia  spectanda  visa,  et  Jovem  vehit  pne^entem  intiiens  motus  kni  no  est  -i^m;^ 
there  \x^  proceeded  by  way  of  Megalopolis  to  Olvmpia.  77/./-Hie  saw  J  c  Lv  V5  28 
;?c  Wh/Mfp'""'"'"»*^!'^"'"""^  legatospergit.  (^/^.  quum  Perse.?s  obviam  proce^'sl^s;;^ 
etc. ;  W  hen  Perseus  had  come  to  that  place  to  nieet  them.  lb.    Ex.  15-17.     *"^"*'^'^''*^^'^ 

Obs.  4    The  neuter  relative  quod  is  used  as  a  oevrual  connective  of  a  neriod  which 
IS  opened  by  a  rnoTASis  with  si  (quod  and  si  being  (,ften  wriaen  as  one  word       I    t  fis 
connection  r/W_  does  not  refer  to  any  antecedent,  except  to  the  wdioiriv^ult  of  wh»f 
has  been  stated  in  previous  pcMi.,d<.    It  represents  the  ;;  o/ck  (and  so  net  mes  thenr^n 
c  pa  sentence)  as  connected  in  a  ireneral  way  with  the  prec  nl-n-    e,i    f  ,r  "^^^^^^ 

Ks  th,u;n;ese  "oS:i?a  Ivlt'n?  r"rt"'"^'^"  ^^'  ?"4^'  ^'^'^'^'^  W  wSt'^KtanUel 
//,//  V,./  /1.  ^?V  ,  ,-'-.",'^''T  '^  l>'"''»'>ly  was  conceived  as  having  the  force  of  'ouod  at- 
tinet  ad  hoc  quod  dixi  \  where  ^ qufnl  attinet  ad'  is  only  conceived  in  the  mind  'W 
mSh-h'-'of  V^:;;:^' 7J>'-^«^-"ted  by  ^quod  \  If  used  with  this cnidnLlmein.^^,  U  i^t'mere 
particle  of  transition  and  seems  a  mere  expletive  to  those  accu«*tomed  to  r  .p  Pn"iLh 

pipiisisilsflifi 

iiiilMiiPii^ii 

other's  companv    Cic   Fam   5  r,^      }^  Iw  j  it  t       '• '"''*^  ^'''''"  '^^'  ^'^'«  ^™«  "'  «^ach 
^■evertheles},Ule^a]if^^^^^^^ 

m^msmmmm 

,  liliiiPP=iS? 

j        ctui  o^tnce^  .  Cass.  13.  O.  1,  14.-Sometimes  quod  m  quodd  expresses  a  copulative  coii- 


f^Q-7 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  RELATB'E  CLAUSE. 


523 


nection  of  tho  protasis  with  the  i)r('vi()U'*  ]>o^i<)(l^*.  rondt-rcfl  by  ''and  if\  '  and  nrjain  if 

{  =  pra'ferea  si)  :  ()no<IA  esjiciu  til  iK-rtidiil  qiiil  sunt  «-i  qui tanjeu  ejT  situltiiiil  ctrio 

lion  fuisseui  ut  etc.  ;  And  >f  I  red/It/ wcvi;  as  tmulKious  as  tliose  who  etc.,  I  ccit.'iinly 
woiihl  not  have  been  lb<>Ii>li  «iiouirl»  to  etc.  Cic  Fain.  ."^  10.  W.—Qurxlsi  id  est  luaxiuic 
aMilti  omnia  ad  suain  ulilitiitfui  relerro,  (juid  inilii  taiidi-iu  crat  ntdiusquam  lioniiuis 
uobilissiini  conjmiciio?  And  ar/ai// (aside  Iroin  th.' rea^-ons  yivcn  beloro.  ?/ to  iiavc 
always  one's  {)rivate  interest  in  view  is  tiio  chief  evidence  of  a  sclienier,  what  could  liavo 
l)een"morein  my  interest  tluin  tlie  connection  with  one  ot  the  nio-t  prominent  men? 
(  ie.  Fam.  ."J,  10,  '.».— Verv  fiecinenily  qiiodsi  serves  to  increase  tiie  force  of  a  simph'  si, 
coirespoiidi'n*''  to  '  nay  if  ',  'indeed  if"  implyinir  a  (jradation  with  respect  to  formt-r  sinii- 
lar  statements  :  QuodM  lloma'  I'ompejiis  pnviltus  esset.  tamen  ad  taiitum  belhim  is  erat 
dili"en(Uis  •  Aa?/  if  I'oinpey  were  in  a  private  capacity  at  Uom'j.  it  would  still  Ite  neces- 
sary to  s.-lect  liini  for  that  war.  Cic.  Le;^.  M.  17,  50.— If  quod  in  connection  with  xi  has 
the' meaning,'  of  an  ordinary  co-ordinatint;  relative  (  =  hoc*,  U  is  ^'enerally  separati-d  l)y 
one  or  more  words  from  .si.'as  :  i^uod  tu  fit  taiiti  laries  quantieso  semper  judicivi  facien- 
dum esse  ;  Jf  you  value  tins  as  iii<,'h  as  etc.  Cic.  Fam.  3, 10,  1, 

Obs.  .5.  Sometimes  n)Ut  rarely)  quod  is  similarly  used  in  connection  with  otiier  snhor- 
dinaliii"-  conjunctions,  as  witli  nisi.  ubi.  qman.  ut  y\n  Plin.  II.  N.  IS.  2:}».  ne  (in  C.>1.  fi, 
11),  an(f  sometimes  before  the  relative  qui  and  the  optative  particle  ntinain.  In  all  these 
connections  it  is  either  omitted  in  renderinir.  or  translated  in  a  way  similar  to  the  ver- 
sions mentioned  Obs.  4,  as:  Quod  nln  ille  intellexit  id  iv/\  atqiie  id  i)aijlri  ut  etc. :  When 
he  (frotn  tliesefa'i.")  understood  that  it  was  the  jdanto  etc.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1.  2(').—  Q//otf  iilii 
Cra>sus  animadvertil.  Piias  copias  non  facile  didtlci  —  noncunctandum  existimavil  quia 
pu<'-na  decertaret ;  When  Crassus  tUuti  perceived  that  it  was  not  easy  to  divide  his  troops 
"  he  did  not  hesitate  to  make  an  attacli  on  the  enemy.  Ca's.  B.  C.  3,  ii*.  See  Nej». 
iiam.  1 :  Cic.  Ciel.  32,  7'.);  H).  Ur.  2,  4'J :  Liv.  G,  8;  Caji».  B.  C.  3,  08  ;  Cic.  Phil.  10,  4,  9. 

1  Ma"na  est  vis  con^cientite  :  qtiam  qui  neirlij^unt,  quum'  mo  viohTre^  volent,  se 
ipsi  iii(lTc:"lbunt3.  Cic.  Cat.  3,  12,27.-2.  Centuiioiies  nutu  voci1)u-^que'«  host!--  si  intro- 
Ire  vellent  vctcilre  coepC'runf ;  quoram  i)roi:redi  au-^us  est  nemo,  i  :es.  B.  (i.  5.43.— 
3.  Quoruni  in'iqui'''  utrinunes^  qmnii  ad  me  per  homines  hon<'>tissimo-*  p»'rf»'rrentiir*. 
habui  non  tempornm  solum  lalionem"  mi-orum,  sed  etiam  natriiie».  Cic.  Fanu  1, '.».  20. 
—4  Quod  qitonidni  tihi  exposui,  facilia  sunt  ea  qujua  me  de  Crasso  requlris,  li).  1,«>.  lit. 
—5  Qi(od  tif/i  iit^^  planiu-'»  expunam.  altins'2  paullo  rati"nem  con«iIionim  meOruni»' 
rep<'tam  necesse  est.  lb.  1,  0.  1.— (J.  Qme.  quidtni  co/iortatio^*  m^.^^  tibi  inilni.-"^  ar.t  sine 
cau-Jl  suscepta"  vidiatur,  ilia  me  ratio  movit''*  nt  consider;Tres  in  omni  reliqujl  vita 
quibusi"  crederes.  quos  cavCres*».  lb.  1,  7,  9.-7.  Qnotf  qnainqiKtm  minime  miror,  doleo 
tamen  te  non  tuis  l)onis2i  delectflri  polins  <^uam  aliCnis  malis  labonlre^'-'.  lb.  4.  3.  1.— 
8.  Qui  xi  est  talis  qualem  tibi  vidG  i  sciil)is.  e^o  quoipie  ali([uid  sum.  lb.  6,  IH.  4.— 
«.)!  Quod  CKJiismodl^W.  .«atis  int.'lliu'ere  non  possum.  H>.  5.  2.  1.— 10.  Occupato  in  aliis 


mihipoluiissima"».  tamen  in  repnbliea  non  alius es.-em  atque^»  nunc  i?um.  lb.  1,9.21 


♦  Some  grammarians  (KUhner.  §  14.').  note  21)  assert  that  wlienever  quod  introduces  a 
clause  whose  predicate  •:oyer!is  an  innnitive  clause,  as  for  Inst,  in  the  al>ove-quofed  pas- 
pa'es.  qumi  is  an  ordinary  relative  witli  ihe  forci-  of  what  ?r«'  call  syndetic  antecedent  of 
th«~  inflnitivt!  clause.  This  learned  irrammarian  would  probal)ly  have  hesitated  to  niaico 
this  assertion  if  he  had  considered  that  sijndelic  antiad^nfs  never  c;in  take  a  relative 
form.  Moreover,  syndetic  antecedent-»  are  always  'emphatic',  and  he  himself  states 
that  quod  ctin  never" be  u^•ed  as  a  coordinating;  relative,  if  the  determinative  is  emphatic. 

1  While,  in  as  much  as.— ^  to  hurt.— ^  to  betray.—*  by  cestures  and  words.— *  mis- 
ciiievous.- «  remarks.—'  to  communicate.— "^  rotionem  ahciljus  ret  halttre.  to  take  some- 
thimr  into  account.—»  their  characters.  — '"  in  order  to.— >'  more  plainly.— '^  ;)a'///0(7//'i '/>' 
repeTere  aliquid,  to  tjo  ratlier  far  l)ack  in  statint;  soinethin-JT.  — '=•  the  scope  of  my  disix»- 
biuons.— '<  exhortation.— •*  lest.—'*  to  consist  of  empty  words.— i'  or  to  be  mad'' 
without  suffici«'nt  cause.— »^  an  ellipsis  —  dicani  til/i,  vie.  hue  ratiuue  motuui  «-.s-ve  ut ;  l«t 
me  t<il  you  that  I  hid  tho  motive  to  make  you  consider  etc.—'»  tlie  per-ons  whom 
(interro'iative  clause».—^"  tojruard  airainst.— ^i  enjoy  your  own  happiness.— '-a  to  be  con- 
cerned by  tlie  misfortunes  of.— ^^  th'-  more  jjlainly.— -<./V/?«~n-  luudi  alicujun,  to  show 
interest  in  somei)ody's  success.— 2i>  ditlerently.— -•^  m/ipuNiann  ten?re,  to  bi-  at  the  head 
of  the  frov»'rnment  ;' to  have  possession  of  the  government.— ^'  to  disapprove  «f.—^^*  as  I 
havepiit  it  just  before.— 2»  even  if  every thin^j  were  wholly  accordinj^  to  my  wish.— ^o  non 
alius  atqiie,  not  difl'ereut  from. 


—1.5.  Berenice,  quum  ad  so  interficiend.am  missos  didicif=set».  Daphne  se  clandit  T'/i 
quumobsider,  eatn  nuntultum  .Asia^  civitatihus  esset,  auxilia  ei  o  "L  ^,us1:"e^^ 
2.  I.-H,.  Memorilhat  L.  Papirms  remjaiblicam  Vejentii)U8  indutiis  et  on,  rt'-it,An« 
.Kqnorum  stare^.  r../.3  si  quid  increpilret*  terrOrii,  s^.ne  p  t  c  ,  maS  u  p la! 
ee  e-'  rempu  . beam  oppnm.y  Uv,  4.  43-17.  Tumulus  circ  inisessus  uft ra  n  edhm 
;;;;il;  y;.gcJut!^r'i;i;T3i;;"""'"'"  ^^^^^  castra^Uesertu  es.e,  et  ipst»,  quacJiiir/il^S 

III.   CONSTUUCTIOX    AND  SIGNIFICATION  OF   TIIE    RELA- 

TIVE   CLAUSE. 

^  613.  The  Latiti  relative  clause  lias  the  same  logical   force  as  the 
English  relative  clau.se,  and,  in  regard  to  the  irrammatical  form  of  its 
constmient  phrases,  follows  the,  general  rules  on    cotistruction,  tenses 
and  moods,  with  the  following  peculiarities :   1)  The  phrase  to  which 
the  relative  belongs  must  regularly  be  placed  first  in  its  clause    the 
relative  i)receding  the  other  member  of  its  own  phrase  (for  exceptions 
see  Ons.  2).  -2)  The  relative  sometimes  agrees,  by  attraction,  in  gender 
and  number,  with  amember  of  its  own  clause,  instead  of  agreeino- with  the 
antecedent  (/?.  10,  Ons.  2).-3)  The  predicate,  or  the  governing  verb  of  the 
relative  is  f.equently  ELLiPTiCALLYomitted,  and  must  be  supplied  from  the 
pn.R-tpal  sentence(/?.  11)._4)  Therelative  often  takes  members  of  thePRiN 
ciPAL  SKNTKXCE  into  its  owu  IVamework,  and  gives  to  its  own  members  a 
form  different  from  that  of  the  English  relative  clause  (if.  12  ;  i?  11    Obs  5) 
-5)  Relatives  (contrary  to  the  English  construction)  are  frequently  made 
membersof  clauses  (either  non-finite,or  already  introduced  by  conjunc- 
tions), so  that  the  clause  is  either  made  grammatically  dependent  071  twodif- 
ferent  sentences,  or  bears  a  twofold  grammatical  relation  to  the  same  sen- 
tence (Involution.  R.  13. 14).-C)  In  relative  adjectives  or  adverbs  the  con- 
nectivc  element  has  often  the  meaning  of  an  adverbial  conjunction  of 
MODALITY,  while  the  determinative  element  has  the  force  of  an  adjective 
of  the  definite  form,  or  of  a  personal  pronoun  (^  014).-?)  The  mood  of  the 
predicate  in  relative  clauses  is  often  a  subjunctive  peculiar  to  relative  clauses 
alone  and  not  falling  under  the  general  rules  on  dependent  subjunctives 
(>^  014). 

P,?ir"K;  '^'^f-  ''^'l='^j^'<r  a'b'octivo  or  adverb  rojrtilarlv  opens  its  own  clause     Hence  n  fh^ 

uv  i;"(A;,,r'  n'  it  noi-  \  .r  *  '  the  relatne  is  used  as  a  coordinating  periodical ci.n- 
ie  el  mif.  w  "u  )  r  i.i  "^'  [»P''"  »»''' P*'";'»^  and  precede  even  ihe  conjunctions  of 
hVoi?,VJ,  t  '    1>e Onu's  while  the  En-lish  corresponding?  demonstrative  i<  always 

fi  M    l/^  'r '''''■"'''^T''''^*''y"''''c''  ''^e  clause  is  introduced:   Cuj,l  iH  avoE  cm^^»e 
tj.lo  Ml  docCre  non  debeo  ;  J  need  not  .how  n-hat  is  tl.e  custom  in  ms  ;^a/7^r  - $1)^  rf 

iSn;'SiSh;;?i;;^  :^^  ;s-  {;^^xt  sei^a^^r^^^  -  -  X;^^f^z 


524 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


COXSTEUCTION   OF  THE   RELATIVE   CLAUSE. 


collicef,  omnia  pnpiontor  fero? ;  If  yon  colloct  fMi>,  yon  will  etc.  Cic.  Fain.  4,  13,  7.— 
{Inl  nisi  (IfcC'dit  ;  /f  h<-  would  hol  leave.  CiE;*.  B.  (i.  1.  AA.—  C^nos  (jimm  Aiiovi^tut*  eoii- 
ppexisiset ;  When  Ariovi>tns  had  perceived  tfum.  lb.  B.  G.  1,  47.— Tims  if  a  demonstra- 
tive member  of  a  rilative  clause  is  employed  in  a  relative  form  for  periodical  connt-cti  n, 
tiro  relatives  will  be  pi  iced  in  inimediaie  snceessjon.  In  this  instance  ihe  rmrdinndnfj 
relative  nui!<t  precede  the  »*nbordinatinj,'  one.  See  Ctvs.  B.  G.  G.  15  (quoted  Ji.  9,  Ubs.  2). 
Obs.  2.  Sometimes,  however  (thongh  rarely),  relatives  are  i)laced  afttr  one  or  two 
words  of  their  own  clause.  This  is  ilic  case  :  1)  very  rar-ly  lor  rhetorical  reasons,  lo 
fjive  to  certain  members  of  the  relative  clause  a  ;j;reater  emphasis,  in  which  ins4ai.ce  the 
«;mphatic  words,  in  a  few  passa;4es.  are  placed  belbre  the  relative,  as  :  nomani  qine  as- 
}»oriatu  sunt,  ad  aed<;m  Honoris  vidCmus  ;  What  has  been  carried  off  to  Rome,  we  see 
in  the  tem|)le  of  Honor.  Cie.  Verr.  2,  4,  54.— (^iiis  autem.  iiunni  cofisuldfui/t  p/ater  Clo- 
dii/m  qui  vitnperilret,  inventus  est  ?  But  who  was  there  that  censured  t/nj  conxalship  ex- 
ctjd  Clodins?  Cic.  Phil.  2,  5.— Utei  fiierunt  inodo  qnox  noniii  ilvl ;  As  those  were  ichoin 
I  haveju-t  menti«med.  Cic.  Am.  5,  li».  Thus  the  passaijeCic.  Rose.  Am.  8,  2*2,  quoted  j).  4?.) 
(in  niaL.'iiri  familiaqiii  habeat)*.— 2)  If  a  relative  has  the  f.irceof  a  modal  conjunct  ion,  nejni- 
tive  words  iiviif  precede  the  relative,  the  same  as  those  modal  conjunctions  whose  j)lace 
thev  take,  a.s:  I'mim  (iter»  ani^'uslum  et  difficile  (erat»,  rix  qini^wvznW  carri  ducerentur; 
So  that  on  it  {on  which)  hardly  one  veliicle  could  pass  at  a  time.  C;e<.  B.  (J.  1,  (i.  (Coin- 
l)are  :  Vix  nt  his  rebus  tempiis  daretur.  B.  G.  :i,  4).— :j)  In  anieclassical  and  poetical 
style,  the  antecedent,  incorporated  in  th»;  clause  as  the  L-ovcr-  in;;  noun  of  the  relative,  is 
sumetimes  placed  fj^fore  if.  as:  l'rt>e7)\  qnain  (instead  of  qtiam  m-liein)  statuo.  vestraest. 
Vir;;.  .En.  1,  573  (see  p.  50(5).— The  oidy  part  of  speech  which  fjeni'TaUn  precedes  the  rela- 
tives are  those  PUEi'osiTioN-  by  whicli  the  relative  itself  is  L'oveiiied.  But  <'ven  these 
arc  Inquently  placed  alter  the  relative,  as  -  quorum  per  fiiii^  ierant',  instead  of  '  per  quo- 
7'vm  Jinlif  ierant'.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  1,  28. 

lltm.  10.  The  relative,  in  its  capacity  as  member  of  the  difTerent  ele- 
meiilaiy  plirases  consiiliitiiii;  the  sentence,  may  be  used  in  all  relations 
ill  whieli  absolute,  disjmicf,  or  attributive  adjectives  occur.  Hence  it 
mav  t.d-Le  the  place  1)  of  the  subji:ct  (whether  nominative,  or  subject  iic 
ctisative,  or  sul)ject-ablative) ;  2)  of  a  pukdic.xtk-no.mixativk  ;  3)  of  a 
COMPLETING  OBJiiCT  lu  any  cuse,  like  a  noun  ;  4)  of  an  advkuhtalobjkct 
(whether  prepositional  object,  or  case-object,  or  in  the  form  of  an  adveri)); 

f))   of    an    ATTIIIBUTIVE   Of   I^AUTtTIVE   GENITIVE;    G)   of  ail   ATTKIBUTIVE 
ADJECTIVE. 

In  all  these  instances  the  case  of  the  relative  is  determined  by  the 
ifcneral  rules  on  the  cases  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  The  gender  and 
iiumber  of  the  relative  adjective  is  determined  1)  if  it  is  absolute  or  dis- 
junct, bv  its  relation  toils  «i-rammatical  aniecedent,  accordinir  to  the  dif- 
ferent rules  under  ji  «1*.^  2)  if  it  is  used  attrihutively  with  a  iroverning 
noun  expressed,  bv'tlie  gender  and  numl)cr  of  this  noun  {II.  5.  Obs.  2.  '6). 
But  if  a  disjunct  relative  is  the  subject  of  a  prediaitehoun,  it  frenerally 
agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  latter ;  and,  in  the  same  Avay,  if  it 
lias  thefimclion  as  a  transitive  object  of  a  factitive  verb  (p.  101),  it  gene- 
rally agrees  in  gender  and  number  Avith  \{.s  predicate-accusative  (Obs.  2). 

Obs.  1.  If  the  relative  (as  disjunct)  takes  the  place  of  a  seRiECT-NOMiNATivE,  the  pred- 
icate-verb arfrees  in  person  irifh  the  (jrainmatical  antecedent  of  the  relative.  Ileiiee,  ii 
the  irrammatical  antecedent  is  a  pkksonai.  puonoun,  expressed  or  understood,  the  pre- 
dicate isin  (he  same  jter.^on  as  the  pronoun  (see  the  Ex.  quoted  Ii.  7.  Obs.  1-4.  and  Ex.  i-i 
belov»).  Thisiseven  then  the  case  i)  if  the  relative  is  not  directly  dependent  on  a  per^t>u.^l 
pr..tionn,  but  on  the  absolute  syndetic  antecedent  i>-  (ori//f),  denotinii:  persons  in  L'ciie- 
ral.  reft-rrini:  as  predicate-nominalive  to  a  personal  i)ronoun  as  subject  (/?.  7.  Obs.  4i, 
as:  Tu  es  eiiim  is  qui  me  fententiis  tiiis  siepissime  ornuxti  ;  For  Yue  are  the  man  who 
hare  mo-t  frequently  promoted  my  interests  by  your  votes.  Cic.  Fam.  15,  4.  1 1.— 2i  II  tiio 
relative  clau>e  is  dependent  ot;  a  piedicatt-noun  that  denotes  the  ireiieral  class  ol  pet- 
sons  to  which  tlie  i)ei>on  beioiiu's  which  as  su/jjecf  m  desiijnated  by  a  personal  proiioim. 
In  this  instance  we  must  Irequently  place  the  English  predicate  in  the  third  person,  while, 

iToiTorthe 


♦  This  passage  shows  that  Madvi;;  is  mistaken  if  he  asserts  that  this  pos 
relative,  in  prose,  is  coniluca  to  the  instance  that  the  principal  &cui<incc jolhws  ine  rela- 
tive. 


525 


in  Lattii,  the  predicate  must  even  here  agree  in  person  with  the  pronoun  expressed  or 
niideiMood,  as  :  >on  siimns  ei  nos  augu?-eit  qui  avium  observatiOuefutflra  dicamvs  •   ui 
:in' iwltUo^e  a ur,n rs  trho predtrt  tlmfnUire  by  th<i  observation  of  birds    Cic   Div   2  .^i 
'iV'Sy   ' '  ^'  '  ''^''VlV'  V'^"-'*'  ''  expressed  in  English  in  the  form  of  an  innnifire 

after    to  .  t..c  person  ol  the  Latin  predicate  cannot  be  directly  determined  by  the  forni 
ol  the  tn-lish  predicate.    This  is  the  case  if  relative  adjectives  have  the  folce  of  final 
conjunctions iihvr  dionus,  idoneus  etc.  (s.-e  below),  as  :  Non  es  dignm  quihalje.as  g. is  tarn 
bene  factii  sunt ;  loa  are  not  worthy  of  having  what  is  so  well  made.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  20. 
Obs.  2.  If  a  disjunct  relative  adjective  is  in  the  relation  of  subject  to  a  pnEDiCATB 
Nrn-N  connected  bv  the  copula  esse  or  l)y  its  grammatical  equivalents  (  Hen    vidhi  did 
ap/)e//an  etc.,  §4♦i2^  the  gender  atid  number  of  the  relative,  according  to  the  treneral 
riile  of  ^.ju,.  mr.stly  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  predicate-noun,  and  not  that 
of  the  antecedent,  as  :  ^Etnensis  ager,  er,  quod  caput  est  rei  frumentaiije,  ager  Leontl- 
nils  ;  1  he  di';fnct  of  .1i:tiia,  and  that  of  the  Leontini,  which  is  the  leader  in  corn-raisincr 
Cic.  \  err.  2,  .1  2.1-E.\.stat  ejus  peroratio  qui  epilogus  dicitur  ;  One  of  his  closing  speeches 
is  extant,  which  is  called  ' epilogue\  Cic.  Brut.  ;«,  \'21.-Carcer  ilje,  qvi  est  a  crufielis- 
simo  tyraimo  Dioiivmo  factus.  ry/zo;  Lautumice  vocantur  ;  Th&t  jnison.  which  was  built  bv 
that  most  cruel  ryrant  Dion\sius,  and  which  is  called  Laatiimice.  Cic.  Yerr  2  5  55 —ES 
qua;  bccflta  est  hi^me,  qui  fail  annus  Cn.  Pompejo,  M.  Crasso  consulibus -'in  the  fol- 

inYV'i^.'V-"''' n''^^^'^';''^^'';',^''''!.*'''"'**'.  '"^  ^^'"^  >'^"'"  «f  ^'"-  Pompey's  »nd  M.  Crassus's  con- 
.  ulsiiip.  (.  a-s  B.  (,.  4,  l.-CtirsOrem  ejus  generis  qui  vfiepoSpofjioi  vocantur  :  a  courier  ot  that 
di.^cripfion  which  ;.;:m//^v/  'nay-runners'.  Nep.  Milt.  4,  3.-But  sometimes  (far  more  r.i  rely 
aiid  hanlly  ever  with  the  c<.pula  e^se)  the  relative  agrees  with  the  irrammatical  antece- 

^  .  )  ir  f-V^'  -^f>.--Ve//«  \  eneris  qu<f>  LncKer  diciiur.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  20.-6>7iw  hominum 

guod  I/.lotes  rocatur.  Nep   Pans.  ;j.-In  the  same  manner  the  relative  generally  a'^rieg 

li^enderand  nun>l,er  with  the  predicate-accusative,  if  it  is  the  h.gicaT  subject  of  the 

tier,  beinu'j.  traiisittye  object  of  factitive  verbs,  as  :  AnimaJ  plenum  ratiOnis' et  coi isi^ 

«f'^T/To??' -""'''/>''''••■•;•  ''^^  '•'""'''''  -'^^^^  '^"^  '■^'*"^""  '"»'  rt-Ucction,  which  wecall 
wan.  Cic.  I^'g  1,  <.--/>ryw?c//?rt  conjunct  a  qvasyrlA.'^  i\\i:\umi^.  mcei  ibus  sepsenmt  •  Thev 
surr..t.nried  with  walls  thos,>  mnted  homesteads  which  we  call  cities.  Cic!  Sest  40  See  Ex 
4-9  -In  the  same  manner  the  relative  agrees  in  the  neuter  gender  with  an  absolute  nred- 
cate^adject.ve.  det.ot.ng  the  «etieral  idea  of  a  thing,  althotiSh  the  antecedent  ^^.Tpir.m 
as.  Nun  dicain«,/,^.-v,,,  ,unm,  quod  apud  homines  carisdmvm  est,  non  hospifein  ouod 
mnctis..imam  ;  I  will  not  say  thy  friend,  which  with  men  is  the  dearek  {i.  /  xiiixo  d2sig. 
KATioN),  not  thy  guest-friend,  which  is  the  most  sacred.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2,  45. 

Obs.  3.  liejatiye  adjectives  (absohite  or  disjunct)  cannot  generally  tie  used  as  predi- 
cate-nominatives (see  §210).     liut  they  may  be   so  used  whenever" thev  incline ^Jone 
Id.  a  besides  that  Ota  mere  abstract  reference.     Wherever  this  construction  occurs  the 
relative  as  predicate  adjective   agrees  in  gender  and  rtvmhr  with   its  svbiect    and  not 
wtih  Its  ant,c. dent  ^iUn-  j.-a,,.,  „  diflerent  from  the  subject,  as  in  the  pas sa.Ve"  under 
>o.  2  (below),  and  in  the  secnd  and  third  examples  under  No.  4.    Pel  .five^are  Unis 
used  predicatuely:    1)   If  the  relative   expresses  identity  of  a  person  or  thi i-  w ith 
the  subject  of  the  clause,  as:  Prius  non  is  eras  ^,.i  erasf  nunc  !s  factu^c^J   turn  n  m 
eras;  ^(unierly  you  were  not  the  one  who  yon  were;  now  voii  have  become  one  who 
you    then,  not  were.  Platil.  Trin.  4.  2.  i:i8.-2)  In  the  logical  relatives  of  X  foin    4^1? 
esfluahumanitas\  mentioned  p.  519.  Obs.  7,  D.   In  this  construction  the  relative  must  be 
considered  as  a  predicate-adjective,  the  clause  being  equivalent  to  'Your  humanity  is 
suih  that  lam  entiHed  to  make  the  stattvient  in  the  leadinq  sentence  '.—3)  In  the  indefi- 
MTE  relaiives  (see  Rem.  4.  Obs.  7  foil.),  in  which  the  relative  expresses  the  idea 'o/"S 
;.:.;        '"  '  ^^  •  '-''■"^^^'■'••"  jne.  quimnque  sim,  ex  Acadeinije  t^paiiis  exstitisse;  That  I  be- 
came an  orator  whatever  kindofone  I  may  tie  (such  as  I  am),  In  the  halls  of  the  Academy 
.;,,  ■/       i/       •   •'  .      Ni^>iRRAL,  QUANTITATIVE,  and  QUALITATIVE  relatives,  as  :  Totidem 
gjtotcuiAtamnginiserant,i:oVn\\\'^  missis;  Having  sent  as  many  colonies  «^  there  were 
ml^flin;;  r  t^^-  S- •«  (-niy  niomer-cities  were  ^so  many^  =  ([not).     If  ^^.oAvere  ,,0^ 
11    eclinable.  It  would  t -ke  the  gender  of  capita,  althou-h  'co/o/*ii«'  is  the  irrammatiad 
5.    -'.V    -^''^  "f   ^''«  relative  (comparative)  daiise.-Tantam  eOruin  multitudinem  nostri 
inuileeeruni.  quantum  J  uit  di'ei  simtium  ;  Our  troops  killed  such  a  number  of  them   a» 
u,eie_  ivas>.pact  qt  the  day  (i.  e.  as  the  time  of  day  admitted».  C-ps.  B.  G.  2.  11.— Amicum 
nanere  talem  volunt    quahs  ipn  e^se  iwn  possunt ;  They  wish  to  have  such  a  friend  as 
they  cannot  be  themselves.  Cic.  Am. -i'2.  >  ■>  *i  nu  u<. 

_Obs^  Kelative  clauses  in  which  the  relative  (disjunct)  adjective  is  in  the  relation  of 

*  T^J^  tlifference  made  by  Madvi^r  and  other  grammarians,  that  the  former  method  is 
"S'et  11  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  contains  an  idea  whicli  is  in  itself  complete  while 
llie  latter  method  is  used,  if  the  idea  of  the  antecedent  is  determined  by  the  relative 
Clause,  IS  without  any  foundation.     This  is  sufficiently  shown  by  the  examples  quoted 


526 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


CONSTRUCTION   OF  THE   REL.\TIVE   CLAUSE. 


527 


an  onjKCT  arc  oxccodingly  froqnont.  and  examples  occur  in  any  part  of  tliis  grammar 
(from  the  fduitli  book).  In  all  clauses  of  this  kind  the  relative  takes  its  caM!  according' 
to  the  j;eiieral  rules.  Only  if  ilie  relative  is  in  the  niatior.  ol  an  adveibial  object  (oi  piact'^ 
time,  and  modality »  st)me  peculiarities  occur.  In  this  instance  (lie  leadimiadverliial  idia 
i»  alvvay-  expressed  by  the  «.rammatical  antecedent  of  the  relative  {locus,  ftnipus,  or  oilier 
tlesi«;nati()ns  of  time-point»,  or  time-spaces;  t/iodux,  cau-^a,  or  yr.<),  wiiich  antecedent,  in 
certain  in-iances.  may  be  omitted.  'I  hese  antecedents  frequently  are  l\i^  adre/biat  {>\)- 
jectsof  the  principal  sentence,  takin<^  those  forms  which  are  requiied  by  the  rules  (>ii 
adveri)ial  objects  (p.  31.*)  loll.).  If  tlie  relative  clause  is  used  lo  dtneiil^e  these  adverbi.il 
relations,  the  relative  adjective  reijulariy  takes  the  same  grammatical  lorm  as  ii»  aiitci'  - 
dent,  liavini,'  tlie  same  ;,'tamniatical  reluliuu  to  ita  own  clause,  as  the  antecedent  has  to 
the  principal  .-entence  : 

A.  For  Loc.\L  clauses,  which  can  take  no  other  form  l)Ut  that  of  a  relative  clause,  S(o 
N(».  IV. 

/>.  In  TKMPORAL  clauses  the  noun  ffmpua  or  one  of  its  grammatical  equivalents  (di»  ^ 
atmns  etc.)  is  made  the  ((uttctdt  iit  it(  the  clause. 

{a\  I  lie  lime  at  wliich  an  acti»)n  is  said  to  happen  requires  the  form  tewj^ore  quo  {iiie 
quo.  hold  qiid,  dihus  quihus  etc.  :  see  j).  'iiO).  as  :  Ko  i/to  /etnjxjfe  quo  lieret  indiniim 
conjurationis ;  Al  (he  reiij  time  tlidt  (wheu)  Uw  infoiinaiion  wiis  jriveii  about  the  con- 
spiracy, tic.  l)iv.  2,2'). — Itaque  quiiKiue  \mim»  ditOug.  'jui/juii  liabC'ri  seiiatus  poiuit.  do 
iinperio  ("iH<aris  decernilur;  Thus  action  was  taken  on  Ca'sar's  jnoconsiilar  pouer  in 
the  tir.-t  live  daij^  l/iut  {wlitin  the  Senate  could  meet.  (';es.  B.  C.  1,  ."). — Thus  with  a  re- 
peated aniecedeiit,  in  the  inverted  form  :  (^uofuniiore  ilium  a  (iinestione  al»dilci  nonlicG- 
baf,  (O  te)niK»e  ad  quu'stionem  ii)se  abreptiis  est;  .fud  at  thaf  time  ivlcn  ii  w;i>  not 
allowed  to  n-iiiove  him  from  presiding  over  the  trial,  he  was  hurried  away  to  his  own 
trial.  C'ic.  Clii.  ;i'5.  S!».  Or  the  antecedent,  according  to  |>.  .V).*).  Ons.  2.  may  be  made  tiic 
governinir  word  of  the  relative  :  Quo  tempore  cam  primuin  liiieram  e-se  aiidlvit.  sim- jii- 
(licio  reddidit  Cejo  :  At  (he  time  u/nn  he  lir>t  heard  thai  she  wasa  lr«'e  person,  he  reli  riicd 
Ii-  r  to  ("«'jus  without  waiting' for  a  trial.  Cic.  (In.  5I>.  1»)2.  Sometimes  the  antecedent  may  m  t 
be  in  an  adverbial  case,  while  the  relative  is  in  the  ablative  of  time  :  DixCMiinl  cum  -'a- 
tuil  se  eju-  habuis-(!  tem/y)ri>!  rationem  quo  posita  >it ;  cum  hoinine  eju,<(  ^wvgeieret  la-lhim; 
They  said  that  with  rer-pect  to  tlu;  statik  (of  Mithridates)  they  had  regarded  the  dui' 
when  it  was  erected,  with  respect  to  the  pkuson  they  had  regarded  the  time  when  he  \\;i- 
in  war  with  tin m.  Cic.  \  eir.  2,  2,  Go. 

(fj)  If  the  relative  denotes  a  time  aftt^r  another  time-iioint  (p.  2.321,  either  both  the  ;ni- 
tecedent  and  the  relative  are  in  the  ahlativk.  or  (if  the  antecedent  has  an  ordinal  nii 
meral  as  attrinute)  the  relative  takes  ilie  form  *^.r  <7'/o  with  its  aiit'ecedent  in  the  aiu.a- 
TiVE.  In  neither  case  a  relative  clause  can  be  iiseil  in  Knglish  ;  as  :  Dttdus  iivcvu:  i/'i- 
&'/,>.•  materia  ccepia  erat.  comjiortaii  oj)ere  conlecto  ;  The  work  having  been  linished  /"' 
days  after  the  caning  of  the  material  had  commenced.  Cses.  Ii.  U.  4.  IT.— Mors  >>(\. 
Korcii  quatfiduo  quo  is  occTsus  est.  C'hrysogono  nuntialur;  The  (hath  of  Sex.  \U» 
cius  was  antiounci'd  to  Clirysogonusyo^//'(A///.s  a/t>r  he  was  nmrdered.  Cic.  Ho.^c.  >Mii. 
3().  10').  — Duodeqiiadrageslmo  an/io  ex  quo  regnaVt!  c»ep<'rat  Tarquinius  ;  In  the  tiiiit>- 
eighth  y^ar  r.'/"  Tarciuinius's  reiun  (alter  T.  had  commenced  to  reiiru).  Li  v.  1. -10.  ."^k 
Ex.  11.  12.— If  the  antecedent  (according  to  the  rules  p.  2.'j2)  takes  a  prepositional  f'  nu 
witli  post,  the  clause  must  take  a  comparative  form  wiili  quain. 

(c)  If  the  relative  denotes  a  Jime  in  answer  to  the  question  ' how  hn</\  both  theatiti 
cedent  and  the  relative  are  placed  in  the  acci'sativk  ip.  2:}4)  :  Omnis  illos  quo<  (Cli<  r.-n 
nSsi)  habitaial  an/ios ;  All  the  yairs  duriiKj  which  he  had  lived  in  the  C'hersone^us.  N'  p. 
Mill.  8.  — Sca'vola  fuit  meciim  triduum  illiid  quod  ego  Ephesi  commoraiiis  sum  ;  Scicvnlii 
\\as  with  me  during  those  three  i/ai/s  nhirh  I  sp»"nt  (iiieraliy  :  during  which  I  staiti»  .it 
Ephe>u>.  Cic.  Kam.  .3,  ").  5  — If  the  time  (luring  w  hicli  an  action  has  or  had  been  in  prti;:- 
ress  is  staled  prtdieatirely  (/.  e.  in  regard  to  tt,<tlj\  and  not  lo  serve  for  determiniJi;;  il' 
time  of  another  action),  the  clause  by  which  the  l.-isting  of  tlie  action  is  stated,  is  not  i  x 
pressed  hy  a,  relative,  but  Uy  n  t^m//oral  clause  with  quutn  (sometimes  by  an  L't-cl.iii>'  . 
in  the  difl'erent  tortus  mentioned  p.  4ST,  Otis.  9,  li.     Clauses  ot  this  kind  are  either  pn d- 
icate-clauses  (as  in  the  I'lauiine  passaijes  meniioiien  p.  4S7),  or  attribute-clausis.  a- : 
Anni  sunt  octo  quinn  ista  causa  in  medilaiioiie  itrsatur  [i.  e.  anni.  quum  (insieaii  of 
quos^  or  per  quos.  which  forms  would  iK>t  i>e  admi^sible)  ista  causa  versatur,  sunt  o(  to] ; 
It  u  eight  years  that  this  case  has  been  tinder  deliberation.  Cic.  Clti.  30.  bi.  II  the  uh<<\<- 
mt'iitioned  passage  with  '  triduum'  were  predicatively  expressed,  the  daii-e  woiil»!  t 'l"*' 
the  form  with  quum  in  the  lorm  of  a.  suf/jecf-clanse.  aim  not  the  relative  form  with  <yw/ 
(triduum  est  quum  Ephesi  commoior  ;  «)r  '  triduum  trat  qumn  rominordbar'). 

{.d}  Clauses  denoting  an  action  lasting  'erer  t-incc'  another  action  occurrf^,  almost  :ii- 
w  -ys  take  a  relative  form  in  hatin.  l)eing  introiluced  by  tu-  quotrmpore  (  —  ex  eo  tinqt^ue 
quo),  or  by  ^x  quo,  where  te/n//ore  is  understood,  as  :  Fundus  quem  q'ladrienuiuui,  In't: 
est,  ex  QUO  tempore  fundus  veniit,  possCdit  Cx'seunia ;  An  utiatc  which  had  been  iu  pus- 


pcpsion  of  Ca'sonnia  four  years,  that  is  erer  sin^e  the  estate  had  been  sold.  Cic.  Ctec  7  19 
— Si.  <.r  quo  trajecimus  in  (iia'ciam,  adhibitus  essem  in  cotcilinm:  If  I  hadf^vrbeeii 
taken  into  the  council  since  we  crossed  over  to  Greece.  Liv.  :^(;.  7.— See  Ex  18  14  Some- 
times ^3- <y^/o  Is  pregnantly  used  includinir  both  •immediately  afler*,  and  "ever  since  ' 
as  :  Dixit,  se.  (J-  qiu)  siii  jtoteiis  luerit.  Hoinam  commiirrasse  ;  He  said  he  had  moved 
over  :o  Home  ivwiediately  after  he  had  been  of  age,  and  had  lived  there  ever  dnce.  Liv, 
1,  35. 

C.  I?elative  adjectives  or  adverbs  which  express  the  different  relations  of  modality 
(p.  2;}S  loll.)  are  treated  in  the  same  way  as  subst^intive  objects  of  that  kind,  as:  Ei 
quorum  interest  pacem  esse  ;  Tho.«<e  whose  interest  it  is  that  there  should  be  peace.  Liv 
:il).;H).  They  are  frequently  us<d  in  compakative  clauses:  as  :  Qiue  facta  ^uut  eadem 
rutiuue  qua  Roscius  (.cclsus  est  ;  This  has  been  done  in  the  same  manner  ns  the  mnidcr 
of  K(is(  Ills  (literally  'in  the  same  manner  in  which  Roscius  was  murdered  ').  Cic.  Rose. 
Am.  :3,  '.»4.— De  te  loquitur  qutm  ad  moduju  tii  i)utas  (  =  ' ad  eum  vwdum  ad  qvem\  or 
'eo  modo  quo  tu  eum  loqiii  pittas')  ;  Of  y.ui  he  speaks  in  the  same  manner  as  you  think 
Cic.  (^iiiiict.  27,  84.  For  this  form  see  '  Conijiarative  clauses  \— Some  peculiarities  occur 
in  the  relation  of  caxse,  in  which  the  relative  takes  the  following  forms  :  (a)  that  of  the 
adverbial  r«latives  quare,  cur  (negatively  cnr  non,  or  quin).  quainofjrem  ;  [b)  the  prepo- 
sitional lorm  with  de.oh.  uv propter  (quitj'/s  decausis.  quam,  ob  causa.m, propter  quern  e\c  )  • 
(c)  the  lorm  of  an  attributive  genitive  with  the  ablative  causa  {cujus  rei  causa).  These 
ft)rnis  me  Ufvii  with  the  lollowing  distinctions  : 

(«)  If  cavsa  or  one  of  its  syiionyms  (tado  etc.).  or  any  noun  implvin"'  the  idea  of  a 
CJiiise  is  the  ant. -cedent  of  the  relative  clause,  the  cause  is  <:etierally  crniceived  as  'cause 
«•fticienf  (p.  277).  i.  e.  an  existing  cau.-e  from  which  the  acfi(m  was  done  or  should  be 
done.  In  this  instance  the  relative  regularly  takes  an  adrerbial  form,  b.-ing  ext)reH(!ed 
either  by  cur  in.gatively  cur  uoii  or  quin\.  or  bv  qucne.,  which  adverbs  l.av"  the  force  of 
*  qua  dr  causa '.  or  'qua  ex  causa  \  a>  :  Oe-ar  satis  esse  cai/sa;  arbiirabnt ur  quare  in  cum 
animadverteret  ;  Ca'sar  believed  there  was  reason  enouL'h  to  proceed  (frhyhe  should  itro- 
<ee(i)  a-aiiist  htm.  Cses.  B.  (J.  1.  l".».-Non  fuit  causa  cur  tanfiim  labnrcm  caperes  •  There 
\vi»  no  rnison  why  (  =  from  wliich)  you  should  take  such  i)ain<.  Cic.  Rose  C  16  49  — 
Sic  iibi  i)ersuade;.s  velim,  nniim  mihi  esse  sedatium  quaj-e  facilins  possem  pati  te  e<«e 
sine  nobis :  I  w  ish  you  would  rest  assured  that  vour  being  without  ns  is  mv  onlv  nrovnd 
Of  comjort  tchtch  enables  me  (literally/m?A  whirh  ground,  or  'why'  I  am  able)t6  siifler 
more  easily.  lb.  Fam.  7, 10,  4.  See  Ex.  15.  IG.-For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  these 
clauses,  see  p.  ul4,  Olis.  :i. 

(6i  III  relative  clauses  dependent  on  cama  or  ratio,  the  relative  rarelv  takes  a  nrepoM- 
tional  form  with  propter  tnob{\\w  latter  expressing  a  mofire.  bein"  generally  used  with 
a  repetition  <)t  the  antecedent):  liatio  ab  accu-atore  reddita  non  est,  qmmi  ob  causam. 
(lu^  rva^on  why,  or  jor  which)  patrem  filius  occiderit.  Cic.  R.  A.  22.— De  cau<is  wonter 
q'nis  innocens  in  pencnhim  deducattir.  Quint.  4,  2.  12.  Peculiar  is  the  x^<^c  of  quamobrevi 
Mh  i',?,.'::.^.  •V,,"'^' """^'^.^''^'"t  causa  in  the  plural:  .Multie  sunt  caum,  quawobrem  ciipiam 
•iDduieie.  I.I.  Kun.l.2,«..).  In  piibli.istic  language  the  relative  sometimes  takes  the 
niepositnuial  form  with  de,  the  antec.-deni  causa  being  repeated  :  Mililes  qui  causas  lia- 
beaiit.^  qinf„is  de.  causis  mi<si  fieri  debeant.  Cic.  Fam.  8. 8.  i  .it^o  ..a 

(c)  Freciuently  the  aiit.-cedent  causa  is  contained  by  implication  in  a  neuter  absolute 
adjective,  especially  in  the  negative  nihU,  or  the  iuierroirative  quid,  also  in  the  mere 
negation  non  in  th.-  predicative  expn-sioii-  nihil  est.  quid  est  f  non  est  {=  nulla  causa  est 
qjm' causa  e^t,  caum  non  eM)  In  this  construction  relative  adjectives  are  not  used  the 
r.-lai)ve  clause  being  introduced  by  the  adverbs  cur,  quare,  quamobrem  (negatively  by 
quin).  or  by  a  Quod-clause.  See  p.  544,  Oils.  8.  »-  J  "/ 

u/i  If  the  causal  niative  doe>  not  reler  to  cau.oa  or  its  equivalents  as  antecedents   tho 

f..ll..win-  di>tinciion  is  made:   1)  If  ix  fact  or  thing  is  represented  as  the  cause  of  the 

actmu  contaitied  in  the  relative  clause,  the  relative  takes  the  adverbial  form  with  c»r 

qunr,.  quamobrem.  wXww  the  pnnci|)al  sent. -nee  is  neqatire,  or  virtiially  so  as:   ^i  vm 

vel  minima  leperiiltur  V'W/K/^/'^w. . .  videantur;    If  the  sli-htest  fact  should  be  discov- 

ei;-d  why  «m  account  of  which)  they  should  seem  etc.  Cic.  R.  A.  3.-Quod  «gr/?/^  c<.m- 

IThl'.l.n  ;;' '"'^illi-.^-.ret  {i.e.  quicquam)  q»are  timeret;  Because  he  knew  WvM  nothing 

had  been  done  by  him  why  he  should  be  afraid.  Oes.  IJ.  (J.  1.  l4.-(,)uod  commisHiiii 

I  u,  J"*"^*     '"'^r^  ad  istam  rationem  perveniietur :  IJecaiise  ;/o//a/K/  had  occurred  vhu 

ha   measure  should  have  been  adopte.l.  Cic.  Qiiinct.  19.-  2)  It  the  fact  or  thing  is  not 

^;    I'T.?    "J/I  "  '  rP";'''  "'*'  !'''''"*V'''  '"''"^""'^  ^'^"-'^  t'"'  P'-*'IH.sitional  form  with  Vr>/</^ 
onuiim.'s  o/y).  <.rthe  lorm  c>ijus  ret  {qnarum  rtrum)  causa.  a<:    Mihi  eiiam  Dpni/udo 

\'U-\^ino'i/^['''"lT  account  of  which)  non  ipse  ad  te  scribo.  sine  uUfl  laciimaest. 
y<.  Alt.  10, 14,  1,— Lilrunw¥/7///i  ol)mi,;>wy>/^'  7//a.v  fuGnint  tibi  infensi.   lb  Phil   ]   ]•)  _ 

c^n«titne^n?"/C''u^/'''^'oy^^'''r   ^"'"'"^  (fo^  ihv,  sake  ..f  Which)  exercitum  trad'ncere 
coiistitutrat    c.e>.  Ii.  u.  4  l!).-ReIiquo  sermoue  confecio,  cuius  rei  causa  vcnerat.  lb.  B 
v..  1, ».—  6)  If  the  antecedent  ot  the  causal  relative  is  a  penon,  the  relative  must  take  a 


528 


REIATIVE    CLAUSES. 


prepositional  form,  almost  always  with  propter,  as :  Ei,  propttr  qiios  ipse  hoiiestissimns 
j)iital)ritur ;  Those  for  U'liote  ><(tkf  lie  was  liimseif  held  in  the  iiiiiliest  esteem.  CMc.  H.  A.  ti. 
— If  till'  n-JHtivt!  '{:•  used  for  periodical  eouncetion.  the  forms  qnd  de  causd^qiin  tXcaKsii, 
qnami  bnm,  qimre,  qiuipropter,  qnocirca,  quibus  dt  caui>is^  are  all  used  wiili  the  nieaiuiii,' 
*  tluiej'ore  \ 

Obs.  5.  If  the  relative  is  used  as  an  attiukitk  of  a  noun  expressed,  it  either  has  tlio 
form  of  an  attuiiutive  ad.ikctivk  to  a  noun,  wliieh  is  either  the  antecedent  repeated 
or  incorporated,  or  a  noun  pointing  to  the  antecedent,  or  restrictinj;  it,  as  shown  p.  :^]:, 
foil.  ;  or  it  lias,  i/  t/isjunef.  the  Ibnn  of  an  attuibitivk  (iknitivk,  oecurrin-,' in  any  «f 
the  different  relations  in  which  a  noi//i  nniy  be  atlriliutively  used,  as  :  Qxontm  inarfnunt. 
numrriuii  hahebat  :  Of  trhont  he  had  a  r/redf  umnhtr.  C'les.  li.  G.  1,  4. — (Quorum  er;it  X 
jnillia  mnnertix ;  Wh6-<e  numfter  wa^  live  thousand.  lb.  4,  12.— .Multis  de  cau^ui,  qitunnn 
ilia  t'lxw  Ji/.sfis.ylma  ;  For  many  reasons  fhe  viont  ler/itimnfe  of  rrfitrk  was  this  etc.  lb.  4.  hi. 
— 'I'he  Latin  ian<.'uai:e  frequently  u-es  relatives"  in  the  form  of  attributive  adjectives 
^'overned  by  a  noun  e.\'pre>sed  or  timlerstood,  when  the  Kni,'lish  lan<,'ua^fe  makes  use  of 
ditlereni  form».     Jlere  luloni:  the  followini;  construe  ions  : 

1)  A  relative  which  in  Knj;lish  has  a  form  equivalent  to  a  pautitive  genitive  depeiidoiit 
on  definite  or  iudetii.ite  numerals  (§  374  foil.),  i^enerally  ai^rees  in  Latin  with  the  ini- 
nieral  in  ijeniler,  number,  and  case,  as  :  Venio  ad  epistolas  tuas.  qnax  v\io  '^excenfa!'*  uiio 
tempore  accC])! ;  I  come  to  your  letters,  of  which  I  have  received  ti  inillioa  at  a  time. 
Cic.  Att.  7,  2,  3.— Conviviis  delectorcumicqualil)us,  qi/i'pouci  admodum  restant;  leiijuy 
the  entertainments  with  my  equals  in  aire,  very  fete  of  ivhoiii  are  left.  lb.  Sen.  14 — Ejus 
jjontts  custodes  rell(iuit  i)rincipes, //>//ft//,s' .sirt7'//M  iirbium  perpetua  dederat  imperia:  He 
left  as  <,'Urtrds  over  tiie  bridi^e  the  chiefs  to  each  of  whom  he  liad  driven  the  u:overniniiit 
for  life  of  a  city.  Nep.  Milt.  3.  L  —  Propter  liniruie  (Jallica,'  scientiam,  qua  inull'i  j.uii 
Ari()vistus  lon;;inqu!lconsuetudine  utelnltiir ;  On  account  of  his  knowiedire  of  the  (iailic 
lau^'uaire,  much  of  which  Ariovi-tus  had  already  acquired  by  a  lonj;  practice.  Cies.  B.  (J.  L 
47.  [}[iilta  may  also  be  taken  for  an  accessory  predicate,  -  Sixpe.  Sei^  p.  2.71,  Obs.  7.]— In  a 
fimilar  manner  relatives  aj^ree  in  <;ender  etc.  with  the  adjectives  ^o/«.s"aud  universus,  corro- 
h{)on(li:i<;  to  the  p]i)glish  partitive  phrase  'fhe  whole  of  which\  as:  De  repubhcjl  lacx'o.qiiam 
vos  unirersutn  in  hoc  judicio  vestris  humeris  sustinCtis  ;  The  whole  of  vrAicA you  sustain 
in  this  trial  on  your  shoulders,  Cic.  Flacc.  37,  94. — If  the  partitive  relative  is  dependent 
on  uterqxe,  it  is  used  both  in  the  form  of  a  partitive  irenitive,  and  in  that  of  an  adjective 
au;ieeini,'  with  uttrque  ;  while  a/A  )'  ahvavs  takes  its  partitive  relaiive  in  the  _<,'enilive  ;  ;is: 
O'fo/u/H  ntt-r^iue  contempsit  alteruni :  Either  of  whom  despised  the  other.  Cic.  Olf.  '»',  1. 
Jjiit:  Ajjitabiltur  inopijl  rei  lamiliilris  et  coiiscieiitiil  ^calwum.  qtnn  i/lraque  his  uriilius 
auxerat  ;  He  was  i)ressed  by  the  scantiness  of  his  means,  and  ttie  consciousness  of  his 
crimes.  /Mt/h  of  which  he  him  increased  by  these  divices.  Sail.  Cat.  5,  7.— If  the  relative- 
is  d-peiideni  on  alin-^..  .ali'/s,  it  likewise  occurs  in  both  constructions.  ])ut  more  jreiic- 
rally  in  thi-  form  of  a  parfi/ire  gt  tdUve,  as  :  (^normn  ali'ix  (did  causjl  illjlijl  etc.  ;  fj<u/t  i>f 
whom  made  use  of  ditferent  pn-texts. -If  a  paititive  relative  is  (le^)en(lent  on  the  iieiiii 
numerus.,  ox  genus  it  either  takes  the  form  ora;,'enitive,  or  of  an  adjective  at  tribute  a;.'reeiii!; 
with  numert/s,  as:  Ilaqiie  iiicitilbat  omnTs  studio  suo;  quo  in  mtmeroWxQvnwi  L.  'J'oripifi- 
tiis  etc.  ;  la  ivhv'h  immhev  (i.  e.  in  icho.<e  number,  anwng  nhorn)  were  L.  Torquatiis  etc. 
Nep.  Att.  L  4.  But:  Si  oinnes  societiltes  venGrunt,  qmintni  »'X  uiiinero  miilti  sedeut  jii- 
dices  ;  U  all  the.  socit ties  cmnc.  from  ?t7io.'''c  «vm/'x/- m:inyjudi:es  are  sitting  here  (i  t.  to 
■whichxwauy  of  these  judj^es  t^'long).  Cic.  Miir.  :W,  i'M**.     See  Ex.  17-20. 

2)  LooicAL  UELATivEs,  wliich  caimotbe  u-ed  in  the  irenitive  or  dative  (p.  5\C,,  Obs.  3\  fre- 
quently take  the  form  of  an  aj;jreeiiiL,'  adjective,  instead  of  beintj  placed  in  a  j,'eiiitivr 
dependent  on  re>"  etc.  {cujns  r<i,  n/jiis  f(((ti),ii>i:  (Numquam)  obliviscar  quanti  me  sem- 
per feceritis  ;  qnce  si  vos  cepit  oOlirio,\-\\r  id  non  meo  polius  capite  luitiir  qiiam  MileiiiB 
(instead  of  ejus  rt-i  oblivio)?  I  shall  never  forjjet  in  what  hiirh  esteem  you  have  alwnvs 
held  me  ;  ami  if  the  memory  of  this  fact  is  effaced  with  you.  why  is  this  not  visited 
upon  my  head  rather  than  up  mMilo's?  (;ic.  Mil.  ;itj,  99.  —  Per  idem  tempiisadversu-*  <iil- 
lo<  male  pHLrniltum,  quo  m^/u  Italia  oinnis  contremut'iat  (  —  cujiis  facti  nietii);  And  ilio 
whole  of  Italy  had  trembled .//'w/i./entr  (concernim,'  this  fact).  Sail.  Juy;.  114.  1.— Here  l>t'- 
long  .-everal  passages  quoted" above,  as  :  Atticus  reinigrilvit  Koinam  L.  Cottil  L.  Toninflio 
Coss.,  quern  diem  (i.  e.  cujiis  profectinnis  diem)  universa  civitas  prosecQta  est.  Nep. 

*  The  Lajin  uses  the  numeral  sexcenti  wiih  the  meaning  of  u  large  indeliuite  number, 
often  for  the  purpose  of  comic  exaggeration. 

**  Demonstrative  adjectives  freciiienily  take  the  same  form  {eo  numero  =  eon/m  nu- 
t)ie7'0).  In  the  relative  clause  dependent  on  such  demonstratives,  the  relative  adjeclive 
frequently  is  in  tUe  plural,  &•*  if  eOru/n  had  l)een  used  in  the  jjrincipal  sentence,  as:  Ar- 
chi  IS  poCia  est  eo  numero  qui  semper  apud  omnis  sancti  sunt  lutdlti.  Cic.  ArCh.  1'<J.  -jI  .^ 
Amiciiia  est  ex  eo  genere  qiuc  prosunt  (  —  ex  tdrum  rerum  genere  quce  prosunt).  Cic 
Fin.  3,21,70. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  KEL^VIIVE   CLAUSE.  529 

^!^-^iS^'S^:SS^^''^'^  TVi  ^^  gr^r  -  ^"J-  ^-  t--P-)  commit. 

^t\^^n^::^W^l^^Z^^t^:^^  sentences  or  clauses 

1..-.1  sentence,  as:  (Dixit  Divitiaais  ra  rem  p'^se  ere  ^^sJ  S  "'^!',r^'  «"•?  ^^«  P'-"'^''- 
ad  perniciem  suam  uterOtur  (i.  e.  fratrem  cre?4r// «»«^;^  '^''•'  ''i''  oi'^^^^^  ac  nereis 
-.<^)  ;  Divitiacus  said  that  his  brXrTad  grown  \hrS?^^^  ''''  ^"^*"^ 

V'jiuence,  which  he  was  «.ing  towards  his  own  n  it  Si'  r'  T'L'^'^1''''''^  ^'''''  «^'^^ 
sages  quoted  above,  as  :  Ut  me  ner  litter-i^  enni  I'Vr.M.  ,w^'  22.-bo  in  several  pas- 

cons.dflrer  lif.rum  ^c/,*.«^  V'"  ^^ad  L  nTittZ^  T^  VT  ^Y"^""'  ""^  ^  ""^^^m  (i.  e. 
vyiling  «  W,  which  I  wilf  .se.Vto  ycm  e  tc  Cic  a»  VlTi^'n.'^V''^^  ^^'-  '''«^«t^re, 
iMon-em  contendit,  V?/o  j/^ /.w  cum  nai  cL  emiiViLA!.    ^^  ^^  'P^'"»  Ami 

contendit  et  in  eumlLnn  in^uTZ^t^^il^fi^^^''^^^^^  ^^-  ^-  ^d  Ambiorigem 

a  l;.St^vr^C2^"irVjl2;^Z^S;?;?  ImpIy 

?;e;;;!s;=w^;irq-;;ss^ 

jest imata  est,  quantus  in  classem  .«^  "1  foct.L  era?    Tho  \un}     *l'""r?'^"'^^  ^*^^"^'^ 

^^^^'^^^^^'^^i!^^^^^  equivalents  of  at- 

connected  as  8Ub.7ect-ab2at,ves  with  pa     doles  in  "^^^  «^^^n  those 

absoh.te,  as:  l„  eft  republics  ixdqmmoSm^!Sn»^^^^^^^^^  ^^  ^^'^  «iblatives 

ment/or  the  oppression  of  which  iht^ ^^u^[uJ^^^^^  vires  defuerunt ;  In  that  govern- 

arii  regtio  ip.f,rum  nitc4tV  do.n  nJt  ^^.^oSS.?  fnZ=' Vv  "V"-  *^^?"^-  ^''  «^-"Q^od 
Because  their  power  rested  on  I)ariuVs  r'nln  «Jv/,^;/  'P^<»^  c  vibus  snis  poenas  datQros  : 
count  by  their  countrynien.  i\'p  Milt.  3,  i'  ^      '^^^^  f^U  they  would  ie  called  to  ac- 


^s,  ccnitTa  pop;;b;n^^i^.s^;s^Sn^n?rT 

5,  11.-11.  />^eC  d?.  t  ;  i       i  S^^'SJ  'Jn^  appeUatur  Tamesis!  cSsTo 

ortum  est  ab  Ambioriire.  I b  5  2G  -pi  fS^^^^^  ^'^"^"'n  est.  initium  tumultus" 

tenti.3  Pi.iHppo  pa.-,  data^'  .^u^^h  ^2  5^  il^i^T'"'^  "^'V?  agebfttar^^  ex  quo^e- 
vnllemstmipsit'^  nullodiY^nrbisn  iVrnt.^^iTir  ^•.  ^^^''P'»  Africanus.  ex  quo  lo^r^m 
tolitun  iret.  lb.  2(5  19  -ll  (  ,  mV   ater^.i  «1^^^^^^^  ^•^•"  ^"^^  Q"^'"  *"  Capi^ 

a/w  . '  "I";"  n  ");'"  ''^^^^"'^  ^^I>edem  h  duit-^  h  VTV^I\'  dies.noctlsque  insidU- 
abessent  hello  Treviri.  Cics  B  G  7  «-^  i«'  o.,  ""  ^'^""l^-.  "«^^  tuit  caw.*a  9?/«re  toto 
pianicum  vellet  y  Cic.  Cli.   (il -n    E.?;,7p  5' .S""!  ^^7«  ^"'^  Avito  cur  interficere  Op 

nyn,  qnipauci  nominanlur  fnit.  lb  im   6  ol  "  i''si"^''^-""''':'''^^!"^"«'-'  q"^'»*  ^0- 

ochurn,  y//o^  video  esse  «o/i/^z/Z/o.  cum  dnnt  ^^'  T"  ^""t  qnibus  infinitum  sit 

^ai^urare-  ^-^i^liJ^^ll^^Z^^^^S^  ^ 

3  Z!;Sri-i:2-^;^-onducti.;^  o^^S'^:^lZ^^^^X!^r^L  «my  one  - 


-e  With  thi  ma;k\'f'rb"SrK'Vr%^^^ 

sanctuary  of  its  religious  charader,  to    ec^ lari^  '  t -"  to  vow  ^""■"'^^'  ^"  ^"  '"  ^'^''''^  ^ 


530 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


631 


— W   Moa«  litfcrfi!»  quod  roqnTri*'',  imp-dior^  inoiii-I  rornm'.  quasi  nttf/a^  haJ)oo  Htte- 

rtHcii'Miis    Cic-    \tt    11   4    1.  -yl.   I.actdaMuMiii  «IfctiiiviiAlcn»  p«>t«'Hi;1trm  a  Lysaiidro 

conPiTiatam  siistulCrnnt* ;    quo  dddre^  inccnsus  iniit  consiliu«  reges  LaccdffimoniO- 

rum  lollere.  Nt-p.  Lyt>.  3, 1. 

Hem  11.  Frequently  ihecoveminc:  verbs  of  relatives,  or  the  predicates 
depeiuient  on  them,  and  sonnetimesOther  words  by  wliieh  their  case  is 
determined,  are  elliptiaiV.y  omitteiU  and  must  he.  supplied  from  the  princi- 
pal sentence,  the  same  as' in  coordinate  propositions. 

Obs  1  The  relative  clanscs  in  which  Huch  omission?  occur,  mostly  have  the  nature 
of  cmnparafire  clauses  {Hew  q>d,  tnudnn  qmwtmn  etc):  hut  omissions  ol  this  kind 
also  oc'ur  in  ordinary  relative  clauses.  Such  an  ellipsis  cannot  he  imit.ited  m  hniili^l» 
unless  the  Latin  relative  may  or  must  he  rendered  hy  tin-  comparative  conjunction  -as  ; 
hut  we  may  sometimes  us.Mhe  auxiliary  • /o  f/o\  instead  ot  rep.-jitin;,'  the  verh  ot  tli.; 
Drincipal  sentence.  Such  auxiliaries  cannot  he  expressed  hy  'farrr»^  in  Ijitin  ;  as: 
Sla-is  ea  percipimus  qiue  nohis  ipsis  prospere  eveniunt.  quam  ilia  qme  ceteru>  (i.  e./>;w- 
n^>y?  fiv//iw;i/)  ;  We  perceive  more  what  hai)pens  l)rosp,-ro-.i>ly  to  ourM-lves  than  that 
which  so  hapjfehstookrrs  (ttian  what  does  t.iolhers).  Cic.  OH.  l,m--A^^7^m  utfinihu.  no- 
men  ^mun  qiiiffiix  vita  termhianftir :  So  that  his  name  is  conlmed  t<.  tUvsawe  \um\s  as 
hUlife  (=  eisdemliiiihus  nomen  tcrminarCtur v'/i(>//^r/'^Mernunareiur).  Cic  1  use  i,  i,), 
32  -Erat  eiiim  eddem  quo  Mc'Madfxxeum  ;  For  he  was  of  ihvsamf  iivudw<  Alribtmh.^'i  = 
eddem  senm  erat  quoAlcihiad.^^  eraf).  Nep-  Ale  5.  3.-lntelliLretis  eiiim  nullis  homiiu- 
hus  quemquam  taido  odi..  qiuwfo  istum  Syracu^-\Mi>  et  esse  efj'nsse  (  =  fa»o  fxfioe  .xv 
et  f msse,  wnw  foist  timet  esse  etpmse;  For  you  will  understand,  that  nuhin[\  is  aud  >  as 
bo  hateful  to  any  men,  as  he  {is  and  tras)  to  Die  SyraeuMans.  (  ic  \  err.  2,  i,  .>.  fc>V«  f'^- 
1-4  -S(mietiines  hoth  the  principal  sentence  and  the  clause  have  the  same  ohject-inliui- 
tive  which  is  understood  in  /><>f/i  propo-itions,  as:  J',, ye  qao  cceiusti  (  =  P/'fi-'**  ";« 
qito'ire  ccepisii) ;  ilooa  to  the  j>lace  to  wliu'h  yon  hair  ma<U  anuhqemtnfs  to  (/o.  Cic.  tat. 
1,  5.  ,.    ,  . 

Obs  2  In  the  examples  quoted  ahove  ^Or.s.  1).  the  verhs  which  arc  thus  supplied  in 
the  relative  clause  iiave  the  same  grammatical  lorm  in  the  piincip;il  sentence  as  must 
be  undei-t^tood  for  the  clause.     Hut  this  is  not  -eneralty  the  caM'.      1  hus 

(a I  The  verhs  to  he  supplied  in  the  clause  may  he  of  tenses,  moods.  <)r  p.-rsons  dill'  r- 
cnt  from  those  in  the  principal  sentence,  »s  :  Tam  sum  misericors  pidices,  quam  vc-s 
tam  mills  qpam  q>d  lenissimus  (i.  ^.  .^0  ;  I  am  as  merciful  O  jti(U:es.  as  >m,u  are  a> 
mm  as  the  most  /tv/i/z/Mliterally  :  as  he  who  [i^]  the  mo>t  l<-|'ient).  Cic  !^»'  • '^  ;  ^' - 
Tam  milii  -ratum  efit,  quam  quod  .^ratissimum  u.  e.  est) ;  It  will  he  as  P'^'l''^';  ^  «'r  c 
«.vWmM*- the  most  pleasant.  Cic.  Pain.  13.  3.-Non  eadem  inihi  qua  supenorihus  c  i  - 
sulihus  le^^e  et  ccmdiiiOne  utendam  esse  decrCvi :  I  have  resolved  that  not  the  saiue  ;  v\ 
and  condidon  should  f>e  used  by  me,  as  had  to  be  used  by  the  former  consuls  (  ^  qini  ^///"- 
riaritjusconsaliOus  utendum  faih.  (Mc.  L.  A-r.  2,  3.-l;'requently.  however,  in  '^»',h  u.  stn  i- 
tions  the  verb,  if  it  is  in  a  diflerent  irrammalical  lorm  fnun  that  '-^''l""'^''  ,^\,  ''•,,,V;.  " 
struction  of  the  clause,  is  repHttnl  in  Latin,  where  in  hn-lish  we  rei.eat  "  y  ^^^/^  * 
iary.  as  :  Animus  aletur  et  sastenfafntur  ei>dem  rehuP.  quibus  astra  sxsiei.tantvi^ial  n- 
tar:  The  soul  irill  be  fed  and  sustuvttd  by  the  same  elements  as  th^  stars  are.  Cit.  int. 

^'(ftJsometmK-s'the  verb  in  the  principal  sentence  is  an  infinitive,  and  must  be  supplied 
as  a  finite  verb  in  the  dau-e.  as  :  Eum  non  ptei.ite haty.wv/-^  idein  v'''>^^  '  v  m  J^X  •  u 
He  was  not  ashamed  of  dmnq  the  same  </x  you  did.  <- L^.^^^'IV '^'v^''-:;"  VUw /^ 
quocefei-i}un;versdri{  =  cpio  ceteri  re rsan fur  jwra  versan) ;  He  wishes  to  be  buhjetua 
loiUc^iimaVAw  a^<  the  others  a  re.  Cic.  L.  Alt  2.2:1.  *  i,  „,.//„/ xv 

(r)  Most  frequently  of,kct-i,>finitiri-s  or  predicafe-infimfirf.o  are  '''n>P  hhUu  tiie  r^w« 
while,  in  the  principal  sentence,  the  same  verb  is  usecl  as  the  inite  pr'-'tlicate,  J-  -J'"     ! 
8..ss»'mel  \vx-vr>vii  eddem  aq>nd  quo  ccfpennd ;  Having  <.nce  dislodtred  t»'^"^'/ '^.w' 
them  by  me.-.ns  of  the  same  terr..r  as  tl,exj  did  in  the  beninnincj  ( =  quo  '^?7«' Yf!,n'^/.w  •«? /i'^ 
by  which  they  be-an  to  drive  themi.  Liv.  10.  ;«  -Nemoe^l  qui  non  equo  9''«  ^^J^'  . 
(i.  e.  quo  uli  cONSuevit)  li»)entiU8  utafur  quam  intractito  et  novo  ;    I  here  i*;  •' "'"V'V;" 
would  not  use  rather  a  horse /on'// icA //t;  iv  accu.^foiiudihx <-rn]\y:  '''''''^Jf^'fA,-.^ 
cuslmned^  than  an  untried  and  new  one.  Cic.  Am    11).  »iH.-V>s  t»'"^'",ho^.,f '-f,'   'Z/    at 
iilo  au'Mirio  quo  diximus  d.  e.  qaoconfirman  diximvs^ ;  W  e,  however   pmc  tins  i>} 
aUL'ury  fry  which  w-  hare  said  it  is  pror^l.  Cic.  Att    10.  8   7.— See  hx.  <>-lO. 

(rf)  Sometimes  the  srovernin- words  of  the  relative  whi'h  must  .^»^' '^''if  ^^' /^"J,     r 
principal  sentence,  and  by  which  the  case  of  the^relativc_^s  det.-rmim-d,  aic.^M<-/'>s  * 
^1  As   for^your    missin;:-  my  lett<rs.-»'Hrpply";from  ^\ritinu''.->  by  the  want  «^, 
material,  of  news.-*  to  abolish.-»  =  cvjus  rei  dolbre  ;  and  embittered  by  grief  on  a. 
count  of  this  fact.--«  he  resolved. 


I: 


they  arc  vorl)»  alons-  with  other  clasfcs  of  »ords.  ne  :  Crecar  rirciter  nc  ei..,  <,«■>..;. 
<lr,..Ul,  „.  were  ru,„i,h,-,l.  „f  that  kin.l  -MfcA    •flji./d^;;;;^'^^'^;''',?^^'^'''!  'I"?" 

qmsquepoterai  (>/r///.«exTbant(i  e  v\'<  Yv\m»  ^^'ilWn^^:^<n^^^^  Kaptim  qmbus 

w.-nt  out  after  everyone  had  f^^n  mcc^^cf^^Zt(SZ.Tni  Tl'S^  \7r'''^ 

die.  quo  CO/lslftn  rat'-»   h,ft-rrn//n    l.«.fT^  .-'...; />    '      -rl^^l,     .'   i  .  "  *J"_  •'•-^'^'  «0.— 6.  Eo 


tliu  tinlfcc,  onls  nre  transluTOl  to  th<.reltilive  clause  (p  505   Oe«  'n-  o   i„ 
ion-!,  to  both  the  piiiicinal  senieiice  ami  the  relative  clause  is  aenernn,, 

<'M,  which,  ficcoriliiiff  ,„  Eniriisl,  i.sa-e,  are  placed  in  the  principal  En 
■nee  as  a„r,h,„e,s  of  the  tp.iecclcpt.h.tt  ticcorcling    o  La'  n  S  e  a?e 

OB^^rgyis^m^^  Ingieaiiy  a  member  of  both  a  relative  claiiae  and  the  princip.1 
J  prompted  by.—o  ^.  g.  permOtus  esse.-^i  none  of  which  is  owed  (due)  to  you 


532 


RELATIVE   CL.VUSES. 


sentence,  the  Enf;li!»h  lancrnare  places  the  equivalent  of  qvt.*q^ie\\\  the  principal  mifencf, 
and  refrrs  to  it  in  the  ( lau^e  bv  a  demonstrative,  or  n  pergonal  pronoun.  But  in  Latin 
qiiisqiie  if*  irentrally  jdaced  in  fhe  relative  dame,  din'(  tly  atter  the  n-laiive  adjectiv^.  ,)r 
adverb  wbiU-  in  the  principal  .«.ntence  it  Is  cither  replaced  by  a  demonstrative  (»*).«.: 
entirely  omitted,  if  it  may  beeasdy  siippiietl ;  as:  I't  sit  per  qnem  adsripulturr/^/o^/ «/»«<- 
que  de-^ideret :  That  there  mav  be  somebody  thronirh  whom  every  one  may  obtain  uhul 
he  df^sires  Cic.  Am.  9,  29.  Monnil  ut  ea  f/itce  in  qnoque  maxima  essent.  imitareniur; 
He  exhorted  us  to  imitate  in  everyone  what  was  irreatest  in  htm  (  =  in  qnoque  ea  qmn 
maxima  ineoessenf.  which  arranirement  would  not  be  admissible  in  Latin).  (Mc.  Or.  .'i, 
12  Thus  with  comparative  relatives,  and  with  relativf  fidvfrbs  :  I  t  qndntt  qmnque  >^e 
ipse  faciat.  fanfi  liat  ab  amicis;  That  even/  one  should  be  li»'id  in  x'/ch  esteem  by  his 
friends  rtN-A^  holds  himself,  (.'ic.  Am.  10.— Vallum  sumpspre  vnde  cmqne  proximum  Uiit; 
Eacli  took  the  materials  for  the  rampart //wm  that  jilai't  uhich  was  neaiest  to  ntni  {  - 
qiiinqiie  ex  eo  loco  qui  ti  tuvximm  fait,  which  arraiiLMment  would  tiot  be  admissibUi 
Liv.  ;^,  27.— Generally  the  relativ»-  clauses  in  which  qnisqne  is  tluis  incorporated  are  placxl 
BY  INVERSION  before  the  principal  sentence,  in  whicli  instance  tlie  ijriiicipal  seniencr  i8 
frequently  introduced  by  a  demonstrative  {it)  referriui:  \o  qui/ique,  in>tead  of  bein^'  iii- 
tr(Hliici-dl)y  the  syndetic,  antecedent  of  the  relative,  as  :  Koscius  jaindiu  h(»c  est  cniisc- 
cutus  lit  iu  quo  quisque  ariitici'»  excelleret.  ix  in  biio  ;renere  Hopcius  dicereiur ;  K«>scmi>, 
Ion»-  since,  has  obtained  the  distinction  ttia:  ex-try  one  in  that  spher»-  in  ivhich  lie  excels 
is  c^llfd  a  Hoscius  in  his  specialty.  Cic.  Or.  1,  28.  Tims  quisque  is  sometimes  placed 
alter  quo  in  those  comparative  clauses  connected  by  qvo. .  .to,  as  :  i^uo  quixqut*  •  st  ^o- 
leriior  et  in<:eniosior. //oc  docet  imcundius  ac  lahoriosius;  Eni-y  one  teacluswiih  i-o 
much  jjreater  ire  and  pains,  as  he  is  (mor»-)  sk.lful  and  in-enious.  Cic.  Rose.  Com.  11.— 
If  qiiisque  occurs  in  tlie  same  sentence  in  two  diilV-rent  relations,  the  one  may  l»e  placed 
in  the  principal  sentence  (mostly  it  it  can  take  one  of  the  constructions  mentioned  in 
§  m-i,  li  2t).  ;^)  ;  while  the  other  is  incorporated  \\\  the  relative  clause,  as:  I)ionyi>iii< 
edixit  ut  quod  qni-que  e  sacris  habCret,  id  ante  diem  certain  in  suum  quodque  lanuin  re- 
ferret  •  That  even/ one  should  Xmw):,  everythinq  that  he  held  of  sacred  utensils,  brlurc  :i 
certain  day  to  the  temple  in  which  it  belonired.  Cic.  N.  1).  3,  'M.  S«.meiimes  yz/iAVJ/c  is 
repeated  iii^AO/Aproposuions  if  it  has  tiie  same  relation  in  Ixith.  as  :  Opportunitas  ut  i\\x 
culque  i\\tiix  esset  ea  cu'ique  obvenlret  ;  That  opportunity  should  bill  to  etery  one  s  m 
which  is  suitable  to  him.  Cic.  Fin.  4, 13.— Rarely,  quixque,  in  this  connection,  is  attaclud 
to  the  principal  sentince  alone.  In  classical  lan-u  "ire  this  «iccurs  only  il  the  pnnciiKii 
sentence  precedes,  atid  quisque  is  placed  alter  <('/w  or  ,<e,  as  :  In.nnte  adole-centul  id  ^J//i 
^fax^'/^jrenusietiliisdeirendieconstituit^'/o^/maxime.idamJlvit  (where  the  usual  eonstriic- 
tion  '  quod  quisque  ojenus  jetStis  degenda'  maxime  adilmilvit.  id  siin  constiiint  'would  im- 
pair the  rhetorical  svtnmetry  of  the  principal  sentence);  Kven/ one  choosvi^  in  hisyoiiiiL'tr 
days  that  future  vocal ion/ar  M^Z/icA  h<'has  a  |)redilecti<»n.  Cic.  Off.  1.  .32, 117. —Laier  writers 
(rarely)  phice  quisqne  in  the  principal  sent,  nee  even  if  no  such  position  alter /?»/i/.f  or  se 
can  be  assigned  to  il,  as:  Bonus  liber  melior  est  quif<que  quo  major  (inst.  of  quo  qui-que 
major,  which  construction  lias  not  been  chosen,  becau^e  in  this  airanizenu-nl  qin.sq'ie 
would  have  the  app.arance  of  an  absolute  adjective,  =  qui.<quehomo)  \  Every  good  buoU 
is  the  better  the  larger  it  is.  Plin.  Ep.  1,  20.     See  Ex.  1-3. 

Obs.  2.  The  Latin  Language  frequently  combines  with  a  relative  adjective  dimiptive 
arf;^6'/tJV/f  a»  ACCKS80RV  PKKDiCATES  of  the  relative  (p.  241»  foil. \  which  agree  with  the 
relative  in  gender,  numb,  r,  and  case.  This  combination,  which  is  not  admillea  lu 
English,  is  used  in  the  following  instance?  :  i-«    n    „ 

1)  If  ill  Eui,'lish  a  sueKiiLATiVK,  used  as  an  attribute  of  the  antecedent,  isqualilieu  i>.\  i 
relative  clause.  Such  relative  clauses  «h)  not,  logically,  restrict  the  antecedent.  \nit  the 
superlative,  and.  it  construed  in  the  sam»;  wav  in  Latin,  would  confuse  ihe  logical  aim 
grammatical  relations  of  the  clause.  Hence  The  Latin  takes  the  superlative  out  ol  ine 
frame  of  the  principal  sentence,  and  joins  it,  in  the  form  of  an  accessory  predicate  umi 
the  relative,  i.  e.  makes  the  relative  (instead  of  tlie  grammatical  antecedent)  the  lof/uai' 
sufiject  of  the  superlative,  as  :  Massilieiisitini  civitas  FoniCjiim  eis  aflecit  hanonffUK  q"0'^ 
habuit  amptis.'.imm  ;  The  Massilian  State  conferred  on  Foiiiejiis  the  hiqhest hono?^  uct,i</i 
it  had)  in  its  i:ift.  Cic.  F<mt<').  »1,  14.  It  would  not  be  admissible  to  express  thl^^  fv- 
tence  in  the  Eii'di-h  way  (Civi'tas  Fontpjum  amplissiniis  honoribus  afl^cit  quo>  habuit», 
bec.iuse  (a)  the  principal  sentence  would  implv  that  the  State  had  'highest'  honors  to 
confer,  and  perhaps  no  other  honors;  (fj)  the  clause  'quod  hnf)uit'  would  repj'-i'  "" 
assertion  already  made  in  the  principal  sentence,  namely  that  tiie  State  had  such  h'»"';  ■; 
to  confer.  But  the  construction  would  not  imply  what  the  author  meant  lo  state,  uMnn 
that  the  h<mors  it  conferred  ictve  the  highe-t  of  those  it,  held.  Tliis  predicative  r^''^'""" 
is  expressed  in  the  lorm  of  an  acces,^ory  predicate  attached  t<»  the  relative,  ^  tiie  'i*^"''  . 
which  it  had  as  the  highest,  ^/fty?<7  "'t^  Highest.— Thus  :  Aganiennum  Difinie  aevowr» 

*  Instead  of  this  form  of  the  comj)arative  clause,  more  rreqiieutly  the  form  with  n 
gviaque  and  two  superlatives  is  ui?ctl.    See  '  Comparative  clauses'. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  RELATRT:  CLAUSE. 


533 


quod  in  puo  regno ;)?//c/<^mm?/mnatum  cpset  illo  anno;  Agamemnon  had  vowed  as  a  sac- 
ritice  to  Diana  ihe  fnofit  btnutiful  of  ivhaf  had  been  procreated  that  year  in  his  kingdom. 
Cic.  Off  3.  25.— Often  superlatives  of  this  kind  cannot,  even  in  l-ni;lish.  be  attached  to 
the  antecedent,  without  impairing  the  sense  of  the  passage,  as  :  Ille  Ephesum  ad  eum 
qutui  tu  ex  lux^  Jidelixi<imuni  delegisti,  i)ecuni:im  misit ;  lie  ncnt  that  money  to  Ejjhesus 
to  a  man  whom  you  had  selected  a.v  the  mod  trustworthy  of  your  officials  (different  iroin  •  to 
the  most  trustworthy  of  your  officials  whom  you  had  selected  ').  Cic.  Dej.  5.  14.— See  Ex. 
4-7.— The  i-ame  form  ir-  used  in  comparative'  clauses  with  qiiantvs  and  posse,  dep»  ndent 
on  superlatives,  and  corresponding  to  'as  much  (great  etc.)  as  possible'.  In  clauses  of  this 
kind  the  superlative  !■>  always  attached  as  an  ac<'essory  predicate  to  qnantus,  and  not  to 
the  .••ntecedcnt,  the  syndetic  antecedent  tantus  beinj.' generally  omitted  (See  Ex.  10),  as  : 
Vi  in  transversos  quanto  maxiino  possent  impe'u  concurrenuit  (instead  of  impetu  fuaximo 
quanta  jtossent);    To  rush   against   their   front   with  as  hard  a  dash  as   they   could. 
Liv.  10.  2S.  See  Ex.  8-10.— In^tead  of   quantns  more  usually  the  adverbial  foirm   with 
quam  is  emi)loyed.    Thus  the  idioms  mentioned  P.  I,  p.  221,  li.  IT.  must  be  explained  : 
.Iiigiirtha  quam  maxitnas  \miv6l  capiat  parat.  Sail.  Jug.  48.— Superlatives  if  tlius  cou- 
necied  witli  relatives  often  have  tlie  meaninir  of  a  hiqh  (not  highest)  degree,  being  ren- 
dered like  i)osiiives  with  an  adverb  ol  intensity,  as  :  "Veries  mittit  ad  Antiochuni  regein 
rogatum  ea  rcu^a  qu(R  puUliernma  apud  eum   viderat  ;  Verres  sent  to  king  Antiochus, 
and  ask«-d  him  for  those  admirable  {moat  beauiifvl)  ra-ses  which  he  had  seen  in  liis  house. 
Cic.  Verr.  2.  4,  27.  [If  here  the  superlative  could  be  attached  to  the  antecedent,  it  would 
have  the  meaning  'for  tlie  most  beauliuil  of  the  vases  which  he  had  seen  \]  Sec  Ex.  11. 
2)  The  same  construction  is  extended  to  adjectives  in  the  positive  degree,  if  the  ante- 
cedent is  conceived  as  being  unqualitied  with  respect  to  the  action  of  the  principal  sen- 
tence, but  as  being  restricted  l)y  an  adjective  in  regtird  to  the  predicate  of  the  relative 
clause.     Such  coll^tl■uction8  are  variously  recast  in  English,  as  :  Phileas,  vir  inquigti 
animi,  et  minime  otium  quo  liim  diutino  senescere  videbiltur.  paticntis  ;  Phileas,  a  man 
"Whose  mind  was  restle>s  and  impatient  of  inactivity,  which  it  then  seemed  was  ever  to 
continue  till  he  would  bean  old  man.  Liv.  2,j.  7  (different  from  'impatient  of  the  long 
lasting  in  ctivity  in   which  he  seemed  to  grow  old).— Sometimes,  in  ret  derinir  such 
Latin  constructions,  we  would  combine  the  adjective  with  the  antecedent,  alihough, 
l«)gicaily,  the  action  of  the  princijial  sentence  has  no  connection  with  it.  as  :  Romulus 
Sabliias  viru'ines  qiiie  Romani  ludOrum  gnwiS.  venissent,  quos  tum  prinuim  anniversarios 
in  Circo  faceie  instiIui^set,  Consualibus  rapi  jiissit ;  Romulus  gave  orders  to  abduct,  on 
the  day  of  the  Consualia.  the  Sabine  virgins  who  had  come  to  Rome  for  the  sake  of  the 
annual  qutnes  which  Romulus  had  then  lirst  established  in  the  Circus,  Cic.  Rep.  2,7,12. 
— Privatis  qiiibiisdam  vxpecunid  quam  con-ulibus  7/i</^</(7m<iederanl,  tertia  pensio  d«  be- 
bninr  ;  To  certain  private  citizens  the  third  instalment  was  due  of  the  loan  (as  if  pecu- 
nid  mutud  quam  d(!derant)  ichick  they  had  made  to  the  Consuls.  Liv.  31,  13.— If  attribu- 
tive adjectives  referring  to  the  antecedent,  logically  belon-r  to  both  the  principal  sen- 
tence and  the  clause,  they  are.  even  in  Latin,  aifiched  to  the  antecedent,  and  not  to  the 
relative,  as  :  II<ic  rectum  putab;im.  ex  annuo  surnptu  qui  mihi  decretus  esset  (not  *  sumptii 
qui  mihi  aunuus  decretus  esset)  referre  in  serarium  ad  IIS  X  ;  I  considered  it  my  duty  to 
return  it)  the  treasury  10,000  ^estel•ces  remaining  from  the  yeai^Iy  allowance  which  was 
decreed  to  me.  Cic.  Att.  7,  1,  <i.    Here,  the  -returning'  was  made  from  the  allowance  of 
that  ytar.  and  hence  reieis  to  both  tiie  principal  sentence,  and  the  clause. 


aj  con- 
datura 


1.  Hoc  privatorum  coiisiliOrum'  ubique  semper  fuit,  nt  in  quam  cu'iqve  femin 
venisset^domum  nuberet.  Liv.  4,  4.  10.-2.  (;>woc/ «/I^i/e  temporis  ad  vivendum 
est.  eo  debet  esse  c<mtenius.  Cic.  Sen.  11),  (]<).— 3.  EOrum  quai  natfiril  fuerant  commu- 
nia  quod  rulque  obtigit^,  id  quisque  teneat*.  lb.  Oil".  1,  7,  21.-4.  Veniat  Ciesar  cum  co- 
pus  quax  haM  finnissiynas'" !  lb.  Fain.  10,  23,  5.-5.  Themistocles  nociu  de  servis  suis 
quern  habuit  fidtlistsinium  ad  Xerxem  misit.  Nep.  2,4,3.-6.  Ouas  res  violentimmas 
natara  genuit,  eftrum  moderatiOnem  nos  soli  haljCmus.  Cic.  X.  I).  2,  GO.— 7.  M.  Popili- 
us  iii^  tiimulo  quem  proximum  castris  GallOrum  capere  potuit,  valliim  ducere  coepit. 
Liv.  7,  23.— 8.  Hannibal  quantam  y/fttj-iw^az/t  vastitaiem^  potest  ca>dibus  incendiisque 
efficit.  Liv.  22.  3.— 9.  Papirius  Sp.  Naulium  jubet,  inter  ipsam  dimicatiOnem^  nnilos* 
quanto  maximt*  posset  7noto^°  pulvtre,  ostendere.  lb.  10,  40.— 10%  Tanta  est  inter  eos 
^(/a/</rt  wj<u'i//}a  potest  esse,  inorum  studiOrumque  distantia.  Cic.  Am.  20.-11.  P.  Sci- 
l)ioni  ex  multis  diebus  quos  in  \iiik  celeber/imos^^  latissimosque  vidit,  hie  dies  clarissi- 
niusi-  fuit.  lb.  Am.  3. 

'  A  ri-ht  of  individual  discretion.— 2  to  be  convenient.- 3  what  has  fallen  to  his  lot  ~ 
*  CoiistriK' :  Id  quisque  teneat  quod  culque  obtigii  eOrum  (/.  e.  ex  eis  rebus)  qujc  natiira 
etc.—»  with  the  most  triistw..riby  (or  f//t(/irfe).—«  desolation — '  during  the  ri-ht  itself 
i.  e.  >yhen  the  tiLdit  would  have  fairly  commenced.— «  mule.—»  Instead  of  an  "adjective 
{maxvno)  agreeing  \^\\\\  pulvere,  an  adverb  is  used  dependent  on  ^movtre''  understood  — 
'"  lo  raise.—"  the  many  famous  and  happiest  days.— 1-  the  most  glorious. 


634 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


535 


Ban.  13.  It  is  a  princij)lc  of  the  English  language  that  the  relative  ad- 
jectives or  adverbs  must  be  actual  members  of  that  proposition  which 
they  subordinate  to  another  sentence.  According  to  this  principle,  it  is 
not  allowed  in  English  to  subordinate  a  sentence  to  another  sentence  by 
means  of  a  relative  which  grammatically  belongs  to  a  clause  dependent 
on  tlie  sentence  which  is  to  be  connected  by  the  relative*.  Tlie  Latin 
conception  is  ditferent.  Any  Latin  sentence  may  be  relatively  subordi- 
iiated  to  another  sentence  by  means  of  a  relative  adjective  ()r  adverb 
which  is  a  grammatical  member  of  some  claum  dependent  on  it.  In  this 
instance  the  relative  (according  to  the  rule  p.o'iO,  Ous.  2)  precedes  iha  con- 
junction or  other  c(mnective  of  the  clause  to  which  it  belongs,  and  the 
clause,  in  this  construction,  generally  7;rec6(/t'«  that  proposititm  which  is 
logically  subordinated  to  the  principal  sentence  by  means  of  the  relative 
in  the  clause.  This  remarkable  construction,  which  is  very  frecpient, 
and   is  called  '  Involution   ok   the  kelative',  must  be  rendered  by 

variously  recasting  the  Euirlish  sentence. 

Obs.  I.  Wherever  The  Latin  lan-ua'^e  user»  an  involution  of  relative  clan=e!»,  it  con- 
ceive;* tlie  relative  adjective  or  adveri)  «.v  (ico  distinct  word.^,  nannly  as  a  connkctivk 
ELEMENT.  consi!?tin<,'  in  the  relative  root  qh  icu),  which  connectn  without  bein«r  itself  a 
lueniberof  the  s«enlence  wliich  it  connects;  .'iiul  a  prono.minai.  or  determinative  ele- 
ment, which  rei)r.'seius  the  antecedent  as  hel<)ni:in«r  to  the  jrrammatical  frame  of  a  given 
clause.  If  the  relative  is  '  involvt'd  ',  the  relative  i-oot  bel(m;„'i%  a-  if  it  were  aconjunciion, 
to  (mother  chxwi^ii  ihan  the  ueierniinative  element,  as  :  Vivit  'v\Q..qu<tnsi  interfen"''^»  ^i\\\'\. 
essCinus.  wliich  would  be  literally  rendered  :  That  man  lives  t/  whom  yon  would  hare 
killed,  we  woull  be  safe.  But  the"  Latin  dofn  not  concnre  or  feel  the  construction  in  tlii^ 
way.  The  Latin  thinks  as  we  would  think  if  employ  inu:  a.  conjunct  ion  with  a  demonstra- 
tive :  'That  man  lives  ?r//i/<?  if  you  had  killed  //?/y<,  we  would  be  sate;  '  Vivit  illc  7'/— , 
em  si  interfecisses.  salvi  essCmus ',  where  qu,  beloiij;inir  to  sidri  tsftJtnu/t,  has  the  lorce 
of  a  conjunction  of  «general  and  loos«'r  import  than  anyspecilic  conjunction  (  =  quuw, 
dmn  etc.  withoiu  their  particular  adverbial  meaning),  while  em,  belongin-;  to  si  inttr/e- 

cii^se^f  is  conceived  as  an  accusative  eion**. . 

""♦Some  of  tlie~Eni,'lisirclassical  authors  have  attempted  to  introduce  this  form  of  eoii- 
Ptruction  in  the  EuL'lish  laniruau'e,  as:  '  Tluij  venture  to  he  hanaed  for  those  civil  rifjhts 
■WHICH  TiiEin  ANCESTORS  RATHER  THAN  TO  PART  WITH  chifse  to  be  cut  to  jnecen  in  the  Jitld 
of  battle'.  Aduison.  Freeholder  No.  \.  Here  are  two  proposiiions :  1)  Their  ances- 
tors cliose  rather  to  be  cut  to  pieces  in  the  lield  of  b.-ittle;  :2)  the  comparative  clause 
'  than  to  part  with  which'  (  =  than  they  would  part  with  whieh).  Tiie  former  pro})osi- 
tiun  contains  no  member  connect iuir  it  with  the  antecedint  in  the  p'incipal  sentence 
(•those  civil  ri^diis').  tm  which  antecedent  it  is  mudc  dependent  by  means  ol  a  relative 
'whicU\  that  belonirs  to  the  comparative  clause  dependent  on  it  ;  tliiis  leaving  the  gov- 
eriiin<'  proposition  of  this  clause  qrammatically  unconnected  with  its  principal  sentence. 
Such  attemi)ts  have  failed  to  find  many  imitators  since  they  are  repugnant  to  the  prinn- 
ple  of  the  En<'lish  huiLMiaire,  according  to  which  the  relative  word  is  an  indlotol uf>le  unit. 
and  cannot  btT so  separated  in  thought  as  to  assign  the  connective,  or  relative  element 
'  wh"  and  tiie  determinative  clement  '  ich\  to  dillerent  jjropoHiions.  This  is  done  in 
the  abovo  quoted  passage,  where  the  element  '«•//'  belongs  to  the  proposition  '  1  heir 
ancestors  in  the  Held  of  battle  ',  and  the  determinative  element,  to  the  comparative 
cl.iu-e.  To  the  same  I'n-Erglish  conMrtictions  belong  such  expressions  as  'Than  wh(»m 
ijohody  is  wiser ',  which,  being  an  improper  imitation  of  a  Latin  idiom,  is  sometimes  nsal 

by  Entilish  writers.  ^  ,  .    , ,    ,    *  .i  n. 

*♦  That  this  was  reallv  the  Roman  conception,  appears  from  the  remarkable  fact  tiiai 
pentences  thus  subordinated  by  the  m-reroot  qu,  have  their  predicates  either  in  th*-  tudic<(- 
five  or  suftj'mctice  according  to  the  rules  on  actual  relative  clauses,  as  :  O  :u!oie>centiam 
tradiictrim  eleganter!  cut  quidein  quum  nnod  licuerit  ohjiciiliur,  tamen  id  ipsuin  lalsniii 
rept-riatur  ;  O  how  une.vcepiionable  must'  be  the  life  of  that  young  man  !  se>i'>fj  M^/M-v.  n 
those  repn»aches?)/Y^?v  fal>e,  which,  even  if  true,  would  contain  no  reproach  Cie.  1  line. 
]•).  :^l.— Here  •  reperidtur'  is  a  relative  mbjiindive  acc«.rdiiig  to  §  (il4.  .ff.  lo.  ^'^ 
if  the  proposition  to  which  r^/xn^?////' belongs,  were  a  rejil  relative  clause,  while  the  rela- 
tive adjective  grammaticallv  belouirs  to  the  clause  introduced  by  quum.  T«)  the  propo- 
sition in  which  'rependtur'  is  tlie  jiredicate,  only  the  relative  root  cm  be  n^erre<l,  .imi 
its  subjunctive  ft)rm  can  be  explained  only  \f  we  separate  in  our  inintis  this  relative  ce- 
ment Iroiu  the  determinative  element. 


\ 


Obs.  2.  A  relative  may  thus  be  '  involved  '  in  any  kind  of  finite  or  non-finite  clauses, 
and,  in  these  clauses,  may  have  any  grammatical  relation  which  a  demonstrative  can 
have. 

.-I.  Of  the  FINITE  clauses  in  which  a  relative  may  be  involved,  the  most  frequent  are 
conditional  clau.<es  (see  Ex.  1-4,  and  the  Ex.  in  Obs.  4,  8;  Obs.  (i,  ]  ;  Obs.  7).  IJut  rela- 
tives may  also  be  involved  in  completing  Tliat-clauses  (Ex.  in  Obs.  6,  2),  in  interrogative 
clauses  (Ex.  .5-7.  and  th(!  Ex.  in  Obs.  4,  1 ;  4,  3;  Obs.  H,  H),  in  temporal  (Ex.  in  Obs.  4.  2  ; 
Obs.  ri.  1 ;  Ors.  7),  c.'iusal  clauses  (Ex.  8).  modal  Ut-dauses  (Ex.  9,  and  the  Ex.  in  Obs. 
f).  3»,  comp.irative  clauses  (Ex.  10.  11.  and  Obs.  8),  concessive  clauses  (Ex.  in  Obs.  4.  2; 
Obs.  7)  and  even  in  n/a/i?vclauses  (Ex.  12-14,  and  Obs.  4,  1  ;  4,  8  ;  Obs.  fj,  1  ;  see  l)eIow>. 
In  all  these  clauses,  the  relative  has  the  same  position,  as  in  the  coordination  of  peri- 
ods «hich  have  a  protasis,  or  begin  with  their  clauses  (p.  .520)  :  Qui  H.  cujussi.  cut  quum, 
guim  ne,  quo  quin  (  =  si  is,  si  (jus.  quu?n  ei  etc.).  A  relative  may  be  involved  in  a  rela- 
tive clause,  if  both  relatives  have  different  grammatical  relations  in  the  clause.  In  ttiis 
instance  the  'involved  '  relative  (i.  e.  that  of  the  two  relatives  whose  relative  root  be- 
longs to  the  governing  clause)  aOcays  precedes  that  relative  which  oriirinally  belongs  to 
the  clause.  This  latter  relative,  in  the  Eni'lish  rendering,  has  always  the  force  of  an  or- 
dinary relative,  while  the  'involved'  relative,  as  far  as  it  belongs  to  the  clause  corre- 
sjjonds  to  a  d*'tnoufitrative  (or  to  a  p(?rsonal  pronoun,  if  its  grammatical  antecedent  is  a 
personal  pronoun),  as  :  AccCdit  superstitio.  qua  qui  est  imbtlfus  quietus  esse  numquam 
]><)test;  To  this  must  be  added  superstition,  which  never  allows  rest  to  him  who  is  af- 
lect«-d  by  it  (literally  :  by  which  who  is  affected  can  never  be  quiet).  Cic.  Fin.  1,  18.60. 
— Similar  is  the  form  of  involution  if  applied  to  inferrvgative  clauses  introduced  by  in- 


^eIUl<^ ;  »>  nicu  now  iiiiie  [itl  is  i  leei.  i.  e.  'Jne  insyjjictency  oj  ivtncn  1  Jeel ').  tic.  Arch. 
1,  L— Sometimes  other  parts  of  the  «rovcrning  clause  are  inserted  between  the  relative 
and  the  interrogative  clause.  See  Ex.  5.  7. 

B.  In  a  sim'lar  manner  the  relative  is  involved  in  the  different  non-finite  clauses,  as  : 
(^n  III  INFINITIVE  clacses.  Here  the  relative  may  be  the  subject,  and  is  then  in  the 
accusative,  as  :  Ei  quos  speiamus  nobis  profutiiros;  Those  o/"  whom  we  hope  that  they 
will  be  of  use  to  us  (liteially  :  Those,  we  hope  that  who  will  benefit  ns).  C  ic.  OflT  1,  15, 
4S,  But  the  relative  may  be  in  the  relation  of  a  transitive,  intransitive,  or  adverbial 
object,  or  in  that  of  an  attribute;  as  :  Helvetioriim  una  pars  ^^'/o//?  Gallos  obtingre  </ir;'(i/wt 
est  ;  The  one  part  of  the  Helvetian  country,  ichich.  av  it  has  been  said,  the  Gauls  occupy. 
Cies.  B.  (J.  1,  1.— Exercitatio  dicendi,  in  qua  me  non  infltior  inediocritcr  esse  versiltum  ; 
The  exercise  in  speaking,  in  which.  I  own.  I  have  been  not  a  little  engaired.  Cic.  Arch. 
1,  1.— Cato  post  mortem  in  ea  loca  discessit  quo  milii  ipsi  cernebat  esse  veniendiim; 
Cato,  alter  his  death,  has  irone  to  those  places,  to  which,  he  saiv,  I  must  go  myself.  Cic. 
«en.  13.  81.— See  Ex.  Ui-lS. 

(fj)  If  a  relative  is  involved  in  participial  clauses,  not  belonging  to  the  ablatives  abso- 
Itite,  the  relative  may  be  in  any  relation  except  that  of  a  subject  (See  Ex.  19-22  ;  and  the 
Ex.  in  Obs.  5.  1).  — In  this  instance  many  English  authors  permit  themselves  a  literal 
'\i'  '''m\  of  the  Latin  involution,  as  :  InPhidijc  mente  insidCbat  species  pulcritudinis 
(.*<.;'f' Ir^/w^/M-  artein  et  maniim  ad  Jovis  similitudinem  diriirCbat ;  In  Phidias's  mind 
^y^e!-  *ti  an  ideal  of  beauty,  lookinq  at  which  he  directed  his  art  and  hand  to  the  expres- 
^,'1  of  Jove's  imaire  (better  :  ivhich  wasftefoi'e  his  eyes  when,  he  directed  .etc.).  Cic.  Or. 
■i,  9.  — Relatives,  if  involved  in  the  construction  of  ablatives  absolute,  almost  alwavs  are 
in  the  relation  of  siibject-ablatlves,  as  :  Sunt  prima  elementa  natfine,  qnibus  auctis\\r\il- 
tis  quasi  carmen  efticitur  ;  The  first  elements  (of  virtue)  are  those  of  nature  (are  created 
by  nature),  and  when  thej^e  are  enhanced,  the  poem,  as  it  were,  of  virtue  is  built  up 
(composed).  Cic.  Fin.  5.  15,  43.— But  sometimes  relatives  thus  involved  are  in  the  re- 
lation of  attributes  to  the  subject  ablative,  or  to  the  objects  of  the  predicate  ablative 
as  :  Quum  L.  Flacci  res  aaxtyir.  cujus  rirtute  reqibus  exterminatis  libertas  in  republic^ 
instil flta  est ;  When  the  case  of  L.  Flaccus  is  discussed,  by  whose  bravery  the  kings  were 
exti-rminated  so  that  lib.Tfy  was  established  in  the  republic.  Cic.  Flacc.  11,  25.  See  Ex. 
2;j.  '24  and  the  Ex.  in  Obs.  4,  2;  6,  1. 

Obs.  3.  Clauses  with  involved  relatives  cannot  be  literally  rendered  into  English.  For 
the  purpose  of  renderingsiich  clauses,  the  Latin  relative  must  be  'devolved',  i.  e.  the 
double  nlation  of  the  Latin  relative  must  be  reduced  to  h  simjile  relation.  There  are 
always  thre(!  propositions  which  are  aflected  l\v  the  i-  volution  of  the  relative  :  1)  The 
ptincipal  st^ntence ;  2»  the  governinq  clav^^e,  to  which  the  Latin  relative  nKtt  refers,  and 
which  is  logiraily  dependent  on  th<'  principal  sentence ;  3)  the  dependent  clause,  in 
which  the  relative  is  involved,  and  which  is  thus  made  grammatically  dependent  on 


536 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


both  the  principal  sentence,  arid  on  its  povorninj?  clause.  The  rcarrant^ement  of 
tht'«e  three  propot^itions  by  'devolvini;'  the  relative,  is  called  ' dtvolution  of  the 
relative'  which  cons'ists  in  the  follow in<?  four  metliod:» :  A)  The  governing  clam« 
is  made'  Gn\M>\.vnc\\.\.\  de)i€ndent  on  the  piittcipal  stntence  by  means  of  a  relaiivo 
or  conjunctional  connective,  the  dependent  clau^e  beinj;  so  attached  to  it  that  a 
demon-^tiative  or  pers^onal  pronoun  is  used  in  place  of  the  involved  relative.  This 
method  if=  called  '  diuect  dkvolution'  (Obs.  A).—B)  The  grammatical  relations  of  the 
iroverniii"- and  dependent  cX^n^cs  ine  reversed,  m  that  what  is  in  Latin  the  dependent 
clan«*e  becomes  the  governini,'  clause  in  English,  and  vice  ver^a  ;  the  relative  reinaminir 
in  the 'same  clause  as  in  Latin,  while  the  connective  properly  belonging  to  the  clause  (if 
there  is  any)  is  transferred  to  the  other  proposition.  This  method,  whieh  is  callta 
'  OKvoi  UTioN  BY  UEVKUSAL ',  IB  mostly  applied  to  non-finite  clauses,  but  sometimes  also 
ti)  the  I'lniie  clauses  (Obs.  5).— 6')  The  governing  and  dependent  clauses  are  contracted 
into  one  proposition,  which  is  connected  like  an  ordinary  relative  clause  with  the  princi- 
pal sentence.  This  method  is  ciiUed  'devolution  by  contkaction  '  (Obs.  0).—^)  Both 
the  "overnin"-  and  the  dependent  clauses  are  coordinated  witli  the  principal  sentence  by 
u-^in'^'-  a  coordinating  conjunction  with  a  demonstrative  or  personal  pronoun,  in  place  of 
the  iTivolved  relative.    This  is  called  '  devolution  by  coOudination  '  (Obs.  7). 

There  are  numerous  instances  in  which,  besides  these  methods  of  devolution,  minor 
change-*  must  be  applied  to  certain  members  of  the  clauses,  or  in  which  connecting 
links'inust  be  placed  between  the  principal  sentence  and  tiie  clauses.  Sometimes,  how- 
ever none  of  these  diflerent  metliods  will  do  full  justice  to  the  elegance  and  conemmty 
of  the  Latin  construction,  and  the  finer  shades  which  the  Latin  form  imparts  to  the 
thought  will  be  lost  in  the  Knglish  rendering.  Peculiar  is  the  rare  instanee  that  a  rela- 
tive T»  involved  in  more  than  one  dependent  clause,  in  wliidi  instance  several  of  the 
above-mentioned  methods  must  be  combined,  as:  Doctrlna,  f/uam  ego  n  mhd  dicatnad- 
jiivdre  mentiar ;  A  doctrine  tho  usefulness  of  which  in  several  respects.  I  do  not  dispute 
(literally  :  that  which  if  J  would  say  was  not  useiu  1, 1  would  lie).  Cic.  Or.  1,  32.— Lx.  8.  2o. 

Obs  4    Diuect  devolution.— This  form  mav  be  applied  in  three  dlfl'ereTit  ways  : 

1)  By  u«in"  a  relative  adjective  or  adverb,  wiiich  may  be  nnide  a  member  of  the  gov- 
emint/ dame,  and  at  the  same  time  refer  to  some  member  of  the  principal  sentence  as  its 
a-itecedent,  as  :  Ad  fugam  hortJltur  turpitndo  conjungeiidi  cum  tyranno,  5?/?  qui de in 
\ncvvinm  v^X,  Phatarimn^  an  Pisi.-tratum  .nt  imifatnrus :  To  flight  the  turpitude  urges 
rme)  of  unitin'»  with  a  tyrant,  of  irhovi  it  is  un<-ertain  whether  he  /nil  ivutate  rhalanj'  or 
Pisi^trati/s  cTc.  Att.  7,  20.—  Infiina  est  conditio  servOrum,  qt'if,i/.'>  non  male  pnecipiiint 
oui  ita  iubent  nti  ut  mercenariis  (  =  quibns  qui  ita  jubent  iiti  ut  etc.,  non  male  pneciju- 
nnt)  •  Tlie  lowest  rank  is  that  of  the  slaves,  in  regard  to  whom  some  lay  down  the  good 
rule  to  treat  them  like  paid  servants  (or  more  literally  :  in  refjard  to  vhoin  Xhom  lay 
down  a  good  rule  who  order  '  to  use  them '  like  paid  servants).  Cic.  Off.  1, 13,  41. 

2^  By  substituting  for  the  predicate  of  the  governing  clause  a  verb  of  kindred  signifi- 
cation  hnx  \\\x\\  a  diflerent  (for  inst.  'caumtive')  relation  to  the  antecedent,  so  H^it  it 
may  be  attached  to  it  bv  means  of  a  relative,  without  changinu'  the  sense,  as  :  ^l  ill 
umnuam  patrem  facere  vidit  quod  quum  imitiltus  esset  non  patn.<  siindi.^  vidertiur ;  lie 
never  saw' his  father  do  anything  which,  when  imitated  by  him,  would  not  make  himap- 
irnir  the  like  of  his  father  (i.  e.  in  tnipitnde).  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3,  «i8.--An  adolescent .4uni 
discere  ea  mavis  qmr  quum  plane  perdidieerit  nihil  sciatf  Or  would  you  rath.;r  ha    / 
boy  learn  what  Imves  him  igmn-ant  even  when  he  has  thoroutrhly  mastered  it  ?Lic.  t-iu 
2«  7H     Thus  if  the  relative  is  involved  in  ablatives  absolute  :  Stajenus  ea  lociltus  o  • 
pariete  interposito,  qnibus  patefacti^  in  judiciumque  proiatis  ille  reicapitah^  da».nu, 
est  •  Stajenus,  within  his  own  premises,  used  that  langua-e  which,  after  tt  Jfasbetrayed, 
and  carried  to  the  courts,  caused  hui  condemnation  for  a  capittd  crime.  Cic.  J  op.  -W,  «o. 

3)  By  nsino  a  conjunction,  in  place  of  the  relative,  to  subordinate  the  governing  clause 
to  the  princTpal  sentence,  as  :  C^iam  dubium  ist,  an  merito  accusgtur  gut  an  oiunino 
accui^aun-incerfumest,-  II. )W  doubtful  is  it  whether  a  person  is  justly  accused  '/ »^/* 
vncertain  whether  he  is  accused  at  all  !  Plin.  Ep.  7,  10.-(Jratulor  tib»  quod  tanium  vales 
apud  Dolabellam  quantum  si  ego  apud  sormis  filium  valCreni,7.<//i  sain  esse  pos.sr)n us ,  1 
coiK'ratulate  you  because  your  influence  with  Dolabella  is  so  great  th(d.  if  I  had  tlie  sune 
influence  over  my  nephew  (Antony),  we  might  be  all  safe  by  thi^  time..  Cic.  Fam.  ••,  1  *' •»• 
Sometimes  a  conjunction  may  be  attached  to  an  intermediate  participle,  or  clause, 
thrown  between  the  principal  sentence  and  the  clause  as  :  Qmim  re  mtueor  >I;';';'  J^ 
o^/^m  si  ad  Cannab  couMilem  halmissCmus,  melior  nostra  fort  una  J  uis.et .  >Y'^ ''!,'' ^'^ 
Jpon  you.  O  Marcellus,  knowing  d^nng  convinced,  satisfied)  that  our  jate  would  hare  beta 
better,  had  you  been  our  consul  at  Canute  !  Li  v.  2.),  b. 

Ons   5.  Devolution  by  keveissal.  This  form  may  be  applied  :  v-. 

1)  'W^temiMwal  clauses  (both  liniie  and  participial)  in  whuh  the  same  tempo» a    con- 
junction is  adapted  to  either  of  the  two  clauses,  as  :  Lnas  litteras  video  mihi  a  ic  mm 


CONSTllUCTION   OF  THE   RELATrV^E   CLAUSE. 


5S7 


esse  redd  it  as,  quas  L.  Quinctius  quum  ferket,  ad  bvstvm  Basili  vvlneratuset  sp^Hat'is 
est ;  I  see  tliat  one  leitt  r  iias  not  been  returned  to  me  by  voii,  (ihe  one)  which  Lucius 
Quinctius  cakimed  when  he  was  wounded  and  rot,btd  at  lia^ilus's  /o/^/a  Cic.  An.  7,  9,  1. 
— tiordius  plaiistrum.  quo  vemknti  legnum  deldtumfuerat.  in  templo  Jovis  po.«-uit  ;'Gt)r- 
dius  placed  in  tlie  lempk-.  of  Jupiier  tiie  wjiiron  in  which  he  kode  when  the  croxvn  wa>t 
conferred  on  him.  Ju^l.  11,  7(  =  quo  quum  veheret,  regnum  ei  ddanmi  iuerat)  — Heie 
beloiig>  the  passage  Cic.  Or.  2,  9.  quoted  Obs.  2,  B.  o.  In  the  pas-age  Cic.  V  lace.  11.  25 
quoted  at  the  same  place,  a  devuluiion  byrevers«l  is  \\^ei\,  but  will)  a  modal  coiPi.nciion] 
the  relation  of  the  twoelauses  l)eing  not  iu'erchaiiireab!.'.  Sometimes  the  reversal  of 
tlie  two  claus.s  may  be  m;.de  by  means  ol  relatives,  as  :  Naturjl  fit  ut  liberi  a  par.  ntibus 
ainentur  ;  a  quo  initio  rnoFECTAM  cofnmunem  hnmdni  (,ene?-is  societdftrn  petseqnijnnr  • 
That  children  are  love.l  by  their  parents  is  established  bv  nature  ;  fr.)m  which  l.>ve  that 
soci.'tv  .if  the  human  race  has  arisen  w  hich  we  perpi-tua'te.  Cic.  Fin.  3.  fri. 

2)  (ienerally  this  meth.)d  is  applied  to  infinil  ive,  and  sometimes  to  interrogative  clauseg, 
in  which  instance  the  governing  clause  is  added  as  a  parenthetical  clause,  enherasyndeii- 
cally.  or  by  means  .)f  the  conjunction  *as\-  Socratis  n.m  ea  Irons  erat  qua?  Crass'i  illlns 
veteris,  quem  semel  ait  is  omni  vita  risisse  Lndlins ;  Socratess  face  was  not  that  of 
old  Crassus,  wii.),  as  Lucilius  says,  laughed  only  once  in  his  whole  life  Cic  Tusc 
3,  15.  31.  See  the  passages  in  Obs.  2,  B.  a. 

3)  S.)metinies  tliis  form  of  devolution  may  be  applied  with  a  change  of  the  Liitin  con- 
junction, in  certain  instanc.-s  when  an  involuti.m  is  used  to  hide,  as  it  wee.  the  main 
l»oint  of  a  sentence  under  the  form  of  a  dependent  clause,  and  to  solten  thereby  with 
urbanity  the  directn.ss  .)f  a  statement,  as  :  Atiieus  'Noli,  oro  te".  iiiquif  Siillse  'adver- 
su-^  e.)i*m«' ducerecuM  quibus  ne  ontka  te  auma  feki:em  Italium  renqvi' •  Au\c\\« 
sai.l  to  Sulla  '  Pray,  do  nor  lead  me  against  tho.se  whom  I  would  have  joined  in  fight- 
ing YOU,  if  1  had  not  preferred  to  leave  Baty.  Nep.  Att.  4*. 

Ocs.  6.  Devolution  by  contraction.— Tiiis  lorm  is  us.'d  : 

1)  By  changiuL'  the  predicate  ol  th.>  dependent  clause  into  a  corresponding  verbal 
NOUN  (in  iiig  or  otherwise),  which  is  made  an  ol>ject  (geiieraliv  a  pr.-posiii.»nal  object)  or 
other  member  of  the  coniracied  prop.)sition,  the  relative  being  used  as  the  connective 
of  the  whole  propositi. »11.  Frequently,  with  this  method  a  change  of  the  predicate  ac- 
conhntr  to  Obs.  4  must  be  connected,  as  :  Recordor  tna  consi.ia,  quibvs  si  parvissem 


guas  qui  tenent 
nu 


asqui  tenent  eruditi  ai)pe!ianinr;  Epi.  unisisnot  p.dished  enough  in  those  accompiish- 
•nts  the  holders  (post-essors)  .»1  which  are  called  '  sch.  lars ',  Cic.  Fin.  1,  7.-Expulso 


th.)se  time^ 
*  This  is  one  t)f  the  instance 


in  which  we  cann.it  appmach  the  finer  shades  <.f  the 

"s 


Latin  s.-ntence.   The  pa.ssage.  as  rend.'ied  above,  contains  th.-  real  meaning  of  Atticus's 
^ords,  but  this  meaniii<:  is  far  in.)re  .lirectly  expressed  in  the  Engii^h  version  than  in 
fjhc  Latin  text.     If,  however,  the  passa-e  is  r.-ndered  otherwise,  the  real  p«.int  will  be 
•*•/,,''  "  ''.'^"'^  "'  "'^'  I^'"'"  t^-'^f-  '^  intimated  by  the  lo<,ical  connection  of  the  openin'rwords 
"  ../m  qui/jHs  with  the  g.iverning  clause  ' Baliatn  lellqvi  \     As  rendered  by  our  "i-amina- 
rians  and  oditors.  the  sense  of  the  Latin  woids  wii  be  all  but   nnintellicrible  "  Br5der 
renders  :  For  the  soke  of  whom  I  left  Ifa/i/,  le.<if  J  might  be  compelled  to  bear  arms  against 
you.     Kuhn.'rand  Meirii  g  :    With  wheun  I  did  not  'wl-h  to  bear  arms  against  yov.  and 
therefen-e  left  Italy  (whiili  form  is  as  obj('(ti.>nab]e  in  re<2:ard  to  (ierman  (-tvle.  as  it  is  in 
the  EiiL'lish  veisi.mi.     Madvio  :   With  whom  1  did  not  wish  to  bear  ar-ms  against  yov  so 
that  /left  Italy  for  that  very  reason.   In  all  th.'sc  renderinirs  rh.-  ifnwillinLMiess.)!  beaiiii"' 
arms  again-t  Suila  i-  made  the  main  point  of  tlie  sent,  nee,  w  hile  the  m:iin  point  is  '  that 
he,  if  he  had  remained  in  Italy,  would  hare  joiindthon  in  the  fiirlit  against  Suila.  ThaCher 
in  his  '  improvi-m.-nl' .»n  Madvjg's  rendeiiiig. makes  the  wtoiil'  point  more  prominent 
still  by  translating  :  'Against  thos.-  wUh  whom  I  was  so  unwilling  to  bear  arms  against 
you  that  I  lelt  Italy  \    As  if  rht  unwillingness  of  Atticus  to  fiirhr  airainsr  Sulla  could  be 
a  reas.m  not  to  tiL'ht  for  him  !— It  i»  prop'.r  toadd  here  the  r.inark  that  the  abovt-qu.ited 
passaize  is  objectionable  111  tliejioint  of  i  aim  st.\le.  since  the  wortJs  'cum  qnibus'  may 
be  grammatically  referred  \o  IxAh,  the  dependent  vVaum^  '  )ie  contra  te  a7^nafe7rem\  and 
to  the  i,'ov.'rniiiir  clause  lla/ium  renqui  (cumqiiibus  Italiain  rellqiii,  ne  contra  te  arma 
ferrem).  This  glaring  ambiguity  cannot  be  excused  with  the  elegauceof  theconstructiou. 


538 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  RELATI\'E  CLAUSE. 


539 


,» ..w  .....  ....-^,.:    - ;-       .  Pouic-or  omnibus,  oini.i  nu-  (k"fen^iuIu•  u>ilrn,..  t'j>^('  7"«  "«"«^ 


Ob?.  7.  Devolution-  «y coOiu^ination.     i-^ hh      k  seMt"nct'.    Soiuetim.s  a  con- 

n,.v  l.i'  rom.ect.-a  by  ^''^''^'n^tion  u  u^  pn.^'^^^^^^^^^^^ 

,.e,in.lin.n..n>e,n..t.la.^^  ,n  actOr.-  can.., 


/A^  ^««/«y  in  ^treuiili.  LiV.'*\^-;~\  -     .  .'e^^^  tl.in-s  w.iic.i  an  okatc:  .mi>t  have 

BY  NATURK,  AND  THE  UtFhCT  ,     ....  -  comnarit^OU ' 


OB,.  8.  T.:: ,-,.,„,iv,.  i,  in..>v....  i" -•"r-i;!'  ;;^j^  !"■ -,  j^»  i;:;;;;^::;;!;"^;;!.. 


If  <2</outf.  has  tlicturce 
7).  {'haiiuiiiir  t*lthtr 


one,  (a)  bv  tho  coin  k  rat  ^  ^^^>  ^  ;  /  ^  „  ul  '  y  ■«.ntuact...n  (Obs.  7..  cha.,^...-  el.ln-r 
o^a^^^bJect-nolnlnatlVL^the  UrNoiut    ...._  inm^^^ 

the  compa.ativf  into  a  '^«MHMlap-e,  "'  "  ^l^'!'^^,    VJ    ue  fo//^y>.,/7//ir6  clau.^e  i.  dcvolvc-d 

lent  e.vpressi»ns.  If  v/zoimplK^'^  -^  ^"^V^'^J^^^-jVu  'livV,  bv  kkvki:^a..  (Obs.  .">.,  as  :  Avii!* 
in  ,he^U.  way.  while  the  j;oy..-n...,L^c^^^^^^^^^^^  „  ,^,^,,,,  ,,/,,,,  ,«  ,,^ 

tui.>«,  quo  cire  nemint-ni  V-'  '^''^''■^•'%^  ./Z/  J  ,  u-  in  niv  «pinion,  wa..  the  bravest  c.ti- 
opinwn.  had  no  superior  in  the  l'^''' ^^^'^'  '^  \^i  '  ,  f,.i  \iei,et  esse  a/./ir/vi'^s- ;  The 
zen).    Cic.  Plane.  •jl.-Homuui.n  "'    '\*;\;a   ie  ^/n        "s  ^  OtV.  l,4.i. 

interest  of  fellow-men,  winch  should  be  the  f»;^^/-'.  '  'V  .y.u  j,,  ff,^  „to..(  pernicious 
-qua  nulla  p^ndcie.  /«^V^r  u,.n....,..i  vi ue  p''  ?>t  'l^^'J  ,;,;/  /^^'e  /.la.ive,  as  abl.-.tive 
mU  that  conl.i  beiull  ;»'^\\'f^' /'^ "\='  ;, ,^,  ..V^^*  -.^and  Tx.-clalX  ehietly  i..  th.  fon....la 
or  comparison,  is  i..v..  ved  bo  h  "' ''•^  '";[,*•  ^';,  li  t  li  u.  a-  :  DeiiniMi,  quo  „e  pluris 
Er^nf^^^ou  ':4e;;^  K'r:^;^;;;n^";:-"V^^;r!>uy -at  UUeraHy  :  -at  n.ore  tha.. 

-;.n:^-ji:x.r:Jbi?;^;;^-^i^;;5:ci^;^^^ 

qmiles  ,i  om.iea  semper  lessen.',  ''^V'»'!"/* "V '^*-;     1'^'  mo    i ,,  ."nantlsii  cep.sset.  in- 
?1>.  Plane.  11,  iS.-:!  lyi^l''^' '^»^'•VM'  .«     ^  PuN.s  e<?^  vinciti».  non.eu 

t.i.rnis  accepra  clades  foivt.  Liv.  10    •|-|;-'»-  |  "  „".  'j  L_.    .p,/,„  .,^,„..1  sum  ea  si.n.pta 
luTpnli  Ho.nilni  deh-atnr  necesse  est.  V,?;iAl  V/;/;»;///;/*o^/'///<  mlutarihv  uUr^i.luriwn 

K^;;;:r;;;n;;^t,s:;v^^^^^ 

tainlv.  bad  ihose  q»:'!»''^^-     J  7\'l\V.;'*'\'V  V.mi  di.  ii.<Mhe  li  mixn  hM> 

would  hare  arisen  '.-«  panic.-»"  l.at  '•  ^•-  '  '*'^:'i 'jS^J,  ere.''-  or  '  ..f  who^e  d./^o' 
been  vanqnisned.-'^  om  whose  rt'^ory  chv*^^^<\i^J^oJX^^^^^  ^   ^^^ 

the  «^./.i/J/^/^io,.  etc  will  be  a  ^^^^'^^ZriTX^^^i^^t  'seen  -'M,a;,  be  bred  to 
their  country.-'»  xyhom.  I  »^..u.w  yo  ho  1  ,'^  J^. /^r'^.i  ^ol  p  ram.M^it  importance, 
moral  principles.-y  for  which  P'  P»f;;' "^.  ^  J^oi  who  incnlca  es  them  '.-'^o  object.- 
^-iMhechai-actcrof  his  ^^'-^^l'^'^^'' '''   '^^,  .^^^^^^^^^^  by  the  a-ency  of  fire. 

>i  subject :  Your  fellow-seetarians.-»''  to  explain  e\eryiiiin„  oy  i         ^      j 


niam  quid  diceret^  infelligi  nohiit'.  omiflann/,s^.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  14.  .3-").— 9.  Sulla  cum 
mat;no  equititu  in  castra  venit.  (/uo.t  vti*  ex  Latio  coseret  Ronue  relidus  erat.  Sail. 
JiijLif.  95.— 10.  Multi  ingcniuin,  7?//)o  n<qi.e  ;«<?/i?/,s-  ucqiie  a //ipliua  aliud  in  natura  nior- 
tali.im  est,  incnltu"  atone  gocordiiV  torpescere*'  sinimt.  lb.  2. — 11.  I'hidiie  eiraulft- 
cris»,  qyibuti^^  nihil  in  illo  jrenerc  perfecting  vidCm.is.  cojritare  tanien  po^gunlus  pul- 
crinra.  Cic.  Or.  2.  8. — 12.  Magna  est  vis  conscientiu'  quam^^  qui  .u'gli;:eiit,  quum  me 
vioiare'"''  volent'3,  se  ipsi  ii.diciliiiint''».  Ih.  Cat.  3.  12,  27.— 1.3.  Sunt  cei'ta  vitia  qncE'^^ 
nemo'*'  est  quin  eflugere  ciipiat.  II).  Or.  3,  11.  41. — 14,  illiid  ipsnni  qn:er«'i'  cvjus  qui^^ 
git  comjKJs'",  sit  eloqiiens.  lb.  Or.  v9.  101.— 1.').  Ponijieji.s  uiins  inventus  est  qutnV^* 
gocii  .11  nrbls  suas  cum  exeiT  tii  renisse  gaudeant''".  lb.  Leg.  Man.  23. — 16.  Piaeieiire 
iion  pos?um  Ilainiicaren.  el  Hannibalem.  qvoii  et  aniini  niagnit.idine.  et  callidiiate^' 
om.iln  in  AfriCiT  nato>  ]/ras/i/is.<e  con>iat.  Nep.  21.  3. — 17.  Ea  scripsi  ud  te,  quce  et 
fraluti  tuje  co/iducere  arbitiarer,  e.  non  atiena''^  tttt-e  dueerem  a  dignitjl'e.  Cic.  Fam.  4, 
7.— IS.  Attribu.to  hoc  Gra'cis  liiteris.  9W(/;v^w,  constat  (JnlOnem  j^ers/udio'^urn'^*  fuisi^e 
in  seneciflte.  Ih.  >en.  1,  3. — 19.  Dedit  MurC-na;  facu  tatem'-^  ie>piiblica  libeialitStis, 
qua  u.iu^-'^  niultas  sibi  tribus  adju.ixit-^.  lb.  Mur.  42.— 20.  Quid  adhortSri  leferret^'* 
eas  legiones  cum  quihus'^"  luiiieiiiem  hunc  ipsu.n  hostem  feculufi.  conlessiOiiem  ceden- 
tis  pru  victorijl  liabui  y  Liv.  21.  40.— 21.  Nullas  consequ^jntur  voluplStes  quaivrn^^  po- 
tie.idi  sj)e  inllainimlti^»  mi.ltos  labOres  n.agno>^que  susceperant''^.  Cic.  Fin,  1,  IS. —  22. 
Oculi,  ta.nquanihpeculatrjres^^'  al.issimum  locum  o\)\\\\c\iX\  ex qvo plai-iina coriJ^ijicitnteti^* 
fungantur  M.o  munere.  C  ic.  N.  D.  2,  56.-23.  Pnefecli  dixere,  Darii  legnoss  ii»sOrum  uiti^* 
doininatiOneiii^' ,  ^'/Of.r.v/i/^c/o^''  ip>os  poi estate  expnlsos^»  civibus  siiis  pa'uas datflios*". 
Is'cp.  Milt.  3.-24.  ^apieiitia  est  una^^  qua prierejyfrlce^'^  in  iranqtiillitate'*^  vivi"'*  potest. 
Cic.  Fin.  1,  13.— 25.  Cautum  erat  quo  uejdus*^  auri  et  argenti  domi  haberemus.  Liv.  34,  6. 

Item.  14.  If  each  of  two  propositions,  the  one  of  which  is  dependent 
on  the  other,  contains  tlie  s.'une  determinative  referring  to  the  same  ante- 
cedent in  tlieir  j)rincipal  sentence,  the  Latin  language  reguhuly  connects 
tlie  depcndeui,  and  not  the  governing  clause  relativelN'  with  the  principal 
sentence,  while  in  English  the  reverse  is  the  case.  This  is  called  CKoss- 
INVOLUTION  of  the  relative. 

Obs.  1.  Dependent  clauses  connected  by  cross-involution  of  the  relative,  fake  the 
same  grammatical  form  as  tho>e  connected  by  ordinary  involution  accordinL'  to  ^.  13. 
While  thus  the  determinative  ol  the  dependent  clause  fakes  the  form  of  a  relative,  that 
of  t.ie  governing  clause  lias  the  form  of  a  deinonsirative  or  of  a  pronoun,  m  liich  is  g<n- 
eially  uitdtrfilood  .f  it  is  a  suiyect-nominalive,  or  if  it  is  in  tlie  same  case Witli  the  rela- 
tive. Such  constructions  must  be  rendered  by  •  uevei^sal'.  making  the  gortrvning  clause 
relatively  drpeiident  on  .he  principal  enteiice.  and  changing  th«' Latin  demon^tl•ative 
or  pronoun  (expressed  or  understo.  dt  Jn.o  the  col•re^polldilll.'  relative,  while  in  the  de- 
pendent clause  the  Latin  relative  is  clumped  into  an  Eni:li^h  denionstiative  or  pc^^onal 
pronoun,  as  :  Aiitonius  habtiil  compiehensam  animo  qiiamdani  form.-im  eloquent ia>.  cui 
ijeoMAM  NIHIL  OKKUAT.  COS  quibusailquid  deerat  in  eani  formam  non  poterat  inciuderc  ; 
Anionius  had  condensed  in  hi>  miiida  ct-rtain  type  of  eloquence,  iu  nhich  he  could  not  in- 
clude tho^e  who  were  defective  in  anythiiiL',  bk^^alsk  this  typk  was  without  defect 
(literally:  Nothingwas  wanting  to  «7).'cic.  Or.  5.  19.  Here  the  same  determinative  occurs 
in  both  propositions  (T^a  nihil  deerat'.  and  *in  eavi  formam  non  poterat  includere'). 
Either  ui  the  two  propo?^itions  might  have  been  relatively  connected  with  the  antece- 
dent/wv/i  am  in  the  principal  sentence.    The  L.itin  connects  the  dependent  claui<e  rela- 

*  Ills  meaning. — "■'because  he  did  not  want. — 3  wliom  we  will  pass  over. — *  lor  the  en- 
listing of  which. — s  which  is  the  l)est  and  most  important  gift  that  nature  has  bestowed 
ou  etc.— «  neglect.—*  sloth.—»  to  become  toj-pid.  to  rest.—"  statue.—'"  which  are  the 
most  perfect  works  of  art  thai  we  can  see.— '^  andthosethat  slight  its  power. — is  inpire. — 
|3  mean. — '<  to  betray. — '^  (itvoluiion  by  conliaction. — i**  nemoqvin.  every  one. — i^  I  am 
in  search  of  that  'something'  wliich.  -i**  if. — ^"^  cennpettem  ea^e  altcxijus  rei.  to  have  some- 
tliiiiir ;  or  re.ider  by  •  the  possessio.i  of  which  makes  an  oi-ator  eloquent '. — "*'  quern. .  .re- 
7/^^•^^,  who^e  visit.— ^»  remember  with  joy. — ^*  shi-ewdness. — '■^^  not  prejudicial  to. — "*  a 
Very  zealous  ii\\u]cut.—'^^  /aculfaft  liberalitafi>!,  the  means  of  being  liberal. — "^  by  the  use  of 
which.- 27  to  attach. — -''  o(  what  use  would  it  be. — -'•  with  whom  I  pursued  this  very 
eneii.y  whose  tliijht  is  tantamount  to  a  confession  of  our  vicioiy. — ^o  (•,,!.  (jig  p.-ike  of 
which. — 31  iidlained  by  the  hope  of  piocuriiiir  them. — ^^  to  sulunit  to. — ^3  j^pi^.j;. — 34  —  ^^ 
siio  inuiure  lunuantiir,  phiriina  tx  to  loco  con>pi(  iendo  :  =  from  which  they  cun  p-rceive 
tin-  greatest  amount  (i.  e.  more  than  if  plactd  lower),  and  thus  pei  lorm  their  lunctions 
properly. — 3*  rule. — 3*  to  depend  on. — 3'  reign. — "*  afuM-  the  extinction.— 3»  would  be 
driven  from  power  and  etc. — *^  parias  alicui  date,  to  be  pu.iished  by  somebody. — <^  It 
JBwif'dom  alone. — *'^  in  the  school  of  etc. — *3  jn  peace  with  one's  self. — **  man  c;in  live. 
— **  The  maximum  amount  of  etc,  was  fixed  (than  which  wc  should  not  have  more). 


y 


t 


540 


RELATIVE   CL.\USES. 


tivclv  makin^r  the  governinj?  clause  demon-s^tradve,  whWe  the  En-lish  laniruaire  n1n^'t 
alwdjs  «ive  tho  relative  form  to  tht-  rjorernifu/  ciau.i-  »iti  earn  lurinani  Hc.).-Kx  qno 
crein^v  illiul  fst  Cai0ni8,  a  quo  q>nrm  qiuertritur  qiiul  n.axnnr  in  re  faini  lan  exiM-(  Iri-t, 
T^Fsi'  NU IT  •  hene  pascere  \  Hele  b.-lm.-.  that  .ayii.-  of  Cato'.,  who,  uheu  a^ked  ihicr- 
allv  '  when  it  was  askrd  of  /dm')  what  was  the  first  requisite  in  a  hoiiseho  d,  answeued 
">i  .rood  hoard  '  Cic  OtV  -J  25.  Here  the  determinative  of  the  uoverniiu;  clause  Uhe  pro- 
noun i"  i^  left  out  as  sul)ject-n.muiuuive.  while  in  En-iish  it  takes  the  relative  lorm  ur/>o) 
If  the  period  had  I.een  armn^ed  without  involution,  it  would  have  been  -fiwt,  quum  ab 
et»etc/  bee  Ex.  1-5. 

Ob^  2  The  fame  form  of  cro?s-involution  is  applied  to  ;)ff/7ia;>ta^  clause?,  which  arc 
'devolved'  in  Ei.irlish  in  the  same  manner  as  finite  clau.<es,  as  :  Salutalio  illlus  libri 
om  eimc>>.'af,lf>>.^,  quasi  jacentem  r-rd^an^'  The  dedication  of  that  book  (,yiv/n<h 
A  tie  IS  ro  sed  me  froin  despondet.cy  when  he  addressed  me  BV  it  (when  addres.in-  It  to 
me\  Cic  Brut  3  14  Here  the  demonstrative  of  the  -oveiinii-  clause,  beini:  lu  the 
same  cas'e  with  the  relative,  is  omitted  ^quasi  jaceulem  eo  excitavit),  wlnle  m  English  u 
takes  the  relative  form. 

Ob«  3    Sometimes  the  denwnstrntives  of  the  governing  clan.«o  are  left  out  in  Latin 
even  if  thoy  are  in  oblique  cases  ditlerent  from  the  case  of  the  relative  i!i  tlie  « lependent 
clause  e<'  when  thevare  subiect-accusatives  or  transitive  objects  and  even  il  they  arc 
prJpcSitronal  ol^idverbial  ,.bject.  aCa-sar  dixit)  ho«  esse  ^ 

Kcnenumero  connresd  Helvetii  non  solum  in  suis.  ned  etiam  iii  illorum  hnibiis  ple- 
l^a^c^^a^rirint  (instead  of  'eo.  .upemru.r)  ;  Ca-.ar  said  that  these  were  the  same 
aitnumn^)  whom  the  Helvetians  had  -renerally  defeated  when  they  had  met  inih  tht^n 
both  on  Helvetian  and  German  soil.  C;e-.  B.  G.  1  40.-(C:e^ar  dixit  »';/^- /^'  ^'  "^j;  J' 
populi  Komaui  acci.iisse),  qni  n  alicOjus  injurKe  sihi  C""^^-'"^^»';^';'^  l^y'V/"'^,':,*^,;'  : 
cile  cavCre  (  =  non  fiii>se  ti  ditficile) ;  ...of  the  Koman  people,  to  which  U  would  not 
have  been  difficult  to  guard  against  it,  t/ i^  (they)  had  b.en  '^'''Y'^'Z^^l^JylUS:, 
Ctes.  B.  G.  1,  14.-Quiiii  eranl  ordines,  quo  qui  intraverant  se  ipsi  acutiss  uii>  ^all  s 
imliiehant  (i.  e.  nbi  se  induel)ant  ) ;  There  were  live  row  s,  where  those  w  l.o  entered  iheni 
(literallv  'thither'\  spitted  themselves  on  the  sharply  pointed  stakes.  Cie>.  b.  It.  .,  .-l. 
-Sentences  in  which,  as  in  the  last  two,  the  demonstrative  supplied  is  n..t  a  ;'C-ces>ary 
part  of  the  clause,  may  be  considered  as  ordinanj  involutions  '^^'^-'''f»";-' '*\^f- J/?;.  ,f  '  ' 
indeed,  cross-involution  is  nothin?  but  a  species  ol  ordinary  i''Y';V'''\'\V./.  wl  .  t  el  i  .<e 
method  of  direct  devolution  is  applied  by  attaching  the  relative  oMhe  ^1^^^ "^^  ^*; 

to  the  .'overnin.'  clause,  and  which,  even  in  Latin,  may  be  replaced  by  a  constiiittioi     i 
whichihe  i4 litlv-e  is  /o/  inv<,lved  (Ous.  5).    See    Ex.  (i.  T.-Scmetimes    two   relainc 
claises   one  of  Which  is  dep.'nd.  nt  on  the  other,  which  is  a-ain  dependent  on  a  govern- 

ng  clause  ai-;  thu.  involvi-d  with  omission  of  the  antecedents  \^'^^'':^^^, 
ri.-Tvides  locutlnnem  emendatam  et  Latlnam.  cujus  penes  r/uo.v  la  us  a  Ihiic  '      ;  "   '   ^ 
rationi<  aut  scientiu'   sed  quasi  home  consuetudinis  :  \ou  see  that  the  first  re  uis  te,  lor 
an  Sor   is  a  iCl  i.atin  'style,  which  with  tho^  who  had  the  «-^'P^'i^V;;'-;    '  ^.V^Iut'o 
the  reputation  of  a  go(Hl  style)  was  not  a  consequence  ol  a  se  entitle  method,  hut  o 
p  ope    practice.  Cic.  Brut.  74,  2;>s.      This  oi.siruct.on  must    be  thus  ^eso IvkI     ^^^^^^^^ 
aimd  eou>^nes  quos  eju.s  laus  fuit,  m.n  fuit  ratio.ns  etc      V'^^^'^'t/^   ^^.i X.,      "i   J/  .o^-^ 
governini  clause  '  nhn  fuit  ra/ioni.\  where  it  ).  underMood  a8    ''^j  ^    >JJ'^-  ;  i   (    hu  on 
i«  omitted,  as  being  suincienilv  implied  in  i>rnc.<  quo^ ;  Ujus' \^  turned  by  involution 
into  the  connecting  relative  of  the  whole  of  the  three  clause».  ,.,    •    i 

Ob..  4.  Sometimes  the  dependent  clauee  has,  besides  !^'«/.^''t^''"|'''^;;;;%);\V^'\Ji-t\"t 
in  common  with  the  governing  clause,  an.)ther  deteiminative  relernng  to  «  /ii«^r^/'} 
ant-cXnt  in  the  principal  sentence.  In  tliis  instance  it  would  be  grammatically  coruct 
?o  u^e  eirher  ot  the       o  detern,^  of  the  dependent  elaiise  as  the  connec.ing  reh  - 

tWt^    Bi     the  I  alii    prefer,  that  relative  c.mnection  which  will  not  require  the  u.e.oj 

"^^ih^^eZ^^si^tivha  addVion  to^  it  as  :  M.  ^^'i^r^^^^.^^S^'^^^^Z 
QUirrn  pnelectus  essel  in  Cilieia.  est   interfectus  ;  M.  Gratidius,  the  '^    ."^^  "'  f^' .f "  .^ 
Xi.  s   J/o  wjis  killed  when  he  was  /aw  (Antoniiis's)  preleet  in  Cibcia.  Cic.  Brut.  4o,  l(.b. 
Un^u^d V- ,^  q^m  ;..  pra^fectus  e.set  ^;vhicil  c.,nst ruction  w.Hddn-qm^^ 
of  adem.mstrative.  while,  if  construed  as  above,  the  delermmalnet,   of   l)oih  clau.c, 
being  the  subjects,  are  omitted.]  ♦   i  v^ 

Obs   5.  Sometimes,  but  more  rarelv,  clauses  which  mi -ht  have  been   «^71"*;^^«^     J 
cross-it^volution,  are  construed  as  in  English,  so  that  the  <}^l^';^-'':^''V\C"novi^ 
dependent  clause   while  the  relative  beh.ngs  to  the  qorennnq  chmt^e,  n>  .  Hoc  ne  1  .  qu 
Sr/ci      i us  1  xiVu   qua.n,  q'um.  (piia  jure  fui  ei  inimlcus  doleo  a  te  "ni"»'"^^,^,'  J     cTc 
mm". Vtu.u  (instead  of  cul  quia  fui  inimlcus,  doleo  (.«;»)  a  te...esse  .uperatum).  tic. 

Phil   "Z  7 

i.  Tcctaigiturambulatiuncula'  addenda  est,  qnwm  i//»  tantam  faciamu^  n"!'ntamu» 

^"rj^ta^afnbulatiuncuhi,  a  little  hall  for  promenading. -^  which,  if  we  make  it  etc. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  KELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


541 


UUUIII     1.    lid  tJl*  I**  1*1        IJIV    I     V(l|/lll>r  t  t  I  llA  1  .  .  V    ■   -^.        ,^IV>.      A     .f.AIV'.        .. 1.        i.-        IIIV.UIII,     ^uti      yM((//i.  111. 

ret  majoies  ex  otio  fructiis  cai)e!e  qitam  ceteris,  non  duWaterim  me  i:ravis>iinis  tem- 
pesiaiinus  ohviam  fene*'.  lb.  IJep.  1,  4.— 5.  Ex  qiioexstiiit  ilhuU".  multa  esse  j)iH)ba- 
bilia",  quix^"^  quamquaniwsw  peiciperentur'^,  tuinen,  quia  viMim'*  haben-nt  quem- 
(laip.  insignem  el  illu^trein,  eix  sapieiiiis  viia  regerC'Uir.  lb.  N.  D.  1,  5.— H.  Veuit  mihi 
in  mentein  illud  dicere  quod^^  quinn  apud  M".  GiahriOnem  nuper  coiumemorasseni,  ia- 
/t//eA'i  vehementer  populiiiu  Honiamim  commovGri'^.  lb.  Verr.  1,  14.— 7.  Id  solum  bo- 
num  est  quo^''  qui  poiltur,  neces^e  est  beStus  eit.  lb.  Fin.  5,  xS. 

Piern.  15.  Short  relative  clnuscs  often  take  the  foim  of  tahticipial 
CLAL'SKS  if  the  relative  adjective  is  the  subject  of  the  clause.  Tlie  relative, 
in  this  instance,  is  omitted,  the  finite  predicate  being  changed  into  a  parti- 
ciple (present  or  perfect,  according  to  the  sense),  wliich  agrees  in  gender, 
number  and  case  with  its  antecedent,  expressed  or  understood. 

Obs.  1.  The  present  participle  is  used  if  the  action  is  conceived  as  coincident  in  time 
with  the  principal  acti(m.  provided  the  verb  is  active  or  dejwueut,  as  :  Non  sustinuissent 
priimim  impetum  ni  alius  metua,  inddenx  pectonbus  (  =  qui  insedit  pectt»rihus),  a  fu-ft 
contineret ;  They  could  not  have  resisted  the  first  attack,  had  not  aiioiher/ea;-, /Aa/ocVM- 
pied  their  fiiinds  , occupying  their  minds),  kept  them  from  fieeing.  Liv.  In.  41.— Ml^eri- 
cordia  est  ivixritildo  ex  miseria  cdter'ius,  injuria  latjorantis  (  =  alterlus  qui  injiina  laho- 
rat) ;  Compassion  is  the  grief  (arising)  I'rom  the  distress  of  another  pernoii  who  is  bVjS'er- 
ihfj  wrongly.  Cic.  Tusc.  4.  8,  18.     See  Ex.  1-5. 

Obs,  2.  The  past  participle  is  used  if  the  action  contained  in  the  predicate  of  the  rela- 
tive clause  is  anterior  to  the  principal  action,  i)rovided  that  the  verb  xajms^ive  or  dei>o- 
Hint  •  Ne  munus  humai)um.  ui^nqnatnm  a  Deo.  delugisse  videamini  :  Lest  you  may  seem 
to  have  deserted  tiie  d'dy  of  men  asfiqned  (which  has  l)cen  assigned)  f/y  God.  Cic.  Kep. 
6.  1."),  15— /1  difi  imwortalVtus  con><titrttam  inter  homines  f-ocietateia  evertunt ;  They  de- 
stroy the  mnfty  ichich  has  been  established  by  the  immortal  gods  amtmg  men.  Cic.  Oft.  3, 
(i, -28  — I'ytha^'oias  CrotOnam  \itn\\.jK)pulumque  in  luxvriam  lap-^um  aiictorit5te  sua  ad 
usiini  fru-aliiatis  revocavit :  P.  came  to  Croton  and  recalled  by  his  auihonty  to  frugality 
the  people' that  had  fallen  into  luxury.  Just.  2i),  4.     Ex.  »>.  7. 

Obs.  3.  If  the  active  predicate  of  a  relative  clause  denotes  an  action  prior  to  the  prin- 
cipal pction  the  clause  cannot  assume  a  participial  form,  except  the  verb  is  a  dejxmenc 
(seu  the  last  Ex.  in  Obs.  2),  or  if  the  construction  may  he  so  changed  into  a  passive  con- 
struction that  the  relative  is  made  the  subject  of  the  passive  verb  as:  1  imotheii^  en- 
hanced l)v  manv  (of  his  own)  virtues  the  qlory  which  fit  had  inherited  J romtas  juinei  , 
Tiinoiheils  a  pat  re  acreptam  (jloriam  muliis  auxil  virtulibus.  Nep.  lim.  1.3,  1. 

Obs  4  If  XhQpaMve  predicate  of  a  relative  clause  denotes  an  action  coincident  in 
time  with  the  main  action,  the  clause  cannot  take  a  participijd  form  exc  pt  t''^;P;;^'Jf  «^^ 
i<  conceived  as  a  mriphrastic  participle  with  the  copula  (p.  12. ),  as :  In^ila  est  Altllta.  m- 
tixlatoab  Sicilia  lnaAai>juncta  (  =  qiue  disjuncta  est.  which  '^  l^;'^}''''^]^^^^^^  ^^^ 
lita  is  an  ishnd  which  is  separated  from  Sicdy  fjy  a  rather  fjroad  channd  or  tie^ea.^  Uc. 
Verr.  2,  4,  4H.-Non  tam  vtilitas  parta  ptr  amleum  (luam  a.nlci  amor  ipse  <»^'?;  ;»f  '  ^''l 
so  much  the  udrantaqe  delurhts  which  w  obtained  through  ajrien.d,  as  the.  fuaiu  »  Jove 
(itself).  Cic.  Am.  14,  51.     Ex.  8.  9.  . 

Obs.  5.  Absolute  participles  are  often  u-cd  with  the  force  of  T^^Vi^^^^./^J^TJf/fdrsl^im  K 
absolute  syndetic  antecedent  is  (id,  ei).  as  :  t'>'0  d  eodem  tennKut^  >n^d<  >  u^i^^ 
et  nataras  et  vitas  et  cisus  haoent ;  Those  that  are  horn  atone  and  ^'''^^^^'^^''t^^Z 
difleivMt  characters,  lives,  and  fates.  CMc.  Div.  2,  45, «  5.-Pnma  et  rV,^^^'  '  ^V:^  ''^^Sco  d 
t.ilii  ut  viclis  ac  sununods  re.-isteret,  tenia  ut  vementis  *;"^'7^,'-;^^j^/ '  :  j''^,  r^J.^^S 
lines  made  the  attack  to  oppose  those  that  had  been  (already)  conqueied  and  dtslodgea 

~\\Mircostalnu)stoi^^1Ttnri7^^::=^bU^Sii^  ='  (wp^ 

gill  of  his  countrvmen's  love.-^  odium.-*  who.  although  ->  v  «•  e     e  J^//';   ;^^^^^^^ 
means  -moral  cohipulshm  '  by  some  violence  acting  on  the  mind    »    V'^^:'  '^'''•'^o^'j^V,,ce 
«  to  threaten.-^  tW-  .^uard  If  niy.  life.-^  alU.ough.-^  to  expose  m^^^^^^ 


542 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


ihffore)  '  tho  third  line  in  order  to  meet  thoup  that  were  (newly^  arriring.  Cief».  B.  O.  1, 
\h—Nin}ernme  diet  inn  facili-  mcnioriie  niandfitur  ;  What  li(i-<  f>t<njnxt  Hnd\i^  easily  com- 
mitted  to  memory.  Aiict.  Her.  3.  10,  W.-Male  porta  male  (lilal)Mntur  ;  What  lia><  Ijeen 
badly  acquired  ^oes  hadlv  to  nanjrht.  Cic.  Phil.  2.  27.  (JJ.-Such  pariieiples  may  often  ho 
rendered  bv  ErK'lish  >»ubstanlives  or  pariiciph's  nsed  8uhs«taniively,  us  :  Lquestris  prcrlu 
ratio  etr^^/^'/^/i/^^/^ot  intieqxentifms  par  peiicnlum  inferehat  ;  The  character  of  an  eques- 
trian battle  wa.s  equallv  daiifiemns  Tor  the>^t//7  «"'<1  the  ;i»/;-.<w/-^.  (  ie.s.  iv  (,  \  u,.- 
Oiiein  i)i<'eat  loii-rincinit'iltis  bellorum  seiibendo  leireiidOque,  (luje  nereidi.'i  non  laiiirave- 
riint  *  Wiio  would  he  wearied  by  the  length  ..f  wars<  in  w  ritini;  and  readinir  (them),  wIikIi 
did  liot  tire  out  thnr  ar/or.* '(those  that  waited  them)?  Liv.  10,  «1  -Olten  the  Latin 
idiom  .'ivesto  absolute  participles,  with  the  force  of  relative  clauses,  il  they  refer  to  the 
ceneral  idea  of  pcr^on-^,  a  ^'rammatical  relation  to  the  s-ntence  which,  in  En-lish.  must 
be  replaced  by  a  diflerent  constructicm.  as:  Ma-naejusdiel  quo  m  Seiitimlti  a-'robeimtum 
est,  fama  e^t  etiam  vera  stanti ;  Litkkau.y  :  The  i:l..ry  of  the  day  ot.  ;yl";»i  ».-  »>a  - 1« 
in  the  Sentinat  iaii  disM-ict  was  foutrht,  is  «reat  even  toone  that  .•stands  by  tht  truf/i(  =  e\en 
if  tiiere  is  iiothiu''  exa--crated).  Liv.  10,  30.— Nisi  forlc  ha;c  illi  tune  arma  dedimus  ut 
nunc  cum  bene /wz/yI/o  pu<_'narC*mus;  Unless  perhaps  we  have  then  <:iv.-ii  him  (to  Cjesar) 
arin^  in  or-ler  to  ti-hi  now  with  one  that  iv  neff  prepared  (  ==  in  order  to  prei)are  hini 
well  for  lli^'hting  a'.iainst  us).  Cic.  Alt.  7,  6,  2.    See  Ex.  10-18. 

1  \ejm  ru'ictain  intupus  terrain  de  divTna  providentiil  dubitAbit.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  39,90 
—2*  Probe»  aStoicis  deflnTtiir  fortitado  (puim  eam  rirtiVe/n  esse  dicunl  propuf/nantem* 
nro  (tQinfate.  lb.  OtT.  1,  19.  «>2.-3.  Aninu)  nobis  opus  est  non  af,ltorre,d,^  a  Q>nelt>'Ci>n- 
y-iiiU  \a\'  :W  :W— 4.  Nullum  vitium  tetrius  quani  avaritia.  pnesertim  in  prinnptbits* 
re>nn>mra,n  'rpff^rnanfiha.s:  Cic.  OtT.  2,  22.  T7.-5.  Odinsnm  Pane  genus  honnnum  (est) 
otiicia^  (-ua)  ej'prol)ra}iti>ini^',  qu;e  meminisse  debet  is  in  quern  colhlta  sunt,  non  c<mi- 
memorjlre  qui  coiitulit.  lb.  Am.  20,  71.-G.  Supervcniunt^  hi.<  restitj(e,,tit>>isy\\i:xn\m 
L  Cornelius  et  C.  y\&Vi\\\^ad pnvsidvim  colleija'  mu^si.  Liv.  10  29.-..  Prniecti.<  afj  Ihn 
ItoimVnx  Eumenes*'  rex  cum  auxilii.s  occurrit.  Just.  31,  8.— S.  llisioria"  est^'esta  r*--'" 
afj  (etd/is  na^tr,^  memoria  remdta^K  Cic.  Inv.  1,  19,  27.-9.  (^uid  est  tarn  futile  quam 
qmapHim  approbare  7>on  cogidt'im^'^':  lb.  Ac.  Pr.  2,  IK,  59.-10.  Jacet  airpus  durmvniis 
ut'3  iiwrtni  II).  Div.  1,  30  —11.  Proprium  est»*  Whexw^v  fad'- >iti'(  eito  facere.  ben.  lien. 
2  ft—\i  Verum  dic^nti/jus  facile  cedam.  Cic.  Ttisc.  3,  21,  .'-.1.-13.  \  .ntus  a  st-ptentn- 
onilMis  ori»iis'*  adversum  tenet"»  AtliCnis  (Lvnmiun^'' \  prona^anfifjn-^.  Nep.  Mill.  1.— 
14  Vi-ui«  varentem  ma-na  pars  veri  latet.  Sen.  (Ed.  -m  ~\h.  Nihil  dithcile  ainaidi 
pii'to  Cic  Or  10  — !♦).  komulus  vetcre  consilio'»  comlentiuai  urbTs  locum,  qui  nunc 
beptiis  dc'sceti'dtnfifjas^o  i„ter  duos  lucos  est,  asylum  apetit.  Liv  1.  ^:,"^,-.  *^'' v'^'y^,o'"■ 
nium  ordinum  consensu  pro  reipublicie  salQte  r/'fa'^J  risi'iderat-.yc.  ^  '•  •^;- 
18.  Prisci  Atheuieus(!s«  arare^^  et  screre  frumenta  ^jluiidem  xetscentibu.^''*'  uiontiraruui. 
Ju8L.  2,  0. 

Moods  ill  Held  (ice  Clausen. 
§  614.  Relative  clauses  have  their  predifates  in  the  subjunctive  1)  if 
the  clause  is  conceived  as  lacking  reality  (subjunctive  of  non-keality)  ; 


1  Correctly  —^  pronvgmlre,  to  be  a  champion. —3  to  shrink.—*  prominent  men.— »  their 
Da^t  services  and  merits.— «  exproftrare  a/k/'tid,  to  ca>t  in  somel)ody's  teeth  ;  always  to 
relW  to  what  one  has  done  for  another,  so  as  to  make  ir,  as  it  were,  a  reproach  to  him. 
—7  historical  present.  Sujmrenire  alieui,  to  arrive  while  somebody  is  performini;  an 
action  de-i"-nated  by  a  piv-sent  pariicii)le  wliich  agrees  with  its  lo:;ical  subject.—»  J.  e. 
Eumenes  occurrii  Komanis  qui  prolecii  erant.— «  an  historical  fact.—'»  ms;  7e.>Ya,  an  act 
nerformed,  a  transaction,  uu  event.-'»  i.  e.  quie  remota  est  (periphrastic  participle), 
which  is  removed  from,  i.  e.  which  is  anterior  to.— >=  which  is  not  known,  i.  e.  by  those 
whoaDurove  it.— >3  as  if.— i*  It  is  in  the  nature  of  one  who  performs  an  a<  turn  with 
nlea-ure  ->^  the  ronhwiud.— '«  is  a-?ainsr  (contrary  to)  those  who  etc.-»^  from  Atliens 
to  the  island  of  Lemnos.-»^  the  sense  of  siirht.-'»  accordin--  to  the  customary  device 
of  those  who  found  cities  (of  the  Ibunders  of  cities).-^"  a  place  which  is  now  enclo.-e'l 
bv  two  «'roves  'for  those  that  descend'  ;  i.e.  which  is  enclosed  towanls  the  upi.er  part 
of  the  hill  so  that  those  tliat  descend  must  pass  between  two  jrroves,— -t»  imaMires 
taken  bv  the  consent  of  all  the  ranks  etc.-^"^  to  rescind.-^;  n..  ,wo  '>  ^f*^^}"^'.''  hS 
an-  dependent  on  //iO//>/m/t!,  accordinir  to  the  cnstruciion  of  docre  (p.  104i.  J)nt,)t  has 
not  been  used  because  this  verb  v^ould  require  the  accusative  ,mtv////-s.,  w;hich m  the 
form  it  was  used  at  Justin's  time  (rmr/^/e-s),  would  not  have  »>*'^"t'  <l'r'""^,';>'^^'';,V'^Vh  .'!?, 
the  nominative,  and  would  have  made  the  sentence  ambiguous.-s*  literally  :  lo  tho.o 
that  ate  wild  fruit,  i.  e.  '  while  up  to  their  time  men  were  liviii;;  on  wild  Iruit  . 


MOODS  IN  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


543 


2)  if  the  clause  is  logically  connected  with  the  principal  predicate  (gnomic 

PUBJUNCTIVE,  i^  615). 

A  relative  clause  is  considered  as  lacking  reality  :  {a)  if  it  conveys  a 

nci^ative  meaninj^  under  an  affirmative  form,  or  an  affirmative  meaning 

under  a  negative  form  [R.  IG.  17) ;  {h)  if  its  preilicate  does  not  express  actual 

existence,  but  is  merely  conceived  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker.  (7^.  18.  19.) 

Obs.  Several  kinds  of  relative  subjunctives  belong  to  both  of  the  above-mentioned 
classesbt'i-njrsubjuiictivesof  non-reality,  and  at  the  sam<' time  «rnoinic  Subjunctives.  Thus 
the  relative  subjunctive  of  purpose  is  a  gnomic  subjunctive,  being  logically  connected 
with  the  principal  predicate;  but  it  is  at  the  same  time,  a  subjunctive  of  noa-reality, 
theaition  «-xisting  onlv  in  the  mind  (intention)  of  the  sp<'aker  (R.  19,  Obs.  6).  Ofien 
relative  mbjunctives  fall  under  three  and  more  diflerent  niles,  each  of  which  requires 
of  itself  the  subjunctive. 

llein.  IG.  Relative  clauses  conveying  a  negative  meaning  under  an 
nllirmative  form,  and  vice  versa,  always  depend  on  'negative  antecedents/ 
and  aUrnys  require  ilie  subjunctive  if  the  pegatioii  in  the  principal  sentence 
apcts  the  relative  clause,  so  as  to  make  it  virtually  negative  if  it  has  an 
affirmative  form,  and  virtually  affirmative  if  it  has  a  negative  form.  If 
the  negation  in  the  prineipuf  sentence  has  no  such  force,  the  relative 
clause,''generally,  has  its  predicate  in  the  indicative,  as : 

Nan  aded  qui  /iOCSENTtr  (  =  isqtii  hocsentit,  nonadest):  The  person  who  lias  this 
opinion  is  not  present.  But :  Aoti  adc.xt  q>u  hoc  skntiat.  or  yemo  adest  qui  hoc  skn- 
TiAT  (  =  Ei  qui  adsunt  hoc  non  sentiunt) ;  Ti.ere  is  nolH»dy  i)resent  who  has  this  opin- 
ion. In  the  former  example,  the  relative  clause  retains  its  amrniative  nieanini.',  l)eing 
not  aftected  by  the  negation  in  the  principal  sentence,  and  hence  has  its  predicate  in  the 
i>,dica'ire  In  the  second  example  the  relative  clause,  although  afhimative  in  form, 
is  c«>iic«ived  as  negative,  beiiiir  alVe«-ted  by  the  negxition  in  the  principal  sentence. 
Hence  its  predicate  must  be  in  the  mbjinictive  of  non-reality. 

Obs.  1.  Sentences  with  negative  antecedents  (or  what  is  virtually  equivalent  to  these) 
of  relative  clauses  dependent  on  them,  occur  in  three  grammatical  f..rms  :  1   ™  "ega- 
live  antece<lent  is  the  sibjkct  of  the  principal  sentence,  the  predicate  ^>^'\"^ 'j'^  'V,w 
v.-rh  esse,  d.-noting  mere  'existence'  (p.  4M»,  ««s.  8)  as  :  Ae^*o  ^v^  5?/^  ^^^ 
Mhil  est  ,pHKl  addi  ix>.^sit. -Nulla  f/.n.-^  ed  q>m  etc.     (See  Obs.  2.  .\.  4.)-2)  1  he  ^^,t'gatn  e 
antecedent  is  the  silbject  of  the  coriLA  esse  with  a  completing  predicate  as  -^^"^^J^.f 
Iji.nns  q,d  hm'.  senlit  (see  Obs.  .5..-31  The  predicate  of  the  ^''^^'^''•""'J-^;;''^';  ,  .Hon  Vllnh 
i,:irv  verbal  predicate,  the  nej-ative  antecedent  being  in  any  grammatical  re'at mn  (as  s  ib- 
ject*  obiect.  orattriiuite),  as7  Neviiin,  qui  hoc  serdiat,  credtrtduni  ed  :  neminem  imeino 
Vd  -^c^\%in^rei  qjexc.    (See  Obs.  7).     In  all  instances  tho  ^^i^^;;^^^^^'^ 
inav  be  replaced  l.v  interrogative  antecedents  (qtm  est  «''»  ^^'^c- ;  t  \^f,^,,f  :.f  J^rm^' 
See  Obs.  4),  or  by  afHrmative  antecedents  combined  with  ne-ati.  ns  in  anj  ^]\\^J^J'^_^ 
inumquam  rid'O  howinem  oai,  =  mminein  unquam  tidi  qui  etc.,  veque  qmsquam  - 
nemo;  non  habeo  quod  =  nihil  habeo  quod). 

OBS.  2,  If  the  predicate  of  the  governing  negative  ("^'l,  ^5/!;:,flr'!L!7eHi'Vclau^se 
ABSTUACT  verb  e^i^e  (in  English  expressed  by  '  there  is  ',  th'''^,"«  >'.';,  '  ;  '  /  -f  k  a» 
is  abvays  cnceived  as  r,ot  existing  if  it  has  an  afhrmative  P'^,^,^  ^f  \^;X.  "^  n  the  J^ 
a  negative  predicate.  Hence  the  predicate  of  such  clauses  '" "^Vh^.i  vtS  nobodv  uho 
jumiive,  as  :  yemo  erat  qui  jus  civile  didicisset  (not  dtdi'^erut  =  Jle  e  was  nobo.W  «  A^^ 
had  learned  the  civil  law.  Cic.  Brut.  93,  322  (  ^  nemo  jus  f'^.^.;'''  ?f^'\VuMam  S 
natio  quampertiwesrCimus;  There  is  no  nation  which  we  «''^/'J,^^,''/. ^Ji^'f.'^^o  'h  f„ 
iHMn  ii-rti.n..«eimn<^  ("ic  Cat  2  .^  11  —Nihil  est  quod  vacet  corpore .  1  here  i*  noinin^ 
nun  l>trti  m  scimus).  t  ic.  >_ai-  ■^.  •>•  'f-     -^\,,_       ,.J  ....  ^^  roli.mis  auisauam  oi/tjurSre 


What  is  theiv  in  this  case //z«/  ne^ds  ix  defence?  Cic.  K.  A.  ^'j^^  *  "  "J";',  T/ _  ,  e^^^^^ 
\m\\-^.xy-quis<  est  qui  xxi\\\^fugiatf    Who  is  there  ^^'«^^-'':;';^ '  ^"^:;":,',  ^  „„  ^enisJe 
fuirit  utilia).  Cie.  Ort-.  3.2H,  iOl-Utrnmne  «.sV  tempus  ^^'^''''\[{'yj^J^''^^^^ 
tur,>e  .it  f  (literally  :  Is  there  any  time  at  which  t...  have  ^;^'"  ,^  "' V\v 'Sc^^^^^^^^^  cS. 

nracer  -  Can  it  ever  be  disgraceful  to  have  been  in  the  Senate  at  nn  hatcver  lime  . )  v.u 

Dom.  3,  7.— See  Ex.  1-10. 


544 


BELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


MOODS  IN  THE  BELiVTIYE  CLAUSE. 


545 


Thn.  the  relative  clause  i.  ;^cen.d  as  ^^^^^^^^^^^^li;;^^^:'^:^ 
net  iHMtinaxoiH'ra  :  1  here  if  J"V       TV-  vUino-  r  Vemo  e<f  i<iftrum  qin  otliim  uon 

^;;;;f  iHduJ^plaie^'S  i^^i^AlcX'^^a^^^  death  Uoe/no^  enter  f  Sen.  Ep.  81  See  Ex. 

exsistere,  exstare,  ami  the  I'f  ^l^■^'^V;' V.'r.?.  r    i  a   d  i,r!-e nt  ineanh  -.    is  :   Inrern.hatur 
^../.and  r.y>.r///..w^.  occur  l>'>'^;y;»»V^';'y^r;^7^r -Hut^^^  >v1i«^  "«"ed  to 

n./«o«/*use  suffra-ium  de  n.e  '"l'^:;^^*  ^X  ;;^^ 

//^^v/  miod  scv'iham  (  =  nihil  est  quod  scribam).  tit.  Att.  4,  i>.^.     Z^.:      \'   kC   17 
can  urn,  lyC^r"^^^   (  =  nuUi  militW  erant  qui  sequerenlur).  Liv.  J.,  4b.-  be.  L.v.  1 ..     ^ 


!■!  no  reason  why  vou  should  he  airaui.  v  u.  \iii.  .,  *.  •»•     -  ^ 

etc  ?  Tlurc  i-  n„  rc-ason  «by  «e  sl.ould  bel,«e  clc.  S-c...  (Jn.  N.  1,2 
Oe,  4    •  0"i<  «'  ".,i  •  iq,dd  »t  qno.t^  Ma.irts  ,vilh  tlu'  iMliranve  if  I  he  t|"Oft;';"  i-  "" 

^:;^^ ?  a'„^atio,f^  hut  ir %.i,;  :■;!>-■  ;-'-:s;i;;.n::i:;i;;;ir;who'?,'« 


rur  decx  al)  homiiiihus  colendos  dicniif  lb.  N.  D.  1.  41,  lu. 


rannot  be  called  etc. ;  '  qxioe  expers  sif '  would  mean  :  '  There  exists  no  bravery  which  is 
destitute  of  reason).  Cic.  Tusc.  4.  22.  50.— AV;/w>  lifjer  est  cjni  corpori  st-rvit ;  Nobody  is 
free  who  is  a  slave  to  his  body.  Sen.  Kp.  92  (  =  Is.  qui  corpori  servit  liber  n<>n  « st)  — 
I'.iit :  Niillmn  €f>t  tevipua  quod  justiiia  vaejlrc  deheat  (not  debet\  ;  Tht^re  is  no  fime  which 
should  lack  justice  (  =  justitia  numquamabesse  debet).  Cic.  Otl\  1.  19, 6.5  --Si-e  Ex.  20-22. 

Ons.  0.  To  this  rule  (Obs.  ."))  there  are  three  exceptions:  l)  If  both  the  principal  sen- 
tence (rti»h  a  cojjula)  and  the  relative  clause  are  neL'ativc,  so  t/mt  the  uhole  sentence  is 
rirtvit'ly  qifinnafive,  the  relative  clause  is  always  in  the  subjunctive,  as* :  Xcrno  rex 
I'ersAruTn  potest  esse  qui  non  ante  MaijOruin  disciplTnain  pei-C(pt7-it :  Nobody  can  be  king 
of  the  Persians  who  has  not  previously  learned  the  lore  ot  the  Ma:;i.  (Mc.  Div.  1.  4 
(  =  Every  Persian  kin?  must  be  familiar  with  the  lore  of  the  Maui  before  his  accession). 
See  Obs.  7,  No.  2.— But  nesjative  clauses  of  this  kind  may  have  the  indicative  if  ihe 
whole  sentence  is  ;vo/ conceived  as  aflirmative.  as:  Judex  esse  nemo  bonus  potest  qui 
suspiciOne  certil  non  movHur.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  5.  26.-2)  If  the  principal  sentence  expresses 
luissihility  (nemo ]X}t&st  esse),  the  predicate  of  the  clause  may  l>e  either  in  the  indicative 
or  in  thesub)unctive.  since,  accordiuir  to  R.  17,  Obs.  .3,  such  relative  clauses  way  have  a  sub- 
jiinrtive  even  if  the  piincipal  sentence  is  affirmative,  as:  Nemo  iimquam  in  seuatu 
jiotidi  esse  princeps  qui  7iHiliirnf  esse  j)opul5ris  (  =  si  nialuerit).  Cic.  Prov.  Cons.  16.  :^8. 
—But  :  A>w/)  JUSTUS  esse  jiot est  qui  mortem,  qui  dolOrem.  qui  egestatem  tinut.  Tb.  Off.  2, 
11.  ."iH.— See  Ex.  2-3-25.  3>  If  the  relative  clause  re.^tnc/s  the  nefjilive  antecedent,  makin-? 
itifss  treiieral  or  comprehen«^ive.  the  relative  clause  has  its  predicate  mostly  in  the  sub- 
junctive :  Quis  me  est  m<n-t}llis  miserior,  qui  riivj/.  hodie  5"  What  mortal  t/tat  /u'(?.vis  uiore 
wretched  to-day  than  I  amy  Plaud.  Rud.  5.  1.  \.—yi/iil  est  deo,  quod  quidem  in  terris 
Jiiit.  acreptius  quam  concilia  ccetusque  hominum  qiiie  civitSies  appellautur.  Cic.  Rep. 
0,  1.3.  See  Ex.  26.  27. 

For  the  sui>junciive  dependent  on  sentences  of  the  form  :  '  Nemo  est  tarn  ferns  qin,'  and 
•  eqo  non  sum  is  qtn '  see  K.  20,  Obs.  2.  3.  9. 

Obs.  7.  If  the  principal  predicate  is  an  ordinary  verbal  predicate,  the  relative  clause 
depeudini:  on  an  antecedent  actually  or  virtually  nej,'ative,  the  predicate  of  the  clause 
is  in  the  si'bjunctivk  : 

1)  If  what  is  allirmatively  stated  in  the  clause  is  conceived  as  not  existinjT:.  Such  sen- 
tences may  be  recast  by  chan^'in?  the  relative  clause  into  an  ind<pendent  ne<rative 
sentence,  and  by  attaching:  to  it  the  ])riiicipal  setitence  in  the  form  of  an  affirmative 
nlative  d.iuse,  as:  yHdl  dixTrunt  quod  ad  vestrum  judiciuui  7?t>7t7/?rf)! ;  They  said 
notfiing  that  bttohffs  to  yonr  de(  ision.  Cic.  Ca'C.  10,  27  (  =  quod  dixeiunt,  ad  vestrum 
judicium  non  pertinet).  Nihil  quod  ipsis  esset  iiidiirnum  committibant  ;  They  comudtted 
nothing  that  was  unworthy  of  tliem.  C;es.  B.  G.  5,  35  (  =  quod  committebaut  non  indig- 
nuui  erat).  See  Ex.  28.  *1.     For  the  indicative  in  such  clauses  see  Obs.  S. 

2)  If  what  is  ne-xativeiy  stated  in  the  clause,  is  conceived  as  ;>«/,  the  predicate  of  the 
clause  is  ahvavs  in  the  subjunctive.  In  this  instance  the  negative  clause  may  be  trans- 
lormed  into  an  independent  affirmative  sentence,  as  :  Quis  unquam  orfltor  excellere  iiidi- 
cjltiis  est  vulgi  judicio,  9"i //o/?  id(;m  a  doclis/>;-o/>^/rf^/r.^  What  orator  has  ever  been 
considered  as  distinguished  bv  the  judgment  of  the  multitude  that  was  not  likewise 
acknouledf/ed  by  the  learned?  Cic.  Brut.  50,  189  (  =  every  orator  has  been  acknowledged 
by  the  learned  who  was  praised  bv  the  multitude).  See  Ex.  31-36.  Passages  in  which 
nlative  clauses  of  this  kind  occur  with  a  predicate  in  the  indicatire  arc  S(>  rare  that  they 
must  be  considered  as  marks  of  inaccuracy,  as  ;  Nee  vero  quirquam  video  quod  non 
idem  te  vidC'ie  certo  scio  (iustead  of  cirto  sciam).  Cic.  Fam.  6,  3,  2. 

Ons.  S.  An  affirmative  relative  clause  dependent  on  negative  sentences  requires  the 
indie  ative  if  wliat  is  stated  in  it  Is  conceived  as  real  and  eji-^tinn.  as  :  Nihil  quod  ratiO- 
nis  eH  expers,  generare  ex  se  potest  compotem  ratiOnis.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,8  (  =  /</  quod  est  ex- 
Wrs,  geiienlre  mm  vtuK^^u.—Nec  qul<quam  peditum  .«wy^er/Vu  qui  in  vallo  puguaverunt 
(they  really  lou-ht  on  the  rampart).  Liv.  28.  33.-.V«///0  in  summam  nequiliam  inci- 
dit  qui  umquam  h(tsit  sapientiae ;  Nobodv  falls  into  great  wickedness  who  has  ever  been 
attached  to  wisdom.  Sen.  Ben.  7,  19  (  =  Is.  qui  umquam  hiesit,  nou  incidit).  But :  ISiitU 
potest  ad  malos  perveiilre  quod  prosit ;  Nothins  (no  benetit)  can  come  to  the  wickea 
that  is  tjen^  filial  (to  then).  Sen.  Ben.  .5,  12  (  =  Pn>desse7>o;<  potest  quod  ad  eos  pervenit  ; 
but  'qufxl'proiltst'  ■-  id  quod  prodest  {a  useful  thing)  ad  malos  perveiilre  non  potest).— 
Sometimes  it  makes  nr)  ditlereiice  in  the  meaniuir.  whether  a  relative  clause  is  conceivea 


as  real,  or  as  not  .-xist  ing.  In  this  instance  either  l  he  indicative  and  suhjuncti  ve  are  eoiia.ly 
currect,  as  :  Notjlti  .«eptem  (a  censoribu<),  netno  tamen  qui  sella  curuli  sedisset  (or  seae- 
rat\  ;  s'.-v.'u  ni.nibers  of  the  Senate  w  re  expelled.  l)ut  none  that   had  been  a  curule 


546 


IIELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


T  -,*^;.,  fi,^  ^nhiiinrtivo  the  same  as»  in  the  instance  mentioned  Ob».  6  No.  8. 
1ms  Its  predicate  in  the  Ml bjctncTje^m,^^^^  ^^.  j,.,„ii„ii„n  m„do 

lint  the  indicative  is  aK<o  l.mnd  •  '  ^'/'^^  "'^  ^^^  ^h  am  I^dain  recitilvit  ?    \\7,o 

bonunun  c..n.uetudMu-m  ''^  f',  ; ,     ^\7  ^«^ntlem^^^^^^^  l)nb hrly  n-cited  the  letter 


VM<i;  !>*•'•  *•'""  »-^'^''y•*f^:.  T/^^.tv  ?o  mr    rni    Liv   2:1,  14.-AVc  pneftrvnffefMit  trnc- 

qi^/7/m/ir^p<ed.ea  e      Ihis  1      mi.^  ^     ^^^^^^  y„Y,/f/e<7/'/r ;  lite.iiUy: 

as»(iuivalei.tt()unvulal  U-claii>t    a_  .  .  e/^fx^/t  /  /Ture  i^  ncthini;  on 

He  does  .u>t  except  anythinjjou  ^/A^V  V^e}.  Hta  t  «k  ^n^  pn.liu.Ttur).  Cic.  Ac.  Pr. 
?'^^f  tS'^aSX  r^.  ;/i  ^'qioill^m/'i-i^.  literally :'Non.in^.is  «aniin^  to 
you\ hui;  vo  io' M.S.>w,  =  IherS  is  nothin-Mhat  you  do  not  know  ,t.  e.  nihil  dee.t 
fta  ul    on  scia.^).  Cic.  Or.  1,  17.  77.  See  Obs.  11,  t.  .  .        -,     . 

i,,;r  to  OBS.  2.  u.id  OBS  .  f..  I.  '  '''"!^l^;™'-;;,"  iv/eS^  „„,.„  ,ak.us  lli.^  particle 
,.r«licate«  m  tin'  «ihjiiitctive,  ™-„'';^;'V/,' ^.X.uv  r,,,-  „  .■-(■i- S  tll.'.l.    Such  poiiI.miccs 

which  he  d.d  not  I  1^^«:,  •""  [  .^  ';~  _o./i(/est  i-iiur,  (^>mi  ocrurmf  in  hac  (pue^iiuiie, 
kintl  pr<)perly  belong  to ;>a//^<iu^"'''»«"'f'' j'"^»         ,:,:,,   r.-lanve  clause  beini;  made 

^itil;  e:^';'"  ."Uletn  ,,u/,c  ,Wa^  <,ui  e.c,  Ci.  A.,    .        .   se^^ 


r»„.   11    Tf  rpl.itivp  clause»  dependent  on  negative  antecedents,  or  th.ir  equivalents, 
are  utem^elve^  m^^anve;  advS^    clauses  introduced  by  <,uin  are  often  u.ed  in  tueir 

P^r  ^a:i^^  ^'riroilgU^Uy  an  interrogative  negative  adverb,  =  cur  .on.  where 


MOODS  IN  THE  RELAXrVE  CLAUSE. 


647 


lu-r,  a<  athrmaiive  particle,  iinpeiative  sentences,  it  implies  that  a  command  or  advice 
should  not  hedisie-arded  (  =  Iiideeil  you  should  etc  ;  I  wish  vou  would  ;  You  better  had) 
ti<  :  Q'iin  tu  hoc  cnineii  ohjlce  ubi  licet  a-ere :   You  better  /lad  (you  should)  make  this 
ch  .rge  where  the  law  allows  it.  Cic.  H.  Com.  9.  2."). 

J{.  From  the  oritrinal  meanin».'  ot  (/tii/t  as  interrogative  negative  adverb,  arose  its  use 
as  a  rclatire  negaiive  adverb,  referring  to  cause  (nulla  ect  caum  guin,  or  itifiil  et'f  ouin  • 
there  is  no  reason  why  not),  as  :  Nulla  est  mum  quin  me  condones  (poena;)-  Tliere  is 
no  reason  tvhy  you  should  not  pardon  me.  Plant.  Kud.  4.  4,  2«. 

C.  This  led  to  the  use  ol  quia  as  a  subordinating  conjunction  to  represent  affirmation 
under  a  n(  i/ative  lorm.  both  the  princii)al  t^eiitence  and  the  clause  being  ne«mtive  Qhin 
i-  thus  u>ed  as  a  conjunction  (a)  in  certain  completing  Tuat-clauses '^(p.  58!)  km)  • 
itj)  in  a<iverbial  modal  clauses  in  the  place  of  ita  ut  non,  corresponding  to  the  English 
con-jtruction  of  'without'  with  a  participial  noun,  or  to  the  conjunctions  'b>it  thaf 
{IS  :  Neque  uilus  Hare  ventus  i)oter:it  <iiiii)  (naves)  aliqua  ex  parte  secundum  cursum  ha- 


lei:iltos  mitterent  ;  They  hardly  let  any  lime  i)ass  without  sending  envovs  over  the 
Kliine  (  =  ut  non  mitterent).  Cics.  B.  G.  5,  55.— Neminem  conveni. .  .^win  bmnes  mihi 
niaximas  gratias  again.  Cic,  J'am.  9,  14,  1. 

1).  Modal  Quin-clauses  witli  the  force  of  clauses  introduced  by  ita  ut  non,  are  fre- 
qut'Utly  used  in  place  of  negative  relative  clauses  dependent  on  nkgative  antece- 
dents in  any  of  the  forms  menti(Uied  Oiis.  2-9,  if  the  whole  s-entence  is  virtually  afflnna- 
live,  and  if  in  Engli.-h  the  clause  may  be  intnuluced  by  '  uithout '  or  'hut  that\*    This 
u.-e  of  (^uin-dauses,  however,  is  chielly  contined  to  the  instances  that  the  relative,  re- 
placed l)y  quin,  would  be  in  the  nominative  of  the  masculine  gemhr,  or  in  the  ablative  of 
time  dependent  on  the  phrases  '  nullum  te/npus  (nulluK  dies)  intenedit''  west,  or  '  nullum 
tf-mitus  {diem)  i/itermittere'  ;  as  :  Nemo  est,  quin  (  =  quia  is.  vt  is  non)  iibivis  quam  ibi 
iitti  est,  esse  malit  ;  There  is  nobody  Out  he  wishes  to  be  anywhere  rather  than  there 
when;  he  is.  Cic.  Fain.  (J,  1,  1.    (Instead  of  the  modal  Quin-clause,  a  negative  relative 
clause  according  to  Obs.  2  might  have  been  used.)— Kepertus  est  nemo  quin  mori  dice- 
ret  satius  esse.  Cic.  Ver.  2.  2,  36.— In  castelio  nemo  fiiit,  omnino  miliiU'ii  quin  vulnera- 
letur  (without  being  wounded).  C;es.  13.  C.  3.  53.— CuriOsus  nemo  est  quia  sit  malevo- 
liis  ;  Nobody  is  curious  without  being  malicious.  Plant.  Stich.  2,  1,  .^4  (see  Obs.  (i.  1).— 
Neque  ulliim  feix*  teuipus  inteicessit  quin  alifluem  de  motu  Galloruni  nuntiumacciperet; 
Il.trdly  any  time  passed  by  (there  was  hardly  any  time)  that  he  did  not  (or  but  that  he, 
ntthout.iiic.)  receive  some  intelligence  on  the  movements  of  the  Gauls.  Cais.  B,  G.  5, 
5:3.     (Instead  of  the  modal  (iuin-elause,  a  negative  reliitiv-?  clause  "^wo  non  acciperef 
misht  have  been  chosen,  as  in  :   '  Nullus  dies  intercessit  quo  non  ad  eum  scriberet.  Nep, 
Alt.  21).)— Modal  Qutn-clauses  are  especially  frequent.in  jjlace  of  negative  relative  clauses, 
li  the  negative  antecedent  is  restricted  byanottier  relative  clause  according  to  Obs.  10, 
when  the  resiricting  clansJe  always  requires  the  subjunctive,  as  :  Nemo,  qui  aliquo  esset 
t/i  nu/nero,  scripsit  oiationem  quin  redigeret  omnis  lere  in  quadnim  nunierumque  sen- 
I'.Mitias;  Nooue,  who  held  anv  rank,  (ever)  wrote  any  speech  without  arranqinq  e\Gry 
teiitence  according  to  the  law  of  syinmeLry  and  rhythm.  Cic.  Or.  Gl,  208.**— See  Ex.  51-55. 

*If  a  Quin-clause  is  thus  used  in  place  of  a  negative  relative  clause  dependent  on  a 
negative  antecedent,  the  clause  must  still  be  considered  as  an  adverbial  modal  clause 
with  the  lorce  of  a  Tliat-clause  introduced  hy  (ita)  ut  non.  We  should  guard  against 
tlie  heresy  of  most  graminiriiins,  who  consider  quin  in  this  connection  as  a  contraction 
of  the  Ufgation  non,  with  the  relative  adjective  qui,  or  even  as  a  contraction  of  qua,  quo, 
or  quitd  with  )ion.  That  the  Latin  did  not  feel  quin  as  an  equivalent  of  a  relative  adjec- 
tice  with  non,  is  provt  d  by  the  lact  that  oftt-n  tin-  demonstrative  is-  is  expressly  added  to 
quin  (see  tiie  next  note),  which  would  be  impossilde  if  quin  had  the  value  of  u  relative 
ailjcctive.  in  which  tin'  demonstrative  is  is  already  implied. 

**  Sometimes  the  subject  of  modal  (^uin-claiis'es.  if  referring  to  a  substantive  of  the 
prhicipal  sentence,  is  expressly  added  by  the  demonstrative  is,  which  would  be  implied 
in  the  relative  if  a  relative  form  were  given  to  the  clause,  as  :  (iiiisin  Circum  Maximum 
venit,  quin  is  unoquOque  gradii  de  avaiiiia  tu5  couimonerCtur  ?  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  59.— 


548 


BELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


MOODS   IN   THE   RELATIVE   CLAUSE. 


549 


^   •      1  «n.  ,ico,i   in   nl'irp  of   ri'lative  nccrntive  clan^os  in  which  the 

Rarely   Q''Vl-^^'^"^*;^  "J)    "' i:?,^   h-      r  m  time;  namely  Dif  ihe  rela'ive 

relative  is  uot  a  nominative  n';,^^"'";;;,   ",,;.,,  „ihil  est  <,>tv,  (  =  Ha  "t  no»  ;  more 

is  in  the  nruter  s.nixniar  (-/'/O'/  ,  «-  ''",";,!  "       ,e.c  t  in-^  hut   that  it  perishes 

uKially:  '  q>'od  now  V)  inteieat  ;  But  '''^/V  ,^%V:'.  'vj*  o  ".   12  :w     See  Ex.  fiti.  f.7.-2)  If 

NnllH  fuit  civita-  7''*''  <  =  *'V/  w^w;^  rsl  ,te  > /M^  hent  unrt  of  its  Senate  to  Cor- 
.enilius  Coniah.m  m't'ere  ;  '  '^'''^.^.'^f  ?iVi  a-*  vue//ci  '^  IvifC-ret.  Ih.  :i.  81.  Tims 
duba.  Cies.  B.C.  i.  1  >---^V'''^  ^^' '"'^ll^^r  .'  Hn.  \s  dnO  -3)  If  ti.e  relative  is  a  tran- 

Cic.  Fin.  4,  13,  :«,  where.  »'"'' Tn  ;r  tlv.  '  JV/,?,  t  -a",  umkM>to<Kl,  as:  Ci«s«r  nullu.a 
sitive  accusative,  and  ^^''y^';''''^'''^\'''^]\';,^'/V^^^^ 

unquam  hos.em  fudit.  (?</m  -,^-' nu-.^^; >«"!•)  f^lativl  c^u.s.s  intnulneed 
qu..queexueri').  Su-t.  Auir.  .0.  ,i  V»i iii.  Vl-uisi  s  with  a  t-.)rrespMiidiiii:  deiuimslrative 
by  relative  advkubs  are  I'^'I'l-'^*'*  J  -^..f.^'  ^  .  !  "^^,,'' «Vt  "  *i/^^  {  =  nbi  no..»  iUico  ad>il : 
adverb,  a.:  Nee  sacr.t.n.  ''V'^.  l»^;; ;  'l  %'  ,\'  :''  I  di  i-c^i  t  n-re.  Pla.it.  Merc.  2,  3,  T.- 
Nor  i.  there  any  sacred  ov  P'-''[.^'     fj   *\'       .\    .',.  i  1     .rJ  cannot   be   nplaced    by   (Min- 

antho-  ii.",'al  ullum  cil.nn.  i-si-  tniii  ^  .       i  ?,"'"'',•  J.,  ,f  ,|,^  i.i,,„i  n-nr,.  to  »iAi(; 
2,<..-Th,..  thiMlenmuMniuv..  ,-    ..H    U^^^^^^  ""1 1',  ,  .,   '  -..-1.".  Iial.c.il  v«"  "' »'■ 


1 


live  clause  c.nuot  ''^*  l''"'W''th".f'(l;Mn  rlanj.e8  occur  in  place  of  relative  clauses  with 
tSome,fe'ra..naY'»"-  T.^'^  ? '''^Vfn mo    tl^^^^  IM.blic  Sch.u.l   (J.an.nuir 

relatives  in  the  dative  case.  .^^»^,  \iy  ;\*  :,4'i\  '  V-  unniiatn  habni  cut  darem  qmn  (  =-- 
(p.  3H9>  uiv.:«  the  ^^^}}]^^^^'^^^^  ■  I  ;  '  '  Ins  ms -a^e  1^.  reblive  dan^e  culd  have 
cui  ««'')<^'^V;;"  •.,^' euce    s'em  vale      t^^^^  •  f^ahni  cm /itferas  ad  te 

"^^j.  ^srn^u?.:^n;:;n^ron;ii;i;;e";^ti;^r!uj;:^^iu  .how.  that  ,uin.. 

the  above  passa-e  ha.  not  '•'«  J«;''^^.  •'[ '"^f/'^J^^red  nuch  a  dilTerence.    Mkirino  eays  : 

tSorne  -rammnr.ans,  ^^^''^T  A.rMrv  is  a^^^^^^  bv  r/z/i//.  which  is 

^^.,no  '^;;j;-;-;;;;;r  »11^; ^   X^l  I  K  ^Sl^*^  n-rul^  l.y  every  exa,/;,>lew.th  ,.in 

„ot  .o  \vuh7W^  '"^;;  fcJn:    it  m.U  i'^^^       ne-ative  antecedents  (othervvi^e  rjuin  cannot  l)e 

w„at  is  stutedin  the  clau^e.-Ki;HNj.u  say.  '^J^^^:::^  ^:^i[:::!^'\^'r:^:,Uvd  int-.gui 

i.les 


What  is  stated  m  tt.e  ^•lal.^e.-l^UHi^^"^' .  -  '•  "■  "^     "  'I  /i;,;    r,„„„  »,'.  r,.s.,lsed  int.. 
„e.rati..„.    The  authur  ol  the  I't-bl.  bch  ^f-  -;  >;      '^,  V'J^  ,  i     .xaminit.-ih.tx.-.mi 

m,y  :  emplmsis  ',  much  less  a  ■  fptxial    cnipha».». 


I 


I 


14,  20,  3.-7.  XuUa  ed  qend  quam  periimrficfitis!.  lb.  Rah.  Perd.  12,  33.-8.  AntePericlem 
lifff-ra  nulla t->!t  (/ii<t  qiiide.n  or.iaiuiu  aliquein  hiibeaf,  et  oratOris  esse  ridfdtur.  \h.  Brut. 
7.  27.— '.t.  Quid  c-/  yiiod  art»'  eflici  jHtsnI.  nisi  is  qui  ariem  tractabit  nuilta  ptrcepcri  i  ? 
II).  Ac.  Pr.  ••2,7,  22.— 10.  Quid  tt:t  ry/of/ pcrcii.i  po^fit  si  ne  scnsnsqtiidein  vera  nnntiaiiis? 
11).  2,  25.  7!».- 11.  M/ii/  est  quod  deus  eflicere  non  po>ifnt.  lb.  I)iv.  2.  41,  86—12.  Nihiltst 
giKid  tioii  aliciibi  esse  coqdlur.  lb.  .^c.  Po.  1,  (i.  24. — 13.  I^^nlla  j^?ens  est  qua  von.  etiamsi 
i^rnui'et  q.iaieni  habere  (ieiini  deeeat.  tan. en  habendum  Hiat.  lb.  Lej,'.  1,  8,24.-14.  Quia 
enl  qui  non  anifponat  oratori  imperatonitn  ?  II).  <>r.  1.  2,  7 — 15.  Quis  rex  unquani  jiiit^ 
quit  /Kipulus  qyu  wn  //^r/?/'/r  jniedictinne  divliia^?  lb.  Div.  I,  43.  95. — 1(».  Setno  e^t  in 
ludo  Kla<i'aioiio<  paullo  ad  laciniis  aiidacior^  ^'/i  sc  non  intimuni  Catiilnie  esse/a^fa- 
tur.   lb.  Cat,  2,  5,  9.-17.  Animal  indium  iiivnuH  potest  quod  neque  umquani  luiium 
fil,  et  semper  df  futtlruin.  lb.  N.  D.  3.  13,  32.— lis.  Quis  istic  est  qui  decs  tani  parvi 
])endel  f  Plant,  liud.  3,  2,  :j<i,— 19.  Quid  est  qua  de  re  nunc  litiqdtis  inter  vos  ?  11).  4, 
4,  16.-20.  Btdlnse<l  nnuo  qui  e;l  lej,'e  riiif  ut  non  niodo  imi)une,  sed  etiam  cum  Mimma 
iiiteifectOris  j;loria  inteilici  pos?ii  V  Cic.  Phil.  1,  4,  :i5.— 21.  Xi/<U  ueqiie  meum  est,  neque 
cujiisqiiani,(/w>/  aiifeni.  quod  eripi,  quod  amiiti  ;;o/e.v/.  lb.  Parad.  4,  29.— 22,  An  ^y/ic- 
(/^/'/me.^^  secundum  naturam  7"0'/./?7  repumiante  ratione  ?  lb.  Tusc.  4.37,79. — 23.  Qui po- 
t()^t  eiist  vita  \\\ii\\r-'^  qua  noi)  in  aniTci  niutiul  benevolentia  oo//(??ae-N'c«/'.^  lb.  Am.r»,  2J. — 
24.  PuteM  i^iinr  quidquuf/i  utile  esse  quod  sit  huic  taliiim  viriutiim  choro  contraiium  ? 
lb.  Oil".  3.  33,  lit».- 25.  Sacrosanctiim  ni/iil  tsse  latest,  nisi  qi/od  sanctum  ei<t.  II).  Balb. 

15,  35.— 2(».  Imp  trabilit).-,  qui  riraf,  ?vtUus  est.  Plant.  Merc.  3.  4.  20.— 27.  Quis.  qvi 
aiiqiiid  sajnaf,  n.inc  beiltus  tsse  pc.test  ?  lb.  Fam.  7.  28.  1.-28.  Ni/iil  accidit  quod  sol- 
liciimiiiK-s  (illevilnt  in<us.  lb.  Brut.  3.  12.-29.  Quiil  potest  reperiri  quod  ipsum  sibi 
npuqiut  mauis'r  Ac.  Pr.  2,  11,  44. — SO.  Xiliilquod  iut.inorikveattiiHat  eo  anno  consules 
pe>^Grunt.  Liv  42.  4(>.—ii}.Xi/nl  oratOri  in  quo  ma<:nus  esse  jto^nt  relinquemus.  Cic. 
Or.  1,  15,  6S.— 32.  Eiro  liabeo,  cui  plus  qtuim  tibi  dd/eam^  n(vnnem.  lb.  Fam.  (5.  1,  4.— 
3.3.  Verbum  frywx/  unqumn  ex  illlu.s  ore  excidit  in  7?/o  quisqm.m  ;wv.vi/  oflendi  ?  lb. 
Siill.  2«;,  72.— .it.  ^V</y/<>  uniqiiain  me  tennissima  sll^pi(■iolu;  peistrinxii' <??/<=?«  von  per- 
xevttrini  ac  ptrtrf<iei\m.  lb.  10,4(1.-35.  Quis  de  C.  Cethei'o  cogitat  cut  non  ad  illlus 
poenain  career  ti'ditlcatiis  e.«se  videntur  f  lb.  25,  70—30  Quo  enim  ducere  liunc  juve- 
nem  potestis  }itn  1,011  sua  decora  eum  riudicent  f  Liv.  1.  2»).— 37.  Xevio  i)arum  <  iu  vixit 
qui  virifltis  pe.feet;e  pt-rfecto/z/^'r/^/A'  est  nninere.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  45.  10!». — >;8.  Quis  pla- 
cC're  popuio  potest  cui  placet  \\\\\\>'t  Sen.  Ep.  2t>.— 39.  Quid  qvi.^quarn  rvii'm\\\\\  quad 
non  an  I  mo  ainipnhtndit  et  tt-nttf  Cic.  Ac.  Pr.  2,  7.  22. — 40.  yum  quin.  cui  quidem  eli- 

gendi  i)otcstas  e,sset.  qu<  niqinim  his  anteponCbat  ?  lb.  Brut.  .^0.  l."~9. — A\.Xec  vero 
ixhvo  qur/nqua?n  aniiqiiiurem,  cujus  quidem  scripta  profereiida  7??/?tw.  lb.  10.  fil. — 
42.  Primnm  piliim  T.i.lins  dncebat,  neque  crat  in  exercitn,  qui  quidem  pedestria 
Ptipendia  /cri.^sit.  vir  factis  noliiiior.  Liv.  7,  13.— 4.3.  CatOiiem  qnis  uostrOriim  ora- 
tOitii..,  qui  (juidein  nut.c  sunt.  Ie;;it  ?  Cic.  Brut.  17,  05.-  44.  Xerninetn.  ex  eis  quidem 
qui  tiWqiio  \\i  j.umero/^/rn//'/,  coguOvi  tarn  indocium,  tam  rudem.  lb.  59,  213. — 45.  QvCB 
enim  homii.i,  iu  r/>/o  aliqni  si  non  famre  pudor,  at  Fupplicii  timor  e.'<t,  {rravior  poena 
accidere  p>.iuit  ?  lb.  Prov.  Cons.  0, 14.— 40.  iVVcenim  locus  vllus  i-t^i  jynetennisst/s  ab  eis 
qui  ad  leu'es,  qui  ad  moiei*.  qui  ad  disciplTnam  reipuhlica"  ;)^/*'i?(?rf /.  lb.  Off.  1,  44,  150. 
— At.  Xiliil  lira  ttrmittan)  quad  ad  libertatem  vestram  pertiuCre  aibitrdhoi'.  lb.  Phil.  4, 
0.  15. — 48.  S'iliil  pratiriiiissnjn  est  quod  non  haheat  sapienTem  exctisatiOnem.  lb.  Att.  8, 
12.  2.— 49.  ^ViA</  li-re  dictum  est  ab  \\oc  quod  quidem  facetius  dictum  rider ttnr .,  qvod 
non  provocil'us  resiKinderit.  lb.  Or.  2,  .'iO,  230. — 50.  Qua  con fio  fuit  per  hos  «nnop, 
gua  quidem  es^etnon  condurta",  sed  rera,  iu  qua  popnii  KomSui  consensus  pcrspici  non 
pos-et  ^  II».  Se^t.f)0.  100.— 51.  JN'ewiO est  ^J/m  banc  affectionem  animi;>w6f/ atque /a?/(/<=^. 
lb.  Fin.  5.  22.  «i3.— 52.  IlasnatiOnes  nemouviquamfuit  quin  Jran^'i  domarIqnerw/;ie?v/.  lb. 
Prov.  Cons.  13,  ;33.  — 5;J.  .\dest  feren«//<o  r/'vi//  acutius  viiia  in  dicei.teqnum  recta  rideat. 
lb.  Or.  1,  2.5,  110.-?)4.  Xeqve  ullvm  Ivre  diem  iutermitfTfmt  ^?/m  equestri  proelioqnid  in 
quo(|ue  esst't  viriQtis  pti'.^pict-iefi/r.  Oies.  B.  G.  7,  30. — 55.  ^uUvm.  adhuc  interm'isi  diem 
</'/</^  ali(jui(l  ad  te  lit!eiarunw/fl/r/>?.  Cic.  Att.  7.  15, 1.— 50.  A^j/^i/dicitur  aphilosophis, 
quoU  quidem  ncle  /tonesttque  dicdtur,  quin  ab  his  partum  sit  a  quibus  civitatii>us  jura 
descripta  sunt.  lb.  Rt-p.  1,  2,  2.-57.  xVi/ti/  est  quin  male  narraudo  jwssit  depravari, 
Ter.  Phorm.  4,  4,  10. 

licm.  17.  In  many  iiistancrs  relative  clauses  dependent  on  indefinite 
anlecedents  have  Ihcir  predicates  in  the  subjunctive,  according  to  the 
analogy  of  those  ^vitll  negative  antecedents.  In  these  instances  the 
idea  ot'  indefiniteness  is  transteried  to  the  relative  clause  in  a  similar 
manner   as  a  negntive  .-.ntecedent  imparts  a  negative  conception  to  the 

~  1  To  learrT.— '-^  10  tT-lMhe  trmh.— ^  prophecies  of  the  gods.—*  amons?  the  jrladiatorial 
perrormerv.  — *  being  bold  enough  to  commit  crimes.—*  worth  living. — ''  upbraided 
me  with.--"  hired. 


550 


TELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


claiipc  (lopondent  on  it.     This  constnirtion  orrurs  :  1)  If  the  antccedont 

contains  a  qudliftd  doniMl,  as  fduci  (wliicii  denies  ilic  idea  '  iiiuhi'),  quo- 

HfKqfi/.sqifc,  KtruH,  and  tUe  panicle  r<>  (OiiS.  1).     2)  If  the   lehilive  clause 

refers   lo  liie  indefinite  numeral  t^olun    (or  mitts,  in  the  nieaninir  of  kolt/s), 

as  predicate-afijectives  (see  Ous.  2.  3).     3)  If  the  relative  chinse  is  a  predi- 

cate-elause,    dependent   on    any  indefinite,   or  numeral  antecedent,   the 

principal  predicate  being  liie  abstract  verb  esi<c  (Ous.  4-9). 

Op.s.  1.  If  a  relative  dans»'  refers  to  pattci,  or  <'qnivnl('iit  expressions  in  the  principal 
pentence,  ttie  jjredicato  of  tlie  clause  is  in  the  siibjiuictive,  if  whai  is  stated  in  tlie  clause, 
is  conceived  as  the  act  of  '  few  '  or  as  happeniii};  *  rarely '.  Sn«h  cl'uises  niay  he  re- 
placed l)y  (iiialifu'd  neiraiive  sentences,  as  :  ('onsecflti  dies  panci  ornnTno  Jam  ario  nieiis« 
p,  r  qiins  Sciifltiiin  hat'Ore /ic?/'f/ ."  Hut  few  days  followrd  in  .I.iniiiry  on  wliirh  the  Senate 
conhl  le^rally  meet.  Cic.  Sest.  .'il,  74  (  =  On  most  (»f  the  following:  days  the  Senate  could 
vot  meet). — Karos  vt\\u»  insideniTs,  intm  quibvK  fern  m  in  M'anu  n^/  inv»nies  (  =  most 
of  those  y«)n  will  meet,  will  have /<«  swords).  Liv.  8,  liS. —  Y'lX  invi-iiltur  qui  Inhorihus 
b^usceptis  mm  quasi  mercC'deni  reriim  «restjltum  den<lenf  irioriain  (  =  almost  every  one 
i/e-^ireM  «riory  as  a  reward  etc.).  Cic.  Otl".  1.  1!>.  •>.").  See  Kx.  1,  "J.— Sometimes,  howi-vrr, 
in  such  clau>^es  the  indicative  occurs*,  which  always  is  necessary  if  tlie  relative-clause 
is  conceived  as  a  real  f.ict  to  which  the  <iualitied  denial,  implied  in  jxo/ci  etc..  dors  not 
refer,  as  :  Cum  pat'cis  collociTti  clteniil)us.  qi/ihtis  tamum  facinus  commtitere  a"dr//fifif. 
C'ses.  H.  C.  a.  (>().— /'(n/ci  tamen  lioni  in<rant,  (///ov  rejeclione  luirJlre  ille  non  itotucrat ; 
I?ut  there  wi-re  a  few  «rood  men  (amonj;  the  judires)  whom  In-  had  not  hctn  able  to  drivi! 
out  l)y  a  challen^'e.  Cic.  Att.  1,  It»,  .3 — 'riic  iiitcrro^riitive  formula  "  i^notim  (jin^fpie  t-t 
qui  '  (  —  quam  pauci  sunt  qui),  and  the  similar  formula  "■  quatn  umltt  f/nf  qui  \  «lieic 
the  relative  clau-es  are  j)reaicate-clanses.  always  reijuire  tin*  sul>juii<-tiv«',  as  :  Quotrnt 
eirirn  quisque  est  qui  lianc  in  rei)ul)li(  il  t^vctmn sff/UiVtrr  /  For  how  few  are  there  (  =  lh<  re 
«re  but  \  cry  few)  who  follow  this  sect  in  tli"  republic.  Cic.  Klacf.  41.  ]()i.—  (^uifm  inuUi 
dies  repfi'iri  /wasunt  qui  tali  nodi  a/iftpo/iantur /  Il>.  Tu^c.  1,  41,  '.'T.    Sev  E.\.  3.  4. 

Obs.  2.  Kelative  clauses,  dependent  on  vnus  or  fol us  as  predicate-Hdjeclives  {untts  or 
folns  est  qui  —  he  is  the  oidy  one  who),  almost  always  liave  their  predicates  in  the  sub- 
junctive, on  account  «>f  the  ncijative  nieaiiinj;  latciit  in  such  claust-s  (sdlux  e>-f  qui  hoc 
d'lcat  implyni;;  that  all  others  do  not  say  so)  :  Sa[)ieiitta  est  una  qua?  uuesiitiam  ptUat  ex 
animis  ;  It  is  wi-dom  alone  whieh  e.xpels  sadness  from  our  minds.  Cie.  Kin.  1,  to.  43.— Si 
voluptasest  xolaqucR  nos  ro<v/ ad  se,  i-i  aV/c^ta/su  apt  eiuit.irA  :  If  it  is  pleasure  alone  which 
calls  and  attracts  us  by  its  o\\  n  nature,  lb.  1,  16,  ^A. — StAux.  (-s  (C;esai )  tu/us  in  viclonjlc^ri- 
deri.f  nemo  ;  You  are  tlie  only  one  in  whose  victory  no  one  has  p<jrislifd.  lb.  I)tj.  1"2,  3t. 
— Solus  ed  hie  homo  qui  sdat  divinltus  (who  knows  it  by  divine  in^plratioll).  Plant. 
Cure.  2,  2.  33.— Ha'C  est  umi  confentio  qun'  adhuc  pfiinanseiit;  This  is  the  only  dispiitcr 
which  still  remained.  Cic.  Ac.  2,  24,  7S.— See  Ex.  5-7.— The  subjunctive  is  also  used  if 
vnus  or  f-o/us  are  us.  d  as  acce>ttiorij  predicates  (p.  2.")1,  Oks.  7.) :  I'nuui  excipi<)  Catr>"em 
in  quo  perteciissimo  Stoico  eloquentiam  non  dtsidt^nin.  Cic.  Brut.  31,  118.  —  Ejjfo  exsiiti, 
noil  electns  7inu,s  qui  jHjsxemcM:..  (not  elected  as  the  only  one  who  could  etc.).  Ih.  Hose. 
Am.  2.  5.  See  E.Y.  y.  9.— Soinctimes  unus or  f^o/usurv.  itnfdied  in  ihe  i)redicate,  as  :  Cu'-ar 
quod  SlorTni  supern'ant  (  =  uni  erant)  v'/i  in  armis  tsftnf,  eo  exercitiim  addu.xit  :  Ca'sar, 
])ecHust;the  Morini  were  tin?  only  ones  who  were  in  arm-i,  h'd  his  army  to  their  territory. 
Cais.  R.  G.  3,  28.— Sometimes,  however,  in  relaiive  clauses  dept-ndeni  on  u/ius  or  ^•o/»/^^ 
the  indicative  occurs,  as:  Tii  esses  vnus  profecto  qvi  vi.x  ullatn  ceteris  oratonhus 
iaudem  reliquisti.  Cic.  Or.  1.  17,  7(1.— ?7/rtest  amicitia  in  rebus  hunuliiis.  de  cujus  utili- 
tate  oinnes  uno  ore  cousentiunt.  lb.  Atn.  2^1,  Hf».  Comp.  Ter.  Andr.  T),  6,  •.) ;  Sen.  Kp.  92. 
The  indicative  is  nece'<s(try  iC  the  relative  clause  does  not  dei)end  on '///'/.•«■  a;- predicate- 
adjective  but  on  its  subject,  as  :  Id  ununi  bonum  est  quad  numquam  dtf/i/tqi/uri  =  id, 
quod  nuiKiuam  defrinj^itur,  unum  bonum  est;  what  never  is  worn  awHy  is  the  only  irood). 
Sen.  Ep.  92.  Also,  if  unufi  means  'one,'  the  iiidicativt^  is  used  :  Kst  vnurn  jus  quo  de- 
vincta  tst  hominum  sori<-tas;  There  is  only  one  law  by  whicli  society  is  bound  (but 
'■quo  devincfa  dC  =  it  is  the  law  alone  by  which  etc)-  Cic.  Le;r.  1,  lo,  42. 

Obs.  3.  Ofien  relative  clauses  are  attached  to  >///>/<  or  folus,au(\  also  to  primt/s.  reliqui, 
and  other  form-adjectives,  instead  of  beinij  attached  to  partitive  attrii»ut«'s  of  ihcse 
words  (see  K.  1«»,  Obs.  10).  Such  clauses  always  re(juire  tin-  subjunctive,  as:  Xenophanes 
itnus  qui  deos  esse  dicdtf,  divinaiiOni'in  lundilus  sustulit;  Xeiiophanes  aloin*  amon;^ 
those  that  beli<'ved  in  the  L'0(is,  utterly  rejected  divination  (  =  unus  fj»  ^j,s- qui  deos  es!-e 
dirtbaiit).  Cic.  I)iv.  1.  ^.—Quevi  vero  ex.^tft  et  de  quo  sit  irenioria'  prv/it'on  eloquvntem 
f\il»tie,priuius  est  M.  CethC;L^iis;  The  first  (amonr;  tho?e)  of  whom  it  i>  known  and  placed 

*  Thus  in  the  paspa<re  C:es.  B.  (i.  3,  11»  the  subjunctive  "  tvaseiinf .  phoiild  be  exi)(.-clid 
in  place  of  the  pluperlect  imiicative  ^  er:aseraut\  which  isexhibiied  by  all  ccnlicee. 


MOODS   IN   THE   RETATIVE    CLAUSE. 


551 


^ 


on  record  that  he  wa«  (they  were)  eloquent,  is  M.  Cethejjus.  Cic.  Brut.  15,  57.— Hie  qui 
m  collei'io  sacerdCtum  estuf.  pninus  post  Konuim  conditam  jcdicio  publico  est  cond»-m- 
njltus  (  =  Ihc  primus  («=j:  eis  qui. .  .enint).  lb.  IJrnt.  3-3,  Vil.—neliqui  i-vnt  cpji  inortui 
unf,  L.  Torquaius  etc.  (  =  reliqui  ex  eis  qui  niortui  svnt,  sunt  L.  T.  etc.)  lb.  7«,  265. 

Obs.  4.  Relative  predicate-clauses  with  esse,  or  with  verbs  iucludinij  the  idea  of  exist- 
ence, a^  eroi'iri  (exortus  e^t).  reperiri.  invenln.  eve/nre,  iucidere,  occurrere,  adcssp,  prce- 
.ffo  ^'sse,  if  these  verbs  are  used  as  abstkaot  pue^jicates  (p.  486.  Obs.  9),  are  introduced 
in  Enirlish  by  ""tlure  is\  '■there  are"  etc.    They  occur  in  tlie  followin<?  forms  : 

1)  With  an  INDEFINITE  ABsoLiTTE  FouM-AD.TECTiVE  as  suhject  (^'/erf^m,  non u nil i,  pauci, 
rnulti.  (afi)quit.  {a/i)quid.  quhquis,  quofusquisque,  nemo,  nihil),  as:  Sunt  quidam  quibus 
met  amilrum  videiluir;  Thfre  are  those*  to  whom  honey  seems  bitter.  Sen.  Ep.  1()9.— 
Sunt  vvilti  qui  omnTiio  (inecas  non  anient  litteras :  There  are  many  who  do  not  like 
Gn-ek  literature  at  all.  Cic.  Ac.  2,  2.— Si  quis  est  qui  hiec  putet  arte  accipi  posse  etc.;  If 
there  U  anyone  who  thinks  tiiat  this  maybe  learned  by  rules.  lb.  Or.  1,  25. —  Quisquis 
erat  qui  aliquam  partem  sceleris  atti<ris^et,  damnabStur;  Whoever  there  was  that  ri ad 
his  hand  in  any  part  of  this  crime,  was  condemned.  In.  Sest.  31.<i8.— A><  aliquid  quod 
non  oporteat.  etiamsi  Meet ;  There  is  somethini;  which  is  not  proper,  althoui^h  it  is  per- 
mitted, lb.  Balb.  3, 8.  See  Ex.  ll>-25.— For  nemo  est  qui,  nihil  est  quod,  imuci  sunt  qui  etc. 
hee  p.  54:i.  Obs.  2  foil.  ;  p.  .5')(»,  Obs,  1. 

2)  With  an  indefinite  ronM-,\DJECTivE  a?  subject  tmnEnsTooi) ;  as:  Sunt  qui  omnia 

na'i1':e  noiiine  appellent ;  There  are  some  who  call  evervthiu!;  '  nature.'  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  32. 

— Sunt  qui  eo  die  inaixno  prfplio  puirnatum  e<^e  auctores  sint;   There  are  some  who  state 

that  a  L'reat  battle  had  occurred  that  day.  Liv.  42.  66.— A'ra///  quos  moveret  Claudius; 

There  were  those  on  whom  Claudius  made  an  impression.  Liv.  3.  bS.—Erit  rnox  qui  ar- 

quaf,  nequicriuam  .\ntiochum  ultra  juga  Tauri  emotum  ;  There  will  soon  he  someltody  that 

arjju'-s  that  A'ltiochus  etc.  lb.  42,  42.— .Si  est  quod  desit ;  If  there  is  anythins;  (ihat  is) 

wantinir.  Cic.  Tusc.  5, 8.— Dum  est  unde  jus  civile  discjltur;  As  lone:  'i^*  there  is  somebody 

Irum  whom  to  learn  the  civil  law.  lb.  Verr.  1,  4.').— /!7.>-/  quod  differat  inter  justitiam  et 

vere<-uiidiim  ;  There  is  something  that  is  different  between  (i.  ^."ihere  is  «o  ne  diflereiice 

between)  justice  and  respect  (of  the  laws).  lb.  Off.  1,  -H.—Est  is?itur  ^'wquidque  referfltur; 

Thf^re  i<  a  somethinq  to  which  everythinir  refers.  lb.  Fin.  5,  6,  16.— AW  quat-nus  amicitite 

dari  venia  po.«sit;  'fhiTe  is  a  limit  tip  to  whicli  friendship  may  be  pleaded  in  excuse.  lb. 

Am.  17,  1\.—Ad^uid  qui  vos  hortentur  ut  a  nobis  desciscStis :    Thei'e  are  those  present 

who  «'xhort  you  etc.  Cies.  B.  C.  2,  32.— Sometimes  '  est  qui '  has  the  meanini:  of  '■sunt  qui ', 

as:  Est  qui  phis  ei  del)ere  se  judicet  per  quem  tutior  est,  quam  ei  per  queni  honestior; 

There  are  persons  who  think  they  are  owiiiir  a  greater  debt  etc.  Sen.  Ben.  3.  12.— £'^7'  nbi 

id  valeat;   There  are  instances  in  which  thi<  holds  «rood.   Cic.  Tusc.  .5,  8.— See  Ex.  1(M8. 

3»  With  NOUNS,  taken  in  an  indefinite  sense,  as  subjects,  correspondini?  in  the  sinjru- 
I       1. ,. ...._.  ,  ,  .     .,         .       .  .  .  .  .     ^^  with 

are  ni^en 
quirdarn  ris  {there  was  a  }X)wer)  qucR 
jreneri  consuleret  humiluo.  lb.  Tuse.  2,  ■\^,—Sunt  vhilosophi  et  fueruut  (there  are  and  were 
jihilosophers)  qui  omiiliio  nullain  habSre  censerent  humaaSrum  rerum  procurationem 
deos.  lb.  N.  D.  1.  2.  See  Ex.  26.  2S-31. 

4)  With  definite  nu.mehai.s  with  or  without  nouns :  OrnnTno  duo  sunt  qua»  condiant 
oratiOnc-m;  There  are  altoj^ether  two  thinj^s  which  spice  the  stvle.  Cic.  Oiat.  ^^.—  Tria 
sunt  qu<t  sint  efticieiida  diceiulo ;  There  are  three  fhinqs  which  niust  1)e  acconipli-hed  by 
(pul)lici  speakin<,'.  lb.  Brut.  4!».  — In  eil  urbe  suut  ««'(/'^^,  sed  duiv  qutv  Ionise  ceteris  ante- 
cellaiit.   H).  Verr.  2.4,  ii-i.—  Quafuor  sunt  capita  quce  conclQdant  nihil  esse  quod  nosci 

Bossit.  lb.  .\c.  2.  26,  83.— />'/«  turn  srcellUbant  (  =  erant)  oratores  qui  me  exciljlrent.  lb. 
rut.  «♦2.  317.— .V/7^^  7es  inciderurd  qiue  iiomioa  desidenlrent,  nee  habCrent.  Sen.  Ep.  58. 
5»  With  iNDKFtNiTR  suB-iECTs,  expressed  or  understood,  and  'inreulus  (re/mfus)  est\ 
'inrenti  (reperti\  sunt\  'exo?-tusesf\  as  abstract  predirates.  a<:  Nostra  in  repnbliea  i/i- 
ventus  ejst  f^ui  filiam  interticeret :  There  was  in  our  republic  a  man  who  killed  his  dauj^h- 
ter.  Cic.  Fin.  5.  22.— Sin  ^/7/n^  aliqui  reperti  qui  pecuniam  prseferri  amicitiie  sordiduni 
pufeni  :  If  th.-re  will  be  those  who  think  it  mran  thai  money  should  prevail  over  frieml- 
shi|).  lb.  AmAl,i>i.—/nrenfusestyumitfa(  =  Ni\m\(hio\\khun)qui  pnesttliet  e'c.  Liv.  26,  4. 
—Erortusest  serrusqui  eum  accO^-et;  Tlnrecame  a.v/a^v  to  accuse  him.  lb.  Dej,  1.  Ex.  2T. 
—Probably  the  (^ui-claiis -s  after  *  inventus  est '  etc.  were  oris^iiially  conceived  as  relative 
claus<-s  of  puKPosE(p.  .^.Viloll.)  =' S<unehody  has  been  f<>und  out.  orsiiiirled  out  by  fate  or 
a  hiiTher  ai,'encv  to  do  somethinq '  (qui  aliquid /aceref).  In  thi-  meanin-r.  the  mentioned  ex- 
pressions are  also  used  with  definite  subjrcts".  which  is  the  only  conneeiion  in  which  they 
occur  in  an/edassical  style,  as:  Tv.  Tu  eiiim  rf/}tr(us\s  Piiiloeratem  qui  superes  veriverbio. 
Alt.  Pol,  tu  invtdus's  vera  vanitiKiine  qtn  convincas  (You  have  l>een  found  out  to  surpass 

♦The  Enirlish  demonstrative  'fhose\  in  this  construction,  is  never  expressed  by  the 
Latm  demou.-trutivo  ei  or  illi,  but  is  either  omiued,  or  expressed  by  an  indtjinite. 


.5)  »  iiu  NOUNS.  laKen  in  an  indefinite  sense,  as  s!it)jects,  correspondini?  in  tin 
lar  to  the  English  indefinite  article,  and  in  the  plural  to  nouns  without  article, 
'  some  ',  as:  Sunt  homiues  quos  infamiie  suie  neqiie  pudeat,  neqne  t.-edeat ;  There  i 
who  j;re  neither  a<hamed  etc.  Cic. Verr.  1,  V2.—Fvif  quiVdam  vis  {there  was  a  iiow 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


KGr.cTUHaimr^^^^^^^     t  ,  di^ti  rb  tlu' p^'Mce.  Cic.  Ac.  2.  .■j.-So.netl.neH  both  construe- 
?i  n"  tl  ;     w    h  H^^^^^^^^^^^  »'"»  «»'^«t  NNill.  a  (Ulini.c  subject   arc  uiuted:  //n-f/./t/.v  .,i 

t^^tifxi  'i''/}'%);J  -f'l'yr.  ;x\).><L-(l  ibc  calendar  for  ihe  people»  u^e.   Cic.  Mur  H.- 
na/z/./y  Cn.  ^</      ^  ^^h^  i;,rfr//^/.«6.o/  etc.  when  «)/«^v  or  iwu,  \^  added  or 

^>R^  «s   The  mood  in  the  Qui-c]  .us>e»*  f,\ii>r  wrej^tui^,  rcpertu-^,  ti\^^  ('rort>^s  f^t,  on  ac- 

f'   »■  i-  ?.rhr?n,.l  •  fiir.r  nieaiiin"    is  aZ/rwyv  the  ^uiudnctive.    In  il.e  Qui-clau^es 

a)in.t  ol  Its  origina     hiua    im^  the  nw.od.  in  the  tune  bi'fore  Cicero,  Nvas 

Sa;;?n  "nu^I^vk.  S.^1  wSn7rchu;.e  reqinn-^.a  H.)>jnuetive  lor  other  rea.o,^. 
In  P  an  I.  an  Til-  nc  ■  this  constrnction  (ahv.ays  uith  i.idicat.ve)  occurs  m  llie  U,\\ov;- 
in./  m"  J4  A  iVhic  uno.^  credo  inter  se  dicre  etc.  I^'^»"»;,?'}^;. I'^ol  .T^-^'/J^  9^« 
"e  ri  m  /?  peroninri.  Ib.'psend.  1.5,  A1.-S>n,t  ex  te  <juit  sc.scit>ln  ,^y^- /V' ^  l|  ^'  ?^1'^- 
W  ^yJ  sriry  ef«e  amlco-,  *'/«^  quorum  in-<  lua  nun  </'/'0  uos.eie.  lb.  Irin.  1,  2,  ..4.— 
7  /  ih!!Vm/v.  Urn  mVo^^^  lb  1  2.  ♦•r4.-£,V/ rrf//'/.v  liominuni  ^wi  8e  pnnios  omnium 
ta^i^i^^^^^^ti^-  Where' the  sabjifnctive  occnrs,  it  is  1)  a  M.bjut.ctive  <. 
V^-i^ie  ^^\ti^'in^ntns  e.D,  in  the  passau-e  cp.oied  ab<.ve  (Obs.  4  N<..5);  '-i)  "  ^-'a"*"^ 
M  iunctive  ace ordin-  to  p.  m\  foil.) :  ^«/.Z,  ',"o.^  «nise.os  n.a  Cqne  /ia^^as  </^o.v  n\nje- 
^Vi"Sox?os  ^<«    7/HNf70.s' Aa/.«-.s,  tibi  feci^ti  obnoxiosj.  Plant  1  rin.  2  1, 

4S       S?       S^^^^^^^^  OITARDED   STATEMENT   ^p.-iTS):   /^^i    ,.aueis    VOS   V''^^^.    molMtOS 

S/Jln.'i\l'captrrol.n3;  4,  tr..4mMaly  a  -'lUU"etiye  on.o.j-rejUUy  u^.^^^^^^ 
i.e-ative  antecdents  :  M/iil  e^f  quod  mefuam.  Plant.  Capt.  3, .:..  Si  ^<^  *y"l'- ^;fl  /iii  '  nf 

I  2  12  am   often)  -In  Cato  and  Lucretius  this  consiiuciion  does  not  occur  .it  all.     Of 
he  ^)s:^Sfsof  CiceroV  time.  Yam,  u.es  the  c^;t.-ucnon  f^^,'^^:^ 

onlv  three  times  with  the  subjunctive:  Sunt  qui  put>-nt,\  arro  R.  H.  1,  8  ,  l>ud  V/'J  «^^«"J' 
1 12, 7;  V./?/v/./  qui  duerini  lb.  L.  L.  4  p.  l.i     W  th  the  indicative:  .S.///Z  qui  tradu 

II  T    4  D  13-   SuntQui  scrijmnmf,  lb.  p.  44;  Kd  quod  inquwiU,  lb  U.K.  3,  i  ,  iiunt 
animm^^  ^'''^^'^  '""^  '"  '^'"*"^^  consuetu.linem  sequimur 

7    ■   i*R  1   65      iH.-a?    toth^^^^^^^^  "'"^t  be  made  between  the 

instance  Ihatthe  siU-Iect  of  '".'<  (eM  etc.)  is  elliptically  omitted,  ai.d  that  it  is  expressed 
^^v  niihltnn   multi  *iU-      For  the  latter  see  OiJS.  G  and  <.  . 

\u  thfcHm^tructio.V  witlH  It  a  subject,  C.ksau  has  twice,  and  SAi-LUSTonce  the  indxca- 

;.,  «v<.  nn>j«ji«Te*-  .Sw/j/  o>/i  vufuiU  posse  te  non  decedere.  Cic.  l^am.  1,  u,  <i.i.— <v/f<t  yta, 

^•;.!!d'si;rtiu;ftnon«;2;;^ 

],w/./*<  a-ainst  all  the  codices)  nonnumquam  posse  e  c    lb  Inv.  \:^'^^-^''"\^^^^^^^^ 
iitilitaiem  pete.dam  putant  (some  Codd.  have  jmferd).  lb.  •*' J^.-f  "«Z^.^'^f: 'f  *f  J  /^^^ 
Alt  10  4  11  -Livv  very  frenueiitlv  ii^es  this  construction,  and  alN^ays  wi  h  a  suOjunc 
are -iu  the  classical  f)oe,sS he  stibjunctive  occurs  about  us  often  as  the  indurative 

rJ^;^?:aitmS^vllys  use  the  subjunctive.  In  a  few  Vf^:^^^^;^^^^^^^''^^;:^:^^ 
occ  us  {.Su/d  quiju'/iawf.  Sen.  lien.  5,  2  :  Sunt  qui  putant,  lb.  (^11.  N.  Tief-»-  * "^  V.!''?,.p 
facts  it  is  evident  that  the  subjunctive  in  the  con.lrucln.n  ^fun  ^V''  '^'^c  ^  «;;  ""*^"«^'^; 
to  the  earlier  lanLma-e,  and  that  this  mood  was  lirst  used  in  the  time  of  ^'^ro,  \atro 
sti  lus^m'  the  indicative  oftener  than  the  subjunctive,  while  Cicero  almost  always,  aiid 
Livv  alavs   his  the  subjunctive.     Tins  subjunctive,  ^v/dck  occurs  in  no  other  language 

but'the  iM'fin,  has  been  dirtVrently  explained  by  the  S^^VT^'V^'if-.^  '"^1^";^  th?I  exX 
sidtr  '  .sv/n/  (,ui  dicant '  as  equivalent  to  '^>mf  houanes  tcOes  u  duant  .  Btit  this  expla- 
nation u  HI  fail  in  mo-t  of  the  pa.sa^es  quoted  Ohs.  4.  and  below  and  >^.  '«  «^«  «^'^''t 
sible  because  modal  Uf-dauses  an;  ntrer  used  in  this  connection  (see  p.  .>».'n<>ll;.  ^^j::;jl- 
Haase  (in  Reisijrs  U-ctures,  p.  605)  considers  thi*  subjunctive  a  linguiMc  '^<f^J'^ff; 
because  the  predication  proper  is  contained  in  the  principal  predicate,  and  hence  the 
us.  ano  her  indicative  in  the  relative  clause  for  the  same  predication  w^ou  d  »^e  »'  \''  j 
euistic  pleonasm '.  Hut  it  is  difficult  to  see  how  such  a  '  pleonasm  'could  be  corrected 
6v  the  I  se  of  the  subjunctive.  On  account  of  the  late  introduci ion  ol  this  ';"»>J»;'Ct>Ne^^ 
it  i.  m<.re  probable  that  a  mere  anulo-y  ha*  caused  its  use  '^;''»^»"  !,"'«V,  7?/S 
found  in  the  negative  construciion-  ' ne/no  e.^t  qm'  etc.,  and  also  in  the  i-""^";''^-'  V" 
S./VA  e^t^q^d',  in  either  of  which  the  use  of  .he  subjunctive,  in  accordance  with  the 
ijeneral  requirements  of  this  mood,  was  established  already  in  anteclassical  style. 


/ 


MOODS  IN  THE   RELATIVE   CLAUSE. 


553 


"nt  the  indicaUve  occurs  considerJwyl  f  ene?   l?an^  in  A?.^  *'''•  T""^!-^  ^^^^'  ^'  ^  «"^  3); 

inderstood,as:  Mtdti^  re.s  ,unt  in  ryj  Lrde  snis  rnrimi  r  ^'."'.'^^••"c  ion  with  fubjecta 

Cic.  Am.  hi.-Sunt  ejus  aliquot  07wST^^n»,vl^  "?^°'''?^'"  *"'"'  ^^^^^  detrahnnt. 

4S.-Quam  multi  sunt  /^^^m^^.^quoram  prf.tt^  ejus  perspici  7,0^..^.  lb.  Brut 

-Fulrunt  etiam  alia  genera  philosopK?n  ^1?«^^  obUgavit!  lb.  Sul).  26. 

--Sunt  quidam  qui  molestas  amicitias/S?//  lb  Am  a      '^f^^/^'^^'l^'^^  ^^"  ^'-  '^'  ^'^^ 

fed  jmyjiciurd.   !Sen.  Ep.  120.*    See  Ex  :S-!S      Som  .^„,    ""^"'^*  ^^^  ^"'  "^u  donant, 

this  construction  to  remove  ambi-ukfefr^^^y!,/  w^^^      indicatives  are  necessary  in 

«lantur;  There  are  many  who  di^priAe  sLe  o  ^  ^  erimunt  aliis  quod  aliis  laW 

pre.ents.  Cic.  Ott".  1, 14.    IJad  tht^reo?,lar  ,ub  nnr^^^^^^^^^^      '•"'^f  J"  "'''^'  ^''^"^  ^»  others  as 

\qmd  aliis  largiaatur'  won  d  not  Slv  S'.;^^^^^^^         ^"^^,"  "'^'^  here,  the  clause 

intended  to  be,  since  (he  HiI>juncMve '^mS^^  purpose,  which  it  is 

tive  by  attraction  (=  they  take  fro  n  some  v^ifhPvf.ItP''^'  ^''\l''  ordinary  subjunc- 

ity  is  removed  by  Uv^cm^ eriinunlin  theind  cat iv^      if    "''  on  others).     'J'his  ambl-u- 

JV^t  in  this  construction:  the  nX  of  the  rdaUve  cl^^^^^^^  ^''  ^V'^  ''  "^^^  ^«  ^"^* 

Siqun-  c^tguiC.  Kabirium  reprehendemh.m  ;.^L^  (not  .V/«/f ^^^^^^^  /he  g„l)j„nctive,  as: 

alujui.-^cxt,titeiitQmi)os.nt  dicere.  lb  q^  3  21'         ^  ^^^"'"'^-^-  ^-'^- ^^b.  Post.  1,  l.-^m 

^^k^^^^^oX^^^"^::^^  refer toBEKrxiTK  xtrMKUAX. 

/luce  m,d  arfes  quce  l^sunthKlrth^^^^^^ 

^^^^Y-Quatuo^'lunt^proril^^^^ 

}n^.^aKvays  the  indicative,  to  disS^i^K;.-  =^ ^'i^r^^^^'Sl^^-^ 

V^'^^^n^^^^^^^l^S^^S^  -e  OBJECTS  of  ordinary  verbal 

;,'eneral]y  have  their  prethcatesi.nhrs^irNfT.vr^i?^^  ^^"^'^  relative  clau^es 

mentioned  li.  10,  Ob-  7  as    4 //  /7r  7^/^,\  ,f//«  according  tothe  analo-y  of  the  clauses 

oratio  (  =  nonnhmsunt  gloiiT^xcyT^^^^^^  «^^^'^^"a'^  conclfd^^Snr 

perfect  rhythmical  conclusion    Cic  Or<it?i    1?       if,?  ''•'^'*'  "^'^''^^^  \^^noa^  had  an  almost 
am  rendam  vit.c  sme  negent  ( ^^nnttrot'-^^^^^^^^  ^^^  vim 

qucvobsetTem.  Cic.  Fam.  G,  G  7.-Si  /S.  o^/orf  L?/.?;/"  t     '  ^^'-  ^^^--"^'f^^o  alia  signa 
Ac.  Pr.  2,  2!*,  94.  ^^^*  ^"^^  Hqueat,  iieque  respondis,  snperbis.  lb. 

a  d^n'e  X^^l^l^^^T  "^^^^^^  ^l^  '"  ^"«^'^^  «^^^  ^^«tin)  to  make 
tnuluced  by  ' there  is  ^  \nxx  \»y  '  5  ^  ?,  nerf 111  h?^  'V-"^^  "'•  *^"-'^^*»  «''^  ""t  in- 

but  also  in  the  ivDic^TivKt  a«     \v//£,?  //  -^  .     "-  'heir  predicates  in  the  subjunctive 

intentiOne  turn  remis>iun(>  motus  ixmmrnnmsUnimi^u.'  /Vi  fr~^'"'l''  '""'i^  Q^^or^'m  turn 

t.un  or  relaxation  /r^  i/,,/icr//e  the  emoXoMh^^^^^ 

conturlH-ntX  in  deiiben.tir>ue  nonnunio   a  1  •  J/V^  ^^-  '^'  ^•*'  '^^^  "^^'^^^  '^«^'J'  q"Je 

liberation.'lb.On^3.20  m.-S.??rJ.^<^^^^^^^^ 

«m//«^.xeverythin^Moitsef  si     £1^55  S^^^^^^^^ 

ces    virtually  equiralent  to   he    i,oi^  hi  w  S  i^.^  hli',h"''P'''"^-*"''  i- applied  tosenten- 

*'///nmpiisdomestic;e/^wri.f  QuTi\\l>Tm!,  .1^^^^         '.^*'  Unction  of  a  copula,  as:  //eg 

filiis  rep.(ant  ;  Tl.oe  arrtoVhe  wicked  Ui^d'm^^  co„.eeleratissimis 

pum^hM.ent  on  criminal  sons  iu  the  nam^of  S  rmrfi  fs    -^^n^^  ".!?^" 

as  I; lines  pursue  the  sons  etc.).  Cic  Kov"    Am   2     ?-     Th  ^  7  \    ^-  '^*''''®  ^•""S«  ^'^^ch. 

IS  aKshnied      Piir  thi<  fii^tinr-f VAn  ?     ..V»     1  1''-'^'  <*"  ^^^  "'ing    to  which  a  certa  n  '  quality  ' 

parin,Mhe  dinUlUc'xampl"'' Other  S  '^^  «^^P^f  ">'  ^o^' 

dicat  ve  is   used  if  the  iiiHefinitV.  ««flii 7    .      ^      .   ^^"-  ^'-  '•  '^'^^  sl'»te  that  the  in- 
(/««//a  .>w«/ J /fp  j  C^J"  -  Fa  0'/^^!%'^^^^^  ■  /'"•'^li  '■•^''^  predicate-adjective 

rare,  and  the  lule  Vu,     1  ceTtah?]^  mt  .n.^vT.^^^         • ''f  ^:  -^^"^  '"^'^  instances  are  very 
Moreover  sM(h  clauses  occu^fh.l"^^    ^^':''^''  indefinites  as  quidam,  nonnulli  etc. 

^ntqui  se  duo^soir^idS^^^JJiS.^^^c^ie^t^^^^^^^^^  "^^'^"^^  ^*"*'"  ^--^'  "^i-  ^-•- 

thJ  1:^.^:^^^^:^'^  §  ^^«^  "«^-'•)  erroneously  state,  that  in  stich  clauses 
X  Inferior  manuscripts  -ivo  conturhant. 


5S4 


RELAXrV'E  CLAUSES. 


Timneranfia  €sf.  Qvm  ratiOnem  utpcqnilmur  montt  ;  It  is  temperance  which  admonuhes 
4TfS  U  t«  r?aSn.  Cic.  Fin.  1,  14,  47.  The.e  pcr.tencc^  imi.t  bt-  d..t.n!,,nKlu(  In.m 
fhoseVTmi  In  construction,  in  which  the  relative  clau.c  cxpr.-.se«  a  qnnlUy  mdicaled  by 
is  (e<pn*^K'(l  or  under:?! ood).  a^  a  prt-dicatc-udjecuve.  bee  li.  2o,  Ubs.  4. 

1  In  oninibt.8  pspcuIip  pancidres  viri  rei^rii  sunf  qui  Mins  cnpidiiStes  qnnm  <pn  hos- 
tium  ">  ,;a"V/;;..;..^  Cic.  Fam.  15,  4,  15.-2.  ^<'r'!l!^'\J^;;:^^;^^'i^  %T\%  - 
a  corpoVo  ar<H'ent,  ct  ad  divinJlrum  rerum  ^'^fl'\'^''^:'^J'l^''"^^^^^^^ 
3  Oitotu.'i  i"itur  fs/  nmsf/>te  qui  pomniis  pareat  f  lb.  2.  eA  12.>.— 4.  Quotui^quuque  eM 
omteneit  a^te  n  numcrOrmn  ac  modorum  ?  lb.  Or.  2.  50,  l%.-5.  Solu,  est  h.c  ?"»"'' m- 
Quam  la  OieV»  ad  ernrium  /y/Vm/.  lb.  Verr.  2,  1.  38.  -r,.  Inus  eH  qui  curet  con.tantia 
Ss  quame-oniuio'ca.o.  lb.  Att.  1,  18.  7.-T.  Q.ur  (vy.)  .i  ..^ ./««  ex  onuum.  y.^ 
pe.T.  moveat.  neque  nata  est  certc,  et  set.rna  est    lb.  Kep.  k  2«  ^•-«-  "««    'K      uc 

ty,/^/w  unus  qui  ipsam  eloquentiam  /or  »//>/. /an  w.h    Brut.  97    f  ;-)?•  f^'^'f,,^',;* 
discessum  animi  a  cor  pore  ;;»/«///  esse  mortem,  lb.  1  use.  1   •».  18.-11.  Di  1^  ^rris)  n   pi 
deutia  sin.M.lSri  .unt  qui  rninntur.  lb.  Verr.  2,  1.  2.-12.  hraut  qut  ';':"-^'.'t"^*'^  Vnl? 
vl.ri    a  in  r-  -.  1!   reced.-n.lnm    C'les.  B.  C.  2,  ;«.-13.  Esse  debet,  uude  ahquul./lrt/,  deinde 
a  J  oV'z     ie      E^^^  '•e'>"«  ^?'^^''  <lici;>av>-i/  subli  iu..  C.c.  Tusc 

?  ^i5!:?2^  -  5.%S.  V"i  ^e  statim  ctaf.nnt.  Tac  H.  3.  H.-IO.  Inva.vmtur  qut  honesta 
in  niercCdeiu  cotanf/quihusque  mm  placeut  virtus  frratuita.  Sen.  Ben.  4,  l.-l*.  ^«f/f"f 
o/ihic  o  «/S>.;  /  Cic.  Tuse.  1,  31,  77.-1S.  Pntsto  tsl  qui  necjet  reui  u  lam  percipi 
?,  -s?  .e  si  lu's  lb  Ac  Pr.  32.  lOL-l^.-.V»^/»  ^uut  qvi_  non  aeerbum^'/^/^-^"  y.vere, 
lid^snpervac  nm.  Sen.  Ep.  24-20.  Est  aliquhl  quo  ^^^u.x^^  anUcedat  ^l»""  ;,i'>v;;?-7 
t\  Quicquid  est  q.od  dec  at.  id  .u.n  app^ret  qunm  ^^^l^;^^-^^:^^  'ib"  Ou  %V  f "  4  ^'  - 
27  44-22.  Midia  eonvenerutd  qui^  uientem  (xfurf^ityd  ne.m.  lb  (^>.  h.  i'4.4^ 
S:  (  u^  quil>usdam  admirahilia  vi.ieutur  j^nnultisuut  qm  P""';  "/''';' {^/^^j'-.^^^,^'^ 
o^si; -■>4  l/'///a  ocrutrunt  quiv  in  dicendo  prolutflra  ?n^a;//Mr.  II).  Or  2,  .b,  .3H4.— 
25"  Coi.sUio  ac  KU^ent  a  r/"/i  re-ere  rempublicau.  poss.ut  multi  n..Mnl,  phires  patrum 
memoria  ex^inSu.  \h.  1.2,8.-2«.  Kraut  sent.n/i.e  qmv  castra  \  an  oppuirnauda 
ceu'lTnt  neVi  C  2.30-27.\v.m7/o;-  iurmtu^est  qui  Milnnem  cum  telo  esse  dice- 
?/<  Cic  Mi  -24  16-28.  bMqua;damnxunV\  sauifas  v^c?  M'  ni>ipientem  ^noqnc  radat. 
lb  Ti-c  4  3  30.-2'.>.  Sunt  uowadlie  discij^ime  qute  offinum  (.mi;e  l^.rrtrtauf^  \h 
m  \th-kFuire  dies  qui  sequc  remque  publican,  obst.mlns  an.mis  perdiuin 
ir^«/  Sa  1  Ca  3fi-31.  i^ymvm^  lex  est  <le  reli-ione  qu<t  in  annos  sn.L'uIos  Jovis 
laterdOtem  «<?rtIto  capi^  ;«Lrt/.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  2.  51.-32.  \ovnulti  sunt  in  hoc  ..rduie  qui 
snem  ?4t    Inr^^^^^  atutruut.  eonjur.Mtionem.iue  luiscent.-m  n..n  ere- 

d    /d  ,  ro/  -X-aS? /^      n>.  Cat.  1.  12.  m.-^i.  Sunt  t>eslice  quadani  w  quit,us  tuest  a h- 
qud  simile  C^rtiti..  lb.  Fin.  5.  14.-34..  £:</.. e./amor.^/..«ran^ 
verbis  e.v/,  alius  qui  ex  (Mmtinuatis  conjunctisque_oa«.v/f/J.  lb.  ()r.  '^-^'^  .:,^-*-!;-'5?;/.'''2* 
,uut  et/uiruntqui  a  neiro,ii<  V}^^>^^',]' *'y,'"'%'';;'^^^^^^^ 

darn  ducPdo  sermOnis  qme  ifre/dt  et  tUancptur    S.ai   hp.  1( .  .-3i    />  /0^'/;^/  ^Triulud 
tractataab  on.tOre,  admirabilem  eloquent iam/a«./«/./..c.  Oral.  -••  If  •-•^'J-  f ''V  ,« 
omnl       r7^/»^m  one  in  disceptuiO.um  et  controveisiam  cadere  posst'-t    Ih.  Or.  2.  2b, 
?n-3*  -Q.Xlo^  »"^*^"'»  ^7/n/,qui  MiiOn.s  causam 

mm  //riJS.?  lb.  Mil.  5.  12.-40.  Duo  ,unt  temix>ra  quibus  no«irOrum  civium  specten. 
^/r  judicia  de  nobis?  lb.  Vat.  4,  10. 

Rem  18  If  ihe  principal  predicate  is  represented  as  jwmOle,  doubtful, 
desirable,  or  necesmn/  in  rci-ard  to  an  indefinite  antecedent  of  a  relative 
clause  whose  reality  is  dependent  on  tiie  reality  of  liie  pnncipal  sentence, 
the  predicate  of  ihe  clause  is  ij^enerally  placed  in  the  puiuunctive. 

Ob^  1  The  modes  of  n.m-reality  mentioned  above  are,  in  ihe  prine.pal  t^entence.  e^- 
pre-J^'d  bv  one  nhe  «.nammatical  forms  mentioned  Ob..  2.  wb.le  in  the-  T^"  '"'j;;,^-  i  f  ^^  ^»^^ 
I  me  klnVN  of  nnn-ri-alitv  Mrc  ."xpres-ed  by  the  subjunctive.  Kelative  elauses  of  Ihl^  kind 
a  iw^s  1  we^^  ^^/^7''^.  cxpr.«-ed  or  u.ulerstood),  ^vlnch  are  repre- 

Ben  ed  a"  l>o-iblv  real  in  .he  event  t  bat  the  principal  predicate  becomes  nnl,  as  :  mpert- 
%  /  /  %a/ij:idouod  animum  conffnnef  ^somethiiii:  must  be  found  nut.  u  h.eh  may  con- 
fiTn  the  mind  •  .le  '  «?/i"i</  '  is  f.-nnd.  it  will  cease  to  be  ind.linitc.  the  staf  of  suspense 
beh..'  exp,is,e^^       th.!^siii,junctivc.     Ma.iy  of  these  subjuncttves  are  quasi-oblique. 

Ob".  2.  The  principal  -entenres  to  which  relative  clauses  of  this  kind  are  attached, 
have  the  following  grammatical  forms  : 


MOODS  IN  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


655 


1  HafiAueo  ad  a>rarium  reffrre.  to  remit  the  balance  of  one's  accounts  to  the  treaeniy. 
1  CmVt^rrrto  thVlKMtei^^^^^^^^  the  vul-nte  has  the  indicative  perrertunt.-^  to  elect. 

C«i^;4  b  thVtyidcal  term  denoting  the  election  of  prie.t..-^  by  indulgent  remarks. 


yJf'.Z  If-.  POTKNTiAi.  predicate!»  (posse,  deb?re,  or  a  pernndial) ;  aP  :  Potest  alio  (aliquo) 
confide,  t-ut  item  ex.  rcitus  in  manu  sif,  falsum  aliquid  pro  vero  ciedi-  It  is  ZTnUelvSi 
imbT  some  other  con.ul,«Ao  likewise  has  control  oV.r  an  army,  ^ometliC  fSs^^^^^^ 
Iv  lirilrVl'V--  *^^'  ••  ^''•'-  ^''  ^\  "••'•f:  ^*^^-  "«"-«-«^ality  is7>o.*t^.,7jy.  whlS  isl./dcaled 
seVt  ce  Th^'^^^l'I.'!;'.^^^^^  Vr  '^  '^'*Vr-^'  *""  '"^'T'"^  '-y  «  I'otcntial  verb  in  the  principal 
c,^uilu1u^r  rl^.T^^^^^^^^^^^^  '^  ccmceived  as  an  indefinite  person,  who  will  be  a 

Hull     }^  ■''  "'"^^'.'7^'r"'eV'«"^«orthe  principal  predicate  becomes  real.~7?«;fmn. 
fh?f1r  -/^'ui.?'  '^"^  T^  y™''  invitanu-nta  natflne  ;  A  iource  must  bediscovend  i.?which 

mouum,  e^^c  iiinxn  dtljtt  ahquis  cujus  nt  iiicommodum  ;  Death  has  no  discomfort  •  for 
t liere  must  s(.mebody  exist  to  whom  it  is  (could  possiblv  he)  a  discon.for     Sn   En  36 
a  bus  11  Vor«.w 'is  added  to  the  principal  lenience  I'Audisti  ex  «S /^^^^ 
M.li.^sc  eum  diceiet  exeuntem.  Ter.  Hcc.  4,  1.  35.    Ilerethe  siibj,inctiveXmrer^)rt«?es 
b;rKx"'l"7r''"'"'^' ""'  ^'^^^^^^^'^^'^  "^  the  principal  sentence  is  expressed  byy^-S^^! 

i.wf V.?!!''  P'i"^'n"l  predicate  may  have  the  form  of  an  absolute  question  (S  417)  the 
^\^l^X!^TTV^''' ?'''''''  bein.^.conceived  as  subject  to  tl.e  sam"  uLertiim$ 
t^,:!.i  '"<:'"^"'«."*^  '.''^'.qiH'stioii,  as:  Almsne  est  aliquis  improbis  civibus  peculiaris 
populusan  uos  mvl^i  fuenmus  ?  Is  there  any  diflerrut  pc()ple  pocuIiai\o  arci  iz.i  s 
to  which  (people)  we  liave  hec-n  hateful?  Cic.  Ses t.  5.s,  ik-Vidistis  (rt/Vv'/S  oin 
</^/c.r.   chlamydafos  cum  macluerisy  Did  voti  see  any  one  who  luul  with  hinfth^ 

:ce;;;;;;;;;-n<!;;:'i^:'i;5.^^^iSyx'S-  ^"'-  '^  '^  '-^'^''^^  ^^^^^-  - '  q!;:;\r  srr 

ahqunncumquncouferaL  cum  quo  qmerat.  Sc-n.  Ep.  10!).-Eien  pli  causa  X/Lr^i? 
quid  quodpattal  latins.  Cic.  Oft".  3,  4,  ly.    See  Ex.  11.  12.  ponaiur  ait 

tho'.u!^^  principal  Pente.ice  may  have  tlie  form  of  a  conditional  clause,  the  reality  of 
s    /  /    i  /  ^"'i''/J''''  indelimte  antecedent  bei.g:  dependent  on  the  same  condition  as 
Atr    i'    irf  ^^^/''^,f<^-'V'f'"f'' }.<i^ifpnd)  quodpe?-tinraf  ad  me,  certion-m  me  fades.  Cic 

^U\V.'/.  V.    1f^^r"^''I/''"■'^ ''',''""'*  ''"•^'^*  ^""'  ni«''''»"^  et  natara  conqrudmus.  lb.  Am! 
1;.  r       ^*-^/^^-  Ij-lJ-     ilt'ie  belong  sentences  inirodiicrd  by  'quum'  in  the  meaning' 

t  .1  V 'e".^'''iI'e;n.r;\.?/'7M/''r/fl-''i  "^'^T  'f,  ^"''-  "'''*'"'?  ''^''^  compareaut.  id  cumulate  vidg": 
nil  .:i^.]t•^  ^^-  ^"-  '^'  "•  ^S— 1^1^'C  HI  antiquorum  mim.rum  rejiciuntur  qvum 

a   qmdnon  Inxunaannmcnta  vsUquo\v.ii,eobrmiet.  Sen.  Ep.  HJ.    But  in  ^•uch  ciausS 
Ihrindicaiive  is  as  fre(,uently  used  as  the  subjunctive.  See  Cic.  Off.  .3.  S,  3C,  •  Am  19  70 
A.   i  ir  writers  o|  thu  silver  .age  frequently  use  subjunctives  in  relative  clauses  if  Vheir 
imieliniie  antecedents  ref.-r  to  luiure-pivdicates.  ii/ place  of  a  depend.-m   future    a- • 
ScM.'.  Ep.  S     sITk    ir'n''''*  ncnimjunqut  ac  misceat  (instead  i^f  Junr/et  ac  miscmt). 

.,/?/fi  ■/ ?•  ^«"^*'^''"'''^  relative  clauses  dependent  on  the  indefinite  antecedents  aliquL^  or 
fl/^V't'/  (expressed  or.understo(,d)  take  predicates  in  the  subjunctive,  even  if  the  princi- 
pal sentei.ce  IS  represented  as  real.     Such  subjunctives  must  be  c.mskle  ed  as  c  nvln- 
lo.inl    onnst.  caused  i)artly  by  an  analogy  of  relative  clauses  with  nega  ive  amece  lent" 

to  /'.  18  .  as.  Niii  c  dici.s  a/iquKl  quod  ad  rem  penineat.  Cic.  R.  A.  18.  .'>2  —  Vjdesne 
quanta  fmrit  ap.id  Ac.demicus  verecundia?  Pl^ne  .-nim  dicmt  (i.  e.  aliquid)  qvndai 
rrni  perfimat  (something  that  is  to  the  point).  lb.  Tuse.  4,  21,  4l-Magno  in  nSore 

*  If  the  antecedent  and  the  clause  are  conceived  as  given  ideas,  and  as  real  withont 
ngard  to  the  non-reaiiiv  of  the  principal  sentence.  /A/i«rfJm/er.  is  usecMn  The  clause 
(L'eiHTally  witht.s«a,  etias  antecedent):  Discutienda  sunt  ea  qua;  ohscuranf.  Cic.  Or  3 
...,  21.,.     Sometimes  the  clause  maj-  be  conceived  as  real  or  non-real  accordiiK'  to  the 
conception  ol  the  writer,  in  which  fnstance  both  moods  would  be  crrect   as  •  Nee  pro^ 

rmmnr'oe'^M?''!    lo'-f'''?'''^  l"-'7-^  someeodlces  have  '*•^//.r  )  eis  quibus  pnmiiseris, 

.      ;  S  M  ^"'  ^-J'*'  -^'  ^^*'*'''^    "'"^  inufiha '  is  conceived  as  non-real,  hein*^  dcoendent 

on    he  fuj  ilmeiit  ..f  the  promise.     But  in  a  similar  passa^-e  the  indicatlVe  Ts  iSd     Ac 

'^^^'^^^y^[^'^''^^^^^^^  eis  ips'isuiilia  quibus  ilia  promise- 

i„LT!'vw.''"M^"""'!'y''^  in  these  relative  clauses  are  generally  interpreted  as  '  modal '  sub- 

,,   :;  V  V  ''^\V  '■';"•"'*'  •''•'"'-  <^<'"t"^^''^^^  «**  equivalent  to  a  modal  Ut-clause.    To 

thl.-    nte  pietatiun  the  ohjectnm  must  be  made  that  such  modal  Ut-eiauses  dependent 

n.issible  to  replace  the  relative  clause  by  a  modal  Ut-clause.  It  is  difficult  to  comnre- 
heiidhow  the  Lat.n  authors  sh.>uld  have  felt  these  clauses  as  Ut-c  auses  when  Siifv 
never  actually  used  Ui-clauses  in  their  place.  ^«  «»   ui  tiauscs,  ^neu  uicy 


r 


556 


RELATIVE   CL.\USES. 


MOODS  IN  THE  EELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


667 


inesttamon  aHquid  <^nod  roApnhUrr,  profntnmrn  p//m   Ih.  PhU  Y^,^^? -,latj"mSi- 
?  c  i?8  e-t  illo  die  quo  viclit  alique,n  cui  iiec  da.c  qaR.iuu.n  ;xxv.<«;^  i.ec  eriptTc.  ^cu. 


1    Omni-  ^cientia  nlifyuM  debet  hahOrc  manifestum  ex  quo  omV>ir  of  rmM^  Son   Ep 
eo  %\i'.u:d1antT-l  ,.0.^  non\oln.n  ./;/.././,  ..d  ^^'^-»r^]l-:;:Z^%!^^^^^^ 

2  6-  W-11  /W.V/m  ma7i.v/ra/«m  in  quo  n.iln  nia-n;c  ut.l.tflt.  e-';^-  />^^>  ^  J/ 
Plane  5  :i  -  -2.  Kiro  7nah  rirum  qui  p.-cui.iiC  eqeat  quan»  l'«^"»";'"/l"f.^.  '^*'-.  l.^f,; 
2  21   71  -n  .4  'y'/a  rcluria  sites  est  7"ce  ^ociOnim  anun«.»  con.olSji  jm.^  ,  valuta  in 

q  am  IS.Km  N    Ter  Em     Pn:^  i'-n.  ^i  7^./;/ ..  ««./^-  'I'd  "},t"am  farn.l.ar.^u^i 

?.    mnl    n  ri;i>    huic  quantum  credendum  bit  vide.  Cir.  Qu.  It.  1.     .  r,.-lb.  W«t^^ 

ItVn.m  7;r/no^      Z^emr.pOuat  dies.  Sen.  Ep.  'M.-U.  Uuju^  unlu«  rei  u.um  7«*  exi- 

f/a/  di<?«  venief.  lb.  70.  i  j      /   7 

iiV/w    19    If  the  antecedent  of  a  relative  clause  is  represented  as  adapted 

or  lit  for  the  purpose  expressed  in  llie  clause,  or  as  intended  for  or  serving 

a  purpose  designated  in  the  same,  the  relative  predicate  is  placed  m  the 

SUBJUNCTIVE  of  non- reality. 

Or<*  1  If  the  antoc.'dont  is  indetinifi*.  the  mere  subjunctive  of  the  relative  pn-di- 
ca?e  haithe  ,  ow.r  ,  f  d  -si^natin^'  lb-  antecedent  .^fit,apt  or  adanted  .0  ibe  aonon  e.x- 
SesseTi  predicate.  Such  relative  clau^e^  are  -enerully  rend-red  by  h  v.disb  re  a- 
S^'li;:^  ■  wi'^b '"L,  '  or  by  an  infinitive  with  'to\  as  :  fZt>i;:^<i^^ ^  ^^ 
I  see  perso.i^  present  whom  I  may  a-k  (U  e.  adapted  to  be  a>ked  bv  nie)  *  ^^^-^  '".''' 
o  4 -Fiat  in  le.iuitilte  PisOnis  paratis.iMuim  refuqvwi  q<iO  sine  labnro,  ^ine  '."«>; '^»'^ 
homhie^w/^r^  <V  •  -ni.Te  was  n  Plso's  fai.nes^.  a  r-a.iy  refu-e  xchtcli  unnmm/U  uso 
^  C  t  tS'le  a^^^  difficulty  u.  ^.  the  refu-e  was  a.lapted  to  tbetr  wants).  C.c.  \  err  '2, 
^  ifi  Ard  is^.Xed  nobis  (i.  e.  locum)  ubi.  animus  rx  hoc  f..rensi  strepilu  rr/ia.A- 
J;/f'  An'h    -  pr       r.^^^^^  f "•  "^  "'^^^'-^  »'»«  '"'"'^  m'^y  recover  Imm  tins  foreus  c 

tut  •,^'^,''"'.  J.,,    ;   ,.)      S.  inner  re<ijl))it  eiiam   snpienti    (i.  e.  /o.v/.<)  7//0  animus  .-jus 
^;  ^   ;'(^  e  ^uC^^'n^u^ulll^  f-  a  wisi  man  --•'»'i"^',..  wbiclihis  miud 
.    .!      '  1     •»     If    c.^r.    1.'«    Mv\      Til»!   mnin  est  ni/i  rem  .sv>/?"a>«' -omnilju- ;    i<>u  nave 
:;ia.u!:'^a^  o  ,;^hSia?ms;f  an  \iTmea;.l  ^ 

?on\  PI  1  liud  2  r.M  -M'dta  e  corpore  exsistunt  qmt  ncuarit  ment.m  ;  Many  thi.-s 
proceed  rroml he  body,  wincfi  .hank  (i.  e.  arc  Qt,  have  Iho  power  to  sharpen)  the 
mind.  Cic.Tusc.  1,:«,  bO.    See  Ex.  1-4. 

OBS.  2.  In  several  conventional  formulas  relative  clauses  denotin-  «'^«Ptt;'^"*;;';'  '^^^^^^^^^^^ 
>viVb  th^letlniteatiteccdetit '/*K\  referrin.Mo  prevwnis  remarks  e(m^^^^^^^^^^ 

and  similar  predicates,  a»  :  Jhec  hab>n  de  seneelQie  quce  dir.nm  :   V'V?  'T     .h/V  r'ir 
?o  make  on  old  a-'e  (  =  this  was  what  I  had  to  say,  nhat  was  adapted  (0  b^  -^f  '^  •.;  ^,; 
Sen!  it ^     Sof7/ic  haltui  de  amicitia  7^/<^  dicerevi.   lb.  Am.  27,  103  -JI<EC  habtbam 
'   1  Vpatness  — ^  if  it  13  asked  tor.— 3  This  sentence  belongs  both  to  the  rule  R.  1^^-  O»^. 

0  «».[^«/^17  Ors  4  But  Terence  who  construes  ^x<  7«^  with  the  indicahre  ^hxce^ 
'?urf.«M./the';.ii|;;nciive  on  acSt'of  the  non-reality  of  the  pre.licate  in  re,.»rd  to  the 
coverninj'  conditional  clause.  .       „  .     . 

*  If  the  antecedent  is  dettnite^ti  separate  adjective  expressing  fitness  etc.  is  -ener 
nllv   n<.  ded   (Obs    .3>    except  in   the  few  conventional  phras.-s  mentioned   Obs.   2.- 

1  Uiefoow  «.^passage  it  should  seem,  at  first  si-ht.  as  if  '7^'  ^^^'^  V^'"^^  "^  "^'f,^  /  f/ 
i,P«s  wi.^  maZ^deDendent  on  a  proMV  name  as  antecedent :  I.i  h«,c  fuit  numero  MiUia- 
wit.  Vur«^.wtodi?rrS/a^  Milt.  3.  2).  wli(>re  the  relative  clause  seems  to  have 
fhe  Zrc^^iXnfpeZ^^^^^  with  this  guard  '.     But  more  properly  the  clause 

s\o  be  maXiiof^oc  r.ymero  ^  eorum  vumero.  so  that  >'/«;'i'^  '^.J.l';;'^;;,^'^'  ^/'^^ 
to  the  covernin<'  word  of  a  partitive  attribute  (according  to  li.  1 ..  Obs.  3)  "I'^J^l^fj;';.  ^" 
IhepanuTve  attribute  itself  (  -  i.i  numero  eOrnm  quibu-s  Ula  cu.todia  crcdebfltur).- 
The  editors  generally  take  this  clause  as  quasi-oblique. 


otz/E  to  Pcirc  veUem  (instead  of  qu<B  scires,  according  to  p.  405  Obs.  3).  P).  Att.  1,  6,  2^ 

f.rfi'inlwe  tiTh""ge  uiulia^:  or  'vJith'^^Sn'ternlgative  clan?e  :  De  republic^  nihil  hc^ 
ad  te  m-i^rm  lb.  Att.  2.  22,  6.-De  spatiis  hoc  prceciptendain  habemus.  Col.  5,  5.-Msi 
quid  scribereiniww  habebam.  i\c.Vam. 'J,  Z.  ,.     .,.  -  •      ♦!,„„„, 

nns  ^  The  subiiinctive  of  adaptedness  led  to  the  peculiar  idiom  of  expressing  the  par- 
tiouHr  kirn  of  uKX  ^"hy  ndescnptive  adjective  to  which  the  relative  c  ause  (ahyays 
wH  it>  e(  ic-  e  in  t  e  subjunctive)  is  attached  with  the  lorce  of  a  compleling  object- 
\Mth  lt^  l»'^;'  V. ViV,.!  iv,  s  are  tho-e  denolingJiYrtf^•.^^  worthiness,  and  somt  times  leadiness 

hi^.<  bot'h  SV/J ^  antecedents,  are  rendered  by  partiapial  nouns  in  mg 

after  Tl  reno-^h   m    i/,  tn^ov  by  infinitives,  if  the  relative  i^  the  subject  of  the  clause 
II  t^'e  relative    s  in  an  oblique  case,  the  clause  must  be  variously  recast  in  1-''.-^'^^  ^  »;„= 
Is  n  m7()o«y' /er  t  Qui  iidl  atar  f  Will  not  that  man  he  Jit  to  be  sen   f  Cic   L.  M.  2.^,06. 
^U  iTinSe  plire?  vidf-tur  qui^  aliquando  imy>.;.^  jje^n..  esse  ;  Who  '-dpi ly  ob^^^^^^^ 
pee^ii-*  to  be  worthy  of  commanding  in  the  fuiure.  lb.  Leg.  .i,  2,  5.— Eo  inihi  <i^(fniorM 
e^s    st  «i  in  am^  meam  /ecipenm  ;  The  more  worthy  he  seemed  tome  ojbev.g 

«"/«i/  .n^^^^  Ih.  Fam    13,  1«,  2.-quid  est  dtgnius  '^^  9"^.  «"","1';  "(t^^^* 

Sentm  ri/ "w^^  VVhatismore  tvorthy  of  receiving  omv  whole  attention  ?  lb.  \  en . 
(liii^u.tm  w/i^    /|  Hlentium  ac  nox  tegat ;  Nor  do  you  deseri'e  to  be  htd- 

%'n  Vn  siilnce  ind  ?iikt.  ui:  7,  3«  -  Nulla  v-i^-'f  ur  «;>/ior  V:r^f^-^^^^^^^  ^^^ 
Iftnii^retur  (more  competent  to  speak  on  that  age).    Cic.  Am.  1,  4.-b  nguiis  ariicuiis 

l^i'SuanU'hJl'US 

t..  niiHd.-  to  fit)  the  torture  of  each  limb.  ben.  Ep.  24.— bi  piopius  C'Pi^i'*  ;»"mo\  u.ci, 

;;;S  fofe  7.1  pi^L^nt  urbem  ;  They  would  be  ;.ac/y  ^g^.^^^-'f  ^.^he  city  (or    per- 

'•.  Vio",ii.i  ..oti.in^  /o  de><erte  mv  U/wina  liim  as  companion  m  his  flight,  lb.  Att. 
M  %'2  4m  1 0  OS  ^/sSs  ^MUdiqnos  duxi.ti,  baud  i,.c/i7«o.  jud.cas  7«o.  in 
9  10,  ^-^' "^"  5"."%':;,..:'  i,,  ,he  fir^t  propositii.n,  a  relative  construction  would  liave 
fidrmreeeptu-^/ec//  .    w  urenM^^  4-2 -i>J7«a  res  visa  est  «f  simulacrum  ejus 

requ.re.l  "J^vice   vpe  t.d     70..).  }  ^"^;  ^^^^j^f '^ute  has  no  antecedent  in  thep.in- 
diei  O.acchiis  pmgi  J'>beret    lb  24   lb    w  iiere  in  construction.    Comp.  Plant. 


^l:^^Xriisr::^u;;;Uh  a  g;n:n;u;r  c^ll^e:  ^wW  a  gemndial  after  ad  (p.  1«4, 

tence,  or  if  the  '-^"'^'^-.^ent  is  the  .J^^m^^^^^^       ^^^  d'T.rfinite  .mt'Jcedents,  are  rendered 

purpose,  which  are  "-«^*  «^  '\;j'\*i  af t er  «fo "  or  ' in  order  to\  'with  theorder  to%  'so 
e  therbyan  English  object-intinitne  after    fo,  or    11  ,  ^,         ^     relative 

as  to  \  or  by  part  lelpial  nouns  in  t;K/  ,  '■f.,/''^, '  ^f J  ^^tes  de,  S^ng  pu  pose  ('  to  be  to  ' 
clauses  with  an  int  n.t.ve.  V^^"'  | J/?'^  '";\l?'Xile     h?  generally  takes 

T)     ''■^•"'nn^rSXui^t'heJt^^tliln^ 

tin- form  ol  a  final  1  ','*^J*^ '-*  l,;.".!"^  V,  Obs  (31  Often  perst.nal  pronouns  must  be  added 
the  preposiiioM  \fur  (S.e  the  ''^?^- -V^S,  ^/1,  imi.- ra«e  •  as  •  Philippus  Ai-isfotelem  Alexan- 
in  Enl:li^h  if  the  Latin  relative  is  in  ^,        J.    :^^^^^^^^^  Aristo- 

,lro  filx.  doctonm  «celvit  a  quo  ^'^■li'^/'if^.^Z^^^^  /vi^  //  m  the  1  u  es  of  c-loquence.  Cic. 
tie  as  teacher  for  his  s<.n  Al<;xa  u  er^'//iO      ^  o  /e«My^^^^^^  amiI•is^imus  :  I 

Or.  3,.%.  141.-VOS  du..  delCgi  '/ '^  .IXra.id  H^  in  til  iX^  to 

]t;?^;?:';;^^.^S'^^-E::^^::i  ^^;^;^?rei;i;^m?elS^it;  Ue  U.  C.  Trebonlus 
toaccomidish  this.  Cas.  B.  G.  7, 11. 


558 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


MOODS  IN  THE  EELATIYE  CLAUSE. 


Obs.  n.  Clau?os  clcnotinj!:  pnrpope  with  antocedent?  which  repropeiit  the  ccmcelver  of 
the  |)nrpo>;p,  do  not  irentially  «ssnnic  a  relative  form  (see  Obs.  7).  but  are  expres^isecl  by 
a  tiiiiil  Ut-(lause.  But  if  the  antecedent  is  not  the  conceiver  of  the  purpo>e,  and  ia 
represented  as  >Ymr27Mhe  purpose  of  8omc  other  person,  the  clause  almost  always 
assumes  a  relative  form  (if  nor  expressed  by  one  of  the  other  forms  mentioned 
p.  -i^i),  as:  (ieruKlni  in  castra  venerunt  }(t  (hardly  •■  (jvV)  de  indutiis  impetrilrent ;  The 
Germans  came  into  the  camp  to  procure  an  armistice.  Cies.  B.  (J.  4,  Li.— Tertia  acies 
fi'Mia  iiitulit  nt  (hardiv  ' q>tcE')  venientis  sustingret,  lb.  1,  25.  But  :  Cicsar  equitatuni 
gui  (hardiv  ?//)  mslin^ret  hostium  impetum,  misit.  lb.  1,  24.  The  relative  form  is  espe- 
cially ntcess.iry  if  with  tit  a  demonstiaiive  would  be  required,  as  :  Milites  e.v  coriis  tuni- 
cas Jecertint  quibm  (iw\  tit  tis)  tela  ritdnnt ;  The  soldi. -rs  made  tunics  out  of  hides  to 
parry  (by  them)  the  missiles.  Cies.  B.  C.  8,  44.— Ctesar  hibi  novum  helium  exoptabat  vbi 
(  =  t,i  quo  ;  but  not  nt  ibi.  or  tit  in  eo)  virtus  enitescere/)0.f><=/.'  Ciesar  was  very  desirous 
of  a  newwiir  in  which  his  <rl•eatne^s  nii-rht  shine  forth  (or't/iat"  his  greatness  etc.).  Sail. 
Cat.  54.  4.— His  delecii  ex  civitatiltus  attribuuntur  qvM'um  (hardly  til  editim)  consilio  bel- 


pose  isaitacheil,  as:  Hoc  non  fu^'it  Catniiem  netpie  Lielium.  quibus  in  hominibus  erat 
su'uma  virtus,  «-t  --umina  virtQie  ampiiflcSta  auctoritas.  et  qi/ir.  hU  rcbu><  ornainento  et 
re'tp'iblii\K pmndio  tssft  elooueiitia  (  =  and  eloquence  '  which  these  vien  jtractieed'  that 
it  miglit  be  an  ornament  and  support  etc.).  Cic.  Inv.  1,  4,  5. 

Ons.  7.  Karely  clauses  of  purpose  in  which  the  antecedent  is  represented  as  the  con- 
ceiver of  his  own  purpose,  assume  the  relative  form,  mostly  for  particular  reasons,  jis  : 
Verres  venerat  ipse  qui  esset  in  conciiio,  et  prinnis  !>eiitentiain  iDceret  (Here  the  relative 
form  indicates  ili.it  the  purpose  was  carried  out:  diff^ret  including?  pre^ruantly  the  m.-an- 
inir  of  an  indicative».  Cic.  Vt-rr.  2,  1.  2<».— Nondum  Uotnam  Eumenes  venerat  qui  ca/um- 
niando  omnia  invtmfacertt  (where  the  action  of  the  clause  is  cnly  '  rhetorically  '  n-pre- 
Beuied  as  a  purpose  of  the  coining;  '  ut..  J'aceref  would  historically  state  the  real  pur- 
pose of  Eumenes's  c,omin<;  to  Itoine).  Liv.  42, 42.-Pauca\  qiuv  ciicum  illam  exsiut 
manent  ;  A  lew  remained  to  attend  to  /itr  (where  quce  is  used  instead  of  ut  on  account  of 
the  metre).  Ter,  Eun.  3,  5,  Si. 

Obs.  8  Ifthe  whole  principal  «entence.  «)r  any  part  of  it  which  is  nota  substantive,  is  con- 
ceived as  the  /oqiciU  antecedent  of  a  linal  clause  (p.  515  foil.),  and  is  repre>ented  as  the 
tHHtrnt  bv  whicli  \hf  purpose  of  the  clause  is  attained,  the  clause  frequently  take<  a  relative 
form,  bein_'  introduced  by  quo  =  ut  eo  (in  order  that  f>>/  it),  as  :  forrupisse  dicitur  Llii- 
entius  judicium  pecuniagwo  inimlcum  tfwwm  condemnrirtt  :  in  order  to  condtinn  'by  it 
(i.  e.  corrumpendo  judicium)  his  enemv.  Cic.  Clu.  4,  y.-Deos  hoinine-que  testilmur  nos 
arma  neque  contra  patriani  cepisse.  neque  quo  pericula  allu  facertinus  ;  nor  tn  ord>-r  to 
endan'f^r  others  ' t>y  it'  (i.  e.  anna  capiendo).  Sail.  Cat.  :«.— E(iuites<)mnibus  in  oris 
pu;;njihant,  quo  se  leqiona/iis  niititib"»  pnvf'trrcnt ;  to  gain  'by  it  (t.  e.  omnibus  Jocis 
pu-nando)  dLsfincfioii  orer  the  foot  sotdierx.  Ca's.  B.  O.  2.  27."lf  the  ])nrpose  relers  to  a 
coinparat'ire,  the  form  with  quo  is  almost  always  used  in  place  of  ut  eo,  as  :  Dixit  sese 
iccirco  ah  suis  discedere  quo  /aci/iMscivitiltem  in  officio  teneret ;  in  order  to  ke^p  thirehy 

'     ■      -  •■         '  —  '   '^'-  -    '•   '^    ''-  3.— Thus  if  a 

itas 
tol- 

^  this 

kind  is  rendered  like  a  simple  'vt\  tl'e  demonstrative  eo,  imt.lied  in  it,  beinir  either 
omitted,  or  expressed  by  •  the'  before  the  comparative  (quofaciliux  teneret.  to  keep  the 
more  easily). -Kar«'lv  final  ut  is  n«^ed  in  place  of  quo  before  comparatives,  as  -.It  aperltus 
hoc  sit.  Cic  Inv.  2,  57.  no— Sometimes  gwr>  is  used  with  the  lorce  ot  tit  fnal.  when 
neither  eo  can  be  supplied,  nor  a  comparative  follows,  as  :  Ego  vos,  quo  pauca  monerein 
udvocavi.  Sail.  Cat.  58.  3. 

Obs  \)  Frequently  the  anteced«'nts  of  relative  final  clause*  are  absolute  indefinites. 
The  indelinite  aliqHix  {quidam)  in  this  connection,  in  classical  lan<;iia;:e,  is  irenenilly 
omitted  (accordini,'  to  p.  510  (2),  but  must  be  always  rendered  by  correspond  in-,'  En^'lisii 


*  Such  relative  clauses  frequentiv  represent  the  antecedent  as  acting'' tuider  orders  , 
and  thus  pas-  over  into  imp.iative' clauses,  from  which  they  can  often  be  scMrce  y_dis- 
tinMiish-d-  Postea  homines  cursare  non  destitCrnnt.  credo  q'li  Chiyso«:ono  nuntiarmt 
etc"  Tic  K  \  22,  tU)  (  i.  e.  at  the  order  of  the  accuser,  or  of  the  oMer  Roscius :  ut  tiun- 
tia'rmt  woi'.ld  implv  th.ir  own  pMrpose).-Tlms  in  the  frequent  formula  *  ;/a//J^  '^'i},}^' 
renV  and  similar  p'hrases.  as:  Ilelvctii  k-atos  ad  Caesarcm  mitluut  qui  dictnnt  etc. 
(who  were  to  say).  Ca.*s.  B.  G.  1,  7. 


nouns  (somefhinq,  ihinqs,  a  subject,  a  fart,  persons  etc.),  as  :  Aliguem  velim  qrd  mihi  ex 
hi*  locis  viani  mon<tret  ;  I  siioiild  like  somefxydy  to  show  ma  xha  way  from  this  place. 
Plant.  Rud.  1,  4.  :it).— Sordidi  etiam  putnndi  qui*  mercantur  a  mercatoribus  quod  statim 
rendant ;  Also  those  must  be  considered  as  carrying  on  a  sordid  trade  who  buy  from 
the  merchants  ('//i//7>' /'OAvV/them  directly  a^'ain.  Cic.  Ofi".  1,42,  1.50  — Dedisti  mihi  quod 
diluerem.  de  quo  disputarcni  ;  Von  have  given  me  a  fact  to  refute  and  to  discuas.  lb. 
Scaur.  2.  14.— Ciesar  ad  pi-.efi'Ctos  mittit  qui  nuntiarent  ne  hostis  prtelio  lacesserent ; 
Cu'sar  sent  messenqerx  to  the  comtnanders  to  announce  (  =  sent  word  to  the  commanders) 
not  toattack  the  eiiemv.  Cies.  B.  (J.  4,  11.— If  the  antecedents  are  negative  absolute  adjec- 
tives {nemo,ni/ii/).  the  indefinite  element  may  be  in  the  same  manner  omitted,  so  that  the 
mere  ne<'-Jiiion  remains,  as  :  Qui  niitterent'ur  non  reperiebantur  (  =  nemo  reperiebatur 
qui  mitteretiir).  Cies.  B.  C,  1.33:  but:  Homo  Justus  ?/t//i/ cuiquam  detrahit  quod  in  se 
transferat  ;  An  honest  man  does  not  take  anything  from  anyone  to  appropiiate  it  to 
himself.  Cic.  Ot!'.  3,  I'».  75*.  See  Ex.  25.  2G. 

1.  Undique  mihi  suppeditat  quod  pro  M.  Scauro  dicam.  Cic.  Scaur.  2.  46.-2.  Ego 
vero  quern fuqiam  habeo,  quetn  sequar  non  habeo.  lb.  Att.  2,  4,  2.— :^.  Quum  piimuni 
fuit  <?//i  recie  ad  te  htitras  daiem\  nihil  i)rius  mihi  faciendum  putavi  quam  ut  tibi 
irratuiarer    lb.  4,  1.  1.— 4.  H:ec  faciliora  sunt  philosophis  quo  minus  multa  patent  in 
eOrum  vita  qy(e.  fortflna  feriaf^.  lb.  Off".  1,  21.  73.-5.  Cwsar  idoneos  nactus  homines 
est  mr  qtios  ea  qiiie  vellet  ad  Pompejum  jyerferrentur.  Cies,  B.  C.  1,  9.-6.  Hunc  pro 
suis  beneflciis  Ciesar  j(/o;<e//w  jiidicaverat  quein  cum  mandatis  ad  PompCjura  mitteret. 
lb.   3,   10.— 7.  Hie  qui  postulat   idoneux  non  est  qui  impetret.  Cic.  L.  Man.  19,  57.- 
8.  Livianie  fabuUe^  non  satis  diqnm  sunt  quce  iteriim  kganfur.  lb.  Brut.  18.— 9.  Plerl- 
que  rem  idoneam  de  qua  qucerutur,  et  homines  diqnos  quibuscum  dixxerdtur  piitant. 
II).  Ac.  Pr.  2.  »;.  IS.— 10.  ETne  qui  postuiabant  indiqni  erant  qui  impetrdrent ?  II).  Ilosc. 
A  41  —11.  ()  v'irum  magnum,  diqnumq>ie  qui  in  republica  nostra  natm  esset!  lb.  Oflf. 
2  23  N3  — T'  Siciili  statuCrunt,  si  vobis  indiqni  essent  visi  quibus  opem  auxihumque 
/•f /v?/i.s\  sedis  suas  relinquere.  lb.  Verr.  2,  2,  3.-13.  Me  impcmor  dignutn  judicavit 
cui  primum  pilum  hustamm  aMondret*.  Liv.  42,  34.-14.  Si  tibi  idoneus  videor  7"?  do 
h<.mine  Siculo  ac  (ira-cnlo  j//rfi«';n.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  2, -.'9.-15.  Lacedieraonu   devicna 
Atliemen-ibus  triginta  viros  imposuere  9?/i  rempublicam  eOrum  tractarent.  SaU.  Cat. 
51  _ir,   Pia'inittit'eqiiites  qui  primnm  impetum  svxtineant.  Cius.  B.  C.  2.  2G.— 17.  Han- 
nibal tria  inillia  militum  in  silvis  dispnnit.  qui,  signo  dato,  simul  omnes  e  latebns 
exH-iterent^    Liv  25,  21.— IS.  Da  mihi  aliquid  abi  condormixcam  loci.  Plant.  Kud.  y,  7, 
13—19  Ouasi  \ppius  ille  Ciecus  viam  muniverit  non  qua  populus  nterctur,  ^ca  vbt 
impflne  xy^^m^u  latrocinarmtur.  Cic.  Mil.  7,  17.-20.  Homini    natflra  ratinnem  dedit 
nuareaerenturnmmx  appetTtus.  lb.  N.  D.  2.  12.-21.  Vos  nunc  quiestiunculam,  <f6  9J/5 
meo  arbitratu  lonuar,  poniti-  ?  Cic.  Or.  1.  22. 102.-22.  Medico  i)uto aliquid  diindum  esse, 
ouoxit  studionor.  lb.  Fam.  Ki.  4.-23.  Cohortarer  vos,  q>io  ammo Jorfiore  exxff is,  nisi  vos 
foitinresco-nossem  quam  quemquam  virum.  lb.  4.  7,  2.-24.  Omnem  oratiOiiem  attri- 
buimus  Caioni  quo  majOrem  auctoritaiem  habhet  oratio.  lb.  Sen.  1,  3.-25.  UoctOriim 
e-t  ista  consueiudout  eis  ponatur  (a  theme  is  given  to  them)  de  quo  disputent    lb. 
Am    5.  17.— 2<i.  Accusator  esses  ridiculus  si  illis  temporibus  natus  esses  quum  ab  ara- 
tro  arcessebantur  qui  consules^^ren^  lb.  R.  A.  18,  50. 

^  615.  The  GNOMIC  SUBJUNCTIVE  (i^  014)  is  used:  1)  if  the  relative 
chitisc  restncis  the  reality  of  the    pkedicate   in  the  principal   sentence 


*  Anteclassically  eaim  often  occurs  as  subjunctive  present  of  edere,  to  eat,  especially 
in  relative  clauses  .)f  purpose,  as:  Mis.-rrimus  "st  (|ni.  quum  cupit  esse,  qtiod  edit, 
non  habet  Plaut.  Capt.  3, 1,  3.-  The  relative  sul>junctive  of  purpo.se  has  a  double  nature, 
that  of  uou-reality,  and  that  of  virtual  obliquity  (p.  404,  It.  as).    If  the  antecedent  is 


Druides  hahent  qui  retjux  divlnix p,a;xint.  neque  sacrificiis  student  ;  'I  heGerma  s  neither 
lia  e  Druids  prUdinr/  orer  reli'iion,  nor  eic.  Ca-s  B.  G.  <;,  21  (  =  Druidex  nullox  habenl 
QUimvsiut,  accordi'  g  to  R.  Iti.  t)Bs.  7 ;  not,  as  Madvig  supposes  =  Druides  id  pmsint, 

t,  are  ex- 

ramas  of 

ha statu 

—6  leave  their  hiding-places. 


\ 


560 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


MOODS   IN   THE  EELATIYE  CLAUSE. 


561 


Obs.  1.  2);  2)  if  it  expresses  quality  or  modality  (R.  20);  3)  if  it  is  to 
the  principal  predicate  in  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect  {R.  21). 

Obs  1.  Relative  clauses  restrict  the  reality  of  the  predication  in  the  principal  sen- 
tence if  the  facts  of  the  latter  are  reprei^ented  as  holdinj;  «rood  only  within  the  limit»  of 
what 'is  state.l  in  the  clause.  Such  relative  clauses,  in  which  often  the  particles  Quidem 
or  modo  (at  least)  are  inserted,  generally  occur  if  the  antecedent  is  nei?atiye  (U.  It,, 
Obs  10)-  l)ut  they  may  also  refer  to  substantives  not  qualKied  by  any  torm-adjeclives, 
or  to  absolute  indeflnites  not  negative  (as  mmes,  ceten,  rdiqui,  unufO  or  to  the  whole 
sentence,  conceived  as  antecedent.  Kestiictin-  relative  clauses  generally  contain  yarioua 
moditicaiions  of  the  idea  •«>•  far  as  known\  and  may  be  generally  rendered  by  ag  far 
as'  with  a  personal  pronoun,  Veferring  to  the  antecedent,  as  :Om;jn<m  oraforum,  guog 
quidem  eqo  cognovenm,  acuiissimum  judico  Q.  Sertorium ;  Of  all  orators,  o-^rtr  a.<  7 
know  them  (or  '  at  least  of  those  with  whom  I  am  acquainted '),  I  consider  bertonus  the 
most  in«'enious  Cic.  Brut.  4S,  ISO.-Fuit  Sulpicius  vel  maxime  ommum,  quos  quidem 
eno  audlenm,  grandis  orator.  lb.  55,  20:3.-Ex  oraforibu^  AUMs  antiquissimi  sunt, 
guorum  quidem  "^aipta  conste„f,  Pericles  et  Alcihiades.  lb.  Or.  2,  '22 -I  nus  in  hac  civt- 
tate.  quem  quidem  eqo  mssim  dicere,  L.  Opimius  iiidignissime  concidit.  lb.  best.  G7,  140. 
—If  the  restrictiii"  clause  does  not  express  the  idea  'as  far  as  known  ,  the  predicate  is 
olten  round  in  ihe'indicative  (except  when  there  is  a  negative  antecedent,  see  K.  1»),Obs. 
10)-  a<  •  Ceteri  aiictores.  quonnn  quidem  e-o  ^«//i annates,  nihil  memorabile  actum  tradunt. 
Liv  3-i  G  — U(  liquas  omuls  Gneciie  laudes,  quiX,  quidem  erant  exjietrndif,  studio  suo 
inajOres'  in  banc  uri)em  transtulGrunt.  Cic.  Tusc.  2.  2,  S.-Oninia  7'/<r  v''i'^*'"J  ^^^^^ 
itidusa  sunt,  ita  locata  suat  ut  nihil  eOrum  supervacaneum  sit.  lb.  >.  D.  'i,  4*,  i-:i. 

Ob»*  2  If  re-trictin"  relative  clauses  refer  to  the  whole  sentence,  they  are  introduced 
hyquod  (p.  515,  It.  8),  occurring  in  the  followingconventional  formulas  :  1)  W  ith  the  mean- 
ino-  'as  far  as  known'  in  the  formulas  'quodsciam'  (to  the  best  of  my  knowledge,  see 
D  518.  i),  quod  senserim  '  (as  far  as  I  have  noticed),  'quod  exsfet '  (as  far  as  known  by  record), 
and  equivalent  expressions,  as :  Numquam  ilium  oflendi,  quod  quidem  ften^enm.  Uc.Am. 
27  \oi~Quod  litterU  e.tsfet,  Pherecydes  Syrius  primus  dixit  animos  esse  hominum 
sempiterims.  lb.  Tusc.  1,  Ki,  .38.  These  formulas  always  require  the  subjunctive,  except 
when  quantum  is  used  in  place  of  quod,  in  which  instance  the  cln'\^«  js  comparative, 
and  as  such  not  subject  to  the  rules  of  relative  subjunctives. -2)  ^^  iih  the  meanini.'  as 
far  as  possible '  (to  the  best  of  one's  alilily),  or  'as far  as  consistent  witli  somethincr 
eeiierallv  expressed  by  the  formulas  quod ..  .facer t  or fieHposnt.  quod  fiat  (p.  51«,  6),  but 
also  by  'quod\s\\\x  esse:  as:  Qmeso.  ut  liceat.  ixice  quod  fiat  tua  (if  you  have  no  objection, 
t  e  'a-  far  as  it  may  be  done  with  thy  c(msent'),  dare  huic  qnie  volumus  ler.  Eiin.  .i, 
2  13  In  the  formulas  of  this  kind  the  indicative  (hiture)  is  sometimes  used,  as  :  ru  ex 
cdicto  censOrum  in  Macedoniain  redlbis,  quod  sine  dolo  inalofacere  pottns  (to  the  best  of 
your  at)ility.  acting  in -ood  faith).  Liv.  43,  15.-Omnia  li:ec  confixv^^xn,  quod  ^nlvnhi 
bomnn  afque  commodum  (as  far  as  consistent  with  my  own  good).  1  er.  I  horm.  1,  2,  bi. 
Com».  Cic.  Att.  1,  5,  7,  quoted  p.  518.-3)  The  formula  'quod  in  te  (nw  etc  )  e.<  =  as 
far  as  vou  are  (I  am  etc.)  concerned',  as  far  as  it  depends  '»11  you  :  being  always  in  the 
indicative  :  Sacra  Clodiie  gentis  cur  intereunt,  quod  in  teest?  Cic  Dom.  Li,  6\. 

Rem.  20.  Relative  clauses  are  frequently  used  with  the  force  of  quali- 
tative Ut-clauses,  and  of  adveiibial  Ut-clauses  of  manner  or  in- 
tensity according  to  which  we  distinguish  1 )  relative  clauses  of  quality  ; 
2)  relative  clauses  of  manner  ;  3)  relative  clauses  of  intensity.  Each 
of  these  three  classes  requires  tin;  subjunctive. 

Obs.  1.  The  requirements  of  the  subjunctive  of  quality  are  the^  following  :  1)  The 
clau-e  must  contain  facts  which  are  stated  with  the  purpose  of  deriving  trom  them  a 
Quality  of  the  irrammatic.il  antecedent  (Gajus  est  isquirunnoHfimeat  =  irii}n^e^t 
iinnavidu-)  2)  The  quality  must  be  indicated  in  the  principal  sentence  by  one  of  ho 
form-adjectives  i.s%  talis,  ejusmodi,  which  arc  souK-times  loft  out,  but  «^e  .«hvays  //«(^^^^^^^^ 
stootl.  3)  These  form-ad  jectivi-s  must  be  either  in  the  relation  of  prediait^-w^iectires 
the  antecedent  being  the  suf,)€ct  (as  in  the  above-mentioned  example),  or  in  the  relation 
of  nttrihutfs  to  the  antecedent,  in  which  instance,  however,  they  mu^t  be  conceived  as 
kyjicnl  predicates  {Eas  re-<  gessit  qua  defendi  uequeaut  =  His  acts  are  "^l^''^'';"'»^'")-^!" 
this  form  the  relative  clause  is  virtually  the  predicate  of  the  principal  senteiu  e.  This 
logical  relation  of  the  clause  to  the  principal  sentence  must  be  considered  as  the  giam- 
matical  reason  for  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  (§  ()14). 

Obs  2  If  any  of  the  three  requirements  mentioned  in  Obs.  1  is  wanting,  the  clauso 
eithercannot  take  a  relative  form,  or  its  predicate  must  be  in  the  indicative,  or,  if  a  sub- 
junctive  is  used,  it  canuot  be  considered  as  a  subjunctive  of  quality ;  as  : 


1.  Animus  t..  est  quemridelis;  copia^  (oae  ^"0  J/a?  aw|/ts«.  •  "is  ^pint  is  ^^^^ 
1/nu  */->  •  bis  resources  are  >-ych  as  y(ru  hove  heard.  Cic.  Phil.  11,  13.  34  (Here  ine  iwo 
r^l.tTvVcl  nset  not  describe  9«a/i^i€.  of  th-  antecedents  animus  a,  d  copi<t ;  hence 
he  predicite  is  in  the  indicaWel-TUn^:  Qute  domus  non  ea  est  quam  i.ane tes  no^tn 
S/ 'Anot  cinrfant,.  lb.  Hep.  1..  13.-Kgo  i.;  ero  qui  ::^""^P«''^/'f',,;"*i  /«^X*^,3  ^'j 
11  1'  3-/>mte  esse  tinue  qui  si/m  {n»x  sivi)  vgo:  Suppose  yourselt  to  be  sucfi  as  I 
im  Here  the  chuse  does  not  descrzf>e  a  quality  of  the  antecedent,  but  deterrnines  it 
Xv'a  ^IpaZn^Uh  other  q.-.alities  (i.  ././ =  tulis  qualis).  H^nc^e  i.  ts  qut  has  the  forr^ 
of  talis  nuali^.  the  clause  must  be  in  the  indicative.  Comp.Cic.  Att.  '^^^-^-  ,1^"";-^.-  '^ 
2-  ib  i  12  2*  -But  •  E<'0  isxujn  qui  illi  concGdi  p"tem  utilius  esse  quod  poMnlat  quara 
sigiiaconterri  •  IamV/..^m..«..t0o  fhiuks  (to  think)  ^'^  rrirX^u  ?  rs'^See't IiTeI' 
mauds  than  to  fight  (  =  I  am  strongly  inclined  to  peace).  Cic.  Att.  7,  5,  5.  See  the  ux. 

^r"BUhvni:r,  qum  nunc  vestra  provlnria  est,  vici  exusti  sunt  complflres.  ^ic  L.  M. 
2,  4.  leJe  the  ivla.ive  clause  denotes  a g^m/i/y  of  the  antecedent,  but  it,  is  ^)"»;  «fd  can- 
not  be  oesi.'nated  in  the  principal  sentence  by  any  of  'he  fo.ni:«(,ject ives  ^JJ(^i^■g^^ 
modi,  as  svndet.c  antecedents  ..f  the  clause  (not:  A;«*' Bithynue  quie  est  etc),    lluice 

the  mood  of  the  cbiuse  is  the  ihdicative  /t.u^.,„v  „o,»a  «o.irh  ranse 

3    Improbaniur  ei  qua^Mus  qui  in  odia  hominum  in^.urrunt .  (Those)  irains  which  case 
the  lati  <^-  men,  are  disapproved.  Cic.  OIT.  L  42.    Here  the  clause  both  denotes  a  qu  dity 
of  I   e  antecedent   and  refers  to  a  form-adjrctive  is  as  its  syndetic  antecedent,  which 
however,  neitln"  is  a  p.edicate-:.djective.  nor  can  be  logically  conceived  as  such  (see 
Obs  6) ;  heuce  the  mood  must  be  the  indicative. 

Obs  3  If  the  syndetic  antecedent  of  a  relative  clause  of  quality  is  in  the  relation  of 
a  vredc'ae-adkctui  or  of  an  attribute-adjective  nttached  to  a  jrvedicate-novn,  or  of  a 
gZuaZ'lqen^^^^^^^  the  force  of  a  predicate-adjective,  the  l.atiii  '^^'"«f«  ."^^^'^f, 
Leof  thefollowin'-lbnns:  1.  Gajus  est  i-y  y//i  ,'  2.  Urh^e^l  ejusmodiquce ;  3.  Ghjus  est 
/a  i  "J^/i  ^  u '  T's   i"r^^^^       qui ;  5.  Hoc  est  ejus  viri  qui.     These  forms  are  variously 

rSdered  l^y'  &."iW/,Ma)  ,nau  ro\  '  the  (n)  7nan  whf  'suchiu\  'such  asto\  'such 
thaC      Sometimes  diti'.-rent  circumlocutions  are  required. 

A    In  the  forms  with  is  qui,  the  grammatical  antecedent  of  the  clause  always  is  the 
subiect  .  f  the    ent  ncet     These  f-ums  are  mostly  used  if  the  f^'"veri.iuv^  sen.enc^    s 

K^^hrS';SpS^  i-tei^S^iii^^/ivS'^T  ^i':r^  f^.^;^^;^ 

/^  foSi^s  ?Kmhor?ty  o?,.n.ers.  Cic.  Leg.  I  13.-Ego  siitn  i.^a  -^^PO-^j;^^^^ 
me  hac  <lidlcisse  :  I  am  such  a  jy^rson  (..  c  '  my  kn;;^^;^.f  ^f-'^,  ^^  i^.^^»[.,^,^/;;V^ 

^^/(Krat6iinou<</w|>^sca  s    Anceuu  tjim  nocens  impflne  eripi 

r;!i"/;!' Aw"S\!;rpnf;,tli;;H/r  JZ^rmmwl ,!,,,,  a  dcfunduut  .0  culpuhle  co„,d  be 
Kn-itched  with  impuniiv.  Cic.  Verr,  2,  1,  4.  See  Ex.  1-8. 
Tihe  folm  ejlmmii  qui  rarely  refcT.  10;,.,««.,  liut^^mo.^aKvny»  to  ...toeedent. 


Quorum  i)riiieeps  St)crates  fuit.  is  q 

t  In  sentences  of  tl 
a  noun  of  L'cneral  import  uuders 


tin  ;e;,.„c.^ ,.,  ,„.  ^-«':^B'iii^i'^&'^!^'^^ 


la- 


,..,„,„  .  o„7„,  «,  i.  *;„„„,«  •     /.  and  /0/«  in  Jlji;;}-*-,  ion  ^■^^^^^'^^l 


the;>^r.s^;rof    he  verbof  the  clause  does  not  agree  with  ''V^\'^'/'«    ^'^.^^^V'  \'  r.^^V 
pn^lfait' -m.un  understood,,  but  with  the  pe.-son  of  the  '-^^^^-^.^  ,^^^,?,,    ^  j^;;/, 
^Homana  gens  ea  est  qua^  victa  V^^^'^^^'^^  ^Jnerallv  do  (»o   =  Roinai.a  gens  ea 
predicate-noun  understood,  as  the  F«"^™f."^"^^;"',^l,L"^ ^"^  yt  ea\  The  Latins 

of  the  English  equivalents  of  these  adjectives. 


\ 


562 


EELATIVE  CL.VUSES. 


10. 


TalL^.  as  nicdlciU'-adjcrtivc.  i?»  raroly  n^^od  ^vlth  qualitative  Qui-clauseP*,  as: 
i  U- t.<<e  oDurttt  aid  tu  bonis  omnibus  {iuctin  prabew.  (."ic.  taui.  10,  W.— M  qui» 
lisoui  mc  vHu'imMiltr  a.  lOset.  lb.  Cat.  -i,  2,  y.-Muie  fn  qu.  ntly  ti.e  pivduaic- 


—  Quic'^i/iil  ej 

lb.  Ort"  1,  8,  20.  SfO  Ex.  9 

C. 

ToXe.in 

Sl%^?ttvcSi"!rccuVrwith  Vnodal  L  t-ciausf^V'a'^  l>\}ah^  mut  di  «f  rebus  InnuAiiis  i/./er- 
«/i^/  •  If  the  «'Oils  aiemch  that  tbt-y  interfere  with  the  Mflairs  of  men.  lb.  N.  I).  .3.  14,  47. 
On  the  <.il»e.  hand,  it  is  and  ejimuodi  are  predicatively  u^ec  in  the  pnmipal  sentence, 
Ut-cl:iu-es  more  rarily  occur  than  (^n-dauscs,  a. :  l^ium  ille  2.v  sit  onlior  nt  nihil  eo 
p.Uit  esse  pnesiantius.  Cic.  Or.  3,  U,  '^l.-Son  is  es,  Caiillna,  Mt  te  unquam  pador  a 
turpitudiiie  revocarit.  lb.  Cat.  1,  D.  .     ,  , 

/;  Similar  is  the  consiniction  in  which  U  and  taJU  are  attributively  attached  to  pred- 
icale-nouns,  the  subject  lieinir  the  grammatical  aiitececl.-nt  as:  E-o  vvoi^cmmUqai 
ooiitiOiiem  metuam,  (j'd  trihOnos  pi.  bis  i^rhorresnim  f  W  ill  1  be  .vwrA  n  consol  as  tube 


This  occurs  if  tlie  :;raminatical  subject  is  an  action  (.-eferied  to  by  the  reut.r  hoc\ 
tin- (lualiiy  of  which  is  df^scribed  by  a  relaiive  clause  releinn-  to  tlie  ciiaracter  ot  the 
doer     Such  relative   clauses  cannot  be   replaced   by  Ui-clauses  ;    but  their  predicate. 


ckarac'erof  a  man  wliu  in  his  mind  liad  travelled  through  innumerable  worlds.  lb.  Fin. 
•2,31. 

Ob<  4.  Ill  this  c<Mistruction  the  predicate-adjective?  is,  talis,  ejxswodi.  are  sometimes 
understood  a>  :  I)..miis  tst  (i.  e.  ea  or  tjasinodi)  7'"«  "n"'  «neilrnm  vilianim  ctdat  ;  \  he 
hoii."*e  (on  your  country-place)  U  such  a<  fotje  second  to  none  ol  my  own  villas.  Cic.  tain. 
6  18  5  —Pieces  erant,  sed  [i.  e.  e;e)  v//j6'/.v  C'-ntradlci  noii  iX}s^et  ;  It  was  a  prayer.  l)Ut 
s,^chasto  admit  of  no  contradiction.  Tac.  II.  4.  8t.  See  Ex.  ll.-Kor  ihe  co-orujnaiion 
of  relative  qualitative  clauses  to  descriptive  adjectives  see  Ji.  21,  Ous.  10. 

Ob-*  5  K"lative  clauses  dependent  on  sentences  ot  the  form  A  of  Ora.  3  (Oajus  est  w 
oui)  have  tln^  indicative:  1)  if  thev  do  not  denote  quality,  provided  tlie  sut)jiinctive  is 
not  required  for  other  reasons  (see  //.  21,  p.  5(kS.  iK.te*) ;  as  :  Suscipe  paulispermea»  partis, 
et  emu  le  tsse  liii<'e  t/i'isi/m  er/o  (  =  think  vourscll  to  be  in  my  place).  Cic.  bam.  3.  12.— A* 
erai  (I'ti  ipsu  eain  sed.-m  roverat ;  It  was  lie  who  had  himsell  voted  that  temple.  Liv.  40, 
34  —I'u  es  i,vqui  me  s-cntentiis  tuis  sa-pissime  ornasti  ;  It  is  you  who  have  mo>t  fre- 
•cted  my  interest  by  your  voles  on  tlie  Senate).  Cic.  F.im.  15,4.  II.     (See 


has  its  pedicaie  in  the  indi.  aiive,  even  if  it  may  be  conceived  as  describinv  a  quality 
of  the  subject  J.  Hence,  if  there  are  several  co-ordinate  (jui-clanses  dependent  on  llie  seu- 
"  *  From  talis  qui.  the  cotnbi^iaTion7«/i.*  qualis  must  be  distiiiiruished,  which  never  has 
the  value  of  a  qualitative  (^iii-dau-e,  but  always  has  a  comparaiice  meaninir,  requiiinj,' 
the  indicative  (See  Comparative  clauses).     Talis  qui  always  requires  the  subjunctive 

(see  Obs.  7,  and  loot  note  ti.  ,  ,  .     .    .       .  .  ,      , 

t  Som. times  relativeclau-es  of  qnalitv  have  as  antecedents  subjects  to  which  a  demon- 
strative (is)  referriui:  to  a  prerious  sent>r/ice,  is  attached.  In  this  insiame  iv  is  not  re- 
I)eaied  as  predicate-adjective,  as  :  /.*  erat  annus  quo  Ciesari  per  l-'jes  consiilem  tieri  licS- 
ret  (  =  ^  or  hir  annus  erat  is  quo  etc.).  Cies.  B.  C.  3,  1.  The  clause  'quo  ticeret '  is  C(»ii- 
ceived  asaqualiiy  of  the  year  by  which  it  came  (a-*  all  other  ^imllar  years)  under  the 
j^eiieral  requirements  of  the  election  laws  in  reirard  to  C:esar.  The 
the  indicative  would  denote  a  permission  referriej;  to  that  year  only. 


The  same  clause  with 


MOODS   IN  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


MS 


tences  of  the  form  A,  Obs.  3,  those  predicates  referring  to  a  time  anterior  to  JJat  of  the 
principal  Pentenceare  placed  in  the  indicative,  while  those  belon-in- to  the  time  spoken 
of,  are  in  the  sulnunctive,  as  :  Et  reus  ui  est  cut  existimatio  sancti-sima /wti  semper,  etjudex 
est  is  nutni  iios  nou  minus  bene  de  nobis  exislimare  quam  secunnum  nos  judicare  wfi- 
mus,  et  advocatio  ea  est  quam  pr.-pter  eximiam  splenudr.  m  yereri  «''^f-^fi*"^-  ^'^' ,^.- ^ 
6,  1.  .-Genus  hominum  yids  erat  cui  liclM  libere  f«<^^-'e  q"od  ^;r'^'"V^^''^A?"i7  ^d?i.?nff 
Quai  paullo  ante  apud  a.iversarios  fuevant.  Ca's.  B  C.  2.29.  See  Ex  12-4.-4)  bome- 
finVen,iit  rarely,  in  relative  qualitative  clauses  of  the  form  ^,  not  belongin-  to  any  of 
the  mentioned  e.xceptions.  the  indicative  is  used,  as  :  Ista  quidem  senteutia  ea  est  qu(Z 
necjue  amicos  p«?a^  nee  inimTcos  iollit.  Liv.  9,  3. 

Obs    6   Often  the  syndetic  antecedent  'w'  of  a  relative  clanse  of  quality  is  in  the 
relation  c'.f  an  atti-ifnde  to  the  jriammatical  antecedent  (or  it  may  be  u*«d  «-;  «»  "  J^"  "  f 
adjective),  the  principal  sentence  havinir  an  ordinary  vert)al  predicate.    The  Latin  lan- 
e  i-e  oftei.  ust's  this  lorm  of  the  sentence  in  place,  and  with  the  (orceof  the  predicative 
fonnsmenth.ned  Obs.  3,  in  which  instance  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  generally  placed 
in  the  subjunctice.    The  criterion  of  this  ccmstruction  is,  that  i;  may  be  replaced  bv  tlie 
predicativ'c  form  considered  in  Obs.  3,  and  that  the  prin<;ipal  Predicate,  containing  a 
fact  conceived  as  already  kn<.wn  and  granted,  may  be  relatively  attached     «    ^^1  a"tj'Ct- 
detit  as  •  Eas  res  nesse ram  quorum  m-n  unus  auctor.  sed  dux  omnium  voluntjltis/?/t.s^f  m  . 
1  had  done  ('hoseMhir.gs  of  which  I  was  not  the  sole  author,  but  (in  regard  to  which)  I 
ac  e     as  the  or-an  of  The  universal  will.   Cic.  Sest.  HI.  :iS.     Here  the  author  does  not 
mean  to  assert  the  principal  predicate  qesseram  as  such,  since  the  acts  relerred  t'>  were 
a  -edv  spoken  of  \n  the  previous  sentences.     But  he  means  to  assert  the  -7«a/t  J.  of   hese 
acts  described  in  the  relative  clause,  so  that  the  passage  is  logic>illy  equivalent  o    Kes, 
5««;  qe.seram,  e.tfuerant  quarum. .  .fuissem  \     In  these  co.istructions  the  ';y"df' f  «•   «' 
cedent  is  (or  talis,  ejusmo^Ji,  see  Obs.  7),  being  always  empliatical,  and  s  unMUg,  in  con- 
nect On  with  the'snbjunciv'e,  the  real  meaning  of  the  pa^sHge,  >^  ^f,^  ^  .^'j  "J'  ,  .' ^^ 
prose,  and  always  must  be  understood.     UK'lauses  cannot  be  u«ed  in  place  ««/  »^"1«'«- 
tive  clauses   unless  the  construction  is  first  translormed  into  a  construction  of  the  oini 
A,  OBS.  .3:  as  :  Non  ab  frt  republica  avellar,  qua  carendum  esse  dokam  (  =  «{^^P"^' Vf 
a  nua  avellar  non  est  ea  qua  etc..  or 'non  est  ea  nt  carendum  ea  esse  doleam   ;  1  he  lepuD- 
fic^  fimn  w  lich  1  shall  be  torn  awav,  is  not  such  that  I  should  be  sorry  lor  being  (le- 
ri\ed  of  Cic.  Fam.  (i.  4,  \.-Ki  mandasti  cui  ex,,e,nret  illml  venire  quam  plurin  o 

\L  Vir  cui  ynandasti],  est  u  cui  expedlret:  He  to  whom  you  ''«f^  r/^^^/V^f  r^fLi^r 
a  man  win.)  has  an  interest  in  its  selling  as  high  as  posMble.  lb  I- am.  i,  \^--*-^m 
Vctiiti^n  rostra  produxit.  eumque  in  .0  /oro  constii nit  r/j/o  Bibulo.cx>nsuli  «^P^'^e 
mm  lief  re  {  =  loc.  s,  in  <iuo  eum  cnstituit  is  erat  nt  Bifnilo  60  aspn-are  non  licSret 
a"  .'.in-  a  place  to  him  \o  which  etc..  or  'the  place  assiumed  to  h.m  feeing  svch  that 
prcM  lb  Alt  2  24  3-Tu  ifd  ems  vid  omnia  scire  7)0..^.s  (  =  locus,  ubi  ens,  t^^  est 
Vtm  ilc.)^  li)  Fam  «,  20.  2*.  See  Ex.  l;Vl9-If  relative^lauses^^len^^ 
heTTc^c^i^^W  h^ve  tenses  reterriug  t-.  a  time  anterior  to  that  of  tlie  principal  ^^-'itence. 
Chmses  de  ndent  <m  sentences  ofthe  form  ^,  admit  these  tenses,  bit  "^''^yl^^'^i^  ^^^^ 
thir  predicates  in  the  subj.inctive.-If  a  perfect  tense  in  relative  clauses  of  the  foim  A 
nc  ti<  e<  the  pre'ent  time  (corresponding  to  the  English  present -perfect),  it  may  be 
placed  eiihl^r  1.1  tin.  subjunct  :  A^  enim  est  ilie  tf«t  semper  voluntft- 

^^!;^^;!"nunrS1;ei..Sly^t;':ider  stibjtinctivos  in  relative  clauses  a.  qt^itative 
..ubiunctiveV  aith...i.di  .hey  do  not  corresp.md  to  t)ie  requirements  ol  this  rule,  as  in  the 
S&"A>Hssages(MKiia.NG  §704):  (^v^^^^^^  in  hiatum  ^<';^p}^^l.^^^'^^'^'(^^ 
ferunt  faliuho,  animadvertit,  cujus  in  lateribus  f..res  ^'"''^f'  •  ^^^-^^,^?.;' *^„,,.;,  /^/^^^^^^^ 
ttiis  relative  clause  expresses  a  quality  of  the  bronze  horse.     But  the  quality  is  siinpiy 
Ht  ?e  1    <  a  fact  vithoiit  any  predicate  force,  so  that  the  clause  could  neither  be  replacet 
?n  u    n-cl  ui  V   u  f  cm  antecedent  '  eum '  bo  used,  nor  could  the  pnncipa 

uredilvlte  •«";;;aZr/i',  which  is  stated  as  an  independent  fact  be  relatujy  attached 
u^-Ueauus'  taken  predicativelv.  The  subjunctive  essent  evidently  is  quast^obliqne  .h^xuj, 
represe^  el  as  he^st'  enient  of  the  fable.-Natflra  nihil  habet  P'-«^'*'«"';!'^' "' ''  '^  .V^ 
m^X^  exmtat  quam  honestatem.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,20.     Here  the  sul)junctivj  .ay^/a^  evi- 

3  'rtlv  i'  ^t  a  Mibjunctive  of  quality,  but  a  '  "^7«'^^"f  T^'t  ^^'^Sh'c;•HmnSr^^ 
Ors  7   1  -Some  -rammarians  (for  inst.  the  author  of  the  Publ.  Sch.  ^'  ammar)  sa>  .    7* 
o/^  take«  tic  su1n"unctive  if  •  qui '  is  consecutive  and  indefinite     =  such  a  o"f '^at^)    but 

».MUM-ilK'  (letihite  and   the   render  iil's  'the  person  ivho    and    sucn  aone  inui    «'^*;'J' 
?n'quelvu?ed  without  anv  appreciable  difference.     Moreover  this  nile  foes  not  deter^ 
mine  the  instance  when^.(,  'Ts  ri./ consecutive  «^j*^  "\f  ««'l^'^.^Y 
that  has  most  perplexed  the  grammarians,  bee  p.  5b8  foil.,  fool-note  j. 


\ 


564: 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


K 


MOODS  IN  THE  EEIATIVE  CIAUSE. 


56S 


ferrinfrto  'w'.bnt  the  principal  ?ontence  does  not  admit  of  the  transformation  mentioned, 
the  indicatire  mu?t  be  ustd,  unless  tht-  subjunctive  is  required  for  other  reasons,  a»? :  I're- 
mt'batur  muititado  ab  eU  qui  (najOres  opes  haMbant.  Uic.  Off.  2,  12,  41,  H«Te  the  prin- 
cipal predicate  ;;rgm^*!>rt^/r  contains  a  new  fact,  asserted  as  such  by  the  author,  the  rela- 
tive clause  liavinir  merely  a  determinative  nature,  desii^natins:  the  passive  agent.  But  if 
hahlbani  is  chauijed  into  the  subjunctive  kabercnt.  the  predicate  prernebatur  would  be 
represented  as  already  known,  or  as  mentioned  before,  wl»ile  the  statement  in  the  clause 
would  contain  the  real  assertion  (  =  Homines,  qtiibus  muititado  premebStur,  ei  (-rant 
qui  niajnres  opes  habC'rent). — An  indicative  must  als.)  be  used  if  the  clause,  even  in  the 
pr<'dicative  construction,  would  require  the  indicative  (according  to  Obs.  5),  as:  Civis 
erat  expulsus  is  i/i/i  reinpublicam  ex  seniltus  auct.oritflte  defends  rat .  Cic.  Sest.  24.  5.J. 
— Eid(!ni  in  eis  elabOrant  qiuv  sciunt  nihil  ad  se  pertinCre.  II).  Sen.  7,  24— In  urbe  ea  es 
ubi  naUi  etit  ratio  ac  moderatio  vitie  (not  =  Urbs,  irj  qua  es.  ea  est  ut  ifd  nata  nf).  Cic. 
Fam.  ti.  1.  6.  Compare  with  :  Sed  in  trd  es  urhe  in  qua  h;ec  vel  plura  parietes  ipsi  loqui 
posse  riUeantur.  Ih.  (i,  3,  3.— Sometimes,  however,  in  clauses  of  this  kind  the  indicative 
IS  used,  even  if  all  the  requirements  of  a  subjunctive  exist,  as:  Caio  et  ea  sentit  qute  non 
fi&ue  probanftir  in  vul«:ju«,  ei  in  ed  est  ha-resi  quiv  nullum  sequitur  florem  oratiOnis  (  = 
Qiiue  Call)  sentit  ea  sunt  quiB ..  .probe  ntur ;  ha'resis  in  qua  est,  ta  est  qucE.  ..sequdtur). 
Cic.  Parad.  I'ro.  I.—Id  enim  bellum  fjerunt  quod  ab  omnibus  m^nxWtVi»  pntttdt ur  (  =  Hel- 
ium, quod  1,'erunt,  id  est  nt  ab  omnibus  gentibiis  probCtur).  lb,  Phil.  11,  15,  ;i9.* 

Ons.  7.  Sometimes  ^^/t*and  ejnsmodi  may  be  used  with  the  force  of  i*  in  clauses  of 
this  kind  (Obs.  (i),  in  which  instance  the  mhjunctire  is  always  necessary,  as:  Taltin  in- 
juriam  aeee|)erant  qua/n  nulhl  leu'e  satis  difjjne  persequi  jM'i.^enf.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 1, :«.— Mild 
causa  talis  obhlta  est  in  qua  oratio  deesse  nemini  jMsnt^.  lb.  L.  M.  1,  3.  Sec  Ex.  20.  21. 

Obs.  8.  Adverbial  IJt-clauses  of  manner  of  the  form  'ita  ut  i*'  can  jreneraHy  not  assume 
a  relative  form,  as:  Hi  ita  vivtmt  ut  edru/n  probetur  fides.  Cic.  Am.  5,  I'.».  This  Ul-clause 
cannot  be  replaced  by  a  relative  clause  'III  (ita)  vivunt  quorum  pcobefur  fides',  which 
would  mean  'Qui  vivunt  ei  sunt  ut  eHrum  fid«'s  |)r«)l'Ciur\  But  sometimes  relative 
clauses  have  tiie  fore»;  of  adrt/bial  Ut-clauses  of  manner,  namely  1>  if  the  relative y^/o// 
refers  to  the  whole  principal  sentence  as  anteeedeiit  (p.  515,  7?.  8i,  as:  In  enodandis 
nominihus  vos  Stoici,  quod  miserandu9n  nt.  labori\tis;  In  the  explanation  of  names 
you  Stoics  blunder  so //m^  it  is  pitiable.  Cic.  N.  D.  l,4i.— .Eta;,  uo^iva.  quod  inttrdum 
7>'/rfw/,  jurisiijnjlia  est ;  Our  time  is  so  ij^norant  in  the  law,  tha'  it  sometime.'^  is  a  shame. 
Cic.  Or.  1,  10.  40  ;  2)  if  rehitive  duises  are  coordinate  to  predicative  or  attributive  de- 
scriptive adjectives.  See  li.  21,  Obs.  10. 

Obs.  9.  Relative  clauses  are  sometimes  used  to  de«^cribe  the '  intkssitv  '  of  a  quality 
referring  to  their  antecedent-.  The  regular  form  of  diUfes  of  intensity  is  that  of  an 
Ul-clau-<e,G\-on  it  the  princip.d  sentence  contains  an  ant  cedent  of  the  clause  (p.  4:;7i,  as: 
Tanta  vis  justitiie  est  ut  ea  etiam  latrOnum  opes  firmet  atqiie  auL'eat.  Cic.  Ot!'.  2,  11,  40. 
But  the  clause  takes  almost  always  a  relative  form  in  the  peculiar  idiom  of  the  form 
'Nemo  est  tarn  Inmus  (forlis  etc.)  qui  hoc faciat\  and  in  eijuivalent  constructions  with 
nihil,  null  us,  with  iiuerrogatives  of  negative  force,  or  negative  adverbs.  These  forms 
are  the  same  as  the  relative  uredicate-clauses  dependent  on  negative  anti'Cedents  di.  U», 
Obs.  2,  7),  and  are  eraploy«'d  to  make  the  statement  of  the  clause  more  emphatical  by 
denving  that  even  the  greatest  intensity  of  certain  qualities  «)r  the  indefinite  subject 
caiMiot  affect  the  facts  stated  in  the  clause.  Such  n  dative  claus«'9,  having  the  adverb /am 
as  syndetic  antecedent  (which  is  merged  in  tantus  in  place  of  tam  maqnus),  must  be  cou- 

♦  A  peculiar  species  of  qualitative  relative  clauses  are  tho-<e  wliich  designate  things 
by  certain  quavtitativk  properties  pertaining  to  them,  for  inst..  by  their  value,  size, 
distance  etc.  They  always  occur  with  a  subjunctive,  and  generally  without  a  syndetic 
antecedent,  as  :  O  societiltem  captiOsaui  et  indignasn,  ul)i  alter  HS  quinqiiaginta  millia, 
alter  centum  millium  quitd  sit  in  societiltem  ali'ert :  And  wliere  tl»e  other  party  brings 
into  the  partnership  what  is  worth  (^-f  much  as  100,000  sesterces.  Cic.  11.  Com.  10.  2<.*  (  = 
where  what  the  other  invests  in  the  concern  is  worth  etc.). — Paucnlis  men>iibus  lurta 
prietoris,  quie  essent  HS  duodecies  ex  uno  oppido  exportati  sunt ;  Within  a  few  months 
the  pnetor's  stealings,  which  were  as  high  as  6  million  sesterces,  were  sent  off  from  a 
siiiiile  city  (=  the  stealings,  which  were  sent  from  one  single  city,  amounted  to  etc.).  Cic. 
Verr.  2,  2,  75.— .At  ille,  mille  et  octoginta  stadia  quod  abesset,  videi)at :  But  that  man  saw 
(could  see)  things  which  were  at  a  distance  of  1080  stadia  (=  the  distance  at  which  he 
couhl  see  tlnngs  amounted  to  1080  stadia).  Cic.  Ac.  Pr.  2,  2,').— Nam  vir  bonus  emet  de- 
nario  quod  nt  mille  denarium  ?  (  ^  if  what  he  buys  for  a  denarius  is  worth  a  thousand 
denarii).  Cic.  Ott.  3,  23.  The  subjunctive  in  the  last  passage  may  also  be  relerred  to  tlio 
rule  p.  555,  B. 

t  This  passage  is  quoted  bv  some  gramtnarians  (Pub).  Sch.  Or.  p.  370)  with  an  indica- 
tive {iM)t«sf)  to  prove  that  talis  qui  sometimes  occurs  with  an  indicative.  But  all  the 
critical  edition?,  by  authority  of  the  belter  codd.,  give  the  subjunctive />3iJ#i^  Tuere  ia 
no  other  proof  lor  the  use  ol  the  indicative  after  talis  qui. 


eidered  as  equivalents  of  Ut-clanses  of  intensity,  and  hence  frequently  take  the  form  of 
a  Ouin-clause  if  they  are  negative  (R.  16,  Obs.  U)  :  as:  A'mo  e.4  tarn  senex  qm  se  annum 
non  vufet  posse  vivere  (  =  nt  se  non  putet  etc.) ;  Nobody  is  so  old  as  not  to  believe  he 
nii'dit  live  another  vear  (the  same  as  'Nemo  est  qui  se  annum  non  putet  posse  vivere 
quanivis  sit  senex'')  Cic.  Sen.  7,  21.— In  hello  nihU  tarn  In'e  est  qvod  non  maLMiae  inter- 
dum  rei  momentum  facial:  In  war  nothing  is  so  insignificant  that  it  might  not  scmietitnes 
be  of  .'reat  infinence  on  the  course  of  events.  Liv.  25.  18.— AV^'/«  turn  reimsso  ammo 
Quifnuam  fuit  qui  ea  nocte  conquieverit ;  Nor  was  there  any  one  of  such  equanimity 
that  he  coiild  sleep  in  that  night.  Cses.  B.C.  1,  2\.-^ec  verot/{/a  vis  imperii  tarda  est 
qu.e  preinente  meiu  }X)snt  esse  diuturna.  Cic.  Olf.  2,  7,  2o.-Q>as  hmno  t-^^t  tanta  cou&- 
deiitia  f/ui  sacerdOiem  audeat  vioiare  ?  Plant.  Rtid.  3,  2,  32.— Ai/<r/  tarn  obsurde  diet  potest 
oucMl  non  dirdtvr  ab  aliquo  philosophGrum.  Cic.  Div.  2.  ^i^.-Netno  est  torn  fortis  quia  rei 
novitate/^r/M/^'e/'//-.  Cas.  B.  G.  6,  39.  See  Ex.  n-2S.—  lt-clanses  are  less  frequently  iised 
in  phice  of  such  ndative  or  Quin-dauses,  as  :  Nee  gum  «am  stultus  ut  te  usflra  falsi 
t'audii  frni  velim.  Cic.  Fam.  6,  12,  1. 

t)B^  10  Aside  from  the  form  mentioned  Obs.  9,  clanses  of  intensity  rarely  take  a 
relative  form  as  :  StatuCrunt  tantum  illud  esse  maleficium  quod  «periri  illustrailque 
dtbtret.  Cic.  Sull.  2.  extr.  Sometimes  taidus  is  understood,  as:  Yidi  cisternam  qucE 
(i.  e.  tanta  fuit  vt)  sufficere  in  usum  vel  exerciiuj?  ;>0e;»6/.  Sen.  Ep.  8G*. 

1    Equidem  is  sum  qui  istos  plausus  semper  contempserim.  Cic.  Phil.  1, 15,  37.-2.  Is 
enim  sum  qui  vi«'iliis,  curi-^,  periculis  jyerfecerim  ut  non  obstarem  reipnbluae.  lb.  12, 
8  21  -3  (ieiius  s'cribendi  id  fuit  quod  nemo  ahjecio  animo»  lacere  pa^set.  lb.  Att.  12, 
40  ^—4  Is  t'liim  fuerani,  cui"^  qiiuin  liceret  majOres  ex  otio  fructus  capere  quam  cete- 
ris   won  dubitavt'rim  me  gravi-simis  tempestaiibus  obviam /(prre.  lb.  Rep.  1,4,7.— 
5   'Non  sumus  ei  quorum  vagllur  animus  errOre,  nee  hab^at  nmquam  quid  sequatur. 
li)    Off"  2  2—0   Si  mod»)  is  sum  qui  id  possim  judicare.  lb.   Brur.   49.  18«.- 7.  Aeque 
is  'sum  qui  "ravi^sime  ex  vobis  mortis  periculo  ter?ear.  Cits.  B.  G.  5,  .3d.— 8.  Aon  sumus 
ei  quibus  nihil  vernm  ridedtur.  Cic.  N.  D.  1,  5,  12.-9.  Nomen  legati  ejusmodi  esse 
debet  miod  non  modo  inter  r-ociOrum  jura,  sed  etiam  inter  hostium  tela  Incolume  vtv- 
situr    11)   Verr  2   1   ;«  —10.  Genus  ejusmodi  fuit  criminum  quod  non  totum  penderet 
ex  te'ste,'s:ed  q'uod  jmi'derdret  judex  ipse  per  se.  lb.  Scaur.  2,  14.— 11.  Accessit  coumiI 
hortator    At  aiii  consul!  Si  prudentiam  qu:erinius,  qui  minime  falli  ;)0,v,v^/;  si  virtfi- 
tem   rt./i'niillam  paceiny>/o^/a/^Miisi  .Antonio  victo.  Ih.  Ph.  12,  1.-12.  Estne  Sthei.ins 
is  r///j  omnTs  honOres,  facillime  quum  adept  us  esset,  amplissime  ac  magnificent  issi  me 
n^^ssit  2*  lb   Verr  2  2,  40.— Ki.  Hoctes  ei  sunt  qum  proximo  anno  daniore  debefiastis. 
Tac  V  A"r  :i4 --il.Non   hostis  f-v/ i*  cwj^/.'^priesidium  Claterna  (/-^'ciMlirtius  *  Cic. 
Phil   7*8  21  —15   -Majoriluis  vestris  cum  fo  hoste  res  erat''  qm  hat^eret  rempublicain, 
curiam',  irarium    H».  4,  6,  14.-ir,.  Prodigi  sunt  qui  }>ecHnias  profundum  >"   f«;  res 
o'idrum  memoiiam  ant  brevem,  aut  nnllam  omi.Ino  sint  rehcfun*.  lb.  OIT.  2,  lb.  3-5.— 
17   Cum  eo  ho-te  res  e.<t  qui  he^terno  die  delendi  omnis  exercitus  lor»flna  per  soror- 
diam  usus  non  sit^.  Liv.  7.  :i^.-18.  Manlius  prieceps  ad  id  cert  amen  agitur  qm'^  vince- 
ret  an  vincerStur,  hand  multum  interesset.  lb.  8,  7.-19.  Eiat  in  <  ppido  conventus  is 
oui  ex  variis  <-eneribus  constdret.  Cies.  B.  C.  2, 30.-20.  Naiilra  dedit  tuleyn  mcntem  qucB 
omnem   virtQtem   capere   i)Osset.    Cic.  Fin.  5,  21,  59.-21.  'va/<^.s- viri    mitteoantur    quo- 
rum de  c(nl^ilio  hperSri  7>o,sw/,  imperatOres  nihil  indignum  decretflros  esse.  Liv.  4o, 
17  —22  Nulla  tarn  dttestabilis  pestis  est  quce  non  homini  ab  homine  nasciitur.  Cic.  Off. 
2  5  10-**')  Quis  est  tarn  stultus  cui  sit  explordtum  se  ad  vesperum  esse  victarum  ?  lb. 
sVn    19  67—24   Nulla  gens  tarn  immdnis  nmquam  fuit,  in  qva  tam   crud61is  hostis 
natrhe  'sit  inventus.  Ih.  Sull.  27,  76—25.  Ecquem  tam  amen/em  esse  putas.  qm  illud  quo 
Ve<caiur  ileum  esse  credat .^  H).  N.  D.  3,  16.  41.-26.  A^*m*^wam  ullutn  peiictilum  /o/?/^/m 
omavi  quod  subterfu-ere  ma/h7n  qnam   vestnc  auctoritati  obtemperare.  Jb.  Fam.  lb, 
1  -27  AVmo  est  tarn  ajflictus  quin  }>osnf  navare  aliqmd  et  elhcere   lb  6  1.  <.-28.  Mwi- 
q'vam  fam  male  est  Siculis  quin  aliquid  facete  et  commode  atcanf.  lb.  \  err.  2.  4.  4.j. 
~*l\vitus  quantus  is  ahvavs  u>ed  comparatively,  requiring  the  indicative,  and  is  in  the 
name  relation  to  tautus  qui,  as  talis  qvalis  to  tali<  qui  (Obs.  4).    If  subjunctives  occur 
with   tantus  quanfus.  they  must  not   be   considered  as  qualitative_  subjunctives,   as: 
Fumenes  exeeotus  est  tdnfo  honOre  quantum  meriiis  ejus  exvtiuutret  debSri  populus 
Runianus  (Liv.  42,  in,   where  existimdret  is  an  idiomatic  quasi-obiique  subjunctive, 
according  to  p.  405,  Obs.  3. 

1  Bein-'  in  a  despondent  mood.-''  See  p.  539,  7?.  14.-3  i,ad  to  deal  with.-*  In  this 
pas-a<'e"ihe  relative  clause  is  conceivtd  i)redieativdy  (  =  If  men  spend  money  for 
hin.'s  MAtf^  are  of  a  nature  that  tliey  will  not  leave  behind  etc..  they  are  t^pcndthrifts) 
—6  The  time/x>i«^  of  the  relative  predicate  is  strictly  ;?nor  to  the  time  of  the  principal 
sentence;  but  the  author  has  in  his  mind  the  time-period  or  stage  of  the  war.-»  in- 
volved accordiiiij  to  p.  5-J5,  Obs.  2. 


566 


EElATm;  CLAUSES. 


n       01    Tf  -,  rolitive  clause  contains  the  CATTSE  of  the  principiil  preilU 

Kem.'il.    1'   "■.'•''l"'^'^.        ',,,„:„„  r.mfticntcil   as    the  LOGICAL  EFFECT 

icate,  the  principal  ^^^"  ™^  '  ''^  "^^,;, ,V ,".  '"'i','  ,bc  suiuunctive.     The 

oflcn  be  rendered  by  an  ^"K  '*!' «"''f'  "^.'^^^^^^^  i,aiii,  (wilh  the  KUbjni.ctive, 

^!.''i;r.uj'.;!ve,'  "'^^i:^^^^^  -hf  5ir  >  .>  cau.a.  conjunetiun  « iU.  a  deu.„n- 

The  coiistniclu.ns  in  which  "  \',p/'"'^'V  "y   ',  ;„>  ,,^  or  on  one  or  the  personal  l.l-o- 

he  (idihouqh.  or  'wAo'  )  A-«^U' thu.,  obeyed,  «f f ;  '^-•'^  ,     denotin-  a  fact  which  theprin- 

B.  The  relative  clause  has  t'\^;  •«•'f.^iVf  :^,,^X^^^^^^^^^  to  p.  3.S'...  It.  t.9  [fou- 

cipal  sentence  de^cn  u^  acc.^d  n^   o  itsm^^      'c^^^^Hnftted  a  blunder  in  m  doiug  tins 

(u;A.n  he  did  thi..  in  ^' "'"i''"^;.^^^^^^^  (Juod-davse  after  verh>*  of  pnu.- 

6\  The  relative  clause  take^  the  place  <'^  ^;,  ('f,         -^  ^.^  .,  yss,  Obs.  1,  '2    FORMirLA  : 
ing,  -censurinir,  thank  ..|r,  .^V/l!!;^'!^'  I^-, ^  i'i!^!  4^us  A^  haWnf^  said  this].  Obs.  7. 

or  nndersloodl,  bin  so  Ihnl  a  ';>'""■'  (^'^^^''■.VrriiM.K  kmila'  :  Q'd  nilM  ejimimli 

re«ient,.  (Obs.  1,  ^K  irenerally  den  >  e     '^^  •(  .^//;J  ..f  the  causal  conjunc- 

principal  sentence  are/a7?/a?«a/,  the    earn  thc^^^^^  ^     ^^^^^^,    .^.^  ,„,,,, 

tion  ^V'/m,  8ince.(9'/i  =  ^''''''\|%5      -  /?2ep  t  i  T^^^^^  «Ao  (si.ice  he)  c/irf 

«t/i^/>im/'^7«r,  hominem  ^"''>'V'^ '\  f       h.>  mS^fw^  nrirency.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 

n„/..«.7>^c<  anything,  began  to  '''^''}\^\\\l'^'''l'^^^  locus,  Komam  fe 

Jontulit.  Ih.  Flacc.  21.  5()  -  (^'n  (  =j;'\"''['^^^,^^^^^^  1 1  never  had  par^ 

si^i^^f '!;>?' -v':.K;:;'d^a'-;^-        -^^^^-^'^  -  ^^'^  '-^  -^  "'''^^^* 

niam),  as:  SamuTtes,  omis-ii?  SullcTl^^  Campano-  aiorti  v^  >          ^^^^^^^  ,j^^ 

i,,rf..  i.  e.  ^6  .i^•)  pr*cUB  a(que  glorue  p^^^^^^^^^  ^^.-,  t.,  ,,^  .^tUered 

Sidicini,  attacked  the  Cainpani  .ns  ff.^^^'.'^'^^  ™ '^'^^^^^^^^^^^^  (/urn  7^^ 

there  i  from  them).  Liv  7.  f  •-^"">^' .'  "^'^.[^f  V"'^  ahvay.  requires  the  sub- 

sed  etc.,. ee  p.  «take  the  <""! ."»  '^d  ^^J^-  oc  o^  nuliia  ten6bat  Hantubal, 

junctive.  like  Quod-clauses  of  this  '^^"Z  •  ,»^" -^J'^  'J         j.-ulo  nu)rtis  (/J//W/i.s>>^'^  ^•'^  V"» 

iwnrj.os(  =  non  quod  en.)  ni  acie  c.;«^>^^^^^^^^^^^  iJ,.,,,  «ooo  men, 

(  =  sed  quod)  relict,  in  V^^''*''-  '  ^^/L^  in    a  t^e  o?  of  anv  attempt  of  th.-irs  to  flee 

t^omc  grammarians  doV  since  .t^^^'V  iieUher  are  P^^^^^^^^\^  /,  ^^^^'^^  ,  evidently  equiva- 
nor  admit  of  a  trantlormalion  into  an  Ui-clause.     ine  ton.uuci 


MOODS  IN  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


567 


fn  relative  cianppp,  hy  which  a  catipe  referring  to  a  dtffrevt  antecedent  is  pregnantly 
infitnated.  as  :  I»  erat  qui  ipse  earn  aedeni  voverat  gvo  die  cum  Antiociio  ad  Thermopylaa 
dejyxiqnanset.  Liv.  40,  34  (on  the  day  he  had  defeated  Autiochus,  and  ffecavse  he  had  de- 
feated him». 

Often  the  cnnsal  force  is  not  contained  in  the  relative  clause,  but  in  its  governing 
clause  in  which  it  is  inrotred  accordiuir  to  the  rules  p.  5:34  foil.  In  this  instance,  the 
pr.  dicate  of  the  fjovtming  clause  is  placed  in  the  guhjunctive,  while  the  predicate  of  the 
relative  clause  may  be  in  the  subjunctive  by  attraction,  as* :  Nuinquam  laudari  satis  diirne 
philosophia  potent,  cui  qui  jmreat  omne  tempus  aetatis  sine  molesiia  i^snt  degere.  Cic. 
ben.  1,2. 

Obs.  3.  Often  a  relative  clause  does  not  assign  a  cause  to  the  action  expressed  by  the 
pr.dicate,  but  to  the  predication  (assertion)  as  such,  repret^enting  it  as  ajoroo/"  for  the 
truth  oj  what  is  asserted  in  the  principal  sentence.  The  relative  in  clauses  of  this  kind 
has  the  force  of  the  conjunction  nquidem  (since  =  seeing  that),  as:  Non  est  inhumflna 
virtus  neque  supcrba,  quiE  etiam  populos  universo.s  tuCri  soleat ;  Virtue  is  not  inhuman 
nor  haughty,  since  it  is  wont  to  protect  even  whole  nations  (  —  which  is  proved  by  the 
fact  that  it  is  wont  etc.).  Cic.  Am.  14,  50.— Atticus  affliciis  semper  succurrit,  qui  quidtm 
JServiliam,  liruti  matrem,  non  minus  post  mortem  ejus  quam  flurentem  colueri.t ;  Atticus 
always  assisted  those  in  distress.  Thus  (  =  which  was  shown  by  the  fad  that  etc.)  he 
mis  not  les^  dtvnf'-d  to  IJiutuss's  mother  after  the  death  of  her  son,  than  when  she  was 
in  jiro>perity.  Nep.  Att.  11.— Quid  ?  Istse  mutie  sunt  qv<x  pro  se  fabulari  negveant ? 
How  ?  Are  those  women  mute  that  (seeing  that)  they  cannot  talk  in  their  own  behalf? 
Plant.  Rud.  4.  4,  H9.— Tubero  paullo  etiam  durior,  qui  quidem  jvdicaveiit  vacatiOnera 
augures  non  hal)Cre.  Cic.  Brut.  31,  117.— In  M.  Bruto  magnum  fuit  dedecus  generi  vestro, 
^«iaccusatiOnem/ac/e^ai'^ri/.  lb.  34,  130.— See  Ex.  10-13. 

Obs.  4.  Freqnently  the  cause  designated  by  the  relative  clnuse  is  ADVEnsATivE  (con- 
cessive), containing  a  reason  from  which  the  contrary  of  what  is  stated  in  the  clause 
should  be  inferred.  This  force  of  the  clause  is  frequently  intimated  by  the  particle 
tamen  in  the  apodosis,  but  often  it  must  be  inferred  from  the  connection  alone,  whether 
the  cause  is  meant  to  be  direct  or  adversative,  as:  Egomet,  ^wi  sero  ac  leviter  Gnecas 
litteras  attigis.'^fm,  tamen  complQres  dies  AthSnis  commorStus  snm  ;  I.  on  my  part,  uho 
(although  I)  had  but  late  and  slightly  touched  Greek  literature,  yet  staid  several  days  at 
Athens.  C'C.  Or.  1,  18.  8-2.— Pomptjilui  miserrimo  ac  patientissimo  exercitui  (Vsaris 
luxnrienM)bjiciGl)ant,fv/j  semper  omnia  ad  necessarium  usum  defvis-'^ent  ;y\\\\c\\  (althou;;h 
it  ;  in  the  face  ot  ihe  tact  that  it)  had  always  been  short  of  all  necessaries  of  life.  Cies. 
B.  C.  3,  !M;.— Tu  non  adluisti,  qui  diligentissime  semper  ilium  diem  et  iliud  munus  soli- 
tus  esf&s  obTre.  Cic.  Am.  2,  7.— Kex  Antiochus.  qui  Komae  ante  oculos  omnium  nostrum 
biennium  I'crf. /ulsftet.  is.,  .pneceps  proviucia  populi  iJoraSni  exturbatus  est;  Antiochu:*, 
vho  (althouL'h  he)  had  been  two  rears  at  Koine  etc.  lb.  Verr.  2.  4.  30.— Te  solfltuni 
Komam  mittebat.  qui  eadem  scire^  f  Should  he  have  sent  you  free  to  Rome,  iclio  (although 
y«Mi)  liad  a  knowledge  of  the  same  thinirs  ?  lb.  Dej.  7,  22  (  =  He  could  not  have  sent 
you  bemuse  etc.).— Ut.  qui  non  satis  diu  vixerit,  Hortensius,  fat/ien  hunc  cursum  c<infe- 
cerit  ;  So  that  Ilortensius.  although  his  life  wa.^  too  short,  still  has  finished  this  career, 
lb.  Brut.  IM,  :i-2i).  See  Ex.  14-18.— For  tiie  combination  qui  tamen  see  Obs.  12,  5. 

Obs.  5.  Relative  clauses  containing  a  direct  or  adversative  cause,  have  not  always 
predicates  in  tiie  subjunctive.  If  the  causal  connection  is  evident,  the  indicative 
ivcrea.<e!i  the  force  of  positivene<s  of  tlie  statement,  and  the  relative,  in  tliis  instance, 
olten  has  the  force  of  the  conjunction  quoniafn  (which  is  nor  the  case,  if  the  relative 
clause  has  a  subjunctive);  as:  Constitflta  respublica  videbStur  aliis.  mihi  vero  nullo 
niodo,  qui  (  =  qiioniam)  omnia  te  giibeniante  naufragia  metuebam.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  3G  92. 
Comp.  lb.  Ot!'.  1.  32,  118;  ib.  3,  2<>.  104.  Thus  in  clauses  denoting  adversative  cause  : 
Contio  qua  ex  imperitissimis  constat,  /'<7w^»  judicSre  solet  quid  intersit  inter  populSrem 
civem  et  inter  constnntem.  Cic.  Am.  2.').  95.— Atticus,  qui  pecuniam  conferre  nolutrat 
florenti  ill:  j)arti,  abjecto  Bruto  US  centum  millia  nuineri  misit.  Nep.  Att.  8.  5.— Some- 
lime^  indicatives  a-e  used  to  avoid  ambimiities  :  Clarissimnm  virum  generis  vestri  nemo 


ashamed  of  tiring  etc.). 

Obs.  6.  Relative  clauses  are  often  used  with  the  force  of  Qnnm-clauses  stating  facts 
lent  to  a  causal  Quod-clause  alter  a  negation,  which  always  requires  a  subjunctive,  since 
the  relative  clause  is  lo:.Mcallv  neirative  under  an  afHrmative  form  (p.  543,  Obs.  2;  p.  545. 

a 

mendos  * 


>B8.  7).    At  the  same  lime  tne  clauses  explain  the  cause  ol  the  captivity  of  the  soldiers, 
nd  also  the  reason  for  the  following  stiitemeut:  'Eos  tenatus  uon  ceusuit  esse  redi- 


h 


h   \ 


668 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


MOODS  IN  THE  RELATIVE  CLAUSE. 


m 


which  in  the  principal  sentence  are  represented  according:  to  thilr  inner  import  and  bear- 
injr  (p  3-iO,  E.  tiy).  Such  cla  .ses»  7nay  bi'  placed  in  the  isiibjtiiictive,  on  account  of  their 
cau-al  character  ('  in  aa  much  as'),  as  :  Tarquinio  quid  imputlentius,  q>ii  beliiim  gereret 
cum  ti<  qui  noii  tulerant  ejus»  8npirl)iam  ?  \Vh:it  (  =.  nothinjr)  ic  more  impudent  than 
(the  act  of)  Tuiqiiin  who  (in  ay  much  as  he)  waired  a  war  with  iho>*e  who  had  not  borno 
liif*  arroi:ance  ?  Cic.  Tu.sc.  6,  12. — M.iriusa  tide  jUv^titiilciiu'  di>cessit,  qui  optimum  civt-m, 
cujus  le;,'aius  et»set,  in  invidiam  falf^o  crimine  adduxerU ;  Marius  deviated  from  duty 
and  virtue  uhen  he\\\\  as  much  as  he,  by  the  fact  that  he)  hy  a  false  char;:e  c;ya^ed  hatred 
a'^aiiit't  an  excellent  citizen  etc.  lb.  OH.  3,  2(),  7!).  See  the  Ex.  p.  425,  a,  and  Ex.  l'.i-21.— 
But  frequently  the  indicative  ViZ^\w^\\\  thet^e  clauses'  :  Errastis  veiieinoiit«r,  r/vi  (  =  quum, 
or  quod)  n})frastis,  vo8  contia  cons^ulem  popiiiarcin  in  everti-ndi  n-i)ultli<il  pt^pulares 
exi>tiuulri.  lb.  L.  Aj,'r.  1,  7,  ii.— In^^rStus  (fuit)  L.  Sulla,  qui  patriam  duriorihu!*  remediii» 
quaiii  peric'tla  er.jiit,  sandvit.  Sin.  lien.  5,  1«.  Comp.  Cic.  >en.  15,  52,  where  the  codd. 
are  divided  between  '  procreaf  and  '  pivcretf.—^ac  Ex.  22.  2.3. 

Obs.  7.  Instead  of  completins:  Quod-clauses,  dependent  on  verbs  of  thanliinj»  etc. 
(p.  388,  Obs.  1,6;  Ob-<.  2),  which  ahvavs  involve  a  cause,  Qui-clau-es  are  trecjuenlly 
used.  Tliese  generally  have  thtir  predicates  in  the  subjimc/ire :  Ego  te  non  reprehendo, 
g(/i  ilium  ad  jedillcatiOnem  tuam  iraduxens ;  I  do  not  bhime  yon  for  having  emjiloyed 
him  in  your  buildinu:  operations.  Cic.  Fam.  7,  2i).  1.— DlctatOrein  increpdbant,  qui  con- 
pulaium..  .cepiinet.  Liv.  7,  25. — Mi^eret  tui  me,  qui  hiinc  hominem  faciiis  inimlcum  til»'. 
Ter.  hun.  4,  7,  32.  See  Ex.  21-2H.— Sometimes,  liowever,  if  tiie  principal  predicate  is  in 
i\\i-.  present,  such  clauses  have  an  indicative,  as  :  Doleo  te,  c/;w,«  in  ailolcscentiam  incur- 
ri^nisera  fortaiia  reipublicie.  Cic.  Brut.  »7,  *31.  This  is  always  the  ca«^e  if  '  giatiam 
habere'  (refene)  i^  the  principal  prediciite*,  a;^ :  Maximas  habfo  gratias  PisOiii,  qui  non 
cogitdvit  etc.  Cic.  Phil.  1,  7,  1.5.— l*ra;ciarum  popido  h'onu'UH»  refers  gralium,  qui  le  ad 
suiuiimm  imperium  extulii.  lb.  Ciec.  11,  28.  Thus  Cic.  Phil.  10,  1,  1.  See  Ex.  27.  28. 
Comp.  Cic.  Sen.  14. 

Obs.  8.  A  relative  clause,  dependent  on  a  'general  ante'-edent  '  (denoting  the  gen- 
eral idea  of  persons  or  things,  or  of  classes  of  ^»er^ons  or  things),  may  have  tlie  doul)le 
function  of  deteu.minino  the  general  idea  of  the  antecedent,  a/id  of  assigning  a 
CAL'SB  to  the  piincipal  predicate.  Such  general  antecedents  are  mostly  expressed  by 
th»;  absolute  demoutitrative  is,  ea,  id  (rareiy  by  /licur  illtf).  The  predieatoof  such  rela- 
tive clauses  is  placed  in  the  suB.ruNCTivE  of  causk  if  the  autiior  means  to  make  the  causal 
connection  prominent.  This  kind  of  catisal  relative  clauses  cannot  l)e  rejdacvd  by  clauses 
introduced  by  causal  conjunctions^.    They  are  mostly  used  if  the  principal  predicate 

*  After  'grufia/n  habere'  ill  the  present,  a  subjunctive  occurs  only  for  particular 
reasons,  as:  Ego  vero  illi  (Lycuigo)  maximam  gratiam  habeo,  qui  me  eil  poena  muMave- 
rit  quam  sine  mutuatione  possem  dissolvere.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  42.  100.  Here  '  /nutetdre'  is 
used  ill  a  figurative  sense,  =  eas  leges  dedit  ex  quibus  mulctiltus  essem.  If  the  indica- 
tive had  been  used,  the  predicate  {mulctdvit)  would  mean  that  Lycur^'us  performed  him- 
self the  act  of  punishing. 

t  If  the  demonstrative  antecedent  is  not  deferminedhY  the  relative  clause,  but  has  itself 
an  ordinary  noun  as  antecedent,  the  moud  of  the  relative  clause  is  treated  as  if  its  own 
antecedent  were  i  noun  according  to  Onn.  2.  In  this  instance  the  demonstratives  /lic, 
ille,  iste  are  used  (rartily  is,  ea,  id).  See  Ex.  5.  ti,  and  the  passage  Cic,  Elacc.  21,  50, 
quoted  Obs.  2. 

X  Relative  clauses  dependent  on  the  absolute  demonstrative  w,  ea.  id.  belong  to  very 
ditferenl  categories,  according  to  which  the  moods  of  the  clause  are  difl'erenily  treaten  : 
1.  They  may  have  the  soU'  function  of  more  or  less  detinitely  </f/>^77//i/<J/<?7  the  general 
ideaol  the  antecedent  (iMiirl.  =  'he  who',  'those  who',  'that  which'  ;  hut  sometimes 
'such  as',  'a  man  who',  'thinirs  whicli'  etc.).  Sucli  clauses  liave  their predicatis  in  the 
indicative,  as:  Quid  potest  desideiflre  iv  cui  omnia  contingvntf  What  can  a  man  desire 
who  succeeds  in  everything*  Sen.  Kp.  »2.— Non  is  solum  grains  esse  debet,  qui  accipit, 
verum  etiam  is  cui  potestas  accipiendi/'/i/'  (  =  he  who).  Cic.  Prov.  C<ms.  17,  41.— Duces 
deligunturti  qui  una  cum  St'vlor'nt fuerant  {  =  men  who).  C;es.  B.  G.  3,  23.— Siepe  homi- 
nes aut  tos  laudant  qtios  non  deben't.  aut  eos  quos  non  exjtedit  (  =  tbost-  who.  or  such  as). 
Cic.  Off.  2.  19,  68.— Quo  niodo  geometies  cernere  ea  potest  quce  aut  nulla  sunt,  aut  inier- 
nosci  a  falsis  non  possunt  ?  (  =  things  which).  Ih.  .\c.  Pr.  2,  7,  22.-2.  The  antecedent  is 
may  be  used  to  indicate  a  gw/t/y  described  by  the  clause.  In  this  in&tance  the  rules 
li.  20  are  applied.— 3.  The  clause  may  have  the  douhle  functicm  of  determining  the 
antecedent  '  tV.  and  <»f  assigning  a  cause  to  the  principal  predicate.  In  this  instance 
the  rules  Obs.  8  and  Obs.  9  are  applied. 

Our  grammarians  liave  tried  to  establish  another  rule.  Madvio,  and.  after  him, 
Meiring  and  others,  say  that  if  the  demonstrative  is  denotes  an  indefinite  person  or 
thing,  the  predicate  of  the  relative  clause  is  in  the  subjunctive,  while  it  is  in  the 
Indicative  if  is  denotes  a  certain   person  or   thing.    But  so  sweeping  a  rule,  without 


«^ 


belongs  to  the  verbs  of  praising,  censuring  etc.,  mentioned  Obs.  7  ;  but  they  also  occur 
with  other  predicates;  as:  Eoruni  constantiam  tauddmus  qui  non  turbiilente  hnniSna 
patiantur  {o{  those  who  bear  human   irials  without  fr.-tting;  i.  e.  wq  praise  them /or 
hearing  etc.).  Cic.  Tusc.  4,  '28,  00.— Ex  hoc  genere  est  illud  quod  tu  nuper  ei  qui  le  ro- 
f/a^'W/..  .inquisti ;    'Here  belongs  that  answer  vxhich  you  lately  gave  to  one  who  had 
ask^d  you  etc.',  the  question  being  represented  as  the  cause  of  ilie  an-wer.  or  as  eliciting 
it.  Cic.  Or.  2.  <;4,  259.— See   Ex.    29-*l.   A   -eneral   anteeedent   may  also  be  designated 
by  a  noun  denoting  a  whole  class  of  persons  or  things,  as:  Ilal)et  tamen  suos  laudatores, 
qui  hac  ip-tl  ejus  sul)tiliiate  admodiim  V/a'/c/e*//*/;  Still  he  has  his  own  admirers,  who  ate 
•n-aily  dtHghtt^d  by  this  very  nicety  o(  his  (they  are  his  admirers,  because  they  are  de- 
fighted).  Cic.  Brut.  It».  tM.— Oppianicus  oftsignatores  ad  cum,  qui  neque  Atinium,  neque 
Aviliiim  Hossent,  adduxit  ('  witnesses  who  were  not  acquainted  etc' ;  which  fact  was  the 
very  reason  that  liiey  were  chosen),  Cic.  Clu.  13.  37.     Often  relative  clauses,  dependent 
on'ttie  general  antecedent  i*- (expressed  or  understood),  have  the  value  of  conditional 
clauses  with  indefinite  antecedents  (is  qui  =  si  quis,  or  =  aliquis,  <i  i>).  Such  clauses, 
which  always  are  to  the  principal  predicate  in  tiie  relati<m  of  cause  to  effict,  have  some- 
timer'  a  subjunctive,  and  sometimes  an  indicative,  as:  Non  est  contra  naiflram  spobare 
eum  quern  est  lionestum  necare  (  =  spoliare  aliquem  si  eum  necflre  houesiiim  est).  Cic. 
Off  3   G  32    But  :  Necpie  conamur  (\oc(ireeum  ulcere  qui  loqul  ntsciat  (  =  abquein,  si  is 
nescii').  'H).  Or.  3,  10.  3S.— Niliil  est  lam  aliGnum  ah  eo  qui  alterum  conjoiraiionis  accilset, 
quam  videri  conjuratoium  pODiiam  lu-Cre  (  =  si  quis  alterum  accQsal,  nihil  est  tarn  ali5- 
nuin  ah  eo  etc.).  lb.  SuU,  10,  31,  See  Ex,  34,  35, 

Ob«  9   By  a  frequent  Latin  idiom,  relative  clauses  with  predicates  in  the  subjunctive, 
are  attaciied  to  «jreneral  antecedents  (mostly  understood)  relerring  to  ;>a?/tc///ar  persons 
mentioned  in  a  previous  sentence,  in  order  to  intimate  that,  what  is  stated  in  the  clause 
in  re<'ard  to  a  i)articular  antecedent,  would  hold  good  in  regard  to  any  other  person  or 
Ihiif'^in  the  circnmslances  mentioned.     Such  relative  clau>e'-  have  a  causal  force  in  re- 
card^to  the  particular  person  meant  ;  but  they  imply  at  the  same  time  a  general  assertion 
holdiiK'  "ood  in  ngard  to  all.    In  English  they  are  mostly  expressed  by  participial  con- 
-iniciioirs  or,  if  such  constructions  are  not  admissible,  by  relative  clauses  with  indeji- 
iiite  antecedents ;  as  :  Verres  nauarchos  vocftri  jubet.   Qui  nihil  metuerent,  nihil  su.'^pica- 
Ttntur  statim  accurrunt;  Verres  had  the  naval  commanders  called.    Fvarxng  nothing', 
.<?(/.7>fc/i«7  nothing,  they  directly  came.  Cic,  Verr.  2,  5,  41  (the  force  of  this  conslrnction 
iniv  be  riilly  expressed  by  the  addition  of  the  clause  'a*  every  one  would  do  under  the 
circumstances  '     The  sentence,  l>esides  the  particular  fact,  implies  also  the  treneral  asser- 
ti<.n  •  Uui  nihil  inttuit  cic,  statim  accurrit  quum  ro<dfus  est').— Qui  nondum  physica 
didicissHd  tantum  sibi  persuaserant  quantum  natflra  adiiionente  cognoverant ;  Jlavtng 
no  knoidtdge  vet  of  physical  science,  they  (referring  to  the  oldest  inhabitants  of  Greece) 
believed  only  what  they  had  learn,  d  in  the  school  of  nature.  Cic,  1  \x<c   1,  \Z—qut  jam 
ante  inimico  in  nos  animo  fuisset,  multogmvius  hocdolOre  exarsit :  Having  been  always 
Xf<)i  M  of  a  hostile  (lisposTtion  towards  us.  he  (i,  e.  Indutiomams)  was  »'flamed  int«> 
uh  greater  an.er  by  this  (new)  grievance,  Caes.  B.  G..5.  4,  (Comp.  Ex.  40.)-Ey6nit 
facile  quodcUs  cordi  esset :  The  sod^^  taking  an  interest  in  it,  it  came  readily  to  pass. 
(  =  it  came  readily  to  pass!  as  every  thing  does  in  which  the  gods  take  an  interest).  Liv. 
anv  T>Vher^discrimination,  is   not  warranted  by  the  usage  of  the  Latin  authors.    In 
?he  pas^a-es  quoted   N...  1,  the  antecedents  are  certainly  •  indeflnite',  and  often  cor- 
r^^.Jml  to  the\„i^^         indefinite  article :  still  the  predicate  is  always  in  xhe  t?idicative 
On   Z(    her  hand   in   the  passages  belonging  to  No.  2  (see  Ji.  2i  )  the  antecedent  js 
,  I  u  't  alwav^  /Xi^     and  j-et  the  subjunctive  is  used.     The  same  is  always  the  case  in 
t   riSta.c"riS^^^                      ruleois.9.-Madvig  tries  to  establish  his  rule  by  the 
•  Ih  vi      pa-sa.' e^             Obs.  1):  Qui  ex  ipso  audissent  quum  palam  multts  audtentt- 
<  lou iKM^e  ui-^^"^^^^^^^^       q  nedam  ad  me  pcrtulCMunt.  Cic.  Att.  11,  S      M.^nvio  says  :     Qui 
j/Sr  =  ptMso^^^               .uch  persons  as:  '^.a  a^/rfi^m/.r  won  d  mean  'those  who' 
''Ker  impmperlv  renders  '/A/;>ar/i^^  that  the  Latins  did  not 

,  ake  sue  I  aTSi mVion,  appears  from  passages  like  the  following  :  Utriimque  qui  infer- 
nuiKc  MICH  «  ui^iiiii  11     ;    I  F  »-  ^,„r,„.„,j,,„  ^how«  that  '  (jui  infertueie    cannot 


di^TiiVt  o,,«.-iieimpr.;t>er.  C^nnpare  :  Pictor  videt  qu(B  nos  mn  vidimus.  Uc  Ac.2,  2<  ; 
^ heVL  Ilie  coneet  WdPm*/..  acconling  to  Madvig's  theory,  would  have  to  be  changed  into 
the  improi)er  subjunctive  videdmus. 


r  \ 


5T0 


BELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


MOODS  m  THE  RELATIVE   CLAUSE. 


171 


1    ^()     Pncrnjitnm  ab  ho=tibns  ita  acritor  est  nt  a  viris  fortibns  in  oxtrCmfl  ppc  salQtls  con- 
tVwoTr  f  cK  I"  Ih^^  tela  jacer^nf,  pu-n-lrl  «leh.iit  ('au'a.nst  »'  ver.ar  e.   »Mo 


?eniste~Acq     r«  rnr.Te^rrii^  t..  Vern-.),  .r/.o'(i.  o.  altho„.l.  be )  own.  to  have  nppro; 
priaU'd  imnuMi.e  .nm.  by  inflictinj;  the  greatest  ^'^l^^^l^P^^^^:^^^';  1*//^,^^  43-45! 

r^P   nVrT  10-  That  kin«^  icho...had  from  his  youth  considered  the  heimte  a^  th.    mo^t 
See  Ft    40  -^SiH  ne<  si  "^  have  predicate,  in  the  i.id.cative,  as  :    (^//    /0^^'/« 

vidGhnm  iit  etc.  lb.  Verr.  2,  3,  18.  Sec  Ex.  47.  48.  .        ,     .  ;„  „  jnnir 

ou-  in    Fn.nnentlv  rehitive  clauses  dependent  on  a  noun  a.  antecedent,  are  in  a  loriir- 

?onsistere  (and  aW.  to  acqnit  himself  cred,tably  in  ^»;;,.^  Y.e  ^wvudeHc  an\ea^ 


-•<•■ 


the  adjective  by  coordinating  conjnnctlonP,  a?:  T{Ki^  ^wwm  fieMili^is  worf?.',  ^^/i  (ita  m 
ei)  tot  s  thefinis  n.wstitiain  iuUmut.  conciniintur  ;  When  this  is  etin?  in  dolefvlsiiaius, 
mm  to  nil  whole  audiences  with  sa.tne?..  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  44.  lOfi.-Multi  vuineraiu  etiam 
Qvo^  vires .ansnisqn.^  desererei.t,  ut  intra  vallum  caderent  iHtebantur  (  =  etiam  ey/^t  tta 
rnlmraii  erind  vt  eox  etc),  Liv.  25,  14.  C:omp.  Cic.  \err.  2,  5,  27;  ib.  28;  ib.  2,  4,  51  , 

^V."^  Re!mi\n'^*'laii-es  denotin£r;)roof  with  regard  to  the  use  of  the  preceding  adjective, 
do  Vint  takec(.r)nlinatinirc()iiiuMrti(Jns,  as:  Kepcntead  me  venit  Heraoluis,  homo  nobtu, 
nui  wicerdos  Jovis  fuis^f  (the  hiL'h  standint;  of  Heradius  heiny;  proved  by  the  fact  that 
he  had  been  a  pri.At  of  Jupiter.)  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  r.l.-Isle  norm  astronomus,  qm  non  tani 
ciPli  ratinnem  quam  cselilti  ar-enti  daceref.  (the  clause  explaiuing  the  reason  for  applying 
the  attribute  noi-vs  to  the  noun  lutronoinus).  lb.  2,  2,  5,  2.  Comp.  Cic.  LaiC.  «,  1».— ^ee 

'^H.'lative  clauses  of  this  kind  (Hare  mostly  used  to  explain  adjectives  which,  with 
lli.ir  .'oveniiii"  nouns,  form  an  elliptical  kxci.amation.  as  :  O  wrwm  ><tm)Mc€m  qui  nos 
nihil  celet  :  Mfdenfem,  q>n  Hervieudum  nece^sitiTii  putet !  Oh,  for  the  simple-mindt-d  man 
who  does  not  conceal  anvthinir  fn.m  us!  Oh.  for  the  wise  man  who  thinks  he  must  sub- 
mit to  neco-sitv  (make  the  best  of  it) !  Cic.  Or.  G9,  23().-Me  viistrum  qvijaow  adjj'enm ! 
How  unlortunate  am  I,  that  I  have  not  been  present!  I))- Fam.  3.  l^  - ^ /%'«"^\^^o- 
lescens  uui  tu;e  virtOtis  Homerum  pnccOnem  invefei-iS :  lb.  Arch.  10— ^ee  tx.  .'*  &». 

Relat'ive  clauses  explainiiij;  a  preceding  adjeciive  by  addinir  a  proof,  often  have  their 
predicates  in  the  in.licative.  as:  Quam  rem  pauci  impedivCrunt,  can  avaritia,  qin0>^8 
omnia  vendere  mos  eraf.  Sail.  Juir.  SO,  5.-Ofor(uudta  «nors,  7;^«  nati.ne  debita  pro  pa- 
trill  e.f  potiss^imum  reddifa/  Cic.  Phil.  14,  21    See  Cic.  Or.  3,  27,  and  Ex.  59 

If  relative  cliuses  referrini:  to  precediii<r  descriptive  adjectives  helouL'  to  none  of  the 

preceding  catejK.ries  (A.  li.  C).  they  have  their  predicate  in  nwjndicafive  as:  An  imi- 

ilri  d.'iiemus  a'Tos /V=/'/i/f^\  qui  multo  plus  ederunt  quam  acc^y>t/v;//^?'  Cic.  Off.  1,  1^.  48 

Lll.'-e  the  clause  contains  a  y/.a/i/y  of  iho  ag7i /ertUe^,  but  not  a  quality  ol  the    agn  , 

coOruinatk  to  ftitiUx].  See  Ex.  GO. 

Ors  11  Relative  causal  clauses  frequently  assign  a  caupe  to  some  intermediate  predi- 
cate i„  the  mind  of  the  author,  which  must  ho.s>tpi>lied.  in  order  to  acciuit  for  the  use 
of  the  Kubjunetive.  as:  Oppianicus  L.  Clodinm,  pharmaeopniam  circuinforaneum.  r/^i 
"ivr^m"i"/7/<'/;//n/>i.J/.  a--reditur,et  cum  eo. .  .tranngitj  Opp.anuus  app  ud  to 
n  diu  a  peddler  in  drugs,  n'ho  h<idj>,xt  come  by  chance  (p  LarinuuK  and  concluded  he 
hir  ill  wi  h  him.  Cic.  Chi.  14.  40  (Tiie  intermediate  fact  is  'Oppianicus  made  use  of  his 
ca'ual  pr..s.  nee.  and  concluded  etc.').-Quod  quum  Percrebrmsset  Pythius  quidam  y^.n 
nrr/erdarunn  facfiet  Svracilsis,  ad  coenam  Canium  mvitfivit.  Cic.  Ott.  3,  14,  08.  { 1  tie 
fn[cnnSe'fa(Tis.that  Pyti  ius,  in  consequence  of  his  businee^  as  money-broker, 
•  Si  ^^^e^^^^^^^  resident,  so  that  he  might  claim 

tl  ^ri  h   to   .vitehim  per  tot  annos  HierOnem  et  Gelonem  nee  ves  is 

babitu  nee  alio  nlloinsigni(lifre.eniTs  a  ceteris  rid/^w«^  conspexCre  purpuram  ac  dia- 
d?  .  I  iv  24  .5  (Tiie  Sviacusiai.s  '  were  amazed  '  to  see  purple  and  diadem,  nme  they 
h^  never  see,',  Huh  badges  of  royalty  even  with  their  own  k.ni:s).-Socii  naySies  ad 
li;! populandum  a^^rum  Nuce.Tnum  Vro.ecti  P-xim  s  raptim  ^^^^J^'^:^^.  ^ 
n,f  narljs' es-X'f  loii'dus  proiriess  ,  excivCre  hostem.  Liv.  9.  3.\  [=  1  he  cre\\s  01  inc  snips 
St)iX  Plundeie  r  the  ivj^^^  next  to  the  shore  '  by  tvhich  they  exjmed  hermelves  to  no 
K.;*'S/?r.thevc.mld«afelv  return  from  there  to  their  ships:  but  going  farther 
U  e  -^arou'^^d  th.  eiiem vl.  -Sthebiu«.  <iui  Romarn  ;>^7^'^i^*«^  on^";f,9"«  {'.f 'i^JJ^^  ^"^ 
et  idacabil'Ora  quam  !  limum  pnetOris,  rem  ad  amicos  suos  detulit.  ^'«-^  ^'[- *;  f' f?; 
Sum  V  '  0«  Jrt.j/  pnPtrn-i  \  to  which  the  relative  clause  ^gmjierteni^et,  et  habnuset 
r<sH  -^b  M-a  /Ic^  -Homo,  cpn  semper  ita palam  dicfifa^set,  pupiUos  ceiiissimam  praedam 
e.!"-  rXrib'i".,;ptmumnei<.tiu,nVibi  in  «inum  obiatum  esse  ^''f.^^b.^Jhi.  H, "  On  ' 
^0  (Sui  ulv •  '  mrnn  non  est,  Verrem  dixisse,  optatum  negoiiuin  etc'  To  this  the  Qni- 
ctai  s:!*i£lgns  thernson).-bipln.na  sta.im  non  -t  datmn  qrK>d  est  "3^'"? eVaTr'%! 
ill  (iiiihu-dam  (nd  f>dissent  acerbius  veniam  tibi  dan.  Cic.  tain.  0,  li,  J.  lleic  aiier  gm 
Z!^'l!^cuuivclL  link  «who  caused  this  delay' must  be  understood,  the  reason 

^'^oSmelrubjiuftv^iia'it^a^ 

nie,   "    •     ta  uUseq^'fnt  s.nte.ce.^.  as  :  Atqui  ille  apud  Acciiim  pastor.  9';^  na  .m 

n   I  una  1.    me  ridi-ssef.  ut  procnl  vehicuUim  Argonamarum  conspcxit.  boo  mo-io  l.-qui- 
r    I  c  Cic   NO  2  35.  81».     Here  the  niative  clause  (  =  •  being  a  man  who  had  never 
1  mm;  a  vesiriu.fortr')   explains  the  import  of  the  .emarks  quoted  in  the  snbseqnent 
.    ,     iV,  i/w  ,  mviiici  e  o^^^  1  vaii.-tate  conxtaret,  FontPjus  pnefuit. 

l^?c   S7e"  i'  "3!  (Here  ih/  the  future  argument  which  the 

"-*  Here  theT^^nn^^^ti^'link  'which  were  so  situated  ^/ia<  they  could  sal ely  retreat' 
might  be  supplied,  which  would  make  tlie  relative  clause  a  clause  of  manner. 


^ 


572 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


MOODS  IN  THE   RELATIVE   CLAUSE. 


573 


author  is»  soinj;  to  derive  (subsequently  from  the  '  variety  of  the  iuhahitants '  in  favor  of 
the  accns?eii*).  .  ^. 

Sometime^  relative  clauses  have  the  subjunrtWe  on  account  of  some  inner  connect-.on 
of  the  fact  star.d  in  ir  with  the  fact?  ol  the  principal  *^entence,  the  nature  of  which  con- 
Section  iiletun.-xplained,  as:  Mirabiit.  quod  eo  ip^o  tempore  ^./o^r./ indicuun  con- 
duration  s  si-num  Juvi*  cullocahatur.  Cic.  Div.  .>,  20,  46.  Here  l\^e  coincidence  of  tvm 
oMi.e  facts  i^n  both  propo^iti<)ns,  is  reprt-eented  as  a  proof  that  there  niu«t  be  gome 
innt-r  coiuuctKm  between  thi-m. 

Obs  12  Frequently  causal  relative  clauses  are  used  in  connection  with  cnnjunctions 
and  particles.    Such  combinations  are  quipiie  qui,  ut  qui,  ufjxfte  qui,  prizserttm  qui,  and, 

'^I  "0^;^'i^;i  (^'StSi'lfTi^nee  they,  since  I,  etc.)  represents  the  priticipal  sentence 
as  a  .^elf-evldent  consequence  of  the  facts  .tated  in  the  clause.  C.cero  «lw»i>.t  uses  the 
snbiunctive  in  clauses  iiitn)duced  by  quipp^  q>a.  In  auteclasMC.il  style  ij/:'^^  .< ''"»^^» 
ZTnmeriUly:  \n  Livy  o/Y^",  and  in  Sallust  a///aj/.<,  construed  with  the  indtcattteX  (in 


Cesar  the  combination  guippequi  does  not  occur) :  IIos  libros  non  contemno  r^uippe  quos 
I^mnmmm  /^^Hm  Cic  TUSC.I3,  7.-C(mvivia  cum  patre  non  inlbar  Ko-cius,  outpfM! 
«;;iT  in  o^^^bium  f  uidem,  nisi  perraro.  nniref.    lb.  K.  A.  IS.    Hut :  Qnippe  q.il  certo 


?^o  "Plaut^ffic  T  ?  ^X-Q  o  ni'^^uVi;;;  Pe;;:eus  ho;tis  judicargtur,  quippe  quem  per 
f?nuia  .-ral^a  i  i^^cllMa^  Liv.  42,  18.-Impenltor  omnis  lere  res  asperas  P^>r  .Iu|iur. 

tl  a     a-^^^^^  neque  consilium,  neque  incept.iin  ullum  ^'•"^tra  .ra^  Na  bJuo;. 

ruaui  at  1  <.,/<'//      y  1  ^  10.  and  often.— See  hx.  bl-b-J.— 

LmeHne-     np'aS^o?     reh'Ve  cfa^.s^^^     partilipKd  claux^  is  c<,n.bi„ed  ^\ih  quippe. 
as  :  Es!  hoc  haud  ni.nis  amj.lnm.  qmppe  concedentibas  Komam  aiput  Uitii  esse  (  =  nobis 

amnlum   nuinpe  Qxiconceddtnus).  Liv.  8,  4.  ,,    ,  ^     .        ^    ,     a;i  ««^ 

^>rtQ>n  has  arisen  from  ut  i*  q>d  =  '  as  a  man  (won  d  do)  who  etc.' ;  as :  Ad  eum 
venit  Dejoiarus  evocAtus  ut  t.-»  qui  senatni  par?re  didm.^^ef  &s  a  man  (would  d..)  who  had 
le  r,  e(  1.0  obey  the  Senate.  Cic.  Dej.  5.  Vi.  Tliis  '  i.< '  is  almost  always  understood,  and 
Lenm  lirr.i»v«'-nts  the  clause  as  applying  to  every  <.ne  besides  the  a;'t*"V^den  under 
fbe  circumstances  mentioned  in  the  clause.  Clauses  intro.  need  »»>'.  V'7  " .  »•  ?i^fw 
i^lsuSmcfire:  but  the  construction  (except  in  its  ori-.nal  form  with  id  i.qui),aoe^ 
iiotSr  in  Cicero  Ut  q"i  is  generally  rendered  by  '  since  he,  they,  etc.',  or  by  a  parti- 
cipi;.^^  construction:  as  :  ^aiqufnius  ad  jus  regni  nihil  P-J- ^.m  lu^bcbat  j./^v^^^ 
Donuli  ius-u  neque  auctor  bus  patribus  rer/nurtf.  Liv.  L  49.  See  h\.  h\.  h.).— JsouRlimca 
futhne-atiVe  clauses)  ut  qui  is  used  in  the-  meaning  -ailhough'  as:  ^am,  utqut  ne 
aUeri  nurdem  exercitu  se  4d  cer.amen  credldisseat  pares  ,  adyenientem  >  Hnnum 
a  -recU  tur  Liv.  <>.  4:i.  Sometimes  it  has  the  f<.rce  '  a.<  if  he  etc.\  as:  Prima  uce  sic 
crcastr  '  rofic toir^t  vf  quibus  e.'<set  j)ermd.'<um  (as  if  tiiey  were  assured.  1.  e.  as  per- 
SuswoulHa  who  are  assured  etc.^,  non  ab  h..ste,  sed  ab  homine  amic.ssimo  consdiuin 
TwinnT  Ces   B  G  5  31      In  this  sense  velut  qui.  qumi  q„i,  famquam  qui  nn^  ^onietinies 

sed:  Taf^ntlni^Vi./destitQ.i,  ac  non  qui  ipsi  ^^-('.^''^^'^^''^  ^r-'S*  plait"'S  ^^^ 
Liv  8  27.— Meo  all.iratu  venit, 'Z'/a^  7"»  aurum  mihi /erre^  abs  te.  1  laut.  Irin.j,  ^1». 
_\lius  Jiccinit  fa>^iidiOse. /a/Ato>mm  9'/i '/ica<!  etc.  Sen.  Ben.  2,  24.  .....  , 

•^rV,^/^  J /ill-  the  force  of  ut  qui  ('  since  he  '  etc  ).  being  construed  with  the  sub- 
iiinctivef-  ffius,f  ater  .0ns,  T//y>o//r/«iperegre  d^puqr.mV,  faniiliam  ducit:II.s  brother 
Ttciu^  ^incel^^^^  at  »''«  »'^-'"l.".*  '"f  l^-x^x-l-I^J^l-  Cu-.  Phil. 

Lt.c  u  ._mc.  ny.a  .^  ^^^-^j,,,,-,  „,ed  =.  ita  vt.or  ita  4,  in  the  meaning  'provided 
that '  fsimilinrem  mulierem  magisquc  eandem,  vtpote  qua!  nou  sit  eadem,  non  reor  deos 

^Tp!^^im'Q>!il^pr^^r^^  «^«-  '  especially  since  he,  you  etc.)   in  classical 

lAmrmC^c  is  ^»11  "rued  with  ihciubjunctive :  Nemo  adfuit,  ne  hic  quuiem  Hortensius, 
ISS'/^J'/Tilium  solus  ant^  de4m.dtu  defendi..et.  Cic.  SuU.  2,  0 -Valde  metuo  ne 

♦  ThiTSiidTti^previous  ^entence,  and  many  similar  passag.-s.  are  generally  under>tood 
««  enu  V  ilent  to  Ut-dauses  of  quality  (althou-h  Ut-clauses  couhl  not  be  used  in  the  r  place). 
SuTexi  luittonsex  ain  nothing,  since  the  question  will  arise,  «/^y  the  author  co,.- 
ci^hecl  s  c  cKes  a^  qual.tafve  tjt-clauses.  and  why,  for  instance,  in  a  relative  clause 
hutm  irate  vprecetiing  the  last  pa-sa-e.  which  expresses  exactly  the  same  thought, 
a  Si/^  i^  u^ed  (•  Gallite  FontCjus  priefui».  qu(t  cousta  ex  eis  generibns  hondnum 
Siec  Tie  reason  that  in  this'relative  clause  the  indicative  is  used  is  evidently 
because  liere  the  author  states  a  mere  fact,  while  in  the  next  i.assaire  (qu<.ted  in  the  text) 
be  repeat-  tm.  sa    e  1^^^      in  order  to  show  its  importance  for  the  subsequent  d.'lence 

t  iK  Cic   Mil  18,  4  (quippe  qui  obvius  ei  futflrus  non  erat)  the  reading  is  doub    ul. 

1  Lvvuse^ the  indicative  with  quippe  qui  about  as  often  as  the  subjunctive.  1  he  sub- 
iuLVive Sccuis  for  instance  in  21,  m!  2(;,  31 ;  and  :37, 20. -For  pariicula.s  about  the  u^e 
.!tv,»/i»»e  see  D  688  foil.     For  the  derivation  of  <7Mi/J/>^  see  p.  7U>. 

S^iu  Cia  Att-aTS, 4\Utpote  qui  nihil  contemuere  soremus),  the  reading  Is  doubtful. 


fri^-eas  in  hibernis,  jyrcesertim  qui  sagis  non  ahvndAris.  lb.  Fam.  7,  10,  2.  Sec  Ex.  66.— 
With  the  indicative,  it  sometimes  occurs  in  Planius,  as  Rud.  2,  1,  2. 

5  Qui  tiwien  generally  represents  the  principal  smfence  as  'concessive'  in  regard  to 
the  clause,  being  ren.iered  by  who  however',  'which  however',  or  by  althuush  . 
with  restrictive  meanin-,  as :  Perturbat  me  etiam  ilhid  interdum,  <?worf  /am€//,  quum 
te  peniius  recogndvi,  tiinCre  des:no  ;  Sometimes  this,  too,  disturbs  ma  which,  however 
I  cease  to  fear  when  I  thoroughly  examine  your  character.  Cic.  Dej.2,  4  (  =  althougU 
itdisturbs  me,  I  cease  to  fear  when  etO-Sometimes  a  clause  introduced  by  «?wt  tainen 
has  the  force  of  a  concessive  parenthetical  sentence,  restricting  the  predication  of  the 
Drincipid  sentence  by  a  'concession',  similarly  to  quamquam  U  used  as  co-ordinating 
{•oniunction  (See  '  Concessive  clauses ') :  as:  Alter,  qui  <amm  se  continuerat,  senseraf. 
tautum  aliud  atque  homines  ex-pectabant ;  The  other  one,  although  (I  cannot  deny 
that)  he  had  restrained  himselt,  only  felt  diflerently  fnmi  what  men  expected.  Cic. 
Sest.  53.  114. -Sometimes  qui  fatnen  approaches  the  meaning  of  a  concessive  subordina- 
tin<'  conjunction  (almost  =  et^),  as  :  Csesar  dixit,  ejus  hostis  periciilum  factiim  esse 
nuper  in  Italia,  servlli  tumultu.  quos  tamen  aliquid  usus  ac  discipllna,  qu:e  a  nobis  accc- 
pissei.t,  sublevaient ;  That  tnis  enemy  had  been  lately  tested  in  Italy  in  the  war  with 
the  Slavs,  althouqh  the^e  had  the  advanta-e  etc.  C;es.  B.  «.  1,  4(».-<;^«t  ^a?»^;?  generally 
stands  with  the  indicative,  unless  the  relative  clause  as  such  requires  the  subjunctive, 
a-  •  Fnit  miiiftcus  in  Cra-so  pudor,  qui  tamen  (  =  ita  tamen  ut  is)  non  modo  obesjet  ejus 
oratiOni.  sed  etIam  pHides.<et.  Cic.  Or.  1,  26,  122. -Si  vt;_tusium  verbum  sit,  quod  tamen 
(  =  ita  tamen  ut  id)  consuetQdo  fcrrc]H)s4t.  lb.  3,  4:3,  170. 

1  Homo  oui  semper  hospitalissimus  nostrOrum  hominum»  existimatvn  emt,  nohiit 
videri  IMbVium  invliusdomum  suam  recepisse.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1,  26.-2.  I  aUoni.is.  ^//1 
le-em  nos^et.  et  nui  non  putartt  sil)i  expedire  ita  accipere.  neg^at  id  sibi  debCn.  lb. 
'>  1  TA  -3  Neque  spes  veni;e  ab  ScipiOu.-  erat  CeltibCris.  quern,  bene  meritum  de  se-», 
in  AfriVam  op|ni-natum  venissent.  Liv.  :i0,  8.-4.  Itaque  jam  J»  Tuscu lano  Q.a  i.ou 
vmninUsem,  me  jam  u-um  isto  pr.uemio.  conjCc;3  ui  in  lilum  lib.um  quern  tiln  misi. 
Cic  Att  16  6  4—5  \^U\qui  j.im  illain  pr.t'dam  rf<^iwww/,  commotus  e^t.  lb.  \  err. 
2  1'  .51  — ♦;  Volcatius  animo  aquissimo  nuinmos  atiei t.  qui  nihil  amitteret.  In.  2,  i,  \.i. 
— 7'lnde  barl)ari  dissipaii,  quihux  nee  certa  imperia,nec  duces  e^>e«^  yertunt  I'.'y'*-'^""} 
iusuo»  I  7  24-8  Turn  «lemum  Titurius,  qui  nihil  ante  ;>ro^wdi.'.*^€^  trepidSre  et 
concur^are-'atCo'tta,  r/./i  coqitasset  luec  posse  accidere,  nulla  in  re  commflm  salflti 
dee.T  C:U.  B.  G.  !>,:«.-«.  I'rimo  mirantur  onyies  improbua.ein.  .f'^'d-,  J"^;«  ^^» 
no<sent  vidObant  adi<ctum  esse  oculum  hereditati.  Cic.  \err.  2,  2,  15.— 10.  Attitus 
niHG  ;,m  onsulu.n  pnefectQia^  deiatas  sic  accepit  ut  ne.uinen.  in  provinciam  sit  con- 
secfit.s-  oui  ne  cum  Otiintu  quidem  CicerOne  roluent  ire  in  Asiam.  Nep.  Att.  6.- 
1  inni^al  .rius  anitn^.n.  qu^fm  odium  er.a  Komanos  deposuit ;  gi.t  quidein,  quum 
patria  pulsus  'esset.  iMMnquam  desfiterit  an.m<,  bellare  cum  1/;;"}^"';«;  !'>•  l^^%\  %- 
12  Sit  utn  nanus  mentis.  O"icond)tioii<iu  banc />;;'/rf?('.««.?'  Plant.  Inn.  2,4,54.— Li.  J>e 
que  Ic  f.  'irJa  Pientissinuim  ngem  Philipi)um,  qui  Aristoteiem  Alexandro  Alio  doc- 
?arem  ac.fcnX  Cic.  Or.  :3,  ri.^  14i:'-14.  Ego,  qui  ab  i'-eunt^  acta.c.  tnceru^us  essem^unho 
Crassi,  v.rbum  ex  eo  numquain  elicere  potui  de  r»  ^"^^<i'%"^''- .1'''  \'r^s',;  '.iTi»;  „^1 
tuip.  qwv  illlus  oausa>.nihil  />7-o./^.s-,s-./^/,  reponuntur.  lb.  Verr.  2,  2  6.  -16  ^"  P.''-'"^'  «^ 
in  eadem  ir.vidiie  llamma /vi^w/,  hos  in  t''''"»atu  spoliSre  inst  tu  t  lb  On 
17  Vera  oui  in  foro  jiidiciOque  ita  verser  ut  nemo  plures  causa»  deleideiit,  et  ^?nomne 

enums  ?n  his  sn,dfis"U.3?m«m,  tamen  quo  die  mihi  ^»^^"^{""^,'^^^"7,;;;' r/JiTii 
moveor  animo  sed  etiam  toto  corpore  perhorresco.  lb.  Cac  13.  41.-18.  itaque,  qui  111 
naUinaceebrirae  atque  in  ociil  s  civium  quondam  rixenmm,  nunc  abdimus  nos, 
u  u    i^m  licet    II)  Oir  3  1.  3.-19.  At  btulte  fecit  (R.-gulus)  qui  non  modo  non  «;j^/6- 
W   cap    vorredimendos  verum  etiam  dissuaserit.  lb.  3,  27,  .lOL-20.  Sed  tu  in  re  mili- 
•iri  multoescau  i'^m^        in  advocationlbus*,  g;/i  neque  in  Oceano  natSre  vduerts 
ne?iiu    s  eciare  essed2rios5.  lb.  Fam.  7,  10,  2.-21.  Ego  stulta  multum,  q uce  cam  hoc 
»11,0  t-ubulem    PlaiU   Mil.  2,  4,  18.-22.  Corporis  nostri  raagnam  natflia  vuietur  habu- 
"le  rino.  eur'o^^  i"  q"^  esset  species  honesta,  eam  posvit  m 

rrtuiiM         Vr  oVl   3.^  126-2.3  Credo  ego  miseram  fuisse  Penelopam,  g?/ce  tamdiu 
?r JS  o'<I.lv;i.'Vh;m:'stlVh.  tu  L-24.'sic  vest.,  ista  P-videntia  re,.rdiendenda 
qn^  ra.iOnem  dederit  eis  quus  scierit  ea  perverse  "''aros   .^'c  ,N.  IJ- 3,  31    '8      2o  im 
Sacnlm.-.n  exsecrabantur,  qui  vcrrem«  tam  nequam  reliqvtsset.  I'^-  )e|r.  i   1,4»,. 
oifllo    o  Li'Mirem  accusare  c«pit.  qui  tam  diligeus,  tam  attentus  esset.  lb.  2,  1,  48.- 
2lMaiunai"tiKg.at'a^i.^^^ 
^-Tf  tv^-[,i7;^hospitable  toward  (mr  citizens.-»  alttiouoh  he  bad  well  d^s^rv^-^^^f  ,»^':"J- 
-3  1  rn^eiTei  ft  in  that  book  which  etc.-*  in  your  1^^-pract.ce^    Cicero  jvro^ 

Sled  of  gladiatorial  shows.-»  a  boar,  being  an  allusion  to  Verres's  name. 


-i' 


674 


LOCATIVE   CLAUSES. 


576 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


ted  quill  maximogandiofrnerCmur.  lb.  Ph.  10. 1. 1.— 28.  Bnnam  c^tqnodhaboacirmtiam 
iiiilii.  (/Ill  lu  ex  iii-ul-o  salsiitn /ki  operjl  meji.  Plaiit,  Kiwi.  2,  )i,  ii.— 2H.  Uiucs  to^  lau- 
davisMs  (/ui  contra  ilium  b-lluin  su^cept'^.sefif.  Cic  IMi.  5,  i.  3. — •H).  Socrates  t;i>-  gut  luec, 
qiiie  iiii.ic  no- quajriimis,  f/ ad  are/it,  comiuHue  iiomeii  (philo^opbOnitii)  eripiiit.  lb  Or. 
3,  IH.  t)0.— .il.  Homo,  iiiiiulcus /a.v  qi/i  recV assent^,  hw^^li8  oinniOus  (jid  arc/a//Hissen('\ 
exarsiii  iracuiidiil.  lb.  Verr.  2,  2,  20. — 32.  Noii  iiii^rati,  eed  mi.-eri  (enmt  ei)  ijuibiifi  red 
dere  salfliein.  a  quo  acceperaiit,  iion /ifer«?/.  II).  Se.-^t.  57,  122.— 33.  (^ui  potest  tempe- 
raiiriarn  laudjlre  is  qui  fpnuit  siiminiim  l)onum  in  voiupl5tc?  II).  Ott".  3.  33. — 34.  Usee  qui 
vidtat.  iiDiiue  cou'iltur  eoiiliiCri  deos  esse  t  H).  N.  D.  2,  4.—;^.  Has  episjolas  qiii  Ugat^ 
noil  mult  urn  desideret  historiam  illOrum  temporiim.  Nep.  Att.  Hi.  3.— 3(>.  (^wi'  adolt-s- 
Cfiis  iiibil  nisi  gravissiine  J'eceHl,  is?  eil  leljlte  saltjlvit  1  Cic.  Dej.  9,  27.-37.  i^ni^  ex 
calainitjlte  senatOris  I*.  U.  «*polia  doinuni  referre  auxus  «/,  is  ullam  calamitaiem  poterit 
deDivetlri  ?  lb.  Verr.  2.  1,5!). — -'JS.  Cupiditiltes  qui  possuiit  esse  in  to  r/wi^  ruri  siempor 
fiabitdrit?  lb.  1{.  A.  14,  31).— 3!).  Noii  illo  otio  fruor  quo  di'l)ebai  w  qui''  quondam  /X7>€- 
risset  otium  civitiiti.  H).  Off.  3,  1,  4. — 40.  Hac  impulsi  occasiOne.  qui  jam  ante  se  P. 
R.  imperio  siibjectos  dolertnt.  iiberius  atqiie  audacius  de  bello  consilia  inire  iiicipiiint. 
C';es.  B.  (J.  7,  1. — 41.  In  eo  qui"^  ad  D.  lirutum  obsidione  liberandnm  proftclusnf.  tiuiere 
mm  del)Gtis,  ne  raemoria  maiu-ar  doinesiici  dolOris.  Cic.  Ph.  5,  18,  51. — 42.  C^uia  qui 
barbaros  homines  ad  bellum  i/iip'^U'-ret,  noii  detiebat  miiuiere  illDrum  suspiciOnem.  11). 
Sull.  13,  3<;. — 41  Qui  chiroKrapba"*  Cjtsaris  Ufftiidisxet  lucri  sui  causjl.  i>  legrs  C;esaris, 
eu-que  pra.'ciilras,  iit  r<nipublicam  concuiere  possit,  evertit.  lb.  Ph.  2,  42,  109. — 
44.  Qui  in  sua  Vii  fuisset  egenti^simus,  erat  insolens  in  aliCnjl.  lb  \i.  A.  8,  32. — 15.  Et 
qui  se  arK'in  dicendi  traditilrum  etiam  c\i\<ir\»  profifeilfur,  ipse  omnibus  judiciisvictns 
est.  Ii>.  Fiacc.  IS,  42.— 40.  Prope  inspeciautibus  v'obis  classis  en  rui  consul  P.  K.  pne- 
positus  esfief,  a  pnedonibus  capla  est.  lb.  L.  M.  12,  33.-47.  Mihi  permlriiin  accidn,  tan- 
tain  teineritjtem  luisse  in  (O  adolcsceiite  cujus  ego  salflteni  duubus  capitis  jiidiciis  i/e- 
ftudi.  It).  Faui.  3,  10.  5. — 4i.  Qui  reus  pridie  jam  ipse  se  condemnaium  putCihat,  is 
po-teilciuam  defensor  eiiis  consul  est  factus,  absolvittir.  lb.  Verr.  1,  7,  20.— 4'.».  OiatO- 
lem  per/K'tu/n.  et  cui  nihil  admodum  de^nt^  Demostheiiein  facile  dixi'ris.  lb.  Brut.  9. — 
50  L'giOni  Mt-ssaUa  pijeeiat,  claris  majoriijus.  (gnf/ius  ipse,  et  qui  soitisad  id  bclium 
arils  l)onasa//''//i^>'e/'.  'I'ac.  H.  3  9. — 51.  Tyneta  abe>i  a  Carthagiiie  XV' millia  passiium, 
locus  quum  openhus,  turn  suapte  iiatQra  futU{<,et  qui  a  Carttiaiiim;  conspici  et  i)::o- 
bCre  ipse  conspectum  in  mare  uriii  jx).-<,sit.  Liv.  30,  9. — 52.  Erant  in  ejl  \i'<^\oue/or(issimi 
viii,  ceuturiOnes,  qui  (  =  ita  f^irtes  ut)  jam  primis  ordiuibus«y>/)ro/*i//7'/(7;v-«/,  T.  Piillo 
et  L.  VorSnus.  C:e>.  B.  G.  5,  44. — 53.  Me  impedit  pudorab  hoininum  omnium  irravis- 
simo,  qui  genus  liujusmodl  dispuiatiOnis  semper  coufe/npserif,  luec  exquirere.  Cic. 
Or.  1.  .35. — 54.  Est  vera  lex  recfa  ratio,  iiattlne  conff^rufns,  cotiMaiui,  seinpittrnn.  quiE 
vocet  ad  ollicium  jiibendo,  vetaudo  a  fraiide  U^tfrreaf.  lb.  liep.  3,  22. — 55.  Hoscius  hunc 
■mif^truin,  qui  iiondum  paterno  funeri  justa  solvittsel*,  ejCcit.  lb.  It.  A.  8.  23. — 5f).  O  //#is6- 
runi  scnem,  7'/i  mortem  contemiiendam  esse  in  tam  loiigS  jetfite  non  ridtint .'  Cic. 
Sen.  19. — .57.  O  marpui  vis  verit;Ttis,  qu^e  contra  homiimm  calliditiliem  facile  se  per  se 
ipsam  deftndat!  lb.  Ciel.  20. — 58.  Me  Ctxcuni  qui  h;ec  ante  lion  videriin!  lb.  Att.  10, 
10,  1. — 59"  O  solem  ipsum  btatissiinurn^  qui,  antequam  se  abderet,  lugientem  ridit  An- 
tonium  !  H).  Ph.  14,  10,  27. — 00.  (^tiintus  etiam  C;epio  (in  numeio  disertOrum  est  habi- 
tus), \'\racer(itforfi't,C"i  furtflna  belli  crimini,  invidiapopuli  calamitatiy*(/i/.  lb.  Brut. 
35,  13"). — 01.  Mihi  (piidem  pcstifera  vidCtur  tribunicia  potestas,  quippe  qiue  in  seditu'jiie 
et  ad  sediiiOnem  /mfa  sit.  lb.  Leg.  3,8. — 02.  Niillas  res  habeo  litteris  dignas.  quippA 
cui  nee  qu;e  accidunt,  nee  qu;e  airuntur  iillo  moihi  pt'oben fur.  lb.  Att.  11,  4,  1. — 0-3.  Plii- 
riinurn  terroris  Romam  cel«ritas  hostium  tulit,  quippe  quibu-n  a'gre  ad  undecinium  lapi- 
dem  occurswn  est.  LIv  5.  37. — 04.  iEquOrum  exercitus,  ufqui  permultosannos  imbelles 
er/issenf,  sine  ducibus  certis,  sine  imptiri»)  trepidJie.  Liv.  9.  45. — 05.  Igiiur  pro  se  qiiis- 
que  iuennes,  ut  quihwi  nihil  hostile  suspect tini  esset,  in  agmen  Komanum  luCbant.  lb. 
30,0. — BO.  Verilus  est  ne  hostium  impctum  tUBtinOre  iiou  lio&uci^  pt(£(>e7tim  qttos  re- 
ceuti  victoria  efferri  sciret.  Cuis.  B.  O.  5,  47. 

IV.    LOCATIVE   CLAUSES. 

i,  I* it*.  Locative  clauses  are  tliose  introduced  by  one  of  the  locative 
adverbs  of  tlie  interrogative  or  relative  form  {uhi^  unde,  quo,  qua,  ubicuii- 

^  Who  bad  read  the  report.— =  who  had  shown  their  approval  of  it  by  tluir  clamor. — 
^  i.  e.  Ucjoiarus.— 4  incaiiing  Vines.—*  refcrriiiLr  to  S.  Ko>cias.  — •»  "relerring  to  ilie 
HpeaUer.  -■  'Since  I  have  iiiveu  peace  to  the  cominunity,  I  ougut  to  eiijt)y  it  myseU".— 
'  referring  to  Octaviaiius.— »*  the  autograph  notes  leli'by  Ca.'sar.— "  had  i)ci formed  his 
duties  in  regard  to  his  lather's  funeral. 


qiLS  etc.,  see  p.  215,  i?.  3.  4;  p.   216),  according  to  which  they  belong 
either  to  the  inteuiiogative  or  to  the  relative  clauses. 

Obs.  1.  Relative  locative  clauses  are  either  in  the  relation  of  adverbial  objfct-davfes 
(p.  482,  C).  or  in  that  ol  atbibutive  clauses  (Obs.  2),  The  former  (h>cative  adverl)ial 
clauses)  have  the  grammatical  value  of  an  object  ot  place  (p.  215).  determining  the  toco/ 
relation  of  the  principal  predicate.  Their  syndetic  antecedent»  (expressed  or  under- 
stood)  are  the  demonstradce  locative  adverbs  (i.  e.  those  of  the  definite  form  :  ibi^  inde, 
to.  Hi,  see  p.  210,  2).  The  relative  locatives  may  be  either  in  the  same  adverbial  case  as 
the  syndetic  antecedent  {ibi  ubi,  inde  unde,  eo  quo  etc.),  or  their  cases  may  be  different 
(ibi  unde.  inde  ufn,  ibi  (?woetc.);  au:  Nuila  est  laus  ibi  esse  integrum  ubi  nemo  est  qui  aut 
p<»ssit  aut  conCtur  corrumpere;  it  is  no  praise  to  be  incorrupt  where  there  is  nobody  who 
can  or  dare  corrupt.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  Hi.— Ubi  libido  doniinatur,  innoceniiai  leve  priesidium 
est.  II).  Or.  05,  219.— Ejici  est,  inde  repelii  uude  invlius  recedas.  Sen.  £p.  54.— Major 
l>ar8  homiuum  to  delerri  solet  quo  a  iiatura  ipsa  deducitur.  Cic.  Off.  1,  41.  147.  —  Qua  triduo 
ascenderat,  (ea)  bidiio  est  degressus;  Jiy  l/ie  way  on  which  it  took  him  three  days  to 
ascend  the  mountain,  he  descended  in  two.  Liv.  40,  22.— Paheopolis  fiiit  hand  procul 
inde  wW  nunc  Neapolis  sitaest;  Paheopolis  was  not  iurfw/n  where  now  Neapolis  lies 
(  =  from  the  present  site  of  N.).  Liv.  8.  22.  See  Ex.  1-0.— Indefinite-relative  adverbs 
either  take  no  syndetic  antecedents,  or  the  ordinary  demonstrative  locatives,  as  :  Vbi- 
cunque.  homo  «;sL,  i^t  benelicio  locus  est.  Sen.  Vit.  B.  24.— Roniam  se  ire  significabant, 
quw  onque  Ibant,  immensum  obtinentes  loci.  Liv.  .5,  37.  See  Ex.  7. — The  relative  locative 
adverbs  niaj'  be  replaced  by  attributive  phrases  with  the  noun  locus  to  which  they  are 
equivalent  (quo  in  loco,  quein  in  locum,  quo  ex  loco  etc..  gee  p.  215,  7?.  4)  as:  Qjium  vi- 
dCreiit  quo  in  lo<o  (  =  ubi)  antea.  qui  sociis  injurias  fecerant,  accusSri  et  coiidemn5ri 
solebaiu,  ibi  esse  palam  posita  ca  qu;e  a  sociis  abiati  assent.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  1,  22.  Instead 
of  "  quo  in  loco\  the  mere  ablative  {quo  loco)  is  of  ten  used:  Hannibal.  j</r>  constituerat 
loco  (  =  uU  conslituerat),  quinque  miilia  ferme  ab  urbe  posuit  castra.  Liv.  27,  10. 

Obs.  2.  Attiwiu'tive  locative  clauses  describe  the  local  relations  of  an  ordinary' eub- 
Ftaiitive  which  is  the  grammatical  antecedent  of  the  relative  adjective,  implied  in  the 
locative  adverb.  The  antecedents  of  such  clause»*  are  either  names  of  cities,  or  proper 
names  denoting  other  localities,  or  common  nouns  denoting  places. 

A.  If  relative  clauses  with  the  name  of  a  city  as  irrammatical  antecedent,  are  intro- 
duci'd  by  those  prepositions  which,  according  to  §  455.  wmild  require  names  of  cities  to 
be  placed  in  the  genitive,  accusative,  or  ablative,  without  a  preposition  (as  'locative 
cases '),  the  relative  always  takes  the  form  oivilocative  adverb  (ubi  —  in  which ;  quo  =  to 
which  ;  unde  =  from  which),  as  :  Tarquinienses  VolscOrum  bello  ad  Anxur,vbi  (not't/i 
quo'')  puesidium  obsidebatur,  occupStoa  vidgbant  Romanos.  Liv.  5,  10. — Tanium  terrOris 
liiit  Iidtnoi.  7?/o(not '  ad  quain  ')  muitii)lex  famapervenerat ;  So  great  a  tenor  was  at  lioni^, 
to  which  (city)  many  rumors  iiad  J'ound  their  way  (where  uv.my  rumors  had  arrived).  Liv. 
5.  IS.- Maxima  pars  rf/o/*  prof Q git,  t///(/e  ne  nuntius  qiiidem  cladis  Romara  est  missus, 
whence  (from  which  city)  not  even  a  messenger  was  sent  to  Rome  to  carry  the  intelligence 
of  the  defeat.  Liv.  5,  38.— Often  the  antecedent  denotes  the  inhaf/itants  of  the  citv,  while 
th»;  relative  relers  to  the  city  as  a  place.  In  this  instance,  the  relative  likewise  takes  an 
adverbial  form,  as  :  Bellum  cum  Volxiniensitjus  exoitum,  quo  exercitiis  duci  nequlvit. 
Liv.  5,  31.— Adsunt  Afhtnietises,  vnde  bumanitas,  doctilua,  etc.  in  omuls  terras  dislri- 
bfltte  putantur.  Cic.  Flacc.  20,  02. —See  Ex.  8.  9. 

B.  Relatives  generally  take  an  adverl)ial  form  in  place  of  relative  adjectives  dependent 
on  those  prepositions  which  correspond  to  any  of  the  four  locative  adverbial  cases,  if 
iheir  antecedent  is  any  proper  name  denoting.'  localities,  as  m<uiniains.  countries,  castles, 
etc.  (where  oiteii  the  name  of  tlie  inhabitants  is  u-ed  instead  of  the  place),  as  :  Iter  per. 
Alpls.  quo  magiio  cum  periculo  mercatOies  ire  consuerunt,  palefieri  volebat.  Caes.  B.  G. 
3.  1. — Accepimus,  statuam  in  Avent'itnim,  quo\o\i\  Romani  diciatoris  vocaverant,  perla« 
tam.  ulji  tempium  ei  postea  Camillus  dedicavit.  Liv.  5,  22 —Qui  m  Salle nt'inis,  fxni  in 
liruttits  pnedia  habent.  unde  vix  ter  in  anno  audlre  nuntium  jjossiint.  Cic.  R.  A.  40,  i:S2. 
— Instead  of  tli^se  local  adverbs,  equivalent  attributive  purases  with  'locus'"  freqneutly 
occur,  as  :  Venit  ad  castellum  Axiam,  (x  quo  loco  fundus  is  de  quo  agittir  nou  longe 
al)est.  Cic,  Ciec.  7,  20. 

C.  The  same  '  locative '  adverbial  form  of  relatives  is  often  used  when  tbe  antecedent 
is  a  COMMON  NOUN  denoting  locality  (as  l(KUs.  vrb»,  regio  etc.).  as  :  Intelliggbat,  in  eis 
locis  sibi  bellum  gerendum  J/W  L.  Valerius  legatii»  interfecius  esset.  (.  je-.  B.  (».  3,  20. — 
Videtisne  hoc  totum  «ow<-n.  coram  utA  facit  delatiim,  esse  in  litOra?  Do  you  not  see  that 
the  whole  paygye.  where  he  savs  that  the  complaint  was  mtide  in  person,  shows  the 
marks  of  erasure?  Cic.  Verr.  5,  2,  42.— Ex  ei»  oppidis  qua  ducebantur;  P^iom  those 
towns  through  which  they  were  conveyed.  lb  2,  5,  20. — Vadis  Hhodani  qua  minima  alii- 
tfldo  fluiuiuiis   erat:  by  the  fords  of  the  llhodanus,  ivhe7e  (i.  e.  'through  which')  the 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


576 


577 


RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 


wafor  had  the  least  depth.  Cnes.  B.  O.  1,  8.— See  Ex.  10-12.— But  the  upe  of  relative 
adjectives  with  Mich  auleccdciits  is  as  frequent  as  ttiat  of  the  locative  ad verhj»,  as  :  Mox 
Vi-iiacxi  »d  vum  lontm  in  quo  (or  f/Ai)  coniinif'^a  pupiia  erat.  Liv.  10.  S»).  — Kis  tt^tjionihiis 
quf!>u,s  (t^T  qua.)  iios  iter  I'actflio!*  co^rnovcrat.  C'jes.  B.  G.  5,  lU.  The  use  of  locative  ad- 
verbs, howi'ver.  is*  ne<;essary  if  tlie  local  antecedent  is  expressed  by  an  absolute  adjec- 
tive, as  :  Ad  €xtrhnu}n\iVo\\\\c\vb  Galiiic  ubi  (not  inquo)  castraMarcellus  habCl)at ;  To  the 
extreme  bouudarieti  of  Gaul  where  (or  at  which)  Marcellus  had  his  camp.  Liv.  40,  16. 

D.  If  relative  clauses  refer  to  7*?r*"on«  as  antecedents,  the  ndative  may  take  an  adver- 
bial locative  form,  if  by  the  relative  the  place  is  meant  where  the  persons  are  staying:, 
as  :  Kem  ad  pa/res  conscripted  detuli,  quo  quum  C'atilltia  venisset.  quis  eum  senator 
ippellilvit?  Cic.  Cat.  2.  6,  12. — But,  even  if  the  relative  has  no  local  meaninp:,  locative 
adverbs  are  sometimes  used  in  place  of  prepositional  relative  adjectives.  This,  how- 
ever, is  confined  to  the  adverb  viide,  as:  Quodsi  saltatOreui  avuuj  halmisses,  neque  eum 
virum  unde  (  —  ex  quo)  pudOris  pudii  itiu'qiie  exemi)la  petereniur,  tamen  e.'c.  (Mc.  Dej. 
10.  2S.  See  Ex.  13.  14.-  Kanly  uU.  with  reference  to  persons,  is  used  in  the  nieanin<i: 
'  apnd  quern  \  a-  :  Neque  adhuc  pruiter  te  quisquam  fuit  ubi  nostrum  jua  contra  illo» 
obtineremus.  Cic.  Quiiict.  9. 

Obs.  3.  The  MOOD  of  locative  relative  clauses  is  determined  by  the  rules  referring:  to 
relative  clauses  in  <,'eneral  (^  014.  (115),  both  in  respect  to  the  subjunctive  of  non-reality 
(Ex.  15-17),  and  tlie  jjnoinic  subjunctive  (Ex.  18).  In  the  case  of  the  subjunctive  of 
adaptedness  and  purpose,  the  antecedent  /cxv/t*,  implied  in  the  locative  form  of  the  rela- 
tive, is  omitted  in  the  same  way  as  the  antecedents  of  rehiiive  adjectives,  as :  Ilabea 
(i.  e,  loc>/m)  ubi  ostentts  tuam  illam  prieclilram  j-.atientiam  fri;:oris  etc.  Cic.  Cat.  1, 10,20. 
— EtfecSrunt  ut  esset  (i.  e.  locus)  ubi  tci^imeuta  pnependCre  ^>06*€/j^  Caes.  B.  C.  2,  9. 

Obs.  4.  Intkukogative  locative  clauses,  which  (accordinjr  to  p.  482  foil.)  are  either 
pubject-clauses,  or  object-clauses,  must  always  have  their  piedicates  in  the  subjunctive, 
according  to  the  general  rules  on  interrogative  clauses  (p.  390,  foil.),  as  :  Istud  non  beue- 
ficium  sed  fenus  est.  ciicuinspicere.  non  ubi  o^Xum-.  ])onas  (i.  e.  beneflcium),  ted  nbi 
qiuestuosissime  habeas,  nnde  facilliine  tollas.  Sen.  Ben.  4,  3. 

1.  Obcnecat  animos  fortflna  ^ibi  vim  suam  ingruentem  refriniri  non  vult.  Liv.  5,  37. — 

2.  Ubi  culque  valles  abdita  spem  salfltis  aiiquam  offerCbat,  (ibi)  consederat.  Caes.  B.  G. 
6  34.-3.  Ibi  cognoscif,  LX  navis  eOdem,  undf  erant  profecta;,  revertisse.  lb.  5, 5.-4.  Ibis 
tandem  aliquando  ^«o  te  jam  pridem  ista  tua  cupidiias  etlVenilta  ac  furiOsa  rapiCbat. 
Cic.  Cat.  1,  10,  2."3.— 5.  Iliec  exsecriXtus  in  se  hostlsque.  qua  confertissiniam  cernCbat 
Gallonyn  aciem,  concitat  equum.  Liv.  10,  28. — H.  Ketulerunt,  eo  se  progressos  unda  in 
oHinIs  partis  circumspectus  esset.  lb.  10.  34.— 7.  Ad  virtQtem  eundum  est,  yvocM«7M« 
voc-Svii,  quocuxque  misit.  sine  rcspectu  rei  familiSris.  Sen.  Ben.  4,  1. — S.  Labienus  re- 
vertitur  Agtaicum,  ii/A  impedimenta  totlus  exercitus  reiicta  erant.  Cu;s.  B.  G.  7,  02. 
— 0.  LUyUeum,  uude  diirressa  est  oratio,  reverttlmur.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  10.  — 10.  Loca  su- 
periOra,  ^4nde  erat  propinquus  dcspectus  in  mare,  ab  exercitu  tenebantur.  Ca^s.  B.  G. 

3,  14. --11.  Ad  c</^7/-a  S:imnilium  perrexil,  7«o  multitGdo  omnis  consternata  agebaiur. 
Liv.  10.  29. — 12.  Tantis  scelcribus  notatuses,  ut  omiiem  lociun  quo  a<lisses,  exilii  simil- 
iimum  redderes.  Cic.  Dom.  27.  72.--13.  (^iiasi  jam  divinarem,  illo  exstincto,  fore  vnde 
di-Tfrem  ntmineni.  lb.  Sen.  4, 12. — 14.  (Iia)  ut,  qui  ei(jn  necasset  iiud''  ipse  natus  tsset, 
carSret  eis  rebus  omnibus  ex  quibus  omnia  iiata  esse  dicuntur.  lb.  R.  A.  2(i,  71. — 
15.  An  vero  ullam  oram  tam  desertam  putatis,  quo  non  ililus  diei  faiua  pervenerit  ?  lb. 
Lesr.  M.  15.— 10.  Quid'  erat  in  terris,  uf/i  in  tiu»'^  pedem  jKmeres ?'  lb.  Phil.  2.  19,48. — 
17.  Turn  «ibi  M.  PisOnis  domum,  vbi  ha/ntdret,  leu'erat.  lb.  2,  25,  02. — IS.  Veluti  ex  com- 
posito  ibi  obviam  habuCre  hostem,  vf/i  et  inirare  ac  vastare  ipsi  Samnitium  agruni 
prohiberentur^,  et  regredi  inde*  in  pacata,  Bociorunique  P.  K.  finis,  Samnltem  ptvhibS- 
rent.  Liv.  lU,  32. 

ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 

I.  Indkfinite  Relatives  (/?.  4,  Obs.  9).— 1. 1  shall  send  you*  all  the  books*  on  tliis 
subject''  lean  discover**  in  my  library. — 2.  All  the  soldiers  that  survive»!"  after'"  the  rout, 
retreated  totheir  former"  camp.— 3.  The  ir«'neral  sent  a  foraging  parly  >2  to  the  surround- 
ing countryi^  t,,i4  collect'^  all  the  corn  tiiat  was  left'-'  after  the  depiedations"  of  the 
enemy,— 4.  I  wish  you  would  employ  all  the  time  that  will  be  at  your  disposition  be- 


1  Where  was  a  place  etc.—'  in  your  own  (property). — ^  a  subjunctive  of  quality,  accoid- 
ing  to  /?.  20  (  —  prohibebantur  vastare  ai^rum  ubi  liosti  obviam  venerant). — *  instead 
of  et  unde,  according  to  p.  474  Obs.  7,  fin. — *  Render:  You  ivill  hare.—*  —  whatever  of 
books, — '  res, — "  investigare,- "  superesse, — •"•  §  414,  7?.  52.— "  superior. — *3  Irumenta- 
lOres. — ^^  surrounding  country,  agri.— »*qui.— •*  colligere. — *'  leliqui  esse  ex. — "  i)opu- 
latio. 


iow9}  entering  upon  yourofhcial  duties,  to  acquire  that  knowledge  without  which  von 
cannot  successfully  perform  your  duties.-5.  {  wish  you  would  enter  upon^  this  bS 
i.t.>s   with    the   undersiaiiaint;3   that   I  will   myself  do*  what   fuartl  of  it    voii   mS 
leaves  unfinished«.-0.  Examine^  the  man  in  whatever  way"  ^TaVi.-7n^whaTevl^r 
wy  we  may  shape  our  actions»,  yet  that  which  is  to  be,  will  happenJo._8  The  consul 
orderedu    he  l.ctor  to  hurry  to  executioni^  whomsoever  oP^  the  cfowd  he  would  desi^ 
iiateM  by  [a  ni(.t.on  ofj  his  eyes.-9. 1  begi»  [you]  would  remember  this,  that,  whatevfr 
words  you  use'»  in  your  letter,  you  will  certainly  oflend  his  feelingsi' _io 'wSh'o 
ever  of  the  two  parties'^  will  be  victorious  in  this  war,  we  will  be  lost'»  at  all  events^o 
—11.  How  jrreat  so  ever  his  poverty  was,  he  still  preserved  his  intcf^ritysi  _12  AH  his 
1.       l.f'/rP'^'''  '"■'"J^^'y.'/  'y  amount"  was,  he  placed^s  at  the  dispos^ition  of  the  reniib! 
)ic.-13  Oil  never  takes'^*  the  taste"  of  salt,  whatever2«  quantity  ycm  may  add"  -54^6 
gav,.  what  he  could,  however  little  it  may  have  been.-15.  If  [there]  will  be  anythin-  of 
whatever  kind  it  iiiay  be,  I  wisii  you  would  write  [it].-10. 1  cannot  attack^-  a  man^. 
m  !v  b e'"^"  'rrva^Vo  T.  ^'''l  '\f  "'""T^'  kin,lnesU<  whatever  his  [Xr]  qualh  es3» 
r    -^1    r»  '••  ^  ^'^      \Z  '^^"''".  ^  ^*"'"*'  •'*''«'■«  'he  first  of  next  months*,  wherever  I  may 
.e  [at  that  iime].-18.  Our  citizens  have  committeds*  to  their  government's  the  pro^ec^ 
101.37  o,    heir  persons3«  ;  wherever'-  in  the  world  they  may  beTthe  whole"  aulhJrity  Sf 
U  e  ivpublic  is  w,  th  them.-19.  So  great  fame  had  preceded*'  that  man,  that,  to  what  phice 
so  ever  he  ca,ne^=»,  a  crowd  eager  to  see  and  hear  would  receive"  id,  i.-_2(^  In  whatever 
direction**  they  tr.^,ed*^  they  were  received*"  by  the  missiles*'  of  the  enemy  -21  Skir. 
m  ^he^s*    harassed*»  the  enemy  along^"  the  whole  line  of  their  march. -22.  How  so  ever 

man  wMi  Icr«''T    Kf  Tn  '''^ll^""  ^  ^^l""  "f  I«>^?ib]e.-23.  In  what  manner  so  ever  th  s 
wn.  i'  ^  «-hall  follow  his  lead". -24.  Be  it  as  it  may,  there  is  no  reason  why" 

xe  s iKMild  place  a  doubt  in  his  good  faith.-2.5.  Let  us  wait  Ibr^-  the  events  of  the  next 
[f.w]  days,  and»»  shape  our  course  accordingly. 

II.    AOKEEMENT  OP  TUB  RELATIVE  WITH  THE   GRAMMATICAL   ANTECEDENT  (§  611    §  612 

slnv.rTsV  ^^'.f*^""";''?  ami  women  who  had  survived*^  this  calamity,  were  sold  in tJ 
r.  IP  r^;-"''  ohtained  fame  by  those  devicess»  and  contrivances"»  which  are  un- 
,^/.'.  .''Ve'i  '■'  '''^•^,"}:'"--"f  ^"  f'C  next  day,  the  hostages  and  arms  which  Caesar  had  de- 
m.iiKled"',  were  delivered.-4.  Almost  the  whole  community'^  went  to  meet«3  Cjcsar  and«* 
begj:e(l«s,  not  to  deliver  them  up  to  the  vengeance""  of  [their]  bitterest"^  eneinies — 
foho  ih'Tfl  J^'^^^orenus  left««  the  intrenchment,  and  n.shed'o  «n  what  seemed 
to  be  the  thickest  ol  the  hostile  luies.-(5.  f-^extus,  the  son  of  L.  Tarquinius  used'Mo 
he  destruction  of  the  Gabii  that  power  which  they  had  entrusted  to  him  for  the  nrotec- 
lonof  the  !Mate.-7.  The  Gauls  resolved  to  assemblers  for  the  defence"  of  that  terri- 
tory^*  which?»  the  Romans  would  invade  first  with  their  ariny7«.— 8.  It  is  astonishing'T 

'  Kender  :  I  on  my  part,  whatever  of  time  will  intercede  {intercMere)  till  yduin  with 
8Ui)j)  you  wnl  assume  {occijjere)  the  province  conferred  (defejre)  to  you,  I  wish  you 
would  so  employ  {collocare),  that  you  learn  those  thinirs  {ea'jierdL^cere)  without  wliich 
you  cannot  correctly  perform  (^w^^yx'/yV/z/r/i)  that  office  (wvuhs).—^  a-'irredi  aliquid — 
■  ita.-*  perheere.— 5  future  perfect,  converted  into  a  subjunctive.— «inlectus—?  jn- 
vestigare.— »  modus.—»  to  ahapt  one's  actions,  se  gerere.— '<»  fieri.— n  mandare— '«  ad 
siipplicium  trahere.— '3  ex  multitudine.— '*  significflre  (p.  373,  Obs.  1  :  p  452  ^  98)  — 
i-'quaiso.-"  fut  perf.  (subjunct.).-^  animus.-'«  pars.-i»  =  we  are  goin- to  perish 
—  '•'"*";"•  fid<^s.— "  quantuscunque.— 23/o;;/flrc«'  at  the  disjwntionof  sfmubodu.  dicSre 
aliciii.— -*  recipere.— •■'«  sapor.— '-'"  Render:  How  much  salt  soever  vou  will  have  added 
iieyertheless  oil  does  not  take  [its]  taste.—"  adjicere.— 2«  acciisare.— 2»  is  — so  prose- 
qui.—3'  benevolent la.— 32  =  of  whatever  kind  he  etc.— «3  operam  dare  ut.-3*  Kalendse 
proximaj.— 35  deferre.— «"  =  to  those  who  are  at  the  helm  (in  gvbernaculh)  of  the  republic 
— 3j  pnesidium.— 38  corpora.— 3«  Render  :  Who,  \vherever  they  are  etc.— *"  Render  •  there 
(2(^t)  IS  the  whole  authority  of  the  republic.—*'  pra?cedere  aliquem.— *2  phiperf  — *3  nro- 
sequi.-**  qaoqiio.-*»  se  vertere,  p.  328,  li.  06;  Ob.>^.  1.—*«  excipere.--*?  telum — 
•'  expedlta-  cohortes.— *«  lacessere.— s»  -  wherever  he  made  his  march.— s'  curSre  (ut) 

ft  se  gerere.-"  =  I  shall  follow  to  what  [place]  he  will  lead.—'»*  nihil  est  quaraobrem! 
—o"  Kender  :  Let  us  expect  what  will  happen  ifleri)  at  the  next  (proxiinus)  days.— 
»»  Render  asyiidetically  :  according  as  (utcunque)  the  thing  is  (subj.),  so  let  us  act 
{agere).—->^  superesse,— »«  sub  corOua  vendere.— s»  artes.— «0  stndia  — «1  imperSre — 
«^  civitas.— 6»  obviam  procedere.— "*  Render:  '  nho'  begged,- "^  orare  ne  — «"  ira* - 
V  *V'*'^— ***  l*>q"i  (partic.  construction).— «»  extra  munitiOues  procedere.— 'o  Render- 
And  what  part  of  the  enemies  seemed  thickest  (confertisnmus),  in  that  he  rushed  (Irrunx- 
f  ^r",  .  .  "i***'"  »^y  inversion  :  Which  to  him  forces  to  protecting  (^«?H)  the  State  of 
ttio  Gal>ii  had  been  committed  (sM^/tf/^c/.).  those  he  used  to  (iw)  the  destruction  (wr- 
nicu.<)  of  the  people  (^6//.-?).— 'Sconvenlre,— '3  defendere  (f7m//<^m/^—7*  Render  •  bound- 
aries of  that  nation  (r/^n.*).—'^  Render  by  iwtJemon.—''»  Render  by  'to  introduce  an 
army  into  the  territory '.— '?  mirus. 


ENGLISH  EXERaSES. 


OVCi 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES, 


that»  [there]  should  have  been'  no  rancor'  between  those  men  who*  were  comp«*- 
iui,'*  for  tiiicli"^  a  prize.— JK  You  onj^ht  to  implore  the  immortal  cods  to^  defend  froiu 
the  nefarious'^  crimes  of  the  mo>t  abandoned»  citizens  a  jrovernment'O  which^'  they  des- 
tined»'^ to  be  the  ^ri-'atest'^anci  most  prosperous»*  of  all.— 10.  Keturn'^to  us  soeMengih- 
cned'«  in  health  that  you  are  able  to  justify»^  the  expectations  in  respct  toyou»'',  which»* 
\ou  have  awakened"  in  us.— 11.  Atticus  assisted  the  friends"»  of  his  adver>ary  AntoniuH 
with  [thosej  things  they^"  were  in  need  of^s.— 12.  Returns*  the  money  vvtiich^»  you  haso 
received  from  me.— 13.  Semirami»  built"»  the  walls  of  Babylon  with  lime"^  and  bitumen"», 
an  article""  which,  in  thatcouiitrv^o,  oozes»»  from  the  earth.  — 14.  KiiiK  Philip  was  seized 
with  the  desire  of  ascending  Mount  Hivmu»'",  from  which  it  was  said»»,  both»*  the 
Adriatic  and  Ionian  seas  [could]  be  seen  at  once.— 15.  The  whole  land^^  which  was 
between  Mount  Massicus  and  the  river Vulturnus  was  p.ircilled  oui3«  amonir  the  Plebe- 
ians,—1«.  The  enemy  seized»'  all  the  p:old'«  and  silver,  and  all  the  corns'*  ji„,i  ftKlder^» 
that  was  in  the  city.- n.  Hannibal  laid  waste*"  the  whole  tract  of  land*»  between  the 
city  of  OortOna  and  lake  Trasimenus,  with  all  the  riiror*"  of  war. 

III.  Absolutk  rklativks  (H.  H).— 1.  It  will  be  difficult  to  find  [any  person]  who  can 
pive*3  you  a  satisfactorv**  account*^  on  this  subject*». —'.>.  They  maintain*^  an  uninter- 
rupted*'* intercourse*»  with  these  traders*",  in  order  to  have;  [persons]  to  wh<mi  to  sell 
what  they  have  ^1»«»*'^*'  '^y  Ptealing^"  and  robbery*".— 3.  The  conquerors**  broke  the 
fetters**  of  their  countrymen*»  sold  into  slavery*',  sending;*''  [parties]  in  all  directions*» 
to«o  search»»  [for  them].— 4.  The  mannjxers»"  selected  [some  persons]  out  of  those 
presenf^s  to»*  keep  order»*  durinjjj  the  proceedimr**  in  po  iarj,'e  a  *;atht,'rin£:  —5.  [Thc^se] 
act  wisely  who,  in  times  of  prosperity»»  nuike  provisiims»'  for  a  rainy  day»^.— <».  He  i» 
considered  the  wise^t»»  who'"  himseH"  conceives  the  ideas  he  needs;  the  next  place 
beinj?  assigned'»  to  him  who  adopts^"  what  is  well  devised'»  by  others'*.  In  the  sphere'* 
ofstupiditv  just  the  reverse  is  true  ;  forhe'«  who  has  no  original  thought",  is  less  stupid 
than  he  (I'/le)  wiio  emlorses"  what  is'»  stunidly  devised  by  others,- 7.  [Those  rulers] 
who  consult*»  [the  interests  of  one]  part  of  the  citizcMis,  [and]  neglect  the  other**»,  inau- 
giirate»"  a  most  baneful*»  condition  of  things"*  in  the  country,  [namely!  rebellion  and 
discord.— 8.  Then,  even  those  who  had  been  doul)tful  before,  went  over"*  to  the  Cartha- 
ginians.—i>.  Happy  was  the  decease"»  of  that  [man]  who  did  not»'  live  to  witness  those 


things  which  he 


city]  who  either  do  not  see  whats»  is  imminent^'»,  or  dissemble»"  what  they  see.— 11.  ' 
Veneti  commenced"»  to  procure  the  equipments  for  their  ships.— 12,  They  did»"  w 
was  unworthy  of  themselves,  and  of  him  under»»  whom  they  served,— 13.  Write  to 


aw  in  his  nund  as  impending.— 10.  There  are  several  persons  [in  this 

",  The 

what 
hy  of  themselves,  and  of  him  under»»  whom  they  served,— 13.  write  to  me 
as  much  as  vou  can  on  all  the  events»*  of  that  dav.-14.  Let  every  one  of  us  attach 
himself»*  to  those  whom»»  he  likes  best,- 15.  Actions»'  are  dangerons  either  to  their 

»  Qiiod.— "  intercedere.—»  obtrectatio.— *  by  invemion.—^  they  compete  for  a  jrrize; 
intereos  est  lemulatio  laudis.— «  tantus.— '  nt.— »  nefarius.— »  perditissimus.— »»  res- 
publica.— »»  by  inversion.— "^"^  velle,- »»  pulcherrimus,— »♦  Horentissimus.—»*  reverti 
(fut.).— »»  confirmjlre.— "  sustinCre  ac  tueri,— '«  expectatiOnes  tui.— »•  by  invernon.— 
2«  concitare,— ■-'»  familiilris,— ""  by  i/uvrix)rafion.—'^  indigCre.— "*  resiituere.— "*  by 
incormration.—"'^  construcre.— "'  caLx,- **  bitflmen.- "»  materia.—»"  regio,— »»  exsudare. 
—32  liender  :  Hiemus  from  which  mountain.—»»  ferebatur  (with  impersonal  construc- 
tion).—»* the  two  seas,  the  Adriatic  and  the  Ionic  (sing.).—'*  quod  agri.—»»  dividere, 
with  dat.— »' capere.—»»  partitive  construction.—»»  pabulum,—*"  pervastare.— *»  parti- 
tive: quod  agri.— *"  clades.— *»  reddere.— **  probabilis.- **  ratio.—*»  res.—*'  tuPri,— 
*8  continuus.—*»  commercium.— *"  mercator,— *»  capere.— *"  furtis.— *»  rapTnis.- **  vic- 
tor.—** to  break  wniebodi/s  fetters,  aliquem  ex  servitOte  in  libertatem  restituere,— 
66(.ivis.— 5'  to  xell  into  slavery,  venumdaie.--*»  ablative  absolute,  in  the  perfect.—*»  to 
send  in  all  directions,  dimittere.— »"  qui.—»»  conquirere.— »"  qui  pru'fuCrunt.— »'  ei  qui 
aderant.— •*  qui.—»*  Render :  who  should  take  pains  (operam  ?/«/•<?)  lest  anything  in  such 
a  multitude  should  be  done  tumultuously  {tumult iidse),  or  against  the  laws.— ««  tempora 
secunda.— «'  providCre  aliquid,  to  make  prorl<ionJ<  for  soinetfnng.—*^  casus  adversi — 
«»  Render  :  They  say  that  he  is  the  wisest.—'"  Render:  to  whom  comes  into  the  mind 
what  IS  necessary  (o/>w),— '»  Render:  that  next  comes  (inv:rime  acrt-dere)  that  [one] 
who  etc.— '"  obtemperare.— '»  Render:  to  the  things  well  invented  {//y  afisobtte  parti- 
ciple).—"<*  Render:  of  the  other,— '*  Render  :  In  stui)i<lity  it  is  contrary  (contra).— 
'»  .\rran<re  :  For  less  stupid  is  he  (iv).— "  cui  nihil  in  mentem  venit.— '»  comprobare. — 
'»  Rendtn- :  What  comes  stupidly  into  the  mind  to  the  other.—*"  consulere  alicul,— «>  = 
neglect  a  part  — ^"  inducere  in  civitatem,- "^»  pcrniciosus,— »*  condition  of  things,  res. 
— 0*  deficere,— ^»  exitus,— "'  Render:  who  did  not  see  those  [things]  when  they  hap- 
pened (^n)  which  he  foresaw  Qmniidh'e)  [&i<]  future.— «»  plur.—^»  iinminCre.—»"  dis- 
simuiare.- »»  Render:  C(*mmenced  (institnere)  to  procure  (providere)  those  [things] 
which  pertain  to  the  use  of  the  ships.— »"  cominittere.-»»  Render  :  whose  camp  they 
followed.—»*  Render  :  on  all  things  which  have  been  done  on  that  day.--»*  to  attach  one^t 
aelf  to  anyone,  aliquo  uti.— »»  Render  :  to  whom  it  seems.  The  whole  sentence  to  bo 
irendered  by  four  words, — »'  rerum  actiOnes. 


*    ■•' 


m  - 


doers»,  or  to  other?. —16.  Every  one  can"  see' with  his  own  eyes  the  beauty  of  what* 
we  know  to  b(>  the  work*  of  divine  providence,— 17.  Is  Piso  the  man  wholookb»  as  if 
he  did  this  without  a  consideration' *— 18.  They  havtj  given  the  nian^,  whose»  life 
they  failed'"  to  take,  to  you.  O  judges,  to  throttle»».— 19.  lias  that  [man],  who»"  made 
another  man's  calamity"  the  occasion  of  a  most  outrageous  robbery,  the  iii:ht»*  of  depre- 
cating any  calamity  ?— 20.  Many  demand»*  of  iheir  friends  what»»  they  themselves  do  not 
grant»'  them. 

I  v.  Logical  Relatives  (R.  8).— 1.  He  sent  to  my  nid'^  all  the  troops  he  could  spare, 
which  gave  me  the  greatest  pleasure,— 2,  You  will  have  to  try»»  what  so  many  [did]  be- 
fore you,  [namely]  to  retrench""  your  expenses"»  as  carelullv""  as  you  can,- S.King  Ario- 
barzanes  has  returned  thanks  tome  for"»  the  great  care  which  the  Roman  Senate  and 
])eoj)le  were  taking  for  his  interests,  [a  distinction]  which  seems  to  be  very  great 
and  exceediigly  honorable"*  for  him"*. —4.  In  the  next  place"»,  if  I  am  now"'  called  from 
life"»",  I  shall  not  Ix  torn"»  from  a»"  re})ul)lic  which  to  part  with»»  would  give  me  pain,  a 
consulati<m  which»"  I  have  in  common  with  you. — 5.  The  Senate  returned  thanks  to 
Cicero,  not  lor»»  the  pood  administration»*  of  the  republic,  which  [it  did]  to  many,  but 
for  saving»*  [the  republic],  [an  honor]  which  since»»  Rome's  building  happened  to  no 
civilian»'.— (i.  He  condemned  the  very  man  from  whom  he  had  taken  a  bribe»»  with  refer- 
ence»» to  the  judinnent,  an  impudence*"  which  is  without  a  parallel. — 7.  This  happened  in 
such  a  manner*'  that  it  should*"  have  been  fatal*»  to  the  Syracusians,  as  much  as  could  be 
conjectured**  by  human  foresight**,— 8,  Verres  ordered*»  lleraclius  to  be  summoned*', 
which*"^  ouirhi*"»  to  have  been  done  from  the  firsi*",— 9.  Alexander  did  not  only  kill  Cal- 
listhenes.  but  even  tortured*»  [him],  a  cruelty  which  was  followed*"  by  too  late*^  a  re- 
pentance**.—10.  He  hopes  it  to  be  leasible**  to  depart*»  with  me  for  Italy.  Should  I*' 
live  to  see  this  day,  I  shall  think*"  myself*»  amply  rewarded  for  my  hardships. — 11.  He 
never  mentioned*'"  this  subject  again»»,  as  far  as  I  am  informed. — 12. 1  have  directed  my 
agents»"  to  apply  (if  it  would  not  jrive  you  too  much  trouble)  to  you  for  advice»»  in  all 
the  affairs»*  which  would  give  rise»*  to  any  dispute.— 13.  The  Senate  commanded»»  Scipio 
to  leave  the  army*",  if  not  prejudicial  to  the  public  interest,  and  to  come  to  Rome  to 
jtreside»**  over  the  consular  election, — 14.  As  regards  me.  I  keep  quiet»»,  l>ec.ause'"  I  do 
not  believe  that,  while  Pompey  is  absent,  action  should  be  taken'»  in  rejjard'"  to  the 
Cam])anian  lands'»,— 15.  For  the  rest,  I  wish  you  would  think'*  that  whatever  kind- 
ness'5  y,)„  ^vili  show  to  Cjerellia,  you  will  do  a  great  favor'»  to  me.— IH.  For  my  [frimd] 
Dionysius  I  oidy  oimmi"  and  pave'«  the  way  to  your  acquaintance'».  When*"  you  once 
know  him  personally,  you  will,  as  is  your  character"»,  consider  him  worthy  of  your 

»  To  those  who  undertake  th^in,— "  by  licet. — ■  contemplftri, — *  of  those  tliinsrs  which. 
— *  to  l)e  constituted  by,- «  =  who  seems  to  have  done  this. — '  gratis.— «  is, — »  by  inver- 
sion.—»" Render:  whom  they  could  not  kill  while  (qnum)  they  wished  (c/;j(?r(!^).— »»  jugu- 
lare  (geriindial),  — »"  by  inversion.—»»  Render:  Who  snatched  (rapere)  owl  of  the  other's 
calamity  the  most  disgraceful  spoils  to  [his]  house.—'*  Render:  will  he  be  able  to  de- 
precate {deprecari)  from  himself  ?—'*desiderare,—»»  by  inversion,— »'  tiibuere,— »*  Ren- 
der :  He  did,  which  was  to  me  the  greatest  pleasure  (Icttitia,  abstkact  dative),  that 
he  sent  to  me  to  aid  (yuljsidium,  abstr.  imtive)  what  was  left  {reliqvi)  to  him  of  trooj)s. 
— '»  facere,— ""  circumcldere.- "»  sumptus.— ""  religiOsus,— "»  by  an  inlinitive  clause  : 
'That  to  the  Senate  eic,  his  welfare  was  of  so  great  care  (abstract  dative).—"*  perho- 
norificus,— 25  The  relative  inserted  clause  must  be  placed  before  the  infinitive  clause,— 
"«deinde,- "' jam.— ""  ad  exiturn  vitie  vocari  (subjunctive).—'^^  avellere,— »"  is,—»»  that 
which  must  be  missed  {carere,  gerund),  I  should  eriieve  (dolere,  subj.  pres  ).— »"  Render: 
which  as  to  (ad)  consolation  is  common  to  me  with  thee.  The  relative  inserted  clause 
to  be  placed  after  deinde.—^^  pro.—»*  bene  gerere  rempublicam  (by  reversed  particij)ial 
phrase). — »*  conscrvare  (rever.'^ed  panic,  phrase).—»»  post,—»'  togatus,- '^  pecuniara 
accipere,— 3»  ob,— *"  Render  :  Than  wtiich  (abl.)  what  could  be  more  impudent  ?— *»  ita. 
— *"  debCMV.— *»  exilium  (abstr.  dat.).— **  coiijicere.—**  consilium.— *«  liistorical  present 
(.pjbtre).—*''  citare  — *»  to  be  placed  directly  after  the  subject.—*»  oportet.— *"  initio,— 
*»  toiquere,— *"  change  into  an  active  construction.—*»  too  late,  senis.— **  pcenitentia. — 
**  =  that  it  could  be  done,— *»  decedereiu,— *'  =  which  day  if  I  shall  have  seen,— *"  ex- 
istimare.— *»  =  that  I  have  derived  i percipere)  a.  great  fruit  from  my  labors.— »"  col- 
loqui  de  e5  re. — »'  postea. — «"  —  so  we  nave  prescrilwed  to  those  to  whom  we  have  com- 
mitted Onnnddre)  those  aft'airs  (nenotium).—^'^  to  apply  to  somebody  for  adrice.  aliquo  arbi- 
tro  uii.— »*  res.—»*  =  which  would  be  called  into  some  controversy.—»»  prjecipere.— »'  to 
li-are  the  army  and  come  to /iotfie,  ex  cmxrii*  Romara  venire.— »8  comitia  consularia  habere 
(oERUNDiAL).—»»  tacere,—^"  iccirco  quod,— '»  Render:  that  it  is  convenient  (conrenlre) 
that  (accus.  w.  inf.).—'"  to  take  action  in  regard  to  something,  causam  alictljus  rei  agere. 
— '»  ager  (sing,).-'*  sic  velim  existimes,— '*  =  by  whatever  things  you  will  have  done 
kindly  (benigne)  to  etc.— '«  gratissimum  facere.—'"  patefacere.— '"  munlre.— '»  cognitio. 
— »"  Paftic.  const. :  The  acquainted  one  (cognHus  per  te  ipsum)  you  will  judge  worthy 
etc.—»»  natflra. 


^ 


580 


REL.VTIYE   CLAUSES. 


friendship.— 17.  Whatever  may  be  obtainable»,  yon  wilP  (considcrins  Caesar's  humanity) 
most  easily  obuiin  it  Iroin  him  by  your  own  applicaiioii^. 

V.  CoOnoiNATiNG  Kelativep,  JL  9.  {All  the  co-ordinating  (hmonstratires  and  pro- 
nouns, lAs-ec/  in  these  sentence,,  to  be  expressed  relalivthj  «*^^«^^^,  «;';'i;J^^t^iTo■nfid  •  ce^ 
hokls4  bocietv  together*  t*o  much»  as  [mutual]  conlidiMict^«;  but  ihie  (t.  <?.  c«mnutiicc; 
can  not  ex.t^  u  W«  the  payment»  of  deht8><»  be  rnforced»».--^.  Sophocles  wrote 
fiag-desnp  to  extreme  old  We'».  When,  on  accounii^  .>,  tl.i.^"ccupano.j^^^*  he  .e<.nc^^^ 
to  ne-'lect  [hisl  propcrtvis,  le«,'al  proceedin->fi«  were  instituted  agaiut.  h  m  by  \n*  h^on^ 
-3  The  A  e.  iin.  ««..tian.^  aud  their  other  allien,  tried''  t.»  ^tnp««  the  "larch  o  ] 
A.^e.ilau:  [Bui]  he  defeated  them  all  in  a  bloody'»*  battle.-4.  Uein-  well  aware  of  this 
custom-o,  the  consul  departed  at  an  earlier  time-;i  lor  the  army  ^'''^'\^^='\'|'V  hf-i^^i 
5.  When  our  army  was  at  the  distance'-'a  of  a  few  days'  marches  Irom  t''^'^^' ^'''1,' ^' ^  '^'J^^ 
envoys  came  to  the  camp.-C.  When  their  (i.  e.  the  ene><'y  f )  C''''"'^'"':'";;'',;^ ''",'*'; 
tnived-!*  hv  bustle"  and  runnin^'2=*.  our  soldiers  invaded"  the  camp.-..  At  this  place 
[thosel  who  were  able  to  seize  theirarms  quickly,  oppi.sed^Oour  [troopsj  fora  lit  le  while  ' 
i."  The  positions- of  this  -round»»  was  such^^  il.at  heavy  missih-.^-»^  cukl  be  launched»» 
on"  our  ships  Irom  the  hi-her3«puints3».-<).  When  the  consul  had  arrived  there  he  or- 
dered thecitytoenlist^o^^.idiers  [for  hisarmy].-llt.  llavii.-  received*' ihis  letter  about 
midni-lil*-,  iie  immediately  communicated"  the  mteni<,'ence**  to  the  chief-commandei. 

VI  "construction  op  the  kklativk  clause.-Guammaticai>  roKM  OF  THE  Hkla- 
tive'  E  10— 1.  Are  you  the  man  who  has  t»tarved«Mhe  cmmon  i)eople 'r-'f  It  is  1 
who'.-ave  you  the  hope*«  of  an  early  departure"'  ;  [it  is]  I  who  kept  ni.-««  out; conlidence-'», 
that^"  our  plans  mi-Mit  be  carried  out«*'.-3.  It  is  the  mark  ot  a  tnllin-*-  mind  to  repudi- 
ate a  legitimate  fameS»,  .yhich  is  the  most  honorable^*  fruit  of  true  virtne.-4.  Alter  the 
death"^of  Pompey,  the  father,  who  was  the  [sl.inin-]  li-htO"  of  the  IJoman  en.p.re 
[hisl  son.  most  similar  to  the  fatlier,  was  killed.-5.  I'anula  is  a..-'  i-laiid  snriH.ui.ded"- 
by  that  sea  which  y..u  call  the  Ocean.-G.  Enmenes  tied  int<.  atoriress^"  ol  I'hry-ia  which 
is  called  Nora.-7:Thel)es  itself,  which  Ls  the  capital^"  ..f  Bceolia  was  in  jrreat  excite- 
ment'''.-^. Hannibal  arrived  in  Italy  live  months  alter*"^  he  had  marched  irom  New 
Cartha-'c  and  tilteen  days  afterS^  he  had  be<;un  to  ascend  the  Alps.-'.».  1  lie  ireneral  left 
for  the'tlleatre  of  war«3  two  davs«*  after  he  had  been  appointed  to  ttie  command  of  the 
jvi-niv»*  —10  I  st.aid««  at  Athens  three  days»'  after  your  letter  was  handed""  to  in«-.— 11.  1  he 
week»»  I  staid  in  my  villa  near  Tusculum'^  1  spmi'i  in  rcadini:  and  wriiint,',  since 
the  bad  weather'-  conilned'»  me  to  the-  house.— 12.  It  is  now  exactly'*  thirty  years,  since 
I  came'5  to  this  city.— 13.  It.  is  now  ten  months  tliat  you  have  heen  unplnateil' ^  in  thi« 
difticultv.  -It.  Ever  since  I  became  a  man",  1  have  be.n  in  so  intimate  a  connection'» 
with  Sulpicius,  that  neither  he'»  has  been  doin-'"'  anythini:  without  "u-  nor  I  ^vthout 
him  —15  Ever  since  Cicero  entered  on  the  irovernment  t)f  [his]  province«',  he  showed'"' 
himself  so  conscientiou>*'3  that  nobody  had^*  to  nxcxxx^'-  even"»  the  sli-'htcst^'  expenses 
on  his  account««.-10.  This  is  an  important^»  reason  why  we  should  believe  this  man  in- 
nocent.-17.  What  means»»  thai  whole  ehar-c»',  if,as«-you  say.  you  had»-' no  reason  to»« 
make»5  thi.-*  nnt()rtiiimte»«^[manj  still»'  more  unfortiinar.e?-!».  I  had»'*  many  reasons 

''TnTi^I^tramluMfutnre:    plural).-^  =  it  will    be  easiest   ^'^^^^'^'''■-''^''^^'llllf'':}^^^ 
yourself  (dative  «l  interest).-*  continere.-^  vehementins.-»  hdes -'  esse  nulla  pote.<»t 
i.6  nisi—»  solutio.— 10  res  credittc.-"  future.-7'o  enjorce  wmethinrj  =  some  hm^'  m 
necessarv.-i'-'  sumtna  senectus.-»^  propter.-^*  studi^um.-'^  res  familijlns.-'^  Render: 
He  was  Jailed  into  trial  (judicium*  by  etc.-i'  conan.-i«  «.bsi>tere  «l'S."'v7.    r"/''';"? 
•■i"  huvin<'  ascertained  icoffno<Cire)  this  custom  (aW.  a6*\)—"  raatunns.— -■'  It  i^  wy  umt, 
con>uevr.-'-3  to  be.  at  a  didance,  abesse.--'*  ah  eis.-"  terror-'^»  siuNiHicaie.--'  fremi- 
tus.--"*  concursu8.-3»  irrumpere  in. -3«  resisiere.-3'  paulispcr.-^^  nai(^ra.-33  loci  s.- 
sMiic    htec,  hoc— 3*  tormentum.-»»  adi-ere.-3'  nd.-S'*  superior.-»» jocus.-*»  alicm 
milites  imperSre.-*!  =  After  (abl.  abs.)  this  letter  had  been  hrouirht  (a/env).—*-  media 
jiox  — *3  defene  ad  aliquem.— <*  qnie  nuntiabauttir.— **  fame  necjire.— *«  speiii  alleire.— 
*'  m'atfira  decessio.-*»  servare.-*»  Ihles.— ^»  infinitive  clause.-^'  our  plans  may  be  car- 
ried out,  res  contici  potest.-^-!  levis.  -"  justa  -loria.-"*  l"»'^'^''i«--"' =  »'te'-  J  •  h^tl 
died   {exstinqui),  abl.    abs.-s»   himen.-"   quidam.--"*   circumfa-ti**.-^»  castellum.- 
«"  cai)Ut  -«'  motus.— e-!  by  the  relative.— «»  ad  castia  prohcisci.— •*  by  ordinals,  ace.  to 
I)  -m  Obs  4,  1.—«^  totje  appointt-d  to  the  command  of  theanvy,  exerciinm  accipere.— 
«•^coimnoiSri.— «'triduum.-«'reddere.— 6»  hebdomas.— '«  ri/A/  mar   'J usculuf/i,  1  nscu- 
lanum.-'»  consumere  {with  genindial}.--'^'  teinpestas.-'3  conimGre  altquem  in  aliqiio 
loco  — '♦  ipse.— '^  coinmigiare.  -'»  in  aliquA  re  ver^ari.— "  to  btarme  a  man,  togam  viri- 
lem  "siimeie.- '^  io  be  in  an  intimate  connection  with,  somebody,  aliquo  familianter  uti.— 
7»  iiie  —«0  a'^ere.-^'  provinciam  accii>ere.— ^^  se  pra;stare. -=^3  abslinens.— »«  eerundial. 
— «s  snmptus  suscipere.— <=«  Render:  -noL  even'.-"'  minimus.—'^»  proi.ter.— ^»  magnus. 
_»o  esse.—»*  crimen.— »2  by  the  relaUve.— •'  by  esse—**  cur.—»-»  rcddere.--»»  mittcr.— 
»'  multo.— •<*  by  esse. 


ENGLISH  EXEECISES. 


581 


why  I  should  join*  Pompey  as  the  companion  of  his  fliirht.— 19.  What  do  yon  allege' 
why  we  should  believe  you  rather  than  that  [other  man],  whose  very  words^  betray* 
his  trreat^  consciousness». — 20.  I  was  seized'  with  the  greatest  arief  when  I  saw»  the 
^  man»,  lor  whose  sake'"  I  had  undergone"  so  many  hardships,  be  faithless'^  to  a  cause 
which  is  [that]  of  all  the  patriots'». _21.  So  great  was  the  forgetfulness'*  of  that  man 
that,  if  he  came  to  any  [place],  he  forgot  the  veryi*  [thing]  for  the  sake  of  which'»  he 
had  come.— 22.  [S(/me  of]  the  most  pri>minent"  men  were  present,  with  many  of  whom 
1  am  inlimately'Oftcquainted'».- 23.  This  kind  of  gems^*»,  a  few'-'*  of  which  are  in  my 
possession^-',  is  of  remarkable'*  beauty.— 24.  We  cannot  wonder  that^*  you  are  hostile^* 
to  that  government  which  you  failed"-'»  to  destroy,  not  lor  lack  of  disposition,  but  for 
lack  of  strength. 

VII.  Ellipsis  in  tue  relative  ci.ArsE,  anp  transposition  or  words  from  the 
I'RiNciPAL  sentence.  Ji.  11.  12.-1.  They27  think»»  about  this  subject  very  much"»  as»» 
the  other  barbarians  do.— 2.  To  Aristides  happened  what  happened  to  many  countiy- 
meii  of  his3i.  [namely]  that  {ut)  he  was  banished»'  by  ostracism»».— 3.  Caesar  left  as  pro- 
tection»* for  the  ships  the  same  troops  as  he  had  left  before. — 4. 1  did»^  what  few  did  before 
me.  when»»  1  followed»'  the  advice  of  those  who.  avowedly»^,  were  my  worst  enemies.— 
5.  I  shall  follow»»  the  same  plan  as*"  I  did  from  the  beginning.— 6.  I  shall  give  you  the 
same  opportunity  as**  before  ;  only*'  observe*»  that  upriL'htness  in  your  dealings  with 
mt!  which  you  are  wont**  [to  observe].— 7.  He  showed*^  in  his  letter  that  respect*» 
which  it  was  his  duty*'  [to  show].— 8.  Some  said  that  the  dead  body  of  Pausanias*» 
ought*»  to  be  interred"*"  in  the  same**  [spot]  as  those  [were  interred]  who  were  exe- 
cureds'  for  a  crime.— 9.  If  we  make  gifts^»,  we  should  give**  to  every  one  what  he  needs 
most^^.— 10.  Let  every  one  attend^»  chiefly'''  to  those  [things]  for  which^*  he  is  best 
titted'i». --11.  Every  one  seized"^"  those  [things]  wliicli»i  seemed  to  him  the  most  suit- 
„ble»'.— 12.  The  Carthau'inians,  [in]  the  peace  made  with  the  Romans,  lost  th<  ii*8  rich- 
est»* provinces.— 13.  The  priestess  is  said  to  have  prayed»^  to  the  god,  to  give  to  [her] 
sons  for  their  piety  the  highest»»  reward  which  could  be  given  by  a  god  to  men.— 
14.  Drtisus,  after  leavini^»''  his»'»  most  trustworthy»»  troops  as  L'arrison'"  in  the  fortress'», 
])iiisii«>(l  the  eiiemv  with  the  rest  of  his  army.— 1.5.  He  used"  as  interpreter'»  a'*  cap- 
tured'5  Persian  whom  lie  had  in  his'»  camp.— 10.  The  consul  marched"  to  [his]  colleague 
by  as  great  marches  as  he  could. 

VIII.  Involution.  li.  13.  14.  {Tnvnired  relatives  to  he  used  in  every  sentence.)—!.  The 
accu^ed  is  exceedinglv  culpable'",  and'»,  if  he  is  condemned,  people»*»  will  no  longer»» 
say  that  money  is  omnipotent'"'^  in  these  courts*».— 2.  It  will  be  necessary**  for  the  con- 
sul to  yiehl»^  his  opinion,  by  doing  which"^»  he  will  greatly»'  ingratiate  himself  with  all 
the  good —3.  At  that  time  we  had  a  chief  of  quick  action"»  and  energetic»»  mind»«. 
If»»  we  had  now  such  a  chief,  we  would,  for  these  outrages,  demand  reparation»'  by 
war.— 4.  That  alone  is  a  t;ood,  the  possessor»»  of  which  is  praiseworthy»*,  even  if  he 

»  SeadjungeTealicui.— '  afleire.— »sermo  {sing.).—*  demonstrare. — »  summus.— «fldes. 
— 'athcere.— »  intelligere.— » is.—»"  propter.— »'"susciperc.—»' desererecausam.—'»  boni. 
—1^  oblivio.— »s  by  ipxe  ille.—^^  cujus  rei  caueft.— »'  summus.— »«  familiarissime.— '-»  uti. 
— -"  gemma.— '^»  aliquot.— "■"  possldere.— "  minis.—'*  infinitive  clause.— '*  infestus.— 
2«  Render:  for  {ad)  the  destruction  {del^re,  gerundial)  of  which  not  the  disposition  (ani- 
1/iii.s),  but  the  sireni^th  (vires)  were  wanting  {deesse)  to  you.—"  hi.—'»  senilre.— '»  fere. 
—30  _  what.— 3»  see  P.  J,  §272,  R.  1  ;  §  ,2y:l  R.  .5.-3'  in  exilium  mittere.— 3»  testSrum 
suflVagium.— 3*  prtesidium  (abstr.  dat.).— »^  facere.— »»  Render:  'that  (ut)  1  followed'. 


— *'  by  deblre.—*^  =  the  body  of  the  dead  Pausanias.— *»  oportSre.- ^"  tointer  in  aplace, 
inferre  in  locum.— ^'  by  the  hnative  adverb.—^'  to  be  executed  for  a  crime,  ad  suppiicinm 
dan  idatum  esse).— a»  benetjcium  {sing.)  i)riestare  (in  the  future).—»*  [that]  should  be 
given  (gerundial)  which  etc. — ^^  =■  what  is  most  (maxime)  necessary  to  every  one.— 
^»  elab(;rftre  in  alicjua  re.— &'  potissiinum,— ^»  hy  inversion.— '''^  aptissimusad.— »"  arripere. 
— «1  by  i/ivernon.—'^'^  aptissimus.— »»  =  which  they  had.—»*  opulentus.— »5  precSri  a 
(leo.— ■<»  maximus.— "'  relinquere  (abl.  abs.).—»»  =  which  he  had.—»»  firmus.— '"  abstr. 
DAT.—'»  castelluin.— "  adnibere.— '3  Interpres.— '*  quidam.-'s  hello  captus.— '«  by 
sex:ut7i.—'*''  ducere. -'«  nocenti^simus.— '»  =  who  if  he  is  condemned.—*^"  homines.— 
»»  =  will  cease  to  say.—»'  pliirimum  posse.-»»  judicium.—»*  Intinitive  clause.—»»  de 
opinioi'e  sua  decedeie.— '»«  =  if  he  which  does  {suljjuncl.).—^''  to  greatly  ingratiate  one's 
self  with  fome  one,  ah  aliquo  summam  inlre  gratiam.— «»  celerrimi  consilii.— «»  acern- 
ni"us  —  »»  in"-enium.— »»  by  the  involved  relative  qualis:  '  of  which  quality  {gua/is)  if  [one] 
were  now '.— »'  to  demancl  reparation  for  outrages  by  war,  res  ex  injuriis  bello  repetere, 
^»3  =  which  who  has.—»*  laudaudus. 


«82 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


11 


•rri 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


683 


has  nothinjr  else',  but  witliont  which'^  a  man  is  condemned  and  rejected  in  the  fbll. 
ness  of   everything    elt^ea,— 5.   The  8wnn8«  are  consecraied»    to  Apollo,  hccause  thev 
seem  to  have  Iroiu  him  [the  pift  of]  divination,  bv  which  they  font^ee*  the  happiiie/s 
alter  death,  ko  as  to  die  with  »on^^  and  rejoicin<,'.8 -«.   The  nothin-'ness  of    worldly 
p(K)cl.s»   you  have    proved   in  your  hook  on   happy  life,   in    the  read'ing»»  of  which  I 
wish  nottiinir  s^o  much,  as  to  abandon  all  those  [thins;?].— 7.  How  pleasant  must  be  that 
journey,  at  th«*  endol  wiiich»»  no  care,  no  anxiety»*  is  to  remain'^.—g.  Where'*   on  land 
or  water,  shall  I  tind  a  person'^  whose  whereabouts'»  I  do  not  know  5-— 9.  A   TdrouStus 
Btands'7  belore  [myj  eyes,  the  quality»»  of  whose  pursuits  both  of  you  must'»  know  — 
10.  Octavius  IS  a  inan-».  whose  actions^»,  of  whatever  kind-»  they  niav  be   we  will  ex- 
l)ect  \vith  the  1,'reatest  contldence''^».-!!.  That  man  is  addicted»*  to  habits'of  life,  from 
^'r^^%l}^  ^'■'■1!*"  ^^^^  it'once  accustomed  to  them,  will  seldom  return  to  honest  i)ursuits. 
—12  This  IS  the  carriage-*  which  Napoleon  used--iMvhen,  on  his  lli-ht  after  the  battle 
of  VV  ateiloo.  he  was  nearly  captured  by  the  eneniy.-l:i.  That  ancient  throne'-i'*,  on  which 
the  kinj,'-''  used  to  sit  when  his  vassals  tendered  him  their  homa<'e,  was  ruthlesslyso 
thrown    nto  the  flames.- 14.  This  was  the  prophetic.3»  wordS'-»  of  L.  Crassus,  which  we 
expected"  [to  hear]  when  we  came  to  the  Senate.-15.  From  there  thev  came  to  the 
river  i^uphiates,w;hich3*  th.-y  rapidly  crossed  l)y  pontoons,  when  another  more  serious 
obstacle  opposed  [the  inarch  of]  the  army.— 16.  We  relys^on  those  whom  we  believe  to 
have  a  better  knovyled,!je3«  than  we  [have].-17.  Ajudlonius  did  not  sufler  those  who,  in 
nis  judj;ment3^  had  no  hope  of  becominir  [u'ood]  orators,  to  waste  their  timeS»  with  him  — 
iM.Haunihal  was  appointed^»  commander  «if  theCarthai,Mnian8  on  account  of  the  hatred*» 
Which  all  knew  he  had  ever  since  his  cliildhood  entertained  airainst  the  Homans  — 


?"Ll^l*""®.""^**'.'l'^^'''^'  fll'V'P^*?!  '"  re<:ard  to  which*»  Epicurus  remarks  that  he  did" not 

em.— 20.  Nothini;  is  more  undignified*'. 


comprehend  how  life  could  be  happy  without  them.— *u.  .^oiiuni,'  i»  iiii>re  un(ii<rnineu". 
than  that"  anythinj,'  should  s.em  worse  to  you  than  dishonor**,  to  avoid*»  which  any  naiii 
must  be  submitted  to.-21.  His*«  condition  is  the  same  as*^  [that]  of  the  tyrant  I)io- 
nysnis.  who,  when  be  was  in  a  position  to  do  anvthinir  he  pleased*^,  did  not  feel  him- 
self [any]  happier*»  on  that  account^".— 22.  Of  what  u>esi  are  treasures  which"  we  can- 
not einploy^J  when  they  are  in  our  possession^*  ?_2.3.  Alexander  made»»  Parmenio  jrov- 
ernor.)f  Media,  a  country  which,  in  wealth,  is  second  to  none,— 24.  Philo.  who  in  scholar- 
snip-«  had  no  sui)erior  amon-  the  Jews,  was  the  first  who^^  applied"  the  speculative'^'» 
method  to  the  interpretations'»  of  the  facred  books  of  the  Jews. 

1    ^-    J^E^ATIVE    SUBJr.VCTIVKS  OP  NON-REAI.ITV,  DEPENDENT  ON  NFOATIVES.      (R.  10  >_ 

1.  There  la  nothing  that  either  you  [would]  wish  to  hear,  or  [which]  I  dare  to  assert«i 

»  Etiam  si  aliis  de^intufi^aTiTt  which  who  has  not.- -3  in  omnium  aliflrum  reruiu 
copia  -*  cyjrnus.-»  dediciltus.-*  ^  foreseeins;  by  which  what  boon  U/uH  fxj,u)  [there! 
IS  in  death  they  die  etc.-'  cantus -«  volupt  .s.-»  Kender :  How  none  riches  are,  thoii 
hast  taiiirht  in  that  book  which  thou  hast  written  on  happy  0m/u.v)  life.—'»  liender- 

When  1  read  wiiuh.  I  prefer  {fmille)  nothinjr  than  to  abandon  ireUnnnere)  etc  -»»  ' when 
which  IS  emied  (wn^c«'re)\  by  akl.  abs.->3  sollicitado.-'3  reliqui  esse  (periphr.  fut 
puhjj  — M  =  rhro'xjh  tv/jtch  parts  (bv  the  locative  adverbial  form  of  the  interro«'ative) 
shall  I  pursue.-»»  is.-»«  .=  where  who  is,  I  do  not  knc.w.-»'  vers-iri  -'8  =  whose  of 
what  quality  studies  were.—»»  nfccs^ie  e<f  :  with  infinitive  clause.- «<>  is  — «»  =what  who 
!!'f  rr"~    o7  "'[•t'rt"»l«  relative.-"  H.quissimo  animo.-^*  =  follows  that  method  irafio) 
of  hfe  -->  =  by  which  who  is  imbiK'd  (hnbn/us),  can  (■'>»hj,incf.)  hardly  be  recalled  to  an 
nf'VC  w ['/^^''''/x'^  of  l.vinir.--'-^«  rheda.-2T  on  (l,y)  which  when  Napoleon  fleein-  «.ut 
of  the  Waterloo  (\aterIoensis)  battle  was  driven  {ve/uK  he  almost  was  captured  etc — 
^«  solmm.-2»  =_to  the  on  which  {ahl.)  sittin-  kinur  faith  and  office  used  [w/^re)  to  be 
tendered  (pmsfan)  by  his  (men).-3o  faHlus.-si  divinans.-3i  vox -33   L   expectin-- 
which  we  came.— 34  ^  after  having  cros-ed  (>^uperare.  abl.  abs.)  which  by  bridges  quicklv 
?s  « ','*  ^  u^^*"*'  ^^'""".^  {rrrnri)^)  o»)stacle  (impedlmfntmn)  was  objected  to  the  armv  — 
3»fidem  habere  alicui.-s»  plus  infelligere.-37  Haider:  that  who  he  jud-ed  couLfnot 
become  r^mrf^rf)   orators.-ss  operam    (not   'tfwpn.,')  perdere.-3»  constiiuere -*o  = 
hatred  of  the  Romans,  that  by  which  he  was  imbued  from  boyhood  was  known  (ron.^faf) 
amoM-all.-*»  =r  after  which  had  been  detracted  (abi..  abs.),  how  life  could  be  happy, 
Lpicurus  denies  that  he  understood   {inff/lio^re).-*'*  indiL'nus.-*3  jufinilive  clause - 
**dedecus   (coMfAU.  abl.).-*6  =  that  (///)  thou  mayest  escape  {^fuqfre)  which,   any 
{q>nhf)et)  rather  pain  must  be  nnderirone  {><>,U\re,  eerundial).-*»  =  of  this  (matO  — *t  ac 

*,  7,  ^"V^''"»'"  "■''»'"  •«"  [fhinirs]  were  allowed  (/jV^/).- *»  sebeatinrem  dnceie.-»<*iccirco' 
--»»  tin  bouo  s,n,f  opfi.'i,  literally  '  To  whom  are  treaMires  Oo)advantare'  (AB-Tn  d\t  )  -- 

iVJrVAf'",-"''?  "^'"'^V 'i  "'*•-'*  .=  '^''*''"  ^^'  •'«^'^'  which.-"  liend'er  :  Alexander  ;nl>. 
ject.rt  .Media,  than   which   no   resrion    is   more  opulent,  to  Parmenio -»«=:  than  who 
nobody  was   more  learned  (fruirifm).—^i  bv  access.  -      '         ^"^       "     '      --'    " 
somefhivfj  to  somethuiq,   uti  aliqiia  re  in  aliqu;!  re  • 
(ijeruudial  phrase).— «»  dicere. 


«in 


1 


pred.  p.  2.-)0.  Ons.  1.—»»  to  apply 
-»»  dialeclica  ratio.— «o  exi)licaie 


ns»  certain.— 2.  There  is  no  admixture^  in  the  soul  which  seems  to  be  of  terresfrfal 
origins.— 3.  There  is  nobody  that  considers  Cicero  a  greater  orator  than  Demosthenes. 
—4.  There  was  no])ody  that  dared  to  open  his  mouth*.— 5.  There  is  no  subject  on  which 
the   learned  disagree  so  much.— 6.  What  lapse  of  time»  can  replace»  divine  power? — 
7.  What  is  there  that  should  hinder  me  to  follow  that  [view]  which  seems  reasonable' 
to  me*— 8.  Who  is  there  that  believes  that  future  [thintrs]  can  be  conjectured**  out  of 
dreams?— 9.  There  is  no  living  being»,  except"»  man,  that  has  any  notion»»  of  God.— 
10.  There  is  nothiiii:  that  leniith'"''  of  time  cannot  achieve»3.— 11.  Tliere  is  nothing  in  the 
whole  world  that  does  not  belong  to  the  universe  as  a  part'*.— 12.  Who  is  there  that 
does  not  hate  Tarquin  the  Haughty  ?— 13.  Who  is  there  that  would  not  like»»  to  seem 
benevolent  ?'«— 14.  Who  is  there  that  does  not  understand,  that  by  this  one  law  the 
whole  republic  is  annihilated  ?"— 15.  Who  is  it  that  divulges  rumors  of  this  kind  ?— 
1»;.  What  is  the  reason  that  you  think  him  to  be  insolvent"*?— 17.  There  is  no  reason 
why  ill  this  case  a  prominent  genius»»  should  berequired'^o.- 18.  There  is  noreason  why 
you  should  call  21  that  man  from  the  province.— 19.  There  is  no  reason  why  you  should 
risk  ^vour  popular! tys*-»  by  proposing^s  t^uch  a  law.— 20.  Nothing  is  honest,  that  is  done 
unwillingly^*  [or]  under  compulsion.— 21.  Nobody  is  [to  be  called]  happy  who  believes 
in"»  this  iheory'-*».— 22.  There  is  no  good  [man]  that  holds»'  this  opinion.— 23.  Nobody 
can  be  a  president-^^  of  the  republic  who  is  not  born  in  thiscountry^».- 24.  Nothing  can 
i)e  truly  useful  which  is  acqiiired^o  by  crimes».— 25.  Nobody  can  be  [called]  rich  who 
covets  the  thincs  of  otherssa.- 2«.  You  cannot  send  me  anything  from  that  city  which 
will  be  more  acceptaldess.- 27.  The  speaker  said3*  nothing  by  which  the  passions^»  of 
the  multitude  were  aroused^*.- 28.  I  have  nothing  toS'  compare  with  Scipio's  friend- 
ship.—2<*.  1  have  never  met 3»  with  any  [man]  from  whom3»  I  withdrew**  mure  gladly*». 
~»i.  The  name  of  no  [man],  that  had  been  among  the^e*3,  ^as  wiihheld*3.— 31.  I  never 
have  known  anyone  who  said  nothing  with  greater  airs**.- 32.  No  one  has  yet  wished  to 
see*»  me  w  hom*«  I  refused  to  receive  on  account  of  my  engagements. — 33.  Nobody  who 
is  hurrying*'  to  his  burnintr  house*'*,  will  admire  even*»  the  most  exquisite^"  music»». — 
'M.  I  respect»'-'  no  i)ursuit^3  which  has  money  for  its  object^*  (Seneca).— 35.  After  Panae- 
tius  nothing  has  been  written  on  this  subject,  at  least  [nothiuir]  with  which  I  agree»».— 
3(i.  Nobody,  who  has»«  a  manly  spirit»',  can  tolerate  the  bearing»"  of  that  man.— 37.  Who 
is  there  of  all  [men],  provided»»  he  has  any  intercourse  with  the  Muses,  who  should  not 
rather  wish*"  to  be  this  mathematician»»  than  that  tyrant?— ;i8.  There  is  no  one.  but  he 
would  rather  wish  to  die  than  be  converted  into  some  form^»  of  a  beast^s.  while*^*  at 
th»'  same  time  having  the  mind  of  man.— 39.  There  was  no  one,  but  he  said  that  the 
opinion  of  this  [man]  was  most  correct "^ ».—40.  No  day  passes,  but  Satrius  calls  on  me««. 
—41.  I  have  never  sent  a  letter  home,  but  another  letter  for  you  accompanied  it*'. — 
42.  Ilortensius  let*»  no  day  pass  without  either  speaking**»  in  the  forum,  or  meditating 
without  the  Ibriim. 

X.  Relative  subjunctives  porxowiNc.  the  analogy  of  subjunctives  with  nega- 
tive antecedents,  li.  17.— 1.  You  will  find  few  that  will  ajrree  with  you.— 2.  How  few 
are  there  that  deny  wealth  and  pleasures  to  be  goods  !— 3.  He  took'"  [a]  few  assistants'» 
whom  he  thought  to  be  comj)etent'''^  to  perform  the  work.— 4.  I  was  the  only  one  to 
whom  both'3  [alternatives]  were  open'*.— 5.  Y'ou  were  the  «nly  one  who  [ever!  wished 
to  have  his  colleague  as  a  master'».— 6.  Have  you  alone  the  privilege  to  claim  this  right 

»  Pro.— 2  =  nothing  mixed  {mixtum).—^  of  terrtsttial origin ,  ex  terra  natus.— *  hiscere^ 
— »  =  what  lapse  of  time  (Vttustas)  is  there,  that  can  etc.—*  conficere. — '  probabilis. — 
«  conjicere.— » living  being.  animal.~»'^pra?ter.— »»  notitia.— »2  lontrinquitas.— »3  assequi. 
— '*  =  that  is  not  a  part  of  the  universe  (nninersuni).—^^  velle. — »*  beneficus. — "  deJgre. 
— »*  See  p.  1<»8,  Obs.  3.—'»  excellens  ingenium.— 20  requirere.— 2»  devocfire. — 2a  /^  ^^gj^ 
one's  jiopiilayity^  cum  populo  in  invidiam  venire.- »3  leirein  rogSre, — 24  _  tj^at  is  done  by 
an  unwillinir  [one]  (inrVut:),  by  a  compelled  [one].— 2»  sequi  (with  accus.). — ^e  ratio. — 
2' sequi.— 2«  princeps.— 2»  intra  finis  nostros.— 3»  parere.— 3»  scelus.— 32  p.  i,  8  358.— 
33  jiuuiidus. — 34  proferre. — 35  animi. — 38  excitSre.— 3'  =  which  I  compare. — Sb  ^on- 
veiilre  aliqiiem.— 3»  unde.— *"  ablre. — *»  lubenter.— *2  =  who  had  been  in  that  number. 
— *3  occiiltare.— **  majOre  auctoritfite. — *»  convenlre.  — **  Render:  'for  whom  (dat. 
INCOM.MODI)  I  was  enga^red  (oc€updtus)\ — *'  currere.— *»  =  to  the  conflagration  of  his 
house. — *»  by  ne    qvidern.—  '^^   suavis. — »»   cantus. — »2  suspicere.— »3  gtudinm. — »*   = 

probatur 
IS  only 

some  commerce  with  tht;  Muses. — *°  matle  with  infinitive  clause. — *»  mathematicus. — 
•2  figflra. — <»3  bestia.— **  9!/?/wi  with  subjunctive  of  periphrastic  tutnre.—^^  somebody's 
opinion  is  correct,  aliquis  vere  sentit. — •*  domnni  mearn  tentitdre. — «'  Render  :  I  have 
never  sent  one  letter  home,  that  not /Another  was  [directed]  to  thee. —*s  pati. — *»  dicere. — 
'"  sibi  assumere. — "  minister. — '2  idoneus,  withgerundial  dative.— '3  uterque. — '*  licet.— 
'»  Render:  Who  wished  (velle)  to  have  him,  whom  you  had  [as]  a  colleague,  [as]  a  master. 


w  hich  goes  out  (exlre)   into  money  (ces). — »»  /  agree  with  something,  mihi  pro 
uliquid.— "*  by  esse. — »'  virile   injjenium. — »*   viiltus  habitusque.— »»    =  who  has 


li 


58^ 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


585 


for  youi  ?— 7.  He  is'  the  only  person  to  whom  I  can  confide^  this  [secret].— 8.  This 
[man]  was  the  only  one*  amoujj;  those  conilemned.  who  was  i)rivy  to  that  crime.— 
i>.  Tliere  was  [btU]  one  desire  hy  which  all,  who  were  present,  were  Hcruated^.— 10.  There 
are  those  who  think  that  body  and  soul  perish  toj^etlier*.— 11.  I'lu-re  are  those  who 
neither  know  how  to  decline'^  the  benefits  which  they  receive,  nor  how  to  return"  [theml. 
—12.  There  were  some  that  thought  the  flj^ht  would  result»  disastrously'»  to  our  [troops]. 
— 1-3.  There  were  some  to  whom  Curio  seemed  the  tliird  orator  of  that  ai;e.— 14.  There 
were  some  who  either  were  anxious"  for  some  new  commotionsi^  in  {of)  the  republic, 
or  who  turned'^  the  discords  of  the  citizens  to  their  profit.— 15. 'J'here  are  certain  [thinirs] 
whicii  are'*  neither  commanded,  nor  prohibited  by  the  laws.— IG.  There  are  those  pres- 
ent who  are  ready  to  shed  their  blood'*  for  the  welfare  of  the  republic— 17.  There  are 
certain  philosophers  who  think  that  invalids"  bhonld'^  neitlier  be  called"^  happy'",  nor 
unhappy-". — 18.  There  are  oblij^ations-'  which  we  are  owint;'-^  more  to  some-'  [persons] 
than  to  others.— 19.  There  is  a  certain^*  [quality]  which  is  theoretically"''*  rather  than 
practically  diftereiit  from  virtue.— 20.  There  are  many  thinj^s  which  may  be  said  on"'"* 
Doth  sides  of  the  [question].— 21.  We  know  some  [persons]  who  studied^^  many  years 
with  a  philosopher,  without^**  acquiriiij?  even  a  tincture  Xot  philosophy].— 22.  Ihere 
were  two  roads  in  all-"  by  wnich^"  the  Ilelvetians  could  reacli^'  the  country  of  the  Se- 
quaui. — 2.3.  There  are  seven  cities^^  which  claim^^  Homer  as  their  townsman.— 24.  It  is 
tjiis  [fact]  by  which  it  is  proved  that  this  part  of  philosophy  is  not  superfiuous^*. — 
25.  It  is  philosophy  which  teaches  the  true  way^*  of  liviujj,  aud^"*  which  makes  it  impos- 
Bible  for  its  follower  ever  to  be  unhappy. 

XI.  ItELATlVK  SUB.IL'NCTIVES  OP  POSSIBILITY,  NECESSITY,  PESinABLENESS,  AND  DOUBT. 

R.  18. — 1.  VVe  want37  a  commander  who  has  legitimate  authority^». — 2.  We  must  learn 
thino;s3«  that  enable  us*"  to  be  useful  to  our  country.— 3.  We  must  act  with'"  a  diL'niiy*"'' 
and  firmness'3  which  is  proofs'  not  only  ajrainst  iulhumce**  but  even  au'ainst  suspicion. — 
4.  Perhajjs  [somebody]  has  told  you  this  who  has  not  seen  it  himself,  but  heard**  it 
from  others.— 3.  Money*'^  should  be  made  by  means'''^  which  are  free*'-*  from  Ijaseiiess*". — 
6.  Is  there  anything  else*'  that  you  [would]  say  in  your  behalf  ^■■^  *— 7.  lias  any  onegone 
dowii*3  this  road  wlio  carried  a  wo(>den**chest*^  on  ills  shoulder*^  y-S.  To  you  I  wish*' 
a  farm*'"',  in  which  you  can  enjoy*"  al  the  i)Ieasures'''<'  of  atjriculture*'.— 9.  What  deli'jhl®^ 
of  the  mind  can  be  compjued*'^  with  the  i)ursuits"*  of  those  who  are  always  sejirciiiu^''* 
for  somelhiiuf  that  [may]  contribute  to  the  well-being  of  thc^r  fellow-men**? — 10.  In 
the  presenf^corruption"'' of  morality**,  somethinir  is  required^"  that  [may]  reform" 
inveterate  abuses^"''.— 11.  Our  people'^  do  not  desire  monitors  who  [shall]  leil  them  mi- 
nutely^*: '  Walk^*  thus!  speak  thus!  dine  thus!  drink  thus! ' — 12. 11" you  know  any  one  who 
will  take^*  the  villa  on  this  condition,  let  me  know^^  at  your  earliest  convenience"'*. 

XII.  Relative  subjunctives  of  adaptedness  andpuupose.  li.  19.— 1. 1  know  [some- 
thinji:]  that  [may]  give  you  relief'".— 2. 1  have  fouiul  [somebody]  wlio  [might]  be  prop- 
erlyBo   entrusted»^  with  the  defence**-*  of  our  cause.— 3.  He  erected  a  Ibrtification^^  in 

1  Render:  Are  you  distinguished  {eximius)  [as]  the  only  one  in  whom  this  holds  good 
ivalere)?—'^  Render:  I  have  this  [one  as]  the  only  [one]  Xo  whom.—'  credere. — *  Ren- 
der:  This  [man]  was  condemned  [as]  the  only  [one]  who  was  privy  {ron/fciun)  of  that 
crime  (^ce/M*). — *  movCre. — *  uiul.— '  negjlre. — ^  referre. — *  esse.—'"  c.ilamitOsus. — "  (ohe 
anxious  for  mmet  king,  aliquid  quicrere. — "»  motus. — '^  to  turn  something  to  one's  profit, 
aliqu:"l  re  pasci. — '*  render  by  active  construction  '  which  to  do  the  laws  neither  command 
(Jufjire),  nor  prohibit'.—'*  vitam  prot'undere.— '*  inra/ids  =  homo  (sing.)  valetudine 
parum  prosper^  usus. — "  gerundial. — "^  dicere. — '"  beiltus. — -"  miser.—"-'  ofticium. — 
■"'"■' which  are  owed  (debtre). — -^  alii.  ..alii.— 2*  quiddam. — '^*  which  from  virtue  can  be 
separated  rather  by  the  idea  {cogifatio)  than  by  the  thing.— 2«  iti  ntramque  partem  — 
2'  apud  philosophum  persedGre. — '^*^  and  drew  ((lucrt)  not  even  the  color. — '■"'  omiiTno. — 
3<»  qua.— 31  jx-rvenlre  ad  finis.— ^2  civitiis,— 33  say  that  Homer  is  their  citizen. — 34  super- 
vacuus. — 35  ratio. — 3«  Heiukr  by  involtition  'to  which  who  has  given  himself,  can  by  no 
means  be  unhappy. — 37  nobis  opus  est. — 38  imperium  legitimuin.— 3»  artes. — «>  =  w'hicli 
effect  that  (ut)  we  are  of  use  (absth.  dat  )  to  the  State. — ♦'  adhibCre  aliquid  (gerundial). — 
42  «rnivitas. — ^^  constantia, — •«*  to  fje  proof  against  something,  resistcrealicui  rei.  -■*'  gratia. 
— *■*  acci[)ere. — *'  rem  lamiiinrem  qu;erer(\— *'<  eis  artibus. — *»  to  t)e  free  from  something, 
abesse  ab  aliquil  re.—*''  turpitildo. — *'  Incorporat(!  'else'  {aliud)  in  the  relative  clause. 
— *2  pro  te.— *3  descendere. — *•»  ligneus.— **arca.— *'  humerus,-  *'  optjlre  (plur.).— *"»  rus. 
— *•  frui. — *''  obiectamentum. — *'  airrt  colendi.— "^  oblectatio. — *3  coiiferre. — **  studium. 
— ^^  to  search  fo^'  something,  aliquid  anquirere. — ««  Render:  'That  looks  {specfiire  ac 
valere)  towards  (ad)  living  well  and  h-ippily  '.— *^  hie.—*"  perversitas.— *"  mores.—'"'  de>i- 
denTre. — "  disrutere. — '2  malum.— '^  homines  nostri. — '*  ad  singula. — '*  incedere  (sing.). 
— '*  emere.— ■"  certiOrem  facere  (fut.).—''^  primo  quoque  tempore.—'»  saldtem  aft"erre. — 
*"  recte.— 8'  to  entrust  somebody  ivith  something,  alicui  aliquid  credere.—"'''  vindicaiio. — 
*'  locum  munlre. 


"4F 


which  the  soldiers  [might]  find  a  safe  refuge'  if  they  were  pressed  by  the  enemy. — 
4.  Crops  were  growing  in  these  fields  which  might  serve"'*  as  pasture  for  the  ilraught- 
hor?es.— 5.  Antonius  has  [something]  to3  promise*  to  his  [adherents]. — 0.  Fortune  has 
given»  me  noihiui:  to  bestow*».— 7.  CamiUus  was  deemed'  worthy  of  being  called'* 
the  second  founder^  of  the  city  after'"  Itonnilus  — 8.  Virtue  makes"  men  wortiiy  of 
coming  into  communion'"'*  with'3  (iod.— 9.  Who  seemed  to  us  a  fit  person  to  receive 
gifts  from'*,  cannot  be  unworthy  of  being  our  creditor'*.— 10.  That  architect  was  fully 
competent'*  to  buil(l"the  l)ri<lge  over"' the  rivtT.— II.  The  horsemen,  in  order  to'*  wipe 
out"-"  by  bravery  the  disgrace'-* 'of  [their]  fliglit.  lought  at  all  places.— 12.  The  consul  gave 
to  D.  .Junius  commaiKi"^-'  at  the  mouth"'*3  oi"  the  Vulturnus  river,  with  the  order  to  send 
corn  to  the  army  whenever  a"^*  ship  had  arrived^*.- l;i  C'lesar  made"-**  the  foot-soldiers"-' 
maiifleuvre"-*»  umoni:  the  cavalry"^»  that  they  might,  by  daily  practices»,  acquire*'  skiips 
in  this  kind  of  fighting33.— 14."  Every  day  a  great  number  of  ships  assembleu3*  for  the 
l)urpose  (»t  carryiijg  sui)plies3*  [to  the  army].- 15.  Armed  [men]  were  placed  at  that  very 
^pot,  who  w«'re  to  murder  you. — IH.  Places  in  the  Circus  were  assigned3*  to  the  Patri- 
ciansand  Knights,  wliereeach  [rank]  mighthaveth(!irown seats  {specfaculum)^"^ .~\7.  The 
Mamertini  «^'ave'^  to  Verrc*  both  a  city  into  which"  to  convey*''  his  gteallng8*^  and  a 
ship  in  which  to  remove**  [them].— 18.  Artaxerxes  presented  Themistocle8*3  with  the 
city  of  .Magnesia,  to  furiiish  him  with**  bread;  Lampsacus,  from  wliich**  he  was  to 
take**  [jjisj  wine,  [and]  My  us*',  from  which  he  was  to  liave  [his]  vegetables**.- 19.  The 
Rhodians  sent  Thra.xyllus  to  Rome,  in  order  that  by  his  eloquence  the  good  graces**  of 
the  Senate  might  be  won  for  them*"  — *20.  What  hope  of  return*'  have  we  if  we  give  to 
an  unknown  shipwrecked**  [person]  a  vessel  to  convey*3  him  home?— 21.  Moses  estab- 
lisheii**  new  ceremonies**  amojii'  the  Jews,  in  order  to  strengtlu-n  thereby  the  nation 
f»)r  the  future**.— 22.  Themistocles  fortified*'  Port  Pira^eus  with  walls,  the  more  easily 
to  defend  the  cily.— 23.  1  sent  him  word**  that  I  would  arrive  in  three  days.— 24.  I 
have  appointed**  [a  man]  to  take  niy  place*"  if  Icaiinor  be  present  in  person*'.- 25.  Clo- 
dius  hired*"'*  assas?ins*3  to  take  Milo's  life  by  an  aml)ush**. 

Xlll.  Rki.ative  sfB.iLNCTivE  OF  QUALITY.  li.  20.— 1.  Antonius  will  he  the  man  to 
whom  crowds**  of  profligate  citizens  will  fiock  from  all  quarters**. — 2.  Apronius  was  a 
man  who  had  the  privilege*'  both  to  say  and  to  write  with  impunity*"  everything'^*  he 
wished.— 3.  Sulpicius  is  not  the  man  to  be  afraid  lest  his  principles'"  be  in  danger"^' 
from  the  artifices'"^  of  [any]  prepared'3  si)eech. — 3.  I  am  not  the  man  to  pronounce'*, 
whatever  we  see'*,  to  be  such'* as  we  see  it.— 5.  These  men  will  be  such"  as  to  consent'* 
to  nothing  prejudicial"*  to  the  public  interesf^". — t».  P.  Crassus  was  in  a  position  (i.-!)  tiiat 
nobody  in  the  repul)lic  thought  himself  siii)erior*'  to  himeither""'*  in  honor  or  in  wealth''3. 
— 7.  You  are  a  man  who  have  always  been  on  the  side^-*  of  the  patriots'^*. — S.  Tiie  chief- 
commander  was  a  man  in  whom  the  s«»ldiers  placed  nnbound<'d  confidence*'*  :  the  otiier 
ofiicers"'  were  tnen  who  had  seen  service^»  in  Spain  under**  Sertorius.— 9.  [77a.y  sen- 
tence, and  No.  10.  11.  12.  totje  franiformed  into  relative  constructions  with  attributive  syn- 
detic unftcedents,  arcen'ding  to  Or^.  6.]     The  works  which  M.  Atrrippa  erected*"  in  the 

*  Perfugium. — '•*  =  in  which  the  draught-horses  [ini^ht]  be  pastured  (/)a^'C6;¥).— 3  relative. 
— *  polliceri.— *  invenlre. -*  dare.  — '  habere. — »  i>y  active  construction  (/  am  called  = 
they  call  (ferre)  me). —  »  conditor. —  '"  a.—  "  efficere.  —  '"^  consortium.—  '3  jrenitive. — 
**  Render  :  Who  seemed  to  us  worthy  'of  whom  '  we  should  receive  gifts  (bf-nefium). — 
**  Render:  'rnworthy  to  whom  we  owe'  (debtre). — ^^  fully  competent,  satis  i'tloneiis. 
--" />/'tty.»'.N'^  with  gerundial  dative  (fqciendo). — '^  in.—'*  Can  '  in  order  to'  be  rendered 
here  by  a  relative* — '•*"  delcMe.— *'  I'lirpitflldo. — ■•*2  pru^ponere. — ^^  ad  ostium. — '-**  by  ^  ut 
g'/isgue' — '•**  accedere. — "-*  jubCri. — "-*'  legionarius. — '-*'"*  piwliilri.- **  equites.— »"  consue- 
tfldo.— 31  percipere. — 32  ^^-^7/  j,^^  usus,  with  genitive.- 33  proBlioriim.— 3*  convenlre. — 
3*  coinmeatum  supi)ortare.— 3«  Raider  :  Places  were  divided  to  etc.— 3'  Render  :  Where 
each  [rank]  might  make  spectacles  10  themselves.— ^-^  prailiere.— 3*  by  the  locative  ad- 
verb.—*" de|)ortare.— *i  fiirtum  (plur.).— *"-*  exportilre.— *3  dat.—**  =  furnish  (pmbere) 
to  him  bread.— **  locat.  advt^rb.— **  sumere.--*' Gen  Myuntis. — *'' ops(niium  (sing.). — 
*'*  to  v'in  the  good  graces,  \o\\x\\\\\Xyn\  conciiiare.—*"  dative  t»f  the  interested  jierson. — 
*'  rt'cipere  beueficiiiin.— *'-  naut"ragus.— o3  =  by  which  he  may  be  forwarded  back  (revehi). 
— **  consiitiiere  aliquid  alicui.—**  ritiis.— **  iii  posterum.— *'  munlre. — *»  sent  [persons] 
who  were  to  announce.—**  constituere. — *"  meo  nomiiu!  agere. — *'  ipse. — *"-*  conducere. 
— *3  sicarius.— **  to  take  one's  life  by  an  amfnixh,  aliquem  improvidum  ex  iiisidiis 
opprimere.—**  Render  :  To  whom'  runnings  (co//c//r»''/.'»)  of  profligate  (perditu^)  citizens 
[will]  be  made.--**  undique.— *'  =  t(»  whom  it  was  allowed  (/io^/").  — *»  imj)Qiie.— **  by 
the  indefinite  relative.-- '"  fides  (sing).—  "  tol>e  in  dangtr,  temptari.— '"-  insidia?.— 
'3  compositus. — '*  dicere.—  '*  =  whatever  is  seen.—'*  talis  quails. — "  talis. — '**  tx>  con- 
sent  to  something,  aliquid  sententiis  confirmjlre.— '*  =  which  seems  to  be  contrary 
{obtsse)  to  etc. — ''O  utiliias.— >='  =  tliat  nobodv  preferred  (anteferre)  himself  to  him  (rela- 
tively expressed).— »"-*  neither.— "^3  fortilnie.— "^*  to  be  on  somebody's  side,  alicfijus  partes  se- 
qui.— »*  boni.— "*  summe  coufidere.— ^'  dux.— s^*  stipeiidia  facere.— ^»  apud.— *"  excitare. 


•\ 


^ 


586 


RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


y^- 


ENGLISH   EXERCISES. 


587 


city,  were  such  that  they  both  8nrj)ai»scd>  the  majriiificonce  or  former'  [works],  and 
it'DiaiiuiP  uiisjurpajjscd  in  the  fiitiinv— 10.  Perha|)s  what  you  will  hear  from  me  is  euch, 
that  not  all  will  «ijprove*  of  it.— 11.  Tlit-  act*  which  the  tril)Uiies  had  undertakfii  was 
fiieh  that  it  aroiisfd*.  not  the  lowe:*t  elashU'S»^,  hut  llu'  very  headr»  of  the  l^leheiane". — 
12.  KiiiiT  I)l■j(ltatu^'^'*  troops  mver  were  oi  u  quality  that  he  could  make  war"»  with 
tlu-m  on  the  Homan  people. — 18.  We  were  distin-jui^hed"  hy  qualirier^i^  that  do  not  ^l:ow" 
themselves  in  hattle.  — H.  The  people  conferred'*  tin-  hii:he.-t  powi-r'^  on  a  man'*  who,  Ix-- 
forc.  had  in  amost  disfxracefiil  tnanner'^  hrokt-n'**  the  laws. —15.  \N  hat  State  is  sostrun::"' 
that  it  miu'ht  not  be  utiorly^"  (h'^troyed■-''  by  hati--"'^  and  discord^-^y — 1«.  No  force-*  is  fo 
{^nat  that  it  mij,dit  not  he  brokeu'^^by  the  sw(*rd-'*.— 17.  Was  there  cvei  a  man'''^  fo  crtiel. 
as  to  rorl)id  anyone  to  mourn  * — 18.  Nobody  is  so  hostile  to  our  cause  as  to  call  us  ba<l 
citizens.— H).  Nothin^j  has  ever  happened  to  nnfortunutely^*^,  that  it  thould  not  be  use- 
ful''* to  some  one. 

XIV.  Causal  and  adveksativk  kelativb  clause?.  7?.  21. — 1.  The  j:fovernor^*'  of  tlie 
State,  who  was  of  the  opinion-"  that  he  should  do  his  ofliciaP^  duty  without  any  re- 
pud  to  party,  reji-ctecPS  the  otrcr^*.— 2.  Zopyrus  was  dcridi-d  by  the  others,  who  did  not 
acknowlcdi^e^*  these  vices  [to  e.xist]  in  Socrates.— .'J.  1  know  that  the  master  was  aii'MV. 
since  I  played  the  eavesdropj)er3«.— 4.  Sleep  euil>raced3^  me,  since  1  had  been  awake'» 
till  late^"  in  the  ni<,'ht.— 5.  'I'his  is  a]tot;:ether'"'  your  own  fault*',  since  you  despised  the 
advice  we  tendered*"-'  to  yoti  at  your  departure*^.  — 0.  The  servants,  who  were  of  the 
same  stami)**  as  their  master,  treated  Habonius  most  shamefully. — 7.  We  ourselves, 
althoiit;li  we  were  strongly  attached*^  to  that  party*",  are  (luily  more  estran;:ed*^  [from 
it].— 8.  Nero,  althouj^h  he  was  <,'iven*'^  to  a  mo^t  immoderate  debauchery,  was  only  three 
times  indispo-ed  durinir  his  whole  life*».—'.».  Should  that  man  have  been  elected  with- 
out bribe-^",  who,  besides  his  wealth,  had  nothiii"'  at  all  topun  thefav«>r^'  of  his  fellow- 
citizens? — 10.  I  helieve52_  i  djd  wronoraa  ihat  I  left&*  you.— 11.  You  yourself  acknowl- 
edired^' this  to  be  correct^»,  wheii^^  you  refused'^^  to  follow  Pompey  to  the  war^». — 
12.  We  admire  Fabricius  for  his  belief*"  that  even  the  enemy  has  some  riirhls  which  we 
Hie  bound  to  respect*'. — 13.  I  am  very  thanklul*^  t(»  old  a^'e*'  lor**  increasiuti  my  eajrer- 
ness*^  for  conversation**,  [and  for]  abatin;,''''  [my  eaircrness]  (or  drink"*  and  food. — 
14.  What  place  can  bravery  have*»  in  liim  who  says  ihat  i)ain  is  the  tjre  >test  evil "! — 
1.5.  We  admire  the  bravery  of  those  who,  in  battle,  prefer^"  death  to  llijrht.— l^i.  Ilavini; 
rehised^'  to  riile"'^  in  his  own  State,  he  could  not  be  a  subject'^  "m  a  loreiL'n**  [one]. — 
17.  Observe  tile  discretion^'' of  [tluue]  Gauls.  Not  kiiowim:**  the  life  and  nature  of  men, 
and  hiviiii;  heard  [only]  so  much  that  1*.  Sulla  and  the  others  were  in  the  same"*  di>^- 
iress^s  as'»  Cetht;i!;us,  they  ask«'d  whether  tlu'V  had''"'  the  same  i)urpo.>-e8'.— IS.  Who 
lhroltled*2  his  intimate*'^  [frii'iid],  what  will  iie""*  do  with'"'  an  enemy  if  an  op])ortiinity 
otters»*  ? — I;*.  You  cannot"''  [any]  longer  retain  in  [the  comnniud  of)  the  j)roviiice  a 
nian''^  who  is  makiiij,'  with  theeliemy  treaties^*  disj)o.'ini:*'<'  of  our  allies,  and  with  our 
allies  [is  makin;;  treaties]  disposinirof  our  citizens.— 20.  I  shall  uiihoitatiiii.'h'"  delend 
a  m  in»2  wiiom  whok;  provinces  wish  to  be  sale'-'^. — 21.  Ilavini;  attacked"*  this  i)ait\»» 
with  the  fiercest»*  hatred,  he  now  became»'  its  most  ardent  supporter— 22.  'I  his  is  a 

'  Vincere. — ^  prior.— ^  Hender :  And  were  surpassed  by  no  [mai:nitic«'nce]  afterwards. 
— *  proiiilre  aliquid. — 'actio. — '  accendere. — ">  inlima  plel)s  (sing.). — *  plebs  (sing.).—  *  = 
Kill!,' Dejotariis  had  those  troops. — '"helium  inleire  alicui.— "  pra^stilre. — '- ea'  res  — 
13  —  which  <lo  not  <:o  loi  ward  {/uv/lre)  into  battle  (inerely  determiniiii,'  the  antecedent 
rc^)  — 14  (lefene. — "  imperium.— '*  is. — ''  bv  the  aclverb  (V//^7y^.^■).— '^  violjlre.— '»  hrmus. 

—  -"  funditus.—  21  evertere,— 22  plur.—  23  ^ijjicidjnni  (])lur.).—  2*  \ifi._ '^s  fraiiL'ere.— 
2*  ferrum.  — 27  by  ecqvl^. — 2«  male.  —2»  prodcsse. — 'o  pnrfectus. — 3'  existimflre — ^-^  len- 
der :  That  oftices  should  [be]  performed  (prjest.lre)  without  faction  ( f'acfio). — ^^  re^puere. 

—  34  conditio. —  ^^  airnoscere. —  3*  ad  fores  ausctiltilre. —  ^7  comi)Iecli. —  3*  viudljlie. — 
3»  multa  no.v.— *"  omnlno.— *'  culpa  (that  thy  alto<;ether  fault  is).— *2  oflerre.— *3  partic. 
con>tr.,  by  j/rofiei<cen.'i.—**  mores.—*'  deditissimus. — **  pars.—*'  abalienare.— *"  —  to 
be  «.f  most  immoderate  luxury. — *•  =  languished  altojiether  (07?j»7/»o)  thrice.— '"jxnitis 
(th(f  question  to  be  expressed  in  the  indicative  and  without  any  interrcirative  |)article). — 
"  fo  (/(tin  /A«/rt?'w,  aninios  sibi  conciliiXre. — '2  videor.— '^  pe'ccilre. — ^*  disc«d«re  ah. — 
'^jiidicSre. —  '*  veriis.— "  relative. —  "*  nolle. —  '»  in  castra.  —  *"  =  who  believed,— 
*'  Paraphrase:  That  there  exists  (esse)  some  crime  (ne/tis)  even  apiinst  {i/i)  the  enemy 
(/lOstis). — «2  magnain  pratiam  habere,- *3  scnectus. — «*  relative.-*'  aviditas,  nif/i  fjeni- 
the.~*^  scrmo.— 6'  toUere.— *«  potio. — «»  by  es.-ic.—''^  anteponere.— "  nolle  (re/a/ire  con- 
sfniction).—  '2  principem  esse.—  '^  to  be  a  subject^  servTre.—  '*  allCnus.— "  dili;:entia.— 
'*  nosse  ir^fdfire  const/wfio/i). — "  par.—"*  calamitas.— '»  relative.—  ""  esse  in.—'"'  volun- 
tas.—«2  jnirulare.— »3  familiilris.— »*  is.— **' dative.— '"*  dari  labl.  abs.  in  the  peif.).— *"'  by 
an  aftirmative  imperative  sentence. — *"*  is. — ^»  pactiOnes  facere  (at  the  end  (if'  the  peiiod). 
•—»»  dis}xMnr/  of  =  de.— »'  sine  ulla  dubitatinne.— »2  is,— »3  salviis.— »*  persequi  (xelatire 
const rucf ion).— ^^  faciio. — »*  acer.— »'  =  bejjau  to  support  {aiijnvdre  atque  07'ndre)  it  with 
the  greatest  now  zeal. 


/   I 


mo«»t  frrievou'^i  error  indeed',  which  (e/  qui)  may  be  fataP  to  the  safety  of  the  repub- 
nc*Ui  The  reason  Of  mai\  is  imperfect,  but  perfectible' -24.  The  Syracusians, 
fbein.'l  me  of  experience*,  who  (i.  e.  ^ so  that  th.y')  wtc  able  to  see  in  the  dark', 
kei  t  an"cc  mut«  hi  the  pirates  that  were  daily  beheaded». -"25.  Archaga  hus,  a  noble- 
mi.ded'o  ma  1  vvh..  (i.  e.  Ko  that  he  ')  wished  to  be  loved  and  esteemed' '  by  his  [towns- 
men 1  felt  sore''-'  that  such  an  office'3  should  have  been  ten.  ered'*  to  him.-2b._  [Ihese 
n  e  r  old  fa«ldoned  people",  who  (i.  e.  'so  that  they^)  judged'*  others  '  Irotiilheir  [own] 
ch  ricu'r''^^^  [tliis  statement].- 27.  [That]  timid  and  inexperienced'»  man,  who 

h  i  ne    her'  cm  rage  n^or  intelligence20  enough,  did  not  think  the    "her'tance  to  be  Nvc.rtb 
so  mS"'   that  he  should  endanger22  [thereby]  his  citizensnip.--28.  O  the  sordid^s  [men] 
Avho  accepte    the  Mft.  [and]  the  wicked2*  [man]  who  gave  [it]  !-21).  Oimprudent'o  youth 
wo  dUNt  surrender    hyseff  to  the  faith  of  a  tyrant  !-30.  It  is  not  e^asy2«     „  recognize 
r      tterer,  s  nee   7«W^^^  he  frequently  flatters2'  [while]  pretendinjz2«  t«  f  insav2.   ana 
at  Hstao  Miller-  himself   o  be  cnvinced^i  by  better32  arguments.-31.  Although's  Pb.to 
w^s  cruelly  injured»*  by  Uionysias,  since  (quiirpe)  [the  latter]  had  ordered  him  to  besold 
TntoXVerv"'   he  yet  returned  to  Syracuse.-:^.  The  consuls  did  not  restrain^*  theai-dor 
o     he  1 -ions'   knowin^aVthat  the^aw  recruits^s  of  the  enemy  were  not  equate,     he 
con    st3r!^33  A  great  part  of  the  Fid-  nates,  having»'  been  added  a%<^<l,J«"|^t^7.  «;^»^^ 
komai  -  knew  the  Latin*'  [language].    -34.  Y'ou  cannot  wonder  that  I  should  dislike*' 
hnu"  w'ho"rthe  Itoman  pe<tplcTs  inin\ical*3,  especially  since  I  in  ^^^"'•■^fV^i^^^^^JJ";^ 
of  the  Roman  people,  should*'  take**  even  more  than  my  share*'  in*»  the  burdens 
and  duties'"  [due  to  it]. 

XV  Locative  clauses  (§  616).-!.  Where  the  king  had  fallen,  a  sepn  cher  was  con- 
btnict'ed -2  When  the  enemv  had  come  to  that  [place]  where  our  [soldiers]  were  d- 
den  in  ambush,  those  [that  were]  fleeing  suddenly  stopped",  and,  urning  a  u  d 
t^l.fde  Ln  a  tack  on  fthe  r]  pursuers'2.-3.  Till  a  ship  has  come  to  the  place  for  which  a 
p  ssage^ias\M.en  aken  [ill  U  it  does  not  belong'*  to  the  owner",  but  to  the  passen- 
•^er.i.'^_4  You  must  directly  return  there  from  where  you  have  departed.-5  J  he  i"' 
{■.abitants:  in  the  third  ni-ht-watch,  madea  sally"  from  the  town  on  that  f^^e]  where'8 
he  ascen  '»  to  our  fortitication.s  seemed  to  be  least  steep«".--«.  They  met*'  the  Gauls 
eleven  mles*'Mo^  citv],  where"*  the  river  Allia  mixes*»   ^^^  ^vaters  w.Ui  those 

of  he  Tiber -7.  They  returned**  to  Home,  where  <hc  war  w;as  preparing*'  ^^'th  the 
^rea  est  enJp'V»* -8  I  de|.arled  fr.)m  Svracus.^  om  which  [place]  the  I''|,«sage«'  to 
Greece  w^uiJ^d  to  be  safest.-i».  On  the  ihird.     .,iay  I  left««  Tarsus  where*»  I  had  ar- 

rVvfd  Ure\lay  before'».-10.  Ipray"  [to]  thee,  ^>, ^«"-".^-^"Vhef ' Tl^The  conlul  a^'- 
where  a  ten  pie,  worthy  of  thy  greatness'2,w-ill  receive-»  thee.-ll  The  con^u  ac^ 
ce Died  the  capitulation  of  the  city'*,  to  which  the  routed  army"  ^^d  fled'*. --12.  I 
U.  ught''  it  necessary-^Mo  point  ouf»  the  sources  from  which  you  might  draw"  th  s 
k  w  ed-e-'  -13.  We  are  not  going  to  sufter^2  i„  this  country^»  any  one  ln>m  whom^* 
dan-er  ,miy  come  to  our  liberty.-13.  The  consul  occupied  that  town  in  order-  to  col- 
lect"'-  there  the  supplies"  for  the  army^ 

1  T  amentAbilis  —2  «aiie  —3  e\itiO-us.— *  salus  publica.— '  =  but  which  can  be  perfected. 
-  or  ]^;iH.  K^^^^  pe;  t  1.;-'  oicu^^^^^^  h.bCre.-«  seciiri  ferlr.  (quasi- 

c.bli'^'ifSIjTcti^ve  ,1^  if  an  i'Klirect  question).-'"  nobilis._''djigere.-'^grav^^^ 
fcrrc- (With  inflnitive-clause).-'3  proviucia.-J*  dare.-"  '^^^^^Jf^^^^'J^^/z-'o^'lf^^-Z 
17  ceteri  — »»  natQia.-'»  imperltus.^20  consilium.-2i  p.   2b7,  Obs.   4  ,  p., 27)  li.^. 

22  Render :  That  he  should  come  into  i\oxx\M{duhiinn)  on  [his]  citizenship   «  t^);- 

23  sordidu-»- 2*  imi>robus.— 2'  impr..vidus.— 2*  =  A  flatterer  (assen  afar)  1=^  not_  easily 
r.:o^^mnSTiieo  p.  2.38.^foll.  Obs.  I.-2'  blandIri.-2B  simulare  with  mhninve^ 

•lau^e--»  liti-!lre.-3"  ad  extremum.-»!  vincere.— ^2  potior.-»»  q"H™"T  ,  -,7  ?  f"^ 
^^  obe  soldinlosavery,  veiiumdari.-»* /;o/  to  restrain,  indulgSre  with  dat— »',by  nt 
wi  h  the  ?ebli ve -i»^  Sus  miles  (sing.).-»»  tot>e  equal  to  the  contest,  satis  certamini  esse. 
-*"  coionu-  -^*'  p.  84,  R.  ;i8.-*2  alicui  inimlcum  esse.-*3  infestus.-**  pro  voluntate.- 
45  deS-**  susT  pere.-*' quam  pars  virllis  postulat.-*"  partitive  genitive,  depend- 
enf  ^  yi;/..-*»  onifs  (>i«^.).--  "ulnus  (sing.).-^l  C'>"^i^tere.-'2  Render  -.  ami  carried 
a.ferre)  the  converted  standards  {sirrnmn)  against  the  1'"'-^ »",  ^  j"  f^^J^^'T  '  Keen 
Till  (quoad)  '  it  has  be.n  come  '  (perve,nre.  impeus.  p-^^s.)  thither  w  hither  a  ship  has  heen 

tnken  (sumere).-^*  esse.-"  dominus.-*-  "*''"^*rJ?'T  •'' o'^S- OKs^n  e^a'^fc.der  • 
censrs  -»"  arduus.— *'  occurrere  (iniptrs.  pass. ).— *2  by  lapis  (p.  220,  Ob>  V-—^\^f^^'^^^  " 
Wher /the  river  Allia  is  mixed  to  the  Tiberine  (77^>emw.)  •^trearn.-**  unpcM-s.  pass.- 
6'  uar-lre  -«*  vi-  -*'  trajectus.-*'*  =  departed  from.-*»  pervenire  (see  p.  ii,  Ji.  hO-— 
'"  ridie 'ejus  diei.-''  precS.i.-'2  ampl.tQdo.-'»  subjunctive  by  attnvct.on.-'  urbem 
in  dedit^Onem  acci  .ere  -"  fusa  acies.-'"  se  conferre.-"  putilre.-"*  gerundia    of  the 

main  verb.-'*  ^i^^^^ 

"ein  this  country  etc)  -"  civitaa.--^*  adverb—»'  relative  constmction.~»«  comportaie. 

Render  passively  (the  supplies  to  be  collected).—**'  commeStus. 


COMrLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


589 


588  THAT-CL.VUSES. 

CHAPTER    THIRD. 

TIIAT-CLAUSES. 
I.    COMPLETING   TIIAT-CLAUSES. 

^  617.  That-clauses  are  either  completing,  or  advcrUal  {%  456 ; 
§  GIO,  li  3,  Obs.  1,  p.  483  foil.)-  The  former  are  those  which  complete 
the  idea  of  their  governini;  words  ia  the  principal  seutencc.  They  have 
either  tlie  form  of  an  infinilive-chuise,  or  the  form  of  a  finite  clause  in- 
troduced by  ut  {uti),  ne,  qum,  quomUus,  or  quod.  Quod  reciuires  the  pre- 
dicate of  tlie  clause  to  be  in  the  indicative,  except  if  the  clause  ^^  oblique 
(p  388).  The  other  conjunctions  require  a  subjunctive  in  all  1  hat- 
clauses,  whether  the  clause  contains  an  oblique,  or  a  direct  statement. 
—Sometimes  finite  That-clauses  take  an  asyndetic  form  (p.  473,  OtJS.  3), 
their  predicates  Wmg  in  the  subjunctive  {R.  24,  Obs.  1,  G). 

Or^  The  form  of  complotinsr  That-clanso*  is  dctermituMl  1)  by  the  nature  of  he 
M«,w?:rr  24  O."  l\  •  27  )v  the" .'ovfri.in- word  in  the  i.rincipul  ^ontcncc.  Coinplet  i- 
tS  trUuisr^a  ^eith^T  «  ii  l.e  relation  of  objects  to  the  (logical)  ,.redu;ttte  ol  he 
ir^;  d,      /em  relation  of  pcb-ikcts  to  the  .ame.  or  (c)  in  the  rdulum 

of  aVSiu't^^^^^^^^^  Thev  al.o  may  «/)  perform  the  lunction  of  r;"Ki>'^-^-'['^';,    f 

the  pH,  c  p:  1  'enteneJ.p.  4S(i  foil).     C^ompU-tin^'  '^^'"'■'^'^'''^J^^v^^C^l^^ 

iulO  0B.IECT-CLAU>?ES,  SLbJECT-CLAL-SES,  ATTKIBUTE-CLAUSE3,  UUd   1  UhUlCArK-CLAL.Ea. 

A.     Object  Titat-clauses. 

Jlem    ^^2    Object  TnAT-CT.AUSES   take   Uie  following  forms:    L  That 
of  an  infinitive  clause  if  they  depend  on  a  ^'^f  "^fj  If'^'/f 'jf  ^  ""  o   Th!'j 
andi,  and  contain  an  oblique  declarative  statement  (p.  .>b j ,  A.  81).--.  i  ny 
t^Ike  the  form  of  an  Ut-clause  (negatively  «.:  (^0  if  they  are  cU'p. ml  n 
on    a   verbum  declarandi,   and  contani   an  obhqne  impemtive ^X^Wm^uX- 
(n  ISO    li  83V  (M  if  they  depend  on  a  rM-6«////m-«r«(/<,  implying  an  ^/*wi 
^h^h  is  siH^diiil  bv  the  That-clause  (7^.  2o).-3.  They  take  the  f^»rm  ot  a 
clause  introduced  by  ne,  quin,  or  quominus,  if  ^IhT  depend  ^^!^^^!^^ 
faciendi  mx\>\y\\vr^  nefjatiee  aim  which   is  specified  by  the    Ih.iUlausc 
(/e  25   Obs.  5   foli.).-4  Thcv  take  the  form  of  a  Quod-clanse  or  ot  an  It- 
U',/.;  if  the  governing  verb  does  not  belong  to  any  o    ^ »«  ^^  ^  ^^|[^« 
classes.     These  clauses  represent  the  idea  ot  a  fact  which  is  treated    ike 
a  suljdantive  object  (transitive,  intransitive,  or  preposU..>nal     ;  ependo^^^^^ 
on  the  principal  predicate  (A'.  20).      There   are  several  idiomatic  excep- 
tions  to  all  these  rules. 

\.   Verba  senticndi. 

Rem,  23.  Verba  sentiendi  are  those  that  express  an  act  of  the  mind 
(sentlre,  intelliqere,  meminiHse,  dincere,  exiMimare  credere,  gaudere,  veren 
cupere,  pati  e\c.),  or  an  act  or  impression  of  the  senses  {cidere,  sentire, 
audlreAc).  The  That-clauses  dependent  on  them  ^r^^'^'^jr^;;"  =\"f;;^ 
and  ijenerally  have  the  Ibrm  of  an  infinitive  clause  (p.  o8^  A.  8  )  uitli 
Uie  tbllowing  exceptions  :  1)  verbs  of  fearing  (Obs.  1) ;  2)  the  verb  dubi- 
Ijr.  with  a  Segative  (Obs.  2-4) ;  3)  verbs  of  emotion  (Obs.  5.  0) ;  4)  verbs 


\ 


n 


of  volition  rOBS  7) ;  5)  those  verba  sentiendi  ^^^\nQ\\  in  certain  connections 
have  assumed  the  sii^nitieatiou  of  other  classes  of  verbs  (as  .i^.rt./r,  cen- 

gere   vide  re)      See  Obs.  8-10. 

n«-    1    V.Tbs  of  FEABiNO  require  Xe-dauses  or  Ut-dauses  {m  non\  aecordin^  to  §408 
T^^'al:  ^U^o/./iu^"!Aduslviarti:e  nihil  dederiut.  P-'^^ter  l;et_,t.am; ^7 a;;K//mc/ //.«(! 


(See  ulf-o  Cic. 

^  n.'.« '  g'  That  clanpcs  dependent  on  duWare  with  a  ne-ative,  or  with  what  is*  equiva- 

]:Z^r^ZMmXi^kr^^i^^^.    1"  '«er  pUe  ,hi»  cou.,ruc.iun  be- 
camolhcroxi'Mone  mcanin- ■  not  to  hcsilate '  (»t>cn  the  losical  Buliject  of 

th?  wi.,ci.faf  predS  •  i  "  he  .a,l^  a"  that  of  Ihe  elau.e),  >.  seoerally  co„sm,ed  jvuh  an 

\   "ri  i'i  con«i™  '   o.    V  n^ri  iV  dulntC,,-:  is  in  ihe  peripLrarfie  conjUKat.on  in  d,,m 

\n,)  iliihifaiidxni  puiavi  uuiii  (iuccnrrevem.  tic.  lam.  U),  1«.     inns  yvun  /'^«  <^'  "\'."" 
d^nUie-l^l^^rnl  cuncLdum  exi.timavit  guin  pugna  decertaret.  Cae..  B  G.  3,  2.3. 
nu«  4    Sometimes  other  verbs  of   feeling  and   thinking,  implying,  hke  dubifare,   a, 

tiili,,» /M  -  ne  >.o«l.  as  :  Xoii  melnoi/iiin  mi-.x,  axon  lalK  »  ipp.Mia!  i-liit.  1  l.int.  Am   4, 

L!^  ,::;...  .n/'  Si -For    hi  c.nisliuclion  ot  neamve  linpersoiial»,  and  ne-a  ive  fuli- 
'wn'tSv.'"  'vitfr  Qiiin-^lHn^-ci' >'««'«•  ■■"  »■"'  SS--'"^  ""=  cou.tmcllon  of  nesauve  verba 

^"ctf  5  ".'^l^.^gg.t!::;.^^  KMOT.O.  are  con..med  wi.h  na.rl.,,...  to  deno^ 
^  TlH^liH^l  conception  of  tlic  conjunction  quin,  in  this  «>"f;™j"''"!;™/'''L''",j 
of  an  afflnnalive  conju^.lion,  lint  ih.t  of  '"']•''■■■"  f^'l^l^Z^^.^t^  it  M^^^^ 
r,-rne  ',"'  Ke'Vori^tfn  t  oi?  o.",S  'SS^  elc'  T,.",  an  S  'rro^.S-^  dan.e  i»  not 

''"i-;'k^'S™h«ramniarl'i\'t';'u;;e^l;;.'S,S^^ 

li™^^  '^^'S:^:;.^^  '!^.'=?- ^'^^v-i" 

Cic    \it   1  1   3     But  thepa^^'age  reads  thus:  Na.n  Pompej  us //o/i  dutntuL  \  ere  cmm 
judiaU  tal  qiiic  de  republica  ntiuc  eenliani,  mitii  proban. 


590 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


COMPLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


591 


the  OH..CX  Of  the  -oUon     S.^cl^T^a^cl^c^eit^^ 

clause,  or  thai  of  •<\Q>'<''ilf.''!''f'l^^^^^^^^^  .uccen^re.  irasd,  and  }he 

htUin,  doFere,  nutnre,  'o!hn hwie^':J''^-,l''' ^^^  auww  J\rn.  quo  ammo 


a.  3,  32.-Minime  e.t  "itn^'durn  n^^^^^^^  ^^  Facf-davses 

t  quo<l-daHses  expn-^^in-  the  o^J^^'^i  of  an  cmo  ion  navc^  denotin- 

I.  26 OBs.  3),  in  which  th_e  «'^^«"^«"^  "^ /'^^^.^"l^^Vf  I  rejoice  a   the  tact  U.at  you  have 
fact  mm<ieo  victoria   mi  -  9avd.oeoguod  ucuti_,  1 /e  mcc  ai  ^^^^^^.^^^^^  ^^^.^. 


a  fact  (<7«'<^<^o  victoria  tua  -  f/ai/rfeo  to  r/</o«  ].l'^;^'L\W;'^^e,t7f^ro  quod  homines  mihi 
been  victorious.  ^'^''^^^''''\'^''V"''''' M  ^/S  !>  rhe~-!me  S  arJrft2//r:.e«'i^«^/^  the.c 
invident).  Since  every  yejrb  ot  enioiion  V^-.f .  ,^,^  "'J-^e  pir  forni  of  That-clauses  de- 
verbs  may  always  take  infifatire  clauses,  ^^ !  '^ J,  ^' "i^,  /  .^  ^^„-" '  J.  Vhe  .ame  lnn<Mi..ns,  and 
perulentoi;  verbs  <,flV^^n,^Bo^^^^^^^ 

trenera   y  arc  convertible.    Only  lor  rneioiuai  ^^"^^yj^;  \  c  .  ;^  conci-er  and  l)ncti'r. 

the  other  if  it  is  better  fittin.:^  the  [f  ^  «  , .  i^^"^';!'^,^,  ^'^l':      ,„  Ul^^Ga^us  ad.si  gan- 


at  the^^ame  time  gen 

have  become  a.qnainted  etc..  I  am  very  ^r'^tl/V'^-f^^lI'VolurihTihe ;,y;m^^^^  «f  ti»e 

and  the  int\nitive  clauses,  dep.-ndent  '">    '^^j'^'^'f.  ^^^nnce ^^^  »«  mentioned 

emotion  ;  but  this  must  be  ^'^''"«"^^^^''V  i?    s  ite  £^^^^^^  ««•  known,  when 

as  a  stale  of  its  subject,  the  ^"'^/^^'^"^6  «.f  l  e  ^Ut    bu   ^'  I  '|^\'W  he  diflerent  from  ita 
the  clans.'  assigns  a  reason  to  the  emotion  which  may,  ''\J^]^1r;:^^').i\  (in  Knirlish 

n.';S  mu...  ^uchaclause  i^''Otac.nnp  etin.%bu  tan^^^  ,^ 

introduced  l)y  '  because '),  and  may  ''^.^">,^T^Vf/.%'y  ,:*;;,  'ci  an  intinm  clause  would 
he  (are  you,  etc.)  in  that  stale  o  emotion  ?  J"  [  ' Vv  ^  f/^or  v  quod  (in  the  meaning 
be  out  of  place,  and  the  clause  is  "'troduce  «'i»'  ^  '  >  ^^  7/,;/;Vi,/^"^7'^^  te  negibas 
'because') ;  as  :  Jam  onutto  inltus  esse;  id  (  -  care  >; ^J^^^  ^j.,.  ^f,  „,,,.rnre  ^/id- 
credere  ar-eutum  mihi.  Plant.  Pers.  .^  3,  ^J— Jj«H^*''''^  "'  '^1^^  y^„,^.  ,„,,„  of  a  cauml 
tus,  et  eo  ma-is,  quod  Appu  qmrstio  est.  C  c  Au.  3,  17  1.  ^'^  ^^^  ,„.-nt.oned.  as  :  Si 
da^tse  is  used  \f,  besides  ihi^.ofvec  of  the  emo  ton  a  r^a  o^^^^ 


intiuitive  clause  is  used  if  tlu3  P[-*|'^|;:;;;'     '[j.^;:,,^^"  ^^en ted^^ 
assumed  as  true,  while  by  a  Quod-claur-e  the  I'f/'.  f ^^^ ''^ J\*  '  X-r   ons  by  the  author '.- 
auffun:  Bat  both  construction,  contain    -iven  ''^'^'':;  ^l       l^,J^y.^'i:^Z,Z,f  the  feelin-', 
MADVia  says:  '  Quod,  in  this  con^tnu.tmn  den^^  Th^/    u  etn-nt  makes  dls- 

which,  in  its  va-ne  wordm-,  may  lead  to  s«-'ry    «^  i     dUtii-uiVli  where  there  is  distinc- 
tinctions  where  there  is  no  dutmclion,  and  failb  to  distinj,uisn  wnere  uicrc  «. 

tion. 


Ji 


jrqnalitas  vestra  tantum  abcst  ab  invidiil  ut,  etc.  lb.  Brut.  42,  150.— Quae  nrbs  mihi  /«• 
tari  \\(\mir  quod  tantam  pestem  evomuerit  forasque  projecent.  lb.  Cat.  2,  lj^2. 

2  Doieo  illlus  consilio  popidum  KomSnum  carere  lam  diu.  Cic.  Brut.  42.  Irti.—IJoCebam 
quod  socium  et  conrJortem  <;l<)riOsi  laboris  amiseram.  lb.  1,  5.— lllud  iimrto  quod  tibi  non 
minOrem  dolOrem  illOrum  orbitas  afleret  quam  mihi.  lb.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  3,  10.— Neque  enun, 
nu-a  commendation.'  te  non  delectdri  facile  patitbar.  et  nunc  arigor,  quicquam  tibi  sine 
me  e<sejucundu>n.  lb.  Fam.  7,  15,  l.—Quod  vivis  nobis»  csrressns  est,  quod  ei  ferrum  ex 
manibus  extorsiums,  quanto  tandem  vicerdre  ilium  esse  afflictum  et  profligatum  putatis . 

3.  T\h\ademntas  tot  mbis,  tot  genfis.  vulignor.  Liv.  40,  lO.—Indignalus  est,  regem  ad 
cansam  dicendam  evocCui.  Ca-s.  B.  C.  3,  IGS.-Indignabantur  milites  quod  conspectum 
suum  hostes  ferre  posj^ent.  lb.  B.  G.  7,  19.—  Quod  spirStis,  qvod  vocem  raittitis,  indtg- 
naidur.  Liv.  4,  3.— Quis  tandem  siicceriseat,  wilites  nos  essef  Liv.  7,  13.— Si  tm*cm« 
juvenibns  quod  peccant,  irascere  infantibus  quod  peccatflri  suut^  Sen.  Ira.  2,  9-— V^^ 
quoque  irascimur  quod  aliquis  nos  autecedat.  Sen.  ib.  3,  31.— Non  irascetur  aliquem  gibi 

cumihinhi.  Ib.  2, 22.                                                  .  ^.     ^        „  «  «     /^    i         .  ...• 

-  •    •    -    ----'■ . -1  — 1— • <-.:-  XT'»—   nan     Carbo  gvavi- 

IS.—  'Juli 

er.  Ib.  Div. 

Ib.  Fam.  3,  6,  5.— Quod  a 


fer 
Of 


'mpardii.  Ib.  2,  22.  .  «.     ^n,         «  «   «     /-. 

4.  Qui  victos  nostros  moleste  fervnt.  nos  dolent  vivere,  Cic.  Fam.  9,  2,  2.— Cai 
rprebat,  sibi  qiuestSrem  hbUgisse  hominem  sin<;ulilri  inertia.  Ib.  Verr.  2.  1, 
•dvittr  et  aceibe,  in  eum  7}ie  locum  addilci  nt...ad  accusandiim  traducerer 


C;ec  2,  4  —Mole<tissit/ie  fero  quod  te  nbi  visurus  sim  nescio.  It).  Fam.  : 

tuis  abes.  eo  leriusferendum  est  quod  etc.  Ir>.  4,  3.  '2.— Quod  salus  sociOmm  euinmum  in 

periculum  vocfltur,  o«o  tandem  aA/iw«/«r/'e  debetis?  Ib.  L.  M.  5,  12. 

5  Miwr  te  ad  me  nihil  scnbere.  Cic.  Att.  8,  12  B.— ^linime  miranmr  te  tuis  proeclSris 
operibiis  IcEtari.  lb.  Fam.  1,  7.— Cato  inirari  se  ajebat  quod  nou  rideret  haruspex,  ha- 
ruspicem  quum  vidisset.  Ib.  Div.  2,  24. 

Obs  G  That-clauses  take  the  form  of  an  exclamatory  infinitive  clause  if  the  {rovern- 
in"-  verb  of  emotion  is  understood,  so  that  the  clause  may  be  considered  as  the  object  of 
a  feelin"  existin.--  only  in  the  mind  of  the  author,  as  :  Te  nunc,  mea  Tereniia,  sic  vexan, 
nicjacfre  in  lacrimis,  idque  fieri  mea  culpa  1  (  =  doleo,  te  nunc  rexdri  etc.);  O.  that 
you  are  now  tormented  thus," etc.  Cic.  Fam.  14,  Z.—JUam  clemevtiam  nostri  imperii  lu 
tantam  crudelitatem  esse  conversam!  (  =  C^uis  non  indiirniltur.  illam  elementiam  etc.), 
lb  Verr.  2,  5.  44.— Qui,  ad  Cannas  victor,  ire  tamen  ad  urbem  ausus  non  eeset,  eum, 
repulsnm  a  Capua,  spem  potiundie  urbis  Korn;e  cepi'^se/  Liv.  2(),  8.— Frequently  such 
claut-e<  take  an  interrogative  form  by  suffixing;  the  interrogative  particle  jie*  to  the  first 
word  of  til.'  clause;  Men^  non  cum  bonis  esse  f  Cic.  Att.  9,  tu—Tene  hoc  dicere,  tali  pru- 
deiitia  pra'ditum?  Ib.  Clu.  84.— 7Vr/e  tibi  partis  eas  dejxjjwscisse ?  Ib.  R.  A.  34  95.— 
Tantamnefuisseodlividnem  ut  etc.  Ib.  Brut.  Ol,  219.— /yH/wcine  hominem  tantis  delecta- 
(nm  esse  nii-'is  ut  non  videret  etc.  Ib.  Div.  2.  13.  30.— Sometimes  such  clauses  consist  of 
a  mere  intinilive.  where  an  indefinite  subject-accusative  must  be  supplied,  as  :  Hoc  nou 
ri(l7re  cujus  "eneris  onus  navit*  vehat.  id  ad  gubernatOris  artem  nihil  pertit. ere  !  (i.e. 
guemquam  hm-  non  ridire.  it  is  inconceivable  that  a  perj-on  should  not  see  etc.).  Cic.  Fm. 
4  x»7  7r.— Tantum  laborem  rapere  ob  talem  filium  !  Ter.  Andr.  5,  2,  27.-Often  such 
clauses  are  dep.-ndent  on  an  exclamatory  particle,  or  an  exclamatory  accusative  (p.  8(,  L. 
44)  a<-  Me  mistrum,  te  in  tantas  lerumnas  propter  me  incidisse/  Cic.  Fam.  14.  1.— O 
sp-cta'ulum  7hi-erum  atque  ocerbum  !  Ludibrio  esse  urbis  gloriam  et  populi  Komam 
homen!  It).  V.-rr.  2.  .5,  3S.  In  this  instavce.  the  clause  may  assume  the  form  of  a  Quod- 
clause.  as  :  J/^  ?rti^<^rwf/i,  <7»/o</ in  non  valuisti!  Cic,  Att.  9,  6.  .  •       xu 

Frequently  in  place  of  '  interrogative'  infinitive  clauses.  Ft-douses  {ut  requiring  the 
Pubiumtiv.')  are  used  to  desiimate  the  fact  as  impossible:  Te  ut  nlla  ra»  fran^at.  Ui  nt 
unniuam  te  corrigas  f  Cic.  Cat.  1,  22.-Egdne  vt  te  interpellem?  Ib.  Tusc.  2,  A^.-hgone 
vt  prolis  mete  futulam  cruOrem  ?  Sen.  Med.  9,  27.-Pater  ut  in  judicio  capitis  onesse  film 
delteat^  Cic  Plane.  l:i.  31,- Me  ut  quisqnam  norit.  nisi  ille  qui  priei)et  cibum !  Plant. 
IVr-*  i  3  52  Instead  of  ?/^  often  quas:i  is  used  in  these  clauses  (see  'Comparative 
clauM-s')  or  a  mere  subjunctive  without  any  conjunction,  which  form  is  passing  over 
into  the  -'ititerrogative  tiibjunctive'  (p.  381,  §  593),  as:  Ego  tibi  irascerer?  tibi  ego  vos- 
sem  irasci*  Cic,  Qu.  Fr.  1,  3,  1, 

Obs.  7  Vi"rb«  of  vomtion  (reUe,  nolle,  malle,  cupere,  concvpl^cere,  optare),  are  con- 
strit.d  either  with  an  obj.ct-intinitive  (except  optare)  or  with  an  infinitive  clause,  or 
with  an  Ut  (ne)-clauso.  or  with  a  mere  subjunctive,  according  to  the  following  rules  : 

1.  If  verba  of  volition  (except  optart)  have  objects  expressing  verbal  ideas,  which 

♦  In  this  anomalous  form  of  *  interrosative  infinitive  clauses'  the  interrogative  parti- 
cle do.-s  nut  bel..ng  to  the  infinitive  clause,  but  to  the  governing  verb  of  emotion,  in  the 
mind  of  the  author,  which  is  understood  as  a  question.  Thus  '  AdeOne  hominem  infell- 
ccm  esse'  (Ter.  Andr.  1,  5,  10),  pniperly  means  :  Fierine 2>otest,  hominem  adeo  lufellceuJ 
esse? 


i 


592 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


IIV    iinj  oi'y/'m*    "■»••    —   r .     -  I      ,10 

I  was).  C  c.  1  lauc.  o4,  M. —  »  «ttt.'-,  upn  wi.  «i»n  v         0  di  u\ I«t«)  in  fcntTc  lu 

14  St; -To/'//'/  illi,o//i/rw  eildcm  cnditione  nai^cl.  lb.  I^'^- *t,1/' ;*\-^t'V.  J^7 


'"^  "*^," :"/  /„/  .  rpuo  trihiiiH'«  now  'iUcUlenlv  wif'li  that  the  H)lduM>  be  reliexed 

{Mem  a:  l'.'»^, ""?>'"'„,'•  Citc  B   31  -Lib.-rls  m„>iill:nn  !yV.»«i«  prnplcr  .|.»..8.  ID 

orant  ut  f-cx  Komii  '•',;''■>'"  ""'  V,', '    ,j  _s,,  «ill.  riinere  (hul  not  «iih  opirin),  as  : 
C.mp.  Plant   Am.  pr,.l.  •«•  „^',S-  'J  \;  V'^T;  tfJlZT  ulrimn  ,x.<li„clam  c<,jnL  Liv.  4,  24. 

tii-p    lb   7   81  —  Te/i'/i  iiiihi  iy//r/^ra^.  Ih.  13,  7.).—    ''/o '//i  lum  n  .  iMMKu 

ghT>ulVbe  (kme'hc  wish.-d ',  a«  :  Cras.us,  equitu.u  pru^fectos  colioriam.,  quid  fei .  teli' , 
""I'lMhe^ubic^t  (?f  ?hf(iopendentclnu.e  islikewiso  in  the  first  p.r.on  the  ^^^^^^ 

fectum.  Cic.  Att.  10,  2. 


i 


COMTLETINQ  THAT-CLAUSES. 


593 


594 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


;;t^^ilio:';i:.;*;rcS!ii:ai'i.!-MaL;"V-iu.f.::'p«."s  ;e,i.,uo.  ...,■,•..  .«■«-.•.  iv  b.  c.  3, 8. 

2     Verba  declarandi. 

foelini;,  tl.c.i.-l.t,  "'■  ""P'V^^."'l  •. , .  V  .^„,,   ir  tC  00.  tain   a  doclamtive 
take  1)  tl,.-  .■o,-m   ", »"  '''^«'^f^i.t      m    f  u^'^""  ^ 

«•i//^rfby  the  subject   "\^\'"'"^  V  l  »Jhn  /o^o ')   or  that  of  a  Thut-clause  with  ^  ^/'Ould  , 
of.ject.inP'ifire  ^^■^th^ro    ^!  h^'/*^'^  "  ^^^^  '  snch  clause,  ttiust  either  take  the 

^ou^ht\  or  other  auxiltariesd  MM    ti-com^^^  .ubjiit.ctive)  or  it  they 

f..,m  of  an  i„w?ative  ^^•^'}'^%]ll^'''l\^^^^  with  a  gernndia^  predicate  ;  a.  : 

Ivixe  pa.^me  predicates  the  for' "«'  ;  v  V' >^ho  lUl  <'  ^=ilent).  Cic.  Brut.  42,  \5-.-Ihjri\m' 
jnxenimf  a  prit.cip.o  n(  %'\^l^X%^.]^'^^^^^^  esse  eju.tuodi  quod  mjh  i.ec  dt.st- 

tril>us  conscriptis,  m  xu^^  Pl'V;!^'^ wu  rrtur  lb  Att  1.  10.  «'-(Here  •  >,e  vu.i plaga  ronct- 
nuihiudum.  tiec  l^'^-tV"^'''"^";  ',  t  ve  d-n^  but  he  coordinate  That-clau.e  'vnlnus 
derenV  x^  conceived  a=*  JUi  "PP^y^^ii^A  '!".,^,i  r^nmCirent  ne  hostis  pradio  laces^^erent 
e,s.  ej'i.'^Mdi  etc  i^  declaratiye.)-M.tt  U     ui  n*'^^^^^^^^^^^^  no=*inet  ipso*.  noscerCinus  ; 


limiiuive    eiuii:?' ,  ••"  '  ■;'  .y^   — -.  " 

lie  iruiii  ui  fVMi.t.......r,     —  ~  ;.„,:, o.'i nil ««»  ft«»  •  civitilti  yx^^.NWf'-^'iM/Mle  linihus  siii>  exi- 

to  persuade  ;  require^  an  '/"KlJ^^^Tri    Qt^"-  '^^^  t  v>.-Socrates  Alcibiadi  p.r.nasit. 


'  to  persuade  '  requirer<  an  impeiauv^  vw....v..  -.  .  ^  .-Socrates  Alcibiadi  p^rxinmt, 

rint^;>.r/a.-//....y.CialliaMmpeno  ^^^±3^;,^;.;; in  the  meaninjz  Mo  remind  of  u 

e„m  nihil  hoinmis  ^x.v^,  ^'^  Ju^c    -i, ;«.  m-      .;;;,,„'.  ,„  ..^hort '  must  have  an  impera- 

fact'  requires  an   ''^"'"^^^f"^^' ';"!*" '''c"^^^  «^  "^^'«"^ 

live  chiuse  :  lies  ipsa  mon^batJ^mpuiyebU.  cic.  au.  iw,  o 


domum  metueret.  lb.  Sest 


(>4 


;;Ve!ra:  Tac.  Ann.  12,«.  For  th..  use  ..T  7«Jm  wuu    up^^  .^^^  ^,^,^ 

^;c^-^;^.Sio;^woui:i^^  nice  a  pJ::^;i;i;iu^^  that  the  god.  snould^x.. 

or  not  exist. 

q 

or  an 'onler^is  conveyed.     ^(t:^rani;E'{^mnn  -^I  am  i^ni^{<>  ^^f  "her  word  by  a 
E-o  puerum  volo  mittere  ut  habt^«   "'»"''  '^^  'g/3  sC.-Fabius  ad  coll5-am  vmit. 

Blave  that  she  wist  be  ol  «^ood  cheer.  1  laui.  i    '^-- J  '\\ 

Sxercitu  oj>us  esse  qui  <^'^"M>iinis  opponere  un  ^^^^^^  ^^^^^^.       ^f  ^  ,|„,y.  a.  : 

§  Similarly  di.6'.r.  «.^c^'''*  J      .,H»  ^Vilte  quam  dolo  contenderent ;  They  had  learned 
£e^i;?i^f  w^^^(^i?t;^-  S  by 'S^c^  than  by  treachery.  C.  B.  G.  1, 13. 


t 


J 


COMPLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


595 


Ons  2  Imperative  clnnses  contain  the  followinj?  diflercnt  kinds  of  volition  :  1)  re- 
nue-^ts.  praver  detiiand,  and  invitation  (Obs.  3) ;  2)  advice,  proposition,  and  exhortation 
(Obs  4)  •  8)  resolution  and  stipulation  (Obs.  5)  ;  4)  order,  charL-^e,  command,  and  expressed 
wi~h  (Obs  (>  7).  5)  permission  (Obs.  8).  These  diflerent  kinds  of  expressed  volition 
are  indicated  by  special  classes  of  governing  verbs  {verba  im)/erandi),  while  the  general 
verbs  of  saying  (Obs.  1)  may  be  used  with  regard  to  any  kind  of  volition. 

Obs.  3.  The  rerba  irnperanili  expressing  request  etc.  are:  petere,postuIare,flaqifdre, 
orare.  rogare,  precari,  obsecrCire,  implorare,  iustare  (to  urge)  iurildre,  and  similar  v«-rbs, 
as-  I^'fcor  (leos  vt  his  inttnltls  nostris  malis  contenti  slnt.  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1,  3,  \).—lete- 
fmnt  1/fi  equites  pnvmitteret.  Os.  B.  G.  4,  U.—Postulo  vt  ne  qn\d  pnijudicati  aflenltis. 
Tie  C'ln  2  5  — Ciesar  coirnOvit.  Germflnos  ?»n/J('o.<ewf^  ?/<i  ab  Kheno  discederent.  Cjcs. 
B.  G  4,  «.—Semper  JlagilUri  nt  convocaremur.  Cic.  Phil.  5,  11,  30.  '  7b  ask  for  a  ])er- 
tfiisHon'  is  rendered  by  '  pet  ere  vt  aliquid  facereliceat'  (not  by  'vemam  or  ]X)testoftm 
petere  '),  as :  TribQnus  milTium  petebat  ut  Ciesaris  voluntflte  discedere  liceret  ;  a  military 
tribune' asked  Casar  for  the  permistsion  of  leavin<r  the  army,  Caes.  B.  G.  1,  39.— If  the 
person  10  wliom  the  petition  is  directed,  is  not  mentioned,  the  clause  generally  takes  a 
I)assive  constniciion,  in  wliich  instance  it  sometimes  takes  the  form  of  an  ii-fiiative 
clause  which,  however,  in  cb'ssical  prose,  is  confined  to  the  verb ;x>.v''W<?»'€  as  :  \\\f:  pos- 
tvlat  se  Roma)  af/sotvi.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4.  60.— Ettamen  ig?)osci  nolni^ posiulamug.  Aucr.  Her. 
2,  \':.—r\).<fcere.  in  irood  prose*,  is  not  construed  with  That-clauses,  but  only  with  substan- 
tive objects.  In  the  poets  and  postclassically.  it  occurs  both  with  Ut-clauses  and  infinitive 
clauses.  Livy  once  uses  an  Ut-clause  after  clamare  et  poscere  (2. 65).— if  insidre,  (to  insist 
upon)  refers  to  a  mere  statement  of  a  fact,  it  is  construed  with  an  infinitive  clause,  as  : 
Si  instetur  (if  it  is  insisted  upon),  suo  milite  vinci  limnam  posse.  Liv .  2,  48.  If  it  means 
'to  continue  with  perseverance',  it  is  construed  with  an  object-infinitive,  as :  Instat 
Scandilius  mscere  recuperatOres.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  3.  59.  I5ut  if  instdre  means  'to  demand 
urgently',  the  That-clause,  dependent  on  it,  lias  the  form  of  an  imperative  clause,  as: 
Tibi  instat  Ilortensius  vt  eas  in  consilium.  Cic.  Quinct.  10,  34. 

Obs  4  The  verba  imperandi  expressing  advice,  projwsition,  and  exhortation  are  sua- 
dtre^wrsuadZre,  vwnere  (see  Obs.  1),  horta/i,  cehsere  (in  the  meaning  'to  propose',  'to 
move '  see  li.  2:3,  Obs.  9)  ;  as  :  Equidem  svasi  vt  Komam  pergeret  ( I  advised  Inm  to  pro- 
ceed to  Rome).  Cic.  Att.  16.  8,  2.— Ciesar  reliqnos  cohortdtvr  ne  labOri  succurabant  (ex- 
horted them  not  to  succumb).  C«8.  B.  G.  7,  86.  Verbs  of  exhort inir(wo?<^r«,  hortarx) 
sometimes,  hut  very  rarely,  take  an  object-infinitive  in  good  prose  (Cic.  tin.  1,  2() :  ib. 
Sest.  3  7).  The  same  construction  or  that  of  an  infinitive  clause,  with  madere  and  ;)fr- 
suad^re,  is  poetical  or  postclassical,  as  :  Svadibat  asinofiigere.  Plia?dr.  1,  17,  6.— \  erbs 
of  exhortiii"-  are  frequentlv  construed  with  ad  and  a  gerundial :  Sie  ego  vos  ad  liberta- 
tern  recuperandam  vohortdbor  (  =  ut  libertaiem  recuperetis).  Cic.  Phil  4,  5,  11. 


y  ecu  Pi 
Obs.  5. 


The  verba  imperandi  expressing  resolution  and  stipvlntion  are  :   decemere. 
mslituere,  velle  (s-e  R.  %\  Obs.  7),  j)ncisci.  pangere**.  sanclre.  as  :  Decrevtstts  vt 


X  nriiiciDes  iureiurando,  ne  quis  enutitijlret  (qua)  essent  constiiflta)  inter  se  sanxerynt 
hev  pled'W  each  other,  by  stipulation).  Ca>s.  B.  G.  1,  30.— O  n«  plebi  cum  patribus 
sseiit  connubia,  inhumanissimil  \r<rcsanj^H'unt.  Cic.  Rep.  2.  :i7,  6;3.-If  the  construction 


gerundial 
Liv. 


quis  p<in 
li 
(I 

of  the\dause'ir;W*ii\?^Tt  may'take  the  form  of  an  inAnitive  clause  wi^ih  a  gerv 
predicate-infinitive,  as:  Ad  unum  omncs  reguvm  NuiTne  dejereudupi  decerniint. 
1  iH  —i^cernere.  constiiufre,  and  statuere,  are  generally  construed  with  an  object-intini- 
tive  if  the  actions  contained  in  the  clause  are  those  of  the  subjects  of  the  governing 
verbs  as:  LciOnes  decrererunt  senatum  defenders  contra  Antouinm.  Cic.  1  hil.  5,  2.  4. 
— Cirsar  helium  cum  (iertnanis  gerere  consfi'ftdt.  Ca)s.  B.  G.  4,  6.  But  sometimes  even 
in  this  meanin«^  I't-clauses  or  (if  the  construction  of  the  clause  is  passive)  2//./?;**^??;« 
clauses  with  gerundial  predicates  are  used,  as  :  Constit uerajmit  pridie  Idus  Aquliii  mane- 
rem.  Cic.  Att.  Ki,  lO.-Reliquam  ff/a/tm  a  republic^  procul  Aa6e/.(/fl7rt  rfeo/m.  ball  Cat. 
4  _if  these  verbs  are  used  in  the  meaning.'  to  judge',  as  verba  sentiendi.  the  1  hat-clause 
takes  the  form  of  an  infinitive  clause,  as:  In  quo  omnia  mea  panta  e^se  decnvt.  Cic. 
Fam.  2,  6,  Z.—Laudun  sapiential  statuo  esse  maxvnam.  Ib.  5.  13.— II  corKtitvere  means 
'  to  promise ',  it  tak^-s  the  same  construction  m^  pollictri  (with  an  infinitive  clause  in  the 
"^♦^U'^ustin  (Civ.  Dei,  '2,  21'  mentions  the  following  (lost)  passage  of  Cicero-s  second 
bookde  Rep  :  '  V\\\\\x» ]x>ix>scit  ut  luec  ipsa  quiestio  diligeniius  tractaretur  .  But,  since 
Philus  in  the  extant  parts  of  Cic.  Rep.  always  speaks  in  '  direct  discourse  ,  it  is  evident 
that  Au<'u>tin  quotes  onlv  the  s€iuse,*i\\CL  not  the  wording  ol  the  passage. 

**  Pangere  Jias  the  meaning  '  to  stipulate '  only  iu  the  perlect  pepigi,  not  in  the  present 
eystem,  lior  in  the  perfect- form  ^^a/aai. 


1 


COMPLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


597 


590 


TIIAT-CIAUSES. 


periphrastic  future):  Vcilotn  non  amx(ifuii>s<>ni.  in  Tuscuian-im  m^hoiho  re,, fiJr urn  e^6i\ 
L«li():  I  wish  I  had  imt  hound  niis»-lf  lo  T,ii'liu<  10  come  to-Hav  etc  C  ic.  Or,  1,  «>..- 
Co/'. «.YJ /fa  cum  quodam  ho^^pitc,  me  e<,<e  ilium  conc^nturain..  I  cr.  11. c.  1,  •„  i^u. 

Ob^  fi  The  verhi»  of  command,  ami^XrwviX  with  That-c1ansc:«.  arc :  imp'rore.  pmc^- 
pere.  imvsnnf)^}^,  mmulare,  veqntunn  dar.'  (to  <\»''>r-r).7-*//.r;r  /.//r^rf.  /m-<?*.  m'>/-^, 
and  those  of  '  ne'^a'ive'  commanrl  iprohihition) :  i>iter<iic<r>-,  vf'tftr  (Or".  .  >.  1  he  n  <ru- 
lar  construclion  of  these  verbs  is  with  a  dative  of  ''l*"  y«'J^\''V";:'l>i;'""\l{;'^^^  FllliLh  K 
with  ut,  ne  (>U  fu),  or  the  n.e.e  ^uhJunc•IIve  (excepty//W/-e  ami  ^  l^TU^^r,  ^^^^^^^^  a"' 
•aia^e  L'eneraliv  emplt)vin-'  an  ohj.ct-  ntiiniive  in  phice  ol  the  Latin  1  hat-clause,  as 
rfmsui'c^  S);l6'.rcur'..Hbus  im/.r.lrunt  vt  sacerdotes  ejus  ^:u;.i  onn-Is  J-;;"'!"'-'';;;;^: 

scriptum  es.<^f  ne  quid  sine  Sexti  nostri  seiitentia  a-eret.  tic.  Alt.  Ih,  .^.  h.—ni-}>nun>u, 

fminls  moriulls  p?H-unia  <m„'nm>fur.  Hull.  Ju^'.  28.-M.  .£',/.i/i(..  senatus  /'/f/^/'^'^  ''"^ 

t//;  Patuvii.urum  seditiOiirui  comprimeret  (char-ed  with  sni)pre8MUff  ^'t^'-  :  .^-'y,- y*  *  ;~ 

J„frrre  takes  the  peix.n  commanded  as  sub^tanlive  «d.j.'ct  m  llie  arcw^afive   the  ac  t     n 

comm^^^^^^^^^    b<dnL  added  in  the  f..rm  of  an  UO^cl-inn^inre^i  41.     p.  104»  :  C.esar  Jl^l^e- 

tio<  ouDida  vict<fOue,  quos  inceiideranr,   /'tstittiert  jtitfsil.  Cies.  li.  (..  1,^«.      Hit    V'Tds 

Xm;  /elr..  ccu-L  do  nor  take  pergonal  objects  alonj,  with  the  ^nmt-clauses  depem lent 

on  Ihein:  l)Ut  ii.corporat.-  the  pers<.n  to  whom  the  ommand  is  din-cted,    n  the  tlaisc, 

as  :  Omero  edU>ri(ne  pra'tor  u(  wU^ses  die  trieoimo  U'ol  :  eduunt  Mint  «;f^-^'7>-  ^  •<=. 

Vatin    14,  3:i.— Con>ul  eUicere  est  ausus  uf  feiiudis  ad  ve^llluui  redlr.-t.  11).  1  i>.  «.  l«^-  — 

The  same  con.struetioii  often  occurs  with  pnrcipfire  and  pne-criUiy.  nirely  with  impfi- 

rar^^  •  Illiid  pnvdnien<i"m  faiL  nt  dili-entiam  adhiherCmus.  Cir.  Ain.  \U.-Uh-mi>np>ral 

hastas  4''/--  ♦'>i-'^''-^">-  I^iv.l.:^7.-ir  the  person  commind-d  is  V't  "n-nlPme,    a 

passive  Ut-elause  or  passiv..  intinitive  clauMr.is  used  :/../>■  >v/r;     'i'  "'riri  IVo 

iteriterfntKr   Cic  Verr.-.>,3.  W.—^owhnnc  in  vinc.iIa'/'/(7  impnuU-'/  lb.  (at   1, 11.— I  10 

Serapinni-  li'bro  tibi  pnr^-^mf^m  iwruniamsolvi  impenlri.  Ii>.  Att.  •.>.  I.  V\.-/f(i.^  '"''^IH,'!!'"' 

arial  hnperat  fitf-i.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  5, 1.-  A  passive  infinitive  clause  is  the  UMiai  coi.siructn  n 

wi  h  /X^;>Mf  the  p.rson  command.-d  is  not  m-n-ioned.  as  :  Ca;.ar_/>o,,/.m.  qui  crat  ml 

^:^:''c^>;;i;:7W>t//.  Ib,:^.!»,    l^m  sometimes,  -.  ^'^ 'I'lrM^ci^ui-^'a' • 'llS: 

tion  r.mains  aciive.  ami  an  ohj.cfMth.idre  is  used  in  place  of  '^,,  '/:';•,  .^""^;  .^;,;  J  ^,:^. 

du^  end.-m  i.,en>ni:T  rvUUnjnlnt  «pia  nccperis.  Cic.  Brut.  4  -Ca'.-ar  lastia  ^'»";'    >;■ 

q    e  nvi,\v  jM.  ("a-s.  IJ.  (^  •>.  5.     Vel.-.a  sunt  pra'cepta  >apientium.(,n..;'/i^///  te     p.  1 

Sarci%      "ic   Fin.  :i,  2i.-J)uces  barharoinu.  tota  acie  p,OH»ntHir. .m.^.nnd  ne  qui>  ah 

oco  dtcederet.    Ca-s.  li.  (J.  5.  :3..- JuMiti:!  prarli^t  paror.  o.n.nbus.    Cic.   hep.  .1  U^ 

This  con.tructi..n,  except  with  j'//.f/>,  is  ex-remely  rare  in  clas-ua    1  ;<'^^-;(';'V  . /';.'' 
tVm.te^  the  reso!.uion<  of  the  pe..ple  in  a  plebiscite,  IS  either  construed  ^itli  an  ^/-./a^^^^^^^ 

r,  if  the  coustruclh.n  of  the  Th.a-chu.se  \.  pas.ire,  uith  an  '."f'V''\!;,S.  .  '  T\c  V  r" 
tu-^decrOvit  poi)iilu-que  jus.<i/  y// (pla•^tore^  eas  siatuas  demolieiid  is  curarei.t  >  ic  ^ i  . 
'/•/  iT  -lioii,  Onem'  pn/miilixavit  ^r\\eutJ"0?renf  I'hii.ppo  re^M  V- ''A'/'/S-r^  .Va'  iv 
6  -The  sarn^  construction  ^rarely  a  Ne-clause)  is  sometimes  us.d.  ify'//.(/r  fHers  .  y 
om<liUuirvc  ix<:  Hie  til)i\i.  ^.  pfietr.ri)  in  mentem  nou  venil  ^<//.em  '/^^Jm-c  qm.q  le 
Srn.t\'  ibVve  n  idisse  M;ie.  Verr. -2,  4.  P>.-(iui..ctius.y'/^>t/  uf  naves  Kub<vam  pete- 
rent    Liv^•2.^^-^la^oninunti^UUln  est,. sf,/.7^/m7''^^/^^^ 

\\    -^    iii-Xhef  >d  senteutiam  dhat  suam.  Plant.  Am   1,  1.  5(  -(^lod  /,.  •"'■^^V.' 
jus^nud.  Iliri.  IJ.  O.  H,  ^.-JusHt  at  Briiannicus  et  Octavia  m  complexum  patns  pei- 

jjerent.  Tac.  Ann.  H,  :«il^^ -, — 

*  The  vtM-F/WrTlis  verhum  iinperanrii  mostly  occurs  in  the  phrase  lerjnn/erre,  to^ne 

alaw   withmfaconipleti.i-  clause).    But  it  also  occurs  in  the  meant ii;r  Mo  ordain 

wUtu.ut  i.".m,  but  wi'th  an  L-t-dau-e,  as  :  (iuum  hoc  natQra  lulenl  ut  summi  virtQte  et 

auimo  praH-ssent  imbecUlioribus.  Cic.  Hep.  1,  34.  „  v-.^.v .,.;;;,,  tiw. 

Tcahre  takes  Thai-clauses  in  two  ditiVrent  mean.ni,'.  ;  1    as  a  ^-^/^l^^^,^'  f''^!  f ' '"/J\^ 

meanin-  'to  be  on  «me's  «uard  h'st  \  or, '  to  take  care  that,    (see  li.  i'.;>   >•  ^,^  • ;  ,f ., 

verbi.m  im/>^m/*^/i  in  the  meanin- '  to  make  a  provision  in  a  fl'i'i'^'^.f  '='^\/''     -  *;" 

artic      of  sf-pulationinatreatv.     In   both  meaninirs  it  is  construed  with  a  \e-clause. 

or    •  th  an  luSVse  as  :  EpicQru<  test.-.mento  rarU  (onieivd  in  his  testament    dies  natil- 

lis  ^/1  aVei'e.  tir   Cic!  Fin.  2.  31,  KW.-Aiiis  plehiscT.  is  cant.nn  td  (it  was  provided)  m  quis 

tundem  madstratum  intra  decern  annos  capeiet.  Liv.  «.  4v.  ,  •     *  •♦     ir  u 

"l    the  That-claiise  drpeiuh  nt  on  edicere  refers  to  the  actions  of  the  subject  it>e  f,  it 

call.   >       •  cot isid. fed  as  an  imperative  clause,  and  mu^t  take  the  f..rm  <.l  an  i';Htmive- 

clause  with  a  periphrastic  luture.as:  AVui/,  sese  judicium  injur.5rum  uondalurum. 

^^'siSin'tllc'^con-truction  of  the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  :  In  lauturaias  Syra- 

ciisJlnas  deduct  impenintnr.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5  27  (p.  KC).  lOt)).  .  „^p„„ntivo     In 

\ln  this  construction  J//W/y  does  not  take  a  personal  object  in  t[»e  acciiMtne     Ir^ 

I»obt-cla.Hcal  lan-aa-e,  however,  it  soiuetimea  takes  a  personal  object  in  the  dative,  u»  . 


i 


^ 


on.  7.  The  verbs  of  ...a^ir.  -mmjuid  (y^c^ibnio^        inferd^^e^  and  .W«r^.  Int^^ 
dic^re  (.0  issue  an  "OU''y'y>'';   »     iToue  i  u  fatxS^  Mandnbratio  noceat. 

analogous  to  edicft;e.  as:  ^'Jf''^^^^^^^^^  m  amplius  quam  singu  as 

C^..  B.  (J.  5^  •'^•^•-^>;?'l'^;^  ''it'^^ltToLZr^'^  command  with  a  restriction,  in  which 
aiiTs  nosse  hceat.  <-'^- ^." •  .••,.;/  «l  «  in.Te  subiuuctive,  as:  Pra;ci|)it  atque  tiderdmt, 
iusiance  it  is  constnuci  with  ut  or  a  "i^je  subjuucu^c  a  1  ^^^^^^ 

unum  o.nnes;>€/^/-^///  Indutionulrun    ^^;/-.^;  %f  J^    Cic  Kep.  1,  31),  Hit.-  Velare  is  con- 

nt  nni  dicto  fl^^^^^'^  ^:\Zi'\t\Tu^^^^^^^  that  it  occurs  withaNe- 

strued  likej//d/(^/e  ,•  ony  that  It  ^J^  '  V^^  ^^*"; '\"\y,.r  l'^^  ^  A  sin-ulis  le-ionibus  singulos 
clause,  or  a  mere  -;'>>J""J»;^/'^^' "  g^'^^j^'it /-Ra^i^^^^^^^  a^e  coirecta»  velabautnie, 
Icuato.^  aesar  <i^^^<if.^^  '['^'''^l^^^^^  lex,  e^/m  qui  provocasset  virgi3 

^ff^S^rffle';:^'^ 'SS^'uv' lli;-i;:-i^'p-atis  Hippocates  .etat  adiuMre  medecl- 

"^;::^:'^^'^  P^rm..o.  are  ......,^n^^  ^£S^^' 

rer.iamdare  ^imI  the  verbs  ..t..T.  and     «^^^^^^^  ^^,j-,,  j,,  ^he 

struciion  of  cr/n^^.^^r^  y>em    /.r^,   ami  f*^^^^^^^^^^  1^  ^,     replaced  by  an  Ut- 

«hitive,  and  an  object  of  the  ''^"''f  J  ,/■   " '''^^'jr'^^^J;^^^^^^^^^  quantum  vellet  de 

cV«*/..§,<.rhy  a  clause  with  a  mere- ^^^^^^^^  ^.^^j,,^^,  ,^;},  (Bojos)  co/to- 

Ciesennue  bonis  vt  hah.ie(    Uc.  ^  •^^•/;^  «^,,,^     .„ -^..^^ ,,/  partis  facerel  ?  Cic.  Or  2,  90 
nnt.concesnl.  C;es.  1^^^^' "^  '  •  H.^m  V^,///»//;^^^       Att  2  16  3.-Non  commiUam  ut 
tunc  l*»'cresju<l.cetur,qunmhacli'^^^^^^^^^^  Ut-clauses, 

.ame  wav  ' iwtt, date m, Ulcere:  «"^  ^*-.? .       f,f// 'I'^^.^ttin  (/r»c^     anlepOnam.  Cic  Or.  1,6.- 
as:  mhi,^  (tn.hi)  «>anc  r-/*ta/n  '/   eOi    in  a  c  ontc^^^^^  P      ^.  _.pj^^  ^^^rhper- 

lUe  tibi  ,K,(e.tatemjacturu.<v^'iut  e|ii:as  ''';'      j^'^''-,^,  ;,Vvith  an  object-dative,  denoting 
.nittere  is  also  c.n.sti  ned  wnh  an  obje    mi^^^^^  .^  rdre  in  classical  prose, 

the  p.rson  permitted    p.  104,  It.  8-i).  ,/^    f„^''"^^  [^^^       conjecturam  facere  iyennWam.  Cic. 
as:  Jam   ip.-is  j././.<;i^.'/.<  sine  "^;.''l  "r^/ .^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  the  silver  a-e,  as: 

Verr.  2,  5,  9.  But  it  is  the  resrular  <^«>nst  uuion  tut  i  ny  \'^ 2 rermittere  is  also  con^trued 
Xerxes'  Pytlno  que.n  vellet  '^^'^f^;-^-  '  t=^^  n^i  li^^^n^aMow^^ce ',  '  to  le.ive  ', 
with  a  disjunctive  luterrouativc  el;»  ^«  •       »"^  Vz\VaudI.e    Cic.  N.  D.  3,  1,  A.-Peiimsso, 
as:   TiU  pernntfo  r.s,Hj.denveruihx  ]^^l.-;^^^^'tn'^^^  lan^^ua^-e,  is  not  con- 

as-;;ni?mi^d^;;;^;;;;?r^^^ 

sative  of  the  per>on  P'»'»  <  l'^,^/'      ""  ^,^  „,StiXd  as  :  Tu  mesim  illam  vendere.  Plant, 
constniction,  i^M>^'i><''M>^-"'\'''^'\\  "' I'j'^.'^    ,,  "  id  a  vobis  e\  per  solvere. 

Pers.  1.  3,  hk.-Sunte  me,  <iuod  vobis  f ^^'  "/ ,  ^"  ^'^  ":f  P^'' "r  finl^  snos  Helretios  ire  pafi- 
C\c.  Plane.  42,  103.-I).nnii...MX  a  beqnan.^^^  Sw^r  non  «^^^^^^^     lb.  4,  2.-Non  pafiar, 

r  !n  s^;:^.npi;;^;.;!^:c^.  verr  ^^^        i:^'^^i  s:s 

C.  3.  l»s  ^Minnbus  ^,s  ,.jc^^^.  M^^  cc.n;«.«./ani 

pome  manuscripts  ki\  f  \^'-.^^V7>V.  aamits  of  a  diftcrent  interpretation, 
ne  etc. -The  passa-e  tn  l.iv.  42  4,3  h  f j^'^?  ^^^^^^^^^^  /"ai^rr^di,  see  i?.  25.  Obs^  5. 

;  ^::;^;!!^tS;^n;;  S;:;t  "ll^^i^lce^^'constnied  with  ,^6^^..  is  erroneous,  bee 

-S:i=^ii^^^^^^  -  ,fe?5lki;SiS:{^'a^re.ular,  no  vouchers  are  ex- 

'fpermdfere  and  com.nttere  on^j-Hy  hav^a  more  gen^l^m^^ 

verbs  'to  permit',  'to  allow',  ^>g^  '  ^    L^   ..Sidv  "    '  was  ori-inally  ex- 

redderc  iliis  liceret.  Cscs.  B.  G.  1,  -35. 


598 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


(rnrely)  con>=tnicd  with  an  Ut-clmm*,a9:  Illucl  natOra  non  jxifttur  vt  al.urim  Ppo.irs 
no^^tra.i  facnlinie.  an-eilmus.  Cic.  OlV.a,  5,  •>>.-Ne(,.u-  sum...  iicqnt'  R  i.  ro.isiu-t.id.m-ra 
/>r//i,  .//t  opti.uc  incrTnils  .ocios  desm-re-t.  C\es.  H.  (i.  1,  45.--^..y<  ''"%''":,.•;;?.'? 
lie.  only  in  antecla^^ical  .«tyle.  Very  lVfqu<i.tly  it  i^  construed  ^v.t  .  a  mere  -^"  'J'»  '  ' 
but.  it  i.sdoul.tful  wli.ther  tlii;*  eonstruciion  wa.s  ut'ed  iii  cUssical  pr^^et.  It  luopliy 
occurs  tlius  in  tlie  imperative  (dne  -  let,  allow),  as*:  Sine  remat.  let  him  come.  ler. 
Eun.  4,  6,  \.—Sine  id  temput»  veniat  quo  ipsi  juheauius.  Siu.  Iia  :i,  32. 

Ob«*  ♦)  The  r^rha  dedarandi  denoiinu'  the  inanifef^tation  of  emotions,  and  of  friendly  or 
umViendlv  AF-nKCTioNs,  have  their  completin-:  That-clausi-s  in  the  form  ol  a  (^''^'^ff^^'^J^ 
or  of  an  vifiin/ire  chvh-^r,  the  same  as  the  corrtt^pondinj;  class  ot  veri>a  sentieiidi  (/^  Z-% 
Obs  -)  6)  '  Here  hel«>n<'  the  lidlowint:  vcrl.s:  (^neii,  glorUln,  fjratitUni,  (jrati((i<  aqeje, 
nraiiam  ("not  qratias)  nf.rre,  /a>/(la>e,  lepreh^ndere,  rit'fpoare.iinre/xne.  ^mj<\ie^ 
o'jj'trmire,  acciimre.  incumre,  cnmiiuirU  arguere  (to  accuse),  iimvudare  (to accuse  talsci> ), 
aiid  iqno^cere.-Q'uH  and  qloi'idri  take  inllnitive  or  t^iod-daiises.  (Pm^/A/zv.  and  verbs 
of  accusin<'  and  condemninir,  m..stly  take  Qnod-clauses.  rarely  inflniiivc  clauses  (/><^rv- 
ui'im  eaesiTiss^  dawnd/l  s>o>f.  Liv.3(i,31»:  aro^mcif  luMlitufem,  Jraiide  ,p<_n  vt  etc.,  U). 
27  21  •  i/icumi'if,  Mln  ex  Mlis  ,^en,  lb.  31,  1) ;  but  arr/'ure  always,  and  ii^^invthire  j;en.'r- 
ally,  takes  an  inllnitive_claiise._The_other  verba  take  (^uod.daus.-s  only^:    Quentur 

*  The  Dhrasis  facUe pali^Ti^digne i)(ifi,'iulqm  aniinopati,  Ami  »u^^^^ 
note  amotions  or  emotions,  designated  by  the  adverb,  and  are  construed  with  int...it.ve 
clauses  like  vefbs of  emoi ion.  as :  Faci/e patior  id  te  aectisan tein  jam  di u  di'^ie.y^.  I  lane. 
2ti  "  IVnidqm  iKdiehar  animo  fe  a  me  dlqredi.  lb.  Fam.  12.  18.  See  I b.  \  err.  2,  3.  2 ;  Uv.  4, 1». 
t  In  the  |)assa<a!  '  Non  Khxvn  turn  nol.is  deniqne  lyyifOndKint  (C'lc.  \  err.  1,  1>.  54)  foine 
manuscni.ts  liavr  resiHUHK re  and  others  i-t.<jMidtai,L  There  are  no  other  pat-sa<,'e8  in 
classical  prose  vonchiny  lor  this  construction.  ^..  .i  ...u  •♦„„ 

i  Tlur  verbs  querL  and  qloridvL  bein-  neuter  verb?,  not  admittinir  pergonal  substan- 
tive objects,  have  the  nature  of  the  verba  stnfiendi  expressing  emotion,  and  hence  have 
the  same  consiructitm  ju»  these.     The  QMod-clau^es,  dependent  on  them,  have  the  nature 
of-prepositional  Facl-dau.<es  (R.  2<>Uiis.4  ),  which  often  are  used  with  tli<-m  in  then;  com- 
plete form   as-  Non  pudet  pbilosophum  in  eo  qlondri  q>i<nl  luec  non  timet?  Cic.   I  use. 
1   21  4«>     inlinitive  clauses  y/irty  always  be  used  with  them,  but  they  nvtH  hv  used  if 
tile  clause  does  n.)t  express  a  fact,h\xX  a  mere  sentiment,  tti^ :  Lentiiius^v  alterum  ./or« 
Sullam  qlm-idtnr  (not  '  quod. .  '.futurus  .^if).  Cies.  B.  C.  1,  4.-Ncarly  all  t)f  the  other  verba 
mentiolied  take  substantive  objects.    The  clauses  dependent  on  these  verbs  (except  ar- 
nnere)  may  always  be  Quod-clauses,  beins,  likewise,  orii?inal  Fact-clauses:  hrunt  qut  m 
eo  audaciam  ejus  reprehendavt  gmd  etc.  Cic.Verr.  2. 1.  4.   But  arqucre  never,  and  «''^'"'/l* 
/<7;v  rarelv.  takes  Qnod-clauses:  Me  arquit,  Jhvic  dntno  ahse  iiui'np'ti,^se.  I  laut.  Men.  5,  2,_h-v 
—Innnvdant,  hnm:netn  frawinndi  ch'/.^d  dl^ce-^n.^.<e,  Cic  Verr.  2.  2.  21;   but  ln.ninul<irit 
liomdno.-^  quod  Chmridehi  tenT'reut.  Liv.  34,  23.     So  in  nom.  with  inlin. :   Occidi>'.;'e  jmtrem 
Sex.  lioscitis  arquitnr.  lb.  R.  A.  13.  37.-Qnod  auctnr  illTus  injuriie/^/t-sw  nrquetxi  ur.  in. 
Verr  2,  1,  :i3.- C'nwi/*<7H,  likewise,  may  take  an  inlinitive  clause,  as  :  Sed  imlites  ex- 
tnihiremaimvutnte.-^.  L\v.2.:i\.-~Grafuldn  often  occurs  with  infinitive  clauses  in  the 
poets     III  the  passage  ("ic.  Phil.  9, 12.  2S  (Brutus  CicerOni  recujyerafam  fd^rtirtrm  est  gratu- 
latns),  the  i)iira<e  rtanxrdtam  lib*rtattm  may  be  4-iiher  taken  as  an  intinilive  clan-e,  or 
as  a  reversed  participial  phrase,  used  as  a  substantive  object  {alicut  ahquid  gratulait). 
Asid.  from  tins  p  issai^'e,  graluhlri  in  classical  prose,  takes  a  Quod-clause. 

Ttiere  arc  two  or  three  passages  in  which  the  verbs  gmtulCiri  and  Idudare  are  conncctea 
with  Quuni-dauses  (in  which,  however,  the  readintrs  mostly  an-  doubtful  between  quum 
or  quod),  as  :  L.  Ciesar,  '  ()  mi  Cicero  \  inqiiit,  '  gmtulor  tibi  qoton  (the  older  editions  aU 
have  'quod'}  tantum  vales  apud  Dolabeliam  etc'.  Cic.  Fam.  1>,  14,  3.  and  lb.  Att.  14 
17  \  3  This  0»/Mm-clanse  ccmtains  a  verbatim  quotation  ot  L.  Ca-sar  s  colloquial 
remark,  and  hence  cannot  be  used  as  a  voucher  for  a  Ciceronian  construction.— J  e  qui- 
dem.  quum  isto  animo  es,  satis  lundnie  non  possum.  Cic.  Mil.  m,  W.  (Here  quum j;\i- 
deiiily  has  the  force  of  «).-- Jam  id  ipsum  consul  laudare  quum  initiStam  se  non  intiMa- 
rCtur  Liv  3«)  12.  On  these  three  passai^es  rests  the  theory  of  some  Liiirlisli  gramma- 
rians (see  R  2:j.  Obs.  5,  foot-noie)  that  (dl  rerbs  of  emotion  (including  gaudvie  etc.)  may 
be  construed  with  Ouum-dauses  with  the  force  of  Quod-clauses.  But  the  llrst  two  pas- 
sa<'es  evident  Iv  prove  noiliing,  and  the  third  j.assa^e  must  be  consideiedasa  Patavinity  , 
the  construction  being  so  aiiOmaU.us  that  it  cannot  furnish  any  pioof  for  a  receiveil 
nsa.'e  (.f  classical  Latinitv.  Much  less  can  it,  by  sell-made  examples,  be  extended  to 
'alfverbs  of  emotion' .  —  Verbs  of  ruAisisu  and  cknsuuino.  if  the  clause  contains  an 
'individual  nawn'  for  the  praise  or  censure,  are  sometimes  connected  with  cnu.<ia 
clauses  introduced  by  quoniam.  or  quia,  as:  Utrumque  sane  laudTmv».  quoniatn  i)er 
illus  ne  ha^c  qui.iem  gene.a  latule  curuerunt.  Cic.  BiMit.  :}0,  11«.— Hiec  lamilia  reprehendtt 
me,  quia  non  semper  quieverim.  lb.  Att.  2.  1(5,  3. -Sometimes-  Si-dau,-^es,  dependent  on 
this  class  of  verbs.  i//c///(/<?  a  Quod-tlausc,  but  so  that  the  fact  is  designated  as  uncer- 
tain, as  :  Ignot^ce  si  ejus  viri  auctorittTti  rex  Dejotarus  ceesit.  Cic.  Dej.  4,  12. 


COMrLETING  TIIAT-CLAUSES. 


599 


q.o<l  anobis,K.em  -1- ;^i^-  PJ^^  f^ l^^^^J^i'i^n^^J^^a^k^^^ 
qn<xi  sit    <l^,^t..Qtus  ^''^^fi^^^^^^^^^^^^^  in  vest. um  coi.spectum 

eorum  popnlarentur.  lb.  1,  •"•    ,;;'"V  fiberta^        equitis  KomSni  se  ferre  non  po.se.^  lb. 
T,nix,<e.  Cic.  ^err.  2.  1.58.-^'/^/^/^'^''^  "»^^''\'  Horten-ium  QUod  numqnam  btdlo  civTli 

Plane,  in,  3.3.--3/.miya  {//'.''^'^'Y**'^  i^pu '^^^^^^^  ^'"^  "'^"  "^"'^"'""  """^f- 

interfuisset.  lb.  Fam.  2,  lb.  3— L.  ^.P^'  PP"%y  jVi.  i   17  m  ^Gtatuld'i  pr  mum  senatui 
Wm  esse  omnia  q.ue  haberentur  amp  issmm    lb  Ofl.  2   1  ,^  ^^^^^  ^^.^,, 

sunt  quod  >cipn.  prospere  re>  in  Aj";^,^f ^' '^^,.^.r°um  est  in  cos  qui  contra  pugnart  nt, 
nissam  regera  fecisset    L>v.30, 1  ..-r^^od  am^^^^  est,^ar/do.  Cic.  K.  A.  47, 

n.,n  debeo  7epre<endere ;  ^ ''''fy'V'J''^^^^^^^^  lb.  Fam.  7, 

SfT^^Ctim^SminellSt»^^ 
;,^}J-junrp;>vinci,e  n.ntaris,  id   r.;^^^^^^^^^ 

Sl^'^l^'lSrSeiS":::::  i  ".^^i!  7!^!^^^  P-tem  ducerentur,sibi  quu^rendum 
puiarent.  Cajs.  B.  G.  1,  4U.  ^    ,      ^     •       •,• 

3.   Verba  facienai. 
7?  9=^   \>rbs  denotiii-  a  '  doing  '  may  be  construed  with  Tliat-clauses 

^:^:TZ^^W^t^M    Verbs 'of  doing  implying  ;.^a^^ «.- 
nrJc()i  struL^d  \vith  claiises  introduced  by  ne,  quominuH,ov  quit  (OBh.  o) 
'^rr;^h'of(po.tive)  doing  cmnpri.^ 

T^^'^^a^^l  "^^-  '"omeVrt^'etrbs  ^rVilso  construed  with  object-inhniuves, 
Snd  a\ery  few,  with  infinitive  clauses.  ^,,^^^„.^.„^    ^re-  oqifare  and  its  com- 

OBS.  2.  The  verbs  denoting  i^'T^^T^^f  ,^"^J  J.'^^^^J^Jlt.XcO  flV^>^^^^^  ^'M'e  (in  the 
pound  cor/i^7/v  (to  revolve  in  <>;;,-.^"j"'V  .Sr^  ,  a"  a  i  >^/S^/«/-..  labordre  and 
meaning- 'to  desjgn  ),  "i'^'^'l'  '  ''^J^^^^  shape  one's  acts 

daUrrme,  7nfi,  admtt  and  ^  '  '),'''^''[,'- f 'Jj^''^^  4;  3^,-,,  promc^fe.  spectdre  and  ex^nc 
towa.ds  an  aim  '),  ^•''^*^r^/;^^^,.^;,,tL»i'!5  habirequam  to  take  the  first  .>ppo_rtunity  for 
tare  (K.  23.  0B.^^8j,^.m,  ,  ;u^^^^^^  ^  ^^v^o^^^mu!}!^]!^^^^ 

an  action),  mr'rr^^jmd_tiu^\^i^njJL^>'' ii_n__^^^^^^^ 

--^G^icirirrererre  may  be  followed  by  an  f  ^f  J  ;;%^,?^^?,;re  t  o  ^m^ia,  as :  Quoniam 
objed,  but  x\M'.  quality  "f  ^^e  thanks,  be  ng  a    a^^^^^^  Cjes.B.  0^1,35. 

h.inc  populo  H<''"a..o7r«/i«//*  r.r^T^^M''^  "  *^^^  ,„^^,5     ration  egit,  non  libeia- 

V.!i  lnS:Xi  r  ^^  t?C  Z^^nm^i>^.  cL  Fam.  13,  ^.    Here  a  verbum  dicend: 

stuct^orc:t^-nieofthem(./.^.,.^^ 

:i:2^.r^^Sen^t!;;^a";mS  ^^:^!::^^^^^,  although  these  may  be  mental,  as  in 

mostly  ha;  the  negative  meaning  ^^.^y^r^gi'^l;  in^'^^onstnied  with«.(not with 
inir  it  belon«'s  t<.  the  verbs  with  negat  ve  a"P  .<5^,^';;/J- "  " -^ic  Fam   3,  U.-Carendurfi 

est  ne  extra  m..dum  pr«>deas.  lb  Off.  1,  .^>.  14^  '"  essedariis  decipiaris  caveto.  Cic. 
rendum-  Ciesar  exist imilbat  Cics.  B.  <V,,  \;^;~:y^,,K\,,,,ctive  as  a  circumlocution  of  a 
Fam  7,  i).-Carlre  frequently  occurs  w^^»\a  "vere  snbjnnc^^^  exi^fime^,  do  not 

an  Ut-dause.  Only  in  this  n^^-aning  it  belongs  to  the  ua.^  o  ^^^  ^Cavearnus  nt 

eical  language. the  on  y  P^.^lr'aiin  '  is  S^  Compare:  Cant  f 

^^^^:^  ^S  ^^^39,  i     C^t^r  T^l^^ro.  'sulcos  aquarios  faciamus.  Co..  2, 8. 


GOO 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


dere.dimic'ire.  fendere).  Some  of  those  verbi*  admit  the  con!»trnction  with  an  ohjcct- 
iiiiiiiitivi?  {'<fn(if^re,  cofiitdrf.  aninntin.  inditcert,  m-oTin,  tiitt),  which  is  the  rejiular  C()i)>truc- 
ti(»n  of  fttudere*  and  tw/ildrff.  A  fuw  others  take  aii  objeci-inliniiive  in  poetry  and 
po>t -classical  laniriiairc. 

ExAMPLKs  :  Af/itdlum  in  nrbe  ah  tribflnir*  ploblo  ?//  tribflni  militnm  consnlari  potee- 
tjlte  cican-ntnr  [Th*-  fchmie  ofelectwff  etr.  qvan  ar/ifafed).  Liv.  4.  30.— Illud  i)()tinB  ar/fn- 
dam  Kit  cor/it anduin  eiit  ne  qniVocii  apopnlo  Koiurmo  d<'sci!»cant.  Liv.  24.  4r>. — Inltrllig»Te 
HO  (li.Kit.  iioii  ill  nrji  ut.  ve;iim  inveiiircttir  {tlia*  thi'  infention  wa^  uof,  to  find  the  truth), 
fed  >it  ahquid  Jal;?i  dicere  coirciCmr.  Cie.  CMn.  r.:i,  177.— Ille  iiilellexit,  id  Ufji  atqiie  id 
jmrtlriX  id  filia;  husb  vis  nttVrrCtur.  lb.  Verr.  2,  1,  2(>.  — Itaqnt;  i(t  idem  omnrs  ptiitiant 
sumniil  vi  (t'jetidnin  f>fxe.  Liv.  24,  2a.— Pater  potnit  a/tini'/tn  itidurere  nt  natQram  ipsam 
vi!icTr»'t.  C'ic.  K.  .\.  1!>.  53.— C^nuni  senfttii»;  ternptrmt  (tfiitjlnt)  po^^t  Komuli  execssuni, 
ut  ipso  <,'oreret  sine  r»'<;e  reiupublicam.  lb.  Hep.  2,  12,  2J. — Eqiiidein  i/f  lioiiOro  ditrnus 
esseni.  maxinie  semper  /«^/ylrt.  lb.  Plane.  21).  50.— Id  rnonrl  ei>8  «tque  stniero§  lit 
Syracflsie  in  ditiOne  ItomanOrnm  siiit.  Liv.  24,  23.— (^ni  stadium  enrrit,  iiiti  at  cottten- 
dtrt\\  debot ;//  vineat.  C'ie.  Otr.  3,  10. — Kidter*'  por  amiios  at  scida  lie  qtni  dcpereat.  lb, 
Att,.  1.20,  7.— Se  adinsflros  ut  bene  cninuiiliam  ^.'ratiam  referant.  Liv.  24,  4s. — Dernus 
mod»)  oiifvatii  ne  (inori)  tarn  necess^e  nobis  sit  quaiu  Catoni  fait.  Cic.  Fam.  9,  is,  2. — 
Moderdlior  ipse  nt  vulear  lortuito  in  serniOnem  veslrijin  ineidisse.  H).  Or.  1,24,  lll^— Me 
spectas^e  semper  at  til)i  possem  qnam  maxime  esse  conjiinctns.  lb.  Fam.  .5, 8, 3. — 
Mentes  iiominum  nefarisc  ne  voi)is  nocere  pc.sseiit,  ejjo  prorldi.  11).  Cat.  3,  11,27. — Pro- 
f'Picite.  jiidices.  id  jjlns  apiid  vos  preces  viriiinis  Vt'stfilis  qnam  mime  (JallOrum  valuisse 
vidtantiir.  lb.  Foiitej.  21.  49.— Scrviiis  Tullius  O'/A/ri/  ne  i)lurimiim  valeant  pliirimi.  lb. 
Kej).  2.  22,  39. — Xi/iU  (udiqaiiis  h(d>iii  quani  vt  Paiisam  eonvonlrem.  11).  Fam.  11,5. — 
Pugna  ut  tecum  et  cum  meis  mihi  licoat  viverc.  lb.  .\tt.  3,  22,  2.— Omni  contentiOne 
pur/ndfiun  eM  ut  Ii«  hjec  capitis  :estimarCtur.  lb.  Clu.  41,  IP;.— (^iios  ut  incolnmls  coiiser- 
vilre  posslmus.  omni  ratiOne  erit  dlmicanduin.  lb.  Div.  Ciec,  22,  72. 

Ob9.  3.  Tlic  verba  efficiendi.  dcnotinj]:  the  'brinj^ini:  about'  of  an  effect,  are:  1)  the 
general  verb»  efflcere^,  fucere**,  jyrticere,  pm.<ftdre,  rem  eo  deducere  ;  2)  verbs  denotitiij 

*  iStudere  is  rarely  construed  witii  an  Ut-clause,  as:  Doeet  omnibus  modis  huic  rei 
studtnduin  ut  pai)ulaii0iie  KomSni  pr()lnl)cantur.  Cies.  B.  G.  7, 14. — Caesar  studT:bat  itt 
Jianc  partem  oppidi  ab  reliquil  parte  urbis  excluderer.  Bell.  Alex.l. — Studtre  is  most 
frcquoiitly  construed  with  an  objcct-inliiiitive :  Studemua  tutiGr"m  vitam  hoininum  red- 
deie.  C\c.liv[).  I, '2.— Fit-ri'sfudi't/am  ejus  protleiitiil  dociii)r.  lb.  Am.  1.1. — Sometimes 
aiudtre  is  ctnistrucd  witli  'tntiniiife  dauseti,  as:  Si  quisquam  est  qui  plactve  xe  ftudet 
quain  plurimis.  Ter.  Kun.  prol.  1. — Pompejus  rem  ad  arma  df'duci  itintef^uf.  Cjps.  B.  C. 
1,  4.— Orator  ille. .  .illis  gratiim  se  videii  studet.  Cic.  Off.  2, 20,  70.— Qui  sei<e  student  pne- 
itJre  ceteris  animalibus.  Sail  Cat.  1, 1. 

t  Krheredilre  \ni\vi  iiVinm  cor/it'ihat.  Cic.  K.  A.  19,  .53. 

:}:  ParCire  i^enerally  takes  a  s>iljst,vdlve  object;  more  rarely  it  is  construed  with  an  oh- 
jcct-infiniiive.    The  coiisiructiou  with  Ui-clauses  is  very  rare,  and  mostly  anteclassicaK 

§  Struere.  without  tlie  addition  of  s^uch  verhs  as  moTlri,  does  not  occur  with  L't-clauses. 

B  Tlie  ct)nstrtiction  of  the  simple  verl)  tendere  (in  tiie  meaning  of  its  compound  con- 
tendi-re,  with  ut,  or  iie,  is  ran;,  as:  Tril)iliii  plel)is  tribunOruiu  militum  ut  habeanlur 
comitia,  tenduut.  Liv.  4.  7.  See  lb.  :i8,  45.  Tlie  construction  oi  ttndtie  with  an  objecL- 
inlinitive  is  poetical  and  i)ost-classical. 

^  Efficere  is  often  used  in  the  meanins:  ''to prove  (to  make  out)',  mostly  in  the  passive 
impersonal  form  ' t-Jfiritur''  =  it  is  proved,  it  follows  (as  a  loL'ical  consequence).  In  this 
meanim;,  «fficere  is  either  treated  as  a  rtrftum  dfclaratidi.  and  construed  wiiii  an  infini- 
tive clause,  or  as  a  verbum  tfficifndi.  beinjj  construed  with  an  I't-claufe.  as:  Diciearchua 
vult  efficere  animo>i  esse  mortuti-i.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,31. — Mors  vt  malum  non  sit,  effieies  (  = 
Yourdiscussion  will  have  the  elTect  that  death  is  not  considered  an  evil).  lb.  1,8.  Seo 
It.  27.  Obs.  1. 

**  Fdcert  lias  different  c<mstrnctions  accordini;  to  its  different  mc.aninijs  :  1)  With  a 
participle  as  factitive  predicate  (p.  101.  Ji.  74,  A.),  it  has  tlie  meaninj:  Mo  intnxluct!  iu 
discourse',  as  :  Xvx\o\)hon  facit  Socratcrn  dixputantem,  formam  dei  qniHri  non  oportCre ; 
Xenopborj  introduces  So(Tates  who  asserts  (makes  Socrates  assert)  that  the  form  of  tho 
Deity  should  not  l)e  investiijated.  Cic.  N.  I).  1, 12,  31.  Karely  in  place  of  tlie  participU*, 
an  object-irifinitive  (accordiufj  to  the  construction  of  ju/>ere)  is  used,  as  :  PolypliCMUim 
Homgrus  cmn  ariete  colloquentem /ari/,  tjiisque  lauddre  fortflnam.  11).  Tusc.  5,  39. — 
2)  lu  tho  meaninj; '  to  represenf  it  takes  a  transitive  object  alon<?  with  an  object-infini- 
tive (Vikoju/jere),  or  an  infinitive  clause  (if  tlie  infinitive  is  i)assive).  as  :  Si  timuigse  eos 
fads  qui  disccssorunt  ;  If  you  represent  those  that  have  j^one  as  havinj;  been  afraid  (as 
coward>).  Cic.  l)oni.4,  10.— Poetje  imprndtre  apud  inleros  saxum  Tantalo  faciunt.  lb. 
Tusc.  4, 1(5,  35. — Plato  con^trui  a  deo  atque  feditiruri  mundum/«d.'.  lb.  N.  D.  1,  8. 19. — 
Isocratem  Plato  adiunabiliter  in  Phiedro  lauddri  facit  a  Socrate.  lb.  O.  G,  O.  6, 17.— 


COMrLETING   THAT-CLAUSES. 


601 


an  effect  iii  the  interegt  of  the  doer:  impetrdre,  obtinere  (tenere),  amqui,  conftcquL  adi- 
]n«ct  ;  3)  the  verbs  denoting  an  effect  obtained  after  a  previous  stiug<de  •  vincere  ver- 
vxncere  evincere,  expugndre.  The  Tliat-clauses  dependent  on  these  verT)8  take  the'lorm 
P'  "'•' •  "''^''  "^"  ('>'f.''"i^'('Lv)  of  a  No-clause*.      Sometimes,  in  poetry,   an   object- 

innnitive  or  a  m<  re  sul>junctive  is  used  in  place  of  an  Ut-clanse.  It  is  frequently  reuuo-- 
naiit  to  tlie  English  idiom  to  connect  That-clausos  with  the  regular  equivalents  of  these 
v^-bs,  so  that  the  construction  must  be  variously  recast : 

Ex.  Faclam  id  intelligatis  quid  error  aftiuxerit  ;  1  will  make  you  understand  (make  it 
clear  to  you)  wliat  has  lieen  added  l)y  error.  Cic.  Clu.  4,9.-Gennani  jumenta  quotidiana 
exercitjUiGno  siimmi  ul  suit  la»)Oris  ejiciunt  (make  their  horses  able  to  bear  the  severest 
labor).  C;esB.  G.  4,2.— lliec  stultitia /oc-i^  (has  the  effect)  ut  hoc  stultissimum  facinus 
»'ai)ienter  factum  esse  vuleStur.  Cic.  Kab.  Post.  9,24.— /^«d^m  ut  aut  vivo  mihi  aut 
niortuogratia.s  agas  (I  will  Dring  it  to  pass  that  you  shall  thank  me  etc.).  Cies.  B  C 
3.91.-S0I  ejicit  ut  omtna  llor(;ant.  (Mc.  X.  D.  2, 15. 41. -Satis  id  est  magnnm  quod  potest 
pra^'tme  ut  ea  causu  molior  et  pnostaliilior  esse  videitur  (tliat  he  can  inake  tliat  cause  to 
.7/v^rt/'  better  etc.).  lb.  Or.  1.  W.AL-Pem  hue  deduxi  ut  palam  puguSre  mssefis  quum 
etc.  a.  liave  made  it  ivmit^le  for  you  to  contend  etc.).  lb.  Cat.2,  i.  4.-Attamen  le^-re 
reteiitis  Domitianis  niilitU)us  est  factum  ne  prwlio  contenderCtur.  (Bv  restrainin<r  The 
Eoldiers,  a  battle  aw  prevented.)  C:es.  B.  C.3,37.-Ejus  belli  fama  efedt  ne  se  pu^^njE 
committerent  Salpinjltes  (prevented  the  Salpinians  from  etc.).  Uv.'5.S2.—Efflciun7ne 

nnii     infer  tin  v'Stiim  <•!  iiiarr;^ti..1f  11.,..  .i;»)-..„.^»   ,  .1 ..i»-,  .■ ..  .Y.  ,i  .1  •  -..^  ■^  _ 


quid  inter  privatum  et  magistiatum  dilVerat  (they  effect  that  there  is  no  difference,  =  efface 

1,43.  67.— MunitiOnes  efficilbard   lie  quem  locum  nostri  intrare 


*  u  jjeitnce),  i^ic.  Kep.  .,,,  ^..  .^.»,...,.^.1* »-  rj/n.t-rt'u«t  /m;  uut-iu  lueuiu  iiumti  inirare 
\.o^^ytiM(}rrevent€d  our  soldiersy/wn.)  Cies.  B.  C.  ;i,  44.-^^^  irascdmur  pr(Estaljimus  :  we 
wi  I  succeed  in  suppressing  our  anger.  Sen.  Ira.  3,  .5.-An  etiam  prceMdre\>oU\\.  necubi 
rclitescerenl  latrnnes  //f  quid  sarcinHrum  raperetur,  ne  quis  vulnerargtnr  ?  Liv.  3S,  49  - 
JJux  Gaiiurum  ?//i  eildem  deditiOnis  cuditionc  nteretur,  a  Crasso  t/w;>e)'n7d^  (obtained 
from  Crassus  the  same  conditions  in  regard  to  his  capitulation).  Cjes.  B.  G  3  23  — Galli 
legAtosad  Ca'Mirem  dededitione  mittunt  et  vt  conservarentur  iw;>€/7Wi<  (succeeded  in 
eecuring  their  lives  and  liberty).  lb.  2. 12.— Verum  si  a  Chrysogono  non  immtidmus  ut 
pec  11  nia  nostra  contentus  nt.  vitam  ne  petat ;  It  we  cannot  make  Chrysogonos  be  con- 
ttrded  with  our  money,  lot  him  (at  least)  not  claim  our  life.  Cic.  14.  A.  52, 1.50  —Wmadenti 
eMi.'^  ne  quem  civem  metueretis  ;  You  have  obtained  the  advantage  of  not  fearing  any  citi- 
zen, lb.  Mil  13,34.— Quid  a.NW7>/i/w/"  nisi  ?//aieiit  qui  in  agris .reman serunt?  what  does 
he  gaining  It  except  rAa/ etc.  y  11).  Verr.  2.3,  55.-Antiochus  facile  obtiauit  vt  Cbalcidis 
yon»i^\h\apeinrentur  H'.ii^\]y  snccteded  in  Aadn^  the  gates  opened  \o\\mq).  Liv  ;i5  51.— 
JVlarcelius  /r/i^/2?  (  =  ofjtinuit)  ne  irrito  incepto  abirgtur.  Liv.  24.  V^.—  yictrunt  tribQni  ut 
legem  perferrent(cw?7?/^/f(/  the  right  of  proposing  the  law).  Liv.4,  2.5.— Patres  summa 
ope  fric-e/vz/i/ut  I-  urius  Camillus  crearetur  ;  The  Patricians,  after  a  hard  contest,  cairied 
the  election  of  t  uriusCainilliis.  Liv.  5,  m.-Pervic?rwitinbQm  ut  Quinctius  de  hello  ad 
Rarely/V/revv  has  the  meaning  of  cogere,  in  which  inelance  it  has  t h e  corTstrucTi on  of  th i s 
verb  (With  an  accusative,  along  with  an  object-infinitive)  :  Facio  me  alias  res  agere.  ne 
convicium  Platonis  aiidiam  ;  I  compel  myself  to  do  someihin<r  else,  in  order  not  to  hear 
liatos  reproaches.  Cic.  Fam.  1.5,  18.^4)  In  the  Imperative  it  often  means  '  sujmose\ 
requiring  an  infinitive  clause,  as:  Faconinh  amicissimos  Foniejo/'wi.w;  Suppose  all 
bad  been  most  intimate  with  Fontfjus.  Cic.  Font.  2.:i.—Fac  (te)  potuisse.  fb.  Phil  2  3  — 
^acanimas  non  reman^re  post  mortem.  lb.  Tusc.  1.  34.— >'ac,  qui  ego  sum,  es.'^e  te.  II).  Fam 
''  rTo!.  ,'?'"  .  consiruction  of  fa/xre  as  an  .abstract  verb  with  a  Predicate  clause 
eee  /.    .30.   l-or  the  construction  of far^ re  with  substantive  Quod-clau.'ie^  see  P.iHi,  Obs  2 

*  Ihe  veilis  ;ff/'^r^  and  ^^/firere,  if  construed  with  Xe-clau.^e.'i  (see  the  examples  in  the 
text),  assume  the  force  of  ttie  negative  verbs  of  doin<r  {im}mnre  etc.,  see  Obs.  5).  Unless 
these  verbs  have  this  force  (the  aim  of  the  action  beinir  necrative).  a  negation  in  the 
l.iat-clause  is  not  expressed  by  ne,  but  bv  non.  alter  ///,  as  :  Splendor  vest  er /V/W/  ut 
pecc.ue  sine  suinmo  poriculo  non  possltis.  Cic.  Verr.  2. 1,8  (  =  Your  i)rominent  position 
has  the  effoct  that  if  you  taller  in  your  duty,  the  republic  is  in  the  utmost  danger).  Hence 
if  efficere  ut  has  the  meaning  '  to  prove  that\  the  That-clause,  if  negative,  is  introduced 
hy  ut  non  (See  Cic.  Tusc.  1. 8,  quoted  above).  Sometimes  a  clause  with  ne,  and  a  clause 
witti  vt  non  are  coordinated,  to  present  proirnantly  two^  different  meaning's  of  the 
povprnir.g  verb:  Ex  hoc  effiritur.  non  ut  volupta^.»  ne  sit  volnptas.  sed  ut  volnpias  non  sit 
sumnium  l)onum  ;  From  this  it  follows,  not  that  we  can  decree  pleasure  to  be  no  pleasure 
(make  pleasure  be  no  i)leasiire),  but  that  pleasure  is  not  the  greatest  good.  Cic.  Fin.  2,  8 

boinetiiues  a  clause  introduced  by  guominus  is  used,  in  place  of  a  Ne-clause,  to  impart 
to  the  verbs/ac.'/y  and  efficere  the  meaning  of  a  verbum  prohibendi.  as  :  Quominus  dis- 
eessioflerot,  peradversarios  Xwo^  factum  e.^t ,-  Ymir  adversaries  hindered  the  takinf'  of 
a  vole.Cic.  Fam.  1,4,  2.— Nihil  censoria  animadvcrsio  efecit  quominus  reirimen  renim 
ex  noiatft  domo  peteretiir;  The  censorian  mark  did  not  hinder  the  tenderiu"  of  the 
highest  power  to  tho  disgraced  family.  Liv.  4, 3L  This  construction,  however,  belon<'a 
more  to  the  silver  age,  and  is  not  frequent  in  classical  style.  ^ 


602 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


would  Im^eJo'fU  It  out  tiiai  indtarp,  adducere,^ 

a  transitive  ac(nsan%e.     in^-  ^^,1,5511«  promi*^i  tni  /^'^;,;^;  xf,.t,n)ont()  RonftinS 
EnXh  objcct-inftnit'vcs    as  .   bv^^ci  .,^^^^^.^jj,^     "'\''" "  uvider  nt.  Liv.25,11. 

am  indued  t..  remind  yo»);, ^?^;  Jo    a^Mo)  »o<^t«  •^'^'-^''^'f '"  "     the  .4rden  l.iinsrlO. 

nvarilia,  alios  >r 'C   ad.a  7/M  v  ^^^.^  ^^^  ,^^^  *^':^^'^v  n.reu  nr  Vi"''*.  1^-  <^'-  ^'  ^-'"^^^J 

nuntium.  lb.  24. 31.  ^  kkoative  aim,  if  con;:trucd  n    h  1    «   c       ^^^^ 


^t     •UcTwViler.so.netinv.s  ^>' ^\  ^^S  n:;:Vx,)ressinR  both  ^^^^^^^^  jbrmer 

§  /niem^/^r'',  Hltl''»;!-i'  •V'*  W  ori.'uially  means  'to  ,^'«''''^i  .^"  ,^  ',>iiriuni  sit  ;  They 
^idered  as  a  ivrbum  dicendi  ^  "  I  -  '  ,.;„io  pacis  belllqnc  !»'>  ''•»'"  *^' '?  '  .^ce  and  war 
ai.  Nihil  iA/^em-c/i7''<>''"'''^''\''Vufee  act l-n  of  the  Samnites  "^  /*»  l^'-l''y„^^,r,,ier« 
wcmld  in  v.o  sm\s  inl^-rjerf  wi'l»      )  j';,^^';    ,-,,^^  decvnon  of  ♦•^•\,^:'\„^\rn,u.'es,  inter- 

Ui  e  i  ly  ••    le^t  the  •^•«''»r''^,i  tf.   e  K  man  m'i^'i~t'''^«^-.  •'«PrV'''  ?' I     In       s  connec- 
rmosilyusc.l  of  t»i':  r^^.^  ^^hu-h       c  K  .  m  ^^^  political  'r*'^,^^V„Vi     eci>i<»«'  t»»«3 

po"e  al''»inst  tl.e  «'^-^'r'^^^;!^''  ,'///;,/!  e  of  the  person  a^"""-,'  ^  •^,,.';  he  decis-ou 
K  \at:rcedere  '^eo..^^-;',^:^^huse1n  trod  need  ^>y.^;;7;;r '  ^^  H;:"  pn.nuntiaviL 
veto  is  »''t«'P''f,d;,.    V,     IS  n.preset.ted  as  a  '''''t-,?.^f(tan  iMttui.  the  tribunes  would 

Vin  2  1-  Cies.  B.  (i.2..il).     ^^^;?"  *    i-*-  MhWnii  dfprecans  (-non  r»-  _some- 

^'";n;Anied  with  ^;^'^  «l^Xl^^i^'^iviuus  it-nm  in  se  ^^v^^    L -^^    ^,^  ,,.^ 

that  man  from  coniiuuiii„  «^ 


COMPLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


603 


their  own  interest:  i^if^rn^riniere,  {nbi)fewiyfrare,  (sibi)  hnperare,abshnPreJenere.rettn^.' 
re  •  4)  verbs  of  delaying  and  omitting:  ^/^/ft/r^,  7/un-an,  moram  interimmy,  exsiiectarfi. 
cmctdH  (diibifar€)*.sibi  deesse,  pnztermitUre  ;  5)  verbs  of  avoiding  :  mtare^setnpere, 
carJ/-?  (SVC  (ms  2,  and  p.  -VJO,  rool.uotet).-All  these  classes  of  verbs  admit  the  coustiuc- 
S  r«i.irT  mtldaSses,  to  ekpress  the  action  which  is  .aid  to  be  prevented  res.>ted, 
dela^^Hi  or  avoided.  The  En-iish  language  seldom  allows  the  use  of  such  T  u.t-c lauses, 
so  that  often  the  Latin  con.Mruction  must  be  variou-ly  recast.  The  Latin  1  hat-clauses 
n-ed  with  these  verbs,  are  introduced  i)y  guominvs,  ne.  or  qmn.  Quin  can  only  be  used 
if  (he  norerning  i>rb  is  qualified  by  another  negation,  or  by  an  expression  equivalent  to 
a  ne  Xon  as  rJ,  ingre,  or  the  form  of  a  question).  Q.imiinm  occurs  both  when 
Vhe  v^erb  is  connected  with  a  ne-aiion,  and  when  it  is  not.  Ae?  is  very  rarely  used  if  the 
«'overninff  verb  is  Qualitied  by  a  nejiaiion.  _  ,  ,  -,  o 
"  The  i"f  o  Ithese^hree  conjunctions  is  thus  defined:  The  first  cla-8  (verbs  of  hinder- 
ING)  takes  either  quominux  or  ne  (very  rar.-ly  quin\).  The  second  class  t'lkes  either  5|vo. 
minu.^  or  quin,  i^v  ne.  The  third  and  fourth  classes  (verbs  of  rkstuainino  and  delat- 
ing) \\x\iii  aninX  {Min-y  nw^tXy  quominu^i,  a^x^\  never  ne),  the  governing  verb  always  re- 
mri.rtoL  qualified  by  a  nk-ation.  '  Without  a  nepUiou  these  verus  do  not  admit 
Thii-claitse^  The  filth  class  (verbs  of  avoiding)  takes  ««  (nvxevqninur  qnotinnu^}. 
Several  of  tlic  verbs  belonging  here,  may  take  the  construction  with  an  object-intiniin-e 
(without  a  negation)  in  place  of  a  That-clause  with  qnosninus,  or  guin\. 

•  The  construction  with  qnin  of  nan  duhitare  and  nan  cvnctari,  mentioned  p.  589, 
Obs  3  belono-s  to  the  rule  referring  to  this  fourth  class  of  verbs. 

■^'0»llTc^nv^^\\vv  ^mnimptihre'uy  Auct.  ller.:j,  1, 1  :  A-^  quid  impeduire  quin . . , 
nrogX-  i  m?sJ?  I  Cic.  Att.  4,2, 6  the  vulgate  reading  has:  Nulla  re  iinpedirer  q^nn.^i 
ITSi  mild  int.irrum  es.et.  But  the  codices  read  quod  n.  ovquod  ne  .u  or  quod  m^, 
which  readings  make  no  sense.  Omn  is  a  mere  conjecture,.  It  is  more  probable  that 
Cicero  ^vrote7;i^/.v^^^  jm^Yntrere  is  found  with  quin  in  the  following  passages  : 

HaiinonequVi'terd 

Liv.26.40.-Nequediomuesid  pwhiOtburU  quin  sic  laciam  "'»  <-«''^«'tiu.  Piaiit.  Am.  4 
.3  17  So  lb  Merc.  .5.  4,  01.— Some  grammarians  (for  instance  Publ.  Sch  Gr..p.  H-y^^)  Umf^^ 
liuVtran-tl.e  difference  between  ne,  quonunu.,  ai.'l  quin  :  Xon  pwhibui  n^  tret.  I  did  not 
torbid  him  to  «'o  •  quominus  iref,  I  did  not  by  prohibition  imj)ede  his  going ;  qum  iret,  I 
d  1  not  b  '  pn:idl  ifion  prevent  his  going  the  did  go).  The.e  d.lVerences  are  unfounded 
'\U>/^.V.Su»«  ire/ ''will  hardly  ever  be  found  in  classical  prose.  The  expressions 
x^^q  'miZaonot  imply  the  idea  of  the  English  word  ;  prohibition ',  ^vhich  is  d  s- 
tii.c  Iv  s(H:n  bv  the  o  is-a-e;  quoted.  Moreover,  quonvnus  is  used  in  almost  all  the  pas- 
la.'s-quoted  with  t he  ide-'a  tlmt  the  action  was  really  prevented.     The  cunstructiou with 

^''^'Wiel^ndni^^Ms'^hhule^^^^  Bclf  in  o.ie's  own  interest,  or  a  hindering  of 

otlK^rs  in  t Tir^own  interest.    General  verbs  of  hinder  ng  take  quominus.   while  this 

micu^j^^^^  of  hindering  requires  a   Quin-clause.    Both  classes  are  expressed    by 

Si^i^-eilM-^S  butUme  ofThe^  -cur  ii:^>.>th  chisses    To  those  beUnigs^..^^which 


fvorut^^^^^^^  o^hinUennff  an  .cti<m  \    JAferre  RvA 

the  oYher  verl  "  of  lav  ng  mentioned  above  refer  to  the  posf2>one7mnt  of  an  action. 
This  '  nnJet  .1  f  movL  with  the  idea  of  hin<lering  is  the  reason  that  non^jnorartis 
CO  st  •  cd  bo  with  quominu.s  and  quin,  as  :  Xihil  nioror  r/..o;/an/^^decemvlrat^  abeam  ; 
T  o  n  t  de  •  V  nlv  r  'si-'uatio.i  as  decemvir  (i.  e.  I  will  make  no  difliculties  as  to  my  re- 
Ji  i  "  L  v^  51  Hi  t  N.c  morati  sunt  qui,,  de<Mirrerent  ad  castra  (they  ran  wiihout 
dt"  V  To^hL  citni  i  Liv.40,31.-In  post-classical  style  verbs  ol  restraining  and  delay- 
L  a  1  te  iSenM  w  th  quominu>^,  instead  of  the  classical  quin,  as  :  ^e 

cl-i-issinU  md  kTv"^^  r/./.>;7/m'M'aliquid  do  gram  mat  icS  sen  herent   retrained 

from  wr  in"  ti-rammar).  Suet.  Gramin.  :i.-Nec  quievTre  Ubu  qxifrminus  pra^das  e  Ger- 
liin^i:!  pl^rent  ;~S  Ubii  tr.r.  not  slaw  (did  not  lose  any  timej  in  going  to  Germany  for 

^TThos?of\^he'm.-ntioned  verbs  which,  in  classical  prose,  take  an  object-infinitive  jn- 
«tiuloTTha  -Claires  wUh7«o/m;>^    or  quin,  aroAw,pedlre,pj'ohtb^re,  deterrere,  recusare, 
«o/   /"li/Z/f    O    the^^erbs  irnimUre  knd  j^rohibere  V^ke  an  ^^^'''''''^"'''^vulVi^'.r 
CXrc  1  Btrnction   the  claus.-s  sfuh  ne  and  quominu,  being  less  frequent.     VV  ith  de.er- 

H /ronmdial  after //rf  as  •  Quic  res  ad  veH-^tendum  cos  t?niKdnt.  Liv.  40, .«.  -/Wa/>€/ e  takes 
a,f /^y  "S  "  n  he  i>^^^^^^^^  M  prohibeant  nt  \  as  :  Di  prohibeant  ut  hoc  quod  majjrescon- 
Si!ium  publicum  voUri  voluCruut,  presidium  sectOrum  existimCtur.  Cic.  R.  A.  52. 151. 


CO^^rPLETING  THAT-CLAUSES. 


605 


604 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


FxAMPLE^    1    Vfrbs  or  HiNPKRmG.-Plnra  r,^  (licam  tufp  f^^  l''^^'-'!""^/;"^;£"(,[;:,';?: 

vent  me  from  ^ayin-  ^"<>'-^''^^ '^- P^^"^;f.^^^|H,:^w  ir)    I       W  :« -.Kt^^ 

imp^dW  Onixi^T^'d  tl.c  i.nm.diate  Ih'?";'""^^  «»  ,?.nmi8  sonic; Qiis((l.K.s  not   l-rovt-nt  u. 

ln).n  c-.ntii.uin-  our  pursuit,  t-  i-xtren.e  <  U      ?•  •, <^^  c.  Si n  U,W^  y^^\,r,„are  civitiltcm 

-Ne  id  qi.od  placcbat  decormrfr   ainbitio  ''^'f'^^'I^Xv^^VX^  N  D  1  34.-A'«  conf.-si  im 
l,e  wishrd». .  Liv.  5.  :i6.-Q..ul  .>/W;/   ^/;"/;r^;".i  ''Vvt'Jr  -f  re  m^  nnUta'  externa  v'/^'^^""* 


of  erecthiL'  a  nlatn.-  to  Inm).  ^••P•  A't-  3.-T  '-^/  ;/.'  i7'j;:.;,/i  p,.evvnt  by  our  rcHst- 
rensti  pote^t:  We  can,  even  with  tl.e  hel  1  »»}'  >7'^:  "^,.^,  ^renunnal^  qmminus 
ance    the    collapse   ..f    ^^^^.  '^^'^'^'^''^'''X]^'^-^^^^^ 

oratores  omnia  le-ant.  ouuna  au<  .ant :  N  r  u  il  }  Pl  ,«j  V  5,^;  t  s*M  vo„  recusaturos 
itu-  KiH-jiker-*   of  all  th  nil"*.  Cic.  Or.  1,  <.0.  2.)().— <.1'^<I  u  ponum  •";"•'*''     ^,    .   .,«  _,|ii 

S;o;>  hoc  rlcu..mnt  ne  e:^.;o;:•^accu^are.|tur  ju     uu  c^\n^^^^^^  ,^,,,^  ,^.,,^.. 

.,,f,den|  n,nquany•e.v/.s.,^^  v'/oj.  .  ^^  U^-  ato  m  ^i;-,j;V5.._p,„„pr.ius  dixit  von 
;SS;e'Je:^;;^im;,;t^;s'S;np;^^t^- e^timarCtur  .i  Bine  ma.imo  detnmento  h.tO- 


rehnti  qnin  oppidum  irrumperent    C  ic-.  li.  L-  -J.  id. 
4    Vkkbs  of  1)KLAyin<;.-  N.m  ultra  dfje?en<l>/m 
exerciti.m  in.truxit.  Liv.  40.  ^-^'''('/'([/'''''''''l'!!;::/^^^^^^  'va  ^   ].-Qu.im  omnes 

mus  l.otntnem  nobiscum  vetu.hlte  um.citKe  ^'  V  "/^^,  ":>;.•  ^rn-jctn,-  (that  t lie v  should 
voce,  audirentur,  exspecUhi  d.unus  non  V'P^f  ^;'^'-' *?  '' *  'S<  H  (i  ^  '2  -/^^^.s"^  mihi 
not  «lelav  anv  lon-er  the  marchuij;  a-anist  the    campK  ♦-'V'^- ,"•  \*-    ( V,    Vuu  '•>  12  •' 


nr,.v-nted  the  takin-  of  a  vote..  lb.  bamj.  4,  2.->  e  nu     Ic  « 


ceu«*orias  lei;es  toUere.  ne 


;;npillot.unres..,..^..../V-^;-^^;^^^^^^ 

prevent  by  anv  measure  (ron<>d>'i-e)  '1»^'"^  ^variiMrom  otn.„    ^ji  ^^^^  __^  ^^^  ^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^^, 


)('in^  in  that  i)osit!on  wnere  eu.  ui'V"'-'  •    ^     a-i      ivipter nuereum 


«T 


ni  •  S^^^  construction  '  Stat  pe?-  cUiqnem  qvmyiinm  (where  per  has 

the  sim^  ce  a.  in  "^r  me  licet  \  the  phrase  l.eini?  equivalent  to  '  u/t^.'/t-"'  ^f"/f  J  ,9  '^ 
the  -«'^^^,  ;'\' ",  the  acce-s..rv  idea  of  responsibility.  It  may  be  variously  r.ndiied 
'T^  ch^,^^^^:^!^ne  il}aA,of\^\x  i  imputed  to  some  ""f ; ' -""?;  n*^^^  ^  |T: 
jt  IS  S'<"f'/*^''i*'  Miliiip  of  etc  '  ♦  it  i«  one's  fan  t ', '  owinir  to  one  etc.'.  or  simply  by  He 
,p<M.Hble  o  /;;••!"' ^/.*V^[.',-  co'm  ov  t.  per  Afra?wwi  stare  quowinvs  proelio  dimica- 
IVTi^r  •  r taVle- ii^ha^  pVevent'ed  a  li.^ht.  Oes.  li.  C.  1,  41.-S/./i.>".  p-r 

C^:tiiuni%^;;;^^;-;m.i.U>  potirenun- ^idebnmr  ;  U  k..».  tl-Jrebonius  wa.  rj.^^^ 

f^^  n  u  e  1  w""ow  n  "etc  o  tl.ecom.nande.s,  and  not  to  the  sol<lier-.  Liv.  :^  «i  . 
^^Z'l^^l^^e^mtT^Mi^l^U-  fi'ies  pra^^taretur ;  because  the  breaking  of  their 
faith  was  not  attiibutable  to  him.  lb.  2.  .^1. 

n«^  7  In  a  similar  way  a  Q>dn-clause  dependent  on  nonfacere  (?ometimej»  non  efficer^) 
inJ  rr;J"t<  V/Vr^  e  mei  idn-  of  a  verb  <.f  le^traunnr,  or  on>ifth,rf  (Ob?  5).  and  hence 
imparts  to  ^/t^-r^  »  '^.  '''-';;^^^^^^^  ^  ^j„^„(,^  ,,,.,p  (refrain)  doin<r  8omclhin<r%  'I  cannot  but' ; 

:.".S'."not' but    e  1  you  omSy  iny  opinTo-K  lb.  Fam.  6. 18,  l.-Fien  wdlo  modo  iK>terat 
could  not  but  tell  >*  1,  •''Vi?   '  .^  iilto.rfther  imnos.ible  not  to  spare  (  leomenes.  lb. 


See  Cic.  Mur.  :il,  TO.  .     -n>     .    j      ..„ 

4.  Fad-claiiscs. 

nnn  '^O  'Verbs  not  belonirinjr  to  the  claR.«^ns  mentionod  above  (i?.  23- 
o5)  nmM  Ike  Tbat-daiises  to  represent  any  snbstantive  olyoct  (transitive, 
r.  tVr.b  ve  or  adverl>ial).  Such  chtnses  either  take  the  ior.n  ot  a  Quod- 
.^1^;'' ,  Ih  ll>at  <.f  an  Ut-olanse.     They  are  called  sub.tantive-clauses 

or  FACT-CL.\USES  (p.  41)1,  Ol5S.   14).  • 

i^.^  1  TnF„.rli«h  Buch  Fact-Clauses  are  either  made  dependent  on  a  noun  Of -eneril 
Obs.  1  In  ^^'^^-'''^'^•.^"V,,^  t)  ,.v  kft  the  form  of  a  participial  noun  in  it^g  as  a  sub- 
import  ^f«5;^i  ^>°7' VSiVth  >^  tUe  ?n  lU^i^^^^^^  form,' an  absolute  neuter  demon- 
Htantive  object.  j;»  '"'  il  non<trative  with  the  i.oun  reAh<jec  re.<.  ea  re.^)  as  syndetic 
Ptrauve(^../.r><^fWH»^^  ^^^^  ^^^^  required  by  the  govern  in- 
antecedents  (p.  4*>2  Obs.  1.)).  n\  "'/^"  -'"^  '  ,  •  n,,t,.eedent  the  clause  is  attached  in  the 
verb,  or  ^v  the  lem  in,-  m Iverbia^            tl^e  cli^Jt  conceived  a.  a  ;>^^^^^  or  present  fact. 

presses  a  mere  idea  conceived  in  ^^^.^^r^^'^'f^J^'^^^  and  some- 

d.tic  antecedent  may  be  1*/   <>  >'  •*  V^rtci<es  occur  not  onlv  as  ohjecf-claufes,  but  also 
times,  when  it  is  m  the  ablat     ^^,"!,  \^^-f '^  ' {  ,^Tfhif^^fe-cIa>hes  (See  R.  21)  Obs.  7.  B,  fi). 

ced.nf.  as  transitive  ohjrct.  is  placed  in  ''"' «V'^""""*,';  ""' '*  ^';.'' J,,V„J.(  //,„/  v.nl  liavo 
mtnus  n-ro  9«<d  cn^t-ssisti  'ft'-™7>; '''""''^,,    '''i;;"'„S7?o{? .s  •  .  CiJ  Brnt/Sii.  297.- 

lEiir^t  ?'c7trar/or^oi\^Krsir.sisr;ra^  « itc.  b.  Fan.. 


I 


606 


THAT-CL.VUSES 


15. 4, 12.-Qno  facto  dna.  res  eonseai7.tu.  e.H*).  qnod  animos  ^.^"^""^Prj;^';^,,^^"^^^^^^^ 

once  etc  ).  Li  v.  38,  4'.).  See  ihc  Ex.  p.  491,2. 
nJ  V  Of  th..  intransitive  verbs  that  govern  a  -onitive  and  ablative,  only  some  tvrfta 

ilisisiipiiilii^ 

iac?     a/    r        /^U /ac^am  e^e  creda.  quod  =  Ascribe  tin.  to  the   act  that) 
OB '4   m  the  follosviu^  instances  Fact-clauses  with  quod  take  the  place  of  substantive 

Aclius  .oVo  ^/..0^/  nihil  tale  t.mOrcnt  .Eiuli   opp.  nni  incautas  P'!^-V'^4      PoinuTc^n 
ver  factfkat  the  /Eiuiians  did  nor  fear  anythin-  oJ  the  kind      ,'^^- 3;.^.-I  «>    '.  '^  ^^s 

contcnt,-d  ^e^^i»-;-'»-  J'L^- %,,,.  ,vi  de  ic  Vn.tecedent  eo  or  Aoc  may  be  left  out,  which 

"Z^^Z^^^Y^^^^^sc^^^olr  into  cauml  Quod-clauses  :.(MI  potuit 

intns  U<.nuh;'sVir'i^i^;^^        .^y^nm%d  (  =  eo  quod^  "';>,;''."  i;^^^^'';V'!' ""l.'i'r/jT'io'  K 

tiiConsithiUse  ret)ns  tuis  a.t  <i'ind  Uenietniim  liomain  ini>ens    Id.  40.  i'--7V '^f  "Ij"*  .'\[!'^ 

"V7>;;S;^7r'K7a'verriumT'ffl<;ieiiili,  ini"lil  have  taken  iiii  Ut-clau»e  (*.  25.  31.  wllicll 
won  ;m    'v  'r<:prLrted  %fpreUica,  an  ...rec.  of  Jl-  acllon   >vh,  e     «,"^^ho     by 

th,.   Kict-claus-    represents  tlie  predicates  as  ccnncideiit  with    the  main  action      inus 
J    :.Mn  in       simil  r  «em^^         uses  an  rt-chius^ :  His  subsidiis  m  ,umcon><ecu(u.<7a  ex 

takesthi^loini^i  m.  a  _.  ^MUiiH  Kacl-clai.se  in   the  sen>e   explained 

;;;;::;.;"\i:e  'ft 'rauie  \!^!^  f-J'^LL;;  6>A>c^c/a...,  dependent  on  cura,n  adUm.e  (  = 

'''rTVini^au^'dcXemicn^^  ^eenis  to  require  the  form  of  an  ;,,/f.mM 

oUu  o      i  it       re  t he  O     .i-clau<e  rel.'rs  to  novum,  m.  anint:  th«t  th.-  act  mentioned  i, 
;;.r/n  <X,:!!k^^  tZ:^v.\W  fuUow  a  pccmiur  method  in  the  order  of  exam.n.n.^ 

'"S  hi  u'Smilar  construction  eo  mnrju.  •  .n»o.  where  eo  i -f ';!';!- -l^^y  ^  relative  clause, 
both  the  clause  and  the  autecedent  eo  represeut  ablatives  of  diStiena. 


COMrLETING   THAT-CLAUSES. 


G07 


;>nW^/-  i</  V'/<x/.  besides  the  fact  that,  <^\*,^'^^'f'^'*  ,; '^' ^„„ '  „,,der  reus  erat  factus  vfrom 
SSy>/io«  of  the  fact  thul%  as:  V-Pf '!!?  '"iat,  Timu^nSt  c^^^  ^ic  Chi.  24. 

the  fact  that  Scamunder  was  "'^^'^  ^-^'^  1"\^  ,r'^^^^,^^^^^  patiebSlur  (is  inlerred 

Hr..-0.ii.un  pains  n  til.um  ff.^  »^  ,^;  ' "/  {V,  U  A  18,52*.  Chalcidensium  legatio  o6 
from  his  snflVrin-  him  to  ^''V  ,!Lnnwlec\lci' e-tintr.  ductus,  ultimie  ..ecessitatis  visa 
id  qmd  priiueps  eonun,  pod. b  i=^  ^^l '^^;^   f^^^td^  ad  omnium  familiariiat.^ 

res.   I.iv.4:i,  V- In  hoc  '["'^ '^.'^'^^^/'^^.i^^.!,^  quidnam  sentTrem  de  hoc  quod 

esse  munltas.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  -i. ^'^•-J,^"-  ,^'* ' fn  f  V?  19  -Omnia  mihi  perjucunda  fugrunt 
duos   soles    visos   esse   constarei.   1'^- -^^;  M;;..^ ;;,,,,  ,^^^^^^ 

yr.,Ur  Ulud  nuod  parum  ^"^^^^^^'^^^ :^:^;^^l^^^^^^^^^  you)    lb. 

"^facl  that  my  property  in  the  salt  xn  orks  /^  ^^«^J^  ^^^^  ,  meaning '  besides  the  fact  that ' 
Vam.  7,  32.  l.-See  tl»e  Ex.  p..492. 4.-t  or   ;^^^^  express  '  excepting  the  jact 

the  farm  lO'.vferquam  quod  \f  xnovii  comuu^^^^^^^^  than  -  »r,^/^r  id  quod\-  as:  Sinis- 

t/mt\  the  form  •  nisi  quod    \^ '"'^j'^    '-^     "''"^'r^nno  ^  additie  vires  (to 

tns,  pnetrrquamqu^^l  ^""  '.'^V^urtiiaf  thJ^^forSd      m  body,  new  strenj:th  was 

the  left  w  nir,  aside  fnmi  the  fact  tliat  tnt  j  '"' "'Jf " ''  .  ,„hn  ennsules  nrofecti  ad  bellum 
added  by.  etT).  Li  v.  9,  V -'l^^:^:,^^;^^^ZrSin^o^  10,  26.-Cum 

erant  cum  (juatuor  legionibus,  alii  «"  M;\'^[;,  '";.  f  J;'"^^^      n hih.sophiil  vehementer  ab  eo 

and   their  prepositional    ""^^^'^^'St^nr  to^o/^^^^^^^  I^  must  be  corn- 

periodical  connective,  being  equ.vakmt  /."    | '«'  J^«''^^^  ,.^^.^  ^hat  ?),  as  :  QuUr 

pleted  by  '  Quidde  eo  dxcam  quod  e  c.  '    X^^/  v^nrcr^^^^^  vouiself  into  cusu.dy. 

qnod  tu  te  ipse  in  custoduun  '^^^^':''^J''^^^^^^^^^  periodical  connection, 

Cic.Cat.l.8.19.-(6)  Very  fivquen  ly  ^''';^f";Vv'  fact  that'  or  '  a^' /o' with  a  parti- 
bave  the  force  of  '  Q^'fl'-totV^i^'^'  'o^^^tSi^m  G^nnano^^^m  v.Galliam 
cipial  construciKm,  see  p.  4j4,  «»«• .«  ;  "x  \a\J{xI  \s  to  the  fact  that  he  was  taking  over 
traducat,  id  se  sui  muniendi.cau.a  \^^''\^^f,^^^^^^^^^  himself.  Cffis. 

a  .'reat  number  of  (iermans  into  Gaul,  he  ^\ff''*"  »/;!„','  indul-entia  plures  ad  lalia 
l:QAA\.-qnodetiamsua  rrdfuUn'it    j^^^^^^^^^^^^  J^.^^  ^^eir  own 

audenda  impellantur  :  Concerning  '^f,  {«f^,  ,7:;,,,"JJ,iore  people  might  be  induced  to 
property,  he  was  afraid  that  by  ^";;';*;i'\^j,V**  '^  ,",  Te  P^haicio  de^.Cre  quam  bonis 
such  undertakings.    hw/M.rro.-Quod  "  -^;  ''VV*'/o  ywir  remark  that  I  am  not  owiiig 

of  prevention  :  else  u^on  is  "^^''l-         ,.    o^„-„,p«  ee«c  mentl^sef  vt  amplissimis  honori- 
1.  TKANsiTivK  UT-cLArsEs.-ResTondit  Socrat^^^^  ^^^^^^ 

hus et  pneniiis  decoraretnr  un^/;?;^ '^^'/-^'^) :  »^^^ 

lii-diest  honors  and  rewards.  Cic.  Or  1,  54.  *  /•^.-:;", '/'';, |,irini05  (  ^  you  have  no  right 
vriH)ssis.  nee  nat.ira  "J^l'"^.^"''"^  "  .^^^  !,r7as  noS^  'or  "as  youi- heart  any  better 
moVe  important  ^l^an  that  oy  ^«a/^(7  i'^   "'^^  X  ^  et  animi  magnitudinem 

nnnlUiJ  than  your  wilt  of  doing  *^': /''•  ^'i;, t,,;  ,,  «ccidunt  infra  se  judicet  (complectt, 
Lnplectltxr.  e.  justitiam,  et  "^  ;>">.;  1»  '*  :*  ^^'and  the^^^^^^^  ol  ju.lging  all  human 
a/u/m/) :  VVMsdom  comprises  ma.namim^ 

accidents  n  er or  matters.  H).  I  m.  3,  i.  -io.  ""/''''  .  v|ptelius  (bv  his  proceedings  has 
I^IV  u,  quererer  hoc  -ciis.imperari  (('^^f' J^f  ^^^^^'  ano  hi     r-iU  to  k  immely  that  I 

'""  '^""";';l'.  :;r.;;ch\'hi.  ?:^K-  1  .!"nposed  o^^  ^ur  •dii..s,jb^T.j,2,_i^^ 

via  I/ com  plain  ol  Hich^tnin_s^).  in_.      i p-^^-:-::^:::-;;^,^— ^^^TTnuam  vehementer  eum 

^    -  ••   ,Cat.2,2. 

,  as: 
nati 


timemlm,.  imljrem.  ''«•  /"'\X,  '  ;^  ,]^?e  'h.flnUi i...  a.ul.  .,>--atively.  a  Ne-clause, 


juerui  guiu'i/o  ui.f".*>v.  -,.-••--,»       ,,  ,., 
rempublicam  pcenilCret.  \  ell.  Pat.  2, 12, 


608 


THAT-CLAUSER. 


etc.  Ih.  Tn^c.  1,  41. 9S.-See  the  Kx.  I  •;•;:-•         „^,  j^  vorsn  ?//  totis  viribiis  torrJl  apre- 
clerei.nir;  All  their  hope  was  directed  to  l^^^\P''['[yir:\!^\\\zl:,  „„„  vide,iinini  cs^e  coii- 


B.  Subject  Tiiat-clauses. 


are  either  1)  iiie  rA^>ivr.o  w^  '""'':.J.r;V,,«   «n.  nr '^^  pufdicate-.xd.tkc- 

J^.  73;  foU.)   i^"  OB.^  4^11 ;  or  3)  active  im.-kusonal  vr....;..  bee  A.  -b. 
1    Thnt-dauMS  as  Suhjctts  of  Passive  Verbs 

1.  The  verb  f.fUxre  ''■•^"«V^y,/^  h,.    <■    v.- m^;    nl  "  v»  l^ke:.»..  It-dauae,  it  may  .u 


K..  jmrnre.  Auct.  Her.  "2,  2. 3t  ^    substantive  objects,  in  the 

3  The  verb  relinqxere,  winch  in  the  actne  "'^^^^J^^f'-fyi  rV„viin-  '    '  the  only  alterna- 


]\ 


\ 


SUBJECT  THAT-CLAUSES. 


609 


bo  aone,  as  a  con.,ue.c,o^^  the  <^-.starK^jnc^tion.l  ^^^ 

s..risqiie  copias  di^tineret.  ^^'«''•^•.^•/^''Jjl-^   take  Fact-clanses  with  quod  (/?•  2H,  Obs  2), 

'    ■  2  '7-A«(-<-(««».»  «»  Subjects  of  Impersonal  Predicate-adjectkes 


Obs. 
pat* 


t  remains)  has  the  ^«.i.^truc tio     «t    'J      J'/c"  tentMdicen.lum  videatur  .(  =  re In.qiu- 
I't  rhm^ii  as:  Rdiqunni  *->^t  nt  "^/i- V  ""''  "^  '  ,  ,„i-,.o  «  K|lhiect-ehul^-e  with  quin,  like 

INFINITIVE    CLAISES   >f  t'l^ASV"'?.  ";,..» J  1,U  m/inion.  or  to   pass   his  J.ld 


-HTh7;;;7iT;:77in^n;^I^Tn^^  ..7  with  an  ^f^^y^^  ^'Vme^  Sail.  Fr<r.  Hi^t.  3.  22.- 
extremely  rare,  as:  ^""V'lnranlt'Se  even  f  '  rele'rs  to  an  anterior  fact  as: 
li.liqwnn  e,t  \>  construed  ^MIh  an  J^:;l^';r^^frcmains  the  only  alternative  U)Ossibiltj) 

hdiqinim  est  ut  p.r  servos  1^«'^' "'^^'^'f :'/.;,:  ,''^rfcR  \  28,  7r,.  Here  rdiqnnvi  e^t  implH^s 
(hll^he  committed  the  crime  thr^u.^i  ;^^:,)^^^if^- ^:eviou.  arqvu>en(s^  l^""' XhVn 
a  verb  of  ptorinq  (see  Obs.  1),  "=  {[{^f  "f/JXr  is  the  pcr^.nal  construction  « ith  an 
o»/.vlu.ve  committed  'l'y-"'"^]:>:*'iV-  ^1''«^^^^^^^  ^^  "^'  '^'''''  ''''^'^''^'' 

EJc^Turc'S  (^ -%-- -^  ^^   rf '"V^"an;.d  aHnu'!A.c.r.  potest,  and  a^Jf^nli.. 
t  1    should  be  expec.ed  Xh:afactli--<  ^''^'"'f  = ,?  \7  "^:  /'i  k/^.'r,  i-.deed.  is  sometimes 
.houhl       c  -nlinir  to  thi>  rule,  »>e  c<)nstrue(   ^^  th  <^^  .       /  J^^^^^  succe^sor  tuns 

2  c     str  led  bywrilers  or  the  V^■;''V;Tt'i     classical  pn>^e/ad^6  est\.  either  cons.rued 
no.-it  qmim '// velit.  Plin.  P.Mi.  44,  3.  l;"V?(u  r^//7     'te  1)   l4  No.  2).  or  with  a  subject- 
vti.  a  second  ^"l>''ns  or  with  a  unTumha        er^^^'^rf^^^^^^  ^^  ^^^..TrMnot:  inqne 

i-irtnitive   as-  N\-quc  ^m//a«^'^  "osiris  unc)  t«  mjun   /yM/    j  y  ^,ry  frrqnriuly Jacile 

isinrorporated  as  adverl)  in  the  ''=i""-V,"V.r^  v^Vm-i/e  vim  joofubtre).  Cses.  B.  G.  1,11.- 
i;o;/racl/.vimpr(.im>erein,steadc.f  ^  >^o«^>.  r^^^^  ^A^,^  ^  subject- nflmtive    as: 


qme  sint  in  jure,  vei  apu^  nesc      "  ".nice.  Iom  before  vt,  reprrsent  tlu 
^M<re  the  editors,  by  an  improper  ^V/  I,       th    text  hardlv  admits. 
^.ecufive  clanse,^^hich  the  ^•"•'"*|^^  "    /j.  ^^   eUometimes  in  Lati. 
t  Propositions  .>f  this  kind  may  ^"\ ^'' VL,, k";  ct   a^  •  '  //  is  danrjeiox 
cbuU  with  'tr  with  an  imlehn.  e  lo,  cal  .ubjcc  ,  ^  ^^^^^^  ^^  ^^ 


Jin)  be  replaced  by  a 

..X  ,.u»ycAOt/^  i/"  owe'*  flfrfrmo- 

I  iiii  ■•■"> -  -  ^  -  -  ^,  .         jy  i)e  considered  the  prac* 

«iSU^l^-l^^'r  !naSJv;:"Sy;i^S^a,,;^K  una  J  ru,c  or  OBS.  3. 


Fiu.  3, 15, 50. 


SUBJECT  THxVT-CLAUSES. 


611 


610 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


T^m  riir^re  -  Vende  niihi  va^a  ctelSta,  non  es  diiiiins  qui  habeas  qnne  tarn  bene  f-^^ta  sunt. 
os^^CciuuK  it.;tc.  l''/."^'-^,, ;-,'•.,>.  i    'ji-Lonoiwi  et>l*  (It  would  take  Km  niiich  iime> 

r\        .    If  ti.o  nrinriDHl  Drcdicatc  fcxpiess^e»  tajmh/mfut  of  the  author,  as  in  the  pre- 

a  past  or  P.'-f/ 'i.,  "^  '   "^  ,J^  , /,^^^^^^^^^^  But  in  all  ,»u-se  insranc-e.  ../6/V7  i/./f/.i- 

Examples:  ^-^  .^''^^.^'^/h,-  f .?,      ^  1     ,,oc    /H/iv/i'///*  pmas  v</(>^i  vesiltum  se.lCre  in 

lb.  K.  A.  .1     •;^7' •'','/  ,'/  Vis      lint  •  (Mid  /'^/7>^'^^•  <-s/  q'J'ini  sapieutis  vitam  ex  iiiMpi- 
44.     '»i'/;  •  .w'*./"'."^'  ,  .      .  .^  .     /11, ...J.  tlie  autlior  retirements  thu  hut  tliat   mc 

^'V;''^'";:.'"''\7\'-'    'tV,;!  inrnfi':nn  c<)^^^^  </Li///i/^  (ev/)  quod  auirni  valenles 

e.s/*.  lb.  Fun».  Iti,  It  ~^'''''\'*''''''^'      .„/,,..    iutm>,,.  4  n  -Ouninadtmn.ios  homines 

;f  t  Ti.e '^V-r/^''' t'-' t  he  thoul,i?.e  subdued  by  pas..ou  who  is  not  .ubdued  by 

fear.  f/0'-<  not  hold  to  reason).  \\y^A).J,  1  >. . ^— . 

'"^V^.n^^n^nTii^eVtli^^W^xn^^^  r.cere"  In.l^t  be  diMin^Mii-hed  the  exi)re>j-ion ;  .MAif 
/■•/L-^/^'  -  •nil.fi  /  iV.o  lon-ius'  (li'ixnot  wait  for  the  time  that),  which  is  eon- 

^":;;iJ:!:^qS'';^mi'5icSrrCi?:FanKll,2T.-AiAi/a  /..,i..  viuebatur.  quam  dun. 

^' +'o;;1?.^'o;her  hind"  ^[^v^^i^^^^\^\--  with  a  transitive  object  dependent  on  it, 
mlv^  e  repla  -^^^^  ^'l^^^se  in  winch  th  •  trni-tive  object  '^ -'•••^;>^' ,=' J''^  j^r.- 

SiuiNV  theactivesubject-infi.iitivebein-clKUiu'edu.;^ 

J-  0  d  lia'ia  .sius  qua.n  eum  a  quo  pecuniain  accepens  con.Umnare.  Cic  \  c^n  .  .'.  ^.  -ii. 
n.\o  t  tr  Msitiv  .  ob  e,-t  euni  mav  be  ma.le  a  ^ul>ject-accusatiye  witiiout  chan.'tu^  it  in 
}  r  n  wlule  h  ■  a-ti  e  subj.-ct-intini  condrmmre  is  chanu-ed  n.o  a  Vr"  W'^nWeT 
inft  i\  ve  (ro/^/^^^^^^^^^  nf>*rtrnem  repetl  satis  est.  Liy.3,53.     Here  the  si  bject- 

a^-e   i  UiveSy<Xn  mav  bo  made  a  transitive  object-accusative,  the  passive  predicate- 
?nV.;ilive?4wi  boc^^^^^^     an  active  subject-inQaiiive  meitatem  reiK^tere  «atts  e«t). 
;  Fur  fjraluni  est  ut,  see  Ob3.  0,  at  the  end. 


s 


Or.,  r,  Tf  the  clau«e  is  represented  as  a  nde,  riqht,  duty,  task,  or  as  un  action  wj^ch 
..S  &  iL'; o?S;^ed,  it^ljes^th.  iom,  ol  an  ^<^- (-f  ^-^^^'^^'  J^.^^ 
claram  ilh.d  est,  et  r^c^^;/i  q  oqne  et  JJ^^'^J^J^^'^*^^^;';^  '«„a  true  rule  that  we  should 
^due  ac  y-"?,^;  'P->lf'l\^"'"^t^,;,?\],iye^  e^^^^^  q"am  ho,K,ribus  pertunc- 

love  etc.  Cic.  1  use.  3, 2».  ':{•  ^,.^'  V.'f '','  .i  ^^^^.  n,  or.  i  45.  Similailv  :  Non  est  rectum, 
turn  senem  posse  sno  jijre  f  7'«  Jem  j  ^a  uc    it),  ur  i  ^  ^^^^^    ^^^^^  ^^^^^^^      ^_ 

ndnori  ;/ar^/v  ;//(?yor*=m ;  It  ^  ""^^/fV:,  ht  V"  etc  i  lb  Tim.tJ.-ld  enim  est  proprium 
'  the  proposition  that  ,  or  ^I  '^  ""^  "^^t  ^^^^^^'/-^  ^'  ,/^  Jv  ,todi5  (it  is  ti/e  partim- 
civitiltis  et  urbis  ut  sit  hl)e ra  et  not  ^oi  icita  ^  ue  rei  cujiyp.c  _  j^onrium  est 


I  Ouod-dause  {quod  ninu  esi  aiccu  n  tu^.-,  ..ui-  —  "V.^j ,",;:.'   .^  ^n  ex- 
correc^-Id  arlliJfor  appr-ime  (n  vita  ^^^.r^^^^^^^ 
tremely  us"/ul  ?^de^  thai  there  .hoiild  be  m      «"  "  Y/-^tc  ^    Cic  R  A  20.  56*.-Nihil  est 
satores  mulios  in  civitate  esse,  ^^'f  «'    <  {    »  "!  i  amlief  N^^tl  h  ?       more  important  in 
y;.^';i;^:;:;^K' n.?^r  c:;^^;^  ^ff^n^  ISe  rr.^  ^^o.//  be  favorably  disposed 

'^Tlt  ^;;^nc^l>;.r  P^dfeate  ^Jen-^^^^^  t-^,:!^^^^^/^^^^ 

the  sul)ject-claiisedenot.n.     that  s(,mcmn.^^^^^^^^^^^^^  predicates  are  CBquum 

turn  estyn    '»« '«^''"'"-'.'V^n.m  Fsbould  be  onen  to  all ;  not  '  ut  auxilium  pateat ').  Liv. 

ato 
urn 
sc. 


repre»ciiun^  n  « _ — ♦„u„  .H*.  fnrm  of  an 


e*>«,  perspicuum  est.  Cic.  Or.  2,  S4. 


,nd  .^quum  est  with  an  1"'>";;;^,;;5^;\^;.^/ ^^.^J  t><    tude^  another  coordinate  predicate 
e.>/  are  ai.ways  <oDstiMted  wnthinfintivc  clause.,  u^^^^^^^  Liv.  39. 13.   See, 

requires  an  Ut-cla.ise.  «'^^I'^^.-'f^,^";"  ^f/'p^J^.y^T^g^^i-ni  «i/i   L  M.  23;  C.es.  B.  G.  4. 16; 
bolides  th.M.xamplesquotcH  in  the  ext.Cc.^^^^^^^^^^ 

Nep.2.7;  Ter.  lleaut  2  1.2    I^^^.  It),  ^i.  ana  one  i.    .    '        img  to  the  principle  stated 
two  or  three  phu-es  of  l>Iai.  us  a  e  ;«"-  r^^f^^/^  ^^;V,^^';Vet:o^  est  meum 

:;Sd^^;f  c:isir:;^\niu:^=i^K  iii  Sa^r^S^-r':.....  exisUm^vlt.  C.s. 


""fs^lu^  est  at  is  better;  it  would  he  ^^f^^^l^^^i):^^  T  Infit'^^^^ 
as*:  dbrui  JFAu^  i<.^..i;>us  satius  ^^^^^  taLTZ  Ter  E un  4.  7  2. -Satiu^  fuisse  non 
with    an   intinitive  clattse.  «Il;  /on  m.  ^a/,.^^J.^  ^^^^ 

iia  nobis  majf^vr^s-  '{«>''t'«^,/';;:/V^.',^t-ntoner '  i'^  not  constrned  with  an  Ut-clause.  But  in 
thlSd.:;'' Sn't;;;;"  V?fi;^liSi^%  it'tal-^  either  an  intinitive  clause,  or  an  Lt- 
clause.  See  Obs.  C. 


612 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


n«5nal  or  nnn^ual  raro  or  h^trango.  fho  pubjcrt-clanse  takes  eifhn  the  form  of  an  inHmhre 
c'aofe  or  th;>t  of  an  ri-cln"Sf*  (no-ativt-ly  >it  i,nn).  The  form  of  an  rf-clausr  is  ntntvally 
li«t'(l  in  this*  connection,  if  the  nullior  prcpiantly  implies  iliat,  wIkiI  is  ^tatea  in  the 
clause,  l<  or  s^hoohl  he  oiherwise,  or  should  be  exptchd  to  l)e  oi  hei •^yi^e 

ExAMPi  E*  -ConcedCtnr  renini  e.-^-ie  iff  b.-nos  hoiii  (lilijr.int.  Cic.  Am.  14.  50.— Mn  autem 
ilia  rtviora  (  =  iihid  verins)  nt  idem  (sit)  iiiteritiis  aniinonim  et  corpornni.  ll>.  4,  i-*-— ^^ 
TH-nm  est  {\f  it  is  certaiiDt  vf  popnliis  Rom-Iiius  omiiTs  jrentTs  virtilte  sMpenlnt  Nop. 
llann  \.-V>r>i)n  est,  etiam  eis  qui  alicpiando  Intflri  suit,  esse  coosv/em/iw.  i.  w.  tuu  .i, 
l.»r,4_\eaue  reri/m  esf,  oppriini  inemorumi  imairinum  i)ondere.  lb.  ()r.  y.  hh.—  mm 
ren>/s  est.  imimion  in  oo  diserttim  esse/w,s>6  quod  nesciat.  H).  1.  14.— Ita./?/  rerumxWmU 
awiriliam  nisi  inter  b(mos  esse  iion  possf.  11>.  .\m.  18.  (J.'i.-Po  ipso  Roscio  potest  illiid 
niii(iern<^.s->v  f,Us>mi  vt  circnmliirjTtiis  fuerit  anirui.  Ih.  Div.  2.  31.  W.-f-a^'/m  f/;/.  oniiiT!? 
animi  robiplditi^  esse  e  corporis  societilte.  lb.  Kin.  2.  82,  lOi.-Ktiam  turn  ()niiin  ren^ymle 
tiV  aliquem  (crimen)  coimnisUse,  in  t^nspiclDne  latrainte.  lb.  K.  A.  20.  5..-Atqiie  il  ua 
est  pmhahiliKs.  neipie  tainen  rernm.  nmrris  in  eo  quod  scrent  satis  ^.<«e  cl-quentls.  ID.  i»r. 
1, 14  —Hoc  rtri-itiiile  von  est.  odio  fuissf  pareiiti  filiuw.  lb.  \\.  A.  14, 40.— Aon  m  reri- 
simi/eyt  Chr\>^o^<>\\\\!*  Jioruin  litteriis  adamarit  ant  hiimaniiruem.  11).  41, 121. —An  Jvn- 
simile  est  itt  civis  Komanus  cum  irladio  in  fonim  descendeiit  V  lb.  Sest. .%.  7K.—  ]t-rtsimife 
von  est  ut  hunc  in  adv.rsij»  rebus  ab  pc  dimitteret.  \\^.'!>\\\\.'i{^r^:^.—  ^/n)vmle  mm  est 
vt  ille  relio-iOni  sua»  pecnniam  anteponeret.  lb.  Verr.  2.  4,  »}.-I)ei  rerisvnile  est  ut  altos 
indub'entius  tractent  propter  parentis,  alios  propter  fiitnram  ijosterorum  indoleni.  hen. 
Ben  A  Z-l  —Rnrinn  est  ut  in  foro  jndicia  projiter  id  foliim  constitnantiir.  Cinint.  •>.  1.».  .i. 
— Quid  tam  fwwi/a/'/m  qiiam '//  eqiies  Koinamis  ad  helium  maximnm  i)ro  (•onMilemit- 
teretur?  Quid  tarn  .si/ir/'//'/'^  q"^»"  "' C(.nsnl  antefieret  quam  l>c'''"'?;'^ ''/''"; ''V|  •  J{"!' 
tam  inrredilnle  quam?//'  iterum  eques  Uom.lniis  tritimiiliHret?  Cic.  L.  M.  21  »i-,.— i^uui 
tarn  prater  consiittudinem  (  =  iiiusitiltdm)  (piam  homini  peradolescenti  ^f(r<'^'^'^  nan/ 
()iiid  tam  tarvum  quam  ndoUscenfem  |)iivatiim  ex«rcitnm  conficeie  ?  lb.  21,()1.— Non  erit 
tibi  hoc  nocuin.  mihi  ill'iin  nulllus  rei  rudem  esse  visum,  lb.  Ur.2, 1.— Hoc  vero  uort/jn, 
ut  homines  servos  e  medio  snpplicio  dimi.-^orit.  lb.  V.-rr.  2,  5.  fi.^(inid  in  (.ra-co  senuoue 
tam  trifmn  atcpie  cehtnalmn  est  quam.  si  qtiis  despicaiui  diicittir.  nt  M\>orum  nitimu* 
essediejltur?  II).  Flacc.  27.  (m.  — H  in  cunis  tueiit  aii<;uis.  ;/o/j  tam  e-t  minnn  (strang:o, 
uiiu^iiaU  lb  Div  2  :^1,  »>♦>.— Hoc  vero  0])fi?n"m  est  (ironically  used:  It  Piirpasses  all 
belief  that  such  a  man  should  t.ut  know  etc.)  ut  is  qni  linem  rerum  expeteiidilnim  yolup- 
tsTtem  e>se  diceret  et  ultimum  bomlriim,  id  ijjsum  quid  et  quale  sit  nesciat.  lb.  l"n.2, 
3.  f).— Id  veroTuilitibus  fitit  jytrr/rattim  v\j'/nntd>fm  nf,  qui  aliqnid  justi  incommodi  ex- 
gpectavissciit.  ul/ro  pr(emiitm/en-ent  (aj,'aM»st  all  i)robability).  Ctes.  15.  C.  1.  8(5. 

Ob>«.  7.  Often  the  neuters  of  ordin.\i>  NtMEKAi.s  (definite  or  iiuhfinite)  are  used  with 
the  copula  iti  connection  with  a  subject  That-dause.  Such  numeral  adjectives  are  not 
to  be  considered  as  impersonal  ])i-edicates  of  the  That-clatise,  but  as  absolute  adjectives 
denotiu"'  the  -jeueral  idea  of  a  t/iinr/.  bein?  used  in  this  connection  to  express  \\\f  order 
of  certain  'points'  in  discourse.  Such  constructions  must  be  treated,  not  accordwiL^  to 
*  The  rea-on  ()l  iiiis  consiructi..n  with  lUiUt-dause  must  he  derived  Iroin  those  pas- 
sages, ill  which  the  subject  That-ciaust'  contains  a  fact  arjainst  reality,  or  a  proposition 
which  is  contrary  to  experience.  In  these  instances  an  Tt  clause  is  used,  becaust;  this 
form  makes  it  p(')ssible  to  expre-s  the  non-reality  of  the  predicate  by  a  suhjunctue  (see 
T).  .548).  Subsequently  this  principle  was  ireueralized.  and  optionally  exienued  to  all 
instances  in  which  tlie  principal  predicate  refers  to  the  rK////y  of  the  clause.  _ 

t  '  It  i«  certain  '  is  either  expressed  hy'cirfum  est\  or  i)y  *  rena/i  est  .  or  erpforntt/m 
est,'  being  construed  with  iiitinitivu  clauses,  as  :  Port<'ntum  ortissimmn  est,  esse  alvpiem 
qui  etc.  Cic.  U.  A.  22,  (»8.  More  «renerallv.  however,  the  expression  'cerliun  est  m.ans  i 
(lie  etc.)  am  determined  (to  do  a  thinir)  ''beinf?  either  construed  with  an  inlinitive  clause 
or  with  a  subject-infinitive.  In  the  infinitive  clause,  the  HniiUsh  subject  ol  the  principal 
predicate  is  inserted  as  subject-accusative,  the  tense  of  the  predicate-intinitive  Iteing 
alwavs  the  prestyd,  as  :  Ceytmn  est.  exuUltnni  hinc  irt  vie.  1  am  delermined  on  .s:<>">>' i'H'> 
exile"  Plaut.Merc.3,  4.51».- Knriim  w/t  libtrtjlti  parcere  certum  est.  tic.Oti.  i.  !•..>«.  ir 
construed  with  a  subiect-infinitive.  certnm  est  takes  the  Enirlish  subject  as  dative  of  the 
interested  person:  'Mihi  artum  est,  illTus  vti  tesnmoniis.  <^ic.L'iec.9.24.— Su'pe  ex 
Crasso  audlvi,  sifA  certum  et^^-e  a  jiidiciis  causisque  discedere.  lb.  Or.  2.  8.'>.— 1  he  expresMou 
•  exn'oratum  est '  is  construed,  like  an  adjective-predicate,  with  a  dative  of  the  person  and  a 
subject-infinitive  clause,  as  :  Cni  conuis  bene  constitQtum  sit  et  exploralum  ita  semper 
fore  Cic.  Tnsc.2.7.— 6V/i  sit  explordhnn  (To  whom  is  it  sure)  se  ad  vesperuni  esse 
victurum  ?  Ih.  Sen.  1«>.  07.— If  certum  tst  is  used  in  the  meanlnir  of  '  it  is  certain  ,  it  L'en- 
erallv  refers  to  'subjective'  (i.  e.  individual)  certainty,  beinir  construed  with  the  (I'lnve 
of  tlie  person  and  an  infinitive  clause,  as  :  Certi;is  tihi  eM  vi^  esse  Homa%  quam  miia,t« 
AthCuH.  Cic.  Att.l.  9.1. —Sometimes  'cfrnx/a/ \  with  an  infinitive  clause,  is  used  in  mo 
meaning  of  '  objective '  certainty.  See  li.  28,  Obs.  1. 


n 


I 


■ 


SUBJECT  THAT-CLAUSES. 


613 


f/ 


the  nilo»  of  impersonal  predicate-adjectives,  but  according  to  those  of  impersonal  pr^rfi- 
cate-nouns  (Obs.  8  foil.),  the  iiouter  {render  of  the  adjective  beinc:  not  the  neuter  of 
'  impoisonahtv  ',  but  the  neuter  denotinir  the  general  i«lea  of  a  fhin«r  (P.  1.^  8.)4)  1  he 
form  of  the  sirbiect-clause  connected  with  such  expressions  is  either  that  of  an  It-clwise 
(if  the  numeral  n-fers  to  the  order  of  points  '  to  Ije  discussed),  or  that  ot  a  Quod-cjause  (if 
it  refer-  to  anual  facts  mentione  1  in  order),  or  th  it  of  an  intfnitive  clause  (if  it_  relers 
to  asMnnpiionsor  opinions  enumerated):  as:  Er-o  hoc  sit  ;>?imi/m  in  pneceptis  meis 
ut  demonstrCmus  qu.MU  i.nitetnr  (Let  this  be  the  fir-t  point  to  show  et<-.)  Cic  Or.  2  22. 
—  Prorimum  est  ut.  doceam,  deorum  provideniia  mundutn  administrSri.  lb.  N.  D.  2,  29.— 
Extremum  est  ut  te  orcm,  animo  ut  maximo  sis.  lb.  Fam.  4  18  7 -^//^r'/w  est.  quod 
ne<r-uis.  actionem  ullTus  rei  posse  in  eo  es>e  qui  etc.  \h.  Kc.VT.'l.'^\.-Fnmu7n  est,  e.se 
athpiod  xh^um  falsum  (the  first  p.dnt  is  the  as.su77iption  thai  something  lalse  has  bee^i 
seen):  secundum,  id  pcrcipi  noii  />r>sse  ;  tcrtium,  fieri  non  jmse  ut  etc.  lb.  Ac.  i'r.  A  2b, 
S:3 —Ao.rJmww  ^n/,  quam  piimum  mo/j.  lb.  Tusc.  1,48.*.  ,r.    ,         , 

Sometimes  other  lorm-adjectives  are  used  with  similar  constructions,  as:  \  ir  hotni3 
vt  sim,  7veiijn  est ;  it  is  in  7i>y  power  to  he  a  ffood  man.  Sen.  Ep.  98.  To  such  clauses  the 
rules  ou  Fact-clauses  must  be  applied  (/.'.  2C.,  Obs.  5.  See  li.  29.  Obs.  T.) 

3.  That-clauses,  as  Subjects  of  Imjyersonal  Predicate-nouns. 

Obs  8.  If  the  imp<rsonal  predicate  of  a  subject-clause  is  a  pREmcATK-Norv  wilh  the 
CODula  the  form  of  the  clause  is  determined  by  the  previous  rules  (Obs.  2-«)),  if  the 
iiredieate-noun  with  the  copula  is  equivalent  either  to  a  verb  construed  with  an  object 
That-clause,  or  to  an  impersonal  predicate-adjective  construed  with  a  subject  Ihat- 

^^ l"  PuFDiCATE-Norxs  WITH  suB-TECT  iNFiNiTiVE-cxArsEs.-Tertium  exercitum  tnendis 
paiari  finibtis  feunn  eraf  (  =  lanul  nuntiahdtur).  Liv.  10.  :«.-Ketn  te  yalde  bene  gesnsse^ 
{^Zlrerat.  Cic.  Fam.  1,8.7.— NV/«.v  a-unt  esse  comul^TT.  phhej'mi  fieri  (  =  ^destum.  turpe 
es'<e^  Liv  4  8 —In  Oallo-neciri  sacer  tnons  v^t.  quern  ferro  riohn^  vefas  hahVur.  Just. 
\\,i—Fac\nus  est  rinclri  cirem  Komanum,  sceJus  rerberari,  prope  iHt7Ttctdium  necart 
{  -^  it  is  criminal  etc.  if,  see  Obs.  3).  Cic.  Verr.  2.  5.  «Ui.  ,       ^  , 

2  PuFDu  ATE-NOUNs  WITH  Qi'oi)-cLAi'SBs.-lf  the  predicate-uouu  uiav  be  replaced  by 
a  v.'-rb  i.f  praising,  censurinir,  or  accusinir.  the  subject-clause  generally  tak^-s  the  form  of 
a  (Juod.ch,use,  provided  it  contains  an  actual  fact.  If  it  contains  a  1>ro|>osinon  equ  va- 
l.-nt  to  a  clause  with  if.  or  to  a  That-clause  with  an  indefinite  sub.iect  (Obs.  3),  it  alvNaxa 

akes  the  form  of  an  infinitive  clavse :  Sum7na  laus  tua  et  Bruti  est  quod  exercitum  pne- 
er 'pern  Ji"/i;;,^,/u.rcomparasse.  Cic  Fam.  12, 4. 2.-Dixi.  cum  ^^''^^  ''"^J;]''^!;  '^^^ 
\y.xuc  esse  vel  niaximam  daudem),  quod  non  solum  quod  opus  esset  rftc^m,  se<l  et  atn 
,  d  non  opus  esset,  tM>n  diccres.  lb.  Or.  2,  78.-P.ut :  Mag-a  lans  est  et  grata  hominibus 
Znn  hominem  elahordre  (  =  if  one  man  is  workin.M  ,n  eS  scient.a  qm^  ^J^  '" "'^is  pro- 
futilra  lb  Mur9— Suesi  maximam  putant  ^.svW«//(/6r/i.  quam  lati-Mtne  a  suis  fi nibus 
IS  V  aqro'  ;  •  the  lands  are  waste)!  Ca^s.  li.  G.  4  3.-Grave  crnnen  est  hoc,  praWrmi 
Koc  s  habuisse  decumfinos  (it  is  a  serious  charge  that  rt /mp/or  shoul.l  have  ^^^.^  f?-}- 
Cic  Verr  2  3.  m  Hence,  of  coordinate  That-dauses,  one  takes  the  lorm  of  minfimtre 
chiuse  if  if  Vont.iins  an  a-sumed  preposition,  while  the  other,  referring  to  an  ac  ual  fact 
fake^  the  form  of  a  Ouod-dause,  as  :' Non  tanfum  inali  est  (  =  so  -reat  an  evil)  p^ccure 
;;;i;*;v-/r..'  (V  ndeis  .U.  wnuiL').  quantum  iUud  q>>od  permulii  imitutOres  principes  ex.stunt 
las  that  so"manv  imitators  exist).  Cic.  Leg.  3. 14. 

3  PuKDicATK-NorNs  WITH  Ut-claisw.  AM)  NE-ci.ArsKs.-\  ctus/,^/  /^'.T  (  lege  m- 
mv7^  •.  ro/^C/i//7^//n  esf^  amicitite,  ut  i<lem  amTci  semper  velint.  Cic.  Plane  2.5  - 0?n- 
snlusfnit  =  consensu  decretujn  est)senatus,  vt  mat  Ore  Prot.o.sce.-emur.  b^I-am.  3  3  1 
P  iinum  est  offf'-i"fn  (idea  of  dufi/,  Obs..'))  vt  (homo)  s«.  con<ervef  in  "'  une  ^tat  i  lb. 
!'■  n  8  r  '>0  -Ejus  cultilne  hoc  7»hnusest  (idea  of  task,  Obs.  5)  ut  efliciat  etc.  lb.  4. 14.  38. 
-Fuif)^  (uioddam  inter  Scipionem  et  I.elium  jus  ,i(lca  of  right,  or  permission)  jj 
sch)  o  I  .'lit  obsenaret  parentis  loco.  lb.  Wep.  1,  2.-Mea  7'aho  in  diceiido  hac  e.<>s^e 
solet  (it  is  V  lis  a  A  /.^  Obs.  r,)  ut  boni  quod  habeat.  id  amplectar.  a  tnalo  autem  rec6- 
datn  1  Orl  ^V-liriculvrn  est  7ie  (according  to  the  analogv  of  T>^reri,  =  ^'^rendvm 
i  )  ///om  .esVoi)iieconveniant.  Liv.  25,  3^. -Nullum  est  exxxm  penculum,  w^qnid  iu  elo- 
o  \  ',?i^  ita  p  leu  e  ut  Mc.  Cic  Or.'l,  A>^.-Haud  sa.u.  p.7'iculu7n  est  ne  7u>n  n^or  em 
op.andam  putet    lb  Tusc.  5.  40. -The  co'nsiruction  oi  i^ricuhnn  est  with  an  infinitive 

'*^;;^:T  iniui'^^L^^nol?;;' a^^  ^-  replaced  hy  verbal  or  adjective 

nre  ficates  the  subi  "^  is  treated  according  to  the  rules  of  Fact-clauses  ^7?.  2(,).  as: 

?'«/'rmiVte    li     /?    /^0^^  Alpls  patefi.ri  volebat  (the  fact  mentioned  «-as  the 

cause  if  th" mission)!  C;es.  B.V^^,  i!_Gravc^c^ianw,rj^/^^.;^./;/L.ti»iL!:^^^J^'!^^^ 
""  ♦SuT-h  predicate-nmin's  of  gel^eral  import  may  be  expressly  added,  as:  AlUra  est  res, 
vt  res  geras  magnas  et  utills.  Cic.  Off.  1,  20, 06. 


*;i» 


•\ 


614 


THAT-CLAU8ES. 


opinio  de  di-  immortHlibu.  on^nlurn  essot  (.ho  f-t^non,ioned  -;:™^^,f;j J^^^^^^^^S 

ffi^^'^v'Vro^  =^flrS^^^  rccipias  in  necsHiiulnu-m  tuam  (the  «/m/. 

?[;,^  s  A^Va;  ^nl/Jrt  ^:;^Ai^  ^^,)  Ii>.  Or.  1,  1.. -Est  »1-  c^njnflne  a^.^.  n;  n..,n.. 
librn<quecivitHtil>n8«nnvi(iia  plonre  comef»  Pit.  Ncp.Chab.3.  (It  i»  a  wcl,  con^quem 
to  the  «Tcatness  and  liberty  ol  a  (^tate,  ///'//  etc.)- 
OBs  ^10   There  are  several  couveutional  usages  in  regard  to  subjcct-clauses  connected 

"i*X''<au'";^.trul,  it  is  alb.wed  by  the  ,od.,  it  i.  prede.,in<^.by  fate)  is  not  cou- 
strned  wiTl.  an  Ut  Jiu^.e,'  a.  .hculd  be  expeced.  but  wUh  an  7:f;'^\^;^, ^T^Hu  c  Icgt 
«(/r-i/e«  ^« «.'!'< <«^,"=-^/  3  2-2.— Si %o.<  hoc  nomine  api)(Uanfastst.\h. 

^r'Tm^o^^^fa^  GerJ^n!>n.^ra,'e  iit  was  not  a. creed  ^^ /«'^f''"',/.^^,  ^^;!;: 

S;.^;?"mc '^n  til  ^Si/m  /  it:^is  Shi^d  by  r!te,  is  roL.rued  eliher  wiOi  a 
K  -cf  infiniM  e  oV\  vith  a  It-clause,  or  uiib  an  intinitive-(la,.se.  the  PredKate-n.flni- 
nirw  nrrS  tense:  as:  Ihiplntit  fatum  fuU  .-^  ecpn.  aid>-re  (it  v. as 

ordaim-(yf,y  ut.hat  D  .ph^  should  fall).  Cic^Kat.  :J.  5.-F..(  lu.c  s.ve  nu-um  sive  re - 
pub   ciyX^^^^  nt  iu  me  un.im  omnis  ilia  iiulinatio  tempornm  !''^-''"\''«;,^'\- /   '  ^^  ^Prn^^ 

Kumt'iuim  t/^/trTrt'.  lb.  Div.  2,  8,  20.  _ 

2.  The  predicates  ,le„..tin«  '  i/  i»  «^  *<;«' '  ("W  «';  «"-^'f ''"?  'fl''„rw  ImhiMfc.  tt 

r,.  tiv,.^  .the  hibit  exist:-),  as:  K<»iro,  quia  was  est  ita  rofjaodi.  Cie.  tam.  i..  i..    m'i    ^l 
rmpi^;  ro>!'/el^^  <leos  ai^i^>'a,Hii :  The  habit  of  disputing  again.t  the  eM.i- 

'TtI^^J^^'^I:^^'^^:^^  i:'-tS;.-'ii^h\ime.  the  proper  time)  i.  ^qniv^^ent  to 
^.,V/.' «<S  .To  timt  a  Tbat-clause  cannot,  logically,  be.  in  the  relat  loi.  of  ^^;;]!^^^^^ 
nT  fCe  to  this  expression.  According  to  this  concept  .on  M/./>./.  .^  s  mc  '"J»^^  ' 
strued  with  an  uttiibut  ve  gerundial  «leiiitivi-  (see  p.  Id'.»,  Oijs.  .3).  liut.  '""■^^nj.M"'-;."'^ 
L";>  I-  Us  construed  with  a  s./Jrcf.infi.itire.  or  with  ^^^^.^'l^^Yu^^ll^^iZ^a^^^^ 
an  imuer-onal  predicate  =  experJit.  as:  Jam  (emp't.-^  est  ad  id  (luud  inMitnimus  «^<'^'7^^^- 
Mr  Ton  1  5  -Sed^^m«w^v^■/.  jam  hiiic  (ihlre  me  ut  monar,  ros  ut  vilam  agStis  lb  I  use. 
\  4\yrelwuseT\w^^^^^^  perpetua  v.ta  cogiUlre.  lb.  Att.  10.  8.-The  construct  in  of 
];,npus  ly  wUh'tn  Tt-clause  ii  ailteclassical,  as :  Dicas.  ^^^'/"'f"-^ '"'»";  ^^  "'  *^^^  '"" 
i.nm    Pbiiif   Mil   4   :3  8  — Videiur /t^/^yvJAsf^^ef// eJlmus  ad  Jorum,  lb.  1,  i,  »-«. 

4    Peculiar  is  the  toormarjis  est.  in  the  meaning  •  there  are  stronger  reasons    (it 
foroH  thing  than  for  another),  which  originHlly  was  a.te.hnical  l-'^'-'j^'v/ ''    ^^^^^  ^  ;^"i;- 
sioii-beiiK'  extremely  frequent  in  the  Pandects  and  in  I  Ipian.     Hut  it  "'^""^^^"rf.  » 
m  lin^rv  c  a<«^ical  prose    It  is  c  onstrued  (as  if  =^  i^'>s  caum  est,  or  major  causa  est)  either 
u     "an  S^'i/^^^  Quod-clause    (with  su)>juiutive),  if  it  refers  to  reasons  lor 

'<  irtf/  SOUK'     in-'    as:^J^^^        est  j/MCielius)  ip-e   moleste  ferat   errasse  «•,  q"»'"   «^ 
i-^^TwaS  ^^n  There  are  more  reasons  lor  (  u'lius  to  feel   why  he 

Iho  .1(1  led)  s  urv  fo   his  eiT..r  than  etc.  Cic.  Cel.  0.  U.-Macfis est  quod  yratuhr  til.i  qua. 
Mioi.Ki  '*^^'\^'-'V;/''' '".p,  .   .,     Tf  ;j  „,.fcr,;  to  reasons  for  -beCvin::',  or  '  adoi)t.ii«r    an 
^;■:!^:'c^Il:.^^^^n  l^£l^^<;^  But  this  construction  occurs  only  in 

'^ois"lL' Impersonal  predicates,  consisting  of  inipersonal  genitives  or  im per ^^^^^^ 
datives  are  treated  according  to  the  same  rules  as  prcdicaie-uouns  ;  as  :  EU  mihi  ma<jn(Z 


SUBJECT   THAT-CLAUSES. 


G15 


,  *  u«  «rn,iTstnr  Ptr  Tie  Fin  3  2,  8.-Scient  ;)rtM6w  cvree  fnissc  ne  r\\\ti  \\)}\\nB, 
oir(t  vt  ^^^""^^V.^4  7 -F^/i^^  "^^m  SI  am)  deOrum  judicio  inbui,  la»datid»is  est. 
cU' Or.%'S'.-;(;iiS  t.:^o:!ill^^^nento,  c^vod  pila  e'x  scutis  evellere  non  poterant. 

^"^^nf  "12'  ioinetimoB  impersonal  substantive  predicates  take  q»in-clauses^^  '"j'^'lS^ 

i.  That-dauses  a»  Sulijecis  of  Impersonal  \  erbs. 

Item    "8   The  active  (or  deponent)  TMrKUSoNAL  veibs  wl.ioU  are  con 
strnedwrih  Tl  U-cbusesmav  be  divided  into  Iburgronps  :  1)  Tl.osevv;  nch 
nZ'sen      ,c  idea  of  a  ferbum  seniiendi  or  dedarandv:  Apporet  {videtur). 

See  Oi"s  I  -2)  Tliose  which  represent  the  idea  of  a  tabum  fmiendi :  Fit, 
mdilTccidit  imdlf,  nenit,  mu  verat.  contingil.  oblingtt.  est,  stat,  (Obs.  2).- 
3  Th  «e  ld"l.  rep  esent  the  idea  of  an  adjective  predicate,  denotmg 
a  iu  "nu".  of  tl  e  author  on  the  morality  or  merits  of  a  P!"!'?^;""^/ 
lleet::mLi,,rep,.jnat,  o.^riet  (neeesse  ^^^^  '^^^ .'^l^'^^^^^^Zti 
refer!  non  altim  t,  prodtst,  ex  nm  est,  obest.  See  Obs.  f — 4)  A  teis  okdin auy 

;^TEUVEUBS  ^:l.ieh,  by  their  freqtjent  ^"»"«f,"'';,^;f  1"^  Li- 
clauses  have  assumed  the  character  of  impersonal  veibb.  Accedit,  sequi 

'''aMrl'ubim''^mt^hu.st;  connected  with  these  four  groups  of  imper- 
sonals  takiute  form  of  an  innuitive  clause,  or  of  ^  fimte  c^-e  intro- 
rlnced  bv  lit  ne  ouod,nnominus,qiiin,oHhe  form  of  an  asjnacuc  suo 
ncvecluise  according  to  the  i-ules  of  that  class  which  they  represent. 
^^tWect  FACT-c^AUSEslsee  It  20)  may  be  connected  ^v.lb  any  onhnarv 
veS  predicate  which  admits  of  tlie  idea  of  an  action  as  subject  (Obs.o). 

liar  is  the  per-^onal  construction  <•»«/>/?;  rf^{  Tn  iU)^  "iS^a^  data  sunt  ut  ad 

passive,  according  to  the  analo-y  ol  '''^'''^/P;.^"*^.-  '^*''?"^,^    p'L  it  is  clear)  is  some- 
!^,,andam  vita.  ra,iOne.n//a/a  ....  «/V>^^^^^^^^^^^ 

?Mues.  but  rarely,  used  ""P^lf^'"^ '>  „V,  *,  23  -L  7 /'  i  cllr)  mostly  occurs  with- 
idesse  quod  se  ipsum  moveat.  ^1«- JJ  »■  ^;  | •  ^^^  da  ,.e  w  h  (lative  of  the  person:  Num- 
ont  s.i).jeet.  but  also  takes  a  ^"^J^'^V !  f.  .  n^hal  eJit  Liv  ^45  So  Ter.  Andr.  2,  3,  3(5. 
q..am  lUiumt^  uoOis,  ihi  ^f^^f/^^^^ff  Jj^^'l  .^  f^'nticmli  ridere.  is  virtually 

2.  Videtur.  being  grammatical  >  the  P'^^^'^.,^  *^^,;";,;'V"  .j^.^^  it«  logical  subject  in  the 
an  ac.ve  (deponent)    '.'-Personal  ver»  v  -      ^;^f,  ^"  rm^d  wi  h  ^^  ^'«"«e  :  Non 

ddtire  (the  same  as  hcd.  placet  etc.).  and  is  con/'Jiueu  ^^  uu  un  i  ircauentlv 

1;:mMtur  ad  beflte  vivcMidum  saHs  ;>^..  nr^,^..^  C  i^^ 
takes  the  personal  con^t.uctio.i  of  the  n   n^^^^^^^^^^  although  it  has  a 

i,  retains,,  bv  «.^.^  P^"  |;'J-  /^  ,7,,  f^,  fxpres  ed  o?  tufdeJ^tood':  Mihi  videor  )^^}  de 
orai/miafic'd  subject  ^^\y^^.."^."^*"^'l^\  ]^^  __Vere  T?n/ti  hoc  videor  esse  dicturus. 

bmt.ibus  lebus  ejus  gestis  </m.s>6.  V  •  u\ ho  :?;:;,    n-  \  re  '  Ived  '  (hko  placuit),  and,  in 

visum  est.  Liv.  So.  33.  .  ♦„toe  „,-,  infinitive  clanse.    Its  logical  subject  is 


616 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


T  know  or  '  it  i»  evident  to  me ' ) :   Constare  int^r  omm^  video,  pcit^re  aurlo  tnas  qnerSliB 

^n      v^^^^^  condaMif  (M   became  evi.iei.t  to  me^  paucuimn  civinm 

r!;-;«-  e  "/  ^  -Omnih,.s  (n.ilitil.u.)  cw..'-7/../aall  the  .old.er. 

!  f  ».i   M^U     n  VA.iiin  />»oWrr^  J        4. '^'J.— Sometimes  con.^tat  (witliont  a  per- 

^"Kd^\>^";%";i- --r;;'^^!^':^-^^  =  I^om^Jum  nobis  ami, 

''folnJ^^iflil^^^^'il^^^r^^  or^ituaare.r.  In  the  former  t..-aPin.Jt 
bt'lon<-  to  he  third  elas*..  (See  Obs.  :\).  In  the  latt-r  meaniiii;  it  is  I'duivMleiit  lo  (O/  - 
si,.^k;"'ro  s>   /i  ' '/  etc  \  re  ernn-  ei.her  to  the  truth  of  a  propoHtiun.  or  to  on  action 

inZith'e  €1^  the  l.x'ical  sui.ject  be  in-  cxpre.ssed  by  ^inter\  as:  Inter  omm.-^  con- 
r;f /^^  opcnte  (All  ^h<  ufd  a-ree  on  the  fact  that,  ail  nhould  acknoNvled-e  that)  conuno- 
^  ^^Ihni^Iim  a  recta  ratiOne  aversas,  es,e  vitiOsa^.  C.c.  '»\J^?«' ;;;;-{^"^  ^^'^^ 
HnU'urfHouuhtiWi  Perfect  a  (K^^v);  'There  js  a«:reeinent  on  the  point  that  ,  oi  all  tic 
a  ho  i  era.'rce'  (hat  the  remainder  of  the  war  was  carried  to  the  vnd  by  the  consnls 
Liv  i  ir-irri/nUir  relern  to  an  action  to  be  performed,  it  is  cither  construed  with 
nn  nl^L^v  (,^^r^  with  an  asyndetic  clause  wi.li  a  predicate  in  the  subjunctive  he 
io.Mca  sti bjects  bein-  expressed  by  the  daCne,  referring  to  the  one  party,  l^'tl  bv  the 
ir;  (siti  I  C-/  /I  referrimi  to  the  other  party,  a« :  Mihi  can  Dejotaro  cotyyoit  i//  lie  m 
}ne  s  cas  is  cssJt  cum  snrs  copiis  omnibus  Hviad^  an  ngre^oi^ct  with  Ih,otar,>s  that  he 
lhnfu?ibec\c)l'\i  Atl  G,  1,  It.-Pacto  c«/.ma/  vt  Hime.ulinis  re-m  Syracut^am  esset. 
L  vtl  tlpro  ar^M,nti  si  aurutn  dare  mallent.  dare,d  conr?,nt;  U  was  ^t-pu lated  in 
tlie'treatv)  that  they  should  l>e  entitled  to  pay  in  -old,  instead  of  lu  silver,  il  they  prc- 
lerred  it'  l.iv.  38, 11.  Conip.  CMc.  Tusc.  4,  19,  4:^.  Plant.  Aul.  '.>.  :i,  80. 

r,  nl.^emt  '  they  disa-ree  '  (bein-  the  contrary  oUonreint)  is  construed  with  avudcr- 
f^riafi^ZlaZe  the  lo'ncal  subjects  bein-  expressed  hyhder\^s:  Q.nn.tum  ini  mim 
Sspor  am.n;4  tntel'  auctort^ dUcrepat:  Liv.  2«).  2:,.  But  '/.o/.  dWrjput  takes  n(>nn- 
J  .Maccordin- to  the  analo-v  of  ^non  dnlAtdre^),  as:  ytc  di.^cnpat  q,An  (nor  is  tl  eie 
anv  dit  Vrence  of  ..pinn.n  as  to  the  fa.t  that  etc.)  di.ctat..r  eo  an-o  A.  Cornelius  fm-r.  L  v 
8  40  -()uum  hand  dl^crepdret  r;jin  qua'  re-um  fuissent,  Komanr.rurn  es^ent  U  »^^n  /A.  y 
auned  that  what  had  lunnerly  been  under  royal  dominn.u,  should  become  K..man  terri- 

^'V'lil'v^^itan  renit  (it  occurs  to  me,  the  idea  comes  to  me)  takes  an  infinitive  clanse.  if 
it  i's  eiuiAient  to  ,n.mini.  as:  WnU  hoc  mihi  in  menfem,  1e  fs^e  liou.mem  div  tern. 
iV  uf  \  1  2  2  4J  If  it  refers  to  an  intention  of  the  doer,  it  \<  either  construed  wi  li  a 
B.  bjecMnftnitivc'or  (rarely)  with  an  Lt-clause :  Ne.pie  rnitn  ^^^^l^^^r^Y*^"}'^"  '"^!>r^;i 
Cia«s„  inridfre  I  never  thou-ht  of  envy.nir  Cinssus.  Cic.  Ati  2,  4,  2  —  U//i{  ""/'(..»" 
m^dmari'nl^nnf  petam.  Plant.  Cure  4.4. 2.-SMnilarly  the  l^^Y^^^,?'^ ^JillliliuUIn 
2wrven>t'  is  used  iuipersonally  with  a  snl)ject-.nfimtive  clause:  Ad  auils  mafjutiatuutn 
7><'/i>/*ii'.  exnles  in  iirbem  (levenisse.  Nep.  Pelop.  :i*.  ,  /•„„;/ „,^   «r 

7  m/it  me  (I  am  mistaken  =  opinio  fallif  me,  mv  opinion  deceives  m^\f>gtt  m",  or 
vmf'Tmelh  me),  take  their  l-.-ical  subject-  in  the  arrusnire,  heiii.;  con- 
{ tiS  w  th  a  s,ibjeet-inflnit;ve  clause.  Xon/a'tit  me  ,s  also  construt.l  with  ^Q^;-^'';'f 
(ac  or'iinu  to  the  analo.^v  of  non  duhito  )  ;  ^w\/ur,it  m.  sometunes  ^^^^^/''^^'l^''^^ 
tive-  Failit  eo>>,  dicendo  homines  ut  dicant  ef^eere  .oleve :  'J lay  are  mi-^taken  >"  «l'^»r 
opinion  ti.at  men  will  learn  speakin-  (u.ake  th^.t  they  speak,  1.  e.  ''%*»7'{;;;^>  I^.^'r.n- 
in<r  Cic.  Or.  1.  :M.-In  <hac)  le-i;  nulla  e-sw  ejusmodi  capit<i  te  unu  JaUit.  Ih.  Alt  -i-  -i-*- 
-See  vero  Ca-sarem  fefellif  q"in  ab  eis  cohortibus  victoria  oriietur  (nor  w^;is  (  le^ar  dis- 
anooinied  in  his  exii  •ctaii.,M  that  etc.).  (^es.  B.  O.  :i.  IM—Neque  enim  tf.u(/it  onii.uim 
art'imn  parentem  pt^ito..ptun>nJ.dirnri.  Cic.  Or  1,  3.  '.>.-.!/.  tan.en  fn-.-nU  .leOrujn  in.ino  - 
talium  has  esse  ptenas  onstiiatas.  lb.  Pis.  2(1,  40.  C..mp.  Ca-^.  P..  C.  1,  .1.  Cic  Att  .  In,  .|, 
Ib.Caje.;«.   Tul  vhm^c^  opinio  me,rallitU^i\i<^^:i(M''fctans..n^:^^-c^^^^^ 

nem  multum  fef'-llisse  q»od  existimaris  me  causam  Cluentu  le-e  d-fensQrum    ID  C   u..  ,. 

8  /ZeY,  u'iich  takes  its  lo-ical  subject  in  the  dative,  is  used  with  J»":/Vi  ,1.  Ilh 
meaiun-s  and  cmstructions  :  un  Plm^t  mihi.  m  itie  nieanuiu'  'I  'ike  ,  s  ineti  11^' 
pleaseslne'  is  construed  personally  with  a  substantive  subject,  or  imper>onady  ^^^  >>  «^ 
tubject-inflnitive,  or  (as  rerbum  <ifect>is)  with  a  (^lod  clause,  as  :  -V^'i  •'•"''!■  .f^y'-^''^'''.^^ 
mihi  semper  p/annf.  Cic.  Tusc.  2,  :i.  '.».-Ne  mihi  «luulem  ipsi  tunc  //''i'^J'';; ''  ;\  '^,,'^,^:,';;^ 
ab  reip.iblicai  cu>iodia.  lb.  Fam.  «>,  15,  3.-Ait  Quiutus,  lil)i  mm  pfocere  quod  ad  n  t  s 
de  me  asperius  scrip-erit.  lb.  Att.  11.  13.2.-  (//)  In  the  meainn-  '  if  is  proper  it  st.uyls 
(witliout  a  dative)  with  a  subject-infinitive,  or  an  inllnitive  clause:  Placet  »"  ,« ''/..^"//^f 
quid  sit  offlcium  ;  It  is  proper  (for  me)  to  dellne  hrst  (or  'that  I  should  defl.;e  li;^-  '  « 
idea  of  duty.  CicOtf.  1.  2,  7.— P/(/c^/  es^  guiddam  in    republna  pnestaii^;  It  is  i)r«)pt_r 

combinations,  as  :  '  In  dif^quisi- 


*  The  verb  venire  is  used  impersonally  in  some  other 
tidnem  venit  \  it  is  a  subject  of  discussion.  Liv.  20, 31. 


■% 


SUBJECT   THAT-CLAUSES. 


617 


S  t^rjS^^Iif  T.r  3  i3Xi(;/rFr;qu:Mn{y -^a^r?  acet '  ha.  the  for«.  of  •  I  resolve  ^  with 
rhep  M^Wt ';///;/«'  r',  or  '  mi/n  pfaritnm  e.t\  In  this  instance  the  reL'ular  construc- 
tion-hat wnh  an  It-clav.e,  or.  if  the  predicate  is  a  passive,  ^^ 'Ih^!'/;'^"'  u'  14  T  ' 
is :  Senalni  placere  ut  con^ules  eis  ^^V\^^^^^^^^'^^\'l^'^^^^^^^ 

I'lacitum  eJnt  in  .-MmIco  loco  considered.  ^  V  I^fl'/^V"^/.^;-*  "f,\^\™  ^ 
re,s(.lved  to)  (inecOrum  oratioiies  explicarem.  lb.  Or.  1.3»,  l.^i.-IIunc  locum  ^"'^;'^ '""','; 
rtmn  placuit    Liv.5.:i8.     Frequently,  however,  an  inhniive  clause  i>  used  exen  wUh 
ac'tivc  i)r%i  ates,  as:  Placebat  Valerium   Iloratiumqne   ire   m  Avenilnum.    L>v.  3  oi 
So.   etilnes  ac.ivJ-intinitive    clauses  are  used  wiihthesubjectacctisat.^^^^^ 
riacn'  IkeOlos,  Achieos  etc.  temptare  (  =  se  temptare  Bieutos,  or    Bceotos  temptan   ). 
Li\s'  35  47 

There  are  three  imner-onal  svnnnyms  of  fVart^  namely  ;  Jurat  delect  at  nrnMibef.— 
nJlectat  i  rar  ly  ..y^d  impersonally,  bt.t  .oineiimes  occurs  so  with  a  ^"!>J<^^;;;"fi»' ".^ 
dlect  t  me\  it  ddid.ts  mi),  as:  Sunt  alii  quo.  cum  ipsa  ^^'"^^^^l^^l^^^^^^J;^ 
Tiwc  3  ^\— Jurat  me  (with  the  same  meanmir)  is  Irequently  used,  both  with  a  PUtij.ct 
h;!inuf;-e%om:^hne"in  the  perfect)  am»  an  i.Mlnitive  clause,  as:  ^-  >- -lf^-^« 
fitsnere  Cic  Fam  3  \0 —Jurat  m£,  x\h\  n\A<  litttras  projui>:se.  lb.  tain.  .5.  .il.  3.— />ioec  or 
K  /;.i/.    (\vi       t lie  p^^  mtum  est.  nirely  libuitL  is  similar  to  the  fir.t  niean.ng  of 

^ Inret  \m\   m      e-  the  id«'a  of  an  arlntrary  action  (I  choose),  and  is  used  only  of  actu  n* 
^Sl;  iScS'subject.^  I'is  either  con^rue.!  with  -f-^i^^^fl^i^'^^l^SZ 
form-adjectives:  Lubet mihi facere  (to  si&y)  in  Arpinati.  Cic.  Att.  1, 10,  li.-Z.t6tfw/n  e^c 

mihi  paullo  plura  dicere.  lb.  Or.  2,85. 

9.  Licet  mihi  (it  is  allowed  to  me)  does  not  denote  a  positive  P^r^^^^jon  (^h'ch  m^ 
he  pxores-ed  hy  '  conceditur'),  but  a  want  of  prohi/ntion  (licet  mihi  =  I  l»'^^f  "    J".  Lv 
mav   lean)     llence  it  cannot  take  a  j.assivc  ajrcnt.  Wkc  ^  concedituf  ;  but  thepei>on, 
or  thim-  which  ni-htpr^^^^^^^^       an  actiin,  is  expressed  by  'Z^/;'  with  an  accusative  (;>^r 
«L  /    er-  I  have   n     <. Iji'ctic.n  ;  per  leqes  licet  =  it  is  lawful,  i.  e.  the  laws  do  not  pro- 

n>  r>  -7iVV/l  as  tree  rcMilar  constructions  :  1)  with  a  mere  subject -vifinitire  if  the  per- 
io      Init  h  s  a  Sd  t  is  not^  represented  as  uncerta  n  :  Stultitiam  «.c«.<7r. 

mini  "is  c..i)i(v7> /?>f/  •  It  is  allowed  to  arraijrn  lolly  {my  may  be  airaigned^  '^'';,,^''^- 
C  VV-Q  o  u'i  H'n  velis  passis  pei^ehi  liceat  (Would  x^^i  we  could  proceed  X\^e^■^ 
.  tc  )  li  i  49  '>  If  the  person  wlio  has  a  ri-ht  is  mentioned,  either  a  mbject-iufinitive 
fuUaUntwith  he  u^rs>nasol,ject(locricaT  subject)  in  the  (/«7  m  or  wMth  an  asyn- 
Vncsidh^rcti^^^^^^^  tlic  P'Tson  beim:  made  the  qrammatiral  .ubject  of  the  cbuise  a.: 

PecalX^  n  >bodv  is  allowed  (has  a  ri-ht)  to  ccmimit  cnnies.  ^c  Tusc.  5, 9. 55 

_  ta  se  J  -ssit  ut  ea  facere  ei  liceret.  Ib.-Pet is  ut  tibi  per  me  ^^^f  ^  R"^»Vb' Fin  2'S 
m/»/r^r^  that  1  should  not  of^ect  to  your  recall  in- some  one  fro  .11  ^"^  ^,^•^\'':J'"•2•28•- 
7;/X/£;// /r  i//i  M-r  wjf /"W  .'  I  have  no  objection  to  their  ti-htinir.  lb  Tusc.  4.  21, 47.- 
iil^SurU^^^^  He  ^^'11  »''^^«  a  perfect  ri-hi  to  follow  llermairoras.  lb 

t'v  1  '  r  -Ft?  in  fu  mina  fortan:e  conternmlmus  licebit  si  etc. ;  ^ye  may  even  (we  have  a 
M   lit  lo  'dii  e'irl    1         m  fortune  if  etc.  lb.  Tusc.  2,27.    The  use  of  an   It-cIause 

r  iVr?w  f  ■.in"i"  vndetic  subiunctivc  clause  is  unusual  (as  in  a  passage  literally  rendered 
f  o'm  the  Oieek  -^^^7  1^  venia^-  Cic.  Tusc.  5.  :i2,  90).- Less  frequent  is  an 

.•X/iv^i«v^w  th  thel()Mcal  subject  oUicet  as  subject-accusative  of  the  clause,  as: 
Htc  or  eSta  •  V/^^^  ficet  ma^nifice  virere :  A  jy^rson  observing  these  rules  may  live 
mtn  icentlv  Cic  Off.  1.  2G.-/.i^.?  me  id  scire  quid  sit  ?  May  Iknmo  )vbat  is  the  ma  ter  r 
miirniiKini}    V  K,  -L/u  construciion  of  hcet   with  a 

alli^/^lnnith'^cliuJe  ve^  n'^^^^^^  of  a  transitive  subject-infinitive 

f   ih.  Uica    subSo^^        is  not  mentioned,  as  :  Erocari  ex  xu^x,\^  (yprios  non  hcet 

-  frirJ  y  Cw '  S  noi  icet).  Cic.  Att.  5, 21, 0.- Coopfnn  sacerdotem  hfcbat  (  =,<l";'f  f ^^ 
iaVnlOt!^"' ^-  1  ^- 1^^"^-  3^  1^''  ^--liatibnem  hablH  per  leges  licet  (  -  ratiOnem  habSre).  lb. 

^' A'comDlet'in-  or  accessorv  predicate  of  the  subject-infinitive  oUicetx^  orenerally  placed 
inth'T/Svwhc^itS^^^^ 

Po-t  7.-rt  sifn  triumphanti  urbem  invehi  licet^et.  L;v  -iS,  44.  bo  lb  35,  8 -CT^a  «gMW 
li,,r^  lir?h(d    V'll  Max  4  7  ext.l.  Comp.  Cic.  Tusc.  1. 15 ;  lb.  Rose.  Am.  49  ,  ise^.H.ir. 


A\ 


G18 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


SUBJECT-THAT-CLAUSES. 


6iy 


in  the  accnsativo  even  if  the  loqiral  mh}fcf  iv  in  the  dative,  as :  ^o- licet  Q^/l^/.f  j  "^.^ 
tib;  .w^wi/'^/M  ess.v  CMC.  bjnn.;^  14.  b.— J^i  ci<i  ii«'ii  juiu  t«  ij„i,it   4  4  (i  •  lb   7.1,11». 

erat  ai.i.us  quo  per  loge.^'t  con.ultm^fienlueret.  ties.  B.  C.  3, 1.  Cf.  ^»  "  •  -^' ■»'     '  ' ".      '\' 

The  cou^tnu-tion  '  ^i  /i<v/  f^>v  Unw '  i.  als.)  applu-d  to  f>ecesse  est  nud  (in  tl'C  ;  ^ ^^r  [^f; 
tinitv)  u>/,;o/^'r">/»'L^  *am/;.     TUe  o>u>tr.ictiou  V.r/>../»^  voOis  e.se  tx^na.    oc 

"';o''?WUn"!iiu;l;^..»nally  in  poetry  and  in  the  prose  if  ^^-^''-[.SSrThS 
iavYi         S  mUarly  <wv'//«  ..>V  i^  u.»ed  in  Tac.  lli^t.  '2.  :^«,  and  ^a  1.  lli<t  1.  1. 
;.^/;e?uu.v;.a";r"'^°Vcrr..,3,l^ny^^^ 

h'^^:^^:^;^;r^.^:^^wi^i:-.^;;]e!^i^nn.^^^^^ 

1  hive  not  learned  less.  CMc.  Or.  1, 11».  n.-M.puUet  ta.n  c.to  de  ^^^'  ^^""^^.^^r.^^-^^^^,^^^^^^^^^  ^^  ' 
14)     ND  \% -J  > tin/tire  cluusl  are  n.ed  with  these  verbs  if  the  V^'i^'^^^^'^^.^'^;- 
ve.  as  :  Nonne  esset  pumu,n,  non  n.odo  le^ntum  sed  :^'^^}^;^'^ ;;r^;:;;,X^S- 
WH;/V,i?  Pie  Flacc  «i^  52 —The  use  of  a  subjeet-intiiiitive  witli  tittiet  is  antecassitai. 
S  rdin^   «  lhe'antt.^v  ofnenlet,  the  verbJ  soltintare,  punrjere,  and  ''«^/^''^ J.!",»^.»;;-  .^ 
lary  .lyKO  are  used  in.persoi.ally  with  loj^ical  ^»^;i--»f J''  !  .^Varn^T  I's  i     a"o    /<^  iS 
tive-clauses,or  Qnod-cUiuscs  {Paiujit  me  tjaodscribis  etc.  Cu-.^ani.  .,  lo,  1  ,  ^^'d"f^y>y: 
at,ds    lb  G.  4,3;  nihil  me  ma-is  ^.Miritut,  quani  mf  non  7iiltre  tecum.  ^»  •  ^'{f,  -'';;',; 
So/Jni  rai-ely  .  sed  in  place  of  doko ,'  but,  in  -ood  prose,  it  is  construed  neiiher  w  t h 
f  dnuse      or  with  a  subject-infini.ive.     The  sentence  '  Dotet  milu  q"od    a  uunc  somo- 
?/.S-"s-'V.cHTrs  in  a  letter  of  Brutus  (L'ic.  ad  Brut  1. 17,  «^^v''ich  probably  is  spurious,  bo 
with  a  Si-clause  :  Mifd  dollbit  *i  quid  ego  stiilte  fecero.  Plant.  Men.  2,  3,  W. 
Obs.  2.  Impersonal  VEKBsc<>rrespondin<;  to  a  wr^/^/m/rtai^/'f/i-  to  denote 

A.  The  impe.sonals  denoting  '  it  happen,  that  etc'  ^^^^^'^'^^y.^^J^    m»  r-omds  a"e  rtl 
what  haupeus  or  happened.     The  nu..l  ^'eneral  among  these  di  tie  rent,  '"M>^rf•>n  ^^^  «'^   -/if 

and  Si?,  which  a'ri  frequently  used  as  ^t^stn^^^  ;^^-^;f^^%:;^^';^':^^^  "'^'^.l 
instance  the  Ut  clause  is  to  be  considered  as  a  Prtdicate-daih-e  (p.  4b«,  Ubs.  i\i).  liui 
ollen  some  additional  idea  is  expI•e^sed  by  tliese  impersonal  forms.  ^ 

1    Fit  vt  represents  (a)  an  action  as  happening '.som^^iz/J^x' or  '  qtten   :  J-itutnannji 
ipshid  ornat  iSs  dicendi  genus  incitCMiiur  J  it  ofUuUm>^'n.  that  -e  are  urgedj^>-   le  v^ 

loree  of  circumstances  into  a  higher  style  o  ^l><-'^^'''i-'/  'S"  ^'^\V  V,  I  nw  fibat '^ 
est  is  often  used,  mostly  corre>po..dini;  f.  '  it  is  a  fact  that  \  or  *  o  lie  i^'Pl>^'"r  '»','/  .; 
Vs///^i)leiT(iuei)hilosophi  nulia  tradaut  praicepta  diceudl.  Cic.Or.2.  3i.  l.)2.-(«») /-ir^  s 
also  uiel  to  lei  .'  ate  an  action  as  the  rLdf  Horn  facts  previously  mentioned  generally 
rn'mmectlon  witli  ita,  either  by  a  /or/i.v.aonclus.on  ( /f/ .^^  V^Un^' l^  uZ^T U^^^^ 
as  a  consequence  of  historical  facts  [itajactutn  est  nt) :  Ita  Jit  (t  uis  it  "f rP<*nf' '"M'^  }\ 
fulhnvs  «/  -anientia  sanitas  animi  sit.  CMc.  Tusc.  3,  5,  lO.-7/a  lit  ut  quc.d  bo.mm  Mt  id 
e  1  n  tne;tTin  sli  lb.  Fin.  3,  8,  27.-(?.o  (  =  Ua)  factum  ^/t.  "t  ;>|n'.Is  innjaratos^^^ 
den't  Ne»  A'^e<.  2,  3.--(()  '  i'Vtri  ;>o/<^n/  nV  means  'it  is  }H)SMble  that  ,  M\(\  neii  non 
f^^JeiwT- it  if  impossible  that  %  as:  Potest  feri  nt  res  veri>osi«.r  hi«c  fuent,  jUh  verior 
Sit  8  3  C -aW"^  fi^ri  jJOtek  ah  equitibns  K.)mrinis  ut  snos  necessanos  canduhltos 
n^it:.c-tentu.  tob.s  dies  (it  is  impossible  that  the  Roman  knights  should  attend  to  etc.). 
Cic.Mur.  3t,  70.     For 'pri  uo/i  jxjte-^t  quin' f^ea  i).  m.i.OBn.':. 

2    iccidit  ceneially  is  construed  with  a  subject  Ut-dause :  Accidit  nt  illo  itinere  venT- 
refLaiS  cm^^^  2, 1.  24.-lIoc  tu  igiiur  censes  sapienti  accidere  posse  u   a-ri- 

udi   e    upriinatur:  Th.n  vou  believe  it  can  happen  to  a  wise  man  tt.a    he  should  etc. 
I     'Ai-c^3        -  aoidit  an  adv,Ti>ial  or  other  qualilyin-  expression  is  adde.l.  denot- 

1- //o^t' a  tl  in- happens  or  happened,  the  subject-clause  -eneraly  takes  the  form  of  a 

i,;>Kaus  :  .46ril/  p.nncomL,de  quod  eum  nusmiam  vidist.  ^"  l')'''*'"',lV7iA  ,1  s[ 
ve.iientlv  that  etc. ).  Cic.  Att.  1, 17,  2.-(|mun  ei  nihil  pnfJ^r  consult udint^m  "<^<-i'J^'f'JJ. 
gSvilMs  nobis  llonul  profectns  est.  in.  Cat.  2,7, 16.-(>yv:o;/.nt.^ma  r..  ««'J^^^  «^J^ 
i>o-tri(iie  Germilni  frequeiites  nd  eum  in  castra  venTrenl.  Lai-.  B.  G.  4. 13.— in  place  o i  a 
Q"(iy  ia^^r^o  uetini?s  an  infiuifive  clause  is  used  :  Illu.l  mihi  permlrum  «^-f'^fj^;!  «"* 
Lientat^im  fuisse  in  adolescente.  Cic.  Kam.3  11).  5.-But  «;>;i'«'''"^'='„  .^!»:.';  •>>  "J^^ 
clauses  are  used  even  in  place  of  Ut-clauses :  ObligJtus  ei  nihil  eram,  nee  euim  accuitral 


. 


r.-  -corv,  fi  11  1  —N'oaue  tanta  pernicies  ulla  acddere  potest  quam  rati3- 
mihi  opus  esse.  Cic.  Fam.  6, 11,  ?•— \*^^*}"?,,  v  -rr  2  l  2  Such  intinitive  clauses,  however, 
nem  verna.is  ab  hoc  ordme  ^i^o:'dlcal^.l^.\^^.^^^^^^^  \ou.\^X^  of  a  copula. 


classical  style  is  expressed  by  ]'}^^'%{^^'%'%li '  he  san  e  se.S.  but  reading  doubtful, 
tur.  Tac.H  1.7).  'f'^^'^'-'^'^'^f'''^^^^^^^^^  chance,  but  of  such  actions 

4.  Evenit  is  not  K«»«'-*"y;;.f,  i,^/-^^  ^'y  1  L' determina         of  the  gods  u^  turns  mt 
which  happen  either  m  rt'j: "liii^^c^^"^^^^^^^^^^  ui-clause,  or  with  a  Quod-clause  it    t  is 

^Sfied  'il^^airallS."  r:^S'i;:i;;^'t;;'e.....  ut  m   vmgus  insipientium  opinio 


iVv  'quominus,  imparling  to  '  ecenit "  J^f/ "'";;;;  V'»;.  ^^'^    ^^J^^^^  ,^,,,,,s^^o  liceat  (it  happens 
t^.  T^.  cS IslSlI  ;?Xlhlft  KiXSr  master  from  holding  the  slave).  Pomp. 


iN'hiCh    111  «MlOil  prose,  ai"«*v' •    »■   ""•  -  •.       ,-•       1     u- 

trereret,  obiiqlsstt  (i.  e.  by  ,-ortitio).  C'^;/,^]''i,;,\.,  i.appens  cither  in  the  dative,  or  in  the 
%.  Cadit  takes  the  person  t»  NvUom^onei  ling  Jm^m^c^    synonym  of  acddif  but  is 

It  is  construed  with  a  »A.Ti\t;, J^^^i.^^'.,,^,^  ^vnression.  In  such  a  con- 

rcommode  cadit 

'err.  1.  2. -Hoc 

lb.  Or.  2,  4,  15. 


I     \ 


G20 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


£' 


TO  the  example,  .iven  there,  the  fo^owin.  pa.s.^j.r^^c^^^^ 

„^r  ///m<  */./Jx.v./7"0///t/"/v  <1>^'  odeieiur  a    '      'J'^:    '    \',i'  ,,.J,,,,  ..J»  quid  hibi  faciendum 

e.set,    KluuHos   consuleratflros    e..>c.   J  V,;^ ,; J '•-,'>%'    [^^^^^^^ 

'.oMU'hody  is  not  .vspou.ib.»'  lors.Mm  f''   '  /;  ' '^      '^^^^^^^  pe,sc.(,n.-,ru.ur 

wiih  rt;/j//   a--  L'tr  siiue  app;iruU  mini p^r  nltetOf^  ^nire  <in(/fninrt.^  m^  i       i      .,..'_, ,11,-:; 

lirtnly  ,IH,.r„m,o.l  to  pvr  ,.r.n  .n  >i(l.oi  .  1)  1  "'"^'  ;^f    J™  *i,,    ','.,.  1.    .lo,,  n,.uri.hini? 

■^t„'.  3.  lMrE,-.soK.LVK„n.  rcpr«c„,l„,.  the  i.lea  „f  ..m.ct.v.  or  ..-b.t.nt.ve  pbed- 

CATKS.  .  d^  ovnr<'«»«*  tlic  idea  'it  is  proper',  (beinix  similar  to 

1.  /,,cefana  conr^mt  ^;:^;^^^^;^^.^  iXr»'    c    .Vn-u.  d  ether  wiih  n.subj.-et-inf,ni- 

(gnuu/n  e<'.  par  e-'if.  ete.,  Yi.  ^* ,  UBs.  .n.      ^'''^^  "'.,  ,.,„,.,,_.)in,r  to  the  mire  p  U-  .xp  anied 

Ji.  oii.OBs.H»  m.y  tak-  an  I  t  clause   '»^>'V-T/;^»  .?/J/  ('ic  Tn-c  4  :il  m.-lJei>t  cano- 

rem  nobis  essepahiam  jpuitn  '''.J'^JV.W'^ '   i  ^^■^\];,rZt^JLi<ar.  pro  Ic-ibus.  Cic. 

1,  2,  4.-Quid  est  n^^-'\^;!!'>'':;!;;;\^;;!^  {^^'iZ^r^  qJam  uoc  su/v«^>t  '  \nm  quum 
qui  solum  malum  dolOn-m  esse  '"^f[- ''' .  "  r,,,  r,^,,^,f  r,  n,  -.u.-Q'n  enim  ronvtirit  (\t 
Julore  cruciCMur,  diet  ilrum  esse  ^'VP^''"' '"'•./';'", /;,;,,ji,.s  f^  eidcm  in  re 

is  hardlv  nroprr    C(Uisistent)  vt  qui   m  rebu>  impit>  ij»  P''»;   '7,  ., '"  ..   .  ' 

•i.  /lepu;ii,<il.a  1«  "''■"'''''*''"   ^.- ■"'''/,','„.,;.  V),"'/«a(:  .•iiim.  recti-  <iecii>fre.  H 
ct  multi-  m:ilis  oppre.^i^um.  lb.  J^»'»- ^'^;'';  •  '•  . ,        ^  nece^sitv.-Both  o/iorfef  and  7>ecesse 

T)  isS^.^-  --f  ^"^''' '^1  ^;r  ^ui^^ :;,  j;;^:;M!;*i:?ir  m^  s^d^  ^:;i^^ 

tlu.se  nuM.  called  ;M>>^  Il>- \;  ^; M-^J;-^,^^^  o,mtlbnt  (the  temple  ou.Mit  to 

dr/m.  II).  Tusc.  i,  15.  •^^•-V'V'*''\  *  '^'(C;V.4r  1  V»  i:W  -Hoc  habeu.us  in  prouiptu.  lahd 
hav..  b..en  driven  over  .^^J  .^^'IV'  'V,;;;/!^V^■i' •^4Ji;•  ,,/  a  priueipio  o/-7ri  o//./.m.  lb.  1, 
ODorfSreioopinadim  nden.  I' •  ^''^^^V^;. r"*:^!"  *„.' ,;  „„!,,„  ih  3  7, 15. -Qui  ulconcupi- 
i^.r^i.-Xeces^e  est,  qui  fortis  sit.  f '//*r/r/n  ^^^^^^^'^^'l  «^  ^^  V  Vb  3  9  1!)  -If  the  preterite 
erit,  ewn  nece^se  est.  si  nl^c..nseeQius  s  t.  nai^n  i^re^^^f^^^^^^  ^,^„^^.  »,,^     ^^ 

tenses  of  o;x.;V./  mean^  'ou-ht  to  1^^  e  .   h    1^  ^^^^Vj  ^^^'^^^^  y^.  ExclQdit  eum 

placed  in  the  p^,fert^  ■V'^"^-'!.^'w?rjr;    f^L  m^  b  -"  ad.nitted..  Cic  Verr. 

Cat.  1,  2,  5 


a 


ref 
t^ 


at.  1,  2,  5.  „.,,^^„.v  ri  »t-<:t:-«^  *  '  E-o  Crimen  onortet  diluam  ;  It  is  my  duty  to 

jfute  the  char<,'e.  Cic.  K.  A.  13.  3t..-  1 1«,  si  quui  ^  ;\V^  j  Tusc  5  5  18.-OmuiH/fr^/t^ 
t.t  (you  had  bet.er  t-.  look  f'»-/7»«,";^:\Jf  ,^//  to  doev  Tvt  in-i  betbre  etc.).  wi  Phil. 
op'Ttet,  priusquam  aliquid  po-tulet  (  t  is  »"f./''''>„^  *  *  ^.^.^;!,  'jy  >,  7,  ]0.-No..  p«.testea 
VK2r,.-Aut;7.c<7/^<r>/x>r/./.autquulv,spotmsq^^^  „, 

n-.tnra  hoc  uno  scelere  esse  <;<'V'^''VlVi;};i/ TZ-.^i^  «-^^'l»'^' 

\^.rr.l,15.40.-C^.odsl,ta^s     a-W^^  7   ,4 -Aut  \v.^c'facfn  n<ni  .vJa|^ 

r^r?7>;a/  idem  necesse  est  timiditJltem  ^'^^,  -'  "\  *  "\% '^  ,-,:    i;^,i,,c  jus  in  dvitdte  coiisti- 


SUBJECT  THAT-CLAUSES. 


621 


ieints   ,ii,.!t,  opu;  e,.  ^tt",?    »  "»i'''  ""  ^  '"-'"r"- '""'";  ."'''r^'oV"- h '.erest '  (a.mlo- 

?i,:.„-.utio,,  u,,'.-,  .;;/;'■' •: ,f ^^^e^e  tm  ;-U!ina"  occur' ai.o  "i'''»"' i;"':;";»^ "  r-lS'.m 

-I-  r/  ,  Iw     •  ii  «<>  hi'  'li'i  a-q"al>iliHr  ;  1'  '"■"'';f*  \"i  _F„rvi  rfftrt  ro«  vecti^alia  piw- 

j;;r,r?,;e^.'?i.t:aj.a,reeeu.,j      .^ 

futflra  smt.  .«'»•  M^r  ^;^,  ^,.1,,^  verb's  <with  r^y.^r/.    ^  7"  "Yli  clau>^e  is  found  in  Cic. 

vy"Si':>ori\tiv;*Ni.-.3«:ii  .,;!--•, 

sr^,.'t;;:,ra^'.icli^^.A''i"«iL-'^,-;^^^^^^ 

i„  uuch  construciions  a*^;»"  «>*'-'*'y  .    •       verv  plaus^ible  theory  ;  »V\,.:t  uit>    an  accusa- 


G22 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


5.  The  ideas  '•it  is  mefiil,  expp'Hent,  or  Jinrtful\  are  Homctimcp  roproscnted  by  the  Im- 
personal  expiessionsf.r-f/.s-wt.sY,  or  ta:  r<?  ^.s7  (it"  is  expidient) ;  ahrtext.  it  is  iiitxpedieiit :  or 
l)y  tlie  in-ntei-  verbs  prodesse  and  ohenfie  in  an  impersonal  form.  Prod> x(  with  a  suhject- 
iiiinitive  or  an  iiitlur  ive  clause  oceiir:»  in  poet rr  and  in  the  Latiniiy  of  the  silver  a-e  : 
Pliirimiim  proderif  p'leros  sitatim  ^alul)riter  inxtilui.  Sen.  Iia.  v>,  21.— (^iiihiisdaMi  iiiliis 
jyffuit  a.'^ptaixse  hpecuhim  :  To  some  it  has  been  useliil  to  look  into  the  ylafS  when 
anirry.  lb. 'J.  8().— O/v^v/ sometime^<  «)C(ur8  with  an  intinitive  clause  in  j^'ood  prose:  Nam 
etllfos  nobis  iion  ttbesf  rideri  no.<fru/n  texfifnoni'ttn  non  valnisst*.  Lie.  .Alt.  1,  IH,  11. — 
The  exprei*ssi()ns  ejr  UfHf  est.  ex  re  t>-t  (it  is  advantntrtous,  expt-dient,  *  of  interest ')  are 
construed  with  inflniiive  claii^cji.  except  when  an  It-clans»-  is  used  in  a  ne^'ative  .«ense, 
according  to  i?.  *»,  Obs».  <5,  as  :  Matns  fanjilias  s^oriiljus  declaiabant  \\\\\\\\\  pr&l'umi 
comniitfi  e.r  ttsn  esst-f,  iwcuc.  Ca-s.  B.  G.  1,50.— Libido  est  opinio  veiHQri  boni,  '^r/od  fit 
ex  i/.ti/  jam  pr(P.<iei).'i  es{te  atqne  adesse  (of  which  it  is  thouirht  expedient  that  it  should  be 
pre-eiit.  i.  e.  tiie  present  enjoyment  of  which  is  considered  desirable).  C'ic.  Tiisc.  4.  7. — 
Ex  Km  re^voti  e*-/  id  ego  tmoriar.  Plant.  Pseiul.  1.  3. 102.— 'I'liiis  v  re  pid^icd  est '  means 
'it  is  of  public  interest  \  'it  is  in  the  interest  of  the  republic':  Ne  mai:is  e  re  piiblicd 
es>ief,  iiderregnvin  iinri.  quam  in  eo  statu  relinqni  provincinni.  Liv.  ::5. »».— '  yl,'/  reesf 
means  'it  is  inexpedient  \  with  the  same  construction  :  Non  ub  retake  (^uinctio  vieum 
est,  sociOrum  aliquou  legdfos  inferesse  ei  consilio.  Liv.  :i5,  '22. 

fi.  Pnestat  (it  is  better)  tak(>s  the  conslniction  of  scdixst  est  (p.  «ill,  n.  *).  Sufflcit 
(—S(dis  est)  is  construed  with  a  subject  Ut-clauso  in  tlie  bilver  age,  as:  Sufficit  ut  biiu- 
l)bx  (luiddam  et  uniformc  doceilmur.  Tac.  I)ial.3:i. 

Oiis  4.  The  foUowini;  imporsonalsdo  not  belonir  to  any  of  the  above-mentioned  classes: 

1.  Accedif  (  =  a<ld*  to  this,  that)  requires  an  Vt-clause  {(t)  if  the  clause  ex|)resses  what 
should  l)e  done  :  Accedif  etiam  illud  >/f  stdtiu'ilis  hoc  judicio.  utrum  posihac  etc.,  to  this 
must  be  added ///7/^  ijou must  defen/iine  in  this  trial  whether  etc.  Cic.  Halb. '2S.  (>ri.— Eo 
accedibnt  ut  nietu  reirmim  ei  fufundu/n.  esut^f.  IJv.  1,49.— (/y)  If  arrTdif  refers  to  an  action 
reprt-sentcd  a-  jH)ssUde  or  con'i/if/cnt  (H  accedit  uh:  (^uid  si  acctdtt  eodein  '//  tennis  ante 
fiieris  ?  C'ic.  \l.  A.  31,80.— -S'ls  vero  illud  quoque  acctdtt  iit  in  ea  verba  pia-tor  jndiciuHi  «let 
etc.  lb.  Verr.  2,  "2,  li.  In  all  other  instances  the  use  of  Quod-clauses  or  It-cIauses  with 
«cc'^'/jV  is  optional,  as:  Accedebnt  vt  ha'c  tu  pro  republicil  queri  summjl  cum  niirnitato 
ex'tsHniarere.  Cic.  Or.  2,  48.  C'ompaic  with  :  Accedit  illud  (/uod  ilia  plebecula  me  a  Pom- 
pej<»  iinice  diliiri  putat.  lb.  Art.  1, 1(5,  \\.  —  Accessif  ut  eqiiitibiis  i)er  oram  disi)ositis  atiuari 
prohiberentur.  Ctes.  B.  C.  3,  24.  Comp.  with  :  Accedebnt  quod  suos  ab  s»-  libt-ros  abstractos 
ol)-idum  nomine  dolebntd.  lb.  B.  G.  3.  '2.— For  examples  with  ut  see  C'ic.  Sen.  6  :  Dej.  1.  2; 
Mur.  'II,  45 :  Tusc.  1, 1').  43 ;  Fain,  h,  12.  8  :  Att.  :i.  N  1  :  ib.  14.  13,  B.  3  ;  Ca's.  B.  G.  3.  13 ;  5, 
IB  ;  Liv.  1,  41).  For  examides  witli  quo<l  see  Cic.  Att.  1.3,  21,  7  ;  ib.  1,  IS»,  1  ;  Fam.  <>,  n.  S  : 
R.  A.  8,22;  C;e-.  B.  G.  4,  Hi ;  5,  «> ;  Liv.  1,48:  '2.18:  3").  10.  [Kuh.nek  says  that  accedit 
must  be  construed  with  r/uod  if  the  fact  is  supposed  as  correct  :  and  that  uf  mu>t  be 
used  if  thefuct  is  conceived  as  'devilopini,'  itself '—which  distinction  is  purely  ima^'ina- 
rv.— Mkikin'cj  states  that  quo  I  is  used  if  an  existing  fact  is  mentioned  ;  and  that  'arcS- 
dit  uf  has  the  sense  'Moreover  it  happens  that'.  Almost  every  example  j)roves  that 
this  distinction  is  erroneous.— Zumpt  considers  accT'dif  quod  the  le^'ular  c<uistruction, 
and  acc?f/i/! '// an  occasioiiul  exception,  which  is  rwluted  by  the  fact  that  t>ofh  construc- 
tions are  extriMuely  frequent,  the  one  occurring  about. as  often  as  the  other.] 

'2.  Rtstat  has  the  meaning  and  construction  of  relinquUur  and  nliquum  est  (A'.  27, 
Obs.  1 ;  Obs.;")*,  requiring  an  I't-elause  :  li'-sfiif  uf,  qualis  t-Orum  natilra  sit,  considerCnuis. 
Cic.  N.  I).  '2,  17  4r^.—Ii'tstat  ut  niotus  astrOrum  sit  voluntarius.  lb.  2,  1(3,44.  Comj).  Ib.  L. 
M.  10.27;  lb.  Quinct.  12.41. 

3.  Pertifie/,  with  a  subject-clause,  has  the  general  meanin£rs  'it  pertains,  it  referst,  it 
beloiis^s',  being  alwavs  accompanied  with  the  object  to  ir/iich  the  facts  stated  in  th« 
clause  are  said  to  belonir.  This  object  is  expressed  by  ad  with  an  accusative,  or  by  its 
equivalents  (tO,  eode/n,  hur).  The  clause  takes  the  form  of  a  Quod-claust'.  instead  of 
which,  if  the  subject  is  an  indefinite  i)erson,  a  subject-inllnitive  is  used  :  Kodrw  ptrtittet 
quod  causam  ejus  probo;  It  pertains  to  the  same  (end)  that  I  approve  his  cause  (  =  the 
fact  that  I  at>prove  will  lead  to  th<^  same  end.  will  have  the  same  etrect).  Cic.  Att.  8.  9,  1. 
—{C.esar  dixit),  quod  victoria  suil  tam  insolenter  i.doriarentur,  tddtin  ji^rfinere  ;  Ca'sar 
paid  that  the  insolent  boasting  <»f  their  victory  ?ms-  of  a  puce  with  their  other  conduct 
(literally  :  '  belonged  to  tiie  same  thini,'').  Caes.  B.  G.  1, 14.— An  tu  ad  domos  nostras  non 
censes  pertinere  scire  quid  asiltur  domi  ?  Or  do  you  not  think  that  knoirinq  what  is  going 
on  at  home  pertains  to  our  homes y  Cic.  Kep.  1, 13,  19.—'  Ad  nm  perfihet'  is  sometimes 
used  in  the  meanincr  "if  is  proper'.  beiii<jj  construed  with  an  infinitive  clause  accordnig 
t<»  /».  '27.  Obs.  .1,  as  :  Ad  rem  })tiiinPre  visum  est.  consules  primo  (in<)que  tein|)ore  cndfi. 
Liy.3!),'-ii.—Pertinelntad  vtrn,  proeceptlfres  pueris  placidos  (/(wi.  Sen.  Ira.  -2,  '22.— Karely 

*  Literally  :  addf  quod.    This  expression  occurs  in  the  poets  only, 
t  The  English  'it  refers  to  something'  cannot  be  expressed  impersonally  hj  refert^ 
eiuce  the  verb  ri'ftrrc  is  not  used  as  an  impersonal  i)redicate. 


ATTRIBUTIVE  THAT-CLAUSES. 


(S 


nertinet'x*  used  as  a  svnonym  of  interest  if  the  clause  refers  to  an  action  to  be  done.  In 
this  instance  it  takes  an  Ut-dause  or  a  Ne-clause  :  Ad  rejnpublicarn  pertinet  (  =  rtipubli' 
CiE  iuteresf)  ne  acta  mea  rescindendo  alios  in  posterum  seyniores  facialis.  Liv.  2«,  31. 

4  Seauifur  u-ousequiur),  has  the  same  construciion  as  ejficitur  (/?.  '27.  Obs.  1).  Hence 
it  i^  construed  either  with  an  Ut-clause.  or  (more  rarely)  with  an  infinitive  clause.  An 
It-clause  is  alwavs  necessary  if  the  action  is  represented  as  'to  be  done  :  Sequifur  ut 
causa  noiijltur  ;  It  loilows  th  it  the  case  be  defined  (i.  e.  the  next  point  for  an  orator  is  to 
define  the  case).  Cic.  Or.  2,  8!,  ;331.— Inde  et  iilud  sequitur  ut  minimis  rebus  non  exacer- 
heiniir  (Hence  it  follows  that  we  should  not  etc.)  Sen.  Ira.  '2,  '25.- Ex  perpetuis  gaudus 
nuum  nerspicuum  sit  vitam  befltam  exsistere.  sequitur  ut  ea  existat  ex  honestate.  <  ic. 
Tusc  5  ^i  iu  -Sequitur  vitam  hviWAm  virtQte  «)///d.  Ib..5.8,21.  Comp.  Cic.  Fat.  12, '28; 
ib  "lO'^i-  Fin  2.8.24.  Tusc.  3,  Ki.  34  ;  ib..x  18,  M.  Sometimes  consequem  est  is  used 
with  the'same  force  and  construction  as  sequitur:  Hoc  probato,  tWifttgw^yt*  €«^  beStara 
vitam  virtflte  esse  contentam.  Cic.  Tusc.  5, 7, 18. 

5.  Subject  That-clauscs  icith  Ordinary  Active  Verbs. 

Obs  5  Any  active  or  deponent  verb  mav  take  a  Quod-clause  as  subject  in  place  of  an 
onlinarv  substantive-subject  if  the  subject  contains  the  idea  of  a /«/c/:  which  is  de- 
ecribed'bv  a  complete  sentence,  as:  Rem  disfineftat  quod  utrum  arnulli  an  inerines  emit- 
terenturre.'ii,  irAvnm  conreuietmt  ;  The  fact  that  there  was  no  sufficient  atn-eement  on  the 
ouestiim  whether  the  roval  troops  should  be  sent  out  with  or  without  tlieirarms.  delayed 
iheaflair  Liv  .37  12.— Illud  niaxime  nostrum/#/nr/(7rt<!  imperium  qvod  Romulus  loeciere 
Saliino  (Ax-w?/,  eiiam  hostibus  recipieudis  augc-ri  banc  civitjlteni  oportGre  Cic.Balb.  13, 
31  -Thus  :  J  v7(7>a/ molest iam  quod  etc.  Cic.  Brut.  1,  2  ;  adjurabat  conMlium  ^''orf  etc. 
Cics  B.G.'2,  17:  r»//(/tctTri/  ">c  quod  etc.  Liv.  40,9;  comoatur  ^^oc/  etc  Cic.  Clu  1.  3  ; 
c<u isiUo  sufraqabatur  qvod  etc'  Ca^s.  B.  C.  l.Ol.  See  the  Ex.  p.  -.91,  Obs.  14, 1. -Subject- 
clauses  of  this  kind  mav  be  changed  into  r.bject-clauses  representing  the  passive  aircnt 
in  the  same  way  as  the  nominatives  of  substantives  may  be  turned  into  ablatives  by 
civi.K'  to  the  predicate  a  passive  form.  In  this  instance  the  Quod-clause  is  attached  to 
the  ablative  loot  the  syndetic  antecedent  id  (Rts  disfinef,afyr  eo  quod  etc.;  imperium 
nostrum  fuhdafum  est  eo  quod ;  mole.-^tia  aiigebatur  eo  quod  etc.). 

OB8  0  Ut-clauses  are  rarely  used  as  subjects  of  ordinary  (personal)  verbs  If  they  are 
used  so  a  noun  of  general  import  according  to  7?. '2«, Obs.  5  (rule,  duty  etc.)  mus  be 
?uppli  "i.  as  :  Quod  a^item  conHnet  vitam  fort.inasque  nostras,  id  est  7/^  quod  honest  urn 
sit  s  lum  bonum  judicemus,  potest  id  quidem  coi)iosc  au^gri  et  ornan  Cic.  1  «n.  3, 
sit    1(1  l'»';i',^^;;'^\,   ;';,„„,  ,,,;„{„,,  judicemus.  conHnet  vitam  ;  The  rule  that  we  should 

comidn-  the  moral  as  the  only  g.x.d.  hobis  our  lives  toqefher)   ^^'I'Jl^tV'n  n"resf,u 
this  kind  also  occur  in  accordance  with  the  principle  explained  7?.  '2b.  Obs   fi  represent- 

-th" facts  stated  as  unreal,  unreasonable,  or  impossible,  as  :   Quam  hat>ef  (i<Pn(ot^ll^ 
/"•i-rim  multis  annis  ante  fossess.im  qui  nullum  habnit,  habeat,  qui  autem  habeat 
amil7a  V    CV()tr  2  -22  (  =  The  principle   that   pndetarians   should   gain   the   lands  of 
X-rs,  and  that  pr<;perty-h(»l.lers  should  lose  theirs,  has  no  fairness,  is  unreasonable; 
see  the  remarks  at  the  end  of  R.  27,  Obs.  5). 

Obs  7    The  use  of  subject-infinitives,  except  with  the  regular  impcrsonals  (7P.27.  28  ; 
6  49f //'sO)  is  extremelv  rare  ;  see  p.  10^  R.  94,  and  the  examples  quoted  there      To 
fhese  the  nilovvim-nniv  be  added:  Bene  di^ere  non  fiaf>ef  derinltam  aliquam  regiOnem 
•  c  Or  2  2  3  -Tetnpiis  colloquio  non  dare,  ma-nam  ].acis  desperatiOnctn  ft/fV^f/.a/.  Ca^s. 
j3  (>  1  'u^yi,iai  pro'Iium  defuirisse,  mamuim  detrimentum  afferebat.  Ib.  1,  82. 

Or-'s  Still  more  rarelv  are  subject-infinitive  clauses  attached  to  ordinary  verbal  predi- 
ct Rsa^  A  /erg^^^^  ti.r  pe  sit,  id  numquam  vlile  ....  (  etthe  I)nnciple  remain 
tl  at  etc  <  C  c  Ofl-  3.  r2.  49. -Inde  /'.m  ad  triaHos  redl^seproxevhuMUcrefmaf  ;  Hence  he 
'sayrng'thit  the  fight  has  come  up  to  the  Trir.rii,  has  become  widely  km.wn  in  the 
forni  oT  a  proverb  (^turned  into  a  proverb).  Liv.  8,  8. 

C.  Attributive  Tiiat-Clauses. 

Jlcm  29  The  form  of  That-clauses  dependent  on  ^substantives 
(xTTinBrTivKTiiAT-CLAi:sEs)is  determined  either  (r?)  by  the  nature  of 
lie  <M,verning  .'<ub.st<wtirc  (Obs.  4) ;  or  (h)  by  the  nature  of  the  verb, 
'  whidi  forms  either  an  objective,  or  a  predicative  phrase  .vith  the  govern- 
hi"  substantive  (Obs!  ry){  or  (c)  by  tlie  nature  of  the  whole  governing 
vumZk  thus  formed  (Obs.  (1) ;  or  «/)  by  the  nature  ot  the  clause  itself, 
■which  is  determined  by  some  leading  idea  understood  (Obs.  t)- 


624 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


ATTRIBUTIVE  THAT-CLAUSES. 


625 


OB..  1.  The  jronoral  form  of  verbal  action.  dependont^n^b^amW^^  on 

gcruudial     or  l>articn>ial  ^-^:^^^^^^':^  ^'^J^fl^^i^'^J!^^^^  Cic.  Phil 

iri-neraily  be  replac-d  by  a   [^''^[■''^''''■^'^^^^^ 


that  of  a 

»y 

il. 

Liv.  4-2,  55  (  =  iraiidmm  <iu(»(Ualtn8  ^*'  P^/ J'J  '^^^.'^^    ;.,../Xi4s  may  be  corr.-ctly  chan-ed 
p.  IHO.  A.  ami  p.  lfi-2  (§527).  the  '-^••••''"•^'«^^^'^'  'Si  !   JJ  ,^^^^^^^^^  below,  are-ove.ue.l 

nto  some  form  oi  Tl.at-clanses.  an<l  manv  of     ^*^^/    ;    ^  q"«'t^'^l  P-  ^^^  f*'"- 

bv  the  sam-  eubstantivrs  as  the  .f^^/'V''      /       he    o  m^^ 
But  if  the  relation  of  an  action  and  its  t^nbj.ct  to  the  M>^» J    "-  "    '         '  j       j^  connected 

[net  exi.ression  than  that  by  a  mere  J^^'  Xv^'VXih  prefer ^e^^^  infinUlves 

with  -vcral  adJ,nvcts^t.K^l^m  exceptions  .ee  Obs.  5,  tin. 

^'o:n:=;;r;;[r'?h:^^^^ 

.*  8uhject.ch.u-e.  in  .■.-.'arcl  t..  a  "'>'"■"'."",['    l^»,'';  i,,  "i    aV«(  W<-m  amid  «-mpor 

■"I;r:;^,tt^::^|;,eaco„.ain.a,n^.c.o„ 

rcD-esente.l  by  on-'  of  ttio^e  verbs  winch,  acconUn-'  '•\'"  ,     '^^      .       t^e  same  form  as 
smied  with  compMlnq  Ohjecf -cliwm.  iho  claii^c  alnl0^tal^^ay^  takes  me 

w:;^ld  1?:' re(^.irid..f  ft  w.^Ve  made  ;'«P-^"i-;j^'^J^I7^i^^Sutivc  That-clanses 
A.  Nouns  imply.n-.a  r.r/>;///i  ^^J'  ^t     'A'l^^^^^oB  wcm  d  take  thi^  form  ah  object- 

in  the   form  of  i''./''*'^"'.  ^'^«^''^'^  >  .^^.^  Vr/.hri  ad  C«-^^^^  afrerel)antur.  om/rw 

clauses  of  .the_corre-pond,ngr.r^,a^ 

IM'ias  co-j'imre.  Cits.  B.  Cr.  i,  1  (^."{^j*  fj^.     on  _rAl//<r)r1  =  clamilre)  oritur,  nullam 

fanul.  jam  If^;-''!^  f^t^^'^i'^'^'i:^^^  (  =  flderi)  pnebet,  c,m- 

earum  vivre  dehi.-r&.  Ih. -i»,  i> -.U'l''^.  '-'^  p,',,.^  iiimileir  mc  htrrj'imndo  adeirit,  nnm- 


.vws  quidcm   idia  ostenditur 
t  /OA-f  ut  etc.  Cies.  B.  G.  1, 42 

jore  nieiiii?.    *"•  "^•'- '*' '%•/•, ni   i  .   Tn..»-  i  4-^^       But  ssometimes*   ^pe<i  takes  aii 

%..„,,.  Cie.  A_,r.l.;j.5;   ll..Vam  iK  1  1 .  Tu^^^.^  „,.,  ,„.  /,..j,,,obs.  8),a.- 


Si  «K-n  nllVrnm,  ,-<  frnclii*  appareat,  Uc.  Am;,' >/^-  "^ "    ^JriK.,',  «itl.  ailrHiulivc  Tliat- 
2    Holli  o/ii/iio  ami  snifi'iiltn  in;nn«;-l.  ««""/f    are  C"ii  irutu  "/i    , ,.„,..._.„„  ,-/. 


tandum  est,  8i  honestatem  ^/fn  ac  rdinire  ^enttntia  (.noois;       ». 

3.i.  lir,.  Co.np.  Auct.  Her.  3,  24  40  infinitive  clause,  accordin!::  to  the  construc- 

?,.  /'W^-.^in  themeanm-'taith  '  J/^^'^^l''^^? '^^^^^^  „i-i  populi  utilitatem  7««^'-*''^- 

ti.,n  of  creilere :  Fac  ftdem  (  =  fac  u   ^ red. nnm  /e     H„'  ,     i  j  ,^^  ^.j.^^^,,.^  ^  ,,„ 

Cic.  Aur.  2. 8,  22.-But  if  .fide^  mean.    »>  ""V^'*^  '  l^^ed'afcw^^^^^  ^^^^^'^  rerform- 

Ut-clause,  because  (like  pudum,  pacmV  it  i*  conctiv cu 


2.  Noun-s  corr.spi)ndins  to  verbs  of  ./««n/jf/,  take  i"V^  '^     ;      .     j^       2.  28,  51.-Patre» 

f,-;^!^  i:s,;;:'s;yi'j;.ri„"u:!;'etf:;^.^/e?e:,u'r^si;L «.  rZ,^no,m.  a.,uc  ab 

armisdiscederGtur.  Cies.  B.C.3.1G.  ^,^^;.,,^  imiwr^xrfi  rff  24  Ob?.  2)  are  construed 

C.  All  nouns  which  imply  the  idea  of  a  «'7*""^.*X%nstruc^on  with  passive  infini- 
with  Ut-clauses,  and  "^r'^tively  with  ^e-clau^eN  /.^^,,Xl  with Vi^r^",  a?  :  Per  totnra 
tive  clauses  (which  with  verbs  i^  ^'?'',;'?''i  '1  ftiimi  eS^ 
Italian!  edicta  missa  sunt  ^^  qms,  qui  ^^^^^^    «"^^  '^'\\^,^^  p^^^^^  vt  omnes  regige 

Liv.89,14.-Pr:etr,res  tvnafwnem  ^P^^J^f  \^'^"  ^X,^J*VactSm^  M.  Fulvius  litteras 

«tirpis^nterficerentur^Ib.  24  -25 -V.«  .^^^^^^^^^ 

extempio  ad   consulem  nr.tteret.    V'a:    ,«  ,\^pV...r    f'ic  Ren  2  :il,  54.— Paul lo  post  «««- 
civem  Homanum  adversus  provocat  nnem  ";[,^^,y^;^^,,V,  j    Liv  24,  26.-Hispala  prece^ 

tvu  Ml  messa.je,  containing  «"  "',^^'r.^   14        SrSt^  (  =  ^'^^  ?^ 

easdem,  w/seable-ilret.  lepetTvit.  I»^- ?;^j^^;-"-^^^^^^^  accusilret,  aut  acerbe 

a  command,  implyin,^  the  Idea  /,n..m6^^^  „,'^„5^  postea 

morerGtur.  ^'ic.  Clu.  14.  42.-Ju>sit    1  pr.pm^^^^^^^  GrjecOrum  civi- 

scriberet.  lb.  Arch.  10. 2-5. -Pax  data  P»^";, '  «^V",  '^'j  aSsatoriS  cnmyetudine  C  custom  ] 
tates  lil)ertatem  haoeren  .  Liv.  33,  3i).-><)n  ^]}^^'\^^q.  „^  dissclflte  factum  cnminer  si 

Lir;/  iat'i='.;:?S'L';4aJ;  ;:'er^tipc^n3iaLi'ao;.  Liv.  7, ..  CO.P.  Liv.  S3, 


wmin»>  nupliis  uiler  se.jtliiKerHni,..i.   ■"■.■  •""7  ",'„..  ,„,  .^^  noun  on  which  it 


626 


THAT- CLAUSES. 


the  clanse  is  loqiraJly  dopendent.  In  snch  constructions  the  {rovcrning:  noun  of  tho 
attributive  clause  does  not  form  an  eef»ential  part  of  the  sentence  (and  hence  may  always 
be  omitted  without  iiiipairinL'  the  oense),  but  serves  only  to  det-iirnate  certain  properties 
of  the  clause,  as  :  I'ritnuin  error  est  tol/enduttne  qui^  gequi  existiniet  ut  duo  unit  tiitima 
bonijium.  Cic.  Fin  3.  ti.  2*2.  Here  iheclaiis»-  '■jiequis  existimef  which  is  irraminatically 
an  attribute  to  the  noiin  error,  is  lojtrically  dependent  on  tolUre  (to  remove),  which,  as  a 
negative  rcrbum  fuciendi,  requires  either  a  Ne-clause,  or  a  (^uominus-elause.  The  noun 
frror  is  loirically  in  ap|M>sition  with  the  clause,  desiy;natinj?tlie  proposition  as  erroneous, 
and  may  be  lett  out  without  either  chanijinj,'  the  sense  or  the  construction  (Primum  esf, 
tollendiim  ne  qnis  existimet,  i.  e.  the  belief  must  be  destroyed  that  etc.).  Hence  arises 
the  negative  form  of  the  clause,  which  cannot  be  retained  in'  tin?  Enirlish  version.— Neqne 
eiro  nunc  coiodlium  re/nrhendo  tuum  gt/od  eas  tribus.  quibus  «rat  hie  maxime  notus.  non 
eduleris.  Cic.  I'lanc.  l>s,  44.  Here  the  (^u(xl-clause  is  lojrically  dependent  on  reprehendo 
(accordini;  to  li.  '-24.  Obs.  !>).  The  noun  cotmlif/m,  on  which  the  clause  is  «rrammatically 
<lep«*ndent.  woiilil  have  required  an  I't-claure.  Leavim;  o«it  '  conj^ilium  \  the  sense  of  the 
clause  remains  jinchaniL'ed.— Similar  is  the  followini:  :  SeniHres  niiniam  indidgeniiatn 
P.  K.  castigCinint  quod  eos  homines  qui  in  alit'tio  solo  oppidum-  aniilicarc  conhti  sint, 
impiiiiTtos  diiniserit.  Liv.  8!»,  .55.— Servus  earn  occa.Hon.eni  ut  littene  leirjltis  dar«>ntur, 
exxpecidbat.  lb.  2, 4.  Here  the  form  of  the  Ut-clause  is  determin»'d  hy  exajiectdf/at  (ac- 
cordinsj  to  Fi.  2-3.  Obs.  S),  althoui^h  irrammatically  dependent  on  occaMoftem,  which  may 
be  left' out.— Kx  hac  licentiil  htec  funnuia  cogifi/r  (  =  efticitur)  vt  fastidiOsa- m()]lesque 
mentes  evildant  civium.  Cic.  Hep.  1.48.— /Khutius  in  cam  opinidnein  Ca>stiiniam  addnce- 
bat.  ut  mnlier  imperlta  nihil  puiilret  ai;i  callide  posse  ubi  non  adessct  vKbuiius.  lb.  C'lu. 
5, 13.— Caedem  nii^erabiliorem  ca.-oix  ftcit.  guod  paullo  post  nuntiijs  venir  ne  interficerG- 
tur.  Liv.  24,  26.  This  Quo<l-clanse  lo^'ically  is  a  subject  Fact-clause  (A'.  28.  Obs.  h).  which 
if  the  noun  ca.>>w  is  left  out.  will  be  analo'i«)Us  to  the  passa<jre  quoted  p.  491 :  Snspectnm 
Alexandrum  fecit,  guoit  I'elnsii  pia^sidium  relictum  erat.  Liv.  4.\  11. — Sor>t  ut  dictatOrem 
diceret,  T.  Quiiictio  erlidt.  lb.  4.  2()  (where  the  It-clause  is  loirically  a  subject-clause  of 
etv/a/.  accordinir  to  i?.  28,  Obs.  2).— In  such  constructions  even  mere  intitiitire^,  which 
loirically  are  subject-infinitives  <(f  some  impersonal  predicate,  may  be  the  grarnmatical 
aftrif^ufes  of  nouns,  as :  Ilia  vero  d^ndi'mlu  arrognntia  est.  in  niinoribus  iiavii.'iis  ru<leni 
esse  se  confjferi,  quinquerC'inem.  aut  etiam  majores  «^Mibernjlre  dviirltse.  Cic.  Or.  1,3S: 
=  'Deridendiim  est  {•X\n\\wm)  confirm  ri\  while  jxrammatically  '  contUeri''  is  an  attribute 
to  '■arrogaufia  \ — Ma<^na  eriain  ilia  /««.<.■  vidGri  solet,  fufisse  casus  sapienter  adversusetc. 
Cic.  Or. 2,85  (Lou'icar construction  :  ^Magnum  esi  tulinife'';  grammatical  construction: 
'  Laiis  tutm-ie,  magna  ext '). 

Obs.  6.  Frequently  a  That-clause  is  jrrammatically  dependent  on  a  noun,  but  lorjirally 
on  a  verbal  idea  represented  by  the  «,'Overnin<4  noun  in  connection  with  s-ome  verb  of 
•general  import.  This  verl)al  idea  determines  the  form  of  the  clause.  Such  phrases  are 
potedatem  facere  (  =  penniffere),  toluptdtrin  capere  (  —  qauden),  vurr'ire  offin  (  —  do- 
lere),  condlvnn  caiiere  (  =  conntifnere),  negotium  dare  (  =  manddre),  fe>tem  eti.'<e  (  =  testifi- 
cdri),  rtiens  mihi  est,  or  sententin  mild  est  (  =  ro/o).  Ex.vmi'i.ks:  Cein  roluptdfem  tam 
iiyiCL'\\^i\»ingeuiinn pilose  in  nostril  republieJl  Cic.  Brut.  40.  117. —  Consilium  cepirunt  ut 
notnen  hujus  de  parricidio  deferreut.  lb.  R.  \.  10,  2S  — Homin'-s  te<tes  erunf.  pen«'s  .l^tnloa 
cu/pani  belli  e^.^e.  Liv.  39,  33.— .l/i.-/i>'  ea  sen5tus/<a^  ut  in  Ilispania  milites  legtrentur. 
Liv.  35,  2. 

Obs.  7.  Frequently  the  form  of  an  attributive  That-clause  is  determined  by  a  leadinjj 
idii'd  understood.  Tliis  idea  may  be  either  that  of  the  j^overnin;;  noun  itself,  implied  iu 
the  neuter  form  of  the  syndetic  antecedent  of  the  clause ;  or  that  of  a  verb  which  must 
be  supi)lied  as  the  connecting  link  between  the  governing  noun  and  the  clause. 

A.  The  governing  substantive  which  mu-it  be  sui)plied,  is  always  a  rerttal  noun,  repre- 
senting tin*  L'eneral  idea  of  a  rerbvm  .^entiendi,  declnrandi,  uv  faciemli,  according  to 
which  the  clause  assumes  either  the  form  of  an  infinitive  clause,  or  that  of  an  Ut-clause, 
Quominus  clause  etc.  Often  such  nouns  are  not  expressed  fjecause  tlit^  Latin  lanrpiage 
lachf  an  appropiiate  noun  to  express  the  required  idea.  Examim.ks  :  liidicnlum  est  illud 
{i.  €.  dictum,  remark)  Neroniiliium  vetus  in  furjici  su-rvo.  so/uni  e.'ise  cui  nihil  sit  nee  ot)- 
signatiim.  nee  occlQ-nm.  ("ic.  Or.  2.  til.— Po~id<>nius  de  lioc  ipso  (i.  e.  theme),  t-ihil  bonutn 
esse  \\\^'\  (juod  esset  honestum.  dispntilvlt.  lb.  Tusc.  2,  25. — Ilttc  ipsu/n  {  =  ordinance)  ne 
connubium  patribus  cum  idebe  esset,  non  dec<'niviri  tnlT'iunt  j)aucis  his  annis*  Liv.  4,  1. 
— (^uiini  lex  abrogatu»-,  itlud  ipsutn  (i.  e.  •  ilie  i)rohil>itory  clause  in  the  l;tw ')  abroiriltur 
(7'/f///?7??/,s' earn  abroL'ilri'oporteat  (if  a  law  is  repealed,  the  very  provi^ion  in  it  which  is 
to  prevent  if/.s'  aljrii'ia'ion,  is  lik<'wise  repealed).  Cic.  Ati.  3.  23.  2. — Totuin  iu  eo  (i.  e.  in  eo 
consilio,  or  in  ea  conditidne)  est  uf  til>i  impcres  ;  The  whole  is  contained  in  your  r-'solu- 
tion  (or  •  dffyinds  on  the  condi'ion  ')  that  you  c.ijitrol  yoursidf.  lb.  Tusc.  2.  23.— Nam  si  hoc 
Don  obtinetur  (if  the  principle  does  not  follow)  id  solum  fjonu/n  esse  quod  ln)nestutn  sit, 
nullo  luodo  probari  possii,  beStaui   vitam  virtflte   efllci.    lb.  Fin.  3,  3.— The  influitiv* 


ATTRIBUTIVE  THAT-CLAUSES. 


627 


Clause  ^..^.^^  ^:  ^.t^,:^^:^^^^^:^;:^ 

passive  predicate  {/i.  ^'\\^^-;^l'll!(:,   Ler  and  frequentlva  That-clause  may  be  con- 

h^aliS:^^^^::^^-^^^^^^^^ 

tive-clause  belot.ging  tc^a  noun  of  gene  al.mpo^^^ 

the  same  pre.licate  ^^'^''^''^^f    he  hL,'  ie  llf  the  -"^'ral  i^^iea  of  the  noun  wh:ch  is  to 
luis  no  influence  on  the  lorm  of  ^^e  ^l^use  "K  tl  e    cntra^^^i^^u  ^^^^  ^^^ 

be  supplied,  belongs  to  none  of  the  \^'^^:^ ,^'^:,f;  '^!~^§ I"'^^^^^^^^ 

treat ed  as  a  sul^stantir,  cfau.e  orf-act^^^^'^e  (R.  26  as.  ^f/^^,  ^^'^  «f  ^  ccedent  id  means 
ncm  afterat  L'cneris  humflni.  ^^»'^- Tu^c.3.  23      u  re  t"t.  .^u     i  mav  be  either  con- 

'advantage'.  'property  %  or  a  "o"';  ;>f  ^^'^Sr^^^JZji  26  Obs.  s",  or  as  an  attributive 
reived  as  a  transitive  object  of  f^f ^f / J,*^^^,^,^'^  >  accordine  to  No  B,  6.  Thus :  Habet 
Fact-clause  dependent  on  »  >« 'd^'^^"»    ru^cb"  S»'  Sn       »K>Se  posui,  delectet  [either 

in  Ihe  form  of  a  paruiiplc,  as:  „„„„,i._,  ,■,•,./„,  ronco  there  existed   that  villne, 

1.  -Kfeclinr,  ituil  tic.':  Fi.it  \f «  <!>  ™  f,^^ J' ?'  f,/";\'^?.io" ,,„  Lain  acerl.issimiim 

ftcnn,,  '''<-'' f  v-ri  foites  acrinril,^»  M.I  ,  I  u     av  1    l.ennuO,  _^  ,Zmodilm  ,t.^a.  great 

in  foro  diceret,  deluls^e;    mat  nc  '''^ V','; '^y  ' '^  /,   «,,^    (-?(.  Ren  3  39  -Frequently  Quo- 

t:^^  ll;^STa.;il,r;;;'^»'aflW.\  V';>»i«i'.«2....a  ^^,  .l  pater  puerO,u.n 
fiwlmmta  justitiie.  iLinni...  id  ..e  .  ui  """ J"  ;;,f,,V'    L.fnt  «c  )   Cic.  Off.  1, 10, .31. 

tvdin^m  omnem  procul  e.-'Se  ix   ^'M^i^nte  ,  \\  e  mu^t     uurn^  Tusc.  3,  ;^,  42. 

uam.lg  the principle^  ^'^'"^'>  J^^'^'T^TV/  'n ?  .  'c     o^^^^^^  qlod  m.hi'non  solum 

(>.  '  linng  (consisting  in)  thejact   :  ttuun  "^>»9/' f  "^j/j'y   1      ,     .  ^;^^  consistinir  in  the 
pro  Plancio  diccndum  est.  sed   etiam  Ij'-fj.^J^  X«  j^^^^^^^^ 
fact  that  etc.).  Cic.  Plane.  l'?-^;"\\,^      ''.  ""^.^^X^^^^^^^^^^  "'  ^"«-^^'^^ 

?ri;rs,K:?'iJi=ers;s.rs;ctiv^ 

Comp.  lb.  7, 15  ;  Cic.  Kai).  Post.  ''•  ^^;  ^^^/^f;;^^^  forms  of  the  dependent 

Hence  one  and  the  same  noun  may  "1^«'' ^•^*]'^'^,^™  "'"^  i,ata  est  vt  potentia  sena- 
Thatclause.  Here  belongs  the  noun  causa  «^;  .J  «''f^''^^^*;^  C^c  Rep.  2. 34.-But :  Sed 
tus  atque  anctoritas  nii!"'^-'-^^"^.  f  J««^?  f^'.f^^^^^^  by  the 

eisdem  de  cau>>i.<,  q^minus  f  !"^>^;',^^,^,*^  "  ; '"'^i'l*' r  c  1  82. -But :  Acc6dit  ilia  qno- 
gj.  causes  which  prevented  hnn  fvom  fl^;^'\"'?;.^'^^P•  V' J:  etc  •  The  cause  consisting 
que  ca..sa  quod  a  ceteris  [l\-tan  Ha  pet  Uun^s^^  hic%uoque  rafio  eos 


628 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


Cic  Fin  3  2  8     So  if  'cmtm  eH' \s  iipod  prodicatively  in  this  PenPe  :  Mn<nia  ra?/,«a  abw). 

Fonlfjus'8  acquittal  i>^  the  purpose  (the  iiit.ntion)  ot  prevtnftnrf  a  L'reat  (liMirn<  e  fr<  ni 
fain.x'  on  this  repMblic.  Cic.  Fontej.  12.  Caum  is  al.o  constrne»!  ^\^y\cur,  qnare  ;  and 
nuila'caum  often  taiies  a  (iuin-clau^o  (t'cc  p.  527,  a  ;  p.  54*,  B;  p.  &4-1,  A). 

Ob^  8  The  That-chtn^es  attached  to  '  tavtum  nhe»t  \  '  rii/dl  af>est  \^pa>iUum  af^st  'etc. 
may  he  conceived  as  jittrihutivc  That-clanses,  dependent  on  ' ab  eo  ,  l.  c.'uf)  ''''^^  -  "^ 
7.  adverhial  That-chi.iHe.,  accordin.,-   to  A;.  20,  Obs  4  (aO  eo  vt  '-'tc^).      T he  pred  cate 
'  abM'  is  thus  „s.>d  with  ahsolute  quantitntives  a8  ^uhj.-ct^  to  represent  the  facts  Mitta 
in  the  dause  as  lacking  realiti,,  hut  witi.  sn«;h  qualitlcaiions  as  are  nnp hed  in  the  '^n  .j.-ct 
Such  constructions  must  he  recast  in  En-lisli, -enerally  hy  makin-  ti.e  Iol'U.I  >'.'»J«-Ct 
of  the  chaise,  the  <;rainmatical  suhject  of  the  whole  period  with  llie  predica  e    »^  (are 
etc  >  fdrfioin  '  followe.l  hv  a  participial  noun,  correHponuIni,'  to  the  predicate  of  the  clause. 
Such  Thht-clauses  with  'a/>^.s-^ '  <.ccur  in  the  followini; conventional  connection»  :  (a)  Jan- 
i«mU.3  withan  H-r/a^Av.  = 'cornet hint;  is  .o./V/r  from  heinj:  etc.'.  T  ^.  co"^mu;t.on 
Ln-perallv  occurs  in  combination  with  a/ujf/if.r  It-chi'isp  (or  its  equiv..leiit).  >ve  h.-U, 
OBs  4  No  3    But  sometimes  it  isusedwithoutasecond  It-clause,  a- :   lant>n,i  ahtmt  ut 
ex  Vncomtnod..  alien.)  oecasio  i)eterCMur  :  .SZ/./V//-  uere  (hey  r>w«  takiti-  ntl^"'"??';  «'  Jhe 
distress  of  others.  Liv.  4,  .>S.-Parcebant  adhuc  etiam  niulis  aninmlihus  :   W"/'^  <iffrat 
nt  homo  homintm  occideret  ;  So  far  weremenjroin  kilU,»,  vnvh  other.  \^^'"- ^:]/- •*<;;.  .'.^ 
construction  is  thus  conceived  :  '  Tantnni  xpatunn  a'^erat  ahear^  nt  <'ic.   -.sinh  a  distame 
was  there  from  the  point  that  etc.    The  That-clacse  takes  the  ft)rm  ol  an  I  t-clause  on  ac- 
count of  the   neitive   idea  contained  in  the  clause  <^^- f '  \>«^-  '>- !'^»  '" /,  ,«'^^^1 
Liiinitvthis  construction  sometimes  occurs  with  jwrxohal  fuhjects, as  .N.pj//<^  /onj7« 
ai>erit  ut  ar-umentiscredat  philosophOrum  :  He  will  he  far  from  helievinjretc.  [i  e.    lon-e 
aS  abJo-ut ').  Cic.  Ac.  I>r.'2,  m.  1  7.-(.)  V.-ry  f-  equenth  .,/..7  i>  thus  -■;'^;-^^}\^0!^!^^ 
subjects,  as  nan  multam  abesf,  nihil  ahest,  vonlongvi^  abes  ,  paullmn  afHst.    ^'^    '    »  ' 
clauses  dep.-ndent  on  these  expressions  are  always  (;>//?«-(/;/>/.v<'x  acc()rdin^  to  the  princi- 
ple explained  H.  t'.\  Obs.  5,  as  :  Prorsus  7nhil  alj^sf  quin  sim  m.sernmus  :   I  am  next  to 
bein-  most  wretched.  Cic.  Att.  11. 15.-l)ocet,  non  lomiius  atM:^.^e  <pnn  proxi.nfl  ''*>f ';  ^-'V/J' 
nus  clam  ex  castris  exercituin  «Mlfleat  ;  It  wo>,hl  happen  no  laf^rihuu  the  i.»-xt  '.'H-'ht  t_  «^t 
Sablnus  would  secretly  evacuate  the  camp.  C;es.  B.  (;.  :J,  IH.-Pa>dlutnnf,j,at  V"/^'  \  «•  '"J 
inlerticereiit,  mqne  rnnltum  «//wi/ 7^/Jy^  etiam  castris  expel  .rentur;  ^  arus  ?6U>  for  jar 
from  belli"  killed,  nor  were  the  troops  far  from  beinir  dislodired  from  the^  camp.  Cas. 
B  C  2  3:. -SometitUHS  thecom|)lete  construction  with  ah  ^o  occurs,  as  :  ^erl>le  multatn 
abes^e  ah  eo  f/'tin  panels  diCt)us  dedQci  posseut ;    And  that  iu  a  few  days  the  ships  would 
be  ready  to  be  launched.  Cies.  B.  G.  5, 2*. 

D.  Predicate  Tiiat-clauses. 

Fern  30  The  nature  of  Pro'licate-clauses  in  jreneral  is  explained  p.  4W)-4S8  Prepi- 
CATKTn\T  ci-AirsEsalwavs  have  the  foi  in  of  an  I'tclause.  or  of  an  asynd.tie  subjunctive 
ciau«^e  and  are  attached  either  to  the  impersonal  predicate  est  (see  p.  4ST,  a  and  />),  or  to 
a  verb  of  doing  ( fare  re.  fi'-ri,  agere,  non  commiftere,  carere,  and  the  impersonals  denot- 
in<r  '  it  happens  ').  Thelatt-r  are  used  1)  as  circumlocutions  of  affirmative  or  iH'i-'Jitive 
imneratiie  sentences,  mostly  in  the  form  of  asyndetic  subjunctive  clauses,  as  :  I'ac  bej- 
hiJ revertare.  Return  in  fair  health.  Cic.  Fam.  If,.  18.  1.— (iiietn  virmn  Jante  vt  agno.<cu- 
tis  ;  Acknowle.lun-  the  merits  of  this  man.  lb.  Rep.  2.  20.  ryZ.-Car^^  en.'^'tme.^  me  alv|.'ci-se 
curamreipubiic;e:  Do  not  think  I  have  <jiven  np  the  care  for  the  republic.  Ih.  I-atn.O, 
24  4  —2)  To  make  more  emi)hatiCHl  either  the  predicate  of  a  sentence,  or  some  of  jts 
members  especially  adverbial  expressions  <i\^  pro/)^.  inr'if>t.f,  tihenter,  ' pro'fer  opinionem 
accidit '  etc  )  See  p.  4K8,  Ob:<.  10.  If  such  a  circumlocution  is  applied  to  negalire  sen- 
tences the  verb  committere,  with  a  ne-rative.  is  irenerally  u-ed  as  the  abstract  predicate 
as:  E-'O  non  commit  tarn  nt,  si  defuirerim,  causam  alnpiam  til)i  recnsandi  dein  :  I  will  not 
rive  you  a  pretext  for  backint;  out  by  mv  retract  in-.  Cic.  Or.  2.  r.7.  2:li.  To  ne-ativu 
imperative  sentences,  the  d.mble  circumlocution  with  'noli  cowvntttve  is  sometimes 
applied  as:  Xoli  commit  fere  ut  excusatidne  i)otins  explea*»  othciiim  scrib.ndi  quam 
assidiiitjlte  epistoltlrum  :  Do  not  by  any  means  replace  your  duty  of  writing,  by  excuses 

rather  than  etc.  Cic.  V-mw.  1<>.  2.'>. — 

""•^Sonurtimes^OuTn-clauses  areatUiched  to  sentences  of  different  forms  if  a  construction 
of  the  above-mentioned  kind  {nihil  at>est.  paiU/um  a/jesf  etc.)  \^  virtnally  contained  m 
them,  as  •  Pernanci  ex  ho>tium  nuin.iro  dfxid^^rafxintnr  gnin  ciincti  caperentar ;  J  he  niim» 
ber  of  the  captured  enemy  fell  very  little  short  of  their  whole  stren<:tli  (  =  PavUnm 
ahfnit  gnin  cuncll  caperentur).  Cies.  B.  G.  7.  ll.-From  this  constructi..n  ot  the  verb 
defdderkre  must  be  distinjruished  its  construction  with  quomxnus,  implying  the  idea 
of  hindering  (.sec  Obs.  7,  B,  2). 


INNER  FORM  OF  THAT-CLAUSES. 


629 


E.  Inner  form  of  That-clauses. 

Reyn.  31.  The  inner  construction  of  finite  That-clauses  refers  to  the  use  of 
the  nr<  per  moods  luul  tenses,  which  have  been  considered  p.  4U  fol  .  p.  088, 

TlLZulve  (OBS.  1-3) ;  2)  tlie  tense  of  the  predicate-inpatite  (obs.  4-9). 
Or-  1    FxrtANATioN  OF  THE  SuB.jECT-ACCiTSATivE.-In  explaining  the  questum^^^^^^ 

tiS^t^ii;  J^  ;^  uin^ttve  ^^^^^  i!r;^i  :^^Xti^;'i;^d;^v^^& 

wmmsmmmmM 

I;;;s;;:=S  rsrss  »rr;v.T's 

(«hull  ho  eaw  Iliat  n<i  resistar.ce  was niiidc).  Liv.  10  J.I.— Ad  con  iiici  i  'J  '^        •      ,,  ^ 

o    f"i)  lirh".    lh.lO.«.-Siniu-efa!  falls  coiiftSbat  lacte  pmuife    "'•  ^  -i"-  ' 'ji' 
umiicate  of  I  u  clause  is  an  i,np,Tso.m1  with  a  ^"'>Je«HnnnUTve  or  a  suiyect-cta^e 

these  forins  of  the  snl.ject  are  «'"«''•''' V '■:''■  ^''-r^l^'f^'l''- ^'-J^^^^^^ 
'SS^i'^i^Url^u!  ^  ;S^«o»  or  a  Wc^acciWative  t;;;J.e  impersoha.  p.K,,_- 

»)  Madvi<'  asserts  that  such  omissions  'almost  never  occur  ^yj'i''*,..  A-.  = 
i^iln  tives^in  the  perfect.  On  the  contrary.  tl^T.^rc/r^g^/^n^  as  •  Audlvit  Din^^ 
magnam  venisse  heredititem  :  Biatnas  Ju^sum  esse  in  foro  pouere  (i.  e.  eum  jusmm  e^e). 


I^NER  FORM  OF  THAT-CLAUSES. 


631 


630 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


rS  B  U  4  T-Sedcv.V/.c.W'/mqiic».!  t'tc  (i.  v.  sed  se  co  d^cepfurn  i-s^c  quod  etc.).. lb. 
B  G  1  4  -Thi.  ..  Uls  ...  s  very  UH.al  1 .  il'  the  im.iu-diat».  Hotecfden»  ..I  the  i.roi.o.n.nal 
Mil  U-c^irVuiat  ve  "a  1  .on.)....  of  the  .a.uc  lor...,  as:  /'./(ieVe^  ;,h-  d.r.re,  no..  I'^i^H^H^re 

nn-psioi-cin  illlii'^  fmasf  (i.  e.  /^'  nua>j-tun-in  l^.^'seK  lb.  Div.  Ciec.  IS— ^»  it  uu.  prcuicaic 
Suie  Vio   ..i^Hl  witi.  an  A.-ces.ory  predicate   vvhc.e  the  P-'"^^  e "'Kii^'^'j: 
Ative  i<  almost  always  nuTffod  i.i  the  ucciisat.ve  ..t  ti.e  aeee8>ory  predirate  .  1^,1^  pani- 
/mrain  "<..n  (icn  ?t;/7/r  hoiil  no..:T  jubet  (instead  ol' e  urn  pa»  o(  am  ..vexl  re). 

cIcN'tn-  2,2:3T.-Apparuit;  .nam  vicem  indignantem  abisse  (i.  e.  earn  tndignantem 

Ob..  3.  Tnflnitivc  clauses  are  frequently  placed  in  a  P^^^'^'^.f,""^;;;"^,^;!;"' ^'J^^f  he 
En«'lish  idi..ni  requiies  or  prefers  an  active  construe  ion  :  1)  when  the  P'*^^  •"■<', i^i 
cluie  denotes  •  necessity  ',  and  a  -eriindial  constn.ction  is  tobeiised  in  Latin,  as.  Cicsar 

etc  Op-  B  G  4  5.--2)  Subjecl-inlinitives  with  tra.iHt.ve  olijec  s  are  ^ery  liequtntiy 
convened  i.m>i..flnitive  clauses  with  passive  predicates.  ^ -^^^^T^^^^^]^,  ^au- 
^Uxinxuomnls  uavl^  ^'.bdilci  (to  t/ra.^  all  vessels  ashore)  ^^.f:  «:,^*- ^^f  ^--^J';;^^ 
ddi-i  eoA  etc  •  It  is  the  custom  to  praife  those  etc.  Cic.  Orat.  43.— bac  nus  est  i*»rf" 
dS/uoma.Vum  (to  mur  a  U.>ma.i  c'itizen).  lb  Verr.  2,  r>.  ^T^I^^^'IP  (^'ff^lH^^  "^/jj/^^^ 
(tom//o«/theCvprians).  lb.  Att.  5,  21,  «•— -^^^^^^^t^''*^''*  ^''<^'"*  pl(i^"ij-'.  .*t  «•'s'  '^^\"„.,  „ 
/o//?^/«J/r^ito/-  lav.  k  22.-3)  If  the  predicate  of  an  active  n.flnitive  clause  has  a 
tm.      ive  oh  S  which^  be  mistaken  for  the  ^/i>'J«ct;aceusat.ve   the  Latin  Un- 

gua-e,  ^ince  n.e  positio..  of  the  wo.-ds  forms  no  sufficient  ^r'';^"'»";;'}     ^^^h'^^^^^J/.l^'e 
.ivcTcLn^tructio.!  to  the  clause,  or,  il  the  predicate  is  a  P^ir.!;  drastic  f;»;"//' "  'i^f  J^f 
of  the  circumlocution  by  fore  ut.  as  :  Si  te  a  me  «m=lr.  scis  U»;  t    ^';;  J  /^  «'"«r^  ^f;]: 
Cic  Att  1  20.7-Ais/o/r  ut  /<>  Ciesar  restiti. at  (more  accurate  than    rtt.s  (<f.«/c//i  tere 
^/Su/.i  .i; ',.•  lb.  Fa..i^7.  27,  1.   This  rule,  however,  cannot  ^-^'^!iyif;:^y:f^^:Z^: 
ti..ies  n  subject-accusative  occu.-s  in  connectK...  with  ?'»  "^^J^  -;*f;    ;^     ^ '^^AS   as^ 
the  connection  decides  which  of  the  two  accusa  ives  is  ''';;"'V,    »  '\V'^iS>^^^^^ 
Quum  consul  mn.atus  esset,  ew/n  sua  ma.ui  ,^e  ...terfectQrum.  I>'^-^|22.     »     •^.f'"'^    « 
tl.e  obiect    and  se  the  subject,  which  is  made  clear  by  the  con.iec  lon.-Sii.iulans  ad 
ieu^M    i''/ ;  .s"  nli.tere  veiie  '(where  e.m  is  the  object,  and  ..  'l^'  su.oect ).  Nep  Con.  5 
In  botli  passa-es  a  chaise  into  a  passive  constructum  would  neither  »'=\^«/  ^\  ^,f !  "; 
mli.ically  passible,  lu.r  nt-cessai-y.   (Tlie  V^^^^  <^^^-J^^-  f  ^'^^  '^  "H^U'iolcd  by  Meinn- 
§  73.-,;  as  it  stands  in  tiie  text,  it  is  no  exception  to  the  rUiC.) 

Obs  4.  Predicate-intinitives  maybe  in  two  tense*.,  the  present  or  perfect.     Both  of 
these  tenses  may  be  1)  onlina.y  actives  or  pa^si^vs  ^^i';^'{>-^';'X>^^^'i;^'^^^^^ 
tsse)  •  2)  i>ei-iphra-tic  futures  (amnfan/m  ^-^^^,  aiiMtunnnj'iKxt)  ;  i)  pi-nphia>tic  m  nnHii- 

if  the  pre.licate  denotes  necessity,  or  ^n  pass.ve-inh...t.ve  ^-l?"*-*^,-;  ^\'P"''^  I  f  .',''' 
of  reso  vin-.  in  plac  of  IT.-ela.ises  (p.  'm.  Ob-.  •.♦  ;  p.  r.l  >,  Obs.  =,)  I  ''*;"  ^^'"^  -V'  .  .  L  to 
i.arv  activt^a.id  passive  infinitives  a.-e  not  (listin-u.shed  acc.-din-  to  their  relation  to 

"^^^^ker^xlr^^'.hnt  aeeoniin.'  to  th<-ir  relation  ^- ''^^Pr::i'ff!:r:tfkn:^l^  \^:' 
fi'VJih  If  the  nredicate-infinitive  denotes  an  action  pa-^t  at  or  b^Joit  \\u  time  oi  int. 
r.r il  ?iVa  P  -diSri  is  placecl  in  the  ;>.rA./.  But.the  Pr-^^i^-^V'-V^^^Ti^n'^fsra 
1,  theVei-^'^^  il  its  time  is //...<«//..  as  that  of  the  principal  predicate.  ^^  >^J;  f  ,.J 
later  tine  than  that  of  the  principal  predicate,  it  is  placed  e  ther  in  '»?  O'^*'"/^" •- 
T^i-ese„t  ,e..-e  r  in  th.'  pnse,\t  of  the  pe.iphrastic  f.iture.  aeeordm-  to  the  <^i^t"'Ct'ons 
Fn  OBH  f.  To  the  e  rules  there  are  the  followin<j  exceptions  :  (a)  »»1^  "/«  ,;>f,.^y7  ; 
feet  pmsive-injiuitive  instead  of  a  present-intinitive  jn  f^^^^/^^^^'^^'^^l  '^^[l^{. 
mi  Xo  3  «)•  (^»  theuseof  a/>m^vH^^/'/?/i'^^'■^  iiistead  of  a  perfect  in  tlausi  s  (U  pi  n 
ent  o.i  ;iv;;;t;J.''/(()iL  ..•)the  use  of  the  infinitive  of  the  periphrastic  future  m 
conditional  and  hypothetical  intinitive  clauses  ^Oiis.  .-U). 

Ons  5  That-cliii-e-  dependent  on  the  lirf^t  person  of  the  verb  memim^^e,  ffi'nernuj 
ha^rpnMicate-infi.ntivlVJn  the  present  ,ins,ea/i  of  in  the  perle<-t)  ifthe  ^Pf'^'ke.-  rep  e 
sents  the  act  ff.«  icitne.'^S'd  /n/  /ii/n<r-fr.  The  lai.irua-e  conceives  nch  acts,  altnou-,ii 
nclually^pa'at^he  U;::e\./ti;;.  pri..cipal  p,e<Uc.te.  as  still  ^-VV";:  '  "'  ;;  -J";;;^;;!?:.»;' • 
the  sp.-aker.  .-.nd  hence  as  consinietively  pre<ent  at  tl.e  time  of  the  P' '\^  ".•»;[;  .^^^  : 
as:  ^fennni  CatOi.em,  anno  ante  qua.n  "'orniiis  est.  me,-,,m  ./»>v./>-/^  (  '^^^ 
I  remember  tint  Ctt)  .</,n/:e  etc.  Cic.  Am.  3.-J/rmi;/i,  te  mihi  Phame;e  c.ena.i.  '  "  '  «• 
b  Fam.  9.  Ui.  8.-M>-,ni!n  ei^dem  fere  ve.bis  «d  me  ,e  .rrtUreU^  "v ."^L  n^u^v/K  ' 
tu.m.l.  lb.  Dej.  14.  :iS._Comp.  lb.  Fam  3,  S.  3  ;  15.  4,  1  ;  ^  err.  2,  4, 1;^=  ^  ";  •*•  ^  j"  f  "j'  ^J 
2.5.17.-But  meniinis^e  takes  a  />^/r.cnnnn,tive  (in  re-anl  to  pasyacts)  j»  Jf  j^^'J 
speaker  was  not  a  witness  of  the  act  mentioned;  2)  it  ''r"»''»-^^^^';'  I"  ,7^ 'f,^?''^^^^^ 
third  per6on;  as  :  Memvieram,  C.  Murium,  (luiini  vim  armorum  profu-ibstt,  btnlle  cor 


^V^ 


MemoHu   tonre,   ^V^^Tt^  a  tierft'ct  infin  tive,  according  to  the  f;;";;','^^_,j;''Sc  phiK8    0. 

"^l^noria  teneo  Smyrna.  '"^  «''^^If  on  verba.  /*«€«^t  and  tf^c/ara«dt. generally  have 
OBs  6   Infinitive  clauses  ^^^'P^^^^ent  oil  Ncrba.^^n^^^^  ^^^*^p"''1ls^• 

msmmmmmm 

^£ifvt^!;ion;U^^^0^7)ando,^ 

2-.,;  see  Ex^  P.5»-^^5J;  -^^^«^^rW-ed  Vn  the  periphrastic    u     re      n^^^^^^^^ 

ing  V^''"^^'^-  li^t   o      verbum  sentiendi  «^  dec  arand  i.      n  a^^l  tue  e  i  ^^,7^,,^,). 

mmmmsmmm 


OBs  7    There  are  several  peculiarities  in  the  form  of^^^^^^^^^^^^^  ^'T^S'Tb^ 

^^^'-  -  infinitive  clauses      Ihesertr^r)  ^^^^^^^^  Pf^'}^'.  "^^ib.^. 


re  are  severm  17^  """'"mhp.p  refer  1)  to  the  conversiou  ^^-  "'"'V".//  •   (M 
1  of  infinitive  clauses      1  ^e^e  ru^^r  ij  i  (jteccet),  poerias  dabit ,    (J) 


8ume  the  form  of 
ditional  period 


against  reality)  •  W)  trfyuM  «•••  1  ^ ^  .^  ;,^,.,iinnrv 


tic  tense  is  uot  admissible. 


632 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


rumfui^  Ka,.  the  mea.nuL'     '  f ,,,{  J™"' !,  *]'^u£i;,  Is  converted  mxo  fulumm  Unt»e 


For  the  converrum  of  the  txprc^^ion.  «y        ,,:    '    ,r*,.  mratio  ol)liqua)  is  always  m  the 
li   The  predicate  of  the  Hi-clanHe  in  oblique  ^^''^«-""rf ^  j^f,*^^^^^^^^^  rarely)  1^  in  the 

suf^'.mctivv     hut  in  ordinary  .*>l>liq"^fT,\t 'i^ml^   ''S  SjSi'e^  i.Urdin^^ 
ind  ca  ive  (,..  4ul  foil.),  except  ^^^^'^^"^^^^'^l"^^^^^^^^^  rule«  on  the  con- 

conditi<.nal\>eriod.,  ^^ll^^X'X^ll^^^'t^,^^^^^^  ^^  tHe  ten.e  of  t|'e  P"";"^'.;-! 

version  of  tenses  (p.  44.  foil.).  ^'i.^^\*;"f^\."'^\"ir^."  tri  coni»ecution  ol  tenses,  but  the  his- 
predicate.  Cicero  almost  ^^^^^^  «J^f:^;.^' J  !,^  of  prLcmt  (instead  of  preterite)  consecu- 
lorians.  especially  Livy,  '"-^'^l^^l^.^r  otherult'p  ^  ^^^  "  theperioil  is  hypothetical, 

tion  in  oblique  discourse.  nj:^«  -^" Vf  <"  ^,^  t  e  imper  ect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

....  .  Si  peceat  ^^.^^^^B^,^  ^  f  ^^ 

1 1;  ^^x^^^ ,,,,,  £;fe^s;^^s^?;;^;;aisittncesse>. 

0,  intitiii^  neccaret,  pcenas  datilrum  esse) 

1.  Si  pcccat  (peccet),  pttnas  dabit  ^^^^^^S.kIx   V^^mx^  datflrum  (esse)     - 

2.  Si  peccabil,  pa-nas  dabit  -'  ueccassetS,  ptenas  datQrum  (esse) 

3.  Si  peccavit,  panias  dabit  ^   neocasset    iKeiias  datflrum  (esse).         . 
4  Si  peccaverit  {J'nt.  perf.)s  ^^"^^l^^^l^'uxxn^^^^^^^  «"^y  ^^c  meaning,  of 

The   perfect-inflnitive  of   the  P«"l» "^l^f^V^,/ "oX-^^ 
ft  hvnothetical  i//'//)^//'^^'^  (wouM  »1»^'*''  ^"'S"^^^?""',,^  .t  rul  i;/J/>^?re^^  (aimturmii  fuis^e 
fn'trSi-clausJ,it'oKen  ^-)^^J^^:i^^\^^^^^SU-^^,^^^  are  the 
=  Mould  love).  See  Obs.  8.    1  '»*^/;  "V!.H  ^. '";i^^^^  are  the  following?  : 

i^ame  for  present  consecution  and  P  eteiilt  ^^>;; ^;';»;^'^  peccSret,  paMias  datflrnm  fuisse 
INDEP.  1.  Si  peccaret,  p.vnas  dedi*set  si  ieccasset,  pc«nas  datflrum  fuisse. 

^•Skl^S^S^^Ce  i;!t;u:;^etical  peri<><^^i^  ,;;;U^^^^^ 

q,^^^isu forensi,,  .  -^-^l^^,:^:^)^^  ^i  inter  cau^s 

len^bit).  Cic.  Or.  1. 15,  ♦j5.-llla   n  dies  ^^ll'^^^^l^^^^^^^^     iJudtum  interfntCmim  (Indep.: 
armOrum  aliquantum  »'.'^f^f  ;,/,^V  f"  'V^,Y/iu  K,.m  .;.4.  l.-(Miam(>brem  sati 

tempo 

tinei 

Fam 

Dlrit, 

■r«/Jif«^[venianl]).  - 

non  deerit  d  e^t).  lb.  3, 10.  g.     .^.  ^      dementia  opem  t'tlerjt.  oninibns 

Pure  conditional»,  formulas  3  and  4.  ^>  ""'".  ^      .  /,,/tn/).  Cic  Fam.  5, 4.  'Z.-hdi- 
in  rlbus  me/or.  in  twa  pc.te.tate  ro/^^^^^^^^ 

cmt  (histor.  present)  si  'l";?^}^;/i''"^J  !.'/•?  I  v  3  2  .-Satis  confidere  convenuram  pacem 
tares  (INDEP. :  !i?'^.(>^^^?'^«^^!^^rfr^r2:n^MlNDEP.  :  convmuU  si  venfnt).  ^^-^^^^ 

pros.) 
•imus). 

"StS'-^r',^;;;!^^';  -;;^-  Si«'M«'  -n.r„™ca  .„  ...e  .«.ne  «».  a.  the 
'•';"}i:!j;,ft/r(;^X^;/nrr:;:i''/::^^^^^^^^  f„rn.n,a,  have  very  different  tneanlng, ;  there  i.  no 
„J„„f  to  .li«lnR«i*"  <!'en' '"■;  '-y ''l-^.^'X';^^^^^^^  ,ocorre.pond  to  the  ;>«-Arf  i"  Ind^ 

pell^ttti  lS';T;a'i.''"iferr^nrPe.^t  consecution  U^caum  u  used,  T  pe^ 
?MW  have  to  be  converted  in  this  connection. 


I^-^'EU  FORM   OF  THAT-CLAUSES. 


633 


i 


i"  would  hate  irfia^"  >"'";"  I'ii'i/  'e  ad  ■«<:«'•''"'  /■"''■«  *^'""',v-  •. ''»"/'"""•       • 

llYl-OTHETlCALS,  FORMULA  2.-I«a    f «^  "S    ^  .    autttulU.tlH  «  7//««^*^^)-  <^ '^' J""V  ^^ 

Ippidum  amitierCiur  (INUKP.:  «'"^^' %'"',;'.    ...ferrin-  to  present  time  (formula: 
OB«  8.  If  the  hypothetical  P'"^^»^''^  ^"/,,?„    f    '«>  a^^^^^^^  ^'*"•  ^"""mh; 

iiiipiSsiSsfill 

then  the  dictator  nW;;^n/^^^  ,,ellum,  .i  pU.res  Fa  nos  ha 


M>-  wrath  upon  all :  neraur^t-,  ..v.  -     •- v     .,  .,,      Sonietimes  \T>n''-'^    ^*  "/i""/",  ,  oo  \s  * 
'wr,ieverAlnif^lZ?M^J>^JU!!!;Si^?^^i^^ 


ad  castra  venti  RO>  X"?nvK'i^^■^ri^<'^^^^  not  support  t^^l^    .  alTitera  u?e1n  >vhich  the 

(,f  lan.iruace  cannot  '^*-* '\^^V,  e  theorv  of  «>">  crammanans  ^'   'at^^  .J^^,^  i/j./ica^Jm 

;i-'!ra\^;T';.l;  .ica."S5£^'  -l;;.  -S  't'hl  ir^^^rh-^ticaTSe^Si;!..»  «  «e  cannot 
exclude  the  orcii/iary  preseut-mnniinc 


634 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


„.in^  direct  di.conrso,  or  hy  ^f^^-^^^lt^fi^^r-  ^^^l' ::^;!^^^■'l:no!Z:t 

cenriie  «iv»  Car.Kvi(U-s  ';r':*^t  :f/  ;,Sre/  f^/r/a  i  c  c.  ♦).  Cic.  Div.2.  72. 
'  affirmavenm/utarunijuisse  "^  '''      r^^,;^^^^  have  the  same  modal  force  a. 

Ob..  9.  Aoconln.tr  to  the  pr.m-iplelmtp.edK.  «^      ^  ^^  ,„.  ,,,^.  j,,r..cts  y.V.«,  (in  the 

the  indicative  ..f  the  s:.m.'  ^*''';;  j^^^,,  -/Jv;/^  (  =  i^v^/m  r»i-W,  it  uouhi  have  b.j  . 
,rnse  <.f  }H>nrU<en,).  f^/'''"- ^  ^  '^/    f"  !^^!"^/      opus  fU  etc..  m.d  <>f  t he  ;..r/'  ct  f/.r     - 

s.;Lhyp.;thHie:ilfo,reea.thepc^^^^^^^^^^^  Perspieuum  e.. 

Hnce  thVse  expre^M-Mii*  »''^7' t'»>;7;\"  , '  „^anu  rmx^re  potuuse  (that  we  (-o/zW  //oi'- 

e!.s  utilitatc.  no-  luulo  modo  .^  m  »'  '"J"  \!\;7'  '|i"(;on  \lica.n.  in  hon.mmi  hone- 
have  gained  the>^c  '"1^'^'''^'-'*^%  J^.}  '  ,^,''^:/^";,,tv;(t  s<.heavy  apnnishn»ent  0'n,/,tuut 
8Tis8ilnum.am-ravitera/u//m^/^//^  nono/^^^^^^^^  o/,/^//u/m  r•"^^■>•^  «it-  ""^"-'"'^  '■^"''V^, 

?„  /?^r<^  he^n  infiicf^fi  .Mc.)._Ih.  \  ^"- -7/'    m/.V     S      hare  be^i  best  if  At.tiochns  co'Ud 

hareint^rrened  etc.).    ^tl''- •^•''   ''"/H  1,>5  /.ir^T^/z  rf?^         to  -uard  if  he  had  been 
fnUse  difficile  cavCre  (that  U   7rr)'//(/  '^^J,^.J^!Si7eO&  ^eire.  sibi   trans   Kuphrat-ni 
{c.     C:ef  B.(i.M4.-Marcnne  ^^^^^^^'t^'^^J^^^U^u' i\\x\t,  .i  nmnltas     Knnlu 
cum  i.Mi.Mninifl  h^^«  P«'-^"''V*^";'nu'nnon    W^^  eonsnlcm  d-orum 

soriim  i^iinia  honiinibns  ^.s-.s't^r,  tamon  "•'". /'/^«^•^/^»  ininicrnh'e  that  a  consul  in  hi>  ab- 
nun"  t^iu.n  honori  obstijn;  (that^  H  «^^j^^^^^  t^^^u"^i:  rllni.s.t ,  ne.hoc  ..ui.h- 

s,.nce  8hoMUl  liinder  etc.)   ^  •  I   ;.J;:;7  th  s  ui  d  »'r>*/W  har^  been  necessary  if  ^■\^-'- ^^f- 
\n^o  onn.U-'n.<se  indww  U'lat  n..i  eNen     ns  11   u  »' j  ^^^   j^^  connection  with 

Kv.2.-27,Hl.-Son.eti.n.:s./Vi.s>^^  'f/^s  hi  v it  un  1     ^  nue  ranDnw /.i^se.  si  lihene  ac 

ordi,tary  descriptive  adjective.    ^^     the  1  fe      f   1  ^^  <1="''-^^»'*'^  ""^"'^   '""'  f'"r''u!^o 
pndlc;e  vivere   licilum  jm-'^set    t h a     Y/L*';*^^^^^^^^^       which  even  in  the  pn^.'d  ind.caiuc 

toiro  to  Hrundusiu.u  ifJ_hcidjon^_Uc^t^. r^vhich  would  be  fatth^TW^- 

.r^T^i^J^Tsfj^o^;,  or  je,darus^-;;-  -^f^!-^- .i^rMJ^^';;;!!!,^ V^i^  ;>.•  prater. 
taiidvcaMnoTsaym»  '^rMm^^^^^.f;^'>^^^^^^^  .      „,^.  hypothetical  Pense.--^.  lo 

ite  consecution,  which  it  ^T' '^''''y  .;"/.;  ^t   if  th^^^^^^  •"''''"'^  is  dependent  on 

this  must  be  added  the  ^^^^'^'''''^  Zy^^T^^uM^^  »^ '  "'"1<^''  »»^^'  •"'cessity  of  chantrni  J 
a  tense  requirin-  present  «^''r*"^'  ^^  ^/^^,/7-  Z't^  siprrc^f).  which  would  ellace  every  1  race 
tlie  imperfect  into  a  prcscml  .poina'^  «^  I  beTom  .H^  to  use  an  iwp^r/ecf  siibjntictive, 
of  h:p"thetical  si.jnirtcatton;  "X^J.^ltn  t  l^wrZ^  i.  tself,  aceordiiV'  to  p.  442,  Obs  1 ; 
dependent  on  a  presmf.  T  his  ^^'"V'''^  "''V, '.^,^.^;'  "^/.j.,  c„nstrn<-tion,  where  an  imperfect 
but  a  voucher  for  .Ins  ^'^c^'l>^;;'l;;l^;  '";';[;,  ^^^^  ^vould  be  absolutely  wautm-, 

is  made  d<-pen<lent  <m  a  P^'"  P»'f  ^   ^.     ...ni    of  mr/.nV^  consecution  i-  n  quired  , 

sin.e  in  the  a!)ove-ment.oned  V^'^f^^^^^^'^J'^^  ,J^.r,  even  if  we  take  the  readiut?  in 
Hence  the  theory  of  our  '-.'ratnuvu  a ns  woul.l  iK  w        -  ^^^^^^^^^  ,^^.  correct.     Lo<,k- 

the  above-mentioned  passau'O  V.'^'^^T.d    hat  t  u-  Euun  ne<  J>ad  <-a>ne  already  some  l.me 
in-atthec()iinertioniM  thetext.weUM     tna    T.H.  r.  Titnrins  could  not  say  •///'// 

blhre  the  speech  of  Titurius  to  mves    >  '^J;    ?•  ,„'!'/',,/ i'o./zi  >,ot  mavk  con,e  to  the 

WOULD   NOT   BE    COMING    \f  ,^<*^^^'\'',Z    l\,\^ 

camp\  in  the  same  way  as  he  m  ^  \  f^-^ '  "  ;;';;:\^i  ,  .ry,.,,,/,7,.o.  ,.se  \  we  must  assume 
reJlved  to  kiU  Tas-et.us  ..  '1  h,i-  t  '^"i^^^^^^^^  u  e  M^ahled  to  express  an  idea  which 
that  fa-ar  used  an  «>''J^^ctu)nah  e  n  rm  1.  .  t «  ^^,.,,„„„„ee  -^...^  '  an  nnquestionahe 
he  did  not  mean  to  express.  Wed.  m  t  Mai.  to  I  j..,„i,.ones  wo'dd  not  hare  comf  to 
gloss.  Takin-  it  out,  the  "^^^^^^^^^  ^^''»"l'»  ^>"'"  »»=^'^  '''^'''  •',"  Xent.nv^. 
the  camp \  since  the -r^ivx^o  ^;,^,^'^'  ."hcVtei-  c«.dices,  and  are  an  eviden  -loss 
The  words  '>i  ad^s>->er  are  left  out  l\y  nu^  ,1.  .  mr-inin.' of  '4  ade->H\  Le-iviie.;  out 
Iinc«  the  preceding  ^aWer^    "   ;V  "/,?;' t.thlUe'^^ n^^^  the  same  hand, 

these  wonls  U  will  appear  probable  that  bo  11^   K^t^  hy  formula-  of  their  own 

Some  trrammarians  ^^^  ^X?^^^^^c^-^h^dir^r^^^  OB.aQfKll)  V^nseo 

make.    KiiiiNBK  say< :  nniEcr  im^couu^e^.^^  >^^^^^  .ni^taUes)  ;  2.  VensZr»anK  ^x  h<.c 

t=i  hoc  diceres,  te  errafnr'un  esse  .^  y;f ;'';'',;,. ,;,ke.  and  does  not  correspond  o  '  .vi 
dicere.^.  te  etra'ur'on  ess>'  twh  eh  contains  ^^'^  "V,«'\  ll'he  author  idtl.e  l>ubl.Sch.  (.r. 
Kk.m,EKKAnE8\but  '^'^''l^^'^'f','-^  '^"^l^^iJ^^  lie  gives  the  following 
(p.  :m)  nnpr..ve8  on  Kuhner  by  adding  ^"^  ' '','^;;\'"., ,V  e  ,i  Vmr.?,  dolifurum  f^>•«  or 
formulas:  Direct:  Si  Pf<^'<''-''- .^'^''/Zj^^^^^^^  .i  jnccuri^^e,,  doliturnrn 

r'   ,■ .  i  \_...,i,i'o  iJi.i-ka<».poiiiti((sition.' 


t* 


MODAL  TH\T-CIAUSE3. 

II  MnnAT.  TIIA.T-CLAUSES. 
U.  MODAL   1  m^  describe  the  modal  relation» 

S  618.  Mo.lal  Tlmt-clauses  are  lU.«e  '^^'^'^J"  ^'      ^,,;         TUev  are 

either  1)  riBE  modai.  clalses,  "•";=',    .^^  «.  3-3 ;  or  2)  final 
action.,  or  .u„.,nent  -^^-  f  ~'    ;  .^r»;-»»  or  .nrpo.  of  the  subject 

CLACSBS,  i.  e.  modal  '^'^'^^^..f '"'"„' "i^^^es  of  clatises  are  in  the  gram. 
of  the  principal  action  (R.  3.J).    Both  ^^^^^'  ^,,^^^,,  ^     438. 490). 

,„„<W  rdation  either^  .<i-^-  «^^^^^  .  «.H«. 


,r„/iV«i  relation  either  of  odcerbKil  or  ox  »»"'-—  .".idered  a.  altnbume 


OBJ».  1.  All  nu>v.......    -■,._.„,,, ive  of  general  iiiih"'"  "'"VVStr.  a  nnnn  of  general 

petaccedere.  <^>c  Ain..i.     r.         ^   j^.^j  _Ar,<,vi^tu:.  ^^/-     Vrenuentlv  such  construe- 
tione  may  ''''."^.'S  ,s  «Md "San.  e.urians  vj.nlrrt  (  r  \'«  «  mm  r"s   tuantur  <  =  ite 

\;;(^V^^<^  contion-cn  -''"-"'-•^^^^^^^'cis,  1)  the  followin^r  points 

Ren..  32.  In  ""^.  P'"-f  »"*  1^'"  ^  of  ,he  'yndeV.c  antecedents     For 

n,ust  bedistingnished:  1    ^^  «  ^^'^  "„„1  Obs.  1  to  this  re.tta,^  -2^  Tl^e 

♦iw.co  QPf  n   4oo,  UBS. -w  ,  J»,  t*^'»-^'     »  ♦iwicp  «ipe  t).  4:o4  loll. — oj  auc 

o od  an   *  tet)se  of  the  predtca  o      ^o  .  ^/;^^^^,^',tWely,  is  always  ^<, 

linn  of  the  itUrocUicing  -^X^'^")-!  The  different  idiomatic  usages 

-:!S^  w!^."^^^- '^  ^    _er   intensity,  coincident  action, 

"ri!lnpuremod^m.lause.a^^ 

and  the  con ^ecu t/^e  clan ^^^^^  ^.,^^^^       a  c;;^if.^f.,f,t''^Sr"^^^"""'^^^ 

Thus  the  unahtative  cUu  es(w         Phinciu8  t/a  vixit  ut  offend^^^^^^^^  describe  the 

tain  their  ^vndctic  «n  ^*^»; '«"^^'^.j  pia„c.  ic,  41.  But  if  /^^''^^^.^^^^/o.-e^^^^  of  the  viann^r 
»  />/«/,««''  rixtt ;'  /^^^  /^^^f,2'«,S/'  without  describing  '\«  ^"^"S" ^aUo^^ether  omitted, 
consequences  ^^^  "^^l"^  ^^'''^'^^^^^^^  m  "f '^^f /'^f,  'il     In  v?r"tate  viidti  smd 

of  its  performance,  the  ''.V""^^'^^         .     introduce  it  (ita  nt),  as.  J"  ^'  .     „,         -25.  tK). 

manner,  ^^■^'\«TL\l,^:Vi»f  Wleam  ilerfecerat,  vt  tP^^ Jorttina  }^*^"       •>    ^^gnce  of  the 

IgHSSSS^So^S^ - ^  ^SS^oft.  »«^  or  iu  p.. 


It  from  •  Arnold's  Prose-composition. 


63  G 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


formance,  which  would  be  exprossctl  by  '  ita  iterfecerat  ut  etc.'— Noqne  multo  post  de 
im\i\\oii\c\o\n'nwi^^i\\\^<'(>nnUnmest,vt  iJ>^is  Pi.inprjiliii-  tides  lu-ret  <n.)t  '  ita  i'Ofjin- 
tumestut')  Ih.3,  101.  luKi)f,Mir*h,  fucli  lt-<lausf.>*  inii>t  alwav!'  b«'  i  lit  rod  net- (I  by  aO 
that'  But  :  ltd  tuin  ah  his  patron!.-  causa  ilia  dicta  est  vt  cloqiicntiiiin  juris  peritissi- 
iiius  Cra^U''  juris  periloruiii  floqucnti^simus  Scievola  putarGtur.  C'ic.  Hrut.  3»,  14.>.  Here 
the  clause  i<  ri-pre>eiited  as  a  consequence  of  the  vianner^A  perforniini;  the  pniuMpal 
action,  and  hence  ita  cannot  be  omitted.— Pompejus  m-  \^to  castris  exercitum  .^tat>nijat 
vt  tertia  acies  vallum  conlingeret.  Cies.  B.  C.  ;^,  5(i.  Here  the  Ut-clause  describes  the 
manner  of  the  '  statnere''  ;  without  m-  it  would  be  represented  n^  i\  consequence  o\  llie 
'  iftatntre  '  itself,  without  referring  to  the  manner  in  which  it  was  performed. 

Obs  2  ir  the  )ynre  modal  TliatdaiiseA  arc  negative,  the  clause  is  not  introdiiccd  by  ne, 
but  by  ut  with  an  oniinarv  negation,  which  may  be  contained  in  adverbs,  adjectives,  or 
verbs  Oit  non,  ut  rtvmqvavKUt  n/rno.  vt  nesnrem  ;  not  'ne.  ne  vinqvaw,  ve  quuxinain,  ne 
scirem")  as-  Ea  vestra  merita  eri:a  iios  luCrunt  ut  nos  chidium  nostrSnun  von  puniteat 
(not  neiwnittat).  Liv. 'J8.  3U.— Adeo  anjrusto  mari  confllxit  ?//  ejus  muliiindo  naviuin 
explicilii//o/«potueiit(not/<^i;o<wtn/).  ^'en.  Tl.em.  4.-M.  (alius  talis  tnbOnus  plel.is 
fuit  ut  ne/no  uiot  ne  quitt)  a  senatu  steterit  constantiiis.  Cic.  Brut.  .»,  2*3.— Uratio  ita 
lihere  rtuet)at  M//JM.<.r;^m;n  (not  ne  vsquam)  adlueresceret.  II).  70,  274.— Sometimes,  how- 
ever, nei:ative  modal  clauses  of  this  kind  pregnantly  imply  the  idea  of  an  aim,  duty, 
command,  or  prevention.  In  this  instance  they  mat/  take  the  form  of  aNe-cluuse,  as  :  Jtn 
me  gesH,  ne  tibi  pndOri,  ne  remio  tuo,  ne  <,'t'nti  Mace<ioiium  essem :  I  have  behaved 
a.  e.  shaped  my  c(»urse)  so  as  to  ntlect  no  disgrace  on  you  etc.  (  =  me  ita  g<  ss\  ['t  <'J>^- 
ram  darein  ne  etc.)  Liv.40,  15.— Perfacile  se  Sicilia  tueUVur,  ut  ne  quod  ex  ipsa  bL'llma 
po<set  exsistere  ;  Sicily  protected  herself  easily,  so  that  etc.  (i.  €  '  and  prevented  thereby 
]e«t'  etc  )  Cie  Veir.  2,  5,  4.— Ita  admissi  sunt  in  nrbeui  ne  tanien  eis  seiultus  daretiir  (  — 
ea/f'^Z^ /<^  with  the  proviso  that  etc.)  Liv.  22,(11. —Minucius  sciC-l)at  ita  use  r.m  auueri 
oportere  ut  ne  quid  de  lihertilte  deperderet  (the  clause  beinj;  represented  as  Mmuciiis  9 
dutlJ^  Cic  Verr.  2, 2,.m— Danda  opera  est  ut  etiain  sin«;ulis  consuiatur,  sed  ita  ut  ea  res 
aut  prosit  aut  ct-rte  neobdt  reipublira>  (the  restrietit)n  '  ne  oMt'  beinjj  represented  a»  to 
be  '"uarded  a-ainst',  ^  ut  cavtotur  nensohsit).  lb.  OtT.  2,  21.— But  in  all  such  iiistan<-es 
ut  \\\l\\  an  ordinary  neirative  would  likewise  be  admis^ible,  as  :  Soeietatem  ab  lltmiaiin* 
ita  (  =  ea  le«,'e)  volCbant  peti  ut  nullum  de  ea  re  scitum  populi  fierel  (or  ne  ullum. .  .Jteret). 
Liv.  45, 25*.° 

Obs.  3.  If  the  principal  sentence  of  a  negative  clause  of  manner,  snbsequent,  or  coincident 
action,  or  intensity,  is  likewise  negative,  and  the  two  neirations  have  the  torce  ol  mak- 
ing the  whtde  statement  virtually  affinnative,  the  clause  may  be  either  introduced  i)y  '//. 
noil  or  by  quin  (see  p.  547.  6',  and  p.  .oH5,  Ex.  No.  27.  28).  Such  clauses  are  v'enenilly 
rendered  by  '  withouf  with  a  participial ;  as  :  Ao/t  possunt  uiul  in  civitate  multi  rem  ac 
fortQnam  amitlere,  ut  noii  pluies  secum  in  eandem  trahant  calainitatein  (or  quin...tra- 
hant)  Cic.  L.  M.  7, 19.— M/Zi  ita  fracti  aninii  civitatis  erant  ut  non  sL-ntlrent  ete.  (or  q/nn 
senCirent).  Liv.  45,25.— AVsv/mm  oenli  ejus  lleclentur.  ut  non  quod  indiirneutur  inveniant 
(or  "quia  inveniant").  Sen.  Ira.  'i^l.—Numquam  domum  litteras  mitiam  qum  adjun- 
L'am  eas  quas  tibi  reddi  veiim  (or  at  non  utljunga7n\.  Cic.  Fam.  3,  8, 10.-E<:o  ;<w7«9*/a//* 
liberos  meos  aspicio  quin  (or  vt  non)  hujus  nieritum  in  me  recorder.  lb.  Plane.  3S.  «.".♦.— 
Hiec  natflra  loci  esse  dicitur  ut  nuiliis  unniuain  dies  tam  mau'iia  temp'state  Uwvw  qu\n 
(or  ut  no/')  aliqti"  tempore  ejus  diCi  Kolem  homines  viderint.  lb.  Verr.  2,  5.  10.— Some- 
times the  writers  of  the  silver  a«,'e  introduce  clauses  of  tliis  kind  by  q>/ominu,'i  lusu-ad 
of  by  quinism:  Ubi  nemo  impQue  siulte  aliquid  dicit,  quoininus  judex  reprobet.  Tac. 
Dial.  34. 

Obs.  4.  Peculiar  usages  in  pure  modal  Ut-clauses  are  : 

1.  The  use  of  these  elanses  (wilhout  a  syndetic  antecedent)  with  the  force  of  conce-ostre 
clauses  ;  as  :  Hiec  res  nihilo  minus,  vt  eqo  attsim,  conttci  poterunt  {although  I  am  absent, 
7M>/w'i//i.sya//^/j//9'mv  absence;  literally  :" '/.o  ^Aa/  lam  afjsent").  Cic.  Fam.  10.  2.  2.— Quo- 
tas enim  quisque  disertus  est,  vt  eos  numere^  qui  volunt  esse  ('even  if  you  count  ,  '  in- 
cluding those"  :  literally  '  xo  that  you  count").  lb.  Plane.  25,  G2.—  f/7  guivra^  omnia,  quo- 
modo  Gneei  Mneptum  '  appellent,  non  reperies.  lb.  Or.  2,  4.— Verum  vt  hoc  non  fit,  tainen 
pneclarum  spectacuium  mihi  propfjno.  lb.  Alt.  2,  l.'i.- T/  dt-sint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda 
voluntas.  Ov.  Pont.  3.  4,  7'.).  Comp.  Cic.  Agr.  1,  8;  Tusc.  1.  21  ;  1.  *» ;  Phil.  12,  3  :  Liv.  .3b,  <. 

2.  Frequently  modal  Ut-clauses,  with  the  syndetic  antecedent  ita,  are  used  in  an 
advermtive  or  restrictive  sense,  corresponding  to  "  but  so  that '.  Such  sentences  occur  in 
~*  Sometime8^rai7se¥with  quominu.^  occur  which  have  the  force  of  a  neirative  consec- 
utive clause,  if  the  idea  of  'hindering'  is  implied  in  them,  as  :  Neque  mihi  (luidquam 
oneris  m<<cCp\,quotninu>f  honeste  banc  causam  et  libere  i>ossem  defendere:  Idul  not 
trammel  myself  so  as  to  be  dcbantd  from  honestly  and  freely  defending  this  case.  Cic. 
Clu.51,142. 


MODAL  THAT-CLAUSES. 


637 


the  followin- forms  :  1)  cither  the  clause  corresponding  tothis  English  construe  ion  is  in- 

tiodu  ed  bv  i  a  tamen  vt,  or  sed  ita  vt ;  2)  or  i/«  is  incorporated  in  the  principal  sentence, 

e  clau'e  bei   .' a^^         e  ther  with  or  without  tawen  :  as:  Totus  hic  locus  est  contem- 

nencUis   i/aVawe/^       iiH>rtuorum  cor^  nihil  sen.Ire  sentiSmus  ^but  fo  that  sm,  knovv 

etc      Cic  Tu-c       45, 108.-//«  dissiiniles  erant  inter  sese.  statuere  ut  tamen  mm  posses 

ut'TuMc^ma"les  eV^e  sin  iliOre^^^  (they  were  dissimilar.  6^//  .o  that  you  con  d  "ot  have 

leci  ed  eu        II)  Brut  40.  14.s.- Pom  pejus  omnia  poUicCtur  et  Csesar    quibus  ego  ita 

crX  i  nihil  de  mea  com paratione  diminuam  (whom  I  trust,  but  so  tha    1  do' not  diM.in- 

V^hoxc)  (  n   Fr  1,  2  5  -y/fl  qua-stus  te  cupidum  esse  oiwrte/^t  yt  horum  existima- 

i.-m  nVet  le-S'Bemmiam  puia.es  ali(iuid  valere  oportere  ;  You  migh    have  been  eager 

}  ^1  u-re  K«  o  "  "/  to  have  paid  some  regard  to  the  character  ot  t»>e^e  men  and  to 

?   e  Kn?ia./law.  lb.  Kosc.  Am.  V.),  50.-Sometimc8  "^^  V:«  J^«"^„^^\\f     "%\"^^,t  ^ 
ntiodueed  by  vt  ne  to  represent  the  restrictum  as  a  protest  Vita  vt  ne    being  almost  - 
;;Ji;;;,;Xne)^  as  =  Uoc  a  ita  utile  vt  ne  plane  illudamur:  This  is  uselul,  bnt  so  iuith  the 
niiui^r^inndinn)  that  we  must  not  be  clearly  trifled  with.  Lie.  K.  A.  iw.  ^       »,  *  ;^ 

3  The  re  m^Vt  construction  '  Tantum  abest"^vUh  tuo  Ut-clauses,  represents  what  i8 
stated  in  tut  "t  It-clause  as  ?//'//v/€  in  a  degree  that  its  very  contrary,  which  is  ex- 
I,.  J-sed  n  the  iec«)n  I  It-clause,  is  true.  The  first  of  the  two  Ut-dauses  is  an  atiributne 
%^w  r/a  / V  ai.d  1  elon  's  to  the  clauses  mentioned  i?.  29,  Obs.  8,  being  equiva  ent  to 
^/S«rrj;aiio\7etc:^  Vhe  second  Ut-clause  is  ^,^^f^--'.  i:;^;f:^y:'^J:i;:^ 
as  syndetic  antecedent,  tantum  ut  etc.  meaning  '  so  jar,  that  on  ^'^^^nfaiy  ,  5^«^'"M'"''* 

but  very  rarely)  this  construction  is  used  in  its  complete  \oymyxn\i  '  abest  «^..^^  'vY  .  as  . 
T.n  t i.m  ab  St  «J/fO  vt  malum  mors  sit.  vt  vereor  ne  homini  nihil  sit  bonumaliud  potms, 
(V  T  KAL^  V  There  Ts  o  gn-at  a  distance  from  the  fact  that  death  should  be  ^-^}\;^l 
on  ,1  e  cot'tVary  I  think  That  there  is  no  other  i:ood  greater  for  ^^^J^^^Jf  f , « f^ 

from  fjeina  an  eHl  that  on  the  contrary  etc.).  C\c.Tn^c.\,-iO,  i^t.  A  most  alwajs  imse 
Se^a  e'frnd  without  •«^>.o'.  The;^  n.ust  be  recast,  in  the  Enghsh  ^;yrsnm  as:  T«n- 
im  attest  vt  scribi  contra  nos  nolTmus.  vt  id  etiam  maxime  opiemus ;  So  far  am  Jpoin 
S  S//i/  7  cri  cisms  to  be  written  against  me,  that  J,  on  the  contrary,  p^atly  des  re 
thLfcir  'fuse  2  2  --Tantum  ahe^t  utltvc  bestiarum  causa  paiata  sint.  vt  ipsas  best  as 

lom  nun' causa  generitas  videamus;  So  far  are  these  (/'/^7^  ./'ombe^n.  provided  or 
th.'KikPi.f  lu-i-t«  that  we  see  the  very  beasts  created  for  man  s  sake.  lb.  N.  D.  2,  W, 
l'^8      yintumXsfu^^^^^  "^  «^^^^vatum  a  pe  exerc^um  c^ 

cons^io  irSnrLiv  44  W-7a.^  abfuitut  (Pansa)  periculOsum  re.pubbca.  M  BruU 
3let  exercitum  ///  in  eo  firmissimnm  i  eipublica3  piiesidium  poneret.  Cic.  Phil.  10,  b,  1  i. 
-(\S   insteXf  ihe^P^^  (modal)  Ut-clause,  an  independent  sentence  is  used  :  Jan- 

r«!^.''S;.^  .'/  binos  (libros)  s!-ribe.:ent :  vix  -^p^^Z:''^'il^T^o^Z^'\rvi^& 
tun  book-  aniece    thev  hardly   fin  shed  one.    Cic.  Att.  13,  21,  5.— Somttuncs,  in    putee 

of  the  c  Tuu      •.?ti\»    w^th^a^  abest  ut*",  a  ^>n^'V-"7"'^'^'^"''"SS  1  d  wftbout 

or  usouee^  non  is  used,  to  which  the  second  (modal)  L  t-clause  is  d>r>'Ctly  added  wlhout 
anoTer  intervening  Ut-clause.  This  construeti<m  is  rare  in  classical  prose,  but  ^xry 
fr^uent  the  s  yle  of  the  silver  age,  as:  Usque  eo  quid  argua,^  non  hafjes  vt  contm 
enu  "muiram  cKidum  p.U..  ;  Far  frornU^.r^  a  ground  J;-^^^,^;!*^»'^;' J-'Vls' 
th.«  iipee<sitv  of  i)it)i)osin-'  what  s  n  conflict  with  the  laws  ol  nature.  Cic.  K.  A.  id, 
45-OloViam  facto,  urn  adlo  non  abstulisti,  vt  auxeris.  Veil.  2,  ti6.-IIa^c  res  adeo  non 
sunt  «'audia,  ut  sa-pe  initia  futflne  tristitue  sint.  Sen.  tp.  5J. 

lUm  15:5  FiN\i-  TiiAT-cr.AUSES  (see  p.  404.  li.  88,  1)  are  intfoduced  by 
vt  (sometimes  quo),  and  negatively  by  ne  (rarely  by  quo?ninusy,\mugieu- 
dered  bv  English  object  infinitives  (with  or  without  '  iii  order  )  Jt.the 
subiect  of  the  action  is  at  the  same  time  a  member  oi  the  principal 
predicate.  If  this  is  not  the  case,  the  English  language  uses  clauses 
introduced  by  '  iti  order  thnt\  'for  the  purpose  that  ,  or  ^o  that 
which  must  be  distinguished  from  the  '  .v.  Mr^r  used  I'^J^'^''^^^^;"^^^^; 
clauses.— For  mood  and  tense  in  final  clauses  see  P- 440  Obs  U^  l^or 
the  form  of  the  syndetic  antecedents  see  p.  435,  Obs.  2.  ior  the  use  ot 
quo  in  final  clauses  see  p.  558,  Obs.  8.  .        x.  .u 

OBS.  1.  Final  clauses  must  l)e  distinguished  from  clauses  denoting  those  aims  of  t^^^^^ 
pubiect  which  are  contained  and  intimated  in  the  governing  verb  (P..  'Ip,  Obs  2).  C  lauses 
of  Uds  kind  o  n()n  S^^^^^  the  modal  Ut-clanses.  but  cowjMe  the  idea  of  the  govern- 
hVycrb  while  fhial  modal  ctouses  may  be  dependent  on  verbs  containing  complete  ideas. 

"~^  Logically,  the  attributive  modal  cUiuse  dependent  on  'tantv7n  abest"  is  a  predicate 
clause. 


G38 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


o   .,1  r^Z^/i^  In  Kn-li:-»!,  ohjcct-intinitives are  -eiRrally  employed  if  the  ^""J^'*-   ^J 

?he  Chuil  i^a    thc^^^^^^^^  H  M.emberot  the  princiiml  .entenre,  as  :  ^;:^^'^^:^^'^ 

nri-lio ii  te  -it  Ca-  B.G.  7,  87.-Leiruiu  icciico omues  scrv.  sunius  w<  libei  i  e^^e  P<^;\'  i^- 
F-i^  *  >,  '•J^uii -liUe  li-o  tempu^  hoc  vohis  divinitus  datum  e^hc  v  odu,,  infamul, 
n    pU   dini;u:;um'o;i'l;;imUlKi-e.is,Ib.Verrl   lo.-ra^ 

On»  o    If  the  final  clause  isf  negative,  it  almost  always  takes  ve.  or  W  «^  (not  vt  non\ 
bc?.^  in  En',  Mnmrodncc.d  by  •  It  to ',  or '  lest\  a.  :  Caesar,  jl^^HTl'^'some^lmei' ho^^^ 
mitm-  lis    onnm  ((m-iiCMHt  ad  exercitum  proticiscittir.  Cies.  B.  (..4  0.    Sometimts   now- 
?vtr   it  th?neSi  ive  "cMers  to  a  particular'men.ber  of  the  clause.  ^^^^'I'i^^'^^^llZ 

-^iur;i;-:^;;^a.;^;;r'sr^^^^^^ 

But  it  won  d  be  r  erfect  v  pn.i)er  (tl.ou^d.  le.s  concise)  to  express  this  ^»;"»^*''^-**/^"'^;  ' ' « 

«VeiY^)/  our  morals  from  bciu-  examined  every  tive  years,  (ic.  Pis.  !>.  11.  >"V.'  <^''"'^V*J^'^,^ 
?  .rt  n.Viriv  re  a  ed  to  those  final  ()no-da>i.^e.'^u\  which  min>t.<  is  a  red  comparat  i  v,-.  as .  Nou 

;fi^ium'ei^-^bi!;;;t^'^;;immJ..y>.|u 

etc  Cic  Trov  Cons.  17.  Here  ' (jm  minus  ,Hrj)e  intn-ptlltr  means  in  oiuu  ^"  "^  '^.  "J, 
fiv^H  itlv  in  errin.te.r-  but  n,o  /ninw^  nviy  also  be  taken  m  the  sense  of  «^  ;  If-t  I 
JnJft^  /r4Sv  i  .^  'Hiis  iilcnfity  <.f  m-anin.,  in  final  clauses  is  nnque.- 

Kaw/th^  oridn  of  the  use  of  a  Quonn,n>.  as  a  "--''J'^;'''';"";;  ;;.;"•,,  ,i,„«,,  ^efer- 
()R3   3    Final  Ut-clauses  are    di(<m;iti(  ally  used  as  bru  f  paieniheiual  <^''"''^^- \;;.^^\, 
TimMo  tiie  S?a//?V>/y  (not  to  tlie /./-t^rfuw/^)  in  the  principal  sentence,  and  exph m  nj? 
[n  a -enerafJi  N  the  ^^^^  of  the  di<course,  or  the  views  and  purp<.se  of  the  an    lor  in 

!m/  rV.   n,l  to  m  -nt^ion      In"En-lish  such  parenthetical  cluises  take  the  form  o!  an  object- 
nfiS  ive(   /i/aS    Zu:^y',vfpr\(ermitfawalia.  to  omit  other  points;  r/<  mAt/ 
i'SV/.,nottn;ent1onVtc.>:a;:^ 

tnr  •  To  he  hrief-  bavin"  made  her  testament,  the  woumn  die.l.  Tic.  dec.  (.  1  i.-h(  quui 
mi.^ur  'It  ad  falUja^  re.iHrnn.  Uo  come  to  the  drama,  to  \^^;;^;;--;]^^  ^^  ^^^ 
matic  poetry),  senVx  ille  Oecil.anus  "''"^ns  laceie  filium  rn^t  c  ni  r  «/•  -J-^  ♦^'^^•^j 
Ttelinuum  iudi.ium  de  judicibus.  et,  v^re  uf  dimm  (to  tdl  the  '^ '/  >  ■  m.  ,1?  f  .  lb 
ih  \Vrr  2  'S  »!'♦  -MurOiia  -i  nemii.i,  ut  fcrU^irm  dicam  (to  say  the  least)  odio  ''nt.  i  >. 
Mu^40  87.-1  7  n^l  7  deiUo  tempore,  nihil  de  calamitatc  reiyubliae  qtierar,  hoc^  .n 
Jespmideo  not  to  comphdn  of  th:/t  time,  and  of  that  '^^^'y  9\  ^J^"^^"; ^,\^;t 
'iSi,Vo.-Ut  ne  lonrjius  abeam,  decia.at  ista  a.^crlptio,  esse  ahquid  ,  i\ottojollou  I'^^'lf^  ' 
A  r/A.r  ^»,That  id.iition  shows  that  there  is  8.)methin,.  Ib.-l  abet.s  enm,  '  ''f  f  " 
iamamiAr^  (to  my  mthmq  more).  (,ui  se  homines  coe-issc  ateatur.  I»>- 1^'-  «''i^  ^'''l' 
?u  S  alterlus  volunt-ite,  ne  dicnn  libidine  {not  '«/;«y^ ''.'^/'^'I'Ty^-'  '•  *^  '^,  V^^lVl- 
-l  niea  o  ^,«  multa  dicam',  fre.iuen.ly  '  ».  ;/*"//a '  is  eliiptu^iliy  used  =  w  Mor/  , 
^inairord'-  Nemulta;  invenTiur  ea  «errula  ad  Stratonem  pervenisse.  Cic.  Clu  (.1 

In  ilaie  of  'n«  dicam'  in  this  parenthetical  sense,  sometimes  the  cmpound  particle 
n.]/m  (not  to  me'S  to  say  ilothinj:  <.r)  i.  used  :  a..  :  Krat  eimn  mu  to  ;;."'  ;•  "V  '^ 
huiiisnrbisaptiusquani  tota  Peloponnrsus.  r>f(/^/m  Patrcf  :  Tiie  leMdeiice  •'  «'".^^  ^' '^ 
Zld  inwe  been  nluch  more  .-.da/.ted  than  the  whole  ^-\^Y'T:^:X ^"^^^^^ 
Patne.  Cic.  Fnui.  7,  •iS.-Uenerally.  however. /..(/////^  is  u.sed  as  i  .  ,^  '^'  .  /  ^,^^ '  ;^"  ,^ 
'  mucli  less'  or  •  much  more',  mostly  occu.nnir  in  certain  eMU-essious  with  the  lorce 
a  particle  involvins;  the  idea  of  a  conditional  clause,  hee  p.   ...S.  before  i 

Obs.  4.  Sometimes  a  final  clause  is  connecte.l  with  sai^  with  t«'e  force  fa  l>elj.r^^^^ 
cronindial  as-  SalU  es^e  ma-nia  iiicommoda  accepta  vt  reliqiios  casu>  luneient ,  iJiai 
emmghdi.i.ter^  had  been  met  with  to  make  them  afraid  of  other  ucc.deut..  C«s.  B.  C. 
3,10. 


EXERCISES. 


639 


EXERCISES. 

T    That  ct  AfSES  DFrENPENT  OS  verf>a  sentievdi  {li.  23).-  1.  Tbemistocleg  Nvas  afraid 
I.  /  HAT-CLALSES  WK^^^^^  barbarians  with  part  of  their  ships  should 

dmlbh.»  Jirj-'  L  a   d     1  i^  bo'  .-2^  v^ere  afraid  Uiat  Hannibal  mi.dit  not 

double»  the  >^  """  y;  hiV  mnv  in  time  to  raise  the  sieire  of  the  city^-3.  Has  any  one  ever 
doub  ed  nr  on       u     no   d<."  th^^^^  did  not  doubt  but  you  would  do  what  yoit 

rivailvl  did   T  was  ^'reatly  delighted  that  an  occasion  had  presented  itself  t..  him 

lieall\J  ^^7-  ,^-X  I;  Thnt  as  vou  write',  Caesar  is  consultinir«  you.  {lives  me  much 
\Ztnvl-  bm  I  raTi  er  w  s'le  xVould  consult  for-  you.-7.  Men  of  inferior  abiljtyn 
*r  ,1  1  ^  .;  .^1  sorrv  for  beiiK'  surpassed  by  their  [contemporanes].-8.  Ca?sar  sjud,  he 
h  u   iKe    u  i"v^  '»>«  K""^«»  I>«^P'^'  ^^^"»^d  '^^  ex;orted'3  from  him.- 

!    W^a    >am'ryM  e^^^^^     wTth  our  dearest  friends  when'Mhey  P^rform^e  less  than  we 
;;,^i.t  _iO   I  do  not  griid-e»'  vour"<  reapingi"  the  fruits  of  your  pood  action?2o._ii 
TKub^ic-^i  was  deeply  chagri^e^  ornament,  should  have  been  camed- 

oii-  b^t    ii  robb^."* -12.  I  do  not  wonder  that  my  [friend    Furnius  should  be  held  lu 
sue    es   im"    y  you.-    3   Is  anvone  astonished'^^  when'^'  he  feels  cold''«  in  winter ?- 
14  (i'ar  was    ?eatlv  provoked"-  bv  CiceroV  departinii^o  to  join  the  force?  of  Poinpey 
i^^  Ueer^vvr-hi^  10  be  n.lieved3i-fromthat  embarrassmeni3-^.-l«.  These  [men]  rather 
wi:  ;  U   brdeserie^^^^  all,  than  to  be  defended  by  you.- 17.  I  wish  you  ^youM  ex- 

iV/    .11    ,n.    vMiir  «frders3*  — 18  I  wish  you  to  write  whatever  comes  into  [your] 
K.^nd'^m   I  'u(s    the  time  had  no^  coml»^  when  (,,.0)  you  are  able  to  "''derstand 

^hi.lis'  1  he<l3«  Pompey,  [and]  how  hi-h  [I  am  holdinirl  Brutus.-20  tlandius 
w  she  3^  that  t  leK()iiian  pe..ple  mi.'ht  have  one  Isin-le]  neck^^  that  »>e  inif-dU  unite* 
il  I iis  manifi  Id"  crimes"  in**  one  [single]  strike«.-21.  Our  forelathers  willed  that  not 
:  o  t)  Won  an  neoide  should  assemble**,  unices  some  of*'  the  magistrates  had  is>^ued 
Tc  I  rn  1:1  im.*»  -2^1  expect  to  return  in  three  days*«.-23  We  waited  in  yam 
acallloranuenn       .     *-.  ti.rht60._24.  P:picilrus  was  of  the  opinion"  that 

nlT-a  ure^^^i^the  hi<^S^C^^^  The  majority"  he'ld  that  the  army  should  depart  by 

^hMrom  the  ca    u  -^^       propose"  that  embassadors  for^*  peace  be  dirfK^tly  sent  to 

night  lu  m  V'^^^f.*^";^'- „_;"„.^^^      fV)i.53  departing. --2».  See  that  nothin-^»  is  done  against 

?he"  a  w^  -2!»  Yo^;^^^^^^^^^^^^^  the  Subject-  [in  question],  but  you  are  speak- 

'^"I"THAi-cLAUSEs  DEPENDENT  ON  ve.rt>a  dedavandi.  (R.  24.)-!  The  dictator  L.  Papi- 
riulslnt  ^N  ord  to  his  masVer  of  the  horse  not  to  engage  in  a  battle^»  in  his  absence  "- 
'    Avianus    nm^^  to  punish"  rather  himself  than  hisconntrv  if  any  ^^rong«^ 

b^.f  ber  do  e  a  -ainst  reli<'ion.-:3. 1  a^ked  for  the  permission  of  sending-s  a  colony  o  the 
iM.bli^l     d^iI^Scily^  on"  your^on's  speedy  ^^^P^rture -5    A  aler.us 

^vh  .tP  The  s.dXr^  to  remember*»  the  glory  of  their  fat  hers. -♦;.  At  that  time  I  ad- 

•>  Vi  vA„  to  he  rlcone  le^^^  Parties  stipulated»^  that   no  harsh 

me-i^t.r  ".  on  Id  Kken««  air^iilst  thV:i:tolian..-8.  I  resolved  to  keep"»  the  so  IduMS 

"h     eanip    iv.li.r  'y  a/l  adm^sMe  methods).-^.  He  S'^?^^^"? <^d  (Kf "^^.^.^^J^^^ 
imilrrneml\  Vihere)  Valerius  to  send  one  legion  to  CrassusV'»  help.-lQ.  He  gaNeordtrg 
•   1  ^,...  1.  4:'>'  OBS  M  -^  li.ndir :  L>-st  he  might  be  pressed  by  a  double  {ancej^s)  attack. 
M  oe  kre    sVeii  453  Ot^s.  2.  «.-*  Jieuderl 'Y\^tii\\.  could  not  lead  (a^/rf«cm)  early 
;^;L/iyi)  cmm'.u  d.  h  5  ar^^^^  (.aTundial  after  ad)  the  city  from  the  sieae.-^  corn- 

mi  tei-e-«/W^^  That  an  occasion  had  been  ofiered  to  him  of  '  the  thing  to  be  earned 
u  1  '  ;.;yi  t'i'/.r^v  -'  lUndH' :  That  you  write  that  Ciesar  i^etc.-«  co»^?//^  •€^- 
i  hi  r,,.t/>/-'o  Da  ive  «f  the  interested  person.-"  inferiOres.-^-'  beneficia.-^s  all- 
«M  u'^  icui  txtorq.iG  e.--'*  ir.isci  alicui.-»^  That-clause.-i»  7?f«c/.r  .•  That  they  have 
n',V.Vv^7;.7toiU  smaller  [thin-s]  than  we  have  conceived  in  the  mind.-'  -  moleste 
7.  •      ^^IViiZc^^^^^^^  ferre.-="  qood  adion.^,  virtus.-^i  homines.-"  gravi- 

teret'";:cerb    1  •rre-"aul\-rie.-"pra^^  hold  somebody  in  siick  esteem,  al.quem 

t  nafacere -iernii-^^^  That-clause.-'^-  to  fed  cold,  algere.-^»  vehementer  iudi^;;5"- 

^'54  55  «ri'     6«  Ne  clause.  -"■  dicere  -f>^  res.-^»  pugnam  commitiere.-»»  abl.  abs- 

o^aSaliquid  dudus  lacere  Jn.-'«  tenere.-''  by  abstract  dative. 


i 


^ 


640 


THATCIAUSES. 


t„  prepare  ovcrythin.  for, he  dj.p»r.urc[l!^^^^ 

t>pnc     ui  I  I  von  lor»*  vour  nia-'ii  iceiit  rocoption'-'  oJ  my  br<)tHer.—-.ti.  lu   n 

"'nTrjAT  ri.Ar.F?  DEPFNnKKT  ON  r«*n  r<;d«K«.  7?.  2r..-1.  Ihave  ahviiyf  taken  u-ioat 

fX"';,;^,;?,"n,i'a'rlhe  w\^Aec,Lwer/.  ,,,e  eonaUW^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

rus  t^aul.  he  was  at  1^4  »Hea-«  preNcntul    )y  ms^^       «^^^^^^  njrainst  the 

deliverh.g  the  prisoners  by  force  «rom  t he  bctor^    -^yj;^^^^^^  „o 

nius  out  of  my  note".— 5.  <^  f/'"^,'  <<^*  J*'*."        A,,,  ' ;     »;  This  \»  evident  ( />^W«'i I  lioni 

verb  delere.-^  «raviter -«   Ibnt-daiiM.  '^^;   '>  ,[,     .  c'e-ar  had  a  ir<>od  opinion  of 

do  not  know  how  to  bear.--"-  P'.'^^'".^',^';-:!  ""'""TJ  I      "  nrifm  .  m  -"  enlti.-^*  H.n- 

s^fisr;,:'rt^r£,^'t;;p;f  tps™i^3;r,^M 


EXERCISES. 


6il 


mander.in-ohief-8.  Ap  to  yonr  Ptavinff  in  Athens.  T  wish  you  would  depart  [from  there] 
r^  H^jn  a"i>o"lMw7-9  Your  brother  d*'serves  the  greatest  thanks  (.f  our  lellow-cinzens. 
^10  WhaleN^T  tile  tyrant  has  taken  from  us^  he  ha«  leltua  the  rii,^ht3  to  transmit  (maA 

1  XvMmt  am  be  ".  clea.^  aifd  evidei.f  as  that  there  is  some  divine  i.en.^'  l,y  whom  .h.8 
w()i-id''  s  overned  'U.  There  is  no  doubt  that  of  all  Greek  nations  the  Lacertjenioinans 
w  'the  bn"e""-3.  It  is  better  that  a  piilty-  [person]  should  -^^^^^-^^^  '^^, 
tli-m   liiat  an  inmnent  [nerson]  should  be  condemned.— 4.  It  is  disgrajtlu    lor  a  irte 

,n  •    nAito    vL^M^-  ''•'""•d  "^^)  at  any  placets  where  he  has 

no^  he  ruhts  of  a  ci  ize.^^-S.  It  was  disL-raceful  [lor  him]  to  accuse  (  =  that  he  ac- 
?u<ed)thatco"^uUv^^^^^^^  qua-sior  he  had  Ik  en.-G.  Nothing  is  more  important  imajm) 
SaiT  or  a  uSer  (/>r^c-./>/^A-)  to  thorou-hly  examine'*  before  all  other  hinps  ur/j/^im  ^2 
t  rtalem'»  amr^^^^^^  the  student  (^i.T.n«).-7.  The  Senate  considered''  i     to  be 

ioiS  (  i^.m""  harcornelius  sh.,uld  ol>tttin  Gaul  as  [his]  province,  his  command  t;/|pe- 
l^Srbeh^tr  cont  inuedi».--8.  It  is  not  fair  (;>ar)  that  I  should  speak  in  the  presence  ot  Kos- 

L  d   fshou^^^^ 

^iNJior,Lr-\{)  It  is  a  settled  matter»"  with  me  to  leave  the  public  ser\-ice^».-  -11.  ^ear 

h  r^eS  .'i>^ H  s"  r.^^  tree  which  it  is  thou.dit  a  sin  (../a.,  to yiolate.-l' .  It  is  a Pious  cus- 
tom to  attribute  Ktrihvert)  one's  hapI)ine^s  to  the  <rn.ce  (judiciuvi)  ot  the  cr"*^^-!^- ^fto 
savi'  in  is  '  O  •  -ins  '  that  with  our  ancestors  it  had  been  t  he  custom  in  banque  s^i  for  the 
?ul<ir,r<inLMif  t.'rn  with  the  accompaniment  ol  the  fliite'-i^.  the  pral^es  and  vi. tuts  of 

il:,ra'^,=i^^^^£.i;eKfffa|K^ 

VI    Tmat-clal'sfs  as  subjects  of  Impersonal  \  ekbs    li.  2«.— i.  it  was  eviueni  iimt 

t  -  V'^  «{%— ^^  Sonl^iTiJe^pi:^ 

^Tri"  -  aStk'd  lict  wtth  m^^  that  Labeo  had  committed  the  murder.- 

^  I  aVneVd  (?o/'r    ii?)  with  llortensius  that  he  should  open  thf  P.'^^t"/-'  ;' 1"  ^his  case  - 
7  Thert  is    o  disa^-reement  as  to  the  fact  that  Semproni.is  fell  !»  ^^at  battle  -8  It  ee 

PJ^r*/.iiy  «/  «XiS:So</.i:-l-2.  It  »a.  «llo.ed  •«  .l.e  king  •»  XweVby 

was'  not  far  with  his  ar/ny  when  our  ^l^Vr'l^Y'^re  tints  jm-ss^^^  -^It 

^Tti:,n-     he  ^;sT    "k  a-s^an'omtorVa  triS  ^L  than  twenty  years.-19  In  del  nitio^^^^ 
U  is  proper  that  nothing,  should  ^^^ .f}}^; :{^^^^%^\SrA^^^^^ 

St';;¥^i^.irEie-;r^ 

--By>.m;.«.  Oraiiasaoere  (Pa-We.y).^  eripere  ali^^ 

_4  in'mmis.-^  «l'^''-*"^^--  vP'^''P''u\'n;:  n   nV     n'hSta^  eo  loco.-»*  Lt  to  have 

»  nocens.-'o  causani  non  duere  -»    ini,'enu  s  -     ««;  '"^^^^^^^   _,\  _  ^j^^,,  ^jj^t  a  teacher 
the  rights  of  a  citizen  =  servTre  (by  the  P^r.phrast  c^^cm  umm 

should  thorouirhly  examine  ( ^>' J'^^^^o'^^;^ ';"  /^,  ^^^^^^  J.  cpula'  (gen.V-*^^  Hender: 

abs.  with  perfect).-  »  certum  «f^-'^^.   'l^^^i'^Jf^^^^^^^^        the  flute  («d  tibxam).  etc.- 

inff),  priOrem  diceie.--^»  ex  cons.ho  «  ^^f.^ l"   Ji^cim^^^^^^^ 
«•,u:tere.-30evanescere-=''uni.mcaus^^    m  uare.^ 

tIs;iudicendotenCre.— 5*redundare.— 3*pettfitum.        iiu„i. 


642 


THAT-CLAUSES. 


.in.U.>  State  .houl.l  he  -titled  (/^^0  to  iT.nl<c  Us  -- 1---^.  J  .Imll  let  yon  knowMf 

,lK-v.lH.ul«l  k..()w  it.--2fi.  ir  >V'V'^^"";!^,  ?;;'pr"<  M.^  at  t  .•c.l.cu<.n».--'27.  It  matter* 
be  lone,  than  in  my  .nt.Te<t  that  you  >';>'>  '»'1  ^^^  fi.V  h  1%  ee.l.l  unless  mn)  he  knous 
v.-ry  little  r<.r  an  ontoi-»  to  know  what  to  say  [m  »'"*,  »;»'^.VA!..!;  V".  .r^.L  if  the  enemy 


t„-  ,.civ,l  villi  IraiKl.iU'nl  ,"'<<^"'">i' '•-*;jj,r'fl\'"|,   „||„,vs^ 

wh.,1  ,uc.a,„.'»we  "'"X  ■">■«  'V'''^'.^'?^,'"''!^,  •^fti,'    -35.  Oar  .lifticiiUie.-'  »«<•  i" 


I 


(  efeat'-*  in  >uain. — .5.  1  nc  infp^  "»-  ..^...    ... 

Mauiiiu^ThS  be  «„„1,1  -..ily  r,.«,v..r"  «ha.  h.,  had  lo«.-4.  The  .lan?jero"s  o.h.mo,,  h.m 

pained  f'round"  that  under^nhe-c  jii         , 

K  " '  n  he  condemned.-5.  We  hold  the  o|nn.oi. 


>  Iiad  lost. — *•    1  UU  imnu»  1»'"         1,     / 

gained  F-'''^"i^^,-'^^^i'S  il^^^^niZn^M^afr^Wne^^  (--)  ^cept^ 


icommoUum  m  thi.  law  V/,  V/'  A;:  ^-j  .«h  ,  a  i v  ni  bein-s  ^<iniwa,>^)  «-ere  once  glam- 
or our  mas:if»nates.-l.i.  ■^''«,Vr  "uV^Lti  «  1  1  .the  aeknowled-'ed  (coured^m  hy  onr 
dam)  calledo»  into  existence'»   >y/ha  ce  »    vvil    n..t  ^^«;^!   '^,  ,^,.p^,,  \,„  ,j,,)  the  State 

conntrymen.-l.i.  That  r.'proach'^  ;,'    ,  ^ ,    L  i  ;,*  J/ 7 r^^^^  »"•'  ^^'^''^^  ^'^^^'S"- 

of  t!ie  Atlienians  that  they  put  ^"  <!^'='^  \  <'f,^;/'^. '''^'^^^^^^  (o"*  bribo'^  ilieir  le-isla- 

-17.  There  was  nt)W  {jayn)  no  m<.tive  U-a^/^fO  tor  »»'   .^    'f^'.'.  '    ,„  you  why"  I  cannot 

tors'»  -18.  You  cannot  vemoye{Mkre)  the  chH'^^'^.J'  '^'\.   ^^J^^  H^^ 

^Mue  into  the  Senaie.-19.  What  other  cause  inul^^^^^^^ 

(reiviomlre)  your  nefarious  measure8?-2u.  Veires  came  >ciy  near  u      „    . 

tht;  multitude. 


.M„r^».r"^- »b,.;i»  ;  he.ej,eh,.  the  j,^^^^^^^^^ 

S'  iH'Cunir)SUs.-3«  qnamrU  with  subjunctive.-^*»  ""     '  /^««J/Vlri,   /yl/i//)  -"  dicere.- 

44  a.limere.-*»  dominus.--»»  divulere.-^'  V  Ji r//.^/ r.f   Vm  t 
conari.-^orerupenlre.-'^pra.ium.-     /0/  A^^^^^^^^ 

65  nisti.ia.-"  /^/K/.r;  «'«^^'^^   »'-'  CVhu  c  a   se  -«"^^^^^^^^  ar  n:ltus  ,arcess.  pred.). 

•«  /;.nrf.r.-  That  lax.'s  (trihutam)  be  paid  (^o/tvr^)  ^f  "^^^^^^"'•g^p,'^  _;♦  That-cl^ 
••  vocare.-'o  vita.--  casns^--  oppm^^^ 
'2^^:^^^^^Z^^'^X^^  and  a  Tiiat-ciau.e.--  laccr.re. 


I 


■ 


■ 


EXERCISES. 


643 


„,  ^^^c     7?  91      IT  hplipve  that  ve  mnst^  Ptrive  with 

VIIT.  iNNF.n  FORM  OF  TlT AT-CLAFSFP.  ^•/^j-r/A\7„rxt4  humUhl  -2.  It  is  absurd 

nil  our  n.iL'hf^  to  rednc'  the  city  b.fore_,the  first j-f^ncxt^Jjno';^^ 


you  "'•^y;''V,''"'\\.'l, 'L.u    threat ened't.)  imil'^  them  to  the  crossi*  when 
Sfra.;^:nl!:ii?^:-m  U  5-^i::  - -j;!^'- ^^^^i^^r  S;io^^t^hrmed  that  Csar 

be  defeated,  will  '«<>»  ^^^M;"»"^' ^^^X  ^^i^pS    e^^  ^'^^  '^-"^""• 

would  accept  these  ^'^^^^^^\^^^''h)\^\^il\'^)l^^^  to  n-bellion  (>'editio\  had  been 


IX.  MoDAi.  THAT-CLAUSES.  H.  ii.  ^-^-l-  fJJ\*^?  '^iV.-,^^^^^    j^  th  "ranks3»  -2.  It  had 
tbat  l.e  placed  (ro//o.v7..).  for  apii^arancc^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^^  ,.^^^. 

been  noticed^Mhat  the  ai-my  ««.*     f  Po^^^^^^^^  ^,,,^  ^,^  ,„„.,,t35  on 

part-33  than  th.>y  were  w'»"t'*.  ^^.  .ir  >,Ll  nrrfom^^^      his  march  so  that  he  never  wasS» 
Lot  nnfavoral»le3«  lm-ou.uP'.-3.  C  esar  had    et    '^^^^     The  attention  of  the  enemy  was 


o  latus.-**  accidere  ^^^^^r^^'^^l^'J^Z^^^^  contracted  (.v.vd- 

jr..od  -race  (^ra/JaV-*»  liV"'jf;  '^Iffl^V^/ere  -  ««^^^^^^^^^  appHcilre  ad.-"  tu- 

^,v)  many  «^imities  (ye//rM/^?/^«>V-;^^^^^^^^  [soldier^i]  on  etc.-^^  hpvnm 

inulns.-»' Render  :  t(.  observe  what  w  a.  h.n.^^^^^^^^^^^  siutiment  (ro/u/.tor) 


eornu  -.3.aducIr;.^^:^^S;^tJan;^oZSinof  ttheir]  sentiment  ..^unm 
mi-ht  be  done.-"  largitiOnee.-»»  nuntius. 


644 


TEMPORAL  CLAUSES. 


tliou<-ht  of  the  same  reapoTis.-IS.  This  ran'  easily  be  done  if  yon  arc  \yilling«  to  sell 
V m.r  V  Ha  to  kiv  nuthin- of  a  n.ortira-e»,  which.  I  think*,  yon  can  ne-otiafe  oi,  8a t^- 
l-u"orv  ten..* --14  The  «hole  tiihe^  of  the  Greeks,  not  to  i.ntt.M.l.ne  a  point  on  lt% 
is  i-noraut  ol^  the  meanin-^  the  importance»,  [andj  the  wei.i;ht">  ol  an  oath. 

»  Poterit  -«  fut  perf.— »  veipflra.— •«  Bender  by  involution:  which  it  will  be  allowed 
(lictre)  to  tin  e  to  make  on  [by]  cnon-h  fair  ^a,p(iis)vMn\\\\in\9.-^):v\m^.-^  J\'>"f^^'.  """^ 
to  treat  ilie  thiiii.'  too  {coiiiparatici)  lincly  (subrUiti).—''  i<;i»orarc  aluiuid.-»  vis.— 
»  aucioritas,— •"  pondu:*. 


CIIAPTEU  Fouirni. 

TEMrOPiAL   CLAUSES. 

I.   QUUM-CLAUSES   AND  THEIR   EQUIVALENTS. 

§  619.  Qimm-clauscs  arc  either  tuke  tempoual  clauses,  denoling 
the  relations  of  time,  connected  with  the  principal  predicate,  or  IM- 
piiorEU  TEMPORAL  CLAUSES,  whicli,  tindcr  tiie  FORM  of  a  temporal  clause, 
express  certain  relations  of  the  predicate  7wt  belongini,'  to  time  {nfftctid 
Quum-daus€.s).  They  arc  1)  Modal  Quum-clauses  ;  2)  Causal  Quum- 
CLAUSEs;  3)  Adversative  Quum-clauses;  4)  Coordinating  Quum- 
clauses. 

The  pure  temporal  clauses  arc  either  definite,  or  indefinite  (7?.  34), 
and,  in  regard  to  their  grammatical  relation,  either  adverbial,  or  attrib- 
utive (see  Obs.  2). 

Or-*  1  The  coninnction  oumn  nm^t  l>e  oonsidcred  as  an  original  advkhb  of  time 
havin-  the  same  relation  to  the  relative  adjective  ry/zi,  a^  the  locative  adveri>8  ufn  and 
vnde  "  As  vbi  \s  =  eo  hx-o  qvn,  or  =  u^u>liKO,  m)  q>i>nn  is  =  to  hmjmre  (/vo,  or  =  (p/o 
temmre  Hence  fnuuenlly  relative  clauses  introduced  by  quo  ttw/H)rP,  are  e(,uivalent 
to  Quum-clauses,  and  vice  versa:  (/uo  fenijM,r.  (  =  qrtrwi)  earn  primuin  liberam  esse 
audiv it.sine  judici.»  reddidit  C'ejo.  (^ic.  CIu.  .',!M.;2.  Thu.,  for  ln^tance,  the  appos.  ne 
<>  nm-clau-('s  ( A'.  81.  Obs.  «M  have  the  forci'  of  a^drdinntina  relanve  clan^es.  Therefore 
tl  e //Vol)./  of  Quun)-clau-es  frequently  f..Ilous  the  rules  on  the  mood  ot  relative  clau-^es, 
e  i  X-rtniteind  the  aKirdinatum  relative  (^,nm-clauses  re.iuinnir  the  indicative  ike 
the  corresponding  t)ni-clause8,  while  causal  and  adversative  (^lum-clau^es  have  their 
predicates  in  the  suT)iunctive.  Only  the  subjunctive,  which  must  or  may  be  used  lu 
lome  clasg,"  of  tin-  pure  temporal  Quum-clauses,  must  be  considered  as  conventional, 
deviatin-,'  more  or  less  from  the  rules  on  the  mood  ol  relative  clauses. 

Ob«  2"  Ouum-clauses  are  either  ADVKitBiAL,  or  attkibutivk.  The  former  arc  thope 
whichai-e  directly  dependent  on  the  tjovernini:  predicate;  the  latter  arc  tho.«e  which  are 
deuendent  on  one  of  the  «reneral  nouns  denotin::  time  {tempu^.  ditn.  annu^,  etc.).  >«'C  /f. 
:i6  S.mu'times  temporal  Quuui-dauses  are  used  as  SiB.iErT-(  i.ai'sks  inostly  referring 
toindettniie  time,  so  as  to  have  the  nature  of  Siclauses.  as:  /hfinifio  est,  q„„m  in  scriplo 
verlmui  aliquod  est  jxnifum  cujus  de  vi  quariiur  Cic.  Inv  2,  l"l|<- V'"'?i''''i^i'i'.  V'^'tilim 
mus  locu^^sf.ncum  injuiiil  cntumelia  juncta  demons  riltur,  I'V.l"'»^.^-  ^.f!»^' ''  ' "  ™ 
dissimulatio  est  quum  alia  diandurnc  s.ntias,  =  alia  dic.re  (^^'''^J^'^"  -•"«"'  r\'.''nn,mm 
ulatioest.  Ib.Or.2,<i7.-Qui(l  est  autem  (piod  |>lus  valea  ad  ponendum  dolOiem  quam 
guutnest  intellectum  nihil  prollci  ?  (  =  Si  ii.telli-itur,  <|r;  Intel  i.m  .  plunmum  valet  I. 
Tusc  3  is— The  mood  in  subject  Quum-clauses  of  this  kind  is  the  indicative,  i.au  r 
writ.rs,  however,  use  sometimes  the  f^uf>J>oic/ive,  as  :  Nou  exiijit  defensrOrtm  quumjalear 
qux'dam  eloquentiui  eOrum  defuisse.  Tac.  Dial.  25. 


QUUM-CLAUSES  AND   THEIR  EQUIVALEx\TS. 


645 


««^ 


'" 


t 


A.  PURE  TEMPORAL  QUUM-CLAUSES. 
1.  Adverbial  Quum-clauses. 

Bern  34  Adverbial  Quum-claiises  denoting  pnre  time,  refer  either  to 
an  indefinite,  or  t(.  a  definite  time.  The  former  have  the  nature  ot 
the  indefmite  relaiive  clauses  (p.  4U7,  Obs.  7  loll.),  denoting  an  uticertam 
coHtinqcncy  on  Avhich  the  reality  of  the  principtil  i^redicate  depends.^  In 
the^e  the  conjunction  quvm  is  either  rendered  by  '  \chen  ,  or  by  ?/  , 
havino-  either  the  force  of  'whenever ',  or  denoting,  like  .<  an  assump- 
tion o^  the  speaker.  (See  p.  320  foil.)  The  mood  ot^  indehnile  Quum- 
clauses  is  generallv  the  indicative  (but  see  Obs.  2  and  5). 

Ob*.  1  If  ii.delinite  Qunm-clanses  refer  to  non-preteHfe  principal  predicates,  their  own 
nr"ucHU-  nay  be  1)  in  Ihe  perfect  indicative,  2)  in  the  present  indicaiive,  3)  in  one  of  the 
Ko  future  ttnses.Si.metmes  the  perfect  and  present  are  placed  m  the  subjnnc  lye 
loi;V  Kit  neither  of  the  two  future  tenses  can,  by  conversion,  become  a  subjuucUve 
of  the  present  or  perfect  (p.  447,  foil.). 

Ob«  2  If  both  the  principal  and  the  dependent  predicates  denote  an  indefinite  present 
♦  imr^seei)  2MH  V.'WT  2an(:^).  the  predicate  of  the  Quum-clause  is  in  the  iNincATiVE 
ru  .  ST  ■.  •  c)'''/m  p'-n^n-na  ,)nemia  .vnt,  e.t  cau^a  peccandi :  When  (wherever)  there 
a  e.m'u',ri/eMt.el.lout)thereisam<,tive  for  sinnrnj:.  Cic. Off.  3,  20  ^"^'^,^^  ^™ "'»'"« 
hori'<  a  iq  1  (I  atrx  iter  fieri  vidhnUK  seiisum  omneni  humanitatis  amittirnus.  I'>-  «•  A^53. 
i/L  .e  suinini  ^.vN.mnium  summa  i.-rum,  re-em  ilium  nnnm  r6«///.y/.*.  I'>- I^f P- ^' 
^  Iver  1,  '  AKBiTR<>u'  nos  etiam  tunc  vtimvr,  qvnm  ea./ea;jj«.  jurat,  qna^  comperh» 
h  lu-mu-  lb  Font.  13.  2H.-Quod  idem  tit  qnum  de  tniimpho  r^/e^/wr.  lb.  Phil.  1,  5, 1^-— 
Ronve   •/;//o"e<M^  tiias  liitctas  /;70.  lb.  Att.  2. 15.  l.-Non  ea  ..<  m^lecTna  qnyrn 

re»,us  ^uum  renit  calamita-.  V^'I/l^/^'lL^'^n  "'^  TT.V  ^^  dIx  V^  ^  lb  a^iS  142- 
2  1  1S-2  5  12-  Hep.  l,;is. .')();  Tull.11,28;  Ciec.  1.3;  Or.  «»,32;  J^n.  2,  25,.>4,  in.  ^,t»??,  j^^  . 
Plane  fi  1;     Ih  14  :i5-lf  the  two  predicates  denote  habit  or  cu.«tom,  the  ;;?t//ct;>ai 

,  e  k>m  ma    h,  in  the  ..npe.lect  :  Tu.n  qnum  concurmnt  ceten  P'^'^'^i^^;  ,',^»«  "^n" 
tor  castra  facilbat  •  At  the  season  when  the  other  j.raMors  are  on  the  field  of  act  on, 

h  .t^?eM  :4  u  m  was  w..nt  to  bt.ild  his  camp.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 5  12.-ln  post-classical  !an- 
mi-^r  Ur-  itnd  a^^^^^  of  such  Quum-clauses  are  often  placed  in  the  subjunctive  In 
S;>:  mri-.i-  1  -e  the  indicali\^',  in  clau^es  of  this  liind.  is  even  then  necessary  when 
frclatisems  the  character  of  \  conc.sHve  clause,  as  :  Qui  ">^-^'^«»t.  X>'^'"»!  "^I^.f 
Itinm  Quum  manent  corpore.  animo  tamen  excuisai.t  et  vagrant tir.  ^'C.  Kep.  2.4.-lhe 
SxrS^^"^ cZToZy  be  used  when  the  clause  is  mbot/ique,  or  when  '^^.subjunctive  is 
n  M.  nu'd  for  bv  ttie  rules  on  subjunctives  by  attraction  or  quasi-attractton  <p.  398  foil., 
n  4  s  f  II)  a-  (?^^^mr^</^am  navem  cursum  tenentem  stium,  cum  tempests,  e /p«r7nem 
niins  auan'i  HI  .a,temperem  ?  Plane.  :il»,  iM—Ceter.ne  Ciesaris  virtflies  popuhlres  sunt.  , 
nlNl^nHrsi  u    tt^^^^^^^^^^  f'-ne  se  latibulis /^7«''^  atque  omnia  bella  jure  jren- 

ii  m     X^^  (Subjunctive  by  quasi-attraction  on  account  of  the 

);/■«-  mbSuea"/d^^^^^^  '^'*^"^"  ^^^^T'^  *^  '-'^'•f"VZ 

ac.or^fitS  to  tM3  ndes  p  402,Obs.3,  and  p.  408,  /?.  90,  as  :  Ex  suS  vi  {rem  asmmt)  quum 

^^' 0««  %    If  the  predicate  of  such  a  Qnum-clanse  denotes  an  action  which  m'?^t  be  con- 

^    •//..    Tu  V.',,f  94  Q^  — \n  ill  e  aves   nisi  qmnn  v  reritnt,  canere  non  solent  f  lb  Di\.  A 
tatein  eiguiflcari  putant  (when  the  pilots  see  dolphins,  etc.).  lb.  Div.  2,  .0, 14o.-Dum  lego, 


64:6 


TEMrORAL   CLAUSES. 


n?p(M)fior,  Quum  maui  librum.  a??entio  omnif»  olabitnr.  11».  Tupc.  1, 11,  24.  C  omp.  Cic.  Or. 
2  •^4.  1(»4  :  1.  .-^.S.  ir»T ;  Verr.  2, 3,  81> ;  Off.  :<.  21.  Siibnmctivcs  in  clau-cs  of  this  kind  occur 
o'lily  bv  uitrHction,  or  when  iluM-Imii*c' is  siibobiKim-.  a»  :  Placet  i-itur  tibi,Caio,  qvian 
res  suinp-^erui  iioii  < oncessas,  ex  illis  •  flicere  qiioii  velis?  Cic.  Fin. 4, 18. 

Obs  4  FurrnK  predicates  in  indefinite  Qunm-claupcs  remain  in  the  indicative,  a  con- 
versidii  into  the  correspomlin.,'  tiubjnnctivc  tense  beini,'  not  atimissible.  They  are  mostly 
connected  with  imperative  sentences,  as:  Imfurfi  jiopulo  potedtfifis  aliqind  :  non 
eafian'^  eiim  lihertate,  se<l  in(evdtrl<  ciipiditilte  libertfltis,  fy/zwrn  tanlummodo  potestjltem 
pistandi  feceris.  lb.  Hep.  2.  2S.  .'■>1.— 'l^inc  antem  fellcem  tu  w^vj'iUtn  (junin  ix>tnis\n 
publico  vivere,  qiivm  le  parietes  tui  tegeut,  non  oh^condmt.  ben.  Ep.  43.— Conip.  Cic. 
Prov.  Cons.  1, 1. 

Ob*»  5  If  indefinite  Quum-clause?  are  dependent  on  preterite  prcdicatep,  they  always 
dein.te  repeated  or  habitual  actioti,  their  principal  predicate beini,'  in  \\\Mimi^rtert  of  C(»i- 
tinqent  action  (p.  SQ'.Hoil.K  while  the  predicate  of  tie  <-lauseis  in  \hv  pliii)erject-uutic(iin-e 
if  the  action  must  be  comi)lete(l  l>ft'<ne  the  principal  action;  else  it  is  in  the  twjhrjtct 
indiratir"  •  as:  (ives,  quimi  pahim  ejus  aniiuli  ad  palinam  amverterat  (  -  u'htn  he 
turned  or  when  he  'had  turned),  a  nullo  videf/atur  ;  idem  riirsii-  ridefjotur  rrmm  in  locum 
annulum   inVf-rterat.    Cic.  Off.  3,  n,  :W.    See  p.  3"»,  Obs.  l,and  p.  331,  Kx.  S-f..  Ccmip.  tic 


Flacc.  7.  1«  :  Orat.  32, 113 :  Verr.  2.  5,  11 


Cics.  B.  (i.  7,  22  ;  Cic.  Cat.  3, 7,  IT.     For  the  use  of 


the  tiidniiHrth-e  in  iiuletinite  Quiim-dauses  by  the  writers  of  the  Augustan  and  silver 
a"e«!  8ee  p  331,  c  -When  the  principil  predicate  deuoies  hatnf,  and  the  pr«'dirate  of  the 
clliiiae  belongs  to  the  same  tiin<',  the  .sufijunrtire  is  often  used  even  in  Cicen),  as :  14  \  anus 
dicee  ,<nfefxit  qinnn  daiis  t<^stibtis  alii  tamen  cifnrentiir.  Cic.  Fin.  2, 19.  bee  the  Jj.x.  cited 
p.  331,  Obs.  6,  No.  b,  and  Brut.  G2,  222  ;  Or.  H,  2.")*. 

Rem.  ;>.■).  The  predicales  of  pure  tcmporul  Q'uim-claiises  referrinc:  to 
DEKiNiTh:  TIME  Jire  ixciicnilly  in  the  iiidirntirr  if  tiie  time  is  conceived  sis 
a  dcpinte  point  of  iiine  ;  and  cither  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunc- 
tive if  tiic  lime  is  conceived  as  a  jieriod  or  a  i<p((ce  of  time.  But  tliere 
are  several  exceptions  to  tiiese  rules  (see  Obs.  2  foil). 

Obs  1  Ml  the  distinctions  in  reirard  to  the  mood  of  pure  temporal  Qiium-claus-s 
depend  1)  on  the  tense  of  the  principal  predicate,  accordin;;  as  it  is  in  a  NoN-ri:KTKi;iTK 
or  in  a  pkktkiutk  tense  ;  2)  on  the  (luestimi  wliethcT  the  time  of  the  (iuum-dause  crmi- 
cides  with  that  of  the  princip  il  predicate,  or  whether  it  is  aidtrwr  to  it.  Hence  tlie  fol- 
lowin ■'  main  distinciions  must  l)e  made  U  .\ntkkiou  Quitm-clai'sks  dependent  on  non- 
PRETKRiTKs;  2)  CoiNciDiNcj  Qui'M-CLArsKs  dependent  on  non-i'HKTKkitks  ;  o)  Antk- 
Kiou  QuuM-cLAUsES  Uepemlcnt  ou  ruKTEUiTEs  :  4)  Coincidi.ng  (iuuM-cLAUSEs  depend- 
ent on  PKETEUITES. 

Obs.  2.  ANTEniou  Qim^m-clauses  dependent  on  xox-PRETEUiTEshave  their  prrdirates 
either  in  \\m  jH-rftct  indicative,  or  in  the  per/'trt-y>ttjj>tnctic>\  wlitre  it  makes  no  dilb-rence 
whether  the  time  is  conceive  1  as  a  jwinl  of  time,  or  as  a  space.  ii*<:  Sociks  eiro  no>tris 
mare  per  hos  annos  clausum  fuisse  dicum,  f/>ium  exercitus  vestri  nuimiuam  a  Brundisu), 
nisi  hieme  summjl  transmiotrint  (when  your  armies  hare  crossed  etc)?  <^iiad  vos  ab 
exteris  nationibus  venlrent  captos  *?//era/-,  (jt/itm  lepjilti  P.  B.  redempti  funf/  Mercaton- 
bus  tutum  mure  n(m  fuisse  dicam,  qmiui  duodeeim  secQres  in  pra'dOimm  potestatem 
j)€rvenennt?^\c.h.yi.  12, 33^ut  :_Jiuid_e^o_^stiem^e_Hiconiin()(|unij/w/Y^^ 
~  *  Here,  however,  do  vot  belonir  the  passajres  by  which  the  author  of  the  Publ.  Sch.  (ir. 
attempts  to  prove  this  usa<'c:  ll  Zennnem.  ii>iinn  Atlienis  easem,  andiel>am  frequenter. 
Cic  N  D  1   '^Jl     The  author  of  Publ.  Sch.  (Jr.  explains  the  use  of  the  siibjunctive  by  tlie 
fact  that  Cicero  was  more  than  once  in  Athens.     This  is  true,  but  in  this  passajre  Cicero 
refers  to  that  time  when,  afier  his  defense  of  Boscius  Amerinus,  he  liad  proceeded  lo 
Athens  for  the  sike  of  stiidvimr  philosophy.     We  know  that  durinir  thi-  period  lie  also 
attended  the  lectures  of  the  Kpiciirean  Zeno  (Fin.  1,  r>,  Iti» ;  but  he  did  not  hear  liim 
a<'aip,  and  the  connection  of  tlu;  passat,'e,(i noted  above,  distinctly  shows  that  Cicero 
referred  to  tliat  time  (mlv  when  he  was  stadiimq  at  Athens.— 2)  Nos  turn  </«'/;/*  maxiuie 
con-ilio  nostro  snhveiilre  eominani  falfiti  opurteret,  in  seniltum  non  vocabjlmnr.  cic. 
Phil.  5, 1.     The  author  of  P.  Sch.  Gr.  renders  :  '  I  was  not  summoned  to  attend  th.-  Senate 
rtvn  oj'i  fH'ca<ion>t  when  mv  advice  was  most  needed'.     Whoever  has  read  the  I'hilipines 
must  know  that  the  '  Ao^' '  and  the  'vocatxiniur'  in  this  passape  do  rot  reler  iiMiivKiually 
to  Cicero,  but  to  the  whol^  Senate,  and  to  one  occasi',>n  only,  namely  to  tiiat  tune  ol 
Antoniu-'s  consulship  in  which  for  political  reasons  he  did  not  call  the  Senate  t^virether 
Nor  ci»/ld  the  r'a<sa<'e  refer  to  Cicero  individuallv,  since  the  Senators  were  not  summoned 
individuallv.but  hy^piddic  call  throu-;h  the  prieco.     It  was  altoirether  impossible  to  pre- 
vent a  Seiiatoi'fl  coming  into  the  Senate  by  'not  inviting  him'. 


QUUM-CLAUSES   AND   THEIR  EQUIV.VLENTS. 


G4:7 


classis  eacni  consul  P- I^;^P-nil"^^t;^  S^^^e^^^S^lT^^ 
Photild  1  complain,  when  n  fleet  l\^!^^"'J'^'''^^^^  honestum  sit.  tnm  rursus  rfaa- 

llud  probo  (1U0.1   qanm  f<'[''''  -^^^:;!^^^^^^  again  say  that  etc.).  lb 

U  etc.  ;  that,  when  y..u  ^^'^/^''^    "   'JL^l .1/«  ,7.  m  n.st  nc-dod  of  indefinite  length,  iti 


^;^;:i^JWZ'S:^rlS'tSi^:^^^^  «urn.  ^.«>.^»».-,  re  .am,!.. 
r^drS,?™rchoice.im«.«,a,Jna„,^ 


„ot  wonder  tchen  (tj  }  Ivoufc.^  'i'^'n^^tnStii^hulT^^^^  ita  e.t  lb.  M«r.  2,  5). 

this  is  so  (meaning  jj'f^,  J  »;,[«>•  J^'^^^.^j'^.'^jea  tM.e  meaning  of  'since  ,  as; 

Sometimes  <l'»um-clauses  wittia  prestni  i       c^  ^^^^^  (since) 

Quo.l  vos  quom  faeere  nony.o/^v  ^,.,    aniquam  >"  ™/^;'y  ^^JJi^  coincidiuL'  Qnu 

?ou  cannot  do  tins,  y..u  ^!:^,^^:J:^:^-^h}^^J^Z^ced.M^ 


',:;"./-'.";-"  .7,  '7;ih;.;';;;m-n.'s"S"tho'idl,atiJe  after  nu„c  gumn,  as  :  Quanto  lac.l.us 
Clu.4.0.-C.)mp.Cic.\err.  1,18    (|u.l^r  3.  s.^.  ^^^^^^^^^^  ^  „/^  iC  ^,,^.  Matter 


condidil.  Cic.  Div.  1.  l7.-io.  •""!"'  'phii  /4  11  —Sometimes  Ouum-clauses  which, 
(=  eut.nv^>re  quo,  f  ./^J^f  i;*^;  .^V resent  d  ^^i^uaV^^^i^ciding^  .>ne  time-point  bv 
et/ictly  taken,  «re  «;»/^7W,  arc  rtprc^^^^^^^  •'  .  .,  ^^^ji^atire  instead  of 

giving  t«)  the  predicate  of  »*'«  Q'''' »f ''^"^^ '"^J"  "'  ^, '\  A  £  .  £-0  m.  hercules.  7""'^ 

all  codices),  is  quoted  wit li  the  /"'''^'V,,'^'  ;.;'',;,,"  .leulioned  before,  thepredicate 

l,v  a  pirfi-ct  iiulicaine  to  <  cn..lc;.a  ';""■;*',.  "J    o,/J„    .rim"  m  i..  iPiaii'm  rem.  pater 
tsse  incii)ere(,  ad  exercilum  venil.  Cies.  B.  O.  •.,  z. 


648 


TEMrORAL  CLAUSES. 


*    .^.77/^  ^c/'    Bt.iptiv  «Doikin"-  U  anterior  to  the  predicate  'mm  percusfiis'.    But 
cate  'dehVa  e^t  v j*/,  '<^VJnh  a,  ih  r^^      coinci.lent  at  the  Hamc  tiine-ix.int.  to  exprosp  the 

Pftn'm.  iic.ur.  *.  4».     viii"u  iiiin  i\ /..  ),«p,.  tho  muior  tv  or  the  C Out .  nai*  the 

V'4^'r  Tmnirm  -S^init  m^lu   i>i'^S^  (i,mm.d:u.se  is  in  fact  a /.^^ 

Jc?1if  ^r!^a,  S|n.  .;.^ 

eipMl  l>7<';:'^y.'V';>^r'jrU^..ce    he  M  >;ct    m^^  i./the  above  pas<ai?es  inu.t^hc 

?et'  ,  r'    ,™,  ,,l  ";,^««-  <im>m-cl.u„es  r.f.rm.s  1,.  Inno-,»,,,,!,  «x  Ob,.  1  L 


■ '^  J^rSiSiS?  Sis  i^^ 

noii-hi.storical)  htAie.  '"^- ?'.''""'■  [^'X,;,^'"/;,,.  ,iixtwjr<>e  as-  ()uod  ^m/:  o8  tuum  v"«w* 
viims  eos  honnnes  »»  c.m.One     (.  ic  \  er^^^^  .,^  ^.,.,,„        .i,,i, 

locabmlnr.  H>-."-2/'2,.«.-He-.'uU  s  tu      ^^^,".'7 ''?' .V_;^,^,,  |i„c  factHohtm  semper  turn 
quam  h   donu  consuh1l•l^.mansl>^et.   ^  ; \V- ;;  tVV  .5  _k;^^^  »"„«  a  nos.ro  CatOne 

lu.mar,  vel   reprehendi  ine,.ce  ens  none ^.^^a^^  .<^^,^^,^  ^P„„,. 


^^i^;^^;,;;s>v./  ..^...(i..  .-y  be  uj.d  i^,Q---;--«,;::;:;rti;;^?r.;:<;;.e^ 

the  mea.un.  'while',  '"'d  the  t.^^^^^^^^^^^^^^  Hir- 

whicli  is  represented  a.s  fal  in^  u^U/nn  tht-      h'»^,  "^,;  ^   '  "• /^^^,,^  .nl.iri  stratum  (>/vru.rf  the 

is;:.^;;rrc^:imSat^^ 

^"HJ^^ondMin7er^Qu,un.c.a.^^iU^  a^^^         are  ^->;^ -^--;;-; 


ir.^'iir„;;;v'-s"' .;;;;  's,^K:;i;'ar.!'katsi'e':?rThe%ne  uotiou  i,  represented  to 

fall  within  the  period  of  the  other. 


QUUM-CLAUSES  AKD   THEIR  EQUIVALENTS. 


649 


DdThnm  ct  vchcmenter  anq^bar  quum  viderem  (while,  i.  e.  since  I  saw)  virnm  talem  non 
in  eadem  foriana  esse.  lb.  Marc.  1,  2.— (c)  if  qwon  denotes  '  as  long  as  ;  see  p.  324,  Obs.  2. 

Ods  G  If  Quum-clauBes  coinciding  in  the  time-jyeriod  of  the  principal  predicate  (Obs  5) 
are  n<ed  in  histouicai.  discourse  (t.  e.  so  that  their  time  is  the  same  as  that  which  issmken 
Of  at  that  stageof  the  narrative),  tlie  imperfect  subjunctive  is  far  more,  frequently  used  than 
the  imperfect  indicative,  as  :  Qunm  circa  Tarenium,  consules  ambo  in  bamnio  essent, 
jam  famem  CampSni  sentmant.  Liv.  2.5,  Vi.-Ouvm  tanta  multittldo  lapides  ac  tela  cwje- 
V  vV/  in  muroconsistendi  j.otestaa  erat  nnllT.  Oes.  B.  G.  2,<>.-§Mwm  se  hostes  identi- 
dem  iii  silvns  recinerent,  ac  rnrsns  ex  silvis  in  nostros  impetum /rtc^r«/i^  t«^mm  lejriO- 

essex  qux^  venerant,  castra  mnnire  ra>perunL  lb.  2, 19.-But :  0«vm  jam  a/>7>ro/w«7^/a. 
6.m/  Poris  ad  hortatiOnem  nautflrum  intent  us  erat.  Liv.40,4.-In  later  Latimty,  in 
rlau-e«  of  this  kind  (both  historical  and  non-historical),  the  subjunctive  imperfect  was ea;- 
clZiveh,  nsed.  Thus  to  the  followin-  passa-e  of  Ter.  Andr.  2,3,  13  «  cam  esse  censes  nunc 
me  atque  olim  (eram)  quum  dabam\  Doniius  remarks  'Nos  dicimus  ^' quurn  darem''  \ 

Obs  7  If  coincident  Qunm-clauses  refer  to  a  fime-jxAnt  (being  represented  as  com- 
nleteacts)  while  the  pmicipal  predicate  denotes  an  action  extending  over  a  /^;7^^- 
7^./•  oc/  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  in  the  jH-rfect  indicative  botl  in  historical 
and  ar4mcritativc  discourse,  as:  Quum  Oesar  in  Galliam  Tenit,  aherlns  factiOms 
princ^es  erant  yEdui,   alterfus  Sequani.  Ca^s.  B.  G.  C,  12.  [Here  the  Quum-clause   de- 

otes  a  time  several  years  before  the  time  spoken  of  at  that  stajre  of  the  narrative, 
ad  hence  this  part  of  the  discourse  is  not  historical  in  the  above-mentioned  sense, 
Uumc^^^rocc.rriml  in  an  historianl.-Eo7"^'m  veni,  pnetor  quiescebat  iratves  immbula- 
Z  t  ac  \vrr  2.  4, 14.  [This  passage  is  historical,  since  the  time  of  rera  corresponds 
w/  h  ttie-encral  time  of  the  episodical  narrative,  althou-h  not  used  by  an  historian].-- 
ll-ec  Cra«;  T'S;/»  edita  am\o  est,  quatuor  et  tri-inta  tum  Aa/>?'k/^  annos,  totidemq  e 
ann^s  mihi  nra;^/<T6fl<.  Cic.  Brut.  43,  101  (not  historical).-Jusquod«anum??/wn  Aselius 
TmoS/^/Mnot  historical).  lb.  VeVr.  2, 1,  41.-Tu,  quum  Qu^stor  esfa^ius,  etiain  qui  te 
mim  iiiani  V  dennt,  ilium  honOrem  nomini  mandabant  tuo.  lb.  Pis  1,  2  (Here  the  clause 
r""t   ctly  «'^''«^^^^^^^  *^  represented  as  virtually  «oincident   according  to  the  principle 

nuMi  oned  Obs.  4  .-Ambo  reqnabant  quum  de  eis  tnumphatumest.  Liy.  45,  39^-1  he 
wfierrof  the  silver  age,  most  always,  use  the  subjunctive  tmperject  in  clauses  of  this 
kind  as:  Eftice  ul  idem  status  sit,  quum  exigis,  qui /«i/I  quum  promttterem.  Sen.  Ben. 
5  39 '(.where  Cicero  would  say  '  tum  quum2»'oml<i'). 

'obs  8  If  coincident  Quum-clauses  refer  to  a  «;;w-»mo<Z.  while  the  principal  pre^^icate 
i^^^Xe^'^tiZ-point  falling  within  that  period,  the  predicate  ot  the  Qunm-c  ause  is 
.f//?r  in  Uie  MPKRFECT  indicative,  or  in  the  niPEKFECT  subjunctive,  while  th?  prm- 
r  ml  nredica  e  L  in  the  perfect  (or  in  another  preterite  tense,  according  to  the  rules  on 
Z  n-e  of  Tenio")  as:  Isto  in  -enere/wim^/y  ipsi,  qnvm  am  hi  tiOnis  nostra  tempora 
Xl:tulfbant  C  c  P  a  c  IS,  45.-Qnod.  qUm  res  agetxltur,  nemo  in  me  dixit  id  totannis 
{^>^t    I?  .   nvcnn.s  qu    diceres  Mb.  Pliil.  2.  9.  22.-Bene  apud  ma  Ores  nostros  tum  quum 

^Zr\bat\xi^'iiv\xl^^^  principum  filiis  sex  singulis  Etrurue  populis  ra  ^^-p- 

Pie  \^  rf  2  4  S  -S/  m    ort;e  appropinquarent.  editus  ignisab  Ilannibale  e*^  Liv.  2c,  9. 

r.p\  r>i'^m  ab  ho<tc/n<  1  ampliVs  p  issuum XII  millibus a^,essef.  ad  eum  legati  7-^pr/;u/.- 
;;?  cS.^B.  G  4  11  :-8o"  in  ep\stolaW  style  :(^.ym  banc  Jf'^^rP'f  ±Vn  ■  If  57  ' 
tabellarii  a  vobis  ven^runt.  Cic.  Qu.Fr.  3, 1, 17.  Comp.  Liv.  1,50;  10,30,  .o  11  ,  42,o7. 

Ob«  0   The  two  constructions,  mentioned  Obs.  8,  are  used  ''^  ^l'!"  f^''^}  ™'^^^^^ 
pened'at  a  t  me-point  of  the  period  expressed  by  the  Pn^^'M^al  Pred'ca/e.  ^J  ^^"  ^^^/^^«t 
f he  main  fact  while,  when  the  period  is  conceived  as  the  miu    faa,  t»'«  P"";_iPf •  «^" 
{^,eTn;a,econ,eaC^,u..««,.^^^ 

K"?"Vf,;S'«A?n"%.o°°BnUf^^^^^ 


650 


TEMrORAL  CLAUSES. 


live,  the  predicate  denoting  the  time-period  hein*?  in  the  imperfect,  while  the  predicate 
denotjiij^  tlie  time-point  i»  in  \he  /lejfect.  Tiie  foriner  i;*  assi^'iud  to  Uie  primipal  tn'U- 
tfiice.  which  nUsviyt' precedes  the  (.^uuin-clause,  a.s  :  Jam  projie  trat  ut  in  ^'um^nun  ciivi 
jutrum  evaderent.  (juurn  tcrj^a  hoptes  dedere.  Liv.  2.  65.  Comp.  tl:e  Ex,  p.  3:J4,  Obs.  1,  and 
p.  ;ii5.  Ex.  1-4.  Hence,  whtiiever  two  propofitltms  are  piven,  the  one  denotin<j  a  time- 
period,  the  other  dtnotin;z  a  time-point,  there  will  be  ttirte  ways  t)f  conibininj:  thtm  into 
a  temporal  sentence,  acconlins:  to  tlie  importance  assiirned  to  the  one.  or  to  the  otlier,  or 
to Ijoth of  the  predicates :  at*:  I'oytero  die,  horS  fere  sicunda.  (jnum  etiamtuin  in  lecto  Cnis- 
suts  esset.  et  apud  eum  Sulpiciui*  (.^deret,  Antoninn  anteni  inamtAddret  cum  t'ottil  in  porticu, 
repente  Q.  Catnlus»  fcnex  cum  C.  .Julio  retdt.  Cic.  Or.  2,3, 12.  This  lenience  is  construed 
accordinir  to  Ob.s.  S,  the  predicate  referring  to  a  time-point  heinp  represented  as  the 
main  action.  liv  apj)lyiiig  the  construction  of  Obs.  7  (^'iw//i  Caiulus  vinit,  Crassus  in 
lecto  erat)  \\c\\\\\  make  the  predicates  denoting,'  the  time-period  the  kadin;,'  actions. 
But  by  applyinj:  the  construction  of  an  apimsitive  t^ttnm-clause  (Crassus  in  lecto  erat^ 
quum  Catnlus  venit)  we  assign  an  equal  importance  to  tx)i.h  actions.  Grammatically  the 
appositive  Quum-clause  must  be  considered  a  relative  clause  (  =  quo  ttinj^ire  Catulus 
venit),  in  which  the  relative  has  cinjidinatinr/  fi>rce.  This  accounts  lor  the  absolute 
necessity  of  the  indicative  mood  in  such  clauses,  and  also  lor  the  fact  that  not  rarely  two 
asyndetTc  principal  sentences  are  used  in  pla<  e  of  the  ctmstruction  with  an  appositive 
(^uum-chiuse.  See  p.  3.'W,  Obs.  4.  The  form  of  the  appositive  Quum-clause  is  not  con- 
lined  to  coincident  C^uum-dauses  (see  Obs.  10). 

Obs.  10.  The  form  of  an  appositivk  Qiii:m-clause  is  sometimes  applied  to  sentences 
in  which  the  actions  of  the  two  propositions  either  both  denote  time-pornts,  or  both 
time-i)eriods  (Obs.  4  ;  Obs.  5).  In  the  former  iiistaiue  both  predicates  are  placed  in  the 
verftct  indicative,  and  in  the  latter  instance  both  predicates  are  iilaced  in  the  imj^trftct 
indicative  ;  as  :  Cadeftdtur  virgis  civis  Itomftnns.  qintm  inter&a  nullus  gemitus  auditbd- 
iur.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 5,  i\'i  (ditierent  Iroin  '  qimm..  .aM</i/e/wr ').— Populus  id  lum  tulit,  et  postea 
regem  flagitaie  non  de^titit.  quttm  jjrudentes  illi  principes  novam  interregtii  ineundi 
ratiOnem  txcorjitavtrunt.  lb.  Ren.  2, 11.  23  [diHeient  fiom  '  Quvm  excogitavCnmt  (exco- 
gitarent),  populus  non  destitit*  ;  and  from  'Quum  jjopulns  non  d^sHtit,  y\vo\i\\A\^- 
vw\\l"\.—Conrietnuil  senatus,  iieque  tameu  satis  s*'vei»'  dccrerif,  quum  erupit  (Catillna) 
ex  senatu  triumphans  gandio.  lb.  Mur. 25,  51  (difl'erent  from  *  Quum  erupit,  con(jtmml\ 
and  from  '  Quvfn  ingemisc^ret,  erupit). 

Ons.  11.  From  the  'appositivk  Qnum-clanse'  must  he  distinguished  the'pARKNTHKTiCAii 
Quum-dause',  which  is  sometimes  added  to  sentence-,  complete  in  themselves,  as  a 
parenthetical  remark  in  regard  to  some  action  that  happened  at  the  same  time  as  the 
I)rincipal  predicate.  Such  Quum-clauses,  likewise,  have  tiie  nature  of  a  relative  coor- 
dination {(plum  =  qvo  temjwre),  the  predicate  being  g-Mierally  in  the  indicaHre,  but  also 
\viX\\e  (itnjmfect)  sufjjunclive ;  as:  Maxime  Iloriensium  i)robavi  jno  Messaia  dicenttm, 
qunmXw  abliiisti  (quo  tempore,  qua  «KcasiOne.  tu  abluisii).  Cic.  lirut.  9«».  3.28.— Ad  eum 
postridie  mane  vadCbam.  quum  hiec  acripsi.  lb.  Att.4. 10,  2.— Non  ego  te  niodo  hie  ante 
aulTs  vidi  adst are,  r/w//m  7/f7^//yrtj?  mi  esse  sanum  sinciput  ?  IMaut.  Men.  4,  2, '15.— A  I).  VI 
Id.  Maj.,  quum  ha.<  datxim  litteras.  ex  I'ompejano  p'-oficiscrbar.  Cic.  Att.5, 2. 1.— Memo- 
ria  tenCtis,  C^tta  et  'J'orquato  consulibus,  < omplQres  in  Capifolio  res  de  cjpIo  esse  pi-rcus- 
sa<,  7>/?/m  et  simulacra  deGrum  depulsa  svrd  et  legum  a-ia  liqiufacta.  lb.  Cat.  3.  S.  1!>. — 
Eos  quos  nominavi,  cum  Attico  nosiro  frequenter  audlvi,  v"w//t  inirarltur  ille  quidem 
utrumque,  Ph;edruraautemetiam  amdret.  lb.  Fin.  1,5,  IG. 

Obs  12.  Often  a  coincident  Qunm-clause  determines  the  time  at  which  an  action 
occurred,  by  a  predicate  serving  for  desiirnating  timf  a^  svch.  Such  (^uum-clanses  must 
always  be  in  the  suf)Jun^tire  imperfect,  whether  the  time  is  conceived  as  a  period,  or  as 
a  point ;  as  :  ProximS  nocte,  j:im  fere  quum  lux  appropinqudrft,  ad  ilhid  a'diflcium 
servi  Q.  Fabii  frequentes  tvn?/T/n/.  Cic.  Tull.9,  21.— Ipsi  comi)rehensi  ad  me,  quvm  jam 
dihiresceret,  deduruntur.  lb.  Cat.  3,  3.  fi.— Illi,  qnvm  adresperasceret,  occulte  ad  pontem 
Mulvium  pervenCrunt.  lb.  3.  2,  5. -(;>w?/m  jam  in  exitii  annus  esset,  C^.  Marcius  absers 
mairistratu  abitflrus  erat.  Liv.  .';•.»,  23.— A.  d.  IV  Id.  Oct.,  quum  adreyperasceret,  expedlto 
exercitu,  ita  noctii  iter  feci  ut  a.  d.  Ill  Id.  Oct.,  quum  lucfsc^ret,  in  Amanum  ascenderem. 
Cic.  Fam.  15,  4.  8.  But  if  the  time  is  indefinite  in  the  sense  of  li.  34.  the  predicate  must, 
of  course,  be  in  the  indicative,  as:  Quum  ver  esse  caperut.  dabat  se  laboribus.  Cic. 
Verr.  2,  5, 10.— To  such  clauses  the  form  of  the  appositive  Qiium-elause  is  fre(piently 
applied  to  rejjresent  the  time  as  an  item  equally  important  as  the  statement  itself.  In 
this  construction  the  proposition  containing  the  designation  of  time,  takes  the  forni  of 
a  principal  sentence  preceding  (ahnost  always  in  the  imperfect  iiulicaliv»-)-  the  action 
whost!  time  is  determined,  taking  the  form  of"  an  appositive  (.^uum-clause  with  a  predi- 
cate in  the  perfect  indicative,  as:  I*rima  fere  lux  erat  quum  vigiles  ad  arma  civdamare- 
7w/nndiflrerent"frotn  '(^niim  prima  lux  esset.  vigiles  conclamavCrunt).  Liv.41.2«).— Diei 
baud  ita  multi  intercesilrunt  quum  ex  Leotillnis  pra^bidium  oranle»  venlrunt.  lb.  24, 29.^ 


QUUM-CLAUSES  AND   THEIR  EQUIVALENTS. 


651 


Nondum  lu^at,  quum  Amon.scitum  -/.Cic  ^-  34.-Jam  ver  appetel^at quum Uanni^ 
^^n\  «v  hibeniis  inovit.  Liv.  22, 1.  Comp.  Ln  .dH,  >U. 

an  ay>;«^im-.  <^«;/;.r7«"^^^  f.,rm  is  used  as  a 

expres.-ions  by  uhich  the  '^' f^^^.  ^;**  "\^,,.7u '\^^         «^  being  of  an  importance  equaling 

circumlocution  to  represent  the  length  "'  ^J,^,!',*^"^;  //„,,  ^^  «.f  tlie  peri(.d  would 

that  of  the  fact  itself     Without  ^.^,^  "'^^^'4^^  S^^^^^  is.  and  14.  Thisc.r- 

be  expressed  ]^y ^\^;:/}^Z"^^^^^^^^^^^  the  time  spoken  of 

cumlocution  IS  used  1)  to  express  ineicnMu».     j  instance  the  predicate 

corresp..n(ling  to  the  «^^'"f^'^^^V^.^^^f^  P^^'^tvf  ^  is  represented  as  lasiiiig 

„t  the  C|i.um-clause  IS  in  the  r«f «, ^^J. \^ V'^^L'' ^-f^^^^^^  Engliih  jn-e sent- perfect,  iu 

during  the  P^^!;;>^ '  t»ie  /.r..^/^^  te  i.c- ^  .r  nie^  ^^^.        /  ^^  ^^^^ 

accc.rdaiice  with  the    ule  /^  4-  p.  2<M  ar.m^m  jam  tertium  et  vigesmmm 

tersans  (Cic.  t  lace.  2.>)  '  «r  i"fj«^^"  "      '  ,  ^     ^  y^^^  tHginta  sunt  quumnx  loro 

regnat  (Cic.  L.  M.3  ;  see  p.  235)  ,  ?n\  ""y  ^-^y*  ..^^'^j-Vdl^  llere  the  con- 

ver^aris^  and  ' ^riniyAm  tre^^^^^^^^^  „,„o.,  or  per  quos 

junction  quum  has  the  force  «f  ^^^  '  ^.^^S^^^^^        ista  med  t«tir>ne  versatur;  It  U 
annos).  Example^  :  -^''^'^  •^''''/ ^^  ^^^"  7'.  -v  efS^^^  (  =  Ista  cau.sa  octo  annos  in 

eight  years  that  this  matter  has  been  under  consicitraiion  i^  i.,l.\„,io  «  nroronsuli- 

meditatiOne  versatur).  Ci 

i>us  et  a  i)ropr.etoiil)ii8 

quadringlnti  sunt  quum  »»>V?r^'!  :!!:vi  "le  Ji"  uNh^'l^i^^^croMsometimes)  in    the 

lime  sp..ken  ol  is  in  the  ;>a.*Mhe  pitdicate  '^  ' "    '  [  *^X^^  l^     „^,^  j^^.r  patri- 


,Sr  "a"".ru  Id er  am;^^deration  (  =  Ista  causa  octo  annos  m 
'  J  Clu  30%2-C///am  fnulti  anni  sunt  ^«7/m  be)  a  a  procons"^^ 
^«rfS  Vi^ym:?«r>  lb.  Div.2,3ti.-Apud  «ra^cos  jam  onn^Vn>pe 

rject.  and  always  in  '^'i^^i!^ZA.i^T^rS7t  ^^r  ^^X'i^S  ^  U 
magistratus  t<ihuiK)sqiie  nulla  cert,  ninayj/jra^  rei.eatedly,  or  nev 

-If  the  action  of  the  Quuin-clause  is  re  rc>^^^^^  jyeifect  indie 


1  Ned  to  express  the  length  ot  time  eiapMu  "./'^'  "  "'j;;"'"  / 

lug  to  abhinc  with  an  .^^>>!^";\e  or  accusatt^^^^^^^^  -j^^.e 

cnte  is  m  the  pei/ect  indicative,  the  ^^V!7; ,  c  «reordi.  «r  to  i)   5-26  6  ;  as  :  Nondum  cen- 
introduced  by  ex  quo  tempore,  or  Q^o,qudM>^  ,TiS    r/'^^o  ^^J  de  p^  repetundis  a 

tuni  et  dece.n  annt  7''  ,  ^^^  (  =  ^^'^,\' f^^^.'tenc?! witZt  a  ciix.^^  would  be: 

L.  Pi>One  lata  \^:x.  est.  <-i^- ^*^- ^- j'-  //  f  ^^"l^V'^^^    j^^  e^t -3)  Sometimes  this  form  is 
Abhinc  (miuu^)  centuin  et  decttn  aunts  (annos)  lata  lex  «.;  i._^o;^  „„rf«;«  ..vpnr  i.«  to  take 


cHiV^es'mentioned  p.  553.  Obs.  7,  in  coni.ectKm  ^^l^"' P;-,5?,^vW23 
"^^rererS^^nnn  exJrcitui  frumentum  meilri  ^f  J^ff /^^^^^J^^^h  A/iiW..  (see  p.  487,  8), 
^riiese  ouum-clauses  .«^e  ^ramnmtia   1>   in  the  u^m^^^^^  «nteclasiical  Ian- 

althuu.'h  tliey  miist,  logically,  ^^^  ^«"^'^l  f  ,^  "^^^^^  made  by  Quum-clauses, 

guage  the  circumlocutions  !»c"^'oned  ^o.  1  a  id  ^  arc  ^^^^^^^^^^.^/^,,,^,/(b^i„g  likewise, 

feut  often  so  that  they  are  in    he  f^^;'"^    'J'^i'  '^^/J  .^^^^^^  in  this  const  ructii.n, 

h.gically.  Predicate-clauses)  1  he  predicate  of     c^^^^^^^^^  ,^    ,^1^  ^,^  ^l^e 

consists  of   the  impersonal  copula  est    tl»^^  1    "  V 'V  "'i""  fi„,s     Thif  predicate 

period  b..ing  added  to  it  ">  the.f.>rm  c.    an  adverb^^  Jonst.uc 

,f  the  Ouum-dause  is  in  the  \f^dtcatire^\\\^i^^^y^G&^^n^^^^  ,     .          ^^       domuin 
Hons.  \his  indicative  is  in  th":  ;>m.../ m  tin.  ca^^^^^ 

jam  multos  annos  est  quumpo^sideo  (  =  3;'"l,"iHV,L"X  2,  as  :  Hauddum 

Mecraribushuc commigravit*).  Plant.  P^rs.  1,3, o7. 


and  periods  of  time,     liui  u  is  'l^-^^V^^"'-^/;'**:  ■■•7,,7r,:.' lacVion   as"":  Ha;c  quum  dixisset, 

br  li^i^Si:  &?;5v^;  n-^t-'-^TISCJlS^ 

.ThonmhorofthcPnW.Soh.O.r.p.  Zs,  quote,  the  above  passage  in  the  to™,  given 
In  Ihe  parculhesis,  which  Plaulus  tlid  ml  use. 


652 


TEMrORAL   CLAUSES. 


Ariovistum  ad  occnpandnm  VesontiOnem  coiitondore.  C:rs.  B.  G,  1,35(.— Ko  quum  Vfini^- 
set,  anima<lve?fif  ui\  iiltvriim  ripum  iiiH<:iias  cfiHo  ci)j)i.is  ho>lium.  lb. 5,  IS.— Ancii»  Mar- 
tius,  qi/urn  Latljios  bello  (levicLfget,  Ofic'irit  von  in  civitutcm.  Cic  Kt-p.  2. 18.  3^3.— Quorum 
TTieiuoria  juciiiida  t^ane/'a/  quidti  in  t-ani  iiuix-r  in  hcrniOn*'  (luodain  incidiff^^ihux.  II). 
Brut.  2,  y.— The  principal  predicalc  is  nio.-t  freciuently  in  the  p-rff-cf,  I'Ut  it  may  be  in  any 
I)reterite  tense  (historical  present,  imperfect,  and  pi  i|)erfect),  as  :  Dionysius  qunni  lanuia 
Proserpinae  Locri;*  expilavisset,  vavigdbat  ISyracfitJas.  Cic.  N.D.  3, 34.  — Ho.-tes,  qinnn 
ina<:jn;e  mantis  vo  convtnioie/it.  multitudirie  naviiim  d.territi,  a  littore  dv^cesKerant.  Cjcs. 
B.  G.  5,  9.— The  use  of  a  pi-UI'kkfkct  indicativk  in  (iiiuin-claiises  of  \\i\^  kind  is  ante- 
clas^ieal  and  rare,  as  :  Qunrti  inftllextrus  id  coii.<ilii  capere.  cur  non  dixti  e.xtemplo 
Paniphilo?  Ter.  Andr.  3,  2,  37.  ISomeiimes  however,  in  clashical  pro>e.  the  phijurj^ct 
indicative  is  used  i)  to  represent  an  action  a< cotittiti]>oran(()nx  with  a  perio(l/o//o«i«f/  tho 
act  ion  of  the  clause,  i^enerally  in  connect  ion  with ///f/M=  at  a  time  aJUr),2i9,:^i\m  t  umquuvi 
in  Apia  r"s  mannas  permiilti  ami^v/v/'//.  scimus  Hoin;e,  soiiitione  impiMlita,  lidem  conci- 
di^se.  Cic.  L.M.7,  lU.— (^wwm  ea  ccnstcrtti/s  nondnju  train  (at  a  time  u/nn  I  had  not 
yet  achieved  those  re>ults)  qunr  sunt  liominum  opinioniiius  ainplissima,  tamm  ista  vestra 
iioinina  numquani  sum  adniiratus.  11).  Fam.  3.  7,  5.  But  even  in  this  instance  tlie  plii- 
perfi'Ct  subjunctive  is  moie  u*nal  tlian  the  indicative,  as  :  .Mque  hoc  tantum  lucri  coz/w/i- 
tiir  (historical  present)  dare  tmn  qinnn  (at  a  time  alter)  aratores  ex  airris,  spolulti  decu- 
manOruin  \\\']\\rn<profiifjisse?it.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  3.  32.— 2)  Sometimes  u  jduperfect  indicative 
is  used  for  particular  reasons  in  place  of  a  ttubjiinctii-e  if/ijxrt'ect,  if  the  predicatf  is  repre- 
sented as  coinciding  in  time  with  an  action  past  at  the  tune  spoken  of,  a.sj  IV  inillia 
hominum  erant.  mixti  ex  «>mni  coHuviune  exsnles.  et  r/in/vi  in  civitatibus  sui~  sub  le<;i- 
l)us  rixeranf,  et  postquam  eos  fortilna  con;,'ltibaverat.  per  lairocinia  ac  rapTnam_/r>/<?- 
ra/i/<?.s' vitam  (  =  qui  tot'varerant  vitim  qiotm  in  civitatibus  suis  rinrfnt,  et  toler'dxint 
vitam  postqnam  eos  fortOna  consul' >bjiverat).  Liv.2«;.  40.  If  here  the  imperfect  subjtinc- 
tive  rir^r^/zMiad  been  used,  the  action  would  be  mistaken  as  Mill  lasiinj:  at  the  time 
spoken  of.  since  tht?  principal  i)re(licate  has  the  form  of  a  participle  which  does  not 
mark  tin;  time  as  pa4  A  pluperfect  sttt/ji/ncfire  would  rei)resent  the  time  of  '  rivere  'as 
past  in  rcL^ard  to  ■  tolerantf.'t\—:i)  (Juum-clnuses  regularly  take  the  pltiperf«'Ct  indicative 
when  they  depend  on  an  imperfect,  o\  continrjent  action,  as  :  QKnni  vineie  i)aullum  j^fO- 
cesserant,  iijni  aut  lapidibus  corrumpebantxr.  Sall.Juj?. '.»2.  See  p.  3-.n,  Obs.  1. 

Obs.  15.  Anterior  (Juum-clauses  have  their  predicates  in  tlie  imperfect  ftuf)jiinctire  1)  if 


)])tion  of  tne  other  plan).  Cic.  Verr.  2.2. 4.— Epamiiionda-.  y 
exatiim:iri  se  ri(A";vY.  «y'/^v7ri^  snlvnsne  esset  clipeus.  lb.  F'in.  2.  30.  — Kqniies,  snb>idio 
con flsi.f/w'/w  post  sele<j;ir)nes  vidi'ent,  j>r!rcipites  hostis  ('-'/frMZ/A  C:es.  B.  G.  5. 17.— Quum 
in  mesl  salflte  custodifciidil  tarn  nuiltos  viros  boiios  rid?rem,  capilfiam  Don  mcdiocreni 
voluptatem.  Cic.  Plane.  1, 1.  Compare  with  :  (^//?/m  e  Ciliciil  decCdens  Khodnm  tv/'i^**"//?, 
et  e«)  nuhi  (le  (^.  Hortensii  morte  es.<<t  ff//(7/'/7AJ,  opinione  omnium  majArem  aniino  cepi 
dolorem  (where  tin;  predicates  venifseni  and  ef<f<et  aWttiim  contain  actions  which  had 
reaped  when  the  principal  ;icti>n  commenced).  Cic.  Brut.  1, 1.— 2»  If  both  actions  belonj» 
t(>  the  fame  transaction,  the  principal  action  beinp:  represented  as  an  immediate  or  neces- 
sary consequence  of  tlie  action  of  the  clause,  as  :  Non  intirl>rine  Stratonlcus,  qninn  quidaiu 
Alabaiidnm  deuni  esse  contlrmaret,  Ilerciilem  nt^qdret^  'Kriro'.  iuquil,  •  milii  Alabandus, 
til)i  Hercules  sit  iratiis\  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  r.>, 50.  — C^'/'///i  ex  captlvis  qmer'-ret  C:esar,  qmiin- 
obrem  Aiiovistus  non  decerljlret,  lianc  rejieriehat  cansam.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  50.— Catuuis. 
qniim  vx  \oh\i^  quivreret. ..,  cepit  mairnam  sme  virtutis  pnernium  quum.  ..dixistis  etc.; 
Wtien  Catulus  had  asked  you  etc..  he  received  the  reward  for  his  virtue  by  your  answer 
etc.  Cic.  L.  M.20,  5'.i.— 3)ir  thenctionof  a  (^uiim-claiise  is  represented  both  iv^imfnediotely 
precedinq  the  principal  action  in  time,  and  as  a  7-ea<on  or  inotire  for  the  principal  action, 
as:  Themistocles,  quum  in  epulis  recusaret  lyram,  habitue  et-t'wHhwX'xur.  Cic.  Tiisc.  1.2. — 
Demarilfus.  quum  audlref,  doMnna'iOn<ni  Cypseli  contirmilri,  dejTiqif  patriam.  lb.  Kep.  2, 
l'.>.  34.  Compare  with  :  (^'/«m  ^'/^//.v>yw  Antiochum  \n  <s\m\\i\A\'i,constituimus  nt  ambu- 
lationem  postmeridian  im  conficerC'mus  ;  (immediately)  after  heariuq  t\  lecture,  of  .Vntio- 
chns,  we  resolved  to  take  an  afternoon  walk.  lb.  Kin.  5, 1.  Such  clauses  pass  over  into 
'atfi'Cted'  (^Muui-clatises.  denotintj  cause  without  any  reijird  to  time.  See  A'.  37.— For 
the  use  of  the  perfect  indicatire  in  (^num-clause>  immediately  piior  in  time  to  the  prin- 
cipal predicate,  see  Obs.  4.— For  the  ditlVrencc  of  'vbi  (at,  j)ostquam)  I'idi''  from  *  quum 
viderem',  and  'quum  vidlssem  '  see  li.  43. 

()Rs.  in.  The  form  of  an  appositivk  QtruM-ci.ArsE  is  ai)plied  to  the  anterior  temporal 
relation  in  the  same  manner,  and  for  th<' samereas(»ns  a>  to  coincidini:  time  (Obs.  9.  12). 
In  this  instance  the  proposition  d»Miotin<r  anterior  time  fakes  the  form  of  a  pritwipal  sen- 
teucc  with  a  predicate  iu  the  pluperfect,  while  the  Quum-clause,  with  its  i)redicatc  iu  iho 


QOTM-CIAUSES  AND  THEIK  EQCIYATEKTS. 


653 


.  ,-    „„  demote.  n.i.<,'.e.t  -imc  Vin.'  '^^fZ^t-^^^'i^S^^^^^ 

mlcce^s  on  in     1  accusant  L-.Cotiam  (U  luei  ^gi^ience  contains 

I^umaniiamque  '*' '^^*:.^^";^^_rrinj  ^jv,ne  form  is  used  it  ibc  l»"*'/.'*"*'  ,^  ,.«  •   Vix  annus 

repiiiled  action,  as  .        ,,^^        uo 
atque  acrms  iuslare.  ball.  Jug.  9». 

o    Attributive  QruM-CLACSES. 

inVr  lo  \he  rules  on  the  mcod  ot  /^^^^''^^;;/;'^^^^'^,',,  ,  ^  ^as  a  time)  generally 

..       1    The  exD.c-sions  tempus  est,  ^«^'"/^/'/''^^/'nfr^,'' 'ccordin-  to  the  rules  m  regard 

^^'"'-  Vb  Jsub  uK>^  in  ihei/ dependent  Q"",'?:^''^  ^f ''^^''Xy  rer^./w.  quum  rura  c^Je- 

rcquirethchunjumi  .      f      ^  ^xv.,  p.  5ol  fo  I.),  ^-  ■f^'"-       T^MPn^^  ff^wm  mihi 

to  the  analo-ou.  ^'  '"^If;  ^J^^^  V«/ven"^  Varr.  K.  K-  3,  l--^ '  f;  V-fJguodsi  fuit  tempus 

lb.  Brut.  2,  •^•-^/*^.  V'  .7,  ^';.  e  Mil.  2(i  -But  the  indicative  /  f  ^J^^' "  _yj4a  potentially  or 

cate  (acco.-<  ill?  m  K;  ?'■  'j^;,,,,;;  «so  vafi.um  (llie.<  ay  <"  ."'"^'-f,  ,15  t™  51.0"!  V""^ 
clc-iinii*  rfif""!";  '",V  ","5  20  _N-onnnlU  elia.n  1  lum  <;.•«,''  "fh.V'day  on  «ftioS,  a.id 
wrteat  loisur.-!.  <-ic.  »■.->. -^;^  vict.iriam  P.  11.  ''""'"■  J'  '',S(urttn«»imo  rei- 
,11«  eadcm  U.Sna.  ^:=^\r^  :i-.'iVr,;|.a>.iensi«  .l>'g»"»  J""?';"^*  ,*,  n  ,  civi un,  dv-Mlrent 
hica'i'fomi).  I"-^'^"- 1',,  •  ;,,.i  Sill  a>  in  Iia  am  maxinii  "-"^V,,  r,  .\„,,5ecOtus.  ouam 


654: 


TEMrORAL  CLAUSES. 


attribute  todies).  Tb.  Cln.  20.72.  Comp.  Cic.Or.  1, 11 :  Sost.  7, 15  ;  Pis.  22.52;  Plane. 
41,  «J*» ;  ib.  42, 101  ;  Rab.  Post.  17,  47  ;  Att.  12,  18,  1  ;  Ofl".  1, 10.  81.— Sometim.s  the  noun 
(enipwi  as  goveriiini^  no m  of  a  (^luiin-clause  must  be  ftitppHetl,  as:  Kenovabiltur  j^^ta 
militia  (  =  militia  qn:e  fuit  eo  tempore)  quxin  iste  a  foro  abdQci  xollbaf.  Cic.  Xvrv.  2,  5  i;i. 
Sometimes  (rarely)  ijunni  has  the  ineauiiif?  of  an  ordinary  relativf  placed  in  tiie  ablative 
ol  means  :  Pneceps  vestra  lei:atio  fuit  qunni  Ilannibalem  dciiosct-bdtis  {  =  legatio  qua  de- 
poscebatisi,  referring  to  an  embassy  8<'nt  at  a  former  time).  Liv.  21, 18. 


B.  AFFECTED  QUUM-CLAUSES. 

Jlern.  37.  AfTected  Qnnm-claiiscs  (^  GIO)  are  either  modal,  causal,  adver- 
safice,  or  coordinating.  ]\Iou.\l  Qiuim-chiuses  are  lused  to  represent  the  re- 
lation of  instrumentalitif  (Obs.  1,  No.  1),  and  some  of  the  looser  relations 
oi  coincide  lit  action  (Oijs.  1,  No.  2,  and  Obs.  2),  under  Wia  form  of  a  tem- 
poral clause  of  coincident  timk.  Their  predicates  partly  are  placed  in  the 
8 ubjunctice,  and  partly  in  the  indicative. 

Obs.  1.  The  3tTB.juNCTivB  is  used  in  modal  Ouum-clanse.s  of  the  following  relations  : 
1)  If  the  clause  has  the  force  of  an  ablative  of  means  and  iNSTmrMKNTAHTV  (p.  177), 
as  :  Me  ip-'um  quondam  ille  decOpit.  quinn  et  civis  bonus  et  optimi  cujusi^ie  firmus  ami- 
cus riderlltir  ;  He  deceived  me  7vhen  he  seemed  to  me  a  <;ood  citizen  etc.;  i.  e.  h]f  making 
vieheliecH  that  he  was  etc.  Cic.  C:el.  (>,  14.— Soiebam  dimitterea  me  8c:evolam  qmnn  itA 
ei  die  rein,  me  velle  esse  ineptum  ;  I  dismissed  him  by  telling  him  that  I  wished  to  make 
nonsense.  II).  Or.  1,24. — (^ui  Ciesarem,  mitem  hominem  et  a  cjede  «bhorrenlem.  Ki^pe 
increpuit,  s;ppe  accus-lvit,  «/'/vm  affirmdret  illnin  numquam.  dum  h:ec  *  natio' viveret. 
Pine  cura  finQruin  ;  Wiio  in-^tigat'-'d  (upbraided)  C.-esar  f»y  axuerting  tliat  he  never  would 
be  without  care  as  long  as  this  tribe  was  living.  Ib.  Sest.  <».'J,  132.— (^  libus  quotidie  meam 
potentiam  invidiOse  cnminaljiltur.  qunm  dice  ret  ^vxx^Wwn  non  quod  sentfret.  sed  quod  cl'O 
vellem  decernere  ;  He  insidiously  incriminated  my  influence  oy  saying  etc.  Ib.  Mil.  5, 12. 
— Ita  «?'/'/m  maximis  eimi  rebus  /i/<f/v7/rj?,  perparvam  amicitiie  culpain  relinquGbas  ;  by 
relieving  him  from  the  most  important  charL'es,  you  left  a  very  trilling  ofTence  against 
friendship.  Ib.  DcJ.  8,  10.~2)  If  t lie  clause  ha»  the  force  of  an  acckssoky  pkedicatb 
(p.  2^15,  §  2.V)),  denoting  the  inner  nniiy  of  ditlerent  actions,  quum  with  its  jjredicate 
being  «generally  rendered  by  a  participle,  as:  Nobis  quum  ca?pi8set  Curio  rospondCre, 
subito  assedit.  q>tt/m  sibi  venCnis  ereptam  memoriam  «liceret  (  =  riicens  sibi  ereptam 
e.sse);  Curio  suddenly  took  his  seat,  xaying  tiiat  he  had  lost  his  memory  by  witchcraft. 
Cic.  Orat.  37, 12!>.— Iter  in  Ciliciam  facere  institui,  qmaa  hac  opinione  e  Cap|)adocia 
di^cedereni  ut  regena  mens  advent  us  insidiis  libcrarit ;  I  began  my  journey  etc.,  leaving 
Cappadocia  with  the  convicti(m  that  etc.  Ib.  Fam.  15,  2,  8.— Iijitn'r  in  Syria  imperatOre 
illo  nihil  aliud  actum  est  nisi  pactiOnes  pecuniilrum  cum  tyrantiis...  ,  quum  palam 
populi  Ronulni  imperiTtor,  instructo  exerciiu,  non  ad  laudeiii  luilites  korlaretur.  sed 
omnia  sibi  empta  esse  clamdret.  Ib.  Prov.  Cons.  8,  5.— Ab  eOdem  homine  vetiis  ilia  mairi- 
gtra  pudOris,  censtlra,  sublflta  est,  quutn  in  interim  verl)o  numquam  signijicdri^  penten- 
tiam  tuam.  Ib.  Pis.  4,  9.— Here  belong  the  (iuum-claiises  connected  with  audlre,  and 
eomerimes  with  vid?rt  {con,tpirere)  in  place  of  a,  participle  (p.  2rj;i,()Bs.  2),  as:  L.  Flaccum 
ego  nutnvi  quum  dictret,  Cieciiiumexissc  (  r^  autl'ivi  Flai'cnm  <lv:entein,  I  heard  him  say). 
Cic.  Div.  1,  4»i. — S;epe  ex  socero  meo  a'/(/7/i  qunm  \»  dicer-'t  (socertim  meuin  dicenterii), 
Laelium  semper  fcn^  cum  ScipiOne  solitum  rusticilri.  Ib.  Or.  2.«i.— Is  numquam  est  con- 
gpfcfus  quum  ven'iret  {  =  veniens) :  He  has  never  been  seen  coming.  Ib.  Sest.  59.  Comp. 
Cic.  Or.  2,  :W:  2,  :n  ;  Pam.  .3,  7  ;  Fin.  5, 11».— The  same  construction  is  sometimes  used 
after  meminisse,  but  in  this  instance  the  indv'aUve  is  used,  as:  .V>miin  quum  mihi  desi- 
pere  ridebnre  quod  etc.  Cic.  Fam.  7. 2H.  1.  But  here  the  Quuin-clause  may  be  cousidered 
as  a  temjioral  clause  (  =  Memini  temp'>ris  quum  etc.). 

Obs.  2.  The  indicativr  is  used  if  the  same  action  which  is  expressed  by  the  Quum- 
clanse  is  represented  in  tlie  principal  seiitiMicc;  according  to  its  sii,'nirtcance"  and  imtxirt 
(see  p.  .33!),  li.  f»9).  TIn'se  clause-»  express  that  relation  of  'coincident  action''  winch 
may  also  b(!  expressed  by  a  g^rundial  ablative  (as  :  Frafrcm  laudando  suflVagSris  tibi. 
Cic.  Le/.  1.  1),  or  by  in  with  a  gTundial  at)lafive  (p.  194.  §  540,  3),  being  rendered  eitlier 
by  participial  eonstructiotis  with  'in  '  or  '■b>/\  or  by  '■  wheii\  '  t/i  a^  much  as"'  etc  ,  as: 
Nee  plus  .■Xlricilnus  in  excidf-nd'i  Nuniantiil  re>publica>  profuit,  quun  efidem  tempore 
T*.  NasTca  quum  Ti.  C.racchtim  infevTtnit  (  =  in  intetimendo  (iracclio).  Cic.  OtV.  1.  22. 
The^e  r  au-esnre  di-tin.'uished  from  temporal  Quum-claxutes  by  iht;  fact  that  in  tiie  latter 
tw-»  diprent  action-  are  repre-ented  to  coincide  in  time,  while  hen?  the  f>ame  action  is 
represented  in  two  different  aspects.  They  arc  also  dibliuguislied  from  the  (^uum-clausesi 


QL'UM-CIAUSES  ASD  THEIR  EQUIYAUINTS. 


655 


onted  as  the  instmnunt  for  an 

/>/<>v  as  the  principal  predicau»         U.  A.  19— N»^*  ^^^T  *^^  whpn   I  mentiou  myself,  I 
your  Hlence),  n.tlla  esse  co^^ced^-^^  K  ^^^^^^^   ^'fV.rl  Ztendl  qualis  tu  f.teris 


;tion,  without  the  mea  "' --; 

icnuoncu  vy^.-  -,  :^„,,„,.piauses  (leii^ii"''^  iuy..--j    .        .«hich   moreover,  tias  lue  ^u//<o 

Mnixd^d puriiose.    ^i'»"  V  *^^ "V.^dicate  in  the  indicatne,  wm^"'."   ^we,  quum  laces  (by 

Lnialit/,  h-ve  '-^.'^^'J^: '^^j;;  ras?C«ncedo  tibi  .ut  ^^^,fi«,^;^/nuSXor  ^uvm  bella 

,..,.v  as  the  principal  predicau»  U.  A.  19.— Nisi  for  ecc«M77e  u  ^j  ^  myself,  I 

?our  Hlence),  n.tlla  esse  co^^ced^-^^  K  ^^^^^^^   ^'fV.rl  Ztendl  qualis  tu  f.ieri. 

«on  geiv    lb.  >*mi.  i\.  l!?--//""' 01   110  -Quod  quum  ?<=/"^'^f"?t'':,!f,  S  gratis  esse  Oppi 

consul  futQrus.  I^- ^"*-  ';  11;^  /7  132-110  ii^am  nun  ^m"^^^^  et  subagreste 

anicumc..n(le.nnrinun.  Ib-C^lu^-^^^^^^^^^        ^^^.^^^  civitStem  novum  quou_  ^_^^^^  ^ 

Vam.  3, 10,  2.  -Komulu>'  ad  tifma^^      virgines  rmJ^^'H'^^  rn^l'  the  Ex.  p.  2:59.  240.  and 

tSm  Uid  <J-'r^^}^'ri  ^>0  iKd'Ufib  2, 3,  57  ;  ib  'f:  f' ^^^,  j^  ^u'sed  onl^  if  the  clause 
Cic.Otr.  1.  ;'^!?\  V'Viv'Vubj.inctive.  in  ^l^^^^^^.^o^^t.am  periculOsa  <iu:^fUotempte- 

^^l^  ^:^^^^^^^-^^^^^^  meaning,  tlte  cla.se 

Rem  38   U  qnnm  ^^^"'^«^^^    ''*"*''  'onrcHiises  (p.  506,  B.  21,  Obs.  2). 

tak^  *he  SU  JuNCTlVK,  the  -^-^l^^'^:^^^^^^  time  ten^f^^^ 
Ons.  1.  Q""--clauses  clenotmg  cAti^-  my^^  ^^^''iZ^^S^.i^l^^^^ ^T'^ 

KotnionMneterite  predicate.. -^^^^  .^,t^„ce 

p'r„7,  (jBS.  5),  as  V\f::y,n?^iJistsire^used  without,  ^ej-;^  ^  to  *itne^^^  ^^^^^^ 
^  But  often  cansal  Quuiivc  a  K.8  »  j^^^  ..^^  r;?vvou  should  not  pick  up  an 

they  always  take  the^uj   ""^*/;*;-  ";      V  ^  „f  ,uch  a  dignity   ^^e  amicis  insi(iiarum  et 
pere  maKdictum  ex  tm>;^>  •  ^J^'^Jj^  j,i,,,.  6, 13. -  Qu»m  ^ ita  ^P^ ^^'^\_Q„yrn  amiciti^ 

Ob-  2    Frequently  causal  9«^^  is  co  ^^  because  );«r  ^.]  "  ^These  expres- 

l\ou^  always  require  J  f  f''^  f  f/, ,,  audent.  Cic.L.M.,5.;^^^^^^^  J^^^^  rescrip^ero 

vrcvsertim  vos  alium  mt-senji-s  i^,.^^^  ^^^,^^^^  ^.^m  wmojecturu.^  stcji^^  r>^^  Ou.Fr.3, 1,4.- 
lam  oratir"'""  rescriber 
(the  more 

^uod^unniodo  rft^if/'Vm'/^s:  l^>- AnV^f^-^fllM^rnrcommoda  valetaao    qu. 

inc  j'uj '  -  r.v.rri,,,»  the  subinncti 


,™>  require  t^":^^""».      «Sin,    «c.  L.  M.,  5.  '.J->^J«-  ,-"„«.  reScrlp.ero 
m  vos  alium  rnisentis,  ""/.'J'       „j  ^.^n  nemo  led uru^^  "^JLih  Ou  Fr.3, 1.4.— 
,,,„  ,„„;ronem  ro^cribere  7>r<*v^r/^^^^^^  ,,  -,,  I  doj^^t  rep    )•  I^-  Q;-/^^^ 


BCIi.>n.if  Ihcpreilicile  a;""";-,,     l^,  this  theory  the:e  is  inc  nil'  they  refer  lo 

Curio  (faciCbat  9*/"jnu|uf 

bat  *  Vincat  utdiiaa '.  Cic.  on.  o.  ^^- 


G56 


TEMrOR.VL  CI^VUSES. 


Item.  'Sd.  Adversative  (concessive)  Qmini-clanscs  (i.  e.  those  express- 
ing a  reason  lor  the  contrary  of  what  is  stated  in  tiie  principal  sentence) 
require  their  predicates  to  be  in  the  subjunctive,  the  same  as  the  analo- 
gous Qui-clauses  (p.  507,  Ous.  4). 

Ob3.  Most  jrenonilly  adversative  Qnum-clansep  arc  bofh  temporal  arid  oonceppive, 
whereby  they  are distingniphcd  from  the  r<»nces»sive  clauses  iutnyduccd  hy  qumnqtiam, 
etn  etc,  a»:  L.  IJrutus,  tjwwi  prir,l/i/fi  essef,  totam  rempiil)licam  piietimiit:  L.  brutiis 
upheld  tlie  whole  State  when  and  ulilwnqh  he  was  a  private  person.  Cic.  Kep.  2,  25,  47  (L. 
Brutus  was  a  private  person  at  tlie  time  spoken  of;  this  was  a  reason  that  he  should 
not  have  the  ai)!lity  to  uphold  the  whole  State;  neverthdosn  he  did  so).  Ileuce  Uuum- 
clauses  of  this  kind  comprise  three  relations  :  1)  a  temporal  ;  2)  a  causal ;  .'^)  an  adver- 
sative. Thus :  Eos  scnStus  non  censuit  redimendos,  quiin».  id  parv-l  pecuniil  fieri  jxiast^t. 
Cic.Otr.  3.  ;^2.— Sacerdotium,  qituvi  non  ditlicillime  consequi  ponstm  (t.  g.  at  a  certain 
time m  the  mind  of  the  author),  non  apix-tlvi.  lb.  Fam.  15,  4,3.— Ipse  Cicero,  quujn 
tenuissimil  valetudine  esset  (at  the  time  spoken  of,  and  although),  ne  nocturnum  quidem 
81  bi  tempus  ad  quiCtem  relinquCbat.  C:es.  B.  G.  5,40.— Itaque.  qt/nm  me  aml<i  hortarenfitr 
lit  causasa_'«'re  desistereui,  quodvis  potius  p«'riculum  mihi  adeundum  quam  a  spenlfS 
dicendi  ,i,doriiT  discedemium  puiavi.  Cic.  Brut.  «H,  314.— Patrem  meum,  quuf/i  proscriptus 
vnue.'Oief,  juj,'uiastis.  lb.  K.  A.  11,  32.  Comp.  Cic.  Brut.  31,  lO-.t;  !>.-).  .325.— Adv.-r.sativet^uum- 
clausfs  which  are  at  the  same  time  temi)oraI,  are  not  rarely  found  with  their  predicates 
lu  the  indicative,  the  same  as  ihe  correspondin<r  (^ui-clauses,  as;  O  beatos  illos,  qui, 
«7'/«m  adesse  ipsis  propter  vim  armorum  nou  Uclbat,  udtrunt  ta/nen  et  in  medullis  p'opuli 
JtonuTni  A<f7v7></«('.'  Cic.  I'hil.  1.15, ;^>. 

But  frequently  such  (imim-clauses  are  nsed  without  any  reference  to  a  partirnlartime, 
coutaiuini^oiily  two  of  the  above-mentioned  elements,  namely,  the  causal  and  adversa- 
tive relations.  They  are  «xeiierally  used  to  desijjiiate  qualilies  of  the  subject,  the  coex- 
istence of  which  with  the  principal  predicate,  is  contrarv  to  experience  or  to  reason, 
as:  Itaque,  qnnm  ei  nee  officium  d>-esset,  et  Jiagrdret  stuciio  dicendi.  perpaucje  ad  eum 
causje  (ielerc'bantur.  Cie.  Brut,  fil,  22<>.— Atticus.  qnnm  esset  peciiniGsus,  nemo  illo  minus 
fiiit  ema.\-.  minus  u>dilic:ltor.  Ncp.  Att.  1.3.— Bhocion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  qnnm  divitis- 
simus  esse  jmnet.  lb.  Bhoc.  1.— Tanjuinius  S'.iperbus  inte<;ra  mente  non  erat,  et,  qnnm 
imtueret  ipse  pa'nain  sreleris  sui  summam,  nietui  se  volehat.  Cic.  Bej).  2.  25.  — Druentia, 
Alpliius  amiiis,  qnujn  aqua^  vim  rehat  inj^entem,  non  tamen  navium  patiens  est.  Liv.  2li 
31.  Comp.  Cic.  Brut.  7,  2ti.— For  the  use  ol  /f//.vf,s'  in  adversative  Qunm-clanses  see  p.  42<j. 

Concessive  Quum-clauf^es  pass  over  into  coimlinafe  Quum-clauses.  when  the  causal 
relation  is  more  or  less  fading  away  till  it  entirely  disappears,  af  :  Timothens  ConOnis 
filius  qnum  belli  laude  non  iiiferior///i.vw/  quam  pater,  ad  eam  laudem  doctrlme  et  in-^enii 
trlonam  adjecit  (Timotheus,  ?rA;/^  he  had  not  been  inferior  to  his  father,  added  to  this 
quality  distinction  in  etc.  ;  or  '  Timotlieus  was  not  inferior  to  his  father  in  war,  bnt  he 
added  etc').  Cic,  Ott'.  1,  .32.— Ilorum  auctoritas  maxiine  florebat  quod,  c/^/?///i  honr.re  lonj^e 
antecellerent  ceteris,  voluptatibus  erant  viferidres,  nee  pecuniis  lerme  superiores.  lb. 
Hep.  2, 34. —  Sum  Cn.  Pompeji  virtiltem  admiratus  quod,  qnnm  ijj.se  ceteris  omnibus 
e.-^set  anteldtus,  ampliOrem  houOreiu  alteri  tiibuil/at  quam  ipse  erat  assecQtus,  lb.  Pro  v. 
Cons.  11.27. 

Iie)n.  40.  Coordin.\te  Quum-clauses  are  either  adcersatice,  or  compar- 
ative. The  former  require  the  mbjunctive,  while  the  latter  (OiJS.  2)  have 
their  predicates  either  in  the  indicative,  or  in  the  subjunctive. 

Obs.  1.  Adveksative  coordinate  Quum-dauscs  are  equivalent  to  an  adversative 
coordination  by  anfem  or  rero.  beiiii?  distiiij,'uished  from  the  odi>rsatire  sufxjnlinate 
(^uum-clauses  (li.  39)  by  the  lack  of  a  causal  relation.  The  Quiim-clause  jrenerally  fol- 
lows (but  may  also  precede)  the  principal  sentence,  beinjj  rendered  by  an  Enirlish  clause 
with  *  whert^as '  or  '  while '.  The  two  propositions  denote  oppaHte  qnalUies  or  actions  of 
diferent  snttjects,  the  predicate  of  the  (iuiim-claiise  bein<r  alivays  in  the  subjunctive,  as: 
Socratis  inizeiiium  i.iiimortalirjUi  scri|)ti-«  suis  Plato  tradidit,  y?^//m  ip^e  litteram  Socrates 
nullain  rdiquiHi^tt.  Cic.  Or.  3,  l(i.  W.  — Eorum  (UomaiiOrum)  erat  V  millia  numerus,  quum 
ipsi  (Germaiii)  non  amplius  octimzentos  equites  ha/jtnnt.  Cie^.  B.  G.  4, 11— Ante  id  tem- 
pus nemo  aut  miles  aut  eques  a  C:esare  ad  PompCjum  transierar,  qnnm  ptene  quotidie  a 
PompSjoadCiesarem  irrofngerent.  lb.  B.  C.3,«l.— Solus  homo  ex  tot  aniniHinium  •reiie- 
nbus  atqne  natflris  jjurticeps  est  ratiOnis  et  co<,'itatioiii8,  qnuin  cetera  sint  omnia  expertia. 
Cic.  Lei;.  1,  7.  Comp.  for  preceding  adversative  Quuin-clauses  the  passage  Cic.  Ac.  Po.  1, 
lU,  oo.  3,7. 

Obs.  2.  Sentences  with  comparative  Quuk-CLAUSES  are  used  as.  one  of  the  forms  of 
COORDINATION,  to  reprcscut  two  coordinate  propositions  referring  to  the  same  logical 


QUUM 


-CLAUSES   A.ND  THEIR  EQUIY.U.ENTS. 


657 


,  *  «a  iViia  similarity  or  dipsinnlanty 
^«  similar  or  dissimilar  features,  Ihi^  ^imu'»  virtutibu^  ornatus 
«uhiect  as  Mvins  ef>mc  ^^^^^1^1.]!;  %rm,  as:  Ciajus  ?"""''/'^^h'rned  with  all  virtues, 
S^^\\uini:aed  by  j^co.;^'  ^^-^^f^  «^IV/^^lSlil^oUi  ^Sue!' represent  the 
essel.  iinii  ea  P'"'*^*-'.^'  '^,{  •,  ,1  at  quality  that  etc  .  »  *^'*:^'^\7"  urincipal  sentence  refer- 
«o  he  was  di.tingui^hed  in  ;  "MV/Vmusewo-tby  q"«^'t'*^ViLnJe  The  general  lorm  for 
tu  iect  as  the  P*'-^^^^"^*:**''''^  coniaine'»  in  the  ^"^'^V^^^^T,^,-  ,,ie  bV  ««•  •  >ic  ^^^a) ', 
r  1  u  to  a  particular  qua  lit  •  ^.-  ^J^^^ie  stnctly  ^^^^l^^^^i'v\^  p<.nCbant,  ita 
couM.arativej.eriodsof  thi.  l^nui     ^^^^^.^  l^^"^^"^^';?    a.cer  tht    "rm  of  a  comparalive 

feoi^:;!^^^""-"^^ 

sint  in  philosophia  „rav.  /nrota«i«)  contains  a 

^^:^s^ 3  ^.^^lirative  Qnnm-clauscs  a^useO:  .  U  ^^^y^-^^ 
rNivEUSAi.  th!..  HP^t^freXn     -^.fded  t^  the  tumoj  the  aj.odo.     ;^2)  jf^^t^^^P  ^ 
cipue,  maxinie,  vero  f  fjj  .J  ^."^''.'inie  the  ap«.dosis  ^^'^^J^^.^'^^%r eater  intensity  ;  3  to 
is  in  tlie  relation  ol  «^.*«*/,"l.   'uodosis  being  represented  as  oij//  _         ,    .^,^   besides, 

The  MCKiD  iif  tlw  *"":^  " ''i^,  Km\wrA  ^imim-.lai.fc»  ^"'  '  ;'^^',„a<ie,  ilie  choice  of 

tl>u  general  rules  oinl  o  '",''", '!'''ri„<l«  and  time-P">""„'^"""° ',"  i„  the  nl,.pnfect,  in 
*JSna  ,a.a..M..cl>.m  he -cn  ..mc   ,e^^^ 


cate  of  the  '^}}'^^^^^  (  ofe    sual  i han^l^lllliill^l!^ V-r:^^^^;^^^^^^^:^^^'^^  '" 

these  clauses.   KiiuNKU  '^ay^.  Tln^^^^^^^^^^^^^         P^"'»^*'*-^"  ,,  Lf.^'Thich  is  ext.einely  se  - 

ami  if  thenpodusisisa  c   n^tquc    c         .^^^^^^^^  ^""T'i'.o  I  can 'e   a  '1  vet  botlc  moods 

denote  ca^/^e,  t.  ey  iall     "^\    -V  ^  "mi-clunses  do  ''f^^,,^'^'"*'''  .f,"":  in  whi6h  the  apodoMs 

om  the  case.    Generallv  ^"•^'' X  ""I  comparative  Q»"i"f  ^'V't>i  L'  .venu.'.-MEiKiNtt 

reiisidinthem  in^^lf^Tut'^sis- we  l.a?e  not  yet  ^"^.f  V^^\\'"    m    tl  «    we  may,  very 

fl.,vs  that  thi-  siibjiincti%e  18  )^  ^"      .^,1,0  clauses  by    vhile    \"^  f  "^  ^.  -'Madvig  says  : 
freque.iily.  introduce  ^"^'^^.^   'l^P' .^:    -,  ab..ut  as  of.cn  as  ^^^^^'''^^'^^^^^f  cmnparison'  (ac- 

,oir  should  >-^'a">i-^'.the  s     J      ctn^       j^^jj,^,  '''^P'^'^'hI^  dui  m  by  one  solitary  pas- 
eral  principle,  asseringlia^^^^^^^^  ^^,,^,1  ^^^'^'.V'''      .1 /S    tamen  eOrnm.audi- 

the  subiunctive.  He  »''"''^f„;\';, ',  ;  .ymnasia  phil'>^^;P''' '^^'^^Knt  be  subjunctive  in 
p  fre:  lioc  ipso  ten,pore  '/""''' .*;;„V?„  maU.nt.  Cic.  ^J-.J:  ^..^f !  '  '^^or  can  we,  even 
-^.  discum  aua^re  q;.nn^l>U;^- 


ejM'e:  ll«>c  ipso  iv-'i'"'- V  ,  V  ,,,„  inaiuui.  '-'V  ^Cou  "n««  \     j^or  can  we,  even 

Vvhich  we  oppose  the  follow  ini,  P*; .,  ..  -„^iuus  est   ^r^'^'^^'^H    <'   t   1  2  —Some  gram- 
^^'"^"     ...;/J  ...,«/  in.l  L'ua.  tnni  nUiii  ,""""  ,..,..,.„  „n,,r,ri,r.  Cic.  best,  i,^-  . 


niarians  give  the  iuK.*naiii  ^     .1,..  ivuiow 


't  r'ame'-p.-edicau-,  ":'y{"iS;;;„t,'emen.iu°  W«-  <;'^^ Fj™,'!  f ^^f  'am 't  optali.sima 


G58 


TEMTORAL  CLAUSES. 


EXAMPLKS.— 1.   T?ELATION  OF  A  UNIVERSAL  TO  A  PARTIcri.AR.    (a)  NON-mETEniTEB : 

Q'/i/T/i  st-mper  tiiCii  mmiicipcs»  mcos  constilvU  ''"»*  li'<^'  auiiiis»  pru'cipiic  ad  incain  ciiram 
jhrlinet  ;  A^  I  am  al\vay<  wont  to  Io«)k  after  the  interests  of  my  townsmen,  w  heloiijja 
tliis  year  particularly  to  my  care.  Cic.  Fam.  13,  11,  3.— (^'/?/wt  te  ■'■e//i/)er  niaxinie  Uileji, 
titf/i  fratrum  tuOruni  sinpfiililtis  j)ictas  nullum  nie  pafifar  officii  erira  te  niunus  ])r;i'ter- 
mittere.  Ih.  fi,  14. — Sl'Bjinctivks  :  (^/////7/*  in  omnibus  caiisis  «jravioribus  initio  dic^'udi 
comnioveri  fO^eam  v»'lie:iientius, /?///;  in  haccausjl  ita  nieniiilta  perturliant  ut  etc.  Ih.  Dej. 
1, 1.  (Coinpire  the  passages  with  subjunctives  in  the  foi>t-nttte  p.  (i57.)— (/y)  Pi£ETEUitks  : 
Sex.  Koscius.  fjifu/n  omni  temixire  iiobiliifitis  fautoryV/itSN«=/,  t>/m  hoc  tumu!tu  proximo  pr:e- 
terceteros  in  eil  vicinitilte  earn  partem  cans  inKiuerfcVVnd/'.  Cic.  I?. A.  fi. — Idque,v'/ '///*.  per 
pe  dijinus  piifantur,  ti/m  auctontale  et  jiratifl  I.uculli  ab  Tleiacl»  iisiiuis  impetrdvif.  II). 
Arcli.  4.— (^'///msjepe  antea  fortuiijlioseos  Inunines^'/^/^vTy^//»  (jui. .  .traiKiuillitJltem  vit:e 
eecflti  sunt,  t"in  vert)  In  his  MiirCna'  perictili!!'iiu.^</7y/  animo  afftdut^wx  eic.  lb.  ^Mur.  27.  .V). 
. — Ex  eo  qunrn  ab  ineunte  letilte  bene  npefovi^^f-in,  turn  pnecU'ire  existimjlre  c(X]A  eximiisi 
judiciis,  fju;e  de  eo  feceras,  coiruiiis.  lb.  Fam.  13, 16,  \.  —  Quttm  omnia  judicia  vx  iinpro- 
bOrum  iiijuriil  nafa  in/nt  (  =  are  born  ;  owe  their  orij^in  ;  ^nafa'  havin-j^  the  force  of  a 
pn'dicate-adjective  with  a  pre-entt, /'//M  hoc  judicium  panels  iiisce  annis  propter  bomi- 
luim  nimiani  licentiam  con>titiltum  est.  II).  Tiill.  4,  H.— Diciinus.  C.  Verreni.  ^//////<  niulta 
in  deos  homine.'^que  nefatie/fce?^/.  fi/vi  practerea,  quadringenties  scsterliuiu  ex  Siciliil 
contra  le<:es  ahstnlisse.  lb.  Verr.  1,  IS,  SH. 

•2.    ItELATION  OP    A    POSITIVK   TO   A   COMPARATIVE     OR    St'PERLATIVE  :      QlH/T/l    OTTinibU» 

me  virtntibus  allectum  esse  e>/pio.  tuin  nihil  est  (jiiod  maiim  quain  me  ef  cs-e  craiinn  ct 
vidGri.  Cic.  I'hmc.  3:i,  80.  —  Cj/'/'/m  omnium  rerum  simuiaiio  f=v/  ritiosd.  linn  amicitiie  re- 
puirnat  mr/j'Jm*'.  lb.  Am.2.">.  i*2.— <^w>///i  phirimas  et  maximas  cominoditfltes  auiicitia 
<wi/JA/f(7/, ///w  ilia  niuiTiiim  ;>?•<»■.</<// omnibus  (juod  bonam  spt  m  pradQctft  in  postfrum. 
lb  7.  'i\.  —  Qmnii  tota  pliiiosoj)hia  fruirifera  ^aV,  tuni  wwWn^ fe raciov  in  eS  locus  et»l  quani 
de  ofticiis.  lb.  OtT.  3.  2. — ItH(|ue '/////w  eum  ant'-a  tui  .'^liid'tin  vulenm.  Oim  vero  nunc  a 
doctissimo  viro  instructum  muiio  videiiam  ninili'rririn.  H).  Brut.  71,  2.">().— r^/z/^/zj  auctori- 
tas  et  diixnitas  PisOnis  ra'?hat  \)\nY\n\\\m.  turn  ill.i  crat  vuu-fi  ju^ty-inia  (iui»d  eum  sibi 
Acha'i  patrOiium  adoptilrant.  lb.  JJiv.  Cu'c.  20.  ♦».").  [The  conneciioii  of  this  pa-saire  shows, 
that  a  8ut)junctive  (ra/c/'e/)  could  not  have  been  used  without  niakiiii,'  ilie  meaninjj  of 
tlie  el  !U«e  amliiiruous]. 

3.  The  apooosis  uknotino  an  AnnirioNAT.  fact  of  orkatkk  impoiitanck  :  Qtnun 
tuJ  et  men  ntaxiim-  inferest  te  valere.  tnin  miiltis  est  curav  Cic.  Fam.  Hi.  4,  4.— (^iiie  tpn/m 
res  tuiii  ficfd  nj/  pueriliier,  /////*  ne  etticit  quid^-m  quod  viilt.  M).  Fin.  1.(5,  !!<.— Qu;e  quinn 
aW/or/'g/</!  a  litteri»  et  ab  humanitjlte,  tnin  vero  coniraria  sunt  imperio  et  diirnitilti.  lb. 
Qu.  Fr.  1. 1,  12.  —  (^'/'//n  hos  sibi  (jua'stiis  cw/AVj/Mtx.sv/'  ex  his  caiisis  quas  ipse  insiituerat 
cum  cohorte  snil  coirnoscrre,  tuiii  intinlium  «renus  inveneratad  innumerabilem  jx  cuniam 
corripiendam.  lb.  Verr.  2,  2. 11.— Ihecyf///m  merito  ejus  fieri  inttllif/ehat.  turn  ma<;ni  inter- 
esse  arbitrabiliur,  eju<  auctoritjltem  inter  suos  qiiam  plurimum  valere.  Cujs.  B  G.  5,  4. — 
Ilrec  urbs  qiDim  maun  muniti.ssim»  e^-i^et.  fiirn  loci  nattlrfl  tern!  ac  mari  clandebJltur.  Cic. 
Verr.  2. 2,  2.— Sc:evola  7'///m  t)nea»ntus  esstt  ad  excoiritandutn, /«//*  verbis  erat  ad  rem 
cum  suminil  brevitilte  miral)iliter  aptus.  lb.  Brut.  31>,  145. 

Ob:*.  4.  If  both  the  protasis  and  the  apodosis  h-ive  the  pamc  predicate,  this  common 
predicatt;  may  be  repeated  in  l)oth  j)ropositions  (as  in  the  examples  quoted  in  the  loot- 
note  to  Obs.  3,  and  in  the  passaire  Cic.  Brut.  71.250,  quoted  Ous.  3.  No.  2) ;  but  it  is  fre- 
quently once  omitted,  ^'i///^;*  in  the  prota-is,  or  in  the  apodosis.  In  either  ca-e,  the  ctmi- 
mon  predicate,  if  ext)ressed  only  once,  is  in  the  iu'licafire.  as  :  Qumn  omtiiuin  sociOriim 
provinciarumque  ratir>nem  dilij^jenter  habere  itehT'tifi,  tuin  pnecipne  Sicili;R.  Cic.  Verr. 
2.  2.  1. — Nam  mihi.  qunin  muita  eximie  divinequi'  I'i'ien'ur  Atlieia'  tute  j)eperisse,  tmii 
nihil  melius  iilis  mysteriis  (iuil>us  ex  a>;resti  vitil  exciilti  ad  humanitiltt-m  sumus.  lb. 
Les».  2. 14.— Hoc  eiro  qiiuin  reipublicje  cansfl  c^n^iii,  turn  imprimis  retinendje  diirnitJtis 
tua'.  lb.  Fam.  12,  22. — Te  quititi  semper  valere  oijno.  ft/m  cvrw  qiium  hie  sumus.  lb.  7,  4. 
— Id  fcediim  consilium  (/'/"m.  inceplo  turn  etiam  exitu/V/jV  ibo'h  in  its  be<,'innini;  and  its 
end:  or«vir'//at  the  bef^inninrj.  «v  at  tin;  end).  Liv.  2(i,  38.  — .AKesilJus  g>/i/in  a  c«'teris 
scriptoribus,  fn/n  a  Xenophonte  co'l'i'i(l(Vi/.<  t.-./.  Nep.  As;.  1. — Multum,  qaum  in  omnibus 
rebus,  turn  in  re  militjlri,  potttil  fortQna.  Cies.  B.  G.  ti,  30. 

Obs.  .5.  Not  »'very  Quum-clause  used  as  a  protasis  with  a  followinir /'/w,  can  be  con- 
eidered  as  a  cotnparaiivt  (^ninn-clanse.  Sometimes  tdis  form  is  applied  to  pure  tempo- 
ral clause!»,  atid  also  to  concessive  Quuni-cl  luses,  when  'he  mood  of  the  Quum-clause 
follows  the  rules  about  that  class  of  Qiium-clauses  Ui  which  it  belonixs.  In  such  instan- 
ces the  adverb  turn,  openini;  the  a])odosis,  is  altvays  redundant,  beiti^'  used  only  to  mark 
more  distinctly  the  bei.Mnniii^  of  the  apodosis.  ^  Tum''  must  then  be  considered  as  a 
mere  syndetic  antecedent  w  iiu  an  incersion,  similar  to  that  of  relative  clauses  ^see  p.  505, 
Obs.  2>:  aa :  1)  Tkmpouai.  cl.m'ses  :  Quuni  mihi  projxjftui  (see  /i.  34,  Obs.  3)  re;rnantem 
Leutulum.. .,  turn  lamcntutiOnem  matrum  fumilias..  .perhorresco.  Cic.  Cat. 4,0, 12.— Qui 


POSTQUAM-CLAUSES   AND   THEIR  EQUIVALENTS. 


659 


. 


,: 


,.um  ill!  breviter  resj.ndi.ent    J,e.  21^  ^^^^,t^^^ 

quanta  conscientne  vis  «^^«  '  "f^'^   I'^^jl^^^^Ji^'i  "opS  T)-  Fam.  15,  2.  5.- 

me  ^'andere  t/.xe^v,m.        it/m  ;   "«^.^J^f  ^.^f^  ,^'VSs  libi  gratias  agam,  non  reperio. 

-:;^;(;.i;;tu;.ire^^bo=qnr^^^^ 

ad  bciie  vW^^^^^  lb  Fin.  3,   5,5;). 

Item  41.  Sometimes  Quvm-rlauf^es  have  the  force  of  hypothelical  bi- 
clau^estcmlraiy  to  re.Uity,  in  uhich  instance  they  require  their  precU- 
cates  in  the  subjunctive  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  as : 

Onod  ^^f!ff  ludicitim  ouuvi  ex  Verris  tnrpisgimo  comitatu  tree  recuperatOrum  nomine 

;. -vie  esse    illud  quidem  non  q>a-ererent,  "cui  bono  «."''"^^'t  •  .  J^^J^- /.  3  .  8h.     upinor, 
t..v,  louu  VI  aiidirtli)i    turn  causa  aL^i  vere  viderelw.   lb.  V  err. -J,  l.  lu. 

out  of  Leoiidas,  if  he  had  ordered  him  to  be  present.  Cic.  \  err.  2,  5, 5. 

II.  Temporal  clauses  with  postquam  and  its  synonyms. 

I     ^  620  Temporal  chmses  introduced  by  podquam  {postcuquam) ,  'ubi,ut, 
Hmul  {simulac,  siniulatque),  and  quando  have  their  predicates  in  the 

INDICATIVE.  .:,..•      ♦!« 

Obs  1    The  above-mentioned  temporal  conjunctions'  have  their  pi-edicates  in  the 

C«»a,i8,  co,m„mf  ll.i.iii5u.«  pnT.c.pt-s  "'   ;^,^-i^'*  ";  V\-;/,^,,;^  i    (('„  ^^^^^^  „ith 

wimMmimmmm 

vcrc^ mr?^  a  ,t^  quam  m  in- pr,,vh,ci»,..  V^ 

(in  St  editors  bavin."  podea  quum  against  the  conices).  !'>•  Lt'g^A  ^ -^"f  Z;^^;,^"^^^^^ 

mo.us,  orta  ...m^ne' iK>stqaam  C.  Cu|sari  baud  .ff^^f^l^^^t.^foiTUUtJd   vvlu^^^ 
(Where  the  editors  say  that  the  very  plain  passage  has   >^^»  ^^^  "^;.^^/'!^^^^^^         m-ove  to 
W  anything  to  gel  rid  of  the  subjunctive  alter  •;x/.s/./t/am  •- ^j^^^  J  fl,^-^^' 1^^^     '" 
evfdcnce  x\mi  imtquani  sometimes,  though  rarely,  is  construed  with  the  ml^unctiie. 


660 


i 


TEMPORAL  CLAUSES. 


Ob!*.  2.  1  he  rlanses  dependont  on  jmtquam  and  simvldc  inrnvlafque),  from  a  strictly 
{rruiiimatical  t^taiidpomt,  nuisr  be  CDusider.'d  a^^  comjiaradve  clauses  (j)ost  and  in^sted 
qnarn  =  later  than  ;  ^imitl  ac  or  afqne  =  at  ttie  ^nine  lime  as).  Hence  these conjniiction>< 
are  som  time-  >e|)anued  into  their  elements  by  insertinir  one  or  metre  words  (po^/ea  vera 
qi/ani  ;  vniUi.s  fx)st  a/inh-  quavi  etc  :  see  the  examples  below).— 'I'he  clauses  introduced 
by  ihe  conjiinetioiis  .numerat.d  abov.- are  only  nsi-d  as  fff/re/«ttf/ clau>es,  except  those 
intro.iuced  by  postquaw,  wiiich  .«.metimes  occur  as  uttiibutt-davKea,  dependent  on  nouns 
deiiotuiu:  time  (p.  -jrW,  foil.).  Such  chinseshave  three  lorms  :  D  with  the  "•ov.rnin"  noun 
in  iheaulative  (rarely  ti.e  accusative)  of  lime,  as  :  Auhoposiqimm  rofanaf  iviU^  .AlTjiieia' 
dedicuMir.  Liv.  7.  '-'H  -  ^  ndeat/io  die  ixt.-<tqinim  a  te  disccsseram  hoc  litteruijuum  exanlvi. 
Cic.  Ati.  12.  1.— I'rofectus  d'^c'uii"  jn),s(  die  quatn  exercitum  accepeiat.  Liv.42  2  —2)  I^txt 
IS  coniH;cied  as  a  preposiiiim  with  the  goveriiiiio:  noun  (always  with  ordinals) :  Po-'t  di>^tn 
XL  et  \  1  qmmi  a  voids  dii^cexoeiant.  Cic.  Fam.  16.  21,  l.—I'osf  dhin  lertintn  ^m  sla  res  est 
quam  aixnat.  lb.  Mil.  16.— 3)  I o<t  may  be  elliptically  omitted,  if  the  ^'overniii"'  noun  is 
m  thcai)lative,  or  is  connected  with  the  prep<.sition  intra  :  quadnhgtnlemno  ainioquaiu 
url)s  Honiana  amdila  etat,  qtnnio  tuvesimo  qxavi  a  (Jallis  )td]yer<Va,  patricii  consuh-fl 
ambo  ex  inierre<,'no  ma-iftiatum  iniere.  Liv.  7, 18  — t'onsiil  inilites  duflrum  Ie<Mnnum 
intra  dif.<t  seoraqinta  quam  in  provinciam  reriit.  dimlsit.  lb.  4:j,9.-The  tense  in  these 
attributive  clauses  is  reirnlarly  the  pluj)er/'trt ;  but  scmietimes  the  ]iredicate  is  in  the 
perfect,  as  m  the  last  passa<,'e.  Tlitis  :  Cent  11711  et  octo  annU  jiostquuin  Lycur'nis  le«'eB  scri- 
bere  t/z^/t/i/i/,  prima  posita  est  Olympian.  Cic.  Kep.  2, 10, 18. 

llrni.  42.  Clauses  with  jnistquam  nic  ureiierally  depondont  on  preterite 
prt'ilicatcs,  in  which  iu.stance  ;w.s/r/^mm  has  1)  the  nicanini,^  of  the  Eng- 
lish conjunctions  *  after'  or  '  irhe/i'  (a,<^  soon  ns) ;  2)  the  incauin;^  of  the 
rehitiveexpi-ession  ex  quo  {tonpon),  z=  'from'  or  'since  the  time  thnt\ 
'ever  4nee\  More  rarely,  'pontqunm  is  dejieudent  on  NON-ruETEuiTE 
predicates  (Ohs.  7-11). -The  predicates  of  Postquain-clauses  are  either 
in  the  PERFECT,  PLiPERFECT,  IMPERFECT,  or  PRESENT,  biit  neither  in 
the  futiire-i)resent,  nor  in  the  fiiture-i)erfeci*.  For  the  use  of  Postquam- 
clauses  referrini,^  to  indefinite  time  sec  Ous.  10. 

1.  PosTQUAM,  in  the  meaning  '  after'  {ichen),  dependent  on  Preterites. 

Ob^.  1.  Clauses  with  po.^fqvnm,  in  the  above  menninu'.  arc  used:  1)  to  represent  the 
two  predicates  as  lieiii','  merely  \\\  a.  f-uccts.sioii  f/ /i///«?  without  any  other  connection  of 
ttie  two  actions  ;  2)  to  reiiresent  the  main  action  as  a  coih-eejuejice  ol  the  anteiior  action  • 
3)  to  denote  an  incident  by  whicli  tiie  lo-:ieal  subject  of  the  principal  senience  was 
induced  or  detemnrud  to  jterfonn  the  main  action:  4)  to  repres.iit  an  action  which 
accorc  lUK  to  the  inteniion  of  the  doer.  /ra.v  to  l)e  performed  before  the  main  action. 

In  all  these  instances,  postqumn  is  a  synonym  of  quum.  \\\\\\  the  pluperfect  subjunctive 
or  ol  uta  and  xit  wiih  the  perfect  indicative  ;  but  not  of  quum  wiili  an  imimfect  subjunc- 
tive, nor  of  r/^/w/w,  //«!/?■,  and  ut  with  a  pluperfect  or  imperfect  indicative.  'J'he  ten<ks 
Hitx'T ]X)stquam  essentially  ])reserve  iheir  peculiar  force  which  ihev  have  in  ind.pend.-nt 
sentences  according'  to  the  jrcni  n>l  rule.-.  Hence  we  tind  after  'jtostquam  not  only  tlie 
/iistonatl  present  (see  Ons.  G),  hut  also  (in  silver  Latinitv)  tin-  hlstoncal  infinitive  '  But 
the  tensys  after  qunm,  iibi,  and  ut  (aside  from  the  perlect  indicative),  Lave  mostly  con- 
vtntional  si,i,'nilieatious. 

Obs.  2.  When,  accordincr  to  these  principles,  either  posfquam  or  qvi/m  (ubi  etc.)  miirht 
be  employed,  the  l/in<,'iia<,re  nevertheless  prefers  the  use  of  jwstquam  1)  to  pre«crve  the 
original  and  idiomatic  lorce  of  certain  tenses.  This  mostly  refers  to  the  use  of  the  im- 
perlect  (Obs.  5),  but  also  to  the  perfect  and  j)luperfect,  as  for  inst.  :  Postquam  Manlins 
</U7/,  pecunise  summa  homines  movit.  Liv.  22.  <il.  Here  the  perfect  indicative  dtj-it  lias 
the  idiomatic  ne<rative  nieaninir  mentioned  p.  ;30.J,  Ous.  3  rafter  Manlius  had  ceased  to 
speak  '),  which  would  be  etlaced  by  Ujuum  diHsxet  \  as  in  the  followinir  passaj^e,  where 
the  speaker  did  not  ctaxe  to  speak  :  Ifepc  quum  dixisstt,  jiintvir  se  nisi  victOienrin  ca-tra 
non  reversOrum.  O.es.  B.  C.  3,  87.— 2»  Po.<tquam  is  used  in  preference  both  to  quum  .tnd 
ubi  (ut)  if  the  action  is  opjjoaed  to  other  actions,  bcloncnmr  to  a. previous  time  mentioned 

*  The  En<,dish  'after'  (when)  with  the  liiture-perrcct  cannot  be  e>cpres>ed  liy  •  i>ost- 
gnam  wilh  a  Latin  future-perfect.  In  this  instance  the  Eiiirlish  'afur''  U  «■■enerally 
expressed  by  (fuum.  vbi  or  n/nulac  with  a  Aiture  perfect  (p.  o54,  Obs.  3).  Sometimes 
however,  imtqnam  is  used  in  this  tjense  with  a  perfect,  as :  Pa«tea  vero  qunm  profectus  ei 
(not  en-<),  velim  recordere  quie  ego  de  te  in  seiultu  cgcrim  {after  you  will  have  departed, 
I  wibh  you  would  remember  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  5,  2, 4. 


rOSTQUAM^LAUSES  AND  THEIR  EQUIVALENTS. 


661 


...    in  this  it^tance  ^^^^^^^^S"^/?'  ^S^f^^^^^^/S^^^^'^ 


before. 

(Which  forms  are  'requeimy  eu.,..v.Yvv^^^  ^"iaebatis  ;  jwsfeaquam  (i.  e.  'vero')  mentes 

{rebatis,    me   qnoque  cum  '''^^  ^^ 'J"    ,!""'  Ve  viistiL  Cic.  Pr^^^^ 

tesn-as  7nH'a.stis,  me  comitcm  ^f »         -^  ''^^  h  Mcs  ter.^a  verterunt.   C*s.  B.  G.  7.  :i7. 

quam  equilatus  master  1»  f  »"^P^''"''\  ^4^'  ,L  .  V^V   21,33;   25,25;   Cais.  B.  G.  7,  82  ; 

?-omp.  Liv.3«h  12;  3:3. 18^   32,22  ^^%^^\^%;^  \md  often.-3)  If  'the'En.di^h  conjunc 

B.  C.  3,58  ;  Cic.  Fam  3   ..  5  ,  ib  I\^'»;  \";\;  „'  /.^  i>e  introduced  hv  posfquarn,  and  not  by 

tion  V//y^r'  means  ■  afer  than  '    ^^^  ^''V.  f^,/  "  ,  ',ver  to  theques  ion  '  how  much  later  ?\ 

quum,  Ui,  or  ut.  This  is  t'spt^'Cially  t  Ic  case  1  >  »"' ^»-  to  "j^  q         construction  iw^fqaam 

I  in 'the  attr.biitive  claiises  mentm  ^^,^^  -^^  ,,^,,^,,,  ^,,,^ 

tak.'s  either  a  pluperlect  .«'^  ^  P<^V  ./-^  v,;,/    liA  21  -ii)  -lliYu  non  multo  ])Ost  qv  am  tu  a 
quam  consules  in  P'-^vinciam  y>ro/.o<t  6;a  .^  l^^^^^^^^  Mario.  Cic.  Att.  12,49. 

?ne  di.cesd.ti,  subito  quidam  ']''^^^''\^^Jl'^^^^^^  ^ay  be  generallv  used 

OBS.  3.  Aside  fro.11  these  Py/^f ,  V,  ,^  f>X'ibUn'c?ivro?S  of  Ubi-clauses  with 

in  ph.cc  of  Q""^"-^'^"^r^^,l^l^,,^'''L'r.  tV?au^^^^^^^^^  very  similar  ,.ass.g.  s  wi.h 

aporfectindicaiive,  andbolhfon   sarcl't^^^^^^^^^^^^  J  exanimari  se  vidcMet, 

eiactly  the  same  lorce,  as.:   f;P«7"  "/;,^"'j?"nf  es^rt^^  s-n  respondisse7U.  ro:.avit 

qineslvit  salvusne  essx-t  chpeus  ^  ''  ,/^/,^^1;^'^;^^,  „,,^1^,^,,.,^  evelh  jussit  eam,.qua 
Jssentnc  fusi  liostes.  Qu^m%  }  9". '^" ^  om  are  w  1.  :  Epaminondas  turn  denique 
erat  tninslixus,  hastam.  <->c.  1 11.  2  30  9  •  c  omp^^^^^^^^  j,,. 

sibi  avelli  jubet  spic.ilum.  ^'^^'^f '^J^,f '^„^^^^1^  S^  «1'"^  locGtum  ferunt  quam 

Fam.  5, 12.  5;  and:    Y^'\^^\^^'l'^''lZ\ue<a^^^^^^  dictum  ed  incolumes 

quiesisse  si  incolunus  Lycortas  X  ,lo^[^;.;,;iVo  cxspinlvit.  Liv.  :3«>,  50.-Eo  postquarti 

2,se.   'Bene  habet      "'^'''^;  ^J,  ^^*^^  ^/^ctesB"^^  1^^^^^  Eo  g./«m  Ca^^ar 

Clesar;>c/T^^^^^<)bsldes  arnlapopo^cl  tai^.^5.^_^^  Brundusium  re7.ii,  contionatus 
venisset,  civitatiinis  milites  imperat.  Ib.o  1--^^':'J'^.\  g  _Hasdrubal.  postquam  peniiias 
i  Id  milites. . . ,  II.  Non.  Jan.  navTs  ^«'Iv  •  J  •  B-  ^"  f^\^  H'  „a  ..^'iiannibal  accepit, 
ris  ad  Cissim  acci pit,  iter  ad  '"^,^/^^^];^'^;,  _\Vann  ial,  ^uum  recermd^sef  omnium 
equitibus  emissis  in  h..stem  erflpit.  -V ;. .7^^;  •vota  ex^^^^^^^^^^^  lb.  21,  21.-Po<vY^«am  ilh 
^2ntium   auxilia,    Gadcs   Vro^i^etns   Uc^^^^^^^^  Frequently  such 

iusta  ma-nihce /fCfm//^  reiruli  m  "V2  Ln?.mle  it  0«  €0^  oTher,  as  :  Romana  pubes, 
equivalent   temporal   clauses  are  '"«'  «  „^,«P^3^'i"Vi^|/''  ,'„^  silentium   ob.inuit 

'^"'  .ere.  a  lux  7'ediif,  vbi  vacuam  sedem^t^««...ina  ^^^  ^^^j^^^^^,_ 


;;^;;y,;;;^;r Serena  mx  r<;inf^j^2^^,,i:^Se:^vty^  '^f'''\ 

Uvheu,  after  the  return  ^^^  I'f 'f.' iV-f^ym^o     empor^^^ 
in-intere-tinjrpassa-e  almo>t  .      [  '^^*"_\*,' '^    CVltibCri.  qui  profecti  erant  a  domo,  dedi- 
relative  forms,  are  cc)...bi.u'd  w    h  <-Nic^^  ?,     primiin    imbres  rejniserwd,  077nnbus.  Contre- 
tionis  i-nari.  qtnnn,  '»''*'^''";1''  t  /u-  '^/^/-K^r^^^^^^  in  alteram  partem  translata  rati,  aut 
bia.n  renU-'enf,  postquam  ^^^^'-'.''\%]lf'^^^^^^  accesserunt.  Liv.  40,  m. 

recessis.e  hostis  per  -^'^'^'^'  '"^^"^J^^^^^^^^  enumerated  Obs.  1.  the  perfect, 

Obs.  4.  In  the  f»'''r/^^*^criptions  of  Postqua  n  c  a^^  ^^^^  ^,^^^.^  categories  is 

pluperfect,  or  imperfect  may  be  used.   ,/;;;.i''caJe-orv^i//^tr  tlie  perfect  or  ihe  pluper- 
fheVr/Vr/.  while  in  the  causeso    tie    m  ^^^^.^  .1^  place  of  a  perfect 

feet  is  used.    The  pluperlect    7.aij,n  J  '^;|^;.J^,^'^"j-  an  immediate  one.     I"  the  second 

?ii;ljrJ.T  iias  always  ai  idU>matic  m--^^--  ^,^,,,  ,,,,  .^eras  M,  Postnmia 
•1    Meue  tkmporai._succkssion  .  i)  1  Euthcis  .  _/ iA<y  .\.  .*..„  „;,.iAr.^a  f.Mines  ouidcm 


ca 

2) 
es 


nt 
nin 


stemuam  in  istam  provinciain  7>^/tMo.  ?^«'  a''.  ^^'  '  '_pienunius,  qnique  in  eadein 
artio  accidisset.  sic  tu  mil,.  vulSris  t^c  lb- Q^- 1^- 2- 2  1.  ^  p^^^  ^J^^.^.^  Liy.^J.22 
nsa  erant,  poxtquam  Romam  *-'^V    [^i"/^;/^^^^^^^^  temptationem  ajgbam 

;.,  Plupkufkcts  :  .Equi.  w^tquam  t^^''^l^\^^'S  n-  tereiVtur  etc    Liv.  9.  4.5.-Tum,  qunu 

::.se"ut  ter.0.e  in-'-o  Ju^li.     -lanos  s .^  ti       P;"^'  -  '[-eottam  in  judicium  vocabat. 

P    AtV  cslnu--.  iX)-<teaqunT7i  ni>  consu.  et  *-'  '  "^      -'  .. 

cic  Piv  Ca-c.  21.  See  sail.  Juu^  11,2.  qi.<>tcdOB>.^  Po.tquam  vineas  a<ri  tur- 

li  Tkmporai,  srccESSiON  with  9<»^'^>Q\f'^"f ,;  '  ,,,,.V4w  that  woiks  etc.  were  erected 

rl/que  exci.ari  rieHrunl,  Hda  P^^tinacia  .^r^ Aft^r  t   (  w^^^  ^^ 


662 


TEMPORAL   CLAUSES. 


compertnm  est,  in  bello  plnrimnm  irgonium  pospp.  Sail.  Cat.  2,  2.— Iljspala,  postg^iam 
lictOri-'!<  in  vestihiilo,  et  consiilein  ip:«iim  conipexif,  prope  exanimilta  eft.  lb.  31>,  12. — 
Wacedones». .  .niovGii  n(>q[iiivenint  ;  jwstquam  htvo  latt'ie  nudilto  ciraanarjcre  ha^tai?  in 
venirntcm  hostetn  condti  mnt.  tuvhdti  t  xtepiplo. .  .terira  vertunt.  lb.  *i,  18— Ax^/vva/;» 
audita  vox  in  foro  est  pra-cuni:?,  veliu  nova  res  niirabundain  j)li;b('m  conrerdf  quidnaiu 
incidis^i^•t,  lb.  3,  38.— Anliuchus  qiuim,  pa^teuquam  a  L.  ScipiOne  devictus,  Taur«>  ti-niis 
rcKiiarejw,svfw*'6,sY,  omnein  banc  At^iani  amisJigeet  ;  Wben  Antiocbus,  after  bein;;  directed 
by  Scipio  {i.  e.  in  consequence  of  Scipio's  order)  to  reii,Mi  as  far  as  Mount  Taurus,  bad 
lost  all  tliis  Asia.  C\c.Dv}.l'i.—  CreHtne'^]\i:^^-n\Ui.])0.'ifguam  neniinem  annfltum  in  niu- 
ris  ridtnnit.  lb.  43,  9.— Duni  loiigius  aberant  (ialli,  plus  multitudine  telurum  proticigbant; 
pofifedquam  piopiiis  ttucieist/Srunf,  ant   be  ntiniulis  induibant,  aut  etc.    Cits.  B.  G.  7,  82, 

C.  TmK  ACTION  or  TIIK  CLAUSE  DETKKMININO  A  nESOLUTION  OP  THE  PRINCIPAL  PIBJECT, 

1)  Perpkcts  :  PosfQitOTfi  conipt-rit  lran^itunl  ejl  non  esse,  castrn  quain  extenciscima  po- 
test valle  locat.  Liv.  21,:52.— Marcellus,  jx)sfm/am  id  inceptuin  irritum  f'/it,  ngua  ad 
Enryabim  rcferri  junnt.  lb.  25.  2o.— llasdrul)al, //asy^'/r/m  animadi't^rtit.  exi<rnuni  "Konijl- 
nuni  exercitum  in  castris  esse,  nad^d/.vr  cum  CeltiberCrum  principibus  nt  copias  incie 
abdflcant.  lb.  25.  3:i.— Ilanc  pbalanj,'ein  Hippias  et  Leonnatus  raptim  adduxerant,  jxtitf. 
qvain  prospcre  pu<!:nasse  cquitem  ncrepirunr.    lb.  42.  .59  (see  p.  34»»,  Oiis.  3).— Hannibal, 

iMKtqiinm  cohoTWi:  strai:em  ridit,  recipere  si<;na  cccjnt.  lb.  26,  H.  C"i)mp.  Cirs.  B.  G.  7,  .58; 
.iv.  10,  29;  21,31:  32.30;  Cic.  Clu.  63,  177  ;  Kep.  2.  31.— 2)  1'i.upekpects  aie  sonietinifs 
used  in  clauses  of  tliis  kind  (rt>  if  tbe  predicate  denotes  an  action  indefinitely  repeated 
before  tbe  main  action,  as;  Qui,  ])0.^tq}(am  alia  frustra  ternptuta  eranf,  earn  actionem 
BuscepOrunt  qua  etc.  Liv.  10,  ii.—Fo.^fqaam  nulla  occasio  puiruantii  configerat  (ini})lyini^ 
several  attempts  btan^  made  in  vain),  castra  movit.  lb.  24,  .36.— Ilanc  vir;:inem  Appius 
pretio  pellicere  adortus,/>0N7g'/a/M  omnia  piulOre  septa  auitnadverttrat  (be  had  seen  by 
repeated  attempts  etc.),  ad  crudelem  vim  animum  convertit.  lb.  3,  44.— This  pluperfect 
of  repeated  action  is  generally  chosen  instead  of  an  imperfect  of  repealed  actinn  (see 
()Bs.  5).  if  the  main  action  is  conceiveci  to  be  sejiarated  by  a  perioci  of  ti^ne  from  the 
anterior  action.  ^*)  If  the  action  of  the  clause  bad  already  been  slated  before,  and  is 
mentioned  again  as  occasioning  another  action,  as  :  Metapontlni.  i)ostquatn  (Fabius)  ad 
constitOtum  non  venerai  diem,  remissi  ut  cunctantem  hortarentur.  Liv.  27,  26  (the  fact 
that  Fabius  would  not  come  having  been  stated  before).— Philippus  (pioqiie,  primovere, 
jmtqvavi  lei:jlti  ab  Romfl  nihil  pacjlti  reiiilerai^t  (which  fact  has  i)een  repeatecily  men- 
tioned before),  dileclum  p«'r  omnia  oppida  habCre  instituit.  Liv.:i.3,  3.— I'aucos  ante  dies 
Perseus.  ;>o.<.V7//fl;?j  legSti  ab  Komil  n-ixrcf^A  jmnideranf  spem  pads,  consilium  habuit. 
lb.  42,  50.— /V/^//^»/i  i)ars  major  exercitus  e/nhi^a  6?a^  jam  ne  cis  quidein  quie  ultro 
dicta  erant,  ptabaiur.  lb,  26, 17,  Cornp.  lb.  108.  Sail.  Jug.  97. 

/>.    The   MAIN   ACTION    depending    on    the    PUEVIOrS    PEKrORMANCE     OF   THE   ACTION 

IN  THE  CLAUSE  ;  1)  Peupkcts  :  Postqnani  (as  soon  as)  assnetudine  <iuotidi;ln;l  satisintre- 
pide  fieri  visum  est.  adversus  instructos  CampanOriim  equites  processCrunt.  Liv.  26, 4. — 
Postedqvam  (as  soon  as)  satis  calCre  res  Kubrio  ri<a  *-fi/,  '  (^uieso ',  incpiit,  'Philodame 
etc'  Cic.  Verr.  2.  1.  26.— Itaqiie  Hannibal,  posfquam  Ipsi  sententia  sfefif  Ilaliam  peteie  (as 
Boon  as  his  resolution  of  invading:  Italy  was  settletl),  advocjlta  continue  v.irie  militum 
v«'rsat  animutn,  Liv.  21,  30.— 2i  Pli'pekfects  :  Pos/qimtfunnu'inm  animos  oculosque  oc- 
cupaverat  certamen,  turn  arreptis  scutis  adversam  adoriuutur  Itomanam  aciem.  Liv.  22, 
4S, — Posfedqua/n  tantam  miiltituilinem  co">'q"rat  erablematura  ut  ne  unum  qiiidem  cuT- 
quam  reliquisset,  instituit  otticTnam  Syracflsis  in  reiria,  Cic.  Verr.  2,  4,  24.— Ceterum  /xW- 
quam  jam  ad  siirna  pei'renerat  Hispanbrum,  tumundique  in  eum  traguhe  conject;e  ("after 
he  had  ab-eady  come';  i  e.  'not  before  lu;  had  reached  the  line',  the  enemy  waiting 
with  the  hurling  of  tbe  missiles  till  be  had  come  up  to  tbe  line).  Liv.  26,  5,— In  all  these 
Bentences,  the  two  propositions  do  not  merely  denote  a  succession  in  time;  nor  is  the 
principal  action  a  mere  consequtiice  of  the  action  in  the  clause  ;  nor  is  the  will  of  tbe 
principal  subject  determined  by  it.  But  in  all  the  passaires  quoted,  the  doers  are  waiting 
ftir  a  certain  issue,  indicated  by  the  predicate  of  tbe  clause,  to  jjerform  tbe  main  actioii. 
In  su<  h  constructions  both  a  perfect  and  a  pluperfect  may  be  used,  and  even  an  imper- 
fect, if  tbe  other  requirements  of  ibis  tense  are  satisfied  (Ons.  5,  3). 

Obs.  5.  The  iMPEUFECT  is  very  rarely  used  in  Postquam-clauses  to  denote  a  m^ere  fd/c- 
cession  of  time*.  But  it  frequently  occurs  in  clauses  beloniring  to  the  last  three  catego- 
ries, mentioned  Obs.  1.  Hence  such  clauses  are  to  tbe  main  action  almost  ahvavs  in  a 
relation  resembliuir  came.  Tbe  imperfect  is  unied  in  Postquam-daust-s  if  tbe  action  of 
the  clause,  expressed  as  a»  independent  sentence,  would  requir»;  or  admit  tbe  imperfect 
tense  according  to  the  difi'erent  rules  on  the  use  of  this  tense  (p.  305  loll.),    Such  imper- 

*  An  example  of  sucb  a  construction  occurs  in  Liv.  10,  24  :  Fuit  contcntio  in  scnfitn, 
et  postquam  ibi  Fabius  plus  }X)ferat,  revocata  res  ad  populum  est  (  =  Fabius  carried  bis* 
Doint  in  the  Senate,  whereupon  the  matter  was  referred  to  the  people). 


rOSTQUAM-CLAUSES   AND  THEIR  EQUIV.U.ENTS. 


663 


^cts  mostly  correspond  to  thc^T-J^ct^c.  s.ate  of  coi^n^^ 

also  to  tbe  diflercnr  uliomatic  '"JP/'^  '*:  "•  f  .^,'''^^;^^^^^^^  Hence  frequently  perfects  and  imper- 
an.l  tbe  imperfect  of  ""^"^^^'^^^^L.^^^'/i'P .-^^  '  be  enually  correct  in  the  same  ^entence.-- 
fects  (and  s.»me.imes  also  PV'';f  ^^-^.fiaVlv  requi?-e  a  change  of  expression  in  English 
Postquam-clauses  with  '»>P'^«-f^'^,'%;i^"?;7?/,S  fng  cavs7,  the  conjunction  7>o^  9"am 
and  ;iuce  they  always  «P-'f  r^/,,^f ''^'^"al  coS  'since'.    Very  frequent  y    he 

must  frequently  be  rendered  l>y  y>«  f '^\^f 7,,,.  ."^jon  is  nc-ative,  the  negation  imply  ng 

mp'rlecl  is  used  in  I'o^^*l'!'^"\-^f»f^!,yo  be  Srrettt  time-points  up  to  the  beginning 
that  the  action  was  not  P^'^  ''«""V  j^'f  ^Stim'ed  '  non-action  '.  Hence  almost  every 
oi   the  principal  action.  ^^;;  Vive  SredS^r^mv  take  its  predicate  in  the  imperfect. 

Postquam-clause  with  a  negative  predicate  r/my         ^amc^  plebs  gravabatur  se  templa 

FvAMPiE-  1    Actions  of  catkgouy  B:  ,5^""f,,J'',"i  alia  opera  traductbantur  (imp. 
d.itun  cScHflcare  manibus  ^^^^^^^!^^^  Seing  t  Kerred  to  other  works, 

rv^;r^^s^J4rSirSi»SSv.  5^^ 

tur  •  This  di-order  was  quelled  i",  ^.^^^^t^J;,"'''  .  pfriphkastic  imp.  of  state)  by  the 
wei^  free  (were  set  free,  ivere  ma  stat^oj  .r^^f^l{'  "^il^'^ii)  j^sfqimm  Romam   advenfa- 
fliVht  of  the  mountaineers).  ^V- ^Iv^^'TvT,  7  n   S)   Ob*   1^2),  sen 
/  /"///(When  thcv  were  on  the  point  of  arruing.  p.  f ; ;^5\^!ls^^d  m-^^g'/am,  dilapso  tem- 
t   s  esr   1  ceretne  Juirurth*  IcL^atos  recipi.  ^aU  JuL^  AS  ^-     »^    /      V^^^^^  AlbTnus 

ore  CO     tiorum  dies  adverddfrnt  (when  ^^^^^^^^  [.feum  tr  Ims  justis  exercitibus  ade- 
i  omam  dece.sit,  lb.  37.  -«•-'^^^■^^"«'^  res  'mperatorc^ cum  ^j  ^^^^  ^^^^^^  g^  ^    arutn 

r«/  (Since  three  generals  were  present,  l^^^'-^^^/^JJ^l'^/',,^  'dies  comitiOrum  aderat  (when 
Td  luendum  locum  valitflroj  esse,  Liv,  2o,>S.^^^^^^^^  ^,..^    ,,,^  ^^  [Compare  : 

election  day  had  emu),  <^"- ^"  i  «  Ow /m  is  dies\vni.v.^^/  etc.  t:jc.  ?h>l.  5  -,  20] -- 
rbi  ilia  dies  venit  ^'t^;  ^^i^j^  :^^{Jhaa,%ui>o..f2«am  uuUus  ad^raU^uice  there  was 
QuterCl)ant  auctorem   repeutTn.v  laiiiuo,.  h      ^       i 

none),  evanuitgaudium.  lb.4o,  i.  Po^tanam  citSti  non  conreniebant.  dimissi 

2    Actions  belonging  to  categoky   a-PoPtq^^^^     .^  ^      ^^4,^,^  to  meet  upon 

d.^a  d.uuos  apparitores.  referunt  ^«"^V'i^t     their  hou-es  who  reported  that  the  senate 

?he  s,?mm<.ns,'|.ublic  ofticcM-  ----en   -^"  /X^^'ne^o  a./7/J(ad  t"bflna  Ml^ni.im 

43  T.     C  MH   -"lb  :«.  17].-Scipio,  postquam  ^'^^'  j^^^^i^P^^^^^gJ^Comp.  C«s,  B.  G,  7,  87].- 
tiVp    OF  continued  action),  retro  cedere  ^fl'^;^^,]^^^^^^^  /mperf.  of  ^tate   = 

Aico  Z^fauam  conduiOiies  tristes  a  ^iCOre/er^oa/^f'/^  u  ^    ^^  hostem  raan- 

nosunnm  c  SitiOnes  qiue  ferebantur,  tnstes  ^m^  ,  ''^^%P^^!;j/%i„ce'  the  undertaking 
Lb  21  v2.-/>.>^-^9"aminitutn  .''^«P-^^^X^.f^^Vbyu  [Compare  :  Marcellus,  post- 
f  Vledi    recenti  post  signa.  proelio   excesserui  t.   1».  lu,  i*  ^ee  Liv.  42.  58 :  ;x).^<ywam  ea 

^;S  ird.".K'i.-ep.uni /.^,  ^^^^^"^^  ^^^i^i^u^m  ^il^^.r^T^ioTs^ 

Mtur  (repeated  action).  coufQ-i  m  ^7;^^]  "''/"' cc(>mplished  action,  p.  '^oy' <^/*-- V/ 
^rie.  ati  jus^i :  postquam  ha^Mtafjant  ^'?»f-  .''^^^  ^Srer^.n  etc.  Liv, 42, 36.-Sed  i)(W^ 
?.^..}.h?..  '  ii  It  nnicouam  mandatum  esse,  JU-.?' r^  uin  ulrc  re  ^_  ^^^^^^^  ^^^^_ 


6«i/wr  (repeaieuauiio....  vv,^-^_..  -  ^  unaccompnsueu  »;r'.'""' *^jp — o"^  „^^',. 

«r«  l.'.'-iti   iussi ;  postquam  fnvMtaoani  ^'^f  •;'„,,„, :.Tre  rci  etc.  Liv,  42, 36,— bed  i^o^t 


,,hr.i«tie  imoerfcct).  scd  etiam  uuctus  t,i  "»i^^  • 

1    \CTiovs  BEi-oNoiNO  TO  CATEr.oBT  T>---'oilqmm  I  ^  tyraiimis  legs  OS  Ela- 

Jat  cSSn  a.'  the-  city  was  in  • '«f 'y!!CViico  A  «<m  (as  /00«  a.).ab  Hippoora. 


664: 


TE]\rrOR.VL   CLAUSES. 


\u^i  '}k  7?  9^'*^^'>-e  »"  soon  as  Syracnse  was  occupied  etc.),  fadlo  perpulcrat  etc. 
i  ).-il..^5.-/o.sYv'/am  portnm  ttnihant,  conikincs  cam-re  juhcnt.  Ih.'ZA.Ail-J'ostnuojn 
1  »/ii ''"^•/^^r{;  ^"^  I^^>i"J^»i  i"  arceni  co)>funtrant.  coutichcl.atque  paiililiiin  tunuiltus, 
turn  H.iniMl)al  larentltios  convocSre  jiihet.  Jl).ir.,  \(\.~P(K^tfjuum  hatis  Niriiim  colk-ctuiu 
a  I  oninls»  coniltuy  ridlbat,  turn  «x  i^n\>  unun»  scitJciiatum  honiani  ad  patrt  in  niinit  etc 
,11  -^~:  [fV'^ia^  '"l''"^'",  "^'""WiH'  A/rt^>a//^  cum  paucis  pn.c-enini  in  medium  duces 
proceaunt.  It).  1.  2.i.— Turn  ^\\<y\\yl[u\,fx)stquam  omnis  Numidiie  />o/i^/A7///r  <  =  possid6bat) 
in  otio  facinu^  huum  cum  ammo  reputaus,  timCre  populum  Kuniilmim.  Sail.  Juir.  13. 

wY'"/'",^""'^*""^^  (mostly  in  Sallu.'^t)  in  Po.«tqnam  daus.-s  a  lii>toncal  prescinds  u*ed 
iTriiM    "  V""t^-"''-  ')  J'^''"f*'<"^-  ">  ''!*•  nieanin-s  mentioned  above,  as  :  Ei,  jwstquain  muium 
arieti bus  ftMlri  rident.  anrum  atque  ai^tntum  domiim  n<:iam  comportant.  Sail  Ju-  7<) 
—lostqiiamUi^-ds  copias  ridet  Catillna,  in   conlertigsimos  hostls  iiicuirit    It)  CaV(H)" 

^>!.?!P-i  1  ;V'^i>-^*]'^"--^':.":.^^''"  "'^  '''■'''  TO.'<tqvam  ridfo  me  sic  luditieari.r.  Vhnit. 
^;ipt..i,l,ii.—/o../quam  nihil./?/,  clamnre  homiiu-m  posco.  Ih.  Cure.  5,  H,  5.— Posfouam 
iideo  ueycio  quid  tuspicarier,  magis  ca'pi  iuttfire  ut  dicat.  Ter.  llec.  5, 3,  '2S. 


2.  Postquam,  =  ex  quo  {tempore). 


period  during  which  the  principal  action  is  naid  to  continue,  or  the  peiiod  itself  'duo 
the  becnnnnifj  of  ichick  '  the  principal  action  is  represented  to  continue.  In  both  in 
t<tances  the  period  must  be  surh  as  to  last  up  to  the  time  spoken  of 

1.  H  the  Postqiiam-clause  refers  to  a  period  lastini;  up  to  the  time  of  the  ppeaker 
po^tquam  IS  rendi-red  by  (ever)  since,  or.  with  a  nc-^aiion,  bv  '  h'-tfr  since  \   The  principal 
predicale  :s  jjenerally  in  the  perfect,  with  the  force  <»f  ah  En'Mish  present-perftd    but 
also  in  the  present     In  the  former  instance  the  pn-dicate  of  the  clause  is  eit/ui'  \\\  the 


que  m 
reuewe 


emoriain  acceptie  cladis  (nor  alter  his  return  ;  <^r  '  from  the  time  he  returned  and 
edetc    >.  Liv.-2:>.(51.— L.  Cincius  Alimentus  scrii)it.  ex  ipso  audisse.  Haunihalem 
2>o^tquam   \ihvi\iiun\n   transient   Tri-inta  VF.   niillia  hominum  amisisse  (ihat  Hannibal 
jrom  the  ti/ne  he  crossed  the  Khodanus  to  his  arrival  in  Italy  lost  r^.dOO  men).  lb  '21  S8 
— Cunclatio  Fabii  conlempta  end,  utique  postquajn  al)sente  eo  temeritilte  ma<'istri  pros- 


ent  which  is  rendered  by  an  Ki'iirlish  pr)e>ent-perlecL"asV  PlViuV"ivl\'"-j^^^^^  videor 

posfquam  in  Porinulno  .««-////i  (;is  ion^' as  I  have  been  in  mv  Forniiannm)    C'ic  Att  -2   111 
i.)tumesiHliud_/>o./^(77?m//iyvr/ia  te  disjunctior.  To.  13,11,  ].-Q„(kI  mihi  nuncdeninue 
apparutt    posteaqvam  et  ipsa  (porticus)  tota  pafet.  et  columiue  jioiifcv  ftunt  (peripiir 
pr»;«ent).  lb.  (^u.  br.  3, 1.1.— Quian'  tibi  unquam  qiiidquam.  ;>&sVa'/a//J  ft/f/s  sum  (as  Ion" 
as  I  have  been  your  property),  verbOrum  dtdl  /  Tlaut.  Most.  4, 2, 22.-Suspecta  majotibua 


rOSTQUAM-CLAUSES  AND  THEIR  EQUIVALENTS. 


G65 


no.tris  ni.re  in.onia  .ervnrum,  ^^^^^^l^l^'^.t^  ' 

vero  nationes  in  famiins  fiami"s,  "^"J  'I'      \l'  nTein^^^  qn<>  tempore'  (ever  since  , 

OBS.  9.  In  place  of  l'<'^'9'l'""-;;'"";td;nende^^^^  employed  (s.  p.  198.  Obs.  1), 

frequently  reversed  i)articipial  phrases  «[f';    '^;   ;,,%'/^^^^  rrravissimum  est  (ever 

I'}  Hoc.  crimen  postjudicia  de  V^'^^}^^:'};.  J^^^']^'^^^^  consiimnm 

3.  Exceptional  usages  of  postquam.  ^    ,  ^,„ 

OBs  10   Ilarelv;>o../,.«...tiot  bavin,  the  mcanm,  '..^^^^^^^^^^^ 
d.^n  on   NON-ruETKiuTK  predicates.  <'J  .^^^f^^'/ .  ;i;.r, '^SicYe  it,  the  perfect,  with  the 
>  s  quam-clause.  dependent  ""  ^  "^^.'^"«^;";.^;  4  it  -^    he  idea  of  CAUsk  or  of  advkh- 
meanini:  of  an  En-h^.h  Preseti  -perfec    appr^^^^^^^^  pra^clarissimum  est,  quod 

SATIVF  cause  (concession),  as:  Cujus  <l^^J''t  "    q    u  tm  n       ,  ^^^^^^^^  ^^^^^^^ 

ji>Zlqnam  a'caesare  tctra.ThiS,re^mo,  peou^^  evenerint,  poenitere  :  after 

lT,spic.n-nm  qu.e  sibi  a.'l  l'"^/'*^^"^  ^l^.^.V/f  S^^^  he  yet  says  that  he  aoc8 

i^oioxavu>^  has  been  pinnshedn^  .crimaram  suam    ab  inTqu  s 

no     re-ret   etc._   «^ '^- 1>1^'- ^' ]5:r.^n  ?S  T/yJ?  ^ 

observari.  indicio  de  se  ipse  m^  ^  bt    o  ^  fl/f^r  /  ,^„imony  iu  his  own  behalf. 

n.at  his  works  are  beinsr  c«»"im<-^"t^f^  "I'^'lf  j;,^' .eni-  j  ^...^^  a  predicate  in  ihe 

Ter.  Ad.Prol.l.-2.  S'''V^\'"'*'\' n  ^0^1 ,  "rfec  '^  Poltq"<nn  hoc  ab  Romams  yobis 
pr'-senf,  pre-nantly  includin-  a  P'^;';,"^^:\'  f  ^^ L,^,;;,/.  pacem  afero  ad  vos  (,=  after  it 
ulla  spes  est,  nee  vestra  jam  arma  ^'O^^;'^'  f^^^^^^'e  on  the  Komaiis  etc..  i.  e.  since  there 
lias  become  plain  ^l^^  y*'"  ^^^i;:;^,  .^'.^".^1  e  mfof  an  epistolary  imperfect  in  H"^  lar  «r 
is  no  more  hopo).  Liv.  21. 13.-1  ^•^"''•''  '^  '  f,;:,, '  .-njor  eraf  quam  put5ram,  et  mea  qua?- 
8en<e  •  Postefquam  et  PompCji  ^•«n^".^*^'^''^  o  du  t   rnior  e/^«^^  i  i  ridebatur,  aut  certe 

da  n  tibi  non  iirnota  dubi.atio  aut  '"^1  ^^  Tf  1^^^^^^^^^  '''  Po-tquam-clause 

Tardare,  ride  quid  mihi  ^''^'/Jf"  ;  :^  ^,J;^^;r  :e  of  an  E^  present-perf.cL  refers  to 

with  a  predicate  in  ^^i^^P^'^"--^^:  ^''Xl''ii,]a^^^^^  qmedam,  priva  vir  fi  is 

indetinf^  and  (/eneral  Ume,  «^  •.£J^*;,';'''?;;;/fn"e,no  freta  perverterc  xnhi^...assveiit 
imifltrix  dieendi  copiam  consecufa  est.  turn  i"?^;;'"..^^  '  ariibus  iinperinm  a  vobis 
r=  Bolet)  Cic  Inv.  V,3 -^«o  e^o  plerosqu^^  SrLS?metimes  l">th  th^e  principal  and 
pefere.  et  jya^lgmm  adepti  .'>v»f,  ^l?!!  ;»  F  vdi'li"  present-perlects  :  Atque  e-o  see  qm, 

fe;t;;^KT;n.xs:l]SrSs^^         ^^^-^^  ^--^^^  ^^^^^^  ^* 

^""i;^  {l^^^Sy^o^^.^-  occurs  with  Pre^^^^^^^li^^^^^'^^  Z^ 
in<- «7m".\  'nViile\'  Equidem  etiatn  ^^y^"  "°;.\  ir  whereas? altboudi  it  actually 
nire  n  i' nor  mihi  esse  vidTtur,  posteaqxam  e-^fj^^y'^  ric  F  n  5  1.-2)  In  the  combination 
?s  lar"e  -solSbam  intuens  ^cipiOnem  W  a^^^  etc  Oc^  Fm-  5,„,,,^,o,,g,am  mulio  mapO- 
n'ncm^fqiiam  with  the  force  of  n>mc  7"  '^'j/,» V  '  riis  ho:tium  fati-atos  subsislere  (dixiO. 

sit  erpccunia.  Plaut.  True.  2,  3, 24. 

4    Ubi,  nt,  simulac,  quando. 
1    *    ♦!  ,.A    r^f  ovnressin"-  the  immediate  temporal 
Bern,  43.  The  usual   "^^^^^'^^,.  \f  ,^X\S  or  'after')  is  by 

successioti  of  two  acta  (in  E^^^^^^^^^f^^f/^^'tn    lie  verfert  indicatice.     The 
clauses  with  .//>^'  or  nt,  ^^-'ll^'^;^'^^^^^^ 


666 


TEMPOK\X   CL.VUSES. 


Obs.  2.  When  clauses  introduced  hy  vbi,  vf,  or  dmv lac  take  thv\r  predicates  in  the 
impertVct  or  pluperfect,  they  ^'eiicr.illy  nler  to  indefinite  time,  or  t«)  actions  iiKlelinitely 
re;-e!il»'d,  as*  Vui^i,  ubi  pericula  \m^\\i  jrropuli-roDt,  s'lxiis»  alquc  ainlcis  aiixilia  portSljaut 
(whenever  tliey  had  averted  daiii^ers.  they  would  carry  help  to  their  allien).  Sail.  Cat.  6. 
See  p.  :i-,>9  foil.  For  this  purj)ose  Post  nmunda  uses  cannot  be  used.  Sometimes,  (but 
rart-ly)  tin-  hii^torians  uce  ubi  and  vt  with  inii^erfectH  if  they  refer  to  delinite  time, 
aecordinir  to  the  same  distinctions  as  with  ]K>f!/gu(i//i,  as  :  Constil,  vbi  ne  paucos  quidenx 

?ni  [n-Imfi  luce  obambulaverant,  parte  ulla  cernebaf,  inft-rri  siirna  jiissit.  Liv. '27.  4-^. - 
Vyi  numo  obvius  ibut,  ph-no  ^'radu  ad  castra  hostiuni  tendunt.  II).  9,45. —  Ubi  ea  dies 
advenit,  ct  Amynauder  in  llnibus  erat,  quatuor  i*iinul  locis  Macedonuni  prit'sidiaexpulsa. 
lb.  ;i'^,  1.— Fabii  onitio  fuit  qualis  biennio  ante  ;  deinde,  ut  viiicelHitur  consensu,  vt-.-sa  ad 
P.  Decium  coile<,'am  popcendum.  lb.  10, 22.  — Deinde,  ?//;  nulla  vi  pcrcuisos  sustiiien^ 
poterat,  'Quid  ultra  moror',  inquit  etc.  lb.  10,  28.— Marcellus,  ut  tanta  vis  inqruifjat 
jiiali.  traduxerat  in  urbein  suos.  lb.  25,  2(3— Still  more  rarely  these  conjunctions  are 
construed  with  pUiperfects,  so  as  to  reler  to  delinite  time  and  sin<jle  actions,  as* :  Ut  ad 
mare  nostra?  cohortcs  excubueranf,  acces^Gre  eubito  prima  luc»;  I'ompejani.  Cais.  B.  C.  3, 
iJ'>i.—  Ubi  ad  pecuniaj  mentiOneni  veidavi  erat,  ibi  hu'eitabat.  Li  v.  44,  2.>. 

Obs.  3.  Ubi,  tit,  Hmid,  si/nul  vt  etc.  are  also  used  if  the  principal  predicate  is  non-pre- 
teri'e.  which  is  rarely  the  case  with  pa'itq  it  am.  The  principal  predicate  is  in  the  puksk.nt 
only  if  they  refer  to  indefinite  time,  in  which  instance  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is 
either  in  the  present  indicatire,  or  (according  to  p.  301»,  Ji.  43)  in  the  perftct  indica/ire, 
as  :  Adfo  ofjdecat  animos  fortflna  ubi  vim  suam  in>;ruentem  infringi  non  vult.  Liv.  5,  37. 
—  Ubi  salutatio  dejluxit  (ac  soon  as  the  calls  hare  cea<ed),  litteris  me  incolvo.  Cic.  Kam.  '.♦, 
20,  3.  — Omne  animal,  *t//i«/  ut  orturn  e.-ft,  et  se  ipsuin,  et  omnTs  partTs  suas  ddir/it.  II). 
Fin.  2, 11.— Ab'i//iw/«^^?/«  increpuit  suspicio  tuniultus,  «rtes  illico  nostne  conticescunf.  lb. 
Mur.  10.— If  clauses  of  this  kind  designate  a  definite  time,  they  always  refer  to  the 
future,  and,  while  their  principal  prt-oicates  are'  in  the  future,  tln-ir  own  pn-dicates 
(according  to  the  rules  p.  353  and  3.'J4)  are  eitber  in  the  />dure-prr{ie/U„ or  /uture-per/'tct, 
as:  JSimul  et  quid  eHt  certi.  ticribam  ad  te.  Cic.  Att. 2,20.  2.— Ego  statim  hal/tbo  quod 
scribam,  ^imul  ut  (others  read  siniul  et)  vid-ro  CiiriOnem.  lb.  10. 4,  12.  — If  such  clauses  are 
suboblique,  the  oblique  governing  clause  (in  the  periphrastic  itilinitive  of  the  future) 
being  df pendent  «m  a  i)rfterite,  their  predicates,  according  to  the  general  rule  p.  45;^, 
are  placed  in  Iha  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  place  of  a  future-perfect,  as:  IJixi,  siinulac 
limCre  dei>isses,  similem  te  futurum  tui.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  34, 80. 

Obs.  4.  Qaando,  which  oriirinally  is  an  interrogative,  and  al-o  an  indefinite  temporal 
advt-rl).  is  sometimes  (rarely)  used  as  a  temporal  conjunction  :  1)  as  a  synonym  with  qnum 
lollowed  by  a  perfect  indicative,  as:  Anctoriiatem  senatus  exstilre  sentio  turn  quando 
(  =  turn  qiium)  Alexa  mortuo  legatos  Tyrum  mvduius.  Cic.  Agr.  2,  !<).- 2)  As  a  synonym 
of  jHtst'iuarn  with  an  imperfect:  Consul  trepidatiDnem  injiciendam  ratus.  ^-/a/n/o  vi  pelli 
non  jHjterant,  equitibus  immis-is  turbare  prima  signa  hostium  conatur,  Liv.7, :^j. — 
3)  with  a  present,  futurepr«8ent,  future-perfect,  and  imperfect,  as  a  synonym  of  quum 
(whenever),  or  of  ubi  (as  soon  as),  as  :  (/uando  esurio.  turn  crej)ant  intestlna.  Plaut. 
Men.  5,5. 27.— At  tu,  quando  habebis,  turn  dato.  lb.  3, 3,  23.— Opera  reddetur.  quando  quid 
tibi  erit  sutjv^ptuin.  lb.  4,  2,  lOO.— C^ui  non  comparCbunt,  quando  (piisque  primum  inventus 
futrit,  reddatur.  Liv.  38,  II.  — Quando  pars  major  in  eandem  senteniiam  i/mt,  bellum  erat, 
consensum.  lb.  1,;^2.  Sometimes  a  perfect  indicative  is  used  aft<'r  quando  with  the 
force  of  a  future-perfect,  as  :  Tu,  quando  Itomani  salvus,  ut  spero,  renisfi,  yidGbis  omnia. 
Cic.  Att.  0,4, 2.    For  the  use  of  ^ua/<t/o  as  a  causal  conjunction  seep. G87,Oii8.  13. 

III.  Temporal  clauses  with  antcquam  and  pi'iusquani. 

%  621,  Clauses  with  anteqanm  {antedquain)  and  pHusquam  take  their 

predicates  either  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive.    Any  tense  may 

be  used  in  them  except  the  future-present  and  the  j)hiperfect  indicative. 

The  imperfect  indicative  and  the  pUiperfect  subjunctive  rarely  occur. 

Obs.  1.  Claases  with  antequam  and  priusquam  are  properly  comparative  clausep.  the 
same  as  Postquam-clau-es,  antequam  and  priuxquam  neing  =  ante  (\)v\w^)..  .quatn, 
'  fooner  \  or  •  earlier  than  \  '  before  the  time  that  \  ' b  fore,  as  a  conjunction  '.  Bot  h  ante 
and  ptius  are  frequently  separated  from  quum  by  one  or  more  words,  and  regularly  so, 
if  the  principal  sentence  is  ner/alire  (non  ante  raiit  quam  ;  neque  prius  destiterunt  quain 
etc.).  Such  a  separation,  however,  neither  aft'ects  rtie  nature,  nor  the  constructit)n  of 
the  clause,  although  many  grammarians  take  great  pains  to  establish  a  diflTcreuce  between 
anlequam  and  ante  quam. 


CLAUSES  WITH   ANTEQUAM  AND   PRIUSQUAM.  667 

OBS.  2.  C,au.e.  with  antequam  (-^^^^^^^^-'^^[^rrSlitSKr^^h:^^^^^ 
often  t.sed  as  ATTKiBUTE-CLArsES,  betmr  d  pc    Uu.tM^^^^^^^        ^^^^^^  ^^^^  predicate  of  the 

predicate,  in  this  '"-^^'i.''^^-  "^"f^^^/.f,  1  ,t?,  ij  hcMW^^  indicative  or  in  tlie  imperfect 
clause  being  indiscnmu.ately  I'  ^^^'j.',  ;;^;,;Vl  s^^  oppngnareut,  urbemque  Komam 
subjunctive,  as:  Duc.ntis  «''^^»-  .7^,  ^ '«^  ,.S":i:j'_Va^/dv  a«/«  diebus  quam  Syracu^« 
camreut,  in  Ilaliam  Galli  ^'«''■^^*^'/"^' ""V.,r'Ti;  o?  01  _Vespasianus  natus  est  9Mt/'?«en- 
cf/^r./*/;/r,Otacili...in  AlncanWm/.x     .^^^  Ib-^^^^^^^^^  f,,!,,,,^^,  aocuit  anno 

vio  antequam  A.igustus  d.^'deret ^^x^!^^-^^^^^^^  antequam  e^t 

inso  antequam  natus  est  Ennius.  ^y^'-^l^^^-},?^^^^^^  jb  Am.  3,  ll.--Tiie  pluperlect 

Jnortuus  (some  Cdd.  have  e<^e<  "^'-^"T^J^m^Z Is  m  the  p  .perfect :  Stajenus  biennio 
subjunctive  occurs  when  ^^'^  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^S^n^  nummum  se  judicium 
«,./.%//./m  causani  bonoruiu  Sati.u    r6C^/>^^^^^^^^  ,,i,h  ant^qnanu   and 

''^t  Often  in  Ant.quam-clayses  ^^^^ ^^i:^^^^'^^^ ^^ 
the  contr.Vv  is  said)  1  he  choice  of  'V^'^^^Vp^'J'  n  mm^^^^^  such  i^"  tances  the  mood  is  often 
o  any  desc-iption  which  do  not  '•^Q;;»;^^  «  f^^f/'^'^^^^^^^^  general  meaning  of  tense 

detei-mined  l)y  particular  a""^/>f/   «  f/^lio^^  »  ^^j^^^    r^^^,^  ^re,  hoxv- 

and  n.ood.and  often  by  a  "'^\  ^ff  wb  eh  he  t.-e  of  tense  and  mood  in  these  clauses  is 
ever,  certain  get.eral  Pf  V),"'}!'::' ''^K-e^e '^  ^^^^^^^^^  "'""'1    ^"  ^".?^^ronl 

^^^  X^S^i:^^^^^  ;^S;;i^j;^^-.xEUiXE  predicate. 

1    Anteqiiam^lauses  referring  to  Indefinite  Time 
OB.  4.  The  niood  and  tense  of  the.  j^l^emA^^ 

u'ed  in  two  meanings :  1)  t",'^tate  that  the  7>y'«/^«^^^  ^^  ^^  negative  p^.st- 

Sf  the  clause  has  not  tHke.i  place  before  (an/.^^^^^^^^^^^  ^^^j^,,  the  pr.nci- 

quam) ;  2)  to  express  that  t^e  action  of  the  cm /^^^a«^^^  V  speak  before  learmng  gram- 
pal  action  has  talven  place  beh.re  ,.^'X\Sw6  J^r^  w"flit  our  language  even  b^JoreweJiave 
mar'  may  convey  the  meaning  ^J^^^".^,^'!,*^- Jf  f^i  „^  under  No.  1 ;  or,  '  We  do  rM 
ZZdred  (wiTHoLT  having  ^<^^l^^]'f^^^:,^^Ta^^^^^  falling  under  No.  2     If 

(at  any  day)  stu^ly  our  grammar,  ^^le^s  «e  /^a^« '«^^^  J  g^pECT  indicative,  or  the 
The  clLsc.  is  used  in  the  « '["^er  ni^eamng  ^l^l^\ll,lfZZ,,„^,  it  lakes  the  puesent  ei^- 
PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE.  ^^  ^^.  ^'^."^p  bartlie  iiatuie  of  the  perfect  mentioned  p.  300, 
juNc .  ivE  only.  The  perfect  "  «^'^^'J^^  '\^' f/J^  ^A  I  negative  subjunctive  according  to 
7^43;  the  subjunctive  present  ha^  f^  "e  ongiL  to  the  fiust  formula  with  per- 
the  principle  explained  p.  543.     Ex.  .  j]  .^J/;"^f  IJ".?  Jea  m  causa  habeamus  :  we 

rfc¥s:  Membris  utimur  ;/rm^9"a'^/  ^J^    »'' '^^^^^^^^^^^^  know- 

use  our  limbs  before  ive  have  ^^«/''^,^,["f.  ^^'^if "3'^i  '06  -O  inanes  nostras  contentiOnes, 
n- ;  it  might  hi,' ^ priusquam  sciamus)  f;^J- ,^  "^^;,*;  ^^'^'  quam  portum  conspicere  potut- 
0 ine  in  m^dio  spatio  Siepe  Iranguniur.  et  a«  «  ooi  */M//^«r  "i         [        f     imjjlicatur  aliquo 

Zit  not  conspicere  /><>-^''-'^''v;;;;[/'Srop  num  esse't  '"udiclSe.  lb.  Oft'.  1,  ^-^- ll^;-^"\« 
^l^l/^ai^irs'^I.ScUS^^Slir^lrS^erath, 

ri^-Nec  enim  ille  res,nrat  «'''^«««''^//'^f^^^^^'jf /I^I^^S"  ovidentia  est  per  quam 
]ii<n'f  rirunt,  ac  si  ita  lutOri  semper  essent  lb.  ^  "•  ^.-«^^^^  j^  [^^he  reading  as.  it  is 
futflrmn  aliquid  ridilur  antequanifacumj.^^^^  ^^^  ,^    ^  i,  evident 

.r  V,  n  in  our  texts  against  the  authority  of /»»!'  c«<|'^^;  '^  {  j  n^i  ante  mors  adveniet 
Sat  he  reading  «)ftliecc)(lices  V^^^'i"^  !l,,""%\|'Tr-c  1  46.-Rorarii  dicti  a  rore  ; 
'*  am  ChakUeOrum  oromisKi  ^'^'',:f^7  /.^^^Z^"^^  J^^amnSi  '(where  plait  must  be  taken 
mi   bellum  comminebant  ante  :  qiunl  ante  r.^.f  q.^Xin  -2)  FiR=^T  formula  with  sub- 

-77;;;;;;;,am-clan.c8  referring' to  indennijct.mc^ 
c!l"tincla/«U.  Cicl>hil.5-,n,47. 


GG8 


TEMrORAL   CLAUSES. 


adopse  jxtte/^t  qumn  qnipqnam  ventflmm  op"=o  qr/eaf  (whicli  mijrlit  be  j)of>/if,  which  is*  not 
U80(l  lor  the  Kikc  of  fiipliony  on  jiccoiiiit  of  tlic  i)r«'Codiiiir  jtofesO.  C\c.  Hep.  •,'. .'},  5.— Ante 
riilrf/i>/s  fnls^MiiJitiOnt'in  (/i/<iiti  Honum  a'/(/hl//n/s  (which  iniL'hr  hv  aiidinittnn).  Sen.  Qn.  N. 
2. 12.— (^iii  stTvflvit  (do  ccpIo).  noii  hal)itis  comitiis.  Krd  piiunquayn  hab^uuivr  {or  /labita 
sunt)  dihet  iitintuire.  Cic.  Phil.  2. 32— 3)  Sfcond  foumila  :  Trajroedi  (\\\ox\(\'\c,  antequam 
proriNfifient  (not  pjvnutitiaivnt),  voccm  ciibantci*  seiisim  cxciiant ;  Tra<;«'dians  every  day 
izraduHlly  rais^o  thcr  voici's  ht-fori;  tlioy  ^p»•ak  hmdly  iJ.  *'.  they  d«)  not  h|)«'ak  h)ndly  unices 
they  have  jjradnally  raised  their  voices*).  Cic.  Or.  1,'5'.>.  2')!.— Medico  (iilii^cnri  jirinsqtiam 
cohetf/r  (not  coiidtns  esf)  a'^ro  adhihCre  mcdccTnani,  consiietOdo  valentis  cof//ioscinda  est 
(I.  e.  Phys'ician-'  oui^ht  not  to  «;ive  medicine,  unless  they  know  the  constitution  ol  the 
]>atient  wlien  in  a  healtliy  stale).  lb.  Dr.  2.44,  l.'^»}.— Tenii)estas  tuintifuranfequam  furffaf, 
cnpa/if  a'ditleia  (wf<qtm'in  corrnaiit  («lot  corruTtKnt).  Sen.  Ep.  103.  — In  oinniinis  neufotiis 
jninsq'Kvn  aqqredxdn^  adhihtiida  est  prai)araiio  diligens  (.not  agyretsue  es,  from  a  double 
reason).  Cic.  OH".  1,  21. 

2.  Antequam  referring  to  defnite  time,  dependent  on  Kon-preterites. 

Oi^s.  .5.  The  temporal  relation  of  every  clanso  is  a  double  one.  1)  in  regard  to  the  time 
of  the  jjrineip.il  predieate  ;  2>  in  regard  to  the  time  of  the  speaker.  Aitteqinnn-rlanse.^ 
have  tlie  peculiarity  that  they  ^/«Y/y.*  are  fitim!K  in  regard  to  the  principal  jjredicate, 
hut  in  regard  to  tlie  speak«"r's  time,  they  may  be  either  future,  or  |)rcstnt.  or  past.  If 
they  are  i)rescnt  or  past,  the  two  temporal  relations  (»f  the  clau8>'  are  m  cohjlirt  with  each 
othi-r,  which  ac<'<>unts  for  tiie  peculiar  treatment  of  these  cIaus«'S  in  regard  lo  tense  and 
mood.  If  the  princi))al  predieate  is  a  non-puktkiutk.  th»-  mood  and  tense  of  the  predi- 
cate of  the  Antequam-clau^e  is  treated  according  to  the  followinir  rides. 

1.  If  the  principal  i)iedicate  is  in  tlie  ^^^sK^T.  the  predicate  of  the  clau.=e  is  either  in 
the  present  subjunctive,  or  in  the  present  indicative,  as  :  Hie.  iiriusquani  peteret  consul.1- 
tum.  (insanlvit) :  nunc  qtiocjue.  con>ul,  priiisQ^Kiin  casfra  fidmf  (before  seeini.'  tin*  camp) 
aut  hostem,  ?7/A<7//?7.  Li  v.  22.  .■;'.).— Omnia  fecerit  oporlei,  pri'iyqiiani'  i\\\q\\'n\  jxiafnht.  Cic. 
Phil.  7.9  2r>.— Mill!  certinn  fisf,  aiite(juam  ad  meani  deleiisionem  vfijiio,  illlus  ufi  c«»nfessi- 
OiK'.  ib.  C'a'-;.  0.  24— /V(/Cf/ enim  Chrysippo  qnum  iiiterroirCtur  '  tuia  paita  sint.  annk 
MiTLTA  '  aliquanto  »n'/*  q>unti  ad  nnilia  )ien>tii(if.  quiescere  (where  the  subjunctive  may 
be  taken  a>e  (puisi-Hihobliciue).  II).  Ac.  Pr.  2.  2".»,  93. 

2.  If  ilur  ])rincipal  predicate  is  an  actual  (or  virtual)  FUTrRE-pnESFKT  (including 
inip<-raiives),  the  jjredicate  of  the  clause  is  either  in  tlie  rnKSKNT-i.NDirATivE.  or  in  the 
rKi:sENT-srB.Ji'NCTiVK,  or  ill  then  TruK-rKUFEcr.  but  not  u\  theFfTiHE-riiESE.NT*.  The 
present  indi.  ative  is  irenerally  used  in  cKiuses  uf  this  kind  if  the  aetion  of  the  cfaiise  is 
repre-seuted  as  inivi'diatflij  iintniu'Ut.  or  a- dependent  on  the  will  of  the  speaker  :  bnt 
goiuetimes,  in  tliis  instance,  the  iire-eiit  .••■»///;"//('/i/v  occurs,  which  is  always  used  if  the 
action  of  tlie  clause  is  represented  either  as  uncertain,  or  as  an  act  prohibited  by  the  will 
of  the  speaker  unless  tlie  principal  action  takes  place.  The  fulure-peifect  is  useil  :  (a) 
If  it  is  stated  tliat  the  prineii)al  action  is  not  to  happen,  unless  the  action  of  the  clause 
has  ha])pent'd  before.  In  this  instance  the  i)rincipal  sentence  is  always  actually  or 
virtually  iie<iatir'\  0)  If  the  doer  is  represented  as  vot  to  finish  the  action  of  the  chtnse 
before  t.e  principal  action  will  happen.  In  this  instaice  the  principal  action  is  aftir- 
mativet. 

Ex. :  I)E.  Vr'iva  reitpondeo  qvam  roqo.  Ch.  Prxu^  in  emis  quam  rtndo.  pater.  Plant.  Merc. 
Z,ii.]l8.—An(eq>iain  ad  sententiam  n^/fo,  de  me  ])}U\cii  dicam.  Cic.  Cat.  4,  in,  20.— .4  r//^- 
quam  pro  L.  Miiieii:!  dicere  in-<lil'io.  j)ro  me  ipso  jjaiica  diann.  li).  Miir.  1.— C'lii  pni/<- 
gMffmde  ceteris  whu^  re^xxtdfo,  de  amicitifl. .  .pauca  dicam.  Ih.  VhU.H.  1.3.  — Anft^quatn 
de  incommodis  Siciliag  dico.  pauca  inihi  videniur  €.<>«  de  provinciie  diirnitatc  diceru/a 
(virtual  future).  lb.  Verr.  2, 1,  1.— Si  (lueuuiuain  nacttis  eris  qui  perferat.  litteras  des  (vir- 
tual future)  antequam  discedimus.   \h.  AiX.\Q,\b.—  Antequam  opprimit\\\x,ma]ov&C]\\Q 


♦  If  the  predicate  occurs  in  the  iirst  jterson  «ubjunctive  of  the  third  and  fourth  conju- 
gations, its  form  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  future-present.  Such  i)redicates  must  not 
l)e  mistaken  for  futures.  There  is  no  passage  extant,  in  classical  lauiriiaL'e.  with  a  fut- 
ure-present in  those  forms  which  are  diflerent  from  the  present  subjunctive.- In  antc- 
cla>»sical  and  pustclassical  style,  however,  future-presents  occapi(mai!y  occur,  referriuj; 
both  to  deliuite  and  indetiuite  time:  Pnii<q>iatn  istam  j)Ui:nam  puqndlx),  daboaliaiii  pug- 
nain.  Plant.  PscmkI.  1,  5,  110.  — B<tves;;/7//.s7^^/a//i  in  viam  aqt'x.  pice  liquids  corniia  inflina 
niigiiito.  Cato  H.  II.  72.— /'/i'/NV'"^"^*  messmi  pines.  i)orcam  pra?ci(laiieain  fieri  opoitet. 
lb.  131. — Pniisqiiam  porcum  feminaui  imrmilCihis,  Jano  struem  commoveto.  lb.— Quia 
criminum  mvidia  pro  reo  est,  ptiw-iquain  probabitur.  Quint.  4.  3.  6. 
t  If  ihe  principal  predicate  is  an  epistolary  perfect  or  imj)erfect,  having  the  force  of  a 
resent,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  always  in  the  imperfect  mbjunctive:  Priusquam 
d  scireni^  nihil  ausus  sum  euuicre.  Cic.  Alt.  11, 11, 2. 


I 


CLAUSES  \S'ITn  ANTEQUAM  AND   PRIUSQUAM. 


669 


ho«tium  n<-mina  obi^munt  iter,  por  \\o^...€rvmpdmvs  (virtual  f"M- ,V^-  22,50.->S'inA 

s.Vsionibus  tantum  ufaiVvrxxx  eo  tuCri  sex  le^iones  poss.s    ^l\'J'^-.-^^^--,l);'^^^^ 
anteaunm  reniat  in  P.mtum,  litteras  ad  Pcunpejum  ;/(t//fC.  lb  Agr.  2,  20.-.4/?/f^  mm  ae 
or  ec^erti"  oratorii-  c/?C(7///'v.v,  Vi^/^/^/r  dicendum  esse  de  genere  ipsTus  artis.  11).  Inv.  14.- 
K/^i  (^7/^?  oc    irculo  6Xr?'/a.s  redde  roponsuui.    Li  v.  4.5.  l2.-E.:o  enim  ;>;e.y,s<7''am  ad 
fineiiC;^^  .«.s/i.?6o.  lb.  Ac.  Pr.  2.  ^2^.-P7'iusquam  «f7.7r^^^ar  ad  causa      Cor- 

eM  ou  ddam  cl  .  commtlni  conditinne  omnium  nostrum  covwiemoravdum  ridetuj-lh 
P  H  lb'  ?  s  -  ^*  O'/am  de  repubiica  dicaw,  expouam  vobis  breviter  consilium  proleciOnis 
rneae"  i'b  Phil  1  -AddQca  n  qui  hunc  tollant,  pnusquam  turbarum  quid  Ja«a«  am- 
D  it"  PI  lu  M e'n  5  T^.-VidUamux.  prvn<qnum  agoredianmr  ad  leges  ^i"ff"l"^  Jim 
,^  tm'.im  e  leM<  ib  Le<'  2.  4.-Ante  provinciam  sibi  decreiam  a-'diet  quam  p^>tujrtt 
natiitam(iiic  u    i..  lo.  i^» .,. ^.^.  i  o i  _De  Cartha<dne  verGr    7)0n  ante  desi- 

S.,5"  lb  "    c<-  i\ll-:MH,m,n  aliqno  loco  w,.«d(ro.  neqve  lonuae  a  me,  "7"f  '™- 

vfwiiMiu  imneratoiem  iiicu>ilre  ryz/r/m  finTtum  helium  ridero.  Ln.23.  l<J.--bomaimes  ^oul 
,ej      "  >  in^n^  a  perfect  subjunctive  is  used  in  I^""^^»;';^ 

li...  I  i„  Ml.ire  nf  I  future  Derlect  even  if  the  clause  Is  not  sul)ol)lique.  as:  ^ullopacto 
^S^;i!.SSi;W^«mS:c^lir£...  Plant.  Mil.  Gl.  4,  3,.3.  ,?f  «^l^'^jl'^i^"- ^^Jl;;?;^^'^ 
elause  Wi.uld  in  an  ind.-pendent  form,  have  the  pre>ent_  indicative  it  takes  «' t^^^r  J^e 
1„     ,^yVt  s   bi   mt  v^^^  subjunctive  according  to  the  law  ol  consecution, 

^T    u.  m^S'a'li:.;;;/;.^;^'^  prU^qU  p.m^c.rW.r   Dc^abellam  ^onsulem  es.e 

j,j.Jrum  (iNi.KP.:  Priusquam  pr^Jichcor,  l^*>l^'^^-'i=l';V"A\f  V];.,dkate  of^       clause  is 
«^    If  till,  nriiieioal    oredicate     s    a  FUTtiKE-PEKPECT.  the  piedicatc  oi    liie   ii.iipe  js 
aUram  Z\\Tfuue^^^^^^^  :  Si  quid  mihi  pnas  accident  quam  hoc  t.-|ntum  nialum  n- 

d^TlV^V^V    '^^^^  dyratinm^r  a,.ieq"«m   iHornm  anc  pites  vias    n'tionesque 

;tnV/i?*Ib!on3;k-Neca4  vmenmus  quam  C.  Flammium  patres  asave- 

rint.  Liv.  23,  3. 

3.  Anteqmin  referring  to  defnite  time,  dependent  on  Preterites. 

On.,  r.  If  in  clau<e«»  of  this  kind  an  indicative  is  used  (Obs.  7).  it  isalmost  always  a  per- 
vv^T  i\?di,  at^ve    An  imV^^^^^^^^  sometimes,  but  rarely,  occurs  if  the  principal 

^""^  ''ji'PoVf/,^.^^?  i  s^;;:/'llt^  indicative  never  occurs,  because 

^.T'n'^t'c.  woti  'yiS^^^  '»'«  '>V>'«>^-^'-->'  ti"'e  i^^'.'ich  requires  a  per- 

%   n  £.    ve  ^;  "t^l^relalhm  to  the  principal  predicate  ^;^^^^:^^^r;^^:'l^:^ZA:^d 

*-iV*ie  .rwrNcTivE  i.  n.od.  .he  predicate  of  the  clatise  i»  reyntarly  Pl«ja;,;>^';;| 

siibU  nctive  of  non-r.ant!,.     In  this  instance.  Fnusqna7n.uotanf^^^^^^ 

PleiViue  infertecti  s.nt  P^u^-am  X^^^^^'^^^pr^^-^ue  quam^idlr'enf, 

;,,i.5y.«m  mamis  coJ^^e^^^^^  „{,  ^arento,  aves  nan 

a^X"^^  (Which  P-ve^^^^ 

-  *  M.7st  granim:TH^iiI7^i^.:^tli^^r7^  ^"  Autequaiu- 

Clauses,  wuich  is  crroneoua  as  f  howu  by  the  above-meuiioucd  pabtagcs. 


670 


TEMrORiVL  CLAUSES. 


Qui  tmii'f,  alternm  Ciinatuim  conflcit.  lb.  1,  ?^.— Tyrannus,  pt-iu-tqiram  a  mcdiJl  acio 
f!iiccnn'eretut\  ex.-pirilvit.  \h.^:^,m.—Pn>i^qriam  ad  ictutn  tcfl  vnnret,  capest^it  fufjam. 
Ih  2t»  40  —11  tin-  predicate  of  tlie  clause  is  the  verl)  yw.v.^^',  the  mood,  in  this  ill^t•lll«•.^  isj 
Hoitietimes»  (rarely)  foiir.d  in  ih*.-  perfect  indicafivt,  as  :  Fran  is  lil)er<>s  pnu-i  \\\a.  pnravit 
qiiam  iHi  haiic  a  naiara  proprmui  lucem  acciptre  pofue/vnf.  C'ic.  Clii.  11.  31.  1  hi«  is 
iilvvayt»  the  c.ise  if  the  perfect  tense  refers  to  indefinite  time,  depending  ou  nou-preteritei?. 
See  the  Ex.  Oiis.  4.  No.  1.  ,        .  .    ,        i      • 

'>)  If  the  action  of  th(!  clanse  (li<l  take  place,  but  the  door  if»  represented  as  havinir  on 
purimsc  roresfall^d  or  antidi>af'd  it  by  perf..rmin;:  the  principal  actK.n.  This  siilyniic- 
tive  has  Ui.-  nature  of  a  t»ubjunctive  of  intention  (virtually  suboMique),  as  :  Postnniiua 
w;-i'/.sv/'/rt;;i  uirbe)  exlret,  vcAem  Victoriie  dedicilvit.  Liv.  10.:«.— IlannibaJ  lladruniC-tuiu 
perffl -it,  omnia,  pri'isquam  ixcederet  pu-rna.  expertus.  lb.  :i0,3r>.— Fal.ius  pnuii(/>/am  ad 
coiijcctuin  teli  venlr>-f,  aut  nianun»  cnnAerevet,  et  suos  a  fuiril  ( fln-il,  et  ab  nimis  ferOci 
puMul  iK-siIs  coiuinuil.  W^.'-Xi.'i^S.—Primqnam  coinitiis  in  inseiiuentem  annum  consules 
rovare//^  Camillus  de  Latlnis  populis  ad  «Mi-ltum  reiiilit  (where  the  connection  shows 
that  Cainillus  on  purpor^e  made  his  report  Itefore  the  follo\vin«,'  election),  lb.  8, 13.  — 1  isidas 
Vri\L.<  ad  liostein  pervenlr.;  cupiCbat  quain  de  re  male  ;re-tjl  fama  ad  suos  perien^rel. 
N.  p.  Dat.  ♦>.— Xeqiie  eum  prima  opinio  fcfellit :  nam  pervCnit  (ad  ca»tra)  prummam  Pom- 

pejiis.vfAi/Irg/xw.se/'.  C:es.  B.  C.3, 47.  ,..,...  .u    ^  /    »    .,u 

Obs  8  Aside  from  these  instances,  fi/Z^er  the  perfect  indicative  or  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive is  indiscriminately  used  in  Ante(iuam-clauses  flepeiulenlon  preierite  predicates, 
a<-  Omnia  i-*ta  ante,  facta  sunt  //'/am  isle  Italiain  t^'tirjit.  Cic.  V'err.  2,  2.  «if».— \  eiii.sti 
inVtus,  qu>>d  ei,'o  pn>t.^(/'tain  Uxpii  ofpUfi.  seM^i.  Ih.  Vat.  2,4.-Qu:p  .sunt  tibi  inimicitne 
cum  CO  ciijus  piii'dia  ante  possedisii  qnani  ipsiim  co(jimb<(i.  lb.  K.  A.  50.— Crassiis,  ante- 
U'lani  no-  in  forum  ven'vnu<,  judicio  centumviraii  banc  senteiitiam  defeiidir.  Ii).(!ec. 
ly —Oh-essis.  prliiitqnam  alter  consul  adrenit,  conimt-iltus  ex  moistilxis  Samiiitiuin 
iiivecti  erant  Liv.«»,  1.3.— Equidem.  anteqwun  tuas  l^gi  littiras,  horninein  ire  ciipiebam. 
Cic  •\tt  Z  7  2— Cui  fiii  semper  amicus  u/;/e'7//am  ille  reipublic;»'boiiisqiieomnil)ns  t.im- 
auerte  e4  }'actiis  inimlcus.  lb.  Phil.  12. !).  •ri.  —  Ant>q'tani  ddectdla  t^^t  Athenu-nsium  ci  vitas 
Inc  lau(Ledicendi.  miilta  jam  memorabilia  effecerat.  lb.  Brut.  13.  4;».  But :  .\tiie.iuam  con- 
pules  in  Etniriam  prrvehlrenf,  SenOnes  Galli  multitudine  iiiirenn  ad  Clusiuin  veiienint. 
Liv  10  'Ziu—Priu-^q'Him  clamor  Otlleretur,  concurreteturqne,  piillarius  cecidit.  lb.  10.  40.— 
Prills  concuirit  Voliimnins  qumii  Appius  ad  hostem  jiervetnret  (without  havinir  the  pur- 
nose  of  otltstrippill^  Ai)pius).  H).  10,  lU.-O  solem  ii)sum  beatissimuin,  ^xm  anteqmni  se 
ahderet,  fu-ientem  vidit  Antonium.  Cic.  Phil.  14. 10,  27.  On  the  whole,  ti.e  zndiaitir^  in 
clauses  which  do  not  fall  under  the  rules  mentioned  in  Obs.  7,  is  more  fieqii.'iitly  used  t  lian 
tlie  subjunctive.  Tins  is  especially  the  case  when  the  principal  nenteiice  is  ne<,Mtive,  m 
constructions. orrespondiiii;  to  the  Emrlisli '  ;/o/. .  JUr,  '  not . .  .bfifore  \  as:  Omnes  hosten 
ter«'a  verterunt,  «'(VM^  vr'ina  fuircre  destitCrunt  //warn  ad  (lum.Mi  Hhenum  jm-renirunt 
(where,  hovvever,thereadin«,MsdoubMul).  C'jes  B.  (J.  1,  5.3.— .\>f'q«ncvere«//^'7'/a//i  Latnim 
o\x\r\M  8iit)*'nlre  :  nor d\d  they  rest  till  (Uefnrv)  ffteij  had  .<iib<lued  the  wlioie  ot  Lhiiuiu  Liv. 
^,Vi—Non  piiuA  8um  conritua  misericordiam  aliis  commovCre  qnani  nii-erico;diil  >v///t 
ip-^e  captu.^  Cic  Or  2,47. 105— AVc-ostendCrunt  bellum  ptiutt  qnani  intnlerunt.  Liv.  1,  11. 
—Nee  ante  fu«':e  fitiem  qxam  Patras  rentum  est,  fecit.  lb.  35, 2»i.— Ave  prius  seiisCre  qi/am 
eoH  \nx  oppresdt.  lb.  9.  30.— AVc /m'e  linlium  r»tq'/am  tribflnus  miliium,  <}ui<iue  ciicuiu 
eum  constiterant,  interfecti  mnt.  lb.  41,  2.— Even  if  such  Antequam-clauses  are  ^'//x///- 
liqiie,  their  predicates  are  frequently  placed  in  the  perfect  indicative,  as :  ScitOte  eqniti  iii 
Komflnum  biduo  retentiun,  n''qne  ante  dimvisntn  qnani  ad  conditiOnes  ejus  di-f)e/Jtug  est. 
Cic  V'err  2  3  21  — Oiiidam  aiictOres  sunt. .  .«^c  «/</e  ad  consules  lamam  ejus  ciadis />^/-. 
latani  qnam  in  conspectu  /"//Srt^  GallOrum  eqiiites.  Liv.  10,  vH».  Most  grammarians  (for 
instance.  Madvi<r,  Mririnir,'Kuhner)  assert  that  Antcqiiam  clauses  dep.-ndeiit  on  nei,'ative 
sentences  alway^^  have  their  predicates  in  the  indicative.  But  this  is  by  no  means  tlie 
case.  Even  in  such  constructions,  the  subjunctive  is  not  rare,  as:  ^on  />nwdestiiit 
mittere  (pmm  i)acem  cum  eis  contirmnrtt.  Liv.  45.  n.—Primqnatii  id  scirem,  tn/nl  aiisus 
sum  sumere.  Cic.  Att.  11,  11,  2.— .Vi;  concusso  quidem  motu  terr.e  tb.-airo, /////<'^cantilre 
destilit  qnam  inchoStum  altsolveret  v6txov.  Suet.  Ner.  20.  Thus  in  the  passa«>:^^C  ic.  1  ar. 
«i,  1,  quoted  Obs.  5,  2  ;  and  in  the  two  passaizcs  quoted  Obs.  G.  In  the  i)assaL'<-  Mep  Kum. 
4  {" ^on  prius  distracti  sunt  quam  alterum  anima  reliqmrit\  where  the  perlect  subjunc- 
tive stands  against  the  law  of  consecution),  the  readinj;  is  i)robabIy  corrupted. -Some- 
times the  indicative  must  be  used  to  avoid  ambi-xuity,  as  :  Prins  vriiisset  qnam  tu 
adrenisfi;  lie  would  have  come  before  you  arrived.  Plant.  Ep.  5,  1.22.  Here  aUvenirta 
would  represent  the  action  as  hypotlietical,  like  that  of  the  principal  sentence. 

Obs  9.  Very  ranly*  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  occurs  in  Anle.iuam-clauses  it  is 
found  :  1)  sometimes  in  attriV.iiiive  Antequam-clituses,  and  in  those  refernni;  to  indefinito 
""•  Mosr^raminarians  assert  (rather  boldly)  that  t\\v.  pln})€rfed  oubjunctire  is  one  of  tlio 
'regular  tenses  after  antequam  and  priaaquam,  and  occurs  inxyrefrtquentUj  than  the  per- 
fect indicative  (I). 


DUM-CLAUSES   AND  EQUIVALENTS. 


671 


time,  if  dependent  on  p^terit^  [^S^JJ^.rSs^^nff^e^o^e^^f^^lulllSI^^^^^Snnc^ 
fewpassa-es  ol  t'li^P"^'*'""^^"^  ^^^'^j;^,  f.^"^^^^^^  d.^  meo  adventu  andlre 

tive,  accord  ng  to  Obs.  7,  ^«- "^' «^;  .,^;^'^?'Slc  4     98  -Ende  Serapion  cum  epistoia 
potuissent,  in    Maced..niam    l?*"7,'^^•^A^„:\'i"^^^^  eo  scripsi^se  antea  (Cicero,  on 

Venit,  q»''nW>n''-^'7''«'/^«F7*ff '  ^^^^^^^^  told  Serapion  what  is  stated  by  him). 

v''Kri(;^'7r''3?r;raewp'^^^ 

1).  Att.  10, 17. 1.-3)  in  tiicw  P   ■   '>,\'^'   ^^^.  ^  ,„,^    ^„,„  „,,,,^,.  „„..  mortua  est  nuam  tu  na- 


\ 


ccppturosl^Unm  quam  etc:  Indkp.  :  non  «"f «'  ^  J'^f;  V-","*/,"  9^  may  take  a 

/ira  m.y  al™  occur,  accordii,«  lo  r  ile  P-l'^^'^j;,- f,^\V%'X,,„„  i„.r  nt.  in  Banc  reipn- 
lire  woNlcl  have  bevn  used,  «>:  D'f  '  ">^- J'^l  Se  voV  vchcm  popuhim  solli- 

pendent  on  a,l/e  qmim  ..r  pnuo  '''"""  "'Jli'"!,""  ;\'<,i'^o;„s^S"e"'  ^  pnuoq'mm  «rbs 
iint.  ncsant  .e  Indc  ;«■<««  '/'.';""«".'''„  "'^,  ''  fdlV  S    rdcpR-t,!.™/ es.c'  ...que  ad 

Ml  lie  iM>nd(i  claris-atio  cjsot,  nee  ''''''««""'** ''^^^"'^ii.Vu  _Ariii;1ti  uuUum  aide 
mSu  pugni  «;/am  «wrtento  fccSruut  (  =  aulcquam  ,mrere,Uur).  lb.  21,  U. 

IV  Temporal  clauses  with  dtim,  donee,  quoad,  axd  qitmndiii. 

8622.  />,«,  if  used  as  a  synonym  of  ?««m  ^v-ith  the  subjunclh-e  in 
the  temporal  meanins  '«/«fc'.  generally  requires  the  predicate  of  the 
clause  to  be  in  the  puks.nt  indicative  (0ns.  2-5).--D«»,  ^^f  •  ^;"^^- 
.nnd  guamdi,,,  if  used  in  the  meaning '«^  '"«?  «.',  gener.a  ly  have  the 
predicates  of  their  clauses  in  the  indicative,  the  tei.se  being  different 

CO  dilg  to  the  general  rules  on  tenses  (Obs.  6  f.,ll.).-i^»»,  .-<^,  -d 
aonec.  if  used  in  .he  meaning  W«'.take  tho.r  l-"f;''>'  '"J,^^ 
INDICATIVE,  and  partly  in  the  suejcnctivb,  according  lo  the  special 

•  "o»I  ["r'^rdmlremtcanin.»  in  whict.  *™  (;™Poral)  occu;. 


672 


TEMrORAL  CLAUSES. 


DUM-CLAUSES   AND   EQUIVALENTS. 


673 


fXfcpii^Jquamadvmf,  or  donee  «luvi)  pe,rernt)^  ''^^Tn'^^i   o    i  ,1    n7e    ^e;»  e4 

iii/dfruzi^^  --^F^-%vf  HAH  ^^^^-  """'""'= 

Durn  moliu/dur,  dum  coinunlur  annus  tsL  ler.  lleaiit.  A  A  lu. 

1    DuM  as  a  Si/nomjm  of  quum  (while). 
Ob^  «>    If  the  PI inrioMl  pmlicate  is  a  pkesknt  or  future,  the  c«"J"nc/\?"  ' ^f  j^f,'.?.^ 

qu.,  d'un  certa  et  pauca  et  nui^.m  '//j  <"'  ;.  'f «J/Jj^r  '^.010,1,^  hLi^S     0.1  acccperint, 
niKMiflv  such  futures»  occur  111  ante(hi!«.-ual  bivie,  as  .  v^uou  ok.»,  ru  . ...  i 

3    /fofeam  ^S  in  modio.  .iu^ailo.  .e«iertii  .eiui..e«  Uahuniur.  Ca.o  It  U.  Uo. 
no.   -^    ir  H.onnnrinal  Dredicatc  is  a  preteuite,  the  Dum-chmsc  may  frequently  be 

p.  ws.  UBS.  J),  oui  iH'i,  "  "  "^  '  ,.     .    „f  thP  eliuxe  re<Milarlv  is   n  the />m>v/»'  indicntire, 
!',r"  m";";  \Y  ^"f  ;«..VqnVv  Mii'enn»  ;;  pp'ilS.nr,  prima  n„c,;  u  ,u.,ri,  .^re«.  e,c 


— Sometimi 

con..   toaill,m.fe'rf,  </"/«  lu  accusauoncni  comparires.  (.  c.  Mur  24  4.. 

yECT  INDICATIVE  '"«^ead  ol  u  th  •  /J/t^  «^  i  , Vent  ,V  imperJltor  ^m^  aitercatio  w7a  >^st. 

dered  by  iookint?  at  the  j:<>''"*'Ction.  -       .    (..     v^..^  35  7.):  Apud  Xenophontom 

+  Peculiar  I.  tlie  use  of  d;/m  with  a^^^^  ^^^l  ,„|.  „„iu,m 

morieiis  Cyrus  hiecdicit:  ^"'J!,^  "  '/'^'J^"  "\* '  For  vou  .«'i  not  ^ee 


Dam^lnnoes  to  "ivfi  to  them  the  force  of  certain  Postquam-clansef»  with  the  pluperfect 
(If  A'l  Or-  4  Ih-  />wm  in  unam  partem oculosanimosque  hostmm  certamenarerfora/, 
phiribus  locis  Hcalis  capitur  murus.  Liv.  32.  24.  Probably  this  i«  the  ouly  passage  pc- 
curm"  in  good  proge.  in  which  dum  is  thus  "^ed  with  a  pluperfect.  Perhaps  Livy 
wrote 'atv/y^T^r  according  to  the  usage  mentioned  No.  4.  bometime?,  in  the  writers 
of  h.-  silver  a«^e,  dum  is  used  in  the  same  meaning  with  a  presmt  indicative,  as  :  Quod 
ace  itinihi^/'7/A  c<.rrupturadicendi  genu»  revocare  ad  sevenOra  judicia  con^^.^rfo  (  m 
S.iU/Vc.of  myeliorrstorecair;  the  connection  showing  hat  'J^^f^-^J^l'^^f^.'^ 
meant  to  have  this  force,  and  not  the  meaning  'while').  Quint.  10, 1, 125.-4)  The  histo- 
rian- not  rarelv  usec/«miuthe  meaning 'M'Ai/e' with  the  sub-tunctive  imperfect  in 
l^V^^n'^^^lJ^V^^^^^  by  the  Dum-clause  the  motive  of  the  main  action,  or 

'  THE  lu.  IT  time  '  for  performing  the  principal  action.  To  express  such  pregnant  mean- 
in."  i  Kn-lish,  the  passage  must  be  generally  recast  as  :  /?.y/i  intentus  111  eum  se  rex 
toTusamtere^  alter  da.aiu  sectlrim  in  caput  dejtcit  ;  While  the  kingV  mind  was  wholly 
en' "i-ed  with  him,  the  other  ^viade  use  of  this  opportunity '  to  strike  his  head  with  the  axe, 
L  ivl  40  -^o^te8.  dum,  pnedte  magis  quam  pugme  memores,  tet-erent  tempus,  triam 
K.)inani  con.d()bati  ad  pnetorium /-^t/^wnj;  (The  tiiarii  made  use  of  the  enemy's  negh- 
iece  to  return  etc  ).  lb.  2,  47.-PeIopida8  vallum  incendit,  dumgue  ignibus  subrmveren- 
^ur  (Where  the  vulgate  reading,  acc.rding  to  a  bad  conjecture,  has  submxyventur  )  hos- 
ted pse  mivium  s>rperavit  (PeTop.  made  use  of  the  time  while  the  enemy  was  kept  back 
bv  the  fire,  to  cross  the  river).  F.ont.  Strat.  1, 5, ^i.-IJum  ea  in  Samnio  gererentur  liom^- 
nis  in  Etruria  interim  bellum  ingens  concitur  i^hQ  Etrurians  made  use  of  the  time 
while  the  Komans  were  engaged  in  the  Samnite  war,  to  raise  an  enormous  war  against 
the  n)  Liv  10  1^ -Rex.  quatuor  millia  armatorum,  dnm  recens  terror  esset,  Sotflsam 
fS  (he  made  use  of  the  time  while  the  fright  was  yet  fresh  in  their  memory,  to  send 
a  pHrty  for  the  capture  of  Sotusa).  Ib.30,9.-So,  when  the  I)um-clause_  denotes  the 
mStive  or  aim  of  the  main  action  (dmn  =  vt  interea) :  Perseus,  d«m /rwar6^_ res,  lega 
tos  Koniam  ad  aniicitiam  p:iterna.a  reservandam  wisit  (=  ut  mterea  Jirmxire  posset). 
Uv  4  58  -51  Later  writers,  and  poets  for  the  sake  of  the  metrum,  frequently  u^e  dum 
(while)'with  the  eubjunctive  with<.ut  any  particular  point,  when  in  good  prose,  either 
«^  mwitl  ail  imperfect  suDjunctive,  or  dum  witii  a  present  indicative  would  be  used, 
Ks  :  Pvrrhus  in  Gfseciam  regressus,  dum  Argos  oppugnaret,  ictu  tegulae  prostratus  est. 
Aur.Vict.;i-),10*.  ^.,  _  -  ^. 

Obs.  5.  Frequently  dum  is  used  as  a  synonym  of  quum  (while)  to  express  relations 

not  purely  temporal  :  .  ^  j,  a-      *    w» 

1.  T<.  denote  an  action  which  in  the  principal  sentence  is  .represented  according  to  its 
Pisrniticanceand  import,  </'/m  being  rendered  by  w/nle,  when,  in  as  much  of,  by  with  a  parti- 
cipial Ues^^^^^^^  this  relation  («.37,  OBS.2).  Such  Dura-clauses  have 
th  .  r  p.  "iica les  in  the  indicative,  the  tense  bein-  either  the  same  as  that  of  the  principa 
fe  liute  orinthe  present  indicative,  as  in  strictly  temporal  clauses,  as:  Dum  Aristo 
c^  I'vrrho  in  V  rtnte  'sic  <.m..ia  esse  vf^uPruut  ut  cam  rerum  selectiOne  e.xspoliarent,  yir- 
tQtem  ipsam^XA-r///./ ;  w/dle  (when)  Ari-to  and  Pyrrho  held  the  .opinion  (or 'Aristo 
etc  6// /SnVlhe  opinion',  or  'i/»  as  much  as  they  held  the  opinion ').  they  destroyed 
Jhe  Ve?v  idci  of  Virtue'.  Cic.  Fin.  2. 13.-/^«m  ilia  traddbam,  qwA^ijovebam  dolOres  meos. 
lb  At  12  18  1-Neminem  tequiOrem  reperiet  quam  me,  cm,  dum  se  civibus  impiis 
jLm  «  A/V  iiimlcus  «luam  amicus  esse  r««^/i/.  lb.  Phil.  5,  ^«.-T-aweor  erat  hostium 
S4  <7////  ab  n^^^^^^  multitiKline  Ireti,  sntisidia  mitfunt  ad  castra  oppugnanda.  Liv.  2, 
4V-I  Si  1)  m  c  auses  are  subol.lique.  they  have  their  predicates  in  the  subjnnc  ive 
wi^h  enses  ac^rd  ng  to  the  L-enenil  rules,  as  :  DUisfi,  dum  Plancii  in  me  meritum 
lrMl^::^l^r^^  mcere  e  cloaca.  Cic.  ^'«"c.  40,95  -P«r^;.d.,m  t.b.  roganti  voluertm 
<il>,ii.niii   ine  iniDrudeiitiam  susctpisse  (see.  p.  41^,  rso.  .J).lb.  urin.  «1,  -i.«5. 

rF  e;    e.     y  tl  e  ac    on  of  th "principal  sentence  is  represented  as  a  consequence  of 

an  acti''    of  the  K.me  doer,  designated  by  the  Dum-clause,  in  ^yhlch  instance  the  predi- 

?  te  of  the  Di    i-clause  is  an  equivalent  of  an  ablative  gerundial,  and  may  be  rendered 

v  a  part  cip    1  after  ^by\    The  predicates  of  such  clauses  are  either  in  the  present 

InV.c-atIve!  or  in  the  PERFECT  indicative,  as:  Hoc  loco  nimium  oy>ene  consumttur  a 

nhri^es  the  adverb  yvu  by  ' du?n  eram  robiscum\  giving  to  eram  the  force  of  a  present 
Krinc  pal  pr'u^^^  Greek  *«pareUikewise  referring  to  a  time  present 

II;  theVpiSker  '  XJm  sum  vobiscum '  would  Represent  the  imperfect  videbalis  as  a  real 

^'^*^Pecuiiar  is  the  (very  rare)  use  of  a  pluperfect  snhjunctire  after  dum,  in  place  of  quum 
wMh  r,tpe  feet  sibju^c.ivJ,  as :  Dun  ((he  rea.iing  '.^'1""^  I  ,^/,/"7,^,  amid'eoTi>ci^ 
al  quot  spectatis  paribus  affectos  dimisisset,  conciOne  inde  adyocata  t  f  f  P"^^"*  'J^J 
?  H^"ertu?.  Liv.  21!  43.    This  use  of  ^a,n  seenis  to  have  ^««n  .oW^vto^,  and  to  have  crept 
inadvertently  into  the  passage.  So  in  Hut.  B.  Afr.  bl  ,  ib.  88  ,  B.  Hisp.  -w. 


674 


TEMPORAL  CLAUSES. 


Stoici 
is  coil 

I 
l> 


.  dum  morho  corpornm  rornparalvr  morhnrnm  ammi  .imilitm  o  j  Too  much    ime 

obseq.or  his  a.l<>l;'-ennbns   ui,.  e^j^M^.^^^^^^^^^^^  ^-.^,,  aflVnltur,  ante 

sciu-m  esse  s^nn  of>ntnA    lb.  or.*.  4.     V"';; // /,    Vpit  2  2  ;w  — Sucli  daiises  are  .-ft  en 
honnn  tortiam  noetic  de  foro  'i^"  ^' ;f  f'^^^"  l^i!,^   //^^^^^^^  hahfre  parata 

equivalent  to  an  adversative  .^'•''"l'';;     *  "' "",-,^,'^;„^^^^^  i,/;r^?/=  Caesar,  wlule  wish- 

injr  that  others  should  have  a  rca<ly  majenal    o  c^^^^^^     r^ Brut  75  -mi  -Most  frequently 
vvritini?  (or  :  C«-sar  wi>hed  etc.,  '^^ '''' 'J,^,^^"/;^^^^^^^^  same  d„or,  the  ,,r\ncii.al 

.uch  Dum-clauses(ienotea_^^7H'«/^o^.    «^«-^^  of  Ihe  .ioer, 


llorteusii  consilio.  qui,  <Vim  reiyix  tsi  ,.c  ^  ''"^'^,;'  ':-'  i"    .  .j  _itn  \/wm 

nail  iiiud.  slJtius  esse  ilium  in  /"^«-^reiinqtn  ^:}'-;;;,;;^;;,^^^  ^;^;.^:;;^:,,^^;^'^; 

[iissimiUinius.  lb.  I^nit.  81,  <2Hi.-r»m  c  uuis  >  ii  «  .nnnrioia  Veneris 


lique,  it  is  eith.r  placed  m  »»»^ y>f  :^  ^,  .;'  ^^^  ,.  c(  nstituHmus.  omn.-m 

reqiiiredbv  the  law  o!  consecution:  J"*»!' r,'.  '^;, ,,  ./:'VV/»7;  Jes-e  awUoo'O'^.  Cic.Clu. 
ntilitfltem  nos  hujus  interdict..  <^'^''Jf!0  /  l;''^4i8  No  sVdicVVr^^^^^  a  me  ...v. 
ll.-lloc  vero  dico  ./.m  brenu-r  ^^^^0^^^^^^^^^^  JitSion:  KHiqunm  est  j.t  ubi  nunc 

S'!l";^S;n;i  s:n;is  i;>lias  quam:l^m  illatn  vetereu.  ..nCnnur,  .imus  in  null.,  lb. 
Fam.  y,  ••>,  3.  , 

2    Dum,  and  its  synonym^,  in  the  meaning  '  as  long  as. 


Clauses  is  regularly  tne  'N»  ^■;^'^\ >.  ,         ;;-,;;  ^,  ^  „„n-j.reterite,  or  a  preterite.    Not 
tnilly  treated  accordinuMis  the  pnntipaiprtmuu^^  >  ^ndetic  antecedent  tarn- 

onl/r/^/amrfi^/,  but  also  dnm  «P<»  ^''-y'^ Jren  ^^^^^  ^.,„,j,„,,. 

^i^/,  fn  which  instance  Q''<pndiu  '^'^'^'^J'''^^^^^^^^^  tantumvmin,  tantl<per, 

XrS  i^o^!''^^'^  :^;;ri?^;;Sints  orten  ^and  always  m  have  a  re- 
stHctlve  niennins  (  =  only  fO  long  os). 


DUM-CLAUSES  AND  EQUIVALENTS. 


675 


ITE  principal  predicates,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  almost  always  in  the  same  tense 
as  the  principal  |)ndicate,  so  that  a  principal  predicate  in  the  present  requires  the  pred- 
icate of  the  Dnm-clause  in  the  present  indicative.— Hence,  if  the  principal  predicsne  's 
in  the  future-present,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  must  be  in  the  future-present,  and  not 
in  the  future-perfert  *,  as  in  other  temporal  clauses,  and  in  conditional  clans»  s.  Ex.:  Eo 
ma"is  n-spublica,  dum  per  deos  immurtMlIs  licet,  I'rui  debet  suinmi  viri  vita  atque  virtOte. 
Cic  L  M  20  W.).—Ihim  xSmor  abeKt  (as  long  as  there  is  no  fear),  a  te  non  discMit  aud.icia. 
lb  Phil  2  :^H  —Dum  ixttestift,  dum  licft,  jrrovidete  ne  duriOrem  conditiOnt-m  statuatis 
orilini  vestro  quam  f.-rre  possit.  lb.  Kab.  Post,  fi.— /)wm  istis  consiliis  uferii>,  non  potes 
cs<«'  diutunius.  lb.  Phil.  2.  AA.—Dum  genus  hominum,  dum  P.  R.  nomen  exftabif.  tua  ilia 
pe«tifera  secfssio  nominabitur.  lb.  2.'il.  —  Dum  vos  de  vobis  aliquid  titnebifis,  illi  num- 
quam  de  se  pertimef<cenf.  lb.  Sest.  43,94.— Nee  enim  dum  era,  angar  ulia  re,  quum  omni 
vacem  cnlnA.  lb.  Fam.  fi.  3,  4.~/;/m  Latlne  loqnentur  litterae,  qnercus  huic  loco  non 
dttiV  quie  Mariana  diciltur.  lb.  Leg.  1. 1.  See  Cic.  H.  A.  32.  91  ;  Off.  2, 8. 29 :  Tu.c  1,31 ; 
Plant.  Pseud.  IJi.—Di'ice^  a  prlncipe  hujus  teintis  philosophuruni  quamdiu  roles  ;  tamdiu 
autem  velle  f/<?/>t6tX  yj/oaof  te,  quantum  proficias,  non  ])o>)iitebif.  Cic.  Off.  1, 1.— Ipse  me 

t : iA^,.r.,-,r^-,    nt^lifum   /mt.\    iiir/i^rifAf     lilininllflni    XHm.    eTCU.'iafuri 


sed  Ita  quoad  statum  suum  retinet.  Cic.  Kep.  2.  23.— Ti.  Gracchus  iamdiu  kwdafntur 
dum  memoria  rerum  Roinaii5rum  mambit.  lb.  Off.  2,12.— Eas  litteras  quum  lego,  minus 
mihi  tiirpis  rideor,  sed  tamdiu  dum  leqo.  lb.  Att.  9. 6.— Bajse  nostra}  tamdiu  dum  tn  ades, 
/f7/;/M)blTue  (  =  immemores)  sui.  lb.  Kam.  9, 12. 1.— Kgo  tamdiu  requi^-sco  quamdiu  m\t, 
ad  te  j«m«w,  ant  tuas  litteras  leqo.  \h.\)A,\.-quamdiu  hi  censOres  magistrStum  ^a/.<?. 
bunt  indil.-ctu  prodlbis?  Liv.4J,  14.— Sometimes  the  clause  takes  it<  predicate  in  the 
future  if  the  principal  predicate  is  in  the  present,  but  is  a  future  in  sense,  as  :  Dum  hwc 
de  Oi)i)ianico  con sf dbu n t.  qiin\  ext  quod  hunc  innocentem  opjwvnere  posse  rideatur  ? 
{  =  nihil  eum  opprimere  poterit).  C\c.C\\\.AA.— Quamdiu  inter  mortaies  en/,  nihil  ex 
d«mio  sua  niortale  esse  ^ew/ia/.  Sen.  Cons.  Pol.  31.  ,  ,,     .  i  •  ,   -,.         aa 

If  the  clau^jc  is  s»bob'ique.  it  either  retains  the  indicative  and  the  tense  which  it  would 
have  in  the  ordinary  constniction,  or  it  is  placed  in  the  subjunctire  with  a  tense  acconiing 
to  tlie  law  of  consecution,  as:  Nee  mihi  hunc  errOrem.  dum  nw,  extoiqueri  volo.  Cic 
Sen  2:i,  85.-.Egroto,  dum  anima  est,  sjyes  esse  dicitur.  lb.  Att.  9,  lO.-Quare  ut  ^d  quoad 
liceW,  id  est  quoad  ^cies  ubi  slinus,  quam  sa'pissime  facias,  te  rehemeuter  ro<to.  lb.  Att 
10  4  1  — But-  Dixi,  te  quoad  metueres,  omnia  pronmsiirum  (indep.:  promittes  quoad 
m'r(ue^)  lb  Phil.  2.  35.— 'I'e  a  Sc:evoia  petisse  dicis  ^<^  dum  tu  abesses,_  livovinnaepneesset 
(INOKP  •  pnre^to  provincite  dum  ego  absum).  lb.  Fam.:i,5,5.-Prusias  pruht.'b5iur  se 
cum  Konnlnis,  quoad  helium  fo?-et.  stalfuvm.  Liv.  44. 14.-Cui  cohortls  traderes,  ut  dum 
tempusanni  edet  idoneuni.  aii.iuid  negotii  gerere  jwssem  (indep  :  aliquid  geravi  dum 
ten.pus.n/.idoneum).  lb,  :3.  6,5.-Z^«'m  in  ffistlvis  nos  essemus.\\\mxi  p.ieris  locum  f>\^e 
l^llissimuj/i  dujimus  (indep.:  Locus  bellis>imus  erit  dum  in  aistlyis  e77/?<//^^).  lb.  Att.  5, 
IT  Com p  Liv  4.5.14.-SO  in  the  case  of  attraction,  when  the  princip:«l  sentx-nce  is  a 
livp-.theiical  pluperfect,  where  both  the  mood  and  the  tense  are  attracted  by  the  pluper- 
fect subiunctive  as:  ;Susfi,rui.<set  hoc  crimen  ipse  ille  latrOnum  occultator  locus,  </wm 
iiequemutasolitildoi;*^im>^e/,ne(,weaeca  nox  o.^fendisset  Milonem  (independent  of 
CONDITION  :  ^ustinebit  dum  ueque  muta  solilQdo  indicabit,  ueque  ca;ca  uv^oslendet).  lb. 
Mil.  19.50.  ,      ^ 

Ob«  9  Non-preterite  clauses  with  dum  and  quoad  (not  with  qimmdiu)  in  the  meaning 
'aslo'nn'a'^\  take  the  si-bjunctive  if  the  clause  is  represented  a^  lacking  reality,  or  as 
heim/ i^JW^  the  ,.rincipal  sentence  being  ne-.-ative,  as  :  .Y^  tamdiu  quidem  dominus 
("'  vo/mn)  ;h>.  dull  ex  eis  de  patris  morte  qu^iratur?  Shall  he  ""^^^n  so  long  be 
the  nviMerof  the  ^laves  as  thev  are  examined  on  the  death  of  his  hither  i  Cic  «•  A.  28, 
78  T  le  eTHminati(.n  of  the  slaves  did  r.ot  tak.^  place,  being  m  vain  demanded  by  the 
defender     The  in  iicative  Uju<,rMnr'  would  repre.sent  the  action  as  one  which  wil    cer- 

il";  occur  in  the  fuu.re.-if  the  predicate  is  in  the  ^^^cond  person  ;;>n^j;l-^'J\  ^  in- 
(U-nniie  mcaniii".  it  mu-f  be  in  the  subjunctive  accordimr  to  tt  e  rule  p.  3.9.  Obs.  .\.  al^ . 
T-  n  !  u  discendun  est^,/o  uescias;  You  (we)  must  learn  as  long  as  yoii  (we)  are  igno- 

ra1."  of  anrth°nrSen.  Ep.  7>i.-m  anteclassicul  language,  tlie  present  subjunctive  some- 

*  In  the  passa-e  Sail.  Jus.  110  {quoad  vices,  numquam  tibi  redditam  gratiam  putaveris\ 
the  i  dpal  prJdicat^  pular.risX^  a  perfect  subjunctive  with  imperative  f^r^e-.f  cord- 
i  -  on  383,  OBS.  5.  and  not  a  future-perfect,  as  some  -rammarians  state.  But  "  ^>l>er 
I  rtinit'v  u  future:perfect  sometimes  occurs  when  the  P''"^!P=^l  ir'^/i^n.Tn  ^  nJ.^,S 
futun -pre'ent.  as  :  Quamdiu  fuertt  nllus  litteris  honor,  quamdiu  stetent  Latin*  lingu» 
potenlia,  vigebit  cum  maximis  viris.  Sen.  Cons.  Pol.  21. 


I 


67G 


TEMPOEAL  CLAUSES. 


DUM-CLAUSES   AND   EQUIVALENTS. 


677 


times  ocrnrs  in  place  of  a  fiitnre-prosicnt,  as  :  Pnm  tn  llli,  quod  edat  ct  quod  potct  pra- 
beas,  iiuniqiiam  odt-pol  ftKjitt.  IMuut.  Men.  1, 1.  U. 

Obs.  10.  If  the  principal  predicate  is*  a  pbetekite,  clauses  with  tamdlu. .  .quamdiu 
require  tin;  prtdicates  ui  l)otli  propos^ition^*  to  be  iu  the  perfect  indicative  (see  p.  32i, 
R.  (il,  Obs.  2i.  clautics  with  d>nn  and  qimid  (in  the  nicaiiini,'  ' n.^  fon(/  fui")  generally  have 
thtnr  predicates  iu  the  indicativk  (f^ce  Ob».  1-2),  the  ten^e  bein;;  either  the  i'kkkect, 
or  the  IMPERFECT.  If  tiie  principal  predicate  is»  in  thi:  itnptrjecf,  the  clan>e  (in  irood 
prose*)  lakes  the  same  tense  ;  but  if  the  principal  predicate  is  in  the  )>er/tct  (or  plii|)er- 
fect),  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  tither  in  the  perfect  or  in  the  imperfect,  according  to 
the  special  rules  p.  32-2.  foil.,  Obs.  3-5  ;  p.  32:^,  Ji.  Hi  ;  p.  324,  Obs.  1-3.  To  the  pa^sase8 
quoted  there,  the  followini,'  may  he  added  :  JMuit,  quoiul  rixi/,  se  nocuis?e  reipublicje. 
Cic.  Leir.  3.  Iti.— Fasces  laurejltos  (tmii  quoad  tcneiidos  pu/dri.  II),  Lii:,  3,  7,— Massiiien-es, 
guodd  Ticifxit,  . ,  .circumvenire  n()^tros  contemiebanf.  Cas.  IJ.  C.  1.  bs.—  Qumd  mecum  rex 
yV/i/,  perbOuo  loco  res  era/.  Cic.  Atl.(i,  1,3. -Dionysius  </<//«  imperium  perpetuum  «/Mt///t< 
munlre.  nullliis  pepercit  vit;e  quern  ejus  insidialGrem  piitilret,  Nep.  Ke<,'.  2.  — />*'<//<  ves- 
tris  viribu!"  rtstWutis,  pacis  numquan»  ajmd  v»)s  mentiOuem  ./Vet.  Liv. -^1.13 — iJnm 
necesse  eral,  resiiue  ip-a  axiZhat.  unus  omnia  fxjUntf.  Cic.  U.  A.  4S.— '"> ft r/iul a Uif  occisio 
in  se  unum  vertendie  ^'lurije  dum  le^'cr  colleira  eraf.  Liv.  21,  53  — Macedoues  if/<qi/t  duin 
ordines  et  velut  stipAta  phahinx  constdbaf,  movCri  nequiverunt,  lb.  3-3, 18.— Nequ.-  diulius 
quam  dmn  recens  tral,  quajstio  vi'/ait.  lb.  J».  2«).— Dionysit»,  dum  eji-timaham  va^os  nos 
fore,  itolui  molestus  esse.  Cic.  Atf.  7,  2«».  Tlie  j)rincipai  predicat' may  be  a  parCiciple^ 
as  :  Susce[)tum  l)ellumest  quie-cente  me,  depulsum  ex  Iialijl.  inuiKiite  u\e  <{uoad pofui  lb. 
Fam.H,ri,rit.— If  the  clause- are  sUBoBLi(iUE,  I  hey  may  eitiier  retain  their  indicative  tenses, 

or  may  be  in  tlie  subjunctive  with  tenses  according  to  the  rules  on  consecuiion,  as  :  An 
censes,  dnrn  ilia  riqueiuu/,  non  eosdem  gradus  oratorum  vnlgi  judicio  et  dodoruin 
fiiisse?  Cic.  Brui.  50,"  lS»i. -Prudeiiti^sima  civitas  Alheniensinm,  dmn  ea  rcrum  jM^nfu  e^f, 
fuirse  traditur.  lb.  H.  A.  25.  — Fateiliur  se  privA'um  pnedouiiin  duces  vivos  d  nii  fum 
iittqite  dum  per  me  licueril,  retinuisse  (ind.  :  rttinuit  dum  lUuif.  ace. 'to  p.  418,  No.  3).  lb. 
Verr.  2, 1, 5.  — Pnesertim  quum  sim  conscius  me,  quoad  licuerit,  di-rnitJlii  reipublicie  con- 
guluisse.  lb.  Fam.  6. 21, 1.  U.ni>. : ivitsalui  quoad Ucuif,  p. 4.8).  Cp.  Cajs.  B,  C.  2, 2u;  Liv.  2G,  51. 

Obs.  11.  liJirely  the  present  indicative  is  used  in  the  clause  if  dum  denotes  'as  long 
as' (never  with  quoad  or  quamdiu).  Sach  present  indicatives  mii^t  be  c«msidered  as 
historical  presents,  and  hence  mostly  occur  when  the  iirincipal  predicate  is  an  hi-torical 
present,  as  :  /Jum.  aviditilte  certamiius  provecti,  extra  muniiiOnes  purjnaut  (as  long  as 
tliey  were  lighting),  hand  paullo  superior  e.'<t  Homanus  ndles,  (sedt  pofiKjuatn  etc.  Liv. 
32  12,  But  They  also  occur  when  the  principal  predicate  is  a  pnttiife,  as  :  J)um  ego  in 
Sicilia  mm  (as  long  as  I  was  in  Sicily),  nulla  rtatua  dejecta  e^t,  postquam  discessi  etc. 
Cic.  Verr.  2,  2. «>').— Tantum  ibi  moriius,  dum  milites  ad  pnedam  dUfCununt.  Liv.  27,  42. 
See  the  examples  p.  323,  Ubs.  4. 

Obs.  12.  In  clauses  with  (i<//n  (in  the  meaning  '  a-'^  lonri  o-f")  the  sfB.?i:NrTivE  imper- 
FECT  is  used  1)  a-«  subjunctive  of  non-rcal'dij,  as  :  Secundum  /V/^m/'  (it  would  have  been 
next  best)  dum.  lu-ertt,  ablre.  Liv.  42.  4H.-2)  If  the  principal  action,  according  to  the 
intention  of  the  doer,  is  to  last  up  to  the  end  of  the  space  expresh«'rt  l>y  the  predicate  of 
the  clause,  the  tiuie  of  this  endpoint  being  as  yet  uncertain  at  the  time  of  the  principal 
predicate.  Such  clauses  may  always  be  changed  into  clauses  introduced  by  till  if  the 
imperfect  is  turned  into  an  English  pluperfect' or  into  a  verl)  denoting  the  endpoint  of 
the  action  (Com)».  (Jeil.N.  A.ti,  21),  as  :  Dum  is  ibi  helium  gerent.  Cornelio  proroi:atnr 
imperiun»  (Tlie  command  of  Cornelius  was  continued  as  long  as  the  war  would  last,  or 
'tilKhe  icar  ivouldbetitded').  Liv.  41,  21,— Hi  laniiim  temporis  retenii  dum  erfionrrent 
quantie  regiie  copiie  luissent  (as  hmg  as  ihey  were  explaining,  or '  till  thoj  hadtJ'plained  ). 
lb.  45,  2.-Oioandcs  tanrum  moriltns  f/^/m  pecunia  de/erritur  {a^  long  as  it  took  to  de- 
liver the  money).  lb.  45.  »>.— Ob^idio  tleinde  per  paucos  dies  magis  (piam  oppuirnatio 
fuit  dum  vulnus  duels  ruraretur  (as  long  as  the  wound  of  the  commander  would  l)e  heal- 
ing, or  •  ti/l  the  wound  had  hniled  ').  lb.  21, 8  —Die  inseqnenii  (jnievere  dum  pru'lectus  ju- 
ventfltem  Apolioniatiuin  inspicertl  (as  long  as  the  inspection  would  last,  or  *  till  (he  troops 
had  been  iiuipected  ).  lb.  24,  40. 

Obs.  13.  From  the  potential  meaning  of  Dum-clanses  with  a  subjunctive  (Obs.  9)  has 
arisen  the  veMrictive  n^e.  of  dum  in  the  me.n\\uv^ 'if  but  \' provided  that  only\    The 

♦  Rarely,  in  anteclassical  language,'  the  Dum-clause  hs^  a  perfect  when  the  principal 
sentence  iias  an  imperlect,  as  in   I  er.  Ileaut.  5,  2,  34.  ▼ 

t  in  the  lollowiuur  passage  all  the  three  conjunctions  dum.  mioad.  and  donee  occur  in 
the  meaning  •  (Vi  /unq  (U<\  the  same  idea  t)eing  also  expres>ed  by  an  ablative  absolute: 
Egregium  vita  lamaque  Tiberii  quoad  privStus  vel  in  imperils  sub  Augiisto  fuit ;  occul- 
tum  ac  subdolum  t/o/ze'c  Germaiiicus  ac  Drusus  superfutre  ;  idem  inter  bona  malaqiie 
mixtus,  incolumi  inatie;  intestabilis  siEViliarfam  Sejinum  dilexit  timuitve.  Tac.  A.  6,5L 


predicate  of  such  a  clause  is  represented  as  a  fart  which,  according  to  the  idea  of  the 
speaker  or  doer,  mu^t  coincide  with  the  principal  acticm  in  order  to  remove  his  objec- 
tions a"ainst  the  latter.   It  implies  the  \(\v&'AsUmq  as  the  acti.m  of  the  clause  coexists 
with  the  principal  action,  I  have  no  ol)jection  against  the  transpiring  or  perforiningof  the 
latter  '    Tlie  principal  predicate  of  such  Dum-clauses  is  almost  always  non-pretente,  being 
niostly'in  the  (potential)  subjunctive  present,  or  imperative,  but  also  in  the  indicative 
pr«  sent,  or  in  the  (potent iali  future.     The  predicate  of  the  clause  is  placed  in  the  sub- 
junctive present,  unless  it  is  suboidique,  in  which  instance  the  tense  follows  the  law 
of  consecution,  as:  Nollem  idem  alio  loco  dixissei  '  Odei-iftd  dum  rnfuant     (  et  them 
hate  as  lon«'  as  they  fear,  or  '  if  thev  only  fear').  Cic.  Se*t.  4S,  103.  Thus  lb.  1  hil.  1.  14, 
:U  —Dum  n7ihi  polem  lunamque  intiieri  liceat,  dum  auUnnm  in  sublliiii  semper  ha/Kam, 
ciuantiim  refert  quid  calcein  ?  As  hmg  as  I  am  allowed  (if  I  am  but  allowed)  to  look  at 
the  sun  etc.,  what  matter»  it  on  what  my  feet  will  tread  ?  Sen.  Cons.  Ilelv  9.-5/;/<  vel 
plures,  </'//»  talemducem/i«/>«^(f'/^-  Let  their  number  even  be  greater,  *  as  Ion- as  they 
have'  (if  they  but  have)  such  a  leader.  Liv.  2*^,  34.— In  oratioiie  firmissimum  quodque  f-tt 
primum.  dum  illud  tamen  in  ntrOque  tenedtur.  Cic.  Or.  2, 77,- Qui  qnidvis  perpeliantvr, 
dum  quod  velint  corc-^equantur,  lb.  Oft".  l.iiO.— Dum  res  maneant.  verba  .A/'<7a?i<arbiirfitu 
suo   lb   Fin  5.  29.    Ptccltur  in  vos,  dum  diirni  nti.-<  quibus  iia  satistiat.  Liv.  ti.  2b.  C  omp. 
Ter'  And  4.1,54.  Cic.  K.  A.  41, 119  ;  Iti.  Fam.  10,23.1:   lb.  Leg.2,  2.5.-Ntgative  Dun> 
clauses  of  this  kind  take  ne,  which  often  is  written  in  one  word  wiih  dum  idumne),  and 
sometimes  take  the  syndetic  aniecedeni  ita :  Si  cui  adhuc  videor  segnior  fuisse,  dumne 
tibi  videar.  non  Ial)r)ro.  Cic.  Att.  S,  11  b  3.— Consul  equilibus  piu-dam  circunijecti  agri  con- 
ces>it  <///m //f  amplius  duabus  noctibus  fl4*;.^^€/«^  Liv.  44,  45.— Imitamini  turbam  incon- 
pultam,  (///m  e"o  7J6  iz/ji/*»/' tribQnos.  lb.  3. 21.-Cautum  est.  i/a  id  sacrum  taciret.rfwm 
ne  plu*  quinque  sacritlcio  infe7'e^^ent.  Ih.  39, 18.  C.mip.  lb.  25,40;   28.40;  2b.  1 ;  Platit. 
Cure.  1, 1,  36,  Ter.  Andr.5.  3,  31.  Dum  non  occurs  in  the  poets  and  in  the  \\riters  ol  the 
Pilvera«'e  as-  Lee  Pompfja  permissum  Bithynicis  civitatibiis  ascribere  sibi  qnos  vel- 
leni  cives.  dutn  civitatis  non  sint  aliCna?.  Plin.  Ej).  10, 115.  Comp.  U).  Pan.  27.  2.  Sen.  Ep. 
64;  II).  56;  Ulp.  Dig.  48,  IS,  1,8.  Ov.  Met.  1.3. 151. -Frequently  duvi,  in  this  meaning,  is 
combined  with  7aio(/o  (sometimes  with  ^'/i</<'7«),  which  imparts  to  the  clause  the  addi- 
tional meaniiH'  that  nothing  else  but  the  fact  stated  in  the  clause  is  necessary  for  the 
doer  to  perform  or  to  suffer  the  principal  action,  as:  (iuainobrem,  sne  in  1  uscuiano, 
sive  in  Cumano  ad  te  placebit.  sive  I{oma\  dufmnc/do  sim ul .Hmua,  perfxciAm  profecio  ut 
etc    Cic  Fam.  9,  1.  2  —Dummodo  niorata  recie  venial,  dotata'st  satis.  Plant.  Aiil.  2,  2,  61. 
—Dumquidemne  quid  j^rcout'trix  ^y\<n\  non  liib.at  pndoqui.  lb.  2,  2.  :i4.— Gallia  ^»)»"!^ 
iBqiio  amino  belli  paiitur  injurias.   dumrnodo  repellat   periculum  servitu'is.  Uc.  1  nil. 
12  4,  9.— Maf'no  me  inelu  liberabis,  dmnmodo  int-r  me  et  te  mums  intereit.  lb.  Cat.  1,  5. 
Comp.  lb.  Off.  3.  21  :  Or.  3, 48  ;  Cut.  1,  9,  22 ;  Alt.  12.  4.5,  1 :  Fam.  10.  25,  3  :  Brut.  82,  285  ;  Qu. 
Fr  117-  Le<'.2, 1.5,  ;iS._Harelv  dum  (in  the  restrictive  meaning),   and  dummodo  are 
dependent  on  n/v/^ri'e  predicates,  as  :  Qui  id  numquam,  duntmodo  otiOsi  essent,  recvm- 
runt    Cic.  Alt.  7,7.— Itaque  dum  locus  comminus  pugnandi  </are/«r,  a-quo  annuo  singii- 
las  binis  navis  ohjicitbant  (  =  They  did  not  hesitate  to  oppose  one  ship  to  their  tw^.  if 
hut  the  opportunity  of  a  liand-ti>-liand  fight  was  given),   ties.  B.C.  1,  58.— So  in  saiJ. 
Cat.  1 1.  6  :  Cic.  Fil.  in  Cic.  Fam.  IC.  21, 11.  Comp.  Ov.  Her.  3, 12;i     More   trequen  ly  pre- 
terite  predicates  occur  in  this  construction  if  the  dau.-e  is  tnjbobhque,  as  :  Decretum  est 
ut  Antonius  exercitum  citra  flumen  KiibicOiiem  educeret,  dumne  vwpm^  ^^'%}l!  ^*^5*f"^ 
ducenia  millia  rt(///ior?/-«/.  Cic.  Phil.  6.  3,  5.  Comp.  Liv. :«.  24, 9  ;  lb.  1, -M.  5     Thus  if  the 
Dum-clause  is  made  dependent  on  a  hypothetical  preterite  subjunctive  of  non-reality. 
Qui  et  ipse  in  cruciatum  dari  cuperet  dum  de  patris  morte  ^^/(j/-6r<^/Mr  (if  only  an  inves- 
tigation would  be  had  im  his  father's  death).  Cic.  K.  A.  41, 119    Comp.  Sail.  Cat.  40  4 

OB'*  14  The  restrictive  relation  of  dum  and  d«/ww/oc/^'may  also  be  expressed  in  the  fol- 
lowing fo'rms:  1)  By  an  independent  potential  subjunctive  in  connection  with  the 
particle  tnodo  (negatively  modo  ne).  as  :  Quos.  valetfldo  modo  hom  ^t^if  o'lly  Uie  health 
is  i:ood)  teiiuitas  ipsa  delectat.  Cic.  Brut.  16,  64.-Putant  eiiim  qui  horride  '"C'l heque 
dicat,  tno^lo  id  eleiranter /adrt^  eum  solum  Attice  dicere.  lb.  Orat.  9,  HB.  O.mp.  lb.  Sen 
7  2-»-  N  D  3  8  20-  Oft"  3  6,31.— Qute  de  Sicinio  audi^tl.  ea  mihi  pndwntur:  moao  ne 
ll'laVxceptio  in  alici'u.m  incurrat  bene  de  nobis  meritum.  Il>- At/.  5,4.-Si  quis  est  paullo 
ad  volnptatespn.peiisior.  modo  ne  sit  ex  pecudum  g.  nere  lb.  Oft.  1,  d(>  Comp.  J  >;  'JJ-''' 
49  •  Am.  17,  61  ;  Off  2, 20,  71  ;  Fam.  16.  22,  4  ;  Liv.  32.  21.  Since  pro))Ositions  ot  this  Kind 
are  grammatically  independent,  being  a  species  of  adversative  c<)ordinate  proj^siiions 
the  Tense  of  the  predicate  is  not  subject  to  the  law  of  consecution.  Sometimes,  such 
consirmtions  h  .ve  a  general  restrictive  force,  without  the  peculiar  meanin-ol  dum  or 
dummodo,  as:  Q.ue  placet  Peripatetici«  et  recte  placet :7«ot/on6  laudarent  iracundiam 
oxdicrent  utiliieranatQra  datam.  Cic.  Oft".  1,  25.^9.  Heie  the  subjunctives  Wa?-^«i 
nr.C\  diet  rent  have  the  force  of  the  potential  subjunctives  mentioned  p.  379.  Obs.  4,  the 
sentence  introduced  by  7nodo  ne  having  the  force  of  an  adversative  coordination  hy^frf, 
or  that  of  a  concessive  period,  =  ^but  (only)  they  ought  not  to  praise  etc.  ~    2j  Ihe 


678 


TEMPORAL   CLAUSES. 


pamc  rolation  is  sometimes  expressed  hy  modo  with  an  dhlntive  nhsohite,  or  with  adjec- 
ti.ret'  whicli  have  the  force  of  accessory  predicates,  as  :  Iiaque  veiiiam  quo  voces,  inodo 
ad'futore  te  {  =  inodo  ad  jut  or  sin).  Cic.  Att.  1»J,  \-i. — Turn  qiiam  phirimis,  nwdo  diffni/>,  se 
utilein  prai-beat  (  =  jnodo  d'lgid  fint).  lb.  Off.  1,  2f>.  M'l. — Utinaui  posset  aliqua  ratiOnc  hoc 
crimen,  (luainvis  falsil,  modo  fuondnd  at(]iie  u4fdfd,  d(Mendere  (  =  modo  ca  hinndna  atquA 
xisitdta  nt).  II).  Verr.  2.  3,97.  Tims  inodo  m  ly  be  connected  with  adverbial  adjuncts  of 
the  sentence,  in  whicli  instance  the  predicate?  must  l)e  supplied  accordini?  to  the  connec- 
tion, us  :  Decenu!,  modo  rede  (  =  viodo  rede  dtcernas,  or  'inodo  id  rede  facias'),  t'ic. 
Ko<c.  A.  48. — Bonis  viris  approbantibns  faciendum  vat.  inodo  pro  fandtafibus,  nos  ipsl 
ut  fecimus  (  =  modo  id  pro  facnltotiffus  faciant).  lb.  OtT.  2,  17.  Conip.  lb.  1,  ;io,  127  ,  1,  44, 
15»;.  -  ;])  Rarely  modo  is  ust-d  in  this  nieaniiii,'  with  an  ri-claiise,  as:  Modo  vl  ha-c  no- 
bis loca  tenCre  liceaf,  bellissinie  in  nostris  pnediis  esse  poteritis  (if  it  is  only  allowed  to 
us  etc.).  Cic.  Fam.  14.  14.  1. —  4)  Ri\rely  a  Se-dausf  without  inodo  is  used  in  the  mran- 
\\\Z  diiwmodo  ne.  as:  Sinl misericordes  in  fnribus  a»rani,  ne ill!  saiiiruinem  nostrum  larr/i- 
antiir.  Sail.  Cat.. 52.  12.  —  IVrmissum  nt  au.xilia  absociis,  ve  supr.i  quinque  millium  nume- 
nim,  accipiaf.  lAv. .%,  1. —  5)  Frequently  si  modo  with  the  indicativk  is  used  to  express 
the  Emrlish  'if  only  \  'provided  that '.  Hut  such  claiisi-slack  the  peculiarity  of  the  i)um- 
clauses,  m«*nti()ne(l  Obs.  1.3,  havinj»  merely  a  conditional  force,  the  particle  inodo  be- 
ii  «J  used  to  represent  thenon-fulfilinent  of  the  condition  as  improbable,  or  its  lultiiment 
as  easy,  as  :  Sine  alios  qui  possunt,  s-i  modo  roliinf,  sustinere.  Cic.  Fam.  14.  2.  3. — Heliqua 
tingulOruni  dierum  ecribemus  ad  te,  si  modo  labellarios  U\  jnotbibU.  Ib.-C^u.  Fr. 2, 12. 

3.  Diim  and  its  synonyms,  in  the  meaning  '  till  *. 

Obs.  15.  If  d'/m.  q>ioad,  and  donee  are  used  in  the  meanin-.:  '  tiU\  the  principal  action 
is  alwnys  represented  as  continuiiii,'  duriiiLr  some  space  of  time,  but  as  ceasing  at  the 
moment  when  the  action  of  the  clause  occurred,  or  will  occur.  For  the  tens»-  of  the 
principal  predicate  see  p.  323,  Obs.  6.— These  three  conjunctions  sometimes  talie  the 
syndetic  antecedents  usque,  usque  eo  (usque  ad  euvi  Jinem)  and  tatndiu,  which  denote 
'solo'i(/\  but  tjenerally  an'  not  t*eparatcly  rendered.  The  moods  aud  tenses  of  Till- 
clau-ies  are  ditt'erent  for  each  of  the  lliree  conjunctions  mentioned. 

Obs.  Ifi.  Dum  (tilH.  if  it  refers  to  time  indefinite  and  oenkhal  (i.  e.  if  the  action 
refers  toe///  times),  takes  the  suiufNCTivK  pkksknt:  as  :  Iijltis  subirahendi  sunt  ei  iu 
quos  impetum  facere  conantur.  dum  se  ipsi  coliujant  (till  they  collect  themselves).  Cic. 
Tusc.  4.  3t).  78.— Ditl'erant  in  t«'mpus  aliud.  dum  deiene<cat  ira.  lb.— (^nid  «licam,  quaniua 
amor  best  jlriim  sit  in  ediicandis  eis  quje  procreavCrunt  n^quc  ad  eum  ft/ttm  dum  ftosH/d-  so 
ipsa  detendere  'f  lb.  N.  D.  2,  51. — Ut  ne  expectemus  quidem  dum  ivyemur.  lb.  Am.  13,  44. 

Obs.  17.  When  dum  (till)  refers  to  pahticular  time,  it  generally  tiikes  the  si'bjunc- 
TiVE  PUESENT  if  the  principal  predicate  is  non-priterife  (present  or  liiture),  as^Kxspecta 
<///'«  Atticiim  conreniam  ;  Wait  till  I  see  (till  I  have  seen)  Atticus.  Cic.  Att.  7.  1,  4. — 
Nunc  Scujvola  paullum  requiescMt  dum  se  ca\orj'ranqaf  ;  till  the  heat  sub^ides  (has  ^»^ 
sided),  lb.  Or.  1,<»2. — Nuin  exspectas  dum  te  stimulis  J'odinmf  lb.  Piiil.  2,  34.— (^uuin  ea 
saii<  tiruia  sit,  Itneor  tamen  dum  a  Dolabelhe  procuraloribus  txUjani.  primam  pen>iOnem. 
lb.  Fam.  (i.  IS.  .5.— Ot»to  ne  se  ilia  ir'iis  moveat  d'lm  ad  te  le<,'iones  perducantur.  lb.  Fam. 
12,  19,  2.— Kxspectii  duai  consul  ant  dictator  fiat.  Liv.  3.  1 1, 13.— .Vt  tu  apud  nos  mane 
dum  rtdeat  ips  i.  Ter.  Kiin.  3,  3.  28.  Comp.  Cic.'Fam.  11,  2-3,  2  ;  lb.  11,21,  2.  Thus  dum.  iu 
the  meaniiij;  'till\  with  tin;  pkksknt  sub.junctive  is  expressly  opp«>sed  Xndum,  '  wliile  ', 
with  the  present  indicative  :  'I'ibi  laiendum  tantisper  il)Idem  dum  efTcrvescit  ♦  (  =  tatn- 
diu quamdiu  etlervescet),  et  simul  dum  audidmus  (Mill  we  have  heard',  'until  we  shall 
liear')  (juemadmodum  negotium  confectum  sit.  I'ic.  Fum.  J», 2,  4.— Sometimes  (if  the 
principal  predicate  is  in  the  future)  the  I)iitn-clau-e  takes  a  future-perfect,  as:  Miiii 
quideui  usque  cune  erit  quid  ajjas,  </'///i  quid  eceris  .««e/o.  lb.  Fam.  12. 11»,  3.— In  ante- 
clas>ical  lauiruai^e,  and  rarely  in  the  epistolary  style  of  Cicero,  the  puesent  indicativb 
is  Used  in  place  of  a  present  sui»junciive,  as  :  Exspectdbo  dum  renif.  Ter.  Eun.  1,  2, 
12»). —Me  niineat  triduum  lioc.  dum  id  quod  est  promissum  ab  amicis  arp^entum  aufero. 
lb.  I'horiii,  .3.  2,27.  Comp.  lb.  Andr.  2.  1  ;  Phorm.  5.  7,  M),  and  Lentilus  in  Cic.  Fam.  12, 
14.  4.  Cicero  uses  the  present  indicative  in  .\tt.  10.  3  :  K^ro  in  Arcjlno  opperi'-r  duui  ista 
co/no-tco.  In  the  following  passai:es  which  are  generally  quoted  as  a  pro()f  for  this  con- 
sinictioii,  d'/rn  lias  not  the  meaiung  ' (Ul\  hnt  '  whil^' :  Atcpie  intena,  </'////  hu^c  qino 
di>persa  sunt  coHiqunfur.  vel  pa-sini  licet  colligentein  undiqui"  replCri  jn-ia  juris  civlhs 
scientia.  Cic.  Or.  i.  42  — I\Mpaucos  dies  commorilbor  dum  pecunia  acclpitur  (  =  while 
the  delivery  of  the  funds  due  to  me  is  going  on).  \U.V^\\\.'.i,b,  \.—X  future-prfsent 

*  Mo~t  of  the  older  editions  read  '<l>imder'ervescat'{=  till  tlie  congratulating  excitement 
his  subsided),  which  might  be  correct  if  it  were  confirmed  by  manuscript  authority. 
The  CiKle.x  Mediceus  (the  only  manuscript  authority  for  the  let'iera  ad  Fam.)  gives  tho 
reading  meuiioued  above. 


DUM-CLAUSES   AND  EQUIVALENTS. 


679 


in  Bum-clauses  of  this  kind  occurs  only  in  tlie  poets  :  Quae  maneant  dum  rac  fata  perTre 

rolent.  Prop.  1,14.  ..,.,,  ,.     .       .,,,..11,.         j-    * 

Hence  in  quasi-oblique  Dum-clauses  ol  this  kind,  the  predicate  will  be  in  the  imperfect 
subjundive  if  the  i)rincipal  predicate  of  the  oblique  construciion  is  a  preterite,  as:  Legi 
scrii)tum  esse,  avem  quamdam..  .usque  eo  pienure  eJlrum  (avium)  capita  mordicus  dum 
ilhecaptiim  (piscem)  amUtennt.  Cic.  N.D.  2,  49.— Ut  spatium  intercedere  posset  dum 
milites  convenirent,  legjltis  respondit  etc.  Cais.B.G.  1,7.  Comp.  Nep.  Paus.  3. 

Ob^  18  If  dum  (till),  referring  to  particular  time,  is  dependent  on  a  preterite  princi- 
pal predicate,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  regularly  the  subjunctive  impeupect,  as  : 
Dum  hie  r^nlref,  locum  relinquere  w^luit.  Cic.  Mil.  20,54.— Comitia  dilata  ex  senatus 
consulto  dum  lex  de  tacito  jiuiido fen-etur.  lb.  Att,  4, 16.— Valuit  tamdiu  du7n  hue  pro- 
dirtt  lb  Flacc.  17. 41.— Deleciu  perfecto,  consules  i)aucos  mordti  dies  dum  socii  ab 
nomine  Lutlno  venirent.  Liv.  22.  38.— This  tense  and  mood  is  required  even  then  when  we 
should  expect  a  pluperlect  according  to  English  usage:  Virgiuius  (iwm  colle-am  cons-u- 
leret  moratur  (<i&\d  tiU.  he  had  con.-iuUed).  Liv.  4,21.— Timoleon  ne  a-picere  quidem  tra- 
ternum  sanfiiinem  voluit  ;  nam  dum  res  conficerefur,  in  pra'sidio  luiL  {fill  all  had  been 
done).  Nep.Tim.  1,4  (where  the  interpreters,  variously  trying  to  explain  the  subjunctive, 
render  dum  by  'while'.  Tiie  same  tense,  of  course,  is  required  if  the  clause  is  siibob- 
liqiie.  or  quasi-suboblique,  as:  Quippe  qui  moram  teniporis  quairerent  dum  Hannibal  m 
Afnc&m  (rajiceret.  Liv.  30. 16.  .      .    ,  .  ,  ,    r^^  •«. 

The  pekfect  indicative  in  Dum-chiuses  of  this  kind  is  extremely  rare.  In  Cicero  it 
occurs  only  in  Verr.  1,  (i,  16  :  E3,  niansit  in  conditiOne  usque  ad  eum  flnem  dum  judiceB 
rejedi  sunt,  la  this  passage,  not  the  use  of  the  indicative  is  unusual  (a  subjunctive 
would  have  been  faulty),  but  the  use  of  dum  in  place  of  quoad  or  don/^c  {sen  Obs.  26). 
The  indicative  perfect  is  also  found  in  Gell.  10, 3,  and,  poetically,  in  Prop.  1,3, 4:i.  1  he 
pluperfect  and  imperfect  indicative  never  occur  in  Dumclauses  of  this  kind,  nor  does 
a  pluperfect  subjunctive  occur  if  the  clause  is  oblique,  as  it  should  be  expected  from 
the  future-perfect  being  admissible  according  to  Obs.  17. 

Ou«  19  Quoad  in  the  meaning  '  till '  is  rarely  used  if  the  time  of  the  clause  is  indefi- 
nite and  general.  It  thus  occurs  in  direct  discourse  with  the  predicate  of  the  clause  in 
the  pkkf'ect  sub.ii'Nctive:  Quoad  enim  pei-centum  sit  eo  quo  sumpta  navis  est,  non 
domini  navis  est,  sed  navigantium.  Cic.  Off.  3.  23.  89.- -In  preterite  consecution,  and  it 
the  clause  is  suboblique,  the  predicate  is  placed  in  the  plupeufect  sub.tunctive  :  Pa- 
tres  interre'Mii  ineundi  ratiOnem  excogitavGrunt,  ut,  quoad  certus  rex  dedaratus  esset., 
nee  sine  re'"e  civitas,  nee  diuturno  rege  esset.  lb.  Rep.  2, 12.— If  quoad  refers  to  a  par- 
TiCLLAU  time,  and  the  principal  predicate  is  non-preteuite,  the  predicate  is  placetl  in 
the  present  si:b.iunctive,  as:  E'^o  hie  coqito common! ri  quoad  me  reficiam..  Cic.  Fam. 
7  26  2 —Ea  \ero  continebis  quoad  ipse  te  rideam.  lb.  Att.  13. 21,4.  If  the  construction 
i«  oblique  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  either  in  the  present  subjunctive,  or  in  the 
imperfect  subjunctive,  accordiuir  as  the  tense  of  the  governing  predicate  is  non-preU;riie 
or  preterUe:  Ego  me  Astune  diutius  arblfrorconm\oiatnrum  quoad  Wle  venial.  Cic.  Fam. 
(J  19,  2  — Ubi  i}.^^iidafu*-ram  quoad  aliquid  ad  me  de  eo  scriberes  quod  etc.  lb.  Att.  3, 13, 1. 
But  it  is  peculiar  that  in  these  t)blique  (or  quasi-oblique)  constructions  sometimes, 
instead  of  a  present  suloundive,  a  peufect  subjunctive  is  used,  and  instead  of  an  imper- 
fect a  pi.uPEUFECT  subjunctive,  as  :  Censeo. .  .senatui  placCre  ut. .  .interea  provincial  ab 
eis  obtiutHiitur  quoad  culque  ex  senatus  consulto  succei^sum  sit.  Cic.  Pliil.  11, 1'2.  Comp. 
lb  10  11  2-> —Ip-e  interea,  oyoa(/ legioues  collocatas.  muuiuique  hiberna  co!7//ot^^*^ef,  in 
Gallia  moiari  const ituit.  Cies.  B.  O.  5, 2i.  So  Ctes.  B.  C.  1, 10.  These  tenses  can  only  be 
explained  as  cvuvericd  future  perfeds  (see  p. 45:3:  Independent  construction:  i/ro- 
tincue  obtihfbuidur  quf>ad  successum  ent ;  inordbor  quoad  cognovero),  althou-rh  vouchers 
for  such  constructions  in  direct  discourse  are  found  only  with  dum  and  donee,  but  not 
with  quoad  (as  far  as  we  know). 

Obs  20  If  clauses  with  quoad  (till)  are  made  dependent  on  preterite  predicates,  the 
predicate  of  the  clause  (in  classical  prose)  is  in  ttie  pekpect  indicative:  Usque  e«)  se 
tenuit  quoad»  PompCjoadeum  leirfiti  litteneque  venerunt.  Cic.  Dej.  4  II.--M1I0,  quum 
ill  s»'natu  fuisseteo  dxc.  quoad  ^e\\^i\x*  est  dimissus,  diovciwrn  venit.  1»).  Mil.  10,  28~Lqui- 
testlmm  sequendi  non  feclrunt  quoad  prsecipites  hostis  egerunt.  Cies.  B.  G.  5, 1<.— hpa- 
minoiidas  ferrum  usque  eo  in  corpora  letinuit  quoad  renuutidtum  est  vicisse  lioeotios. 
Nep.  Ep.  9.  Comp.  Liv.  26,  46.— Rarely  quoad  is  used,  in  place  of  dum  in  those  construc- 
tions ot  this  kind  which  require  the  subjunctive,  as  :  An  Brutus  non  ;>o/wt/  domum  re- 
dlre,  triumphare,  primus  in  hoc  ordine,  quoad  inagistrdlum  iniret,  sententiam  dicere. 
Cic.  Phil,  r,,  3,  8.  Her.' iulrd  is  a  subjunctive  of  non-reality,  being  represented  as  an 
action  which  woidd  have  happened  if  Brutus  had  returned.  Hence  the  clause  should 
have  been  introduced  by  dum,  which  probably  would  have  been  done  but  for  the  ambi. 
guity  arisiiK'  from  dum  (dum  iulret  =  while  lie  was  enterin-.:).— The  writers  ol  tlie  silver 
age  coubtrue  quoad  either  with  a  perfect  indicative,  or  with  an  imperfect  subjunctive. 


680 


TEMTORAL  CLAUSES. 


a?  :  Tamdiu  ccrtamen  anceps  fait  quoad  Darlns /ugeret  (where  in  classical  prose  *fiigit* 
•would  have  been  used).  Ju^t.ll,y. 

Obs.  21.  Donee  (till),  which  has?  an  anteclassical  collateral  form  donicvm,  docs  not 
occur  in  clas^j^ical  prose  if  dependent  on  non-preterite  pri'dicates  (unless  the  j)rincipal 
pentence  is  oblique,  and  the  governing  verb  of  the  principal  sentence  is  preterite,  or 
the  clause  is  virtually  mbobliqne.  (See  below.)  But  in  anteclas?ical  and  potJt-clat^gical 
htyle.  and  also  in  the  poets,  donee  is»  frequently  used  if  it  depends  on  presents,  futures, 
aiid  iniperatTvfcs.  If  it  refers  to  indefinite  time,  it  has  its  predicate  in  the  present  sxib- 
jtmclive  (more  rarely  in  the  future  present,  or  future-perfect),  as  :  Inter  eadem  pecora 
degunt,  donee  aitas  keparet  ingenuos.  Tac.  Germ.  20.  Conip.  lb.  H.  2,  1 ;  4,  (j5  ;  Cohim. 
12.25;  12. 26,— CVx^wito  usque  donee  eA  cotmnadcfnt  bene.  Cato  H.  K.  l.'iC».— Id  aliquoties 
facito,  usqne  adeo  d(rn^=e  sal  desiverit  tabescere  biduum.  lb.  SS.  So  lb.  146, 149.— If  donrc 
refers  to  puriiciUdr  time  (dependent  on  non-preterites),  it  ha.*  its  predicate,  in  anteclassicil 
laniruage,  reirularly  in  the  FUTUKK-PEnFECT,  as  :  Hand  desinatn  dontc  perj'ecero  hoc.  Ter. 
Phorm.  2,  8,  72,— Ne  quoquam  exsurgdti.<  donee  a  me  erit  signnm  datum.  Plant.  IJacrh.  4, 
4,  lOtt.  Comp.  Ter.  Ad.  4,  t»,  5.  In  post-classical  language  the  present  subjunctive  is  used:  Sea 
est  vallum  murlque  et  trahendi  artes,  donee  e  proximis  provinciis  auxilia  concurrant. 
Tac.  H.  4,  (io.  Comp.  II).  4,  58.  The  poets  also  use  the  futl'ke-puesent  :  Hie  jam  ter  cen- 
tum ioU^i^  regnabitur  annos,  donee  n-L'Tna  sacerdos. .  .geminam  dat/it  Ilia  i)n)lem.  Virg. 
^n.  1,272.— Livy  thus  uses  donee  in  oblique  discourse,  the  predicate  of  the  clause  being 
in  xhii  jtresent  subjunctive  if  the  governing  verb  of  the  obhque  periodie  a  non-preterite, 
as:  Ko  usque  mc  viverc  r?//^jA^  rfow^c  alterlus  vestrum  superstes  baud  ambiguum  regeni 
ftlterum  meS  morte /Vi««m.  Liv.  40,  8, 18.--Pererraiflrum  se  omne  Latium,  (/on^^c  ad  eos 
verveniat  qui  etc.  lb.  1,53.  In  preterite  consecution,  the  suhoblique  predicate  of  the 
l>onec-clanse  is  either  in  ihe  imjterfeci  suhjxiuct'we,  or  pi  u pet  feet  subjunctive:  Sicinius 
Macedouiam  obtinire,  donee  successor  venlret,jussus  est.  lb.  42,  27.— Patres  eensuire  eos- 
dem  Macedonian)  otttin^ re  donee  res  composuissent.  lb.  45, 16.  So  Liv.  4,  i;i;  1,30;  26,9; 
33,  31.  Such  pluperfects  can  only  be  explained  if  taken  as  converted  tenses  with  the 
force  of/'/ ^//'«'-^^e/yVc^*- (Macedoniam  obtinebunt  donee  rt'i^  composuerint),  allhongh  Livy 
does  not  use  this  tense  in  direct  discourse.— S^mietimes  donee  is  thus  used  with  a  sub- 
junctive if  the  clause  St^  virtually  suhoblique,  the  predicate  referring  to  a  future  event 
which  at  the  time  spoken  of  is  exi)ect*-d,  as  :  A  cetera  pnodiT  Fabius  militem  abstinuit 
donee  coW^'^^-ji  venire nt.  Liv.  4,  69.  This  construction  presnpi>oses  an  independent  con- 
struction with  &  present:  '  Pneda  abstinete  do/t^e  coIIGgie  veniant\ 

On».  22.  7)0MfC  occurs  in  oil  periods  of  the  language  when  the  principal  predicate  is 
preterite,  the  prt-dicate  of  the  clause  beinur  in  the  ferpect  indicative  (the  same  as  with 
quoad).  For  exceptii)ns  see  Obs.  23.  Donee  is  thus  used:  1)  in  antecla«-sical  style: 
Numquamd^*Vi/ii  orOre  tisque  ad  eo donee  jterpulit.  Ter.  And.  4,  l,:i6.  Comp.  Plant.  True. 
1, 1, 17.— 2)  In  classical  language  ;  very  frequently  in  Livy,  but  not  in  Ca'sar  or  Sallust ; 
in  Cicero  only  in  a  few  passages:  Usque  e<)/u/i'/i  ne  quis  de  m<a  tide  dubitaret,  dtutec  ad 
rejieiendos  judices  veni/nus.  Verr.  1,  6,  17.  Fundum  s»^  habere  usque  eo  non  in«)leste 
tulit  donee  viclnom  nactus  est  qui  etc.  lb.  Tull.  6, 14.— Neque  flnis  tiet)at,  donee  pt»pulu8 
senatum  co^git  ut  etc.  lb.  Verr.  2,  4,  40.  De  comitiis  donee  vtdiit  Marnllus  silen- 
Wnmfnit.  Liv.  23, 81,  9.— Potitii  antistites  futrunt  donee  genus  omne  PotitiOnim  interiit. 
Ih.  1,7,14.  Comp.  lb.  Pnef.  9  ;  1,23;  1.31;'l,34;  .3.48;  4,  57  ;  5,  32;  44,  5  :  45,6,  and  often. 
Livy  sometimes  uses  an  historical  present  in  the  Donee-clause,  as  :  Nee  minor  cjedes  in 
«rbe/ut/,  rfon^-cabjectisarmisdictatnri  dedunfur.  lb.  4,34.  So  lb.  1,  54.  10.-3»  Frequently 
donee  has  this  construction  in  the  silver  Latinity.  as  :  Cnncta  ejus  dicta  scire  inalebat, 
donee  Junius  quidam  indicium  detulit.  Tac.  A.  2,  28.  Comp.  lb.  4, 72;  0,51;  13,44;  lb. 
Agr.26,  :i6;  Suet.  Jul.  82. 

Obs.  2:3.  Donee  (till)  with  an  imperfect  or  plupehfect  subjunctive  first  occnrs  in  Livy, 
who  uses  this  construction  1)  if  the  principal  sentence  is  negative;  Principio  anni  tri- 
bOni  nihil  more  runt  donee  Camillus  in  Faliscos  proflci  secret  ur.  Liv.  5,  26.— Progredi  prne 
turba  occurrenfium  non  jwterat,  don^c  a  consulibus  lictOres  missi  essent  qui  etc.  lb.  45,  7. 
—2)  If  the  predicates  of  both  propositions  denote  repeated  and  contingent  artion  (ac- 
cording top.  :i31.  No.  c).  as:  TrepidatiOnis  aliquantum  edtbant  (eleplianti)  donee  (piie- 
tem  ipse  imwrfecisset  (i.e.  every  time  when  a  raft  with  elephants  was  conveyed  across 
the  river).  Liv.  21,  28.— 3)  If  the  action  of  the  clause  is  in  the  relation  of  non-reality  : 
Quiescerem  et  paterer,  donee  in  regiam  meam  arniatus  renis^et  f  Liv  42, 41.— The  authors 
of  the  silver  age  use  donee  far  m(»re  frequently  with  the  imperfect  sub.iunctive  than 
with  a  perfect  indicative,  and  very  rarely  employ  dum  in  the  meaning  'till ';  as  :  Tam- 
diu se  in  sedlli  puo  t^enuit  donee  cervlcem  cireuraactu  rotie  frangertt.  Sen.  Ep.  70— Tnm 
Incupletissimus  quisque  miles  labOre  fatigdri.  donee  vacatiOnem  eineret.  Tac.  II.  1.46. 
Comp.  Tac.  A.  2,  82;  II).  H.  2,8;  1,13;  2,49";  Plin.  Ep.  9,;«.  6.  In  still  later  Latinity,  the 
subjunctive  became  the  only  mood  in  Donec-clauSes  (Charis.  2,  p.  202). 

Obs.  84.  Livy,  the  poets,  and  more  frequently  the  wiiteis  of  the  t-ilver  age,  use  donee 


DUM-CLAUSES  AND  EQUIVALENTS. 


681 


In  the  meaning' « ^s'  long  n-<  \  Livy,  in  direct  discourse,  uses  donee  in  this  meaning,  mostly 
with  r<7em  ct-'tc)  «  v/^^-i/^  principal  predicates,  placing  the  predicate  of  the  clause  in  the 
^mI'krf^';  or  PKiJFEcr  in'd.cative'.  as:  />o..c  arnnlti  c^.nfertlq.i^e  a^^*«.^  pedit^i^n  la- 
hor  in  ner^eouendo  fuif  '  po^tquam  etc.  Liv.  6,  13.  Ccmip.  lb.  2.  49,9,  1.7.13.     »"' '"e 

XvV/  cSV.  Sr^J/i  /<.und  as^a  su.>junctive  of  ^•-^:.^'^-^,r.^Ti:.n^^^^^  L  v' 

No-fc):  Nihil  sane  tre/ndubant  elcphanii  donee  contineiit    Nvlut  ponte  ag^r.r^J^^^^^ 
21  28  (where  some  <T,-a,nmariHns.  lor  in<t.  the  author  of  ttie  Publ.  Sch  Or.,  ^".'^''-f  f 
?o«iider  «7erXr  7.^'"lu...,bUquc  ',  the  elephants  U.u.,  '•^'^/IL^'^lSrcIe^'l^The  Donee 
tiir.  ^i,i.w-.\     Tf  thp  iirinrJDal  ur.-dicfttf  i^  ill  ihe  i^nbiiiiictive.  the  predicale  01  ine  uonec 
c  m-L  a«um"   ho 'h  ?he  to^^  the  mn„d  of  the  f„rn,er:  Ut...Kom,ilus   m"m< 

niwl  writers  of  the  silver  n'^e,  n<e  donee  in  the  meaning  ' as  long  a-^  with  reitrence  lo 
/^y/jJaetions,  both  predicates  being  placed  in  tl.cy^//7-^V>msv,>^  as:  Ne  quern  vest  um^ 
ilnner  anieouim  in  re  mea  supererit,  judicaium  a.idictumque  duci  patiar.  Liv.  6, 14.- 
tuee  ?  K  ffiix  nu.lU)s'";.;V.^kt.  aiAlios.  Ov.  Trist.  1,  9,  'J-y-^'i^SU^Mr'Ta  "'1^^ 
in.-erfo  t>rU  dontc  dubitdfAt'/r  imperatorem  in  castris,  an  hostem  habeatis.  lac.  ii.  i,.5j. 
PeVu  iar?s  \i,riTse  of  a  /i/^^^^^^^^  indicative  alter  donee  (as  long  as),  referring  to  a  present^ 
uS'h/t'he'l.'ense  of  S.rE^glisl.  present -per  feet :  Per  ^f-\^^^^^^^{:S^ 

Jl  ^^oac  io.ii  /V  ^^^^^^^  maker  inrrodueed  in  the  discourse.    In  tins 

in  Ta  ^ce  t'ie  pre-ffcatVo/  the  clause  is  pla/ed  in  the  ''"'^i"-!  J^  ri>-'«^},«8^PSK-"  a 
which  must  be  explained  as  converted /«^'/-^-pr^s^^///.^.  "^'^•^J  l"?-' ]?  P-,^l«'  ^;/';,^"ini 
Dresent  indicative  never  occurs  with  donee  in  direct  disco-irse  ;  as  .  Edixit,  "e  Qui  miii 
lis  X,^c  n  c\"tri"L^<  bona  j>os.<idtref  (Indkp.  :  Ne  quis  p,ssideto  bona  miliiis.  donee 
i^caS TriV  Liv  2  24.-Ne^  umcpiam,  rfo«.c  sang.iinis  Barcini  quisquam  siiiyerM, 
j;,W^nrRomana  fidiVa  (Isokp.  :  ^'nnnn-^^m  quiescent  Ic^dera.  rfon.c  quisquam  super- 
erit)    11).  21, 10.  Comp.  lb.  4,  21 ;  4, 60  ;  25, 11 ;  34,  2-3  ;  Tac.  A.  lo,  64. 

OB*»  2-)  Peculiar  to  the  writers  of  the  silver  a-e,  is  the  use  of  donee  to  introduce 
l<5.!t.ve  c.Au"  Ks":  in  the  meaning  '  usque  ad  eum  Ipeum  ^'O^^^^^^^^}^  ^i  l-on  '- 
III  this  seii-e.  it  Generally  takes  the  present  subjunctive,  or  tmjXitpct  tobjunctiie  ««^t^^r " 
\Vv"  fhe  ens^Tof  the  principal  predicate,  a.  :  lihenus  s.rvat  uorn^n  dome  Oceano 
mfvr^.?////-  Tac.  A.2,6.-Caput  usque  eo  dimlsit,  donee  radns  msereret.  ben.  Ep.  <0. 
Comp.  Tac.  Germ.  1  ;  lb.  :ij.  . 

Ors  26  Dum  quoad,  and  donee  (in  the  meaning  'tilD  are  thus  distinguished  in 
cliisical  prW^'l)  />^'  (not  q>UHid  or  donee)  is  used  if  the  clause  refers  to  tnne  indefl- 
nito  am  general  In  the  paisage  Oft'.  3,21, 89  (Obs.  19)  quoad,  as  ha^  bee.,  shown  is 
sed  f'c.r  particular  reasons*  Donee  with  reference  to  indefinite  time,  does  not  occur  n 
classical  pZs  •  )b^  21).  The  mood  of  Dum-dauses,  in  this  relation,  '^«»«;^>-^,  '|«  P/^^'-; 
P  r  Jul.  .  n.i  ve -2)  Ihim  (not  quoad  or  donee)  is  used  if  the  clause  is  dependent  on 
ex'mdi^^^^^^^^  "^*i"U'  «l^vays  the  subjunctive  1«^'<>1"P- tl»«.ex;u|'Ple; 

OBflTl^as    KviU-^c/^^^^^^ 

(^•l\\  \\  i\i -Kxsmctas  lortasse  rf////i  dicat  eic.  Cic.  fuse.  2,7.  Com..  Oes  H.  G.  1, 
UOnoeM^  also  with  dum  and  a  present  "ulicat.ye  (see 

Obs  i(  Theenpen.r  Trajamis  construed  ..r.^>66/<I/-^  ^\xh  donee:  Sx  exspeet asses  dmec 
me  ^Vi;/^7-f"  F  in  Ep  10  122.  See  p.  593,  Obs.  8.-3)  If  the  principal  predicate  ^  non- 
,7;.^^?';  and  uxnl  duui  and  r^oad  (both  ^'•^'''"'c  ^^^nr"'!-  and  19* 

iinc live    are  used  opfionaUy.     Donee  is  n..t  used  in  this  connection.  See  Obs.  1«  a"d  1.1 

W    f  ti.e   >ii  cii.ll  nredicate  is  preterite,  dum.  quoad,  and  donee  are  used.     B   t  on  y 
7.nnxultaC^d^^^^^^^  f  "»«  pVi-ci pal  action  is  represented  a^  tnfentvm^illy 

con  i  1  .1  by  he  d«>er  till  the  action  <.f  the  cla.iVe  '  will  happen  ';  almost  always  with  a 
«  ctiVJ^np^^^^^^^  18.-5)  If  n<.  such  intention. is  implied    the  pnnc.pal 

ac  i  beim'  yimpy  represented  as  continuing  till  a.u.ther  action  occurred,  quoad  or  do- 
^"  H  e  ,1  "d)  wMt^iout  Sny  difference,  both  7;quirin,r  the  P^;f^f:^:;^l^S^Jl^^^ 
^^,^.^^,^     III  ..o-tcU^-'ical  i.ro-e  there  are  the  followuiir  difl-^ences  fiom  tneciassica    u  a  e 

;■   .a'-  Zi  am.  ,'^«.l»;e  ei„,.l..ye,l  when  in  ,l,i..ical  P-;-=^rS  "S^',Sri:,d.c«fve! 
c.irn-ct  (.\.i.  1):  («'th^arhe  Mibjiiuclire  mml  if  used,  ll^l)ml^cu.m^ly  »iih  ihc  iiiuicative, 
w  ..r..  in  rli«»ical  unisc  only  the  iiulicalire  if  considered  a»  correct  (No.  5|. 
"s.  ,n:a,n'e/;to.'a\i^.s':.,i,ivale„,,,are  syliiMiyili»  of  a,,(^^^^^^^ 

•       I-»        :  .u   I  nil  '   oii.i    '  i»»»f.>ri»'    iii'iv  itfteii  Ot"  used  as  ^^vno^yIIls^.      t>»>iii,  u,urr» 

Sa.;/:7V/a.^:ep?e^M     \.e     i  ic  )^  '»'«  -'-"  7'  ^'"  ^'^"'^• 

Bu  w  i£^  rcla  ses  i  </«m,  do,iec,  and  quoad,  the  principal  action  is  al^v^ys  repre- 
?euted  as  couiiniing  to  the  moment  of  the  dependent  action,  this  is  generally  not  the 


G82 


CAUSAL  CLAUSES. 


ca?e  in  claupos  with  anteqnam,  oxccpt  when  the  principal  a^nti'nce  i?  veqafive,  in  which 
instance  both,  the  AnttMiuaui-clauses.  and  the  Duni-clau-es  refer  to  principal  actions, 
the  n"t-/tapp*-iiinff  of  which  contijines  up  to  the  mtuneni  of  the  depen(h-nt  action.  Ht-nce 
in  such  sentences  a-<  •  /Juin  hie  v  nlret,  locum  relinquere noliiif  ^Cic.  Mil.  iO)  \  a  Piiusqiiaui. 
clause  may  be  snbstiiuted  fir  the  Duin-datige  {iiou  piins  locum  relinquere  voluit  (juam 
hie  rei'Vet).  Thus  '  X'tmqxam  dtstitit  urdre  tisque  to  donee ixrpuUt  (.Tei-.  And.  4,  l,3ti)  = 
NonpriHS  demtilit  a/ are  quarn  etc. 


CIIAPTEU    FIFTH. 

CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 
I.  DIRECT  CAUSE. 

§  623.  Ciiusul  cltiiises  are  introduced  by  the  coiij unctions  quia  or  qtwd 
(because),  and,  for  particular  causal  relations,  by  quiuti  or  quoniam 
(since);  sometimes  by  quando,  qudiuloquidem,  or  siquidem.  Causal  Qiium- 
clauseshave  their  predicates  in  the  subjunctivi<:  (p.  055).  The  other  con- 
junctions take  the  indicative,  with  the  exceptions  mentioned  Obs.  17 

Obs.  1.  Quoil  (generally  not  quia)  it»  nscd  :  1)  if  the  clause  has  the  force  of  a  complet- 
ing That-clause,  boinj;  ijoverned  either  by  one  of  the  rtrba  afrctuurn  (p.  51H)  foil.),  or  by 
th?)>e  verbs  the  objects  of  which  d<'note  at  the  same  time  their  causes  (p.  .V.KS).  The  use 
ol  quia  alter  such  verbs  is  fxtremelv  rare,  whi-n  qxia  may  generally  be  paraphrased  by 
'■for  no  other  reaaon  than  that  \  as  :  'lieprehenili.^  me  quia  defendam  et  ir.isceris.  C'ic.  Snll. 
18,  no.— Id  quia  non  est  a  me  factum,  ugis  (jratiast  Ter.  Ad.  4,  8,5.-2)  (^'/w/  (very  rarely 
quia^  is  usrd  if  the  cause  is  represented  us  the  means  and  instrumknt  of  the  ipain 
action,  so  that  the  -vndetic  antecedent  eo  is  either  used  or  may  ))e  supplied,  as  :  VitiOsi 
principes  non  solum"  obsunt  quod  (  -  toquod)  ipsi  cornimj'uniur,  sed  etiam^z/O'/  (  =  eo 
quod)  corrumpiint,  pliisque  exempio  (piani  peccaio  nocent.  Cic.  Leg.  3. 14,  3-2.— .Anctaque 
invidia  ad  pU-betn  quod  (  =  eo  quod)  tribQtum  etiam  in  siipendium  miliium  collatum  est. 
Liv.  10,  4»;.- Id  fernim.  etiamsi  ha'sis.-et  in  scuio,  pavOrem  iAc'xQhiW.  quod  (  =  to  quod) 
arma  omitti  coLrebat.  Ib.-.»].S.  See  p.  (iUti,  Obs.  4.  i^uia  is  very  rarely  used  in  clauses 
denoting'  instrumcntaiiiy ;  but  it  .M)inelimes  occurs,  i-ven  in  place  of  'J'haf-claime^  {Vnvt- 
clauses)  lor  the  sake  of  emphasis,  as  :  Id  lulfliuui  fui^^)e  tx  tO  quia  lacluni  est,  inlelligi 
df  bet  (from  the  very  fact  that  etc.)  Cic.  Fat.  •>,  18. 

Op.s.  2.  On  tlie  other  hand,  quia  (not  quod,  nor  qvmn,  quoniam  etc.')  ninst  be  used  in 
answer  to  a  (^rEsTioN  askiri<_'  for  the  reason  or  cause  ol  an  action,  as  :  Cur  dixisti  testi- 
monium in  alios?  (^uia  coactus  (sum).  Cur  damnati  sunt  i  Quia  creditum  e^t.  Cic.  Sull. 
17.  48.— Owe  tandem  ista  cau.ta  est?  Quia  liiec  est  mca  germana  i)atria.  lb.  Le<r.  2, 1. 
Comp.  lb.  2.  3,  7;  Part.  Or.  4  ;  Liv.  6, 18  ;  Ter.  Andr.  4.  3, 13;  H).  r.,  2,  51 ;  Eun.  1,2.  »; 
Heaut.  4,  5,  53.  In  anteclas<ical  language  quia,  in  such  answers,  is  frequently  strenirth- 
ened  by  euiin,  wliich.  according  to  the  English  conception  is  redundant.  Comp.  Ter.  llec. 
3, 1,  31 ;  Heaut.  4,  5  52. 

Obs.  3.  Aside  from  these  diflferencc?,  quod  and  quia  are  used  without  distirction*, 
1)  to  express  a  motive  (se''  the  examples  under  ^1),  2)  to  represent  the  principal  act  ion 
as  the  consequence  and  tffect  of  the  causal  prwiicate  (caum  efficiens),  in  which  instance 

*  Several  trrammarians  have  unsuccessfully  tried  to  *establi-h  various  diti^renceM 
between  quod  and  quia.  liAMSiiouN  says  :  C^uod  denotes  a  caise  (Uksacue».  i.e.  that 
which  immediately  precedes  an  action,  and  etlects  it :  quia  denotes  the  ^qround  \  i.  e.  tlie 
remoter  cause,  by  whidi  the  action  becomes  p()ssil)le.  That  tliis  distinction  (which  is 
almost  correct  in'reirard  to  quia  and  quum)  is  utterly  uratuitoiis,  is  evident  from  the  pas- 
sair»  s  given  under  J  and  />'  in  the  text.— Meiiung  says  :  Quod  always  letains  tlie  mean- 
ing 'that\  8o  that  it  mav  be  paraphraseil  'on  account  of  the  fact  that".  But  this  is  no 
Eeouliaritv  of  quod,  l)eiirg  just  as  true  in  reirard  to  quia.  — Uki^w  aimo-t  reverses  Hams- 
orn's  difference,  by  stating  that  quia  represents  an  immediate  and  necessary  cause,  quod 
meaning  '  in  respect  to '. 


DIBECT   CAUSE. 


683 


a  consecutive  Vt.lau.  r.^yll^^^^%^^:^4:^^X^^ 
clause  taking  the  place  o      ''^  J^^^/.,  ,^',!:^' i^^^^^  relations  by  C|uod-clause8 

C;esar  never  uses  ^f «' ,^  \V^  ses%^1  ve^y  mi  ch  oftener  than  quod  (about  m  the  rela- 
only.   on  tlie  other  »«»'d  !;»>>"?'.  ^'^?""^;/'^^^,"^'^  xvhich.  by  this  writer,  is  rarely 

tion  of  three  t..  «'1^^)' ^.''^^,'^,^\'^  '''.I'^n  ;!,\^^e  the^^^^^^^^^  cmijunctions  without  giving  a.  y 
expressed  by  quod.  Cicero  «  'ilj^^'l\:'„  f  Vimbonv  The  syndetic  antecedents  ol  quod 
preference  to  either,  except  for  the  sake    f^o^^^^^  ii,o).  V^«.  »««'•«  "^"^"^^  ^''^^^ 

Sre  propterea.  iccirco,  eo  {tare,  ^';^/«''  ,f/'   '.f/'  :,t ,  fr^dv  o  quia- 

icnnoSni  «1«^-/'^^ ^;!/" /..^^^^J^/'dl.fS  veni'syracfisas  qvod  ab 

Examples  :  A.  Quod  and  ?^'»'' V  i  «"^"^ '  -  "^v  motive  in  coing  to  Svracuse  was, 
oa  urbe  transmissio  in  Gneciam  1"/^  «  ,'^"1  (  -  my  ^^^,Vood  C.c.  Aiil.  i:3,  7.-Quem 
,h:n  the  passage  to  O.reece  fmm    liat  ot>      as  .^^^^^^^^.^    Sail.  Jug.  92.- 

locum  Marius,  (/?/ot/  ibi  ro.g'^/''^^/ ml-tTcessisse  credCbant  hostem,  in  amnein  ruunt. 
Itaqueetmulliindme  freti,  ct  rywo^nneli   tcs^^^^^^^  mbQiius  plebis  legem  pro- 

Lvl2l,  5.-llnic  simu Has  cum  .^''^E^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^  ^.'^  ;^^  licslet  quo<i  Ja.n  beft- 

mulgaverat  qua  e  c.  V,^,%^\^j,^' J?' „..,  ci^^^^^^^^^  Sail.  Jug.  5  ;  7  ;  «1 :  Cic.  tin. 

•  tus  nollet  esse.  Cic.  1  use.  5,  21.  ^*\"  ,\'; '-^\^:, YJJiVi^  aucioribus  sum  certior  factus.  vel 
,  16. 53  ;  Liv.  21,  25.-Postea  y,^';^  XTudierVim  <  BiS^^^  vel  quia  administra- 

<^uod  tanta  res  erat,  vel  ««^/^f  \'  ^  "  e"t  coiiiman  s  q^^^  ad  me  de.ata  essent,  scnbenda 
Tio  liujus  Ix-lh  nnhi  nim  K'j^f  >  l'-»  "^/^J  ut  "is^  t^i^V^''^'^  <1"^'^  ''^^"^""^  sequuntur, 
ad  V..S  putilvi.  Cic.lam.  15.  ^' 1;-/,  ;\^f, .  "^^^^^^^        j/  a^  i   i.-Dionvsius  utrnmnuemter- 

taceant  autem  iecirco  quia  ^'''''^''^^'^^^I'lX^^X.  iierimeidi  sui,  alterum  quia  dictum  id 
tlci  jussit.alteruiuv^J"  v'»'"denu.nstumsset^^n^^^^^^  ^^^  coopta.us  in  augurum 

risu  approbavisset.  lb.  '\  use  5,  -i^^;-*^;,;;/;  1^/.""  26.  UH.-Epicydes  prolectus  in 

colle::ium  non   erat,  non  "^";^;;'  '"^,,^^;''^^^^^^^^^  Liv.  24, 

^;:-^sr:u.^r^;:dt\i:sr;s=^p|^ 
2;;s-;^^i^;n!s:is;;uibu^ 

?l.ll:  21.17;  4,59;  1,4;  Cic^AtM,  3^5   J_a^^.5^  ^.^^^^  ;>,.o/)^,rfa  ^empitemam 

li.   Quod  and  quia  =  calsA  ^^f^*^'*;'*-^,*^,:. /^r".  ,  _  Voinniates  tfficiunt  iif  deorum  vita 

in  acie  ancipiii  iisquam  ^•^''•'=    f.  '        ZZ' "n^VJum^  possumus  dicere,  q./ia.scnpta  non 

ciens  (butliever  the  means  and  '"^,^;";"'^"  .5^^!  ,  i"  o/Zas  a  rfved  at  by  way  of  kea- 
f.rence  thai  <<>''7'^^''«"«^'^^^,'-,t^'^.V, "'  *i'"  «ction  as 

SONINO  or  logical  ^«^^^'i-^^''^.^' 'V,^  .1  mSt?*  Hence  causal  Quum-clauses  are  used 
an  vmnediate  sequence  ol  the  <^^f  ; ;'  »  V*;  ^ .f  ,  «Vllogi^ms,  as  :  ^um  omnia  qu;e  ratiO- 
1>  a-  a  form  of  the  major  and  minor  piemi.c  '^^^.^t'^;^''/^ ?;;,;.  m  Ulcere,  uUam  rem  prie- 
nem  habent  pra-^teut  eis  ^;^^^:::^^tc^^L^  ^  Cic.  Leg.  2,  7, 16  (  = 
gtare  mil  One  omnium  ^^"  "-J/'t  f  "t";,,  P^'c  •  ?  atmii  nefas  est  dicere  etc. ;  3.  ergo  confi- 

«r,.nic,  «nee  in  "•''"y"' '^-i  P^-^^-^f.i^Tp;  i<'^™co;^^^^^         iu  tUe  common  acccptatioD 


684: 


CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 


DIRECT  CAUSE. 


685 


qucmqnani,  si  minus  in  maxiiiijl  arte  qunm  illi  in  minimi!»  oper»  consiimpperim  ?  lb. 
Jii'p.  1,  22  (  =:  1.  Opirtcos  progrecii  in  «nil  arte  fttudenl ;  2.  (Uqni  mea  ars  ed  i-espiiblua ; 
'\.  tvfjo  rt'ipnt)lica'  stiidCrc  me  oportet).— LuciiUus'  n'sponclit,(lin>s  s^t*  liabere  viclnos,  equi- 
ti-m  Ifomflniiin  (rt  libertlimm,  quorum  quutn  e,<fitnf  mai;iiilic;v  villie,  conct'di  sibi  opoitOrc 
qu<»(l  eis  qui  in(<'iir>ris  ordini;»  e.«*s(>nt,  licCrct.  lb.  Li-l;.  .'1  i;i,  yo  (  -  1.  (^tiod  iiiferioribus 
liii't.  mihi  cotice'fi  ojxjrfef  ;  2.  (iff/>n  viiini  mei  mai^Miiticas»  villas  hofjent ;  ',i.  ergo  milii  licet 
villain  luibC'ie  mai;niticam).— 2)  (^umn-claiiset?  are  espicially  used  if  one  or  more  inter- 
mediate iinkfi,  denotini:  the  immediate  caui^c  of  the  principal  i)redicate.  must  be  siip- 
plied,  as  :  Qxum.  mentiuuem  ejus  rei  in  vetustioribus  annalibus  nullain  inreuintn,  mai:is 
lit  belli  ({jdlici  cans:!  (lictatonin  crcatum  arl)itrer.  incllnat  aninms.  Liv.  7, '.Msupply  : 
because  if  T.  (^uinctius  h.id  been  appointed  dictator  for  the  purpose  mmtioned  before, 
it  would  have  been  recorded  in  the  annals).— (|ui  {i.  e.  deOrum  metus)  quum  descendere 
ad  animos  sine  allquo  cominenfo  miraculi  non  ]>OMef,  simulat  sibi  cum  de3  Ejjerifi  con- 
jjressus  noctiirnos  esse.  Liv.  1,  19  (  =  .Numa  pretended  t(»  meet  Ei.'eria.  bircaune  he  wished 
to  make  I  he  Romans  accept  his  reforms  in  religion,  since  v\r.).  —  Q'n/tn  propter  lon<:itn- 
dinem  au'iiiinis  minus  facile  omnia  per  se  oliire,  et  quid  quoque  loco  faciendum  esset 
proriiiTie  j)f>ssenf,  jiis^Criint  promiiitiare  ut  iinptdimttita  relinqueient,  atque  in  orl)em 
cousisterent.  Ca;s.  B.  (i  5,  ;ii  (Thov  i^avi*  the  order  to  relinquish  the  ha^'irnut',  fj^cuftse 
this  was  n«'ce»sary  to  form  a  compact  line  of  l):ittle,  ^i//r^  the  column  was  too  lonir  to 
impart  to  them  the  necessary  commands).  Comp.  Liv.  1, 13 ;  Ca;s.  li.  U.  2,  2o,  and  the  pas- 
buyes  qu<>ted  p.  Gr>5,  Obs.  1. 

Obs.  5,  This  line  of  distinction  between  quia  (quod)  and  qitum  (the  same  as  in  Enirlii'h 
between  'because'  and  '^ince')  cannot  be  drawn  with  ab.-olute  definiteness,  since  the 
supplyiii;;  of  connecting;  links  will  olten  appear  more  or  less  unnecessary,  accordinij  to 
the  conce|)tion  of  the  author,  and  because  the  term  •immediate',  if  applied  tothouijht,  is 
not  capablt"  of  belnir  absulutily  determined.  lU-mc  qw/tn  or  quiau/uod)  may  siometimea 
be  optionally  used,  and,  not  rarely,  in  very  similar  sentences,  tiie  one  is  fuund  wiih  a 
Quum-clause.  wliile  in  the  other  quid  or  quod  is  emjjloyed,  as  ;  Nam  quutn  soliifldo  et 
vita  sine  amicis  insidiArum  et  metiis  p<ena  sit,  nitit»  ipsa  monet  amicitias  comparflre. 
Cic.  Fin.  1,  20,  r><;.  Compare  with  :  Quia  nuilo  modo  sine  amiciiiil  lirmam  et  perpi-tuam 
jncunditatem  vitie  tenere  possumus,  iainv  amicitia  cum  voluptjlfe  connectiiur.  lb.  1, 
20,  ti7. — Itaque,  quum  lonL'iiHiuil  a  domo  insfei  militia.  incerinuKiue  sit  quando  domos 
vestras  risili'i  ^i/i.v,  commeStiim  do.  Liv.  21.21.  Compare  with:  Hannibal,  quia  fe^sum 
militeni  i)ra'liis  operibusqiie  habebat.  paucorum  his  dierum  <iuieteui  dedit.  lb.  21,11. — 
Dionysiiis,  quum  in  comnninibuei  suL'<:jestis  consistere  no/i  ««/(/e/f/,  coniionari  ex  turn 
altjl  solGbat.  Cic.  Tusc.  ."i,  20.  Compare  witli  :  Ariclnu-*  quia  palam  inteilici  /urn  />o(traf, 
oblflto  falso  crimim;  insontem  oppressit.  Liv.  1,51,  It  is  evident  that,  in  all  thesis  p.is- 
i^ii'^v^,  quu/n  miirht  have  been  subsiiiuted  for  quia.  iu\i\  quia  Utrquu/n.  Tim-*  clauses 
with  p/wse/fiat  quum  (see  the  passjij^es  p.  ti.")5,  Ons.  2>  are  often  entirely  equivalent  to 
clauses  introduced  by  7Haj'i/nt  quod,  to  maqis  quod  iquta),  eo  mi/ius  quod,  as  :  (^uanto 
erat  in  dies  «rravior  oppuuMiatio,  et  maxime  quod,  ina<:njl  parte  miliium  conlectil.  res  ad 
pauciiiltem  defi'iisorum  i»«*rvenerat,  tanto  crebiiOres  littene  ad  Ciesarem  miitebantiir. 
C'a>s.  B.  li.  5,  l.">  (  =  y>/(f.vfr/im  quum  res  ad  piucitjlti-m  peivenerai).— Ab  magis  quod 
pridie  GermJlni  retinC-ri  non  pot«'rant  (  =  quum pnnstitim  ntiuiri  noit  jxjfuisxt ni).  lb.  1. 
47. — Neque  llispaniam  nei:li<;endam  ratus,  <^o  7/ii/ius  quod  baud  ii^nnrus  erat  (  =  quum 
prcRsertiiu  haiui  ijxnilrus  esset)  circumitam  ab  Homilnis  earn  legiltis*.  Liv.  21,22.— Causal 
quum  can  never  be  connecteil  with  any  syndetic  antecedent. 

Obs.  G.  Quoninm  (probably  derive(!  from  quum  \\\\(\  jatn)  i.s  used  if  the  action  of  tho 
clause  is  represented  as  known  to  the  ptr'-oii.  addres.'<ed.  especially  if  referrin^j  to  the 
addressed  person's  own  acts,  or  as  g-uendhj  kiiowu,  whereas  with  quia  and  quod  the 
author  means  to  inform  the  reader  or  the  person  spoken  to,  o/  a  lit w  fact,  not  presumed 
to  be  known  to  them.  In  Entrli.-h  this  relation  is  expressed  by  ' niiice\  Quoniam 
closely  resembles  the  French  pui^que.*  Mostly  quouiam  is  used  conventionally  in  i)ar- 
ticular  relations  (Obs.  7),  but  it,  also,  frequently  occurs  with  the  force  of  both  quia 
{qu(Hi)  and  qunm,  beiniir  distiniriiished  from  these  conjunctions  by  the  mere  fact  that  tho 
statement  in  the  claust;  is  assumed  as  kuoirn.  as  : 

A.  Quoniam  with  tiik  fokck  of  quia :  Quoniam  me  verbo  premi?,  posthac  non  dicam 
*MisKrt08  kssk',  sed  tantiim  'misehos';  hince  you  flirht  me  for  a  word  (improperly 
used),  I  will  hereafter  not  say  'miseros  esse',  but  oidy  'miseros*.  Cic.  Tusc.  1,7.— Sed 
\W\\e,  quoniam  satis  jam  ambuKlttim  est,  l«)cum  mutemus,  et  sermOid  reliquo  operam 
demus  sedentes  ?  lb.  Le<;.  2, 1.— .\Jii,  ut  celeriter  perrumpant  censent,  quoniam  tam  pio- 
I>inqua  sintcastra.  Cies.  B.  G.  6.  40.  Comp.  Caes.  B.  C.  1,72  ;  Sail.  Juir.3.">  ;  10.4;  Cic.  Leij. 
3, 2 ;  lb.  Part.  Or.  25,  «9;  O.  G.  O.  2, 4  ;  Cat.  3, 12, 29;  Sen.  2:J,  84  ;  Plaut.  Mil.4,2.  54.    Otten 

*  Very  rarely  (and  only  in  anteclassical  lanjruaL'e  and  late  Latinity)  quoniam  occurs 
when  a  fact  not  known  to  the  i)ersoii  addressed,  or  new  to  the  reader,  is  stated  as  a  cause: 
Quid  isiuc,  inquam,  oruilti  est?     Quoniam,  miser,  quod  habui  perdidi.  Tcr.  Eun.  2, 2, (i. 


qucmiam  and  quia  occur  in  the  same  period,  both  exprcppincf  the  pame  relation,  and  be- 
ing both  used  of  known  facts.  Comp.  Cic.  Or.  1,  50, 217  ;  lb.  N.  I).  I,y9, 109  ;  lb.  Cjcc.  1. 2  ; 
lb.  Fam.  1, 1. —  Quoniam.  in  jrood  prose,  does  not  take  the  syndetic  antecedents  of  quia. 
However  Colum.  12.  jujef.  says:  Quoniam  hunc  sexum  diligeiiliai  assignaverat  nattira, 
iccirco  timidlOrem  reddit. 

li.  Quoniam  with  the  force  op  qnvm  :  Est  ijritur,  qnoniam  nihil  est  ratiOne  melius 
et  in  fiomin'e  et  in  deo,  prima  homini  cum  deo  ratiOnis  societas.  Cic.  Leg.  1,  7. 2:1— Ex 
quo  intelliiritur,  quoniam  Griecorum  oratOrum  pnestantissimi  sini  ei  qui  fiigrunt  Atheuis, 
eorum  aiitem  princeps  facile  Demosthenes,  hunc  si  qui  imitetur,  eum  et  Attice  dictflrum 
et  optime.  H).  O.  G.  O.  4,  i:i — Quoniam  tantum  natflra  a  natQra  (iistat.  quid  mirum  est, 
has  dissiimilitudines  ex  ditferentibus  caiisis  esse  facias?  lb.  Fat.  4.  -Et  qvoniam  del 
lacientls  adjflvant,  prius  iiivo(  abo  eos.  Varro  R.  H.  1.— Adventus  Komanr>nim  Latinos  ex 
prope  certa  tiduciil  mox  cnpiendic  arcis,  quoniam  oppido  potirentur  (quasi-suboblique), 
in  exiguam  de  se  ip>is  spem  verterat.  Liv.  6.  :i.'i.  Comp.  lb.  (i,  ;i7  ;  8,  (i ;  Sail.  Jug.  3. 1 ;  Cic. 
Leg.  2,11, 27;  lb.  :i,  1;J.  .'JO:  3,16;  Part.  Or.  9,  .-^3  ;  21,72;  Fin.  1,11,37;  Sen.  Cons.  Helv.  14. 
— Sometimes  7//o/<iam  and  7M'/m  are  coordinate  iii  the  «^ame  sentence,  as:  Quoniatnqve 
exspectaiiOne  rerum  bonarum  erigifur  animus,  recte  etiam  Spes  a  Calatino  consecrata 
est. . . ;  quumque  Vesta  quasi  focuin  urbis  complexa  sit.  ei  colendai  virgines  pne-int.  (.-ic. 
Leg.  2, 11.  28,  29.— Primuin,  quum  orbis  lerue  dirhus  sit  in  duas  partis  ab  Eratosthene,  et 
sine  dubio  y>/o//t«;/i  saliibrior  pars  septentrionaiis  c^t  quain  meridiSna,  dicendum  (est) 
magis  earn  fuisse  opportfliiam  ad  colenduui  quam  Asiain.  Varr.  li.  li.  2. 

Obs.  7.  The  conventional  usaires  of  quotnam  must  be  derived  from  the  original  tem- 
poral meaning  of  this  conjunction  {—  quum  jam).  In  anteclassical  language  g^'owia/zt 
occurs  both  with  the  me.ining  ol  quum  (dui/i)  temporal,  and  of  ])Os(qvam,  as:  Is  quo- 
niam moritur— ita  avido  ingeniu  fuit— ,  numquam  indicSre  id  lilio  voluit  suo  ;  Wheji  he 
was  dying,  he  did  not  wish  etc.  Piaut.  .\n\.  \)ro].  *).— Quoniam  prolecius  hinc  est  Char- 
mides  ;  While  Ch.  was  on  th-^  point  of  departure.  lb.  Tnn.  1,  2, 12. — Ego.  qvoniam  in- 
Hpexi  mulieris  sententiam,  cep'  talxllas,  consignavi  clancuium,  dedi  meicatOri  etc.:  Af' 
ieT  understanding  the  womans  meaning,  I  took  my  tablets  etc.  lb.  Mil.  Gl.  2, 1,51. 
So  li).  Merc.  4, 1,  1;  Baccb.  2,3,  5fi.  In  classical  language  there  are  only  traces  of  this 
temporal  use,  without  referiinir  also  to  cause,  as:  Nunc  quoniam  hominem  generavit  et 
ornavit  deus,  porspicuum  sit  illiid  ipsnm,  per  se  naturam  longius  jyrogredi  j  Let  th.s  be 
understood,  that  alter  Go<l  created  and  endowed  man,  Nature  by  her>elt  is  continuing 
[his  work]  Cic  Leg.  1,9,27.  Indeed,  jtostquam.  in  its  sect>iid  and  third  meanings,  men- 
tioned p.  660,  Obs.  1,  combines  a  tt  nipoial  ard  causal  signification,  and  qvoniam  is 
frequently  used  with  similar  force,  as  :  Marius  anxius  trahere  cum  animo  suo  omitte- 
retne  inceptum,  quoniam  Irustra  erat,  an  fortunam  opperiretur.  Sail.  Jug. 9:i.  But  in 
this  and  ad  similar  passages,  the  fact  of  the  clau>e  {quoniam  incepium  fiuslra  erat)  is 
represented  as  known  to  the  reader,  having  been  narrated  before,  and  althouirh  pa-<tquam 
might  have  been  used  in  its  place,  such  a  substitution  of  quoniam  is  not  admissible  in 
those  Postquam-(laus«'s,  in  which  the  action  is  mentioned  for  the  first  time.  It  is  prob- 
al)le  that  tne  anteclassical  temporal  use  of  qucmiam  was  basrd  on  c<dloquial  i)ractice, 
and  that  this  usage  was  continued  in  the  following  periods  of  the  language.  For  we 
find  in  Festus  (s.  v.  quouiam>,  and  Donatus  (ad  Ter.  Ad.  prol.  1)  the  express  remark 
that  quoniam  had  the  meaning  of  both  quia  and  poatquam. 

Obs.  8.  From  the  original  temporal  meaning  of  quoniam  must,  in  the  first  place,  be 
derived  its  use  as  denoting  a  reason,  not  /or  the  principal  action  as  svch,  but  for  its  pres- 
ent performance,  or  for  its  performance  at  the  time  spoken  of.  Generally,  in  this 
instance,  the  clause  contains  an  action  just  accomplished,  the  performance  of  the  prin- 
cipal action  being  made  pos.^ible  or  desirable  thereby.  Quoniam,  if  thus  used,  is  ren- 
dered either  by  '■after''  or  by  'since',  or  by  a  participial  construe  tion.  as:  Nunc  quoniam 
illi*>,  quantum  mores  niei  poscel)ant.  re-i/x)udi.  pauca  de  repnblica  loquar  (the  'res]X>n- 
dere'  being  not  a  cause  for  the  principal  act  as  such,  but  the  accoinplishii  g  of  the 
resjiondire  makin<;  it  possil)le  for  the  speaker  to  add  his  other  remarks).  Sail.  Juir.  85, 
44  —Sed  quouiam  nos  tanti  viri  res  ad/nonuit,  idoneum  visum  est,  de  natiira  ejus  paucis 
dicere.  H)  Ub.— Quoniam  j»s/jondi  postrcMiite  tuje  paiijme  prima  nu-a,  nunc  ad  primara 
revertar  tuam.  Cic.  Att.6.  2. 3.— (^/'/o/^iaz/i  fldem  mnaii-tri  cognostis,  co(/noscite  nunc  d\»ci- 
puli  a'quitatem.  lb.  K.  A.  21.— C>//o//ia;/t  de  comniQni  totlus  Asiie  crimine  dit'tum  est, 
agqrediar  Jam  ad  singula,  lb  Flacc.  15  —Quoniam  nacti  te  sinnus  aliqnando  otiosum, 
cefte  audiam  quid  sit  quod  Epicflrum  non  i)ri>bes.  lb.  Fin.  1,5. 14.— Ariovistus  legatos 
miitit :  (^ucd  antea  de  colloquio  jjostulasset,  id  per  se./iVW  licere.  quoniam  projAus  aices- 
siiist-f.  C;es.  B.  G.  1,42.— Quibus  quoniam  pro  pietate  sa'llfectrit,  hal^re  mine  se  rationeni 
oflicii.  lb.  5, 2».  —  (;/'/o/<irtm  tuta  ea  pacataque  ab  terL'o  relinqutbantur,  ovamhn^  jam 
co-itationibu-  in  Philippum  conversis.  Liv.:i;i.  2.— Qiiein  Ca;sar  remittit  cum  mandatis  : 
Q'luniani  ad  id  tempus  facultas  colloqueiidi  non  futtit,  atque  ipse  Brundusium  sit  ven- 
IQrus,  iiUtresse  rcipublicui  se  cum  Pomp5jo  coUoqui  {i.  e. :  Quoniam  facultas  adhuc  nou 


686 


CAUSAL  CLAUSES. 


hi 

l)U 


et  cade;.!  fere  aDsent..  q.uo.  .i  conun  e..eTnu.  consoqne  Cu^.  t  am^^^  ^^^^.  ,,i  ^.^ 


OB.  10.  Hence  aA.e  the  u.e  of  Q"oni.m;Clau^vvhen  ^ --^^--;;;:^^?^: 
fio/iwith  the  principal  action,  bat  \"C'J"Jy  7"t:r?ornied  Sue  clause.  nio>.t  generally 
MO/»,  conMclerinir  which  the  P""^'P^V<'Sh  in  oS^^^^  th^form  of  thJ 

refer  to  actions  of  aper.on  adciressed    which  mohlqutd.^^^^  con.idera- 


Hon 

Hon, 

reft-r  to  actions?  of  a  pei 

thi 

tioi 

the  connection,  as  :  (^uare,  y//o/,,am  J«  A  ^  ,^ '^'d  if  onS  (I    ^^  two  points,  ?/« 

ante  dica.nn.  qme  etc.  (  =  ^.nce  V'^.^^  I'^^^^^^.^^Vth^    e  wh^^  Cic.  P.  0.24,86. 

vwst  connder  them  now;  and  firs^t  we^uiil  ^PS' ^/'J  ;.;","  \,;'V,„^  venire  invi- 

_(^.a/.mm  hanc  .ihi  populOque  »«»"^^^";«;  ■^,';;V,V^"\'^:^"s  'm-e  he^\^^^^^^  I'i"^ 

tilt  us  crravarCtur,  h;pc  e^se  q.ue  a»)  eo  P"^V''£p:n;:r>  ,ri.^  rL;^^^^ 

for  thc".e  heueti.s  by  decliu  n^  an  miemcMV.  he  \<-'^.^'^'^^^^.«-;Xw/7jf^  dri/«/i.s-  <;.«u.' 
in  writing ;  they  were  the  Jollowin-  C  a^s  «;, J'; j ; '^;' .T.^' ^  ^ornS'it  si  nuus  omnibus 
Tepudiatum  est,  nonu-n  tanti.-n  vjdeb.tu    r.  Si^^^^^^  P^  ^,.^  ^^j^^,,,^  ,^t 

reliquis  ina-istralil)ns  impenlbit  (  -  *^"V  t.^!  i  «n  t    o  i.th.  r  mn-it^trates  etc  ).  Cic.  Leir. 

^;;s;i:quo^xciJ;ipli:VGiiiiac.f.uh..acra 

Sause.  as:  Nee  s.>h.m  ^•^''Mioi'e'.tur  Nxrba  r  t  u„e^^^  '„       ,ca^lv  arran^red  etc., 

fi//m  ^'.«^  ann>nn  alterumdiximus     W  u  < U  "y'^'  •';»'''>  ';  "       ,,„.,,    (^.j,..  (,,at.  49. 104. 

70hirh  we  laid  down  as  the  second  P'>V'f  ^l^/^J^r^h'!^^^^^ 

Comp.  11).  Le-.  2. 15,  .33.-Of  ten  a  t?"<>"'a"»-^>a  '^;^^.^^^,  »  "^  Itm-r/  /ir,S^^^^ 

^vord  or  phrase  of  the  princ-pal  s.ntence,  »^ ;.  f*;'J^,^**,:  ""l^"',,,  d  'n  inOta  :  =  the  niaj- 

)«et,  a  1.C  l..llica;  cciimonix-  l.r<.(U-lii..tii.r,  J'  -:-*'-/^,"'  ',';,/;„„,  „m,J8    n  civiia.c  clls- 
,^nail,mdam  Numa  (livlrn  auct,.i;  J..ns  '  "^1    :"-Fri  aiScoH  a  conlrovir^ia  est 


DIRECT   CAUSE. 


687 


1,21  (  =  An  the  twelve  tables  forbade  a  prescription  within  five  feet  of  the  boundary,  so 
we  shall  not  isuffer  the  old  landmarks  of  the  Academy  to  be  encroached  upon).— Ego 
vero,  qnoniam  mtn  desermsse  mihi  vidcor  pra^sidium  in  quo  a  P.  K.  locStus  sum,  del>eo 
j)n)fccio  in  co  quoque  labt^rSre  nt  sint  dociiOres  cives  mei.  lb.  Fin.  1,4  (  =  ^«  I  did  not 
desert  the  po<t  in  which  I  was  placed  by  the  R.  P.,  so  I  must  show  my  gratitude  to  it  by 
promoiini;  tite  knowledjre  of  my  countrymen).— Sometimes  qnoniam  occurs  with  the 
f(»rce  of  qvod  (  =  quod  attinet  ad),  as  :  Qiiare  quoniam  nonnullOrum  permo  jam  incre- 
bruit.  |)Hitim  se  ip-os  Attice  dicere,  partim  neminem  nostrum  diceie,  alferos  neqligamns 
etc. ;  Tlierefore.  a.<  to  tlte  fa^t  that  the  pretensions  of  several  persona  are  going  abroad 
that  etc.,  let  Ut,  reply  nothing  to  the  one  class  etc.  Cic.  O.  G.  0. 4, 11. 

Obs.  1.3.  Qnando*  (since,  seeinij  that,  considering  that)  represents  like  gvoniam,U^o 
cause  as  known,  and  is  a  synonym  of  qnoniam  in  all  its  conventional  meanings  (Obs. 
8-11),  desiirnatinir  a  fact  ascausini,'  an  action  '■vndtr  the  circumstances  or  at  the  time 
being.''  But  in  classical  langUHge  it  is  not  used  instead  of  quoniain  when  the  latter  repre- 
sents an  ordinary  cause  as  granted  (Obs.  {\).—Quando\,  as  a  causal  conjunction  (for  its 
temporal  use  sec  p.  G6G),  often  occurs  in  the  anteclassical  writers  :  and  also  in  Livy  and 
the  classical  poets  ;  but  rarely  in  CiceroJ  and  Sallust ;  never  in  Caesar,  but  often  in  the 
silver  writers,  who  sometimes  use  it  =  qina%  (always  however  referring  to  a  known  fact). 
Examples  :  Due  me  ad  earn,  quando  hue  veni  (seeing  that  I  am  here).  Ter.  And.  4,  5, 
2i.—  Quando  hoc  bene  successit,  liilarem  nunc  sumJmiis  diem.  lb.  Ad.  2,  4,  23. — Quando 
habeo  multos  cou'iiiiros.  quid  opus  sit  mihi  liberis?  Phiut.  Mil.  8, 1, 110.— Quin  ergoabia 
quando  respcmsum  est?  lb.  4.  2,  'd\.— Quando  igitur  i)ote^^t  tibi  Gemiinis  Quintus  vidSri, 
quid  babes  exi)ior;lti  cur  non  etc.  Cic.  .\c.  Pr.  2,  2H.— (;^'ya/irfo  el  aliis  locis  de  virtQte  dixi- 

mus,  et  sjepo  dicendum  est quando  igitur  virtus  est  affcctio  animi  constans,  ex  ea 

proliciscuntur  honestaj  volimtates.  Cic.  Tusc.  4,  15.— MancSmus  in  eadem  sententia, 
y'/«//(/o  hoc  miserius  esse  nihil  potest.  lb.  Att.  9, 13.  S;].— Nunc,  ^'/a«c?6>  per  illam  licet, 
festlna,  atque  uti  ca?pisti  perge.  Sail.  Jug.  102.— Si  tu  perinittis,  volo  ego  illi  belluae 
ostendere,  quando  adeo  fi-rox  pr:esultat  hostiura  signis,  me  ex  ca  famiha  ortum  etc. 
Liv.  7.  10.— DictatOri  neutiquara  placCbat,  qnando  nulla  cogeret  res,  fortunie  se  comrait- 
tere  adveisus  hostt-m.  II).  7. 12.— Quid  prcelia  enumerem,  9</a/i(/o  res  plus  valent  quam 
verl)a?  Tac.  Hist.  3. 11, 6.— Eva-jTinur,  quando  uberior  sempt-r  extra  causam  materia  est. 
Quint.  3,  11,2.-).— Omip.  Ter.  Ad.  3.1,9:  3,2,  .50:  3,3,81:  llec.4,4.81:  Eun.  1,  2. 116:  Sail. 
Jug.  110.  7 :  Liv.  10,  44  :  2(i.  50  :  29.  24  :  35,  22  ;  39,  51  :  Veil.  2,  14  ;  Tac.  Hist.  1, 19,  V\  ;  4,  5  ; 
Ann.  1.44,3;  1.  .57,  1  ;  2,26;  3,18;  4.6;  4.64;  13,2;  1.5,19:  Quint.. 5. 12,  13 ;  Suet.  Cses. 
28 ;  Virg.  .En.  1.  261.— Often  quando.  like  quonia?}i.  is  connected  with  the  particle  quidem, 
being  generaliv  written  in  one  word  with  it,  as  :  Hiec  dctur  cura  censoribus.  qvandoqui- 
dem  eos  m  republiril  semjxjr  volumiis  esse.  Cic.  Le?.  3,  20.  47,— '  Bene  habet',  inquit 
SfXtius.  *■  quandoquidem  tantum  inteicessinnem  pollc'ie  placet,  isto  ipso  telo  tutabimur 
plebem'.  Liv.  «. :}.').- Atque  hoc  contiteor  jure  mihi  oht'MsinBc,  quandoqnidem  tarn  iners, 
tarn  nihil  conscia  sum.  Ter.  And.  3,  ,5.  2.  Comp.  lb.  3.  2.7:  Ter.  Eun.  2.  3.82  ;  Liv.  1,54; 
G,  ;i.S  ;  Cic.  Oral.  31, 112  ;  lb.  Brut. 44, 163.  lb.  Phil.  2,  3. 6  ;  lb.  Or.  3, 14,  .54^. 

Obs.  14.  Siquidevi  (or  si  quidem)  properly  is  an  emphatical  si  with  conditional  mean- 
insr.  Only  in  this  meaning  Hquidpvi  ocfurs  in  anteclassical  ]an<j:uage,  as  :  Si  quidem  (if 
indeed)  me  amditt,  turn  i>tuc  prodf^.o^et  Gnatho.  Ter.  Eun.  3. 1,56.— .vi  quidem  (  =  etiam- 
si»  centies  hie  visa  sit,  tanu-n  inlicias  eat.   Plant.  Mil.  2.  2,  34. — Si  quidem  (=  si  tnodo)  tu 

*  According  to  the  testimony  of  ancient  grammarians,  quando  was  pronounced  with- 
out any  accent  when  used  as  a  causal  conjunction,  but  with  the  accent  on  the  first 
syllable  wiien  used  as  a  temporal  adverb.  Paul.  Diac.  £xc.  Fest.  XV. 

t  Ilarelv,  instead  of  quando  \\\ii  form  quandbqne  occurs  in  two  or  three  passages  cf 
Livy,  as:  Quanduqne  lu.  T.  Manli,  neque  imptrium  consulSre,  neque  majcststein  pa- 
triam  vcritus,  adversus  edictum  nostrum  in  liostem  pugnasti,  nos  potius  nosiro  edicto 
plcclCmur  quam  etc.  Liv.  8,7.  Comp.  lb.  9, 10,  where  quandOque  is  used  in  an  ancient 
lornuila  in  })la(e  of  quando.  . 

t  Some  (for  inst.  Wunder  Var.  Lect.  p.  75  foil.,  and  Frkund  and  Andrews  in  the 
lexicon)  state  that  quando  never  occurs  in  Cicero  as  a  causal  conjimction,  changing 
quando  in  all  the  passages  where  it  occurs,  arbitrarily  into  quoniam.  In  this  expeditious 
WMv  we  niiL'ht  remove  a  great  many  words  oui  of  Cicero. 

§I)o.\atl's  (toTer.  And.3,  2,  7)  says  :  Quando  cr  qnuin  intcrdum  sunt  conjunctiOnes 
cau-aies,  et  quando  pro  quoidam  'et  quia  '  intelligimus. 

II  To  thesi' three  Ciceronian  pas«ai:es  should  be  added  Cic.  Par.  3,1:  Atqni  qvoniam 
pares  virtQtes  sunt,  recte  /acta,  quando  a  virtutihus  proficiscuntnr,  paria  esse  debent. 
In  this  pohage  some  codices  read  qvoniam  for  quando.  The  latter  was  the  common 
reading  belore'ORELM.  who  prefers  *  quoniam  \  without  sufllcient  reasons. 

^  The  difiVreuce  between  quando  and  quonia7n,iis  stated  by  Ramshoun,  and  endorsed 
by  ZuMPT,  Xharquoniajfi  denotes  a  cause  referring  topresent  circumstances,  and  quando 
a  cause  referring  to  circumstances  of  an  ind^nite  time,  is  a  mere  fiction. 


688 


CAUSAL  CKVUSES. 


'  ,c' f.m.  .crv!,,,.  to  deslsLte  Ihe  fact  ..f  the  ;;l»'''/  "/, »  -jl^Xh  ■  ,b  '  o   b  "     "^'' 

Kish.-d  by  the  tact»  et,„incrat.;d).      ''■  B"'-j'^;,f;;-^f  ^^a  ,1?, '  f  ;  i^^^M^^^^^^ 

by  the  fact  that  etc.l  siiiiiii.!.'  is  an  oversleppiif,'  of  t  ,  l'  '•"•  '  ■    •■  -'•  \]J"}":  i  Ti™y 
tian,  p.e„e  ,>bse,«Onem  a,.l.ellilbai,t    «V""'';"'  ;i^,,'  tl  "' '"'"^aM  l.  rtv  m  cave  ll.e 

of  ruan  or  ./.im.    For  the  ^^^-"vutu.n J.f  ^'/'yv^* J^<^^^^      kT-^cc  P  I     §  401),  it  occur,  in  the 
4    If  oMiy)y><^  has  the  force  of  Mil  EMiuiATic  I'AKTiri.h  if-cc  I  .  I..  8  ^yiN  • 

rono,vin?c:i,:,K.c,i..,,.:...I"c....,ec.i....wi,l,m«.<<<«^^^^^^ 

s;;;;  ^im  :^^i^sr..:'"miic;io,r'»^;rpa;,ic;i.nai^r^^ 

.  T„e  «atem™.  of  the  ^a,m,ja.ja,;,  «mt  ^vjjl^jj^  -a  iy  .1-  -'.'V -;«„-  ^r-- 

the  k^^ic<.i^rapher8  quote  the  follmv.n^pa-a^^^^ 

C-a^.-um  vidi.srt.  Cic.Fam.  1, •.♦,!).    ^  \   '  '"..V' '  iT;^      e  m^^^^  without  a 

of  the  Pui»l.  Sell.  Gr.)  i;»  misquoted,  all  the  le\t^  auu  luc  nmim.  1,11^^1.0     «       „ 


DIRECT  CAUSE. 


689 


as  h»\ve  the  form  of  an  apposition.  Phrases  of  this  kind  have  always  a  causal  mean- 
in*?,  and  nuiy  be  renolved  into  causal  relative  clauses  with  quippe  qvi.  as  :  Coniitioram 
prope  major  patrihus  quam  belli  cura  erat,  qttipj}e  prope  a^)is^um  ceim.iHiil,u.<  summum 
impenum  (  =  (piipfte  v'/i  amissum  cernerent).  Liv.5, 14. — Non  crediderim  PisOui,  qui 
quadrairinta  millla  pondo  ar^'cuti  seposita  in  earn  rem  scribit,  quippe  sinnmatn  pecuniaj 
neque  ex  unius  tun»  urbis  piieda  eperandam.  et  etc.  (  =  quippe  quaa  sumnia  ueque  trpe- 
raucla  fuerit,  et).  Liv.  K.'i.i. — Ne  metus  quidem  ab  Rouifluis  erat,  quippe  tam  paucis 
(  =  quippe  qui  tam  puuci  essent).  H).  25,  ;W.— Sol  Deinocnto  magnus  vidCtur,  quippe 
homini  erudite  (  =  quippe  qui  homo  erudltus*  fuerit).  Cic.  Fin.  1,0, 2().  Comp.  Liv.  1. 14  ; 
1,2.5;  8.4;  Sail.  Jug.  Wi;  lb.  1U5.— ti)  Rarely  y//i;>/>e  is  used  as  an  emphatic  particle  if  it 
is  not  thus  connected  with  causal  propositions  «)r  phraser,  when  it  may  be  either  ren- 
dered by  'of  cour>e\  or  be  lelt  out  in  Knglifh.  Often  we  may  use  the  F^iiglish  emphatic 
particle  "J/'Ay',  as  :  VidOte  quid  ea  vitii  lex  habitQra  fuerit.  ciijus»periculOsa  etiam  re- 
prehetisio  est:  et  aspexit  mc  illit»  oculis  quibus  turn  solCbai  quum  omnibus  omnia 
minabatiii.  M<»vet  me  quippe  lumen  curia;  ;  H'Ay  (of  couife)^  the  light  of  the  Senate- 
house  awed  me  (the  meaning  Iteing  ironical).  Cic.  Mil.  12, 3:i.— Ergoad  coenam  petitionis 
causa  si  quis  vocet,  condemnetur?  C/*/iy>/>^,  inqiiit,  tu  mihi  summum  imperium  petas 
fovendis  liominnm  sensibus?  (  HV/y,  do  you  mean  to  seek  the  highest  otlice  by  means 
of  flattering  men's  senses?)  lb.  Mur.  Jio,  74.— Jam,  inquit.  fateor  in  Gabinium  me  nefa- 
rium  fuisse.  Q>iip}y>  vides.  pcenam  illam  in  te  ipsum  esse  conversam  {Why,  you  see  that 
punishment  is  coming  back  on  yourself).  lb.  Dom.  4K,  120.  In  some  other  passages  the 
reading  quipj)€  rests  on  inferior  authority,  lor  instance,  Cic.  Mur.  30,  02;  Jb.  Phii.  2, 29,  74. 

IJ.  Often  quippe  occurs  in  the  hiptorians  (in  I.ivy  and  Sallust,  and  frequently  in  Velle- 
jus.  Tacitus,  Justin,  but  not  in  tU'sar.  nor  in  Cicero*)  as  a  cooudinating  conjunction 
with  the  meaning  of  nam  or  enim  (for.  ftecause).  as  :  DeteriOre  conditiOne  sumus  qiiam 
captlvi,  quippe  illis  ordo  militandi  tantum  est  mutSfus.  Liv.  20,  0.— Intelligo  a^quos 
bonosque  mihi  favere,  quipj)e  beneficia  mea  reipnblicte  procCdunt.  Sail.  lug.  «.5.  Comp. 
Ter.  lleatit.  2,  4,  9 ;  Plant.  Mil.  3, 1,  9 ;  Liv.  5,  3:3  ;  1,  25  ;  10,  41 ;  Sail.  Jug.  85,  27 ;  lb.  90,  lb.  53t. 

Obs.  17.  Causal  clause*  (aside  from  those  introduced  by  quum,  which  always  require 
the  subjunctive)  take  their  predicates  in  the  subjunctivk  1)  according  to  the  gtueral 
rulen  if  theclau^e  is  suboblique  (p.  398  foil.)  or  virtually  suboblique  (p.  404),  or  if  the 
mood  is  attracted  (p.  408) ;  also  if  the  predicate  has  the  force  of  a  potential  subjunctive 
Cp.  378  foil.);  2)  according  to  the  rules  on  relative  clauses,  if  the  clause  requires  a  sub- 
junctive ol  non-reality  (p.  543  foil.). 

.1.  Causal  clauses  introduced  by  quod.  quia,nr\d  quoniam,  are  frequently  placed  in  the 
subjunctive  to  desiirnate  them  as  conceived  or  uttered  by  the  subject,  without  the  addi- 
tion of  anvthing  else  to  indicate  ihis  fact  (see  p.  400,  §  000.  Obs.).  as:  Numa  Camgnis 
eum  locuni  sacravit,  quod  enrnm  ibi  concilia  cum  conjutre  sua  Egeria  essent  (  =  quod,  lit 
dlrit,  it)i  erant).  Liv.  1.  21.— Brutus,  velut  si  prolapsus  cecidissi-t,  terram  osculocontigit, 
scilicet  quod  ea  comimTnis  mater  omnium  mortalium  tsfiet.  lb.  1,  50.— Nemo  oiatOrt-m 
hdmiratus  est  quod  Latlne  loquereturX.  Cic.  Or.  ;i,  14.— g,uum  Sagunilnis,  quia  prieter 

leve  tnim  est  ttnum  ho* ,  risuni  movCre.  Cic.T)rr2,  54.— Recte  igiturdiceres  te  restituisse  ? 
Quippe  quid  enim  facilius  est  quam  etc.  ?  lb.  Ctec.19,55.  But  in  both  passages  quijrpe 
may  be  separated  by  punctuation  from  the  lollowing  words,  and  be  taken  in  the  mean- 
ing '  of  course  ',  '  certainly  ',  according  to  No.  0. 

*  The  passages  irenerally  quoted  to  prove  that  Cicero  uses  qvippe  in  this  meaning  are 
Phil.2. 29, 74: "0^2, 54.218:  Dom. 4s,  120.  But  in  the  first  passage  quin  must  be  read 
instead  of  quippe  (a<cording  to  the  belter  codices,  and  all  the  recent  critical  editions) ; 
in  the  second  and  third  passaires,  quip/)e  has  merely  the  meaning  of  an  emphatic  particle. 


t  Quipi^e,  if  used  with  causal  force,  cannot  be  considered  as  a  sufjoidinating  conjunc 
tion,  although  there  are  several  passages  in  which  it  is  either  coordinate  with  qoia,  01 
in  which  quia  may  be  substituted  lor  it,  as  :  Neque  tameii  SimAtus  provinciam  inyltu< 


or 
us 


sensiOniim  et^se.  quid  in  duabus  wrhWm*  fort  f  Liv.5,24.— Senatus  dis  agt-re  graiias  quod 
Camillus  in  magistratu  esset ;  dictatOrem  ry/ayvx?  dicendum /aj^v'^,  si  privatus  esset.  lb. 


publicis  consilia*  Liv.4.57.-Unde  enim  eam  pecuniam  confici  jx)sse,  nisi  tribtlto  in- 
dicto*  lb  4  (W  —A^am  Siciliam  nimisceleri  desperati0nererumcanc6^j«am  («*?««).  lb.  21. 1. 
i  llere  the  subjunctive  is  not  used  on  account  of  the  negative  form  of  the  principal 


G90 


CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 


.pen.  -i..--'^  crcvU.^  anin.   r^  CJ^.^I^^h^^'S 

the  SHL'UiMiaiKs  as  the  logical  ^"  *J^\\ '^,1^  '    ;   ili   it     I  iv  'M  •>  fHere  the  Hubjnnctivcs, 
a.  the  rea.onj    cla,nor.m  r.,n.n^.  .^  ,^,  co.ieiv.cn.y 


A      i>     1    11    Jo.   liv  ^  -Vi-  Oiiintil  5,10,119.-0)  Fokmlla  1.  wita  nan  quia:  r^u..^ 

of  '  iwa  id  '  in  . he  meaning-  mm  quod     ,  1  h,^>. '''^^l^^^,  J'^^^  ifow  little 

Si';*'.»-.  rtSc  tUc7oru'.  of'iu™'t-lu»e  of  u^u-iealUy  is  iu  co>,forml,y  wuU  .he 


DIRECT  CAUSE. 


691 


rum  cxcmpla  tibi  misi,  iwn  vt.  ddibemrem  rcddendjene  assent,  sed  quod  non  dubito  etc. 
Cic.  Att.  It,  17,  4  {not  that  I  deliberate  whfther  they  should  be  returned;  =  non  qvod 
Udilterrirein). — Ha?c  ad  le  stril)0,  uoa  ut queaf<  tudemere  solitudineui,  sed  etc.  lb.  11,  15,  3 
(not  that  you  ari-  able  to  remove  my  y^orrow,  but  etc. :  =  non  qvod).  Thue  the  clauees 
occui  in  reversed  order:  Qiiorr^uui  hiec  pneteilta?  Qiiia  sequitur  illud  c\c...^non  ut 
ear-  reii  cau>am  allVrient  auiOris.  lb.  Fato  15,35  [  =  lla-c  dicta  hunt  non  vt  {  =  quod) 
cjiut^am  atiVrrent  aniuri.s,  .s>(/ (/>/ia  sequitur  etc.].  This  formula  with  '  nt  causaP  rarely 
occurs,  on  account  of  its  ambiiruity,  and  because  it  was  supplanted  by  the  third  formula 
'  non  quo\—(d)  Fokmui-a  3.  This  is  the  most  frequently  used  amonj»  the  formulas  men- 
tioned ^ZiTMPT's  as^erlioll  to  the  contrary  notwithstanding),  and  is  best  explained  by 


Plane.  23,  5ii;  Alt'.  7,  15;  Fam.5.19.2;  Liv.  28,  27;  28,37;  32,  S3.— (^)  Formila  4:  Sed 
me  non  movet  re-piiblica,  non  quo  sit  mihi  quicquam  carius,  fed  desfiei^dtu^  etiam  Hippo- 
crateji  i^tat  adhit/ere  tnedeclnani.  Cic.  Att.  l(i,  15.— Comp.  lb.  Att.  4, 15;  Fam.  3, 17,  3 ;  lb. 
l(t,  12.3:  Or.:i,  24,  93;  Brut.  21,83;  Tusc.  1, 1 :  Liv.  21,31.— (/)  P'ohmula  5  :  Hujus  con- 
htiiutionis  Ilermauoras  inventor  esse  existimtltur,  Jion  quo  non  vn  dnt  e3  veteres  oratO- 
n'<,  sed  quia  non  animadverterunt  artis  sciiptorc*  cam  supcriores.  Cic.  Inv.  1.  11.16. — 
Majores  nostri  in  douiinum  de  servo  qmcri  noiueruiit,  non  quia  non  jxtsset  yemm  inve- 
nlri,  sed  quia  videbatur  indignum.  lb  Mil.  ?2,  59.  Comp.  Id.  Verr.  2,  2,  35  ;  Quint.  8,  3, 
42;  lb.  2,  2, 2.— (5-^  Fou.Mri.A  Gt :  Ego  me  ducem  in  civTIi  bello  negavi  esse,  non  quin. 
rectum  es»d,  sed  quia,  quod  multo  rectior  fuit,  id  milii  fraudem  tulit.  Cic.  Att.  7,26.— 
Pnt  me  tuli,  me  nihil  malU-  qiiam  pacem,  non  quin  eadem  timCrem  qute  illi,  sed  ea  bello 
cirUi  jtofiOra  duceba/n.  II).  8,  11  /A  1.— Comp.  Cic.  Fam.  4,  7, 1 ;  16,24,1;  Or.  2, 72,  295; 
Urat.  68, 227  ;  Liv.  2, 15, 2  ;  lb.  32, 32$. 

D.  Xon  quod,  and  non  quia  Omt  not  non  quod  non,  non  quia  non.  nor  non  quo  and  non 
qvin)  take  the  indicative  if  tne  predicate  of  the  clause  is  rej)ri'sented  as  a  real  fact, 
which  is  denied  to  be  a  cause  for  the  principal  statement  (in  English:  ^  not  becautie'); 
as  :  /Elius  8extus  'egroirie  cordfifus'  el  •  catus  '  ab  Ennio  dictus  est,  non  quod  ea  qu<xre- 
bat  qiiuj  luinKjuam  invenlret,  sed  quod  ea  respondebat  quie  eos,  qui  qniesi!»sent,  et  cura 
et  net'otio  solvcrent  (/Elius  Sexius,  'the  Sceptic'  really  sought  what  he  never  found, 
namily  the  objective  truth  «>f  things  ;  but  this  ua.^^  not  t/te  rea.<on  why  he  was  called  '  ca- 
tus '  etc.).  Cic,  Kep.  1, 18.— Elto  sum  exercitus,  non  quia  mvltis  debeo,  sed  quia  nepe  cou- 
cnrrit...ut  in  omnis  verear  ne  vix  possim  gratus  vidGri  (Cicero  really  was  owing  obliga- 
tions to  many;  but  that  was  not  the  reason  of  liis  embarrassment).  lb.  Plane.  32,  7S. — 
XeA^  vero  hoc,  quia  tiuni  ip.<e  augur,  ita  sentio,  sed  quia  sic  existimilri  nos  est  necesse. 
lb.  Leg.  2, 1'l.—Son  quia  ad<->!  pnesens.  dico  hoc.  Ter.  Ad.  3,  3,39.— Nam  et  ille,  y.on  quia 
ernif,  leno  est,  sed,  quia  leno  erat,  emit;  nee  hie  quia  sic  erat  locutus  occTdit,  sed  quia 
erat  occisOrus,  t^ic  b.cOtus  est.  Quint.  5, 10,47.— Comp.  Cic.  P.  0. 14,48;  Quint.  5, 10,56; 
11).  5, 10,82.  The  poets,  however,  sometimes  use  the  indicative  with  7wn  quia  {non),  even 
if  tiie  fact  is  non  real,  as:  llancidum  aprum  antlqui  landabant,  non  quia  nasus  Illis 
lUlllusVa^  sed  quod  etc.  Ilor.  Serm.  2, 2,  89.    Also  Livy,  in  a  number  ol  passages,  usea 

principle  often  mentioned  (p.  6J2,  foot-note;  p.  608,  Obs.  6).  In  fact,  this  is  the  only 
way  in  which  we  can  explain  our  English  That-clause,  used  in  this  connection  (  =  not 
for  the  rt-a-son  that).  . 

*  Most  grammarians  explain  non  quo  by  an  'attraction',  stating  that  '^ non  quod  is 
chanired  into  'non  quo'  to  aL'ree  with  the  ablative  eo  which  7nai/  be  understood  {non  eo 
quodl.  If  this  were  so,  we  mav  proi)erly  ask  why,  in  the  frequent  Quod-clauses  depend- 
ent on  eo  without  a  negation,  the  same  attraction  never  occurs?  Moreover  this  attrac- 
tion would  be  entirely  without  analogy,  since  in  Lati7i  relative  clauses  the  case  of  the 
relative  is  never  (and  certainly  not  in  good  prose)  attracted  by  its  antecedent.  The  cor- 
rectnesti  of  our  explanation  is  almost  made  indubitable  by  the  fact  that  clauses  with  non 
quo  never  occur  with  the  indicative,  as  the  clauses  with  non  quod,  ancl  non  quia  (see  No.  JJ). 

t  The  quin  in  these  clauses  may  be  either  explained  as  the  reirular  conjunction  in 
neirativc  That-clauses  with  negative  principal  predicates  (deriving  themfrom/OA-w//a2), 
or  by  the  original  interrogative  negative  meaning  of  quin  (  =  not  why  J  should  not). 

X  The  use  of  quo.niani  In  these  lonnulas  peems  to  be  excluded,  because  a  predicate 
cannot  he  at  the  same  time  an  acknowledged  fact,  and  against  reality.  Nevertlieless 
we  read  in  Tic.  Verr.  2, 1,  9;  Utar  oratlone  perpeiuil,  non  quoniam  hoc  sit  luce-se.  ve- 
rura  ut  experiar  utrum  ille  etc.  Madciq  has  emendated  this  passage  (against  the  codi- 
ces): 'non  quo  Jam  hoc  sit  necesse'.  But  we  way  explain 'no/i  qmniam"  by  saying 
that  Cicero  used  quoniam  with  the  same  peculiar  force  (Obs.  9),  as  he  would  have  with- 
out a  neiration.  But  tiiis  question  can  hardly  be  decided  withcmt  another  passage  m 
which  non  quoniam  occurs  in  this  meaning.    Such  apastage,  however,  is  not  extant. 


692 


CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 


the  indicntive  with  rofcronce  to  facts  non-real,  whore  Cicero  would  u?e  the  PuhjnncHve. 
a».:  IduQuinctiofMcilr  i.upetrAium.  »w^  <pna  (Ba-otioB)  ^at.'^  «VP'o;;  ^''-*"  ^"^.^'^'f/ ;;''« 
onia  Aniiucho  n'<re  jam  suMucto.  favor  cM.iuiliaiuliir»  noinii.i  Hotnano  apiid  civifjltea 
?rat  Liv  33/27.  Co'ip.II)  10,41  (non  ^luia  1^»<<  ummi  rird.e.n,  «nd  lb  40.33  (;.m,  r,>na 
cunctm  su.k).  So  Cohini.8,  iilt.  Frequently  such  indicative,  are  f'»"";»^",';;!,^' !:;;•.« 
of  the  Mlver  »?e.  as:  Vutu.  niacnifiea  c-r,  nou  qnia  per  t-e  fmihwi  f-^f  malo  <^»"ii><'e, 
Ped  oiiia  animiTni  laxat.  Sen.  N.  (^  Pnef.-S.iadente  Ku^ro,  no,,  qyxa  industnft  Haviani 
'7?/.^  .e  .H^e^^^^  Tae.  II.  3, 4.  Conip.  (Jell.  7.  %  11.  -In  later  Latinity  even  um  qmmmvi 
i^fuund  with  the  indicative  in  re-ard  to  lact>.  non-n-a  .  a»^r  ^on  uuoi.tamm-^^xy^MW'^ 
unani  derivationem  e.s-e  hoc  fevertnd  (inst.  of  'no»  y^/w/  h(H' fm^rnU  )  hoe  Ca'sar  dixit 
^ed  nt  ete.  Pon.p.  Con.in.  Art.  I)(»n.  p.  KlH  Und-Aofi  quo.  and  ,am  qmn  are  never  nsed 
11  he  predicate  of  the  clause  i^  r.'presented  as  a  real  fact,  ^.nce  neither  qnin,  nor  q>'0 
can  he  cu.."trued  with  the  indic'itive*.^ir  the  pre.licate  of  these  causal  clause.  1.  a 
hypothetical  preterite,  it  take,  the  form  mentioned  p.  4  j.{,  Nj>.  ^- »=;•  \  7'""i>^'\\f  ,^e 
iide».«e  Dotui-sein  1  Nan  m(0  proflci  jx^fnertt  aliquid,  sed  etc.  Cic.  1  Mill.  l.b,14.-ln  tlie 
writers  fie  silver  a^e.  ;.  Jv"^^  "«'d  non  quia  are  often  found  «'!»'""'«  «"'f  ^;;',^' 
."that  the  copula  must  he  suj.plu  <1.  as  :  ^:quioriht,s  «nim-s  recepti  sm.l  q.  I  »1  .^^^ 
uium  veueiant,  /«>/uyMia  mode.lior  miles U-c e^*•eO,  "^ed  duci pluBauctoruau».  1  aft  11. 6,  m. 

H.  ADYEKSATIVE  CAUSE.  (CONCESSIVE  CLAUSES.) 
^  624  (\>NCEssivE  CLAUSES  aic  either  indefinite,  or  definite.  In- 
deiinUe  concessive  clauses  are  those  whieh  contain  an  action  merely 
assumed  bv  the  author  (  =  even  if,  hoicenr  much).  They  are  intnuhiced 
bv  etiavui\\\\\\\  the  indicative  or  siibjnnrtive),  qmnnvis  with  the  subjunc- 
tive or  ?/Mvith  the  subjinuMive.  7>^/?y/<7c  eoneessive  clauses  reter  to  a 
certain  fact  (  =  althouuh),  ami  are  inliotluced  by  quamquam  or  €t»i  (tarn- 
ftsi)\\\\h  the  indicative  (rarely  by  y//^n/im),  or  by  ^//^(//i  with  the  suU- 
iunctive  (p.  Con).  The  impersonal  verb  licet,  if  used  with  the  torce  ot  a 
conjunclion,  belomrsto  bolh,  delinile  and  indetinilc  concessive  clauses. 
OB*  1  Concessive  ciau^es  denote  advkksativk  caipe,  t  e.  a  cause  which,  ^f^JpI'l'^S 
to  ueneral  experience,  sh-uhl  result  in  a  c.nsequence  either  contrarj/  to,  or  efferent 
fmm  that  expressed  oy  the  principal  sei.ten-e.  Hence  they  contain  hoth.  ^^^  odrermtive 
Ind^conresdre  element;  m/r./>y//i/>.  hecause  the  result  expresses  a  C(mtr(U<t  \o  the 
c^  s^  m  7/rS?4  hecause  the  author  concedes,  a^  ii  were,  that  there  is  a  tact  form- 
hi.;       nam  t  .d^  to  the  pnncip.d  stat^'ment.     Therefore,  concessive  periods 

are     ftJr  pS  n'«»ns   Af  proV..sitions   expressly   containing  the  predjca  e 

Mo  ionce,     '     r  hy  ordinary  wlcersativ.  n>^rdinaf.  prop,. si. Ions  with  famen  (hu     .M       ; 
a^'  FafZa  concede)  insitam  e.se  nobis  crporis  nost.i  cantfltem.  mm  ^*^;>  "      '  * 

pendum  illi :   .en'ie.dum  ner,o  mt  I  deny  that  we  ^•;;>"'i . ''V, ''14     Ih  itracu     K^^ 
et4  eius  in-ila  est  caritas,  serviendnm  /nine»  non  est).    !>en.  hp.  14.-l)i\  tiacus  (.ixu, 
Irtre^e  ilia  esse  r^ra ;    sese   tamea  auir,re    fraterno    commovCri.     (  se».  U.  G    1 ,  20. - 
Seintur  ex  oppi.lo^b^  i".n  deMitit  tani.n  (  =  eM  ex  oppido  ;;xpul^u^  est 

S/  on  de<t  tit)  Ih.7;4.-Indertnite  concessive  clause,  have  either  the  nature  of 
cZcWioZ  i«*^'i  he  n^^  ntroduced  hy  ttiaom),  or  of  indefioit.relaftve  clause,  (he.n;,' 
fn. n  d   c ed  l.v  </«'  //a-i.s).     t>ee  p.  4!.S  f.dl.-The  .y>,de(ic  antecedent,  of  concessive  clause» 

a  r   in  ;;?^r/.«  ..4.  .i/uUi...  which,  »---'-r- »«•«  ^7;>^;«  'y  "j^^^      'j;  le 

niyy/o^U  Ui»  '  no.t-cedent»'),  so  tliat  the  concessive  clauses  form  the  pwKMh.  n  inc 
KSa/  set.tfn^^^  concessive  dau.e,  n.»  syndetic  «ntecedentH  are  Used 

%Zuh  sometime!.,  in  antecia.sical  style  even  in  .hi«  Instance  tutncu  1«  used,  as: 
Tumtn  liet,  elH  tti  fidem  seivaveri«.  Plant.  Hud.  5.  Z,  b-i. 

Or*  2    Clause,  introduced  hy  etianm  (even  if),  are  a  ppecieg  of  conditional  clauecs, 
,,,.;"?:i.:;..  '!! !  v.rv\;..snectjht^  fonniny  ti.e  connectin^^  link  between  the 

'♦IUmTiTFT li^in'dicative  alter  non  q>i«d  the  -rainmaria.i.  d.sa-ree.  Kuhner  ^«v^  :  '  /?y 
the  t'dicatire  the  canse  iv  v^prexenttd  as  hkai.i.v  i^or  noldinq  (/oo<i\  uhich  is  utterly 
rrt.n eouf  MEiKiNG  .ays  :  '  Livy  and  later  writer,  .tra-.frely  use  non  quod  and  »onq''ia 
will  I  e  i.Klica  ive'  (i-norin-  the  reqular  use  of  tlie  iudicuiive).-MAi.vi«  remarks  that 
J^a  re  are  Tfev  exceptions  to  The  use  of  the  suijunctive  after  non  7'/0(/  quoitn-  the  above- 
lin  re  lilt,  J»  11,«  v^.\^-    i»i»"« .1,..    i)..Ki    ».1/^.1.   <!■.    ^uv,i.    'If  ilw  rtiusfi  d&nitd 


nmoe  up  to  suit  the  one  p!4.-.-..^v.  ^.  .. ...  — --  ...---^    .  .    1  .  .  ,  „„.. 

iudicaiivea  u^eed  by  Livy,  Seneca,  and  Tacitue,  in  the  above-quoted  pastage^. 


ADVERSATr\T3   CAUSE. 


693 


concc!»pive  and  conditional  clauses.  In  t>oth,  the  Efiamsi-clavse/i  and  conditional-clavsu, 
the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  represented  as  an  uncertain  continjjewcy  ;  but  in  ctndi- 
litnuil-clau.'^es  this  uncertainty  etlectsthe  reality  of  tlie  principal  predicate,  while  in  Eiiam- 
si-dauses  the  principal  predicate  is  represented  as  real  or  as  non-real  notwitht<tandin<r  the 
uncertidnty  of  the  dependent  predicate.  Etiamsi-clauses  have  this  in  common  with  defi- 
nite concessive  clauses,  that  they  r>ecome  identical  with  them  when  the  uncertainty  of  the 
predicate  is  removed.  Thus  the  conditional-concessive  clause  'Omnia  brevia  tolerabilia 
esse  tlebent,  efiam-H  magna  sunt '  (Cic.  Am.  "27, 104)  becomes  a  dtfinile  concessive  clause 
if  a<lefiniie  subject  is  substituted  in  the  sentence:  '  Hie  dolor,  etsi  majrnus  est,  tolera- 
bilis  esse  debet.  '.  —  Sometimes,  however,  etiarn^i  (the same  as  'even  if  in  English)  is  used 
in  tlie  meaiiin<;of<?Avt(alihou<rh>,  just  as  si  may  virtually  be  equal  to  quia.  If  soused, 
etlntnsi  rtqiiires  th»;  indicative  (while,  if  vice  versa  etsi  is  used  in  the  meanini;  of 
fiatnd,  it  very  frequently  has  the  i^uhjiinctive,  see  Obs.  13);  as:  Etiamsi  (althoutrh) 
dudum  />/^r«^  amhiu'uum  hoc  mihi,  nunc  non  est.  Tcr.  Hec.4, 4, 26.— Nam  ista  Veritas, 
e/ia/z/M  "(althoiifj;li)  jucunda  non  6,-*^,  mihi  tameii  <,'rata  est.  Cic.  Att.  3,  24. 

Ons.  3.  Eflam>:i  takes  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  accordinj:^  as  an  ordinary  condi- 
tional clause,  if  sul)siitured  for  it,  would  take  an  indicative  or  a  subjunctive.  See  Chapter 
VI. ;  as:  Kliamn  qui<l  scribas  non  fiaf>ef)is,  scribito  tainen.  Cic.  Fam.  1«),  2«. — EtiamA  alie- 
riiiii  xixwnun  jHvd and >ifn  est,  }  erdam  poiiiis  quam  sinam  etc.  Plant.  Ep.  3, 4, 85.— £'/t«m>;i 
caiitilte  a  iratre  niajOieri//w;-,  misericordiil  certe  vinci  non  debeo.  \A\.A(),\b.—Eliantsi 
uwn.'  relkm  (contrary  to  reality),  bold  viri  me  ut  id  non  facerem  rojrareiit.  Cic.  Plane, 
3rt.— (^uis,  hoiie<ta  in  familiil  fiistitfltus,  non  ipsa  tiirpitudine.  f/ia;/i.vi  euni  hesflra  non 
/f;7  (viiiuallvsuboi)lique).  oftinditur?  lb.  Fin. 3,11.  Comp.  lb.  Oft".  1,4, 14  ;  Div.  Ciec.  fi, '-il ; 
N.  L).  1,3'.«,  ill»:  Mil.  H.  21;  Fam.  1,!»,  47:  Tac.  Hist.  1,  «>,  47.— Thus  Livy,  accordinj;  to 
the  prireiple  explained  p.  .3.31,  No.C,  uses  the  subjunctive  if  the  principal  predicate  is  an 
imperlect  of  coiiiiiitj;ent  .•letion.  as  :  Id  maxiine,  tfiamsi  /ta:sl^set  in  sciito,  mvc  penetrasset 
in  corpus.  pavOrem /rt(u:/l><j/.  Liv.  21.  8.— Csesar,  who  does  not  use  etiatnsi.  instead  of  it 
employs  si  loliowed  l»y  etiani  :  Ut,  si  qid  «tiain  in  pifesi  ntiil  se  o<cid/a.^sefd,  tavieu  his 
rerum'omnium  inopia  pereiindum  viderCtur.  Cies.  B.  G.  (J,  43.  Comp.  lb.  7,  9. 

Obs.  4.  QxamrisW  a  compound  of  the  relative  quantitative  adverb  ^vam  (as  much)with 
the  2iid  sin^.  pres.  iiid.  of  the  verb  rell''  (  =  as  niucli  as  >ou  wish).  But  in  this  compo- 
sition. qiianiHs  conventionally  has  the  force  of  an  indefinite  relative  adverb  (  =  qnarncun- 
Q'tf.  which  <:oes  not  exist,  see  p.  .501.  No,  •.)),  the  verb  ris  being  in  xbe  indicative,  since  in- 
dellnile  relative  clauses  require  this  mood  (p.  bOH,  Obs.  12).  Quainvis  occurs  both  as  a  rel- 
ative adverb,  and  as  a  concessive  conjunction,  with  the  following  difl'erent  functions  : 

.4.  It  is  used  as  a  cijncessive  quantitative  advkkb  to  quMlify  adjectives  or  other 
adverbs,  =  •h'm'erer''  (much,  little,  rich  etc.);  'ever  so"  (many,  few  etc.).  In  this 
iiistjince,  of  coiirr-e,  it  has  nothitiL:  10  do  with  the  m<K)d  of  the  predicate  of  its  proi)Osi- 
tioii,  the 'concessive '  idea  existing  merely  in  rcL'ard  to  the  adjective  or  adverb  thus 
qualified,  as  :  (^itamris  insi/nens,  poterat  perseutiscere  illam  esse  etc. ;  Jlouerer  sti/jnd, 
he  miirht  have  perceived  etc.  Plant.  Merc.  4, 1,  21.— Itaque  ad  quemvis  numerum  epliip- 
piaioiiim  equiiuin  quannis  pauci  adire  audent ;  Hence  ever  so  few  (however  few,  or 
•evt-n  the  smallest  niimtier')of  them  dare  to  attack  any  number  of  horsemen  on  sad- 
dled horses.   Cies.  B.  (J.  4.  2.— (^uasi  vero  milii  difticile  sit,  quaMVis  fnidtos  nominatiin 

roferre.  Cic.  K.  A.  Iti.— Externus  timor  qnamris  suspectos  injensosque  inter  se  jungebat. 

iv.2,.'i9.—(N(d)ili;s)  quasi  pollui  consuiaium  credCbant  si  eum  quatnris  egreqius  homo 


I 


adepius  foret.  Sail.  Cat.  2-3,  (J.— Tiberius  qua'sTta  iuterdum  comitate  quamrU  fnanifestajn 
derectionem  ttgGbaf.  Tiic.  Ann.  ♦'»,  50.- Stultitiam  accusare  quamvis  copidse  licet.  Cic. 
Tusc.3,:W.  Ccmip.  Cic.  Fam.  2.1«,  2;  7,3,6;  Phil.  2.45,  llti  ;  Verr.2,2,54;  2,;3,97;  Tac. 
ni>t.  l,'2ti.  Sometimes  <y?/ff/«?i.<,  in  anteclassical  and  postdassical  language,  and  in  the 
poets,  has  the  nnaniui:  of  an  adverb  of  intensity  without  any  concessive  idea(=  ad- 
tnoduni),  as :  Quannis  ridiodus  est,  ubi  uxor  non  adest.  Plant.  Men.  2,  2,  43.— The 
poets  sometimes  ii^t-  quandit^et  in  the  meaning  of  quatnris:  Quainlibei  inflrrnoe  raanus. 
Ov.  Am.  1,7,  ♦>«;.  — Instead  of  ihe  second  person  singular  vis.  also  the  third  person  singular, 
or  the  first,  second,  and  third  i.erscms  plural,  are  thus  joined  with  r^uam  in  the  mean|ng  of 
quatnris,  as:  Expectate  lacinus  quam  rultis  improf/wn.  Cic.  \  err.  2.5,  5.  See  No.  2^. 
B.  (;;//«»«? iV,  as  a  conce>sive  adverb,  frequently  is  used  in  imperative  sentences  with 
predicjites  in  the  potential  subjunctive  (p.  382  foil.)  qualifying  both  predicate-adjectives 
and  verbal  predicates.  With  the  latter  it  has  the  meaning  -ever  so  much  '  (or  however 
tnuch),  the  adverb  ouantumris  being  u^ed  as  lis  synonym,  in  silver  Latinity  *.  Sentences 
of  iliis  kind  may  either  be  rendered,  according  to  their  original  conception,  as  impera- 
tive sentences,  or  as  concesfhe  clauses,  with  •however'  as  introducing  conjunction,  as  : 


*  Quantumvis  occnrs  once  in  epistolary  style  =  '  very  much '  (Cic.  Att,  7,"  3, 12).  In  Cic. 
Am.  20,  73,  the  reading  ' quant uinvis  licet  excellas''  is  less  supported  \\\m\qvamvis.''  Livy 
uses  quantutniibet  =  quannis:  Oro  vos,  quantunUibet intersit  inter  Romanos  et  Achmos, 
modo  ne  in  lequo  hostes  vestri  apud  vos  sint,  ac  nos  eocii,  jure.    '  "'  '^'  "^" 


Liv.  39,  37. 


694 


CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 


ADVERSATR^   CAUSE. 


695 


Ouar7,rl<^  hoc  hirrx  «7,  tamcn,  quonJam  expodit,  fariam  ;  =  cither:  ♦  J/rr?/  ^^'f  <  »  ^« 
^<^ZdiSj7aceZr,  or  (lisirracclul  a^  it  may  be  '),  I  shall  yet  < lo  U  since  it  is  >^M''^tl';  t , 
r>r-  •  I  Swrr  U  sen.cef..rtl.is  may  be  etc.').  Cic.  Ofl".  3,  Ki.-Quoc  frpe  est,  id,  «''«^  ^.« 
tx'dre  rnxmitu  hone^t^m  fi.ri  imllo  m<.(lo  potest;  =.  either:  '  ^'^"^  ^'''^/ ^^ '',«  V  'I? 
%X{iJZr  m  nrurh  couceaUd.  it  cannot  by  any  means  ';<'^;;";i;'';;"rVM?  OfT  ^  t 
Ts  di-tr.acefiil  cannot  become  ht)nest.  howtver  much  it  maybe  connakd  .  <- 'C- "' ■ ';•  '• 
n-  tead  ,  la  mele  subjunctive,  the  periphrasis  uith  licet  and  "^;'  'J""^  l^'f  «V^/'^Viou 
1  n  H17  <»)  is  liedueiitlv  used  in  connection  with  qmi7nrh<  (al>o  in  '"^•.^^'■^"'^l'  " 
iuMitioned  No  4)  s:  Quamrl^ IM  in^ectTmvr^unvo^mvuxo  ne  phUosj.phi  .iiit  i: M  y 
Teever^o  wcA  attack  the  Stoics',  or  •  lloic^nr  wvch  we  attack  the  J^toics  etc.  Cic. 
Tu<(^  4  '>4  -iSter  (OS  quaviris  emmeres  m>dtos  licet,  nonnullos  rcpcrio  pernicu^os  tri- 
hn  n  i>s  I  b  L.  cr  8  W-Oitawvi,<  licet  Menti  delubra  con^ecnnwK  tamcn  etc.  Jb.N.U.  o, 
^-^miH^^^(r>^w>^'ncet  .a-cY//a.s-,  omnls  tuos  ad  «mplissimos  honOre.  porduce  e 
lb  \m  -H  ;3  C(.U  Liu-i--«.«01.-Thus  with  qmimlibet,  instead  o^qmiinus:  ^am  cer  e, 
^un^ui^'  nni:Z^^^^^  contuleri,  .etas  juior,  majora  tan)en  a lup.a  disc.t  piier  etc 
Z).!  nt   1   1   18  -So  ssxWxqucnarultii',  qiiavx  rokt  etc.  :  (^(om  volet  yo**/'//;./  I-^'t  ""\  J*f,J 

/ve  Jo  nmch  ihowerer  much  l.e  JeJ).  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  ^  ••- V"«//i/^f  ^^  .^''l.f  £'•  4^^^ 
r..v.u-ibnntnr  •  1  et  them  yield  as  ihey  may  {however  much  they  yield).  It).  I  im.  -  ^- 
ViJa;/)  S  '/v/^^^^^^  rtmr;//./.v  tamen,  etc.  iho>reve7'  ivvch  we  may  love  ourselves 

tcTl\    {\T^^^^  1  •  - (^"^i'n vis  ,um  means   ' hou<v.r  little  \  as  :  Senect us  r^'mmm^ 

mndfmv!^,  tan.en  aulert  lam  vi.  iditatem,  in  qua  e.iamnunc  erat  bcipio  (hoicever  little 
6w7't/^/<^//ie  old  a;?e  may  be).  Cic.  Am.  3,  11. 

C  From  the  constant  use  of  this  c(mstruction,  the  adverbial  expression  (Jl'^mri^;  '" 
the 'cone,  l.tion  of  the  people,  became  tantamcunt  to  a  ((.njinction,  uud  wa»  Jel  as 
;,,c//  He  ce  it  was  used  to  introduce  all  kinds  of  clauses  relernns  to  an  »'<1'  '  '  « 
c  cc--^ive  '  and  'quantitative'  meanimr.  if  their  predicates  were  in  any  kind  of  p«»ten- 
U-  sub  um-t  es.  ?o  that  we  may  rather  say  that  (^iamvis  i.  qoverrud  by  a  >',^'U'>nct^re 
n  that  oVamvis  noverr»^  a  subjunctive.  lU,th  the  '  nmefivite  c.mcesMve'.  and  the 
•  nui  ,tit-ui?e  '  mcani  w^^^  least  in  the  Ciceronian  age,  are  almost  a  ways  contained  in 
Uuamvi  "cUuis.^s  ^  to  apply  them  to  a  definite  eoncesMve  relation,  and  to  a rtnm 

ic?  a  peali^r'ciJcumlocutilm  i.  nsed  :  qnamvis  i»- >/'^-^^^'[,V:  f.^^' »""':;"  Vni 
^  av  he  be  e\er  so  happy,  as  he  really  is  -  7fiO,st  happy  as  he  t-^:  Cic.K.  A.H.  ^^•-|''» 
^//ItLI's-  7-i/Ar*/L^6^  KUANT,  mihi  tamen  lisum  non  moverunt;  Jhdiodotfs  os 

ffi  r£^  it  dd  not  make  me  lauizh.  'lb.  i\.m.l,:i-l.-Qnamvi<  prmUus  ad  coptandum 
Ji  s  c?^^  Ks.  amen  nu.nquam  ea  res  tibi  tam  belle  in  "«entem  venire  poiu.  lb.  An  2, 
^r-y-llmmrl-^  i-imr  fuerit  acQtus,  ux  fuit.  tamen  etc.  lb.  Ac.  Ir.  2.  22,<.'.K-So  1. 
Vhrr"^  W.;s  lh~4  iV-  on-  8,33.117;  Att.8.9.3;  Tusc.  1, 18,41,  and  often  For  onh- 
i^  5,mmvi;-dmi^.i  ioi^are  ;  Cic.  Tus..  2, 25^  «1  :  V-r  2^  1,  9  ;  Kep^  ^,  37  ;  Ofl.  2,  ., 
24-  Or  1  5:3  2.30;  lb.  54, 2:31;  Auct.  Her.  4, 4ti ;  ben.  Cons.  Pol.  30  ;  lb.  Ep.9. 

n   Often  the   intensive  force  of  quamri^  refers  neither  to  the  predicate  nor  to  an 
ndiectver  adverb   bu    to  a  substanfive  adjunct  <.f  the  predicate.     In  this  connecti.| 
oiamVi^^^  X^^Wornqmnn  (althoujrh).  but   its  intensive  fo've  w    I 

S?ratdo«erex  minition.as:  (jlnnvis  i:mm  Themistndes  ^w''';  lamhf'^r,  e\  nt  i.o- 
2n  ejus  qmim  ioinnis  illustrius,  non  minus  pneciarum  hoc  quam  ilh.d  J,''<,  l^-f'-d""",^*-,  ^ 
rioveverii'l.tfnllvThemist«.cles  maybe  praised,  and  -however  more     >Jl"^t"*;»^„ '"'^ 

?i^^;stJe    nVinfn-  o   l/.amrl^-  is  so    weak  that  it  approaches  the  '"^;i'"'.';^;'f  /  ^'Z;.  ; 
Iv  Ue  the     redfcate  itill  retains  a  potential  force,  as  :  Etsi  munus  rtaptHP-,  7"'" 
ln\^oste?Jr^^^^^^^^^^  q"ide,n  solet  nisi  concitStus.  tamen  e-o  etc. ;  Althoui:.  not 

c-vcM.  the  pe^^^  ivont,  to  il.sist  on  a  public  soectacle  :ho»i^rrvnu;h:  so,nebod>   may 

have  held  it  mit  to  them,  =  ^ even  if  somefjody  has  held  it  out\  Cic.  tam.  9,8. 1. 

Ors  5  The  use  of  an  indicative  in  Ouamvis-clauses  is  extremely  rare  I;  "<'7'[';; 
l^onci.in  ivy  where  v'/a//*rM  retains  tlie  meanimr  'however  much  \  but  without  the 
J-eeSo-v  i(  lea;."  ndennit.-n(-ss:  Non  tibi.  qmimvi-^  infesto  a..im<)  et  miiiSci  l^^lf'l'^ras 

c«"p«  dniiliuidiiim  dcSucU  Ck.  Kab.  Post.  9,  4.-3)  Unce  in  Nepos  with  the  mean- 


\r\z  ^ althovgh\  where  it  is  doubtful  whether  ^qvamvis^  was  used  by  Nepos  himself,  or 
cnmes  from  his  puhtclassical  epitomist*  :  Erat  inter  eos  dignitate  regis,  quavivis  carebat 
nomine.  Nep.  Milt.  2. — i)  The  prose-writers  of  the  silver  age  frequemly  u^e  quatpvis  in 
the  meaning  of  q>iamquam,'AUii  ^ometime8,  in  this  meaning,  construe  it  with  the  Indica- 
tiv<!,  as:  Q>/amcis  ab  o/mnbuM  rfc^-s^erunt.  Sen.  Br.  \^it.  11.  —  Q>iainvis  major  XXV ari ids 
earn  i/iteT'j>o.-<'/it.  Ulp.  Dig.  2, 15,3.  !3iif  Seneca,  Taeitns,  Quititilian  etc..  generally  use  the 
siibjumtive  after  q>/amvis,  and  always,  when  quamvis  means  '  however  much  '.  Celsus, 
however,  always  uses  the  indicative  after  Quamcis.  That  this  was  not '  the  reqular  con. 
sfrurtion''  in  later  Latinity,  as  most  grammarians  assert,  but  was  always  considered  as 
faulty,  also  appears  from  tlie  ta<t  that  the  ancient  grammarians  (Diom.  p.  387  ;  Charis. 
p.  202)  expressly  require  the  subjunctive  after  quamri^.  and  even  declare  quamvis  with 
the  indicative  a  solecism,  even  when  used  by  the  poets  (Charis.  4,  p.  24»t). — 5)  The  poets  use 
quamvis,  when  the  metruiu  forbids  a  subjunctive,  with  an  indicative,  both  in  its  projier 
meaning,  and  in  the  meaning  of  etiamsi  and  quarnquatn.  Comp.  Ilor.  Sat.  1,  3, 29;  lb. 
Carm.  1,  28,  11 ;  Prop.  1,  18, 13 ;  2,  4,  29  ;  Virg.  Mn.  5,  542. 

Obs.  fi.  The  writers  of  the  silver  age  construe  qvainvis  with  ablative  absolutes,  and 
participles,  often  with  the  meaning'  of  quaniqiiam,  as  :  Quarnvin  flagrante  adhuc  PersS- 
ruin  bt-llo.  Ta«'.  Ann.  2,  .')<».— (^lue  fato  maiieiit,  quamvis  significata  (  —  quamvis  sint  sig- 
niticilta),  non  vitantur.  lb.  Ilist.  1, 18.  Comp.  lb.  2,  30 ;  Suet.  Aug.  72 ;  Ctes.  48.  See  for 
this  construction  Obs.  11. 

Or>».  7.  The  conjunction  licet  (meaning  both  'even  tf\  and  'although'')  is  nothing  but 
the  impersonal  veib  /to/,  as  coiistrui-d  with  an  asyndetic  subjret  Ttiat-chiuse,  with  irs 
predicate  in  the  subjunctive  (p.  (H7,  9).  As  used  inthe  classical  jieriod,  and  in  the  better 
l)ro8e-writer8  of  the  silver  age.  Licet-clauses  may  almost  always  be  understood  in  this 
way.  The  const rnctiinis  with  licet  in  the  present  tense,  as  an  ordinary  impersonal  verb, 
contain  a  'concessive'  element  dicet  =  conctditur),  but  without  adversative  force,  being 
most  generally  convertible  into  Si-clauses,  as  :  Ilic  pitgn^<  licet,  non  repugndbo  (Here  you 
may  tight;  I  shall  not  oppose  you,  =  if  you  fiu'ht.  I  shall  not  etc.).  Cic.  Ac.  Pr.  2,  18,37. 
Comp.  Tac.  Or.  9.  Hut  often  it  adds  an  adversative  element,  and  in  this  instance  the 
sentence  is  convertible  into  a  clause  with  etiamsi  or  qvamqvani  ;  as:  Sed  omnia  licet 
cojicuri'aut :  Idus  Martiaj  consolantur  (  =  etianv^i  omnia  concutTont).  Cic.  Att.  14, 4. — 
Fremant  omnes /^t•^///  (  =  etiamsi  omnes  fremant).  dicam  quod  .-entio.  lb.  Or.  1.  44. — Si 
cui  sua  non  videntur  atnplissima,  licet  totlus  nuindi  dominus  ^it.  tamm  miser  est  (  = 
etiamsi  sit).  Sen.  Ei).  9.  Comp.  Cic.  Par.  1, 1  ;  K.  A.  11,  31 ;  Ac.  Pr.  2, :«,  102  ;  Sen.  Cons, 
llelv.  10  ;  lb.  11  ;  lb.  Cons.  Pol.  .35  ;  Cons.  Marc.  \2.— Licet  tibi,  ut  scnbis  ngnificaHjyi  ut 
ad  me  venires,  tamen  intelligo  etc.  (  =:Quainquam  tibi  significllvi).  Cic.  Att.  :3,  12.  Comp. 
li).  Fam.  13,  27, 1  ;  Quint.  1,  22  ;  Pliii.  Ep.  2,  IH,  3.— Sometimes  licet,  in  these  meanings,  is 
placed  in  the  luture-preseiit  (licttAt),  but  never  in  a  preterite  tense,  or  in  any  subjunc- 
tive, as :  Licebit  (  =  etiamsi)  eiim  solus  anus,  me  :emiilum  non  habCbis.  Cic.  Att.  ti,  3.  7. 
—Licet  cannot  be  used  in  the  meaning  '  although '  (or  *  even  if)  il  the  predicate  of  the 
principal  sentence  is  a  m\'f(-7-ife.  since  it  would  in  this  instance  require  a  tense  of  pre- 
ttfiite  consecution,  which  would  be  incomtwtibio  with  the  non-preterite  form  of  licet. 
Nevertheless  later  writi'rs  of  the  silver  age  sometimes  (but  very  rarely)  use  licet  with 
an  i;//;>f;ytr/ subjunctive,  making  it  dependent  on  a  preterite  predicate,  as:  Nam  licet 
tyrannicis  vitiis  semper  abundar«-t,  tamen  simulatio  hiec  vitiOrum.  non  natfira  erat. 
Just.  21,  3.— Z,Jr^/',  in  the  jurists,  and  the  later  writers  (.Appulejus,  Ammianus,  Macro- 
b^iis  etc.),  also  in  the  poets,  sometimes  occurs  with  an  i/idirative.  But  this  was  c<m- 
sidered  a  faulty  construction,  ihe  am:ient  grammarians  (Diom.  p.  387)  expressly  as^igu- 
ing  the  subjunctive  to  licet. 

Obs.  8.  Ut  (even  if)  properly  menus  'granted  that'  (snpply  'fariam''  or  ' ponam  vt\ 
I  will  grant  for  argumcni's  sake  that  etc.;  or  the  clause  may  be  taken  as  a  kind  of  final 
clau>e  ;  see  p.  636,  Obs.  4).  I'l-clauses  of  this  kind  represent  the  truth  ot  the  conces- 
sive statement  as  'not  acknowledged'  but  as  fli<.<//;//^rf  for  the  time  being:  Sed  r/HiaiC 
voncedautur,  reliqua  qui  tandem  intelligi  possunt?  Cic.  N.  D.  3.16.— i7  tibi  concectam 
lioc  indi^num  esse,  tii  mihi  coneCdas  necesse  est,  mnltoesse  indiirnius  diseedi  a  leiribus. 
lb.  Clu.  53,  141).  —  Ut  cniui  ingeniOsi  et  tardi  ita  nascantur,  non  seqiiitur  tamen  ut  etc.  lb. 
Fat. .').  U.  Comp.  the  Ex.  quoted  p.  o:30  toll.,  Obs.  4.  1.— Sometimes  ut  is  a  mere  equiva- 
lent oi  etiamsi,  &^:  Ainbulatiuncu'a,  wi  tantum  faciamus  qnnwwww  in  Tusculano  feci- 
mus,  piope  dimidio  minOris  coustabit  ist(»  loco.  Cic.  Att.  13,  39.  2.— Ut-clauses  of  this 
.,  kind  are  rarely  made  dependent  on  preterite  predicates,  mostly  il'  suboblique.  or  virtu- 
ally so,  implying  a  '  conression  '  of  the  ,suljje<:t  ;  as  :  Ae  jam,  ut  omnia  contra  opinionem 
arcid'Vent,  tamen  se  plurinfum  navibus  nosse  perspvitb((nt.  Ca's.  B.  G.  3.  9.  But  i-ome- 
limes  Ut-clauses  of  this  kind  are  dependent  on  preterites,  even  if  not  suboblique,  as: 

*  The  crrammarians,  in  this  passage,  and  In  Cic.  Rah.  2,  find  fault  with  Vne  indicative. 
They  should  have  found  fault  rather  with  the  meaning  in  which  quamvis  is  used. 


696 


CAUSAL   CLAUSES. 


ADVERSATIVE   CAUSE. 


697 


m  Pnim  nomincm  alinm  ni^i  T.  Patinam  roqa.<<sff,  pcire  jy)hiif  illo  ipso  die  a  MilOne 

^ToT^n7^ZZsi'n\l)^^  .1  ..ulcl  have  a.Ur.l  n.>l>oay  b..tT.  I'ati.m.he  cuk  h^^  known 

ir      (M(    Mi    17  46 -If  concessive  Uf-(lauses  are  NKOATivK,  m  \^  "'^^<M''"»t  "'  ^''"^ 

not  the  «rreati  j^r  evil,  it  certainly  is  an  evil).  lb.  1  use.  2,  5.  ,  ,,       * 

Or..  M    0//a//-a?/«m   if  merelv  it^  etymology  \^  considered,  i^*  in  the  Pame  relation  to 
./s?  a- Q//.m  a-H- n  ;/iar^>r  -IncU-ed   in  nio.t  ot  the  pa^sa^M-.  wherr  U  oecnrs  in  ante- 
f-il'^irftTTi    nitv    it  may  he  taken  as  an  .qnivalent  of  r///«wm,  for  instance.  Plant. 
Merc  2  2^H       )  4  4       ;  I  ui   n  classical  lani.ace.  and  in  th.-  silver  and  later  Latimty 
ft  i'nLo-t  never  nselvvith  reference  to  the  i«/fwi^y  «f  the  pre.l.cate,  althou'-h  it» 

de  vi  H?m  U.  W'.^m  sh<>ul<l  .eem  to  imply  this  ^^;^Y-T'^T7T ^'^"^^^^ 
tl.f.  K„.'r.-h  '}.ltliOU-h'  referrinir  to  actions  real  and  definite  which,  as  in  an  «PPnr  'it 
c  ntlict  v^  h  e  i  cipal  pre.Ticate.  are  cnced.d  by  the  speaker.  It  is  J'^^'J^'J  '  '^^ 
Ssar  never  es'  qmmnL,  hut  always  ,and  very  Ireqnently)  *^!"P'">-^j;;\  Sffem.ce 
He  idea  ot-  -althou-h'.  ricen.  uses  both  tisi  and  q>tamquam  without  «^'  V. '  Ji"^^  .^n' 
exce  t  thai  niZ'inam  is  far  more  frequently  used  than  . /4  toexpress  the  'j;'i''^,f///;^"\\;'  'i 
mr  '  '  w  ver '  /()Bs  12)  It  has  been  nmarked  thai  Cicero  likes  to  bei;in  his  letters  w  iili 
eNi  ,  mw  Mmm7'm  ;0,  w^  sh.>uld  seem  strange,  considerinuMhe  on.L'inal  nic^n  s 
of ^/    There arVr.rithan\itKMcem 

use  of  quamquam  prevails  over  that  of  ettn.     T  he  writers  of  »»'<-' f»^*^J«^e"^f,f|\*'"^.'\ 
with  non-historic,  and  quarruiua,n  with    historic    predicates      ^;^"^*j^^  ^^,7/' ,  .   ,^.  ,^ 
<,nce  in  the  Dialo-us).  and  Suetonius  (excep   in  I  ib.  <'>^^^»'«;\^\"?*^^;_'^;,'X     lea 
r...nn,UM  Ho  i.of  n«p  ft-<i  at  all  as  a  hubordinatini:  conjunction,  but  expnss  ^^^*^^^f- 

'i '  oul-*-  h  W"-^?""'"  -  «'""""•"  """■'•";■••  '.",';-\'"";;'r'ri'Th"'e  wh..":  "  """^'" 

iiaHnq  n>tiiinicli<>n,  in  which  -.^i.s.'  mmwimim  jl"; s  ii'.'t  "'"'J  ^  ,V,*;?,am  rlaii'^e  occur- 

ri,!?:'!;ir;:i  i^  ;^^s^;:^;^;t.:v;^d  iti:^;;?!':h;i';n^i;^r;r  j:^^^ 

[e  ce    as      (jZ  q>mm  non  venit  ad  Hnem  tain  «iidax  ii.ceptu.in,  »''3"  ^aud  oinnl.u 
vXum  fuit.'^Liv.lO,:«.-r^Mamy//«m  jam  niotus  imhec.llitAti*  ''^''^'^7^';  ^' '  .,^5  ^f  f.^' 
n^  iir    V       2  U^  -( hmniQ'f am  vrovv  duMcCitnx  lejrir.nuin  numeruse/a/  \  alenti,  studia 

menm   imIn^^^aS^m^ndi.\m>l^ 
pruMu)  fessi  exwt,  tamen  Metello  instructi  obviani  procCdui.t.  ^\'l- '„ 'f  .^iLim'    i  quo- 
Limodum  probAtA  n.tio,  q.uunq.amnimut  qm.m  acumjne  >!'f     •^;'i"\,  l^n  S  r2bo, 
dam  lepOre  dicendi,  proxime  a  Lacyde  solo  retenta  est.  C  ic  Ac.  I  r.  2.  h,  1»k     ."Nam  -  ira   u, 

t!am<mm  fuit  acri  Injjenio,  tamen  ah  ea  disciplin>l  Vi^V  ''^.n.'l!;;.'!' rm-  -at''  i^atviuaa 
1  u  '\i  \^»*Hntem  non  oossumus  ouin  alu  a  nobis  dissentiant  rei  u-art,  7'/a7« /mh'^* 
,';!i\"S-^Udem  Jst,  quiVemm  inveuire  sine  uUu  content.Oue  volumus.  lb. 

"^OBs.  iVsometimes  the  pub-ttnctive  is  used  in  Qnamquam-claiiseP     ^^^:^^^'^:^^^^^^ 

the  <Uflerent  periods  of  the  lanL'ua<:e  must  be  'l^t'"^''"^»^;    *„  Vnn  u- hTcic  Div  1 

lan"ti:i<'e7^/a/<r/>/amalwavs  stands  Nvith   the  indicativk      Comp   ^Vk  V^"!, %'^;   ,  _«; 

2(V-    »lmt  Merc  2  2  It)  •  H).  4.  4,  tiO  ;  lb.  Pers.  3. 1,  S.  Ter.  Ad.  2,  1,5;  Ib.  Ileaut   1. 1, 1.-^) 

0  cen     a^ic^  from  t  leVotential   Subjunctive  in  coordinating'  ^^'«"^^""'"7,  ""^t.  u'e 

Obs.12)   a   d  aside  from  the  ^nbobliqne  subjunctives,  and  thos«  pa^sa^:es  in  N^h^^^^^^^ 

rcSdin.'  is  donbtful  t,  uses  the  subjiUKtive  n\Xi^imi7nqnam  <.nly  in  threejiuth.  ntuatcd 

~*  TheTtJitemeuts  of  ttl^rammarianslibout  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  Quamquam- 

cliuiesareva?m"     M  savs:  ^S.mietimes  -/a/fr  »i^n/^r^  "  use  the  subiuncve    -- 

Km.iFeHnvt-iMie  writers  of  the  silver  a-e  qeturaUy  use  quamquam  \sn\v  the  sub- 

"^^^^  ihe  d^ri!^!;  wriu-rs  do  this  only  when  tl-  concession  n.ers^  mi  ^ser- 

ti.in  nf  "oihern"'      [This  statement  is  false  in  every  piirtKiilar.]  — Mkiuino  sajs.     iu 

euoets  and  later  pros  -writers  quamquam  and  quamvl<  xxx^  used  )v.thout  any  d.lle  - 

pne.^with  both  mood-'  -Rkisk;  says:    ' Quamqmm  and  etn  are  construed  with  the  iti- 

Swe '^"ubjlnlSrve:  according  ul.  the'^tateiiient  is  repr-ont^as^^^  -  ^V^ 

hip'    [vvlijch   w'iih  resuect  lo  (/^/(<wo//am,  is  certainly  wronj;  in  revrarcl  to  inc  <  la.  sic^u 

«l^ige    a  d  is     w  4.^;,?repml  ..Miie  usa.e  of  the  silver  »''^'"'>:»!'^- 'V'lll^rTrit    « 

u^.i^c,  »11«  uc  V  r^  riiioi  7i'MPT   ntran"'elv  savs:      In  later  wrinr» 

t'verv  Dassa<'o  which  will  not  lit  ins  ruiej.— ai  mi  i    pimn-nj  r«j      ,_„» .    „__,>. i    „nA 

quZqZmlud  quamV^  have  exchar>ged  .their  ^^^'^^^^:^\l^;^^^ 
quamquam  is  construed  with  the  subjunctive,  quamrls^^^\\^  the  '"^^"/'J.f,,  1  ;'» V^^  \.JX 
Kl  hn^c<)ntradictiontothefacis,andtot»ie  rul.s  of  the  ancient  ^™^^""'    «^^ 
aSPof  the  PuBKic  Sen.  Ciu.  (alwavs  inclined  to  enrich  the  lauLMia-e)  has  "'V'-nte.i  a 
n?w  concessive  conjunction,  namely'i/^//^  and  says  :  '  A  c<mcessive  clause  wthv««^A- 
qZm  a^id  utut  will  be  indicative,  but  if  suboblique  or  «no».ic  [tliis  f[^™^|^"'  "  "'i^J 
the  expression  >  -nomic  '  very  fr.quently,  without  ^^^V'-f^y  ">f,2  '^,"^';'i     »  "  fbiunc  iVV" 
subjunctive.  By  writers  of  ihe  silver  H^n-  /y//«//|y^/«m  is  freely  used  with  ^1»«  «'  ^J'^'^f'.^  J„; 
+  In  the  followin-'  passatres  :  Cic.Ofl.  l,2,b  ;  lb.  1,  5, 15  ;  lb.  l,«t,.JO  ,  /?•  ^' j/',^^  '  \;- 
Fiii.  a! is'is;  0^^51172;  I'lanc  3, S,  the  readuigs  are  doubtlul,  the  subjiuiclives  re^t. 


paBsape?:  Nee  em m  licet  eis  qui  landem  cnm  dolOre  petendam  ePse  dicnnt  ne<rare  eos 
es^c  b.atos  qui  eain  adepti  sunt.  Quamquam  enim  nnt  (  =  Foreign  if  ih^y  should  be) 
in  quibnsdam  malis,  tamen  hoc  nomen  beSti  lon-e  et  late  patet  Cic  Ti  sc^5  %  rin 
this  passage,  quainquam  is  evidently  u.«ed  with  the  force  of  «/iam^j't he^ subjunctive 
beini;  used  accordinj^to  the  rules  of  Etiamsi-clauses,  Obs.  3.]-Atque  hSc,  J /SiV! 
prresente  L.  Lucullo  (o^w;-.  tamen..  .publics  litteris  tegtatasunt  omnia   lb  mT  9  20 

sT„Vm"«ifrMft"'V''"}  •"  T'""'^'^  ''^'^ '''''""''  ^^^"^'  ^«'■^"^  «'^^*^  sapienti  ratiOnem  amici  ac 

I     Fin  •    9       '  r/i  ''  ciilque  cariorem  suam.  tamen  hi  quoque  posteriOres  fatentur  etc. 

II).  !<  in.  ,3.21.     [It  IS  evidently  iranossihle  to  reduce  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  the 

nnV  ;r  ^' v'"-"'  ^?  ''r7  «nle.l-S)  In  Nepos,  quamquam  is  once  construed  wiih  a  sulJ 

jinctue.  >ecpraiterIho^^w//<(7wamnonmilli8leve  visum  iri»M<e//i.  Nep.Att  13  where 

the  s,,l>junctive  seems  to  have  the  force  of  a  subjunctive  of  guarded  statement   pS 

-4)  In  Lyy  the  subjunctive  alter  quamquam  occurs  in  two  passages  without  assi-nabie 

reason:  Qiiinciius,  quamquam  vrnverttur  his  vocibus,  manu  tamen  abnuit,  qul?quaru 

in  se  opisesse.  Liy.  :3G.  31.-Ceternm   quamquam  tales' viri  mitUrentur,  quorum  de^oS^ 

Mlio  ^perarl  posset  imperatOres  nihil  indijnie  decreturos  esse,  tamen  in  senatu  a-itaia 

est  ^umma  con.iiioiu.u.  Ib  4.5, 18.-5)  In  the  writers  of  the  silver  a-e,  especiallV the  his* 

Vvhfi"  V  if  .^«"^V-n^*"*"  ?^  quamquam  with  the  subjunctive  became  far  more  frequent. 

Uhile  Aellejus  still  construes  quamquam  with  the  indicative  onlv,  Tacitus  uses  the 

indicative  about  as  often  as  the  subjunctive  (without  any  assi<;nablu  difference)  nuam- 

quam  occurrin:;  about  15  times  with  the  subjunctive.    Suetonius,  howeve?,  nevefus^s 

the  indicative  alter  quamquam,  construins?  it  either  according  to  Obs.  11,  without  a 

finite  verb,  or  with  the  subjunctive  (Comp.  Tac.  Hist.  3,  59  ;  lb   Ann  2  2  •  "  on .  o  -u  • 

2.40;  4  74;  f;,51;  Suet.C;es.3;  lb.54;  Tib^.J  ;  ^Yn^  22?  Sliiblllf  Hence' ^ 

inner  distinction   between  the  use  of  the  indicative  and   subjunctive  in  Quamquam- 

clHuses     On-Mially  the  indicative  was  the  only  mood  used.  and.  in  the  classical  period. 

e  uiH    Ire^ue'nt*''*''  ^  subjunctive,  till  in  the  silver  age  both  moods  became 

Obs.  11.  In  the  writers  of  the  silver  a-e  (but  not  in  classical  language)  Quamquam- 
claiises  very  fre^iien  ly  have  the  lorm  of  pakticipial  clauses,  being  ireaTed  like  an 

?!•'  h!fi;^,.KV'"l?''.'i'''"l''^'^-i^'-*-  ^"^^  ^^"^''^^  '^'''^  ^^"'y^''''  introduced  hy  quaviqu am. 
II  the  subject  of  the  clause  does  not  occur  m  the  principal  sentence,  or  may  be  elimi- 

.£1  .?'   r"     ^  .^    ^'^"""''    '^y  '"^'''"''  ^^  ^  passive  construction,  the  Quamqiiam-clause 
takes  the  form  ol  ABi.ATivKa  absolutk,  as  :  At  Germanicu>.,  quamquam  contralto  exer- 
cifu,  pra'mittu  htteras  ad  Ca'clnam  (  =  quamquam  exenifum  amtrax.rat).  'i'ac  A  1  48 
-I  osteriores  quoque  existimo,  quamquam  jam,  ducrttis  profes,<w„ibu^,  nihilo  minua 
in^tituisse  qmedam  genera  instituiionum  adeloquentiam  comparandam.  Suet.  Gram  5  — 
Jiut  If  the  subject  of  the  clause  is  also  contained  in  the  principal  sentence,  it  is  expressed 
only  in  the  principal  sent.-nce,  the  participial  predicate  of  the  clause  a<'recin^  with  it 
as:  .\c  Aquitania  quidein.  quamquam  a  Julio  Cordo  in  verba  OthOuis  obsfricta   diii 
.v!f',!r -^"^  9'!a>>\Q''am  obsfricta  em/).  Tac.  Hist.  h-Hi—Aqrippwam.  quamquam' bene 
louienienfem.  dimiiterc  coactus  est  (  :=  quamquam  ea  l>ene  conveniebat).  Suet.  Tib  7- 
Ji  the  predicate  of  the  clause  consi^ts  of  the  copula  with  a  completing  predicate    the 
topula  IS  omitted,  as  m  ordinary  participial  construction,  as  :  Moris  tum  erat  {nnnnnejn) 
qmimvuunp7a:senftm,  scnptisadlie  (  :-  quamquam  preE-^ens  erat,  or  €.«eet).  Tac  Aim  4 
.jy.-^liiat  I  no)  pnecipiuim  robiir,  quamquam  ntque  ptvi-era  stataia,  et  venfre  paulio  mo- 
^.r^;  0.  e    erat).  f  net.  Tu.  3    V:'"?-^^"- ^<'0:  1,83;  2,41;  3.  15  ;  3.  18^;  3,  82^   3, 
Th  V^'i     '1  ^  if  -^ ''•  '^'Vl-  ^-  •^'.'  ^'  ''•' '  1,  (i5  ;  2.  57 ;  2,  75  ;  3,  30  etc.  ;   Suet.  Tib.  3 ;  Ib.  11  • 

i.  ;;',/*;/  '•  ^'''T  ^"^ '  H'""!-  ^'  -^'  ?'^-  ^"^  often.-This  participial  form  mu/t  l,e  con-' 
.    Itrcd  a.s  tlie  /equiar  wnsfrurhon  of  Quamquam-clauses  in  the  writers  of  the  silver 

n he  Ou^uu'V.ll    r""'^"'  ''''Vw^  'I'  ^''*'  P'oPonion  of  five  to  one,  as  compared  with  the 
1   ite  Quamquam-c laiises.     Of   the  same  nature  is   the  participial  construction   with 
7  r///m  (mentu)ne<l  Obs.  G).  which,  however,  is  far  l.-ss  frequent  than  the  same  con 
striictionjvvith^y^/ft/;>y7^m.-We  must  not  confound  with  this_W)ns^uc2ion  the: oml..v". 

\^^iZu'!^!^:i :Tlu'l!'^-  r'^'iV''  «'>y  IV'  ^''"  pa-ssagesVlu.re  the  manuscril>Fauthority 
'i,'.  r    ..c  '  •"  '"!'''•'•  r^""^'  ^^  ^''^''"*-'  P^-^'^ages  can  be  considered  as  a  proof  that 

n  lb  n"  1  .''i'"  ^^'!-''''''^'  after  7'/^//;^^'/«m.  In  other  j.assaires  produced  by  the  <rram. 
niaiian-,  the  subjunctives  are  either  suboblique  (as  Ac.  Po.  1  S.  and  Or  3  7  '->7)  or  «nb 
J.incfives  l)y  attraction  (as  Leg.  :i.  8,  IS,  and  Fan,.  .3,  10  i  'ln?ie  pa^s.-e  ^a  j  Ju-  3 
theT'^nr  '''^r'"  'P'V^.'^-'^  t''^'  indicative  would  be'faultv.  since  Ihe^ecomlpe  son  ha' 
e  nieu.Mng  of  an  indehnite  i,erson  (p.  413.  Obs.  4).  Verv  strangely  KiiunkA  refers  to 
e^m,  ihI'"'^'  .P''^'!^'^/  "«  "»  t'xample  for  the  use  of  the  s'ubjunctiv^  :  Quie,  quamquam 
y^iT^ltl?  ^'{?  ^'^''^«1«  audiam,  tamen  lil,entissime  ex  tiiis  litieris?ognoscam.  He 
«iV/7;-  '  !^;i!;.,  ^r""^'?',"^  «'/^^«/m  by  '  Quamquam  fibi  concMo  quum  dicU  im  lutx 
kin,  /r,^ ';""-'  ^''^  Hfldn-ssed  i)erson  never  said,  nor  could  liave  said  anythin<'  of  the 
iviud.    ihe  fact  IS,  that  audiam  is  no  subjunctive  at  all,  but  a  future 


G98 


CAUSAL  CLAUSES. 


ADVERSATIVE  CAUSE. 


699 


of  the  copula  in  Ouamqnam-clausc..  if  tho  clause  ha.  it.  «^"J"^^;:!^,;.'"  [Jjf  Y7;"'{'7;; 
ns-  0.m//V/'/a/n  Tiberio  nulla  retn>i  in  Amiitcui  in  (i.e  eral).  ac.  Ann.  1,  »'J„  ^  X 
mrHv  S  7  /"  V,  c.nneots  two  imiuamks  /ri/Ai//  a  ^^cntence.  a«  :  Camilhi>»  cum    rn)uH  - 

H  i:i  -MmmM.idi's  c  Xenophancs,  minus  iMmis  .^UAMiiUAM  t'^/>ii^^s  *e(/  famen  Ults  re/6i 
//w.<.  inciopant  eOnun  ano^jantiam.  Cic.  Ac.  2,  23.  .  .  ,    • 

Or.  !•>  IVeuliar  i.  tlie  u?e  of  qmwquaw  for  rnmoDiCAi.  coOudination  which  is 
r.u<^'.  !>•  fr  -q  'nf  in  Cicoro  and  s'ncca  where  it,  perhaps  ocmr.  of.ener  than  aU 
the  ot  er  wrhVrs  taken  toirether.  In  ^^uch  sentences,  r/uam<^uaw  which  ^-enerally  opens 
Im.viKTiod   l.aM    K, 'c()iH^^^  '"f'-^-'y  '»»^  'adverKi.ve'   force  <.l  its 

^y  t  amecedent  /a;..n,  hein,  rendered  Vv  '''"--««; ^/ 'l"J.\'^''y;-,/<':^:r'"^^^ 
if  thus  u^ed  iias?  the  nature  of  a  ' coord matinir  relative'  (see  p  520,  /^.  9).  ''»).'"g  "*; 
pan  e  re  iti  n  o  /a  '.«,  a.  a  conrdinatin-  relative  to  a  coordin,.tin^,'  ^l^'-'V'''^»/'!  Wn^n  e 
n  iVVi  n"  2  4  and  p  520),  or  as  quu,n  \n  im  apf>^r<ifi re  qnnm-cUxns,-  (p  hlD  foil.)  to  the 

U.mons  ?rtive  a<h"'^^^^^^^^^^^  proposition.,  h.tro.luced  by  the  coOrdinatin-  conjunc. 

th  tu   r  ml  ler  •   d  verb ')  <r'(nnquu]n  a?e  ^n-nerally  used  to  restrict  a  previous  «^ta  ement 

■oi  tS^  mad,' bv  the  .p.-aker  in  hi.  own  name.  Fre<,uently  a  conner-t  in-  Ink 

Ji^^iis   be  su   t   ie  1  as  :  N-.m  ut  sint  ilia  vendibilin.a,  luec  uberir.ra  certe  sunt.   Qmm'iumn 

5  muden     i  Cb^^^^^  e W  existiiiKlre  qui  K-erint.  Cic.  Fin.  1.  4,  12  (  =  However  those  may 
■<•     e  i     X^^^^^  'However  I  will  not  decide  this  ;  may  those  do  it  who  ec.). 

Ins    -ul  oV  /  mm/'  r// ,  a  proposition  with  famfu  mi-ht  have  been  used  ^I/oc-  tamen  /itr- 

6  /  il^  .Vil/fflr  etc  '  or  •  oLl  tamen  licGbit '  accordinu'  to  the  relailve  form  metilloned 
p  S  Nf..  f-Vh^^^^  i"i-"'"*i  <-»"^""^  essc.ne  omnes  potm.  me  arb.  rentur 
caus\e  qu  ni  vol  relidOni  vestra^  defuisse.  Quavujvam  *'K"  (.=  «'l-'V/""^';"  "*",', :^'^ 
T)er<  ladeo  non  vos  propter  juris  (h.biam  rafion-m  moram  anquisi.se.  lb.  Ciec  2  0.  [He  e 
t  e^Sc^iceprececinj^^^  i'»'^  the  fore-  oUx  (^uam<tvam-rau.e  while  9/ /|«- 
oi«f»wirt he  force  o{  tamen,  =  'althou-h  the  case  is  dif^ieult.  ./i/Z  I  believe  etc.  ]- 
1^  Z.Xm  quid  S/te  uvltem.  a  «luo  jam  scio  esse  pr.e,nis.u<(,,ii  tihi  ad  Forum  Aure- 
y'''*''' '",'/. '••"tnr  V  ih  Cat  1  M  *'3(  =  However  I  am  wroiiL'  in  inviting  you,  since 
^""!  ''Sn  if\c  VrVr?  5:^  A^^^  nropositions  of  this  kind  the  iX>ten. 

Ouare 'BFLi^K'  et  'festivb'  niniium  sa'pe  dicfttur.  nolo.  Q.,am>i>,am  lila  ipsa  exclama- 
li  'NorPi^TFsT  MELtUs'  .it  Telim  crebra.  Cic.  Or.  3, 2r,.  101  irellm,  as  sul>jnuetive  of 
mo.kStreitron).-At  nonnunastribuspunctis  pa-ne  totid.m  tulerunt.  (^uippe  q.iutu 
a,  a  t  pr  >  e  s  perioribus  c<.mitii..  declaraiKiiie  veni.-ent.  Qnamqu>>muv  Hi  qu  den 
iu"p  •  r>.eni  cuiliani.  /mhuerif,  =  But  evn-n  wnhout.  this  f'^^l  «^^-/f^J»'"!' J''^^^'  ^n 
no  L'-ound  for  suspicion  (a  vinnally  hypothetical  subjunctive).  lb.  Plane.  2^.  ■'>^-^  »  ^"^ 
Jccn  -set  tempns  n  quo  per-picere  posses  quanti  IJiuium  faceniu  ;  qnamqmvn  11  con- 
sS  lineqi'o  idiana  perspexisses,  sicut  perspicie«;  =  fumever, hnx  sti  hyou  would  ha^e 
Been  this  from  our  daily  intercmrse  (virtually  hypothetical),  lb.  tarn.  3, 10.2. 

Ob.  13.  Etn  (.ometime.  tametsi),  in  classical   lan^uaL-e,  1'.«^!'^';.»»*"«"'""  «']^,.f""' 
struct  on  oi  qnamnmm.h^uv^  leirularly  cmstrued  with  Xh^  twhcat^r.    a.     A^«t  c^u  sa 
hestemo  .ermnne  lafKfarlafa  est,  inihi  tamen  v„lCiur  esse  v«7\7'"\' ;,  ,^;^;^;;-  ' '^(^'  t*  .Va 
—Illi   eiH  ab  ho«te  ea  'liohantxr,  n<m  tamen  neijlijrenda  existimJlbant.  C  a^..  B.  <^'-.^  -«• 
-Tametn   ab  duce  et  a  fortQiiJl  (iesTehanfur.  tamen    omn.-m  spem  salflti.   in  virttlte 
m.n5 Ivi.  t    lb  5  : «.-Sometimes  et.i  is  used  instead  of  efiam.L  as  :  Hoc  omnium  judic.o 
It  telii^i  potest  qi.i  permulta  oh  eam  caii.:.m  unam  faciunt  quia  rectum  est,  .7..?   •'V'-n   0 
Ih  m  cmsecu  anm  emohimentnm  rh/ent.   Cic.  Fin.  2.  14.-Numqnam  edepol   f nu' et 
taneP^  (e"m   if.  capital  fecerit   (Cut.  perf.).  Plant.  Men.  1,1,(5.     If  ef^t  1.  ""?'/'"'.»'« 
m eai  ill"- of  ^  i^/m.^^/,  it  MiaV  take  the  saf,}"nrfive  for  the  same  reasons  as  etmm.^i  Obs  3) 
r.-  Sed^tancU-in,  famfAsi  p.Khi-rosis  pedil)us  .s.sy/  Entymus  uren  j^  he  were    'Jt^-KJ'"; 
JtMiii-se  a  po       potuit.  Flint.  Merc.  3.  4.8.-QMamquam,  efsi  prioie  foedere  •^^«'•f/J'^'  s- 
ca   ,um  erat  SaLMintTni.;  (=  However,  even  if  the  former  treaty  •;;:^^«f//^/?;;'^'''^l^/^'; 
ralid   ihe  inten-.t  of  the  Sa<riintian.  wa<  sulhciently  provided  h)r).  Liv  21,  !!>.- bed  me 
vera  pro  ^^^^^^       h.qui.  e^d  meiim  in^'enium  non  monPref   necessitas  coirit  (  =  et  c.n.en>t 
etiaiK    non  monC're. ).    H).  3,  r.8 -^^i    nihil  aliud  Snlla'  nisi  cmsuliltum  abstuhssett.-, 
Sereov.T,  lento,  esse  oportebat.  Cic.  Sull.  .32.  W.  -  Fabnla  etiam  nonnumqiiara, 

^M^I^   iucredibilis,  tamen   ho,'nim-s   commovet.    ^^,^'^;^;^'^''^rV^^'!l  %^,Z 
etiaftisi)  is  thus  used  with  a  lo/ieal  tense  (see  p.  428.  Obs.  3)  :  Vln  efn  (  -  f'^"^""^' 
S/vm   aiiiuid    numero   .wV.  ma-na  rerfe  avh-^ /ait   '=cerfum  f.^t    mairimm  ca'den 
fn&)    Liv  3  8,  1(..- Aside  from  these  instances,  and  from  those  of  subol.liqmty  and 
a    n.c  ion.  etH  is  always  construed  with  an  imlicative.  nor  is  ei.^,.  like  ^vr/mr/;/,/,;,,  en,  - 

8trS  with  a  subjunctive  in  silver  Latinity.  V^^^Z'"'^ r '"'''-^r '''-''' Vn'\^\^Z^^^^^^ 
out  bv  erammarians  a.  exceptions  to  this  rule.     But  they  either  are  quoted  witli  false 
i^ad  n.^las    t  i   it.  F.  ,n.  »i,  4, 1.  where  Heisi<;  reads  ^efA  vi>jeatMr\  which  is  a  bad 

co^ljtclure,  instead  of  vidlmur,  or  vidmr,  exhibited  by  the  codices),  or  are  misintcr- 


^^u.^^'n^''^  ^^^'•^  ^^^  subjunctive  expentum  sit  is  evidently  Bubobliqne, 
'i^see  OBr"»;::!'  mtl1>;"reLt^'aV^^  m^  quamquam,  and  qvam- 


f 
ra 


erci.ussalva.  h.cuin  c  ,  ein    ."/ta^^ircapi  po."^^  a^nmento,  tamen,  s.imma  ex- 

rictus,  fjlorijl  tamen  omnia  vicit.  Just.  12^  hia.-Arjis,  eln  a  mul.iiudiue 

v!^^fuJS;Kf!ioSvi^S^^^  "*=^'l  in  three  different  relation.  ;  1)  For 

(   =  This,  however,  canm  t  ocxn  r      Cic  n?  V"^-      ^Vi       ^'^'^*  '"^  accidere  non  potest 
lacite  dat  iixsa  lex  iotSeni  (Siidendi    lb  qnodammodo 


^;;:^^,^:,;^;; r^^iS  SS^^ 

had  a  t  t-illv  diff'u.nr  i/«     nr^    v^^^^^^     construction  of  qnamvis  in  the  classical  period 

/     .  iT'^   M '"  '"""■*'  ^'•"'•'•''n'  "^  f'-^i  "hen  it  coordinates  adj.-ctives^     Here  \h"xv?^adlc 
Th^MvV'lIn*''^  ^T^  r^^^r"  '"  ^*^^''  o^''^--  ^«-''  the  two  propositions  of  a  cXcsive  Period 

of'  na  veVllXTiC^i^^^^ 

sei  V.      \\v  m  iv^-^^^^^  a.  the  coordinating  coNJi  NOTION  ^ed,  only  in  a  contrary 

s t  1  (.     u«    niaj  analyze  these  coordinate  phrases    n  the  usual  wav  bv  renpaiin.r  tho 

?e  oh'!^dl  ^'i^;"^/'''"  ^^'-^  "''"''  ^"«'•di-ate  member.    Thus  thc^m  '  ai^itiliv  &     n-av  be 
fnm  fa^tunfest.    ^"  '''''''''""  ^'^^^^^^'<^omuUnm  factum  e.t,  at  certe^ri.ie  eeiSilVconstil 


700 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES   OF  DOUBTFL-X  REALITY.  701 


Qunm-clanpe  (i^ee  p.  650) :  2)  in  the  form  of  a  Cf)ncessive  Qni-clanse  (see  p.  507,  Obs.  4)  ; 
3)  ill  the  form  of  h  si-clause,  either  witii  or  witiiont  tajnt^ii  in  ihe  npodosis,  as  :  Decern 
vocassct  A-i  ad  CdMiam  siimiiios  viros.  nimium  ol)s<»i)jIvif  (he  would  iiav»-  had  too  many 
di^hes,  eren  if  he  had  invited  ten  of  the  nio^t  prominent  rnfio.  riant.  Merc.  4,"i.  3.— Hie 
Tio>-t«-ronltor.  n  minus  erit  doctns  (  —  etiam-si  minus  eiii  doctiis).  attamen  ipsa  ex<-reila- 
tiOne  istos  quidem  verbertTldf.  neqne  sc  ab  eis  coniemni  sinet.  Cie.  Or.  3,  21,  7U.— Comp. 
lb.  Mur.4,8:  lb. Sen. 11,88;  lb.  Rep.  1, -27.  Sail.  Ju«?.  So,  48;  Ter.  Eun.  1, 1.— 4)  By  abla- 
TivKs  ABsoLi'TK  or  ordinary  participles  without  any  conjunction,  irenerally  witli  (ametx 
or  iiihll<miinu!i\n  the  principal  sentence,  as:  Snllam.  hmUVri  omnibus  rel)ii.s  tribunicij 
jwtfsfate  (  =  qnainqiiuin  nudasset  potertiatem)  tainfit  intercessionem  liberam  reliquisse. 
C'a's.  B.C.  1,7.— Ul  Variu<  dicere  solC*!)at.  quum  ditU  t'stibnn,  alii  tameu  ciiarentur  (  = 
qiium,  qiKWKiuam  dedissef  tesils).  Cic,  Fiu.  a,  19.— Ilac  spe  la^mm  Indutiomflrus,  tiifii/o- 
tnirii/ft  copias  cojrere  c<ppit  (  =  etn  lapyits  ernf).  C'ses.  B.  Ci.  5,  .V).~5)  Bv  an  ordinar^-  co- 
ordinaiion.  wiib  /ame/i  in  the  si-cond  proposition  :  AV  uMjnum  poMtiilJlre  videtiir  lla'-din- 
bal.  f-^'iro /</;«/>«  lion  censeo  quod  jutit  tribuendum  (  =  ef-<i  a-qinim  jjostultlre  vidCtur, 
tam^n  vjo  etc.).  Liv.  21,  i.  C-'omp  Cic,  Fin.  1.  :i,  7.-0)  By  a  coordination  with  'luidem  and 
tivmn  :  Use  clade>  Itomam  quum  essent  nuiitiilta\  inprens.  (inidtm  lucuis  civitflten)  cepit, 
Bed  tdinfn,  quia  consules  etc.,  minus  eis  cladibus  movebantur  (  =  qiiatnqnain.  his  cladibim 
nuntifitis.  inirensluctusriviijltem  crpit,  minus  tamen  etc  ).  Liv.  2,"),  22.— 7)  Often  the  neira- 
tive  causal  clauses  mentioixd  p.  »•!»()  may  be  used  in  place  of  a  C(>n(•es^ive  clause.  Thus  tlie 
Fentenc»'  -Pu^iles  in  jactandisca'<tibus  iiiiremiscunt.  non  tjiiln  doltunf  etc'  (Cic,  Tusc.  2,  2."0 
may  be  expressed  ' I'liriiltsinfjemixcunt  etsi  non  dolent '.— S)  By  an  imperative  sentence  fol- 
lowed asyndeiically  by  the  main  sentence,  as:  (^uare  nf  nobis  o?jlior  in  hoc  interpreiandi 
penere  H)irabilis:  in  auirmdo.  in  ornando  etc.  mau'is  existiiniltur  meiumdus,  (piam  adnii- 
randiisorjltor  (  =  r^'/a/z/^vx  miial)ilis  sii.  tamen  in  au-end»»  etc.).  Cic.  Brut.o'.»,  \M\.  — Kiner- 
St^/i/vx  pecuhltus  etiam  judicio  :  mediietur  dediicibus  hostium  (pios  acceptjl  pecunia  libe- 
rflvit  (  =  ttinmA  ejnerserit,  meditCnir  tatm-n  etc  ).  lb.  Verr.  2,  1,  5.  Here  belongs  the  cir- 
cumlocution wwh^tiiitje.  in  the  meanini;'  supposinir\  *  jrr.inted  forarpiinniifs  smUc':  Inter- 
fecti  aiiqui  8unt,./i/'r/e' a  nobis  :  (juidy  vos  senaton-s  Campanos  se(  dri  non  pcrcussisiis  f 
=  Sup[Misin<_'  we  had  killed  them,  or  'even  if  we  h  id  killed  them  '.  did  voii  not  behead 
the  C'ampaaiau  senators:'  Liv.3y,;j7.— 9j  J3y  the  circunilocuiions  meniioued  Obs,  1. 


CHAPTER    SIXTH. 

CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 

t  Li».  Conditional  periods  represent  the  rcalit}-  of  the  iMincipal  sen- 
tence (thesis)*  as  contingent  on  the  reality  of  another  action,  contained 
in  a  clause  (conditional  clacsk).  Conditional  clauses  are  divided  into 
four  classes:  1)  Clauses  of  doubtful  reality,  generally  with  an  indiaitire, 
l)ut  sometimes  with  a  suhjunctice  ;  2)  Clauses  of  doubtless  bealitv, 
always  requiring  the  indicntice ;  \\)  Clauses  of  nox-iiealitv,  with  a  snh- 
junrtive  in  both  the  theds  ami  the  clause ;  4)  iMruoPEH  conditional 
clauses,  with  moods  depending  on  particular  rules.  Affirmative  con- 
ditional clauses  are  introduced  by  d  (sometimes  by  sin,  (»r  sice)\  negative 
conditional  clauses,  by  nisi,  d  non,  or  ni. 

Ob».  1.  While  Errammatically  n  condition.ll  clnupe  is  dependpnt  on  the  principal  pen- 
tence  or  tin-sis.  loL'ically  the  the.s-ix  is  dcix-ndeiit  on  Ihe  co/idi/ion,  since  (in  proper  c«»n- 
ditional  clauses)  the  former  cannot  exist  without  the  latter.  From  this  peculiarity 
chn-fly  arise?  the  crreat  variety  in  treatini;  the  mood  of  the  two  propositions  in  condi- 
tional periods,  since  th(!  mood  of  the  clause  is  partly  determined  by  the  nature  of  the 
thesis,  and  partly  the  mood  of  theMliesis  by  the  natuVe  of  the  cl.iuse.     'I'iie  mood  of  the 

*  For  th<!  expressions  phot.^sis'  and  '  a  poliosis  "pee  p.  478.  ObsTtI  ^Many  jrratnma- 
rians  api)ly  these  terms  improperly  to  conditional  periods  onlv.  A  Si-clanse  cannot  be 
a  'protasis'  (i.  e.  preceding  i)ropositi(>n)  if  it  follows  the  thesis,  nor  can  any  period 
begin  wuh  an  -apodosis'  (  =  subsequent  proposition). 


thesis  js  often  a  subjunctive  onhj  hecanse  the  Si-clansc  is  in  this  mood  «o  th-if  wp  ofY^n 
miist  mpply  a  Si-clause  to  accwnd  f<,r  the  subjunctive  in  the  tluSs  (/}  48  OB^Tand  8^ 
Often,  on  lie  con-ra.y.  the  subjunctive  of  the  Si-cJause  is  derived  s<,hVfV(.m  ihe  1"^! 
t ml  charac  er  of  he  thesis,  even  it  the  thesis  is  not  in  the  subjunctive  (R.  44,  Obs  iV;  ^  '" 
V..^  rh  i-  'l'^-"''J<]'Kt.ve  1.1  the  St-dausH  has  its  own  force»  without  l.^i./-  affected  b^ 
he  thesis.-beveral  kinds  of  conditional  periods  have  the  peculiarity  that7he  rV^i  i  y  of 
the  principal  senteiu-e  (against  the  definition  in  §  .i2.5)  does  «0«  l(.«'ic4llv  denend  on\h^ 
reality  of  the  S.-cla..se.  In  such  instances  the  con,litional  IZ^lkl^x^o^Kll^tv  Tm^re 
«/•a;/.;;m  ,.v//yorm belonging  to  the  improi^er  conditional  periods  for  insta.cewh?,.^ 
has  the  force  of  f/,«,„.vn.,.r  the  real  thesis  must  be  vUr.lood,  so  t  at  t  e  nrinci n-tl 
sentence  is  not  at  the  same  time  the  thesis  of  the  conditiotial  period  (Sc4T48,Ob^^^^ 

Obs  2    In  C()nditi<mal  clauses  of  iJoiBTFiL  nEALirr,  the  reality  of  the  action  i^  ren- 
resented  as  questional,  e  and  undecided.     The  thesis  denotes  either  the  co«VX*//^^^ 
ihe  dect.^ton  (or  of  '  ftiltilling  the  condition  \  as  :  '  Jf  mu  trromUe   InillnW^^^^  % 

,.^th    ,f      •' '"  ^"  "^^-  "'■'  ^''^ '''  '^"'''■'^''  '•  U^'  H'  «J'^'  danger  does  not  b.^in  i  "cowiZV^^ci 

r  the  decision   but  exists  ev.n  before  the  decision,  or  does  i.ot  exist  at  aU-^S 

oiial  clauses  of  1,01  btlkss  ueai.itv  represent  the  action  of  the  clause  as  cr/f^'n   bit 

£^/Iw^r'A'-' ^'^' ''"''"'• '"'^  consequence  is  reached,  as  liable  to  d.ml.t  (//•  Jrer"  "^  S 

{trn^f"f^''T"'-  '''''^  ^''^^^'^  ^^"  mo,e).-lu  condi.ional  periods  of  non-reai  ity    the 

actions  of  both  i.ropositions  are  leinvsented  as  y,o/  happening  while  they  have  an  ai^r- 

mafne  form,  ot;  as  read!/  Iuipiy>->nnr,  wh.le  they  are  negative,  tne  co.Kiition  contalnif^V  a 

inere  fiction  u\  the  speaker,  and  the  thesis  expressing  what  would     e    le  cc^^^seq,   'H^ 

..f  such  an  action,  as  :  /  wo,dd prwe  H,  if  you  denied  it  (but  I  do  not  prove   be 'ms"  v<m 

do  i.ot  deny).-The  ci  iteri<»n  ol  these  three  classes  of  dat  ses  is  X\xl^d\c?Xoi\ '    In  elms,  s 

n  '<; /"o  <,t her  classes,  the  aetion  of  the  clause  being  unconditionally  hue  in  clause,  of 
do  btless  re.hty,  and  vnronditU.naHy  untrue  in  clauses  «,f  non-realit/,-The  m  .1  diffl- 
c   Ities  in  Uitin  cond,ti(,nal  periods  are  1)  the  choice  of  mo(Kl  in  either  of  the  tvv    prono- 

tsi^!i.l:!^:^::^,  ';!i!t^::ir'''''  -'  — ^'^^^  ^  ^>  ^^-  ^--  «^  -^-i^^  z^ 

ui,s.  I,  lo  I.  \[  they  are //^y/ coordinate,  they  must  either  belotg  todiflenut  classes  or  to 
rterent  divisions  of  the  same  class  ;  or  one  conditional  clause  may  be  depcM  riem  on 
an,,ther,as  :  si  q.u  re.trum  forte  mirdfur,  me  nunc  ad  ac<u.sandum  <iesce  dere  is  "i 
tntt  con.ttn  caumm  co<jnorent.,  id  qm.d  facio  i.robabit.  Cic.  Di  v.  (  a-c.  1, 1  The  second 
bi  clause  js  an  improper  (temporal»  coiidith.nal  clause  {n.  ..cofmoniV  =  ouum  coanoveiit 

tia  J^ufjue  ptcunia  l,(i,da  ,st  a  mo,  'si  Kt  vino  rxon  materfamilias  essft'  neain 

h  r    •  ""  ^  '.^,^-*'";'"'""  "''^  f'''','"'  the  -iK-nse-wire'  of  her  husband,  no  legacy  is  di  e 
o  her  It  shednl  not  marry  her  husband  m  the  lorm  of  '  i„  manum  conven.io  "  Cic.  Top 

i\i  44  n;.''''^^!''I.,T  h''''"'"''  '■■'^*.""''  \''Y^-^  ^"  '"^'  ^-'"Klitions  denotin-  exemplinc-.ti.ln 
(K.  44  C)i.s.  1,1,  «hie  the  second  and  third  clauses  are  clauses  ol  doubtful  reality  (the 

^h  e/Mi.'r  b.''?''^^';  V'^'  ^Tr-  ""'?  ""^  'l''''^  ^"  '»'*-•  P^^»>' ""»  belongin^r  to  the  same  thess^ 
Hute  the  lii>t  cuiiuiuoual  clause  is  at  the  same  time  the  thesis  of  the  secoud. 

I.  CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTFUL  REALITY 

Hem.  44.  A  conditional  clause  of  doubtful  reality  re<nilarly  has  its 
predicate  in  the  indicative.    But  the  sujjjunctive  mav  oy  must  be  used 
in  t  le  instances  mentioned  p.  709  foil.  The  predicate  of  Uie  thesis  is  gen- 
erally in  the  indicative  eun  if  the  clause  has  a  subjunctive.    But  it  7nav  be 
('/)  111  an  independent  potential  su])iunctive,  or  {b)  its  subjunctive  may  be 
ch'termined  by  that  of  the  clause^On^.  H.  i;)). -The  tense  of  the  clause, 
*  It  is  customary  among  irrammarlans  to  illustrate  tir.nfiftc^?;nrirci^diti(i^l^n^riic- 
illTun-'  i**''"^"'"  ^""""^^^  '  '^»  'i^^''  i'-fii» ' ;  '  -St  dicas  errdhi^ '  etc.    This  method  is  worse 
r'vlT-  "]"'"^'.'»"^  "  ^*\y  '^'^^'  "f  the  existing  combinations  (of  uhicli  th.  re  are  more 
ih.in  til  >)  can  be  L'lven,  and  because  periods  of  very  difieretit  forms  may  have  the  same 
jneaning.  while  p<-nods  of  the  same  for.ns  may  refer  to  conditions  altogether  different 
n  ttieir  nature.     W  e  have  used  the  conditional  formulas  merely  to  show  their  chaujres 
in  oblique  discourse,  where  not  the  meanini;,  but  the  form  alone  is  essential  Cp  G32) 


702 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES   OP  DOUBTFUL   REALITY. 


703 


if  in  the  indicative,  is  determined  either  by  the  general  rules,  or  by  tho 
parliciUar  rules  mentioned  below. 
A   Tenses  of  the  Indicative  in  Clauses  of  doubtful  reality. 

OBS.  1.  The  MOO.  of  a  conaitional  clauj.  of  ^-J>^;;:;,-;}V^;;j^^;;r;^C^UhiU^ 
TiVK   whatever  mood  may  be  used  in  P.n-li>li.     l  "t  '""""*"  /j  -o  .  ,;  w  g  r.ui  •  „  ;«i 

ll'sieimiuVji;  Jl  fl.A  ,»r;.':  %,i.  H .  1>.  O.  U,  W.-Ko,-mam  i^ilur  mil.i  totlu,  republic*, 

l'>"-?.-'-rv7™.«,w    Plant  Mil-    1  4  lO.-MihlSrntiorilliriiWu/-,  «qnis«(»fll8us 

r'™''rTh  i'  r  0  0«  "jl^S  «e^toinnilM»  in  v.l.is:  qui  rf  icclrco -,6«^^  ut  «li:-  m 
igiiogco.  lb.  t.im.  1(1.  -n.'^  ,.,''',,  ii,  K-mi  !■>  •>  3  -Oii.kI  >i  iia  liii  nt.  tntain  irinora» 
t„l«,  ne  m  v..  us  <,nl<U.m  (.,-f.  ,.^     I!..  K  ...  1-. -^1.    y     ,„'„a,/„„,n.-s  unlu.  sint.  H 

;'.!:';;s™>.l^S<';,!iti..i-:n.'/S';n;^      »..'..« qu«  ,.u,au,„».  u,a.uis  »ub«. 

''''^'•''  "SL'X  ',  ,V  urjr  m  ^     «"^     "^^  .lari  illa.n  quani  darl  hunnino  L'..nfrl  mel.w, 

rsi^^j'^cJiai^wio'^i.-kVi"  i>- "^  -"  '"-■"  "<='"  ^•='""" 

"'opT^  'ir  fht'ac'tfon  of  the  Si-clause  refer,  to  a  time  r.TCKE  t,.  the  speaker,  the  fol- 

'"'V'f^'m.r■;ll■v'i;"Ml''IhX';^i  «.ul  the  .«-/«.-«e  have  their  pre.lieate.  In  the  ruTURE- 
^^;f  ;\5    Jel^Vh^^icluture   «.,n,.,^^^ 


a  vobi 
qiue 


ia  »^/?m/^^  quo  banc  le<jjatinnein  douiu.n  relerilinus 
ico>.  libenter  «.s.sv///ia;-.  Cic.  Fin.  l,8.28.-(iu.;m  t 


Liv,  45,  "24.  — .Vi  milii  proMZ/is  ea 
andem  tiiuhun  nostra  calauiitas 


rt//4 


quie  dico!*,  libenter  "If'!'''''' •^'J^'ir'^rv.)''"- ^^^^^^  ,„  coii^tituerif,  meuui  ron 

eS'ii.^^lf  Pon=;^^;!  ;rg^«U 

future  ''•'•77.»": -.-"'    ;;:     r    ,■  ,  U  m.i*  r,  Vh    ™^^^^  iaciun»  et  a.ln.i.-un. 

SiSrs-i^i^^i:;:;;^  :;ir-^,i;;urft/'n;s^:;:^,s^  -^7u;;:;;uS:;^;rsi::i 


68  —This  form  occurs  even  if  the  future  ii»  possibly  remote,  as  :  Quod  si  assequor  (at  any 
future  time),  f/perv  Cra-sum  divitiis,  atque  omnium  vicos  et  prata  contemrio.  Cic.  Att.  1, 
4  3  _,S't  milii  tiliuf  qeidtur,  it^qiie  prius  moritur,  tuni  mihi  ilie  M  heres.  lb.  Or.  2,  82, 141. 
C  The  tljesis  may  be  in  the  perfect  with  the  name  meanin<r  as  when  the  clause 
refers  to  present  time  according  to  One.  1,  C:  Brutus  si  conservdtus  eiit,  vicimm.  Cic. 
Fam.  12.  6, 2.  (Comp.  the  examples  p.  30.3,  Obs.  2).  -Tum,  hercule,  illo  die  quo  ego  congul 
fum  creiltU"»  male  res  r/e\/a  publicu  fst,  fd  lej;em  banc  tuleritis  (If  you  carry  that  law, 
then  indeed  I  «hall  think  that  it  was  an  evil  day  for  the  republic  when  1  was  elected  cou- 

//  If  tlie  thesis  contains  an  action  holding  sood  at  all  times,  the  predicate  being 
placed  in  the  jxjtentkil  future,  according  to  the  rules  p.  350  foil.,  ^.  75,  Obb.  5-7,  the 
predicate  of  the  clause  is  regularly  placed  in  the  future.  Such  a  future  in  the  claiise  is 
not  a  future  by  virtue  of  the  conditional  clause  and  its  own  temporal  relation,  but  a 
iHmuhnt  future,  according  to  the  rule  p.  353,  R.  76,  as  :  AdversariOrum  de&criptio  tn/fr- 
7/iaWur,  n  lalsa  demonstmbitur ;  The  statement  of  the  adversaries  will  be  refuted  il  it 
is  proved  false.  Cic.Inv.  2,  IT,  54.-Quo  breviter  laudjlto.  aut,  H  erit  mmme,  pneter- 
mi-so  deinceps,  si  res  patietur,  de  fortfliiis  erit  et  facultatibus  dicendum.  lb.  P.  O.  22,74. 
—Defensor  primum,  si  poterit,  dtblbit  vitara  ejus,  qui  iusinmlabitur,  quam  honestissiinam 
demt)iistrflre.  lb.  Inv.  2. 11, 35. 

Ob«  3  The  action  whose  reality  is  represented  as  doubtful,  may  be  past  at  the  speak- 
er's lime.  In  this  instance  the  predicate  of  the  clause  is  regularly  in  the  indicative  of 
one  of  the  three  pmt  tenses  *,  according  to  the  general  rules  on  tenses. 

A  The  principal  predicate  is  in  the  future,  or  an  equivalent  potential  form  (impera- 
tive' subjunctive  present,  gerundial  etc.).  if  tlic  doubt  about  the  reahty  of  the  past 
action  must  be  removed  b^fare  the  action  of  the  thesis  can  ber/in,  as  :  Non  utar  ea  consue- 
tiidine  si  quid  factum  ^.s/clemenrer,  ut  dissolQte  factum  crimiuer.  C'ic.\  err.  2,  5,  8.— «Ji 
triumidium  mm'  cumtba^\  ciijus  tandem  te  rei  cupiditSte  arsisse  dejendes?  lb.  Pis.  24,56. 
MA  iam  aiinuid/aWww<'.s7  per  FIaccum../fe/;a  me.  ib.  Fam.  3,  ll,9.-Sapiensnonnumquam 
ina-na  scelera  levins  quam  n)iiiuraro//J/>*^^rf^,  si  ilia  lapsu,  mm  cnideiit5te«wim?.s*:a  sunt. 
Sen"  Ira  1  10— Sinas  nutrlcem  percontSri  quid  hoc  rei  sit,  ut,  si  lalso  pater  dxctus  suniy 
jeou'iOre  hinc  animo  dL<cidam.  Liv.  3.48.->bi  qui  se  vitidruni  illecebris  dediderunU  ims- 
sos/V/da/<<  honOres.  Cic.  Sest.  «G.  i:d8.-6't  quem  libido  in  ilUim  gurgitem  a/y7•^/^M^^  illo; 
rum  turn  cum  qinl)us  conjurjlvit,  non  suum  judicet  esse.  Liv.  39,  lb.->^i  il^metu  coacti 
statuam  dedrruid,  conliteare  necesse  e-t,  te  pecunias  per  vim  coegisse.  Cic.  V  err.  2, 2,  bl. 

B  The  predicate  of  the  thesis  is  in  the  indicative  of  one  of  the  past  tenses,  U  the 
action  is  represented  as  coincident  with  the  action  of  the  clause,  presupposing  the  reality 
of  the  latter  •  or  it  is  placed  in  the  pkesent  indicative  if  represented  as  existiuir  at  the 
speaker's  tinie,  provided  the  action  of  theclause  was  a  reality  at  the  time  spoken  ol,  as: 
(Juo  in  hello  si  fuit  envr,  commflnis  e\  fuit  cum  senHtu.  Cic.  Phi  11  13,34 -(^^worf^i 
iios  ad  aliquam  si)em  fortOna  reserrfivit.  minus  est  erratum  a  nobis.  Ib.  I<am.  14.^.  L— '>| 
\\'d.itci  C'laudiuin,  dolo  malo  dtjHi.  lb.  Tull.  12.29.-6'i  non  deum  na,  nee  faio,  sed 
cnlpil  veiiinini^  ad  C^annas.  cujus  tandem  ea  culpa  fvitf  Liv.25,6.-^t.  .q""  ^'i^  '^^i* 
eedHs  Ui.niie  facta  est.  ego  AtliC-nis  eo  die  fui,  in  c«de  interesse  non  jiotui.  Cic.  Inv.  1, 
3(5— Si  id  actum  ^st,  et  iccirco  anna  sttmpta  s-unt  ut  homines  postrgmi  alienis  pecuniis 
locupletarentur,  turn  vero  in  isto  beilo  subadus  oppressusqut  popnliis  Komanns  est.  l\).  K. 
A  47  _.si  Koma  condita  est  secundo  anno  Olympiadis  septiinie,  in  id  sieculum  Komuli 
c^riWk  tetas,  quum  jam  plena  (inecia  poetarnm  esset.  Ib.  Kep.  2, 10.-^\  tibi  ilia  proba- 
banuVcynnou  propriis  verbis  ilia  tentt^  f  lb.  Fin.4,22.-^i  magoo  emerat  (decumas), 
lare  ;>S>(ts'  enptori  lucrum  addi  oportgie  t  lb.  Verr.  2, 3,  m.-Quodsi  mil  um  ante  con- 
M  m  «r^^^  .-us  inieras,  ad  te  minime  2^rtinebat.  Ib.  K.  A.  34.-^t  .Hi  honOns  c-ausS 
sainam  dedidPrunt,  inimici  non  sunt.  lb.  Verr.  2,2.  til.-Ai.st  hinc  hodie  .^m^rart/  aut 
heii  certo  scio  hie  habitdre.  Plant.  Most. 4. 3.  U.-Si  omnes  tduimus  quod  arguimm-, 
m)nWtn7?m/a/.s' voluntiliemafacto;  omnes  plecttlmur.  Liv.45,24. 

C  The  iMincioal  predicate  may  be  in  a  hypothetical  subjunctive  of  the  imperfect 
or  Pluperfect.  In  this  instance  the  principal  sentence  is  not  the  thesis  of  the  indicative 
Si-clause  but  the  real  thesis  (ccmceived  as  a  general  assertion  of  the  speaker)  must  be 
suimlied  "as:  Si  fatum///t/,  classls  populi  Komai.i  inteilre.  etiamsi  iripudium  so hsiimum 
fecKsent  cl  .sses  tamen  ilterissent  (  =  Jf  this  was  the  decree  of  fate  ^f  ts  certain  that 
he  fleets  would  have  perished,  even  if  etc.).  Cic.  Di v.  2, 8. 20  -In  such  constructions  it 
n mv  be  nJce "sary  to  suoplv  both,  the  hypothetical  8i-clause  belonging  to  the  hypolheti- 
Snnfsis.  and  the  thesi's  proper  of  the  '"'ii^^^ive  S.-chnse.  as:  At..d  neque  ^.  fatu^ 
fuerat.  effuqisset,  nee,  si  non^/wmI^^l^euln  casum  mcidisset  [  =  If  this  was  (had  been) 
*  Some  <rrammarrai7s7f(Vr"in-tance  Arnold,  Pkosk  Compos  §  441)  assert  that  *i  with 
the  hnTf^c  "ml  pluperfect  ahcays  takes  the  subjunctive  This  erroneous  <:P'n.on  ,9 
refuted  by  the  examples  mentioned  in  the  text,  and  bv  the  regular  use  of  6»  with  a« 
imperfect  or  pluperfect  indicative  in  clauses  of  repeated  action  vP.  i'^^,  Obs.  1). 


701 


CONDITTONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTFUL  EEALITY.    705 


the  decree  of  fate,  U  i.  certain  that  he  conl.  .c.  ^Il^^^^fr^^:,^^^^'^^'^ J^l^ 

V,   Xfg\tive  Si-clauses  OF  DOUBTFUL  iiEALiTY 

03.  4    Ne^H^!^onalclan.e,or<Iou;>tfulr..i|^^^ 
(Hn'thu^'sinemo,  si  mhil  etc.),  correspo mli. u^^tp    ^^.ffj^^^'g;, /according  to  Ob.,  b). 

i^ar  ^  ."ed  non  faciet  si).  A  clause  V'  .^  'J^^J  '^w  y'  iuch.UcB  the  idea  of  ^t  ;^o«  If 
but  it  does  not  iieces-anly  contain  it,  \M  1^  „  nch  or  what  is  not  meant  hy  ilie  speaker 
Iv  .  1  sl" /i.vi  instead  of  si  nun,  we  may  my  too  niic  1,  ^'  ^.  and  fail  to  express  the  whole 
if  we  liVi  ^on  instead  of  ;.i.i,  we  '''«Vv  fv  a  t  i  spViker  did  not  mean  to  assert; 
rnoaniiv'  of  the  speaker,  but  we  will  not  sa>  '  "!  <  .^^^^^'^f^jj  j,,  the  sentence  ;  Vtncu- 
"Z^^i weaken  his  thou^^lit,  V.ut  we  ca       >t  "  1^^  following  two  ideas  arc 

Avhich  is  expressly  stated  hy  usii  -  iht  ^'-/j^y;;  ,        ^  ^     ,i  ,,on,  and  not  hy  nisi: 

OBS  5   Ne-ative  condiiional  clauses  must  he   n^"^"*'^;^^^^^^^^  of  the  nol-happenin- 

i  if  the'rcli<mof  the  thesis  '^J^^y';;^'^^i^l^J'X^^^iheacl\on  of  the  clause 
ot  the  acticm  in  the  clause,  f,ut  «f/^'^''^'''^^// f/;'  *f.'"vi  "chrvso<M.no  inipetnlre  non  pos- 
U  to  mevent  or  to  exclude  the  princuml  a.^t  on,  as     .Si  a  cnrj .^^  1^^  jnevaH'ng  on 

lumus    an  m  perfu^num  est  v^'^tra Juniitas.   C.c^^^^^^^^^  .oodness^;  but  not 

Chrv-^o-'onus  will  have  tl«.e  «'O''^*''/»^  f<^;;'"  '\^,,V  r(-fu  'e  etc.').-  decemviri  hnem  per- 
'  Our  pr~evailinu'  on  Chrysogonus  ^v\  L  Jf ^^,  ,\\\\V  a-sQ  "l^s  is^^  U v.  3, 52  (  =  /  W  1  the  not-^ 
tinacile  non  faciunr,  rtiere  ^l^ :^^^f^^^%^",o\^l  everything  go  to  ruins  '  but  N.^ 
r^f,'<inaoi  the  decemvirs  obstinacy  induct,  y""  «•  letting  everything  etc.?   \—^\ 

^V\M1  the  m/vi/^JZ  of  their  obstinacy  Prevent  you  fun  kju^^  Oic.  Ihut.  51.-Quod 
tmi  e  i  nat-e  «OMi-elerant  somim,  ^^^i'^'f!^^'^^^  '^'  ^  n  ffquod  mihi  cum  tide  im- 
^  ,  Mferre  non  potero,  opprimi  me  onere  oftuu  maio  Hua  ^  ^^^^^^^^^     ..  ^^^^^  „,  ,,,,c 

positum  est,  propter  pertldiam  'V^J'^^,^-,?^  ^.-  ^os  /u/n  tenent   fa'dera  vestra,  ne  nos 
re  mihi  non  Pl^ceat,  vitupeT^re.     l  .  4»k-M  vo^  ?st.-Suasori  proponitur  simplex 

zt^-~  j!'-;';;;!i;f  i^,!':?"^  "!!;^i^t  ^Sri^^n:^:^'  '^^r^r^^  p' 


enisor  pars  'The  non-utilitv  of  the  action  must  result  in  the  "nefiat"'  ;  the  sua 
gjtvs  '  The  utility  of  tiie  action  prevents  the  "  ne  flat  "  \  i.  e.  causes  the  '  fiat '.     lie 


snasor 
gstys  'The  utility  ot  tin-  action  prevents  tne  -  ne  nai  ,  ?.  c  causes  me  iiai  .  Hence 
Nisi-clauseri  cou'ld  not  be  u>-ed  by  the  dissuasor,  since  they  would  iiulude  the  iSi-clause 
of  the  suasor  while  they  are  meant  to  be  opposed  to  it.— Hence  when  the  idea  of  'con- 
hequence'  i-  expressly  indicated  by  the  i)reflicaie  of  the  thesis,  the  cnnditioual  ncL^ative 
clause  must  be  introduced  by  Vi  non\  ami  not  by  ' /a.>i  ' ;  Si  l.iec  euuncialio  '\ENihT 
IN  Tltsculanum'  vera  non  est,  seqnitur  ut  falsa  sit.  Cic.  Fat.  12.  v8.  _  ,  _ 

n  If  a  ne<'ative  conditional  clause  is  at  the  same  lime  concesmvf,  si  non,  not  m^t, 
mu-'t  be  ust^d  since,  in  this  instance,  the  action  of  the  thesis  will  not  he  exvlxditd 
hv  -the  happeiiiiM-'  of  the  action  in  the  clause,  but  will  held  good,  whether  the  action 
of  the  clause  happens  or  no»,  as  :  ISi  non  plus  ingenio  valebas  quam  ego,  certe  timybas 
minii*»  Cic  Att  y,  15.  7.— (^uibus  (volnpt)itil»us)  j^enecius,  si  non  abunde  potliur,  non  om- 
nlno  caret  lb  Seii.  14.— Quern  «i  imit:lri  aique  exprimere /iO/<  possumus,  at  qualis  esse 
debeat  pc/terimus  fortasse  diceie.  lb.  Orat.5, 19.— A  Flamina,  si  non  potes  omne,  partem 
aliquam  velim  «-xlorqueas.  lb.  Fain.  10,  24,  'i.-Si  ilhid  non  licet,  saltein  hoc  licebit.  ler. 
Euii  4  2  11  —0^/fW^ide  Antonio /<o/*laboraiis.  mihi  certe  consiileredebetis.  Cic.  i  n.  1-i,  8. 

C  If  a  ne"ative  conditional  clause  beloiiL's  to  the  clauses  of  doibtless  reality  (^. 
45)  it  must'""be  introduced  hy  « //O/i.  not  by  nisi,  since  such  clauses  always  n.ntam  a 
doubtless  •  not  happening'  of  the  action,  so  that  the  second  requirement  oJ  a  Nisi-clause 
(si  cavto.  non  facitt :  see  Obs.  4)  is  always  wanting  in  them,  as  :  Si  Antoni»)  Crassus  visus 
non  est  eloquens.  numquam  Cotta  esset,  liun.quam  lloriensius.  Cic.  Orat.30, 10b.  Here 
the  negative  action  of  Crassus  is  represented  as  a  doubtless  fact :  and  hence  the  assump- 
tion cannot  be  represented  in  an  affirmative  form,  which  excludes  the  use  of  inn. 

D  If  the  ne<'ation  refers  to  a  single  member  of  the  conditional  clause,  with  wnicH 
another  member  of  the  clause  is  c..5rdinate(i  by  an  adrer^ative  conjunction,  the  nega- 
tion cannot  coal,  see  with  n  into  nui,  as  :  Si  non  deum  ira.  nee  faio.  t^ed  culpa  periimus 
ad  Cannas  ciijus  tandem  ea  culpa  fuit  V  Liv.  2.\  O.-Tibi  minus  commode  consuluens.  .^t 
von  foi-tunoi  oftvecu^/^- videbere,  sed  inevm  aliq'iod  factum  condemnavuse.  C*s  inCic. 
Att  10  i^Ji  1  — Mehor  lit  grex,  si  non  est  ex  coltectis  connmiTnu^,  sed  ex  consuettsiwa. 
V-irroii  \{  '>  3— If  the  ne"ation  refers  to  a  single  member  of  the  clause,  whtc/i  is  twt 
followed  braiiother  member,  adversatively  coordinated,  nisi  may  be  used  instead  of 
ii  non.  if  not  forbidden  l>y  ihe  other  rules  *.— For  the  use  of  si  non  and  msi,  if  two  con- 
ditional clauses  are  opposed  to  each  other,  see  11.  49,  Obs,  1. 

Obs  »;    III  the  ft)llowin<:  instances  nisi  is  used  for  clauses  of  douhtfiil  reality  : 

A  To' represent  the  action  of  the  clause  as  the  only  means  of  j.re venting,  excluding, 
or  avoidiii"  the  action  of  the  thesis,  as  :  Nisi  hiec  cohors  sistit  impetum  ho^tlUln,  a<ium 
de  iwptfioest  (  =  The  staying  of  the  attack  is  the  only  means  to  prevent  the  fa  i  of  the 
emnire)  Liv  4  3^.-Actum  igitur  de  te  ed,  nisi  provides.  Lic.ham.9,lb,^.—l>£j)ugneS 
OiMtet,  'ni-^i  concedis.  lb.  Alt.  7. 9.4.-Frangite  sorltas,  ne  molesti  sint ;  etwit  enim,  nm 
c\-ivCtis  lb  \c  2  29,  9:i— Very  frequei Illy  in  such  periods  the  thesis  is  likewise  nega- 
tive, in  which  instance  'nisi. ..non'  has  the  meaning  of  'only  if  (=' not  except  , 
'iK.t  unless'),  as:  Msi  deus  te  corporis  custodiis  liberaverit,  hue  tibi  aditus  paiSre 
7,on  i)o"te«^l  (  =  Onli/  if  a  «rod  relieves  you.  the  access  can  be  open  :  or  '  y7atss  a  god  re- 
lieves vol".,  no  access  Van  be  open  ').  Cic.  Kep.  (5, 15.-Cui  persuadCri  posse  non  arbitror, 
nisi  eiit  convenius.  lb.  Att.  8.  9,  4.-Qu:e  sceleris  vesti-ia,  7im  multa  et  manilestJi  sun  , 
res  t.-.ui  s<:ele>ta  cndi  non  i.oiest.  lb.  R.  A.  22.-lIi  snnt.  qui  jn.^i  mecivitate  expulissent 
olitintMv  se  fon  posse  i)Ulaveiunt  licentiam  cupiditjltum  siiarum.  lb.  Att.  10.  4, 1. -At 
vero  lilii,  IJrute,  non  solvam.  nid  p.iiis  a  le  cavero.  ainplius  eo  nomine  nemmem  petiifl- 
rum  lb.  Ihut.o,  lS.-Ai.si  quam  vicfriS  patefecerimus  viam,  7/M//«m  hal.emns.  Liv.9 
2:"-If  'nin  non\  in  such  senten-es.  has  not  the  lorce  of  'only',  ihe  c.mlit.onal 
clause  must  be  iniroduced  by '*i. .  ./*o« ',  as  :  Quod  iwn»on  potest  .st  id.  quod  visum 
erit,  diseerni  non  poterit  a  falso.  Cic  Ac. 2, 8  [i  e.  -Tijis  is  \^^^^^^^;^^'l'l^;;:i^]^?l^ 
the  Sceptics  is  true,  namely  that  truth  cannot  be  distiuLMUslied  from  falsehood.  Mst 
id  disceini  iK>tent '  would  inean  '  This  is  only  possible  if,  m  the  things  seen,  we  are  able 
to  disiiii'-iiish  truth  from  falsehood '.]  ...  j 

iJ  iFiI.e  thtsis  and  the  clause  are  to  each  other  in  the  relation  of  rule  and  excep- 
TioN,  or  if  the  action  of  the  clause  is  represented  as  a  mere  chance  or  accident,  the 

*Theirrammariansdo«o/add  this  restriction  to  their  rule  \'l'^\t  if  the  negation  refers 
to  a  sin.de  word  of  the  sentence,  the  use  of  msi  is  not  admissible'.  But  \\ithout  th ib 
re-triction,  the  rule  would  not  hold  good,  as  appears  Irom  the  lollowing  passage  .  Hie 
autem  qui  arcliiuirata  diciiur,  nin  U'luabilittr  pnedam  oispertiat,  interliciaiur  Cic  Off 
2  1  40  Here  e  ideiitlv  the  negation  belongs  to  ivquabiliter.  and  yet  is  blended  with  s% 
imoVXi  Thus  in  the' following  passage  a  Isi>i-clause  might  have  been  used  without 
LttVcti  g  the  sense  otherwi-elhaH  the  sense  is  affected  by  changing  st  non  "'to  «m  in 
a/,V  seiiTence :  Si  latum  tibi  est  ex  hoc  morbo  non  convalescere,  non  couvalcbccs.  Ciu 
Fat.  12, 29  (  =  Nisi  latum  tibi  est  ex  hoc  morbo  couvalescere). 


706 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


clause  is  introduced  by  ni4,  not  by  H  non  (henoo  always  'nisi  for(e\  never  ''sivon 
f'trle  ').  as  :  Ciiiltos  sinlrulo-'  juivjiiraiulo  udi^'un.  tiid  ciii  morbus  causa  crit.  Liv.  24,  Hi. 
(2u.<re,  nin  quid  vobisaliud  f>l.ici-t.  ud  ilia  pt-r^'ilinus.  Cic.  Orai.  «i5.  ^-.'O.— E<;<»  b.lluni  l(c- 
dirisin)uin  tbru  puto,  id<i  qui  Puithicus  casu-  rx-Jitcrit.  lb,  A't.  7,  "^t;.  .'i  — Il)iiur  i<:itur.  et 
ita  quidein  ut  cimisi's,  nisi  cujus  tinivioris  persOiiie  suscipit-iulie  sposerit  anic  oblaia.  II). 
10.  1)  y.  — .Vi.si  liiiic  liodie  rini^'ravil  aiit  luri.certo  scio  hie  bahitflre.  Plaut.  Most.  4.  3, 14. 
—Xisi  oinncs  di  \\\v.  atqui^  houiincs  destTUUt.  t'xossjllx»  e;,'o  ilium,   lb.  pM-ud.  1,8.  171. 

C.  If  a  noL'ative  conditional  clause  is  used  to  desi;,'ii;iie  an  :<ction  as  nwv  wniili  m>i<t 
be;  done,  or  inutit  hold  j;ood  iii  order  to  av..i(|  certain  «li.«iadvantaLfr-,  penalties,  or  threats 
expressed  in  the  thesis,  the  clause  is  almost  always  introduced  by  i,i.>i,  very  rarely  by 
si  non      In  this  instance,  ihit  Nisi-clause  has  the  force  of  a  cate-^'orical,  aftirmative  im- 


pera'ive  if  it  refers  to  the  action  of  another,  and  th  it  «tfa  solemn  jiromii^e  or  ass»  i>r<itio>i 
if  it  refers  to  an  act  of  ihe  sjnake/,  as  :  Quod  nifi  lacis,  in  viiula  te  duci  jubCbo.  Liv. 


own  actions,  the  clause  beini;  equivalent  to  a  pledi,'e  :  Nulla  sni)pruia  recflso,  /«iAi  paucis 
diCbus  hos  populaiores  airrOrum  iiostrOrum  fusos  fu;;atosqiie  castris  exuero,  Liv.;j.  «i8 
(  =  I  p'edtje  mystlf  to  drive  them  from  their  camp;  else  \  submit  to  every  torture).— 
lliBC  /<t.si  "omnia  nerspexerilis  in  causfl,  temere  a  nobis  illam  appeliari  putatOte.  C'ic. 
Clu.  G.  18.  —Sin  mtelie.'ceritis  (  =  unless  I  convince  you),  j'uiiCtn,  nullum  esse  ofti- 
ciu'u  tarn  sanctum,  quoil  non  Capitonis  scelus  violSrit,  viriim  optimum  ef^e  eum  judi- 
catOte.  lb.  i{.  .\..is.  1U'.>.— .\ikdeat  deinde  talia  adus.  n/.vi  in  hunc  iiisi<;ue  jam  documen- 
tum  mortalil)Us  dedero.  Liv.  1,  28.— So  when  the  clause  is  equivalent  to  a  «-iron";  as.-eve- 
ratit)n  :  Occidor,  nisi  e;ro  intro  luic  propeie  proj)iro  currere.  I'laut.  Aul.  2,  8. 23.— Ai.4 
me  suspeudo.  occidi!  lu.  llud.  f).  3,.VJ.— .J/o/'iar,  nisi  fac6te  !  Cic.  .Att.  l(i,  11,  1.  — /Vrt-r/z/J, 
nid  sollicirus  -urn.  Cass.  iuCic.  Faui.  15, 1!>,  4.  So  J'laut.  .Most.  1,3.35;  lb.  Trin.2.  4,  114. 

Som(^times  (but  raiely)  conditional  clauses  referring:  to  a  penalty  for  non-perforuiance, 
are  introduced  by  ni  non.  as  :  «b'i  mild  non  jam  culleis  laic  ol.iim  deportabitur,  te  ipsam 
culleo  ego  eras  laciam  ut  deportCre  in  per;,Milam.  I'laut.  Pseu<l.  1.  2.  83.  This  is  <i//r(/y!f 
the  case  if  the  sulTerer  of  the  penalty,  and  the  doer  of  the  punishable  action  are  dift'<  rent 
persons,  as  for  instance,  when  a  bondsman  or  a  liostaye  is  to  suller  a  punishment  for 
another,  as  :  Dauiunetu  et  Piiintiam  ferunt  hoc  aninio  inter  se  fiiisse  ui  vas  factus  Mt 
alter  ejus  si^tendi,  ut,  vi  ille  non  reveitissei,  moriendum  es.^et  ipsi.  Cic.  Otl'.  3,  10,45. — 
Obsidet*  etiam  sexcenti  equites  imper:Tti  qui  capite  luerenl  n  pacio  non  staretur.  Li  v.  9, 
5.— Ariovistimi  in  obsides  omnia  exempla  cruc  iatusque  edere,  ^t  qua  res  non  ad  nnium 
eius  facta  sit.  C:es.  B.  G.  1,31.*— For  the  u-e  of  ni,  instead  of  nisi,  in  clauses  n'feniui^ 
to  penally  for  non-performance  fee  Obs.  1>,  />>.— For  tlie  iJVe  of  nisi  in  certain  idiomatic 
phra-es  see  It.  5"),  Ubs.  1-9.     For  nh<i  in  clauses  of  non-iealihj,  see  /.'.  4r>,  Obs.  3. 

Obs.  7.  In  many  instances  the  sense  is  not  essentially  afiVcted,  whetlnr  the  thesis  is 
considered  as  the  consequence  of  a  ''  not-doing  \  or  as  excluded  by  a  '  doinq\  In  such 
instances  the  conditi(»ual  clause  may  eitfur  be  introduce  I  hy  si  non.  or  by  nisi,  as  :  E_'o, 
ui  mr  navii^atio  no/i  luorabitur,  cpiie  inciirrObat  in  ii)s()s  Etesin-;.  propediem  te.  nt  spen», 
vidCoo.  Cic.  Fam.  1.").  11.2.  Coinpan;  with  :  Kl,'o,  nisi  quid  me  Etesiie  morabuntur.  eeleri- 
ter.  ur  spero.  vos  vidO'io.  II).  2.  15.  7  — Tu  autem,  ni^i  molest  urn  e^t.  paullisper  «-xsur^'e. 
lb.  Clu.H(5.  But :  Qiud  acturus  si^,  M  tibi  non  est  inolestum.  rescrlbas  nulii  velim.  H). 
Fam.  5,  12.31.  — Coiistitui  virtus  null'»  modo  potest,  ni^i  ea  qua-  sum  prima  natflne  tenO- 
bit.  lb.  Fin.  4, 15.  Compart!  with  :  .Equitas  tollitur  omnis  si  habere  su'.im  cuTqiie  tion 
licet.  lb.  Oil".  2.  22.  78.— -Vnte  portas  est  belliim  ;  si  inde  non  pellitnr,  ^am  intra  mtBuia 
erit.  Liv.  3,  <j8.  But:  Ab  eis,  ni-i  pros|)icitis.  brevi  tempore  deseremii.i.  Cic.  Alt.  1,  9, 
20.— For  the  n-»e  of  si  non.  an  I  nisi  in  coordinate  conditional  periods,  see  li.  49,  Obs.  1. 

Obs.  8.  Xi  (tinless,  if  not)  luid  a  ditlereut  nieaninj;  in  the  preliterary  (archaic),  ante- 
classical,  and  classical  periods  of  the  lani;iia<,'e.  In  the  archaic  j)eiiod.  a»  far  as  we  can 
judge  from  the  few  monuments  extant,  ar.d  from  the  later  develoi)mi  nt  «if  the  use  of  ni, 
111  was  n~ed  with  the  force  of  ,<i  non  (Obs.  9.  .4).  Of  this  usage  there  are  still  several  relics 
in  special  connections,  both  in  anteelassical  and  classical  stvle  (Obs.  9, /y  and  (').  But 
in  the  classical  period  ni  was  extensively  used  as  an  equivalent  of  nisi  in  jnost  of  its 
meaning-»,  ex'-ept  in  those  coniiections  wht!ic //ixi  has  the  force  of  n  co<irdina/inr/  amjnuc- 
tion  (see  /?.  50  Obs.  1-9).  Only  traces  (dthis  use  occur  in  the  anteelassical  authors.  But  it 
becaiie  more  frequent  in  Cicero  and  Salliist.  and  reached  its  greatest  extent  in  Livy  and 
Tacitus,  who.  in  clauses  of  non-reality,  use  ni  more  frequently  than  both  nisi  and  si  non 
taken  togetljer. — C;Rs:ir  ii(!ver  uses  the  conjunction  ni. 

*  If  a  penalty  attached  to  a  non-perfornmnce.  refers  to  indefinite  doers  in  gknbual 
Ri'LES  or  LAWS,  the  conditional  clause  is  iutrodticed  by  ai  non,  not  by  nisi,  as  :  Si  quis 
in  jus  vocStus  non  ierit  (not  'ni<i..  .ierit"),  a  judice  mulctil  damnabilur.  Paul.  Dig.  2, 5, 
2,— Si  non  accipit,  quod  te  debSre  dicis,  ucctlsea.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 2, 12. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTFUL  REALITY.  707 

according  to  H,  '*•»  <^f,^-J>  •,  "f  •  Kp\ni  \  Tab  1  -Kem  vfd  pa-junt,  orfito  ;  7a  pagunt, 
hat,  libras  lams  in  diem  i^^^o.  t  rgm.  All.  i  lu  •  '•     {;         the  actor  shall  plead;  if  tliere 

"'""'''r'^Sw'hau'inmJduce  lie  ^"in  tl^cSu^Ic!  Frgm.il  Tab  3.  and 
j^  no  contract.  »»«  ^»'^^,1  '."t"^**""^^/"  j  )^.\  iireadv  cea-ed  in  the  earliest  anteelassical 
Auet.  Her.  2,  13,  20.  This  use  of  ui  h.xd  a  1  react >  ^^^;^  ^^^^^  habSbis.  foenum  non  defi- 
writers,  who  use  si  non  in  this  connec  ion  .  1  . »^^"")/i  ^^"^^"^  I!^,  vntere  use  7n  in  this  ccm- 

ciet :  si  non  erit,  siecnm  ''"^""'"'♦«•.^;;;^,  ";.;^-  Thus  Lh'v  in  a  verbatim  quotation  of  a 
mction  only  when  j^ey  g'/o/.  a.u^^nt  lavv^    ^hu^^^L^^^     ^  a  4^^^^^^  ^^^ 

p.ssa-e  of  the  hbri  '*V"^'^^   •   •\'>f«  l^'^.  ^".^^^  ori^u^  H^um  in  terram  defOdi ;  siu 

consule)  m.u-itur.  probe  iaclum  MdCn  ; ''*  "'^[';"  '^'"  i,e  pulilicum  d^ 
autem  .ese  devovCre  N^h-t.  ;jt  "^^"^^'^^S^^^eertSin  Lm-a  or  om|sslons  as 

qui  sese  <levoverit.  Lu.8,10.—  -^  ,/."  ^^;:,,?"''?;  :  ()„i  t^c  sicrit  testar  er,  ni  testimo- 
r)i.nishable.  the  thesis  «^P--^^;'"?/;^^  P'^?,'i^^:afenip  yed  as  an  instrumVnt  witness, 
Ilium  fariiltur,  inlesiahilis  esto  ,  If  he  j;''^,^^.f^._\"j»'pr,-n^^  xil  Tab.  S.-Aij>fdicdtum 
refuses  to  give  his  t»^^=^'>;7"y,  he  shjd    be  infa^^^^^^  gt^all  imprison  and 

facit.  ducito,  vtncTto ;  //  he  does  ^«f  *«^  'V^,.  f^/S^^^^  be  distiniruished  from  penal- 
fetter  him.  !»>•  \-T»»^;r^'  »?:;"f  V  i.*^  io  r^  e  fo  niai/ce  n  1 1  e  former  .t  non  was  used  in  the 
ties  denounced  by  tndtrtduals  '"'  jf/^-VV;?"'  'je"!  nisi  was  used.  See  foot-note  p.  700. 
literary  perio.ls  of  the  !''V?n^f;e,  w    le  ni  thc^.^^^^^  as         ^^^  ^^  ^  .^^^^.^.^^ 

B.  M.  as  an  unquestionable  re  le  of  archaic  ».>R,ii  ^^  ^^^^^  .^^^  ^  covenant 


(or  'It  you  nave  hol  comno.i^"  -»-.  "  ^--.V.t,'  ^..gh  a  sum'  (or  '  f  I  did  commii 

etc..  Jvani).    The  def-ndant  Y^^^^l^  •v.Ailo  etc    "^^^^^  So  in  criminal  suits  lor 

Buch  a  crime')  '  I  sha  1  pav  such  ^  ":^  <.»  ^/.^^.lo^f/^jou  of  U^^  complainant  was  '  Al  vir 
certain  kinds  of  slander  ad>;dlusy^^imo>«,s     the  sponsio^^^^^^  ,    i  sponsions  re- 

f,jnus  sum  etc.'.  and  tliat  of  the  ^^''«''^1^  1^,^^^  >;'/  uer  'd  and  if  the  classical  writers 
muined,  to  a  certain  extent,  ^'rou^'h  the  classical  pcrioc^^^a^^^^^^^^       ^^^^  .^^  ^^^  sponsion 

refer  to  a  sponsio,  they  designate  ''^  "'>J.^Jt^mucl>  i)>  ^^'^/^\<^'  .  -^  j^,,^.i^  clauses can- 
cf  the  complainant  trarely  ^J  ^^-^J^;^ ^\^^  I  onius  socititn  in  decumis  esse  di- 
not  be  literally  rendered  ;  as  :  SP"""-'^*.  ^  ?,.  ;;\\\*:,:X  "jicknowledg.-s  you  (the  pnetor) 
cat.'  Cic.  Verr.  2. 3. 59;  The  sponsion  is  ^ha.  A  .oni.h  acKiioN  for  both  the  pitetor  and 
L  his  partner  in  the  collectb.n  of  the  tithes    v-Jiuh^vascrcmr  ^        „ummum  facere 


not  know  y  Ep.  Theii  1  hei  a  taient  ag.  i  -si  »  t."„ 'V'rrcle  pi-nus.  ni  omnia  memini  et  scio ; 
Plant.  Ep.  5,  2,  :i3.-To.  Non  ^'«^^'P'^^,  ^^''^„,^,f  k^J.^ry  ^v^rVth^^^^^^  lb.  Pcrs.  2,  2,4.-Id  7ii  fit, 
Will  vou  bet  with  me  that  I  remember,  ai^d  kno  %  i^^^^g^^'^p  j  ^  _Ti,e  party,  making  a 
mecum  pig.n.s..  siquis  volt,  da.o  ni  urnam  ^^J^^^^-Ji'^i^l^,,  qi^t  habeas  hodie 


mecum  pig.nis.  si  quis  volt,  daio  "^  «irnam  "^"'^'-^^j^^^^-^;  ',,:(,  t^.te  quot  habeas  hodie 
&;;;in';=re.^(^tS'a:!;;^^;^;^^  ^^  not^^know  how  many 

«Ts«ffi.!inuJ^.?s^r:rc£;Sn^^e.«nsu^ 


imililil.ns.  Hi  «L'liuni    iletui-,  sine  """7'»V7'"' oni  .•"o,  ,,m 

ni  |.r,.VM.cl»..i  tibI  quam  v„lueri8  *^''^,^"'l^''    'l"<^;™t    ,„  decree  the  province  lo 

'^i^l^Tl^V^^Z^S^iC:  i'it«e7u."o"ai'ey  »^re  cdered  to  deuounc. 


708 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTFUL  REALITY. 


709 


war  nnlo«s  satisfaction  was  clvcn^.  11>.  1.  2-2*.— TimObat  irtim  Ponilti.  7)i  pannssct  locatis. 
Sall'..Iii".  2.-.,  7.— .Vi  fua  cii-tOdi:*  nvuliis,  jam  h:vv  uuf.Mvr  la-res.  1I'>''- ^^i^,,'' f^  ^-^l-— y/ 
posces  mitf  (licm  lihriiiu  oiiinlumiiie..,  invidiil  vt-l  ainOre  viiril  torqueberu,  lb. i-p.  1,  A  .i4. 
—  ScTvItnni  libi  inc  alxluciti), //Hccero.  Plant.  Pseiwl.  1,5,  105.  ^         .  ,     ^^ 

K  III  the  «^aiiie  wavtlu'  assrv.TationsiiK'iitionfd  Obs.  «,  C  may  he  Ptronsthened  by  M- 
claii<e<  iu-ti-ad  of  by  Nisi-clause-,  as:  Moriar,  ni  pnto  to  mall»;  a  O-^an'  consnii  qiiam 
ir.aunlH  Cic  Fam.  7.  23,  \.—I\rt'H/i.  ni  pit*(i'm  piiulvi  esse.  Varro,  H.  It. .}.  8.  10.—I'>ni, 
lu'rclf  hodie,  ni  hiinc  a  te  abiiro.  Plant.  True.  2,  7,  (i<>.-I)i  me,  pater,  ..nines  od.-nnt,  ?/<  ina- 
.'i«*  te  niiam  ocnlos  nunc  aino  meos.  Ter.  Ad.  4.  5,  Wi.— Similai  ly  minnn,  witl.  the  principal 
uredii  ate  <».sy  understood  (  =  iiiinim  est.  ov  miruin  essel  :  almost  ol  the  name  force  as  7«o- 
i-iar  perii  etc.),  occurs  witli  a  Ni-clause  in  anteclissical  style,  as:  .)/i/7//»  m  domi  est 
(  =  T  am  sure,  he  is  home;  literally  :  A  miracle  if  be  is  not  home).  Ter.  And.  3.4,  r.».— 
Mirumid  l:ic  me  quasi  nuiricnam  exossilre  cogitat.  Plant.  Anipli.  1,  1,UW  -In  Uie  same 
meanin"  '  mini  sunt '  is  used  :  Mira  sunt,  ni  Pseudrdus  est.  Plant.  Pseud.  4,  .,  11 ..  See  lb. 
Baecb  :?  3  4»»C'apt  4,2  -,'5.— In  elassieal  style  Ni-clanscs  occur  with //a;v/;/j,  when  the  cop- 
ula is  f.r/>re.v»"'/,  as  :  Mir'imqne  esse  td  jam  exterir.re  i)arte  eastra  hosliiim  oppusnentiir. 
Liv  3  O.S  _St)metimes  nisi  is  used,  in  place  of  y^j,  after  /nirum.a^:  Plant.  Ampli.  1.1, 127; 
lb  i  i  275.  Similar  is  the  use  of  nisi  ndrum  t>^t  as  a  parenthetical  elanse.  as  :  1  u.  nisi 
iHiruin  est,  plane  perdidisii  mulierem  (  =  mirntn  ni  perdidisti).  Plant.  Pseud.  4.  7, 114t. 

F  Vi  i-*  used  with  the  force  of  nisi  in  the  instance  meniioned  Obs.  (i,  A,  to  repn'seut 
an  action  a<  the  on/i/  means  of  excliidinLr  the  action  of  the  thesis,  both  with  an  alHrina- 
tive  and  a  negative  thesis,  as:  (Decemviri  exislimSbant)  temptalioncm  earn  lore  al)o- 
lend'i  <ibi  ma<"i>tratus, //i  con-ensu  resisterent.  Liv.  3.  3"^.— Iain  pro|>e  es»e  ratus  nt,  7a 
violeniiu'  eorTim  re-i>teretur.  vietum  imperinm  essct.  lb.  3.  41.— (ialii  (iiinm  vidGrent, 
iienuieciiiim  Homaiios  tot  eladibiis  territo-,  ner  llexilros  ad  deditiOnem  amnios  m  vis 
adhibeiT'tiir.  lb.  5.  43.  — Ka  enim  se  didfuum  ii\uv,  ni  Ihinr,  n>/l/(i  sit  paeis  conditio.  lb. 
30  ;];i  — Marcellns  jussit  pimii:!  alt-^iimn  1  virtually  neirative)  ;<?  ab  se  sii,'iium  nccei)is>ent. 
lb  2:i  44  —Xi  ilium  recipit,  niJdt  egl  quo  me  recipiam  (excei)t  he  receive» him.  I  have  no 
retn<'o)  Plaut  (apt.  1,  2,  IM.— (^li  rempiiblicam  sistere  nt-rjut  posse,  )n  ad  e(piestrem  ordi- 
nenriiidicia  refeiautMr.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3.  W  [Hand.  aceordiUL'  to  his  erroneous  tlieorv.  cor- 
rects /ii,  in  this  pa.<sa!.'c.  into//ixi.  Put  this  would  require  the  same  coireciiou  in  almost 
all  the  p:is>a<:es  quoted  above,  and  in  a  L^reat  many  more].  ^  ,    »u 

G  ()iiiie  frequently /4  is  emploved  in  those  clauses  where,  accordinc:  to  Obs.  <.  both 
fjjvi  and  .si  non  inii^dit'l).'  used,  as  :'Servus  indicflvit,  qiiinqu*'  nobiles  juvenes  CampajiO- 
rum  id  incendium  lecisse,  vuliroque  facti'iros  alia,  ni  eomprendantur.  Liv.2<i,  27.— 
E"o  wi  restiiuitur  pU'Mia,  rorti'mam  cum  omnibus,  infamiam  K»his  seiitiam.  Id.  0.24.— 
Eamcoi!tuiiieIiam,//J  sibi  ab  his  qui  lecerint,  demamr,  ipsos  omni  vi  depulsilros  esse.  lb. 
g  o.3_(),ii  nuntiarent.  seiiiltnm, /a  Cornelius  consul  ad  mairistriltus  siibroganrios  l<o- 
maiii  venlret,  potiu»  quam  (i.  Minucium  a  belloavocfiret,  interregnum  inlri  passOrum.  lb. 

""//Extremely  vare  is  the  use  of  ni,  instead  of  7dsi.  if  the  clause  is  to  the  thesis  in  the 
relation  of  an  exeepti«m  to  a  rule  (arconlini,'  to  Ob<.  H.  //>.  and  instead  of  si  non.  when 
a  Nisi-dause  would  be  imi)roper  (Obs.  5.  A),  as:  Mens  hie  est  homo,  ni  (  =  nisn  med 
omnes  di  atque  homines  deserunt.  Phtiiy;^H;ud^2^,J^— Pli2>jjtu  Achtei  liabuC- 

"*  Hand  triesTo7)rove  that  ni  has  only  the  force  of  si  non,  and  not  of  nisi,  by  quoting 
the  above-mentioned  passa«?e,  and  coiiiparinir  it  with  the  followiiiir  i>as.«aj:e  :  '  Le-jiltus, 
si  non  dednntur,  (pios  exi)o-cit,  helium  ita  indTcit.  Liv.  1,32.  Rut  in  this  passage  si  non 
is  coinrtlv  u>-ed,  accordiiiL'  to  loot-note  to  Obs.  (J,  C,  and  accordint;  to  our  remark» 
under  No. '(7  of  the  present  Obs.:  since  Livy  recites  the  siib-tauce  <>!  the /(/?r  conceru- 
iu'^  the  declarations  of  war,  and  does  not  refer  to  any  individual  or  j)articular  tlireat. 

t  From  this  use  of  Ni-(dauses  as  peculiar  forms  of  asseveratiou,  must  i)robably  be  de- 
rived the  ori'MU  of  the  particles  nifnlntm,  (juiJni,  and  quipjie  (instead  o\fjui(Jp>-ni). 
Ximlrinn  (of^-ourse)  stands  either  in^tejid  of  the  parenthetical  '  ni  inh'um  tsf  ,  as  in  the 
abov.'-fiuoted  passa"e  of  Plantus,  or  instead  of  '  ni  ifn  est,  jnin/m  est\  [There  is  no 
analo"v  whatever,  by  which  the  usual  derivation  of  nl/nlrum  from  ne  wiruni  could  be 
x^ro\■^^!i^  —  0>li<^ni  (why  not)  is  =  Quid  sit  ni  (what  would  be  the  matter  if  not  :  it  would 
be  wonVlerlul  if  not,  -^  mirnrn  ni).  This  is  best  seen  from  the  pass;i«res  m  which  qmd 
is  senirated  from  ni,  as  :  0>d<l  cqo  ni  fleam  f  Plaut.  Pseud.  1. 1,  !>4.  (^nid  eqo  m  lentiwi  f 
11,  -2' 2  ':u  —quid  iilain  ni  alniruat  ^  Ter.  Ad.  4,  5.  2H.— C^'/;/>/>f//i  (or  quifipini)  oceur.s 
eei)arite(l  bv  one  or  more  word-,  exactly  in  tin;  sense  of  qmdni.  as  :  Ps.  Nimis  tandem 
e.ro  abs  te'contemiior.  Si.  Quippe  etro  te  ni  contemiiam,  >trat lotiei'.s  homo  qui  eltiar. 
plant  P-(Mul  4  1.12  Hence  (/iiii>/nni.  written  as  one  word,  lias  the  si-nse  of  iiinnrurn, 
»<  •  Ps  Scele-te  •  lU.  Dicis  vera,  Ps.  Verbero !  Ba.  Q"ippi,d.^  lb.  1,  3. 142.  Comp.  lb.  Men. 
5  (J  ■jo'—lt  seems  that  qnippf,  a-  it  occurs  in  classical  u>aL'e.  is  nothina:  but  r/inpptnt 
with  ii«  ni  dropped,  the  usual  derivation  of  r/*/j>;>«  from  f/uia/ie  being  objer-tionabie  in 
gevetal  respects.  But  perhaps  quippe  may  have  arisen  from  the  mere  iuterrogaiive  quia 
with  the  suffix />(5,  with  a  force  bimilar  to  'quidf  quod\ 


runt,  deprecantes,  quia,  ni  (  =  si  non)  impetrassent  pacem  BoeOtis,  bellum  simul  gerere 
decreveiant.  Liv.  33,  29. 
/.  For  the  use  of  ni  in  clause?  of  non-reality  pee  R.  46,  Obs.  3. 

C.  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  in  clauses  of  doubtful  reality. 

Obs.  10.  In  clauses  of  doubtful  reality  the  following  classes  of  subjunctives  must  be 
disiini;ui>hed  :  1>  The  sul>junclive  of  impuobabii.ity  (Obs.  11)  :  2)  the  subjiinciive  of 
actions  DKPEXDENT  ON  THE  WILL  of  the  person  addressed  (Obs.  12) :  3)  the  subjunctive 
of  viKTiAL  NON-KEAMTY  (Obs.  i:^,  14) :  4)  the  subjiiiict  i  ve  in  indefinite  condiiional 
l)erio(is(OBs.  1.5.  Ki) ;  5)  tlie  subjunctive  of  exemplification  (Obs.  17):  b)  the  historical 
bulijunctive.  The  subjunctives  enumerated  No.  1-4.  occur  onJy  when  the  principal  pred- 
C!ite  is  non-preterite,  and  hence  their  tenses  are  either  the  present  or  the  perfect.  The 
historical  subjunctive  (Xo.  5)  occurs  when  the  principal  predicate  \^ prtteHle,  and  hence 
ittj  teuse  is  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect*. 

1.  Subjunctive  of  Improbahility. 

Obs.  11.  The  subjunctive  of  improbability  represents  the  condition  as  not  likely  to 
occur,  as  :  Omnes.  ^i  in  Italia  cwtsistat  Pompejus.  un-l  erimus  ;  sin  cedet,  consilii  res  est. 
Cic.  Att.  7.  10.  Here  the  eventuality  of  PimipeyV  staying  in  Italy  is  npresented  as  less 
probable  than  the  other  alternative,  by  jilacing  the  former  in  the  subjunctive,  and  the 
latter  in  the  future.— Non  tantum,  si  ]tr(elio  vieeris,  gloria;  adjeceris  ouantum  adenieris 
«  quid  adversi  eveniat.  Liv.  30.  W.  Here  Hannihal  represents  Scipio's  losing  the  impend- 
ing battle  of  Zama  as  less  probable  than  his  winning  it.  and  hence  uses  the  subjunctive 
'■e'i'eniat '.  but  the  future  '  riceiis  '.— Istuc  quidem.  ait  Ilomilnus,  par  omnibus  periculnm 
est  qui  cum  hoste  ad  colloquium  comrrediuniur,  .n  mdla  fides  sit.  Ncm  tamen,  inquit 
rex,  T.  Quincti,  par  pertidiie  pnemiiim  est,  si  fraude  wjdtur.  Philippus  et  Pha^ieas.  LIt. 
32,  ;i2— So  in  Msi-danses  if  the  non-existence  ot  the  action  is  represented  as  iniprob- 


...ipiH)i)ai)iiity  as  eqiu — ,.        -     i  ,• 

thesis  derive<  its  force  from  the  subjunctive  of  the  Si-clause,  according  to  the  peculiar- 
ity of  conditional  clauses  mentioned  §  625.  Obs.  1.  This  imparts  to  the  conditional 
period  the  a'ppearance  of  a  period  o{  non-reaUfy  (in  which  always  the  subjunctive  of  the 
thesis  is  logicallv  determined  by  that  of  the  Si-clause),  a  strong  improl.ability  being 
treated  as  if  it  were  a  non-realitv:  as  :  Tiim  vero  nos  similes  istOrum  simus  si  diutms  hie 
viotemur.  Liv.  7. 34.— ^'i  in  laiitfl  scriptorum  tuiha  niea  fama  in  obhcuio  sU.  md)ilit3'e  ac 
ma*^nitU(iine  eornm  me,  qui  iioinini  otticii-nt  iiieo,  con.^o'er.  Liv.  Prief.  3  (Here  Livy  inti- 
maVeshis  stroii"  hope  that  his  fame  will  not  remain  ob?cure.  and  that  he  will  not  be  in 
the  situation  of  u-ing  the  consolation  mentitmed).— 6'//<  eos,  qui  naiuia  cives  sunt,  volun- 
tate  hostes,  salvos  ttlis,  quid  tandem  intersit  inter  te  et  illos  ?  Cic.  Phil.  8,  4,  13.  Com- 
>at 


y 


t=i 

very 


ire  with  :  Qui  -vi  ca  qna>  dicit  Wnsenrirtt,  quid  inter  eiim  et  AristOnem  inleressel  f  lb. 
in  4  2->  60  In  both  these  jjassages  the  author  means  that  the  persons  spoken  to  and 
loiieii  of  do  not  think  what  is  stated,  but  in  the  first  passage  it  isx)nly  represented  as 
,v!rv  imprtdiable.  a  stronger  form  being  not  chosen,  because  the  course  of  his  rea.^^oning 
niake<  it  necessary  to  consider  this  aliernative  for  a  moment  as  a  doubtful  possiluliiy. 
But  in  the  last  pa^s;^ge  the  non-reality  of  the  fact  is  distinctly  stated,  and  hence  h.vpo- 
Ihetical  tenses  «re  used  according  to  Jl^A^.  Obs.  1  foil. )^TheKtme  analogy  between  these 
"♦the  theories  of  the  grammarians  on  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  non-hypothetical 
conditi(mal  clauses  are  widely  apart,  and  either  too  vague,  or  altogether  erroneous  1  bus 
KOiiNEit  requires  the  subjunctive  if  the  condition  is  expressed  as  uncertain,  -undecided,, 
a<  a  mere  snintosition.  or  a.-suwpf ion,  ovconcession.  If  this  theory  were  true,  then  every  con- 
ditional clause  of  doul)iful  reality  would  require  the  subjunciive.  Madvig  requires  the  pres- 
ent snitjunctive  "  when  a  condition  that  is  ^lill  possible  isas-umed  aiu.  subjected  toreasoii- 
inabu  wan  of  'rial,  so  as  to  occur  now  or  at  some  future  time,  while  it  is  intimated  that  it 
will  not  actually  occur",  which  liardlv  intelli-ible  statement  isamended  by  his  translator 
bv  (.milting  the  italicized  w..rds.  Bv  this  omission,  however,  almost  every  diMinciion 
between  the  conditicmal  presmr  subiunctive  and  the  hypothetical  imperfect-subjunctive 
iseflaced,  iK.t  meiitiimiiiir  the  tact  that  the  great  majority  of  the  present-snhjunctives 
will  n(»t  accommodate  to  this  rule.  What  the  author  means  b>  it.  \vill  become  cUar  l)y 
our  remarks,  in  Obs.  11.  on  the  passage  Cic.  Fin.  4.  22.  60.-S()me  American  grammarians 
h:.ve  invented  a  subjunctive  .)f  'lesser  vividness  and  probability _,  illustrating  it  by  the 
followiii"  exami)le  :  '  Ha:c  yi  hoim  patna  loquadir.  nonne  iwmfrare  debeat  r  Cic.  Cat.  i, 
8  -Anotlier  grammarian  (Ahnold  Prose-composition,  p.  154)  makes  the  iis^e  ol  the  sub- 
junctive  dependent  on  the  ^prosj^ct  of  decUiun\  saying:  Uncertainty  with  prospect  of 
deci-^ion  =  present  subjunctive;  uncertainty  without  i.rospect  =  imperlect  subjunctive. 
This  utterly  unfounded  theory  is  borrowed  from  the  Greek  grammarians. 


iM 


710 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


twokind.of  conditional  poviod.^yl.enc.ic^hontho^ 

ment  «r  th.  author  on  the  com^c  tne  .  )  nc  op  m  Ronulnum  ac 


helical  moods  (imperU-ct  s^uDjuncnvi-,.— ow...^..   -  j.;.!...»  id- 


virjii»  ciu>os.  '''■■'••'■— '■'^,  .„  "  JV,;,   ,!,„„;„,,   I  :i'0  imro  tiiiic  HUfcm.-r.  I'laut.  litre. 

3.  Siibjunctive  of  virtual  non-reality. 


isse  rfica^  et  Inec  j^uieii!*  q.mi..  ''/"-;V";:  ^;',//;,  •u'ninT  tibi  vi-iuUmc  natiun  Tibiiir.  et  te 

tuu=*  e.t,  lunmne  equum  mali.^  an  'HI";;  •  ^^'^^,  "  i,  i  ,,  n-l   i n   mihi  ,si/,  .^i  ^/'/rfmm  Chmd.|fi 
deant  inin.Ici?  Liv.  H.  18.-Neque  ''V,V""n  fi  "  -ite  ^^^^^^^^^^  10.-67  ipso  in  nos  mitis 

...nti  nihil  anti.iuius  i"  •■^'P"^^"*-^;;'^'    "'  ^^c^'e  ^n^hm',:^  <  nam  indiini  nt  redinu-re- 
Tlunnibal  esse  r./i/,  '''^'1 'a.nen    obi-  u  a^^^^^^^  .  1  .^  ^  .,.^  j^  j.     ,1       „,j,i,,a 

mur  a  vobis  visi  sunns,  lb.  22.  r)<t.-A/ (//>  f"  /w  '^^^^  »      ,     ,     principal  predicate  re- 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTFUL  REALITY. 


711 


Ob9  U  SometimoP,  in  conditional  periods  of  thi?  kind  the  predicate  of  Vhc  thesis  i8 
nlVml  i.i  the  fidure-present,  or  in  the  indicative  of  tlie  penphrashc  future,  according  to 
tCa  xV(  <'V(>f  ihi.se  Av;>o/A..'ioa.'  periods  i-.  which  the  predicate  of  tfie  thesis  ,s  placed  in 

e  ml  "itivJ  of  a  pret.ri.e  tense  (/?.  46,  Obs.  %\u  as  :  Jam  n  ^uflVagiuni  rf€^^/r  hunc,  qui 
V  .1,  s  n  a  nm  ininan.r.  eis  qni  fortiL.as  stabilire  ^■o\^^^X  imEjere(u?  =  If  you  should  have 
to  c hoo-c  between  them  by  vour  votes,  will  yon  {would  ijou)  prefer  hini  etc..'  Liv.  4, 49.-- 
(iuk  S  h  stis  ad  urbem  IniatJ'aciuH  exlU  (  =/aa.7/i.) ;  quid,  s.  plebs  armSta  tema^J 
il  ;  5-2.-.Si  fraude,  n  casu  Vejis  incendium  ortumsiU  et  fl^U"n^»^^,?^^'", f'^'' ^  "  "1,^1* 
ah<umat  Fidenas  inde  aut  Gabios  Qumilun  mmus  (  =  qn(zramm)  ?  lb.  5  5f  .-Such  con- 
SrSn-hm  ever,  are  extremeW  rare,  and  wherever  the  predicate  ol  the  thesis  haa 
oeotl.ose  forms  which  are  the  slune  both  for  the  future  and  for  the  present  su»xjunc- 
ti  e,  thev  should  always  he  considered  as  snhjnnchves,  and  not  as  lutures,  a^  •  '^ya^i 
i^V/ad  ex  turn  vit;e,  nou  ab  ea  republica  meUar  qua  ca.endura  esje  do  earn.  Cic  B am. 
«^  4  -If  he  author,  in  conditional  chiuses  referring  to  time  indefinite,  means  to  m- 
tiinaie  that  the  eventuality  assumed  will  never  happen,  the  period  is  one  of  mn-reahty 
jrroper,  and  takes  hyitOthetiaU  tenses  (see  E.  4(i,  Obs.  4). 

4.  Suhjunctive  in  indefinite  conditional  periods. 

Ob^  15  iNDBFiNiTE  CONDITIONAL  PERIODS  are  those  in  which  ftateraents  conceniing 
froierll  truth-  riHes.  delinitions,  general  habits  and  customs,  pertaimivj  to  all  f^^nes  htq 
Si^e<l  Iv  conditionsjikewise  pertainii.g  to  all  times.  Tiie  predicates  of  such  periods 
^i     ..^^^^^^^^^^  indicative: as:  ^quitas  tollitur  omnis.  .i  habSre  siium 

r  iTnne  nmi  /i^^/  Cic  Ofl'  2,  22.  -In  corpore  «  quid  ejusmodi  est  quod  rcbquo  corpori 
n  ce  u  id    ri  secarlque  paamur\  ut  membrum  aliqliod  potius  quam  Uitum  corpus  intereat. 
lb  PI  ilia  \l-of^aVu,rsi^m^  sermonem  nostrum  imitatnr,  si  quis  incessum,  «  qui8 
I    ilim  aliqu<>d  cor^Tds  aut  lin.'u.e  erpriuat.  «en.  Const  17.-The  P-^-ate  «f^he  clause 
11111V  be  in   the  peufect  indicative,  according  to  p.  300,  U.  4.3,  ana  p.  diu,  ubs.  o,  as 
N  J    t^,e«.  V-o^kW  i/    d  dens,  n  tact  ton  (est)  dolOre  corpus,  ferre  non  jmsumus   Cic 
T  wr  o  ll,      H  str  o  li  i  aulUim  se  mmit  extra  numerum.  aut  n  versus  pronuidtatus  est 
sv  Uba\nurbJS^  ut*  lo  gior,    ex.-ibU<nur   et  exploditur.  lb.  Par.3  2  2^i.-Comp.  lb 
Quinct    5  4'.    C  es.  B.  G.  (i.  13?   If  the  period  contains  a  general  rule,  in  d.dact.c  ^  yle,  the 
r,-  Stes  of  botli  propos  tions  mav  be  in  the  future  according  to  p.  3ol  foil,  f  -  »"<!  p. 
a-,4  UP^V or  o  e  of  the  two  predicates  may  be  in  tiie  present  indicative,  while  he  ot  er 
f:1n Vh.^f m  lire  MS  '  Eadeui  est  utiliias  uniuscujusque  et  universOrum.  quam  si  ad  se  quis- 
IS  in  the  finuie.  as  .  ii.aucunsi  mniiu..  j     m  f^norl  (Kat-nuT-yntir  i^i  cave- 

Im^as  S'l-Vor  11.^^  of   indetinite  couditional   periods   to  the  temporal  bi- 

clauses  (^•i  =  whenever),  see  li.  47,  Obs.  4.  ^,.r«^n  ,-„ 

Ons.  If..  Indefinite  conditional  periods  take  the  subjunctive  (presenter  perfect)  in 

^'' 4*'!\''?hl' nVldVc'unf  the  clause  is  represented  as  improf^ahle.  or  as  a  rare  ^ni^eoccep. 

;rt  ?' ^<u      sr,i^^ imi-i  do  oculi  peccent  (rare  and  exceptional),  tameii  inest  in  ei^  ms 
^'^  V     r;7niv   -2  V  -AViS^  noil  dt  molesTus,  tamen  est  miserrimum, 

(Which  the  author  ^•'"«'•.•"^^d,  «.^,f„  «:  f,  f ,f A  ;.  fo  ^iquence,  the  predicate  of  the  clause 
condition  must  be  conceived  -^^.^''^^'^V V..  le  oat  mSr  e^^^^^  plurimos  accusatOres 

is  place.l  in  the  perfect  guhjunctue  ^Vvi    ,.?f.^s      iT  R   \  2U  56  -Si-nificant   canes  et 

t>i  quandi)  non  d.portSti  ex  P»^'^,'.'"^;.^,  "''^'',:  '"lY.^^  take<  a  subjuictive,  according  to 
Very  Ireqiiently  in  such  perKKi^  ibe  ihes  s  ^^^;^''^^^^^^^^^  a,it  si  absurde 


712 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES   OF   DOUBTFUL  REALITY. 


713 


Her  4,l.-Coc;mtioiiatarffi  manca  .i/  n  ""/l^pctio  rcrnm  consequatur.  Cic.  Off.  1, 43- 

Sini.'iis  noil  f/<V<^</^  ^  Nee  s^i  puMiu(/e/t/a.-2//'  It).  Ac. -^,4-1.  •    ,     •, 

]    O  t        lu  H,^b^^      tive  I  used  i..  indetinite  (not  in  definite)  ,^om  .tjon=U  peno.^ 

distin.tiOne  .alia  nnoquo  i>,op>dsafnm.s  i^\^  ^elonn-ntiam.  non 

«./;,/7/e/- (modeM  statement,  II  >tead<>    5^/^''X7/ .2~  "often,  however,  indeliniie  t>i- 

etjcjQna  Mdeatm.  »'>-.}^"/«.'*.;»;.,  ',,',.';:^  -j  .u  _viiuif  nns  (orifina.  r/i.vi  totari/'m/'/r.  Sen. 

8t 

ver 


'jV'^n:!^  villeltu       b  V  44  -      M^ioiw    nui.Unuin  v.let  doctrlna,  .isi    ndnst,.^, 


5.  Suhjunctite  of  cxempUJicatum. 
r»„^   1-    Pmiditinniilcl-m^e^of  EXEMPLiFirATioNan;  those  in  which  f^ovnc  parfindar 

of  tiH.  c^u,.c.  urn.,  V  co,,cj.,ve.a »-:;;'  ^™j;;\'  V  ',,^;^eJ;::l;lro;,al..•^i..<l.  i^  "«-i 


man  no?;?^  O'//  to  him  that  it  if»  cold?).— >9i  in  mari  jactflra/adfwcfa  n^,  equTne  pretiO^i 
potius  iacitlram  facial  an  servuli  vilis  ?  Ih.  3,  23.  ii9.—Si  medicus  ^c^o^  euni  ip;:rOtum  qui 
ju-<ns  sit  viniini  snmere.  merariii!*  gumplflrum,  Ptatimqiie  peniunim,  nia^na  s>l  in 
cuiiKl  11)  N.l)  3,  31.— .St  L'ladiiim  quis  apud  te  saiul  niente  deposnerif.  repfif (if  uwinii^n», 
r.ddeVe  pi-eri-linm  /.?/,  omciiim  non  reddne.  Ih.  Oft'.  3,  -io.-Quid  ?  n  Phalanm  crudelem 
tyraminm  (tlie  speaker  does  not  mean  the  tyrant  Phalaris,  hnt  A  Phahins),  yir  bouiis, 
lie  ip>e  !ri"ore  contieiaiiir,  vesiltn  spoliare  //cwi.',  noniie  /V/(ta/ .?'  lb.  Oil...,  b, '2;>.— Lonip. 
('ie.V)tr.  :i.\  2«» ;  lb.  3,  4,  «hi :  Or.  2.  3U,  1G2  ;  Inv.  1, 10, 1)2 :  ^rnll.  '^l  53 :  Oft.  3  6,  30.- 1  hese 
periods  are  extremelv  frequent  in  law-ca<uistry,  and  occur  in  innumerable  passajres  of 
the  jurists  who  re-ndarlv  place  the  predicate  of  the  thesis  in  the  indicative,  and  that  of 
the  clause  in  the  suhjundice.  as  :  Idem  juris  6<  si  ciii  post  factum  testameiitum  u.xor  lu 
maniim  coureulat,  vel  qmc  in  inarm  fuit,  vubat.  Gaj.  Inst.  2.  V^.-Si  procuiator  rendtde- 
lit  et  canrif  emtnri.  nuantur,  an  domino  vel  adversus  dominum  actio  dan  debeat.  t.p. 
Dig  Kmti  vend.  13,  2.5.— Scmietimes  the  writerscd  the  silver  ajre and  the  jurists  usea  sub- 
inncfive  ])l»mrrect  \\\  the  clause  (and  a  subjnnctive  imperfect  in  the  thesis),  when  the 
classical  auiliors  would  use  the  subjunctive  of  \\\i^  j^rfect  and  jrresent,  as  :  Si  pauca  quia 
tibi  ^/o/m^w/ juirera.  accepisse  te  dictres  beneficium..  ..si  pecuniam  tibi  aliquis  doiiavtrit, 
iH'iHticium  rocjfti/.'.  Sen.  Ben.4.«.-A't  sociu.s  qua'dam  ncizligt-nter  in  socieiate  e(ii>i.^tt,\n 
pU-ri>-(iue  autem  societilten  auxi.^net.  non  compenHitur  compendium  cum  ne<j:li<rentia.  L  ip. 
\)\'  i)ro  Soc  17  2  2t).— If  tlie  Si-clause  is  neqaiive,  si  i>on  and  not  nisi  is  used,  unless  the 
condition  is  a  secondary  one,  fl(/(/<^(/ to  tlie  main  condition  by  which  the  ca-e  is  stated,  as: 
Hi  navis  non  cum  jittat  porium,  (luem  ej;o  probSvi,  cum  tempestfue  pvgnem  potius  quam 
eic  ?  C'ic.  Plane.  39. — S'^  quid  procurator  citra  mandaium  in  voliiptfitem  fecit,  permilien- 
dum  ei  aiiferri,  nv<l  ratioiiem  suintus  istlus  dominus  admittit.  I'lp.DiG.  Mand.  10,10. 

Obs  18.  Periods  of  exemplification  not  rarely  take  the  predicates  of  both  proposi- 
tions in  the  future-present  or  future-perfect,  beiiii?  treated  like  indetiiiite  penotls  refer- 
riiKMo  «-eneral  rules  (Ons.  !.■)).  as:  .Si  tvrannidein  occupare,  «  |)atriam  prodere  conahi- 
^„,."(  ^''conetur^  pater,  sUehitin  filius/  -Si  nihil  prqfHcf,  accxsabif,  minubtfur  i-Wam.  Lie. 
Off  3  23  IK)— Si  tabulam  de  nauirairio  stnlius  ar/r/^^/^n/',  extorquebitnc  cam  sajuens  y  ih. 
;^  2:^  S<)  —Sometimes,  when  liieaction  of  the  clause  is  anterior,  a  ;x^7;/<^c/!  indtcafireis  used 
in  the  clause,  and  a  present  indicatire  in  the  thesis:  :Si  Fabiai  pecuuia  iia  legata  eat  a. 

viro,  A.i  etc nihil  t/e(!/e/M;'.  Cic.  Top.  14. 

Ob"»  10  Often  a  period  of  exemplification  is  used  in  the  protasis  of  a  simile  (See 
Comparative  clauses),  in  which  instance />o//i  propositions  rejrularly  take  the  sub.iunc- 
TivK  I'RK^FNT  (or  the  Si-clause  may  also  take  a  sul)junctive;>cr/'^c/),  as  :  Ut  enim  nee  do- 
mus  nee  respublicaratioiiequadam  et  disciplina  de>ij,niata  nV/.a/(/r,  «  in  ea  nee  recte 
factis  priemia  ejrstent  ulla.  nee  siii)plicia  peccatis,  sic  mniidi  divliia  in  homines  moderaiio 
profecto  nulla  est.  si  in  eft  diecrlmen  nuMum  est  b<m5rum  et  malGrum.  (.ic.  >•.  D.3,  ^o. 
rt  "i  in  ordine  stantis  notos  complQris  viderimus,  nihil  nostra  infersit  utrum  a  summo, 
an  ah  imo  nomina  .Orum  dicere  imipiannn^,  item  etc.  Auct.  Her.  3. 18.-If.  m  this  instance, 
the  predicate  of  the  comparative  apodosis  is  a  preterite,  the  two  predicates  of  the  con- 
ditional period  are  placed  in  the  imperfect  (respectively  plnperj^c)  subjunctive,  accord- 
in"  to  the  law  of  consecuti<»n,  as  :  Ut  enim.  «  aurum  cm,  quod  esset  muliilariam  de- 
fo.<sum,  commoiistrare  ?v//^//?,  satis  esse  def,eret  >i  si-iia  et  notas  ostenderem  hxfnim, 
'^ic  has  e<'o  aitrunienir.rum  i.otas  demonstrdvi  ubi  sint.  Cic.  Or.  2, 41. -\  ery  frequently  Si- 
clanses  of  exemplification  are  made  dependent  on  parenthetica!  comparative  cmuses  with 
vt  v't  si  =  ui.<  fur  i„starne\\\h\<:\\  in  this  connecti<m,  is  also  expressed  by  \si  exempli 
qvatia  \  ' si  vivhi  causa \  comp.  for  inst.  Cic.  Off.  3. 12)..  Such  Si-clauses  liKewise  require 
the  present  subjnnctiie,  as:  In  hominem  transfertur  crimen  (the  charge),  utsi  accimturx^ 
nui  P  Snlplcium  se  fateatur  occidisse.  et  id  jnssu  consulum  delendat.  Auct.  Her.  1,15, 
S^-r/  5  uis  hoc  relit  ..stendere.  eum  qui  pareiitcm  necarit  maximo  supp  icio  esse  dig- 
r nm.  Cic.  Inv.  2.  ].5.-Translatum  est  miod  aliud  conficit  quam  causa  ^^''^''t^I'S^^ 
cilem  farhd  auditorum.  quum  benevolentiam  causa  de^uleret.  lb.  1  IS  -ta  qu^  "^l^!  "?^ 
ab  humanitate  discrepant,  ut  si  qui  in  foro  cantet.  facile  ^'PP5'-^;nt-  IJ  •  %  ^^Ue  «f X 
Aiipt  Her  •)  •>«  4  •  2  27  43  ;  2,  29.  4»; :  3.  2,  2:  C'lC.  Inv.  1,  49,  92,  and  often.  1  tie  use  oi  me 
i^mire  In  mVcT.  «•la\is;.s  is  oxtremH  Vare.'  as  in  Cic.  Inv.  1.  50, 94,  where  some  critics  have 
chantred  the  future  in  *  ut  si  qui  dej'endet '  into  '  defttidal  \ 

G.  lUstormtl  conditional  sulonncUve. 

Ob«  20  ni-TouicAi.  8UB.irNCTivEs  iu  clauses  of  doubtful  reality  are  those  depending 
on  a  p^eterite^iredicate.  If  these  subjunctives  are  s.^f^bnque  .^^^.^^^.^  ^^'.^^^^-^^^^ 
imperf.ct  or  pluperfect;  but  In  tlie  instances  mentioned  ^o.  i?  and  (7,  they  arc  aiwajs 
TUPKitvKrTs     Thev  occur  in  llie  following  instances:  ,    .       ,         j     * 

rifTcondiional  period  is  oblique  or  virtually  oblique,  be.n- dependent  on  a 
preterite  itTstrcSlac^cordi.ig  to  the  i.-neral  mles  on  dependent  subjunctive^  and  ac- 
SSrd  u  '  to  the  SI  ecial  rules  p.  m\  foil.    If,  iu  this  instance,  the  predicate  of  the  subob- 


714 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


Unno  m  rlftii^c  refer*  to  n  time  future  In  reL'.uxl  to  the  firn^  f>})okeno/,  n  peculiar  ollippis 
jn  En-liHh,  Hlwti  s  be  iiitr.ulure.l  by  'in  the  event  that  \    >"   ^     '  <^ase     ha        t   c      icmh 

Rnn'iMhe\   ..    m"^^^^  ruture-perlect;a8:  Hie  Ni 

tvi»Ki.  •  '•sicomilia  lion  fienf,   n  urtft/n  mrnam' C\c.  Alt.  4,.i,  .i.— t^arinauuiRu.  imr    m 

IH  drubale  X     VX^S.^^  ^1'^^^  ""'•'i''  ^mt  (-.perahant    .e  ''•'''^'fj^  ?' 

llH.Hiri  oau^  iia  M        :["  ^^       ,.»  enit,  xi  ex  majorihus  c^istns  subvet.irttur.  lb. 

'.  nnan.  a^'lac  in!  Hec;.ndbbat(^accl.KlGb^^    cos  q.md  nalvos  se  tore  ^''-^-jf]^^!^ 
«!■.!  hit    n  te-t-iuK-nto  ut  heresfilio  suo  irrai.dis  pecuniie  le-atnni  8.»lyeret,  h  qui  natis 

tlu    pariiup  t  ui  111«^  H      1^  /?.  l5Si:  A.i  ..ppuixnandam  Llicani  onuils  beUi  \jrls 

Ui-clain*c   >  1  mpHu  I  «Hi^^^  respectuni  prii-iiiue  R)eietati8    rem  a'j(fre.<.<urux  eiat 

ituk^i  e'tt>  uurt  ve'im?.rf.ct  it  .h.  condili..nal  period  re  vrs  u>  <\^^"i:' JJ^'^'Vl 

ilJum  poterat,  et,  n  .iler'et urcinUi  p.tent^.  ^I^l'^f^/^^^/^^!;;:;;  X^  v  k  a^^^ 

IK  .M»  -ji —Necaciecertare  Hannibal  ausus,  quia  tanta  pau(  lait;  ^'^  7^/' ■'\. *.//.:  i'.. 

24  <=Numi(he  /*rW«  luis^i  erant  quia,  n  luce  irefur.hn^U»  P/*^^"7"'*   „,..;,,(•,', u  of  the 


f. 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTLESS  REALITY. 


715 


the  thesi*  is  a  preterite  nof  referrinjj  to  the  future,  hut  to  the  time  spoken  of,  as  :  Qua 
quidem  tempore,  etiannd  ille  die?:  vitie  finem  uiihi  allaturus  esset,  satis  ma^aiam  cej^ram 
fnutiim  quiim  vos  etc.  Cic.  Phil.  6, 1,  2*. 

('.  Prriod!"  of  viKTiTAi.  NoN-iiKAi.iTY  ate  sometimc«  assigned  to  an  indefinite  past 
TIME,  if  the  p'Tf^oii  to  whom  they  n-fer  wa;*  dead  at  the  speaker's  time,  and  the  tact 
as.<uined  by  fiction  vun/  have  happened  at  any  time  of  his  life.  In  this  instance  both 
piopoj^itions  require  the  impeukect  subjinctive,  exactly  coiTospondiui:  to  the  present 
t^ubjuiictive  in  thos»;  periods  of  virtual  non-reality  which  refer  to  time  altoirether  indefi- 
nite (C)Ks.  13).  Siicii  periods  require  their  predicates  in  W\Qjilupe,rfect  in  Enoflish,  a  lit- 
eral traiihlaiion  of  which  would  he  faulty,  as:  Ciir  et  Camillus  dderet  si  hiec  post  tre- 
cenios  et  quinquaginta  fere  annos  eveiiiaia  7;w/(Irf/;  et  etro  ddeavi  si  ad  decern  millia 
auiiOrum  «'eiitem  aliquam  uri)e  nostra  potitflrnm  put^mf  Quia  etc. ;  What  is  the  reason 
that  Cainiliiis  would  have  been  rp-iened,  had  he  believed  that  this  would  happen  etc.  :  and 
why  would  f  be  sorry  if  etc.  ?  Because  etc.  Cic.  Tu<c.  1, 37t.  [Camillus  niif/ht  liave  thouirht 
go  at  any  time  of  his  life.  But  the  assumption  is  a  mere  Jicdon,  no  question  beino^ 
rai-^ed  about  its  reality  or  non-reality  ;  hence  the  period  is  virtmUly  non-real  in  regard 
to  past  indeflnlte  time.  If  it  referred  to  time  alt(»gether  indefinite,  it  would  require  the 
subjunctive  present,  the  same  as  the  second  conditi(mal  period  'cur  eiro  dolearn  si  pu- 
^^/;i']._De  Ciesare  ipso.<fi  7?/flp;<pr^*' quidnam  egisset  in  urbe  et  in  togS,  leges  multas 
ni^miidli-el  se  et  pneclSras  tulisse,  chin)irrapha  vero  non  in  suis  actis  ducertt.  lb,  Pinl. 
1  7  18-  //a/i  wo'^as-yl-f  J  Caisar  etc.,  he  tvould  have  answered  etc.  [The  author  does  not 
m.-an  to  say  that  Ciesar,  who  was  dead  at  the  tim<;,  had  not  been  asked  as  stated.  But 
the  assumption  of  this  fact  is  a  mere  Jidinti  ;  hence  the  period  is  virtually  non-iealy 
which  had  Ciesar  been  living  would  have  required  jrresent  subjunctives].— Si  L.  Mum- 
miusalitinem  islorum  rit/?/*-/,  inatellionem  Corinthium  cupidissime  tractantem,  qumn 
ip<e  totani  Corinthum  ccmtempsisset,  utrum  ilium  civem  excellentem,  an  atriensem  dili- 
.'ent.m  i)Ui(ir(tf  lb.  Par..';,  2.  38.— Ciesar  si  petetet,  non  quicquam  proflceret 'Even  ^l 
Cmt^ar  hail  asked  him  {i.  e.  the  singer  Tigellius,  who  was  dead  at  the  time),  he  would 
not  have  -ucceded.  llor.  Sat.  1,  3,  4.— In  the  same  way  indefinite  conditional  peuiods, 
which  accordiii"-  to  Obs.  l»i,  4-C7,  would  require  th^i  pre'<ent  subjunctive,  take  the  tinpe?'- 
ftct  subjiinctive"if  confined  to  ;;a.>7  indefinite  time,  as  :  Quod  eiiim  usu  non  veiji51)at.  de 
*e<»  si  quis  le<>-em  aut  judicium  constituerel,  n(m  tarn  prohibGre  videretur  quam  admonGre; 
If  anv  one  (in  the  times  of  our  ancestors)  would  have  made  a  law  about  thiiiirs  that  were 
not  really  transpiriuir.  he  would  have  seemed  etc.  Cic.  Tall.  4, 9.  [This  period,  if  refer- 
rir«»  to  the  future  as  well  as  to  the  past,  would  have  required  a  subjunctive  present  ac- 
cording to  Oiis.  l«i,  A  and  C.  Hence  the  imperfect  is  used  with  reference  to  past  time,  since 
a  law  of  this  kind  trnqht  have  been  proposed  at  any  time.]— The  condition-il  periods  of 
ihis  kind  pass  ever  into  those  conditional  periods  of  non-reality  mentioned  li.  4b,  Ubs.  11, 
from  which  they  are  onlv  distiu'juished  by  the  fact  that  in  the  latter  the  tiction  assumed 
as  re  il  i<  impos'sil.Ie,  while  in  the  former  tlie  real  occurrence  of  the  fiction  is  not  excluded. 

D.  For  the  use  of  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  bi-clauses  denoting  re- 
peated and  contingent  action,  see  p.  331,  No.  b  and  c. 

II.  CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES  OF  DOUBTLESS  REALITY. 
Bern.  45.  The  form  of  a  conditional  clause  is  frequently  used  when 
there  is  no  doubt  about  the  reality  of  the  factexpnssed  in  the  clause.  Such 
clauses  aUcaiiH  take  their  predicates  in  the  indicative,  i^enerally  in  the 
present,  or  jlerfect ;  never  in  the  future  ;  rarely  in  the  impertect,  or  plu- 
l)erfect  since  the  general  rules  about  the  use  of  these  two  tenses  can 
rarely  be  applied  ^o  clauses  of  this  kind.  The  thesis  may  be  in  any 
tense  or  mood  required  by  its  relation  to  the  other  parts  ot  the  discourse, 
but  sienerally  is  in  the  present  indicative  or  future.  Negative  conditional 
clauses  of  doubtless  reality  are  always  introduced  by  si  non,  never  by 

irid  or  ni. 

'~*~Very  rarely  clauses  of  this  kind  take  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,  with  the  force  of  a 
future-uerf.-ct  referring  to  a  past  time,  instead  of  to  the  lime  of  the  speaker  :  as  :  i^iime- 
ins  non  nisi  vicisstnt  Ilomini,  sed  nisi  helium  e/essissent,  maaere  m  regno  suo  non  po- 

"I'ivQiiNEH  incorrectly  rendewi  this  passage  '  Why  should  Camillus  have  gi-ieved ',  which 
would  iui|)ly  that  Camillas  ouqhl  not  to  have  grieved,  whereas  the  author  mtans  to  say 
that  Caiuillus's  <;rief  would  be  le-itimate.-Others  (lor  inst.  the  author  of  tlie  Piibl.  bch. 
Gr.  p.  393)  take  this  passage  ai^hi/pothefical,  adding  that  the  pluperlect  is  not  used  because 
the  fact  belongs  to  a  'Jloudng  past  time '. 


716 


CONDITION.\L  CL.VUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  PERIODS   OF   NON-REALITY. 


717 


OCS.1.  conditional  clansos  of  c.onhtl^^  renllty  arc  cn.plo^^^  tho^s 

as  an  inftreuce  ^vlnch  tlu'  f<p^(ihr  niakrs  f.oin  a  lact  a.Hi.in^      .^ ^^    ^  ^,^ 


ynavt'»-  in  oraiiono  cm  ppt'cl 
ih  3,  v.),  l'.> :  ^^eii-  Const.  5.  r,nrf>r)i7rtr  fact  apsertod  by  the  author. 

2    To  represent  a  ^-eneral  truth  ;^-a  proof  f  «^  « ^^^.^^  ^*^    '^^^^  i^rrfio^/ar  a.  to  the 

Such  conclinonal  iHMiods  «'-^;  '"f';^;;^''',,  ^        Xo.n^^^^                q""m  (^  M.-fHum  tarn 
thesi-.  as  :  ,si  pietftii  sumnui //t//'/r/"/a  l.ius  ^^^  cu jh  u     •■■ ,.  «, ^^_^*.  ^,.,,..^tjtt«'  esse 


Phil  2,41,  144.  ,         ,,„.,1,  ,,,„  f,-,-(.o  of  Ouia-cianses  to  represent 

OBS.  3.  IVculiar  is  the  use  of  ^'-^l'"^'■^'^^;;*^     ^^T^t'tVa    n  the  thesis  ^houM  he 

the  factor  .lu-clau-e  as  b.-.n^'  "^  retj^son     hv  the   iacl^  s^^^^  ,„vce(lini,' 

inferred  from  it.    The  thesis  is  always  /-.^^^/^^^^^^^  H  generally 


this  construction  the  causal  relation  becomes  identical  with  the  concessive  relation  ; 
h.-nce  both,  a  Qnia-clause  (accordinsr  to  p.  6W),  or  an  Etsi-clause  may  often  take  the 
t)l-ice  of  euch  a  Si-elause;  as:  .Vo;;.  d  tibi  AuW  profi/it.  semper  proderit.  Uc.  Phii.  »,  4, 
io_Von,  ^.i  Opimiflm  defeudi^fijcnrco  te  isti  bonum  civem  putal)uut.  lb.  Or.  2.40.— 
Neom  enim.  si  ha-e  barlmria  loreiisis  dnt  locum  vel  vitiosissimis  orat..ribns,  iccirco  nos 
hoc    ouod  qniPiimus,  omittC'iuns.    Ih.  -[.-HS-Xefine  enim.  «  tuie  res  -estie  cet.roriim 
lau(iii'us  ()l)srnriiJltem  aTtulCriint.  iccirco  Pompeji  memonam  amisimus    Ih.  Dej.  4,  12. 
-\fc   .siciipitis  dnlurem  fMcit,  inutilis  h.miinihns  sol  e-t.  Quint.  5.  tO,  S2.-Som.;times 
^rirelv)   poti  f«.llo\vs  the  Si-rlanse,  as:  Si  vcnium  meretnr  qui  imprtldens  nocuit,  wwi 
inerCtur  premium  qui  imprOdens  prr.fuit.  Quint.  5,  10,  78 -Sonietin.es  Ulico  or  continuo 
<  added  ill  the  thesis»,  whifh  adverhs  (bein-  redundant  in  th.-  En-hsh  conception)  refer 
to  the  neo'ation,  intimatiuir  ihat  the  conclusion  expressed  in  the  thesis  should  not  be 
'  nishlv  '  o^r  •  immediatfly  '  made  as  :  XfC.  H  oinne  enuntiatum  ant  verum  aut  faisiim  est, 
seonitiir  iflico    esse  c:iusas  immutabilTs  qu;c  prohil)eant  quicquam  secus  cadere  atque 
rn-nrum  sit    Cic  Fat  12,28.    Sed  n  hoe  in  Saserntr  fiiiido  in  Gallia  satis/^a/,  mn  cori- 
tin>m  idem  'in  aj-ro   Lijrustico  montano.  Varr.  R.  K.  1. 18.-Sometimes  a  Quia-clanse  is 
cuordii.aied  with  such  a  Si-clause,  as:  Nec.fjmn  nusquamerat  scriptum  ut  contra  omnTs 
ho<iiuncopias  in  ponte  uniis  assisteret,  a  terirOque  poi.tem  interscindi  juliSret,  tc<trco 
niinu<Co(litem  il'um  rem  sr.-ssisse  tantam  fortitudinis  le<;e  putabimus:  nec,n  reirnante 
L   Tarouinio  nulla  erat  Honne  lex  scripta  do  stiipris,  iccirco  non  contra  illam  le-em 
sempiternam  Sex.  Tarquinius   vim  Lucretia;  attulit.    Cic.  Leg.  2,  4. -In  the    following 
ni-sa-rc  an  Ktsi-clause  is  used  in  place  of  a  Si-clause:  Quare  non,  etsi  c  oquentissimns 
Alhenis  Pcricle-,  idemque  in  ea  civitate  plnrimos  annos  princ-ps  congihi  publici  tint, 
iccirco  .j.isdem   h<.minis  utque  artis  utr.que  facultas  exiMimai.da  est.  J.)C- Or.  1   50.- 
Sometimes  tliis  form  of  Si-clauses  is  appli-d  to  clauses  of  doubtM  rfaltfy,  as:  ^€C.  si 
no    o/"/a^'r.  propfer.a  etiam  permittitur.  Cic.  Phil.  18.  (5,  ]^--^jc  tdeo  i^mhs  minus  urere 
potesr  si  in  materiam  incidit  inviolabilem  lUimmis.  Sen.  Pen.  5,5.  Compare  those  cautal 
clauses  after  a  negation,  which  require  the  indicative  p.  t/Jl,  D. 

in.  CONDITIONAL  PERIODS  OF  NON-REALITY. 

Bern.  4ft.  Cotidition.il  clauses  of  non-realtty  contain  actions  which 
the  'jpcakcr,  hy  ticlion,  assunies  as  occiirrini;-  at  the  time  spoken  of, 
althoiin-h  tliry^lo  not,  or  di<l  not,  in  reality,  occur  at  that  time;  the  thesis 
cxtire^sin"^  the  conscfiuence  of  tlie  action  if  axmmed  m  real.  The  pred- 
icates of  both  propositions  are  reprulaily  in  the  subjunctive,  generally 
of  the  TMPKKFECT  or  PLUPERFECT,  but  in  certain  instances  ot  the  ppes- 
FNT  or  PERFECT  (Obs.  0)-  Sometimes  the  predicate  of  the  them  (not 
timt  of  the  rlaniu')  assumes  the  indicative  of  a  preterite  tense. 
Clan^^es  of  non-reality  ^villl  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  or 
with  the  indicative  of  a  i)reterite  tense  are  called  hypothetical  clauses 
(HYr<)TiiESEs),  and   the  moods  used  in  them  are  called  hypothetical 

MOODS*. 

Ob«  1  If  the  action  of  the  Si-clause  is  non-real,  the  action  of  the  thesis  is  likcAvise 
non-real'  unh-ss  si  is  used  with  the  force  uUtiamd,  as:  Qui  m  (=etiamsi)  rcliquis  flajr,- 
tii:  se  absHnG.e;>o/./..>W(h,,t  he  could  not;  hence  ' P'^l^'^'^'^' ^ ^^:;iy^^^^^J^ 
Ob  hoclacium  dijinum  ilium  onini  i^ixnnx  puturan  Uhe  ^I'^^H''^^^  !>,  i  J  t^u-.f « 
whe  her  the  ondftion  exists  or  not,  hence  putrmm  is  real,  but  nevertheless  takes  a 

V  o  »  ei  c  d  tcn<  •     see  Ihm.  47.  Obs.  1-8).  Cic.  Phil.  13,  8, 17.  But:  .^i  quam  niedecinam 

V  ,7  .  /   .1  .     I  'lo»of  fi>'<l  a  reme.lv  ;  hence  non-rml),  tihi  eandera  mttterar^  (I  do  riot 

s  .  <      h  M.ce  wiff.r.r.  is  likewis.-  r.o.-rea/).  Ih.  Fam.  0, 12,5.-Such  Paj^f^^s  as  the  lol- 

h.wiii-arenotiu  eontlict  with  tins  rule :_^Quulnam_tii^2rovs^2jiuM;t£t^>^f^/_Ln.  3,5, 

*  The  term  ' hypothe1ical\  as  denotin-  non-reality  in  this  specific  ^c":?.' '*^,}',P^*"  f;» 

obicction   since  -eiMM-allv  ' /n/p'^f/t^ficar  is  used  as  a  synonym  ot  ^conditional       But 

wh  le       Ok  h  supertluous  and  objectionable  to  use  two  perfectly  synonymous  terms 

o  de-   M  ate   he  t=mie  idea,  we  -reativ  need  a  specific  term  for  this  class  ol  clauses  of 

,  -refli  V  in  ord.r  to  avoid  The  cnstant  repetition  of  circumlocutions  when  these 
•  ■  isrs  e'to  he  desi-Miate.l.  Hence  we  have  thou-lit  it  best  to  appropria  e  a  useless 
s  ,  o nvm  t<  a  mor;  sp.-citie  mV-aniutr.  This  liherty  is  certainly  far  less  ohject.oiiable 
than  tl.e  practice  of  many  ^-ammanans  who  aPP^opruite  the  ^eneraU 
tnd  'anodo-i-'  which  have  no  svnonvms  in  their  general  meaning:,  to  the  sptc  no 
Sijnifk-iHm.s  of  '  conditional  clause '  aiul  '  thesi. ',  where  they  are  ru>t  uecded,  and  of  leu 
are  iu  conjiicl  with  their  real  signification. 


718 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  PERIODS   OF  NON-KEALITY. 


719 


U.     Here  ^  riicere^  If  taken  in  .the  rru^^;-:^^,^^^^:^:^^^  pl^ON 

m.'an.  '  what  ^^'onldheyouro,nmon^^h^^^^^^^^^^  K  te/im/  moo<i8  (.ubjuiiciive 

OBs^  Ao  English  lan,ua.e  docs  not  distinguish  ^;^^^^yj^^::^;^::Ptj;::^t^^; 

th.Mcal  clauses  of  non-reality,  bnt  >"^  !t.^;;;!."!';^\^'     "     V r     "/^m^^     '  /  /  /ia<i\  'M 
o\  the  predicates,  namely  tje  mibjuncuve  ol  the  ,  n  ter    M^  ^^^^,,j 

.,f'Uie  preterite  or  pluperfect  (.ro.//(/,  ^.['l/TiOr^^^^^^^^^   xvh 'rea.    he  Latin  hin-ua-e 
even  used  iu  P^'io'^t^'f  ^'^''''l"'!  I:,^?'     ^^.f  fj'jn  f,?^  nonreality  by  the 

ngularlv  distin-uishes  hypothetical  Ih  "o  «  [  ;'"•'/''*:'   \.',,(.^.^  ,v».ere  usa-e  admit»  a 
;:.amn.atical   f<.nn  ot  .he  pr.-d.cat.^j  ,X^'  ,J  \,; ,/",    i     Iv  h   pothetical  with  an  ^^ 
clu.ice  between  tlK•seform-J(^eep  7.1  lU^^^  ,  ^..^^  ^.^.r.^),  or  for 

live  form  are  eu  her  directly  used  i  P'\''^^\/;  J  ,^^';  "^f^^A^  „,  ne-aiive  seutencet.,  but 
certai.i  rhetorical  p.irposes  ''^f^^f'^J'^Jf^^'^'^^^^^  oHhe  action,  a^:  E-o,  ^t 

always  in^plyin,-  the  spc-aker  «  \;i^ll'^^^^^:ZnM^^^^  Cic.  Att.  8.  1.  4.     Here 

Homi.um  capere  jxj.s.'^em,  ^^  ^am    on:^ is  tp    i^^^^^^^^^  respectively  attlrmative,  ^^en- 

botli  proposal. ions  may  ''9  ,^»'ec/'y„^' '  ',7.V!  h  .' ^w"/ ca/ ^o/!  sleep).-^(^u  ^^  «H- 

tencei  (  =  /  annoy  ymi  ^v.tb  so  lo..-  le  t^n",  ^.X'  .^"^  ^^.^^^  b.  v\u.  4,  2-2.^  Here, 
cit,  ita  sentVet.qind  (-nihil)  in  ei  eum  7 /,  > '/  *'''^"'/j;' .  ,,.,,5,;n,.e  Uie  thesis  merely 
oniy  the  Si-dause  can  be  «I'^ect  y  c.mnjre     ;"t^^.,^^J  ,7  ^'V.,ntr ary    o  n  *  He  do...  r.ot 

imUinnxj  the  authorV  sen  iment    h  t    he  ..a  unu^^^  patricius  dice; 

mean  wliat  he  says  ;  else  there  nnouUI  be  no  "^'^^'^.^^^^^^^^  f,^,,t/  liany   I'airi- 

ret '  AIT  OMNIA  AcriPiTE,  Aur  N.ini.  KKKo  .  '1'^ /^  ! '"^/,.^  ,  , '  Vhich  t-noiie)  of  vou 
clan  wuuhl  say,  «Either  accept  ^^'''Jtl'"'^';  «;;,Ij'\^,^     ^;/^,^;/^.;  ,"^^  j,,  .,  ..J^a- 

would  bear  i.  ?  Liv.  0,  40.     Here  the  Pr^'Po^Hio   s  \'    ^''^^^^'^^.'^  ^^f^V  u,  unplv  that  no 

If,  (,n  the  contrary,  the  author  doe-  not    '*;'="' /"■^''^.V^^'tcrnmis.  however  impo-si- 

CMC.  Att.  S.  15,  3.-Ad.uH'rete  video    ;>v^^^^^^^^^^^  he  H  not  io  n-  t,.  produce  books, 

theticals  are  used,  b(rcause  the  speaker  >m  lic>^  uUnncnt  v  the  tlTesis  n  hvpo.h.tical 
althoULTh  he  mlnhl  direct  y  fulfil  th.s  ^^^  ^  '''     i;;;,c    v^^^^  :iHl,-e<iuivalent 

periods  takes  the  form  of  an  luterro-r  tne  .^  '  J"f  \''^.';;,^,^'rrex^^^^^^^^  «'hI 

io  a  nej^tive.  ^^^'^^'^^^^f^^Z  u  ^  ro/  ^?'w  E  pfcurCMun  e^sse,  .1  pnM- 
luMice  always  are  v.rtiallyr^ma/'a.a^^^^^^  p,event  me  (but  in  reality  very 

re/n  quie  ille  diceret?  Cic.  h  ,n.  1,  H  ,  -  f^"J  ,  ,-j,i  i  ■  nnrove  etc  Similar  is  the  re  ation 
much  prevents  me)  from  beint;  an  Epicurean  i.d  I  '  P^"^  ^\,^^  ^j^V^is  is  in  a  hypothetical 
of  an  ironical  affirnu^ion  which  means  '  ^^^»^^-    "^  ,*;   ^^^'f^'?,^  ..Vitsirram- 

mood    it^  ^^^^>Z'^uTT^t^S^U^d^^iftr^^^^  fn.stra  fu.mina  miff.nf/ 

if  he  meant  tointiiuaie  this.  •  •     •    ^„   ,,^  „wv,iri 


which  niH  would  be  correct,  and  is  quite  often  thns  used  by  Cicero,  as  :  Dtcfiremquse 
aniea  lutQra  dixissem,  m  t>;fr<^r  ne  ex  eventis  Angare  vidtrer.  Cic.  Fain.  6.  G.  H. -C^nod 
ni  navifrirevK  ipse  scriberem.  lb.  12, -23.  2. -Stat im  Arpluum  irem,  ni  te  in  lormiSno 
ev>peciari  lidSrem..  lb.  Att.  2,  14,  2.-In  Livy  nt  occurs  in  this  sense  in  nearly  a  hundred 
pa^saL'es,  bein;;  more  frequently  used  than  both  H  /i/?/i  and  uld  tojrether.    Livy  jrenerally 


«^...v.. proeul  w//>7X.~.. ,     ,. ^  .     .         -.-,,-, I    o<i  f* 

Komani,  Jii  clamor  ab  eis  qui  erant  extra  arcem  sublatus,  omnia  Mmajtcutm.  lb.  JM,  b'^. 

OB.S.  4.  All  p«?riods  of  non-reality  are  either  definite  (particular)  or  indefinite,  in  the 
pame  sense,  as  tiicM-  express^ions  are  taken  in  periods  of  doubtful  and  doubi less  reality 
(K  44,  Ons  15).  Indetinite  conditional  periods  are  considered  as  hijpothetical  if  they 
are  as^uuled  contrary  to  InitU,  i.  e.  contrary  to  a  fact  holdini,'  K«od  in  all  .nm^-s,  a^^J  ^» 
semper  optima  tenere  ;xw.s^//«w^,  baud  sane  consilio  multum  efjeiemiis.  Cic.  1 .0.  2;j,  89. 
It  is  not  necessarv  that  the^'eneral  lacts  contained  in  i*uch  periods  should  be  represented 
as  ab>olutely  imp"os.-ible  ;  it  is  enouirh  if  the  author  represents  the  assumption  as  con- 
trary to  geutrai  experieni  e,  as:  Quodxi  in  secundis  rebus  bonam  qiioque  meiiteni  darent 
dei.'non  ea  holum  qua'  (.'venissent,  sed  etiam  ea  quie  evcnire  possent  reputaihnvx.  Liv. 
;iO  ;iO.— A  hypothetical  period  may  be  indefinite  in  the  hypothesis,  and  detinite  (particiiiar) 
in'the  thesi-  as  :  QoodH  in  hello  dari  \iearii  follrent,  libenter  me  j)ro  D.  Bruto  inclildi 
Vdteier.  Cic.  I'hil.  12.2.4.  The  rules  about  the  use  of  hypothetical  or  non-hypothetical 
moods  iu  indefinite  periods  of  non-nahty  are  the  same  as  those  for  particular  condi- 
tional periods  of  non-realitv.  Only  when  indefinite  periods  of  this  kind  are  used  in  cer- 
tain lorms  of  sylloj,'isms,  a'freer  treatment  of  mood  and  tense  is  admiited.    See  Obs.  15. 

Obs  5.  The  use  of  mood  and  tense  in  periods  of  non-reality  is  re^rulated  by  the 
following'  rule:  If  the  predicate  of  either,  or  of  both,  of  the  two  propositions  refers  to  a 
\\mc  present  or  future  in  ngard  to  the  moment  of  speaking,  it  takes  the  imi'erfkct  SL;n- 
jiNcTtvK.  corre-^pondingto  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  or  potential  mood  of  the  preterite 
Tense  in  En-lisli ;  but  if  the  predicate,  as  above,  refers  to  a  past  time,  it  takes  the  plu- 
j'KKKECT  sriijiTNCTivK,  coiTespondini:  to  the  indicative  and  j)otential  moods  of  the  same 
len^e  in  English.     To  these  rules  tliere  are  several  exceptions,  referring  1)  to  the  use 
of  the  NON-HYi'oTHETiCAi>  MOODS,  2)  to  the  Use  of  an  i.mpki{FKCt  in  i)lace  of  a  plupek- 
FKCT-  and  :\)  to  the  use  of  the  indicative  of  th(!  three  preterite  tenses,  and  ahso  some- 
times of  the  present  and  future.    These  exceptions  difler  according  to  the  relation  of 
the  two  predicates  to  the  time  of  the  speakeii.     Hence  the  following  instances  must 
be  disiin"ui^hed  :   1)  Both  i)redieates  referring  to  i)resent  or  future  time  ;  2)  both  predi- 
cate-'  referriu"'  to  the  past  ;  8)  one  of  the  two  predicates  referring  to  the  present  or  luture, 
and  the  oiher"'to  the  past.— Sometimes  in  the  thesis  of  a  hypothetical  clause  the  flmie 
sion  of  the  contrarv  o?  the  thesis,  and  si  non  a  consequence  ot  a  negative  assumption  ". 
But   iu  clauses  of  lion-reality  fjoth  of  these  alternatives  coincide  and  include  each  other, 
wtii'ch  is  the  reason  tliat  the  Latin  uses  tiUi  and  si  non  without  distincti(m  in  these 
clauses,  a.-:   Cwdcr^in  te,  nifi  inusceier.  Sen.  Ira.  1, 15 ;  ='My  l)eing  angry  <-aT/*/</c*'  my 
strikiu"  you  "•  but  also  ='  mv  not  being  angrv  (as  assum<d)  would  iiave  the  consequeiice 
that  I  would  strike  you  ".     Hand  tries  to  establish  his  theory  by  the  h»llowin_'  example  : 
'(hneco-'itatiort  non  incidisxtt.  mm  labonlrem  ;  Had  this  consideration  not  arisen  in 
me,  IwoiTldnot  l)eindi>tress'.  Cic.  Att.  13.32.  llA.NDsays.  "It  would  have  been  'absukd 
to  use  in  tliis  sentence  the  conjunction  //m",  which  is  a  very  palpable  mistake,  nccording 
to  Hand's  own  theory,  si-ice  the  s.-nteiice  evidently  means  :  *Tlie  7Wf  happmmg  oi  tins 
con>iderati..n  would  have  excluded  my  distress '.     Tims  ni.n  is  used  in  the  lollowing 


*  The  loHowinir  enumeration  of  ]>art  of  the  passages  in  which  m  is  used  «ith  ttie 


IX,  14  (twice).  32.  40.  41  42;  x.Ml  15.30.37.41.4.-):  xxu,  22  ;  xxiii,l.  14;  xxv  3«;  xxvi, 
21) :  xxvii.  42;  xxviii.  15.  22.  30:  xxix.  2.  <i.  10:  xxx.  18  (three  tlme^) ;  xxxi,  43;  xxxiii,5. 
17.25;  xxxiv,  2.s.2!).H2;  xxxv.  1  ;  xi.ii,  43. -Tacitus  uses  «i  in  the  saii.e  way  as  Livy.— 
For  the  anteclas-ical  use  of  in  in  clauses  of  non-reality,  coiup.  Plant.  Cist.  2,3,81;  Iseua 
6, 2,  3S;  Trin.  1,1,3;  Merc.  3, 4,  4  ;  Aul.  3,  5, 49  ;  4,  6, 3 ;  4, 10, 12  ;  Ter.  Hec.  2, 1, 23. 


720 


CONDmONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  TERIODS   OF  NON-KEALITY. 


721 


verb  or  the  predicate  i.  elliptlonlly  .ornitted    as  :  O  .tuItiHam,  nisi  mea  major  CBset, 
nn'j'darem  (  =qu»  singvlans  e.sstt,  nin  etc.).  (  ic.Fam.  12,  o.  1. 

1    Voods  in  periods  of  non-r^nUt;i  with  both  pmlirates  referring  to  the  Pres- 
ent or  Future. 

0„,.  6.  All  ,hehypo,h.,ica,  P-lnd.  in  which  both  prop^,U^^^^^^ 
to  ih..  ,„<v,k,T.  (,r  u,  in,l,-l,niie  >!'"'; ''"'  "'J  J  " '>  K^lVr  k.    I   l)Lri.NiTKrTiME  with 

sapei-ef  Anto..ia.;  Even  tluit  con.i>irac.v  ['X^'/i'^'^'^^^^ 

r?m'/.s-  cum  .H<>"iii"»*-  ^'^- "^^  ^J'p^f  VV'^  4  J  .2  Defimtk  timk  with  nk(;ativk 
ta<^»e•  ^•tant  resistcndnm  est.  Cic  1  nil.  li,  A  4.—  *•  Vr.;  -^n  In  Mnnolhis  nisi  liidoa 
cf.xis'Ks;  Non  ,.fere,n  pacem  ^'^^V^'l/l^-j/^f  [-«1^  ^-^J;     -'^^^^^ 

•.^^'^^'"hoi  i,..".n  «onus  ora.ioni,  yl.  hjyu.  loc^^^^^^^^^^^ 
l:^:P.;.i«»«aliacl.,,inrao,_c..,inraU.^ 

can  consitler  death  an  evil,  who  thus  praises  etc.*). 
OB.  7..ir  a  hypo,,,Hi....  a..,n,p,i,,n  ..r..r.  .0  ,h^ 


^all..JUl,^ -ii, -ii.— v^""' """."  ".""•  "V,-     »»»  m  «  0      s-j  nni  •indiGrunt  \•\l\^^s\  e<seni i 


vos  hnrtarer,  milites,  ,v2  cmn  aruia..^.  '      Vrj;  V fc    Ut i*  a  io  te  ui)ore  ;v>7K)/*vr/r//.N-  «.s'^fw. 
paull.un  loci  mihi  nt  ei.  re.i.on.lerem  dares   ^^^n^^a^^^  ..^^^.^^_ 

Cio.  Fin.  4.  2-.'.-  Hoc  lem.o  ammo  P<'''^''-r'^J'}*lJ^^\'^'^^^^^^^  ad  Ili^^panien- 

Sall.Ju<;.31,21.-Consi\i.Mn  ..tud  t,mc  ^ff/  l^'i'^f  ^^^  n   i  audiG  u      viiiOsi  6.w^^ 

dt-fi- 
the 
iiite  rutiire,  oramary  im/>tnfr,   '•';</'"^' '■,;-,  ";:»  V»,,.  nn-^ont  time'i-  meant,  as:  Ea  nnllo 
connection  make,  it.clear  .liat  f  f"'"  ;'' -^"^  ^       eri  ir  ? "  n      e  -le  r  bv  the  connection 
mod.>  /;o..sym.^ilGre  siade-o^em    ^!^- '\^ :  '  ;/,^;/„,.,.Vi  /-^ v  lich  the  author  refused  to  attend. 

Cftre?  Liv.  6,40. 


inite  time,  while  periods  of  virtual  non-realitv  can  only  refer  to  indefinite  time.  This 
ditr.-rence  is  best  pcen  in  the  following?  passa'j:e:  Nam  si  forte  qucerer'etur  quae  esset  ars 
impenitOris,  constitncndum  pnfarem  ])rincipio  quis  es-^et  imperator...  ;  sin  autem  qvcB- 
7>>7?//»>/.<quis  esset  is  qui  ad  reinpiiblicam  moderandam  usum  et  scientiam  coiituhsset, 
dt'liinrrtn  hoc  modo:..-6'i;?  autem  qncereretitr  qnisnam  jiirisconsultua  verus  nominarStur, 
eilm  dicereni  qui  etc....\tqne  ul  jam  ad  leviOra  artium  studia  veniam,  si  musicus,  si 
oTainmaticus  si  poeta  nuceratur,  jw^sim  «imiliter  explicflre.  ..OratOrem  autem.  qiioniam 
de  eo  qmrrimifs,  equitlem  etc.  Cic.  Or.  1.  48  foil.  The  transition  from  the  imperfects 
qucererUnr.  qucerer?tnus  etc.  in  the  first  three  periods,  to  the  pr«*sent  qnoiratur  in  the 
fourth  has  ])erplexed  the  j^rammarians.  Kuhner  considers  all  the  lour  periods  as 
ontinary  conditional  periods  (i.  e.  of  doubtful  reality),  pronouncing  the  use  of  the 
imperfects  as  anomalous,  and  the  present  in  the  fourth  period  as  normal.  The  author 
of  the  Publ.  Sch.  Gr.  (p.  :wn  says:  "  The  transition  fro7n  imperfect  to  present  is  deter- 
viin&d  bi/  no  potential  dv^fificfion  between  the  hypotheses,  thoufjh  the  vse  oj  examples  to 
,nnn  the  first  three  may  have  led  Cicero  to  choose  the  imperfect  form  as  more  man- 


con 


AOEARi.K  (')7'or  that  purjxtsey    The  fact  is  that  the  tirst  three  periods  with  impertects 
are \'cnuin«'"^  hypothetical  periods,  referring  to  definite  time,  namely  to  the  moment  of 


Boeakiii",  while  the  fourth  is  a  period  of  virtual  non-reality,  referring  to  indefinite  time 
The  author,  discussins:  the  requirements  of  an  orator,  says  in  the  first  three  periods:  'If 
my  object  in  the  present  treatise  were  (=*i  qHcrrerltar)  the  art  of  a  soldier,  of  a  sta*"" 
man.  of  a  jurist  {which  it  ivas  not),  I  would  define  in  this  way  etc.    These  assumpti 
l>ein"-  evidently  contrary  to  fact,  hvi)othetical  moods  were  required.    In  the  foi 


of  a  states- 

ons 

jfourth 


tlie  predicate  ' possim  explicdre',  which  certainly  is  not  contrary  to  reality. 

Obs  9  In  the  following;  Instances,  the  presekt  sub.junctive  is  used  in  periods  of 
non-realitv:  1)  In  antf.claspical  language  often,  and  sometimes  in  the  poets,  the  pre^s- 
ent  subjunctive  is  used  with  the  force  of  an  imperfect  subjunctive  (Obs.  10).— 2)  If 
the  assumed  fact  is  a  suPEUNATfRAL  act  (Obs.  11).— 3)  If  the  predicate  is  a  verbum 
sENTiEvm  with  an  object  denotini;  another  action  (Obs.  12).— 4)  If  the  assumed  fact  is 
the  speaker's  own  act,  the  performance  of  which  depends  on  his  will  (Obs.  13).— 5)  If 
si  has  the  force  of  etiamsi  [Obs.  14).— (i)  If  the  assumed  act  is  a  link  in  certain  kinds  of 

SYLLOGISMS  (OBS.  15). 

Obs.  10.  The  anteclassical  comics  use  the  subjunctive  of  the  present  in  strictly 
hvp«)lhetical  periods  ottener  than  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  as:  Vocemte  ad  coenatn. 
vhi  e>'omet  cone7n  foris;  I  would  invite  you  to  dinner  (but  I  do  iwt),  did  I  not  myself 
dine  abroad  il  do  dine  abroad).  Plant.  Stich.  2, 1,  .36.     Compare  with:  E<?omet  ducmrem 

"     "         ■'   ^  ""■'      Neque  quid  me  ores  cogitas; 


I,  vi  mi  eseet  ad  forum  negotiiun.  lb.  Most.  3,  2, 160.— 
I  St  coqites,  renntta--^  yAvn.  me  ontrSre  injuriis.  Ter.  And. 


eum 

^\•M\\  sterol. ^. ., ,  .  ^  ,     ,  -      ., 

alere  jm'ntn  inisericordia:  I  would  feel  pity,  could  I  feed  my  famijy  on  pity 


5.  1,  l.—Muereat,  si  familiaiu 

Plant. 


Pseud  1  3.  55  —Si  liercle  haheam  (nummum),  ]x>llicear  Itibens ;  Had  I  any  money  (but  I 
have  noi),  I  wouM  willingly  i)romi<c  it  (but  I  do  not).  lb.  Ep.  3,  1,  12.— A'i  mala  sies, 
quod  viro  esse  odio  videas,  lute  tibi  odio  //a6<=a>^ ;  Were  you  not  bad,  you  would  hate 
what  you  see  is  hateful  to  your  husband.  lb.  Men.  1,  2,  X.—Dicam,  si  videam  tibi  esse 
otium  lb  Merc.  2,  2.  15.— (^lia,  si  e<,'o  emortuos  sim,  AthSnis  te  sit  nemo  nequior.  lb. 
P<.im1  1  3  1-jn— Tii-si  hic*t^  aliter\sv///irt.s\-  Were  you  in  my  place  (but  you  are  not), 
you  would  think  otherwise  (but  vou  do  not).  Ter.  And.  2,  1,  10.*— Poets  sometimes 
U'-e  the  imperfect  snbjnnctive  in  the  thesis,  and  the  present  subjunctive  in  the  hypoth- 
esis as:  Et  /•rt<:f7•«^  A'i  non  iera  repulsa  .vo/^^/*/.  Tib.  1,  8,  22.  So:  Compella rem  Qcro 
illam,  ni  inefitam  ne  desinat  etc.  Plant.  Aul.  3.  5,  49.— Sometimes  the  poets  even  use 
pre-ent  subjunctives  in  pi  ice  oi  pluperfect  subjunctives,  as:  Spatia  si  plura  svpersint, 
tninoat  prior,  ambiiruumve  relinqmt  {-transisiet  prior,  ambiguumve  reliquisset  cer- 
tilmen.)  Virg.  Mu.  5,  325. 

Obs  11.  If  the  lact  assumed  in  the  hvpothesis  is  a  fiction  referring  to  supernatural 
acts  the  period  must  take  hypofheticat  moods  when  the  author  means  to  deny  the 
assumed  possibility,  and  the  thesis  expresses  a  consequcncejikcwise  denied  in  reirard 
^*  MArrvTo~places  this  passaire  in  the  same  category  as  tlie  periods  of  non-reality 
nientitmed  Obs.  11,  saying  that  the  present  subjunctive  must  be  used  in  this  sentence, 
which  is  an  evident  mistake.  The  above-cited  passa-jre  is  very  difterent  from  the  class 
of  periods  considered  iu  Obs.' 11;  for  the  assumption  '  Were.  yo»i  in  my  circumstances 
is  not  contrary  to  the  laws  of  nature,  but  contrary  to  fact,  which  is  the  very  reason  that 
it  \»hymtheficnl,  and  would  take  an  imperfect  subjunctive  in  classical  style  Compare 
tiie  similar  passage  of  Cato,  quoted  by  Itui'iN.  Figur.  p.  204:  iSi  vos  m  eo  loco  es&etts, 
quid  aliud/ac<;re/iif.^ 


722 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  PERIODS  OF  NON-REALITY. 


723 


to  itH  reality  as:  QuodH  omnia  nobis  q.ue  ad  virt.im  pprtinont,  quasi  virpilta  dhlna 

^;^  ,^^^^.^,  '--i;x;2;';r?';c  ^oS^'r  ^rsr  o.n>;c  i^:^  'i:;^':xi;^r^nt 

nemo  ad/n^ret  «'^amr;^^^^^^  viiorc'  ^i  proxiini  n.e.ubri  vliletud.ne.u  «d  .e  tra(lnxi..et. 
hnhrrft  \\i  pus^e  putaut  k.  Naicrt   ei  P^"-^'"'     .,        ..  ..  r,  _uut  if  imnossib  o  facts  ot 

«•itriril*    The  KUt  riClJlIl!*  v\  OlIKl  il«-l»i  I » ^  J""  "'   J       _  .   ,        .  a   ii;„     r'.i»      l     U      l''iMnii!iri>  ■ 

'lh- 'V,  3  Ih..c  «  p..  n^lo,i„ai,;r,  .">"."■  •"'..em  re  <^.W  /  «i-io"--;..  lutu^  i  .l.:cum 


Liv 

pnpn 


V.  5,  4    Coin  pan  .    Y'[2^^j^^\\f    ,.Jii    in  »;  12  -Ouantnui   inf,emU<mnt  patrt'>?  (ances- 
populi  R..in:lni  .'^'^^'''{^'■'^'^'^f  •'_<-';;•  J.  *^;„^^^^^^^^^  W  — Si  Ueiis  te  t/./e/rof/e^  quid 

re^miideaxf   Cic.  Ac.  2,  2.)  — Umntb  ^-"^  "  ''  /,,V  ..,,,  I  s.-rvU.  Suluieio   non  nnt  com- 

Tuli^''.  ;;,,!  n,yum!e7;m.n;uato»u<.,,(ir  etc.,  quid  uudum  wlibue  v,r„  ,«,K„W««/ 

Dulsu^  ad  eOrum  causam  me  adjunfjerem.  Cic  ham.  \';'';Vh./r.Mnl  lie- were  how  lu-ld  i>V 
mood,  are  u^ed  in  butli  P'-<M><''''  ;;•»;;•  .R'V„^^;,^';.^^^^^^^^^^  are  contrary  to 


parati  os?Cmu!»,  scirem  (  =Reftpond?re  non  ponn^im,  qvla  ne^cio  qnemadmodxtm  etc.).  Cic 
Alt.  7, 18, 1.— Often  t»ucii  eentences  include  both,  non-reality  in  rt'<rard  to  the  present, 
and  doubtful  realUii  in  reirard  to  the  future'.  In  this  instance  the  predicates  are  always* 
in  tiie  Kubjunetive  present,  as:  llle  no<*ter  anilcu;»  tibi  irStns  est;  hoc  *t  quanti  tu 
le-times  sciam^  turn  quid  mihi  elaborandum  sit,  scire  jWsvim  (=nef!Cio  nync,  fed  n  fades 
lit  sriam.  scire  poffro).  Cic.  Att.  1, 8. 1.— De  Feilcis  testaineuto  turn  masjis  qverare,  H  scias. 
lb.  Qii.  Fr.  ;3,  0. 8.— If  the  predicate  refers  nicrehj  to  tiie  future,  without  a  present  non- 
reality,  the  sentence  is  an  ordinary  period  of  doubtiul  reality:  Sed  tanieti  ^i  wia;/t  (future) 
quid  constitueris,  meuin  consilium  accomvwdabo  ad  tuum.  Cic.  Fam.  9,  7,2. 

Ob'*.  1.3.  If  the  speaker  iti  the  Si-clan-^e  assumes  an  act  of  liis  own.  implying  that  ft« 
is  }iot  noinq  to  perform  it,  the  thesis  expressing  the  consequence  if  the  action  were  to 
be  performed,  the  |)iedicates  of  the  periods  are  either  l)Oth  in  the  present  subjunctive, 
or  both  in  the  lmpekfect  sitb-tunctive*),  as:  Hie  ego  si  frnttm  faciam  liicendi,  satis  ja- 
dici  lecisse  ridear.  cur  sectitidum  Kosciutn  judicilre  debeat  ;  If  I  would  etid  my  argu- 
ment here  ijnit  lam  not  qoinq  to  do  so),  I  would  have  done  enough  etc.  Cic.  R.'C.  .5. — 
Coiup.  with  :  Quibus.^i  niiiilaliud  resjwnderem, msi  me  M.  Brutone^are  rogauti  noluisse, 
jtista  ej<set  excusatio  ;  /f  I  would  anjuier  notiiing  else  hut  etc.  (but  1  am  qoinq  to  ansiner 
something  more),  it  would  be  a  le<ritimate  excuse.  lb.  Orat.  41, 140.— aSI  hoc  reticeavi,  aut 
fuperbus  aui  oi)noxius  ri6?>-ar.  Liv.  2},  12.  Comp. :  Mihi  i:,'n()scere  mm  dtbej-elis  si  taci- 
t-em. Cic.  Clu.  G.  18. — El'o /fi  me  Scii)iOnis  desiderio  movSri  neqem,  mentiar.  11).  Am.  :^. — 
Quid  mihi  sit  i)oni  si  merdiarf  Plaut.  Most.  2. 1, 23.  Comp. :  Qiiid  assequerer  si  istS  extrS- 
ma  defensione  idevtr?  Cic.  Plane.  6,  IH. — Quibijs  ego  si  me  restitisse  dicam,  nimium 
mihi  sitmam,  et  non  simferendus.  lb.  Car.  :i,9,  22.  Comp.  :  Si  lar::itiOnem  esse  confiterer, 
idque  rectutn  factum  c^^^i' defenderem,face7-e7n  improbe.  lb.  Mur.  3.— /Ve/n  vnpn'dens  si 
plus/>r>.</;//<'7«  qiiam  homini  arerum  na'tunl  tribui  potest.  lb.  Fam.  11,  21,3.  Comp.:  Si 
tabellartos  ad  te  cum  inanibns  litteris  mitterem,  facerem  inepte.  lb.  Att.  8,  14, 1.— Sed 
quid  opjHmas.  si  neqem  me  umqnam  istas  litteras  ad  te  misisse  ?  lb.  Phil.  2,  4. 8.  Comp. : 
/S'iasperius  in  quosdain  homines  invehi  tW/«m,  quis  non  concederet  nt  eos  perstringerem  ? 
lb.  Sest.  <).  14.— Hiec  *i  verbis  explicSre  ro/j?w/r,  nullo  posito  sub  oculis  simuiacro.  eS- 
rum  reriim  fru-tra  suscipiatur  labor.  lb.  Tim.  10.  Comp.  :  Si  plane  sic  verlerem  PlatOnera 
nr  verterunt  nOstri  poCtit- fabulas,  mule  m^rJrtr  de  meis  civibus,  lb.  Fin.  1,  3.— Nam  si 
conftram  nos  cum  illis,  iiijuriain  notnini  Romano /adrt/».  Liv.  22,  59.— Cotnp.  Liv.  2:3,  42; 
Cic.  Fam.  13, 8.  2;  lb.  .5,  2,  3.— I'resent  subjunctives  are  always  used  in  the  expression 
'  Dies  deficiat  si  '  (Time  would  be  wanting  if  I  would  etc.),  as :  Dies  definat  si  iinperatO- 
res  temeie  in  hostium  terrain  transirressos  cum  maximis  cladibus  suisenumeraie  velim. 
Liv.  28,  41. — Dies  defciat  si  velim  wwmei^ryi  (inWms  bonis  male  evenerit.  Cic.  N.  D.  3. 32. 
—Nunc  me  dies,  vox,  latera,  dtficiaid  si  hoc  vociferari  velim.  lb.  Verr.  2, 2.  21.  In  the  fol- 
lowinir  passage  the  '_'reat.r  i)art  of  tlie  Codd.  n-ad  dejiciet :  Dies  deficiat  si  velim  pauper- 
tatis  cimsam  {Icfendere.  Cic.  Tnsc.  5,  35.— In  place  of'a  present  subjunctive  in  the  thesis, 
i\  perfect  subjunctive  (of  guarded  statement  or  individual  opinion,  see  p.  :378,  Obs.  2)  is 
sometimes  used  :  Multos  circa  nnam  rem  ambitiis/Vc^/'im  si  qiiip  de  Marcelli  morte  va- 
riant auctOres,  omnia  exsequi  velim.  Liv.  27,27.  feee  lb.  2»i.  49.— Very  rarely  the  thesis 
has  its  predicate  in  tlie  intkurocjative  imperfect  subjunctive  (p.  ;381.  Obs.  3),  while 
the  Si-clause  lias  a  present  subjunctive  :  Si  profitear  (quod  utinam  possem  !)  me  studiO- 
sis  dicendi  priecepta  traditflruiu,  qui  tandem  id  reprehendertt  f  Cic.  Orat.  41, 141. 

Obs.  14.  Sl-clauscs  of  non-reality  in  which  si  has  the  force  of  efiamsi  are  generally 
treated  as  hvpotheiical  with  i/np-rfert  (ra^peci'WL-ly  pluperfect)  subjunctives,  as:  Cum 
qtiibu!^  «  mihi  nulla  causa  i>def\>dertt,  tamen  tnonetem  te  ut  eOruin  fortQiiis  consuleres. 
Cic.  Fam.  13.  4,  \.—Si  oh  eam  cau>am  peccftret,  t^nnen  iqnosceret  nemo.  lb.  Sest.  *'A.  But 
often  present  subjunctives  are  u.>=ed  in  clauses  of  this  kind,  as  :  Thucydidis  oratiOnes 
imitari  neque  possim  si  velim  (=even  if  I  wished),  ucc  velim  I'orlasse  si  possim.  Cic. 
Brut.  83.  Compare  :  Micrnrcm  miiiiii;  dolorem  nee  i)otui,  nee  sij)0ssem,  velletn.  lb.  Att. 
12.2S.  2.— .Si  Ciaudiie  familia'  non  sim  (even  if  I  were  not  a  member  of  the  Claudian 
family),  reticCre  jxKsMtm,  L.  Sextium  tantum  sibi  Iicenti:e  sunipsisse?  Liv.  6,  40.  Com- 
pare :  (^ujR  si  exsequi  nequinm,  tamen  me  lectulus  oblectdret  meus  ea  ipsa  cogitan- 
tem.  Cic.  Sen.  11. — ^ec  ea  dico,  quae  si  dicam  tamen  infirmare  non  jwssis.  lb.  Ca?c.  9,  29.  • 
— Fact tirusne  opera?  pretium  sim  si  res  P.  II.  perscripserim,  nee  satis  scio,  nee  si  sciam, 

*  The  grammarians  generally  consider  tliese  periods  as  ordinary  conditional  periods 
referring  to  \hr  future.  But  they  are  evidently  periods  of  non-reality,  since  the  action 
of  the  clause  is  represented  i\^  not  to  become  real :  else  it  would  not  be  admissible  to 
tise  al<()  hypothetical  moods  in  tJiese  periods.  It  is  true  that  periods  of  this  kind  refer 
to  the  decision  of  a  (/o'/6^  about  performance  or  non-performance.  But  this  doubt  is  a 
past  one,  and  does  not  refer  to  the  present  or  future  performance,  havini;  ceased  to 
exist  at  tlie  very  moment  the  sentence  is  formed.  Unquestioiial.>ly  the  implied  reler- 
cuce  to  such  a  former  doubt  is  the  reason  that  uon-hypotlietical  moods  are  udiuitied  ia 
these  periods  along  with  hypothetical  moods. 


724 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  PERIODS   OF  NON-REALITY. 


725 


dicere  auHm.  Liv.  Pr^r  1  .-Sometime,  (-^^^^.^^i^'- il:-|^';!;!j:;:;,iT"!C7l^ 
iiiiKMive   witli  a  pres^etit  i?ul)junctive  of  the  h}  potliesif,  wnui  uic  i    f/  '"  .. 

•ar7'/m^"^'//i  ''^  co'ittnno      he  truth  "',':;;,{.  ""^^^^^  imi'kkfect  subjunctive, 

III  if  S  FS'SSHS^^^^ 

*'^n.    .?  Vh  'l  e-  1   18  -Mu   (1    divlua  in  homines  m.uleratio  pn.fecto  nulla  e,f,si  m  ea 
nulla  e-if.  lo.  L,e«,'.  i,  i».     •^'''"''' "y,'.  ,-,.,,,,,    n»  x  I)  M  ;i5  — Ach    U's  «  (  ens  «-^.^  et  Or- 

Atticum  n(  i  ^  i  I    p;^  nr  ,f  o  9M  -^()n<Ml  d  ita  <>.</  qua.  niiilum.  stultiiiil  fnf  Koscius  ? 

junctiv.r  imperfect  or  present,  as:  Cur,  (iu<..l  ui  sinu  ve^tro  e.st,  cxtuU  juOeli^  polius 
quam  pondt'u!,  uiA  aliqua  Iraus  guhe^t  .^  Liv.  h,  1.). 

2  J/<>^x7«  i/<  7?rn"or/s  o/  non-reality,  both  propositions  referring  to  the  1  ast. 
OBs  Ifi.  If  a  hypothetical  period  refers  to  a  time  anterior  to  that  of  the  ''Pcak*;^  ^»>;h 
nmoositions  eenerally  taiie  the  ruPKUFKCT  sibjunctivk,  as:  I'lancuN  .vt  semltum 
S  S^;  m.Eua.^  cur.am  inc.nlis.et.  ^ic.  Phil.  13,  li.-ilcn:  bd  mn  .;  prm.a  s^^^ 
nn.-i)eraV?/i.<.v///  hand  dub  e  «id  lluiujluos»  ptn'^'nuxet.  Liv.  8,  3.— 1  hil  i)puj-,  *t  uiuu  is 
S[A-  W  id  bell  m  j^t>i.s-.s<^/.  lb. ;«.  23.-(^ui  consul  exset  farfu..,  mn  m  Maiulnos  con.uia- 
ui^hH-hils.fVw  Brut  47,  n:..-Qu()d  m  fH-U<e(  Cav-ar.  unum  ni  locum  omue*'  adver- 
.  nor.  n  c  Pi;e  co^e  h^^en  lb.  1).  v.  '2.  24.-Me,  d  vis  ,.<m  fm.^s,f,  nulla  .r«  labefac.  Jlre 
wS  Vh  SesKW»,  1-27.-TO  Ihi.  rule  there  an-  the  lnll.,win-  kxcki'TIons.  lu  wlml 
Tm  KKFFCT  H  hjunct  ves  are  used  with  the  force  «.f  En-li^h  plupkufkcts  :  1)  U  the 
,e  iTnTerr  ni  to^ p^^^^^  nctious.  ,ni-_'ht  luive  taken  puksknt  suhjunc.ves  .''/»•'.  I  err.  d 
t<r/rif'ytimeToBs.  l7).--i)  If  tlu-  tlusis .  c.ntains  an  intkuk..uative  sul)junctue  (Obs 
IsZ-T  f  both  prV^^  •t.fer  to  past  time,  and  th-  clause  is  either  •••{'«•^-"ted  as 

coiNciOKNT  will.,  or  ruECKDiNO  iu  lime,  tlie  pre.licale  ot  the  thens  (Ubs.  19.  liO). 

()B^  17    If  a  past  l.ypothetical  period  is  sudi  that  the  predicated  would  "r  '"•;;»' t  J'^ye 

tnk.i.PKESKNT  -iB-iUNCTiVKs.  accordiui:  to  OBS.  11-15.  if  ref.-rnd  to  p.e>ent  t  nu-.  both 

•e  1     .1  s  a*^^'  aMK^^^^^  in  th.'  impkufect  sibjunct.ve  «ith  the  force  ol  an  Li.i,- 

•     '^    VA  PE  FKr^^      >u u.e  a.  in  the  a,.alo;,'ous  iuManc  .  of  clauM-.  ol  ,7'-V'l;;;;"'riH 

V  U)   710)      Heme  this  o.nstructi....  occurs  :  1)  if  the  fact  assu...ed  in  the  »'VP  't''^,':''; '» 

a  fiction  refer,  in^  to  sipernatihal  acts  (Obs.  11),  for  nist..  to  my  hcdogical  fictions, 

S/  .srProTu/t   e.7.,  q.  uui  mo.talibuH  ii:u.-m  dividere  vclUt,  ipse  a  vi.Inis  carbunculoa 

^/^nK^r^     m  1    r  d  cni     s  ruienforr    If  Promelh.us,  when  he  was  -oin-  to  c.rrv  hie 

U>  [  f  .m>VtT,  /;;;i  h.tnsHf  t.en  h^oowu  li^'l"ed  coaln  from  his  ^^tli^'l^^^S 

lot  hare  .eenied  ridiculous  v  A„ci.  H.-r.  4, 6.-At  (.^t)  dme^  banc  vim  ^'^'^r^Xno    uM^^i 

rum  uercu^MOne  possit  heres  sciptus  esse  qui  levcia  mm  es.set  h.  re^.  m  toro,  n.ii.i 

^ZtsMret*]  But  had  you  yiven  to  M.  Cra^.us  (who  was  dead^t_il.e  Um^of^eak- 

"  *  Tixis  passage  id  preceded  by  a  Bimilar  pas=age,  referring  to  ihe  present,  with  puk3- 


Inff)  the  power  to  Pmnirsle,  hy  a  snap  of  his  finjjerP.  the  nnme  of  a  person  not  being  an 
hcTr  as  an  heir  into  a  will.  \\iiwmUU  have  danced  in  the  forum.  Cic.Ofr.8.  \%  m.—^)  If 
the  i)redicaie  of  the  clause  contains  the  pPEAKEirs  own  act  which,  at  th»^  time  spoken 
of  he  mi-ht  have  performed,  but  did  not  i.eiform  on  account  of  the  statement  "»  the 
th"i"<i<  (Ons  13»  as  :  Ac  t.im  si  dicerem.  nan  audlrer ;  Had  1  sjwken  then,  /  would  i>oi 
have  he* n  heard  ('ic.Clu.29  (referred  to  the  present :  Si  hoc  dicavi,  n<m  audiar :  er<:o 
no.i  dicam)  — Superbe  me  faterer  f^icere  (  =  tateor  me  factQium  fuisse)  n,  pr.usquam  lu 
Airicam  trai»'cissem.  te  tuS  voluntAte  cedentem  Ita.ia  a^^jMri'drer ;  I  wou.d  have  acied 
Hn'o.Vintly  had  I  rejected  vour  oilers  etc.  Liv.  30. 31  (referring  to  the  present :  S>q)erbe 
fariam  siasnen>er).-ii)  If 'the  hypothetical  clause  is  concessive  (Obs.  U),  being  eiihcr 
iutri.(lur.dbV€^irtm-«i,or,siwitli  the  force  of  ^^iaw«,  as  :  Atque  ille,  f/w//J>i  al.il  quapiam 
vi  exmlltrelnr  (wcmld  have  been  expeiii-d)  eis  temporibus  ex  hac  urbe.  facile  jMtevetur. 
Cic  Se<t  2*>  — Hosciirs,  si  nihil  dicertt  (even  if  he  had  said  nothin-),  tacito  ip^^i'  otnc.o  et 
studio  quod  hat.ebar  erga  propinquum  suum,  quemvis  comimreret.  lb.  Quu.ct.  25.-Lte- 
nim  A  lum  veniret,  me  tamei.  socium  suOrum  consiliOnim  vidSre  posset,  lb.  bt-st.  Z\i,M. 
—  Kcquie  vox  uimiuam  ««si  audita  consulum?  Quamquam  quis  aw(/I/v^  M  r/*a«m6  queri 
velitnt^  lb  30  iS\ —Si  fnceres  (in  edicto)  polestatem  oratOri  noii  modo  rejiciei.di,  sea 
eriam  'su'.iendi  r.-cuperatOres.  tamen  hoc  novum  genus  mjurue  lerre  nemo  iiosset.  \V^. 
VeiT  2  3  13  Coinp  Fin.  2, 2t'JU)  — 4)  If  a  hypothetical  clause  is»  used  as  an  assumption 
for  the'^ar-'iinuntum  e.\  contrario'  (Obs.  15):  Nu.nquain  perpeferereut  homines  injunaB 
tu'c  remetilum  morle  quiP.erent,  ;/t>t  ea  res  ad  qu«stuui  ei  ad  prsedam  tuam  jmtineret  ; 
You  ivoafd  never  have  s^feved  that  people  should  s.'ek  a  remedy  for  your  outrages  in 
death,  had  this  not  fjeai  a  matter  of  profit  and  plu-.ide.  for  you.  Cic.  V  err.  2.3,tb. 

Ops  18    If  the  thesis  of  a  hypothetical  clause  consists  of  an  intrruogative  siTB-nmc- 
TivEi'n  ti.e  imp.-rfect,  referring  to  the  past.  accT.linir  to  p.  3^1.  the  hypothesis  ge_ner- 
allv  takes  likewise  an  iwjM'rfect  subjunctive  sxn\i  the  force  ol  a  ;>/r/;^/:/6cf  as:  Si  .Alfenus 
tib.      nV  satis  daret,  et  judicium  accipere  rdlet.  revocare.^  eum  quem  in  (i;i  ham  mise.as? 
I    dlfeuu^  qiv^n  vo.i  security  etc..  Wa/  you  have  recalled  eic?  Cic.  Quiuct.  2h.-Mim 
i.ritirODimium.A'i  turn  €s.<es  {had  you  lived  hi  thai  time),  nefarium  civem  pufaresr  lb. 
Phil.8,4, 14.—' Si  auctOres  ad  liberHudam  \mir\iini  desiderareiitur  ilhs  actoribus,  Brutos 
e"0  iiilptUt-reui  quorum  uterque  etc.  t  II).  2, 11,  2G. 
^Ons   m    If  a  i>a<t  hypothetical  clause  is  conceived  as  coincident  with  the  action  of 
the  the-i<   the  pre.lica.e  of  the  clause  viay  l)e  in  the  impekfkct  srB.Il^^cv^lVE  according 
tti.'eneral  rules  explan.ed  p.  414  loll.  (§  »103.  Obs.),  while  the  principal  predicate 
reuit  n.e  re.ruiar  plup.Mfect  subjunciive,  as:   Si  nihil  p.iEter   f.igam  Q^^f'er^^^r 
funl^sem  l.l>enti.si.ne  :  Had  nothing  but  tlight  be^n  in  quextwa.  1  xJiould  have  fled  most 
Sndy     Cic.Att.  9.  10.  2.-Ilujus  .si  vita,  si  mos,  .i  vultus   mm  omnem  commen- 
a    -mm   iV'enii   evevtereL  nuijus  n.unen   in   patrOnis  />/iW;    //«;/  not    his  li^'  ;-t'^ 
XT, Zed  all  The  <-ftVct  of  hi  ^  genius,  his  name  among  barristers  would  hav-_  been  g.-eater. 
11,   B.m   t  7  -N^^    tanta  i:nr&\fdaissent  cerimonias  sepulcrorum,  nmh^revH  m  eOrum 
nuM.tibus,  mor.e.u  nou  inu-ritum  e<se,  sed  quasi  migrat.Onem     l»^' \.';;;^- ^-jf  ^,^;;;^^^ 
e..ri..  iio.i  /Vt-ivst'  si  suum  iiumer.im  naves  habtitnt.  In.  V  e.r.  2.  5.  51.— Comp.  ID  m»  "pJ- 
^(VsV  Vm  2  ti    A      4;  Fam.  3,  20,  2;  Phil.  2,  2,  3;  Oral.  17  55;  Brut.  10,  40;  Liv.  10.  4U 
lb  ^J9  4->    lb  9,    8.-But  in  all  these  pa^s.ges  a  pluperfect  subjunctive  would  have  been 
as  corVe  'tly  used  as  an  imperfect,  as;  Qui  tu  vir  et  qnantus/^/i^>^^.*  «_i  llus  d.ei  mentem 
t'yxS^lll(U<e^.  Cic.Phil.2.3n-Isy;;-25ce.s>i<^^en.onoribus  iongius,  ?^m  semper  infi.m5, 
at»iue  etiam  legrS,  valeiuQine/«i*^>.e/.  lb.  Brut.  48. 

OBS  20    If  in  a  past  hvpoti.etical  period  the  hypothesis  is  represented  aj^  preceding 

the  tin-s  s  in  time  pl.ipe.-fecl  subjunctives  are  generally  used  in  (,oth  propositums.    But 

some    me  "in  tlds  instance,  the  ..-edicate  of  the  thesis  is  pj-.ced  iu  the  i^nperfect  s^ib- 

jr^'rwhle  the  hypothesis  retains  its  pluperfect  subjunctive,  as;  ,St  hic  lalsus  arc  1.  - 

'piraia  .;..A/-ar/...s-a\it  pro/uqUsef.  uouesxet  <litticile  (it  ^'•<i;;^%^^^^^^^^ 

dimn  in  supposiii  locum  supponere.    Cic.  \  err.  2  5.  .3(. -At  7u    S   hi      FrL  i<  rib! 

ginicsium  d'..ctor./V/i^.e^  nihil   recusandum  -iM>P 'cu  /wv<-    Liv   ,>2  bl.-Ergo  is  ti^^^ 

civis  (P  \a-Ica)  si  te.nporib.is  il  is  fui^xe.^,  nou  prol^arlturf  Cic.  Phil  b.  4,  14.— M  e^set 

;;;/V/;/PomVK.  ...Oruul  c«usa.  n.mlq.iam  exsrnve,^t^ywo^dd^>^r^  A«r.  ;;f;^^f,;^,«^l')- 

II)  13  s  17  — C(Mnp.  Liv.  9, 19;  lb.  42.  43;  Caes.  B.  C.  3.  Ill;  ^  ic.  \  err.  2,  l^^L^'N  >'>•  ^  «'f- 

3  -^  54-  1  ;  Se        -Ttds  fo.-.n  is  (»ft.  n  used  to  represent  the  action  of  the  clause  as 

la:n,^)o  the  moment  <>f  making^  if  thecmid  i  lion Jiad  been  fulfilled,  as:   6t^nt<mius 

FNT  srB.irNCTivEs  (Si  vir  bo., us  hatxat  hanc  vim  ut,  ei  digitis  tovcrepuent,  possit  m 

h'cupien,  ,n  tiMa.uenta  nouien  gus  inepere.  hac  yi  non  ^'ff^-^}^^"^:^^^ 

sage  in  tm;;«fVc/*-c:.nnot  be  likewise  referred  to  the  presen  .  l)y   ender  ng  ,t    ««yf  you 

would  qive  XhU  power  to  a  M.  C.assus'.    The  a.i.hor  of  the  /;»b,l^-^^^^,^;.J'^^-   Pjif^^^^^^^ 

plains  the  imperfect  by  stating  'that  the  J^^^o-.tino  pekiod  of  Crassus  s         1^^^^^^^^^^^  ^ 

contemplated ',  which  certainly  is  a  novel  way  of  explaining  the  use  of  an  imptrltct  m 

place  of  a  pluperfect. 


^ 


72G 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  PEEIODS   OF  NON-REALITY. 


727 


opprimero  nrhom  jx>tini^set.  statim;  n  Gallmm  tcnOrc  panllo  post,  ^*  P^"  ^"W  ^ 
eundinn  rcluiuis  U-^tl  ^^tTvicndum  (  =  the  oUuts  would  hart  been  compel  ed  to  he  ^lavc8, 
\Z\Zuldt^<<o  m  Cic.  Phil.  8. 13,  :U.-AW<  eni.n  ipsi  (Autonio)  siatim  *eme/i(/"m. 
si  Cle^ar  ah  eo  re>;ui  int^iguia  accii)ere  voluU^et.  lb.  3.  5,  12. 
3.  One  of  the  propositions  referring  to  the  Piesent,  the  oth£r  to  the  Past. 
Ob9.  21.  If  the  fheds  refers,  to  the  present,  while  the  h>/j)of/>e-^is  refers  »«  ,^^^,^7  "I'ime, 
the  fonner  in  clH^'sic:ll  prose,  always  lakes  the  impekfect  ^subjunctive  while  the  pred; 
U^iei'lUie  latter  takis  tl,;  PLm-EKKECT  .ubjunelive.as :  Uuo  ;i'/|'/<>»^.l«'Al?^'7;.,!j 
lueu.n  consilium  v«/MWwe^  tu  hodie  ef/tres,  no»  Hberi  *^,v.srm«^.  Cic  I  hil.2  \^; -^-"tj;,*^ 
tn  Fraei  tot  et  taiita  d  nactus  esses,  tempu»  te  cuius  quam  oraiio  d^^tictret.  lb.  K.  A..U. 
-bu  °  me  aXS; honeste  vivermLlh.  Fam.  7,  3,  i).-Uterer  domest.cis  exempli s. 
nav^e^isZ.  lb.  Orut.  ^.-NUi  ante  lio,uMn'oAcfMS  e,,es,  nunc  earn  ^^'-^Yt'lTm 
lb  Fam  7  11  1  -The  anteclassical  writers,  in  analo-y  to  the  u^^age  stated  Obs.  10, 
icmi.hmes  a.cihe  present  sui>juncnve  in  the  thesis,  and  the  Z-'/^^^U  u^MiTa  VilZ 
hvpothe.si!..  as:  N.-jrat  y  Tu.  Eiiam  roj^itas?  nwa/nsiconfessussit  Plaui.  Most,  d,  i, ^-4. 
--In  tenebris  conspmilus  si  sis  me,  abstineas  manum.  lb.  1  seud.  4,  -i,  ^. 

Obs  22  Rarelv  the  ther^is  of  a  hypothetical  period  has  its  predicate  in  the  pluperfect, 
when  the"hvi)oth'esis  with  a  predicate  in  the  inMH-rfecl  subjunctive  refer?  to  a  present 
Snc  (the  Ks  'eneraliy  denoting'  the  cous.quence  of  the  hypothesis).  This  connec- 
tm  occurs  n  two  instances :  1 )  It  the  hyp..the.is  denotes  a  state  (or  custom)  6^j7i«/|i/.f7 
S-7th;-  time  ol  tlie  thesis  and  continuing  to  the  moment  of  speakin-  as:  J^u  rt 
SeVri./ry;;M  =  vix.ssenttu.n,etiu,ncviverent,bellumo 

Phd  13  13  — Non /Vci.s'.NW/i  hominis  menliOnem  msi  judicartm  (  =  mm  J^^".' /^'"'^'"' ^-J 
m  u- jiiditWm)  qui^•rimino^ius  diceret  me  andivi«.se  i.eminem.  lb.  B.ut  .«.-Liro  ^ 
fois  c«ni/J/rm  (J  si  solitus  essem  etc.),  Cn.  Octavio  non  dejuissem,  lb.  ^«n^  V^'.-.f- 
.-NusQuam  hoc  est  in  fcedere  (Jaditilno,  ac  sicdA  esset  (et  turn  fuisset),  lex  id  Gel  la 
^^iKS  lb  Ba  b.  14.-2)  It  the  fnct,  men.h.ned  in  the  hypolhois  is  to  he  refuted  by 
*ap'  m^^^^^  the  thesis  containing'  an  a,;,M.n.K-nt,  lake.i  «rum  the  past   as : 

Nun  "  o"t  Antonius,  nam  n  esset,  non  canunisi^stt  ut  ei  .enil.us,  tanquam  Ilannibali, 
denli.icia.Vtne  oppu-naret  8a.-ii..lu.n.  Cic.  Phil,  b,  S.-t^uod  ia.i  tsset,  certe  ut  a  crudc- 
lissimo  liO!?te  fuyissef.  lb.  Clu.  »•(). 

4.  Preterite  Indicatices  in  hypotheticnl  Periods. 
Ob«*  23  In  the'foUowin^'  instances  the  p.e.licate  of  the  thesis  i.i  hypothetical  periods 
mavhe  placd  in  the  ini)7cat.ve  ok  one  of  the  tiiuek  pkktkkite  ^^^'^^v;  ;.  I'  ,.  ,!v 
«rc-dicate  consists  of  the  pote.stial  verbs  and  verbal  exp.-ess.o..s  denot.nir  possib  ut^ 
Sec  is  ty,  nKsn^ABiLiTT  and  p.^opkietv  (Obs.  24-20..  2)  In  those  instances  i«;  which  a 
preteiite  tt'.ise  of  the  perii.hrastic  futu.e  is  used  with  hyp..lhe  .cal  meaninir   Obs.  2 .  . 
3)  1.1  some  instances  when  the  predicate  consists  of  o.dinary  vc.-ba   predicat.s  (Obs   28  . 
_T  is  usei.f  the  indicative  df.es  .iot  .efer  to  the  predicate  of   the    .y/>r>  A.^rs  wh.c  , 
even   if   dependent  on   hyp<.theiical  indicatives,  retains  its  re-ular  hypothet.ca    Mib- 
iim.iive      Hut    exceptionally,   thon-h    very  rarely,  p.cterite   indicativrH  a.-e   found   .n 
hypoheic.l  Si-claules.  na.m-ly:    1.  I..   epi<.ohuv  sty  e  .f  the  *^^lafse  is  int.^duced  by 
n^;  .  Ipsam  tibi  cpistolam  misis^tm,  vi.i  tam  si.b.to  fratns  i.uer  proM'i-^cthotur  {  =  VVO- 
?ect  is  es.et)     (Mc    Alt.  8,  1.  1.-2»  Sometimes   in  analo-y  to  the  hypothetical  pre.^ent 
indiaitiVe   wi.en  the  Si-cause  assumes  a  p(i.^t  fact  to  be  refuted  by  '  argument, nn  ex 
a    tHuicr    Obs   1.-^.:  Wn^lsi  (^.esa.is  ca..sa  in  provinciam  vemebatts,  ad  eu.n  P'olcc  <,, 
exclflsi  pr..vi..ci[l,  vJssHis.   Cic.  Li-.  8  (  =  Vo..  did  i,ot  come  in  C;esar  s  behalf  to  the 
province^:   for  if  so,  y<.u   would,   aftrr  yo.ir  expulsion,   have   -one   \»>   C^J^^''' .^--'^^^^ 
i,terrWfuru.^et'um{\mi\   I   {..tended   t<.   kill   you.,  n.m  tc.np.-rassem  y.n..|   Liv .  4(),  14 
S      especiiillv.  .1-  th.-  THESIS  likewise  has  a  hypothetical  i.id.cat.ve    (  BS.24):    II  ...C  si 
rw;m/   .  on  e.  ...  (.ua.n  dinti>si.ue  vivere  v.dle  drbebuf  f  Had  he  hated  h.m,  must  he  not 
have  wished  him  Vhe  lu..^'est  possible  lifey   Cic.  Clu.  «Jl    (Con.pare:  In  quo  po  u.  ^^t  te 
cdisZi,  minus  qu..d  ,ibi  obesMl  facen-y  lb.  Fa.n.  .3,  U\^\).-lJeb,lHi>,t  ^x  .m.nis  bono8 

race,  they  im-ht  to  have  made  all  m»-.,  good.  lb.  N.  D.  3  32,  .9  (C  onip.  u  th  I' •  /^.  . 
2  »U  127)  In  such  passa-es  as  Cic.  Uiv.  2,  8  (uequ--  n  faUuujuerat,  ejurjt.^.set),  the 
pre(r.cuie>/mi^  of  the  Si-cia.ise  has  .,..  hypolhe.ical  force,  as  it  has  been  shown  p  ..(  4 
Ob^  3  C  -Very  harsh  is  the  indicative  perfect  «  ilh  hypothetical  meanin-  in  he  follow  lUK 
uassa"."  I.muscit.-CeihC-i  adole.sc-uiiie.  nhi  itcru.n  patrue  b  llumy«^r</.  hall.  tat.  .j-i,  ..-l. 
Jlere  the  Nisi-clause  is  evidt-ntly  hypothetical,  si.ice  .he  author  means  to  «ssrrt  that 
Ceil.e"..s  u'us  a  .cb.l  lor  the  spc....(i  time.  Moreover,  .he  hypothetical  thes  s  has  the 
unexampled  fo.n.  of  an  imperative,  the  whole  passa^'e  havin-  the  mean...-  Censh-ema. 
vdb.s  CethS-o  i^M.oscendum  esse.  ni4. .  ./ecis set  \-Soi  Uy^  harsh  is  the  present  indica- 
tive in  a  Nisi-clause.  with  the  force  of  a  hypothetical  imperfect  subjunct.ve,  m  the 
Xoilowin-  passa-e:  Plura  de  Ju-urtha  scribere  dehortatur  me  lorttlna  mea...  .«i*t  tameu 


intelligo,  ilium  supra  q.iam  e-o  sum  pcterc  (=nihil  amplius  scriberejn  de  Jugurtha,  nisi 
irdeUifjerein  ilium  sup.a  peterc,  i.  e.  that  he  has  a  higher  aim  than  me).  Ball.  Jug.  24. 
It  is  evident  that  the  clause  •  nisi  intelligo^  is  contrary  to  reality,  since  the  writer  of  the 
letter  means  to  say  that  he  indeed  knows  the  fact  mentioned.  Hence  a  hypothetical 
mood  should  have  been  used. 

Obs.  24.  The  potential  verbs  and  verbal  forms  which,  as  theses  of  hypothetical 
clauses  may  be  in  the  indicative  of  a  jneferite  tense  are:  j)Osse,  debere,  dectre,  oportet, 
(Ff/uum  est,  apt 'an  est,  mdius  est,  optuldle  est,  interest,  satis  est,  causa  non  est  cur,  non  est 
quod,  and  the  ]>enpfira><tic  gerundials.  The  preterites  of  these  verbs  are  used  in  two  diifer- 
ent  relations  to  the  verbal  act. ons  to  which  they  give  a  potential  character.  In  the  first 
place,  they  may  represent  the  main  action  as  reailij  perjoi^ned,  in  which  ins^nce  they 
Iiave  the  ^anie  nature  as  any  other  modal  auxiliary  {solere,  veUe  etc.).  a.id  can  generally 
not  be  re.idered  by  the  English  potential  mood,  as  :  Pugnfitum  ab  hostibus  ila  acriter 
est  ut  a  viris  fortibus  pug.ulri  debuit.  Cais.  B.  G.  2, 133  (  =  the  enemy  really  fought  as  it 
vas  their  duty  to  tight). — Tanta  est  contentiOne  actum  q.ianta  &gi  debuit.  lb.  B.C.  3, 
111.— Neque  eniin  ipse  Ciesar,  ut  multis  rebus  intelligere  pofui,  est  aliCnus  a  nobis  (as  I 
h'lif  bten  adte  xo  iutt'T  from  many  facts).  Cic.Fam.  6. 10,  2.— ity/wi/  aliqui  ab  initio  noa 
sedisse,  et  tamen  Oppianicum  gratis  condemnasse  (it  2vas  possible  etc.).  lb.  Clu.  41. — 
But  frequently  these  potentials  represent  the  action  as  not  really  performed,  denoting 
that  the  pe.formance  was  merely  jx)iisible,  or  that  it  should  have  taken  place  from  moral 
reasons,  or  lor  the  sake  ol  exj.ediency.  as:  Volumnia  debr/it  in  te  officiosior  esse  quam 
fuit.  et  id  ipsiim  quod  lecit,  jx)tuit  facere  diligentius  et  cautius  ;  Volumnia  ought  to  have 
acted  more  dutil..lly  to  you  (f/ut  she  did  not),  and  might  have  done,  what  she  did,  more 
carefully  etc.  (which  she  did  not).  Cic.  Fam.  14, 10.  In  this  instance  the  potentials  meiv 
tione<l  above  pregnantly  imply  the  idea  of  nonreaUty  as  if  a  hypothetical  clause  had 
been  added.  Th.is  ''hoc  profdbtre  debuisfi''  (ywi  ought  to  have  hindered  this)  has  a  force 
similar  to  *//'  you  had  done  yovr  duty,  you  would  hare  hindered  this\  If  thus  used  the 
potentials  ineniioned  aie  regularly  in  the  indicative  of  a  preterite  tense  (see  the 
exanii)les  Obs.  25. 26).  Hence  predicates  of  this  kind  retain  their  indicative  tense,  even 
if  a  hypothetical  clause  is  expressly  added,  as  :  Delgri  totus  exercitus ;x>/wf/,  si  fugientis 
2>trsecuii  \\v\rn-iiA  essenf.  Liv.  ;i2.  12.  B.it  in  ihis  instance  also  hyiiotlteticcU  subjunctives 
may  be  ..sed.  as  :  Xl<i  totlus  diei  labore  milites  essenl  defessi,  omnes  hostium  copiie  delgri 
jwfuissmt.  Ctes.  B.  G.7,  88.— Quid  fucvrv  pot uissem,  nisi  turn  consul /wi.s^m.^'  Cic.  Rep. 
1,H.  So  if  the  hypotheti«al  clause  is  understood,  or  contained  in  some  member  of  the 
sentence  by  implication  (p.  734.  736,  Obs.  3.  4.  S).  as  :  Urbes  sine  hominu?n  coetu  (i.  e.  nisi 
honiinum  cief us  f /assent)  non  potuiss<nt  neciediftcari  nee  frequentilri.  Cic.  Off.  1,4. — Ilia 
a..ij)liil)olia  quie  Cia'sum  decGpit,  vel  Chrysippum  jxjfuisset  decipe.e.  lb.  Div.  2,  56, 116. — 
Nonne  multo  melius  fitisse/,  otiOsam  lettltem  et  quietam  traducere?  lb.  Sen.  23,  S2.— The 
Si-clauses  added  to  hypothetical  potentials  in  the  indicative  are  /lOf  always  hypothetical, 
as:  Hoc  si  q.ii  pati  m.ii  jx/tuit,  mori  debuit ;  If  any  one  was  unable  (clause  of  doubtful 
reality»  to  bear  ihis.  he  ought  to  have  died  (by  his  ow.i  hand).  Cic.  Fam.  9,  17, 1.— <S'it'« 
h;i.ic 'tui'ham  efl'i.irere  roluisti,  sire  etc.,  lie  Ciesa.-e  fame.,  mtuisti  dicere.  lb.  Brut.  72. — 
Lysimachia  tenendu  erat  n  pacern  petitdn  erdtis;  Lysimaciiia  ought  to  have  been  held,  if 
you  were  to  sue  for  peace.  Liv.  37,  ;i6.   - 

Obs.  25.  The  hyi.othetical  perfect  indicative  of  the  potentials  mentioned  Obs.  24.  has 
the  force  tif  a  plipkufect  which  lepresents  the  assu.ned  fact  as  complete  at  the  time 
iipokeu  of  (pp.  302  and  305):  Niim  id  vitari  fxjtuit  si  Flaminius  auspiciis  jKimissetf 
Ceite  non  potuit.  Cic.  Div.  2, 8. — Consul  essequi  jwtui,  nisi  eum  vitas  cursum  tenuissem? 
lb.  Hep.  1,6.— Tetigistin'  fores  ?  Tu.  Q,uoniodo  pulsflre  ;>o/?/i  si  non  tangerem  (how  could 
I  have  knocked,  had  I  not  touched  the  door)  y  Plant.  Mosl.  2,  2,  31.— Non /Jt/Zt/i/",  inquies, 
lieri  supie.is  (EpicCirus),  nisi  natus  esset.  Cic.  Fin.  2,  31.— C^ui  nos,  qnos  favendo  in  ccmi- 
inil.ii  causa  retinCie  7X>^/r-rMAt^  invidendo  abalienSrunt.  lb.  Fam.  1,7, 7.— 6'i  omnibus 
copiis  congressus  rex  fuissef,  forsitan  inter  tumiilttim  exui  castris  jwtueHt  rex  (the 
hypothetical  indicative  potuit  being  changed  into  the  subjunctive  of  its  own  tense  on 
account  of  forsVan  which  required  ihis  mood,  in  analogy  lo  the  instance  mentioned  p. 
44.].  Obs.  3,  3).  Liv.  31,  .'i8.— Z^^c^'/i^yi  mihi  ignoscere  ivi  Sextii  volunulti  parere  ?;f>/wi*.>.'f//i. 
Cic.  Vat.  1,2.— Quia,  quod  per  vim  hostium  esset  actum,  ratum  esse  non  debuit.  li)  Off. 


p-ndere.  Cic.  N.  D.  3.  33.— .Si  ujium  diem  fnordti  ef^setis.  morifjtdum  ommbnn  fnit.  Liv 
2,  :i8.— Quje  H  hoc  tempore  non  diem  obisset.  \m\n:y  post  annis  tamen  ei  moriendum 
fuit.  Cic.  F'am.  4.5,4. —Illud  potius  ptwcipiendum  fuit  ut  diliirentiam  adhiberCuus  in 
ainicitiis  co.npa.-jiiidis.  lb.  A.n.  17.— .Si  ila  putasset,  certe  ojifdbiiius  Miloni /wt^  dare 
Jugulum  P.  Clodio  quam  juguliri  a  vobis.  lb.  Mil.  11.— So.ueiimes  the  copula  is  placed 


■^ 


728 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


CONDITIONAL  TERIODS   OF  NON-REALITY. 


729 


in  n  hypothetical  perfect  indicative,  if  the  thesis  is  virtvally  potentml,  aP :  Tp?nm 

nim  ru^ar.n   exsSre  ma^/n/m/zi^'    For  it.  would  have  been  loo  j^reat  u  lo^;^  (and 

u    c\N m   oV-  I  le)    o  wait  for  (iesar's  return.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  40.     So  in  connection  with  im- 

e  ^on"  lindi  utV-genh^        :  ISapievtu  autem  civisfait,  Imnc.  (Uiusam  perniciO.o  cjvi 

on  r  li lu  ue  e  •  It  would  have  been  actin-  the  part  of  a  wit^e  citizen  etc.  (=cau8a  relin- 

r^n  /n,   En    Cic  Le«'  3  11  -Very  rarely  the  imtentials  mentioned  are  in  the  PLurEK- 

?;c4^N o  SuE^^^tak^^n  inV' hypoth^        ionise     but  nevcT  if  a  ^y;^^^'^^[^^:;^ 

Vxuvi's^U'  added  as  •  Non  po/ueras  hoc  a  principio  dicere  ?  Cic.  Div  2,04.— Q  lanto  nie  i- 

,s';;rm/pr<Sii^^^^  non  e.se  Herljltum^!  I '>•  ^«- •% -^S.-Cati  Ina  erfljut  c  .enUta 

trimnphai.B  -audio,  quern  oninino  vivum  illinc  exTre  non  oporUurat.  lb.  Mur.  2o. 

^K^  ^(i    Sometime!*  the  IMPKUFECT  inuicativb  of  the  above-mentioned  potential»  la 
h>TotheticallTu'Jrpar^^^  the  force  of  a  hypothetical  plui^rfect,  partly  with  the 

'TVt1s^tX1»e^'S^^^^  rr.rrEnrECT  if  the  action  a.  an  indepen- 

dent ta^tredieate  would  have  required  or  admitted  the  u.<e  of  an  tmperftct  ll^dicaUie 
p.  :  05  :  wS  ahno.t  alway.  i.  dependent  on  the  author'.  ^""9*^Pt>««' «"'^^' ^'^.^.y;''^»: 
lal  element  of  the  action  may  always  be  considered  as  an  »"/.^'.«^^»^" /f^  t^''' %: 
U(wt('s  PustinCri  non  mteranf,  ni  extraordmarue  cohortcs  se  of'jfci^f^ent.  Li\.  «i  ••— «^* 
'     didam  ve.tem  aXK^^  lujrentium  Pe.sei  ca.um  P^-''^-re^''peaejii  ;^  .m^^ 

Ih  i-S  20— Quid  Quum  iussisset  pnetor,  tuin  mittere  nonne  ;x>/t/(i.N/ C  c.  tiuinU. -4b. 
1  niu8  (Onph  iciH-  ur  vit:e  Avitiis  invidObat?  Ilunc  H  acerbe  et  penitus  oJ^ra/  (see 
O  i  I: )  non  eim^  Ifiutissime  vivere  vello  ^iemat  (ourjht  ('^  "^(.^''^«S^,:*;^  Jfij  '^^J^i;^ 
t()  the  ti me  when  Oppianicus  was  living,  who  was  dead  at  the  time).  lb.  Clu.  bl.-Sestins 
Ma  sil  am  profectui  est  ut  «ocerum  (^.^ScipiOncm)  conso  :lri  P^'^^V't',  >•' '^j  f/J'^  l^;';?l 
.  centem  out-m  in  majOrum  snOrum  vesiigiis  t^UiTu  opartcljat  (L.  Scipio  being  d.ad  at  the 
hm  lb  Se<t  37  -\  chipirilta  SyracasTs.  quoniam  iii  Syracusjlno  c'aptus  erat,  custo- 
dlH  U^^?^aM^^  be£e\hetimeof  speakTngV  >»>•  V-rr.  2,5,  27.-In  unS  civitate  bis 
ii  mro bui  fui-ti  quum  et  7rmi4sti  quod  non  oj^orCefxit  et  accepisti  quod  non  licCbat  II). 
YeVr  25  }^i  Comu  Ih  2, 1,  «l.-.Si  talis  nos  natflra  r/*""i->f/  "t  earn  ipsam  intueri  et 
Bc?<Dicere  posscmu^  baud  eruf  sane  (there  would  have  been  no  reason)  quod  qmsquara 
?a  irm  Mu  ar/lo^^^^^^^^  lb.  Tusc.  3, 1,2.    So  if  the  predicate  is  r«r/«a//y;..^  n- 

iTiVnsisnnoTo  ,i,e  copula  with  imt.er.^onal  predicate-genitives  :  ^•lvestenl  mis.-n- 
Si-1  TJ/«W".-f«^tam(.n  id  his  non  'licGre  per  interdicta  l«»'^''';f.''^tu;e  m/(/./  r  /^ 
eraTw  ferendce  {would  hare  been  an  intoleruble  act  «'f  rniel.y).  Cic.  ^'f;  ^•j»;-^'," f' 
vi<i  (li  mentem  reVi  ar/'W/i.vsfn/,  et  ipsum  ii.gentis  dtjffiadtalu  (rat  Liv.44,b.  So  in 
en?«to  a"v  s  V  e  where  the  imperfect  Vs  used  of  present  actions  which  are  represented 
hI  I.  St  irrt-an  o  the  fut.ire  reading  of  the  letter,  the  same  imperfect  indicative  ,8 
SeKyp  tlK-fically  as  past  in  reirard  to  the  future  reading  :  Xhi  magnam  -Pe«"/;f>^- 
m«  C  ciari  nos  catiiam  VrobatOros  non  a-at  causa  cur  at.  «  '^uu  cont.ndercvn^  (tfure 
woidd  have  been  no  reason",  viewed  from  the  time  of  reading  the  letter).  Cie  tain.  U  i,.i. 
2  \V  tt  tiie  force  of  b«th  a  pli'I-ekfkct  and  impeuvect  subjunctive,  referrin-  to  an 
nrtinn  w  ich  is  ret  rt"e  tecl  as  -iven  up  or  as  not  existin-  at  a/orwertune.  but  so  that  the 
S?rea  i  ^is  co'VK;;i.r«y  Ihftune  q}  the  speaker;  or  relerring  to  i»^^^/^''^!^^^.^^^, 
ii  "the  past  as  well  as  the  future  :  as  :  Iloriim  obt^rect^itioiiihus  nos  scito  ^^^; ^ ^^^t^'  '''^ 
1  r>^trl  sententia  iam  esse  depulsos,  n<m  nos  quidem  ut  dignitatis  simus  «.blTti,  srd  ut 
hablimu  "rat  On^^^^^  Poterat  utriimque  pneclSre  n  esset  fide-  in  homnii bus  consu- 

Kbus  "bS  (  ur  di-n^  and  welfare)  mh/d  hare  been  pn-served  unul  might  be  nmo 
fre^.rvedTiM  ere  Am^  liten  Unui  if  there  were  now)  any  faith  in  oiir  former  consuls 
Cic  Fam  1  7  7 -S^  Icri  .imilitudine.n  non  tarn  propter  p.riiam  legis  studeo.  quami  t 
maxime  asseqtiar  d.Lcu.crc. :  quod  poteran^nu.  ip^a  vilhl  fi;;:Z'!^J^:;i^Z^M<^i 
Atr  12  3«  1  Here  'quod  poteram'  {=' ivhich  I  mujht  have  achieved  ,  ami  nntcn,  i 
miohfJu  achieve!  refers  both  to  the  past  and  to  the  present  (future),  since  the  speaker 
hacl  already  bSore  writing  thisjtmerjbmido.^  the  plan  of  building  _themonuniHP2  on 
"VThF^iiform  assertion  of  all  grammarians  that  the  hypothetical  i.nperf«>ct  iml}eai>ve 

is  alwavs  used  with  the  force  of  an  i'"irf''^ .^^^^J''^^'^'''  '^^^^^^^^^^ 

utterly  Erroneous,  as  sufticiently  appears  from  the  passages  quoted  u  pB^-.-*' -^^ '''""/  ^ 
Da«.a^es  imnerlect  indicatives  of  potentials,  althou-h  accompanied  by  Si-clauses  Mth 
?ur0^nc.ti vv^^mTerfects,  are  not  hyUetical,  as  :  Si  luec  ^-T^^l^^^'T^^^ir^^^On- 
posteris  et  de  ilia  immortalitate  solhcilor,  qme  j^ferat  esse  P^'P<^  ";  .tAVhl  !n...  krr  /at 
iKtitfltis  et  moiibu-.  Cic  Rep.  3,  20.  Here  the  connection  shows  that  the  >pe..ker  (at 
Se'  I^'>^  troraccldj  did  Sot' mean  t.>  'l^"y  the  :;.//ni.  ri«  J'f^^^^  ^;^;^,!];^;'-^^ 
t^ented  the  contrary  as  a  possible  eveutuahty.  Nor  did  be  n  t  ^o  1  y  the  rt.i  i  y  c^^^ 
the  rhewis  '  au(E  r>oterat  esse  permtua  ,  but  meant  to  say  :  1  he  rei)ui)lic  naa  (Otiore 
the  tin^e  of  t^  e  Gmcchi)  The  lyoiJer  or  germ  of  immortality,  j^-ovided  the  people  were  o 
li^erc!>rdi,i''  to  the  institutions  of  their  forefathers '.  Hence  the-  passage  belongs  to 
the  couditioual  periods  with  historical  subjunctives  mentiouetl  p.  »14,  n. 


his  villa  site.— PerturbatiOnes  animOrum  poteram  ctro  morbos  appeliare  :  sed  non  conve- 
nlret  ad  omnia  ;  I  rni'fht  hav*-  (f>efcn-f,  and  jnight  now)  called  the  disiuibaiices  of  the  mind 
diseases,  Ih.  Fin.  3, 1'o.— Contumeliil  eum  onera^fi  quem  patris  loco.  «  ulla  in  to  pietas 
e-set.  colere  debebas :  You  loaded  with  disgrace  him  whom  you  ovght  to  hare  reven-d  (at 
the  time  <>1  the  ■  onerdre\  and  oimht  to  revere  now)  like  a  father  it  you  hud  had  (and 
had  now)  any  pieiy  in  von.  Ih.  I'hil.  2.  38.  — Vos  certe  viciOres  conspici  velle  dtbehwis  ;  At 
all  events  you  o/zer/i^^o  Aar<=  wi>hed  to  ])e  seen  as  conquerors  (al  the  time  you  left  the 
province,  and  ?iow).  i.iv.  45.  :W.— Panietius.  quum  ad  Q.  TuberOuem  de  d«dore  patierdo 
sc/ifjent,  qu«  d  esse  caput  dfbtbat,  m  probari  ]x>sset,  nusquam  jiosidt  (Pansetius,  when  he 
wroieon  '  beating,' LMief '.  alio-eiher  omitted  what  ought  to  have  been  (and  ought  to  be 
BOW)  the  main  point  i/ it  could  be  proved.  Ih.  Fin.  4.  0,  23  — Intelligi  a  nobis  di  velle 
deljefjanfq\nn  nostra  cau^a  nos  monCreiit;  The  ^tds  ought  to  have  wished  (and  ouL'ht  to  wish 
now)  that  what  they  imparted  to  us  should  be  understood  by  us.  lb.  Div.  2.  64.— Chaldsei, 
quum  iu)tent  sidera  natalicia,  quaecunque  Luna  juneta  videantur,  oculoraui  fallacissinio 
eensu  judicant  ea  qua?  latione  atqiie  animo  vidCre  de//tbnnf.  Docet  enim  ratio  mathema- 
ticOrum.  qiiam  istis  notam  esse  ojfortlbat,  quanta  humilitSte  Luna  lerfitur;  The  astrolo- 
gers judge  l)y  the  sense  of  sight  whnt  thev  ought  to  have  seen  (and  ought  now  to  see)  by 
their  reason;  for  the  mathematical  rules,  which  ought  tohave  been  (and  ought  now  to  be) 
known  to  them,  teach  eic.  lb.  Div.  2,  43  (Here  •  debebat'  and  'ojwrtWat '  refer  to  present, 
and  future,  and  to  the  whole  past  time  during  which  the  astrologers  practised  their  pro- 
f^.j^wiuiD.—Ktsi  enim  illiid  erat  aptius.  iv(\mv.n  (est)  culque  concedere  ;  For.  though  the 
former  plan  a\ould  have  been  more  convenient  (and  would  be  so  now),  it  Is  (air  to  yield 
to  every  one's  desire.  lb.  Fin.  4,  \.—Si  verum  respondere  velles,  Cato,  luce  erant  dicenda 
(referrin-'  to  an  answer  which  Cato.  bef(jre.  had  declined  to  give  :  'You  wonld  have  had 
to  say/A^»,  and  may  say  so  now"),  lb.  Fin.  4,  23.  (C<mipaie  'cequius  erat  id  voluniSte 
fieri',  m  the  corrupted  passage  Cic.  Off.  1.  0,  2S).  So.  when  a  i)redicate  with  the  copula  is 
viritndli/  potential  :  Erat  rhetoriceres  prorsus  facilis  ac  parva,  si  uuo  et  brevi  pr»scripto 
conti/itfetur.  Quint.  2,  13,  2. 

3.  If  the  Si-clause  has  the  force  of  a  hvpothctical  concemre  clause,  the  thesis  (since  in 
thi  .....  ....... 


ought  to  punish  him).  lb.  Verr.  2.  3.  .^5.  —Si  vietoria.  pra3da,  laus.  ihihUxessent.  tamen  om- 
uls bonos  reipublicaj  subvenire  decibat.  Sail.  Jul'.  8.j,  4.5.— .Si  Roime  Cn  Pompejus  pnva- 
tus  esset,  tamen  ad  lantiim  helium  is  erat  deligendus.  Cic.  L.  M.  17.— <S'i  mihi  nee  stipen- 
dia  omnia  emerita  essent,  necdum  ajias  vacatiOnem  daret,  tarn' n  aquum  erat  me  diimtti. 
Liv.  42.  34.  -Si  ad  hoc  belluin  nihil  j)ertin?ref.  ad  disci  pllnain  certe  milii  iie  plurinuim  inter- 
e/v//.  iiiMiescere  militem  nostrum  etc.  lb.  5,  «i.— Quanius  imperator  L  ^milius  fiierit, 
*i  ex  alia  re  nulla  exi^tima^i  jtossit.  velhoc  satis  t  rat  quod  etc.  H).  45.  37.— In  this  m- 
stanee,  however,  imperfect  .sv/(V'//<c'^iz7f*' are  fir  more  frequently  used  than  imperfect  in- 
dicatives, as:  ,Si  nemo  responsOrus  esset,  tamen  ipsam  causani  demonstiare  lum  posses. 
Cic.  Div.  Cicc.  13. 43.— «Si  ita  esset,  tamen  vos  sociorum  querimonias  aucilre  opw/e/e?.  ib. 
Verr.  2,  2.  G.  Comp.  lb.  2.  1,  27.  If  the  hvpothctical  clause  is  not  concessive,  a  potential 
thesi<,'.-xclusively  referrinLT  \o  present  lime  must  always  be  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive, 
as:  Mihi  igiiosceVe  non  dtbetiti^  (not  debebdtis)  si  taclrem.  Cic.  Clu.  6, 18.— Peculiar  is 
theu>eof  '«/.-i^^/Zi,*' referring  to  a  hypothetical /«////re  action:  Uld,  ,vi  vos  decedens, 
confecia  provineia,  relinquereni  (=relictarus  essetn\,  deum  hominumqu-'  fidem  iinploiare 
d<l>elHVisv\c.  (Where  'deJjerrtis'  would  refer  \o  present  time).  Liv.  28.  2S.— Poets  use  the 
impi-rfect  indicative  in  place  of  a  hvi)othetici!  imperfect  subjunctive  without  any  re- 
striction, as :  Nam  nos  t/.c<VyaM=<ieceret)...lugere,  ubi  e>^set  aliquis  in  lucem  editus. 
Translaiion  Iroin  Eiirip.  in  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  48. 

Obs.  27.  Frequentlv  the  indicative  of  the  three  preterite  tenses  of  the  periphrastic 
Fi-TUUK  is  used  ill  place  of  ordinary  hypothetical  pluperfect  subjunctives,  with  th<'  di>- 
tinction  explained  p.  131  foil.,  li.  U\.  14ti.as:  Kemissiim  est  id  quod  ereptun  erant  {i.e. 
nisi  remisMim  esset) :  Whai  they  Wtre  going  to  take  by  main  lorce  (and  what  they  uouta 
hare  taken,  bad  it  not  been  for  the  concession),  was  conceded.  Liv.  (i.  17.— Antonius 
coram  mihi  negare  iu)n  vult  quod  ego  non  logaftlrus  eram  (i.e.  si  adfuisset),_nec.  *i 
inimtrassem,  crediturus.  Cic.  Att.  10.  l3,2.-Quod  Awy^wW/aclurifuinuis  (z=teci.-^^emu,<)  si 
a?des  llo^trie  dejiagrassent.  Liv.  .5,  .S3.  C«)mp.  the  pa8^aires  quoted  p.  |.W.-Somt  tunes 
the  imperf.  ind.  «)f  a  periphrastic  future,  with  the  predicate  of  the  hypothesis  in  the  imp. 
subjunctive,  refers  to  a  past  indetinitt  time,  so  that,  if  referring  to  a  time  altogether  m- 
defiiiiie,  it  would  be  a  period  ol  'virtual  non-reality  with  pres'^id  subjumtires  (p.  7!0),  as: 
Quid  «  Si  v^HMnwerer,  meciim  exspiratilra  respublica/^ra'  ?  Had  Idled,  would  the  repub- 
lic/iare<'a-;rir«(/  with  me*  Liv.  28,  28  [With  time  altogether  indefinite:  ,St  es/o  wr/n/z?;.  me 
cum  exspiratura  bit  respublica  ?].  Coinp. :  Si  jam  vocer  ad  exitum  vitie  etc.  tic.  k  am.0, 4, 4 


e- 
4. 


730 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


IMPROPER  CONDITIONAL  PERIODS. 


731 


Obs.  28.  In  the  followiii'::  instances  the  indicative  of  the  three  preterite  tenses  of 
ORUiNAiiY  VERBS  is  ustd  iu  the  thesis  of  hypothetical  p.-riods: 

1.  The  iMVKitFKCT.  Hiid  goim-iinu.'s  the  plupkhfkct  indicitive  (the  pkrfkct  only  in 
certain  connections),  are  nsed  to  represent  past  acti<tn^  as  vet^  near  to  actual  perform- 
ance, the  hypothetical  clause  (mostly  inirodnced  by  nisi,  ofttii  by  ni,  k-ss  often  by  .si) 
denotin"  a  fact  that  hindrred  the  accoinp'Uhintut  {--\vm\  it  not  bt-en  for  the  fict  thMt),as: 
/S'i  per  Metelluin  Ikitum  e.-^stt  {  =  uid  Mttellus  nrohibuUset),  matre^  illOrum  veniehanf ; 
Had  it  been  i>ermitted  by  Metelliis  (had  not  M.  prevented  them),  their  muihers  would 
have  come  to  Rome  (:=iheir  mothers  were  on  tlie  point  of  startiiiLT,  and  they  would  have 
come  etc..  Cic.  Verr.  2,  H,  4'.»  *.— Aa/v^/ya/'  loiiLrins  U  would  hive  swerved  farther  from  tiie 
point).  ;?i4  me  rttinnUxein.  H».  Lcl?.  1,  1».  52.— Cui  eiro  nin  rt^titis^tm,  ex  hac  deciina 
vestril,  quos  iste  udnuerat,  in  eniiiu  consiliutn  mbsortitftatur  (he  was  on  the  point  of 
drawin"  by  lot  etc.,  and  would  have  done  so,  had  I  not  resisted).  lb.  Verr.  2. 1,  til.  -Jam 
hand  procul  justo  pnvlio  res  (-rant,  id  celeriter  dire/nptum  certiimen  per  ceninriOnes 
e^ifief.  Liv.  7, 14.— Aniiochus  enit,  n  pauca  /nutari^set,  ;rermanissimiis  Sioicus. 


(ic.  Ac. 


2  43  —  Ancept»  pedesire  certjlmen  erat  (the  infantry-li.<,'ht  w»)uld  have  l)efcn  a  drawn 
battle),  nL-ii  CA]n\ii;^  f!i'perve,tistteiif.  L\v.  2S,-i-i.—  VifiCeljat(/ue  anxilii  loco  paucitas,  ni 
Veien;^  in  verticem  coUis  ^m4v.«?/.  Ih.  2,:^0.—IUVur  in  c;ede.s,  ni4  Afranins  et  Annten» 
Seneca  obviam  is-fienf.  Tac.  An.  13,  2.— PLrPKurECTs:  Hoc  ipsnm  fortQna  eripu-rat 
(would  have  taken  away),  7ii.<i  nnlus  amici  opes  nubvenUsttit.  Cic.  K.ib.  To,  17.— Aivi 
Latini  siiil  sponte  arma  nurnpd^enf,  capfi  et  de/efi  era/nun,  Li  v.  3.  1»).— Pia'dire  rice- 
rilnins,  ni<i  Lepidus  recepisset  Antoniiun.  Cic.  B\im.  12.  10.  3  (Joinp.  at  Brut.  1,  15,  2).— 
PeriiTa'  imperinm  .«-i  Fal)ius  lantnm  a '/»•'/.•«' e.s\ve/.  (luantiim  ira  Miadebnt.  Sen.  Ir.  1.11.— 
,S"i  Cn.Poinpejum  Neapoli  valetQdo  a/^.-^tulhf'ft,  inmibiiatn-^  P.  K.  prii.ceps  t-.r(v.v.ven//.  lb. 
Cons.  Marc.  20.— Sometimes  tlte  \ian\c\o  ' fkene\  or  '  prope\  is  ailded  to  the  tln-.«-is,  in 
which  instance  the  predicate  is  placed  in  the  pkiipkct  indicative:  I'^nx^  sublicnis  iter 
p^vne  hostihns  dedit.ni  iimis  \\t  fuUset.  Liv.  2,  lO.-Sic  prope  onerdtum  e^t  sinistrum 
Ko  iiiliiiscornn.  id  referentibus  jam  irradum  consul  iu'naviam  ej-cusai^set.  lb.  2.  f,5.-In  the 
follo\vin>'P"'^!*;'i,'c  the  perfect  indicative  '  inquW  stands  in  the /i!/i>of/ie.^i.t.  because  tiiere  is 
no  form  '^inqi(U<et\  and  '  inqnubaV  isoidy  used  with  respect  to  repeated  aciitui:  Ptenas 
rebellionis^^(/iA>v//^«i  Vetiius  Messins  claril  voce,  Mlic  j)r;ebiiilri,  iz/y/ir  etc.  Liv.  4,  28. 

2.  Sometimes  (verv  frecjuently  in  Tacitus)  a  hyixiihetical  Si  clause  is  added  !«•  an 
ordinary  preterite  pmlicate  in  the  itnpt-r/ict  indicative,  wheti  the  proper  hypothetical 
thesis,  denotin,'  the  execution  of  the  princip  U  predicate,  must  l)e  si:ppi,ii:i)  as  an  inter- 
mediate link  between  the  priiicipal  sentence  and  the  hypothesis.  Such  hypotlieiiral 
clauses  are  almost  ahvavs  ne'iaiire.  bein^rrcLrnlarly  introduced  by  ni.  as:  .Ma^rna  iiominuni 
pars  eo  ul  le^'aiio  siipplex  liomam  mitteretur,  inrHndhat  (supply  'id  n'wd /actum  esset'', 
Td  atietores  defectifjiiis  arertiftnc  eolonias  aconsiliis  paci>.  Liv.  H,  21.  — Campus  Martins 
re-stdbat  (supplv  '^/  dn'ixu^  tss't).  ni4  \n-\n-^  cum  fntre  suo  Antoiiiu^/'/.'/iv.W.  Cic.  Phil. 
(>,  .-).— Romam  ferri  protinus  Siccium  placPbat  (supply  '  id  f/uod  factum  txset ')  id  deeein- 
viri  funus  niilitilre  piiblicil  impensfl  facere  rnaturasxent.  lAV.3,-i-i.—Ad/non?b((tu\orvs 
nt  hoc  (pioiiue  loco  interitum  elo(iuenri;e  dfphrdnni  (supply  'id  quod  J'tcittxtm'  ov 
"  facerem'),  ni  vererer  ne  de  me  ip-o  vidC-rer  queri.  CiC.  Oil".  2.  10.  — Rec  pei;lre  Annenhim 
avTftjat  (supply  '<-t  rtcepisuft),  ni  a  Mar-o  pio/nljitu<  foret.  Tac.  An.  4.  ll.—SfieraWitur 
puijna  (supply  *  el  pu//niitu/neifitt'),  ni  Maroboduus  casira  in  c<dles  sufjd'uri'-xet.  P).  2,  4»;. 

'Z  Rarely  The  thesis  of  conckssivk  Si-clansi-s  takes  a  hypothetical  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  indicative,  willioiit  beinj;  potential  (Obs.  2(1.  3):  Si  :,'iadiuin  in  Asiil  non 
strinHitseni,  n  hostes  non  ridixxem,  taineii  i)roconsul  triumphum  iti  Thra<ia  diiobus 
prceliis  tneruerain.  Liv.  3S.  40.  — At  /tiam^i  desertuin  vadinMiiiuni  esxet,  tameii  in  istj 
l)o^rIllati^>lle  iin!)rol)is-'imus  r-y^'Ti^^-l/r.  Cic.  (^iiincf.  18.— Anteclassicady  sometimes  the 
p^-rfect  indicative  is  used  in  this  connection  with  hypothcttcal  force,  as:  Decem  cocasset 
isi  (=etiamsi  vocasset)  ad  e<eiiam  viros,  nimiiim  oh-it/ndrit.     I*laut.  Merc.  4.2,  3. 

4.  Sometimes  hvpot helical  Si-claiisei  are  made  dependent  on  intkkikxjative  ses- 
TENCES  with  a  i»iedicaie  in  the  indicative,  which  pre<;naiitly  contain  a  hypothetical 
subjunctive  by  implicatim,  as:  Nam  ni  \t>i  fnxet.  cur  lu  .Apronium //<a/2/x/.v(|nain  .Minuciuni 
decumas  sumere  (  =  "'  \t<iv»>^et,  caum  nul'a  /uixxtt  cur  tu  ccti'  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3,  (il.  —  AiAi 
id  facertt,  cur  Plato  /E.i^yptum  p^ra^pdvit  f\  =  c-MX^i\  non  fui-set.  cur  etc.)  lb.  Fin.  5.  2». 
—Nam  fd  verborum  disceptatiOnis  ri*sev.sv/;,  quiit  (=cur>  fivdus  Ha-drnl)alis  cum  Lutatil 
priOie  ftedere  annparand-im  erat  f  (  =  cjmsii  non  luisset  cur  compnarctur).  Liv.Jl,  10.^ 

~*  Most  «grammarians  render  this  sentence  (and  all  similar  sentences)  '  The  nwther» 
trerecoininfj\  siipposini?  that,  when  this  construction  is  used,  the  action  is  alwavs  repre- 
sented a<  having' a  1  read v  commenced,  beinir  iattrrupteil  by  the  uclioii  «»f  tlie  Si-ciause. 
But  in  none  of  the  pa.<sa'.:es  extant,  it  Is  even  so  much  as  intimated,  that  the  principal  ac- 
tion had  already  commenced  ;  while  in  several  i)assai,'es  the  contrary  is  evident.  The 
imperfect  indicative  sii.iply  denotes  that  the  action  wm^  direct  I  ij  impe  ndinij  (see  p.  30J,  It. 
53).    The  hypothetical  ihe'bis  proper  may  always  be  supplied  (see  Ji.  48,  Oas.  8). 


IV.  DirROPER  CONDITIONAL  PERIODS. 
Rem.  47.  Impi-oper  coiulitioiial  clauses  ai-e  those  clauses  introduced  by 
coiidiliotial  coujuticlions,  which  are  equivalent  to  other  classes  of  clauses 
or  sentences.  They  chietly  occur  as  equivalents  of  1)  Adversative  prop- 
ositions and  CONCESSIVE  clauses  (Obs.  1-;});  2)  Temporal  clauses  (Obs. 
4.  5) ;  '6)  That-Clauses  and  relative  clauses  (Obs.  6). 

Obs.  L  Adversative  conditional  periods  are  those  in  which  the  thesis  is  represented 
as  not  subject  to  the  uncertainty  or  non-reality  implied  in  the  Si-clause,  thus  forming  an 
adversative  opposition  to  it  (=The  action  of  tne  clause  may  be  doubtlul  or  non-real, 
but  the  action  of  the  thesis  is  dimbtless  or  real).  In  such  periods  the  Si-clause  gener- 
ally has  the  force  of  an  Efianid-clauxe  (.vi  =  'even  \V).  as  :  Si  ego  ab  ilia  deserar,  tamen 
in  mea  pristinil  sententia  permanebo;  Even  if  I  shall  (should)  be  deserted  by  that  body, 
I  shall  yet  persist  in  my  former  views.  Cic.  Att.  1,20,  3.  Here  the  thesis  is  represented  as 
TMt  subject  to  the  uncertainty  implied  in  the  clause,  and  as  true,  whether  the  condition 
is  fultilled  or  not.  At  the  same  time,  the  thesis  implies  an  adversative  coordination,  and 
the  dau.se  has  conces.s-ice  sitrnitication.  But  in  clauses  of  this  kind,  the  concessive 
meaning  maybe  so  weak,  that  the  clause  cannot  be  properly  rendered  by  'even  if, 
as:  ;s'i  narbaiOrum  est,  in  diem  vivere,  nostra  consilia  sem})iternum  tempus  spectare 
debent  (=The  barbarians  may  live  for  the  moment,  but  our  nians  etc.).  Cic.  Or.  2,  40.— 
The  Si-clan-e  in  arlver.-ative  (concessive)  periods  may  be,  like  an  ordinary  Si-clause,  a 
clause  of  doubtful  reality,  or  of  doubtless  reality,  or  of  non-reality.  The  mood  and  teiise 
of  the  Si-clause  are  treated  accordinc:  to  the  rules  of  the  coirespondiiig  class  of  proper 
conditional  clauses.  The /Ae.vi^,  alth6ui,'h  it  is  /it*;;  contingent  on  the  fulfilment  of  the 
condition,  takes  likewise  the  same  mood  and  tense,  as  if  it  were  an  ordinary  condi- 
tional thesis  (for  exceptions  see  2f.  4«.  Obs.  2«.  3  ;  Obs.  28,  3).  Concessive  Si-clauses 
of  r/o'//'//^.**- r(?a/i/y  correspond  to  E'-ti-clauses,  which,  from  this  reason,  always  take  an 
indicative.  Concessive  Si-clauses  of  doubtful  reality,  and  ol  n<m-reality  correspond  to 
Etiamsi-clauses.  Hence  etiamsi  always  takes  a  subjunctive,  if  an  ordinary  Si-clause 
would  require  a  subjunctive  of  doubt  fill  reality  or  of  non-reality.— Examples:  1.  Doubt- 
TV\.  reality  :  (Jund-'i  de  Antonio  non  laf)07'dti'<,  mihi  certe.  patres  conscripti,  consulere 
debeiis.  Cic.  Phil.  12.  8,  10.— ^'i  aliquando  oculi  peccant .  Uxmen  inest  in  eis  vis  videndi. 
Il>.  Div  2.52.-2.  Dotbtless  keality  {si=ttA):  Si  tihi  tortana  non  dedif,  ut  patrecerto 
nascerCre,  at  natflra  certe  dedit  nt  non  parum  humanitatis  habGres.  lb.  R.  A.  Iti,  46.— ^Si 
Massilietises  per  deiecios  sumtna  ju-»iiiia  rt-rpintur.  inest  tamen  in  ea  conditiOtie  simili- 
tfldo  quiedam  servitutis.  lb.  Rep.  1.27.— 3)  Non-reai.ity  (^^=€/^aw.<f^) :  <S'imihi  numquam 
amicus  C.  Cic-ar  fuisset,  si  aspe)/iarit ur  amieWhim  meim.  tamen  ei  non  amicus  esse  non 
possem.  II).  Pis.  :i3.  (The  thesis  '  =/  would  be  still  his  friend  '  is  real,  but  is  placed  in  the 
same  hypothetical  mood  as  if  it  were  non-real). 

Ous.  2.  In  concessive  conditional  periods,  the  Si-clausc  is  almost  always  a  protasis, 
aiid  the  thesis  an  aptodosis.  (Jenerally  the  apodosi-  (as  in  \)ro\ter  concessive  clauses)  is 
introduced  by  an  adversative  coordinating  conjunction  (tamen  or  at\,  or  by  a  restricting 
particle  (certe.  saltern,  atcirfe}.  At.  certe.  and  •<altem  are  generally  used  if  the  claus-  is 
nx/afive,  or  virtually  so  ;  as:  (Rogabat  Caisar  ab  Ariovisto), .<i  nullani  partem  GermamV 
riiin  domum  reinittere  posset,  at  ne  quos  ampliiis  Riienum  transire  jiareretur.  Cies.  B.  G. 
1,  43.— .si  pecunias  lequare  aon  placet,  n  ingenia  ouinia  paria  esse  non  possunt,  juracer^g 
j)aria  debent  esse  eOrutn  inter  se,  qui  sunt  cives  in  eadem  civitaie.  Cic.  Rep.  1,  32.  Nega- 
tive condiiional  clauses  with  concessive  force  are  almost  always  introduced  hy  si  with 
a  iiei:ation  [si  non,  si  nanus  (=h  non).  si  iiullus  etc.]  But  in  the  following  passaire  ni^i 
has  the  force  of  ttiamA  non,  the  apodosis  being  introduced  by  'et  ipsvm\  where  ipse 
(  =  even)  imparts  concessive  force  to  niid.  having  at.  the  same  time  the  meaning  of  an 
adversative  particle  :  Quod,  nlH  di  mentem  regi  ademusent.  et  ipsuni  intrentis  difficnlta- 
tis  erat.  Liv.  44.  «.—Frequently  concessive  clauses  introduced  by  si  non  or  si  minus,  have 
the  same  predicate  as  tiie  thesis,  in  which  instance  the  common  predicate  is  expressed 
oidv  once,  the  .«^ame  as  in  Etsi-clauses»,  as:  Eorum  desiderium  si  non  lequo  ammo,  at 
forti  fera<.  Cic.  Fam.  (J,  22, 2.— Ad  eum  liliiim  ejus  adduxit.  ut  iile  si  non  omnem,  at  ali- 
qiiaiii  partem  mierOris  sui  de/x)neret.  lb.  Sest.  3.  7.— Eadem  ratiofuit  Seslii,  *i  minus  in 
accusando,  at  certe  in  necessitate  defendendie  saltltis  sua.  lb.  42. 

Obs.  3.  Concessive  Si-clauses  often  t.ake  idiomatic  forms  : 

1.  Si  is  often  combined  with  re/  (vet  si=etiam.si).  or  with  ?naxime  (si  maxime)  having 
a  meaning  similar  to  quanict^  (tif  ever  so  much),  in  classical  prose  always  with  the  sub- 
,  unctive,  as:  Ego  vero,  rel si  pereundum/wi'>'.'^f<. ..,  scmel  peilie  tamen  maliiissein  quam 
')i-  vincere.  Ci(^  Sest.  1!).— Qui  autem.  n  maxime  hoc  placeat.  moderatius  tamen  id  vo- 
unt  fieri  ^who  wish  this  to  be  done  rather  m(»deralelv,  even  if  they  like  it  ever  so  much), 
lb.  Fin.  1,1,2.  Comp.  lb.  Verr.  2.  2, 08  ;  2,4,42;  2,5,8;  Cat.  1,12;  Sest,  30, 04. 


732 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


2  Tf  the  thesis  is  mqative.  the  nesation  i«>  frequently  tran«ferrefl  to  the  Si-clanse  in 
theform  •//^.vi...7'/»'/<^//r  =  -notev.'n  if.  I.,  thi- con^tniciiou  the  thc*>is  ohIut  r^tauis 
its  i..-ati..n*.  .'.-nlMallv  if  it  pnc^<hs  the  cIhusc  or  it  drops  the  ne^'ation  if  it  jo'lo'i^ 
tlie  Si-claii^e  us:  OimiTiio  iiisci  amici?  mm  t.-mero  solro.  m  n  iwieinur  (/indnn ,  1  rto 
«o^  creiuM-allv  .'rnmble  with  my  IrifiHls  ^^m*  i/ff"!/  'lestn-r  if  (eqir.valriit  to,  )ut_  ^tn.uirer 
lluia  V/iam>i  trierentur').  Cie.  Phii.H,  5.-A<?  peric.ilis  v./i</f///  c()mpnlsus  ad  Lorum  cau- 
Kim  me  ailjiinir.Tcin,  ;/e  m  .w/m//m  '/"''i^"*  «'^'-«''t  «"  tnemeitta  co„>>(artnt.  j'^-^'  ":  -jj- 
n.-si  ,„:e(ionil)Ur*  pactum  pro  capite  pretiiim  non  ^tt"  ''"=*';' .n^-n  'J m-  ^/Vn  f-^  -^«nt^ 
<./.v  quiLn  id  non  hceris.  lb.  OlV.  :J.  'i!».  107.  Ciup.  ID.  Fnv.  1.  81 .  TO;  Oft  3  1*>- ^;  •-«  • 
Itaqiie  /^f  si  j'trundl^simu^  qxid^ia  no<  somntu  \\^\lvo<  pntGinus.  fc.  uiymiOni>,  >()innum  ^\o- 

Ih  niil  5  <>-Vn.  ne  si  sit  quidein  A'/zmcC  >■^//i</^!f,  ad  i;ijberMaciila  reipublioP  accedtre 
eiim  patiCmur  ?  Liv.  4,  3.  Comp.  CMc.  Phil.  12,  7. 15 ;  Div.  2.  59, 122  ;  Fam.  9. 5,  2  :  Alt.  U 
10-  Liv  4  4  •  lb  42  41.— Someiimes  (rarely)  tht;  ne-ation  i.s  n-peated  even  if  the  M- 
clui^e  oreVedes  tiie  tlie-is,  as:  Tiii  ireiu-ri  esse  e<?o  iriltus,  uf.  si  cu/natn  qmdem,  non  ;kw- 
^';,/^  t?c  pTs  &.  -Qui  pati,  n^  si  nat  guidem,  rwn  potest.  Sen.  Const.  4,  8  -Somelime-;  nee 
with  a  Si-clause  is  used  witli  the  fore»'  of  ne.  ..q'ddem,  as  :  Sapiens  non  iimeal  >  ^tc  s% 
patria  deleStur  y  Non  doleat  ?  Xec  n  delCta  sit  ?  Cic.  Ac.  2.  44. 

Obs.  4   Tkmpokal  clauses,  in  the  followinLT  instance?,  mav  take  the  form  of  con- 
ditional clauses:  1)  IMrely  if  a  premise-,  represented  as  <  ;'"»>'''l*^'*: '•^'';;7,J'*  2i  S',«.. 
fuf'ire  time  in  which  instance  a  Quum-clause  cannot  jrenerally  be  replaced  by  a  Si-claust , 
as:  .Si  damnatvs  eris,  atque  adeo  (or  rather)  q>i>,m  damnatus  (Mms-nam  I>^'B'Tatio  cov- 
DE.MNATIONIS  QU.K  poTEHAT  KssK?-vir-is  te  ad  iiccem  cic.  1  "^^^^^'r.^enr.   Cic  W^^ 
2  3  29      This  rule   however,  is  not  always  observed.     Thus  th(!  Kn-rlish    aftei     with  a 
fuTure-perfect  may  be  expressed  both  hy  quum  or  si  (but  not  by  ;wv/r/»/a//o,  as :  Nunc 
protieiscenmr  ad  n-liqua.  .vi  !)auca  ante /*(fWm?/.s'  a  vobis.  judices,  deprecati.  Cic.  V  err. 
2  3  5  -2)  If  no  d'tinih  time  is  as.-ii:iu..l  to  an  action,  so  tliat  the  consequence  will  be 
true  '"if  it  happen;  at  anv  time',  or  '  whenever  it  happens  \  it  is  <./tcn  optional  to  use  a 
Si-clause  or  a  Quum-clause  (or  Ubi-clause..   This  is  the  case  when  the  idea  of  the  time  and 
that  of  ih.'  coiidition  are  id^^ntical  ('  if  »>ein-,'  the  same  as  '  when'),  i.  ^   when,  by  //w>/y 
a.<suminnthe  time  of  the  action  as  definite,  the  condition  must  be  considered  asjuf^ntttd 
as-    Nulla  nnvna 'ivitas  quiescere  i)otest;   4  foris  hostctn  n<m  ha?^f,  donii   invciiit 
Liv   30  44      lle'^ardiii"  the  ti  ne  of  the  '  non  hahZre  hostem'  as  come,  the  condition  is  at 
once  fiilftlied.    So:  CiTchleie  suo  sibi  succo  vivunr,  r..s  si  m.n  cadit    Plaut.  Capr.  1. 1.  13. 
Hence  in  both  passaires  Quum-clauses  may  be  substituted  f..r  the  Si-clausc->  ujuuni  forir* 
hosJem   n,)n   habetr7'''''''-  ros   non  cadit).    Thus  all  of  the  indct  n.t.-  Quum-clausj's 
Quoted  n  «;45  Ons  2,  may  be  chanired  into  Si-claus.'s.  and  many  of  the  indefinite  Si- 
clausesqu..ted  p.  711. OBs.l5f«.l.,nuiybr  turned  iMtoQiiuniclauses,as:Si^^^^^^^^^ 

«quinoctuinCapitoliumvetiennt  (^qnuin  qui...ven5runt).  .V""  ,  .i//,: /riVi  n,  nd 
factis  verbis  fivqlienter  nt:lmur  (=7'"^"'- •  "timur).  Comp.:  Quod  \ilqu>nn  id  quod 
factum  est.  pluril.us  de  causis  ratiun  vidc-ri  p..test.  lb.  Inv.  2  4.-Qms  audeat  de 
homine  paiillo  majoribus  opihiis  pnedito  j.idicilre  y^/^///M  =.^n  ?•W.«^  Mbi  de  e"  q"y'l 
conseiis.iit  causam  esse  dicendam  ?  lb.  Clu.  55.-ll.it  when  he  (indcn.nte)  time  of 
an  action  is  not  conceived  as  identical  with  its  reality,  the  Si-diuse  cannot  be  replaced 
bv  a  Quum-clause,  as:  .Si  pat-namilias  intest:lto  »/*ori////-,  familia  pecut.iaque  ejus 
a-nifttinu  esto.  Cic.  Inv.  2,  50.  and  Auct.  Her.  1,  13.  When  the  indefinite  time  of  the 
cfaii-e  'Si  paterfamilias  moritxr'  becomes  detinite.  the  condition,  whether  he  lias  left 
a  will  or  i/oMsi  intestato  moru.tr)  remains  still  d<,ubt/ul,  Hence  VK^chmse  inust  be 
introduced  by  *i,  not  bv  vw?/m.-Qni  summum  bonum  sic  instiiuit  ut  ni^il  habeat  cnui 
virtQ-e  conjuuctutn,  liic,  si  sifn  ip<e  r<,nse„nat,  neciue  amicitiam  colere  possi  ,  nee 
institiam.  Cic.  OlV.  1,  2.  If  thi-  period  be  referred  to  time  definite,  it  does  '^o/  i"M>  Y  tl»c 
lultihnentof  the  condition  'si  sihi  ipse  consent iar^^■\ur\l  ^''1» '•^'!"f'«i;'/<^"^^t[''  ;3*'"':;: 
tt  Quum-clause  would  not  be  a.bni-sible.  From  the  same  I'JIV'^'P'^;- ^^|''';^;''^  ^^P^  '^ 
sometimes  used  in~tea<l  of  h;/pothetical  Si-clauses  (see  P;  ^»-^-»- ^^- ^l^  =y'  f  »^  'z.^'";  7 
clauses,  'efiani  q>ntm'  (efiam  fam  q>iam\  beini?  used  with  the  f«»rce  of  etianui.  as.  Qui 
incoluni  maritimas  urbes,  etiaui  q>i>im  cinpore  manent  ammo  tanien  excursant.  cu. 
Kep  2,4-'Vn  etiam  ^/m  quiesceretis.  cun.-taremini,  timerCtis,  qnmn  ivmpub  icam  a 
l>icino;osissimis  sicariis  esse  oppres.am  ri'/./e/i.s  /  lb.  S,sr.  :i^.-32.  ^..nil.irly  boh 
Quum-clauses  and  Si-clauses  maybe  used  if  the  clause  f""»»'''^ '^ '^^•^■;;'/'2:'/.'>'JT'"  "! 
of  an  example  by  whicji  a  La'neraljvssmionjirthe^pj;nic^^ 

■~*'This~repetTiion  of  the  ne-ation  in  concessive  Si-claus-s  is  on  the  same  principle  »is 
the  repetition  of  the  ne-ation  when  nequidem  refers  to  members  of  the  ?ame  sentein  t.  r 
when  single  members  «.f  a  negative  sentence  are  coordinated  l>.y/^'r7v„  f '•?'  .\-en  this 
of  by  et.  et,  or  a'/t. .  .nut,  as  :  Non  enim  ,.r:etereundum  est  ne  id  quidein  (not  <;^^''  y»'» 
must  be  passed  over).  Cic.  Verr.  1.  m.-Nihil  ne  in  ips,l  qnldeni  p>ir)na  imcuinie  fccOiuul. 
lb.  Tusc.  4,  22.— Quibus  nihil  nee  tictrius,  nee  ftedius  eicogitari  potest.  ID.  un.  J, ». 


EQUIVALENTS   AND   ELLIPSIS   OF   SI-CLAUSES. 


733 


j 


Simplex  conclusio  reprehenditnr,  ,<fi  (or  quum)  hoc  qnod  peqniturnon  videStnr  neces- 
pario  cum  eo  quod  aiitecessit  coluerC're.  Cic.  Inv.  1.  46.  C<>mpare  with:  Legitima  est; 
consiiiutio  quutn  (or  sii  in  scripto  ali(inid  controversiae  nascitur.  Auct  Her.  1,11. — 
]Slala(U'linitioest.  qnuai  (or->i)  ant  cominunia  descrlbit  hoc  modo  etc.,  aut  falsiimqiiiddam 
dicit.  Cic.  Inv.  1.  49.— 4)  Clauses  of  repeated  and  contingent  action  (in  En<:li>ii  intro- 
duced bv  '?r^frjer<'r'').  whether  referring  to  time  altogether  indetinite,  or  to  a  definite 
time-period  when  the  time  of  each  single  action  is  indetinite,  may  be  introduced  by  si  {si 
guando.  'if  at  any  time  '),  or  by  the  temporal  conjunctions  qu>(7H  and  utd  (p.  329,  Oes.  1). 
Ors.  5.  Si-clau>^cs  sometimes  occur  in  i)lace  of  Fact-clauses  introduced  hy  quod  (p. 
005  fidl.i,  and  with  the  same  svndetic  antecedents  as  these  (in  eo  si,  literally  'in  the  fact 
if\  i.  e.  'in  the  fact  that  pe'rhapx').  to  designate  the  fact  as  a  doubtful  futurity,  as: 
L)i.\Crunt,  in  eo  verti  p.iellai  salQtem,  si  posiero  die  vindex  injiirite  ad  tempus  prtesto 
esset.  Liv.  3,  4fi.— .'\djccerunt,  Scipioneiu  in  eo  positam  habuisse  spein  pacis,  si  Han- 
nil)al  ct  Mairo  ex  Italia  non  revocarentnr.  lb.  30,  'I'i.—Ta  eo  enim  speni  victori*  verti,  si 
et  loca  opportOna  et  socii  pneoccuparentur.  lb.  35.  18.— Summa  et  perfecta  gloria 
constat  «'.r  iribus  his,  si  dili<;it  multitQdo.  «  fidem  habet.  m  cum  adiniratiOne  quadam 
honOre  dignos  putat.  Cic.  Oft'.  2,  9.— Similar  is  the  use  of  Si-clauses  in  place  of  relative 
clauses,  being  generally  employed  to  imply  a  doubt  whether  such  persjiis  or  things  as 
those  to  which  the  relative  refers,  really  exist  or  not.  These  Si-ciauses  take  the  same 
adjective  syndetic  antecedents  as  Qui-claufes  would  take  in  their  place. as:  Moitem  pro- 
posuit,  non  eis  solum  qui  illam  rem  >;es-Crunt,  sed  ti^  etiaiu  si  qui  non  moleste  tulCrunt 
(r^biit  even  lo  those  who  were  not  dissatisfied  with  it,  if  there  were  any).  Cic.  Phil.  13,  IS. 
Pnechlrum  nobiscum  actum  erit  si  P.  K.  non  istuni  majus  in  sese  scelus  concepisse 
Btatuerit  quani  e/)s  si  qui  istum  sententia  sua  libeiaiint  (rrthan  those  who  may  ab-olve 
bim  bv  their  votes,  if  there  will  f*€  any).  lb.  Verr.  2,  1,  4.  — Dixit  errSre  (supply  ^w)  si 
giii  in  bello  omuls  secundos  rerum  proventusexspect«'nt.  Cies.  B.  G.  7,  29.— Errat  n  quis 
existimat  facilem  rem  esse,  donare.  Sen.  V.  li.  24.— «S'i  quis  habet  causam  celebritaiis  a 
l)atre  acceptam.in /i«/tc  oculi  omnium  conjiciuntur.  Cic.  Oft".  2, 13.  — Diinissi-*qiie  (i.  e.  eis) 
«  ^7/1  parum  idonei  essent.  Liv.  42. 31.— Sometimes  Si-clauses  (like  English  If-clauses) 
are  usi,d  as  iNTEBUOfiATivR  clauses, M  having  the  meaning  '  whether ',  as:  Caniniiis  enim, 
si  quid  ego  scirem  inlerrogarat,  quod  tu  uesclres.  Cic.  Fam.  9,  6,  0.    See  p.  397.  Obs.  10. 

V.  EQUIVALENTS  AND  ELLIPSIS  OF  SI-CLAUSES. 

Heni.  48.  As  equivalents  of  Si-clauses  are  used  1)  The  Quum-clauses 
nirntionod  K.  47,  Ous.  4.-2)  The  clauses  introduced  by  dinn,  dinnmodo, 
and  modo  (p.  070  foil.,  Obs.  13  foil.)— 3)  liKL.vTiVE  clauses  (Obs  1).— 4) 
Pauticipi.vl  constructions  (Obs.  2).— 5)  Subject-infinitives  (Obs.  3).— 
G)  Certain  pakticles  or  other  members  of  the  sentence  (Obs.  4.  5).-  7) 
Independent  sentences,  asyndetically  fidlowed  by  the  thesis  (Obs.  7). 
Sometimes  hyp()Tiii:tical  Si-clauses  are  eniirely  omitted  and  merely 
implied  by  the  hypothetical  mood  of  the  principal  predicate  (Obs.  8). 

Obs.  1.  Relative  clauses  (especially  those  introduced  by  indefinite  relatives)  sometimes 
h^ive  the  force  and  the  moods  (»f  conditional  clauses,  as  :  (^uie  qui  sine  ccnnparaiioiie 
illorum  spectdret,  .satis  m^zwa  dice  ret  (=si  quis  sptctdrcl.  dicertt).  Cic.  Brut.  47.  — In  qua- 
cninqur  enim  ^ahquis)  plane  clauderet.  orator  esse  non  posset  {=si  quis  claaderet  etc.).  lb. 
b'J.—Jlirarttur  qui  tutu  c^rnertt  'Cos)  tarn  fene  genii  objectos.  Liv.  34.  9. 

Obs.  2.  The  participial  constructions  used  with  the  force  of  conditional  clauses  are 
either  ordinary  participles  airreeing  with  their  loirical  subject  in  the  thesis,  or  ablatives 
absolute,  as:  (^uie  vinientia  metuuntur  eadem,  afticiunt  aegritudine  instantia  (  =  qua3  me- 
tuuntiir  si  reniunf.  eadem  ;egritu(line  afticiunt  ihomines)  .i  instant).  Cic.  Tnsc.  4.  ti.  —  Cui 
coiicedeiidiim  est  ot-menti  (=4  qemit).  lb.  2.  7.— Qiu-e  creso-ntia  vitiosa  sunt,  eadem  sunt 
vitiO-a  naxci-ntia.  lb.  4,  IS.— Ilac  de  causa  coustitiierat,  sigua  inferentilius  resistere.  prior 
i)rfelio  non  laces-jere  (=resistere  hosfibus  si  signa  inferrtnt).  Cie-^.  B.  C.  1,S2.— Qu<»nam 
ille  modo  distractus  es.-iet.  taiuo  scelere  non  modo /)f->yVc/o,  sed  t-tiam  cogiidtop  (  =  si  tan- 
tum  scelus  non  modo  ])trt'ect'nn  sed  etiam  co/ifatuni  e<set).  Cic.  Dej.  .5. 15.— An  ego  in' 
hac  urbe  o^-e  possim  his pulsis  qn\  nie  hiijus  urbis  compuiein  leccruut  ?  (=si  hi  pulsi 
tint  q:ii).   lU.  Sest.  l>9. 

Ods.  3.  Subject-infinitives  have  the  force  of  hypothetical  clauses  when  the  principal 
predicate  is  oiie  of  the  potential  impersiuials  nienti(med  A\  4<i.  Ou?.  24.  a'-:  Si  homines 
ratiouem  a  deo  datam  in  fraudem  conveitunt,  non  dari  illam  qiiaiu  dari  humano  geueri 
vulius  fait  {=melius  fuisset  4  ratio  non  data  esset).  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  31, 78.  Comp.  the  exam- 
pies  quoted  li.  4«,  Ol'.s.  2t  foil. 

Obs.  4.  Particles,  adverbial  expressions,  and  other  members  of  the  sentence  frequently 


'*» 


734 


CONDITIONAL  CL;VUSES. 


EQUIVALENTS  AND   ELLIPSIS   OF   SI-CLAUSES. 


735 


pcforn.  the  office  of  a  «vpojm.kt^..  c|a.j^  in  wlud^^^  %X 

lypoih.Mical  sub  unctlv(^a*lt  aconipletehyi    m^^^^^^ 

pop.iU.  jiKlfX  q.ii  ^efHirutrn  ^^'*''^l''^i^l^^J''f!',Z^^^  aiuuLf,  idem  j.uii 


c  vitas  ulla  UUorein  imiumu»  i.  .«^.o  ^--'; '    .y"    -  7   -       .  ,  _.,„.,.  trif'tia/'/i^vn^  a»  innu 
aliiul  accessisset).  Liv.4o,-2o.-bu'o  C  ^-'^^f^^"^^./.'  '     ,''^„  uj  eV  II)  Plane.  :i9  -Placvluvi 

Saev«  .ervo,  qut  occldii   ba  urul      m  1.»^  li,.manns 


ScievsiJ  servo,  qui  occiuil  .^'"""^''^      "' //''[V;  nui    ccl.lit  Satiirnf.iuiu,  eques  Il<)mann> 
fuL^-'et).  Cic.IUb.Pinxl.il.,— I  auurM)ciu<>m  uberrlmi,  et  pax  dm 


7/«inicc //c#fo[.»/.  v.-M  ■•; .^/ /  :_'»i;       noiwiiin  »'s;    hiec  le"a'i<»  talis  inairiuiin  i>iacn- 

rtl^^su^  ma-mim  iwicularn  '^''f  <  ^.T^l- •;PJ^^'^;"V^^^  o;i  _SonK'tinu':*  adverbs 

it/m  ..v/,  et  esset^etiavi^  T?':  ^m^^Js  wl     e  ib.^hy^^^^^  takes  ,he  place 

take  the  place  of  a  hypotli.^tical  ^^;;^  ;;/;'. V./corm    en  Q    Ilorti-nsio  dUimlartm  (  =  1 
;;^.Sld^E'ir:Sy  mS^^'l^^mM^^^Ah^  in  person).  Cic  L.M.... 

"oBs.  5 «:;  b^ion^s  L  particle  -^--tjj.^i^^^-^-./^S'iH.iKrs;;;:; 

or  single  members  of  a  >^•'"t^'M^'^,P  ^^^;-;';;       ^  "e  be  «m  times  by  the  Auc- 

is  first  used  by  Terence  (in  =1  *>"f;l^  l'=  r'';f,  ;  morrfmi  umt  V  h^  Livv  (not  in  Ciesar), 
TOH  ad  IIKKENN.   and  by  ^''^'^'^  •';;^V  [J  "^^ 

and  the  writers  of  the  silver  a-e     If  '"t.ro(liicin^  a  co  upiY»^  represent  in-  an  ar- 

^es  both  the  foree.of  a  00^.  ;m«/^.7  c^^^^^^^^^  „,Hod  be- 

fn-  always  conv.Mtible  into  a  ^-"^'Ht^  ona  en  i  v  '^^ ;  ;^^'^,f;^/  /,^,^  ,^„  jar.nm.  imilto 
Y,roieef>m>lerem^'Mv^nmiMn;  r^''']l^^f^y\l\l^^^^^^^^  \  would  not  lend  you  an 

oboliis;  mucfi  ^'^•''•\  ^^'*V' ^^  I;.  1  Ln  ^^^^^  b  ii'tiii-nislied:  1)  The  akgumentlm 
constructions  of  this  k„,d  three  ^^\\;  f  ^^f  '  ":  ,,  \,  ,/  .  1"  ,,,  n  etc.  .  which  is  n-ularly 
A  M.uoKH.  contained  in  l»'^\  P''^'^^'^^'";  J  f'      ';*''     .^  predi'  ate  in  tli<"  indicative 

ner;ance  or  virtual  y  so  j^^^l^/^^y -"  ^f  ^^V^'^J  i^^'i^ii.,?  Ivhi.-h  n-p-vsents  th.  pr.- 
or  subjunctive— -^)  ^  "^^''  ,'^  ^/ ^•//,     ic  «/i/  /h^  ca<te)  at  the  same  iime  implyin'.^ 

cedin-'  statement  as  a  S.-clause  1««;'^.  ,^  .f,  V  Zf^^?umT%nvch  l..<s  can  it  be  the  case 
that  the  subse(inent  statement  is  %Xl       oux^^^^^  propositi..!»  introduce  by  »6- 

that  elc.).-3)  Th.«  coNcMfsio  ad  ^  .^^  ".  ^,^''  f  ^.  ^.^\;"  f  '^..'//.^^  n„n-reaiitv>,  with  a  condi- 
dum.  which  is  either  a  l'y.l>'>t»"'V''''V  v/  n^  Vr  i       to  oV^   4         \n  ore  ralvlv)  a  potenthU 

assertion.  The  predicate  ol  the  ^  "V/'Vi  .h.-  i  -  ui.dl  rst  .  ,,!  is  in  tne  impkufect,  but 
the  subjunctive    whn-h  il  ;' hn>^^^^^^^^^  If  it  is  merely 

may  also  be  in  the  present,  accnlu  i;  ^  '^/"'^  *  '/  ^  ,i,„K-ti  v.-  Ekami-ues.  1.  The  con- 
a  />^'-'/V^^.---^t'on,  the  predicate^  sM^  ^''i£;^^U^^"am^ur,  numquam  sufT.rre  eji.s 
clu-ion  bt-uii,'  a  thesis  op  ^"^-?*'''*''7^  •,  ^„i^  ,);*  '  ^^  ,„iilto  minus  tu  iHist^ix.  t'i  an.a- 
ptusqueat ;  ne^lum  V.p<^i^  ^^>^tr^^:^^  i,„„iWns  rebuH 

nussU).  Ter.  H^'au.  3.  l,4i  -hi  cum  nniti  ni-    >um  ,antuhs  viribns  co«a- 


sum 

p:irariOrcs  venTrent  ;  ned>j>n  ""P^^^m  orbis  tcrr^^^^^^^^^  ^^,^^.  ^  ,,,„^. 

're.t'<ri  =  ^x  v.l  C'l  "\fl/n  turns  tarn  ex.i^us^c^^^^^^^^^^^  ,  ansferre.  Ai.et.  Her. 

lis  copiis  vemrenf,  si  in  aninu^  ^''^''^'  '»' »  'n    J     ec  O  M  t^llus  vim  tribui.iciam  susti- 

mari  et  via  facile  sit,  abesse  ab  injuria  temporis  (-^i  in  tccti*  iri„u.  uo 


1 


viulfo  minus  injiiriam  efurjias  si  in  mari  nariges).  Ib.Fam.  16.  8,3.— SingulSris  homo 
j)rivfltns  vix  facile  sesc  rejjionibus  officii  ma<;nis  lortanis  et  copiis  continet :  nedum  isti 
ab  liiillo  electi  colOni,  Capme,  in  domicilii»  superbise.  collocati,  non  statini  conguisituri 
^i/^/ aliqiiid  sceieris  et  tla<;iiii  (=«  VaytuiE  coUocentur).  lb.  Aj,'r.  2,  85.— Quippe  secunda 
n-s  >apiriiiium  animos  raiTL!:aiit  (=:ne  sapienios  qiiidem  fortanam  ferre  possuiit).  nedum 
illi  c.MTUptis  moribus  victoriaj  temperdrent  (i.  e.  si  occasio  eis  oblaia  esset  victoria  abu- 
tendi).  Sail.  Cat.  11, 8.— Ke<rii  we  ex  medio  quidem  cornua  sua  couspicere  potermt;  ne- 
duia  extremi  inter  se  compicertniur.  Liv.  37,  41.  Com  p.  lb.  28.  40  ;  llor.  A.  P.  «3  ;  Prop. 
1, 1>.  31.— 2.  Ti  e  conclusion  bein;?  potential  :  Albam  nnde  ipsi  oriundi  erant  e  fiinda- 
nicntis  proruerunt  (  =  .\ll)ie  non  pepercemiit)  :  ncd'ini  eos  Capuie  par>flro8  credam  (much 
less  could  1  btlifiv-).  Liv.  2t),  13. — Attonitu»  inopinSto  malo  vix  quid  ol)jicer6nir  intelli- 
<rere  potui ;  nedum  satis  xciam  qiiomodo  me  tuear.  lb.  40. 15.— Nee  tamen  Epaminondie 
permitlerSmus,  ne  si  extra  judicium  qiiidera  esset,  nt  is  nobis  sentenfi;im  legis  iiiierpre- 
taretnr,  ?uduin  nunc  ismm  patidmur.  quum  praesto  lex  sit,  Cic.  Inv.  1,  39.  See  Liv.  26.  2ti. 

Obs.  r».  In  Livy  and  the  writers  of  the  silver  age  (once  or  twice  also  in  Cicero)  nedum 
connects  two  single  membeh--  of  the  same  sentence,  the  firsfof  the  two  members  con- 
t.iininira  ncL'ation.  as:  In  Sicilia  re<rnum  ad  Ilieronymiim  translatum.  ^wcrum  rixdum 
libenatem.  nedum  dominatiOnem  modice  latQrum  (a  boy  who  would  hfirdly  brook  free- 
dom, much  less  a  throne).  Liv.  24, 4.— In  arcem,  qu;e  rix  capere,  7?fd?/m  tu6ri,  tantara 
niultiiudinem  posset.  lb.  3«j,24.— Quin  voces  quoque  aiidltas  esse,  OEqre  inermem  taiitam 
miiltitiidiiiem.«fe</M/rtarmatim,  sustinCri  posse.  lb.  6, 7.— T7xclamOrem,  w^rfi/m  impetnm, 
Siiesst'tani  tlll6n^  lb.  34.  20,  7. — Nulla  simulacra  urbibus  suis,  nedum  templis,  siiiunt, 
Tac.  Hist.  5. 5.— Virtus  sic  contra  (;asus  indflrat  ut  nee  incliliari,  nedum  vinci,  pos^it.  Sen. 
Coiist.5.— Quinctiiis,  quem  armdrum  etiam  pro  patria  satietas  teneret  (  =  qui  arma  pro 
patria  sumere  jtfUlet),  nedum  adversus  patriam.  Liv.7, 40.— Someiimes  the  sentence  to 
which  nedum  refers  has  the  form  of  a  question,  rirtually  nesaiive,  in  which  instance  it 
cannot  properly  be  rendered  'much  less',  as:  quid  autem  tuto  culquara,  nedum  sum- 
mam  rempiiblicam  permit  ti,  si  ratio  non  sit  reddenda  ?  If  no  account  is  to  be  rendered, 
nothing  can  be  >afely  entrusted  to  anyone,  and  certainly  not  the  government  of  the  re- 
public. Liv.  ;i8, 50.— Sometimes  (rarely)  the  member  preceding  nedum  contains  no  nega- 
tion, in  which  instance  nedum  has  the  force  of  '  much  more  ',  as  :  Quae  vel  socios,  nedutn 
hostes  vlctos,  tcTrCre  jw^.-^ent ;  Which  might  tcriily  even  allies,  much  more  a  deleated 
enemy.  Liv.  45.  21J.— AdiiLuinues  etiam  victis  Macedonibus  graves,  nedum  victoribus. 
lb.  !>,  18.  Coinp.  'I'ac.  An.  13,  20.  Sometimes,  in  this  instance,  nedum  is  used  with  the  force 
of  ne  dicam  (see  p.  «i:i8,  Obs.  3),  as  :  Non  voco  autem  sapientem  supra  quem  quidquam 
est,  nedu/n  voliipias  ;  I  do  not  call  him  a  wise  man  a]>ove  whom  there  is  anything  (wlio 
is  subservient  to  anything),  to  say  nothing  of  pleasure  (  =much  less  do  I  call  him  wise 
who  i,s  subservient  to  pleasure).  Sen.  V.  li.  11.  In  the  passage  Cic.  Fam.  7.  28. 1.  quoted 
j).  G3S,  Oks.  3,  nedum  is  yeneraily  taken  lor  ne  dica?n,  but  it  may  al?obe  rendered  'much 
less  \  ilie  negatiiMi  l)eiiig  implied  in  the  comparative  member  '  quam  tola  Pelojmuiesus  ^ 
(  =:not  the  whole  Pelopi>iiiie>us  can  be  onipared  with  Home,  much  less  Patne)*. 

Sometimes  (rarely)  nedum  coordinates  a  clause  (eiiher  an  Ut-c!ause,  or  a  Si-clause):  Ne 
voce  qnidem  incommoda.  nedum  ut  ulla  vi-^  fieiet.  i>auiatim  permulcendo  tractandoque 
mansueleceraiit  j>lehem  (  =nedum  ita  ut  iIk  fieret,  much  less  by  ajtplying  any  violence). 
Liv.3, '.l,(i.  —  CnncGilaiit  niilii  omiics  oporiet.  factarum  alicpiaiHlo  virum  bonum  ut 
mendacium  dicai,  et  qnidem  nonnnmqtiam  levioribus  causis.  nedum  n  ab  homine  «icci- 
dendo  i.'ra>saior  urertendus  nt  (=and  much  more  so  if  a  desperado  is  to  be  prevented  from 
coMimitting  a  murder).  Quint.  12, 1,  3.S.— In  the  j)assage  Tac.  Dial.  10.  '  ?/6(/'7m  m^  per  tot 
l)roviiKias  innotesCat',  nedum  is  a  conjecture  for  the  senseless  '7nedium\ 

Obs.  7.  Two  propositions  may  be  asyndetically  coordinated,  so  that  the  first  of  the  two 
has  the  force  of  a  conditional  clau>e.  and  the  subsequent  one  that  of  its  thesis.  The 
luoctdsof  the  two  propositions,  in  this  construction,  are  the  same  as  if  the  conditional  con- 
junction had_beeiM3xpress]y  added,  as:  Id  quod  scis  prodesl,  nihil  id  quod  nescis,6>6e.'?i.^ 


*  There  are  traces  which  seem  to  indicate  that  nedum  was  colloquially  used  in  place 
of  *  non  modo'.  Put  the  reading  in  the  two  passages  where  this  usaire  seems  to  occur, 
is  very  doubtlnl  :  Tu  quoniam  (^nartana  cares,  et  nedum  morbuin  removisti.  sed  etiam 
gravedincin,  te  vegetem  nobis  in  CJnecia  siste  (Since  you  are  free  from  the  quartan 
fever,  and  have  removed  not  only  your  sickness,  but  even  indisposition,  present  yourself 
hale  in  Greece,  Cic.  Att.  It),  Ki.  Here  the  Cod.  Mediceiis,  which  is  the  best  manuscript 
authority  for  the  letters  to  Atticus,  read.s  novum  instead  of  nedum,  and  others  have  con- 
jectured 'non  modo\  Some  render  "vedum'  by  "not  to  say\  which  would  be  mean- 
ingless in  this  |>assage.— A^t/^/^>i  hominum  humilium.  ut  nos  sumus,  sed  etiam  amplissi- 
mOrum  virorum  con>ilia  ex  eventn  prol)ari  solent.  Cic  Att,  9.  7  ^.  Here  nedNm  is  a 
conjecture,  the  codex  Mediceus  exhibiting  'tneirm\  which  is  senseless.  If  Cicero  wrote 
'■nedum\  it  lias  eiiher  the  meaning  "not  oidy\  or  the  two  members  must  be  reversed 
(  =^vel  amplissimOrum  virorum,  ne  dicam  humilium,  consilia). 


730 


C0N1)ITI0N.\L   CLAUSES. 


COORDINATION  OP  CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


737 


nior  fui--evide[lrr.  !»>■  ^  err.  2.  3,  2 -\  nn    o^''^^^^^  hvpo.luMual  con.tniclu.n^  wit  i 

a  pn..eut  .uhjuuctivc  '}^f:i!l"i;i'^^^^^^^^  u  nun  1  fv  q.ndc.n  di^MUua  .najur.  a luiuo 

iu-.)ti()putet?  ^H^^ar.5,2..W.-^o  in  n>c  njP'^^^^^^  ,,„vver).  in  loro  sallant. 

Ib"()tV.3.  1«...-With  l^ypotl.et.ca!  plnperfc^^   .  V  ^  /'^^^^^-  acri<n.sef  i  ^if  e.ther  ot 

t^ilinm  certo  uon  ^/<;;^/i.s.s-^<.  p-.^    \^  ;^„,.   .'    "vo  had  happened \  accordi..- to  Ob.*.  1), 
thetwohadhappe.ud;  or'uW^^je  f^^^  ^1/  ^„^  t^,„  proposition,  cmi- 

member  of  the  clause  except  by  the  ^^y\'''  ^^^^^^^^^^^^  iTo.n  the  c<.nuecti(>n, 

Uiis  instance  the  content,  of  t»ie  chui.e      uler.tm^^^^  ^^^^.,^^  lallere  (i   6.  .i 

L:  Nam  ilia  amphibolia  q.ue  Cro^s  ni  decx  it  ncI^^^^^^^^  cullilta  e^sent.  quod  vjx 

tale  oraculum  accepis.et)  Cic.  ^'^ji:  ;••-  /^"Ji\,ft^f,uo  i  Kc.nulni  vix  ausi  essent,  st  in 
lionu-lnus  toties  victor  auchref,  »  'J-\,5^"";^,  ^t,'  nnm^  qtio>*  l»'<^'lio  elVu-eraut  «pios 
Sam..itiiim   loco  f>ns,enf).  Liv,  10, -U-M^^^^  <^'r- V^'  "  "^' 

Cie.ar  fortas.e  serms^et  (x.  e.  ^ '  j  /^  '  f  ^^If  ^'.'^Vj.S  \i.  e.  «  rohrU^eO.  lb.  Brut.  41  - 
29.-Atque  hand  ^'Cio  an  par  1'"  ; 't'^    '^  '7c-aa  c^^^^  tanta  ne.putia  ^^^^>'^^l^'!^ 

Non  modo  unTu8  P^^t'^^^^iV' 'U^•1^  o-  romn  n  H^^^^^^^^^  44.  ItVJ  ;  7f,.-2(i3:  Orat.  3(»,  10b  ;  Or. 
issef  (i.  e.  .i  hal,.i^),  l^.}y^-  ?dV,^"      al  Mib  unetlves  nu.n.io,Ved  p.  3T^Ons.  4   a.: 


n'ed  p.  3T!>, 
dixerit. 


Ons.  4,  a."»: 


i.sef  (i.  e.  .si  hab'um'O.  i».  '  "  '  th  /;mte     iUVuh   in(tives  mention' 

esseaquam.  lb.  Ofl.  3, -^^.-Ca  Quid  «uaisrc^^^^^^  .arripere.^  piUri  (  =y<^" 

VI   COOUmXATlON  OF  CONDITIONAL  CL.VLSES. 
Ran  40.  The  coo.-.linatio,.  of  cmlUional  clauses  if^^l^^^l^^^:^ 

coonlinatioii  of  co.ubt.onal  P''"-)"^'^'    ^ ''  ^Xrrs  tivc  c  ninncUon  :  a.ul 
„,a,l.  by  «•  non.  or  ''.'""'''''■.^yi  'l  " '^^  ,f,t    ''Trm      's^  <-„or- 

I         ifof  two  co„,V,,ion:n  p,.r,o,U.  a,U.,.r.,.|vHy  co<^^^^^^^^ 

Soe  O,^^  2)  o^  si  mln,.^  U  used  in  this  «"Stance  ^^;.  ^^e  O'  e  ronim.  Ci'-.  Fin.  5.2S.- 
beatusmmerit;  .si  mala  f.on  sunt,  -If  f  *>'"'!:;,[;  ,'      /;',  ;   «c  ..-is.  i-noscam.  lb.  Fam. 

ISlI^^ri.  id  quod  o^''--^^ '";^f ';;;!;;J;^^^"  1^^  ^   '"u^^  /i^;:  »'abes.  ne  tu  qu  - 

K  iq  -2  -Si  habes  quod  lupu-iit.  ne(iui  u>p<n  w«..  ..  .       .  j^  almost  a  wav.  used  if 

den  pereipis.  lb.  Ac.  2,  ^«l.-Ni  mu...  }''^>'"'-  ';!^::,;/' ,i'!^cCpi  .ns  aceui  n  '  posset  ;  si 
the  predicate  o!  the  netrat.ive  <"  ^;f  J^  '^//'''^  ^''^'^2. -iV  J    i^  nccur.am  :   sin 

f,nn>l<<  (=si  tion  posset),  t'xlut  as  facere  ^^'^f  ;,?'„,,,,,  veniam,  quam  pet..,  dederit, 
miuNs.  neutiquain  neccsf^e  erit.  tic.  ^^  -^;  •^'. •,;•,,,:;/,/  ,,,.  ip.o.  lb.  Att.i».  14,  l.-A  c-.m- 
u  ar  illTus  cdndilione;  si  "'^"^- 'l^l^^.^Vr/he      <    con^  <lanse  \s  /..//^//ir.,  while 

mon  i)redicate  may  a  so  l>^V'^tV  Vn  tVic  V//i  //'"  "  •'^c-d.  as  :  Ttrum  cetera  iM.m.na 
the  s<!rond  is  afllrmative.  In  tin*  1"-»«";'^^  nnom<  do  tabulas  conf.cis  ?  Si  t-fiarn  (but 
in  codicem  di-esta  »>abes  an  non  ?    A    o«   q^^^^^^^^^  cic.  Rose.  Com.  3. 

it  you  have),  quamobrem  hoc  nomen    u  «'  ^^'^:     '«  '  '.    ^,i,,,,y  eof.rdinated:  1)  If  the 
Obs.2.  iVTsimaybe  used  i"/.<>n'l>"7.^:i  l^fj^'  :;"*iVJ\^^  .^^^^  IMt.  deleStur 

^S4^^<^^^rJi;r^aSr  ^^it  '^S!:-^^  ^elnCS^uJ  vincet.   Cic.  Att.  10,  T.  1.- 


Bellum  comparat  snis  civibns,  exltiabile  nisi  vicerit,  calamitGs^um  eiianisi  vicerit.  lb. 
10.  4,  3.  Ct»inp.  lb.  Clu.  6,  18.— 2)  If  the  conditional  clauses  have  diffi-rtht  subjects,  as  : 
Afffvu/n  (the  one)  si  fit,  intolerabile  vitium  cht :  alteram  (the  other)  nisi  lit,  dissipata  et 
ineuita  est  oratio.  Cic.  Orat.  m,  220.  [  I'he  i>assa-,'e:  Si  exerceas  nientem,  conteniur; 
ni^i  exerceas,  rubisinem  contraliil.  Fi-^m.  Cat.  Mor.  (Geil.  11,  2,  2)  is  mi!^quoted  iu 
Allen's  Lat.  Gr.  p.  ITl.    Iu  all  tuc  texts  stands  si  nou.] 

Obs.  3.  If  a  conditional  period  is  opposed  to  a  precedinjr  conditional  period,  the  clanse 
bcin"  ajfirmative,  Xhe  second  clause  may  he  introduced  hy  si.  or  si  autem,  si  vero.a^: 
Pouia  ex  arboribuH,  «  crudaeunt.  vi  avelluntur,  si  mafura,  decidunt.  Cic.  Sen.  19,71. 
But  «'cnerally  the  second  clause,  in  this  instance,  is  introduced  by  sin,  sin  antem,  or  sin 
rero1.i\^tt  hy  sfd  sin),  which  form  is  also  (sometimes)  applied  if  the  clause  is  ne«rative, 
as:  Ilunc  inihi  tiinorem  eripe;  si  est  veras,  ne  oppfi/nar:  sin/alsus,  ut  timere  desinam. 
Cic.  Cat  1  7, 18.— llli  de  retinendis  suis  fortflnis  .si  eriint  seeundie,  ^^/i  a'//*^m  adversae, 
de  periculo  commonendi  erunt.  lb.  T.  O.  27,  m.—Si  liberari  mortis  inetu  possnmus,  id 
a-'Smus;  sin  id  mm  potest,  nunc,  si  videtur,  hoc  (a«,'amus)  etc.  lb.  Tusc.  1,  11,  23.— 
ifefendet  te  si  poteiit;  stJi  id  minifs  poterit,  iiej^abit.  lb.  Inv.  2,29.— Sometimes  Sm- 
C'au-es  are  used  if  the  precediiii;  clause  \» rirt milt i/  conditional,  especially  if  it  is  intro- 
duced bv  an  indefinite  relative,  as:  Qnicqitid  statueris,  te  niihi  amlcnm,  shi  id  quod 
opto,  ctiam  amicissimum  judicilbo.  Cic.  Fam.  5, 19.  2.~/Vr.s'?«i(/6C  nti  Jutrurtham  maj?i- 
vifi  (=if  possible)  vivum,  sin  id  parum  procedat,  necatum  sibi  iradereut.  Sail.  Jug.  4t),  4. 

Obs.  4.  A  PIS.JUNCTIVE  coordination  of  conditional  jHriods  U  used  to  represent  two  or 
more  conditions  as  ai.teukatives.  for  each  of  w  inch  a  diff"erent  consequence  is  asserted, 
so  that  each  of  the  clauses  has  a  diferent  thesis.  Each  of  the  conditional  clauses  (which 
are  always  clauses  of  doubtful  reali'ii/)  is  introduced  by  sive  (sea),  or  the  one  by  sire,  and 
the  other  by  si.  Generallvthis  method  of  coordination  is  contrary  to  the  Euirlish  idiom, 
which  either  requires  a  clianire  of  the  (/i.<;/'//«'^ir^  into  an  adversative  coordination  (iu 
which  instance  the  idea  of  di.«junctioii  issacriticed),  or  transforms  the  condiiional  clauses 
intodisjunctivepropositionsindependentof  the  coordinated  theses,  as:  Eis  ,stre  creditur, 
creditnr  hoc  ipsum  quod  nos  artruimus;  «re  fides  non  habttur.  de  adversani  testium  fide 
dero"atur.  Cic.  Ciec.  1,  3;  =  1)  If  these  are  believed  (by  the  judge»,  the  very  thing  is 
belicA-ed  which  we  charge;  but  (or?)  if  no  faith  is  jdaced  in  (hem,  we  weaken  the  trust- 
worthiness of  the  adversary's  wit  nesses.  2)  These  are  either  btlit-Ttd  or  not ;  in  the  former 
instance  the  very  thin<;  is  believed  etc. :  in  tfie  latter  instance  we  weaken  etc.— 6"ir<'  enini 
ad  .«apieniiam  i.ervenlri  potest,  non  j.aranda  nobis  solum  ea,  sed  fruenda  etiam  sapientia 
est  •  sive  hoe  ditlicile  est,  tainen  nee  modus  est  ullus  investigaudi  veri,  nee  etc.  lb.  1,  1,3. 
—Nam  sire  timuit,  quid  ignavins?  sive  ineliorem  suam  causam  illOrum  ctede  fore 
pni.lvit.quid  injusiius?  lb.'  Att.  \<,\),Z.—Sni  vicit.  ferociter  instat  viciis  ;  stu  victns  est, 
instaurat 'um  victorilms  ceriSmen.  Liv.  27, 14.  Comp.  lb.  ;if>,  5;  Cic.  Tusc.  1, 1^.42;  tin. 
1  <j  20  —Disjunctive  conditional  clauses  of  this  kind  regularly  have  their  predicates  in 
the  indicative.  But  thev  mav  take  a  subjunctive  either  according  to  the  general  rules 
(if  subolilicpie  etc.),  or  according  to  the  rules  on  conditional  clauses  of  doubtful  reality 
(p  709,  Obs.  11.  foil.),  as  :  Sive  enim  ZenOnem  sequare.  magnum  est  efticere  utquis  intelli- 
gat  etc.:  si  vero  Academiam  jiersequamur,  quam  erit  acQie  explicanda  nobis!  Cic.  Ac.  1, 
2.7.  Tlei-e  a  subjunctive  is  used  in  the  first  clause,  because  the  predicate  is  in  tne 
second  person  denot in ir  an  indefinite  person;  the  second  clause  takes  a  subjunctive  of 
improbability,  the  speaker  having  declared  before,  that  he  would  probably  not  com- 
ment on  these  subjects. 

Obs.  5.  If  merely  the  conditional  clausks  are  disjunctively  coordinated,  each  of  the 
clauses  referriip' to  the  same  thesis,  thev  are  introduced  by  ihe  same  conjunctions  (sive.. . 
j!/r6  t/c  )  as  wheii  whole  periods  are  coordinated;  but  the  conjunctions  are,  in  this  in- 
stance, rendered  by  '  whether. .  .or  \  or  by  '  be  it  that. .  .or  that '  (  =  '  H  the  one  alternative 
is  true,  the  thesis  holds  good;  if  the  other  is  true,  the  thesis  holds  good  likewise  ). 
The  moods  of  these  clauses  (bein<j:  always  of  doubtful  reality)  is  regularly  the  indica- 
TiVK  The  j.redicate  of  the  disjunctive  clauses  may  be  either  dift'erent  for  each  clause, 
or  common  to  all,  as  :  Veniet  tempus,  et  quidein  celeriter,  sire  retractdbis.  sive  proj)er(i- 
bvi  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  :W.— Ex  isto  moibt) convalesces,  sive adhibueris  medicnm,  sive  non  adtii- 
bii>ris.  ib.  Fat.  13.— .S're-  hTc  confictum  est,  ut  appSret,  sive  rnissvm  domo  est,  ut  dicitur, 
commovebor.  Ib.  Flacc.  16.— Hoc  loco  libentissime  utor,  m'<?  quid  mecum  ipse  cof/ito, 
sive  aliquid  scrif^o  aut  It-r/o.  lb.  Leg.  2, 1.— CenturiOnes,  sen  vere  (piam  habuerant  opiniO- 
nem  perferunt  sive  eiiam  puribus  Vari  serviunt,  confirmant  totlus  exercitus  animos  ali- 
CnosesseaCuiiOne.  C;es.  B.  C.  2,27.— Probabile  est  quod  fere  solet  fieri.  *iiy  id  falsuin 
est.  sive  verum.  Cic.  Inv.  1,  29.-»-»S'av  ilia  vestis  mutatio  ad  liictuin  ipsOrum,  sive  ad  depre- 
canduni  valibat,  quis  umqiiam  tam  crudelis  fuit  qui  prohibCret  quemquain  mairgre  ?  Ib. 
Sest.  14  — Superstitio  instat  et  uriret,  et  quo  te  cunque  verteris,  persequitur,  sive  tu  vatem, 
sive  tu  omen  audieris,  sive  immoldris,  sire  avem  aspe^reris,  si  Chaldanim.  si  haruspicem 
videris,  si  fulsent  etc.  lb.Div.2,72.  Comp.  Cic.  Brut.  72, 251 ;  Orat.  G8, 228;  Coec.31,90; 


738 


CONDIllONAL   CLAUSES. 


T  iv  4  9  -The  «tiMuncfire  occurs  in  these  clauses  for  the  same  reasons  as  in  thcflisjunc- 
[i^t;SrdSion'^>rwh;^e  per.od.  a)B..  4),  as  :  QnH.Uo  esse  ..t.us  chxOr.nU  u^^^^ 
rr\itt..re  le.'-ltos  .sw  (iisceutfire,  .n>v<  ro-nre  seiiatun»  7n(illei>t.  Ij\.  .15.  .U-P.  >tn  proimis 

S'e  .ti  locus  e.set.    Il..:^»,l  (s..bjunctive  of  cont.nu-eut  •y'7"i"^,X^' 'r./J^£-,; f,  ,^ 
c<  miKire:  Cato.  ^^  causa  orauda  exM,  eloquenti^^simu^  uat    ^*^/ •^;\'^"   -."  ,;,V,;  ^^^^^ 
t  e   diovnaric  expres.iou  -r.lU  »o/if '  (u.ay  he  wish  it  or  "*>'^/^»;^''^i',^'7 ':   i        •  •  a"  * 
steal  of  ^nvevelit,nve  uolit\  hein-  suh  unctives  «ccordn.- to  p.  «1*^' V»^v  »H  4' 
Ilnnc  it^a  lu..diltum  necesse  e.t,  vtlit  nolif,  seqiuTtur  hilarita«  cont.uua.  ben.  \  .  B.  4 
OBs  (5    Verv  frenuontly  nre.  ..Hre  disjunctively  coordinates  That-clauses  causal  ami 

/•,>•. iniiptioim  Sire  in  the  constructions  mentioned  Ob».  4  and  .>,  lias  ini  '"'^^^."' .,,* 
\   Pr   TTw^\^^^^^  conjunction,  the  coordination  hein-  made  by  the 

{ nTrireii^rlmn  ri«  spe  Mintis  i/.ii'/r/j,  prima  niicie  e  cabins  i-gre«i  ad  Khcniim  c  m- 
Ob" in,""  b.  S"  .i   .™    »-/«»a  vctri.  Liv.  U.  IS.-Ouinque  o.n.ilMO   "^■"■"t  <i;;    »W'^.    " 

md^ni"!S^ri^^i'^uaL  ab  uumrs  p.ur.o,.u,  cuu.id«rire  pnucp.um,  rcpcr,.mu« 

etc.  Cic.Inv.  1,1.  ^      „   ,•     »    *i,„  ci 

OBs  7    Antedassiral  is  the  use  of  dve=rel  si  fo  that  ?vZ  does  not  conrdinate  the  5i. 

c/^":  buMlli'^A^.i^  on  which  the  ^-<^^-^ ^^ ^^Xltl^  "In  cri^I^Sc^rSSJe^:^ 


^sp<,n-u,n  '  te7f;oS;5K  ^n^fe  inlrSJ/cJS.a:  rcJd;>  q  ui   um  '-»-m  judicem  ;.e^oU, 

'=';/1t  JJ  'as^''?ll,fd';.od^^^^^       '  .ive  Hire  '^  irrideut    Cic.  C>c-.  2.3  .according  to  a  very 
probable  conjecture,  the  manuscripts  having  the  senseless  ^  uibe  ). 
VII    PVRTICULAU    USAGE    OF    CONDITIONAL    CONJUNC- 

TIONS   AND   CLAUSES. 
Rem  50    There  are  several  idiomatic  usages  of  the  coiulitional  con- 
junctions nisi  and  *i,  and  conventional  usa-es  in  regarc    ^'^'^^^^^ 
ofconditi.mal  clauses,  whicli  more  or  less  deviate  trom  the  English  idiom. 
Or^  1    XUi  rnever  id)  is  often  used  with  coordinatinc;  force,  to  kestiuct  a  preceding 
or'^^ubs.q.ferA   esp'iallV  negative,  .taten.ent,rep,.^ 

^^:^^.S:tr£^  ;;^/;;tStKes^s:'S!  5r-;^p!^iss:i:ria 

abLr^viat?d  clauses  (Uks.  4) ;  4)  single  members  of  a  «eutcnce  (Ons.  5-b). 

Or«  2   The  sfntences  introduced  by  nUi  have  sometimes  the  value  of  independent  seu- 
teS,beTn^Teirh^  to  the  preceding  Bubsequcut  Beutcuce  m  the  logical 


rARTICULAR  USAGE  OF  CONDITIONAL  CONJUNCTIONS.      739 

relation  of  a  condition  to  its  thesis.  In  this  instance  nisi  has  an  AnvEnsATivE  and  re- 
etrictiui.'  force,  similar  to  the  cocirdinatiiifr  rjvamquam  (p.  <i9S,  Obs.  VI),  by  which  it  may 
beolieii  replaced,  beintj  generally  rendered  by  'hoicev€r\  or  '  buV.  If  so  used,  it  is 
generally  connected  with  tainen.  the  jjrecediiig  sentence  which  is  restricted  by  it  (and 
which  sometimes  is  underi<tooil)  being  ner/ative.  The  proposition  thus  introduced  by 
nUi  «>r  nisi  tiwien^  since  it  is  an  independent  sentence,  has  its  predicate  always  in  the 
indicative,  as  :  (^iiid  est  quod  C'apitOnem  })rimum  scire  voluerit?  Ne^eio.  vin  hoc  video, 
CapitOtiem  in  his  Ijonis  esse  sociiim  ;  I  do  not  know  ;  but  Oioiverer)  this  I  see  that  Capito 
is  his  partner  in  this  property.  Cic.  It.  A.  .'i.5.— I)e  re  w?7it/ possum  judicjlre  ;  nin  illud 
mihi  certe  jtersiiadeo,  te,  talem  virum,  nihil  temerc  fecisee.  lU.  Fam.  13, 73, 2.— iViAt/ 
niihi  gratins  facere  potes.  nif^i  tamen  id  eAt  gratissimum,  si,  qua»  tibi  maudavi,  confece- 
riu.  lb.  Fam.  5, 14.  — Kciiiidim  iiec  cur  ille  tantopere  conteiidat  video,  nee  cur  tu  repug- 
nes.  nisi  ttnnen  niiilto  minus  tibi  concOdi  ]K)t€st  quam  illi,  laborjlre  sine  causa  (  =nisi 
tamen  hoc  video,  multo  minus  tibi  concGdi  jwsse  etc.  ;  But  so  much  I  see  that  it  can  be 
much  les-»  conceded  to  you  than  to  hiin,  to  labor  without  a  cause).  lb.  Fam.  13, 1.4. — 
Marius  pudOre  magis  quam  malo  exercitum  coercCbat,  quod  multi  per  ambitiOnem  fieri 
ajgl)  lilt,  pars,  quod  a  i)ueritia  consiiCiam  duritiam  volnptati  habuisset  :  ni^i  tamen  res- 
jiublica  pariter  ac  stvvissuiiio  imperio  bene  atque  decOre  rjesta ;  However  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  a; my  »*as  irood  and  respectable,  the  same  as  it  would  have  been  under  the 
severest  command.  Sail.  Jug.  100.  [Here  we  may  supply  as  a  connecting  link  '■nescio 
quo  jure  hcec  dicantur,  nisi  hoc  tamen  scio  rempublicam  etc.';  //iyi^be  this  as  it  ma  3*]. 

Obs.  3.  Frequently  nisi,  without  a  predicate  of  its  own,  connects  a  relative,  temporal 
or  any  other  clause  with  a  nrevious  negative  sentence,  so  that  it  merely  restricts  the 
negation  (  =not  except,  notning  but),  non...nisi  being  frequently  equivalent  to  'only'. 
In  such  con^tructions  nisi  behmgs  to  a  principal  sentence  vnderstood,  on  which  the 
clause  is  made  d  •pendent.  Examples.  1.  Relative  clauses  :  Dicere  bene  nemo  potest 
nisi  qui  i>rudenter  intelligit:  iW>w/y  can  speak  well  but  (except)  he  who  intelligently 
uiKierstaiids  (what  he  says).  Cic.  Brut.  <i,  23  (  =nin  hie  dicere  jtotest  qvi  eic). — Adversus 
qm»d  ego  nihil  dictQrus  sum,  nisi  (i.  e.  id  dictiirus  swn)  quod  a  vobis  didici.  Liv.  21. 18. — 
Semo  irascendo  lit  fortior,  nisi  q}ii  fortis  sine  ira  non  esset.  Sen.  Ira.  1,  Vi.—  Quis  morta- 
lium.  nisi  ci  nullum  supere^t  hominis  vestigium,  per  diem  iioctemque  tiiiiiari  velit  ? 
]b.  Brev.  V.  5.— 2.  Infinitive  clauses:  De  pneiOre  nihii  dicam  alintl,  «i^i  eaderti  evm 
titnuisse  quam  ceteros.  Cic.  Plane.  41. — 3.  Ut-clauses  of  all  desciuptions:  Aihil  aliud 
labOro,  nisi  id  salvus  sinu  Cic.  Fam.  16,4.8. — Keperio  nihil  aliud  actum,  nin  vt  decem 
re^'es  constitiiereiitur.  lb.  Agr.  2,  «i.— Tg  quod  optem  quidem  '^dinx  habeo.  wm  ut  aliqua 
inimici  misericordia  liberemur.  lb.  Att.  l>,  12,  4.  For  various  kinds  of  Ut-ciaiises  thus 
connected  by /<i^i,  comp.  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1.3,G:  lb.  Fam  l(i,G,3:  12,2.2;  Fin. 5.19, 53;  Ac. 
2, 3,  7  ;  Orat.  51.  HO  :  Quinct.  :iO,  91  ;  Litr.  4.  10  ;  Ciel.  13, 32 ;  Liv.  21, 29  ;  39.  52  ;  Suet.  C-al. 
2.3.  In  anteclassical  and  posiclassical  Latinity,  ^i^t  ut  frequently  has  the  force  of  ».a^ 
ita  ut  ('  ercept  so  that ',  *  but  that ')  with  the  same  meaning  as  nisi  si  (see  below.  No.  6), 
as  :  C^uis  hie  homo  est  ?  Non  edepol  scio,  nisi  nt  observemus  quo  eat.  aut  quam  rem 
gerai  {=?iud  siobsenemus}.  Plaut.  Pseud.  4,  «1,39.— Irasci  uon  potes,  w?.si  vt  omnia  tre- 
maiit.  Sen.  Clem.  1,  8. —Nee  qiiisquam  perspicere  tot  reconditas  res  potest,  nisi  vt  facul- 
taii  vis  eloquentia}  accCdat.  Tac.  Dial.  33, 5.— For  nisi  in  connection  with  Fact-clauses 
introduced  by  ry  WW/,  see  p.  ()07.— 4.  Temporal  Quim-clauses  and  Dum-clai  ses  :  An 
ill:e  aves,  tiisi  quum  vicenmt,  canerc  non  sclent  ?  Cic.  Div.  2, 2r>. — Atque  ille  eis  semper 
utebatur  ;  uos,  nisi  dum  a  populo  aiispicia  accepta  habemus,  quam  multum  eis  utimur? 
(  =  non  utitnur  ni<i  dum,  'except  while'').  lb.  2,  3<). — Nee  umquam  tacentem,  nisi  dum 
velllt  alas.  Sen.  Ep.5(i.— 5.  For  C^uia-clauses  with  nisi  see  Liv.  34, 4;  Plaut.  True.  4,  8, 
11  ;  Kud.  4,  3,  85  :  Pers.  4,  3, 84  ;  Pseud.  1,1,  105.— G.  Often  nisi  is  placed  before  other  Si- 
clauses,  the  si  of  the  Si-clause  being  apparently  redundant  {nisi  si  =  'except  if  —  '  ex- 
cept ').  If  si  is  thus  omitted,  the  clause  becomes  an  ordinary  Nisi-clause.  The  two  con- 
structions, however,  are  qrammaticaily  dift'erent.  as  :  Nunc,  nisi  si  quid  ex  prasennte 
viatOre  esceptum  est,  scire  nihil  i)ossumus.  Cic.  Att.  2, 11, 1.— Noli  putare  me  ad  quem- 
quam  longiores  epistolas  scribere,  ;/i.vi  si  quis  ad  me  plura  scripsil  cui  etc.  lb.  F^am.  14, 
2, 1.  Comp.  lb.  Att.  2,3,2  ;  Nep.  Att.  12,  2.— Often  nisi  si  is  used  when  the  principal  seu- 
tence  is  not  n^^a^h'?,  especially  in  an  ironical  sense,  as:  Dixisset  etiam  collgga  mens, 
patriius  tuus;  nisi  si  tu  es  solus  Antoniiis  (but  perhaps  you  are  the  Antonius).  Cic.  Phil. 
2,  28.— Jam  sum  as.-ecQtus  ut  vos  omnes  factam  es.<e  aperte  conjuraiiOnem  vidergtis; 
ni^i  vero  si  (juis  est  qui  Catillnie  simills  cum  Catillna  seutlre  non  piitet.  lb.  Cat.  2,  4,  6. — 
A'ivi  si  quid  in  Cse^are  sit  aiixiiii.  omnibus  Gallis  idem  esse  faciendum  quod  Helvetii 
fecerint.  Cies.  B.  G.  1,  31.  Comp.  Cic.  Inv.  2, 57, 171 ;  Liv.  6,  26  ;  2fi.  3:  28,  31  ;  Sen.  Ot.  30. 
—Sometimes,  instead  oi  nisi  si,  the  comjiarative  forms  extra  quavi  si,  and  jmtterqvam  si 
are  found,  mostly  occurring  in  quotations  of  ancient  legal  formulas  and  treaties,  but  also 
(rarely)  in  ordinary  style,  a.*:  Si  quis  ascrlbat  ad  le-rem  iianc  exceptionem  '■extra  quam  si 
quis  rrijmblicie  causa  "exercitum  non  tradideiit'.  Cic.  Inv.  1,  33. — Datum  consulibus  nego- 
tium  est,  ut  omnia  Bacchaimiia  diruerent,  extra  quam  si  qua  ibi  vetusta  ara  aut  signum 


HI 


m 


1. 1 


,  ti 


740 


CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 


^    T  •     Oft  1Q     v..<T,v„t  «nrfientom  Piiscoptflnim  ullam  n-ipuMicte  par- 
con?ecrStum  es^set.  L'^.  30. 18.-^.  ca  t  J»-  r^^^^^^^^  ,j       ^  ^.  ,„._AntCn()r,  pr(t- 

(=„i,i«</M«.i/".se«;;0.    •;j-!,'^,-^i\7:,^.:'^.;""',,d;,,l,„m,  «  v..n  „ia.,tur  r-i-i  uH.ml 


'que  credit  /ri^i  .i  Q''^;' v  ,n  «  V^  v' L^//^^^^^^^^^  Liv.2.fti».  Instead 

Poimieinm  Mppellut.  lb.  Pain.  <..  ♦..  lit.— .\<'//'o  ''"'''V/'''  ;;.■''     ,,^,.,1    ^-  •  AV  esse  u  him 
of ""14  ill  .hi»  c,,nnvc.i0,^  .ho  pr.y..smon  ,;«.  «M^^_-^ 


"'-■'  ';;iif;'..i'n  r,:taiV;v  ""iri'ivio';,  "^crptvJ.'';,,  v."?!,, :  > ,  .■;>•  •  .i^-^/  ««-^  "'-*■  '-■••.  ..r 


a.im,,s:„-i;r,;>ni;nw,ra</.oc.,,..«i.-siT-q"j;;-,^;;i^^^^ 


iiaU.  era..t^  Plant.  c:a,>t^,S^C^acau4..o..^^  ^^.    ,^^^.    ,.,.,  ,       ij, 

urn  perfu-'erunt.   Liv. «.».  2*  — /A/'>-^7"«  ,*^^'',.,'    ,„.  ,,:,:  ...iVr  eos  qui  in-ammit.  Cic.  It. 
nt.rierc.  Sail.  J..-.  17,«5.-Quo<l  '''l2r'Zu,^j'l\^m^^         A  ticuni;  whom  some 

^^{S-^l^'^^^ltl^TU^^^^^^^  ^^-^'  -'^ '''- '''  ""'^  ^^^"• 

^\;^:^r^c::^iS-d:usr  urr^Loauccd  l>y  n.i^..  Cumcss  perhap.  ut^Iess  by 


A 
c 


rARTICULAR  USAGE  OF  CONDITIONAL  CONJUNCTIONS.  .  741 

chance),  recrnlarlv  with  the  tvtitcativr,  1)  If  the  author  does  nof  seriovahj  mean  to  condi- 
tion tile  principal  ^tatt-mtnt  by  ilie  fact  elated  in  the  Nifi-clause.  Such  a  condition  may 
be  added  (a)  for  the  purpose  of  irony,  either  to  ridicute  every  possible  object  ion  which 
mav  be  made  a<x,iinst  the  main  statement,  or  to /<i/ a  person  by  1*0111  e  passing  remark, 
niuhr  the  semblance  of  a  serious  Ptatement  made  for  a  different  i)urpose  ;  as  :  Negare 
hoc,  y^ii  forte  ncfidre  onnna  ron~'>fifiiisti.  nuUo  modo  poles.  Cic.  Verr.  2.  3,  64.— Nee  vero 
nnnc  (luidcm  culpa  in  eo  (i.e.  Ciesare;  est,  in  cujus  poiestjTte  omnia  sunt,  nin  forU  id 
ipy't/m  fs^pvon  dehnit.  lb.  Fain.  7.  2S.  3.— .Vt<i  fort''  h;e  •,  illi  arma  d-dimus  ut  nunc  cum 
l)ene  i)anlt()  pni;naremus.  lb.  Alt.  7.  «>,  2.— Si  Achilles  dens  est,  et  Orpheus  et  Rhesus  di 
f»unf,  .MnsiT  matre  nati,  ni-n  forte  maritinice,  nupticR  terrenis  aideponuntnr,  lb.  N.D.  3. 18. 
— Quam  ab«:nr(Inm.  qui  prastor  fieri  non  potuerit,  eum  petere  coiipuiatum.  nv<l forte  dam- 
nalu'neni  ]>n)  pra-lflra  putat.  lb.  IMi.  W.'^.— Sin  forte  jure  (iermanum  Cimber  occldit. 
]1,  n,»;. — Sisi  forte  adolfscenies  pucritiam.  u'tilte  proL'ressi  a(lole;-c<Mitiam  debent  lequi- 
rere.  lb.  3$.— Nam  quid  illi  mali  mors  attulit?  N In  forte,  iiieptis  labulis  ducimur,  ut  ex- 
istimemus  eum  apud  inftros  impiorum  pupplicia  perferre.  lb.  Clu.61.— (6)  To  add  a  good- 
NATiMiKD  .TEST  t«>  the  i)rincii)al  stattnieni  :  Alexim,  hnmanissimum  puerum,  nisi  forte 
d'ini  erjo  ati.<>/}n  i(tn\y  fi>v  a  ti':\v\\'vk<')odote.'iceniif(ti:tu.<!est—\d  enim  a^'ere  videi)atur— 
salvCre  jubt-as  vdinr.  C'lc.  Att.  7,  7,  7.-2»  Often  however  the  ctmdition  addi'd  i;*  «eriously 
meant,  reiircseutinir  the  possible  reality  of  the  condition  as  accidentai.,  taking  even  in 
this  iiisnnce  the  indicative,  a^:  Eas  litteras  in  eundem  fasciculum  velim  addas,  nisi 
forte  jam  dedi<ti  (unh'-s  l)y  chance  you  have  already  sent  it  away).  Cic.  Att.  12.  53. — 
Vropen^ior  esse  beniKnitas  de])GI)it  in'calamitOsos.  tdsl  forte  erind  digni  caiamitdte.  lb. 
Oir.  2.  18. — ItJique  accCdam  ad  omnia  lua,  TorcpuTte.  ni-n  inemoria  forte  defecent.  lb. 
Fin.  2.  14.— .Vi.<-i  q  :e  me  forte  fu<:iunt,  hiec  sunt  f«re  de  animo  sententiae.  lb.  Tusc.  1, 
11.— Non  placet  autem,  detracta  voliiptate,  leiiritudinem  statim  conseqni.  nisi  in  volup- 
tatis  locum  door  forte  s"cce.<se/it  (luture-pcrfcct).  lb.  Fin.  1, 17,  r)G.— Nemo  fere  saltat 
»obrius.  /li.si  forti-'iiM'nnt,  neque  in  solitudine.  neque  in  convivio  honesto.  lb.  Mur.  6. 
—  Pt-culiar  is  the  useof  a  siTB.irNCTivE  after  nisi  forte  in  the  followinir  |)assage  :  Quod 
declamationibus  nostris  cares,  damiii  nihil  facis.*  Quod  Ilirtio  invid^res  nisi  eum  amd- 
res  (  =  As  to  your  remark  that  you  ico>dd  envy  Iliriiiis  if  you  did  not  love  him),  nouerat 
causa  invidendi,  nisi  forte  ipsTiis  eloquentiie  mairis  quam  quod  me  A\i(\\vi.-x,  invideres ; 
Vntifss  indeed  yo'i  would  enry  him  etc.  C'lc.  Fam.  7.33. 1.  II«re  the  person  addressed  had 
not  said  that  he  did  envy,  but  that  he  would  envy  Ilirtius.  In  repeating  his  words,  Cicero 
liad  to  use  the  subjunctive.  The  indiuitive  •  invide< '  would  have  represented  the  '  invi- 
dere'  as  a  reality,  which  it  was  not.— In  place  of  /u*?,/or/e  with  an  ironical  or  jesting 
meaiiin?,  ' nin  rhv''  (with  the  indicative)  is  sometimes  used,  as  :  MH  vero  tu  libelli-'  so- 
ceri  till  causam  M".  Curii  defeiidlMi.  Cic.  Or.  1,  57.— .Vi.vi  v^ro  majoribus  habes  beneficiis 
obliiratos  quam  C;esar  quosdam  habuit  ex  iis  a  quibus  est  interfeclus.  Cic.  Phil.  2, 45. 

Obs.  10.  If  a  condition  is  represented  as  the  only  one  by  which  the  consequence,  ex- 
pressed in  the  thesis,  can  be  reaelied,  it  liequently  "takes  the  .«yudetic  antecedent  ita.  or 
*<-(/  ita  (ita  .st='hut  onlv  it\  or  'on  the  condition  that').  In  all  such  constructions,  the 
form  of  a  neqatire  conditional  clau^e  with  nin  may  also  be  used  (accordini:  to  p,  705, 
Obs.  (i.  A.'w  as:  Ita  senectiis  honesta  est  si  se  ipsa  defendit;  Old  age  is  respectable  only  if 
it  defends  itself  [=senectus.  nin  se  ipsa  defendit  (or  defendat),  honesta  non  est].  Cic. 
Sen.  11.— //«  enim  Acilium  re<,'i  concessisse  si  J^^tolOrum  fuissent,  n  voluntatc,  non  si  vi 
atque  armis  coacti  cum  .FtOlis  essent ;  Acilius  had  made  these  concessions  to  the  king, 
but  only  if  (on  the  condition  that)  they  had  joined  the  .Etolians  voluntarily  etc.  Liv. 
31»,  .T).— ifuic  nieie  voluntilti  ut  faveas  vehementer  rogo,  sed  ita  si  non  jejQnum  quod  ego 
g(fssi  et  contenmendum  videbiliir.  Cic.  Fam.  15,  4, 14.— De  Irumento  respon^un1,  ita  usfl- 
riim  eo  populum  llouianum,  si  pretium  acciperont.  Liv.  3e),  4.  Comp.  Cic.  Att.  IG,  0, 2; 
Div.1,0, 10. 

Obs.  11.  In  manv  instances  the  principal  sentence  is  not  the  lof/k'ol  thesis  of  the  con- 
dition, so  that  ihe'n-al  thesis  is  either  understood,  or  contained  in  the  principal  sentence 
by  ini plication.  Here  belons;  the  lollowiii«;  constructions  :  1.  The  subordination  of  hy- 
jwth'tical  c/rt'/>w  to  indicative  |)reterites,  wliere  a  hypothetical  thesis  must  be  supplied 
(see  It  4<'.,  Obs.  27.  2).— 2»  Those  suboblique  Si-clauses  whose  oblique  thesis  is  elliptic- 
ally  omitted  accordini?  to  p.  714.  Obs.  20,  A.—Z)  The  instances  in  which  a  conditional 
clause  i?  made  jzrammaticaliy  dependent  on  the  second  term  of  a  compaiison,  when  gener- 
ally the  real  t  hesis  must  be  nhpplit-d.  Here  belong  the  combinations  quam  si.  velut  si.  ac  4, 
gaan,  tamfjuam  si.  For  this  construction  see  Chapter  VII.  -4)  Hestrictions  referring  to 
the  truth  of  a  statement,  or  to  the  limits  within  w  hich  a  statement  is  to  be  accepted,  are 
oltei  e.Kint'ssed  by  Si-clau.>ies^n  which  the  restriction  is  represented  as  dependent  on 
the  choice  of  the  'person  addres.-ed  or  of  an  indefinite  person.  These  conditittns  do  not 
strictiv  affect  the  truth  of  the  statement  as  such,  and  hence  stand  only  in  a  loose  con- 
nection witii  the  principal  sentence.  The  predicate  of  such  Si-clauses  is  regularly  in 
the  SUBJUNCTIVE,  as:  Cajsar,  si  Podutmim  audlre  velles,  persecutama  erat  Cmeum  (epis- 
tolary lenses) ;  If  you  choose  to  believe  Fostumus,  Caesar  is  going  to  pursue  Ponipey.  Cic, 


til 


\4 


74^ 


CONDITIONAL  CLAUSES. 


A  ft  Q  o  o     n-TP  the  reality  of  '  mr^erutrmi^  erat '  doc«.  not  dopoml  "!?«"  j^»«  ^'j"  5»!  ^^f 


ii\ncai  «■ons'tniciioii  «n  mt;  :-^-iinii«-'-.    '- 
l\)stumus  dicli,  rtn/in  ent'  {^according 

to  I'o.onnu,.  sfauv.nn:  y''vr"^';7'^;:ri'^:i^j;;e;;r.u;''th^  wii^  of  S';:^;Mln'nd. 

n.s'ed.  which  can  only  (k'tennine  h.s  «.wn  vu-w- -M  I^  ?.  v.  ;W.  10- 

,uniii  ho.tiu.n  en  tin-  «m.t  oe.a  (  =  "^;;''r  V,  f ,  ^;  LVL  nr.m  ol^e  tradit;  nee  He.  Ih.  44, 
m  Vaferio  A»nm  creda^,  nee  '•^l'^''-\'''^i'^'    'jf]''^^^^^  (artha-iniensinm 

13.-.S'i  quh  reram  orir/inem  juris  f.ngere  rdlrt  qn  m  :'*'n"^;j'7;; '',,„;  rinht  is  conAd- 
iL?  (  =  What  title  hav.  the  ^'^■■^^^^^^J^'.Jl^'^^^^:^  .-esti.nSre, 

eredf).  I-iv.34,r.->.-^V  nn.nerSre  f  n  •  a  ^  "^;'^',  /^^^/.^^jVa  n  . .  claus.s  an-  used  in  this  re- 
ami-erat  Cracrho..  Si-n  ^  ""^."i  Vl  Hm^T-i-  Mn-^^^^^.^ -^^^^  alhiuant..  m.ruit  sup- 
la  ion  with  tl.e  force  of  ^'»"'\'V  s?o  S  vekt)  LiV  ,  lO—On  account  .»f  the  loose- 
plicii.  q>n  vcre  rem  a'st.niare  vdit  (^^st  qui^.  •  J,^'// '(,,!;*  V/,/ ".nee  and  conditions  of  this 
!,es.  of  the  lo-ical  conmHtu.u  ''^'V^  hi  Kw  of  en' ecu  on  arc  used  in  the  ^nhjunc 
kind,  ''oui.ti.nes  /or/^m     ./».j..s  .HgH.n.t  t^^h^^  "^i^^ZxS^  prince,...  n  quis  Ulnm 

tive  of  the  conditiona  Predicate,  as  ^''\'^^p|  ;"  '".  -Cicero,  si  u'lU  virtutihus  vitia 
a  prit.cipatu  suo  :esti.nJlre  ''''''l^l''!-^.'^^^^^  are  /^,/am>(/ Nvith  his 

jnUrnit,  vir  tna-jnus,  «^er  meinc.ra hilis  fui    (    K      c    o      m  ^  ^^^^  .^^^^^^.^ 

vtnisset.  Liv.9.  IS. 


6«;  ,,to..t,esHmoniautnm;  ...>-.! 


4 


w/s-^/mW   te<timonia  etiata  in  S.  Ko-cuun  ou  .u.uy -•  '    ;;  Yo_(»„o.l   illi   interhrti 
Td^^i!.:'t.  nefas  esse  'Oun^  --u  h-m  jdebejum^  i... :,,  3.>.-In 

r  url^rJil^ aS;ue  ea^r^c^  ;$l;i;.nu  conviviis,  sunt  qui  exercitu«  >n  Mac.do- 


n^.xl^cr  of  il-^'^^»H>:  to  m=.ke  a  stateme^  fr; 

him,  as  if  he  would  expect  nuexpr. 


si  (nam  hoe  r/mrris.  express  a 
)m  eonie  reason,  npn;:n!inl  to 

„„„,  a,  „  n.  w ^^.■--.-vv-  ■-,  ;i;i';;::Bi^£"v'^^:in^^ 

even  this  ,     let  mc  auu   >■.  .^  _th\  if  rl.e  statemei 


COMrARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


743 


I 


dercd  '  indefd\  Ht  is  true  thaf\  ^  to  ocTcnowlcdge  even  thi^  '),  as  :  Sunt  morOpi.  et  anxii, 
et  iraciiudi,  et  difficiles  >cnes.  si  qyitrinvis.  etiatn  avjlri  ;  sed  lupc  ni<>ruin  vitia  sunt. 
Cic.  Sen.  18. — Kk,  si  qinehfis.  is  qui  appeliStur  dicax,  hoc  jrenere  maxime  excellet,  ^^d 
risus  movent  alii  niajOres.  Ih.  Ov.'iAVl. — Marius  solus  edixit.  Et  ea  res,  «i  queens,  ei 
nia<:no  lionOri  fuit  (the  author  iinplyinir  in  the  subsequent  remarks  that  the  morality  of 
the  action  w  is  very  questionable»,  lb.  Ofl".  3,  20. — Omnino,  si  quixHs.  ludi  apparanssfmi, 
sed  non  tui  stoniachi.  lb.  Kani.7, 1,  i.— Scaiirum  Triarius  reum  fecit.  Si  quceris,  i\\x\\& 
est  mijrnopere  commOt  i  (rvfj-ndxitia;  sed  tainen  etc.  4, 17.  2. 

5.  Often  Si-clause»  are  parenthetically  added  to  a  gin;,'le  expression  of  the  sentence, 
intiuiatini,'  that  the  use  of  the  word  mi^ht  seem  of  doubilul  propriety,  as  :  De  lucro 
pn»pe  jam  (piadrieiinium  vivimus,  si  aut  hoc  lucrum  est.  aut  hiec  vita,  superstiti'm  rei- 
ptibiieie  vivrre,  Cie.  Fam.  9.  17,  1.  — Roma?  (/i/€C^w.s  habetur.  si  hie  dilectns  aj.pellandus 
est  quiMU  nitro  s(»  olferunt  omiies.  II).  11,8,  2. — Non  est  is  (^uinctius,  qui  fraudatiOnis 
caii-'jl  latit'irif,  nisi  si  Uititaut  qui  ad  neiroiium  suum,  relicto  procuraiore.  proticiscuntur. 
li).  Quinct.  19,  60.— llabes  formam  rtipublic<E,  si  in  castris  potest  esse  respublica.  lb. 
Fam.  12,  23,  3. 


CHAPTER  SEVEXTII. 
COMPARATIVE   CLAUSES. 

§  6*20.  Comparative  clauses  are  eitlier  qualtt.\tive  or  quantitative, 
the  foriiKir  (lescribiiiq:  the  mnnner  or  quality,  and  the  latter,  the  intensity 
or  numeral  relation  of  a  member  of  the  principal  sentence.  Qualitative 
comparative  clauses  are  introduced  eitlier  l)y  the  relative  adjectives  qui 
and  qnallH,  or  by  the  rehitive  adverbs  quemadmoduia  and  quomodo,  or  by 
tlie  comparative  conjunctions  ut,  sicut,  atque^  and  ac  (rarely  by  quam), 
and  also  by  the  conjunctions  tamquam,  quasi,  relut,  and  the  combinations 
ac  si,  tit  si,  and  tamquam  si.  All  these  relatives  and  conjunctions  gener- 
ally correspond  to  the  English  comparative  conjunction  'as'  {as  if).— 
QuantitaticG  comparative  clauses  are  either  introduced  by  the  relative  ad- 
jectives quot  and  quantus,  or  by  the  adverb  and  conjunction  quam. 

Ob««.  1.  Comparative  claupe?  introduced  by  relative  adj''Ctives  belong,  like  the  ordinanr 
relative  clauses  (p.  494),  to  the  atthibutive  clauses.  Those  that  are  introduced  by  ad- 
verbs or  conjunctions,  belong  to  the  adverbial  clauses.  In  both  ttie  qualitative  and 
qu;intitative  comparisons  the  relations  compared  are  either  represented  as  like  or  as 
unlike,  lor  instance,  uvque..  .ac\  and  '  a/ifer. .  .ac'  for  the  qu'ilitative,  and  'tarn... 
quam\  'maqu.  ..quam'  for  the  quantitative  comparison.  Generally,  comparative 
clauses  have'one  or  more  of  their  members  common  with  the  principal  sentence,  and 
hence  appear  in  an  abbreviated  form,  which  is  completed  by  supplying  the  common 
members,  not  expressed  in  the  clause  (see  P.  1,  p.  207  loll.). 

Obs.  2.  The  nature  of  a  comparative  clause  is  determined  by  it?  stndetic  antkce- 
DENT,  which  is  ditVerent  fory'/a/i/a/ir«  and  quanfifafire  comparison.  If  the  comparative 
clause  is  an  aftribat^-chvtse,  the  syndetic  antecedent  is  always  an  adjective  {idem,  talis, 
alius,  tantus.  tot).  In  this  instance  the  c<miparative  clause,  if  qualitative,  may  be  either 
introduced  by  an  aimectivk  or  bv  a  conjinction  (id^m  qui,  or  idem  ac ;  alius  ac,  or 
alius  quam):  but  in  the  (juantitative  comparison,  an  adjective  antecedent  always  re- 
quires the  clause  to  be  introduced  by  a  kki>ative  adjective.  If  the  antecedents  are 
,  tiie  ADVKUBs  tarn  or  tofirs,  the  clause  is  introduced  by  quam  or  quQties.  both  of  which,  in 
this  conneciion.  ruust  be  considt-refl  as  relative  apvekbs.  But  if  the  antecedent  i* con- 
tained in  a  comparative  (mtlior.  etc.),  quam  must  be  considt-red  as  a  conjunction,  since 
in  this  instance  it  cannot  l)e  paraphrased  like  a  relative  adverb.  'Tarn.. quam'  may  be 
l>araphrased  by  Uanto  qradu\. .' quanta  qradu'  (^tantopere. .  .quantrqwre),  hut  this  para- 
phrase does  not  apply  to  '7nagis...quam\  nor  to  ' sapienfior..  .quam'  (p.  489,  C  foil.). 

Obs.  3.  In  both  the  qualitative  and  quantitative  comparisons,  the  fact  contained  in  tho 


f.^1 


744 


COMrARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


litt.T  k  lui  are  called  iivi-otiikticai.  compauativk  ilausi-s.     riie\  la\e  the  w|"ie  j-jn 
i      .•  m      •  dent-  as  the  unli.mry  e.mipMrative  clau>es.  l)nt  tlu'  conjunctions    )y^^»u;•h 
lu  ^lr  •    .    rod  cefar'  reuul.^  w,th  the  conditu.nai  cnjunetion  «  (lor   he 

«    diSi  e^^^^^^^^^^  r'a4.  '»t  si,  v.l>U  suae  d :  f..r  the  q'jai.t.tat.vc  companso  , 

^Inlnilsr-  I  li  former  coi  n-spondini;  to  '  as  if\  the  latier  to  both  '  than  tf  and  a>*  xf  ). 
T  e  rc'^icates  h  p'.U  e  icil  co.nimrative  ehu.ses  must  always  be  iu  the  ^''bJ^nct.v^ 
.i  HMhe'e  c  an.e.a  wavs  in.plv  a  hypothetical  thesis  underst,.o.i,  an  :  Hoc  :cl.m  e>t  ac 
'1  nihil  ;>fr.5v.  (/</<:ia.>U;^r  . A>7  .# /^  melius  fecisii  nuam  n  lacui6.^es,^Ciuam  fe- 

ciss€f!  si  hicuigsen.  See  p.  748,  Obs.  o. 

I.  Qualitative  Comparison. 
Rem  51  Comparative  clauses  ri'prosfntin.i?  coniparea  qualities  a^  like, 
take  as  svntletic  antecedents  the  adjkctives  idem,  par,  simiU^,  ov  talts, 
llie  clause  bein-  introduced  by  the  relative  adjective  Qf/L  (with  laem),  or 
1)V  O'/a'u  (with'  Odi:^),  or  by  tlie  conjunctions  ^fc  and  atque  In  the  coin- 
pfiri.on  of  like  7aanner,  the  syndetic  antecedents  are  1)  the  adverbs  «^c 
and  iA^  takin"-  the  conjunctions  ut  {^icuti,  uti),  tamquam,  or  tlie  adverbs 
qneniadmodum  and  qimmodo;  2)  the  adverbs  ivque,  panter^nnnifer  or  the 
lU'-ative  adverb  m>M  .<*<'C?/.s,  takini;  the  conjunctions  aique  a4id  .rr  (rarely 
„,/r,,,,)_For  the  comparison  of  unlike  qualities,  the  adjective  ante- 
cedent a/i'is  is  useil,  with  the  conjtnictions  afquc  and  ac  {^omitUmvs, quum), 
and  tor  unlike  manner,  the  adverbs  aliter  and  contra,  with  the  conjunc- 
tions afque  and  ac  (sometimes  q^am).  For  hypothetical  comparison 
l<{i"r>  Ojjs  y)  the  conjunctions  quasi,  tamquam  si,  velnt  si,  vt  si,  acsi,  or 
tunqu.nii  and  vehif,  without  si,  are  employed.  Tlie  mood  ot  the  clause 
lor  hvpothetical  ompari^on,  is  always  the  .Nhjunchve,  and  '>i' "ri^in^^^ 
compariscm,  always  the  iW/c^f^tt'^,  unless  the  general  rules   (p.  o8a  toll.) 

require  the  subjunctive. 

Obs  1  Comparative  clauses  dependent  on  th<'  syndetic  anfrcedent  tW^m  Jicnerally 
tak(f  the  f^  rm  of  a  keiative  c.Acsk.  introduce.l  by  v"  «P-  4%».  while  in  Lu-  ish  a 
I^irt.v  comDar  tivc  lorm  (by  the  conjunction '«.■. ')  is  used:  as:  hwiem  fere  fj>ne  ex 
nu  't  is  c,?Zter  t7tle'i(//  .  tlilni:.  a.s  he  had  learned  (Tom  the  messeuijers).  c-oram  per- 
?oic  f  Ue-  i  i  5,  lO.-Nemo  nostrum  idem  est  in  senectQte  qui  luit  m  juyentQte  Sen 
E  ',S  t  both  propositi..ns  of  the  compari>oM  have  the  same  predicate,  the  ^ui-clause 
r^'nif^Vlv  H  S^^^^^  predicate  of  its  own:  Non  licet  mihi  ^/.7/*.  r/vrW  ets.  quil.u-  omnia 
;^U  be  u'tic  a  o.  mie!.t>b««  deforuntnr.  Cic.  V.  r.  'i.  5.  70  -  V.U.  i''./"' 7«;  7-J  ^^';^.;^^ 
iorXi  lb  L  a-  2  -i-J.-Non  ead<m  mild,  gmi  mi>erwnb>is  con-odifjus,  h-u-e  et  conditio ne 
iteiu  urn  e-e  d^'cievi.  Ib.-2,3.-AW.m  copias,  r/uas  ante,  pnesidio  navibu-j  rellmut. 
Cei  BUS  11  Very  freqiKMitly  a  coordina.iou  by  tL  a>uue,  aan  que  is  u-ed  in  place 
«Vf  a'rei-ilive  eon-trtiction,  if  the  predicates  are  the  snm.-,  and  m  tlu-  same  tense  and 
momras     Ni^"«S^^^^  '^^'^''^  habuent  Ko^cius.  nolo  v.ncat:  I  <l..  not 

w  -  ijo' ci.^  to  S^^^^^  his  adversary,  unless  he  has  the  mm.  ,nan  as  an  a.hvrsary  and 
'^•^^  tie's  (^.unless  his  adversary  be  at  the  same  time  ''«^^vUness)    Cic.  H.  A  .i    ).- 

r-  hH  end  ot  his  rii"-n  was  the  same  a*  the  end  of  hi^  lil«».  ftj.ill.  .«uu'.  j— WuirMmiur 
i ^//1//^  c  -'//'i'v  //,  capiiis  sui  arjudiom  esse.  Liv.  8.  :52.-Est  O'l'^dmi  ,t  n;p.rt  et  i:oxx- 
^^i^nv^ZZZviri  pecnnias/c.c.  Or.  2,  4^.-lt  eadan  .it  utiUtas  ""^'.''^•"J/Xom 
univer-Onim  ib  OlV.  3,»i.— Virtud  eadem  in  homme  ac  deo  est.  lb.  L.-<;.  L  2.> -f  rom 
ll  is  cons  ricti.  arose  the  us..-  of  m-  and  ntqu>'  with  tlie  force  of  a  omparative  c- n- 
ictim  c  rr.^^^^^^^^^^^^^  to  the  English  V/..\  as:   Amii.us  eru'u  te  idnn  K.^uarjmt. ^xs 

i  e  same  as  t  w  ^  efon).  Trr.  Il.aut.  2. :),  21.-Iloc  ipsum  niium  et  idem  vi.  etur  «  ^^e 
oJ^^^li  q  lod  de  me  ipso  nomi.uT.im  uilisti  ,this  very  thin-  was  Ihv.  samo  «^  ^al  wl  ic  1, 
?ic     ct    )om  2(),.51  idem  i*  followed  by  »/ ;   DispulatioiK-in   habitan     ^<^  n 

f'-re  vermVexpJi  mn^  actum  di>putalnm<,ue  est.  Cin.  Tuse.  2.  8.-1  idem  '«  »'«  ;•y»- 
d.■tic  u  tecedent  «.f  a  humth.ncal  coinpanitive  clause  (§62r.,  Obs.  3),  the  claus.'  is  m  me- 
;^:^  i;un>ducS  by^li^frelative  ..ui  combined  wiih  .i^as  :  Acta  per  eun.U,a  ^^  «  Ui^- 
tliKMiiiensium  nomine  sic  a-'fretiir  (  =  r/'/o  actum  exsei  m,  etc.)  \as.U,^^.  utiuraiy, 
ow  -v  T  cU  iserc?  t!iis  kiiufare  introduced  by  the  conjunction  ac  or  vt.  'n^..nn..c  uu 
wiU.  't  \=as  if),  as:  Xeque  vero  idem  proflci  lon-.o  itinens  '•P-J  '«)«<;  ^^eontm  de  mu^ 
bus  condiiionibus  duictprdur  ^=ac proJiacUur,  m  duceptdur).  Lm.  ii-  C.  1,  -Ji.-<^ui  am» 


QUALITATIVE  COMrARISON. 


745 


nocont  nt  in  alio?  liberales  sint,  in  eadem  sunt  injustitia  ut  si  in  suam  rem  aliSna  con- 
vertuiit.  Cic.  Ort",  1, 14. 

Obs.  2.  Par  and  mnilis,  which  are  generally  construed  with  a  dative  or  {reni*ive  often 
take  comparative  clanses  introduced  by  ac  or  vf,  according  to  the  analogy  of  idem  as- 
Hostes  inter  se  jactHbant,  nmilem  Romte  pavOrem  fore,  ac  bello  Gallico  fnerit  •  That 
tliere  would  be  a  consternation  like  the  one  (similar  to  the  one)  in  the  Gallic  war  {=pavd- 
^^.['^\.^''"^^.^.''\^^^  V^^'^^^^  operam  ne  simili  utamur  foriQna  at 

ut, 

tus 

ac 

,  .      ..    Tu  T       «  «     .;      .      '      . —a --^«...  pictflrie  scientia 

fuisset,  lb.  Inv.  2,  2.— Cassius  pan,  atnue  antea,  raliOne  egit.  Cies.  B.  C.  101.— Whether 
qiiam  was  nsi-d  aUvvpar,  is  doubtful  [In  the  only  passage  where  it  occurs,  'cum  pari 
«mnero  equitiim  quam  in  continenti  relinquCbat',  Cais.  B.  G.  5,8,  it  is  uncertain  whether 
quam  or  quern  must  be  read].  Frequently,  hypothetical  comparative  clauses  with  ac  H, 
etc.,  are  nse<l  alter  i^imilui  and  jxir,  as  :  SimUes  sunt  ut  si  qui  gubernatOrem  in  navigando 
nihil  agerc  du^ant  ( =they  act  us  if).  Cic.  Sen.  6, 11.— Simile  est  quasi  dicas  in  operto  (me 
fuisse).  Ib.  AtL  1,  IG,  \0.—Similes  sunt  di  tamquam  si  Poeni  aut  Hisp5iii  in  senStu  nostro 
loquerentnr  •  .      ,.    ^.     -    ..      . 


aniTcoorbatus  qualis  nemo  umquam  erit.  Cic.  Am.  3,  X^.—qualia  quisqiie  liabet,  tall^  est; 
Every  one  is  such,  as  he  ha-*  qualities  (=as  his  qualities  are).  Sen.  Ep.  87.  Ilarely  talis 
is  lollowed  by  ac,  as  :  Ilonos  talis  paucis  est  delatus  ac  mihi.  Cic.  Vatiu.  4, 10. 

Obs.  .3.  As  adverbial  syndetic  antecedents  of  such  clausesi,  the  adverbs  (or  adverbial 
ablatives  with  tnod(A  of  the  above-mentioned  adjectives  may  be  used  (eodetn  modo  par- 
xter,  similiter),  aNo  item,  a;que,  and  (rarely)  ^"wa-to  (=equally,  or  'next  to'),  peHh'de  (in 
tiie  same  manner,  Mhe  same')  or  proinde,  and  the  negative  combination  hand  (non) 
$ecus,  the  latter  two  more  frequently  occurrimr  in  hypothetical  com{)arative  clauses;  be- 
ing iollow(;d  by  the  conjunctions  mentioned  Obs.  2,  as  :  Quum  animi  inaniter  movean- 
tur  todem  modo  rebus  his  qu;e  nulhe  sint  ut  iis  quae  sint.  Cic.  Ac.  2, 15.— Neque  vero  ilium 
einniiter,  atque  ipse  eram.  commOtum  esse  vidi.  Ib.  Phil.  1.  4.— /'a/i^er  nunc  opera  me 
adjiives  rt<?du(lum  re  opituiata  es.  Ter.  Phorm.  5,:i:3.— Is  rellqiiit  filium  paHter  moratura 
w/ pater  ejus  fuit.  Plant.  Aul.  Prol.  21.— Fecisti  itern  vt  pnedOnes  solent.  Cic.  Verr.  2. 4, 
9.— Qiue  beneticia  aque  magna  non  sunt  habenda  atque  ea  quie  considerate  delflta  sunt. 
Ib.  Off.  1, 15.— Nisi  habcM-es  qui  illi-  i^que  ac  tu  ipse  iraiideres.  Ib.  Am.  6.— Curiius  me 
edit  (Equr  ac  patrOuum  suum.  Ib.  Fam,  13,  m,  1.— Vestnim  nomeii  jaxta  ac  deos  immor- 
tales  mtiietur.  Liv.  37,  54.— A'o/i  dixi  secus  ac  sentiCbam.  Ib.  Or.  2,  6.— So  with  quam: 
Juxta  earn  rem  a;<rre  passi  sunt,  </t/am  quum  consulatum  vulirari  vidgrent.  Liv.  10.  «.— 
Ne  quid  liat  secus  quam  volumiis,  quamque  oportet.  Cic.  Att.  6, 2, 2.— With  HTPOTHKTiCAii 
comparative  clauses  :  Si  unltm  motlo  putant,  exercitu  in  fore  coUocato,  dici  pro  Milnne 
decuist^e.  vt  si  de  re  i)rivata  ad  unum  judicem  diceremus,  vim  eloquentise  sua  lacultate 
nietiuntiir.  Cic.  O.  G.  O.  4, 10.— Juxta  ac  si  hostes  adessent.  castra  vallo  atque  fossa  niu- 
nlre.  Sail.  Juir.  45.— -Vimi/j/e/- facis  ac  si  me  7C;7<?.<  cur  le  duObus  contucar  oculis.  CicN. 
D.  3,  3.— Navaies  socii  }uxta  effOsi  ac  si  insuiis  cuUOrum  egentibus  proidarentur.  Liv.  22, 
31.--Egnatii  abseniis  rem  ut  tueare,  a^que  a  te  peto  acsi  mea  neuotia  esierd.  Cic. Fam. 


ex  me  esu^-t  iiata  ('n*-ver  otherwise  than  I  would  if  \-alw;iys  the  same  as  if).  Ter.  Ilec. 
2, 3,  5.— Tecum  again  non  secus  ac  si  mens  ess&^  frater.  Cic.  Mur.  4  *. 

'  Ptrinde  iprniiith)  ut '  or  'perindeac  '  means  'according  as  \  the  same  as  prout  (Or.s.  4, 
//).  otren  adding  ita  or  sic  in  the  principal  sentence  as  an  apodosis  ;  as :  Habes  a  patre 
niiinus,  mea  quidem  sententia  magnum,  sed  perinde  erit  vt  acceperis.  Cic.  Off.  3,33.— 
Philosophia  non  jn'oinde  ac  de  hominum  viia  inerita  est.  laudatur.  Ib.  Tusc.  .5,  2.— Per- 
inde  ut  opinio  est  de  ClIju^que  moribus.  ita  quid  ab  eo  factum  et  non  factum  sit,  cxisti- 
mari  potest.  Ib.  Clu.  25.  — In  exspectatiOne  civitas  erat,  jyerinde  vt  evenisset  res,  ita  com- 
municatos  honOres  pro  bene  aut  secus  consulto  habitflra.  Liv.  7, 6. 

0B»^4.^he  usual  syndetic  antecedents  of  comparative  rif-c^aj/se*  (sometimes  of  clauses 

*  In  anteclassical  language,  (rque  is  tised  with  (jr^^f^rirTquaTrtitTtive  cornpan'son,  \vTFh 

the  force  of  iam..  .quam.  as  :  liidiculus  mque  nullu'st  quam  hie  quando  esurit.  Plant. 

btich.  1.3,  W.— Nnllum  opiiior  esse  agrum  <xque  ferdcein  quam  hie  est  l=tamferdcenu 

or  jeraciOrem).  Ib.Ep.  2,3,2. 


If' 


•■  ii 


746 


COMTAEATm:  CLAUSES. 


"foTcc^Tf' V(Vi«w  nioflo  qm\  romparin?  what 


mr.tive  Ut-clau-es  chuHy  ocnir  in  I  ho  f<  )1  low  inj^  relatione  . 

^  i    Gcn.-ml      Vtc  Kia)..-"r  has  the  force  ..f    /^i«m  v 

a-Ve.sii.  the  man..er«»f  it^  perlormnncc   iep.e>..:ntini:  au  a 

the  .ame  ,nan..er  as  (l.vi.ed.  «^,.f  I'ff  ,^«'  l^''^;;/,  J?;;j:^^^^^^  difiVrent 


tH  or  Pimiianiv,  an  ;  luiLt-i  «fit  k' ••■""-■• •        T.  V..;.    lu  r-i^r  7  18 


iiZis  «r  oculi.  vidCre  P<>^^^mus  nemo  ue  u.vu..^»^^^  rK:-^^  semen  tern  fe<«eri9, 
r„nu.onimn  Attioum  «r  amo  u(  alterum  ^'f^'^'V;;- ^  '"^;-!:^^^^^^  rarely  (ninnuam,  quein- 
ita  mete».,  lb.  Or.  2,n:,.-Hiec.  f'''.'^,;'-\P*^"-";' ''«  f,*'?,',^r  ^^^  as  sv.  (ieiic  a.ilece- 

wlmodmn  or  y'/w/*/></a  i«  n^ed  with  the  ""^^^ ''^.  '  / -'Vn   .nt   S  tn  in  ext  iCmil  parte  rnu- 
den.s(or'p->^tceden.8-),as:  Trnmayfr-V^^^]'^^^^^^^ 
„eri8  tni  dilii:ei.ti^>imns  es^e  dehes.  V'C-,*j";,V,n  •  ,m  J  "anin^^^         1»)  Am.  l^..-Manu^» 

pauci  facti  sunt.  Ih.  L.  Air.  J,  '•  ,/I^Vfl;ii\  rV-  i;r'//i  re<'l  llhnerat.  pax  convenit.  ^all. 
\\\  aiiHlojjy  to  relative  clause*,  (p.  501>  foil.),  as  -vr'/f*  hl^i  ^  ' \  •  y^  „,o'/rt/  (co/i^'^c/- 
Jn.'.  as,  10  -Uem  «.mnem  v/i  acta  erat,  co-iiOvit  'J  •  'I- -'--^  \",'Vn  1  e  ^ae  period,  as  a 
/V  V)  Ui-claiise  depends  .»n  the  same  syudetic  '"^'V'^'C^'  ^  »' »'/|'' '  ,  l^^r"^^^^^^^ 
cUvaraiire  Ut-clause.  as:  si  ^  ^X:^:^;^^.;;;^;^  ^McCitTi  -When  U.e  author 
ut  pnetermitteres,  nic  tu  in  mult.)s  Autronios  '"^""^^.^  ^*" ^-^^''j.J'Yfv./el^^  the  negation 
aAu.  the  existence  «f  |"V -q"^'  ''X  r'l!:'^!:     !  1  !\.?.n    "    n  n  '^  tT.e  ne- 


denh^  the  existence  01  an  ^'^.''-^^  '"^;' ;;•;;■  ;.;;;:V//cH  r,.llowini,' the  ne- 

i;;s'."^;r':v;c.  !^i"r,%'nr;;^:J';r.-  ""r  ;;r^;.n v-;^,  f^,  r,,.,.  liv.-,,  ...-.v».,  ,...»- 

\dmMUm  luMlle  nol.ie  lu'.-t.  .W.  jr."T.^  ^'''""ll'^ri V,,    ,V,,,',.  .^f^iiLr..  «hich  mmtraU, 


luueiiij;  Mil-  «j/www.  ..   «.       , 

dents  Vas:  Ut  ...  ^.n.mfr;„an.  -^^^ -^'^'^riZ^r::^.^^^^!^ 
junctiveof  the  second  indetinite  persoin,  sic  '''^ '//'V^:f/;fV,nJ"  jmlicil 

[;ic.  U.  A.  27.-ITT  ai^rtu^  '"./^•"'^r  J't"'  h  ^^t        2  -    VJorpora  nostra  "iL  7,,../.,  sic 
xitrmcna  sua  consilia  <.mnihus  feet.  I'^- ^^['^•.V/^in  L  _f  t  f«wiN/m/i/>'/v  /"7''^'.  ita 

?r*M,\4M  lev,.  q,.L:d.un  vi,n.  ,»7u/_m(^,.;_m  ^^^^ 
potiira  delectant.  Cic.  1  use.  d.  o 


fl.^tln-l  rario$  wotm  eicri,  tamqiam  in  eantu  ^mo-'^  ?'j'.Vro,V  hv  w^\  ()r%.'m>'^  bv  n-pre- 
"^t'.  Often  comparative  Ut-clauses  '^^'^y^''^ '^^:^;^^'T^  n  ila  to  .  . '  a.iversa.ive 
sontin-  .hem  a«  restit.L'on  tl'C  ^v,m^  c  |  .^  or  pi     c^^ 

coonlittaiiou  of  C^...n^cUu>ses.  a,^<i  s;.  n^^^^^^^^  „,„,,  ,,r.;..ihente  se 

...turn;  see  p.  «m»),  /?.  40i,  a-  .  L  t  i  "^L'' ;;*;';,;  i„p,.nti    I  iv  2-.  37.-  Sicrx  aliis  in  lociB 
perv.^nisse  in  glonfn>o„fUtut.  ^^a  Hf/^ '«/'"''' '«^^^^^^^^^^  Cic.  Clu. 

parum  virinm  reritm  hahr-t,  sic  in  hoc  lV^''-{f';'l,  l\\n  f„  >"    u-m^^^V^^  mw  o^>^arn'a,.t  ab 

K^^u^r,r  vidl^r ry^F^nriiUJ^T-ltinsu^  T t' J^;. ta^.e  t .v,  ..c  panon  ntUiur  tu 

^i^K:;?;i^:;::K^s;Si;;^;?i.yes  t«ue  v- f<.m  of  .>mp;.^;vcrt^^^^^ 

the  principal  sentence  '  //'M-'^>  ^'^5 ''Vs^JJltw    "^^  £r/  L'(or  a.  /  /»•.)  \  as: 

va,n  \  properly  meaning  W  h.it  I  sav  1=^.  •  J' "  'm^'h  .,,„:/  1.  54  -Ita  mf  di  amnd  ut 
.Sic-  medi  aniabuat  ut  me  tniVuu»  iniser.t,  m  ^^^^^  j  1  lis  I  43  S -//«  n,e  di  amabnut  ut 
eironuno  non  tarn  "'^''''PV^^^l^.^^/J,.  *'  Vl^'^jj^j',-^  Cic. 

^;;^^^^-5o  JiSli^ril^  -prc^iou^'aro  ^^Uhotically  inserted  in  the  a.scven. 


QUALITATIVE  COMPARISON, 


'47 


tion  without  vt,  as  :  Nam,  if  a  riram,  pntavi  (=Tta  vivatn,  ut  pntavi).  Cic.  Fam  2  13  3  -- 
SnllTntat,  tta  vtvam.  me  tua  valetfldo.  H).  16.20.-S«pe,  ita  me  di  juvent,  te 'ailctOrem 
consihoriim  meorum  desiderSvi.  lb.  Att,  1, 16, 1.  uv-tuicm 

A',  roinpjinifive  Ut-clauses,  without  a  syndetic  antecedent,  are  for  varion?  purnosea 
pnreritlieftcaUy  inserted  m  the  principal  sentence,  always  containing  an  additional  re- 
mark, which  may  he  omitted  without  impairini,'  the  sense,  and  which  is  represented  as 
h.Mnir  in  some  relation  similar  to  that  of  the  principal  action,  for  instance  when  the 
principal  assertion  is  represented  as  a  mere  opinion  of  the  speaker  or  of  another  person 
or  as-  a  similar  action  of  another  person,  or  as  a  hearsay,  or  as  a  former  remark  of  the 
speaker,  or  if  it  is  illustrated  by  examples,  etc.  Sometimes  such  clauses  are  introduced 
by  ?v/'//.  qufviadvioduv},  or  qnowodo  ;  as  :  Cupidilates  qufp  possunt  in  eo  qui  vt  ime 
nrrujititor  obj'df,  mri  s.-mper  hal)itarit.  Cic.  U.  A.  14,  3J».— Postumius  fn<'erat 'in  leW 
ti-.nem.  y  Jama  ferebaf,  populi  judicium.  Liv.  10,  4H.— Sed,  vt  plerumaue,  fit,  maTor 
pars  meliOrem  yicit.  \h.^2\A.-Ut  ex  proirinqvis  ^ju>i  avdio,  non  tu  in  isto  artificio  calli- 
dior  es  qijam  hic  in  siio.  Cic.  R.  A.  14.— NoiTte  putilre,  quemadtnodmn  in  fabtdis  mjy^nv- 
jn-ro  rid^fiK.  eos.  qui  aliqnid  impie  commiserint,  a<ritgri  Furiis.  lb.  24.-  Civitas  sine  Ice 
PUIS  partibus.  uf  nenna,  et  mni7»ine.  ft  wembri^:.  uti  non  potest.  lb.  Clu  53  — Bestiie  quas 
pi-nuntiir  e  terra,  rWf/z-i  crocoiUn.  lb.  N.  D.  2, 48.-Sunt  bestiae  in  quibus  inest  aliquid 
simile  virtQtis.  ut  in  iennibus,  nt  in  C(tnibu.<i,  in  equis.  lb.  Fin.  5, 14— Sometimes  a  clause 
with  qualiM.  referrmir  to  the  qnnlify  of  the  subject,  is  used  in  place  of  a  parenthetical 
I  t-claiise  :  Sapien.<i  priPtor,  qualis  hic  fxit.  Cic.  Mur.  'i^.—Kquitum  acies,  qualis  quce  esse 
tnyfrurftx^iima  i)otext,  c:rde  omnia  rcplet.  Liv.  8.  39.-Siich  clauses  may  also  be  introduced 
by  \\M'  quanfitatire  relaiivc  'quantum'  (=as  much  as),  as  :  In  quo  templo,  quantum  in 
vw  Juif,  jeci  fundamenta  pacis.  Cic.  Phil.  1,  l.—Tanta  est  eloquentia  ut  me  quidem, 
qunntum.  ego  Gnera  srripta  intelliqfre  pofimm,  mairnopere  delectmt.  lb.  Or.  2,  13. 

/'.  The  form  of  a  pfirehthellcnl  Ut-clause  is  used  to  represent  a  quality  expressed  by  a 
descriptive  adjective  in  the  principal  sentence  as  only  ' cowparatively  '  true.  con>iideiing 
ttie  condition  of  the  persons,  times,  or  circiimstanrcs  mentioned,  as:  TriumphStum  est  in- 
nqni,  vt  iUurum  tenqxyrum  habitus  (rat,  triumpho  ;  a  niMjrniticent  triumph  considering 
the  notions  of  those  limes.  Liv.  10.  4B.— Ardeam  Rutiili  babel)ant.  eens,  vt  in  m  reqiune  at- 
aye  in  ea  <vtate.  pnTpoflens.  lb.  1,  57.— Vir,  vt  inter  ^l^fdlo,^,  facvndus  (eloqii.nt  foran  ^to- 
ll n  ;  con>ideiin£3:  that  he  was  an  .iCtolian).  lb.  32, :«.— Hunc  Themistocles  insecQtiis  est, 
ut  apud  fios(u'ifh  ret>j^ct  to  us).  perantTqiius.  vt  apud  Athenienm  iuith  n.specttothe  Athe- 
injins).  non  ita  sani'v.tus.  Cic.  Brut.  lO.—Meneclidas  satis^r/^rrtVa/t/jy  in  dicendo  nt  The- 
t,o,,uy  SiVicet  (\hi\{  is  to  say  /or  a  Thef>an).  Nep.  Epain.  5.— OratiOnis  penus,  ut  inoratOre^ 
exife  (poor  for  an  orator).  Cic.  Or.  3. 18.— In  this  sense  the  formula  '  utcaptu^  est  alicujus' 
IS  frequently  employed  :  Hic  Oeta.  ut  captua  est , nervorum  (lor  a  slave)  non  mains.  Ter. 
A(1.3. 4, 34.— Civitas  ampla  iiX(\\\v.  florens,  ut  caplus  est  (fermanorum  (for  German  nal 
tioiis).  Ca?s.  B.  G.  4,3.    The  same  form  of  a  parenthetical  Ut-clause  is  also  employed  to 
represent  a  quality  as  (?/;.{»<?/<%  peculiar  to  the  class  of  persons  mentioned,  nt  b.  in<^ 
n-ntl.-rerl  by  ' as\  or  'fjeinq\  as  :  Tu  mihi  videris  Epicharmi,  acflti  nee  insulsi  hominis"! 
vt  Siculi,  {'bfinq  a  Sicilian',  'as  a  Sicilian  ')  sentenriam  sequi.  Cic.  Tusc.  1.  18.— Grajci 
homines  non  satis  animus!.  prud>-ntes,  vt  est  caplus  hominum,  Palis  (but  shrewd  enough 
as  It  18  characteristic  for  that  nation).  lb.  2.  27.  °  ' 

(t.  The  comparative  conjuiH  tion   vt,   without  a  predication,  connects  substantive 
ArcKssoRY  rRKDiCATKs  (p.  252  foil.)  to  disis:nate  a  qiality  attributed  to  a  person  or 
tniiiir.    II  such  a  quality  is  represented  as  in'ierent  in  the  person  at  the  time  spoken  of 
the  noun  u-^cd  as  an  accessory  predicite  is  added  without  any  connective  (see  the  exam- 
ples p.  2.V2  foil.).     Bnt  if  a  quality  is  attril)ut('d  to  a  person  onlv  with  respect  to  the 
priicipal  action  (ut=tike).  the-accessory  predicate  is  connected  hy'ut,  as:  ^tjyptii  caiiem 
et  lelem  nt  dens  colunt.  Cic.  Lesr.  1.  11.     But:  Galli  deu/n  (not  ut  deujn)  niaxime  M^-rcu- 
rnim  colunt.  Ca?s.  B.  G.  ft.  17.    Mercuriiis  was  considered  a  i?od,  even  without  any  reler- 
enc  to  the  worship  of  the  (Jauls  ;  but  doirs  and  cats  were  not  considered  as  j^ods,  except 
by  the  E<;ypiians.    The  relation  of  an  accessory  predicate  connected  by  ///  is  also  ex- 
pressed  by  the  preposition  pro,  with  the  ablative  of  the  noun,  as:   Britanni  iituntur 
taU'is  fcrris  pro  nummo  (or  nt  nuniwo,  but  not  numnw  alone).  Cses.  B.  G.  5,  12.— Exam- 
ri.Ks:  Ilabuit  (ei)  honOrem  nt  proditdri,  non  vt  amico  fidem.  Cic.  Verr.  2, 1, 15.— Anii- 
ochns  turn  Hannil)alem  non  vt  prudentern  tantnm  rirutn,  sed  nt  vatem  omnium  quse  turn 
evcnirent,  admiratus  est.  Liv.  3«,  15.— Cicero  ea  qu:e  nunc  usu  veniunt,  cecinit  ut  vales. 
JNep.  Att.  16.— Dionysium  dimisi  a  me,  ut  maqistrnni  Ciceifnium,  non  liibentur;  vt  homi' 
netmnqrdtum,  n(m  invltus.  Cic.  Att.  8, 10.— If  the  accessory  predicate,  attributed  to  a 
pers(m  or  thinff,  is  represented  as,  bcin?  falsely  attributed  by  the  subject,  or  as  beint^ 
.tir/uraftveli/  compared  v\ith  the  thini?  (.r  perstjn  referred  to  (beinir  an  abbreviated  orcon'^ 
deiised  SIMPLE),  the  conjunction  taviquam.  quasi,  or  relut  jjenerallv  takes  the  place  of 
ut,  as:  Ficta  omnia  tamquam  flasculi  decidunt.  Cic.  Off.  2, 12.— Herodotus  quasi  sedatm 
a//««M  fluit    lb.  Orat.  12— Oculi  in  ciip'ne,  tamquam  in  «rc^.  mirifice  colloc  ati  sunt.  lb. 
ri.  D.  L,  56.— Ex  vita  discCdo,  tamquam  ex  dorm,  non  tamquam  ex  fiosjntio.  lb.  Sen.  23. 


748 


COMPARATIYE  CLAUSES. 


Auri  ar-entlque  n.nm,  r.^/«  omnium  scderum  7^'^'^^,'^'/"^,;;lV*J;,Tw"af  re/"u^ 
n  I^out  (in>*tPadof  pro  eo  iit)  nwiius  '  accord in/j  as  \-   I'roHt  tcmpiis  ac  rts  Hucrti. 

^m^rSj  al  time  a.Kl  c'lrcnmstances  would  p.-rmit.  Jj^%8- ^"tA  '\-^l;V^'^<^^I's"iS^ 
a  quoQue  navilta  opera  erat,  dnnflii  (=accordinv'  to  tho.r  ment>)  ^  ?; 'I^',- V?;r?Jr^h  m^^^ 
PMM  n^r-lr-it  «uDDcllectilein  fk'<^aiitiOrem,  pro'/^  TluTinitruu  hominir'  tac^lt:•ltL'^  feiObant. 
Sc  Iv  f  f  3I  S-^^^^^^  inlqnns  ;equnsvo  his  aut  illi.,  pro../  anunus  P"u'nannum 

aratommque  penuria  lulit  uiuoted  from  a  letter).  Cic.\  err.  *,  .i,  Oi. 

Obs  5    HvpoTUKTiCAL  QUAMTATIVK  coMPAUisoNS   (i.  e.  those  which  compare  facts 
merelv  a- "1  m'd  and  non^  arc  introduced  by  tamquam  «,  ut  ,u  i>„t  n.  ac  -t,//''^;^- 

Th esL^"»,,  Vrti\ms  m.y  tak./  the  .ame  syndetic  antecedents  f  ,;\'-l\"r;X<.VeT;e  lly 
conjunctions  (mostly  ifa,  and  .sic;  see  the  examples  in  Oas.  1.2  .^);  but  more  ir";'  «i^;''  ^ 
U  ey  e  sed  wiaiout,  anC-  syndetic  antecedent.  The  ?'<'^^^-^'^,^^[^:v:,y!i:;^XSt^X 
in  ti.e  subjunctive,  which  (deviatintr  from  the  rules  in  »»vi">"'^'VV' hu  ".  r  /^  I  (  « 
f  Hows  (hi  law  of  conseoifio»,  as  :  Tamqnam  si  emeris  me  arirento,  liber  ,v*^/ 1  Omj  "»  <  « 
/  ;"  •  iZ  Zjf  ,ne  with  monev)  Plant.  Men.  5,  M  42  -Sic  ^^7r^;^;Zt^la:F^^ 
ioLm^quusi  nihil  umquam  audifnm  de  dis  ^^}''^l'l}^^'^'''%('':' '^fj^^^^^^^^ 
thin.')    C'ic.  N.  !).:], 7.-Qu..niam  taciturnitas  l//,^^/^/^  confessiOnem   pi.,  eo    c  ^i  co«<^^ 

*  Tvi^ui^i/'i/  />aU  been  confessed)  concludere  oporteb.t  •''•'-'"»^''>''V,-""T,,  V  V^  ndhi  rl 
-Vos  QUOd".  e  i^lim  milites,  noii  lamentis  tamquam  e.xstinctos  seqiii.  sed.  tW.//  -i  adhor- 
tante^^Slmqi/i  dante.  riJ/ea/M  dlos  («.  i/'  ^..  .r.r.  ^f  i^/J^I^^H/y^,?;^  yM'^"  ^^^l 
25  :i8  — Oiiid  t-'o  his  testibus  vtor,  quasi  res  dubia  aut  ub>rnra  ^t/.^  t-^c.  IJiv.  L^^c.  4 

intouiuipiannini  sic  ro.re/,..^/, /«//.^v.frn  ^ 

6,4.-Ruflo  tuus  Ita  dedd^raf,a/ur  ut  si  essefxunx^  e  "•»^»'^  ,J''/;     "m  :.    h/T^,   4  ^ 


n/jfiivfiir    Cic  Or  1.06. — s>equani  aosenii?» -Aiiwurn  »_iiiviv..i.c..v...  .^»-  —  ^  ------    •-  ■      - 

?orre6«/i/    S^^  HY.'oTiiETicAL  MOODS  (in  the  imperfect  and  pluperf.-ct) 

a?ruuHo  fremrmftly^^         eve.i  iflhe  principal  pre.licate  i.  a  mwpreUnte,  m  ac<-ordance 
w  th    he  nl?".      hypothetical  Si-dauses,  as:  Kjus  ne-otuim  s.c  yelini  •-''•^l^V/»"-^; ',,f* 
^.S  res  mea'cic.  Fam.  2,  14.-Ita  se  ,'eran.  in  istis  Asiatics  V^^V/'i^^.'.'Vam  13  A^^2 
viil  farerf^    lb  Ou  Fi    1, 1,  c.  0.     Comp.  the  passa-res  Cic.  O.  (..  O  4,  10,  ham.  l-i.  4.1,  i  , 
i  u/4  (qi  oVe^^l  O^^^^^^^  Cic.  Div.  2.  G4.  and  Sail.  Ju,v'.10-2,  7  (qu-t  .1  0.;s.  •^'•-«••"'.^.li';';! 

?J::i.i^.  and  r./.^  are  iise<U  without  the  «deli, io.M>i  -•  !"  t  -  --^i:^"^:;    n^^i  .ic^u 


Sr  ^ ised  w    li  PAKTH  r  ALCcu.structiiUi^  «ecOrus  admo.lum  de  belh.  Romano 

crat  /alV'  ""*  /^n  (rafisifuris  in  Asiam  liomdnis  (as  if  the  lomans  ^^remffonoo 
crol'^  orertoAsia\  Liv.  :i5,  41. -Id  resp<.nsum  Latinos,  velut  ,nfn(  jamnon  conctd*-»tib>8 
lioniTini^  feroc  ores  fecit,  lb.  S,3.-Necverovelim,7/7a.i  decMrsospatto.  fi  calce  ad  car- 
/rresX-ari^^  C^  4.    For  the  u.e  of  2*/a//t  *i  iu  clauses  of  quantitative  compar- 

ieoii,  eee  j).  702,  F. 

Ons  fi  Often  quasi  (mostly  in  connection  with  vero-)  is  used  for  PEnionicAL  coGkdi- 
NAT?oN  like  /^i/(p  7:iS,  Obs.  2).  and  quamquam  (p.  .i'.KS,  Obs.  12K  10  .!es,:znate  as  un  r  e 
a  fact  whk h  would  be  true  if  some  assertion  of  another  i>^r.o„,  con  a.ned  m  t  lie  preced- 
fn  '  stMUence  were  cc.rrect.  The  predicate  of  sentences  thus  introduced  by  quasi,  is  in 
he  SUB  t^^crn-E  4.^  of  the  hypotlntic.l  or  of  the  non-hypotheti.al  tenses  "ccor.  inur 
is  the  predicate  of  the  preceding  -ntence  is  a  pretente  or  a  mu^  0'^«- 


casu  !  ih.^'n.—Oua.'-i  rcro  rejtrai  quoo  nen  |.,Mr^i.  ,,•<"■'.•:.•"  r;- \  \r^  \   n„n.i 

tu  homo  ridiculus'es,  qui  ex  mequa^ras  quid  de  ist.s  ^l^^^l^XV^IlV"^^!  ^-r^^Vi 
aut  e'^o  uuiduuam  WMZ/i  quod  iste  neseiai,  aut,  etc.  lb.  bam.  9  17,  1— .Mulia  N<ri.a  it 
ds  i  Fe  qm  .n  res  vidSres.  caus-im  nou  qmerere.  Quasi  eu'o  a.it  lien  concedeiem  nnt  ^set 
phi.sophi,  eau-am  non  qu;prere.  lb.  Div.  2.  2).  4fi.--Expo-u.t  vasa  ^^''"'''; .,<?'(.' ;^'/'f^^ 
i^sset  Dio-enes  Cynicus  morluus,  et  non  diMni  hominis  Afncam  mors  houestarttui .  lb. 
Mur.  36.   "  .  J        J     .       * 

Obs  7.  Very  freqnentlv  quasi  (sometimes  telnt  Axx^lawquam^S^  "^f.''/'','^^"'.!!'.^... 
H(»m  ■  sinje  Jord,  f,ei.iir  In  any  irramm:itnal  relation  (either  a  «"''•J»'^^.?' V;^.^'l  ^  "'*il?^  ; 
predicate,  .>r  anvpart  of  speech).  a<  a  FiorKATivK  kxpuessios  ^  =  "  «-'^^'J^/f .  V,^'  ^,!  '^i^ 
cnim  homines  qua^i  specfafdre^  rerum  c«-le.tuim  (a  trope  taken  from  the    »    '•  '•  ^'f; 
N  D  2  .%  --Quo  plures  dot  tibi  tamquam  ansas  ad  repreliendendain.  lb.  Am.  lb,  5J.— 


QUALITATIVE   COMPARISON. 


749 


Anrcs  dnros  et  miasi  cornedtos  (a  diminutive  formed  by  Cicero  himsclf=*hornish  ')  ha- 
bent  introitiis.  lb.  N.  I).  2.  57.— ILec  est  irravium  hominum,  ilia  (auteni)  quasi  assentato- 
rum  populi,  multitudinis  levitatem  voluptate  quan  titillantium.  Jb.  Oft".  2. 18.- S.  d  est 
alius  qiioque  aditiis  ad  multitudinem,  ut  in  universOrum  animos  tamquam  influere  pos- 
{'Tmus.  lb.  Off.  2,».— Sum  I  liomi  /es  qui  ty^/avi  c/e  industrid  (almost  on  purpose;  the  Latin 
expression  hi-'uxn  Jigvratire)  in  odium  P.  K.  irrueie  videuiitur.  lb.  Verr.  1. 12.— Haec  ne- 
quicquam  velut  ralicindtn^  Romruius.  Liv.  3."),  23.— If  the  word  thus  de^igllated  as  fi<,'ura- 
tive.  is  a  noun  which,  in  Enfrlish,  would  take  an  indefifnte  article,  the  indefinite  adjective 
quidam.  or  aliquis  is  «jenerally  added,  as:  Ei  qui  qua-i  mairnam  qua"da?n  insulam  inco- 
lunt,  quam  nos  orhem  terra;  vocamus.  Cic.  N.  D.  2,  Mi.— Mors  est  qucedam  quasi  tniqraiio 
cominiitatioque  vita;,  lb.  Tutc.  1, 22.— Odyssoa  Ilumeii  est  tamquam  opus  aliquo'd  DiX,- 
dali.  lb.  Brut.  18. 

Obs.  8.  (Jeu  is  used  as  a  comparative  conjunction,  both  in  the  classical  poets,  and  in 
the  prose-writer>  of  the  silver  a^e  :  1)  with  the  meauiui,'  of  ut  in  a  simile,  as  :  Squannim 
iiiceiidebat  fuI<;or,  ceu  nubibus  areiis  rnille  tratiit  varM>s  adverso  sole  colOres.  Virjj.  ^En. 
5,S<).— Soc^//  d  with  the  subjunctive^ m/  si:  Ctu  lapidem  si  jiercutiut  lapis.  Lucr.'tt,  100. 
—2)  With  the  meanini,'  of  tamquam  (asif):  Ut  <?lorio>issima8  victorias,  cew  damnosas 
reipiiblicie,  increparet.  Suet.  Tib.  .52.— .*i>  With  the  force  of  ut  parenthetical  :  Rediicto 
coma  capite,  ceu  noxii  solent.  Siiet.Vitell.  17. — \)  With  the  nieatdns;  of  r/?/a^t  tv/o,  used 
coonlinatively  for  denial  (Obs.  r.):  Veuvtro  non  hoc  etiam  iudit;natiOne  sacrie  parentis 
expriini  possit.  Plin.  H.  N.  piuf.  1. 

Obs.  9.  Clauses  denoting  a  comparison  of  pifferent  quality  or  manneu  take  the 
SYNDETIC  at).tective  anteokuknt  alius,  and  the  advekbial  antecedents  aliter  and  con- 
tra.    The  CLAi'.sE  is  introduced  : 

1)  By  «f  or  a/que,  whicli  coirespond  to  *  t/ian  '  after  'other  \  to  '■from^  after  'different  \ 
aj\d  lo  ' to'  Hhvr  ' contrarij\  as:  Potest  aiiud  ndhi  ac  tibi  vidch  (I  mav  have  anf>///^r 
view  than  you  have  ;  or  '&  \\ew  different  from  yours').  Cic.  Orat.71.— Si"^  esseiit  omnia 
mihi  soliiti-sinia,  tamen  in  republic-l  non  atius  eVsem  atque  nunc  sum.  lb.  Fam.  1,9,21. 
Lonire  a'la  ac  tu  scripseras  narrantur.  lb.  Att.  11,  K»,  2.— Morini  loii<;e  alia  ratiOiieac  reli- 
qui  lialli  helium  ^erere  insiiiueriint.  Cies.  B.  (i.  y,  2H,— Ne  sim  saivus  si  a/iter  scribo  ac 
beiitio.  Cic.  Att.  Hi,  Via,  1.— Qui  nuntijlrent  aliter  causam  a'_'i  atque  idi  exist imtlient.  lb. 
R.  A,  22.— Ea  res  lon'.re  aliter  ac  ratu<  erat  evCnit.  Sail.  Ju^.  7.— Illi  nejilbant,  sibi  judi- 
cium siimptilros  contra  atque  o  imis  Italia  popuhisque  Ronulnus  judicavisset.  Cjes.  B.  C. 
v).  12.— Vidis  omnia  fere  contra  ac  dicta  sint  ab  haruspicibus  eveni>se.  Cic.  Div.  2.  24.— 
Sometimes 67-f/a'/>;es'  ate  used  after  aliter:  Sed  si  aliter  vt  dixi.  accidisset.  Cic.  Rep.  1.3. 

2)  I?y  qi/am,  (ranly  by  ac)  when  the  syn(letic  ant-cedent  is  connected  with  a  negation, 
as:  \irtiis //j'/t/ (;/i'/</  e-t  quam  in  se  perfecta  iiatQra.  Cic.  Lcl'.  1,  8.— AV  «/i/^/*  Horteu- 
sius  quam  e;,'o  velim,  meum  laudet  ini^mium.  Ih.Verr.  1.  9,  21.- A>cquicqnam  ali"d  opus 
est  quam  abro^'ari.  II).  Att.  H.  15.  5.— Lysander  fiihil  aliud  molltus  est  quam  ui  omnT>  ci- 
Tiiilt"-  in  sua  tenCret  potestate.  Nep.  Lys.  1.— Valerius  et  Ilotatius  netjdbatd  se  aliter  iiC- 
ros  quam  si  decemviri  «leponereni  insiirnia  mauittriltus.  Liv.  .3. 51.— Tlius  "non  aliter 
quam  '  may  be  followed  by  a  hypothetic.il  Si-clause:  In  senaiu  nihil  actum  aliter  quam 
si  plebis  ibi  esstt  consilium  (-'quam  ar/erefursi,  etc.)  Liv.  2:i,  A.—Contj-a  may  l)e  followed 
by  q'lam,  even  if  not  connected  with  a  negative:  De  vestr»)  jure  contra  quam  proj)osue- 
ram,  jiidicilbo.  Cic.  Dom.  40. — Quiim  c'o////'rt  fecerint  quam  polliciii  sint.  H).  Leg.  2.5.— 
Generally,  however,  \i  alius  is  connected  with  a  negative,  7iidi  is  used  an  place  of  quam. 
See  p.  710,  Obs.  7. 

Obs.  10.  Peculiar  is  the  use  of '  nihil  aliud  quam''  or'  quid  aliud  qvam\\\\\h  the  mean- 
ing of  the  particle  'only',  when  'aiiud'  has  entirely  lo^t  the  quality  of  an  absolute  ad- 
jective, 1-:  Per  aspera  priino,  rdhil  aliud  quam  \i!i  impefini,  iOre;  They  marched,  being 
Idndered  cnli/  »)y  the  roarl.  Liv.  27, 18.  —  Hostes  uihi'  aliud  quam  perfOsis  vano  tiniOie 
Itomnni-'.  citato  agniine  abeiiiit:  i.  ^..'wheti  the  Romans  had  been  mei^ely  seized  with 
an  unnecessnry  fear.  lb.  2,  {i'\.—Quid  aliud  quam  admonendi  essCtis?  Notliing  would  be 
ueces-iarj'  but  to  admonish  ycui  (=:it  would  be  onlij  necessary  to  etc.).  lb.  22,  GO. 

Obs.  11.  Frequently  <^//tw.«  (like  eV7ewi>  takes  propositions  coordinated  hy  et,  ac.  or  qne, 
instead  of  comparative  clauses,  as:  /l/i<7  ciusa  est  ejus  qui  ca'amitate  premitur.  et  ejus 
qui  res  meliOres  qiuerit.  Cic.  Off.  2.  18  (The  cause  of  one  \*  ho  is  in  distress  U  different 
from  the  Ciiuse  of  one  who  is  looking  for  better  things).— Pompgjus  solet  a'iud  sr-ntlre 
et  loqiii.  lb.  Fain.  8  1.3.  Frequently  a/i //v.  in  place  of  taki;  <:  a  comjiaiative  clause,  is 
repeatt-d  in  a  coOniinate  a-yndetic  propo>ition,  as:  /1/j^/r/ est  enim  laboiSre,  a/i^/d  dolgre; 
Wonyiiii:  one's  self  isditlerent  fro:;!  grieving  (=:Laboi are  est  r?/??/</rtCdolere).  Cic.  Tu-c. 
2, 15.--.4//'/f/  est  inaleiiicere,  ftH'id  acciisaic.  lb.  Ciel.  3.— J/t7^r  loqueris.  ff/i/'er  vivis, 
Sen.  Vit.  B.  IS. — Scitis  esse  notissimnm  ridiculi  genu-',  quum  c//iw(^  exspectamus.  aliud 
dit  itur.  Cic.  Or.  2  t)3. — Di.xi  enim  rationem  aliam  esse  ]ot\.  aliam  severitfiiis.  lb.  2.  65. 
Dolus  mains  est  quum  aliwi  airitur,  a'iud  simuiatur.  lb.  Top.  i». — Alia  legatio  dicta  erat, 
cUia  data  cbt.  lb.  Att.  2, 7,  3.— Turpe  est  aliud  loqui,  aliud  senfire.  Sen.  Ep.  24. 


£1 


;* 


■'■A 


750 


COMPARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


I 


QUANTITATIYE   COMPAKISON. 


I  o. 


II.  Quantitative  CoMrARisoN. 
1.  Comparison  of  Like  Quantity. 

Rem.  52.  In  the  comparison  of  like  quantities  in  regard  to  numbkks, 
tot  and  totidem  are  ii8ed  as  syndetic  adjectivk  antecedents,  and  totiea 
as  ADVEUiiiAL  antecedent.  In  a  comparison  of  like  intensity,  the 
adieciive  antecedents  are  tantus  and  tantusdem,  and  the  adverbial  ante- 
cedents, tarn  and  tnntopere.  A  numeral  comp\uative  clause  is  lulio- 
duced  by  tlie  rehitive  adjective  quot  or  the  rehitive  adverb  quotics.  A 
comparative  clause  of  intensity  is  introduced  by  the  relative  adjective 
quautiiH,  and  the  relative  adverbs  qnantopcre  and  quam. 

OB9.  1.  In  the  numeral  comparison  of  equal  quantity  the  comparative  clanPe  j^ Jntro- 
dnce.l  by  the  relative  adjective  quot A=a.'<)  for  both  adjective  ^''^''^.""'l^'^lJ^^^^^^^^ 
dents')  fat  and  tofidem,  as:  Tot  appellatiOnes  dei  possunt  e^se,  n>'ot  umnerA  {  «  J"^"/ 
apiH-Iiations  as  fniieti..n>).  i^eu.lWn.A.l.-Ouot  hummer,  tot  Hcntentue.  ler.  I  honn  2, 
4]u.-Quot  officia  oratoris,  tot  sunt  -cera  dlcendi.  Cic.  Orat.  21.-Video,  non  mm  o  ceie- 
r.)s,  scd  te  ipf'um  /o/i^Am  verbis  edixi.-se,  ^//o<  verbis  edin  Komje  polet.  lb  \  err.  2  1, 
k-vln-is  mntatiOnes^o/i././«  sunt  r/./r>/ani.nr,rum.  lb.  Orat  J7.-Injater^^^^^^ 

occ.irs  after  fnfUifm  :  Cum  fotuiem  navibus  atfjue  erat  prolectus.  -^^1'- 'X'/'a^U.A  ..(^^  S 
of  quot  the  indefinite  relative  quotcunque  maybe  used  to  represent  an  "'^l^'^"»te  .  ber 
as  (lepen.lent  on  .he  will  of  th.-  subject,  ^^'  Quotoinqae  semltus  ^f•;'*y«"^ J  «»;"/"";/ 
iusserir.  tot  sunt.  Cic.  I.e.'.  ;i,  8.-The  adverb  totie.^  re-ularly  takes  a  clause  \s\\\\qHoties 
is:  ^.oVe.vdicimus,/o/i.xde  nobis  jndicatur.  CMc.  Or.  1.  27.-M.ror  nou  ^^^J;^' 
peretuaslitterasr////)^t^.s'a(ininto  mihi  Iratre  aflerantur.  I*>  ^""^;  V  *' V  «?H  '  "w.^ii 
coinpuiMtive  ela..-e  with  ryi/o/i.  <  relers  to  the  adjective  antecedeji  /o^  as:  i'»  f^  consul  - 
bus  mrruisset  qnoti^x  ipse  consul  tuit ;  If  he  had  s.-rved  as  a  sc.ldie.-  under  a-»  w««y  c  n- 
.uls.  ^cuinany'time^'  he  was  consul  himself  (i.  ..  'If  the  "'''|>!>^''- <>,  .,V'«,,f"'if''lf  J'  Z/ 
whom  he  i-erved,  equalled  the  [number  of]  times  he  wascon-ul  himself  ).  Cic.  »J;  .'^-  ^<^',^'- 
Such  co.istructions  are  analo-ous  to  the  relative  consti-uctions  mentioned  p.  ^  *•;[/»':• -^' 
qnonex  beinir  equivalent  U>  ^ qnot  Ticibus'  (which  phrase  cannot  be  used).  J  '  ;  ^^^^^^^^ 
?..mpara.ive  clause  in.nxuiccd  by  qnot,  so.uetimes  refers  to  t^'^.  a^^^*^''"»'\'i,f"  ^^! ''V"' 
toiler,  as:  Moverat  eum  sul)euMda  dimicatio  totie^  quot  conje.rjlti  j^upere^sei.l  (that  ho 
should  have  to  8trugi,'le  a»  many  times,  as  there  were  cimspirators  lelt).  Liv.  A  M. 

C)Bs.  2.  In  the  comparison  of  like  intensities,  the  adjective  connectives  '^a;'/"* 
{Jtanlimhia)...  qoanta.^ '  nrv.  analo-cus  to  the  ni.m.^ral  combina  ions  /o.  ('^^^J'f;;*);- -If'^^^^^^ 
as:  ya//A2est  contentiOne  actum  quanta  a-i  dc'buit  Cus.  H.  C.  .i,  111 -7^/ jV|m  tCnmn 
multuudinem  nostri  inteifccCiunt.  quantum  fu.t  diCi.  spatium.  I»- l^- <'.-';  -{^[P 
iUe  super.Ores  vicerat  -loriS,  quauto  tu  omnibus  pnestmsti;  (Bi/)  f/'*''^V  ^sl  n  f  i' 
rb.r  in  renown  to  the  former  ««'Ue.als,  a.*  (by  as  7nuch)jon  have  outdone  all.  J;'^  "^J;,-*» 
12 -Fiscus  ^/rt/i  est.  (7va/(^//n  habet.  Sen.  Ep.  H7.-Malo  benefacere  tanfumdernc^t 
quantum  houn  nialeface.-e.  Plant.  Pom..  .3,  3,  20. -Often  the  neuter  /a/*/^/m  w.  h  a  i>ar  tu e 
g.nitive  plural  is  ns.-d  with  the  meanin-j  of  the  num.ral  tot,  in  whi.^h  insta.ice  tju  y'ai.se 
IS  inlioduced  hy  qnanfuvi,  as:  In  sua  quisque  nave  dicit  se  tanium  habuissc  nautui  u/n 
quantum  oportuerit.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  5,  39. 

Obs.  3.  The  adverbial  comparison  of  like  intensities  is  made  by  the  adyerby  fam...^ 
Quam,  or  tantomre...  quantopere.     Tarn  relers  both  to  a'Jj^cttvts  (adverbs)  and  rtrb, 
tanlomre  (far  ...ore  ra.-ely  used  than  tam)  refers  only  to  vc.bs;  as:   Nulla  in-enia  /a//i 
prona  ad  invidiam  sunt  quam  eOrum  qui  -enus  ac  foi-ta.iam  suam  animis  non  a'quant. 
liv  4.)   '2— Nequeeos  ^a//i  istlus  hominis  perditi  subita  bet.tia,  quam  hominis  ainpl.s- 
si.ni  nova -.-atulaiio  commovef>af.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  S.-C^.a  nulla  i..  re  tarn  utor  7"«'"  i''  hac 
civlii  et  put.lica.    lb.  Att.2,17,2.-Ncque  enim  tantopere  «'""C  a  Crasso  di>puta  iiu  le  n 
c/m'/^/(7/xi//i.  v'/a«^ow^;vcju3()rati0.ie  in  causis  delecior.  lb  Or.  l,.^o.     Karei>  quam    s 
used  after  tantoperl  as:    Quid  est  in  vittl  tantopere  q.iierendum  </w«/n  quum  om..ia  in 
phil!.sophia,  nin/i.i  (  ..od  in  his  libris  qu.eritur?  lb.  Fin.  1,  ■i•-;.l;'^S,^'^^V'\r^'^n'^^'^.n.lv 
'tantum...  quantum'  as  accusatives  of  intensity  (Comp.  p.  2(i3,  Obs.  1),  are  not  rarely 
used  with  the  lorce  of  the  adverbs  tam...  quam,W  refernns;  to  verl)s,  as:  Si  nie  amas 
tanium,  quantum  profecto  amas.  Cic.  Att.  2,23,  3.-In  prima  ace  ante  ^^'^F'^ ^:}'-\'^^''%\\'^ 
coll.cat,  baud  tantum  eis  fldens  quantum  ab  hoste  timCr.  eos  credCbat.  Liv.  -j'.^;.-  1  .le 
neuter  accusatives  tantum...  quantum,  if  used  as  adverbial  accusatives   of    tb-iance 
have  b<.th  the  nature  of  an  alUtire,  and  of  an  adverbial  comparison,   as  :  V;\:;'!',  .7^ 
a'je-ta  mi'.snitudine  ixuUiu,  quant utn  a  f.)rtitudine  audacia.  Sen.  Ira.  1  10.     *^*1"^- ','['>;• 
when  both  tarn  and  quam  refer  to  the  same  or  similar  adjectives  or  adverbs  the  adjec- 
tives or  adverbs  are  repeated  A\to.r  quam  in  tlie  comparative  clause,  accordinjj  to  the 
rule  for  relative  clauses  (p.  506  full.,  Obs.  3),  as:  Tam  liquidus  est,  quam  liquida  tempes- 


tas  esse  sold.  •Plant.  Most.  3. 2.  64.— Quia  umqnam  obeundi  negotii  studio  tam  breti 
tempore  tot  loca  adire  potuit,  quam  ceUriter  Cn.  Pompejo  duce  tanti  belli  impetus  navi- 
jjavit  t  Cic.  L.  M.  12,  ;i4.  Hence  a  comparative  clause  belonj^Mi.g  to  the  compound  ante- 
cedent tamdiu  is  more  frequently  introduced  by  quamdiu  than  by  quam  (p.  074,  Obs.  6, 
toll. ..— II  a  nufneral  comj)arison  of  like  quantity  is  to  be  made  by  absolute  adjectiveit,' tot. . . 
quot '  are  not  used,  but  tam..  .viulti  (multa)  followed  by  quam  or  '  qvam..inulti  {multa)\ 
are  substituted,  as  :  Nemo  orator  tam  multa,  ne  in  Gr:eco  quidem  otio  scripsit,  quam 
w///a  sunt  nostra.  Cic.  Or.  :iO,  168.— Virtu te  ipsa  non  tatn  ;«w//:i  praediti  esse  ouam 
videii  volunt.  lb.  Am.  26.  »8. 

Obs.  4.  Frequently  comparisons  of  equal  quantities  or  intensities  are  made  hy  aque 
...atque  {ac)  in  connection  with  an  adjective,  to  denote  a  perfect  equality  of  two  quan- 
tit.itive  ideas,  as:  Quie  l)enetlcia  <pywe  magna  non  sunt  hal)enda  atque  ea,  quie  consi- 
derate deiata  sunt.  Cic.  OlT.  1, 15.— Ale  certe  habebis,  cui  et  carus  ceque  sis  ct  jucundus  ac 
fuisti  patri.  lb.  Brut.  71. 

Obs.  5.  If  two  quantities  or  the  intensity  of  two  qualities  or  actions  are  so  compared 
with  each  other  that  tliey  are  represented  as  inckeasing  or  decreasing  in  like  pro- 
portion, the  Enirlish  lanf,'ua;.,'e  introduces  each  proposition  by  ' /Ae '  before  a  compara- 
tive, while  the  Latin  lanL,'uaL'e  uses  the  followinj,'  forms:  1)  The  construction  by  abla- 
tives OF  DiKFKRENCE  (P.  L,  p.  218),  the  principal  sentence  being  introduced  by  the  abla- 
tive neuter  singular  of  an  absolute  demonstrative  (eo  or  hoc),  or  by  tanto,  followed  by  a 
comparative  denoting  the  intensity  of  one  of  the  two  compared  actions  or  qualities; 
the  clause  being  introduced  by  the  corresponding  relative  (eo...quo;  tanto..  .quanto), 
followed  by  a  compamtive  referrinsr  to  the  other  action,  as  :  Quo  «lelictum  7naju8  est,  eo 
piena  est  tardior;  The  greater  an  oflence  is,  the  dower  is  the  punishment.  Cic.  Case.  3, 7. 
—  Quo  ca/iv  acceptiarque  om.iibus  erat,  eo  mors  ejus  (■v.^pectior  fuit.   Liv.  35, 15.— §mo 
;>///.s- ncipit  .-iniinus,  //oc  .se  rnagis  la.xat.  Sen.  Ep.  I(i8.— (;>(«/«/o  divtim  con^iOmro,  tanto 
mihi  res  videtnr  obscurior.  Cic.  N.  D.  1,  22.— If  tuch  periods  are  dependent  on  another 
sent(!nce  by  means  of  a  relative  connection,  the  relative  comparative  clause  is  elegantly 
inro'red  in  the  governing'  relative  (p.  5;J4  foil.),  as  :  Itaque  benignitas  benignitate  colitur, 
qua  quo  in  j)lures  usus  sis,  eo  Tninu<  in  multas  uti  possis  (for,  the  greater  the  number  of 
those  who  have  partaken  in  if,  the  fewer  are  those  to  whom  it  may  still  be  applied).  Cic. 
Oil.  2.  1.").— 2>  The  construction  by  ineans  of  a  comparative  Ut-clause  with  quisqne  and 
a  srPKULATivE,  the  principal  sentence  being  introduced  bv  i/a  or  «c  likewise  followed 
by  a  superlative.    This  lorm  is  used  if  the  subject  is  indefinite,  belonging  to  a  plurality 
of  inditinite  or  definite  peryons  or  things,  as  :   Ut  qul^que  a^t  vir  optimus,  ita  diffifUliTiie 
\i<i>i-  alios  improlxis  suspicatur,  Cic.  Qu.  Fr.  1, 1.  c.4  (the  better  a  man  is,  the  vwre  unwill- 
ingly will  he  suspect  others  to  be  wicked).— T/  quaque  res  est  turpisdma,  tdc  maxime 
et  ;/irt''//vV><//i<i;  vindicanda  est.  lb.  Cajc.  2,  7  (the  more  dixgraceful  an  action  etc.).— C? 
quisque\u  Uvzii  ytostilinu.'i,  ita  in  periciilo /wt/i'C*?/)-'*  (virtual  superlative)  erat.  lb.  Verr.  2, 
5,34  (The  more  backward  any  one  was  in  the  flight,  the  more  was  he  exposed  to  dan<rer, 
=  every  one  that  was  last  in  fliirht.  was  the  first  in  danger).— .3)  Ihe  fir.-t  form  with  abla- 
tives of  dillV-rence  and  comparatives,  is  sometimes  aj)plied  to  indefinite  persons,  with 
quixque  or  with  the  indefinite  quis,  immediately  after  the  relative  quo  or  quanto  (see  p. 
532),  as :  Quo  qui.<que  afqtfriu.><  adversiis  Kon.anos  locOtus  erat,  eo  spes  gratite  majm-  fuit; 
'J he  m'ne  stvtrely  a  person  had  spoken  etc.,  the  greater  was  his  chance  of  favor.  Liv.  .35, 
11.— Quo  quis  vtrsutior  et  caUidior,  hocinvisior  et  sv.^}>ectior,  detracts  opiniOne  probita- 
tis.  Cic.  Ofi".  2,  9.  Comp.  lb.  Hose.  Com.  11  (quoted  p.  5-32).— 4)  Itarer  forms  are  the  follow- 
ing :  (a)  In  place  of  tlie  ablatives  of  difl'ei-ence,  sometimes  ordinary  relatives  referring 
to  the  logical  subjects  of  the  compared  actions,  are  used:  A  quo  ex])edifior  et  celerior  re- 
niuneratio  fore  videtur,  in  evin  fere  est  voluntas  nostra  pwpenHo7'  (=qno  expeditio?'  ab 
aliquo  remuneratio  est,  eo  propeiisior  in  eum  est  voluntas).  Cic.  Off.  2,  20.— (6)  The  rela- 
tive clause  is  sometimes  introduced  by  an  accusative  op  intensity,  the  principal  sen- 
tence taking  the  companitives  magis  tnagi^que :  Quantum  in  altitudinem  progredieban- 
tur,  magift  magisque  invia  loca  excipiCbant  (=quunto  altius  progrediebantur,  eo  magis 
inria  loca  excipiSbant).  Liv.  40. 22. — (c)  In  silver  Latinity  the  demonstratives  eo  and  tanto 
are  sometimes  omitti-d,  when  the  relative  clauses  precede,  as:  (^xnA-Am,  quo  plus  debent, 
fnagi.1  oderunt.  Sen.  Ep.  19.  — ((/)  Sonieti.nes  both  propositions  are  comprised  in  a  single 
Sentence  with  qulsque  and  two  superlatives  :  Ego  enim  ignavissimo  cvlque  maxime  fidem 
hal)eo  (  —  Ut  quisqut  ignavut-^imus  est,  ita  ego  ei  maxime  fidem  habeo).  Cic.  Fam.  7, 18, 1. 
(0  In  anteclassical  language,  this  comparison  is  frequently  made  with  t((m..  .quatn  and 
either  a  comparative,  or  a  superlative  i.i  both  propositions,  as  :  Qvam  magis  a?rumna 
u.-get,  tam  inagis  ad  male  lacii^iidum  viget.  Enii.  Mtd.  fi"gin.  \).—  Qua?n  magis  la  in  alium 
caiessis, /a//i  ie?tus  te  in  portu.n  refert.  VhwW.  A^.\,ii,h.  — Quatn  magis  \d  re\)\\Xo.  tam, 
tnof/is  uror,  qiue  ineus  filius  turbavit.  lb.  Bach.  5, 1. 5. — Quam  citi9.4me  confides,  tarn 
maxime  (ix\nii'nit.  CawR.R.  64.— Quatti  acerbissimd  olea  oleum  facies, /am  oleum  opti- 
mum erit.  lb.  i<o.—Quam  maxime  buie  vana  liasc  suspicio  erit,  tamfacUliine  patris  pacem 
In  k'ijes  conficiet  suas.  Tor.  Ueaut.  5, 2, 44.  Comp.  lb.  Ad.  3, 4,  56. 


752 


COMrARATTV^E  CLAUSES. 


2.  Comparison  of  Unlike  Quantity. 

Rem.  53.  A  comparison  of  unlike  quantities  may  be  expressed  by  a 

comparison  of  like  quantities  made  negative  {non  tain quani  etr.) ;  but 

generally  it  is  expressed  by  an  adjective  or  adverb  in  the  coMPARATrvB 
DEGREE,  as  syndetic  antecedent  of  the  comparative  clause,  which  is  cither 
introduced  by  quarn,  or  takes  the  form  of  a  comparative  ablative  (Obs.  14). 
In  the  comparison  of  unlike  ncmeual  quantities  the  plural  adjectives 
q}lure«  and  pauciorei^  are  used  as  syndetic  antecedents,  instead  of  which 
freciuently  the  sintrular  neuter  adjectives  jj^m*,  amplius,  and  mimis  are  used 
with  pavtitice  genitives  in  the  plural  (Obs.  1).  A  comparison  of  unlike 
INTENSITY  is  FCiTularly  made  by  the  adverbs  7nagis  and  ?>nnus  as  syndetic 
antecedents,  the  former  of  which  is  frequently  mersjed  in  the  compara- 
tive DEGREE  of  a  DESCRIPTIVE  ADJECTIVE    Or  ADVERB   (OBS.  7.  10).      In 

place  of  viagis  the  sin!j:ul:ir  neuter  adjective  plus  is  used  in  certain  in- 
stances as  adverbial  accusative  of  intensity  (Obs.  7,  C).  The  mood  of  the 
comparative  clause  is  reirularly  the  indicative,  except  when  the  clause 
iini)lies  a  denial  under  an  afliimative  form  (Obs.  12). 

Ob^  1  A  comparison  of  unlike  numkrical  qcantities  is*  made  l)y  the  plural  afljec- 
tives»  nliire.'i  {mon-)  nud  paueidre^  (fewer),  as  :  Verren  plur^.<  Hocinriim  tirhe^,  qyam  Mum- 
mius  hosiium  t^imlias^^e  vitiGliir.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  .*!  4.— Sic  habefute,  pf>oe.-<  esse  a  Syracusjlnis 
i^llu>4  adventu  dtos  \i.  e.  ^tatiias  deOriim),  qunm  virtoriil  Marcelli  Iwnimts  desKienltoi*. 
ih  2  4  ^^—Khnhanii  ;>/w;fA' ab  ipsis  rectorJl)ii!*  quam  ab  hos'fe  iiiterfocti.  Liv.  !:i.4.«.— 
Ihvc'ad  te  nha-ibus  I'erOis  scripsi  qu(im  soleo.  CMc.  Earn.  7,  l.O.-Cautiim  est  in  ScipiOnis 
le'Mbu-  lie  «/«messcnt  in  senfltii  ex  cnloiK-rum  immero,  q>mm  ex  vetere  A  <jrni,'eii  nig- 
rum lb  Verr.2,2.50.-7V^/m  dixi  qi/am  \uhi\.  lb.-2.  r),:iO.-/V//m  (  =  inore  books)  brevi 
tempore  eversjl,  auam  inultis  anius.  stante  republic;!,  scripsimus.  Il>.  OH.  ;i  1.  —  / /'/ra 
etiam  dicta  <iuam  scripta  sunt.  lb.  Brut.44,  IW.-Quo  quum  ali(inanto  /Hjunores  quam 
umquam  ante  venissent.  Liv.  3(),  15.— Multo  pauciOrts  otatOres  (Vnim }K,iliF  fma  rcperien- 
tiir  Cic  Off  1.3— In  place  oi  pauciores  frequently  the  neiraiive  exprest^ion  'nanus 
imiltV  (iiterallv  'lei<,<  many')  is  used  :  Cum  Spartaco  minus  multi  (i.  e.  quam  cum  Scap- 
tio>  primo  fuer'unt.  Cic.  Att.  (),2,8. -In  ph.ce  t.f  both  phire.^  and  2>(a/cwre.^,  the  sm^u  ar 
neuter  adjectives  7>^/^-  and  miuu.v  with  plural  i)artitive  irenitivc!*  are  frequently  used  if 
the  phrasi  is  in  the  nominatire  ..r  arcumfire  (P.  I.  p.  2»i7.  §  371).  as  :  (,)unm  jdu>^  cladmrn 
intulissetf/z/amaccepissct.  Uw^o^i-l.-Samidlium  plus,  quam  velleut,  intra  m<enla  eusc 
rebantur.  lb.  8, 25. 

Obs  2  An  adverbial  numeral  comparison  of  nnlikc  quantities  i«  used  if  one  of  the 
compared  quantities  is  represented  as  a  mal/iiUe  of  the  other  ('^o  many  times  more  or 
•80  much  inore  W/i«;<,  -twice  etc.  as  much  as').  For  tins  kind  ot  omparison  the  fol- 
lowim'  forms  occur:  1)  Ablatives  ok  uifferknce  with  the  iionn  pavtihiis  ami  an  in- 
detiuite  or  definite  numeral  witii  a  comparative  adjective  (as  vutjor,  ampUor  vie.)  as  : 
Sol  multis  partifjus  miuonxuina  atnplior  est  quam  terra  universa;  '1  he  ^iin  is  many  times 
greater  than  the  whole  earth.  Cic.  NM).  2.  3.i.-Quid,  ^i  doceo  te  dnahus  parhbus  am. 
plius  frumenti  abstulisse  quam  populo  Romano  misis:<e  {tmC'^  as  mwh  ^rain  as  etc.]  lb. 
Verr  2  3  19  — Mathematici,  »»olem  ami)lius  duodeviqinti  parfihiis  couWrm-MM  majoreni 
esse  qiJam  terram.  lb.  Ac.  2,  20.-2)  The  adverbial  accusative  tantum  or  the  ablative  of 
difference  tanto  with  a  cardinal  adcerb  and  a  comparative,  as:  7er  tanin pejor  ma  est. 
quam  illam  tu  esse  vis.  Plant.  Pers.  13,  73.-Ltea  nv^xxx^ma  denes  '^J'^i^/'^^'J/'/W^ 
quanti  essent,  icstimarentur.  Liv.:}0.44.  Comp.  the  examples  p.  2».4.  Obs.  4,-  One  Ualf 
as  much  more '  or  •  less '  is  expressed  by  '  dimidio  plus  quam  ,  or  dwndio  min  us  quatn  , 
and  Uts  many  men-e  than\  by  ' iaufo  plures  quam\  as:  hocu^dimidio  miu'is  quam 
civibus  daluin.  I.iv.  41,  13.-r(/«^o  /;/^/;f.s  ablati  er.nt  quam  relicti.  Ck.\  err,  >  :>,2H.-3) 
In  anteclassical  lan-ua-e  the  plural  neuter  of  tantus  is  sometimes  ined  as  ablative  of 
difference,  with  the  force  of  a  noun  ^tribus.  qualuor,  tanlis  r///(////  =  by  tine-  etc  multiples 
of),  as  :  (A<;er  ille)  Iribus  lands  minus  redil  quam  obseveris.  1  laut,  lrin.--i,4,  i;,.». 

Obs  3.  Both  plus  and  ami>lius  are  used  to  npresent  a  numerical  qtiantity  an  inuepinitk 
in  rec'ard  to  its  excess  over  a  f,'iven  definvt^  number,  accoidinj;  to  the  idiom  explained  ^  3U 
(P  I^p  21'»)  For  this  relatitui  the  loUowimr  formulas  are  used:  1)  t'lus  {a/u/jlius)  qiaim 
decern  mililes.-2)  Plus  {amj)lius)  dtcem  milites.-Z)  Plus  (amplius)  decern  mihlibus.  1  he 
game  lormulas  are  used  with  yninus,  in  place  of  plus,  to  represent  less  than  u  fjiven  quan- 
tity    The  comparatives  plus,  amplius,  minus  alwaye  remain  uuchauged.    lu  the  nrac 


4 


4 


QUANTITATIVE  COMPARISON. 


753 


AMPLE..  Fikstform    lA-  i'eri     on  no^^^  '"'*'  ':^ '"'''^  freq-ently  nsec..-E.x. 

atjlieut   C'ic  VeiV  •>  ^  47  '  vt^,         •'      7"*  "^  ?^^"''  1"^^  ^^^^''*  medimmi  ex  ju-ero  ex- 
2.W     I^'reh^nlthi.^•,oi.n,l;^^^^^^^^^^ 

^eu  plures  o,  am  t/^cJm  ;  r  v?'nr    .nr  /      ,/,i  /  "^^"^ ,'"  place  of /;^/.-  or  amplius.  as: 

hahc.o.  L\v.:S<.m.-^ycoV^^^^  ?'.^^''"'"  Pl"'' Qnam  trfirinfa  remis^.jPur, 

Ampnus  ,unf  seTmeni^    nriT^^^^^^^^^^^^  Liv.  42,8.- 

CunVentu  Svracu>Zrir.\V,V  2  -^".0  '  \wf''-'^  '''"^'  Romanos  ImbCbat  ex 

3»),.3S.-Num  JiocLTno  17,/;  -'^;  ;».  •~l^''^i;  «'''^'^'<''  -^^'«^  ceriamen  sustlnnere.  Liv. 

non  amplL:  h^m.m'",/^^^.?' ;  Zt  left^KnSr  n;  ^'^^  f''  ^>^'  ^-^^V^^ 
diesf^nm.  Ilaut.  Trin  2  4  1  —()ni<AnL?lt         ^uMinCre.    Ih.2,  xb.l.—3hnus  quwdecwi 

annOrum    more rn  '«^^IvtrC-u  i^!^  Uv^^  RomSnos  q„„ni  plus  dlrenforum 

l.roxima  Eiilxeie  est  nr  r  itr  .iVu-n^^  q>/alyor  millium  (passuum)    inde   in 

conlin-top.  115   /Mt  2    \o  4     Vl^V^  d      Tm«"  "  ^«r^^''^"  -^^^"  ''''^•*''*  '"«ad :    ac- 

venisset.  minus  tfim„fn,m?u,.  M-..  .n  ':  *l.-.„^.^/- .-     ^^'^'  '"iitfl'e.Lieiilius  cum  lnteria 


^nannuum  (  =  ..e  duret'   .lu.  quauTu  m  am.um      Cic   \t^^  ^'^V 

uuo  nummo  plus  petas-  Indeed   I  wi.    vn  ,  !.t ,    i  V         7^  iiercle.  ut 

than  yon  are  entitled  toVpimit'Mostll^  119.  ""^  ""'^  '''''  '''^'''''  ''^''^  ^^•^• 

nu^n"hei^isT)iLvT!;  .'I'V""''"^  are  nsed  when  the  existence  of  an  excess,  or  of  a  lesser 
H,    t     ■«      <•  „~      "^'- '     J  <''.v\s:notus  i,on  sunt  us  ptu.^  quam  (jua'uor  cokyrihus    V\c 

'7./^/..rfu;s.e  i  V  2r-'4  in  r  n  t  ^•""■'^"^''^/f  ''^"  '"i""''  ducentos  Carihnoiniensium 
«//.yVi/^s  i.;  fi.  Jnr  i/i^TAvJv  ""^i'^^'»"'"^  ho^tium  a-nie,,  et  nostrum  primum  non 
umpnu»  quinis  aut  sems  naUibus  passuum    iitererat.  (•ie<  B  G  1  n  — Kn.fiii.ntiv  fi>» 

h^l^Mn^'Mlir,;'""'  ^'r^''^K>  'I'or^  rniuus^  are  parenthetic allvinseVted  in  h?  ;m  'enc^ 
Iti  n^  as  V,?n  "■')  ^";'""'>V"  «»'<.s:.me  construction  as  it  would  hc^v  1  out  tSai- 
11  tons,  as.    /JUG,  hand  ampln,s,  jndliu  peditum  cum  M.-.-One  effn-'Grunt    J  iv  2^  21 

(  V  rum  i  see  ,V-      est    nf -ji^^^  '''"■^""'  '^  <P'i"^I"m>da,  non  minus,  ade^f^vui, 

IS      Tf   L.W)  .  '   •      7.^-  I''-.-^~-2^--<^ium  111  senatu  centum,  non  minus,  essent    lb  39 

:  tlms  'm;  TVs''l  ee  yji!'  ^•«'"';  "^"'V'l'^  "--tl,  ^^^  mrKUAT.vE.  'nemir>us^rn:pl^^ 
ni,        !]^^    I  :  "^^'.«^"•/V"'"'^'''*^  tru/inta.  ne  minus,  adessent  (the  roakm^^  'hi- 

ori.iuity  conjectures,  partly  reslinir  «.n  inferior  authority)  Cic  Veir  2  2  V.7  fumnMr..- 
Locum  const.tnir.  quo  duo.  ne  plus,  necessarii  caplv.e  ciim  auro  Unirent.  Liv  ii  SI' 

t\nuf  ,^:  ??:^  ''''^""'*  '"."•■'"'!'»  <Vlu>'^^Y  minus\\\\\Hm\  quam  ,-  hiU  luA  '  amplius')  is'some- 
A  ,  -  1  ?-^''  t-xi)ress  indetiMite  excesses  over  quantities  (intensities)  not  nimier.  T.  • 
T  ^Fuf  i-o%"  'T''  J'*'"/-^^'^ ^^-^^  />^-  ^-^i-^  (you  ^^•iH  "^'  "lore  than  suffidcn  ly  varni) 
mUlo.1  u.r\-  J  -^•^^'*l"t^""y  '^'^'  Urst  lormula  (with  an  indecli.  able  ;>/./..  and  quam)  i 
i   ttn      l^'^^'T'  *"■  "^""•'  «:'-M>nv-siM-  QUAL1TIE.S,  to  represent  them  ai  beiii-  of  ffiSe? 

eiaut  (resources  more  than  ordinary).    Liv.  21,  2.-Perfldia  plus^quam  PunicaiaUhh 
nnn^^""  ZT""  *^'""  ^'""'^^  ^''-  -1'  4  -Id  hand  nia-num  quiUem  o^iSum  est   tJ  nlm 
quam  medilerraneum,  celebre,  ct  Irequens  empoiiimi.  lb  38, 18.-E  iam  Pontidius  S 


754 


COMrARATIVE  CLAUSES. 


ta^  nrlvatas  cmi^aaactitJlvit,  noc  hohci»  (fuU)  in  c.iupis.  vel  dicam  plus  otmm  qvam  non 
l^^^?/  a.-  Brut.  70.  Dixit,  primu  pra-lia  GallOnnn  pin,  qunm  rironmi,  iM.^.ruma  ,nxnus 
o^uuHfeminarum  i'^sv.  OrMX\r^  "^^'^-  Je<H  than  vvom.-n).   l^>.v   10  ^. 

C'nntit  or  ^^^^^  libcratOri-spopuli    Honiili.i  coi.^ervat..rcsquc  reipubliciP  Mut.  phis 

^mm  ^im/•/ol^  )  ".;.^  7^«m  ho,nicidas,  plus  eliam  quavi  parricidus  e.^e  (e.-.m  Ihau  a.- 
tfussinc  etc.)  Cic.  Phil.  2, 13.  . 

Obs  6.  In  the  comparison  of  i-miKE  intexsitv.  p/'/x  and  /«int/.«  (al-^o  ^'^yf ';;•'" '/''r- 
t-iiii  conn.'  tioiis)   with  7«aw.  i.rc  u-tMl  a-  AUsonTii  adject.vks,  nih.  r  u-i(/w/t  n.y  ad- 
t  n^7^f^^\^ku*  'he  -.ncr.l  idea  of  intensity  (;>/'/.•  =  a  L^reater  amount)  or  w. 
parfUn-e  genitive^  in  (he  d„q>dar,  expressing  tne  ^xv^WAx  atn>>„Uve  'more    or     .-ss    m 
c^M.er  foT,    vi<h  a  nonn  denoting  a  ma/eri //  or  a  y./a/./y  Un..n' silvrr   more  emir  il^o 
ete   .as:  Plusqaamcr^X  ei   eonee.^u.n  l*;«i''ns  i.npenlvit  ;  he  e«)nn.v.nd>Hl  /m^^ 
he  mide  lar -rr  reuuisitions)  than   was  allowed   hy  the  laws.  Cic  \en.  ^^ '^'^'-^f'i 
\^\Zcx^pl.s  quln  tibi   d.Ou.am,  nenuttetn.  lb.  t'^""' «f' \- ••-^'"::,^;;«'JV'f  ^^^^^^^ 
re.ididi^ti.  lb.  3. 13,  I  -Vlu.^  tibi  virt...  tua  d.d.t  quam   1«!';  ^  1*    .^^^''^J'^-;' \^;  V.^i 
Si  niilii  tecum   minus  es^et  qiuim  est  emu  tuis  omnibus,  lb.  l.>.  10,  ^.-7 /'/*•   ".fq"'- 1  i] 
dl      aVi^^^^^^^^^  reifammm-u.  lb.«,  H,  2.-Ca-cIna  in  hae  re  plus  xm\n  mnmi 

SmSi^rS  lb.Ciec.8  2-2.-Siestenim  aliMtti-l    /,/».  .>t  t^oui  qumn 

?ut5  am    lb  Att.  2,  7,  4.-Nec  7nin„.  op.ris  labori.^que  i-x  oppu-natu-ino  ouam  "'^«^-^f  « 

;bm.Lrv.:^fK50.-S«withc..mparativ 
Noil  verendume-t  ne  ;>///,s' rtY//'0  in  amicitiam  e(.n^<Taiur.  Cic.  Am.  lb.—    Moieinonfy  , 

iLl-  /,l ru   Ll    ciintnor  columiris  dealbandas  quam   ille  omi.Is  a>diUeandas  l,.ctl\it. 
CirVer    2  1  5«;  -^Accip  te^  '  inn  in  „dnOre  peanij  non  minus  iM.pu(le..ten.  oalu.nnmm 
^aValum  iv  reVe'riti '  to  a  ^mal:er8um  of  mo,u-y).  lb  2,2.1».     rius  and  vn>;us,  in  tl.iseon- 
truet'  ^..'ca;,  Ve  m^^  in  the  nominatire,  accu.adve.nna  in  '";:.  r/^';;/^-;;   I'-.J^^!':^ 

va;u.-(ac(<n(lin.'  to  p  2()i;  foil.) :  /V?//i.sVfndidt  <iecumas  quurn  eetm.  tie.  V  t-rr.  -£..<,    .. 
r       1  (  'tii  H   r^  1>l>o-i'<  Hit  (will  be  worth  mon-)  quam  nun  mudo  hostes,  M-d  etiam 

Jr  m  «  n  8  ri  Edui  b  F a  n.  7.  10,  4.-Sotnetinu-s.  instead  ..f  pins,  the  dnnn.ut.ve  form 
•^'Jl^S  occ»;-  ;  Am(!;-i  no^-r.;  plu.'.Uum  ^.x  . title  niynM  '{'"Z^^^^uS:^^ 
iM-.ri.ir,.  cir  P\im  .5  12  3— ,4/// ///i '/.«.-,  as  an  absolute  a<//*t7<rf.  it  used  .i- an  t  qui  van  nt 
o^^m>y'    imi,    "th^  Kl'O,  hoc  oui-re  suscepto,  et  n-eepia  c.usa 

S  ci  U-  'i  'a  eVu'  an  mV>  sum  aliquant*,  a^^^^^^^  (..  o.  ^.mm.in  hac  .•au>il  continC  ur  ; 
^nm^it  d^iiaddili^^^^ ')  •  su-eepi  enun  eau^am  totlus  ordini>»-,  suscepl  caiisam  reipi- 
b^S^  C  f  Ve?r:2^  2  i:^T;vviri,  ii  C.e^ar  ..,y./i..  obsnlum  u.  ..  51u-.-M.teH<  ed.ran  ; 
in  addition  to  those  *'iven  bfb.re)  velit,  dare  pollicentur.  (  ;es.  R  ..  b.'l.-lMcquui  y 
nnZlul  xVxllxx^^  a   lu'-.tion  or  in   intt-rroirative  pro,,o>itions.  in  which  in- 

Ht     c     t  otteeor.'  ponds  to  the  En.dish  • ./..  '.  (which  word  is  to  be  rendered  by  ^aUu. 
oi  Iv    f  it  nie-ins  '.iitl  ■rc-ne.')  ' ;  as  :   liatOru-  non  Mini  mnpliu.-^  (i.  e.  quam  dedi)  ;  I  «'"""t 
pl^J  m  ^;^:";nylSin':;   nior;.  (else).  C.e.  Verr.  2.  ^- f ---^'f '  V''^'^:^^':^  ^j; ..  ^.^ 
nn-im   lac7uin   e<t)-  notlrnirelse    s   necessary,  lb.  Qii.  V  r.  1,  .3,  ..-t^iui   t  bi   m  .i   ars 
S- -r,.  S  p..t  Tcr.  And.  2.  1,4.-Qui,l  vulti^  onfin^f    Cxc.  Mil    l-l- 

mbi  i\\c  amnriul  lb  Arch  4.-Fre(pu-ntlv  amprius  i-  ihus  u^ed  udnrhudly  as  a  pai- 
iV/.  wUh  ^iX  oi  prat^rea  (  -  in  addition  .  as  :  C;es„r  (postuhUmt)  ne  qyx^>^  am- 
%^!!lx^i^^^:'il^U^nr\  that  he  should  n..t  suff^.r.,«v  «.or.  bodujs  o  Ger- 
mans (  =  in  addition  to  tlio-e  already  in  Gaul)  to  cross  the  Kh.ne.  Ca's.  B.  G.  1,  4.i. 

Ob'»  7  K'moie'  and  '/^^,.;*' denote  the  adrerbinl  i<lea  of  intensity  Onore  =  '  in  a 
.'rertei-dejrci)  they  e  ex,.re.s>ed  by  tlu-  c.unparative  fornwulvrrb  'narjisorhyxhe 
Siicra  iSvesS/and  ///i////^.  as  adverbial  accusatives  .>f  intensity  (p.  2M.  O ns.  1). 
T»  e  adv  rl.  •  es^  is  «"^^^^^^^^^^^  exprC'sse  t  by  ^winuH\  Tlie  adverb  •  mor.-'  ,s  p-neraliy  ex- 
T,    ^iedbv'rX^^^^^^^  '»^-  infl'-^tiouMl  r<,mparative  o    de^cnpllve 

aliV-ciivesl  plu^ hZ^r  only  u^ed  in  certain  in^lanros  (No.  C).    The  adverbial   idea  of 
»  «I*,///»»' inten«*itv  '  occurs  in  the  follow  iiii:  relations  :  •   *•   ^ 

^rlncVmiiectir.n  wku  a  DKBCun'TivE  mukc  t.ve.  If  ''-'7  ;,^\^^'\^;,!1  /  .Im'S'  ' 
adjective  or  adverb  whi.h  forms  no  inflectional  de-ree-  (P.  I,  p.  ^>  'J,  .^T  f;/'/:  •,;/,."''. 
frouianvrea<(m(i)  7.V.»  Ons.  K»)  an  infl.ctional  comparative  is  not  used,  more  mu-t  in  «  x- 
Si-e-4  bv  ;m  .  I  -vc^  hv  plu.<,  as:  Nactus  sum  mauis  vlon.um  tempns  quam  umquam 
Sntea  Cic  Fan  '  ».  3.-Intelli-o,  nullu.n  luiss,-  lem|)us  quod  mar/i.<  -lebuerit  m*//'/m  esse 
S  l^Ti'  (f  ?.  VaS  ...c).  lb.  At;.  J^.  14,  l.-Nnlluui  oniciu.n  re...renda  -ratuv  naiqt>>  ue- 
?^  wi'm  -t  b  Off.  1,  15.-Facie  magi-^  quam  lacetus  ridwulux.  I''- tan..  1.  3,2.- 
T  n  m  ri  b  ec  I  on  animim  meum   inqqix  .oltiritum  habent  quam  tuum.   lb.  2.  !•.,  1  - 

natum  ii  e  auam  hiinc)  in  iu<  cium  mducere?  lb.  \  err.  2.2,  tl.— lliu-*  niaqis  mu.  l 
Ihva'sbeus?d  fa  ixlu-r  de^^^ree  is  ascribed  to  prefHi^tiona  expressions  which  have 
tie  m^e  of  a  l/i.S'i/./'itv  a. O^'tive  or  adverb,  as  :  Multo  '"«,?.  f -},  ^f,"''^'j;«''^;^'i^^ 
(  =  uattlne  conveniens)  exceleitas  animi  quam  volupta?.  Cic.  Oflf.  3.  5.-Ciuod  ita  a  te 


QUANTITATIYE   COMPARISON. 


766 


i 


pcto  vitmagiYX  animo  fas  if  =  't?iaqis  opfanf^r')  petere  non  popsim.  lb  Fam  11  22  2 
-Ilominem  hominis  incommodo  ^u^ul  cummodum  axxir^ra,  maqls  e>^t  cout,ajiafaram 
=  natanecontrar  um)7vam  mors  lb.  Off.  3.  .5.-Thus  sLu.e  imef  ul  stan  tve^  Ss^ 
the  Idea  of  intensity  to  whicti  a  hi.-li.  r  degree  is  attributed.  Such  substantives  asif 
they  were  adjective..,  are  co.inect.ed  with  magi.,  not  with  plu..-  Nihil  v  rtflu  adcM  porest 
quo  magt.  rtr/usm  (i.  e.  quam  ..st)  ;  nothing  by  wliicu  Virtue  may  be  '  ni  re  vFt-tue' 
(different  from  ^j)Ims  quam  rir/us^  acc.rdin-  tS  Obs.  5).  Cic.  Par.  .3.  l.-Nis  forte  /«/i, 
^.t  pa?Ttcida  qui  consumivm  pativm  quam  si  quis  humile.u  necaver  t  Cinie'rhe^i* 
rnoj-eofa  murderer  who  etc  ).  lb.  .Mil.  l.-Magi.  a(nH.<  lim  ....n  poiuitset  he  could  not 
have  become  '  more  of  at.  a-dile  than  lie  became),  lb.  Plane.  24.ii  the  f  dlouMn  Mm- 
sa.e  a  claiise  ol  manner  tak.s  the  place  of  a  de>criptive  adverb,  Lin- oualiflTc/^^^ 
magi.:  Ad  CicerOnem  .ta  scripsis.i  u.  m-que  severius,  nLque  temperknti  il%?ri      po  ue^- 

A  i   1?  lTTTZ'r:x^T^r'  T^r^r"  r^r  '  <  =  "^^  '"a,Ms\.x  animo  meo)^    '  ?. 
Att.  13  1,  1    [The  Cod   Me.i.  and  the  other  Codd.,  beini:  copies  of  it,  have  'vmoisouam 

aulty.     Ihe  cUxxxsa  ^  guemadmrxlum. .  .vellem' ^tHxuls  in  exactly  the  same  rel a    on  as 

befo'n'i;   ;r7.f'^'''''-'  y^'l  "'''"'  ^^"^P^rannu.:  and  does  no^more  nS^xlT'qlam' 

e..re  It,    ban  '  severe'  ixud'tempr  ranter '  \Mnxk\  do.  if  m./^i.  were  chosen  instead  of 

:^::'^  urjsrtion?'""  ^^  ^^-^^^"^'^  ^  °'"^«  ^^^^^  ^y  ^  -^^-^  who  did  11 

n    If  the  adverbial  idea  of  intensity  refer»  to  a  verb,  so  that  two  dif event  degrees  in 
ffie  i''ten.pfy  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  verl,  are  compared,  magi,  IV re^MilarJv  used 
\eibs„l   this   kind  aie  yv,?ri,  optare,  dtsiderare,  admiran,   reprehendere    ofend^e 
landare,  Uvfan,  quen  ,ollinfare,  eucruciare,  imidere.  indigere,  arch'TdJ^th?ftZl^e' 
Jfonre,    excellere,  enifcre,    conflrmdre,   minuere,   pud^t,  I  uLf,' placet;  tudVxt^vs^^^^^^ 
expressing  an  action  which  admits  of  increase';  as:  J/«7i.^t^e/>a/ An  o.do     he  was 

enio;iw;;n^i  ii''\b'q''""^     •^''^•^'■yV «^.-Adolescens  magis  Jloriut  dicendo  ? Jim 
r..  .    tTT^  //-,^]-^-^-~'*^«^'*  o.lf^ndit  niminiu  quavi  parum.  lb.  Orat.  22,  73 -Alina 

iA7  i-'      tuum  olhciuni  rf.^^(/^^o  quam  a  te  lequlii  putcavi  meum.  lb.  Fan    7  2(i  1  - 
Jlocaflirmo,  mortem  nemini  7nagis  optandum  fiii.s.se  {i.  e.  quam  mihi)    lb   Att  3  7  2  — 

f  .V". '""'V; '"•''•7V /•  '■  "^T"'  '""^"•*''  "H^*"'^  ''^  lineamenta  hospitie  dele'ctdbant.  lb.  Verr. 
2,  2,  .>(,.-  l/avi-v  //y/.eM-undere  quam  perdere.  Plant.  Peis.  4,  4.  lOS.-Quai  vis  est  ouie  ma. 
^|.<^^/r.«Miominesalnmprobitate  umni  quam  8i  sense.int  etc.  Cic.  Par.  3,  2.-Td  quod 
n  lito  magisv^x  admirandum  (i.  e.  quam  res  ip.si).  lb.  Cat.  ],  3.-Quos  mul  o  magiTre. 
rear  quamyOvxxux  honiinum,  qui  vivunt,  rumusculos.  lb.  Att.  2.  5,  L-Nihil  est  c  uod  J«- 
ii.W  !  '"  ^"-"^"^.''"M>"'^'!V  V'^"«  "«  etc.  lb.  2,  li.  l.-De  Fellci8\estame   1 0    u  1    m.i  to 

ni':      h    V  f  J  i  r      M^.^'  ''1"'^^'  quaffu  (]xxmrx  tloreb-lmus,  re  ramiliari  commintlti  su- 

ol//-" •/-]•■)''•'*'■*'. ''r^^''"'  "^   '■'^^  tnagis  jylarebat.    lb.  Qu.  Fr.  :i  l.  1 —Nihil  me  mani<t 

^oticifabati^xx^xxxxxxhx^  mole.^tiis  non  me  ridere  tecum.  lb.  Fan  .  i  12  1 -Cr"^^^^^^^^ 

e  im, /,*«r/^•^:  inc  judicio  hoc.  7'/«m  morte  inimlci  AW.7/Mm.-lb.  7,  2,  2 -.IM7  rt^^ 

SM  n  ^*'"  i".V.^-  ^'""''  ^"•'  ""'."'  """  ^'^^-  ^en.  Ben.  3.  3.5.-ln  quo  magis  reprehmTndts 

Him  (piod    I'iK.F.EA'  .«cripserim,  quam  quod  '  in  '  addiderim.  Cic.  Att.  7,  3  %  -N^si  to rte 

p>Tus  elo(,uenti;e  ;««7j«-  7^/am  quod  meatidlret,  inridh-es.  lb.  Fam.  7,  ;i3, 1  -Uii'de  ouam- 

iiuabfuisti,  ;/*«./,,■  a  me  «6..v,v^videbflre,5r./a;/,  si  d(uno  esses.  lb.  Att.  J  5 -Ni  nc  i   di- 

iiitn  meiim  xuuUomagi.<  confirmo  testimonio  tuo  (i.  e.  quam  antea).  lb.  Brut  42  -Mmis 

esset  pud,j,dam  sJ  in  sentential  permaneres.  lb.  Tusc.2,5, 14.-Nihil  ?nagis  caveSn 

e.^t  senectuti  quam  ne  lan^MiOri  so  dedat.  lb.  Off.  1,  34.  cazenaum 

hS'.ur.Y'''-'^''^'  «^"'^l''-''  'J^^'^'^^e  in  the  instance  mentioned  No.  B.  is  in  the  followin^r 
i.s  antes  expres.sed  by  ;>//^?,  as  adverbial  accusative  of  intensitv:  1)  If  the  <vovernin5 

ini^  ;;:  v>?'i^/I-"J-"'  "''"^''''  ^  ""^'A  "  ^'^'JJ  ^^^y  ^^  construed  with  t'he  accvsaliveof  indef- 
'  ^ir  !::V^^\'"'  />o.vs^.  r«A;'^.  j>otirre,  pjvdesse,  nocZre,  sapere.  The  Latin  .ays 
V     .      •  •   -I  ''{^.1"Vi  f^^''^  (  =  to  be  powerless,  to  be  powerful):  nihil  valere,  to  be  of  no 

mi  ;,.  r;/  ''"!'^^  "'•""■^''  '"''^^  '"^'"'^^  *"  ''^'  ""  'i^-noramus';  «one  of  these  verbs  ad- 
b  7;  •/'ivJ'iL' ?  Htc'»";«tJ V'  ^'-^P''^''^''^.tl  »>y  Piihsiantives.  The  intensity  of  such  verbs, 
e  er  bv  «7/  J,7  ,'' f^^f  r"^'-!-*^  hy  accusatives  of  '  intensity  '  (multum,  tantum),  and  hardlj? 
,i//  Jt Yh  •  '  *  ^"^  intensity  (adeo  tarn,  valde,  admodumetc).  The  same  V('rbs  requirb 
il-  iV  '^V.^'.-""-*^^'  «  ^'^'f^^^'  ^'(n-ee  of  their  intensity,  and  cannot  be  construed  with  magis  • 
eM',.n  I  .  ''1'"        •'  '"•■.'•1^"''*-'=*  mytros  non  modo  armis  plus  guam  ceTeras  natiOnes.  veVum 

maj^istiatus.    CiV.-.  B  G.  1,  14.     b'O  plus  j)osse  occurs  Cic.  Att  6  1  3-    Fam  5  21  2    and 

meVrL'7.uU''^^^^^^^^  Liv.44,40;-/Y;M"apnd 

Solum  mm  !m^  '^T"  ''1'-'  ?f""l^.<-''c-  ^*'"-.  1,  l.-P/u.'>  in  amicitia  ra/^/  similitCdo 
moium  quam  animias.  Nep.  Att.  5.-Utilitas;>/w.*  raluit  (had  a  greater  weight)  quam  ho- 


f'^- 


75G 


COMrARATIYE   CLAUSES. 


QUANTITATIVE   COMPARISON. 


757 


TiPRfm   Cic  Off  3  ^0 —Ad  cnmo]anAnm  mhW  plus  ralff  qunm  qnod  etc.  lb.  ram.  5,13. 3. 
);«f  rm.rf5(iant   lit  tibi  nlus  ouam  ipsi  hoc  tempore  pnxhsse  pop-ini.  Cic.  ham  10,  -K».— At 

f     Le.  4-     .ic     ut"n    -run.  Jnpi. or />///.  /.0<vy-  potui.set    r/.«/«  i.ocut  ^'bi   ipse 

in  alt.im  oiiam  (iiue  in  ^tatiOiie  sunt  nav.s,  prommei  t.  I^  ^- •i\' :^*--'^f /^'''^  .^"V/V? 
li,i  .  «;/-?m  (lonn^  •  le<t  Im;  may  tl)iiik  himr^elf  icis^r  than  his  master.  (  aio.  R.  R.  o. 
^te^p     '^m^^^  tiliu.il.  Ilor.  Ep.  1, 18.  277.-2)  Certain  yerh<  take  convkn- 

lower.  Here  belonir  affnlre  and  ,/iliffere  (in  classical  prose  always  ^^■uh  plus,  =  J;»  joye 
nwrl or  bef/er\  while  in  the  positive  both,  the  adverbs  r(iI<i^yrar/mo>i>wi,  and  the  a  - 
?e2tiv<?s  mX-m.  hinfum  ete.  occur;  '  m/>U^  and  v//i7"«^i  «"''^  ;;''^^^\r  ^^''rir^'Tl' 
tivemeumn^,  different  from  /.iAi/  ralrre  and  ;>,wM^.v^.-  see  <^'>%Fmn..lb  2 ;  A  •1-19.4 , 
'>  20  "j- 2  23  3-  »i  1  2H):as:  Hiinc  (inem  tu/)/'<.s' quam  te  rtm^^*.  Cic.  Brut.  8h.— tiuasi  ntri 
uo-^i^iifqt.tqnam  p///  •  alteruni  <ii/i,af.  quam  se.'  Ib.Tusc.  -S.  2t>.-Ut;>/«^^  a//^^^.  lien  nul  o 
m.d  pot?s  .  \b.-Totu.n  h.cum  pUs  urM>  posthac.  lb.  Let:.  2.  ^-AntecMass.c.Uly  bo  h 
»;/a7i.s-  and;.//i.<  are  used:  (^lem  e-o  ///f^r/t.v  a/yK>  quam  te.  Pluut.  1  rue  5,  5  2(K-Non  quo 
quemquam  j>lus  ameni,  aut  ?>/".  iniigani  (i.  e  7^.a/n  .llnm>  eo  ''^.^l;  J^^-J^'l^.j^^'.^^'^- 
Tiins  uater  (juite  ainat  iihisqtuim  hosce  oculos.  lb.  Ad.  5,  ..5.—  Jo  /lafe  uori^e  i«»  ex 
^Shy^u'oSeiLt  •  t'.,  love  better  "  not  by  ;  ;../i..  «'-^rO:  but  also  ^v^^^ 
iiis>y  '  uioderam  mn\U>  p^'jus  hunc  quam  ipsuin  Cladunn.  Cic.  Finn.  .  2,  .^--Q '>'<•'"' 
quo  plu^ciebet/t  (ec.)  ;..«./ls4/?/vv./  Sen.  Ep.  19 -/>,.?/■.  ^t.^^'Krio  19  2  ^2')  So  ne 
v//;(i/v'  a--  Non  multo />/'/>•  patiia'/aro quam  «jloruetuif.  Cic.  Fam.  10  19,  2.-^)  some 
few  v^rbV  d^M  oti  .  "  itensitv,  l,ut  not  belon-im:  to  the  abovcMnentioned  s,-mi-transime 
AvrbValU(convniti(.nallv)  either  plus  nr  vutois,  as:  Hn>t,^.  rr?-,n  tut^re.f,  7,u,ve,e 
}^Lo^:)lZf^l^  and  perhaps  s.line  others;  a;^:  ^i'"^  j''^^;:^::/^^  uiV''  inteiii^'o  n  o 
capi  Li-urum,  cjmtm  bene  defendi  causan.  M'.  Cum.  Cic.  Hr  U.  .3.  \''' •  .V^/V  *  n  \tt 
»/Xiv  £7*/e/<ss/tiia  te  a.'ere  iiuod  a-eii'lum  est,  quam  mefl,  te  adesse  comltu^.*  lb.  Alt. 
f  T(  1  -S  wTt he  s'  d  .(  e';serat.  mequ,.  plus  r,uam  ..-rvi  more  d.-be.e  videbfl, ur, covonoie- 
rnf  Ih  \tt  1  12  4  Rut-  Sed  me ///ofvm/ nemo  m.^f/iwy/^./mis  quern  tu  neminen.  pu- 
U-    lb  Att  7  8  8      Oue  quia  tibi  sunt  propiora  quam  nobis,  tiia  ine  ruusil  uums  me 

^om  -^^m  nt^  lif  Fa;!"  12.  7,  l.-NcH  putare.  me  de  "V^,X^'^^ti'e '^^la/^nllnO 
de  hac>  lb  Ati  0  1  3  liut :  Ut  si  mea  res  esset,  non  matjis  Mxuurtm  (1.  e.  (juain  n  11  c). 
ih  Km  i!44  So  11)  13  5t  3-  13.74.-/V'/.*  et  vfnnvn:  et  (irnhnus  de<.s  iminortalls. 
]  V  Th  uomi)  he  1  -a:4  \l\i\xvutqU  r^nn,  «juoted  No.  B).-nr.^uH  seems_  t« 
Uxk;  «/^tonirs  na  v.l'cVn  M>t  s  in  thepositive  '  ruUI.  r.rsun\  but '  mulfumvnsan^ 
]!^!;i(umi^mud^^ersurL  Cic.  Brut.  47) ;  as  :  In  rebu.  atque  usu  plus,  quam  vellem,  v.r- 
*rt/a.<.  Cic.  Fani.6, 10, 6.  .        ,    ^„     .   ,       •,•„„ 

n   Tf  not  two  different  de-rces  in  the  intensity  of  the  ««ame  action,  but  the  inlen-ities 
oUuodflreu^  compared  wi.h  each' other,  the  cmparison  is  always  made 

dunTe-'UUtoV'/o//^  dufntauhni  magls  quam  li.hnt.m  rvhn^^m*.  l»^-Att   10 

RT-Sucirc  nLue  ions  as  the  follnwin-  belnn-  to  the  silv.-r  a-.'  and  to  the  pi.ets:  Huh 
%latt^icS:.Uuam  val.t.  Sen.  Ep.K)  (Such  wordn  --'-'V/'rfoI  '^"  '  "''^  ^' 
where  plus  is  treated  as  a  transilive  oloecU  according  to  p.  ho,  A.  39  foil. 

F  If  the  de-rees  of  two  actions  belonjn-  as  objects  to  the  .«ame  pre.licate.  or  two 
AvlmVXsv  are  compared  mth  €a<h  oHi.r,  the  comparison  is  ma.U-  hy  marjis,  not  by 
W  s  as-   Tantasuin^^^  l]r<v,n.'an  quamauw  /^""/7;;^^.,^;- 

{     t'  ('ic  F-  m  '^  0  1  ~Sed  i  ra-teritnrum.  qute  //ur/i>'  npi-e/i^u^/ifjuamrornui  pos^ent 
nh  Tiuu^'  Liv  3t?2^)  -  Var/ism\h\  vid-iitur  vota  /arturi  contra  rem  pub  icam  7.''«^"  »'"!'* 
M  7  r  Cic  Cai  2  y -R  im-lni  maais  iluudis  quam  urnpv'udls  bo^eJhysnmuUux^  panV 

•~^-~VrnTn  the<c  and  the  followim;  passa<;es  it  clearly  appears  that  the  distinction  made 
by  aU  "mnuuuianl  accoa  to  whicl?  ;>/«.  does  not  refer  to  the  inienstd/,  but  only  to 
the  extent  of  an  action,  is  utterly  unfounded. 


aci  se  imponari  desulereiit.  Ca^s.  li.  li.  4,  2.— Comp.  Tac.  H.  4,  25;  Sail.  Cat.  14 —If  th 
actions  thus  eompared  are  represented  as  producing  at  the  same  time  a  different  intensif 
of  tlie  main  aciion,  the  conii)arison  may  be  made  hy  pi ux,  if  admissible  accordiiiij  to  th 
rules  U'lder  No.  f:.  as  in  the  passage  Cic.  Le»;.  3, 14,  cited  above  (VitiOsi  priucipes  pli 


iv(e.  Cic.  Fam.  7, 1, 1.— Omnibus  ita  existimantibus,  magis  sanctitdte  rifce  quam  sacerdi>- 

tv  jure  cam  rem  lluminem  obtinuisse.  Liv.  •?7.  S.— Impetraia  pax,  rnagis  ut  fessa  tarn  di- 

utiiio  beilo  acqiiiesceretcivitas,  7«am7'/"(/  digni  peterent.  Liv.  5,  23  (Here  the  intei  eitiea 

of  the  cause?,  in  reirard  to  their  effects,  are  compared  with  each  other).— Mercatoribus 

est  aditus  fnaai<  eo  ut  quje  hello  ceperint  quibus  veiiderunt  habeant,  9^ '/am  quo  ullam  rem 

ad   se  importjlri   desiuereiit.    Ca^s.  B.  G.  4,  2.— Comp.  Tac.  H.  4,  25;   Sail.  Cat.  14 —If  the 

sify 

the 

,     -         ^  .,     ,     ,  .  -  ^.lus 

extmjHo  quavi  ptccato  no<:ent). 

Obs.  8.  Peculiar  is  the  use  of  plus  and  mngis  with  a  neoation  {non  plu-o  quam,  non 
mnijis  quam  =  no  more  than).  A  nep^ative  comparison  of  this  kind  repiesents  the  com- 
pared actions  as  not  different  in  their  degrees  of  keality  ;  '  non  magis  quam  '  represent- 
insx  either  the  two  propositions  as  equallij  vntr^ie,  or  as  equally  trve.  In  ttie  first  in- 
f^tance  both  non  plus  and  non  magis  are  used,  both  having  the  force  of  'as  little  as'; 
in  the  second  insHnce,  «renerally,  oidy  '•non  magis  quam'  is  used,  with  the  force  ol  'as 
MUCH  As\  but  with  a  peculiar  relation  of  the  two  actions. 

A.  The  English  ^ as  little  as'  must  always  be  expressed  by  maglt  or  plus  with  a  nega- 
tion, because  the  Latin  language  has  no  direct  expression  for  the  intensive  adverb 
'litile'  (  =  'non  inultum\  'non  adnioduni''  etc.;  see  p.  2(14,  Obs.  5).  'Ae  little  as'  is 
rather  more  frequently  expressed  by  'non  plus  quam  '  {nihil  plus  quam)  in  classical  lan- 
giiag»*,  than  by  'non  magis  quam\  the  former  being  employed  even  when  'plus  quam' 
would  not  be  admissible  without  a  nega'ion;  a-:  De  ciijus  incolumitjlte  nou  plus  dubifo 
quam  te  memini  dubitilre  de  meil;  About  his  inteirrity  I  doubt  as  little  as{\  do  not  doubt 
auy  mart  than)  I  rem-mberthat  you  doui)ted  of  mine.  Cic.  Fam.  «i,  G.  2.— Hunc  annuliim 
si  habeat  sapiens,  nihil  plus  sil>i  licCre  putet  peccdre,  quam  si  non  liaberet;  He  would 
tiiiiik  wrong-doing  to  be  as  little  allowed  to  him  as  it  would  be  if  he  had  no  such  ring. 
H).  Off.  3.  9.— Angor  iste  qui  ])ro  simlco  sjejje  capiendus  est,  }ion  plus  valet  quam  ut  vir- 
tfltps,  quia  iionnuUascuras  atlerant,  repudientur  ;  is  of  no  greater  weight  a^'ainst  friend- 
ship (i.  e.  holds  good  as  little  against  friendship)  than  (as)  thai  virtues  should  be  repudi- 
ated, because  they  may  cause  some  cares.  lb.  Am.  i:^,  48. — Ego  illas  Calvo  litterasmisi,  non 
jilus  quam  has,  quam  nunc  legis,  existimans  eaituras;  thinking  that  the  letter  would  be- 
come as  little  public  as  the  one  wtiichyou  are  now  reading.  Cic.  Fam.  15.  21.  4. — S<i-  enim, 
me  Gncce  loqui  in  Latino  sermnne  non  plus  so]Qri',  quam  in  Gra'co  Latliie.  Ib.Tusc. 
1,8.— Scutum,  gladiuin.  galeam  in  onere  nostri  milites  non  plus  numt-ranf,  quam  huine- 
ros.  lacertos,  nmnns;  they  count  them  just  as  litMe  as  (no  more  than)  they  do  their 
shoulders  etc.  lb.  Tusc.2.  "]>;.— Bil)nliis.  dum  unus  hostis  in  Syriii  fiiit,  jiedem  porta  non, 
vlus  extulit  quam  <ionius  *  t-ua;  Bibulus,  as  long  as  a  single  enemy  was  in  Syria.  i)laced 
nis  foot  as  little  out  of  the  gate  as  his  house  did.  lb.  Att7().  8.  5.— Cicero  also'  uses  '  noti 
magis  *^uatn'  in  this  meaning,  but  less  frequently  than  'non  plus  quam\  and  without 
any  assi^'iiable  distinciion  from  it,  as  :  Nihilo  magis  ei  licifurum  esset,  plebCjo.  rempub- 
licam  prodere  quam  patricio  esset  licitum;  It  wolild  be  as  little  allowed  to  him.  in  his 
quality  as  a  Plebeian.  t<>  betray  the  rei>ublic,  as  this  would  be  allowed  to  the  Patricians. 
Cic.  Att.  2.  1.  5.— Si  proccsseris  longius.  von  vuigis  doUndum  est.  quam  airricola^  dolenr, 
praferitd  verni  teinporis  suaviiate.  a-statem  etautumiium  venisse.  lb.  Sen.  1!),  70.— Qui 
animus  est  in  alicpio  inorbo.  non  magis  est  sauus  quam  id  corpus  qui>d  in  morbo  est.  lb. 
Tusc.  3.5,  10. — Sin  ali(iu:"I  in  re  Verris  siinili"»  fiiero,  non  magis  m\\\[  deerif  inimlcus  ^//aw 
Verri  defuit.  Ib.Verr.  2.  3.  69. — \  qua  (gratijl)  te  affici  non  magis  potiiisse  dimonstras 
quam  Herculem  Xeiu)phontC'um  ilium  a  voluptate.  lb.  Fam.  5,  12,  3.— The  writers  of  the 
silvt-rage  do  not  use  '  non  plus  quam''  in  the  adverbial  moaning  'as  little  as',  but  only 
'  n'ui  magis  quam  \  as :  Quid  sit  animus  non  magis  tibi  qui^quain  cxpedief  quam  ubi  sit; 
What  the  s<»ul  is,  nolxxly  can  tell  yoii  any  more  than  where  it  is  (can  be  said  as  little  as 
etc.).  Sen.  Q.  N.  7,  24.  Comi).  Sen".  Iia.2.'l2  :  lb.  2. 14:  Quint.  proaMn.5();  Suet.  Cal.  19.— 
Oft<'n  non  plus  quam  or  non  ?nagts  qvam  is  added  to  a  sentence  already  negative,  in 
\yhich  instance  '  mui  plus'  must  be  rendered  '  any  more',  as:  Xeque  enim  bonitas,  nee 
liberalitas  esse  potest,  non  plus  quam  amicitia,  si  h:ec  nou  per  se  expetantur;  Nor 
can  there  be  any  goodness  etc.,  any  moi'e  than  friendship,  il  etc.  Cic.  Off. . 3,  .33. — Ne 
iiuiic  qiiidem  vires  dt-sidi  ro  adolescent  is,  non  plus  (any  more)  quam  adf)lescens  Uuiri  aut 

♦iThe  Cod.  Mid.  an(i  the  other  Codd.  which  are  copies  from  it,  read'^?/am  domo  siid\ 
which  makes  no  sense.  The  critics  liave  variously  tried  to  emendate  the  readinjr;  some 
conjecturinij  'quam  olim  doi^io  sua';  others,  'quam  consul  domo  sua, '.  But  these  con- 
j< ctiiies  do  not  essentially  remedy  the  passaice.  In  our  oj)inion.  there  is  no  doubt  that 
Cicero  wrote  '  quamdo/nussna  '.  although  this  reading  is  nothing  but  our  own  conjecture. 
The  connection  shows  that  the  comparative  clause  was  meatit  to  denote  an  action  alto- 
gether out  of  the  question,  Bibulus  beiusr  designated  as  a  coward  for  remaining  immov- 
able iu  his  headquarters  as  long  as  there  was  any  danger. 


I: 


•5 


758 


COMPARATIVE  CLAUSES. 


QUANTTTATIYE  COMPARISON. 


759 


elephanti  dcslderabam.  lb.  Sen.  19.  27.— Hoe  rf»8  tion  sunt  ira»,  n/>n  magis  quam  tristitia 
esitqmu  ad  conspectimi  mlmici  naufragii  contrahii  troutem.  Son.  Ira,  2, 2.— .\t>/i  iia.^citur 
ex  lualo  bouum.  7M>/i  mayi»' ^waw.  ticii!' ex  oloa.  lb.  Ep.  87. 

B.  When  the  comparativi-  clause  contains  a  fact  represented  as  holding  good,  the 
two  p^(>po^iitions  beiii'r  represented  m  beini,'  equally  true,  ' non  magis'  has  the  lorce  of 
'  a^  much  \  but  the  construction  is  uof  equivalent  to  ' (am.,  .quam  ',  '  taiitum..  .quam  , 
'oeque...ac:  representing  ratlier  the  fact  of  the  clause  alter  '  quain'  as  beini,'  '  no  less 
true  than  that  of  the  principal  sentence,  and  sometinies  implyin;,'  that  the  fact  in  tlie 
comparative  clause  /nay  hold  good  in  a  Ai<//ifr  decree  than  that  of  the  principal  sen- 
tence. Hence  this  construction  is  equivalent  to  '  nun  minus  quam  \  if  the  relations  of 
the  clause  and  of  tlie  principal  sentence  are  reversed  C  nori  magis  e<j:o  quam  tu  '  being 
tlie  same  as  '  rwn  minus  tu  quam  ego '),     This  reversal  is  always  preftrable  ni  rendering 


pluii  \\v2.^-x\\u  valibas  quam  _  , 
strong  in  mind  than  you,  you  certainly  feared  less  literally:  If  you  were  not  more  strong 
in  mind  than  I,  etc.).  Cic.  Att.  3. 15,  7.  Uut :  Jus  bonuuiqiie  apud  eos  (i.  e.  prisc«»s  llomil- 
no-')  non  le<'ibus  magis  quam  natura  ralthat;  Kight  was  maintained  no  less  by  its  own 
nature  than  by  the  laws.  Sail.  Cat.  9.  Here,  according  to  Ob-'.  7,  A',  the  use  ol  plus  in 
excluded.— A>c  me  7nagis  me;e  miseriic  excrunant  quam  tu;e;  Your  distress  torments  me 
no  Ifss  than  my  own  (as  nun  h  as  my  own).  Cic.  Fam.  14,  8,  l.-Ciuid  enim  in  meis  snpe- 
rioril)us  litteris  fait  pneler  querelam  temporum?  quie  iio)i  meiitn  animuirt  magis  sollici- 
turn  habent  quam  tuum;  which  engage  your  mind  no  less  than  miive  (as  much  as  mine), 
lb.  2,  10,  \.—Xon  magis  te,  quam  de  te  judicium  meuin  reprthendo  ;  I  censure  my  judg- 
ment on  you  no  less  than  1  censure  you.  H).  U»,  2»j,  2.— .V^'/w  enim  ipsOruin  conviviorum 
delectaiionem  voluptaiibus  corporis  «u/7i<  quam  ca'tu  amicOrum  et  sermoniKiis  metie- 
bar.  lb.  Sen.  13,  45.  This  construction  occurs  also  with  reference  to  numerical  relations 
(non  plures  quam),  afi:  Itaque  non  uqnH,  non  iirni  pi u rihu s  h)C\i^  ufimur  quam  «micitia; 
We  do  not  use  friendship  less  often  ^on  fewer  occasions)  than  w.iter  and  tire.  Cic.  Am. 
(i,  22.— Compare  for  t^tich  constructions  with  7i0/i  magis  quam  :  Cic.Verr.  2,  4,  3;  Liv.  1, 
28;  9,  22:  2,  5;  22.  27:  39,  52:  45. 10.*  This  construciion  is  al>o  applied  to  predicates  con- 
Bistingof  a  predicate-adjective  with  the  copula,  in  which  instmce  the  comparative  wa- 
f/i.>' irenerally  coalesces  with  the  adjective  in  the  form  of  the  inflectional  c(»mparative 
de"-ree,  as  :  Cincinnatus  non  in  plebe  coeicenda  quam  senAtu  castigando  rf/<f;/<a</ior 
fiPit;  he  was  not  /€.s\!?  vehement  in  reproacliing  the  senate,  than  in  <»)eicing  the  plebs. 
Liv.^1,  19.— Sometimes  the  comparative  clause  is  nei/'/ier  asserted  as  holding  good,  nonis 
iioidin"'  not  good,  as:  Hiec  quidem  ratio  rton  magis  contra  Uciruli  quam  contra  onmo 
ju-juraiidum  valet:  This  reason  prevails  no  tnort  a-amst  Heu'nlus's  oath,  than  nL.'ainst 
any  other  oath.  Cic.  Otf.  3,  29  (i.  ^..-  If  ir  holds  good  against  Keguliis's  oatli,  ii  holds 
good  against  every  other  oath;  if  not,  not). 

Obs.  9.  'Potius  qua?H '  corresponds  to  '  rather  thnn  \  and  is  used  to  correct  the  fact  ex- 
pressed in  the  clause,  representing  it  as //o^  holding  good,  and  hence  a  comparison  by 
'potlus  quam'  is  sitn'.lar  to  a  negative  coordination  by  'non..  .std\  as  :  Hoc  re  jxjfius 
dcclarabo  quam  oratiOne:  I  will  declare  this  rather  by  facts  than  by  words  (alniosi  the 
same  as:  'hoc  non  aratidne,  sed  re  declardbo').  Cic.  Fam.  H.  i:^,  4.  But  the  comparative 
form  t)y  'pitfius  quam'  repiest-nts  the  two  actions  as  optional  alternatires  (I  might  iio' 
Clare  it" by  words,  but  I  do  not),  and  hence  is  e.«pecially  applied  to  correct  falfe  antici- 
pations or  views  which  the  reader,  or  hearer,  or  the  person  spoken  of,  might  enter- 
tain about  the  reality  of  some  action;  as:  Auxit  potius  tinioiem  quam  minuit.  Liv. 
45  \0 —Mi'^'ericf  nostme  jMtiu.^  velim  quam  inconstanfiw  tribiias  quod  a  VibOne  subito 
discessimus.  Cic.  Att.  3,  4.— Velim  banc  inanem  meam  diiigeniiam  tnl<erafdlem  jtotius 
quam  ineptam  pnte^.  lb. ;?.  23,  1.  — /'o/i/^^■  ritil  quam  palrid  carebo.  lb.  3.  ild.-Ne  causd 
jKitius  apud  te  vahiisso  videar  qua7n  gratia.  lb.  Fam.  13,5.  i.  —  Opftmus  jjofiu.^  ut  eat  in 
exsilium  quam  queramur.  lb.  Cat.  2, 1.—Xocti  se  potius  ac  solitiidini  quam  ulli  ant  urfji 
ant  hospiii  committCbat.  lb.  Clu.  68.— Meinini  quum  mihi  desipere  videbflre  quod  cuiti 
istis  mtius  viveres  quafn  vfMscum.  lb.  Fam.7,  2S.  1.— .Vc/f/i'»"  quam  (as  in  most  of  the 
passages  quoted  Ons.  7,  D  and  E)  is  often  used  with  a  force  siiinlar  to  ' potius  quam' ; 
~"*yBy"not  reversing  the  two  comparative  clauses  in  construction»  of  this  kind,  pas- 
sages have  often  been  misinterpreted.  So  the  much-discussed  passage  Cic.  Tusc.  1,  17, 
4l"w  here  we  must  evidently  read  '  non  nomindta  magis  quam  inte/Ucta  '  (as  some  ol  the 
CtMld   have  it)  in  place  of  the  vulirata  'qnam  non  intellecta '.    The  vul.'ata  will  not  make 


Mise  required  by  the  connection,  whether  we  reverse  the  terms,  or  whether  we  read 

in  the  Latin  ordei-.    But  by  reading  'quam  intdlecta  '.  if  we  understand  the  pas- 

nenativdij  according  to  No.  A,  the  sense  will  be  clear  at  once  (.-The  filth  element, 


the  ser 

them  ii 

Baire  negativdy 

which  is  as  little  comprehended  as  it  has  a  name). 


but  a  clause  dependent  on  magis,  if  used  in  this  sense,  denotes  rather  a  small  decree 
than  an  absolute  denial,  although  a  degree  exceedingly  small  is  virtually  a  denial.  Thus 
it^  sometimes  occurs  iu  the  same  period  with  ;x>/i'/v," merely  to  change  the  expression,  as: 
Ne  id  quod  petat,  ex.igere  magis  quam  roQdre,  et  in  mercMis  jxttius  qua?n  beneficii  loco 
numerare  videatur.  Cic.  Fam.  2,  «1, 1.  Similarly  :  Priinum  eniui  judicio  malo  (  =  magi8 
voio)  quavi  gladio  (hetari),  delude  glo7'ia  potius  (helari  volo)  quam  calamitdte.  lb.  7,  2. 2. 
—Potius^  in  connection  with  a  disjunctive  conjunction,  serves  to  correct  a  single 
expression  of  tlie  sentence  ;  generally  rel  iwtius  being  thus  used,  but  also  sen  jxjtius, 
or  aut  jxjtius:  as:  quotidie,  rel  jwtius  in  dies  singulos.  breviOres  litteras  ad  te  mitto.  Cic. 
Att.  5.  7.  1.— Scripsissem.  te  frustra  in  nendtum,  sire  ixAius  in  conventum  si-natoruin,  esse 
yentarnm,  ni  etc.  Ih.VAin.  A,  \,\.—  Cunspectu7n,  aut ])Otius  citn\\i\iixnm  mihi  tuum,  defu- 
is^e.  lb.  Att.  4. 1,2.  Sometimes  the  adverbial  Cim\\^SiV'M'\\Q  citius  or  ]i7i us  is  used  with 
the  force  of  potius,  as:  Vitain  sibi  eripi  cidus  qua7n  irloriam  rerum  gestarum  posse  vo- 
cilerabatur;  He  exclaimed  that  his  life  could  be  rather  {WlQT'dWy  '  77iore  quickly ')  ts\n'n 
from  him  than  the  glory  of  his  deeds.  Liv.  S,  32.— .^gyptii  quamvis  carniliclnam  p/JM« 
sul)ierint  qun77i  ibin  aut  aspidein  violent.  Cic.  Tusc.  5,  27.— MagnStes  iu  corpora  isua 
citiu.^  siTvi'uros  qua77i  ut  Romanam  amicitiam  violarent.  Liv.  35,  31, 

Obs.  10.  If  a  comparison  refers  to  the  intensity  of  a  descriptive  adjective  or  adverb, 
the  c<nnparatiye  adverb  '7/iagis'  is  generally  merged  in  the  Inflectional  comparative  de- 
gree of  the  adjective  or  adverb.  Hence  every  inflectional  comparative  of  a  descriptive 
adjective  or  adverb  contains  the  syndetic  antededeiit  7nagis  of  the  Quam-clause  by  im- 
jdicatiMii,  as:  Luna  est  i7iajor  quam  dimidia  pars  terra}.  Cic.  N.  D.  2.  40.— Exercitus  multo 
niodestia  post  victoriam,  ^uar/i  ipsa  victoria, /o//c/aW/ior.' Liv.  3(i,  21.— QuiPdam  abscin- 
diiiituryV/ct/^'/A^  animo  qua/n  teinperantur.  Sen.  Ep.  \^^6.—^[aju6  accCpit  beneficiura  ouam 
dedii.  lb.  Ben.  3, 35.  *-  ^  f  « 

If  the  degrees  in  the  intensity  of  tivo  different  descriptive  adjectives  (predicative  or  at- 

triiMitive)  or  adverbs  are  compared  witli  each  other,  the  Latin  language  places  either 

both  adjectives  (or  adverbs)  in  the  comparative  degree,  or  both  in  the  i)ositive  decree. 

In  the  latter  instance  the  comparison   is  made  by  the  adverb  waz/i*"  (sometimes  by 

j)0/ius.  or  melius).    The  fonner  method  is  more  usual  in  Livy  and  ihe  historians,  as  : 

l^ngiorquajn  latior  ac\en  erat  ;  mtei:ali.y  :  The   battle-line  was  longer  than   deeper 

(J   e.  The  length  of  the  battle  line  exceeded  its  width  ;  or  '  The  battle-line  was  long,  but 

it  had  little  depth)  Liv.  27,  48.— Triumphus  ob  earn  rem  cla7'ior  qvarn  gratior  fuit ;  The 

triuiiiph.  therefore,  was  ra^^^r  (more)  brilliant  than  ]X)pular.  lb.  5.  2:j.— Asia  rfi/t5r<>« 

quam,ror^?r>^^ exercitus  hiciGbat :  Asia  made  our  armies  7ather7ich  than  brave.  lb.  39, 1. 

Sometimes  7/iagis  or    potius  is  redundantly  added    to    such   comparisons  :   Cele7idra 

quam  tutiC/ra  consilia  7nagis  placere  diicibus.  H).  9,  32.— The  second  method  is  more 

Usual  in  Cicero.    Mihi  autein  i/npud>'ns  77iagis  qva/zi  stultus  vidStur.  Cic  Att.  5.  21. 12. — 

Sed  exstitit  tempus  optdtu77i  mihi  magis  quam  sperdtU7n.  lb.  Fam.  5. 8.  2.— Artem  juris 

civilis  habebitis.  magi-s'  7nagna7n  atque  vlie7'e7n,  qua7n  dijficiie7n  i^t  obscura7n.  Ib.Or.  1, 

42.— Octavius  jid   dicendum  veniGbat  ?nagis  audadter  quaoi  pa7'dte.  lb.  Brut.  (58. — Vir 

iiiireiiii  i/i(igni  77iagi-<  qua7n  bcmi.  Sen.  Ira,  1,  Ki,— Quid  valet  igitur  ilia  L.  Crassi  cojriosa 

7nagi.'<  quam  sa]ne7is  oratio  ?  Cic.  Par.  5. 3.— Est  non  gloribsa  7/iagis  qua7n  dives  victoria 

vesira.  Liv.  37.  54.- -Consul   respondit.  ?nagis  scepe  qaa7n  rere  ninqnam  .^tOlos  pacem 

petere.  lb.  :i8.  8.— Quod  fiubtilifer  7nagis  quum  ditucide  dicitnr.  Cic.  Tusc.  1. 17.     So  with 

indius;  Quam  causani  Pompejiis.  animdlus  i/itlius  qua7ti  pardtus  susceperat.  Cic.  Fam. 

0.  (i.  10.   Cicero,  however,  sometimes  made  use  of  the  method  by  two  comparatives:  Non 

linu'o,  ne  lifjtntius   li:ec  in  Clodium  evomere  videar  y?/awi  veiius.  Cic.  Mil.  29. — In  the 

writers  of  the  silver  Latinity  sometimes  an  inflectional  co7/i]mrative  is  used  in  the  first 

j)art  of  the  comparison  with  a  ]X)-^itire\\\  the  Quam-clause  ;  and  sometimes  two  positives 

are  connected   by  quam  without   magis:  Ingenium  Agricohe  specieni  magnie  gloriae 

rthe7nentius  qua7n  caute  ajjpetebat.  Tac.  Agr.  1.— Fine  anni  excessit  Asinius  Agrippa, 

Claris  majoribiis  qua77i  vetusiis.  lb.  Ann.  4,  61. 

Obs.  11.  The  'compared  members'  in  a  comparative  period  may  be  single  members  of 
the  two  ])ropositions,  as  in  most  of  the  passages  quoted  above,  or  whole  clauses. 

A.  Uklative  Claisks.  A  comparison  of  relative  clauses  occurs  in  the  followinc:  in- 
stances :  1.  II  fn'o  relative  daufies  are  compared  with  each  other,  as  :  Scito  multo  plures 
es-^e  qui  d>  t7'ibuto  recusent,  quam  qui  exigi  relinf.  Cic.  Fam.  3,7,3.-2.  The  S7jndetic 
antecedent  of  a  relative  clause  may  be  compared  with  its  !7/'a//jwir/^?'ca/ antecedent  in  the 
l>rincipal  sentence.  In  this  instance  the  syndetic  antecedent  is  ow?i//^c/,  the  relative 
clause  being  immediately  preceded  hy  qua7h,  as:  Xavls  facit  hunnUOres  quam  quid  us 
in  nostro  marl  uti  consuevimus.  Ca?s.  B.  G.  5, 1  (=  qua7H  eiefuttunt  quibus  etc.).— £"2?- 
ercitu  hand  minOre  quam  que77i  prius  habuerat,  ire  ad  hosils  permit  (=  quam  is  fuit 
guem  prius  habuerat  :  with  an  army  not  smaller  than  that  which  he  had  etc.)  Liv.  30, 
11.— 3.  Ill  a  comparative  period  wMth  the  adjectives  j)lii7'es^  plus,  7)iinus,  or  a  descriptive 
•djective  in  the  comparative  degree,  the  second  term  of  the  comparison  often  takes  the 


tiMf 


760 


COMrARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


QUANTITATIVE  COMPARISON. 


761 


form  of  &  relafire  clawe  introcluccd  by  a  qitnntilatire  or  a  numeral  relative  adjective 
{qitaiitus,  quoO  after  the  conjunction  quaw,  if  the  (iiium-clause  lias  a  predicate  different 
Ironi  that  of  th<'  principal  sentence,  and  if  the  compared  quantitative  or  uunicralidras 
occur  in  each  of  the  two  (completed)  propos^iiions  as  attkibitive,  absolute,  or  pkkdi- 
CATivE  ADJKCTiVES,  as:  Quud  t'iii plus  fnime/iti  imjx-ratviTtur.  qnain  qvxinfuin  ^xatara/tt/ 
Because  they  were  char<.'«'d  witli  t/tore  corn  than  they  had  harve^ttd.  Cic.  Verr.  2.3.29. 
In  tliii*  ^^ellt^•nce  the  predicat'S  of  the  propositions  are  differetit,  the  comparative  clau^e 
l)einu  completed  in  the  loliowin;:  fern», '  1  hey  had  harvested  less  corn  \  Hen-  the  com- 
pared quantitative  ideas  occur  in  both  propositions  as  absolute  and  respec  lively  at- 
tributive adjectives;  hence  quantum  {\.e.  frumaiti)  is  addeci  fiUvr  quain,  afjreein^  with 
.//  ntneiiti  in  pender  and  number,  according?  to  the  rules  for  relative  clause's,  but  takinor 
ihe  cage  required  by  the  construction  of  the  clause.  In  Enqlii^h  fuch  relatives  cannot  he 
exprei^fted. — Hannibal  jdureti  et  duces  et  miliies  IJomanorum  occldit,  ^w^/;?  ^?/o<' super- 
Hunt.  \a\.  ^,V.\  {—  Paucidres  duces  supersunt  ;  hence  the  /JM//i.vrt/ adjective  7«ryMakes 
the  j)Iace  of  pauciores). — Dux  jjlures,  quam  quot  mtis  erant  in  usum,  ijrnes  accendit.  Liv. 
'3(i.  10  (— pauciores  iqnes  satiti  erant}.— i>o  when  /(//j/?///i  with  a  multiple  is  the  syndetic 
anteceileiit :  Iiitelli<;Ctur,  sexies  tantum  {i.  e.  fruroeu\i)  quam  quantum  satum  sit,  abla- 
tum  esse  ah  aratorTl)us.  Cic.  Verr.  2,  3.  43. — De  i)ectiniil  finltur.  uti  major  (equivalent  to 
the  unusual  ^ p/us  pecunicv")  causa  ludorum  consumeretur.  7^/^/7«  7««///«  Fuivio  Nobili- 
viidecrifa  ei>set.  Liv.  40,  44. — ImplC-bat  hondnet»  cerliuris  f^jxi.  quam  quantam  fides  i)ro- 
missi  humsliu  pubiicere  solet.  Liv.  2().  19  (=  tides  ?ni/iu<  spei  subjicere  solet).— Cu.  Len- 
tulus  multo  viajorein  ojtinionem  dicendi  actiOne  faciebat,  quam  quanta  in  eo  facidtas 
crat.  Cic.  Brur.fi6.  2-34  (=opiniOnem  dicendi  majonm  fecit  ;  farultax dic*^idi  minor  fuit ; 
the  quantitative  adjective  bein<r  attributive,  quantum,  takii.jrit?  place,  must  n<,'ree  with 
the  «govern ill LT  noun  yrtC«//«.s').  These  (piantitative  relatives.  how6v«'r,  m  ly  be  left  out 
if  tlie  relative  is  in  tiie  nominative  or  accusative,  or  In  the  same  case  as  the  compara- 
tive in  the  i)rincipal  sentence,  as:  Patiemini,  judices,  ab  araroril)Us  jAua  aliquanto 
(frumeiiti)  abljltiiiu  qs^s^q.,  quam  natitm  f<it  ?'  (*>r  quatn  quantum  natum  sit).  Cic.  Verr.  2, 
3.  43.— (^uo  maJOre,  etiam  apud  vos  odioesse  deber.  quam  (inst  o{  quamquanto)  est  apiid 
l)opulum  Homiliium.  lb.  1.  It.  Thus  in  the  foUowinir  passa-^e  both  formsare  ii^edaloiif; 
viih  each  01  her  :  (Quantum  Aproidu»  edidissel  dehc-ri,  tantttm  (frumenti)  ex  «'dicto  dan- 
diim  erat.  Etiamne  si  plua  edidisset  quam  quantum  natum  erat  ?  Etiam  :  Quid,  si  mi- 
/c/.v  dedisset.  quam  poposcisset  .Ai)ronin>i'  lb.  Verr.  2,  3.  2^>.— So  in  most  of  the  i)a>saLret« 
■with  ditierent  predicates,  quoted  in  Obs.  1  and  (>.  the  relatives  are  omitted.  But 
puch  an  admission  is  inadmissible  if  the  construction  recjiiires  the  adjective  to  l)e 
placed  in  the  «jenilive,  dativt-,  or  ablative,  as  :  Cojris  eos  plin<  lucri  aildere.  quam  quanti 
venierant  (decuma'K  Cic.  Verr.  2,3,39.  [=  Decuma»  re?iierant  minorii^  pr^tii.  the  com- 
mon terms  in  the  two  propositions  beinir  the  idea  of  the  very  amount  the  intensities  of 
Aviiich  are  compari  d  Since  this  idea,  in  tiie  clause,  requires  to  be  in  the  «reiiitive  of 
price,  the  relativ<>,  liy  which  it  is  represented,  cannot  l)e  omitted].— .</a/o/vw  sumpluiu 
lecerunt,  ^wam  ^'/^n/'i  CatOnis  lis  jesiimilta  est.  lb.  Verr.  2.  4,  10.— ..l/^(;(y;v  inde  aninu) 
pacis  opera  inchojita,  quam  quanta  mole  j^esserat  bella.  Liv.  1.38. —  4.  Sometimes  the 
same  form  of  a  relative  quantitative  clause  after  qu(im.  is  used  to  denote  a  •  concessive 
ioka',  so  that  the  (lej,'ree  is  representtd  as  irreater  or  less  than  it  should  te  inft  rnd 
from  the  (act  stated  in  the  clause  (— mon-,  L'^reater  than  '  accordin<jr  to ').  as  :  Pnedam 
inde  majorem  r\i\vx\X,  quam  quanta  f/elli  fama  erat ;  a  booty  irrealer  than.  acc«)rdin<; 
to  the  reports  on  the  war.  it  should  iiave  been  expected  Liv.  1,35.  (ienerally.  however, 
this  relation  is  more  briefly  exjiressed  hy  quajn  pro  \\'\\\\  an  ablative:  and  this  form  is 
applied  to  all  tlie  quantitative  comparisons,  in  which  the  dei^ree  is  lepreseiited  as  being 
■not  in.  a  direct  projK>rtv>n  to  the  fact  contained  in  the  clause  •  as  :  Achiei  mulio  majurem, 
quam  jnv  numerocopiarnm,  hostil)tis  teirOrem  intulerunt.  Liv.  .37,  20.  — Quidquid  dixero, 
minus,  qvam  pro  ati'ocitate  et  masrnitudine  rei.  dictum  scitnte  esse.  lb.  39.  \h.—  Pluiihus 
ivMiibus.  quam  pro  numeromaneuHum,  in  sjkm  iem  lactis.  ib.  21, 3'.'.— Omnium  non  tmta 
pro  .Eiolis  cura  vtM./erociori//UK  quam  pro  ingmiis  draco/ um  (jtntis.  Ib.  27,  30.— Cabtra 
nietjitus  est  latius  qvain  pro  copii>i.  lb.  3G,  10. 

D.  iNFiNiTivE-ci.ArsEs.— If  the  compared  memlier  of  a  Qnam-clause  is  a  Tlint-clanse, 
its  form  must  l>e  determined  accordinir  to  the  manner  in  winch  th»-  (^>iiam  cI!lU^e  is  to  be 
completed,  as  :  Ut  mori  mallet  {  =  ma^/ift  re.Met)  quam  de  his  rt-fjus  Sullam  docT ri.  Cic.  H. 
A.  9.  2f)  (^minns  roluit,  Sullam  de  hi.<  reftus  doiu/i.  which  shows  iliat  the  'IMiat-elause  is 
an  OhjecT-clause  dependent  on  t'elte.  and  hence  to  be  exi>ress<'d  in  tiie  form  of  an  Infini- 
tive-clanse  accordin;:  to  p.  f)(j2,  3,  A), — Neque  salus  nlla  reii)ublicap.  7najorhoc  tempore  re- 
pt'iTri  potest,  quam  jyqmlum  llomdnvm  intelliqere.  iif(iue  taiita  pcrnicies  iilia  potest  acci- 
dere,  quam  rationem  Vtritdti<  ah  hoc  oidine  ((hjndirdri.  lb.  \'eir.  2,  1.  v.  '!  he  completed 
Qiiam-clausesare  '  Mitjor salus  est  jiopulnm  H<imSi;uin  intelli<r«'re:  and  Major  })er nicies ettt 
rationem  abjudicftri  \  Hence  a  Suliject  infinitire-clause  is  required  (p.  ♦>13,  Obs.  8:  p.  609, 
Obs.  S).  So,  when  the  clause  takes  the  form  of  a  suhject-infinitive:  QujPcausH  i'tuthonesti- 
or,  quam  a  proviucia  defeusOrem  coustitui  (=me  det'ensOnun  conslituij  ?  Cic.  Vetr.  2, 1, 5. 


a  TJT-CT.AUSEs.-That-claneeB  take  the  form  of  Ut-claupes  of  any  description  if  the 
romplet.-d  comparative  clause  will  require  this  form  according  to  the  general  ru  es  a"- 
^'/'.•'  J-'.V'   '''"•^"•'  ^''^''^ti's  deos  quam  ut  incolumi  ahire  liceat.  Liv.  2G  41  -Coiwimi' 
nihil  mihi  optatius  cadere  quatn  ut  tu  me  quam  primiim  consequare  "cic   Att  3  1  l' 
(=  opto  ut  etc.).— Magis  vereor,  ne  parum  gloriie.  quam  ne  nimium  belli  sit.'  Liv.  38  17* 
-Idioma  ical  is  the  use  ol  a  final  UT-rxAUsE  to  represent  the  consequence  of  a  denr*e 
less  than  that  of  the  principal  action,  denoting  at  the  same  time  that  the  hiqher  de-ive 
as  stated  111  the  principal  sentence,  does  not  produce  this  consequence.    Iii  Eii'-lish  we 
use,  instead  of  the  Latin  comparative,  a  positive  with  'to(i\  and  in^tead  ofilTe  Latin 
I  t-clause  of  purpose,  an  object-infinitive  with  Mo  \  as  :  Clarior  res  erat  quafn  ur  K-i  ac 
i\)>;^\imihin  posset  :^T\w.nua\er\s-n^  too  clear  to  be  covered  up  and  dissembled  (literallv 
1  he  matter  was  clearer  than  that  it  could  be  covered  up).  Liv.  2(i.  51.     Here  the  sec     d 
term  of  the  c<.mparis(,n  must  be  completed  by  '  qtmm  ea  res  esse  dehuit  ut  tegi  mssef '  - 
i  he  matter  was  clearer  than  it  ought  to  hare  been  in  order  to  be  covered  up  -So-  Ouod 
pra'ceptum,  quia  majus  erat  quam  ut  ab  horaine  videiCtur,  iccirco  assifrnatum  est  deo• 
l  Ins  precept    because  it  wa.s  too  sublime  \o  come  from  man,  was  assigned  to  a  god' 
veri.-iteln  v    hli.nV'iT"  J,'';''";.^'^^.Canachi  signa  ligidiora  esse,  quam  vt  hmieutur 
\criiatem  y  lb.  Ibut.  18.~Potenttus yim  id  malum  aiiparuit  quam  ut  minOres  per  ma-is- 
atussedarCtnr.  Liv  25  l.-P«ter  de  se  magis  timCbit  quam  1// filii  necem  ulciscaur. 
11).  40,  ll.-l'  requently  (but  not  in  Cicero)  final  Ut-clauses  of  this  kind  (the  same  as  or- 
dinary final  clauses,  according  to  p.  557,  Obs.  5.  foil.)  take  the  form  of  relative  clauses 
tie  relative  agreeing  with  its  antecedent  which,  in  consinictions  ..fthis  kind,  is  almost 
always  contained   in  the  principal  sentence,  as  :  Vi^ii  \e<:AXo  major  ac\e>^  qaam  qmr  ah 
suo  pnesKlM)  sushnt?tpo.^sit ;  The  let-ate  considered  the  army  too  strong  lobe  resisted  by 
hi<  force.  Liv.  10  4.— Famie  et  fidei  damna  majdroQ^^e  quam  qua;  a'stiniaii  possent    Id 
3.  .-..-.Magis  aunbus  quam  animis  id  acceptum  erat.  ut  majus  ketiusque  quam,  quod 
nieiitccapere  aut   satis  credere  possent  {too  glad  for  them  to  comprehend),  lb  27  50- 
Ajiint,  iios  loqui  ma^ma  qnam  qua;  natflra  hunulna  sustineat.  Sen.  Ep.  104  — Sometim'ea 
Quam-clauses  dependent  on  jwtius  and  its  equivalent^  (Obs.  9)  take  the  form  of  an  Ut- 
ciaii>e  to  express  more  stron-ly  the  negative  force  of  the  clause  ip.  608,  Obs.  0),  as  •  Ma<^- 
nete.<  11.  corpora  ^wa  citius  sjevitQros.  quam  ut  Homanam  amicitiam  violarent.  Liv  35 
31.    Clauses  of  this  kind  inu.^t  be  ccmipleted  by  means  of  a  verbum  faciendi  {=quam 
nmnntterent  ut  vudarent).     Generally,   however,    in    constructions  of  this  kind    the 
Quam-cianse  takes  a  sufjjunctive  without  vt.     See  Obs.  12. 

I).  TKMf(.K.\L  CLAUSES  may  be  connected  with  Quam-clauses,  to  compare  the  time  of 
tilt!  princii)al  action  with  the  time  of  another  acticm  mentioned  in  the  clause  in  which 
insrance  the  principal  sentence  generally  contains  a  temporal  adverb  to  which  the  time 
01  the  temp-iral  clause  is  opposed:  as:  Vos  uunc  graviore  caiCna  vincti  estis  Quain  ouum. 
(=quanW^///i(/v</m)  pru'sidium  Macedonum  in  arce  habuistis.  Liv.  35  ;38  —  E-re^ie  Ari- 
stoU'les  ait.  numquam  nos  verecundiores  esse  debere.  qvam  rjuum  de  deis  agitiir.  "sen  O 
.N.  ..30.  Generally  such  Quiim-clauses  have  their  predicates  in  the  indicative;  but  some- 
times the  subjunctive  occurs.    The  same  form  is  also  used  in  compari.«ons  of  equality 

?r.";.    ''m"  '''^'"  ^VV^"'^'^  '''""*■''  ^""^  l*''^*''*'''  ^"^'^*  ^^(^"^^  consulatum  vulgSri  rider^nt    Liv 
10. «,.—  1  emporal  clauses  are  also  used  afrer  quum  when  referring  to  indefinite  time  hav- 
ing always  their  i)redicate  in  the  indicative,  a»  :  Omnium  societutum  nulla  pnestiintior 
est,  quam  quum  viri  bom.  moribus  similes,  sunt  familiaritate  conjuncti.  Cle.  Ofl".  1,  17. 

E.  Causal  clauses  after  quain  represent  a  fact  either  as  bein"-  in  a  less  deo^ree  or 
not  at  all  the  cause  of  some  action,  the  real  cause  being  stated  in  the  principal  sentence 
which  IS  gener.iily  connected  wiih  magU;  as:  Impetrata  jiax  imigis  ut  fessa  tarn  diutino 
hello  acquiesceret  civitas.  quam  quod  digni  jyeterent.  Liv.  5,  23.  Hence  this  form  is  an 
equivalent  of  the  constructiim  with  'non  quod,  sed\  explained  p.  «90  foil  From  the 
reasons  stated  there,  the  mood  of  the  clause  must  alwavs  be  the  suaiUNcnvE.  Ex  •  Sed 
ex  aliis  xvhw^  vmgis  quam  quod  ciilquam  id  compertum /0;«/,  h;ec  fama  valGbat.  Sail. 
Cat.  W.—Magix  ut  consiietudinem  servem.  quam  quod  vos  non  vestra  sponte  hoc  facid- 
«^o  l^^^^^V^y"^^*"'',".^'"*'  "^'^1'.*'^  audiatis.  Cjc.  Clu.  32.— Antiochus  Ephesum  est  profectus. 


guia  Id  negare  Porsenna  nequiverat  Tarquiniis.  ry//«//;  quod  nei^atiim  iii  *!ibi  al)  Komanis 
vjnoraret.  Liv.  2.  13.— Very  frequently,  in  place  of  quod  or  quia  in  such  clauses,  quo  is 
used,  the  same  as  in  the  coiistr^i'  tion  *  non  quo.  sed'  (p.G90,6').  as:  Benevoieniia  maqis 
M(UivU\<,  quam  quo  res  Ua  postuldret.  fiii  Umgior.  Cic.  Fain.  6,  3, 1.— Mercatoribus  est 
aditiis  magis  eo  ut  qme  bello  ceperint  qiiibus  veiidant  habeant,  quam  quo  ullam  rem  ad 
6c  iraportari  desiderent.  Ctes.  B.  G.  4, 2.— H:ec.  amOre  magis  impulsus,  scril)enda  ad  te 
putavl,  quam  quo  le  arbitrSrer  mouitis  et  pr^eceptis  egGre."  Cic.Fam.  10,3,4.— Elsi  more 


7(32 


COMPARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


QUANTITATIVE  COMPARISON. 


7G3 


maoi^  hoc  Pcribo,  quam  quo  tc  admonendum  piitem.  lb.  12,  20,  3.-Thc  indicativk  mu«t 
be  ii-^ed  whiMi  the  comparison  is  madw  by  noa  maqU,  accordiiii,'  to  Obs.  8,  No.  B.  oecaii^ie 
in  \\\\^  ii.st  inco  the  fuct  of  the  claii-*;  is  represented  «v  rm/,  as:  Decmius  cum  inH-iio  as- 
seiisu  andltus  .st,  iwn  rnnrji^  eo  quod  inultitudinis  no.>cam  clcvilbat,  r/uarn  quod  m  aucto- 
res  vertentt..  Liv.  4-),  10.     In  this  instance,  quo  can  not  be  substituted  for  quod. 

F  Si-ci  AtT««Ks  are  frequently  combined  with  quani.  wlien  the  (iuam-clau-e  must  be  so 
coinnlrtedas  to  contain  the  conditwn<tl  the.<is,  the  pndicate  bei.i-  always  supplied  front 
tbt'  principal  sent.-nce.  The  combination  q>iani  si  (f/uin  if>  lias  the  same  ofllee  in  the 
clauses  of  r/'/aw/i/a^ir^  comparison  as  the  conjunction  quasi  uis  if),  and  the  equivalent 
combinations  ac  si,  vt  si  etc.  have  in  clauses  of  qmUitafive  comi)arison;  but  with  the  dis- 
tinction that  the  latter  always  require  the  suhjunctir,',  bein,<:  always  jwn-rtul,  while  quain 
si  may  be  conceived  either  a-  d..ubtfiil,  or  as  non-real,  accordin-  to  the  nature  ..  the  he- 
sis  whicli  mu«t  be  supplied,  and  hence  may  be  lollowed  by  an  indicahiy;  as  .  Mhil  to 
niihi  qrafiiui  facere  posse,  quani  si  omnibus  tuis  opibus  Laniiam  in  V^\'\'''^l'^J'!^J2'l1,,fl' 
lure-i/erfect).  Cic.  Fam.  11,  17, 2.  Here  the  Quam-clause  must  l)e  completed  by/  qnamfe- 
ceris  si'  etc.-Nisi  forte  viaqis  erit  parricTda,  qui  consulilrem  patrem.  quamKi.e.v^niUi 
or,;iVhumilem  necarerit.  Il).Mil.  7.-Geiierdly.  however,  this  foim  is  used  when  the  the- 
sis by  which  the  Quam-clause  must  be  completed  is  hy})ol helical,  and,  in  this  instance, 
the  moods  are  jrenerally  hyiuAhelical  (i  e.  imperfect  or  phiperfect  subjunctive),  while  the 
mood  with  quiii.  ac  si  Jtc  generally  folh.ws  the  hiw  of  consecution;  as:  l>eto  a  tedihq'^n- 
Wil-q^ni  (i.  e.  pelerem)  sPmea  res  essel.  Cic.  Fam.  18  11.  2.-Rei:ulus,  quum  \i.>l/'y'<> 
necabiltur  erat  in  meliOrc  caus;l  7"«'^  d-^-  fuisset)  .s7  doini  consuUlns  remannssel.  lb 
OffVi^-Ptus  ea  oratio  moment!  ad  incitando-  ad  bellum  habuit.  quam  {i.e.  habuisset) 
si  aperie  siia^lendo  cupiditatem  res  -crendi  osMidissel.  Liv.  :i5.^r).-Peloponnesum  quo- 
nue  adire  jussi,  nude  prior  le-atio  discesserat  incertiore  >\A\n  quam  (?.  f  disctv-sis.ent) 
s^  non  venUsenf.  II).  39. :«.— Hunc  annulum  si  habeat  sapi.-ns,  nihil />/««;  sibi  hcere  putet 
li^^lZ^TiUwn  e  ih-eret)  si  non  hab?rel.  Cic.  Ort'.  3.  «J.-This  form  Is  also  applied  to  the 
Kjlml  of  KQ  '.  L  qu:intiries,  as:  Vide  ne  relijrio  nobis  tam  adhibenda  .a  quam  it.e^ 
adlibenda  esset)  .4  teiiimonium  diC'-nmu^.  H).  Brut.  85.-(iui  autem  non  defendit  si 
potest,  ta/n  est  iu  vitio  quain  (i.  e.  si/)  si  parentes,  aut  amicjs,aut  patnam  deserat.  lb, 

Oft.l,'"!.  ,.^        ,        -.     , 

Obs  12  When  the  two  propositions  of  a  comparative  period  have  difTerent  predicates 
ami  the  comparative  clause  denotes  not  only  the  lesser  •'«*-'•^•<^J''!:/^ 'ir;;;/,f  ;//,,  i'?/;;^.^ 
Mated  in  it,  the  mood  of  the  clause  is  re-ularly  the  subju-Nctivk.  Mm  h  clauses  are 
c  mi  ar  "d  }  means  of  the  syndetic  antecedent  y>o/i*/.s-,  or  itsequivaknts  ctlius  audpnus 
H ee  OBs  9)^as :  ErnTbo  }m,1  us  quam  p^rducfe/  (lui^piam  (  =  lla(l>er  l/ian  take  a  -uiue,  I 
will  .M?a.t  ay)    inaut.Mo^  'i"<t"^  ro'in^  i"  p.-ricnlum,  divului.m  face 

S//:  5/m'Vo...  into  .iamjer,  divide).  Ter  A..D.  2,  2.  32.-/W;;-  V^'^'mid  ^^^-^f,^ 
dabo  (lialher  than  allow  this  lo  happen,  I  will  irive)  Plant.  Pseud.  l,o,  141  -^'  ■  9"«  '* 
t  i  M  nTcum  halH-am  faciain  ut  j  isseris  {liaf/ier  than  have  you  an  en.-my,  1  will  do  as 
vou  wi^orde  r^^^^^^^^^  <>P"1vit  />o^i'/.^  eum  relinquere  quam  eu") 

?  eUiriui  cL;A^o/^s■/m/•./^  Plant.  Aul.  .red.  ll.-IUicitalorem  jx,l i us  pon:xm  quam  illud 
ni'.n  s  i.^t/.  Cic.Fam.7,2,l.-Cur  quod  in  sinu  vestro  e^t  ^f^^'\i^^';^Z/:^Z^''ln 
wnmlis  f  (Why  do  you  bid  us  search  for  what  you  have  in  the  bosom  oJ  your  ^ '  "^^^f-^^^ 
^idoflauinq  il  downf)  Liv.  «i.  m.-^E-yptii  quamvis  carnihclnam  /.rVt'/w  subiennt, 
7'/  1  f(.i  au7aspi(le.n  rinlent.  Cic  Tusc.  5.  27.  -Zeno  perpes.us  est  omnux  ,M>Husquam 
?on'cios  delend:e  tyranni.lis  indicarel.  lb.2,22.-Depu?:na  /f  ^!/;//:^;  "  ,f^;  1'^^'  ^ ^.f;^' 
7  7  7  -If  maqis  is  used  in  the  principal  sentence,  the  mood  «d  the  c  ause  is  he  ludca- 
tlve  •' Maqisiiv\y.x  le-atr,rum  beni-ne  sunt  audita  quam  momentum  ad  muiandos  animos 
hahierun  Liv.  42,  40.-Sometimes  the  writers  of  the  silver  age  use  subjunctives  in  com- 
paraUve  (iua.n-clauses  as  loosely  as  they  use  the  subjunctive  in  'r/«  Vi^.^'l^'rof  thi 
Caio  (Uticeiisis)  majore  spatio  i)roavum  vicerut  quam  a  crasso  vinceretur  (instead  of  tde 
proper  '  victus  est ').  Sen.  V.  B.  21. 

Ob*  13   The  Latin  likes  to  give  to  those  words  in  the  comparative  clause  which  are 
hmmlogous  to  words  of  the  priucii>al  sentence  (he  ^'^'''^.Of^^'''''''''''''^^^^/^^^^^^^^ 
have  in  the  nrincipal  sentence.    This  attuaction.  which  applies  to  all  the  clas^.  s  or 
ccmiparataJe^pe^i^)^^^^  produces  inciiL-rnities  both  in  reiraid  to  grammatical 

and  lo-icai  laws,  which  chieJly  appear  in  the  following  constructions  : 

A.  If  the  principal  sentence  in  a  comparative  period,  both  terms  ol  ^^'^"/.Vif.^  P^,^; 
icatesof  their  own,  has  the  form  of  an  obliepie  inlinitive  clause,  the  VV^^^  o^^ 
comparative  clause  should  be,  as  subobliq.ie,  in  the  ^^•''*//'''-^"'^' «^  "',  "^  ;  i''!,^^ 
the  indicatii-e  But  contrary  to  this  rule,  ihe  predicate  of  such  a  comparatne  c  au>e  is 
mire  generally  (alth.mgh  nof  always)  i^laced  l^xV^uiflnilire  ^'^»' *!«  f.^J'J^jf^^Vibi  X' 
m'iiv^beiiM' treated  ^i^i/i/i^;fre>  coordinate  \s\\\\  its  ])rincipal  sentence,  as  .1  ibi  afflr- 
m5vi,'q,.id;qs\reV>^i"*>'^^/>^'"*-^"r«m.  quam  ex  Italia  ad  bellum  ^\l'^]^l.";^^^f[}^^^^^^  ^^1 
Fum.2,lG, 3  (instead  of  'quam  ex  Italia  exeam).-<l\x\Ci  si  doceo,  te  duabus  p.uiibus  am- 


p.ius  fruinenti  ^6,*^?^/i.w  qvam  populo  Romano  misisse  (instead  of  onam  mtHeri^)    Ih 
::''nL^:  ^-'r-^^T  \"  ^"f'V/^^'^^^^a^^^es  such  an  attraction  is  som.  ime?usS  a-  Cenl 
ses  ante  coronam  herbie  exs/ilu<se,  quam  conceptrwi  esse  semen  ?  lb  Div  2  32 -Thii' « 
raction,  however,  is  not  used  :  1)  If  the  tense'^ui  the  predica  eg  are  j/;f^^^^^^^^ 
tenifre.  iMuin  re  comm,s>urum,  quam  verbis  mirnlabStur.  ne. m.  putav  t    Cic  C^c  7  >l 
-hril  niox  qui  arg.iat   qranurem  Asi,c,  ^.am  Anuochus/..n^  Emii5nem  eSse.  lI  •'41• 
42.-.>)  II  Ihe  predicates  ot  both  propositions  are  the  same,  but  are  exnressed  in  Vich 
prop:.s,non,   the  l^iam-clanse  consisting  merely  of    this  co,.  moii   prcMHcue^^  ^  m^^^^^ 
plum  duusse,  quam  Uixisset,  putaretur.  Cic.  It.  A  1.-3»  If  the  prec  ca  e    s  made  bv   If 
ftus  .,r  Its  equivalents,  and  the  fact  of  the  clause  is  co.icei.ed  as  non  real   thrmTclicai?' 

S  van  Son  '!<"  i^J^Ti^:.  ""If;!^  H'^^'^^  "'  the  subjunctive  tl^i^tn  U^'inflSe 
■/  -V.'^V-      ;.^:     t"  ^^^  "'^^  patieiida  censeo  jjolius  quam  trucidflri  cornora  vesira 

HJici  a  0«  iioa/oca/(^/?-.  Itv  22,  .33.— llamilcar  pentflrum  se  »o;!/w.n' dixit  auam  cum  thnrn 

eS;n^;:;;;;i';:;^;^:r-i^^^""-^--^^-^^«-  -  d«£^d.ehan;i.^;^  ^^^^^s:^ 

predicate-intimtive  in  the  principal  sentence,  (hL-ubJecf  of  the  c/auseT^^ai^^^^^^^^ 
accusattre,  being  attracted  by  the  subject-accusative  of  the     HnS  sent? nee  as     In- 
elhge^s  mulu,  meviqyareacnus  ad  salfltem,  quam  te  ad  pern\"iem'.e  pulS    C^^^  Cu 

L/,".  ■''"  ''''  '■'^'•"  "''^''  '"'  '"'^^'^'  mv^i^iv^^  nostros  non  niodo arn.is  /  «^«^«m  c^/er^^ 
tiationes,yiirmn  etiam  sapientia  jx^tuisse.  lb.  R.  A.  25.-Non  enimXMie  or*S  dixeiim 

fe;  orta.?" 'Tb  Ac'o  "^'"*  aV^^';  I'\«-"',^^-I>i^ct^  ^ne  «..i"  'idSre^rm"^;.  o" 
f  *f ;.,  "V^;"^;,  V^wJ-LrfnT  .•'  •  '  /•  '^V'.^'^i'"^  if^Mmare  qnanti  Sacerdo&m.  lb.  Verr. 
li    '    •,~i'^  ^«"^'^  hetitia  perjundi  arbitramur,  quanta  aut  sumriorem  Africanmn 

Hann.bale  victo.  aut  posteriinrem ,  Kartha::ine  eversaHb.  Fin.  5, 24.-ThX  aUra^ToS 
o.curs  111  the  quahiative  comparison,  as  :  AjGbant  te  non  fatc^5  c./^ms>  ex  vestra  f^^^^^^ 

far hTa'bn nnn  "Tx^.'T'  '""7"-  ^'^"  ^^^''-  '^  ^^'-Q""""  <^«a^e  onines  fugerent  //q.u  q  fe 
,  i:  '  f^\\<rrouem,  Cannens,  p„g„a,  ut  mulfos  alios  i?nperald?^€s.  Liv  26  3     So 

II  comparative  relaivecauses  after  ic/^,/i;  Cumd,.os  ejusdem  juris  coiiditi..nisqire%/;?/# 
^P'"l'n  e^.e  piacmt  Liv.  8, 14.  S(,metimes,  however,  the  sii hjects  (.f  s  icl  clai^^es  a^^^ 
pkued  m  the  nominative,  as :  Vult  se  in  eddem,  quo  ceteri,  jure  iLrsdri.  Cic  L  ^-"^2.3 

I.  A  comparative  clause,  which  does  not  refer  to  the  whole  principal  sentence  but 
nerely  to  an  attributive  phra.e  with  a  comparative  as  an  artrib,ui';'"a%^;:ctive  !;  n^^^^^^^^^^^ 
atZ  /a/'V-''!/"'  ';^  ''"  ''  predicate,  as  :  H;ec  le-atio  etiam  insolentioris  {le7,ationisl 
quimjlla  juit  sails  mairnum  piaculum  esset.  Liv.  45.  23.-7%i.  multo //?«;^i  ouam 
Ajnainus  ruit.  Cic.  Fam.  5,  7,  3.-Sometimes,  the  copula  of  si  cl  cl  uses  Knft ted 
and  the  snbject  o.  the  clause  is  attracted  by  the  case  of  the  co?, pa^<^i^Z  •  Pr  0.  am 
^■ri-HT  J""'  ^f  .>"">""'him).  quod   facere  solent  q.ii    hortan,u?y     .viVi/'.m^hZo 

rnn  qmim  Lalium  (==  quain  Lvliusfidt),  tlbi  adjunctum  esse  patere.  lb.  5  7  3  -Homi- 
nem  e-o  irarundidnm  quam  te  (=  quam  tu  es)  novi  neminem.  Plant.  Merc  i  2  30  - 
Cerie  e(iii!dem;y//^?v/my>V^r<?;«  quamte  (=quamtu  es)nu\\  neminem.  lb.  Pers"  2  2'  27  — 
*jg<>  homtnem  callidtotem  vidi  neminem,  quam  Phorinionenn=  quam  Pfimnioest^  Ter 
i'eorrh  ^^-^"  r ''■'"'•  ^J<'ft--^;l''-^-Very  rarely  this  attraction  occur"  when  .he 
h  li-  r  .,  1  "'''■-''^"'^'  ','  //o/2/^^/.e.  accusative,  as:  Thermopylae  locus  appdiatur.  no- 
uiiis  Lacediemoniornm  ad  versus  Pei-sas  morte,  tnaqis  memorabili  qvam  puqnai=quajn 
Sm  iu^J.  »'»v.  36,  15  If  puqna  is  taken  as  a  nominative,  the  omission  of  the  copula 
w ould  be  as  harsh  as  the  attraction  by  the  ablat ives  morte  tnagis  memorabUl. 

o,?.m",!it".,^*'''^?'  ^''"'■^'''  c«".f«i"i"?r.a  comparative  by  implication,  are  construed  with 
Quam-clau<es,  the  same  as  with  maqis  expressed.  1)  The  verbs  maUe  (sometimes  velle 
^J^^rlTJmJ''^^^^^^^  Snaqnisque  ab  aliis  benefacta  laudSri  quam  ipse  aliOrum 

^^!1  nJl     ^^^-  ^•''.'•V'^-.^--^^i''*i;'  amultis  eligere  homines  coramodissimum  quod- 
que,  quam ^vfG  nni  alicui  certo  vtllmt  addicere.  Cic.  Inv.  2.2.-Accipere  ouam  facere 
;mf*Vaj  injunam.   Cic.  Tusc.  .5. 19.-2)  The   adverb  ultra  in  the  meaning  'farther\ 
beyond  .  denoting  an  exceeding  of  the  limits  stated  in  the  Quam-clause     %ntra 
9 M<///i    mostly  occurs  with  ne-atioiis,  but  aUo  affirmativelv ;.  iV/)  in  regard  to  placb 
(literally  or  li_Mirativelv),  =  ultetius  quatn,  lonqius  quam:  Tlicipitlnus  non  ultra  quam 
(no  lartiier   thannii   Ilernicos  procedit.    Liv.  3.  8. -Longuni  exordium  est  quod  W^ra 
9wr/m  suns  est  producitur  (luither  than  it  is  sufficient).  Cic.  Inv.  1.  18.  Coinp  lb   Tusc 
1    %.•    .  •    'T^^'^^'  7.}^^-'-  .^-':"''i''  """  "^/'■'^  V'^«'«  ("o  longer  than)  quinque  dies  Hhodi 
niorati.   Liv.  4.^,10.- I  rienniiifn  et  sex  mensis ///f/m  ^Mom  11«  et  lege  Emilia  ceiisflram 
gerai.  lb.  <»,  31.  Comp.  Tac.  Ann.  6,  41.- (^)  Of  the  ixtknsity  of  acticms.  designating  the 
intensiiy  as  •beyond  measure  ' :  Nihil  uUra  (=  intolerabiiius)  malOrum  est,  quam  QUod 
pa>si  ^.umus.  Liv.  2s,  :i{).-(d)  (Jenerally  it  is  thus  nsed  wiih  Ut-clauses,  dependent  ou 
uverbum  faciendi  (by  Livy,  not  by  Cicero),  as  a  mere  synonym  of  amjdius  (Ubs  6j: 


,j,&» 


764 


COMTAKATIYE  CLAUSES. 


QUANTITAXrV^E  COMPARISON. 


765 


X  ,      *      ««cf.-^Knt  •  Thprc  remained  vnfhinq  eUe  (nolhing 
Nihil  ultra  qvam  uf  poonitGret  ^''^f^^^^^lZu^^^^^  vUra  valnCrnnt  quam 

iuomdo  oes.arCMnns  (=  m/^^,/ «"'i'/^/^Y-^^^^^^^  >onu.iinu..   tl.e  advert 

*//»ra  atid  ,s///)<-r  are  similaily  us.  d  with  ^i"'{  "  ^'7!-  r  <i  i)  2  54.  -(h)  =  ultra  (beyond) : 
s  pm  quam  a.l  lin.Miam  ^toniachns  «""\;  ''"J;^^,    euTn  credihile  e.t     Sail.  Cat.  5. 

_-P,\enas  dedit,  usque  '^'n^r'^^^J''''^^^^^  VvUnovWm^.  super  quam  quod 

(with  a  FactH^lau.e)  =  i>/v»/^/7'/am  r^/o^^^^^^i^n  ^^^^^^^^^  2     :i._MarcHlu.  etuun  ad- 

li>sen.erant  a  consilio,  ti-rntis  ^V'    '    Z      na  e     uenavc-rat.  Ih.  27,  20.    Si-nificantly  a 

.uiuuMC.iveofnon.real.ty  is  ^;*;;^    "  'o  t.    C  in  terms  b.youd  what  could 

feret./wamlU'ri;>^>.'«  ;anoralor^^^^^^^^  ,tyle,   the  adverb  pn^ 

happen.    Cic.  Oiat.  40. -4)    In  autcdapsi^^^^^^^^  .^^^^  ^^^    compakisos.    ;>/tg- 

is  construed  with   ^^''^'^-^■^«'^"^■^\  *;>^''n(m'(-^  with) :  Nihil  hoc  qnuleu.  est 

quam  beiu-  ofre.i  written  as  ^^''^.^  ^^v'      V^^h  8  is    u»ll.ui^  nith  what  he 

t.i-ntamMKe,;>r^<Z"^/"^a''5>«  ^,"'"^'l^^i*^J,un  fnii^  omnia  facio.  pnvquam  ivuh^i'^ 
otherwise  spends.  Plant.  ^^^'^^ ■'^),\^-J:  ,,,  Uier  tiicki*  he  playe.i  on  me.  lb.  5,  2,  2o.- 
ine  modis  lu.lificatus  est :  co,ni^"^  ^'/,i  '  «  res  palitur.  .tudu>t  ele;:antiiv :  without 
Nee  i)ol  profecto  Mue  i:randi  malo,  /^''^'i'""';  .  '  ,, »  ,,.  ^f,.,.e  Pro!.  22.— Sed  hoc  etuun 
.cdoK.  ei-Ms,  e.nnpared  ^vi'^' /he  advann.j^e.  U     -  1    1» ;  ^\:,!n  excellent,  ...tnpared  with 

nulcium 'St.  ;mry"rtm  sumi)tus  nhi  l»*^^^''.'  '  !  pv  lb  \ul  3,5  :W.-Caionis  s^ententia 
the  time  when  lliey  are  demai. ding  their  nionev.  Ih.  AUi.  .5,  j.^>^_^^^^^^.^   .j^^^,   (inecum 


nulcrum  Vt.  »r(rv"«"t  ''""M""-'  •■■     '.1    V,.  .\w>tw.v    Ih    \ul  3,5  :«.— t  aionis  senieni. 
e  time  when  lliey  are   ^l!""^^^'-; 'I'S      H^    "  -     >^^  iii„,,    (inecu 

laxiorib'is    pauUo    lonLMonhuMine   Nerhis  o.m   r^^^^^^^^^^  /       .  ,^j,„..„ce).  (ie 

raio's  wordiu- i^  rather    "•r'a'^i;   -Jr'-s     uhiM^  Nvitl'  "t  i"^'*^"d  of  w. 

N.A.in.l.  ^'<''M^.l*l';'''-^uV  3  5.^.-77''^^^^^^^^^^  belou!,'  the  adverbs  yx 

qunm.  as  in   Plant.   Men    .^.  5,  •«.  ^  "»"•/,;,,' r/i,,,,^  j,,  conneciion  with  Q"<im  (see  ... 
Ld  ante  (=  pnu-^).  formini;  UMupon  "  ^  J,",    ^'.^s  are  used  with  pridie,  as  :  Si 

«.-,<♦,  and  p.  HWi  foil.).  As  ^vuh  rt/^/^,  and  /     "s    i"'i'n  \   "^^.^.^   ,,^,.  jepl.-iola)  e-t  />ri(/<t; 
hie  pridie  na.us  foret  ^'mm  hn-  c>t       '''.'y.  ^i;!;.;,;-  ,,,„,„  con.i.ia  lure  puiahantur. 

data  7'mm  ilia.  C'ic.  A^t- 3.  «. --i-ll-^''    '''/,'       ,.  1     n--/'ridie  quam  c.xcesMt  e  viti. 
Ih.  4,  15,  H.-rridiequam  e-^o  ^    '^na^  ve    t       >^;;.; 'j;^,^  ^  someiimes  ronstrned  with 

a miVwm  quam  (si)  (p.  73'J,  Obs.  3,  lin.). 
'"*'"""  ^  i,.«,,ro<iv..rh  In  tnc  comparative 


craf  ipse  Cyclo]»!»  quam  rt/'i<?.«  iltfi  prudenfior.  Ih.  5.  39.— On  the  other  hand,  a  comparative 
ablative  is  j)refenH-d  if  the  subject  is  a  negative  absolute  adj''ctive,  or  an  intenvf/ative  ad- 
jective, virtually  ne:.'ative,  as  :  Outs  vberior  in  dicendo  Platonef  Quis  Aristctele  /lervo- 
sior,  Theophriisto  dulc'wrf  Cic.  lirut.  31.— §'/?^  eiiim  hoc  adolescente  castior/  Quis  autera 
Wo.  qui  m.iiedTcit.  impurior  f  II).  Phil  3.  tj.— In  publicis  nihil  est  leqe  pravius.  lb.  2,  42. 
— A'i/iil  ii>^t  detestalnlius  dedecore,  nihil  fcedius  nervit ate.  11).3, 14.— A^i^i/  est  animo  vtlo- 
cius.  lb.  Tusc.  1,  19. — \ihil  enim  est,  profecto,  homini  j^rudentid  dukius.  lb.  1.  39.— Si 
iiiiiil  es.<et  ali ud.  7ii/ii^  esset  hoJiiiiie  de/ormius.  Ih.  Tus'c.  2, 21.— A'iAi/  est  rirfute  ama- 
bitius.  Ih.  Brut.  IS.— Quid  est  melius  aut  quid  prcestantius  et  benfificentius  bonitate  ?  lb. 
N.  D.  1,  43.— A'j^i/  est  in  historiS,  pura  et  illustri  breritnte  dulcius.  lb.  Brut.  7.'i.  Accord- 
iiiir  10  a  remarkable  L;iiiu  idiom,  the  form  *  quid  y/iihil)  e.it\  etc.,  in  this  construction  is 
used  with  relerence  to  peksons.  j^enerally  referring  to  their  actions  or  qualities;  as: 
Xii'il  erat  Crasso  cojnoHus  (=Nobody  had  a  greater  command  of  the  laiiiruage  thaii 
Crassus;  or:  No  orations  show  a  greater  command  of  th^  language  than  those  of 
C'rasMis),  Cic.  lirut.  39  — Qi'id  enim  beafius  illis.  quo<  tu  expulsos  a  te  pnedicas?  Nothing 
is  hidier  than  the  co/idition  of  those  whom  «!tc.  lb.  Pliil.  2.  Vi.—  Tarquinio  vero  quid  irn- 
pu'fe/itiu<,  qui  etc.?  What  is  more  impudent  than  the  act  of  Tarquin  who  etc.?  lb.  Tusc. 
3, 12. — Quid  est  autem  nequiu<  aut  turpii's  fffemiuato  lirof  What  is  so  wicked  or  dis- 
graceful as  fffeminacy  in  a  man?  lb.  3. 17.— AVc  mihi  est  te  jucundius  quicquam  nee  ca- 
rina, lb.  Fain.  2.  10,  1. — Acces^it  etiain  ilia  opinio,  quod  homini  homiue  pulchrius  nihil 
videiitur.  lb.  N.  D.  1,27.— Comparative  ablatives  are  al«o  used  when  the  comparative 
adjective  has  the  lorce  of  a  participle.,  so  as  to  be  equivalent  to  a  relative  clause:  Est 
bos  c(!rvi  flgflra,  cujtis  a  media  fronte  inter  aurls  unum  cornu  exsistit,  excelsius  (=quod 
est  exceldusj  muqifque  directum  hi<,  qu;e  nobis  nota  sunt,  cornibus.  Ca;s.  B.  G.  6,  2ti. 

]}.  If  tlie  comparative  is  in  the  relaiiou  of  a  completing  puedicate  in  thb  accusa- 
TIVK,  dejiendent  on  a  pactitivp:  verb  (p.  101.  li.  71),  especially  verbs  of  conside?'ifig  (p. 
102,  No.  6').  tlie  compared  noun  being  conceived  as  x\\g  subject  of  the  same  lactitive  verb 
under.-tood,  the  constrnct'on  of  tlie  comparative  ablative  is  frequently  used,  as:  Sapi- 
eiiti.i  omnia  inferiara  virtilfe  ducit.  (Coinjileted  :  Sapient  la  viriQ.em  siiperiOrem  ducit; 
=  Virtue  i"  su'jterior.  as  wisdcnn  considers  it).  Cic.Tiise.  4,  2H.— fi^st  boni  consulis,  siiam 
salutem  post^rioiem  salilte  com  muni  ducere.  11).  llab.  Perd.  1.  3. — Profecto  Epieflrus  nihil 
Ctxsalione  meliut  eritttitnat.  Ih.  N.  D.  1,  W.—IIerodotmil  cur  r-  raciorem  ducam  Eunio  f  lb. 
Div  2,  50.— Qui  nihil  hattet  (considers)  in  vita  jucundiv.'f  vita,  is  cum  virtute  vitam  nou 
])(»ie-t  colere,  Auct.  Her.  4,  14.— //oc  mihi  fjra'iu'i  fac»  re  nihil  potes.  Cic.  Fam.  13,  44.— 
Bnl  tlK- construction  \\\\\\  quam,  'n\  thi<  conn- ction.  occurs  as  often  as  thai  with  com- 
})arative  ablatives,  as:  Ut  nihil  pulchnua  quam  hominem  putdrtt.  Cic.  N.  D.  1,  27.— Nou 
ininuii  pneclilrum  hoc  quam  illud  judicundum  est.  II).  Ofl".  1,  22. 

(\  A  comparative  ablative  i-  often  used  when  the  principal  sentence  with  a  predicate- 
adjective  in  ilie  co/nptiratice  dtqree  is  in  the  accusativk  with  thk  infimtivk.  the  com- 
l)a"red  noun  having  the  relation  of  a  sul>jecl-accui>ative  in  a  Quam-cl  luse,  as  :  (Jra>^so  nihil 
statuo  fieri  potuisce  ]>erfectius  (Indepknoently  :  Cra<so  nihil  perfectius  est.,  or  fieri 
jiotest).'  Cic.  Brut.  3H.  — Dixerui  t.  omni  pnesenti  atatu  spem  cnjusque  novandi  res  suas 
b/andiorem  eK-<e  (Inoep.  :  Spes  cuju-qiie  tjlandior  est  quam  ontnis  prttsens  status).  Liv.  :i5, 
17.— (^iiiil  egt)  caiisam  civiiaiium  ai;o.  (juam  ipsis  a(jtiitVtus  et  nos  et  regem  cognoscere 
txquiusest  (  — y?]quius  est  nos  caiisam  coirnoscere ;  minus  iequiim  est  ips(f.-<  agentts  cau- 
pam  c<»s.'no8cere).  \A\.  3."),  10.  Tie  construction  in  this  i)as?age  is  extremely  harsh,  since 
thr  comparative  ablatixe  is  not  the  subject  of  the  copula,  but  of  a  predicate-infinitive, 
d«'pendent  ot\  it.  — But  the  ordinary  construction  \\'\i\\quami\\\i\  an  attracted  subject-accu- 
sative (accoriiing  to(^iis.  12.  No.  I'i),  is  about  as  frequently  used  as  a  comi)arative  al)lative, 
as:  Sentio.  Lailuam  liuiruam  loc'ipletiorem  esse  quam  Gntcavi.  Ci(^.¥'u\.\.'i.—Xevdnem 
diqniorem  esse  ex  sociin  vestris  quam  me.  dicere  aiisiin.  Li  v.  37.  .53.  Compare  the  following 
two  similar  sentences  with  ditlVreut  comparative  constructions:  Illud  cognosces  pro- 
fecto, mihi  te  {=quafn  tei  neque  cariorem,  iwqui\/ ucundidrem  esse  quemquam.  Cic.  Fam. 
2,  3, 2.  — A'<?;;*///f//t  cul.iuani  neque  cariorem  wqwe  jucundiorem  unqnam  ful'^se  quam  te 
niihi.  lb.  1,9,  24:  where,  the  construction  with  ^'/am  is  used,  because  the  comparative 
clause  consists  of  an  object  (mihi),  bet^ides  the  subject-accusative  te. 

1).  If  the  comparative  i>  in  the  relation  of  an  attimbute-adjkctive,  the  comparative 
noun  in  tiie  con>truction  of  a  comparative  ablative  may  be  used  if  the  comparative  ab- 
lative is  equivalent  to  a  Quam-clause  witii  a  predicate-adjective  and  the  copula,  provided 
tlie  governing  comparative  adjective  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  as:  Hoc  mihi 
inojtis  (  =  m<ijor  7'ts  quam,  hcec  est)'Ah  dis  imniortalibus  nihil  dari  potest.  Cic.  Phil.  2,  46. 
— Causam  suscepisii  antiquiohm  m*7norid  lua  (=quam  memoria  tua  est).  lb.  Rab.  Perd. 
9._()„em  auclOrem  locuplttidrem  PUifune  laudilre  possninus  {-locuplttiorem  quam  Plato 
esDt  lb  liep  1,  111.— Non  tiilit  ullos  Inec  civitas  aut  irloria  daridres,  aut  auctoriiate  qravi- 
or'-s.  aut  Immanitate  poliiii>re.s,  P.  Africano,  C.  LiBlio.  L.  Furio.  lb.  Or.  2,  37.— Nullum  ^o 
telu7n  ad  viuccuduiu  homini  ab  dis  imiuortalibus  acnus  datum  est  (=nullum  telum  ucrius 


'M 


766 


COMPARATIVE   CLAUSES. 


QUANTITATIVE  COMPARISON. 


767 


;  7  .oA    T  \^r  91   11     Hilt  oftm  tlic  coTistruction  with  qnam  is  applied  to  sentences 

Vr.e.^fannas  (  =  n.,llam  >V."\V'-'^^^^ril°T  x  ex  i  V^r^^  falti-W)"^^^m  ^^^  detract.,» 

^^ciuuni  honctn.  e.t)  I  >.  1  u.c^  ,  .f^,"  f^  oppicfu  a  ha  l  niil^  majde  certa.nine  cepit 
erat  (not  tynnino).  L  v .  '^'^' l^-;-/*' /l"cm,n^^      H  Quoted  Obs.  13,  C.    Coinpani- 

7/m//'  cnstm  (not  ca-tris).  Ib..W.  'Jf;,^  ^r.^l"^;;;'"''  u  ,Vot  in  the  nominative  or  acen-ative, 
tV.  ablative.,  when  \he  amipara  ive  a  j.x^  however,  the  pa«. 

occur  ..nl>  m  the  poets  and  ''' '*^';^\\V  .wit^  U    Pan  am  meintu^  potwre  placentts 

Kifie  Cic.  Att.  1.  li,  1.  cued  in  the  foot-   ote),  «\,  ^^  V-'.J>  ,  ,,tn^^       wlwfi^   n(roc(ae 

(=qnam  "'-^^"^«^  . :""!?•  olnn.'^"  .<!  -UnWw  ite?.  t  the  "ilvJr  a^e  n.e  compara^ve 
i^iKt  f  tf!:^:mU!u'SSaJ;i'auin.Xre.olv.d  into  a  .ti^ect  with  the  copula,  a.: 
t.i^i;  :..<;....  ....i.animt.m  |;abnit  .=anam  ^nuU.na^^.J^      -^j,^^,,,,,  ,^,,,. 


maiorem  semltu  animum  habnit  (=qnam  senufug  habmt). 
Dixit.  As,a>n  hoc  lon.^e  m4ivs  qnam  ^'J^^.f '^'^^^i  ;  V,;^,;!  f.o,;„\';,;uio  H.e,-mo  polV'S 

•inxrit    Cic   luv.  l,r)5  (Cornp.  Auct.  ller.  !i,  .il).— iU'CTi.an^uraii.  ,jv  I  iw  e/ft  The  U'^e 

able  that  the  correct  readin-  is  'm«i/^^■  «^''^«^  Anlouio  ,i.e.    ^J"""\^"^'^,^^^^"^^^         _._. 
^  I„  ti.e  foliowin.  two  instance.  tlu,construcUonw.mc^ 

be  alwa!/s  used  ni  place  of  Q„am-claa>e^.  }^\.;^J'':'^lll'^^^^^^^  of  the  eom- 

comparative  clause  refers  to  a  J>recx'din^  a/i^  ^.  as  .nbjt^MM     i^^^  ^.^^^^ 

^^:iou.^^:yn;diu.ahoferoccH.xn^V^^  J^^V» -'>   If  1 1  e*   i mpan-d  word  is  a  hkla- 

nihil  uoXG^X,  v,i^ii  admirahiliu.<.  <-'c.  N.  D.  2,40.— NatQr .^  y /a  mnu  i»  i  i  .^  _p  1^,,^ 
Tb  \  D  •>  57  -Mens,r/'/a  nihil  honiiin  dedit  dens  \\^<cdivvnus.  lb.  Utt.  }'  J."- ^Vl"'^"!  ' 
bl-ilmn  7^/o  nnllu.n  neque  majns,  neque  i,e/ic./fo..^.  Komani  ^-essere.  Lin. 38,^.  bcc 
tlu>  i>:is«'ji<''e~  ciuoied  p.  S-'iS,  Obs.  8. 

«' k™m.rL  the'ronowin,  iaiomntie  constmction,  jn^^^^ 

C; 


^,S;;rcS'l- fVit,,-Z>K:/i  ,.ro,..  d/^«  eqmm 


quain   solitum 
(  =  major  qnam 


nnn/eral  expressions,  referring  to  the  comparative  adjectives  major und  minor,  denoting 
AGK.  as  :  MdjOres  duodecini.  annix  coronjlti  gupplicavgrunt  (thosf  that  weri*  older  than 
twelve  years;.  Liv.  40.  37.— Mancipia  mi/?//ra  annis  vij^inti.  lb.  3!),  44.  (So  re«rularly 'ma- 
jor' or  'initial-  viqinti  q>iinque  annu\  in  rej;ard  to  the  term  of  lei:al  guardianship.)  If 
'  iintiia''  or  'natx  '  is  added  t»  the  nnmcral  expressing  the  years,  cmparaiive  al)!atives 
are  generally  not  used,  the  first  or  second  formula  mentioned  in  Obs.  3  lieing  employed 
instead,  as:  Majors'/am  quindecim  annas  na(>ix.  JAv.  45.S2.—ifaJor  qi/adragiiifa  annos 
iiat(fs\  Cic.  K.  A.  14.  Karely,  however,  comparative  ablatives  occur  even  wirh  Jtafu, 
as :  Ne  qui  rrriTwr  triqinta  anids  natu  legerStnr.  Cic.Verr.  2, 2,  49.  The  Jurists  frequently 
place  the  numeral  expression  referring  to  the  age  in  the  qenitive  (major,  or  minor  vujinti 
quinque  niinorum),  combining  thus  two  different  constructions,  namely,  that  of  the 
second  formula  in  Obs.  3,  and  of  a  qualitative  genitive  (major  viginti  annontm=:homo 
])lus  viginti  annnrum;  '■homo  liqinfi  ani'Orum''  meaning  a  ^man  of  twenty  yearn')  as: 
Nisi  si  minor  sit  anndimm  viginti  quinque.  Gaj.lnst.  2,  163.  The  same  construction 
occurs  in  Liv.  3S,  38. 

3)  Sometimes  (very  rarely)  ablatives  absolute  serve  at  the  same  time  as  comparative 
ablatives,  as:  Virttlie  gubernante,  quid  potest  e-se  prcecfarius ?  What  can  be  more  ad- 
mirable than  the  reign  of  virtue?  (=quam  quum  virtus  regnat).  Cic.  Rep.  1.  34. 

4)  II  it  is  desirable,  for  rhetorical  purposes,  to  give  to  a.  compared  Infinitive-clause  a 
svndetic  antecedent  in  the  form  of  a  neuter  demonstrative  (see  p.  492,  Obs.  15.  No.  1), 
tiiis  demonstrative  antecedent  must  be  placed  in  the  comparative  ablative,  as :  Quid  hoc 
toia  Sicilia  est  claiiua.  (juam  onines  Segest»  matrOnas  conveuisse,  quum  Diana  exporta- 
rCtur  ex  oppido  ?  Cic.\  err.  2. 4,  33. 

h)  The  poets  sometimes  use  comparative  ablatives  in  place  of  Qnam-clanses  referring 
to  a  comparison  of  unlike  quality  (p.  749,  Obs.  3),  as:  Ne  putes  alium  sapienti  bonoque 
beiltum.  Ilor.  Ep.  1, 16, 20.  This  licence,  however,  is  never  extended  to  clauses  of  equal 
quantity  or  quality. 

Obs.  16.  Sometimes  in  the  historians  (Sallnst.  Livy,  Tacitns,  Nepos  *).  the  comparative 
degree  to  which  a  Quam-clmse  refers,  is  eUipticnlly  omitted.  Tliis  ellipsis  only  occurs 
in  the  construction  with  maqis.  mentioned  Obs.  7,  Nos.  D  and  E,  when  either  the  inten- 
sities of  two  verbal  predicates,  or  those  of  two  objects  of  the  same  predicate,  are  com- 
pared with  each  other.  In  this  instance,  magi^  is  sometimes  (but  rarely)  omitted.  In 
Sallust  there  arc  only  two  passages  critically  established  :  FortOna  res  cunctas  ex  lubi- 
dine  quam  ex  vero  celebrat  obscuratque  (=ex  lui)idine  jnagi^i  quam  etc.).  Sail.  Cat.  8, 1; 
and:  Beneflcii"  quam  metu  imperium  agitdbant.  lb.  9.  5;  although  even  in  these  pas- 
sages many  Codd.  exhibit  magbi.  In  the  other  passages  (Cat.  48.  5  ;  and  52.  3)  the  trreat 
majority  of  the  Codd.  give  mdgift.  althonirh  most  of  the  editions  have  left  it  otlt.  In  Livy, 
this  omission  is  very  rare;  as:  Ciaudii  oratio  Uxil precib us  quam  juririo  similis (=ma7i« 


passage  (Ann.  4.  61.  cited  Obs.  10)  two  descriptive  adjectives  in  the  positive  degree  are 
compared  by  quam  without  7na7w.— In  Nepos  this  ellipsis  occurs  in  one  passage:  Ta- 
men  statuit  congredi  quam  cum  tantis  copiis  reliigere.  Dat.  S. 

Obs.  17.  If  two  propositions  are  so  compared  with  each  other  that  it  is  represented  as 
donbtiul  to  which  of  the  comixired  terms  the  higher  degree  is  to  be  attributed,  the  com- 
parative period  takes  the  form  of  a  dis.iu.mctive  questiov,  P.  I.  §  419).  the  second  term 
l)ein<'  introduced  by  an  instead  of  quam  Disjun-tiive  comp  irisons  are  treated  in  every 
respect  like  perio.is  with  Quain-clau-es,  especially  in  the  form  of  the  cotnpara;ive  de- 
gree in  tjie  first  term  of  the  comparison  ;  only  fiat,  if  the  ouestiou  is  oblique,  the  predi- 
cates of'the  period  always  require  the  subjun'tire  ;  as  :  Utrum  7a< a^/iv  est  inirandnm, 
quod  is  coiidemnatns  est.  a/>  quod  oninlno  respondCre  ausus  est?  Cic.  Clu.  22,  60.— 
S«peet  multuni  hocmeum  coiiitavi.  bonliie  an  mali  plus  aftulerit  hominihuseloquentuB 
studium.  lb.  Inv.  1,  1.— Ex  liiteris  tuis  cepi  Iruclnm  duplicem.  mihique  ditticilem  adjii- 
dieandum,  amoremne  erga  me  tuum  an  animum  in  rempublicaiu  p(url<  icstimandum 
putarem?  lb  Fam.  10,  5, 1.— If  two  adjectives  are  compared  with  each  other,  generally 
each  of  them  is  placed  in  the  comparative,  the  same  as  with  Quam-clauses,  as:  Multi 
dubitavCre,  J'orlior  an  felicior  esset.  Sail.  Jug.  95.  ^ 

some),~beiiig^nsed~witliThe  force  of  'less  interest ',=/«J/?ort*'v«  usuris  quam  centesirnis. 
This  use  >eems  to  have  been  colloquial.  .  . 

*The  pas.^ao-e  Liv.  .'i.il,  15:  'invidiam  lenTre  quam  minvno  sno  pnvato  incommodo, 
publieOque  piTpuli  Komani',  will  mike  no  i:ood  sense  without  reading  '  h-nlre  siio  pn- 
vato incommodo,  7Wrtm/y/i/w//iO  incommodo  publico?.  R.',  =  suo  incommodo  ma^t.* quam 
etc.  However,  this  conjecture  is  too  bold,  and  there  is  no  other  passage  in  Livy  in  wnictl 
this  ellii)sisoccuru,  except  the  cue  cited  in  the  text. 


if 


Ygg  OBLIQUE  DISCOURSE. 

ClIArTER  EIGHTH. 

OBLIQUE  DISCOURSE. 

B  ««,    cm  ,orE  r>.«couusE  {oratio  ohV.qua)  is  a  scries  of  periods  ex- 

prosscd  in  un  oblique  form  (as  ^'^'h»-'^^ 5^  ;«  •  P'  "o'^uo^oZ^na  l.as  several 
«ttenHlbyaspeaUer.i„trod,^edby  .     a  Ih-   0-^^    obU.ue  and  snb- 

peculiari,  es.  ''-'f  "'^    ^^  ^^f  tCPr,,«,m«  ?,•.«<.««..  rCVrrin,,  to  tbe 
oblique  clauses,  1)  in  the  "^»  "    "  e  p  '  ,,^^^,,1  ,„„„  of  the 

sneaker,  and  to  the  person  spoken  to  ,  .)  m  tue  y 

predicates,  both  of  the  l"i"cipal  sentenees  and   he  ^  "'^,     •,      „p„,„.,„, 
OB,  1.  Not  every  Oblique  or  «•'>" ''■'l""  J  1     ,%,'i^  .^11  ai  |ir  .'cipal  [.nllicnte.  may 

7,'«/n.'a.<*^,  i^^  ea  ./i>a7>/«/^o  ^''^f,?'''';;  J.^J^  i^nv  ea  h  oth,  r  without  any  ^^^r'!''^^^ 
ThiKoftfti  ft  srcat  number  of  P^^'^'"*^  ^"V,l,,  v<.rv  awkward  in  He  L^;:ll^n  \erMon. 
V.  ,- >n     dicendi,  which  const ructu.ns  an-    .et^a^^^^  ^^^  .applied,  bu 

Irammaticany  to  all  ^^'■^^r^^!:^^'Vt^\^^^^l.u\av^^^n^e  to  consider  t  >«  «^2  o 
itir*  more  in  conformity  w^h  the^niu^  .roverned  by  the  ic/^a  of  obli'initi/.  It  ^  t  * 
neriodMCOUi^titatin-'oratioobuiui  /V*  X  ,™unatical  forms  of  the  oratio  obliqua, 
cone,  ptiou  to  which  tl»e  peculiarities  in  the  Ijratm^^^^^^^  account  of  these  devia- 

itlie  deviations  Irom  the  -enera  rnles,  m"';t  \«  !„  i   the   'oiatio  obliqiur,   must  be 

coi'HsK.  .    .      ^    J  «nd  Fccond  persons  is  fa-c^i/c?*'^/ in 

Or^  2    The  nsc   of   pronouns  both   of  J"«  ,V\*'^ ,»;;",. ",..,,   or  that  of  the  person  ad- 
obr.que  discourse,  unless  the   author   quo  es    V^!;,^^,^  ./^.f/^f^^^^  rE.;soN  must  per- 

dreX^d     If  speeches  of  others  are.quote     th  "<    ;  =^  *»  ^     ^^  ^  p,r,on   spoken  of  a 

?oi  I    the  three  offices  of  r.p.esentii.j,'  the  action  J  f   l^^^^f  p^'  ^  „\ore  expressions  lor 

person  spoken  to,  and  to  the  *'P^:'^)^^-^^^;V^;;V,ji„  aJ^/.a.je  than  there  are  in  En{,dish  ; 
he  'third  i.er.^on'  at  the  disposi  ion  of  ^h  -^,  '  i  ,li  a"  much  an  impos^'^^'ility  as  U  is 
else  t  col'.struction  (^f  onuio  ^^^^^^^ll^  a;dlu^i<n  -adjectives  K  i p.e,  ille  iaud 
[n  English  ;  "---'yJ^^^Xr spokVn  o^^  ^^'d";.  while  in  KugU.h  only  'A.'  and  it. 
;;;i!?s^;;;^r ^h^nla?^;a  ^-1  -  be  used  for  Uii^ntrpos.  ^^^^^^,^  .^ 

OBs  3    The  FiusT  PERSON  (i.^.  that  iK'rson  ^^hlch   refcrs^^^^^^^^^ 
C^S^ral  ;  expressed  by  the  pronoun  ,.u  ^^''^:^^^^^^,^t\.e  is  required     n   the 
«rooositions  of  the  discourse,  or  f  ''ti..  t;^-^' ->cepi  \nc^  re-ularly  subobhque). 

Kricinil  clause,  or  in  the  dependent  t'lte  cUu^ts  i'^  |\»^"  ^^^^^i^^^  referrin-  to  ll.e 
V^J'Ts  subject' accusative  is  frequently  «";'"^2;,,,„Via  ita'sint,  tamen  ...^  cum  ei. 
speaker  aie  re.'ularly  expressed  by  --'^^^  ^ij.  •  ^^'^"^^e  \nparatum  veni^.e),  QU-^\  "e- 
E^ur^vlLs^U^^^c^u^^a  ^in^.  tlno  posita  pr.s..ia  exisUmataios 


OBLIQUE  DISCOURSE. 


769 


e«8C.  In  prjTscntia  cnrre  esse^tolis  debSre.  ut  copia  frumenti  ftvis  PuppcdilStnr.  Liv, 
85.  44.-  But  since  frequently,  accordiiiii:  to  the  fjeneral  rules,  the  same  forms  are  required 
lor  both,  the  person  spftken  to,  and  the  person  ^poken  of  (if  referring  to  the  subject), 
the  connection  must  olten  decide  wliether  by  m/i.  fti/)i.  fte,  and  gwts.  the  i'jyeaker  is  meant, 
or  one  of  I  he  two  other  ])er>ons  :  ai«  :  Tarciiiinius  dixit  (in  concilio  EtruscOrum). .  .ne*'^, 
ortiim  (jiisdein  san^ruinis.  extorreni  cum  liberis  adolescentil)UP  ante  oeulos  «/os  perire 
simrent.  Liv.  3.  <>.  Here  the  pronoun  se  refers  to  the  speaker,  but  "ftuos"'  to  the  persons 
fjxiken  of,  bein;j  the  subjects  of  the  predicate  nnerent,  which  relation  is  distinctly 
j-hown  by  the  connection.  But  if,  for  instance,  the  sentence  did  not  contain  the 
l)hrasep  *  /J<»,  ortiitn  ejusdfm  sanrjuinu.  extorrem  \  and  only  the  latter  part  {ne  liheromin^e 
oculofi  nuos  ju-i'irt  sinerent)  were  expressed,  it  would  be  doubtful  whether  ^  svos''  referred 
to  Tarquin  or  to  the  Etruscans  ;  and  the  plural  '' ipsoridii''  with  reference  to  the  Etrus- 
cans, or  the  singular  'iptnuK''  with  reference  to  Tarquin  would  have  to  be  substituted. 
So  Ciesar  in  the  followin<;  passage  uses  Hprn^''  with  reference  to  the  fi^peakers,  while  the 
prec€?dinir  f^ftis  ref-  rs  to  the  p  rson  s^wk'^ii  o/"(as  subject  ol  the  clause),  and  the  possess- 
ive i>u<f,  to  the  person  f^pok^n  to  (likewi^e  the  subject  of  an  adjoined  clause) :  Quod  im- 
jn-ovTso  uiium  pagum  adortus  esset.  qunm  ei  qui  flumen  transissent,  svis  auxilium  ferre 
non  possent,  ne  oh  earn  rem  aut  ^^/<^  magnopere  virtuti  tribneret,  aut  ipiios  despiceret, 
(tlie  Helvetians,  as  the  speakers,  instead  of 'X(?  despiceret,  which  would  be  ambiguous). 
C;es.  B.  O.  1.  18. — Sometimes  the  pronoun'*  t*,  en,  id,  are  used  with  reference  to  the 
ftp^aker.  to  obviate  ambiguities  which  might  arise  out  of  the  use  of  the  pronoun  sui^ 
sihi,  se ;  as  :  Qiiodsi  veteris  contnmelite  oblivisci  vcllet,  num  etiara  recentium  injuria- 
rijm,  quod  ^o  i/f?I/o  iter  per  provinciam  tentassient,  memoriam  deponere  posse  *  lb.  B. 
G.  1,  14.  Here  se  invito  mitrht  refer  to  the  L'rammatical  subject  (instead  of  'inrl/i'  as 
accessory  predicate).— The  chansre  of  the  first  person  into  the  third,  in  all  kinds  of  in- 
direct statements  in  wliich  a  third  person  speaks  of  himself.  i>  even  then  necessary  if 
the  first  person  '  ego''  in  direct  discourse  would  have  the  force  of  a  7i0un,  as :  Pompejus 
ad  omnia  me  alteiuin  se  (his  other  'ego'  or  ""self)  fore  dixit.  Cic.  Alt.  4,  1,  7. 

Obs.  4.  If  the  speaker  is  the  sub-tect  of  a  ^finite  dependent  clause,  the  pronoun  desig- 
nating this  subject  is  either  left  out  (if  no 'ambiguity  can  arise),  or  it  is  generally  ex- 
))ressed  by  i})se.  which  is  also  used  in  any  case  il  the  speaker  places  himself  in  opposi- 
tion to  other  persons,  as:  Si  ipse  populo  RomSno  non  priescrii)eret,  quemadmodum  sue 
jure  nterCfur,  non  oportCre  sese  a  jxtpulo  lionijlno  in  siio  jure  inipedlri.  C'jes.  B.  G.  1, 
3t).  If  'nos''  does  not  express  the  speaker  himself,  but  reters  to  the  j)eople  or  friends 
etc.  of  the  speaker,  it  is  generally  retained  in  oratio  obliqua.  as  :  Ariovistus  ad  po?-tu- 
liSta  ("a^'saris  respi>ndit.  Ut  ip>i  concedi  nonoponCret.  si  in  nostfos  fines  impetum  faceret, 
sic  item  nos  esse  iniquos  quod  in  suo  jure  se  interpellaremus.  Ca.*s.  B,  G.  1,  44. 

Obs.  5.  The  jierson  spoken  to.  in  oratione  obliqua.  is  regularly  expressed  by  is,ea  etc. 
(but  if  in  ojiposiiion  to  the  s])eaker,  by  Ule),  unless  the  use  of  siti,  sibi,  se  ior  {^^uu,<)  is  re- 
rp:ired  by  the  L'cneral  rules;  as  :  De  bello  Sablno  eos  (i.  e.  the  addressed  decemvirs) 
ref<rre,  t'amquam  majus  j)f>pulo  Homilno  bellum  sit  quain  cum  eis.  Liv.  3,39.  (In  ora- 
tiOiie  direct:!  it  would  be  rofi.  robiy).—l{('X  in  consilio  ^EiolOrum  dixit,  id  suse  impensse 
erL'a  eo*' (the  addressed  J^^tolians)  voluntatis  maxima'  debCre  esse  indicium,  quod  nee 
j)ar5tus  satis  nlhl  re,  et  tempore  ad  navigandum  immaturo.  vocantibus  legStis  eornm 
{thi-ir,  the  addressed  JEiolian  ambassadors),  baud  gravate  obsecQtus  esset.  Liv.  35,  44. 
(In  oratiOne  diiecta:  ' erga  ros\  'tef/d/i<  rf.sy?7N ')  — Ariovistus  respondit,  si  fliscessisset 
I'tc.  inagno  >f6  illam  priemio  remnneratCrum.  et,  qua'cunque  bella  geri  vellet,  sine  ullo 
'J'/.-!  labOre  confeciQrum.  Ca's.  B  G.  1,  44.  (Orat.  uir.  :  Magno  fe  jjriemio  remuuerai)or; 
i)ella  sine  ull«>  tuQ  lal)Ore  Qonficiam).— Si  quid  ipsi  a  Caesare  opus  esset,  se^e  ad  eutn  ven- 
tfirum  iuisse,  ei  quid  Ule  se  (facere)  velit,  ilium  ad  se  venire  oportCre.  lb.  1,34. 

Obs.  (5.  The  predicates  of  the  principal  sentences  in  oratione  obliqua,  according  to  the 
general  rules  (p.  :iHT  toll.,  §  h\W,)  slvq  predicate-infinitives  if  declarative,  and  in  the  snfj- 
jnnctive  if  imperative  :  but,  if  intkhrooative,  generally  the  form  of  an  infinitive-clause 
is  Used  (difterent  from  the  rules  on  ordinary  oblique  questions),  as  :  Quodsi  veteris  inju- 
ria» memonam  aeponere  vellet,  /iww  etiam  recentium  injuriarum  niemoriam  deponere 
mssf  /  C'tes  B.  G.  1.  14.— Q'lid  enim  sua  sponte  Jlievoni/tnttm  piierum  facere  jxttuisse? 
Liv.  24.  2.J.— Chersonesiim,  queni  dubitdre,  quin  Lysiinachi  fuerit*  lb.  3;},  40. —  Quid 
enim  eos  per  populum  egisse/  lb.  3,  39.— MoritQros  se  citius  (dicSbant) — quippe  nunc 
in  unaurbe  tantam  dissensinnem  esse,  quid  in  duabiis  ur.hibusyo/e,^  lb.  5. '24.  In  ques- 
tions of  this  kiiKl.  no  verb  o!  asking  can  be  supplied,  as  in  ordinary  oblique  questions  ; 
but  these  questions,  as  all  the  other  principal  sentences  in  oblique  discourse,  must  be 
coie-idered  as  governed  by  ihc  f/^ntnd  idea  of  obliquity.  le.finitive-ciauses  of  this  kind 
can  never  be  leKdered  by  English  That-clauses.  Sometimes,  however,  if  a  verbum  in- 
ti-rrogandi  in^  jn-edicatt-inlinitire  maybe  supplied,  such  clauses  assume  the  same  form  as 
ordinary  dependent  questions,  as  :  Quain  putdrent  continual  militiie  causam  esse? 
>iullam'profecto  aliam  inventflros  {-inlenogdre  se,  quam  putareut  etc.).  Liv.  5,;J. 


770 


OBLIQUE  DISCOURSE. 


OBLIQUE  DISCOURSE. 


771 


ifiiil^li^il 

A U  .1    All  t\.e  snbobli.liu-cl.All^'F.s  rtopeii  lent  on  t  0  Py  ,  ;„,,;,.«,;„,■  ,„  orrtinary 

„,l,obliqu.'  :^'i!';,;V'/\V;i  "";«;"  Imal  in,m»ce.  mci.t,...u  1    ',,1'  f;,  ,',%VJVcnwrk.  of 

Konnlnos  posMt.  Liv.  35, 3-2.  „,.K,,hr,nne  clauses  in  orntiono  obliqna  laKe  tne 

r^«a  10    In  thi>  following  int'tance?  f''^'*»7  T,  ,.r.  -mNATisiJ  relative  rlause  ^).  5-iO, 

ifirtdri  hoslibus.  Liv.b.  ^4  —  V""^-        1    „ 
S;\uuUcuu<,ue.obyia,u  ae.„.    .^^^^^^^^ 


MCi- 


CLAUr'ES 

tlinate. 

?Kre^i»;;i;';i-^Sji;;!^^ 

of  ihoclanso  1«  «  ''«'' ll^i; ''X,  /' ^f „ra '  o  Jim'/.I ;  ae:  W-^i',A,"."'':!'i'Vnt    M  l'"l- 

Isgiliilsii:iiii|s^ 

t:un  (lili'-r«Miter  inq"irtie  quid  "^' ':;;-'  '    t,,  ;,>  40  -Claudiii-  '/i.rif..  .tU>  i)»-iio  f"  .y. 


prodicate-inflnitive  is  non-preterite,  as:  Zeno  ab  Quinctio  flens  pctif.  ne  nnlns  amentiam 
civiljlti  (ts^if/mret.  Suo  quenique  periciilo  fiirerc.  Ma_Mietas  tion  libertati'm  modo,  sed 
omnia  qiiie  hoiiiiiiibus  sancta  \i/</',  popiilo  Roiu^nn  d^(/ere.  Nihil  qiieinqnain  ab  dis  im- 
inurtaliDiis  precari  jw.^.ie.  quod  noa  MaLMiStcs  ab  illis  /lab^reuf,  el  in  corpora  sua  cidus 
huJvitQros  qiiarn  ut  lioinaiiam  amicitiam  violurent.  Liv.  35, 31. 

Obs.  12.    If  tile  f^overiiing  infinitive  i:»  a  perfkct,  generally  the  same  tenses  are  used 
which  would  be  used  if  tbj  clause  were  made  dependent  on  the  same  perfect  in  the  in- 


dixit.  ..non  quod  ullum  periculum,  ant  semen  majOris  belli  videat,  iccirco  se,  priusquam 
l)rovincia  dtcTdat  oppriuu-ndos  ller>retes  duju<se  >-e,  ue  impunlia  tam  bcelerata  defectio 
tsf^et.  Liv.  28. 32.  Im>ep.  :  Nou  quod  ullum  periculum  videam,  iccirco,  piiusquam  dtce- 
da/n,  opprimendos  llergCtes  duxi  (et  nunc  duco). 

Obs.  13.  If  a  suboblique  predicate  in  oratione  obliqna  is  dependent  on  a  finite  pre- 
TKBiTE  tense,  the  consecution  is  ii\\\i\yi^  prekrite.  unless  the  «reneral  rules  for  Hii)obl.que 
clauses  admit  tenses  of  present  consecution  :  as:  S -d  qua  Lysimachi  quondnuj  regnum 
fii^rit,  quo  vict<»  omnia,  quse  WWn^fuissent,  jure  belli  Seleuci /ac/a  sinl  existmiare  sine 
diciOnis  esse.  Liv.  'ii.  40.~Dixit  L.  Cornelius,  jam  nunc  ia  se  parSre  Claudium  ut  com!- 
t lorn m.  quaMpse  Aa/i'/tri/, .««(//!  sibi  ratiOnem  reddendam  esse,  utrum  in  unum  ainium 
crtCitl  t^iitt,  an  (supply  'cndti  dnt ')  donee  leges,  quie  det.ssent,  perferrenlur.  lb.  3, 40. 

Obs,  14.  Frequently  there  is  a  tranntion  fromoratio  obllqua  to  oratiodirecta  ;  mostly 
on  account  of  the  ambiguity  which  llie  use  of  trie /j^r^V'ttrt/  pronouna  of  the  third  permn 
for  all  the  three  grammatical  persons  would  create  ;  as  :  Fabius  adeo  atrociter  in  roga- 
tOrem  latorenujue  est  invectus  ut  nildl  relictum  minSrum  bit:  insidiatvm  eum,  et,  tem- 
pore ca\>\o,adorfnm  rempublicam. ..,  neque  ilium  fie  c/f/y/'6C(/7i  quominus  pergat  ut 
co^perir.  *  To*',  i/iguii  Fabinn,  ^ ceteH  fribilni,  on'n/iu/i.  ut  i)rimum  omnium  cogiietis 
l)otestarem  istani  ail  singulOrum  auxilium,  non  ad  perniciem  universorum  comparatam 
esse;  tril)iinos  i)l<bis  ros  crejltos,  non  hostes  patribus  ;  nobi-i  miserum,  invidiosuin  tobis 
est.  deseriam  rempublicam  iiivSdi.  Non  jus  vestnim  sed  invidiam  minuerilis'.  Liv.  3, 
!♦.  [It  would  be  almo>t  impossilile  to  tran>lorm  the  direct  j)art  of  the  above  speech  into 
oblique  discoui>e  without  causing  ambiguity  by  changing  the  pronouns  of  the  tirst  and 
second  jM-rson,  used  aliove.  into  pronouns  of  the  third  person].— C'incinnatus  dixit  .., 
omnia  juvenlQtis  decora  pidsa  ex  urb(!  Ron^ana  €-<se ;  UHi'idctS,  aeditidt^Oi^,  semina  dis- 
cordiaruin,  iierum  ac  t<'riium //77y^7//o.y  pes>imis  artibus  vivere.  '■''Aulas",  inquit,  ''•ille 
yinjiiiin.'i,  quia  in  Capitolio  non  /V<i/,  minus  supplicii  quam  Appius  ^/<e/•//^^"  .?•  Liv.  3, 
v.).  [Here  the  force  of  the  direct  que-tion  would  be  impainnl  i»y  continuing  the  ol)liqne 
discoiirsej.— MiMiippus  optimum  luisse  ommi)us,  qui  Uric-ciam  incolereiit^  ait.  iutegris 
rebus  IMiiiippi  y>o/'/i.ssr  intervt-nlre  Aniiochum  ;  sua  quemque  hal'itflrum /</i^^(^,  neque 
omnia  sub  dicionem  Ilomanam  i^rvadara.  "■  Nunc  quoiine''' .\\\i\\\\\,  "fi  modo  t?Oi«, 
qu.e  iiichoiifitis  consilia  coiistanter  puducilis  ad  exituui,  poterit  dis  juvantil)us  Anti- 
<R;hus  Gra^ciui  res  restituere.  Liv.  3."),  32.— Sometimes  the  oblique  discourse  passes  over 
into  direct  discourse,  then  returns  to  oblique,  and  ttually  is  ajain  changed  into  direct  dis- 
course, as:  (^uinclius  dixit -IcZ/ttOA' probe  scire,  vEtolOrum  ferociam  in  verbis,  non  in 

factist*'.s<'y  iiaijue  p.irvi  AclneOrum  exist imationem/t-m.se'.  Quodsi  quis  luiXea  iff/wrofset, 
quie  res  Aniiochum  et  /EtOlos  conju/txissef,  ex  leg.itOrum  sermOne />o;!wi.Nve  appargre, 
mentiendo  vana  spe  inflatos  esse.  '-  JJi/m  hi  ab  se  victum  Philippum,  sua  virtflte  pro- 
tcctos  Romanos.  et  quie  modo  audiebati^,  naj-ranf,  ros  ceterasque  civitates  suam  sectaiu 
esse  secuifiros  :  rex  peditum  equitumque  nubesjf«t'/rt^  et  conslruU  maria  classibussuis. 
E<t  auteui  res  simillima  ca?n:e  Chalcideiisis  hospitis  mei,  apud  quern,  qnum,  solstitiaii 
tempore  /nirareniur,  nude  illi  eo  tempore  tam  varia  venatio,  homo  ait  varietatem  illani 
ferluie  carnisex  mansueto  sue  factam."  Ilocdiciapie  in  copiis  regis,  qu;e  paullo  ante 
jxcfiVie  ftu/tf,  pofise.  Varia  enim  i:enera  armOrum,  et  multa  nomina  gentium  inauflita- 
rum,  Syros  omuls  esse. . .  "  Et  ulina/n  siibjicere  vesfri/f  oculis  jM-ox-tn  concursatiOnein 
reikis  ma.'ui..  .videiGiis  vix"  ere.  Liv.  3.").  4!*.  Here  a  conversion  of  the  inserted  anec- 
dote, and  of  the  closing  optative  formula,  into  au  oblique  discourse,  is  hardly  po&sible. 


FINIS. 


INDEX  TO  PAET  II. 


il 


t^T^  The  first  number?»  of  the  references  refer  to  themes  .of  the  Second  Part;  the 
number?  and  Utters  adjoined  to  tliese,  after  a  comma, TCrer either  to  the  §,  or  to  the 
Hern.,  or  to  the  Ob?».,  or  to  mere  numerical  divisions  of  a  paragraph.  If  on  the  page 
referred  to,  are  !i«everal  numbers  of  the  same  kind,  their  different  designations  (/?.,  Obs., 
or  §)  are  always  added.  Numbers,  or  references  after  n.  refer  to  the  foot-notes.  Num- 
bers separated  by  a  semicolon  always  contain  a  new  reference. 

We  beg  to  notice  the  following  abbreviations: 


abl.  ablative  dep. 

abs.  absolute  diff. 

ace.  accusative  expl. 

act.  active  expr. 

a'ij.  adjective  fut. 

adv.  adverb  gen. 

ant.  antecedent  gram, 

attr.  attribate  imp. 

cl.  clause  impers. 

comp.  comparative  ind. 

cond.  conditi(»nal  indef. 

conj.  conjunction  inf. 

constr.  construed  intens. 

coord,  cooidinate.  or  nom. 

cortrdinaiinji  «l>j. 

dat.  dative  part, 

def.  definite  pass. 

A  <ab,  absK  prep.  s<^ea'>. 
a,  Kiigl.  article  ;  twice  a  day,  bis  in  di"  45,  78. 
ab  (a,  abs),   Lat.  prep.  w.  abl. ;  use  of,  and 
diir.   from  de  and  ex^  2.)  foil.— Denoting 

DISTANCE,    and    SEPAItATIOX    PROM    27,   4: 

2^0,  4. —  =  at  a  distance  of  28,  47. — Inci- 
pcre  ah,  to  begin  from  (withK  n>t  (x.  28. 
A%. — Used  of  TIME  (r=  since)  29,  442.  Idioms 
w.  ab  '^2,  55. — When  retained  before  names 
of  cities  48,  R.  82.— Introdncing  a  co>i- 
ri.ETiNo  oijj.  of  advs.  of  distance  {prond 
ab  etc.)  220,  7. — w.  oeruxdial  abl.  195, 
511.  —  w.  abl.  of  reversed  participial 
phrases  198,  ob».  2. — Ab  re  est  (it  is  hurt- 
fiiU.  constr.  ftll,  5. 

se  abdere,  constr.  w.  in  and  acc.  38,  07. 

se  abdicare,  w.  al)l.  94.  479. 

abcsse,  constr.  w.  ab  27,  n.  2. — Different  con- 
structions o(  oMfi'fe,  in  regard  toDisTAvr-E 
220.  4.  —  Tant'on  abfst,  with  single  Ut- 
clause  62*^,  8:  with  double  Ut-cl.,  see  fan- 
lum  abeif. — .Vihi/  abet,  non  longing  abesf, 
7)on  multum  ahest,  with  Quin-rl.  628.  8. 

abhino,  adv.  of  time  (=  ago),  use,  and  diff. 
In  nil  dehinc  223,  4.— Constr.  w.  acc.  or  abl. 
230,  I. 

abhorrere,  to  differ  from,  w.  ab  29,  48  ;  fo 
afirink  from,  w.  gerundial  abl.  after  ab 
195,  243. 

abigere,  to  drive  from,  constr.  w.  acc.  of  the 
tiling  and  dat.  of  the  pers.  97.  (»8. 

ablative,  as  compU-tinir  obj.  of  verbs  93 
loll.  ;  w.  another  completing  obj.  99,  4S6. 


perf. 

perfect 

pers. 

person 

pi. 

|)lural 

phip. 

J)!  n  perfect 

pred. 

predicate 

prep. 

preposition 

pres. 

present 

pret. 

preterite 

princ. 

principal 

pron. 

pronoun 

rel. 

relative 

sent. 

sentence 

sing. 

wngnlar 

euhj. 

subject 

subjunc. 

subjunctive 

fynd. 

syndetic 

w. 

with 

dependent 

difference 

explained 

expressed 

future 

genitive 

grammatical 

imperfect 

impersonal 

indicative 

indefinite 

infinitive 

intensity 

nominative 

object 

participle 

passive 

—Completing  obj,  of  adjectives  119 foil.; 
of  adj.  denoting  dimension  (rare)  115.  102. 
—  Abl.  after  prepositions  12  ;  25  foil. — 
Abl.  or  acc.  after  preps.  12  ;  37,  450. —Gen- 
eral i)rinciple  about  tlie  use  of  abl.  in  ad- 
vkrbial  relations  243,  obs.  1.— .^bl.  of 
PLACE,  in  names  of  cities,  inst.  of  in  vv. 
abl.  147,  19;  inst.  of  ex  w.  abl.  147,3.— 
Abl.  of  distance  22),  2  ;  22i>,  4  and  5  ;  abl. 
of  quantitative  form-adj.,  to  express  dis- 
tance 221,  2. — Abl.  of  time  (quest. '  when  ') 
2-28  foil.  ;  denoting  1  -iiirth  of  time  before 
or  after  an  action  229  foil.:  abl.  of  time- 
measure  229.  13;  dep.  on  abhinc,  2:J0  foil.  ; 
dep  on  advs.  post  and  ante,  2:^1  foil.  :  de- 
noting duration  of  actions  inst.  of  the 
regular  acc.  23H,  a  ;  denoting  time  applied 
to.  or  required  for  an  action  236.  b. — Abl. 
of  MANNER  242,  553.  Limitations  in  its 
use,  and  diff.  from  abl.  of  the  instrument 
243  :  244,  OBS.  2. — Hoc  (ea)  condttldne.  lege, 
e'l  rafioiie.  m con-nlio,  ea  -^p"  244,  4.— Abl .  of 
QUALITY  80,  27. — .\ccEssoRY  PRKD.  In  abl. 
22 >.  24  ;  255.  ;>.— Abl.  of  the  accessory  p^ed. 
as  abl.  of  quality  256,  obs.  1.— .\bl.  of  coin- 
cident ACTION '2.58,  /?.  28. — Abl.  of  means, 
its  limits  and  equivalents  277.  1  and  2 :  278, 
4.  Form-adj.  as  abl.  of  means  278,  3. 
Clauses  conceived  as  abl.  of  means  278, 
4.— Abl.  of  PRICE  and  value  in  form  of 
substantives  266  foil. ;  not  with  pretium 
dep.  on  esse  =  to  be  worth  ;  of  fisrurative 
price  2t;7,  4 ;  w.  nouns  denoting  denomi- 


774 


INDEX. 


be  used  a.  ahls.  «jl  pncc  ^^f^^^^^^^^^l  , 
pen  with  («^/ m«r^  2«'i  3.— Ai>i.  oi  M^A^  1 
gen.  ^' '"'^      .  .  ,i,.,u»tinc  excf!»-  of  nu*a^- 

port  onal  tncapure)  ^^i.  -^-    /"  "^  '    L  __  *  ki 

of  DIFFBKENCB  (SC'C  P.  I    .    ^M     Ol    qUHl     ^ 

tfttive  adis.  before  comps.  2<>s..  i' •  ^;'\' ^* 
duced  by  quo.  .  .  eo.  and  ?"«'if ;  ' -./^"^f, 

rr,,     5  _XV,.    of   GEUUNPIAL    ABLaTIV  b  ID.» 

fnii     See  aNo  compauaTive  ablative. 

la.     ,.  of  abl.  abs.  to  P^nc  .ent.  1  2,  2  7 
Relation  of  tbe  ^^^  ^f  ^^i'.'^iJ;  i^'^'XvS  n 
5;lro?^in5^'S.lml^re<^abL-nH.m 
K.eJd;^>.J)npredabl..;u.lcon.ecttn^^ 

^'  'riS.   ir  'iKndi  ii;?^  of'^aecmnuKd 
P^r-    u^iV-i-  174  4       Abl.  abs.  intro- 

rindeied  by  -witbouf  w.  parttcipuils  188, 

j^lSiives  absolute  -ith   perf .  pass    part^lTT 
lou.   TlH-irusen  Hi  tran.l  y.  .M^c^^  ^^^ 

?^c:S;in^E^^-"t.' 177,222,1;    178^2. 
PaiiveVei.t   in  thin  con.tru.-t.on    1.7 

ttruct!;;.!,     Ib-DJponenU     with     pa«. 

meanin- 172,  4.  533-  rendered 

Abl.  ab3.  w.  preseiit  part.  1«^  JJ\'  ^  •   p    j. 

bv  prepositional   P»'' '"*'';•  ^^^''i^f.-bl    W    ' 
),hrLstic  pa...  pan.  n.ed  a.  prM  .  abl.  w. 

Ab    abs  w.  nouns  and  adj.  as  pred.  abl.   18  • 

5:5     Wiat   nouns  "^^y  *^«  'r^;l./''J  ,7iM- 
ahl.  {Cu'^rbne  conmle  etc  )  IS.  ••^^^\.  ^okm 

ADiKCTiVEJ»  as»  pretl.  abl.  !«♦' '*-J^ ',','*i\^ 


24.  Rendered  by  snb  w.  uhl.  40, 454-   -jl^V^ 
/o  w.  obj.  inf.,  rendered  by  periphrasiic 

alsiivlre:  'con.tr.  w.  ace.  of  pers.  and  gen. 

ol  tluni,''.t9,  «Nl.  jTQ.  w  ffernn- 

abstinere.  const.,  w.  abl    04,  4 •«-,;•,, ^,^f  ;«. 

^;;^li;;i;l«^:s.^  iJ^a^i-ciJus:^:  ^-  r. 

i^S^rdative,  .00  rr.rfl.a^f  ^^*;;;;    A^>- 
.tract  <lat.  as  accessory  Pn;d.  2o  :  2«. 
abstrahcre,  con^tr.  w.  gerundiul  abl.  alter  ao 

absu^dum  est.  constr.  w.  subj.  inf.  claa*c 

abundare,  w.  abl.  03  479. 

abuti,  XV.  abl.  ''3,  4. '.♦.;' -t)-    ,  ^„„j. 

ac.  as  coord,  conj   se,^     I      as  comp         j^ 

2.'>4,  4.  , 

acceptna  w.  dat.  118,  iij;. .   .^j^^^    functions 

Accessory  predicate.      Ut  1'"^'   ^;      ^i,,,,,,.^ 

'    and  analvMS  '^l  ^  f^^-  •  .;i4b   \>«^(  ^r,^   Adj. 

"'"^*^''^-i;?oVed    247  20     ve  bal  adjs.  iu 

r  "^x'm^i^"  1'    i^  '^7  "'>•  13'.),  /^  158 ;  m 

"^^  .      \;iei  of  fVr/Vitbe  idiom  expl.)2o4, 

r^F::;:tn.u^^^/^''^;ni^-^i^^^sr^Bs: 

pred.  2.-,0  f..ll  ;  ''••""".,;;  ::/\'>red  from 
ol.j*.  as  1  ...ir  l"--";i>l  -'".J-  -'^•'  „„  i„- 
',ri.m..ve  .<■...  a,„;  "."■  "f/,: -..f  i/,I*c, 


happens-)  w.  dat.  l^,'- 'V' ,  ^,  ^18  2.    Diff. 

19U.  -S.V-K  I-  ^,4.  11Q  119-  w   cviiidial 

accommodatus,  w.  dat.  ^}.^-,\  *•  '^,;/if.,-2.  l. 

,lat.  l.U.  1  ;  w.  ••f^'7''f;!i'f^o\' Sprout  748, 
according  i^s^perind^  ut  .4a,  i ,  -P' 

according  to=arf,  secundum,  ex.  pro.    For 


INDEX. 


775 


diff.  32,  5.3  :  35.  62.  Rendered  by  paren- 
thetical rel.  clauses  {qude.  tua  est  huumni- 
f as  VAC.)  .')i;i,  D 

accusare,  incusare,  criminari,  w.  ace.  of  pers. 
and  iren.  of  tiling  9!),  4S4.  Accusare,  tjen- 
eraliy  takes  (^uod-cl.,  rarely  luf.  cl.  598,  9, 
and  n. 

Accusative,  a?  completin;r  obj.  of  transi- 

T!V  K  VKUBS  84  foil.  ;    W,  NEUTER  VERBS  85, 

39;  w.  passives  {indutus  vestem  etc.)  &'), 
40.  Ace.  of  neuter  form-adj.  dep.  on  neu- 
ter verbs  85.  .39.  Ace.  dep.  on  verbs  cotn- 
j)()uii(led  w.  the  preps,  circum,  per,  prcEter, 
ininx  m,  473.  Exclamatory  ace.  87,  It.  44. 
DouBLK  ace.  w.  verbs  compounded  with 
trans  87.  42.  Donble  ace.  dep.  on  doclre, 
cdarc,  r<x}are  etc.  1(X),  4SH,  Double  ace. 
consistini^  of  a  necter  adj.  aloni^  w. 
transitive  ace.  {hoc  fe  hortor  etc.)  101.  73. 
Double  ace.  w.  factitive  verbs  101,  487. 
Transitive  ace,  alonj»  w.  obj.  inf.  104.  491; 
w.  jxb^re  5!m.  6,  and  n.  ||.  Ace.  as  com- 
pietini^  obj.  of  An,js.  denotini;  dimknsiox 
Klniigns  etc.)  115,  498;  as  obj.  of  adjs.  w. 
force  of  limiting  abls,  (celer  pedes)  11«,  10.5. 
Prepositions  w.  ace.  12;  w.  ace.  or  abl. 
lb.  and  ;37,  4:)0. 

Acjusativc  (adverbial).  Ace.  of  place  in 
n  lines  of  citie<  47,  2.  Ace.  neuter  of  form- 
ad  js.  expressin^j  intensity,  or  extent  of 
thi!  pred.  2«.i,  1 :  755,  C.  Ace.  of  distance 
220,  'i  foil. ;  of  quantitative  fonn-adjs.  to 
express  distance  221,  2.  Ace.  of  time  2.34. 
14;  ace.  or  abl.  w.  ahhinc  230  foil.;  ace.  of 
time  chanired  into  a  pass.  nom.  146.  n.  14. 
etc.  of  intensity  denoiinsr  age  of  men  23fi, 
5.  Ace.  of  WEIGHT  275,  562.  Ace.  w.  iNr. 
see  Inf.  clauses, 

to  accuse  one  of  a  capital  crime— <:a7Ji^t6'  ac- 
cxsdre.  99,  H.  70. 

to  accustom  one  to  »omothing  =  assuefacere 
afif/'/em  alif/ud  re  99,  485. 

acerbus  with  II  supine  121,  121. 

actutum,  expl.  225,  11. 

acuere  w.  <,'erundial  after  ad  190,  239.  1. 

ad,  prep.  w.  aec,  use  12  loll.  Ad  in  local 
relations  13,  11.  When  Eiii,'!.  '  to '  is  expr. 
by  ad.  and  when  by  dat.  lb.  Moaiiini,'  of 
spectdre  and  rergere  (to  face)  w.  ad  221,  8. 
^ (/= accord ini;  to,  up  to  14,  13.  Idioms 
with  ad,  15. 14.  Ad  before  names  of  coun- 
tries, postclasslcal  ;i8,  n.  4.  When  retained 
in  connection  w.  names  of  cities,  48.  83 
foil.  Ad  vrheMi  venire,  inst.  of  in  xirbem 
rtnlre  ;it»,  (»9.  Ditf.  of  ad  from  in  w.  ace. 
in  local  relations  :^.  «»9  ;  in  fisrurative  rela- 
tions 40  foil.  Ad  referring  to  time  "at," 
and  before  dates  of  month  228,  '^.—Ad  de- 
noting purpose,  284,  2;  dill",  of  ad  and  ia 
denoting  jnirpose  41,  71;  ad  Jinem  =  \n 
order  to  283,  .566;  28.3.  \.—Ad  denoting 
MANNER  244,  5.  Referring  to  the  thing 
which  is  of  interest  274,  »)<— Verbs  com- 

l)ounded  w.  ad  constr.  w.  dat.  or  ace.  90, 

45. 

addicere,  to  award,  constr.  w.  obj.  of  price 
in  gen.  or  abl.  206,  2. 


adducere  conetr.  w.  That-clanseB  etc.,  seo 
inavere  ;  w.  gerandials  after  ad  190,  2;^9,  1. 
—Adductus  w.  abl.  as  circumlocution 
(=from)  119,  11.5. 

adeo  (so,  so  much),  adv.  of  intens.  Diff. 
Irom  tarn,  tantopere,  tantum,  mic.  ita  262,  4; 
as  synd.  ant.  of  clauses  of  intens.  435,  2; 
of  consecutive  clauses  lb.— Adeo  non  (ni- 
/ieO  = 'so  little '264,  5. 
adesse  w.  dat.  89.  Adesse  and  interesse  w. 
gerundial  dative  163,  209;  adesse  scribendo, 
expl.  163, 1 ;  adesse  rei  agendce.  lb.;  adesse 
ad  rejnfaciendam,  diff.  from  adesse  rei  fa- 
ciendis  237,  2. 

adhibere  w.  gerundial  dat.  163,  209 ;  w.  ge- 
rundial after  afl?  190.  239.  1. 
adhortari  w.  gerundial  after  ad  190,  239,  1. 
adhuc,  adv.  of  time  222,  9. 
adimere  w.  ace.  of  thing  and  dat.  of  pers. 
(=  from)  97,  68. 

adipisci,  constr.,  see  impetrdre. 
adire,  to  api)roach,  w.  aec.  89,  n.  4, 
Adjectives.  Their  construction  with  ob.ject8 
113,  96  foil.  w.  ace.  115,  498;  w.  gKin.  117, 
499;  w.  gen.  in  the  poets  and  later  prose 
118,  111 :  w.  dat.  118.  .500;  w.  abl.  119.  501 ; 
w.  inf.  121.  502  ;  w.  II  supine  121,  503;  w. 
gerundial  gen.  161,  207;  vv.  gerundial  dat. 
164,  210;  w.  genindi.d  after  ad  192,  240.— 
Adjectives  as  accessory  preds.  247,  20.  Di- 
viding line  between  adjs.  as  access,  preds. 
and  adverbs  248, 1.— Adverbial  use  of  neu- 
ter FouM-ADjECTiVKs  iu  acc.  26:3,  1 ;  in 
abl.  lb.  and  264,  3.  Their  relation  to  advs. 
of  intens.  2(53,  2. 

adjicere  ianiuwm)  w.  gerundial  dat.  16:3,  209. 

adjuvare  w.  acc.  87,  n.  3 ;  w.  acc.  »>f  neuter 

form-adjs.  along  w.  tmnsiiive  obj.  a5,  ;39,  2. 

admirari,   constr.  w.  interrogative  clauses 

3!)0,  a. 

admodum,  adv  of  intens.  2^2,  6. 
admonere  constr.  w.  acc.  of  pers,  and  gen. 
of  thing  99,  4W. 
adspergere  and  inspergere,  constr.  either  w. 
acc.  of  thing  and  dat.  of  pers..  or  w.  acc. 
of  pers.  and  abl.  of  thing98,  483. 
adulari  w,  dat.  or' acc.  91. 
advenire  constr,  w.  ad  or  in  and  acc,  36.  67, 
Adverbial  (incidental)  relations,  or  circumstan- 
ces, 214  foil. 

Adverbial  clauses,  their  analysis  and  division 
■iss,  12. 

Adverbs,  formation  of,  see  P,  I. — Explana- 
tion of  their  linguistic  nature  215,  1. — 
Advs.  in  o  239,  obs,  3  ;  are  originally  pas- 
sive impers.  predicate-abls.  ISt),  2.34. — 
Advs.  in  im  241,  16;  their  diff.  from  ordi- 
nary advs,  lb,  OBS.— Advs,  of  place,  see 
locative  adverf)^  ;  advs.  of  place  not  in  lo- 
cative cases  219— Advs.  of  distance  220, 
7.— AdvB.  of  manner,  their  analysis  242, 
17  ;  how  formed  H^,  552;  their  predicative 
use  239.  OBS.  1.— Diff.  of  Engl,  and  Latin 
in  the  use  of  advs.  2:j9.  obs.  2,- Formation 
of  modal  form-adverbs  239.  li.  15,— What 
advs.  may  take  objects?  114.  98,— What 
advs,  may  be  used  as  objs,  of  adjs,  ?  114,  99, 


776 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


777 


t4t«ri«l  w.  dat.  88;  coni.tr.  w.  clauses,  see  ' 
Tk    -w-Diff     from    Ciiiainquam-cl.    bob, 

and  erf7a  15,  1(»;  41,  <-J. 

«dificare,  con^tr.  w.  obj.  ot  ruicE  20b,  z. 

Bger  vv.  ubl   l;-i<\'/l';-  ,  .       „en.  or  dat.  119. 
aquahs  w.  dat.  11»,  H*  ,  >^-  n^"-  " 

il.(m)tw.  Ut-cl.)  bin  •'i ;";»"•+: 

%riS  "-^""erh  S  valu;;;.  take,  obj    ..f 
iu'cK  -ib?  3;when  w.  abl.  and  wlun  w. 
V  071   4-  fts  verb  of  estekmino  2il.  1. 
Slt'lh'pr-^aaou  t„  utMU  (pert, 

dl,!)^,  i.«n,  I  ,  "   '         .>>i-iH()  2i'). — After 

ftbl  abs*.  and  i)art.  1 19,  ^ii .  i^^'.  '***;•. ^f;',,  . 

fis  coni     n-n.lered  by  /KAs7(/'/«//t  bbO  f.»n. , 

w^ft    u/,  dmut,  and  it«  compou  »'.  b>., 

IfV^/w  Dro?.  perf.  hy  ]Xfsfqucwiy>.  perl. 
—Aj(ei  w.i'i'  •  I  ...//T  w  fut.  pert,  not  by 
or  pres.  bbS,  10.— >V'^'^  ^^-    .,V/ o.  7W  4- 

against,  J^ngi.  pit-u.,  n»' >  .,.y 

r.i ;  41,  72 ;  by  pre.,  ab    ab>^.  1^^  -!^J- 
aee  of  men,  how  expr.  -fib,  5.  „    «  — 

aB[ta;.faB-vtrbof.triviu,w.«<o.-«.5n 
.gmine  mresto  (ff"».  '»«"'"'•  *"'«"■«"'•  "'"■>• 

S;//mayVu.td  in  the  meaning  'a,o 

ai;!\o-introduce  Indirect  HtaUnncntB  380, 1. 
alacer  w.  irerundinl  after  wl  1^>2,  ». 
tSsvv.Vrundia.  after  a.    140,1. 

alioquin.  modal  l..rni-adv.  23.»,  lo. 
aliorsum,  expl.  -21 ».  S. 

quondam  and  oam  '2vJ,  ^. 


aliquanto,  adverbial,  abl.  of  inter,»  ;  when 
u.ed  ill  place  oi iUiquantum^^>^.-l- 
aiiquantui,  adverbial  ace.  ol  mtea».  263,31. 
aliouatenus,  expl.  217,  8. 
ali4uotx--»,adv',f  t.mc2;2,9. 
a.iter.modal  lorm-adv.  2.^^i.  l». 

^^^lh  /orerof  the'  particle  ^«"^!--(jfj\^^, 
only  749,  10.-^/i«^  ^„""»^Vi       '^*'='^'"^ 
ail  thl  things  wluch,  rendered  either  omnia 
n>t,e,  or  omnia  ta  7"<*  5^"'  ^,;./  « 
alone   Eu^d.  adv.,  how  expr.  2;>1,  7. 

air"dv.:with  ace.  f>';,f -^!';^;;;;'»,,,  '  iH he 

alter,  nsed  as  e(,uivalent  of  /"•""^'^y.o    111, 

acK.n  i.  betwee..  tNv;o  only  lOS-     •  1?  :  1^'' 

amabo  te,  use  of  348,  5. 
amans  w.  ^'en.  Hi,  10».        .^-c.   r 
amare    w.  ;>/'/.<,  not  w.  w^7^<  '/'^''  V -^oo  a 
Sb  g;re,cinstr.  w.  interro^-at.ve  cl.  390,  a. 
tSbuWw.  ace.  ..f  distance  22C),  3. 

amicus,  w.  S^'';;;^:[/'V:.nderid  1"'''^  19,  '2.", ; 
among   Kutd.  P':M;'Ji    ^^^,,,.  43.  7.-> :  44.  7b. 


dJuotinu-nnmeVal  excess  (a./i/>/i''*  c/ecm) 
fyv)  'A'  w  neiiatn>ns  «m.  •*.  „  t>  t  \ 

al    Lat.  Vnterro-u.ive   particle  (.ee  P.  D, 
°'  !^  Vnnrtive  comparison  7b«.  lb. 

^  '"'^ASfn^'ole'Velation  of  purpose, 
a?ii°^''  iwor^  "  28:},  1.  Animvm  concer- 
lu  abl.  -i^^;  •*'''**''  Verundial  after  «(i 
;-f  S  f  i'S.m  i-/""  ^.  as  verb  of 
sniN^^'  w.  t/1  and  ...  5'.»9,  2  ;  w..obJ.  ">f. 
tln'2^Animinn  facers,  >^^'^  rnonre 
anniis    numeral  nouns  derived    romt  22  . 

ante,  prep.  ''''^^^^^i^^V^. 

of  !-- i=  ^rt  '^^onXf^com  funded    w 
""•\til\/«>  'mo  45. -.4«/^  diem,  i"  what 
T;^;";?    ht'^r..J',nT,^'••a;..•,•o^.^.^e,• 
»?n%"'''v."n'    .'.  o,>",Ucd  to  pre.,  -ame 

Snt.'hf'ic  antecedents. 
an    cedere,w.dat.oracc  91    4.5. 

;nteire,Nv.dat.oracc.yi,4io. 


Anteqnam-clausea  (and  Priusquam-clauses), 
WK»,  foil,  lieferrinj;  to  fut.  action  .344, 4 ;  35.5. 
— 'I'hey  properly  are  comi-arative  clauses 
6bb,  1.— Wlien  ante  (pritis)  and  ^«a//imu8t 
be  written  ^s  two  .separate  words  b<)6.  1. 
Tenses  of  their  predicates  in  j^eneral  m), 
021 ;  344,  4;  355.  Particular  rules  of  the  forms 
ot  the  pred.  :  A.  If  dev.  on  non-pket. 
PKi.NC.  PHKD.  1)  indef.  time:  pred.  in  perf. 
iiid.  or  pres.  subjunc.  bb7,  4  ;  2)  def.  time: 
pres.  iiid.,  pres.  hubjunc,  or  fut.  perf. 
Ob»,  5.— B.  Dep.  on  pket.  piunc.  pred.  1) 
indef.  time:  imp.  suhjuuc.  or  plup.  subj. 
007,  n.*;  2)  def.  time  :  perf.  (rarely  imp.) 
ind..  or  imp.  (rarely  plup.)  subjunc.  009.  b. 
—Dirt,  between  the  two  moods  in  these 
constructions  667,  3  ;  («)9,  7  and  8.— No 
tut.  pres.  used  w.  anfer/uatn  or  priuyguam 
in  clasMcal  lan<;ua<je  <Wi'i,  b21 ;  bb»,  '5.— In 
indirect  discourse  b()9.  2.  —  Participial 
Anteqnam-cl.  071,  11.— Attr.  Autequam-cl. 
Obi.  2.  !See  also  priusquam. 

antiqoitus,  «dv.  ol  time  225,  11. 

antiquius,  iii/dl  antiquius  habere  auam  w. 
ut  5in>,  2.  ^ 

Apodosis,  see  protasis. 

apparere,  dirt",  from  videri  74,  10.  W.  dat. 
m.—Appartt  (impers.)  av.  subj.  inf.  cl.  015, 
1:  w.  nom.  and  inf.  lb. 

to  appear,  when  rendered  by  apparire,  and 
wlitii  by  rif/eri  74,  lb. 

appellare  aliquem,  appeal  to  somcbodv,  86, 
47.J.  As  faetitive  verb  w.  double  ace.  JO»,  13. 

appellere,  to  land.  w.  ace.  after  in  38,  07. 

appetens  w.  }rei\ .  107,  108. 

Apposition  (see  also  P.  I.)  Nouns  in  appo- 
sition to  a  SENT.,  in  connection  with  a  lel., 
not  used  in  Latin  .50«i.  3  :  510.  1  and  :i  :  517, 
0.— Appositions  by  which  verbal  ideas  are 
'quoted'  as  such  (the  verb  '  to  lore,"  etc.), 
expr.  hy  cr<'n.  of  £r,.ruiidial  154,  194,  4. 

Appositive  Quum-clauses,  definition  and  use, 
049.  9  :  L'ram.  form  and  mood  050,  9.  'I'en- 
ses  650,  9  and  10.  Kefenin^  to  anterior 
time  652,  10.  W.  princ.  sent,  containing  a 
circumlocuiion  of  a  time-object  051,  13. 

appositus  w.  ^erundial  after  ad  192,  1. 

appropinquare  w.  dat.  89. 

aptatus  w.  nl.  cl.  in  subjunc.  .557,  3. 

aptus  w.  dat.  IIM,  ll->  ;  w.  rrerundial  dat. 
104,  210;  w.  jrerundial  after  ad  192,  1 ;  w. 
rel.  cl.  in  subjunc.  557,  3. 

apud,  prep.  w.  ace.  10,  430  foil.— DifT.  from 
cinn  17,  20.— Dirt,  of  '  in  VoL^cu; '  and  '  apud 
lo/.vco.s'  44,  n.  1. 

arbitrari,  as  lactitive  verb  w.  double  ace. 
10-2.  c. 

arbitratu  tno,  242,  ons. 

arcere  w.  «^,  or  a  mere  abl.  29,  48. 

arduus  w.  irerundiil  after  ad  192,  2. 

Argos,  city,  how  declined  67,  n.  10. 
arguere  w.  ace.  of  pers.  and  «jcn.  of  thing 

99.  484  ;  w.  inf.  cl.  104.  »3;  5U2.  9.     Doubt- 
ful whctlier  the  inf.  after  arguere  is  an  obj. 

01  pred.  inf.  1()4.  n.  2. 
argumentum  est,  constr.  w.  subj.  Quod-cl. 

013,9.  ^ 


arriving,  verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ace.  after  in  or 
ad  37,  (J7 ;  w.  a  mere  ace.  of  nouns  of  cities 
47,  n.  2. 

artifex,  w.  ^erundial  gen.  159,  2. 
As  (Latin  denomination  of  money),  a?  stand- 
ard of  money,  and  unit  of  fractional  ex- 
pressions 208,  5. 

as,  En<,d.  coxj.  of  time,  rendered  by  vhi.vt., 
idmid  and  its  comi)ounds  665, 1.— .^s  comp. 
cosj.,  w.  various  Latin  equivalents  743, 
026  ;  rendered  by  qui  744.  1 ;  by  ac,  atque, 
lb.;  by  comp.  Ul-clause  746  foil.;  bv  tam- 
quam,  quornodo,  quem'tdmcHium,  qvasi,  ve- 
lut,  lb. ;  by  quoi  and  quoties  750,  1 ;   by 
qnantug  750,  '2.— As. . .  .so    rendered  bv  ut 
incut).... sic   {if a)  7.56,   B.   or  by  comp. 
Quum-cl.  (quum....tum)  657,  2.— .4«  con- 
cessive, by  quatnvuw.  sicut  est  (rich  as  he  is 
=  quamvis  sit  dires,  sicut  est)  694,  C.—As, 
as  accessory  pred.,  generally  omitted  in 
Latm  253,  obs.;  but  in  certain  instances  by 
itt  747,  G;  also  by  recasting'  the  clause  (to 
distinsruish  one's  self  as  a  fribune  =  i«.*i(7- 
nem  tribundtum  gerere)  199.  n.  2.— As  far 
AS,  how  rendered  518,  b.    As  far  as  con- 
sistent (not  prejudicial)  =  quod  fieri  jyossit 
w.  abl.  lb.;  as  far  as  I  am  al)ie,  quantum- 
cunque  jwssum  .500,  5.    As  far  as,  l»y  rel. 
cl.  w.  subjunc.  560.  1  and  2  ;  by  quoad  674, 
7.— As  FOR  instance,  not  by  exempli  gra- 
iid,  but  by  nt  si  w.  subjunc.  713,  19.— As 
IP,  ac  si,  ut  si,  velut  si,  744,  1 ;  pennde  ac 
SI,  haud  secus  ac  si,  perinde  quasi  745  3  ; 
tamquam  {si),  quasi  etc.  748, 5.— As  little 
AS,  magis  quarn  or  jtlus  qvam  w.  neiration 
^7^"'  ^""^**  (*'")  LONG  AS,  by  quoad,  qvam- 
aiu,  dufii  674. 6 ;  only  so  long  as.  tarndiu 

duni,  tantuvx dum,  ita dum.nl^o 

w.  quoad  and  qua?ndiu  674.  6.— As  much 
AS  by  iion  magis  (pt us)  guam  758,  B;  by 
rel.  clauses  509.  2 ;  as  much  as  I  can.  lb.— 
As  MICH,  denoting  multiples  264,  4 ;  7.52, 
2.— As  SOON  AS.  by  postquam  mi,  I)  ;  66:3, 
3;  by  quuni  pnmum,  ut  pmnum.  siiradac 
66.5,  43  foil;  'as  soon  as'  with  pres.  perf. 
see  660, 3.— As  to  (the  tact  that)  =  quod  W7, 
3.— As  TO  ME  (as  regards  me)  =  quod  ad 
vie  at.tirut  518.  B.—As  to  the  kest  =  quod 
reliquuin  est.  etc.  518,  C. 
ascertaining,  V'eibs  of,  constr.  w.  06  or  ex 
2S.  4S. 

aside  from  with  participial  =prceter  id  ouod 

»i07.  2. 
to  ask  for  permission,  how  rendered  .595,  -3. 

—Asking  questions,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w. 

ab,  ex,  de  28,  48. 
asper,  w.  gerundial  dat.  165,  2. 
assembling  (convenire  etc.).  Verbs  of,  constr. 

w.  ate.  after  in  ;38,  07. 
assentari,  w.  dar.  88. 
assentiri,  w.  dat.  89. 
assequi  w.  Utcl.,  see  impetrare. 
assignare.  w.  ])articipial  gerundive  148,  178. 
assis  est,  272,  3. 
assuefacere  w.  transitive  ace.  and  obj.  inf. 

104.  »3 ;  w.  aliquem  aliqud  re  (to  somethiu"^) 

99,  485. 


778 


INDEX. 


assuetus  \v.  abl.  110,  lie.  .,„.-0    tm 

Asyndetic  combination  of  8«°*'e°<=»^,1 ';',,;• 
\Clu'.>  applied  to  CMonimationui  (I  ^u  >  >^ 
dinaiion  of  Pent.  ATi,  '\:  ^'h,^.-  i^^o 
words  asvndetically  c()5rdinaU'd  4.b  (-- 
Idio.nan6  asyndeton,  it  ..no  danso  s  i  e^- 
ative  47«,  A  l.-A^yndeiic  imperative 
(•laiis('s5!>r,.  r,  ;  597,8. 
at,  at  certe,  Liitin  advs..  as  pynd.  a"„tj/^j'^^ 

cedents^  of  conces-ive  Si-clauscs  -Jl.  j. 
at  En-1.  preo.,  rendered  by  ad  or  opud  10. 

1»)-  bv  in  w.  ace.  (verbs  ot  arnymjr,  a^- 

'ombMn^    landiu-  etc.)  37,  H7;  by  tj  w. 

abl   4>,t4:  bv  mere  abl.  44,  78  (see  p. 828). 

Se  ore  imrnei  of  cities  by  abl.  or  p-n.  4  > 

and  47.    Af.  refnrins  to  price  and  Nalue 

hv  ai)l.  or  <ren.  2»»8,  :il ;  270. 
atone  (coDrd.  con],  n-e  P.  I) ;  comp.  conj. 
'X  r^./.m  ..re.  744,  .51  ;  744, 1      After  a/*t/. 

and  con/ra  74'.>.  1>;  after  toMtm  ;-A  J; 
attamen,  pynd.  ant.  (postcedeni)  of  concth- 

sive  clauses  692,  1.  „♦:,.„  r-ii 

attinet  (non),  meaning  and  construction  b-i. 

Attraction  in  Comp.  clauses  762, 13  foil.   See 
Siil>i'ihctivebii  altvadion. 

attribuere  w.  participial  Lrerundivc  14H.  1.». 

Attribute   (see    P.  I)       KH-  «'U-  »^   »»'.''•.  "'^ 

^nom^s  ii!  their  own  cl.  .V>S  folI.-Partit.ve 
rel    a^m-eiiigwith  its  L'overiiinsr  numeral 
«r  noun  m}  m>'<'-^  r.fn>f;  <,"oi^  /;'"^;t^« 
=  quorum  ill  mifitero)  .'Jv'H.  1  and  -.       "' 
governing  noun  ellipiically  omitted  o2.>,  .3 

Attribute-clauses,  a  g.;:im.  form  ^f  (lop.  ^;^"; 
tei.ces  4S0,  610.  The  dilleiynt  •'•«i;^^ 
which  may  assume  the   relation  as  attii- 

AlSilJrmt-clauses,  623  foil     By  ^yhat 
th.'ir  A>rm  as  Inf.  clauses.  I  »-^''- ^»' •J'" '  '  " 
termined  «123,  29.-Their  analogy  to  g-rnn- 
dial    genitives   624,    1-T>'t'ir  f  mTunig 
noun  "mnst  be  abstract  (lex  etc.^  624.  2.- 
Cir  m.  dep.  on  a  noun,  but  loL'tcally  on  a 
v^X;26,  k  and  6.-l)ep.  on  a  le.u  ing  ide 
vnderstood  626,  7  f<.ll.-The.r  r.-latiun  to 
SuDJect  That-clauses  624,  3;  627,  A. 
auctor,  w.  genindial  gen.  159,  2. 
audiens,  w.  dai.  118,  108.  ,   ^^oa-n  '>• 

audire  and   accipere,   t-o"*=<'-- «'•  ^«^.^  .^^^'-S' 2  • 
wuHre  con^tr.  w.  accessory  pied.  2.>>,  2 
w    Inf.  cl.  5^.  23.     AmFiri  qnvrn  dv^rej 
,326,  3;  always  with  pret.  consecution  42., 


because,  Engl,  conj  ,  by  quod  an;1^9t'i«/>«^. 
62;i:  683  foil.;  by  siquidtm  6b8,   M,    oy 

befiri^'Engl.  prep,  and  adv.,  by  rf"/;:' «"'/^' 
nee   these.     Ikjhre.    conj.    (=  beloie   the 
time  that)  by  (uittq'iam  or  prvtsri'iam  006, 
1  :  bv  noiidum  w.  al)l.  ahs.  179,  V^l. 
beginning,  V.rhs  of.  con^tr.  w.  ub  28,  48. 
to  beheve  in,  how  rendered  88,  n.  4. 
bellum,  r/'/<//a  or  i/J  41.  72.        .....   „ 

benignitas  est  w.  subj   <i""t^PVu».>S 
benignus  w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  5. 

be8  =  ^;116,  105. 

to  bestow  on  somebody,  by  rovfene  in  all- 
a'n//i,  or  dtfene  aiiciii  98.  69.     _ 
better,  you  had  belter  -^  quia  w.  imperative 

b'ipartito.  tripartite,  etc.,  as  impcrs.  pred.  abl. 

ISC,  231.  .  »   or^    4 

bis  tanto  etc.,  twice  as  much  264,  4. 

blandiri  w.  dat.  KS 

bonus  w.  L'erundial.dat.  it>o. «. 

to  border  on,  how  e.\i)r.  221,  8. 

brevi,  ^o(.n  :  difl".  from  luox  etc. 

brevi's,  w.  11  sui)ine  121.  121. 

Bull  Run,  how  rendered  3».2.  n. 

but  Kn-l.  adversative  conj.  (lor  autem. 
.tcee  P.  1):  w.  clemonstrat.ves  or  pers. 
pron.,  n  ndered  by  cOrd.  rehune*  520,  1 
•  Hut  so  THAT,'  ita  ut  etc.  4.ij,  2.  Bitt 
ONLY  IF,  ita  4  741,  10.  But  that  =  Qvtn 
547  (•  and  D.  But  rendered  by  M.^t  .39, 
2  'b,t  =  except  739,3.  Bit  remie.c^l 
dve  7-37,  4.— Bltt  fou  thk  fact  tuat  .1», 
3.  But  if  (but  if  not)  7:J6.  1-3. 
buying.  Verbs  of,  cn^tr.  w.  ab  28.  48. 

VM  Bv  w.  particii)ial  =  L'enind.al  abl.  16'. , 
iih-  rendeivd  )>y  a  Fact -clause  ^eo  quod) 
»1U6,"  4,  1 ;  by  abl.  abs.  18«J,  225. 


221,  3. 
11. 


fed 


Cadit(ithappens).difr.  frpmaccldif;  con^tr 

w.  subj.  Quod-cl.  or  ;:«-<V'^|?ir 
in  anqiiem  w.  b^ubj.  uif.  or  L  t-cl.  in. 
Calendffl,  see  Kalenda:'.  ,  , 

c«rK..gl.  potential  ''"^^il''^'-^- [/^"^^^^'^^^J 
pr.s.  ind.  or  fut.  ol  ;/o.w  3.9.  a.  Can 
l.AVK  (may  have)  by  poU.t.fienu  ^  erf. 
379,  c  :  rarely  hy  i>o.<.se  w.  obj.  mf.  in  perl. 

cineret-  trans,  ace.  1.39,  n.  12 ;  w.  abl.  95,62. 
capax  \v.  L'cn.  118,  111. 


^9.1  '^-  alwavs  with  pret.  con<ecuuoii -i*.,    capax  w.  t;.u.  ";:■,";•,   „*.„,.  .^10-  oin 
f^Au^ZquuJiir.r.t  326  4.-Pecu-    capere  w.  ffj-n^"''-^-  ^  l^f/^YJ,^.,^)'  ^'''ubj 
liar  use  of  the  i-P- «-  -J^- ^:?;,'i.t.  oA'^^^'j}.  'c.uV'^   '  °^ 


auferre,  constr.  w.  ace.  .>t  'In'"-'  "'J'^/Jat-  «^ 
iK-rs.  (alicui  =  from  sonvbody)  9..  «)S. 
augurato  and  auspicate  as  impers.  pred.  abl 

IKH,  2;U. 
auxiliari,  w.  dat.  87,  4.1. 

averUre'V^  gerundial  abl.  after  ab  195,  213, 

t^^^e'v.l^iV'x^Jaial^;;^)!.  after  «.295,  243. 


Be  it  that. 
as  it  inaij: 


.  ..ortbat  =  «»€ 
by  ni6i  739,  2. 


737,  5.~B€  this 


(Jiiod-cl.  614,  9 
(•arpre  w    abl.  93,  479.  ^^  ._ 

ctrgo  .>Va  ship,  how  remlerod,  3:^1,  J- .In- 
cases of  nouns.  Hu-ory  of  their  use  84,  1 .1. 
castLre  construction  ..f.  see  reprehendere. 
castrfs  '/^/Va..  etc  )  =  tribusdilbu.  2:36,  b. 
«•«.an   accidentallv  241,  .3.  .  , 

elS'a.  w  attr.  ltd.,  Quominiis-cl.,  and 
Ouodcl  627,  I?,  6.-6'«'/.^«  e4.y>-,^n\^h 
I>  cl  6 13  4  -Causa  mn  e.^t,  in  ind.  of 
^'pret?  tense,  used  hypothetically  724.  ^^ 

foil. 


IXDEX. 


779 


•ansa  in  abl.,  w.  an  attr.,  to  denote  cause 
em.  iriit  mid  parposc  2-.9,  5<;5  ;  28-3,  5(;ri  and 
i.  vv .  fren.  of  a  noun  =  propter  24,  43  ;  w. 
gen.  or  posscs-ive  adj.  denoting  can.se  etti- 
cieui  and  Jiioiive  -27.1,  1  and  2  ;  w.  g.rundi.  1 
V'-'?-.\";'''''^"'^'  purpose  (lor  the  sake  ol) 
!.>.».  &.  ^M.  \.— Causa  incof/nitd,  -xpl.  IS'.l  a. 

Causal  clauses,  682  loll.  Generally  take  ind. 
except  with  qu»m  682.  623.  Causal  con.js. 
II).  — When  snhjiii.c.  is  used  alter  guod, 
^,f  *^',.""*^  Q'""nani  689.  A  ;  690  li  and  C- 
i  he  difleient  formulas  ol  Quod  clauses.aiid 
^^lla-cl.  witii  snbjunc.  after  non  690  C.  loll. 
—Collocation  of  cau>al  cl.  47S.  6.— Subob- 
iique  causal  cl.  referring  to  fut.  with  peri- 
phrastic lenses  419,  li.  See  also  qaod, 
quia,  quonunn,  siquidem,  quando,  and 
tonip(tn.<ou  of  can  ml  clauses. 

Causal  Postquam-clauses  w.  imp.  ind.  662,  5 : 
w.  p.rf.  ind.  (k;.-,.  lo. 

Causal  Quum-clauses.  Their  mood  follows 
the  rules  on  causal  rel.  cl.  6.i5,  3M.  Always 
111  the  suhjuuc,  unless  referring  also  to 
tune  655.  1.  ° 

Causal  relative  clauses,  .566,  21  foil.    Six  in- 
t^tances  in  which  rel.  clauses  may  be  used 
Hist,  ol   cau>al  Quuin-dauses  5»i6,  1  foil.; 
insr.   of  Siquidem-clauses  567.3;   raielv 
iiist  of  Qu(,«t.(l.  and  (^nia-cl.  56»},  -2.     Ke-"- 
nlarly    vv    suhjunc;  when    w.  ind.  .567,  6; 
»•»8,  7.     Kel.  eau.sal   cl.  used    w.  force  of 
<yiiuin-cl.  denolini:  identity  of  acti.m  .568, 
6.  liis'.  ol  c.nnpleiing  Quod-clauses  568,  7. 
>>  .  ludei.  antec -dents  b\,S,  8  ami  9. 
Cause,  relation  of  -277  toll.     Uel.  adjs.  w. 
lor.  e  of  caus.il  ol)jecls.5-27.  C'.-Causeexpr. 
i)v  the  rel  adv«.  cur,  qmre.  quamoljrem.— 
When  prepositional  rel.  objects  must  be 
u.«»ed  to  express  cause  {profiler  quna  etc.) 
5-7.  a  and  b.  — Cause  efficient  and  rnotire. 
how  expr.  279,  565  iV.ll.    Cause,  as  purpose, 
how  expr  -.'83,  566  foil, 
cuyere  w.  ace.  86.  473;  w.  That-cl.  596  foil. 
l^.»rm  ol  the  Tiiat-cl.  when  carere  is  a  ver- 
huin  jm|)eraiidi  .596.  n.  t.—Di  tie  rent  mean- 
ini,'s  and  constructions  oJ  car<'rt  599,  n.  t 
Asyerl)  of  avoiding,  w.  ne  (iOl,  ,5.  —  Cave 

Avitha.syiidfticsul)jiinc..asciicumloculion 
ol  m-rrative  imperatives  6-28.  30. 
ccdere  w.  dat.;  w.  ahl.  93.  479;  w.  dat.  and 
ahl.  as  compound  obj.  {alicui  aliqua  re)  96, 

celare,  meaning  100.  n.- With  double  ace. 

JUO,  486;   w.  de  101),  n.    How  constr.   in 

piss,  voice  101,  7.3. 
celer  w.  gerundial  abl.  after  in  194,  540  ;  w 

gerundial  after  ad  19:2,  5. 
colebcr,  w.  ahl.  1:20,  116. 


ccnsere,  constr.  w.  inf.  cl.,  or  nt,  according 
to  II-  meaning  .59.3.  9.  Censlre.  to  propose-' 
w.  imperative  clauses  595,  4.  Ce.nslbat  and 
cfi,,yuU  :3.x.  ;3. 

It  is  certain,  how  rendered  6!i?.  n.  t. 

certe,  as  s\nd.  ant.  (posice.lenti  of  conces- 
sive cl.  69-2,  1 :  of  concessive  Si-cl.  731,  2 

"rtus  w.  dat.  119,  112.  Cei'tior,  w.  gen.  118, 
109.-CV/-^um  est,  m<^auiug  and  construc- 


tion 612,  n.  t.—  Cerddrem  facere,  with  de 
rf2,  .54. 

ce:era  (lem.  sing.)  as  attr.  of  collective  uouna 

2.>3,  n.  6  (see  P.  J), 
cea,  poetically  i<nd  in  «Iver  prose  as  comp. 
C.M.J  =a.v749.  8;  =a>.if  lb. 
chairman,  r.^nd.red  by  rector  164,  n.  10. 
circa,  circum,  about,  n'ear,  prejjs.  w.  ace.  use 
of  18.  431.    Diff.  irom  pjoj)e.a/)ud,  projtfer. 
— rscuter  verbs  compounded  w.  circum  be- 
c.nne  transitive  «<;.  4;;3. 
circumdare  c.)n>tr.  w.  aliquem.  aliqua  re,  or 
ahoii  aliquid  98.  48:3;  99.  48.5. 
cis,  citra,  preps,  w.  ace,  u.se  24,  438. 
citius,  w.  force  of  potius  759,  9. 
city.    Diff.  of  civitas,  nrl/s,  and  oppidum  53, 
n.  66.— Names  of  cities,  towns,  etc.,  how 
constr.  46  foil.— Clloquially  names  of  vil- 
las constr.  like  names  of  cities.    4.52,  n.  21. 
clam,  semipreposiiioii,  w.  ahl.  or  ace.  114.  98. 
clamore,  w.  shouts,  used  as  adverbial  obj.  of 
coincident  action,  with  or  without  cmw  244, 
3 ;  258.  2.  ' 

claudus  w.  abl.  120,  116. 
Clauses,  general  theory  of  4S0  foil.  ;  their 
division  480.  «ilO,  and  n.  *.— Used  w.  fierce 
of  a  Miijrle  conj.  474,  6.     Collocation   of 
clauses  477  foil.     See  Sentences,  Coordina- 
tion of  clauses;    OI>ject-clauses ;    Subject- 
clauses:       At'ribut,-.cl.,nses ;       Adinbial 
clauses;  and  the  special  classes  of  clau.-es 
(Hel.,  That-cl.,  M..dal  cl.  etc.) 
coenare,  may  take  an  onj.  of  puice267.  .32.  2. 
coepisse,  when   used  in  pa-^s.  voice  104,  80 

\V.  irenindial  abl.  after  ab  195,  243. 
cogere,  cotstr.  \v,  transitive  ace.  and  obj. 
Inf.  491,  83  ;  w.  ut,  or  an  obj.  inC  mi,  4. 
cogitare,  as  verb  of  striving  w.  ut  or  ne  599, 
2;  also  w.  obj.  inf.  590,  2.—  Cof/itaba?7i,  in 
lettt-rs  with  ellip>is  of  its  obj.  inl.  359,  K 
Coincident  action,  one  o(  the  relations  of  mo- 
dality 245  f.)ll.    Its  function  in  the  sentence 
expj.  245,  oBs.— Is  either  pr.'dicaiive  (uc- 
cessory  predicate  :  see  this  article),  or  ob- 
jective 21.'i,  555.  — Expr.  bv  abls.  with   or 
wiihout  cum  (.sine)  258,  556.— Clauses  of 
coincidenr  action  6:i5.  32,  1. 
collecting,  Verbs  of,  constr.  \v.  in  and  ace. 
:if^.  itl. 

colligere,  constr.  w.  in  and  ace.  38,  07. 
comitari,  onstr.  w.  dat.,  or  ace.  91.  475. 
commencement- exercises,  how  to  render  286 
n.  94. 

committere,  constr.  w.  imperative  clause  .597, 

8  ;  w.  pred.  Ut-cl.,  used  as  circumlocuiion 

6-28,  :i\). 
commodum  est,  it  is  expedient,  convenient, 

w.  Mil)j    inf.  cl.,  not  L't-cl.  611,  5. 
commodum,  w.    force  of  adverbial  particle 

(-  ju.-li,  w.  pill  I).  317.  6. 
commonere  and  commonefacere  w.  ace.  of  pers. 

and  i,'('ii.  of  thing  !I9.  -184. 
communis  w.  gen.  or  dat.  119.  IVi.— Commune 

est  w.  bubj.  Quod-cl.,  Inf.  ci.,  or  Ut-cl.  610, 

4. 

Comparatio  compendiaria  144,  n.  21. 
Comparative  ablative,  w  hen  it  may,  may  not^ 


780 


INDKX. 


INDEX. 


781 


or  mu.t  he  nfcd  5n?t.  of  a  Q"'^-?^»"^^ 
?;-.4   15  foil. ;  i»  Pl^^^  "•  ""P^^»'^-  i""^'- '' '' 
copula  7Wi,fr\  1.     f  .        iptivo  adjective?, 

icticns  «re  compared  w    ca.h   -  »ur  lb. 
ComparaUve  clauses      («r  'n^.  a m  >>  r, 

ivh.tiou  to  ^>''^'f/i''"^''^r^;V  division 
Th.-ir  collocation  4.8,  7.  .">»o  ,'  r-io 
in  o  Q  m  tative  and  quantitanve  c  s    .4.^ 

}  -^Keds.  generally  «""''Ivt^:  ^.  ,i  f\ 
r-i  ^^hiunc  in  coinp.  el.  «48,  5  .  »»)■*,  ^  . 
^^^o    ?..  Vli   ly.-Attraetion  in  conj).  cl,. 

(V*^?  in  re-ari  o  pred.  when  P-i-^"- P''^'  ; '^ 
^     •   r  -kV  /t  •  (ft)  in  reiranl  torul)j.,  when 

IVr',..,,  f 'VZses^tll;^'".'."™'»'  form  of 

vt  g'nsq>ie  with  two  .upcrluines  (-ffu 
...//<«)  751.  5.  i.:i._.  tVij.ir  differ- 

'5^  i  introduced  hy  V-^'^'f;  ^^s^'u^n  ^* 
com,..  tiuan,-elanseH   .o(),  3  .  .•  -,  51  '      • 
Comparative'  Quum-c  ause3    Uy      n      .^^^  ^-J- 

i;:i^;;r  \.iK/hv  ti;^^^ 

relations  »^(      .'        rally  optii'uaHi.)  1.3. 
Omi^Mon  of  the  commou  predicate  in  lut 

^^  '''^l-t  lirith  how  rendered  704, 14,  n.  4.  ^ 
compared  witH,  now  re.m  inyam  qui. 

Comparison  of  depend  nt  clau  es  iq  a      y^^^^ 

y,/«m  W.^_9'/«  /    V^  '"^  V  "^;  „     j,iV..n   or 

etc.)  .59,  11.  ^1-  Y  ■/.  _(M  „f  Inf.  clau.>e8 
=  too  much  to  »01,  5;-  ^i  ,  '  ,p  X  jnu-t  be 
7.i0,  B.  ^Vr^^S^  ^:?;  ,  'ut  ciauieV7.1, 
in  comp.  Mhl    '/V'^.m.--  En.d.  'too  nuuh 

V     <.>««";,;''',  rVhW-rcc  of  romp. 

Onat;i:clal>s  without  .t  Ib.-U/)  of  U-m- 

(sul.iunc.  us.d  in  thein  7t.l.  A.-  /  )  <»»  J^ 
not  w.  obj.  inf.  or  Ut-cl.  bOi,  n.   . 


complere  aHqmd  iaHqvem)  aJiqu^  re  99,  485. 
r'"-l.? --l^^-!^d  w.  con  generally 

corciin-to  it«  "^'antng  5W,     ,  jv-  fl»^- 

per.,  and  i">P':i?^';;V,;^,ir   cU'ia  i-run- 
in  good  prose  59«,  0,  w.  paruci^n»   ^ 

dive  US   1T8.  ^^^  go-    2, 

concerning  the  fact  tnai  -  Jfly  „'' 

ry,/«//K/./fl;/»,     c.Mley  "i»y      ^^  ^^^^^^.  ^j 
&,;^';Kh;^'S;.^o-f«^c.n.ry>art.c^ 

perativesett.     .jub    n^^^^^^^  ,o„c.  cj. 

S^!'^eSJ!o^,V-7-;;-;^;f^-- 

Concessive  («''''^'>^''V1  hf  n  -  eul^^r  =  ^/fem- 
iiiioroDercond.cl.  (.^t  l)eiiig  tiinti       c 

',•    .r  L  .A^i) :  their  "^e  »nd  niood^  .il,  1. 

'i'h..ir«vnd  ant.  (postoedents)  ,.i\,  ''•  ^*^f] 

nvi  oonce-ive  ii-cl.take.i  .o..,not  ym, 

h.^),nissu.nofpred.(^t^o«      .a).^J^^ 

ciiine  •«»,  4M.      inc  y    j  ,         j^j,q 

'*'•'■!!.'=  ij'''S  "-t"  ;*.d™..  ,me  of  a 

i.':;;i;„f'cv,mc'- =.;;,««-.  »'''•<''■'*<''"' 

Kclativecond.    cl.).-l-qm^^^ 

caiiy  ad.ied  to  ^7^i;:,-;';;^:,;;'^\n:-Fom 

dinatiun  of  cond.  elauf»  s  .-iu  1      •  _ 

of  pred.  if  th«;sis  is  »"/"  •/j^'  ^%l  i*      „, 
Collocation  ot  coud.  ^^- f,  .f' ;\t,,Vi\  cond. 

Cai;«;  "comparisoti  of  cond.  clauses' 
and  the  artirlen  beh>w  Pefinl- 

Conditional  clauses  of  do'ibUul  reahtj.    ^  ^^^^^ 
tion  and  nature   «01,  i-    a^""" 


and  cl.  regularly  ind.  701,  44  ;  702  foil.  ; 
711,  15.  For  subjunc.  see  *  Snlijuiictive  in 
cond.  cl.'— Tense  of  thesis  and  cl.  70*2  roll. 
Negative  cond.  cl.  of  doubtf.  real,  (ai  i}On^ 
nUi.  or  «i.^)  704  foil.— Peculiarities  of  in- 
definiie  cond.  periods  711,  15  foil.— Idio- 
matic ellipsis  of  the-is  if  referring  to  past 
time  (si  -  in  the  event  tii.il)  718,  20,  A  foil. 
Conditional  clauses  of  doubtless  reality.  Deti- 
idiion  and  nature  701,  "2. — Mood  always 
ind. :  neirative  els.  introduced  by  H  von, 
not  wjvj  715,  45.— Intjtauccs  when  they  are 
n>«d  71»).  oHs.  'i. 

Conditicnal  clauses  of  non-reality,  7)7  foil. 
J)etlnition  and  moods  (thesis  and  hypothe- 
sis) 717.  4(>.  See  also  '  Hvpotlu'tieal  peri- 
o(ls.'  Diff.  from  other  cond.  cl.  717,  1.— 
Different  conception  in  Latin  and  English 
71H.  2. — Xciiative  cond.  cl.  of  non-real,  in- 
troduced by  nisi,  ni,  or  n  non  with  no  as- 
signable diff.  718. 3.— General  rule  on  their 
moods  719,  5. — If  both  preds.  refer  to  time 
pres..  generally  both  pteds.  in  imp.  siil)- 
junc.  720,  fi ;  if  to  the  fiit.,  the  cl.  generally 
in  imp.  Biibjunc.  of  periphrast.  fur.  720, 7.— 
Instances  in  which  pres.  eubjunc.  must, 
may,  or  may  not  be  used  721.  9-15.  Pres. 
ind.  in  surirperiods  724, 15.— If  both  preds. 
refer  to  the  past,  generally  in  plup.  ^^ub- 
junc.  724,  1(5.  Use  of  imp.  pubjnnc.  in  its 
l>lace  724,  17-20.— Tense  and  mood  if  one 
pred.  ref.  to  pres.,  and  the  other  to  past 
72»),  21  foil.— For  use  of  ind.  se«?  'Indica- 
tive in  iiypothetical  periods,'— Hypotheti- 
cal cl.  oileii  contained  by  implication  in 
members  of  the  sent.  784,  4.  or  supplied 
without  such  implicali«)n  7-U),  8. 

condonare.  w.  dat.  88.  Different  meanings 
Ns.  n.  5. 

conducere,  to  hire,  w.  participial  gerundive 
1 1>^,  178  ;  w.  obj.  of  price  2«i().  2. 

conferre,  constr.  w.  ad  14, 11.— ^'e  conferre  w. 
a<  c.  after  in  38.  67. 

confestim,  adv.  of  time  225,  11. 

confidere  w.  dat.  88  ;  w.  abl.  93,  479;  88,  n.  3. 

congregare  w.  a<'c.  after  in  38.  <i7. 

coag-uebant  and  co/if/rinr'fnf  338,  7. 

congmenter  w.  dat.  114,  98. 

congruit,  impersonally  used  as  verb  of  hap- 
pi  nuiiT  w'.  subj.  Ut-cl.  <)li>,  3. 

Corjunctions.  For  coord,  conjs.  see  'CoOr- 
dinaiioii  of  clauses'  and  P.  I.— Subordi- 
natini;  conjs.  which  are  u<v<\  to  introduce 
tin;  different  class  -s  «d'  clauses  482,  3. 
What  ('(mj-i.  may  l>e  used  to  introduce abls. 
abs.  173.  2  (see  .\bl;it.  abs.).  Collocation 
of  conjs.  4TU.  10.  (ien- rally  not  repeated 
when  <'o5rdii.ate  clauses  are  dej).  on  the 
same  subordinating  c^njs.  475.  A. 

conscius  w.  sen.  118.  109;  w.  dat.  118,  110; 
w.  L'i'i-nndi:tl  <;e!i.  Itil,  "JOT. 

Consecution  and  Conversion  of  tenses  of  the 
subjunctive.  Law  of  C()n>^«^ution  414  foil. 
Diff.  b. 'tween  tenses  of  pres.  consecution 
and  pret.  consecution  414,  003.  Diff.  be- 
tween the  two  tenses  belouiring  to  either 
kind  ol'cousec.  lb.    Examples  illustrating 


the  law  of  consec,  415  foil.— Consecution 
if  the  governing  pred.  is  non-finite  (part., 
inf.,  L'erundial,  supine,  adj.,  noun)  410,  92; 
417  foil.;  418,  OBs.  1  and  note  t:  419  a; 
420,  ft  and  c— Instances  in  which  the  law 
of  consec.  must,  may,  or  may  not  be  set 
aside  (logical  tenses;  see  these)  422  foil.; 
424,  91.      Tense  of  i)otential   subjunc.  in 
dep    cl,  42:3,  3.— Tense  of  subjunc.  deter- 
mine!  by  a  governing  pred.  understood 
424,  4.— Law  of  consec.  must  yield  to  pro- 
hibitory gram,  laws  425,  1.— Con<ec.  when 
princ.  PUET.  pred.  implies  a  pres.  427,  a, 
ft  and  c— Pret.  final  clauses,  and  epistolary 
pert",  and  imp.  always  require  pret.  consec. 
429,  1-3.— Perf.  subjunc.  dep.  on  another 
perf.  subjunc.  by  attraction  4.30,  7.— Con- 
.sec.  when  princ.  pred.  is  hypothetical  4;i0, 
8  ;  431,  9.— Consec.  in  comp.  Qunm-cl.  431, 
10  ;  in  moda!  Ut  and  Quin-ci.  4:i3  foil.— No 
plup.  subjunc.  in  modal  Ut-cl.  435. 3.   Perf. 
subjunc.  used  in  modal  Ut-cl.  435,4.    Imp. 
subjunc.  in  the  same  430,  5 :  44U,  12.    Pres. 
subjunc.  430,  0.      Errors  of  «rrauimarians 
4:i6,  7.    Rare  occurrence  of  perf.  pui)junc. 
in  clauses  of  manner,  coincident,  and 
suBsEQUKNT  action  437,  8,  A  ;  439.   C— 
Tense  of  subjunc.  optional  in  cl.  of  inteiis. 
4.38,  J^.— Perf.  subjunc.  in  rel.  cl.  w.  force 
of  modal  Ut-cl.  439,  9  ;  in  Quin-d.  440,  10. 
—Equality    of    tenses    in    certain    modal 
clauses  440.  11.— Application  of   law  of 
consec.  to  dep.  hypothetical  periods  442, 
2-444,  4.— Imp.  subjunc.  dep,  on  nou-pret. 
preds.  445,  0;  440,  7.— Conversion  of  the 
two  fut.  tenses  if  the  pred.  requires  sub- 
junc. 447  loll.  :   1)  by  method  of  ordinary 
tenses  448,  97  foil.  ;  '2)  by  method  of  peri- 
phrastic tut.  tenses  448,  98  foil.     See  the 
articles    future-present   and    Future-pevm 

/ect.— Consec.  if  governing  pred.  is  a  con- 
verted fut.  perf.  4.54,  5.— Consec.  applied 
to  periphrastic  gerundials  143,  109. 

Consecutive  clauses,  0;i5,  32,  1. 

consensus  est,  w.  suly.  Ut-cl.  613,  3. 

consentaneum  est  w.  Ut-cl.,  or  Inf.  cl.  610,  4. 

consequens  est,  as  impers.  pred.,  how  constr. 
02.3,  4. 

consequi,  constr.  w.  That-d. ;  see  impefrare. 

considering,  parenthetically  used,  rendered 
by  paniitheticjl  relative  cl.  519,  D.  "Con- 
nderiiig  that '  by  quando  «587,  13. 

consilium  in  abl.  denotes  purpose  283,  560 ; 
2S3.  1. 

consolitio  est,  w.  subj.  Qnod-cl.  614,  9. 

constanter,  adv..  w.  dat.  114,  98. 

constare,  to  abide  by,  w.  abl.  after  in  95,  58; 
con^tare,  to  consist,  w.  abl.  ;  more  fre- 
quently w.  de,  ex,  in  95,  58;  w.  gerundial 
abl.  after  ex  197,  740.  Constare.  to  cost, 
w.  abl.  94,  479;  takes  an  <»bj.  of  price  267, 
4.  Constat,  it  is  known,  w.  dat.  89 ;  w. 
inter  89,  n.  5  :  w.  subj.  Inf.  cl.  along  w. 
dat.  or  inter  015.  3. 

constituere,  constr.  like  decernere  (see  this) '. 
ciiiistr.  like  iHillicZri  59.">,  5.  Constitutiis\ 
w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  1. 


782 


INDEX. 


constitution  of  a  State,  ^9^^  t« '"^"^f  f  *5i"' 

o7^_.-To  Irume  a  constitution    4W),  n.  s^. 

Construction  ..f  vorbs  m  foil. ;  meuuin,'  of 

consuetudo,  w.tli  uitr.  Ut-cl  6-25.  C.  jonsue 
«ii^X  ,uHl  mcnsnlto.  a.  impcr».  prcd.  abl. 

temporal,  aiul  ^""''^  •  .^i;/^'^' ^/em^H,  rule 
32i>,  2;  by  fonip.  tl;^:^^f\'*-  J'','^l  jn  these 
on  the  gram,  forms  3-30,  5.    Mooa  lu  u'^ 

cl   a30,Hloll.  w.  Biibj.  Ft-cl. 

contmgit  w.  dat.  89  ,  •"''  ''H'  J"'    ^^  ^  en».  »;. 

Ditf.  from  flm^/t/.  lb.     ^^  v  at   1  b 
completing  pred.  m  «^>\ver  Lat    i   . 

^rB;^dSc^nt'ofi<.m..jM;;^- 
quality,  followed  by  ac  or  quam  (-  diticr 

ent  from)  749.  1).  .    „q  /.-. 

coitrahere.  cou.tr.  w.  ace.  af  er  in  38,  b.. 

contrarius  w.  gon.  or  •»''  ;.  V"  \,\  ,  „1  615  12. 
controversia  non  est,  \v- ^"^^J-  ^^"'^  ^'-  ^^^' 
convenienter  \v   dat.  in,  y-  - 

convincere,  w.  ate.  oi  pii-  •  «"    « 

o   n.  ;.l    se   t    471   7.-Cor)r.linate   elausef 
Llimn.'  the    or.n  of  coord,  in.lep.  ^ent 
4?4    7  l".Tl  -CLAUSES  cannot  he  coord,  b 

Ordinations  exi.r.  ^^^.  A^^''  ''if' JJ,  V/    n 

f'oArd- nation  of  condilionMl  cl.  .•>••.  4.t  lou. 

Co-Sate  iuum-clauses;  their  u.e  and  mood 

(^ordlnatSg' Relatives  520  folK      Piflerenl 


v-hen  the  period  opens  w  a  f'f^ZtJoll 
-Quod  as  Kcneral  c<»nnective  of  p  no  3 
open.n-  with  a  protasis  {quodU  ^'  ->  ^-^' 
4.     See^'W  del.  neuter       Kel.  ad%s.  lor 
periodical  coordination  o21,d. 

Cupula.  Hoinetiines  '^.^--i^'Jlcoifull  ibT^ 
in  numl)er  «4,  !■>.    D».ec«*c.     '-"i 

refuted  480.  n.  t.         ,,   «r   ^m 
coram,  KMi.iprep.   w.  «J^  •,,^';,^l-  j^  gramma- 
Correlatives,  a  iipcless  term  of  tiic  gnimu. 

cJiil^ii'denoUn.  interest  in  an  action  ; 
triioSirilS^SSSri'TJeoet  one's 
cJ^:yul;:w.S:-W;  -rely  w.  abl.  115. 

Jl'r«  m  f>irtitlveverb  w.  double  ace.  101,  A. 
creareasfactltl^o^^^  ,„eaniMgs  and 

credere  w.  /!«;•  ^,  •,.  J' „  4.  w.  Inf.  cl.  588,23. 
constri>ctu>n!»  ol  S«,  n.  -*,  «•  i" 
Lc;,./o.  parenthetically  "»^*   '^'^ '^  '  1'^ 

crimen  graie  est,  it.i«  a  .erious  charge ,  w. 
t;ubj.  inf.  el.  (»13,2. 

criminari,  constr.,  see  a^'n/.^Ir^. 

cnminidare(Hb.tractdat.   2o7-^^^^ 

SrT  flSTipr  V2I;  121.     Cruc/e/.  est  w. 
c;b;:^c^i^,^^i;-^henusedin.t.of.^^^ 

Cobic  meMaw.  1'"«  '^^''^]'- ^^f'- ,\?r■ 
™S^rlU:ract,,a,«.f^,«\"-"- 
cuius   a   um.  used  as  rei.  4'X),  4  ,  ■*•"•  ^• 
cuSs're'i  causa,  as  nms.il  rel.  form  527,  d. 

1  cujusmodi,  use  of   *•» 'j  '^;,^  ^^  44«.    Combined 
cum,  prep.  w.  abl.,  use  ni«,  ^,f  rum  in 

w.  .vim'//  and  ?//^a  •^'^'    oii  V.  ;,,  the  rela- 
the  relation  of  mannkk  214.  5  .  in  tiic  rem 
!ion  ..f  roiNr.PKNT  action  2.J,  foil. 

•^^'^'r w"dal  ^In-'iee^inMfff^n'nt  meaninj; 

'T!-^- ■  win    cl .  5S8.  n.     Cupne  icoucu- 

^l;;l;;:;w--<d;^inf.,Inf^.l.,.^..,ormere 

cS^wf;StKll8:\i;r\v.ger«naiaUen. 
thing  done)  148,  1»8. 


Damaare  w,  ao<-.  of  p.TJ..  and  s"!»-  "t  crlmo 

"'    '     ,r,,  o  1J^  178     Dai-p  (oneram  etc.)  w. 
Sllrulluul  daulVI:-m    I>\.re  eplMa,n  ai 

14,  n.  1. 


INDEX. 


783 


Dates  of  the  month,  how  oxpr.  227, 3  and  4. ; 
in  abi.  of  the  day  228,  2  ;  by  prep,  ad  228. 
3.  In  letters,  as  regards  tense  Kdedi,  not 
dahain)  ;i57.  c  ;  361»,  1 ;  in  regard  to  place, 
abl.,  not  gen.  228.  4. 

Dative,  as  coinijieiing  obj.  of  vejibs  87,  474 
loll. :  iTOveriied  by  velle  and  facfre  92,  476; 
whi-n  used  as  i)ers«»nal  olij.  i)f  i/fij/erd/e 
along  w.  impcrativL-  eluu^e  fj9G,  H.  JuOere 
w.  dat.  i)o!itelas^ical  596,  n.  1|  ;  dep.  on  ]}tr- 
mittete,  coiniidittn.  coiicedrre  along  w.  im- 
perative clause  .'J97,  8.— Dative  as  obj.  of 
AUJs.  118.  500.— Dat.  of  the  interes^ted  per- 
son 90,47;  cxpl.  91,  48.— ^<»sse8^ive  dat. 
91,  48,  1  (see  Predicate  </a/u-(?».— Ethical 
dative  91,  48,  2.— W.  interjeciious  91,  48,  3. 
—Dat.  w.  r«-fert  274,  6.— Dat.  in  the  form 
of  participles  referring  to  person.s  in  gen- 
eral 91,  48,  4. — Accessory  pred.  in  dat.  255, 
21  a  lid  2,5. 

datum  ferre  aliquid  (accessory  pred,),  mean- 
iui;  of  251,  4. 

de,  from,  prep.  w.  abl. ;  use  and  diff.  from 
ah  and  ex  25  foil.  £>,  not  de^  used  in  re- 
spect to  time,  in  the  ni'  aniiiir  'from'  29, 
4V2.—/Je  as  equivalent  of  i)ariiiive  gen.  30, 
443,— Z>€  denoting  material  30,  2. — De  equo 
j)Ufjnate  31,  d.—De  =  concerninji:  32,  445. — 
Idioms  with  de  32,  55.  W.  gerundiai  abl. 
196,  542 ;  w.  participial  reversed  phrase  199, 
6;  de  causa  279,  M.—Ue  w.  Quod-cl.  {^de  to 
quod)  mi,  2. 

debellato.  impers.  prod.  abl.  186.  234. 

debere,  difl".  Ironi  other  verbs  expressinc:  nc- 
ccs.Kity  140.  163.  In  the  iiid.  of  a  pret. 
tense  used  h\  pothetically  127,  24  loll.  In 
flit.,  how  to  render  ^i")!,  i. 

decedere  w.  ai)l.  93,  4T9  ;  w.  gerundiai  abl. 
aft.-r  (//>  19.-),  243. 

decere,  in  the  ind.  of  a  pret.  tense  hypothet- 
ieally  used  727.  24.  Decet  w.  tiubj".  Inf.  cl. 
or  subj  Inf.  620,  1;  w.  lo-ical  subject  iu 
ace.  107,  IM). 

decernere,  constr.  1)  w.  imperative  cl.  ;  2)  w. 
gerundiai  Inf.  el.  ;  ,3)  \v.  obj.  inf.;  4)  w. 
ordinary  Inf.  cl.  in  the  meaning  '  to  judge  ' 
5!).-).  5. 

decidere  to  compromise,  w.  obj.  of  value  and 
|)rice  266.  2. 

Declarative  clauses  4S0.  610. 

declarare,  as  lac li live  verb  w.  double  ace. 
101,  A, 

decunx  =  five  sixths  ;  116,  105. 

Deductio  ad  absurdum,  by  pred.  in  fut.  3.51,  B. 

de?sse  with  «lat.  89;  w.  irerundial  dat.  163, 
2i)9.  J)ee.<se  ad  i-tf m  facie/tdam,  (WSernni 
from  dees^e  rei  facieudie  189,  2.  Sibi  non 
df(-s\s'e.  constr.  w.  quiii  6u3,  5. 

defendere,  w.  ah  2\i.  4S. 

defending,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ab  29,  48. 

deferre  w.  ad  or  dat.  14,  11, 

defcere  w.  ace.  85,  39 ;  w.  ab  29,  48. 

defiLire  aliquid  aliqua  re  lOt^  485. 

definitio,  w.  aitr.  Ut-cl.  625.  D. 

deincepe,  adv.  of  lime  ;  derivation  225  11. 

deinde,  then  ;  diff.  from  turn  and  iiifle  22-3,  3. 

delectat,  impersonally  used  w.  6ubj.inf.G17,8. 


deligere  w.  double  dat.  90, 65 ;  w.  participial 
i:erundive  148,  178. 

demanding,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ah  28,  48. 

demere,  w.  ace.  of  the  thing,  ahd  dat.  of 
pers.  {—  from)  97,  68. 

demoliri,  error  about  its  meaning  in  the  lex- 
icons, corrected  312,  n.  6. 

Demonstrative  adjectives  in  the  neuter,  as 
pviid.  ant.  of  iSubj.  and  completing  Obj. 
cl.  492, 1.  Hepiaced  by  ea  7es  lb.;  replaced 
by  .sic  and  ila  lb. 

denarius,  value  of  268.  5. 

denique,  ditT.  from  tandem  and  postrhno  223, 
5. 

denuo,  again;  diff.  from  iterum  and  rursus 
224,  6;  deriv.  275,  11, 

to  depend  on,  rendered  by  pendere  ex  29,  48. 

Dependent  sentences  478,  2 ;  see  Clauses. — Dk- 
I'KNUKNT  «^LKsTioMs,  See  Interrogative 
Clauses. 

Deponents,  NVhat  forms  have  passive  mean- 
ing 140,  161 ;  deponent  participles  used 
passively  172,  4. 

deposcere,  w.  participial  jrerundive  148,  178. 

deprecari,  w.  tie :  non  deprecdri,  w.  quin  or 
q'/oniinus,  602,  n.  **. 

desinere,  to  cease,  when  used  in  pass,  voice 
104.  80. 

desistere,  w.  abl.  94,  479;  w.  de  29,  obs.  48. 

desisting,  \'erb8  of,  constr.  w.  ab,  or  a  mere 
abl.  29,  48. 

desperare,  w.  dat.,  ace,  or  de  91,  47.5,  n,  3. 

destinare,  w.  gerundiai  dat.  163,  209;  w.  ge- 
rundiai after  ad  190.  2:i9,  1. 

deterrere  and  absterrere  w\  gerund'al  abl. 
after  ab  1!»5,  243;  deter/ ere  w.  obj.  inf.  60:3, 
n.  1|.  As  verb  of  hindering  w.  quo/ninus 
i)v  }ie  602,  5. 

detrahere,  w.  ace,  of  thing  and  dat.  of  pers. 
(=  from)  97,  68. 

deunx  =  eleven  twelfths  ;  116,  105. 

dicere,  w.  inf.  cl.  5!>4,  1 ;  w.  imperative  cl. 
li).  In  pass,  generally  takt-s  noin.  w.  inf. 
106.87;  except  ill  perf.  and  plup.  lOH,  88. 
As  factitive  verb  w.  double  ace.  102,  B; 
w.  abstract  dative  {die7n  alicui  rei  dicere) 
96,  iiri.—Dico  quod  sentio,  or  dico  quid  sen- 
tiarn  ?  393. — IficTham,  as  imp.  of  reference, 
()|jtional  w.  dlH  341,  3. 

dicto  audientem  esse,  w.  dat.  The  conetruc- 
tion  expi.  87,  n.  4. 

dies  w.  gerundiai  gen.  1.59,  3  :  w.  dat.  {diem 
colloqaio  dicere)  257,  2.— Advs.  derived 
from  dies  225,  11.  Numeral  nouns  derived 
from  dies  226.  1. 

difference.  Verbs  expressing  difference 
constr.  w.  ab  29,  48. 

differre,  constr.  w.  ab  29,  A?,.—Differre,  ex- 
s/>ect~fre,  cu/tcfnri,  (duhildre.  to  hesitjite), 
sibi  dtesse .  prattrtnittere,  as  verbs  of  delay- 
ing and  oniitting,  constr.  w.  quin  if  con- 
nected w.  a  nci^ation  604,  4. — Differebaty 
ditf.  from  distulit  ;3;38,  10. 

difficilis.  w.  dat.  118,  112  ;  w.  II  sup.  121, 121. 
Difficile  est,  w.  subj.  That-cl,  609,  n.  t. 

diffiiiere,  w.  dat.  88,  n.  3. 

digitus,  as  measure  unit  115,  101. 


784: 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


785 


••"rely  w.  obj     i.f.  \^^^:J}ll^^,^,  w.  ut  lb. 

dimicare,  us  verb  of  Btrnin^. 

dimidiatus,  m^*^"*"?  "['  k,   .,,tor  ab  105,  243. 

ili'^OP-C    %V.  lilt.  CI.  Oob,  ^7.   ^V    *-  ^      o^r»      f,,ll    • 

„1,1  .,.ir  7i*l"ll.    ^f^     jfi^rfpat.  impcr... 
*ll"l?S";Vn,''ern4,.,vocl.;  «»•  <ii^"pat< 

dt'eniS  »;  .»  39,48  <aV.ow.;;m=  from).- 

/'l"-.vv    ^7,  27   n.  2;  different  construc- 
distare  vv,   ao  -*•,  ';..,: '4 

distinguished  for  -,{^Xt  '  eca-c^  22:),  11. 
diu   adv.  -' ^^^^^nii^l^  14S.  178. 
d  videre,  w.  P;^'^^'^^'    ",L,  ki,.  ace    100,  48«) ; 

dear..,  =  three  .^."..|.,|;'>^W;',„,,    „3   , 
dolere,  >v.  ace.,    ^)^-  ..      j.^i  5.H).  Formood 

tr„od  P'-'>^e  in^,  II-  ^  ^ntod  like  name 

*rct-tr4r4! '  tX  in  *."i  W-"  "'- 

*r'^,fp"S^'"- --•»*>-- ''■'''"'''• 

of  ihin^  98,  483.  ^nnirvni)     temporal 

donee,    (an;;;!;  ,„Si  a1?d  mood  of  D.^nee- 

eonj.    V      t[m  S    21-2.3.     nonec  ^   as 

clauses  (  =  ^7  ^.^^/Ke  '  oet^  and    silver 

Quill-el.  62o,  -'*•  ^ •„..,_  „1    QQo   a.    Non 

in  the  meanin-r    ^^!,  ^^V  IJ'  f  ordmiuy  or 
cl.  or  ohj.  u.f.  5^i>  ..     y^^^;  i,  .;.  44(^^3. 
pcMiph.a.tic  ]:;^\^J^^^^^c\.  :m.  a. 


ofpred,acc     02    .0.    ^J  .''^^\^^^^  and 
fstcemint;,  takes    an   oi>j. 

di;du8,'J^'  libl.,  as  cireumlocution,  to  ex- 

prC'!-8  >10T1VK  Hi».  Il3- 

l;'™;.rie',ipS  l^v.'uixcd  to  negation, 

.i ;  .^20,  .i  ,  f-l^t:   ]f  '  vf,,od  ill  snbobliqno 
Duin-el.  t..^,  3      l)in    n         v 


l.os(.  AS.'    Mo..d,  inrf.  or  'S'','  fnV  ■  ".1,1 
g.„.Tany  a.'r.ol.Mr  >v,,h  pnn.   t  m..  .  c_  .^ 


Li;s'T5^[/o7:inriiiim'.nw;rr."d 

;il'!;.i^il'4■-«='^''«.»-;?'r;n't"^• 

THAT),  w.  snhjiine.  <>«»'J'^-,,    ^ 

d;l;^^^J^i^;.;fl;i^inl;V^Hetn^ 

pn.vi.led  tl»at ' ;  w.  ^"'^J""^", !;  .'rt^A; ;•  or 
during.   Kn.d.  r-^^'^JV^^V^i^X 

1 ;  by  pres.  abl,  f^--J^;f 
dux,  w.  {;erundial  ;,'en.  1j.»,  -«• 

E,  prep.,  pee  fX 

\  East  =  ontns  .<o/.  222,  n.  .5.         ^ 
ea,  fonrtli  U.eauvc  rase  216  ,  -Jl».  <•• 

::f-^;;^K?:;^.s;;c^ra^!:-5;-..i^ 

1  Eetiesi»  in  ."t.-rropiuv.;  «nd  o.hcr  clau.ea 
edictum,  w.attr.  >:^-,-'>it '.r'''.;./  102   1 

efficiens  w.  ^-en.  117,  1(>H. 
;|rin^.S-I^e^waysw.abl.93,54; 

egr'^df'w.  abl.  04.479;  used  in  perf.  part. 

as  ruED.  ABi..  172.  3.  „-,.^738  6. 

either... or,  ^'^'^^^-'J-it  '   ca^^es. .1^/512,  C. 
ejus  rei..ei  rei,  as  "'  •4U«  f  a^cs  mi  ,^^^ 

ejusmodi  -  sucb  ;  n>'  2»1.  4     a    ^^^^^^^^^ 

1,1  Modal  clanHts  4,i.,   .  .  4^i,  ^      A/ 


Ellipsis.  General  principle  with  respect  to 
the  ussuminK  of  ellipses  to  explain  Latin 
con^'tl•llction8  120,  11.  1.— Ellipsis  of  e.tse  as 
aii.\iliary  3(r),  571,  obs.— Ell.  (»f  pred.  and 
oihrr  tt-rms  in  rel.  el.  5:K),  1  foil.— Ell.  of 
liypotlii-tieal  clauses  73«,  8;  of  a  hypotheti- 
cal thesis  7«2.  F;  730,  1  and  2. 

eloquens,  w.  ^'ermidial  after  ad  192,  5, 

emere,  w.  a*  or  c/e ;  dilf.  between  both  28, 
n.  2.     W.  an  ohj.  of  price  26«,  2  ;  94,  479. 

enemy,  Eiiirl.  collect,  noun  ;  in  Latin  n^ore 
frequently  in  plur.  {limtes)  than  sing.  52, 
n.  46. 

to  enter  (on  the  books)  =  referre  164,  n.  20-. 

eo,  1)  abl.  of  is  (id) ;  2)  abl.  of  diff. ;  3)  third 
locative  case -216  ;  4)  abl.  of  means  218, 
(' ;  278.  4  ;  5)  adv.  «>f  cause  or  purpose  281, 
5  and  7  :  283,  5r.6 ;  28^1,  3.  DitT.  Ironi  prgo, 
lArr/"",  i(;if>tr  281,  6.— .\s  ubl.  of  ditf.  it 
stands  brfore  comparatives,  e8j>ecially  in 
the  const  I  net  ion  eo  ...  qiio\=  the.  ..  .flu) 
2'14,  3  ;  751,  5.  and  eo  ina'ps  quod  60<),  4,  1 ; 
6S4,  T).—Eo  as  synd.  ant.  of  Qiiod-cl.  6S3,  3  ; 
of  consecutive  clauses  4.'i">,  2:  of  final  cl. 
lb.— ^  cohkUio,  ed  ?'a/idne,  as  synd.  ant.  of 
liiial  Clauses  135,  2:  283,  1. 

eousque,  compound  local  adv.,  expl.  217,  8; 
adv.  of  time  'i-ii.  9. 

Epistolary  tenses  3.')6  foil.  In  what  instances 
they  are  used,  and  what  tenses  356,  77. 
When  ordinary  tenses  must  be  used  in 
letters  a")8,  3,  4.  When  they  became  ob- 
polete  3(K),  3. 

erga,  prep.  w.  ace. ;  use,  and  diff.  from 
adversus  and  contra  15,  16;  41,  72.  Collo- 
c ition  of  erga  25.  44. 

ergo,  semipreposition,  w.  gen.  114,  98.  Der- 
ivation (=  e  recjo)  lb. 

eripere.w.  ace.  of  thins  and  dat.  of  pers.  97,68. 

erumpere  w.  abl.  94,  479. 

esse,  i)cciirs  1;  as  AUxiLiAnr  of  tense  (its 
ellipsis  305,  .571,  ons.).— 2)  As  copl'la,  w. 
pred.  nom.  73;  \v.  pred  trcn.  77;  w  pred. 
dat.  81 ;  w.  pred.  abl.  80,  27  ;  w.  geruiuliiil 
<ren.  161,  208  ;  w.  genindial  dat.  KiS,  212 
(^.sw.  as  copula,  used  iiypothetically  in  the 
ii!().  727,  25  fin).—  3)  .As  ordinary  xeuteu 
VEhB.  takinj;  adverbial  and  pre'pt>sitioiial 
objects,  {a)  as  verb  of  state  ami  existence 
=  *  to  l)e  there  '  (see  s'/nt  f/ui).  Here  beloiitr 
the  expres-ioii!*  et>t  q'lod,  est  cut\  ed  qunm 
487,  3  ;  ed  uf,  prope  est  ut  487.  2  ;  also  the 
COMPOUNDS  (tftsse,  which  take  completin»; 
objs.  in  flat.  89.— (A)  As  a  verb  of  situation 
(=  sifi/m  esse},  takiiiir  ace.  or  abl.  of  place 
220,  4.—  (c)  Asa  verb  of  iiiteie-t  and  worth, 
constr.  w.  <;en.  (sometimes  abl.)  of  price 
and  value  267.  4  ;  271.  2;  273.  1. 

et  ipse,  ~  lik'wi-e.  used  as  accessory  predi- 
c  itf  2.52,  9.     Difl'.  from  idem  =  likewise  lb. 

etiam  (for^/jam,  as  particle,  see  P.  1).  Et'iam 
afque  etinvi,  used  in  place  ol  valde  262,6. 
Etiatn  qwim  —  even  when.  w.  ind.  645,  2  ; 
=.f/i(n/i.<i  w.  suitjujc.  732,  4.* 

etiamnum.  use  of,  222,  n.  §. 

Etiamsi-clauses,  beloni;  to  the  indef.  conces- 
Bive  cl.  692,  624.    Their  relation  to  condi- 


'  tional  and  Etsi-clauses  693,  2 ;  their  moods 
6!».3,  3.  Etiamsi,  sometimes  =  ei^i  693,  2. 
Not  used  by  Caisar  693,  3. 

etiamtum  (etiamtunc),  use,  222,  n.  § ;  w.  imp. 
316,  1.     Diff.  from  adhuc  lb. 

Etsi-clauses,  generally  w.  ind.  698,  13.  Sub- 
juiic.  in  Eisi-cl.  lb.  Etsi,  sometimes  = 
e/iamA  lb.  W.  participial  construction 
699,  14  ;  173,  2;  as  coord,  conj.  699,  5;  699, 
n.  t. 

evadere  w  pred.  nom.  73,  462. 

even  if,  rendered  etiamsi  692,  624  foil. ;  hyvi 
695, 8 ;  Jtot  even  if,  by  ne  si.,  .quident.  732. 2. 

evenire  w.  dat.  89.  Eceidt,  impels,  w.  dat. 
107.  90;  w.  bubj.  Ut-cl.  or  Quod-cl.  619,  4. 
Diff.  from  acridit  etc.  lb. 

ever  since,  as  prepositional  combination,  = 
inde  ab  3i»,  442 ;  ever  since  that  day,  ex  hoc 
die  .30,  49  ;  as  adverbial  expression,  =  ex 
(a^t)  eo  tempore  319.  4;  as  conjunct,  (ever 
since  the  time  that)  =ex  quo  (with  or  with- 
out tempore)  526,  d;  also  by  postquam  6tK}, 
2;  (5(34,7  foil. 

evincere,  constr.  w.  Ut-cl.,  see  vincere. 

ex,  prep.  w.  abl.,  use.  and  diff.  from  de  and 
at)  25  foil.  Ex  omitted  Uoco  cedere,  sendtu 
vwrere  etc.)  27,  n.  1 ;  before  names  of  cities 
47  foil,— A>  =  be^'inning  from,  29,  442  ; 
equivalent  of  partitive  iren.  30,  443;  de- 
noting material  30.  i.—Ex  itinere  scfi,bere 
etc.  31,  3 —Denoting  chan^'e  31,  444;  = 
'after' 31,  52;  = 'according  to' 31,  2.  W. 
gerundlal  abl.  197,  246;  w.  participial  re- 
versed phrase  19«),  5;  w.  Quod-cl.  (f-x  eo 
qnod)  6<)7,  'i.—Ex  {ah)  eo  tempore  w.  perf. 
or  imp.,  difterent  from  Engl.  319,  ^.—Ex 
quo  (tempore)  =  'niter'  52(;.  B;  =  *  ever 
since'  526,  d.  Ex  quo  replaced  by  ]x>st- 
quam  6t»4.  l.—Ex  usu  est,  ex  re  est,  e  repu- 
blicd  est,  impers.  nse  and  construction  of 
these  phras<'s  622,  5. 

excedere,  w.  abl.  93,  479. 

ezcellens,  w.  abl.  120,  116. 

except,  rv-ndered  by  »14  739,  3:  except  that 
=  pnettr  id  quod,  fiisi  quod  (»07,  2. 

excipere,  w.  ace.  after  in  38,  «57.  If  =  '  to 
exempt  from,'  constr.  w.  ne  or  quominus 
602.  5. 

excitare,  w.  gcrundial  after  ad  190,  2.39,  1 ; 
w.  Tliat-cl.  see  /norere. 

exciting,  Veri)s  of.  constr.  w,  ad  41,  70. 

excludere,  w.  gerundial  abl.  after  ad  195,  243. 

Exconsul,  Expresident  etc.,  how  to  express  in 
Lat.  .32,  n.  1. 

excusatio,  w.  attr.  (^nominus-cl.  625.  D. 

exhorting.  Verbs  of,  eonstr.  w.  ad  21,  70. 

exigere.  w.  participial  gerund' ve  148.  174. 

exiguus  (=  too  small  for)  w.  gerunciial  dat. 
1(;5.  2. 

existimare  w.  Inf.  cl  588.23;  in  the  pass, 
generally  takes  nom.  w.  inf.  106,  87;  ex- 
cept in  perf  and  plui)  88.  As  factitive 
verb.  w.  double  ace.  102,  C  ;  as  verb  of 
esteeming  w.  tren.  of  value  272,  1. — Existi- 
7/iaf)at  and  existimdrit  337.  2. 

to  expect  w.  That-cl.,  not  by  €Xsi)ectdr€^  but 
sperdre  593,  8. 


786 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


787 


expedit,  w.  Inf.  cl.  and  dat.of  the  interested 
expensum  ferre  (accessory  prcd.)  expl.  2;>4,4. 

Nv.  s„l,l.  Inf.  cl.r.l-i  n.  t.    , 
expugnare.w.Tl.af-cl.,s.en/r.m 

roizativc  cV   not   adnutti..-   penphrastic 

eSyarew.abl   or./.03  470^^^^^ 

extcmplo,  adv.  of  time,  expl.  -^-^/'v,^  ^  ,, 

Dirt,  from  .«'A(f  .Jh,  «».i.    ^""•.I'^-.V*    J,    1. 
Qnam-el.  {fxfra  quam  si)    .b4,  14,  no.  d, 

7:V>  8  no.  ti- 
extremum  est.  w.  Ut-cl.  113  1  . 

exuerc,  fitluT  w.  ace.  of  tin n? 
m-rV.  or  ace,  of  pers.  and  uhl. 

m  ;  98,  483. 

F    pvmbol  of  the  nncia  IK".,  10r>  FS.,  symbol 
Vtlu'^eptunx  110,  105.     FZ.,  symbol  of 


£r:;t^:^I^!p'?21,121;w.Bubj.Inr,or 
f:;u;iXw'J^Vlnf.cl.,Ut-cl.,orsubj. 

fivIrJ'w:  dat.  89;  w.  ;>/..,  not  ^"«f^J^  (;• 
favor,  '  to  do  somebody  a  favor,'  how  e:.pi. 
in  Lat.  28-3,  n.  12.  _   .,.- 

fecundus  w.  -en.  118,  109:  w.  abl.  119,  116. 
felix  w.  <renindial  dat.  Ifv),  2. 
ferox   w   -'.-rundial  after  ad  192,  5. 
f  Se  (m^V;./.,  o'rfve.orarU.r  ^'tcV  more  f  e 
cnilv  w.  Inf.  el.  than  ^v.|lu<Hl  590.  ^^r 


qui 


♦.-In 


re 
the 


and  dat.  of 
of  Ihiu':  97; 


of  the   Hep 
tS'^;c'.:'r;.V:.rVi'n.''l-^.- point,  of  the  com. 

ticlirnrmcuK/vorh  «■  do„We  ao..  101, 

?;;cunlonXn45i..lO;|>2i30.-Sym;ps^ 
of  th.  dit^Vreni  si-nillcations  and  con^truc- 

et'c   =  llinnot  help  doin,^'  sonu-thin^'  |UK 
?_^'ac,    •suppo>e   that,'    w.  InL  d.  1.0  , 
;;   **     Fac  I/I.  as  circnmlocution  of  the 
affirmative  imperative  488,  10;         ,    ,  .. 
facilis  w.  dat.  11^  li2;  w.  -.«rundial  dative 

1 

8Up 

^foJnlr  Ut^^^^  ♦i0.5,2r..  lnt.odnr|Hl  by 
fnlrl  or  uf  ■  dirt".  l)etween  them  (.(I;),  1-  1'» 
Ji;;o^;;f;ansitiveot,jec.s^2;mj^^ 

I,f  at.l.  of  means  (eo  quo'h  <»0*'- V'  "  j"^^' 


Hs  ver1)nm    imperandi   59(),   n 

mennin"  Mo  reoort  '  takes  nom.  >\.  im«-  »> 

pli^,  except  in-  perf.  and  plup,  100,  8.  and 

fides,  w.  Attr.  That-cl.  624.  A,  •i.-Fulevi  ha- 

fidere,  w.  dat.  8S  ;   w.  abl.  88,  n.  3  ,   J^,  4.». 

\)\{\. from  co'ijidere  88,  n.  .i. 
fieri  fee  rV/c.rl     Constr.  w.  Vrc<}   l^(^n^    .3, 

Fit,  it  happen»  w.  subj.  Ut-cl.     UiutrLut 

Tinir  ThAt  clauses      Syndetic   ant.    {eo,  eo 

«""•  VM;  I  CcT'aT  V     I>ar  ' 'h.liaa 
I'omoletinir  inai-ti.  <»•)<,  '•    ■»  •*■  . .., » 

S  Ut-cf.  (•.:'>8,  3.     Always  ^^V^^^f 

consecution  if  dep.  on  l»'^'^;  }  "  .''.•.^^•'ioi 
fingerc.  as  factitive  verb,  w.  <1«'^'I    »^^,.;  ^"^' 

A     Flnnt  -  suppose,  w.  Inf.  cl.  <09, 1« . 
fi^    w.Ci'rundial  pen.  l-'^./^--^'^^"?: 

St.  of  t^ynd.  ant.  of  llnal  clause^  2b.i,  500, 

283.  1. 
rinite  clauses  4S0r,10 

firmna   w   <'erun<lial  dat.  l'>o, '«•  ^„,.„1 

fiS     Canr.ons  in  renderin-  lhi8  numeral 

into  T-atin  290.x.  inn  i«w;  •  how  con- 

ai'gitiis'om  est  w  ;"l;j^T"r.  cl.  609, 

abl.  118,  lUo. 


o 


cilis  w.  dat.  11^  I'-f'  ;;.:, =^;, V'lV ^  2 •    v    H.     Aairans.  w.  abl.  118, 
♦;-,  'I-  w.  eerundial  after  «u  l.»^,.-*,  "^^-  "•     ^°-..i  0-0  3, 
;,;,';.-121,  121.    FaMe  ut  w.  .ui.J.  cl.  60.1,  ^  a.m  «t.  -;-.  '-,  ^.„ 


Factitive  verbs,  con:-i-i  «'•  ■'  —   ^  .^_  . 

CoHstr.  w.  double  ace.  or  uom.  101,  4^.7  , 

w.  pred.  gen.  102.  7«. 
facultas  vv^  attr.  Ut -J  -  6|^,_^     ,.^  ^,,  ^„,,;^ 

fiu^U  w.  .nbj^  Inf.  cl   or  TTt-cl.  612,6. 
famaestw.  eubj.  Inf.cl  0  .3  1. 
famUiaris  w.  gen.  or  dut.  119,  in. 


ever.  iHW'.-^'    ^'Ki  sliSsSiS)»" 

Tfor  a  consi  leration,  ?Mr.'/H^i  ^'-■^^?'^';;.^'^' 
rm^T^     To  have  regard  for,  by  gen.  144  n 
Jf  •^•^F.-r'   w    participials  by   gernndial 
rron    r,9  1-  by  participial  gerundive  148, 

'.^['cr'^r';';.  i^:«c'(r.;r*e  turP-e-or  557 


(see  P.  I);  by  dquiOem  688,  14  ;  by  ^uipix 

fo-as  and  forig.    PifT.  between  them  219,  n.  t. 

fore,  forem  etc.  I'se  of  1.30.140;  l:i5,  l.')0. 
Wiih  i.erf.  parr.  1.37,  I.50.  Cireumloeution 
hy  fore  >it  137,  151 :  487.  b.  Forem  w.  perf. 
part.  =  perf.  bit.  subj.  of  the  pass.  137, 1.52; 
Jorein,a^  auxiliary  in  place  of  t-w^m  130, 
140;  in  place  of  periphrastic  fut.  451,  2. 

Form  adjectives  (see  P.  I).  Demonstrative 
/orm-adj.  as  synd.  ant.  of  different  classes 
of  clau>es,  see  Syndetic  anf^cedenU.  As 
synd.  ant.  of  attr.  modal  Ut-cl.  493,  4. 
Wh.it  fonn-adjs.  may  be  used  as  accessory 
I)re(|s.  o-)()  foil.  ;  MS  pred.  abl.  185,  2. 

forsitan,  w.  subjunc.  37t>,  1. 

forte.  242.  OBS. 

fortuna  w.  gernndial  <:en.  1.59.  3. 

Tractions,  h-nv  cxpr.  110,  105.  Symbols  of 
fraciioiis  lb. 

free  speech  (to  demandUiowexpr.in  Lat. 151,7, 
freeing,  VeiDs  of.  constr.  w.  ub  29,  48. 
fretus  \v.  al>l.  Ill),  IKi. 

from,  Ivngl.  prep.,  rendered  by  ah,  de,  f.r  25 
loll   ;  ixfore  names  of  cities  48.82;  after 
verbs  of  lakinir  away  by  dat.  97,  »i8.     De- 
noting time  (from  tne  time  that),  inde  ob 
{>^et'  iiid-).  t.v  (/)/o  (si'o  ex),  po-^tqua/n  <JGit. 
42;    r.04,  2  and  7;    deiiotiii;^r  cause,  bv  ob 
and  de;   30,  31;   279,  5<)5 ;  bv  partici'ples 
{d'icfns  etc.)    119.    115;    l)y   abl.    279.    .505. 
*  From  the   lact  that,'  ex  eo  quod  mi.  2. 
'Different  fro/n'  =  aUn-'i  afque    74!).    9.— 
From  w.  pa'rticipials  (de>ist  from  liu'litinir. 
etc.)  I)y  ohj    inf.  t»()4.  3  ;  by  quominus  004, 
1  :  by  qt/in  t»4,  4  ;  004.  6. 
fnii  ( perfrui).  w.  abl.  1)3,  479 and  n.  9.   Treat- 
ed as  transitive  verb  in  reversed  gerundive 
plira-es  152.  188. 
fmstra,  212.  obs. 
fugiens,  w.  ireii.  117.  108. 
funditus.     DilV  from  radicifus  242,  obs. 
fungi  { i)firfinifii)   w.  abl.  •.»3.  479  and   n.  9. 
'i'lcatedas  tr.msitive  in  reversed  gerundive 
]>h  rases  152,  188. 
furari,  w.  ace.  of  thing  and  dat.  of  pers. 

(=  from)  97,  08. 
Future-perfect.  When  used  as  ordinary  fu- 
ture teii-^e  (see  Future  tent^fs)  349  foil.  ;  w. 
lorc^  of  Eiiirl.  fut.  perf.  319,  1  ;  w.  force  of 
EiiL'I.  fut.  pres.  349,  2.— As  potential  fut. 
350,  75  foil. :  as  imperative  350.  1.— As  de- 
pendt-nt  future  35i  foil.;  rendered  by  Eiiirl. 
pres.  or  perf.  354.  3.  Form  of  the  pred.  of 
its  princ.  sent.  3.55,  5.  Convkhsion  of  fut. 
pert,  into  an  ordinary  perC  or  plup.  when 
the  clause  must  be  in  subjunc.  452,  98  foil, 
(not  by  circumlocution  w.  'futunnnsit  uf 
4.53,  n.  *).  Cannot  be  converted  if  in  pass, 
4.53,  1.  I'liU).  subjunc.  inst.  of  perf.  sub- 
junc. as  coiiverted  fut.  perf.  454,  3.— Fut. 
perf.  in  Antequam-cl.  008,  2;  609,  3;  in 
periods  of  c«)ntiii<rent  action  330,  5;  in 
Quum-clauses  (i40,  4;  047,  3.— %Vhen  depo- 
nent ftit.  perf.  takes  the  auxiliary  futro, 
3.50,  3. 

Future-present  (see  Future  tenses)^  >vhcn  used 


a?  ordinary  fut.  tense  347,  73  foil.  It?  rela- 
tion to  the  Engl,  forms  with  'will'  and 
'  shall '  348, 1  foil.  Potential  fut.  pres.  350, 
7.5.  1  ;  as  imperative  .350,  1  ;  denoting  con- 
clusions 350.  2;  of  potential  verbs  (jx)s.<e 
etc.)  and  gerundials  351,  3  :  to  express  syl- 
logisms 351,  4,  A  ;  for  deduct io  ad  absur- 
dnm,  in  interrog.  form  a51,  B;  for  rules 
3.)2,  B;  fur  opinions  advanced  352.  6;  in 
polite  statements  352,  7.— Conversion  of 
fut.  pres.  into  ordinary  pres.  or  imp.  if  the 
cl.  must  be  in  subjunc.  448  foil. ;  into  per- 
iphrastic fut.  449  foil.  Different  methods 
of  converting  futures  of  the  pass.  451,  3.— 
Future-pres.  not  used  in  Antequam-ciaiises 
in  good  prose  068.  n.  *.— Exceptionally  used 
after  dutn  =  while  672,  2.— In  clauses  of 
contin<rent  action  330,  5.— In  Si-clauses  of 
doubtful  reality  702,2;  711,  15;  7l0,  14; 
713,  18.-In  Quum-ciauses  640.  4;  647,  3.— 
Not  n-^ed  in  Si-clauses  of  doubtless  reality 
71.5, 4.5.  ^ 

Future  Tenses.  Gram. division:  Fut.  pres.and 
Int.  perf.  347, 587  and  obs.;  Logical  division: 
Onlin.iry  fut.,  potential  fut..  dependent 
fut.  347, 588.  For  periphrastic  fut.  see  that 
article.  Hules  on  the  choice  between  fut. 
l)res.  ;ind  fur.  perf.  in  indep.  sent.,  and  cl. 
dep.  on  them  351, 1 ;  354,  2.  Ordinary  fut. 
347  foil. :  potential  fut.  350  foil.  ;  dep.  lut. 
3,53  foil.  Four  combinations,  according  to 
which  either  fut.  pres.  or  fut.  perf.  must 
be  used  as  dep.  fut.  353.  1.  Dep.  fut.  in 
cond.  cl.  of  doubtful  reality  703  A».~If  the 
clause  requires  subjunc,  the  dependent 
fut.  cannot  be  converted  into  periphrastic 
subjunc.  4.50,  C— Epistolary  tenses  in  place 
of  fut.  tenses  3,58,  .5. 
futunis,  verb.  adj.  ofessie  125, 12S.—Fufi'irv/m 
esse,  use  of  i;3o,  1.50:  as  circumlocution, 
wiih  nt  134,  4;  137,  154.  Faturum  est  ut, 
use  as  finite  pred.  1.%,  n.  1  ;  cannot  be  used 
as  circumlocution  of  fut.  perf.  453,  1.  Fu- 
turumfuisae  ut,  use  of,  137,  155. 

Gaudere,  w.  abl.,  or  de  93,  479,  n.  8.— W.  re- 
versed participial  phrase  in  abl.  173,  1 ;  w. 
Inf.  cl.  or  w.  Quod-cl.  590.  For  mood  of 
the  Quod-cl.  see  laudare. 

Genitive  case.  Pre»,  gkn.  77  foil.  Gen,  of 
the  possessor  77.  460  (diff.  from  dat.  of  the 
l)ossessor  79,  24)  ;  impers.  pred.  gen.  77, 
466.  2  (inst.  of  neuter  pred.  adj.  79,  2.5) ; 
qualitative  gen.  78,  31  (diff.  from  qualita- 
tive abl.  80,  27);  after  factitive  verbs  1U2, 
76  ;  eren.  denoting  the  aire  of  men  2-36,  5.— 

GeX.  as  COMPLETING  OBJ.  of  VEKBS  92  foll.; 

along  w.  a  transitive  obj.  99, 484.— Dep.  on 
ADjKCTivEs  and  participles  117, 499.— Ge.v. 
of  GEKUNDFALs  1.57  foil. ;  of  reversed  par- 
ticipial phrases  162,  527.— Gen.  of  place 
(names  of  cities  47).  Gen.  of  distance 
220,  4  ;  of  ui.mension  after  nouns  115.  102; 
after  adjs.  11.5,  498;  dep.  on  comparativea 
denoting  numerical  excess  116,  103.— Attr. 
pen.  referring  to  the  length  of  time-peri- 
ODs  237,  7.— Accessory  predicatb-okk. 


788 


INDEX. 


05H  3-  250,  26  and  oB8.  1-««^;  «^ff  7: 
^)'>,  o  ,  *•» '»  .     worth,  ^(•«1  *  » 

and  VAMK  afti-r  «'^^^^'    "  "  .jves  lnn^t  bo 
2,w  3 -What  abs.  Q«>""t''7'\V'^  '  o-,,  •!> 

fexnlnnaiionoi  thi>  form  f«i'  V    ^    «en 
genus,  w.  j:  rundml  iren.  15J,  3. 

"'■i'"  "■■■''' ''-'\','"  "j;:;."".^  "^"y'<^- 

cur  (a)  in  ^^j;";  "  ,  „,.,,1,    „r  n.-iiphniflic 

(c)>i^  attrU.ut.  s  aiul  obj^^  ^*  »»      *•  . 
'■""'7^;  Vn  n.lu  -  lee   he  arti.-le.  un<h-r  | 

loll.     .Mt  tmiii  "  j-o  »L.>2\    (ieruiub* 

151,  Ih.)  or(.M"  _    yj.ivin.'  activt^  meamnj;, 
«re  i-'n>«'''-  l»»"**- ,;^;' ,,7^^^.;  thiir  .xci'p- 

{alc^ntransitive   objero^     5^1^^^^^ 
^,ram.  «noma  y  o      •  •'^^^  '^^;„;:.Vruc.  i.lu   in 
«rrtaiii   connectloni*    hU,       •• 
,vith  ot.j-.  in  an  «'«"'Vl'A.mH   n  whi  h  L-e- 

rnncUaU  may  '•••  '';">;;j;:^J  V'   .   .1.^1^  u. 

191.     Tia<»'»«  of  the-  UM    oi   1.« 

iiubi,..  ami  transitive  obj^l.;'  "• 

/^----r^w'um^eUca..;how 
''"■'V  K^''.ii?an<l*'5      Wh.t  n-ttttlonnare 

---;^!^''r^:.*^|o/'a!;i;%i;r*n 
r;;;r.^t.U;i;;:.'o„...e.Uui.w 

v,ri.*  nil    «>7.     A»  prrti.  u.niuvo  w.  loi» 
ula  Hi  J.  'itlH.  „  |.,,n     I 

'    ..,.  iti,.<aL'<"'  onU  I 

I  XV   irMi,-iliv.ol.J    IM     l»«l 

'  1  vlilrh  It  «H- 

f-  r«"i  '  ,  oi.j    Mi».  «»••• 

f„ll._,.  ,»l  «tHi .  vf   !•  ' 

\i.   L>»n.f'"Ui 


erain.rccltilK5..;...j...^-v-^;^  ;^J^;;^ 
as  accessory  pred.  1.0,  -ii-»,-  "^-1^  '  com- 
al.l  ab-.  or  of  a  clan>-c  1 .0.  1  ,  «'»  * ""» 
f.Vrat  abl  170, 2  :  a»  completins:  obj.  1 .0.  .J. 
^''S'tivviy  «.'adverbial  obMf  n.»^"Uer,  = 
'without'  w.  partH  ipiai  l'-».  i.  ^- 
T/EKUNi>.Au\rrKHrKEi.<).moN.     ra^^ 

:;'^co:::^^iSn.o;o.of^e:..de..otin.^x 

IW  2:^«.),  2.  Dep.  <»n  «njs.  1^2,  ^40.  A8 
atir.  l^M,  ons.  'l)iff.  from  j:<rundm  da  • 
?'i?237;  from  p.rticipial  «eru.nd  e  IW, 
2m-//i  >v.  Kernnd.al  ACCiB  IW  M.  • 
Force  of  ihi^  ronsttn.  tum  ^f'f.}\\^^^ 
Diff.  from  LM-rui..iial.after  m  l.».i  2^2- 
G.rundial  abi..  after  in  VM  /'     •  •  "'''^^ '7 

-^G^n.ndi^l  ace  «fier  c>6  1%,  5 13  ;  alter  in- 

nartieipial  phrase  m  abl.  1  ..i.  1  ,  \n  .  ^iuou 
dorlnf.  cl.5U8,y;  5»8,n.^ 

gloriosum  est  w.  ^'«»^3^  y.'^^'  *!.;„,! dial  pen. 

by  /1/(7'^  TOO,  lb.  _y_   --J.  . 

gratia  in  abl.,  to  denote  P"''^"*'^  m  ^;'; 

1    -iKl    1      W    tren.,  a»»  hviionvm  of  projXer 

con>tr.  w.  C^KKl-cl.  r>08.9:  '«rely  ^^.  l"f,^}- 

gratificari,  w   dat.  8".». 

«rati»  {'/'K'ii"}  212,  on?.  „ 

Iratulari.   w.   dat.   W» ;  w.   Quod-cl.  598,  9 

gVatu..    vv'dat    lis    112       (rat"fne*t  ^^. 
^iuod-cl.  GIO,  4;  w.  Ltd.  612,  b. 


INDEX. 


789 


gvrumlial  pi*Kl.  g«u.  iws»  »• 


Habere,  n^  factitive  verb  w.  double  a^c  10., 
C  ;  more  freciuenlly  in  pasn.  w-  •  <  "  '« 
,,om.  102,  oB«.  <'onr.tr  w  V^o.<^  n  rm- 
t„,n}  102  7.'».  Ah  veib  «)f  cHteemJn--'.  w. 
old  "inner  value  272.  1.  ,  W.  pt-rf-  P^f^^ 
HHMcee-Kirv  pred.,  b.lnuMbe  origin  «.I  the 
Su"marr-t«»'«ve'in  nuHlern  lan.;n«-e.» 
5?^  k  t'on-.r.  w.  a  rel.  el.  In  M.bju..c. 
fw;  /  diramK  «.  obj.  inf..  w.    ge- 

rund i  w.  iiiterro-Htive  rl.  55.,  ^. 

hftUlis  »n<i   inhabilii.    w.  dal.  118,   112;  >*• 
i.rrni  d  al  all.  I  r///  102.1.  ,.«,.-   qq  o 

h»b»tare   in  'v  take  an  obj.  of  price  2<i..  3^  *• 
Habitual  actioot.  how  .  xpr.  UX  '»•         . 
K»c     |,.,nih    l.»..uiv.'   cane   21«..      "'f'**'"''. 

,    n.'mpound   adv     ..f  4th  lor.   ra8e  «H,  8  , 

had  it  not  bwn  for,  h.»vv  rend.ted  .  18/; 
,htlf.    how    expr.     ll'i.    IIJK     </n«    A"//    <^ 


it  happens  that,  expr.  by  different  imper- 
sonal^ 61S,  A  ;  dill",  between  these  G19,  9. 

hand  («o/n  secus,  synd.  ant.  of  com  par.  cl. 
of  (jiia  iry  745,  3.  What  conj^>.  are  u.sed 
ufler  it.  Ih. 

he  who,  liow  rendered  .509,  2:  514,  1. 

help.  *  I  cannot  help'  w.  participial  =fa- 
cfre  non  jwsxnni  qiiin;  or  noti  posmni 
quin  ;  or  non  jm^issioh  non  005,  7. 

hie.  denionstr.  adj.  (r^ee  P.  I.);  hh  ?ynd.  ant. 
of  rel.  and  modal  cl.  of  (juality  4.J5,  2. 
inc.  adv.  in  first  locative  case  217,  4;  as 
temporal  adv.  =  turn  22.3,  3. 

hiding,  verbs  of,  w.  ace,  alter  in  .38,  r»7. 

hinc,  demonstr.  adv.  in  second  locative 
case  217,  4  ;  a.s  temporal  adv.  =  deinde 
2-22.  9. 

Historical  present,  pec  Presient.  Historical 
INFINITIVE,  sec  Infinitive.  Histokical im- 
rEUFECT,  s<'e  Imp*-'  ftct.  Histok.  8UB.iunc- 
TivE,  see  Suhjunct'ii'e  in  conditional  cl. 

honestus,  \v.  «reruudial  after  ad  lt>2,  5;  w. 
II.  Sup.  121,  121.  ilonestitin  est.,  w.  Subj. 
Inf.  cl.  610,  3. 

hora  (hour),  how  calculated,  and  divided 
iiy  the  Latins  226,  1. 

horno,  temp.  adv.  =  hoc  anno  223,  11. 

horsum,  compound  locative  adv.  217,  8. 

hortari,  w.  ace.  after  ad  or  in  41,  n.  2,  W. 
imperative  cl.  595.  4  ;  rarely  w.  obj.  inf.  lb. 

how,  (litlereiit  ways  of  renderinij  240,  2. 

however,  rendered  by  quarnquam^^^,  12;  by 
nitl  «»r  nvii  tanit-n  739,  2.  (By  autem,  etc. ; 
Pee  P.  1.). — Ilotreier  mucli.  by  quamvi'< 
(not  qiKuncmque)  5(K).  5:  501,  9;  693.  A 
foil.  Hon't-r^r  w.  an  adj.,  l)y  qua/nris  693, 
4  :  //owe rer  little  =  quamris  non  691,  H. 

hue.  adv.  of  j.lace  in  3d  locative  ca.se  317, 
oBs.  4.  Ilucuxque,  compound  locative 
adv.  2!7,  8;  postclassically  as  temporal 
adv.  222.  9. 

humus,  as  locative  object,  takes  locative 
(•a>es,  like  names  of  cities  47,  81. 

hundred-weight,  how  expr.  275,  1. 

Hypothetical  comparison,  in  re<,'ard  to  comp. 
cl.  introd'icrd  by  qiian.  ac  xi,  qxam  n'l, 
etc.  74-3.  3  loll.  Subjunc.  in  the  cl.,  sub- 
ject to  law  of  consecution  748,  5. 

Ihi,  adv.  of  place,  in  1st  locative  case  216; 
Hs  temporal  adv.  !i"J2,  n.  t. 

icciroo,  causal  adv.  280.  40.  Svndet.  ant.  of 
(^lod  and  (^uia-cl.  68-3,  3;  of  iinal  cl.  4;i5.  2; 
ot  causal  Si-cl.  716.  3  foil.  Use  of  iccirco 
if  not  svnd.  ant.  .if  clauses  282.  8. 

id  quod,  lntn»dncin<;  parenthetical  rel.  cl., 
rendered  by  *  which '  after  a  uoua  lu  appo- 
sition 517.  4. 

idem,  determinative  form-adj.  (t«ee  P.  I.>, 
as  synd.  ant.  of  comp.  cl.  of  quality,  fol- 
lowed by  qiti,  ac,  atque,  uf.  etc.  744.  1. 
IVeil  as  acc.'ss.  pr.d.  in  the  meanin;; 
'  likewiw^ '  251,  9.    ])iff.  frotn  tt  ipse.  lb. 

identidem,  temp.  adv.  222.  H. 

ideo.  therelore.  cau(»al  adv.  280,  5  and  7. 
Ditf.  Irom  the  causal  conjs.  trqo.  iffifvr, 
ilaque  281,6.    Adv.  of  purpose  283,566; 


284,  3.  Synd.  ant.  of  Qaod-cl.  683,  3. 
Meaning  of  idea  if  used  without  a  causal 
cl.  282.  8. 

idoneus,  w.  dat.  118,  112;  w.  gernndial  after 
ad;  w.  a  rel.  cl.  in  subjunc.  557,  3. 

Idus,  meaning  and  gram,  use  227,  1. 

if,  regular  Engl,  equivalent  o\ si  488,  B; 
rendered  by  quum  645,  34,  If  not  =  ?nsi, 
ni,  or  si  non  (see  these  conjs.).  'If  /  am 
not  mistaken'  =  nisi  im  fallit,  nisi  fallor 
(not  nisi  ert-o,  nor  si  non  fallor,  etc.)  742. 2. 
'  Jf  you  please  '  =  si  placet,  si  videtur,  sis, 
sodes  (anted,  and  poet)  742,  11.—'  If  but,  if 
indeed'  =  si  quidem  688,  14.  '  If  but  = 
if  only,  provided  that.'  by  diim  or  dmnmo- 
do  w.  subjunc,  si  modo,  etc.  676, 13;  677, 14. 

ignarus,  w.  gen.  118,  109.  W.  gerundial  gen. 
161,  207,  Te  ignaro,  without  your  knowl- 
edire  it^,  1. 

i^orare  (non)  w.  Quin-cl.  .^89,  4. 

ignoscere,  w.  dat.  88;  difl'erent  constructions 
SS.  n.  5.  W.  Quod-cl.  598,  9;  w.  Si-cl.  598, 
n.  *. 

ille,  demonstr.  form-adj.  (see  P.  I.)  Svnd. 
ant.  of  clauses  of  quality  435,  2. -Ille  ego 
qui  51.5,  4. 

illico,  adv.  of  time,  expl.  22.5, 11.  In  a  neffa- 
tive  thesis  of  conditional  periods,  emphat- 
ically used  inst.  of  iccirco  717,  3. 

illudere,  w.»dat.  or  ace.  91,  475. 

immemor,  w.  gen.  118,  109. 

imminens,  w.  dat.  118,  108. 

immolare.w.  abl.  or  ace.  of  the  victim  95,  62. 

immunem  esse,  ^v.  ab  or  mere  abl.  29,  48. 

impedimentum,  w.  attr.  Qiiominus-cl.  625,  D. 
I/jij>Klinitnto  i:»t.  w.  subj.  Quod-ci.  615, 11. 

impedire,  constr.  w.  trans,  ace.  along  w.  obj. 
inf.  101,  83;  603,  n.  li  ;  w.  trans,  ace.  along 
w.  neuter  lonn-adj,  S5,  39,  2.  As  verb  of 
negative  doing  w.  Quominus-cl.  602,  5. 
Kon  impedire  w.  quin,  an  anomalous  con- 
struction (i03,  n.  t.  W.  ne  603,  n.  1.  W. 
gerundial  after  ad.  lb. 

impellere,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  190,  239,  1  ; 
w.  That-cl.,  see  movtre. 

imperare,  w.  dat.  88.  Other  con<»trnction3 
88,  n.  1.  Imperare  alicui  aliqnid,  of  mili- 
tary requisitions  98,  69.  Personal  con- 
otruction  of  the  pass,  imperor  w.  obj.  inf. 
105,  85.  Constr.  w.  imperative  clauses 
596,  6  ;  their  different  forms,  and  connec- 
tions w.  the  dat.  of  the  personal  obj.  lb. 
Sitii  non  imperare  (not  to  restrain  one's 
self)  constr.  w.  Quin-cl.  603,  5. 

Imperative  clauses,  a  main  division  of  depen- 
dent sentences  480.  610.  Gram,  form  ;389, 
8:1  Dep.  on  ordinary  verbs  of  saying 
389,  2.  Different  classes  of  imperative 
clau.ses  according  to  the  nature  of  the  lead- 
ing imperative  idea  59.5,  2.  Form  of  im- 
perative cl.  dep.  on  verbs  of  neirative  com- 
mand 5!t7,  7  ;  on  verbs  of  permission  597, 
8.  Governiug  verb  of  command  under- 
stood Sl^O,  3.  Im|)erative  cl.  in  form  of 
Inf.  cl.  w.  «rerundial  pred.  594,  1. 

Imperative  mood  (see  P.  I).  The  II.  Impern- 
tive,  denoting  laws  and  rules  351,  A,    Its 


'QS 


INDEX. 


KH  3;  25fi,  86  and  obp.  1— Oon.  of  rnirK 
nnu  VAi.rK  aftrr  ett«f,  lo  !»••  worth,  2«i7,  2  ; 
3»{S,  3.  — What  ahn.  (jiiiuititutivi-M  lnll^t  hv 

1>Iii<mmI  In  ifi-n.  oT  price  uud  value  2TU.  35. 
•^xplanailon  ol  thii»  form  271,  1.  (Jcii.  or 
nl>l.  of  vahn'  «lep.  on  dsfitmTrt  271.  3.  (Jen. 
of  liitrmnl  valin-  272.  Vi-rl»-*  takliiir  a  K^u. 
ol  iiittrniil  van»'  272  1.— (it-n.  |>1.  of  nount» 
of  ••(Tond  ih'cli'n^'ion.  ih-nutini;  dfnoniiiia- 
tlont»  »»f  nionoy.  formed  in  uin  117,  n.  2 ; 
QtW).  ft.--Kllii)!'i'*  of  tht;  iroveiiiiiij;  nonn  «)f 
nil  attr.  i,'en.  {,/orit  S/aforis,  i.e.  (ftn/Unm) 
II    »>.     For  in trihiitive  p'n.  nrv  I*.  I. 

genuam  iterrtmmi,  u»  utir.  of  hHutive  ad- 
v«-ib-  :a)1,  u.  22. 

ftBM,  w.  );'  riiiidiHl  «.'cn.  159,  3. 

gtrtBSj  w   <:<'ii.  117.  1()8. 

Oemnd  ami  Oerandive,  .iiLilyif»  1 11.  n.  ♦  :  l.'il, 
II.  1.  I).-iinU'  the  (111.  rent  v'nim.  lorm?» 
which  %erl»al  ««Ij».  in  dun  may  aM-iime  in 
th'-  franu'Wiirk  ol  the  Hentcnce.  They  oc- 
cur {ft)  ill  NoM.,  In  coiiiu'ctioii  w.  the  cop- 
ula (ptrilMat«-i:«-riiiidinl.x.  or  peri|)hra>tic 
pTinidialf ),  {f»  UH  rAitTK'UM-Ks  (uccet'.>*ory 
iin-dicatef).  the  participle  of  tlu;  copula 
Im-Iiii:  uiul«THtood  (oartiripial  priiudials). 
(r)  hj»  attriliut-  s  and  ol)je(;tH  in  the  form  of 
rever«»ed  phra.^cH  (ireriindial^.  in  the  nar- 
rower »«rn-e».  For  I'eriphrastic  and  Par- 
ticipial (teriindial!*,  net*  tlie  artichn  under 
tiiiu  heading.  F<»r  (Jerundials  in  the  uar- 
row«'r  sense,  Hce  the  article  below. 

Oenindi&ls  (in  reversed  phrancp)  .Analyd!»  l.'iO 
lull.  Are  eilher  okiunds  (expl.  lol,  TjIH  ; 
l.'il,  187) »)roKUl  NDIVE."*  12-V3.  522).  (Jerunds 
«re  impers.  pasg.  havlni;  acti  v»^  meaninii;, 
a»  every  otiur  im])ei«.  pas^. ;  their  excep- 
tional il!*»'  in  the  ineanini;  of  personal  pa>- 
pive»  1.')!,  187.  Are  used  either  witli<»iii,  ob- 
ject!* («rerunds  absoluie.  arg  n(ivifjanUi),  or 
take  intransitive  object»  152.  IBs.  Tlie 
jiram.  anomaly  of  transitive  objs.  dep.  on 
^leruiuls,  m  ule  a  re;,'ular  construction  in 
certain  connections  152,  51!».  (ierunds 
with  objs.  in  an  attracted  case  152,  .520. — 
The  dilVerent  ^'rani.  relations  in  which  ^e- 
rundiaU  may  or  may  nut  be  used  154,  H. 
31H.  Trace»  of  the  w^v.  of  frerundlajs  as 
8iibj8.  and  transitive  objs.  1,5<),  l!i8  foil. 

GEnUNl>IAI.  CiKNlTIVK,  157,  52fi  foil.  II!» 
form  1.57,  52ti.  W.  attracted  case,  how 
expl.  158,  204  and  205.  What  relations  are 
exi)r.  liy  ircriind.  };en.  1.5'.»,  2()«».  Eii^l.  preps, 
etc.  ase<iuival<-nts  159.  1.  — Dep. .as  iittr.  on 
nouns  15!»,  1-3;  as  obj.  of  adjs.  101,  207. 
t'annot  be  used  as  compleiiiif?  obj.  of 
veri)s  161.  207.  As  pred.  i;iniiive  w.  cop- 
ula Kil,  208. 

Gkkundial  dative.  163  foil.  Extremely 
peldtiin  (in  three  pissajres  only)  t.ikcs  the 
form  of  jj;<rund  w.  transitive  olij.  \M.  Dif- 
ferent objective  relations  in  which  it  oc- 
curs W\,  528.  As  compietiiif,'  obj.  163.  20*.» 
foil.  — Qerundial  dat.  of  purpose  l<i5,  211 
loll  Diff.  from  qerundial  alter  ad  189.  237. 
— Gerundial  pred.  dat.  168,212.  Dill",  from 
gerundial  pred.  gen.  168,  2. 


(iBi^rNniAL  ABi.ATivR,  169  foil.  It?  een- 
cral  force  169,  .529;  as  passive  apeiit  l«i9.213; 
as  accessory  pretl.  170,  214  :  w,  the  force  of 
abl.  ah»,  or  of  a  clause  170.  1  ;  ni«  com- 
n.irat.  abl.  170,2:  !«b  complelini;  obj.  170,3. 
Nei.'atively  us  adverbial  obj.  of  muiiuur,  = 
'without'  w.  participial  1^8.  1,  (■. 

(iEitrNi>iAi>  ArTKii  puKrosiTioNf».  Can- 
not take  the  forui  of  a  u'^'iiilul  w.  tiansiiivo 
«)bj.  188.  2.37.— .'i</  w.  Kerundi.ilH  189,  .5:i8. 
As  completinL;  obj.  of  verlis  deimtiiiir  aim 
UK),  2.3«».  1.  As  equivalent  of  Final  It-cl. 
I'M),  23'»,  2.  Dep.  on  aojs.  192,  240.  As 
atir.  191,  ons.  Dill",  from  pcrundial  dat. 
1^'.»,  237;  from  pirticipial  gerundive  ItK), 
2:W.  — 7/1  w.  gerundial  Acci  s.  19-3,  6:^9. 
F«)rce  of  this  construction  193,  241  foil. 
Dirt",  from  gerundial  after  ad  19.3,  212.— 
(jierundial  abi,.  after  in  194  loll.;  alter  f/6 
19.5.  :A\  ;  d*'  IW,  ,542  ;  ^.r  and  pro  197.  .541. 
— Uerundial  ace.  after  oO  196,  5J3  ;  alter  in- 
ter 1!>7,  544. 

gloriari,  w.  abl.  or  d*'  93.  429  ;  w.  reversed 
partici[)iMl  phrase  in  abl.  173,  1  ;  w.  (^uod- 
cl.  or  li.f.  cl.  .598.  9;  598,  n.  %. 

gloriosum  est  w.  t-ubj.  I't-cl.  610,  4. 

gnarus  w.  gen.  118,  109;  w.  gerundial  gen. 
161,  207. 

to  go.  '  Which  «roes  to  Bhow,'  how  rendered 
4.35,  2. — *  Goihi/  to  '  rendered  by  peripliras- 
tic  future  129.  .507. 

granted  (granting)  t/int,  rendered  by  pub- 
junc.  of  the  main  pred.  ;i84.  7;  by  fV-clj 
695,  8.  '(Jranted  for  argument's  sake,' 
hy  Jin  r/f  700,  16. 

gratia  in  abl,,  to  denote  purpose  283,  .566  ; 
283,  1.  W.  gen.,  as  synonym  of  projtfer 
24,  4ti.— dm fia-f  aqfre.  f/rii/iaf/i  ri-ferre. 
coiii-tr.  w.  (^uod-cl.  .598.  9;"  rarely  w.  Inf.  cl. 
.599.  \\.*—Giati(treftrtHdiXet^8e,  expl.  lt»8,l. 

gratificari,  w.  dat.  89. 

gratis  (f/rafiif<)  242,  on?. 

gratulari,  w.  dat.  8'.»;  w.  Quod-cl.  598,  9 
(i.ot  w.  Quuiu-cl.  .598,  n.  i\. 

gratns,  w.  dat.  lis,  112.  Gratum  est  w. 
l^uod-cl.  610,  4;  w.  Ut-cl.  612,  6. 

Habere,  as  factitive  verb  w.  double  ace.  102, 
C. ;  more  fre(iuently  in  pass.  w.  double 
nom.  102,  oBs.  C'onstr.  w.  pro.  or  in  uu- 
tnero  102,  7.5.  As  vi'rb  of  esteeniintr,  w. 
obj.  of  inner  value  272.  1.  W.  perf.  part, 
as  accessory  pred.,  being  the  oriirin  ol  the 
auxiliary  Mo  have'  in  modern  langnages 
2.54.  3.  C^onstr.  w.  a  rel.  cl.  in  subjuiic. 
(kal)€0  quod  dicam)^  w.  obj.  inf..  w.  ge- 
rundial. and  w.  interrogative  cl.  557,  2. 

kabilis  and  inhabilis,  w!  dat.  118,  112;  w. 
t.'eruiidial  alter  ad  192,  1. 

habitare,  m.i y  take  an  obj.  of  ])ricc  267,  32,  2. 

Habitual  actions,  how  expr.  343,  71. 

hac,  fourth  locative  case  216.  Ilact^nus 
ci-mpound  adv.  of  4th  loc.  case  217,  8; 
222.  9.     llitr  hactf-n'is.  .520,  n.  1.3. 

had  it  not  been  for,  how  rendered  718,  3. 

half,  how  expr.  116,  105.  One  half  as 
much,  or  letis,  how  expr.  752,  2. 


INDEX. 


789 


it  happens  that,  expr.  by  different  imper- 
sonals  613,  A  ;  diff.  between  these  619,  9. 

baud  {noil)  secus,  synd.  ant.  of  compar.  cl. 
of  qua  iiy  745,  3.  What  conj;^.  are  used 
after  it.  lb. 

he  who,  how  rendered  500,  2;  514,  1. 

help.  '  /  cannot  help'  w.  participial  =  fa- 
cere  non  pofsuni  qi/in;  or  non,  2>ostium 
qiiin  ;  or  uon  jHissitin  non  t»05,  7. 

hie,  demon str.  adj.  (see  P.  I.) ;  as  synd.  ant. 
of  rel.  and  modal  cl.  of  quality  43o,  2. 
Jflc.  adv.  in  ffrst  locative  case  217,  4;  as 
tcmponil  adv.  =  turn  22:3.  3. 

hiding,  verbs  of,  w.  ace.  after  in  .38,  67, 

hinc,  demonstr.  adv.  in  second  locative 
case  217,  4 ;  as  temporal  adv.  =  demde 
222.  9. 

Historical  present,  pce  Preaent.  Historical 
jNFiNiTivE,  see  Inflnilive.  Historical im- 
rEKFECT,  st^e  Imperfect.  Histok.  sub.iunc- 
TivE,  see  Suhjunctice  in  conditional  cl. 

honestus,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  5 ;  w. 
11.  Sup.  121,  121.  Uonestum  est^  w.  bubj. 
Inf.  cl.  610, 3.  ,       ,        ;,    V   -1  ^ 

hora  (hour),  how  calculated,  and  divided 
by  tiie  Latins  226,  1. 

homo,  temp.  adv.  =  hoc  anno  22o,  11. 

horsum,  compound  locative  adv.  217,  8. 
hortari,  w.  ace.  after  ad  or  in  41,  n.  2.    W. 
imi)erative  cl.  595,  4;  rarely  w.  obj.  inf.  lb. 
how,  different  ways  of  rendering  240,  2. 
however,  rendered  by  quamguanim^,  12;  t>y 
niH  or  nisi  tanun  739,  2.    (By  autem,  etc. ; 
p^.^.  i>    I.)  —However  much,  by  quamvi.'< 
(not  quamcxnque)  500.  5:  501,  9;  693,^1 
loll.   Howerer  w.  an  adj.,  by  quamrts  W6, 
4  •  however  tittle  =  quaniriit  non  694,  B. 
hue  adv.  of  place  in  3d  locative  case  317, 
oBs.   4.      Ifiicusque,    compound    locative 
adv.  217,  8 ;  poetclassically  as  temporal 

adv.  222, 9.  ,         ,      v- 

humus,  as  locative  object,  takes   locative 

cases,  like  names  of  cities  47,  81. 
hundred-weight,  how  expr.  275,  1. 
Hypothetical  comparison,  in  regard  to  comp. 
cl.   introduced  by  r/z/a-fi.  ac  ki,  qvam  «, 
etc.  74:}.  3  loll.     Subjunc.  in  the  cl.,  sub- 
ject to  law  of  consecution  748,  5. 

Ibi,  adv.  of  place,  in  1st  locative  case  216; 
as  temporal  adv.  222.  n.  t. 

icciroo,  causal  adv.  280.  40.    Syndet.  ant  of 
Ouod  and  Quia-cl.  68-3,  3;  of  linal  cl.  4:i.5.  2; 
of  causal  Si-cl.  716.  3  foil.    Use  of  iccirco 
if  not  sviid.  ant.  of  clauses  282.  8. 

idauod,  jntroducing  i)arenthetical  rel.  cl., 
rendered  by  '  which '  after  a  uoua  in  appo- 
sition 517.  4.  .,     ,         -n    t  \ 

idem  determinative  form-adj.  (see  P.  L|, 
as  synd.  ant.  of  comp.  cl.  of  quality,  fol- 
lowed by  q>ii,  ac,  utque,  ut,  etc.  744.  1. 
Used  as  access,  pr.-d.  in  the  meaning 
'  likewise  '  251,  9.    Diff.  from  et  ip>se.  lb. 

identidem,  temp.  adv.  222,  9. 

ideo  therefore,  causal  adv.  280,  5  and  <. 
Diff  Irom  the  causal  conjs.  ergo,  if/ifiir, 
itaq'ue  281,  6.    Adv.  of  purpose  283,  566 ; 


284,  3.  Synd.  ant.  of  Quod-cl.  683,  3. 
Meaning  of  ideo  if  used  without  a  causal 
cl.  282,  8. 

idoneus,  w.  dat.  118,  112 ;  w.  gerundial  after 
ad  ;  w.  a  rel.  cl.  in  subjunc.  557,  3. 

Idas,  meaning  and  gram,  use  227,  1. 

if,  regular  Engl,  equivalent  of.v.-i  488.  B; 
rendered  by  quuni  645,  34.  If  not  =  nl4, 
ni,  or  si  non  (see  these  conjs.).  '  If  I  am 
not  mistaken''  =  nid  nie  fallit,  nisi  fallor 
(not  nisi  erro.  nor  si  non  fallor.  etc.)  742. 2. 
'  If  you  please '  =  si  placet,  si  tidetur,  sis, 
sodea  (anted,  and  poet)  742,  11.—'  If  but,  if 
indeed'  =  si  qiiidem  688,  14.  '  If  but  = 
if  only,  provided  that.'  by  dum  or  d'/mmo- 
do  \v.  subjunc,  si  modo,  etc.  676, 13;  677, 14. 

ignarus,  w.  gen.  lis,  109.  W.  gerundial  gen. 
161,  207.  Te  ignaro,  without  your  knowl- 
edge 1&4, 1. 

i^orare  (non)  w.  Quin-cl.  589,  4. 

ignoscere,  w.  dat.  88;  different  constructions 
88,  n.  5.  W.  Quod-cl.  598,  9;  w.  Si-cl.  598, 
n.  t- 

ille,  demonstr.  form-adj.  (see  P.  I.)  Synd. 
ant.  of  clauses  of  quality  435,  2. -Ule  ego 

illico,  adv.  of  time.  expl.  22.5, 11.  In  a  nega- 
tive thesis  of  conditional  periods,  emphat- 
ically used  inst.  of  iccirco  717,  3. 

illudere,  w.'dat.  or  ace.  91,  475. 

immemor,  w.  gen.  118,  109. 

imminens,  w.  diit,  118,  108. 

immolare,w.  abl.  or  ace.  of  the  victim  9o,  62. 

immunem  esse,  w,  ab  or  mere  abl.  29,  48, 

impedimentum,  w.  attr.  Quominus-cl.  625,  D. 
hnp'-dimento  est.  w.  subj.  Quod-cl.  615, 11. 

impedire,  constr.  w.  trans,  ace.  along  w.  obj. 
inf.  104.  83;  603,  n.  11  ;  w.  trans,  ace.  along 
w.  neuter  lonn-adj.  So,  39,  2.  As  verb  ot 
negative  doing  w.  Quominus-cl.  602,  5. 
Non  impedire  w.  quin,  an  anomalous  con- 
struction mi,  n.  t.  W.  ne  603,  u.  U.  W\ 
gerundial  after  ad.  lb. 

impellere,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  190,  239, 1  ; 
w.  That-cl.,  see  movere. 

imperare,  w.  dat.  88.  Other  constructions 
8S,  n.  1.  Imperare  alicui  aliqind,  of  mili- 
tary requisitions  98,  69.  Personal  con- 
struction of  the  pass,  imperor  w.  obj.  mf. 
105,  85.  Constr.  w.  imperative  clauses 
596,  6  ;  their  different  forms,  and  connec- 
tions w.  the  dat.  of  the  personal  obj.  lb. 
SUA  non  imperare  (not  to  restrain  one's 
self)  constr.  w.  Quin-cl.  603,  .5. 

Imperative  clauses,  a  main  division  of  depen- 
dent sentences  480.  610.  Gram,  form  :i89, 
8:i  Dep.  on  ordinary  verbs  of  saying 
:i89,  2.  Different  classtis  of  imperative 
clauses  according  to  the  nature  of  the  lead- 
ino-  imperative  idea  595,  2.  Form  of  im- 
peTative  cl.  dep.  on  verbs  of  negative  com- 
mand 597,  7 ;  on  verbs  of  permission  597, 
8  Governing  verb  of  couimand  under- 
stood 390,  3.  Imperative  cl.  in  form  of 
Inf.  cl.  w.  gerundial  pred.  594,  1. 
Imperative  mood  (see  P.  I).  The  II.  Impern- 
live,  denoting  laws  and  rules  351,  A.    Its 


790 


INDEX. 


equivalents.  lb.  Used  for  didactic  rules 
;i-jL  B. 

Imperative  mood  (En2;l.)  expr.  by  Latin  fut. 
ttiist's  35().  1  ;  by  Lat.  siibjiinc.  ;ts::>  ft»ll. 

Imperative  (independcui)  sentences  (.see  P.  I). 
\\  tRMi  llieir  pred.  is  placed  in  Mihjuuc. 
aSl  loll.  Ut^ed  \v.  force  of  Si-cl.  355,  G;  T.'Jfi, 
7.  \\  itb  concessive  force  :i84,  7.  Form 
of  iiiipt-rative  seat,  in  obi.  ditJcourse,  see 
Oblhpie  <iUc<>in  se. 

Imperfect  Indicative,  305  foil.  Two  general 
n'qiurt'nu'nts,  ^a)  incomim.ktkness  of  ac- 
tion ;3()."),  312;  (b)  peculiar  conccpti«)n  in 
ref^'ard  to  timk  of  action  313  foil.— Accord- 
ing to  the  various  relations  of  '  inconi- 
l)lefeneps  '  the  imp.  is  either  imperfect  of 
bTATK  (:W6,  .50),  imp.  of  contimkd  (pro- 
gret^sive)  action  (:iU7,  51),  or  of  uki'Kated 
ACTION  (311,  3):  alfO  imp.  of  unsuccess- 
ful ATTEMPT,  and  of  directly  iMrENi>ft<o 
ACTU»N  (:Wy,  .53).  Incompleteness  of  act, 
pregnantly  implied  {(juare  prqticiscebatur? 
=  quid  EUAT  caut^a  cur  jir()fidsct?e(ur)  308, 
52.— Necessity  «)l  determining  the  stand- 
point of  TIMK  in  the  u.se  of  imp.  313.  5T(), 
OBs.  The  lime  of  the  action  either  con- 
ceived as  time-point  (315,  377).  oras  period 
of  time  (3ir.  foil.),  both  of  which  may  be 
designated  by  adverbs  of  time  (313,  55).  or 
by  temporal  clauses  (:jJO,  »1U>,  or  by  impli- 
cation (314.  5»»).  Use  of  pelf,  or  imp.  ac- 
cording to  the  difterent  combinations  and 
relations  »)f  these  elements  (313,  577.  oBs.  ; 
81 4,  1  and  2 ;  317,  3  and  4  ;  318,  58  ;  320.  t,0 ; 
322,  ()1  :  323,  «i2  ;  325,  oiss.  2).  — Particular 
classes  of  imperfecis,  which  must  be  con- 
sidered as   typical   forms  :  Imptrleet  of 

CONTINOKNT  ACTION  328  foil.  ;  DEsCUiniNO 
IMI'EKKKCT    332   loll.  ;     HISfOUICAL   IMl'Ett- 

FECT  3*1  loll.  ;  imperf.  of  inneu  action 
33b  foil.,  which  is  subdivided  into  imp.  of 

REFEKENCE    539     hill.,    imp.    of    DEBATES 

3U),  ot  habit  312.— Imp.  w.  anfea,  inst.  of 
plup.  31H,  n.  11.  Imp.  w.  force  t)f  Engl, 
phip.  when  an  action  was  still  lasting  at 
the  time  spoken  of  310.  5'.>.  — Imp.  in  princ. 
tent,  determining  the  time  of  another  ac- 
tion, 32.5,  OBS.— Idiomatic  use  of  the  imp. 
of  audlre  (325,  1),  and  dictre  (3H,  3).— 
I'erf.  or  imp.  of  t^olere  343,  72;  w.  sape 
32«),  3,  4  ;  w.  semper  32«,  3 ;  w.  qitotidie 
320,  5;  w.  etianUum  31»),  1.— Lat.  imp. 
rendered  into  Engl.  1)  by  progressive  form 
of  preterite  ;S07,  t)BS. ;  311,  3  ;  2)  by  com- 
mon form  of  pret.  ;i(t7,  1  ;  320  loll. ;  3:17 
foil.;  340  foil.;  344,  72;  .3)  by  'used  to,' 
'was  wont  to '  344.  72  foil. ;  4)  by  pluperf. 
310,  50;  340,  4  ;  5)  by  pivsent-perf.  319,  5; 
357,/.  ;  »i)  l)v  present  or  future  in  episto- 
lary imp.  .3.^7  toll. ;  358,  5 ;  7)  by  '  about  to,' 
'goini!  to  '  3.57,  //. 

ImPEUF.  of   I'ERIPHRASTIC  FUTITUB,  860 

Ptrijihr.  /w^— Imp.  of  periphrastic  ok- 
itUNDiALS  145,  514.— Imp.  as  epistolauy 
tense,  vv.  force  of  pres.  or  Int.  357  foil.  ; 
3.")8,  5.— Imp.  in  TEMeoKAi.  Quum-d.  320, 
60;  in  Quum-cl.  denoting  identity  of  ac- 


tion 339,  69  ;  in  Postquam-claufses  C62.  5 
foil.;  in  Antequam-cl.  «.(iO.  6;  after  c/wm, 
while  (exceptionally)  072,  4;  073,  5,  1  ;  alter 
donee, ii^  lonu'as,  tiyl,24;  in  Si-cl.  of  doubt- 
ful reality  703,  A  foil.— Imp.  ind.  of  poten- 
tial verbs  {poteiam,  oporlebat  etc.)  in  a 
hypothetical  sense  w.  force  of  plup.  sub- 
iunc.  728,  20;  w.  force  of  imp.  subjunc. 
72S  n.  *.  Imp.  ind.  ol  ordinary  veibs  in 
hypothetical  sense  130. 

Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  declarative  indej). 
sentences,  not  belonging  to  liypothetical 
periods  379.  4  ;  in  interrogative  seiitences 
and  w.  force  of  pol«ntial  future  381,  2:  in 
optative  sentences  38^1,  0.  For  imp.  subj. 
in  thesis  and  hypothesis  of  conditional 
l)eriods  of  non-reality,  see  SuhjuitctiVK  in 
conditional  (hypothetical)  ])enods.—\my>. 
subjunct.  independent  clau^es,  as  regular 
tense  of  preterite  consecution  for  con- 
temporaneous action  414,  «)0.3.  ITsed  as 
logical  tense,  dep.  on  noii-preieriie  pred. 
445,  0;  440,  7.— In  cond.  clauses  of  doubt- 
ful reality  1)  according  to  law  of  consecu- 
tion 713,  1!>;  2)  as  bi^torlcal  cond.  sub- 
junc. 713,  20  foil. :  714,  20,  .1  ;  3)  in  cond. 
cl.  of  virtual  non-reality  715.  C — Imp. 
subj.  in  periods  of  contingent  action  .i:*), 
f).  In  Qiium-d.  with  force  of  Engl.  plup. 
319,  2  (for  imp.  subjunc.  in  other  Quum- 
cl.,  see  these).  In  Anteqiiam  and  Priii.s- 
quam-cl.  009,  Oand7;  070,  8.  In  Donec-cl. 
(since  Livy)  r.80,  "iA.  In  Dum-cl.,  and 
Quoad  cl.  (rt)  dam  =  while,  denoting  the 
motive  of  the  doer  07.3,  4;  {b)  t/'/m,  and 
quoad,  =.  as  long  as  (i70.  12;  (c)durn  and 
du/nmodo  —  provided  that  077,  13.— In 
Mod.l  Ul-cl.  4.35,  3;  430,5. 

Impersonals.  Impersonal  verbs,  their  enu- 
meialioM  and  con-irnction  015  foil.  Im- 
pers.  \v  subj.  inf.  107  494.  Case  of  logi- 
cal subj.  of  impersonals  107,  90.  Impers. 
predicates  in  inf.  108.  92 and  93.— Impers. 
PARTICIPLES  alter  preposiiions  1!«8,  219; 
19'.),  3.  -  I  mpeksonal  passives,  their  mean- 
ing and  use  71  toll.  Impers.  pass,  as  peri- 
phrastic geruudials  142,  513,  as  ubl.  abs. 
180,  5.30  ;  187,  2. 
impertire,  either  w.  ace.  of  thing  and  dat. 
«if  pers.,  or  ace.  of  jjcrs.  and  abl.  of  thing 
OS,  4^:i.— Imperil  re  {labOrem  etc.)  w.  ge- 
ruudial  dat.  1«>3,  209. 

impetrare,  ob/inere,  (entre,  asicqui,  consequi, 
adijH!ici,  as  verbs  of  achievinjj,  consir. 
with  nt  or  ne  001,  3. 
implorare,  w.  imper.itivc  cl.  505,  3. 
imponere,  w.  ace.  after  in  38,  n.  2. 
impoi   w.  iren.  118.  lbl>. 
impoteiis,  w.  gen.  118,  109  ;  w.  gerundial  gen. 
ir,i,  207. 
impulsus,  w.  abl.,  as  circumlpcuiion  of  mo- 
tive 119,  113. 
in,  prep.  w.  ace,  37  foil.    Diff.  from  in  w. 

I    abl.  "u,  00.     //'  w.  ace.  =  on  (to),  against, 
for,  :18,  (ks.    Dilf.  from  ad  in  local  relations 

'    38,  09.     ///  w.  ace.  before  countries  38,  09  : 

:    left  out  before  cities  40  foil.  ;  vvUea  rc- 


INDEX. 


791 


tallied  48,  8:?  foil.— In  figurative  relations 
39,  451.     Dilf.  from  ad  denoting  purpose 

41,  71  ;  from  erqa,  adrermtf).  contra  38,  08  ; 
41,71.  Hanc  in  modum.  mirum  in  modum 
expl.  41,  7'2.  Marfnarn  in  partem  \h.—Jn 
w.  ace.  of  gerundial  193,  .5.39.— In  relations 
of  time  42,4.52;  to  denote  length  of  fut. 
periods  2:18,  0.  In  the  relation  of  manner 
244.  5,— Dep.  on  spectdre  and  vergere  (to 
lace)  221,  \i.—Jiirdre  in  verfni  105,  n.  7.— 
Peccdre  in  aliquem  or  in.  aliquo  199,  n.  1. 

In  w.  abl.  42.  453  foil.  In  local  relations, 
—  on,  at.  in  42,  74.—  Corresponding  to 
Engl,  'in'  in  figurative  relations  43,  74. 
In  =  with  43,  74  :  =  among  43,  75 ;  =  '  in 
the  country  of '  43,  70.  When  in  is  left 
out  44.  77  ;  omitted  before  names  of  cities 
40  foil.  ;  when  retained  48,  84.  In  w. 
gerundial  abl.  l'.)4,  540;  w.  jiarticipial  re- 
versed phrase  IJW,  0.  — In  temporal  rela- 
tions 44.  78  ;  =  during  45,  78  ;  when  omit- 
ted 45,  78.— /ft  w.  (^uod-cl.  (iu  eoquod)  »107, 
2.  /ft  eo  «i^<  M^  (impersonally)  487,  6.  Verbs 
compounded  w.  in,  lake  dat.  or  ia  w.  ace. 
or  abl.  90,  45. 

In.  Engl.  prep.     Rendered  bv  Lat.  in  w.  abl. 

42,  74  ;  43.  74.  Before  names  of  cities  40, 
455.  In  relation  of  time  228  ;  of  manner 
243.  /ft  expr.  by  pres.  abl.  abs.  182,  229.— /ft 
with  participials  expr.  by  gerundial  geni- 
tive 154,  1.— '/ft  order  to''  expr.  by  ltd. 
435,  2  ;  by  (^ui-cl.  557,  0  ;  by  verbal  adj.  in 
ilrusWiS),  i'>8.—' In  accordance  ivith,'  'in 
keeping  icith, '  519,  /?.— '  /ft  the  event  that ' 
714,  '20,  A. 

inauditum  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  009,  2, 

inaugurato,  expl.  1S9.  a. 

Incautus,  \v.  gerundial  after  «^  192.  5. 

Incertum  est,  w.  interrog.  cl.  aJK),  a. 

incidit,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  019,  3.   Ditl".  from  ac- 

ridit.  lb. 

incitare,  w.  That-ol..  see  movers. 
inclinare,  w.  irernndial  after  ad  190,  239,  1. 
incolumi  exercitu,  184,  1. 
Incorporation  of  antecedent  in  relative  cl. 

.5ii(i.  h. 
incredibilis,  w.  II.  sup.  121,  121.    IncredibUe 

est  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  009,  2. 
increpare,  w.  Qiiod-cl.,  i^vf  reprehendere. 
incumbere,  w.  gerundial  alter  ad  190,  '239,  1. 
incusare,  w.  Thiit-c\.,  nee  accumre. 
inde,  locative  adv.  210;   temporal  adv.  222, 

9  ;  2'2:i.  3;  as  synd.  ant.  of  quod  causal  OS:i, 

S.—Inde  ab  {jam  inde  ab),  ever  since  30, 

442. 
Indefinite  relative  adjectives:  formation  496.  4; 

4I)S.  1  :  meaning  4'.t7.  7.  Ditf.  from  ordinary 

relatives  498.  8.     Used  without  irram.  ant. 

49S.  2.  Difli*.  ill  the  use  of  the  doubled  forms, 

and  the  compounds  w.  cunqne  499,  9. 
Indefinite  relative  adverbs ;  formation  501,10. 

In  locative  clauses  .575,  1. 
Indefinite  relative  clauses.    Their  relation  to 

conditional  and  concessive  clauses  498.  2  ; 

50-2,  11.    Mood  of  their  pred.  499,  2.  When 

tbev  takesubjunc.  .5(V1,  12.  Analysis.50'2. 1<». 
Indicative  in  causal  cl.  082,  02:1 ;  w.  quamvis 


694,  5  ;  w.  qnamquam  696,  9.    See  the  sin- 
gle clauses. 

Indicative   in   hypothetical    periods   726  foil. 

When  the  clause  may  take  an  ind.  720,  2-3. 

ind.  of  tlie  thesis  720,  2:i-'28.    Force  of  hy- 
pothetical perf.  ind.  of  potential  verbs  727, 

'25;   of  their  imp.  ind.  728. '20.     in    what 

in^tances  ordinary  verbs  take  a  hypoth. 
ind.  7.30. 

indigere,  w.  gen.  92,  478  ;  w.  abl.  93,  54  ;  9.3, 
479. 

indignus,  w.  abl.  (Ca^s.  B.  G.  5,  35  ;  7, 17  ; 
Cic.  Vat.  10,  39);  constr.  w.  rel.  cl.  in 
subjunc.  5.57,  3. — Indiqnvm  efse  w,  Subj. 
Quod-cl.  610,  4  ;  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  lb. 

inducere,  w.  ace.  after  in  ;18.  07. 

inductus,  w.  abl.  as  circumlocution  of  mo- 
tive 119.  115. 

induere,  aliquem  aliqud  re,  or  aliquid  alicui 
98.  4S3. 

indulgere  w.  dat.  89. 

inesse,  w.  dat.  In  Cic.  w.  abl.  after  in  89,  n.  3. 

ineunte  aetatc,  182,  229. 

inferring,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ex  29,  48. 

Infinitive  rarely  made  dep.  on  adjs.  121,  .502. 
As  impers.  pred.  lOS,  92.  Free  use  of  Inf. 
w.  force  of  ordinary  nouns  108,  495.  See 
Object-infinitive,  and  iSubjecl-infinitive,— 
Historical  Infinitive,  as  equivalent  of 
imp.  of  repeated  or  internal  action  31*2.  2. 
Always  refers  to  jmsons  as  subjs.  31-2,  2. 
Connections  in  which  it  occurs  312,  3.  In 
appositive  Quum-cl.  003.  16.— Inf.  pres.  of 
periphrastic  fut.  134,  508  ;  o:il,  6.  Inf. 
perf.  of  the  same  235,  151  ;  6.33. 

Infinitive  (Enirlish).  Rendered  by  interrog- 
ative cl.  {quid  dicam  nescio)  39<),  e  ;  by  rel. 
cl.  .5.56,  1  and  2  ;  .557,  3  and  5  ;  5.58  foil.;  by 
That-cl.  of  various  descriptions  139,  11; 
.595  ;  590,  6  :  637.  .37.  Engl.  obj.  inf  by  Lat. 
pass.  inf.  cl.  630,  3.  See  Object-inJ\,  and 
Subject-in  f. 

Infinitive  clauses,  as  oblique  clauses  387.  598. 
UBJ.  Inf.  cl.  dep.  on  verba  sentiendi  588 
(exceptions  588,  '23);  on  verbs  of  emotion 
590,  5;  exclamatory  591,  6;  481.  obs.;  on 
verbs  of  volition  592,  obs.  7.  1  foil.  ;  on 
verbs  of  hopinir  etc.  .593,  11.— Dep.  on 
verba  declarandi  594,  24  ;  on  verbs  denot- 
intr  the  manitestation  of  emotions,  and  of 
praisini;  etc.  592,  9.  n.  J.—  Subject  Inf. 
CL.  or  Ut-cl.  as  subj.  of  passive  pred.  008, 
•27  foil.:  as  subj.  of  predicate-adjs.  609.2 
foil.;  of  adj.  w.  II.  sup.  122,  124;  of  pred. 
nouns  013,  1 ;  of  impers.  verbs  015,  2s  foil. 
—Attribute  Inf.  cl.  6'24,  A,  foil.— Inf. 
cl.  introduced  by  qvippe  689.  n.  t ;  after 
nam  and  enim  lb.—  Tenses  of  the  Predi- 
cate-I\f.  030.  4  loll.  Dift".  in  the  use  of 
ordinary  inf..  and  periphrastic  fut.  inf. 
r)31,  6.  Treatment  of  conditional  periods 
if  the  thesis  (apodosi'^)  must  assume  the 
form  of  an  inf.  cl.  631,  7  foil.— Inf.  cl.  ia 
form  of  nom.  w.  inf.  see  this  article. 

infra,  prep.  w.  ace.  24,  4.38. 

ingredi,  in  perf.  part,  as  pred.  abl.  172,  3. 

iniijuum  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  (not  ut)  611,  5. 


792 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


793 


injucundas,  w.  II.  Snp.  121,  121. 
injuria  i/i  (not  contra)  atiquern  41,  72.     In- 
Juii'i,  unjustly,  2-t4.  3. 
injuriosum  est,  w.  Siibj.  Inf.  cl.  610,  3. 
injussu,   \\  itluti/.  onU-r,  ohj.  of  coiiicident 

actioii  242,  v^BS.     Jiijusgu  fneo  etc.,   e-xpl. 

W.K  C.      / 
inopg,  \v.  oen.  118,  inO. 
inquam,  /fiow    used    in    quotations  3Sfi,    1. 

\\hvi\.(U(-(^?'e  is  u?-od  iiii^t.  of  inquam  II). 
insciu»  \v.  yen.  IIH.  101*.  'Vie  i//.srio  184,  1. 
inscrilere,  as  factitive  verb,  w.  double  ace. 

\{K.\\. 
'ikacfvire.w.  dat.  89. 
insidere,  w.  dat.  or  ace.  281,  n.  10. 
insimulare,   w.   ace.   of  pers.  and  jrcn.  of 

cliar-'e  iH>.  484.     Generally  \v.  Inf.  cl.  rarely 

w.    Qiiod-d.    508,   9;   598,    n.    +;    101,   83. 

Doubtful,  wbether  inf.,  dep.  on  indinulare 

is()l)j.  inf.  or  pred.  inf.  104,  n.  2. 
instabilis,  w.  irerundiul  after  ad  192,  5. 
instare,  w.  Imperative  cl.  or  luf.  cl.  accord- 
ing to  its  ineaniiii?  595.  3. 
instituere,  as  factitive  verb,  w.  double  ace, 

101.  A. 

instruere,  aliquem  (aliqtfid)  nliqvd  re  09, 485. 
insuetus.  w.{,'eu.  118,  109;  w.  gerundial  gen. 

i«il.  207.  _,    . 

integer,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  105,  5.     He  in- 

tetirCi  1S4.  1.    Iiitegrwn  est,  \v.  Subj.   Inf. 

or  Suhj.  LIt-cl.  (WO,  2. 

intelligere,  with  Inf  cl.  588,  23. 

Intensity,    adverbial  relrtti«»n,  200  foil.     Its 

dilVerent  gram,  fonus  200,  5«8  foil.  Clauses 

of  intens.  0-'}5,  32,  1. 

intentus,  w.  dat.  118, 112;  w.  gerundial  dat. 
104.  1  :  w.  gerundial  after  flf^/  192.  4. 

inter  prep.  w.  ace.  18  foil.  Ditt'.  from  apvd 
10,  25  ;  from;>«/'  21,  :«.     As  exponetit  of 

the  reciprocal  relation  19,  28.    Inter  Uilca- 

rios  19,  25.  Inter  tncariofi  20,  29.  Kefer- 
riiiir  to  the  endpoints  of  distances  220,  4. 
— \V.  participial  reversed  phrase  109,  0.— 
W.  gerundial  ace.  107,  248.  Verbs  com- 
pounded \v.  inter  often  take  dat.  90,  45. 

intercalate,  in  retrard  to  leap-years  227.  n.  t. 

intercedere.  w.  dat.  of  pers.  along  w.  Q,uoim- 
nns-cl.  002,  n.  §. 

intercludere,  either  w.  arc.  of  thing  and  dat. 
of  pers.,  or  ace.  of  pers.  and  abl.  ol  thing 
98,  4S;i.— W.  That-el..  see  obstare. 

interciperc,  w.  ace.  of  thing  and  dat,  of  pers. 
07.  08. 

interdicere,  w.  dat.  of  pors.  and  abl.  of  thing 
yO,  li.3.  As  verb  of  negative  command, 
coiistr.  w.  imperative  cl.  597,  7. 

interdiu,  temporal  adv.  225   11. 

interdum,  temporal  adv.  224,  10. 

inte-ea,  adv.  expl.  217,  8. 

interes8e,\v.  dat.,  ^ecadease.  Interest  (impers. 
verb)  and  rHert,  how  constr.  213  foil. 
Form  of  their  Subj.  cl.  021,  4.  The  degree 
of  interest  w.  these  verbs  274,  4  :  by  p/ws- 
or  rnagix  75<).  C.  n.  2.  Interested  person 
274,  5.  The  thing  concerned  275,  0.  Inter- 
eat  in  the  ind.  of  a  preterite  tense,  used 
hypothetically  727,  24  foil. 


intermisso  tempore,  after  some  time  180,  OBS. 
interrogare,  w.  donl)le  ace.  100,  4sO. 
Interrogative  Particles  (s.e  P.  I).     Instance?, 
in  which  they  are  left  «)Ut  3.")1,  B.  ^ 

Interrogative  clauses,  one  of  the  main  divi- 
si4)ns   of    dependent    sentences  480,    010. 
Delinition,  grammatical  form,  and  mood 
(sul)june.)  300,  .s5  lull.  Improper  interroga- 
tive cl.  390,  85,  1.     (JoveriM  (I  by  verba  sen- 
tiendi  and  dicendi  390,  b.  W.  force  ol  neg- 
ative assertion  391,  c.      Governing    verb 
understood  391,  2.     Parenthetically   used 
lb.  — Interrogative  Subject-clauses  391,3; 
int.  attrib.  cl.  391,  4.    Diff.  of  relative-in- 
terrogative cl.  from  ordinary  rel.  cl.  391, 
5.    When   Engl.  rel.  el.   must  or  may  be 
expr.  bv  Lat.   interroiiative  cl.  (qnid  not 
quod)  392  loll.;  «»5,   8.-  Expr.  by  Engl, 
nouns  395, 8.  Ik  Interrog.  cl.w.  their  pred.  in 
indicative  391  foil.- Invoh'tion  ol  mterr. 
cl.  396,  c;  in  the  form  of  abl.  abs.  173,  3. 
EcTUESis  390.  d.     Different  ways  of  ren- 
dering interrog.  cl.  referrimr  to  the  luture 
396,  e.     When  they  take  periphrastic  tens- 
es 449,  4.     Interrog.  locative  clauses    570, 
4.    Interroi:.  comparative  cl.  707,  17.    Col- 
location of  interrog.  clauses  478,  4. 
Interrogative  (independent)  sentences,  sec  P.  I. 
intra,  prep.  w.  ace,  use  24,  438.     Denoting 
performance  at  or  before  the  end  t)f  a  pe- 
riod (or  =:  '  no  loniriT  than ')  2:30,  0.    Used 
—  jxtst  and  abkinc  lb. 
introducere,  constr.  w.  ace.  after  in  38,  67. 
intus,  adv.  w.  abl.  114,  •)8. 
inutilis,  w.  gerund,  after  ad  192,  1. 
inventus  (repertus)  est  qui,   expl.  551,  4,  5  ; 
always  w.  sul)june.  552,  5. 
Inversion  of  rel.  cl.  506.  a.   Invers.  when  the 
clause  is  introduced  by  an  abs.  rel.  513,  4. 
invicem,  w.  recii)rocal  meaning  20,  20. 
invidere  w.  dat.  89.  . 

invidia  in  (not  contra)  aliqvem  41,  .2. 
invidiosum  est  w.  Subj.  quod-cl.  610,  4. 
invita  Minerva  184.  1.  .  „     -nr 

invitare.  w.  ace.  after  ad  or  m  41,  n.  3.    W. 
gerundial  after  ad  190,  239,  1 ;  w.  impera- 
tive cl.  595,  3. 
inviting.  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ad  41.  .0 
Involution  of  interrogative  clauses   (dutbanj, 
quid  p<-fejite!i  rtnU^tnt  etc.)  39<J,  V ;  in  the 
form  of  abl.  abs.  173,  3. 
InvoluUon  of  relative  clauses.    Dofinitioii  5.34, 
13     Its  gram,  nature,  and  inadmissibility 
in   En<:l.  5;M,  1:  5:«.  n.  *  and  n.  **.    The 
different  classes  of  clauses  in  which  a  rela- 
tive may  be  involved  .535.    HenderinL'  of 
involved  relative  cl.  (devolution)  53.),  2 
fo  1 1 .     1 )  D  i  rect  de vol  ii  I  i  on  .536,  4  ;  2 )  d  e y  o- 
lution  by  reversal  .530,5;  3)  by  contraction 
.5:37,  6:    4)  by  c«>r)i di nation  .^:i8,  7.     Cios<- 
inv'olution  and  its  devolution  .5.39,  14  loll. 
Involution  of  rel.  in  abl.  abs.  173,  3. 
ipse  (determ.  adj. ;  see  P.  1).    Placed  in  the 
nom.  as  adjunct  of  abl.  abs.  176,  1 ;  or  as 
adjunct  of  gerundial  abl.  170,  2.    Lse  in 
oratio  obliqua  7»i8,  3;  709,  4. 
ira,  w.  attr.  (iuoa-cl.  625,  B,  3. 


irasci.  w.  dat.  89;  w,  Subj.  Quod-cl.  ;  more 
rarely  w.  Inf.  d.  590. 

ire,  w.  double  dat.  90,  05;  w.  first  snp.  137, 
158,  n. :  in  the  i)ass.  inf.  (iri)  w.  first  sup. 
as  circumlocution  of  inf.  fut.  pass.  1.37, 158. 

is.  ea,  id  (i)ers.  ])ron.  and  determ.  adj.,  see 
P.  1).  As  predictte-adj.  w.  Ut-cl.  502,  C. 
Use  in  oratio  obliqua  700,  5.  As  synd.  ant. 
of  clauses  of  quality  435.  2. --/•?  qui;  dil- 
ferent  renderings  and  simiifieations  515,4; 
.501.  A  :  .501,  n.*  and  n.  t;  .508,  n.  X-  1^  Q^'i 
parentheticallv,inst.  of .?'/«. 501, 11.*  />'  q'/i 
w.  8UB.ILTNC.  .561,  A.  /^',  in  is  qui,  connect- 
ed w.  a  i)red.  noun  .502,  D;  as  pred.  geni- 
tive {e'lnii  est  qui)  5»i2,  E ;  is,  as  pred.  adj. 
understood  502,  A.— Is  qui  w.  i.nd.  .502,  5. 
Use  of  mood  when  i.<  stands  in  the  relation 
of  an  attribute  503,  iS.—Is  qui  w.  subjunc. 
in  causal  meaning  508,  8. 

it  is  I  who,  etc.,  how  rendered  5.5.3,  0. 

ita,  moilal  form-adv.;  its  derivation,  239, 15. 
Diff.  from  tain  and  ad^o  2f)2.  4.  Ita  and  sic 
as  synd.  ant.  of  modal  Ut-cl.  435,  2.  When 
they  arc  omitted  035,  32,  oBs.  \.—  Jta  vt 
rendered  '  but  so  that '  4.3.5,  2 ;  6:30,  4, 2  foil. 
—As  synd.  ant.  of  duni,  quoad,  and  quani- 
diu  (=only  so  long  as).— //a  si  {sed  ita  si) 
=  'but  onlv  if  741,  10. -//a.  regular  ant. 
of  comp.  Ut-cl.  74.5.  i.—fta  in  asseverations 
(ita  me  di  anidbunt  nt;  ita  vivani  ut)  740,/>. 

item  and  itidem,  modal  forin-advs.;  deriva- 
tion 23'.»,  15;  241.  5.  Idiomatic  use  of  non 
item  lb. 

item,  Engl,  noun,  how  to  render  into  Latin 
270,  n.  7. 

iter  diei,  as  measure  of  distance  220,  1. 

iterum,  dill",  from  denuo  and  rursus '22i,  G. 
W.  force  of  bis  372,  n.  2. 

Jactura  est,  w.  Subj.  Qnod-cl.  014,  9. 

jam.  temp.  adv.  221,  10:  224.  oBs.  2.    Jim- 

prl'leni  lb;  jamd'm,  225.  11;  Jaindudum 
expl.  225. 11.    Jam  exoleti  vely  used  200.42. 

jubere,  w.  transitive  obj.  along  w.  oljj.  inl. 
lOt,  8.3.  The  diff.  constructions  of  the 
clauses  dep.  on  it  .5!)0,  6.  Controversy, 
Avhether  the  ace.  dep.  on  jubtre  is  a  trans- 
itive obj.  ace.,  or  a  subj.  ace.,  and  whether 
the  inf.  is  obj.  inf.  or  pred.  inf.  10(i,  Hi.— 
Jiibeor  w.  obj.  inf.  104,  &1.  Peculiar  pass, 
construction  by  making  the  transitive  obj. 
of  the  obj.  inf.  ot  jubtre  its  pass.  subj.  105, 
%—J,/ssus  w.  obj.  inf.  104,  S4.  oBs, 

jucundus,  w.  dat.  118. 112  :  v^.  11.  sup.  121, 121. 
.///(•//;irf?/;/i6.N'^  w.  subj.  Ut-cl.  012,  0, 

judicare  aUquevi  atiqud  re  100,  485 ;  as  facti- 
tive  verb  w.  doubh;  ace.  102.  C. 

Judge,  Roman,  functions  of  204,  n.  18. 

judging.  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ex  29,  48. 

jnrare,  in  verfxi,  expl.  105,  n.  17. 

jure,  justly.  244,  3;  meo  jure  hoc  feci,  I  was 
right  in  doing  this  lb. 

iury  Engl,  noun,  how^  to  render  291,  n.  IS. 

lus  est,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  613.  3. 

iusjurandum,  oxpl.  149,  n.**;  vv.  attr.  That- 
c  1.02.5,  .4,:3. 

jnssu,  by  order  234,  obs. 


just,  Engl,  particle,  by  commodum,  or  tan- 
tum  quod  347,  6.  May  be  intimated  by  tho 
IMP.  tense  of  the  pred.  315,  3. 

juvare,  w.  ace.  87,  n.  3.  Juvat,  impers., 
takes  its  logical  subj.  in  ace.  107.  iK).  Juvat 
me,  w.  subj.  inf.  617,  8;  w.  perf.  inf.  lb. 

juxta,  prep.  w.  ace,  use  3.3,  4:37.  Diff.  from 
p)0i)eix\\(\  propter 'HA  A\.  As  adv.(=equally), 
synd.  ant.  of  comp.  cl.  745,  3.  Conjunc- 
tions used  after  it  lb. 

Kalends,  meaning  and  use  of  227,  1. 

to  know  how  to,  etc.,  expr.  by  scire,  either  w. 

obj.   inf.,  or  w.  quomodo.    Diff.  of  both 

constructions  396/. 

Laborare,  w.  abl.  or  de  93,  479;  w.  plus  or 
magis  750,  6'.  no.  2.  Laborare  and  elabo- 
rdre,  as  verbs  of  strivinu:.  w.  ut  or  ne  500,  2. 

Istari,  w.  al)I.  or  de  93,  479,  n.  8;  w.  Inf.  cl. 
or  q>/od  .500. 

lamentis  lacrimisque,  as  obj.  of  coincident 
action  214,  3. 

languages,  names  of,  if  objs.  of  verbs  of 
speaking,  knowing,  writing,  etc.,  assume 
the  form  of  an  adv.  ( Latins  loqui  etc.)  84,  38. 

the  last,  not  rendered  in  such  expressions  as 
'  the  la»f  ten  years '  200,  42.  Lastfij  (at  last, 
at  len-rth,  finally)  how  expr.  in  Lat.  223,  5. 

Latine  loqui,  see  languages. 

latus,  w.  ace.  or  gen.,  rarely  w.  abl.  115,498. 

laudare,  w.  Quod-cl.  598.  9  (once  in  Livy  w. 
Quum-el.  508.  n.  :{:).  Subjunc.  or  ind.  of 
the  Quod-cl.  388;  :3S0, 3.  Wh^-n  it  may  take 
quia  or  qiioniam  :388.  n.  *;  508,  n.  %• 

laudationis  est,  w.  Sul)).  Inf.  cl.  015.  11. 

laus  est,  \\\  Subj.  Quod-el.  or  Inf.  el.  01:3,  2. 

Law  of  consecution,  see  Consecution  of  tenses. 
In  reirard  to  the  subjunc.  dep.  on  pred.  w. 
epistolarv  tenses  ;3.50,  C. 

learning,  Verbs  of.  constr.  w.  ab  or  e'x28,48. 

lege  agere,  expl.  2.58,  2. 

lest.  Ent^l.  con].,  how  to  render  6.38,  2. 

let  (Engl,  imperative)  how  expr.  .382,  3. 

lex,  w.  attr.  Ut-cl.  and  Ne-cl.  625,  C.  Lex 
e4.  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  613,  3. 

liberare,  w.  ab  or  mere  abl.  29,  48;  w.  ace.  of 
pers.  and  gen.  of  thing  99,  484. 

liberum  esserw\  ab  or  mere  abl.  29,  48. 

libet  mihi,  w.  Subj.  inf.    Diff.  from  placet  lb. 

libra,  pound,  standard  of  wei;:ht  275,  1. 

libralis,  weighing  a  pound  270,  3. 

licere  to  be  sold  for.  to  be  held  at  a  certain 
price;  takes  an  obj.  of  price  207,  4;  94, 
479._/^ic^/,  impers.  (it  is  allowed),  w.  dat. 
80;  107,90.  ijc^/ mi/a,  different  construc- 
tions and  signiflcaiions  017,  9.— Licet,  w. 
force  or  a  concessive  eonj.  (=  even  if,  or 
although)  w.  subjunc.  695,  7. 

likewise,  Enszl.  adv.,  how  to  be  rendered 
241.  5.     Expr.  by  et  ipse  or  idem  2.52,  9. 

liquet,  w.  Subj.  inf.,  or  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  615,  1. 
Yon  liquet,  w.  intorroirative  cl.  .390.  a. 

litare,  w.  abl.  95,62.— Li^a^o,  as  impers.  pred. 
ahl.  180.  234. 

little,  Emrl.  adv.  of  intcns. ;  diff.  ways  of 
expressing  it  in  Lat.  264.  5. 


I 


794 


INDEX. 


locare,  to  let,  rent  out,  w.  participial  gerun 
(iive  14S,  ns  ;  w.  obj.  of  price  2«.b,  2. 
locatio  and  conductio  operarum,  nieanin<;  ana  , 
rouHtruction  of  148,  ii.  1-  t^.^.^- 

Locative  adverbs;  gram,  '.'ature 215.3  Fonna- 
tiun   (\  casrs  w.  ^»peCIfic  endinj^s)   215,  4. 
Synop^^iH  216.      Of  thi^  def.  Jormyfnuide 
etc.),  as  8ynd.  ant.  of  locative  cl.  4W.  2. ; 
575.    Loc.  adv.  of  indef.  rel..  how  formed 
(ubiubi,  or  nbicnnque  etc.)  501,  7.     Used  m 
c<>mi)<)siti(m  with  other  advi».  2J7.  8. 
Locative  cases,  in  nanu-H  of  citie^,  etc.  21 .,  7 : 
uf  locaiivf  advs.215,3;  217.  rseofsi-c_on 
case  in  place  of  the  first  {unde  purfiuniO 
217  5  4     Second  case  as  completiniroDj. 
of  advs.  of  dismnre  (proc'd  vnl^)  '^20,    «. 
i:se  of  third  case  218,  b.     Fourth  case  inst 
of  first  21S,  c— In  relations  of  time  and 
niodalitv21S,  a.  .    ^  *•       ^, 

Locative  clauses.  574  foil.;  interroorativo  or 
n-l<.tive:,Tl,  H16.  Attributive  and  advei- 
l.iul  locative  els.  575,  1,2.  Is»;  and  lorm 
of  attr.  loc.  cl.  375,  Ii.  Keferrin"  to  per- 
goim  as  ants.  57»),  D.  M«>od  "» J;»;-  t'"'' 
and  ellipsis  of  irram.  ants,  lorus  oii>,  S.  JH- 
terrofiative  loc.  els.  57H,  4. 
locus,  w.  irerundial  «en.  1^9,  ti. -Locum  ca^- 
//  is-  cape  re  2.")7.  2.  .  inn  r  n 

Logical  tenses  of  dep.  subjunctives  422  foil, 
(s.-e  Consecution  of  tenses),  la  restricting' 

Si-cls.  742,  10.  ,  11    iin 

lon-u8,  w.  ace.  or  pen.  ;  ''arely  w.  ahl   1  .5 
4\iS—Iy)nrfumef<f.  w.  Mihj.  Inf.  «"'-^^ ';'*'' 
lonninfi  est  q>iam  w.  Snhj.  I  l-cl.  «ilO,  n.t— 
jA,nge,  as  adv.  of  distance  270.  7  ;  as  adv. 
of  intens.  before  superlatives  2(>4,  3. 

loqui.  w.  intransitivf  ace.  85,  ly.). 

luci,  as  local ivf  case  225,  11. 

lugere  w.  ace.  85,  39. 

Macte,  w.  ahl.  120,  118.  ^ 

majrere.  w.  arc.  8.5.  39;  w.  ahl     ncc,  or  de 

!».{.  479;  w.  Inf.  cl.  or  Quod-el.  5«»0. 
magis,  iisi-anddifT.  from  ;>/'/«' 754,  .  foil,  in- 
stances in  which  mrt7t^'.  "ot  />/«•<  must  be 
used  7.50  foil..  A;  Ii;  D:  Ej  sK\xvnplu<< 
not  v\agiK  must  be  used  .o.),  ( .  ^V  "*;^» 
either ;>/'/>?  or  rnanU  may  he  use(t  K>b,  f., 
n.  2.  Noil  mafju  q'lanu  =  '"^,'"^',';'*^.' 
757.  A:  =  'asn.uch  as'  758,  /.  ^^^•^ 
quam  =  pofiu.i  qnain  7.58  loll.,  9.  W  ht-n 
the  comp.  decree  of  descriptive  ndjs.  must 
be  formed  by  mnnii^  7.59.  10;  754,  A.- Ma- 
ni.'iquam  quod  (<pna\  in-^t.  ornnnqxo't. . . 
miquod.\y.  snbjunc.  7«n,  i^-^---.^^''/'?-  «'' 
Pvnd  ant.  of  ()uam-cl.  elliptically  omitted 
7};7  1(5  -Mnqis  est  =  'there  are  more  rea- 
sons' w.  Siibj.  Ut-c1.,  or  Quod-el.  (il4,  4. 
magnificum  est  w.  Subj.  Ut-el.  610,  4. 

sii:r':;ttv':;i,j.  Quo.|:oi  6.0  4  w.« 

esf  (mon-  important)  w.  huhj.  Ut-cl.  hlO,  5. 
malle.    ccmstniciion,   see  velte  '    w.   comj). 

QiiaTi-cl.  im,  U.-Malim  and  inanern  in 

optative  sentences  3s;},  »).       ,^   ,,    „.    , 
malum  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  and  Suhj.  Lt-cl. 

in  the  tame  sentence  613,  2. 


mandare,  w.  imperative  claase  596,  6. 

mane,  225,  11.  _„ 

manere,  to  remain,  constr.  w.  pred.  nom.  7.^, 
4t>>.    Ma/lire,  to  abide,  w.  abl.  alter  in 

95, 58.  ,  ..         • 

Manner  (i.  e.  quality  of  actions)  relation  of, 
;>;kS  loll.  — .\dvs.  of  manner  228,  .'>.>2.  r.x- 
pressed  by  participles(<7«a  arr^mintia  rsra 
Interdixilset)  245,  7;  hy  abl.  243,  lo  . ;  >y 
cmn  244,  5  ;  by  modal  clauses  b3o  fi»ll. ;  uy 
comparative  clauses  744.  51. 

to  marry,  how  rendered  89,  n.  8. 

maturus,  w.  gerundial  dat.  165,  2 ;  mature, 
t>«)on.  how  ustd  225,  4. 

may  Engl,  potential  auxiliary,  expr.  i>y 
PKKs.  snuuNC.  in  imperative  sentences 
383,  6  ;  in  declarative  sent.  37S  1  ;  in  rel. 
cl.  556,  1;  in  final  Ut-cl.  («7,  1  h'll.  By 
ruEs,  iND.,  or  FIT.  of  ;)0^sv3.9.  a:  hyiio-i 
,37'.>,  a :  617,  9 :  by  ri^T.  phes.  :i52,  U ;  by 
INI).  MOOD  ill  indef.  rel.  cl.  .50:?,  12. 

maxime,  in  apodosis  of  comp.  Quum-cl.  «).57, 
3.  MuTime  quod,  w.  lorcc  of  pviXsertitn 
(itntm  1)84,  5.  „„ 

Measure  of  distance  220  foil.  ^^  heri  measure 
of  length  etc.  may  be  ext^res^ed  hv  a.ljs. 
276  B.  I'roporiional  measure,  by  abl.  ii\, 
3.  Units  of  measure,  used  hy  the  Romans 
4!)S.  101. 

mederi,  w.  dat.  89.  ,  , 

melius  est,  in  ind.  of  a  pret.  tense  used  hy- 

pothetieally  727,  74  foil. 
memini,  w.  gen.  92,478.    When  it  niav,  or 
inu>t:  take"  ace.  1«,  51;  93.  .52.    W  .  Int.  cl. 
58^,  23  ;    w.   pre8.   Inf.   referring  to  tho 
past  (i:i(),  5.  ...     ^„ 

memor,  w.  gen.  118, 109;  w.  genindial  gen. 

mens,  i"*»hl.  to  denote  purpose  m.56<5;  283.1. 
mensis,  month.    Divishm  of  227;  how  treat- 
ed gram.  226  foil.     Adjs.  derived  from  it 

»)OJJ     \ 

meUri  a'iquein  (aliquvf)  nliqna  re  100,  48.5 
mctuere.  as  verb  of  fearimr.  w^n«,  «.r  vtjne. 

ftnn)  rm.  1.    Non  metuere  w.  Quin-cl.  589,4. 
metus,  w.  attr.  Inf.  el.  62.5,  Ii.  2. 
menm  est    w.  Subj.  Ut-d.  613,  ». 
Sue  as  measure  of  distance,  different  ways 

of  expressing  it  220.  1. 
mina,  value  of.  2»".8.  5. 

mina'ri,  w.  dat.  «•:»^  ^^\  1"^;.,;"S.J'"\  ^^'  ''• 
pred.  inf.  in  i)enphrastic  lut    l.n,  2 

minister  of  war,  how  to  be  rendered  292,  u.98. 

ministrare,  w.  <lat.  SO.  , 

'  minor  points.'  how  to  be  rendered  29.'.  n  3r^ 

minus  i's  synd.  ant.  of  comp.  cl.  ol  nnhke 

"intens.  7.52.  .53;  TA.  6  foil.;  w-.phir.  parti- 
tive "en.  used  inst.  of  paunvref  «52,  1. 
Mvvrs  mum=paucidre'i,  Ib.-J/?;jr/.«,  de- 
noting h'^'s  than  a  given  number,  how 
constr.  7.52,  3  loll. 

minute  (division  of  the  hour),  how  cxpr.  in 

1  "it   '^26    1. 
'minutM  of  transactions '=at/c/ori^a^<'*  prce- 

mirart' niore  'frequently  w.  Inf.  cl.  than  w. 
quod  590. 


INDEX. 


795 


mirum  est,  and  mirabile  est  w.  Subj.Quod-cl., 
or  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  6in»,  2.  Mirum  est  {=  it  is 
strange)  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  612,  6.  Mirum,  ni 
708,  K 

mise  et,  impers.,  w.  ace,  as  logical  subj., 
alonjr  XV.  gen.  «JO,  484. 

mittere,  w.  ad  or  d;tt.  14,  11;  w.  participial 
gerundive  H8,  178  ;  w.  double  dat.  96,  65; 
w.  imperative  cl.  in  the  meaning  'to  send 
word  '  .594   n.  $. 

Modal  form-adverbs.  Formation  239.15.  When 
phia<es  must  be  used  in  iheir  place  2."}9,  B. 

Modal  clauses.  Division  434, 1.  Modal  Diiin- 
clauses  673,  5,  Modal  Quuin-cl.;  their  use 
and  iintods,  654,  1  and  2. 

Modal  Dt-clauses  and  Quin-claus?s.  Division 
into  cl.  ol  manner,  intensity,  coincident 
and  consecutive  action  635,  32. 1.  Use  and 
omission  of  their  synd.  ant.  (sic,  ita,  etc.) 
(W6,  4;  4;i5,  2.  Negative  mod.  cl.  introduced 
by  ut  uon  6-36,  2,  by  quin  636,  3.  Mod.  Ut- 
cl.  dep.  on  (ideo  /ion  mi.  3.  W.  the  force 
of  concessive  cl.  63»».  4,  1.  Tense  of  the 
subjune.  in  mod.  Ut-cl.  434  foil.  Ct)nflict- 
in:,' statements  of  the  «rrammarians4il. 11.*. 
Exceptional  use  of  plup.  snbjunc.  43.5.  3. 
When  |)iet.  modal  Ut-cl.  may,  or  must, 
take  perf.  subjune.  4:i5  loll.;  4-39,  C ;  when 
they  must  take  imp.  subjune.  436.  5;  when 
they  may  take  eiiher  pres.  or  imp.  sub- 
june. 436,  6;  when  they  may  take  eiiher 
perf.  or  imp.  subjune.  4:iS,  B.  When  the 
tense  of  tin  ».laii>e  must  correspond  to  tiie 
tense  of  the  priuc.  pred.  410,  11.  When 
they  take  periphrastic  tenses  of  the  fut. 
419,  Ji. 

Modahty.  The  different  adverbial  relations 
cuinprised  by  it.  2-38  foil. 

moderari  (to  yhap»;  one'p  actions),  as  verb  of 
striving,  with  ut  or  ns  599,  2. 

modius,  measure,  270.  n.  1. 

modo.  as  temp.  adv.  22.5.  11 ;  =  just  now  222, 
n.  *.  (For  7nodo  as  particle,  see  P.  I.)  W. 
the  force  of  duminodo  {—  if  but)  w.  sub- 
june. 677.  14.  This  subjune.  not  subject 
to  consecution  lb.  Modo  (if  but)  w.  abl. 
abs..a(ljs.  oradvs.67S,  oBs.  14;  w. Ut-cl.  lb. 

modulus,  a  relative  unit  of  measure  115.  101. 

modus  w.  gerundial  gen.  159,  3.  In  abl.  to 
express  man.neu  243.  553. 

molestus.w.  dat.  118. 112;  w.  IT.  sup.  121. 121. 

moliri,  as  verb  of  striving  w.  ut  or  ?»e599,  2; 
w.  obj.  inf.  600,  2. 

mollis,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  5. 

monarchy,  how  to  translate  279,  n.  7. 

monere,  w.  Ut-cl.,  or  Inf.  cl.,  according  to 
meaning  591,  1.  W.  imperative  cl.  595,  4. 
Karely  w.  obj.  inf.  lb. 

Money,  standard  and  denominations  of, 
2»18.  5. 

Mood,  in  cond.,  concessive,  causal  etc. 
clauses,  see  Subjunctive,  and  the  articles 
on  eacli  clause. 

Mood  in  Quum  clauses.  In  indef.  Qunm-cl. 
<:enerally  ind.  645,  34;  645,  OBS.  2  loll.— In 
def.  Quum-cl.  either  ind,  or  subjune.  ac- 
cording to  the  relation  of  the  cl.  to  princ. 


pred.  646— C52.— Mood  in  attr.  Quum-cL 
6.53,  36;  in  subj.  Quum-cl.  644,  2;  in  com- 
pared    temporal    cl.  761,  D.     In    causal 
Quum-cl.  654,  1. 
mora,  w.  gerundial  gen.  159,3;  with  attr. 

Qiiominiis-cl.  625,  D. 
non  morari  {moram  non  intei^wnere).,  constr. 

w.  quoininus  or  quin  603,  n.  §. 
more,  rendered  by  j^lus,  magis,  amjylius,  or 
comp.  degree  of  an  adj.  or  adv.  759.  lU.  As 
abs.  adj.  =  ;>///§  or  amplius  7.54,  6;  as  attr, 
adj.  of  nouns  exI)ros^^ing  quantity  or  qual- 
ity =  j)lus  w.  partitive  gen.  in  sing.  7.54,  6; 
referring  to  number  =  plures,  or  plus  w. 
partiiive  gen.  in  pi.  7.52,  1;  as  adv.  by  ma- 
yis  754  foil.  A,  B,  I),  E ;  by  pUn^,  or  option- 
ally  by  magis  or  plus  loo,  6'.— More  money 
=  tnajor  ptcunia  754,  6. 

mos,  in  abl.  (more),  to  denote  relation  of 
manner  ;^43,  b  ;  344,  4.  J/cw  est  (tnoris  est), 
w.  Sul)j.  Ut-cl.,  or  in  pass,  construction 
w.  Inf.  cl.  614,  2  ;  w.  L'eruudial  gen.  lb.— 
Morem  gertre,  w.  dat.  89. 

mori,  makes  the  verbal  aiij.  moriturus  from 
its  pres.  stem  125,  127.  In  perf.  as  pred. 
abl.  (mortuo)  172,  3.  Mortar  si,  use  of,  348,5. 

morigerari,  w.  dat.  89. 

motus,  perf.  j)art.,  w.  abl.  as  circumlocution 
of  motive  119,  115. 

to  move,  neuter  verb,  to  be  rendered  by 
pass.  o{inortre  51,  n.  3. 

movere,  constr.  w,  ace.  of  neuter  form-adjs. 
along  w.  a  transitive  obj.  85,  39,  2.  With 
plus  or  magis  756,  C,  n.  2.  Mozlre,  ani- 
nium  facere,  excifdre,  incitare,  adducere, 
impellere,  perpellere,  cogere,  suborndre,  as 
verbs  of  inducing,  constr.  w.  ut,  ne,  or  ge- 
rundial after  «(/602.  4. 

mox,  use  of,  224,  3. 

multiples,  compared  w.  a  simple,  how  expr. 
7.5-2,  2. 

multus  (as  form-adj.,  see  P.  I.).  As  acces- 
sory })red.  251,  7.  Cannot  be  used  in  the 
positive  in  the  relation  of  price  and  value 
2(»7,  2.  Mnltmn,  as  adv.  of  intens.,  its 
gram,  nature,  and  relation  to  the  pi.  multa 
263.  1  ;  2t»3,  n.*.  Mullo,  as  adv.  of  intens.; 
dill'  from  in  nit  inn  2W,  3. 

munus  est,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  613,  3.  Muneri 
mittere,  2.57,  2. 

must,  Eiiirl.  potent,  auxiliary,  how  expr.  in 
Lat.  (periphrastic  gerundial,  oportet.  etc.) 
141,  164  ;  by  pres.  or  fut.  of  deffire  379,  a  ; 
hy  fut.  tense  of  the  verb  ,3.52,  B ;  352,  6  ;  in 
syllogisms  .351,  A.  '  Musf  w.  'have'  as 
perf.  potential  145,  171 ;  by  oportMt  w. 
perf.  inf.  351,  3. 

Nam  and  enim,  w.  Inf.  cl.  in  ©ratio  obliqua 

689,  n.  t. 
narrare,  in  pass.  w.  nom.  w.  inf.,  exc.  in 

perf.  and  plup.  106,  87  foil, 
natus  (born)  w.  genindial  after  ad  192,  1  ; 

natus  (old),  used  of  the  aire  of  men  2-36,  5; 

w.  ace.  1 15,  498.  Xatu  as  adjunct  of  major^ 

minor,  etc.  120,  118. 
nauci  est,  272,  3. 


796 


INDEX. 


oe  (nejjative  particle,  =  not,  see  P.  I.),  "scd 
ins't.  of  non  in  rt ■^t^ictive  claucfs  intro- 
duced hy  dum.  dutnmodo,  or  inodo  (=  if 
but)  H77,  la  foU.  ;  when  used  insst.  of  von 
\v.  reference  to  numeral  excess  (not  more 
than)  7M,  4.—ye...f/ui<fem  after  a  nega- 
tion, in  the  meatiing  'even  '  7.^-2,  n.  *.  Ae 
n.  .qiiidein,  not  even  if.  idiomatic  nse 
732,2.— iVg,  conjunction,  =  'ihat  not'."  lest;* 
wlien  it  mu5«t  he  used  iust.  ofw/!  non:  (a) 
introduciii-'  negative  imperative  cl.  594, 
1  ;  .V.H).  fi;  :i89.  m)  ;  (f»  «tep.  on  verba  faci- 
endi  b*M.  25  ;  (when  ut  non  is  used  in  thest^ 
chiuses  mi,  u.  *)  ;  (<•)  in  That-cl.  of  pur- 
pose iuiH,  2  {>/f  non  »«8,  2  and  3)  ;  ((/)  ne  or 
«/  nov  ill  Fact-cl.  «07.  .'S;  (<-)  \\hen  used  in 
JSubj.  Tliat-ci.  Jill,  5  ;  612,  (i  ;  613.  3  ;  615, 
28  loll. ;  (/)  wiien  used  in  miKhil  That-cl. 
636,  OBs.  2;  ((f)  when  Uf<e<l  in  atrr.  Thai-cl. 
625!  7^2;  «i25  C  and  D.—Xe  multa,  ellipti- 
cal'Final  cl.  6;W.  3. 

Ne-clauses,  w.  lorce  of  negative  Dummodo- 
claiises  678,  no,  4.— Concessive  Nc-clanses 
0%^  8.— Ne-clauses  w.  force  of  Enj;!.  atlir 
niative  clauses  («)  dep.  on  verbs  ot  leariiiix 
r)«9.  1  ;  0)  as  Sul)j.  cl.  of  penculutn  est  613, 
3  ;  ((•)  w.  v«tI)s  of  negative  c(»niniand  {iu- 
terdicere,ritare)  597,7;  (^)  w.  verbs  im- 
jjlytiig  a  negative  aim  {in'ohiMie  etc.)  602.5. 
necessarius,  w,  gen.  or  jjosnessive  adj..  or 
d;tt.  IIH,  112;  119,  114;  w.  gerundial  after 
(id  192  3. 

necesse'est!  DitT.  from  opvfi  €!>t,  oportet.  and 
l)eriphrastic  geiuiidiMJ  141.  103  Its  use  in 
syllogisms  351.  A.  Meaning  of  iis  future 
tense  351,  3.— W.  gerundial  after  ail  192. 
3.  W.  perf.  subjunc.  corresi)on(iiiig  to 
Engl,  potential  w.  'must,  iiavcM4.i,  171. 
For  construction  w.  Subj.  cl.  etc.,  see 
0}X)rtet. 

Necessity,  idea  of,  how  oxpr.  in  Lat.  140. 
103.     How  to  chanire  tht;  voice    of   Kngl. 
verbs  denoting  necessity  when  to  be  ren- 
dered into  Lat.  144,  170. 
nedum,  particle,  =  much  less;  explanation 
and  use  of  7-34  foil.  Without  a  pred.  735. «>. 
need  not,  how  expr.  in  silver  Latinity,  383,  6. 
nefarius.  w.  H.  Sup.  121,  121.  ,.   ,    , 

nefas  est,  w.  11.  Sup.  121,  121  ;  w.  Subj.  Inf. 

(1.  613.  1. 

negare  {non)  w.  Qiiin-cl.  580,  4. 
Negation  (i«i  general  see  P.  I.),  llowexpr. 
ill  negative  imperative  eent.  383.  5.  How 
expr.  in  clauses,  see  ne,  Ne-dattfies,  rieyfie, 
m,  and  /<m.— Negations  as  accessory  pre- 
dicates (niiUun,  niliil)  251,8.  In  c<»nnection 
w.  ni.n,  in  the  meaning  '  only  '  739,  3  ;  740, 
5  and  6.  When  tlie  negations  must  be 
blended  w.  other  words,  see  P.  I. 
negotium  dare  (.i"  i^h»i"K^).  w.  imperative  cl. 

5'.l»i.    ti. 

nequaquam.  modal  form-adv.  239,  15. 

neque  tas  negative  conj..  see  P.  I.),  used  as 
equivalent  of  Engl,  participial  alter  '  with- 
out' 189,  3.  Neque  eo  minus  -  neverthe- 
less 476,  2. 

nequicquam,  modal  forra-adv.  239,  15. 


nescio  quia  {quid  etc.)  w.  force  of  indef.  adj. 

3'.tti.  9. 

nescire,  w.  interroirative  cl.  390,  a. 
nescius,  w.  <r<  n.  1I8.  109. 
neutiquam,  modal  form-adv.  239,  15. 
ni,  C(Mid.    negative  ccmj.,  usetl  in  cond.  cl. 
ol  doubtful  nality  70«i.  8  foil.     History  of 
the  word  706,  8  :  707,  9.     Not  occurring  in 
Cffsar  70<),  8.    Ni  in  si)onsions  and  wjiL'i-rs, 
expl.   707.   li  and    C     Minivi  ni,'^^^^.,  E. 
Used  inst.  of  ni4  707,  I):  7a*',  K-II.     I«i 
cond.  cl.  of  non-reality  71.S  3  ;  718.  n.  *  ; 
719,  n.  *.  „  ,^ 

nihil,  negative  abs.  form-adj.  {^o(^  P.  I.). 
Midi  abt'^t  quin  487,  a.  M/dl  a' bid  ?nd, 
idiomatic  use  without  a  pred.  740.  7.— 
Ai/iil  est  Cras,<oroi)iosiu>i  =  nemo  e>t  co/d- 
o.<ior  765,  A.  Nihil,  as  ucce-sory  pred., 
inst.  of //OH  '251,  8;  in  the  ace.  inst.  oi  non, 
dep.  on  r<dZre.  itocerr.vnpedlre,  etc.  85,39. 
'i.—Nihito  before  comp.  264.  3.  Ni/iHi,  as 
neirative  obj.  of  price  and  value  272,  1. 
Nihdomini/siis  synd.  ant.  (poslcedeni)  of 
conc.'s-ive  claiiiies  692,  1 ;  700,  16.  Mhilo 
S'l-ius.  211,  5. 

nimirum,  di-rivation  708,  n.  t. 
nimium,    adv.    of  intens.   26.3,   31;    2f.3,   2. 
When  it  takes  the  f»)rm /fjwavli). ;  260.  n*. 
nisi,  distinction   from  n  non  in  cond.  d.  of 
doubtful  reality  701  f<'ll.     ^i  non,  not  vM, 
used  in  cond.  cl.  of  exemplification  (713, 
17,  tin.),  and  of  doubt. ess  reality  715,45. 
Nisi  in   cond.   cl.   of  UMn-rcaliiy  718,  3. 
When  It  may  be  used  in>t.  ol  n  non  to 
coordinate  negative  cond.  cl.  7.36.  2.     A» 
coOni.  coiij.  of  indep.  sentences  {ni>i  ta- 
rnen)  738,  2  foil.    AJ>t  alter  a  previous 
neL'ati»)n  or  univcr.-al  =  'except.'  'but,' 
in  the  coordination  of  clans»  s.  and  of  m«'m- 
bers  of  the  same  sentenc»-  739,  3  ;  740.  4 
foil.     Nui  w.  participial  clauses  and  abl. 
»bs.  173,  2  ;  740.  4.    Msi  quod,  607.  2.  MH 
f&r'e.  and  tiisi  rt?'0  741.  9.     Mi  fi  739,  3, 
no.  6.    M.yi  me  fallil  {niM  faVor)  742.  2. 
niti,  w.  abl.  93.' 479.     Mit  and  ndnVi,  w. 
geiundial  after  ad  »90.  '2*<9.  1  ;  niii,  adnVt, 
enVi,  as  verbs  ol  strivii  g,  w.  vi  or  ne  599, 
2  :  also  w.  obj.  inf.  600,  2. 
nive,  7;i8.  7.  .  , 

nocerc,  w.  dat.  89  ;  w.  ace.  of  a  neuter  form- 
adj.  85,  39.  2;  w.plus,  m>t  7naqis  755,  ('. 
noctu,    locative  case,  ditlerent  Irom  uocte 
225,  n.  ,        ^ 

nolle,  ccmstr.  w.  obj.  inf.,  Inf.  cl.,  vt,  ne,  or 
mere  subjunc.  592,  OBS.  7.  1  foil.  Nolim  and 
nollem  in  optative  pent.  383.6.  Noli,  as 
circumlocution  of  the  negative  impeiaiive 

38:i,  5.  ,  ,     V,, 

nominare,  as  factitive  verb,  w.  double  ace. 

Nominative  (as  Ribj.  see  P.  I.);  ascase  of  the 
completing  or  accessory  pred.  73  loll.;  'i4tj, 
18  Double  nom.  w.  lactitive  verbs  in  the 
pass.  '201,  487.  Nom.  w.  Inf.  106.  Lsed 
lust,  of  a  Subj.  That-cl.  484,  3. 

non,  neirative  particle  (see  P.  1.).  Its  use  in 
imperative  sentences  383,  6.      In  connec- 


INDEX. 


797 


tion  w.  si  and  uf,  pee  these  conjp.    NoneM 
ur  487,  a.     Non  est  quod  in  ind.  of  a  pret. 
ten-e.  vv.  hypothetical  force  727,  24  fol  . 
nonnisi,  =  only,  in  the  writers  of  the  silver 
age  710,  »■». 

nonnumiuam  {nonnunquam),  temp.  adv.  2V4, 
9. 

North-west,  how  to  express  in  Lat.  222,  n.  6. 
not  even  if,  ln)w  rendered  732,  2.     Not  . .  .tilt, 
not.,  hi/ore,  by  Priiisquam-cl.  w.  perl.  ind. 
670.  8. 

nothing  but,  nobody  but,  hy  nrhil  mn.  nemo 
Tiixi,  etc.  740,  5  :  by  niliil  ali'id  mn  740.  7. 
'  Todo  nothing  else  but,'  how  rendered  lb. 
Nouns,  used  as  accessory  pred.  2.52,  22.— 
Nouns,  expressitig  the  diflerent  adverbia 
n-lations,  see  these.     Denoting  price  and 
value,  267.     Denoting  the  denominations 
of  money  26S,  5.    Denoting  tneasure  of 
distance  220,  I  :  time  226.  1 ;  weiirht,  275, 1. 
novum  est.  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  or  Ut-cl.  612,  6. 
noxius,  w.  dat.  612,  6. 
nubere,  w.  dat.  S9.  ,  «-.e   n 

nudius  w.  ordinal  numerals,  expl.  225,  11. 
nudus,  w.  al)l.  l-'O.  116.   ,     .     ^      ,  _, 

nullus  asaccessorv  pred.,  inst.  of  7wn  2jI, 
S;  as  pred.  abl.  181, '231. 
Numeral  comparison,  752,  .53.  Numeral  excess 
(inure  than  ten,  etc.),  how  exp.  7o3.  4. 
Numerals  (use  (.f  their  different  classes,  see 
P.  I.>.    How  to  express  numeral  multiples 
(twice  as  much,  etc.)  7.52.  2. 
numquam  (nioiquani).  temp.  adv.  222,  J.— 

X'lfH'/uam  nnn,  always,  '222.  9. 
nunc  222,9  an«l  n.*;  nunc  ipsum,^i,r\* 
■  Nunc  quuni,  now  that  493.  3  ;  w.  subjunc. 
617.  3;  nunc  iwstquaui,  w.  pna.  ind.  665, 11. 
Nundin»,  as  division  of  time  '226,  1. 
nuntiare,  w.  Inf.  cl.59t,  1. 
nuntius,  w.  gerundial  gen.  l-A  2;  w.  attr. 
Ne-cl.  625,  C. 

nuper.  expl.  225.  11.  ^  ,      ^.  , 

nusquam,  used  boih  as  first  and  fourth  loca- 
tive case  218,  b. 


Ob  prep.  w.  ace,  use  of  '20,  31;  denotnTj 
imrnose  '284.  2  :  w.  L'ernndial  ace.  196,  .543; 
w  participial  phrase  19!>,  3.  Ob  causnm 
'27'9  39-  Ob  w.  Qiiod-cl  (ob  H  quod)  607. 
2.     Verbs  compounded  w.  ob  take  dat. 

obidire!  w.  dat.  87,  474.     Obediens  w.  dat. 

lis    108 
obesse,  w.  d»t.  88.    Obest,  used  impers.,  how 

eon  sir.  622,  5. 

SS^i'-n'pkting  and  incidental  (adverb- 
ral)  t)9,  4.56;  simple  and  compound  .0,  4). ; 
near  and  remote  9<».  4Sl.  Onjects  w.  rela- 
tive torin  526  foil.  Euirl.  compound  objs.w 
two  objective  cases  generally  correspond 
to  Latin  compound  objs.  in  ace.  and  dat. 

ObLt-danses,  definition  4S(),  fnO.  Without 
a  princ.  ^ent.  481.  oBS.  Different  gram, 
forms  „f  comoletin,'  Obj.  clauses  482.  1. 
Their  gram,  relation  to  princ.  prod,  483,  a. 


Rein  tion  of  Object   That-cl.    to  Subject 
That-clauses  483.  1  foil. 
Obje^t-mfiuitive  (Latin).    Verbs  constr.  with 
obj.  inf.  103,77.    Transitive  and  intransi- 
tive verbs  w,  their  substanrive  objs.  along 
w.  obj.   inf.   101,  491.     Obj.  inf.  dep.  on 
passives  103,  490.     Use  of  Inf.  clauses  in 
place  of  pass.  obj.  infs.  104   81.     Obj.  infs. 
dep.  on  verbs  of  volition  592,  OBS.  7,  1  loll.; 
on  permit  fere  597,  8;  on  cogeie  r>02.  4;  on 
verbs  of  doing  w.  neirative  aim  {proltiber"^ 
recusdre,  etc.)  602,  5.— Tense  of  obj.  inf. 
107,  493.     Exceptional  use  of  perf.  inf.  as 
obj.  inf.  107,  1-4.  ^     . 

Object-infinitive  (Engl.>,  rendered  by  Latm 
iin'>eraii ve  or  inf.  clauses  594. 1.  How  ren- 
dei^ed  after  verbs  of  commanding  596,  6; 
alter  verbs  of  striving  by  Ui-cl.  or  Ne-cl. 
600;  after  verbs  of  inducing  by  Ut-cl.  or  ad 
w.  geiundial  602,  4.  When  rendered  by 
final  Ut-cl.  637.  33;  with  'not  to'  0:^8,  2 foil. 
Rendered  bv  (iuin-cl.  604.  4;  by  rel.  cl.  of 
l)uri)Ose  .557,  5.  Rendered  by  Latm  pass. 
Inf.  cl.  630  3,  no.  '2. 
objection,  '  I  have  no  objection '  =perme  licet 
tjir,  9. 

objurgare,  see  reprehendere. 
Oblique  clauses,  detinition  386,  .597.    Gram. 
forms  of  3^7  foil.     Oblique  Inf.  cl.  387,  81. 
Obi.  finite  clauses,  declantive  388,  82;  im- 
perative 389.  83;  interrogative  39  •,  84.  ODl. 
causal  clauses,  by  enallage,  t  ikim:  the  form 
of  Inf.  clauses  dep.  on  a  verb  of  saying 
405,  OBS.  3.     Obi.  Quod-clauses  dep.  on 
verbs  of  emotion,  praising  etc.  492,  n.  *. 
Oblique  discourse,  see  Oratio  obliqua. 
oblivisci  w.  gen.  92.478;  whenit  may  or  must 
take  an  ace.  92.  51 ;  w.  interrogative  cl. 
.39»,  a.     Obntus,  foriretful,  w.  gen.  118,  109. 
obsecrare,  w.  imperative  cl.  595,  3. 
obsequi,  w.  dat.  87,  474. 
observans,  w.  gen.  117,  108. 
obsistere,  see  obsfdre. 

obstare  w.  dat.  v^8.     Obstare,  obsistere.  adver- 
sdn.    intercludt-re.  intercedere,  deterrere^ 
excipere,  as  verbs  of  hindering,  consir.  w. 
lie  or  quominus  602,  5. 
obtaining,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ab  28, 48. 
obtemperare,  w.  dat.  87,  474.  _ 

obtinere,  construction,  see  impetrare. 
obtingit,  impers.,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.;  diff.  from 
conlinqit  etc,  619,  7. 
obtrectare,  w.  dat.  89. 
obvenire,  w.  dat.  89. 
obviam,  along  w.  a  verb  of  motion,  constr. 

w.  dat.  89. 

occasio,  w.  gerundial  gen.  1.59,  3. 
occupare,  when  it  takes  an  obj.  inf.  10.3,  <8. 
02currere,  w.  dat.  89,  „  t  \ 

of  Eu'd.  prep.,  rendered  by  gen.  (*ee  P.  I.); 

bv  (/e  32,  54;  31  51;  by  ex  30  and  31.  443. 

Of,  before  pariicipials, rendered  by  relative 

ci.   in  subjunc.  557,3;  by  gerundial  gen. 

2.59,  \.  — -Of  course:  rendered  by  quipfte 

(•.89! .4. (for other  Engl,  equivalents, see  P.I). 
offensive  and  defensive  warfare,  how  rendered 

19t,  n.  35. 


^:5 


INDEX. 


officium  eat,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  613,  3. 

old,  w.  immeral  expr»'!»t»ions.  in  regard  to 

age  of  men.  hv  nat'is  115,  4fl8;  23H,  5. 
Without  numeral  expressions  by  ^enex 
(P.  I.).  Older  w.  numeral  expr.  {inajorvi- 
g'lnti  qiiinque  annis  or  annorum)  707,  2. 
Ohler,  oldest,  without  num.  exi»r. :  major 
nafii,  nidj-ifnitM  natu  1-20,  18.— llow  old  is 
expr.  itrelerrinir  to  things  270,  6. 

olere,  constr.  \v.  ace.  85.  '^V^. 

olim,  adv.  of  time.  DifT.  from  altQuando 
and  (piondani  223.  2.  If  opposed  to  present 
time,  constr.  vv.  imp.  31»).  2. 

on  Eni,'l.  prep.,  rendered  rf^32,54;  circa  18, 
Jt.  23,  1;  in  w.  ace.  38,  08;  e.r  2<>.  7^48; 
31,  3;  in  w.  ahl.  42  foil.,  74.  Jf  denotin- 
time,  b.v  mere  ahl.  44.  78;  228.  By  hat.  lu 
several  compound  obj.  phrases,  98,  69. 

once,  variously  expr.  -22;^,  2. 

onerare  afif/ne/n  {(iHqnid)  aliqud  re  99,  485. 

oneriferendo  esse  1<)8,  1. 

only,  Knirl.  panicle,  rendered  by  ni»?  after  a 
ne''ati»»n  710.  5;  bv  non),isi  (silver  Lat.) 
740,  G;  1)V  ytihil  aliud  q'niin  749,  10.  For  the 
ordinary  Lat.  equivalents  of  onlij,  ^ee  P.  I. 

onustus  U-.  al)l.  119,  115.  .   . 

operam  dare,  equivalent  toaverbof  striving, 
\v.  ut  or  ne  h%),  2. 

opere,  abl.  orrvy//.s\  exponent  of  the  relation 
of  intensity  {niagnopere,  tanlopere  etc.) 
2»;i,  2<>. 

opinio,  vv.  attr.  That-cl.  in  different  forms 
(;.'(.  .1.  2. 

opinor,  parenthetically  inserted  3%,  4. 

oportet,  dill,  from  opxa  est.  nec^.fixe  est,  and 
the  .'enindials  111,  163.  Takes  its  logical 
euhj.  in  ace.  107.  90,  which,  however, 
fhould  Ix^  considered  a  subj.  ace.  020,  3,  a. 
roM>tructi«)n  of  oportet,  necesfte  est,  and 
opuii  ext  in  reirard  to  the  form  of  their  subj. 
clauses  020,  3  foil.  OjX)rtet  w.  perf.  sub- 
iunc.  corresp'Oiding  to  Engl.  perf.  poten- 
tial w.  '/nnst  have'  145,  171.  Use  of  Int. 
tense  of  0})Ortet  :i51,  3.  In  the  ind.  of  a 
pret.  t<'nse  used  hypotheticallv  727,  24  foil, 
opportunns,  w.  g-rundial  dat.  104,  1;  w.  ge- 

riuniial  after  ad  192,  1. 
optabile  est,  in  ind.  of  a  prct.  tense  used  hy- 
pottietically  727,  21  foil, 
optare,  constr.  w.  Ut-cl.  or  Inf.  c1.  r>02.  ob«». 
7   1.     Optato.  as  impers.  pred.  abl.  180,  234. 
optimus,  w.  II.  sup.  121,  n\.  — Ontimwnest 
(  -  it  i>i  very  strange)  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  612,  6. 
opulentus,  w."al>l.  119,  116. 
opus  est,  w.  abl.  91,  479.     Its  construction 
in  General  9."),  0  •.     DilV.  from  oiHirt^t,  ne- 
ce^fieeM.  etc.  141,  163:  w.  II.  fiii>.  121,  121: 
w.  .'crundial  alter  ad  19>.  3;  w.  pirticipial 
phras.'  in  ahl.  173,  1.    For  form  ol  its  Subj. 
cl.  see  oportet. 

orare,  w.  imi)erativc  cl.  .595.  3. 
oratio  in  atiqutm,  more  usual  than  contra 
at'iq.  41.  7i. 

Oratio  obliiua  (oblique  discourse)  7<i8  foil. 
Detinilioii  7t)8.  607,  and  OBs.  1.  Must  he 
considered  as  dep.  on  the  idea  of  obliqaity 
708,  1.    When  pronouns  of  1.  and  2.  per» 


may  be  used  in  or.  obi .  709,  4.  Conversion 
of  the-e  t)ron.  into  tho.<e  of  the  3.  pcrs. 
7(i8,  3;  769.  5.  Form  of  the  pred.  in  or. 
<>bl.  {a\  of  declarative  seiitenci-s  709.  0;  (h) 
of  interrogative  sent,  (whether  inf.  or  sub- 
June.)  7«»1»,  6;  (c)  of  imperative  sent.  770.7: 
Kd)  of  dep.  clauses  770.  9.  —  I.imitationj)f 
law  of  conseculion  in  or.  obi.  770,  1 ;  771, 
12;  420,  rt.  Transition  from  or.  obi.  into 
oratio  di recta  771, 1 1.  Int.  rl.  after  (/wj/v'« 
089,  n.  t;  after  nam  and  enlin  lb. 

orbua  w.  abl.  120,  110. 

Ordinal  numerals  (for  their  ordin.".ry  use,  sec 
1*.  I.).  Distinction  between  the  adverbial 
forms  in  um  and  o  224,  0:  250.  2  and  3. 
Ord.  num.,  inst.  of  Enu'l.  cardinals,  to 
de-ignate  the  lenirth  of  periods  2.3.5.  2. 
Did",  in  computinir  by  ordinals  in  Lat.  and 
En«/1 .  2:«,  4.  Ord.  num.  as  accessory  pred, 
2.50  foil.  Diff.  of  these  from  the  adverbial 
{orm>*  {primus,  primum,  or  ])rimo.^)  250, 
1  foil. 

oriri,  w.  gerundial  abl.  after  ab  195,  243. — 
In  the  perf.  as  pred.  abl.  172,  3. 

ornare  aliquem  (alionid)  aliqud  re  99,  485. 

otinm,  w.  irerundial  gen.  159.  3. 

ought  to  (have),  how  expr.  in  Lat.  727.  24. 
(inim.  analysis  of  this  form,  and  of  it3 
Latin  equivalents  Il>. 

over,  Engl.  prep,  rend !•  red  supra  and  per\1\ 
21,  32 :  trans  24,  4:J8  ;  ill  w.  abl.  42,  74 ; 
super  OS. 

Pace  tua  (alicujus),  or  cum  pace  {pace  bona) 
2.59 .  .3.  c. 

pacisci  w.  imperative  cl.  .595.  5. 

palam,  semi-prepos.  w.  abl.  114.  98. 

palmus.  as  measure-unit  115.  lol. 

paludatus,  accessory  pred.,  ex|)l.  218,  n.  ♦. 

pangere,  w.  imperative  cl.  (only  in  perf.  7)^- 
phji)  .595,  5;  50.5,  n.  **. 

par",  w.  gen.  or  dat.  119,  113:  w-  abl.  (alinn 
aliqud  re)  120.  110;  w.  dat.  and  abl.  gerun- 
dial 104,  1.:  as  synd.  ant.  of  comp  cl.  of 
quality,  followed  by  uc.  atque.  or  vt  745,  2. 
Parent,  it  is  proper,  w.  Subj  Inf.  cl.  (uot 

Ut-cl.)  on,  5. 

at  par  (to  buy,  sell  at  par),  how  to  be  ren- 
dered 404,  n.  31. 

parare,  w.  obj.  inf.:  rarely  w.  Ut-cl.  600,  r.  t- 
J'ar'ffi/s,  w.  irerundial  dat.  101, 1;  w.  gerun- 
dial after  ad  192,  4  ;  w.  relative  cl.  in  sub- 
junc    557,  3. 

parcere,  w.  dat.  89;  w.  gerundial  dat. 103, 209. 

Parenthetical  clauses.  A.  Relative  clau>^es, 
how  nnd' reil  iiiio  Enijl.  510.  .3.  Idiomatic 
jiarenthetieals:  Quod  sciam;  qnod  com  mo- 
do  fuo , fieri  jM)<sif:  quo  I  atfinet  ud  ;  quod 
reliquum  est;  qnai^quanta)  tua  est  humani- 
tas:  qu(f>  sunf  t)arl>arbrum  inqtnia  518  foil. 
—  7/.  Final  Ut-cl.  w.  subjunc.  (  =  Enul.  int. 
w  ' /o')  038.  3.— r.  Comparative  Ut-cl.  = 
a^747,  E;  =for'-Al,F.—D.  Parenthetical 
Si-cl.  742,  11. 

parere,  w.  dat.  87,  474. 

particeps,  w.  geu.  118, 109;  w.  gerundial  gen. 
161,  207. 


INDEX. 


799 


Participial  constructions,  i.  e.  participial  form 
of  sentences,  as  asuhdivisitmol'  non-finite 
clauses  (see  V.  D.    Pauticipi.\l  riuiASE 
is  tlie  predicative  phrase  of  a  participial 
clause,  being  either  an   ordinary,   or  re- 
versed participial  plirase  150,  R.  185.     See 
Reversed  participial  phrases.     Participial 
clauses  w.  Ibrce  of  relative  clauses  541,  15 
foil.  ;  w.  forc<'  of  cond.  cl.  733,  2;  w.  force 
c.f  temporal  cl.  in    place  of  abl.  abs,  174. 
218  ;  175,  2.    Panic  clauses  introduced  by 
conjuncti -us  :   by  anttquam  671,  11;   by 
qwpi>e,  »W9,  .4  ,*  by  quamquam,  quamv'is, 
etsi  111».').  0  ;  097.  11  ;  «)99.  14  ;  by  nUi  740,  4. 
Participial  gerundive,  when   used   and   how. 
147.  177      Verlts  by  wliicli  it  may  be  gov- 
erned 148,   178.     llow  to  recast  an  Enirl. 
sent,  to  render  it  by  a  part    gerund.  148, 
180.     Ad   w.   gerundial    sometimes    used 
inst.  of  part,  trerundives  lb. 
Participles  (Latin).     For   constructi(m   of 
pre^.  and  pert.  part,  see  P.  I.— Pres.  part, 
w.  gen.  lit,  108.     Use  as  accessory  pred. 
240  foil.  — Part,  of  the  peripurasiic   future 
(verbal  adj.  in   urus)  as  accessory  pred. 
139.  158:  as  thesis  of  cond.  cl.  714,  20,  .4. 
The  term 'participle  of  pass,  fut.'  gene- 
rally applied  to  the  verbal  adj.  in  das  if 
used  as  participial  or  attributive  gerund- 
ive \ii\,  120  ;  120.  n.  1. 
Participles  (Engl.)  rendered  by  verbal  adj.  in 
Cirus  i:}9.  1.58;  bv  c<»ord.  rel.  cl.  520,  1  ;  by 
eausd  rel.  cl.  509,  9  ;  by  motial  Quum-cl. 
054.  1.  ..   , 

parum,  adv.  of  intens.  204,  5  ;  w.  irerundial 
dat.  105.  2;  Parum/ter.  temp.  adv.  22.'),  11. 
Passive  voice.     lis  intluence  on  construction 
of  verbs  70.  4.59.     Personal  passives  71.  6. 
Impers.  pass,   and  their  «litlerent  kinds  71, 
460.    Use  of  impers.  jiass.  71,  9.  10.     I'ass. 
inf.  useil  impeixmally  72,  11.    Lat.  impers. 
pas.s.    corresponding    to    Engl,     personal 
pa«s.  71,  9.     Verl)s    governing  dar.  nuist 
take  an  impers.  form  in  the  pass.  92,  477. 
passus,  as  measure  115,  101.     Passuum,  un- 
derstood w.  inillia  2-.»l,  n.  8. 
patere,  w.  ace.  of  distance  220,  3  ;  as  general 
verl»  denolinu'  dunension,   w.  ace.  276,  «J*. 
Patet  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  675.  1. 
pati,  w.  ace.  and  «)bj.  inf.  lOl.aS;  w.  Inf.  cl. 
5^<8,    23.     Construed  like   jufjrre  597,  8. 
Karely  w.  Ut-cl.  598,  8.     As  verU  of  emo- 
tion (facile  pati  etc.)  w.  Inf.  cl.  598,  n.  *. 
patiens!  w.  gen.  117,  108. 
pauci,  as  indef.  numeral  adj.  see  P.  I.  Pauci 
qui  w.  subjunc.  550,  1.  Paucidres,  as  synd. 
jint.  ofcoiiip.  Ciuam-cl.  of  unlike  numbers 
7.5-2.  1. 

paulli3per(;>a'//'i>'/>^r),  temp.  adv.  225,  11. 
paulLum  ( /w//"//n  used  as  adv.  of  intens. 
•203,  31  ;  2«')4,  5.  When  pau/lo  must  b<^  used 
264,  3.     Paiillum  (^)est  w.  Q,uin-cl.  628,  8. 
pauper,  w.  abl.  120.  116. 
pecunia,  what  attributes  it  takes  to  express 
quantity  267,  2.     Ptruni<e  repefundiP,  149. 
11.  ♦*.    Pecuniam  niutuamdare^  acctii-sovy 


pred.  a48,  li.  20. 


pendere,  error  about  this  verb  in  the  lexi- 
cons corrected  275,  n.  *.  Pendere,  as  verb 
of  esteeming,  constr.  272,  1.—  Pendere, 
constr.  w.  ex  29,  48.  Pendere  (not  pen- 
dere). to  weigh  (=  to  be  of  a  certain 
weight)  275,  2  foil. 

penes,  prep.  w.  ace.,  use  of,  24,  44. 

penitus,  242.  obs. 

per,  prep.  w.  ace,  use  of  30  foil.  Dift'.  from 
i/y/fr  21,  ;i3:  from  i/i  w.  abl.  in  the  mean- 
ing 'durinu''  45,  n.  1.  To  denote  time 
during  which  an  action  lasted  235,  3.  Per 
causam  280,  1.  Per  as  equivalent  of  the 
nbl.  of  means  277;  to  introduce  logical 
subj.  of  licet  617.  8  ;  a>*  intensive  prefix; 
also  separately  203,  7.  Ptr,  couipounded  w. 
neuter  verbs,  makes  them  transitive  86,473. 

Perfect  (ind.),  use  of  302  foil.  General  theory, 
and  relation  to  imp.  :300,  509.  Relation  to 
End.  Pres.  perf.  428,  oBS.  3  ;  302.  .570,  obs.; 
Jiii;^,  40;  ;^)4,  47.  Rendered  by  Engl.  pres. 
300,  43;  300  obs.  Negative  meaning  of 
perf.  (f'uimus  =  non  sumus)  'W3,  3.  Use  of 
perf..  if  the  pred.  refers  to  indef.  time  :304, 
48;  if  the  action  is  complete  at  th<;  time 
spoken  of  304.  571 ;  if  the  action  holds  good 
at  every  time  (by  later  writers)  305,  572. 
Perf.  or  imp.  according  to  the  author's 
standpoint  in  regard  to  the  time  of  the 
action  314.  50,  1.  Rendered  by  Engl  pro- 
gress, form  of  pret.  320;  322,1.  When 
used  for  repeated  action  325,  04;  325,  2; 
w.  scepe  3-^5,  3;  32ti ;  w.  semper  320.  3;  w. 
quotidie  326,  5 :  w.  tatndiu..  .quamdiu  322, 

01.  Solebat  or  solitus  est?  343,  71,  1  and 

2.  W.  force  of  Eii<rl.  plup.  340.  4;  of  fut. 
perf.  355.  8.     Perf.  and  pres.  in  periods  of 
contingent  action  :«0.  5.     Epistolary  pert. 
a57.  77;  :i57,  2.  Perf.  ind.  in  Quum-cl.  049. 
7  and  9;  ib\,  2;  when  rendered  by  Eni.'l. 
pres.  04.5,3;  in  Postquam-cl.  001  foil.  (w. 
force  of  fut.  perf.  062.  n.*);  in  .\ntequam- 
cl.  007,  4  ;  009,  0 ;  070.  8.     Exceptionally 
used  after  dam  =  while  072,  4 ;  073,  5.  1 
and  2.   Perf.  after  quoad=l\\\ 679,  2i» :  after 
dontc  ()S0.  22;  asi.  24.     In  Si-cl.  of  doubt- 
ful reality  703,  A  foil.;  711,  15  ;  713.  18.  In 
Si-cl.  of  doubtless  reality  715,  45.— Pert, 
ind.  of  potential  verbs  {potui,  debui  etc.) 
in  ordinary  and  hvpothetical  meaniuir  727, 
24  foil. ;  of  ordinary  verbs  w.  hypothetical 
sc^ise  7:W.     Perf.  of  periphrastic  fi'.t.  131, 
143;    of  periphrastic  gerundial   14.5,   514. 
IrrcLMilar  ccmsecution  of  tenses  after  a  per- 
fect {a)  if  implying  a  present  tense  428,  3; 
Kb)  after  inrenti  (reperfi)  sunt  429,  B,  2  ; 
(c)  referriuir  to  the  speaker's  time  4-2i»,  B, 
1  •  420,  0.    Consecution  after  perfect  verbs 
4l'9.  6.  .  ^.     ,  , 

Perfect  subjunctive  w.  ne  imperatively  used 
a^3  5;  of  guarded  statement,  iinidying 
'perhaps'  :^78.  2.  P.rf.  subj.  as  tense  of 
pres.  consecution  414  foil.  Dep.  on  pret. 
pred,  429  foil.  ;  dep.  on  another  perf.  sub- 
junc. 4:J0.  7  :  in  modal  Ut-cl,  4:^5.  4 ;  430.  4. 
Perf.  subjunc.  in  Antequam-cl.  671,  10;  in 
cond.  periods  of  doubtful  reality  712,  17; 


800 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


801 


713,  19.    Antecla??ically  w.  force  of  a  hy- 
potlu'tical  pliip.  siibjnnc.  726,  21. 

perferens,  w.  *;ri\.  117,  108. 

perficere,  as  verb  of  doini;,  w.  ut  or  ne  600,  3. 

perfrui,  w.  al)l.  9-3,  47!>,  no.  9. 

perfungi,  w.  abl.  93,  479,  no.  9. 

perhibere,  in  pass.,  w.  noin.  and  inf.,  except 
ill  pit',  ami  pliip.  100,  S7  loll. 

periculosum  est,  w.  subj.  Inf.  cl.  000,  3. 

periculum  est,  w.  snbj.  Nc-cl.  613,  3. 

peril,  I  am  lost.  303,  2. 

perinde  {proind<),  adv.  of  manner,  itf»  use 
•Z\l  5;  as  Hvnd.  ant,  of  compar.  cl.  of 
ciiiality  745,  3".  Conjs.  u.scd  after  it  lb.  iVr- 
i///i^  Hf  —  arrordincc  aa  lb. 

Periodical  co-ordination,  definition  473,  4  ; 
made  bv  demonstratives  lb.  ;  by  nam, 
itaqne,  etc.  474,  5;  hy  relatives  .VJO,  !»  loll.; 
by  qnnnuiuam  and  f7.-«  098,  Vi. ;  0!»9,  14. 

Periphrastic  conjugation,  d<linition  and  divis- 
ion 1-20,  503.  Tliore  is  no  peri|)brastic 
conjii'-ation  of  the  i)re8cnt  participle,  as 
in  Enu'l.  12<i,  131. 

Periphrastic  future,  conjnuation  and  use  of 
l-i\k,  ."j07  loll.  :  \v.   ridiri,  iiist.  of   w.  e.<.<!e 
130,  141,  n.    Present  ten.-e  of  periphr.  Int. 
1.30  141    IinixTf,  ordinarv  and  hypotbeti- 
cal'iise  131,  143;  132,  141:  729,  27;  as  equi- 
valent of  a  verb  of  resolution,  w.  quasi- 
pubohliqne  clause  dep.  on  it  407,  1,  no.  d  ; 
its  elliptical  construction  w.  Si-cl.  714,  20, 
A.     Imp.  of  per.  fut.   as  epistolary  tense 
3.59,  1).— Perl,  of  periphr.  lut.  131,  143  loll.; 
729,  27.     Pin  p.  of  periphr.   fut.   133,    140 
Future   tenses  of  periphr.   fut.    133,   147. 
Pres.  inf.  134,  .508;  nom.  w.  inf.  i;i.5,  149; 
perf.  inf.  i:«,  1.51.    Equivalents  of  periphr. 
flit,  when  the  verb  is  in  pass,  voiee  130, 
509.    Circumlocution  by  iri  137.  158.— Use 
of  snbjuiic.  of  periphr.  fut  in  dep.  clauses 
(periphrastic  tenses)  448  foil.;  after  verbs 
of  fearini,'448,  2;  after  verbs  of  doubtinj? 
449,  3;  in  dep.  questions  449,  4:  in   sul)- 
oblique  clauses  in  general  449,  li ;  not  in 
final  clauses  449.  5;  not  as  converted  tense 
of  a  dep.  fut.  4.50.  C.  Siibjunc.  of  ordiiuiry 
tenses  colloquially  used  inst.  of  subjuuc. 
])eriphr.  fut.  451.  I). 

Periphrastic  gerundial,  140  foil.  Meaninir  of 
140,  511;  UU,  102.  Kelaiion  to  periphr. 
fut.  140,  100.  Passive  meaninj;  of  depo- 
nents as  periphr.  «.'erundives  140, 101.  Dift'. 
between  gerund,  and  gerundive  141,  512  ; 

142,  513.  Gerundives  must  be  transitive 
verbs  142, 513  ;  gerundive  form  of  vti,frui, 
fungi,  and  jwCin,  unusual  in  good  i)rose 

143.  n.  1.— Periphr.  gerundials  take  their 
passive  agent  in  dat.  143,  2  ;  when  ab  is 
used  as  pass,  agent  113,  117.  Impersonal 
cerund  of  intransitive  verbs  143,  165. 
Impers.  srerunds  \v.  transitive  acciis.  in 
Varro  and  Lucretius  143,  100.  Rendering 
ol  impers.  gerunds  143,  1(W.  —  Periphr. 
gerundials  in  perf.  and  imp.  ind.  11.5,  514; 
w.  hyuothetical  meaning  171  ;  727,  24  foil.; 
In  perf.,  imperf.,  and  piup.  subjunc.  14.5, 
172  foil.    Future  of  periphr.  gerund.  351, 


3;ofprc3.  and  perf.  inf.  146,  515.  Verba 
which  are  construed  w.  gerundial  pred. 
inf.  140.  175  ;  .593,  9  ;  594,  1  ;  595,  5.  Perf. 
inf.  w.  non-hypothetical  meaning  147,  176. 
Participles  of  the  periphr.  gerundive  (i.  e. 
verbal  adjs.  in  duf<)  w.  the  force  of  attrib- 
utive or  al)s.  adjs.,  or  of  rel.  cl.  149,  182. 

Periphrastic  (perfect*  participles  with  the  copu- 
la; 127  loll.  DitV.  between  iieriphrastic 
l)re8.  inmdtns  sum)  and  perf.  pass.  127, 
133.  Dill",  in  the  past  tenses  127,  134  ;  128, 
137.  Periphrastic  pluperfect  {avuVusfue- 
ram)  128.  130.  The  two  fut.  tenses  128, 
137.  Periphr.  inf.  128,  138.  Ccmsecutiou 
of  tenses  in  clauses  dep.  on  the  pres.  of 
the  periphr.  participle  428,  4  foil. 

peritus,  w.  gen.  118,  109;  w.  gerundial  gen. 
Itil.  207. 

permanere,  to  abide  by,  generally  constr.  w. 
ill  9.5,  r)8. 

permissu,  ])v  permission  242,  op.s. 

permittere,  w.  tlat.  and  obj.  inf.  104.  83  ;  w. 
gerundial  dat.  103,  209  ;  w.  dat.  of  the  pers 
along  w.  imperativecl..597,rt.  Exceptional 
constructions  of  j^termittere  lb.  Original 
meaning  of  permittere  vt  .597,  n.  Ii.  Per- 
7ni(tere  vtlictatlb.—W.  parlicii)ial  gerund- 
ive 148,  17.-«. 

permotus,  w.  abl.,  as  circumlocution  of  mo- 

live  11!»,  115. 

perpellere,  construct icm  of,  see  mov^re. 
perquam,  adv.  of  intens.  202,  3. 
perseverare,  to  abide  by,  generally  constr.  w. 

ill  95,  .5S. 

perspectus,  w.  dat.  119,  112. 
perspicuum  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  600,  2. 
persuaders,  w.  dat.  89  ;  \\.  Ut-cl.,  or  Inf.  cl. 
according  to  meaning  594, 1  ;  w.  impera- 
tive <lause  59.5,  4.  ,..n   .m- 
perterritus,  w.  abl.  =  from  fear  of  119,  115. 
pertinax,  w.  gerundial  alter  <td  192.  5. 
pertinere,  w.  ad  14,  11 ;  w.  f.r'"»tiia    after 
ad  190,  M),  1  ;  w.  ace.  of  distance  220,  6. 
J'ntiiiet,  impers.,  how  used  and  constr. 
622,  3.  .^       . 
pervenire,  to  arrive,  constr.  w.  ace.  alter  tn 
37.  f.7. 

pervincere,  construction  of,  see  rincere. 
pes   as  measure-unit  115,  101  loll.  ;  jus  qua- 
drat  us  110,104. 

petere,  w.  imperative  cl.  .595,  3. 
piget,  impers.,  w.  logical  suhj.  in  ncc.  107, 
«H) ;  w.  ace.  along  w.  gen.  99,  484  ;  w.  Subj 
(iuod-cl.,  Subj.   Inf.   cl.  abmg  w.  ace.  of 
loi:ical  subj..  or  w.  pass.  Inf.  cl.  018,  1. 
pignori  dare  2.57.  2. 
pingui  (crassa)  Minerva  li^l,  obs.  1. 
Place   re.allon  of.  how  e.\pr.  21.5,  54S. 
placere,  w.  dat.  «^9.     Plact.  impers.,  takes 
its  log.  subj.  in  dat.  107,  90.     Dift".   m.-an- 
ings  and  constructions  o\' pfartt,  in  respect 
tolts  subjects  and  ol)jec*s  616,  8  lull,     /b'i 
placet  7-i'Z\  11. 
plaudere,  w.  dat.  89. 
play  on  the  violin,  bow  rendered  9.),  62. 
plenus,   w.  gen.  118,  1U9  ;  w.  abl.  118,  110; 
119,  116. 


I 


pleriquc  in  the  nom.,  as  adjunct  to  abl.  abs. 
170,1  (foritsuseasindef.  lorm-adj.,see  P.I.) 
plerumque,  temp.  adv.  -222,  9. 
pluere,  w.  abl.  9.5,  62;  as  pred.  inf.  without 

subj.  aco.  0-29,  •>. 
Pluperfect  indicative,  use  of  .340  foil.     Denot- 
ing siate  :W>.  1;  exceptionally  of  actions 
happening  at,  or  after  tiie  time  spoken  ot 
346.  3.     Plup.  deponent  w.fueram  ;i47,  7. 
Plup.  w.  force  ol  a  future-pluperfect  :i55, 
8;  w.  force  of  a  fiit.  perf.  358.  .5.    Episto- 
larv  pluperf.  357,  77  ;  -3.58,  4.    Plup.  in  cl.  of 
c«>ntini:ent  action  329  foil.,  OBS.  1  and  3; 
:«0.  4  and  5.  Plup.  ind.  iu  temporal  Quum- 
cl.  not  referring  to  continirent  action  0.52, 
14;  in   princ.  sent,  of  appositive  Quum- 
cl.  652,   16;  331,  3.    In   PosUiuam-cl.   601 
full.      Plup.   of  repeated   action,  W>2.   C. 
Plup.  after  pattijuam  =  ever  since  664.  2; 
in  Anteqiiam-cl.  609,  0;  in  Dum-cl.  {dnm 
=  whilei  072,  4;  w.  d'/m  =  alter  (collo- 
quially)  07:3,    n.*;    in    Si-cl.   of   doubtful 
reality  703.  Ii. :  703,  6'.— Plup.  ind.  of  po- 
tential and  onlinarv  verbs  used  in  hypo- 
thetical sense  728.  27;  730. 
Pluperfect  (Engl.)  rendered  by  Latin  imperf. 
;i40  4;  721,  17  loll.  ;  by  Lat.  imp.  <»r  perf. 
111(1.  379,  5;  728,  27.     In  cl.  introduced  by 
'tiir  rendered  by  Lat,  imperf.  subjunc. 
after  dam  679,  18.    In  cond.  cl.  of  virtual 
nou-realitv   and    indef.    cond.    cl.,  corre- 
gponding'to  Lat.  imperf.  subjunc.  715.  C; 
the  same  in  i)eriods  on  non-reality  724,  17 
foil.—' One  would  have  said'   etc.  =  di- ^ 
cerex  etc.  .379.  3. 

Pluperfect  subjunctive  in  optative  sent.  38-3, 
0;  iu  declarative  sent.  379,  4  ;  in  temporal  | 
Quum-d.  651,  14;   in  Autequam-cl.  070,9; 
671.  10:  in  cond.  cl.  of  non-reality  724,  16. 
llvpothetical  plup.  snbjunc.  generally  re- 
quire preterite  cou-^eciitioii  iri  clauses  dep. 
ou  them  430.  8.     Exceptions  431,  9. 
plus,  quantitative  abs.  comp.  adj.  (see  P.  \.\ 
I'lu'i,  as  ai)s.  adj..  followe  1  by  quam-cl. 
751,  0.     Pluif,  w.  pirtitive  gen.  in  numeral 
and   intensive  compari-on  752,  1   and  3; 
754.  6.      Denotintr   numeral  excess  (plus 
decern)  752,  3.      Fide-f  pins  quam  Pu/nca 
7.53.  .5.     P/a'i  (accus.)  used  adverbially  263, 
2  ;  754.  7  foil.     Its  ditl".  from  7na:/is  751,  A, 
foil.      See    viaqis.—'^on  pl"s  quam  =  as 
little  as  7.57,  A,  foil  ;  =  as  much  as  7.58, 
Ji ;  non  ;?''/<  quam  after  another  negation 
757,   A.—Pl'/sc'dam   w'vh  quam  751,  6.— 
Plitrea.  more,  as  syndetic  ant.  of  compar. 
clauses  relerriiiL'  to  unlike  numbers  752, 
1  —PliiH'i  as  «ren.  of  price  and  value  270, 
^:^.-^riurimam  (mostly)  as  adv.  of  intens. 
263  31;  when  plurimc  is  used  in  its  place 
2()1.  li.—Plurinii  and  pluriino  as  gen.  and 
alil.  of  value  and  price  270,  35  ;  272,  1.  _ 
pcBnitet,  impers.,  t.ikes  its   logical  subj.  in 
ace.  107,  90;  constr.  w.  ace.  along  w.  gen. 
99  481  •  w.  subj.  inf.  alcmg  w.  acc.  ot  the 
io'Vical  subj.;  w.  Sub).  Quod-cl.,  or  pass. 
IiPf.  cl.  618,  11.    Pcenitendum  est,  as  peri- 
phrastic gerund  149,  n.* 


poUere  w.  phm,  not  maqis  755,  C. 

poUiceri,  constr.  w.  Inf.  cl.,  the  pred.  mf. 
beiii-'  in  peripliraslic  fut.  134,  2;  593,  11. 

ponderis  esse,  270.  3. 

pondo,  standard  of  weight;  its  gram,  treat- 
ment 275,  1. 

pone,  prep  w.  acc,  use  of,  22,  37. 

porro,  temp.  adv.  244,  10. 

poscere.,  w.  doubU;  acc  100  480;  how  constr. 
in  tin-  pass.  101,  73.  Not  constr.  w.  im- 
perative cl.  in  good  prose  595.  3. 

posse  (w.  obj.  inf,  see  P.  I.),  cimstr.  w.  acc. 
of  a  neuter  form-adj.  85,39,2;  w.  quanti- 
tative neuter  form-adjs.  {pluiiinnm  posse, 
etc.)  104,  82;  w.  plus,  not  viaqi^  75.5,  C. 
Its  use  in  the  ind.  w.  force  of  Engl,  poten- 
tial mood  w.  'can'  379,  5;  its  hypotheti- 
cal  use  in  ind.  of  a  pret.  tense  727,  24  foil. ; 
meaning  of  its  fut.  tense  351,  .3. 

possible,  '  It  is  possible  that,'  how  rendered 
107,  493,  1.  '  While  it  is  possible  '  289.  n. 
27  'It  is  not  possible.'  292,  n.  99. 
post  prep.  w.  acc,  use  of  22,  435  ;  diff.  from 
secundum  22,  2  and  3;  w.  reversed  parti- 
cipial phrase  198.  545;  diff.  from  abi.  abs. 
198  OBS.  1  ;  w.  the  force  of  jwstqnaw  (= 
ex  qwt  femim-e)  665.  9.  Idiomatic  use  w. 
ordinal  nu-merals  233,  2.  Post,  used  as 
adv.  w'.  abl.  of  diflerence  22.  :«:  as  adv. 
or  prep.  w.  numeral  expressions  of  time 
2:32.  Verbs  compounded  w.  post  take  dat. 
90    45. 

postea,  compound  temporal  adv.  expl.  217, 8; 
w.  an  imperf.  310.  2. 

posthac,  compound  ti^mp.  adv..  expl.  2i7,  8. 

Postiuam-clauses,  require  ind.  0,59,  1.     Eight 

pa^sa^es  extant  in  which  Postquam-cl  are 

constr.  w.  subjunc.  Jb.     Attributive  Po<t- 


nuam-cl.  w.  plup.;  their  different  significa- 
tion- 600,  41,  2.  — Postquam-cl.  pmperly 
comparative  clauses  GfO,  41.  2.  Tenses 
after  postquam  mostly  correspond  t<»  the 
tenses  in  indep.  sent.  660.  42,  1;  663  5. 
Use  of  tense  when  ;w.-/7>/(-»n  means  'after 
(iOO.  1.  Perf.  or  plup.  66!.  3  ;  601.  24  ;  662, 
C  and  D.  Imperf.  ind.  0(i2.  5  foil.  His- 
torical pres.  0«54,  6.    Diff.  of  jw.^fqnam  from 

quum  w.  plup.  ^"'Xi-  «"^^  '^^*  *^^l\  ^  '^''; 
Posfquam  =  as  soon  as  t;02.  />.  —  Use  and 
ten-^e  of  Postquam-clause  when  postquam 
means  ex  quo  tempore  (since)  664,  7  foil. 
Perf.  or  plup.  »)4.  7:  pres.  664,  8.    Post- 
quam  -  dum,  quoad,  quamdiu  664,  8;  = 
whereas,  while  60,5,  11.     W.  force  of  c«m- 
cessive  cl.  ()()5. 10. -Postquam-cl.  referring 
to  indef.  time  005.  10:   w.  pred.  in  pres. 
661.  1.2;  664,  8  ;  66.5,  10  and  11.   Postquam 
not  used  =  tohenever  {\W.  2. 
postremus,  as  accessory  predicate,  and  ditf 
irom   uttimus  2.50,  4.     Postreino,   adv.  of 
time,  use  and  diff.  from  tandem  and  dent- 
que  223    5.    PostrSmum  est,   w.  Subj.  Ut- 

postridie,  different  constructions  22o,  11;  W. 

acc  in  regard  to  dates  227,  3. 
postulare,  w.  imperative  clause,  or  pass.  Inf. 

cl.  595,  3. 


802 


INDEX. 


potens.  w.  gen.  118,  109;  w.  gernndlal  gen. 

It.l,  -^07. 
potestas,  (liff.  from  impennm  197,  n.  1. 
potiri  w.  }il>l.  «).i.  54 :  1)3,  4?.».  n.  5»;  f^oini'times 

w. -.11. '.»2.478  (/>o/7W   (iidlidr'tm  284.  Ex. 

m.^  Treated  as  transitive  verb  in  the  lonn 

of  a  •gerundive  l.">2,  18S. 
potissimus,  a-  ace.  pred.  250,  5;  w.  gcrundml 

alter  <i  I  1U2,  1  (for  ]X>(hdmu7n  as  particle, 

sec  P.  I.). 
potius,  its  use  in  romp.  el.  7.58,  9.     \d('^ire, 

ant)  pafius,  without  coinp.  cl.  7.")9,  9.     I'o- 

(ius  fi'ft  out  with  velie  and  a  comp.  Quain- 

el.  7f,;i.  1:3.  .       .  , . 

pound,  how  expr.  in  the  lelation  of  weight 


y..). 


I  loll. 


practical,  how  rendered  254,  n.  18,  19. 

pra,   prep.  vv.  abl.,  use  33,  447.    As  adv. 

coiisir.  w.  comp.  cl.  764,  14,  n.  4.  ^Verbs 

compounded  w.  pnv  take  dat.  90,  45. 
prabere,  w.  pariieipial  «^.-rundive  148,  178. 

,Si-  pnedere  as  factitive  verb  w.  double  ace. 

101.  A. 

prsBcipere,  oonstr.  like  imperdre,  see  tliis». 
pracipiteaa  ire.  arctss.  j)rt'd.,  expl.  24'.»,  3. 
praecipue,   in   apodosis  of  comp.   Quum-cl. 

ti.'):.  .\  (u-e  as  parti<le,  see  V.  \.\ 
praeclarus  w.  ahl.  120.  lir..     Pnedari'^.^tmu/^ 

lihtr.  different  from  pnccIanMine  H-npfi':" 

lih^r  1!«».  n.  W.—PnTcldruin  est^  w.  Subj. 

Ut-cl.  or  Inf.  cl.  (111.  5. 
praecurrere,  w.  dat.  or  ace.  91,  475. 
prfflditas,  w.  abl..  idiomatically  used  119.  ii.5. 
praeesse,  w.  dat.  87,  48^4  ;  88,  n.  1;  w.  gcrundial 

d.it.  If.:}.  209. 
prsferre,  w.  dat.  14,  11. 
praeficere  (pmfMoiere),  w.  ace.  of  pers.  and 

dat.  of  thing  98,  C9;  w.  geruudial  dat.  163, 

20'.». 
praequam,  adv.  compar.  conjanction,=  com- 

pai.'d  with'  7t)4,  1 4.  n.  4. 
praDscribere,  constr.  like  imperdre,  see  this. 

praesente  eo  184.  1. 

prsBsidio  relinqaere  257.  9.  t»    t  ^ 

prssertim   (   luphalical   particle,  pee  V.  I.). 

J'/iBserfii/i  q>i'i  w.  siibjanc.  .572,  4  ;  priP^^er- 

tiin  qninn  =  the  more  so  because',  always 

w.  sul)junc.  655,2;  synonym  of   vuuiine 

f/nnl,  eo  marfis  iininna)  quod  684,  5. 

prsstans  w.  abl    120,116. 

prsstare,  w.  abl.  93,  47!»,  no.  2.  As  verb  of 
jlo  u"-  w.  ul  or  n>'  600.  3.     .SV  pvixMare.  as 

factitive  verb,  w.  d*)uble  ace.  101.  A.  Pne- 

/>7^/^  impers.,  w.   Subj.   Inlcl.  622,  6;   w. 
comparative  Ouamel.  703,  14. 

prasto  esse.  w.  dat.  89. 

prastolari,  w.  dat.  or  ace.  01,  4.o. 

prater,  prep.  w.  ace,  use  of  23.  436 ;  w. 
Ouod-cl.  { prfsfer  id  quod)  60».  2;  w.  the 
f.irceof  ni4  after  ne<;ations740,  5 :  w.  com- 
p.u-ative  Quam-cl.  {pnefer  q'lain)  .64,  14, 
110.5.  Neuter  verbs  comp.  w.i;/a;fer  be- 
come transitive  8<»,  473. 

praterea,  adv.  23,  39;217,  8.        .      ,   ^^o  r 

non  pratermittere,  constr.  w.  Quin-cl.  603^  •>• 

praterquam  quod  607,  2  ;  prceterquam  st  «39, 
3,  no.  6. 


precari,  w.  imperative  cl.  59.'>,  3. 
preces,  w.  attributive  Ut-cl.  625,  C 
Predicate  (as  member  of  the  predicative 
phrase,  j^'overned  by  the  subj.,  see  V.  I.). 
Dili*,  beiween  predicate  and  jjredicalion 
480,  n.  *.  Tredicate-nouns,  and  adjctived 
in  the  relation  of  completing  jired.  »19,  /?. 
2.  For  the  dillVrent  cases  of  completing 
preds.  (pred.  nom.  eic.)  see  the  articles»  be- 
low. Completinir  preds.  of  pubj.  inls.  and 
Inf.  clauses  placed  In  ace.  75.  4ti3.  Airrw- 
ing  in  the  dat.w.  the  obj.  of  impers.  preds. 
(Ikef  mi/ii  esfie  aecuw)  75,  19  ;  <)17,  9.  Cai*e 
of  completinir  preds.  dep.  on  obj.  infs.  75, 
2.  Completint:  preds.  dep.  on  participle:» 
76,  20.  Accessory  predicates,  see  this  ar- 
ticle. 

Predicate-nominative.  Verbs  requiring  it  73, 
4(»2  (For  Its  aicrtrment  w.  subj.  see  P.  I.). 
In  the  neuter,  when  the  siihj.  is  mascu- 
line or  feminine  74,  14.  Dep.  on  ohj.  inf. 
75.  2.  Sometimes  w.  force  of  pred  dat. 
451,  n.  6. 

Predicate -genitive.  U^'C  and  classes  of  *6, 
464:  77  foil.  Possessive  adjs.  in  i)lace  of 
pred.  gen.  77,21.  Pred.  gen.  in>tead  of 
j)red.  nom.  (inorix  est,  etc.)  8»,  467;  con- 
sistiui;  of  a  gerundive  phrase  l«»l,  2(>< ;  de- 
noting purpose  in  later  writers  161,  obs. 
Pred." gen.  w.  factitive  verbs  l(^2,  76. 
Pred.  gen.  w.  rel.  clauses  in  su'junc. 
{f>ju!i  rifi  e,<t  qui)  562,  E;  w.  Subj.  clauses 
«115.  11. 

Predicate-dative,  as  dat.  of  the  possessor  81, 
4C>8;  denotiiijr  nomenclature  (w.  rtomeu)  82, 
31.  Dirt",  between  dat.  and  gen.  of  the 
possessor  82.  32.— Abstract  pred.  dat.,  or 
double  dat.  S2,  469.  Dat  of  the  person 
often  left  out  83,  33.  Abstract  dat.  w. 
factitive  and  other  verbs  8:^,  34 ;  2.56.  obs.  2. 
As  access,  pred.  w.  vi-rbs  otln-r  than  esse 
96,  64  and  »15.  Pred.  dat.  w.  Subj.  clauses 
615.  11  :  617.  9.  , 

Predicate-accusative,  as  completing  pred. 
dep.  on  hictitive  verbs  loi,  487  ;  as  compl. 
pred.  of  pn-d.  inf.  in  Inf.  c!.,  see  these. 
Predicate -ablative,  as  abl.  of  quality  t-O,  27 
aiul  28.  Abl .  of  quality  as  accessory  pred- 
icate-aid. 256.  OBS.  1.  Other  accessory 
predicate-ablatives  2.55,  21  ;  2.5.5,  3.  Pred. 
abl.  as  pred.  in  the  construction  of  abl. 
abs.  171,  530.  _  „    .  .  , 

Predicate-clauses  480.   610.     Definition  and 
]).  culiarities  4S6.  s;  48«),  n.*.     I).p.  on  rftVfi 
48«»,  9;  on  /(«•f/^486,  10;  on  verbs  of  say- 
ing,  askini;,     and    commanding  4S8,    11. 
Predicate  Thai-clauses  6>8.  30. 
Prepositions,  definition,  and  functions  in  the 
sentciu  c  7.  4?4  :  S.  2  and  3.     Deiivation  7, 
1.    Objective  and  at. ributive  use  8,  3.  L.-jiJ 
of    retlexive   pronouns   after  them   9,   7. 
Cases  required  by  preps.  11: 12.    Preps,  on 
which  gerundials  may  be  made  dependent 
188,  2:i6.     Ccdlocation  9,  6.     When  placed 
after  relative  adjs.  dep.  on  them  497,  6. 
Li-Jt  of  i)reps.  12. 
Present  indicative  298  foil.    Threefold  nature 


IKDEX. 


803 


of  this  tense  298,  567.    No  distinction  of 
forms  for  progressive  and  ncm-progressive 
actions  298,  3.     Present  tense  denoiin«: 
contemp.n-aneonsness  w.  the  speaker,  has 
ft  twofold  meaning  298,  41.     Pres.  tense 
referring  to  actions  true  for  all  times  2!)1>, 
2:  referring  to  the  sayings  etc.  ol  known 
persons  in  time  past  .JOO,  44  :  301.  1  and  2 
W.   force  of  Engl.  pres.  perl.  '-iOH    4.^  ;  of 
Engl,  preterite  (historical  pn-sent)  •'<'1;4.> 
Hist   pre-*,  w.  force  of  imperf.  312.  5;  .^«, 
1-  after  nbi,  ut,  etc.  665,  1;  in  Postquam- 
cl    «164    6 ;  in  D(mec  Cl.  680,  22.     Consecu- 
tion y,t  tenses  dep.  (m  historical  l)resents 
301   3      Pres.  w.  force  of  Enud.  fut.  .348,4; 
w.  'force  of  "dependent   fut.  pres.  or  fut. 
nerf  3."»5.  6.    Pres.  rendered  by  progressive 
form  of  Emil.  preterite  320,  3.     Pres  im  . 
in  Post-q:i.im-cl.  corresponding  to  bniri. 
pres.  perf  664.8:  «M55,  10 :  corresponding 
10  End.  presents  after  'wliereas,    'while. 
6«»5.  iT.    In  Ante(piam-cl.  «»«»8.  1  and  2.    In 
Dum  cl.  {dum  --=  while),  referring  to  past 
time  672,  2  and  3:  673,  1  and  2.     In  sub- 
oblique  Dum-d.  672,3:  076,11.    In  cond. 
cl   o\  douldlul  reality  702.  B:  711,  15;  w. 
foVce  of  fut.  pres.  7o2,  li;  in  hypothencal 
periods,  referring  to  syllouisms  724,  lo. 
Present  subjunctive.    lu  indep.  sent  as  sub- 
iuiic    of  iTiiarded  statement  3.8,  1;  as  in- 
terrogative subjunc.  :iS1.  1;  w.  force  of  po- 
tential fut.  381.2;  in  imperative  and  opta- 
tive  sent.  .382,   1-4:  38:^.  3-6. --Pres.  sub- 
junc. in  dep.  clauses  as  regular  tense  o 
ores,   consecution   414,   603.      As    logical 
tense  dep.. .n  pret.  preds.:  see  Connecuhon 
of  tenses.     Pres.  subj.  in  Antequam  cl.  66;, 
<[•  (;(}8,  1  and  2;  in  Dum-cl.  {dum  =  till) 
678,  16:  after  r///m  and  dummodo ^ 'pro- 
vided that'  67»i,  13  foil  :.bi  Quo  id-cl.(  = 
till)  67M    19-  in  cond.  periods  ol  doulitlul 
reality  709,  10  loll.;  in  «oud.  periods  ol  non- 
reality  721,  9  and  10;  726.  21;  iioetically  in 
hvDothetical  perii)ds  in  place  ol  plup.  siihj. 
7->l     10      Pres.  subjunc.  in  cond.  clauses 
w^hi'ii  the  thesis  is  in  the  imperf.  subjunc. 
7>2   11  •  72.3,  13:  724,  14. 
Present  tense  (Engl.)  rctidered  by  Lat    per- 
fect -m,  43;  by  Lat.  future  ?i^3,  «6  :  in  tem- 
poral (lauses  bv  Latin  perl.  ind.  hl.j,  3. 
Present-perfect  (En-1.)  expr.  by  Lat.  plup. 
3.5.S.  4  :  after  'till,'  by  pres.  subjunc.  after 

duni  678.  17.  j       ;„  t  »f 

Presidential  elccUon,  how  to  render  in  Lat. 

Preterite  'consecution,    see     ConMCution    of 

Preterite  tense  iFM<:\,)  \n  the  P/ogressive  form 
rendered  bv  Latin  imi)erf.  (bee  It/U)er- 
ferf) :  by  Latin  present,  320.  3. 

pretium;  a.lj<.  used  av.  it  to  qualify  the  idea 

%,f  price  and  value  267,  33:  26.,  ons.  2. 

Price,  adverhial  rcdation  of.  ^fe  T|';,'//  ,,  - 

'price  for  a  trip  to,'  how  translated  21»4,  n.  ». 

pridem,  temporal  adv.  224.  10. 

nridie  different  construciKins  of  22.o.  11,  ^^. 


Quam-cl.  764,  14,  no.  5 ;  w.  Qnam-cl.  in 
Subjunc.  lb. 

nrimus  (as  ordinal  numeral,  see  P.  I.) ;  as  ac- 
cessory pred.  250,  1  foil.;  when  prtmuni 
and  pnmo  must  be  used  2.50,  2  and  6.  ini- 
muni  est  w.  subj.  Ut-cl.  «112.  7  UA\.-P)irna8 
iviere  279,  n.  b.— Prima  luce  228,  12. 

princeps,  w.  gerundial  gen.  159,  2;  as  acccs- 
^orv  i)red.  2.50,  4.  ^       t^  . 

prior  and  prius,  how  used  250,  4.  Pnm  w. 
force  of  potius  759,  9. 

Priusauam-clauses,  see  AnteqmmrClayj^  — 
J'riusquam,  noi  antequam,  is  used  when 
the  action  of  the  clause  has  failed  to  take 


ac 


"c.'in  regard  to  dates  227,  2;  w.  comp. 


place  (>69,  I.— Antequam,  not  priusquani, 
used  when  the  clause  is  attributive  66.,  2. 
Pnuyquam  referring  to  fut.   action  3o4, 

pro  "pr'epos.  w.  abl.,  use  U,  448;  w.  gerun- 
dial abl.  197,  247;  w.  participial  reversed 
]>hrase  199,  4.    VV.  Quod-cl.  (pro  eo  quod) 

607   2 
probabiie  est,  w.  subj.  Inf.  cl.,  or  Subj.  Ut- 

probarc'in  pass,  voice,  takes  Ut-cl.  in  place 
of  Inf.  cl.  608,  27,  2. 

probatus  w.  dat.  119,  112.  . 

proconsul,  proprator,  etc.  how  expr.  in  classi- 
cal Latin  31.  n.  4.  1  i    n^    qq.  «, 

procul,  adv.  of  distance,  w.  abl.  114,  98,  w. 
(//>,  or  II.  locative  case  220,  7. 

prodesse,  w.  dat.  89 ;  w.  ace.  of  a  neutei 
form-ad j.  85,  39,  2  ;  w.  pLns,  not  magis  joo, 
C.  I^'odest,  impers.  (not  m  classical 
prose),  how  constr.  622,  5. 

proficerc,  w.  ace.  of  a  neuter  form-adj.  bo, 

pr'oflcisci,  w.  ace.  of  distance  220,  3.  In  perf. 
part,  as  pred.  abl.  172,  3. 

prohibere,  con-tr.  w.  ab  or  "^ ere  abl.  29,  48 , 
w.  transitive  ace.  along  w.  obj.  int.  KH, 
83  Prohibere,  to  prevent,  as  vert)  or 
doino-  w.  negative  aim,  constr.  w.  Q^pmt-^ 
nus  602.  5.  In  the  meaning  '  to  prohibit 
'  to  forbid '  w.  obj.  inf.  «102  n.  X-  ^on  pr^ 
hibere,  w.  quominvs  rareVy  w.  ^'^/j/^-J: 
n.  t :  w.  ne  603,  5;  603,  n.  t  w.  ut  after  dt 
jirohibeant'  lb.  ..   ,,  r  n 

proinde,  as  causal  adv.  281,  5  foil. 

prompted  by,  how  to  expr.  m  Lat.  119, 115 

5Stus  w  -erundial  dat.  164, 1 ;  w.  gerund- 

PronomiM? connection  of  sentences.  Definition 
and  nat.neof472,60i);  473,2.  Pronominal 
cov5rdination  and  subordination  4.3,  2. 

pronu3,w.  gerundial  after  «(/192  4^. 

nroue  iirep.  or  adv.  w.  ace.  2.5,  43.  ,24,  4U. 
Diff'  from  propter,  juxt a,  ad,  ^iu\  apud 
24  41  Construction  of  pro}ie  as  adv  of 
distance  220,  7.  Prope  est  ut  487,  a.-l  ro- 
nioraml  proximns,  w.  ace.  or  dat,  or  w. 
abl  after  a*  114.498;  w.  gerundial  dat. 
164  1  When  propior  and  proximus  take 
the'aciverliial,  and  when  the  adjective  form 

2.51,  «5.  Propins  and  P^'C^'^^ne^^ ^^'"^^'^^"^ 
ositions  w.  ace.  or  abl.  114,  <do.-Proxv 
mum  est,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  013,  7.  , 


I 


804 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


805 


propediem  (soon),  use  of  223,  4. 

propensus,  w.  irermidial  tUun-  ad  102,  4. 

proponere  w.  participial  «ronindivo  148,  178. 

P'-oprius,  w.  sjfii.  ordut.  119.  IVi.-  Propti'tm 
esf,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  Oil,  5;  w.  Subj.  luf. 
cl.  lb. 

propter,  pi'-p.  w.  ncc,  nse  of  93,  437:  w. 
p;ii  licipuil  rovers>cd  pbrases  191»,  3.  Com- 
pounds of  217.  8.  Propter  w.  ratio  282,  1. 
Propter  quein  {quos  etc.)  hk  aiusal  relaiive 
object  527,  d. 

propterea,  »'xpl.  217,  8.  r.«c  as  causal  adv. 
281,  'i\  2sl,  7.  Syiid.  aut.  ol'quod  and  quia 
♦i83,  3;  281,  7. 

prospicere  w.  dat.  or  ace.  accordini?  to  mean- 
iiiL'  '.»1,  475;  as  verb  of  strivinj,',  w.  nt  or 
tifi  ."!»•.»,  2. 

Protasis  and  apodosis;  meaninj;  of  these 
terms,  and  to  what  sentence»  tiiey  are  ap- 
plied 478,  7.  Protasis,  preceded  by  the 
t»ubj.  of  the  apodosis  478,  7.  In  comp. 
Quum-cl.  t).'")7,  2.  Not  confined  to  coud. 
peiiods  1(H),  n.  * 

protecting,  Vei-l)s  of,  constr.  w.  ab  20,  48. 

protenus,  local  adv.  210,  3;  temp.  adv.  224, 
10. 

prout,  according;  as,  748,  H. 

providere,  w.  dat.  or  ace.  01,  475.  Aa  verb  of 
striving  w.  uf  or  /le  ^M),  2. 

proximus  and  proxime,  sec  prope. 

prudens,  w.  L'fn.  US,  100. 

pubes,  collectively  =  younir  men  101,  n.  7. 

pudet  impers.,  takes  its  logi-al  subj.  in  ace. 
107.  90;  constr.  \v.  ace.  aiong  w.  <xen.  W, 
481.  W.  Stibj.  Quod.d.,  or  Sul>j.  inf.  alon;; 
w.  acc.  of  logical  subj.,  or  \v.  pass.  Inf.  cl. 
r.is.  11. 

pugnare,  as  verb  of  striving,   \v.  ut  or  tie 

cm.  2. 

pungit  me,  impers.  used,  w.  Snbj.  Quod.cl., 

snhj.  int..  or  pass.  Inf.  cl.  018,  11. 
Purpose,   relation  ol;    ila    exponent?,  283, 

putare  to  believe,  as  verbum  sentiendi  w. 
Inf.  cl.  588,  23  (see  P.  I.);  in  pass,  gen- 
enilly  takes  noni.  w.  inf.,  except  in  i>erl. 
and  plup.  lot»,  87  foil.  As  factitive  verb 
w.  double  acc.  102,  C.  Constr.  w.  jm) 
inst.ofw.  pred.  acc.  102,  75.  Future,  to 
estinmte,  takes  an  obj.  of  price  2»i7,  32,  2. 
llow  constr.  as  verb  of  esteeming  272,  1.— 
Putdbat  and putdv'U  337,  1. 

Qua  and  quactinque,  locative  interrog.  and 
relative  adv.  in  fourth  locative  ca^-  210; 
21S,  1  ;  400,  4.  Introducing  locative  clause» 
571.  r.Ki;  575,  1;  575,  C. 

quadrans,  =  one  fourth  110.  105. 

qu»,  8c«'  q>'i.  Qme  tua  est  humanita'^  (qx't 
<2.s'  priidtnthh  etc.)  =  pro  tml  hiniKtniidtt 
510,  I).  Qu(V  quu?H  ita  sint.  as  circumlo- 
cution of  a  causal  conj.,  to  connect  periods 
474.  0. 

quaBritur,  imperi'.,  \v.  interrogative  cl.,  how 
r.  n,!,red  391,  3. 

i  ,,  interrog.  and  rel.  adj.  of  the  qnalita- 
11  ve  class  40d,  4  (see  P.  I.t.     Qudlh  -  as, 


introducing,  compar.  cl.  of  quality,  w.  talis 
as  synd.  ant.  745,  2. 

qualiscunque  (aineclasa.  gnalUqiialiK),  indef. 
rel.  adj.  of  the  qualitative  class  400,  4; 
5(H),  5. 

qualiter,  po>^tclas?.,  rel.  adv.  of  the  qualita- 
tive class  49(i,  4. 

quam.  1)  =  how,  interrog.  adv.  of  intensity 

201,  30;   201,   ons.    2.     Mi  rum   quam  v\v. 

202,  3.  Quam  nihil,  or  quam  a  on  =  how 
little  264,  .5.-2)  relat.  adv.  ol  intens.,  in- 
tnuliicing  <^uam-cl.  wiih  synd.  ant.  tarn 
743  foil.;  750,  .3.  Kepetition  of  the  C(mi- 
pared  adj.  or  adv.  7.50,  3.  Quam  and  quan- 
tum, \\.  superlative  in  the  meanini:  'as 
much  as  possible'  2»K5,r).— 3).  Quam  as 
comp.  conj..  see  Comp.  ciau.<en.  Quam  in 
ccmip.  cl.  of  quality  after  a/ius  w.  a  nega- 
tion 741,  2.  Quam  *i,  its  use  and  relation 
to  quasi  7ti2,  F. 

quamdiu,  how  long,  as  long  a?,  as;  interrog. 
and  rel.  adv.  of  time  222,  9;  225,  1.  An- 
alysis 074,  7.— (iuamdiu-clauses  Uelong  to 
the  same  class  of  temporal  clause»  aa 
Dum-clauses  and  (iuoau-cl.  (se»;  the.se) ; 
their  synd.  ant.  t)74,  0.  Always  w.  ind. 
074,  8.  Tense  the  sauu*  as  that  of  princ. 
j)red.  if  the  latter  is  non-j)reterite  075,  8; 
if  i>reterite,  the  tense  is  the  rEuFE(  T 
070,  10. 

quamlibet,  concessive  quantitative  adv.  00.3, 
.4  ;  |)ostclass.  as  conjunction  =  quamcis 
001,  //. 

quamobrem,  nse  as  interrog.  and  rel.  adv. 
■JSO,  4(1;  280.  4;  as  adv.  ol  purpose  28.3.  5(Hj. 
Used  lor  periodical  connection  inst.  of 
itaq'O'  etc.  521.  2;  281,  G. 

quamquam,  concessive  conj.,  originally  in- 
def. rel.  adv.  501.  '.♦.  In  anteclas<.  lauLtnige 
used  as  synonym  of  the  adv.  quumvis 
(iiowever  nuieln:  but  in  class,  lini^uage 
always  conj.  =  although  OlXi,  9.  >,'t»t  used 
in  Cjesar  lb.  Relation  t«)  f/*i  lb.  IJeirnlar 
mood  iNO.  lb.  Whejj  used  w.  subjunc. 
(i'.Mi,  U).—  Quawquatn  introducing  parti- 
cipial clauses  and  abl.  abs.  097,  11  ;  173,  2. 
As  coord,  conj.  for  i)eri(»dical  connection 
(=  however)  008,  12.  Use  ol  poteutiui 
subjunc.  i!i  such  sentences  lb. 

quamvis,  1)  concecsive  (juantitative  adverb 
(=  however),  qualilyiiiL'  adjs..  and  with- 
out intluence  on  mood  of  the  sent.  093,  A. 
Analysis  09.3.  4;  tm.  11.  Anieclass.,  post- 
class.,  and  \>ov{.=admodum  093.  .4.  Quam 
ru/ti.f.  quam  volet  etc.  in-t.  (A'quamrifi  II»., 
and  09».  J}.  Qualifying  impetjitive  preds. 
093,  Ji.  Quamii-<liett\h.  Qua  mi  is  nou, how- 
ever \\\Ue  tm.  H.—2)  Quamvis  as  conces- 
sive conj.  (=  however  much),  requires  the 
sui)junc.  Analy>is  of  this  const  ruction  094, 
v.  In  class,  "language  always  as  i?id(/. 
concessive  lb.  Is  made  del",  by  ' dcut 
est '  lb.  Quamvis  w.  ind.  00».  5.  In  silver 
Lat.  =  quamquam  (although)  095,  5.^  W. 
participles  and  abl.  abs.  09.5,  0;  173,  2. 
DilVerent  conception  of  quamvis  in  classi- 
cal and  postclass.  use  099,  n.  * 


qxiando,  1)  Interrog.  temporal  adv.  222,  7?.  9; 
22  2  n  +,  and  obs.  1.—  2.)  .As  temporal  conj. 
000,  4;  requires  ind.  059.  020,  1.— 3)  Aa 
causal  conj.;  dift".  Irom  quod,  quia,  etc. 
087,  13.     Not  used  in  Ciesar.  lb. 

quandocunque,  iiidef,  rel.  temporal  adv.  222, 
9;    lOS,  n.  ;  .501,  7. 

quandoque,  w.  force  of  yi/a/i/Zo  causal  087,n.t. 

quacdoquidem  =  qi/a/x/o  causal  ()87,  13. 

Quantitative  Form-adjectives  (-ee  P.  I.),  used 
in  acc.  neuier  (tantam  etc.)  to  express  iu- 
def.distance  221,  2. 

quantopere.  intern)g.  and  rel.  adv.  of  intens. 
2(il,  20;  49»),  4.  Introducing  adv.  comp.  cl. 
of  equal  intens.,  w.  tantojttre  as  synd.  aut. 
750,  3. 

quantulas,  in  the  meaning  '  how  little  '  204, 
5  ;  4!»<>,  4.     Quaiituluscunque  500.  5. 

quantumlibet,  w.  force  of  the  adv.  quamvis 
093.  n.* 

quantumvis,  adv.  of  intens.  203,  31.  In  silver 
L;it.  us  synonym  of  the  adv.  quamvis 
«.93.  Ji. 

quantus,  interrosr.  and  rel.  adj.  of  the  quan- 
titative class  490.  4  (see  P.  I.);  as  logical 
relative  in  parenthetical  clauses  518,  b; 
519.  D  (quantum  inteUigo,  as  far  as  I  aee. 
205,  0).  Introducing  comp.  cl.  of  like 
intensity  750,  2.  Quantum  (acc.  neuter), 
used  as  interroir.  and  rel.  adv.  of  intens. 
203,  31.  Difi".  from  quam  203.  2.  Intro- 
ducing adverbial  comp.  cl.  of  intensity 
after  fautum  750,  3.  When  quanto  is  used 
in  place  of  quantum  201,  3.  Quanto... 
/<j/?/o,  corrRsponding  to  ' the.  ..tke'  751,5; 
w.  'mi>-  3:iO.  b. 

quantuscunque,  and  quantusqnantus,  indef.  rel. 
a(lj<.  of  the  quantitative  class;  use  of  4%, 
4  ;  .500,  5. 

quapropter,  componnd  causal  adv.  217.  8; 
2si.  5.  As  connective  of  periods  =  itaque 
281,  0. 

quaqua  and  quacunque.  indef.  rel.  adva.  of 
ih.'  4lh  locative  ca.-e  210  :  490.  4. 

quare,  caua  d  rel.  adv.  280.  2.  Diff.  from  cur, 
quid  and  quamobrem  280,  4.  Use  of  527, 
a.  b.  c. 

quasi  (as  if),  compar.  componnd  conj.,  in- 
troducing hypothetical  comp.  clauses  743. 
3;  745,  2.  W.  subjunc.  according  to  law 
of  consecution  748,  5.  Used  before  parti- 
cir)les  and  abl.  abs.  748,  5  ;  173,  2.  Qua.n 
(quasi  v-ro)  used  to  introduce  exclamatory 
sent  for  periodical  coordination  481.  obs.; 
748,  T).  Qualifying  single  words  748,  7. 
Q'/asi  qui,  w.  subjunc.  .572,  '2.— Quasi  qni- 
dam,  q"a<i  {a'/)qms  719.  7. 
Quasi-oblique,  :iiid  quasi-subobliqu«* clauses.  An- 
alvsi-  kU,  ons ;  tlieir  use  404,  8S  foil.  Take 
siibjinic.  40»,  000. 

quatenus,  interroir.  and  rel.  adv.  222,  0;  4%, 
J.  Poetically  and  anteclass.  iiist.  of  quo- 
?ii<i/n.  as  causal  conj.  088,  15. 
quemadmodum,  as  interrog  and  rel.  adv.  of 
manner  240,  2;  as  compar.  adv.  =  vf,  w. 
synd.  ant.  sic  and  ita  740,  A  ;  in  similes 
746,  B  ;  in  parenthetical  clauses  747,  E. 


queri,  w.  acc.  86.  473 ;  w.  de  32,  54 ;  w.  Quod- 
d.  or  Inf.  cl.  598,  9. 

Questions,  dependent>ee  Tnterroqative  clavses. 

'  It  is  the  question  why  '  how  rendered  391.  3. 

qui,  rel.  ndj.  490.  4  (for  interrog.  qui.  and 
qni  as  disjunct  and  abs.  relative,  see  P.  I). 
How  rendered  490,  1.  Inflected  after  two 
declensions  240,  n.  t:  archaic  forms  (qvojus 
etc.)  497,  0.  I'se  of  the  abl.  form  qui  240, 
n.  t;  497,  6.— §'/?  =  ' as,'  when  introducing 
comp.  cl.  after  idetn  744,  1.  Omission  of 
its  predicate  lb.  Qui  n.  iiitrodu«-ing  hy- 
pothetical comparisons  lb.  Qui  tamen 
573, 5.—  Quo  171  numero=qvorum  in  ymmero 
528,  1.  Quo  pacto=quomodo  240,  2.  See 
lielative  clauses. 

qui,  interrog.  form-adv.  of  manner  239,  15; 
use  240,  2 ;  derivation  240,  n.  t.  Qtd= 
'  whv '  280,  3. 

quia,  "dlfT.  from  qnnd  causal.  682,  1-3.  Not 
used  in  C:esar  08:3,  3.  Its  synd.  ant.  lb. 
DifT.  from  quum  causal  683.  4.  W.  aub- 
junc.  of  indirect  statement  without  a  gov- 
erning verb  of  saying  etc.  089,  A  ;  w.  sub- 
junc. of  non-reality  090,  B.  Non  quia  (not 
that)  w.  subjunc.  090,  C'foll.;  090,  B;  w. 
ind.  091,  Z>;  092,  n.  *.  Nov  quia  (non  quod) 
replaced  by  Si-clauses  orEt  si-cl.717,  3. 

quicunque,  indef.  rel.  adj.  (see  Indef.  rela- 
tives) 490,  4.  Its  relation  xoqvisquis  499,  2. 
Lacks  the  gen.  plur.  lb.  Separated  b^ 
tmesis  lb.  Used  as  oidinary  indef.  adj. 
(  =  quisque)  Il>.     Sec  qul-^quis. 

quid  (neuter  of  quis,  see  P.  I).     Quid  in  the 
meaning  '  how  '  240,  2.     Quid^why  280,  3. 
^Quidf  quod'  — nay  even  (»07,  3. 
quidni,  why  not,  derivation  708,  n.  t.    Ita 
use.  and  diff.  from  quin  and  cwr  ;M>^/i  280, 4. 
quidquid,  see  quiaqnis. 
quin,  and  Quin-chiuses.    Diflerent  uses  and 
meanings  of  quin  ,540,  11  foil. 

1)  Quin.n^  iNTEKUOGATivE  negative  adv. 
(whv  not)  540,  A.  Dili".  Irom  cur  non  and 
q>/idni-2S0.  4.  Quin  (quin etiatn)-nay  even 
540,  .4.    With  imperative  11). 

2)  Quin  (wiiy  not)  as  kelative  ncgati^^e 
adveH)  (nulla  causa  est  quin  etc.)  547.  B  ; 
615,  12.  ^       . 

3)  Quin,  a?  con-tunction,  (a)  =  that,  m 
coMrLt:TiNG  Tuat-clauses  547.  C.  Dep. 
on  non  dubitdre  and  noncunctdri  589,  2  and 
3.  Dep.  on  other  verba  sentieiidi  w.  nega- 
tions 580,  4.  OriL'inal  meaning  of  quin  in 
these  clauses  (  =  why  not»  .589.  n.  *.  Intro- 
ducing subj.  cl.  (duf)ium  non  e.'^fquin.  non 
di.-crepat.  non  fallif)  009.  2;  010,  5  and  7. 
Introd.  attributive  That-cl.  62.5,  B,  1. — 
Dep.  on  verbs  of  ncL'ative  doing  w.  another 
negation  002,  5.  Its  relation  to  quominus 
603.  5.  Dep.  on  verbs  expressing  the  ideas 
'not  restraining,'  'not  omitting'  605.  7. 
Facere  non  possutn  quin;  fitri  iion  ixitest 
quin  lb.  Non  stat  per  ali'quem  quin  020, 
OBS.  2.  Alter  nihil  abe^t,  pautlum  abest 
etc.  628.  %.-(b)  Quin,  introduci^ig  modal 
TiiAT-CLAUSEs  after  a  negation  (  =  ut  non, 
rendered  by  '  uifhouf  w.  participial)  189, 


80G 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


807 


3 :  547,  n  {nemo  est  gain  etc.)    Not  to  he 

considered  as  h  contniction  of  the  nom. 

gul  with  non  547,  n.  t.     How  tar  it  may  he 

replaced  by  qui  7wn  etc.  547,  1);  548.     Re- 

placd  hy  ut  non  tVW,  a.  — (c)  A«  a  causal 

CONJUNCTION  {71011  quin  =  non  quia  non) 

«K),  C;  691,  n.  t.— Consecution  ol  tenses  in 
Qiiiii-dauses  4J.3  foil. 

quinarius  (coin),  vahie  of  2()8.  5. 

quincunx,  =^  live  tu"  Iftli  llti,  1(I5. 

quippe,  derivation  708.  n.  t.  Ditierent  iises 
ufti8H.  16.  W.  participial  construction  ()89, 
A.  Aw  a  coOrd.  conj.  —  mnn  CiHfl,  Ji.  Not 
to  he  consid'-red  as  suhordinatinf;  conj. 
689,  n.  t.  W.  Inf.  cl.  Ih.  Not  used  in 
CiPsar  689,  li.  Quippe  qui  572,  1.  Quippe 
quu/n  65.*),  2.     Quippini  708,  n.  t- 

quisque,  use  of  as  indef.  adj.  see  P.  I).  Is 
j)laced  in  the  nom.  as  adjunct  of  ;;erundial 
abl.  and  ahl.  ahs.  170,  2;  176,  1. 

quisquis  and  quidquid,  indef.  rel.  adj.  496,  4. 
I;^  relation  to  qaicunque  4Wi,  1  loll.  What 
cases  or  ^'//.o'V'/i.s-  are  in  ns«;.  and  in  wliat 
relations  ihey  occur  491»,  2  foW.—Quit/quid, 
as  adverbial  ace.  (=  how  far  po  ever)  .501, 
7.  -Quidquid  and  quodeunque  w.  partitive 
rjen.  =  quofquof  and  quotcunque  5(K),  4. 

quo,  1)  as  ordinary  abl.  of  tlie  abs.  neuter 
rel.  adj.  quod ;  quo  <=  qua  re)  j'aetutn  eM 
lit  474,  6.  As  abl.  of  difl".  hefore  compara- 
tives, (iuo...€0  ;i30,  6;  751,  5.-2)  As  inter- 
rogative and  rel.  adv.  of  the  3d  locative 
case  216  ;  496,  4.  Its  use  in  locative  clauses 
575,  616  loll— 3)  Inst,  of  vt  eo.  {a)  to  intro- 
duce final  clauses  283,  ^MS  ;  28t,  3 ;  .5.58,  8 
(M'G  llelative  dauset!)  ;  {h)  w.  modal  force 
afier  non  {non  quo  =  non  vf  eo.  or  non 
quod)  6'.K),  />'  ;  690.  6' foil. ;  691,  n.*  ;  after 
VKiqi^  quam  761.  E. 

quoad,  1)  as  interroj^ative  and  rel  adv.  (how 
far,  up  to  what  time,  as  far  as,  etc.);  deri- 
vation and  analysis  217,8;  222,9;  674,7 
{quoad  eju.<  fitri  jx>f(f(,  lb.).  2)  as  tempo- 
ral CON.;.,  {('()  =  as  loUL,'  a»  671,  622;  synd. 
ant.  674.  6;  tense  and  mood  of  its  ))re(l. 
674,  S  foil.  ;  676,  10  ;  323,  62  ;  (/>)  =  till  679, 
19 and  20.  Dil^'.  from  dumiunl  donee (iS\,2rK 

quocirca,  derivation  217,  8  ;  use  of  280.  1  foil.; 
as  causal  relative  adv.  281, 5  ;  as  periodical 
coniieciive  281.  6. 

quod,  relative  neuter  adj.  (for  it."  jreneral  use, 
see  r.  I.,  qui,  and  Relative  cl.);  w.  i)arti- 
tive  sen.  like  quodeunque  and  quidquid 
499,  1.  Quod  altinet  ad  518,  li  ;  quod  reli- 
quum  est,  quod  superest  —  as  to  the  rest 
518,  (' ;  quod  conimo.io  tuo  fieti  poasil  518, 
b  :  quod  flat  jxiee  tua  560,  2  ;  quod  t^eiani. 
quod  eoq'uovtjim  etc.  518,  ft  ;  .560,  2  ;  quod 
ajuiit  5i8,  a  :  quod  in  te  est  5<H),  2;  quod 
exsfef  Ih.  Quod  =  quod  atliru  t  ad  (»07,  3.— 
Quod  (iiccns.  neuterK  as  jieneral  connec- 
tive of  i)eriods  {quod  at  or  quodai,  quod 
vhi  etc.)  .V21,  4  ;  522,  5. 
quod,  conjunction  —  that,  1)  introducing 
completing'  That-clauses  after  verbs  of 
emotion  r.^K),  5.  CJram.  nature  of  such 
Quod-cl.  388,  n.*,  590,  n.t ;  their  mood;388, 


2.  Exclamatory  Qnod-cl.  591,  6.-2)  dep. 
on  verbs  denoting?  the  manifestation  of 
emotions,  and  on  verbs  of  aecusinj^,  prais- 
in-;,  etc.  594,  24 ;  .598,  1,9;  598,  n.  X  \  'l»t'ir 
mood  388,  2.-3)  (^uod-cl.  dep.  on  verbs  ol 
paying  and  thiidving  in  late  Latinity3s7, 
2.-4)  Quod,  introducinjr  Factcl  (see  this 
article)  («)  in  the  relation  of  transitive  objs. 
{jnittoquod  <tc.)  605,  2  ;  {b)  in  the  relation 
of  an  abl.  of  instrument  (eo  quod)  <i06,  4; 
(t")  of  prci)Ositional  ohjs.  (ex  eo  quod,  etc.) 
607,2;  (d)  Quod-cl.  denoting  identity  of 
action  (bene  faeis  quod,  etc.)  •.06.  1  :  {()  el- 
liptical (|uo(l-cl.  {quid?  quod)  f.07,  3  ;  339, 
3.-5)  Quod  introducing  Subj.  clauses  t>()9, 
2  foil. ;  61.3,  2;  615,  28  foil. ;  62;^,  .5.—  Quod 
introducing  attributive  That-cl.  626.  5 ; 
627,  6. 

quod,  causal  conj.  =  because.  Diff.  from 
^?/ia  682,  1-3;  from  quuin  causal  <i83,  4; 
synd.  ant.  6S3,  3.  Causal  Quod-cl.  with 
subjunc.  of  indirect  statement  witliout 
governing  verb  of  .«ayiui.',  etc.  689,  A  ;  w. 
subjunc.  of  non-reality  6JH).  B.  I^on  quod 
(iion  quo)  w.  subjunc.  6JH),  C  loll.  ;  w. 
ind.  CJK»,  B;  691,  J)  ;  692.  n.*. 
quominus,  conj.  Dep.  on  verbs  of  doing  w. 
neirativc  aim  {ptohif^eie  etc.)  «".02,  5.  When 
quilt  or  ne  may,  or  may  not  be  used  inst. 
of  quo7ninus  6o:i,  5.  Quomi/ins  iuii)arts  to 
any  governini:  verb  the  idea  of  hindering 
604,  6  ;  to  introduce  8ubj.  cl.  619,  4  :  619, 
B  foil.  ;  attr.  cl.  625,  I)  ;  (»26,  A.  ;  627,  6  ; 
intrtxlucing  consecutive  clauses  6.36,  n.  *  ; 
6:^6,  3  ;  introd.  fiuul  Thal-cl.  w .  force  of  ne 
6:i^,  2. 

quomodo,  its  use  as  infcrrog.  and  rel.  adv. 
240,  2  ;  4'.M5,  4.  Quotno'toeunque  and  quo- 
quo7nodo  as  indef.  rel.  adv.  496, 4.  Quoinodo 
—  ut,  to  introduce  coinp.  cl.  ol  quality  w. 
synd.  ant.  tde  or  ita  746,  A  ;  in  Similes  746, 
B  ;  to  introduce  parenthetical  clauses  747, 
/,'. 

quondam,  temp.  adv.  Difl'.  from  a/iqnando 
and  o/itn.  NV.  impcrf.,  opposed  to  pres. 
time  316,  57. 
quoniam,  since,  causal  conj.  Use  and  diff". 
Irom  quod,  quia,  and  quu7n  684,  6  foil. 
Generailv  without  synd.  iint.(»85,  .«1.  Con- 
ventional usages  6N5,  7-12.  In  the  mean- 
ing of  quum  (du7)i)  and  jwcfquain  687,  7  ; 
w.  /orce  of  comj).  coijs.  68r,,  12  ;  =  guod 
atfi/iet  ad  687,  12.  W.  Subjunc.  of  indi- 
rect statement  <i89,  A. 

quoquo  (>r  quocunque,  indef.  rel.  locativeadv. 
in  the  .3d.  locative  case  2ir>  ;  496,  4. 
quoquoversus,  derivation  217.  8. 
quorsum,  derivation  217.  8  ;  use  496.  4. 
quot,  interrog.  and  rel.  numeral  adj.  496.  4; 
w.  force  of  ordinary  rel.  497.  3  ;  introduc- 
injr com  p.  clauses  of  like  numbers  7.50.  1. 
Quof.  in   composition  w.  die,  anniii,  inenn- 
t,ii.<.  Cahriditi.  =  'at,'  or  'in  every'  225.  11. 
quotcunque,    iiidef.    rel.    adj.,    iniroducing 
numeral  comp.  clauses  750,  1.    See  quot- 

quot. 

quotidie,  w,  imperf.  326,  5 ;  w.  perf.  lb. 


» 


quoties,  interrog.  and  rel.  numeral  adv.  229, 
9  ;  496,  4.  Introducing  comp.  cl.  alter 
lolies  and  tot  7.50,  1.  W.  meaning  of  quo- 
titxcuuqut  501,  8. 

quotiescunaue,  indef.  rel.  numeral  adv.  496, 
4  ;  501,  8.     W.  perl.  3-J9,  2. 

quotquot,  indet.  rel.  adj.  =  quotcunque  490, 
4;  r.Ol. 

quotusquisque  est  qui,  w.  subjunc.  .5.o0,l. 

quousque,  comp.  locative  adv.  217,  8;  its 
temporal  w^c  222,  9.  Quui7i,  conj.,  origi- 
nallv  temporal  adv.  644.  1;  rendered  when, 
if,  while,  whfTievertii^,  34  ;  618,  5  ;  32\),  obs. 
1.  Dirt",  from  du/n  321,  7.  Qua/n p/i/nu/n 
w.  perf.  ind.  665.  43.  Quu7n  cau>ai,  mean- 
ing and  dirt",  from  quod  and  quia  68-3,4; 
takes  no  synd.  ant.  6&4,  5.  See  Causal 
()inim-clauses. 

Quum-clauses  (temporal)  644,  619  foil.  Their 
dirterent  relations  toprinc.  sent,  as  adver- 
bial or  attributive  clauses  644,  2.  Definite 
and  indefinite  645,  34.  Tense  and  mood 
in  (;uum-cl.  reterring  to  indef.  timeW.5, 3; 
64i;.  5;  referring  to  del',  time  646,  35  loll. 
Their  different  offices  in  determining  time 
619,  9  foil.;  314,  1:  3-'0,  2;  3.39,  69;  339,  3and 
4.  Quum-cl.  used  w.  force  of  hypothet- 
ical Si-ci.  6.5!»,  41;  w.  force  of  ordinary  Si- 
cl.  732,  4.  When  M-clauses  may  be  used 
inst.  of  indef.  Quum-d.  lb.  See  Modal 
clauses.  Adver^alive  Quum-clauses;  Co- 
ordinating Quum-cl.;  Appositive  Quum- 
cl.  :  Parenthetical  Quum-cl. ;  Mood  in 
Quum-clauses. 

Radicitus,  242.  obs. 

rarum  est,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  612,  0.  , 

rather,  rendered  i<y  ]x>fiu'i,  citiu^t.  pnus  (.oS, 
9  ;  7.59,  9.  •  liatlitr  than  do  this,  J  will 
etc.,'  how  renilered  762,  12. 

ratio,  w.  irerundial  i;en.  1.59,  3;  in  abl.  to  de- 
note purpose  28-3,  566  and  1.  liatio  est  \\. 
Subj.  Ut-cl.  613,  3. 

recedere.  w.  «jrerundial  ahl.  after  a^>  195,  243. 

receiving,  Verbs  of.  const r.  w.  ab  28,  48;  w. 
:uc.  after  i«  38.  67. 

receptui  cancre,  expl.  2.57,  2. 

recipere  w.  aec.  after  in.  or  w.  ad  in  flirura- 
tive  relations  40;  in  d€ditidtu7n,  in  civitd- 
ttin  lecijiere,  expl.  41,  n.  1;  w.  ace.  or  abl. 
after  in  ;38,  67,  n.  1  ;  w.  participial  gerun- 
dive 148,  178.  ,     . 

Reciprocal  relation,  meaning  and  rendering 
of.  19.  n.  2. 

rectum  est,  it  is  rii^ht,  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.,  or 
Subj.  Inf.  cl.  611.  5;  in  the  meaning  'it  is 
proper'  w.  Inf.  cl.  611.  5. 

recusare.  w.  neijation,  constr.  w.  quowinvs 

or  (/uin.  or  w.  obj.  inf.  »i02,  n.  ^;  ti03,  n.  |. 

reddere,   as  factitive  verb,  w.  double  ace. 

redigerei^v.  adU,U\  w.  ace.  after  i»  or  at?  40. 

redimere,  constr.  w.  an  obj.  of  price  266,  2. 

redire,  w.  ace.  after  ad  or  in  13,  11;  40. 

redole're,  w.  ace.  85.  »>. 

redundare,  w.  abl.  93.  479. 

re-elect  the  President,  how  expressed  203,n.59. 


referre,  w.  ad  14, 11;  w.  gerund  lal  after  ad 
1<K),  239, 1. 

refert,  impers.,  derivation  and  construction 
273  foil.  621,  4.    See  interest. 

refertus,  w.  abl.  119,  116. 

Reflexives  (see  P.  I).  Use  of  reflexive  and 
non-reflexive  forms  for  Engl,  personal  or 
possessive  pronouns  9-11.     See  se. 

refragari,  w.  dat.  88. 

refugere,  w.  gerundial  ahl.  after  ab  195,  243. 

regere,  ditf.  from  regndre  54,  n.  78. 

regredi,  in  perf.  part.,  as  pred.  abl.  172,  3. 

reipublica  causa,  meaning  of  290,  n.  3. 

Relative  adjectives  and  adverbs,   (see  P.   I). 
Enumeration  and  clas.-ification  496,  4  (see 
Indefinite  Bel.)    Dift"erent  conception  of 
ri'lative  adjs.  and  advs.  in  Latin  and  Eng- 
lish 495,  2.    Agreement  of  the  relative  504, 
612.     Referriiig  to  more   than  oiie  ant. 
504.2t;  agreement  w.reference  to  collective 
nouns,  and  per-^onsdesignated  hy  the  names 
of  things  ij05,3.  A'_'reement  of  the  rel.  subj. 
w,  the  pred.  nom.  525, 2:^ ;  agreement  of  rel. 
predicate  nom.  w.  the  sul)j.,  and  not  w. 
antecedent  525,  3.    Gnim.  forms  of  abso- 
lute relatives  (how  rendered)  5ii9,  2  foil. 
Logical  airreement  of  relatives  512,  C;  528, 
u   **.    Peculiar  agreement  w.  the  case  of 
antecedent  531,3.    Collocation  t)f  rel.  adj. 
and  adverbs  523, 1 ;  524. 2.    Dift'erent  grain, 
forms  of  relative  attributes  528.     Rel.  in 
C(mnection   w.  gerundives  and  abl.  ahs. 
529,  5.    Rel.  adjs.  as  ace.  and  abl.  of  time 
526,  a,  b,  c;  as  ohjs.  of  manner,  modality, 
and  cause  .527,  C.    Relatives  w  the  force 
of  conditional  conjs.  {qvi=si  guis,  etc.) 
320,  2;  7:^3,  1.    Difl"erence  between  relative 
adverbs  (M6i  etc.)  and  adverbial  conjunc- 
tions 495,  n.     Locative  relative  adverbs 
575  616  foil.;  their  replacement  hy  attrib- 
utive phrases  \v.  locus  {ubi  =  in  quo  loco 

Relative' Clauses.  494  foil.    Classification  and 
gram,  properties 494,611;  494,  n.*  Fotm  and 
function  of  the  gram,  antecedents  504  lolL 
Place  of  the  gram.  ant.  and  its  difl"erent 
forms  .50.5-.507.   Incoi?poration  of  the  ant. 
in  the  clause  506,  6;  incorp.  in  the  lorm  of 
a  partitive  gen.  507,  4.     Inversion  of  the 
rel.  cl.  506,  a.    F«>rm  of  the  relative  if  the 
«Tarn  ant.  is  understood  508,  6  foil.    Eii- 
7.IPS1S  of  ants,  denoting  iNDhr.  persons  or 
things  C*"^'^  ^"^'  ^"^^'^^  qui,  praniisds  qui) 
510  2    Peksonai.  pitONouNs  as  gram.  ants. 
514'  7  foil.    Omission  of  the  pers.  pron!  as 
ant'  514,  3,  Dift"irent  meaning  and  render- 
in"  of  is'  qui  51.5,  4.    Ble  ego  qui  lb.    The 
pronominal  ant.  merged  in  a  possessive 
515,  5.    Logical  relative  clauses  (referring 
to  sentences,  or  thouslits)  515,  foil.:  re- 
ferrin<'  to  two  dift'erent  sentences  5l6,  2. 
DiHerent  forms  of  rel.  parenthetical  ci. 
516  3  {id  quod  517.  4;  referring  to  parts  of 
the  «'•oven.ing  sentence  517,  5).    Idiomatic 
parelith.  rel.  cl.   w.  logical  relatives  518 
foil  —Gram,  form  of  the  predicate  in  rel. 
cl.  524,  1.     Its  ellipsis  530,  1  foil.  Incorpo- 


808 


INDEX. 


ration  in  the  rel.  cl.  of  words  bclonq:in^  to 
I)rinc.  i*ent.:  1)  Incorp,  of  quisque  581.  ob8, 
1;  2)  of  desicriptive  adj^.  and  superla- 
tives, as  accet«!*ory  prcd.  of  the  rel.  5y2, 2. 
—  I^el.  cl.  ahbrevialed  by  PAUTiciriAL  con- 
struction 541,  15  loll.— Mood  in  rel.  cl.  542 
foil.  CoNSEcvTiON  of  tense  in  rel.  cl.,  t»ee 
Suhiunctlve  in  relative  r/.— Collocation  of 
rel.  cl.  478,  5.— Peculiar  form  in  the  co<5r- 
dinaiiun  of  relat.  cl.  4T4,  7.- See  alt^o  In- 
rolufion  of  relatires.  Cooniinafinr/  /elafives, 
Jncfejinife  relat..  Syndetic  antecedents,  Cotn- 
2)aiif'0n  of  vtlative  daufei^. 

rAHTICUL.\K  CLASSES  OF  RELATIVE  CLAU- 
SES. Kkstricting  relative  cl.  (lonn  and 
mood  of  pred.  etc.)  545,  8;  54«,  10;  5r>(),  1 
and  2.— Relative  cl.  of  PiniposE  :  dilf.  from 
final  Ut-claiisos  557,  5;  558,  (5  and  7.  Ken- 
(lerinjj:  ami  construction  557,  5.  Clause? 
of  purpose  introduced  by  quo  558,  8;  w. 
indef.  ant.  558,  9;  558,  n.*;  alter  a  com- 
parative w.  quam  idiomatically  «fed  to 
express  the  En<.'l.  'too  much  to'  \v.  inf. 
7t;i,  6'.— Kel.  cl.  of  quality;  referrini^  to 
a  prec(Hlin>jf  des('riptive  adj.  570,  A.  Mood 
.^)<;0,  20,  1  and  2.  Their  ditierent  tjram. 
forms  (is  €ft  qui,  ehts  modi,  talis  qui  etc.) 

5t)l,   3  foil.— R.l.   cl.   of    INTENSITY,   whcU 

used  inst.  of  Ut-cl.  5<)4,  9  and  10.  Form 
'nefno  est  tarn  ferns  qui  yquin)'  564,  9.— 
Rel.  cl.  of  manner;  when  they  may  be 
used  inst.  of  modal  Ut-cl.  5(i4, 8.  Referring 
to  ])receding  descrintive  adjs.  570,  B. — For 
CAUSAL  rel.  cl.  see'this  article.  Conces- 
sive rel.  cl.  5<i7,  4  foil.— Rel.  clauses  with 
forc»^  of  8i  CLAUSES  738,  1 ;  w.  force  of 
restricting:  cond.  cl.  742,  10.— Relation  of 
relative  clauses  to  interuooative  clauses, 
introduced  by  interrofj.  adjs.  and  advs., 
and  when  they  may  be  replaced  one  by 
the  other  395.  8  foil. 

relinquere,  w.  double  dat.  96.  65;  w  i)artici- 
pidl  irerundive  l»i8,  178.  litliuqiutur,  it 
remains,  w.  Ut-cl.  (i08,  3. 

reliiuum  est.  w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  009,  2;  600  n*. 

reminisci,  w.  <:en.  9t2,  478. 

remunerari  aliquein  aliqud  re  99,  485. 

reniti,  w.  dat.  88. 

rents  are  cheap,  how  rendered  295,  n.  32. 

renuntiare,  as  factitive  verb,  w.  double  ace. 
101,  A. 

replere  aliquem  (aHqvid)  aliqua  re  99,  48.'. 

reprehendere,ri/«/y>e/v7/Y,  increpdre.  castifjdre, 
ohjurqtlre.  con^-tr.  w.  Qiiod-cl.  598,  9. 

se  reprimere,  nbi  iernpfrdre,  siH  inijy^rdre. 
afJ.-'Hiitre,  as  verbs  of  restrainitii,',  if  con- 
nected w.  iion,  constr.  w.  Quiu-cl.  602, 
5  foil. 

repugnans  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  610,  3. 

repugnare,  w.  dat.  88;  w.  quondnun.  ne,  or 
qiihi,  see  renistcre.  Repugnat,  impers.,  w. 
subj.  Inf.  cl.  or  subj.  inf.  «)20.  2. 

res,  exi)ressinj;  the  «reneral  idea  of  things, 
see  P.  1.  Re  Integra,  meanin};  289,  n.  27; 
Tfhene  'jestd  180,  obs.;  res  de  qna  aqitur, 
the  subject  under  discussion  (legal  for- 
nnila)  404,  n.   17;  res  contrahendiv,  con- 


tracts 197,  246.  Rem  €0  dedvcere,  equiva- 
lent to  a  verb  of  accomplishing,  w.  ut  or 
ne  Hmi.  .8. 

to  resign  an  office,  magistrdtu  abire  238, 
n.  .5. 

resistere,  w.  dat.  8«.  Resistere,  repvgnare, 
recusdre,  deprecdri,  as  verbs  of  resistiiiL', 
constr.  w.  qnoininus  or  ne.  or  w.  quia  if 
connected  with  a  negation  6U2,  5  foil. 

respondere,  w.  dat.  89. 

restat,  impers.,  w.  subj.  Ut-cl.  622,  4,  2. 

restituere,  w.  at/,  or  w.  dat.  14, 11;  w.  in  40, 
70:  40.  n.  5. 

to  return,  reiulered  by  reddere  w.  dat.  (=to 
give  back),  or  by  redlre  w.  ad  13,  11;  w. 
ace.  after  in  40  (=to  go  back). 

reus  w.  genindial  gen.  159,  2. 

Reversed  phrases,  meaning  and  origin  of  150, 
517;  II).  183.  Ditr.  from  ordinary  attribu- 
tive i)hrases  150.  18.5.  Tbeir  diflerent 
gram,  relations  l.')3,  522  ;  L">4.  R.  194.  Rev. 
phr.  in  api)osition  (=  namtly)  154,194.4. 
Ditt".  between  gerundive  and  ])articipial 
levereed  phrases  155,  52:?,  When  they 
may  interchange  w.  each  other  155,  19(3. 
P()inted  opposition  of  the  two  kinds  of 
phrases  155,  If/i.  Reversed  phr.  as  com- 
l)leting  objects  155.6.  Pronouns  and  ab- 
solute acijs.  as  governing  words  in  reversed 
])hrasts  155,  195. 

Reversed  gerundive  phrases.  Whether  they 
occur  as  transitive  objects  and  sultjects 
1.56,  198.  In  gen.  157.  526  foil.;  as  attrib- 
utes of  nouns  159  foil.;  as  objs.  of  adjs. 
IHl,  207;  as  pred.  gen.  261.208;  in  dat.  163 
foil.;  in  abl.  ir,9  foil.;  after  prepositioi-s 
(onlv  after  ad,  in,  ab.  de.  ob,  inter,  ex,  pro) 
187,  537  loll.  See  the  articles  on  gerundial 
cases. 

Reversed  participial  phrases,  as  subjs.  nnd 
tian>itive  obj>.  1,5«).  ^)•^").  Change  of  subj. 
nom.  into  a  pred.  alil.  15«»,  200.  In  gen, 
162,  .527;  in  abl.  as  completing  obj  173,  1; 
as  Mbl.  abs.  (see  this  article);  after  prepo- 
sitions 198  loll. 

ridiculum  est,  w.  subj.  Quod-cl.  610,  4. 

to  be  right,  liow  rendeied  2<4,  3. 

rights  which  we  are  bound  to  respect,  how  ren- 
dered 5«;8.  n.  61. 

rite,  242,  ous. 

robur,  meaning  of,  in  military  language  504, 
n.  7. 

rogare,  w.  double  ace.  100,  486;  how  constr. 
in  the  pass.  101,  73  ;  w.  imperative  cl. 
595,  3. 

rogatio,  w.  attributive  X^t-cl.  625,  T, 
rudis  w.    gen.,   or   w    in  118,  109  foil.;   w. 
gerundial  after  ad  192.  5. 
rumor  est,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  613.  1. 
rursus,  ditl'.  from  iferutn  and  denuo2'2i,  6. 
rus.   takes  locative   cases    like    names  of 

cities  47,  4. 
rusticus  sermo  477,  2. 

8,  symbol  of  setnis  116,  105.— SZ,  symbol  of 
;    dodrans  lb. 
sacer,  w.  dat.  or  gen,  119,  113. 


INDEX. 


809 


Bfflpe,  temp.  adv.  222,  9;  224,  10;  w.  perf.  or 
imp.  32t). 

saltern,  as  svnd.  ant.  (postcedent)  of  conces- 
sive si-cl.'731.2. 

salva  fide,  184,  1;  salvis  auspiciis  185,  R.  231, 

OBS.  1. 

sancire,  w.  imperative  cl.  595,  5. 

sapere.  w.  ace.  8.-),  39 ;  w.  plus,  not  magis 

satis",  quantitative  abs.  adj.  and  adv..  see 
P  1:  w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  3;  w.  final 
Ut-cl.  638,  4.  Hads  est,  and  satius  est,  in 
ind.  of  a  i)ret.  tense,  used  hypothetically 
727,  24  foil.;  w.  subj.  inf.  or  bubj.  Int.  cl. 

satisdato^as  impers.  pred.  abl.  186,  234. 

satisfacere,  w.  dat.  89. 

scatere,  w.  abl   93,  479. 

scire  constr.  w.  an  adverb  denoting  lan- 
guages (Laflne  scire):  how  to  be  exj)l.  104, 
SI  'As  verbum  sentieiidi  constr.  w.  Int. 
d.'  (P.  I,  and  588.  23);  w.  obj.  int.  or  inter; 
rotative  clause  (w.  quo  //w/o)396./.  /Scivi 
different  from  scitbani  ;i;38,  9.  *J>ti€«5,  w. 
irerundial  i:en   161,  207. 

scribere,  w.  ad,  or  dat.  14,  11;  14,  n.;  w.  Inf. 
cl.  594,  1. 


se  in  p'l.tce  of  euin,  against  the  rule,  for  the 
sake  of  pregnantly  intimatinir  certain  re- 
liitions  ot  the  pre'jicate  401,  n.  4. 

Second  person  singular  w.  the  meaning  of  an 
indef.  per-on  (  =  aliquis) ;  requirert  sub- 
jiinc;  how  used  413,  oBS.  4._ 

secundum,  prep.  w.  ace.  22,  4"i5. 

secus,  use  of  241,  6;  w.  nan  {hand),  as  synd. 
ant.'  of  'lualitative  comp.  clauses  745,  3. 

seeing  that,  rendered  by  quoniam  68«»,  9 
ami  10 ;  by  quando  687,  13;  by  siqtudem 
688.  14.  ^^^  ^ 

segnis,  w.  gerundial  after  ad  192,  4. 

sejungere,  cou-tr.  w.  ab  29,  48. 

Semi  prepositions  114,  98. 

semis,  —  one  half  116.  105, 

semper,  temp.  adv.  229.  9;  224,  10;  w  perf 
or  imp.  326,3;  to  iiulicatc  repeated  and 
coin imrent  action  328,  65.^ 

senatus  consultum,  w,  altr.  Ut-cl.  62.),  C. 

to  send  word,  rendered  by  mittere  w.  imper- 
ative cl.  594,  n.t-  ,  ..         f 

Sentences,  combination  and  connection  of 
472  foil  •  is  either  svndetic.  pronominal, 
or  asyndetic  472, 609  foil. ;  coord,  or  subor- 
dinai"ing  (see  these  articles).  Di=5»y^'"''^r- 
ing  Latin  compound  sentences  4.9,  11. 
Tlicir  euphonic  arrangement  4:7,  2. 
sententia.  form  of  the  altr.  That-cl.  dcp.  on 

it  fi24,  .4,  1. 
sentire,  w.  Inf.  cl.  5S.8,  23. 
separare,  con-tr.  w.  ab  29,  48. 
separating.  Verbs  ol,  cot.str.  w.  ab.  29,  48. 
septunx,  =  .seven-twelfths  ll«i.  10.>. 
se^uitur  (consequitur)  w.  Subj.   Inf.  cl.  or 
Ui-cl.  62:3.  4. 

servire.  w.  dat.  89.  ,  ..^  n- 

sesqui,  meaning  and  use  of  116,  llo.  ^ 
sestertius,  value  and  notation  2«)8,  o.    Dif- 
ferent  "ram.  forms  {sesteriium,  eestejtia 


etc.>;  form  of  the  numerals  connected  w, 
it  269.  6. 

sexcenti,  as  indef.  numeral  528,  n.*. 

sextans,  =  one-sixth  116.  105. 

shall  EiiLd.  potential  auxiliary,  rendered  by 
Lat.  future  :347,  73  foil.;  by  II.  form  of 
imperative  354,  5,  A;  by  pres.  subjunc 
381.  1.     (See  P.  I.) 

should,  (should  have),  Engl,  potential  auxili- 
arv,  rendeied  by  i)eriplirastic  gerundial 
140,  1U2:  by  interrogative  subjunc.  pres. 
or  imp.  378,  1;  :38l,  1  and  2;  38:1  4.  Velleni 
{cupereni)  or  velim  etc.,  I  should  wish  38:3, 
{\.—'  ShouUr  etc.  in  clauses,  rendered  by 
the  mere  pred.  inf.  of  the  main  verb,  and 
in  Ut-cl.  by  subjunc.  1:35,  5;  611,  6;  594, 
1 :  by  fut.  pres.  ;351,  obs.  4.  B  ;  352.  B.— 
'Should'  =  ought  to,  see  'ought.'— In 
cond.  cl.  of  doubtful  reality  often  by  fut. 
702,  2,  A. 

si  if,  Cond.  conj..  see  these.  Si  =  Mn  the 
event  that '  407,  3;  71:3,  A.  foil.,  si  r=when- 
ever  3:9.  1 ;  734.  4.  Si  and  O  si  =  '  would 
that  •  :38:3,  (i.—Si,  as  interrog.  panicle.  :397, 
10;  7:3:3,  5.— S'i  non,  in  cond.  cl.  of  d(mbt- 
ful  realitv  7u4.  5;  71:3,  17;  in  cl.  of  doubt- 
less reafity  715,  45;  in  cond.  cl.  of  non- 
reality  718.  3;  in  imjjroper  cond.  cl.  731, 
2;  in  opposition  to  a  preceding  si  7:36,  1. 
Si  non... at,  w.  pred.  omitted  731,  2.  Si 
minus,  inst.  of  «i  no/i  73(;,  l.—Si  etiam  (  = 
but  if  etc.)  II).  Si  forte  :329.  1.  Si  maxirm 
(=  quamris  etc.)  503,  11 ;  731,  3.  Si  nwdo 
678,  no.  5.  Si  prius  355,  4,  b.  St  quis.  si 
quo,  si  quando  329.  1.  Si  placet,  si  ridetur 
742,  11.  Si  qua; i  is  742,  4.  Si  di-^  placet 
742,  3.    Si  ita  vis  742, 11     Si  vales  bene  est 

sic'inoclal  form-adv.  239,  15;  derivation 239, 


n!*  Sic  and  ifa  distini:uished  240,  3  ;  diflT. 
from  fa?n  and  adto  262,  4.  As  synd.  ant. 
of  modal  Ut-cl.  4:35,  2  ;  «)f  comp.  ci.  745,  4  ; 
of  obj.  and  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  inst.  of  the  regu- 
lar ant.  hoc,  id  etc.  49:3,  1. 

sicubi,  if  any  where  329.  1 

sicut  (sicuti),  oriiiinally  adv.  of  manner  240, 
1;  comparative  conj.  as  synonym  of  nt, 
introducing  comp.  qualitative  cl.  744,  51; 
746,  A.    W.  abl.  abs.  17:3,  2. 

silentio,  abl.  of  manner  or  coincident  action 

244,  3';  258,  2.  .     .u     ,  r 

Simile,  rhetorical  figure,  in  the  form  of  a 

comp.  period  74(1,  B. 
simiUs,  w.  dat.  or  gen.  118,  112;  119,  113;  as 

synd.  ant.  of  comparative  qualitative  cl., 

followed  by  ac,  atque,  id,  ac  si,  quasi,  ut 

8imul,^simulac,  simulatque.  Simul,  temporal 
adv  222,  9;  w.  cum.  or  mere  al)l.  il4,  98. 
As  tein|)oral  conj. ;  its  svnonyms  simukic, 
ninul  ut,  sinvilatque,  simul  ei  329,  1;  6o9, 
«;20  1  •  w.  piM  f .  ind.  «»65.  43 ;  «565,  1 ;  w. 
imp.  or  plup.  «166. 2  ;  w.  pres.  or  fut.  666, 3. 

simulare,  w.  Inf.  cl. ;  not  w.  mere  obj.  mf. 

sin  isin  vera  etc.) ;  use  in  the  adversative 
coordination  of  cond.  cl.  737.  3. 


810 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


811 


since.  Engl.  prep,  and  adv.,  rendered  by  ah 
Hud  ex  {inde) 'B,  44-2.     As  temporal  conj.  j 
by  ex  quo  30,  50  ;  T)-^»;,  d  ;  by  ])ost(iuaviim, 
42;  Wil.  2  and  7  foil.     A^  causal  eoiij.  by  I 
qiiinn  rm,  4;  quoniam  r^,  0;  qnando  and 
quaiidoqiiidem  <>HT,  13:  nquUitni  G88,  14; 
bv  iMisfqiHun  w.  imp.  W)2.  5  lull, 
sine,  prep.  w.  nbl.,  use  and  difl".  from  exfra 
3(i,  »1.3;  denolin<,'Coineident  action  25.^, .V)<>. 
sinere,  eonstr.  w.  ace.  alon^  w.  obj.  int.  lUl, 
N3  :  const  r.  Mk^'jubtre  h^l,  8. 
singly,  bow  expr.  in  Lat.  251,  7.  ^ 
singulus,  as  accessory  pred.  2.")!,  7. 
siquidem,   causal   conj.,  use  and  difterence 
lioni  ihe  other  causal  conj.  »187,  14;   «16, 
DBS.  1.    When  it  must  be  written  in  one 
word,  or  in  two  words  688,  14. 
sis,  =  «  vis  (if  you  please)  742.  11. 
sitire,  con^tr.  w.  ace.  85,  39.   jSitiens  w.  gen. 

117,  108. 
sive  -  rel  si,  anteclass.  738,  7  ;  as  synonym 
ofV^/,  see  P.  I.  Sive..  .nre,  as  disjunctive 
cond  conj  1)  in  the  coordination  of  whole 
cond.  periods  737,  4 ;  2)  of  cond.  clauses 
737,  5;  3)  of  other  clauses,  or  members  of 
the  same  sent.  737,  ti.  Mood  in  Hivu-clauses 
737,  5.  Clauses  w.  sive...sive  pass  over 
inu)  iiidef.  rel.  and  concessive  cl.  603,  11. 
60  EultI.  adv.  rendcrtd  by  ni\  ifa,  (am, 
dd^o,  tantopere,  tantimi.  Dift'.  of  these  ex- 
pressions 262.4.  *So  th.'it'  =  ita,  vf,  or 
vf,  without  ifa  4^5,  2;  (J3H,  obs.  1.  'So  as 
to,'  how  rendered  435,  2;  5,^)7,  5.  'So 
much.'  *  so  many,'  see  i*.  I,  '  So  much  for 
this  subject'  =  h;ec  hactenus  .5-.0,  n.  13. 
'  So-called  '  55,  n.  18  ;  =  qui  dicitur  182,  ii. 
97  ;  =  quetn  rocant  341,  n.  21. 
sodes,  (  =  si  voles),  if  you  please  742,  11. 
solere,  w.  obj.  inf.  see  P.  1. ;  ir.  perl",  or  imp. 
3J3,  71. 

solitus,  w.  {jerundial  dat.  1(55.  2. 
soUemnis,  w.  trerundial  dat.  IH.'»,  2. 
sollicitare,  w,  <:erundial  alter  ad  190,  5.30, 1.— 
ikMicitat  me,  iinpors.,  w,  siibj.  Quod-cl., 
pass.  Inf.  cl.  orsnbj.  inf.  618,  11. 
sollicitum  esse,  w.  Quod-cl.  or  Inf.  cl.  51K). 
solhcitudo,  w.  attr.  Quod-cl.  »;25.  «,  .3.  ^ 

solus,  as   accessory   pred.  251,7;  i)luced  in 
the  «ren.  if  dep.  «m  j»ossessives  H).    Solus 
qui  w.  subjunc.  .551.  4  .  w.  ind.  553,  7. 
solvendo  esse,  expl.  168.  3. 
soon,  how  to  reiuler  224,  3 :  225.     Sooner  = 
VKiturvix,  citius,  or  prius  225,  4  ;  759,  9. 
Bordida  vestis,  expl.  259,  n.  1. 
Bouthern  (Northern)  States,  how  to  be  render- 
ed 3.52,  n.  19. 
spatium,  w.  «rennulial  iren.  159.  3. 
to  speak  pro  and  con,  how  to  translate  41,  72. 
spectare,  as  verb  of  striving,  w.  vt  or  ne 

.")'.)'.).  2, 
to  spend  time  at  a  place,  by  esse,  or  absumere ; 

how  distinizuished  288,  n.  71. 
Bperare,  w.  ace.  86.  473;  w.  Inf.  cl.  and  peri- 
phrastic pred.  inf.  134.  2;  rarely  w.  Ut-cl. 
593,  8;  rarely  w.  Obj.  inf.  .593,  11. 
Bpes,  w.  attr.  inf.  cl. ;  sometimes  w.  Ut-cl. 
624,^,  1. 


sponte,  242,  obs. 

8quare-measur«,  how  expr.  116,  104. 

stadium,  2J2,  n.  3.  ^      ,        . 

stare,  to  al.tdebv  ;  vv.  abl.  0.5,  .58:  stare,  to 
cost,  w.  obj,  of  price  2<i7.  4  ;  94.  479.  Stat 
mild. impers.  (  =  cejtum  est  mi/ii)  .w.  siibj. 
inf.  620,  OBS.  2.  Stat  per  aHqumi  w.  quo- 
minus  or  tie  610,  li  loll. ;  non  f<taf  pet  all- 
quem,  w.  quoininus  or  quiii  605,  6. 

statim,  expl.  225,  11.  c,.  4   ■,  axo- 

statuere.  constr.,  see  deairiere.  Jblatud,  ain. 
from  xfaturtjat  3.*jS.  16. 

still,  Engl.  adv.  variously  expressed  in  La- 
tin 222,  II.  f 

BtonewallJackson,  how  to  be  rendered  363, 
n.  54,  .55. 

to  stop  payment,  how  rendered,  4(>^,  n.  .30. 

strictly  speaking,  adhibito  discnmiue,  183, 

strong,  (  =  amounting  to)  w.  numerals,  how 

expr.  277,  e. 

studere,  w.  dat.  80.    Noris  rebus  studTre,  80. 

n    10.     W.  geriindial  dat.  1«W,  209  ;  w.  obj. 
inf..  Inf.  cl.,  or  w.  ut  or  ne  51W,  2 ;  600,  2 ; 

600,  n.*. 

Btudiosus,  w.  gen.  118, 109  ;  w.  gerundial  gen. 
161,  207. 

to  study,  how  to  render  80,  n.  10. 

suadere,  w.  imperative  cl. ;  postclaes.  w.  obj. 
inf.  .5!«5,  4. 

8uavi8.w.  II.  Sup.  121,121. 

sub,  prep.  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  use  of  45:  4b. 
Sub  jus  didonernque  redif/ere  193,  n.  2<i.— 
Verbs  compounded  w.  si/b  lake  dat.  !H),  45. 

subducere,  constr.  w.  ace.  of  thing  and  dat. 
olljcrs.  (  =  from)  97,  6S. 

Subject,  ifs  irram.  form,  ste  P.  I. 

Subject-ablative.  171,  5:^0 ;  see  abl.  abs. 

Subject-accusative,  explanation  of  this  form 
(i->'t  1.  umiited  1)  always  if  pred.  int.  is 
impers.  without  snbj.  629.2;  2)  sometimes 
a-  a  ))ers.  pronoun  lb.  ;  3)  almost  always 
if  an  accessorv  pred.  is  made  dep.  on  a 
])ers  pron.  conceived  as  snbj.  ace  630,  2. 

Subject-clauses,  different  chi;ses  and  n-la- 
tions  of  480,  610  ;  482,  A  U)\\.  :  484  foil. 
Must  have  impersonal  pred.  48:^,  2.  Kela- 
ti<m  to  obj.  clauses  48:^.  3.  Subject  inter- 
rogative clauses  391,  obs.  3.  Subj.  '1  hat- 
clauses  608,  27  :  1)  as  subjs.  of  pass  verbs 
(Inf.  cl.,  Ut-cl. ,  Qu(»d-cl.,  etc)  (m,  1-4; 
2)  Form  of  Snbj.  That-cl.w.  impers.  pred. 
adjs.  (i09,  2  f<»ll.  :  3)  w.  impers.  pred. 
nouns  <;i:i,  8  foil. :  4)  w.  impers.  verbs  »;  1.5 
28  foil :  51  w.  ordinary  active  verbs  U2.i,  5 
foil.— Subj.  cl.  conceived  as  subj.  ace.  485, 

Subject-infinitive,  its  cram  relation,  see  PI. 
As  sub),  of  impers.  predicates  107,89  ;  609 
foil.  Tense  and  voice  of  subj.  int.  107,  494. 
Cliange  into  passive  subj.  Inf.  cl.  <ilO,  n.  t. 
Exceptional  use  of  subj.  inf.  w.  ordinary 
active  verbs  108,94:  623.7.  Used  as  ex- 
clamatory elliptical  sent,  without  a  pred. 
481  OBS.  As  subject-acc.  in  Inf.  clauses 
lOS'  93.  W.  force  of  hypothetical  clauses 
733,  3.— Completing  pred.  of  subj,  inf.  Hi 


I 


ace.  masculine  sing.  107,  91 ;  75,  1.  When 
it  requires  its  completing  pred.  in  dat.  7o, 
19.  Form  of  accessory  preds.  dep.  on 
subj.  inf.  255.  2.  /     *     *•  i 

'Subjunctive  in  independent  sentences  (potential 
siibiunc.)  :J78  foil.     Is  either  declarative 
(:i78,  1  and  2:  379,  3  and  4),  interrogative 
(:iSl,  .593  loll.»,  or  imperative  (optative)  .^2 
f.ill.    For  imperat.  >ubj.  see  P.  I..  303  loll 
Subjunctive  in  dependent  sentences  in  general 
;iH5,  1   and  2;    1)  Subjunc.  of    inYu^ect 
STATEMENT  (oblique  clauses)  :^S5  foil. ;  -iho. 
5'.>7  ;  (a)  in  Quod-d.  alter  gaudere  etc.  :388, 
b.  ;  alt.-r  laudare  etc.  38^,  2  ;  Ind.  in  such 
Quod-clauses  :i89,  .3.    (b)  in  imperative  cl. 
389, 83  :  in  a-yndetic  clauses  alter  velie  et(v 
5''2',  a  •  (c)  in  interroizative  clauses  ;i90,  85 
folT.  (see  Inferrooative  clauses) :  id)  in  sub- 
oblique  cl.   .398   toll,   (see   the-'c);    («)  in 
Quasi-oblique     clauses    404.    600   foil— 2) 
Subjunc.  by  attraction  and  qua>^i-attrac- 
tion  408  foil.    In  cl.  dep.  on  subj.  inf.  and 
subj.  Inf.  cl.  412  foil.  Ji.  91.     Tenses  of  the 
uiijiiiK'..  sec  Cofi^fcufion  of  Tenses. 


Subjunctive  in  particular   clauses,   1 
That-clauses  introduced  by  id,  i 


)  In  all 

.  ne,  quin, 

quominHs\  iim\  in   asyndetic  That-cl.  5S8, 
617.— 2)    In    temporal  and  causal   Quum- 
claiises,  see  Mood  in  Qnu}n-dau,^es.—:i) /in 
clauses  of  contingent  and  repeated  action 
(wfienevr  etc.)  :«1,  obs.  6  —4)  Subjunc. 
after  ;>o.s-/7'/am  «rA  1.— 5)  Mxhy  anjequani, 
priufquaw,  and  pridie  667  f«»ll. ;  764, 13.-— 
6)  Afi.  r  dum  and  quoad  =  as  long  as  6. .5 
9-  67'">,  12  :  after  dum  and  dunnnodo  =  if 
but  «•,76,  13  ;  6-17,  13.-7)   After  quia  amX 
quod  cnu-al   6S9  loll.,  17:    w.  siiboblique 
subjunc.  401    foil.:  w.  quippe  572.  12.— b) 
A  tier  etsi  69S,  13:    quamquam   696,  10; 
etiauisi  cm,  2  and  3,  quatnrl-<  «••94,  C  ;  licet 
695,  1',  nt  (  =  even   if)  695,  8 ;  vel  si   (  = 
etianui) ;  si  maxime  (  =  quaunis)  731,  3— 
9)  In  compirative  clauses  748,5;   «62,  ^; 
762.  12;  764,  14,  n.  3:  after  quasi,  veluf, 
tamquam  etc.  in  hvpotheiical  comparison 
(see     this     article).— 10)    In    conditional 
clauses ;  see  Subjunctive  in  cond.  cl.—W)  In 
relative  cl.,  see  Subjunc.   in  rel.  cl.—VZ) 
Subjunc.  of  a  verb  of  saying  denoting  a 
cni.-al   relation  of  an  Inf.  cl.  dep.  on  the 
verbum  dicendi  405.  obs.  3. 
Subjunctive  in  conditional  clauses,  1)  in  cond. 
clauses  of  doubtful  reality  :  (a)  Subjunc. 
of  improbabihtv  709,  11  ;  (b)  of   actions 
dep.  on  the  person  spoken  to  710. 12 :  (c)  of 
virtual  non-realitv  710.  13  and  14  ;  71.5,  6  ,• 
id)  inindef.  coiid\  iieriods  711,  15  and  16; 
712;  (<iiof  exemplificaiion712, 17  foil.  ;  (/) 
historical  subjunc.  713, 20  f<dl.-2)  In  cond. 
clauses  of  non-n-alitv.  see  this  article. 
^Subjunctive  in  relative  clauses,  is  either  a  sub- 
junc. of  non-reality,  or  gnomic  512,  614. 

1)  Sl'BJUNC.    OF   NON-UK ALITV   543.  16   foll. 

(rti  after  noil  est  qui,  nulla  causa  est  cure\c. 
.54»,  2  and  3;  after  quis  est  qni  544,  4. 
^^hen  ind.  must  be  used  in  relative  cl. 
dej)t.  on  negative  pred.  544, 5-8  ;  546, 9  and 


10. -(b)  After  indefinites  implying  a  nega- 
tion {jxiuci.  quotmquisque,  solus  etc.)  .550, 
l_3._(c)  After  sunt  qui,  inventus  est  gut 
etc.  551  foil.— (rf)  If  princ.  pred.  is  poten- 
tial or  doubtful  .554,  18;  after  aliquis  55.5, 
Z.~{e)   Kel.  sutijunc.  of  adaptedness  and 
purpose  5.56.  19  foil.    Nature  of  subjunc. 
of  purpose  expl.  .559,  n.*— 2)  Gnomic  sub- 
junctive  559   foil.;  is  either  restricting 
(.560,  1  and  2),  or  modal  (qualitative,  i^  est 
qui  etc.  560.  20  foll.  ;  of  intensity  564, 9  and 
10»,  or  causal  .">66.  foil.— Subjunc.  in  rel.  cl. 
referring  to  precedinir  descriptive  adjs. ; 
its  difterent  nature  .570,  10  loll.— Subjunc. 
of  loose  h)irical  relation  571,  11  foil.— Sub- 
iunc.  by  attraction  in  rel.  cl.  410.  3,  2.-- 
Tknses  of  subjunc.  in  rel.  cl. ;  (a)  logical 
tenses  in  restricting  relative  clauses  42:?, 
2;  in  modal  rel.  cl.  433  loll. :  439,  9;  440, 
10.     Periphrasric   tenses  of  the  subjunc. 
in  rel.  subobl.que  clauses  referring  to  the 
future  449.  B. 
tfubUmis  fertur,  expl.  249.  3. 
Suboblique  clauses,  definition  :^7,  507.    Sub- 
junc. m  suboblique clauses ;398  foll.  When 
they  take  ind.  399,  1  loll.    Subjunc.  m  cl. 
virtually    suboblique    (quasi-suboblique) 
404,  600  foll.     Ind.  in  such  cl.  405,  obs.  2. 
Subobl.  cl.    when    a   governing    oblique 
clause  is  implied  in  princ.  sent.  406,  foil., 
OBS.  1.    Elliptical  omission  of  the  govern- 
ini;  clause  407,  3.— Suboblique  Dum-clauses 
retaining  their  ind.  present  or  perf .  672,  3; 
675.  8 ;  676, 10.    Periiihrastic  tenses  in  sub- 
oblique clauses  449,  Ii. 
Subordination  of  sentences,  definition  472.  608; 

472.  2  loll.     Sentences  coordinate  w.  each 

oilier,  and  subordinate  to   a   third  _474.  7. 

Sent.  dep.  on   subordinate  sent.  477.  10. 

Their  collocation  477,  1 ;  478,  8 ;  479,  4. 

See  Clauses. 
subornare,  constr.,  see  movere. 
Substantive  Clauses  =  Fact-cl.,  see  these. 

Substantive  Si-clauses  inst.  of  a  Fact-cl. 

introduced  bv  quod,  733,  5.         .     ,   ^ 
SubsUntives,  (Engl.)  expr.  by  Latin  interro- 

«rative  clauses  (commands  =  quix fieri  veUt  ; 

size  =  quanfM.  sit  etc.)  395,  S,  b. 
Bubvenire,  w.  dat.  87,  474. 
Buccedere,  w.  dat.  89  ;  w.  siti  and  ace.  89,  n. 

not  to  succeed,  n^m  male  gerere  228,  n.  7. 
succensere,  w.  dit.  89. 
Buccurrere,  w.  dat.  87,  474. 
Bufficere,  w.  gerundi;il  dat. 

uiulial  aft era(/ 190,239,1. 

w.  Subj.  Ut-cl.  622  6. 

suffragari,  w.  dat.  87,  474.  _  ..    ^,  i; 

Bui,  sibi  se,  and  suus,  their  use  in  oratio  obli- 

qua  7GS,  3 :  7(59.  5.    Sai  protest dtern  facere, 

:k  n.  1.    For  their  general  use,  see  P.l.; 

see  also  #:€.  ,         „,^   ,^ 

Bultis  (  =  si  vu/fis),  anteclass.  742,  11. 
sum  (Engl,  noun),  how  exiir.  in  Lat.  268, 

:^i  2 

Bumere,  w.  participial  gerundive  14S,  178. 
Bumme  and  summum,  as  adv.  of  lutens.  2bo,  7. 


163.209;  w.  ger- 
Sufficil.  impers., 


812 


INDEX. 


INDEX. 


813 


summopere,  2(il,  20. 

sunt  qui  etc.  w.  Mihjnnc.  fjol,  4  ;  w.  ind.  552, 

;")  and  «5.     The   consUuctioii   expl.  551,  4  ; 

510,  2;  486,  9,  1. 
super,  pri'p.  w.  ucc.  and  nh\.,  its  use  6S,  sup- 

I)l(-'in.     Suiter  w.  coinp.  tiiiam-cl.  '.04,  14, 

no    3.     Wrbs  compounded  w.  suiter  lake 

dat.  W.  45. 

superbum  est,  w.  subj.  Tnf.  cl.  000,  3. 
superesse,  w.  dat.  80  ;  \v.  <,'eruudial  dat.  1G3, 

*iO. 

supersedere,  w.  abl.  94,  479;  w.  obj.  inf.  103, 

superstes,  w.  sen.  or  dat.  110,  11.^. 

Supine,  liri^t,  H«e  P.I. ;  fecond  Sup.  121,  503. 
\  trhs  fonninir  a  second  sup.  121,  121. 
WJicn  II.  sill),  it»  \\^v\\  as  impersonal  pred. 
l-,'2,  124.     Used  expletively  II). 

suppetere.  w.  trerundia!  after  ad  100,  230,  1. 

supposing  that,  how  r'  ndi'red  384,  7. 

supra,  prep.  w.  ace.  24,  4:W;  used  to  denote 
numeral  excess  753,3;  w.  comp.  (iuam-cl. 
7r.4.  14,  no,  3.  , 

surripere,  w.  ace.  of  thinjj,  and  dat.  of  pers. 
(--Iioni)  07,  (i8. 

suscipere,  w.  piirticipial  tjerundive  148,  178. 

saspicio,  vv.  attr.  Quin-cl.  025.  /i,  1. 

Syllogism,  w.  pred.  in  Int.  pres.  351,  4,  A. 
llypi'theiieal  suhjinic.  or  ind.  in  syllogisms 
by  arirnmeiiliiin  ex  enntrario  724,  15. 

Syndetic  antecedents  of  clauses,  delinition  and 
use  402,  15;  ol  relative  cl.  40(),  4:  of  loca- 
tive cl.  575,  1;  of  modal  Ut-cl.  O-T),  32,  1: 
their  omission  H).;  of  concessive  cl.  002,  1; 
of  c«tmp.  cl.,  see  these.  For  other  clauses 
4!»2  foil. 

Syndetic  combination  of  sentences  472,  GOO; 
47.J,  1. 

Tabula,  account-books,  idioms  connected 

w.  them  expl.  254,4. 
tsdet,  impers.,  w.  lof^ical  subj.  in  ace.  107, 

00;  const r.  w.  ace.  aloni;  w.  ;;en.  00,  4S4. 
taking  away,  verDs  of,  coiistr.  w.  dat.  of 

pels,  from  whom  somethiiii?  is  taken  07, 

OS;  also  w.  ab,  tie,  ex  2i»,  48. 
talentum,  talent,  as  weii,'ht  2T5,  1;  as  desig- 
nation of  money  200,  5. 
talis,  def.  form-adj.  of  the  qualitative  class, 

see    P.   I.      Syndet.    ant.    of    modal    Vt- 

clanses  435,  2;  of  qualitaiive  lel.  cl.  400,  4. 

Ta/i-s- 7'/?,  always  w,  su»)junc.  502,  CV  504, 

7.    Did".  Irom  /a/e.*  guali-^on-i,  n.  *.    Synd. 

ant.  of.  comp.  (pialitative  cl.  745,  2. 
taliter  (posicluss.)  synd.  ant.  of  qualiter 

400.  4. 
tam,  .w,  adv.  of  intens.;  diff.  from  tanfum, 

tdiifopere.  ml^o,  sic,  and  Ha  2«i2,  4:  750,  3. 

Sviid.  ant.  of  Ut-cl.  of  iniens.  4;i').  2;  of 

comp.  (^uam-cl.   of  lik(!  quantity  750,  52. 

When  tani  tnulti  must  be  used  iust.  of 

(.f  /n/  751,  3. 
tamdiu,  temp.  adv.  222,  9;  225,  11.     Synd. 

ant.  of  ilum.  quoad,  and  quantdiu  403,  3; 

n74,  0.     Tamdiu..  .quaw.diu  w.  perf.  ind. 

322,  2. 
tamen,  as  adverbial  conj.  and  particle  see 


P.  I.  As  eynd.  ant.  (postcedent)  of  con- 
cessive clauses  \v.  etsi  and  (/uainquamiJ^Ji, 
1;  of  concessive  Si-clauses  731,  2. 
tametsi,  altlioiii:h,=  efsi  098,  13. 
tamquam,  comp.  conj.  iniroducinff  hypo- 
thetical cotnp.  clau>e9  743,  3.  \V.  sub- 
jiinc,  subject  to  law  of  consecution  748,  5; 
introducim';  ordinary  comp.  cl.  of  quality 
7^4,  51;  iiitrodiicinir  a  simile  {  =  uf)  740,  Ji: 
introd.  an  accessory  pred.  747,  G';  before 
l>ariiciples  and  abl.  abs.  74S,  5;  \Ti,  2; 
qiiali lying  single  words  748,  7.  Tamquam 
qui  w.  sui>jiinc.  .572,  2.  Tamquam  w.  qui- 
dam  or  aliquis  74!»,  7. 
tandem,  use  of.  and  diff.  from  detiique  and 
jxtffrenio  223,  5. 

tantus,  def.  form-adj.  of  the  quantitative 
class,  see  P.  1.     As  synd.  ant.  of  Ul-cl.  of 
intens.  035,  2.     Tatdus  ut  =  only  so  much 
as  to  440,  12.     Syml.  ant.  of  quantitative 
rel.  or  comp.  clauses  {tardus  quan'us)  4%, 
4;  750,  52.     Tan/us  qui  5<i4,  0;  dill*,  from 
tafdus  quantus  505,  n.  *  — Tanfum  w.  par- 
titive gen.  in  the  meaning  of  fo(  75U,  2. 
Tatdum  as  adv.  of  iiitens.  -ziV-K.  31  ;  its  use 
20:1,  1;  d  ft',  from  tatn  and  fa/dojHrf  2tW,  2. 
When  fa/do  nui.-t  be  used  inst.  of  it  204.  3. 
Tatd<)(Viu\'\y  taut  urn)  toexprets  muliiples 
201,  4  ;  752.  2.     Tu/ifutn  quod  w.  plup.  347, 
0.     Taidiim   as    synd.   ant.  of  quantum, 
ii.st.  of  ^«m. .  .^"«//t  750.  3:  as  synd.  ant. 
of  dum,   quoad,  and   quamdiu  (only  so 
long)  074.  0.     Tanlu7n  afjent  w.  attr.  Lt  cl. 
{^taidum  abrst  ab  to  ut  (028,  8;  idioma-ic- 
ally  w.  two  Ut-ciauses  (attr.  atid   modal) 
«37.3.     7a/j/o...9?/a/</0  followed  by  two 
comparatives  =  'the.,  .the'  751,  5.    Taidi, 
not  taido,  as  obj.  of  value  and  price  :;i70, 
3.5,  2  foil.     Tanti  est,  idiomatic  use  of  272, 
2.—Tantum,  as  particle  =  oi.ly,  see  P.I. 
tantisper,  temp.  adv.  225,  11;  as  ^ynd.  ant. 
i>t  dum,  quoad,  and  quamdiu  074.  0. 
tantopere,  adv.  of  i'jtens.  201,  20.    Dift'.  fmm 
tam  etc.  202,  4.     Synd.  ant.  of  adverbial 
comp.  cl.  introduced  by  quanfopert  750,  3; 
400,  4.     Quam  after  tantoptre  750,  3. 
tantulus,  =  so  little  204,  5. 
tantusdem,  as  synd.  ant.  of  quantitative  rel. 
(comp.)  cl.  400,  4;  7.50.  52.      Tantuindem, 
used  as  adv.  of  iniens. .2»»:i,  31. 
tardus,  constr.  w.  gerundial  after  rtt/  or  in 

(w.  a  1)1.)  104,  540. 
temperare,  w.  gerundial  dat.  103,  209.    hibi 
tempejdrf,  as  verb  of  restraining,  w.  That- 
cl.;  see  rcprifnere, 

temperi,    temporal   adv.    in    locative   case 
*'-J.").  11. 
Temporal    adverbs    and    particles  ;    different 

cl  i>M's  and  use  of  •-i".'2  foil. 
Temporal  clauses  (541  foil.  Introduced  by 
quum  015  loll.;  by  ptsfqvam,  utn,  ut,n- 
inulac,  quaiido  0.50.  020  foil.;  by  aid^qnnm 
and  priusquam  «.«iO  foil.;  by  dum,  donfC, 
quoad,  quamdiu  (i71  foil.  Temporal  rela- 
tive clauses  .520.  Vi.  Temporal  Si-clauses 
732,  4.  Collocation  of  temporal  clauses 
478,  7. 


I 


tcmpus,  w.  gerundial  gen.  150.  3.  Tempvs 
est,  w.  gerundial  gen.,  w.  subj.  inf.,  or 
siibj.  Inf.  cl.  014.  .3. 

tendere,  as  verb  of  striving  w.  id  GOO,  2; 
MK),  n.  !!.  , 

tenere,  =  obfiuere,  as  verb  of  doing,  w,  rit, 
se  •  iiiqtetrdre.  As  verb  of  hindering  (^ae-- 
tiiitre)  w.  quoniinu'i,  and  as  verb  ()f  re- 
straining accompanied  by  a  negation,  w. 
qui /I  002.  5;  003,  n.  ^. 

Tenses,  iheir  use  in  the  ind.  298  foil.;  see  the 
sin.de  tenses.     Tenses  in  letters,  see  A>w- 
(olury  t(nses.    DitlVrent  coneepiion  of  past 
ten«es  in  Latin  and  in  Engl.  .'302.  .508,  1. 
For  ten>es  of  ind.  used  in   the  difl'erent 
clauses,  sec  the  articles  on  the  particular 
conjunctions  and  clauses.- -Tensks  of  the 
SUBJUNCTIVE,  see  Consecution  of  tensex.— 
Look  AL  tknses  of  the  subjui.c.     Defini- 
tion 422,  00.5.    Ditl.  from  'tenses  by  con- 
secution,' and  coi.flict,  w.  them  422,  OBs. ; 
4J2.  000  foil.     Logical  tenses  chiefly  used 
when  not  the  time  spoken  of,  but  the  time 
of  the  speaker  is  taUtvn  as  the  standard  of 
time  w.  respect  topa^t  actions  423,  1.     In- 
siaiices  in  which  this  occurs  423,  2  foil.; 
421,  04.     (rt)  In  restricting  rel.  cl.  423,  2  ; 
{b)  w.  potential  subjunc.  in  certain  con- 
nections 423,  3;  U-)  for  the  s.ike  of  perspi- 
cuity, or  to  avoid  a  conflict  w.  other  gram, 
rules  42.5,  1  foil.;  id)  when  the  governing 
))ier.   pled,  contains  a  present  pred.  by 
implication  420,  2;  {f)  in  comp.  Quum-cl. 
431,   10;    (/'»   in   modal   Ut-cl.   and   their 
t'uuivaleuts  434  foil,  (views  of  the  gram- 
nrarians  examined  434,  n.  *);  ig)  in  hypo- 
thetical clauses   made  dep.  on  non-pret. 
pred.  412  foil.;   (/<^  the  imp.  subjunc.  as 
io'ical  tense  when  the  princ.  non-pretenie 
pred.  contains  a  past  ten.<e  by  implication, 
jind  for  particular  rea-oii-' 745,  0  and  7.— 
Wh  n  loirical  tense»  cannot  be  used  42*>, 
1-3;  440,  12.— Conversion  of  tenses  in  the 
subjiuK!.,  sec  Consecution  of  tenses.  ^  Conv. 
of  tenses  in  cl.  d'p.  on  verbs  of  fearing  448, 
2;  on   verb-  of  doubling  440,3;   in  dep. 
questions  440,  4;  after  erspectdre,  lb.;  in 
final  clauses  449.  5;  in  sub-oblique  clauses 
44".»,   n,  1.     Convers.  of  dep.   Int.,   if  the 
pred.  must  be  in  subjunc.  450,  C. 
tentare,   as  verb  of  striving,   w.  ut  or  Jie 

f)'.»'.».  2. 

tenui  Minerva,  184.  obs.  1.      , ,  ^  .    .„    «c 
tenus  xiiii-preposiiion  \v.  abl.  0,  b;  1^:  'W. 
44»  '     Adve«-bs  in  4tli    locative  case  com- 
poiiiided  w.  tenus  217,  8.    Its  derivation, 
and  cimstruction  w.  gen.  .30,  oBs. 
terra,  meaning  in  the  pi.  10.5,  n.  1.     Ter- 
rdt  urn  iqentium)  as  attr.  of  locative  ad- 
verbs ,504.  n.  22. 
terribilis,  w.  II.  Snp.  121,  121. 
teruncii  est,  272,  3.  ,-a  n 

testis,  constr.  w.  crerundial  gen.  1;)".»,  Z. 
testato  and  intestate,  as  impers.  pred.  able. 

than,  rendered  quam  (see  this  conjj.    Than 
ulier  'Other'  by  ac,  atque,  or  quam  «49,  0. 


That-clauses  588  foil.  Different  gram,  forms 
inLatiu.58S017.  1)0b.iect  That-clauses, 
b'ing  either  (a\  Inf.  d.,  or  {b)  clauses  in- 
troduced by  ut,  lie,  quia,  qvoininas ;  or 
(c-)  Quod-clauses,  .588,  22.  See  these  dif- 
ferent classes  of  cl.  — Form  of  That  cl. 
after  verba  sentiendi  580  foil.;  alter  verbs 
of  emotion  500,  5  ;  after  verba  declarandi 
.504.  foil.;  after  verba  faciendi  (see  these) 
5'.t0  foil.  When  the  latter  are  introduced 
by  vt,  ne,  quomiaus,  or  quin  .500.  25  foil. 
2)  Subject-That-cl;  3)  Attribute  That-cl.; 
4)  Predicate  That-cl.;  5)  Modal  'I  hat-cl. 
See  these  different  classes  of  clauses.— 
Comparison  of  That-clauses  7r)0,  li  loll.; 
7i;i,  C.  Idiomatic  use  of  compared  Ut-cl. 
after  comparatives  w.  the  meaning  'too 
much  to'  7t)l,  C.  Collocation  of  That- 
clause»  478,  3  foil. 

the... the,  before  comparatives;  different 
wavs  of  rendering  into  Latin  751.  5;  by  vt 
qu'isque  w.  two  superlatives  330.  a:  by 
quo...eo,  or  quanfo.. .tanto  w.  compara- 
tives 25(5,  6V3;10,  (}. 

then,  how  expressed  223,  -3, 

theoretical,  how  to  render,  see  practical. 

there,  as  locative  adv.,  =  jM,  as  first  locative 
case  210;  l)y  third  loc  case  (eo)  218,  b;hy 
fourth   loc.   case  (ed)  218,  c— 'There  ts, 
'  fhf-re  ar*','  how  rendered,  see  esse  no.  3,  a; 

487.  3;  510,  2.  ,  ,        ^ 

till  Eniil.  prepos.,  rendered  by  ad  or  iisque 
ad  13,^3,  R.  10;  as  conj.  by  dum,  quoad, 
tfo/i/'c;  sec  these  conjs.  ,      ,   , 

Time,  relation  of,  222  foil.  Time  absolute 
and  relative  m\,  1  and  2.  Gram,  forms  of 
the  objects  denoting  time  220.  5.50.  Ro- 
man division  of  time  220,  1.  Accusative 
of  time,  denoting  lensth  of  period:-  234. 
Length  of  periods  designated  by  abl.  or 
l)y  per  %lb  foil. :  referring  to  the  fut.  230, 6. 
Lengih  of  i)eriods,  as  attr.  in  gen.,  ace. 
{vnum  diem  supplicatio).  or  by  per  and  in 
2:37,  7.— Ablative  of  time,  denoting  time 
'  wiien  '  227  foil.  No  distinction  in  Lat, 
in  regard  to  the  Engl,  temporal  prepos.  at, 
on,  in  2-28  n.— Relative  adjs.  as  abl.  and 
ace.  of  time  520.  a,  6,c.— Advs.  of  time  222 
foil.  Standpoint  of  time,  and  adverbial 
expressions  in  rejrard  to  the  use  of  past 
tenses  313,  55:  310,  57;  in  regard  to  length 
of  time  310,  50.  Time  expr.  by  temporal 
clauses,  see  these. 

timere  alicni  and  aliqwm.,  in  different  mean- 
innOl,  475;  constr.  w.  Ne-clause,  or  Ut-cl. 
.580, 1 ;  either  w.  plus  or  maqisTii\,  C,  no.  2. 

timer,  w.  attr.  Ne-clause,  or  Ut-cl.  62"i,  B.  2. 
to  Enul.  prepos.,  either  by  dat.  or  by  acc. 
after  ad  or  in  13,  11  foil.  Before  names  of 
countries  by  in  14,  12.  Before  names  of 
cities  by  mere  acc.  47  foil.  '  To'  before  a 
participial,  bv  rel.  cl.  in  subjunc.  .557.  3. 
'  To '  w.  inf.  by  a  rel.  cl.  of  purpose  5.57,  5 ; 
by  imperative  or  final  Ut-cl.,  or  Inf.  cl.  sec 
Of)ject  inf.  (Engl.)--'  To  condemn  to  a  fine.' 
by  abl.  of  value  2()8,  .34.—'  To  condemn  to 
death '  90,  70.—'  To  the  best  of  my  know- 


814 


INDEX. 


lodfjo,'  qmd  snam  etc.  518,  b.  *  To  tho 
best  of  oue\s  ability  '  :m,  2.—"  To  (the  inX- 
vaiitJJfje,  fi-^cjace  etc.  of)'  by  abl.  or  cnn 
25«)  4.—'  To-d'ty '  and  *  (o-nionviv,''  224, 
10,  2.     How  v\[>r.  ill  letiers  3(H),  1  and  2. 

too,  w.  an  adj.  followed  by  '  fo'  or  'for,'  not 
expr.  by  a(^  w.  gerundiul,  except  w.  ^e;v/,s> 
aft  (too  late  to)  l{)2,  oBs.  1.  (Jenc-rally  by 
Ut-cl..  or  rel.  cl.  w.  qitam  after  a  conip. 
7fil,  6'. 

tot  and  totidem,  def.  fomi-adj?.  of  the  nu- 
meral ela<>,  see  P.  I.  As  pynd.  ant.  in 
coinp.  cl.  of  like  numbers  49«i,  4  ;  T^O.  52  ; 
fullowvd  by  qmt  750,  1 ;  in  later  Latinity 
bv  (itqiie  Ii>. 

toties,  iciiiporal  nnd  numeral  adv.  222.  9. 
Sviid.  ant.  in  conip.  el.  of  like  nmnbcrs 
750.  52  ;  405,  4.     Followed  by  quoties  or 

qnnf  T.")0    1. 

totus,  (whollv)  a?»  accessory  prcd.  251.  7. 

tradere,  todi-iivt-r.  w.  participial  «renindive 
11^.  n> :  in  tlie  nieaiiinji;  '  to  report,'  as 
v<rbuin  deelarandi  w.  Int.  cl.  (sec  1*.  I).  In 
the  i)a>s.  iicncrally  w.  nom.  w.  inf.,  except 
ill  pi-rf.  and  plnp.  KMJ,  87  foil. 

trans,  pn-p.  w.  ace.  24,  438.  Neuter  verbs 
conipoiinded  w.  ti'dits  become  t/an^ifice, 
exci-pt  tmnrfuqere.  transcurrerp,  80,  478. 

transducere,  trajicere,  etc.,  constr.  w.  two 
arc  NT,  -12. 

se  transferre,  w.  «renindial  after  a'Z  100,  2:i0, 1. 

transgredi,  in   perf.  part,  used  us  pred.  abl. 

n-2. 3. 
transigere,  to  a^ree  on  a  price,  constr.  w.  an 

object  of  price  and  value  2<;ti,  2. 
Transitive  verbs,  see  the  articles  Verbs,  and 

Accu-^diire. 
tribe  =  tribu.<>,  when  it  denotes  a  division  of 

ilie  Homan  people  ;  =  gem  or  )ialio,  when 

it  means  a  barbaric  nation,  52,  n.  40. 
triens  --  one  third  1H>,  105. 
to  trust,  either  by  amwdttere,  or  cotifidtre, 

or  credere  w.  diflerent  meaniujjs  88,  n.  3 

and  4. 

tueri,  constr.  w.  ab  20,  48. 
turn,  temp.  adv.     Ditl".  from  deinde  and  ivtle 

2-.23.  3.     As  synd.  ant.  of  ta-npoial  (^uum- 

cl.  and  Postquam-cl.  40.3,  3;  «48  loll.     The 

instances  in  which  it  introduces  the  apo- 

dosis  ()58   5. 
to  turn  to  flight  (in  neuter  meaning),  terqa 

rerf>  re  48,  n.  4. 
tnrpis  w.  II.  Sup.  121,  121.     T^>r^}e  eft  w. 

Sul)j.  Inf.  cl.  or  Subj.  Ui-cl.  GOO.  3 ;  610,  4. 

Ubi,  where,  rel.  locative  form-adv.  of  first 
locative  case  216:  400,  4.  In  locative 
clauses  574,  610  foil.  With  perscms  as 
antecedents  576,  D.  Vhi  or  siaibi  = 
wherever  32^),  2.  — T'Ai,  when,  as  soon  as, 
as  temporal  conjunction,  re<iuires  ind.  650. 
ti20.  1  ;  w.  i)erf.  ind.  005,  43  :  005,  1 ;  606.  3  ; 
w.  imp.  or  plup.  ind.  WWJ.  2;  w.  pres.  ind. 
or  fut.  606,3;  w.  historical  pres.  60.5.  1. 
W.  imp.  or  plnp.  ind.  in  the  meaning 
'whenever'  32<»,  1  ;  w.  subjunc.  in  Livy 
and  later  authors  331,  no.  c. 


uWcnnqne,  or  nbiubi,  indef.  rel.  adv.  4%,  4. 

ultimus,  indef.  form-adj.  of  the  numeral 
class,  see  P.  I.  As  accessory  prcd.  and 
diff.  from  po^trernns  250,  4. 

ultra,  semi-preposition  w.  ace.  24,438;  as 
adv.  of  distance  •4!20,  4 ;  implyiui.'  a  com- 
paiaiive.  and  constr.  w.  ct)mp.  t^uam-cl. 
70.3, 14.    Ultra  quain  w.  Ut-cl.  703,  1 4.  no.  d. 

uncia  =  nuit  110,  1U5 ;  in  re;iard  to  wei^jht 
275.  1. 

unde,  whence,  relat.  locative  adv.  of  second 
locative  case  210;  217.  oBs.  3;  400,  4. 
Kendered  bv  '  v///^;e  '  217.  rt.  lu  locative 
clauses  574,  616  foil.  W.  persons  as  ante- 
cedents 576,  I). 

undecunque,  or  undeunde,  indef.  rel.  adv.  400, 
4. 

under,  Eni:!.  prep.,  =  sub  45  foil.  'Under 
consideration'  =  ttub  judice  40,  80.  '  len- 
der '  rendered  by  abl.  ahs.  180,  223 ;  1^2, 
22!);  185,232. 

unus,  numeral  adj.,  see  P.  I.  As  accessory 
pred.  251.  7.  Placed  in  gen.  if  <l<p.  on 
possessives  lb.  Liius  qui  w.  subjunc.  551, 
4  ;  w.  md.  553,  7. 

up  to,  rendered  by  ad  or  vsqve  ad  13. 10  ;  by 
(tnus  135,  440 ;  by  sub  w.  aec.  45,  454. 

upon,  Engl,  jirep.  :  in  regard  to  place  ren- 
dered by  in  w.  abl.  42,  4r.3.  As  temporal 
prepos.  w.  participial,  l)y  abl.  abs.  180, 
225  ;  by  vbi,  lit,  simul  and  its  compounds 
00.5,  1. 

it  is  useful,  expedient  hurtful.  Different  ways 
of  rendering:  into  Lat.  (i22,  .5. 

usquam  and  nusquam,  e\]>l.  217,  5. 

usque,  adv.,  in  connection  w.  prepos.  13, 
10 ;  as  temporal  adv.  222,  9.  Formation  of 
its  compcmnds  vv.  third  locative  case  217, 
8.  U^qiie  or  usque  eo,  as  synd.  ant.  of 
clauses  of  intens.  435.  2;  of  cl.  introduced 
bv  dinn.  quoad,  and  df'ihc  (  =  till,  or  as 
lonq  rt.s)  403,  3  ;  074,  0:  078.  1.5. 

usus  est,  (mostly  antcclass.  and  poet.)  w. 
abl.  iC),  61.  ,      ^ 

Usui  esse,  w.  gerundial,  after  ad.  C.ener- 
aliy  used  inst.  of  titilis  as  pred.  adj.  102, 

n.* 

ut,  uti,  as  interrogative  form-ndv.  2'^9,  15; 
230  11.  t.  Ut  as  conj.  introducing  com- 
l)letingThat-cl.,  see  Ut-clausfS.—  Ut  intro- 
duciiiir  optative  sentences  388,  1,  a;  in- 
troducimr  exclamatory  si-nttnces  A^\.  obs. 
'  Te  ut  ulla  resfrangdt,''  etc.  501,  0.— (7.  as 
conj.,  introducing  modal  and  final  I't-cl., 
see  these.— tV.  as  tempor-al  ccmj  ,  requires 
iM).  <i50.  620.  1.  W.  perf.  ind.  005.43 ;  ()«i5, 
1;  (;0().  3.  W.  imp.  or  i)lup.  (»00,  2;  w. 
pres.  or  fut.  000,  3.  Ut  pnmuin  m\.  43.— 
Ut  =  'as  soon  as,'  in  clauses  of  contin- 
gent and  repeated  action  329,  \.—  Ut  as 
comparative  conj..  w.  ind.  see  Conipara- 
tire  Uf-clauxes.—  T'f  qui  w.  subjunc.  expl. 
.572  'i —Ut  w.  subjunc.  in  hypothetical 
C(m'ip.  cl.  744,51 ;  744,  \.—  Ut  n  w.  subjunc. 
748,  5.  Ut  =  'as,'  befort!  substantives 
used  as  accessory  pred.;  difl'.  from  acces- 

I    sory  pred.  without  ut  747,  G. 


INDEX. 


815 


Ut-clauses,  always  w.  subjunc.  when  used  as 
Thai-clauses;  from  what  reasons  388,1, 
(I  _i)  Ut-clauses  dep.  on  verba  skntiendi 
(verbs  of  fearing  580,  1  ;  of  volition  603, 
oB<.  7,  1    foil. ;  on  sjferare,  vid'ere,  censure 
503).— 2)   Depend,    on   verba    dicendi   if 
thay    belong    to    one    of    the    folio winir 
classes  :  (a)  Verbs  of  request  .595,  3.  (b)  of 
advice   and   exhortation   .505.  4,   (c)  of  re- 
solution and  sli|mlati<m  505,  5,  {d)  of  com- 
mand 50(».  0,  {e)  of  permission   .507,  8.-3) 
Dep.  on  verba  faciendi  500,  25  loll,  (con- 
sist inir  of  verbs  of  striving  and  prepara- 
tion  .500.  2  ;  of  accomplishing  WK),  3  ;    of 
indiicinir  002,  4).— 4)   Dei),  on  ' />i  invhi- 
beaut'  0(13,  n.  !1. -5)  Faot-clai'ses   intro- 
duced by  vt,  i'l)  transitive  Ut-clauses  after 
merPre.   nddere  etc.  (J07,  5  ;    (b)  preposi- 
tional  V\c\.{ad  id  vt,  eo  ut)  008,2;  (c) 
Ut-cl.   of  non-reality  008,  6  (te  vt  uUa  res 
franqat  .501,  6;  lonqe  or  tanturn  abest  nt 
028,  8;  w.  causal  meaning  in  the  construc- 
tion twn  ut...se(L  not  that  but 000,  6  ;  600 
n.  t):  (d)   Passive  Fact-d.   introd.  by  w< 
000,  4.— 0)  SuiUECT  Ut-clai'ses  (M)9,  2  foil, 
(see  tlie.se).— 7)   Attkibute    Ut-clausks 
(see    these).— 8)   Prkdicate   Ut-clauses 
(see  Predicate  clauses).—*.))  Ut-clauses  w. 
concessive  fouce  ;  their  nature  and  use 
eg-,,  8.-1(1)  Modal  Ut-clattses  (see  these), 
utcunque,  indef.  form-adj.  23),  15. 
uter    interroiTHtive  lorm-adj.  of  the  deter- 
minative class,  see  P.  I.    Its  relative  use 
406,  2  ;  used  with  force  of  utercunque  500, 
3. 
utercunque,  indef.  rel.  form-adj.  500,  3. 
uti,  deponent  verb,  w.  abl.  03,  479  ;  n.   .) ; 
treated  as  transitive  in  gerundive  phrases 

152,  188,  ,.   ,  J  *   • 

utiUs,  w.  dat.  118.  112;  w.  <:enindial  dat.  in 

Pliny  10.5,2.     Utile  est  w.  subj.  Lt-cl.  or 

subj.  Inf.  cl  611,  5. 
utinam,  introducing  optative  sentences  38-5, 

0. 

utique,  modal  form-adv.  ?39,  15. 
utpotequi,  w.  su)>junc.  572,  3;  ufpote  quum 

w.  subjunc.  655,  2. 
utut,  indef.  modal  form-adv.  230,  1;). 

Vacare,  to  be  flc-stitute,  w  abl  93,  479:  to 

hav.-  leisure  for.  vv.  ..'erundial  dat.  1(>3,  jOO. 

Vacat,  impers.  in  silver  Latinity,  w.  dat. 

and  subj.  inf.  018,  10. 
vacatio,  w.  attr.  Quominns-cl.  62.),  J). 
vacuus,  w.  abl.  120.  110.     Vacuum  e^.^e  w.  ab, 

or  abl.   20,  48.     Varuum   est,   impers.,  w. 

dat.  and  subj.  inf.  018.  10. 
▼aide,  adv.  of  intens.  2(>-',  0. 
va'.ere  to  be  strong,  w  abl.  03,  479  ;  =  to  be 

of  importance,  w.  ace.  of  neuter  form-adjs. 
\   85  30.  2  ;  270,  3 :  w.  plux.  not  maqi>i  «oo,  C. 

Vallre.  to  be  worth  (mostly  antedass.  and 

postcla-s.).  w.  abl.  of  value  207.  4  ;  w.  atn-. 

of  value  in  Varro  208,  Z.—  Valuit  and  vale- 

Value^'an/price,  relation  of,  206  foil.  .  Verbs 
constr.  w.  an  obj.  of  value  and  price  '2Gb, 


2.  Nouns  used  to  express  value  and  price 
'2(J7.  .33.— Indefinite  price  and  value,  with- 
out a  noun,  by  certain  absolute  form-adjs. 
iquanti,  rnagtw,  pluris  etc.)  '270, 35.  When 
they  are  placed  in  abl.  and  when  in  ;:en. 
270  .500.  Hare  or  false  expressions  for 
indef.  value  271,  2.  By  adverbs  {bene,  male, 
care)  271,  4.  By  ita  -  at  such  a  \n\ce.  272, 
Ex.  11.— Genitive  (uot  ablative)  of  internal 
value  272,  5(jl. 

vas,  (suretv)  w.  gerundial  gen.  159.  2. 
vehementer,'  as  adv.  of  intensity  262.  6. 
vel,  disjunctive  conj.  and  particle,  see  P.l. 
Vel  si  =  etiamsi  w.  subjunc,  731,  3.     \el 
'l>otius  7.50,  OBS.  0. 

velle,  meaninir  and  use  of  its  fut.  tense  .3.il, 
3     Difl".  of  veliui  and  vellein  (I  should  wisb) 
in  optative  sent.  383,(5.     Vdit  nolit.}n^i. 
of  sive  vulf.  sire  non  rult  738,  5.     \elie  w. 
dat  92,  476  ;  w.  ace.  of  a  neuter  form-adj. 
8.5.  30.  2:  w.  obj.  inf..  Inf.  cl.,  ut,  ne,  or  a 
mer»!  subjunc.  591,  7  foil.  :  w.  perf.  (peri- 
phrastic)  participle  .502,   3.   a;   w.  comp. 
Quam-cl..  inst.  of  waJle  or  pot i us  velle  tb-i, 
Vi.—  VoluU  and  rolebat  ;i.37,  4. 
velut    as  comi).  c<mj.  introducinir  a  Simde 
74(5.  B.  Velut  {velut  n)  introd.  hypothetical 
comp.  cl.,  w.  subjunc.  748,  5.     Velut  =  as 
if,  before  participles  and  abl.  abs.  I'^y.   ' 
748.  5  ;  qualifving  simile  words  748,7.    i  el- 
ut  qui  w.  sul>junc.  572,  ^.—  Vtlut  w.  aliqats 
or  q'lidam  572,  2.  >  .      «. 

venalis,  the  only  adj.  constr.  w.  an  obj.  of 
value  anrl  price  2()6,  1.  , .      «, 

vendere,  w.  abl.  04,  470;  takes  an  obj.  of 
l)iice  2()0,  2. 

venire  to  be  sold,  used  as  the  regular  pass, 
of  rendere.^MS.  n.*;  constr.  w.  an  obj.  of 
price  '21.6,  2  ;  04,  470.  . 

venire,  to  come,  w.  ace.  after  in  or  ad.    M 
snem  reulre,  in  amicitiam  alicui  venire  40, 
n    1.     Venit  in  rnenfem.  impers.,  w.  dat.  of 
the  losiical  subj.  107.  00:  w.  gen^  ot  the 
thing  03,  .53:  w.  subj.  Inf.  cl  ,  I^  t-cl    or 
pubj     inf.  according    to    meaning  010,  0. 
Veyiit  ad  anrl».  impers.,  lb.     U^^u  renit  w. 
Subj.  Ut-cl.  :  «liff.  from  accidit  610,  5. 
Verbal  adjectives  in  bundui^  12.5,  125. 
Verbal  adjective  in  das.    Formation  120.  129. 
Verbs  not  forming  it  120.  120.     Irregulari- 
ties in  its  formation  126.  I'.O.     As  pred. 
nom   •  ?cc  Perii>/ira.<!tic  gerundial ;  a^  at- 
tributive  or  al)solute  adj.  see  Gerundials 
i),  renr.'^ed  pb rases. 

Verbal  adjective  in  urus.  Fomiation  of,  12.5, 
120  Verbs  not  fornnni:  it  125.  120  loll,  ir- 
re'Milari  ie>*  in  its  formation  1*25,  12«  foil. 
U"ed  as  j)artici|)le.  or  accessory  predicate 
138.  510  ;  130,  158  ;  as  ab<.  adj.  l-'iX.  1.57  :  w. 
bvpotbetical  meaning  130.  1.59;  as  abl.  abs, 
13'.},  1.50  B;  as  pred.  nom. ;  see  Periphrastic 

future.  ,  ,        ,  *  ♦v,^:^ 

Verbs,  construction  of,  i.e.,  fomis  of  their 
completing  objects  or  subjects  00  Toll. 
Transitive  verbs  70,  4.5^.  Verbs  in  a  per- 
sonal pass.  form,  always  transitive  84,  .3b. 
Conversion  of  transitive  verbs  into  pas- 


INDEX. 


816 


INDEX. 


pivpp  85.  2.  Neuter  verh?  constr.  w.  jicc.  85, 
R.  m.  Latin  transitive  verbs,  intranf^itive 
in  Engl.  8().  47:1  Neuter  verbs  made  tran- 
sitive by  eompoHition  w.  tbe  prepos».  cir- 
C'lm,  lraa>^,  pn\  jmefcr  8(5,  478.  Wiih  dat. 
ar»>  constr.  verbs  of  bt'lpintr,  ob^-yinir,  com- 
mandinj:,  ()[)posing.  trustinir.  pardoninir, 
flattering,  encountering,  liuppening,  being 
angrv,  and  most  compounds  o\  e^se  88  foil. 
Sinude  verbs  \v.  dat.  89.  Verbs  constr.  w. 
dat.  or  ace.  91.  475 ;  w.  jren.  92  foil.  Verbf» 
denoting  aflecti"ii^',  plenty  or  want,  and 
separation  take  ahl.  98,  479.  Verbs  constr. 
w.  two  completing  objs.  9»'.  foil.  They  are 
mostly  transiiive,  takinir  1)  ace.  of  thing 
and  dat.  of  pers.  97.  482;  2>  arc.  of  pers.  or 
tliinLT  an<l  abl.  of  thing  or  instrument  9S, 
488  toll. ;  3)  ace.  of  pers.  and  gen.  of  thing 
91».  484;  4)  two  accusatives  100.  48<) :  101 
foil.  Factitive  verhs,  t.iking  a  transitive 
ace.  alonir  w.  a  ])red.  ace.  HM,  74.  V«'rbs 
constr.  w.  inf.  102  foil.;  w.  obj.  ace.  along 
w.  obj.  inf.  104,  8i.— Verbs  constr.  with 
the  pri'p.  <tb.  ad,  de,  ex,  in,  13  loll.;  2G  foil; 
28;  29;  40  loll. 

Verbs  of  granting,  criving,  8endin<r,  de- 
maiifliiig,  takinsr,  receiving  are  constr.  w. 
participial    gerundive    148.     178.       Verbs 
constr.  w.  gernndial  dat.  Ifti.  200.— Verbs 
of  motion  and  extent  take  ace.  of  diPtancc 
or  extent  220.  8.    Verbs  denoting  trans- 
nction  for  a  valuable  consideration  of  es- 
timatinif,  nppraisin<r.  costinir,  being  worth, 
take  nn  obj.  of  value  and  price  (gen.,  aid., 
or  adverbial)  2(H5.  82 ;  2rt7,  8  and  4.    Verbs 
denotiiiir  appreciation  and  esteem  take  a 
gen.  of  inner  value  272.  1   foil.— Verbs  ()f 
fearing,  constr.  w.  Ul  and  tie  .5X9.  1;  w.  in- 
terrogative cl.  391,  1.     A'o)i  dnhitdre  takes 
Quin-cl.  .'iSO,  2;  dnbitdre  takes  interrog.  cl. 
3W.  85,  a.     Verba  skntikndi,  constr.  w. 
Inf.   cl.   5S8,   23.     ExceptioJis  ,5s9.   1  foil. 
Verbs  of  emotion  (verba  afl'ectunm")  take 
Inf.  cl.  orOiiod  C1.5JK1,  5.  Verbs  of  volition 
take  obj.  inf.,  Inf.  cl.  iif,  ne,  or  a  mere 
f  ubjniic.  .592.  OBs.  7. 1  foil.  Verbs  of  thr(;at- 
eniiiir,  hoping,  promisinir.  and  pietending 
are.  in  En<_'l..  constr.  w.  obj.  inf..  but  in 
Latin  vv.  Inf.  cl.  598,  ll.Verba  dkclauandi, 
vv.  Inf.  cl.,  but  if  denoting  command,  w. 
im|)erative  cl.  594,  24  foil.   Verbs  of  exhor- 
tation take  imperative  cl.,  a  irerundial  alter 
ad.  ran-lv  obj.  inf.  595.  4.   Verbs  of  resolu- 
tion and  stipulation  take  imperative  cl., 
paps.  Inf.  cl.  w.  gerundials,  or  obj.  inf. 
595.  5.    Verbs  of  permission  take  impera- 
tive cl.  597,  8.    Verbs  denoting  manilesta- 
tion  «>f  emotions  and  feelinirs,  of  accnsinir, 
praising,     censurino:,    condemning,    take 
(iuod-cl.,  sometimes  Inf.  cl.  598,  9;  598, 
I!.  *.— Verba  faciendi  (of  striving,  accom- 
plishing, and  inducimz)  take  Ut-el.  or  Ne- 
cl.  59<),  2,5  loll.  Verbs  of  doing  w.  neirative 
aim  take  Ne-el.,  Quominus-cl.,  or  Quin-cl. 
lb. —  Ordinary    tkansitivk     verbs    with 
Quod-cl.   atid'rt-cl.   (Facl-cl.)  605  foil.— 
Construction  of  iMi'EusoNAL  verbs  CIS  loll. 


—Verbs  which  may  be  construed  w.  ik- 
TKi{no<;ATiVE  clauses  8'.K),  <i  and  b  ;  391. 
verecundia,  w.  attr.  Inf.  cl.  025.  li.  3. 
vereri,  w.  Ne-cl  (=  that),  and  Ut-cl.  (=that 
not)  589,  1  ;  w.  Quin-cl.  589.4;  w.  interrog- 
ative cl.  391, 1.  Its  pred.  not  in  periphrastic 
future  448,  .1,  2.— Constr.  either  w.  ;;/«»  or 
l/iar^/iK  75(>,  C\  no.  2. 

yerisimile  est,  w.  ISubj.  Inf.  cl.,  or  Subj.  Ut- 
cl.  <il2,  0. 

versari,  w.  abl.   after  in  42.  453;  42,  n.  t; 
w.  plus,  not  niagix  75H.  C,  fin. 
versus,  versum,  seiniprepos.  w.  ace.  12 ;  9, 
(i  ;  I.").  15. 

verum  est,  it  is  true,  w.   Subj.  Ut-cl.,  or 
Snbj.    Inf.  cl.  (ill,   5;  012,  0.     Ytnnn  est, 
it  is  proper,  w.  Subj.  Inf.  cl.  611,  5. 
very  (very  much),  rendered  by  rahle,  ad- 
modum.  reheniftiler.  inultum,  ttiam  alQue 
etiam,  or  prefix  j)er ;  see  these  articles; 
by  superlative,  .see  P.  I. ;  hy  facile  615,  1. 
vesci,  w.  abl  98,  479,  n.  9. 
vesperi,  locative  case.  225.  11. 
vestire,  w.  ace.  of  pers.  and   abl.  of  thing 

99  485. 
vetare,  w.  obj.  inf.  along  w.  transitive  ncc. 

104,  83;  as  verb  of  neirative  command  w. 

imperative  clauses  597.  7.     In  the  silver 

writers  w.  qitomiinf.<  597,  n.  +. 
vi,  dolo,  precario  possidere,  expl.  244, .?. 
videre,  w.   a  participle  as  accessory  pred. 

258,  2 ;  as  verbum   seiitiendi   w.   Inf.  cl. 

588,  28  ;  as  verb  of  stri  ving  (=  to  take  care 

of  .soraethiuL')  w.  ?// or   ve,  .599,  2:  598,  10. 

Vide  w.  interrog.  cl.  895,  b ;  ride  ne.  as 

idiomatic  circumlocution  593,  \\).—  Yider%, 

to  seem,  w.  completing  ])redicate  78,  462. 

Difl^.   from  appatlre  74,  16.    W.  nom.  w. 

inf..  even  in  perf.  and  pltip.  10(».  S7  and  8S. 

Vidifu)',  impers..  w.  subj.  Inf.  cl.  and  dat. 

of  the  person  615.  2.    Mi/ii  videor,  w.  inf. 

Ih.  —  Vl-tujii  fst  7nihi,  =  ]>lanot  jniJd,  w. 

Ut-cl.  or  Inf.  cl.  lb.— >6"i  vidUur,  if  you 

please,  712.  11. 
vincere,  as  verb  of  achieving  (=  to  prevail 

alter  a  struggle)  w.  completing  Ut-cl.  or 

Ne-cl.  (;01,  3.     Vici,  \\.  force  of  a  pres.  or 

Int.  :5()8.  2. 
▼indicare.  to  defend,  w.  ab  or  mere  nbl.  29, 

48;  w.  gernndial  abl.  after  ab  195,  243. 
vis  (noun)  w.  attr.  Ut-cl.  625,  1). 
vitare,  seeripcre,  cavere.  as  verbs  of  avoiding, 

con-tr.  w.  lie  (aftirinative  in  Eni:l.)  608.  5. 
vitium  est,  w.  Subj.  Quod-cl.  61 1,  9.     Vilio 

(pr(tf/r<))  dare  2."j7.  2. 
vitTiperare,(  onstruction  of,  see  reprehendere. 

vivo  fratre.  184. 

vix.  negative  particle,  see  P.  I.;  w.  plop. 
347.  6. 

vocare,  w.  ad  14.11:  w.  in  (aliquid  in  di/M'nn 
focCire,  to  doubt  something  Cic.  Inv.  2.  28; 
aliqiiem  in  inridiatn  rcK'dre,  to  make  some- 
body odious  lb.  I'hil.  2,  24;  aliquid  in  ju- 
dicium vor'ire.  to  call  to  account  lb.  Verr. 
2. 1, 12).  V(K-<lre,  w.  gernndial  afiernrrf  190, 
289.1.  As  factitive  verb  w.  double  acc.lU2,Zi. 

voluntas,  w.  attr.  Ut-cl.  025,  B,  4. 


\ 


roti,=siifragium,  or sententia.  Dift'. 5.5,  n.  19. 

Wagers,  how  expr.  707,  C -'  What  will  you 
bet    tiiat"  (I    bet   that)    =  da  picjuus  ni, 

vTa'^ding'off,  Verbs  of,  constr.  w.  ah,  or  mere 

at.l.  29,  48. 
week,    hebdoina'i.  sepHinana,   ""known   as 

division  of  time  in  ihe  classical  period  2-^0, 

1.     Names  of  we»'k-days  (dits  Soils  etc.), 

when  inirodueed  227.  n.**. 
to  weigh,  w.  numeral  *.bjs.,  how  expr.  ^7o, 

2  loll.:  277,  d.  .      .      ,     1   ..P 

Weight,  rel.tive  of,  275,  .%2;  standard  of 
2r.5,  1.  'T«)  l)e  oi  weigUi '  in  a  tigurative 
sense,  how  expr.  276.  8._ 

West,  occ'dtnx  f<(>l  222.  n.  5. 

what  abs.  relative  adj..  how  rendere^  .509, 
2-  511  1  UV/a/.  interro^'.  iidj..  see  1  .  1.— 
'What'  are  vou  ca>lled  T  =  quomodo  nomi- 
nfiris  ?  289,  ous.  2.  Whatsoever,  whichso- 
ever, how  lendereil  49'.«  foil. 

when,  teuip.  adv..  how  expr.  222  OBS.  1. 
Wk'H.  at-,  teuipoial  eonj.,  rendered  by 
n.nini  645.84  toll.:  I>y  ubi,  ut ,  siinnljwd 
US  compound-  665.  48  ;  i.y  .ibl.  abs.  »)(..)  4.j. 

wh8ne?er,  rendered  bv  quuni  6».),  84;  b4o. 
2:  i»y  tibi,  vi.  f<imulac.  not  hy  j)Os(qua>n 
66f>,  2;  l>y  .•>•?  (•■^i  (piaiido)  829.  1 ;  782,  4  ;  by 
nuaiidocunrjup  498.  1 ;  5(M.  7. 

where,  r.d.  and  it.ierr.  a<lv..  by  ?/6i  216  ;  b> 
nnde-ill.r,,i:  hy  q'"l  2is,  c:  by  .///o  218 
d;  S'-e  575  foil.   Imroducmg  interrogative 

whereas!  rendered'   by  quu/n  65<>,  40,  1 ;  by 

i)(>.<fquaui  w.  pre-,  ind.  l>6.5,  11. 
wherever  iwheres  .even,  by  ubionique,  qua- 

cuii'iuf.  uU(H)unqueh\)\,l.  t^   t     i 

whether,  as  ni  erro-.  particle,  ^ee  P.  I. ;  by  « 

:i'.tT,  10 ;  7.«.  5.    \Mietl„fr...or,^sive..  ntt 

787    5 

while.  *Rngl.  eonj.,  by  dum  w.  pre-,  ind. 
0T>  2  l-dl  TAi/^  =  as  Ion-  as,  ))y  dutn. 
qjoid.  or  qmnndiu  671,  6.  \V/>i/e  ^  when. 
yquumiA^.:^:  65.;.  40.  1,  Dift.  be  w^eu 
d'um  ami  quum  821,  7.  W/iy'e.  hy  posf qua m 
w  pres.  ind.  r.C^^  11 :  by  Ha  ut  48.)  2  ;  by 
„res  abl.  abs.  181,  228;  by  abl.  abs.  w. 
perf.  perii)hrastic  pi-cd.  abl.  18:J,  2:i0. 


wholly  (entirely),  how  expr.  251,  7. 
why,   as   interr«)g.    panicle,    by    cur. 


qui. 


qudinobrem,  quart,  see  these  articles 
Why  not  by  quin,  cur  non,  quidrn,  ^ee 
these  urticles  —As  emphatic  particle,  by 
quippe  68t),  A.  ^      a 

Will  En-d.  auxiliary  of  fut.  tense  ;  rendered 
i.y'Lat:  rut   847,  78  foil. ;  by  subjunc.  pi;es. 
878,  1;  denoting  rule  and  habil,  hy  soltre, 
or  by  fut.  tense  352,  C. 
with, 'Engl,  prepos.,  rendered  c?/wi  32.  44() , 
apud  17,  20 ;  penes  25.  44 ;  in.  w.  abl.  48, 
74      Denoting  manner  and  instrument  by 
mere  «ibl.  or  cum  248  foil. :  denoting  coin- 
cident action,  by  cum  or  mere  abl.  2.i», 
5.'i(}  f«dl.    By  circumlocution  w.  abl.  aos. 
180.  225;  182,  229.     '  WUli'  before  partici- 
pials  by  Quod-cl.  388.  b ;  38S  \     ^  ,^     , 
without,   Engl.  prep..  »)y  sine  to,   4^9  ;y 
extra  24,  4.88  loll.    Difl'.  between  sine  and 
extra  36,  68;  by  pres.  abj.  abs.  182  ;^'W. 
'  Withour    before    participials,    ditteicnt 
ways  of  expressiuii  it  36,  64;  188.  obs  , 
by  non  w.  gernndial  abl.  170,  214;  by  quin 
547,  C,  I) ;  by  quin.  or  ut  non  (W6,  3 
worse,  p^jor  or  deterior,  see  P.  1.    1  o  hate 
worse,  maqis  odis,<e,  or  jiej us  odisse,  i5b,  L. 
worth,  as  adj.  of  price,   how  expr.  2^.    C 
•  Tu  l>e  WO) ill.'  how  rendered  26 . .  4.     He  18 
worth  a  million,  po.'^sidet  decie^  lb. 
would  Enirl.  potential  auxiliary,  introduc- 
ing optative  sentences  383,6;  in  deciara- 
tivH'  sent,  of  guarded  statement  etc.,  by 
subjunc.  pres.  378,  1 ;  381,  1:  by  subjiinc. 
perf.  87S.  2.    '  Would,'  expr.  by  tut.  .i^J.  j . 
In  interroirative  cl.  396,  e;  in  cond.  periods 
of  non-reality  718  loll. ;  in  co.id.  P^rx.ds 
of  doubtful  reality  710,  obs.  11  ;  .10,  I'.d, 
711,  4.     •  Would'  by  imperfect  iiid.  olre- 
peated  action  311.  3 ;  329,  2. 

Year     Designation  of  the  year  in  chron- 

olo^v.  by  the  names  of  the  Consuls,  in  abl. 

iih^.'\^^.\.-Aytar'  =  '  every  year,'  how 

rendered  2<U,  n.  11. 
yesterday,  heri  m,  -2 -hesterno  die  304,  47, 

Ex.  3  ;  how  expr.  lu  letters  360.  2. 

Z,  symbol  of  the  quadrans  116,  105. 


•  •  •    . 

•  •  •    •  •  • 


4    • 


ft  0  % 


•  *    «  * 


•         •         •  « 


This  book  is  due  two  weeks  from  the  last  date  stamped 
below    and  it  nor   returned  at  or  before  that    time   a  fine  of 
V  :  be  incurred. 


The  second  part  of  Robys  Latin  Grammar  has  deservedly  attracted  the 
attention  of  Latin  scholars  on  account  of  its  rich  collection  of  classical 
.a.sages.     But  their  uncritical  selection  and  lack  of  arrangement  have  met 


I 


III 

m 

II 
II. 

iii 


w 


with  decided  disapproval.     Instead  of  giving  an  accurate  statement  of  the 
laws  governing  the  language,  Mr.  Rol        Columbia  university  libraries        [-oTn 

t>  t>        »  '  II     III     II      llllllllllllll      lllillii      lllllllll  |l|IIIIM  IIII  IV^l" 

which  these  laws  might  be  construe!        '  '  |  I  I  P!      i        ^^^ 

nd/ 


If 
if. 


them  himself.      His  collection  of  exar 

hence  he  fails  to  illustrate  many  important  facts  of  the  language.  ' 

An    examination   of  Dr.   Fischer's   work  will  show  that   non*»  nf  th#.w 
faults  can  be  iir 


the    most    necei 
generally  acki 
attention  o 
Whenever  he 
arguments  caii 
refuted  by  Dr. 
stereotyped  w] 

We    invite 
Composition. 


';::  s  1 1. 


^■•~\ 


Part  I 


IS  \ 


student  to  the 

important  prirt 

I 
Part  II  di 

adapted  to  the 

Part  I,  440 

Part  11,  81? 

Parts  I  and 
— ^-i— ^ 

Specimen 
\ 


I 


I 


I 


'v-r.,   \rwjn^rwrs, 


14  Bond  Street,  New  Tcrk^ 


JUl  6 


jii'wvi^'UiiWFWIWIffiWttMKKMB^ 


F 


•  J 


SllNSO'™^*'!?"--*^*   ■• 


tmmstim^'» 


m-' 


J 


MMMWMMMMnMasti» 


j" '  ">*"    " ■■"■f 

13^ 


i*MMii 


.^. 


*'!i' 


1* '""    i.'**,; 


i 


END  OF  REEL 
PLEASE  REWIND 


